JP2022159573A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the interest of a player in a game.SOLUTION: A predetermined display mode is displayed by display control means on display means on the basis of information stored in storage means. Further, when a game period advantageous for a player is set, a performance is carried out. A first display mode based on update information is displayed on the display means in a first period of a specific period including the game period advantageous for the player, and a first state in which a specific condition is satisfied and a second state in which the specific condition is not satisfied are different in the content of a predetermined privilege given by privilege giving means, thereby improving the player's interest in the game, who aims that a specific performance is carried out.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines operate a movable means with a series of operation contents as a movable control to move the movable means within a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position. There are some that are configured so that an action scenario for making them movable can be set.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-130802

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a plurality of ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first control means capable of executing control related to a game, and an output from the first control means. and a second control means capable of executing control based on the predetermined signal received, wherein the first control means provides a privilege based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the plurality of ball entering means. and an output means capable of outputting to the second control means an information signal containing information on at least part of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, The second control means includes receiving means capable of receiving the information signal output by the output means, storage means capable of storing the information contained in the information signal received by the receiving means, and the receiving means. update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the information contained in the information signal newly received by the user; and a predetermined display based on the information stored in the storage means. A display control means capable of displaying a mode on a display means, a setting means capable of setting a game period advantageous to a player, and an effect capable of executing an effect when the game period is set by the setting means. and effect execution means, wherein the display control means causes the display means to display a first display mode based on the update information updated by the update means during a first period of a specific period including the game period. The gaming machine can change the content of the predetermined privilege granted by the privilege granting means in a first state in which a specific condition is satisfied and in a second state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. It is possible to make them different.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, in the second period set later than the first period in the specific period, the display mode based on the update information is set to the second period. A second display mode different from the first display mode displayed during one period can be displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the privilege imparting means has a higher privilege to be imparted in the first state than the privilege to be imparted in the second state. A privilege advantageous to the player can be given.

A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the specific condition may be established according to the information stored in the storage means.

A gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the storage means is configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the information, and the specific condition is the number of the information stored in the storage means. is a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a plurality of ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a first control means capable of executing control related to a game, and a predetermined signal output from the first control means and a second control means capable of executing control based on the first control means, wherein the first control means is capable of imparting a privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the plurality of ball entering means a granting means; and an output means capable of outputting an information signal containing information about at least part of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means to the second control means, wherein the second control means is receiving means capable of receiving the information signal output by the output means; storage means capable of storing the information contained in the information signal received by the receiving means; update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the information contained in the information signal; and display means displaying a predetermined display mode based on the information stored in the storage means. display control means capable of displaying; setting means capable of setting a game period advantageous to a player; effect execution means capable of executing an effect when the game period is set by the setting means; wherein the display control means is capable of displaying, on the display means, a first display mode based on the update information updated by the updating means in a first period of a specific period including the game period, The gaming machine is capable of differentiating the content of the predetermined privilege granted by the privilege granting means between a first state in which a specific condition is satisfied and a second state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. is.

As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second period set later than the first period among the specific periods, the display mode based on the update information is the display mode different from the first display mode displayed during the first period. Two display modes can be displayed on the display means.

As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the privilege giving means can give a privilege more advantageous to the player than the privilege given in the second state as the privilege given in the first state.

As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific condition can be established according to the information stored in the storage means.

As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means can store a plurality of the information, and the specific condition can be satisfied when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number.

As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning equipment provided in the area under the front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow-down path|route of the ball which won the variable winning device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing display screen area division setting and effective line setting in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when ready-to-win is established in a normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the normal design variation in the normal state displayed by the design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a normal pattern per game (long open per game) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a chance zone is set in the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; A diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is acquired. be. A diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is not acquired is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is the first control. Of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the example, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half period, (c) is the third symbol display device in the first control example. Of the ending period of the normal jackpot game to be displayed, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half period, (d) is the ending of the probability variable jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the second half period among the periods. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is the state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and the period other than the high-speed fluctuation period is It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the period (during the normal fluctuation period), (b) is a state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a normal state is internally set and the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of operating a frame button during the operation production during a high-speed fluctuation period among the chance modes displayed by the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode" displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) ) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode" displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of an effect when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol in the first control example; It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when a variation pattern in which the reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the ending period production for the normal jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is the ending period production for the probability variable jackpot in the first control example. (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down the specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game in the first control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game in the first control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is the main controller in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of this. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table, and (c) shows the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for probability variation and time reduction set in ROM of the main control unit in the 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; be. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the production|presentation selection table during probability variation set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a continuous advance notice execution selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example; (b) is a diagram showing the sound lamp in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a V-notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the control device; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a button operation effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the sound lamp control device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time saving state selection table set to 1 ROM. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variable probability state selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining rear surfaces BD in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing a state command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the winning a prize information command processing for the special figure which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing normal map-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. 7 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a chance mode effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flow chart which showed information command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed on the ending screen of a jackpot game. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the chance time in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen at the end of the chance time in the second control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the start of the pullback zone in the second control example, and (b) is a display displayed when a time reduction win is made during the pullback zone in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the extended time that is executed when the long working hours in the second control example is set, (b) is executed during the long working hours in the second control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 9900 times. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen of the preparation time performed during a time saving state after the chance time in the 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background type displayed in the pullback zone in the second control example and the content indicated by each background, and (b) is a suggested mode during the pullback mode in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of suggestion and the content of suggestion indicated by each suggestion mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a game flow in the second control example; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the second control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the second control example, (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the second control example. is a block diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the second control example is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second per random number table set in, (c) schematically shows the prescribed contents of the time saving per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example is a diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is the specified content of the special figure 1 jackpot table in the second control example , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the second control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is for normal / second probability variation in the second control example It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the table for probability variation / time saving in the second control example, (b) is the time saving type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second control example; is a block diagram showing FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pullback mode selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a suggestion mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a special design determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 2nd control. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the second control example; It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 2nd control. 13 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing normal state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing pullback mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd probability variation state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 production mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process during chance time performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a big hit or a short-time election in the normal state in the first modification of the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. In the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in the first modification of the second control example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special 1 lottery) is short-time winning It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the time saving state when 30 seconds is set as the variable time of the special figure 1 in the normal state in the first modification of the second control example, (b) [Fig. 10] is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the time saving state in the first modified example of the second control example ends. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of short-time election by special figure 2 reservation in the promotion chance zone in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the random number table per time reduction set in the ROM of the main control device in the first modification of the second control example, (b) is the second control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 1 modification. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 2nd example of control. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 2nd example of control. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 production mode setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the second control example. (a) is an example of a display screen during the chance time acquisition performance that is executed when winning a jackpot that gives the first time reduction state in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state in the second modification of the second control example. (b) is a diagram showing, (b) is a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the second time saving state is awarded in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state in the second modification of the second control example and the time saving is won It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of inside. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern at the time of jackpot election in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example, and the variation pattern at the time of short-time election. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the random number table per time reduction set in the ROM of the main controller in the second modification of the second control example, (b) is the second control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for jackpots in 2 modifications. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 2nd modification of the 2nd example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time reduction A in the third control example is set, (b) is a display screen when the time reduction B in the third control example is set It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of remaining working hours is increased, and (b) is a time saving during the working hours state in the third control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen when winning and the number of times of time saving remaining decreased. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a game flow in the third control example; FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table per time saving set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, (b) is in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the set time saving classification selection table. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the big-hit table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the third control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 3rd control. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. 14 is a flow chart showing mode-specific effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing during time saving B performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the V winning device in the fourth control example; FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the fourth control example; FIG. 11 is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the fourth control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door is closed to the V winning opening of the V winning device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a V winning opening of the V winning device in the fourth control example. is a schematic plan view of a state in which is open. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the time saving lottery result suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the fourth control example, and (b) is a special figure 1 in the fourth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in the case of suggesting time-saving election during fluctuation|variation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when suggesting time-saving non-winning during the fluctuation of special figure 1 in the fourth control example, (b) is a jackpot when duplicate winning is made in the fourth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the winning notification screen. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern in the case of double winning in the time-saving lottery and jackpot lottery in the fourth control example, and (b) is a time-saving lottery and jackpot non-winning in the fourth control example (c) is a timing chart showing an example of the notification pattern in the fourth control example when the time saving non-winning and jackpot winning are won. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the fourth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. is a block diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, (b) defines the first special symbol random number table in the fourth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second special symbol random number table in the fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, (b) defines the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the fourth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the fourth control example, (d) is the main in the fourth control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 4th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the fluctuation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth control example, (b) is the normal fluctuation pattern table defined in the fourth control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a time-saving variation pattern table in the fourth control example; (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table per time saving set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth control example, (b) is in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the set time saving classification selection table. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example; It is a diagram. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the lottery result notification mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a game flow in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fourth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 4th control. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flow chart which shows the short-time update process for small hits executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a diagram showing a modified configuration of the game board 13 that the pachinko machine 10 has. FIG. 11 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a fifth control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064 of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when special figure 2 suspension is continuously acquired by overflow winning in a disadvantageous time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (b ) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example during a normal long figure winning game. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen in the case of suggesting the end of the disadvantageous time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen during ending in a normal jackpot game displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection table in the fifth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time saving random number table in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variable / time saving table in the fifth control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving type selection table in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a prefetch suspension mode selection table in the fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning information command process for special figures performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a liquid crystal presentation execution management process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a preceding winning detection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing a game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example; (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example. (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example. (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern A per normal pattern in the sixth control example is set. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern in the sixth control example is set. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow showing transition contents of a game state in the sixth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when winning a time saving symbol in a normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example, (b) is a sixth control example It is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the space mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in challenge mode displayed. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the sixth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time saving random number table in the sixth control example It is a diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection table per normal figure in the 6th control example. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a RAM of the main controller in the sixth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an expectation level selection table in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game state update processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving related processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of the 6th control. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a non-powered state management process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving effect screen after a special figure 1 jackpot at normal time displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the time saving effect screen in the seventh control example. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during a special figure 2 jackpot game displayed on the 3-symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the final variation screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example, and (b) is the third symbol display in the seventh control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the production screen when the special figure 2 pending is accumulated to MAX during the super chance mode displayed on the device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a treasure box opening effect screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the seventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the final variation screen in super chance mode displayed on a display apparatus. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow showing transition contents of game states in the seventh control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the seventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the seventh control example, (b) is a special symbol that is part of the first winning random number table in the seventh control example It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 1 random number table, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table which is a part of the first winning random number table in the seventh control example. It is a diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection table in the 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table in the 7th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect selection table in the seventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the notification target selection table in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a pending ball count command process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example, (b) is a normal display displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during a time right hitting game. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eighth control example, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the eighth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the eighth control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the small hit type selection table in the eighth control example It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving random number table in the eighth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time saving type selection table in the eighth control example It is a diagram. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 8th control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving limit update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 8th example of control. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the ninth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a first winning random number table in a ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second winning random number table in a ninth control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number table per time saving in the ninth control example, (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a small per random number table in the ninth control example be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the ninth control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot that is part of the jackpot type selection table in the ninth control example FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a table for use; It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special-figure 2 jackpot table which is a part of jackpot type selection table in the ninth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection table in the 9th control example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table in the ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal state variation pattern table, which is part of the variation pattern table in the ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving state variation pattern table which is part of the variation pattern table in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for time saving winning variation state, which is a part of the variation pattern table in the ninth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design variation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 forced stop process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th example of control. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 forced stop process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 small hit stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction limit update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 9th example of control. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a ceiling reaching suggestion effect screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling reaching variation effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in the ceiling which is carried out. It is the figure which showed an example of the addition effect screen in the ceiling displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a transition diagram showing the flow of transition of each game state in the tenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the tenth control example, (b) is the main controller in the tenth control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second per random number table set in the ROM, and (c) is the prescribed contents of the time saving per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the tenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a time saving type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth control example, (b) is the defined content of the time saving winning table in the tenth control example is a diagram schematically showing , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for the ceiling in the tenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example, (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect selection table at the time of reaching the ceiling set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of tenth control. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 10th example of control. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal mode effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the tenth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a game state suggestion effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the tenth control example; (b) is a diagram showing the first It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen after it alert|reported that the 1st time saving state is set by game state suggestion production|presentation in a modification. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the random number table per time reduction set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modification of the tenth control example, (b) is the tenth control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for time saving election in the 1st modification. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the tenth control example, (b) is the first modification of the tenth control example It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the game state suggestion effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the tenth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 10th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 10th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing normal mode effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the tenth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen at the time of entering the ceiling activation mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in ceiling activation mode displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen at the time of entering the super ceiling activation mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the eleventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen at the time of the time-saving rush during the ceiling activation mode displayed on. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the random number table per time saving set in the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example, (b) is the table for the ceiling in the eleventh control example It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 11th example of control. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 11th control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing normal mode effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a heart-pounding zone entering screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the eleventh control example, and (b) is a first modification of the eleventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting|reporting screen which shows time-saving rushing immediately after the heart-pounding zone rushing displayed on the 3rd design display device in an example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the eleventh control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for time saving election in the 1st modification of the 11th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the eleventh control example, (b) is the first modification of the eleventh control example It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the pounding zone effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the eleventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 11th example of control. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first modified example of the eleventh control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 11th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 11th example of control. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal mode effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modified example of the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the second variable probability state displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the twelfth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen at the time of the 2nd probability change state completion|finish displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the twelfth control example, (b) is a diagram in the twelfth control example It is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 2 variation screen in the second probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example, (b) is the second set in the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the winning random number table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 12th control example. be. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot table in the twelfth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the twelfth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 12th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the keep zone effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th example of control. 29 is a flow chart showing second probability variation state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 12th control example. (a) is a diagram illustrating the appearance of an island facility in a state in which a plurality of pachinko machines connected to a data display device according to the sixteenth embodiment are arranged side by side in a hall, and (b) is a diagram of the sixteenth embodiment. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of various data displayed on the data display unit of the data display device in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the visual recognition mode of the data display device while it is in a jackpot gaming state in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a time saving state of normal symbols after the jackpot in the thirteenth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a visual recognition mode of the data display device when shifting to . It is the figure which showed the visual recognition aspect of the data display apparatus between the 3rd time saving states set based on having reached|attained the ceiling lottery frequency|count in the 13th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the data display device interlocking effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the thirteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the big-hit information production|presentation linked|linked with a data display device displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a small win or a special jackpot is won in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a variation executed in the ceiling lottery number of times in the thirteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the time-saving activation effect in the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirteenth control example, (b) is the third in the thirteenth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the time-reduction activation production|presentation linked with a data display device displayed on a pattern display device. (a) is a diagram showing a list of hold change modes in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing conditions for suppressing the hold change effect in the thirteenth control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the thirteenth control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, the data display device and the hall computer electrically connected to each other through the external output terminal board in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing types of external output signals output from the external output terminal board in the thirteenth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board in the normal game in the thirteenth control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when power is turned on in the thirteenth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth control example, (b) is the main controller in the thirteenth control example is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirteenth control example, (b) is the main controller in the thirteenth control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the random number table per time saving set to ROM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the holding|holding mode selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time-saving suggestion production|presentation selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the thirteenth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the thirteenth example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing an outer end output setting process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example 4 is a flow chart showing error signal processing. 29 is a flowchart showing out-ball detection signal processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing start-up signal processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing opening signal processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up signal output processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing normal map-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal mode effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the data display device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing display device signal reception processing executed by the MPU in the data display device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing signal reception processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing power recovery comparison processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the thirteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time saving state B set when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached in the 14th control example, and (b) is a time saving state in the 14th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect at the time of transferring to time saving state A from B. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of being elected to a jackpot during time saving state B in the 14th control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 14th control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 14th control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot table in the 14th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the fourteenth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourteenth control example, (b) is the main controller in the fourteenth control example It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table set in the ROM of , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first time saving table in the fourteenth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 14th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 14th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM, (c) shows the prescribed contents of the time saving random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 14th control example It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving per type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 14th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 14th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the . FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 14th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 deviating stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a front perspective view of the V winning device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 20 is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the fifteenth control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the open/close door is closed to the V winning opening of the V winning device in the fifteenth control example, and (b) is a V winning opening of the V winning device in the fifteenth control example. is a schematic plan view of a state in which is open. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a V icon acquisition effect screen executed during the ending period of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifteenth control example, and (b) is a fifteenth control. After the end of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the example, it is a diagram showing an example of the battle effect screen when the V reservation is digested in the fourth variation of the special figure. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when the V icon is activated during the battle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifteenth control example, and (b) is a fifteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen of a battle production|presentation when V suspension exists in the suspension displayed on the 3rd design display device in an example. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the fifteenth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example, (b) is a special symbol 1 random number table in the 15th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined content of the special symbol 2 random number table in the fifteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifteenth control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the fifteenth control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the fifteenth control example, (d) is the fifteenth It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in a control example. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hitting classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifteenth control example, (b) defines the normal variation pattern table in the fifteenth control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving variation pattern table in the fifteenth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the random number table per time saving set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifteenth control example, (b) is the main control device in the fifteenth control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction classification selection table set to ROM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of an effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example, (b) is a time-saving effect in the fifteenth control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the mode setting A table, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction production|presentation mode setting B table in the 15th control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the V-icon acquisition effect setting table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a game flow in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the short-time update process for small hits performed by MPU in the main controller in the 15th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing V-icon acquisition effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a time-saving performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a V-icon acquisition effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, and (b) is a first It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen when V icon is exercised during the special figure fluctuation|variation of small hit A winning displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when the V icon is activated during the special figure fluctuation of the small winning B winning displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the fifteenth control example. and (b) cancels the V icon activation when a new V hold is acquired during the special figure fluctuation of the small winning B winning displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the fifteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the fifteenth control example; (b) is a block diagram in the first modification of the fifteenth control example; It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the V icon display mode setting table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of the 15th control example. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing V-icon acquisition effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation mode setting process for time reduction performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 15th control example. FIG. 30 is a front view of the pachinko machine in a state in which the upper accessory is arranged at the overhanging position in a modified example of the thirteenth control example; (a) is an example of an effect mode when a big win notification effect linked to a data display device is executed in a modified example of the thirteenth control example, and a big win is started in a state where the upper accessory is placed in the overhanging position. (b) is an example of an effect mode in the case where a data display device-linked jackpot notification effect is executed in a modification of the thirteenth control example, and it is time to actually notify the jackpot. It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the second probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the twelfth control example, and (b) is a twelfth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen at the end of the second probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device in . FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state transition change discarding processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first modification of the twelfth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd probability variation state production setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the twelfth control example. (a) and (b) show an example of a variable display mode executed by the third symbol display device when the lottery result corresponding to the time-saving symbol winning is obtained in the normal time special symbol lottery in the 16th control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional effect executed in the third symbol display device during the chance time in the sixteenth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the completion|finish waiting production performed in less than ten times. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a chance time end effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth control example; In the 16th control example, it is a diagram showing the transition of the performance mode when the time saving pattern of the time saving number of 50 times is won in the special pattern lottery executed 25 times before reaching the ceiling lottery number. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variable display mode for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed for the first time after reaching the ceiling lottery count in the sixteenth control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect for ceiling fanning displayed on the third pattern display device in the sixteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation for ceiling fanning performed after the time saving state based on the ceiling lottery frequency|count completion|finish at least 1 time in the 16th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; is a block diagram showing FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixteenth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixteenth control example, and (b) is the defined contents of the ceiling tilting table in the sixteenth control example. and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the ceiling reaching table in the sixteenth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving per type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 16th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 16th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the . (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing set value control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal mode effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing ceiling-related effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variable display mode when the special figure lottery result executed for the first time after power-on with RAM clear operation in the 17th control example is a small hit. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example; It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventeenth control example, and (b) is the defined contents of the table for after winning in the seventeenth control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the post-small hit table in the 17th control example, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the ceiling reaching table in the 17th control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing normal state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventeenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 17th control example. (a) is executed in the third symbol display device from the end of the chance time in the 18th control example to the end of all the reserved balls of the second special symbol held at the end of the chance time. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode, (b) is an effect mode executed by the third symbol display device within 20 special figure lottery times after the chance time ends in the 18th control example. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached during the special mode in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a transition of an effect mode after the chance time ends in the 18th control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 18th control example, (b) defines the time saving end notification table in the 18th control example It is the figure which showed the content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for after the end of time saving in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 18th control example, and (b) is the defined content of the table for after winning in the 18th control example. and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the post-ceiling table in the eighteenth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for after the end of time saving in the 18th control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighteenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling-related effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 19th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 19th control example. (a) is a front view of the effect buttons of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a front view of the selection buttons of the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine is in a retracted state in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example. is a schematic diagram showing a case where is in a movable state. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the nineteenth control example; It is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the nineteenth control example as viewed from the rear side. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during special figure fluctuation in a state in which the character displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example is stored, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the nineteenth It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 1 in the case of moving the accessory displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example, and changing a reserved color. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 2 when the character displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example is movable and the reserved color is variable; 19 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 3 when the accessory displayed on the third symbol display device in the 19th control example is movable and the reserved color is varied. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the character is stored after changing the reserved color displayed on the third pattern display device in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is the nineteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 1 in case the accessory displayed on the 3rd design display device in a control example moves, and a part of reservation color shifts to the next reservation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 2 when the character displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example is movable, and a part of the reserved color shifts to the next reserved, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the character is stored after changing the reserved color displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the character object displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example moves and the reserved symbol changes independently; It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the accessory is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example is changed alone. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the color of the reserved symbol and the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the 19th control example, and (b) is a variable pattern of the color of the reserved symbol in the 19th control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is the amount of light displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the adjustment screen (with a character). (a) is a diagram showing an example of an adjustment end screen when the decision button displayed on the third pattern display device in the nineteenth control example is operated, and (b) is a diagram showing the third It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special figure fluctuation is started during the light amount adjustment displayed on the symbol display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the light quantity adjustment screen during the character object prohibition displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 19th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the start of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the nineteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of shutter closing reach continuation displayed on an apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the nineteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 6th stage of shutter closing reach displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a capsule is obtained in the third stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when the capsule acquired at the 5th step of the shutter closing reach displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example is opened. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a branch effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a nineteenth control. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the end of the special movie when the button operation is executed during the branch effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the example. FIG. 212 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the end of the special movie when no button operation is performed during the branch effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the effect time of the special movie and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the nineteenth control example, (a) is the case where no button operation is performed during the branch effect in the nineteenth control example; and (b) is a timing chart when a button is operated during the branch effect in the nineteenth control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the nineteenth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the nineteenth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 19th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the nineteenth control example, (b) is the second in the nineteenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit random number table. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example, (b) defines the big hit variation pattern table in the 19th control example FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing the contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table in the nineteenth control example, and (d) is the nineteenth control It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the fluctuation|variation pattern table for deviations in an example (probability variation. Shortening of working hours). (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a holding change effect lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a nineteenth control example. is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a reserved color selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in . FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the hold change scenario selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the shutter closing reach selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the nineteenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 19th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the nineteenth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the nineteenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the nineteenth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 19th control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing notification processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning information command processing for special figures performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 19th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a holding effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a composite hold change effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a change-start holding effect execution process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing decision button operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect button operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; (a) is an example of a display screen when a change operation to the chance-up mode is performed during the second half period of the variation effect in the state where the normal mode is set displayed on the third symbol display device in the twentieth control example. (b) is a display when changing to the chance up mode during the first half period of the variable effect in the state where the normal mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example is set It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a mode is selected during deviation variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twentieth control example, and (b) is a nineteenth control It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of selecting the mode during the big-hit fluctuation|variation displayed on the 3rd design display device in an example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the production mode selection area during the loss variation in the 20th control example, (b) is the configuration of the production mode selection area during the jackpot variation in the 19th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the decision button for switching to the chance up mode is operated during the second half period of the variation effect in the big hit variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twentieth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the character is moved during the special figure fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twentieth control example, and (b) is the twentieth control It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 1 when the accessory displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example is completely closed. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 2 when the character object displayed on the third symbol display device in the twentieth control example is completely closed; It is a timing chart showing the flow of setting the variable production during the special figure fluctuation when the production custom selection operation is not executed during the special figure fluctuation in the 20th control example. Shows the relationship between the flow of setting the variable production during the special figure fluctuation and the production custom selection operation when the production custom selection operation is performed during the special figure fluctuation in the 20th control example and the production mode is changed during the special figure fluctuation. It is a timing chart. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the flow of setting the variable production during the special figure fluctuation and the production custom selection operation when performing the production custom selection operation during the special figure fluctuation in the 20th control example and switching from the next fluctuation. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twentieth control example; It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the production|presentation custom information table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the 20th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second half advance notice effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twentieth control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twentieth control example; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a variation-start holding effect execution process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an in-execution hold change effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect custom selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing decision button operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect custom execution processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variation effect update process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example; (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing procedures for changing settings in the 21st control example, and (e) to (g) are settings confirmation in the 21st control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the procedure for (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a character corresponding to the previous stop symbol has a conversation at the start of the special figure fluctuation executed in the 21st control example, and (b) is a 21st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion production|presentation at the time of starting the next fluctuation|variation after the design stops by the special combination (7 reach loss) performed in an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the character corresponding to the stop symbol is having a conversation during the demonstration effect executed in the 21st control example, and (b) is a diagram executed in the 21st control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when characters talk while the voice is fixed in the demonstration effect to be performed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pending color change precursor display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-first control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-first control example. (c) is a diagram showing an example of a pending color change sign display screen (when special symbols are stopped), and (c) is a chance effect display screen 1 during a pending shift displayed on the third symbol display device in the 21st control example FIG. 12D is a diagram showing an example of (jump), and FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of a hold shift chance effect display screen 2 (high speed) displayed on the third symbol display device in the 21st control example. . FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 21st control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio output device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example; It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the special symbol jackpot random number table set to ROM of the main controller of the pachinko machine in the 21st control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 21st control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a voice command selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the pending action selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 21st control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound output device of the pachinko machine in the 21st control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the sound output device of the pachinko machine in the 21st control example. is a block diagram showing FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 21st control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing standby processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing stop symbol type setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-first control example; 29 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a change-start pending effect execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing pending action determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-first control example; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the start of the symbol stock reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the twenty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the completion of design stock displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when stocked symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example temporarily disappear from the screen; (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the twenty-second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when the ready-to-win pattern is switched with the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the liquid crystal display of the third pattern display device in the twenty-second control example, and (b) is a preliminary layer of the third pattern display device in the twenty-second control example. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing an example of a display screen to be displayed, FIG. 11C is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the main screen of the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed on the sub-layer of the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is normal display and the transmittance of the auxiliary image layer is 100%; b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the main layer of the third pattern display device is displayed at scale A and the transmittance of the auxiliary layer is 0% in the twenty-second control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-second control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the symbol stock reach selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-second control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration within the display control device of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the twenty-second control example; 29 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 22nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing processing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-second control example; 29 is a flow chart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-second control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the start of the symbol stock reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the twenty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the completion of design stock displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when stocked symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example are moved; (b) is a diagram showing the third symbol in the twenty-second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when a new reach line is formed from the stocked pattern displayed on the pattern display device. (a) is a diagram showing a game machine in a movable state of a large sword role in a modification of the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a light amount adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when special figure fluctuation is started inside. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on a third display device in a modification of the nineteenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the development of the modification of the shutter closing reach, and (b) is a diagram of the nineteenth control. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the modification development of the shutter closing reach displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the modification of an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of branch effect of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third display device in a modified example of the nineteenth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when the shutter displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a modification is fully opened. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a preemptive attack screen of a battle presentation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect button press instruction screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during the battle production button repeated hitting displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the battle production|presentation button long pressing screen displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 23rd example of control. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of gauge reduction during button repeated operation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of gauge decrease when the button is long pressed displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example at the start of the subjugation effect, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a first start screen displayed in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the first attack screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a second start screen displayed; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a second attack screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a third start screen displayed; It is the figure which showed an example of the attack screen of the 3rd time displayed on the 3rd design display device in the 23rd example of control. It is a diagram showing an example of a chance-up effect screen during normal fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. It is the figure which showed the special design fluctuation|variation frequency in the 23rd control example, and the content of the chance up production|presentation performed. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a long press effect scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the final HP selection table at the time of disconnection set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 23rd control example, (b) is the 23rd control It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the entry lottery table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in an example. FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a release lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an additional decrease value selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a chance notice lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example, and (b) is a diagram in the twenty-third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the chance mode selection table set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation mode determination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 23rd control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable probability state effect mode determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing subjugation reach effect determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-third control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a chance-up effect determination process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing effect button operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing long-press effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing long-pressing processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot opening effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fourth control example, and (b) is a third symbol during the time saving state in the twenty-fourth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on a display apparatus. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus when the remaining time addition production|presentation is performed during the time saving state in the 24th control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the continuation rate increasing effect is being executed during the time saving state in the twenty-fourth control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the final judge effect is being executed after the time saving state ends in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a diagram showing a change over time of the effect mode after winning the jackpot in the twenty-fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 24th control example is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second per random number table set in the ROM of, (c) is the prescribed contents of the small per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 24th control example is a diagram schematically showing , and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the direct hit table in the twenty-fourth control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the V winning table in the twenty-fourth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th control example, and (b) shows the defined contents of the S rank table in the 24th control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the A rank table in the 24th control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the table for 1 fluctuation after the end of the time reduction in the 24th control example It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 24th control example, and (b) shows the rush performance for each rank. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the rank-up effect table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram in the twenty-fourth control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the rank-up discrimination table set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 24th control example. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 24th control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 24th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 24th control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 deviating stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 24th control example. 24 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing during final judge presentation executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a time-saving effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 24th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 24th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device during the variable probability state in the twenty-fifth control example, (b) is during the variable probability state in the twenty-fifth control example It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the special figure 1 jackpot variation is started. (a) is, in the 25th control example, the special figure 1 jackpot variation is started during the variable probability state, and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation has passed It is a diagram showing an example, (b), in the 25th control example, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is started during the probability variation state, before the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation passes It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the variation time of the special figure 2 small per variation has elapsed. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 25th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 25th control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM, and (c) shows the specified contents of the small hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 25th control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 25th control example, (b) is the defined content of the table for probability variation and time reduction in the 25th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 25th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 25th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fifth control example; FIG. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed the subtraction timing of the number of times of time reduction in the 25th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 25th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing update processing at fluctuation stop executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 25th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 25th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fifth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fifth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 25th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 25th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 26th control example in the probability variation state and when the probability variation ratio super UP zone is set, b) is executed in the twenty-sixth control example, when the special figure 2 small hit variation or the special figure 2 loss variation is performed in the probability variation ratio super UP zone, and the pinch effect is performed 3rd symbol display It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of an apparatus. In the 26th control example, a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device at the end of the pinch production executed based on the fact that the special figure 2 small per variation is executed during the probability variation ratio super UP zone is. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example. is a block diagram showing It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 26th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-sixth control example; (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variable probability/shortening working hours table in the twenty-sixth control example. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 26th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 26th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 26th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device during the variable probability state in the 27th control example, (b) is during the time saving state in the 27th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example; is a block diagram showing It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 27th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 27th control example, (b) is a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time saving table in the 27th control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the probability variation table in the twenty-seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing update processing at fluctuation stop executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-seventh control example; (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device in the time saving state set based on the occurrence of the time saving symbol winning during the normal state in the first modification of the 24th control example. (b) is a first modified example of the 24th control example, the third symbol display device in the time saving state reset based on the occurrence of time saving symbol winning during the time saving state It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the time saving symbol winning occurs during the time saving state in the second modification of the twenty-fourth control example. . In (a) and (b), in the second modification of the 24th control example, the rank notification effect is executed during the time saving state reset based on the occurrence of the time saving symbol winning during the time saving state. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus at the time of being made. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second modified example of the twenty-fourth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 24th control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an effect setting process during concealment executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second modified example of the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing non-concealing effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second modified example of the twenty-fourth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the twenty-third control example, and (b) is the first display of the twenty-third control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the preemptive attack screen of the battle production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display device in the production|presentation modification. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing display examples of the long button in the first modification of the twenty-third control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production mode decision processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st production modification of the 23rd example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the second modification of the twenty-third control example, and (b) is a second effect start screen of the twenty-third control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen which shows the production|presentation result of the additional production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the production|presentation modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo MAX jackpot effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the second modification of the twenty-third control example, and (b) is a view of the twenty-third control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during the production|presentation of pseudo-MAX jackpot production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 2nd production|presentation modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo hold continuous effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the second modification of the 23rd control example, (b) is a diagram of the 23rd control example It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during the production|presentation of the pseudo|simulated holding consecutive production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display device in the 2nd production|presentation modification. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the twenty-third control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second effect modification of the twenty-third control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the twenty-third control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the probability changing state displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-eighth control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen in the third symbol display device in the twenty-eighth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot production screen in the probability variation state displayed. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table for probability variation that the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-eighth control example has. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-eighth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable probability state effect mode determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the V winning device of the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device of the twenty-ninth control example; It is an operation diagram of the V winning device of the twenty-ninth control example as viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door is closed to the V winning opening of the V winning device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is the V of the V winning device in the twenty-ninth control example. It is a schematic plan view of a state in which the winning opening is open. (a) is a front view of the effect button of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is a front view of the selection button of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing display screen area division setting and effective line setting in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the twenty-ninth control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot effect screen after winning a normal state jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the twenty-ninth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an enemy subjugation effect screen displayed on the display device; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an interval screen after the end of the second round displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the twenty-ninth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the subjugation success screen during 6 rounds (final round) displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the third round displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example. FIG. 788(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a button is pressed in the displayed FIG. 788(a). (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when no button is pressed in FIG. 788 (a) displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the twenty-ninth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the revival success effect screen in 6 rounds (final round) displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a time saving state (during a rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the twenty-ninth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the winning screen of the time saving state (during rush) displayed with a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen in a time saving state (during a rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the 29th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the small winning game screen in the 29th control example. Aim for V displayed on the 3-symbol display device and show an example of the display screen when V is won during the initial effect period. After FIG. 791(b) displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, aim for V and show an example of the display screen after the initial effect period has elapsed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the final variation (off) of the time saving state (during rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the 29th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the 29th It is the figure which showed an example of the pull-back production|presentation screen after completion|finish of a time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pull-back effect end screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed by the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a rush result display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the NEXT effect screen (the second round of the jackpot during the rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the NEXT production result screen (suspension group, no round promotion) displayed with 3 design display devices. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a NEXT effect result screen (with round promotion) displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example; (b) is the third symbol in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a NEXT effect result screen (with pending series) displayed on the display device; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen during the holding streak state displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the twenty-ninth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a NEXT effect screen (with hold stanza) displayed on the display device during the continuation rapture state; It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of display rounds exceeds MAX (9 rounds) in the continuous holding train displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a standby state displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode selection screen displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a stage transition effect screen during special figure fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the twenty-ninth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the stage fixation operation screen during special figure fluctuation|variation displayed with a display apparatus. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine in the 29th control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the twenty-ninth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the main controller in the ROM of the 29th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the set special symbol 1 random number table, (c) schematically shows the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 29th control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example, (b) is in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the set time reduction provision table. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 29th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal variation pattern table that has been created. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time-saving variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 29th control example is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special time-saving variation pattern table set in the ROM of, (c) is the time-saving final variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the subjugation number selection table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the 29th control example, (b) is the voice ramp control in the 29th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a subjugation effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the device; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of an additional decrease value selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect stage data table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example, and (b) is the sound ramp control in the twenty-ninth control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a game environment data table set in the ROM of the device; 29 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-ninth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 29th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-ninth control example. It is a flow chart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-ninth control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a time saving update process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 29th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-ninth control example. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing NMI processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 29th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing hold information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing in-round effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing first-time jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing subjugation effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an effect process during the first big winning round executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an effect process during the first interval performed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 29th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a time-saving effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flow chart showing update processing during a small hit game executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing fixed mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect button operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen (in the case of special 2 reservation 0) displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirtieth control example; It is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen (at the time of special 2 reservation acquisition) displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the thirtieth example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 30th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 30th control example. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing hold information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirtieth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the holding|maintenance acquisition process during a small hit performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 30th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 30th control example. It is a flow chart which shows guidance mode setting processing in a small hit performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 30th example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third special figure hold is acquired during the special figure 1 fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the 31st control example, and (b) is , It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen where only the action of the third special figure reserved design displayed on the third design display device in the 31st control example is shifted. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 stop display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the 31st control example, (b) is the third symbol display device in the 31st control example It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure primary fluctuation start screen displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pending change action display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a pending change action display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-first control example. (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of change of hold, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of hold shift displayed on the third symbol display device in the 31st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen before stage change at the time of synchronization of the pending symbol action displayed on the third symbol display device in the 31st control example; It is a diagram showing an example of a post-stage change display screen during pending symbol action synchronization displayed on the 3-symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen before stage change at the time of pending symbol action asynchronous displayed on the third symbol display device in the 31st control example; It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during stage change during the pending symbol action asynchronous displayed on the 3 symbol display device, (c) is a pending symbol action displayed on the third symbol display device in the 31st control example FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen after stage change during asynchronization; FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the 31st control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a pending action data table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 31st control example; FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the sound ramp control device in the 31st control example; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 31st control example; 29 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-first control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 31st control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a hold mode determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 31st control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 31st control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a pending effect update process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 31st control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing varying stage transition processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-first control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing special mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-first control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of the V winning device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 20 is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 32nd control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the V winning device is closed in the V winning opening of the V winning device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a V winning device of the V winning device in the thirty-second control example. It is a schematic plan view of a state in which the winning opening is open. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the decorative movable accessory is at the storage position in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a state in which the decorative movable accessory is at the lower limit in the thirty-second control example. It is a schematic diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a right middle one-sided state of the decorative movable accessory in the thirty-second control example; It is the schematic diagram which showed the left fall state. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative movable accessory in the 32nd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative movable accessory in the 32nd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the bar accessory in the 32nd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the bar accessory in the 32nd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary accessory in the 32nd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotator accessory in the thirty-second control example; (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the third symbol row in the 32nd control example, and (b) to (e) schematically show stop patterns of the rotating character in the 32nd control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time of special figure temporary stop displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, (b) is the third symbol display in the thirty-second control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the relief chance production|presentation start displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a successful rescue chance effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of success on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example in the case of the relief chance production|presentation failure displayed. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; be. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; (b) is a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal fluctuation pattern selection table set to . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, (b) is the sound in the 32nd control example It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special time saving variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the lamp control device, (c) is the time saving set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a final variation pattern selection table; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario A (vertical driving of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario A (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario B (vertical driving of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario B (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario C (vertical drive of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario C (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario D (vertical driving of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario D (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario E (vertical drive of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario E (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario F (vertical driving of the bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an operation scenario F (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario G (vertical drive of the bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario G (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario H (vertical drive of the bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 32nd control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an operation scenario H (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; 29 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing symbol determination command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a liquid crystal effect execution management process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a relief chance presentation start process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing special scenario executing processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a process during execution of a relief chance effect executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-second control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the start of a relief chance effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a diagram of the thirty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the relief chance production|presentation success displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a 1st modification. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 33rd control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the decorative movable accessory action unit in the thirty-third control example; (a) is a schematic diagram of the operation unit of the logo character in the 33rd control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the operation unit of the character character in the 33rd control example. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an operation unit of the shutter accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a state where the logo accessory is at the lower limit in the 33rd control example; FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a state where the logo accessory falls off in the middle of the right side in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a state where the logo accessory falls off to the right middle and falls to the left in the 33rd control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a state in which the bonus item is at the rising limit in the 33rd control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a closed state of the shutter accessory in the 33rd control example; FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a case where all decorative movable accessories are in a movable state in the 33rd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the logo accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the logo accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the bar accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the bar accessory in the 33rd control example; FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of an action unit of an actor in a thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the action unit of the character in the 33rd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the ascending accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the ascending accessory in the 33rd control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit of the shutter accessory in the 33rd control example; FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the shutter accessory in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the shutter accessory in the 33rd control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen after three seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern composite effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the thirty-third control. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen after 5 seconds progress from the start of the composite production|presentation of the normal pattern displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen 7 seconds after the start of the normal pattern composite effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the thirty-third control It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 3 seconds after the production|presentation start when composite production|presentation is started during the ready-to-win production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen five seconds after the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1 displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-third control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 7 seconds after the composite production|presentation start of the substitute pattern 1 displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen three seconds after the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-third control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 5 seconds after the composite production|presentation start of the alternative pattern 2 displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 7 seconds after the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-third control example. It is a timing chart when the composite effect is executed in the pre-reach effect period in the thirty-third control example. FIG. 22 is a timing chart when the alternative pattern 1 composite effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 29 is a timing chart when a composite effect of alternative pattern 2 is executed during the ready-to-win effect period in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 33rd control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-third control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the thirty-third control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-third control example; (b) is the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-third control example; is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal fluctuation pattern selection table set to . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example, (b) is the sound in the 33rd control example It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special time saving variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the lamp control device, (c) is the time saving set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 33rd control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a final variation pattern selection table; (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of a composite effect operation scenario table (bar character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example, and (b) is the 33rd control. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a composite effect operation scenario table (rotating body accessory left/right drive, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the example; (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of a composite effect operation scenario table (a character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the 33rd control. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the composite effect operation scenario table (shutter accessory left and right drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative operation scenario table (bar character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a first alternative operation scenario table (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the control example; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative effect operation scenario table (a character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a first alternative operation scenario table (shutter accessory left/right drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the T.33 control example; (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of a second alternative operation scenario table (bar character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second alternative operation scenario table (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the control example; (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of a second alternative effect operation scenario table (a character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second alternative operation scenario table (shutter accessory left/right drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the T.33 control example; 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a liquid crystal effect execution management process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing composite effect start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a first operation process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 33rd control example; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing second operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-third control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing processing during movable character object executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 33rd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a composite effect of a gekiatsu effect and a character role performed by the third pattern display device in the first modification of the thirty-third control example; (b) is a diagram of the thirty-third control; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during execution of the gekiatsu production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the 1st modification of an example. (a) is a diagram showing a case where the character is in motion in the first modification of the thirty-third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing that the character is moving in the first modification of the thirty-third control example. It is the figure which showed the case where it is moving. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a combined effect when a character role is arranged on the front side of the key role displayed on the third pattern display device in the first modification of the thirty-third control example; There is, and (b) shows an example of a combined effect when the character role is arranged on the back side of the key role displayed on the third pattern display device in the first modification of the thirty-third control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the thirty-fourth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 34th control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 34th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal variation pattern 1 table that has been created. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal fluctuation pattern 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 34th control example, (b) is the main control in the 34th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the apparatus; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving variation pattern 1 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 34th control example, (b) is the main control in the 34th control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the fluctuation|variation pattern 2 table for time reduction set to ROM of the apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the variation pattern 3 table for time reduction set in ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 34th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 34th control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 34th control example; (c) schematically shows the defined contents of the state transition 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 14D is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fourth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table set in the ROM, and (c) schematically shows the defined contents of the state transition 6 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 34th control example; It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot transition setting table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 34th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-fourth control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a special merit variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 35th control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 35th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal main fluctuation pattern table that has been created. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the main fluctuation pattern table for time saving set in the ROM of the main controller in the 35th control example, (b) is the main control in the 35th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal addition fluctuation pattern table set in the ROM of the apparatus; FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variable time counter set in the RAM of the main controller in the thirty-fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-fifth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-fifth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variable time update process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the third symbol variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the thirty-sixth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the delay production|presentation start displayed with a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the development effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the horizontal rotation production|presentation performed. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a chance mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing normal effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a box design displayed by the third design display device in the thirty-sixth control example; (a) is a correspondence diagram of box symbols and number symbols in the thirty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a number symbol row display pattern in the thirty-sixth control example. (a)-(b) are diagrams showing an example of the symbol data set in the numeric symbol row in the thirty-sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example when the losing symbols are stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the horizontal rotation effect displayed in . It is the figure which showed an example of the ending screen of the jackpot game displayed by the 3rd design display device in the 36th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirty-seventh control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when time saving symbol winning occurs in the normal state in the 37th control example, (b) is the second time saving state in the 37th control example It is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the chance time standby effect that is executed in the period from to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when 10 times of time reduction is notified in the chance time standby effect of the 37th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the 37th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a jackpot is won with the reserved ball of the first special symbol during the execution period. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the variable display effect when winning the normal figure B during the chance time in the 37th control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the chance in the 37th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the 1st suggestion production|presentation performed during the normal figure per game when winning the normal figure per B during the time. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the effect mode of the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol in the thirty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the second suggestive effect executed during the small winning game of the second special symbol in the 37th control example, (b) is a rush in the 37th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect set during a state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode when passing through a through gate during a rush state in the thirty-seventh control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode before and after the chance time in the thirty-seventh control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the correspondence relationship between the special symbol state and the normal symbol state during the chance time in the thirty-seventh control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 37th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 37th control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 37th control example It is a diagram showing, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the thirty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 37th control example is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the thirty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the 37th control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving giving table in the 37th control example. be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 37th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 37th control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time saving type selection table set in the ROM, and (c) is the stipulation of the normal figure per type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirty-seventh control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirty-seventh control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the standby effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirty-seventh control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 37th control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-seventh control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time type determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a time saving update process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-seventh control example. (a) is a flow chart showing a normal figure hit time process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 37th control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 37th control example 10 is a flowchart showing a third termination condition determination process; 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flowchart showing standby effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 37th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing per-normal-pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a chance time production setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-seventh control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirty-eighth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when shifting to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 38th control example, (b) is the first variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state A FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when display is started; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a specified number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated after the transition to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 38th control example and the time saving end condition is satisfied. and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode during the variable display of the second special symbol executed for the first time after the time saving state B is set in the thirty-eighth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the MAX bonus is won in the 38th control example, and (b) is a pseudo interval effect executed during the time saving state C in the 38th control example It is a diagram showing an example of the production mode of. It is the figure which showed the correspondence relationship between transition of the production|presentation mode after the first hit in the 38th control example, and the state of a 2nd special design. It is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation aspect between reaching|attaining the time reduction limit frequency|count after transfering to MAX bonus mode, and transferring to normal mode B in the 38th control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 38th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 38th control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 38th control example It is a diagram showing, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the thirty-eighth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 38th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 38th control example is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the thirty-eighth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the 38th control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the MAX bonus table in the 38th control example. is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction provision table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 38th control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the 38th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set to. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 38th control example, (b) is the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 38th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a set attack icon selection table; FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirty-eighth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 38th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-eighth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 38th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 38th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a pending ball number determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-eighth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-eighth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-eighth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-eighth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-eighth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-eighth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-eighth control example; It is a diagram showing a transition method between each game state in the first modification of the thirty-eighth control example. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a first modified example of the thirty-eighth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first modification of the thirty-eighth control example, (b) is the first modification of the thirty-eighth control example It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus. (a) is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 38th control example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of shifting to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 2nd modification of the 38th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when transitioning to the time saving mode or the pullback mode in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example, (b) is the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example After shifting to the MAX bonus mode in the modification of 1, it is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the hit variation effect in the time saving state C immediately before reaching the time saving limit number of times. It is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variable display of normal symbols, the winning game of normal symbols, and the variable display of special symbols during the time saving state in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 2nd modification of the 38th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example, (b) is the main in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the control apparatus. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the second modified example of the thirty-eighth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving table in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example, (b) is for MAX bonus in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 38th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd modification of the 38th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modified example of the thirty-eighth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time type determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of a remaining machine stock effect executed in a jackpot game other than the first win in the thirty-ninth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a rush starts in the thirty-ninth control example, and (b) is a view of an effect mode when a reach occurs during a rush in the thirty-ninth control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a non-V small hit is won during the rush in the 39th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing all non-V during the rush in the 39th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode when the remaining machine corresponding to a small hit becomes 0. FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of a remaining life recovery effect that is executed when a condition for increasing remaining lives is satisfied during a rush in the thirty-ninth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode while the remaining hold of the special figure 2 after the end of the rush in the 39th control example is digested, (b) is the final time saving in the 39th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect when winning suspension is acquired after the start of a fluctuation|variation. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the invincible mode in the thirty-ninth control example; It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 39th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-ninth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the thirty-ninth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 39th control example, (b) is a jackpot type selection set in the ROM of the main control device in the 39th control example It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 39th control example, (b) shows the contents of the normal table in the 39th control example It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the 39th control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the time saving final fluctuation table in the 39th control example It is a diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 39th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 39th control example. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirty-ninth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-ninth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 39th example of control. 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-ninth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 39th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-ninth control example; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a time-saving production setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-ninth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the non-V small hit time process performed by MPU in a sound ramp control apparatus in the 39th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen in an advantageous mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the fortieth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in disadvantageous mode displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when winning a short time A (10 times short time) in the normal mode displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in the 40th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. , It is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen when winning the short time A (10 times short time) in the advantageous mode (30 times short time remaining) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when winning time saving B (time saving) is won in the normal mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 40th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen at the time of time reduction B (time reduction) winning during the advantageous mode displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect during the remaining pending digestion period after the stop of the time saving symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the 40th control example, and (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the 40th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen at the time of small hit winning during the reduction of working hours. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the ceiling reaching fluctuation in the normal mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the fortieth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen during ceiling reach|attainment fluctuation|variation in advantageous mode displayed with 3 design display devices. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 40th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the 40th control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 40th control example, (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 40th control example It is a diagram showing, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 40th control example, and (b) shows the contents of the normal table in the 40th control example. It is a figure shown typically. FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the 40th control example; It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 40th control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction classification selection table set to 1 ROM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the background mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the performance symbol selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 40th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a detachment type determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 40th example of control. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing ceiling update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fortieth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing standby effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing an effect setting process at the time of time-saving symbol winning executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction design determination process for production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 40th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-first control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variation screen during the time saving of non-reaching the time saving limit displayed on the third symbol display device in the 41st control example, (b) is the 3rd in the 41st control example It is the figure which showed an example of the time-saving hit variation screen of time-saving limit reach|attainment displayed with a design display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen (during fluctuation per special figure 2) displayed on the third symbol display device in the 41st control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the 41st It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen which shows that the time saving state was complete|finished during pseudo|simulation left-handed hitting displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in the forty-first control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the 41st control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 41st control example; FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern table in the forty-first control example; FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a time saving state variation pattern table in the forty-first control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 41st control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example; It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the forty-first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 forced stop process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st example of control. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the forty-first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the forty-first control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 forced stop process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 small hit stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 41st control example; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving limit update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st example of control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 41st control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when winning time saving A1 (slightly reducing time 1 time) in the normal mode displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in the 42nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. , It is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen (at the time of winning time saving A2) in the high probability mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 42nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when winning time-saving group A in the high probability mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 42nd control example, and (b) is a 42nd control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen (internal second time saving remaining 20 times) at the end of the high probability mode displayed on the third symbol display device in . It is the figure which showed an example of the high certainty mode transition screen at the time of the deviation in normal mode displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the 42nd control example. (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the flow of the game and the flow of the effect in the 42nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 42nd control example, and (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 42nd control example. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second effect symbol selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-second control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the ceiling information selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 42nd control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing determination command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the forty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 42nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a second effect symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 42nd control example; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing ceiling information notification setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-third control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen in the chance zone displayed on the third symbol display device in the forty-third control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen at the time of passing through with left-handed hitting in the chance zone displayed. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-third control example, (b) is the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-third control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the set remaining time reduction frequency|count information selection table. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-third control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing hold information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing determination command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing through passage processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the forty-third control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 43rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of the non-time-saving limit performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 43rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation|variation production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 43rd control example. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a background mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modified example of the 40th control example; It is a flow chart showing a time-saving symbol winning effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the 40th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of the time-saving design winning performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 40th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing ceiling mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second modified example of the 40th control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the start screen of the final countdown effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the forty-fourth control example; It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen (normal state, time-saving design B winning) when the time-saving design is won during the displayed final countdown effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small winning winning screen during the final countdown effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the forty-fourth control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the forty-fourth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the final countdown production|presentation end screen (remaining time reduction frequency|count of 18 times) displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional effect start screen displayed by the third symbol display device in the forty-fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed by the third symbol display device in the forty-fourth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen (first time saving state, time saving pattern A winning) when the time saving pattern is won during the final countdown production. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the flow of game states and the flow of effects to be executed in the forty-fourth control example. It is the figure which showed the transition content of each game state in the 44th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 44th control example, (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 44th control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the forty-fourth control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal table in the forty-fourth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction grant table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 44th control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the 44th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set to. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 44th control example. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-fourth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd time saving state transition processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 44th example of control. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-fourth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing an effect setting process at the time of time-saving symbol winning executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 44th control example. 29 is a flowchart showing normal state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-fourth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a long battle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the forty-fourth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the combination battle production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1 modification. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a background change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modified example of the forty-fourth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a normal table in the first modified example of the forty-fourth control example; It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd time saving state production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 44th example of control. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing special background setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modified example of the forty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing normal state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modified example of the forty-fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a super reach effect in an additional example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a time-saving suggestive effect in an additional example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of switching the production|presentation mode displayed with a 3rd pattern display apparatus in an additional example. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing production patterns in additional examples. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when set to the variable probability state A in the 45th control example, and (b) is a case where reach occurs in the variable probability state A in the 45th control example It is a diagram showing an example of a pinch effect to be executed in the. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a jackpot is won in the variable probability state A in the 45th control example, and (b) is an effect mode during the opening period of the challenge bonus in the 45th control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when an opening effect of informing a normal jackpot is executed as an opening effect of the challenge bonus in the 45th control example, and (b) is a view of the 45th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode when promotion chance production|presentation is performed in probability change state A in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when promotion chance production is executed in the variable probability state A in the 45th control example, and (b) is a failure in the variable probability state A in the 45th control example It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a promotion chance effect to notify is executed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a promotion chance effect for notifying promotion success is executed in the variable probability state A in the 45th control example, and (b) is a view showing an example of the effect mode in the 45th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the invincible mode is set; In (a), in the invincible mode in the 45th control example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are overlapped, and the variation display of the first special symbol is the normal jackpot variation. (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the case, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an invincible mode in the 45th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect. (a) is the effect when the start winning of the second special symbol is detected after the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol is executed while the variation of the second special symbol is stopped in the invincible mode in the 45th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the mode, (b) shows an example of the effect mode of the blackout effect executed when the execution of the jackpot game with the second special symbol is confirmed in the invincible mode in the 45th control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the premium rush mode is set in the forty-fifth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a transition method between states in the forty-fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a forty-fifth control example; FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the forty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 45th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 45th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 45th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 45th control example is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the forty-fifth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for time saving and probability variation A in the 45th control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability B table in the forty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variable probability C table in the 45th control example, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the promotion effect table in the 45th control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 45th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 45th control example FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in a ROM; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 45th control example. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 45th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 45th control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 45th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process performed by MPU in the main control device in the 45th control example. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 deviating stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 45th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the forty-fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 45th control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 45th control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 45th control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 45th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing an invincible mode effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the forty-fifth control example; (b) is a flow chart showing the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the forty-fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing the effect setting process during the premium rush executed by. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 45th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modification of the 45th control example, (b) is the 45th control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for probability variation B1 in the 1st modification. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modified example of the forty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the ending effect of the MAX bonus mode executed during the ending period of the fourth jackpot won in the MAX bonus mode in the 46th control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect when MAX round breakthrough production|presentation is performed in the ending production|presentation of MAX bonus mode in a control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of the continuous judge effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot won in the MAX bonus mode after the MAX round breakthrough effect is executed in the 46th control example. is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when transitioning to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 46th control example, (b) is the first in the time saving state A in the 46th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode when the variable display of 2 special designs is started. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the lottery result of the first second special symbol is lost A in the time saving state A in the 46th control example, and (b) is the 46th control. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode when the lottery result of the first 2nd special design is out in time-saving state B in an example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the 46th control example, (b) is a specification of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 46th control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction grant table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 46th control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the 46th control example is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table set in, (c) schematically shows the specified contents of the outlier type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 46th control example It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-sixth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 46th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 46th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 46th control example. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing attack icon selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-sixth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-sixth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the forty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing MAX bonus end processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the forty-sixth control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode when a race effect is executed in the variable probability state A in the second modification of the forty-fifth control example. (a) is a variable probability state A in the second modification of the 45th control example, is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when a race production to notify the first special symbol jackpot is executed, a) is a diagram showing an example of a production mode when a race production informing a big hit of the second special symbol is executed in the variable probability state A in the second modification of the 45th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary motion unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary motion unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of a third operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the third operation unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third operation unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the opening/closing operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the opening/closing operation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the opening/closing operation unit of the third operation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the opening/closing operation unit of the third operation unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the light guide plate unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light guide plate unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit; It is a rear view of an auxiliary light-guide plate unit. 1328. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit along line MCDXVIa-MCDXVIa in FIG. 1328, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit along line MCDXVIb-MCDXVIb in FIG. (a) to (f) are schematic front views of an auxiliary light guide plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit; It is a front view of an auxiliary light-guide plate unit. FIG. 1336 is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit taken along line MCDXXIII-MCDXXIII of FIG. 1335; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a downstream guide member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the downstream guide member; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a visual recognition mode changing sheet; (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing changes in appearance of the downstream guide member due to different directional views. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the first operation unit in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 32 is a schematic rear view of the first operation unit in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 4 is a schematic rear view of the first operation unit; FIG. 4 is a schematic rear view of the first operation unit; (a) and (b) are sectional views of a ball guide unit in a thirteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rotary motion unit in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a flow-path front-side constituent member in a fifteenth embodiment; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 16th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a board box; FIG. Fig. 2 is a rear perspective view of the board box; It is a front view of a board box. 1352(a) is a rear view of the board box, and (b) is a side view of the board box viewed in the direction of arrow MCDXXXIXb in FIG. 1352(a). (a) is a partial front perspective view of the board box, and (b) is a partial rear perspective view of the board box. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the board box, and (c) and (d) are partial rear views of the board box. 1354(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIIa-MCDXLIIa in FIG. 1354(b), and FIG. 1354(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b). (a) is a partial front view of the board box, and (b) is a partial rear view of the board box. Figure 1356(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIV-MCDXLIV of Figure 1356(b); (a) is a partial front view of the board box, and (b) is a partial rear view of the board box. (a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDXLVIb-MCDXLVIb in FIG. FIG. 21 is a partial cross-sectional view of a protective cover in an eighteenth embodiment; (a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the nineteenth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box along line MCDXLVIIb-MCDXLVIIb of FIG. 1360(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLVIIc-MCDXLVIIc, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLVIId-MCDXLVIId of FIG. 1360(a). (a) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box in the twentieth embodiment, corresponding to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box; FIG. 1362(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the twenty-second embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDXLIXb-MCDXLIXb in FIG. 1362(a). 1363(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box in the twenty-third embodiment, (b) is a partial rear view of the board box in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and (c) is the MCDLc of FIG. 1363(b). - MCDLc line, a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box; 1364(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the twenty-fifth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLIb-MCDLIb in FIG. 1364(a), and (c) is a substrate FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the box; 1365(a) is a front view of the protective cover of the board box in the twenty-sixth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIIb in FIG. 1365(a), and (c) is a FIG. 1365(b) is a rear view of the protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIIc in FIG. 1365(b). 1366(a) is a rear view of the substrate box, (b) is a side view of the substrate box viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIIIb in FIG. 1366(a), and (c) is a MCDLIIIc- FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box at line MCDLIIIc; 1354(a) is a side view of the protective cover of the board box in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b). 1368(a) is a front view of the protective cover of the board box in the twenty-eighth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLVb in FIG. 1368(a), and (c) is a FIG. 1354(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb of FIG. 1354(b); 1354(a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover of the board box in the twenty-ninth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b), and (c). 1369(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover taken along line MCDLVId-MCDLVId in FIG. 1369(c). FIG. (a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover in the 31st embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover taken along line MCDLVIIb-MCDLVIIb in FIG. 1370(a), and (c) is the third FIG. 32 is a partial rear view of the board box in the 32 embodiment; (a) is a side view of the protective cover of the substrate box in the thirty-third embodiment, (b) is a side view of the substrate box, and (c) is the line MCDLVIIIc-MCDLVIIIc in FIG. 1371(b). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the board box; (a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the thirty-fourth embodiment, (b) is a partial side view of the board box as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIXb in FIG. 1372 (a), and (c) is a protective cover. It is a rear view of a cover. (a) and (c) are rear views of the board box at the MCDLXa section of FIG. , (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXd-MCDLXd in FIG. 1373(c). 1372(a) is a rear view of the board box in the MCDLXa section, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXIb-MCDLXIb in FIG. 1374(a). 1375(a) is a partial front view of the board box in the thirty-fifth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box along line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb in FIG. 1375(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box at line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc of 1375(a); FIG. 1375(a) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box at line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb in FIG. 1375(a), and (b) and (d) are substrates at line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc in FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of the box; 1377(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the thirty-sixth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box along line MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb of FIG. 1377(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along the line MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc, (d) is a rear view of the protective cover, and (e) is the protective cover taken along the line XCVIe-XCVIe of FIG. 1377(d). is a cross-sectional view of. 1377(a) is a rear view of the substrate box in the MCDLXVa portion of FIG. 1377(a), (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the line MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb of FIG. 1377(a), and (c) [Fig. 1377] is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc in Fig. 1377(a); 1379(a) is a partial front view of the board box in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXVIb-MCDLXVIb of FIG. 1379(a). 1380(a) is a partial front view of a board box according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, (b) is a side view of a protective cover as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLXVIIb in FIG. 1380(a), and (c) is FIG. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along line MCDLXVIIc-MCDLXVIIc of (a); 1381(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box along line MCDLXVIIIb-MCDLXVIIIb of FIG. 1381(a). FIG. 32 is a rear view of the protective cover in the fortieth embodiment; 1383(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box along line MCDLXXb-MCDLXXb of FIG. 1383(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box according to a forty-second embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of a substrate box according to a forty-third embodiment. 1385(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the forty-fourth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXXIIb-MCDLXXIIb in FIG. 1385(a). FIG. 32 is a partial rear view of the board box in the forty-fifth embodiment; 1387(a) is a partial rear view of the board box in the forty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box taken along line MCDLXXIVb-MCDLXXIVb of FIG. 1387(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box in the forty-seventh embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box in the forty-eighth embodiment, and (c) is a board box in the forty-ninth embodiment. is a partial rear view of the protective cover of . It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 50th Embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the path configuration device; It is a partially enlarged front view of the route configuration device. 1394(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the channel configuration device taken along line MCDLXXXIIa-MCDLXXXIIa of FIG. 1394; 1394(a) and 1394(b) are partial front views of the path configuration device at area MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1394; 1394(a) and 1394(b) are partial front views of the path configuration device at area MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1394; 1394(a) and 1394(b) are partial front views of the path configuration device at area MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1394; 1394(a) and 1394(b) are partial front views of the path configuration device at area MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1394; Figure 1391 is a partial front view of the gaming board at area MCDLXXXVII of Figure 1390; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball in a normal prize-winning opening (through gate) and time-measurement change of the state of the electric accessory. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in the fifty-first embodiment; (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. 1408(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit along line MCDXCVa-MCDXCVa in FIG. 1407(a), and FIG. 1408(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit along line MCDXCVb-MCDXCVb in FIG. 1408(a). 1408(a) and 1408(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting unit taken along line MCDXCVb--MCDXCVb in FIG. 1408(a). (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball by the detection device and time-measured change of the state of the wing member. FIG. 1404(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line MCDXCVIII-MCDXCVIII. 1411(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the prize winning opening unit and the ball throwing unit taken along line MCDXCIXa-MCDXCIXa in FIG. FIG. 32 is a partial front view of the game board in the fifty-second embodiment; FIG. 32 is a partial front view of the game board in the fifty-third embodiment; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 54th Embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a winning unit. It is a rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. (a) is a front view of the winning unit, (b) is a side view of the winning unit viewed from the direction of arrow MDXVIb in FIG. 1429(a), and (c) is an arrow MDXVIc in FIG. 1429(a). It is a top view of the winning unit in a direction view. 1429(a) and 1429(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXVIIa-MDXVIIa in FIG. 1429(c). FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXVIII-MDXVIII of FIG. 1429(c). FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX of FIG. 1429(c). FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXX-MDXX of FIG. 1429(c). FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXVIII-MDXVIII of FIG. 1429(c). FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX of FIG. 1429(c). FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXX-MDXX of FIG. 1429(c). 1429(a) and 1429(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXXIVa-MDXXIVa in FIG. 1429(c). (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the winning unit. 1429(a) and 1429(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in FIG. 1429(b). 1429(a) and 1429(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in FIG. 1429(b). (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in the state of an electric accessory. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the pending type, the game state, the type of special symbols, and the variable time. Figure 1437(b) is a cross-sectional view of the slide member, the tilting member and the transmission member taken along line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV of Figure 1437(a); Figure 1437(b) is a cross-sectional view of the slide member, the tilting member and the transmission member taken along line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV of Figure 1437(a); Figure 1437(b) is a cross-sectional view of the slide member, the tilting member and the transmission member taken along line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV of Figure 1437(a); 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the plate member, the base plate, the slide member, the tilting member, and the transmission member taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX of FIG. 1429(c); FIG. 1416(a) and (b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable prize winning device in area MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1416(a) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in area MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1416(a) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in area MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1451(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the moving top lid member and the moving floor member taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in FIG. 1451(a). 1451(a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the moving top lid member and the moving floor member taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in FIG. 1451(a). (a) is a diagram showing changes in clocking of the second specific winning opening in the first special operation pattern, and (b) shows changes in timing of the second specific winning opening in the second special operation pattern. It is a figure and (c) is the figure which showed the time-measurement change of the 2nd specific prize-winning hole in the 3rd special operation pattern. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first hit random number table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first per random number counter and the determination value in the special symbol 1 random number table, (d) is the first per random number counter and the determination value in the special symbol 2 random number table It is a schematic diagram which showed the correspondence typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter in the first hit type selection table and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (b) is the second hit random number table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the 2 per random number counter and the normal per symbol. It is a top view of a front frame and an outer frame. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot production, (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending production, (c), (d) and (e) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen of an ending display effect displayed in an ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect. (a) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen of the company name display effect displayed in the ending effect, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. (a) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen immediately after the end of the ending effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with the jackpot classification in an ending production and a special design. FIG. 1429B is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit in the fifty-fifth embodiment taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX of FIG. 1429(c); FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX of FIG. 1429(c). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning unit in the fifty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing another example of the winning unit. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing winning units in the fifty-seventh embodiment. 1416(a) and (b) are front views of the upper variable winning device in the fifty-eighth embodiment in range MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the fifty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in an ending effect; (a) and (b) are diagrams exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 60th embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in an ending effect; (a) and (b) are diagrams exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 61st embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in an ending effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of time-measured change of frame button display, time-measured change of effectiveness of operation of the frame button, and operation of the frame button in the card forgetting prevention display effect. FIG. 32 is a front view of a game board in the 62nd embodiment; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; 1484. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXIIIa in FIG. 1484, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXIIIb in FIG. FIG. 1484 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV of FIG. 1483; FIG. 1484 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV of FIG. 1483; FIG. 1485 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXVI-MDLXXVI of FIG. 1484; 1487 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXVIIa of FIG. 1487, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXVIIb-MDLXXVIIb of FIG. 1483; FIG. 1483 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in FIG. 1483; FIG. 1483 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in FIG. 1483; FIG. 1483 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in FIG. 1483; FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of a lower frame in the 63rd embodiment; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; 1499. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1499, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 1499 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX of FIG. 1498; FIG. 1499 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX of FIG. 1498; 1500 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDXCI-MDXCI of FIG. 1500. FIG. FIG. 1500 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII of FIG. 1500; FIG. 1498 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in FIG. 1498; FIG. 1498 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in FIG. 1498; FIG. 1498 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in FIG. 1498; FIG. 1508(b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDXCVI-MDXCVI of FIG. 1508(b); FIG. 32 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 64th embodiment; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; FIG. 32 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 64th embodiment; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; (a) is a top view of the dish member in the 65th embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member taken along line MDCIb-MDCIb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the plate member taken along line MDCIc-MDCIc of a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 66th embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII in FIG. 1500, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 67th embodiment. , corresponds to the cross-section on line MDXCII-MDXCII in FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of a game board in the 68th embodiment; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; 1522. (a) is a side view of the lower frame viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXIa in FIG. 1522, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXIb in FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1521, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1521, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1521, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXVa-MDCXVa in FIG. 1521, (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXVb-MDCXVb in FIG. 1521, and (c) ) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a lower frame in the sixty-ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a lower frame in the 70th embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged rear views of the lower frame in the 71st embodiment. FIG. 32 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame in the 72nd embodiment; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame in the seventy-third embodiment; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; 1521 (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame, (a) corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1521, and (b) corresponding to line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG. corresponds to a cross-section at (a) to (c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame in the seventy-fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of a lower frame in the 75th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXXVIa-MDCXXVIa of FIG. 1538(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXXVIb-MDCXXVIb of FIG. 1538(b). It is a diagram. FIG. 1525 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc of FIG. 1525; FIG. 32 is a front view of a game board in the 76th embodiment; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXXXVIa in FIG. 1547; (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXXXVIb in FIG. 1547; 1547 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame at line MDCXXXVIc-MDCXXXVIc at 1547; FIG. (a) is a front view of the lower frame with the front member omitted, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame with the rear cover member omitted. and (c) is a top view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1550(c), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXXXVIIIb-MDCXXXVIIIb in FIG. 1551(a); (c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame with the front member omitted, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame with the rear cover member omitted. and (c) is a top view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. 1552(c), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line MDCXLb-MDCXLb in FIG. 1553(a); (c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame. 1551 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the seventy-seventh embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1550; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the sorting passage, (b) is a front view of the sorting passage as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXLIIb in FIG. 1555(a), and (c) is FIG. 1555(b). 1555(d) is a side view of the distribution passage as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXLIId in FIG. 1555(b). FIG. 1550C is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the seventy-eighth embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1550(c). (a) is a front view of the lower frame in the 79th embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame in the 79th embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of a lower frame in the 80th embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; (a) is a front view of a lower frame in the 80th embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 81st embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. 1552(c), and (b) is the lower frame in the 82nd embodiment. 1552(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the eighty-third embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa of FIG. 1552(c). corresponds to the cross section along the MDCXLa-MDCXLa line of . (a) is a partial top view of the lower frame in the eighty-fourth embodiment, and (b) is a partial top view of the lower frame in the eighty-fifth embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view of a sorting passage in a 77th embodiment, (b) is a view of the sorting passage in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage in an 87th embodiment, and (c) 1552(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage in the 89th embodiment, and FIG. 1552(e) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the distribution passage in the 90th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa of FIG. 1552(c). (a) is a partially enlarged top view of a lower frame in a 91st embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged top view of a lower frame in a 92nd embodiment. FIG. 30 is a front view of a game board in the 93rd embodiment; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a fixed passage, and (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a drive means. (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a fixed passage, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a driving means. FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; 1575. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIVa in FIG. 1575, (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIVb in FIG. 1575 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame at line MDCLXIVc-MDCLXIVc at 1575; FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 4 is a partial top view of a displacement member; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; 1582(a) is a rear view of the lower frame, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIXb in FIG. 1582(a). FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; 1584(a) is a rear view of the lower frame, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXIb in FIG. 1584(a). (a) and (c) are partial enlarged front views of the lower frame in the 94th embodiment, and (b) and (d) are partial enlarged top views of the lower frame. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged rear views of the lower frame in the 95th embodiment. (a) is a top view of the lower frame in the 96th embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. (a) is a top view of a lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. FIG. 32 is a front view of a game board in the 97th embodiment; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of displacement means; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement means; FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; (a) is a side view of the lower frame viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXXVIa in FIG. 1597; (b) is a side view of the lower frame viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXXVIb in FIG. 1597; 1597 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame at line MDCLXXXVIc-MDCLXXXVIc of 1597; FIG. (a) is a front view of the lower frame, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 11 is a partial top view of the left displacement member; FIG. 30 is a front view of a game board in the 98th embodiment; Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame; It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting means. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting means. FIG. 4 is a top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a front view of a lower frame; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the lower frame; 1612. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCCIa in FIG. 1612, (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCCIb in FIG. 1612 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame on line MDCCIc-MDCCIc at 1612. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCCIIa-MDCCIIa in FIG. 1614(c), and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along line MDCCIIa-MDCCIIa in FIG. 1614(c), and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 4 is a partial top view of the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a partial top view of the lower frame; (a) is a sectional view of the lower frame in the 99th embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. (a), (c) and (e) are the fourth passage portion of the sixth passage member, the rolling surface of the intermediate passage member, the displacement passage member of the distribution means, and the second displacement passage portion of the second displacement passage. 4B, 4D, and 4F are schematic top views of the fourth passage portion of the sixth passage member, the rolling surface of the intermediate passage member, the displacement passage member of the distribution means, and the second displacement passage; It is a front schematic diagram of a 2nd displacement passage part. FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the 100th embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged top view of a lower frame in the 101st embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the 102nd embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a lower frame in the 103rd embodiment; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 104th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the inner frame. It is an exploded perspective front view of a front frame. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a front frame. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 105th embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 1639 is a partial enlarged front view of the game board in the MDCCXXXI section of FIG. 1639; FIG. 1644 is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line MDCCXXXII-MDCCXXXII of FIG. 1644; It is a perspective view of a winning unit. It is a perspective view of a winning unit. It is a perspective view of a winning unit. It is a perspective view of a winning unit. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a front layer side movable device. It is a back exploded perspective view of a front layer side movable device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a first movable device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first movable device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting device. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of an elongate device; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elongated device; 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a moving device; FIG. 1 is an exploded rear perspective view of a moving device; FIG. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged front views of the front layer side movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the first movable device. It is a partial expansion rear view of a 1st movable device. It is a partial expansion rear view of a 1st movable device. (a), (b), (c) and (d) are partial front views of the first movable device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the second movable device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the second movable device. (a) And (b) is a front view of a 2nd movable device. (a) And (b) is a front view of a 2nd movable device. (a) And (b) is a front view of a 2nd movable device. (a), (b) and (c) are schematic front views of a vertical slide member, a followable member, and an interlocking member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back layer side movable device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear layer side movable device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a third movable device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the third movable device. (a), (b) and (c) are front views of an upper rear cover member, an extended rotary member, a base end side slide member and a pinion. It is a partially enlarged front view of the rear layer side movable device. It is a front view of a back layer side movable device. It is a front view of a back layer side movable device. It is a front view of a back layer side movable device. (a) to (f) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (e) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the base plate and the light irradiation device in the 106th embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a base plate and a light irradiation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate and a light irradiation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate and a light irradiation device. FIG. 1699 is a partial cross-sectional view of the base plate and the light irradiation device taken along line MDCCXC-MDCCXC of FIG. 1699; 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate and a light irradiation device in the 107th embodiment; It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate and a light irradiation device. FIG. 1699 is a partial cross-sectional view of the base plate and light irradiation device taken along line corresponding to line MDCCXC-MDCCXC of FIG. 1699; FIG. 32 is a front view of an operation unit in the 108th embodiment; (a) to (d) are front views of the mobile device. It is a partial rear view of the 1st movable device of a front layer side movable device. It is a partial rear view of the 1st movable device of a front layer side movable device. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) and (b) are partial front views of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1639 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in the range corresponding to the MDCCXXXI portion of FIG. 1639; (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) And (b) is a front view of a 2nd movable device. It is a front view of a 2nd movable device. 4 is a schematic front view showing the plate-like portion of the rear opening/closing member, the plate-like portion of the middle opening/closing member, and the plate-like portion of the front opening/closing member of the rear layer side movable device; FIG. 1727(a) is a front view of the display area of the third pattern display device, and (b) is a plate-shaped display device arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device illustrated in FIG. 1727(a). It is a front view of a part. 1728(a) is a front view of the display area of the third symbol display device, and (b) is a plate-shaped display device arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device illustrated in FIG. 1728(a). It is a front view of a part. 4 is a schematic front view showing the plate-like portion of the rear opening/closing member, the plate-like portion of the middle opening/closing member, and the plate-like portion of the front opening/closing member of the rear layer side movable device; FIG. (a) to (c) are top views of the plate-like portions of the third pattern display device and the rear layer side movable device. (a) to (i) are partial enlarged front views of the pachinko machine in part MDCCCXVIII of FIG. 1712(a). (a) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the pachinko machine in part MDCCCXVIII of FIG. 1712(a). (a) and (b) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. (a) and (b) are schematic front views of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 109th embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of a game board. FIG. 1738 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line MDCCCXXVI-MDCCCXXVI of FIG. 1738; 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of a game board in the 110th embodiment; (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in the MDCCCXXXIIa section of FIG. 1744, and FIG. 1745(b) is a partially enlarged front view of FIG. 1745(a). FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an even number symbol reach display screen in the normal state in the 47th control example, (b) shows an example of the display screen after the SP reach development in the 47th control example It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an even symbol reach display screen in the probability variable state in the 47th control example, (b) shows an example of the display screen after the SP reach development in the 47th control example It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen after SP reach development in the 47th control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time of design provisional alignment in the 47th control example. be. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when symbols are stopped in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during SP reach in the forty-seventh control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a normal angle display screen in the forty-seventh control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a left-angle display screen in the forty-seventh control example, and (c) is a is a diagram showing an example of a right angle display screen in the forty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure fluctuation stop screen during left angle display in the 47th control example, (b) is a special figure fluctuation stop time during left angle display in the 47th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the screen (at the time of next fluctuation reach). (a) is a diagram showing an example of an upward angle display screen in the forty-seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a normal angle display screen (upward angle shift suggestion screen) in the forty-seventh control example. is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during variation per normal figure long in the normal state in the 47th control example, (b) is a normal state per normal figure long in the 47th control example per variation stop It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of special figure stop just before. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time of stopping the fluctuation per normal figure long in the normal state in the 47th control example, (b) is an example of the display screen when reaching the ceiling in the 47th control example It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the end of the normal figure long hit during the ceiling time saving in the 47th control example, (b) is a display screen at the end of the ceiling time saving in the 47th control example It is the figure which showed an example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during normal figure long per fluctuation|variation at the time of the ceiling time reduction completion|finish in the 47th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the same symbol stops two times in a row in the 47th control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the next fluctuation|variation which stopped. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the one-shot announcement effect in the forty-seventh control example, and (b) is a display when a button is pressed during the one-shot announcement effect in the forty-seventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen after the winning announcement in the 47th control example, and (b) is a display screen when the winning announcement is not made in the one-shot announcement effect in the 47th control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the second-stage notification screen during the one-shot announcement effect in the 47th control example, and (b) is another display screen of the one-shot announcement effect in the 47th control example ( It is a diagram showing an example of a holding series. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the forty-seventh control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the forty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 47th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 47th control example is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of, (c) is the second winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 47th control example It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 47th control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot table in the 47th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the forty-seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 47th control example, and (b) shows the specified contents of the normal table in the 47th control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variable probability/first time saving table in the 47th control example, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the second time saving table in the 47th control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the reach mode selection table set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the 47th control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the addition time mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a one-shot notification mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the forty-seventh control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 47th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 47th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling time reduction update process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 47th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 47th example of control. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 47th control example. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a start-up process (main controller) executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 47th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing (sound ramp control device) executed by an MPU in the sound ramp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a time saving state effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a general map-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing continuous reach mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing detailed mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (display control device) executed by the MPU in the display control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the forty-seventh control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the opening screen (for even numbered symbols) of the jackpot game in the 48th control example, and (b) is a button push during the display of the opening screen of the jackpot game in the 48th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of music change. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing display screens displayed in the background change effect in the forty-eighth control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the flow of the background change effect in the forty-eighth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect display screen at the start of fluctuation in the 48th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a freeze effect display screen for 6 seconds in the 48th control example. is. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing a combination of a freeze effect mode and a hit expectation level in the forty-eighth control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table in the 48th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-eighth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-eighth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a promotion lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-eighth control example, and (b) is a pachinko game in the forty-eighth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a background change lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the machine; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of an addition time mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing stop effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing background change rendering end processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing opening effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing background change effect determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing background change effect lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing music selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during flight performance in the forty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during bird stock in the forty-ninth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during development from the flight presentation in the forty-ninth control example, and (b) is an example of a display screen after development from the flight presentation in the forty-ninth control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the flow of the delay pattern of the effect during bird stock in the forty-ninth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the melody zone in the forty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time of song switching in the melody zone in the forty-ninth control example. is. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a song remaining in the song history is newly reproduced in the forty-ninth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the start of the variable effect in the 49th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the ready-to-win effect (first half) in the 49th control example. is. It is the figure which showed the execution timing and classification of each notice performed during the fluctuation|variation production|presentation in the 49th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the variable effect that is executed during the variable probability state in the forty-ninth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the forty-ninth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the forty-ninth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 49th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 49th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 49th control example, and (b) shows the contents of the normal table in the 49th control example. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second probability variation table in the forty-ninth control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the probability variation table in the forty-ninth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-ninth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-ninth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the advance notice mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the advance notice mode scenario selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the music selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-ninth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the forty-ninth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing music switching processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable probability effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an advance notice mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (display control device) executed by the MPU in the display control device in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing bird stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the forty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fiftieth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the jackpot symbol is stopped in the fiftieth control example, and (b) is an example of a special figure fluctuation start screen after the jackpot game ends in the fiftieth control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a button long press operation is performed during reach fluctuation in the fiftieth control example, and (b) is a display screen of a button long press operation chance UP pattern in the fiftieth control example. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 140 is a diagram schematically showing a combination of a symbol stop action and a character object light-emitting pattern in the fiftieth control example; FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fiftieth control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an effect pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fiftieth control example; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a variable probability effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fiftieth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing initial variation mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fiftieth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing detailed mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fiftieth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fiftieth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the first time saving state in the 51st control example, (b) is a display when the time saving symbol is elected during the first time saving state in the 51st control example It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the first time saving state end variation in the 51st control example, (b) is an example of the display screen at the start of the second time saving state in the 51st control example It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the jackpot C54 variation in the first time saving state in the 51st control example, (b) is a jackpot B54 in the first time saving state in the 51st control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during a change. It is the figure which showed the transition content of each game state in the 51st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-first control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the fifty-first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-first control example, and (b) is the main controller in the fifty-first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the random number table per time reduction set to ROM of this. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 51st control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot table in the 51st control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the fifty-first control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-first control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the fifty-first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 51st control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 51st example of control. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a time saving state effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-first control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing in a time saving state performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 51st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of the 1st time saving state completion performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 51st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the remaining number of times in the first time saving state in the first modification of the 51st control example is less than the number of special 2 reserved balls, and (b) These are the figures which showed an example of the display screen in the time reduction extension suggestion mode in the 1st modification of the 51st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the time reduction extension suggestion mode in the first modification of the 51st control example, (b) is a time reduction extension suggestion in the first modification of the 51st control example It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot display screen in mode. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modified example of the fifty-first control example; It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 51st example of control. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing in a time saving state performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 51st example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the variable probability state in the 52nd control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit variation display screen during the variable probability state in the 52nd control example is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the second probability variable state is set in the 52nd control example with a small hit winning, and (b) is a small win winning in the 52nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in case 3 probability change states are set. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third probability variable state is set in the small hit winning in the 52nd control example and the number of remaining short time increases, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the 52nd control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 2nd probability change state. It is the figure which showed the transition content of each game state in the 52nd control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-second control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the fifty-second control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 52nd control example, (b) is the main controller in the 52nd control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the random number table per time saving set in the ROM, and (c) shows the prescribed contents of the small hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 52nd control example It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 52nd control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot table in the 52nd control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the fifty-second control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-second control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 52nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 52nd control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a small winning lottery process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifty-second control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 52nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifty-second control example; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 small hit stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 52nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 52nd example of control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variable probability effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-second control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the variable probability state in the production modification of the 52nd control example, (b) is a time-saving symbol winning during the probability variable state in the production modification of the 52nd control example It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot winning screen during the variable probability state in the modification of the production of the 52nd control example, and (b) is a small winning during the variable probability state in the production modification of the 52nd control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a winning screen. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the fifty-third control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-third control example, and (b) shows the prescribed contents of the normal table in the fifty-third control example. It is a figure shown typically. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for probability variation and a 1st time reduction in the 53rd example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for the 2nd time reduction in the 53rd example of control. It is the figure which showed the flow of the game when the time saving design was not elected during the 1st time saving state in the 53rd control example. It is the figure which showed the flow of the game at the time of the time-saving design election in the 1st time-saving state in the 53rd control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifty-third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 53rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 53rd example of control. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fifty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a start-up process (main controller) executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fifty-third control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen at the start of the first time saving state in the 54th control example, (b) shows an example of the display screen at the time of the ally character LV up in the 54th control example It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit fluctuation screen during the first time saving state in the 54th control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of an avoidance failure screen in the 54th control example be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a recovery screen from an avoidance failure in the fifty-fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an invincibility screen in the fifty-fourth control example. (a) is the figure which showed an example of the avoidance success screen in the 54th control example, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 2nd time saving state in the 54th control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-fourth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the random number table per time saving set in the ROM of the main control device in the 54th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 54th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the time saving per type selection table set in the ROM, (c) is the stipulated content of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 54th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fourth control example, and (b) is the RAM within the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fourth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the mode selection table at the time of small hit winning set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fourth control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time-saving symbol winning mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 54th control example. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifty-fourth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 54th example of control. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a time saving state effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fourth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of a small hit performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 54th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of the 1st time saving state completion performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 54th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the state with support in the fifty-fifth control example, and (b) is displayed at the time of winning a small winning that ends the state with support in the fifty-fifth control example. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed as a state suggesting effect in the fifty-fifth control example, and (b) is a display displayed as an expectation level UP effect with stock in the fifty-fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed as an expectation degree UP effect in the state with normal low probability support in the 55th control example, and (b) is a normal map low in the 55th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed as a state finalization effect with a certain support. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing state transitions between states in the fifty-fifth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing state transitions between states in the fifty-fifth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing state transitions between states in the fifty-fifth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the fifty-fifth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-fifth control example, and (b) is a main controller in the fifty-fifth control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the random number table per time saving set in the ROM, and (c) shows the prescribed contents of the small hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 55th control example It is a figure shown typically. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 55th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fifth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fifth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the state suggesting effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-fifth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction lottery process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 55th control example. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifty-fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 55th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 55th example of control. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifty-fifth control example. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process during electric support executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-fifth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during fluctuation of the short jackpot (2R), in which the number of short-time grants is less than the number of short-time stocks in the second modification of the 51st control example, and (b) is the 51st It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the short jackpot (2R) variation in which the number of times of reduced working hours given in the second modification of the control example is greater than the sum of the number of reduced working hours in stock and the number of reduced working hours remaining. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display screen during time reduction jackpot fluctuation|variation in the 2nd modification of the 51st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during time-saving jackpot fluctuation|variation in the 2nd modification of the 51st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the second modification of the fifty-first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing in a time saving state performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 51st control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot winning mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second modification of the fifty-first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the first time saving (four times of time saving) in the third modification of the fifty-first control example, and (b) is a third modification of the fifty-first control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during the last fluctuation|variation of the 1st time reduction (4 times of time reduction) in . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table in the third modification of the 51st control example, (b) is the main in the third modification of the 51st control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the random number table per time saving set to ROM of the control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing in a time saving state performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 3rd modification of the 51st example of control. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing during the 1st time saving state performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 3rd modification of the 51st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of the 1st time saving state completion performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd modification of the 51st control example. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third modification of the fifty-first control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when entering the time reduction extension suggestion mode during the holding change effect in the fourth modification of the 51st control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the 51st control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in the time reduction extension suggestion mode in 4 modifications. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth modified example of the fifty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a hold change effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth modified example of the fifty-first control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing in a time saving state performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 4th modification of the 51st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the first time saving state in the fifth modification of the 51st control example, (b) is the first time saving in the fifth modification of the 51st control example It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a small hit is won during the state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the first time saving ends with the small winning 5 times in the 5th modification of the 51st control example, and (b) is the 51st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when the 2nd time saving state based on the time saving design A stocked in 5 modifications is set. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the second time saving state (time saving pattern A) in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example, (b) is a fifth modification of the fifty-first control example It is the figure which showed an example of the final variation screen of the 2nd time saving state (time saving design A) in an example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 2nd time saving state (time saving pattern B) in the 5th modification of the 51st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example, and (b) is the RAM of the main controller in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth modification of the 51st control example, (b) is the 51st control example It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the time reduction hit classification|category selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 5th modification. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving lottery processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th modification of the 51st example of control. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th modification of the 51st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing in a time saving state performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th modification of the 51st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of the 1st time saving state completion performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th modification of the 51st control example. (a) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the last change display screen of the 1st time saving state in the 6th modification of the 51st control example. It is the figure which showed the flow at the time of time saving design election during the 1st time saving state in the modification of the 53rd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a character prefetch effect start screen in the fifty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display screen during the character prefetch effect in the fifty-sixth control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen during a character prefetch effect target change in the fifty-sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a character tilt screen during character prefetch effect target change in the fifty-sixth control example, and (b) is a figure showing a character fainting screen during character prefetch effect target change in the fifty-sixth control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing a roaring screen after the character roars after reviving from fainting in the fifty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display screen after the character roaring in the fifty-sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a silent reach screen during the character prefetch effect in the fifty-sixth control example, and (b) shows a display screen when winning hold is obtained during the character prefetch effect in the fifty-sixth control example. It is a diagram. It is the figure which showed the display screen of the hit pending|holding object change in the fifty-sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display screen (first special figure variation) of the roulette effect (first time) in the fifty-sixth control example, and (b) is a view of the roulette effect (first time) in the fifty-sixth control example. It is the figure which showed the character display screen (special figure fluctuation|variation 2nd time). (a) and (b) are diagrams showing result display screens of the roulette effect (first time) in the fifty-sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a result display screen of the roulette effect (second time) in the fifty-sixth control example, and (b) is an example of a result display screen of the roulette effect (second time) in the fifty-sixth control example. It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram showing a display screen for a hero character effect in the fifty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display screen for a special character effect in the fifty-sixth control example. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette display screen after a special character appears in the fifty-sixth control example; It is a diagram showing a flow of roulette effect and special figure variation in the fifty-sixth control example. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the character mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the sound type selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the roulette scenario selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a roulette mode determination table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a look-ahead management process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing second look-ahead effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing variable effect setting processing for look-ahead effect executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a state setting process during look-ahead effect executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the operation effect during reach variation in the effect modification of the fiftieth control example, and (b) is a view showing the operation effect in the effect modification of the fiftieth control example. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation mode at the time of the next fluctuation|variation start of a fluctuation|variation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a jackpot game in the production modification of the fiftieth control example, and (b) is a special figure after the jackpot game ends in the production modification of the fiftieth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation start screen. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during a special figure fluctuation|variation after the jackpot game completion in the production|presentation modification of the 50th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the approach mode in the probability variation state of the production example of each control example, (b) is a super close mode in the probability variation state of the production example of each control example It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a mode promotion effect during approach mode in another example of effect of each control example, and (b) is a view of a disengagement display screen at the time of mode promotion in another example of effect of each control example. It is the figure which showed an example. It is the figure which showed the execution timing and classification of each notice performed during the fluctuation|variation production|presentation in the 57th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the start of the butterfly button effect in the fifty-seventh control example, and (b) is an example of a display screen during button notice A in the butterfly button effect of the fifty-seventh control example. It is a figure showing. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen when a button is operated during button notice A in the fifty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a button is operated during button notice B in the fifty-seventh control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the one-shot notification effect in the fifty-seventh control example, and (b) is a display showing a flower icon and a butterfly icon in different modes in the fifty-seventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the opening screen (for even-numbered symbols) of the jackpot game in the fifty-seventh control example, and (b) is a selection button operation during the display of the opening screen of the jackpot game in the fifty-seventh control example. is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during song selection in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the opening screen of the jackpot game (when a new song appears) in the fifty-seventh control example, and (b) is a button push during the display of the opening screen of the jackpot game in the fifty-seventh control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when all songs are released with . FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing opening effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing music selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing detailed mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifty-eighth control example; (a) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the production mode at the time of time saving state in the fifty-eighth control example and entering the variable probability state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode of the time saving final variation in the 58th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the transition to the rush mode in the time saving final variation in the 58th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the shift to the normal mode is notified in the time saving final variation in the 58th control example, and (b) is a time saving final variation in the 58th control example , It is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode when it is notified that there is a jackpot within the final fluctuation or the remaining reservation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the probability variable state that continues until the next big hit is notified in the time saving final variation in the 58th control example, and (b) is a time saving state in the 58th control example Alternatively, in the variable probability state, it is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode when a suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation of the variable probability state is increased is executed. It is the figure which showed the transition content of each game state in the 58th control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-eighth control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the fifty-eighth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 58th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 58th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 58th control example, (b) is the defined content of the time saving / probability variation table in the 58th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving final fluctuation table in the 58th control example, (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the latency table in the 58th control example It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 58th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 58th control example FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in a ROM; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-eighth control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a set mini-character suggestion selection table; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-eighth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 58th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 58th control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifty-eighth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifty-eighth control example; FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-eighth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 58th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 mini character effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-eighth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 58th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special-figure 2 mini-character production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 58th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the passage of the game ball for the first time through the through gate is detected in the weak rush mode in the first modification of the fifty-eighth control example; It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the second special symbol lottery is executed five times without the game ball passing through the through gate in the weak rush mode in the first modification of the fifty-eighth control example. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 61A table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modification of the fifty-eighth control example, and (b) is the fifty-eighth It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern 61A table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modification of the control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a light rush 61A table in the first modified example of the fifty-eighth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a variation pattern scenario 61A table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modified example of the fifty-eighth control example; It is a diagram showing the transition content of each game state in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 61B table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example, and (b) is the fifty-eighth It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd hit random-number 61B table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern 61B table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example; 2 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving/probability variable 61B table in the modification of No. 2, and (c) schematically shows the prescribed contents of the time saving provision 61B table in the second modification of the 58th control example. is a diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a variation pattern scenario 61B table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second modified example of the fifty-eighth control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode after the first win in the fifty-ninth control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode after the first win in the fifty-ninth control example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the variable display production|presentation 1 time before the time reduction final fluctuation|variation of the time reduction mode in the 59th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the variable display effect one time before the time saving final variation of the time saving mode in the 59th control example, (b) is a time saving mode time saving mode in the 59th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of a final variation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the loop bonus is won in the fifty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a continuous judge effect during the loop bonus mode in the fifty-ninth control example. is. It is the figure which showed the transition content of each game state in the 59th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the 59th control example, (b) is a specification of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 59th control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving provision table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 59th control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the 59th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set to. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the deviation type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifty-ninth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 59th control example. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 59th control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing chance mode processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a time saving mode process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing loop bonus end processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifty-ninth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing in time saving mode performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 59th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable accessory is at the origin position in the 60th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable accessory is at the operating position in the 60th control example. be. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the configuration of a movable accessory in the 60th control example; (a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board with the movable accessory at the origin position in the 60th control example, and (b) is activated while the movable accessory is descending in the 60th control example. FIG. 12C is a vertical cross-sectional view of the game board at the timing when the position sensor switches from OFF to ON; ) is a longitudinal sectional view of the game board when the movable accessory is at the vibration lower limit position in the 60th control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of actions of the movable accessory during the effect of moving the accessory in the 60th control example; (a) is a diagram showing the position of the movable accessory at the start timing of the first movable control (advance scenario operation) in the 60th control example, and (b) is the first movable control in the 60th control example. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing the location of the position of the movable accessory at the end timing of (advancing scenario action), and (c) is the position of the movable accessory at the timing when the movable accessory descends to the vibration lower limit position in the 60th control example. FIG. 12D is a diagram showing locations, and (d) is a diagram showing the location of the movable accessory at the timing when the movable accessory rises to the lower limit of the detection range of the operating position sensor in the 60th control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device in the 60th control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 60th control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 60th control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an advancing scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 60th control example, (b) is a pachinko game in the 60th control example; is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the evacuation scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine, (c) is set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 60th control example; is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first return-handling scenario table, and (d) shows the second return-handling scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 60th control example. It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing specified contents of a vibration scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 60th control example; (a) to (b) are explanatory diagrams of control of the stepping motor in the 60th control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing frame button input start/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing drive timer monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing motor scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an advance scenario process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing evacuation scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing recovery scenario processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing motor command monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing motor output processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 60th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board in the 61st control example; FIG. 32 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; (a) is a front view of the frame button in the 61st control example, and (b) is a front view of the selection button in the 61st control example. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device in the 61st control example; FIG. 32 is an operation diagram of the variable winning device in the 61st control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is the third symbol during the movable role preparation period in which the movable role is being executed (advancement control) for advancing the movable role from the storage position to the operating position as the role object production in the 61st control example. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the vicinity of the display surface of the display device, and FIG. 11B shows movement control (advancement control) for advancing the movable accessory from the storage position to the operating position as the accessory effect in the 61st control example; It is a figure which shows an example near the display surface of the 3rd design display device during the waiting period after completion|finish. (a) shows the area near the display surface of the third symbol display device in a state in which the player presses the frame button while the first effect of the movable accessory is being executed in the 61st control example, and the end condition is established. FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example, and FIG. 11B is a display surface of the third symbol display device in a state in which the condition for ending the movable accessory first effect in the 61st control example is satisfied and the movable accessory second effect is executed; It is a figure which shows an example of vicinity. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the vicinity of the display surface of the third symbol display device in a state in which the movable accessory that was moved in the accessory performance in the 61st control example is returning to the storage position; , a diagram showing an example of the vicinity of the display surface of the third symbol display device in a state where the movable accessory is moving (retracted) to the storage position after the first rendering of the movable accessory ends in the 61st control example; be. (a) shows the third symbol in a state in which the additional effect is executed during the period until the movable accessory moves to the operating position in the state where the condition for ending the first effect of the movable accessory in the 61st control example is established. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the vicinity of the display surface of the display device, and FIG. 11B shows the third symbol display device in a state where the movable accessory has moved to the operating position while the additional effect in the 61st control example is being executed; It is a figure which shows an example near a display surface. (a) is a diagram showing another example of the additional effect in the 61st control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the movable accessory moving to the operating position in a state where the additional effect in the 61st control example is executed. It is a figure which shows display surface vicinity of the 3rd design display device of the moved state. (a) is a diagram showing the vicinity of the display surface of the third symbol display device in a state where the up effect is executed in the 61st control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the role object effect is executed in the 61st control example and the end condition is met during the vibrating motion of the first cycle and the falling motion is executed. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the flow of the performance when the role object performance is executed in the 61st control example and the termination condition is satisfied and the rising motion is executed during the vibration motion of the third period; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the 61st control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; is a block diagram showing FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 61st control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 61st control example, (b) is the main control in the 61st control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 61st control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 61st control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern table for the big hit, and (c) is the specified contents of the (normal) variation pattern table for loss set in the ROM of the main controller in the 61st control example is a diagram schematically showing, (d) is set in the ROM of the main control device in the 61st control example (probability variable / short time) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the fluctuation pattern table be. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an operation scenario table group set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the sixty-first control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation effect pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example, and (b) is the 61st control example. is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the mission selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in . It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the additional effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a second control execution selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a second period display selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the retreat mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an advance scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; (b) is a pachinko game in the 61st control example; is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the fall scenario table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device of the pachinko machine, and (c) is set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of an upward scenario table; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a vibration scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a character object movement related area set in the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; (b) is a sound lamp of the pachinko machine in the 61st control example; 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data types of stored data stored in a drive status storage area set in a RAM of the control device; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 61st control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 61st control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 61st control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 61st control example. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 61st control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 61st control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing notification processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special figure winning information command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 61st control example. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing additional effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing drive timer monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing character product effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a time elapsed update process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing motor scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing advance scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario repetition processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing second operation scenario determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing second operation scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 61st control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing evacuation scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixty-first control example; FIG. (a) is a view showing the vicinity of the display surface of the third symbol display device in a state where the role object production is started in the 62nd control example and the movable role object is positioned at the operating position; It is a diagram showing the vicinity of the display surface of the third symbol display device in a state in which the total mission is achieved by pressing the button PUSH during the performance of the character in the control example. (a) is a view showing the vicinity of the display surface of the third symbol display device at the start of the super 4 role product production of the 62nd control example; It is a figure which shows display surface vicinity of the 3rd design display apparatus in the th period. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an operation scenario table group set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation effect pattern selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an overall mission selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example, and (b) is a diagram in the 62nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 1st period suggestion production table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the progress effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first vibration scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a second vibration scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the third vibration scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a role object movement-related area set in the RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; (b) is a pachinko machine in the 62nd control example; 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data types of stored data stored in a drive status storage area set in a RAM of an audio lamp control device of a machine; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing character product effect pattern determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a pressing information update process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing additional effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing character product effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario repetition processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 62nd control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode when a performance effect is started in the 63rd control example, and (b) is a view showing an effect mode during execution of the performance effect in the 63rd control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode when the player operates the frame button at a timing matching the rhythm in the performance effect of the 63rd control example; (b) is a view showing the performance effect of the 63rd control example; is a diagram showing an effect mode when the player operates the frame button at a timing that deviates from the rhythm in . (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of winning a displacement lottery that is executed when a frame button is operated at a timing that deviates from the rhythm in the performance effect of the 63rd control example; ) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case where a displacement lottery executed when a frame button is operated at a timing out of rhythm in the performance effect of the 63rd control example is not won. (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case where the performance effect in the 63rd control example results in a performance effect corresponding to success; It is the figure which showed the production|presentation mode when it becomes the production|presentation result. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the operation scenario table group set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a winning operation table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a pressing period type table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a success lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; (b) is the sound of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the period A table set in the ROM of the ramp control device, and (c) is the period set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for B, and (d) schematically shows the defined contents of the after-success-pressing table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; is a diagram shown in FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect result selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the destination selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 63rd control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio output device in the 63rd control example; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing drive timer monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing performance effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a role product operation setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing motor scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an advance scenario process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning operation scenario processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 63rd control example; FIG. 12(a) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 63rd control example; 4 is a flowchart showing loading processing; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 63rd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 63rd control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a performance mode in a state where the role object production is started in the 64th control example and the movable accessory is positioned at the operating position; (b) is a diagram showing the role object production in the 64th control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode when cancellation of execution of the falling motion is determined after the execution of the falling motion is determined during the execution of . (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 64th control example, (b) is the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 64th control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the set cancellation lottery table. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 64th control example; FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 64th control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing additional effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 64th control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable accessory is positioned at the origin position in the 65th control example; It is a figure which shows a state. (a) is a diagram showing a production mode before the start of the character object attack production (battle preparation production) in the 65th control example; ) in which the movable accessory is most lowered. (a) is a diagram showing a performance mode in which the movable accessory is most lowered in the role object attack presentation (fifth attack) of the 65th control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rendering mode (destruction rendering) when the end condition is not met in the attack rendering (five attacks); (a) is a diagram showing a production mode (attack failure production) when the end condition is satisfied in the role object attack production (second to fifth attacks) of the 65th control example; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a performance mode (self-destruction performance) when the end condition is met in the accessory attack performance (first attack) of the 65 control example. (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the movement of the movable accessory when the end condition is not satisfied in the accessory attack effect (fifth attack) of the 65th control example, and (b) is the 65th control. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of movement of a movable accessory when an end condition is satisfied in the example accessory attack effect (third attack). FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the flow of the movement of the movable accessory when the end condition is met in the accessory attack effect (first attack) of the 65th control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 65th control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an operation scenario table group set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 65th control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a vibration scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 65th control example, and (b) is a pachinko game in the 65th control example is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the first drop scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine, and (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the first drop scenario table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 65th control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a set second fall scenario table; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the vibration scenario end lottery table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 65th control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 65th control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a character object movement-related 68 area set in the RAM of the sound lamp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing normal state effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing drive timer monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing battle effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing motor scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario repetition processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing vibration scenario end processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing first fall scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixty-fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing second fall scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing evacuation scenario processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 65th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixty-sixth control example; (a) is a plan view schematically showing a state in which the variable winning device is closed in the 66th control example, and (b) is a state in which the variable winning device is open in the 66th control example; FIG. 4 is a schematic plan view; It is a diagram showing a flow pattern of game balls in the variable winning device in the sixty-sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a normal state production mode (during left-handed hitting) in the 66th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a normal state production mode in the 66th control example when a 2-round jackpot is won. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the normal state 2-round jackpot in the 66th control example, and (b) is a normal state 10-round jackpot (first win) win in the 66th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of time. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the first win in the 66th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the chance mode in the 66th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the final jackpot in the chance mode in the 66th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a chance mode end screen in the 66th control example. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the pullback mode in the 66th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a victory mode entry screen in the 66th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the victory mode in the 66th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a victory mode end screen in the 66th control example. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which a heaven zone is set in the 66th control example; It is a diagram showing the transition content of each game state in the sixty-sixth control example. It is a diagram showing the transition content of each game state in the sixty-sixth control example. It is a diagram showing the transition content of each game state in the sixty-sixth control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the sixty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 66th control example, and (b) is the main controller in the 66th control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table in the 66th control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the 66th control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 66th control example, (b) is a normal/second probability variation table in the 66th control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the probability variable/time reduction table in the 66th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 66th control example, and (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 66th control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a pullback mode mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the winning ball table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing (every 2 ms) executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing switch reading processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pullback mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing winning type processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a continuous-chance jackpot start process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view showing another example of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 66th control example; FIG. 322 is a diagram showing another example of the chance mode end screen in the sixty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the number of prize balls reaches the upper limit during the victory mode in the first modification of the 66th control example, and (b) is a first modification of the 66th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode during a big hit after the upper limit reach|attainment in an example. FIG. 212 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the pullback mode after reaching the upper limit in the first modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first modified example of the 66th control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the 66th control example; (b) is a block diagram of the first modification of the 66th control example; It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a privilege giving table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a switch reading process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a set prize ball determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first modification of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing upper limit-related processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 66th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after entry into the pullback mode before reaching the upper limit in the second modified example of the 66th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the second modified example of the 66th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the presentation mode at the time of reaching|attaining an upper limit during victory mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot medium effect mode after reaching the upper limit in the second modification of the 66th control example, and (b) is after reaching the upper limit in the second modification of the 66th control example. is a diagram showing an example of a victory mode end effect mode. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a second modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a second modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a probability information selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the 66th control example; (b) is a block diagram of the second modification of the 66th control example; It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a character level selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the item selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the second modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a set prize ball determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modification of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing state change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of continuous chan, which is executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pullback mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing upper limit-related processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing post-upper limit command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the ending screen of the jackpot game in the third modified example of the 66th control example, (b) is a display screen during the variable probability state in the third modified example of the 66th control example It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example after the start of fluctuation per special figure 1 (non-variable special figure 2) in the third modification of the 66th control example, (b) is the third example of the 66th control It is the figure which showed an example of the pseudo|miniature hit production|presentation during big-hit fluctuation|variation in a modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo small hit production screen in the third modification of the 66th control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot in the third modification of the 66th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen (when there are many pseudo point displays); (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot middle screen (when pseudo point display is small) in the third modification of the 66th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the 66th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the start timing standby screen of the small hitting game in 3 modifications. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during a small hit game in the third modification of the 66th control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot in the third modification of the 66th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the opening production screen. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a third modified example of the 66th control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third modification of the 66th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the 66th control It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 3rd modification of an example. FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a first win type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 222 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time-saving / probability variable table in the third modification of the 66th control example, (b) is the second in the third modification of the 66th control example It is the figure which showed typically the content of specification of the probability variation table. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a third modified example of the 66th control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; (b) is a block diagram of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a pseudo effect table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the third modified example of the 66th control example. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing switch reading processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 3rd modification of the 66th example of control. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing game state update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a process during execution of the first special symbol variation executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the 66th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the 66th control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 3rd modification of the 66th example of control. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing second special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third modification of the 66th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 3rd modification of the 66th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the 66th control example. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation in-execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the 66th control example. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 3rd modification of the 66th control example. It is a flow chart showing the special figure 2 deviating stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third modification of the 66th control example. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in a third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 3rd modification of the 66th control example. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a second prize winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the third modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing stop type command reception processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing prize ball mode subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing prize ball mode addition processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 3rd modification of the 66th example of control. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in the 3rd modification of the 66th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd modification of the 66th control example. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing pseudo effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during the variation of the jackpot (first small hit) in the fourth modification of the 66th control example, and (b) is a jackpot in the fourth modification of the 66th control example It is the figure which showed an example during a fluctuation|variation screen (the 20th small hit). (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the jackpot symbol is stopped in the fourth modification of the 66th control example, and (b) is a jackpot game start screen in the fourth modification of the 66th control example. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a jackpot game in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a number-of-balls selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example; It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hit mode selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the 4th modification of the 66th control example. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing switch reading processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing prize ball determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a set prize ball determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a process for determining the number of balls during a jackpot executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing winning type processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fourth modification of the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 4th modification of the 66th example of control. FIG. 322 is a diagram showing an example of a chance mode end screen in the first example of effect in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first example of effect in the 66th control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot middle effect mode after reaching the upper limit in the second effect example of the 66th control example, and (b) is a release in the second effect example of the 66th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect during a later big hit. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing set prize ball determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second example of effect in the sixty-sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second example of the sixty-sixth control example; (b) is a second example of the sixty-sixth control example; 3 is a flowchart showing other command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in .

<First control example>
A control example of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 85, as a first control example, a control example when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the provided variable winning device 65, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.
A game board 13 (see FIG. 4) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the vehicle to the target. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加
The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.
The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).
In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 4) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.
Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off. That is, in this control example, a shooting means for shooting the ball to the game area formed on the game board 13 and a shooting device for varying the shooting intensity based on the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 are provided. and intensity variable means. As a result, the player can execute a ball shooting action using the shooting means and a shooting intensity varying action of varying the shooting intensity of the ball simply by operating the operating handle 51 . Therefore, the operation of shooting the ball toward a specific game area out of the game areas formed on the game board 13 can be executed with one hand, and the game can be executed without imposing an excessive burden on the player. be able to.
In this control example, the firing intensity is varied based on the rotational operation amount (rotating position) of the operating handle 51, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can select the firing intensity, for example. A shooting intensity selection button may be provided, and the shooting means may shoot a ball at a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation result (selection result) of the shooting intensity selection button.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .
As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Ball mouth 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, variable prize winning device 65, normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are used for playing games. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the board 13 .
The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.
In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 21) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 4) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 4) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface of the game board 13 (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37 .
The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 performs the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is a display means for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball is entered. In addition, in this control example, since the pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used, the first symbol display device 37 selects two types of special symbol lottery ( For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one type of special symbol (first special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 displays one type of special symbol. A display area should be provided.
In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses the LED to indicate which of the current game states (for example, normal state, time saving state, variable probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, or a special symbol (first symbols) are in the process of changing (during dynamic display for stop-displaying the combination of symbols to indicate the result of the lottery) by the lighting state, and the stopped symbols correspond to the big wins that are advantageous to the player. A pattern, a pattern corresponding to a disadvantageous big win, or a lost pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big win and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, blue), and a combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this control example, various game states are notified by a combination of light emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period during which the light emitting means is lit and the period during which the light is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is conducted when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (winning a prize). Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success/failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which the privilege game state is advantageous to the player.
When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the balls can be easily entered into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, and by allowing the balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A game that can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the opening period (specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65) for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) 65a), a round game period in which the open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. A period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A big hit game period is set. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the fact that the game ball is launched by the player operating the launch handle, and the game ball enters the special figure start port (first ball entrance 64 etc.). This is another form of the movable means in the 64th control example described later because the movement is controlled when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery.
In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbols indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped (confirmed display), the ball is set in time with the opening of the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game. can be prepared to be shot in any direction, so that a big winning game can be played smoothly. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.
In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game. In the jackpot game, various controls executed during the ending period set after the movable control of the variable winning device 65 is finished are also controls executed after the control of 1 is finished. This is another form of the second control in the example of 64 control.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, a plurality of types of jackpot games are configured to be executable, and the number of round games executed during the jackpot game (round number ) and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game are different. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the big win is won by lottery of special symbols, but also in the type of the big win won and the game state at the time of winning.
In addition, the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery also depends on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win and the winning game. Different lengths may be set according to the type of the jackpot. For example, when the jackpot is won, game contents different from the game contents at the time of winning the jackpot are set as the game contents to be executed after the jackpot game ends. is set so that the ending period (for example, 10 seconds) of the jackpot game is longer than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of other jackpot games, and during the ending period, It is preferable to configure so as to be able to perform an effect of guiding in advance the contents of the game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.
On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in which the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot is changed to another jackpot game. It is preferable to configure the setting to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.
In addition, for example, based on the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, without using a configuration for actually distinguishing between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance according to the contents of the regulation.

Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, there are two states (special symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is different. Two states (high-probability state of normal patterns, low-probability state of normal patterns) with different winning probabilities in lottery of normal patterns are combined, and three kinds of game states can be set. Specifically, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and variable state (high probability of special symbols Probability state, high probability state of normal design) is configured to be settable. The lottery for special symbols and the lottery for ordinary symbols are configured so that winning is easier in the case of a high probability state than in the case of a low probability state, so that the pachinko machine 10 in this control example Among a plurality of game states that can be set by , the variable probability state is a game state that makes it easier to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery than other game states, and the variable probability state and the time saving state are more normal than other game states. A game state in which winning is likely to occur in the pattern lottery is brought about.
In addition, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, it is configured to execute a winning game (normal pattern winning game) that facilitates the execution of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened to provide a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640. A normal game is executed. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the probability variable state and the time saving state, that is, the high probability state of normal symbols are set, the game state becomes easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the other game states. Furthermore, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the period (dynamic display period) from the execution of the special design lottery to the stop display of the lottery result is the low probability of the normal design. It is configured such that it is easier to set a shorter period than when the state is set. Therefore, when the variable state and the time-saving state, that is, the high-probability state of the normal design is set, since the special design lottery can be executed in a short period of time than the other game states, a new special design is created. The game state is such that the lottery can be easily executed.
Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and only when the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game, A high-probability state of special symbols can be set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area during the jackpot game and a jackpot game (disadvantageous jackpot game) in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area during the jackpot game. and are configured to be executable. Hereinafter, an advantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area during the jackpot game will be referred to as a probability variable jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed will be referred to as a probability variable jackpot. In addition, a disadvantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game is called a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed is called a normal jackpot.
In this control example, if a special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot, it is determined that the player is out of the game, and the player is not given a privilege. As a result of the lottery, in some cases where it is determined that it is not the above-mentioned big win but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned big win (for example, the benefit of opening the variable winning device 65 for only one round). It may be configured such that a winning game is executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicates the type of the big win in the case of a big win. A pattern corresponding to is shown.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description is continued. In the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a are provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 variably displays a special symbol executed by the first symbol display device 37 triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). While synchronizing with the third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided which is composed of an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) with passage as a trigger. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 114(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is They are composed of 10 types of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "1" to "9" are added. These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In the third symbol display device 81 of this control example, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.
As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols sz are formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each number-like identification information. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big win, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are arranged (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot game occurs after the end of the game. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .
In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively on the top, middle and bottom. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has the main symbols arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled in the horizontal direction for variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to be scrolled from right to left and variably displayed. The column Z2 and the lower pattern column Z3 are arranged such that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) fz which do not indicate the lottery result of the special symbol are also formed between the main symbols sz. In FIG. 6(b), a blank pattern (secondary pattern) fz is displayed using a pattern imitating a triangle.
As shown in FIG. 6A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed vertically and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed obliquely. In a state where each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, the third symbol (main symbol sz) is aligned on the activated line in a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example). If stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 6(a), in this control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Until all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (the middle symbol row V2 in this control example) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.
In this control example, among the above-described three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3), a particular symbol row (symbol row Z2), that is, a symbol row whose variable display is stopped and displayed last among a plurality of symbol rows. On the other hand, it is configured so that the number of main symbols is larger than that of other symbol rows. Specifically, the number of main symbols to which a specific number (for example, the number "4") is attached is greater than that of other symbol rows. As a result, when the identification information that imitates a specific number is in a reach state, the jackpot pattern (that imitates a specific number) that passes over the effective line is more likely than when the other identification information is in a reach state. Since the number of pieces of identification information) can be increased, it is possible to visually predict that the player is highly likely to win the jackpot.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.
Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player can hardly distinguish ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating. In addition, by additionally displaying (switching display) a pattern of a type different from the variably displayed third pattern, when it is possible to give the player additional information different from the information indicating the winning of the jackpot, the additional information The effect encouraging the awarding can be said to be an effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player will be awarded when a combination other than a combination indicating a big win is displayed.
Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 6(b). As shown in FIG. 6B, a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery situation (whether the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed, 4th design (special 1 4th design) for indicating the lottery status of the 1st special design (special 1), or 4th design for indicating the lottery status of the 2nd special design (special 2) ( Special figure 2 fourth pattern) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.
In addition, the small display area Dm2 is an area where identification information for indicating the lottery status of normal symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during change) and the lottery result) is displayed. ) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of special symbols and the lottery status of normal symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth pattern is displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 6B) to show that the special symbol is fluctuating. 6 (b) small display area Dm2), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth pattern, a plurality of colors By using the display mode that shows that the special pattern is changing depending on the number and the display mode that changes the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode that shows the specific pattern and color, the lottery result of the special pattern may be configured as shown.
Furthermore, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is displayed in the main display area Dm. The upper left shows an example of forming a normal 4th symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which a normal 4th symbol for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. However, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area may be varied according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect due to the restriction of the area in which the variation production is executed by the fourth pattern display area and the normal-fourth pattern display area. . In this case, the fourth pattern display area and the fourth normal pattern display area are deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80 is replaced. It may be configured to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol.
As shown in FIG. 6A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved storage). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example executes a new special symbol lottery when variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37 or when a winning game is being performed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in such a state that it is not possible to enter the ball, the number of ball entrances is suspended up to four times for each entrance. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this embodiment, the maximum number of held balls stored for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is 4, and the maximum value for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls to be held is set to 4, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6B, the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The waiting area Ds1b is an area for displaying a number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbols. They are displayed in order from left to right. Then, when a reserved ball with a special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the pedestal with the lowest number among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 on which the reserved pattern is not displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 6(b), four reserved balls of the first special symbol are held and stored. Four reserved patterns (hz1 to hz4) of the display mode (white circle mark) corresponding to the ball) are displayed on the first pedestal hr1 to the fourth pedestal hr4.
The running area Ds1a is a display area where the pending symbols displayed corresponding to the currently running special symbol variation are shifted and displayed, and the running pending symbol hz0 is displayed on the running pedestal hr0. be. That is, when a new special symbol variation is started, the pending symbol hz1 displayed on the pedestal hr1 of the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the pedestal hr0 of the active area Ds1a and displayed. By configuring in this way, for example, when executing the notice effect (for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved pattern) indicating the expectation of winning the jackpot with respect to the reserved pattern displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. In addition, the player can easily discriminate that the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the advance notice performance is performed is being performed.
In addition, by making it possible to display reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved patterns is also executed for the reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the display mode of the reserved symbols will be changed for a longer time than when the reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed are not displayed.

In this control example, the displayed reserved design shows the reserved ball of the first special design by the display mode of the reserved design displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds (special figure 1 reserved design) or a reserved pattern (special figure 2 reserved pattern) indicating the reserved ball of the second special pattern, and the special figure 1 reserved pattern is a white circle (Fig. 6 (b)), the special figure 2 reserved design is displayed with a black circle (see FIG. 8(a)). As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol. It is possible to facilitate the determination of whether or not to continue the game.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, in this control example, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special symbol is displayed, and the pedestal with the youngest number (the pedestal with the youngest number A special symbol lottery is executed using a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved symbol displayed on the pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved symbols are displayed in the order of use in the special symbol lottery, but are not limited to this. It may be configured so as to attach order of consumption information for indicating the order used in the lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which reserved ball acquired at which timing corresponds to which reserved symbol.
In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 6(b), it is configured to be able to display up to 8 reserved patterns side by side, but not limited to this, the display area of the special figure 1 reserved pattern , and the display area of the special figure 2 reserved design may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, for example, if the game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation is set, the display area of the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed more conspicuously than the display area of the special figure 2 reserved design. However, if the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) that makes it easy to acquire special figure 2 reservation is set, the display area of special figure 2 reserved design is displayed more prominently than the display area of special figure 1 reserved design. It may be configured to
In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, and the right-handed game and the left-handed game are played. Since it is configured so that the same game result is given in the case of hitting the left, it is not displayed, but for example, depending on the set game state, the right hitting game is more likely than the left hitting game. If it is a pachinko machine 10 that can set a case where the game method is more advantageous than the left-handed game and a case where the left-handed game is more advantageous than the right-handed game, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 Alternatively, a guide display mode may be displayed to guide the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

To explain in more detail, as the guidance display area, there are a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode for making the player play a left-handed game. The display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding is displayed, and the display mode of ``right-handed'' is a game state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, for example, a probability variable state , It is displayed during the time saving state and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left hitting" may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right hitting game ends. In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). is preferably configured so that the display mode of is displayed. In addition, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in each control example described above may be configured to be displayed as appropriate.
<Regarding the effect contents of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 15, description will be given of the characteristic effect contents out of the various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. do. First, with reference to FIG. 7(a), the display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ready-to-reach state is reached in the normal state (normal state). In this control example, the variably displayed third symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and a jackpot is won on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 6(a)). When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the third symbol combination indicating winning, a ready-to-win state is reached, and the upper symbol row Z1, The active line on which the lower symbol row Z2 is stopped is set as a ready-to-win effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. After reaching the ready-to-win state, the medium symbol row Z2 moves each identification information (third symbol) at a low speed (main symbol (third symbol imitating a number)) that is visible to the player. It is constructed so that the time required for the display is variably displayed at a rate of about 0.5 seconds).
As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol row has 10 main symbols (one each of main symbols with numbers "1" to "3", "5" to "9", and "4"). ), when the medium pattern row Z2 is variably displayed at a low speed, it takes 5 seconds (0.5× 10). Then, the medium symbol row Z2, which is variably displayed at a low speed, is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-to-win mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.
Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 7A, any third symbol (in FIG. Even in this case, the identification information (the third symbol imitating an octopus) in which the medium symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) that is variably displayed during reach is imitating the number "1" is first. It is configured so that low-speed fluctuation display is executed so that it can be visually recognized immediately.

In addition, in this control example, the effect mode of the variable effect is configured to vary according to the variation mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after entering the ready-to-win state. At the timing when the symbol row Z2 makes one round (after 5 seconds have passed since the low speed fluctuation display is executed) and at the timing when it has made two rounds (after 10 seconds have passed since the low speed fluctuation display has been executed), there are different presentation modes (ready-to-win mode). It is configured so that it can be changed to Therefore, as in the present control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol row Z2 that becomes visible first after entering the ready-to-win state, the player is given a different effect mode (ready-to-win mode) at any timing. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it changes to .
In this control example, the timing of changing to a different effect mode (reach mode) is the timing when the medium symbol row Z2 makes one round or the timing when it makes two rounds after entering the ready-to-win state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information that has been stopped) passes through the reach effective line and the identification information that is the combination indicating the jackpot after reaching the reach state. It may be configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the distorted identification information passes through the reach effective line. In this way, the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information that is stopped reach is changed to a different production mode (reach mode) based on passing through the reach effective line, the game It is possible to give a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stop-displayed in a combination that results in a big hit and the timing at which it changes to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode). Specifically, after entering the ready-to-win state, the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information for which the reach is stopped), which is the combination indicating the jackpot, changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the reach-to-reach effective line is passed. , the timing at which the medium pattern row Z2 is stop-displayed in a combination that results in a big win and the timing at which it is varied to a different presentation mode (ready-to-win mode) are overlapped. Therefore, when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information for which the reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating a big hit, approaches the reach effective line, the player has a great sense of expectation and pays attention to the variable performance. can be made In addition, when the symbol (third symbol) of the medium symbol row Z2 that is variably displayed in the ready-to-win state is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the combination indicating the big win (for example, one frame lag), it develops into a further variable effect. In the case (pseudo-run) or when the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed next indicates that the result is winning (chance), it is not a big hit in the reach state during execution, but the pseudo-run or chance is stopped. You may comprise so that the production|presentation which suggests is performed. In this case, it can be said that the effect suggesting the stoppage of the pseudo run or the chance eye is the effect suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player will be given when a combination other than a combination indicating a big win is displayed.
Here, in this control example, as described above, even when the reach state occurs in any third pattern, the specific identification state (the third pattern imitating the number "1") is visible first. For example, the combination of the third symbols to be finally stopped and displayed is shifted by one type from the combination of the third symbols for the big win. In the case of a combination (reach 1 frame off) (when the final stop display mode is determined in advance), from reaching the reach state until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed (the final stop display mode is the stop display A new problem arises in that the period of time (until it is reached) differs depending on the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state.
Specifically, when the ready-to-win state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number "1", the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol at low speed fluctuation. Therefore, in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 as the final stop display mode when the ready-to-win state is out by one frame, it takes 5.5 seconds (first round) and 10.5 seconds (second round) after entering the ready-to-win state. In short, when the ready-to-win state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number "6", the medium symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol at a low speed. 8 seconds (first round) and 13 seconds (second round) are required after entering the ready-to-win state in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 as the final stop display mode with one frame out of the ready-to-win state.

Therefore, in order to establish a ready-to-win state with the third symbol of a different type in a variation pattern in which the same variation time is set, the timing to reach the ready-to-win state is set by calculating backward from the stop display timing of the third symbol. I needed to process. In other words, there is a problem that the ready-to-win effect is executed without uniformity, which varies according to the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win condition, and the effect of the effect is reduced. rice field.
On the other hand, in this control example, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the main controller 110 determines by lottery the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result, and the determined variation The time is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display effect of the effect period that matches the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and the variable display effect of the third pattern. is configured to execute The variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an addition time command indicating the variation time to be added. It is configured to vary the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state based on the length of time. More specifically, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional time. be. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional time. In other words, the notification content of the addition time command allows the audio lamp control device 113 side to identify the variation type that is seven seconds longer than the basic time. As a result, it is possible to set the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state simply by confirming the contents of the addition time command.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7(b) to 10, the contents of the effect related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 7(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the normal symbol variation in which the player wins in the normal state will be described. FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed during execution of normal symbol variation in which winning is achieved in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the normal symbol variation is performed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being performed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. . Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating a second ball entrance 640 including an electric accessory 640a to be opened in a normal game per game is displayed therein. At the same time, a highlighted display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to inform the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. In the situation shown in FIG. 7(b), since the winning normal symbol variation is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is the second symbol including the closed electric accessory 640a. It has a display mode imitating the ball entrance 640 . By configuring in this way, the game may soon be executed for the player. can be predicted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, in FIG. 7(b), the explanation was given by taking as an example the execution of the normal symbol variation that is winning, but the lottery result is part of the execution of the normal symbol variation that is out (for example, the deviation variation (probability of 1/100) of forming the small display area Dm3 and displaying an icon simulating the second ball entrance 640 including the electric accessory 640a (fake effect). In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, even when the normal symbol lottery is not won, the effect display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed, so that the normal symbol winning game is executed for the player. The game can be played while expecting that the game will be played. In addition, in FIG. 7(b), by displaying an icon simulating the second ball entrance 640 including the electric accessary 640a in the small display area Dm3, an example of an effect suggesting the start of a regular game is shown. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to display a comment suggesting the start of a game per normal pattern in a part of the sub-display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

In addition, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of the normal per figure game. In this case, only when the special symbol variation is also performed while executing the normal symbol variation, since the effect suggesting that the normal pattern per game is performed is performed, for example, the special symbol lottery The result of the normal pattern lottery is previously suggested to the player executing only the normal pattern lottery by allowing the ball to pass through a through gate 67 which makes it easier to enter the ball than the first ball entrance 64 which is the execution trigger. nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege (execution of an effect suggesting the result of a normal symbol lottery in advance) to a player who is playing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the effect using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example is set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is being executed or the ball shooting game is being continuously executed. You can
In addition, depending on the contents of the game being executed, the degree of expectation of the suggestion effect that suggests the start of the game per normal pattern may be varied. , When the suggestion performance suggesting the start of the normal pattern per game is executed, the general per pattern game is executed at a rate of almost 100%, and only the normal pattern lottery is executed without executing the special pattern lottery ( If you are doing a stop hitting game), that is, if you are not playing a normal game, even if the suggestion effect that suggests the start of the game per normal pattern is executed, only about 10% per normal pattern. It may be configured so that the game is not executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the stop hitting game to grasp the start timing of the normal pattern per game based on the suggested performance to be executed, and to impose a penalty. can be done.
Details will be described later, but in this control example, up to four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal pattern reservation) is acquired, the acquired lottery right is used. The result of the normal pattern lottery that was used is configured to be able to be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the preliminary determination result can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 . Therefore, the stage before the normal pattern variation that is winning by hitting the suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the game per normal pattern is executed, that is, the stage that acquires the normal pattern holding that the preliminary determination result is winning. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that a normal game will be executed soon. In this case, rather than the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 7(b), it is preferable to execute the suggestive effect in an effect mode that is more difficult for the player to understand. It is configured to execute the suggestion performance in the same performance mode as the performance suggesting the result or the pre-discrimination result for the acquired special figure reservation, and the executed suggestion performance makes the situation advantageous to the player. It may also be configured to notify the player only of upcoming events.
In this way, the timing of actually executing the game per normal pattern and the execution timing of the suggestive effect diverge so that the player can understand the production mode of the suggestive effect for indicating that the game per normal pattern is executed. By making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is the normal game winning game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the suggestive effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8(a), the contents of the production when the game per normal pattern (per game with long opening) is executed in the normal state will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed when the regular game (long open winning game) is executed in the normal state (during the normal state). In this control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal design is set, the probability of winning in the normal design lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the normal executed in the low probability state of the normal design. The variation time of pattern variation is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 4, it is configured so that about half of the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 in both cases of executing a right-handed game and left-handed game. ing. In addition, it is configured to be able to store up to four lottery rights (normal pattern reservation) for normal patterns.
In other words, while the game is continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the normal symbol lottery is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when winning a general pattern in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be executed for a general pattern per game (long open per) in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 5 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, since the electric accessory 640a is provided below the first ball entrance 64, simply continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 will cause the fired ball to reach the second It is constructed so that the ball can be entered into the ball entrance 640 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal pattern winning game in the low probability state of the normal pattern that occurs at a low probability. there is
In the normal state, when winning the normal symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, a combination (in the figure, two Circle), the identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed, and a game per normal pattern is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and the open electric chew (the second entrance 640 including the electric accessory 640a) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. A mock icon is displayed. In addition, since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be executable in parallel (overlapping), the variation display of the third symbol executed in correspondence with the special symbol variation and the small display The variation display of the fourth symbol executed in the area Dm1 is continuously executed even during the regular pattern per game.
In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds, the number of second special symbol holding memories (special figure 2 holding balls) acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is shown. Special figure 2 reserved design (indicated by a black circle in the figure) indicates the number of reserved memory (special figure 1 reserved ball) of the first special design that has been acquired Special figure 1 reserved design (indicated by a white circle in the figure) (on the left side of the waiting area Ds1b). In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 8(a), it is a state after four or more balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640 during normal game per game, and the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit number. It shows the state after acquiring certain four items.

In this control example, since the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol, the later acquired special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired earlier. A special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the special figure 1 reserved ball. By configuring in this way, when the game per normal pattern is executed in the normal state and a plurality of special pattern 2 reserved balls are acquired, it is possible to preferentially and continuously execute the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, one period during which the lottery for the second special symbols is executed can be used as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player, and a dedicated performance can be executed to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance. can be done.
In this control example, the acquired special figure 1 reserved ball and special figure 2 reserved ball are displayed side by side (up to 8 pieces are displayed) in the waiting area Ds1b. When using the special figure 1 reserved ball display area that displays only the reserved ball in FIG. If the reserved ball of the second special pattern to be held is not acquired, the special figure 1 reserved ball display area is displayed so as to be more conspicuous than the special figure 2 reserved ball display area, and the reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired. In the case of doing, it is better to switch display so as to make the special figure 2 reserved sphere display area more conspicuous than the special figure 1 reserved sphere display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the next lottery for the first special symbol or the lottery for the second special symbol is to be executed.
The display screen shown in FIG. 8(a) is continuously displayed until the end timing of the normal per game in the normal state or the start timing of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. It is configured as follows. That is, even during normal per game, when the second special symbol variation is started, the chance zone effect, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 8(b), is executed. On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation is not started even when the end timing of the game per normal figure is reached, for example, the first special symbol variation in which a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected is executed. When the general pattern winning game (5 seconds) is executed at 10:00 a.m., the character "waiting for the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and when the first special symbol variation currently being executed is completed, the first 2 A standby screen is displayed to inform the player that the special symbol variation will start.
In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 8(a), when the general pattern per game is executed during the first special symbol variation, the main display area Dm corresponding to the first special symbol variation being executed While continuing to display the third symbol variation effect (indicated by three arrows in the figure) executed in the partial area of the main display area Dm (small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right in the figure) In this case, the display area used to display that the game per normal pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed The size of the small display area Dm3 may be made smaller than the example shown in FIG. 8(a). Alternatively, it is preferable to configure such that the small display area Dm3 is not formed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating the winning of the jackpot due to the formation of the small display area Dm3. In addition, when the normal pattern winning game is started without forming the small display area Dm3, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is the big winning variation. Therefore, even in a state in which execution of a normal figure winning game is not notified in the small display area Dm3, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operating state of the electric accessory 640a. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to configure so that the same production mode as the big win variation is executed even in a part of the case where the special symbol variation being executed is not the big win variation (is a loss variation). .

On the other hand, when the special symbol variation being executed (first special symbol variation) is a deviation variation, or when the special symbol variation is not executed, the small display area Dm3 is larger than the example shown in FIG. It may be formed large, or the entire surface of the main display area Dm may be used to display that the normal game is executed.
In other words, in the limited area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, when it is necessary to display a plurality of pieces of information (lottery results and winning game situations) in duplicate, information that is advantageous to the player. may be preferentially displayed, and may be displayed in various display modes based on the technical concept. In this case, the information that is advantageous to the player may differ. There are also players who consider low-rate effects to be advantageous information. Therefore, an operation means that can be operated by the player and an advantage level selection that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage level of various information displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means. means for setting a display mode corresponding to various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the degree of advantage selected by the degree of advantage selection means. As a result, it is possible to display various information in a display mode that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.
Next, the contents of the effect in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8(b) to 10. FIG. FIG. 8(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the effect executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 8(b), when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state, the comment "entering the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set during the period until all special 2 reservations acquired during the normal state are digested, basically after the first 2nd special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is started It is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 until the last second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is completed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current period is the advantageous period.
In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, characters of ``variable probability GET high probability'' are displayed as a guide display mode for showing that the variable probability state can be obtained with a high probability. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, but it is higher than the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. , when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variable probability state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the period of the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery is executed obtains a jackpot winning that is more likely than the period other than the chance zone in the normal state. Since it is a period where it is easy to get, as shown in FIG.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this chance zone, during one special symbol variation (second special symbol variation), a pseudo-variation effect that makes it appear that a plurality of special symbol variations have been executed is performed. configured to run. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 8A) indicating the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the secondary display area Ds is hidden, and a small display area Ds11 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. In the special figure 1 reservation number ("2" indicating that the number of special figure 1 reservations is 2 in the figure), the number of special figure 2 reservations in the small display area Ds12 (in the figure, the number of special figure 2 reservations "3" indicating that there are three is displayed.
As shown in FIG. 8(b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is different from the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 8(a)) of the sub-display area Ds. Since it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of special figure reservations during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the chance zone, the player can be made to think that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is actually executed a plurality of times, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, in this control example, a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm is used to display the number of special figures pending. During the zone, it may be configured so as not to notify the player of the number of special figures reserved, or in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the LED provided in the variable display unit 80). It may be configured to notify the number of pending drawings. Furthermore, it is only necessary to make it difficult for the player to identify the number of reserved special figures. You may switch to the display mode which changes a color. When configured in this way, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures, it is possible to suppress the current number of reserved special figures from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effect as in this control example can be obtained.
Further, as shown in FIG. 8(b), on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a rabbit-like character 1801 indicating that the second special symbol is currently being changed is displayed. As described above, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed in parallel (overlapping), so the period during which the normal pattern per game is executed is the first special symbol. There are cases where it overlaps with the fluctuation period (see FIG. 8A) and cases where it does not overlap. When the regular pattern winning game is executed overlapping with the period of fluctuation of the first special pattern, the second special pattern lottery is executed after the first special pattern fluctuation being executed is completed, and the first special pattern is drawn. When it does not overlap during the fluctuation period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern per game (during the normal per pattern game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery is different according to the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol when the game per normal pattern is executed, and the special symbol variation currently being executed is the first special symbol. A problem arises in that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether it is a variation or a second special symbol variation.
On the other hand, in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether it is the 1st special symbol variation or the 2nd special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9(a) and FIG. 10, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) among the variable effects executed during the chance zone will be described. Figure 9 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during special variation production, Figure 9 (b) is a special figure 2 holding ball FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol restarts in the special variation effect executed in the acquired state, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect that is executed in the non-starting state.
Here, the contents of the special fluctuation production (pseudo-variation production) will be explained. This special variation performance is a variation performance in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted. It is a pseudo variation production that makes you think that the pattern variation has been executed. First, using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special fluctuation effect, the reach effect is executed, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. ”) to temporarily stop the third symbol (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special variation performance, the characters "Unfortunate" suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, giving the player a chance. It is constructed so as to make one think that the second special symbol lottery executed during the zone was lost. In other words, in the first half period of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the ready-to-win performance with the expectation of winning the jackpot is stopped (temporarily stopped) with the performance result indicating the failure.
After that, in the second half period (about 30 seconds) of the special variable performance, a variable performance (special second half performance) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured to vary its effect mode according to the number of special figure 2 reservations that have already been acquired. , the special second half production is executed in a production mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone, and in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured, as shown in FIG. 10, the chance zone A special second half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation which is executed after the end of. That is, in this control example, as a special variation effect, the type of special symbol variation to be executed after the second special symbol variation in execution is completed is determined based on the number of special symbol reservations, and the effect corresponding to the determination result The production mode of the special second half production is set in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more strongly that the special symbol variations are executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation.
Furthermore, in this control example, when the special second half production is executed in the production mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone (see FIG. 9(b)), the acquired special figure 2 reservation number , the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the second half period is varied. Although detailed description is omitted, when the special variation effect is executed, if neither the special figure 2 reserved ball nor the special figure 1 reserved ball is secured, the second shown in FIG. Without executing the temporary stop display of the 3 patterns, the fluctuation performance (variation performance without temporarily stopping and displaying the 3rd pattern even once) is executed using the entire fluctuation period of the 2nd special pattern fluctuation. It is configured as follows. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation production is executed only in the state where the number of special symbols reserved is secured, so it is more likely that multiple special symbol variations are executed during one second special symbol variation. can make you think strongly.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a production mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol executed during the second half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have already been acquired. It is configured so that Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five times or more, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot. As described above, in this control example, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and when it is stopped. hard. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed to make the user think that the temporary stop display has been performed five times or more, or part of the temporary stop display is mistaken as the stop display, and the temporary stop display is actually performed five times or more. In spite of this, it is possible to make the player think that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached 5 times, and to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the effect result.
In addition, other configurations may be used as the effect mode of the special variation effect, for example, in order to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol variation. The number of temporary stop display times may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol variation. At least a part of the effect mode of the special variable effect (for example, the color of the background, the effect of the third pattern, etc.) may be changed stepwise according to the number of times. Further, it is also possible to display a display mode indicating the number of times the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed again (for example, the first time, the second time) at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third symbol.
As shown in FIG. 10, when the special variation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured, the characters "chance zone end" are displayed as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended. Effect that the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds and executed in the main display area Dm becomes the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol varies in the horizontal direction). Since the mode is executed as a special second half performance, after making the player think that the chance zone has ended, the performance result of the special variation performance, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stop-displayed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.
Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the above-described special variation effect is executed in part of the second special symbol variation in the normal state, and other than that, the second special symbol variation is performed once. On the other hand, it is configured so that one variation performance is executed. Therefore, when a plurality of (maximum 4) special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired in the normal figure per game, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special variation effect for a long unnecessarily long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, and FIG. 11(b) is the ending of the probability variable jackpot game. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half period of the period, and FIG. 11C is a display mode displayed in the second half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game. FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example, and FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game. .
In this control example, if the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won during the normal state is a jackpot game (variable probability jackpot game) in which the variable probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is likely to be set, the player The jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the probability variable state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is difficult to set. Specifically, in the probability variable jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds, and in the normal jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 15 seconds. By configuring in this way, during the ending period (before the probability change state is set), the game content changes greatly through the jackpot game (shifting from the normal state to the probability change state) to the player. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the content of the game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game can be notified to the player using a long ending period.
Further, in this control example, as described above, even when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, the winning ball of the variable winning device 65 must flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 5). It is configured so that the probability change state is not set. Therefore, when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability variable big winning game, the probability variable state is not set after the probability variable big winning game ends, and the time is reduced like the normal big winning game. State (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set.
In this case, if the notification effect indicating that the probability variable state is set during the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game is executed, the content of the effect of the notification effect and the actually set game state will be different, and the player will not be notified. There was a problem of giving dissatisfaction. Furthermore, when switching the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period (17 seconds) of the probability variable jackpot game to the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period (15 seconds) of the normal jackpot game, There is a problem that the length of the actual ending period and the length of the performance period of the notification performance are different, and the notification performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed.

Therefore, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and furthermore, the length of the second half period is configured to be a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. there is Then, the performance mode of the notification performance to be executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, when the normal jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) as the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. The characters "chance mode 100 times" are displayed (see Fig. 11 (a)), and after that, for the second half period (7 seconds), if the jackpot is won during the time saving state (second special symbol lottery ), a notification effect (see FIG. 11 (c)) is executed in which the characters "Hit and Super Chance GET in Chance Mode" are displayed as a game guidance mode to indicate that the variable probability state is likely to be set. It is configured as follows.
On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period, "super chance mode 100" suggesting that the probability variable state is set for the first half period (10 seconds) (see FIG. 11(b)), and after that, in the latter half period (7 seconds), as a mode of calling attention that is not directly related to the content of the game, "Please be careful not to forget to remove your card." is configured to execute a notification effect (see FIG. 11(d)) in which characters are displayed.
In this control example, the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the above-described jackpot ending period is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. As a result, during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, there is no need to execute the process for determining the performance mode of the notification performance every time, so the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game is reduced. can be made

Here, the case where the ball could not flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game will be described even though the variable probability jackpot game is executed. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. A process of switching to the notification effect (see FIG. 11(c)) executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period of the game is executed.
More specifically, the display mode shown in FIG. 11A includes a display layer (display layer) in which the characters "super" are displayed and a display layer (display layer) in which the characters "chance mode 100 times" are displayed. The display layer (display layer) is different from the display layer), and the characters "super" are displayed based on the determination result of whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during the jackpot game (display layer) ) can be switched between the presence and absence of a display instruction. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not the ball can be made to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game by a simple control process. Furthermore, since the performance mode is switched during the period set with the same length as the second half period of the jackpot ending period, the performance mode of the notification performance can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.
In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period varies depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types without being limited to this. In addition, in this control example, the second half period of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all the jackpot types. The length may be the same for each type. Furthermore, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. Thus, the jackpot type B and the jackpot type C may be configured so that the second half period of the jackpot has the same length.
In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set ending periods of different lengths according to the type of jackpot that has been won. It may be configured to have different thicknesses.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14, the details of the effects executed during the chance mode will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that the high-probability state of normal symbols is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 50 times after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, although detailed description will be given later, it is possible to set the case where the V notification effect is executed to notify that the ball in the jackpot game has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and the case where the V notification effect is not executed. It consists of
Then, when the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, the player is notified that the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. When the effect mode (special chance mode) is set and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, or the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, but the V notification effect is not executed, the effect mode ( chance mode) is set.
When the chance mode is set as the production mode, the characters "in chance mode" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and the normal pattern high probability state is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. A remaining period notification mode for indicating the period until the end is displayed (see FIG. 12(a)). The example shown in FIG. 12(a) shows a state in which the 20th special symbol variation is executed after the chance mode is set. The characters "80 times" are displayed to indicate that the chance mode will end if executed.
In this way, when the chance mode is set as the effect mode, from various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state. can be made difficult for the player to comprehend, the game can be played while expecting the current game state to be a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player.

In addition, only when the V notification performance is not executed during the jackpot game, even if the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the chance mode can be set as the performance mode, so that the jackpot game is performed. In spite of the notification that the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, that is, that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished, the chance mode is set after the jackpot game is finished, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person is confused. In addition, when a V notification effect for notifying that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed during the jackpot game, the effect for indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Since the super chance mode is set as the mode, the player can play the game with peace of mind.
In this control example, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game but the V notification effect is not executed, the chance mode is selected as the effect mode after the jackpot game ends. Although it is configured to be set, it is not limited to this, and in some cases when the V notification effect is not executed even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. , super chance mode may be set. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) to let the ball pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game this time), during the jackpot game this time Determination of whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and determination of whether the V notification effect has been executed are performed, and the result of determination that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the V notification effect In the determination result that is not executed and part of the case obtained (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery), the probability variable state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game 11(b) and 11(d)), and the super chance mode may be set as the effect mode after the jackpot game ends.
By configuring in this way, even if the V notification effect is not executed during the big win game, the possibility of setting the super chance mode can be left, so that the player can continue to play until the big win game ends. can be made to play a game with a sense of anticipation.
As described above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state is set as the game state, and the variable probability state is set. and will occur. Then, regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period of the period during which the high-probability state of the normal symbol continues is displayed. In other words, as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game, as an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a first advantageous game state (probability variable state) and a second advantageous game state (time reduction state). can be set, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game), and the second advantageous gaming state is A second period longer than the above-described first period (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game) is configured to continue, and a first advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game. After that, when the first period elapses, the second advantageous gaming state is set until the second period elapses, and the normal state is set when the second period elapses. In the configured game machine, regardless of whether or not the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to execute remaining period notification for indicating the remaining period of the period (second period) until the end of the advantageous game state. It consists of

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state continues. Furthermore, in this control example, in the state where the remaining period of the second period (the remaining period of the chance mode) is set, to suggest to the player whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state The game state suggesting effect is configured to be executable using the notification mode (display mode) of the remaining period notification.
Here, with reference to FIG. 12(b), the effect content of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode will be described. FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the chance mode is set in a state where the variable probability state is set and the predetermined notification condition is established, the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed. A variable game state suggestion effect (in FIG. 12(b), displayed in a white display mode) is executed. Then, in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Expectation of big win UP" is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player is predicted which game state is set among the advantageous game states while informing the player of the period until the end of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. It can provide fun to let you. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as the display mode shown in FIG. If the special figure 2 reserved ball contains information to win the jackpot, and within the period in which the probability variable state can be set in the chance mode (after the jackpot game ends, until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times) (within the period).
By configuring in this way, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that the variable probability state is set, Since the information about winning the jackpot) can be displayed using the same display mode, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, even if the time saving state is actually set, it is possible to display the display mode that is likely to be displayed when the variable probability state is set based on the jackpot winning, so it is higher than the design value. It is possible to make the player think that the variable probability state is set at a rate, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.
In addition, it may be configured to execute the production during the chance mode using a technical concept different from the technical concept of this control example described above. , jackpot winning, or if the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball contains information to win a jackpot, a suggestion production for suggesting that the currently set gaming state is a time-saving state (for example, The display mode of the remaining period notification may be configured to display in a display mode different from that in FIGS. As a result, in the advantageous game state, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a jackpot during the time saving state which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the variable probability state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, since the rate at which the variable probability state is set as the game history can be made to appear lower than the actual rate, the game can be played while making the player expect that the variable probability state will be set in the next big winning game.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 12A and 12B, in the first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the period (remaining period) during which the chance mode continues is variable. A game that suggests the currently set game state to the player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode by constructing the game state so as to suggest the currently set game state to the player. Although it is configured so that the state suggesting effect can be easily grasped, the game state suggesting effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode, for example, when the variable probability state is set The first display mode (e.g., "chance" character) that is easier to display than when the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, than when the variable probability state is set The second display mode (for example, the characters "pinch") that are likely to be displayed may be configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 The game state suggesting effect may be executed by varying the display mode of the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) to be displayed.
In addition, in the first control example, both the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured to end when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number of times. As shown in 12 (a), (b), display of remaining period information to inform the remaining period that the chance mode continues (remaining period in which the high probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the normal symbol can continue) The pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to suggest the current game state by using the mode, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the high-probability state of the special symbols continues until the next big win game is executed. , the configuration of the chance mode described above may be used. In this case, as the duration of the chance mode, if the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the remaining period until the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (time saving The period until the state ends) is configured to be notified by the remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has passed, if the working hours reduction state is set, the normal state Execution of the production notifying that it has shifted, and when the variable probability state is set, the display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit game is executed, that is, variable probability It is possible to execute an effect in which characters of "congratulations" are displayed as a display mode indicating that the remaining period in which the state continues is the period until the next big win, and during the period in which the chance mode is set, predetermined notification conditions are set. It may be configured to display the characters "Congratulations" when the is established.
In other words, the remaining period of the chance mode exists instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 12(a)) that is updated at any time corresponding to the remaining period of the chance mode that is updated each time the special symbol lottery is executed. A display mode that only indicates that the game is running, that is, like the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. Alternatively, by varying the display mode (for example, changing the display color) in correspondence with the length of the remaining period of the chance mode, the remaining period that can roughly inform the length of the remaining period of the chance mode A notification mode may be used. Further, a plurality of remaining period information modes are configured to be displayable, and by combining the display modes of the displayed plurality of remaining period information modes, the player can grasp the length of the remaining period of the chance mode. You can
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the details of the effect executed when the player operates the operating means during the chance mode will be described. In this example of control, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 4), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the details of the operation and the timing of the operation. ing. Although detailed description is omitted, an operation effect of changing the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and a variation effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 As a part of the above, guidance information is provided for the player to operate the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the performance mode is different from when the player does not operate the frame button 22. and an operation effect for enlivening the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are executed. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game other than the action of shooting the ball, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Here, among the operation effects described above, contents of various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, but in this control example, when the advantageous gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) is set, according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the advantageous gaming state is set It is configured so that different fluctuation times can be selected at each time. Specifically, the first period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) is likely to be selected during the period in which the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1st to 20th" after the advantageous gaming state is set. , the period of "21st to 49th time" is the second period in which a longer variation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set than the first period, and only the "50th time" has a specific variation time (for example, , 20 seconds) is set, and the period of "51st time to 100th time" is set to be the third period in which the same fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) as the second period is likely to be set. It consists of
In other words, during the predetermined period (first period) after the chance mode is set, that is, during the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol fluctuation is likely to be executed in a short fluctuation time. When winning, it is possible to facilitate execution of a plurality of jackpot games at short intervals. As a result, the next big winning game may have been executed as part of the previous big winning game. It is possible to make the player think that, and the interest of the game can be improved.
And, in the second period and the third period described above, the special symbol variation with a shorter variation time is more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and the special symbol variation with a longer variation time than the first period is executed. It is designed to be easy. As a result, in the chance mode, it is possible to secure a period for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting whether the game state currently set during one special pattern variation is a time-saving state or a probability variable state. can. In addition, in a specific period (50th special symbol variation after the advantageous gaming state is set), a special symbol variation of a specific variation time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a probability variation state is set for the player. It is constructed such that a suggestive effect for 20 seconds is executed to suggest whether or not the player is in the state of being (is) in the state.
In this way, by making it possible to select a different variation time according to the number of executions of special symbol variation, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each number of variations using an appropriate period.

FIG. 13(a) shows a state in which the chance mode is set as the production mode, and a normal state is set internally, and is displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). FIG. 13(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display content, and FIG. 13(b) schematically shows an effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display effect displayed in FIG. 13(a). It is a schematic diagram shown. In this control example, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, and the player presses (operates) the frame button 22. By doing so, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are switched and displayed alternately.
As shown in FIG. 13A, when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a frame button 22 is displayed at the lower right side of the main display area Dm in a display mode ( In the drawing, an arrow pointing in the button pressing direction) is displayed, and in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, characters "sea mode" are displayed to indicate that the sea mode is currently set. there is When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the display is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode" as shown in FIG. 13(b).
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the contents of the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed variation period (the period from when the time saving state and probability variation state are set until the 20th special symbol variation ends), the background image is not switched and displayed ( difficult). In other words, if the background image is switched and displayed during the high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation, it will be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display mode changes frequently and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, the background image is configured not to be switched (difficult to display). However, if all the player's operations on the frame buttons 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's desire to play is lowered.
Therefore, in this control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, a different effect is executed instead of switching display of the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the characters "special mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period. The player is notified that During this "special mode", regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a special symbol variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the variation effect of the third symbol is also a variation effect exclusively for the "special mode". be done. Also during the "special mode", the icon HR10 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, it is displayed in the small display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. 14(b). A game state suggesting effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining period information is varied.

In this way, even if the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), by varying the effect content of the operation effect to be executed depending on the operation timing, various effects can be given to the player. The game can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 at appropriate timing. Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 13(a) or FIG. 14(a), the guidance display (icon HR10) for guiding the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 is the same. When the player performs the same operation (depression of the frame button 22), the contents of the operation effect to be executed are varied depending on the operation timing. Therefore, until the player actually operates (presses) the frame button 22, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what kind of operation effect is to be executed, so that the player can operate the frame button 22 more willingly. can.
Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, in this control example, a plurality of operation effects can be executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period. is selected in accordance with the set game state. In other words, it is possible to predict whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state depending on the appearance ratio of each operation effect executed during the high speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is repeatedly executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
Further, in this control example, the switching display of the background image is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied even during the high-speed fluctuation period. Specifically, if the second special symbol reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved ball) acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period contains information to win a jackpot, a special figure containing information to win a jackpot The special pattern variation corresponding to the 2 reserved balls and the special pattern variation executed before the special pattern variation of the jackpot (which was acquired before the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information to win the jackpot) A special pattern variation corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball) and a special variation performance using the variation time can be executed, and the player can execute the special variation performance in a state where the conditions for executing the special variation performance are satisfied. When the frame button 22 is pressed, the background image is switched from the currently displayed background image (for example, sea mode) to a dedicated special background image (for example, space mode). That is, when the switching display of the background image is executed based on the fact that the player presses the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases, and the player is actively encouraged to win. can be made to press the frame button 22 .
In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image can be switched and displayed by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22 . This special operation (long press) is determined to have been performed when the player continuously presses the frame button 22 for two seconds. The period until it is determined that the Therefore, since it is an operation that is difficult to perform frequently compared to the normal operation (pressing), even if the background image switching display is configured to be executable, frequent switching display of the background image is suppressed. be able to. In this control example, a long-pressing operation is used as a special operation in which the operation time is longer than that of the normal operation. , and a special operation performed by operating a plurality of operation units in a predetermined order may be defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the contents of the effect executed during the "super chance mode" in which the player is informed that the variable probability state is set will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents when the first special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode", and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the production|presentation when the 2nd special design variation is performed in "chance mode."
In this control example, when the variable probability state (high-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable state is set with a high probability (the probability variable jackpot game in which the ball can be easily flowed down to a specific gate during the jackpot game is always executed. ). Then, the variable probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).
In other words, once the variable probability state is set, the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/50) before the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). ), it is configured so that the variable state can be looped with a high probability. Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly win the big win in the second special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, even in the state where the variable probability state is set, for example, the variable probability big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and immediately after the big win game is completed and the variable probability state is set, that is, , In the state in which the probability variable state is set, the special figure 2 reserved ball is not obtained and the special figure 1 reserved ball is obtained, the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, as described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, It is constructed such that the variable probability jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. In other words, even if the variable probability state is set, there is a case where the variable probability state cannot be looped when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery.

In this way, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, if the player early determines that the jackpot won is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the jackpot game is usually executed. , Since there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases, in this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state, the third symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (Identification information with an odd number) and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot are in a ready-to-win state at the same time. It is designed to be easy. More specifically, when the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the above-described double reach effect is always executed (Fig. 15(a)). reference).
As a result, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state when the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state wins the normal jackpot. The performance can be prevented from being executed, and the player's prediction of winning a normal jackpot during the variation period of the special symbols can be suppressed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 15(a), in this control example, during the "super chance mode", the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same way as during the above-described "chance mode". On the other hand, it is configured to make it difficult to grasp the number of special figures pending. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, characters of "under super chance mode" are displayed as a display mode for informing the player that the current state is in the variable probability state.
Here, during the super chance mode, the double reach shown in FIG. Identification information with a number of 2) and double reach performance, which is a variation performance that is in a ready-to-win state at the same time) are executed, the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation Since there is a risk that the player may easily grasp this, in this control example, even in the variation performance executed in correspondence with the second special symbol variation, the double reach performance shown in FIG. 15(a) can be executed. It consists of In other words, the double reach performance using the third pattern corresponding to the normal win can be executed in the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed when the big win is won. ing.

By configuring in this way, even if the double reach production shown in FIG. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily discriminate.
Furthermore, in this control example, when the double ready-to-win effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round is selected. As shown in FIG. 15(b), the third pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) It is configured so that the promotion performance) is executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the probability variable big winning game will always be executed when the special symbol lottery being executed has won the big winning. In addition, even when the double reach performance is executed as the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player is expected to be promoted to the probability variable double reach halfway through the game. can be done.
In addition, in this control example, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach production being executed to the probability variable double reach production, when the fluctuation mode of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (one round has passed) Although the variable condition to be established is set, it is not limited to this. A variable condition may be set that is established when the symbol) passes through the reach effective line, or is established when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player is a specific operation result. It may be configured to set a variable condition.

In addition, in this control example, when the variable condition is established, the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state is configured to be variable. It may be configured to increase the number of patterns. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 15(a), blank symbols (represented by triangle marks in the figure) are erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed in order from the left as the upper symbol row Z1. and "1, 2, 3" are displayed in order from the left as the lower symbol row Z3 to execute a triple ready-to-win effect. Even if it is configured in this way, the triple reach production can increase the number of reach of the third symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot rather than the double reach production, so the probability variable jackpot in this special symbol lottery. It is possible to visually notify the player that there is a high possibility of winning the prize.
In addition, the technical concept described above may be applied to a variable effect that is executed in the normal state, for example, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the ready-to-win state. When the variable condition is established during the normal single reach production, the type of the third pattern that is in the reach state may be switched to the type of the third pattern that corresponds to the probability variable jackpot, or the third pattern that is in the reach state may be configured to increase the number of As a result, the player can play the game while expecting a more advantageous performance result to be provided until the variable performance ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this control example and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of production when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation production is executed is set as the variation production of the third symbol, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the effect when the variation pattern in which the reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol.
A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 26, but in this control example, as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern obtained by adding up the basic time and the addition time is used. stipulated. A period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common variation pattern, and a period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific variation pattern.

In other words, in this control example, as the effect mode of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol is displayed after the ready-to-win state is displayed. The period until the stop display is made different according to the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state. Then, the third pattern corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third pattern in the ready-to-win state. By configuring in this way, the third symbol variation performance (the third symbol variation performance performed corresponding to the basic time) executed during a predetermined period after the third symbol starts to fluctuate is shared. can be made
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(a), in the case of the non-reach variation production, since the addition time is not set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the third symbol The upper symbol row Z1 is stop-displayed at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the variable performance (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed), and after 1 second, the lower symbol row Z3 stops on the effective line so as not to cause a ready-to-reach state. 2 seconds later, the medium symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a stopped display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost. After that, after a stop display period (determined time) of one second, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is determined and displayed.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the reach variation effect is executed, the basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common variation pattern for 30 seconds, until 5 seconds have passed since the reach state is set. In other words, the effect mode from when the ready-to-win state is reached to when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one turn is set as the common variation pattern. After that, an effect mode (ready-to-win pattern, stop pattern) is set according to the added time.
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 17(a) shows the normal jackpot, FIG. 17(b) shows the flow of the effect during the ending period for the variable probability jackpot, and FIG. It shows the flow when it does not flow down the specific area (V gate).

As shown in FIG. 17, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot, and the ED period is set to 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the variable probability jackpot. Configure. And, it is configured such that the ending effect divided into the first half period and the second half period is executed (see FIG. 11).
In this control example, the effect mode in the ending period is set at the start timing of the jackpot game, and whether or not the V prize is won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined during the ending period ( ED period) is determined at the start timing, and the ending display mode is switched based on the determination result.
First, with reference to FIG. 17(a), the content of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the normal jackpot game is executed will be described. In this control example, in order to suppress the increase in the processing load during the jackpot game due to the complexity of the various processes executed during the jackpot game, a round game (a prize ball can be obtained) is played during the jackpot game. game) is executed (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game), the production mode of the production (ending display production) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined. It consists of
To indicate to a player that when a normal jackpot game is executed, a "chance mode" is set (a time saving state is set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. Set the display mode of the ending effect (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(c)). In the normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a preset ending effect is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(b) and FIG. 17(c), the effect contents during the ending period of the jackpot game when the probability variable jackpot game is executed will be described. When the probability variable jackpot game is executed, whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the jackpot game is determined by the end of the opening period of the jackpot game, and the performance mode of the ending performance is based on the determination result. to decide. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, the player is allowed to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v. and a V passage notification that notifies the player that the ball has actually passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. When it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed, as the ending effect, a display mode (Fig. 11 (b), (d)) is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V notification effect is not to be executed, the display mode (the display mode in FIG. 11(b)) for showing the player that the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game as the ending effect. , and a display mode in which the display of "super" is deleted, and a display mode (see FIG. 11(c)) is set.
When executing the V notification effect, the comment "Aim for V" and the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable prize winning device 65 are displayed in accordance with the start of the V round (first round) game. Guidance information is executed in which a schematic diagram shown in a circle is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the V passage notification is executed in which the comment "V acquired!" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) despite the guidance notification being executed, the specific area (V gate) 65v is sent to the player. Emphasized guidance information is executed to guide the ball passing to V gate 65v with more emphasis. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the end of the V-round game, the above-described V passage notification is executed, and the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v. When the round game ends, the characters "I'm sorry I didn't win V!" are displayed.
After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, it is determined whether or not to replace the display mode of the preset ending effect based on the actual game result of the V-round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed at the start of the jackpot game, the display mode indicating that the "super chance mode" is set as the ending effect (Fig. 11(b), ( d) reference) is set in advance, so when the ball is passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the ending effect is executed without switching the display mode of the ending effect. . On the other hand, if it is not possible to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, so the display mode of the ending effect is changed to "chance Execute a process (replacement process) to switch to a display mode to indicate that the "mode" is set, and delete the display of "super" from the display mode after replacement (the display mode of FIG. 11(b) The ending effect is executed in the display mode shown in FIG. 11(c)).
Further, when the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game as in the normal jackpot game, and from the various effect displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 , a jackpot game is executed in which it is not possible to grasp that the V round game is being executed and that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. As a result, it is possible to provide a state in which the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game although the variable probability state is actually set.

Furthermore, if the "chance mode" is set while the variable probability state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the variable probability jackpot game), so the variable probability state is set by the effect during the jackpot game. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp in advance what will be done. In addition, in this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed, the jackpot game ends even though the variable probability state is actually set. Although the "chance mode" is configured to be set later, it is not limited to this. However, it is configured so that the V passage notification is not executed at a predetermined rate, and when the V passage notification is not executed in spite of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, after the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that a "chance mode" is set. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the V notification effect can be executed even when the normal jackpot game is executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to cause an event in which the V passage notification is not executed despite the execution of the V notification performance, so that after the jackpot game in which the V notification performance is executed It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the setting of the "chance mode".
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first specific period (period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 100 times) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is predetermined after the end of the jackpot game is set. be done. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the second specific period in which the high probability state of the special pattern is predetermined after the jackpot game is completed (special pattern variation is executed 50 times) is set). Then, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), "chance mode" is set as the production mode (Fig. 18 (b )reference). Also, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), Depending on), the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game is different, and as shown in FIG. When notified, that is, when the display mode (see FIG. 11(b)) of entering the "super chance mode" is displayed as the ending effect, the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode (see FIG. 18(a) ) display a), during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), when it is not notified that the variable probability state is set, that is, the display mode of entering “chance mode” as the ending effect (Fig. 11 (a)) is displayed, a "chance mode" is performed as the effect mode (see display b in FIG. 18(a)).
As shown in the display a of FIG. 18(a), when the "super chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, the "super chance mode" continues until the variable probability state ends, and the game state changes to the variable probability state. When shifting from to the time saving state, the display is switched to "chance mode". In this case, while the "super chance mode" is set, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the game state most advantageous to the player continues. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 15(a), after the variable probability state ends, even if it is configured to execute a preliminary notification effect for notifying the player in advance that the time saving state is set 50 times. Well, for example, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probability changing state displayed in the small display area Ds2 (in FIG. 15 (a), it is displayed as white "49 times") is less than or equal to a predetermined period (for example, " 10 times or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time saving state to be set continues is a display mode different from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the variable probability state (for example, "50 times" is displayed without black). As a result, even after the variable probability state ends, it is possible to notify the player in advance that a game state (time saving state) more advantageous than the normal state is set.

Further, when the "super chance mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the variable probability state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time saving state are displayed, Each time the special symbol variation is executed, each remaining period mode may be configured to be subtracted by 1, and after the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probability variation state and the probability variation state is completed The remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the time saving state to be set is displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the definite variable state is subtracted first, and the remaining period of the definite variable state becomes 0, It may be configured such that when the state is shifted to the time saving state, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time saving state is subtracted. Even in the case of such a configuration, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set in advance for the player who is playing the game during the variable probability state after the variable probability state ends. can be notified to
Next, the presentation during the chance mode will be described with reference to the display b in FIG. 18(a) and FIG. 18(b). In this control example, a chance mode is set as an effect mode when part of the case where the variable probability state is set and when the time saving state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 12, the game state suggesting effect for changing the notification mode of the remaining period notification is executed. The game state suggesting effect is set so that the chance mode during the variable probability state has a higher appearance rate than the chance mode during the time saving state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the contents of the operation effects during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, the effect mode of the operation effect executed during the chance mode (the effect executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) is set to ), the operation timing, the operation method, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19(a), during the chance mode when the time saving state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, the special symbol variation is 20 During the high-speed fluctuation period until the time is executed, whether or not the variable effect being executed is in a ready-to-win state, "ready-to-reach suggestion" that suggests during the third symbol change, or the currently set game state It is configured to be able to execute the operation effect of suggesting "state suggestion", and after that (after the 21st special symbol change), it is configured to be able to execute the operation effect of "background mode transition" to shift the background mode. there is In addition, as an operation method, when a long press "long press" of the button is executed, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation production of "background mode transition" to transition the background mode can be executed, and during the period (during the second period) when the number of special symbol fluctuations is from 21 to 50 times, it is possible to execute the operation effect of "state suggestion" that suggests the currently set game state. After that (after the 51st special symbol change), the game state that was set in the past (when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) was set. ” is configured to be executable.
Also, as shown in FIG. 19(b), during the chance mode when the variable probability state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, the special symbol variation is executed 20 times. During the high-speed fluctuation period up to, whether or not the variable effect being executed will be in a ready-to-win state, "reach suggestion" to suggest during the third symbol change, "state suggestion" to suggest the currently set game state ”, Alternatively, the operation effect of “background mode transition” for transitioning the background mode is configured to be executable, and during the period (during the second period) from 21 times to 50 times of special symbol fluctuations, “background mode transition , or "suggestion of state" can be executed, and after that (after the 51st special symbol variation), the operation production of "transition to background mode" can be executed. In addition, as an operation method, when a long button press "long press" is executed, regardless of the number of special symbol fluctuations, the operation effect of "background mode transition" to transition the background mode is configured to be executable. .

As described above, in this control example, when the time saving state is set, or in a part of the case where the variable probability state is set, it is configured to be able to set the "chance mode" as the production mode, The duration of the chance mode (100 times of time reduction) is divided into a plurality of periods according to the number of times of special pattern fluctuations executed during the chance mode, and the player operates for each set game state and period. It is configured such that the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the means (frame button 22) is operated is made different. As a result, when the chance mode is set, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation effect executed by the operation effect. It is possible to execute a game for intentionally operating the operating means.
As described above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if the frame button 22 is "normally pressed", the "background mode transition" is performed. Although the operation effect is configured to be less likely to be executed than other periods, the high-speed fluctuation period (period in which it is difficult to shift to the background mode) may be set at other timings, for example, after the jackpot game ends. The period until the end of one special symbol variation to be executed is defined as the normal time-saving variation period, and from the execution of the second special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the 20th special symbol variation. may be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.
By configuring in this way, for example, during the first special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, as a notice mode for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set, "The background mode cannot be changed from the next fluctuation." By displaying the comment "Choose your desired background now!" Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game cannot be executed in the desired background mode and the player's desire to play is lowered. Furthermore, as a guide mode for explaining the game content of the "chance mode" to the player using one special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, "the chance mode may be in a variable state. Don't give up!" and the comment "If the display mode of the remaining count changes, chance!" may be displayed together.
In addition, as in the first control example, when the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special symbol fluctuation after the end of the big win, the game period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set. During a period (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), the background mode in the "chance mode" can be selected, and when the "chance mode" is set, during a predetermined period (during the high-speed fluctuation period), It is sufficient to notify the player that the background mode cannot be changed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.
In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this control example), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed at a predetermined value. It is configured to execute a winning game (ordinary figure winning game) that is in an operating state (open state) only for a time.
The time it takes for the second symbol to fluctuate (normal pattern fluctuation time) varies depending on the set probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state), and the low probability state of the normal pattern ( Normal state) is set, 10 seconds is set as the normal pattern fluctuation time, and 3 seconds is set as the normal pattern fluctuation time when the high probability state of the normal pattern (variable state, time saving state) is set. configured to be As a result, it is possible to largely deviate the frequency at which the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal symbol low probability state and the normal pattern per game per frequency in the normal symbol high probability state. In other words, the high probability state of the normal pattern can increase the number of normal pattern lotteries (normal pattern lottery) that can be executed per unit time by shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time compared to the low probability state of the normal pattern. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to hit and win in the normal drawing lottery that is executed. Therefore, while making it difficult to execute the normal pattern winning game when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is made easy to execute the normal pattern winning game when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. can be done.
In addition, in this control example, the normal pattern high probability state is more advantageous than the normal pattern low probability state for the set general pattern fluctuation time and the winning probability. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and only one of them may be configured to be advantageous to the player. For example, irrespective of the probability state of normal symbols, the normal pattern fluctuation time of the same time (for example, 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. As a result, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute the game per normal pattern during the low probability state of the normal pattern (during the normal state), the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal pattern (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer than during the time saving state. In a pachinko machine 10 configured to be longer in a normal state, a normal pattern winning game is executed from a normal state (ordinary pattern low probability state) in which the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game) is difficult to be executed. When the game state shifts to an easy time-saving state (high-probability state of normal patterns), a long-time normal pattern fluctuation executed during the normal state (normal pattern per game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) ) is shifted to the time saving state during execution, and the period in which the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state is not executed is set for a long time despite the fact that the time saving state is set. .

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has various devices arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the ball is displayed in the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Even if a game (left-handed game) in which the ball is made to flow down is executed, and a game (right-handed game) in which the ball is made to flow down to the right region is executed, there is no difference in the game value obtained by the player (it is difficult to occur). A game board 13 is configured. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to the vertical line of the central portion of the game board 13, and the ball enters the lower area of the variable display unit 80. A first ball entrance 64 that can be a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, and a first ball entrance 64 that is provided at a lower position of the first ball entrance 64 and can be a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol by entering the ball. 2 ball entrance 640, an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a normal pattern winning game executed when winning in a normal symbol lottery, and its second entrance. A variable winning device 65 is provided below the ball opening 640 and is opened in a big win game executed when a special symbol lottery wins a big win.
A ball shot in a left-handed game flows down the left side area and passes through a through gate 67 provided in the left side area at a rate of 1/2. The ball also flows down toward the first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area by a nail planted in the game board 13. - 特許庁Here, the ball that has flowed down from between the nails enters two general ball entrances 63 . In this control example, about 1/50 of the balls flowing down the left side region enter either of the two general ball entrances 63, and the ball enters the general ball entrance 63. It is configured such that 10 prize balls (privileges) are awarded when the ball is entered.
The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter at a rate of one ball out of fifteen balls, and when a ball enters, four balls are paid out as prize balls. It consists of In the second ball entrance 640, when the electric accessory 640a is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), the ball hardly enters, and when the electric accessory 640a is open ( In the state shown in black in FIG. 2), a ball is launched in a left-handed game and is configured so that one ball enters at a rate of about two balls that flow down the left side area. It is constructed such that one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball is entered. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is configured so that almost no balls enter the ball when the jackpot game is not executed, and the balls enter at a ratio of about two balls to three balls during the jackpot game. It is constructed such that 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the game.
Here, the variable winning device 65 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is variable ball entry means that is opened in a big winning game executed when a special symbol lottery wins a big win, and the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 during the big winning game is variable. By passing through a specific area (V gate) provided in the internal area of the winning device 65, a high probability state of special symbols can be set after the big winning game is over.

In addition, according to the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) in which the ball winning the variable prize winning device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate) and a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass. In this control example, a normal game is performed during a jackpot game in which a ball that has won a prize in the variable prize winning device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate), that is, a jackpot game. For example, a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to a specific area (V gate) is a variable jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is difficult to pass through the specific gate. A jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass a ball through a specific area (V gate) even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game will be referred to as a jackpot (game).
In addition, as described above, even if the probability variable jackpot game is executed, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, a high probability of special symbols after the jackpot game ends. The state (probability change state) is not set. That is, in this control example, at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is not determined. Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the round game (V round game) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) is configured to run. Therefore, the game state set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until the V-round game ends. In this way, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the game result during the jackpot game, so that the player can enjoy various benefits (prize balls, high probability state of special symbols) in the jackpot game. can be played in order to obtain, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
On the other hand, when the above-described configuration is used, the effect mode of the notification effect (for example, the effect mode of the jackpot ending period) for informing the player of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (for example, the jackpot (At the start of the game), it is necessary to set the performance mode of the notification performance during the jackpot game in which the control processing related to ball delivery and the control processing related to display are executed densely. There is a problem that control processing becomes complicated.
On the other hand, in this control example, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, in advance (at the start of the jackpot game), an effect mode indicating that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set as the performance mode of the notification effect (at the start of the jackpot game). Determining whether or not to switch the performance mode of the notification performance based on the result of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) immediately before the notification performance is set and executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period). is executed, and if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), a notification effect of a preset effect mode is executed, and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) It is configured so as to switch the effect mode of the notification effect only in the case. In this way, when a normal game is played during a big win game, the game state that is likely to be set after the end of the big win game is assumed, and the performance mode of the notification mode is set in advance, and an unexpected game state is set. By switching the performance mode of the notification mode only when it is determined, the frequency of execution of the control processing for setting the performance mode of the notification performance during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the probability variable jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is set with a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. It is configured so that Thus, it is possible to inform the player that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set (during the big winning game). On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.
Thus, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game. In addition, simply executing the process of switching the effect mode of the jackpot ending period to the effect mode executed during the ending period of the normal winning game will cause an uncomfortable notification effect during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. I had a problem with it running. In addition, if a dedicated effect mode is prepared in advance that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) in the probability variable jackpot game, image data (effect data) for that effect mode will be created. ) has to be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.
On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type (variable jackpot, normal jackpot). However, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is changed to the latter half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game. It is configured to switch to the production mode set by pressing. As a result, there is no need to provide a dedicated performance mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game, and the player is not given a sense of incongruity. A notification effect can be executed.
In addition, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. is not allowed to flow down to a specific area (V gate). By executing the notification performance during the round period, the notification performance may be executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period, or during a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, The round performance executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed, and then the notification performance is executed, whereby the notification performance for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period is executed. Also good.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically. It may be configured so that there is no large deviation between the case of performing a left-handed game and the case of performing a right-handed game. The number of ball entry holes 63 is made smaller than the number of ball entry holes 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first ball entry hole 64 is higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. A right-handed game is more difficult to obtain a prize ball than a right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and a right-handed game is easier to obtain a prize ball than a left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game in any game method. It is possible to make the right-handed game more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game in the game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 (the game in the time-saving state or the variable probability state). .
Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled in both the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 and the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 of the area is configured so that 1/2 of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can pass through. Also, the through gate 67 in the right area is configured so that 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area of the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, a variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result is out, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for variable display.
The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .
In addition, as in this control example, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 due to the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67 .

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. Below the variable display device unit 80 (below the electric accessory 640a), a ball that is launched in a left-handed game and flows down the left area and a ball that is launched in a right-handed game and flows down the right area can win. A variable winning device 65 having an opening width of about 50 mm is provided. In this way, by providing the variable winning device 65 having a wide opening width, the ball flowing down the left side of the electric accessory 640a in the left-handed game and the ball flowing down the right side of the electric accessory 640a in the right-handed game are also variable. A winning device 65 can be made to win a prize.
Here, a specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of the winning ball in the variable winning device 65. is. As shown in FIG. 5(a), inside the variable winning device 65, a guide member 65d is provided. configured to flow down to
Specifically, the ball that flows down the left area and enters the specific winning hole 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d, and flows down the first opening 65a1. guided to. In addition, the ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2. be done.
Below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, ball detection sensors (65s1, 65s2) for detecting winning balls in the variable winning device 65 are provided. When balls are detected, payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this way, the opening (first opening 65a1) through which the ball that has flowed down the left area and won the variable prize winning device 65 can pass, and the ball that has flowed down the right side and won the variable prize winning device 65 can pass through. By providing openings (second openings 65b1) to obtain, and providing ball detection sensors for each opening, even if the player performs a left-handed game during a jackpot game, a right-handed game can be performed. Also, a game with no difference can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5(b), the flow of the ball winning the specific winning hole 65a will be described. As shown in FIG. 5B, the ball passing through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1 and flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e. , the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.
A discharge port 65h1 is provided at the downstream end of the third flow path 65e3. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which balls that enter the discharge port 65h1 flow down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that have entered the discharge port 65h1.
A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and a discharge port 65h2 into which a ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v enters is provided at the downstream end. A detection sensor for detecting a passing ball is provided in the specific area (V gate), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a predetermined period of time during the jackpot game. The detection result is stored in the machine, and when the big win game ends, the game state after the big win game ends is set by referring to the stored result.
Here, the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y during the jackpot game will be described. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V-solenoid 209a (see FIG. 21) (not shown). In the state where the V solenoid 209a is energized (ON state) while the closed state (see FIG. 5B) is maintained for flowing down to the third flow path 65e3, the ball flowing down the second flow path 65e2 is moved to the fourth flow path. It is configured to maintain an open state for flowing down to the flow path 65e4.

This V solenoid 209a is normally in an off state, and is drive-controlled so as to be in an on state only for a predetermined period during the jackpot game. Specifically, when a specific round game (first round game) is started among a plurality of round games executed during the jackpot game, it is turned on, and a specific round game (first round (round game) is completed, or when the game time of a specific round game has passed a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), it is driven and controlled to be in an OFF state. That is, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game.
With this configuration, only when the jackpot game is executed (when the jackpot control is executed), the ball can be won in the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable prize winning device 65 wins. It becomes possible to make the sphere flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v. In addition, the privilege given based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v (setting of the high probability state of the special symbol) is the end timing of the jackpot game (process executed at the end of the jackpot game) Since it is configured to be granted at , even if a fraudulent act of passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v is performed at a timing other than during the jackpot game, the privilege is granted to the player. There is no
In this control example, in the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game, switching control for switching the switching valve 65y is executed according to a predetermined rule based on the timing at which a specific round game is started. However, the switching control may be executed based on other triggers, for example, the start of the jackpot game may be used as the trigger for switching control, or the jackpot may be executed. The end of the opening period of the game may be used as the trigger for switching control, or the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 is measured during the jackpot game, and the switching control is performed when the measurement result reaches a specific number. It can also be used as an opportunity to execute. In addition, when the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 reaches a specific number as a trigger for executing the switching control, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game may be used as the determination target, or the number of balls in the round game unit may be determined. may be used as a determination target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game the state in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) is set.
Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when the jackpot game is executed and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 65b may be changed for each jackpot type. By configuring in this way, even if it is configured to perform the same switching control for the switching valve 65y regardless of the jackpot type, the state where the ball can easily pass through the specific area (V gate) is set, a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to reach the specific area (V gate) 65v and a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.
The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.
The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.
In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by means of a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .
The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 21). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.
<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the game flow in this control example will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as shown in FIG. 3 types of game states, ie, a high probability state of symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), are configured to be settable, and the initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped). or after the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated (depressed), the normal state is set.
Then, during the normal state, a game mainly including the first special symbol lottery executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is executed. In the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbols is set, the probability of the big win of the special symbols is set to 1/200, and when the big win is won, the type of the big win is "jackpot A" (selection rate of 1/2). and "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected. When "jackpot A" is selected, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) is executed in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and "jackpot B" is selected. , a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) is executed in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game.

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this variable probability state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 50 times, or when a jackpot is won, the end condition is established and the state shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 50 times in a state where the variable probability state is set, the game state changes from the variable probability state to the execution of the 51st special symbol lottery. Moved to short-time state. In addition, in this control example, the process of shifting the gaming state from the probability variable state to the time saving state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation corresponding to the 50th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. , The 51st special symbol lottery should not be executed in a state in which the special symbol high probability state is set, for example, immediately after the 50th special symbol lottery is executed (at the start of the 50th special symbol variation). , or just before the execution of the 51st special symbol lottery (the conditions for executing the 51st special symbol lottery are met, but the timing when the special symbol lottery is not executed). may be transferred.
Since the probability variable state is a high probability state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is more likely to be in an open state by a normal pattern winning game than a normal state of a low probability state of normal symbols, and a game mainly based on the second special symbol lottery. is executed. In the variable state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of the jackpot of the special pattern is set to 1/50, and when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot type is "jackpot C" ( Any one of the selection rate 3/10), "jackpot D" (selection rate 4/10), and "jackpot E" (selection rate 3/10) is selected.
“Jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which 4 rounds of variable jackpot games are executed, “jackpot D” is a jackpot type in which 7 rounds of variable jackpot games are executed, and “Jackpot E” is 16 rounds. It is a jackpot type in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the execution probability of the probability variable jackpot game.
Further, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, 7 rounds of the game are always executed, and a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, an average of 8.8 rounds (4 rounds 30%, 7 rounds 40%, 16 rounds 30%) are played. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that a 4-round game will be executed. If you win the jackpot. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

Next, the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) will be described. When "jackpot B" is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the probability variable state exceeds 50 times, or during the probability variable jackpot game can not be passed to the specific area (V gate) 65v, a time saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big win game reaches 100 times, or when a big win is won before reaching 100 times. . That is, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot B is elected), the time saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (time saving 100 times is set). On the other hand, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the variable probability state exceeds 50 times, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times after the variable probability state ends.
During this time saving state, since it is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set similarly to the variable probability state described above, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and the game in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. state. In addition, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. That is, from the point of view of the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a jackpot probability lower than that in the variable probability state, and the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the variable probability state. That is, from the point of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. In addition, in this control example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it is configured so that the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same, but not limited to this, for example, during the variable probability state The variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed is made different from the variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed during the time saving state, for example, the variation time is shorter during the probability variable state than during the normal state. , it may be configured to be able to execute the special symbol variation.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.
In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.
In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .
In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.
Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 51). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding area). to fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a includes the Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special In the symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64. Each value of is stored.
Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Of the various values stored in the reserved first area, the information of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol type for which the lottery is executed next is shifted to the special symbol execution area and stored. Special symbol variation based on various values is started.
In this control example, two kinds of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are used, but the number of special symbols may be one. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are performed. It may be configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a special symbol. It may be configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.
In addition, in this control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a loss, but without being limited to this, for example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, It may be constructed so that the player can win a small prize that can give the player a privilege less than that when winning the big prize (a privilege different from that when winning the big prize). With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.
In addition, in the case that a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. Alternatively, for example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. It may be configured such that when a small win is won, the small win game is executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small win, and the game state is not shifted even after the end of the small win game.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.
Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.
The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 51).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.
Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 24(a). FIG. 24(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first hit random number table 202a is a table that defines random numbers (decision values) for determining a big hit in a special symbol lottery.
Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202a, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined differently according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 24 (a), for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 4" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is the jackpot determination value , and other values (“5 to 999”) are defined as deviation determination values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 19" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "20 to 999") is defined as the deviation determination value. That is, since the update range of the first random number table 202a is 1000 of "0 to 999", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000). Thus, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).
In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state. Alternatively, three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "big hit" and "loss", are determined as the lottery result of the special symbol. , and may be configured to be capable of judging a "minor win" as one type of "out". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.
As described above, when the configuration is such that a "small win" can be won as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202a. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.
The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the RAM 203 It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the one special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.
The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, the obtained value of the first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the first winning type selection table 202d includes a special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 and a second special symbol table 202d1 that are referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in a lottery.
First, with reference to FIG. 25(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting a jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Different jackpot types are defined according to the value.
Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot As a type, "jackpot A" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability variable jackpot game (when not V), the probability variable counter 203ja is set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 25(b), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds, and the jackpot game is usually executed. is a jackpot type in which "0" is set. Furthermore, in the "jackpot B", it is defined that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 50% (50/100).
That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same. The easiness of passage of the ball to a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the "big win A" is different from that of the "big win B" during the big win game. It is constructed so that an easy jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the "jackpot A" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot B".
Next, with reference to FIG. 25(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 25(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2. This special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 25(c), in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 in the first control example, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot C" to "jackpot E" Three jackpot types are defined.
Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type. It is This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C", so in the lottery of the second special symbol In the case of a big win, the percentage of "jackpot C" determined is 30% (30/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 25(c), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C" is 40% (40/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 25(c), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot E" is 30% (30/100).
That is, the three types of jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all execute variable jackpot games, but the number of rounds of the jackpot games is limited. The "jackpot E" in which the most round games are played is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, and the "jackpot A" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed, so compared to the first special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes an advantageous jackpot type. In addition, in terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the maximum number that can be obtained is greater in the second special symbol lottery, and the minimum number that can be obtained. Also stipulates that the second special symbol lottery is less. In addition, the average number of prize balls that can be acquired is defined so that the number of the second special symbol lottery is larger.
Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls obtainable under the minimum conditions, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other respects. In addition, in this control example, although the jackpot types shown in FIG. 25 are defined, there are various types based on the same technical concept as each jackpot type that can be set in each control example described above, without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the jackpot type can be set.
In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed for all the jackpots. A different number of round games may be executed according to the selected jackpot type. In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the time saving state is set for the same period (100 times of time saving) after the jackpot game is finished with all the jackpots. Without limitation, it may be configured so that the time saving state is not set in part of the jackpot winning (part of the jackpot type to be set), or the number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) is changed according to the jackpot type. It can be configured as follows. Furthermore, according to the selected jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game, and a jackpot type in which a normal state is set may be provided.
Returning to FIG. 22, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 26) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal table 202b1 used in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and a state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set. The table 202b2 for probability variation and time reduction used in is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.
Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 26(b) and 27. FIG. FIG. 26(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and the variation time is longer when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win than when it is a loss. , and different variation patterns are defined according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed and the result of the special symbol lottery executed.
First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202b1. In this normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the judgment is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19". , normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 seconds to 42 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating either a basic time of 30 seconds or an additional time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the addition time is configured to be set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the additional time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the additional time is "3.5 seconds", and when it is "2", it is added If the time is "4 seconds", "3", the additional time is "4.5 seconds", if "3", the additional time is "5 seconds", if "4", add If the time is "5.5 seconds", if the additional time is "5", the additional time is "6 seconds", if the additional time is "6", if the additional time is "6.5 seconds", if "7" If the added time is "7 seconds" and "8", the added time is "7.5 seconds", and if the added time is "9 to 11", the added time is "8 seconds" and "12". If the additional time is "8.5 seconds", if "13", the additional time is "9 seconds", if "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds", "15" If , the additional time is "10 seconds", if "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds", and if "17", the additional time is "11 seconds", "18" , the additional time is "11.5 seconds", and when "19", the additional time is "12 seconds".
Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the command is included in the basic command. A variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information contained in the addition command, and a reach pattern (type of the third pattern) is set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, when the ready-to-win state occurs, the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that is first visible to the player is always specified as a specific third symbol (in this control example, the third symbol with the number 1 attached). pattern), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the additional time of 13 to 22 seconds is output as the variation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the normal pattern described above. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.
Here, in this control example, the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect is configured to be variable according to the information (the number of seconds) included in the addition command. 3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal reach effect (the effect that is displayed stopped after the middle pattern row Z2 fluctuates about one round) is "13 seconds to 22 seconds", the super reach effect (medium pattern row After Z2 fluctuates about two rounds, the effect of stop display) is executed.
By configuring in this way, for example, during the first predetermined period, the variable performance is executed in the same performance mode, and after that, when the variable performance in which the performance mode diverges is executed, the same performance mode is executed. It is possible to set the period based on the basic command (command containing information indicating the basic time), and set the variable effect after branching based on the addition command (command containing information indicating the addition time). . Therefore, for example, even if the entire fluctuation time is the same, the sound ramp control device 113 can easily differ by simply changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time to the fluctuation time. You can set variable production.
In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when normal reach is performed and the basic time (30 seconds) when super reach is performed are the same, and the variable time set as the addition time Although it is configured to vary the production mode of the ready-to-win production according to the length, it is not limited to this, and the basic time for normal ready-to-win is set at 30 seconds, and the basic time for super ready-to-win is set at 40 seconds. Alternatively, the addition time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" only for determining the type of the third symbol.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an additional time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, an effect is executed in which the variable effect of the third symbol once in the ready-to-win state is switched to another variable effect. Even if the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 in which is visible is always a specific third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in this control example), Since it is possible to change the display order of the third symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 in the middle of the variation in accordance with the third symbols that are finally stopped without giving a sense of discomfort, like the above-described normal and super, There is no need to set the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state by varying the addition time.
Also, if the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, similarly, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the variation time is 8 seconds as a variation pattern. Outliers are specified. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the loss is determined, as the variation effect of the third symbol, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the loss without entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the addition time.
Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the variation pattern is defined to be out of reach with a variation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When this out of reach is determined, a combination command indicating any of 30 seconds of basic time and 3 to 22 seconds of additional time is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the normal pattern described above. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is a loss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. In addition, when the lottery result is a loss, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed so that the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed will be a combination other than a big win. On the side of the lamp control device 113, a correction process is executed so that the third symbol shifted by one from the setting contents of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is selected. Thus, when the out-of-reach performance is executed, it is possible to easily set a performance mode in which the third pattern is stop-displayed (disappearance-stop display) in the vicinity of the third pattern that is the combination of the big win.
On the other hand, if the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" defines a special reach with a variation time of 40 seconds as a variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command showing a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. It is configured so that the production is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, A variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the addition command, and a special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. 8(b), A performance mode of a special variable performance is set in which the third pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, as shown in FIG. 9(a), an effect mode is set in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped). Then, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is out of special), the third pattern is fixed and displayed as it is, and the variation performance is terminated.
On the other hand, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special reach), as shown in FIGS. A variable production in which the pattern restarts is set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the contents of the table 202b2 for variable probability/reduction of working hours will be described. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable probability/time reduction table 202b2. This probability variation/time reduction table 202b2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set, and the type of special symbol, the number of variations (jackpot game end Each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of special symbol variations afterward), the special symbol lottery result, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.
Here, in this control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the high-probability state (probability variable state or time-saving state) of normal symbols is always set. Then, the set normal pattern high probability state is configured to continue until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In this control example, as the time saving end condition, the first time saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol variation after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set reaches 100 times, and the high probability of the normal symbol. A second time-saving end condition is established when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a state where the state is set, and when any of the time-saving end conditions are established, normal symbols are displayed. It is configured to shift from a high probability state to a low probability state of normal symbols.

During the high-probability state (probability variable state, short-time state) of normal symbols, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the low-probability state (normal state) of normal symbols is set to be easily selected. Therefore, since the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time can be increased, an efficient game (special symbol lottery game) can be provided to the player.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, during the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is "1 time to 20 times", the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery , regardless of the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of "5 seconds" is selected. In other words, the high-speed variation in which the special symbol lottery is executed in a shorter variation time than the other periods in the predetermined period after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol variation is performed 20 times) period (first period). By setting this high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the next big winning game in a short period of time after the end of the big winning game. It is possible to make the player think that the game has been executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, during this high-speed fluctuation period, since the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is always selected, it is possible to easily set the production period (continuous production) over a plurality of special symbol lotteries. .
In addition, when the jackpot is won in a state where the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is set, the second special symbol reserved ball ( Since there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 reserved ball) has not been acquired, the special design lottery (special figure 1 lottery) using the acquired first special pattern reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved ball) is easily executed. , If the jackpot is won in a normal state in which the variable state or the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since the possibility of acquiring the ball is high, the special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) using the special figure 2 reserved ball is easily executed.
Thus, immediately after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, any special symbol lottery of any symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed, so as shown in FIG. The same variation pattern is selected regardless of the type of symbol for a predetermined period after the high-probability state of the symbol is set (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times). As a result, the same special symbol variation can be executed even when the special symbol lottery of any symbol type is executed, and the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) over a plurality of special symbol lotteries is set. can be made easier.

In addition, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 4, both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game are set to the normal symbol high probability state. is constructed so that one ball reaches the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one ball out of two, so simply by continuously executing the game in which the ball is shot during the high-probability state of normal symbols, It is configured so that the special symbol lottery can be executed without interruption. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the period until the high-speed fluctuation period ends, that is, the period until the 20th special design fluctuation ends (5 seconds × 20 times) 100 seconds is set in advance as a high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous performance for 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous performance across 20 times of special symbol lotteries. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is sufficient to execute the switching process for switching the already set continuous production mode, simplifying the process for executing the production during the high-speed fluctuation period. can do.
In addition, a determination means is provided for determining whether or not to temporarily stop the set continuous effect for 100 seconds during the high-speed fluctuation period. When it is determined that the period until the special symbol variation is executed is a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or more, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is interrupted, the continuous performance being executed is temporarily It may be configured to execute a process of stopping. As a result, even when the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent only the continuous performance from proceeding ahead. In addition, an operation means (for example, frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is provided, and when a predetermined operation is performed with respect to the operation means, a process of temporarily stopping the continuous effect being executed is executed. It may be configured to
In this control example, the same variation time (5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the high-speed variation period. A variation pattern in which a variation time other than seconds is set may be selected. In this case, it is preferable that the variation time of 5 seconds or more is set more easily when the special symbol lottery results in a big win than in the case of no big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from switching the performance mode of the preset continuous performance for 100 seconds to stop-displaying the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot. The winning of the jackpot can be notified in a performance mode in which the player can fully grasp the lottery result, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
In addition, instead of setting the production mode of continuous production all at once for the time (100 seconds) assumed as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) is divided into a plurality of periods. A first continuous effect to be executed during one high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) is set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and a second series to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds). The effect may be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a performance mode (a performance mode in the second half period of the continuous performance) that is not executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance. .

Furthermore, it is not necessary to perform continuous effects for the entire period of the high-speed fluctuation period, and a specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, special symbol fluctuations (20 times in total) executed during the high-speed fluctuation period) Of these, the continuous effect may be executed only during the 10th to 20th fluctuation periods.
Returning to FIG. 27, the description continues. The special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)". If the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" in the entire range (Hit) is defined to be selected, and if the lottery result is "loss", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179" and the variation time is "30 seconds" is selected, and a variation pattern (short deviation) with a variation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".
In this control example, when the high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) of the normal design is set, the second special design lottery is mainly executed, and the high probability state of the normal design. During the second period in which the special symbol variation is executed 21 times or more after is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed as long as the game is continued. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 4 , the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example performs the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is performed. Since it has a configuration of the game board 13 that allows balls to enter, for example, when the game is interrupted during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the first special symbol lottery is executed after the game is restarted. Sometimes.
As described above, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, unlike the case where the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that the normal jackpot game will be executed (50% of the jackpot wins). 2. In the gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed, if the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot where the normal jackpot game is executed, the player wins the jackpot. An unfavorable lottery result. In addition, in this control example, in addition to the presence or absence of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot is suggested to the player in the variation performance (variation performance using the third symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when main symbols sz with odd numbers are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating winning of a jackpot, it suggests winning of a jackpot in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and even numbers When the numbered main symbols sz are stop-displayed in a combination indicating the winning of a big win, it is constructed so as to suggest the winning of a big win in which a normal big win game is executed.

Therefore, in the variable production executed during the probability variable state or the time saving state, the main symbol sz with an even number is in the reach state (the main combination indicating the jackpot winning in which the normal jackpot game is executed) When a state in which part of the symbol sz is stopped and the rest of the symbol rows are variably displayed) is created, a disadvantageous jackpot is won from before the special symbol variability is stopped and displayed. There is a problem in that the player is made to think that this is the case, and the desire to play the game is lowered. Therefore, in this control example, in the gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, when the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery is won, As shown in FIG. 15(a), both the main symbols sz with odd numbers and the main symbols sz with even numbers are in the ready-to-win state (double reach). production) is configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he or she has won a disadvantageous jackpot before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.
In order to execute this double reach effect, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected. In addition, if the double reach performance described above as the variable performance executed during the variable probability state or the time saving state is executed only when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time when the double reach performance is executed. Because the player will be aware of the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, in this control example, a part (about 80%) of the case of winning in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery Variation pattern for executing double reach production (30 seconds variation time ) is selected.
By configuring in this way, when the double reach performance is executed in the variable probability state or the time saving state, whether the corresponding special symbol lottery is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. is made difficult to understand and whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win can be made difficult to understand, and the player can play the game while having a sense of expectation until the performance result of the double reach performance is displayed.
Furthermore, since the double reach performance is executed even for the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed when the jackpot is won, the probability variable jackpot game is executed for the entire double reach performance. The performance result indicating that the jackpot is won (the effect result that the main symbol sz with an odd number is displayed in a combination that indicates the winning of the jackpot) is double reach performance only for the first special symbol lottery. can be made easier to create than when executing Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description is continued. When the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)", Regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, it is defined that the variation pattern (medium variation) with a variation time of "20 seconds" is selected.
In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. , As the probability variation end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the first probability variation end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 50 times, and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A second probability variable end condition is established when a special symbol jackpot is won in a state where the second probability variable end condition is established, and when any probability variable end condition is satisfied, the special symbol low probability state is changed from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state. It is configured to transition to a state.
That is, according to the game result during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until the number of times of execution of special symbol fluctuation reaches 50 times, After that, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until the number of times of execution of special symbols reaches 50 times, and the number of times of execution of special symbol fluctuation is 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. There is a case where a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until it becomes.
The display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a game state suggesting effect for suggesting the currently set game state to the player. When the V notification effect for notifying that the area (V gate) 65v has been passed is executed, the notification effect (super chance mode effect) for notifying the player that the current game state is a variable probability state is executed. When the performance mode during the big win game is set so that the V notification performance is not executed even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big win game, the current game state is set. A common effect (chance mode effect) is executed to make it difficult to understand whether is in a variable probability state.

Then, when the super chance mode effect is executed, the probability variation state ends at the 50th special symbol variation (specific period), so "20 seconds" set at the 50th special symbol variation ' is used, the variable probability state ends, and then an effect indicating that the chance mode (shortening of working hours) is set is executed. Further, when the chance mode is executed, an effect is executed to suggest whether or not the variable probability state has been set during the specific period.
In this way, using the special symbol fluctuation period for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in the specific period, information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (information for guiding the transition of the game state, information set in the past Information other than the lottery result of the special symbol is fixed by fixing the variation time of the selected special symbol variation when executing the information notification performance for notifying the player of information for suggesting the game state that has been played. It is possible to reduce the variation of the presentation mode (including the presentation time) of the information notification presentation for informing the player.
In addition, in this control example, the execution period of the special symbol variation (the 50th special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot) in which the probability variation state ends is set as a specific period, and the variation time of the special symbol variation is fixed to "20 seconds". However, without being limited to this, including before and after the special symbol variation that will end the probability variation state, for example, the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot is a specific period (fixed The period in which the selected variation time is selected), and by using the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the specific period, the information notification effect may be executed.
In addition, according to the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period described above, it may be possible to vary the effect mode of the information notification effect, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the probability variable state It may be changed to a production mode that does not notify the information indicating that the is finished, or regardless of the actually set game state, the game state set in the past state) is a game state disadvantageous to the player (for example, time saving state) may be changed to an effect mode.

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period may be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, it is better when the jackpot win does not occur. Rather, it is preferable that the execution timing of the information notification effect is easily delayed. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the performance contents of the information notification performance, but also in the execution timing, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
Also, as in the above example, when the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period is varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the information notification effect is executed at the specific timing in advance. It is set, and when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit), the timing of executing the information notification performance is configured to be varied from the above-described specific timing. Alternatively, one execution timing is determined from a plurality of execution timings according to the result of a special symbol lottery executed during a specific period without presetting the timing for executing the information notification performance. It can be configured as follows.
Next, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period) ”And if the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is “hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is “30 seconds” in the entire range. If the lottery result is "missing", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179", and the variation time is set to " 30 seconds” fluctuation pattern (long outlier) is selected, and a fluctuation pattern (second superfluctuation) with a fluctuation time of “60 seconds” for the range of “180 to 198” is selected. .
This 3rd period is a period when a game state turns into a time saving state. That is, even if the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is a period in which the variable probability end condition is established and the time saving state is set. During this third period, as in the above-described second period, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method to be executed. Since execution of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than execution of the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period. is configured to facilitate selection of a variation pattern with a long variation time. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time saving state, the first special symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent execution of the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

It should be noted that during this third period, as well as during the above-described second period, the double reach effect (see FIG. 15) is configured to be executed, so if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, it will be out. A variation pattern with a variation time of '30 seconds' is selected for part of winning, part of winning a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, and part of losing and winning.
Next, the contents of various variation patterns defined for the second special symbol lottery when the variable probability state or the time saving state are set will be described.
As shown in FIG. 27, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "1 time to 20 times ( 1st period)”, the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol), and regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of “5 seconds” stipulated to be selected. That is, during the first period, the same variation pattern (5 second variation) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.
Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (lottery result of special symbols) is "win" , the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", and the fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is in the range of "150 to 198" , The variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected, and if the lottery result is “out”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 191”. A variation pattern (second short variation) with a variation time of “10 seconds” is selected for the range of , and a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected for the range of “192 to 198”. stipulated to be selected.

During the second period, which is a high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) of normal symbols in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed, the above-mentioned double reach effect is performed. A variation pattern with a variation time of “10 seconds” is selected, except for the variation pattern for which the In other words, the second special symbol variation is completed in a short period of time in a state in which the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed. there is As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the special figure 2 reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit, and the player feels comfortable. can be made to play a good game.
In this control example, "10 seconds" is specified as the short-time variation time, but this variation time may be specified even shorter. It is preferable to define a longer time (eg, 3 seconds) than the interval (approximately 1.2 seconds) that can reach the 2-ball entrance 640 . By constructing in this way, although the player continuously shoots the balls, the special figure 2 reserved balls are reduced, and are set to have a non-priority over the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first special symbol lottery is executed.
Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)", the lottery result (lottery result of special symbols) and the acquired variation type counter A variation pattern (medium variation) with a variation time of 20 seconds is selected regardless of the value of CS1. Since the variation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the variation pattern selected in response to the above-described first special symbol lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period) ”And if the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is “hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, and the variation time is “10 seconds” The fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) is specified to select a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" for the range of "150 to 198", and the lottery result is " In the case of "out of", the fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and the range of "192 to 198" , a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected.

As described above, in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b includes the normal table 202b1 and the probability variation/time reduction table 202b2, and according to the set gaming state , different data tables to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern. As a result, the type of variation pattern to be selected can be made different according to the set game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player with various variation patterns, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.
Furthermore, when the variable probability state is set as the game state and when the time saving state is set, the same data table (variable probability/time saving table 202b2) is referred to to select the variation pattern. ing. Therefore, in the state where the "chance mode", which is a production mode that makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, is selected in response to the special symbol lottery to be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set game state depending on the type of variation pattern that is set. In addition, in this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the probability variable state and the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the time saving state are the same, but this , and may be configured to refer to a different data table.
In this case, a probability variation data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation state and a time saving data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the time saving state are provided, and a small probability ( For example, as the type of variation pattern selected in 5%), it is preferable to provide a specific variation pattern defined only in one data table. As a result, the player can grasp the currently set game state based on the type of the selected variation pattern only when the specific variation pattern is selected.
In addition, the data table for probability variation and the data table for time saving may be configured to have different ratios of selecting each variation pattern. By constructing in this way, by analyzing the bias of the variation pattern selected for the special symbol lottery executed during the "chance mode", the enjoyment of making the player predict the game state currently set. can be provided.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern is configured to be different according to the game state to be set. For example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game state set when the previous jackpot was won, or the game state set when the previous jackpot was won Jackpot type (stopped display mode of special pattern), display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and whether or not the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game It may be configured such that the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the same time-saving state is changed based on the result of whether or not (whether V has won a prize) or the like.
In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is preferable to set a command that includes information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table). . As a result, when a variation pattern command is received on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine not only the type of variation pattern set this time but also how the current gaming state was set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, for example, even though the probability variable jackpot game has been executed, it is determined that the ball cannot win V and the time saving state has been set, and a dedicated production mode ( For example, "sorry mode") can be set.
Returning to FIG. 22, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.
Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and one for when probability of winning is higher for normal symbols than when the probability is low, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 24(b). FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined as "0 to 2" for the normal design hit, and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined to be in the range of "0 to 149".
That is, in this control example, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal game, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal game to be executed during the normal state and the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.
In addition, in this control example, it is configured such that the variation time of different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state. A longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the low-probability state of the pattern is set than when the high-probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation according to the game state, winning in the normal symbol lottery and entering the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to easily set a game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.
Furthermore, in the present control example, when winning the normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, a plurality of balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640. It is configured to be able to execute a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in an operation mode (long opening) in which it is possible. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so any game state is possible. Even in the set state, the possibility of execution of the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 51).
In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.
Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, and the like. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 23(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment includes a first winning random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, a first winning type It has at least a selection table 202d. The first winning random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, and the first winning type selection table 202d were described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. omitted.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.
The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .
When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a number of first special symbol reserved balls. Counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, probability variable counter 203i, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, probability variable setting flag 203m, It has a variable probability passage counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a variable probability effective flag 203r, a variable probability effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, up to the maximum number (4 in this control example), various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). is a storage area for storing
In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, up to the upper limit number (4 in this control example), various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). is a storage area for storing
The special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbols, and when the special symbols stop fluctuating, the first special symbol reserved ball is displayed. When various counter values are stored in the storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area. When various counter values are stored in any of 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area and stored.
The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of the start winning. The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retrieved from the counter buffer. are acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, when detecting that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Store each.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the big winning lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 are executed. One of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the above-described first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (each value of counters C1 to C3, CS1) The data corresponding to the start winning prize is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.
The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area for storing the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning). be. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is detected from the counter buffer. is obtained and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (value of the counter C4) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area in which the order of digestion is early among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant. .
In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting the display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.
In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable display effect of the normal symbols, the above-described normal symbol reservation is performed in order to execute the processing such as the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the ball storage area 203c (the value of the second winning random number counter C4), the data corresponding to one start winning is stored in this normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). ). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the first pattern display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third pattern display device 81). The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 50). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.
Also, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. is.
The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is based on the winning to the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the first pattern display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third pattern display device 81). The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 50). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.
Also, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. is.

The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). ) is referenced in the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 42), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.
In addition, the fluctuation pattern and the stop classification which are decided here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop classification command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.
The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f detects a ball passing through a through gate 67 during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ), it is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time at maximum. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 50). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 48). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S805 in FIG. 47).
The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends (the setting state of the time reduction counter 203h, the setting of the probability variation counter 203i The game state corresponding to the situation) is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 0, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0, and the probability variation counter 203i When the value is 0, the time saving state is stored, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the probability variable counter 203i is greater than 0, the probability variable state is stored.

Furthermore, when the jackpot game is being executed, there is also a winning game state (jackpot state) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed. configured to be stored. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.
A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223g.
The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 50), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is set.
As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends (see S2103 in FIG. 54). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, based on the special design lottery (fluctuation), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted, the time reduction counter 203h When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the normal pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the normal symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203h.
In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of normal symbols and a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions for subtraction are set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the time saving counter 203h may be subtracted.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is configured to be decremented by 1, but according to the type of the end condition that has been established, multiple values of the time-saving counter 203h are collectively (for example, 2) It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203h. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .
The variable probability counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which a special symbol high probability state is set, and is set to a value corresponding to a case in which a special symbol high probability state is set. A value is set in the variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (see S2102 in FIG. 54). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set, based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted, the probability variation counter 203i When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the special pattern is terminated, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the special symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i.
In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, as a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the probability variation counter 203i based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Also when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be subtracted.

Furthermore, the value set in the probability variable counter 203i may be changed based on the winning jackpot type and the passing situation of the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, and the value of the time saving counter 203h described above is subtracted. Similar to the contents, the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be configured to be subtractable according to conditions other than the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability variable counter 203i is satisfied, the probability variable The value of the counter 203i may be configured to be capable of subtracting a plurality of values at once. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to grasp how long the high-probability state of the special pattern continues, so that the player can watch the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the high-probability state of the special pattern without getting bored. can be done.
Further, in this control example, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203i, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions are set, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. can be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special lost winning), or normal symbol lottery Even if the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special normal figure), the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be subtracted, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, the first 1 entrance 64, second entrance 640, etc.), the value of the variable probability counter 203i may be subtracted.
In addition, in this control example, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is configured to be decremented by one, but according to the type of end condition that has been met, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is collectively set (eg, 2). It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the variable probability counter 203i. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.
Furthermore, the conditions for ending the variable probability state may be varied according to the content of establishment of the conditions for which the variable probability state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203j is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. The big win start flag 203j is set to ON when the end timing of the variation display indicating the big win comes. Also, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1903 in FIG. 52).
The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203k is ON, it means that the big winning is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the big winning is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON when a jackpot game (special game state) is started (see S1903 in FIG. 52) when a jackpot game (special game state) is started (see S1903 in FIG. 52). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (special game state) (see S2105 in FIG. 54). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), this big-hit flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not the big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 41).
The variable probability setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether a ball enters a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 5) provided in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game. Determined by whether or not the ball (flowed down). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific area (V gate) 65v (passing of the variable probability switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the variable probability setting flag 203m is turned on. (see S2215 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203m is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 54). The variable probability setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.
In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off. may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203n, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting only the variable probability setting flag 203m to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (flowed down a specific area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the winning balls have been discharged from the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203n and the ejection number counter 203t, which will be described later. This variable probability passage counter 203n is updated by adding one each time the ball passes through the variable probability switch (flows down a specific area). Also, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that the probability variable passing counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.
The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Based on this, 1 is added and updated. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203o) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203t and the probability variable passage counter 203n) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.
The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter for
The remaining ball timer 203q is the time required for the winning ball to be discharged to the variable prize winning device 65 when one preset round is completed and the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this embodiment, it takes 0.5 seconds for the variable winning device 65 to discharge the winning ball. is set as the upper limit of When the remaining ball timer 203q reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. be. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variable setting flag 203m is turned on even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch. may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.
Probability variable effective flag 203r, after the switching valve 65y is switched to an arrangement that cannot distribute the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the passage ( It is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the ball entry). When this variable probability effective flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v is a normal period.
The variable probability valid timer 203s is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203r described above is set to ON. After the switching valve 65y is switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (V gate) 65v, the period required for the variable probability switch to pass normally can be determined by the variable probability effective timer 203s. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that reaches the switching valve 65y to pass through the variable probability switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if it passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.
As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passed through the variable probability switch, or pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passed It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as misdetection of passing by the magnetic sensor.

The discharged number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203t is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number.
The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.
The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.
The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .
The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .
The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.
An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .
When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an accessory for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to
Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. At least a selection table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation effect selection table 222f are stored.
In the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early. In addition, in each control example described later, the name of an element having the same reference numeral (222a) may be referred to as a variation pattern selection table, but the meaning is the same.
In this control example, a variable effect (see FIG. 7) is executed in which the third symbol is variably displayed by horizontal scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the executed special symbol variation. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. A game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加
The normal special figure 2 effect selection table 222b is the effect of the third symbol when the variation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set. A data table that is referenced when selecting a mode, and corresponds to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (result of judgment), the number of special figures 2 reserved, the number of special figures 1 reserved, and the value of the production counter 223f Different presentation modes (contents of presentation) are defined.

In this control example, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the state where the normal state is set, the normal symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is open for 5 seconds is executed. Then, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be executed by entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal figure winning game. That is, in the gaming state (normal state) in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute, when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (when winning per normal pattern), during a predetermined period (per normal pattern during the game period ), it is configured to be able to easily acquire the lottery opportunity (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol lottery (easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640).
In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 26(b)), a variation pattern with a variation time of "10 seconds" and a variation time of "40 seconds" is selectable, and when the second special symbol lottery in which a variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" is set is executed, the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b is changed. The production mode of the variable production is set with reference to the table.
Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b. This normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b is for the third symbol when a variation pattern with an addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set. A data table to be referred to when selecting the production mode of the variable production, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (result of judgment), the number of special figures 2 reserved, the number of special figures 1 reserved, the value of the production counter 223f Different presentation modes (contents of presentation) are stipulated in correspondence with each other.
As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 26(b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, a common Out reach production is executed (see FIG. 9(a)), and then pseudo-fluctuation production (FIG. 9(b) to 126) is configured to be executed during the addition time (30 seconds).

Specifically, if the lottery result is a big hit and the number of special figures 2 reserved is 3, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f regardless of the number of special figures 1 reserved fluctuates in the range of "0 to 79""Pseudo 3 effect" as a pattern is specified in the range of "80 to 99", "Special pseudo 2 effect" is defined as a variation pattern, and if the number of special figures 2 pending is 2, to the number of special figures 1 pending Regardless, if the value of the production counter 223f acquired is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is "pseudo 2 production", and the number of special figures 2 is 1, it is acquired regardless of the number of special figures 1. The value of the effect counter 223f is defined to be in the range of "0 to 89", "Pseudo 1 effect" as the variation pattern, and in the range of "90 to 99", "Special pseudo 4 effect" is defined as the variation pattern.
Also, if the lottery result is a big hit and the number of special 2 reservations is 0, if the number of special 1 reservations is 1 to 4, the "special end effect" will be displayed, and if the number of special 1 reservations is 0 "Pseudo no effect" is set.
If the lottery result is out, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is ""Pseudo 3 production" is defined, and if the number of special figures 2 reserved is 2, the value of the production counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of special figures 1 reserved is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is ""Pseudo 2 effect", when the number of special figures 2 reserved is 1, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 99" regardless of the number of special figures 1 reserved, "Pseudo 1 effect" as a variation pattern However, if the number of special figures 2 pending is 0, "pseudo no effect" is defined.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, determine the presence or absence of the special figure 2 reservation number and the special figure 1 reservation number, and then executed It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation production in the production mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily make the pseudo-variation performance executed during one special symbol variation period look like a variation performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

In addition, since the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation production (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) is configured to be the number of times corresponding to the number of acquired special figures 2 pending, during the normal state It can be made to think that all the special figure 2 reserves acquired during the normal figure per game executed are used. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect in which the jackpot is won is executed, the player thinks that the jackpot has been won as a result of acquiring many special 2 reserves during the normal game per game executed in the normal state. can let Also, if the pseudo-fluctuation effect that is out and won is executed, after making it think that all the special 2 reserves have been consumed, the next variable effect using the special 2 reserves will be executed (chance zone continues), it is possible to provide the player with an extra effect.
In addition, in this control example, since a pseudo-variation effect (special pseudo-2 effect, pseudo-4 effect) that is set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the pseudo-variation number of times executed in the pseudo-variation effect and the special figure The player can be interested in two pending numbers.
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probability variation will be described. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probability variation. In this probability variation production selection table 222c, a variation pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state (time saving state), that is, during the normal symbol high probability state. It is a data table that is referred to when setting the variable effect in the case. This probability variation production selection table 222c is referred to when setting the production mode of the variation production for the special symbol variation to be executed, and is executed in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66). 1 production mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 67), during the "super chance mode" which is the production mode for notifying the player that the variable probability state (S5005 in FIG. 67: Yes), this time If the fluctuation time (basic fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be executed is "30 seconds" (S5007 in FIG. 67: Yes), or the special figure executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66) In the 2 production mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 68), during the "super chance mode" which is the production mode for notifying the player of the variable probability state (S5112 in FIG. 68: Yes), this time execution If the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern to be displayed is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 68: Yes), it is referred to.
In this control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the jackpot that can be won only in the first special symbol lottery (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed) is won. In order to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player grasps the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery before it is stopped and displayed, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is usually A third pattern (third pattern with an even number attached) for indicating a jackpot winning in which a jackpot game is executed, and a third pattern (with an odd number) for indicating a jackpot winning in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed Attached 3rd pattern) and are configured to execute a double reach effect in which both are in a reach state.

Furthermore, when the above-described double reach effect is executed in the probability variable state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, or in the time saving state, the player is informed that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery. In order to make it difficult to grasp, even in the variation performance corresponding to the second special pattern lottery in which the probability variable big win game is always executed when the big win is won, the above-mentioned double ready-to-win performance is executed. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are configured so that the variation pattern with the variation time of "30 seconds" can be selected. , and when this "30 seconds" variation pattern is selected, the double reach effect is executed. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same variable time (30 seconds) is set, and the double reach effect that is the same variable effect is executed. Various performances executed by a pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by making it possible to prevent a player from grasping the symbol type of the special symbol variation being executed, and by sharing performance data used for the variation performance. It is possible to suppress the volume of performance data used for
As shown in FIG. 30, the effect selection table 222c during probability variation has different effect modes depending on the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (special symbol lottery result), and the value of the effect counter 223f. stipulated. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot A), the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". "Variable single reach" is defined as "double reach" in the range of "50 to 99", and "double reach" is defined when it is a normal jackpot (jackpot B), and "non-reach" is defined when it is out. there is
In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot, the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". "Variable double reach" is defined in the range of 50 to 99", and in the case of deviation, the value of the production counter 223f is "double reach" in the range of "0 to 4", "5 to 10" in the range of ""Variable double reach" is defined as "non-reach" in the range of "11 to 99".
By configuring in this way, even when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, even when the second special symbol lottery is executed, "double reach" (shown in FIG. 15 (a), normal hit Since the ready-to-win effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the third symbol variation performance corresponding to the special symbol lottery is being executed.

Furthermore, when the "special double reach" is set, the "double reach" production mode is set first, and then the reach production in which the production mode is changed to the "probability variable double reach" shown in FIG. 15(b). is executed. Therefore, even when "double reach" is executed corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the game can be played while expecting to be promoted to "probability variable double reach" on the way. In this "special double reach", the timing at which the production mode of the ready-to-win production is changed is the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one or two rounds. You may change the production|presentation mode based on the timing which operated .
In addition, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, when the variation pattern (special off) of variation time "10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, addition time 0 seconds)" is selected , After the failure ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 9(a) is executed, the third symbol is stop-displayed in the display mode indicating the failure as it is. On the other hand, when a variation pattern (special hit) with a variation time of "10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, additional time 0 seconds)" is selected, after 10 seconds of symbol variation, a display mode indicating a jackpot winning ( For example, at "777"), the third symbol is stopped and displayed.
In this way, as a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state, a special variation pattern for pseudo-executing a plurality of variation performances during one special symbol variation period, and one time It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the new second special symbol variation is executed by providing a normal variation pattern in which one variation performance is performed during the special symbol variation period. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the chance zone will continue.
In addition, the greater the number of variable performances (including simulated) executed in the chance zone, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. can be done.

In addition, in this control example, one pseudo-variation time (10 seconds) executed in a special variation pattern that performs a plurality of pseudo-variation effects during one special symbol variation period and the same time Since the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal variation pattern is defined so that, for example, after the second special symbol variation performed with the special variation pattern, the second special symbol variation performed with the normal variation pattern When executed, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect for 10 seconds is repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the pseudo variation performance is repeatedly executed as the special variation pattern or whether the special variation pattern and the normal variation pattern are continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the new second special symbol variation is executed, so that the player can play while expecting the chance zone to continue.
In addition, in this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation in the normal state, the variation effect of the special variation pattern is executed. However, without being limited to this, as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state, a variation time other than "40 seconds" may be selectable. In addition, in this control example, the pseudo-variation time, which is part of the variation performance of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and when the expectation of the big hit is high, the pseudo-variation performance is performed at a length other than 10 seconds. It is designed to be easy to execute. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while anticipating that the execution period of one variable performance will be long.
Returning to FIG. 28(a), the description is continued. The continuous announcement execution selection table 222d is based on the winning information (whether or not the jackpot is won) included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110 side, and the continuous announcement effects that are executed across a plurality of special symbol variation periods. 2 is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to satisfy the execution condition of . Here, when the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is established, a special valid time is set for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special valid time, the continuous announcement effect is executed.
When this continuous announcement effect is executed, it shifts to a background mode (sky mode) different from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a special symbol corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied. A continuous performance is executed using a period until the result of the lottery is displayed. Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, among the periods in which the high probability state of the normal design is set, the high-speed fluctuation period (after the high probability state of the normal design is set, the 20th special design fluctuation is executed), the transition to the background mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is made more difficult than during other periods. Since the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22 even during such a high-speed fluctuation period, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

In addition, unlike the normal background mode transition, the background mode transition can be executed with a high degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, during the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation tends to be shorter than in other periods, so if the background mode is shifted like in other periods, the result of the special symbol lottery, which is important, will be overlooked. Since there is a risk that the background mode will be lost, it is configured to make it difficult to shift to the background mode. However, when the background mode shifts based on the execution of the continuous notice effect, since the continuous notice effect using the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is executed a plurality of times, the continuous notice immediately after the transition to the background mode The effect result of the effect is not displayed. Therefore, even if the transition to the background mode is executed, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.
Furthermore, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, an effect (operation effect) other than the transition to the background mode can be executed. By operating the frame button 22, the user is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. Among them, the transition to the background mode is executed based on the fulfillment of the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance, whereby the player can be provided with an unexpected performance, and the interest in the game is improved. be able to.
Here, with reference to FIG. 31(a), the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d will be described. FIG. 31(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the continuous notice execution selection table 222d includes the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) included in the received winning information, the number of special symbols 2 reserved (second special symbol reserved ball number) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, it is defined whether or not the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is established.
Specifically, the lottery result is "big hit", the special figure 2 reservation number is "3", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79", the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is defined as "with continuous notice" in the range of "80 to 198", "without continuous notice" in which the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is not established. In addition, the special figure 2 pending number is "4", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", and the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is satisfied. In the range of 150 to 198", "no continuous notice" is defined in which the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is not satisfied.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out", the special figure 2 reservation number is "3", and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 194", the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is not established. In the range of "195 to 198" for "without continuous notice", "with continuous notice" is defined, which satisfies the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect. In addition, the special figure 2 pending number is "4", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", and the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is not satisfied "No continuous notice" In the range of 190 to 198", "with continuous notice" is defined, which satisfies the condition for executing the continuous notice effect.
As described above, in this control example, the larger the special figure 2 pending number, the more likely the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is established, and furthermore, the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is better than the case where it is out. It is configured so that the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect are easily satisfied. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play a game (a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640) in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect, and the pachinko machine can be operated. 10 work can be increased. In addition, it is configured so that the greater the number of reserved special figures 2, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit in the case where the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance are established. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous notice effect with a high expectation of a big win, the game (the game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640) can be enthusiastically played, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is enhanced. be able to.
In this control example, when a winning information command (a winning information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110 side, the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d is referred to, and only whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous announcement effect are established. is configured to determine (determine), and even if the execution conditions for the continuous notice effect are satisfied, the continuous notice effect is not executed at that time, and after the execution condition is satisfied, within a specific period When the frame button 22 is operated in , the continuous announcement effect is executed. As a result, when a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during one special symbol variation period and a plurality of winning information commands are received, the winning information for which the execution condition is to be satisfied is played. can be difficult for people to understand. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice performance is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous notice performance will continue, and it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance contents of the continuous notice performance.
In addition, in this control example, as described above, the player is not notified (suggested) that the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect has been established. may be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) effect for notifying (suggesting) to the player, for example, by displaying the characters "waiting" in the sub display area Ds, It may be configured to notify (suggest) to the player that the execution condition is met. By constructing in this way, when the notification (suggestion) performance is executed, the frame button 22 can be operated willingly to execute the continuous advance notice performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, in this control example, as shown in FIG. An icon HR10 imitating a frame button 22 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm as an effective period notification mode that can be notified to the user. From the display mode of the icon HR10, it is difficult to determine whether the special valid time is set or the normal valid time is set. With this configuration, the player does not know whether the continuous announcement effect is executed or the normal operation effect is executed until the frame button 22 is operated. The frame button 22 can be voluntarily operated.
It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of this control example, the configuration is such that the player can determine whether the valid period currently set is the special valid period or the normal valid period, depending on the display mode of the icon HR10. Alternatively, the icon HR10 may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and it may be determined whether the valid period currently set is the special valid period or the normal valid period. can be configured to In addition, the period in which the special valid time is set is made different from the period in which the normal valid time is set (for example, 3 seconds after the special symbol variation is started), and the special valid time is set. may be configured not to notify (suggest) to the player. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated to execute the continuous advance notice performance, so that the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22. can be operated. Similarly, when the player is not notified (suggested) that the special effective time is set, an effect (for example, It may be configured such that only the characters "waiting" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds) can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being unnecessarily operated in a state in which the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is not satisfied. In addition, in a state where the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect are established, and when the frame button 22 is operated outside the special effective time, the player is notified that the special effective time is now out. A notification display (for example, the display of "not now" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executed, or a guidance display for guiding the special effective time (for example, "Press again in 2 seconds" in the sub-display area Ds. display) may be executed.
Further, in this control example, when a winning information command including winning information for the second special symbol is received, the continuous announcement effect table 222d is referred to, and the process for establishing the conditions for executing the continuous announcement effect is executed. However, without being limited to this, it may be constructed so that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is established even when the winning information command including the winning information for the first special symbol is received.
Returning to FIG. 28, description will be made. The V information execution selection table 222e is a data table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V information effect during the jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable prize winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and the winning ball in the variable prize winning device 65 passes through the specific region (V gate) 65v. Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol high probability state (probability variable state) is set. Then, according to the type of the jackpot game to be executed, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and a jackpot game during the jackpot game rather than the probability variable jackpot game. A jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which a ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v can be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5(b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 depending on the arrangement of the switching valve 65y is placed in a specific area (V gate ) 65v, and a fourth flow path 65e4, through which the specific area (V gate) 65v can be passed. The switching valve 65y is drive-controlled so as to be switched to an arrangement state in which the ball can be distributed to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round game when the probability variable jackpot game is executed.
The V notification effect is a period (V period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a period (V period) for aiming at the specific area (V gate) 65v for the player who is executing the jackpot game. A V guide effect for guiding a game method, a V period effect for notifying that the current period is V, and a V success effect for notifying that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. A V failure effect informing that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period is an effect that can be executed. By executing this V notification effect, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, it is possible to easily perform the game for passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and ) 65v, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the variable probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends.
Here, in this control example, after the normal jackpot game is executed, the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the time saving state is set. If it is set, the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode (see FIG. 18). Further, the "chance mode" is set even in a part of cases where the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, even if the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to leave the possibility that the variable probability state is set internally, so that the player can be informed that the variable probability state is set. The game can be played while making the player anticipate it. However, if the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, it can be easily grasped during the jackpot game whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. If the ``chance mode'' is set after the end of the jackpot game even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, there is a problem that people will feel distrust that the variable probability state has disappeared. . In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a variable probability end condition that is established when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times as the variable probability end condition for ending the variable probability state as in this control example, a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Since the variable probability state ends without doing so, there is a possibility that the variable probability state is not set even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v.
Therefore, in this control example, a process for determining whether or not to execute the V information effect during the big win game is executed, and based on the processing result, the presence or absence of the V information effect during the big win game is determined. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed (when the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), after the jackpot game ends, the "chance mode is configured to set By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the variable probability state is set internally, so that the player who is playing the "chance mode" feels distrustful. A game can be played while expecting that the variable probability state is set without giving.

Here, the contents of the V-notification execution selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 31(b). FIG. 31(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V-notification execution selection table 222e. This V notification execution selection table 222e determines that it is time to start a probability variable jackpot game in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 64) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 58) of the sound lamp control device 113. If so (S4701 in FIG. 64: Yes), it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the current jackpot game (S4704 in FIG. 64).
As shown in FIG. 31(b), in the V notification execution selection table 222e, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed this time (jackpot type won) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f are associated. V notification presence/absence (determination result of whether or not to execute the V notification effect) is defined. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "V report present" indicating that the V report effect is to be executed is In the range of "150 to 198", "no V notification" is defined to indicate that the V notification effect is not executed. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C, D, E" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "V notification" is in the range of "190 to 198" , "No V notification" is defined.
When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot type "jackpot A" in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed is set, a V notification performance is executed at a rate of about 75%. Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, 50% is the variable jackpot game ("jackpot A"), and the remaining 50% is the normal jackpot game ("jackpot B"). ing. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the V notification performance is executed during the jackpot game at a rate of about 37.5%, and the V notification performance is executed during the jackpot game at a rate of about 62.5%. The performance will not be executed. In addition, it is configured such that the percentage of the probability variable jackpot game being executed is about 20% in the case where the V notification effect is not executed.
On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot C, D, E" in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed is set, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 90%. . Here, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to always be a probability variable big win game ("big wins C, D, E"). Therefore, in practice, a jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed is executed at a rate of about 10% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this way, by providing the case where the V notification performance is not executed even for the big win winning by the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed, the case where the V notification performance is not executed, i.e., the jackpot game. When the "chance mode" is set after the end, it is possible to increase the ratio of the game state to the variable probability state.

In addition, as described above, when winning the jackpot ("jackpot A") in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery, and the jackpot ("jackpot C") in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed in the second special symbol lottery , D, E”), the ratio of execution of the V notification effect is made different. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery in which the probability variable big winning game is difficult to be executed is more likely than the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable big winning game is actually more likely to be executed, when the probability variable big winning game is executed. is configured to make it difficult for By configuring in this way, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the frequency of not executing the V notification performance during the big win game can be increased, so that the first special in which the normal big win game can be executed. Even when the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the pattern lottery, it is possible to easily make the player have expectations.
In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. It may be different, for example, the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, or depending on the number of times the jackpot is won without shifting to the normal state (so-called number of consecutive games). The execution ratio of the V notification effect may be varied, or the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be varied according to the operation result of the player's operation of the frame button 22 . By varying the execution ratio of the V notification effect according to various conditions in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of apparent probability change ratios (the ratio of the V notification effect to the entire jackpot winning). can improve the interest of
In this control example, the above-described V notification effect can be executed only when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V notification effect may be executed even when a normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, in accordance with the timing (timing at which the first round round game is executed) V period (period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the probability variable jackpot game The configuration may be such that the V notification effect is executed, and finally the V failure effect for notifying that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period is executed. Furthermore, in the case where the V failure effect is executed even though the game is played normally during the jackpot game, for example, the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the probability variable jackpot game. It may be constructed such that the V failure performance is executed despite the fact that the player has made the game, and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends.
In addition, in this control example, it is possible to set a pattern in which the V notification effect is not executed during the probability variable jackpot game, even when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable big win game is always executed, the V notification performance may be executed without fail. good.

Returning to FIG. 28(a), the description is continued. The button operation effect selection table 222f selects the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operation means, when the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. It is a data table referred to when making a decision, and in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 70) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 58) of the sound lamp control device 113, the chance mode If it is determined that a valid operation has been performed on the frame button 22 during the period (S5314 of FIG. 70: Yes), it is referred (see S5315 of FIG. 70). In this way, by varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the frame button 22 with reference to the presentation selection table 222f at the time of button operation, the player is provided with a variety of variations. It is possible to provide an operation presentation.
Here, with reference to FIG. 32(a), the contents of the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation will be described. FIG. 32(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the button operation time effect selection table 222f is referred to when the time saving state selection table 222f1 and the variable probability state are set when the time saving state is set. A probability variation state selection table 223f2 is defined.
In this control example, when the time saving state is set and in a part of the case where the variable probability state is set, the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. Then, regardless of the game state that has been set, during the "chance mode", a common variable effect is executed. Furthermore, when the variable probability state is set and when the time saving state is set, the same variation pattern table (variable probability/time saving table 202b2) is referred to to select the variation pattern (variation time). is configured as As a result, the currently set game state is the probability variable state from the special symbol variation executed during the "chance mode" and the third symbol variation performance executed corresponding to the special symbol variation. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether it is in the time saving state, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the current state is the variable probability state.
However, if the player who is playing the "chance mode" is not provided with information that can suggest the currently set game state, there is a problem that the player quickly gets bored with the game during the "chance mode". there were. Therefore, in this control example, a plurality of types of operation effects can be executed during the "chance mode", and the execution ratio of each operation effect is made different according to the set game state. . In other words, although the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, by making the ratio of selection of each operation effect different, it is possible to predict the current game state based on a plurality of operation effects that are actually executed. It consists of Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state.

In addition, the production mode of the operation production that is executed when the normal state is set, and the production of the operation production that is executed during the "super chance mode", which is the production mode that informs that the variable probability state is set. Similarly, regarding the mode and the effect mode of the operation effect that is executed as part of the variable effect, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is determined and executed. Description is omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG.32(b), the content of the time saving state selection table 223f1 prescribed|regulated to the production|presentation selection table 222f at the time of operation is demonstrated. FIG.32(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table 223f1. This time saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect in the "chance mode" in which the time saving state is set, and includes the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, Effect modes of different operation effects are defined according to the type of operation method executed by the player on the frame button 22 and the value of the effect counter 223f obtained.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "0 ~ 149", "None" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, and in the range of "150 to 189", whether or not the variable effect being executed will be in the ready state. The range of "190 to 198" defines the "suggestion of ready-to-reach" that indicates an effect to be suggested inside, and the "suggestion of state" that indicates an effect for suggesting the currently set game state. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated. .
Here, in this control example, a plurality of operation methods that can be executed by the player with respect to the frame button 22 are set, and when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 2 ”, and “Long press” determined when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed continues for two seconds or more are set. And, it is constructed such that different operation presentations are executed according to the operation method of the player. As a result, the player can arbitrarily select an operation method to execute various operation effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In this control example, the two types of operation methods described above are used as the operation methods that can be operated by the player. For example, a second frame button) may be provided, and different operation effects may be selected according to the type of frame button pressed by the player. A plurality of operation methods may be set in correspondence with the order of operations performed on a plurality of operation means. Furthermore, when the player presses the frame button 22, it is determined as "normal pressing", and when the pressing state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), it is additionally determined as "long pressing". , may be configured to execute an operation effect dedicated to "long press".
Further, as operation means that the player can operate, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player, a lever member that can be tilted up, down, left, and right by the player, and a rotating member that can be rotated by the player. An operating means consisting of a moving member may be provided. In addition, instead of the player directly operating the member, a proximity sensor having a predetermined detection area is provided, and the proximity sensor detects a hand that enters the detection area, thereby determining that the player has performed a predetermined operation. Any operating means (for example, a touch sensor, etc.) may be provided as long as the player can arbitrarily perform a predetermined operation and select a different operation method according to the content of the operation.
Also, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described. , only one type of operation method may be provided. Here, if only one type of operation method is provided, it may be configured such that different operation presentations are performed according to the interval at which the operation is performed. As a result, even if the operation method itself is one type, it is possible for the player to select various operation effects.
It returns to FIG.32(b) and continues description of the content of the time saving state selection table 223f1. When the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", the background mode is shifted. "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate that. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggest state". is stipulated.

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", the background mode "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate transition. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 198", in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game is over)) A "past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the set game state is defined.
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the contents of the variable probability state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability state selection table 223f2. This variable probability state selection table 223f2 is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect in the "chance mode" in which the variable probability state is set, and includes the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, Effect modes of different operation effects are defined according to the type of operation method executed by the player on the frame button 22 and the value of the effect counter 223f obtained.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 119". In the range of "No" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "120 to 139", it is suggested whether or not the variable effect being executed will be in the ready state during the third symbol change. In the range of "140 to 189", "suggestion of reach" indicating the effect to be performed, "suggestion of state" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", the background "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate mode transition. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated. .
In addition, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", the background mode is shifted. In the range of "170 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the game is to be played is defined as "suggestion of state" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggest state". is stipulated.

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", the background mode "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate transition. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 198", in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game is over)) A "past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the set game state is defined.
As described above, when the "chance mode" is set as the production mode after the end of the jackpot game, the operation is performed by referring to different data tables in the case of the time saving state and the probability variable state. It is configured such that the effect mode of the effect is selected, and the rate at which each effect mode is selected is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加
In addition, at a specific operation timing, among a plurality of game states (probability variable state, time saving state) in which "chance mode" can be set as the production mode, an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set. As an effect mode (advantageous effect mode) that is likely to be executed when the Isn't an advantageous game state set when the "state suggestion" operation effect is executed by the "normal push" inside? The game can be played while having a sense of anticipation.
Furthermore, since the operation effect can be executed multiple times during the "first period", the more the number of times the operation effect is executed in the above-described advantageous effect mode during the "first period", the more Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for which the advantageous game state is set, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among a plurality of game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which the "chance mode" can be set as the production mode, an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set. As an effect mode (fixed effect mode) that is executed only when the It can be grasped that an advantageous game state is set when the operation presentation of "background mode shift" is executed by "normal push" during "1 period".
In addition, as the above-described advantageous rendering mode and fixed rendering mode, a rendering mode that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal push" during "second period") is used. More specifically, when the "state suggestion" effect mode is executed by the "normal push" during the "first period", the expectation that the variable probability state is set increases, and the "second period ”, it is configured so that the degree of expectation that the time saving state is set is high. By constructing in this manner, the player is provided with the enjoyment of playing the game while analyzing which performance mode the operation performance was executed in which period during which the ``chance mode'' was set. be able to.
As described above, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22), the contents of the effect modes of the operation effects that can be selected, and the effects referred to when they are selected. Although the contents of the data table (button operation selection table 222f) have been described, in the first control example, different data tables are referred to according to the set game state. In each data table, the same presentation modes are defined with different selection ratios. As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state only by the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, and by executing the operation effect a plurality of times, the current game state can be grasped by grasping the selection ratio of each effect mode. It is possible to make it possible to grasp the game state. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to execute the operation effect multiple times.
In this control example, it is configured to refer to different data tables according to the set game state. A different data table may be referred to to select the effect mode of the operation effect based on the effect mode. As a result, when the variable probability state is set, different operation effects can be executed depending on whether the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode or the "chance mode" is set. can.

Here, when the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode, for example, there is no need to execute the "suggest state" which is the effect mode suggesting that the current game state is set. , Instead, it indicates a specific lottery result (big win or a variation pattern in which a variation time of a predetermined time or more is set) in the effect mode of "suggestion of reach" or the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. It is preferable to define a rendering mode of "prefetch suggestion" that suggests whether or not information is included. As a result, even in the state where the "super chance mode" is set, the player can be motivated to execute the operation presentation.
Furthermore, the type of the data table for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect (the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation), the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol stop display mode), the third symbol display It may be configured to vary according to the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the device 81 or the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game.
In this case, for example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and the "chance mode" is set as the production mode, the "chance mode" is set after the normal jackpot game ends, and the probability variable jackpot game The performance mode of the operation performance to be executed during the ``chance mode'' can be made different from the case where the ``chance mode'' is set after the end of the jackpot game without allowing the ball to win a prize during the ``chance mode''. Specifically, during the "chance mode" in which the time saving state is set after the end of the variable jackpot game, the production mode of "past jackpot type suggestion" that suggests that the previous jackpot game was a variable jackpot game. It is good to stipulate. As a result, the player can be made to think that the variable probability state is set even though the time saving state is actually set. In addition, it is also possible to define the effect mode of "past game history notification" for informing that the previous big winning game was a variable probability big winning game but the V prize could not be won. This makes it easier to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 28(b). As shown in FIG. 28(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, production counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h, special production flag 223i, V winning flag 223j, V production execution flag 223k, V notification flag 223m, subsidiary time reduction counter 223n, special continuous notice At least a flag 223o, an effect mode storage area 223p, a continuous notice execution flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operating counter 223t, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 59) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.
Winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reservation areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols. Winning information included in the output winning information command is stored in order from the first area. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.
In this control example, a maximum of 4 reserved balls of the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 reserved balls of the second special symbol are configured to be retained and stored. Four reserved areas for the first special symbol and four reserved areas for the second special symbol are formed. In this control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured not to be executed at the same time. When executing a new special symbol lottery in the state of having both, the oldest stored winning information (winning information stored in the first area) of the second special symbol holding area is executed It is configured to transition to the area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is shifted to the reserved area with the number one lower. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery.
In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, for example, regardless of the type of special symbols, the pachinko machine 10 (so-called winning order digestion pachinko) executes a special symbol lottery according to the order in which the reserved balls are acquired. 10), the winning information storage area 223b is provided with eight reserved areas, and the winning information contained in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 is stored in order from the first area. good. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 (so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10) capable of simultaneously (overlapping) executing the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the configuration of this control example is used. On the other hand, instead of one execution area, a first execution area for the first special symbol and a second execution area for the second special symbol are provided, and the first area of the reservation area corresponding to each special symbol is provided. The prize winning information stored in is transferred to the execution area corresponding to each special symbol.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the value corresponding to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is the first for counting the reserved ball number of the first special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .
As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls of each special symbol based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It is designed to be managed.
Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls of the first special symbol is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or when the main controller 110 newly draws the first special symbol When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is subtracted in order to execute, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command ) to the audio ramp controller 113 . In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is added by the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or the second special symbol for executing a new second special symbol lottery in the main controller 110 When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 Send.
When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command (special figure 1 pending ball number command, special figure 2 pending ball number command) transmitted from the main controller 110, from the pending ball number command, the main control device The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of 110 or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1, second It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the first special symbol reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display reserved symbols. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .
When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 6B). As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. can be made Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which execution of the special symbol lottery is suspended.
The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation pattern output from the main controller 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d has a first special figure fluctuation start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure fluctuation start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special symbol, On and off are set in correspondence with the type of special symbol indicated by the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 .
The special figure stop classification selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop classification command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation stop classification output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, this special figure stop classification selection flag 223e has a first special figure stop classification selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure stop classification selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is set to ON and OFF corresponding to the type of special symbol included in the stop type command (special figure stop type command) transmitted from the main control device 110.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 198". It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed. Although detailed description is omitted, the effect counter 223f is composed of a plurality of counters, each of which has a different update rule. Both counters are configured to be updated each time the main process (see FIG. 58) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, when selecting a variation pattern or performing a plurality of selection processes of various effects within the execution interval of the main process, the values of different counters of the effect counter 223f are acquired and the process is executed. ing. As a result, even when the process using the value of the effect counter 223f is executed multiple times at the same timing (within the same period of the main process), various effects can be selected using the same value of the effect counter 223f. can be suppressed.
Data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 . Further, the sub-state setting area 223g includes a current game state storage area for storing the currently set game state and a past game state storage area for storing the game state set before the current game state was set. It has an area and is configured to be able to calculate what process the current game state was set through. Thereby, for example, when the time saving state is set, whether the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, or the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the probability variable end condition is satisfied It is possible to determine whether the time saving state is set in , and to execute an effect (past state suggesting effect for suggesting the past game state to the player) based on the determination result. In addition, the subordinate state setting area 223g is configured to be able to store game states such as a jackpot game state and a normal game state in addition to the normal state, the variable probability state, and the time saving state.
The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223h is a counter for counting the value corresponding to the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the normal design of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f for counting the number of reserved balls. It should be noted that the detailed contents are omitted because they are the same except that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol with respect to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c described above.
The flag 223i during special effect is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, and is turned on when the condition for executing the second special symbol variation during the normal state is established. is set to Specifically, when the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal state, or when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired in the state where the first special symbol variation is performed, it is set to ON. And, when the first special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the flag 223i during special effect is set to ON, that is, when the special figure 2 reservation is 0, it is set to OFF. In this control example, a "chance zone" effect (see FIG. 8(b)) is executed to indicate a period during which the special effect in progress flag 223i is set to ON.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. be. Specifically, when a V winning command is set by main controller 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 55), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that the V winning command is received in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 61) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 59) of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4407 in FIG. 61 : Yes), set to ON.
This V winning flag 112j is referenced in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 65) executed in the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 64) (S4801 in FIG. 65), and during the current jackpot game It is determined whether the ball has passed through the V gate) 65v (whether it has won a V prize). Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the ending process (see S4715 of FIG. 65) (S4801 of FIG. 65: Yes), it is set to OFF.
In this control example, a V notification effect can be executed as an effect for passing a ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a jackpot game. It is configured to change the performance mode of the performance executed at the time of winning (at the end of V round) and at the time of ending of the jackpot game. Further, the effect mode at the time of V winning and the effect mode at the time of the ending of the jackpot game are changed depending on whether or not the V notification effect is being executed. In this way, in order to enable the performance that is variably set based on the presence or absence of the V prize to be executed at a different timing (at the time of the ending) from the time of the V prize, the presence or absence of the V prize is determined according to the setting status of the V prize flag 112j. configured to be identifiable.
The V effect execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the V information effect is to be executed during the big win game, and is set to ON when it is determined to execute the V information effect during the big win game. Specifically, in the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 64), if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 64: Yes), and if this jackpot is a probability variable jackpot ( S4703 of FIG. 64: No), it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification effect by referring to the V notification execution selection table 222e. When it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed (S4705 in FIG. 64: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 64).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 65) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 64), if the V winning flag 112j is not set to ON, that is, if the V winning occurs during the jackpot game. If it does not occur, it is referred to (S4802 in FIG. 65), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4802 in FIG. 65: Yes), a process for switching the effect mode of the ending effect is executed ( S4804 in FIG. 65), and then set to OFF (S1804 in FIG. 65).
In this control example, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the jackpot game, and when it is decided to execute the V notification performance, the ending is performed at that time. As the effect mode during the period, it is configured to set the effect mode (see FIGS. 11(b) and 11(d)) for indicating that the variable probability state is set. That is, when the V notification effect is executed during the probability variable jackpot game, the player is notified to that effect at the time when the V prize is won, so even in the ending effect executed during the ending period, the player is notified of the probability change. It is configured such that an effect mode (see FIGS. 11(b) and 11(d)) for indicating that the state is set is set. Therefore, when the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the ending effect is switched to the effect mode (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(c)) for indicating that the time saving state is set. Execute the process.
On the other hand, when the V notification effect is not executed during the probability variable jackpot game, even if the V prize is won, the player is not notified to that effect, and the time saving state is set as the effect mode of the ending effect. (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(c)) is set in advance. Therefore, even if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, it is necessary to execute the process of switching the effect mode of the ending effect. None.
The subordinate time reduction counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period in which the time reduction state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of the jackpot game), A predetermined value (“100” in this control example) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n becomes "0", normal symbols are displayed. It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the sub-time reduction counter 223n, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In addition, in each control example to be described later, an element with the same reference numeral (223n) may be referred to as a time-saving counter, but the meaning is the same.

The special continuous notice flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is satisfied during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, and It is set to ON when the condition for executing the effect is satisfied. When the special continuation notice flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period is set in which the operation to the operating means can be effectively discriminated, and a specific operation is performed to the operating means during the special effective period. In the case, continuous announcement effect is executed.
Specifically, in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 61), which is part of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 59) of the audio lamp control device 113, the special figure winning information command (corresponding to the special symbol In the special figure winning information command processing (see S4406 in FIG. 62) executed when receiving the winning information command), the current is during the high-speed fluctuation period (the value of the short time counter 223n is greater than 75) (S4502 of FIG. 62: Yes), when it is determined to execute the continuous announcement effect by referring to the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d (S4506 of FIG. 62: Yes), it is set to ON ( S4507 in FIG. 62).
Then, in the special figure 2 production mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 68) for selecting the variation production corresponding to the second special symbol variation, the chance mode executed when the "chance mode" is set In the middle effect setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 69), the setting status of the special continuous notice flag 223o is referred to (S5210 in FIG. 69), and if it is set to ON, the operation to the frame button 22 is enabled. As a distinguishable special effective period, the special effective time timer 223s is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (S5211 in FIG. 65) and then turned off.
In this way, a special valid period is set in which the operation to the operating means is determined to be valid only when the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied, and the player specifies the operating means within the special valid period. By making it possible to execute the continuous announcement performance only when the operation of (1) is executed, the player can be motivated to play the game to execute the continuous announcement performance. In addition, a plurality of information for executing the continuous notice effect (information indicating whether the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect are satisfied, information indicating the period for which the special effective period is set (set period), , information indicating the operation contents to be performed on the operation means for executing the continuous advance notice effect), by varying the notification mode of the notification effect for informing the player, the difficulty level of executing the continuous notice effect is facilitated. can be variably adjusted.

In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to establish the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (when it does). As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to execute the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, when the player executes a specific operation on the operation means outside the special effective period in a state where the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect are satisfied, the player can set the timing at which the special effective period is set. It is preferable to configure so as to execute a guidance notification effect to guide to. As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation means more willingly, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
The performance mode storage area 223p is a storage area for storing various performance modes set during the high probability state of the normal symbol, and different performance modes are stored according to the value of the short time counter 223n. Then, when determining the current presentation mode, the stored presentation mode is read. Specifically, in the chance mode production setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 69), the value of the reduced time counter 223n is read (S5201 in FIG. 69), and the production mode corresponding to the read value (high speed period ( high-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) are set and stored. Then, when the high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, the stored information is cleared.
The continuous notice execution flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the continuous notice effect is set as the variable effect of the third symbol, and is set to ON when the continuous notice effect is being executed. Then, in the chance mode production setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 69), the setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 69), and when it is set to ON (S5208 in FIG. 69: Yes), continuous notice An effect mode corresponding to the effect is determined. Then, it is set to OFF when the continuous announcement effect ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the setting of a different effect mode that does not correspond to the continuous advance notice effect in the new variable effect executed during the continuous advance notice effect.
The SW effective time timer 223r is a timer for measuring the operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the variable display period of the third symbol, and when the operation effective period is set. , a value corresponding to the length of the operation valid period is set, and the value is decremented as time elapses. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to zero. In this way, by setting the operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22, the effect (operation effect) executed when the operation means (frame button 22) is operated is not excessively executed. can be suppressed.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as the operation means that the player can operate. When a plurality of operation means are provided, different operation effective periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing the SW effective time timer 223r for each operation means, it is possible to set the operation effective period of each operation means in duplicate.
The special valid time timer 223s is set to the frame button 22 only when the effect setting process during the chance mode (see S5012 in FIG. 69) is executed while the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON. is a timer for measuring the operation effective period (special operation effective period) that determines whether the operation is effective, and when the special operation effective period is set, the value It is configured so that it is set and the value is decremented as time passes. Then, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 70), it is determined whether or not the special operation valid period is valid (S5306 in FIG. 70). 70 S5306: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively handled. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated within the normal operation valid period (the period when the value of the SW valid time timer 223r is greater than 0), and when the special operation valid period (the value of the special valid time timer 223s is 0) A different operation effect is executed depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated within the special operation effective period. , It is constructed so that a continuous advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of special symbol variation periods from the next executed special symbol variation to the end of the target special symbol variation. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, the background mode is configured to shift to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period in which the background mode transition is suppressed by the normal operation of the frame button 22, the execution of the background mode transition alone can increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot.
The in-operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and when the player measures and presses the frame button 22, The value of the counter is updated. Based on the value measured by the in-operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 70).
The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.
The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).
The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39. FIG. FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.
The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .
Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.
The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.
Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.
Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.
On the other hand, NAND-type flash memories generally have a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.
The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .
The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.
The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.
In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.
The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .
Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.
In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.
The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.
The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.
The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.
When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .
When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.
When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.
On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.
The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.
When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.
Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.
Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.
In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 71) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 71) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .
By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.
Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.
The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 39) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in
The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.
In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.
Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.
Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.
As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.
Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.
Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.
The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.
The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.
As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.
In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.
The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the special figure ball opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.
The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 71).
Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 35 . FIG. 35 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 35( c ), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a “○” pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a “○” at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.
The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.
Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the special-figure entrance 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image 35(b) and 35(c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.
Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in a special symbol entrance 64 while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.
Returning to FIG. 34, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 36A and 36B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 36(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage,""riverstage," and "empty stage," respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage." .
As shown in FIG. 36, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.
When it is determined to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.
On the other hand, the back image of the back E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.
When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the third pattern display device 81 displays a repeated back image that returns to the back image showing the morning glow.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, is stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 in the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, the image data corresponding to positions a to d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.
On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Also, image data corresponding to the back side E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the power is turned on.
Here, in order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all back images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during the interval b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, fluctuations will start. When the change of the stage is decided by lottery at the time, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to immediately display the initial position of the back BD with the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear faces B to D, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to turn the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .
Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the back face E, the image data of the remaining image is displayed using the image data resident in the back face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range of the image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. After that, by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as time elapses.
Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 in the rear-side images B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 34) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.
In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.
Returning to FIG. 34, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.
In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加
Further, in this control example, the third pattern is displayed in a different display mode according to the set background mode (back image). Therefore, the display image data of the third pattern corresponding to the background mode after switching is stored in the third pattern area 235d every time the background mode is switched. This eliminates the need to store the image data for all the third designs corresponding to all the background modes in the third design area 235d, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

In this control example, the background mode can be switched by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22). There is Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the background mode before switching is not erased from the third pattern area 235d for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after switching the background mode. As a result, even if the background mode is frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the process of storing the image data in the third pattern area 235d from being complicated. Also, the third pattern storage area 235d may be configured to store image data of a plurality of third patterns corresponding to each of a plurality of background modes in advance.
The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.
The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.
Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately. Note that the control for setting an error notification such as an error message when the occurrence of various errors is detected is another form of the control for setting a specific notification mode in the 63rd control example described later, and the execution of the error notification. The control for terminating the error notification, which is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the error corresponding to the error is resolved, is the control for setting a specific notification mode in the 63rd control example described later. is at least another form of control.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.
The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.
The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.
It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.
In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.
That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.
The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.
The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.
The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.
Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.
The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.
The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.
The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.
Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.
The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.
The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.
In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.
Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the back face type, when specifying to display a back face image different from back faces A to E, information specifying which back face image is to be displayed is also described.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.
In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.
Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.
Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.
On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁
In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.
In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 37) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.
The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 39), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .
Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.
Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.
If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.
The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 38). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 38).
The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.
It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 38, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.
When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 39), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 38, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.
When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.
Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.
As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.
The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.
The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.
The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 71). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 83(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 73(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 73(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6308 in FIG. 73(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 74 to 79) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 80 to 82) are executed.
Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 83(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 83(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 84) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.
The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 39) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.
While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 39), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.
While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 39) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.
As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.
As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 73(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 82) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.
Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 39), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.
As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.
In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.
Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .
The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.
In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.
In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.
Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .
The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .
The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).
Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 73(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 80). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to
The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.
The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".
Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 84). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 84). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.
The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 85).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.
The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 73B) is performed.
That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.
After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 79A). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 84), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 84). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.
The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 79(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.
The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S7221 in FIG. 80). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 75(a), S6705 in FIG. 76(a), S6805 in FIG. 76(b) , S6905 in FIG. 77). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.
The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 80) (S7214 in FIG. 80). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 75(a), S6705 in FIG. 76(a), S6805 in FIG. 76(b), FIG. 77, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 40 to 56. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.
In this first control example, as described above, in a state where both the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) are stored, It is configured to preferentially execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Also, while the jackpot game is being executed, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable prize winning device 65, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured so that Furthermore, as an end condition for ending the probability variable state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in addition to the end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is configured to provide a termination condition that is satisfied when executed.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).
Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, 99, 999) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.
Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process associated with entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.
After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 41) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination of special symbols based on each counter value acquired, and in the determined variable display mode by predetermined control, Control the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display, set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and determine the result ( Control is executed to stop and display in a display mode showing the result of the determination of success or failure. The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 41) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.
In the processing of S201, if it is determined that the special symbols are not being hit (during the jackpot game) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202). ), if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter Obtain the value of 203d (the number of holdings of variation display based on the first special symbol lottery N1) and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings of variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2). (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.
After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S208.
On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (S210).

In the processing of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the counter 203d (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.
After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207 (S213), and the processing is changed to the processing of S208. to move to. In the process of S208 executed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIGS.
In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214). If the variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of S215, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated corresponding to the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and then the process of S215 is executed. It is updated (decremented) each time. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S215 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 (S216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to E is determined.
In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. , the green LED is lit, and when the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), and the values of the time reduction counter 203h and probability variation counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219). ), the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the processing of S218, when the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in FIG. 51) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, S1901: Yes By branching, an opening command is set (S1902). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.
In the process of S217, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, the update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.
The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during an external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent to. When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the process of S220, a special figure confirmation command is set (S220), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S301). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 24(a)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery is performed. A result (determination result) is acquired (S302).
When the process of S302 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (S303), and if it is determined to be a big win (S303: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to a big win. (S304), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2, set the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (S305), and finish this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S303 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S303: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S306), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).
In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 42), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not it is set (S401).

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S401: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 25 (a) to (c)) and acquired The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g state) is read (S404).
Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 , to set the special figure variation pattern command (S406). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (S1801 in FIG. 51 ) to the audio lamp controller 113 .
Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S407), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (S408), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and the process is terminated. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, a rough type such as reach out or non-reach. 51, and is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 51) of the main process (FIG. 51) of the main controller 110. FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 41) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S221). In this update process (S221), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (at the time of fluctuation stop), it is a process that is executed, and the remaining period of the period in which the probability fluctuation state is continuously set is updated, Processing for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.
When the update process (S221) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203i is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current is a high probability state of special symbols (S501), and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 0 If it is determined to be greater than (S501: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted (updated) by 1 (S502), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203i after updating is 0 (S503 ), when it is determined to be 0 (S503: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In addition, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S501 (S501: No), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not currently in the high probability state of the special symbol. The process of S502 to S504 described above for updating is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.
Also, in the process of S503, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is greater than 0, even if the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state) continues (S503: No) , the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.
In the process of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and when it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, when the current is a normal symbol high probability state (S505: Yes), time saving 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203h (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S507). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the process of S507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, the current game state is set (S509), and the process ends. Also, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S505 (S505: No), or in the process of S507 it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 If so (S507: No), the process proceeds directly to S509.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and if the starting winning is achieved, Up to the maximum number of reserved balls (up to 4 in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is the process of storing each.
Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) will be described below.
In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S601). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S602), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).
In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S604), and the voice lamp control device 113 A reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first ball entrance 64 (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) is set (S605).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.
Also, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or in the process of S603, the number of currently held balls for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (S603: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S607.
Next, each process from S607 to S612 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entrance 64) executed in each process from S601 to S606. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
After executing each process from S601 to S612, prefetching process is executed (S613), and this process ends.

This look-ahead processing (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, but it is determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. A process for determining the result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like is executed. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination of validity, the determined variation pattern, the type of stop, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but this is not the only option. For example, when there is a new start winning prize, the validity of all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b It may be configured to execute processing for determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like.
Also, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined. Accordingly, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.
As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added, information about the added prize Although it is configured to execute the prefetching process (S613) based on (winning information), it is not limited to this, for example, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is If it is determined to be the upper limit number (4) (S603: No), that is, if the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, look ahead. It may be configured so that the process (S613) can be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.
Next, referring to FIG. 46, the look-ahead process (S613), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S613).

In the look-ahead process (S613 in FIG. 46), first, a first hit random number, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 is read (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S702).
Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S704), After that, this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S703 is not a big hit (S703: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the lost winning and the variation pattern is issued. set (S705), and then terminate this process.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S704 or S705 includes the above-described information for indicating the result of winning/failure determination (information that has a different meaning based on the result of winning/failure determination), and common information of S701. The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51).
On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.
In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.
By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.
Further, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which prefetching processing is executed and the success/failure determination is predicted in advance in the prefetching processing. Or set information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b as a winning command, and received at the voice lamp control device 113 side It may be configured to predict the result of winning/failure determination based on the information included in the winning command.
With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.
Next, referring to FIG. 47, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc., and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery). (Processing for executing normal design variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal design variation to be performed, processing for updating normal design variation during execution, processing for stopping normal design variation, result of normal design lottery Processing to determine the game content of the normal figure per game executed when is a hit) is executed.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 47), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, if it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) is currently executable (S802: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f A value (M) is acquired (S803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804).
When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S804 (S804: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S805). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of S804 (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied, the retained memory is stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning prize information.
Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time-saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current state is the high-probability state of normal symbols (during time-saving) (S808), and the time-saving counter 203h is set to on. If it is determined (S808: Yes), the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 24(b)) (S809) , S811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24 (b)) for low probability time Based on the hit determination value, the success or failure determination result is obtained (S810), and the process proceeds to S811.
In the process of S811, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a win (S811), and if it is determined to be a win (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the win is displayed. The display mode is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, in the process of S811, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (no) (S811: No), the display mode of "x" is set as the display mode when losing. (S813), and the process proceeds to S814.
In the process of S814, it is determined whether the current game state is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S814), and during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols). If it is determined that there is (S814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S815), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S814 that it is not in the time saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (S816), and this process is finished.
In addition, in this control example, as described above, depending on the set probability state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is varied, but without being limited to this, regardless of the set game state , 3 seconds may be set as the variable time. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set, a short fluctuation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the game state, or the fluctuation time can be changed according to the number of normal pattern pending balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.
In this manner, by varying the degree of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 according to the length of the set normal symbol variation time, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is changed. Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.
On the other hand, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being changed and displayed (S802: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S817), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S817: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the processing of S817 (S817: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S818). In the processing of S818, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S812 or S813 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S818, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S812 or the process of S813. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).
Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S819). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (no) (S819: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal pattern is a hit (S819: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is checked to see if the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state). Refer to it and determine (S820), and when it is determined that it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (S820: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is 1 as the game content of the game per normal symbol The game contents (release operation) of 2 times per second are set (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.
On the other hand, in the process of S820, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (normal symbol high probability state) (S820: No), as the game content of the normal symbol per game, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds × 1 The contents of the game (opening action) are set (S821), and the process proceeds to S822.
In the process of S822, based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is set (S822), and the process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, based on the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is valid (timing of performing the processing of S808 to S811) Probability of a normal symbol set at the timing (timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S817) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a by executing the judgment of the normal symbol. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).
That is, in this control example, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing regarding special symbols ( It is configured so that the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal design is variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.
In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the open pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set ) was a problem.
Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In addition, in this control example, the normal design success/failure determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the success/failure determination of the normal symbol, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to open for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is open. It may be configured to set
Also, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal design lottery results, normal design fluctuation fluctuation time, normal design per scenario, etc.) determined in the normal design fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 40) , commands indicating the contents of various information are set, and output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 51) of the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51).
Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the details of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area. In addition, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual right/wrong determination is executed (normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 47) right/wrong determination (see S811) is executed This is a process for obtaining the lottery results (whether or not winning judgment results) in advance.
In the through-gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S902), and then , determines whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S903).

In the process of S903, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S903: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S904 ), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), and the lottery result is acquired in advance based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(b)) ( S906), set the winning information command for normal drawing including the normal hit determination result (preliminary determination result acquired in the processing of S906) (S907), and terminate this processing.
The normal figure winning information command set in the process of S907 is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each control example described above. be. By constructing in this way, it is possible to previously discriminate the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved and stored normal symbol lottery right, and to execute the performance based on the preliminary determination result.
Specifically, in the state where the chance zone is set, that is, for the general pattern received in the state where the second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the normal pattern per game being executed during the normal state When the winning information command includes the information indicating winning of the normal symbol, it is possible to execute the effect of continuing the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is all completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal game is executed, the first special symbol lottery As the production mode of the variable production executed correspondingly, the production mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the production mode in which the third symbol is fluctuated in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 6(b)) is not used. It is preferable to configure so that an effect mode corresponding to the 2 special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is fluctuated in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 8(b)) is set. By configuring in this way, when a game per normal pattern is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in a normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the production effect can be enhanced.
In addition, when the chance zone is not finished even though the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player is notified that the next normal pattern winning game will be executed soon. can be grasped, the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example, as a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo variation performance of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is executed. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone will be extended.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.
The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this start-up process.
This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 50), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not stored (S1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1712.
If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.
In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.
On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .
Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process which will be described later.
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 51), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is determined. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 41) and the start winning process (see FIG. 45). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 51), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 42) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.
Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.
When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 are executed (S1804).
Details of the jackpot control processing (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S822 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 47), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S821 and the processing of S823 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.
Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 43), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. do. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.
Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.
Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 43) has ended, it is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. After finishing the variable display, the stop symbols are stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 43). .

Furthermore, in this control example, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating an omission. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.
Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S815 and the process of S816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 47), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 47), it is executed in the second symbol display device. Ending the variation display, and the stop symbol (second symbol) in the display mode set by the processing of S812 or S813 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 47) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device ( display).
After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the above-described processes after S1801 are repeatedly executed.
On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.
Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.
In addition, in the processing of S1809, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 49 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1813 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1813), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .
It should be noted that the processing of S1809 is performed at the time when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial setting processing (Fig. 50, S1701) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the content of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 51) of the main controller 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, various It is a process for executing an effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.
In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203j is ON (S1901). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON (S1901: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON (S1903). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is off (S1901: No), then whether the special symbol jackpot is currently on (that is, the jackpot flag 203k is on) ) or not (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is off) (S1904: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is ON) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round. (S1905).
In the process of S1905, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1906 ), the process ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the round currently being executed (S1907). . Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (S1907: Yes), an ending command is set (S1908), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

In this first control example, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the process of determining the jackpot type using the first hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 25(a)) is executed (S402 in FIG. 43). , an ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the processing of S1908, the ending command for display corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In addition, unlike the first control example, the length of the ending period is not set when the jackpot is won, but the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V)) The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined in accordance with .
Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 52), when it is determined that the ending period start timing (the end timing of the final round), whether the V prize was won during this jackpot game (probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON, the ending display for 17 seconds indicating that the probability variation state is set (Fig. 11 (b), (d) reference) to set 17 seconds as the ending period of the jackpot game, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203m is not set to ON, 15 seconds indicating that the time saving state is set In order to display the ending (see FIGS. 11(a) and 11(c)), the ending period of the jackpot game may be set to 15 seconds.
By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of changing the game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the game result during the jackpot game, the ending corresponding to the game state actually set. A period can be set.
In addition, in the case of using the configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game result during the jackpot game, any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, after the round game of the first round is completed (the ball is placed in the specific area (After the round game that can be awarded to the V gate 65V) is completed), the presence or absence of the V prize is determined, and based on the determination result, the round game of the second round to the final round is executed. It may be configured to set the ending period of the jackpot game during the period.

Furthermore, in the above example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not there is a V prize during the jackpot game. The ending period of the jackpot game is set in advance based on the type of the jackpot, and specifically, the ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when winning the variable jackpot, and 15 seconds when winning the normal jackpot. When it is necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the game result during the jackpot game, that is, to win a V prize during the jackpot game even though the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is not possible, the length of the preset ending period may be varied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the frequency of setting the length of the ending period during the jackpot game.
On the other hand, in the processing of S1907, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1909, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S1909: Yes), a big win end process for setting the game state after the big win ends (S1910), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S1909, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1909: No), the winning process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1911), Abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the ball entered into the prize winning opening 65a has been discharged normally (S1912), and then this processing is terminated. The details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG.
Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot action setting process (S1906) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.
When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 53) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S2001). In the process of S2001, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the specification corresponding to the jackpot type An opening pattern of the winning opening 65a is set (S2003).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the contents of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (first round) is different depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), the ball is made to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) as the first round game. It is configured so that a round game that operates the switching valve 65y is executed so as to make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only for a specific period of the jackpot game that is executed for a long period of time, so that the player loses concentration. A game can be executed during a big winning game without any trouble.
In this control example, when the first round of the probability variable jackpot game is executed, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 causes the player to flow down the ball to a specific area (V gate 65V). As a guidance notification mode for indicating that it is a chance period, a V notification effect in which characters "Aim for V" is displayed is configured to be executable. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) in the long-running jackpot game. Furthermore, based on the detecting means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 detects that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). It is configured so that the characters "VGET" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for guidance. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.
It should be noted that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of the conditions. For example, "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. It is preferable to change the character color of , change the size of the display area, or change to characters with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).
In addition, in this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V function for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and by varying the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, the ball moves to a specific gate. It is possible to set a period in which it is easy to flow down and a period in which it is difficult to flow down, but it is not limited to this. By varying the timing of the open state depending on the type of jackpot, it may be possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period during which it is difficult. As a result, since the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be shared, even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is grasped, the big winning game this time easily makes the ball pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it is a game. Further, since the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y can be standardized, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V function (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2001, if it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processing of S2002 and S2003 is skipped, and the opening of the normal specific winning opening 65a is set (S2004). ), and the process proceeds to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2005), and the process ends.
The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.
By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 53), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) in the first round. Can be set. As a result, in the jackpots A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) just by shooting the ball in the first round, so after the jackpot game ends, the variable state ( High probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be set.
Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 52), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S1910), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203m is ON (S2101). In the process of S2101, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203m is ON (S2101: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the big hit, so the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102), and the process proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if the variable probability setting flag 203m is off (S2101: No), the process of S2102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2103.
In the process of S2103, 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2103), and then the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203i (S2104). The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the sub-state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Then, both the flag 203k during the big hit and the variable probability setting flag 203m are set to OFF (S2105), and the process is terminated.
By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 54), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game. can.
Next, the details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1911). This winning process (S1911) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2201). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if it is not the round valid period (S2201: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S2201: Yes), then it is determined whether winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2202), If winning is detected (S2202: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203o is updated by adding 1 (S2203), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning port 65a is detected is set. (S2204), the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2205.
In the processing of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205). On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and the round time has elapsed. If so (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In addition, in the processing of this S2206, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of each round game of this big win. In addition, in this control example, regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds, it is configured so that the end condition of the round game is established by the same round time elapsed and the number of prizes won, but not limited to this, depending on the jackpot type Depending on the number of rounds to be executed, the end conditions of the round game may be changed.
In the processing of S2207, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2207), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S2209), and when it is determined that it is based on the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is turned off (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 2665k is turned on is not set, the process of S2210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the variable probability effective flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. Further, when it is determined in the process of S2205 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), and when it is determined in the process of S2206 that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), The process of S2207 to S2211 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2212.
In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is ON (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is OFF (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203 is ON in the process of S2212 (S2212: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203r is ON (S2217). In the processing of S2217, if the variable probability effective flag 203r is off (S2217: No), this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203r is on (S2217: No), add 1 to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s (S2218), then determine whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is the upper limit value ( S2219). Then, if the value of the variable probability effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, and the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) is monitored to update the variable probability setting flag 203m. Execute the process. As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V), so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being illegally passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) and given a variable probability state.
On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2219: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to OFF (S2220), and the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is reset (S2221 ), the process ends.

Also, in the processing of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213). End this process. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passing counter 203n (S2214), and the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215) , V winning command is set (S2216), and this process is terminated.
Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormality process (S1912) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally. This process is for
In the abnormality process (S1912), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2301), and if not (S2301: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the outlet 65h1 (S2302). In the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not a ball discharge port switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball passing through the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 5B) has detected passage of the ball.
In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203t (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if the ball has not passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is ON (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 (S2305). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit (S2306). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203n and the value of the discharge number counter 203t) wins a prize. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203o) matches (S2307).
In the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period in which the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 5B) is closed (the period in which the switching valve 65y is closed), the ball is illegally flowed into the fourth flow path 65e to (V gate 65V) can be suppressed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203o, the discharge number counter 203t, and the variable probability passing counter 203n are reset (S2311), and the process ends.
By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 56), the occurrence of a problem such as ball clogging occurring inside the variable winning device 65 and the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a not being discharged normally. Early detection and notification are possible.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 70. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.
First, referring to FIG. 57, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.
When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 58), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.
If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.
It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.
If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.
In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be
In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 4). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), an interrupt Permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .
On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).
The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the processing of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4112, and S4113. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.
If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.
In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.
After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.
After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.
After the processing of S4111, command determination processing (S4112) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S4113, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.
On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .
Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.
When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a state command has been received (S4201). End this process. This state command receiving process (S4202) receives the state command indicating the current game state, sets the mode effect mode according to the game state, and sets the corresponding effect mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for displaying (for example, a back image) is set. For example, when a state command indicating a variable probability state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 15 is set, and when a state command indicating a time saving state is received, the chance mode shown in FIG. A display command corresponding to is set. Details of the actually set game state and the switching control of the effect mode in the mode effect to be executed will be described later. The details of this state command reception processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined that the state command is not received in the process of S4201 (S4201: No), then it is determined whether the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203), and if it is determined that it is received (S4203 : Yes), the special figure variation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command is set to ON (S4204), and the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, this processing ends.
If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the special figure stop type command is received (S4206), and if it is determined that it is received (S4206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (first special stop type flag 223e1, second special stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special stop type command is set to ON (S4207), The stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this processing ends.
If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the processing of S4206 (S4206: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). Here, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has been received (S4209: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the corresponding value is set to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the normal symbol It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, when a special symbol reserved ball number command is received, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the number of reserved balls for variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value. do.
Also, when the normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the normal symbol reserved ball number of variable display) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the pending ball number command is that a ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, through gate 67), and the values of various pending ball counters is added, or when executing various fluctuation start processing, when the value of the various reserved ball number counters is subtracted, it is transmitted from the main controller 110, so at the time of starting winning or fluctuation display At each time of setting, the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, by the processing of S4210. It is possible to match the values of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.
Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c possessed by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203d, 203e, and 203d of the main control unit 110. Also, at the time of start winning, at the time of variable display setting, that is, when the number of reserved balls command is notified based on the change of the number of various reserved balls, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. It is possible to modify and match the values of various reserved ball number counters first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of main controller 110.
Also, in the process of S4209, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). In the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4212), and this process ends. This winning command process (S4212) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (sound lamp control device 113 It performs processing for storing (storing) in the prize winning information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and processing for executing an effect (prefetch effect) based on the received prize winning information. Details of the winning command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not the design determination command has been received (S4213), and if it is determined that the design determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), sets the stop display of the third symbol (S4214), and terminates this process. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), then it is determined whether the general map related command has been received (S4215), and if it is determined to have been received (S4215: Yes), the general map Related processing is executed (S4216), and then this processing ends. In addition, the general figure related process is executed (S4216) and detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4215, if it is determined that the general figure related command is not received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the jackpot related command is received (S4217), and if it is determined that it is received (S4217: Yes ), execute a jackpot-related process (S4218), and then terminate this process. A detailed description of the jackpot related process (S4218) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4219), and this process ends.
Next, the state command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4202). This state command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the state command reception processing (S4202) will be described below.
When the status command reception process (S4202) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223g is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4301: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4302).
In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), the display command indicating the normal mode is issued. set (S4303) and proceed to the processing of S4304.

In the processing of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), then the game state after the change It is determined whether it is a time saving state (S4306), and if it is determined that the gaming state is a time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state) (S4306: Yes), the time saving counter 223n A value of 100 is set (S4307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.
In the processing of S4306, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is ON (S4309). If the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the process proceeds to S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is ON (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to OFF (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4304. .
In the process of S4304, the game state set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223g is set in the past state area (S4304), and the information indicated by the received state command is set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223g. The corresponding game state is set (S4305), and this processing ends.
Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of S4308 and S4311, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in this control example, the audio lamp control device 113, based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the types of various display modes ( mode, background), and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, it outputs to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.
In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.
By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating proper information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.
In addition, in this control example, the configuration described above is used, but it is not limited to this, and the current game state and the received variation pattern are set by the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the contents of the winning command process (see S4212) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (S4212). This winning command process (S4212) is set when the winning command (winning information command) is set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, or when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process that is executed when receiving a winning information command for a normal figure or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during a jackpot game.
When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). , It is determined whether the command received this time is a winning information command for normal drawing (S4402), and if it is determined to be a winning information command for normal drawing (S4402: Yes), hit information (normal (S4403) If it is determined that there is winning information (S4403: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, , It is determined whether the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S4404).
Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high probability state of the normal pattern, that is, the normal state (S4404: No), the state that has acquired the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins the normal pattern during the normal state. Since there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, a display command for suggesting the opening of the electric churong is set (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406. When the display command is set in the process of S4405, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control processing of other sound lamp control devices, and the display control device 114 is notified during the normal state. Suggestion effect suggesting that a game per normal is executed and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (open for 5 seconds) (for example, a small display area Dm3 is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 A production that arouses whether or not it will be formed) is executed.
In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed only when the lottery right of the normal symbol lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired during the normal state, but it is not limited to this. Even when it is determined that the winning information command for the normal figure includes winning information indicating a specific outlier winning, it is preferable to configure the above-described suggestive effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to set the case where the game per normal pattern is executed when the suggestive effect is executed and the case where it is not executed, so that the player can predict the game content to be executed in the future. can let

Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired during the normal state, it is configured so that the suggestive effect is executed. Based on the special symbol lottery or the preliminary determination result of the special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing at which the game is actually executed, that is, the general pattern showing the winning per general pattern Execute pre-game state processing for determining whether the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command is executed (timing at which the normal pattern winning game is executed) is normal or not, and in the normal state If it is determined that there is, it may be configured to execute the above-described suggestive effect. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone will be set.
Returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the general figure winning information command is not received (S4402: No), if it is determined that there is no hit information in the process of S4403 (S4403: No), the time saving counter in the process of S4404 If it is determined that the value of 203h is greater than 0 (S4404: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4406.
In the process of S4406, a special figure winning information command process is executed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. The details of this special figure winning information command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S4407, the command received this time is the V winning command (command set when the ball flows down to the variable probability switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S1911 in FIG. 55) (see S2216)). (S4407), and if it is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409. Also, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4409). When the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4409: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to OFF (S4410), a display command for notifying of the V prize is set (S4411), and the V notification is performed. The flag 223m is set to ON (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Also, in the process of S4409, when the V effect execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4413.
In the process of S4413, other processes are executed (S4413), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the contents of the special figure winning information command process (S4406) executed in the winning command process (S4212 in FIG. 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure winning information command process (S4406).
When the special figure winning information command process (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223g (S4501), and the value of the subordinate time reduction counter 223n is It is determined whether or not it is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON (S4503). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the presence or absence of continuous notice is selected using the continuous notice execution selection table 222d (FIG. 31(a)) (S4504). It is determined whether or not there is an advance notice (S4505). If it is determined that the continuous notice will be executed (S4505: Yes), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

Also, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), in the process of S4503, when it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON (S4503 : No), even if it is determined in the process of S4505 that there is no execution of the continuous announcement (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4507.
In the process of S4507, a display command based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command is set (S4507), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the contents of the normal-map related process (S4216) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal map related process (S4216). This general pattern related processing (S4216) includes a general pattern variation pattern command indicating that a normal pattern lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a general pattern per start command indicating that a general pattern per game has started, It is a process that is executed when a normal figure per end command indicating the end of the normal figure per game is received.
When the general pattern related processing (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether the general pattern fluctuation pattern command is received (S4601), and if it is determined that it is received (S4601: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation start for display A command is set (S4602), and then it is determined whether the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is greater than 0, that is, whether it is in a high probability state of normal symbols (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), the normal figure received this time It is determined whether the variation pattern command is a normal pattern lottery corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has been won per normal pattern (S4604), and if it is determined that it is not elected per normal pattern (S4604: No ), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is elected per normal pattern (S4604: Yes), it is a per normal pattern variation in which long open per is executed, so a display command indicating long open standby is set ( S4605), the process ends. The display mode shown in FIG. 7B is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by setting the display command in the process of S4605. As a result, the player can easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will soon be set.
In addition, in this control example, the process of displaying the display mode (the display mode forming the small display area Dm3) shown in FIG. 7B is used based on whether or not the normal symbol variation is the winning variation However, without being limited to this, the display mode shown in FIG. (display mode forming the small display area Dm3) may be displayed.
Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied according to the content of the variation effect (third symbol variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. When a variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, reach performance) is executed in the pattern variation performance, the display area is smaller than when the variation performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, reach performance) is not executed. It is preferable to change the display contents so that the display area of Dm3 becomes smaller. In this way, the display contents are variably controlled by providing a relationship between the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed independently and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, To provide an easy-to-understand game by suppressing the confusion of the player due to the useless provision of a lot of game information.
Returning to FIG. 63, the description is continued. If it is determined that the general pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received in the process of S4601 (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the general pattern per start command is received (S466), and the general pattern per start command is received (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607: No) , set a display command indicating that the button is open for a long time (S4608), and terminate this process. The display mode shown in FIG. 8A is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by setting the display command in the process of S4608. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the long open win is being executed. Also, in the process of S4607, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and the process ends.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the start command per normal pattern is not received (S4606: No), it is determined whether the end command per normal pattern is received (S4609), and if it is determined that it is received ( S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4610), and if it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), then the normal design is reserved. It is determined whether the value of the ball number counter 223h is 1 or more (S4611), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223i is set to ON ( S4612), if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4612: No), a display command indicating entering the chance zone is set (S4613), the special effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S4614), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4610 to S4612, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the determination result described above, this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218). In the jackpot-related processing (S4218), a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.
In the jackpot related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4701). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .
Next, it is determined whether this jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703), and if it is determined that it is a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), enter the chance mode (a time saving state is set). The ending display mode to be shown is set (S4708), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot, the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 31(b)) is used to determine whether or not the V notification effect is executed. is selected (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). If it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), and an ending display mode indicating entry into the super chance mode (variable probability state is set) is set. (S4707), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S4708 process.
That is, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 25, the ending period of different length is set according to the set jackpot type (normal jackpot, variable probability jackpot), and the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing. By configuring in this way, various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information for indicating the number of won prize balls and control during execution) Control for displaying information for indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed. Since there is no need to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process of setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. The ending display mode may be set during the variation, or may be set using the remaining period of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period when the control process is small in the jackpot game period. Also good.
On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4709), and the round number command has been received (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4710), and it is determined whether the current round number is 1 (V round) (S4711). When it is determined that it is one round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4712). When it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4712: Yes), a display command for guiding V winning is set (S4713), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S4711, the number of rounds this time is not one round (V round), that is, when it is determined that a round game other than the first round is started (S4711: No), in the process of S4712, V Also when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this process is terminated as it is.
If it is determined in the process of S4709 that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714). ), the ending process is executed (S4715), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this process ends.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command is received in the above-described jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 64), and the ending display mode executed during the ending period. is to execute a process for finally determining the
When the ending process (S4715) is executed, it is first determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801), and if it is determined to be ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning The flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4804), and this processing ends. Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON in the process of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and the V effect execution flag 223k is determined. is off (S4802: No), the process proceeds directly to S4804.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4802, if it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802: Yes), a display switching command is set for switching the display mode of the second half period (7 seconds) of the ending period. (S4803), and the process proceeds to S4804.
When the display switching command is set in the processing of S4803, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the second half period of the ending period set corresponding to the setting of the probability changing state in advance (Fig. 120 ( d) reference) to the display mode (refer to FIG. 120(c)) corresponding to setting of the time saving state is executed. In this control example, since the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, the content of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be described. FIG. 1711 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .
In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4901). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4901: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S4905 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), then for notifying the display control device 114 Execute the special figure 1 effect mode setting process for generating the display variation pattern command based on the acquired variation pattern type (S4903), and shift the data corresponding to the first special symbol out of the winning information storage area 223b. (S4904), the process proceeds to S4905. The details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S4905, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM223 is ON (S4905). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4905: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so of S4909 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), then the special figure 2 effect mode setting process is executed Then (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. The details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S4909, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4909: No), the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 Since it is in a state where it has not been done, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or special figure that is set to on 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is set to OFF (S4910), then the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), and then this process is executed finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described. Figure 67 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S4903). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variable effect of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66). A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state is executed.
When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5002), and the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n after the subtraction is displayed. A command is set (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5004.
In the processing of S5004, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If the super chance mode is determined (S5005: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether there is (S5007). When it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the production mode (production contents) is determined based on the probability variable production selection table 222c (see FIG. 30) (S5008), and the production determined A display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S5009), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5009 described above. In the process of S5010, when it is determined that the game is in the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to the process of S5009. The details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described. Figure 68 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S4907). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the variable effect of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66), and is set. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state is executed.
When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal state (S5101), and when it is determined that it is a normal state (S5101: Yes), A command for display indicating entering the chance zone is set (S5102), then the special effect in progress flag 223i is set to ON (S5103), and the effect mode is based on the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 29). is determined (S5104), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5105), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106), If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the short time counter 223n (S5107), and a display command is set to indicate the value of the short time counter 223n after the subtraction ( S5108), and shifts to the processing of S5109. In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5109.
In the processing of S5109, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5110). If the super chance mode is determined (S5110: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether there is (S5112). When it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the production mode (production content) is determined based on the probability variable production selection table 222c (see FIG. 30) (S5113), and S5105 described above. , and terminate this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, in the process of S5110, when it is determined that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to the process of S5115. The details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5114 (S5012)) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S5115, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the process of S5105 described above is executed, and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the effect setting process during chance mode (S5012 (S5114)) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 shows the effect setting process during chance mode (S5012 (S5114)) executed in this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 67) and special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 68) ) is a flowchart showing.
In the chance mode production setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the read value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 99 (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high speed period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), then it is determined whether the read value of the reduced time counter 223n is 79 (S5204). When it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), the normal first period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the value of the reduced time counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), it is then determined whether the read value of the reduced time counter 223n is 49 (S5206). When it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5206, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution flag 223q is ON (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is ON (S5208: Yes), the continuous effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5208, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether or not the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON (S5210: Yes), the special valid time timer is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (S5211), and the special continuous notice flag 223o is set OFF (S5212). ), the process proceeds to S5213. Also in the process of S5210, when it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the process proceeds to S5213.
In the process of S5213, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5214), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to enhance the effect. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute an effect (operation effect) corresponding to the player's operation.
In this control example, the player can operate the frame button 22 by a plurality of operation methods. A "long press" in which the button 22 is kept pressed for a long time (two seconds or longer) can be determined. Then, different operation presentations can be executed according to the determined operation content. As a result, the frame button 22 can be operated by various operation methods so as to execute various operation presentations for the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as distinguishable operation methods, but the number of operation methods may be one, or three or more. Also, in this control example, the frame button 22 is the only type of operation means that can be operated by the player. Then, the discriminable operation method may be configured so as to be discriminated not only by operations on individual operation means but also by a combination of operation contents executed on a plurality of operation means. In addition, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, a first operation means and a second operation means), when the first operation is performed on the first operation means and when the second operation means is performed, It may be configured such that it is determined that the same operation has been performed (determined as the same operation method) when the second operation is performed. With this configuration, for example, when the arrangement position of the first operation means and the arrangement position of the second operation means are separated, the player can select the operation means that is easy to operate and enjoy the operation. It can be carried out.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107 in FIG. 70), first, whether the SW valid time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is set (whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is greater than 0). ) is determined (S5301). It should be noted that this SW valid time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when the variation pattern effect using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S5301: Yes), the value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW valid time counter 223r (S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5303.
In the process of S5303, it is determined whether or not the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special valid time timer is subtracted (S5304), and the process proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.
In the process of S5305, it is determined whether or not the value of the in-operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not it is within the valid time (S5306). If it is determined that it is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the value of the in-operation counter 223t (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. ). If it is determined in the process of S5306 that it is not within the valid time (S5306: No), and if it is determined in the process of S5307 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5307: No), the process of S5308 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S5309.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is subtracted (S5312), and it is determined whether the subtracted value of the operating counter 223t is 0. (S5313). If it is determined that the decremented value of the in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the process proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the decremented value of the in-operation counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the in-operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the process proceeds to S5314.
In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current chance mode is in progress (S5314). If it is determined that the current is in the chance mode (S5314: Yes), an effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 32) (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309.
In the process of S5314, if it is determined that the current is not in the chance mode (S5314: No), the button effect corresponding to the current operation method and the content of the effect being executed is set (S5316), and the button effect of S5309 is set. Go to processing. In the processing of S5309, other button processing (background change, etc.) is executed.
Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. It is configured so that the period is 0. In other words, the number of operation presentations executed during the period in which each effective time is set is one. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of the operation presentation.

Note that the processing for the remaining periods of the SW valid time and the special valid time is not limited to this. within seconds), when the operation of the frame button 22 is received (S5310 of FIG. 70: No, S5313: Yes), during the special symbol fluctuation period, it may be configured to set a new effective time . By constructing in this way, the number of operation performances executed during one special symbol variation period can be varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 .
<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 85. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.
First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.
Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.
On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.
When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.
Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.
On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.
Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.
Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.
After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.
After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 71). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 71) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.
By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.
On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.
Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.
In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.
Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.
Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.
Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.
Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.
The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.
When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 83(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 83(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (Fig. 73(b) S6308) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 73(b)) are executed.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .
Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.
In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is voice lamp control from the main control device 110 When received via a device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.
After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73(a). FIG. 73(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.
In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). FIG. 73(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.
As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.
Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 73(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.
In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 79. FIG.
In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.
After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.
Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates the drawing list shown in FIG. 39, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.
On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 79, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402). The command types are analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area (S6403).
Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.
Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.
In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.
If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.
On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.
Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.
Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.
Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out) stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).
Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.
Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.
It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.
Returning to FIG. 74, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.
Details of the opening command processing (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 76(a). FIG. 76(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .
In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 74, the description is continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.
Details of the round number command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG. 76(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .
In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).
Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 74, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.
Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .
In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).
Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 74, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.
Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .
This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 66) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main control device Display stop command ( normal stop command).
In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.
Returning to FIG. 74, the description is continued. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.
Details of the notification command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. In this notification command process, a process corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.
This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).
Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.
In this control example, among various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.
Returning to FIG. 74, the description is continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. 79(a). FIG. 79(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .
In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.
In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.
Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.
Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.
Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. 79(b). FIG. 79(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.
In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.
If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.
Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.
In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 75(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.
Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.
Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.
In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 80, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).
Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).
In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as
Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.
In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.
In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.
After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.
Here, returning to FIG. 80, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.
Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.
Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .
It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.
On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.
As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.
In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.
The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 83(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.
In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 83(b). FIG. 83(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.
In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.
As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .
As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 74 to 79) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 80 to 82) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 84) (see S7501: No in FIG. 83(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.
Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
Next, referring to FIG. 84, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.
In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).
In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.
In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.
In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.
If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.
On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".
By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.
Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.
Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.
The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.
In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 39) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.
When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.
Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.
When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.
In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.
Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 73(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .
After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured so as not to be executed in parallel (in parallel). The lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, the lottery is executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, it is configured to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the normal design is set (time saving state, variable state) than when the low probability state of the normal design is set (normal state) In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol, a ball entrance accompanied by an electric accessory 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed when winning a normal symbol. When the ball enters (the second ball entrance 640), it is configured to be able to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. In other words, when the game is played in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Taking this opportunity, it is possible to set the high probability state of the normal design, and when the high probability state of the normal design is set, so as to execute the lottery of the second special design that is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special design. It consists of By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly varied according to the set game state, so it is expected that a game state with a high degree of advantage to the player will be set. However, it is possible to make the player voluntarily play the game.
In addition, when a win is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. there is By configuring in this way, even in the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to temporarily provide a period in which the second special symbol lottery can easily be executed, so that the normal state can be maintained. A player who is playing a game can be made to execute a game aiming at a special symbol lottery jackpot winning and a game aiming at a winning lottery in a normal symbol lottery to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. can be suppressed.
Furthermore, in this control example, the production mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation production executed on the display surface of the third design display device 81 corresponding to the second special design lottery executed during the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol that is present, that is, the number of special symbols 2 reserved. Specifically, as a production mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation production that is executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-loss fluctuation production showing that the lottery result is out in the first half of the fluctuation production is executed, and in the second half period, the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-loss variation performance is restarted to execute the pseudo-win variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win, The number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo hit variation performance is configured to be variable corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. By constructing in this way, the variation effect of pseudo-stopping the third pattern a plurality of times until the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big hit. can be executed. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a big hit after the second special symbol lottery has been conducted a plurality of times.
As a result, even if the player wins the jackpot with the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special symbol lottery that is executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the normal game. On the other hand, since it can be made to think that you have won a jackpot because you have acquired multiple special 2 reservations during the normal game, you can play a game to acquire the special 2 reservation more motivated during the normal game. can be done.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed when the first special symbol lottery is executed as the above-mentioned pseudo-hit variation effect. To execute a variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface (the performance mode of the special figure 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery) It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the special figure 2 fluctuation production is repeated in a situation where the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained, so that the player is given a pseudo fluctuation production. It can be difficult to identify what is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo fluctuation production imitating the special figure 1 fluctuation production is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so the game It is possible to execute a variation performance with unexpectedness for the person.
In this control example, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set as the performance mode of the notification performance in advance (at the start of the jackpot game), Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, and the ball passes through the specific gate. When the ball is flowing down, the notification performance of the performance mode set in advance is executed, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the performance mode of the notification performance is switched.
Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the variable probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the variable probability jackpot that is advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. Configure. As a result, the fact that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set. On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.
In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, the jackpot ending is performed. If the effect mode of the period is simply switched to the effect mode that is executed during the ending period of the normal winning game, the length of the ending period is different, so that the incongruent notification effect is executed during the ending period. I had a problem. In addition, if a dedicated effect mode is set in advance only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate in the probability variable jackpot game, image data (performance data) for that effect mode is displayed in advance. There was a problem that the character ROM 234 of the control device 114 had to be stored, which increased the storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, and during the probability variable jackpot game. When the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the ending period of the normal winning game. Configure. As a result, a notification performance is executed without providing a dedicated performance mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the variable probability big winning game, and without making the player feel uncomfortable. can do.
In addition, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. is not limited to this, for example, from the final round period of the jackpot game By executing the notification performance, the notification performance that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period may be executed, or the jackpot game is finalized for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuously executing the round performance during the round period and then executing the notification performance, the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period. In this case, if the final round period of the jackpot game is determined by the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game rather than by the number of added rounds obtained by adding the number of executed rounds, the remaining number of times of the counter is determined. It can be said that it is a performance that is executed using
Since this V winning device 2650 has the same content as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 78 to 80) of the eighth control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. . Also, the configuration of the right side area of the variable display unit 80, and the ball flowing down the right side area to the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 Since the rate of entering the ball is the same as that of the left area described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this control example, even if the player executes the right-handed game, regardless of the set game state, and thus regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the left-handed game It is configured so that the same privilege is granted even if Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his or her mood.
In this control example, as shown in FIG. 114, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is symmetrical. It may be configured so that there is no large deviation between the case of performing a left-handed game and the case of performing a right-handed game. The number of ball entry holes 63 is made smaller than the number of ball entry holes 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first ball entry hole 64 is higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. A right-handed game is more difficult to obtain a prize ball than a right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and a right-handed game is easier to obtain a prize ball than a left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game in any game method. It is possible to make the right-handed game more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game in the game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 (the game in the time-saving state or the variable probability state). .

In each of the above control examples, whenever the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.
In each of the above control examples, the number of winnings in the first ball entrance 64 is set to four times at maximum, and the passage through the through gate 67 is set to be set to one time at most. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to
Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114 .
In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Moreover, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state, the left side of the game board 13 Although it is constructed such that a left-handed game aiming at the area is executed, it may be constructed so that the area targeted by the different game board 13 is changed according to the game state. For example, in the case of the normal state, the game board A left-handed game aiming at the left side area of 13 is executed, and in the case of the time saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a left-handed game is played during the time saving state. may be executed, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.
Furthermore, in each of the above-described control examples, even when any game state is set and when a jackpot game is set, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. However, without being limited to this, when the time-saving state is set and during the jackpot game, the right-handed game may be executed, and the left-handed game may be executed only during the normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.
In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means capable of determining the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation of the means.
Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when the advantageous gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, during a predetermined period (until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times), A high-speed fluctuation period in which a short-time fluctuation time is selected can be set, and during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition performance is not executed (hardly performed) when the frame button 22 is operated. there is As a result, the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect during the period when the short-term fluctuation time is likely to be selected, and the player grasps the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes it difficult to

In addition, in the first control example, the first operation for the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, that is, in the state where the normal state is set, the operation for executing the background mode transition effect ("normal push") ) is performed, an operation effect in a different effect mode from the background mode transition effect is executed. As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the first control example, by executing the second operation (“long press”) other than the above-described first operation (“normal press”) even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the transition to the background mode can be performed. The production is configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the background mode transition effect to the player who intends to execute the background mode transition effect even though it is difficult to grasp the stop display mode of the third symbol. can. In this first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been performed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, so that it is possible to suppress excessive difficulty in grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol.
It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first operation processing executed by performing the first operation on the operating means is performed by performing the operation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The technical idea that prevents (makes it difficult to be) executed even if the first operation is performed on the means may be used for other techniques. ), and when a liquid crystal display is used as the third pattern display device 81, a brightness adjustment process for adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal display is applied as the above-described first operation process, and a predetermined condition is established. If not (for example, if the special symbol variation is not executed), the first operation process can be executed, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, if the special symbol variation is executed) may be configured to make execution of the first operation process difficult.
Further, as the above-described predetermined conditions, not only the presence or absence of special symbol variations, but also conditions that are established when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or conditions that are established during a jackpot game may be set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the above-described first operation is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, the first processing for notifying that the operation processing will not be executed). Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the first operation process is not executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute another operation presentation that is not related to the first operation processing.
In addition, even when the predetermined condition described above is satisfied, the first operation process described above is executed by executing the second operation different from the first operation, as in the present control example. good to do In addition, in the first control example, the first operation and the second operation can be performed by differentiating the operation method for one operation means (frame button 22), but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of operation means are provided in the pachinko machine 10, the first operation is made executable by operating the first operation means (for example, the frame button 22), and the second operation means (for example, the frame button 22) is provided in addition to the The second operation may be executed by operating the frame button). Also, in this case, it is preferable that the second operation is more difficult to execute than the first operation. 2. It is preferable to arrange the operation means on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 3), which is difficult for the player to operate.
Furthermore, when the above-described first operating means and second operating means are provided, a first operation validity determination period for validly determining an operation on the first operating means and a period for validating an operation on the second operating means The second operation validity determination period to be determined may be set uniformly, or different periods may be set. If the operation validity determination periods are unified, the validity period determination process can be simplified. In addition, when different periods are set, the period during which the operation is determined to be valid differs depending on the type of operation means to be operated, so that the game can be motivated to operate various operation means at various timings. can be done.
In the first control example described above, the normal state and a plurality of advantageous gaming states (probability variable state, time saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set, and among the advantageous gaming states , when one of the game states is set, not the period until the set game state ends, but the period until the next normal state is set (remaining period) can be notified to the player. Configure.

Here, conventionally, when an advantageous gaming state (for example, probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is notified to the player. there is something to do Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. be. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous game state.
In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are some that can set a plurality of state types as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. There are some that can be set with the most advantageous game state (for example, probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the advantageous game state.
In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the game state shifts from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player can display the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the most advantageous game state continues. After that, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the normal advantageous game state continues.
In other words, in a state where the most advantageous game state is set, it is possible for the player to grasp the period (remaining period) during which the most advantageous game state continues, but it is set after the most advantageous game state ends. The player cannot grasp what kind of game state the game state is and how long the game state continues after the most advantageous game state is finished. .

Therefore, when the most advantageous game state ends, the player is asked whether a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state is set, or a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state. There is a problem that it is not possible to grasp whether (for example, the normal state) is set, and it is difficult to understand what the game should be aimed at during the most advantageous game state.
On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, when a plurality of types of advantageous game states are continuously set, the period until the plurality of types of advantageous game states are terminated, that is, the normal state It is configured to display the advantageous gaming state remaining period display mode for the period until is set. By configuring in this way, when advantageous gaming states of different types are set continuously, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed so as to straddle the advantageous gaming states that are successively set. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.
Furthermore, in the first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period across a plurality of consecutively set advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) is notified, the currently set It is configured so that a player can execute an effect that makes it difficult for the player to identify whether the game state being played is a probability variable state or a time saving state. Therefore, since the game state set during the advantageous game state period can be made difficult to understand, the player can play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state is set.
In the first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period across a plurality of consecutively set advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) is notified, currently set A game state or a game state set in the past can be suggested, and a suggestive effect can be executed. As a result, the player can be interested in the contents of the suggestive effect executed during the game state period.

Furthermore, in the first control example, it is possible to execute operation effects in a plurality of types of effect modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each effect mode is made different according to the set game state. ing. Therefore, since the player can predict the current game state based on the effect mode of the operation effect executed during the advantageous game state period, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since only the selection ratio of each effect mode is changed according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved by increasing the number of operation effects executed during the advantageous game state period. can. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means (frame button 22). Note that in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. Is configured to execute a “reach suggestion” effect that suggests to the player whether the special symbol variation being executed will be in a reach state or not, and if it will be in a reach state, the reach line or reach pattern to the player. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is determined whether there is winning information that becomes a ready-to-win state in the winning information related to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and based on the determination result It may be configured to inform the player that the second special symbol variation to be in the ready-to-win state is to be performed before the second special symbol variation is performed. In this way, the performance effect of the operation presentation is further enhanced by expanding not only the special pattern variation being executed but also the reserved and stored special pattern variation (special pattern variation to be executed in the future). can be done.
In addition, in the above-described first control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the background mode transition and the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery are executed. Functions that can be executed by operating the operation means include, for example, a volume adjustment function for adjusting the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 21) of the pachinko machine 10, and a third A brightness adjustment function for adjusting the brightness on the display surface of the pattern display device 81 may be used. As for the volume adjustment function and the brightness adjustment function, there is a risk of making it difficult to see the variation effect of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as with the transition to the background mode described above. , When a predetermined condition is satisfied, specifically, when a period (high-speed fluctuation period) is set in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, and when a period other than that is set It may be configured to be more difficult to execute. In addition, in the above-described first control example, the values of various counters such as the win random number counter C1 configured by the loop counter can be periodically updated while the power is on regardless of the state of the gaming machine. Was. That is, each time the update timing comes, the value is updated by 1, and when the counter completes one cycle, a new initial value is set. It is another form of the 1 control means and the 2nd control means. That is, it is a different form of first control means for setting a predetermined initial value to the counter value and second control means for updating the counter value according to a predetermined update rule.
In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even while the high-speed fluctuation period is set. Also good. In addition, in the above-described first control example, a first period during which a specific effect mode (transition to background mode) is likely to be executed as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means, and a specific effect mode (transition to background mode) are more likely to be executed than the first period. Although the second period is provided, it may be possible to set three or more periods in which the ratio of execution of operation effects in a specific effect mode is different. In addition, in the first control example described above, since the average number of rounds for the second special symbol jackpot is greater than the average number of rounds for the first special symbol jackpot, the jackpot starts and then ends. The period until the jackpot in the variable probability state tends to be longer than the jackpot in the normal state. On the other hand, by changing the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation, if you win the jackpot, the period from the start of the jackpot fluctuation to the end of the jackpot (a new lottery is possible after the special lottery is executed) The length of the period until it becomes) may be configured to be longer in the case of winning a jackpot during the variable probability state than during the normal state. The normal state and the variable probability state in this modified example are different forms of the first state and the second state in the 45th control example described later.
<Regarding the switching control of the switching valve executed during the jackpot game>
In each control example described above, as described using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 53) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 103), a specific round game (V round game) is started. If it is determined that the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 5(b) or FIG. 97(b)) is controlled. That is, only when the jackpot game to be executed is a probability variable jackpot game, a specific round game (V round game) is configured to be executed, and when it is a normal jackpot game, a specific round (V round game) was configured so that it would not run. By configuring in this way, it was possible to suppress the ball from winning a V prize (passing to a specific area (V gate 65V)) during a normal jackpot game. Accordingly, since it is necessary to vary the contents of the control process for the switching valve 65y, there is a problem of increasing the processing load during the jackpot game.

Therefore, control processing other than the control processing content for the switching valve 65y used in each control example described above may be used, for example, the V round game is executed even in the normal jackpot game. The condition for ending the game may be different from that of the variable probability jackpot game so that the ball cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. Further, when the switching valve 65y is switched and controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is executed, in the normal jackpot game, the number of winning balls for switching and controlling the switching valve 65y is The switching control of the switching valve 65y may be configured not to be executed by setting a number larger than the winning number (for example, 10) for ending the V-round game.
In addition, even if the control contents (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y are set to be the same for the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during execution of the normal jackpot game , may be configured not to effectively process its passage. In other words, even if the ball passes through the specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.
Furthermore, regardless of the type of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is started (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set), when a predetermined period elapses, the switching valve 65y is set to be in an open state for a predetermined period. , and the opening pattern of the open/close door 65b in the jackpot game is changed according to the jackpot game type, thereby making the V winning probability different for each jackpot game type. good.
As described above, in the first control example described above, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state As a state, two types of advantageous gaming states are set: variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) and time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) configured as possible. Furthermore, it is configured such that the time saving state is set after the variable probability state ends.

Then, when the advantageous gaming state is set, then the period until the normal state is set, for example, when the variable probability state is set, the time saving state set after the end of the variable probability state ends The period until the normal state is set can be notified to the player as the continuation period of the advantageous game state. With this configuration, the player can be notified of the period until the end of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, not the period until the currently set game state ends. A player can play a game with peace of mind.
In addition, when notifying a period in which a plurality of advantageous game states continue continuously as the duration of one advantageous game state, depending on the contents and execution frequency of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81, It is configured so that the player can grasp the detailed game state currently set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to perform a game while predicting the current game state while grasping the period until the normal state is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.
Further, in the first control example described above, among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, the most advantageous gaming state (variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set first, and then the most advantageous gaming state (variable probability state) is set. Although it is configured to set a disadvantageous normal advantageous game state (time saving state), it may be configured so that a plurality of advantageous game states can be set continuously, for example, as a game state, normal state and , In addition to the variable state and the time-saving state, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is also set, and the latent state is more advantageous to the player than the variable state. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as above, a game state (probability variable state, time-saving state, latent probability state) in which special symbols or normal symbols are highly probable becomes an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. Then, the value of the variable probability counter 203i indicating the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be set to be larger than the value of the time reduction counter 203h indicating the period of continuing the high probability state of the normal symbol. . As a method of making the latent probability state more advantageous than the probability variable state, for example, a first special pattern and a second special pattern are provided as special patterns, and a small hit is won with a high probability in the lottery of the second special pattern. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined prize winning opening is opened for a predetermined period when a small prize is won. In the latent probability state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter than in the normal state, and when a small hit is won, the game ball is easily entered into a predetermined winning hole, and in the probability variable state, the second special symbol is easily entered. Although the variation time of the special pattern is shortened, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined winning hole, so that the latent state receives the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the predetermined winning hole more frequently. It may be configured to be advantageous as much as possible.
In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, for example, as the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game, "100" can be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i and "50" can be set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h. , After the end of the jackpot game, a variable probability state is set as an advantageous game state, and then a latent probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example described above, a period in which a plurality of advantageous gaming states continue continuously, that is, a period until the latent probability state set after the variable probability state ends is reported as the duration of one advantageous gaming state. Also, in this case, during the continuation period of the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute a transition suggesting effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not there is a possibility that the currently set gaming state will transition to another gaming state. should be configured to As a result, the player can grasp only that there is a possibility of transition to another game state during the advantageous game state. can provide. Furthermore, when there is a possibility that the currently set game state shifts to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state, the game state after transition is a game state that is more advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be able to execute an advantageous transition suggesting effect capable of suggesting whether or not. Further, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the timing at which the game state shifts during the advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enjoy the game during the period while grasping the period until the normal state is set.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, when the jackpot is won during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is terminated. The most advantageous game state (probability variable state) is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time reduction state) that is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous game state (probability variable state) is set, so it is advantageous. Winning a jackpot during a game state does not disadvantage the player, but for example, among a plurality of advantageous game states, a normal advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set first, and then normal. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the most advantageous game state (latent probability state) more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game state (variable probability state), rather than winning a jackpot during the normal advantageous game state, It may be more advantageous for the player to set the most advantageous gaming state without winning the jackpot.
Therefore, it is constructed so as to execute the performance during the period in which the player can distinguish between the period in which winning the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state is advantageous to the player and the period in which it is disadvantageous to the player. good to do As a result, the result of the special symbol lottery can be watched closely based on the contents identified by the period presentation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, as a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during a normal advantageous game state, and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during a normal advantageous game state. If the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player, whether the jackpot winning is advantageous to the player based on the performance contents of the above-described period performance and the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting whether or not. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the game aiming at winning the big win in the special pattern lottery, but also in the timing of winning the big win and the kind of big win set at the time of winning the big win. It should be noted that, in this modified example in which the latent state is provided as the most advantageous gaming state, in the modified example in which control is adopted to shift from the variable probability state to the latent state, the time-saving control is set, and the second special symbol variation time In the variable probability state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed by shortening, the value of the time reduction counter 203h becomes 0 or the setting condition of the latent certainty state is established by winning the jackpot of the type that directly shifts to the latent certainty state. Then, only the time-saving control is cleared and the second special symbol variation time is kept short, so that the configuration is set with the second control and the fourth control in which the discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed. This corresponds to another mode of the invention according to the fifty-fifth control example, in which when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the fourth control is maintained and the determination by the determination means is made difficult to execute, switching to the first control.
In the above-described first control example, after the end of the jackpot game, one of a plurality of types (two types) of advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) is configured to be set, but not limited to this, It may be configured so that the normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will be set after the jackpot game ends.
Further, in the above-described first control example, an effect mode (super chance mode) for notifying that the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game according to the effect result of the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, A production mode (chance mode) for notifying that an advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state after the jackpot game is set is set. . As a result, in the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, meaningless performance of setting the chance mode after the jackpot game is completed despite notification that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed. You can prevent it from being executed.

For the technique of the first control example configured in this way, for example, an effect mode selection means is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game, and the effect mode selection means is used in advance. By making an arbitrary performance mode selectable, the performance mode of the big win game performance executed during the big win game and the performance mode set after the end of the big win game are changed to the contents selected by the performance mode selection means. It may be configured to be set correspondingly. Specifically, by the production mode selection means, as the production mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, "complete notification mode" for notifying the actually set game state, and only that the advantageous game state is set A ``chance notification mode'' to be notified can be selected, and the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22) during the period when the special symbol lottery is not executed in the pachinko machine 10. A production mode is configured to be selectable.
A storage means for temporarily storing the production mode selected by the player is provided, and information that can identify the production mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a secondary It is displayed in the display area Ds) so that the currently set performance mode can always be identified by the player. Then, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, as a jackpot game effect, the effect is to guide the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during the jackpot game. When the V notification effect is executed and the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends (Fig. 11 ( b), (d)), if it does not pass, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (see FIGS. 11 (a), (c)) Then, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a "super chance mode" (see FIG. 15(a)) indicating that the current game state is the variable probability state is set, and after the end of the jackpot game, the time is reduced. When the state is set, a "chance mode" (see FIG. 12(a)) indicating that the current game state is the time-saving state is set. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V prize that serves as a trigger for determining the game state.
On the other hand, when the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the above-described V notification effect is not executed as the jackpot game effect, and after the jackpot game is finished, regardless of the set game state, the "chance notification mode" is stored. mode is set. With this configuration, the game can be played without informing the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V prize that serves as a trigger for determining the game state. In addition, when the performance mode is not selected by the performance mode selection means, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means similarly to the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and is similar to the first control example described above. Then, it is decided by lottery whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the big winning game, the big winning game performance is executed based on the lottery result, and after the big winning game is finished based on the performance result of the big winning game performance. Production mode is set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an arbitrary performance mode desired by the player without any sense of incongruity, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Furthermore, as a means for selecting various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, the selection ratio of various effects modes (see FIG. 32) selected for the operation effects executed when the chance mode is selected Effect frequency selection means may be provided which allows the player to select arbitrarily. Specifically, when the probability variable state is set and when the time saving state is set, the selection ratio of the various production modes to be selected is greatly diverged, or the difference in the selection ratio is reduced. It is preferable to provide an effect frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio can be selected. Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to provide an arbitrary performance mode desired by the player without any sense of incongruity, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
In the first control example described above, the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. The pachinko machine 10 configured to set the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbols after the end of the jackpot game has been described, and in this way, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. As a configuration capable of providing a player with a special game different from the privilege game based on the fact that the ball passes through the specific area in the state, for example, winning a small prize which is a lottery result different from the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery. In this case, a second privilege game (small win game) different from the privilege game (jackpot game) can be executed, and variable ball entry means (variable winning device 65) that is opened during the second privilege game may be used. (Other winning devices may be provided separately). A specific area through which the entered ball can pass is provided, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the second privilege game, the second privilege game (small winning game ) may use a configuration that can execute a privilege game (jackpot game) after the end. In addition, in the first control example, since it is easier for the jackpot to be won in the variable probability state than in the normal state, the jackpot game is an advantageous game that is easily executed in a predetermined advantageous game state in the 58th control example described later. is another form of
In addition, as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, even in the state in which any game state is set, the first special symbol lottery can be executed by executing the left-handed game. A game ball can be entered into a first ball entrance 64, and a game ball can be entered into a second ball entrance 640 that can trigger a second special symbol lottery by executing a right-handed game. can be configured to
<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 122. FIG. This second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and that the configuration of a part of the RAM 223 is changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), variable state ( High probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) can be set, and each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is executed after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery. was configured to allow the probability state of to shift from a low probability state to a high probability state. Also, after the end of the above-mentioned jackpot game, and when other end conditions (for example, end conditions established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number) are satisfied, each symbol (special symbol, The normal pattern) probability state can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.
In other words, unless a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, the opportunity to shift the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) from the low probability state to the high probability state is not established. In the first control example configured in this manner, a high-probability state (high-probability state of special symbols) in which a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls can be given to the player and a lottery advantageous to the player are likely to be executed , high-probability state of ordinary patterns) and are executed based on the fact that the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, so that various benefits are given to the player who wins the jackpot in the special pattern lottery. This allows the player to enthusiastically play the game with the aim of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.
However, in the above-described first control example, the probability state of each symbol can be shifted to a high probability state only when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. There is a problem that a player who does not win a prize is not provided with a privilege, and a player who has not won a jackpot for a long period of time loses his or her desire to play.
On the other hand, in the second control example, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of the normal symbols from the low probability state to the high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and the special symbol lottery is performed. In a part of the lottery result (lost) different from the jackpot winning, the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established.

In other words, it is configured so that a privilege different from the big winning game can be given even to the player who did not win the big winning in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, the player is provided separately with the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.
Furthermore, in the second control example, the easiness of establishment of the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is varied according to the set game state. Specifically, the game state If the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won when the special symbol lottery is executed, short-time winning (high probability of normal symbols If a game state other than the normal state is set, only the presence or absence of a big win is determined when a special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured so that it can be determined.
By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, the opportunity that can be established when the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set is the opportunity that can be established when the big win is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. The opportunity that can be established when the short-time winning is set, and in the game state other than the normal state, the opportunity that can be established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery is set as the opportunity to set the high probability state of the normal symbol. will be set. That is, in the normal state in which the presence or absence of time-saving winning can be determined, more opportunities are set for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern than in the game state other than the normal state.
Therefore, each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is set to a low probability state, and the normal state, which is the most difficult game state to win in each symbol lottery (game state that is disadvantageous to the player), is better than the other. A high-probability state of normal symbols can be set more easily than the game state of (1), and the player's willingness to play the game in the normal state can be enhanced.

In addition, in this second control example, the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set is the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state, The second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second probability variable state), and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is limited to a predetermined number (4 pieces). It is configured to be storable (possible to hold storage). And it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to win the time saving than the first special symbol lottery.
In other words, when the game state shifts from any game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to the normal state (from the game state advantageous to the player to the disadvantageous game state ), during the normal state after the transition, the second special symbol lottery based on the execution right of the second special symbol lottery held and stored in the normal symbol high probability state before the transition is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to win a short-time election in some cases.
By constructing in this way, the player can receive a special symbol lottery that facilitates the return to the game state that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period even when the game state is changed from the game state that is advantageous to the player to the game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly declining when the normal state, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, is set. In addition, in order to execute more second special symbol lottery during the normal state, the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired, and the normal symbol high probability state to end the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal pattern ends.
In the above-described first control example, the high-probability state of normal symbols can be set only based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. Specifically, after the end of the jackpot game, as an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or short time state (low probability state of special symbols, normal High probability state of the pattern) was configured to be settable. Then, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game, the variable probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and then until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, that is, the big winning game. A time saving state is set until the number of special symbol lotteries after the end reaches 100 times. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is continued until the special symbols are executed 100 times.

On the other hand, in the second control example, as described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the normal symbol high probability state can be set even when the special symbol lottery wins the short time. There is a high probability state of normal patterns set based on jackpot winning (first short time) and a high probability state of normal patterns set based on short time winning (second short time) High probability of normal patterns The easiness of fulfillment of the termination condition for terminating the state is differentiated.
Specifically, it is configured so that the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the second time saving is more likely than the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the first time saving. In this way, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the high probability state of the normal design in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting opportunity (the establishment opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design) By making it possible to set, not only whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, but also the process of the game such as what trigger the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make the player interested, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.
In addition, in the second control example, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the benefits given to the player in the high-probability state of normal symbols, the ease of establishing the time-saving end condition (the number of times of time-saving) is varied. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the first time saving is set and when the second time saving is set, the ease of acquiring the pending memory of the second special symbol lottery (electric role 640a (open pattern)), or the degree of advantage of benefits given when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game, the jackpot game The type of game state that is set after the end of the game may be changed.
First, referring to FIG. 86, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example. As shown in FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example is located on the left side of the game board 13 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 4) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The fact that the through gate 67 provided in the area (the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is deleted, the second ball entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached, and at least when the jackpot game is executed The major difference is that the arrangement position of the variable winning device 65 that enables the ball to win a prize is different. Moreover, it is different in that the internal configuration of the variable winning device 65 is changed. Other contents are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the through gate 67, which is the ball entrance for establishing the opportunity for executing the lottery of normal symbols, is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. It is arranged only in the area. By configuring in this way, a game ball is shot toward the left side area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance (winning entrance) 64 Left hitting game While performing, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the normal symbol lottery.
The first entrance 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80 . A variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into right and left sides. On the right side of the display unit 80 is formed a right channel (right region) through which game balls can flow. A game ball that has flowed down the left flow path (area) does not flow down the right flow path (area), and a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path (area) does not flow down the left flow path (area). is configured to
Below the variable display unit 80, there is formed a lower area (common area) in which both game balls that have flowed down the left channel (area) and game balls that have flowed down the right channel (area) can flow down. An out port 66 is provided at the most downstream part of the side area (the lowest part of the game board 13). The first ball inlet 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball that has flowed down the left channel and the game ball that has flowed down the right channel can enter. It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of the second control example, it may be configured such that only game balls flowing down the left channel can enter the first ball entrance 64 . By configuring in this way, when executing a right-handed game in which a game ball flows down to the right region, for example, when executing a game in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed.
The second ball entrance 640 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path. The second ball entrance 640 is formed by forming a horizontally long rectangular opening in the game board 13, and forming a flow path through which the game ball can flow down. A photosensor is provided for detecting a game ball that has been hit. On the front side of the opening, an electric accessory 640a is attached as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the variable opening/closing plate is used as an axis to drive the opening/closing to the front side. and an open-mouth solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second ball entrance 640 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. When the normal pattern (second pattern) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the lower side of the front to create an open state where the ball can easily enter the opening of the second ball entrance 640. It is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are repeated a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the special pattern lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is hit (big hit lottery), and determines whether the winning time is short for setting a high probability state of the normal pattern (short time lottery), and at the same time as the jackpot. When it is determined (when the jackpot is won), the jackpot type is determined, and when the time reduction type is selected, the time reduction type is determined.
In this second control example, the lottery opportunity is established when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the lottery opportunity is established when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Different jackpot types are stipulated for the second special symbol in which is established, and 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5) and 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot B5) are regulated for the first special pattern. In addition, 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5), 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C5), and 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot D5) are defined for the second special symbol. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .
Here, "16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5)" means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) ) is a jackpot type that is set. In this second control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of special symbols continues (special pattern high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of normal symbols continues (normal pattern high probability period) In the jackpot A5, the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times as a special symbol high probability period and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped is set. Then, the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 60 times and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped is set as the general pattern high probability period.
That is, the same conditions (60th special symbol fluctuation stop) are defined for the jackpot A5 as the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period. Therefore, when the jackpot A5 is set as the jackpot type, a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the 60th special symbol in the probability variable state. When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed, both the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period are terminated and the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. By configuring in this way, since the game state is directly shifted from the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to the normal state, the second special acquired during the high probability state of the normal pattern The second special symbol lottery based on the symbol lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) can be made easier to execute in the normal state.

“6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot B5)” means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is a jackpot type that is played. This jackpot B5 is the end condition for ending the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period. conditions) are stipulated. That is, the jackpot B5 is a jackpot type that differs from the jackpot A5 only in the number of round games (the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game.
As described above, in the second control example, it is configured such that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state, which is the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the normal state, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, either the big win A or the big win B is set as the big win type. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed in the normal state, a jackpot game with a different number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the end condition is the same probability change. It is configured so that the state is set.
By configuring in this way, even when any jackpot type is set, the player can be made to play the game under the same conditions after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the second control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type can be set by changing only the number of rounds of the jackpot game. Depending on the set jackpot type, the type of game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be changed, or the end condition may be changed for the same game state. Also, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, etc.) and the content of the game state (game state type, termination condition) set after the jackpot game ends may be set differently.
In this case, the first privilege (jackpot game) and the second privilege (high probability state of normal symbols) given to the player based on the special symbol jackpot winning are classified as the first privilege and the second privilege. From the jackpot type corresponding to the combination that is most advantageous to the player, to the jackpot type that corresponds to the combination that the first privilege and the second privilege are most disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured so that the jackpot type is set. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the privilege that can be given after winning the big win in the special symbol lottery can be greatly varied based on the type of the big win set, so that the big win set for the player. Types can be of interest. In order not to greatly differ the degree of advantage of the privilege granted based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, for example, the first privilege with a low degree of advantage and the second privilege with a high degree of advantage and a jackpot type combining a first privilege with a high degree of advantage and a second privilege with a low degree of advantage, that is, the first privilege and the second privilege defined for the jackpot type Only the jackpot types other than the jackpot types having high or low degree of advantage with the privilege are defined in advance, and any one of the defined jackpot types is set. It should be configured as follows.

“6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C5)” means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is a jackpot type that is played. And, in this second control example, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) are different periods. It is configured to be settable, and the jackpot C5 is a period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times as a special symbol high probability period and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped. is set, and the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 56 times and the 56th special symbol variation is stopped is set as the normal pattern high probability period.
In other words, the jackpot C5 defines the end conditions (probability variable end conditions) for ending the special high probability period and the end conditions (time-saving end conditions) for ending the normal high probability period. It is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied before the probability variable end condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the jackpot C5 is set as the jackpot type, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 56th special symbol variation in the probability variation state is stopped and displayed, from the special figure high probability period Also, the normal pattern high probability period ends first, and the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed for the fourth time after the second probability variable state is set (60th time in total after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set. The game state transitions like this.
Here, the period in which the probability variable state is set is a gaming state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, In contrast to the game period in which the player is made to play the right-handed game, the period in which the second probability variable state is set is the same as the normal state because the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It becomes a game state in which it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, it becomes a game period in which the player is made to play a left-handed game. That is, when the variable probability state shifts to the second variable probability state, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the variable probability state is executed during the second variable probability state. And, in this second control example, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery, and since it is configured to be able to store up to four special figure 2 reservations, Even if you move from the definite variable state to the 2nd definite variable state with the upper limit number (4) of the special figure 2 pending, until the 2nd definite variable state ends (until the special figure high probability period ends) In addition, since the second special symbol lottery is executed four times, the number of special figure 2 reserves stored becomes zero when the game state shifts from the second variable probability state to the normal state.
That is, when the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type, the normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed after the jackpot game ends is set, but during the normal pattern high probability period The second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired in the normal state is executed in a game that is difficult to execute. Therefore, the jackpot game with the same content is executed, and the special pattern high probability period and the general pattern high probability period are over than the jackpot B, which is the same jackpot type in that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. , the jackpot type is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B in terms of the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery in the state in which the normal state is set.

Although detailed description will be described later, in this second control example, the case where the variable probability state ends and the second variable probability state is set, and the case where the normal state is set after the variable probability state ends, is the same It is configured so that the presentation mode (pull-back mode) is set. That is, after the variable probability state ends, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp which game state, the second variable probability state or the normal state, is set. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the normal pattern high probability period is executed during the normal state or during the second probability variable state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the executed second special symbol lottery can win the time-saving lottery (whether the time-saving lottery is executed or not).
Therefore, even when the second variable probability state is set, the game can be played while expecting the short-time winning.
In addition, in this second control example, after the variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, than the special symbol high probability period (the period during which the special symbol high probability state continues) Each end condition is defined so that the normal pattern high probability period (the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues) ends first, and the second probability variable state (high probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) It has a jackpot C5 as a jackpot type, and specifically, in the jackpot C5, the special figure 2 hold acquired during the probability variation state is the second probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol Low probability state), as the period from the end of the normal pattern high probability period to the end of the special pattern high probability period (the period during which the second probability variable state continues), special symbol fluctuation Although it is configured to set the period until it is executed 4 times, it is not limited to this, and according to the game state (normal state, second probability variable state, etc.) set after the variable probability state, acquired The game state in which the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation is made different. That is, as a game state in which a special symbol lottery is executed based on the acquired special symbol lottery, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the special symbol lottery that can be executed in an advantageous game state (normal state) that is advantageous to the player. Any possible configuration may be used.
For example, a part of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the probability variation state is consumed during the second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and the remaining special figure 2 suspension is normal state For example, a jackpot type may be provided in which 58 special symbol fluctuations are defined as the end condition of the general pattern high probability period, and 60 special symbol fluctuations are defined as the end condition of the special pattern high probability period. In this case, when the normal high probability period ends with the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold being acquired during the probability variable state and the state shifts to the second probability variable state, two special figures 2 are digested during the second probability variable state Then, the second special symbol lottery based on the remaining two special figure 2 reservations can be executed in the normal state. In this way, when specifying each end condition so that the probability variable state is set and the normal pattern high probability period ends earlier than the special pattern high probability period, just by making the difference of each end condition different The number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed in the state can be varied.

In addition, in the second control example, in the case of having both the first special symbol reserved memory (special figure 1 reserved) and the second special symbol reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved), the first Since the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the special symbol lottery, as described above, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the variable state is the special figure. Regardless of the presence or absence of 1 reservation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 reservation that has been acquired before the special figure 2 reservation), the game state that is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation (normal pattern high probability state ) is completed, that is, the number of special figures 2 pending decreases immediately after the game state (low probability state of normal symbols) where it is difficult to acquire special figures 2 pending is set, but not limited to this, The first special symbol lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation and the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation may be configured to be executable according to the order in which each special figure reservation is acquired.
“6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot D5)” means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is a jackpot type that is played. And, in this second control example, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) are different periods. It is configured to be settable, and the jackpot D5 is a period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times as a special symbol high probability period and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped. is set, and the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 65 times as the general pattern high probability period and the 65th special symbol variation is stopped is set.
In other words, the jackpot D5 defines the end condition (probability variable end condition) for ending the special pattern high probability period and the end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the normal pattern high probability period It is configured so that the probability variable end condition is satisfied before the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special symbol variation in the probability variation state is stopped and displayed, from the normal pattern high probability period Also, the special pattern high probability period ends first, and the time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed for the 5th time after the time saving state is set (the 65th time in total after the jackpot game ends), the time saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set. Game state transitions.
Here, during the period when the time saving state is set, as well as the variable state, the high probability state of the normal design is set, so the right to execute the second special design lottery (Special 2 reservation) is acquired. It is a game state that is easy to play, and it is a game period in which the player is made to play a right-handed game. In other words, when the probability variable state is shifted to the time saving state, the player is made to continuously execute the right-handed game and acquire the special figure 2 reservation. And, in this second control example, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery, and up to four special figure 2 reservations can be stored, The number of special figure 2 suspensions stored at the time of transition from the time saving state to the normal state with the upper limit number (4) of special figure 2 suspensions acquired is 4 pieces.

That is, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, the normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed after the jackpot game is completed is set, and the normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) is set as in the case of the jackpot B5. A game that facilitates execution of the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the guaranteed period is executed in the normal state. Therefore, the jackpot game of the same content is executed, and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the special figure high probability period and the general figure high probability period are ended, and the normal state is set Second in the state In terms of easiness of execution of the special symbol lottery, the degree of advantage is the same as that of the big win B5.
Here, in the time saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to a low probability (1/300) compared to the variable state, so the time saving state is less likely to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the variable state. It becomes a game state. Therefore, in the big hit B5 that shifts from the variable probability state to the normal state, during the final variation period of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state, the effect (variation effect ) and the guidance notification (notification effect) to encourage the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit during the variable state, and the effect of different purposes is performed repeatedly. Therefore, there is a problem that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.
On the other hand, like the jackpot D5, it moves from the probability variable state to the time saving state, and then the end condition of the special figure high probability period and the end of the normal figure high probability period so as to move from the time saving state to the normal state If the condition is defined, during the final fluctuation period of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state, only the production (variation production) for indicating whether or not the jackpot is won in the fluctuation is executed. Therefore, for the player, the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol high probability period), that is, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery with high expectation of winning the jackpot It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the variable performance for showing . Then, in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, by executing the guidance notification (notification effect) to encourage the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit number, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery with high expectation of winning the jackpot It is possible to make it difficult to overlap the period in which the variable performance for showing is executed and the period in which the notification performance for prompting the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit number during the normal figure high probability period is executed. .
Therefore, the jackpot D5 is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the jackpot B5 in terms of the ease of understanding of the effect to be executed.

During the normal pattern high probability state (during the normal pattern high probability period), not only the winning probability of the second pattern is increased, but also the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed. A longer time is set compared to the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the time-saving state, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed can be increased.
In addition, during the time saving state, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role object 640a associated with the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the object 640a is opened compared to during the normal state. In addition, during the time-saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. At least one of may be changed. In addition, during the time saving state, the time for which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not determined. may be changed so as to be higher than normal medium.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general prize-winning holes (ball-entering holes) 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 displays a third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by the winning of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs a variable display, and the passage of a ball through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger to change the second symbol. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for display is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 94), for example, the upper, middle and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of this control example, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 94). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.
In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this control example), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (open) only.
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short time during the time saving, so that the winning lottery (the number of variable display of the second symbols) can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 . When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper tray 17, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. As a result, the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player, and the lottery for the special symbols can be performed for a short period of time while suppressing the investment for additionally lending the balls. can be done.
It should be noted that other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. are also likely to win the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving. In the case of the state, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the right channel of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, some of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board are configured to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.
The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .
The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.
Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first prize entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 94), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. In this control example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out. It may be configured to pay out prize balls.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, if the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of the first entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.
The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state, and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加
As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 as compared with the normal time.
Here, the probability of winning the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, in the second special symbol lottery executed by the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, in a specific game state (normal state), it is possible to give a time saving state as a privilege other than winning a jackpot. Configure. In other words, as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, in a part of the cases other than the jackpot winning (missing), after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is configured to be able to give the privilege of setting the time saving state. . Therefore, a special symbol lottery is executed in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加become.

In other words, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set so that the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. do. In this second control example, as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, it is greatly different from the above-described first control example in that short-time winning is provided in addition to the jackpot winning. I will mainly explain the performance. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the elements (display modes) having the same contents as those of the first control example described above will be omitted.
FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 87(a), when the jackpot game is executed, a character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm to congratulate the player that a privilege (jackpot game) has been awarded. A production is executed. During the jackpot game, the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is continuously stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and in the example shown in FIG. , and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777". This small display area Dm1 is an area in which a third symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, and while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed. The third pattern is variably displayed in a display mode indicating that it is displayed.
In addition, on the left side of the main display area Dm1, a small display area Dm4 for displaying a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game method during the jackpot game, and a current round number (round game number) are displayed for the player. A small display area Dm5 in which the number of rounds notification mode is displayed to notify the player, and acquisition information for indicating the value corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in the games that are continuously executed without going through the normal state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 87(a), the small display area Dm4 is "right shot", the small display area Dm5 is "2 rounds", and the small display area Dm6 is "140P". ” is displayed.

That is, during the jackpot game, the player is guided to execute the right-handed game, informed that the second round of the jackpot game is currently being executed, and the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game this time is 140. It shows that it is individual. In this way, it is possible to display the fact that the jackpot game is in progress, the game method during the jackpot game, and the information about the obtained privilege, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .
Then, when all the round games during the jackpot game are completed and the ending period of the jackpot game is set, as shown in FIG. An ending screen will appear. FIG.87(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed on the ending screen of a jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 87(b), the effect (chance time) corresponding to the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the period of the chance time is 56 times (56 special symbol variations). indicates a display screen on which the player is notified. In the central portion of the main display area Dm1, a display mode in which the character 801 continues to run from left to right is displayed as a display mode for notifying the player of the effect to be executed during the chance time in advance. be done.
In this way, using a partial period before the actual variable state is set (during the jackpot game), the variable state is set after the jackpot game, the duration of the set variable state, the variable probability By informing the player of the explanation of the contents of the performance to be executed during the state, the player can grasp the contents of the game to be executed in the future in advance, so that the player can easily understand the game. can do.
Next, the contents of the chance time effect executed during the variable probability state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the chance time, and FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the final variation of the chance time. is. During the chance time, the character 801 keeps running in the main display area Dm1, and an effect is executed in which a big win is reported by getting the V icon 801v displayed on the screen. As described above, during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game to execute the second special symbol lottery (right beating game) becomes a game method advantageous to the player.

Therefore, in the small display area Dm4, "Right-handed" is displayed for guiding the right-handed game. Then, a remaining period notification mode for indicating the period until the chance time ends is displayed in the small display area Dm7. In FIG. 88(a), characters of "50 times remaining" are displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of times of special symbol variation that can be executed before the chance time ends is 50 times.
Here, the chance time is an effect executed corresponding to the variable probability state, and the end timing of the chance time is the timing at which the variable probability state ends. Here, in the second control example, when the normal state is set after the probability variable state is completed by the type of probability variable jackpot in which the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends (jackets A5, B5) and the second There is a case where a variable probability state is set (jackpot C5) and a case where a time saving state is set (jackpot D5). Even if any jackpot type is set, during the special symbol variation (final special symbol variation in the probability variation state) where the probability variation state ends, the effect screen at the end of the chance time shown in FIG. 88 (b) Is displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 88(b), the second probability variable state after the probability variable state ends, or the normal state, that is, with the end of the probability variable state, when the normal pattern shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state In the main display area Dm1, the main display area Dm1 shows "Pull back mode after chance time ends" to indicate that a normal symbol low probability state is set. comment is displayed. Then, as a game guidance mode that encourages to acquire the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit during the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, that is, the period in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, in the sub display area Ds Along with displaying the comment "Right strike and save the hold", a small display area Dm9 is formed to show the acquired special figure 2 hold number on the lower right side of the main display area Dm.
In the small display area Dm9, a hold icon capable of informing the player of the upper limit number of obtainable special figure 2 reserves and the number of acquired special figure 2 reserves is displayed, and the first special figure 2 reserve is displayed. Corresponding to the first reserved icon h1, the second reserved icon h2 corresponding to the second special figure 2 reservation, the third reserved icon h3 corresponding to the third special figure 2 reservation, the fourth The 4th reservation icon h4 is displayed corresponding to special figure 2 reservation. In FIG. 88 (b), since it is in a state where three special figures 2 pending are acquired, the display mode for indicating that the first pending icon h1, the second pending icon h2, and the third pending icon h3 have been acquired ( In the drawing, it is displayed in black), and the fourth pending icon h4 is displayed in a display mode (white in the drawing) to indicate that it has not been acquired. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired up to the upper limit.

Although detailed description is omitted, when all the four reserved icons displayed in the small display area Dm9 have been acquired, that is, during the special symbol final variation in the probability variation state, the upper limit number (4) If you acquire the figure 2 reservation, you can not acquire a new special figure 2 reservation even if you continue the right-handed game any more. Since the 2 reserve is not digested, even if the right-handed game is continued, it is not possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player. A display mode (for example, "MAX") is displayed to indicate that the upper limit number of has been acquired, and the character "Right shot" displayed in the small display area Dm4 acquires the upper limit number of the special figure 2 hold. It is configured to display a display mode in which the need for right-handed games is low (for example, the character size is reduced), which is different from the previous display mode. This makes it difficult for the player to wastefully continue the right-handed game.
The pullback mode is an effect that is set corresponding to the period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state). In the second control example, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be short-time winning. That is, during the pullback mode, not only the jackpot winning, but also the special symbol lottery with the possibility of the time saving winning is executed, so it is possible to increase the possibility that the time saving state (normal high probability state of the symbol) is set. .
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the contents of the effects executed during the pullback mode will be described. FIG. 89(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the start of the pullback mode, and FIG. 89(b) is an example of the display screen that is displayed when the short-time winning is made during the pullback mode. Fig. 3 shows.
When the pullback mode is set, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the number of treasure boxes 810a to 810d corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reserved that have been acquired are displayed, and the treasure boxes are displayed according to the second special symbol variation. is executed. Then, an effect is executed in which a display mode for indicating the lottery result of the corresponding second special symbol appears from inside the treasure box.

At the start of the pullback mode, as a guide mode for explaining the contents of the pullback mode in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "If a 'V' comes out of a treasure box, you get a big win, and if 'Time' comes out, you get a short time." Open the treasure chest." is displayed.
In the second control example, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode is determined regardless of the number of second special symbol variations executed during the pullback mode. , and it is constructed such that an effect of opening one treasure box is executed for one fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation. A performance for opening one treasure box can be executed by using the fluctuation time of all the second special pattern fluctuations, and even one lottery result is obtained in the second special pattern fluctuation executed during the pullback mode. It may be constructed so as to execute an effect for showing the result of the lottery when a jackpot or short-time winning is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of variations of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode.
In addition, in the second control example, even if any gaming state of the normal state in which the time-saving lottery is actually executed and the second variable probability state in which the time-saving lottery is not executed is set, that is, from the variable probability state When the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is shifted to, the withdrawal mode is set. That is, in the pullback mode when the second variable probability state is set, an effect is executed in which "time" does not appear from the treasure box as a result of the effect.
In this way, by configuring to execute the same performance (pull-back mode) in the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed and in the game state in which the time-saving lottery cannot be executed (difficult to do), the pull-back mode production As a result, it is possible to set in advance a pull-back mode in which the performance result indicating the time-saving winning is likely to be displayed and a pull-back mode in which it is difficult to be displayed. In this case, the pull-back mode set this time is a pull-back mode (advantage pull-back mode) in which the effect result indicating the time-saving winning is likely to be displayed, or a pull-back mode (disadvantageous pull-back mode) in which the effect result indicating the time-saving winning is difficult to display. It is possible to suggest to the player whether or not.

In this second control example, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not the pull-back mode to be executed this time is the advantageous pull-back mode according to the type of background displayed during the pull-back mode. On the display screen shown in (a), a background image imitating "Heaven" is displayed as a background type for suggesting that the possibility of the advantageous pullback mode is high.
That is, in the second control example, without pre-reading the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension that has already been acquired (without prior determination), the pull-back mode according to the set game state The background type is configured to be determinable. By constructing in this way, even if the background image of any type of background is displayed, the possibility of short-time winning or big win winning can be easily left, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.
Then, when the reduction in working hours is won during the withdrawal mode, the effect shown in FIG. 89(b) is executed. FIG. 89(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the time reduction is won in the third second special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, and the second special symbol variation has already occurred twice. A treasure box 810a and a treasure box 810b marked with crosses are displayed as a history display mode to indicate that the execution has been performed, and the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed (the third second special symbol variation) is displayed. is displayed in a treasure box 810c, the lottery result is the time-saving winning, and the number of times of time-saving given is ``10000 times'', that is, the next jackpot is won substantially. "Time"×10000" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is given. Also, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, the remaining number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the pullback mode, including the second special symbol variation being executed, can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.
Next, the contents of the performance executed when the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode is won will be described. In this second control example, the period during which the high probability state of normal symbols continues ( It is configured so that the normal pattern high probability period) can be easily set for a long time (the normal pattern high probability period is difficult to end). Specifically, in a part of the time-saving election, it is possible to set a time-saving state (long time-saving) in which the normal pattern high probability period continues until the number of times the special symbol variation is executed reaches 10000 times without winning a jackpot. Configure.

Then, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode, when the time reduction is won and the long time reduction is set, the effect screen shown in FIG. 90(a) is displayed. Fig.90 (a) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during the extension time performed when the long time reduction is set. When the long time reduction is set, before the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation reaches 10000 times, since it is almost the case that the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 90 (a) , When long time reduction is set, "infinite (indicated by a symbol in the figure)" is displayed small as the remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues It is displayed in area Dm7.
By configuring in this way, the player can play the game during the time saving state without worrying about the remaining period of the normal figure high probability period, and the small display area Dm7 can be 5 as the display area. Since it is no longer necessary to provide an area capable of displaying digits, and the small display area Dm7 can be made smaller, the display area of the main display area Dm can be effectively used for other effects. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide mode for guiding the player that the time-saving state (normal pattern high probability period) will continue until the next jackpot winning, "Beat right and crispy until the next jackpot. is” is displayed.
Here, if the long time reduction is set, it is almost the case that the time reduction state continues until the time reduction state continues until the next jackpot election, but in the unlikely event that the long time reduction is set, the jackpot will be elected. If the number of special symbol variations exceeds 10,000 times, the normal pattern high probability period ends, and the content displayed on the display screen differs from the actual game content, distrusting the player. Since it gives a feeling, if the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the long time reduction is set exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 9850 times), the display screen during the long time reduction should be changed. It is configured so that
FIG. 90(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed during the long time reduction reaches 9900 times. As shown in FIG. 90(b), when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the long time reduction is set exceeds the predetermined number, the remaining period for showing the remaining period of the normal pattern high probability period in the small display area Dm7 "100 times remaining" is displayed as the period notification mode, and the main display area Dm displays a production mode in which the character 801 runs with a tired expression. By configuring in this way, even if the normal pattern high probability period that can continue the time saving state until the next big hit is set, when the situation where the normal pattern high probability period can actually end occurs can inform the player of the specific remaining period, so that the player can be provided with a game that is easy to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, description will be given of the effect contents when the time saving state is set after the chance time is over. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of a preparation time effect screen that is executed during the time saving state after the end of the chance time. As described above, when the jackpot D5 is set as the type of the probability variable jackpot, the variable probability state shifts to the time saving state, and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. And, during the time saving state, the preparation time production is executed. This preparation time is an effect that is executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and during the period of the special symbol final variation in the time saving state, the special symbols in the definite variable state shown in FIG. 88(b) described above A mode that prompts you to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit as well as the final variation is displayed.
Next, the contents of the background type displayed during the withdrawal mode will be described with reference to FIG. 92(a). FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed during the pullback mode and the content indicated by each background.
As shown in FIG. 92(a), in the second control example, four backgrounds (heaven, night, evening, day) can be displayed as background types in the pullback mode. And, according to the type of the displayed background, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the benefits (jackpot, short-time winning) during the pullback mode this time.
Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 102, but in this second control example, when setting the pullback mode (when moving from the variable probability state to the second variable state or normal state), the acquired One mode type out of four mode types can be determined based on the number of special figure 2 reservations, the type of game state after transition, and the presence/absence of jackpot winning and short-time winning within the reserve, and determined. A background type corresponding to the selected mode type can be displayed as a background during the pullback mode.

The mode types in the withdrawal mode are defined so that the degree of expectation of awarding of benefits is different, and there are four mode types from mode A, which is most advantageous to the player, to mode D, which is most disadvantageous to the player. there is "Mode A" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning is extremely high during the pullback mode, and "Heaven" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, if a background imitating heaven is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player is made to understand that there is a high possibility that some benefit will be given before the pullback mode ends. can be made easier. Next, "Mode B" is a mode with the second highest possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning in the pullback mode, and "Night" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when the background simulating the night is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player is informed that the possibility of receiving some privilege is the second highest before the pullback mode ends. can be easily understood by "Mode C" is a mode with the third highest possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning in the withdrawal mode, and "Evening" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, if a background imitating the evening is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player understands that there is a slightly higher possibility that some benefit will be granted before the pullback mode ends. can be made easier. Finally, "mode D" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning is low during the withdrawal mode, and "daytime" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, if a background simulating daytime is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player is made to understand that there is a low possibility that some benefit will be granted before the pullback mode ends. can be made easier.
In addition, in the second control example, when the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of entering the pullback mode is not the upper limit number, the mode type of the high mode is configured not to be selected. Furthermore, if the number of special figures 2 pending at the time of entering the pullback mode is not the upper limit number, the mode without determining whether the time saving lottery is executed in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode It is configured to determine the type. In other words, in order to make it easier to predict the mode type of the pullback mode, it is necessary to transition to the pullback mode in a state in which the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending numbers is acquired.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 92(b), a suggestion mode for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode will be described. FIG. 92(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of suggestion mode in the pullback mode and the content of suggestion indicated by each suggestion mode. As for modes, referring to a suggestion mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 103), which will be described later, the display mode of the treasure box (see FIG. 89) can be changed, or the display mode of the character 801 can be changed until the treasure box is opened. Suggestion mode (suggestion A to suggestion D) is set.

Specifically, "Suggestion A" and "Suggestion B" can be set as suggestion types according to the expectation of jackpot winning or short-time winning in the variation, and suggestion types according to the set gaming state. , "suggestion C" and "suggestion D" can be set.
When "suggestion A" is selected, a different color (gold) is displayed as the display mode of the treasure box 810c displayed in the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 89(b)). When a golden treasure box corresponding to this "suggestion A" is displayed, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning due to the variation. When "suggestion B" is selected, a treasure box larger than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure box 810c displayed during the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 89(b)). When a golden treasure box corresponding to this "suggestion B" is displayed, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning with this variation. It should be noted that the selection of "suggestion A" is configured to increase the possibility of winning a big win or short-time winning as compared to the case of selection of "suggestion B".
When "suggestion C" and "suggestion D" are selected, a display mode in which the character 801 displayed in the pullback mode (see FIG. 89(b)) is equipped with an ornament is displayed. A character 801 is displayed in a different manner. Then, the currently set game state is suggested to the player according to the type of the displayed ornament.
When "suggestion C" is selected, as shown in FIG. 89(b), an ornament 801w imitating an angel's ring is displayed on the character 801, and the currently set game state is the normal state. It is suggested to the player that the possibility is high, and when "suggestion D" is selected, an icon imitating the word "chance" is displayed above the head of the character 801, indicating that the game state may be the normal state. It suggests to the player that the quality is high. It is to be noted that the possibility that the normal state is set is higher when "suggestion C" is selected than when "suggestion D" is selected.

Thus, in the second control example, the mode type of the pull-back mode is determined according to the game situation at the time the pull-back mode is set, and the special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode is suggested. is determined. By compositely determining the mode type and the suggested mode type, it becomes possible for the player to accurately predict the current game situation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the aspects of various effects being executed.
<Regarding the game flow in the second control example>
Next, the game flow in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram schematically showing the game flow in the second control example, that is, the flow of game state transitions. As shown in FIG. 93, in this second control example, as the game state, normal state (special figure 1 normal, special figure 2 normal), time saving state (first time saving, second time saving), probability variable state, second probability variable The game state of the state can be set, and various game states can be set according to the result of the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery and the result of the time saving winning determination.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 103. FIG. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. Note that, of the electrical configuration in the second control example, the description of the same electrical configuration (see FIG. 21) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above will be partially omitted.
The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.
In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 95, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .
In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a time reduction type selection counter CC1 used for selecting the time reduction type at the time of time reduction election are used.
In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 51). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding area). to fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a includes the Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 time reduction type selection counter CC1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the 1 ball entrance 64. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 and the time saving type selection counter CC1 is stored.
Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Of the various values stored in the reservation first area, the various values having special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed are shifted to the special symbol execution area and stored. A special symbol variation based on the various values is started.
In this control example, two kinds of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are used, but the number of special symbols may be one. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.
Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are performed. It may be configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a special symbol. It may be configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in the second control example, the judgment value for jackpot winning and the judgment value for short-time winning are made different so that short-time winning can be won when jackpot is not won as a lottery result of special symbols. , Without being limited to this, it may be configured such that at least a part of the determination value for winning the jackpot and the determination value for the short-time winning are overlapped. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of only the jackpot winning, only the short-time winning, and the double winning of the big win and the short-time winning is provided to the player based on the obtained judgment value (the value of the first random number counter C1). can be done. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player is given a benefit that is more advantageous to the player in the case of multiple wins than in the case of winning either one of them. , it is preferable to make it more difficult to end than the time saving state set based on other winnings.
By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while expecting to win multiple prizes.
In addition, in this control example, in addition to the big win and the loss of the lottery result of the special symbol, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is performed without executing the winning game. ) can be set, but not limited to this, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, there are fewer benefits than when winning the jackpot (when winning the jackpot It may be configured so that the player can win a small prize that can be awarded to the player. With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.
In addition, in the case that a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. Alternatively, for example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. It may be configured such that when a small win is won, the small win game is executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small win, and the game state is not shifted even after the end of the small win game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can. In addition, as a lottery result of one special symbol lottery, four lottery results of jackpot winning, small winning, short-time winning, and losing may be configured to be able to win, or according to the special symbol type, a special symbol lottery You may comprise so that the privilege which can be won may be made different.
In this case, for example, as a privilege that can be granted when the first special symbol lottery is executed, a jackpot winning and a short-time winning are defined, and as a privilege that can be granted when the second special symbol lottery is executed , a jackpot win and a small win win, and when the same game state is set, the player selects the direction in which the game ball is shot (left-handed game , By selecting a right-handed game), it is preferable to configure the type of special symbol lottery to be executed to be selectable. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select the type of privilege (additional privilege) other than winning the jackpot.
Furthermore, the RAM 203 of this control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.
Then, when the normal symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 899), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.
The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process of main controller 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 51).
The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202da stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. 202da, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when it matches the value of the random number that will be a jackpot set by 202da. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery is set by the time saving winning random number table 202de stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the time saving winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202da to become a time-saving election, it is determined as a time-saving election.
Here, the first winning random number table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 97(a). FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202da. This first hit random number table 202da is a table that defines a random number value (determined value) for determining a big hit in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202da, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined differently according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 97 (a), for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 2" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is the jackpot determination value and other values (“3 to 899”) are defined as outlier determination values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 14" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "15 to 899") is defined as the deviation determination value. That is, since the update range of the first random number table 202da is 900 of "0 to 899", the probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/300 (3 out of 900). Thus, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/60 (15 out of 900).
In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state. Alternatively, three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.
In addition, in this control example, in addition to the two types of lottery results of "big hit" and "loss", "time saving winning" is determined as the lottery result of the special symbol. Here, with reference to FIG.97(c), random-number table 202de per time saving is demonstrated. Fig.97 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to random-number table 202de per time saving. This time saving random number table 202de is a table in which a random number value (determination value) for determining time saving winning is defined in a special symbol lottery.
Specifically, the time saving random number table 202de is defined by varying the determination value for determining time saving winning according to the special symbol type and the game state. As shown in FIG. 97(a), for the first special symbol as the special symbol type, the determination value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to the time-saving winning is not defined. In addition, for the second special symbol as the special symbol type, the determination value corresponding to the time-saving winning is defined only when the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). In the case of other gaming states (probability variable state, second probability variable state, time saving state), the determination value corresponding to time saving winning is not defined.

For the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set as the game state, "51 to 200" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the time saving winning judgment value. , and other values (“3 to 50, 201 to 899”) are defined as deviation determination values. Although detailed description will be given later, this time-saving random number table 202de is referred to when the result of the big hit determination executed with reference to the first winning random number table 202da is "miss". Therefore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is determined to be a big hit, the value other than the value ("0 to 2") of the first winning random number counter C1 is obtained. It will be.
Therefore, since the update range of the first random number table 202da is 900 of "0 to 899", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/300 (3 out of 900). As a result, the probability of being determined to be short-time winning is 1/6 (150 out of 900).
In other words, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 3/900, the probability of winning the short time is 150/900, and the probability of losing is 747/900. It becomes a special symbol lottery that makes it difficult to win (easily gives benefits) to the symbol lottery (loss probability 897/900).
In addition, in this control example, it is a specific game state (normal state), and is configured to execute the determination of time-saving winning only in the special symbol lottery of the specific special symbol type (second special symbol). However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to be able to execute determination of time saving election for any special symbol type. Furthermore, even if a game state other than the normal state is set, it may be configured to be able to execute the determination of the time-saving election, for example, in a state where the normal symbol low probability state (second probability variable state) is set Also in the second special symbol lottery to be executed, determination of time saving winning may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 89) can always execute the determination of time saving winning (time saving lottery).

In this case, the time saving lottery executed during the normal state and the time saving lottery executed during the second probability variable state should be different in the probability that the time saving lottery is determined (time saving winning probability), for example, the normal state is set, it is preferable to make it easier to win the time-saving election than when the second variable probability state is set. By constructing in this way, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery is increased in a normal state (low probability state of special patterns) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than a second variable probability state (high probability state of special patterns). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.
In addition, without being limited to this, the second variable probability state may be configured to increase the time saving winning probability more than the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to a high probability (high probability state of special symbols), so the probability of winning a short time can also be increased, so special executed during the probability variation state The special pattern lottery executed during the second probability variable state can increase the probability of obtaining a lottery result (probability of not winning without winning) to give some kind of privilege (big hit, short working hours) rather than the pattern lottery.
Furthermore, in the second control example, the time saving lottery can be executed only when it is in a specific game state and a specific special symbol lottery is executed, so the time saving winning probability is always fixed. However, when the time saving lottery is configured to be executed under different conditions (special symbol type, game state), the time saving winning probability may be changed according to the timing of establishment of the time saving lottery. .
In addition, not only the establishment opportunity of the time saving lottery, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation executed without changing the game state exceeds a predetermined number, it may be configured to increase the time saving winning probability. good.

In addition to this, as a result of the third lottery, it may be possible to determine a "small win" as one type of "loss". If the "small win" is won, the variable winning device 650 may be configured to be opened for a period (for one round) shorter than the "big win 5" so that a small win game is executed. By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.
In addition, in this control example, as the lottery result of the special symbol, three kinds of lottery results of "big win", "loss", and "short-time winning" are determined. As the lottery result of 4, it may be configured such that "small hit" can be determined as one type of "loss". If the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.
As described above, when the configuration is such that a "small win" can be won as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202a. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.
The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in this example of control, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the one special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, the obtained value of the first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202dc to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202dd will be described with reference to FIG. 98(a).
FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202dd. As shown in FIG. 98(a), this jackpot type selection table 202dd includes a special figure 1 jackpot table 202dd1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol. It has a special figure 2 jackpot table 202dd2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won.
First, with reference to FIG. 98(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202dd1 will be described. FIG. 98(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202dd1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot table 202dd1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the obtained first hit type counter C2 Different jackpot types are defined according to the value. The detailed contents defined in each data table are omitted because they have been described above.
Returning to FIG. 95, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202db (see FIG. 99) storing a random value for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202db will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202db. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202db includes a normal/second probability variation table 202db1 used in the state where the normal state or the second probability variation state is set as the game state, and a probability variation state Or table 202db2 for probability variation and time saving used in the state of setting the time saving state is stipulated. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.
Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202db will be described with reference to FIGS. 99(b) and 100(a). FIG. 99(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal/second probability variation table 202db1. This normal/second probability variation table 202db1 is a data table referred to when the normal state or the second probability variation state, that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the game state, and the special symbol When the lottery result is a big win, it is stipulated that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when it is a loss, and the type of special symbol for which the lottery is executed and the special symbol which is executed are defined. Different variation patterns are defined according to the results of the lottery. Also, if the lottery result of the special design is a short-time winning (part of the loss), the lottery result of the special design is a big hit than if the lottery result of the special design is out (other than the short-time winning). is defined so that the same variation time as is easily selected.
First, the normal/second probability variation table 202db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 99(b). FIG. 99(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this normal/second probability variation table 202db1. In this normal/second probability variation table 202db1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. ing. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the judgment is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19". , normal (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. That is, even if the variation time is the same as 30 seconds, different variation patterns can be selected according to the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1. By configuring the main controller 110 to be able to select different variation patterns for the same variation time in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 side that receives the command indicating the variation pattern determines the variation effect. processing can be simplified.
In addition to the basic time, it may be possible to add an additional time according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In the case where the additional time can be added, the basic time and the additional time are summed. The added time is set as a variable time, and a command indicating the basic time and a command indicating the added time are output. In this case, when determining the additional time to be added, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 may be used, or the value of a dedicated counter used to select the additional time may be acquired. good. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (for example, 30 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the basic command It is preferable to set the variation pattern (normal reach) based on the information included in the addition command and set the reach symbol (type of the third symbol) based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the type of the third symbol of the medium symbol row Z2 that is first visible to the player is always set to a specific third symbol (in this control example, the third symbol with the number 1 attached). pattern), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Also, if the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, similarly, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the variation time is 8 seconds as a variation pattern. Outgoing is defined, and when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", out of reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.
On the other hand, if the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the judgment is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 149". , super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "150 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.
If the success/failure determination result is out (time saving), that is, the success/failure determination result is a time saving election, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 169", the variation pattern is super with a variation time of 30 seconds (reach) is defined. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.
If the result of the determination is out of range and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", out of reach with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 198", the deviation of the variation time of 8 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

Next, with reference to Fig.100 (a), the content of table 202db2 for probability variation / time reduction is demonstrated. Fig.100 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to table 202db2 for probability variation / time reduction. This variable probability/time reduction table 202db2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the variable probability state or the time reduction state is set, and the set game state and the type of special symbol Each variation pattern is selected so that different variation patterns are selected according to the number of variations (the number of variations of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result of the special symbols, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. is stipulated.
Here, in the second control example, the high probability state (probability variable state) of the normal symbol is always set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, the set normal pattern high probability state is configured to continue until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In this second control example, as the time saving end condition, the first time saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol variation after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set reaches a predetermined number of times, and the normal symbol A second time-saving end condition established when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a state where a high probability state is set is provided, and when any of the time-saving end conditions are established, a normal condition is established. It is configured to shift from a high-probability state of the design to a low-probability state of the normal design.
Then, according to the jackpot type, the number of executions of the special symbol variation (number of times of time reduction) set as the first time saving end condition is different, for example, when the jackpot A5, B5 is set as the jackpot type, the special symbol When the number of executions of variation reaches 60 times, the first time-saving end condition is established (time-saving number of times 60 times), and when the jackpot C5 is set, when the number of executions of special symbol variation reaches 56 times When the first time-saving end condition is satisfied (time-saving number of times 56 times) and the jackpot D5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is satisfied when the execution number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 65 times (time-saving number of times 65 times ).
In addition, in this second control example, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot (in the case of loss), the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) can be set (time saving winning possible). , and the first time-saving end condition is changed depending on the time-saving type set when the time-saving election is made. For example, when time saving A is set as the time saving type, the first time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 10000 times (time saving number 10000 times), and time saving B is set. In the case, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 100 times, the first time saving end condition is established (time saving number of times 100 times).

And, even when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, different variation patterns are selected according to the game state and the time saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable performance corresponding to the set game state and the type of time saving.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the time saving type is "time saving after the jackpot", that is, when the high probability state of the normal design is set based on the jackpot winning, the number of special symbol fluctuations is " 1 times to 60 times" period, regardless of the type of special symbol, the lottery result (whether judgment result) is a hit, and the fluctuation time is "15 seconds" regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. It stipulates that the pattern (middle variation) is selected. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189", and the variation pattern (short variation ), a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”.
In addition, during the period when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is "61 times to 65 times", the variation pattern ( special variation) is stipulated.
Here, when the period of special symbol fluctuation number "61 times to 65 times" is referred to, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, that is, after the probability change state ends, the time saving state of 5 rotations is set. is the case. During this time-saving state, it is a period during which the production of preparation time (see FIG. 91) is executed, and a constant variable time (5 seconds) is always set regardless of the success/failure determination result. Therefore, since the entire period of the preparation time can be fixed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the remaining period until the withdrawal mode is set.

The display screen during the preparation time has been described above with reference to FIG. 91, but in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. If the number of acquired special figures 2 pending satisfies the conditions for ending the preparation time (time saving state), the time obtained by adding 5 seconds to the number of remaining fluctuations of special symbols that can be executed during the time saving state is displayed on the display screen. Configure it to display. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the timing at which the preparation time ends and the withdrawal mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner.
Furthermore, when the remaining period of the preparation time can be notified, the period corresponding to the special symbol final variation in the time saving state, that is, the acquired special figure 2 hold is the time saving state It may be possible to execute an effect capable of preliminarily suggesting to the player a range corresponding to a period in which it is confirmed that the money will not be newly consumed during the period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the period during which the final variation of the special symbol is executed during the preparation time.
On the other hand, if the set time saving type is "time saving A" and the design type (special design type) is special 1 (first special design), the number of fluctuations (special design fluctuations), the lottery result (special design Lottery result), regardless of the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of "20 seconds" is defined, and if the symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol) , During the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1 time to 99 times", the lottery result (whether judgment result) is a hit, and the fluctuation time is "15 seconds" regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. (middle variation) is selected. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189", and the variation pattern (short variation ), a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”. Then, for the special symbol variation count of "100 times", regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, the variation pattern (special variation) is specified. Furthermore, when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "101 times to 200 times", the fluctuation time is "2 seconds" regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) or the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1. A pattern (ultra-short variation) is defined, and the number of special symbol variations is "201 times to 10000 times", regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 A variation pattern (special short variation) with a time of "0.5 seconds" is defined.
Also, if the set time saving type is "time saving B" and the design type (special design type) is special 1 (first special design), the number of fluctuations (special design fluctuations), the lottery result (special design Lottery result), regardless of the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of "20 seconds" is defined, and if the symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol) , During the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1 time to 99 times", the lottery result (whether judgment result) is a hit, and the fluctuation time is "15 seconds" regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. (middle variation) is selected. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), a variation pattern (short variation ), a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”. Then, for the special symbol variation count of "100 times", regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, the variation pattern (special variation) is specified.

As described above, in the second control example, when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery (when the time saving state is set without going through the jackpot game), it is set Regardless of the time-saving type, the variation pattern is selected with common contents until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the time saving type set based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, for the 100th special symbol variation, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, in the second control example, when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving type A or the time saving B can be set. When the number of times is set and the time reduction B is set, the number of times of time reduction is set to 100 times.
Then, if the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation period of the 100th special symbol change is used to determine whether the time saving state ends (time saving type is time saving A It is configured to execute an effect (continuous effect) for suggesting whether it is the time saving B). That is, even if any time-saving type is set, and even if the lottery result of the variation is any, since the variation pattern of the fixed number of seconds (10 seconds) is selected, continuous production can be made easier to implement.
In addition, when the time saving A is set, the time saving state will continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a maximum of 10000 times, but a special symbol low probability state is set during the time saving state. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than in the normal state, the special symbol lottery may continue to be executed without winning the jackpot. In this case, during the time-saving state, game balls can be frequently entered into the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed games to obtain prize balls, so a situation in which the number of balls possessed by the player is greatly reduced occurs. Although it is difficult to do so, there is a risk that the period until the next big win will be extended, and a player who has limited playing time will have to give up the game during the time saving state.
Therefore, in the second control example, as the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state increases, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the time efficiency of the game when many special symbol lotteries are executed without winning a jackpot during the time saving state. In addition, during the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), it is configured so that the shortened fluctuation time is difficult to select, so that multiple jackpot games can be played. It is possible to suppress the excessively large number of prize balls being provided to the player in a short period of time due to execution in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 95, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Since the configuration of the second winning random number table 202c is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. .
The time saving type selection counter CC1 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the time saving type selection counter CC1 is won in the special symbol lottery. , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁
The value of the time reduction type selection counter CC1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, the value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 obtained is used to refer to the time saving type selection table 202df to select the time saving type when the time saving is won. Here, the contents of the time reduction type selection table 202df will be described with reference to FIG. 100(b).
FIG.100(b) is the figure which showed the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction classification selection table 202df. In this time saving type selection table 202df, different time saving types are defined for the acquired value of the time saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is defined as a time saving type "time saving A" for the range "0 to 89", and for the range "90 to 99" time saving type " Shorter working hours B” is stipulated.

Here, when "time saving A" is set as the time saving type, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 10000, and when "time saving B" is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. be done. In other words, the time saving A is in a time saving state with 10000 times of time saving, and the time saving B is in a time saving state with 100 times of time saving.
Returning to FIG. 94, the description is continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 96(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.
As shown in FIG. 96(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a first winning random number table 202da, a variation pattern selection table 202db, a second winning random number table 202dc, and a jackpot type selection table. 202dd, random number table 202de per time saving, and time saving type selection table 202df. In addition, the first per random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second per random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection table 202d, the time reduction per random number table 202de, and the time reduction type selection table 202df, various counters shown in FIG. Since it was mentioned above when explaining, the explanation is abbreviate|omitted.
Returning to FIG. 94, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes various counters shown in FIG. 95, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .
When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
Also, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a number of first special symbol reserved balls. A counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, a variable probability counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot middle flag 203k, and other memory area 203z. have. Since the contents of each storage area, each counter, and each flag described above are the same as those in the first control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .
When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an accessory for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to
Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example is different from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 28A) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above. Then, the variable probability effect selection table 222c, the continuous notice execution selection table 222d, the V notification execution selection table 222e, and the button operation time effect selection table 222f are deleted, and the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db are changed. , and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
In the pullback mode selection table 222da, the end condition (shortening end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal design in the state where the variable probability state (high probability state of the special design, high probability state of the normal design) is established. A data table referred to when selecting the mode type in the pullback mode, which is a production mode executed corresponding to the game state (normal state, second variable probability state) set in the case, and is time-saving in the variable probability state. The number of special figures 2 pending when the end condition is satisfied (the number of pending memories of the second special symbol), the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, the presence or absence of a big hit in the pending (special figure 2 pending), the pending (special FIG. 2 pending) Four types of mode types (background) are defined corresponding to the presence or absence of time-saving winning and the value of the effect counter 223f.
Specifically, the number of special figures 2 pending is "4", that is, the upper limit number of special figures 2 pending is acquired, the value of the time saving lottery counter 223db is "4", and the jackpot in the hold is "yes" In the case, regardless of whether or not the short-time winning is held, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “Mode A” for the range of “0 to 49”, and “Mode B” for the range of “50 to 99”. ” is stipulated. Also, if the jackpot in the hold is "no" and the short-time winning in the hold is "yes", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79". 99” range is defined as “Mode A”, and if the short-time election within the hold is “None”, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “0 to 19” for the range of “Mode B”. , “Mode C” is defined for the range “20 to 59”, and “Mode D” is defined for the range “60 to 99”.
Also, if the number of special figures 2 pending is "4", that is, the upper limit number of special figures 2 pending is obtained, the value of the time saving lottery counter 223db is "0", and the jackpot in the reservation is "yes", Regardless of the presence or absence of short-time winning in the hold, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as “mode B” for the range of “0 to 59”, and “mode C” for the range of “60 to 99”. is set, and if the jackpot on hold is “no”, regardless of the presence or absence of short-time winning on hold, “Mode C” is set to the range of “0 to 79” for the value of the acquired production counter 223f. "Mode B" is defined for the range 80-99".

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number is "1 to 3", that is, in a state where the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations is not obtained, regardless of the value of the time saving lottery counter 223db, the jackpot in the reservation is "present". In the case of , regardless of the presence or absence of the short-time winning within the hold, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “Mode B” for the range of “0 to 19”, and “Mode B” for the range of “20 to 59” C” is defined as “mode D” for the range of “60 to 99”, and if the on-hold jackpot is “no”, if the on-hold short-time winning is “yes”, the acquired effect "Mode B" is defined for the range of the value of the counter 223f from "0 to 49", and "Mode D" is defined for the range from "50 to 99". , "mode B" is defined for the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and "mode D" is defined for the range of "20 to 99".
Since the detailed content has been described above with reference to FIG. 92(b), the explanation thereof will be omitted. It is stipulated so that the player's expectations for granting benefits are different, and mode A is the most advantageous mode type for the player (the expectation that benefits (jackpots, short-time winning) will be granted during the pullback mode is the highest) ), and the contents of the pullback mode selection table 222da are changed so that Mode B is the next most advantageous mode type, followed by Mode C and then Mode D so that each mode type is selected so that the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege becomes lower. stipulated.
Furthermore, depending on the number of special figures 2 pending at the timing when the variable state ends, the mode type to be selected is configured to differ greatly, and the number of special figures 2 pending at the time when the variable state ends is the upper limit number If not, the mode type (mode A) that is most advantageous to the player is not selected regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery number counter 223db or the look-ahead result in the special figure 2 reservation (whether there is a big hit or a time-saving winning). It is structured so that it is difficult to be
By configuring in this way, in order to predict the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode, the player actively hits right so that the number of special figures 2 reserved is the upper limit number. A game can be executed.

The suggested mode selection table 222db is a data table referred to when selecting the suggested mode displayed in the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode, and is a set mode type. , different types of suggestions are defined in correspondence with the lottery result of the variation and the value of the effect counter 223f.
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 101(b). As shown in FIG. 101(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, production counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h, time saving counter 223da, time saving lottery number counter 223db, mode type storage area 223dc, long time saving flag 223dd, initial setting flag 223de, other memory At least an area 223z is provided.
In addition, command storage area 223a, winning information storage area 223b, special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, special figure fluctuation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, normal symbol reserved ball number counter Since the content of 223h is the same as the content of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Time saving medium counter 223da is a counter for measuring the period in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of the jackpot game, or , after the stop display of the special symbol variation that has been elected for short time), a predetermined value is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter 223da during time saving becomes "0", normal symbols are displayed. It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the counter 223da during time saving, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

The time-saving lottery number counter 223db is the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the normal state, out of the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state). That is, it is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that can be elected in a short time, and is a special figure 2 acquired when the probability state of the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. A value is set based on the number of reservations and the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) set when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state.
Specifically, when a state command indicating that the normal state has shifted from the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) to the normal state (S9102 in FIG. 116: No), or from the variable probability state to the second In the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 117) executed when a state command indicating that it has moved to the probability variable state is received (S9402 in FIG. 119: Yes), based on the acquired special figure 2 pending The number of times of the second special symbol lottery to be executed (can be done) during the normal state is specified, and the value indicating the specified number of times is set to the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db. Then, the pullback mode selection table 222da is referred to when selecting the mode type of the pullback mode.
Also, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the pullback mode, the value of the time reduction lottery counter 223db is read, and if it is determined that a value greater than 1 is set, the second special Each time the symbol lottery is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S9607 in FIG. 121).
That is, in the second control example, when the special figure 2 hold obtained during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed after the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same regardless of the set game state It is configured to execute the production of the mode. In other words, as the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the normal state in which the special symbol lottery that can be short-time winning is executed, and the second probability variable state in which the special symbol lottery that can not be short-time winning is executed, A performance of the same mode (pull-back mode) is configured to be executed, and a player can easily discriminate whether or not there is a game state in which time-saving winning can be displayed as a lottery result of a second special symbol lottery being executed. It is configured to make it difficult to By configuring in this way, even if the second probability variable state is set in which a special symbol lottery that cannot be won in a short time is set, the player can play while expecting a short win. can let

Further, the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery that can actually win the time saving lottery is discriminated, and the mode type of the pullback mode can be selected based on the discrimination result. By configuring in this way, the same mode (retraction mode) is performed in the normal state in which a special symbol lottery that can be won in a short time is executed and the second probability variable state in which a special symbol lottery that can not be won in a short time is executed. Since it is possible to provide an element (mode type) for allowing the player to predict which game state is set even while the effect is being executed, the currently set game state may be a short-time winning. Since a player who wants to quickly determine whether a certain game state exists can pay attention to the content of the performance being executed, the performance effect can be enhanced.
The mode type storage area 223dc is a storage area for storing the mode type selected by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da. The information (mode type) stored in this mode type storage area 223dc is read when determining the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode. Then, when the pullback mode ends, the stored information is cleared.
The long time saving medium flag 223dd is a flag for indicating that a long time saving state (10000 special symbol variations) has been set, and a long time saving state (time saving type "time saving A") has been set. is set to ON when the time-saving state ends, and is set to OFF when the time-saving state ends. The setting state of the flag 223dd during long time reduction is referred to when determining the display mode for indicating the number of times of remaining time reduction (the remaining period of the high probability state of the normal symbol). Specifically, in the case of determining the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state (S9613 in FIG. 121: Yes), the long time saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 121), and if the flag 223dd during long working hours reduction is not set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 121: No), display in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A display command for subtracting and displaying the remaining number of times is set (S9614 in FIG. 121).
On the other hand, if the long time saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 121: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 121), and if less than 150 If it is determined that there is none (S9616 in FIG. 121: No), as shown in FIG. 90(a), "infinite" is displayed in the small display area Dm7, so the remaining time reduction count is subtracted and displayed. If the processing is skipped and it is determined that the number is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 121: Yes), the presentation mode for switching the display mode of the small display area Dm7 from "infinity" to "149" is determined (see FIG. 121: Yes). 121 S9617).

The initial setting flag 223de is a flag for indicating that the first second special symbol lottery has been executed among the second special symbol lotteries executed during the pullback mode, and is executed during the pullback mode. It is set to ON after determining the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the first second special symbol variation (see S9605 in FIG. 121). Then, it is referred to when setting the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode, and when it is determined that the first setting flag 223de is set to ON (of FIG. 121 S9602: Yes), the processing for setting the first special figure 2 production mode (S9603, S9604 in FIG. 121) is skipped.
<Regarding control processing contents in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 122, the contents of various control processes in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. In this second control example, for the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, part of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 The difference is that a part of the processing is changed, and the others are the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 113, the control processing executed by main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. In this second control example, in place of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 41), the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 104) is replaced with the special symbol jackpot determination processing ( S208 in FIG. 42) instead of special symbol determination processing (see S251 in FIG. 105), special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S209 in FIG. 43) in place of special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S252 in FIG. 107), Update processing (S253 at time 256) instead of update processing (S221 in FIG. 44), and starting winning processing (S195 in FIG. 110) instead of starting winning processing (S105 in FIG. 45). Prefetching processing (S613 in FIG. 46) instead of prefetching processing (S653 in FIG. 111), jackpot control processing (S1804 in FIG. 52) instead of jackpot control processing (see S1894 in FIG. 112), jackpot end processing (FIG. 54 (see S1910 of FIG. 113) instead of executing the jackpot end process (see S8403 of FIG. 113), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 104, the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 104) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104). In this special symbol variation process (S104), in contrast to the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 41), part of the process executed when starting the special symbol variation and the variation time of the special symbol variation The difference is that part of the processing to be executed when the time elapses has been changed.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, the same processes of S201 to S207 and S210 to S213 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 41) are executed. Then, when the process of S207 or the process of S213 is finished, the special symbol determination process (S251) is executed, then the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S252) is executed, and this process is finished.
Also, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed (S214: Yes), the same S216 to S220 processing as the above-described special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 41) is executed, and this processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S217, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S217: No), update processing is executed (S253), and then time reduction setting processing is executed (S254), S220. Move to processing.
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S251) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol determination process (S251). This special symbol determination process (S251) is executed in place of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 42) of the first control example described above, and in addition to the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, the time reduction winning Determination (time saving lottery process) is executed.
When the special symbol determination process (S251) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S8001), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202da (S8002). , When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a big hit (S8004), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2) , sets the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S8005), and terminates this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S8003: No), the time-saving lottery process is executed (S8006), and the process ends.

Here, the time saving lottery process (S8006) is a process for executing determination of time saving election in this special symbol lottery. That is, in the second control example, in the special symbol lottery, first, the judgment of the jackpot election is executed (S8003), and when the jackpot is elected, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing the judgment of the time-saving election, It is constituted so as to execute the determination of time-saving winning only when the jackpot is not won. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, short-time winning) are not given to the player, a game excessively advantageous to the player is provided. You can prevent it from happening.
Next, with reference to Drawing 106, processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8006) are explained. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving lottery process (S8006). In this time-saving lottery process (S8006), it is determined whether the current gaming situation is a game situation in which the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) can be executed, and when it is determined that it can be executed, the time-saving lottery judgment is executed. is done.
When the time saving lottery process (S8006) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current target (lottery target) is the special figure 2 (second special symbol) (S8101), and if it is determined that it is the special figure 2 (S8101; Yes), the current game state stored in the game state storage area is read (S8102), and it is determined whether the read game state is the normal state (S8103).
In the process of S8103, when it is determined that it is in the normal state (S8103: Yes), the lottery result (time reduction winning judgment result) is acquired based on the time reduction random number table 202de (S8104), and it is determined whether the time reduction is elected Then (S8105), if it is determined that the time saving has been elected (S8105: Yes), based on the value of the acquired per type counter (first per type counter C2), special to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The time-saving design of the design is set (S8106), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the current target is not the special figure 2 (the first special symbol) (S8101: No), in the process of S8103, it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state. If (S8103: No), or if it is determined that the time-saving election is not performed in the process of S8105 (S8105: No), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the A missing symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is set (S8107), and this processing is terminated.
That is, in the second control example, as execution conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery is not a big hit, the second special symbol lottery, and the normal state are set. It is stipulated that In this way, by setting the conditions for executing time-saving winning judgment, depending on the execution status of the special symbol lottery, a case where only big winning judgment is executed and a case where both big winning judgment and time-saving winning judgment are executed are created. can do. Therefore, it is possible to vary the probability that a player is given a privilege (big hit or reduced working hours) in one special symbol lottery according to the situation.
In addition, in the second control example, the game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state such as the variable probability state and the time saving state ends when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60 times). It is configured to shift to the normal state. In other words, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot, the conditions for executing time-saving winning determination can be easily established, so that the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the special symbol lottery will give the player a privilege (big hit or reduced working hours) in one special symbol lottery than before the predetermined number of times. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has not won a jackpot for a predetermined period of time from being extremely motivated to play.
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S252) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S252). In this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S252), first, in the special symbol determination process (S251 in FIG. 105), whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, that is, whether a special symbol big win is set. It is determined whether or not (S8201). In the process of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), based on the jackpot type selection table 202dd and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 , determines the jackpot type (S8202). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203), and the current game state (normal state, second probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g , probability variation state) read out the variation pattern selection table 202db corresponding to (S8204).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection table 202db read in the process of S8204 (S8205), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 , to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main control device 110 Main processing External output processing Voice lamp control Output to device 113 .
Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (S8208), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S8209), and the process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .
On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the time reduction lottery result (time reduction winning determination result) is time reduction winning ( S8209), when it is determined that the time reduction is elected (S8209: Yes), the time reduction type is determined with reference to the time reduction type selection table 202df (S8210), and the process proceeds to S8203. Also, when it is determined that the time reduction election has not been made in the process of S8209 (S8209: No), the process of S8210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.
Next, the contents of the update process (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S253). In this update process (S253), the same process as the above-described update process (see S221 in FIG. 44) is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S254) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S254). In this time saving setting process (S254), a process for setting a working time saving state is executed when working time saving is won by time saving winning determination. When the time saving setting process (S254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is time saving winning (S8351), and when it is determined that it is time saving winning (S8351: Yes), the determined time saving The value corresponding to the type is set in the time saving counter 203h (S8352), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area (S8353), the value of the time saving counter 203h, the time saving type game state (information indicating the time saving state, and the set (Information indicating the time saving type) is set (S8354), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S8351, if it is determined that the time saving has not been won (S8351: No), this process is terminated as it is.
That is, in the second control example, it is configured so that the time saving state is set at different timings according to the time saving winning opportunity, and when the time saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, the timing of stopping the special symbol variation. When the time-saving state is set in , and the time-saving state is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is set not at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation but at the timing of finishing the big winning game.
By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state is set can be varied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to get tired of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the contents of the starting winning process (S195) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting winning process (S195). In this starting winning process (S195), the value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is added to the type of the counter value stored in each special symbol reserved ball storage area, compared to the above-described starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 45). The only difference is that the points (S651, S652) and the execution of the prefetching process (S653) are the same.
Next, the processing contents of the prefetch processing (S653) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prefetching process (S653). When this look-ahead process (S653) is executed, first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first The values of the hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the time saving type selection counter CC1 are read (S750). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S702).
Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S751), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S703 is not a jackpot (S703: No), then it is determined whether it is a time-saving election (S752), and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving election (S752: No) Then, based on the various counter values read out, a prize winning command including information capable of specifying the lost winning and the variation pattern is set (S705), and then the process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving election is determined in the process of S752 (S752: Yes), it is determined whether the suspension fluctuation time is normal (S753), and if it is determined that it is normal (S753: Yes) , Based on the read various counter values, set a winning command including information that can identify the time-saving winning and the variation pattern (S754), and terminate this process.
Here, the winning command set in the processing of S704, S705, or S754 includes, in addition to the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), common information: The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S701. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51).
On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) of displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of variation and suggesting the result of winning judgment (whether a big hit, winning a short-time winning) to the player.

In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.
By configuring in this way, to the audio lamp control device 113 side, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot or short-time winning Because it will output a winning command indicating jackpot or short-time winning, look ahead Expectation of winning a big win can be given to the special symbol variation in which the performance is not executed.
Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the order of variation until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.
Further, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which prefetching processing is executed and the success/failure determination is predicted in advance in the prefetching processing. Alternatively, information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set as a winning command and received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to predict the result of winning/failing determination based on the information included in the winning command.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1894) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot control process (S1894). In this jackpot control process (S1894), the above-described jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 52) is executed when it is determined that a new round start timing (S1905: Yes) is executed in the specific winning opening. Set open (S8401), set a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S8402), and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), jackpot end processing (S8403 ) are executed, and the rest are the same.
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing (S8403) executed in the jackpot control processing (see S1894 in FIG. 112) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S8403). When this jackpot end processing (S8403) is executed, the currently executing jackpot type is specified (S8501), and the value (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set to the probability variable counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h. Then (S8502), the game state corresponding to the value of the probability variable counter 203i and the time reduction counter 203h is set in the game state storage area (S8503), the value of the set probability variable counter 203i, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the state indicating the game state A command is set (S8504), the jackpot medium flag is set to OFF (S8505), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 122, the contents of control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this second control example, in place of the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 59), the command determination processing (S4182 in FIG. 114) is replaced with the status command reception processing (S4202 in FIG. 60). (see S4983 in FIG. 120) instead of the state command receiving process (S4282 in FIG. 115), instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 67), the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4983 in FIG. 120) , Instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 68), the difference is that the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4987 in FIG. 121) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S4182 in FIG. 114). As shown in FIG. 114, in the command determination process (S4182 in FIG. 114), the status command reception process is replaced with the status command reception process (S4282) in contrast to the above-described command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 59). They are different in one respect and otherwise identical.
FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the status command reception process (S4282). As shown in FIG. 115, in this state command receiving process (S4282), based on the state command received from the main control device 110, the newly set game state is determined, and various effects are performed based on the determination result. Processing for setting is executed.
In the state command reception process (S4282), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (S9001). If it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S9001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S9001, when it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S9001: Yes), the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g is shifted to the command received from the main controller 110 this time. The corresponding game state is set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S9002).
Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: Yes), normal state effect setting processing is executed (S9004), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the normal state effect setting process (S9004) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9003 that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: No), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the processing of S9005, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005: Yes), the time saving state effect setting process is executed (S906), and this process ends. A detailed description of the time saving state effect setting process (S9006) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S9005, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005: No), the process proceeds to S9007.
In the process of S9007, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the second probability variation state (S9007). If it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the second probability variation state (S9007: Yes), the second probability variation state effect setting process is executed (S9008), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the second probability variation state effect setting process (S9008) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S9007, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the second probability variable state (S9007: No), the process proceeds to S9009.
In the processing of S9009, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the variable probability state (S9009). When it is determined that the command indicates a change to the variable probability state (S9009: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203da (S9010), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9009, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the probability variable state (S9009: No), this process ends.
FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the normal state effect setting process (S9004). This normal state effect setting process (S9004) is a process executed when a state command indicating a normal state is received in the state command reception process (see S4282 in FIG. 115). In this normal state effect setting process (S9004), as shown in FIG. 116, different effect modes are set depending on whether the game state before the normal state is set is the second probability variable state. And if it is not the second probability variable state, that is, if it is determined that the probability variable state or the time saving state has transitioned to the normal state, the pullback for setting the effect mode corresponding to the pullback mode (pullback zone). Execute mode setting processing.

In the normal state effect setting process (S9004), first, the game state before change is read out from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9101). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read in the process of S9101 is the second probability variable state (S9102). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the second variable probability state (S9102: Yes), the display command for the effect mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S9102, when it is determined that the read gaming state before the change is not the second probability variable state (S9104: No), pullback mode setting processing is executed (S9104), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the pullback mode setting process (S9104) will be given later with reference to FIG.
FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the pullback mode setting process (S9104). In this withdrawal mode setting process (S9104), as shown in FIG. 117, various processes are executed for setting display commands for indicating the display mode (effect mode) related to the effect screen shown in FIG. be.
In the withdrawal mode setting process (S9104), first, the game state before change is read from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9201). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball in the second special symbol (S9202). When it is determined that the second special symbol has a reserved ball (S9202: Yes), the number of lotteries for the second special symbol executed during the normal state is specified (S9203). Next, the value of the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed during the normal state specified in the process of S9203 is set to the time reduction lottery number counter 223db (S9204).
Next, with reference to the pullback mode selection table 222da (see FIG. 102), the mode type is determined by using the number of reservations of the second special symbol, the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db, and the special figure 2 reservation information. (S9205), the mode type determined in the processing of S9205 is stored in the mode type storage area 223dc (S9206), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9202, if it is determined that there is no reserved ball in the second special symbol (S9202: No), the display command for the production mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9207), and this process is executed. finish.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the time saving state effect setting process (S9006). This time saving state production setting process (S9006) is a process executed when a state command indicating a time saving state is received in the state command receiving process (see S4282 in FIG. 115). In this time saving state effect setting process (S9006), as shown in FIG. 118, if the gaming state before the time saving state is set is a probability variable state, the preparation time (see FIG. 91) corresponding display mode (effect mode ), and if it is in the normal state, the display mode for indicating that it has entered the time saving state, or the display mode corresponding to the extended time corresponding to the long time saving (see FIG. 90) ( A process for setting the effect mode) is executed.
In the time saving state effect setting process (S9006), first, the game state before change is executed from the subordinate state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is the variable probability state (S9302). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding effect mode is set during the preparation time (S9303), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is not the variable probability state (S9302: No), it is determined whether the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304). When it is determined that the gaming state before the change is not the normal state (S9304: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9305), and is set this time. It is determined whether the time saving type is time saving A (S9306).
In the process of S9306, when it is determined that the time saving type set this time is time saving A (S9306: Yes), the long time saving medium flag 223dd is set to ON (S9307), and the effect mode corresponding to the extended time is set. A command for indicating is set (S9308), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving type set this time is not the time saving A (S9306: No), this process is terminated.

FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the second probability variation state effect setting process (S9008). This second probability variation state effect setting process (S9008) is a process executed when a state command indicating the second probability variation state is received in the state command reception process (see S4282 in FIG. 115). In this second probability variable state production setting process (S9008), as shown in FIG. 119, different production modes are set depending on whether the gaming state before the second probability variable state is set is the probability variable state. In the case of the variable probability state, a pullback mode setting process is executed for setting an effect mode corresponding to the pullback mode (pullback zone).
In the second probability variable state effect setting process (S9008), first, the game state before change is read out from the subsidiary state setting area 223g (S9401). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9401 is the variable probability state (S9402). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9402: Yes), the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 117) is executed (S9403), and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S9402, when it is determined that the game state before the change is not the variable probability state (S9402: No), this processing is terminated as it is.
FIG. 120 is a flowchart for showing the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4983). In this special figure 1 production mode setting process (S4983), a process for setting the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation to be executed is executed.
In the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4983), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is greater than 0 (S9501). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 223da (S9502), and the value of the time saving counter 223da after subtraction is indicated. A command for display is set (S9503), and the process proceeds to S9504. On the other hand, in the processing of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S9501: No), the processing of S9502 to S9503 is skipped, and the processing of S9504 is performed. In the process of S9504, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9504), and the process ends.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart for showing the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4987). In this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4987), as shown in FIG. 121, a process for setting various effect modes is executed according to the gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed.
In the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4987), first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variation state (S9601). When it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the second variable probability state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602). When it is determined that the first setting flag 223de is not ON (S9602: No), based on the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed during the pullback zone is determined (S9603 ), and determines an effect mode corresponding to the determined number of lotteries of the second special symbol (S9604).
Next, the initial setting flag 223de is set to ON (S9605), and the process proceeds to S9606. On the other hand, in the process of S9602, if it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602: Yes), the processes of S9603 to S9605 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9606.
In the process of S9606, the suggested mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 103) is referenced to determine the suggested mode (S9606). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db (S9607), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db after the subtraction is 0 (S9608). When it is determined that the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db after the subtraction is 0 (S9608: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the pullback zone final variation is determined (S9609), and the first time setting flag 223de is set to OFF. (S9610). Then, a display command indicating the determined rendering mode is set (S9611), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9608, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time lottery number counter 223db after subtraction is not 0 (S9608: No), the process of S9609 to S9610 is skipped, and the process of S9611 described above is executed. , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9601, when it is determined that it is not the normal state or the second variable probability state (S9601: No), the value of the counter 223da during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S9612). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S9613). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a time saving state, that is, if it is determined that it is a variable probability state (S9613: Yes), set a display command for indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 223da after subtraction Then (S9614), the effect setting process during the chance time is executed (S9619), the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the effect setting process during chance time (S9619) will be given later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of S9613, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S9613: Yes), it is determined whether the long time saving flag 223dd is on (S9615). When it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is not ON (S9615: No), the process proceeds to S9614 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is ON (S9615: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during short working hours is less than 150 (S9616).
In the process of S9616, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the number of remaining time saving times is determined (S9617), and the above-described S9614 Go to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S9616, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is not less than 150 (S9616: No) a display command indicating that the time saving state continues until the next big hit is set ( S9618), and shifts to production setting processing during chance time (S9619).
FIG. 122 is a flow chart for showing the effect setting process during chance time (S9619). This production setting process (S9619) during the chance time is the production mode of the variable production that is executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in the special figure 2 production mode setting process (see S4987 in FIG. 121). As shown in FIG. 122, processing for updating the display mode of the remaining period display is executed.

In the chance time production setting process (S9619), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 223da subtracted in the process of S9612 of the special figure 2 production mode setting process (see S4987 in FIG. 121) is 0 (S9701). . When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da after subtraction is 0 (S9701: Yes), the production mode including the guidance mode for saving the special figure 2 reservation is determined (S9702), and then, It is determined whether the flag 223dd during long working hours is ON (S9703).
In the process of S9703, if it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is ON (S9703: Yes), the flag 223dd during long working hours is set to OFF (S9704), and the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined. (S9705), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9701, if the value of the time saving medium counter 223da after subtraction is not 0 (S9701: No), or if it is determined that the long time saving medium flag 223db is not on in the process of S9703 (S9703 : No), the process of S9705 described above is executed, and this process ends.
<First Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 129. FIG. In the second control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving election can be made only in the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. On the other hand, in the present first modification, the difference is that the first special symbol lottery, which is executed when the normal state is set, can be elected in a short time. Other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
In the above-described second control example, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery is performed in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, and the second special symbol lottery is performed during the high probability state of normal symbols. It was configured to be able to acquire the execution right (special figure 2 reservation) of 2 special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, in addition to the big winning lottery, the short-time lottery is performed. By configuring it so that it is also executed, for a player who has experienced a game (advantageous game) in a high probability state with normal symbols that is advantageous to the player, after the advantageous game is completed, more than usual It is possible to execute a game (pull-back game) that easily returns to an advantageous game with a high probability.

However, in the above-described second control example, a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state, and the game (advantageous game) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is not executed. As long as there is no benefit from the time-saving lottery, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game without receiving the benefit of the time-saving lottery.
On the other hand, in the first modification, since it is configured so that the time-saving lottery can be won even in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the player can easily receive the benefits of the time-saving lottery. can do.
Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, based on the time-saving winning in the special symbol lottery, rather than the normal symbol high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery In the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern set by , the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) is likely to become longer. In other words, when the special pattern lottery wins the short-time win, the player can be provided with the privilege of facilitating the continuation of the normal pattern high probability period until the next big win win.
On the other hand, in the first modification, when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short time (for example, time saving once) state can be set, and the short time saving state is configured. During the period in which the state is set (normal pattern high probability period), it is configured to be able to execute a game to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery. That is, in the first modified example, the pull-back game in the above-described second control example is configured to be executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the first modified example, a plurality of variable times can be selected as the variable pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. In this first modification, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed in a display mode (time reduction symbol) for indicating the time reduction election after the fluctuation of the predetermined variation time. is stopped and displayed, a time saving state (time saving number of times) is set, and the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation to be executed next is stopped and displayed.
That is, the length of the period during which the time saving state continues is determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the longer the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state, the easier it is to acquire many special figures 2 reserves during the time saving state, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player can be obtained.
<Regarding the production contents of the first modified example of the second control example>
With reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, description will be given of the characteristic effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example of the second control example.
First, in the above-described second control example, the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues after the jackpot game ends (special pattern high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) A predetermined period (for example, the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times and the 60th special symbol variation stops) is set, and during the normal pattern high probability period, the second It is possible to acquire the lottery right of 2 special patterns (special pattern 2 reservation), and the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are over and the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) If set, time-saving judgment only when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special 2 lottery) executed based on the special 2 reservation acquired during the normal pattern high probability period is not a jackpot winning is executed, and the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set when time saving is elected by time saving determination.

It should be noted that the special figure 2 hold means that when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is already fluctuating, the second special symbol This means that the lottery right of the pattern is reserved, and up to four lottery rights are reserved (reserved storage).
In the second control example, when the normal state is set, the probability of winning the normal pattern is low, so it is difficult to win in the normal pattern lottery (normal lottery) compared to the time saving state, and the electric role Since it is difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) in which the object 640a is in an open state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and in the normal state. The special figure 2 lottery is executed, as described above, during the normal figure high probability period set after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and the special figure high probability period and the general figure high probability period end It was only when there was a special figure 2 hold when the normal state was set later.
Therefore, in order to set a state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state), the jackpot must be won at least once, and the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. A player who cannot win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (special 1 lottery) executed based on will play a game in a normal state, which is a disadvantageous game state, for a long period of time, so that the willingness to play is reduced. There was a fear that it would be lost.
On the other hand, in the first modification of the second control example, in the normal state, even if the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is not a big hit, time-saving determination is executed, and if it is a time-saving election, A time saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, a period until a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed once and the variation of the special symbol stops), and a special figure 2 is set during the time saving state. It is different from the second control example in that the reservation can be acquired, that is, the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired even if the jackpot is not won.

Specifically, if the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery is not a big hit, the time saving judgment is performed, and the time saving winning probability in this case is lower than the time saving winning probability of the second special symbol (for example, the second The time saving winning probability of the special symbol is 1/6, and the time saving winning probability of the first special symbol is 1/200). In addition, if the number of times of reduced working hours given when winning the first special symbol (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues) When the short winning of the second special symbol less times (for example, when the second special symbol is elected to reduce the time, the special symbol is changed 10,000 times, and the period until the 10,000th special symbol variation stops, during the time when the first special symbol is elected, the special symbol is The period until the special symbol stops changing after being changed once).
Here, when the probability of short-time winning in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), for example, 1/200, normal pattern Even if the lottery right of the second special pattern (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired up to the maximum number (maximum 4 in the embodiment) during the high probability period, at least 1 time-saving winning in 4 special figure 2 lotteries The probability is about 2%, and when the special figure high probability period and the normal figure high probability period are over and the normal state is set, it is advantageous to win a short time in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation. Since the player hardly expects to be set again, it is difficult to make the player think that the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period. There is a risk that the player will not actively play until the last moment to obtain the special figure 2 reservation.
Therefore, the time-saving winning probability in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state is the special figure 2 hold that is obtained up to the upper limit number (in this embodiment, up to 4 pieces) during the normal figure high probability period. It is desirable to set the probability (for example, 1/6) that short-time winning can be fully expected in the special figure 2 lottery based on FIG. The probability of winning a short time is about 50%, and even if the special high probability period and the normal high probability period are over and the normal state is set, it is advantageous to win a short time in the special 2 lottery based on the special 2 reservation. It is possible to make the player expect that the state will be set again, and by making the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state think that it is a special period, until the last moment when the normal figure high probability period ends It is possible to motivate the game to acquire many special figure 2 reservations.
On the other hand, the short-time winning probability in the first special pattern lottery (special 1 lottery) in the normal state is the same probability as the short-time winning probability in the special 2 lottery in the normal state or the short-time winning probability in the special 2 lottery. If the probability is higher than that, there is a risk that the time saving will be frequently won in the normal state, and the time saving state will be easily set, which will be excessively advantageous to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the time saving winning probability in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is set lower than the time saving winning probability in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state.
Also, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the time saving is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving number of times is changed once. It is configured to set the period and the time saving state.
For example, if the number of times of time saving is granted two or more times, if the player is playing correctly, it is possible to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit, but in the case of such a configuration, the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery If you do, you can get the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit every time, so the ease of winning the time saving is always constant, and the game in the time saving state set based on the fact that you won the time saving in the special figure 1 lottery However, there was a risk that it would become a monotonous game just to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit number.
On the other hand, if the number of times of reduced working hours given in the first special pattern lottery (special 1 lottery) is 1, the reduced working hours state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set, the variable time of the special pattern, the variable time of the normal pattern, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is opened as a privilege by winning the normal pattern lottery. It is possible to change the number of lottery rights (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special pattern that can be obtained inside, and it is easy to win time saving without changing the probability of winning time depending on the number of special figures 2 reservation that can be obtained. Since the depth can be varied, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this way, the time-saving judgment is executed even in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and if you win a short time, you can acquire special figure 2 reservation. By setting the time-saving state, even if the player cannot win the jackpot for a long period of time, the player can obtain the opportunity to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, so that the normal state disadvantageous to the player continues for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
As described above, in the first modification of the second control example, the time reduction determination is executed even in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state, so that the game state is varied after the time reduction election, so that the player's game Since the method also changes, it is necessary to inform the player of the time-saving winning in an easy-to-understand manner.
In addition, a time-saving state that is set when you win a time-saving lottery in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state, and a time-saving state that is set when you win a time-saving drawing in the second special pattern lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) in the normal state. , The contents of the game are different (in the time saving state set by the time saving winning in the special drawing 1 lottery, special drawing 2 is acquired a lot, and special drawing 2 in the normal state is executed based on the special drawing 2 holding A game aiming for short-time winning in the lottery, and a game aiming for a special symbol lottery jackpot in the short-time state set when winning the short-time lottery in the special drawing 2), so that the player is not confused Display mode during the short-time state , to make it easier for the player to understand which of the time saving states is set based on the time saving winning in which special figure lottery.
Based on the above, an example of rendering in the first modified example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG.

FIG. 123(a) is an example of a variable display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot lottery or a time-saving lottery lottery in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 123(a), in the normal state, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a big win or a short-time election, a rabbit character 801 and a treasure box 810e are displayed in the main display area Dm, In the secondary display area Ds, "If a 'V' comes out of the treasure box, you win big! ! When "time" comes out, it's a short time GET! ! Open the treasure chest." is displayed. In other words, at the time when FIG. 123(a) is displayed, it is configured so that the player does not know whether the jackpot or the time saving has been won.
By configuring in this way, when the treasure box 810e is displayed, it is possible for the player to expect that he or she has won either the big win or the time-saving win. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player predict which one of the jackpot winning or the short-time winning is won.
Figure 123 (b) shows the display screen when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is a short-time election in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) An example. In the main display area Dm, the treasure box 810e displayed in FIG. 123(a) is opened, and an effect is executed in which a ball tm1 written as "Time x 1" appears from inside, and "Time reduction" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. GET ONE TIME” is displayed to notify the player of the time-saving winning.
In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot winning, the treasure box 810e opens in the main display area Dm of FIG. is executed, and "Congratulations! Jackpot!" is displayed in the secondary display area to notify the player of winning the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether the game state set after the first special symbol during fluctuation is stopped is a jackpot game state or a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). It can be made easy for the player to understand.
In addition, in the embodiment, when the jackpot winning or the time saving winning is performed, the effects of FIGS. 123(a) and (b) may be executed in part of the case where there is an error. is empty and "Unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds) is displayed.
In this case, by changing the display mode of the treasure box 810e displayed in FIG. In this case, there is a high possibility that you have won a wrong prize, and if a golden treasure box 810e is displayed, it indicates that there is a high possibility that you have won one of them).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game due to the fact that the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is out for a long period of time in any determination, and the performance is not executed. can.

Although details will be described later, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for displaying the number of lottery rights (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special symbol acquired, and in FIG. Reservation h6 is displayed in black, reservation h7 and reservation h8 are displayed in white, indicating that there is a special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the number of reservations displayed in black (in the case of FIG. 123 (b) , Shows a state where there are two special 1 reservations). That is, the embodiment is an example of effect executed when special figure 1 reservation is present and time saving is won in special figure 1 lottery in normal state.
Here, when an advantageous state (for example, time-saving state) is set, the game machine is generally configured so that the second special symbol is likely to be set for a shorter variation time than the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, when the advantageous state (for example, time saving state) is set, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is mainly executed, so if the lottery result is out By shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols, the game in an advantageous state is prevented from being prolonged, and the player can comfortably play the game.
However, in the first modification of the second control example, in a situation where there is no special figure 1 reservation, the first special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) 1 lottery), if you notify that you have won a short time as shown in FIG. From there, the player starts a game (right-handed game) in which a game ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 on the right side of the board surface of the gaming machine, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Based on, the variation of the second special symbol is started. In other words, the second special symbol, which is likely to be set with a shorter variation time than the first special symbol, starts to fluctuate in a state where the time saving state is set, and when the variation of the second special symbol stops, the time saving state ends. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will not be able to obtain the upper limit number of lottery rights (special figure 2 reserved) for the second special symbol, and the situation will be disadvantageous to the player.
In addition, when the second special symbol is configured to easily set a longer fluctuation time than the first special symbol in the time saving state, when the time saving state is set based on the fact that the time saving is won in the special figure 1 lottery In addition, by varying the second special symbol, it becomes easier to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit, so that the lottery right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol is not acquired during the game in the normal state. There is a risk that some players will play an illegal game by shooting the balls one by one.

Therefore, if the time saving is won in the special figure 1 lottery in a situation where the special figure 1 reservation does not exist, even if the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is winning the time saving is stopped, the fact that the time saving is won is not notified (for example, the treasure box 810e is empty), and next, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the large second ball entrance 640, when the special symbol variation is started, It is good also as composition which performs production (refer to figure 124 (a)) in a time saving state.
By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 1 lottery is short-time winning in the special figure 1 lottery in a situation where the special figure 1 reservation does not exist, the player does not know whether or not the short-time winning is won, and the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In order to continue the game (left-handed game) to enter the ball, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variation by the first special pattern during the time saving state set based on the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery.
In addition, in order to change the first special symbol during the time saving state set based on the time saving election in the special figure 1 lottery, the first It is good also as a structure which provides the starting opening which can change a special design.
With reference to FIGS. 124(a) and 124(b), the effect executed when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state will be described.

Although the details will be described later, in the first modification of the second control example, if the time reduction is elected in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is elected for the time reduction is stopped and then executed A time-saving state is set for the period until the variation of the special symbol of 1 is completed.
In addition, as described above, when the time saving state is set, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state compared to the normal state. It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the 2 ball entrance 640, and the player can obtain the special figure 2 reservation.
And the number of special figures 2 reserved that the player can acquire during the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the variation time of special symbols, the variation time of normal symbols, the game per normal It is possible to change the combination of the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a by .
For example, 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol when the time saving state is set, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the electric accessory 640a is open 1 second x 2 times as a game per normal symbol. In this case, the electric accessory 640a will be in the open state 12 times at maximum, so the player can draw the second special symbol lottery right (special figure 2 hold) can be obtained.

On the other hand, 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol when the time saving state is set, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds, and the electric accessory 640a is open 1 second x 1 time as a game per normal symbol. In this case, since the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 only once at most, the player can acquire only one special figure 2 reservation.
Then, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped and the time saving state is ended, a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired by the player during the time saving state.
In addition, in the embodiment, the time-saving winning probability of the second special symbol in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is higher than the time-saving winning probability of the first special symbol (in the embodiment, 1 / 6), the number of times of time saving given at the time of winning time saving is also large (10000 times in the embodiment).
That is, the more special figures 2 pending acquired during the time saving, the more special figures 2 lotteries can be received, so the longer the special symbol fluctuation time when the time saving state is set, the more advantageous it is for the player. Become.

It should be noted that any of the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a by the normal per game may be a fixed value.
In FIG. 124(a), the first special symbol won in the normal state is stopped, and the variation time of the first special symbol to be executed next is 30 seconds, the variation time of the normal symbol is 2 seconds, and the electric accessory 640a. It is a display screen during the time saving state when 1 second × 1 time is set as the opening pattern of.
The first special symbol is variably displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the display indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed in the small display area Dm8. It is easy for players to understand.
Corresponding to the fact that the time saving state is set in the small display area Dm4, the player is urged to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 on the right side area of the board surface of the game machine. is displayed, and in the secondary display area Ds, the message ``Right hit and accumulate reserves! is doing.

In the main display area Dm, "Collect capsules within the time limit during charging!"
The capsule is a display for notifying that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640. When the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the reserved symbol in the small display area Dm9 is displayed in black. When it lights up, one capsule is displayed. Here, the small display area Dm9 is a display area for showing the number of special figures 2 reserved obtained by the player entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery If the right (special figure 2 reservation) does not exist, the reservation h1 to reservation h4 are displayed in white, and when the player acquires the special figure 2 reservation, it is lit in black in order from the reservation h1 to the youngest, and the reservation storage is the upper limit. When the number is accumulated, all of the suspension h1 to suspension h4 are lit in black.
In addition, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for indicating the number of lottery rights (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special symbol acquired by the player entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64. When the special figure 1 reservation does not exist, the reservations h5 to the reservation h8 are displayed in white. When the hold is obtained up to the upper limit number (4 times in the embodiment), all of the holds h5 to h8 are lit black.
In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 124 (a), it shows that it is in a state of acquiring one special figure 1 reservation and one special figure 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the upper limit number of reserved special symbols and the current state of obtaining reserved special symbols, and when the reserved number of special symbols is obtained up to the upper limit number. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the lottery right for each special pattern is not reserved, so depending on the reservation acquisition status, the player is asked to enter the first ball entrance 64. Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier to determine whether or not to continue the game for entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, when the reservation h4 is displayed in black based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in the state where the reservation h1 to reservation h3 are displayed in black in the small display area Dm9, that is, the special figure When four 2 reserves, which is the upper limit number, are stored, the main display area Dm displays "MAX Acquisition Complete!" notify. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired up to the upper limit number, and the player can be relieved.
In the small display area Dm5, the remaining time until the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) ends, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbols during fluctuation is displayed. Dm11 displays "capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX". The content displayed in the small display area Dm11 corresponds to the special figure 2 pending number that can be obtained during the time saving state, and in the example shown in FIG. 2 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal pattern, and 1 second x 1 time is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX" is displayed. On the other hand, when 5 seconds are set as the variation time of the first special symbol, 3 seconds are set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and 1 second x 2 times are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since you can only get 1 at maximum, the message ``Expectation for Capsule Upper Limit Acquisition Low'' is displayed.
By configuring in this way, the enjoyment of predicting the number of special figures 2 pending that the player can acquire during the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) from the display content of the small display area Dm11 can be given, and when a short variation time is set as the variation time of the special symbol, it is possible to make the player shoot the game ball in a hurry, and despite the fact that the time saving state is set, the game ball It is possible to suppress the problem that the player fails to play the game in the time-saving state due to the delay in the launch of the ball.
It should be noted that the display of the upper limit expectation level of the capsule may be any display that indicates the level, and for example, the number of stars may be used to indicate the level of expectation.

In addition, in the embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is elected during the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the lottery right of the first special symbol (Special figure 1 suspension) exists, and the case where the variation of the first special symbol is executed based on the special figure 1 suspension during the time saving state is explained as an example, but when the time saving is won, the special figure 1 suspension If it does not exist, then the charge effect is that the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and either the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes. Started when started. In addition, regardless of whether or not special figure 1 reservation exists, the time saving state is set at the time when the variation of the first special symbol that has been elected for time saving stops.
FIG. 124(b) is an example of the display screen displayed when the variation of the special symbols is stopped and the time saving state ends.
In the small display area Dm1, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, "remaining 0 seconds" is displayed to notify that the period in which the time saving state is set has ended. there is
In the small display area Dm9, the hold h1 to hold h4 are lit black, and the letters "Total4GET" and the capsules cp1 to cp4 are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, so that the second special symbol lottery right (special The player is notified that he has acquired four pieces of (reserved in FIG. 2). Capsule cp1-capsule cp4 correspond to hold 1-hold 4, respectively, for example, the result of pre-discriminating hold information of hold h2 (special figure 2 hold acquired second during charge production) (read-ahead result) , when the degree of expectation for the time-saving winning is high, the capsule cp2 is displayed in a display mode (black capsule) different from the other capsules.

Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that there is a reservation with a high possibility of winning a short-time win in the special figure 2 reservation, and to improve the interest of the game.
Also, in the central part of the main display area Dm, "Charge completed, enter the promotion chance zone!" ” indicates that the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is executed after the time saving state is finished.
It should be noted that, if the capsule could not be acquired during the above-mentioned charge production, that is, if even one special figure 2 reservation could not be acquired, the promotion chance zone will be entered after the charge production is completed, and the normal mode will be entered. Transition.
In the embodiment, in the small display area Dm9 and the small display area Dm10, even if there is no special figure 1 reservation or special figure 2 reservation, the reservation h1 to reservation h8 are displayed in white, so that up to 4 each Although it was configured to indicate that it is possible to hold, it is not limited to this, and if there is no special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold, nothing is displayed in the small display area Dm9 or small display area Dm10 , it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reserved design is displayed when the reservation of the special design is obtained.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to understand how many lottery rights of each special symbol can be reserved, and even if the player obtains the maximum number of reservations, the player will not notice that the maximum number of reservations has been obtained. It is possible to continue shooting the game balls without doing so.
In addition, in the embodiment, when the fluctuation of the special symbols in which the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the display screen of FIG. 124(b) is displayed. However, not limited to this, when the second special symbol lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired to the upper limit number with the remaining variation time remaining until the special symbol variation stops , the display screen of FIG. 124(b) may be displayed. In the case of such a configuration, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the display mode of the capsule changes, and the configuration that suggests the expectation of winning the jackpot with special figure 2 or the expectation of shortening the time. It is good as
By constructing in this way, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 for the player who has obtained the upper limit number of the special figure 2 reserves while a lot of the special symbol variation time still remains. It is possible to continue the game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball inlet 640 until the last moment when the special symbol stops changing by making the player expect that the display mode of the capsule may change if Become.
In the embodiment, the capsules cp1 to cp4 corresponding respectively to the holds h1 to hold h4 are displayed. A configuration in which only one capsule is displayed may be used. That is, in the later-described promotion chance zone, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on hold 1 to hold 4 is notified by opening the capsule once. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand how many special 2 reserves have been acquired during the charge performance, and the player can enjoy the promotion chance zone performance without worrying about the number of special 2 reserves acquired. can enjoy.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the player does not know that the special figure 2 suspension has been obtained when the special figure 2 suspension is obtained in the charge effect. When the capsule is acquired, the capsule is not displayed, and the small display area Dm9 is not displayed so that the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation is not known, and only when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired to the upper limit number, the main display area A configuration may be adopted in which "MAX Acquisition Complete" is displayed on Dm.
By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation, so that it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the fact that the special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained as desired during the charge performance. .
FIG. 125 is an example of a display screen displayed when short-time winning is won in special figure 2 lottery based on special figure 2 reservation in the promotion chance zone.
In the small display area Dm1, a display indicating that the first special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8, a display mode indicating that the second special symbol has been won is displayed.

In addition, since the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is set, the player is urged to shoot the game ball toward the first ball entrance 64 "left-handed". is displayed to prevent the player from playing with an erroneous game method.
In the center of the main display area Dm, the capsule cp1 written as "done" indicating that it has already been opened, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved) A diamond dy1 written as "time x 10000" indicating that the result of 2 was a short time winning, an opened capsule cp2, and unopened capsules cp3 and cp4 are displayed.
In the example of FIG. 125, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on the first acquired special figure 2 reservation among the four special figure 2 reservations acquired during the charge production does not win big hits and short working hours. , It shows that it was elected in a short time in the special figure 2 lottery based on the second special figure 2 reservation.
In addition, the small display area Dm5 is displayed as "three more times", indicating that the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 hold is three times remaining, and the display of the remaining number of times is the second special It is updated when the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, at the time when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the first special figure 2 hold is started, "4 more times" is displayed, and when the variable display based on the second special figure 2 hold is started , "3 times more" is displayed.

In addition, in the display of the small display area Dm9, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is newly started based on the special figure 2 suspension, the suspension display displayed in the suspension h1 is changed from black display to white display. Then, if the hold h2 is black display, that is, if there is another special figure 2 hold, it is displayed by shifting to the hold h1, the hold h1 becomes a black display, and the hold h2 becomes a white display. At that time, if the pending h3 and the pending h4 are displayed in black, they are shifted to the pending h2 and the pending h3 respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 125, since the variation of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 suspension has been executed twice, the two suspensions h3 and h4 are displayed in white.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand how many more times the variation of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 reservation will be executed.
In addition, in FIG. 125, an example of production in the case of short-time winning in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation was described, but when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation, the contents of the capsule may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, a ball marked with "V") to inform the player of the jackpot winning, or the capsule itself may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, a red capsule). It is good also as a structure to carry out.
Also, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation is out in any judgment, it may be configured that the contents are empty when the capsule is opened, or from the capsule It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a display mode (for example, a piece of paper with the word “sorry” written on it) indicating the deviation is displayed.

Also, in the embodiment, as a result of pre-discriminating the hold information of the special figure 2 hold (prefetch result), if there is a high possibility of winning a short time, a capsule corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that is likely to be short are displayed in different display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, as a result of prefetching the hold information of the third acquired special figure 2 hold, if there is a high possibility of winning a short time, in the capsule opening effect based on the second acquired special figure 2 hold, from the capsule " Next time big chance!” By making the paper appear, the special 2 lottery based on the next 2nd special pattern lottery right (special 2 reservation) (that is, the 3rd acquired special 2 reservation) It may be configured to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or winning a short time, or "Done" displayed after the capsule opening effect based on the second acquired special figure 2 reservation is completed. A different display mode may be used instead of the capsule written with (for example, a capsule written with "next big chance").
By configuring in this way, when a capsule with a different display mode is displayed in the promotion chance zone, the second special design based on the special figure 2 hold executed before the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the capsule In the fluctuation of , it is possible to expect that information about the special figure 2 hold that will be executed next will be displayed, and it is possible to have interest in the opening effect of the capsule displayed in the normal display mode. can.
In the promotion chance zone, the special 2 reserves are digested in the order in which they were acquired (from h1 to the youngest), and the capsules corresponding to the special 2 reserves to be digested are released in order (from capsule cp1 to the youngest). However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that the special figure 2 reservation to be digested and the capsule to be released do not correspond. For example, when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on the first acquired special figure 2 reservation is short time winning, if capsule cp4 is selected instead of capsule cp1, short time winning By adopting a configuration indicating that there is a high possibility that the capsules will be released, it is possible to make the player interested in not only the display mode of the capsules but also the order in which the capsules are opened, thereby further enhancing the amusement of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 126, the electrical configuration of the first modified example will be described. In this first modification, in contrast to the above-described second control example, the point that the time saving can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and the time saving type that is set when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery is set to the second. It is different in that it is different from the time-saving type set when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery. Moreover, it is different in that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is varied. Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
FIG. 126(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the random number table 202dae per time saving. As shown in FIG. 126(a), the time saving random number table 202dae is normal for the first special symbol (low probability of special symbol State, low probability state of normal design) is different in that it defines the determination value of time-saving election, other than that is the same.
Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol and the set game state is a low probability state (normal state) of special symbols and normal symbols, the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "51 to 54".
That is, since the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 900 pieces, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, it is constructed so as to be short-time winning with a probability of 4/900.

Next, with reference to Drawing 126 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection table 202daf are explained. FIG.126(b) is the figure which showed the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction classification selection table 202daf. The time saving type selection table 202daf is different from the time saving type selection table 202df of the second control example described above in that a time saving type that is set when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery is added. are identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
Specifically, when the special symbol type (special symbol type) is the first special symbol, regardless of the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, the time saving type "time saving C" is defined. When this time saving C is set, 1 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. That is, the time saving state of one time of time saving is set.
<Regarding control processing in the first modification of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129, the processing contents of the control processing in this first modified example will be described. In the first modification, in contrast to the above-described second control example, a part of the processing contents executed by the main controller 110, a part of the processing contents executed by the sound ramp control device 113, are different, and otherwise the same. Here, differences from the above-described second control example will be described.
Figure 127 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8021). In this time-saving lottery process (S8021), the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning determination) are different from those of the time-saving lottery process (S8001) of the second control example. That is, in the above-described second control example, the control process is executed so that the condition for executing the time saving propriety determination can be established only when the type of the special symbol lottery being executed is the second special symbol (S8101 See), in this first modification, it is configured so that the conditions for executing the time-saving propriety determination can be established regardless of the special symbol type. That is, the difference is that the process of S8101 is deleted from the time saving lottery process (S8001) of the second control example described above. Other processing contents are the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute time-saving adequacy determination also in the first special symbol lottery.

Figure 128 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S9026). This time saving state effect setting process (S9026) is set when time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the time saving state effect setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 118) of the second control example described above. The difference is that the processing content (S9321, S9322) when the type (time saving C) is set is added, and the other is the same, so the description is omitted.
When the time saving state effect setting process (S9026) is executed, the same S9301 to S9308 processes as the time saving state effect setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 118) of the second control example described above are executed, and this process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S9306, if it is determined that the time saving type is not the time saving A (S9306: No), then it is determined whether the time saving type is the time saving C (S9321), and the time saving C is determined. If so (S9321: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the effect mode corresponding to the charge time (see FIG. 124) (S9322), and this process ends.
Figure 129 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S4993). In this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4993), the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4983 in FIG. 120) in the above-described second control example, the effect mode in the case of time reduction winning in the first special symbol lottery and the processing for setting the effect mode of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state are different.
When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4993) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes ), subtract 1 from the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9502), read the time saving type from the secondary state setting area 223g (S9521), determine whether the read time saving type is time saving C (S9522), If there is, determine the time-saving performance mode corresponding to the remaining variation time of the special symbol this time (S9523), set the display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode (S9524), and terminate this process.

That is, a display mode for guiding the remaining period of time reduction displayed in the small display area Dm5 shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed according to the time reduction effect mode determined in S9523. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining time in which the time saving state continues in an easy-to-understand manner.
Also, if it is determined that it is not time saving C in the process of S9522 (S9522: No), since it is a case where the first special symbol variation is executed in a state where other time saving types are set, time saving after subtraction A display command for indicating the value of the lottery number counter 223db is set (S9525), and the process proceeds to S9524.
On the other hand, in the process of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db is 0, that is, if it is determined that the present is not in the time saving state (S9501: No), then whether it is a time saving election fluctuation is determined (S9526), and when it is determined that it is a time saving election fluctuation (S9526: Yes), the production mode for indicating time saving election is determined (S9527), and the process proceeds to S9524. Here, the variable performance of the short-time winning variation shown in FIG. 123(b) is executed according to the performance mode determined in the process of S9527.
<Second Modification of Second Control Example>
A second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 134. FIG. In the above-described second control example, it is possible to set a high probability state (first time reduction) of normal symbols based on the fact that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery, and the normal symbols are based on the fact that the time reduction has been won in the special symbol lottery. It was configured to be able to set a high probability state (second time reduction). As a result, it is possible to set a high-probability state of normal symbols at a plurality of opportunities, and by increasing variations in the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this second modification, in order to further improve the interest, the contents of the privilege given when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set It is configured to vary according to the trigger (first time saving or second time saving) when the high probability state of the symbol is set. In other words, the contents of the privilege given when the same jackpot type is set are different between when the big win is won during the first time saving and when the big win is won during the second time saving. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to make the player interested in which opportunity the time saving state was set, so that the game It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.
Furthermore, in the second modification, a jackpot game (2R jackpot) with a small number of rounds and a short game time per round game is executed as a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. After the 2R jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, that is, when the first time saving is set, the time saving state is set without executing the jackpot game. When set, that is, when the second time reduction is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the contents of the game to be executed.
In addition, in the second modification, the variable production executed in the process of setting the first time saving and the variable production executed in the process of setting the second time saving can be executed in the same production mode. It consists of Specifically, after the special symbol variation for indicating that the jackpot winning (2R jackpot winning) in which the first short time is set is started, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and then the 2R jackpot game ends. The first period until the second time reduction is set and the second period, which is the variation time of the special symbol variation to indicate that the second time reduction is set, is set to be approximately the same period, and the period is set. It is configured to execute an effect in a common effect mode using.
By configuring in this way, when the first time saving is set and when the second time saving is set, the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the setting of the time saving state is common. Since the performance of the performance mode can be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state is set.

<Regarding the contents of the effect in the second modified example of the second control example>
With reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, the characteristic effect content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example of the second control example will be described.
In the second control example described above, although there is a difference between the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols) and the number of time reductions given by the time reduction winning , If you win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery during the time-saving state set based on the jackpot winning (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and the time-saving state set based on the time-saving winning In the case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, if the jackpot type is the same, the privilege given (for example, the number of times of shortening the time given after the jackpot game ends) is also the same.
Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set as a trigger for either the jackpot winning or the short-time winning, there is a difference in the ratio of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won during the time-saving state and the benefits given even if the same jackpot type. There is a risk that the game will become monotonous.
On the other hand, in the second modification of the second control example, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state set based on the jackpot winning, and when the jackpot is won during the time saving state set based on the time saving winning It is different from the second control example in that the ratio of the jackpot type and the privilege given even if it is the same jackpot type are different.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot with a large number of rounds of the jackpot game) in which advantageous benefits are given to the player by the opportunity of setting the time saving state is variable. Also, it is possible to give different benefits even for the same jackpot type, thereby improving the interest of the game.
Specifically, in the second modification of the second control example, the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) and the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) In the lottery (special drawing 2 lottery), the jackpot determination and the time saving determination are performed, and the first time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning, and the second time saving state is set based on the time saving winning. It is possible. Then, for example, when the jackpot A is won in a state in which the first time saving state is set, a maximum of 100 time saving times are provided after the jackpot game ends, but the second time saving state is set. When a jackpot A is won in the state, a maximum of 10,000 times of time saving is provided after the jackpot game ends.
Thus, depending on whether the game state set when the jackpot is won is the first time saving state or the second time saving state, the benefits given to the player when the jackpot is won are different, and the second time saving state is set. When the first time saving state is set, advantageous benefits (for example, the number of times of time saving given after the jackpot game is large) are more likely to be given based on the winning of the jackpot than when the first time saving state is set. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the second time saving state is set rather than the first time saving state.
In addition, as will be described later, in the second modification of the second control example, it is possible to acquire prize balls during the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) and a 2R short-time jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls during the jackpot game and the first time-shortening state is set after the jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, when the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is the 2R time-saving jackpot, the prize ball cannot be obtained even though the jackpot is won, and the second time-saving state is more disadvantageous than the second time-saving state. Since the one-hour-shortening state is set, there is a possibility that the player who wins the 2R jackpot may lose his/her willingness to play.
Therefore, in the second modification of the second control example, when the 2R time saving jackpot where the first time saving state is set is won, and when the second time saving state is set when winning the time saving It is made the same and configured so that it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the 2R time-saving jackpot win or the time-saving win is won.
By configuring in this way, even when winning the 2R short-time jackpot, which is disadvantageous compared to the 16R variable variable jackpot, the player can expect to win the short-time jackpot, and when the 2R short-time jackpot is won. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
FIG. 130(a) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) in the normal state wins the jackpot in which the first time saving state is given.

Two numbers "2" are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a symbol "chance time" is displayed between them, and "chance time GET!!" is displayed, and it informs that it will shift to the chance time after this.
Here, the chance time, after the time-saving state (low-probability state of the special pattern, high-probability state of the normal design) is set, it shows the production mode that is displayed in the period until the time-saving state ends. there is In addition, even if it is a case where the time saving state of the 1st time saving state and the 2nd time saving state is set, the production mode displayed becomes a chance time. Therefore, it is configured such that the player cannot determine which time saving state is the currently set working time saving state from the displayed production mode.
It should be noted that it is also possible to use the effect executed during the chance time to suggest the set time-saving state, for example, prepare a plurality of background images displayed during the chance time, and set the second time-saving state. It is good also as a structure with which a specific background image is easy to be set compared with the case where the 1st time saving state is set when it is set.
By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the display mode during the chance time in order to guess the type of the time saving state, and the interest in the game during the chance time can be improved.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display mode indicating that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving jackpot. Here, in FIG. 130(a), the size of the display in the small display area Dm1 is set so that the player can see it, but it is configured so that it cannot be seen by the player (for example, the small display area Dm1 is not displayed). Desirably, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to determine whether the 2R time saving jackpot win or the time saving win is made so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
Then, since a jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the first special symbol wins the 2R time-saving jackpot, the small display area Dm4 displays a game for the player toward the specific winning opening 65a on the right side area of the game machine. "Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that a ball-shooting jackpot game is in progress.
Here, when the 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the opening/closing plate 65b performs the opening/closing operation at high speed twice during the jackpot period in the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the short-time winning is won, the opening/closing plate 65b remains closed because the jackpot game is not executed. In other words, the player can determine whether the 2R time-saving jackpot winning or the time-saving winning is by confirming the operation status of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress this, the screen is made to emit light intensely in the chance time acquisition effect so that the player can focus on the third symbol display device 81 and not the opening/closing plate 65b. is doing.
In the embodiment, the screen is illuminated intensely so that the player does not pay attention to the opening/closing plate 65b. It may be configured to attract attention, or may be configured to install a small variable prize winning device which operates only when a jackpot game based on the 2R short time jackpot winning is executed at a position less conspicuous than the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

FIG. 130(b) is an example of a chance time win effect that is executed when the short time winning is won in the first special symbol in the normal state.
The difference from the case of winning the 2R short time jackpot is that the small display area Dm1 displays a display mode to indicate that the short time win has been won, and the other displays are displayed when the 2R short time jackpot is won. It is the same as the display screen displayed.
It should be noted that even when the fluctuation of the first special symbol that has won the time saving is stopped, it is displayed in the small display area Dm4 as "Right hit", but this is because the time saving state is set, so that the player can use the gaming machine. This is a display for prompting the player to play a game in which a game ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 located on the right side of the board.
In this way, the chance time acquisition performance in the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the time-saving winning is made to be the same display mode, making it difficult for the player to determine which one has been won, thereby winning the 2R big time-saving win. Even in the case of doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that it will be a time-saving lottery, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a 2R time-saving jackpot. .

Here, when the 2R short-time jackpot is won, the jackpot game is executed during the chance time acquisition performance, but when the short-time win is won, the big win game is not executed, so when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at the same timing. In the case of winning the 2R short time jackpot, the period from the display of the chance time acquisition performance to the start of the chance time is longer by the period during which the jackpot game is executed than in the case of the short time winning, and the chance time is acquired. There is a possibility that the player can determine whether the 2R time-saving jackpot or the time-saving winning is won depending on the length of the presentation display time.
Therefore, in the second modification of the second control example, the period from the start of the chance time acquisition effect to the actual stop of fluctuation of the special symbol in the case of winning the 2R time saving jackpot and the case of winning the time saving jackpot (fixed period) are different.
With reference to FIG. 131, the variation pattern of the special symbol at the time of winning the jackpot and the variation pattern at the time of winning the time saving will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the performance mode is the same from the start of variation of the special symbols to the end of the chance time acquisition performance. However, in FIG. 131(a), the variation of the special symbol stops 1 second after the chance time acquisition effect is started, and the jackpot game is executed for 4 seconds, whereas in FIG. 131(b) , the variation of the special symbol stops about 5 seconds after the chance time acquisition effect is started.

In this way, the period (determined period) from the start of the chance time acquisition performance to the actual stop of the variation of the special symbols is set longer in the case of winning the time saving jackpot than in the case of winning the 2R time saving jackpot. Thus, the display time of the chance time acquisition performance is determined depending on whether the jackpot game is executed while the chance time acquisition performance is displayed or when the jackpot game is not performed while the chance time acquisition performance is displayed. does not change, it is difficult to determine whether the player has won the 2R time-saving jackpot or the time-saving winning, depending on the length of the display time of the chance time acquisition presentation.
In the embodiment, different fixed periods are set for the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the case of winning the time-saving jackpot, and the configuration is such that the display time of the chance time acquisition effect is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing
For example, if you win the 2R short-time jackpot and if you win short-time, the fixed period is the same, and if you win short-time, after the change in the special design stops, the change in the next special design starts for a certain period of time. It is also possible to set the display time of the chance time acquisition effect to be the same by providing a waiting period during which the game is not performed.
In the embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the case of winning the time-saving prize, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol won in a short time is fluctuating, there is a lottery right for the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation), and the result determined in advance based on the reservation information of the special figure 1 reservation (pre-reading result) is a jackpot winning, the display mode of the chance time acquisition performance to be executed in the changing special symbols is set to a special display mode (for example, the 'chance time' symbol is displayed in rainbow colors), It may be configured to suggest that the player wins a jackpot after winning a time-saving win.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. Drawing 132 (a) is a figure showing the contents of random number table 202dbe per time saving. As shown in FIG. 132(a), the time saving random number table 202dbe sets a prescribed value determined to be time saving winning even in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the time saving random number table 202de of the second control example described above. The difference is that the
FIG. 132(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot table 202dbd1. As shown in FIG. 132(b), the jackpot table 202dbd1 is designed so that the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202dd in the second control example are commonly referred to in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. According to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained, the jackpot type, the value of the time reduction counter 203h corresponding to each jackpot type, and the probability variable counter 203i values are specified.
In this second modification, as described above, based on the fact that the special symbol lottery jackpot has been won, the normal symbol high probability state (first time saving) can be set, and based on the fact that the special symbol lottery has won the time saving It is configured to be able to set a high probability state (second time saving) of normal symbols, and as shown in FIG. is set and the second time saving is set, the number of times of saving time (value set in the saving time counter 203h) set after the jackpot game ends is different.
Further, as shown in FIG. 132(b), in this second modification, the jackpot game is two rounds as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the time-saving state. The big hit B5b is configured to be selectable. Here, when the jackpot B5b is selected as the jackpot type, the effect described above with reference to FIGS. A specific effect that makes it difficult is executed.

That is, the same game state (time saving state) as when the second time saving is set can be set, and a jackpot game with a short jackpot game period can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first time saving has been set or the second time saving has been set.
Drawing 133 is a figure showing the contents of time saving classification selection table 202dbf. The time saving type selection table 202dbf differs from the time saving type selection table 202df in the above-described second control example in that the time saving type defined in correspondence with the acquired value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is different. are otherwise identical.
As shown in FIG. 133, in the second modification, the time saving end condition (the value set in the time saving counter 203h) when the second time saving is set is the time saving end condition when the first time saving is set ( 132(b)). Concretely, it is configured to select a time saving type in which one of "50", "200" and "10000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.
By configuring in this way, for example, after the specific effect is executed, the high probability state of the normal design is set, the number of special design fluctuations reaches 50 times, and the high probability state of the normal design (time saving state) is low. When shifting to the probability state (normal state), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first time saving has been set up to now or the second time saving has been set.

<Regarding control processing in the second modified example of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the contents of control processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving state effect setting process (S9056). In this time saving state effect setting process (S9056), when it is determined that the game state has shifted from the normal state to the time saving state with respect to the time saving state effect setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 118) in the second control example described above The difference is that the contents of the control processing executed in are different, and specifically, when it is determined that the time saving has been won, it is determined by prefetching whether there is a jackpot election in the special figure 2 reservation (S9352) , When it is determined that there is a special figure 2 hold including jackpot winning, a special time saving mode is configured to be executed.
In the time saving state effect setting process (S9056), first, reading of the game state before change is executed from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is the variable probability state (S9302). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding effect mode is set during the preparation time (S9303), and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S9302, if it is determined that the game state before the change is not the variable probability state (S9302: No), then it is determined whether the game state before the change is the normal state (S9303). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the counter 223da during time saving (S9305). Then, it is determined whether the time saving state set this time is the time saving state set with the opportunity of the time saving winning (S9351).
In the processing of S9351, when it is determined that the time saving state is set with the opportunity of the time saving winning (S9351: Yes), next, it is determined whether there is a reservation for winning a jackpot in the reservation of the second special symbol. (S9352). If it is determined that there is a hold to win the big hit (S9352: Yes), a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the special time saving mode is set (S9353), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9351, if it is determined that the time saving has not been won in the lottery of this time (S9351: No), or in the process of S9352, it is determined that there is no reservation to win the jackpot within the reservation of the second special symbol If it does (S9352: No), it sets a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the time saving mode (S9354), and ends this process.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 145. FIG. In the above-described second control example and each modified example, it is configured so that the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set can be short-time winning. On the other hand, in the third control example, it is greatly different in that it is configured so that the special symbol lottery can be short-time winning even in the state where the game state other than the normal state is set.
By configuring in this way, for example, in a state in which the time saving state is set, when newly winning the time saving state, it is possible to update the remaining period in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state continues.
Also, when updating the remaining period of the time saving state, if it is updated so that the period of the time saving state continues longer than the current remaining period (advantageous update), or if it is updated to be shorter (unfavorable update) ) is configured to occur. In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving lottery and the number of times of time-saving (short-time) set when winning the time-saving lottery, there are cases where the time-saving lottery is an advantageous benefit for the player and a case where it is a disadvantageous benefit. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property that includes a game property in which a time-saving winning is expected and a game property in which a time-saving winning is not expected.
Furthermore, in the third control example, it is configured such that the more consecutive time-saving winnings are made, the easier it is to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player without winning a jackpot. Specifically, a plurality of time-saving classifications with different degrees of advantage for the player are defined, and the more advantageous time-saving classifications are set as the time-saving winning is made in the time-saving state, the easier it is to set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the player does not win the jackpot, the easier it is to give the player an advantageous benefit.

In addition, when the time-saving type most advantageous to the player is set, it is easier to shift to the time-saving type disadvantageous to the player than when the time-saving type more disadvantageous than the time-saving type is set. It is configured to be In other words, it has multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantage, and based on the time-saving election, a time-saving type with a high degree of advantage is gradually set, and when the highest level of time-saving type is reached, the lowest level It is configured to make it easier to fall into the time-saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the time saving type advantageous to the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.
<Regarding the production content of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136, the characteristic presentation content in the third control example will be described. Figure 135 (a) is a diagram showing the display screen when the time saving is elected in the normal state and the time saving A is set as the time saving type, and Figure 135 (b) shows the time saving A being set. It is the figure which showed the display screen when the reduction of working hours is elected and the reduction of working hours B is set.
In addition, FIG. 136 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when winning the time saving during the time saving state and increasing the number of remaining time saving times (remaining time short time), and FIG. 136 (b) is a time saving state It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in case short working hours are elected inside and the number of times of remaining short working hours (short time remaining) decreases.
As shown in FIG. 135, in this third control example, even in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, since it is configured to be able to execute the time saving winning determination, the result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state An effect for indicating (an effect in which an icon indicating the lottery result appears from inside the bag 863) is executed. In this case, for example, the current number of reduced working hours in the state of reduced working hours and the newly elected reduced working hours type are distinguished, and the number of reduced working hours set corresponding to the newly elected reduced working hours type is the current number of reduced working hours remaining (Dm7 reference), as shown in FIG. 136 (a), production is executed indicating that the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state increases, and the number of time reductions set corresponding to the newly elected time reduction type is less than the current remaining time reduction frequency (see Dm7), as shown in FIG. 136(b), an effect indicating that the remaining time reduction frequency in the time reduction state decreases is executed.

In addition, in the third control example, if the time reduction is won during the time reduction state, it is easier to set the time reduction state (time reduction B) in which the time reduction end condition is difficult to be satisfied (it is set more easily than when the time reduction is won in the normal state. easy). Then, when the time saving B is set and the time saving is further elected, the time saving state continues until the next big win (the number of time saving is set to 10000 times) is easily given. there is
Then, when the time saving B is set, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the player can be notified that the time saving state is set in a display mode different from the state in which the time saving A is set. display mode is displayed.
<Regarding the game flow in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the game flow in this third control example will be described. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a game flow in this third control example. As shown in FIG. 137, with respect to the above-described second control example, in the game state other than the normal state, it is possible to execute the determination of the time reduction election, and depending on the game state in which the determination of the time reduction election is executed The difference is that the probability of winning the time saving is different, and that there are multiple types of time saving (time saving A, time saving B) that differ in the degree of advantage of the benefits at the time of winning the jackpot as the time saving state. there is
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Drawing 138 (a) is a figure showing the contents of random number table 202ee per time saving. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the time saving random number table 202ee defines the determination value determined as the time saving winning even in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the time saving random number table 202de of the second control example described above. The point that the judgment value of time-saving winning is stipulated even in the game state other than the normal state. is different.

By configuring in this way, the time saving winning probability can be varied according to the set game state and the type of the special symbol lottery to be executed.
Drawing 138 (b) is a figure showing the contents of time saving classification selection table 202ef. As shown in FIG. 138(b), the time saving type selection table 202ef is set for each time saving type according to the game state at the time of winning, with respect to the time saving type selection table 202df. Value of the time saving counter 203h That is, the number of times of time saving is defined to be different.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which game state is set.
FIG. 139 shows the contents of the jackpot table 202ed. As shown in FIG. 139, in the jackpot table 202ed, the value of the time saving counter 203h set for each time saving type, that is, the time saving It is specified that the number of times is different. Specifically, when the same game state (time saving state) is set, the time saving B is set, and when the time saving A is set, the number of time saving times set after the jackpot game ends is different. , When the time saving B is set, that is, when the time saving state which is easy to be set when the time saving is won in the time saving state is set, the time saving state with a large number of times of working time saving is set more easily. ing. In addition, in this third control example, the value of the time saving counter 203h set for each time saving type, that is, the number of time saving times is defined to be different according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Without limitation, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed may be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this third control example. As shown in FIG. 140, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example differs from the second control example in that a time saving mode storage area 223ea is added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
The time saving mode storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the set time saving mode, and stores the time saving mode set in the time saving state production setting process (see S9076 in FIG. 142) (S9372 in FIG. 142). ). Then, it is referred to when setting the performance mode of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and the variation performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the read time saving mode.
<Regarding control processing content in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 141 to 145, the contents of control processing executed in this third control example will be described. Figure 141 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8056). This time-saving lottery process (S8056) differs from the above-described time-saving lottery process (S8016) in that the process for determining whether the execution conditions for the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning determination) are satisfied is changed. is doing. That is, as shown in FIG. 141, in most of the special symbol lottery to be executed, time-saving win-or-win election is executed.
In the time saving lottery process (S8056), first, the lottery result is obtained based on the time saving random number table 202ee (see FIG. 138(a)) (S8154). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a time-saving election (S8105). Next, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is time saving winning (S8105: Yes), based on the value of the obtained time saving type counter CC1, the time saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first design display device 37 set (S8106), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8105, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not the time saving winning (S8105: No), the first symbol display device 37 is set to the missing symbol of the special symbol (S8107), and this process is performed. finish.

Next, FIG. 142 is the flowchart which showed the content of the time saving state production|presentation setting process (S9076). In this time saving state effect setting process (S9076), the time saving type included in the state command received this time is stored in the time saving mode storage area 223ea for the time saving state effect setting process (S9056 in FIG. 134) in the second control example described above. The difference is that the processing for storing is executed, and the rest is the same, so detailed description will be omitted.
Next, FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4997). This special figure 2 production mode setting process (S4997) is a process for setting the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the second special symbol variation, special figure 2 production mode setting process in the above-described second control example (See S4987 in FIG. 121), it differs in that the mode-specific production setting process (S9651) for determining the production mode in the time saving state is performed, and the other is the same, so detailed description is given. omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 144, the contents of the effect setting process for each mode (S9651) will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the contents of the mode-specific effect setting process (S9651). In this mode-specific effect setting process (S9651), the process for determining the effect mode of the various effects described above with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136 is executed.
In the effect setting process by mode (S9651), first, reading of the current time saving mode is executed from the time saving mode storage area 223ea (S9801). Next, it is determined whether the current time saving mode read from the time saving mode storage area 223ea is the time saving A (S9802). If it is determined that the current time saving mode is time saving A (S9802: Yes), it is determined whether this lottery is a time saving lottery (S9803).

When it is determined that it is a lottery that wins time saving (S9803: Yes), the difference is calculated based on the number of times of time saving given based on this lottery and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9804) . Next, based on the calculated difference, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction count decreases (S9805). If it is determined that the number of times of reduced working hours does not decrease, that is, that the number of reduced working hours increases (S9805: No), a display command is set to indicate that the number of remaining reduced hours of working hours increases (S9806), and the process proceeds to S9809. do.
On the other hand, in the process of S9805, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is reduced based on the difference (S9805: Yes), a display command for indicating that the remaining time reduction number of times is reduced is set (S9807), S9809 to process. On the other hand, in the processing of S9803, if it is determined that the lottery of this time is not a lottery for short-time winning (S9803: No), the processing of S9804 to S9807 is skipped and the processing of S9809 is performed.
On the other hand, in the process of S9802, when it is determined that the read current time saving mode is not time saving A (S9802: No), the effect setting process during time saving B is executed (S9808). A detailed description of the effect setting process during time saving B (S9808) will be given later with reference to FIG. Next, the read current time saving mode is compared with the game state set based on the lottery result (S9809), and it is determined whether there is switching of the time saving mode (S9810). When it is determined that there is switching of the time saving mode (S9810: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the switching of the time saving mode is determined (S9811), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9810, when it is determined that there is no switching of the time saving mode (S9810: No), the process of S9811 is skipped and the process ends as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the processing contents of the effect setting processing (S9808) during time saving B will be described. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process during time saving B (S9808). As shown in FIG. 145, in the time saving B medium effect setting process (S9808), the time saving type set when the time saving is won during the time saving B is determined, and other than the time saving B, that is, when the time saving A is set , A process for setting an effect mode for indicating that the time saving state will end soon is executed (S9853).

In the production setting process during time saving B (S9808), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery is a lottery for time saving winning (S9851). When it is determined that it is a lottery to win time saving (S9851: Yes), it is determined whether it is a lottery to win time saving B (S9852). When it is determined that it is not a lottery to win the time saving B (S9852: No), the production mode for suggesting the end of the time saving is determined (S9853), and this process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a lottery to win the time saving B (S9852: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the time saving continuation until the next big hit is determined (S9855), and this processing is finished.
On the other hand, in the processing of S9851, if it is determined that the current lottery is not a time-saving lottery lottery (S9851: No), it is determined whether it is a jackpot lottery lottery (S9854). If it is determined that it is a lottery to win a jackpot (S9854: Yes), the processing of S9855 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a lottery to win a jackpot (S9854: No), this processing is terminated.
<Fourth control example>
Next, the contents of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 180. FIG. In contrast to the second control example described above, this fourth control example is configured so that a small win can be won in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big win (losing). The difference is that a big winning game can be executed by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small winning game executed based on winning.
In addition, in the above-described second control example, only when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, it is configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election, whereas in the fourth control example, once It is different in that the jackpot winning and the short-time winning can be judged redundantly in the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, after executing the determination of the jackpot winning, it is configured to perform the determination of the short-time winning, and when the short-time winning is won, the timing at which the special symbol variation that is the short-time winning is stopped and displayed In contrast, in the fourth control example, it is configured to execute the judgment of the time-saving election before the judgment of the jackpot election is executed, and the time-saving election is made. In this case, the time saving state is set before the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed in the special symbol lottery, and the judgment of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, The time saving state can be ended at the timing when the special symbol variation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is executed.
Specifically, when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, for a short period of time including the timing at which the big hit determination is executed in the special symbol lottery, so that the time saving state Configure. That is, in the above-described second control example, a game that is advantageous to the player toward the next big win (a game that makes it easy to execute a special symbol lottery) is executed for a predetermined period (up to 10000 times) without going through the big win game. In order to make it possible, a function (short time setting function) that can be elected in a special symbol lottery was provided, whereas in the fourth control example, in addition to the above-described short time setting function, special symbols are used in the normal state. A time-reduction state is achieved during a game (left-handed game) executed in a normal state by structuring such that the timing of execution of a big hit determination by a special symbol lottery is in a time-reduction state without facilitating the execution of a lottery. A function (special lottery function) is provided to enable execution of the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in .
By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a big hit determination of the special symbol lottery in the time saving state while making it difficult for the player to grasp that the special symbol lottery has won the time saving, so that the result of the special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to inform the unexpected lottery result.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the privilege given when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is different between when the jackpot is won in the normal state and when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state. It is configured such that when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state rather than in the normal state, a privilege (for example, a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous to the player is given. That is, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when both the short-time winning and the big win are won, a more advantageous privilege is given than when only the big win is won.

In addition, in the fourth control example, as the production mode of the variable production for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, the suggestion mode (notification mode) that can suggest the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the presence or absence of the jackpot winning can be suggested. A suggestion mode (announcement mode) can be set.
In other words, by grasping the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed, it is possible for the player to predict the result of the big hit judgment executed for the special symbol lottery being executed and the result of the short-time winning judgment. Configure. Furthermore, as a variable effect, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the big win are configured to be different. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the determination for giving a plurality of different benefits for one special symbol lottery, while grasping (predicting) at least one determination result, It is possible to comprehend a suggestion mode for suggesting another determination result.
In addition, in the fourth control example, when the production result including the suggestion mode that can suggest the presence or absence of the time reduction winning (time reduction production) is the production result including the suggestion mode that suggests the time reduction non-winning, It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning a big win is higher than when the time-saving performance is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of awarding a plurality of privileges with different award judgments in one special symbol lottery, a judgment result suggestive presentation capable of suggesting the award judgment result for one privilege. is executed, the production result of the judgment result suggestion production is a production result that suggests that the privilege of 1 is not given, and other benefits are compared to the case where the judgment result suggestion production is not executed. By configuring so that the degree of expectation to be given is high, at the time when the judgment result suggesting performance is executed, compared to the case where the judgment result suggesting performance is not executed, it is easier to grant any privilege. A player can be notified of something.
The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described below, but the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 151. FIG. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. 148 to 151 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example.
As shown in FIG. 146, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.
The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.
In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 94) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 146) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 146) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 146). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 94), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the fourth control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. there is Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbol. is a pattern corresponding to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is over) or a pattern corresponding to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which a normal state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is over). The presence is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.
Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is given (15R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds and after the jackpot ends. A 5R time-reduction jackpot (5R time-reduction with jackpot) to which a time-reduction state is given and a 5R normal jackpot (5R time-reduction-no jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and no time-reduction state is given after the jackpot is completed are prepared.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicate the big win when the result is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.
Here, the “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a short-time state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the “5R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state. In addition, "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state.
In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when a jackpot with a special pattern is won, the "15R time-saving jackpot" that can give the player the most prizes and the next most prizes can be given. ``5R time-saving jackpot'' and ``5R normal jackpot'' in which the smallest privilege is given to the player among the jackpot games are provided. As a result, even if a big win is won in the lottery of special symbols, the player can expect that the jackpot game with the largest number of benefits will be provided among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be given. can let
In addition, in the fourth control example, the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends Although the size is defined, it is not limited to this, and the size of the benefits given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits may be defined without defining the size of the benefits. It is also possible to simply change the content of the jackpot game so as to be granted.

In addition, the “time-saving state” is a game in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the fourth control example, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the first special symbol lottery that can be executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 In the second special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity can be established when the ball is entered, it is configured to be able to win a time-saving election in addition to the above-mentioned big win and small win. Specifically, in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) executed in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, It is configured so that the determination of the time-saving election is executed.
Here, when time-saving is elected, a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big hit determination is executed in the special symbol lottery, and a special symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. At the timing when the fluctuation is started, a process (update process) for determining whether or not to terminate the time saving state is executed. For example, in the case of the time saving state set to the time saving number of times 1 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1), the update executed at the timing when the special symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery winning the time saving is started In the process, the number of remaining working hours (the value of the working hours counter 203h) is updated (decremented), the working hours ending condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the working hours saving state is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a time saving state in which a value of multiple times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of time saving, the time saving state until the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the result of updating the remaining time saving number of times executed by the update process continues.
In other words, by using the setting timing of the time saving state and the end timing of the time saving state used in the fourth control example, only the special symbol lottery jackpot determination timing (special symbol It is possible to set a time saving state (except for the fluctuation period) or to set a time saving state including the special symbol fluctuation period.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, another processing timing may be set, for example, the time saving state is set at the stop timing of the special symbol variation that has been won in the same way as the second control example described above, and the next Before the special symbol variation to be executed is started, the update process of the time saving state (the process of determining whether or not to end the time saving state) may be configured to be executable. Even when configured in this way, the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is included by changing the number of time saving times to be set, or the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is not included. It becomes possible to In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, and the next special symbol lottery is not started with the time saving state set, the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied, so the time saving state will continue.
Therefore, in this case, by the time the special symbol variation that has won the time saving is stopped and displayed (before the time saving state is set), do you have the right to execute the next special symbol lottery (special figure pending)? If it is determined that the special figure reservation has been acquired, that is, after the time saving state is set, the next special pattern fluctuation will start immediately, and only if the time saving state can end. is preferably configured to notify the player. By constructing in this way, the player who grasps that the short-time winning has not executed the first special symbol lottery, performs the right-handed game, and suppresses the act of executing the second special symbol lottery. can.
Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the fourth control example, as a condition for ending the "time saving state", the first special symbol and the first special symbol and the second 2 When the number of fluctuations of special symbols (total number of fluctuations) reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times) (first end condition), or winning a small hit in the lottery of special symbols (small winning game is executed When the number of times reaches a second predetermined number of times (for example, once) (second termination condition), when any of the termination conditions are satisfied, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state. Configure. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to make the player play while exciting how long the time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. can.
Furthermore, in the fourth control example, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hits A and B) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), and each small hit type are set so that the number of times that the second end condition is met is different for each. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small wins won during the time-saving state, so that the player is always given a sense of tension to reduce the time-saving state. You can play games.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when the time saving state (second time saving) is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state (first time saving) is set based on the jackpot winning. It is configured to set an end condition different from the case where it is set, and specifically, it is configured to set the number of times of time reduction "1". In other words, the first working hour reduction set based on the winning of the working hour reduction in the special symbol lottery is used as a special lottery function for executing only the judgment of the big win in the special symbol lottery in the hour saving state.
In addition, in the fourth control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (a special discharge channel that is a specific area When the V switch 650e3 provided in the 650e2 detects the ball, it is configured to be a big hit (so-called two types of hits) (see FIG. 150). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game is configured to differ according to the type of the small winning winning. Then, the number of times the second end condition set for each small hit type is satisfied (the number of small hits) is set so that the small hit type in which the small hit game with a high V winning expectation is executed is smaller. Configure.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the V winning expectation level for winning two types of wins when a small win is won during a time-saving game with the anxiety that the time-saving state may end, The player can be motivated to play the game.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) as described above is set as the end condition (first end condition) with respect to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) However, other end conditions may be set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, for example, when the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol reaches the third predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Or, when the number of fluctuations of only the second special symbol reaches the fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times), the condition for ending the time saving state may be established. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two patterns is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 94) so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 6). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the fourth control example, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 94). A decorative display is performed according to the display of the 1-symbol display devices 37a and 37b.
That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbols.
That is, the determination is performed by the determination means (the lottery for the special symbol is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and the predetermined After the identification information (third pattern) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, in a display mode (combination of patterns) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of special symbols) of the discrimination means , the identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a part of the lottery result of the special symbol It may be a display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination result only), or it may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are four types of lottery results (for example, big hits, small hits, misses, and time saving) as the lottery results of special symbols, the above-mentioned three types of lottery results of special symbols are used as the display mode of the third symbol. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of lottery results (for example, a big win or a small win). In addition, in the case of duplicate winning determination (for example, stable jackpot, short time determination), it is possible to use a display mode to indicate multiple winning, or based on the fact that multiple winning If the content of the game to be executed based on the winning of the jackpot is the same as the content of the game to be executed based only on winning the jackpot, the same display mode may be used.
Further, instead of the display device used in the fourth control example, for example, reels or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices. .
In the fourth control example, when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is higher than when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be long. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.
In addition, the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above-described content. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be used. In addition, when the time saving state is made to be a state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is irrespective of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time point, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the timing of the display of the second symbol) It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.
The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.
Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 94), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.
As shown in FIG. 146, the first ball entrance 64 is the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 is more likely to be played in a game (so-called left-handed game) in which the ball flows down. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 94), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.
In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the fourth control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are set to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.
In addition, in the fourth control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special pattern lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the ball entrance. , While it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a ball passing through detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of special symbol lottery opportunities and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.
The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 146) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessary 640a is in a protruded state (allowed state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. In the fourth control example, as shown in FIG. 146, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.
In the fourth control example, as shown in FIG. 146, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for whether to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 serving as a trigger is arranged in a right hitting area, and when a time saving state is set as a game state, a right hitting game is performed.
A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball is entered during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, as shown in FIG. 146, in the right-handed area, the upper surface of the V winning device 650 is inclined downward to the left (lower left when viewed from the front in FIG. 146). is arranged, and each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 2). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.
In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case of using the configuration for changing the visibility of the inside using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Now, with reference to FIG. 147, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, among the balls shot in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right when viewed from the front in FIG. 147). is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 147) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.
The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable prize winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state in a state where the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured such that the ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 that is opened. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates is different in the game state (normal symbol probability state), and the game state is the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) state) is set, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the projecting state reaches the area b (see FIG. 147). In the state where the 640a is changed to the retracted state and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory is held for a period of time sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 147). 640a is configured to be positioned at the projecting position.
Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 147 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in the fourth control example). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.
Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, different ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 Alternatively, by configuring it so that the ball can be guided to the general winning hole 63), the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the time saving state.
As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than for the ball to enter the general winning opening 63. Advantageous benefits (i.e. special figure 2 lottery and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery cannot be executed (during special symbol fluctuation) If there is, it is configured so that the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give the player a more advantageous privilege (that is, 10 prize balls).
As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in the special pattern), the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained) can be changed. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In addition, in the fourth control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. is set to a long period (2 seconds), and the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is operated. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a inside is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.8 seconds). 9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.
Returning to FIG. 146, the description continues. As described above with reference to FIG. 147, the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning device 650 first. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.
In addition, in some of the "big wins" of the special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the "minor wins" described above. As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.
Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 147, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state that closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is sphered. can flow down, and the ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down toward the lower left side (lower left side in front view of FIG. 147) above the opening and closing door 650f1. , to the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the fourth control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds×12 times, and at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the open/close door 650f1. The ball that is doing wins a prize to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 150(a)) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.
In the fourth control example, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1, Any other period may be set as long as the ball can enter the V winning device 650 during the period. In addition, in the fourth control example, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.
Although details will be described later, in the fourth control example, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game and then opened next time (opening interval period). Five seconds are set after the fifth and tenth opening operations, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.
Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650 is set longer than normal. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the tenth opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.
In the fourth control example, a longer special opening interval period than others is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small winning game. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small win game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in the fourth control example, by performing the right-handed game continuously during the small winning game, at least one ball is released in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that the ball can be entered, if the normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the winning number (10) that is the condition for ending the small winning game during the 10th opening operation , and the small winning game is terminated.
That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.
It should be noted that, as in the fourth control example, when the first special opening interval period is set to the timing (after the fifth opening operation ends) reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed is the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered during the operation to be discharged from the V prize winning device 650 has passed, and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. When it is determined that it is, a notification effect is displayed to notify that effect during the first interval between special openings. should be configured to display As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.
Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 148, the V winning device 650 is an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the V winning device 650 is combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of
149 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 149(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 149(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 149(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 149(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 149(a).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 149(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.
In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.
FIG. 149(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 149(b). As shown in FIG. 149(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 150(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 150(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h can be rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.
As shown in FIG. 150(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By turning on the flow path solenoid 650k, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (see FIG. 150(b)).
In the pachinko machine 10 used in the fourth control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured as follows. Then, when a small win is won, the passage solenoid 650k is set to ON in accordance with the contents stipulated in the open scenario table 202fg described later with reference to FIG. The flow path 650e2 is configured to be able to flow down. In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to OFF, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 150(a)).

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.
In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.
In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball in the fourth control example) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out for winning a prize. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.
Furthermore, in the fourth control example, according to the small winning type (small winning A, B) set when winning a small winning, small winning games with different periods and timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON are performed. configured to run. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is made different depending on the content of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high expectation of V winning will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the structure of the spherical lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 151(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. In the opening/closing door 650f1 of the fourth control example, as shown in FIG. 151(a), the ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 moves along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 146) It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the device 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .
A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured to be 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.
When the small winning game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 151(a) and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 151(b) is entered. FIG. 151(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 151(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the player can win. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.
In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 146). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the privilege game (small hit game) given when the determination result of the determination means (lottery result of the special symbol) is a predetermined determination result (small hit) The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the open interval period (0.5 seconds) of the operating variable member (opening/closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the open/close door 650f1 is in a closed state) during the small winning game surely enters the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. can be made
In addition, only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of times of opening operation in the winning game (12 times) is set more than the number of winning prizes (10 pieces) for the end condition of the small winning game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short , a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.
<Regarding the production contents in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 152 to 154, description will be given of the characteristic effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example.
In the above-described second control example, the success or failure determination ( If you are out in the jackpot lottery), it was configured to execute the judgment of the short-time election (short-time lottery) to set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so if you win the jackpot, you can win the short-time election. There was no configuration.

On the other hand, the fourth control example differs from the second control example in that the jackpot winning and the short-time winning can overlap in the special symbol lottery.
Specifically, a time-saving lottery is executed before the jackpot lottery is executed in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols). The state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the jackpot lottery is executed during the period when the time saving state is set, the jackpot lottery ends, and the first special symbol variation starts. It is configured that the time saving state ends when it is done. In other words, the period during which the time saving state is set by the time saving election is only the period during which the jackpot lottery is executed.
Then, when the normal state is set and when the time saving state is set, the ratio of the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won is different. For example, the normal state is set. The ratio of determining the 15R jackpot (maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds) when the jackpot is won in the period is 10%, whereas the 15R jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the period when the time saving state is set. is determined is 50%. In other words, if the jackpot is won during the period when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning, the 15R jackpot is more likely to be determined than when the jackpot is winning during the period when the normal state is set. When time-saving winning and big win winning overlap, it is advantageous to the player.
In addition, in this embodiment, in the time saving state set when the time saving is elected, the time saving state continues only for a short period from the time when the time saving is elected to the next start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, so the game A person cannot play a game (right-handed game) in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, but can play a right-handed game in a time-saving state set based on the jackpot winning. .

Here, when the player is informed that the time-saving winning has been won when the jackpot has not been won, whether the game state set after the special symbol during fluctuation is stopped is the normal state or the time-saving state for the player. The player is confused, and there is a risk that the player who misunderstands that the time-saving state is set may mistakenly play a right-handed game.
On the other hand, when the time-saving winning and the jackpot winning overlap, the notification of the time-saving winning has confused the player as to whether the normal state or the time-saving state will be set after the special symbol during fluctuation is stopped. Also, by notifying that the big win has been won, the player can be made to recognize that the big win game will be executed after the special symbols are stopped.
Therefore, in the fourth control example, if the short-time winning and the jackpot win overlap in the special symbol lottery, it is notified or suggested that the short-time win is won, but if the short-time win is not won, the short-time win is made. It is configured so as not to notify or suggest to the player that he/she has done so.
By configuring in this way, when time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap, the player can determine which game state was set for the jackpot winning, while time-saving winning is possible. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game state set after the stop of the changing special symbols and causing the player to play with an erroneous game method when the jackpot is not won even though the game is played. can.

With reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, the display screen in the case of suggesting the time saving lottery result during the variation of the first special symbol will be described.
FIG. 152(a) is an example of a display screen displayed when the time saving lottery result suggesting effect (effect for suggesting the result of the time saving lottery) is executed during the variation of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery, "Omikuji time performance" is executed. The omikuji time effect is a effect that suggests to the player whether the time saving win or the time saving win does not occur depending on the contents of the capsule cp5 displayed in the main display area Dm. In the main display area Dm, together with the closed capsule cp5, ``Is this change a time-saving winning? It is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is suggested by the content.
Here, the omikuji time performance is not performed for each change of the first special symbol, and the omikuji time performance may not be performed even when the short-time winning is won. In other words, if the omikuji time effect is not executed, the player cannot recognize whether or not the changing first special symbol wins the time reduction, and if the omikuji time effect is executed, the changing It is constructed so that the player can recognize whether the first special symbol has won the time saving or has not won the time saving.
FIG. 152(b) is an example of a display screen in the case of suggesting that the time-saving winning is made during the variation of the first special symbol. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the capsule cp5 is opened and a piece of paper k1 on which "o" is written appears. The paper k1 is a display mode for indicating that the first special symbol during fluctuation has won the time-saving winning, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the time-saving winning has been won.

In addition, it is suggested to the player that the short-time winning during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is that short-time winning and jackpot winning overlap. If the result of the jackpot lottery (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit executed in the special pattern lottery) is out, it is suggested to the player that he won the time saving even if he won the time saving. (that is, the omikuji time presentation is not executed). Therefore, when the paper k1 indicating that the time-saving winning is displayed in the omikuji time performance, the player recognizes that the big winning has been won before the third pattern of the display mode indicating that the big winning has been displayed is displayed. It becomes possible.
In addition, although it will be described later, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set, and when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the jackpot is won The ratio of the jackpot type is different when the jackpot is won in the normal state, and the ratio of determining the 15R jackpot (maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds) is 10%, while in the short time state The ratio of determining the 15R jackpot when the jackpot is won is 50%.
Therefore, in the embodiment, when the paper k1 suggesting that the short-time winning is displayed in the omikuji time production, the main display area Dm says "Super chance has arrived! If you win with this change, you have a big chance to win the 15R jackpot!" By executing the displayed ``super chance arrival presentation'', it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the fluctuating first special symbol wins the 15R jackpot, and the omikuji time presentation ends. The amusement of the game can be improved by making the player expect to win the 15R jackpot during the period from when the result of the jackpot lottery is reported.
FIG. 153(a) is an example of the display screen when suggesting that the time-saving non-winning was made during the variation of the first special symbol. Unlike the case of short-time winning, an effect is executed in which a paper k2 on which "x" is written appears from the capsule cp5 in the omikuji time effect. The paper k2 is a display mode for indicating that the first special symbol during fluctuation has not won the time saving, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the time saving has not been won.

It should be noted that, as will be described later, in this embodiment, it is suggested to the player that the time reduction has not been won only when the jackpot A (15R time saving jackpot) is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost and
Here, in the present embodiment, three jackpot types are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and "jackpot A" is a jackpot. The number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and the normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished. . That is, the jackpot A has more rounds of the jackpot game given to the player than the jackpots B and C, and unlike the jackpot C, after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set. It is an advantageous jackpot type.
Therefore, in the omikuji time effect, when the paper k2 indicating that the time saving was not won is displayed, the main display area Dm displays "Best or Eight! Jackpot A? Or Lost?" Execution of the high-stakes performance" suggests to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the most advantageous jackpot A, and after the omikuji time performance ends, the jackpot lottery (in the special pattern lottery) Amusement of the game can be improved by making the player expect that the jackpot A is won during the period until the result of the execution judgment of whether or not the jackpot is won is reported.
FIG. 153(b) is an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when time saving winning and jackpot winning overlap. In the small display region Dm1, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. An effect in which the written ball tm2 appears is executed. The ball tm2 is a display mode for notifying the player that the first special symbol has won the big win, and the player can recognize that the big win has been won by displaying the ball tm2.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the result of the jackpot lottery is notified of the super chance arrival effect displaying "Super chance arrival! If you win with this variation, you have a big chance to win a 15R jackpot!" It will continue to be displayed even when
It should be noted that in the case of winning the jackpot B or C, although the time saving was not won, neither the super chance arrival effect nor the high chance effect is displayed in the main display area Dm of FIG. 153(b). An effect is executed in which the rabbit character 801 opens the treasure box 810f and the ball tm2 appears. On the other hand, if the time-saving non-winning was won, but the jackpot A was won, and the high-stakes performance was executed during the above-mentioned Omikuji time performance, the main success notification screen in FIG. 153(b) The high-stakes performance is continuously displayed in the display area Dm, and the player can recognize that the jackpot A has been won by displaying the ball tm2.
After the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 153(b) is displayed, an effect of notifying the determined jackpot type is executed (not shown).
In addition, when the first special symbol during fluctuation is not winning the time saving and not winning the jackpot, the omikuji time production is executed, and in the omikuji time production, the main display area Dm says "One or eight! Jackpot A? ?” is executed, the high-stakes effect is continuously displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 153(b) as well. In this case, the game player is notified that the jackpot has not been won by executing an effect in which a ball labeled "Unfortunate" appears from the treasure box 810f.

In the embodiment, the omikuji time effect is configured to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern executed in the special pattern lottery), but it is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured such that the player can recognize the result of the time saving lottery by displaying a specific character or background image.
Further, for example, in the super chance coming effect shown in FIG. 152(a), the main display area Dm displays "Super chance coming! If the jackpot symbols stop during the super chance display, a big chance to win the 15R jackpot!" is displayed. If the super chance arrival effect is continuously displayed until the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, the 15R jackpot is confirmed and the super chance arrival effect ends before the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed. If the super chance arrival effect is not displayed in 153(b), it may be configured to suggest to the player that the possibility of the 15R jackpot is low.
By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while expecting the super chance arrival presentation to be continuously displayed during the period from the execution of the super chance arrival presentation to the display of the big win notification screen. It is possible to make it possible to perform it, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game, and when the jackpot type is not the 15R jackpot even though the jackpot winning is notified in a state where the super chance arrival performance is displayed, It is possible to suppress distrust given to the player.
In addition, in FIG. 153(b), the configuration may be such that the type of the jackpot is notified by the display mode of the ball tm2. It is good also as a structure which shows that it is a jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot).

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the notification pattern when winning the time saving lottery and the jackpot lottery will be described. Figure 154 is a time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election for setting a high probability state of normal symbols executed in a special symbol lottery) or a jackpot lottery (judgment of whether or not a big hit is executed in a special symbol lottery). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the notification pattern at the time of winning.
Figure 154 (a) is an example of a notification pattern when time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap. The paper k1 (see FIG. 152(b)), which is a display mode for suggesting, and the "super chance arrival effect" (see FIG. 152(b)) are displayed to suggest that the player has won a short-time win, A game player is informed that a big win has been won by displaying a jackpot winning notification screen after a ready-to-win performance period. Therefore, when the short-time winning and the big win win overlap, the player can recognize that the short-time winning and the big win win overlap.
Figure 154 (b) is an example of a notification pattern in the case of winning a short time but not winning a jackpot. 152 (a)) is not executed, so the player cannot know the result of the time-saving lottery, and after the reach production, the third symbol is displayed in a display mode to indicate that the jackpot has not been won. The player is informed that he/she has not won. Therefore, when the player wins the time saving lottery but does not win the jackpot, the player cannot know the result of the time saving lottery, and can only recognize that the jackpot has not been won.
Figure 154 (c) is a notification pattern in the case of winning a jackpot even though it was not time-saving winning. Since FIG. 152 (a)) is not executed, the player cannot know the result of the time saving lottery in the same way as 302 (b), and the third symbol is a display mode to show that the jackpot has been won after the reach production. Only the fact that the jackpot has been won is reported by being displayed. Therefore, when the jackpot is won but the time saving lottery is not won, the player cannot know the result of the time saving lottery and can only recognize that the jackpot has been won.

By configuring in this way, when time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap, the player can determine which game state was set for the jackpot winning, while time-saving winning is possible. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game state set after the stop of the changing special symbols and causing the player to play with an erroneous game method when the jackpot is not won even though the game is played. can.
In the embodiment, the production that suggests short-time winning is executed in the pre-reach production period, but it is not limited to this. production) may be executed, or a time-saving winning suggestion production may be executed during the period in which the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed.
By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving winning suggestion production does not occur in the pre-reach production period, the time-saving winning suggestion production may be executed even on the screen informing that the jackpot has been won. It is possible to entertain the variable display of the first special pattern while making the player expect the short-time winning without disappointing the player even if the performance suggesting the short-time winning is not shown in the previous performance period, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.
In the embodiment, if the jackpot is not won even if the short-time winning is won, the short-time winning is not notified, but it is not limited to this. Also, it is good also as a structure which alert|reports time saving election. For example, in the embodiment, the super chance arrival effect (see FIG. 152 (b)) is executed only when the time reduction winning and the jackpot win overlap, so the super chance arrival effect (see FIG. 152 (b) ) occurs, the player will know that the jackpot has been won before the jackpot is announced. 152(b)), even if the super chance arrival effect (see FIG. 152(b)) occurs, the winning of the jackpot is not confirmed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is announced until the last moment. Since it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the result of the jackpot lottery, the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, each counter that the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example has will be described. It should be noted that the counters used in the respective control examples described above are different in that the update ranges of the counters are partially different, but since the basic configuration is the same, a detailed description thereof will be given. is omitted.
The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.
The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 166) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 177).
The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the fourth control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202fa stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202fa as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

In addition, this first hit random number table 202fa is provided with two types of a first special symbol random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a second special symbol random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol, The number of random numbers for the big win is the same, but the number of random numbers for the small win is set differently (see FIG. 157). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that become small wins, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big wins or small wins) to players can be increased between the lottery for the first special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols. can be different. The first special symbol random number table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number table 202fa2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.
Here, the first winning random number table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 157 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first per random number table 202fa, Figure 157 (b) is the contents defined in the first special symbol random number table 202fa1 FIG. 157(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second special symbol random number table 202fa2. In this first hit random number table 202fa, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a random value (determination value) determined as a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined as a small hit are set. is a table.
Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the first special symbol random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 157(b), in the first special symbol random number table 202fa1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpots (ie , out of range). Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.
When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the second special symbol random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 157(c), the second special symbol random number table 202fa2 defines "0 to 4" as the big hit determination value among the values of the random number counter C1, and "5 to 144" is the small hit determination. "145 to 999" are defined as other (ie outlier) judgment values. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win, and when the value is any one of "5 to 144". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the fourth control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, in a state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during fluctuation of special symbols and during a big win game or a small win game), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of hitting the ball.
Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number determined to be a special symbol big win or small win. That is, if it is a random number determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.
On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.
The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-999. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become a big hit in the special symbols when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn. is stored in the first special symbol random number table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number table 202fa2 of the first per random number table 202fa. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example has 1000 random numbers in total, and the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 5. Therefore, the probability of a big win with special symbols is "1/200".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the fourth control example, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 158(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 158 (a), in the fourth control example, at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the special figure 1 jackpot used when determining the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 It has a type selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). there is As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratio can be changed, the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2) provide different game characteristics to the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 158(b). FIG. 158(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 158(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first per type counter C2 If it is "jackpot A", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" if it is any of "10 to 49", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C". . When the time-saving state is set as the game state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot D" and "10 to 49". ”, the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, and when it is any of “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.
"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers select "jackpot A", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot A" is 10%.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers for which "jackpot B" is selected is 40, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot B" is 40%.
"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected as "jackpot C", so the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot C" is 50%.
"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win D" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Furthermore, the "jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to end the "jackpot A" described above. Therefore, the jackpot type is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A" in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, 15 rounds at a rate of 10% in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in which the normal state is set. , and 90% of the time, 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.

On the other hand, 15 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and the rate is 50%. 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished.
In other words, winning a jackpot in a time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in a normal state in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 158(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 158(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 158(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" when the random number is any one of "0 to 99". That is, when a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "jackpot D" for the player is always selected as the big win type.
In the fourth control example, there are four types of jackpots, but the number of types is not limited to four. One type, or five or more types may be provided. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and has a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the fourth control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first Stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the ball is the first entering ball in the state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, the state other than during the variation of the special symbol and during the big winning game and the small winning game) It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the mouth 64 or the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁
The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit type selection table 202ff (see FIG. 159) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is set.
Here, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202ff. As shown in FIG. 159, the small hit type selection table 202ff defines that two types of small hits A and B are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit types of the second special symbol. . Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 89", the small hit type becomes "small hit A (V passage time big hit A)", "90 to 99" The small hit type in the case of either is "small hit B (V passing time big hit B)".

Here, for each small winning type (small winning A, B), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small winning game, the big winning game executed after the small winning game ends type is set. In the case of the small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state to execute the big win, and then the time-saving state. (Period until the variation of the special symbol is 100 times, or the small winning A is won once, or the small winning B is won 3 times) is set. In addition, in the case of the small win B, the big win B (5R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and the big win is executed. It is configured to set a time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times, or the small winning A is won once, or the small winning B is won three times).
Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game executed after the small winning game is completed and the game state set after the big winning game can be varied. Specifically, the small win A has a large number of rounds (15R) executed in the big win game, and since a time saving state that is advantageous to the player after the big win game is completed is set, it is the most advantageous for the player. It is set as a small win, and the small win B has a small number of rounds (5R) executed in the big win game, and is set more disadvantageously than the above-described small win A, but a time saving state is set after the big win game. be.
Although detailed description will be described later, in the fourth control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (the number of times of small winning A winning, or small winning The number of times of B winning etc.) or the time saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be set. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 1 or more, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the first special pattern (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot is finished. ) is executed, the time saving state will not end. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed and a small win (small win A, small win B) that can execute a big win game is won, the number of times the special symbol changes Since the time-saving end condition is established before the time-saving end condition is established and the time-saving state can be terminated based on the time-saving end condition, the small win game is continued until an advantageous small win (small win A) is won during the time-saving state. It is possible to suppress the repeated execution of a game in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area until the second end condition is satisfied.
Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202fd will be described with reference to FIG. 160(a). FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the variation pattern table 202fd is used in the normal variation pattern table 202fd1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, and in the state where the time saving state is set. A time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the fourth control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. can let

FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202fd1 provided in the variation pattern table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 160(b), in the normal variation pattern table 202fd1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is defined in the range of , and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "140 to 149", and fluctuations in the range of "150 to 179" Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in correspondence, and super reach a with a variable time of 80 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "180 to 198".
In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the variation time is 40 seconds. A super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of "30 to 189", and a special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 198". It is
Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time in the entire range 180 seconds long out is stipulated, and if the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range has a variation time of 180 seconds. Long out is defined.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the special symbol, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and a command indicating this variation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect corresponding to the variable time.
Here, in the fourth control example, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game for entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game for executing a lottery for the first special symbol is performed. The case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is the case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the normal state A variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in . As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second special symbol lottery is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed is used to illegally draw the second special symbol. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed illegally, the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that is illegally executed is forced to be the result of the lottery (variation). It may be configured to create and display.
As shown in FIG. 160(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern table 202fd1 is 7 seconds (the selection ratio is 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). . Also, if the lottery result is a big hit, it is likely to be selected in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). stipulated in
In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (variation time), and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the special It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected by the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the pattern is a loss. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In the fourth control example, the same variation pattern table is used irrespective of the type of jackpot won. A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicated and the case of the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern is easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.
Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the contents of the variation pattern table 202fd2 for reduction in working hours provided in the variation pattern table 202fd will be described. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving variation pattern table 202fd2. As shown in FIG. 161, in the time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, the pattern type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, if the fluctuation time is defined as 2 seconds in the entire range, and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" A short hit with a variation time of 2 seconds is defined for the range, ie the entire range. If the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 times or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range If the deviation of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the above, and the lottery result is "big win", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the whole range of the fluctuation time is 20 seconds. is stipulated. Also, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the variation time is specified to be within 30 seconds for the entire range and the lottery result is "small win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 160" and the variation time is 10 seconds. is defined, medium and small wins with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are defined in the range of "161 to 198", and when the lottery result is a "big win", a medium and big win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined.

Returning to FIG. 155, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the fourth control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is held and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .
Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202fc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202fc. If it matches the value of the random number set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, in the fourth control example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.
For example, as the second random number table 202fc, for normal design low probability (period in which normal design is normal state), and for high probability of normal design hit than the low probability time (normal design) It is possible to provide two types, one for the time period in which the working hours are shortened. In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning can be changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.
When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state, and if the game state is the time saving state, the second pattern is displayed. In the device 83, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not the time-saving state, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 30 seconds.

If the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is used as a stop symbol (second symbol). A symbol of "○" is illuminated. Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and When the second pattern variation start time is also in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation control (short opening control) of the electric accessory 640a is performed so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of openings of the second entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.
In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period of the second ball entrance 640, number of times of opening) are variable according to the set game state. When the game state at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbols is the time saving state, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from ``30 seconds to 3 seconds'' compared to the case of the normal state, and further, If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period in which the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts to operate, otherwise , the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. state. A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4.
In addition, in the fourth control example, depending on the game state at the start of variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. , the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a are set differently, but other configurations may be used, for example, the normal symbol (second symbol) A determination means for determining that the time saving state is continuously set is provided from the variation start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, and the variation time of the second pattern is used by using the determination result of the determination means. , and operation contents of the electric accessory 640a may be set.
As described above, in the fourth control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, the normal symbol fluctuation start time and the operation start time of the electric accessory 640a It is necessary that the time saving state is set at any timing. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern, which starts to change at the timing when the normal state is set, is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or Based on the lottery of one second pattern, such as when the second pattern that starts to change at the timing when the time saving state is set is stopped with identification information indicating the win at the timing when the normal state is set. In the case where the variation of the second symbol and the action of the electric role product 640a executed by stepping across a plurality of game states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric role product 640a that is advantageous to the player is executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 166). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 177).
In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 156(a), the contents of the main controller 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 156(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains, as part of the fixed value data, a first winning random number table 202fa, a jackpot type selection table 202fb, a second winning random number table 202fc, and a variation pattern A table 202fd, a time saving provision table 202fe, a small hit type selection table 202ff, an open scenario table 202fg, a time saving random number table 202fh, and a time saving type selection table 202fi are stored at least.
Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first hit random number table 202fa, the big hit type selection table 202fb, the second hit random number table 202fc, the fluctuation pattern table 202fd, and the small hit type selection table 202ff have already been Since the detailed contents are explained, the explanation is omitted.

The time saving provision table 202fe is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state differently for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and the jackpot game ends (jackpot game ending When the period ends) (S1612 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is referred to, and a different time saving frequency (time saving end condition) is set according to the jackpot type.
Here, the contents specified in the time reduction provision table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. 158(d). Drawing 158 (d) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents prescribed in time saving grant table 202fe. In the fourth control example, a jackpot type (jackets A, B, D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (normal state is set) It has, and as shown in FIG. 158(d), a plurality of time-saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.
In the fourth control example, the first time-saving end condition is established according to the number of fluctuations of special symbols, the second time-saving end condition is established according to the number of times a small hit A is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. and a third time-saving end condition established according to the number of times the small win B is won.
As shown in FIG. 158 (d), the time saving grant table 202fe defines values to be set to various counters corresponding to each of a plurality of time saving end conditions, and the value to be set as the first time saving end condition described above is It is set to the counter 203h during time saving, the value set as the second time saving end condition is set to the small hit A counter 203fg, and the value set as the third time saving end condition is set to the small hit B counter 203fh.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A and B, as the time saving end condition, the time saving medium counter 203h (first time saving end condition) "100", the small hit A counter 203fg "1", the small hit It is defined to set the value of "3" to the B counter 203fh, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving end condition is "100" to the time saving medium counter 203h (first time saving end condition), and the small hit A counter 203fg. is set to "2", and a value of "10" is set to the small winning B counter 203fh.
As described above, in the fourth control example, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot C of the time saving grant table 202fe is set for the various counters described above. No value is specified. In this way, by differentiating the end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game for each jackpot type that has been won, even if it is notified in advance that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time saving, the game can be played until the end (until the time saving state ends) in a state of heightened play motivation.
In addition, in the fourth control example, in addition to the time saving end state set using the time saving grant table 202fe, the time saving state is also ended when a special symbol jackpot is won. Since the time saving end condition established based on does not differ according to the set jackpot type, it is omitted from the time saving grant table 202fe, but the above time saving end condition (established based on the special figure jackpot winning You may comprise so that a value may be prescribed|regulated to the time saving provision table 202fe also about time saving end conditions to carry out.
Furthermore, in the fourth control example, it is configured to set the time saving state (second time saving) even when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, but regarding the time saving end condition set for the second time saving will be described with reference to a time saving type selection table 202fi, which will be described later. In addition, in the fourth control example, the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning is set by referring to the time saving type selection table 202fi instead of the time saving grant table 202fe. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to define the time saving end condition corresponding to the second time saving in the time saving giving table 202fe.

Further, in the fourth control example, as a plurality of time-saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time-saving end condition to third time-saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time-saving end conditions. , For example, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times), the time saving end condition is established, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 80 times). The time-saving end condition to be established and the number of times the V winning device has been activated by winning the small win (the number of times the sum of the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). You may set the time-saving end conditions satisfied in the case.
In addition, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the lottery result. number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) You may comprise so that the time-saving end conditions etc. which are materialized in may be preset.
As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.
Furthermore, in the fourth control example, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions are predetermined You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized, when number (for example, two) is materialized. In this case, the establishment number determination means for determining the number of time-saving end conditions that are satisfied, and the condition attainment determination means for determining whether the number of establishment determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), is provided, and the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set) when it is determined that the condition attainment determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means is provided for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition that is established first, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means is varied based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. It is also possible to provide means for varying the determination reference number. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is established first, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.
In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period of time after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches 10 times) is measured, and the measurement result of the predetermined period of time measurement means is measured. A result determination means for determining is provided, and when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delaying means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means for invalidating the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period may be provided. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set according to each time saving end condition ) may not be executed.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, in the case of using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fact that a plurality of time saving end conditions are satisfied as described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions are prioritized time saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is Time-saving end conditions that are established when reaching 100 times) and non-priority time-saving end conditions (for example, time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and priority time-saving end It is preferable that the time saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated only when a plurality of non-prioritized time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.
The opening scenario table 202fg is an opening pattern ( A pattern for operating various solenoids provided in each winning device) is stored in a data table for storing an opening scenario, which is a jackpot type set for a winning jackpot or set for a winning small win. The contents of the open scenario are defined in correspondence with the small hit type.

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the contents of the opening operation (opening scenario ), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the privilege game in multiple stages. can.
In the opening scenario table 202fg, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type). , the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the inter-round interval period (between round games ) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period to allow the start of new special symbol fluctuations) )), and the ON/OFF switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2. there is
Specifically, corresponding to jackpot A, the winning type is "2 seconds" as the start interval period, "15 rounds" for the "variable winning device 65" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and 1 round. As a game, an opening operation mode in which the game is opened continuously for 29 seconds is stipulated with an inter-round interval period of '1 second' and an end interval period of '4 seconds'. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. . Furthermore, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, since the jackpot is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, the jackpot A is given a privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit.
Next, corresponding to jackpot types B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the prize winning device is set to "5 rounds" for the "variable prize winning device 65", and one round game is set. The opening operation mode of "continuously 29 seconds" is defined with an inter-round interval period of "1 second" and an end interval period of "4 seconds". Therefore, when the jackpot types are jackpots B and C, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds, and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is played for the player. It becomes a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of prize balls are paid out. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, and when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished. Since it is configured, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot in which a privilege that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C is given.

The start interval period corresponds to the jackpot D, the start interval period is "1 second", the "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and the "variable winning device 65" is operated. is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the first round opens "0.1 seconds open 12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds open", 2- In the 15th round, the opening operation mode is "continuously open for 29 seconds", the inter-round interval period is "10 seconds" after the first round, otherwise "1 second", and the end interval period is "4 seconds". is stipulated.
That is, the interval period between the start of the jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (round game contents of the first round (opening/closing operation mode), and the interval period between rounds after the end of the first round) The content is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small winning game described later. By configuring in this way, whether the winning game being executed this time is a big winning game or a small winning game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small winning game, the small winning game ends It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand until the timing to do so). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small winning and recognized that a small winning game is being executed.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the second special symbol lotteries are set to win a small win. (See FIG. 157(c)). Therefore, the time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period in which the variation of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some winning game is started after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the winning game is started from the same opening operation regardless of whether the player wins the big win or the small win, which win (big win or small win) is won by the player. can be difficult to grasp.
In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbols, the probability of winning the big win is set to be lower than that of winning the small win, and after the big win game corresponding to the big win D is finished. It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, since a player who has won a big win is not provided with a privilege that is more disadvantageous than when he wins a small win, the player can play an unexpected game (a jackpot game corresponding to the big win D). Since the game can be played in an advantageous manner, the player can be more excited.

Incidentally, when the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same performance mode is executed as the variable display (variable performance) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or the period before and after that. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify than during other periods, the display mode and display area are changed, and at the stop display timing of the special symbol, the effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 It is preferable to switch from the third pattern to the normal pattern for production corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern.
In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged separately, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (when any winning At the timing of informing the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes a performance display to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a as in the fourth control example. , 37b is made smaller than the display area of the third pattern display device 81 so that the first pattern is more difficult to see than the third pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a big win or a small win by the stop display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the big win is continued even during the winning game. can be expected to be elected.
In addition to the small winning game (1 round game), the small winning game is performed by the V switch 650e3 detecting the ball during the small winning game. A release scenario of a jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also defined. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the small winning game contents of the winning small winning type with the big winning game contents that can be executed after finishing the small winning game, so that a proper game can be provided.
Specifically, for a small win A, the start interval period is "1 second" as a small win game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is "1 round". Round game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, end of the 5th and 10th open 5 seconds (interval 2 between opening)” is defined later.

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small win game, the "variable prize winning device 65" opens in "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.
In addition, for the small winning type B, as a small winning game, the start interval period is "1 second", and the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened for "1 round". Game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, 5 seconds after the end of the 5th and 10th open (interval between opening 2)” is defined.
Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small win game, the "variable prize winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.
That is, the big winning game that can be executed after the small winning game corresponding to the small winning B is finished is set so that the number of round games is smaller than the big winning game corresponding to the small winning A described above. Further, when the small win type is a small win B, the small win B is a small win because it is configured to set a time-saving state that is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the corresponding big win game is completed. It becomes a small win in which a privilege more disadvantageous than A is given.

Time saving random number table 202fh, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value (determination value) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as the time saving winning data is defined in correspondence with the game state. is a table. Here, with reference to Drawing 162 (a), the contents of random number table 202fh per time saving are explained. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the random number table 202fh per time saving.
Specifically, regardless of the special symbol type, when the game state is normal (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first per random number counter C1 is "3, 4, 140 to 287 , and is configured not to provide a judgment value for time-saving election for other game states.
Here, in the fourth control example, determination of big hit winning and determination of time saving winning can be executed in duplicate in one special symbol lottery. In addition, the determination of the small hit winning and the determination of the time saving winning are configured to be executed in duplicate. Therefore, for example, when the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", in the big winning determination executed using the first winning random number table 202fa (see FIG. 157(a)), And, because it is determined to be short-time winning in the time-saving winning determination executed using the time-saving random number table 202fh (see FIG. 162 (a)), it is possible to win the jackpot and short time. Similarly, when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "140 to 144", a small hit determination is performed using the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 157(c)). It is determined to be a hit, and it is determined to be a short-time winning in the time-saving winning determination performed using the time-saving random number table 202fh (see FIG. 162 (a)). .
As described above, in the fourth control example, after the determination of the time-saving election is performed, the jackpot (small hit) determination is performed. hit) will be elected. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a benefit that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case of winning a big win (small win) without winning a time-saving win.

In addition, in this fourth control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in one special symbol lottery is used to determine the big hit (small hit) and the time-saving winning decision. , The value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is the winning judgment value in any judgment, it is configured so that duplicate winning can be possible, but not limited to this, for example, execution of special symbol lottery When the right is acquired, the value of the random number counter for judging the jackpot (small hit) and the value of the random number counter for short-time winning are separately obtained, and the obtained values are used to judge the jackpot (small hit). And, it may be configured to execute time-saving winning determination.
The time saving type selection table 202fi is a data table referred to when setting the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, and the time saving type selection counter CC1. A time saving type is defined in correspondence with the value.
Here, with reference to Drawing 162 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection table 202fi are explained. Drawing 162 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection table 202fi. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the time saving type selection table 202fi, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving end corresponding to the defined time saving type Conditions are specified.
Specifically, the time saving type A is defined as the time saving type for the entire range (“0 to 99”) of the time saving type selection counter CC1 that has been obtained. And, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition in which "1" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is defined. In other words, a time saving end condition is set in which the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the special symbol working time saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if you win the time saving in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set at the time of winning the time saving, and then the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery. A time saving state will be set until it starts.

In other words, when the special symbol lottery wins the time-saving lottery, the time-saving state can be set only for executing the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (executing the special lottery). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, it is possible to execute only the big hit determination during the time saving state without the player noticing that the time saving win is made. Potential benefits (jackpot game content, time saving state after the jackpot game ends) can be given.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 162(b), in this fourth control example, when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving A is always set as the time saving type, but it is not limited to this. For example, according to the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, a time saving type different from the working time saving A may be configured to be selectable. In this case, for example, the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 defines time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "0 to 94", and time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "95 to 99" is configured to define a different time saving Z, and as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving Z, a time saving end condition in which "100" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is preferably defined.
By constructing in this way, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the time saving state for continuously executing the second special symbol lottery is set instead of the time saving state for executing the special lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more unexpected game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 156(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 156(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 156(b), the RAM 203 in the fourth control example includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, game state storage area 203g, time reduction counter 203h, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, small hit type storage area 203fa, small hit start flag 203fb, small hit middle flag 203fc, V passage big hit type storage area 203fd, V flag 203fe, V passage flag 203ff, small hit A counter 203fg, small hit B counter 203fh, and other memory area 203z ing.

That is, for the RAM 203 (see FIG. 96(b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example, the small hit type storage area 203fa, the small hit start flag 203fb, the small hit medium flag 203fc, the V passage big hit type storage Area 203fd, V flag 203fe, V passage flag 203ff, small hit A counter 203fg, and small hit B counter 203fh are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The small hit type storage area 203fa is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set to the won small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit is won (S10306 in FIG. 169: Yes ), the acquired small hit type is temporarily stored (S10310 in FIG. 169). Then, when it is determined that the number of openings of the V winning device 650 reaches a predetermined number during the small winning game (S11707 in FIG. 179: Yes) and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON (S11708 in FIG. 179: No ), the stored small hit type is referred to (S11709 in FIG. 179), and an instruction command corresponding to the referred small hit type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa (information for indicating the small hit type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.
The small hit start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 172). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203fb is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (S11703 in FIG. 179). This small hit start flag 203fb is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs. configured to be
The small hit medium flag 203fc is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose judgment result is a small hit is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 172). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (S11720 in FIG. 179). This small hit medium flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure etc. occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure etc. configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 while a small winning game is being executed. This is the storage area where the data is stored. The V passage big hit type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the big hit type corresponding to the determined small hit type when the fluctuation of the special symbol that the determination result is a small hit stops (Fig. 172 S10402). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, a V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd. 203fe is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by
The V flag 203fe corresponds to the type of the small winning game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. A flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is on (S11716 in FIG. 179), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S11716 in FIG. 179: Yes), it is set to on The jackpot type to be executed is discriminated from the executed flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S11718 in FIG. 179). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as
The V passage flag 203ff is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203fe is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. be done. In the fourth control example, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and correspond to the balls that have won the first prize in the special discharge flow path 650e2. is set to ON in the V-passing process (see FIG. 175) (S11207 in FIG. 175).
Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 175), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203ff is set to ON (S11201 in FIG. 175). ), the processing of S11202 to S11208 in the V passing processing (see FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small winning game, and the V passing command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 is complicated. can be prevented from becoming

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is established, and in the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 178), the ending production (S11612 of FIG. 178: Yes), the value (100) defined in the time reduction grant table 202fe is set (S11614 of FIG. 178).
Then, the value of the counter is referred to in the update process (S8253 in FIG. 171) executed in the special symbol variation process (S10104 in FIG. 167) (S10601 in FIG. 171), and it is determined that the value of the counter is greater than 0. (S10601 in FIG. 171: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S10604 in FIG. 171: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is satisfied (S10605 in FIG. 171). In addition, the fourth control example sets a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time-saving end based on the number of winning small wins Even if the condition is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S10505 in FIG. 173). Thus, even if the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) with reference to the value of the time saving counter 203h is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the time saving counter 203h is Since it is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as above, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated.
The small hit A counter 203fg is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit A is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 178), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production (end timing of the jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 178: Yes), the value defined in the time reduction grant table 202fe ( 1) is set (S11614 in FIG. 178).
And, the small hit of the small hit that was elected this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S10405 of FIG. 173) executed in the small hit start setting process (S10223 of FIG. 172) of the special symbol variation process (S10104 of FIG. 167) When it is determined that the type is small hit A (S10502 in FIG. 173: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203fg after the subtraction is 0 (S10504 in FIG. 173: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 173). . In addition, the fourth control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is met), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S10606 in FIG. 171). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (second time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit A counter 203m are met, the small hit A counter Since the value of 203m is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit A counter 203m is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as above, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated.

The small hit B counter 203fh is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit B is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 178), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production (end timing of the jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 178: Yes), the value defined in the time reduction grant table 202fe ( 3) is set (S11614 in FIG. 178).
And, the small hit of the small hit that was elected this time in the small hit time reduction update process (S10405 of FIG. 173) executed in the small hit start setting process (S10223 of FIG. 172) of the special symbol variation process (S10104 of FIG. 167) When it is determined that the type is a small hit B (S10510 in FIG. 173: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh after the subtraction is 0 (S10512 in FIG. 173: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 173). . In addition, the fourth control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is met), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S10606 in FIG. 171). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (third time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit B counter 203fh are met, the small hit B counter Since the value of 203fh is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small winning B counter 203fh is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is terminated.
Next, referring to FIG. 163(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 163(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 163(a), the ROM 222 of the fourth control example has a retraction mode selection table 222da and a suggestion mode selection table 222da in contrast to the ROM 222 of the second control example (see FIG. 101(a)). 222db are deleted and a lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the variation performance that is executed corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation, and is the result of the special symbol lottery (of the jackpot determination. One mode is selected from a plurality of modes as a mode for suggesting (announcing) the determination result and the determination result of the time-saving winning determination. This lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S14893 in FIG. 180 reference) (see S19502 in FIG. 180).

Here, with reference to FIG. 164, the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa will be described. FIG. 164 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 164, the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa defines different lottery result notification modes corresponding to the game state at the time of the big win determination, the big win determination result, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. A performance mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set using the selected notification mode.
Specifically, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the normal state, that is, when the time-saving winning determination in the special symbol lottery does not win, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A (15R jackpot)" The value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as “suggestion of winning time + jackpot winning notification” for the range of “0 to 64”, and “suggestion of time saving non-winning” to the range of “65 to 79” + Jackpot non-winning notification” is defined, and “jackpot winning notification” is defined for the range of “80 to 99”. In addition, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as "short-time winning suggestion + jackpot winning notification" for the range of "0 to 4". , and "jackpot winning notification" is defined for the range of "5 to 99". If the jackpot determination result is "out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 98", the "jackpot non-winning notification" is defined, and the value of "99" is " Short-time non-winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification” is stipulated.
On the other hand, if the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is a time-saving state, that is, if the time-saving winning determination in the special symbol lottery is successful, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A, D (15R jackpot)", obtain The value of the production counter 223f is defined in the range of ``0 to 89'', ``suggestion of time saving + jackpot winning notification'', and ``jackpot winning notification'' is defined in the range of ``90 to 99''. ing. In addition, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as "suggestion of short-time winning + jackpot winning notification" for the range of "0 to 79". , and "jackpot winning notification" is defined for the range of "80 to 99". If the jackpot determination result is "out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "0 to 9" with "shorter winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification", and "10 to 99". "Jackpot non-winning notification" is defined for the value of.
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). As shown in FIG. 163(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and an effect counter 223e. , Game state storage area 223f, time saving information update area 223g, temporary hit determination flag 223h, temporary time saving information update area 223i, temporary time saving end flag 223j, time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n, At least a state effect counter 223o and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning command processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4212 in FIG. 61) is executed. The winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110, which is stored in order from area 1, is set when the prefetching process of the main controller 110 (S653 in FIG. 111) is executed, and the main controller 110 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 177) executed in the main process (see FIG. 177).
Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is displayed one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is shifted (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904 and S4908 in FIG. 66). As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, the sound lamp controller 113 side can surely grasp.
In addition, since it is possible to shift the winning information (special symbol prefetch information) transmitted by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, winning Based on the reception of the information command, the effect using the period from the start timing of the special symbol variation to be executed next to the timing until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command ends (so-called look-ahead continuous effect), the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the aforementioned look-ahead continuous effect ends.
In the fourth control example, up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be retained and stored. In addition to the area, it is configured to have the first area to the fourth area. information) can also be retained and stored, the winning information storage area 223a includes four areas (reserved information areas) for the first special symbol and a second area for the second special symbol in addition to the execution area. It may be configured to provide four areas (reserved information areas).

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a variable display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .
As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol is reserved by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It is designed to manage the number of balls.
Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in special symbols. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .
When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is acquired from the reserved ball number command. , stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4182 in FIG. 114). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is updated, the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223b, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.
When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.
The information contained in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol reserved ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been incremented or decremented by one may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball number command, it is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp controller 113. It suffices to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information received.
The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4204 in FIG. 114), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See S4902 and S4906 in FIG. 66). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the main processing (see FIG. 177) executed by the MPU 221 External output processing (S11501 in FIG. 177) Inside, it is sent towards the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.
The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4207 in FIG. 114), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4910 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type for display is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (S4911 in FIG. 66).
The effect counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 177) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. In the fourth control example, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, a counter that is repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 99), and the values of each counter are configured to be updated without synchronism. ing.
Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters with different values updated each time the main process (see FIG. 177) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Further, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used in lottery when determining the content of various effects.

The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main controller 110. FIG. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.
In the fourth control example, the data in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current game state that has been played is also erased. However, in the fourth control example, the state command is set in the start-up process (main controller) 7 (see FIG. 176) of the main controller 110 executed after the power is turned on (S11412 in FIG. 176). After that, the information indicating the game state set before the power shutdown is immediately stored in the game state storage area 223f. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main controller 110, a state command indicating the game state after variably set is set (S10509 in FIG. 173, S10607 in FIG. 171, S11616 in FIG. 178, etc.). .
The time saving information update area 223g is the end condition of the time saving state, the progress status for each end condition (the number of times that the event targeted by the end condition (for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol, the small hit, and the big win) was executed) And is a data area for storing A state (situation) display mode Dm3a to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223a (end condition and progress of the time saving state). This time saving information update area 223g is determined as the end timing of the ending production in the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the main control device 110 jackpot control processing (S11504 in FIG. 178) (Fig. S11612 of 178), when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S11614 of FIG. 178) When the time saving setting information command set is received, the end condition for ending this time saving state is set.
Then, in the time saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113, update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that the special symbol variation has been executed, small When it is determined that the winning information) has been received, the current time saving situation is updated in correspondence with the received update information.

To specifically explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223g, in the time saving information update area 223g, each item that can be the ending condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the second special The number of fluctuations in the design, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of fluctuations in the first special design and the number of fluctuations in the second special design, the number of winnings for each small hit type (small hits A, B) (the operation of the V winning device 600 It is formed so that information can be temporarily stored corresponding to the number of times it started), the number of times a small win was won (total number of wins by summing the number of times each type of win was won), etc. For each item, Stores time-saving setting information (the number of times the conditions for ending the time-saving state are satisfied) and update information for each item during the period when the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it was actually executed). configured to be
In the fourth control example, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, it is possible to determine the end condition that is more likely to be satisfied than other end conditions from among a plurality of end conditions, or to determine whether each end condition is satisfied. It is configured to determine the number of remaining executions until the execution. Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information is calculated, It may be configured to display the progress degree of time saving by a numerical value (for example, percentage).
In addition, in the fourth control example, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times it has already been executed (the number of fluctuations, the number of winnings)), Without being limited to this, it may be configured to calculate the remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and to store information indicating the calculated remaining number of times in the time saving information update area 223g.
As described above, in the fourth control example, the time saving setting information and the update information are configured to be stored (stored) separately, but not limited to this, for example, stored as time saving setting information It may be configured to update the information directly. By comprising in this way, the capacity|capacitance of 223 g of time saving information update areas can be reduced.

The provisional winning determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (the stored winning information) before the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol is executed includes the winning information for winning the jackpot. When it is set to ON, it indicates that the stored winning information includes the winning information for winning a jackpot. The tentative hit determination flag 223h is set by the main controller 110 in the winning information-related process executed when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command acquired by the pre-reading process of the main controller 110. When it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information of the received winning information command, it is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is referred to in the winning information related process and set to ON, various determination processes for the subsequently received winning information command are skipped. It is also referred to in the effect setting process executed in the variable display setting process, and if it is determined that it is set to ON, the process for setting the display state display command indicating the state display mode is skipped. It is configured as follows.
As explained above, if the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information retained and stored at the end of the jackpot contains the winning information for winning the jackpot, After that, it is determined whether the winning information included in the newly received winning information command includes winning information for winning a jackpot, and whether or not the condition for ending the currently set game state is satisfied. It is configured not to perform discrimination. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state ends due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time saving state ends based on the winning information acquired after that. , configured to skip its unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the processing for determining the content of the winning information is executed when a new winning information command is received and when the jackpot game ends. As, for example, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to power failure etc., in the start-up process (main controller) 7 (see FIG. 176) of the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a A winning prize information command at the time of returning is set to indicate each stored winning information, and is configured to transmit all to the sound lamp control device 113, and the winning prize information command at the time of returning is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to execute the process of determining the content of the prize information described above when the information is received.
In addition, in the fourth control example, when a new prize information command is received or when a jackpot game ends, the process of determining the contents of the prize information is always executed, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured so that the content of the winning information is not determined when a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied. In this case, as the predetermined prohibition conditions, for example, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of performance modes, the performance mode prohibition condition that is established when one of the performance modes is set, or the special symbol Plural special pattern variations based on the big hit lottery result (win/fail judgment result) included in the prize information and the condition for prohibition of being stuck when the lottery result is a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) in succession (loss) other than the big hit. During the continuous performance prohibited condition that is established while the continuous performance that is executed across is being executed, and a predetermined period after the continuous performance is completed (for example, the special symbol fluctuation is executed twice) It is recommended to set a condition for prohibiting multiple occurrences, etc., which is satisfied during the period until

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a period in which an effect (so-called prefetch effect) corresponding to the content determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and a period in which it cannot be executed. Even if the look-ahead performance is not executed for the player, the expectation for the big win can be maintained. It should be noted that the frequency of determining the content of the prize information may be reduced when the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied, or the content of the prize information may be determined without fail when the prohibition condition is not satisfied. Instead of determining, the frequency of determining the contents of the winning information may be increased. Furthermore, it is preferable that the player does not know whether or not the prohibition condition described above is satisfied.
The provisional working hours information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing working hours information (temporary working hours information) updated in advance according to the winning information included in the winning information command. In the 4th control example, with reference to the provisional working hours information stored in this provisional working hours information update area 223i, the timing at which the working hours saving state ends can be determined in advance.
As described above, if the winning information contained in the received winning information command satisfies the time-saving end condition, the winning information contained in the newly received winning information command after that will be a big hit. It is configured so as not to determine whether winning prize information is included or whether or not the condition for ending the currently set game state is satisfied. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state ends due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time saving state ends based on the winning information acquired after that. , configured to skip its unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.
The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations in the special symbol has reached a predetermined number with respect to the end condition established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and is set to ON. , It is for showing that the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times.

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON according to the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and by configuring so as to vary the performance mode according to the setting state of the flag, Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the presentation suggesting the end timing of the time saving state.
In addition, in the 4th control example, although it comprises so that the progress condition until the completion|finish condition of time saving is satisfied may be discriminate|determined by two steps, you may provide more steps. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) that can identify the state is provided every time the variation of the special symbol is executed 10 times in the state where the time saving state is set, and the production mode is changed according to the flag (counter). It should be configured so as to be variable.
The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of special symbols has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end conditions established based on the winning of a small prize by lottery of special symbols, and is turned on. is set to indicate that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number.
The time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the change before the time saving state ends (the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed, and when it is set to ON, the time saving state ends This indicates that the previous variation to be executed is executed. Specifically, among the end conditions of the time saving state that are set multiple times, when the period until the time saving end condition set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied (number of fluctuations) is 1 time remaining set to on. By executing the variation display setting process (see FIG. 66) in a state where the time saving end before variation flag 223n is set to ON, it is possible to determine that the variation is the final variation of the time saving state, and the time saving state A production corresponding to the final variation can be executed.

In addition, in the fourth control example, in order to determine that the variation before the end of the time saving is completed (executed), the change flag 223n before the end of the time saving is set. For example, a configuration is provided in which the winning prize information of the second special symbol can be retained and stored, and the prefetching process (see FIG. 111) is configured to be executed even for the retained winning prize information, and the result of the prefetching process is It is configured to receive a winning command shown, and based on the received winning command, it is configured to determine in advance the winning information of the second special symbol for winning a small hit. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when the variation before the special symbol variation in which the small hit winning that the end condition of the time saving state is established is performed is performed, the time saving before end variation flag 223n is turned on. configuration can be added. Thus, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time saving end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the special symbol variation immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied.
The state effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries used when setting the effect mode of various effects executed by the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 It is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. A detailed configuration is omitted because it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above.
In this way, in the case of selecting a specific display mode according to specific regularity (results of determination of suitability, setting status of various flags), selection is made based on a randomly updated value (value of the state effect counter 223o). By configuring so as to further classify the display mode to be displayed in detail, along with diversification of the display mode, the current game state by the selected display mode (the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81) It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping (the update status of the time saving state).
The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 165 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 165, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as described above, during the normal state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the first ball entrance 64 is aimed at the special 1 (special figure) 1) A game is played. Here, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed, first, determination of time-saving winning is performed. Then, when it is determined that the time-saving winning is not determined in the determination of the time-saving winning, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol lottery is executed while the game state is the normal state. When the first special symbol jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.
Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it shifts to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and if a big win is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the big win is completed. It consists of This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 147, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is in a normal state (during a normal game), even if a right-handed game is played, a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Since it is configured so as not to (hardly) to do so, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbols in the normal state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and the player who has committed the fraudulent act is made to play an advantageous game. This is a measure to prevent As will be described later, in the fourth control example, a lottery (game) in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is configured to be performed during the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol lottery may be conducted by cheating. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.
Furthermore, in the fourth control example, since there is no configuration for holding and storing the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640), for example, During the time-saving state (while the electric accessory 640a is likely to be moved to the projecting position), the winning information of the second special symbol is retained and stored, and based on the retained and stored winning information, the winning information of the second special symbol during the normal state is stored. A lottery (fluctuation) is never executed. As a result, when a normal game is played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state.

On the other hand, if the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery that is executed with the normal state set (if it is determined that the time reduction is elected by the judgment of the time reduction election), the jackpot judgment is executed in the time reduction state. be done. When the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination executed in this state, the time saving state is set at a rate of 100% after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the time reduction election is determined by the determination of the time reduction election executed in the first special symbol lottery, the time reduction state ends at the timing when the first special symbol variation for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is started. However, since the normal state is set, the game in the normal state (left-handed game) is continued.
When the time saving state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened by the opening operation (projection operation) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640. Since the time-saving state is set so that the time-saving state continues for a period in which the ball can be entered, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is performed.
Here, when a small win is won (winning probability 140/1000) by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 is turned on. is detected (by the ball passing through the specific area), a jackpot game is started. In the fourth control example, when a big winning game is set (executed) via a small winning game, after the big winning game ends, the time saving state is always set as the gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win via the small winning game from feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game according to the small winning type (small winning A, B) set when winning the small winning by lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to execute small winning games with different possibilities (possibility of V switch 650e3 detecting a ball).

In addition, in the fourth control example, as an end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the time-saving state set based on the jackpot election, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) (lottery number of times ) is established when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times) (1st time saving end condition) and special design (2nd special design) As a result of the lottery, the number of winnings won in the small hit ( An operation count end condition (second time reduction end condition) that is established when the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small hit reaches the specified number of operations is set.
In addition, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to a small winning type (small winning game to be executed) set when winning a small winning.
Then, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before the first time saving end condition or the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the special symbol jackpot lottery is elected (per type Winning), or win a small win in a lottery of special patterns, and pass the ball through a specific area during a small winning game according to the winning small win (small winning game according to the small winning type) to win a big win. When acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.
On the other hand, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, the above-mentioned first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of special symbol fluctuations) or the second before acquiring one type or two types When any of the time-saving end conditions (end condition corresponding to small winning (operation of V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the game state is shifted (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example configured in this way has the possibility of terminating the time saving state when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed when the time saving state is set. It is possible to provide the player with both (the possibility that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of obtaining two kinds of wins. Therefore, the player's interest in the game (lottery for the second special symbol) to be executed during the time saving state can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
Furthermore, in the fourth control example, as shown in FIG. 165, when the time saving state is set and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the state in which the left-handed game is performed, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved memories) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. A jackpot is won when the number is four (4), and a jackpot is won in ``first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time saving state'' that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Even so, it is possible to suppress providing the player with a result that is disadvantageous to the player.
<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 166 to 179. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in the fourth control example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing (main controller) 7 and main processing will be described. Of the control processes executed by main controller 110 in the fourth control example, the same processing contents as in the second control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.
FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S10101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S10102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in the fourth control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the fourth control example), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. The value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203 .
Furthermore, the value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, the small per type counter C5, the time saving type selection counter CC1 (not shown) Update Execute (S10103). Specifically, the value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5, the time reduction type selection counter CC1 (not shown) are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively, in the fourth control example). Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CC1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.
Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S10104). After that, the starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S10105). The details of the special symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S10106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 accompanies the passage of the ball. Through gate passage processing is executed (S10107). It should be noted that the detailed contents of the start winning process (S10105), the normal symbol variation process (S10106), and the through gate passage process (S10107) are as follows: the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, and the , through-gate passage processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the through gate passing process (S10107), the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S10108). After that, the V passing process accompanying the winning to the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S10109). Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S10110), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S10111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the special symbol variation process (S10104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S10104). This special symbol variation process (S10104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.
In this special symbol variation process (S10104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S10201). During the special symbol jackpot includes a period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). A period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), a period during the jackpot game (round game period), and a round game period are completed, and then a lottery (fluctuation) of new special symbols is started. and a grace period (ending period).
Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If it is not in the special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S10201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b It is determined whether or not the display mode is fluctuating (S10202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not fluctuating (S10202: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d The value (N1) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are obtained (S10203).
Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol reserved ball for starting the variation (lottery) is secured. , the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 pending ball number command) is set (S10206). After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). Thereafter, time-saving lottery processing (S10208), special symbol determination processing (S10209), and special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S10210) are executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), the second special symbol reserved ball to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is selected. Since it is not secured, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).
When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is secured. Since it is not in the state, this processing for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, in a state in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol for starting the variation (lottery) is secured. If there is, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation ( Toku-zu 1 reserved ball number command) is set (S10213). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). Thereafter, time-saving lottery processing (S10208), special symbol determination processing (S10209), and special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S10210) are executed, and this processing ends.
In the process of S10202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S10211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the variation time has not passed (S10215: No), that is, if the current period is during the variation period of the special symbol, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10215: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set. (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S10252), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fourth control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). In this way, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed momentarily, the first display is surely stop-displayed to the player. The contents of the design can be recognized.
In the fourth control example, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above, but other configurations may be used, such as the first symbol. In the case of performing a blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state to indicate that the is changing, the lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) is longer A long period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol performed by the special symbol determination process (see S10209 in FIG. 169) (S10218). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot medium flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), and the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0. (S10220), the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special figure confirmation command is set (S10221), and this process is terminated.
That is, in the fourth control example, as explained in the processing of S10220, when the special symbol jackpot is won, after the special symbol variation is completed (the final symbol display is completed), It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing until the jackpot game is started. In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described fourth control example, the special symbol (first symbol ), for example, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special design that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special design is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the confirmation display starts). You may end the time saving state. In addition, the time saving state may be ended at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period of time after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened). Then, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.
In addition, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (timing to satisfy the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) is selected from the above-mentioned multiple timings. Only one may be set in advance, or the time saving state may be terminated at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.
By configuring in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving state ends for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the specified number of times ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the normal state is set after reaching 100 times or the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied for each of the multiple jackpot types (the timing at which the time-saving state ends when the jackpot is won), special symbols based on the end timing of the time-saving state It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result). In addition, if the player identifies the timing when the time saving state ends in part of the timing when the time saving end condition set for each of the multiple jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol will be A timing for notifying a player of a big win, that is, a time-saving end timing dedicated to a big win at which a time-saving state ends only when a time-saving end condition established by winning a big win is established may be provided.
By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. Also, in order to achieve such an effect more, the time saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot mentioned above is set in the first half period of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation. Good to configure.
On the other hand, in the process of S10218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). In the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10222: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S10223), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10222: No), the small win start setting process (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.
As described above, in the special symbol variation process (S10104 in FIG. 167) of the fourth control example, the first It is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (fluctuation) condition for 2 special symbols is established (processing of S10204 in FIG. 167). This is because the second special symbol, which is an advantageous special symbol for the player, can be varied (easily varied) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and cannot be varied (easily changed) when the normal state is set. This is because the second special symbol that is difficult to change) is configured to be a special symbol that is more difficult to execute a change (lottery) than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by any chance, the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are set at the same time (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (Fig. 166). (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of reference)), the variation of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol, which is difficult to perform variation (lottery) As a result, the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol so that it is easier for the player to win the lottery result. so that it becomes easy), the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 166) (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of ), when the variation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the first special symbol is prioritized over the second special symbol. There was a problem that it gave more discomfort.
On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when executing the process of starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value added to the player is high (the winning probability of the small hit is the first special symbol The lottery (fluctuation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the fourth control example), which is higher than the symbol and is difficult to actually execute the lottery (fluctuation), is configured to be preferentially (firstly) discriminated. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-described problem can be suppressed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the process content of the time saving lottery process (S10208) will be described. Figure 168 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S10208). As shown in FIG. 168, the time saving lottery process (S10208) is the condition for executing the time saving lottery with respect to the time saving lottery process (see S8006 in FIG. 106) in the second control example described above, and the time saving lottery lottery. The difference is that the data table referred to when determining the result (whether or not the short-time winning) is different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
When the time saving lottery process (S10208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal state (S18103), and if it is determined that it is not a normal state (is a time saving state) (S18103: No ), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S18103: Yes), the lottery result (judgment result of time reduction winning) is acquired based on the time reduction random number table 202fh (S18104), and it is determined whether the time reduction has been won (S18105 ), when it is determined that the time saving has been won (S18105: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 1 based on the contents defined in the time saving type selection table 202fi (S18106), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined that the time reduction has not been elected in the process of S18105 (S18105: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the fourth control example, regardless of the special symbol type, the execution condition for time-saving winning determination is the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the normal state. The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to set two types of game states, a normal state and a time saving state. That is, in the fourth control example, in all special symbol lotteries executed in a state where the time saving state is not set, determination of time saving winning is performed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while always having the possibility of setting the time saving state.
It should be noted that, as described above, in the fourth control example, if the time-saving election is won in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state that is set based on the time-saving election is the period during which the jackpot determination is performed in the special symbol lottery. Since it is configured so that only the number is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the short-time winning is won unless the jackpot is won.
Next, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S10209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S10209). The special symbol determination process (S10209) is a process executed after the time-saving lottery process (see S10208 in FIG. 168) is executed in the above-described special symbol variation process (see S10104 in FIG. 167), and a special symbol lottery. A process for performing a big hit determination (small hit determination) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 169, this special symbol determination process (S10209) is a process executed when a small hit is determined with respect to the special symbol determination process (see S251 in FIG. 105) in the second control example described above. are the same except for the addition of A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 169, for convenience of explanation, the same processing contents as the above-described special symbol determination processing (see S251 in FIG. 105) are denoted by different reference numerals, but the processing with the same description contents is the same processing. The content is identical.

When the special symbol determination process (S10209) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S10301), and the lottery result (big hit (small hit) determination result) is acquired (S10302), and it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot winning (S10303). When it is determined that the jackpot is won (S10303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to the jackpot (S10304), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the first The jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the design display device 37 is set (S10305), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not elected in the process of S10303 (S10303: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is elected (S10306), and if it is determined that the small hit is elected (S10306 : Yes), the lottery result of the special design is set to a small hit (S10307), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 A small winning pattern is set (S10308), and this process is terminated.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the processing of S10305 and the processing of S10308, when the time reduction is elected in the special symbol lottery, and when the time reduction is not elected, different winning patterns are set. Configure. That is, on the first pattern display device 37, as a display mode of the special pattern for showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, the presence or absence of the time-saving winning and the presence or absence of the winning (big win, small win) are combined. It is configured so that the mode can be set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10210) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10210). As shown in FIG. 170, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10210) is configured to execute the update process (S8253) before setting the start of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be terminated before the special symbol variation is started.

Furthermore, in this fourth control example, the update process (S8253) is performed after the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is selected until the special symbol variation is actually started. configured to run. Therefore, since it is possible to select the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the game state at the time the special symbol lottery is executed, the update process (S8253 ) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the current game state by the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be performed.
Further, even if the special symbol variation is executed after the time saving state is finished, if the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is time saving. Since it can be determined using a data table referred to during the state, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a privilege that can be given only based on a special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the privilege Dedicated performance can be smoothly executed only by prescribing the dedicated performance for indicating that is given corresponding to the variation pattern of the special pattern variation selected during the time saving state.
In addition, without being limited to this, for example, the update process (S8253) may be executed before the process of S8252 in FIG. 170 is executed. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to end the time saving state before selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, for example, different variation patterns can be selected between the normal state and the time saving state. In the selected pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress the determination whether or not the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state based on the selected variation pattern.
When the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, that is, whether or not a special symbol big hit is set (S8201). In the processing of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection table 202fb (see FIG. 158(a)) ( S8251), the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S8201: No), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, that is, the special symbol small hit It is determined whether or not it is set (S8209). When it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is set in the process of S8209 (S8209: Yes), the small hit type is determined with reference to the small hit type selection table 202ff (see FIG. 159) (S8254). , S8203.
Also, in the process of S8209, if it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is not set, that is, the deviation of the special symbol is set (S8209), the process of S8254 is skipped, and the process of S8203 is performed. Transition.
In the processing of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203). Next, the current game state (normal state, time saving state) is specified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the specified game state is read from the variation pattern selection table 202fd ( S8252).
Then, based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the data table of the variation pattern selection table 202fd (see FIG. 160 (a)) read in the process of S8252, a variation pattern is selected (S8205 ), based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205, to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main control unit 110 Main processing External output processing Voice lamp control Output to device 113 .

Next, a special figure stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), and update processing is executed (S8253). A detailed description of the update process (S8253) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbols (S8208), and ends this process. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the processing contents of the update processing (S8253) executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see S10210 in FIG. 170) will be described. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the update processing (S8253). In this update process (S8253), similar to the update process (see S253 in FIG. 108) in the second control example described above, the processing for updating the information on the end condition for ending the gaming state (time saving state) and , a process for determining whether the updated information satisfies the end condition, and a process for terminating the game state (time saving state) when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied are executed.
As shown in FIG. 171, in the fourth control example, since the game state is configured to be able to set the normal state and the time saving state, in the update process (S8253), time saving for ending the time saving state It is configured to update information related to termination conditions and execute processing based on the updated information. In other words, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the process of ending the time saving state based on the determination result (when performing the determination of whether the time saving end condition is satisfied ) is executed to clear the values of various counters referred to.
This update process (S8253) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 167) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166), updates the number of time reduction, and sets the game state to the normal state. It is a process for

When the update process (S8253) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S10601). In the process of S10601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S10601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.
In the process of S10603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S10603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 177) described later, the voice lamp control device 113.
After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and the small hit A counter 203fg and the small hit B counter 203fh are set to 0 (S10606 ). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S10607), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 167).

As described above, in the fourth control example, whether or not the time saving end condition (variation count end condition) established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is established is determined by the update process (see FIG. 171), and the special Whether or not the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition) established based on the number of winnings of the small winnings of the pattern is configured to be determined by the time-saving update process for small winnings (see FIG. 173). Then, in any process, if any of the time saving end conditions are established among the time saving end conditions that are set, various counters for indicating the update status of the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end conditions is set to a value (0) for indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when any time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to unify the processing contents for ending the time saving state.
In the fourth control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, the value indicating each time saving end condition is set to each counter at the timing when the time saving state is set, and each time saving When the time saving information corresponding to the end condition is determined, the value of the various counters is subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. In addition, when the time-saving state is set, the value of various counters is set to 0, and when the corresponding time-saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and the counter value after the addition is the time-saving end. You may comprise so that a time saving state may be complete|finished when it discriminate|determines that it is the value which shows conditions. In other words, means for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established, and in the state where the time-saving state is set, time-saving information corresponding to various time-saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small winnings, etc.) is updated. It is sufficient if the configuration is provided with updating means.
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the small hit start setting process (S10223) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S10223). This small hit start setting process (S10223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 167) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166), small hit type (small hit A, B) Based on, the start of the small winning game is set, and the processing for updating the time saving information according to the winning small winning (update processing for the winning number end condition) is executed.
Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 moves to a specific area (V By passing the winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game is finished.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability. Although the details will be described later, in the fourth control example, different small winning games are configured to be executed corresponding to the small winning types (small winning A, B) set when winning the small winning. Possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game is different according to each small winning type.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the possibility (expectation) of executing (setting) the big winning game (per two types) by the small winning game to be executed, so that the small winning game for the player Since it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the player wins the prize, but also in the type of the small prize won, the amusement of the game can be improved.
When the small hit start setting process (S10223) is executed, first, an open scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10401). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203fd (S10402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202ff, the V passing big hit type (jackpot game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A (15 rounds with a short time), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (5 rounds with a short time). Determine (see FIG. 159). That is, in the fourth control example, the content of the jackpot game (per two types) that is set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small win game, and the jackpot (one type) by lottery of special symbols In order to execute the same jackpot game as the jackpot game that is executed when winning a win), when winning two types of wins (when a ball passes through a specific area), it is set for one type. It is configured such that the type of jackpot (jackpot A or B) to be executed is set according to the type of small hit.
In this way, when two types of winning are obtained, a jackpot type is set, and a process of starting a jackpot game based on the set jackpot type is executed, thereby winning one type and two types. The processing related to the jackpot game can be shared between the case of winning and the processing, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the fourth control example, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when one type is won or only when two types are won. It may be configured to execute different jackpot game processing for winning seeds and winning two seeds.
Returning to FIG. 172, the description is continued. When the processing of S10402 is completed, the start of the small hit is then set based on the small hit type (S10403), and the small hit start flag 203fb and the small hit middle flag 203fc are set to ON (S10404). After that, small hit for time saving update processing is executed (S10405), this processing ends. This time-saving update process for a small hit (S10405) is a process for updating time-saving information corresponding to the winning number end condition, which is the end condition of a time-saving state that can be established when a small win is won, and updating time-saving information. When the condition for ending the winning number of times is satisfied by doing so, the processing for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 173 do.
Here, with reference to FIG. 173, the small winning time saving update process (S10405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning time saving update process (S10405). This small hit time saving update process (S10405) is a process executed in the small hit start setting process (see Figure 172) of the special symbol variation process (see Figure 167) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 166). It is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small hit, and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.
In the small winning time saving update process (S10405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time saving state. In the process of S10501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S10501: No), since it is a state in which a small hit is won in a game state other than the time saving state, the time saving This process is entirely skipped in order to update the information, and this process ends. In addition, in the fourth control example, it is configured so as not to win a small hit (so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is not executed) except in the state where the time saving state is set. When it is determined that the time saving state is not set in the process of S10501, an error command for executing error notification (abnormality notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S10501, the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S10501: Yes), then the small hit that was elected this time It is determined whether the small hit type is "small hit A" (S10502). Here, in the process of S10502, the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa is read out in the process of S10310 of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 169) and determination is performed.
In the processing of S10502, if it is determined that the small hit type of this time is "small hit A" (S10502: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit A counter 203fg (S10503), and the small hit A after subtraction It is determined whether the value of the counter 203fg is 0 (S10504), and if it is determined to be 0 (S10504: Yes), the time-saving end condition (the winning number of times end condition corresponding to the small hit A ) is established, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which measures the period until the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established, is set to 0 (S10505), and the conditions for ending the number of winnings are measured. Each value of the A counter 203fg and the small winning B counter 203fh is set to 0 (S10506), and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507).
By executing the processing of S10505 to S10507 described above, when one time saving end condition is satisfied among the time saving end conditions that are set in plural, for measuring the period until the other time saving end condition is satisfied Since the value of the counter can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, after the time saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state), the time saving information is updated. Processing (processing for updating the values of the small winning A counter 203fg, the small winning B counter 203fh, and the time saving counter 203h) can be reliably prevented from being executed. Therefore, execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.
In addition, in the fourth control example, when any one of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is met, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time-saving end conditions are set to 0. Since it is only configured to be set to (value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied), after the time saving state ends, it is determined which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended in the previous time saving state. Although it is not possible, for example, a storage means that can store the satisfied time saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time saving end conditions that have been met in the past and the number of times they have been met may be configured to be distinguishable.

By configuring in this way, for example, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishments, and the player is established based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) an easy time-saving end condition. Furthermore, the update status of time saving information corresponding to other time saving end conditions when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, when the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0, the small hit A counter 203fg, the small hit B counter 203fh), and the time saving end condition that is the most difficult to be satisfied, that is, at the time when one time saving end condition is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, it has time saving information with the largest value. It may be configured to determine the end condition.
When the processing of S10507 is finished, next, the remaining time reduction command corresponding to the value of each small hit counter that has been subtracted is set (S10508), the state command indicating the current game state is set (S10509), and this processing exit. Here, the commands set in S10508 and S10509 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . The voice lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving command, and sets the state display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (period until the time saving state ends). Also, the current game state is grasped based on the received state command.
On the other hand, in the process of S10504, if it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203fg is not 0 (S10504: No), since the time saving state does not end by this small hit winning, S10505 for ending the time saving state ∼S10507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10508.
Returning to the processing of S10502 described above, the description continues. In the process of S10502, when it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit A"("small hit B") (S10502: No), next, the small hit won this time It is determined whether the small hit type is "small hit B" (S10510), and if it is determined to be "small hit B" (S10510: Yes), the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is subtracted by 1 ( S10511), after that, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the small hit B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512).

In the process of S10512, when it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512: Yes), the time-saving end condition (the winning number of times end condition corresponding to the small hit B) is established in this small hit election. Since it is the case where it did, it transfers to the process of S10505 mentioned above, and performs the process for ending a time saving state.
On the other hand, in the process of S10512, when it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is not 0 (1 or more) (S10512: No), the time saving state does not end by this small hit winning, so the time saving state The process of S10505 to S10507 for ending is skipped and the process proceeds to S10508.
In the process of S10510, if the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit B" (S10510: No), the time saving state does not end due to the small hit winning this time, so to end the time saving state The process of S10505 to S10507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10508.
As described above, in the fourth control example, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol that has been won as a small win has passed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small win is subtracted, and the time that is established based on the small win is reduced. It is configured to determine whether or not an end condition (winning number end condition) is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to terminate the time saving state according to the winning number of times termination condition before the small winning game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a large difference in the timing of ending the time saving state even when either the time saving end condition of the fluctuation frequency end condition or the winning number end condition is satisfied.

Specifically, in the fourth control example, when the fluctuation number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied, the final display of the special symbol (first symbol) is completed. When the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning number of times end condition, that is, the number of times a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, the special symbol ( The time saving state is ended at the start setting timing of the small winning game after the confirmation display of the first symbol).
In other words, even if any of the time saving termination conditions are established, the time saving state is terminated immediately after the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time saving end condition has been established and the time saving state set this time has ended. In addition, in order for the player to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. , For example, by setting to end the time saving state at the time of setting the small hit start (just before the small hitting game is started) as in the fourth control example, the time saving state immediately after the small hitting game is started It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not has ended.
In addition, in the fourth control example, even if any of the end conditions of the variable number of times end condition and the winning number of times end condition is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, substantially the same timing (a degree that is difficult for the player to determine) concept including the time difference), but other configurations may be used. The time saving state may be terminated immediately after the confirmation display, and when the condition for ending the winning times is established, the time saving state may be terminated after the small win game executed after the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed and displayed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the time-saving state during the period in which the small winning game is being executed.
Therefore, during the small winning game, the player cannot determine whether the time saving state has ended due to the winning of this small winning game, and until the small winning game ends (whether or not the two types of winning Until the game result is notified), it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the time saving state has ended. Further, as in the fourth control example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of obtaining two kinds of wins during the small win game, the player is notified whether or not the time-saving state has ended after the small win game ends. Is it based on the small winning that this small winning game ends the time saving state by configuring like this? Since the game is played while predicting that, it is possible to always aim for two kinds of wins willingly in the small win game executed during the time saving state.

Next, the V entrance passage processing (S10108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166).
In the V entrance passage processing (S10108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S11101). In the process of S11101, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is not turned on (S11101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S11101, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is ON (S11101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is open (S11102).
In the process of S11102, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is open (S11102: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S11103), and this process is terminated. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 177) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 165).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S11102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is issued. Set (S11104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned on (S11105), and the process ends.

Next, the V passage processing (S10109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the V passing process (S10109). This V passing process (S10109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166).
In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203ff is ON (S11201). In the process of S11201, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203ff is ON (S11201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that the V passage flag 203ff is not ON (S11201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S11202). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 or not. In the process of S11202, if it is determined that the vehicle does not pass through the V (S11202: No), the process ends.
In the processing of S11202, if it is determined that there is V passage (S11202: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the V passage valid period (S11203). When it is determined that it is during the V passage valid period (S11203: Yes), the V passage jackpot type value stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S11204), and the acquired V passage jackpot type is obtained. is set to ON (S11205). Then, a V passing command is set (S11206).
Next, the V passage flag 203ff is set to ON (S11207). After that, the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S11208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11203, if it is determined that it is not during the V passage valid period (S11203: No), an error command is set (S11209), and this process ends. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when it is not during the V passing valid period, it is considered that the ball has entered the V winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S11209, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.
Next, referring to FIG. 176, startup processing (main controller) 7 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing this start-up process (main controller) 7. As shown in FIG. This start-up process (main controller) 7 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial settings are executed upon power-on (S11401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (one second in the fourth control example) is executed. (S11402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S11403).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S11404), and if it is turned on (S11404: Yes), the process proceeds to S11415. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405), and if not stored (S11405: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.
If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S11406). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S11515 in FIG. 177, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S11415, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S11415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S11416, S11417).
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S11416, S11417) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S11416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S11417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S11410.
On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S11405: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S11407: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S11408). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S11409), and the process proceeds to S11410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .
In the processing of S11410, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is read (S11411), and the state command based on the read value is set (S11412). Then, the channel solenoid 209a is turned off (S11413). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S11414), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 177, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing (main controller) 7 described above will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S11501 to S11508 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S11511 and S11512 is executed in the remaining time.
In the main process (see FIG. 177), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166). External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S11501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S10101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 166) is determined. Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the special figure 1 pending ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 167) and the start winning process (see FIG. 45). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S11501), the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command (S11602), round number command (S11607), and ending command set in the jackpot control process (FIG. 178, S11504) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S11611). In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.
Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S11502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the fourth control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.
When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 (S11502) is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S11503), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot performance is executed. Or, a jackpot control process for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S11504). . In the jackpot control process (S11504), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the corresponding winning opening ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a prescribed number of balls have entered the V winning port 650 a of the winning device 650 . Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in the fourth control example, the jackpot control process (S11504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 177), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166).

Next, in the case of a small winning state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small winning, corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of V winning device 650 650a) is executed (S11505). In the small winning control process (S11505), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65 It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the V winning port 650 a of the winning device 650 . Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In addition, in the fourth control example, the small hit control process (S11505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 177), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166).
Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S11506). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S822 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 47), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S821 or S823 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.
Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S11507). In the first symbol display update process (S11507), when the variation pattern is set by the process of S8206 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 170), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at the devices 37a, 37b. In the fourth control example, among the LEDs of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red The green LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. The LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.
Note that the main process (see FIG. 177) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process (S11507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S8206 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 170) ends, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b (see FIG. 146) end the variable display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S10305 or S10308 of the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 169), stop symbol (first symbol) are stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.
Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S11508). In the second symbol display update process (S11508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S815 or the process of S816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 47), the second symbol display device 83 varies. Start display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S11508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 47), in the second symbol display device 83 The variation display being executed is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 47). Stop display (lighting display).
After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11509). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the fourth control example) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S11510). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S11510: Yes), the process proceeds to S11501, and the above-described processes after S11501 are repeatedly executed.
On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S11510: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S11511, S11512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S11511). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and each counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in the fourth control example). do. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S11502 (S11512).
Here, since the execution time of each process of S11501 to S11508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by using the remaining time to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (S11511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly.
In addition, in the processing of S11509, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S11509: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 49 has been executed, so the power-off process after S11513 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S11513), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S11514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S11515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S11516), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .
It should be noted that the process of S11509 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S11501 to S11508, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S11511 and S11512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. , the process can be started from the process of S11501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S11501 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process (main controller) 7. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S11401). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S11501. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S11504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S11504). This jackpot control processing (S11504) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 177). This is a process for opening or closing (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).
In the jackpot control process (FIG. 178, S11504), first, it is determined whether it is the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S11601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203j. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S10216) when the jackpot start is set by the processing of S10215 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 167). In the process of S11601, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON) (S11601: Yes), the opening command is set (S11602), then the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF (S11603), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S11601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF) (S11601: No), next, the current jackpot is in progress. (S11604). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included, and corresponds to the period during which the above-mentioned jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. In the processing of S11604, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is off) (S11604: No), this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S11604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k during the jackpot is set to ON) (S11604: Yes), various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot Determination processing (S11605 to S11612) is performed to determine whether it is time to execute

In the process of S11604, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S11604: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of a new round (S11605). In the process of S11605, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. In the processing of S11605, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S11605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V The V winning port 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S11606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S11607). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated.
The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 177) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.
Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of lotteries) during the execution of a plurality of jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during the jackpot game) When it is executed during a period in which the time saving state is repeatedly set, the number of rounds of the jackpot game continuously executed on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 is cumulatively displayed. . That is, the sound lamp control device 113 is a period setting means for setting a period (continuous chance period) during which it is determined that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 And, when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the number of round games (number of rounds) in the previously executed jackpot game is added to the number of round games (round number), and a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated round number accumulated by the round number accumulating means are transmitted to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. and a round cumulative number display control means for displaying on. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved. In this case, the cumulative number of rounds displayed can also be said to be a display mode in which the benefits are summarized.
On the other hand, in the process of S11605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S11605: No), then the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of variable winning device 65 or V of V winning device 650) It is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the prize winning opening 650a are met (S11608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) win the winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S11608, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is established (S11608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening The opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S11609), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not established (S11608: No), next, It is determined whether the present is the start timing of the ending effect (S11610). The start timing of the ending effect is that 15 rounds (final round game preset in this jackpot game) are completed, the open/close door 650f1 is closed, and the standby time (in the fourth control example, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect.
In the processing of S11610, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S11610: Yes), the ending command is set (S11611), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 177). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.
On the other hand, in the process of S11610, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S11610: No), in the process of S11612, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending effect (S11612). In the processing of S11612, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect is not reached (S11612: No), this processing is terminated.
In the process of S11612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S11612: Yes), then it is determined which of the jackpot types A to D is the jackpot type being executed (S11613). In the processing of this S11613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read.

Next, based on the read jackpot classification, corresponding time saving end conditions are set using the time saving grant table 202fe (S11614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R with short time) or jackpot B (5R with short time), set 100 to short time counter 203h, 1 to small hit A counter 203fg, and small hit B counter 203fh to 3 respectively. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving jackpot), 100 is set to the short-time counter 203h, 2 to the small-hit A counter 203fg, and 10 to the small-hit B counter 203fh.
In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot), it is a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that the value (time saving end condition) is not set. When the processing of S11614 described above is completed, next, a time saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the processing of S11614 is set (S11615).
The time saving setting information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 177) External output processing (S11501) It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time saving setting information command, it sets the time saving information indicating the time saving end condition of the current time saving state in the time saving information update area 223g and the temporary working time saving information update area 223i. Based on the time saving information set here and the update information of the time saving state updated based on the variation of the special pattern (lottery), the remaining number of time saving state (remaining condition) is determined, and based on the remaining number Various effects modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .
When the processing of S11615 is completed, next, a state command corresponding to the game state set after the big win is set (S11616), the end of the big win is set (S11617), and the flag 203k during the big win is set to OFF (S11618). ), the process ends.

As described above, in the fourth control example, it is configured to be able to set different termination conditions of the time saving state according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, in the fourth control example, compared to the case of winning the jackpot by lottery of the first special symbol, the case of winning the jackpot by lottery of the second special symbol is the termination condition of the time-saving state (time-saving end condition). It is configured to set a time-saving termination condition that is difficult to hold.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when winning for one type instead of for two types during the right-handed game while the time saving state is set.
In addition, in the fourth control example, the same time-saving end condition is set for the jackpot types (jackpots A and B) set when the jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbols. , For example, it may be configured to set a time-saving end condition that is more difficult to be established when the jackpot type is jackpot A, without being limited to that. Also, some of the plurality of time-saving end conditions may be set so that the big win A is more likely to be established, and the other conditions are more likely to be established for the big win B.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), in the fourth control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the change number end condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (end based on the value of the time saving counter 203h condition), and a winning number end condition (end condition based on the value of each small win counter) relating to the number of times a small win is won as a result of the lottery of special symbols.

In addition, it is configured to set end conditions corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of winning a small win as the end conditions for the number of times of winning. By configuring in this way, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times) for the player, which small winning game corresponding to which small winning type is executed, and how much longer It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state ends with.
In addition, in the fourth control example, it is configured to set only the number of fluctuations "100 times" of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the condition for ending the number of variations, but depending on the type of jackpot Different fluctuation count end conditions may be set. In addition, as the fluctuation number end condition, a first special symbol fluctuation measuring means for measuring only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is provided, and when the measurement result of the first special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result, it is established. A first special symbol variation end condition and a second special symbol variation measuring means for measuring only the number of variations of the second special symbol are provided, and established when the measurement result of the second special symbol variation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. A second special symbol variation end condition may be provided.
Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the end condition based on the measurement result of the counter (small hit A counter 203fg, small hit B counter 203fh) corresponding to each small hit type is set as the winning number end condition. However, without being limited to this, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times that a small win is won, or a predetermined number of a plurality of (3 or more) small win types Means for counting and measuring the number of times the (two) small winning games for which the small winning types are set may be provided, and the end condition may be set based on the measurement result of the means.
In addition, in the fourth control example, it is configured to set the time-saving end condition for all the types of small hits that can be set at the time of winning the small win, but not limited to this, how many times at the time of winning the small win Even if it is set, the small winning type Z may be settable as a small winning type for which the time saving end condition cannot be established. As a result, even if the player grasps that the small win has been won during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is coming to an end due to the small win this time.

In addition, when the above-described small winning type Z is provided, it is preferable to perform a small winning game having the same contents as the small winning game in which the winning number end condition is set. By configuring in this way, even if the game contents of the small winning game executed during the time saving state are identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is nearing the end due to the small winning game this time. .
In this way, by determining whether a small win has been won or by determining the game content of the small win game executed based on the winning of a small win, that is, the game of the pachinko machine 10 By discerning the content, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end), so that the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end) Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly interested. In the fourth control example, the contents of the effect control performed by the third symbol display device 81 will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later.
Next, the small hit control process (S11505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing this small hit control process (S11505). This small winning control process (S11505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 177), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, execution of various effects according to the small winning, correspondence This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650).
In the small hit control process (FIG. 179, S11505), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S11701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fb is set to ON by the processing of S10404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 172), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S11701, when the special symbol small winning is started (S11701: Yes), an opening command is set (S11702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S11703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11701, when the small winning of special symbols is not started (S11701: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S11704). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small winning game of the special symbol is included. Determination of S11704 is determined by analyzing whether the flag 303fc is set to ON during the small hit. In the processing of S11704, if it is determined that the special symbols are not in the middle of a small hit (S11704: No), this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S11704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of a small hit (S11704: Yes), the process of S11705 is executed. In the process of S11705, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening (S11705). In the process of S11705, if it is determined that it is time to open the V winning opening (S11705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg ( S11706), and it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707).
In the process of S11707, if it is determined that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11707 that this is the fifth or tenth release timing (S11707: Yes), then in the process of S11708 it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON. (S11708), when it is determined that it is not on (is off) (S11708: No), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa is read (S11709), then the read small hit An instruction command corresponding to the type is set (S11710).
As the instruction command set in the processing of S11710, for example, a small hit (for example, a small hit A) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the small hit game as the small hit type, and a ball specified during the small hit game An instruction command is set for differentiating the display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on a small win that is difficult to pass through the area (for example, a small win B).

Returning to FIG. 179, the description continues. In the process of S11705, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a (S11705: No), is the closing condition of the V winning opening 650a established, that is, is it the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a? It discriminates (S11711). When it is determined that it is time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711: Yes), the V winning opening 650a is closed (S11712), and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S11711, if it is determined that the current time is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S11711: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S11713). In the process of S11713, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S11713: Yes), the ending command is set (S11714), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 177). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.
On the other hand, in the process of S11713, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S11713: No), in the process of S11715, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S11715). In the process of S11715, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S11715: No), this process ends.
In the processing of S11715, if it is determined that it is time to end the ending effect (S11715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S11716), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S11716: Yes), sets an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe (S11717), sets the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot middle flag 203k to ON (S11718), and sets the V flag 203fe It is set to OFF (S11719), the V passage flag 203ff is set to OFF (S11720), the small hit middle flag 203fc is set to OFF (S11721), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the contents of control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S14983). In this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S14983), in order to set the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state, the effect determined by referring to the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa A process using the mode (see S19502) is executed.
When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S14983) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (S19501). When it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S19501: Yes), the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa (see FIG. 164) is referred to determine the notification mode (S19502). Then, a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined in the process of S19502 is set (S19503), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S19501, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S19501: No), the process of S19502 is skipped, the process of S19503 described above is executed, and this process ends.
As described above, in the fourth control example, in one special symbol lottery, both the judgment of winning the jackpot and the judgment of the short-time winning are configured to be executable, and the big win and the short-time are overlapped. It has a different technical idea from the other control examples in that it is configured to be able to give a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the player wins the prize, but the technical idea unique to this fourth control example is It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in other control examples. In addition, even when a game state other than the normal state is set, it may be configured to be able to execute determination of time-saving winning.
In addition, in the fourth control example, when the process related to the special symbol lottery is executed, the process of determining the time-saving winning is executable before the process of determining the big hit winning, and when the time-saving winning is made. , The time saving state is set before the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed, and the time saving state is set between the judgment of the jackpot winning and the start of the special symbol variation for showing the judgment result. configured to terminate. In other words, the time saving state can be set only for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, like the conventional pachinko machine 10, the time saving state can be used for a purpose different from the case of setting the time saving state for the purpose of facilitating the execution of the special symbol lottery. A variety of games can be provided to the player.
In addition, a configuration other than the configuration described in the fourth control example is used as a configuration that enables setting of the time saving state only for the purpose of changing the game state when the judgment of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is executed. Alternatively, for example, the time saving state is set at the timing when the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and the time saving state is terminated after the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed in the next special symbol lottery. It may be configured to allow
In this case, when the right to execute the special symbol lottery (special figure pending) is acquired, the period in which the time saving state is set is momentary, so as in the fourth control example, the jackpot in the special symbol lottery A time-saving state can be set for the purpose of changing the game state when determination of winning is executed. On the other hand, if you have not acquired a special drawing reservation, the time saving state will continue until the next special drawing drawing is executed, so it is possible to set a period that makes it easy to execute the special drawing drawing. becomes. Therefore, the next special symbol lottery can be easily executed only for the player who cannot smoothly execute the special symbol lottery.
In addition, in this fourth control example, it is possible to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning in one special symbol lottery, and when the double winning is made, it is more advantageous to the player than when the double winning is not made. However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to provide a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player in the case of double winning than in the case of non-overlapping winning.

In addition, as the determination that can be repeatedly elected, not only the determination of jackpot winning, the determination of time-saving winning, but also the determination of time-saving end condition establishment, and the determination of falling lottery winning may be used. In other words, when a plurality of types of judgments can be executed based on the establishment of a specific execution trigger, and the combination of the plurality of types of judgment results becomes a predetermined combination, a combination different from the predetermined combination is obtained. What is necessary is just to constitute so that a privilege different from the case where it becomes may be provided. In addition, in the fourth control example, if you hit the left in the time-saving game state, the small hit will not occur, so the time-saving state will easily continue for a long time, while if you hit the right, the small win will occur with a high probability. Since the time-saving end condition is likely to be established in a relatively short period of time, the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the fourth control example tend to continue for a long time in the advantageous predetermined game state in the 58th control example described later. This is another form of the game method and the game method in which the advantageous predetermined game state is difficult to continue for a long time.
<Modified Example of Game Board Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, a modified example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the second control example to the fourth control example described above, a left-handed game is executed to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and when the time saving state is set, the ball is entered. It has a game board 13 capable of executing a right-handed game for entering a game ball into a second ball entry port 640 which makes it easier to play. That is, the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of switching between the game for executing the first special symbol lottery and the game for executing the second special symbol lottery according to the game state has been described.
On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 181, in the normal state, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by executing the left-handed game, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. By executing the right-handed game, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 1641, and the second special symbol lottery can be executed. By configuring in this way, when the player selects the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) in a state where the same game state is set (operating the operation handle 21 to adjust the firing intensity By doing), since it is possible to execute a special symbol lottery of any special symbol type, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game.
Next, novel game features using the game board 13 shown in FIG. 181 will be described.

<Playability 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 having a game property used in the fourth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured so that the jackpot is won at the same selection ratio, and in addition, the second In one special pattern lottery, determination of time-saving winning is executable in addition to big winning, and determination of small winning is executable in addition to big winning in second special symbol lottery. Then, when the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning, the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 1640, the right-handed game is executed, and the big winning game is played by the small winning. To make a target game executable.
By configuring in this way, in the normal state, by the left-handed game, aiming to set the time saving state via the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, or via the time saving winning of the first special symbol A game (first game) aiming to set a time-saving state through a game (first game) and a right-handed game aiming to set a time-saving state via a jackpot winning of a second special symbol, or a second special symbol The player can select a game (second game) aiming at setting a time-saving state via winning a small prize.
In this case, for example, the time saving state (second time saving) that is set when the time saving is won makes it easier for the time saving end condition to be satisfied, and at a rate of about 50% when the second time saving is set, the second time saving , the jackpot game is executed via the small winning lottery, and the probability of short winning in the first special pattern lottery is higher than the probability of winning the small winning in the second special pattern lottery. good.
By configuring in this way, the game determines whether to execute the first game or the second game in order to execute the game process in which the big winning game is executed via the small winning of the second special symbol lottery. It can be selected according to the taste of the person. In this case, in order to equalize the ratio of the number of winning balls in the case of shooting the prescribed number of game balls in the case of playing the left-handed game and the case of playing the right-handed game in the normal state, It is preferable to define the entrance rate of game balls into each ball entrance, the time saving winning probability, the small winning winning probability, and the execution probability of the big winning game at the time of winning the small winning. As a result, a fair game can be provided to the player regardless of which game is executed.

Furthermore, in this case, the period required for the ratio of the number of won prize balls to become equal in the case of shooting a specified number of game balls is varied between the first game and the second game, or the deviation of the number of won prize balls is set. It is good to configure it so that it is different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that matches the taste of the player.
<Other playability: Depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to set a time saving state that is more disadvantageous than the normal state and a time saving state that is advantageous>
As in the second control example described above, the time saving state (first time saving) set via the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the time saving state set via the time saving winning (second time saving) and can be set, and the second time saving A advantageous to the player and the second time saving B disadvantageous to the player can be set as the time saving type set when winning the second time saving.
When the second time saving A is set, similarly to the second control example described above, a time saving state is set in which the electric accessory 640a opens so that the special symbol lottery is more easily executed than in the normal state. . On the other hand, when the second time reduction B is set, the electric accessory 640a is opened by an opening operation in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 only at the same ball entrance rate as in the normal state. Opening operation is controlled.
And when the second time saving B is set, that is, in a game state other than the normal state, the time saving winning determination is not executed. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, it becomes a game in which the jackpot winning determination and the time saving winning determination are executed in the special symbol lottery, and when the second time saving B is set, the special symbol In the lottery, the game is such that only the determination of winning the jackpot is executed. That is, since the time saving winning determination is not executed for the normal state, the second time saving B is more disadvantageous to the player.

And, for the second time saving B, different times of special symbol lottery times (for example, 10 times, 50 times, 100 times) can be set as time saving end conditions.
Further, as the selection ratio of the lottery results in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the probability of winning the jackpot is assumed to be 1/200, and the probability of winning the short time is assumed to be 199/200. Then, when the time saving is won, the ratio of selecting the second time saving A is set to 10%, and the ratio of selecting the second time saving B is set to 90%. That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, if the lottery result is other than the jackpot lottery, it is constructed so that the time-saving lottery is always won.
By configuring in this way, the timing at which the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state is the special symbol lottery when the normal state is set when the time saving end condition of the second time saving B is established after the jackpot winning is finished, that is, , Only the special symbol lottery executed in a specific cycle. As a result, a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player (a special symbol lottery in a normal state) can be periodically executed (every time the end condition of the second time saving B is satisfied).
In addition, by configuring it so that different special symbol lottery times can be set as the time-saving end condition of the second time-saving B, it is possible to change the cycle in which the special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the player is surprised. We can provide you with exciting games.

In this case, as in the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. , The first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the time saving is different, the selection ratio of the time saving type set at the time of the time saving winning is different, and the second time saving B is set. It is preferable to configure so that the content of the time-saving end condition is different in each case.
By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery in the normal state) which is periodically executed and which is advantageous to the player is advantageous to the player depending on which type of special symbol is executed. The probability that the second time saving A is set can be varied.
Also, as the time saving end condition of the second time saving B, it is not a time saving end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, but is established when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific determination result (for example, a small hit) It is also possible to constitute so as to be able to set the time-saving end condition, and to be able to win a small win different from the big win and the time-saving win as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, when the second time saving B is set, the novel game property of aiming for a small winning by quickly ending the second time saving B and executing the special symbol lottery in the normal state. can be provided.
<Playability 2: Combination of game machines with simultaneous fluctuation specifications and short-time winning>
The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and when both special symbols win the jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation is stopped first (special A jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern on the side where the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and when the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol variation In a game machine configured to forcibly stop display in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost, it is possible to execute time-saving winning judgment in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Configure.

Then, similarly to the above-described second control example, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning decision) is executed before each special symbol variation is started, and when a time-saving winning is made, a time-saving state is set at the special symbol variation stop timing. In this case, if the first special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the first benefit is set to the time saving state, and if the second special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the second benefit different from the first benefit Time saving State is set.
Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first special symbol variation that is winning the time reduction, when the time reduction is won, the third benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit and the second benefit is given. Configure the state to be configurable. By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 constructed so as to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same time (in parallel), the timing of short-time winning in each special symbol lottery is achieved. It is possible to set a time saving state in which different benefits are given accordingly.
Regarding the privilege to be granted, for example, it may be a third privilege in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first privilege or the second privilege, or a special symbol lottery may be executed more easily than the first privilege or the second privilege. 3 It is good as a privilege.
Furthermore, the timing at which the time saving state of the third privilege is set may be the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed first among the special symbol variations that are executed in parallel, or the special symbol variation is stopped later. The displayed timing is also acceptable. Also, regardless of before or after the stop display timing, it may be the timing when the previously executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed, or the timing when the later-executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed. Moreover, the timing at which a specific special symbol type is stopped and displayed may be used.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is given to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is granted.
Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win that is advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). It is possible to be elected. In this case, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the lottery at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.
In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and to stop display (fixed display) the winning result before the winning result in the disadvantageous win. can.
<Regarding game machines that can set infinite number of times of time saving (number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during high probability state of normal symbols)>
In the above-described first control example, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends, the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) Although it was configured to be configurable, the period during which the time saving state continues is not limited to the time when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, but it may be set until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times or more. until you are elected).

For example, in the above-described first control example, as the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition for ending the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, the first number of fluctuations and the second number different from the first number of fluctuations The number of fluctuations is configured to be able to set one special pattern fluctuation number from a plurality of number of fluctuations including at least the number of fluctuations, and the number of fluctuations is 100 times for the first number of fluctuations, 200 times for the second number of fluctuations, and 300 times for the third number of fluctuations. , the fourth variation frequency is 500 times, and the fifth variation frequency is 10000 times (substantially until the next jackpot election).
As the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the time saving state is set, "100 remaining times" is displayed regardless of which end condition is set, and the number of fluctuations of 100 or more times (for example , fourth variation count) is set, an effect (for example, "+30 times") is executed to add a predetermined number of times to the value of the remaining variation count displayed at a predetermined timing.
By configuring in this way, even if the super chance mode (high probability state (variable probability state) of special symbols for a limited time until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times) is not set after the end of the jackpot game. Also, when the period until the special symbol variation is executed 10000 times is set as the period during which the time saving state continues, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 more than when the variable probability state is set. Since the easy state continues for a long period of time, although the probability of a big win with special symbols is low, it is possible to execute a big win lottery with more special symbols while maintaining the number of game balls acquired, and a big win can be achieved. Since the possibility of winning increases, even if the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player is expected to set the time saving state for a long period of time, thereby reducing the desire to play. It is also possible to make the player interested in how long the time saving state will continue, thereby improving the amusement of the game.
In addition, since the probability variable state is set by the game ball passing through the specific area during the jackpot game, and the time saving state is set when it does not pass, it becomes a high probability state of special symbols. A game in which the number of time reductions is 100 times, which is the period during which the high probability state of the pattern continues, and the low probability state of the special design is set, but the number of time reductions, which is the period during which the high probability state of the normal design continues. A player can be made to select which game state to play, a game in a time-saving state in which there is a possibility of being awarded 10,000 times at maximum.

<Regarding a game machine having a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a high probability state (probability variable state) of special symbols is set until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the jackpot game>
When a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a variable probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of special pattern fluctuations after the probability variable state is set is a specific number. In a gaming machine having a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a condition for ending a variable probability state is satisfied when reaching (for example, 100 times), a plurality of termination conditions are defined, and one termination condition is set from among them. Also good.
For example, as the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition for ending the probability variable state set after the end of the jackpot game, a first number of fluctuations and a second number of fluctuations different from the first number of fluctuations are included at least. 1 special symbol variation frequency can be set from the variation frequency, the first variation frequency is 100 times, the second variation frequency is 200 times, the third variation frequency is 300 times, and the fourth variation frequency is 500 times. , the number of times of the fifth variation is set to 10000 times (until the next big hit is substantially won).
Then, as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the variable probability state is set, "remaining 100 times" is displayed regardless of which end condition is set, and 100 times or more is displayed as the end condition. If the number of fluctuations (for example, the fourth number of fluctuations) is set, an effect that adds a predetermined number of times to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, "+30 times") is executed. do.
By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand the remaining period in which the probability change state continues, so even if the remaining period until the displayed probability change state ends (the number of remaining fluctuations in the special symbol) is small, It is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of an additional performance, and to play the game while having the expectation that the variable probability state may continue until the last moment when the variable probability state ends.

In addition, the above-described configuration is applied to a gaming machine (a so-called one-type two-type mixed machine) in which a big win is awarded when a special symbol lottery results in a big win or when a game ball enters a specific area. You can
<Regarding gaming machines with a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit to the period in which high probability states can be set continuously>
It should be noted that the above-described configuration capable of setting an infinite number of times of time saving may be applied to a game machine having a function (limit function) of setting an upper limit to a period in which a high probability state can be continuously set.
Here, the limit function means that even if you win a jackpot type that can set a high probability state (high probability state) of special patterns or normal patterns after the jackpot game ends, special patterns or normal patterns are displayed after the jackpot game ends. Usually refers to the threshold value for executing the process for setting the low probability state (low probability state) of the symbol.
For example, after the end of the jackpot game in a low probability state, the high probability state (variable state) of the special symbol is elected to the jackpot (variable jackpot) of the type that is set, and 3 times is set as the variable limit number of times, the variable state is When the probability variable jackpot is won three times consecutively after setting, the probability variable limit is reached by the third probability variable jackpot winning, and the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game is finished.

The variable probability limit number is a value set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state of a special symbol, and a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is finished. In the variable probability state, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot for which the variable probability state is set is won, the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, and the variable probability limit is reached using the updated value. A determination is made as to whether or not
In a gaming machine having a conventional variable probability limit, for example, when the jackpot type distribution in the case of winning a special symbol jackpot is 90% of the probability variable jackpot and 10% of the normal jackpot, and the probability variable limit number of times is set to 3 times, Winning the variable probability jackpot in a low probability state, setting the variable probability state after the jackpot game is completed, and then winning the variable probability jackpot three times in a row, the probability variable limit is reached with the third probability variable jackpot, and the third time the probability variable jackpot is won. A time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set for a predetermined period (for example, until special pattern lottery is executed 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game, and the special pattern jackpot is not won. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the state shifts to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).
Also, even if the normal jackpot is won before reaching the probability limit, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal A high probability state of the symbol is set, and when a predetermined period elapses without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the state shifts to the normal state. In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won in the time saving state, the probability variable limit number of times of 3 times is newly set.
In other words, in a gaming machine with a conventional variable probability limit, although the number of times the probability variable limit is canceled when the normal jackpot is won, within a limited period (for example, the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times) If the jackpot of the special pattern is not won in the low probability state of the special pattern, the state shifts to the normal state, so for the player, the normal jackpot is a jackpot more disadvantageous than the variable probability jackpot, and the probability variable jackpot is set after the probability variable state is set. 2 times in a row, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the same regardless of whether the next jackpot is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, so the remaining number of times until the probability limit is reached is 1. There is a risk that the player's willingness to play may decrease in the variable probability state in the case of a turn.

On the other hand, by setting a normal jackpot that gives an infinite number of time-savings (until the next jackpot is won), the variable limit number of times is canceled by winning the normal jackpot after the variable state is set. Although the low probability state of the special pattern is set, the time saving state will continue until the next jackpot, so in the probability state when the remaining number of times until the probability limit is reached is 1, it is usually a jackpot rather than winning the probability variable jackpot. Winning is more advantageous to the player, and even in a variable probability state when the number of remaining times until reaching the variable probability limit is 1, the player is expected to win a normal jackpot, thereby preventing a decrease in motivation for playing the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, even if the same variable probability state is set, the variable probability state with a large number of remaining times until the variable probability limit is reached becomes another form of the third variable probability state in the fifty-second control example described later. The variable probability state in which the remaining number of times until reaching the limit is small is another form of the variable probability state in the fifty-second control example described later. In addition, when the remaining number of times to reach the probability variation limit is 1, it can be said that the probability variation state is regulated.
In addition, if you win a normal jackpot with an infinite number of times of reduced time, a special effect that is different from when you win a variable probability jackpot (for example, the effect that the remaining number of times until reaching the displayed variable limit is rewound, etc.) may be executed.
<Big win 2 in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (so-called simultaneous variation method) that can simultaneously (in parallel) perform the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol Concerning the configuration in which the loop can be executed>
A jackpot game in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (so-called simultaneous variation system) capable of simultaneously (in parallel) performing variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbols and variable display of the second special symbols based on the lottery. A probability variable jackpot set until a high probability state (probability variable state) of a special pattern and a normal pattern wins the next jackpot after the end, and a special for a predetermined period after the jackpot game (for example, until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times). A game machine (so-called probability variable loop machine) having two types of jackpots, a normal jackpot in which a low-probability state of symbols and a high-probability state of normal symbols (time-saving state) is set, is generally known.
In a conventional variable probability loop machine, when a variable probability big win is won, a variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game, and one more big win is guaranteed, but if a normal jackpot is won after winning the variable probability big win. If a jackpot is not won in a time-saving state set for a predetermined period, a normal state is set, so that two more jackpot wins cannot be promised without changing the ratio of the probability variable jackpot.

However, by making it possible to set the above-mentioned time-saving infinite times (until the next jackpot is won), if the probability variable jackpot is won without changing the probability variable jackpot ratio, two more jackpot wins are guaranteed. becomes possible.
Specifically, if you win the normal jackpot when the probability variable state is set, the time-saving state of infinite times (until the next jackpot is won) is set, and the normal state or the time-saving state is set. In the case of normal jackpot winning, the time saving state is set for a period shorter than the infinite number of time saving times (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times).
By configuring in this way, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, one more big win is guaranteed no matter what kind of jackpot the next winning jackpot is, so that the probability change is performed once. By winning the jackpot, two more jackpots are guaranteed. Therefore, by winning the variable probability jackpot, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game in anticipation of winning the variable probability jackpot.
<About the configuration that does not reset the time saving state even if the jackpot is won when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is set>
In a conventional game machine, when a time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, until a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times) after the end of a big win game, and a big win game is started based on winning a big win during the time-saving state. It is common to terminate the time saving state that has been set to , and newly set the time saving state for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (reset the time saving state).

In order to further improve interest in the game machine having such a configuration, when the time saving state is set, even if a jackpot is won, the time saving state is not reset within a predetermined period. A player can be entertained by seeing how many jackpots he or she can win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends (first hit), and the time saving state ends End condition As the number of special symbol variations set as , one special symbol variation number can be set from a plurality of variation numbers including at least the first variation number and the second variation number different from the first variation number. The first variation frequency is 100 times, the second variation frequency is 300 times, the third variation frequency is 500 times, and the fourth variation frequency is 10000 times (until the next jackpot election).
Then, for example, when the third variation frequency is set as the termination condition, if the jackpot is won in the special symbol variation executed for the 20th time, the time saving state is not terminated (not reset) at the start of the jackpot game, The number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition of the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game is satisfied is 480 times.
In this way, the time saving state set based on the first win is not terminated by winning the jackpot during the time saving state, and the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first win is newly executed. Since it is taken over even after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times the player can win the jackpot during the time saving state depends on how many times the number of fluctuations, which is the end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first hit. can be made different, and a novel game can be provided.

In addition, as a condition to end the time saving state, if the number of fluctuations set as the end condition is 0 times (that is, if a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed during the time saving state) and the jackpot during the time saving state When the number of wins reaches a specific number, for example, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the third jackpot is won after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the start of the jackpot game, and It is good also as a structure which newly sets a time saving state after a jackpot game is over.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game of aiming for consecutive chances in order to continue a state (for example, time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, and further improve the interest of the game. can.
<The second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set rather than the first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) Regarding gaming machines with an advantageous configuration>
As the game state, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), first definite variable state, second definite variable state At least four game states can be set, and as a degree of advantage for the player in each game state, at least the second variable probability state is more advantageous to the player than the first variable probability state. It is good also as composition which performs time saving lottery (judgment of whether to set time saving state in special design lottery) in the special design lottery which did.
Specifically, the difference between the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special pattern is set small (for example, the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state of the special pattern is 1/50.1, the high probability state 1/50 of the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol), the ratio of determining the first variable jackpot (jackpot type in which the first variable state is set after the jackpot game ends) when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol is 95%, The proportion of time-saving jackpot (jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished) is set to 5%, and the prize ball cannot be obtained during the jackpot game.

In addition, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the normal state, the time saving state, and the first variable probability state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed only in the second variable probability state.
Then, only when the second special symbol lottery does not win the big win, a small win lottery (judging whether or not the small win wins in the special symbol lottery) is executed, and the small win game executed when the small win wins. allows the player to win prize balls.
In addition, when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the time-saving lottery is executed, and when the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times). .
Further, when the first variable probability jackpot is won in the normal state, the first variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Here, in the first probability variable state, the high probability state of the special pattern continues until the next big hit is won, but the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to the low probability state when the end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is set. As the special symbol variation frequency to be set, one special symbol variation frequency can be set from a plurality of variation frequencies including at least a first variation frequency and a second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency. For example, the first variation frequency is 1 time, the second variation frequency is 50 times, the third variation frequency is 100 times, the fourth variation frequency is 200 times, and the fifth variation frequency is 300 times.

By configuring in this way, when the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol is satisfied in the first probability variable state, the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol, that is, the second advantageous to the player Since the 2 probability variable state is set, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game aimed at ending the high probability state of normal symbols without winning a jackpot in the 1st probability variable state.
In addition, when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the second probability variable jackpot (jackpot in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is over) is determined by 95%, and the ratio of time-saving jackpot is determined by 5%. and
In addition, when the time-saving state is set and the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the 100% second probability variable state is set.
In addition, it may be possible to provide an upper limit to the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set continuously (time saving limit). A second variable probability state is set after the tenth jackpot game ends. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a more advantageous game state is set by making a succession of big wins, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that a small winning lottery is executed also in the first special symbol lottery, and when a small winning lottery is won, a plurality of small winning types including a small winning type in which a second probability variable state is set at least after finishing the small winning game. It is good also as a structure by which a small hit classification is determined from classification. By configuring in this way, the opportunity to shift to the second variable probability state increases, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, when the first probability variable state is set, even if an effect is executed to suggest to the player the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the end condition of the high probability state of the set normal symbol is satisfied. good. For example, when the fifth variation count (300 variation counts) is set as the termination condition, the message "Accumulate 300 points" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and one point is accumulated for each variation of the special symbol. , When 300 points are accumulated, the configuration may be such that the second variable probability state is set. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the first variable probability state, the acquired points are reset (that is, returned to 0).
In addition, even if, for example, the first variation count (1 variation count) is set as the end condition, the third symbol display device 81 displays "300 points to accumulate", and one variation of the special symbol is displayed. It may be configured such that 300 points can be obtained when the game ends, or the number of points given for one variation of the special symbol may be varied according to the number of variations of the set end condition.
By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which number of fluctuations is set as the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol, so which number of fluctuations is set from the number of points to be given. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting and improve the amusement of the game.

<Summary of technical ideas>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, when the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number of times, the technical idea that the probability that an advantageous privilege will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases According to the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has means for acquiring the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (information can be acquired possible acquisition means) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) up to the upper limit number (4) (the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored possible storage means). Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the reserved and stored second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) (determination is performed based on the information stored in the storage means discriminating means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is jackpot winning (first determination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is the end for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern. It continues until the condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to be able to execute time-saving winning judgment separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that time-saving winning is determined in the time-saving winning judgment (it is the second determination result If it is done), it is possible to set a high probability state (specific setting) of normal symbols without executing a jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, a plurality of game states can be set, but only in the state where the normal state (specific period) is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning determination. be.
By constructing in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the fact that the second special pattern lottery is won, it is not the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation but the end timing of the jackpot game. When the high probability state of the normal design is set and the high probability state of the normal design is set based on the fact that the second special design lottery was short-time winning, the high probability state of the normal design at the stop timing of the special design fluctuation is set. Therefore, the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the timing of setting the time saving state.
In addition, since it is possible to set a period during which time-saving winning judgment can be performed (a period in which the normal state is set) and a period in which it cannot be performed (a period in which the normal state is not set), special symbol lottery The duration of execution can also be of interest to the player. In addition, in the second control example described above, it is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period in which the time-saving winning judgment can be executed and a period in which it is not executed. , In the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning determination, and the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability variable It may be configured not to execute the time saving winning determination in the state).
Furthermore, instead of switching depending on the game state where the execution of the time saving success/failure judgment is set, the probability of winning the time saving in the time saving success/failure judgment may be changed according to the game state, for example, the normal state is set It may be configured so that the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/6 in the time saving propriety determination in the case where it is set, and the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/200 in other game states. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win a time saving and a game state in which it is difficult to win a time saving. The time period can also be of interest to the player.

Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, the first ball entrance 64 (first ball entrance means for allowing the game ball to enter) that can trigger the execution of the first special symbol lottery by the entrance of the game ball. , A second ball entrance 640 (second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) that can trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to be executable only in
That is, in the first special symbol lottery, no matter what game state is set, time-saving winning judgment is not executed, and in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a specific period (normal state). By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and eventually the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640. , the amount of value given to the player later can be greatly different.
In addition, in the above-described second control example, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning determination, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning determination during a specific period (normal state). , Without being limited to this, for example, in the first specific period (normal state), only the second special symbol lottery executes time saving winning judgment, and in the second specific period (second probability variable state) different from the first specific period may be configured so that only the first special symbol lottery can execute the time-saving winning determination. By configuring in this way, the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 depending on the set period. and a situation in which entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 more easily imparts a value advantageous to the player than entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64; It becomes possible to create Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a more advantageous value is likely to be awarded.
Furthermore, in this case, as in the modification shown in FIG. 181, even if any game state is set, It is preferable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the degree of ball entry into the ball hole 640 is the same. With such a configuration, the player can select which ball entrance the game ball is to enter, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, rather than the time saving state (first time saving) set based on the jackpot winning, the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning by the time saving winning judgment It is configured such that a time saving state advantageous to the player, that is, a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established is easily set. That is, according to the setting opportunity of a time saving state, it comprises so that the advantageous degree of the set time saving state may be varied. As a result, it is possible to vary the period (time saving end condition) for which the time saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determination result (setting trigger), so the game can be diversified and the interest can be increased. There is an effect that it can be improved.
In this case, depending on the game state before the time saving state is set, the second time saving is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving, and the first time saving is better than the second time saving. It is better to provide a case where it becomes a working hours saving situation that is advantageous to the person. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which situation the time saving state was set.
More specifically, for example, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game (the number of times of addiction) exceeds a predetermined number, the time saving state is more advantageous than when it does not exceed the predetermined number. It may be configured so that it becomes easy to become
Next, in the above-described fourth control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning (see FIG. 167). As a result, the jackpot winning (first discrimination result) and the short-time winning (second discrimination result) can be determined in duplicate, so that in one special symbol lottery, the jackpot winning and the short-time winning. , You can expect to win both a big hit and a short time, and various lottery results. Furthermore, in the fourth control example, when the time-saving winning and the jackpot winning overlap, a jackpot game more advantageous to the player than when the winning is not duplicated is executed (Fig. 158). (b)). Therefore, since a specific game of a type advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to duplicate determination, the game can be diversified by giving the player benefits corresponding to various determination results. has the effect of

It should be noted that, as a configuration for giving a privilege that is more advantageous to the player in the case of double winning than in the case of not winning multiple times, a configuration other than the above-described fourth control example may be used. The game state to be set after the game is finished may be configured to be able to set a game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous in the case of double winning than in the case of non-overlapping winning.
Further, in the above-described fourth control example, after executing the time-saving winning determination (determining whether or not the second determination result), the big hit determination (determining whether or not the first determination result) is performed In one special symbol lottery, when a time-saving lottery is won, the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery can be executed in a time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the advantageous degree of the privilege game executed in the case of duplicate winning and the advantage degree of the privilege game executed in the case of non-multiple winning different.
Next, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, the normal symbol high probability state (first time reduction) set based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the special symbol lottery time reduction winning The type of privilege given to the player when the jackpot is won in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the high probability state (second time reduction) and the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (jackpot The number of time reductions given after the end of the game) is different (see FIG. 132(b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game (the content of the jackpot game and the number of times of time reduction given) is variable according to the setting type (first time reduction, second time reduction), the same normal pattern high probability state ( The effect that the privilege given to the player can be made different even in the second game state) and the enjoyment of the game can be improved by diversifying the game without setting many game states. There is
In addition, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, a difference is provided in the number of times of time saving to be given according to the setting type (first time saving and second time saving), but not limited to this, The content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of round games) may be made different.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, when the second time saving is set rather than the first time saving, that is, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set without the jackpot game being executed is configured to facilitate setting of a high probability state of normal symbols in which the end condition is difficult to be established. In other words, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning the prize ball during the jackpot game, that is, the benefit given before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set than the first time reduction Since the less second time saving can lengthen the high probability state of the normal symbol, there is an effect that the privilege can be imparted fairly to the player.
Furthermore, in the second modification of the second control example described above, similarly to the second control example and the first modification of the second control example described above, time-saving winning determination only in the normal state (discrimination of the second determination result) is configured to be executable. In other words, except for the normal state, execution of the time-saving winning determination is regulated. Therefore, since the time-saving winning determination is not executed according to the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested in the set game state and expect the setting of the game state in which the second determination result can be determined. has the effect of
In addition, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, to show the result of the special symbol lottery so as to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set (see FIGS. 130 and 131). That is, when the first time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 130 (a)) is executed for the first period obtained by adding the special symbol fluctuation time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and the second When the time saving is set, it is configured to execute the specific effect (see FIG. 130(b)) for the second period which is the special symbol variation time (including fixed time).
More specifically, the fluctuation time and the jackpot game period are defined in advance corresponding to each special symbol lottery result so that the above-described first period and second period are substantially the same period, and the specific performance is performed. It is configured so that the performance period of is the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shown after the specific effect with the same effect period and the same effect mode is executed. A performance will be performed. Therefore, to make it difficult for the player watching the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to discriminate in which setting opportunity the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can be done.

Next, in the above-described third control example, it is configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning determination even during the time-saving state (second game state), and when the time-saving winning is made during the time-saving state (second game state) , It is configured to be able to set the time saving state (second game state) of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied (the number of time saving times is large or the time saving winning probability is high).
As a result, the longer the period in which the time saving state is set, the easier it is to set the time saving state of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that the privilege game can be easily executed.
In addition, in the above-described third control example, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the time saving winning probability is changed according to the set game state, but even if the time saving winning probability is defined to be the same good. In addition, although the time-saving winning probability is varied according to the game state, the time-saving winning probability may be changed according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big win game is executed. In this case, when the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big winning game is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the time saving winning probability should be increased. By constructing in this way, a player who has not won a big win for a long time in the special symbol lottery can be easily provided with the privilege of short-time winning, which is different from the big win game. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.
In the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 181, the first discrimination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing the first discrimination and the result of the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means are the first A first privilege (jackpot game) can be granted based on the result of 1 discrimination (jackpot winning), and the result of the first discrimination is a second discrimination result (time saving winning) different from the first discrimination result. A first privilege giving means capable of imparting a second privilege (high probability state of normal symbols) based on that, and a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination (second special symbol lottery) and the result of the second determination executed by the second determination means is the third determination result (winning the jackpot), the first privilege can be given, and the result of the second determination is the third determination result. a second privilege granting means capable of imparting a third privilege (small winning game) different from the first privilege and the second privilege based on a fourth determination result (small winning) different from the However, the third privilege is not given based on the first determination performed by the first determination means, and the second privilege is provided based on the second determination performed by the second determination means. It is configured so that there is no such thing as

As a result, different benefits can be given depending on whether the first determination is performed or the second determination is performed, so that the player will be motivated to perform different determinations. It is possible to play the game in a realistic manner, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.
In the gaming machine related to <game property 2> described above, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols win the jackpot. In this case, a big hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). Depending on the type of jackpot at the time, the game machine is configured to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. To make it possible to execute time-saving winning determination in any pattern lottery. And the first condition is established by the first determination means (time saving elected) It is determined that the first advantageous state (time saving state of the first privilege) is set by the first state setting means. A third advantageous state (third privilege time saving state) can be set. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same time (parallel), different benefits are given according to the timing of short-time winning in each special symbol lottery. It is possible to set a time saving state to be done.
In <Other game characteristics> described above, a determination means capable of executing determination, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result, A game machine having game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, The game state setting means provides a second determination result (second It is possible to set the second game state (second time saving B) based on the time saving B winning), and based on the establishment of the end condition (time saving end condition) in the state where the second game state is set The first game state can be set by pressing the first game state, and the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set is a third determination result (the It is possible to set a third game state (second time saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state based on the fact that the two time saving A win). Further, the discrimination means can perform discrimination so that the probability that the discrimination result will be the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability that the discrimination result will be the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%). .
Furthermore, as the end condition (time saving end condition of the second time saving B), the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the state where the second game state is set (the number of times of special symbol lottery) has reached a predetermined number It is possible to set at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the above. In addition, it is possible to set a second end condition that can be established based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result (minor winning).

In this case, as the setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, the first setting (normal time saving state) that can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game execution means, and the determination means A second game state (time saving state) can be set without executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the performed decision is a second decision result (second time saving B winning) different from the first decision result. and a second setting, and at least a type setting means that can be set, and the game state setting means is different from the first game state (normal state) according to the setting type (time saving type) set by the type setting means It is possible to set an advantageous second game state (ordinary time saving state) which is more advantageous and a disadvantageous second game state (second time saving B) which is more disadvantageous than the first game state. It should be noted that the various technical ideas described above and the various configurations described in the game features may be used in each control example described later, and the new problems described in each control example described later may be solved. It should be adopted appropriately as a method.
<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 187. FIG. The above-described second control example makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, It is configured to make it easier to enter a game ball into the 2-ball entering means 640.例文帳に追加Furthermore, it was configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election (time-saving lottery) in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. In addition, the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) was configured to be stored (reserved storage) up to a predetermined number (four pieces) as an upper limit.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example configured in this way, the high-probability state of normal symbols (time-saving state) ends in the state of holding and storing the special figure 2 hold, and the low-probability state of normal symbols (normal state) is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved and stored special figure 2 suspension is executed in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state), and the second executed during the normal state. When winning the time saving lottery in the 2 special pattern lottery, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set again.
In other words, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design is finished, and the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design is set for a predetermined period (the second special design lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation is executed Period) can be set as a period (retraction period) in which the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is easily set, so that the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern ends. Even after playing the game, the player can be motivated to play the game.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, in both the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery, the determination of the time saving election (time saving lottery) can be executed. It is constructed so as to win short working hours with a probability (most of the lost winnings), and the short working hours state (second short working hours) set based on the winning of short working hours becomes a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. They are different in terms of their structure.
In addition, in the fifth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are easily alternately executed. It is configured to set an end condition that is established when one type of special symbol lottery is continuously executed.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured as described above, when the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set does not win the jackpot (jackpot probability 1/300), , The second time saving is set by winning the time saving with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time saving until the end condition of the second time saving is established.
In addition, as the end condition of the second time saving, the first time saving end condition that is established when the total number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second time saving reaches a specific number (100 times), and special in a predetermined order It is configured to set a second time saving end condition that is established when the pattern lottery is executed, and the second time saving end condition is established before the first time saving end condition is established. It consists of

Therefore, when the second time saving is set, the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second time saving end condition in order to end the second time saving as soon as possible.
In addition, according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the degree of advantage to the player is made different, and when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is configured so that it is easier to set an advantageous game state after the end of the big win game than when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed after the second time saving is finished.
Now, with reference to FIG. 183, the configuration of distribution unit 1064 will be described. 183(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 1064. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

At the top of the sorting unit 1064, a passage opening 1064b through which game balls can enter is provided. ing. A game ball that has passed through the passage port 1064b is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port 1641 arranged therebelow.
The distribution member 900 receives the game ball entered into the passage opening in the storage portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. - 特許庁When the game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball (see FIG. 183(a)), and moves the game ball to the first ball entrance. 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900b.
On the base body provided on the rear side of the distribution unit 1064, the base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the opening through which the magnet 901b of the distribution member 900 passes. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the sorting member 900 side.
The magnet 900b is also a bar-shaped magnet, similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b comes directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage port), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), the magnets are repulsive and do not stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. , is maintained at the position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the sorting member 900 reaches a position where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, so that the sorting member 900 moves left or right. It rotates, and one of the storage portions 900a and 900b faces the side of receiving game balls entering the sorting unit 640 (the upper side of the gaming machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring due to a game ball entering the game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.
In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64a, the accommodation portion 900b faces upward, and the game ball entering the sorting unit 640 is received by the accommodation portion 900b and played. The distribution member 900 rotates about 90 degrees to the right due to the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second ball entrance 1641 . In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution unit 640 to the first ball entrance 64 a and the second ball entrance 1641 . Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641 to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as A first lottery game) and a lottery game caused by winning a prize to the second ball entrance 1641 (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) can be efficiently executed.
The right second ball entrance 1640 is a ball entrance where, like the second ball entrance 1641, the lottery for the second special symbol is started when a game ball enters. In the second special symbol, the second entrance 1641 and the second entrance 1640 on the right side are combined to hold four balls.
In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage opening 1064b of the distribution unit 1064 (a size that allows one game ball to pass through). The right second ball entrance 1640 is configured so that only game balls that have passed through the right side can enter.

Here, FIG. 183(a) is a diagram showing a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped while being rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage port 1064b, the game ball is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a, and the distribution member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball, and the first entering ball is guided to the guide portion 900z1. A game ball is guided to the mouth 64a.
After the game ball is distributed to the first ball entrance 64a by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the accommodating portion 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 183(b). After that, when the game ball passes through the passage port 1064b, it is housed in the housing portion 900c and distributed to the second ball entrance 1641.例文帳に追加Therefore, the balls can be alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 a and the second entrance 1641 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 183(b), among the game balls entered from the passage port 1061b of the distribution unit 1064, the distribution member 900 appropriately distributes them to the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641. The game balls that could not be guided to the distribution unit 1064 flow down the ball discharge path formed between the outer wall of the distribution unit 1064 and each ball entrance, and are discharged to the outside of the distribution unit 1064. Configure.
By configuring in this way, for example, game balls that flow into the passing port 1061b of the distribution unit 1064 collide with the distribution member 900 and flow down in the distribution unit 1064 without being guided by the guide portions 900z1 and 900z2. Even if such an event occurs, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of balls in the sorting unit 1064 .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the position (rotating state) of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor (not shown). Specifically, a rotation sensor capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating shaft 900d of the distribution member 900 is provided, and the position of the distribution member 900 can be specified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor. Then, based on the position of the distribution member 900 specified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor, the game ball next entering the passage opening 1061b enters which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance 64a). It is configured so that it can be determined whether it is guided to the ball entrance 1061).
By configuring in this way, a notification effect for informing the player whether or not it is possible to continuously acquire special figure reservations of the same type, and continuous acquisition of special figure reservations of the same type Since it is possible to execute the guidance performance for making the second time saving end condition satisfied, it is possible to make the player play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.
In the second control example, the rotation sensor is used to specify the position of the distribution member 900. However, the position of the distribution member 900 is determined each time based on the ball entrance. may be configured. Specifically, based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, the sorting member 900 identifies the state in which the housing portion 900c faces upward, and determines that the ball enters the second ball entrance 1641. Based on this, the sorting member 900 is configured to identify the state in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward. By configuring in this way, the position of the distribution member 900 can be specified without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Further, even if the distribution member 900 is rotated due to vibration or the like, the position of the distribution member 900 can be correctly specified by updating the position each time the ball enters the ball entrance. can.
In this second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. , and when a new special figure reservation cannot be acquired based on the game ball entering each ball entrance, the game ball is entered into the sorting unit 1064. By varying the position of the distribution member 900, the special figure reservation of the same type can be continuously acquired without acquiring the special figure reservation, but it is not limited to this, for example, distribution Some of the game balls that have flowed into the unit 1064 are not accommodated in the distribution member 900, and can enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 2164. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery using the distribution member 900 and special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) corresponding to the second special symbol lottery , and a configuration for acquiring the special figure reservation without using the distribution member 900 to acquire the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure reservation 2 in an irregular order. becomes possible. Therefore, it can be made easy to satisfy the second time saving end condition.
Returning to FIG. 182, the description continues. In the right area of the game board 13, there are a right second ball entrance 1640, an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the right second ball entrance 1640, and a state in which a game ball can enter the second right ball entrance 1640. An electric accessory 1640a is provided as a variable means that can be changed to a closed state where it is difficult to enter a ball.
This electric role product 1640a, like the electric role product 640a in the second control example described above, is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won in the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67. It is configured to be variable from the closed state to the open state according to a predetermined variable pattern by a winning game (normal figure winning game). In addition, the technology related to the normal symbol lottery and the contents of the control process for the electric accessory 1640a executed based on winning the normal symbol lottery are the first control example used in the above-described second control example. Since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG.
That is, in the fifth control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is easy to enter the right second entrance 1640 normal pattern winning game ( It is possible to execute a long open winning game) and a normal drawing winning game (normal open winning game) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640 than the long open winning game. In both the game state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set and the game state in which the normal symbol high probability state is set, the long opening winning game can be executed. there is

By configuring in this way, when a disadvantageous time-saving state disadvantageous to the player is set as a game state among the time-saving states, winning is won in the normal symbol lottery, and the long open winning game is executed. It is possible to enter a plurality of game balls into the right second ball entrance 1640 with . As a result, in the fifth control example in which the special symbol lottery is executed according to the order of entry of the game balls, it is possible to continuously execute the special symbols of the same type (second special symbols), thereby reducing the disadvantageous time-saving state. It is possible to make it easier to establish a time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) for ending.
Therefore, by winning the normal symbol lottery and executing the long open winning game, in addition to the privilege of efficiently executing the game special symbol lottery, the advantage of ending the disadvantageous time saving state can be given. A player can be interested in the result of the normal symbol lottery.
Although the detailed description will be described later, in the fifth control example, as the time-saving state, the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (disadvantageous time-saving state) , and in terms of execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time-saving state is configured to have higher execution efficiency than the disadvantageous time-saving state. More specifically, in the state in which the disadvantageous time saving state is set, the game ball is inserted into the right second ball entrance 1640 during the normal pattern winning game that is executed based on the winning in the normal pattern lottery. It is configured so that the degree of expectation that the ball can be thrown is about the same as in the normal state.
Furthermore, in terms of the benefits (jackpot game content, game state set after the jackpot game ends) that are given when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous time-saving state. It is configured so that a privilege is given (becomes easier to be given). More specifically, the benefits given when the jackpot is won during the disadvantageous time-saving state are configured to be given (easier to be given) to the player than when the jackpot is won during the normal state. is doing.

Therefore, among the three game states of the normal state, the advantageous time-saving state, and the disadvantageous time-saving state, the advantageous time-saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player, and then the normal state is the game state that is advantageous to the player and disadvantageous. It is configured so that the time saving state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player.
In addition, in the fifth control example, the content of the time-saving end condition (advantageous time-saving end condition) for ending the advantageous time-saving state and the time-saving end condition (adverse time-saving end condition) for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state The contents of the regulations are different. Specifically, in both the advantageous time-saving end conditions and the unfavorable time-saving end conditions, the first time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time-saving state is set is defined. In addition to the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a second time-saving end condition established based on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is defined.
Further, as described above, in the fifth control example, the distribution unit 1064 is configured so that game balls can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 alternately. Therefore, normally, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are alternately executed. Here, for example, when a long open winning game is executed based on winning in a normal symbol lottery, there is a game in which a game ball is entered into the right second ball opening 1640 by a right-handed game. Since it is executed, it is possible to create an event in which the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed.
Then, in the fifth control example, as the second time-saving end condition established based on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, based on the fact that the special symbol lottery of the same type is continuously executed It is configured to be able to set the second time saving end condition that is established. Therefore, the player to whom the disadvantageous time-saving state is set can be made to play a game while expecting that the long open winning game will be executed in order to satisfy the second time-saving end condition.

In addition, in order to continuously execute the special symbol lottery of the same type, even if the long opening winning game is not executed, for example, a state in which a new special symbol reservation cannot be acquired, that is, the special symbol reservation is suspended up to the upper limit number. It is conceivable to execute a game in which game balls flow into the sorting unit 1064 in the stored state. For example, in a state in which new special symbol variation is difficult to execute, for example, in a state where a left-handed game is executed during a jackpot game, and the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are acquired to the upper limit number, further into the distribution unit 1064 It is conceivable to execute a game in which the position of the sorting member 900 is varied by causing game balls to flow in.
In the fifth control example, during the jackpot game, by specifying the position of the distribution member 900, based on the acquisition status (acquisition order) of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation, it corresponds to the special symbol of the same type. It is configured to be executable guidance production (see Figure 185 (b)) for creating a state that can be acquired continuously the special figure reservation to be. By constructing in this way, during the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is executed, by executing the left-handed game based on the contents of the guidance effect to be executed, it is possible to make the player execute a game advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a novel playability.
<Regarding the effect content in the fifth control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the content of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described.
In this fifth control example, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) and variable state (High probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) can be set, and in addition, advantageous time saving state as time saving state (time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, and time saving when elected It is configured to be able to set a time saving state set with a low probability) and a disadvantageous time saving state (a time saving state set with a high probability when a time saving win is made).

The disadvantageous time-saving state is actually set to a high-probability state of normal symbols, but compared to the advantageous time-saving state, it is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, and is substantially normal. It is a time-saving state in which a game ball can be entered into the right second ball inlet 1640 only as much as the state (low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set, if the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, as in the case where the normal state is set, the right second entrance 1640 by the right-handed game It is structured so that a game in which a game ball flows into the sorting unit 1064 by a left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a game in which the game ball enters the box.
When winning a jackpot with a special pattern in a normal state, a privilege (for example, a large number of rounds of a jackpot game, etc.) is given more advantageous than when winning a jackpot with a special pattern in a disadvantageous time-saving state. is doing. Therefore, the disadvantageous time saving state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. On the other hand, the advantageous time-saving state is configured so that a normal game is executed so that the game ball can be relatively easily entered into the right second ball entrance 1640, and a right-handed game is performed by the player. It is configured to be an advantageous game. Therefore, the game state becomes advantageous to the player in the order of disadvantageous time-saving state, normal state, and advantageous time-saving state.
Although the details will be described later, the disadvantageous time-saving state is a gaming state that can be set after the variable display ends when the time-saving lottery is won in the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery, and in the fifth control example, the time-saving lottery. , it is configured to be elected in a short time with a high probability (299/300). The conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state differ depending on the type of special symbol that was elected in the disadvantageous time-saving state, and if the first special symbol is unfavorable time-saving election, the first special symbol is displayed once. When the variable display of one special pattern is executed continuously), or when the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is executed 100 times in total, the disadvantageous time saving state is terminated. On the other hand, when the disadvantageous time reduction is won with the second special symbol, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed once (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed continuously), or The disadvantageous time saving state is terminated when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed 100 times in total.
As described above, in the gaming machine 13 in this control example, the game balls entered into the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 182) are distributed by the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) to the first ball entrance 64a arranged below. (See FIG. 183) and the second entrance 1641 (see FIG. 183) are alternately distributed, and when the first entrance 64a (see FIG. 183) wins, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, When the second entrance 1641 (see FIG. 183) is won, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls enter the corresponding ball entrances. For example, if the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 183) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 183) win in this order, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in that order. In this way, either the variable display for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol or the variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed continuously.

Here, in this control example, an example of the case where the variable display of any special symbol type is continuously executed will be described. In the gaming machine 13, as described above, the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) distributes game balls to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 183) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 183). However, up to four pieces of winning information for each special symbol are reserved. Then, when the game ball newly wins the corresponding ball entrance in a state where the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 in this control example), the winning information is not reserved. (Hereinafter referred to as an overflow prize). Then, in a state where the number of reservations of both special symbols has reached the upper limit (in this control example, the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are accumulated in total 8), the game ball When the ball enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 182), the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) distributes the game ball to the entrance different from the entrance corresponding to the eighth reserved special symbol type. However, it becomes an overflow winning, and the winning information is not reserved. In addition, since the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) changes its position by distributing the game balls, the next game ball entered in the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 183) is the eighth reserved special symbol. It is possible to distribute to the entrance corresponding to the type, and it is possible to continuously perform the variable display of the same type of special symbol type as the eighth hold, so that the disadvantageous time saving state can be ended. can. By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to shoot the game ball in order to save the hold in order to end the disadvantageous time saving state. It should be noted that the process executed when an overflow win is made in this control example can also be said to be a process of discarding part of the acquired game information.
In this control example, the winning information of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be reserved up to four, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is three. It may be set to 1 or less (for example, 2) or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the small display area Dm19, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.
FIG. 184(a) is an example of the display screen displayed when the second special symbol reservation is continuously obtained by overflow winning in the disadvantageous time saving state. When the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and when the variation display of each special symbol is executed, the number is decremented by one and updated. Incidentally, the chance variation in this control example refers to the variable display of the special symbols for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. In this way, the player can determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the unfavorable time saving state, and the player can easily determine whether or not to continue the game according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the chance fluctuation. ing.
In the small display area Dm1, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small display area Dm2, the second special symbol is being variably displayed, so that the player can easily determine which special symbol is being variably displayed. It is configured.

Reserved patterns of special patterns are displayed in the small display area Dm19, a hatched circle indicates that the first special pattern is reserved, and a black circle indicates that the second special pattern is reserved. . The display screen shown in FIG. 184(a) indicates that the number of reserved first special symbols is three and the number of reserved second special symbols is four. Since it is a reserved design indicating winning information of two special designs, the variable display of the second special design is continuously executed. As described above, when the variable display of one of the special symbols is continuously executed, the unfavorable time-saving state ends, so the unfavorable time-saving state ends due to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols based on the reserved design hr7, and the reserved design. After stopping the special symbol variation based on hr7, the next special symbol variation display is the chance variation.
Here, if the display shown in the small display area Dm12 is decremented by one each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved symbol hr7 is executed, "until the chance variation 73 times" is displayed, and the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is actually executed does not match the number of remaining variations displayed in the small display area Dm12, causing the player to feel distrust of the game information. There is a risk of giving
Therefore, in this control example, it anticipates that the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state as shown in FIG. (that is, the normal state is set), the effect of shortening the remaining variation count until the chance variation displayed in the small display region Dm12 is displayed in the small display region Dm17. By executing this, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is actually executed matches the number of remaining variations displayed in the small display area Dm12, thereby providing correct game information.
In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 184(a), by displaying "lucky" above the reserved pattern hr6 and the reserved pattern hr7, the player is notified in advance that the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state is satisfied. It has a suggested configuration. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize in which hold the chance variation is executed, so that the player can easily understand the variation to which the player should pay attention.

In addition, in this control example, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and the configuration is such that one is subtracted each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, an effect of accumulating points may be used, and a chance variation may be executed when a specific number of points (for example, 100 points) is accumulated. In this case, one point is added each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and when the variable display of the special symbol of the same kind is continuously executed, the points are accumulated up to the MAX. It is possible to produce a performance that does not give a sense of incongruity. It should be noted that the effect of accumulating points in this case can also be said to be a process of giving a privilege without going through the jackpot winning.
In addition, in this control example, the unfavorable time saving state ends after the variable display of the same kind of special symbols is continuously executed, and the variable display of the special symbol to be executed next is the chance variation, but this is not limited to this. Instead, when the variable display of the same type of special symbols continues, the disadvantageous time saving state may be ended at the start of the variable display of the special symbols to be executed later, and the chance may be changed.
In FIG. 184(b), the winning of the normal pattern is won, and the electric accessory 1640a (see FIG. 182) attached to the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182) is opened long as a winning game of the normal symbol. It is an example of a display screen displayed when there is A display mode indicating that the win of the normal symbol is won is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and when the winning game of the normal symbol is executed, the game method of the winning game of the normal symbol is displayed to the player in the small display area Dm4. "Right shot" is displayed for guidance, and the small display area dm18 indicates that the electric accessory 1640a (see FIG. 182) attached to the right second entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182) is in the open state. is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and "Right hit and aim for an electric chew" is displayed. As a result, the player can be guided to play a game in which a game ball is shot toward the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182) in an easy-to-understand manner, and the game can be played in a game method suitable for the game state.
Here, when the game ball wins in the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182), the winning information of the second special symbol is withheld. In the case of FIG. 184(b), the last reserved design hr5 displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved design of the second special design. is won, the variable display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the disadvantageous time-saving state can be terminated. Therefore, in order to inform the player that it is advantageous to let the game ball enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182), the main display area Dm displays "chance to get variable chance". be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the game ball will enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182), and the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, when the last reserved design (for example, reserved design hr6) displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved design of the first special design in a state where three reserved second special designs have already been accumulated. , even if a plurality of game balls are entered into the second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182) on the right side, the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved only for one, so the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously performed. I can't get it to run. Therefore, even if the game ball is won in the second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 182) on the right side, if the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state cannot be satisfied, a different display mode (for example, "chance to accumulate hold" etc. ) may be displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to provide appropriate game information to the player, and the reliability of the game information can be enhanced.
FIG. 185(a) is an example of a display screen displayed when suggesting that the disadvantageous time saving state is terminated. In the main display area Dm12, "three more times until the chance change" is displayed, and the change display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern after the disadvantageous time saving state is set is performed 98 times in total. is shown. That is, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the reserved symbol hr2 ends, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, and the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state is established. In this case, since the special symbol lottery based on the reserved symbol hr3 is executed in the normal state, the reserved symbol hr3 is the first special symbol to suggest that the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. The reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information and the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the second special pattern are displayed in a different display mode (a reserved pattern in which a star pattern is displayed in a white circle), and the upper part of the reserved pattern hr3 is displayed as "Attention". With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the variable display of the special symbols based on the reserved symbols hr3 is the chance variation, and the player can easily recognize that the variable display based on the reserved symbols hr3 is executed. It is possible to heighten expectations for the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the reserved symbols hr3.
In addition, the main display area Dm displays "This chance change may be a lucky change", which suggests the result of pre-reading the winning information of the reserved symbol hr3. It suggests that the lottery result of the special pattern based on is likely to be a big hit. As a result, the player's expectation for the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the reserved symbols hr3 can be further enhanced.
In this control example, the prefetch result of the reserved design hr3 is suggested in the main display area Dm, and the special design lottery based on the reserved design hr3 is normally performed by the display mode of the reserved design hr3 displayed in the small display area Dm19. Although the configuration suggests execution, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to suggest a look-ahead result by the display mode of the reserved symbol hr3. For example, it is also possible to notify the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the color of the reserved symbol.

FIG. 185(b) is an example of the display screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game based on winning the normal jackpot. In the small display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won is usually displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, "Ending" is displayed to inform the player that it is the ending period of the jackpot game. ing.
Although the details will be described later, in this control example, it is configured such that winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the second special symbol. Then, when the jackpot game after winning the normal jackpot is completed, the first lottery for the special symbol after the jackpot game is finished is executed in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying "Lucky, normal fluctuation starts from special figure 1" in the sub display area Ds, the special symbol lottery executed first after the end of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player. By informing in advance that the game will be executed with one special pattern, the player can also be interested in the variable display of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot game. When the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is executed with the second special symbol, a different display mode (for example, a display mode in which "Lucky" is not displayed) is displayed.
During the jackpot game, since the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, it is a period in which the player is likely to accumulate reservations. As described above, if the game ball enters the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 182) when the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit, the winning information is not reserved, but the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) Position can be changed. In this control example, the position of the sorting member 900 can be identified by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown). Therefore, in this control example, it is advantageous for the player to identify the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol hr8 and the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) and vary the position of the distribution member by overflow winning. It is configured to notify whether or not.
Specifically, when the next winning information can be reserved, the winning information of the special symbol type similar to the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is reserved. If it is not possible, that is, if the position of the sorting member 900 can be changed by overflow winning, the winning information of the same type of special symbol type can be held. As shown in the figure, the message "Put one ball in the navel before the big win ends is a great chance." By displaying a schematic diagram corresponding to the position, an effect is executed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the sorting unit 1640 (see FIG. 182). By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the game in which the game ball is shot even during the ending period of the big win.

In addition, when the next winning information can be reserved, the winning information of the special symbol type of the same type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 can be reserved. , the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) is variable due to the overflow winning, and the winning information of the same type of special symbol type can no longer be reserved, so the center of the main display area Dm There is no display of "a big chance if you put one ball in the navel before the jackpot ends" in the section.
In addition, when the next winning information can be reserved, the winning information of the special symbol type of the same type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 can be reserved. , a display mode may be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to notify that the overflow winning is disadvantageous. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to judge whether the overflow winning is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state.
In this control example, the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 183) is determined by the rotation sensor 990. The position may be determined each time. Specifically, based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 183), the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 183) assumes a state in which the accommodating portion 900c (see FIG. 183) faces upward. configured to discriminate. With this configuration, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. In addition, even if the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) is rotated due to vibration or the like, the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 183) can be correctly determined by updating the position each time the ball enters the entrance. 183) can be determined.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 to 190, the details of the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described. In contrast to the above-described second control example, the fifth control example includes a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those of the second control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 186(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example replaces the variation pattern selection table 202db with the variation pattern selection table 202gb in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 96(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above. The difference is that a jackpot type selection table 202gd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202dd, a time saving random number table 202ge is provided instead of the time saving random number table 202de, and a time saving type selection table 202gf is provided instead of the time saving type selection table 202df. ing.
The jackpot type selection table 202gd, like the jackpot type selection table 202dd described above, is a data table that is referred to when selecting a jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. In the above-described second control example, the special figure 1 jackpot table 202dd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the special figure 1 jackpot table 202dd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery 2, but in this fifth control example, since it is configured to select the jackpot type with the same distribution contents regardless of the special symbol type, the first special symbol The jackpot type selection table 202gd is referred to both when the jackpot is won in the lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.
Here, with reference to FIG. 187(a), detailed contents of the jackpot type selection table 202gd will be described. FIG. 187(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the jackpot type selection table 202gd, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 are associated with the jackpot type ( Jackpot A8, jackpot B8) are defined.
Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (normal state), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, and the “jackpot A8” is “95 to 99”. ', 'jackpot B8' is defined for the range of '. In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than normal (normal state), that is, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". ”, and “jackpot B8” for the range of “50 to 99”.

The jackpot type "jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "60" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot A8" is 95 (0 to 94) in the normal state. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the ratio of determining the "jackpot A8" is 95% (95/100). On the other hand, since there are 50 pieces (0 to 49) in a state other than the normal state, if a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot in a game state other than the normal state, the ratio of determining "jackpot A8" is 50% (50/100 ).
The jackpot type "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "60" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B8" is 5 (95 to 99) in the normal state. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the ratio of determining "jackpot B8" is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, since the number is 50 (50 to 99) in a state other than the normal state, if a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot in a game state other than the normal state, the ratio of determining "jackpot B8" is 50% (50/100 ).

In other words, in the fifth control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the selection ratio of the jackpot type set according to the set gaming state is varied, and when a jackpot is won during the normal state. It is configured so that the player can more easily select a jackpot type (jackpot A8) that is advantageous to the player than when the jackpot is won in a state other than the normal state.
By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that many special symbol lotteries will be executed during the normal state.
Next, the time saving per random number table 202ge is explained. This time saving random number table 202ge is a data table referred to in the time saving determination executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (lost), and is used to determine whether or not the time saving winning has occurred. It is something that can be done.
Here, with reference to FIG.187(b), the content of random-number table 202ge per time saving is demonstrated. FIG. 187(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number table 202ge per time saving. As shown in FIG. 187(b), the time saving per random number table 202ge includes a special symbol type (special figure type) and a game state, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 determined as time saving winning in correspondence with (range) is specified.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the acquired first random number counter C1 A value range of "3 to 899" is defined as a judgment value for short-time winning. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure). Similarly, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is A range of "3 to 899" is defined as a judgment value for short-time winning. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).
Here, in the fifth control example, the determination of time-saving election in the special symbol lottery (time-saving lottery) is performed when the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot, that is, when the jackpot lottery is lost and won. A range of "0 to 2" is defined as the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to have won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (first winning random number table 202da), therefore, when the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state does not win the jackpot, it is always configured to win the time-saving win.
In addition, in the fifth control example, as described above, the content of the time saving random number table 202ge is defined so that the time saving winning is always won when the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is lost and won. However, the range of judgment values for short-time winning may be defined so as to be part of the case of winning in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to continuously execute the special symbol lottery without winning the short-time winning.
In addition, in the present fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the determination value of time-saving election is the same regardless of the special symbol type, but not limited to this, different determination depending on the special symbol type A value may be specified. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, it may be more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than when the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this way, by varying the probability of short-time winning according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the type of the special symbol lottery executed is continuously executed during the normal state. To make a player interested in which special symbol type of special symbol lottery is executed (will be executed) during a normal state, since the number of times of special symbol lottery can be easily varied. can be done.

In addition, when the probability of short-time winning is changed according to the type of special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player during the normal state among the plurality of special symbol types (for example, the first special symbol) in which is executed (a privilege advantageous to the player is likely to be given at the time of winning the jackpot) is preferably constructed so as to make it more difficult to win the time saving. With this configuration, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning, a privilege advantageous to the player is easily given, and In the case of winning other than the big hit, the special symbol lottery can be made easier to execute again in the normal state, so that the special symbol type more advantageous to the player can be set.
Also, as in the fifth control example, basically, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be easily alternately executed, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely than the first special symbol lottery. If the special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player is executed, the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the normal state is the first special lottery that is executed during the normal state. It may be configured so that it is more difficult to win the time-saving than the pattern lottery. By constructing in this way, even if the special symbol lottery executed first in the state where the normal state is set is the second special symbol lottery, after that, the first special symbol lottery is executed while continuing the normal state. can be made easier to implement. By configuring in this way, for example, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is ended and the normal state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is 1. It is possible to suppress the fact that the unfavorable time saving state is set again only by executing the game once, and the player's desire to play is lowered.
Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), in the fifth control example, it is configured to execute the determination of the time saving election (time saving lottery) only when the normal state is set, but it is limited to this Without this, even if another game state is set, it may be configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election (time-saving lottery).
For example, among the time-saving states, even if a disadvantageous time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (time-saving state set when a specific time-saving type is elected) is set, determination of time-saving election (time-saving lottery) can be executed, and when short working hours are elected during a disadvantageous short working hours state, the short working hours state in which the conditions for ending the short working hours are immediately established is set. By configuring in this way, a game aiming to establish a time saving end condition and a game aiming to win a time saving in order to end the disadvantageous time saving state for the player who is playing the game in the disadvantageous time saving state, can be run in parallel.

In addition to this, when the time saving is won during the disadvantageous time saving state, it may be configured to shift to the time saving state (advantage time saving state) set after the jackpot game ends, or during the advantageous time saving state. Judgment of time-saving election (time-saving lottery) may be configured to be executable, and when time-saving election is made during an advantageous time-saving state, the system may be configured to shift to a disadvantageous time-saving state.
In this way, the determination of the time saving election (time saving lottery) is executable in the situation where the time saving state is already set, and when the time saving win is made, the advantage degree is different from the set working time saving state. By configuring it so that it can transition to a state, a period in which it is better to win short working hours (a period in which the short working hours state is set) and a period in which it is better not to win short working hours (a period in which the short working hours state is set) , can be provided. In addition, in the fifth control example, by winning the time saving during the normal state, it is configured to make it easier to set the disadvantageous time saving state than the advantageous working time saving state, so the period when the normal state is set It's a good period not to win a short time.
In this case, for example, the content of the effect for suggesting the result of the time-saving winning to the player may be configured to be different according to the set game state in addition to the result of the time-saving winning. If you win a short-time win during a good period (a period in which a short-time disadvantageous state is set), set a production mode that congratulates the player, and a period in which it is better not to win short-time (an advantageous short-time state is set) period), it is preferable to be able to set an effect mode that discourages the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the production in the production mode corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player for the result of the same time-saving lottery, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. can.
Returning to FIG. 186(a), the description is continued. The variation pattern selection table 202gb, like the variation pattern selection table 202db in the above-described second control example, is a data table in which variation patterns of special symbol variation executed to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery are defined. , As a game state, as a data table to be referred to in a state in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set, instead of the variable probability / time saving table 202db2 (see FIG. 100 (a)), the variable probability / time saving table 202db2 ( (see FIG. 188(a)) is provided, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, with reference to Drawing 188 (a), the detailed contents of table 202db2 for probability variation and time saving are explained. Drawing 188 (a) is a figure showing typically the contents prescribed in table 202db2 for probability variation and time saving. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the probability variation / time saving table 202db2 has a different variation time variation pattern depending on the number of special figures reserved (number of special figures 1 reserved, number of special figures 2 reserved) They differ in the points stipulated.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 188(a), in the fifth control example, similarly to the control examples described above, a variation pattern with different variation times is defined according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. However, the illustration of the variation pattern defined for each range of values of the variation type counter CS1 is omitted.
Specifically, when the time saving type is "short time after the jackpot (high probability state of normal patterns set after the jackpot game ends)", the number of special figures 1 pending (0 to 4), the number of special figures 2 pending (0 to 4), and various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the values of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and a special symbol with a variation time of “5 to 90 seconds” according to the selected variation pattern It is configured to allow variation. Although detailed explanation is omitted, similar to each control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the jackpot winning, it corresponds to a longer variation time (90 seconds) than when the jackpot is not winning. Various variation patterns are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that the variation pattern can be easily selected.
In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the number of special figures pending, so that the variation pattern corresponding to the shorter variation time (for example, 5 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the number of special figures pending is larger than when it is small. , and various variation patterns are defined in association with .

Next, when the time saving type is "time saving A8", the number of special figures 1 pending is "0 to 2", and the number of special figures 2 pending is "0 to 2", the fluctuation time of "5 to 90 seconds" Various variation patterns corresponding to are defined, and if the number of special 1 reservations is "0 to 2" and the number of special 2 reservations is "3, 4", the fluctuation time is "5 to 60 seconds" Corresponding various short fluctuation patterns are defined. Also, if the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are defined, If the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "3, 4", a short variation pattern corresponding to the variation time of "5 seconds" is defined.
Furthermore, if the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are defined There, when the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "3, 4", a short variation pattern corresponding to the variation time of "5 seconds" is defined.
Here, in the fifth control example, the special symbol is made to correspond to the order (winning order) in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1641, and the right second ball entrance 1640. It is configured to execute a lottery, and is configured to select a variation pattern based on the acquired special figure 1 reservation number and special figure 2 reservation number, and when each special figure reservation number is small A variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of variations is larger than that of the number of variations. By configuring in this way, the state in which a large number of special figure reservations are acquired makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery in a short fluctuation time, so the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations It is possible to make it difficult for any of the above to reach the upper limit.
By configuring in this way, game balls are made to flow into the distribution unit 1064 in a state where both the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number have reached the upper limit number, and the position of the distribution member 900 is variable By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the same type of special figure reservation is continuously acquired.

In addition, even if the special figure pending number is close to the upper limit number, it may be configured to be able to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time with a low probability (eg, 1/100). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a period in which game balls are likely to flow into the distribution unit 1064 in a state in which the number of special figure reservations has temporarily reached the upper limit number.
Next, when the time saving type is "time saving B8", it corresponds to each value of the special figure 1 reservation number (0 to 4), the special figure 2 reservation number (0 to 4), and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Then, various variation patterns are defined, and the special symbol variation is executed with a variation time of "5 to 60 seconds" according to the selected variation pattern. Although detailed explanation is omitted, similar to each control example described above, the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win corresponds to a longer variation time (90 seconds) than the case where the big win is not won. Various short fluctuation patterns are defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that the fluctuation pattern can be easily selected.
The time saving type selection table 202gf is a data table that is referred to when selecting the time saving type that is set when the time saving type is selected. ) is provided in place of
Here, with reference to Drawing 188 (b), detailed contents of time saving classification selection table 202gf are explained. Drawing 188 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection table 202gf.

As shown in FIG. 188(b), in this fifth control example, it is configured to be able to win a time-saving election in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (see FIG. 187(a)). , The selection ratio of the time saving type is configured to be different between the case of winning the time saving in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the time saving in the second special symbol lottery.
Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special Figure 1 (first special symbol)", the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is in the range of "0 to 95". , The time saving type "time saving B8" is defined for the range of "96 to 99", and if the symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)", the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 value The time saving type “time saving A8b” is defined for the range of “0 to 98”, and the time saving type “time saving B8” is defined for the value of “99”.
Here, in the fifth control example, when "time reduction A8 (time reduction A8a, time reduction A8b)" is set as the time reduction type, a disadvantageous time reduction state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state is set. When "time saving B8" is set, an advantageous working time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. In addition, various control contents in the disadvantageous time-saving state, that is, the control contents for executing the game during the normal symbol high probability state so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, were explained in the above-described control examples. In order to adopt each technology, the detailed description is omitted, but for example, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is higher than the normal state, but the open pattern of the game per normal pattern to be executed is the game ball is executed in an open pattern that makes it difficult to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, or a variation time longer than the normal state is easily selected as the variation time of the normal symbol.
In addition, as a definition of a disadvantageous time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, the technical idea of making the special symbol lottery more difficult to execute than the normal state is disadvantageous to the player, as well as the special symbol lottery. Of course, even if the ease of execution is the same, or even if it is slightly more difficult to execute in the normal state, the technical idea that the benefits given based on the special symbol lottery that is executed is disadvantageous to the player is of course included. be

When "shortening of working hours A8a" is set, 95% of the time when shorting of working hours is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a short of working hours state is set. Then, as the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state, the first time saving end condition that is established when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state reaches 100 times, and the special time saving condition that is executed after the time saving state is set A second time-saving end condition, which is established when the symbol lottery is the special figure 1 lottery, is set. In other words, when two special figure 1 reservations are obtained in succession, that is, when the special figure 1 lottery is continuously executed, the second time saving end condition is established.
By configuring in this way, when a short-time lottery is elected in a special figure 1 lottery and a disadvantageous short-time state is set, the type of special symbol lottery to be executed next to the special figure 1 lottery that is elected at that time is a special figure 1. In the case of lottery, the disadvantageous time-saving state can be terminated by the first special drawing lottery executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state, and the normal state can be set. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the aim that the second time saving end condition is met before the first time saving end condition is met.
In addition, in the fifth control example, it is configured so that the second time saving end condition can be satisfied according to the type of the first special figure lottery executed during the disadvantageous time saving state, but the first time saving end condition If it can be established according to the execution order of the special symbol lottery to be executed before is established, other contents may be defined as the second time saving end condition.
For example, a second time-saving end condition may be defined that is established when a plurality of special lotteries are executed according to a predetermined rule in a disadvantageous time-saving state, or the results of a plurality of consecutive special lotteries, or You may prescribe the 2nd time-saving end conditions established when each variation pattern of special design variation for showing the result of a plurality of special figure lottery corresponds to a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second time saving end condition is satisfied and the disadvantageous time saving state ends.

That is, as shown in FIG. 188(b), in the fifth control example, if the time saving is won in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) lottery, the time saving in the special figure 2 (second special symbol) lottery It is configured to make it easier to set an advantageous time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player (it is easier to select time-saving B8) than when winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.
FIG. 186(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 186(b), with respect to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 96(b)) in the second control example described above, a variation execution flag 203ga, a variation order storage area 203gb, and a time saving flag 203gc are added. are different. The rest is the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The variation execution flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is preferentially set.
The variable order storage area 203gb is an area for storing the winning order for each reserved data (reserved design) stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. . Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203gb, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in order of winning. It should be noted that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The time reduction flag 203gc is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which it is possible to shorten the disadvantageous time reduction state (time reduction state in which the time reduction type "time reduction A8" is set), which is a time reduction state that is disadvantageous to the player. It is set to ON when it is a period in which it is possible to shorten the disadvantageous time saving state. While the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON, a process for determining whether or not a condition (second time saving end condition) for shortening the disadvantageous time saving state is established is executed.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, regarding the contents of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example, focusing on the differences from the above-described second control example, explain. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as those of the second control example described above will be omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 189(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 189(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 189(a), the ROM 222 in the fifth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 101(a)) in that a look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga is added. are different.
Prefetching reservation mode selection table 222ga, when selecting the display mode of the reserved design in the prefetching reservation effect (see FIG. 185 (a)) executed as the effect (prefetching effect) for showing the result of prefetching for the acquired special figure reservation is a data table referenced by In the fifth control example, by executing the look-ahead processing, the special figure holding corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state can be specified, and the look-ahead holding effect is executed for the special figure holding. configured as possible.

Here, the detailed contents of the prefetch suspension mode selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the prefetch suspension mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 190, the look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga includes the special figure type corresponding to the special figure suspension to be the target of the look-ahead suspension effect, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) corresponding to the special figure suspension, Each parameter is defined so that the display mode of the pending symbol is determined based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223f.
Specifically, when the special figure type is "special figure 1 (first special symbol)" and the look-ahead result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 79""2stars" for the range, "3 stars" for the range of "80 to 99" are defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern, respectively, and if the look-ahead result is "time saving B8" , "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 49" and "1 star" for the range of "50 to 99", respectively, are displayed as reserved symbols. It is defined as a mode, and if the look-ahead result is "time saving A8a" or "off", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "1 star" for the range of "0 to 99" It is defined as a display mode of the reserved design.
In other words, as the display mode of the pending symbols to be the target of the look-ahead pending effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player as the number of displayed stars increases, will be executed in the normal state. It is configured so that a look-ahead pending effect is executed.
In addition, in the fifth control example, the display mode selected using the look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga is set to display commands so that the display mode of the target reserved pattern is set as it is, and from the normal display mode , the display mode of the pending symbol can be changed to the display mode showing the effect result of the prefetching pending effect, but without being limited to this, the display mode selected with reference to FIG. It is temporarily stored as the final performance result of the performance, and as the look-ahead suspension performance, the display mode of the special figure suspension to be the target of the look-ahead suspension performance is changed step by step so as to become the finally stored final performance result. It may be configured to execute the look-ahead suspension effect as follows. In this case, for example, every time the special symbol lottery is executed before the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery that is the target of the prefetching suspension effect, the display mode of the special symbol suspension that is the target of the prefetching suspension effect is changed. In this case, many special symbol lotteries are executed from the execution of the look-ahead suspension effect to the execution of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol suspension that is actually targeted. It is preferable to make it easier to change the display mode of the reserved symbols to a display mode corresponding to the final effect result in the case of fewer cases than in the case of fewer cases.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the intention of always acquiring a large number of reserved special symbols. In addition, since it is possible to easily change the effect result of the prefetching pending effect based on the number of special pending effects that have already been acquired at the time the prefetching pending effect is executed, for example, according to the number of special pending effects that have already been acquired It is possible to easily execute a variety of prefetching suspension performances without determining whether or not the prefetching suspension performance is to be executed and without varying the content of performance results of the prefetching suspension performance.
If the special figure type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the look-ahead result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 99" for the range " 2 stars" is defined as the display mode of the reserved design, and when the look-ahead result is "time saving B8", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "2" for the range of "0 to 29""star","1star" for the range of "30 to 99" is defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern, respectively, and if the look-ahead result is "time saving A8b" or "off" , "1 star" is defined as the display mode of the pending symbol for the range of "0 to 99" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f.
In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. It is configured to execute a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the symbol lottery, and as shown in FIG. It is configured so that it is easier for the player to obtain an effect result (a display mode with a large number of stars) that is more advantageous to the player than when the special figure 2 is reserved.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the look-ahead result in more detail by referring to the performance result of the look-ahead suspension performance and the type of the special figure suspension to be the performance target.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 185, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation so that the player can grasp the type of special figure reservation that has been acquired The reserved design corresponding to the is configured to be displayed in a different display mode, but not limited to this, the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation may be configured to display in the same display mode or in a display mode with a difference that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to predict at what timing the second time-saving end condition is satisfied, and to make it difficult to predict the look-ahead result based on the display mode of the look-ahead suspension performance. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol reservation targeted for the look-ahead reservation performance is actually executed.
Furthermore, in the fifth control example, it is configured to be able to execute the look-ahead suspension effect only for the special figure suspension corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, but it is not limited to this, and the time saving state A performance (pseudo-read-ahead suspension performance) equivalent to the look-ahead suspension performance may be configured to be executable even for the special figure suspension corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during (disadvantageous time-saving state).
When executing this pseudo look-ahead pending effect, the display mode is determined for a specific pending pattern in the same manner as the look-ahead pending effect, and as shown in FIG. Executes the pseudo-prefetch pending effect that has been set. Then, when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the specific reserved pattern targeted for the pseudo-prefetching suspension performance is executed, the pseudo-prediction suspension performance is executed as the performance performed during the special figure fluctuation period. It is preferable to display the effect result of the pseudo look-ahead pending effect for informing the player of.
By constructing in this way, even when the unfavorable time-saving state continues for a long time, the pseudo-read-ahead suspension performance equivalent to the look-ahead suspension performance is executed, thereby making it easy to provide the player with a game that does not get bored. be able to. Also, in this case, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special drawing reservation whose result is the jackpot winning is more likely to be the target of the pseudo-reading reservation performance than the reserved pattern corresponding to the special drawing reservation whose result is not the jackpot winning. It should be configured as follows. Thus, even when the performance result of the pseudo-prefetching suspension performance is displayed for informing the player that the pseudo-prediction suspension performance has been executed, the possibility of winning the jackpot can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 189(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example.
As shown in FIG. 189(b), the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example It is different in that a distribution state storage area 223ga, a hold mode storage area 223gb, and a flag 223gc during disadvantageous working hours are added to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 101(b)). Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The distribution state storage area 223ga is a storage area for storing information for indicating the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 provided in the distribution unit 1064 . In the sorting state storage area 223ga, information for specifying which of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 the game ball next flowing into the sorting unit 1064 enters is stored. be.
In the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 183(a), a ball entry sensor 1064a is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through the passage port 1064b of the distribution unit 1064, and voice lamp control is performed. The device 113 is configured to be able to determine the detection result of the entering ball sensor 1064a. Based on the winning command output from main controller 110 and the detection result of ball entering sensor 1064a, the position (sorting state) of sorting member 900 can be specified, and an image icon corresponding to the specified result is configured. can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see display area Dm18 in FIG. 185(b)).

As a result, for the player, when the game ball is allowed to flow into the distribution unit 1064 next time, which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 1641) the game ball will enter. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp whether he/she is guided.
Therefore, for example, a left-handed game is executed for causing a plurality of game balls to flow into the distribution unit 1064 during the jackpot game, and the image icon displayed according to the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 is changed to the following. By determining which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 1641) the game ball that has flowed into the distribution unit 1064 enters, the already acquired special figure reservation The special design type same as the special design type corresponding to the last special design reservation (special design reservation in which the winning information is stored in the 8th storage area of the storage area of the winning information storage area 223b) It is possible to facilitate the creation of a sorting state in which game balls are guided to ball entrances capable of acquiring the type of lottery right.
In addition, in the fifth control example, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 can be specified based on the detection result of the entering ball sensor 1064a and the information included in the winning command, but this is not the only option. Instead, a detection means capable of directly detecting the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 may be provided.
The pending mode storage area 223gb is a storage area for temporarily storing the pending mode set by the prefetching pending effect, and is a pending mode (display mode) selected by referring to the prefetching pending mode selection table 222ga. ) is stored with information for identifying the corresponding special figure reservation. Then, in the pending number display update process (see S4106 in FIG. 198) executed in the main process (see FIG. 198) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the stored information is read.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the execution of a new look-ahead suspension effect is restricted during the period when information is stored in the suspension mode storage area 223gb. In other words, during the period when the look-ahead pending effect is being executed, the time saving state will end before all the special pending effects that have been acquired are consumed, and the normal state will be set, so it will be executed after that If the transition of the game state is predicted based on the special lottery, there is a high possibility that the result of the prediction and the actual transition of the game state are different, and a highly reliable performance is executed for the player. Because it becomes difficult, during the execution of the look-ahead suspension effect, based on the look-ahead result of the special figure suspension after the special figure suspension that is the target of the look-ahead suspension effect in progress Do not execute the process to identify the transition content of the game state Configure. As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.
The unfavorable time saving medium flag 223gc is a flag for indicating that the disadvantageous time saving state is set among the time saving states, and is set to ON when the time saving type "working time saving A8a" or "working time saving A8b" is set. be done. Then, in the winning command process (see S4292 in FIG. 203), when a normal figure winning information command indicating that a long opening winning game is executed is received, the setting status of the flag 223gc during disadvantageous time reduction is determined (Figure S4451 of 203), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451 of FIG. 203: Yes), it corresponds to an effect for suggesting that the normal pattern long open game (electric churong open) will be executed The displayed command is set (S4405 in FIG. 203). As a result, as shown in FIG. 184, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the second time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be established. And when it determines with having received the state command which shows that the disadvantageous time saving state ended (S9051 of FIG. 200: Yes), it is set to OFF (S9052 of FIG. 200).
<Regarding the control processing contents of the main controller in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 197, among the contents of the control processing of main controller 110 in the fifth control example, differences from the above-described second control example will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example terminates the process of determining the order of execution of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery and the time saving state with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. The contents of the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition for the game is satisfied and the process executed when the game ball starts winning are different.
Specifically, instead of the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 104), the special symbol variation process (see S10154 in FIG. 191) is replaced with the starting winning process (see S195 in FIG. 110). 196 S10195) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 191, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S10154) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S10154). As shown in FIG. 191, the special symbol variation process (S10154) is different from the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 104), and the content of the process executed to start a new special symbol variation. , and the contents of the processing executed when the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, and the other points are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the special symbol variation process (S10154) is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S203 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 104) are executed. After that, the change execution determination process (S10251) is executed. The details of this variation execution determination process (S10251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 192, but a process for determining the type of special symbol variation to be newly executed is executed.
When the processing of S10251 is finished, next, it is determined whether the type of special symbol variation to be newly executed is special figure 2 (second special symbol) (S10252), and when it is determined that it is special figure 2 (S10252: Yes), the same S205 to S207 and S251, S252 as the above-described special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 104) are executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S10252, when it is determined that it is not special figure 2 (S10252: No), next, whether the type of special symbol variation to be newly executed is special figure 1 (first special symbol) If it is determined (S10253), and it is determined that it is a special figure 1 (S10253: Yes), S211 to S213, which are the same as the above-described special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 104), and the processing of S251 and S252 Execute and terminate this process. In addition, in the processing of S10253, when it is determined that it is not special figure 1 (S10253: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Also, in the process of S202, if it is determined that it is changing (S202: Yes), the same process as the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 104) is performed. ) is executed instead of the update process (S10254), the time reduction setting process (S10255) is executed instead of the time reduction setting process (S254 in FIG. 104), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, a detailed description will be given of the variation execution determination process (S10251) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S10154 in FIG. 191). FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the details of the variation execution determination process (S10251). In this variation execution determination process (S10251), the special symbol variation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is performed in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is the processing for determining which execution area to execute based on the values of various counters stored.
In the variation execution determination process (S10251), first, the variation execution flag 203ga is initialized by setting 0 (S10271), and the data in the variation order storage area 203gb is acquired (S10272). After that, the data in the change order storage area 203gb is shifted (S10273). In the process of S310273, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203gb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→holding 3rd area, 5th area→4th area, 6th area→ The data in each area is shifted in the order of 5th area, 7th area→reserved 6th area, 8th area→reserved 7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (1) (S10274).
In the process of S10274, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (1) (S10274: Yes), the variation execution flag 203ga is set to variation execution (1) in special figure 1 (S10275) , ends this process and returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special figure 1 (1) (S10274: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special figure 2 (2) (S10276). In the process of S10276, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is special figure 2 (2) (S10276: Yes), the variation execution flag 203gb is set to variation execution in special figure 2 (S10277), this processing and return to special symbol variation processing.
In the process of S10276, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 2 (2) (S10276: No), since there is no reserved ball to be executed variable, the variable execution flag 203gb remains in the initial state, this processing and return to special symbol variation processing.
As described above, by executing the variation execution determination process (S10251), it is possible to vary the special symbols in the order in which various pending memories (special figure pending) stored in the variable order storage area 203gb are stored.
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the process content of the time saving lottery process (S8076) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving lottery process (S8076). This time saving lottery process (S8076) is executed in the special symbol determination process (see S251 in FIG. 105) of the special symbol variation process (see S10154 in FIG. 191) Instead of the time saving lottery process (see S8006 in FIG. 106) It is different in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election) are changed in accordance with the game specifications.

Specifically, when the time-saving lottery process (S8076) is executed, regardless of the type of special symbol variation to be executed this time (time-saving lottery process (see FIG. 106), the type of special symbol variation to be executed is determined. Without executing the processing of S8101 for doing), the same processing of S8103 to S8106 as the above-described time saving lottery processing (see S8101 in FIG. 106) is executed, and this processing ends.
That is, in the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 187 (b), regardless of the type of special symbol, when the normal state is set, the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving winning) is executed Therefore, in the time saving lottery process (S8076), regardless of the type of the special symbol variation to be newly performed, only the game state at the time when the special symbol variation is newly performed is determined to save time. It is determined whether or not to execute the lottery (judgment of short-time winning).
Thus, in the time-saving lottery process (S8076), the process of determining whether the execution conditions (time-saving lottery execution conditions) of the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election) are satisfied, and the time-saving lottery execution conditions are established. It is configured to execute a process of executing a time saving lottery (judgment of a time saving lottery) when there is a pachinko machine 10 For example, in addition to the normal state, when it is configured to execute the time-saving lottery even when it is set in a specific game state (for example, a disadvantageous time-saving state, etc.) , the process of S8103 may be added to the process of determining whether the flag 223gc during disadvantageous working hours is set to ON.
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the contents of the update process (S273) will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S273). This update process (S273) is different from the update process (see S253 in FIG. 108) in the above-described second control example in that a new process is added as a process for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied. are different.

Specifically, when the update process (S273) is executed, it is first determined whether the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351), and the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON. If (S8351: Yes), the time saving flag 203gc is set to OFF (S8352), then it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (S8353), and if it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied (S8353: Yes), reset the value of the time saving counter 203h to 0 (S8354), determine the command indicating the time saving reduction (S8355), then update processing (see S253 in FIG. 194) S8301 which is the same as the above The processing of ~S8306 is executed, the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the time saving counter 203h, the game state after updating various values, the state command indicating the presence or absence of time saving reduction is set (S8356), and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S8351, if the time saving flag 203gc is not set to ON (S8351: No), in the process of S8353, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S8353: No), Moving to the process of S8301, executing the same S8301 ~ S8306 processing as the above-described update process (see S253 of FIG. 194), the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, game state after updating various values, A status command indicating the presence or absence of reduction in working hours is set (S8356), and this process is terminated.
As shown in the update process (S273), in the fifth control example, when the time reduction flag 203gc is set to ON, that is, the disadvantageous time reduction state in which the time reduction type "time reduction A8" is set is set In the case, it is configured so that a special time-saving end condition can be established only for a predetermined period after the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, and it is determined whether the time-saving end condition that can be established for a limited time has been established. configured to be identifiable.
Specifically, if a short-time lottery wins a short-time lottery and a disadvantageous short-time state is set, the special symbol variation of the same type as the special symbol type that won a short-time lottery is 1 after the short-time state (unfavorable short-time state) is set. It is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied when executed as the special symbol variation of the time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten and end the disadvantageous time saving state, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S10255) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S10255). This time saving setting process (S10255) is different from the above-described time saving setting process (see S254 in FIG. 109) in that a process (S8371) for setting the time saving flag 203gc to ON when the time saving is won is added. , are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
Specifically, after executing the processing of S8351 and S8352 which are the same as the time saving setting processing described above (see S254 in FIG. 109), the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8371), and then the processing of S8353 and S8354 and terminate this process.
By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, only when the time saving is won (only when the time saving lottery is won) the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON, so the update process (of FIG. 194 S273 reference) in order to shorten the time saving end condition (the second time saving end condition) is unnecessarily executed the determination process of whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied (the time saving type "time saving A8" is set It is possible to suppress the fact that it is executed during the time saving state (game time saving state) set based on no jackpot winning.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 195, in the fifth control example, the time saving flag 203gc is always set to ON when the time saving is elected, but not limited to this, the disadvantageous time saving state ( It is configured to determine whether or not the time saving type "time saving A8") has been set, and to set the time saving flag 203gc to ON when it is determined that the disadvantageous time saving state (time saving type "time saving A8") has been set. Also good.

Next, referring to FIG. 196, the contents of the start-on process (S10195) will be described. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-on process (S10195). This start-up process (S10195) differs from the above-described start-up prize process (see S195 in FIG. 110) by adding a process of storing information in the fluctuation order storage area 203gb and by changing the contents of the prefetch process. They are different in that respect. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Specifically, when the start-up process (S10195) is executed, the same processes of S601 to S651 as the above-described start-up prize process (see S195 in FIG. 110) are executed. Special figure 1 (1) is set to the first area of the order storage area 203gb (S671), and the process proceeds to S607. In the process of S671, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203gb in the above-described variation execution determination process (S10251), the starting opening varies the first special symbol as in the fifth control example, and the second Even if there are two types of variation, one that varies two special symbols, the variation can be started in the order of winning at the starting port.
Next, the processing of S607 to S652, which is the same as the starting winning processing (see S195 in FIG. 110), is executed. When the processing of S652 is finished, the special figure 2 (2) is set to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203gb (S672), the prefetch processing is executed (S673), and this processing is finished. In the process of S672, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203gb in the above-described variation execution determination process (S10251), the starting opening varies the first special symbol as in the fifth control example, and the second Even if there are two types of variation, one that varies two special symbols, the variation can be started in the order of winning at the starting port.
Next, referring to FIG. 197, the contents of the prefetching process (S673) will be described. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prefetch process (S673). In this look-ahead processing (S673), the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the look-ahead winning information is executed is specified in contrast to the look-ahead processing (see S653 in FIG. 111) in the second control example described above. , differs in that it is configured to set a winning command including the specified information (information indicating the game state at the time of the pending change).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 198 to 207, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, liquid crystal presentation execution management processing (S4181 in FIG. 206) and , advance winning detection processing (S4182 in FIG. 207), command determination processing (see S4183 in FIG. 199), and variable display setting processing are executed. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 198, the processing contents of the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the main processing. As shown in FIG. 198, in this seventh control example, liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S4181 in FIG. 206) and preceding winning detection processing ( 207), the command determination process (see S4183 in FIG. 199), and the variable display setting process. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, the contents of the command determination process (S4183) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S4183). In this command determination process (S4183), the status command reception process (S4291 in FIG. 200) is replaced with the state command reception process (S4282) in contrast to the command determination process in the second control example (S4182 in FIG. 114). ) is executed instead of the winning command process (see S4212), the winning command process (see S4292 in FIG. 203), and the big win related process (S4293) instead of the big win related process (S4218). are identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, referring to FIG. 200, the processing contents of the state command reception processing (S4291) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process (S4291). As shown in FIG. 200, in the state command reception process (S4291), the state command received from the main controller 110 contains the Based on the processing content to be executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state based on the information (S9003: Yes), the game state is shortened based on the information included in the state command received from the main controller 110 The difference is that the content of the processing executed when it is determined that the state has been changed (S9005: Yes) is different. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the state command reception process (S4291) is executed, the same processes from S9001 to S9003 as the state command reception process (see S4282 in FIG. 117) in the second control example described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S9003, if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state (S9003: Yes), then it is determined whether the flag 223gc during disadvantageous time reduction is set to ON (S9051), and ON (S9051: Yes), the unfavorable time saving flag 223gc is set to OFF (S9052), the normal state effect setting process is executed (S9053), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9051, when it is determined that the unfavorable time saving flag 223gc is not set to ON (S9051: No), the processing of S9052 is skipped and this processing ends. Details of the normal state effect setting process (S9053) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S9003, if it is determined that it has not been changed to the normal state (S9003: No), then it is determined whether the game state has been changed to the time saving state (S9005), and it is determined that it has not been changed. If so (S9005: No), the same processing of S9007 to S9010 as the state command reception processing (see S4282 in FIG. 117) in the second control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S9005, when it is determined that the state has been changed to the time saving state, the time saving state effect setting processing is executed (S9054), and then this processing ends. The contents of the time saving state effect setting process (S9054) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, referring to FIG. 201, the processing contents of the normal state effect setting process (S9053) executed in the state command reception process (S4291 of FIG. 200) will be described. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state effect setting process (S9053). This normal state effect setting process (S9053) is different from the above-described normal state effect setting process (S9004 in FIG. 116) in that the processing contents in the case of shifting from the disadvantageous time saving state to the normal state are added. The other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state effect setting process (S9053) is executed, first, the game state set before the game state set this time (game state before change) is read out from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9101), It is determined whether the game state before the change is a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151). In the processing of S9151, when it is determined that it is in a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151: Yes), the display command for the production mode corresponding to the chance variation is set (S9152), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9151, if it is determined that it is not a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151: No), the same S9102 to S9104 processing as the above-described normal state effect setting process (see S9004 in FIG. 116) is executed, and this End the process.
By setting the display command for the production mode in the process to S9152, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode showing that the normal state is set based on the establishment of the time saving end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state background image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation to be executed next is the special symbol variation (lottery) to be executed in the normal state.
Next, with reference to Drawing 202, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S9054) performed at state command receiving processing (S4291 of Drawing 200) are explained. Figure 202 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S9054). This time saving state effect setting process (S9054) is different from the above-described time saving state effect setting process (see S900 in FIG. 118) in that the processing contents in the case of shifting from the normal state to the time saving state are changed. The other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the time saving state effect setting process (S9054) is executed, first, the same S9301 to S9304 processes as the time saving state effect setting process (see S900 in FIG. 118) are executed. Then, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), set the number of times of time saving included in the command received this time to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9305) After that, it is determined whether the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is time saving A8 (S9381), and if it is determined that it is time saving A8 (S9381: Yes), set the disadvantageous time saving medium flag 223gc to ON (S9382), set a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the unfavorable time saving (S9383), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9381, when it is determined that the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is not the time saving A8 (S9382: Yes), the processes of S9382 and S9383 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the winning command process (S4292) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning command process (S4292). This winning command process (S4292) is, for the above-described winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 61), processing content when receiving a general figure winning information command, and when receiving a special figure winning information command It is different from the processing content in . Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the winning command process (S4292) is executed, first, the same processes of S4401 to S4403 as the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 61) are executed. Then, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the winning information command for the normal pattern received this time contains the winning information indicating that the normal pattern lottery will be won (S4403 ; Yes) then determines whether the disadvantageous time saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4451). A display command for displaying is set (S4405).
That is, in the fifth control example, information indicating that a game will be executed per normal pattern long open in the general pattern winning information acquired in the state where the disadvantageous time saving state is set (specific normal pattern If the hit information) is included, an effect is executed to suggest the player a normal pattern long open hit (electric churong open). By constructing in this way, the player who is playing the game in the disadvantageous time-saving state is given an opportunity to continuously execute the special symbol lottery of the same type (second special symbol lottery). Since it can be notified before the game is actually executed per normal pattern long open, the game can be played while expecting the disadvantageous time saving state to end (shorten).
Furthermore, as in the fifth control example, the game method (left-handed game) that is executed when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, and the game method that is executed during the normal figure long open game (right-handed game ), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured to be different, it is determined that the normal long open winning game is executed before the normal long open open winning game is actually executed. By making it possible to notify the player, it is possible to set a grace period for the player to change the game method, so that the player can execute the game corresponding to the normal figure long open game can be made easier.

In addition, in the fifth control example, it is configured to execute an effect for suggesting a normal pattern long opening hit (electric churong opening) based on receiving a prize information command related to normal symbols. In other words, it is configured to be able to suggest that the game per normal long open will be executed for the player before the normal symbol lottery that wins per normal long open is executed, but it is limited to this Without this, the period from the execution of the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal long open to the stop display of the lottery result (variable period per normal) is used for the player to hit the normal long open. It may be configured to be able to suggest that a game will be played.
Furthermore, every time a winning information command related to the normal pattern is received, it is determined whether information indicating that the normal pattern long open per game is executed is included, and information indicating that the normal pattern long open per game is executed When it is determined that is included, a calculating means is provided that can calculate the period until the game is executed per normal long open, and based on the period calculated by the calculating means, open normal long It may be configured to determine the period during which an effect is executed to suggest to the player that a winning game will be executed. In this case, for example, if the normal pattern per fluctuation period is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the stage before the normal pattern per fluctuation is executed, for example, the normal pattern long open per game is executed It is sufficient that the production can be executed from the stage of receiving the winning information command related to the normal symbol indicating that the game will be played.
Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the processing contents of the special figure winning information command processing (S4451) executed in the winning command processing (see S4292 in FIG. 203) will be described. Figure 204 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of the special figure winning information command processing (S4451). This special figure winning information command process (S4451) is a process executed when a special symbol winning information command is received, and information included in the winning information command, for example, for indicating winning To set the performance mode of performance (prefetch performance) for suggesting information included in the winning information command to the player based on the information, before the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. process is executed.
In the fifth control example, by executing this special figure winning information command process (S4451), the display mode of the pending symbol can be changed in correspondence with the information for indicating winning, which is included in the winning information command. Alternatively, it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved symbols in correspondence with the information for indicating the special symbol type included in the winning information command.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, in order to make it possible to suggest to the player which is the special symbol reservation corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed in a specific game state (normal state), When a winning information command is received, the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the received winning information command is executed can be determined in advance.
By configuring in this way, by confirming the display mode of the special figure reservation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure reservation is executed for the player. It is possible to make the player predict the game state when the game is played.
Specifically, when the special figure winning information command process (S4451) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted (identified) based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S4501). , It is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is greater than 0 (S4551). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551: Yes), then it is determined whether the disadvantageous time saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4552), and is set to ON If it is determined (S4552: Yes), that is, if the winning information command received this time is the winning information command received during the disadvantageous time saving state, whether the time saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time saving state is established is predicted (S4553), and based on the result of whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied predicted in the processing of S4553, whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command received this time is in the normal state (S4554).
In the processing of S4554, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (S4554: Yes), the display mode (number of stars) of the corresponding pending symbol with reference to the look-ahead pending mode selection table 222ga is determined (S4555), and information for indicating the determined pending mode (display mode of the pending pattern) is stored in the pending mode storage area 223gb (S4556). Then, based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command (including the display command for indicating the display mode determined in the processing of S4555) is set (S4507), this processing finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4551, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is not greater than 0 (S4551: No), in the processing of S4552, it is determined that the disadvantageous time saving flag 223gc is not set to ON. When (S4552: No), in the processing of S4554, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S4554: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4507.
Next, the jackpot related process (S4293) executed in the command determination process (see S4183 in FIG. 199) will be described. In this jackpot-related process (S4293), the above-described jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 64) is executed when it is determined that the ending command is received (S4714 in FIG. 64: Yes). 64 in S4715), the ending process (S4293) is executed, and otherwise the same process is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the processing executed in the ending processing (S4293) will be described. FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S4293).
In the ending process (S4293), in contrast to the above-described ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 65), the type of special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the big hit game (after the end of the small hit game) is given to the player. It is different in that the processing for setting the production mode of the next fluctuation special figure type information production for notification is added.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 205, when the ending process (S4293) is executed, the winning information is stored after executing the same processes of S4801 to S4803 as the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 65). Based on the information stored in the area 223a, the next variation special figure type (special symbol type) is read (S4851), and a display command for indicating the read special figure type is set (S4852). Then, execution of the ending display is set (S4804), and this processing ends.

By setting the display command for indicating the special figure type read out in the processing of S4852, as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the display mode for showing to the player. Also, in the process of S4851, if it is determined that no information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, that is, if no special figure reservation is obtained, it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Since the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed first after the end of the jackpot game cannot be notified to the player based on the information, the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game is displayed on the ending screen. The processing for displaying the display mode for showing the special figure type to the player is skipped.
In addition, without being limited to this, for example, based on the processing result of the preceding winning prize detection processing (see S4182 in FIG. 207), which will be described later, predicts the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery to be executed next, and the prediction result It may be configured to set a display command for displaying the display mode based on.
Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4181) will be described. FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4181). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4181), a variable time in which a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is set. A process of updating the value of a counter (not shown) is executed, and a process of determining a rendering mode corresponding to the updated value is executed.
When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4181) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S55401). The value of the counter is updated (S5402), the effect mode corresponding to the updated counter value is set (determined) (S55402), the update processing related to other effects is executed (S5407), and the effect mode based on the update result is indicated. A display command for the display is set (S5408), and the process ends.

By configuring in this way, a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect for suggesting the current game state to the player) is triggered by the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. can be executed. In this case, regardless of the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time, the execution opportunity of the suggestion production can be set, and the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time is the elapsed time that triggers the execution of the suggestion performance. It is preferable to configure such that the suggestive effect is executed only when the length is longer than . By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the suggestive effect is executed according to the set variation pattern.
Further, the display area in which the suggestive performance is executed is configured to overlap the display area in which the variable performance is executed, the opportunity for executing the suggestive performance is established, and the suggestive performance is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Depending on the performance mode of the variable performance being executed at the timing of display, it is possible to create a situation in which the player can visually recognize the performance content of the suggestive performance and a situation in which it is difficult to see (unvisible). good. By constructing in this way, it is determined whether or not the suggestive performance visible to the player is executed according to the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and the contents of the variable performance being executed. becomes possible.
Also, in FIG. 206, as the processing content of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4181), the value of the fluctuation time counter set with the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is updated, and the value corresponding to the updated value is updated. Although the contents of processing for setting (determining) the production mode are shown, a counter that can set a value corresponding to the passage of time other than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is provided, and the production mode corresponding to the updated contents of the counter is provided. It may be configured so that it can be set (determined).
For example, a process of updating the value of a counter that can measure the elapsed time since the start of a jackpot game, or a process of updating the value of a counter that can measure the elapsed time after a specific effect is executed. , a process of setting (determining) an effect mode corresponding to the update result may be executed. In addition, in liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S4181), the values of various counters are updated, it is determined whether or not the update result satisfies the execution condition, and if the execution condition is satisfied, the execution condition is established. Only the processing for setting the flag to indicate that the ) may be configured to be able to execute a process for executing a specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the preceding winning detection process (S4182) will be described. FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing the details of the preceding winning detection process (S4182). This advance winning detection process (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 198) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the ball is detected by the ball sensor 1064a. In this case, a process for predicting whether the entrance into which the detected gaming ball can enter is the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641; The state (position) of the sorting member 900 is specified in order to indicate to which ball entrance the game ball entering the sorting device 1064 next can enter when the ball enters the ball slot. process is executed.
In the preceding winning detection process (S4182), first, whether or not the ball has entered the sorting device 1064 is determined by the entering ball sensor 1064a (S9901). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the sorting device 1064 (S9901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the sorting device 1064 (S9901: Yes), it is predicted whether the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641 ( S9902). As a method of predicting the destination of the incoming ball, a sensor (not shown) mounted on the shaft of the distribution member 900 for detecting the tilt is used to calculate the orientation of the distribution member 900 from the tilt. The detection of the direction of the distribution member 900 for predicting the destination of the ball may not be performed by a sensor that detects the inclination, but may be performed using, for example, a magnet and a Hall sensor. In addition, since the direction of the sorting member 900 is alternately left and right as described above, the winning destination may be predicted based on the number of winning times, in which case no sensor is required. can be done.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 by the processing of S9902 (S9903), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: No), the process proceeds to S9905. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: Yes), the game ball that entered the distribution device 1064 next enters the second ball entrance 1641 in the distribution state storage area 223ga. The second entrance side information indicating that the player can win (high possibility of winning) is stored (S9904), and the process proceeds to S9905.
In the processing of S9905, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the second ball entrance 1641 by the processing of S9902 (S9905), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the second ball entrance 1641 ( S9905: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902: Yes), the game ball that entered the sorting device 1064 next enters the first ball entrance 64 in the sorting state storage area 223ga. The first ball entrance side information indicating that the player can win (has a high possibility of winning) is stored (S9906), and the process ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, determination of time-saving winning is executed by special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and it is configured so that time-saving winning can be achieved with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel playability such that the special symbol lottery in the normal state is difficult to execute.
In addition, when the time-saving election is determined by the determination of the time-saving election, either a disadvantageous time-saving state that is more disadvantageous than the normal state or an advantageous time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set. . Then, when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, the special symbol lottery in the normal state is not executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied. Then, as the time-saving end conditions, the time-saving end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed in a specific order and the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number are set. configured as possible.
Therefore, when the unfavorable time saving state is set, the more the special symbol lottery is executed, the easier it is for the time saving end condition to be satisfied, so that the player who is playing the game in the disadvantageous time saving state On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to continue the game.
In addition, in the fifth control example, as a time saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time saving state, it is possible to set a fluctuation number end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to vary the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (number of times of time reduction) set as the end condition of the number of fluctuations according to the type of time reduction to be set.

In this case, for example, it can be configured to be able to set time reduction AA8, time reduction BB8, and time reduction CC8 as time reduction types, and time reduction number "100 times" as a change number end condition for time reduction AA8, as a change number end condition for time reduction BB8 Time saving number of times "200 times". It is preferable to configure the time saving CC 8 to set the number of times of time saving "300 times" as the end condition of the number of fluctuations. By comprising in this way, the continuation period of a disadvantageous time-saving state can be varied according to the time-saving classification set.
In this case, as the number of remaining time reductions displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of remaining time reductions corresponding to the case where the number of time reductions "100 times" is set can be displayed as an initial display, It is preferable to configure so that the display of the number of remaining reduced working hours is increased according to the progress of the game in the disadvantageous reduced working hours state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the disadvantageous time saving state ends.
In the fifth control example, when a disadvantageous time-saving election is made in the second special symbol lottery, a special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous than the normal state even in the first special symbol lottery until the disadvantageous time-saving state ends. is configured to run. In other words, according to the result of one special symbol lottery, a penalty can be imposed on other special symbol lotteries.
<Sixth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 227. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example, similarly to the above-described second control example, a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, and the game area (variable winning that is opened during the jackpot game) By entering (passing) a game ball into a specific area (V gate) provided in the device (attacker) 3650), a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is completed. ing. Further, similarly to the second control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is out, determination of the time-saving symbol winning is configured to be executable.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is configured to set a game state (second time-saving state) that is most advantageous to the player when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state. By constructing in this way, a player who is playing a game in a normal state wins a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and the game is changed to a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state while winning prize balls by the jackpot game. A game aiming to shift the state and a game aiming to set a game state (second time saving state) that is most advantageous to the player by winning a time saving lottery in a special symbol lottery in a normal state are performed in parallel. It can be executed, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the sixth control example, the opportunity to shift to the gaming state (second time saving state) that is most advantageous to the player is configured to be only time saving winning, and determination of time saving winning (time saving lottery) Since it is constructed so as to be executed only in the normal state, when a probability variable state more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set, the game state is shifted from the probability variable state to the second time-saving state. It is configured so that it cannot be done.
In addition, in the sixth control example, in order to make the second time saving state more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the variable probability state and the type of special symbol lottery that is executed during the time saving state It is configured to be different from the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be drawn.
Specifically, during the probability variable state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state, and the first special symbol lottery is executed more than the second special symbol lottery. It is designed to be easy. In addition, during the time saving state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery. It consists of Then, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

By configuring in this way, the variable probability state and the time saving state can be set as game states more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and the time saving state more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state. It is possible to set the second time saving state as.
The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example in that the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, and the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 part of the configuration of 1, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and part of the contents of various control processes. It should be noted that descriptions of the same contents as those of the second control example described above will be omitted.
<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Control Example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 213. FIG. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above. The point that various non-electrically operated openings are provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down (easy to flow down) when the is in an open state, and that the game ball enters the various non-electrically operated openings There is a big difference between the provision of various non-electrical accessories that are activated by the game ball that enters the game ball and the provision of a ball entrance that allows the ball to be entered by activating the various non-electrical accessories. there is
A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 1 entrance 3064) and a non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a) and an entry means (second entrance A non-electrical accessory (non-electrical accessory 3065a) associated with the ball mouth 3065) is provided, and any non-electrical accessory is provided with a corresponding non-electrical accessory (especially It is configured to operate when a game ball enters the non-electric opening 3073a in FIG. 1 and the non-electric opening 3073b in special figure 2).

Then, according to the type of game per normal pattern, which is likely to be executed when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of the normal pattern is set as the game state, the inside of the normal pattern electric accessory 3071 during the normal pattern per game The first normal game in which the game ball that has flowed into is easy to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, and the second normal game per game in which it is easy to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. , is configured to be executable.
Furthermore, in the sixth control example, when the normal pattern high probability state is set, the normal pattern per game is more likely to be executed than when the normal pattern low probability state is set (normal pattern During the winning game, it is easy to enter the game ball into the inside of the normal electric accessory 3071). A time-saving state (first time-saving state) in which a per-picture game is more likely to be executed than a second normal-performing game (first time-saving state), and a time-saving state (second Time saving state) and can be determined according to the game state set when winning a normal figure.
By constructing in this way, the type of the special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state of the normal symbols can be varied depending on the type of the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbols is set.
Further, in the sixth control example, the lottery is more advantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute games with different degrees of advantage for the player according to the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the normal symbol for the player It is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the high probability state of is set, but also in the type of the set game state.

In addition, in the sixth control example, when the time saving state is set as the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed, and the variable probability state is set. In addition, it is configured to facilitate the execution of the first special symbol lottery. Then, in a part of the case where the time saving state is set (when the second time saving state is set), a condition that is difficult to be satisfied as a time saving end condition for ending the second time saving state (time saving number of times 10000 times) is configured to set That is, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to continue substantially until the next jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery which is likely to be executed during the second time saving state, the second time saving state is set after the big win game is finished with a high probability (90%). ing.
By constructing in this way, even in a time-saving state in which the probability of winning a big win in a special symbol lottery is lower than in the variable state, the player is allowed to play a game aiming at the next big win game without terminating the game state. It is possible to make it easier for the player to win, and to make the privilege given when winning a jackpot more advantageous to the player than in the variable probability state.
Here, with reference to FIG. 208, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 208 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 208, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is different from the configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 86) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above. And, it is different in that the configuration of the right area is different. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
As shown in FIG. 208, the lower area of the game board 13 formed below the variable display unit 80 is provided with a first ball entrance 64 through which the right to execute the first special symbol lottery can be acquired. In the right area of the game board 13 formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, there are an operating device 3070, a special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, a special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a, a through gate 67, is provided.

The actuating device 3070 has a flow path in which a game ball can flow down, and a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a into which the game ball that has flowed down the flow path can enter, and a special figure 2 non-electric and an actuation port 3073b. An ordinary electric accessory 3071 is attached to the opening for allowing game balls to flow into the inside of the operating device 3070 .
The normal electric accessary 3071 is opened by the normal pattern winning game which is executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery (lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67). be. In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 3071 based on the normal symbol winning game are the same as the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 640a in the second control example described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.
The special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a by an operating mechanism (not shown), and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is closed while the special figure When a game ball enters the 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the operating mechanism is operated by the weight of the entered game ball, and the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a is configured to be mechanically opened. ing. That is, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for opening the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a.
Similarly, the special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a by an operating mechanism (not shown), and while the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a is closed When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, the operating mechanism is operated by the weight of the entered game ball, and the special figure 2 non-electrically operated accessory 3065a is mechanically opened. Configure. That is, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

In addition, for a detailed description of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that can be operated based on the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, refer to FIGS. 209 to 211 will be described later.
In addition, as described above, the non-electrical accessories (special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a and special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a) are not electrically controlled, but by mechanical action based on the weight of the game ball. It is configured to open and close. Therefore, opening and closing control is executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, etc., like the electric accessory that is electrically controlled to open and close (for example, the normal electric accessory 3071, the opening and closing door 3650f of the variable winning device 3650, etc.). Therefore, the opening/closing status is not managed by the main controller 110 or the like.
Therefore, in the sixth control example, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the actual operation status of each non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is provided, and the operating status (opening/closing status) of each non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is configured to be detectable.
Then, based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operating (open), or the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating (open ) is notified to the player by the special figure 1 non-telegram notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegram notification lamp 3065b. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the operation status of each non-electric accessory in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the sixth control example, the game determines whether the corresponding non-electric accessory is operating (open) by the special figure 1 non-telegram notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegram notification lamp 3065b. Although it is configured to notify the person, a notification means that can notify other situations may be provided. A notification means capable of informing (suggesting) the player whether the non-electric accessory 3065a is likely to operate may be provided. In this case, for example, based on the normal pattern winning type set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, it is easy to operate any non-electric accessory (which non-electric opening to enter the game ball Easy) It is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying (suggesting) the player whether a game per normal pattern will be executed.
By configuring in this way, the timing before the special non-electric accessory actually operates, for example, the first time from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the stop display of the result of the normal pattern lottery. Period, the second period from when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is stopped and displayed until the game per normal pattern is executed, the second period until the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 after the game per normal pattern is executed 3 period, the fourth period from the execution of the normal per game to the entry of the game ball into the non-electrically operated opening, the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening after the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 Select one or a plurality of periods from the fifth period until the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening and the sixth period from the time the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening until the non-electrically operated accessory operates It is possible to inform the player of the type of the non-motorized accessory to be operated (released) during the combined period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp (predict) the contents of the game to be executed later based on the contents suggested by the informing means, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, the notification by the notification means in any period (corresponding to the above-described first period, second period, and third period) from when the lottery per normal figure is executed until the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 In the case of execution, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070 based on the notification contents of the notification means. That is, when an advantageous game state (for example, time saving state) that makes it easy to open non-electric roles is set, any one non-electric role (for example, special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) operates When the game ball is entered into the ball entry means (for example, the right first ball entrance 3064) (when the first special symbol lottery is executed), the advantageous game state is finished, but when another non-electric accessory (for example, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is operating, it is possible to enter the ball (second entrance 3065) When the game ball is entered (when the second special symbol lottery is executed), in a state where the advantageous game state does not end, the above-described notification means can perform notification, It is possible for the player to select whether or not to continue the advantageous game state. In other words, by allowing the player to select the game method (whether or not game balls are to be shot), the results of games to be executed later can be greatly varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to play a more advantageous game.
Furthermore, in this case, when a game ball is entered into one ball entering means, a game more advantageous to the player than when a game ball is entered into another ball entering means is executed. , the advantageous game state is easily ended, and the game is more disadvantageous to the player when the game ball is entered into the other ball entering means than when the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means. is executed, but the contents of the privilege (for example, special symbol lottery) given when the game ball enters each ball entry means so that it is difficult to end the advantageous gaming state, and the conditions for ending the advantageous gaming state should be the default.

Here, if the detection sensor for detecting the operation status of each non-electrical accessory is specifically described, the non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) The operating mechanism (special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074, special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075) that operates when the game ball that enters the ball comes into contact with the operating position (position to operate (open) non-electric accessories) A detection means (proximity sensor) is provided at a location where the position can be detected, and when the detection means detects that the operating mechanism is positioned at the operating position (the detection signal output from the detection means If the determination means determines based on), it is configured to be able to specify that the non-electric accessory is open.
In addition, as a method for managing the operation status of each non-electric role product, it is possible to use a method other than the method of detecting the operation status of the actual non-electric role product 3065a as described above. A detection means for detecting the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is provided inside, and based on the detection result by the detection means and the type of normal figure, which non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b) to determine whether the game ball has entered, based on the determination result may be configured to specify the operation status of each non-electrical accessary. In this case, by determining whether the closing condition of each non-electric role is satisfied based on the operating status of the specified non-electric role and the acquired prize information, the operation of each non-electric role It should be configured to identify the situation. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means only for managing the operation status of the non-electric accessory, so the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
Further, in this case, the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means with different easiness of entry is detected depending on whether the non-electric accessory is activated or not, and the detection result and It is preferable to provide management processing for comparing the contents specified as the operation status of the non-electric accessary product and determining whether the specified contents are normal.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211, detailed contents of various configurations formed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 209(a) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 209(a), in the right area of the game board 13, a game ball flow-down path is formed in the vertical direction, and a game ball shot toward the right area (shot by a right-handed game) is formed. A game ball) flows down the game ball downstream flow path and finally flows into the out port 66. - 特許庁

A plurality of nails are planted in the vertical direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 209) in this game ball flow downstream channel. It is partitioned into a channel (a channel formed between a plurality of nails and the variable display unit 80) and a right channel (a channel formed on the right side of the plurality of nails).
As shown in FIG. 209(a), a plurality of nails for dividing the game ball flow downstream channel into the left channel and the right channel are provided to prevent game balls flowing down the left channel from entering the right channel. It is planted so as to form a passage area through which a game ball can pass so that the inflow and the inflow of a game ball flowing down the right side channel into the left side channel are possible.
The actuating device 3070 is provided on the left side of the game ball downstream flow path, that is, at a position where game balls flowing down the left flow path flow more easily than game balls flowing down the right flow path. The special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a are provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the right side flow path is easier to flow in than the game ball flowing down the left side flow path. It is
By forming the left side flow path and the right side flow path in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of paths for the game balls shot by the right-handed game to flow down, so for example, a plurality of devices ( When the operating device 3070, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, etc.) is in a state where it is possible to enter (open state), the device provided on the upstream side of the right area To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the progress of a game is delayed due to a game ball entering only a device on the downstream side and making it difficult for the game ball to enter a device provided on the downstream side. can be done.

A detailed configuration of the actuator 3070 will now be described. Actuating device 3070, when winning in the normal pattern lottery (when the normal pattern winning game is executed), the game ball is in a state where it can be entered (that is, the normal electric accessory 3071 is released), and is operated. By entering the game ball into either of the two non-electrical openings (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) provided inside the device 3070, The corresponding non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is in an open state.
The game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070 a and reaches the movable piece 3072 . This movable piece 3072 is variably controlled in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when a normal game is executed, and moves the game ball flowing down the first flow path 3070a to the second flow path 3070b. and a closed position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path 300a can be received and flowed down toward the third flow path 3070c. there is In addition, in the state (non-normal game per game state), the movable piece 3072 is configured to be positioned at the closed position.
In other words, the movable piece 3072 serves as means for allowing the inflow of the game ball into the second flow path 3070b when a predetermined condition is established (when a normal game is executed). In the sixth control example, the contents of the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery are configured to vary according to the normal pattern winning type. . Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from when the normal figure per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state is varied. On the other hand, the movable piece 3072 is configured to be variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern after the normal pattern per game is executed regardless of the normal pattern per type.
Then, by varying the length of the opening period according to the type of normal pattern winning, the length of the period required from the execution of the normal pattern winning game until the game ball reaches the movable piece 3072 is varied. By doing so, the game ball that has reached the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the second flow path 3070b, and the normal game that the game ball that has reached the movable piece 3072 is easily guided to the third flow path 3070c. A per-figure game is configured to be executable.

On the downstream side of the second flow path 8070b, a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is provided, and all the game balls that flow down the second flow path 8070b enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. It is configured as follows. The special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a via the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074, and the game ball entered the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. In the case, the entered game ball contacts the operation mechanism 3074, the operation mechanism 3074 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the closed state is changed to the open state. It is configured as follows.
In addition, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is in the open state, the operation mechanism 3074 is operating in the open state, so the game ball entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is operated It is constructed so as not to come into contact with the use mechanism 3074 . In other words, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for changing the special figure 1 non-electrical access material 3064a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source, the special figure 1 It is means for varying the non-electric accessory 3064a.
The special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is a non-electric accessory attached to the right first ball entrance 3064, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the right first ball entrance 3064. and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed from a closed state to an open state by operating the operating mechanism 3074 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 non-electrical activation opening 3073a. be. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on two game balls entering the right first ball entrance 3064 .
Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball entered into the right first ball entrance 3064 is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064, and the holding means is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064. When two game balls are held by the means, the game balls held by their own weight flow out to the discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine. A closing mechanism (not shown) is provided for contact by a playing ball being ejected into.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a that was in the open state is configured to be variable to the closed state.
As described above, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is electrically controlled in any case, whether it is changed from the closed state to the open state or changed from the open state to the closed state. It is configured to be mechanically variable using the weight of the game ball flowing down without using .
On the downstream side of the third flow path 3070c, a special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is provided, and all the game balls that flow down the third flow path 8070c enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured as follows. The special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a via the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the game ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. In the case, the entered game ball comes into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory in the closed state 3065a is configured to be variable to the open state.
In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state, since the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operating in the open state, the ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b It is configured so that the game ball does not come into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for varying the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source, the special figure 2 It is means for varying the non-electric accessory 3065a.

The special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3064b is a non-electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 3065, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 3065, It is configured to be variable between the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a is opened from the closed state by operating the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 based on the fact that the game ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is changed to Then, after being changed to the open state, the open state is changed to the closed state based on two game balls entering the second ball entrance 3065 .
Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that has entered the second ball entrance 3065 is provided inside the second ball entrance 3065, and the holding means When two game balls are held, the game balls held by their own weight flow out to the discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine. A closing mechanism (not shown) is provided for contact with the ejected game ball.
When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism operates, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that was in the open state is configured to be variable to the closed state.
As described above, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is electrically controlled in any case, whether it is changed from the closed state to the open state or changed from the open state to the closed state. It is constructed so as to be mechanically variable using the weight of the game ball flowing down without using .

Next, with reference to FIG. 209(b), the contents of the game ball flowing down during the normal game per game will be described. FIG. 209(b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a during the normal game.
As shown in FIG. 209(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 209(b)) in the open state is positioned at the open position. Pass through 3072 and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 operates, and the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a is in an open state (see the solid line in FIG. 209 (b)) .
When the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is variable to the position that closes the right channel, so it is fired by the right-handed game, and the right channel 3060 Most of the game balls flowing down the right channel enter the right first ball entrance 3064 .
As shown in FIG. 209(b), in this sixth control example, the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is provided for the right channel, Furthermore, since the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided on the upstream side of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, the game ball to the normal electric accessory 3071 depending on the variable state of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a There is no difference in the inflow ratio of Therefore, by changing the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a to the open state, it is not possible to flow the game ball in the game per normal figure into the operating device 3070, and the game can be smoothly progressed. It is possible to prevent an impossible situation from occurring.

In addition, while the special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is variable to the open state, a normal figure per game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b was executed. Even so, since the entrance of the game ball to the operating device 3070 is not restricted by the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, it is possible to surely enter the game ball to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. .
In addition, in the sixth control example, since the game ball flowing down the right area 3060 is configured to flow down two flow paths (left flow path, right flow path), the normal flow path provided on the upstream side Even if the figure electric accessory 3071 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right channel can be made easier to reach the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a provided downstream. In other words, when both the normal figure electric accessory 3071 and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a are in the open state, the game balls flowing down the right side region 3060 flow down one flow path Pachinko machine using the configuration 10, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to reach any accessory.
Then, when two game balls enter the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state, as shown in FIG. Object 3064a is changed from an open state to a closed state.
Here, as described above, in the sixth control example, even when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, it is configured to allow the game ball to enter the operating device 3070. Therefore, for example, a game ball may enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is open. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically activated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operation mechanism 3074 is not operated by the entered game ball, so special figure 1 The non-electric accessory 3064a continues to be open. In addition, the value of the number of balls that is the closing condition of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state is also continued as it is. In other words, even if a new game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a remains open, the player is not given any benefits.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state, the next game ball is before entering the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, A game can be motivated to enter a predetermined number (two) of game balls into the right first ball entrance 3064 to which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is attached.
In addition, in the sixth control example, as described above, in the state in which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state, it is configured to allow the game ball to enter the operating device 3070. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is downstream of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state When it is in the closed state The operating device 3070 (ordinary electric accessory 3071) may be provided at a position that is more difficult to reach. By configuring in this way, during the period in which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, it is possible to suppress the winning number of game balls to the operating device 3070 than in the period when it is not in the open state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 210(a), when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, the ball flow of the game ball launched by the right-handed game will be described. FIG. 210(a) is a diagram schematically showing the flow when a game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state. As shown in FIG. 210 (a), in the state where the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is variable (operating) to the open state, the game ball is easy to enter into the right first ball entrance 3064 Then, when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 3064, the closing mechanism (not shown) connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a changes (actuates) to the closed state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 210(b), operation contents of various mechanisms when a game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b will be described. FIG. 210(b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b during the normal game.

As shown in FIG. 210(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 210(b)) in the open state is positioned at the closed position. It flows down the upper surface of 3072, flows down the third flow path 3070c, and enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 operates, and the special figure 2 non-electrically operated accessory 3065a is in an open state (see the solid line in FIG. 210 (b)) .
When the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is changed to the open state, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is variable to the position that closes the right channel, so it is fired by the right-handed game, and the right side area 3060 Of the game balls that have flowed down, most of the game balls that flow down the right channel enter the second ball entrance 3065 .
As shown in FIG. 210(b), in the sixth control example, the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is provided for the right channel, In addition, since the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided upstream of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the game ball to the ordinary electric accessory 3071 depending on the variable state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a There is no difference in the inflow ratio of Therefore, by changing the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a to the open state, it is not possible to flow the game ball in the game per normal figure into the operating device 3070, and the game can be smoothly progressed. It is possible to prevent an impossible situation from occurring.
Furthermore, in the sixth control example, since the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is arranged above the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a, for example, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is in an open state , when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state (operated), the game ball fired by the right-handed game is the first right than the second ball entrance 3065 It is configured so that the ball is preferentially entered into the ball entrance 3064 .

By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed is excessively executed, that is, the game ball to the second ball entrance 3065. can be suppressed from entering the ball excessively. Furthermore, as long as the right first ball entrance 3064 is in the open state, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 3065, so the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is long. Since it is possible to make it easier to continue for a period, for example, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is variable (operated) to the open state just before the time saving state ends, the game ball to the second ball entrance 3065 Before entering the ball, the game is played so that the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state, and the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state (actuated) to save time. Even after the state ends, it is possible to maintain the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessary product 3065a.
Therefore, the player is motivated to play the game in order to make the game situation (opening/closing situation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) advantageous to the player when the time saving state ends. can be done.
Next, with reference to FIG.212 and FIG.213, the game content of the game per normal figure in this 6th control example is demonstrated. Figure 212 is a diagram showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern A per normal pattern (the open pattern that is likely to be set during the first time saving state) is set, and Fig. 213 is open per normal pattern It is a diagram showing the flow of the game per normal figure when the pattern B (open pattern that is likely to be set during the second time saving state) is set.
In this sixth control example, according to the general pattern per type (game state at the time of winning) set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, by varying the operation content of the general pattern per game, per normal per pattern It is constructed so that the timing of inflow of game balls into the operating device 3070 during a game is varied. Then, according to the inflow timing of the game ball into the operating device 3070, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a from the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Easy general pattern per game (per general pattern per normal pattern A is set per general pattern per game) and per general pattern that is easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b than the special figure 1 non-electric working opening 3073a A game (a game per normal pattern in which the open pattern B per normal pattern is set) is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving type (first time saving state) in which the opening pattern A per normal pattern is more likely to be set than the open pattern B per normal pattern as the type per normal pattern (first time saving state) and the normal pattern It is configured to be able to set a time saving type (second time saving state) in which the open pattern B per normal pattern is more likely to be set than the open pattern A.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the operating device 3070 than in the normal state (the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in the normal game per unit time) A first time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery when the time-saving state is set (the period can be longer than the normal state). , a second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery can be set.
The game per normal pattern is a period (opening period) from when the game per normal pattern is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), and the period during which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state (open period), and the period (ending period) from the time when the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071 is established, and the time from the time when the open state is changed to the closed state until the end of the game per normal figure. A predetermined time (predetermined condition) is defined in advance for each period, and the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 is performed according to the defined content. Furthermore, it is configured to perform movement control to move a movable piece 3072 (see FIG. 664) provided in the actuator 3070 in a predetermined movement pattern.
First, with reference to FIG. 212, the flow of the game per normal pattern executed when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set will be described. Specifically, in the general pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern A is set, as shown in FIG. 212, the normal pattern per game, the opening period (OP period) is 3 seconds An open period is 2.5 seconds, and an ending period (ED period) is a game per normal pattern of 1 second. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to be in the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds. executed.

That is, in the game per normal pattern per normal pattern A, the state in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special figure 2 non-electric activation port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is closed) is set. After a period (a period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal figure per game is executed) has passed, the opening period of the normal electric accessory 3071 is set. Therefore, the game per normal pattern per normal pattern A is executed, and the game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state are all (almost) released. It will pass through the movable piece 3072 in the state and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a operates to the open state, so the general figure per game of the open pattern A is, It becomes a regular pattern winning game that facilitates the execution of the first special symbol lottery.
In addition, in the sixth control example, in addition to the time end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time (2.5 seconds) has elapsed, as the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071, A ball-entering end condition that is established when the number of game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 (game balls that have passed through the normal electric accessory 3071 in the open state) exceeds two is also set. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the flow of many game balls into the operating device 3070 in one game per normal figure, for example, the game ball is clogged in the operating device 3070 , the increase in the number of game balls colliding with the movable piece 3072 can prevent the movable piece 3072 from being easily damaged (broken).
Furthermore, when the game balls are continuously shot, the game balls can be shot up to 100 in 60 seconds, so that the right-handed game can be continuously executed during the normal game. Since it is configured so that the ball entry end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the time end condition, the normal game per game is faster when the right-handed game in which the game ball is continuously shot is executed. It is possible to terminate. Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving type (time-saving B) that is easier to be executed than the general-pattern per game of the general-pattern opening pattern A per general-pattern A, which will be described later, is set. The player is continuously instructed to execute more normal symbol lotteries and to execute the second special symbol lottery as many times as possible until a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied. Since it is possible to shoot the game ball, the operation of the game can be improved.
In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated to the open state immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied, after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state Since it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery, until immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied, the second It is possible to play the game in anticipation that the normal pattern per open pattern B that allows the game ball to enter the non-electrically operated opening 3073b will be executed.

Next, the flow of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern B is set will be described. Specifically, in the game per normal pattern that is executed when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 213, as the game per normal pattern, the opening period (OP period) is 0.5 Seconds, the open period is 2.5 seconds, and the ending period (ED period) is 1 second. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to be in the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds. executed.
That is, in the game per normal pattern per normal pattern B, the state in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special figure 2 non-electric activation port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is closed) is set. During the period (period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal figure per game is executed), the opening period of the normal electric accessory 3071 is set. Therefore, the game per normal pattern per normal pattern B is executed, and the game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state are all (almost) closed. It will flow down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the state and enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, since the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a operates to the open state, the general figure per game of the general figure per open pattern B, It becomes a regular pattern winning game that facilitates the execution of the second special symbol lottery.
As described above, in this sixth control example, by varying the length of the opening period in the game per normal pattern according to the type per normal pattern, flow into the operating device 3070 during the per normal pattern game It is configured to differentiate the types of special non-electric openings into which the played game ball can enter (easy to enter). In this case, even if the game content per normal pattern other than the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is made common to the type per normal pattern, the game ball that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the game per normal pattern Since it is possible to reliably differentiate the types of special symbol non-electric openings that can enter (easy to enter), it is easy to execute different types of special symbol lottery when the time saving state is set. Such a novel game property can be executed while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
In addition, when the time saving state is set, the configuration for realizing the novel game property of making it easier to execute a different type of special symbol lottery is not limited to this, for example, according to the normal pattern per type By differentiating the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the per-picture game, the type of the special non-electric opening into which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can enter (it is easy to enter) can be made different. Alternatively, by varying the movable pattern of the movable piece 3072 according to the type of normal figure, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can enter (it is easy to enter). It may be configured so that the types of operation ports are differentiated.

In addition, in the sixth control example, the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 is configured to enter any special figure non-electrically operated opening, but is not limited to this, for example, A discharge port may be provided for discharging the game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 to the game area again, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may enter the operating device 3070. A winning hole for paying out prize balls may be provided, and a part of the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 may enter the winning hole without entering the special figure non-electric working hole. .
By configuring in this way, even if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during the normal game, to create a pattern in which none of the special figure non-electric accessories are operated to the open state. Since it is possible, for the player, when the game per normal figure is executed, it is suppressed that a certain relationship that any special figure non-electric accessory will be in an open state is given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
Also, as described above, due to the nature of the non-electrical accessory, there is no effect even if the game ball enters the special non-electrical opening corresponding to the case where the special non-electrical accessory is in the open state. , When the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the execution of the normal figure winning game will decrease, but the above-described winning opening is provided inside the operating device 3070 And, by providing a flow path that allows the game ball to win the winning opening, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 only operates (varies) the special figure non-electric accessory to the open state. Instead, since there is a possibility that a prize ball is given, it is possible to make the player interested in the normal figure winning game when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state.
In this case, when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the game that can enter the corresponding special figure non-electric opening than when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the closed state It is good to configure so that the ball can easily enter the winning opening described above. In the case of the state, the game ball entering the special figure non-electrically operated opening contacts the operating mechanism, operates the operating mechanism, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. When the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the game ball entering the special figure non-electric activation opening flows down toward the winning opening without coming into contact with the mechanism for operation. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, when the special non-electric accessory is in the open state, more prize balls are won during the normal game than when the special non-electric accessory is in the closed state. It is possible to make it easier.

Therefore, when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the normal figure winning game can be made a game advantageous to the player in terms of winning the prize ball. Regardless, the player can be made to play while expecting that the game per normal pattern will be executed, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.
First, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the open pattern A per normal pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 212, when the game per normal pattern is executed, the measurement of the opening period is started and the scenario for variably controlling the movable piece 3072 is updated.
The variable control of the movable piece 3072 is always defined to be constant regardless of the type of normal pattern, and the movable piece 3072 into a closed position. That is, every time the game per normal pattern is executed, the scenario is defined so that the closing period of 1.5 seconds is set at a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds after the game per normal pattern is executed). there is
And, in the normal pattern per open pattern A, 3 seconds are defined as a period (opening period) from when the normal pattern per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, and then normal 2.5 seconds are defined as a period (open period) in which the electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, and a period (ending period) from the end of the open period to the end of the game per normal figure. , 1 second. That is, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, the scenario of the game per normal pattern is defined so that the game period of the game per normal pattern is 6.5 seconds at the longest.

It should be noted that the open period (2.5 seconds) in the game per normal figure described above is configured to be able to end even by conditions other than the passage of time, specifically, to the operating device 3070 during the open period When the number of game balls that flowed in reaches a predetermined number (two) (when the conditions for ending the winning number are satisfied), the open period is terminated without waiting for the time of the open period to elapse. . In other words, when the game per normal pattern is executed, the number of inflows of game balls into the area (inside the operating device 3070) where the game ball is easier to enter than when the game per normal pattern is not executed ( It is configured so that the normal figure per game can be terminated when the number of entering balls) reaches a predetermined number. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set an upper limit to the amount of privilege that can be given to the player for one game per normal pattern, it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of the privilege to the player. be able to.
In addition, by completing the normal pattern per game by establishing the winning number end condition, the game period of the normal pattern per game can be shortened compared to the case where the normal pattern per game is ended based on the passage of time. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to increase the number of normal symbol lotteries per unit time. Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state in which the open pattern A per normal figure that can enter the game ball mainly to the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is likely to be set, even once before the time-saving state ends Aiming to execute a lot of second special symbol lottery (executing a normal figure per game that allows game balls to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b), the player continues to play can be performed, it is possible to make it easier to improve the operation of the game.
In particular, in the time-saving state in which the open pattern A per normal figure is likely to be set, the state in which the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4 pieces), that is, no more, right In a state where even if a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 3064, a new special figure 1 reservation cannot be acquired (stored), a game ball is fired in order not to shoot useless game balls. Although the act of temporarily interrupting (right-handed game) is generally executed, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example, in order to acquire the second special symbol pending memory (special figure 2 pending) , the player can be made to select an action to continue the game. Therefore, the player is provided with a novel playability of allowing the player to select between a game in which the game balls are not used wastefully and a game in which the game balls are used wastefully with the aim of giving an advantageous privilege. be able to.
As shown in FIG. 212, when the opening pattern A per normal pattern is set, the opening period is set to 3 seconds, so the closing period of the movable piece 3072 ends before the opening period elapses. will do. Therefore, when the game per normal pattern in which the open pattern A per normal pattern is set is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened, and the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is transferred to the first flow path 3070a, It will flow down the second flow path 3070b and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a (see FIG. 209(b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set will be described. In this sixth control example, the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is only different between the open pattern A per normal pattern and the open pattern B per normal pattern, and other than that, the normal contents are the same. It is configured so that a per-figure game is executed. A detailed description of the same content will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 213, in the normal pattern per open pattern B, as the opening period of the normal per pattern game, 0.5 seconds are defined, so during the period in which the movable piece 3072 is located at the closed position A game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072 .
As described above, in the sixth control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, and the player wins the normal pattern. Depending on the type per normal figure set in the case, the non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) where the game ball is easy to enter during the game per normal figure configured to be different.
Then, the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, which is the execution machine for the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player. Ordinary figure per game) is configured so that the game period of the general figure per game is shorter.

By configuring in this way, as the type of the time saving state, when the time saving type B, which is a time saving type that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, is set, the normal figure per game Since the game can be executed efficiently, the player can smoothly execute the game during the time saving state.
On the other hand, as a type of time saving state, a game ball can be entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, which is an execution machine for the first special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. When the time saving A that facilitates execution of the game per normal pattern A is set is set, the opening period of the game per normal pattern is longer, and the period required for one game per normal pattern is longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of executions of the game per normal pattern (the number of executions of the normal pattern lottery) during the time saving state.
In addition, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, the normal pattern electric accessory 3071 is after the period in which the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Since it is configured to be opened, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game per normal pattern open pattern A will enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. occurrence can be suppressed.
That is, according to the set open pattern per normal figure, the period during which the game ball can flow into the operating device 3070 (open period of the normal electric accessory 3071) and the period during which the movable piece 3072 is located at the closed position (movable Closing period of piece 3072) and, by differentiating the degree of overlap, the normal figure per game (advantage per normal figure per game) that allows the game ball to enter the special 2 non-electric opening 3073b, It is difficult to enter the game ball to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b normal game per game (disadvantage normal game per game), as a method that can be set, the method used in the sixth control example That is, the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is varied according to the type per normal pattern, and the game per normal pattern in which a short opening period is set becomes an advantageous per game per normal pattern, and a long opening period is set. As a method other than the method in which the normal per game becomes a disadvantage per normal per game, the normal per per game in which a short opening period is set becomes a disadvantage per normal per game, and the per game in which a long opening period is set is advantageous It may be configured to be a game per normal figure.

However, in this case, the movable piece 3072 will be positioned at the closed position at a timing later than the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to the unfavorable game. Since the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the game stays in the game area in the operating device 3070, there is a risk that the game ball will reach the movable piece 3072 after the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position. be.
On the other hand, in the method used in the sixth control example, the closed period during which the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position is before the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to the game with the disadvantageous normal game. In order to end, even if the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 due to the game per disadvantageous figure stays in the game area in the operating device 3070, it will enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a fraudulent act of intentionally staying in the operating device 3070 with a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 due to a game with an unfavorable pattern.
In addition, as described above with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, in this sixth control example, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game is surely transferred to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured to be able to set the open pattern A per normal pattern that cannot be entered and the open pattern B per normal pattern that surely enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, but it is limited to this. Without, for example, when the same open pattern per normal pattern is set, the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, and the required time until the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 reaches the movable piece 3072 Depending on the period, the case where the ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b and the case where it cannot be configured may be switched.
In this case, for example, the operating device 3070 during a part of the opening period (2.5 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 3071 during the normal game (first 0.5 seconds or last 0.5 seconds) It is preferable that the game ball is configured to be able to reach the movable piece 3072 located at the closed position when the game ball is flowed into. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b depending on the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, so for the player , at which timing the game ball enters the actuator 3070.

In addition, as another configuration, for example, a plurality of flow paths through which game balls that have flowed into the actuator 3070 can flow are formed inside the actuator 3070, and a movable piece is formed according to the flow path through which the game balls flow down. 3072, and when the period required from flowing into the actuator 3070 to reaching the movable piece 3072 is within a predetermined period, it is positioned at the closed position. or can reach the movable piece 3072, or is positioned at the closed position when the period required from flowing into the actuating device 3070 to reaching the movable piece 3072 is a predetermined period or longer. It may be constructed such that it can reach the movable piece 3072 that is in contact with it. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072 .
In addition, in the sixth control example, as described above, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed is changed depending on the type of game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and the type of special pattern lottery that is easier to be executed by the normal pattern per type that is set when the normal pattern is won during the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern. It may be configured to be different.
In addition, in the sixth control example, it is configured to determine the type of the non-electric opening that allows the game ball to enter in correspondence with the open pattern of the game per normal game to be executed. Without being limited to, it may be configured to vary the type of the non-electric opening that makes it easier for the game ball to enter according to the open pattern of the per-normal game to be executed. In other words, even if the normal game per pattern is executed in any open pattern, it is configured so that the game ball can enter any non-electrically operated opening, and the ball can be entered into each non-electrically operated opening. The ease of playing may be configured to be variable in correspondence with the opening pattern of the game per normal pattern.
<Regarding transition contents of the game state in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the content of transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 214 is a game flow showing transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example.

In this sixth control example, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), probability variation State (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) and three game states can be set, and further, according to the opportunity (time reduction setting opportunity) that the time saving state is set. , a first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively easily established, and a second time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively difficult to be established can be set. Specifically, if the time saving state is set based on the fact that the time saving state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set based on the time saving decision (time saving lottery). It is configured so that the second time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player, can be easily set.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not the time saving state is set, but also whether the time saving state is set based on which time saving setting opportunity.
First, the contents of the game in the normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 214, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example is formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, that is, the game area (left-handed area) in which the game ball shot in the left-handed game can flow down. The first ball entrance 64 is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery executed. On the other hand, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is low (1/240) in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the operating device Since it is difficult to let the game ball flow into 3070 , it becomes difficult to make the game ball enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 . Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.
In the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot lottery (jackpot winning judgment) is executed with a probability of 27/8192, and a short-time lottery (short-time winning judgment) is executed with a probability of 1/8192. It consists of Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot types are set as the jackpot A and the jackpot B, and when the jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set. , After the jackpot game ends, a variable probability state (space mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the variable state (space mode), a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so the right-handed game moves to the operating device 3070. A game ball is made to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 by causing the game ball to flow in and enter one of the non-electrically operated openings. becomes easy. Therefore, during the variable probability state (space mode), the right-handed game becomes a game that is advantageous to the player.
During the variable state (space mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, so basically the first special symbol A lottery is carried out. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, as described above, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types, so when jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, jackpot game ends. After that, when the variable probability state (space mode) is set again and the jackpot B (30% selection ratio) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.
During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is high probability (239/240), so as in the above-mentioned variable state , By making the game ball flow into the operating device 3070 by the right-handed game, and by entering the game ball into one of the non-electrically operated openings, the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 A state is created in which it is easy to execute a game in which a game ball is entered. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.
During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, so basically the second A special design lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot types are set as the jackpot A and the jackpot C, and when the jackpot A (selection ratio 10%) is set, the jackpot game is played. After the end, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (90% selection ratio) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), similarly to the first time-saving state (challenge mode) described above, a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is high probability ( 239/240), similar to the probability variable state described above, the game ball is made to flow into the actuator 3070 by the right-handed game, and the game ball is entered into one of the non-electrically operated openings to make the right third. It becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 . Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.
During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, so basically the second A special pattern lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot types are set as the jackpot A and the jackpot C, and when the jackpot A (selection ratio 10%) is set, the jackpot game is played. After the end, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (90% selection ratio) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.
Here, in the sixth control example, the ease of establishing the time saving end condition is different between the first time saving state and the second time saving state, and the first time saving state is better than the second time saving state is also configured so that the time-saving end condition is easily established. Specifically, in the first time saving state, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery are summed up. A time-saving end condition is set to be established when the game reaches 10 times, and when the time-saving end condition is established without executing a jackpot game, the game state shifts to a normal state.
On the other hand, in the second time saving state, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of times of execution of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery are added to 10000 times. A time-saving end condition is set to be established when the game is reached, and when the time-saving end condition is established without executing a jackpot game, the game state shifts to a normal state. In the fifth control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is configured to be about 27/8192, so when the second time-saving state is set, substantially, time-saving until the next jackpot is won. condition will continue.

<Regarding the contents of the effect in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example, characteristic effects will be described. Specifically, the contents of the time-saving winning effect for showing the time-saving winning during the normal state and the contents of the effect mode screen corresponding to each game state will be described. Effect elements that are the same as those in the control examples described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 215(a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when the time saving pattern is hit (time saving winning) in the normal state. FIG. 215(a) is a diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving symbol is hit (time saving winning) in the normal state.
In the sixth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only during the normal state. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is not a jackpot election (loss), it is configured to be able to determine the presence or absence of a short-time election, and the special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to be short-time winning with a low probability of 1/8192 in the case. Then, when the time saving is won, the time saving state (second time saving state) is set after stopping and displaying the special symbol variation for showing the result of the target special symbol lottery. Here, in the sixth control example, since the second time saving state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can be selected by special symbol lottery It is possible to aim for short-time winning while aiming to win a jackpot.
Then, when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. In the fifth control example, similarly to the control examples described above, when determining (selecting) the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, it is configured not to refer to the presence or absence of the short-time winning. Specifically, regardless of the presence or absence of the time-saving election, the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to determine a variation pattern corresponding to the loss.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not there will be a short-time winning from the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed. In addition, as in each control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is out in the normal state, since it is configured so that the variation pattern of different variation time is selected, the special symbol variation that has been elected in a short time A different variation time is set for the variation pattern of .
Furthermore, as in the sixth control example, a specific image (blackout image) is continuously displayed until a special symbol stop command is received as a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation indicating that the time-saving winning has been won. By configuring as above, even if a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, the process of determining the variation performance corresponding to the time-saving winning as the variation performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 is simplified. can be
In addition, in this sixth control example, the display screen shown in FIG. 215(a) is always displayed as a variable effect corresponding to the time-saving winning (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation). By configuring so as to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113, but not limited to this, for example, as a variable effect corresponding to short-time winning, output from the main control device 110 Set a variable effect (variable effect to indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost) based on the variable pattern command (variable pattern command indicating winning), and specify during the execution period of the set variable effect From the timing (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the variable effect is executed, the timing when the effect mode of the variable effect progresses (reach display timing), and the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the deviation), It may be configured to display a blackout image.
By configuring in this way, during the execution of the variable performance for indicating that the special symbol lottery is lost, that is, during the period when the player's willingness to play tends to decrease, it is most advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to notify that a privilege (time-saving winning) is given, the player's willingness to play is reduced even while the variable performance is being executed with a high possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery will be lost. It can be suppressed.

In addition, as a method of interrupting the effect indicating the short-time winning during the period when the normal variable effect is being executed, as described above, in addition to the method of interrupting the effect indicating the short-time winning at a predetermined specific timing For example, when an operation effect is executed to make the player operate the frame button 22, as part of the effect result of the operation effect, an effect indicating short-time winning may be interrupted. . By configuring in this way, based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), it is possible to execute an effect for notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning, so that the player's motivation It is possible to operate the operating means effectively.
Next, with reference to FIG.215(b), the content of the production|presentation in a 2nd time saving state (heaven mode) is demonstrated. FIG.215(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed during the 2nd time saving state (heaven mode).
As shown in FIG. 215(b), when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set, a rear image imitating heaven is displayed as the rear image of the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area Dm31, when the jackpot is won, the characters "continuation rate 90%" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating the probability (continuation rate) that the second time saving state (heaven mode) is set again. is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area, when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is not set after winning the jackpot (if it is not continued), a guidance mode for explaining the game content is displayed. is the universe." is displayed.
In addition, in the small display area Dm32 formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, the production modes (heaven, space, normal) corresponding to each game state are displayed in order corresponding to the degree of advantage to the player. ing. In the sixth control example, the more advantageous the game state is to the player, the more distant (at a higher altitude) the place from the ground becomes the background of the production mode, and the most advantageous game state to the player. The heaven mode is set for the (second time-saving state), and the space mode is set for the next advantageous game state (probability variable state) for the player.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the displayed presentation mode is advantageous to the player by configuring the aspect of the plurality of presentation modes and the degree of advantage to the player so as to be associated with each other. can be easily distinguished visually. In addition, through the guidance mode displayed in the small display area Dm32, the player can visually see the entire settable (shiftable) production modes, the currently set production mode, and the degree of advantage of each production mode. Since it is possible for the player to easily comprehend it, it is possible to easily discriminate whether it is better for the player to continue the presently set performance mode or to shift to a more advantageous performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 215(b), during the second time saving state (heaven mode), 10000 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in fact, without winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, 10000 times. The time-saving end condition is established based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, and it is configured to shift to the normal state, but 10,000 special symbol lotteries will be performed without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Since the ratio of execution is very small, it is configured not to display the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (remaining time reduction number of times) until the time reduction end condition is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to think that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will continue until the next big win is won. In addition, in the unlikely event that the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), an alert image for notifying the player that the second time reduction state may end. , and the number of times of short remaining time are preferably executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the second time saving state ends without any warning.
Next, with reference to FIG. 216(a), the contents of the display screen during the variable probability state (space mode) will be described. FIG. 216(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen during the variable probability state (space mode). As shown in FIG. 216 (a), during the probability variation state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed by the right-handed game, so the first special symbol variation is in the small display area Dm1. A display mode (indicated by three arrows in the drawing) is displayed to indicate that the program is being executed. A background image simulating the universe is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm, and characters of "space mode" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating the current rendering mode.

Then, in the small display area Dm31, characters of "continuation rate 70%" are displayed as a guide mode for indicating the probability (continuation rate) that the variable probability state (space mode) will be set again after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the small display area Dm32, a display mode is displayed to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current game state is the variable probability state. The game state in which the space mode is set, that is, the probability variable state is configured to have a high probability (1/60) of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and to continue the variable probability state until the next jackpot is won. there is That is, when the variable probability state (space mode) is set, the player continues until the next jackpot game is executed in the same way as when the above-described second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set. Since an advantageous game (a game in which the special symbol lottery can be easily executed) is executed, the game state becomes advantageous to the player.
Next, with reference to Drawing 216 (b), the contents of production performed when the 1st time saving state (challenge mode) are set are explained. FIG.216(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed during the 1st time saving state (challenge mode). As shown in FIG. 216(b), when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set, the rocket 1851 is configured to perform an effect for gradually increasing the altitude (altitude). Then, a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm8 to indicate the remaining number of times of the second special symbol lottery (10 times) executed during the first time saving state, and a comment "delivered to heaven" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. is displayed, and an effect corresponding to a game aiming at winning a jackpot is executed by the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state.
In other words, during the first time-saving state, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, a variable effect is executed in which the degree of rise of the rocket 1851 is varied, and when the jackpot is won, the effect that the rocket 1851 reaches heaven. executed. Then, when the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition of the first time saving state, that is, the lottery result of the time saving final change is out, the rocket 1851 breaks down and usually falls to the background (for example, the ground) It is configured to guide the player that the normal state is set after the end of the first time saving state.
In addition, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 shifts to the space mode while wandering in space. By configuring in this way, during the challenge mode, it is possible to continuously execute the period performance over the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance. can.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 227. FIG. In this sixth control example, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. FIG. FIG. 217(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 217(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described second control example (see FIG. 96(a)) in the first winning random number table 202da. Instead, the first hit random number table 202ha is replaced with the first hit type selection table 202db, and the jackpot type selection table 202hb is provided. It is different in that
The normal per pattern selection table 202hf is a data table that is referred to for determining the per per normal pattern type when winning the lottery of normal symbols (per normal pattern). Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. , The type per general pattern corresponding to the value of the acquired per general pattern type counter C6 is determined. The contents defined in the per normal figure selection table 202hf will be described later with reference to FIG.
Here, the per-universal figure type counter C6, like other various counters (first per random number counter C1, etc.), is periodically updated by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. is a counter that Specifically, each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the value of the type counter C6 per normal figure is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (99 in this control example), the minimum value 0 clear to In other words, the normal figure per type counter C6, the value is updated while looping the range of "0 to 99". Then, the updated value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 . When the general pattern is elected, the general pattern per type counter C6 stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 is read and referred to when the general pattern per type is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 217(b), the first winning random number table 202ha in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 217(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202ha in the sixth control example.
As shown in FIG. 217(b), the first winning random number table 202ha has a first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot winning against the above-described first winning random number table 202da (see FIG. 97(a)). are different in that the range of values of In addition, in the sixth control example, the possible range of values of the first winning random number counter C1 is varied. Specifically, in the above-described second control example, the possible range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as 900 "0 to 899", but in the sixth control example, "0 to 8191”. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to define a determination result with a lower probability in various determinations determined by referring to the value of the first winning random number counter C1. In the sixth control example, only the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is different. Since the configuration for storing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 26". 8191”, the lottery result “out” is stipulated, and in the case of “high probability”, the lottery result “ A lottery result "loss" is stipulated for the range of "137 to 8191".
That is, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability", the number of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 8192, and the number of values judged to be a big win is 27. Therefore, the big win is won. The probability is 27/8192 (approximately 1/300). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability", the value determined as the big win is 137 while the value that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 8192, so the big win is won. The probability is 137/8192 (approximately 1/60).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218(a), the jackpot type selection table 202hb in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 218(a), in the jackpot type selection table 202hb, two types of jackpots A9 and B9 are selected as the jackpot types corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the second special pattern (special pattern As jackpot types corresponding to 2), two types of jackpots A9 and C9 are provided.
As shown in FIG. 218 (a), as the type of special symbol, for the special symbol 1 (first special symbol), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", "jackpot A9” is associated and defined. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 70 counter values are "jackpot A9", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A9" is determined. ratio is 70% (70/100).
As shown in FIG. 218(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "jackpot B9". . This "jackpot B9" is a jackpot type (9th round first time reduction jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the first time reduction state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values are "jackpot B9", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B9" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100).
In addition, as the type of special design, for special design 2 (second special design), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", "jackpot A9" is defined to correspond. It is This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot A9", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A9" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 218(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 99" in association with "jackpot C9". . This "jackpot C9" is a jackpot type (9 round second time saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the second time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 90 counter values are "jackpot C9", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot C9" is determined. ratio is 90% (90/100).
Next, with reference to FIG.218(b), the detailed content of random-number table 202he per time saving is demonstrated. FIG.218(b) is the figure which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to random-number table 202he per time saving. This time saving random number table 202he differs from the time saving random number table 202ge in the above-described second control example in that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that can win time saving is different, and in the second special symbol lottery are different in that they define the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that can be short-time winning, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Specifically, when the normal state is set, it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "8192" in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery as a time-saving election. The judgment value to be determined is specified. In other words, in the sixth control example, the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is configured to win the time-saving prize with a probability of 1/8192. In addition, when the time saving is won, the second time saving (time saving B) is always set as the time saving type, so after the time saving winning, the second time saving state (heaven mode). .
Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the detailed contents of the per normal pattern type selection table 202hf will be described. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the per-universal figure type selection table 202hf. This general pattern per type selection table 202hf is a data table to be referred to when determining the general pattern per type set in the case of winning in the normal pattern lottery, and the set game state and the acquired Different types per general figure (A per general figure, B per general figure) are defined in association with the value of the per general figure type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, the game state is "probability change" or "first time saving", and the value of the acquired general figure per type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", It is configured so that "per normal pattern A" is determined as the type per normal pattern, the game state is "second time saving", and the value of the acquired per normal pattern type counter C6 is "0 to 99". In the range of , it is configured so that "B" is determined as the type of per normal pattern.
Here, the contents of the per-universal figure type will be explained. In this control example, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set and when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern per game is made different. When the normal pattern low probability state is set, the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in one normal pattern per game than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. It is configured to shorten the period of time. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the operating device 3070 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol.
As described above, inside the actuating device 3070, there is a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a for operating the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a attached to the right first entrance 3064 from the closed state to the open state And, since the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b for operating the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a associated with the second entrance 3065 from the closed state to the open state is arranged, the operating device A lottery of special symbols is executed in a state in which it is easier to flow game balls into 3070 (high probability state of normal symbols) than in a state in which it is difficult to flow game balls into actuator 3070 (low probability state of normal symbols). Since the game state is such that it is easy to play, the game state is advantageous to the player.
Furthermore, in this sixth control example, in the time-saving state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, different time-saving types can be set, and according to the set time-saving type, the normal design lottery is won. It is configured so that the selection ratio of the type per normal figure determined when it is different. In the sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 219(b), as the types of per normal patterns, "per normal per pattern A" and "per normal per pattern B" are selectable.

Then, when "per normal pattern A" is determined as the type per normal pattern and when "per normal pattern B" is determined, the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in one per normal pattern game. Without changing the length of the period, the length of the period (opening period) from the execution of the normal figure winning game to the opening of the normal electric accessory 3071 is configured to be different. That is, even if any normal pattern per type is determined, it is easier to flow the game ball into the operating device 3070 than the normal pattern per game executed in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) Although the normal pattern per game is executed, according to the determined per normal pattern type, it is configured to vary the inflow timing of the game ball to the operating device 3070, and by varying the inflow timing, the operating device 3070 It is possible to execute a general pattern per game in which the game ball that has flowed into is easy to enter the special figure 1 non-electric working port 3073a, and a general pattern per game in which it is easy to enter the special figure 2 non-electric working port 3073b. It consists of
Specifically, when "per normal pattern A" is set as the type per normal pattern, the movable piece 3072 is opened during the period in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072 The opening period of the game per normal pattern is set so that it becomes easy to become a state, and when "per normal pattern B" is set, the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072. , the opening period of the game per normal pattern is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in the closed state.
In addition, in this sixth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. The game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b (normal figure per B However, it is not limited to this, for example, within the first period of the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state by the normal game When the game ball is made to flow into the operating device 3070, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, and the game ball is inserted in the second period different from the first period. When it is made to flow into the operating device 3070, it is possible to enter the game ball to the special figure 1 non-electric activation port 3073a. may be configured to be executable.
By configuring in this way, the non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) that the game ball can enter according to the set normal figure per type is determined Instead, a non-electric opening (special figure 1 non- Since the electric opening 3073a, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) is determined, the player can select any non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is likely to be executed until the game ball enters the ball.

In addition, in this sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 219, the contents of the general pattern per type selection table 202hf are changed so that the normal per pattern type to be set is reliably changed according to the set game state. Although it is stipulated, it is not limited to this, and if the second time saving state is set, the second time saving state is set in the range where the type of B per normal pattern is more likely to be selected. Even if there is not, it may be configured so that B per normal pattern can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is suddenly executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol where the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, so that the player can A game with unexpectedness can be provided.
Next, referring to FIG. 220, the configuration of RAM 203 of MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 220 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this sixth control example. As shown in Figure 220, the configuration of the RAM203 in the sixth control example, the configuration of the RAM203 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 96 (b)), the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa is added The difference is that Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the second control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to set the game state after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type. In addition, since the detailed contents of the jackpot type storage area 203eb are the same as the contents described above in the sixth control example, the description thereof is omitted.
Next, referring to FIG. 221(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 221(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 221(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the sixth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described second control example only in that an expectation level selection table 222pa is added. ing. This expectation degree selection table 222pa is, in a state in which the time saving type "time saving A", that is, the time saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set, the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed "time saving A1” is set or relatively easy to execute “time saving A2” is set to the player. This is a data table that is referenced to determine the degree of expectation that

Here, as described above, in the sixth control example, as a time-saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, "time-saving A" can be set. Furthermore, as "time saving A", "time saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed is set, or "time saving A2" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively easy to be executed can be set. Then, when "time saving A" is set, it is configured to execute a common mode effect (time saving A mode) regardless of which time saving type (time saving A1, time saving A2) is set. there is
By constructing in this way, the enjoyment of predicting whether the set time-saving type is 'time-saving A1' or 'time-saving A2' is provided to the player who has executed the effect of the time-saving A mode. can do. In addition, since the mode suggestion effect can be executed in the state where the production of the time saving A mode is being executed, the actual setting for the player is performed in the state where the production of the time saving A mode is being executed. It is possible to provide an element for predicting the time saving type (working time saving A1, working time saving A2).
Here, the details of the expectation level selection table 222pa will be described with reference to FIG. 221(b). FIG. 221(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation level selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), this expectation level selection table 222pa is, for each time saving type, the type of expectation level (expectation level in which the time saving type of time saving A2 is set) and the value of the production lottery counter 223ea are defined in association with the range. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A1" (time saving type with a relatively low probability that the second special symbol lottery will be executed among the time saving A), the production The value of the lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the production mode for high expectations in the range of "0 to 4", and the production mode for medium expectations is defined in association with the range of "5 to 49", The range of "50 to 99" is defined in association with the low-expectation performance mode.
Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the production mode for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation is determined when the time saving type A1 is set. are 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A2" (time saving type with a relatively high probability that the second special symbol lottery is executed among the time saving A), the effect lottery counter 223ea The value of "0 to 19" is defined in association with the production mode for high expectations, and the production mode for medium expectations (not shown) is defined in the range of "20 to 79". , and the range of "80 to 99" is defined in association with the effect mode for low expectations.
Since the production lottery counter 223eka can take 100 values from '0 to 99', the production mode for high expectation, medium expectation and low expectation is determined when time saving A2 is reached. The proportions are 20% (20/100), 60% (60/100) and 20% (20/100) respectively. From these stipulations, it can be said that the production mode for the high expectation level is more likely to be selected when the time reduction A2 is set, but is less likely to be selected when the time reduction A1 is set. In addition, the production mode for the middle expectation degree is selected at a relatively high rate regardless of whether the time reduction A1 or the time reduction A2 is set, and the production mode for the low expectation degree is set to the time reduction A2. In this case, it is difficult to be selected, and it is likely to be selected when the time saving A1 is selected. Therefore, when the production mode for the high expectation degree is executed, while it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the set time reduction type is the time reduction A2, for the low expectation degree When the production mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type is likely to be the working time saving A1. In addition, when the performance mode for medium expectation level is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type may be any of time saving A1 and time saving A2. As a result, the player can predict the execution expectation degree of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state according to the expectation degree suggested by the performance mode, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 222 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 222 , the RAM 223 in the sixth control example has an effect lottery counter 223 ha, a short remaining time counter 223 hb, and a special figure 1 non-electric open flag 223 hc for the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example described above. , Special figure 2 non-electrification opening flag 223hd and initial fluctuation standby flag 223he are added.
The effect lottery counter 223ha is a counter used for selecting one effect mode (expectation level type) from the above-described expectation level selection table 222pa. The value of the effect lottery counter 223ha is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting the effect mode (expectation level type) of the special small hit effect, the random number (counter value) defined in the expectation level selection table 222pa is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ha, and the corresponding 1 is obtained. is selected. This effect lottery counter 223ha is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process (see FIG. 691).

The remaining time reduction counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the remaining time reduction number of times during the time reduction state.
The special figure 1 non-electric open flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 1 non-electric accessary product 3064a is in an open state (in operation) and is set to OFF when it is in a closed state (not in operation).
The special figure 2 non-electric opening flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 2 non-electric accessary product 3065a is in an open state (in operation) and is set to OFF when it is in a closed state (not in operation).
The initial variation standby flag 223he is a flag for indicating a period from the end of the big win game to the execution of the first special symbol variation, and is set to ON when the big win game ends. After the end of the jackpot game, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol variation is executed. That is, the flag is set to ON from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the first special symbol variation.

This initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is referred to when determining a period for continuously displaying the game explanation screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game.
In addition, in this control example, regardless of the special symbol type to be executed after the end of the jackpot game, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the initial fluctuation waiting flag 223he is set to OFF. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the time saving type of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is "time saving A", until the first first special symbol variation is executed, "time saving B" In the case of , the period during which the initial variation standby flag 223he is set to ON may be set until the second special symbol variation is executed for the first time. In other words, depending on the time saving type of the time saving state to be set, it may be configured to vary the special symbol variation type for setting the initial variation standby flag 223he to OFF, and it is mainly executed by the time saving type to be set. The initial variation waiting flag 223he may be set to ON until the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is executed.
<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 227, characteristic contents among the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the same control processing contents as those executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described second control example will be omitted. Further, among the control processes having the same content as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example described above, some of the control processing are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. , and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
FIG. 223 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S54112). In this command determination process (S54112), for the command determination process described above, when it is determined that the state command is received (S4309: Yes), the point of executing the state command process (S54301) and the time saving related command When it is determined that it has been received (54303: Yes), it is different in that the process of executing the time saving related process (S54304) is executed. Otherwise, they are identical.

Here, the content of the state command processing (S54301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the contents of the state command processing (S54301). This state command process (S54301) is a process executed when a state command is included in the command received from the main controller 110, and the game state set by the main controller 110 A process for setting the production mode based on, and a process for setting the remaining time reduction number of times (time reduction end condition) when the time reduction state is set are executed.
When the state command process (S54301) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a command indicating the game state has been received (S54351). (S54352), the process proceeds to S54353. Also, if it is determined that it has not been received (S54351: No), then it is determined whether a command indicating the setting of the number of times of working hours has been received (S54353), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54353: Yes) , Reads the time saving type stored in the gaming state storage area 223i (S54354), determines whether the read time saving type is "time saving A" (S54355), and determines that it is "time saving A" ( S54355: Yes), "10000" is set to the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa, and the process proceeds to S54358. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "time saving A"("time saving B") (S54355: No), the value of the remaining time saving counter 223hb is set to 10 (S54357), and the process proceeds to S54358.
That is, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is set to the remaining time reduction count (time reduction end condition) corresponding to the time reduction type (S54356, S54357). Here, the value of the set remaining time reduction counter 223hb is displayed as the remaining time reduction number of the small area Dm6 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time reduction state is set. In addition, in this 6th control example, it comprises so that the value of "10000" may be set to remaining time reduction counter 223hb as time reduction end conditions of a 2nd time reduction state. In other words, it is configured to set a time-saving termination condition that is established when a jackpot is not won in 10,000 special symbol lotteries.
In this case, since the special symbol lottery in the time saving state wins the big win with a probability of 27/8192, the big win is almost certainly won before the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the second time saving state is set, the remaining time saving number of times is updated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223hb reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100). It is configured not to execute display processing, and instead, is configured to continuously display the character "∞".

By configuring in this way, during a period when the player is not interested in the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state (a period in which a large number of remaining time reductions remain), the number of remaining time reductions is indicated each time a special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to save the trouble of executing the process of updating the display mode, and reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 .
In this case, after winning the jackpot, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed in the second time saving state may be displayed to the player as part of the result display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to analyze the actually executed game.
In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a high probability state of normal symbols in which the types of special symbol lottery to be mainly executed are different, the element for establishing the time saving end condition which is likely to be satisfied mainly is the remaining time saving number counter. By setting the value of 223hb, the process for updating and displaying the number of times of reduced remaining time can be executed based on the content of updating the value of the reduced number of remaining times counter 223hb. can be simplified.
In the processing of S54358, processing corresponding to other information included in the status command is executed (S54358), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 225, the content of the game state update process (S54352) will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process (S54352). This game state update process (S54352) is a process that is executed when a command indicating the game state is received in the state command process (see S54301 in FIG. 224). Processing is performed based on the state.
When the game state update process (S54352) is executed, first, based on the state command received this time, information for indicating the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223i (S4401), and the state shifts to the normal state. It is determined whether or not (S54401). In the processing of S54401, if it is determined that the state has shifted to the normal state, that is, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state is included in the state command received this time (S54401: Yes), the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is cleared to 0 (S54402).
Next, it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 reservation (reservation storage of the second special symbol) (S54404), and when it is determined that there is no special figure 2 reservation (S54404: No), this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S54404, if it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation (S54404: Yes), set a display command for showing the pullback effect of the number of times corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (S54405), End this process.

In other words, in the processing of S54404 to S54405, when the special figure 2 hold is acquired at the time when the "time saving A (time saving A mode)" in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed ends, the transition to the normal state After that, a process for executing a dedicated effect (pull-back effect) is executed for the second special symbol lottery that is preferentially executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in a special state while the pull-back effect is being executed.
In the processing of S54401, if it is determined that there is no transition to the normal state (S54401: No), then it is determined whether it is a transition to the time saving state (S54406), and it is determined that there is no transition to the time saving state If so (S54406: No), this process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a transition to the time saving state (S54406: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is set to ON (S54407), and the display command corresponding to the time saving type is set (S54408), this End the process.

That is, in the processing of S54407 and S54408 described above, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, the display of the game explanation screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game is continued even after the jackpot game ends. is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the contents of the time reduction related process (S54304) will be described. FIG. 226 is the flowchart which showed the content of time reduction related processing (S54304). In this time saving related process (S54304), a process for determining the effect mode based on the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is executed.
When the time saving related process (S54304) is executed, first, the current time saving type is read out from the game state storage area 223i (S54601). Next, it is determined whether the current time saving type is "time saving A" (S54602), and when it is determined that the current time saving type is "time saving A" (S54602: Yes), the received command is a special figure It is determined whether it is a command related to 2 variation (related to the execution of the second special symbol variation) (S54603).
In the processing of S54603, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation related (S54603: Yes), then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223pb is added by 1 (S54604), the special figure after the addition It is determined whether the value of the 2-variation number counter 203pb is greater than 5 (S54605). In the process of S54505, if it is determined that it is greater than 5 (S545605: Yes), set a display command to indicate that the special figure 2 fluctuation count has exceeded the upper limit (S54606), and move to the process of S54609 .

When the display command is set in the process of S54606, in the time saving state in which the time saving A in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute is set, the time saving end condition set for the time saving B "second special symbol A display mode is set for congratulating that the second special symbol lottery has been executed more than the number of times the lottery is executed is 5 times.
On the other hand, in the process of S54602, when it is determined that the time saving type read this time is not "time saving A" (S54602: No), this process ends as it is.
In the process of S54609, the value of the remaining short time counter 223hb is updated based on the received information (S54609), and a display command for indicating the updated value of the remaining short time counter 223hb is set (S54610). End the process.
Next, referring to FIG. 227, the contents of the non-power status management process (S54102) will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the details of the non-power status management process (S54102). In this non-electric situation management process (S54102), based on the detection signal output from the detection means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a Actions are taken to manage the situation.

Conventionally, a ball entry means that can execute a lottery (for example, a special symbol lottery) by entering a game ball, and a first position (open state) that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry means. ) and a second position (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first position, and a variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory) that can be changed to play a winning game (for example, A pachinko machine capable of executing a game of entering a game ball into a ball entry means by variably operating a variable means by a normal pattern winning game executed when a winning is won in a normal pattern lottery. be.
Furthermore, as a game state, a winning game is likely to be executed, or an advantageous game state in which the period in which the variable means is positioned at the first position in one winning game tends to be long, that is, the game ball is entered into the ball entry means. There is a pachinko machine configured to be able to set an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving state) that makes it easier to hit a ball.
In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, when the advantageous game state is set, the ball entering means is more likely to enter than when a game state other than the advantageous game state (for example, normal state) is set. Since the game ball can be easily entered, the player can be motivated to play the game while anticipating that an advantageous game state will be set.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine, only one type of lottery is executed when a game ball is entered into the ball-entering means, so that the contents of the lottery are excessively advantageous to the player. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the player is provided with a game that is excessively advantageous. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to motivate players to play games with the aim of setting an advantageous game state.

In addition, it is possible to set the lottery content with a higher degree of advantage to the player and set the frequency of setting the advantageous gaming state, that is, to allow the player to easily enter the game ball into the ball entry means. It is conceivable to use a specification that reduces the frequency with which possible game states are set. There is a problem that the player who is playing the game becomes bored with the game before the advantageous game state is set.
On the other hand, in the sixth control example, when a game ball enters the ball-entering means that makes it easier for the game ball to enter due to the setting of the advantageous game state, a plurality of types of lotteries are executed. It is structured so that it is easy to Then, the degree of advantage to the player is made different for a plurality of types of lotteries that are likely to be executed.
More specifically, according to the behavior (falling result) of the game ball entering the ball entering means, the first special symbol lottery with a low degree of advantage or the second special symbol lottery with a high degree of advantage is executed ( It is configured so that it is possible to By constructing in this way, the advantageous game state (time saving state) is set to provide the player with a period during which the special symbol lottery can be easily executed for a predetermined period, and the game is executed during the period. By switching the type of special symbol lottery (to make it easier to execute), the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player during the advantageous game state (time saving state) can be changed, so excessive It is possible to suppress the provision of an advantageous game.
Further, detailed description is as described above with reference to FIG. 208, in this sixth control example, the area where the game ball is likely to enter during the normal pattern per game executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery Inside (inside the operating device 3070), a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a that triggers the operation of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and a special figure 2 non-electric opening that triggers the operation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a An electric opening 3073b is provided, and the game ball is configured to be distributed to either the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a or the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b according to the operation pattern of the game per normal figure. is doing.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operated, so that the first special symbol lottery is executed. The game ball is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the mouth 3064, and when the ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated, so that the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 3065 which is the execution trigger. Furthermore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. 3065a is in operation, the game ball is configured to be difficult to reach the second ball entrance 3065.
Specifically, it is configured so that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in operation blocks the flow path in which the game ball can reach the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, in a state in which both the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a are operating, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 3064 rather than the second ball entrance 3065. It is configured to make it easier to hit the ball.
Furthermore, in the sixth control example, as the termination condition for ending the advantageous gaming state, an ending condition is set that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous game state.
In addition, in the sixth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a are placed in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. Since it is arranged, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to shoot the game ball toward the through gate 67 and the normal electric accessory 3071 without making the game ball reach each non-electric accessory. Therefore, until it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 3065 where the lottery advantageous to the player is executed (state in which the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating) , it is possible to make it difficult to play a game without entering a game ball into the right first ball entrance 3064.例文帳に追加

That is, when the game ball is fired toward any one of the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the other It is configured so that a game ball can be entered into the device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player executes a game in which a game ball is entered only to a specific device.
In addition, in the sixth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a are all provided in the right area of the game board 13. However, without being limited to this, at least a plurality of the various devices described above may be arranged at positions where game balls that have flowed down the same flow-down path can enter.
<Seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 247. FIG. In the seventh control example, as in the above-described fourth control example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big win (lost), a small win can be won. It has a game property (so-called 1 type 2 types) that can execute a big winning game by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small winning game executed based on winning. When the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state in which it is easy to acquire the second special symbol reservation memory (special figure 2 reservation) and the time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire can be set.
Pachinko machine 10 in the present seventh control example, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example described above, the point that can be stored up to a predetermined number (four pieces) special figure 2 hold, each game state is different in that the game state is set after the big winning game is executed based on the winning of the big winning or after the big winning game is executed based on the winning of the small winning. Furthermore, it is different in that the content of the production executed during the time saving state is changed. In the following, differences between the seventh control example and the above-described fourth control example will be mainly described. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fourth control example described above will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fourth control example (including each modification), the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols) , a high probability state of normal symbols), and is configured to be able to set at least, and the electric role is performed by the normal pattern per game (performed when winning in the normal pattern lottery) performed during the time saving state The object 640 a is opened, and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance (a prize winning opening) 640 .
Then, a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 results in a lottery other than a big win (for example, a small win). When it becomes, a small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game (at the end of the small hit game, information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area is stored (when it is), the jackpot game was configured to be executed. In addition, by configuring the second special pattern lottery opportunity to be retained and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as an upper limit, the second special pattern lottery is drawn during the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state). By holding and storing the opportunity, even after the high-probability state of the normal design ends (even after shifting to the low-probability state of the normal design), the second special design lottery can be executed, for example. , Even when the time saving state ends and the game state shifts to the normal state, the game is played in the normal state (normal state in which the second special symbol lottery opportunity is retained and stored) that is more advantageous than normal. Since it is possible for a player to execute the game, a state in which the possibility of executing a jackpot game is increased more than usual for a player who has finished the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly declining.
However, in the pachinko machine 10 in each control example described above, in order to end the time saving state in a state where the player who is normally playing the game during the time saving state has acquired the second special symbol lottery opportunity , Since it is configured to increase the probability of winning the normal pattern during the time saving state and extend the period in which the variable means is opened, the normal pattern winning game is executed, so it is acquired at the time when the time saving state ends. There is a problem that the number of lottery opportunities for the second special symbol that has already been completed (special symbol 2 reservation number) is always the same number, and it is impossible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.
In addition, when the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is always the same at the time the time saving state ends, in order to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, the time saving state Including the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery to be executed after finishing, prescribing low the ratio of setting the time saving state, or prescribing low the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery. There is a need to. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to play the game during the time saving state, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, as a time saving state, a time saving state (advantageous time saving state) that is easy to acquire special figure 2 reservation, and a time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) that is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reservation, is configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to vary the number of special figures 2 pending at the time when the time saving state ends according to the type of the time saving state that has been set. Therefore, even if the ratio of setting the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game is increased, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player. can be easily executed, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when a jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, a disadvantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and a small win is won in the special symbol lottery. When the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the jackpot game is played, an advantageous time-saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.
That is, according to the execution opportunity of the big winning game, it is configured to vary the advantage degree of the time saving state to be set after the end of the big winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which execution opportunity the big winning game was executed based on.
In addition, in the present seventh control example, as described above, according to the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, it is configured to vary the setting ratio between the advantageous time-saving state and the disadvantageous time-saving state, but not limited to this, For example, according to the game state at the time the jackpot game is executed (game state at the time of winning the jackpot), the setting ratio of the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state may be configured to be different. In this case, for example, when the jackpot game is executed in the state in which the time saving state is set than when the jackpot game is executed in the state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, the advantageous time saving state is It is preferable to configure so that the set ratio is high. As a result, in the most disadvantageous game state for the player, even if the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the disadvantageous time saving state is likely to be set, so the time saving state is likely to end, but the time saving state is likely to end. When the jackpot game is executed and the working hours saving state is set again, the advantageous working hours saving state is easily set, so that the working hours saving state can be easily looped through the jackpot game.

With this configuration, the player can be made to play games with different degrees of advantage step by step, so that the player can be motivated to play the game with the highest degree of advantage. . It should be noted that, in this seventh control example, as in the above-described control examples, a lottery is executed in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is easy to end with the special figure 2 pending is easier than the time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) that is easy to end with the special figure 2 pending. However, without being limited to this, for example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery, and the special figure 2 is reserved. It may be configured so that the time saving state in which it is easy to end in the state of not acquiring the special figure 2 reservation is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state in which it is easy to end in the state of acquiring .
In the pachinko machine 10 of each control example described above, as the number of times of special symbol variation to end the time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, by enabling the setting of different times according to the jackpot type, the time saving state In some cases, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the event will continue. As a result, the player can play while expecting that the time saving state will continue for a longer time.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example described above, so as to end the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol variation in the special symbol variation of the number of times to end the time saving state (special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied) was configured to
On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the corresponding special symbol variation. Furthermore, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation once can be set. That is, when the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation once is set, the time saving state continues until the first second special symbol variation is performed during the time saving state. However, when the first second special symbol variation is executed, for example, when the time saving state is set without having the lottery right of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation), time saving When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the time saving state is terminated.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery can be surely executed, and the period for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation in the time saving state can be shortened. can be done. That is, in the seventh control example, the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is set to be established by executing the second special symbol variation once becomes a disadvantageous time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.
In addition, in the seventh control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation twice can also be set. In this case, since it is possible to continue the time saving state until the second second special symbol variation is started, the second entrance 640 during the variation period of the first second special symbol variation It becomes a period in which it is easy to enter a game ball. That is, in the seventh control example, the time saving state in which the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation twice becomes an advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player.
In addition, in the seventh control example, as described above, the time saving state is configured to be ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is established, and the first special symbol variation during the time saving state By configuring the time-saving end condition that can be established in , it is possible to set a time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) that is difficult to acquire special figure 2 suspension, but not limited to this, for example, the above In the pachinko machine 10 configured to terminate the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, as in each control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied. A short variation pattern in which a short variation time (eg, 0.1 seconds) is set and a long variation pattern in which a long variation time (eg, 60 seconds) is set may be selectable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and a disadvantageous time-saving state depending on the selected variation pattern. In other words, when the time saving end condition of the same content is set as the time saving end condition of the time saving state, the easiness of obtaining the special figure 2 reservation can be varied according to the set variation pattern.

Moreover, in this case. Depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning (small winning), different types of time saving states can be set, and depending on the time saving type to be set, the selection ratio between the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern and long fluctuation pattern is different. Alternatively, a period in which a short variation pattern is likely to be selected and a period in which a long variation pattern is likely to be selected can be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big winning game. You can
By configuring in this way, since it is possible to switch between the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state in the period from the setting of the time saving state of 1 to the end of the time saving state, the player Until the last moment when the time saving state ends, the game can be played while expecting that the game will be executed in the advantageous time saving state.
In addition, by combining the technology of the seventh control example and the technology of each control example described above, the time saving state is terminated at various timings such as the start timing and stop timing of the special symbol variation executed in the time saving state. It may be configured so that it becomes possible. In this way, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, by configuring the timing of actually ending the time saving state to be variable, it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide games with unexpectedness.
<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 232. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is provided with a V winning device 650 that is opened during a small winning game with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 146) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example described above. Changes in position and structure, changes in the arrangement positions of the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, and changes in the structure of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640. , the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is changed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 228, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Ball opening 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, V winning device 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is display means for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . The first symbol display device 37 is also activated when the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is also a display means for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, the pachinko machine 10 with two types of special symbols is used, but the pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol may be used without being limited to this.
In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10, or changes the special symbol (first symbol). It is indicated by the lighting state whether it is medium (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result), and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to an advantageous win for the player or not. A pattern corresponding to winning or a missing pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, blue), and the combinations of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this control example, various game states are notified by a combination of light emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.
In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is performed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (winning a prize). Then, in the lottery for the special symbols, a win/loss determination (hit lottery) is performed as to whether or not a small hit has been won. Here, a small winning game, which is a privilege game advantageous to the player, is executed based on the determination that the small winning has been won.

During the small winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario) to provide a state in which the V winning device 650 can easily win a ball. When the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game wins a specific area (V winning opening 1650) described later, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends. During the jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), and a state is provided in which the variable winning device 65 is easily allowed to win a ball.
In this control example, the total number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the game is larger in the big win game than in the small win game. In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls that the player acquires, the big winning game is a privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the small winning game. It should be noted that the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player may be larger in the small winning game than in the big winning game. In this way, it is possible to give a privilege having a different degree of advantage according to the privilege game to be executed, so that the player can play the game while enjoying which privilege game is to be played. .
Further, in this control example, when the jackpot game is executed, a game state (for example, normal state) different from the game state before the jackpot game is executed is set, and after the jackpot game ends, the executed jackpot game is set. A new game state can be set based on the information (for example, the small hit type (big hit type) and the game state at the time of winning (small hit winning)). On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, the game state before executing the small winning game continues during the small winning game and continues even after the small winning game ends. In other words, during the jackpot game, which is highly advantageous to the player (the number of prize balls is large), by setting the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, during the jackpot game, the player is given excessive It is configured not to change the game state when a small winning game having a lower degree of advantage than the big winning game is executed while suppressing the provision of the privilege.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game state from being changed triggered by the execution of a small winning game with a low degree of advantage. In addition, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is set during the small winning game as in the big winning game, or based on the type of winning the small winning. , It may be configured to determine the game state after the end of the small winning game. Also, based on the game result during the winning game (during the jackpot game, during the small winning game), it may be configured to determine the game state set after the end of the winning game. ), which makes it easier to enter the ball in the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 (variable ball entering means). It is preferable to determine the type of game state to be set after the end of the winning game based on the determination result. It is preferable to set a game state that is advantageous to the player, or to set a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player when the specific area is passed than when the specific area is not passed. As a result, during the winning game, it is possible to play a game aiming at setting an advantageous game state after the winning game is finished, and the player can play the game with ambition.

In addition, a winning game is executed in a state in which a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and an event in which the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set even after the winning game is completed. When a winning game is executed in a state of being continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is forcibly set after the winning game is finished. can be configured to As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game state advantageous to the player is excessively continued.
When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the balls can be easily entered into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, and by allowing the balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A game that can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and the opening period (variable A period in which a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65 is set, a round game period in which the open state is set, and after the end of one round game period, the next round game is played. A predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the start of the game, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A jackpot game period consisting of an ending period to be played is set.
In this way, by setting the opening period in accordance with the start timing of the jackpot game, it is possible to prepare for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction in accordance with the timing when the specific prize winning port 65a is opened during the jackpot game. Since it can be performed, a jackpot game can be performed smoothly. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.
In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

In addition, in this control example, based on the ball entering the specific area (V winning opening 1650) during the small winning game, the big winning game can be executed after the small winning game ends. Therefore, by setting the ending period as the final period of the small winning game, the preparation period to switch from the game (left-handed game) executed during the small winning game to the game (right-handed game) executed during the big winning game can be provided, the player can smoothly switch between games.
In addition, regarding the length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period), at the time of the special symbol lottery (at the time of winning the small winning), the timing when the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the start of the small winning game Different lengths may be set according to the type of the winning jackpot, or the game state set at any of the time, the end of the small win game, the start of the big win game, and the end of the big win game. A game content (game method) different from the game content (game method) before the jackpot game is set as the game content (game method) to be executed after the end of the game. A period (e.g., 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period (e.g., 2 seconds) of other jackpot games, and is executed after the player completes the jackpot game during the ending period. It is preferable to construct an effect that guides the contents of the game in advance so that it can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.
On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed in which the game content (game method) before the start of the jackpot game and the game content (game method) executed after the jackpot game is the same are executed, the ending period of the jackpot game ( For example, 1 second) may be set to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of other jackpot games. This allows the player to play the game efficiently.
In addition, without using a configuration for actually distinguishing between the game content (game method) before the jackpot game and the game content (game method) executed after the jackpot game is completed, for example, the type of the jackpot game to be executed (small game) A game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is defined in advance based on the winning type) and the game state set before the jackpot game, and the ending period of each jackpot game is determined according to the contents of the regulation. It may be configured to set the length.

In the seventh control example, the game state is set to either the "normal state" or the "time saving state". In the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the special symbol jackpot probability is set to (30/1000), and the normal symbol hit probability is set to low probability (3/300). The time-saving state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to (30/1000) and the normal symbol winning probability is set to a high probability (150/300).
In this control example, after the time saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state, and the time saving described above The number of times indicates a time saving end condition. In other words, the number of times of shortening time means that the termination condition of shortening of time is established when the lottery of special symbols is executed once without executing a jackpot game after setting of the shortening of time state.
Furthermore, in the seventh control example, it is possible to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing of starting the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine how long the time saving state will continue.
In addition, in this control example, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition (time saving number of times) regarding the number of special symbol lotteries during the time saving state is defined, but other configurations are specified as time saving end conditions. May be used, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (specific outlier) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) Time saving end condition and time saving state are set A time-saving end condition that is established when a predetermined time (e.g., 100 seconds) elapses after being played, or the ball entered a specific ball entrance (e.g., general ball entrance 63a) during the time-saving state A termination condition that is established when the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5) may be set.

In addition, the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is established and the timing of ending the time saving state may be different. It is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is established, and if it is determined that the time saving end condition is established, depending on whether the specific condition is established, the time saving state is ended before the special symbol fluctuation is started, or the special symbol The time saving state may be terminated at a predetermined timing during the period from when the variation is started until it is stopped (including the stop display timing of the special symbol variation). Since the timing which performs the process for discriminating whether the time saving end conditions were satisfied by this can be unified, the control process for ending a time saving state can be simplified.
In addition, as the above-mentioned specific condition (element for determining the timing to end the time saving state when the time saving end condition is satisfied), a special symbol lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (a special symbol that was elected for a small hit The type of game state (normal state or time saving state) set at the time the lottery) is executed, the set small hit type, and the type of the big hit game. For example, if the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the normal state and if it is the time saving state, the same small win type (jackpot type) is set, and the same time saving end condition is set. However, the timing of ending the time saving state may be made different.
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example described above, the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this control example). When it does, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electrical winning device 640 is configured to be in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time, so that a winning game (universal figure winning game) is executed.
The time required for the second symbol to be displayed (normal pattern fluctuation time) varies depending on the probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state). In the low probability state, the general pattern fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, and in the high probability state of the normal pattern, the general pattern fluctuation time of 1 second is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of normal pattern per game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state).

In addition, a configuration different from the seventh control example may be used. good. By configuring in this way, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern per game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the time required for the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern fluctuation time) In a pachinko machine 10 constructed so that the normal state is longer than the time-saving state, a normal pattern winning game (ordinary pattern winning game) is hard to be executed (ordinary pattern low-probability state), and the normal pattern is changed from the normal state. When the game state shifts to a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) in which a winning game is likely to be executed, the long-term normal design fluctuation executed during the normal state (is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) During the execution of the normal pattern per game), the period during which the normal pattern lottery is not executed is set for a long time despite the fact that the time reduction state is set. can be suppressed.
In this case, since the normal pattern lottery is executed once per second at the maximum in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern (during the normal state). Since it becomes easier, the probability of winning per normal pattern in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern should be set low.
In this control example, the game content (opening operation pattern of the electric accessary 640a) of the normal figure per game to be executed is configured to be different between the normal state and the time saving state. That is, the normal pattern per game that is executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the general pattern per game that is executed during the normal state, that is, the ball is the second ball entrance. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball to 640. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set after the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a). Normal normal per game) is executed, when the time saving state is set, through the opening period of 1 second (closed period of the electric accessory 640a), per normal per game in which the open period of 3 seconds is set (Time saving normal figure per game) is executed.
Next, referring to FIG. 228, the configuration of the electric accessory 640a will be described. The electric accessory 640a in the seventh control example is configured to be displaceable between an embedded state (restricted state) in which it is embedded in the game board 13 and a protruding state (induction state) in which it protrudes from the game board 13. It is configured to be positioned in an embedded state (closed state) when a game per normal pattern is not executed. And, when the normal figure per game is executed, it is displaced to the protruding state (induction state) for a predetermined period (up to 3 seconds) based on a predetermined variable pattern.

Here, terms for the displacement state of the electric accessory 640a will be explained. The closed state of the electric accessory 640a is a state in which the flow path for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 640a) is closed. 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the ball 640a is embedded in the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term is a restricted state (a state in which the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640 is restricted). is sometimes used.
In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 640a is a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is opened. It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term induced state (state in which the ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640) is used. In some cases.
As shown in FIG. 228, when the electric accessory 640a is in the guided state, most of the balls shot in the left-handed game are formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state. An electric accessory 640a is arranged so as to flow into the path. The flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is formed with a lower spherical flow surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entrance 640, and the ball that reaches the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a enters the second entrance. It flows down to ball mouth 640 .
Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal game, it is configured to end the normal game. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one normal game is one.

As described above with reference to FIG. 228, in this control example, the game method that is advantageous to the player is the same ( It is configured to be a left-handed game). In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, a lottery opportunity for normal symbols is established even in the normal state (a ball passes through the through gate 67), and a lottery for normal symbols is executed. Then, as a result of the normal pattern lottery, when the hit is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball fired by the left-handed game can reach is controlled to be opened, so the normal pattern per game During execution, there was a risk that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 640 .
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, even if the normal pattern winning game is executed in the normal state, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640 is about 1 second, whereas in the normal state It is configured so that the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the induced state by the normal figure winning game is 0.2 seconds.
By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for executing the game in the same game method in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) and the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), that is, In the pachinko machine 10 which can win the normal game even in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state.
The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the balls shot to the game board flow down the left side area of the game board 13. Most (approximately 100%) of the spheres are configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, a variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result is out, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .
Returning to FIG. 228, the description continues. A V winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side in the view point of FIG. 228) so that the ball that is launched in the left-handed game and flows down the left side area can win. Here, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232, the specific configuration of the V winning device 650 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 650 will be described. In this control example, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, a small win game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed. And it is configured so that a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed by winning a ball in a V winning opening 1650 provided in the V winning device 650 .
This control example is based on the ball passing (winning) through the specific area (V winning opening 1650) during the small winning game which is executed when the small winning is won without winning the big winning by the special symbol lottery. , a jackpot game is executed. In this way, by establishing the first condition (small winning) and the second condition (passing through the specific area) step by step, the privilege game (big winning game) that is advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game that the player will never get tired of.
In addition to this, it may be constructed so as to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the execution opportunity of the jackpot game (special jackpot game) that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbols, the jackpot game that is established when the ball enters a specific winning port (V winning port 1650). (V jackpot game) will be executed. In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets bored.

First, referring to FIG. 229, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is provided with an opening/closing door 650a that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can easily win in the V winning device 650 and a closed state in which the ball is less likely to win than in the open state. This open/close door 650a is provided at a position (see FIG. 228) where balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a small winning game is executed.
In the V winning device 650, a first flow path 650b is formed in the space between the first partition wall 650k1 and the second partition wall 650k2, through which the ball that has passed through the opening/closing door 650a in the open state flows down. A reservoir valve 660a is provided at a position where the ball (falling period of 0.5 seconds) that has flowed down the path 650b reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 660a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is temporarily stored in the storage portion. is doing. A storage sensor 650s is provided above the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be able to detect that the ball is stored in the storage portion. Further, a ball detection sensor 650s2 for detecting the winning ball of the V winning device 650 is provided upstream of the first flow path 650b, and based on the detection of the ball by the ball detection sensor 650s2, a small hit is detected. The number of winning balls to the V winning device 650 is counted during the game, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 650s2 at the position where the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down immediately afterward, it is possible to prevent a situation in which more than a prescribed number of balls enter the V winning device 650. At the same time, the prize balls during the small win game can be immediately awarded to the player.
A second flow path 650c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 650b, and a first out port 1163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 650c. As shown in FIG. 229, the balls flowing down the first flow path 650b do not directly flow into the second flow path 650c. It is configured such that subsequent balls that have flowed down the path 650b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a and are guided to the second flow path 650c. The first out port 1163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 650c is a ball entrance for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and flows down the second flow path 650c ( After a falling period of 0.1 second), the ball entering the first out port 1163a flows down a ball discharging path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
Although detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 660a can store balls according to the progress of the small winning game (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the small winning game is executed). It is configured to be variably operated between a released state in which it is difficult to retain the ball. When the reservoir valve 660a is positioned in the released state, the first flow path 650b and the third flow path 650d communicate with each other, and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650b or is stored in the reservoir of the reservoir valve 660a. The sphere that was being held flows down the third flow path 650d. The third flow path 650d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm, which is formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 650k1 and the third partition 650k3.

A first movable valve 660b is arranged at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 650d. The first movable valve 660b has a predetermined movable pattern when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and has a guide position (protruding position) that can receive the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d, It is configured to move to a passing position (buried position) where the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d cannot be received. Specifically, it is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d driven and controlled by the main controller 110. When the valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when energized), the first movable valve 660b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 660b retreats from the inside of the V winning device 650. When the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when the electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 660b moves to the guidance position (the position where it projects from the game board 13) protruding into the V winning device 650. It is configured as follows.
The first movable valve 660b positioned at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. It is configured to slope downward toward the path 650e. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d with the first movable valve 660b at the guiding position (protruding position) (falling period of 0.2 seconds) will flow through the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b into the fourth flow path. It will flow down towards 650e. A second out port 1163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 650e, and a ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path 650e (falling period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 1163b. This second out port 1163b is a ball entrance for ejecting a ball that has entered the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the above-described first out port 1163a. The ball thus played flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 .
On the other hand, when the first movable valve 660b is located at the passage position, the third flow path 650d and the fifth flow path 650f communicate with each other, and the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d (falling period 0.2 second) flows into the fifth flow path 650f (falling period 0.1 second). A V winning port 1650 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 650f. The V winning opening 1650 is a winning opening that can be a trigger for executing a jackpot game. execution right), and after the small winning game being executed ends, the big winning game is executed.
As shown in FIG. 229, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first outlet 1163a and a second outlet 1163b. By configuring in this way, a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650 when the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state can pass through a flow path (third stream) when the reservoir valve 660a is in the released state. Flowing into the passage 650d, the fourth passage 650e, and the fifth passage 650f) can be reliably prevented. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, the first outlet 1163a is eliminated, the second flow path 650c and the fourth flow path 650e are communicated, and the storage valve 660a is in the storage state. , the ball flowing down the second flow path 650c may enter the second out port 1163b. In this case, the third partition wall 650k3, which is linearly provided in the vertical direction in FIG. It is preferable to provide so that the extension in the direction is on the right side of the fourth partition wall 650k4 (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 229). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball flowing down the second flow path 650c flows into the fifth flow path 650f.

In this way, in this control example, the big winning game is executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 1650 during the small winning game. Hereinafter, when the jackpot games are described by classifying execution opportunities, the jackpot game executed when the player enters the V winning port 1650 will also be referred to as the V jackpot game.
As described above, the V winning device 650 of this control example enters an open state in which a ball can win a prize by executing a small winning game, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 660a is released into the third flow path 650d. , and depending on the operation status of the first movable valve 660b when the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b, whether the ball wins the V prize opening 1650 It is configured to determine whether or not
In addition, in the seventh control example, by making the game ball enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, the game ball can enter the V winning hole 1650 without fail. Although the valve 660b is configured to operate, it is not limited to this. The movable content of the first movable valve 660b may be defined so that there are cases where the ball hits and cases where the ball does not enter. The time during which the ball cannot enter the opening 1650 is 6 seconds, and the time during which the ball is positioned at the passing position (the time during which the ball can enter the V winning opening 1650) is 1 second. may be configured. As a result, the ratio of the balls flowing down the third flow path 650d to the V winning opening 1650 can be reduced to about 1/6.
Next, referring to FIGS. 230 to 232, unlike the seventh control example, a small winning game in which the game ball can enter the V winning opening 1650 and a small winning game in which the game ball cannot enter are executed. The contents of the winning ball flow in the V winning device 650 during execution of the small winning game in the possible modified example will be described. In the following description, even if a plurality of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 in one small winning game, the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d is one. A case where the operation of the valve 660a is controlled will be described as an example. First, with reference to FIG. 230, the ball flow in the first half period of the small winning game (the period in which the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state) will be described. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device 650 when the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state in the small winning game. Although the detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be in a storage state from when the small winning game is executed until the V winning device 650 is closed. there is When a plurality of balls enter the V winning device 650 while the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage portion formed in the storage valve 660a, and the second prize is won. The ball P2 contacts the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 660a, flows down the second flow path 650c, and enters the out port 1163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, all winning balls (for example, balls P2) other than the ball P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a enter the out port 1163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls will not stay in the V winning device 650. In addition, since the storage valve 660a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 650a of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state (after the operation control for closing the door is executed), one operation is performed. It is possible to reliably reduce the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d to one in the role-winning game.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the easiness of winning the ball into the V winning opening 1650 according to the timing of winning the ball into the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the number of winnings. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to provide a fair game to all players.
It should be noted that, without being limited to this, according to the number of prizes to be awarded to the V prize winning device 650 during the small winning game, the ease with which the ball enters the V prize opening 1650 can be varied. Alternatively, for example, a distribution member ( (Cloon, etc.). Then, only the balls stored in a specific storage part out of the six storage parts can enter the V winning port 1650 when the storage state of the storage part is canceled, and the balls other than the specific storage part can be entered. The balls (up to 5) stored in the storage are configured to enter the second out port 1163b when the storage state of each storage is released. In addition, when the next ball is sorted by the sorting member toward a storage section in which balls are already stored, it collides with the already stored ball and is stored in another adjacent storage section. A flow path is provided to communicate between the respective reservoirs.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the winning ratio to the V winning opening 1650 according to the winning number of winning balls to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, thus motivating the player. can be made to play.

Even in the case of such a configuration, by changing the number of times of canceling the storage state of the storage unit that causes the ball to flow down to the out port during one small winning game according to the type of the small winning, The winning ratio to the V winning opening 1650 can be varied.
Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the contents of the ball flow (second half period of the game per role) when the storage valve 660a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the reservoir valve 660a shifts from the reservoir state to the release state in the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 231, after the V open/close door 650a is closed and new balls cannot enter the V winning device 650, the storage valve 660a is released (indicated by a dotted line in the figure). Upon transition, the sphere P1 (see FIG. 230) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. In the state shown in FIG. 231, the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the guidance position, so the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b, and moves along the fourth flow path 650e. It flows down and enters the second out port 1163b.
On the other hand, at the timing when the ball P1 (see FIG. 230) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d and reaches the first movable valve 660b, the first movable valve 660b moves to the passage position. With reference to FIG. Figure 232 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when the storage valve 660a moves from the storage state to the release state in the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 232, when the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b and the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the passage position, the fifth flow path 660f It flows down and wins to the V winning mouth 1650. - 特許庁
It should be noted that, in the seventh control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. The game for entering the game ball into the ball opening 640 is also configured to make the player play the left-handed game, furthermore, make the player play the left-handed game even during the small winning game, and make the right-handed hitting only during the big winning game. Although it is configured to play a game, it is not limited to this, and like each control example described above, it is configured to make the player play a game in a different game method in the normal state and the time saving state. You can

<Regarding the production content in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 233 to FIG. 235, contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. In this seventh control example, when the special figure 2 suspension acquired during the time saving state reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), based on the information indicating the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 suspension, to the player , the number of times the jackpot game (jackpot game based on winning a small hit) can be executed can be notified.
Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is stipulated that a big win or a small win is always won, and a small win is executed based on the fact that the small win is won. It is constructed so that the game ball can surely pass through the specific area by playing the game normally during the game.
In other words, in the seventh control example, the number of special figure 2 reserves that have already been acquired, the game of the game type to acquire the right to execute the jackpot game is executed, for example, the special figure 2 reserve is 4 In the state where the pieces are acquired, it becomes possible to execute the next four jackpot games. In addition, in the seventh control example, as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal state and the time saving state can be set, and furthermore, as the time saving state, it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 hold. A disadvantageous time-saving state and an advantageous time-saving state in which the special figure 2 reservation is more likely to be acquired than the disadvantageous time-saving state can be set.
Then, when a predetermined condition (special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit) is established during the time saving state, based on the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired, whether the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends It is configured to be capable of informing the player of the number of rights with which it is possible to perform a jackpot game based on the determination result.

Thus, in addition to the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 reservations is also predicted. Above, by configuring the number of times that the jackpot game can be executed (the number of times that the jackpot can be executed) can be notified, it is possible to notify the number of times that the jackpot can be executed, which is larger than the acquired special figure 2 reservation. becomes.
Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the number of times to be notified to the player as the number of executable jackpots is configured to be different based on the game state at the time when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit and the look-ahead result. . In other words, the number of times other than the maximum number can be notified to the player as the number of times the jackpot can be executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from completely grasping the content of the game to be executed later based on the reported number of executable jackpots and lowering the player's willingness to play. be able to.
In addition, in this seventh control example, during the final variation period of the time saving state in which it is possible to acquire the special figure 2 suspension, even if the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired to the upper limit number, the lottery result of the final variation Also, it is configured to be able to change the performance mode of the guide performance for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation based on the prefetch result of the acquired special figure 2 reservation, or to execute the performance different from the guide performance.
Here, among the conventional pachinko machines 10, in the pachinko machine 10 having the same game characteristics as the seventh control example, the special symbol final variation period ( In the time-saving final fluctuation period), a privilege given to the player during the time-saving state by executing a guidance effect to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit (a privilege that makes it easier to acquire the special figure 2 hold) There is a game that allows a player to play a game that makes the most of the .

However, in the above-described conventional side pachinko machine 10, for example, the lottery result of the time saving final variation, the second special symbol lottery executed after the time saving final variation (corresponding to the special figure 2 hold executed during the normal state Regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery), the guidance effect will be executed, so even if you do not acquire the number of special 2 reservations to the upper limit during this time-saving final fluctuation period, the second special that will be executed after that Based on the result of the pattern lottery, when the time saving state in which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained is set again, the player will be forced to play a game that shoots the game ball unnecessarily, and the player will be forced to play. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to guide a proper game by
On the other hand, in this seventh control example, when determining the effect mode to be executed during the time saving final variation period, the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the time saving final variation, and the acquired special figure 2 Based on the look-ahead result corresponding to the hold, after the time-saving final fluctuation period has elapsed, it is again determined whether the time-saving state that can acquire the special figure 2 hold is set, and based on the determination result, It is configured so that the presence or absence of execution of the guidance effect is differentiated.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a guidance effect that suppresses the player from playing a game for reaching the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation number unnecessarily.
In addition, in the seventh control example, according to the content of the game that can be executed after the time-saving final variation period has passed (acquisition difficulty of special figure 2 reservation), it is configured to vary the production mode of the guidance production. For example, if the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small winning, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the small winning is set, the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is For a player to be in a time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) in which it is difficult to obtain a special figure 2 reserve after the end of a jackpot game executed based on a small winning and a small winning. It is configured to execute a guidance performance emphasizing the guidance mode of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

In this way, by configuring the strength and weakness of the guidance mode as the performance mode of the guidance performance executed during the time-saving final fluctuation period, the special figure 2 hold is more effective than the case where the monotonous guidance performance is always executed. It is possible to suppress execution of a game disadvantageous to the player due to the end of the period without acquiring the special figure 2 reservation during the period in which the player is disadvantaged if not acquired. In this case, if the time saving final variation is not determined by the number of addition lotteries added to the number of times of the special symbol lottery that has been executed, but is determined using the number of times of remaining time saving in the time saving state, the remaining number of times of the counter is used. It can be said that it is a performance that is executed by
In the seventh control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game ends, a time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, or the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. It is configured to be able to set a time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is easy to set.
Specifically, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the timing when the first second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state is started, and the advantageous time-saving state is set. is set, the time saving state is terminated at the timing when the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is started. By configuring in this way, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed only once is set without acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, and the advantageous time-saving state is set. When is set, a time-saving state that can acquire the maximum number of special figures 2 pending is set.
First, with reference to FIG. 233(a), the effect contents when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 233(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the first second special symbol variation in the time saving state (first hit state) set after winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery. . As shown in FIG. 233 (a), the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed is the lottery result (unfavorable lottery result) in which the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, or the lottery result in which the advantageous time-saving state is set. (advantageous lottery result) is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 233(a), an icon 1800a imitating "V" as a display mode corresponding to a disadvantageous lottery result and an icon 1800a imitating "Vx5" as a display mode corresponding to an advantageous lottery result. 1800b is displayed. Then, when the icon 1800b is selected, "super chance mode" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding transition to the super chance mode, and the icon 1800b is selected in the secondary display area Ds. In this case, a comment "Vx5 for 5 consecutive wins" is displayed as a guide mode for guiding acquisition of 5 jackpot game execution rights (5 consecutive chances possible).
Next, with reference to FIG. 233(b), description will be given of the effect contents during the big win game executed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. FIG. 233(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the special figure 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 233(b), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a notification effect for notifying the player in advance of the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is executed.
Next, with reference to Drawing 234 (a), the contents of the production in an advantageous time saving state are explained. Fig.234 (a) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in super chance mode which shows that it is an advantageous time saving state. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), the super chance mode is configured so that the time saving state continues until the second special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times, and during the variation period of the second special symbol variation FIG. 2 is configured so that the hold can be acquired. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, "Right hit The comment "Save V" is displayed.
And, in the small display area Dm9, a V icon that increases or decreases corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 pending number is displayed. This V icon is configured to be able to display up to the same number as the special figure 2 reservation, and each time the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, the first V icon hr1 to the fourth V icon hr4 are displayed in order. In the example shown in FIG. 234(a), since two special figure 2 reserves are obtained, the first V-icon hr1 and the second V-icon hr2 are displayed.

After that, when the player acquires the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number, as shown in FIG. An icon hx imitating "MAX" is displayed as a form, an effect is executed in which a treasure box 1810 appears in the center of the main display area Dm, and the characters "Treasure box appears" are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "What is the content?" are displayed as a guidance mode for explaining the progress of the effect being executed to the player. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect of opening the treasure box 1810 will be executed later.
Next, as shown in FIG. 235(a), when the treasure box 1810 is opened, an effect is executed in which the contents 1810a appear from within the treasure box 1810, and the player can currently obtain The number of rights to execute the jackpot game played is reported. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the fourth special figure 2 pending look-ahead result is a small hit winning in which the advantageous time saving state is set, so the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed Based on the jackpot game (1 time), the jackpot game (4 times) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 reservation, and the second corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reservation A big win game (once) based on the result of a second special pattern lottery executed after the end of the big win game based on the result of the special pattern lottery, and a big win game (4) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserve that can be acquired during the variation. The content 1810a is displayed in the display mode “V×10” for notifying that the right to execute the jackpot game ten times in total has been acquired.
By configuring in this manner, in the seventh control example, not only the number of already acquired jackpot game execution rights, but also the game contents after the jackpot game that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot game execution rights After predicting up to, it is possible to inform the player of the information about the execution right of the jackpot game that can be acquired, so that the number of special figures 2 reserved that can be reserved and stored at once (4) A player can be notified in advance of the number of rights to execute a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how the execution right of the jackpot game will be generated (whether it can be obtained), and the game can be provided without getting bored.
In addition, in the seventh control example, when a proper game (right-handed game) is executed during the small winning game, it is possible to execute the big winning game, so On the other hand, it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot games as the number of execution rights of the notified jackpot game. When the game ball cannot enter the specific area immediately and the jackpot game is not executed, it is preferable to execute an effect for reducing the number of rights to execute the jackpot game notified in advance. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of times of the big winning game executed has decreased according to the contents of the executed game. In this case, it is preferable to be able to inform the player of information for letting the player know how the number of rights to execute the jackpot game has decreased (the right to execute has been extinguished). As a result, when the number of rights to execute the big winning game remains, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of rights to execute the big winning game decreases again.
In this seventh control example, when an appropriate game (right-handed game) is executed during a small winning game, it is possible to execute a big winning game, so Since the player can be provided with the same number of jackpot games as the notified number of rights to execute the jackpot game, all the calculated numbers of right to execute the jackpot game are notified in advance to the player. Not only the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired, but also game contents after the end of the jackpot game that can be executed based on the right to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired. It is also possible to calculate the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired by the game, and notify the player of a part of the calculation result in advance.
As a result, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute a jackpot game with a probability of about 1/2 when a small prize game is executed, the player can obtain the execution right of the jackpot game. When the number of 1/2 of the number calculated as a number is configured to notify the player in advance, based on the number of actually executed small winning games and the number of big winning games, advance notification is made. By making it possible to execute an update process for increasing or decreasing the number of rights to execute a jackpot game, the player can easily predict the number of times the jackpot game can be executed, and at the same time, the prediction can be performed. The reliability of the information used can be improved.
Returning to FIG. 235(b), the description continues. FIG. 235(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the final variation period of the second special symbol in the super chance mode indicating the advantageous time saving state. In the seventh control example, the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is set is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is not set. During the second special symbol fluctuation period (during the final fluctuation period) in which the conditions for ending the advantageous time saving state are satisfied, as shown in FIG. Guidance notification for prompting the game ball to enter the ball is configured to be executable, but when the special symbol variation that is the final variation period is executed, the jackpot game is played in the already acquired special figure 2 reservation. If there is a special figure 2 reservation corresponding to winning when the advantageous time saving state is set after the end, without executing the above-described guidance notification, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), the player It is configured so that a performance mode for congratulations is set.

In other words, during the special symbol fluctuation period in which the time saving end condition is established to end the time saving state, even if the upper limit number of special figures 2 is not acquired, if the specific condition is satisfied, special It is configured so as not to execute a guidance notification for prompting acquisition of the maximum number of FIG. 2 pending. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number unnecessarily. In addition, in the seventh control example, in order to notify the player that there is a special figure reservation (small winning reservation) that wins a plurality of small hits in the special figure reservation that has been acquired during the winning game V stock performance is configured to be executable, but in this case, if one small winning reservation is held, V stock rendering execution conditions indicating that a plurality of small winning reservations are held. is not satisfied, the notification of the small hit suspension will be stocked. In this case, it can be said that the process of storing the small winning reservation in the acquired special figure reservation is also the process of stocking the privilege.
<Regarding the game state transition in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the contents of transition of the game state in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 236 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 236, in this seventh control example, as in the above-described fourth control example, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (special low-probability state of the pattern, high-probability state of the normal pattern) can be set, and the player can execute the left-handed game regardless of which game state is set. is doing.
As the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a normal state (first normal state) is set in a state in which special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension are not obtained. In this first normal state, a game for entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. In this first normal state, since the special symbol low probability state is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed in which the jackpot is won with a probability of 30/1000.
Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type. After the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, a time saving state is set.

In the seventh control example, it is possible to set a time saving state in which the game degree to the player is different, and the second time saving state (advantageous time saving state) that is advantageous to the player A first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than (advantageous time-saving state) can be set. More specifically, by varying the ease of acquiring the special figure 2 hold during the period in which the time saving state is set, the degree of play in the time saving state is varied, and the second that is advantageous to the player When the two-time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) is set, it is configured such that a plurality of game balls can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a short period of time. On the other hand, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set, it is configured to make it difficult to enter a plurality of game balls into the second ball entrance 640 within a short period of time. ing.
In other words, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set and when the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) is set, the ease of acquiring the special figure 2 holding ball during the time-saving state are different, the degree of advantage to the player is made different.
The pachinko machine 10 of this control example has, as a game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). is configured to be configurable. Since the normal state is set to the low probability state of the normal pattern, it is difficult to win the normal pattern, and even if the normal pattern is won, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a is short and the second input. A game state is entered in which it is difficult (impossible) for a ball to enter the ball opening 640 . Therefore, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game and a first special symbol lottery is executed is mainly performed.
Then, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is executed to win the jackpot with a probability of 30/1000. When the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, and the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the content of the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 236, in this control example, the first time saving state and the second time saving state can be set as the time saving state. Here, the difference between the first time saving state and the second time saving state will be described. The first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are both time-saving states in which a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state are set, and the special symbol lottery winning probability and the normal symbol lottery winning probability. are identical. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is also the same.
The only difference is the timing when the time saving state ends (shifts to the normal state), and in the first time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed once, the second special symbol variation The time saving state is ended at the start timing, and in the second time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed twice, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol variation. is configured as
That is, since the second time saving state can be set longer than the first time saving state by the variation period of the second special symbol variation, it can be said that the time saving state is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this control example, the number of balls that can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during one normal game is one, and the second special symbol variation is Since it is configured so that the time saving end condition is established when it is executed once, when the first time saving state is set, the second special symbol holding memory (Special figure 2 holding) is acquired. It becomes easier to end the time saving state without it. On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol variation, so the second special symbol's reservation memory (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired. Makes it easier to end the time-saving state. That is, from the point of view of the acquisition situation of the special figure 2 reservation when the time saving state ends, the second time saving state can be said to be a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.
And, although details will be described later, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set at a rate of 5% is selected. It is configured as follows. That is, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than in the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is configured to be easier to shift to the second time saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. . Therefore, the game state (normal state, first time saving state) in which the transition ratio to the second time saving state that is most advantageous to the player is different for the player who is playing the game in the normal state is changed step by step. Since the transition can be made, it is possible to prevent the user from becoming bored with the game before the second time saving state is set. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the game state shifts to the second time saving state more easily than the normal state, the operation of the game can be easily improved.

In the first time-saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by the left-handed game, the normal pattern lottery is executed, and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game. . Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a small win is won with a probability of 970/1000 and a big win is won with a probability of 30/1000. During the first time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is established based on the execution of the second special symbol lottery once, and the special symbol variation for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery in which the time-saving end condition is established. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start timing of (second special symbol variation). As a result, the time saving state is likely to end without being able to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, so after setting the time saving state, the game state becomes a game state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed only once.
In the seventh control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state, it is always configured to win a big win or a small win, and when a small win game is executed. 2, when the game is executed normally, the execution right of the jackpot game (winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 1650) can be surely obtained. That is, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery and the number of executions of the jackpot game can be the same number. Therefore, the game aiming at setting the second time saving state in which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained is performed rather than the first time saving state.
In the time saving state, the small prize types set when the small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery have different selection ratios, and the selection of the small prize A in which the first time saving state is set after the big prize game is finished. The ratio is 80%, the selection ratio of the small win B in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished is 15%, and the selection ratio of the small win C in which the second time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished is 5%. Configure.
That is, when the first time-saving state is set, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery can be continued until the small hit B in which the normal state is set after the big win game ends is selected. can.

Then, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set is selected at a rate of 5%. . That is, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than in the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is configured to be easier to shift to the second time saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. . Therefore, the game state (normal state, first time saving state) in which the transition ratio to the second time saving state that is most advantageous to the player is different for the player who is playing the game in the normal state is changed step by step. Since the transition can be made, it is possible to prevent the user from becoming bored with the game before the second time saving state is set. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the game state shifts to the second time saving state more easily than the normal state, the operation of the game can be easily improved.
During the second time saving state, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the second special symbol lottery is executed for the first time saving state described above, and the second special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start timing. In other words, since it is possible to set the time saving state during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation until the time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to acquire the special figure 2 hold during the fluctuation period, and the special figure 2 hold It is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state with the acquisition of Therefore, the second time saving state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.
In addition, since it is the same as the 1st time saving state mentioned above about the transition content of the game state based on the result of the 2nd special design lottery performed during the 2nd time saving state, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted. And when the second time saving state ends, that is, when the second special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is established is stopped and displayed, if the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, the above-mentioned first time saving state , the transition is made to the first normal state in the same manner as at the end of .
On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed, if the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, the second special symbol lottery is set in the normal state as the game state to the second normal state where is executed. In this second normal state, the super chance mode is continuously set.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the special symbol lottery for winning a small hit is executed with the same probability (970/1000) as in the time saving state. Then, the small hit type is selected at the same selection ratio as the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state. In other words, if many special figure 2 reservations are obtained, even if the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to easily return to the time saving state with a high probability.
In addition, in the present seventh control example, the selection ratio of the small hit type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small hit type in the time saving state are set to be the same, but not limited to this, one game state may be configured so that it is easier for the player to select a small win type that is more advantageous to the player than the other game state. It is preferable to make it easy to select the winning type (small winning C). By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Become. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of ending the time saving state in the state of acquiring special figure 2 suspension, it is possible to easily increase the difference in the degree of advantage between the first time saving state and the second time saving state can.
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 242. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 have a partial configuration, and the voice lamp The difference is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 are partially changed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 237, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 237(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 237(a), the ROM 202 of this control example replaces the first winning random number table 202fa with the ROM 202 of the above-described fourth control example (see FIG. 156(a)). The table 202ia is replaced with the small winning type selection table 202ff, the small winning type selection table 202if is replaced with the short working time granting table 202fe, the short working time grant table 202ie is provided, and the small winning scenario table 202ii is newly added. different, otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. For convenience of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 156(a)) of the fourth control example are omitted in FIG. 237(a). , are omitted from the drawing except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first winning random number table 202ia is different from the above-described first winning random number table 202fa (see FIG. 157(a)) in the specified value determined as a big win and the specified value determined as a small winning. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. Detailed description of the same contents is omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 238, the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ia will be described. FIG. 238(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 238(a), the first random number table 202ia includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202ia1 and a second special symbol (special FIG. 2) has a special symbol 2 random number table 202ia2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery.
Next, with reference to FIG. 238(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202ia1 will be described. FIG. 238(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 238(b), the "big win" is defined for the range "0 to 29" out of the range "0 to 999" that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take. That is, in the seventh control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 3/100 (30/1000).
Next, with reference to FIG. 238(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ia2 will be described. FIG. 238(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 238(c), among the range of "0 to 999" that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take, "jackpot" is defined for the range of "0 to 29", and "30 A value of ~999” defines a “small win”. That is, in the seventh control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is about 3/100 (30/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 97/100 (970/1000).

In the seventh control example, the type and number of judgment values for judging that the small winning is determined to be a constant value regardless of the game state. It may be configured to set a high probability state (special symbol high probability state) and a low probability state (special symbol low probability state). In addition, in the seventh control example, only the second special symbol lottery is configured to be determined as a small winning, but the special symbol 1 random number table 202ia1 can also be determined to be a small winning in the first special symbol lottery. may be specified, and in this case, the probability of winning a small hit may be the same or different between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The small hit type selection table 202if is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). This small hit type selection table 202if is different from the small hit type selection table 202ff (see FIG. 159) of the fourth control example described above in that the content of the defined small hit type is changed. are otherwise identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.
Here, with reference to Drawing 239, small hit classification selection table 202if is explained. FIG. 239 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202if. In the seventh control example, according to the set small winning type, the advantageous degree of the time saving state after the end of the big winning game executed based on the establishment of the execution condition during the small winning game is changed. Configure. More specifically, it is configured to be able to set an advantageous time-saving state or a disadvantageous time-saving state according to the set small hit type.
Specifically, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, three types of the above-described small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. , and the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is defined for the range of "0 to 79" for "small hit A (5R jackpot A when passing V)", and for the range "80 to 94""Small hit B (5R big hit B when passing V)" is defined, and "small hit C (5R short time big hit C when passing V)" is defined for the range of "95-99" .

Here, in each small winning type, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 1650 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game (big winning type) to be executed after that is set. For "small hit A", "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, for "small hit B", "jackpot B" is set, and for "small hit C" In other words, "jackpot C" is set.
In the seventh control example, even if any one of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" is set, a jackpot game is executed five times in which the variable winning device 65 is opened as a jackpot game. A game (five-round game) is executed, and after the jackpot game is finished, a time-saving state is set. And, detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 240, but according to the jackpot type to be set, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, a time-saving end condition with different contents is configured to be set. is doing.
In other words, it is configured to provide privilege games (jackpot games, games in a time-saving state) in which only time-saving end conditions are changed according to the small-hit type set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the type of the jackpot is specified by the player according to the contents of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, and the time saving state set later is the advantageous time saving state or the disadvantageous time saving state. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting in advance whether or not.
In addition, in the seventh control example, the content of the big win game executed based on the small win winning is configured to be the same (5 rounds (R) big win game) regardless of the small win type. Without being limited to this, it may be configured to be able to execute a big winning game with different contents according to the small winning type. In this case, a jackpot game with the same jackpot game content is used in at least a part of the jackpot type in which a disadvantageous time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set and at least a part of the jackpot type that is set in an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Configure it to run.

By constructing in this way, a jackpot game that makes it difficult for a player to discriminate whether a time saving state set after the jackpot game is over is an advantageous time saving state or a disadvantageous time saving state while the jackpot game is being executed. And, a jackpot game that makes it easy for the player to determine that the time saving state set after the jackpot game is an advantageous time saving state while the jackpot game is being executed (only the jackpot type in which the advantageous time saving state is set is executed) possible jackpot game) and can be executed, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of content the jackpot game will be executed.
The time saving grant table 202ie is a data table in which the conditions for ending the time saving state (time saving end conditions) to be set at the end of the jackpot game are defined in advance. It is stipulated. This time saving provision table 202ie is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and is referred to when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends). , A different number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) is set according to the jackpot type.
Here, with reference to FIG. 240, the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision table 202ie is demonstrated. FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time reduction provision table 202ie. In this control example, the first time-saving end condition established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation (the value set in the time-saving counter 203h) and the number of times of the second special symbol variation It is configured to be able to set the second time saving end condition established based on (value set to special figure 2 fluctuation counter).
Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, or when the small hit type "small hit A" is set, the "jackpot A" is set as the first time saving end condition. "10" is defined as the value of the counter 203h, and "1" is defined as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia as the second time saving end condition. That is, when the time saving state corresponding to "big hit A" is set, when the total number of times of execution of the first special symbol variation and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation reaches 10 times A time saving state is set in which the second time saving end condition is met when the one hour saving end condition is established and the number of executions of the second special symbol variation reaches one. In addition, as described above, in the present seventh control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is established, the time saving state corresponding to "jackpot A" is set, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the first second special symbol variation after the time saving state is set. Therefore, it becomes a disadvantageous time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present seventh control example, the second time-saving end condition that can be established first when the game is normally executed in the time-saving state, and the first time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established than the second time-saving end condition configured to set. And it is prescribed|regulated so that "10" may be set to the value of the time saving counter 203h as 1st time saving end conditions. The value of this "10" is defined to be a value larger than the upper limit number "4" of the special figure 1 reservation. Therefore, the time saving state is set in the state of storing the upper limit number of special figure 1 pending, and even if all the special figure 1 pending is digested before the second special symbol variation is executed, the time saving state is never ends. In addition, when the act of executing only the first special symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated at the time when the number of times of the first special symbol variation reaches 10 times. It is possible to suppress the continuous execution of a game that is not. In this control example, the same value is set as the first time saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time saving state is set, but not limited to this, a different value It may be configured to be set.
For the "big hit B" set when the small hit type "small hit B" is set, as the first time saving end condition, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "0", and as the second time saving end condition , "0" is defined in the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia. That is, when "jackpot B" is set, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as described above, in the present seventh control example, it is easier to execute a game (second special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player when the time saving state is set than when the normal state is set. Since it is configured, "jackpot B" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous to the player.
For the "big hit C" set when the small hit type "small hit C" is set, as the first time saving end condition, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "10", as the second time saving end condition , "2" is defined in the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia. That is, when the time saving state corresponding to "big hit C" is set, when the total number of times of execution of the first special symbol variation and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation reaches 10 times A time saving state is set in which the second time saving end condition is met when the one hour saving end condition is established and the number of executions of the second special symbol variation reaches two times. In addition, as described above, in this seventh control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is established, the time saving state corresponding to the "jackpot C" is set, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol variation for the second time after the time saving state is set. In other words, the time saving state continues during the fluctuation period of the first second special symbol fluctuation after the time saving state is set, and the period during which it is easy to enter the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 by the normal figure per game. becomes. Therefore, it becomes an advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player.
In addition, in this control example, as a plurality of time saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time saving end condition and second time saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time saving end conditions, For example, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (eg 50 times), the time saving end condition is established, and when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a prescribed number of times (eg 80 times). You may set the time-saving end condition to be established when the small hit is won and the number of times that the V winning device 650 is activated reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times).

In addition, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the lottery result. number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) You may comprise so that the time-saving end conditions etc. which are materialized in may be preset.
As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.
Furthermore, when a predetermined number (for example, two) of a plurality of time saving end conditions are established, the time saving end condition may be established. In this case, the establishment number determination means for determining the number of time-saving end conditions that are satisfied, and the condition attainment determination means for determining whether the number of establishment determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), is provided, and the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set) when it is determined that the condition attainment determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).
Further, a content discriminating means is provided for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition that is established first, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means is varied based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. It is also possible to provide means for varying the determination reference number. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is established first, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period of time after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches 10 times) is measured, and the measurement result of the predetermined period of time measurement means is measured. A result determination means for determining is provided, and when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delaying means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means for invalidating the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period may be provided. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set according to each time saving end condition ) may not be executed.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, in the case of using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fact that a plurality of time saving end conditions are satisfied as described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions are prioritized time saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is Time-saving end conditions that are established when reaching 100 times) and non-priority time-saving end conditions (for example, time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and priority time-saving end It is preferable that the time saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated only when a plurality of non-prioritized time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.
Returning to FIG. 237(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 237 (b), in this seventh control example, the RAM203 (see FIG. 156 (b)) in the above-described fourth control example is different in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia is added. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for storing information indicating the game state contained in the state command received from the main controller 110, as in each control example described above. Based on the information stored in 203g, in addition to the set game state (normal state, time saving state), the type of the game state (unfavorable time saving state (first time saving state), advantageous time saving state (second time saving state)) is also configured to be distinguishable.

Special figure 2 variation counter 203ia is a counter referred to when determining whether the number of variations of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state satisfies the second time saving end condition, and the time saving state is When set, a value corresponding to the second time saving end condition is set. Then, every time the control process for starting the second special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state, the value is subtracted, and whether the value after the subtraction satisfies the second time saving end condition (is 0 or) is determined.
By configuring in this way, even if the content of the second time saving end condition is changed depending on the type of the time saving state to be set, it is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia when setting the time saving state It suffices to change the contents of the values, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.
Next, referring to FIG. 241(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 241(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 241(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example selects the lottery result notification mode selection for the ROM 222 in the above-described fourth control example (see FIG. 163(a)). The difference is that the table 202fa is deleted, and the final variation effect selection table 222ia and the notification target selection table 222ib are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the final variation performance selection table 222ia determines the performance mode of the variation performance (final variation performance) executed during the final variation of the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 time reduction final variation) executed during the time saving state It is a data table referred to, and is referred to when determining the variation performance pattern of the special figure 2 variation before the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established.

In the seventh control example, as described above, the timing to end the time saving state is the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, so the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation one before the time saving end condition is satisfied is given to the player. It will be the last chance to get a special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, in the seventh control example, the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation immediately before the time saving end condition is established becomes the time saving final fluctuation period, and the final fluctuation effect is executed in the time saving final fluctuation period. there is
Specifically, by the update process (see FIG. 245) executed by the main controller 110, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia are updated, special figure 2 after being updated A remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the variation counter 203ia is set (see S10603 in FIG. 245). And, by the voice lamp control device 113 receiving the remaining time reduction command output from the main control device 110, until the time reduction end condition is established for the time reduction state currently set on the audio lamp control device 113 side The remaining information (remaining time reduction number of times) is configured to be identifiable.
Here, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied by the special symbol variation executed next to the special symbol variation corresponding to the remaining time shortening number command received this time, ie, the remaining time shortening number of times is established. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203h or the information indicating "1" as the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ia is received as the remaining time saving number command, the corresponding special symbol variation (time saving final variation) The variable period is specified as the final variable period of time reduction, and the production mode of the final variable performance of time reduction is determined for the final variable period of time reduction.
By constructing in this way, even if the process of ending the time saving state is executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is established, the player can acquire the special figure 2 reservation. It is possible to make it easy to secure a period for executing an effect (holding acquisition effect) to prompt the

In addition, in this seventh control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied , Since it becomes a game state (normal state) where it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reservation, the time saving final variation effect is executed during the special symbol variation period one before the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 defines the stop timing of the special symbol variation as the timing to end the time saving state, the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is the time saving final. It may be configured so as to specify it as a variable period and determine the performance mode of the final variable performance for the time saving final variable period.
In addition, the production period of the time saving final fluctuation production should at least overlap with at least a part of the period corresponding to the above-mentioned time saving final fluctuation period, and only a part of the time saving final fluctuation period is used as the production period. It may be configured to execute the final time-saving variation performance, or configured to execute the final time-saving variation performance across a partial period of the final time-saving variation period and a period different from the final time-saving variation period. You can
Here, with reference to FIG. 242, the contents defined in the final variation effect selection table 222ia will be described. FIG. 242 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final variation effect selection table 222ia. In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 234(a) or FIG. 235(b), it is possible to set an effect mode in which different information can be given to the player as the time-saving final variable effect. For example, during the period in which the time-saving final variable production is being executed, the production mode corresponding to the reservation acquisition production (see FIG. 234 (a)) that encourages the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation, and the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired and an effect mode corresponding to a blessing effect (see FIG. 235(b)) for notifying that the information that can give an advantageous privilege to the player is included can be set.
As shown in FIG. 242(a), this final variation performance selection table 222ia includes the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation performance is executed (result of determination) and the time saving final variation performance Special symbol 2 reservation number (value of special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the fluctuation production of special symbol fluctuation executed, and the value of the acquired production counter 223e of the final fluctuation production Production modes are defined.

Specifically, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation production is executed (the result of the judgment result) is "big hit" or "small hit C", and the time saving final variation production is executed If the special symbol 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the fluctuation effect of the special symbol variation is "1 to 3", the value of the acquired effect counter 223e is " 0 to 69”, the effect mode is “goal” (see FIG. 235(b)); )) are defined respectively, and the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable performance of the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation performance is executed is “0 ', the value of the acquired effect counter 223e is in the range of '0-69', and the effect mode 'save weak' (see FIG. 234(a)) is set to '70-99'. A “goal” (see FIG. 235(b)) is defined as a rendering mode for each range.
In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed (result of judgment) is "small hit A", and the variation effect of the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is performed. If the special figure 2 reservation number (value of special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) at the time of determination is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired production counter 223e is "0 to 69" for the range 234(a)), and for the range of "70 to 99", "strong accumulation" is defined as the effect mode.
In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the final time-saving variation performance is executed (result of determination) is "small hit B", and the variation performance of the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation performance is performed When the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) at the time of determination is "1 to 3", the value of the acquired production counter 223e is "0 to 69" for the range Then, as the effect mode "strong accumulation", for the range of "70 to 99", as the effect mode "weak accumulation" (see FIG. 234 (a)) are defined respectively, time saving final fluctuation When the special symbol 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable performance of the special symbol variation in which the performance is executed is "0", the value of the acquired performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 99", the mode of presentation is defined as "strong accumulation".
Here, in the seventh control example, when "small hit C" is set as the small hit type, after the big hit game executed based on the small hit winning, the second time saving state (advantageous time saving state ) is configured to be set. That is, when "small hit C" is elected, it is configured so that a time saving state having a period in which special figure 2 reservation can be acquired is set later. Therefore, as the performance mode of the time-saving final variation performance, a performance mode corresponding to the blessing performance ("goal") that does not prompt the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the performance period of the time-saving final variation performance can be set. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, in the time-saving final variation period indicating that the time-saving state ends, it is suppressed to encourage the game to shoot the game ball unnecessarily in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold for the player. be able to. Furthermore, according to the number of reserved special figures 2 that have already been acquired, the ratio of setting the production mode corresponding to the blessing production ("goal") is configured to be different, and the special figure 2 that has already been acquired It is configured such that the effect mode corresponding to the blessing effect (“goal”) is more likely to be set when the number of reservations is large than when the number is small.
In other words, when the game ball is fired to acquire the special figure 2 reserve during the final variable production period, the state in which the privilege given to the player is small (the state in which the number of newly obtainable special figure 2 reserves is small) is configured to make it more difficult for the pending acquisition effect to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further suppress the urging of a game in which a game ball is shot unnecessarily in order to obtain the special figure 2 reservation for the player.
Furthermore, in the seventh control example, again, even in a state where there is a high possibility that the advantageous time saving state is set (a state in which the small hit C is elected), the holding acquisition effect is executed with a low probability Since it is configured, it is possible to prevent the player from surely grasping the subsequent game contents by the effect mode of the time saving final variable effect.
On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when "small win B" is set as the small win type, the time saving state is not set after the big win game executed based on the small win winning (the normal state is configured). That is, when "small hit B" is won, it is configured so that the period during which the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired is not set later. Therefore, as the performance mode of the time saving final variation performance, it is configured so that the performance mode prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the performance period of the time saving final variation performance can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to surely acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the last period in which the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired. In addition, in the seventh control example, as the performance mode of the reservation acquisition effect for prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, the weak performance mode ("save weak") to encourage the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation , and a strong performance mode ("store strong)" that strongly encourages acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation rather than the weak performance mode, and when a disadvantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. The ratio of setting the strong performance mode as the performance mode of the pending acquisition performance between (when winning the small win A) and when the normal state is set after the end of the big win game (when winning the small win B). are configured to be different.
In other words, when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is difficult to newly acquire the special figure 2 reservation, but for example, the disadvantageous time saving condition is set in a state where no special figure 2 reservation is acquired When it is done, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be newly executed once. That is, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it becomes a game state in which it is difficult to newly acquire the special figure 2 reservation, but the disadvantageous time saving The state becomes a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is newly executed more easily. And, since the second special symbol lottery is newly executed, there is a possibility that an advantageous time saving state is set based on the lottery result, so rather than the "small hit B" in which the normal state is set, The "small hit C" in which the disadvantageous time saving state is set has a higher possibility that the advantageous time saving state will be set later.
Therefore, in the seventh control example, when winning the small win B is stronger than when winning the small win A, the effect mode that strongly urges the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation ) is configured to be easily set.
Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the player is made to acquire the special figure 2 reservation unconditionally in the final period (time saving final fluctuation period) in which it is possible to acquire the special figure 2 reservation in the time saving state. It is configured such that an effect (holding acquisition effect) prompting the user to do so is executed. However, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving change period, there is no advantage in acquiring the special figure 2 hold during the time-saving final change period, and only the disadvantage of firing the game ball unnecessarily occurs. there was a case.

And the situation where it is better to actually acquire the special figure 2 suspension (for example, the situation where the time saving state ends and the special figure 2 suspension cannot be newly acquired) and the merits of acquiring the special figure 2 suspension To easily acquire a special figure 2 reservation again after a jackpot game executed based on the lottery result is finished in a low situation (for example, a special symbol lottery being executed wins a jackpot (small win)). Since the same mode of pending acquisition effect is executed in the situation where the time saving state that can be set is set, when the pending acquisition effect is executed, a game that tries to acquire a new special figure 2 hold There is a possibility that a problem of gradual decline in motivation may occur.
On the other hand, in the seventh control example, as the effect mode of the hold acquisition effect, it is possible to set the effect mode in which the degree of prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold is different. In a situation where it is better to acquire a special figure 2 hold (for example, a situation where the time saving state ends as it is and it becomes impossible to newly acquire a special figure 2 hold), the player acquires a special figure 2 hold It is configured to facilitate setting of a strongly urged effect mode (strong to save).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to see the pending acquisition performance executed in a performance mode that is different from the normally executed pending acquisition performance and in which the acquisition of the special figure 2 pending is strongly urged. A player can be motivated to play a game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation.
In addition, as an effect mode that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold, for example, by increasing the display area of the small display area Dm4 with respect to the effect mode of the normal hold acquisition effect shown in FIG. 234 (a) The letters ``Left-handed'' are displayed in a large size, and the comment ``Be sure to hit left-handed'' is displayed instead of ``Left-handed and accumulate V'' as a comment displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Thus, the player is strongly urged to shoot the game ball, that is, by changing the display mode of the information provided to the player in the normal holding acquisition effect, the player is strongly urged to shoot the game ball. It may be configured, and new information that is not provided to the player on the display screen shown in FIG. When finished, it may be configured to set an effect mode that can provide the player with information indicating that the period during which the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired is not set. In addition, by executing additional effects using the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 and the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10, the situation where it is better to actually acquire the special figure 2 hold (For example, the time saving state ends as it is, and it may be configured to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is a situation where the special figure 2 reservation cannot be newly acquired).

In addition, in the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 242 (a), the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation effect is executed (result of determination) and the acquired special figure Based on the number of 2 reservations, the performance mode of the time saving final variable performance is configured to be determinable, but the performance mode of the time saving final variable performance may be determined based on other information, For example, based on the information about the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) for the special figure 2 suspension that has been acquired, it may be configured to be able to determine the effect mode.
In this case, based on the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) and the result of prefetching for the acquired special figure 2 hold (preliminary judgment result), it is determined whether or not the advantageous time saving state will be set later. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the time saving final variable effect may be determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the time-saving final variation production with higher accuracy.
The notification target selection table 222ib indicates the effect mode (notification number) of the notification effect (see FIG. 235(a)) for notifying the player of the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been obtained (including the number of rights to be obtained). It is a data table that is referenced when determining, and is referred to when specifying information for determining the performance mode of the notification effect when the conditions for executing the notification effect are satisfied (see S20108 in FIG. 246).
Here, the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be described with reference to FIG. 242(b). FIG. 242(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 242(b), in the notification target selection table 222ib, the result of reading the pending storage information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (advantageous time saving state is set small hit type "small hit C ” and the number of pending storage information corresponding to the “small win C”), the target of the notification effect (notification target ) defines the pending storage information differently.

Here, as described above, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four reservation areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols. is configured so that the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 is stored as reserved storage information in order from the first area. That is, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to store the pending memory information in the order in which the second special symbol lottery is executed as the pending memory information corresponding to the second special symbol.
Therefore, by reading the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the number of reserved memory information that wins the small win C and the reserved memory information that wins the small win C It is possible to specify the order in which the second special symbol lottery based on is executed.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the first area (area 1) of the winning information storage area 223a, the pending storage information corresponding to the second special symbol lottery to be executed next is stored, and then the second area (area 1) is stored. The reserved storage information is stored in the order of area 2), third area (area 3), and fourth area (area 4). In this seventh control example, since the special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in the order in which the winning information is acquired, the suspension memory information stored in the first area (area 1) is stored first. The reserved memory information stored in the fourth area (area 2) is the last stored reserved memory information.
As shown in FIG. 242 (b), in the notification target selection table 222ib, the final small hit C reservation storage position, the number of small hit C reservations in the reservation, and the small hit C reservation to be announced are determined in association with It is configured to The final small hit C reserved storage position is specified, among the reserved storage information corresponding to the plurality of second special symbols stored in the winning information storage area 223a, to specify the reserved storage information for winning the small win C. It shows the reserved areas (first area to fourth area) in which the reserved memory information stored last among the reserved memory information is stored.

That is, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "1", the reservation storage information (small winning C reservation ) is stored, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "2", the area where the final small hit C reservation is stored among the reservation areas of the winning information storage area 223a is the second area (area 2). In addition, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "2", the first area ( There are cases where the small win C reservation is stored in the area 1) and where it is not stored.
Similarly, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "3", the area where the small winning C reservation is finally stored among the reservation areas of the winning information storage area 223a is the third area (area 3). It is shown that. In addition, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", the first area ( Area 1) or the second area (area 2) may or may not store a small winning C reservation.
Further, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "4", the area where the small winning C reservation is finally stored in the reservation area of the winning information storage area 223a is the fourth area (area 4). is shown. In addition, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", the first area ( Area 1), the second area (area 2), and the third area (area 3) each store a small hit C reserve, and there are cases where it is not stored.
In addition, as described above, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and the number of acquired special figures 2 reservations (in the winning information storage area 223a It does not specify the total number of pending memory information corresponding to the stored second special symbol). Therefore, even if the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is "1" or "4", if the small hit C pending is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the pending area , the final small winning C reservation storage position is specified as "1".

The number of small hit C reservations in the reservation is the reservation storage information corresponding to the small hit C reservation (holding memory for winning the small hit C information), and if the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "1", among the reservation storage information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a, When the number of pending storage information corresponding to the winning C pending is 1 and the number of small winning C pending in the pending is "2", the pending storage information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a Among them, there are two pieces of reservation storage information corresponding to the small winning C reservation, and if the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", it corresponds to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a Among the holding storage information, if the holding storage information corresponding to the small winning C holding is 3, and the number of small winning C holdings in the holding is "4", the second stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a It shows that there are four pieces of pending storage information corresponding to the small hit C pending among the pending storage information corresponding to the special symbols.
Next, with reference to FIG. 242(b), the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 242 (b), for the final small hit C reservation storage position "1", without specifying the number of small hit C reservations in the reservation, "area 1 (first area)” is defined. That is, if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "1", since there is no other small hit C reservation, the small hit stored in "area 1 (first area)" as it is C suspension is determined as an object to be notified by the notification effect.
In addition, when the final small hit C reservation storage position is "2", if the number of C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, only in the "second area (area 2)" of the reservation area When the winning C reservation is stored, "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservation to be notified. In this case, since the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is not stored, the number of execution rights of the big winning game assuming that the small winning C is won as a notification effect Instead, the number of rights to execute the big hit game calculated based on the reserved memory information stored in the "area 1 (first area)" is determined as the number of notification of the notification effect.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a notification effect that diverges the number of rights to execute the jackpot game notified by the notification effect from the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that is actually acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

When the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, since the "area 2 (second area)" stores the small winning C reservation, it is possible to set the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time as the notification number of the notification effect. Become.
Next, when the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", if the number of small hit C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, only in the "third area (area 3)" of the reservation area When the small winning C reservation is stored, "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small winning C reservation to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small winning C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)", the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time is set as the notification number of the notification effect. It becomes possible to
Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 2 (second area)" may or may not store the small win C reserve. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", it is clear that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 3 (third area)", or The small winning C reservation is stored in any of the "area 1 (first area)".
Here, when the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)", in the state where the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)" to be notified Therefore, the number of notifications based on the pending memory information stored in "area 2 (second area)" (the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning number of notifications including) is set as the number of notifications of the notification effect. On the other hand, when the small winning C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)", the small winning C reservation is not stored in the "area 2 (second area)" to be notified. Therefore, the notification number based on the reservation storage information (small hit A, small hit B, or big hit) stored in the "area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is surely stored. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", it is clear that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 2 (second area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 3 (third area)", or Since only the state where two small winning C reservations are stored in "Area 1 (first area)" is applicable, "Area 1 (first area)" surely stores small winning C reservations be in a state where In this case, since the small winning C suspension is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, based on the suspension storage information stored in the "area 1 (first area)" The reported number (the reported number including the number of rights to execute the big winning game that can be obtained during the advantageous time saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the reported number of the reporting performance. In this case, it is a state in which the small winning C reservation is stored in the area after "area 1 (first area)", and the reservation storage information stored in "area 3 (third area)" The notification number based on is the maximum number of execution right numbers of the big winning game that can be notified in the notification performance at the present time. In this way, a number different from the maximum number of rights to execute the jackpot game can be notified as the notification effect, so that the number of times of the jackpot game actually executed (the number of consecutive wins) can be increased to the player. It can provide predictable entertainment.
Similarly, when the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", if the number of C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, only in the "fourth area (area 4)" of the reservation area When the small winning C reservation is stored, "area 4 (fourth area)" is specified as the small winning C reservation to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small winning C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)", the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time is set as the notification number of the notification effect. It becomes possible to
Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 3 (third area)" may or may not store the small win C reserve. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", it is said that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 3 (third area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)", " The small winning C reservation is stored in either "area 2 (second area)" or "area 1 (first area)".
Here, if the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)", in the state where the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified Therefore, the number of notifications based on the pending memory information stored in "area 3 (third area)" (the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning number of notifications including) is set as the number of notifications of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small hit C pending is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" or "area 2 (second area)", the small winning in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified Since the hit C reservation is not stored, the number of notifications based on the reservation storage information (small hit A, small hit B, or big hit) stored in "area 3 (third area)" is the notification effect is set as the notification number of

When the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 2 (second area)" may or may not store the small win C reserve. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", it is said that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 3 (third area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)" Small hit C reservation is stored in two areas out of "area 2 (second area)" or "area 1 (first area)".
Here, when the small winning C reservation is stored at least in the "area 2 (second area)", the state in which the small winning C reservation is stored in the "area 2 (second area)" to be notified. Therefore, the number of notifications based on the pending memory information stored in "area 2 (second area)" (the execution right of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time saving state set based on the small hit C winning The notification number including the number) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small hit C pending is stored in "area 1 (first area)" and "area 3 (third area)", a small Since the hit C reservation is not stored, the number of notifications based on the reservation storage information (small hit A, small hit B, or big hit) stored in "area 2 (second area)" is the notification effect is set as the notification number of
Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "4", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is surely stored. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", it is clear that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "4", "area 3 (third area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)", " Since only the state in which three small winning C reservations are stored in "area 2 (second area)" and "area 1 (first area)" is applicable, "area 1 (first area)" has a small Win C reserve is surely stored. In this case, since the small winning C suspension is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, based on the suspension storage information stored in the "area 1 (first area)" The reported number (the reported number including the number of rights to execute the big winning game that can be obtained during the advantageous time saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the reported number of the reporting performance. In this case, it is a state in which the small winning C reservation is stored in the area after "area 1 (first area)", and the reservation storage information stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" The notification number based on is the maximum number of execution right numbers of the big winning game that can be notified in the notification performance at the present time. In this way, a number different from the maximum number of rights to execute the jackpot game can be notified as the notification effect, so that the number of times of the jackpot game actually executed (the number of consecutive wins) can be increased to the player. It can provide predictable entertainment.
Next, with reference to FIG. 241(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 241(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 241(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example has a state storage area 223ia and , is different in that a time saving final variation flag 223ib and an executed flag 223ic are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The seventh control example also differs in that the types of information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are increased compared to the fourth control example. Specifically, in the seventh control example, a notification effect for notifying the player of at least a part of the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired can be executed. 222ia, based on the reserved storage information determined with reference to 222ia, it is configured to notify the number of rights to execute the big winning game. The winning information storage area 223a is configured to store information indicating that the pending storage information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia is a notification target.
By configuring in this way, even when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the storage area of the pending memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted, which pending memory information is to be announced. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it is.
In the seventh control example, when the notification effect for notifying the number of execution rights of the jackpot game is executed, until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation that is the target of the notification effect is executed By structuring so as not to execute a new notification performance, the player is made to think that all the numbers of rights to execute the jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those scheduled to be acquired) have been notified by the notification performance.
In this way, in order to control not to execute a new notification effect until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation to be the target of the notification effect is executed, the reservation stored in the winning information storage area 223a It is configured to discriminate whether or not stored information includes information indicating a notification target of the notification performance. This makes it possible to easily determine the end timing of the notification effect.

In addition, in the seventh control example, it is configured to restrict the execution of a new notification effect during the execution period of the notification effect. may be configured. In this case, for example, when the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including those scheduled to be acquired) and is not notified by the notification effect exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the additional execution condition is met. It is preferable to configure so that a new notification effect can be executed regardless of whether the notification effect is being executed or not.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of rights to execute a big winning game that is not notified by the notification performance, the player's interest in the notification performance, and the deterioration of the performance effect. can be done. In addition, as the additional execution condition, in addition to the condition that is established based on the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired) that is not notified by the notification effect, for example, it is included in the pending storage information. Specific information (for example, information indicating that a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be executed, or indicating that the game state set after the jackpot game ends will be a game state advantageous to the player) A condition may be provided that is established when it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, two) of the information indicating the information) is included.
Further, the player is configured to be able to select a notification mode for notifying the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired) by a notification effect, and for example, when the player selects the first notification mode. is configured to notify the player of all the numbers of rights to execute the jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those scheduled to be acquired), and when the player selects the second notification mode, this seventh control As in the example, a part of the number of execution rights is randomly selected and notified to the player, and when the player selects the third notification mode, the minimum number of execution rights, that is, Alternatively, the player may be notified of only the result of whether or not the player has the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired). In this case, when the first notification mode is selected, by obtaining a new special figure 2 reservation, the number of winning (including scheduled to be obtained) jackpot game execution rights notified by the notification effect is increased. Then, a new notification effect is executed.
State storage area 223ia is a storage area for temporarily storing information included in the state command output from main controller 110 . By reading the information stored in the information storage area 223a, the currently set game state and its type (advantageous time saving state, unfavorable time saving state) can be specified on the side of the sound lamp control device 113. is doing. Further, the information storage area 223a is provided with a storage area capable of storing information regarding the currently set game state and a past storage area capable of storing information regarding the game state set in the past. The past storage area has a storage area (first past storage area to third past storage area) capable of storing up to three previous game states. When a state command indicating a change is received, information corresponding to the received state command is stored in the storage area, information previously stored in the storage area is shifted to the first past storage area, and the information corresponding to the received status command is shifted to the first past storage area. The information stored in the storage area is shifted to the second past storage area, the information stored in the second past storage area is shifted to the third past storage area, and the information stored in the third past storage area is shifted. configured to be deleted.

In this way, by configuring the game state set in the past to be temporarily memorizable, an effect corresponding to the contents of transition of the game state a plurality of times, or an effect corresponding to the game state set in the past. can be executed, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player.
The time-saving final variation flag 223ib is a flag for indicating a special design variation period for executing the time-saving final variation performance, and the special design variation corresponding to the special design variation period for performing the time-saving final variation performance is executed. is set to ON when
In this seventh control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, Since it becomes a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to acquire FIG. It is set to ON, and is set to OFF at the timing when the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed.
The executed flag 223ic is a flag for indicating that the notification effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the notification effect is executed. Then, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved storage information to be notified of the notification effect is executed (when the variation effect of the corresponding special symbol variation is set), it is set to OFF. In the seventh control example, while the executed flag 223ic is set to ON, a new notification effect is not executed.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this seventh control example will be described. In this seventh control example, in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 167), the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 243) is replaced with the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 170) for the above-described fourth control example. ), the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 244) is replaced with the update process (see FIG. 171), and the update process (see FIG. 245) is performed. be. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that the same elements as those described in the control examples and embodiments described above are not described in detail, and the details described in the control examples and embodiments described above are omitted. It applies. In addition, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the seventh control example, and the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are also applied. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the seventh control example.
First, with reference to FIG. 243, the special symbol variation process (S10154) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S10154). This special symbol variation process (S10154) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.
In this special symbol variation process (S10154), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S10201). During the special symbol jackpot includes a period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). A period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), a period during the jackpot game (round game period), and a round game period are completed, and then a lottery (fluctuation) of new special symbols is started. and a grace period (ending period).
Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If it is not in the special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S10201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b It is determined whether or not the display mode is fluctuating (S10202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not fluctuating (S10202: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d The value (N1) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are obtained (S10203).
Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol reserved ball for starting the variation (lottery) is secured. , the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 pending ball number command) is set (S10206). After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). Thereafter, time-saving lottery processing (S10208), special design determination processing (S10209), processing of special design variation pattern selection processing (S10251) are executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), the second special symbol reserved ball to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is selected. Since it is not secured, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).
When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is secured. Since it is not in the state, this processing for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, in a state in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol for starting the variation (lottery) is secured. If there is, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation ( Toku-zu 1 reserved ball number command) is set (S10213). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, the special symbol determination process (S10209) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10251) are executed, and this process ends.
In the process of S10202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S10211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the variation time has not passed (S10215: No), that is, if the current period is during the variation period of the special symbol, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10215: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set. (S10217). The stop display is set in advance by special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S10252), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the seventh control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). In this way, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed momentarily, the first display is surely stop-displayed to the player. The contents of the design can be recognized.
In the seventh control example, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above, but other configurations may be used, such as the first symbol. In the case of performing a blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state to indicate that the is changing, the lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) is longer A long period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol performed by the special symbol determination process (see S10209 in FIG. 169) (S10218). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot middle flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), and the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0. (S10220), the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special figure confirmation command is set (S10221), and this process is terminated.
That is, in the seventh control example, as explained in the processing of S10220, when the special symbol jackpot is won, after the special symbol variation is completed (the final symbol display is completed), It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing until the jackpot game is started. In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and the special symbol (first symbol ), for example, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbols that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (the timing when the confirmation display starts). You may end the time saving state. In addition, the time saving state may be ended at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened). Then, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.
In addition, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (timing to satisfy the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) is selected from the above-mentioned multiple timings. Only one may be set in advance, or the time saving state may be terminated at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.
By configuring in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving state ends for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the specified number of times ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the normal state is set after reaching 100 times or the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the contents of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state is terminated, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied for each of the multiple jackpot types (the timing at which the time-saving state ends when the jackpot is won), special symbols based on the end timing of the time-saving state It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result). In addition, if the player identifies the timing when the time saving state ends in part of the timing when the time saving end condition set for each of the multiple jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol will be A timing for notifying a player of a big win, that is, a time-saving end timing dedicated to a big win at which a time-saving state ends only when a time-saving end condition established by winning a big win is established may be provided.
By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. Also, in order to achieve such an effect more, the time saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot mentioned above is set in the first half period of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation. Good to configure.
On the other hand, in the process of S10218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). In the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10222: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S10223), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10222: No), the small win start setting process (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.
As described above, in the special symbol variation process (S10104 in FIG. 243) of the seventh control example, the first It is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (fluctuation) condition for 2 special symbols is established (processing of S10204 in FIG. 243). This is because the second special symbol, which is an advantageous special symbol for the player, can be varied (easily varied) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and cannot be varied (easily changed) when the normal state is set. This is because the second special symbol that is difficult to change) is configured to be a special symbol that is more difficult to execute a change (lottery) than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by any chance, the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are set at the same time (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (Fig. 166). (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of reference)), the variation of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol, which is difficult to perform variation (lottery) As a result, the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol so that it is easier for the player to win the lottery result. so that it becomes easy), the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 166) (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of ), when the variation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the first special symbol is prioritized over the second special symbol. There was a problem that it gave more discomfort.
On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when the process of starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the value added to the player is high (the winning probability of the small hit is the first special symbol The lottery (variation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the seventh control example), which is higher than the symbol and is difficult to actually execute the lottery (variation), is configured to be preferentially (firstly) discriminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problem.
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10251) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10251). As shown in FIG. 244, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10251) is configured to execute the update process (S8272) before setting the start of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be ended before the special symbol variation is started.
When the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, that is, whether or not a special symbol big hit is set (S8201). In the process of S8201, when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot A is determined as the jackpot type (S8271), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S8201: No), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, that is, the special symbol small hit It is determined whether or not it is set (S8209). When it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is set in the processing of S8209 (S8209: Yes), the small hit type is determined with reference to the small hit type selection table 202if (see FIG. 239) (S8273). , S8203.
Also, in the process of S8209, if it is determined that the special symbol small hit is not set, that is, the special symbol off is set (S8209: No), the process of S8273 is skipped, and the process of S8203 is skipped. Go to processing.
In the process of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203). Next, the current game state is specified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the specified game state is read from the variation pattern selection table 202fd (S8252).
Then, based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S8203 and the data table of the variation pattern selection table 202fd (see FIG. 160 (a)) read out in the process of S8252, a variation pattern is selected (S8205 ), based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205, to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main control device 110 Main processing External output processing Voice lamp control Output to device 113 .

Next, the special figure stop classification command which shows the stop design of the special design is set (S8207), update processing is executed (S8272). A detailed description of the update process (S8272) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbols (S8208), and ends this process. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .
In addition, without being limited to this, for example, the update process (S8272) may be executed before the process of S8252 in FIG. 244 is executed. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to end the time saving state before selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, for example, different variation patterns can be selected between the normal state and the time saving state. In the selected pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress the determination whether or not the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state based on the selected variation pattern.
FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S8272). In this update process (S8272), as shown in FIG. 171, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the process of ending the time saving state based on the determination result (time saving end A process of clearing the values of various counters that are referred to when determining whether or not the condition is satisfied is executed.
When the update process (S8272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S10601). In the process of S10601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S10601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S10603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 177). sent to.
After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and then a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set. (S10607), and the process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 244).
<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 246 to 247, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the above-described fourth control example in that the pending ball number command process (see FIG. 246) and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 247) are executed, Otherwise, they are identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that the same elements as those described in the control examples and embodiments described above are not described in detail, and the details described in the control examples and embodiments described above are omitted. It is adapted. In addition, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the seventh control example, and are described in each control example and each embodiment described above. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the seventh control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 246, the pending ball count command process (S20101) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the content of the pending ball count command process (S20101).
When the pending ball count command process (S20101) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the executed flag 223ic is ON (S20102). If it is determined that the execution completion flag 223ic is ON (S20102: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is not ON (S20102: No), the hold information is extracted from the command received from the main control device 110 this time, and the corresponding value is set to the corresponding special symbol hold ball number counter. (Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1) (S20103).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104). When it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is not 4 (S20104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104: Yes), the second special symbol reserved storage information is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S20105). Then, it is determined whether or not there is reserved storage information corresponding to the small hit C in the read reserved storage information (S20106). When it is determined that there is no information corresponding to the small hit C in the read reservation storage information (S20106: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S20106, if it is determined that there is information corresponding to the small hit C from the read reservation storage information in the process of S20105 (S20106: Yes), whether the current game state is the second time saving state It is determined (S20107). If it is determined that the current game state is the second time saving state (S20107: Yes), the notification target selection table 222ib (see FIG. 242 (b)) determines the small hit C suspension to be notified (S20108 ), and the process proceeds to S20109. On the other hand, in the process of S20107, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the second probability variable state (S20107: No), the last acquired small hit C suspension is determined as an announcement target (S20112), S20109 to process.

In the process of S20109, S20108, or S20112 determines the display mode indicating the number of consecutive wins corresponding to the storage position of the small hit C reservation determined (S20109), adding the notification target information to the winning information storage area 223a (S20110). Then, the executed flag 223ic is set to ON (S20111), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to Drawing 247, special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S14994) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. Figure 247 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S14994).
When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S14994) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S19551). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (S19551: No), the processing of S19552 to S19555 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state (S19551: Yes), it is determined whether the current variation is the final variation of the time saving (S19552). If it is determined that the current variation is not the final variation of time saving (S19552: No), the processing of S19553 to SS19555 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S19556.
On the other hand, in the processing of S19552, when it is determined that the current variation is the final variation of the time saving state (S19552: Yes), the time saving state is read from the state storage area 223ia (S19554). Then, it is determined whether the read time saving state is the second time saving state (S19554). The final variation effect selection table read out (see FIG. 242(a)) is referred to determine the effect mode (S19555), and the process proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read gaming state is not the second time saving state (S19554: No), the process of S19555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S19556.

Next, it is determined whether or not the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556). When it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is ON (S19556: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current target variation is a notification target (S19557). If it is determined that the target variation this time is to be notified (S19557: Yes), the executed flag 223ic is set to OFF (S19558), and a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S19559 ), the process ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S19556, if it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is not ON (S19556: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S19557 that the current target variation is not the notification target (S19557: No ), the processing of S19559 described above is executed, and this processing ends.
<Eighth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 to 257. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example is configured so that a small win can be won in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big win (losing) as in the above-described fourth control example. It has a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type) that can execute a big winning game by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small winning game executed based on winning a small winning. is doing.
The pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example differs greatly from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fourth control example, in that the player is in a normal state (low-probability state for special symbols, low-probability state for normal symbols). probability state), the game for executing the first special symbol lottery (left-handed game) and the game for executing the second special symbol lottery (right-handed game) can be selected. , The game property of the time saving state is differentiated between the case where the time saving state is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery and the case where the time saving state is set based on the result of the second special symbol lottery. They are different in that respect.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fourth control example, during the normal state, the left-handed game aiming at entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery, is most advantageous to the player. The game board 13 is constructed so that the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery in the normal state so that the game method can be as simple as possible. Then, when the time-saving state is set, the right-handed game aiming to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, which is the trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous game method for the player. Thus, the game board 13 is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state.
In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fourth control example predefines a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set game state, and the player executes a game according to the game method. was configured to With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. had the problem of getting tired of
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example executes a game (left-handed game) aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in a state where the normal state is set. It is configured so that the player can select a game (right-handed game) aiming at. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select the game method, so that the game can be executed in various game methods. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
In addition, in the eighth control example, it is possible to acquire in the case of executing the left-handed game that executes the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the case of executing the right-handed game that executes the second special symbol lottery. Although the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) is about the same, the process of obtaining the number of game balls (number of prize balls) for the expected value is different. Briefly, when a left-handed game is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues. When a right-handed game is executed, it is easier to set a time-saving state than when a left-handed game is executed, and the time-saving state is difficult to continue.

By configuring in this way, the player can select a game that suits his/her convenience, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
First, referring to FIG. 248, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 248 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 248, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example (see FIG. 146). (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 where the game ball fired by the right-handed game flows down) is different, and the index (display mode) is attached to the upper side of the game area formed on the game board 13. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the above-described fourth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 248, among the game areas formed on the game board 13 (areas through which the fired game ball can pass), the upper area (above the variable display unit 80) has a game method (left-handed game , a right-handed game), a turtle-like mode k1 and a shark-like mode k2 are attached. Mode k1 is a mode corresponding to a left-handed game, and by shooting a game ball aiming at mode k1, the player can play a left-handed game. attached to the position.
On the other hand, mode k2 is a mode corresponding to a right-handed game, and by shooting a game ball aiming at mode k2, the player can play a right-handed game. attached to the other side. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to adjust the game method while following the trajectory of the actually shot game ball rather than the operation content (rotation amount) of the operation handle 22. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

It should be noted that another technique may be used as a technique for informing the player of the game method being executed. A detection means capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the left area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) where the ball can flow down, and a left-handed game is started based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Informing means for informing the player of the execution may be provided, or in the right area (game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) where the game ball fired by the right-handed game may flow down A detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided, and notification means may be provided for notifying the player that a right-handed game is being executed based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
Next, referring to FIG. 248, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In this eighth control example, a second ball entrance 1640 and a right second ball entrance 1641 are used as entrances (starting entrances) for executing the second special symbol lottery in the right area of the game board 13. and are arranged.
The second ball entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessary 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) executed based on winning in a normal symbol lottery, and is set. A state in which it is easy to enter a game ball (normal pattern high probability state) and a state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball (normal pattern low probability state) can be created according to the game state. It should be noted that the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric accessory 1640a that is opened and closed in the winning game (normal game winning game) that is executed based on winning in the normal symbol lottery are described above. Since it is the same as the contents of the electric accessory control explained in each control example, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, the right second ball inlet 1641 is arranged so that the game balls fired by the right-handed game can enter at a constant rate regardless of the set gaming state. In the control example, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that the rate at which the game ball launched by the left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 and the same degree of ball entrance rate. there is By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery executed by the right-handed game can be executed at the same frequency. Therefore, regardless of which game method the player selects, the game can be played without discomfort.

In addition, when the time saving state is set, by executing the right-handed game, it is based on the high probability state of the normal pattern so that the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 1640. Since the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern winning game that opens and closes the electric accessory 1640a are executed, the right-handed game is an advantageous game method for the player during the time saving state. In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery based on the high probability state of the normal symbol and the normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric accessory 1640a are the same as the above-described fourth control example, so a detailed description thereof will be given. omitted.
Further, below the right side area of the game board 13, a V winning device 1650 that is opened during the small winning game and a variable winning device 1065 that is opened during the big winning game are arranged. This V winning device 1650 has the same content as the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 146) in the above-described fourth control example, and the variable winning device 1650 is identical to the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 146) in the above-described fourth control example. 146), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 253. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 have a partial configuration and a sound lamp. The difference is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 are partially changed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 247(a), the ROM 202 of this control example replaces the first winning random number table 202fa with the ROM 202 of the above-described fourth control example (see FIG. 156(a)). The table 202ja is replaced with a small winning type selection table 202ff, a small winning type selection table 202jf, a time saving random number table 202jh instead of a time saving random number table 202fh, and a time saving type selection table 202ii instead of a time saving type selection table 202fi. They are different in that they are provided, and are otherwise the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. For convenience of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 156(a)) of the fourth control example are omitted in FIG. 237(a). , are omitted from the drawing except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first winning random number table 202ja replaces the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 referred to during the second special symbol lottery with respect to the above-described first winning random number table 202fa (see FIG. 157(a)). The difference is that a two-random number table 202ja2 is provided, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 251(a), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ja2 will be described. FIG. 251(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ja2. As shown in FIG. 251(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ja2 is a data table referred to when executing the winning lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2).
Specifically, among the range of "0 to 999" that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take, the "jackpot" is defined for the range of "0 to 4", and the value of "5 to 54" A "small hit" is stipulated. That is, in the eighth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is about 1/200 (5/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 1/20 (50/1000).
The small hit type selection table 202jf is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). This small hit type selection table 202jf differs from the small hit type selection table 202ff (see FIG. 159) of the fourth control example described above in that the selection ratio of the defined small hit type is changed, Other than that, they are identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to Drawing 251 (b), small hit classification selection table 202jf is explained. FIG.251(b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of small hit classification selection table 202jf. The value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is defined for the range of "0 to 4", "small hit A (V passage time jackpot A)", and "small hit for the range of "5 to 99" Hit B (jackpot B when passing V)” is defined.
Time saving per random number table 202jh is a data table referred to in the time saving winning determination (time saving lottery) executed in the special symbol lottery, and the above time saving per random number table 202fh (see FIG. 162 (a)). However, the difference is that the determination value corresponding to the short-time winning is different, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 252, the contents defined in the random number table 202jh per time saving will be described. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number table 202jh per time saving. As shown in FIG. 252 (a), in the time saving random number table 202jh, the determination value of time saving winning determination is defined only for the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols), A determination value for short-time winning is defined for the range of "900 to 949" for the value of the acquired first random number counter C1. In other words, the number of possible values of the first per random number counter C1 is 1000, and the number of determination values determined to be time-saving winning is 50, so the probability of winning time-saving during the normal state is 1/ 20 (50/1000). It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 252(a), in a game state other than the normal state, there is no time-saving winning. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, it may be constructed so as to be elected in a short time even in a game state other than the normal state with a low probability (for example, 1/1000).
The time reduction type selection table 202ji is a data table referred to when setting the time reduction end condition for the time reduction state set when the time reduction is won in the special symbol lottery, and corresponds to the value of the time reduction type selection counter CC1. There are defined types of short working hours. In the eighth control example, different types of time saving are selected in the case of winning the time saving in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the time saving in the second special symbol lottery.

Here, with reference to Drawing 252 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection table 202ji are explained. FIG.252(b) is the figure which showed the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction classification selection table 202ji. As shown in FIG. 252 (b), in the time saving type selection table 202ji, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the type of the special symbol that has been won and the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1, and is defined. Time saving end conditions corresponding to the time saving type, and the presence or absence of time saving limit setting are stipulated.
Specifically, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time reduction A11 is defined as the time reduction type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the obtained time reduction type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition is defined in which the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time saving limit setting "none" is set. That is, a time saving end condition is set in which the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the special symbol working time saving counter 203h is executed 200 times.
On the other hand, when the time reduction is won in the second special symbol lottery, the time reduction B11 is defined as the time reduction type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the obtained time reduction type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving B, a time saving end condition is defined in which "200" is set in the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) and the time saving limit setting "yes" is set. In other words, when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time saving counter 203h is executed 200 times, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is set, and the number of times the time saving state is set continuously is a predetermined number of times (10 times), the time-saving limit is reached and the normal state is set.
Therefore, when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery in which the time-saving limit is not set can set the time-saving state more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery. Configure. As a result, in the normal state where the time-saving lottery is executed, a big winning lottery and a short-time lottery advantageous to the player are executed by playing the left-handed game, or the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed by playing the right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to select whether to execute the time-saving lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, and to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the game method.

Returning to FIG. 250(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 250(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 250(b), in this eighth control example, the RAM 203 (see FIG. 156(b)) in the above-described fourth control example differs in that a time saving limit number counter 203ja is added, Otherwise, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The time saving limit number counter 203ja is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the present eighth control example does not set the low-probability state of the normal symbols except during the jackpot game, and the number of times the high-probability state of the normal symbols is continuously set (normal Continuous setting number) is configured to be measurable, and when the normal continuous setting number reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time reduction limit is reached), a high probability state of normal symbols can be set. is established, the processing (shortening time limit processing) for forcibly setting the low probability state of the normal symbol can be executed, and the game state (first probability variable state) advantageous to the player ) are prevented from being excessively set continuously.
In this time-saving limit number counter 203ja, when the time-saving winning is won by the second special symbol lottery in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, "10" is set as an initial value (see S18182 in FIG. 254). ). Then, the counter value is decremented each time the normal continuous set number of times is updated (see S13104 in FIG. 257), and the counter value after subtraction is referenced in the determination process of whether or not the time reduction limit has been reached (Fig. 257 S13107). Then, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is cleared to 0 when the time saving limit is reached or when the jackpot type being executed sets the low probability state of normal symbols.
Information indicating the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is set as a state command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot ending process.

In addition, in the eighth control example, as described above, the normal continuous setting number of times until the time reduction limit is reached is set to the value of the time saving limit counter 203ja for measuring the normal continuous setting number of times, and the normal continuous setting number of times is set. is subtracted, the counter value is subtracted, but without being limited to this, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is set to "1". After that, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is incremented by 1 each time the number of normal continuous setting times is updated, and the fact that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the addition reaches the time saving limit. It may be configured to determine whether it is a value (for example, 10) and to execute the time saving limit process when the determination result indicates that the time saving limit has been reached.
When configured in this way, for example, when the second special condition (for example, winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, the time reduction limit Even if it is configured to change the establishment condition (reaching condition) of, the time saving limit is reached by simply comparing the changed establishment condition (reaching condition) with the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja. It is possible to determine whether or not
In addition, when the special conditions in the above-mentioned example content are established, the conditions for establishment of the time reduction limit may be changed to make it more difficult to be established than before the change, or changed to be easier to be established than before the change. You can In addition, when the condition (arrival condition) of the time saving limit is changed, it is immediately determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja at the present time satisfies the condition (arrival condition) of the time saving limit. It may be configured, and even if the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit is changed, the judgment of whether or not the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is satisfied is the end of the jackpot game It may be configured to run at times. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the general pattern is immediately suppressed when the conditions for establishing the time saving limit (reaching conditions) are changed, and the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. Since the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery is guaranteed at least (one time) during the period, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
In the eighth control example, as the opportunity to set the high probability state of the normal symbol, the opportunity to set the value in the time saving limit number counter 203ja (the opportunity to set the time saving limit) and the opportunity not to set (not setting the time saving limit Opportunity) and are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger the time saving state was set.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, even if the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving limit number counter 203ja is set according to the opportunity for executing the jackpot game. It is configured to provide a case where the value is updated (subtracted) and a case where it is not updated (subtracted). Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is updated even if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished. If a small win is won in a special pattern lottery without doing so, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is updated (subtracted) when a time saving state is set after the big win game executed based on the small winning win is completed. ).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a player disadvantageous to the opportunity (big win winning) which is difficult to be realized as a chance to execute the big winning game (big winning winning) and to the player who is easy to achieve (small winning). Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while aiming to win the big win in the time-saving state in which it is easy to win the small win. In addition, it aims to establish the execution opportunity of the big winning game that is difficult to be established in a period until the execution opportunity of the big winning game that is easy to be established is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), and eventually, the execution opportunity of the big winning game that is easy to be established. It is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of expecting that the is not established.
In addition, in the eighth control example, as a privilege when an opportunity (jackpot winning) that is difficult to be established as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game is established, a privilege is given that does not update the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja. However, without being limited to this, for example, when an opportunity (jackpot election) that is difficult to be established as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game is established, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is increased or returned to the initial value. may be configured to be executable.
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 253, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example is the remaining time reduction counter 223ja, the time reduction limit The difference is that a flag 223jb is provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the explanation thereof is omitted.

The remaining time reduction counter 223ja is a counter in which a value corresponding to the value of the reduction time limit counter 203ja set in the main controller 110 is set, and the period until the reduction time limit is reached (normal pattern high probability state is for indicating the number of remaining times that can be set in succession).
This remaining time reduction counter 223ja sets the time reduction limit in the limit information update processing executed when a limit related command is received in the state command processing executed in the command determination processing of the sound lamp control device 113. A value (10) corresponding to when a command including information about is received is set, and when a time saving limit number of times command is received, the already set value is subtracted by 1.
The value of this remaining short time number counter 223ja is referred to when executing the processing for determining the effect mode in each game state. Then, in the state command processing of the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the command indicating that the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is received in the game state update processing executed when the game state command is received. value is cleared (set) to 0.
The time saving limit flag 223jb is a flag for indicating that the time saving limit has been reached, and in the state command processing executed in the command determination processing, in the limit information update processing executed when a limit related command is received , is set to ON when a time-saving limit reached command is received to indicate that the time-saving limit has been reached.

<About control processing contents of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 254 to 257, the contents of control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the eighth control example will be described. In the eighth control example, compared to the above-described fourth control example, it is greatly possible to set an upper limit to the period in which the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player across the jackpot game continues. are different.
First, the contents of the time saving lottery process (S10288) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 254 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S10288). As shown in FIG. 254, the time saving lottery process (S10288) is the time saving lottery process described above (see S10208 in FIG. 168). It is determined whether it is a time-saving election in the second special symbol lottery (S18181), and when it is determined that it is a time-saving election in the second special symbol lottery (S18181: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203ja is set to " 10” (S18182) is added.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the time saving limit only when the time saving lottery in the normal state wins the time saving lottery and the special symbol type winning the time saving win is the second special symbol. becomes.
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the contents of the jackpot control process (S11574) will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S11574). This jackpot control process (S11574) is different from the jackpot control process in each control example described above in that the jackpot end process (S11651) is executed at the end timing of the ending effect, and the rest is the same. , detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing (S11651) will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S11651). In this jackpot end processing (S11651), which is executed when the jackpot game ends, a processing for updating the time reduction limit and a game state to be set after the jackpot game is finished are determined, and the determined content is followed. A process for setting the game state is executed.
When the jackpot end process (S11651) is executed, first, the time saving limit update process is executed (S13001). Details of this time saving limit update process (S13001) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the information indicating the game state set after the end of the jackpot is stored in the game state storage area (S13002), the number of time reductions corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed is determined (S13003), and the determined number of time reductions is counted in the time reduction counter 203h. (S13004), set the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content (S13005), set the game state after the jackpot and the state command corresponding to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja (S13006), End this process.
Next, the details of the time saving limit update process (S13001), which is one process in the jackpot end 11 process (see S11651 in FIG. 256), will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process (S13001). In this time saving limit update process (S13001), based on the winning jackpot type and time saving type, the process for setting the high probability state of the normal design and the upper limit value that can continuously set the high probability state of the normal design and update the remaining number of times with respect to the set upper limit.
In the time saving limit update process (S13001), first, the big hit type of the special symbol being executed is read out (S13101). Next, it is determined whether or not the executed jackpot type read out in the process of S13101 is a jackpot type in which a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends (S13102). After the end of the jackpot, when it is determined that it is the jackpot type in which the normal pattern high probability state is set (S13102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game of this time is a jackpot game based on the winning of the small hit (S13103). ).

In addition, in the process of S13103, the timing for executing the big winning game is determined based on the information based on the past game status stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of S13103, when it is determined that it is a big winning game based on small winning winning (S13103: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104). When the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is not a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the probability state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (S13104: No), the time saving limit number counter 203 Since the value which can set the high probability state of the normal design continuously to the value is not set, this process is finished as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S13104, if it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (S13106), then , It is determined whether the value of the time saving limit counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (S13107). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (S13107: Yes), the high probability state of the normal design has reached the upper limit value that can be set continuously, so the time saving limit reaching flag is turned on. (S13108), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S13107, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit number counter 203ja is not 0 (S13107: No), this processing ends.
As described above, in the eighth control example, in the state where the normal state is set, the game (left-handed game) aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery and the execution of the second special symbol lottery are aimed. A game (right-handed game) can be selected by the player. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select the game method, so that the game can be executed in various game methods. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
In addition, in the eighth control example, it is possible to acquire in the case of executing the left-handed game that executes the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the case of executing the right-handed game that executes the second special symbol lottery. Although the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) is about the same, the process of obtaining the number of game balls (number of prize balls) for the expected value is different. Briefly, when a left-handed game is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues. When a right-handed game is executed, it is easier to set a time-saving state than when a left-handed game is executed, and the time-saving state is difficult to continue.

By configuring in this way, the player can select a game that suits his/her convenience, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
Furthermore, in the eighth control example, when the left-handed game is executed in the normal state, the player is made to perform a game aiming at winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery and a game aiming at short-time winning, and a right-handed game is performed. When executed, the player is made to play a game aimed at winning a big win, a small win, or a short-time win in the special symbol lottery. That is, in terms of ease of execution of the jackpot game, the right-handed game is configured to make it easier for the player to execute the jackpot game than the left-handed game. On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game is won, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than when the second special symbol lottery executed by the right-handed game is won. Configured to be configurable. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method.
In the eighth control example, an upper limit (time reduction limit) can be set to the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is set continuously. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive continuation of game states that are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the eighth control example, it is configured such that determination as to whether or not to set the time reduction limit is executed in accordance with the trigger that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. That is, it is configured to be able to create a case where the time reduction limit is set and a case where it is not set by the setting opportunity of the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the time saving state will be set without setting the time saving limit.
Furthermore, even if the time reduction limit is set, depending on the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is updated. It is configured so that it can be created. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game while expecting that the jackpot game will be executed without updating the remaining number of times until reaching the time reduction limit.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the upper limit (time reduction limit) can be set for the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in succession. Another configuration may be used as a function for suppressing continuous setting. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a high probability state of special symbols, the high probability state of special symbols may be set. An upper limit (probability variation limit) may be configured to be settable for the number of times set in succession.
In addition, the upper limit for the number of times that "special pattern high probability state" is set continuously (special pattern continuous setting number of times), and the number of times that "normal pattern high probability state" is set continuously (normal pattern continuous setting number ) may be configured to be updateable and manageable separately. is determined to be set, if the number of continuous special patterns reaches the upper limit (when the probability limit is reached), the "high probability state of special patterns" is changed to "low probability of special patterns state” and changed “time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern)”, when the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting reaches the upper limit (when reaching the time saving limit), “normal pattern ``High probability state of normal symbol'' changed to ``Low probability state of normal symbol'' ``Second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol)'' may be configured to be settable.
In addition, the number of times that the high probability state of the special design can be set continuously (the number of times of special design continuous setting) is more than the number of times that the high probability state of the normal design can be set continuously (the number of times of normal design continuous setting) It is configured as follows. In addition, among the special pattern high probability period in which the special pattern high probability state is set continuously, the first probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set 1st More prize balls may be given to the player than in the second period in which the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. .
By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is elected in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the first probability variable state is set, first the first The period is set until the time limit is reached, and then the second period is set.

Therefore, after the first game in which many prize balls can be given to the player is executed for the first period, the second game in which it is difficult to give prize balls can be executed for the second period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first game is excessively continuously executed and excessive prize balls are awarded to the player.
In addition, the length of the first period during which the first game can be executed is the period from when the first probability variable state is set until the time reduction limit is reached (until the second probability variable state is set) (10 jackpot winnings) ), and the length of the second period during which the second game can be executed is set to the period from when the second variable probability state is set until the variable probability limit is reached (for 30 jackpot winnings). good. In this way, the length of the first period and the second period set within the special figure high probability period can be set based on the number of times the jackpot is won, so that the special figure high probability period is set. It becomes possible to manage the length of the period.
More specifically, in the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery. The content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period may be configured so as not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed and the contents of the big winning game to be executed.
By constructing in this manner, the first period is set to have a length corresponding to the period (number of times of special symbol fluctuation) until 10 times the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the special symbol (jackpot probability 30/1000). can be done.

In addition, in the second period in which the second probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, The content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (two rounds). In other words, the length of the second period may be configured so as not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be performed and the content of the big winning game to be performed.
By constructing in this way, the second period is set with a length corresponding to the period (number of special symbol variations) until the 30th big win is won in the high probability state of special symbols (jackpot probability 30/1000). can be done.
Furthermore, during the first period, which is a part of the special high probability period, it is possible to give a lot of prize balls to the player to increase the number of balls, and the second period, which is the other period of the special high probability period. During the two periods, the number of prize balls given to the player may be reduced, thereby suppressing the increase or decrease in the number of paid balls.
By configuring in this way, in the specific period in which the special figure high probability period is set, when the appropriate increase in the number of balls that can be given is configured to be biased during the first period, that is, the first period Even if it is possible to give the player an excessively large number of balls when looking at only As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an excessive amount of balls while making it possible to execute a ball-out increasing game with unexpected surprises for the player.

In addition, if the jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols) state) so that the first probability variable state can be set more easily after the jackpot game ends than when the jackpot is won. In other words, a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot but is easy to shift to the first game state most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won, and a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot but is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won. A game state in which it is difficult to shift to the 1 game state may be configured to be settable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the game purpose to be aimed at by the player according to the set game state, so that it is easy to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. can.
In the state where the first probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, if the probability variation limit is reached first, if the time limit is reached first, the probability variation limit, It may be configured such that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different from that when the time reduction limit is reached at the same time.
By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot of the same type (for example, the first probability variable jackpot where the first probability variable state is set) is won, a different game state can be set according to the reaching status of each limit. Since the settings can be made, it is possible to easily provide various games to the player.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, in the case where neither limit has been reached, the ratio of setting the same game state (for example, the first probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot game is increased (always set ), the game state with a high setting ratio (for example, the first variable probability state) is set continuously for a long period of time, and the game becomes monotonous and the motivation to play decreases. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.
Furthermore, when the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time, a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player may be set. In other words, when the normal state is set based on reaching the probability limit and the short time limit at the same time in the first probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, usually A normal state (special normal state) more advantageous to the player than the normal state of is set. By configuring in this way, even when the opportunity (each limit) to forcibly shift the probability state of each symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state is established, if the special condition is established, the game It is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player.
Therefore, the player can play a game that expects that the variable probability limit or the short time limit will not be reached and a game that expects that the limit will be reached at the same time, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made
As described above, if there is an element (each limit) for determining the game state (game situation) set after the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the jackpot type that has been won, the jackpot of the same jackpot type After a game is executed, there is a problem that it is difficult for a player to grasp in advance which game state is to be set after a jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, the set game state, the remaining number of times to reach the variable probability limit (remaining number of hits), and the remaining number of times to reach the short time limit (remaining number of hits), production mode based on may be configured to be different.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the future game content based on the content of the effect to be executed, so that it is possible to easily provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
In addition, in a part of the case where the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery which is mainly executed when the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, after the jackpot game ends Although it is configured to be able to set the first variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), it is not limited to this, and when the jackpot is won in the state where the second variable probability state is set. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the second probability variable state is always set after the jackpot game ends.
By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set during the special symbol high probability period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, that is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery When the jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set, or when the first variable probability state is continuously set, the time reduction limit is reached and the second probability variable state is forced after the end of the jackpot game. (when the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing), the period until the probability variable limit is reached can be reliably set to the second probability variable state. Therefore, after the advantageous gaming state (first variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set, the unfavorable gaming state (second variable probability state) can be reliably and easily set for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, in this case, according to the timing when the second variable probability state is set, the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won during the second variable probability state may be configured to be different, for example, variable probability limit processing. When the second probability variable state is set by, the jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set more easily than when the second probability variable state is set based on the jackpot type. can be configured to
By constructing in this way, a jackpot is won in a state where a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is set, and a high probability state of special patterns is set after the jackpot game is finished. In the case, until the probability variation limit is reached, the first probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, is set to the player. It is possible to suppress execution of an excessively disadvantageous game.
Furthermore, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends. It may be configured such that a low probability state of special symbols is set. Further, in the eighth control example, a plurality of game states can be set, and games with different degrees of advantage can be executed according to the set game states. Specifically, the degree of advantage to the player is the most advantageous game state for the player in the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and then the special state (special mode ) is set normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second probability variable state (high probability of special design probability state, normal pattern low probability state), and normal state, but not limited to this, by varying the game content to be executed in each game state, each It may be configured such that the degree of advantage of the player in the game state is varied.
<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 290. FIG. In the eighth control example described above, during the period in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. On the other hand, the ninth control example is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). are different.

By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within a predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.
Also, in the eighth control example described above, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in the ninth control example, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Time-saving lottery is configured to be executable, and one special pattern wins time-saving than when only one of the first special pattern or second special pattern wins time-saving, and the period until the fluctuation display of that special pattern stops. However, it is different in that it is constructed so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the other special symbol wins the short-time winning.
Although the details will be described later, in the ninth control example, the time saving A state is set when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is elected in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) variation time is set (time reduction winning variation state), until the variation of the first special symbol ends (that is, time reduction When the second special pattern wins the time-saving during the period until the first special pattern indicating the winning is stopped and displayed, a time-saving B state more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state is set.
By configuring in this way, when one special pattern wins short time, the other special pattern also wins short time, so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so that one special pattern wins short time, By making the player think that the other special symbol also wants to win the short time win while the special symbol showing the time short win is fluctuating, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game and improve the interest of the game.例文帳に追加can.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends, the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to execute processing for
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the continuation of the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to improve the gambling spirit of the player. can be suppressed.
In addition, in a game machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or a small win) is won in one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol's variable display is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily It is common to have a specification that only one of stopping (interrupting) is executed, but in this ninth control example, depending on the big hit type (or small hit type), the other special symbol fluctuation display is forced It is configured to determine whether to stop or temporarily stop. In other words, a big hit type for forcibly stopping (discarding) the fluctuation of the other special symbol and a big hitting type for temporarily stopping (suspending) the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are defined.
By configuring in this way, when a game state disadvantageous to the player can be set by stopping and displaying one of the special symbols in a state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the other special symbol can be set. When winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that can cancel the fluctuation of special patterns, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous game state from being set, but winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts other special patterns is possible. In such a case, a situation in which a disadvantageous game state can be set continues, so that when a big win is won, the player can be interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols can be discarded, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved.

Here, an outline of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. The jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is 1/50, which is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the time saving winning probability is 1/50, which is common between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, the small winning probability is 1/50, but the small winning lottery is executed only with the second special symbol.
Although the details will be described later, the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won is determined by different tables (see FIGS. 262 and 411) for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the first special pattern wins the jackpot. If you do, regardless of the game state, 100% jackpot A (5R short time A jackpot) is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 263, the jackpot type is determined according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 263, 100% jackpot A is set when the second special symbol wins the jackpot in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same.
In addition, in the second special symbol, a small winning lottery is also executed, and a small winning is won, and when the game ball enters the specific area 1650 in the small winning game, it becomes a big winning B or C that is more advantageous than the big winning A, so the first special It can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol more advantageous to the player than the symbol.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) However, in the normal state, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the first special symbol tends to stop earlier. In the time saving state, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol tends to stop earlier.

By constructing in this way, the number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery is suppressed in the normal state, the player is prevented from becoming excessively advantageous, and the first special symbol is generated before the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is possible to suppress the setting of a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player due to the stopping of the symbols, and it is possible to provide a sharp game.
In the normal state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, and in the time saving state, the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one is set to be shorter.
Here, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. In this ninth control example, as the game state, it is possible to set a normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). In the time-saving state, the time-saving A state ends when the special symbol variation is executed 5 times after the time-saving state is set, and the special symbol variation is executed 10000 times after the time-saving state is set. There are two time-saving types, the time-saving B state that ends, and when the time-saving A state is set, you can win a big hit (probability of winning a jackpot: 1/50) or a small hit (probability of winning a small win 1/50) in 5 special symbol lotteries. 50) has a low probability of winning about 18%, and when the time saving B state is set, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small hit by almost 100%, so the time saving B state is better than the time saving A state. It is a time-saving type that is advantageous to people.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, only the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won in the normal state. In addition, the game state set when only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol wins the time saving A state is only the time saving A state, and the time saving B state is not set.

Here, in the ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 266, when the first special symbol wins short working hours in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. there is Then, as shown in FIG. 268, during the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol (short-time winning fluctuation state), a very short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, in the time-saving winning fluctuation state, it is possible to execute more second special symbol lotteries than in the normal state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 263, when the second special symbol wins the jackpot during the time saving winning fluctuation state, 100% jackpot B (10R time saving B jackpot) is determined, and the time saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends. be. In addition, when the second special symbol wins the short working hours during the short working hour winning fluctuation state, the short working hour B state is set.
By constructing in this way, when the first special symbol is won in time saving, as many second special symbol lotteries as possible are executed in a period until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and time saving B state is achieved. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game by setting the .
Although details will be described later, in the time saving winning variation state, when the second special symbol jackpot (or small winning) winning or time saving B state is set due to time saving winning, the first special symbol winning time saving variation When the display is continued and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the set time saving B state is discarded and the time saving A state is newly set. That is, the time saving B state continues only until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the winning first special pattern can be discarded, the game can be executed in the time saving B state until the time saving limit to be described later is reached, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. The time-saving limit refers to a threshold for executing processing for setting a non-time-saving state after the jackpot game ends even when winning a jackpot of the jackpot type in which the time-saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, even in the same time-saving B state, a large number of prize balls are obtained by playing a game aiming at discarding the first special symbol and continuously playing until the time-saving limit is reached. It is possible to provide the player with different game properties of the game aimed at, and to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time saving, it is configured to set the time saving winning fluctuation state, but it is not limited to this, and the second special symbol wins the time saving. Also in the case, it may be configured to set the time-saving winning variation state. In this case, by making the fluctuation time of the time-saving winning variation different depending on the special symbol type, a relatively advantageous time-saving winning variation state and a relatively disadvantageous time-saving winning variation state are provided for the player according to the special symbol type. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the time saving type set when only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol wins the time saving A state, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to set the time saving state of different time saving types depending on whether only the first special pattern wins the time saving and when only the second special pattern wins the time saving, for example, the second special pattern wins the time saving. In this case, it is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A state, but it may be configured to set the time saving C state (for example, the number of time saving times is 100 times) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving B state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 258 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 258, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example has the same configuration as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example (see FIG. 248). Description is omitted.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 259 to 268. FIG. The ninth control example differs from the eighth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed. Otherwise, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 259, the ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the ninth control example is the first per random number table 202ja instead of the ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the above-described first control example. The winning random number table 202ka is replaced with the jackpot type selection table 202fb, the jackpot type selection table 202kb is replaced with the second winning random number table 202fc, the second winning random number table 202kc is replaced with the fluctuation pattern table 202fd, and the fluctuation pattern is changed. The table 202kd is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202jf, the small hit type selection table 202kf is replaced with the time saving random number table 202jh, the time saving star committee random number table 202kh is replaced with the time saving type selection table 202ji, and the time saving type The difference is that the selection table 202ki is used, the time reduction grant table 202fe and the time reduction type selection table 202ji are deleted, and the small hit random number table 202ke is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. For the eighth control example described above, special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka, special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd, special figure 1 fluctuation A stop flag 203ke, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf, a time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg, and a time saving limit reach flag 203kh are added to differ in points. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka and special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb are timers for timing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka and the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb (see Y701 in FIG. 276 and Y901 in FIG. 285).
Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030kc is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.
This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the lottery result stops the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that is a jackpot other than the jackpot D (Y903 in FIG. 285), and the first special It is referenced in the symbol variation running process (see FIG. 87) and the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 276, Y708). As a result of referencing, when it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 275) (Y2801 in FIG. 275: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 275). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is the same process as when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit. is executed and set to on.
Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the fluctuation time of special figure 2, and stops updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a jackpot is stopped (Y703 in FIG. 276), and the second special symbol variation is being executed. It is referred to in the processing (see FIG. 284) and the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 285). It should be noted that the content referred to in this process is the same as the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 284) (Y2901 in FIG. 284: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 284).
The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit D or the small hit B is stopped for the second special symbol (see Y905 in FIG. 285 and Y932 in FIG. 287). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on during variation of the first special symbol, it is set to off (see Y722 in FIG. 277). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the variation of the big win D or the small win B of the second special symbol stops first.
The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to ON when the first special symbol wins short working hours and fluctuation display is started (Y405 in FIG. 273). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203kf is on during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to off (Y632 in FIG. 286). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the first special symbol is won in a short time and the variation is started.
The time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has won time-saving is being displayed in a variable manner (that is, the time-saving winning variation state). This time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is time saving winning (see Y403 in FIG. 273). On the other hand, when the first special symbol winning the time saving is stopped and displayed and the time saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 278), the second special symbol wins the jackpot D or the small win B, and the first special symbol is discarded (see Y726 in FIG. 277). As a result, the time-saving winning variation state can be set in a period until the time-saving winning of the first special symbol and the end of the variation of the first special symbol.

The time saving limit reach flag 203kh is a flag for indicating that the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting) has reached the upper limit, and the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting is the upper limit. It is set to ON when reaching the value and forcibly changing the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.
Next, the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ka will be described with reference to FIG. 261(a). FIG. 261(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ka. In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 261(a), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 18/900 (that is, 1/50). do.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the probability of the jackpot is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol It may be configured to have different jackpot probabilities.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the jackpot probability is not changed in any game state, but the invention is not limited to this, and when a specific jackpot type is determined, the jackpot game ends. It is good also as a structure which sets the high probability state (what is called probability variation state) of a special design later.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number table 202kc defined in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 261(b). FIG. 261(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202kc. The second hit random number table 202kc is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "0 to 2" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design. In addition, in the high probability state of the normal design, "0 to 149" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design. In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202kc are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit.
Here, referring to FIG. 258, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, when the normal symbol lottery wins, the electric accessory 1640a arranged in the right area of the game board 13 opens. , and is configured to be able to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 .
Therefore, when the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 1640a becomes easier to open, and the game ball easily enters the right second ball inlet 1640, so that the normal state It becomes easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than.
Next, with reference to FIG.261(c), the content of random-number table 202kh per time saving is demonstrated. FIG.261(c) is the figure which showed typically the content of random-number table 202kh per time saving. As shown in FIG. 261(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the time saving lottery is executed for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The short-time winning probability in each special pattern is common and is 18/900 (1/50). In addition, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, and the time-saving lottery is not executed in the time-saving state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have the same time-saving winning probability, but it is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is more. Also, the second special symbol may be configured so that the time-saving winning probability is higher, or it may be configured so that it is lower.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the time-saving lottery may be executed even in the time-saving state.
Next, with reference to 409 (d), the contents of the small winning random number table 202ke will be described. FIG.261(d) is the figure which showed typically the content of the small hit random number table 202ke. As shown in FIG. 261(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, a small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol. The small hit winning probability is 18/900 (1/50).
The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is configured to execute the small winning lottery for the second special symbol, but the configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute the small winning lottery even for the first special symbol. good.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the jackpot winning probability, the time saving winning probability, and the small winning winning probability are all 1/50, but it is not limited to this. The small winning winning probabilities may be configured with all different probabilities. For example, the jackpot winning probability may be 1/300, the time saving winning probability may be 1/30, and the small winning winning probability may be 1/100.
Next, with reference to FIG. 262(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202kb will be described. FIG. 262(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202kb. A special figure 1 jackpot table 202kb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot table 202kb2 are defined in the jackpot type selection table 202kb.
FIG. 262(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202kb1 defined in the jackpot type selection table 202kb. As shown in FIG. 262(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the 100% jackpot A is selected. Jackpot A is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends. After the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, 5 times is set as the counter value of the time saving counter 203h.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is one type, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpot types may be set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which the jackpot classification selected according to a game state differs.

FIG. 263 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202kb2 defined in the jackpot type selection table 202kb. When the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, it depends on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the game state is changed, and the value of the first winning type counter CS2. to select the jackpot type. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations is also reset, for example, when a jackpot is won in the time saving B state and the time saving B state is set again after the jackpot game ends.
First, when the game state is the normal state, there are a non-time-saving winning variation state and a time-saving winning variation state, and the non-time-saving winning variation state is a state where the time-saving winning variation state flag 20kg is off, that is, a short-time winning It is a state in which the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. The time-saving winning variation state is a state in which the time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is ON, that is, the state in which the first special symbol that has been short-time winning is being displayed in a variable manner. In the non-time-saving winning fluctuation state of the normal state, 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is selected regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and 5 is set to the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. be. In the time-saving winning variation state of the normal state, regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is selected, and 10000 is set to the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. .
In this way, in the normal state, only the second special symbol lottery is executed by configuring the benefits given to the player differently depending on whether or not the time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is turned on when the jackpot is won. This prevents a player who plays a game to make a game from becoming excessively advantageous.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the 100% jackpot A (or jackpot B) is selected regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol in the normal state, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured such that a jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of jackpot types according to the number of fluctuations. For example, in the non-time-saving elected variable state of the normal state, either the jackpot A or the jackpot B is configured to be selectable, and the jackpot A is more likely to be selected than the jackpot B from the 0th to 50th rotations, and after the 51st rotation. A configuration may be adopted in which the big win B is more likely to be selected than the big win A. By constructing in this way, even if the player loses and wins continuously in the normal state, it becomes easier for the player to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed. can.

Also, from the 0th to 50th spins, the jackpot A is more likely to be selected than the jackpot B, from the 51st to 100th spins, the jackpot B is more likely to be selected than the jackpot A, and from the 101st to 150th spins, the jackpot is more likely than the jackpot B. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected in a specific period, such as A being likely to be selected, is variable. By constructing in this way, a period advantageous to the player is generated periodically, and the player can be interested in the number of variations of the second special symbol, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.
Next, the time saving state includes a time saving A state and a time saving B state. % jackpot C (5R short time B jackpot) is selected. In the time saving B state, the jackpot type selected according to the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern is variable, 100% jackpot (10R time saving B jackpot) is selected from 0 to 50th rotation, and after the 51st rotation Jackpot B (10R short time B jackpot) is selected at 50%, and jackpot D (10R short time B jackpot) is selected at 50%. Both jackpot B and jackpot D are jackpot types in which a 10-round jackpot game and a time-saving B state are set after the jackpot game ends, but when the jackpot B is won, the first special symbol that is fluctuating is temporarily stopped. The jackpot types are different in that a process of stopping (interrupting) is executed, and when the jackpot D is won, a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) the first special pattern in fluctuation is executed. In other words, when the winning of the second special symbol continues up to a specific number of times, the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be discarded.
By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol is lost and won continuously in a state where the first special symbol that has been elected for short time is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining time of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is short, the first special symbol is displayed. Since there is a high possibility that the variation of the symbols can be discarded, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play when the second special symbols are repeatedly won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, only in the case of the time saving B state, the jackpot type that is likely to be selected according to the number of variations of the second special symbol is changed. However, it is not limited to this, Also in the time-saving A state, it may be configured to vary the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected according to the number of variations of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the 100% jackpot B is selected from the 0th to the 50th rotation, but it is not limited to this, and it is different even from the 0th to the 50th rotation. The configuration may be such that the jackpot type can be won, for example, the configuration may be such that the jackpot B is selected at 80% and the jackpot D is selected at 20%. By constructing in this way, the player is expected to win the jackpot D and discard the variable display of the first special symbol even in the period just after the time saving B state is set, and to play the game. becomes possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, it is configured to switch the jackpot type that is likely to be selected between "0 to 50th rotation" and "after the 51st rotation", but it is not limited to this, For example, the jackpot B is more likely to be selected than the jackpot D from the 0th to the 50th rotation, the jackpot D is more likely to be selected than the jackpot B from the 51st to the 100th rotation, and the jackpot D is more likely to be selected from the 101st to the 150th rotation. It is also possible to vary the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected in a specific period, such as B being likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, a period advantageous to the player is generated periodically, and the player can be interested in the number of variations of the second special symbol, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202kf will be described. FIG. 264 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202kf. As shown in FIG. 264, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, two types of small winning types are defined. In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is configured such that the small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol.
The small hit A is a small hit type selected at 80% when the small hit is won, and when the specific area 1650a is passed (V passage) in the small hit game, the big hit C (5R short time B big hit) is given. be. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, depending on the small hit type, the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted). ), and when the small hit A is executed, the process of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the variation of the first special symbol being executed is performed.

On the other hand, the small hit B is a small hit type selected at 20% when the small hit is won, and when V passes in the small hit game, the big hit B (10R short time B big hit) is given. When the small hit B is executed, the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) the variation of the first special symbol being executed is executed. In addition, although there are two types of small winnings in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the number of types of small winnings is not limited to this, and three or more types of small winnings may be provided.
Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the contents of the variation pattern table 202kd will be described. FIG. 265 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202kd. In the fluctuation pattern table 202kd, a normal state fluctuation pattern table 202kd1, a time saving state fluctuation pattern table 202kd2, and a time saving winning fluctuation state fluctuation pattern table 202kd3 are defined, and each fluctuation pattern table is referred to according to the gaming state. be done.
FIG. 266 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal state variation pattern table 202kd1 defined in the variation pattern table 202kd. In the normal state variation pattern table 202kd1, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.
Specifically, when the symbol type is "first special symbol" and the success/failure determination result is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139", and the variation time is 7 seconds ( 7000 milliseconds) is specified, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "140 to 149", and the variation time is 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds). , and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 179", and "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds (40000 milliseconds) are defined, and the acquired variation type counter CS1 A “super reach” with a variable time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of values “180 to 189”. Also, if the result of the success/failure determination is "hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds (40000 milliseconds) is defined, The value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "30 to 189", and the "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is defined, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "190" ~ 198”, a “special reach” with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds (140000 milliseconds) is defined. In addition, when the success/failure determination result is "shorter working hours", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 198" and "long shorter working hours" with a variation time of 300 seconds.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is "second special symbol" and the result of the judgment is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds). ) is defined as “long out”, and if the result of the success/failure determination is “time saving winning”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, and the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds ) is defined as “time saving hit”, and if the result of the judgment is “big hit, small hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, and the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds) is specified.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, in the normal state, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is likely to be shorter than that for the second special symbol. This is a configuration in which the small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol, and when the small winning is won, the most advantageous time saving B state for the player is set, so the fluctuation time of the second special symbol This is to prevent the game efficiency from being deteriorated by lengthening the period, and the player who plays the game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed is excessively advantageous.
Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is "time saving win", "long time saving win" is set. During the long time reduction winning variation, it becomes a time reduction winning variation state, and the pattern table 202kd3 for time reduction winning variation state is referred to until the first special symbol in which the long time reduction winning is set is stopped and displayed (or discarded). , Since the variation of the second special symbol is a short variation (0.5 seconds), the second special symbol lottery can be executed a plurality of times. In addition, during the long time-saving fluctuation (during the time-saving winning fluctuation state), the jackpot (or small win) winning, even if the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning, the long time-saving change continues. The pattern table 202kd3 for time saving election variation state is referred to.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time saving, 100% "long time saving hit" is set, but it is not limited to this, multiple , based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. For example, 50% selects a "long time reduction hit" with a variation time of 300 seconds, 30% selects a "short time reduction hit" with a variation time of 200 seconds, and 20% selects a "super time reduction hit" with a variation time of 500 seconds. ” may be selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the time-saving winning fluctuation state by the fluctuation time of the selected first special symbol, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, it is configured to be in the time saving winning fluctuation state only when the first special symbol is winning time saving, but it is not limited to this, and the second special symbol is winning time saving. In this case, the time-saving winning variation state may be set. In the case of the second special pattern, the variable time is 600 seconds), the time-saving winning variation state advantageous to the player and the time-saving winning variation state relatively disadvantageous to the player depending on which special pattern wins the time-saving winning. can be set, and the interest in the game can be improved.
FIG. 267 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving state variation pattern table 202kd2 defined in the variation pattern table 202kd. In the time saving state variation pattern table 202kd2, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.
The time saving state variation pattern table 202kd2 is a variation pattern table referred to when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and is common to the time saving A state and the time saving B state. In addition, as described above, when the long time saving variation of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving winning variation state variation pattern table 202kd3 is referred to instead of the time saving state variation pattern table 202kd2.
As shown in FIG. 267, in the time saving state variation pattern table 202kd2, the first special symbol has a long variation (600 seconds) and the second special symbol has a short variation (3 to 5 seconds). As described above, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot while the time saving B state is set, the time saving A state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving B state is set, so the second special symbol is easily stopped and displayed first, so that the time-saving B state, which is advantageous to the player, is easily set continuously.

FIG. 268 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 202kd3 for time reduction winning variation state, defined in the variation pattern table 202kd. In the variation pattern table 202kd3 for time saving winning variation state, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.
As shown in FIG. 268, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, when the time reduction winning fluctuation state is set, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a short fluctuation (0. 5 seconds) is set. In the time-saving winning variation state, the game ends when the first special symbol winning the time-saving winning variation is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be executed.
In addition, in the time-saving winning variation state, the first special symbol is already changing, and when the variation of the first special symbol ends, the time-saving winning variation state also ends, so the first special symbol variation pattern is set in the time-saving winning variation state. will not be Therefore, in the variation pattern table 202kd3 for time saving winning variation state, only the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected.
In addition, as described above, even if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, during the long time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON), the fluctuation At the time of pattern selection, the variation pattern table 202kd3 for time saving winning variation state is referred to.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 289. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the ninth control example is the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 104) instead of the special symbol variation processing ( 268), the game state update process (see FIG. 274) instead of the update process (see FIG. 108), and the jackpot control process (see FIG. 287) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 112). However, otherwise the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As described above, in the ninth control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1), which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol), 2 special symbols (hereinafter referred to as special symbols 2) are greatly different in that they are configured to be able to perform variable display at the same time (in parallel).
First, with reference to FIG. 269, the contents of the special symbol variation process (Y104) in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (Y104). When the special symbol variation process (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is currently in progress (Y231). If it is determined that the jackpot or small hit is in progress (Y231: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y232). . In the process of Y232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is suspended because one special figure is stopped and displayed in the pattern indicating the win. In the process of Y232, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y232: Yes), the first corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (Y233), that is, the processing for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special symbols in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing exit. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.
On the other hand, in the process of Y231, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (Y231: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined (Y234) and the value of the special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y234: No), the first special symbol variation start process (Y237) and the same processing is executed, after that, it moves to Y238 which executes variation processing regarding special figure 2.

In the process of Y234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation executing process (Y235) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is finished, next, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y236) is performed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.
In the process of Y238-Y241, the same process as Y234-Y237 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of Y238 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (Y238), special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol variation start process (Y239) is executed, and then this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of Y238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (Y240) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is finished, next, the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) is performed, and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the first special symbol variation start process (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 269, Y104), will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (Y237).
In the first special symbol variation start process (Y237 in FIG. 269), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is ON (Y301). In the process of Y301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is ON (Y301: Yes), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is not ON (Y301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (Y302) and acquired It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (Y304), and a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (Y305). .

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 4) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 230. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.
When the process of Y305 ends, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.
When the process of Y306 is finished, then the first special symbol determination process is executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process (FIG. 270, Y307) will be described later in detail, but is set based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. It is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the game state being played. Incidentally, the game state update process (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.
When the process of Y307 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 272, Y308). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (Y309). This game state update process (Y309 in FIG. 273) updates the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time reduction counter 203h) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, although the details will be described later. This process is for When the process of Y309 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), whether the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on It is determined (Y311), and if it is determined that it is on (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y311: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on After setting (Y313), this processing is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination processing (Y307) will be described. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the details of the first special symbol determination process (Y307). This first special symbol determination process (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process (S251 in FIG. 105) of the second control example described above, and in addition to the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, time-saving winning Determination (special figure 1 time saving lottery process) is executed.
When the first special symbol determination process (Y307) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (Y8001), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202ka. Then (Y8002), when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), and the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2 ), set the jackpot pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8005), store the value indicating the current game state in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and perform this process. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8003: No), the special figure 1 hour-saving lottery process is executed (Y8007), and the process ends.

Here, the special figure 1 time saving lottery process (Y8007) is a process for executing determination of time saving election in this special symbol lottery. That is, in the ninth control example, first, in the first special symbol lottery, the judgment of the jackpot election is executed (Y8003), and when the jackpot is elected, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing the judgment of the time-saving election. And, it is constructed so as to execute the determination of the short-time winning only when the jackpot is not won. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, time saving winning) are not given to the player, a game that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided. You can prevent it from happening.
Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 270, Y237), will be described. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308).
In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 272, Y308), first, in the first special symbol determination process (FIG. 271, Y307), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (Y501).
In the process of Y501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y501: Yes), the first Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot table 202kb (see FIG. 262(b)) (Y502), and the process proceeds to Y503.

On the other hand, in the process of Y501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y503.
In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 265 to 416) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. In addition, the game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( Y506).
When the process of Y506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (Y508), and ends this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the process content of special figure 1 time saving lottery process (Y8007) is demonstrated. Figure 273 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 time saving lottery processing (Y8007).

When the special figure 1 time saving lottery process (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time saving winning determination result) is acquired based on the time saving random number table 202kh (Y401), and it is determined whether the time saving has been won (Y402 ), when it is determined that the time reduction is elected (Y402: Yes), the time reduction election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is set to ON (Y403), and the time reduction A is used as the time reduction design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37. (Y404), set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag kf to ON (Y8105), and terminate this process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving has not been won in the process of Y402 (Y402: No), it is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2). A special symbol is set (Y406), and this process is terminated.
Next, referring to FIG. 274, the content of the game state update process (Y309) will be described. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process (Y309).
When the gaming state update process (Y309) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If so (Y601: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (Y602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined to be 0 (Y604: Yes), the time saving game is not given (that is, normal state). Therefore, a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and the present process is finished as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) executed in the special symbol variation process (see Y104 in FIG. 269) will be described. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235). In this first special symbol variation executing process (Y235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.
When the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON (Y2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON will be briefly described. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a specific hit (big hit A to C or a small hit A) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. It is. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON) special symbol variation process (FIG. 269) is executed, the process of Y231 is in the midst of a jackpot. Therefore, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is not executed. Then, the big winning game (or small winning game) is completed, and it is determined that it is not during the big winning (or during the small winning) in the process of Y231, so that the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON is the jackpot (or small hit) game It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.
Returning to FIG. 275, the description continues. In the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON (Y2801: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command (Y2802), special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203kc is set to OFF (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, in the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2801: No), the processes of Y2802 and Y2803 are skipped and Y2804 to process.

In the process of Y2804, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and the process ends.
Next, referring to FIG. 276, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 269, Y104), will be described. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop process (Y236).
In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 276, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set. (Y702). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y703). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kd is turned on is set.
After finishing the process of Y703, the special figure 1 stop classification command indicating the set stop classification is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (Y706). Then, the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (Y707), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether the time-saving winning of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, when it is determined that the time saving election is set (Y710: Yes), the time saving setting process (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time saving setting process (Y711), the process related to the setting of the time saving state corresponding to the winning time saving type is executed. The time saving setting process (Y711) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: No), then the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is off in the process of Y708 (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is ON in the process of Y708 (Y708: Yes), when the second special symbol is stopped with a big hit or a small hit Therefore, in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the first special symbol being executed, special figure 1 forced stop processing is executed (Y709). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (Y236), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game A process (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) for stopping the variable display is executed. Also, when the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small win) and the variation is stopped, and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), the variable display is performed. A process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol (Y709) is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big win (or small win) (Y702: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the variable display is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, special figure 1 forced stop processing (Y709), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 276, Y236), will be described. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 forced stop processing (Y709).
In the special figure 1 forced stop processing (Figure 277, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y721). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y721: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set to off (Y722), then the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke Set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating off (Y723). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to be off (Y724), and it is determined whether the time reduction winning variation state flag 203kg is ON (Y725). In addition, although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped by the off symbol, and the special figure 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set.
In the process of Y725, when it is determined that the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is ON (that is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is time saving election) (Y725: Yes), the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is set to OFF (Y726), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is not ON (that is, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is not time saving election) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped, and this processing is performed. finish.
In addition, since it is only when the time saving B state is set that it is possible to win the jackpot D that can cancel the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the time saving election is based on the jackpot winning of the second special symbol in the normal state. Although the fluctuation state flag 203kg is configured not to be set to OFF, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that the jackpot D can be won in the normal state. In that case, after the process of Y725, a process of setting the special flag to ON when the jackpot D is won in the normal state is provided, and a game state (for example, a probability variable state (high special symbol) is provided that is more advantageous than the time saving B state. Probability state, high probability state of normal design)) may be configured to be set. By configuring in this way, different game states are set for the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the normal state and the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the time-saving state, and the game is performed. It is possible to improve interest.

On the other hand, in the process of Y721, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time flag 203ke is not on (Y721: No), since the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on, the first special symbol A command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the fluctuation is set (Y729), and this processing is terminated.
Thus, in this ninth control example, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is turned on (timing to stop the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit in the second special symbol) , Even if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has not passed, the fluctuation is forcibly interrupted, or is forcibly stopped as a result of the determination of the deviation. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is only necessary to execute a small win or a big win for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the ninth control example, there are cases where the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to stop and temporarily stopped (interrupted) depending on the type of the second special symbol big win or small win. and
As described above, in the ninth control example, the time saving A and the time saving B can be set as the types of the time saving state. In addition, time saving A has 5 times of time saving (see FIG. 263), and the probability that the second special symbol will win a big hit (winning probability 1/50) or a small win (winning probability 1/50) with 5 times of working time saving has a low probability of about 18%, it is almost impossible to expect a big win or a small win in the second special symbol in the time saving A state. On the other hand, since the time saving B has 10000 times of time saving times (see FIG. 263), when the time saving B is set, the next big hit or small win can be expected with a high probability. Therefore, it can be said that the time saving B state is a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the time saving A state.

Here, in the period until the first special symbol is elected for a short time and the first special symbol indicating that the short time is elected is stopped and displayed (that is, when the short time winning fluctuation state is set), the second special symbol When the time saving B state is set by winning a big win, a small win, or a time saving win, it indicates that the time saving win was made without being able to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a missing symbol. When the first special symbol is stop-displayed, the set time saving B state is discarded and the time saving A state is newly set. That is, in this case, the time saving B state continues only until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that has won the time saving (300 seconds in this ninth control example) elapses, before reaching the time saving limit There is a high possibility that the time saving state will end.
On the other hand, during the period until the first special symbol indicating that the first special symbol has been elected for a short time and the first special symbol indicating that the short time has been won is stopped and displayed (that is, when the short time winning fluctuation state is set), the second special symbol is When a time-saving B state is set by winning a big win, a small win, or a short-time win, a specific big win (jack D) or small win (small win B) is won, and the first special pattern is forced to change. When the game can be stopped as a target missing symbol, the time saving B state can be continued until the time saving limit is reached, and the player can win a large amount of prize balls.
In this way, in the ninth control example, the period until the first special symbol is elected for the time reduction and the first special symbol indicating that the time reduction is elected is stopped and displayed (that is, the time reduction election fluctuation state is set. case), when the time saving B state is set by the second special symbol winning the jackpot, the small winning, or the time saving winning, the first special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner is forcibly removed and stopped (discarded) ), it is possible to provide the player with a new game property such as whether it is possible to continue the advantageous time-saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 278, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (Y711) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (Y711). In this time saving setting process (Y711), a process for setting a time saving state is executed when working time saving is won by time saving winning determination. When the time saving setting process (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving type is time saving A (Y8351), and when it is determined that it is time saving A (Y8351: Yes), time saving election fluctuation state The flag 203 kg is set to OFF (Y8352), the value corresponding to the determined time saving type is set in the time saving counter 203h (Y8353), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area (Y8354), and the time saving counter 203h is set. A state command indicating a value, a time saving type game state (information indicating a time saving state and information indicating a set time saving type) is set (Y8355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8351, when it is determined that it is not time saving A (that is, when it is time saving B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. In addition, although not illustrated, in the process of Y8353, after clearing the value of the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the determined time saving classification is newly set. Therefore, when the time saving A state is set based on the time saving election, if the value corresponding to the time saving B (for example, 10000 times) is already set to the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the time saving B Discard and set a value (5 times) corresponding to time saving A.
Thus, in this ninth control example, it is configured so that the time saving state is set at different timings according to the time saving winning opportunity, and when the time saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation When the time-saving state is set at the stop timing and the time-saving state is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is set not at the stop timing of the special symbol variation but at the jackpot game end timing. .
By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state is set can be varied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to get tired of.
Next, with reference to FIG. 279, the second special symbol variation start process (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 269, Y104), will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (Y239).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 279, Y239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is ON (Y831). In the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is ON (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not ON (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Y832), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is Subtract 1 (Y834), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203e after the subtraction (Y835). .
The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 230. 223d. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223d is updated, the second special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e.
When the process of Y835 ends, next, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y836 is completed, then the second special symbol determination process is executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process (FIG. 280, Y837) will be described later in detail, but is set based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the game state being played.
When the process of Y837 is finished, next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 283, Y838). Although the details will be described later, this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838) includes the second special symbol validity determination result and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.
When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game state update process (FIG. 273, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed in the first special symbol, and the details are explained with reference to FIG. 274, so detailed explanation are omitted. When the process of Y839 ends, the special figure 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. The game state update process (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag is ON. (Y841), and if it is determined that it is on (Y841: Yes), this processing is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y841: No), set the special figure 2 standby flag to on (Y842), set the special figure 2 standby command indicating on After (Y843), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 280, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing (Y837) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing (Y837). In this second special symbol determination process (Y837), unlike the above-described first special symbol determination process (Y307 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery is out, In addition to determination (special figure 2 time-saving lottery process), determination of small hit winning (small hit lottery process) is executed.
When the second special symbol determination process (Y837) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (Y8101), and the lottery result is determined based on the first winning random number table 202ka. Acquired (Y8102), when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Y8103: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a big hit (Y8104), and the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2) Based on the value of C2), the jackpot pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (Y8105), the value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8107), and this End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8103: No), the special figure 2 time-saving lottery process is executed (Y8106), and this process is terminated.
Thus, in the present ninth control example, when it is not a big hit determination in the big hit lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving lottery and the small lottery are executed, so in the first special symbol In comparison, many opportunities are set for the player to be in an advantageous state (time saving state), and it can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol more advantageous than the first special symbol. In addition, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long time (600 seconds), and the gaming efficiency of the player who intends to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state deteriorates. It is configured as follows.
In addition, although the details will be described later, in the special figure 2 time saving lottery process (Y8106), unlike the special figure 1 time saving lottery process (Y8007 in FIG. 273), when the time saving is won, the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is on. Determine the time saving type to be set depending on whether or not there is. Specifically, the time saving B state is set only when the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is ON. In other words, the time saving B state is set only when the second special symbol wins the time saving during the variable display of the first special symbol indicating that the time saving has been won, and the time saving A state is set in other cases. there is By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction when it is not in the time reduction winning fluctuation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the first special symbol is not changed. It is possible to prevent the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery from becoming excessively advantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the process content of special figure 2 time reduction lottery process (Y8107) is demonstrated. Figure 281 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 time saving lottery processing (Y8107).
When the special figure 2 time saving lottery process (Y8107) is executed, first, the lottery result (time saving winning judgment result) is acquired based on the time saving random number table 202kh (Y8201), and it is determined whether the time saving is elected (Y8202 ), if it is determined that the time reduction election is made (Y8202: Yes), it is determined whether the time reduction election variation state flag 203kg is ON (Y8203), and it is determined that the time reduction election variation state flag 203kg is ON. In the case (Y8203: Yes), the time saving B is set as the time saving design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (Y8205), and this process is finished.
If it is determined that the time saving has not been elected in the process of Y8202 (Y8202: No), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (Y8206), and the process ends.
In the process of Y8203, when it is determined that the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is off (Y8203: No), time saving A is set as a special time saving design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (Y8204 ), the process ends.

In this way, in the ninth control example, when the time reduction winning variation state flag kg is on (that is, the first special symbol has been elected for a short time, and the variation display of the first special symbol indicating that the time reduction has been won is being executed. Only in case), the time saving B state is set when the second special symbol wins the time saving. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction in the absence of the time reduction winning fluctuation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the first special symbol is not changed. It is possible to prevent the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery from becoming excessively advantageous. In addition, within the period until the first special symbol wins the short-time winning and the first special symbol indicating that the short-time winning is stopped and displayed, a new game feature of aiming for the short-time winning of the second special symbol is given to the player. It can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 282, small winning lottery processing (Y8108), which is one processing of the second special symbol determination processing (FIG. 280, Y837), will be described. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing this small winning lottery process (Y8108).
In the small winning lottery process (FIG. 282, Y8108), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving election, that is, whether the time-saving election of the second special symbol is set (Y8301 ).
In the process of Y8301, when it is determined that the time-saving election of the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not set for time saving winning, (Y8301: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the small hit random number table (Y8302), and the small If it is determined to be winning (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired, the small hit type is selected from the small hit type selection table 202kf, and displayed on the first symbol display device. Set the small winning design of the special design (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, when it is determined that the small hit is not won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and the present process ends.
Thus, in the ninth control example, the jackpot winning, the short-time winning, and the small winning won do not overlap in one second special symbol lottery, thereby suppressing the awarding of multiple benefits to the player, It is configured so that the player does not become excessively advantageous.
It should be noted that it is also possible to have a configuration in which the jackpot winning or the small winning and the short-time winning overlap. By adopting a configuration in which the time saving state is set, even if the jackpot of the same kind of jackpot type is won, the game state after the jackpot game is finished can be diversified depending on whether or not the time saving win is won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 279, Y239), will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 283, Y838), first, in the second special symbol determination process (FIG. 280, Y8103), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, the second It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (Y921).
In the process of Y921, if it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (Y921: Yes), the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 280) obtained in the process of Y8105 Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot table 202kb2 (see FIG. 263) (Y922), and the process proceeds to Y923.
On the other hand, in the process of Y921, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y923.
In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 265 to 416) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. In addition, the game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (Y926 ).

When the process of Y926 is completed, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (Y928), and ends this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) executed in the special symbol variation process (see Y104 in FIG. 269) will be described. FIG. 284 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240). In this second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the second special symbol is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.
When the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special figure 2 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the processing loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON) special symbol variation processing (FIG. 269, Y104) is executed, during the jackpot in the processing of Y231 Therefore, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the process of Y231, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is executed in the state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON, the jackpot game ends, and the variation time It is configured to be the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that had been interrupted.
Returning to FIG. 284, the description continues. In the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y2901: Yes), then set the special figure 2 fluctuation resume command (Y2902), special figure 2 provisional The stop flag 203kd is set to OFF (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, in the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2901: No), Y2902 and Y2903 are skipped and Y2904 to process.

In the process of Y2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Y2905), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) will be described. FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241). This second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) is for executing the process for stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and for the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 276), When the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, in addition to the configuration of interrupting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time), the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot D ), the difference is that a configuration for forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure 1 is provided, and a process that is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added.
When the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol variation time has ended (Y901). Whether or not the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether or not the counter value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0.
When it is determined that the fluctuation time has ended in the process of Y901 (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (Y902), and it is not a big hit ( (Y902: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (Y912). In the process of Y910, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (Y912: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a time-saving election (Y914). When it is determined that it is not time-saving winning, the second special symbol confirmation command is set (Y908), the variation of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped (Y909), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of Y914, when it is determined that the time saving is won (Y914: Yes), the time saving setting process is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is performed. In addition, since the time saving setting process is the same process as the time saving setting process (Y711) executed as one process of the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (Y236 in FIG. 276), detailed description is omitted.
In the process of Y912, when it is determined that the small hit is won (Y912: Yes), the special figure 2 small hit stop process is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is performed. The special figure 2 small hit stop processing (Y913) is forcibly stopping (discarding) or temporarily stopping (suspending) the fluctuation display of the first special symbol depending on the small hit type of the won small hit. , which will be detailed later with reference to FIG.
In the process of Y902, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot D (Y903), and when it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No) sets the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON (Y904), sets the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type (Y906), sets the jackpot scenario (Y907), and then , Y908 and Y909.
On the other hand, in the process of Y903, when it is determined that it is a big hit D, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to ON (Y905), and the processes of Y906 to Y909 are executed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, when the jackpot type is the jackpot D, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to ON, and in the case of other jackpot types, the special figure By setting the 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON, the case where the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) depending on the jackpot type, and the case where it is temporarily stopped (interrupted) are variable. can be made
As shown in FIG. 263, the jackpot type determined when the second special symbol hits the jackpot differs depending on the number of variations of the executed second special symbol. , is configured to be easily determined. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol cannot win the jackpot and winning continues (so-called addiction), it becomes easy to determine the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play when he is hooked.
In the process of Y901, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y901: No), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203kf is turned on (Y910). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is off in the process of Y910 (Y910: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is ON in the process of Y910 (Y910: Yes), when the first special symbol is stopped with a big hit or time saving winning Since it is the case, special figure 2 forced stop processing is executed in order to stop (temporary stop) the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y911). In addition, the details of this special figure 2 forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the second special symbol stop processing (Y241), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the second special symbol during variable display has elapsed (Y901: Yes), the determination result of the second special symbol lottery game is shown. A process of stopping the variable display in the pattern is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit and a big hit game with the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins short time and a short time winning fluctuation state is set ( Y910: Yes), a process (Y911) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 286, special figure 2 forced stop processing (Y911), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 285, Y241), will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 forced stop processing (Y911).
In the special figure 2 forced stop processing (Figure 286, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y631). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y631: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to off (Y632), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating off (Y633). Then, the variation type of the second special symbol is set to be out (Y634). In addition, although not shown, after the process of Y634, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stopped, and the special figure 2 confirmation command of the second special symbol is set.
On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is not on (Y631: No), since the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on, the second special symbol A command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the fluctuation is set (Y635), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the present ninth control example, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is turned on (the timing at which the variation that becomes a big hit with the first special symbol stops), the variation time of the second special symbol has not elapsed Even if it is, it is forcibly interrupted and forcibly stopped. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute the jackpot game for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the ninth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving election, the variation stop flag kf of the second special symbol is turned on at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. In the ninth control example, as described above, in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds). If the variation of the second special symbol is continued when the variation display of the symbol is started, the set time-saving winning variation state ends before the stop display of the second special symbol during variation, A problem may occur that the player cannot execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving winning fluctuation state.
Here, when the first special symbol wins the short-time winning, the fluctuation stop flag kf of the second special symbol is turned on at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, whereby the fluctuation of the first special symbol won the short-time winning. is started, the variation of the second special symbol during variation is discarded, so the second special symbol lottery can be newly received in the time-saving winning variation state, and the player can receive the second special symbol in the time-saving winning variation state. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the lottery of 2 special symbols cannot be executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, special figure 2 small hitting stop processing (Y913) which is one processing of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 285, y241) will be described. FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit stop processing (Y913).

In the special figure 2 small per stop processing (Figure 287, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small per type is a small per B (Y931), and when it is determined that it is a small per B (Y931: Yes) , Set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke to ON (Y932), and set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke (Y933). Then, a small winning scenario corresponding to the selected small winning type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y931, when it is determined that it is not a small hit B (Y931: No), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag kc is set to ON, (Y937), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag kc is ON Set the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating (Y938), and perform the process of Y934.
In this way, in the ninth control example, it is possible to discard the first special symbols that are fluctuating not only by the specific big win type but also by the specific small win type. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small wins, and to improve the interest in the game.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol indicating the small winning B winning, but it is not limited to this, It is also possible to set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag to ON at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol that has been elected to the small hit B. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which discards a 1st special design at the time of the start of a small-hit game, and it is good also as a structure which discards at the time of the end of a small-hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288, the contents of the jackpot control process (Y1004) executed in the main process will be described. FIG. 288 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (Y1004). This jackpot control process (Y1004) is different only in that the jackpot end process (Y11613) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (S11651) of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 255) of the eighth control example described above, Other processes are the same as those of the eighth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents of the jackpot ending process (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 289 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (Y11613). When the jackpot end process is executed, first, the time saving limit update process (Y2701) is executed. The detailed description of the time saving limit update process (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for updating (subtracting) the value of the time saving limit counter 203ja that has already been set is executed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 290, details of the time saving limit update process (Y2701), which is one process in the jackpot end process (see Y11613 in FIG. 289), will be described. FIG. 290 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process (Y2701). In this time-saving limit update process (Y2701), a process for setting an upper limit for setting a high-probability state of normal symbols in succession and updating the remaining number of times with respect to the set upper limit is executed.
In the time saving limit update process (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving limit counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001). When the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is not a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the probability state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the time saving limit number counter 203ja Since the value that can set the high probability state of the normal design continuously is not set to the value, 10 is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja (Y3005), and the time saving flag is set to ON (Y3006). Then, this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (Y3002), then , it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003: Yes), since the upper limit value for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is reached continuously, the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is set. It is set to ON (Y3004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y3004, when it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit number counter 203ja is not 0 (Y3004: No), this process ends.
In this control example, 10 times are set as the time saving limit number of times, but it is not limited to this. .
Returning to FIG. 289, the description continues. After executing the time saving limit update process (Y2701), it is determined whether the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is ON (Y2702), and when it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is ON (Y2702: Yes) , information indicating the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) as the game state set after the end of the big win game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703), and a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the big win game is issued. It sets (Y2707) and terminates this processing.
On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, if it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is not ON (Y2702: No), the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state set after the jackpot game ends. The information shown is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2704), and based on the jackpot type selection table 202kb shown in FIG. 262 and FIG. Then (Y2705), a time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (Y2706), and the process of Y2707 is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the upper limit value for setting the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) continuously after the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the state advantageous to the player continues. By limiting the number of times set by , it is possible to suppress the player's gambling spirit from being excessively obtained.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the high-probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is completed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is completed. It is good also as a structure made.
Although not shown, the details of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. In conventional pachinko machines, when a special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) for indicating a specific result is stopped and displayed, a corresponding game state is generally set. For example, when a special symbol wins the big win, the player predicts that the special symbol wins the big win by means of the variable display of the special symbols indicating that the special symbol wins the big win, and the special symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate that the jackpot win has been won. is displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot has been won. In this case, since the player can predict in advance that a different game state will be set after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to smoothly cope with the change in the game state.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, as described above, when the first special symbol is won in time saving and the variation of the first special symbol starts, the time saving winning variation state is set. As shown in FIG. 258, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the first ball entrance 64 that triggers the start of the first special symbol lottery is when the game ball flows down the left side area of the board surface and when the game ball flows down the right side area. However, the second ball entrance 1641, which triggers the start of the second special symbol, is when the game ball flows down the right side area of the board surface. It is placed in a position where only the ball can be entered.

As a result, for example, when a player who is playing a game (so-called left-handed game) that causes the game ball to flow down the left side area of the board surface and enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 wins a time reduction winning fluctuation If the left-handed game is continued in spite of the state being set, there may occur a problem that the time-saving winning variable state ends without executing the second special symbol lottery.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, when the first special symbol is won in the time saving, the time saving is won before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the fact that the time saving winning fluctuation state is in progress is notified. Execute the production to do.
Specifically, when the first special symbol wins the time saving, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the pseudo symbol stops at the time when a predetermined time has passed (for example, after 10 seconds have passed), A display mode indicating that the time-saving winning variation state has been set is displayed (for example, ``Entering time-saving winning variation zone''), and the player hits to the right in order to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entrance 1641. ” is displayed.
By displaying in this way, the player can recognize that the time-saving winning fluctuation state has been set, and can play a game in a game method suitable for the game state. At the same time, it is preferable to perform a display for informing the player that the time saving B state is set by winning the big win (or small win) or the time saving win with the second special symbol during the time saving winning fluctuation state.

In addition, if it is determined as a result of pre-reading the winning information that there is winning information for short-time winning in the winning information of the first special symbol held in the normal state (special figure 1 reserved), time-saving Even if a configuration is added to notify that the time-saving winning variation state is set in the next variation of the first special symbol on the stop display screen of the first special symbol executed immediately before the variation of the first special symbol to be won. good. In other words, if there is a special figure 1 hold, in the fluctuation of the first special symbol immediately before the time saving election fluctuation state is set, it is notified that the next fluctuation is a time saving election fluctuation state, and the special figure 1 hold If it does not exist, it is configured to inform that the time saving winning variation state is set after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation of the first special symbol in which the time saving winning variation state is set.
In this way, if there is no special figure 1 suspension, there is a loss of variation time from the start of the time saving election fluctuation to the notification that it is in the time saving election fluctuation state, but there is a special figure 1 reservation In this case, the setting of the time-saving winning variation state is notified in advance, so that the loss of the variation time from the start of the time-saving winning variation to the notification of the time-saving winning variation state is eliminated. Therefore, the player can motivate the player to play the game by making him/her think to maintain the state in which the holding is always accumulated in order to eliminate the loss of the fluctuation time in the time-saving winning fluctuation state.
In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert|reports the fluctuation|variation time of the 1st special design in a time-saving election fluctuation|variation state to a player intelligibly.
As described above, in the ninth control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols win the jackpot. If so, the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). In a gaming machine configured to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost, depending on the jackpot type at the time of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery In any of the special symbol lotteries, it is possible to execute time-saving winning determination.

Then, similarly to the above-described second control example, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning determination) is executed before each special symbol variation is started, and when a time-saving winning is made, a time-saving state is set at the special symbol variation stop timing. In this case, when only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving, the time saving state as the first privilege is set. In addition, if you win the time saving in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state (time saving A state) that will be the first privilege is set, and if you win the time saving in the second special symbol lottery, the second benefit that is different from the first benefit It is good also as composition by which the time saving state (time saving C) used as a privilege is set.
Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first special symbol variation that is winning the time reduction, when the time reduction is won, the third benefit more advantageous than the first benefit and the second benefit is given. It is configured so that the state (time saving B state) can be set. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 constructed so as to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same time (in parallel), the timing of short-time winning in each special symbol lottery is achieved. It is possible to set a time saving state in which different benefits are given accordingly.
Regarding the privilege to be granted, for example, it may be a third privilege in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first privilege or the second privilege, or a special symbol lottery may be executed more easily than the first privilege or the second privilege. 3 It is good as a privilege.
Furthermore, the timing at which the time saving state of the third privilege is set may be the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed first among the special symbol variations that are executed in parallel, or the special symbol variation is stopped later. The displayed timing is also acceptable. Moreover, regardless of before or after the stop display timing, the timing at which the previously executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed or the timing at which the later-executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed may be used. Moreover, the timing at which a specific special symbol type is stopped and displayed may be used.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is given to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is granted.
Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win that is disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win that is advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). It is possible to elect. In this case, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that he/she has won the lottery at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.
In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and to stop display (fixed display) the winning result before the winning result in the disadvantageous win. can.
In addition, in the ninth control example, the special symbols that have won the short time are changed to a long time, and the time short winning variation state is set. However, it is not limited to this. By setting a big win winning fluctuation state and setting the other special symbol to have a short change during the big win winning fluctuation state, it is possible to acquire a prize ball by a small winning game.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 315. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above in that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and voice lamp control is performed. The difference is that the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the device 113 are partially modified. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
In the above-described second control example, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), variable state ( High probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second probability variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) can be set, and winning a jackpot in a special design lottery. The probability state of each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) can be shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the above. Also, after the end of the above-mentioned jackpot game, and when other end conditions (for example, end conditions established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number) are satisfied, each symbol (special symbol, It was configured so that the probability state of the normal symbol) can be shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state.
Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of normal symbols from a low probability state to a high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery In a part of the lottery result (loss) different from the jackpot winning, the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established.
In other words, it is possible to provide a privilege in which a high-probability state of normal symbols is set even to a player who has not won a big hit in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, the player is provided separately with the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

However, even in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example, due to the nature of granting benefits based on the lottery results of the special symbol lottery that is executed, even though the special symbol lottery is executed multiple times, This situation can continue for a long time, and there is a problem that the player's desire to play may be lowered depending on the result of the special symbol lottery that is executed.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is capable of giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (number of times of special symbol lottery) satisfies a predetermined condition. Configure. By constructing in this way, a privilege can be given to a player who has been playing a game for executing the special symbol lottery for a long time regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player's willingness to play is reduced. You can prevent it from happening.
Here, the privilege (ceiling privilege) granted when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times of special symbol lottery) satisfies the predetermined conditions is the special symbol lottery where the lottery result is other than the jackpot winning (out) is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), and is configured to set a game state (third time saving state) that makes it relatively easy to execute the special symbol lottery. is doing.
In other words, in the special pattern lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), if the jackpot is not won 500 times in a row (when the number of times of addiction reaches 500 times), the ceiling privilege is provided, and a game state (third time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game for the player who has continued the game for a long time without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and to facilitate the improvement of the operation of the game. .

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 (so-called Hamari machine) has a large number of special symbol lotteries executed after the previous jackpot game is over, a new player who aims to receive the ceiling privilege can Since the game is executed, the operation of the game can be easily improved. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set a plurality of stages of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities, even if the pachinko machine 10 has a set value (low setting) with a relatively low jackpot winning probability, the ceiling privilege will be increased. Since the player who aims to be awarded can continue to play the game, it is possible to suppress the operation of the pachinko machine 10 from being remarkably lowered by installing the pachinko machine 10 with low settings. .
In addition, in the tenth control example, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols ) is set, specifically, if the time saving state set based on winning the time saving lottery is set (first time saving state), the game with almost the same content is executed, and is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.
Then, depending on the game state (game state at the time when the number of times of hooking reaches 500 times) at the time when the condition for giving the ceiling privilege (the third time saving state is set) is satisfied, it is given as a ceiling privilege The contents of the benefits are different. Specifically, when the ceiling privilege is granted in the state where the first time-saving state is set rather than the ceiling privilege is granted in the state where the normal state is set, the privilege that is advantageous to the player (The 3rd time-saving state which is hard to finish) is comprised so that it may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the set game state.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured to win a time-saving election with a high probability (1/2) when a special symbol lottery is executed, and most of the time-saving winnings occur for a short period of time. It is configured to set the first time saving state of (for one special symbol variation). By configuring in this way, the game state is frequently switched between the normal state and the first time saving state until the ceiling privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state at the time when the condition for awarding the ceiling privilege is met.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the game state (valid game state) in which the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is updated It is configured to be able to set a game state (invalid game state) that is not played.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured to be able to set the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the second variable probability state is set. If it is, the game (left-handed game) similar to the normal state and the first time-saving state is configured to be executed. That is, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the set game state is the normal state, the first time-saving state, or the second variable probability state.
Then, the state in which the second variable probability state is set becomes an invalid gaming state, and when the special symbol lottery is executed during the second variable probability state, the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is updated. configured to prevent
By configuring in this way, for a player who is running a left-handed game (a player who is running one of the normal state, the first time-saving state, and the second probability variable state), the current Since it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate between the valid game state and the invalid game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the number of special symbol lotteries required until the ceiling privilege is awarded. In addition, according to the length of the period in which the second variable probability state is set, the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of special symbol lotteries to be executed after the previous jackpot game ends) that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege is set. Since it can be made different, even if only the same number of times (for example, 500 times) is specified as the number of special symbol lotteries for which the ceiling privilege is granted, the ceiling privilege can be granted at various timings, It is possible to provide a player who aims to receive a ceiling privilege with the pleasure of predicting the number of special pattern lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted.

In addition, in the above-described second control example, by shifting the probability state of normal symbols from the low probability state to the high probability state, it is possible to execute a game (right-handed game) in which the special symbol lottery is relatively easily executed. However, in the tenth control example, in addition to the configuration used in the second control example described above, the special symbol lottery is performed without shifting the normal symbol probability state from the low probability state to the high probability state. It is configured so that a relatively easy game (right-handed game) can be executed.
Specifically, in the third time-saving state given as a ceiling privilege, while setting the low probability state of the normal pattern, only the variable time of the normal pattern is varied, so that the special pattern lottery is relatively easy to execute. (Right-handed game) is configured to be executable. That is, in the tenth control example, as a game state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the game state (second time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the low probability of the normal symbol A game state (third time saving state) in which the state is set can be set.
By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed even in a situation where the opportunity (for example, jackpot winning) for shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from the low probability state to the high probability state is not established. Since it is possible to vary the easiness (shift from a state in which the special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to execute to a state in which the special symbol lottery is relatively easy to execute), the player can receive special prizes at various timings. It is possible to provide games with different easiness of execution of symbol lottery.
In addition, in the above-described second control example, as a game state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, normal symbols Since only the game state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the high probability state is set can be set, the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is the game in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed. Although it was called a state (time saving state, right-handed game state), in the tenth control example, as described above, in a part of the game state (first time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set , In a part of the game state (second time saving state) in which the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery is configured to be the same as the normal state and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the normal state It is configured to make it easier to execute the special symbol lottery.

Therefore, instead of explaining the probability state of each symbol that is actually set, when simply explaining the ease of executing the special symbol lottery, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the special symbol lottery The game state (first time-saving state, second probability variable state) in which the ease of execution is the same as the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is normal state, or Called a left-handed game state, a game state (second time reduction state, third time reduction state) in which special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is a time reduction state, Alternatively, it will be described as a right-handed game state.
In addition, in the tenth control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed gaming state (normal state, first time saving state, second probability variable state), the same benefits as the ceiling benefits can be given. It consists of Specifically, in a part of cases where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed during a left-handed game state, a period (round game number) during which the jackpot game is executed is shorter than other jackpot wins, and After the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a second time-saving state in which the same time-saving end condition (time-saving number of times) as the third time-saving state that can be granted as a ceiling privilege is set. Furthermore, in a part of the case where the time reduction is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed game state, the second time reduction state can be set, and when the second time reduction state is set based on the time reduction winning. , It is configured to be able to set the same time-saving end condition (time-saving number of times) as the third time-saving state that can be given as a ceiling privilege.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege to the player who is playing the left-handed game before the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. , it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the granting condition of the ceiling privilege. In addition, the event of setting the second time-saving state based on winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving lottery in a special pattern lottery is made to make the player think that the third time-saving state is set as the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established. Therefore, for players who believe that a small number of special symbol lotteries may be set as a condition for granting ceiling benefits, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the previous jackpot game ends Even if the number of times is different from the number of times of the special symbol lottery that satisfies the condition for granting the ceiling privilege, the game can be played enthusiastically with the aim of granting the ceiling privilege, and the game is improved. can improve performance.
Further, although detailed explanation will be given later, in the tenth control example, during the left-handed game, the remaining period (remaining special symbol lottery number of times) until the granting condition of the ceiling privilege is satisfied is indicated to the player. A suggestive effect (ceiling reaching suggestive effect) is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the condition for providing the ceiling privilege is likely to be established (soon to be established) based on the performance result of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance. , it is possible to make it easier for the player to play for a long time while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be given.

It should be noted that, when determining the production mode of this ceiling reaching suggestion production, in addition to the information until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the second time saving state similar to the third time saving state that can be granted as the above-mentioned ceiling privilege It is configured such that the mode of presentation is determined in consideration of information regarding whether or not the condition for which is set is met. By configuring in this way, when the conditions for setting the second time-saving state similar to the third time-saving state that can be granted as the ceiling privilege are satisfied, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established as the ceiling reaching suggestion effect. The same effect mode as in the case of a situation in which there is a high possibility of doing so is determined. Therefore, the event that the second time-saving state similar to the ceiling privilege is set based on the special symbol lottery winning the jackpot or the time-saving winning is set as the third time-saving state when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think.
<Regarding the production contents of the tenth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 291 to FIG. 293, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example can set a game state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above. It consists of
Specifically, when it is determined that the number of executions of the special symbol lottery has reached a predetermined number (500 times), the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (500th special symbol lottery). After is displayed as a stop, the ceiling privilege can be given as a relief measure. In the tenth control example, as a ceiling privilege, a right-handed game state (third time-saving state) that can make it easier to execute a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) than a left-handed game state is set. It is configured to give benefits.
Then, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the left-handed game state (for example, the normal state or the first time-saving state), the period until the ceiling privilege is given (the number of special symbol lotteries) is predicted to the player. As an effect for causing the user to reach the ceiling, a motion suggesting that the user has reached the ceiling is configured to be executable. By structuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the period (the number of times of special pattern lottery) until the ceiling privilege is given by grasping the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggesting performance.

In addition, since it is possible to make the player grasp that the ceiling privilege will be granted soon (that there is a high possibility that the ceiling privilege will be granted) before the ceiling privilege is actually granted, there is no foreshadowing. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ceiling privilege is given without the ceiling privilege and the player hardly receives the benefit of the ceiling privilege.
In the tenth control example, as the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance, the performance mode of "high suggestion" in which the ceiling privilege is given with high expectation, and the ceiling privilege is given rather than the "strong suggestion" production mode. At least a "weak suggestion" rendering mode with a low degree of expectation to be made can be set. It consists of A specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 300, but in the tenth control example, when selecting the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the previous jackpot game is completed, That is, the number of times that the special symbol lottery that the lottery result is other than the big hit (lost) is continuously executed (the number of times of addiction), the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the variable effect that the ceiling reaching suggesting effect is executed, It is configured to select an effect mode based on.
In this way, by configuring the performance mode to be selected based on the number of hooks, the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestive performance is selected based on the actual period until the ceiling privilege is given (remaining number of hooks). Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a high degree of reliability for the player. In addition, in the tenth control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery (based on the results of the jackpot lottery and the time-saving lottery), the same privilege as the ceiling privilege can be given, and the target of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect Even if the result of the special pattern lottery may give the same benefits as the ceiling benefits, it is configured to make it easier to select the “strong suggestion” production mode, which has a high expectation that the ceiling benefits will be given. is doing.
By configuring in this way, even if the same benefits as the ceiling benefits are granted based on the results of the special pattern lottery (based on the results of the jackpot lottery and the short-time lottery), the ceiling benefits are given to the player. It can be made easy to think that it is given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be granted at more timing than the timing at which the predetermined condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the number of special symbol lottery times) is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

As shown in FIG. 291, in the reaching-the-ceiling suggesting effect, the character displayed in the effect mode (middle-ceiling mode) after reaching the ceiling is displayed on the display screen. 291(a) is the case where "weak suggestion" is set as the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance, which is a performance mode that is more likely to be selected when the period until the ceiling privilege is granted is longer than when the period is short. FIG. 291(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when "strong suggestion", which is a presentation mode that is likely to be selected, is set.
291(a), a character 809 resembling an angel crosses the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. A performance is performed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Angel found! Ceiling?..." is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the ceiling reaching suggesting effect has been executed.
Here, as described above, the production mode "weak suggestion" shown in FIG. In the 10th control example, the frequency at which the ceiling-reaching suggestion effect is executed becomes higher as the period until the ceiling privilege is given (until the ceiling is reached) becomes shorter. Therefore, even in the production mode "weak suggestion" shown in FIG. You can play games.
The display screen shown in FIG. 291(a) is a display screen during special symbol fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the 250th special symbol lottery after the end of the previous jackpot game. "250 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a mode of notifying the number of times of addiction for indicating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed since then. That is, in the tenth control example, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the cumulative value of the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of times of addiction) during the period in which the left-handed game state continues, a display mode indicating the number of times of addiction is displayed. configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, the period until the ceiling privilege is given based on the effect mode of the effect suggesting reaching the ceiling to be executed and the number of hits displayed in the small display area Dm7 (the time until reaching the ceiling) period) can be made easier for the player to predict.
Further, as shown in FIG. 291(a), in the left-handed gaming state, the reserved icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the reserved memory (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery mainly executed are displayed in the small display area Dm9. 291(a), in the example shown in FIG. 291(a), it is in a state of acquiring three special figures 1 pending (see small display area Dm1a), so in the small display area Dm9 , three pending icons hr1 to hr3 are displayed.
On the other hand, when "strong suggestion" is set as the effect mode of reaching the ceiling suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed to show that the degree of expectation to be played is high.
FIG. 291(b) is a display screen during special symbol fluctuation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, which is the 499th special symbol lottery executed after the last big hit game is finished, and the last time. "499 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a hamari times notification mode for indicating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game. As a display mode for indicating that the currently executed ceiling reaching suggestion effect is "strong suggestion", a character 809z that is more gorgeous than the "weak suggestion" character 809 (see FIG. 291(a)) is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, as the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect, the effect mode "strong suggestion" which is likely to be set when the ceiling privilege is likely to be given (the period until the ceiling privilege is given is short) is more likely to be set than the other effect mode "weak suggestion". Rather, by configuring to display a gorgeous character in terms of appearance, depending on the aspect of the character displayed when the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is executed, the ceiling privilege is easily granted (the period until it is It is possible to make it easy to visually determine whether the situation is short or not.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "It's an archangel! The ceiling is coming soon" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the ceiling reaching suggestion effect executed this time is "strong suggestion". be done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine whether or not the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (the period until the award is short).
In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 291 (b), because it is in the state of acquiring two special figure 1 pending (see small display area Dm1a), two pending icons hr1, hr2 is displayed.
It should be noted that the fact that the timing for granting the ceiling privilege is approaching is not executed by the ceiling reaching suggestion effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen, but by the pending icon displayed in the small display area Dm9. It may be possible to suggest by changing the display mode of, for example, among the acquired special figures 1 pending, specifying means for specifying the range of special figures 1 pending digested during the left-handed gaming state The range specified by the specifying means and the range other than the specified range are provided with different display modes of the suspended icons, different sizes of the displayed suspended icons, and different displayed areas. It may be configured to
In addition, as a look-ahead effect executed using the hold icon, a display mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is reserved special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery executed before the ceiling privilege is given. It is possible to set different display modes when set to the reserved icon and when set to the reserved icon of the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the first special pattern lottery executed after the ceiling privilege is granted. may be configured.

Further, the pachinko machine is configured so that the contents of the privilege given based on the winning of the jackpot are different depending on whether the jackpot is won before the ceiling privilege is given and when the jackpot is won after the ceiling privilege is given. In the case of the machine 10, it is preferable to display the pending icon in a display mode capable of suggesting the content of the privilege given based on the winning of the jackpot. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information combining the expectation level of winning the jackpot and the expectation level of granting the ceiling privilege by the look-ahead effect using the pending icon.
In addition, as a look-ahead effect, a first suggestion mode for suggesting the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given, a second suggestion mode for suggesting a jackpot winning, and a third suggestion mode for suggesting a short-time winning by a short-time lottery. and , respectively, can be set as the display modes of the pending icon, and a combined display mode combining two or more of the suggested modes described above can be displayed as the display mode of one pending icon. good. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the same display mode (concept including a difference that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish) can be set as the combination display mode corresponding to the different combination.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the subsequent game situation based on the display mode of the pending icon displayed as the look-ahead effect. In addition, by comprehensively determining the game situation including various information (for example, the number of starts, etc.) displayed on other display screens, the subsequent game indicated by the display mode of the hold icon displayed as a prefetch effect It is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the situation.
Next, the contents of the effect executed when the ceiling privilege is awarded will be described. FIG. 292(a) shows an example of the display screen displayed during the special symbol variation (ceiling reaching variation) in which the ceiling privilege (right-handed game state) is set after the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed. FIG. 292(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a right-handed game state (in-ceiling mode) given as a ceiling privilege.

Here, in the tenth control example, the ceiling It is configured so that a privilege (right-handed game state) can be set. In addition, when the ceiling privilege is set, the content of the ceiling privilege (degree of advantage to the player) is changed according to the set game state (normal state or first time saving state). there is
Then, at least a part of the content of the ceiling privilege to be granted this time is notified to the player by the performance mode of the ceiling reaching variation performance for notifying that the ceiling privilege is to be granted. By constructing in this way, not only is it possible to notify the player that the ceiling privilege is to be granted, but also the contents thereof can be notified at the time the ceiling privilege is granted, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game. can do.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 292(a), when the ceiling reaching variation effect is executed, the heaven background corresponding to the mid-ceiling mode is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a display mode for indicating that the player has reached (will reach) the ceiling. Then, the character 809 displayed in the reaching-the-ceiling suggestive effect congratulates that the ceiling privilege is given, and the reaching-the-ceiling variable effect is executed. In addition, the contents 810a of the treasure chest 810 are displayed in a display mode including information "100" for informing the content of the ceiling privilege of this time.
Furthermore, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the game method after the right-handed game state (third time-saving state) is set as the ceiling privilege, The comment "Yes" is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Achieved the ceiling!! Time saving 100 GET!!" is displayed as a notification mode for suggesting that the ceiling privilege is given.

As shown in FIG. 292(a), in the ceiling reaching variation performance executed during the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established, the special symbol after the end of the previous jackpot game is displayed in the small display area Dm7. Information indicating the number of lotteries (information displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 291(a)) is configured not to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily determine the number of special symbol lotteries in which the ceiling reaching variation effect is executed. Therefore, in order to grasp the number of times of the special symbol lottery that can satisfy the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, it is necessary to always grasp the number of times of the special symbol lottery before the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to make the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 always more interesting even during the left-handed game state.
In addition, the above-mentioned ceiling reaching fluctuation effect is performed not only when the number of lotteries of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the previous jackpot game is the number of times (500 times) that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, but also when the ceiling privilege If you win a jackpot where the same benefits (right-handed gaming state) are given, or if you win a specific time-saving privilege (right-handed gaming state) that is the same as the ceiling privilege (right-handed gaming state) It consists of
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the privilege given this time is the ceiling privilege. It should be noted that, by executing the ceiling reaching variation effect shown in FIG. It is preferable to change at least a part of the effect mode of the ceiling reaching variation effect executed according to the type of privilege. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate the type of privilege given this time only to a player who can identify a slight difference in the effect mode of the ceiling reaching variation effect executed.
In addition, the performance period during which the ceiling reaching variation performance is executed, that is, the variation time of the special pattern variation during which the ceiling reaching variation performance is executed is varied without changing the performance mode of the ceiling reaching variation performance to be executed. For example, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation for which the ceiling privilege is given (the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that was won out) is set to the basic time (for example, 10 seconds), the jackpot is won. The variation time of the special symbol variation (the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the specific jackpot winning) when the ceiling reaching variation performance is executed based on 11 seconds, and the ceiling reaching variation performance is performed based on the short winning time. In this case, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the specific short-time winning) may be set to 12 seconds. By configuring in this way, while performing the ceiling reaching variation presentation in the same presentation mode, the performance period of the ceiling reaching variation presentation can be varied according to the type of privilege to be given. Therefore, while suppressing an increase in the performance data for executing the ceiling reaching fluctuation production, it is possible to execute ceiling reaching fluctuation production in different modes according to the type of privilege to be granted. It is possible to discriminate the type of privilege given this time only to a player who can identify a slight difference in ceiling reaching fluctuation performance (difference in performance period).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the tenth control example, the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect shown in FIG. In the ceiling reaching variation effect (fake ceiling reaching effect) executed in this case, the background image (heaven image) of the mid-ceiling mode is displayed, and the character 809 appears, similarly to the display screen shown in FIG. 292(a). Then, an effect to open the treasure box 810 is executed. Then, after the display mode (contents 810a with the word "unfortunate" attached) indicating that the ceiling privilege is not granted from the treasure box 810 is displayed, the background image is switched to the normal background image. be.
During the execution period of the false ceiling reaching effect, the ceiling reward is displayed in the sub display area Ds while the effect is being executed using the same effect mode as the ceiling reward effect executed when the ceiling reward is given. is displayed as a mode indicating that there is a high possibility that is granted, and when the effect indicating the effect result of the false ceiling effect is executed, the ceiling privilege is displayed in the sub display area Ds. A comment "Unfortunately!!" is displayed as a mode indicating that it is not granted.
In this way, by configuring the false ceiling effect to be executable in a situation where the ceiling privilege is not actually given, the effect result indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is temporarily displayed as the effect result of the ceiling reaching effect. When a performance mode (resurrection performance) in which a performance in which the ceiling privilege is not given is executed after the display is displayed, the ceiling reaching performance being executed does not actually give the ceiling privilege. It is possible to make it easy to think that it is a fake ceiling reaching effect shown.
As described above, in the tenth control example, even if the ceiling reaching effect (including the fake ceiling reaching effect) is executed, the ceiling reward is not given, and the ceiling reward is given. It merely indicates to the player that it is likely to be done. Therefore, in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 shown in FIG. A display mode is displayed. In other words, among the characters "Ceiling!?" It becomes a display mode indicating that it is not something that gives a definite notification that it will be given. In this control example and other control examples as well, if a character "!?" is used to indicate

Further, in the tenth control example, as shown in FIGS. 291(a) and 291(b), during the left-handed game state, the number of special symbol fluctuations ( The number of start times) is displayed, and the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of remaining fluctuations) required until the ceiling privilege is granted (until the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied) is not displayed. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is granted may be configured to be able to be notified. By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to continue the game after grasping the number of special symbol variations required until the ceiling privilege is awarded.
In addition, when the information (for example, the remaining number of times) corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations) required until the ceiling privilege is granted can be notified to the player, the actual residual fluctuation Information for presentation corresponding to a value different from the number of times (for example, the number of times greater than the remaining number of times) is configured to be displayed on the display screen, and the presentation displayed on the display screen when the ceiling privilege is actually given. The information for use may be information for presentation indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations required until the ceiling privilege is granted is zero.
In this case, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is given is 200 times, the display mode of "300 remaining times" is displayed as the effect information displayed on the display screen. In other words, the remaining number of times greater than the actual number of remaining fluctuations is displayed as information for effect. Then, when the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed is long, or when the variation performance is executed in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning a big win, or when the player can operate the operation means, the operation performance is executed, Based on the establishment of update conditions such as when the player operates the operation means during the operation presentation, the value indicated by the presentation information displayed on the display screen is updated so as to approach the actual number of remaining fluctuations. (subtraction).
By configuring in this way, the remaining number of times displayed as the information for effect can be reduced more than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, so that the effect of the effect to be executed can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the ceiling privilege has become easier to be granted (the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is granted has been shortened), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the remaining number of times displayed as information for performance can be reduced more than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, so that the result of the special symbol lottery can be obtained before the ceiling privilege is granted. However, if the lottery result (jackpot C13 winning or time-saving election with the second time-saving state set) that can give the same benefits (second time-saving state) as the ceiling privilege, the result of the special symbol lottery Performance information indicating that the remaining number of times displayed as the performance information is zero until the special symbol for indicating is stopped and displayed, and the number of remaining fluctuations required until the ceiling privilege is given is 0. It is possible to make it easy to execute the effect of significantly updating (subtracting) to , without giving the player a sense of incongruity.
By configuring in this way, the content of the production executed when the ceiling privilege and the equivalent privilege (second time saving state) is granted, and the content of the production executed when the ceiling privilege is granted Since deviation can be suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which privilege has been granted. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while thinking that the ceiling privilege will be given at various timings (the number of addictive times).
Next, in the ceiling mode for indicating the period during which the ceiling privilege (right-handed game state in which the third time saving state is set) is given, as shown in FIG. 292 (b), in the main display area Dm A character 801 resembling a rabbit flies around in heaven, and the characters "in the ceiling" are displayed to indicate that the current mode is in the ceiling mode. Then, as a guidance display mode for guiding the game method to the player, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4, indicating the remaining period until the ceiling privilege ends. As the period display mode, characters of "last 90 times" are displayed in the small display area Dm7.
On the display screen shown in FIG. 292(b), "100" indicating that 100 times of reduction in working hours are given is displayed as the content of the ceiling privilege in the ceiling reaching variation effect (see FIG. 292(a)). After that, since it is the display screen when the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, the value of "100" indicating the content of the ceiling privilege notified to the player when the ceiling privilege is awarded is the special symbol lottery. is decremented each time is executed, and "90" is displayed.

In this way, by notifying the player of the period until the ceiling privilege ends (the period during which the mid-ceiling mode continues), it is possible to prevent the ceiling privilege from suddenly ending. In addition, in the tenth control example, when the right-handed game state is set, the privilege (jackpot The game content and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game are configured so that advantageous benefits that are advantageous to the player can be easily given. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "You can win a big prize now!".
Although detailed description will be described later, in the tenth control example, in the left-handed game state in which the normal state and the first time-saving state are set, and the right-handed game state in which the third time-saving state is set, The special pattern lottery is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is the same (5/1000), and the special pattern lottery that does not win the jackpot is performed in the left-handed game state in which the normal state and the first time-saving state are set. When the game is executed 500 times in succession, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, and the third time-saving state (right-handed game state) is set as the ceiling privilege. Then, it is configured so that a right-handed game state is more likely to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a big win is won than a left-handed game state.
In other words, during the right-handed gaming state described above, if the remaining period (number of remaining special symbol lottery times) until the ceiling privilege is granted is reduced, the special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed gaming state It is novel that the game is played while expecting that the special symbol lottery will not win the big prize instead of expecting the big win, and the player expects that the special symbol lottery will win the big prize after the right-handed game state is set. It is possible to provide great playability. Here, in the conventional type pachinko machine 10, although there is a case in which the degree of advantage is varied with respect to the privilege given based on the winning of the jackpot according to the set game state, any game state is set. Even if there is a special pattern lottery, it is more advantageous to the player in that a privilege is given to the player when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. is set, the player has a monotonous playability of aiming for a big win in a special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured to be able to give a privilege based on the number of lotteries instead of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, during the left-handed gaming state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, the right-handed gaming state (second 3 o'clock short state) is set. Then, when the jackpot is won in the state where the third time saving state is set, it becomes easier to execute a big winning game with a large number of round games than when the normal state or the first time saving state is set. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the left-handed game state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set for the player approaches 500 times, It is possible to provide a novel game property of expecting that a big win will not be won in the executed special pattern lottery. That is, it is configured so that a part of the game period during which the player executes the special symbol lottery can be set as a special period during which the player does not expect to win a big win.
Therefore, the player is provided with a game period in which the player expects to win a big win in the special symbol lottery and a game period (special period) in which the player expects to not win a big win in the special symbol lottery (lost the lottery). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game earlier than the conventional type pachinko machine 10 which always aims at winning the jackpot.
Next, with reference to FIG. 293, an effect (additional effect) when the remaining period of the ceiling mode is added will be described. FIG. 293 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during an additional effect in which information (remaining number of times) display for indicating the remaining period of the mid-ceiling mode is added (added).
In the tenth control example, in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect (see FIG. 292 (a)) executed when the ceiling privilege is granted, the content of the privilege (time reduction number) to be granted this time can be notified to the player. Although it is configured, the content of the benefits (number of times of time reduction) notified in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect is a dedicated selection table (ceiling reaching time effect selection table 222lb), with the upper limit of the number of times of time saving set internally. It is configured to refer to and decide.

Then, if there is a difference between the content of the benefits (time saving number of times) notified in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect and the internally set time saving number of times, during the ceiling mode, the remaining ceiling mode It is configured to execute an additional effect for increasing (adding) the period (remaining number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 292(b)). With this configuration, a player who has been set in the ceiling mode can play the game with peace of mind while knowing the minimum period during which the ceiling mode continues. A game can be played while expecting that the period during which the mode continues is extended.
Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is varied according to the gaming state set at the time the ceiling privilege is awarded. If the game state set at the timing of executing the grant determination process of the ceiling privilege at the start of the special symbol variation is the normal state, the right-handed game state (third time saving state) is set, and when the game state set at the timing of execution of the grant determination process of the ceiling privilege at the start of the special symbol variation is the first time saving state, the number of times of time saving is 300 as the ceiling privilege. It is configured so that the right-handed game state (third time-saving state) is set.
That is, it is configured such that the ceiling privilege more advantageous to the player is given when the ceiling privilege is given in the first time-saving state than when the ceiling privilege is given in the normal state. Then, as the content of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time reduction) notified in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect, when the ceiling privilege of 300 times of time reduction is given, the content of the ceiling privilege that is disadvantageous to the player (number of times of time reduction 100 times) can be notified.
By configuring in this way, at the time when the ceiling reaching fluctuation performance is executed, the ceiling privilege given this time is the ceiling privilege advantageous to the player (time reduction number of times 300 times) or the ceiling privilege disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether it is (100 times of time saving). In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured so that the content of the ceiling privilege notified by the ceiling reaching variation effect is within the range of the content of the ceiling privilege that is actually set. On the other hand, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind according to the content notified, but without being limited to this, the content of the ceiling privilege (time reduction number of times) notified by the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect It may be configured to execute a subtraction effect for subtracting during a set period.

For example, when a ceiling privilege (time saving number of times 100 times) disadvantageous to the player is set, a ceiling privilege (time saving number of times 300 times) advantageous to the player is given in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect Information is notified ("300 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7), and in the ceiling mode, the information (remaining time reduction number of times) displayed in the small display area Dm7 is displayed more than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. It may be configured to subtract more. By configuring in this way, even if any ceiling privilege is given, there is a possibility that the ceiling privilege (300 times of time reduction) advantageous to the player is set in the ceiling reaching fluctuation performance. can be comprehended by the player, the player can play the game while expecting that the ceiling privilege that is actually advantageous is given.
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example performs the same game (left-handed game) when the normal state is set and when the first time-saving state is set. It is configured to be executed, and during the left-handed game state in which the left-handed game is executed, the variable performance of the same content is configured to be executed. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to identify the game state set during the left-handed game state. Therefore, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied during the left-handed game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the privilege (number of times of time reduction) to be granted as the ceiling privilege. , the contents of the ceiling privilege notified by the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect can be made interesting.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example, when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed when the normal state and the first time saving state are set, the judgment of time saving winning (time saving Lottery) is configured to be executed, and if the result of the time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) is a hit, the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery that won the time-saving lottery is stopped and displayed. After that, the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) can be set without going through the jackpot game.
Then, when the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery, as a time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state, the time-saving end that is established when the special symbol variation is executed once Configured so that conditions are set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured such that the game state is frequently switched between the normal state and the first time-saving state during the left-handed game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily change the game state set at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of special symbol lottery) is established, so the contents of the privilege granted as the ceiling privilege It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand (time reduction number of times).
The display screen shown in FIG. 293 is a state in which the ceiling privilege (300 times of time reduction) that is advantageous to the player is set as the ceiling privilege, and the ceiling privilege (100 times of time reduction) that is disadvantageous to the player in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect ) is displayed (see FIG. 292 (a)), and a special pattern lottery is executed 100 times in the ceiling mode (remaining time reduction number displayed in the small display area Dm7 is the display screen at the first time (last), and "Last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to indicate that it is the final period of the in-ceiling mode. Then, as an additional effect for adding the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode, an effect is executed in which an additional mode 809a is displayed in order for the character 809 to extend the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode.
In FIG. 293, "+200" is displayed as the additional mode 809a to indicate that the remaining period of the ceiling mode is extended by 200 special symbol lotteries. Then, an additional effect is executed in which the additional mode 809a moves toward the small display area Dm7 and the remaining period displayed in the small display area Dm7 is changed to "Last 200 times". In the sub-display area Ds, a guidance mode for guiding the extension of the ceiling mode and a guidance mode for indicating the details of the extension are displayed as characters "Ceiling extension!! Plus 200 times!!".
Note that the example shown in FIG. 293 shows the display screen when the additional effect is executed in the final period of the ceiling mode (the special symbol fluctuation period in which "Last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7). , The additional effect may be executed during a period other than the final period of the ceiling mode, for example, information indicating a predetermined period (for example, 90 times of remaining time reduction times) as the remaining period of the ceiling mode is displayed in the small display area Dm7. It may be configured to execute an additional effect in the state where the player is present (see FIG. 292(b)). By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the additional performance will be executed, so that the player can continue to be interested in the performance executed during the ceiling medium mode. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 293, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured to execute a special effect as an additional effect, but a part of the effect mode of the additional effect is different from other effects. It may be configured to be the same as the production mode, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery to be targeted in the variable production for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the result of the special symbol lottery is out. In addition to indicating that the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode is extended, a display mode including information indicating that the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode is extended may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility of displaying an effect result indicating that the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode is extended in various effects (variable effects, etc.) executed during the in-ceiling mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in various effects executed during the ceiling mode.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured to execute an additional effect for extending the remaining period of the ceiling mode during the period of the ceiling mode. After the display mode is displayed, a resurrection effect in which the in-ceiling mode is set again may be executable. In this case, for example, without executing the additional effect in the final variation effect of the ceiling mode shown in FIG. After executing a production that suggests (for example, a partial production of the production that is executed when the guidance notification "Please return to the left hand" is set), it is indicated that the ceiling mode has not ended. Execution of an effect (including a guidance notification saying "Enter the ceiling mode! Please continue the right-handed game"), and as a display mode for indicating the remaining period of the ceiling mode, in the small display area Dm7 Remaining 200 times" should be displayed.
With this configuration, the player can be made to think that a new ceiling mode is set after one ceiling mode is finished, rather than the ceiling mode being simply continued. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the conditions for setting the ceiling mode (conditions for applying the third time saving state). Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the left-handed game state can continue to play while expecting that the third time-saving state (right-handed game state) will be set.
<Regarding the game state transition in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the game state transition contents in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 294 is a diagram showing transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 294, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example aims to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 86) which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery. A left-handed game state in which a left-handed game in which a game ball is shot toward the left side area (left side of the variable display unit 80) of the game areas formed on the game board 13 is a game method advantageous to the player. , The right side area (variable A right-handed game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right side of the display unit 80 is an advantageous game method for the player, and a right-handed game state can be set.

More specifically, the normal state as the game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), second probability variation If the state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set, it becomes a left-handed gaming state, and the second time-saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second When the 3 o'clock short state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, it is configured to be a right-handed game state.
Here, the first time saving state and the second time saving state are both game states in which a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state are set. Fluctuation time) is configured to set a normal figure fluctuation time of different length, and when the first short time state is set, it is higher than when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. A normal pattern lottery is won with a probability, but the normal pattern fluctuation time is defined so that the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game executed based on the winning. It is Therefore, in the state where the first time-saving state is set, the left-handed game becomes a game method more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game, although the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. .
The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols are set, but it is possible to set a dedicated variation time as a variation time of normal symbol variation. , the ratio of the game balls launched by the left-handed game entering the first ball entrance 64 is higher than the ratio of the game balls launched by the right-handed game entering the second ball entrance 640. It is a game state in which the higher is. Therefore, in the state in which the third time-saving state is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game, despite the fact that the low-probability state of the normal symbol is set. .
First, the game contents in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) will be explained. The normal state is a game state in which a game (special figure 1 game) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed by entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. When the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200, and when the jackpot is not won, the special pattern lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 for short-time winning.

When a jackpot win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in a normal state, one of four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13) is set. The selection ratios of the jackpot types are defined to be 20% for the jackpot A13, 30% for the jackpot B13, 30% for the jackpot C13, and 20% for the jackpot D13.
When the jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot B13 is set, a jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) is executed, and the second time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot C13 is set, a jackpot game with two rounds (R) is executed, and the second time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot D13 is set, a jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) is executed, and the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends.
On the other hand, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when the time saving is won without winning the jackpot, the time saving is performed after the special symbol variation for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. State is set. In the tenth control example, when the time saving type is won in the special symbol lottery, one of the two types of time saving type is set, and the first time saving state is set. It is configured so that the selection rate of the type is 99%, and the selection rate of the time saving type in which the second time saving state is set is 1%. It should be noted that, in the diagram shown in FIG. 294, since it shows the flow of the main transition of the game state, only shows the flow to shift to the first time-saving state when the time-saving winning is shown, in fact, It shifts to the second time saving state at 1% when the time saving is elected.
Next, the 1st time-saving state set when time-saving election is carried out is demonstrated. As described above, the first time saving state is a game state in which the low probability state of the special symbol lottery and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, but the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the second time saving state described later. By setting a variable time shortening (variable shortening) state in which time (0.1 seconds) is set, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-handed game is executed. It is designed to be difficult. Therefore, similarly to the normal state, the left-handed game becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

In addition, in the tenth control example, since it is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the term indicating the game state is referred to as a first time saving state, but in fact, it is the same as the normal state. Since it is a game state in which a game is executed, the normal state may be referred to as a first normal mode, and the first time saving state may be referred to as a second normal mode as terms for indicating game content.
This first time-saving state is a game state set only when the time-saving is won in the special symbol lottery, and when the first time-saving state is set by the time-saving winning, the first time-saving state is terminated. "Time saving once" is set as the time saving end condition. In addition, even when the special symbol lottery is executed during the first time-saving state, the same time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election) as the normal state is executed, and the time-saving lottery is executed during the first time-saving state. Even when winning, it is configured so that the time saving type is selected with the same selection ratio and the same content as the normal state described above.
In other words, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is a big hit and neither of the time-saving is won, the special symbol variation for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. After that, the time saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is time-saving winning, a new first time-saving state is set at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. , the first time saving state is repeatedly set. Therefore, when the first time saving state is set, as long as the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the special symbol lottery in the first time saving state continues, and if the special symbol lottery does not win the time saving, in the normal state A special symbol lottery is configured to be executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to frequently switch between the normal state and the first time-saving state during the left-handed game state. In addition, in the normal state (first normal mode) in which the left-handed game is executed and in the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the variable production executed using the third symbol display device 81 is also the same production mode. is configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which of the normal state and the first time saving state is set.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, when the number of times the special symbol lottery that the lottery result is out in the normal state or the first time saving state is continuously executed (the number of times of Hamari) reaches 500 times, the ceiling It comprises so that the 3rd time saving state may be set as a privilege. Details will be described later, but when the third time-saving state is set, it is better to perform a right-handed game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the same manner as the second time-saving state described above. , a right-handed game state that is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game in which a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加
In addition, depending on the game state set when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the left-handed gaming state (the number of times of addiction) reaches the number of times the ceiling privilege is granted, the contents of the ceiling privilege are changed. It is configured to be different, and it is configured to give a ceiling privilege that is more advantageous to the player when the first time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set. there is
That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, the normal state and the first time saving state are frequently switched during the left-handed game state, and the game determines which of the normal state and the first time saving state is set. Since it is configured to make it difficult for people to grasp, when the third time saving state is set as a ceiling privilege, it is possible to determine from which game state (normal state, first time saving state) to the third time saving state. It can make it difficult for people to understand.
Returning to FIG. 294, the description continues. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the first time-saving state, the same four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13) as when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state described above. , jackpot C13, jackpot D13), any jackpot type is set. Each jackpot type is selected at a selection rate different from that in the case of winning a jackpot in a normal state, and the selection rate of the jackpot types is 50% for the jackpot A13, 20% for the jackpot B13, and 20% for the jackpot. C13 is defined to be 10% and the jackpot D13 is defined to be a selection ratio of 20%.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example, the game state that is set when the jackpot is won and the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends are made different according to the type of the jackpot that has been set. When the jackpot is won during the first time-saving state and the jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the jackpot B13 and jackpot C13 are set, When the first time-saving state is set after the big win game is over and the big win D13 is set, the second probability variable state is set after the big win game is over.
That is, when the jackpot is elected in the first time saving state, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50%, the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 30%, and the time saving state is set at a rate of 20%. After the jackpot game ends, the second probability variable state is set. Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot in the first time-saving state, a privilege disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is given to the player, rather than in the case of winning the jackpot in the normal state. .
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example, the number of times of special symbol lottery that is executed in the state where the normal state or the first time saving state is set (the special symbol lottery that has been lost is continuously executed) reaches a specific number of times (500 times), a right-handed game that is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game state (normal state, first time reduction state) as a ceiling privilege. The state (third time saving state) can be set, and the game state set when the ceiling privilege is given is the first time saving state rather than the normal state. A ceiling privilege (a third time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied) that is advantageous to the player can be set. On the other hand, as a privilege (jackpot privilege) granted when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed gaming state, the normal state is set rather than the first time-saving state is set. It is configured so that a jackpot privilege that is advantageous to the player (a privilege that a right-handed game state is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends) is more likely to be given when the player is in the game.
Therefore, as a game state set in the left-handed game state, the period in which the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state (the period until the number of times the ceiling privilege is given is reached) and , A period in which the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state (a period in which the number of times that the ceiling privilege is given is reached) is created, so simply one of the game states is set. To improve the amusement of a game by making the type of game state expected to be set according to the game state different from the case where the player plays the game while expecting the game to be played. can be done.

Next, when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery executed in a normal state and either one of the big wins B13 and C13 is set as the big win type, a second time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. . This second time-saving state is similar to the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) set in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. When it is set higher than the low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state, etc.) of the normal pattern and the right-handed game is continuously executed, the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern per game. The normal figure fluctuation time is set so that it is possible to enter the ball easily.
In this second time-saving state, a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, and a specific jackpot type (jackets B13, C13) is set, or although illustration is omitted in FIG. 294, a time-saving lottery wins It is a game state set in a part (1%). In addition, in this 10th control example, when the 2nd time saving state is set, it comprises so that a time saving lottery may not be performed. Therefore, it is suppressed that the first time-saving state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state, is set by winning the time-saving lottery executed during the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player. be able to.
In the tenth control example, the content of the time saving end conditions for ending the second time saving state can be set differently according to the setting opportunity of the second time saving state, and a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. When the jackpot B13 is set in this case, 100 times of working hours are set as the time saving end condition, and when the big win C13 is set, 300 times of working hours are set as the time saving end condition. In addition, when the second time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery, time saving 300 times is set as the time saving end condition.
In this way, depending on the setting opportunity of the second time saving state, by varying the contents of the time saving end condition for ending the second time saving state, when the second time saving state is set, until when the second time saving state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether is continued.

The normal state or the number of times of special symbol lottery that is executed in the state where the first time saving state is set (the number of times that the special symbol lottery that wins out is executed continuously) reaches a specific number of times (500 times) Then, the third time saving state is set. The third time-saving state is a game state set as a ceiling privilege, and is a special game state that is not set based on the result of the special symbol lottery.
The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols are set, but the percentage of game balls entering the second ball entrance 640 in the case of a right-handed game. is configured to be the same as the second time saving state described above. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, the winning probability in the low probability state of normal symbols is slightly lower than the winning probability in the high probability state of normal symbols. There is only a difference, and in the state where the third time saving state is set and the state where the second time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation and the normal pattern per game are executed. It is set to be the same as the opening operation pattern of the electric accessary product. Therefore, when the second time saving state is set and when the third time saving state is set, the same game (right hitting game) is executed for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the right-handed game to grasp whether the currently set game state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state. .
As described above, in the tenth control example, the number of times the jackpot was not won continuously in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time saving state (the number of times of addiction) reaches the specified number of times (500 times) It is configured to be able to grant a privilege (ceiling privilege) in which a third time saving state (right-handed game state) is set as a result of doing so.
In addition, in a part of the case where the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time saving state (jackpot election in which the jackpot C13 is set), the number of rounds is smaller than that of other jackpot elections. A jackpot game (two-round jackpot) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a second time saving state (right hitting game state) is set to make the player perform a game (right hitting game) similar to the third time saving state. It consists of In addition, in the normal state, or part of the time-saving election in the special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state (time-saving election in which the second time-saving state is set), to indicate that time-saving winning After the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, a second time-saving state (right-handed game state) is set in which the player performs a game (right-handed game) similar to the third time-saving state.

In other words, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction) during the left-handed gaming state satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, or the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the left-handed gaming state (whether or not the jackpot is won , presence or absence of short-time winning) is a specific lottery result, it is configured to be able to set a right-handed game state that is advantageous to the player. Then, as an effect for indicating that the right-handed game state is set, the right-handed game state is set for the player by executing an effect of the same content even when any of the above-mentioned triggers is established. It is configured to make it difficult to grasp the trigger to be set.
By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the right-handed game state with different degrees of advantage according to the establishment opportunity for setting the right-handed game state, the right-handed game state to be set is the game. It is possible to make it difficult to determine in advance whether the game state is advantageous to the player.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the tenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 295 to 301. FIG. In this thirteenth example, for the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 295 to 298. FIG. FIG. 295(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 295(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described second control example (see FIG. 96(a)) in the first winning random number table 202da. Instead of the first winning random number table 202la, replacing the second winning random number table 202c with the second winning random number table 202lc, replacing the jackpot type selection table 202dd with the jackpot type selection table 202ld, and replacing the time saving random number table 202de. The random number table 202le per time saving is different in that the time saving type selection table 202lf is provided instead of the time saving type selection table 202df. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example, part of the variation pattern (variation time) defined in the variation pattern selection table 202db is Instead of the normal/second probability variation table 202db1 of the variation pattern selection table 202db in the second control example, a left-hand game state table (not shown) is provided. In the table for the left-handed game state, the variable time is 15 seconds regardless of whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win, a short-time win, or neither a big win nor a short-time win. A variation pattern is defined so that a special variation pattern can be selected.
In other words, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the variation pattern with the same variation time (15 seconds) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is suppressed that the result of the special symbol lottery is grasped by the player by specifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation set before the special symbols are stopped and displayed. can do.
In this tenth control example, a special variation pattern (variation time 15 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, and the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a variation pattern command including information for indicating the selected variation pattern. In this case, it is configured to execute a ceiling reaching suggesting performance with a performance period of 15 seconds. That is, the ceiling reaching suggesting effect is an effect executed when a special variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the variation effect (ceiling reaching suggestion effect) corresponding to the variation pattern type output from the main control device 110, the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to reduce the processing for determining In addition, since the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation for which the ceiling reaching suggesting performance is executed can be fixed to 15 seconds, the performance period of the ceiling reaching suggesting performance can be fixed to 15 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern lottery. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of effect data corresponding to the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 296(a), the first winning random number table 202la in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 296(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202la in the tenth control example.
As shown in FIG. 296(a), the first winning random number table 202la has a first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot winning against the above-described first winning random number table 202da (see FIG. 97(a)). are different in that the range of values of In addition, in the sixth control example, the possible range of values of the first winning random number counter C1 is varied. Specifically, in the above-described second control example, the possible range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as 900 "0 to 899", but in the tenth control example, "0 1000 of "999". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to define a determination result with a lower probability in various determinations determined by referring to the value of the first winning random number counter C1. In the tenth control example, only the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is different. Since the configuration for storing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability state", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 4". The lottery result "out" is defined for the range of "~999", and if it is "high probability state", the value of the first random number counter C1 is lottery for the range of "0 to 19" The result "big hit" is specified, and the lottery result "loss" is specified for the range of "20 to 999".
In other words, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability state", the number of values that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1 is 1000, and the number of values determined as a big win is 5. The winning probability is 5/1000 (1/200). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability state", the number of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 1000, and the value determined as a big win is 20. The winning probability is 20/1000 (1/50).

Next, with reference to FIG. 296(b), the second winning random number table 202lc in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 296(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202lc. This second winning random number table 202lc, like the second winning random number table 202c described above, is a data table referred to when determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, and can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4. For the range of values (0 to 299), a value determined as winning is defined for each probability state of normal symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296(b), when the probability state of the normal symbol is "low probability state", the value of the second per random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 298". If the lottery result is "hit" and the lottery result is "loss" for the value of "299" and the "high probability state" is established, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set to "0 to 299”, that is, the lottery result “hit” is defined for the entire range.
That is, in the tenth control example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbols, when the normal symbol lottery is executed, most of them are hit and won. By configuring in this way, according to the result of the normal design lottery (according to the execution or non-execution of the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal design lottery), the probability of the currently set normal pattern It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state is the "low-probability state" or the "high-probability state".
In addition, in the tenth control example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, by setting the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery high, the currently set probability state of the normal symbol is "low probability state". Although it is difficult to determine whether it is a "high probability state", it is not limited to this. The range of values of the winning random number counter C4 may be defined to be substantially the same.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, as shown in FIG. 296(b), in the tenth control example, when the normal symbol "high probability state" is set, the normal symbol lottery is lost and won. When the "low probability state" of the normal pattern is set without doing so, the normal pattern lottery is configured to lose with a low probability (1/300) and win. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that the "low-probability state" of the normal design is set by grasping that the normal symbol lottery is lost and won. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is lost.
In this case, as the variation pattern of the normal design variation, as the variation pattern set when the result of the normal design lottery is out, rather than the variation pattern set when the result of the normal design lottery is winning, It is preferable to configure so that a variation pattern with a long variation time (normal symbol variation time) is easily set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period in which the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery is not executed, the higher the possibility that the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. It is possible to make the player who is trying to grasp the probability state of the normal pattern interested in the execution frequency of the game per normal pattern.
Next, with reference to FIG.296(c), random-number table 202le per time saving is demonstrated. This time-saving random number table 202le is a data table referred to in time-saving determination (time-saving lottery) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (loss), and is the time-saving random number table described above. 202de (see FIG. 97(c)), the conditions (special symbol type, game state) in which the value (range) of the first per random number counter C1 determined as time saving election is defined are different. is different.
Specifically, the special symbol type is "common", and when the game state is the normal state or the first time saving state, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "500 to 999". The range is defined as the judgment value of short working hours winning. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state and the first time saving state, the determination value of the time saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

Here, in the tenth control example, the determination of time-saving election in the special symbol lottery (time-saving lottery) is performed when the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot, that is, when the jackpot lottery is lost and won. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state, it is configured to win the time-saving with a probability of 1/2. That is, in the tenth control example, the game state (normal state, first time saving state, second time saving state, third time saving state) in which the low probability state is set as the probability state of the special symbol, some games It is configured so that a short working hour lottery can be won in the state. In addition, among the game states (first time saving state, second time saving state) in which a high probability state is set as the probability state of normal symbols, in some game states, it is configured to be able to win a time saving lottery. there is
In this way, instead of defining whether or not it is possible to win a time-saving lottery in a time-saving lottery according to the probability state set for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), according to the set game state It is possible to make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether or not a special symbol lottery capable of winning a time-saving lottery is being executed or not, because it defines whether or not a time-saving lottery can win a time-saving lottery.
Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the left-handed game state (normal state, first time-saving state, second variable state), in some of the left-handed gaming states (normal state, first time-saving state), it is configured to be able to win a time-saving lottery. Then, when the second variable probability state is set in the left-handed game state, it is configured so that the short-time winning is not possible. Then, when the left-handed game state is set, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine the actually set game state. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player who is playing the game in the left-handed game state always think that the time saving lottery is being executed.
Although the detailed description will be described later, in the tenth control example, if a game state other than the game state in which the short-time lottery can be won is set, the short-time lottery (judgment of the short-time lottery) is executed. However, without being limited to this, it is configured so that the time-saving lottery is executed even if any game state is executed. , It may be configured not to set a determination value for determining that the time saving lottery is determined as a result of the time saving lottery for the gaming state in which the time saving lottery cannot be won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 297, the jackpot type selection table 202ld in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 297 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202ld. As shown in FIG. 297, the jackpot type selection table 202ld defines a jackpot type common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the common data table is referred to and the jackpot type is selected.
In the tenth control example, five types of jackpot types are provided as jackpot types set when a jackpot is won: jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13, and jackpot E13. The selection ratio of each jackpot type is varied according to the game state being played. In addition, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the type of the time saving state when the same jackpot type is set differ according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 297, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", "jackpot A13" are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values are ``jackpot A13'', so ``jackpot A13'' is determined when the special pattern lottery in the normal state results in a jackpot. The percentage used is 20% (20/100).
The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 49" is associated with "jackpot B13" and defined for the "normal state" of the game state when the jackpot is won. This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10 rounds of time saving jackpot) in which the second time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when a special pattern lottery in a normal state results in a jackpot, "jackpot B13" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100).

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 30 counter values are the "jackpot C13", so when the special pattern lottery in the normal state results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C13" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100).
The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with the "jackpot D13" and defined for the "normal state" of the game state when the jackpot is won. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values become a ``jackpot D13'', so when a special pattern lottery in a normal state results in a jackpot, a ``jackpot D13'' is determined. ratio is 20% (20/100).
That is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the ratio of setting the left-handed game state (normal state, second probability variable state) after the jackpot game ends is 40%, and the right-handed game state (second short time state) is set to 60%. In addition, for the jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot D13) in which the left-handed game state is set after the jackpot game ends, the same content jackpot game (10-round jackpot game) is executed, so left-handed hits are performed after the jackpot game ends. When the game state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the normal state and the second variable probability state is set.
Further, when the jackpot C13 is determined, a jackpot game with a smaller number of rounds (two rounds) than the jackpot games corresponding to other jackpot types is executed, and the jackpot game is executed (or not) for the player. It is structured so that it is difficult to grasp that Although a detailed explanation is omitted, when winning a jackpot with jackpot C13 set, it is more difficult for a player to recognize that a jackpot has been won than when winning a jackpot with other jackpot types set. It is configured such that a variable performance is executed in a performance mode. Specifically, it is configured to execute a ceiling reaching suggesting effect that is executed when the ceiling privilege is awarded.

By constructing in this way, when a part of the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery is won, that is, when the jackpot C13 is set as the jackpot type is won, the ceiling privilege is given instead of winning the jackpot. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think that it is a game situation where the game is played. Therefore, by winning the jackpot where the jackpot C13 is set, a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (time saving 300 times) is played without establishing a predetermined condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing of granting the ceiling privilege. As a result, during the left-handed game state, it is possible to make the player think that a different number of times of hooking can be set as a granting condition for granting the ceiling privilege, and the game is continued while expecting the ceiling privilege to be awarded. can be done.
In addition, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second probability variable state ends and the transition to the normal state (until the value of the probability variable counter 203i becomes 0) Even if the time-saving lottery is not executed and the special pattern lottery is executed, the number of hits for giving the ceiling privilege is not added. That is, when the second probability variable state is set, when the special symbol lottery of 530 times is executed after the jackpot game ends, the number of times of addiction reaches 500 times, and the ceiling privilege is given, so the ceiling From the point of view of granting a privilege, it is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.
In addition, during the period when the second probability variable state is set, the determination of the time saving lottery is not executed (time saving lottery). Part (0.1%) of the game aiming to set the second time saving state (300 time saving times) is not executed, so the game state is disadvantageous to the player from the viewpoint of setting the second time saving state. .
On the other hand, since the high probability state of the special symbols is set during the second variable probability state, the special symbol lottery executed during the second variable probability state wins a jackpot with a probability of 1/50. Therefore, during the period when the second variable probability state is set, the game state is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set, from the viewpoint of aiming for a big win in the special symbol lottery.

Next, as shown in FIG. 297, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49" for the "first time saving state (second normal mode)" when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is defined in association with “jackpot A13”. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A13", so when the special pattern lottery in the first time-saving state results in a jackpot, "jackpot A13". is determined 50% (50/100).
The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 69" with respect to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot "first time saving state (second normal mode)", "jackpot B13" is associated. are stipulated. This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the first time-saving state (time-saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 20 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when the special symbol lottery in the first time saving state hits a jackpot, "jackpot B13" The ratio determined is 20% (20/100).
In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the first time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "big hit C13" is 10, so when the special symbol lottery in the first time saving state (second normal mode) results in a big hit. 10% (10/100) is determined as the “jackpot C13”.
And when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "first time saving state (second normal mode)", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", and the "jackpot D13" corresponds. attached and stipulated. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values become "jackpot D13", so when the special pattern lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode) results in a jackpot. 20% (20/100) is determined as the "jackpot D13".

That is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the left-handed game state (normal state, first time-saving state, second variable state) is set after the jackpot game ends. The percentage becomes 100%. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (second normal mode), even if the jackpot is won, the right-handed game state is not set after the jackpot game ends, which makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the left-handed game state. Therefore, the game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.
Further, as described above, in the normal state, the second time-saving state is set when the jackpot C13 is set is won. While it was possible to give the player the same privilege (second time saving state of 300 times of time saving), in the first time saving state, even if the jackpot C13 is set, Since the first time-saving state is set instead of the second time-saving state, a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (the second time-saving state of 300 times of time-saving) cannot be given to the player based on the winning of the jackpot.
Next, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "second time saving state (time saving mode)", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot A13" is associated. stipulated by This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values become "jackpot A13", so when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery in the second time saving state, "jackpot A13". is determined at 10% (10/100).
When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second time-saving state (time-saving mode)", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "10 to 59", and the "jackpot B13" is associated with it. It is This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10 rounds of time saving jackpot) in which the second time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second time saving state results in a jackpot, "jackpot B13" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "60 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "jackpot C13" is 20, so if the special symbol lottery in the second time saving state (time saving mode) hits a jackpot " The rate at which the jackpot C13” is determined is 20% (20/100).
Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "second time saving state (time saving mode)", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", "jackpot D13" is associated. are stipulated. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "jackpot D13" is 20, so if a special symbol lottery in the second time saving state (time saving mode) hits a jackpot " The rate at which the jackpot D13” is determined is 20% (20/100).
That is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state, the ratio of setting the left-handed gaming state (normal state, second probability variable state) after the jackpot game ends is 30%, right-handed The ratio of setting the game state (second time saving state) is 70%. Also, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is not the first time saving state (time saving state in which the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery is about the same as the normal state). , the second time-saving state (time-saving state in which the easiness of execution of the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal state) is always set.
Therefore, the second time-saving state is a game state in which advantageous benefits are more likely to be given to the player when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery than the above-described normal state and the first time-saving state.

Next, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is defined as the "second probability variable state", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 29" is associated with the "jackpot A13". ing. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 30 counter values become "jackpot A13", so when the special pattern lottery in the second probability variable state results in a jackpot, "jackpot A13". is determined is 30% (30/100).
The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 49" is defined in association with the "jackpot B13" for the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, which is the "second probability variable state". This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10 rounds of time saving jackpot) in which the second time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 20 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a jackpot, "jackpot B13" The ratio determined is 20% (20/100).
In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 30 counter values are "jackpot C13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a jackpot, "jackpot C13" The ratio determined is 30% (30/100).
When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second probability variable state", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 89" in association with the "jackpot D13". there is This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot D13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a big hit, "jackpot D13" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning the big win is the "second probability variable state", the value of the first win type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with the "jackpot E13". there is This "jackpot E13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (100-round probability variable jackpot) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot E13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a big hit, "jackpot E13" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).
As described above, when the jackpot is won when the second variable probability state is set, a plurality of jackpot types for which the second variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game are configured to be selectable, and the selected jackpot type Depending on the probability variation frequency (the length of the period in which the second probability variation state continues) is configured to be different. As described above, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second probability variation state is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction for granting the ceiling privilege, so depending on the length of the period during which the second probability variation state continues , the period (the number of times of special symbol lottery) from the end of the previous jackpot game to the granting of the ceiling privilege can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily grasp the remaining period of the special symbol lottery until the ceiling privilege is awarded.
It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 297, in the tenth control example, only when the second variable probability state is set, the second variable probability state with different probability variable times (the value set in the variable probability counter 203i) Although it is constructed so as to be able to win the set jackpot (jackpot D13, jackpot E13), it is not limited to this, and even when the jackpot is won in a state in which another game state is set, a different probability variable number of times. may be configured to be able to set the jackpot type for which is set.
In addition, in the tenth control example, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second variable probability state is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of addiction for granting the ceiling privilege, but it is executed As a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction for giving the ceiling privilege, another game state may be set. It may be configured so that the number of symbol lotteries is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to establish the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege as the first time-saving state is set as the time-saving lottery is won in a plurality of times of special symbol lotteries executed without winning the jackpot. . In addition, in the tenth control example, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the game state (second probability variable state) set after the end of the jackpot game is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction for granting the ceiling privilege. , it is possible to delay the timing of granting the ceiling privilege for the period during which the predetermined second probability variable state continues (the period until the value of the probability variable counter 203i becomes 0). However, since the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted can only be delayed for a predetermined period (the period during which the second variable probability state continues), the ceiling There is a problem that it becomes easy to predict the timing at which the privilege is given.
On the other hand, when configured so that the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the first time saving state is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction, the normal state or the time saving executed during the first time saving state Depending on the result of the lottery, it is possible to vary the length of the period during which the first time-saving state is set from the end of the jackpot game to the number of times of addiction that satisfies the granting condition of the ceiling privilege. Therefore, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery that is not updated to the value of the number of times of addiction is not the predetermined number of times, but can be varied according to the result of the time-saving lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ceiling privilege is awarded.
Next, with reference to Drawing 298 (a), the contents of time saving classification selection table 202lf are explained. Drawing 298 (a) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection table 202lf. This time-saving type selection table 202lf is set when the time-saving state is set without being based on the jackpot winning, specifically when the time-saving lottery is won or when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied. A data table that is referred to when determining the type of time saving state (first time saving state to third time saving state), and is a time saving table 202lf1 that is referred to when deciding the time saving type in the case of time saving winning and a ceiling table 202lf2.
Here, the contents defined in the time saving winning table 202lf1 to be referred to at the time of time saving winning will be described with reference to FIG. 298(b). FIG.298(b) is a figure for showing the content prescribed|regulated to table 202lf1 for time reduction election. As shown in FIG. 298(b), in the time saving winning table 202lf1, different time saving types are defined with respect to the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time saving type "first time saving" is defined for the range of "0 to 998" for the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving type "first time saving" for the range of "999" 2 hours short" is stipulated. Then, when the "first time saving" is selected, the first time saving state is set, and as the time saving end condition of the first time saving state, the time saving end condition in which "1" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. stipulated. In addition, when the "second time saving" is selected, the second time saving state is set, and as the time saving end condition of the second time saving state, the time saving end condition that "300" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. stipulated.

In other words, it is configured so that the ratio of setting the first time saving state when winning the time saving win is 99.9%, and the ratio of setting the second time saving state when winning the time saving win is 0.1%. . Then, when the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving election, the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed once. Here, in the tenth control example, since it is configured to be able to execute the time saving lottery even during the first time saving state, when the time saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the first time saving state is set , a new time-saving state will be set. Therefore, if the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, and "first time saving" is set as the time saving type, the first time saving state is set after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the special symbol lottery is continuously executed in the first time saving state in which one time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203h is "1") is set as the time saving end condition.
On the other hand, when the time saving is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the first time saving state ends when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the normal state is set. become. Therefore, the next special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state.
By configuring in this way, in a left-handed game period (hamari period) in which special symbol lotteries are continuously executed without winning a jackpot, the player is encouraged to play while frequently switching between the normal state and the first time-saving state. can be done. In addition, the game state in which the special symbol lottery is executed is switched according to not only the result of one time-saving lottery but also the results of a plurality of times (two times) of time-saving lotteries that are continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract interest in multiple special symbol lotteries that are executed in succession.
Next, with reference to FIG. 298(c), the contents of the ceiling table 202lf2 referred to when determining the time saving type when the ceiling privilege is given (when the third time saving state is set) will be described. do. FIG. 298(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ceiling table 202lf2. This ceiling table 202lf2 is a data table included in the time saving type selection table 202lf, and is referred to for determining the time saving type (time saving number of times) set this time when the condition for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 298(c), the ceiling table 202lf2 defines a ceiling privilege (time saving number of times) of different contents according to the game state when reaching the ceiling (when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied), Specifically, when the game state when reaching the ceiling is the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100", and when the game state when reaching the ceiling is the first time saving state, the time saving counter "300" is defined as the value of 203h. In addition, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the third time-saving state that becomes the right-handed game state while the low probability state of the normal pattern is set without setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. be.
That is, when setting the right-handed game state that makes it easier for the player to execute the special symbol lottery than the left-handed game state based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, the probability of various symbols (special symbols, normal symbols) A right-handed game state can be set without changing the state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the process of changing the probability state of various patterns (special patterns, normal patterns) without being based on the result of the special pattern lottery (the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the short-time lottery). can.
In addition, in the tenth control example, as described above, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the privilege can be granted to the player without changing the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). However, without being limited to this, the probability state of each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is changed based on the establishment of the condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the probability state that is disadvantageous to the player It may also be configured to give a privilege (variable to a probability state advantageous to the person).
In this case, it is good to constitute so that not the 3rd time-saving state but the 2nd time-saving state may be set, when the grant conditions of a ceiling privilege are satisfied. Thereby, since the game state set during the right-handed game state can be set only to the second time-saving state, the processing for managing the game state can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 295(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 295(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 295(b), the special drawing lottery counter 203la, the first ceiling standby flag 203lb, and the second ceiling standby flag 203lc are set to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 96(b)) in the second control example described above. The difference is that they are added. The rest is the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The special figure lottery counter 203la is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of special symbols (the number of times of addiction), and the number of executions of the ceiling privilege special pattern lottery is the grant of the ceiling privilege. The counter value is referenced when determining whether the conditions are met.
Specifically, the ceiling determination process (see S38051 in FIG. 304) executed in the special symbol determination process (see S30251 in FIG. 303) of the special symbol variation process (see S30104 in FIG. 302) has a low probability of a special symbol. If it is determined that the state is set (S38102 in FIG. 304: Yes), that is, if the special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation) is started during the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the counter is 1 are added (S38103 in FIG. 304). Then, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (S217 in FIG. 302: Yes), or if a ceiling privilege is given (S38351 in FIG. 307 : Yes, or S38358 of FIG. 307: Yes), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0.
In the tenth control example, when it is determined whether or not the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low-probability state of special symbols (the number of addictions) is referred to. When the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of special symbols (the number of times of addiction) reaches 500 times, the ceiling privilege is given. As described above, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is not synchronized with the number of special symbol lotteries that have been executed, but is configured so that the value of the counter is added in synchronization with the number of times of addiction.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the low probability state of the special symbol is added as the number of times of addiction, but the number of times of addiction is determined as the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. For example, a special design lottery for a specific special design type (first special design) out of a plurality of special design types (first special design, second special design) is executed. It may be configured to add the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (add the number of times of addiction) only when Based on the fact that one special symbol lottery is executed when the special symbol lottery is executed when the special symbol lottery is executed when another game state (for example, the first time saving state) is set. It may be configured so that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la to be added (the number of times of Hamari) increases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining executions of the special symbol lottery (remaining hooking number) required until the ceiling privilege is granted.
Furthermore, in the tenth control example, only the condition for adding the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is defined, and when the jackpot is won (when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are cleared), the ceiling privilege is granted. In the case, it is configured to clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la to 0. Therefore, when the number of hooks reaches 500 times and the third time saving state (time saving 100 times or 300 times) is set as a ceiling privilege, the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0, and then The value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is added every time the special symbol lottery is executed in the 3 o'clock short state. Therefore, after the third time saving state is set as the ceiling privilege, when the number of times of hooking reaches 500 times again, that is, when the number of hookings after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 1000 times , the ceiling privilege for the second time is given.
By constructing in this way, the ceiling privilege can be given again to the player who did not win the jackpot even during the period when the third time-saving state given as the ceiling privilege is set. In addition, in the tenth control example, since the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0 at the timing when the ceiling privilege is granted, when the third time saving state of the time saving number of times 100 is set, When the third time saving state ends, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la becomes 100, and when the third time saving state of 300 times of time saving times is set, the special figure at the time when the third time saving state ends The value of the lottery counter 203la becomes 300. Therefore, when the game aiming at the ceiling privilege of the second time is performed, the number of times of the special symbol lottery to be executed in the left-handed game state can be easily made smaller than that of the game aiming at the ceiling privilege of the first time.
In addition, in the tenth control example, the number of times that the ceiling privilege is given is stipulated to be 500 times, and the ceiling privilege is given when the number of times of addiction reaches 500 times for the ceiling privilege after the second time. It is configured so that the conditions are established, but without being limited to this, the first ceiling privilege is given when the number of times of hooking reaches 500 times, and then the first ceiling privilege is given. reaches 300 times, that is, when the number of times of addiction after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 800 times, the second ceiling privilege may be provided. .

By configuring in this way, for example, when the third time-saving state of 300 times the number of times of time-saving is set as the first ceiling privilege, the end condition of the third time-saving state (300 special symbol lottery) Immediately after establishment, the second ceiling privilege can be given, the third time-saving state can be continuously set, and the player can easily continue to play the game.
Further, in the tenth control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is added or not added according to the set game state. In addition to this, when the special symbol lottery to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the process of subtracting the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la may be executable.
The first ceiling standby flag 203lb is a flag for indicating that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege has been established while the normal state is set. reaches 500). Then, in the time saving setting process (S30254 in FIG. 307) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is determined (S38351 in FIG. 307) and is set to ON. If it is determined (S38351 in FIG. 307: Yes), as the content of the ceiling privilege, the privilege corresponding to the normal state of the game state at the time when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied (time saving 100 times) is granted. (S38352 in FIG. 307), after that, the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to off.
The second ceiling standby flag 203lc is a flag for indicating that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established while the first time saving state is set, and when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established (special drawing lottery is set to ON when the value of the counter 203la reaches 500). Then, in the time saving setting process (S30254 in FIG. 307) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is determined (S38358 in FIG. 307) and set to ON. If it is determined (S38358 in FIG. 307: Yes), as the content of the ceiling privilege, the privilege (time saving 300 times) corresponding to the gaming state at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied is the first time saving state. (S38359 in FIG. 307), and then the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to OFF.

In the tenth control example, the process (ceiling determination process) for determining whether or not the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied is executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and the process for actually granting the ceiling privilege (time saving setting process) is configured to be executed at the stop timing of the special symbol variation. Then, the result of the ceiling determination process executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation is executed at the stop timing of the special symbol variation based on the setting status of the first ceiling standby flag 203lb or the second ceiling standby flag 203lc. It is configured to be distinguishable in the time saving setting process.
By configuring in this way, for example, the pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which the game state is switched during the execution period of the special symbol variation, and the ceiling determination process until the special symbol variation is started A pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which the game state is switched, or a pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which the game state is switched from when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed until the time saving setting process is executed is used. Even so, a proper ceiling privilege can be given.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 299 to 301, the details of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described second control example. . Note that detailed description of the same contents as those of the second control example described above will be omitted.
First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 299(a). FIG. 299(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 299(a), the ROM 222 in the tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the above-described second control example (see FIG. The difference is that a time effect selection table 222lb is added.

The ceiling-reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the ceiling-reaching suggestion effect when the ceiling-reaching suggestion effect is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation during the left-handed game state. data table. In the tenth control example, it is possible to execute a ceiling reaching indication effect for suggesting to the player the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted during the period until reaching the number of hits for which the ceiling privilege is granted. is doing.
By executing the ceiling reaching suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to predict the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given to the player who is playing the left-handed game, and the ceiling privilege is given. The game can be played while making the player expect that In addition, in the tenth control example, as the ceiling reaching suggestion effect, not only the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, but also the privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time saving state) based on the result of the special symbol lottery It is configured so that it can be suggested to be set. This indicates that there is a high possibility that the ceiling privilege will be given at a timing unexpected for the player (for example, timing when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game is about 20). It is possible to provide an unexpected game in which a ceiling reaching suggesting performance is executed and a second time saving state is set after the ceiling reaching suggesting performance is executed.
By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that a small number of times of addiction may be set as the number of times of addiction to which the ceiling privilege is given, and the player is motivated. can be made to execute a left-handed game. Furthermore, the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) is granted (set) based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, so that the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted is easy to identify, while the ceiling Since the privilege (second time saving state) equivalent to the privilege is provided (set) based on the lottery result of the special pattern, the timing of the provision is likely to be more random than the third time saving state. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing to shift to the right-handed game state in which the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) or a privilege (second time saving state) equivalent to the ceiling privilege is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect mode of the executed ceiling reaching suggestion effect in order to quickly grasp the timing of shifting to the right-handed game state.
Here, the detailed contents of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 2221a. As shown in FIG. 300, the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la includes the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc and the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) corresponding to the acquired special figure reservation (special design reservation storage) ) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, two types of effect modes are defined as the effect modes of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect, respectively.

Specifically, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "0 to 200" and the prefetching result includes information indicating the jackpot winning of "jackpot C13", the obtained effect counter 223f `` Ceiling suggestion (strong) '' for the range of ``0 to 79'', and ``No suggestion mode (indicated by ``-'' in the figure) for the range of ``80 to 99'' is the ceiling reaching suggestion If the look-ahead result does not include information indicating the winning of the "jackpot C13" jackpot (other than that), the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is set to "0 to 99". "No suggestive mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the entire range is stipulated as the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestive effect.
In addition, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "201 to 460" and the information indicating the jackpot winning of "jackpot C13" is included in the look-ahead result, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "Ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 79", "No suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the range of "80 to 99", the ceiling reaching suggestion production It is defined as a production mode, and if the look-ahead result contains information indicating "time saving winning", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 19" to the range of "ceiling suggestion (strong )” is “suggested mode (weak)” for the range of “20 to 39”, and “no suggested mode (indicated by “-” in the figure)” for the range of “40 to 99” If it is specified as a production mode of the arrival suggestion production, and the information indicating the "jackpot C13" jackpot winning and the "short-time winning" is not included in the look-ahead result (other than that), the acquired production counter 223f "Ceiling suggestion (weak)" for the value range of "0 to 4", "No suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the range of "5 to 99", suggesting that the ceiling is reached It is specified as a production mode of production.
Furthermore, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "461 to 495" and the look-ahead result includes information indicating the jackpot winning of "jackpot C13", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "Ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 19", "no suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the range of "20 to 99", the ceiling reaching suggestion production It is defined as a production mode, and if the look-ahead result contains information indicating "time saving winning", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 39" to the range of "ceiling suggestion (weak )”, “suggestion mode (strong)” for the range of “40 to 99” is defined as the production mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion production, and the look-ahead result is “jackpot C13” jackpot winning, and “time saving If the information indicating "winning" is not included (other than that), the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "ceiling suggestion (weak)" is set to "50 to 69". "Ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "70 to 99" and "no suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" are specified as the production mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion production. ing.
Finally, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "496 to 500", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 9" regardless of the look-ahead result. (Indicated by "-" in the figure)", "Ceiling suggestion (weak)" for the range of "10 to 39", "Ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "40 to 99" It is defined as an effect mode of the arrival suggestion effect.

That is, the smaller the remaining period until the number of hits to which the ceiling privilege is given, that is, the larger the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc, the easier it is to set the ceiling suggestive mode, and the smaller the remaining period as the suggestive mode. The contents of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la are defined so that the "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for emphasizing and suggesting is easily set. Also, if there is a special figure reservation that wins the "jackpot C13" in which a privilege (second time saving state) equivalent to the ceiling privilege is set, regardless of the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc "Ceiling Suggestion (strong)” is defined to be easily selected. Therefore, even if the right-handed gaming state (second time-saving state) is set based on the special symbol lottery winning the jackpot, before the special symbol variation to win the jackpot is executed, that effect can be suggested to the player.
Furthermore, if the information indicating the time-saving election is included as the result of the look-ahead, there is still a slight possibility that the second time-saving state will be set based on the time-saving election, so the time-saving election as the look-ahead result It is configured to make it easier to set the ceiling suggestion mode than when the information indicating the is not included. In addition, in this 10th control example, it is configured to be able to set the second time saving state (right-handed game state) in a part (0.01%) when the time saving lottery is won. Then, as the information used when selecting the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance, instead of using the information on whether or not the second time-reduction state is set by the time-reduction lottery, whether or not the time-reduction is won is simply used. It is configured to use this information.
By configuring in this way, when the second time saving state (right-handed game state) is not set, and when the winning is made in the time-saving state when the second time-saving state (right-handed game state) is set. In both cases, the effect mode (suggestion mode) of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is selected at the same selection ratio. Therefore, even if the right-handed game state is not set, it is possible to execute the ceiling reaching suggesting effect (so-called fake effect) including the ceiling suggesting mode at an appropriate rate.
In addition, without being limited to the contents of the tenth control example, for example, when having a look-ahead result indicating that the second time saving state is elected in the time saving state is set, the second time saving state is set Even if there is no look-ahead result indicating that the game will be won in a short time, the ceiling suggestion mode may be set more easily.

The effect selection table 222lb when reaching the ceiling is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling executed by the special symbol variation in which the condition for giving the ceiling privilege is established, and is given this time. The content of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time reduction), the result of the special pattern lottery indicated by the special pattern variation that satisfies the conditions for giving the ceiling privilege (jackpot, loss), and the value of the acquired production counter 223f. Production modes are defined.
When the ceiling reaching time production is executed, as shown in FIG. 292 (a), a production mode including a mode showing that the ceiling privilege is given and a mode showing the content of the ceiling privilege (time reduction number) The effect is executed when reaching the ceiling. Thereby, it is possible to make the player grasp that the ceiling privilege is given (that the third time saving state is set) before actually giving the ceiling privilege.
In addition, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern variation that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, that is, when the jackpot game is started without granting the ceiling privilege, the ceiling is set as the performance mode of the ceiling reaching performance. It is configured such that an effect mode is set to indicate that the privilege is not granted. By configuring in this way, the jackpot game is executed without performing the right-handed game immediately after notifying that the ceiling privilege (for example, 300 times of time reduction) is given, giving the player a sense of incongruity. It can be suppressed.
In addition, in the tenth control example, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (when it reaches 500), the effect when reaching the ceiling is executed. Without being limited to this, when the value of the special drawing lottery counter 223lc becomes a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 100), it is configured to execute the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling, and the conditions for giving the ceiling privilege are actually established. If not, it may be configured such that an effect mode for indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is set. By constructing in this way, when the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling is executed in a performance mode for indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given, the possibility of winning the jackpot can be left, so that the performance effect is enhanced. be able to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 301, the contents defined in the ceiling reaching effect selection table 222lb will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect selection table 222lb when reaching the ceiling. As shown in FIG. 301, the effect selection table 222lb at the time of reaching the ceiling is associated with the ceiling privilege (time saving number of times), the target special symbol lottery result, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. (Production A to production C) are defined, and the value set in the ceiling time reduction counter 223la and the setting contents of the post-loading flag 223lb are defined in correspondence with each production mode.
Specifically, when the content of the ceiling privilege to be granted is "time saving 100", that is, when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied during the normal state, the result of the special pattern lottery is "jackpot" In some cases, the effect mode “effect A” is defined for the entire range of “0 to 99” for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f. In this case, a non-ceiling state indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is set as the performance when the ceiling is reached. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time saving counter 223la, and the trailing flag 223lb is set to OFF (not set to ON).
Although detailed description will be described later, the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is a counter for measuring the value related to the content of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time reduction) previously notified to the player, and the production mode of the production when reaching the ceiling is Value is set if set. Then, the value is subtracted each time the special pattern variation is executed, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 0, the number of remaining time reductions in the third time reduction state granted as a ceiling privilege is determined, and the number of remaining time reductions is determined. When it exists, an effect (additional effect) corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions is executed.
The post-loading flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of times of time-saving in the third time-saving state given as a ceiling privilege. , A value other than the value indicating the number of times of time saving in the third time saving state given as a ceiling privilege (value corresponding to the number of times less than the number of times of saving time in the third time saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la It is set to ON.

That is, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit", it is in a state where it is not possible to execute the game in the third time-saving state given as the ceiling privilege, so the ceiling is used as the production mode of the production when reaching the ceiling. The effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the privilege is not given is set, and the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is not set, and the post-loading flag 223lb remains off.
On the other hand, when the content of the ceiling privilege is "time saving 100" and the result of the special symbol lottery is "loss", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19". A" is set, "1" is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la, and the post-loading flag 223lb is set to ON.
In this case, in fact, the third time saving state (time saving 100 times) is given as the ceiling privilege, but as the ceiling reaching production, the production indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is executed. After the effect is finished, an additional effect (see FIG. 293) is executed to additionally notify the time saving 100 times. In this way, even if the ceiling privilege is actually given, the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given in the effect at the time of reaching the ceiling can be set. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that satisfies the granting condition is the lottery result (jackpot winning) in which the ceiling privilege is not granted, it is possible to execute the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling indicating that the ceiling privilege will not be granted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the ceiling reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set.
Also, the effect mode "effect B" is set for the range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "20 to 99". This production mode "Production B" includes a mode indicating that the ceiling privilege is given as a ceiling reaching performance, a mode indicating that the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is "time saving 100 times", It is an effect mode in which an effect including is executed. In this case, since the content of the privilege (time saving 100 times) given as the ceiling privilege matches the content of the privilege (time saving 100 times) notified to the player in the ceiling reaching production, the additional production is executed. Therefore, the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "101", and the trailing flag 223lb is set to off.

Next, when the content of the ceiling privilege to be granted is "time saving 300", that is, when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied during the first time saving state, the result of the special pattern lottery is "jackpot" In some cases, the effect mode “effect A” is defined for the entire range of “0 to 99” for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f. In this case, a non-ceiling state indicating that the ceiling privilege is not provided is set as the performance when the ceiling is reached. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time saving counter 223la, and the trailing flag 223lb is set to OFF (not set to ON).
In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is "out", the value of the obtained production counter 223f is set to the production mode "production A" for the range of "0 to 19", and the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "1", and the trailing flag 223lb is set to ON.
In this case, in fact, the third time saving state (time saving 300 times) is given as the ceiling privilege, but as the ceiling reaching production, the production indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is executed. After the effect is finished, an additional effect (see FIG. 293) is executed to additionally notify that the time saving of 300 times is added. In this way, even if the ceiling privilege is actually given, the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given in the effect at the time of reaching the ceiling can be set. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that satisfies the granting condition is the lottery result (jackpot winning) in which the ceiling privilege is not granted, it is possible to execute the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling indicating that the ceiling privilege will not be granted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the ceiling reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set.
Also, the effect mode "effect B" is set for the range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "20 to 49". This production mode "Production B" includes a mode indicating that the ceiling privilege is given as a ceiling reaching performance, a mode indicating that the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is "time saving 100 times", It is an effect mode in which an effect including is executed. In this case, the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege (300 times of time reduction) and the content of the privilege (100 times of time reduction) notified to the player in the ceiling reaching production do not match, and when the ceiling is reached At the end of the ceiling mode production (see FIG. 292 (b)) corresponding to the short time notified in the production, the additional production that adds the number of times of time reduction 200 times is executed, so the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la " 101” is set, and the trailing flag 223lb is set to ON.

Further, the effect mode "effect C" is set for the range of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f "50 to 99". This production mode "production C" includes a mode indicating that the ceiling privilege is given as a ceiling reaching performance, a mode indicating that the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is "time saving 300 times", It is an effect mode in which an effect including is executed. In this case, since the content of the privilege (time saving 300 times) given as the ceiling privilege and the content of the privilege (time saving 300 times) notified to the player in the ceiling reaching production match, the additional production is performed. Since it is not executed, "301" is set to the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la, and the trailing flag 223lb is set to OFF.
Next, with reference to FIG. 299(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 299(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example.
As shown in FIG. 299(b), the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example is the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example The RAM223 (see FIG. 101(b)) has a difference in that a ceiling time reduction counter 223la, a post-loading flag 223lb, and a special figure lottery counter 223lc are added. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The ceiling time-saving counter 223la is a counter for measuring a value relating to the content of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time-saving) previously notified to the player, and the value is set when the performance mode of the ceiling reaching performance is set. be done. Then, the value is subtracted each time the special pattern variation is executed, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 1, the number of remaining time reductions in the third time reduction state granted as a ceiling privilege is determined, and the number of remaining time reductions is determined. When it exists, an effect (additional effect) corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions is executed.

Since the ceiling time saving counter 223la is set when the ceiling arrival production (production corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation immediately before the third time saving state is set) is executed, the time saving number of times in the third time saving state A value obtained by adding 1 to the value notified in the effect when reaching the ceiling is set (see S34503 in FIG. 315), and the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation is set in a state where the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set. The value is decremented by 1 each time (see S34408 in FIG. 314). As a result, the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set at the timing of setting the special symbol variation variation performance in which the number of times of remaining time reduction in the third time reduction state notified to the player in the ceiling reaching performance is 1 (last). (see S34410 in FIG. 314).
The post-loading flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of times of time-saving in the third time-saving state given as a ceiling privilege. , A value other than the value indicating the number of times of time saving in the third time saving state given as a ceiling privilege (value corresponding to the number of times less than the number of times of saving time in the third time saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la It is set to ON.
This post-loading flag 223lb is set to ON (S34504 in FIG. 315) in correspondence with the content of the ceiling privilege that is actually set (the number of times of time reduction) and the production mode of the production when reaching the ceiling (S34504 in FIG. 315), and the ceiling time reduction counter 223la becomes 1 (S34410 in FIG. 314: Yes), the setting status of the flag is determined (S34411 in FIG. 314). As a result, whether or not the number of time reductions in the third time reduction state (the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la) notified to the player in the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling matches the actually set number of time reductions in the third time reduction state It can be determined whether or not, and if they do not match (when the post-add flag 223lb is set to ON), the add-on effect is executed.
The special figure lottery number counter 223lc is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction) for establishing the granting condition of the ceiling privilege, and is a special figure lottery counted by the main controller 110. When the command for indicating the value of the counter 203la is received (S9093 in FIG. 311: Yes), the value indicated by the received command is set (see S9094 in FIG. 311). Then, it is referred to when determining the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect (see S34508 in FIG. 315).

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 302 to 309, the contents of the control processing of main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described, focusing on points that differ from the above-described second control example. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example performs a process of determining whether or not to give a ceiling privilege based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, and a ceiling privilege for the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example. is added, the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is different, and the contents of the processing based on the normal symbol lottery are explained in detail.
Specifically, instead of special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 104), special symbol variation processing (see S30104 in FIG. 302), normal symbol variation processing (see S30106 in FIG. 308), and start-up processing ( 309) is shown. Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 302, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S30104) will be described. FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S30104). As shown in FIG. 302, the special symbol variation process (S30104) replaces the special symbol determination process (S251 of FIG. 104) with respect to the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 104). The process (S30251) is replaced with the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S252 in FIG. 104), the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S30252) is replaced with the time reduction setting process (S254 in FIG. 104), and the time reduction setting process is performed. (S30254) is different, but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S30251) will be described. FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S30251). As shown in FIG. 303, when the special symbol determination process (S30251) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S8001), and a lottery is drawn based on the first winning random number table 202la. A result (jackpot determination result) is acquired (S8002), and it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot winning (S8003). When it is determined that the jackpot is won (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to the jackpot (S8004), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the first The jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the design display device 37 is set (S8005), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the process of S8003 (S8003: No), then the ceiling determination process is executed (S38051), and then the time reduction lottery process is executed (S38006), and this process ends do. That is, the special symbol determination process (S30251) executed in the tenth control example is the ceiling determination process (see S251 in FIG. 105) with respect to the special symbol determination process (see S251 in FIG. 105) executed in the second control example described above. (S38051) is added, and the time saving lottery process (S8006 in FIG. 105) is replaced with the time saving lottery process (S38006). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
Next, the details of the ceiling determination process (S38051) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 304 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling determination process (S38051). In this ceiling determination process (S38051), it is determined whether the special symbol lottery to be executed this time is a special symbol lottery that can update the grant condition (number of times of hooking) for granting the ceiling privilege, and based on the determination result Processing for updating the granting condition (number of times of addiction), processing for determining whether the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied by the updated number of times of addiction, and processing to indicate that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied and a process for holding the information until the conditions for setting the ceiling privilege are satisfied.
When the ceiling determination process (S38051) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a special symbol low probability state (S38102). . When it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38103), and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la after addition has reached 500. (S38104).
In the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), set the state command including information indicating the current value of the special figure lottery counter 203la ( S38105), the process ends. The state command set by the process of S38105 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other state commands set in the second control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a state command indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is received, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is updated. As a result, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, that is, the number of times of hooking can be determined also on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 500, that is, if it is determined that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied (S38104: Yes), then the current game It is determined whether the state, that is, the gaming state at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established is the normal state (S38106), and if it is determined to be the normal state (S38106: Yes), the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON (S38107), a state command including information indicating that the ceiling is waiting and information indicating the ceiling type (first ceiling) is set (S38108), and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S38106, the current is not the normal state, that is, if it is determined that it is the first time saving state, the second time saving state (S38106: No), the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON ( S38109), the process proceeds to S38108. On the other hand, in the process of S38102, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a low probability state, that is, if it is determined that the condition for updating the number of times of addiction is not satisfied (S38102: No), this process is terminated.
As described above, in the tenth control example, when the number of executions (the number of addictions) of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches the specified value (500 times), the ceiling A special symbol lottery that satisfies the update condition of the number of times of addiction is executed instead of updating (adding) the number of times of addiction corresponding to all the special symbol lotteries that are executed so as to establish the conditions for granting the privilege. In case (S38102 of FIG. 304: corresponds to Yes), it is configured to update (add) the number of times of addiction (the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc).
By configuring in this manner, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game can be made different from the number of times of addiction. Even if it is specified, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the number of times of addiction reaches a specific number. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing (the number of special symbol lottery times) the ceiling privilege will be given.

In addition, in the tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 304, when the special symbol lottery is executed during the low probability state of the special symbol, the number of times of addiction is updated, and the special symbol is renewed during the high probability state of the special symbol. When the lottery is executed, the number of addictions is not updated. In other words, as the update condition of the number of hits, it is configured so that the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the update condition, but the update condition of the number of hits is not limited to this, for example, a specific When the game state (first time saving state) is set, it may be configured so that the update condition of the number of times of addiction is not satisfied, or a special symbol lottery (second special symbol) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) 2 special symbol lottery) is executed, it may be configured so that the update condition of the number of times of addiction is not satisfied, and when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result, the subsequent lottery A predetermined period (a period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times) may be configured so that the condition for updating the number of times of addiction is not satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the number of times of addiction reaches a specific number. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing (the number of special symbol lottery times) the ceiling privilege will be given.
Further, in the tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 304, when the condition for updating the number of times of addiction is established, the number of times of addiction is updated (added) by one each time the special symbol lottery is executed. However, without being limited to this, for one special symbol lottery, the number of times of addiction may be updated two times or more, or less than one time (0.5 times). However, the number of times of addiction may be subtracted from one special symbol lottery. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict at what timing (the number of special symbol lottery times) the ceiling privilege will be given.
Next, with reference to Drawing 305, processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S38006) are explained. Figure 305 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S38006). This time-saving lottery process (S38006) is executed instead of the time-saving lottery process (see S8006 in FIG. 106) executed in the second control example described above. The difference is that the conditions for execution are changed in accordance with the game specifications.
Specifically, when the time saving lottery process (S38006) is executed, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S8102), and whether the current game state is the normal state or the first time saving state It discriminates (S38151). And, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the first time saving state (S38151: Yes), since the execution conditions for the time saving lottery are satisfied, the time saving lottery based on the time saving random number table 202le (S38152), then the same S8105 and S8106 processing as the above-described time saving lottery processing (see S8101 in FIG. 106) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S38151, if the current gaming state is not the normal state or the first time-saving state, that is, if it is determined that it is a gaming state in which the execution conditions for the time-saving lottery are not satisfied (S38151: No), This processing is ended without executing the time saving lottery.
Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S30252) will be described. FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S30252). This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S30252) is different from the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S252 in FIG. 107) executed in the above-described second control example to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. 202dd (see FIG. 98) to the jackpot type selection table 202dd (see FIG. 98) to perform the process of changing the data table to the jackpot type selection table 202ld (S38251), and the data to be referred to for determining the time reduction type at the time of the time reduction election The table, time saving type selection table 202df (see FIG. 100 (b)) to execute the process of changing to the time saving type selection table 202lf (S38253) and the data referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation The difference is that the table is changed from the variation pattern selection table 202db (see FIG. 99) to the variation pattern selection table 202db (see S38252), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the description thereof is omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 307, the contents of the time saving setting process (S30254) will be described. FIG. 307 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S30254). In this time-saving setting process (S30254), the above-described time-saving setting process (see S254 in FIG. 109) indicates that the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established in the ceiling determination process (see S38051 in FIG. 304). When the information is set (when the first ceiling standby flag 203lb or the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON), processing for setting the time saving state (third time saving state) is added They are different in that respect.
Also, based on the execution of the special symbol lottery of 1, if the establishment of the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege by the ceiling determination process (see S38051 in FIG. 304) and the time saving election by the time saving lottery overlap, the ceiling privilege Priority is set in advance for multiple time-saving state settings so that the setting of the time-saving state based on the establishment of the granting condition is preferentially processed and the processing for discarding the information related to the time-saving winning is executed. There is a difference.

When the time saving setting process (S30254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S38351: Yes) , set the value of the time saving counter 203h to 100 (S38352), set the first ceiling standby flag 203lb to off (S38353), set the third time saving state in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), and set the time saving of this time Clear the information on the lottery (S38355), set the state command including the information indicating the third time saving state and the information indicating the number of time saving times (S38356), clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38357), End this process.
In the processing of S38351, if it is determined that the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is not set to ON (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON (S38358). ), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S38358: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38359), the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to OFF (S38360), and the game state Set the third time saving state in the storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information on this time saving lottery (S38355), and set the state command including the information indicating the third time saving state and the information indicating the number of time saving times. (S38356), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process is terminated.
Then, in the process of S38358, if it is determined that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is not set to ON, that is, based on the special symbol lottery executed this time, it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are not satisfied. If so (S38358: No), the processing of S8351 to S8354, which is the same as the time saving setting processing (see S254 in FIG. 109) in the second control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends.
As described above, in the tenth control example, whether the setting condition of the time saving state is established in the control process (time saving setting process (S30254)) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed ( Whether the time saving state is a settable lottery result, or whether any of the various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) is determined, and when it is determined that the setting conditions are satisfied, the time saving state is set. However, another timing may be adopted as the timing for setting the time saving state. ) determines whether or not the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be set.

In addition, after the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the time saving state may be set before the next special symbol lottery is executed, for example, when the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied A predetermined value is set for a measurable measuring means (timer), and when the time corresponding to the value set in the measuring means has elapsed, the time saving state may be set, or the time saving state may be set. When the setting condition is satisfied (when any of the various ceiling standby flags is set to ON), a setting lottery (for example, a main process periodically executed by the main controller 110 It is also possible to configure the lottery to be executed by executing the lottery, and to set the time saving state at the timing when the set lottery is won. In this way, the time saving state can be set at various timings within the period from the establishment of the time saving state setting condition until the next special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the timing at which the time saving state is set.
In addition, in the tenth control example, a plurality of time-saving setting conditions for setting the time-saving state are configured to be settable, and based on one special symbol lottery, a plurality of time-saving setting conditions are overlappingly established. configured to obtain Specifically, a lottery result time reduction setting condition established based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and a lottery times reduction setting condition established based on the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery can be set.
Then, it is possible to prioritize whether or not a time-saving setting condition (time-saving setting condition for the number of lotteries) is established so that a time-saving state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set, and the condition for setting the number of lottery time-saving is established. When it is determined that it is, it is difficult to set a time saving state (right-handed gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Configured to be configurable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially set a time saving state that is advantageous to the player even when a plurality of time saving setting conditions are satisfied overlappingly, so that the player can easily set the time saving state. , it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous game from being easily executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that a plurality of time-saving setting conditions can be established overlappingly, a method of setting a time-saving state different from the tenth control example described above may be adopted. It is difficult to set the time-saving state (right-handed gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. When it is discriminated, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not a condition for shortening the number of times of lotteries is established so that a time-saving state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set, and it is determined that the conditions for reducing the number of times of lottery are established. It may be configured to be able to set the time saving state based on establishment of the number of lottery time saving setting conditions when it does.
In other words, when a plurality of time-saving setting conditions are established overlappingly, the time-saving setting condition (lottery result time-saving setting condition) that is difficult to set the time-saving state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous for the player is established. A time saving state advantageous to the player is established when only a time saving setting condition (time saving setting condition for the number of times of lotteries) for easily setting the time saving state (right-handed game state) advantageous to the player is established. (Right-handed gaming state) may be configured to set a time saving state based on establishment of time saving setting conditions (lottery number of time saving setting conditions) that are likely to be set.
By constructing in this way, it is easier to set a time-saving state advantageous to a player when only a specific time-saving setting condition is met than when a plurality of time-saving setting conditions are met redundantly. can be done. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the player expects that other time saving setting conditions will not be satisfied based on the special symbol lottery for which the specific time saving setting conditions are to be satisfied.
In this case, for example, a variable effect (ceiling reaching effect) for indicating the lottery result of a special pattern lottery where a specific time saving setting condition (lottery number of time saving setting condition) is established, and a specific time saving setting condition (lottery number of time saving setting condition ) is not established, and whether other time-saving setting conditions (lottery result time-saving setting conditions) are satisfied (for example, time-saving lottery wins in time-saving lottery (whether to do or not) is preferably different, and in the ceiling reaching effect, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous as a result of not winning a time-saving election than when winning a time-saving election. If the result of the time-saving lottery is lost and won, it is easier to set a production mode that congratulates the player than if the result of the time-saving lottery is a time-saving lottery, and in the normal production, it is easier to set a time-saving lottery. Since it is easier to set the time-saving state than when it does not win, if the result of the time-saving lottery is a short-time lottery, the effect mode that congratulates the player is set rather than when the result of the time-saving lottery is lost and won. It should be configured so that it is easy to

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp whether or not a game situation advantageous to him/herself can easily be set by grasping the content of the effect to be executed. Easy game can be provided.
Moreover, you may comprise so that a special time saving state (4th time saving condition) can be set only when several time saving setting conditions overlap and are satisfied.
Next, with reference to FIG. 308, the contents of the normal symbol variation process (S30106) will be described. FIG. 308 is a flow chart showing the details of the normal symbol variation process (S30106). This normal symbol variation process (S30106) illustrates the contents of the process omitted from the above-described control examples.
In each control example including the tenth control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game state ( In this control example, set a second time saving state) and a game state (first time saving state in this control example) that makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during normal game per game configured as possible.

Specifically, the normal pattern high probability state (first time saving state) set based on the time saving lottery winning, and the normal design high probability state (first time saving state) set based on the jackpot winning 2 o'clock short state) and different lengths of normal design fluctuation time are set.
Then, when the first time saving state is set, as shown in S30807 of FIG. 308, a very short (0.1 second) normal symbol fluctuation time is set. By configuring in this way, after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, until the passing game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the normal symbol winning game It becomes possible to end (normal figure per game), and it becomes a time-saving state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁
On the other hand, when the second time saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 308, a short (1 second) normal symbol fluctuation time is set. By configuring in this way, after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, the timing at which the passed game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a is the normal symbol winning game. It is possible to make it during (normal figure per game), and it becomes a time-saving state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640.
Furthermore, in the tenth control example, in the state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to the same extent as in the above-described second time-saving state. It is configured so that the third time saving state can be set. Specifically, when the third time saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 308, a short (1 second) normal symbol fluctuation time is set. Then, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is configured to be a normal symbol low probability state (299/300) and a normal symbol high probability state (299/300).

Therefore, even if the low-probability state of the normal design is set, by setting the same length as the second time-saving state as the fluctuation time of the normal design, the game ball is moved to the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to set a game state (right-handed game state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.
In addition, in the normal state and the second probability variable state in which the low probability state of the normal design is set, as shown in S30808 of FIG. Since it is set, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game. It becomes a game state (left-handed game state).
Also, as shown in S30809 and S30810 of FIG. 308, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, than when the low probability state of the normal design is set, in the game per normal pattern Although the electric accessory 640a is configured to be in the open state for a long time, in any case, when 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, the second ball entrance 640 Since the game ball can enter the second time saving state and the third time saving state, the same amount of game balls can enter the second ball entrance 640 .
Next, referring to FIG. 309, the start-up processing of main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 309 is a flow chart showing the details of the start-up process of main controller 110 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 309, in the start-up process of the main controller 110 in the tenth control example, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has started up normally (S1707: Yes), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is shown. A process of transmitting a state command containing information to the sound lamp control device 113 (S31701) and a process of transmitting a state command containing information stored in the game state storage area 203g to the sound lamp control device 113 (S31702). and are different from the start-up process in each control example described above. Other than that, they are identical.

With this configuration, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted, the information indicating the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 when the power supply is restored. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to appropriately set an effect to be executed based on the game situation of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 310 to 315, the details of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described. The tenth control example differs from the above-described second control example in that the command determination process (see S34182 in FIG. 310) and the variable display setting process (see S34113 in FIG. 313) are executed. there is Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, the contents of the command determination process (S34182) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 310 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S34182). In this command determination processing (S34182), in place of the state command reception processing (S4282) in the command determination processing (see S4182 in FIG. 114) of the second control example described above, state command reception processing (see S34251 in FIG. 311) is executed. ), otherwise they are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, referring to FIG. 311, the processing contents of the state command reception processing (S34251) will be described. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process (S34251). As shown in FIG. 311, in the state command reception process (S34251), the state command received from the main controller 110 includes When it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time saving state based on the information (S9005: Yes), the state command including information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is received. The difference is that the processing for the case of Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the state command reception process (S34251) is executed, the same processes of S9001 and S9002 as the state command reception process (see S4282 in FIG. 117) in the second control example described above are executed. After that, the processing of S9005 is executed, and when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time saving state (S9005: Yes), the time saving state effect setting processing is executed (S9091), and then the processing of S9093 is performed. The contents of the time saving state effect setting process (S9091) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the processing of S9005, if it is determined that the state has not been changed to the time saving state (S9005: No), the display back image change command for indicating the back surface type corresponding to the game state after the change is set (S9092 ), and the process proceeds to S9093.
In the process of S9093, the status command received this time, information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, that is, it is determined whether information indicating the number of times of Hamari is included (S9093), and if it is determined that it is included (S9093: Yes), sets the value corresponding to the received value to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S9094), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9093, if it is determined that the information indicating the number of times of addiction is not included (S9093: No), this process ends.
Next, with reference to Drawing 312, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S9091) performed by state command receiving processing (refer to S34251 of Drawing 311) are explained. Figure 312 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S9091). This time saving state effect setting process (S9091) differs from the above-described time saving state effect setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 118) in that the processing contents in the case of shifting from the normal state to the time saving state are changed. The other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving state effect setting process (S9091) is executed, first, the game state before change is read out from the secondary state setting area 223g (S34301), and it is determined whether the game state before change is the normal state (S34302). ). In the process of S34302, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S34302: Yes), the information indicating the time saving type included in the command received this time is the information indicating the first time saving state It is determined (S34303) , If it is determined that it is not in the first time saving state (S34303: No), the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving counter 223da (S34304), and then the time saving of the time saving state set this time Determine whether the type is the third time-saving state (S34305), and when it is determined that it is the third time-saving state (S34305: Yes), the back type corresponding to the ceiling mode (see FIG. 292 (b)) is shown) A command for changing the back image for display is set (S34306), and the process ends.
Also, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is not the third time saving state (S34305: No), then the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is a jackpot C13 It is determined whether it is the second time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on (S34307), and when it is determined that it is the second time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit C13 (S34307: Yes), The processing of S34306 described above is executed, and this processing ends.
In the process of S34307, when it is determined that it is not the second time saving state set after the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307: No), next, whether it is the second time saving state set after the time saving election It is determined (S34308), and when it is determined that it is the second time saving state set after the time saving election (S34308: Yes), the processing of S34306 described above is executed, and this processing ends. Then, in the process of S34308, if it is determined that it is not the second time saving state set after the time saving election (S34308: No), the display back image change command for indicating the back face type corresponding to the set time saving type is set (S34309), and the process ends.
By configuring in this way, the back image of the ceiling mode executed when the ceiling privilege is given and the third time saving state is set is the second set after the jackpot game based on the jackpot type "jackpot C13". It is also possible to display the second time saving state, which is set in part (0.1%) when the time saving state and the time saving lottery are won, are set. As a result, even when the above-described second time-saving state, which is set without satisfying the condition for granting the ceiling privilege, is set to the player, the player is made to think that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be given at various timings.

Next, referring to FIG. 313, the contents of the variable display setting process (S34113) will be described. FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S34113). This variable display setting process (S34113) is different from the above-described variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66) in order to set the effect mode of the variable effect. ), and special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907 in FIG. 66), the difference is that the effect mode setting process (S4991 in FIG. 313) is configured to be executed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
In addition, in the tenth control example, since the process of setting the effect mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the process of setting the effect mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol are the same process, any special Also when setting the effect mode of the symbol variation effect, the effect mode setting process (see S4991 in FIG. 313) is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the contents of the rendering mode setting process (S4991) will be described. FIG. 314 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the rendering mode setting processing (S4991). This effect mode setting process (S4991) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation, and the result of the special symbol lottery for which the effect mode is set, , a process for setting various effects is executed according to the game state that has been set. In addition, the display mode for showing the number of executions of the special symbol lottery on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) that a specific game state (for example, the third time reduction state) can continue is displayed, a process for updating the value indicated by the display mode is executed.
When the production mode setting process (S4991) is executed, first, the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is greater than 0, that is, the second time saving state or the third time saving state. S34401), when it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), the normal mode effect setting process is executed (S34402), and then a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S34407). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), the value of the counter 223da during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S34403), then the ceiling time saving counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404). The value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la is not greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that it is a right-handed game state (second time saving state) in which the ceiling mode is not set (S34404: No), time saving after subtraction A display command for indicating the value of the middle counter 223da is set (S34405), an effect mode corresponding to the values of various counters is determined (S34406), the process proceeds to the above-described S34407, and this process ends.
In the process of S34404, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404: Yes), the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is subtracted by 1 (S34408), and the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la after subtraction (S34409), and determines whether the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la after subtraction is 1 (S34410).
In the process of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la is not 1, that is, it is not the final change in the ceiling mode (S34410: No), the above-described S34406 and S34407 processes are executed, and this process exit. On the other hand, in the process of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la is 1 (that is, the final change in the ceiling mode) (S34410: Yes), then the post-loading flag 223lb is turned on It is determined whether it is set (S34411), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S34411: Yes), the post-loading flag 223lb is set to OFF (S34412), corresponding to the value of the counter 223da during time saving The value is added to the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la (S34413), the production mode of the additional production (additional production) that increases the number of remaining time reduction display is determined (S34414), the processing of S34407 described above is executed, and this processing exit.
Also, in the process of S34411, if it is determined that the post-loading flag 223lb is not set to ON (S34411: No), the third time saving state in which the ceiling mode is set, the second time saving state ends Special Since the variation effect corresponds to the pattern variation, the effect mode indicating that the mid-ceiling mode (ceiling mode) ends is determined (S34415), the process of S34407 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the contents of the normal mode effect setting process (S34402) will be described. FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal mode effect setting process (S34402). In this normal mode effect setting process (S34402), when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the process of determining the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling for indicating that the mid-ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is set. , it is possible to suggest to the player the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted as a variable effect executed in response to the special symbol change executed in the state where the left-handed game state is set. A process for determining the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is executed.
When the normal mode effect setting process (S34402) is executed, first, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500, that is, the special symbol lottery executed this time satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege. (S34501). In the processing of S34501, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34501: Yes), with reference to the effect selection table 222lb when reaching the ceiling, the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling is determined. (S34502), set the value corresponding to the determined effect mode to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la (S34503), determine the setting status of the post-loading flag 223lb corresponding to the determined effect mode (S34504), this End the process.
In addition, in the processing of S34501, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is not 500, that is, if it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are not satisfied (S34501: No), then this special symbol variation However, it is determined whether it is a special symbol variation that wins the big hit C13 (S34505), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol variation that wins the big hit C13 (S34505: Yes), after the stop display of the special symbol variation Since the second time saving state that becomes the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is set, the above-described S34502 to S34504 processing is executed, and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S34505, if it is determined that there is no special symbol variation to win the jackpot C13 (S34505: No), then the special symbol variation of this time is the time-saving winning variation in which the second time-saving state is set. It is determined whether there is (S34506), and if it is determined that the second time saving state is set to be a time saving election variation (S34506: Yes), a pseudo ceiling mode (ceiling mode) after the stop display of the special symbol variation Since the second time saving state is set, the processing of S34502 to S34504 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In the process of S34506, if it is determined that the second time saving state is not the time saving winning variation, that is, after the special symbol variation of this time is stopped and displayed, the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is set. When it is determined that there is no special symbol variation (S34506: No), next, it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is a special variation (15 seconds variation) (S34507), special variation (15 seconds variation) If it is determined to be (S34507: Yes), the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la is referred to determine the effect mode of the suggestive effect (S34508), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined in the process of S34507 that there is no special variation (15-second variation) (S34507: No), an effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern is determined (S34509), and this process ends.
<Regarding the first modification of the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 316 to 322, a first modification of the tenth control example described above will be described. In the tenth control example described above, when the game state is the normal state or the first time saving state, the time saving lottery is configured to be executable, and the time saving lottery wins, and the first time saving state is set. , the first time-saving state of one time of time-saving is set. Then, while the normal state or the first time saving state is set, the special pattern lottery is executed 500 times without winning the jackpot, thereby establishing the condition for giving the ceiling privilege, and the third time saving state as the ceiling privilege. was configured to be set.
In addition, according to the gaming state set when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied, the contents of the privilege to be granted as the ceiling privilege are configured to be different, and the ceiling privilege is set in the state where the normal state is set. When the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied, the third time-saving state of 100 times of working hours is set, and when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established in the state where the first time-saving state is set, 300 times of working hours. It was configured to set the third time saving state.
In other words, in the tenth control example described above, in addition to the conventional game characteristics of aiming to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, when the period in which the jackpot is not won continues for a long time, it is awarded based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. A player can be made to execute a game aiming at a ceiling privilege.

Furthermore, based on the results of the time saving lottery, by frequently switching between the normal state and the first time saving state, the contents of the benefits given as ceiling benefits (time saving times) are advantageous benefits for the player ( It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether it will be a time saving 300 times) or a disadvantageous benefit (time saving 100 times) that is more disadvantageous than an advantageous benefit.
On the other hand, in the first modification, the probability of winning a short-time lottery in a short-time lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), and the short-time lottery is configured to be executable only in the normal state. The first time-saving state is set so that the number of times of time-saving is greater than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege.
That is, in the first modification, when the time saving is won in the normal state and the first time saving state is set, the first time saving state continues until the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied unless the jackpot is won. It is configured as follows. By constructing in this way, since the advantageous privilege is given as the ceiling privilege as an added value by winning the time-saving lottery, the player can be motivated to execute the game aiming at the ceiling privilege. .
Furthermore, in the first modified example, during the period in which the left-handed game state is being executed, the game state currently set is normal state or for making the player predict whether it is the first time-saving state The game state suggesting effect is configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing a left-handed game state for a long time to predict the currently set game state without winning a jackpot. It is possible to select whether or not to continue the game in consideration of the remaining period until the provision condition of is established and the current game state. In addition, even if the remaining period until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the game state suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode indicating that the first time saving state is likely to be set. Since it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game aiming at an advantageous privilege, the effect for suggesting the currently set game state is not executed during the period when the left-handed game state is being executed. Compared to the case, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily improved.
<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the first modified example of the tenth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 316, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the tenth control example, the content of the characteristic effects will be described. Pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the tenth control example, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, based on the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the left-handed gaming state first time-saving state is set, the time-saving lottery is not executed, and the number of times of time-saving is set to 1000 times, which is higher than the number of times (500 times) in which the ceiling privilege is given as the first time-saving state. there is
Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the left-handed gaming state, at that time, the advantageous privilege (300 times of time-saving 3rd time-saving state) is set as the ceiling privilege. It is determined that
Therefore, in the first modified example, during the left-handed game state, a game state suggestion effect for making the player predict whether or not the first time-saving state is set is configured to be executable. Figure 316 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the game state suggestion effect, Figure 316 (b) is in the left-handed game state, there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state is set It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the suggestion effect for suggesting that to the player.

As shown in FIG. 316(a), when the game state suggesting effect is executed, a roulette wheel 861 having a plurality of areas formed in the center of the main display area Dm is rotated and displayed and stopped at a position corresponding to the indicator 863. A game state suggesting effect is executed in which the area that has been touched is a result of the effect. In the roulette 861, a first region 862a displaying a display mode of "preparation" indicating that the first time saving state is set, and "chance" suggesting the possibility that the first time saving state is set , a third area 862c displaying a "V" indicating that a jackpot has been won, and a "?" indicating no information is displayed. The four regions of the fourth region 862d are formed with different occupied ranges.
In the main display area Dm, characters of "state suggesting chance" for indicating that the game state suggesting effect is being executed are displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, the contents of the game state suggesting effect are displayed. As an explanation form for explaining to the player, the comment "Where will it stop?"
Here, in the first modified example, the execution frequency of the game state suggestive effect and the effect mode are changed based on the length of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted and the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed. As the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given becomes shorter, or the special symbol lottery of the specific number (for example, multiples of 50), the actually set game state is changed. The game state suggesting effect is executed in an easily comprehensible effect mode.
With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to grasp the set game state to play the game until the special symbol lottery for the next specific number of times is executed. The operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily improved. Further, as shown in FIG. 316(a), in the small display area Dm7 formed in the main display area Dm, the number of times of the special symbol lottery that has been executed since the previous big win game is completed is displayed. The figure shown in FIG. 316(a) shows the period during the special symbol fluctuation period for showing the result of the 250th special symbol lottery.

Then, when the first area 862a is stop-displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 in the game state suggesting effect, the ceiling preparation mode is set as shown in FIG. 316(b). This ceiling preparation mode is a production mode for indicating that the first time saving state is set, and in the small display area Dm7, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game is not displayed. , the remaining period (the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) until the ceiling privilege is given is displayed, and a character 809 that appears during the ceiling mode (ceiling medium mode) is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as an explanation mode for explaining the effects of the ceiling preparation mode, the characters "If you get hooked 90 more times, get 300 times shorter" are displayed. By constructing in this way, the game state suggesting effect not only suggests the currently set game state to the player, but also informs the player of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to motivate the player aiming at giving the ceiling privilege to play the game.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modification of the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 to 319, the electrical configuration of this first modification will be described. In the first modification of the tenth control example, the winning probability of the time saving lottery is changed to a low probability with respect to the tenth control example described above. , the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 is changed by adding a data table for determining the effect mode of the game state suggestion effect, and a flag for indicating the state in which the ceiling preparation mode is set. is added, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 is different. Other elements are the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.
First, with reference to Fig.317 (a), the content of random-number table 202lae per time saving is demonstrated. FIG. 317(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the random number table 202lae per time saving. This time-saving random number table 202lae is different from the above-described time-saving random number table 202le (see FIG. 296(c)) in that the number of determination values for winning in the time-saving lottery is different.
Specifically, when the special symbol type is "common" and the game state is normal, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "998, 999". is defined as In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

By constructing in this way, the game state in which the time saving lottery can be won is only the normal state, and furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to win the time saving lottery. Therefore, even if an advantageous privilege (third time-saving state of 300 times of time-saving) can be given to the player as an added value by winning the time-saving lottery, the player is excessively given an advantageous privilege. You can prevent it from being done.
Next, with reference to FIG.317(b), the content of table 202laf1 for time saving election is demonstrated. FIG.317(b) is the figure which showed the content prescribed|regulated to table 202laf1 for time saving election. As shown in FIG. 317(b), the time saving table 202laf1 is set for each time saving type with respect to the time saving table 202lf1 of the tenth control example described above (Set to the time saving counter 203h values) are different, and the others are the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
Specifically, when the first time saving state is set as the time saving type, the difference is that "1000 times" is set as the number of time saving times. By configuring in this way, when the first time saving state is set by winning the time saving, the first time saving state can be continuously set until the number of times of addiction is exceeded.
Next, referring to FIG. 318(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example will be described. The ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example is the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example described above (see FIG. 299(a) ) in that a game state suggestive effect selection table 222laa is provided in place of the ceiling reach suggestive effect selection table 222la, and the rest is the same.

The game state suggesting effect selection table 222laa is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the game state suggesting effect, and in the normal mode (normal state, first time saving state, second probability variable state), special It is referred to when the variation pattern of variation (15 second variation) is selected (see S34532 in FIG. 322).
Here, with reference to FIG. 319, the contents defined in the game state suggestion effect selection table 222laa will be described. FIG. 319 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the game state suggestion effect selection table 222laa. As shown in FIG. 319, the game state suggestive effect selection table 222laa includes the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc, the set game state, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variation, and the acquired effect Different suggestion modes (drawing modes) are defined corresponding to the values of the counter 223f.
In the effect mode of the game state suggestive effect determined by referring to the game state suggestive effect selection table 222laa, that is, in the game state suggestive effect described with reference to FIG. Areas 862a to 862d to be stopped and displayed corresponding to the indicator 863 are determined.
Specifically, the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 1 to 200", and the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the special symbol lottery of the variation If the result is a "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is applied to the range of "80 to 99" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79". ” is stipulated, and if the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is “other than the jackpot”, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 89”, and the effect mode “?” An effect mode "chance" is defined for the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 1 to 200", and the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is set to the range of "80 to 99" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 79", and the effect mode "chance" is defined, and if the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than a big hit", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the production mode "?" 50 to 99”, the effect mode “chance” is defined.
Next, the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc is "50, 100, 150, 200", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the change is "jackpot ', the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is set to the entire range of '0 to 99', and the effect mode 'V' is defined, and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is 'other than the big win'. If the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of 0 to 39, the effect mode ?? .
In addition, the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is "50, 100, 150, 200", the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is " In the case of "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is defined for the entire range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 99", and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than the big win". In the case of , the effect mode "?" is defined for the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f "0 to 19", and the effect mode "chance" is defined for the range "20 to 99". there is
The value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 201 to 490", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the change is "jackpot". In the case of , the effect mode "V" is defined for the range of the obtained effect counter 223f of "0 to 89", and the effect mode "chance" is defined for the range of "90 to 99". If the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than the jackpot", the effect mode "?" A production mode "chance" is defined for the range of .

In addition, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 201 to 490", and the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is set to the range of "90 to 99" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 89", and the effect mode "chance" is stipulated, and if the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than a big hit", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19", and the production mode "?" 20 to 99”, the effect mode “chance” is defined.
Next, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is In the case of "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is defined for the entire range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f "0 to 99", and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than the big win". ”, the effect mode “?” is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range “0 to 49”, and the effect mode “chance” is specified for the range “50 to 99”. ing.
In addition, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is a "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is defined for the entire range of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f "0 to 99", and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "jackpot If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of 0 to 49, the effect mode ``chance'' is specified, and the effect mode ``preparation'' is specified in the range of ``50 to 99''. It is
Then, when the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc is "491 to 500", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", The production mode "V" is defined for the range of the value of the obtained production counter 223f of "0 to 69", and the production mode "chance" is defined for the range of "70 to 99". If the result of the special symbol lottery is "other than big hit", the effect mode "chance" is defined for the entire range of "0 to 99" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f.

In addition, when the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "491 to 500", the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the change is "jackpot" , the effect mode "V" is defined for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 79", and the effect mode "chance" is defined for the range "80 to 99", When the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than big win", the production mode "preparation" is defined for the range of "0 to 98" for the value of the acquired production counter 223f, and "99". A production mode "chance" is defined for the value of .
Here, when the effect mode "V" is determined, the area 862c where V is displayed finally stops at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 as the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 316(a). When the displayed effect is executed and the effect mode "chance" is determined, the chance is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the index 863 as the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 316(a). 316(a) is executed, and when the effect mode "?" is determined, the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. When the effect of stop-displaying the area 862d displaying "?" is executed and the effect mode "preparation" is determined, the index At a position corresponding to 863, an effect is executed in which an area 862a displaying preparation is stopped and displayed.
As described above, in the game state suggesting effect, the larger the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc, that is, the smaller the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, the less the currently set game state corresponds. It is configured to facilitate the setting of suggested modes. By configuring in this way, the prediction accuracy of the currently set game state can be gradually increased for the player who has been playing the left-handed game state for a long time, so that the player can continue playing the game. You can make it easier.
In addition, when the execution condition of the game state suggestive effect is satisfied at the timing when the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is a specific value (multiple of 50), than when the game state suggestive effect is executed at other timing Also, it is constructed so as to facilitate the execution of an effect that makes it easy to grasp the currently set game state. By configuring in this way, the player who is trying to grasp the currently set game state continues to execute the special symbol lottery until the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc reaches a specific value. It is possible to make it easier to play a game.

Next, referring to FIG. 318(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example will be described. The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example is the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example (see FIG. 299(b) ) in that a notified flag 223laa is added. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The notified flag 223laa is a flag for indicating that the notification indicating that the first time saving state is set has been executed in the game state suggestive effect, and the ceiling preparation mode as the effect result of the game state suggestive effect. (See FIG. 316(b)) is set to ON (see S34534 in FIG. 322). Then, the setting status of the notified flag 223laa is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the game state suggestion effect (see S34531 in FIG. 322), and when the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34531 in FIG. 322: Yes), it is configured so that the new game state suggestion effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of the game state suggesting effect in a state in which it is already notified that the first time saving state has been set.
<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the first modification of the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the contents of the control process executed by main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. This first modified example is different from the above-described tenth control example in that the conditions for executing the time saving lottery are different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.
Here, with reference to Drawing 320, the contents of time saving lottery processing (S38006a) are explained. FIG. 320 is a flow chart showing the process contents of the time saving lottery process (S38006a) in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 320, the time saving lottery process (S38006a) is different from the time saving lottery process (S38006) of the tenth control example described above, and only when the gaming state is the normal state, the execution condition of the time saving lottery is established. The point (S38151a: Yes) and the data table referred to during the time saving lottery are different in that the time saving random number table 222iae is used (S38152a), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 321 and 322, the contents of control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example will be described. In the first modified example, in place of the tenth control example described above, the time saving state effect setting process (see S9091a in FIG. 312) is executed instead of the time saving state effect setting process (see S9091a in FIG. 321). The difference is that the normal mode effect setting process (see S34402a in FIG. 322) is executed instead of the normal mode effect setting process (see S34402 in FIG. 315). Since the rest is the same, the description thereof is omitted.
First, with reference to Drawing 321, the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S9091a) are explained. Figure 321 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S9091a). As shown in FIG. 321, when the time saving state effect setting process (S9091a) is executed, the same S34301 to S34304 processes as the time saving state effect setting process (see S9091 in FIG. 312) are executed.
Then, in the process of S34305, if it is determined to be the third time saving state (S34305: Yes), in the process of S34307, if it is determined to be the second time saving state after the jackpot C13 (S34307: Yes), the second after the time saving election When it is determined that the time saving state is determined (S34308: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34331), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S34331: Yes), notified The flag 223laa is set to OFF (S34332), the processing of S34306 which is the same as the above-described time saving state effect setting processing (see S9091 in FIG. 312) is executed, and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S34331, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is not set to ON (S34331: No), the process of S34332 is skipped, and the above-described time saving state effect setting process (see S9091 in FIG. 312 ) is executed in step S34306, and the process ends. By configuring in this way, the notified flag 223laa can be reliably set to OFF.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting processing (S34402a) will be described. FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing the details of the normal mode effect setting process (S34402a). In this normal mode effect setting process (S34402a), a special change (15-second change) is executed in the normal mode in contrast to the normal mode effect setting process (see S34402 in FIG. 315) in the tenth control example described above. The difference is that the content of the processing for setting the effect mode is different in each case, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the normal mode effect setting process (S34402a) is executed, first, the processes of S34501 to S34507, which are the same as the normal mode effect setting process (see S34402 in FIG. 315) in the tenth control example described above, are executed. If it is determined that there is a 15-second variation (special variation) (S34507: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34531).
In the processing of S34531, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is not set to ON (S34531: No), the ceiling preparation mode for informing the player that the first time saving state is set is set. Since the game state suggestive effect selection table 222laa is referred to, the effect mode of the suggestive effect (game state suggestive effect) is determined (S34532), and then the effect mode determined this time is the ceiling preparation mode. It is determined whether there is (S34533), and if it is determined that the ceiling preparation mode is set (S34533: Yes), the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34534).
Then, the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is read (S34535), and the remaining number of times until the read value reaches 500, that is, the remaining number of times of addiction until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied is calculated (S34536). ), set a display command for indicating the calculated remaining number of times (S34537), and terminate this process. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S34537, the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is displayed in the small display area Dm7 on the display screen shown in FIG. 316(b). be done.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the remaining number calculated by the processing of S34536 is set in a dedicated counter (remaining number counter), and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. and a display command for indicating the value after subtraction is output to the display control device 114 . As a result, when the ceiling preparation mode is set, the value indicating the remaining number of times to the ceiling is gradually reduced each time the special symbol lottery is executed. is approaching.
Also, in the processing of S34531, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34531: Yes), since the ceiling preparation mode is already set, the game state suggesting effect is executed. , skipping the processing for and shifts to the processing of S34535.
In addition, in the processing of S34533, if it is determined that an effect mode other than the ceiling preparation mode is determined (S34533: No), the process of S34534 is skipped because the new game state suggesting effect can be executed. , S34535.
As described above, in the first modification of the tenth control example, the probability of winning the time saving lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), and the time saving lottery can be executed only in the normal state, In the case of short-time winning, the first short-time state is set so that the number of times of short-time is greater than the number of executions of the special pattern lottery (the number of times of addiction), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege, and the short-time is won in the normal state. When the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state is continued until the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established unless a jackpot is won.

By constructing in this way, since an advantageous privilege is given in the ceiling privilege as an added value by winning the time saving lottery, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the game aiming at the ceiling privilege. .
In addition, in the first modification of the tenth control example, the time saving lottery is configured not to be executed during the first time saving state, but the time saving lottery is configured to be executable even during the first time saving state. , When winning the time-saving state during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is newly set with the number of time-saving times greater than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction) that is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. However, it may be configured such that the contents of the privilege (the number of times of time saving) given as the ceiling privilege are varied according to the number of times the time saving is won until the conditions for giving the ceiling privilege are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of times of saving time given as a ceiling privilege increases as the number of times of saving time winning increases. By comprising in this way, the added value by having won the time saving lottery can be raised more. Moreover, you may comprise so that the number of times of time reduction provided as a ceiling privilege may become small.
Furthermore, in the first modification of the tenth control example, as in the tenth control example described above, even when the normal state and the first time saving state are switched, the number of times of addiction is continuously updated (added) However, without being limited to this, when the game state switches from the normal state to the first time saving state, or when the game state switches from the first time saving state to the normal state, the number of times of addiction It may be configured to reset.
Even if it is configured in this way, in the first modification of the tenth control example, when the time-saving election is made in the normal state, the special symbol lottery number of times (500 times of addiction) to which the ceiling privilege is given. Since the first time-saving state of the number of time-savings with a large value is set, the ceiling privilege can be reliably given.

In addition, in the first modification of the tenth control example, when the time saving is won in the normal state, the number of times of saving time having a value larger than the number of special symbol lotteries (500 times of addiction) to which the ceiling privilege is given Although it is configured to set the 1 hour reduction state, it is not limited to this, and the number of special pattern lotteries (500 times of addiction) to which the ceiling privilege is given in some cases when the reduction of working hours is won in the normal state. It may be configured to be able to set a first time saving state having a smaller time saving number of times (for example, 100 times, 150 times, etc.).
By configuring in this way, at the time when the first time-saving state is set by the timing of time-saving election in the normal state (the number of times of addiction when time-saving winning) and the time-saving state type set based on time-saving winning, It can be determined whether or not it is confirmed that the ceiling privilege is given during the first time saving state. And, in this case, as an effect executed in the normal state, the first time-saving state set when the time-saving election is set based on the selection ratio of each time-saving state type in which the first time-saving state is set when the time-saving election reaches the ceiling Suggestion production that can suggest the degree of expectation that can continue until the time, and suggestion production that can suggest the degree of expectation that the first time reduction state set this time can continue until the ceiling is reached at the time of winning the time reduction. Good to configure. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game while predicting whether or not the result of the time saving lottery will be advantageous to the player for the time saving lottery executed in the normal state.
In addition, in the first modification, during the period in which the left-handed game state is being executed, the game state currently set is the normal state or the first time-saving state for the player to predict. The game state suggesting effect is configured to be executable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing a left-handed game state for a long time to predict the currently set game state without winning a jackpot. It is possible to select whether or not to continue the game in consideration of the remaining period until the provision condition of is established and the current game state. In addition, even if the remaining period until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the game state suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode indicating that the first time saving state is likely to be set. Since it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game aiming at an advantageous privilege, the effect for suggesting the currently set game state is not executed during the period when the left-handed game state is being executed. Compared to the case, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily improved.

<Regarding the Effect Modification Example in the 1st Modification Example of the Tenth Control Example>
Next, a modification of the effect executed in the first modification of the tenth control example described with reference to FIG. 316(a) will be described. In the first modification of the tenth control example described above, in the left-handed game state, the game state suggestion for suggesting to the player whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state The production was configured to be executable.
As the game state suggestion effect, the effect of displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 316(a) is configured to be executable. As described above, in the game state suggesting effect executed in the first modification of the tenth control example, the currently set game state as the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of times of addiction), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege, approaches. By configuring the game state suggesting effect to be executed in a manner that the player can easily grasp, it was intended to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game. In a state where the special symbol lottery number of times (the number of times of addiction) is far, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is set as the effect result of the game state suggesting effect (at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 There is a problem that the production result of stopping the area 862d with "?" is likely to be executed, and the production effect is lowered.
In addition, as the effect result of the game state suggesting effect, the effect result that makes it difficult for the player to grasp which game state is set (the area 862 d with “?” attached to the position corresponding to the indicator 863 stops Even if the game state suggesting effect (result of effect) is continuously executed a plurality of times, the same effect is only repeatedly executed, and there is a problem that the effect to be executed becomes monotonous.
On the other hand, in this modified example of effect, part of the effect mode of the game state suggesting effect (mode of roulette 861) is different from the first modified example of the tenth control example described above. Specifically, in the present modified example of effect, an "indicator" is provided for the region 862d marked with "?" in the first modified example of the tenth control example described above. This indicator has 10 scales, and is configured so that the display mode is variable so that the value increases in units of one scale from one end side of the region 862d (the side adjacent to the region 862c). ing.

Then, when "?" is selected as the effect result of the game state suggesting effect, when the area 862d with the "indicator" attached to the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is located (when displayed), the area When the "indicator" attached to 862d rises by one scale, and the display mode after the variable "indicator" rises to the maximum value provided on the other end side of the region 862d (the side adjacent to the region 862d) In addition, the effect is the same as when the area 862a marked with "preparation" is positioned (displayed) at the position corresponding to the indicator 863. FIG.
In other words, as a result of a specific effect (playing state suggesting effect) executed during a specific period (period until the ceiling privilege is granted), a specific effect result (a effect result in which "?" is displayed). A storage means for storing the number of times (occurred) is provided, and based on the information stored in the storage means (the number of times of performance resulting in a specific performance result), the performance mode of the specific performance (playing state suggestive performance) is variable. configured as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same rendering mode from being repeatedly executed and the rendering effect from deteriorating.
Further, when the number of times stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined number of times, the display area for showing the specific effect result is changed to another effect result ("preparation"), the more continuously the game state suggestive effect that results in a specific effect is executed, the more frequently the game state suggestive effect that results in a different effect is executed. can be increased, and the player can expect that the game state suggesting effect will be repeatedly executed.
In this modified example of effect, when the "indicator" rises to the maximum value, the effect result of the game state suggesting effect indicated by the area 862d to which the "indicator" is attached is changed. For example, among the areas 862d to which the "indicator" is attached, the range of areas whose values have already increased may be configured to be displayed as areas for indicating other effect results. . In this case, every time the value indicated by the 'indicator' increases, the area indicating the result of other effects gradually expands, so that the player expects that the game state suggesting effects are repeatedly executed. can be done.

In addition, in the first modified example of the tenth control example and the present modified example of the effect, one type of display mode (Fig. 316 (a) ), but not limited to this, based on the number of times of addiction at the time when the game state suggestion production is first executed (the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is granted), the game state suggestion The display mode of the roulette 961 that is displayed first during the production may be changed. By configuring in this way, before the effect result of the game state suggesting effect is displayed, based on the display mode of the displayed roulette 961, the player can determine the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given. can be predicted.
<Regarding Another Technical Concept Regarding the Tenth Control Example>
In the above-described tenth control example and the first modification of the tenth control example, as a different ceiling privilege according to the game state set at the time the ceiling privilege is given, a third time saving with a different number of times of time saving Although the state is configured to be settable, another privilege may be provided as the contents of the ceiling privilege to be provided to the player. For example, the ceiling privilege is set at the time when it is provided. The type of the special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the time saving state may be changed according to the game state. For example, when the ceiling privilege is given in the normal state, the second special symbol lottery A time-saving state is set in which the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than, and when the ceiling privilege is given in the first time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery is better than the first special symbol lottery. You may comprise so that the time saving state which becomes easy to be performed may be set.
By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol lotteries to be executed during the period when the ceiling privilege is granted may be varied according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. Therefore, the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the period when the ceiling privilege is given can be made different.
Further, as another ceiling privilege, the length of the period during which the electric accessory 1640 is opened may be varied according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. In this case, for example, the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery during the time saving state is set differently according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is given, or the normal pattern fluctuation during the time saving state The time is set to be different according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is given, or the length of the period in which the electric accessory 1640 is in the open state in the normal game during the time saving state. It is preferable to set the height differently according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is awarded. By configuring in this way, the number of prize balls to be paid out during the ceiling privilege can be varied depending on the contents of the ceiling privilege. Furthermore, in this case, in some of the benefits given as ceiling benefits, a time-saving state in which the number of prize balls paid out during the ceiling benefits is greater than the number of game balls fired during the ceiling benefits It may be configured to be configurable.

In addition, in the case that a time-saving state in which the number of game balls paid out during the ceiling privilege is larger than the number of game balls fired during the ceiling privilege, the game balls can be given as a ceiling privilege. can be determined according to the number of times of hooking until the ceiling privilege is granted. Since it is used, it is preferable to configure so that about 30% of the game balls used before the ceiling privilege is given can be increased as possession balls during the ceiling privilege. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game aiming at the ceiling privilege. In addition, since the ceiling privilege is provided, the degree of advantage increases as the number of times of addiction increases even in the same game state. It can be said that this is another form of the first effect and the second effect of the 45 control example. That is, it is a different form of a first effect executed in a specific game state and a second effect capable of suggesting a higher degree of advantage than the first effect.
Furthermore, in the above-described tenth control example and the first modification of the tenth control example, as a ceiling privilege that differs according to the game state set at the time the ceiling privilege is awarded, the main controller 110 Although it is configured to be able to grant a privilege that changes the control processing content (a privilege to set a different time saving number of times), the privilege that can be granted in the control processing range of the audio lamp control device 113 is used as a ceiling privilege. It may be provided, for example, as a variable effect executed to show the result of a special symbol lottery, a premium with a low appearance frequency that is easier to execute when a ceiling privilege is granted than when it is not granted The pachinko machine 10 having a setting function capable of setting different jackpot probabilities in a plurality of stages can suggest set values to the player. Such a setting suggesting effect may be made easier to execute when the ceiling privilege is given than when it is not given. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game on the pachinko machine 10 provided with the ceiling privilege.
Further, in the tenth control example described above, since the normal state and the first time saving state are configured to frequently switch until the ceiling privilege is given, the first of the tenth control example described above As in the modified example, during the period until the ceiling privilege is granted, it is configured not to execute an effect (game state suggesting effect) that can suggest (inform) the player of the set game state. However, without being limited to this, an effect (game state suggesting effect) capable of suggesting (notifying) the set game state to the player may be executed. In this case, when it is determined that the same game state is continuously set for a predetermined period of time, it is preferable to be able to notify that effect. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to easily specify a player who is playing an illegal game so as not to end the first time saving state in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given as a ceiling privilege. In addition, the number of pending icons displayed in the small display area Dm9 in the second time saving state in the tenth control example allows the player to recognize whether there is room for storing pending balls in the fifty-ninth control example described later. It is another form of directing mode.
<Regarding the eleventh control example>
Next, the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 323 to 332. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above is configured so as to be able to give a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (number of times of special symbol lottery) satisfies a predetermined condition. . By constructing in this way, a privilege can be given to a player who has been playing a game for executing the special symbol lottery for a long time regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player's willingness to play is reduced. It was something that could be suppressed.

However, when the number of consecutive executions of the special symbol lottery where the lottery result is other than the big win (loss) (the number of times of addiction) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), the ceiling privilege is given. Therefore, there is a problem that the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given to the player is easily predicted, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered during the period when the ceiling privilege is difficult to be given.
On the other hand, in the eleventh control example, after the first condition (500 times of addiction) for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the second A ceiling privilege can be given when the conditions are satisfied (when the prize is lost). As a result, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given is given irregularity, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the eleventh control example, after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the period until the second condition is satisfied is a predetermined period (200 special figure fluctuations). When it exceeds, a privilege (second ceiling privilege) that is more advantageous to the player can be given.
By constructing in this way, even if the period until the second condition is satisfied after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the player's desire to play the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

<Regarding the production content in the eleventh control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is set to the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, after the first condition (500 hooking times) for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the second condition A ceiling activation period is set as the period until the (time reduction out) is established, and during the ceiling activation period, the winning in the time reduction lottery will be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (ceiling activation mode ) is configured to be executable.
FIG. 323(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the ceiling activation period is set, and FIG. 323(b) shows the ceiling activation mode executed during the ceiling activation period. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen.
As shown in FIG. 323(a), when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 500 times and the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied (500th special When the pattern variation is stopped and displayed), the main display area Dm "Ceiling activation mode rush! Stop probability of time saving pattern significantly UP" is displayed, and from the next special pattern variation (501st special pattern variation) to the ceiling It is notified that the activation mode is set. In addition, in a small display area Dm4 formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, a message "Keep left-handed" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding that the game method in the ceiling activation mode is left-handed. characters are displayed.
Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, a game (for example, from a left-handed game to a right-handed game) that switches the game method to be executed by the player in accordance with the timing of switching the production mode (contents of the production to be executed). A game to switch) is known. In this case, a technique is used in which the game method is switched in an easy-to-understand manner for the player by executing a guidance notification for guiding the player to switch the game method.

In the current situation where the pachinko machine 10 has become mainstream, in order to guide the player that the game method will be switched when the performance mode (contents of the performance to be executed) is switched without switching the game method. Even when the guidance information is not executed, there is a problem that the player switches the game method and executes a game disadvantageous to the player.
On the other hand, in the tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 323(a), a guidance mode for guiding the player that the same game method is to be continued can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game disadvantageous to the player.
In the sub-display area Ds, there is a comment "When all the time-saving patterns are complete, rush into the time-saving!" A comment "When the start exceeds 700 times... a big chance!?" is displayed.
When the ceiling activation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 323(b), when three cards are stopped in a specific combination on the activated line LZ, the corresponding benefits (jackpot, time reduction) are given. A variable effect indicating that is executed. In this control example, at least the losing cards (LL3, CL3, RL3) corresponding to the "losing" and the V card ( LL1, CL1, RL1) and time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "ceiling privilege" are formed, and each card row is variably displayed from top to bottom. A performance is performed.

Then, when three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each pattern row are stopped and displayed on the activated line LZ, it is possible to inform that a time-saving state is given as a ceiling privilege, and each pattern. When three V cards (LL1, CL1, RL1) displayed in a row are stopped and displayed on the activated line LZ, it is possible to notify that a privilege based on winning a big win is granted.
Here, as described above, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege in the ceiling activation mode is that the time-saving lottery does not win the time-saving lottery (loss is won), so the result of the special symbol lottery is completely off (jackpot, time-saving) None of them are won), an effect is executed in which three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each symbol row are stopped and displayed on the activated line LZ.
Also, FIG. 324(a) is a display screen during the super ceiling activation mode showing that the length of the ceiling activation period has exceeded a predetermined period (200 special figure fluctuations) and that the second ceiling privilege can be given. FIG. 324(b) is a view showing an example, and FIG. 324(b) is a view showing an example of the display screen in the case of losing in the time-saving lottery in the ceiling activation mode and winning.
As shown in FIG. 324 (a), when the special symbol lottery for a predetermined period is executed after the ceiling activation mode is set, when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied, the game is more likely to be played than the normal ceiling privilege. A super-heaven activation mode is displayed to indicate that the second ceiling privilege advantageous to the player is being granted. Then, in the sub display area Ds, as a ceiling privilege, a comment "Time saving powers up to super time saving" is displayed to indicate that the third time saving state with many times of working time saving is set, and a time saving card ( LL2, CL2, and RL2) are displayed in a display mode to which the character "super" is added.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege has been established.
Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the ceiling activation mode is completely lost (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 324(b)), each symbol row is shown in FIG. 324(b). Three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in are stopped and displayed on the effective line LZ, and a character 809 displayed when the ceiling privilege is granted is a production that congratulates the ceiling privilege. is executed.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 to 327. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, in the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, in place of the time saving random number table 202le, the time saving random number table 202me is selected for the time saving type. It replaces with table 202lf and differs in the point of providing time saving classification selection table 202mf, and other than that is the same.
Also, as shown in FIG. 325(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is different in that the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is newly added, and the rest is the same. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 327, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is different in that a ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is newly added. Other configurations are the same, and descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

Random number table 202me per time reduction, as shown in Figure 326 (a), in that the probability of winning time reduction in the time reduction lottery is different, random number table per time reduction 202le (see Figure 296 (c)) is different. there is Concretely, among the range of "0 to 999" that the value of the first per random number counter C1 can take, the determination value of time saving winning is set to the range of "100 to 999". That is, in the 11th control example, when the time saving lottery is executed, it is configured to win the time saving lottery with a high probability (probability of 900/1000).
In addition, the time saving type selection table 202mf is different from the above-described time saving type selection table 202lf (see FIG. 298(a)) in that a ceiling table 202mf2 is provided instead of the ceiling table 202lf2. . Here, the contents of the ceiling table 202mf2 will be described with reference to FIG. 326(b). FIG. 326(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ceiling table 202mf2.
As shown in Figure 326 (b), the table 202mf2 for the ceiling, depending on the number of times of hooking at the time when the ceiling privilege (3rd time saving state) is set, the value set to the time saving counter 203h is different. , Up to 700 times of addiction, as a ceiling privilege (first ceiling privilege), the second time saving state (300 times of time saving), if the number of times of addiction exceeds 700, ceiling privilege (second ceiling privilege) As, the second time saving state (time saving number of times 1000 times) is defined to be set.
In this way, the longer the period until the ceiling privilege (third time reduction state) is set, the more advantageous privilege is given to the player, thereby making it possible for the player who has not won the jackpot for a long time. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease in motivation to play.

The third ceiling standby flag 203ma is a flag for indicating that the number of times of addiction exceeds 700 times, and is set to ON when the number of times of addiction exceeds 700 times. Then, when setting the ceiling privilege, the setting status of the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is determined, and if it is determined that it is set to ON, the ceiling privilege (second ceiling privilege ) is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the ceiling privilege is awarded or when a jackpot is won.
The ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is a flag for indicating that the ceiling activation mode is on, and is set to ON when the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied. . Then, depending on the setting state of the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma, the effect mode in the normal mode is set (see S34571 in FIG. 332).
<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 328 and 329, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described. In the eleventh control example, in contrast to the tenth control example described above, a process for determining whether the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, and the third time reduction set based on the fact that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied It differs from the processing for setting the state. Specifically, instead of the ceiling determination process (see S38051 in FIG. 304), the ceiling determination process (see S38071 in FIG. 328) is replaced with the time saving setting process (see S30254 in FIG. 307), and the time saving setting process (see FIG. 329 (see S30274)).
In the eleventh control example, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are different from those in the tenth control example described above. It is configured so that the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) is set when both are established. By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the ceiling privilege is given based on the number of executions (the number of times of addiction) of the special symbol lottery that has been lost and won has reached a predetermined number (500 times), the ceiling It is possible to set the timing at which the privilege is granted at random.

Furthermore, as the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege, the normal first condition (500 times hooked) and the special first condition (700 times hooked) set after the normal first condition can be set. When the special first condition is satisfied without granting the ceiling privilege based on the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal first condition is satisfied, only the normal first condition is satisfied. It is possible to give the second ceiling privilege (3rd time saving state (1000 times saving time)) that is more advantageous to the player than when the ceiling benefit (3rd time saving state (300 times saving time)) is given in the established state. It consists of
By constructing in this way, it is possible for a player who continues for a long time to play a game that does not win in the time-saving lottery that is normally executed in a state where the first condition is satisfied, that is, a game that does not give the ceiling privilege. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game without lowering the player's desire to play.
Note that, in the eleventh control example, the ceiling privilege is granted when the special first condition is satisfied rather than when the ceiling privilege is granted when only the normal first condition is satisfied. However, it is not limited to this, and when the ceiling privilege is granted in a state where only the first condition is normally satisfied. In this case, a ceiling privilege (second ceiling privilege) more advantageous to the player may be awarded than when the ceiling privilege is awarded while the first special condition is satisfied. By constructing in this way, the player is motivated to play the game while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be granted during the period from the establishment of the normal first condition to the establishment of the special first condition. be able to.
Also, the period during which only the normal first condition is satisfied and the period during which the special first condition is satisfied may be alternately set. Only the first condition is normally satisfied during the period, and the special first condition is satisfied during the period from "6 to 0". By configuring in this way, after exceeding 500 times of addiction at which the first condition is normally satisfied, the player can determine at what timing the second condition is satisfied (whether the time saving lottery will result in a time saving loss). can be of interest to

Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, it is configured to execute the determination of time-saving winning based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for updating the number of times of addiction. In other words, by executing the special symbol lottery, the element (the number of hooks) related to the first condition is updated, and whether or not the second condition is established (time-saving lottery result) is determined. By configuring in this way, since the game for establishing the second condition cannot be executed without updating the element (the number of times of addiction) related to the first condition, a ceiling privilege advantageous to the player is given. It is possible to suppress repeated execution of only the determination of the second condition in a situation where the special first condition is satisfied. In addition, in a situation where a ceiling privilege that is disadvantageous to the player is given (usually, only the first condition is satisfied), only the determination of the second condition is repeatedly executed, and the ceiling privilege that is disadvantageous to the player is not provided. It can be suppressed that it is granted with a high probability.
First, the contents of the ceiling determination process (S38071) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling determination process (S38071). In the ceiling determination process (S38071), it is determined whether or not the special first condition (700 hits) is satisfied in the above-described ceiling determination process (see S38051 in FIG. 304). The difference is that the processing contents are different when the conditions are satisfied. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description is omitted.
When the ceiling determination process (S38071) is executed, the same processes of S38101 to S38109 as the ceiling determination process (see S38051 in FIG. 304) are executed. Then, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is not 500 (it is not the special symbol lottery of the 500th addiction) (S38104: No), then the special figure lottery number counter It is determined whether the value of 223lc is 700 (whether it is a special symbol lottery for the 700th addiction) (S38171).
In the process of S38171, if it is determined that the number is not 700 (S38171: No), the process proceeds to S38105 and ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 700, it means that the special first condition is met (S38171: Yes), so the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON (S38172), and the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is turned on. It sets to OFF (S38173), shifts to the processing of S38108, and terminates this processing.

The second ceiling standby flag 203lc or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is stopped and displayed in a state where the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON, as a time saving state, to the type of ceiling standby flag set to ON The corresponding time saving type (time saving number of times) is set. That is, in the eleventh control example, by setting different types of ceiling standby flags to ON according to the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc, different types of time saving states are set as time saving states. is doing. By configuring in this way, different time-saving states can be set according to the number of times of addiction, so that a game can be provided in which the player does not get tired of the game early.
In addition, in the eleventh control example, when the special symbol lottery loses and wins for a predetermined number of times consecutively (when the lottery result unfavorable to the player continues), the ceiling privilege can be given (the ceiling standby flag is turned on) ), but not limited to this, for example, after the end of the jackpot game, in a predetermined period after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is started, the ceiling standby flag (special ceiling standby flag ) can be set to ON.
By configuring in this way, in a state where the special period (special ceiling standby flag) is set as the game period of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to set a period during which the ceiling privilege is likely to be given, so that another period is set. It is possible to make it easier to provide a game that is more advantageous to the player than in the case where it is set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 329, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S30274) will be described. FIG. 329 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S30274). In this time saving setting process (S30274), in contrast to the above-described time saving setting process (see S30254 in FIG. 307), when the time saving is won in the target special symbol lottery, the ceiling privilege is not given. The difference is that a process when the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON is added, and the content of the privilege given when the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON is changed. , are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the time saving setting process (S30274) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is time saving winning (S8351), and if it is determined that it is time saving winning (S8351: Yes), the time saving setting described above The same processing of S8352 to S8354 as the processing (see S30254 in FIG. 307) is executed, and this processing ends.
That is, in the time-saving setting process (see S30254 in FIG. 307) of the tenth control example described above, priority is given to the ceiling privilege grant that is likely to be granted to the player rather than the result of the time-saving lottery. On the other hand, in the eleventh control example, when the result of the time saving lottery is the time saving lottery, the process based on the time saving lottery is executed in preference to the ceiling privilege grant.
By configuring in this way, even in a state where ceiling benefits can be granted (state where various ceiling standby flags are set to ON), as long as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery continues to be short-time winning, It is possible to prevent (difficult to give) the ceiling privilege. Therefore, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted can be randomized even after the state in which the ceiling privilege can be granted (the state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) is set. The player can continue to play for a long time while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be given.
In addition, in this eleventh control example, if the special pattern lottery wins the time saving, it is configured so that the ceiling privilege is not given, but it is not limited to this, for example, it is set when the time saving win When a specific time saving type is set as the time saving type to be set, the process for giving the ceiling privilege is preferentially executed rather than the process of setting the time saving state based on the time saving election. good. By configuring in this way, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege can be made more complicated, so the state in which the ceiling privilege can be granted (state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) It is possible to make the timing from when is set to when the ceiling privilege is given more random.

Furthermore, it may be configured to be able to perform processing that combines the time saving winning result and ceiling privilege grant, for example, when a specific time saving type is set as a time saving type set when time saving winning It may be configured such that a ceiling privilege that is more advantageous than the ceiling privilege that is set at the time of non-winning is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a combination of the result of the time-saving lottery and the provision of the ceiling privilege.
Returning to FIG. 329, the description continues. In the process of S8351, if it is determined that the short-time winning has not been won (S8351: No), it is determined whether the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351), and it is determined that it is set to ON. If (S38351: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38374), the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to OFF (S38353), and the third time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information about the time saving lottery this time (S38355), set the state command including the information indicating the third time saving state and the information indicating the number of time saving times (S38356), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this processing ends.
If it is determined in the process of S38351 that the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is not set to ON (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON. (S38358), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S38358: Yes), set the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 300 (S38359), set the second ceiling standby flag 203lc to OFF (S38360), Set the third time saving state in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information about this time saving lottery (S38355), and issue a state command including information indicating the third time saving state and information indicating the number of time saving times Set (S38356), clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38357), and terminate this process.
If it is determined in the process of S38358 that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is not set to ON (S38358: No), then it is determined whether the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON. (S38371), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S38371: Yes), set the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 10000 (S38372), set the third ceiling standby flag 203ma to OFF (S38373), Set the third time saving state in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information about this time saving lottery (S38355), and issue a state command including information indicating the third time saving state and information indicating the number of time saving times Set (S38356), clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38357), and terminate this process. Also, in the process of S38371, if it is determined that the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is not set to ON (S38371: No), that is, based on the special symbol lottery executed this time, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied, the processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 330 to 332, control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described. In the control process executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example, the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (500 times hooked) is Processing related to the period effect (ceiling activation mode) for notifying the player of the period from the establishment to the actual grant of the ceiling privilege (until the second condition to be established in the short-time non-winning is satisfied), and the ceiling It is different from the processing related to the suggestive effect for suggesting the result of the time-saving lottery to the player during the activation mode.
Specifically, instead of the state command receiving process (see S34251 in FIG. 311), the state command receiving process (see S34271 in FIG. 330) is replaced with the normal mode effect setting process (see S34402 in FIG. 315), The difference is that the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 in FIG. 332) is executed. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 330, the processing contents of the state command reception processing (see S34271 in FIG. 330) will be described. FIG. 330 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the status command reception process (see S34271 in FIG. 330). In this state command receiving process (see S34271 in FIG. 330), it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time saving state with respect to the state command receiving process (see S34251 in FIG. 311) executed in the tenth control example described above. As a process to be executed when the time saving state production setting process (S9091 in FIG. 312) instead of executing the time saving state production setting process (see S39091 in FIG. 331) and the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege A period production (ceiling activation mode ), the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON. Other than that, they are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
When the state command reception process (see S34271 in FIG. 330) is executed, the same processes of S9001 to S9094 as the state command reception process (see S34251 in FIG. 311) executed in the tenth control example are executed. be. And, when it is determined that it has been changed to the time saving state in the processing of S9005 (S9005: Yes), the time saving state effect setting processing is executed (S39091), and the process proceeds to S9093. The contents of this time saving state effect setting process (S39091) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S9093, if it is determined that there is no information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S9093: No), or in the process of S9093, it is determined that there is information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la Then (S9093: Yes), when the value corresponding to the received value is set to the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc (S9094), that is, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la measured by the main controller 110 , When the process for synchronizing the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is completed, next, the received state command is information indicating the second ceiling standby, the third ceiling standby (second ceiling standby flag 203lc, or information indicating that the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON) (S9095). 223ma is set to ON (S9096), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9095, the received state command is information indicating the second ceiling standby or the third ceiling standby (the second ceiling standby flag 203lc or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON). If it is determined that it does not have the information indicating that (S9095: No), the process of S9096 is skipped and the process ends.
When the state command reception process (see S34271 in FIG. 330) is executed in this way, the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is established based on the information included in the state command output from main controller 110. If the first condition is satisfied, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON.
Then, when the flag 223ma during the ceiling activation mode is set to ON, a state in which the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is currently established to the player by executing a dedicated effect. (the number of times of addiction is 500 times or more) can be notified. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (a state in which the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted than when the first condition is not satisfied), so that the ceiling privilege is granted. It is possible to aim and play a game willingly.
Next, with reference to Drawing 331, control processing of time saving state production setting processing (S39091) performed by state command receiving processing (refer to S34271 of Drawing 330) is explained. Figure 331 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S39091). In this time saving state effect setting process (S39091), the ceiling privilege (3rd time saving state) is given to the time saving state effect setting process (see S9091 in FIG. 312) executed in the tenth control example described above. (set), the difference is that processing is added to set the flag 223ma in the ceiling activation mode to OFF to indicate that the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. ing. Other than that, they are the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 331, when the time saving state effect setting process (S39091) is executed, S34301 to S34309 which are the same as the time saving state effect setting process (see S9091 in FIG. 312) executed in the tenth control example described above process. Then, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the third time-saving state is set (ceiling privilege is granted) (S34305: Yes), it determines whether the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34371), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S34371: Yes), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34372), and the process proceeds to S34306. If it is determined in the process of S34371 that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to ON (S34371: No), the process of S34372 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S34306.
With this configuration, even though the ceiling privilege is given, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma continues to be set to ON, and the effect indicating that the ceiling activation mode is in progress (Fig. 323 (b )) is executed and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.
In addition, in this eleventh control example, as in the tenth control example described above, it is configured to be able to grant a right-handed game state (third time-saving state) for a predetermined period as a ceiling privilege, and granted to the player A privilege (a second time-saving state in which a right-handed game state is set) whose degree of advantage is the same as the ceiling privilege can be given based on the result of the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the right-handed game state before the first condition (the number of times of addiction) for granting the ceiling privilege is established. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the beating game state (ceiling privilege) is provided.
Here, in the eleventh control example, when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, there is a high possibility that the ceiling privilege will be granted by setting the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma to ON. Although the period production (ceiling activation mode production) is configured to be executable, when the right-handed game state is set by another opportunity (jackpot C13 winning or time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set) Since the effect is not executed during the ceiling activation mode, there is a problem that when the right-handed game state is set depending on whether the ceiling activation mode effect is executed or not, the player predicts the trigger. there were.

In order to solve this problem, for example, when the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set. should be configured to turn on. By configuring in this way, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the right-handed game state has been set due to the grant of the ceiling privilege, but the ceiling Even if the first condition for awarding the privilege is satisfied, since it is possible not to execute the ceiling activation mode effect, the right-handed game state is more than the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example described above. When set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the trigger.
In addition, the information (lottery information) included in the reserved and stored special symbol lottery lottery right (special symbol lottery) can be pre-determined (previously) before the special symbol lottery is executed (pre-reading possible), and if the information for indicating the special symbol lottery result in which the right-handed game state is set is included as the preliminary determination result, the special symbol lottery in which the right-handed game state is set The effect period including at least a part of the period until the special symbol lottery including the information indicating the result is executed may be used to execute the ceiling activation mode effect.
By configuring in this way, even if the right-handed gaming state is set by a different opportunity (jackpot C13 winning, or time-saving winning when the second time-saving state is set) from the granting of the ceiling privilege, the ceiling Since it is possible to execute the activation mode effect, it is possible to make it harder for the player to predict the trigger when the right-handed game state is set than in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example described above.
Also, in this case, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the right-handed game state is set by an opportunity (jackpot C13 winning or time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set) different from the granting of the ceiling privilege. It is preferable to change the ratio based on the number of special symbol lotteries (number of times of addiction) after the end of the previous jackpot game. , When the last two digits are "00", that is, when the number of times of addiction is a good number of times, it is preferable to make it easier to execute the ceiling activation mode effect than in other cases.

By configuring in this way, when the right-handed game state (second game state) is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the number of times of hooking is good, and the ceiling is executed. A right-handed game state can be easily set through the same performance process as when a privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first condition for providing the ceiling privilege is satisfied or whether the ceiling activation mode effect is executed as a result of the preliminary determination.
Next, with reference to FIG. 332, the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 in FIG. 332) will be described. FIG. 332 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 in FIG. 332). In this normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 in FIG. 332), the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (500 times addictive) for the above-described normal mode effect setting process (see S34402 in FIG. 315) is established (the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON), the process for setting the effect is executed. The rest is the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
When the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 of FIG. 332) is executed, the same processes of S34501 to S34506 as the normal mode effect setting process of the tenth control example (see S34402 of FIG. 315) are executed. , In the process of S34506, if it is determined that the second time saving (second time saving state) is not a time saving winning variation that is set (S34506: No), then the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571).
In the process of S34571, if it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S34572), and it is determined that it is not a jackpot. If so (S34572: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is short-time winning (S34573). If it is determined that the time saving is not elected, that is, if the normal state is set while the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34578: No), the ceiling after stopping the special symbol fluctuation Since the benefit (third time-saving state) is set, the effect mode for stopping and displaying the third pattern (decorative pattern) corresponding to the time-saving is determined as the ceiling activation mode effect (S34578), and the flag during the ceiling activation mode. 223ma is set to OFF (S34579), and this processing ends.

When the variable production based on the production mode determined in the processing of S34578 is executed, as shown in FIG. , RL2) are stopped and displayed. Thus, in the eleventh control example, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure (complete failure) in which neither the jackpot winning nor the short-time winning is performed, if a specific effect state is set. , the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given.
By configuring in this way, in the variable performance for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, the decorative patterns are not stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, but the result of the executed special pattern lottery is displayed. Since the decorative symbols indicating the content of the privilege given based on the above can be stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a variable performance that is easy for the player to understand.
In addition, in the eleventh control example, it is advantageous for the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is neither a jackpot win nor a short time win (complete loss), which is advantageous to the player (the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is turned on). set state) and a disadvantageous state (state in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to ON), and according to the set state, the result of the special symbol lottery Although it is configured to vary the stop display mode of the decorative pattern to indicate that it is completely off, it is not limited to this, and regardless of the set state, the result of the special symbol lottery is completely off. The same display mode may be set as the stop display mode of the decorative symbols for indicating that the .
In this case, without using the stop display mode of the decorative patterns, a notification effect for indicating that a privilege (ceiling privilege) advantageous to the player is given based on the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is completely lost is provided. Just run it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of determining the stop display mode of the decorative design by making it different based on the result of the special design lottery and the set state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 324(b), it is possible to notify the player of the contents of the privilege to be given later based on the result of the special symbol lottery, not the result of the special symbol lottery, by the stop display mode of the decorative symbols. When configured, the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern (fourth pattern) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the stop display mode ("342" in FIG. 324(b)) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. good. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 324(b), in the eleventh control example, the stop display mode of the decorative design is displayed on the display surface of the third design display device 81 more than the stop display mode of the second decorative design. is also configured to be displayed large. By constructing in this manner, the decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern can be displayed because the player can more easily grasp the stationary display mode of the decorative pattern than the stopped display mode of the second decorative pattern. Even in this case, it is possible to execute a variable performance that is easy for the player to understand.
Returning to FIG. 332, the description is continued. In the process of S34573, if it is determined that the time reduction is elected (S34573: Yes), it is determined whether the first time reduction state is set based on the time reduction election (S34574), and the first time reduction state is set If it is determined (S34574: Yes), the effect mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to "out" is determined (S34575). (S34576), and if it is determined to be 700 (S34576: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the high ceiling activation mode is determined (S34577), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is won in the process of S34572 (S34572: Yes), or when it is determined that a time saving state other than the first time saving state (second time saving state) is set in the process of S34574 (S34574: No ), that is, when the ceiling activation mode effect ends without giving the ceiling privilege, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34580), the processing of S34509 is executed, and this processing is terminated. . In this case, for example, when the jackpot is won, the effect mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative pattern) corresponding to "V" is determined, and the stop display mode for indicating that the jackpot is won is determined. When the 3 patterns (decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed, the ceiling activation mode effect ends, and when the second time saving state is set based on the time saving election, the third pattern (decorative pattern) corresponding to "time saving" ) is decided, and the ceiling activation mode effect is finished after executing the variable effect as if the ceiling privilege was granted.

By constructing in this way, even if the end condition for ending the ceiling activation mode performance is satisfied before the ceiling privilege is given during the ceiling activation mode performance, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to end the ceiling activation mode production without any problems.
As described above, in the eleventh control example, after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is established, a short time lottery that wins a short time with a high probability (900/1000) , and when the second condition is established (when the winning is lost), the ceiling privilege can be given. As a result, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted is given irregularity, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the eleventh control example, after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the period until the second condition is satisfied is a predetermined period (200 special figure fluctuations). When it exceeds, a privilege (second ceiling privilege) that is more advantageous to the player can be given.
By constructing in this way, even if the period until the second condition is satisfied after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the player's desire to play the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, the condition for giving the second ceiling privilege (the number of times of addiction is 700 times) is defined in advance, but the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (the number of times of addiction is 700 times) is not limited to this. 500 times) is established, it may be configured to determine the number of hits, which is the condition for giving the second ceiling privilege, based on the result of the special lottery executed, and the result of the special lottery is the second If it is the 1st result, the number of times of addiction is 700 times, if it is the second result that is different from the first result, the number of times of addiction is 501 times, and if it is the third result that is different from the first result and the second result. may be configured to determine the number of addictions of 800 times.
In this way, instead of prescribing the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege, it is possible to determine it during the period in which the number of hits is updated, and the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege to be determined is established. By structuring so that a grant condition that is easy to obtain (low number of addictions) and a grant condition that is difficult to establish (large number of addictions) can be set, the game in which the second ceiling privilege is easily awarded and the second ceiling privilege are combined. A game that is difficult to be given can be executed, and the interest in the game of the player can be improved.
Also, in the eleventh control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. Inside, the time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "ceiling privilege" are displayed, indicating that the first condition (700 times of addiction) for giving the second ceiling privilege is satisfied. During the super-ceiling activation mode, super time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the ``second ceiling privilege'' are displayed to notify the player of the current game situation in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition to this, in the ceiling activation mode, it is possible to display a suggestive mode that can suggest the remaining period until the first condition (700 times of addiction) for giving the second ceiling privilege is satisfied. You can
For example, the period from when the ceiling activation mode is set until the super ceiling activation mode is set (after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the second ceiling privilege The first condition for granting (the period until the number of times of addiction of 700) is satisfied) is set to correspond to the length of the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is satisfied. It is divided into periods (first period to third period), and in the first period with the longest remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is satisfied, shown in FIG. 323 (b) In a second period in which the remaining period until the first condition for executing the production and giving the second ceiling privilege is established is shorter than the first period, the production in which the super time-saving card RL2 is added to the right line RL. , and in the third period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is satisfied is shorter than the second period, the right line RL and the middle line CL are super time-saving card RL2 , CL2 may be added to perform an effect.

By configuring in this way, various patterns (cards) that are variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode can be stopped in a predetermined combination (3 sets) during the super ceiling activation mode (super time saving card) can be gradually increased, the player can be made to think that the super-ceiling activation mode will be activated soon. In this case, if each pattern row that is variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode has multiple time-saving cards, switch some of the time-saving cards that are already variably displayed to super time-saving cards. can be configured to By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to carry out the variable display of a super time-saving card, without increasing the number of cards which each pattern row|line|column has.
Also, in this case, it is preferable to set a combination in which three time-saving cards or three super time-saving cards are stopped and displayed as a combination of stop symbols indicating that the ceiling privilege is given during the ceiling activation mode. By configuring in this way, without changing the variable display control of various cards during the ceiling activation mode, simply by executing the process of switching the display mode of the time-saving card to the display mode of the super time-saving card, the game can be played. It can make the person think that the super ceiling activation mode will be activated soon.
<Regarding the first modification of the eleventh control example>
Next, a first modification of the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 333 to 342. FIG. In the eleventh control example described above, after the first condition (500 times of addiction) for granting the ceiling privilege is established, the second condition is established in a time-saving lottery that wins a short-time lottery with a high probability (900/1000). In the case where the ceiling privilege is given when the winning prize is lost (when the lottery is not won), the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given is given irregularity, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. there were.
However, it takes a long time to satisfy the second condition after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 hooking times) is established, and the ceiling privilege cannot be granted to the player. Problems could arise.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, when winning the time saving lottery in the normal state, the first time saving state with a different number of time saving times can be set, and the ceiling privilege is given. After the 1st condition (500 times of Hamari frequency|count) is materialized, the 2nd condition is materialized by complete|finishing the 1st time saving state currently set, and it comprises so that a ceiling privilege may be provided.
In other words, the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition can be diversified by the number of times of time saving set as the first time saving state and the timing at which the first time saving state is set. , the upper limit can be set for the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition.
By constructing in this manner, irregularity is given to the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given, and while the player's interest in the game is improved, the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is achieved. By setting an upper limit to the period of , it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
Further, in the first modified example, the timing at which the second condition is satisfied can be determined in advance before the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied. Specifically, at the time when the remaining period (number of remaining fluctuations) until the timing when the first condition is satisfied (until the number of times of addiction reaches 500 times) is 50 times, the number of times of remaining time reduction in the first time reduction state is 100 times In this case, it is possible to determine in advance that the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is 50 special symbol variations.

Therefore, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect for indicating the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given before the first condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the stage before the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established, the state in which the first time saving state can be newly set, that is, the time saving set as the first time saving state in the normal state It is also possible to inform the player whether the number of times is the number of time reductions in which the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is long or the number of time reductions in which the period is comparatively short.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily play the game while predicting the timing at which the ceiling privilege can be granted from the time when none of the plurality of conditions for awarding the ceiling privilege is satisfied. can.
<Regarding the production content in the first modified example of the eleventh control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 333, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the eleventh control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the eleventh control example is the first time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery executed in the left-handed gaming state with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eleventh control example is set, the time saving lottery is not executed, and a different number of times of time saving can be set as the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state.
In other words, after the first condition (500 times of Hamari) that can grant the ceiling privilege is established, the second condition for granting the ceiling privilege is the first time saving state that has been set is completed. It is constituted so that it may be materialized and a ceiling privilege may be given.

By configuring in this way, the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state that is set when the first condition is satisfied is preset as the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, so the above-described second Like the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th control example, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the second condition is not satisfied for a long time even though the first condition is satisfied.
In addition, as in the eleventh control example described above, it is possible to execute a period effect (ceiling activation mode effect) for indicating that the first condition (500 times of addiction) has been met for which the ceiling privilege can be given. In the ceiling activation mode production, the production based on the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given can be executed.
Here, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, the length of the period during which the ceiling activation mode effect is executed is the remaining time of the first time saving state (remaining time saving number of times), so the length is set in advance can be discriminated. And it is configured to be able to execute an effect according to the length of the period set as the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect. By configuring in this manner, the player can be made to predict the period until the ceiling privilege is given, so that the player can easily make a selection as to whether or not to continue the game. .
Further, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, when the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is within a predetermined period (for example, special symbol lottery four times), the As a notification mode for notifying the player that one condition has been established, a special performance mode different from the normal can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the timing at which the second condition is satisfied is the timing that is advantageous to the player (timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied).

In addition, even in the first modification of the eleventh control example, after the first condition is established, the second condition is not established, and if the right-handed gaming state is set (based on jackpot winning or short-time winning When the second time saving state is set by the second condition), the effect mode set when the second condition is satisfied can be set for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the trigger for setting the right-handed game state.
In the first modified example of the eleventh control example, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 333 is executed. FIG. 333(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed in the ceiling activation mode effect for indicating that the first condition is met, and FIG. 333(b) is a view showing that the first condition is met. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when it is confirmed that the second condition is satisfied at the time when the second condition is satisfied.
Therefore, in the first modified example, during the left-handed game state, a game state suggestion effect for making the player predict whether or not the first time-saving state is set is configured to be executable. Figure 333 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the game state suggestion effect, Figure 333 (b) is in the left-handed game state, there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state is set It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the suggestive effect for suggesting that to the player.
As shown in FIG. 333(a), when the first condition (500 times of hooking) for providing the ceiling privilege is established, the thrilling zone is set as the ceiling activation mode effect. During this heart-pounding zone, a door 871 appears in the main display area Dm, and every time a special symbol lottery is executed, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 opens the door 871 using a key.

In the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Use the key to open the door, and if the door opens, rush in quickly" is displayed as a mode for explaining the content of the effect in the heart-pounding zone. When the door is opened, it is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that a privilege will be granted.
In a small display area Dm9 formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, reservation icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the acquired lottery right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery can be displayed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 333(a), four pending icons hr1 to hr4 are displayed corresponding to the acquisition of four special figure 1 pending.
The pending icons hr1 to hr4 are configured to display the number corresponding to the acquired special figure 1 pending, and correspond to the first special figure 1 pending (first special figure 1 pending) The first reserved icon hr1 corresponds to the second special figure 1 reservation (second special figure 1 reservation), and the second reservation icon hr2 corresponds to the third special figure 1 reservation (third special figure 1 reservation). , and the fourth reservation icon hr4 is displayed corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 reservation (fourth special figure 1 reservation).
Then, when a new special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed during the pounding zone, an effect of opening the door 871 using the key displayed as the first reserved icon hr1 is executed. , the key displayed as the second reserved icon hr2 is shifted to the first reserved icon hr1, the key displayed as the third reserved icon hr3 is shifted to the second reserved icon hr2, and the key is shifted to the fourth reserved icon hr2. The key displayed as the icon hr4 is shifted to the third pending icon hr3, and the display screen is changed so that the fourth pending icon hr4 is not displayed. In this case, when the new special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the fourth reservation icon hr4 is displayed.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 333, only the fourth pending icon hr4 is displayed in a display manner different from that of the other pending icons (first pending icon hr1 to third pending icon hr3). The third pending icon hr3 is displayed in a display mode indicating a normal key, and the fourth pending icon hr4 is displayed in a display mode indicating a special key.
Although a detailed description will be given later, the display modes of the first pending icon hr1 to the fourth pending icon hr4 are usually set to indicate a normal key. It is configured to facilitate the setting of the display mode showing the special key for the special figure reservation corresponding to the pattern variation and the special figure reservation for winning the jackpot (time-saving winning). In the variation effect using the hold icon displayed in the display mode indicating the special key, the effect result of opening the door 871 is higher than the change effect using the hold icon displayed in the display mode indicating the normal key. It is configured to facilitate the execution of the variable production that becomes . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the display mode of the pending icon.
In addition, when the second condition is satisfied immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied and the pounding zone is set, the effect shown in FIG. The special effect shown in FIG.
In the special effect shown in FIG. 333(b), an automatic door 871 is displayed instead of the door 871 (see FIG. 333(a)) displayed in the normal effect in the heart-pounding zone. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide mode for guiding the player that the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state) will be given soon, the comment "Great luck! Just approach and the door will open" is displayed. be done.

During the special effect, the rabbit 801 approaches the automatic door 871 until the special symbol variation that satisfies the second condition is displayed. is opened, and an effect for informing that the ceiling privilege is given is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine the length of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, depending on the type of door displayed when the heart-pounding zone is set. can.
In addition, by configuring the special effect in which the automatic door 871 is displayed to be executable, for example, when the second condition is satisfied by executing the 501st special symbol variation, the normal effect (Fig. 333 ( a) Refer to) is executed, that is, the door 871 is opened with the first key before the player grasps the contents of the normal effect, and the effect of the effect is suppressed. be able to.
As described above, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, the remaining period until the second condition is met can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect (ceiling activation mode effect) according to the length of the remaining period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the ceiling activation mode effect.
In addition, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, when the number of hits reaches the specified number of times (500 times), the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, and the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect (the first condition is satisfied) (remaining period until the second condition is established after starting the second condition), and the performance period of the ceiling activation mode performance is within a predetermined period (for example, within 4 special symbol lotteries). In this case, by configuring the ceiling activation mode effect (see FIG. 333(b)) in which the special effect mode is set to be executable, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, which effect mode is set? It was something that could make the player interested.

However, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the number of hits reaches the specified number (500 times), so the number of hits is 501 to 504. There is a problem that the special effect mode can be set when the second condition is satisfied due to the variation, and the special effect mode is difficult to set.
In order to solve this problem, for example, the timing for executing the ceiling activation mode effect may be determined based on the timing at which the second condition is satisfied. Even if the condition (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the ceiling activation mode effect is not executed, and the remaining period until the second condition is satisfied is within a predetermined period (for example, within 4 special symbol lotteries). ), the ceiling activation mode effect may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set the special effect mode as the ceiling activation mode effect. Further, by making the period during which the first condition is satisfied differ from the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the content of the game to be executed later.
In addition, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, when the number of hits reaches the specified number of times (500 times), the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, and the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect (the first condition is satisfied) By setting a performance mode according to the remaining period until the second condition is satisfied after the second condition is established, it is possible to execute the performance for predicting the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given to the player. However, during a period before the first condition is satisfied, various effects may be executed that allow the player to predict the remaining period until the second condition is satisfied.
For example, when the time saving lottery executed in the normal state is won, the number of time saving times in the first time saving state set this time and the number of remaining addictions until the first condition is satisfied are set this time. It is determined whether the first time saving state ends after the first condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that it ends after the first condition is satisfied, the first time saving state after the first condition is satisfied An effect corresponding to the length of the period until is completed (time-saving winning effect) may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the ceiling privilege is likely to be awarded before the first condition is established (the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is short). It is possible for the player to predict whether or not.

Also, if it is determined that the first time saving state set this time ends before the first condition is satisfied, the remaining period from the end of the first time saving state set this time until the first condition is satisfied , and determines whether the length of the specified remaining period is longer than the smallest number of times of time saving among the number of times of time saving that can be set as the first time saving state, and the first time saving state set this time is When it is determined that the length of the remaining period from the end until the first condition is satisfied is shorter than the smallest number of times of time reduction among the number of times of time reduction that can be set as the first time reduction state, and when it is determined that it is long , and may be configured to be able to execute a different aspect of the production (production at the time of short-time winning).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the information on the timing at which the next set first time saving state ends and the timing at which the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is established. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game situation is such that the ceiling privilege is likely to be awarded (the period from the first condition to the second condition being satisfied is short).
For example, based on the number of times of addiction measured in the normal state and the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state that can be set when winning time saving, a period that is likely to be advantageous to the player when winning time saving It is preferable to construct an effect capable of informing the player of the period during which the player is likely to be disadvantaged.
Specifically, in the eleventh control example, as shown in FIG. 335, when the first time saving state is set, the number of times of time saving is configured to be able to set a range from "100" to "300". Most of them are set in units of about 100 (100 times, 200 times, 300 times). The first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is set to 500 hits. Therefore, the period when the number of times of addiction measured in the normal state is around 200 times, around 300 times, and around 400 times is the first time-saving state that ends immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. can be set (advantageous period). On the other hand, in the period when the number of times of addiction measured in the normal state is 450 times to 499 times, the period from the establishment of the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege to the end of the first time saving state is long. period (disadvantageous period).

Therefore, the number of times of addiction measured in the normal state is set as an advantageous period for 201 to 220 times, 301 to 320 times, and 401 to 420 times. To enable execution of a performance indicating that it is an advantageous period that is likely to be advantageous to a player. More specifically, when "advantage zone" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guidance mode to indicate that the current period is an advantage period, and the special symbol lottery is executed during the advantage zone. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 hits a golf ball. And if the result of the special pattern lottery is completely out (both jackpot, short time, and non-winning), "One more time" is displayed, and the effect of hitting the ball again with the effect corresponding to the next special pattern lottery is displayed. executed.
Then, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, or when a second time-saving state is set by time-saving winning, a hole-in-one effect is executed in which the golf ball hit by the rabbit 801 enters the cup, and is taken out of the cup. When the icon attached to the ball is 'V', the winning of the jackpot is reported, and when the icon is 'time saving', the setting of the second time saving state based on the time saving win is notified.
Also, if you win a time saving lottery in a special pattern lottery, the number of time saving times in the first time saving state set by this time saving win, and the number of remaining hooks until the first condition for granting ceiling benefits is satisfied. If the first time-saving state ends within 5 times of the special symbol variation that is executed after the first condition is established, that is, for the set advantageous zone When the optimum first time-saving state is set, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the golf ball hit near the cup is positioned, and the characters "Nice shot!! Near pin prize won" are displayed. The displayed near pin effect is executed. When this near-pin effect is executed, the trophy of the near-pin prize is continuously displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling privilege is given or until the jackpot game is executed. configured as follows. By constructing in this way, the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 is a game situation in which the ceiling privilege is awarded immediately after the first condition for awarding the ceiling privilege is met (within five special symbol variations). can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.
In addition, the calculated difference (the difference between the number of time reductions in the first time reduction state set by this time reduction election and the number of remaining hooks until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied) is the first If the first time saving state ends within 20 special symbol variations executed after the conditions are established, that is, if the appropriate first time saving state is set for the set advantageous zone, On the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a green-on effect is executed in which the golf ball is positioned on the green and the characters "Nice Shot!!" are displayed. When this green-on effect is executed, unlike the near-pin prize effect, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 continues to be specified until the ceiling privilege is given or until the jackpot game is executed. Configure so that aspects (such as trophies) are not displayed. By constructing in this way, only the player who has experienced the green-on effect is immediately after the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege as the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 is satisfied (within 20 special symbol variations). It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game situation is such that the ceiling privilege is awarded.

On the other hand, the calculated difference (the difference between the number of time reductions in the first time reduction state set by this time reduction election and the number of remaining hooks until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied) is the second If the first time saving state does not end within 20 special symbol variations executed after 1 condition is established, that is, if the appropriate first time saving state is not set for the set advantageous zone Among them, when the length of the period from the establishment of the first condition to the setting of the first time-saving state is longer than 20 special symbol variations, the golf ball hit by the character 801 becomes OB. An effect is executed, and then the advantageous zone ends. When this OB effect is executed, the effect indicates that the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 is a long period from the establishment of the first condition to the end of the first time saving state, so the OB effect is performed. A player who has confirmed that the game has been executed can easily determine future game policies including moving to another pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
By configuring so that the fact that the OB effect has been executed is not displayed as a history, it is possible to provide information (whether or not there is an OB effect) that only the player who is actually playing the game can know, so that the game can be executed. It is possible to provide a player who is playing a game with information that is more advantageous than a player who is not playing a game. It should be noted that the execution of the OB effect may be configured to be able to be displayed as a history, and the presence or absence of execution of the OB effect may be confirmed later.
In addition, when the first time saving state ends before the first condition is satisfied, the golf ball is positioned on the fairway, and the first hit effect displaying the characters "next approach confrontation" is executed, End the advantage zone.
In this case, a storage means capable of storing information indicating that the first striking effect has been executed is provided, and when the next advantageous zone is set, the storing means stores that the first striking effect has been executed. If so, the approach production is executed. Then, when the first time-saving state is set by a new time-saving win in the advantageous zone, each performance is determined by the same method as the above-described method of determining the performance, and the determined performance is executed.

As described above, by executing the above-described effect, the stage before the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established as a suggestive effect that can suggest the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted to the player. , different performances can be executed in the stage after the first condition is established, and the player can be made to continue playing the game easily without lowering his/her willingness to play.
In addition, depending on the various effects that are executed, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted is disadvantageous to the player (the period from the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege to the granting of the ceiling privilege is Since it is possible to suggest a longer timing), the player playing the pachinko machine 10 can determine at various timings whether or not to continue the game aiming at giving the ceiling privilege. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily played while the players having different criteria for determining whether or not to continue the game aiming at the provision of the ceiling privilege are replaced, so that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. can be made easier.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 337. FIG. In the first modification of the eleventh control example, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, The difference is that part of the configuration of Other configurations are the same, so description thereof is omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 334, the configuration of the ROM 202 of main controller 110 in the first modification of the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 334 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of main controller 110 in the first modified example of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 334, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, for the configuration of the ROM202 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example described above (see FIG. 325 (a)), the time saving type selection table 202mf is replaced with a time saving type selection table 202maf, and the rest is the same.

The time saving type selection table 202maf is compared to the time saving type selection table 202mf of the eleventh control example described above, and is referred to when determining the time saving type when the time saving type is won in the time saving lottery. The difference is that a table 202maf1 is provided. In this time-saving winning table 202maf1, five types of time-saving types are defined as the types of time-saving types for which the first time-saving state is set. It is configured as follows.
Here, with reference to Drawing 335, contents of table 202maf1 for time saving election which time saving classification selection table 202maf has are explained. Figure 335 is the figure which shows the contents which are specified in table 202maf1 for time saving election. As shown in FIG. 335, in the table 202maf1 for the time saving election, a total of six types of time saving types are defined, and five types of time saving types in which the first time saving state is set based on the time saving winning, One type of time saving type in which the two time saving state is set is defined.
In addition, since the selection ratio and the number of times of time saving to be set are the same as those of the eleventh control example described above, the detailed description of the time saving type for which the second time saving state is set is omitted. On the other hand, the types of time saving types for which the first time saving state is set are increased, and according to the time saving types to be set, a maximum of 300 times and a minimum of 100 times are set. there is
Specifically, in the range of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, the number of time saving times 100 (100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h ), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set is in the range of “100 to 199”, the number of time saving times 101 (101 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h), and the first time saving The time saving type for which the state is set is in the range of "200 to 299", the number of time saving times 102 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 102), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set , In the range of "300 to 599", the number of times of time saving is 200 (200 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set is the range of "600 to 899" , the number of times of time saving is 300 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 300), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set is in the range of "900 to 999". 300 is set to the value of the counter 203h), and the time saving type in which the second time saving state is set is defined respectively.

Here, as shown in FIG. 335, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, as the number of times of time saving set in the first time saving state, a plurality of time saving types are defined with only slightly different values of the last digit. ing. In the first modification of the eleventh control example, as described above, the remaining time in the first time saving state that is set when the first condition (500 times of hooking) that can give the ceiling privilege is satisfied. When the number of times reaches 0 and the normal state is set, the ceiling privilege can be given.
That is, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given differs according to the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state when the first condition is satisfied. In this case, when the value that can be set as the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state is specified to be different at predetermined intervals (for example, 50 times), the number of special symbol lotteries near the end of the specific number of times of time saving ends. At that time, the timing at which the time-saving state can be ended next time is after about 50 times of the special pattern lottery.
On the other hand, in the first modification, since it is configured to be able to set the time saving type in which the number of times of time saving is slightly different, it is easy to continue playing while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be given. can do. Furthermore, in the first modified example, as in the eleventh control example described above, when the time saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery, the first time saving state can be set, and in the time saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery Since the probability of short-time winning is set to 990/1000, there is a possibility of not winning short-time in the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game.
In other words, after the end of the jackpot game, the measurement of the number of hooks is newly started, while the timing when the remaining time reduction count of the first time reduction state becomes 0 is set at the timing when the first time reduction state is set. It is possible to vary depending on the type of time saving in the first time saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily change the value of the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state when the number of times of addiction satisfies the first condition (500 times). It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the condition is satisfied.

Moreover, it is configured to be able to set up to 300 times as the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state. This 300 time-saving number of times is set to a value greater than the number of special symbol lotteries required from the normal first condition (500 times of addiction) to the establishment of the special first condition (700 times of addiction). It is
By configuring in this way, the second ceiling privilege is set according to the timing when the first time saving condition is newly set before the first condition (500 times of addiction) is established, and the time saving type to be set. It is configured to be able to create a situation that is likely to be (a situation in which the first time saving state cannot (is difficult to end) ends after the normal first condition is established until the special first condition is established). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second ceiling privilege than in the eleventh control example described above.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example of the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example of the eleventh control example is provided with the heart-pounding zone effect selection table 222maa. The configuration is different from that of the ROM 222 of the lamp control device 113 . Since the rest is the same, the detailed description thereof is omitted.
The heart-pounding zone effect selection table 222maa is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode when the heart-pounding zone is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 337, the contents defined in the pounding zone effect selection table 222maa will be described. FIG. 337 shows the contents defined in the pounding zone effect selection table 222maa.
As shown in FIG. 337, the pounding zone effect selection table 222maa includes the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the pounding zone is set (the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state) and the acquired special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation ) and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f, different effect modes are defined.
Specifically, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "1", that is, when the second condition is satisfied in the next fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation in which the first condition is satisfied, and the ceiling privilege is given, prefetching Regardless of the result and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, "automatic door" is defined as the effect mode. Here, when the effect mode "automatic door" is determined, the special effect shown in FIG. 333(b) is executed.
Next, the value of the remaining counter 223maa is "2", and the prefetch result is "total out", that is, the prefetch result (preliminary As a determination result), if it is determined that information indicating jackpot winning or information indicating time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set is not included, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 49 ” for the range, ``Main 2 strong key'', ``Normal'' for the range ``50 to 89'', and ``Automatic door'' for the range ``90 to 99'', respectively. is defined as

Here, when the presentation mode of "Hold 2 strong key" is determined, the display mode of the special key different from the normal key for the second held icon hr2 (the display mode of the fourth held icon hr4 in FIG. 333(a)) corresponding to the display mode) is displayed.
On the other hand, the prefetch result is "hit", that is, as the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) for the special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) that has been acquired at the time the pounding zone is set, information indicating jackpot winning, or , If it is determined that the information indicating the time saving election in which the second time saving state is set is included, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", "automatic door" is , and the range of "50 to 99", "Hold 2 strong key" is defined as a mode of presentation, respectively.
Here, even if the look-ahead result is "hit", the "strong key" is determined for the pending icon corresponding to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. In this case, when the special symbol lottery for "winning" is executed before the second condition is satisfied, the door 871 is opened as an effect using the normal key indicated by the reserved icon corresponding to the special symbol lottery. An opening effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the effect of opening the door 871 even in the effect using the normal key.
In addition, when the special symbol lottery to "win" is executed after the second condition is satisfied (after the ceiling privilege is granted), the special symbol lottery to win after the end of the pounding zone is executed. Therefore, there is no sense of incongruity in the production in the heart-pounding zone.

In addition, the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "3", and the prefetch result is "total out", that is, the prefetch result (pre-determined As a result), if it is determined that the information indicating the jackpot winning or the information indicating the time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set is not included, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". For the range, "Main 3 strong key", for the range "50 to 89", "automatic door", for the range "90 to 99", "Normal", respectively, as a production mode stipulated.
On the other hand, the prefetch result is "hit", that is, as the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) for the special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) that has been acquired at the time the pounding zone is set, information indicating jackpot winning, or , If it is determined that the information indicating the time saving election in which the second time saving state is set is included, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", "automatic door" is , and “90 to 99”, “Normal” is defined as the presentation mode.
In addition, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "4" and the result of the look-ahead is "total out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". However, for the range of "50 to 99", "automatic door" is defined as the effect mode. On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "H4 strong key" is in the range of "50 to 89". For example, "automatic door" is defined as a range of "90 to 99", and "normal" is defined as an effect mode.
Furthermore, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "5 to 20" and the result of the look-ahead is "total out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", and the "chance" is , “90 to 99”, “random strong key” is defined as a mode of presentation, respectively. On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", that is, before the second condition is established (before the first time-saving state ends), the pounding zone is a special symbol lottery that wins. When the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", "normal" is set to "50 to 89". 90 to 99”, “automatic door” is specified as a mode of presentation.

Here, when "chance" is set as the production mode, the display mode of the door 871 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is more than the normal door (see FIG. 333(a)). A display mode showing a slightly extravagant door (chance door) is set. By configuring in this way, the player can visually discriminate that the door is easier to open than when the normal door 871 is displayed (situation in which the second condition is easily satisfied). can be made easier.
In addition, when "random strong key" is set as the production mode, "strong key" ” display mode is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect (failure effect) in which the door 871 is not opened by the effect using the special key.
If the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "21 to 100" and the look-ahead result is "total out", the "chance" is set to ""Normal" is defined as the mode of presentation for the range of "50 to 99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", that is, before the second condition is established (before the first time-saving state ends), the pounding zone is a special symbol lottery that wins. If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "this key", and in the range of "50 to 89", the "automatic door" is "Normal" is defined as the mode of presentation for the range of "90 to 99".
When the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "101-300" and the result of the prefetch is "total out", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0-89", "normal""Chance" is defined as a mode of presentation for the range of "90 to 99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", that is, before the second condition is established (before the first time-saving state ends), the pounding zone is a special symbol lottery that wins. If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", "automatic door" is set, and if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "50 to 89", "Normal" is defined as the mode of presentation for the range of "90 to 99".

Returning to FIG. 336(b), the description is continued. FIG. 336(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modified example of the eleventh control example. The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example of the eleventh control example differs from the above-described eleventh control example in that a remaining count counter 223maa and a heart-pounding flag 223mab are added. are identical. Descriptions of the same elements are omitted.
The remaining number of times counter 223maa is a counter for measuring the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state, and corresponds to the number of times of saving time set when a state command indicating that the first time saving state is set is received. value is set. The value is updated (subtracted) each time the special symbol lottery is executed during the first time saving state. The value of the remaining number counter 223maa is referred to when the first condition (500 hooking times) for giving the ceiling privilege is established, and based on the value of the remaining number counter 223maa, the ceiling privilege is given. The remaining period until the second condition (the end of the first time saving state) is satisfied is calculated. Then, the value is cleared to 0 when the first time saving state ends.
The heart-pounding flag 223mab is a flag for indicating a period in which the production mode of the pounding zone is determined and the production of the pounding zone is being executed, and is turned on when the production mode of the pounding zone is determined. set. While the heart-pounding flag 223mab is set to ON, a new processing for determining the effect mode of the heart-pounding zone is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. Then, it is set to OFF when the performance period of the heart-pounding zone ends.
<Control processing in the first modification of the eleventh control example>
Next, control processing in the first modification of the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 338 to 342. FIG. In the first modified example of the eleventh control example, as the control processing executed by the main controller 110 with respect to the eleventh control example described above, the process content for executing the time-saving lottery and the ceiling privilege are given. The processing content for setting the time saving state and the processing content for setting the time saving state are different. It is different in that the processing content for setting the variable production that is used is different.

Specifically, as the process executed by the main controller 110, instead of the time-saving lottery process (see S38006 in FIG. 305) executed in the eleventh control example described above, the time-saving lottery process (S38056a in FIG. 338 ) is replaced with the ceiling determination process (see S38071 in FIG. 328), the ceiling determination process (S38071a in FIG. 339) is replaced with the time saving setting process (see S30274 in FIG. 329), and the time saving setting process (S30274a in FIG. 340 ) is different. In addition, as the processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the time saving state production setting processing (see S39091 in FIG. 331) instead of the time saving state production setting processing (see S39091 in FIG. 331) executed in the eleventh control example described above ( S39091a) is different in that the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472a in FIG. 342) is executed instead of the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 in FIG. 332). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 338, the process content of a time saving lottery process (S38056a) is demonstrated. Figure 338 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S38056a). This time-saving lottery process (S38056a) differs from the time-saving lottery process (see S38006 in FIG. 305) executed in the eleventh control example described above in that the type of game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is different. , and that the data table to be referred to when judging the time-saving election is different, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 338, when the time saving lottery process (S38056a) is executed, first, information indicating the currently set game state stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S8102), and the currently set game state is read out (S8102). Determine whether the gaming state is normal state (S38151a), if it is determined that it is normal state (S38151a: Yes), the lottery result based on the time saving random number table 202me (determination result of time saving election) Acquired (S38152a), the same S8105 and S8106 processing as the time saving lottery processing (see S38006 in FIG. 305) executed in the eleventh control example described above are executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S38151a, when it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S38151a: No), this process is terminated without executing the time saving lottery.
That is, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, only the normal state is defined as the game state in which the time saving lottery can be executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, the time saving lottery is performed. configured to not run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an opportunity (time reduction lottery) that can grant a privilege (second time reduction state) that is advantageous to the player only in the normal state, which was the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game in the normal state from losing his/her desire to play.

Also, unlike the eleventh control example described above, since it is configured so that the time saving lottery is not executed in the state where the first time saving state is set, the first time saving lottery is based on the time saving lottery winning. When the time saving state is set, it is possible to reliably set the normal state by completing the time saving times corresponding to the set first time saving state. Therefore, since the maximum period in which the first time saving state continues can be set in advance at the time when the first time saving state is set, it is possible for the player to play the game during the first time saving state for an unnecessarily long time. can be suppressed from being executed. In addition, the length of the period until the first time-saving state ends for the player based on the length of the longest period in which the first time-saving state continues, which is set in advance at the time when the first time-saving state is set. It is possible to execute a production (pounding zone) that suggests.
Next, the contents of the ceiling determination process (S38071a) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling determination process (S38071a). This ceiling determination process (S38071a) is the first condition (500 times of addiction) for giving the ceiling privilege with respect to the ceiling determination process (see S38071 in FIG. 328) executed in the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that the conditions for updating the related information (the number of addictions) are different, but the other processing contents are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and the description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 339, when the ceiling determination process (S38071a) is executed, the ceiling determination process (see S38071 in FIG. 328) executed in the above-described eleventh control example is controlled by deleting the process of S38102. Processing is performed. Specifically, after executing the process of S38101, it is configured to proceed to the process of S38103 without executing the process of S38102.
That is, in the ceiling determination process (S38071a), regardless of the set game state, every time the special symbol lottery is executed, the number of times of addiction is added. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily fix the timing at which the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the number of times of addiction is 500) is satisfied, so that the second condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the second It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in the timing at which the one-hour-short state ends).

Next, with reference to FIG. 340, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S30274a) will be described. FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing the details of the time saving setting process (S30274a). This time saving setting process (S30274a) is a new time saving setting process (see S30274 in FIG. 329) performed in the above-described eleventh control example only when the normal state is set as the game state. The difference is that the state can be set. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted.
As shown in FIG. 340, when the time saving setting process (S30274a) is executed, it is determined whether the current state is normal (S38571), and if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S38571: No), the time saving state , skipping the various processes for setting , and ending this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S38571: Yes), the same processing of S8351 to S38357 as the time saving setting processing (see S30274 in FIG. 329) is executed, and this processing ends.
In this way, the processing for setting a new time saving state is configured to be executable only when a specific game state (normal state) is set, and whether a specific game state (normal state) is set By performing the determination of first, unnecessary processing can be made difficult to be performed.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 340, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, when the normal state is set, the setting of the time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery is changed to the time saving state based on the ceiling privilege However, without being limited to this, the setting of the time saving state based on the ceiling privilege can be executed with priority over the setting of the time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery. can be configured to In this case, similarly to the time saving setting process (see S30254 in FIG. 307) executed in the tenth control example described above, the process of determining the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (the setting status of various ceiling standby flags) is performed. To set the time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery when the conditions for executing first and giving the ceiling privilege are not satisfied (when none of the various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) It should be configured to execute processing.

By configuring in this way, in a state where the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of addiction) is satisfied, the ceiling privilege is always given when the already set first time saving state ends can be granted.
Furthermore, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, except when the normal state is set, when the conditions for setting the new time saving state are satisfied (any of the various ceiling standby flags Even if it is set to on), it is configured to carry over the right to set a new time-saving state until the normal state is set without setting a new time-saving state ( It has a time-saving carryover function).
This time-saving carry-over function may be applied to another purpose, for example, in the state where the right-handed game state such as the second time-saving state or probability variable state is set, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the current setting After the right-handed game state based on the currently played game state is completed, the right-handed game state based on the ceiling privilege may be configured to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the right-handed game state that is advantageous to the player continues, so that the player's interest in the game can be easily improved.
In addition, even if the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established at any timing during the right-handed game state, the same privilege (ceiling privilege granted after the end of the right-handed game state) can be provided. It is possible to prevent the content of the ceiling privilege given to a person from becoming excessively advantageous or excessively disadvantageous.

Further, the time-saving lottery can be executed even during the right-handed game state, and when the time-saving type in which the second time-saving state is set is won in the time-saving lottery, the time-saving lottery is won after the right-handed game state ends. You may comprise so that the 2nd time saving state based on may be set. In this case, as in the first modification of the eleventh control example, a pachinko machine configured to set the time saving type (advantageous time saving) in which the second time saving state is set in a part of the time saving winning In 10, it is configured so that the short-time lottery can be executed repeatedly until winning the short-time advantageous lottery (even if the short-time lottery other than the short-time advantageous lottery is won), and the short-time lottery is not executed on the condition that the short-time lottery is won. should be configured to
In addition, the results of the time-saving winning may be configured to be able to be carried over, for example, when the time-saving lottery executed during the right-handed game state is won five times, the time-saving based on the five times of time-saving winning. It may be configured to set the states in order.
Next, with reference to Drawing 341, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S39091a) are explained. Figure 341 is the figure which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S39091a). In this time saving state effect setting process (S39091a), for the time saving state effect setting process described above (see S39091 in FIG. 331), processing for measuring the number of time saving times set when the first time saving state is set are the same except for the addition of The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 341, when the time saving state effect setting process (S39091a) is executed, the same S34301 to S34303 processes as the time saving state effect setting process (see S39091 in FIG. 331) are executed, and the process of S34303 , when it is determined that the first time saving state has been set (S34303: Yes), the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa (S34391), and then the time saving state production setting described above The same processing of S34305 to S34309 as the processing (see S39091 in FIG. 331) is executed, and this processing ends.

Thus, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, by measuring the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state using the value of the remaining number counter 223maa, the remaining period of the first time reduction state can be determined. Configure. Thereby, it is possible to determine the period until the second condition (the end of the first time-saving state) for giving the ceiling privilege is established, and to execute an effect based on the determination result.
Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting processing (see S34472a) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flow chart showing the details of the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472a). In this normal mode effect setting process (see S34472a), in contrast to the above-described normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 in FIG. 332), if the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON, The difference is that the content of the control process that is executed when the first condition (500 times of addiction) for awarding the privilege is established is different, but the other points are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 342, when the normal mode effect setting process (see S34472a) is executed, first, the processes of S34501 to S34571 which are the same as the above-described normal mode effect setting process (see S34472 in FIG. 332) are executed. do.
Then, in the process of S34571, when it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571: Yes), the value of the remaining counter 223maa is updated (S34591), and the heart-pounding zone effect selection table 222maa , the production mode of the pounding zone is determined (S34592), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34593), the pounding flag 223mab is set to ON (S34594), and this processing ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S34571, if it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to ON (S34571: No), then it is determined whether the pounding flag 223mab is set to ON (S34595 ), that is, if it is determined that the pounding zone has already been set (S34595: Yes), update of the pounding zone effect mode is determined (S34596), and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S34595 that the throbbing flag 223mab is not set to ON (S34595: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern received this time is determined (S34509), and this process is terminated. .
As described above, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, when the time saving lottery wins the time saving lottery, the first time saving state of a predetermined number of times (100 times to 300 times the first time saving state) can be set. , and when the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (500 times of addiction) is satisfied, when the first time saving state ends (when the remaining time saving number becomes 0) The condition is satisfied and the ceiling privilege can be given.
By configuring in this way, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is awarded can be varied according to the timing at which the first time-saving state ends, so that it is difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the ceiling privilege is awarded. can be done.
In addition, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, as the first time saving end condition for ending the first time saving state, the first time saving end condition established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is set. However, without being limited to this, before the first time saving end condition is established, a second time saving end condition that can be established based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be provided, for example, special When the number of times that the lottery result of the pattern lottery becomes a specific lottery result (a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the second time saving end condition is established, and the first time saving It may be configured to end the state.

By configuring in this way, the first time saving state can be ended before the special symbol variation number (time saving number of times) that satisfies the first time saving end condition is executed, so the ceiling privilege is given. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing to enter.
Furthermore, in the first modification of the eleventh control example, the time saving lottery is configured not to be executed in the state where the first time saving state is set, but the first time saving state is set without being limited to this. The time saving lottery is configured to be executed even in the state where the first time saving state is set, and when the time saving lottery executed in the state where the first time saving state is set is won, the number of times of the time saving state newly won is the first time saving state. (set to the value of the time saving counter 203h), or the number of time saving times in the newly elected first time saving state is higher than the number of remaining time saving times in the already set first time saving state It may be configured to be able to determine whether it is small, and to determine the value of the time saving counter 203h based on the determination result. In this case, for example, as the value of the time saving counter 203h, it is preferable to determine a value corresponding to the one that is advantageous to the player. is established, the value of the time saving counter 203h may be determined in accordance with the number of times of time saving in which the value of the time saving counter 203h decreases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the frequent occurrence of situations in which the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is unnecessarily long.
As described above, in the above-described eleventh control example and the first modification of the eleventh control example, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are the first condition (500 hooking times) and the second condition. (End of the first time-saving state) is provided, and the ceiling privilege is provided when any of the conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to easily differentiate the timing when the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of addictions) set as the first condition is reached and the timing when the ceiling privilege is actually provided.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a different number of times as the number of times of addiction to which the ceiling privilege is given, and when the setting condition is satisfied, a complicated number of times of addiction is determined from among the different numbers of times of addiction. Ceiling benefits can be given at various timings (number of times of special pattern lottery) without executing processing.

In the above-described eleventh control example and the first modification of the eleventh control example, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries, the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (the result of the time-saving lottery). Although it is configured to be possible, it is not limited to this, for example, when the normal state is set at the time when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the first time saving state is always set. It may be configured as follows.
Further, in the eleventh control example and the first modification of the eleventh control example described above, in a state where the first time saving state is set, the third time saving state is configured not to be set as the ceiling privilege. . That is, the first time saving state can also be said to be a delay state for delaying the timing at which the third time saving state is set. Moreover, it can be said that it is a regulation state that regulates that the third time saving state is set.
In addition, the first time saving state is configured to end based on the fact that the special symbol lottery has been executed for the number of time saving times set in advance. That is, the means for ending the first time saving state can also be said to be a canceling means for canceling the regulation state (regulation period) in which setting of the third time saving state is regulated.
In addition, in the 11th control example and the 1st modification of the 11th control example, as a method of canceling the first time saving state (delayed state, regulation state), the conditions that are established based on the number of times of special symbol lottery When it is established, it is configured to cancel the first time saving state (delay state, regulation state), but not limited to this, in order to terminate the time saving state used in each control example described above You may apply time saving end conditions suitably.

<Regarding the 12th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 343 to 355. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example in that the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially configured, and the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. The difference is that the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 are partially modified. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other contents are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
In the above-described second control example, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from the low probability state to the high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and a specific special symbol (second special In some of the lottery results (outliers) where the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (2nd special pattern lottery) of the pattern) is different from the jackpot winning, time is shortened so that the opportunity to set the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. The lottery was configured to be viable.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example, similarly to the second control example described above, the time saving lottery can be executed only in the second special symbol lottery, and at least the time saving in the normal state and the second probability variable state. The lottery is configured to be executable.
And when the time saving state (second time saving state) is set, it is configured to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and it is given priority over the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, in the twelfth control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the high probability state of special symbols continues. It is configured so that the length of the period (probability variable period) and the period (short period of time) during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues can be set differently.

Specifically, the duration of the variable probability period is longer than the duration of the short period of time, so that the variable probability state can be set after the jackpot game ends, and in this case, the game state after the jackpot game ends. However, as the number of executions of the special symbol lottery increases, the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), second probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) , Normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) and is configured to shift in order.
Furthermore, the player is more likely to execute the second special symbol lottery with the normal state set than when the second special symbol lottery is executed with the second probability variable state set. It is configured so that an advantageous short-time lottery is executed.
By configuring in this way, during the variable probability state (during the right-handed game state where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640), the acquired second special symbol is held (special figure 2 hold) However, in order not to be executed during the second variable probability state, enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 during the second variable probability state, and hold the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation ) can be provided to the player with a novel game property of not being interrupted.
<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example>
First, referring to FIG. 343, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example executes a left-handed game for entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and when the time saving state is set, it is easy to enter the ball. It had a game board 13 (see FIG. 86) capable of executing a right-handed game for entering a game ball into a second ball entrance 640. Then, as shown in FIG. 86, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special 1 reserve) is not provided, and during the right-handed game, it is configured to be in a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a new special figure 1 reserve.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present twelfth control example acquires the special figure 2 reservation by executing the right-handed game in the variable probability state, and a predetermined period has passed since the variable probability state ended. Until then, by executing the first special symbol lottery that is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player if the special figure 2 reservation is not digested. . And, the game board 13 is configured so that the special figure 1 suspension can be newly acquired even when the right-handed game is executed in the variable probability state in which the special figure 2 suspension is easily acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the probability variable state while acquiring the special figure 1 reservation.
FIG. 343 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example is formed on the game board 13 in contrast to the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example (see FIG. 86). It is different in that the configuration of various devices arranged in the right side area is different among the game areas to be played, and the special figure 1 reservation can be acquired even during the right-handed game state. The configurations other than the right side area are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
As shown in FIG. 343, in this twelfth control example, a game that flows down the left area of the game board 13 as a ball entry means that can acquire the right to execute the first special symbol lottery by entering a game ball. A first ball entrance 64 into which a ball is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13, and a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13 is located on the left side of the game board 13. and a right first ball entrance 64b into which a game ball that has flowed down is easier to enter. The right first ball entrance 64 b is arranged in the right area of the game board 13 .
The first ball entrance 64 and the right first ball entrance 64b are configured so that four prize balls are paid out when game balls enter, and when a left-handed game is executed. , it is possible to enter about 20 game balls into the first ball entrance 64 by the time all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out on the way). The first ball entrance 64 is arranged so as to be.

On the other hand, when a right-handed game is executed, about 15 game balls are put into the right first ball entrance before all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out on the way). A right first ball entrance 64b is provided so that a ball can be entered into 64b.
Here, in the left area, a general ball entrance 63 is arranged other than the first ball entrance 64, and 10 prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter, and the game flows down the left area. Among the balls, it is configured so that prize balls are paid out even when game balls that could not enter the first ball entrance 64 enter the general ball entrance 63. When executing a left-handed game rather than executing a hitting game, when a specific number of game balls are fired, the game ball can always enter the ball entrance (general ball entrance 63, first entrance It is configured so that it is easy to obtain a large number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the ball opening 64 and the right first ball entry opening 64b).
Therefore, in the normal state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is not set (the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), the right-handed game The game is more advantageous to the player when the left-handed game is executed than when the is executed.
As shown in FIG. 343, in the right area of the game board 13, there is a second ball entrance 1640 which is a ball entrance (starting ball entrance) for executing the second special symbol lottery, and a second ball entrance. An electric accessory 1640a attached to 1640, a through gate 67 capable of acquiring the execution right of the normal symbol lottery by passing (entering) the game ball, and a ball entrance for executing the first special symbol lottery. A right first ball entrance 64b (starting ball entrance) and a variable winning device 1065 that allows a game ball to enter (win) by executing a jackpot game are provided.

The second ball entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessary 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) executed based on winning in a normal symbol lottery, and is set. A state in which it is easy to enter a game ball (normal pattern high probability state) and a state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball (normal pattern low probability state) can be created according to the game state. It should be noted that the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric accessory 1640a that is opened and closed in the winning game (normal game winning game) that is executed based on winning in the normal symbol lottery are described above. Since it is the same as the contents of the electric accessory control explained in each control example, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.
Next, a description will be given of the flow of game balls shot in a right-handed game. As shown in FIG. 343 , the game ball launched by the right-handed game flows down while changing the flow direction by a plurality of nails planted in the right area of the game board 13 . Then, at a ratio of about 9 to 1, in the first flow path in which the second ball entrance 1640 is arranged, or in the second flow path in which the through gate 67 and the right first ball entrance 64b are arranged It is sorted and flows further downstream.
The inlet to the second flow path is formed by a gap su1 between two nails, and among the game balls that have flowed down the right side area, the game balls that have not passed through the gap su1 flow down the first flow path. It consists of Since the opening width of the gap su1 expands or contracts depending on the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su1, for example, when the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su1 moves in the direction of narrowing the opening width of the gap su1, A game ball that has flowed down the right side area is less likely to flow down the second flow path and more likely to flow down the first flow path. On the other hand, when the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su1 moves in the direction of widening the opening width of the gap su1, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area is more likely to flow down the second flow path, and the first flow path. It becomes difficult to flow down the channel.
The game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the second ball entrance 1640 accompanied by the electric accessory 1640a, and when the electric accessory 1640a is operated to the open state by the normal game, A game ball is guided to a second ball entrance 1640 by an electric accessory 1640a projecting from the game board 13, and enters the second ball entrance 1640.例文帳に追加In addition, when the normal pattern per game is not executed at the timing when the game ball reaches the second ball entrance 1640 (the electric accessory 1640a is in a closed state), the electric accessory 1640a is in the game board 13 Since it is buried inside, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 1640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 1065. - 特許庁

A game ball flowing down the second flow path passes through a third flow path provided with a through gate 67 and a fourth flow path provided with a right first ball entrance 64b by a nail planted in the second flow path. It is distributed to the channels at a ratio of about 1:1. The inlet to the fourth flow path is formed by the gap su2 between the two nails, and among the game balls flowing down the second flow path, the game balls that do not pass through the gap su2 flow down the third flow path. It is configured to Since the opening width of the gap su2 expands or contracts depending on the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su2, for example, when the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su2 moves in the direction of narrowing the opening width of the gap su2, A game ball that has flowed down the second flow path becomes less likely to flow down the fourth flow path and more likely to flow down the third flow path. On the other hand, when the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su2 moves in the direction of widening the opening width of the gap su2, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path easily flows down the fourth flow path. It becomes difficult to flow down the third flow path.
The game balls flowing down the third channel pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the variable prize winning device 1065, and most of the game balls flowing down the fourth channel are the right first ball entrance. Enter the ball into 64b. In addition, a part of the game ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path may flow down toward the variable winning device 1065 without entering the right first ball entrance 64b. An outlet is provided. By configuring in this way, even if game balls stay in the vicinity of the opening of the right first ball inlet 64b (occurrence of ball clogging), the game balls that flow into the fourth flow path are prevented from entering the fourth flow path. It is possible to make it flow down.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the game balls flowing down the right side area pass through the second ball entrance 1640, the through gate 67, and the right first ball entrance 64b at a predetermined rate. When 100 game balls flow down the right area, 90 of them flow down the first flow path where the second ball entrance 1640 is arranged. , and 10 flow down the second channel. Of the ten game balls that flow down the second flow path, five of them flow down the third flow path and pass through the through gate 67 . The remaining five balls are configured to flow down the fourth flow path and enter the first ball inlet 64b.
When the normal state is set, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 1640 even if the normal pattern lottery is successful. Since the period in which 1640a is in the open state is short (0.1 seconds), the game per normal pattern is configured to be executed, so the right-handed game is executed in the normal state, and the game ball flows down to the right area When the game ball is entered into the right first ball entrance 64b, only prize balls (four pieces) are paid out.

Therefore, when a right-handed game is executed in the normal state, about 5% of the shot game balls are configured to enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so 250 games are played. When all the balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out on the way), it becomes possible to enter about 15 game balls into the right first ball entrance 64b.
In addition, by adjusting the arrangement position of various nails so that the opening width of the gap su1 or the gap su2 is narrowed, the game ball fired by the right-handed game enters the right first ball entrance 64b. Although it is possible to adjust the ratio to be low, when the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted in this way, the ratio of game balls entering the second ball entrance 1640 or the through gate 67 is increased. It consists of
Here, detailed description is omitted, but in this twelfth control example, if you win in the normal symbol lottery in the second variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), A normal pattern winning game in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 than when winning in the normal pattern lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns). configured to be executable.
In other words, in order to make it difficult to end the probability variable state with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, if the arrangement position of various nails is adjusted so that it is difficult to acquire the special figure 1 reservation by right-handed games, right-handed strike Through the game, it becomes easier to enter (pass) the game ball to the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640, so it is easy to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation by performing a right-handed game during the second variable state. can do.

Also, in order to make it difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation during the second probability variable state, it is made difficult to enter the game ball into the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640 by the right-handed game. When the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted, it is configured so that game balls can easily enter the right first ball entrance 64b.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is configured so that when a left-handed game is executed, the special figure 2 reservation cannot be acquired (it becomes difficult), and basically, the left-handed When the game is executed, it is configured so that it is easier to acquire the special figure 1 reservation than when the right-handed game is executed, so when the probability change state ends with the special figure 2 reservation acquired , by executing a left-handed game during the second probability variable state set after the end of the probability variable state, acquire a new special figure 1 reservation, and hold the special figure 2 reservation until the second probability variable state ends Although it is intended to make the player play the game aimed at, it is possible to make the player play a wide variety of games during the second variable probability state according to the result of the right-handed game executed during the variable probability state. becomes.
For example, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, if the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted so that the game ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b more easily than usual, the second In the variable state, a game aiming to acquire special figure 1 reservation by left-handed game and a game aiming to acquire new special figure 2 reservation although it is low probability while acquiring special figure 1 reservation by right-handed game The player can choose any one of
Further, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, when the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted so that the game ball is more difficult to enter into the right first ball entrance 64b than usual, the variable probability state If the special figure 2 hold is held at the end of the , the player is made to execute a left-handed game that is easy to acquire the special figure 1 hold during the second probability change state, and the special figure 2 hold is made at the end of the probability change state. If it is not held, it is more difficult to acquire the special figure 1 reservation than the left-handed game in the second variable state, but it is possible to let the player execute a right-handed game that can acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. Become.

With this configuration, the player can play the game while trying various game methods through trial and error, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.
In this case, based on the number of reserved special figures 1 and the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at the end of the probability change state, it is advantageous for the player as a game method in the second probability change state set after the end of the probability change state. A game method may be determined, and information may be notified to the player to indicate the determined game method.
Specifically, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired at the end of the probability change state, the right-handed game that can acquire the special figure 2 reservation newly in the second probability change state When it is notified as a game method and it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired at the end of the probability change state, the left-handed game that is easy to acquire the special figure 1 reservation is notified as the game method in the second probability change state. It should be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game disadvantageous to the player from being played during the second variable probability state.
As described above, in this twelfth control example, by using the game board 13 shown in FIG. 343, the game state (probability variable state ), the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery can be acquired even during the right-handed game executed in .

By constructing in this way, both the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are acquired in the pachinko machine 10 in which the first special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it easier to end the probability variable state in the state of being. Therefore, even after the definite variable state ends and the game state (second definite variable state) in which it is difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation than the definite variable state is set, the first special symbol lottery that is preferentially executed is continued. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game in a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a new special figure 2 reservation without consuming the acquired special figure 2 reservation.
In addition, as in the 12th control example, without using the configuration that can acquire the special figure 1 reservation by the right-handed game, another configuration can be used to create the same game property as the 12th control example. For example, when using the game board 13 (FIG. 86) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above, the second special symbol is executed by executing the right-handed game during the variable probability state. The lottery is made easier to execute, and a long (for example, 180 seconds) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the last special figure fluctuation (special figure final fluctuation) executed in the variable probability state, During the special figure final fluctuation, the first effect (right-handed effect) that guides the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold of the upper limit number (1 in this 12th control example) that can be stored pending, and the upper limit number that can be stored (this In the twelfth control example, the second effect (left-handed effect) that guides the special figure 1 reservation acquisition of 4 pieces) may be executable.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 343, below the right side area of the game board 13, a variable prize winning device 1065 that is opened during the jackpot game is arranged. This variable winning device 1065 has the same content as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 146) in the fourth control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding the effect contents in the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 344 and 345, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, so that the second variable probability state is set after the variable probability state ends. configured to be long.

Then, by holding the special figure 2 reservation to the normal state set after the second probability change state is completed without the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the probability change state being digested during the second probability change state, the game The second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is configured to be executable.
Here, in the state of having the special figure 2 reservation, the effect contents of the keep zone effect executed when the second probability variable state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 344. Figure 344 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the keep zone production, Figure 344 (b) is the end screen of the keep zone production, obtained special figure 2 pending It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed when the success production|presentation which shows that a 2nd probability variable state is complete|finished in the state which is in is performed.
As shown in Figure 344 (a), when the second definite variable state is set while holding the special figure 2 hold acquired during the definite variable state, the keep zone effect is executed. When the keep zone effect is executed, the conveyor 10802 is displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, and the bait icons hr1 to hr5 imitating a plurality of baits placed on the upper surface of the conveyor 10802 follow the movement of the conveyor 10802. An effect that moves from right to left in conjunction is executed. A fish 10801 waiting for food discharged from the conveyor 10802 is displayed on the left side of the conveyor 10802, and an effect of eating the food discharged from the conveyor 10802 is executed.
Here, a plurality of bait placed on the upper surface of the conveyor 10802 is configured to be displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation, as shown in FIG. 344 (a) On the display screen, as shown in the small area Dm1a, two special 1 reserves have been obtained, so two baits corresponding to the special 1 reserves (feed icons hr1, hr2) are displayed. there is Then, as shown in the small area Dm8a, since one special figure 2 reservation is acquired, one bait (bait with the letters SP attached) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (bait Icon hr5) is displayed.

Then, as shown in the small area Dm1, since the first special symbol variation is being executed, the bait icon hr0 (the bait of the display mode corresponding to the first special symbol) for indicating the type of special symbol being executed is fish. At 10801, an eating effect is being executed.
In the twelfth control example, since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and is newly inserted. Each time a special 1 reserve is acquired, a new bait icon hr1 to hr4 is added downstream of the bait icon hr5 corresponding to the special 2 reserve on the conveyor 10802 (position closer to the fish 10801). An effect is executed in which the player 801 throws the bait onto the upper surface of the conveyor 10802 .
In the upper part of the main display area Dm, characters "KEEP ZONE" are displayed to indicate that the keep zone effect is being executed. The text "Feed the fish until it's full!" is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Save the special figure 1 reservation so that the SP's food is not eaten" is displayed as a guidance mode for showing a more detailed game method.
Also, above the conveyor 10802, a traffic light 10803 is displayed for notifying the player of the operation status of the conveyor 10802. FIG. This traffic light 10803 has a display area of "GO" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is operating and a display area of "STOP" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is not operating (stopped). One of the display areas is illuminated corresponding to the operation status of the conveyor 10802 .

Furthermore, as a guide display area for guiding the player to the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), "left-handed" is displayed in the small display area Dm4. In the twelfth control example, basically, during the left-handed game, no notification is given to guide the player to the game method, and when the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, "right-handed" is selected. The display is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm4, but during the keep zone effect, when the game ball is not shot, a game disadvantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than when a left-handed game is executed. Therefore, the small display area Dm4 is configured to display "left-handed".
In the keep zone production described above, every time one special symbol variation is completed and the next special symbol variation is started, a new bait (bait icon hr1 in the figure) is eaten by the fish 10801. In other words, the bait icon hr0 being eaten by the fish 10801 becomes a state indicating information about the special symbol variation being executed (suspended during execution), and among the baits moving on the conveyor 10802, the bait that is closest to the fish 10801 is displayed. The icon hr1 becomes a mode (first special symbol reservation) indicating information about the special symbol variation to be executed next.
In addition, the operation contents of the conveyor 10802 are configured to be determined based on the variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed and the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the acquired special symbol 1 hold. , For example, if the variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed or the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the acquired special symbol 1 suspension is short, that is, if the special symbol 2 suspension can be digested in a short time When the operating speed of the conveyor 10802 increases, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation during execution or the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the acquired special figure 1 hold is long, that is, the special figure 2 hold When there is time to spare until the timing at which the data can be consumed, the operating speed of the conveyor 10802 is reduced or the conveyor 10802 is temporarily stopped.
By configuring in this way, not only the number of remaining bait (the number of bait icons hr1 to hr4 displayed) but also the status of operation of the conveyor 10802, the special figure 2 reserve is consumed (the bait icon hr5 is eaten by fish 10801) can be predicted by the player, and a left-handed game can be executed to obtain a new special figure 1 reservation based on the prediction result.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone production, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. It becomes difficult to hold the acquired special figure 2 pending to the normal state. Therefore, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone production, the end production for ending the keep zone production is executed.
Specifically, as the display mode of the bait icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension, poisoned bait can be set, and when the fish 10801 eats the poisoned bait, it runs away far away. It is configured so that a slamming effect is executed. In addition, the bait icon imitating the poisoned bait is configured to be displayed at a low probability even when the jackpot is not won, and the bait corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation that does not have the information indicating the jackpot win. When a display mode imitating poisoned food is set as the display mode of , an effect is executed in which the fish 10801 avoids the poisoned food.
By constructing in this way, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery during the keep zone performance, the keep zone performance can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the display mode (display mode showing poisoned bait) that is set when the jackpot is won can be set even for the special figure 1 reservation that has not actually won the jackpot, The bait icon can be displayed in a display mode showing poisoned bait without making the player feel uncomfortable.
Then, when it is determined that the second probability variable state ends with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, that is, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery Suspended memory (special figure 1 pending) number exceeds the number of special symbol lotteries required until the second variable state ends, and if the information indicating the jackpot winning is not included in the acquired special figure 1 pending, As shown in FIG. 344(b), the effect that the fish 10801 is full and goes home satisfied is completed, the conveyor 10802 is stopped, and the traffic light 10803 indicates that the conveyor 10802 is stopped. The display area for "STOP" is illuminated.

Then, in the small display area Dm4, "Rest!?" is displayed as a guidance display mode prompting the player to temporarily stop shooting the game balls. As a result, the first special symbol lottery is executed by continuing the left-handed game even after the second variable probability state ends and the normal state in which the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is executed is set. (Continuing to acquire new special figure 1 reservation), it is possible to suppress the lengthening of the period in which the second special symbol lottery is not executed.
In the display screen shown in FIG. 344(b), the small display area Dm4 displays a display mode that does not have enough force to prohibit the player from shooting the game ball, but this is not limitative. Instead, it may be configured to display a display mode that directly prohibits the player from shooting game balls (for example, a display saying "Please stop shooting game balls until the SP food runs out"). good.
As shown in FIG. 344(b), when the keep zone effect is successful, as a guidance mode for guiding the next game content to the player, the secondary display area Ds displays "Great success! Remaining SP."Let's eat the bait" is displayed. When the second special symbol lottery is executed without suspending the launch of the game ball from the state shown in FIG. 344(b) and acquiring a new special figure reservation, the production shown in FIG. executed.
FIG. 345(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 344(b), when the bait icon hr5 corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension is left, when the mid-ceiling mode effect is completed, the rabbit 801 is placed in the special figure 2 suspension after the normal state is set. An effect of eating the corresponding food is executed. Here, when the rabbit 801 eats all the food, an effect indicating that the time saving state has been won is set as a result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state.

On the other hand, when a new special figure 1 reservation cannot be acquired during the keep zone production, the special figure 2 reservation is digested, and the second special symbol variation is executed during the second probability variation state, Figure 345 (b ) is executed. FIG. 345(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the second special symbol variation is executed during the second probability variation state. As shown in Figure 345 (b), in the small display area Dm8, a display mode for indicating that the second special symbol variation is being executed (indicated by an arrow in the figure) is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8a , "0" is displayed, which indicates that the number of acquisitions of special figure 2 pending is 0. Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hungry fish 10801 attacks the rabbit 801 while angrily saying "there is not enough food", and in the sub-display area Ds, the end of the keep zone effect is displayed. The comment "End of keep zone" is displayed.
In addition, in the present twelfth control example, the period during which the second probability variation state continues is configured so that it can be varied according to the jackpot type, and the period during which the second probability variation state continues is the longest special drawing lottery It is configured to be 40 times and 1 special drawing lottery at the shortest. Therefore, on the display screen shown in FIG. 344(a), the period during which the second probability variable state continues so as not to let the player grasp the period during which the keep zone effect continues (the period until the fish 10801 becomes full) (The remaining period of the second probability variable state) is configured not to be notified.
In addition, in the keep zone effect executed in the twelfth control example, by varying the effect mode of the keep zone effect (for example, the display mode of the fish 10801, the speed of the conveyor 10802, etc.), the second probability variable state It is configured so that the remaining period can be suggested.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the duration of the keep zone production in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player is motivated to hold the special figure 2 hold until the second probability variable state ends. be able to. In addition, instead of exclusively displaying the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the second probability variable state, for example, by making it possible to set different modes of fish 10801, the remaining period of the second probability variable state can be displayed in the game. It may be configured so that it can be suggested to a person. In this case, as the aspect of the fish 10801, it is possible to set a slightly eating aspect and a big eating aspect, and the slightly eating aspect is easier to set when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is short. It can be configured as follows.

In addition, unlike the keep zone effect of the twelfth control example, the information (remaining probability change number of times) until the second probability change state ends during the keep zone effect can be displayed, and a special It may be constructed such that the number of remaining probability variations is counted down each time the symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many times the special symbol lottery is executed until the second variable probability state ends.
Further, in this case, it is configured to display information (pseudo residual probability variation number) different from remaining information (remaining probability variation number) until the second probability variation end condition for ending the second probability variation state is satisfied, A pseudo residual probability variation number update performance for updating the pseudo residual probability variation frequency by making it different from the update content of the information indicating the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery during the 2 probability variation state may be configured to be executable.
Specifically, when the remaining probability variation count until the second probability variation state ends is 40 times, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a pseudo residual as information until the second probability variation state ends. When the information corresponding to the probability variation count "50 times" is displayed and the second probability variation state actually ends, the information indicated by the pseudo residual probability variation count indicates the end of the second probability variation state. ” display mode). And, as a special symbol variation time for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variation state, when a variation time longer than a predetermined period (30 seconds) is set, the special symbol variation period Inside, it is configured to execute a pseudo residual probability variation count subtraction performance for updating (subtracting) the pseudo residual probability variation count by at least 2 or more.
By configuring in this way, when the pseudo residual probability variation count displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 becomes "last (0)", the second probability variation state is actually ended. However, in the initial stage when the second probability variation state is set, it is possible to display a pseudo residual probability variation number of times larger than the actual number of residual probability variations, so that the player is provided with the second probability variation state can obfuscate the length of time the period lasts.

Furthermore, based on the execution of one special symbol lottery, it is possible to reduce the number of pseudo residual probability variations by 2 or more, so in the second probability variation state in which the pseudo residual probability variation number is displayed, the second probability variation state The player can continue to play the game while expecting the game to end quickly (the number of times of pseudo residual probability variation will be greatly reduced).
Also, in this case, based on the preliminary determination result of the special figure 1 reservation, if it is determined to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery during the second probability variable state, the lottery of the first special symbol lottery to win the jackpot Using the period until the result (lottery result indicating jackpot winning) is stopped and displayed, the number of times of pseudo residual probability change displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set to "last (0)". It is preferable to configure so that the pseudo residual probability variation count subtraction effect can be executed.
By configuring in this way, even if the second probability variable state ends at any opportunity (probability variable number of times digested or jackpot winning), after displaying "Last (0)" as the pseudo residual probability variable number , the second variable probability state can be terminated, so that the player can be provided with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to set a number larger than the actual number of residual probability variations as the number of pseudo residual probability variations, and when the special symbol lottery is executed once, the value of the number of pseudo residual probability variations can be updated (subtracted) by 2 or more. Therefore, even when the jackpot is won during the second probability variation state, the number of times of pseudo residual probability variation can be greatly reduced.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 350, the electrical configuration in this twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 are used for the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. , and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 348. FIG. FIG. 346(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 346(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described second control example (see FIG. 96(a)) in the second winning random number table 202c. Instead of the second winning random number table 202nc, replacing the jackpot type selection table 202dd with the jackpot type selection table 202nd, replacing the time saving random number table 202de with the time saving random number table 202ne, and replacing the time saving type selection table 202df with the time saving type. The difference is that a selection table 202nf is provided. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.
First, the second winning random number table 202nc in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 346(b). FIG. 346(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202nc. This second winning random number table 202nc, like the above-described second winning random number table 202c, is a data table referred to when determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, and can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4. For the range of values (0 to 299), a value determined as winning is defined for each probability state of normal symbols.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 346(b), when the probability state of the normal symbol is "low probability state", the lottery result "hit" for the entire range of the value of the second hit random number counter C4 ” is not specified, the lottery result “out” is specified for the entire range, and in the case of a “high probability state”, the value of the second random number counter C4 is A lottery result “win” is defined for the range of “0 to 149”.
That is, in the twelfth control example, when the normal symbol low probability state is set, it is configured so as not to win the normal symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is ensured that the normal pattern per game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the event that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 occurs. can be suppressed to

In addition, in the twelfth control example, the contents of the second winning random number table 202nc are defined so as not to win in the normal symbol lottery executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. In the low probability state of the pattern, it is sufficient to suppress the frequent execution of the normal pattern winning game, and the contents of the second winning random number table 202nc may be defined so that the winning can be won with a low probability.
In addition, the technical idea used in any of the control examples described above, which is a technical idea that makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even when the normal game is executed. It is of course fine to divert .
Next, with reference to FIG.346(c), random-number table 202ne per time saving is demonstrated. This time-saving random number table 202ne is a data table referred to in time-saving determination (time-saving lottery) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (loss), and is the time-saving random number table described above. 202de (see FIG. 97 (c)), the conditions (special symbol type, game state) are defined for the value (range) of the first random number counter C1 determined as time saving election are different. is different.
Specifically, if the special symbol type is "second special symbol", regardless of the gaming state, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is in the range of "3 to 899" as a judgment value for short-time winning stipulated. In addition, for the special symbol type "first special symbol", the determination value of time-saving winning is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

Next, with reference to FIG. 347, the jackpot type selection table 202nd in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 347(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202nd. As shown in FIG. 347(a), the jackpot type selection table 202nd includes a special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a jackpot win in the second special symbol lottery. A special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2 is referred to, and the jackpot type is determined by referring to the data table corresponding to the special pattern type of the jackpot winning.
First, with reference to FIG. 347(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1 will be described. FIG. 347(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Different jackpot types are defined according to the value.
Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "jackpot A15" is used as the jackpot type, and when the value is in the range of "50 to 89", as the jackpot type "Jackpot B15" defines "jackpot C15" as the jackpot type for the range of "90 to 99".
"Jackpot A15" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 6 rounds (R) is executed and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed. 100 is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203i for indicating the period, and 60 is set to the value of the short time counter 203h for indicating the short time period. That is, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot A15 is executed, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probability variable state reaches 60 times, the game state is a jackpot type that is shifted from the probability variation state to the second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

"Jack B15" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 6 rounds (R) is executed and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed. 80 is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203i for indicating the period, and 60 is set to the value of the short time counter 203h for indicating the short time period. In other words, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot B15 is executed, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probability variable state reaches 20 times, the game state is a jackpot type that is shifted from the probability variation state to the second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).
"Jackpot C15" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 6 rounds (R) is executed and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed. 61 is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203i for indicating the period, and 60 is set to the value of the short time counter 203h for indicating the short time period. That is, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot C15 is executed, the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state reaches one, the game state is a jackpot type that is shifted from the probability variation state to the second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).
Next, with reference to FIG. 347(c), the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2 will be described. FIG. 347(c) is a flow chart showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2. This special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2 is different from the above-described special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1 in that the types of special symbols for which the jackpot types are set are changed, and each jackpot type is defined. However, a detailed description of the detailed setting contents will be omitted.
Next, with reference to Drawing 348, the contents of time saving classification selection table 202nf are explained. FIG. 348 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving type selection table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 348, the time saving type selection table 202nf defines different time saving types and the number of time saving times corresponding to the game state at the time of winning the time saving.

Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of winning the time saving is "normal state", the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is "0 to 99" for the whole range, as the time saving type "second Time saving" is defined, and "500" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. Also, if the gaming state at the time of winning the time saving is the "second probability variable state", the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is "0 to 99" for the entire range of "1st time saving " is defined, and "10000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.
In other words, the special figure 2 hold acquired during the variable state is held until the normal state is set, and when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, the time saving is won with a high probability (Fig. 346 ( b) See), as a time-saving type, the second time-saving state that is a right-handed game state (rather than entering a game ball to the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game, the second ball entrance by a right-handed game A time-saving state in which a special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently by entering a game ball into 640) is set with the number of times of time-saving 500.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability variable state, the time saving is elected with a high probability (see FIG. 346 (b)), and the time saving type is the left-handed gaming state. (Entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game causes the special symbol lottery to be executed more efficiently than entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game. time saving state) is set with 10000 times of working hours.
By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly varied according to the game state in which the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the variable probability state is executed. In addition, even during the second variable state and during the normal state, since the low probability state of the normal pattern that is difficult to acquire the second special symbol lottery pending memory (special figure 2 pending) is set, the variable state is Since it is not possible to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation after the end, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery so that the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the variable state is not digested. A player can be motivated to play a game in order to acquire more reserved memory (special figure 1 reservation) of 1 special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 349 and 350, the contents of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described second control example. do. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those of the second control example described above will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 349(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 349(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 349(a), the ROM 222 in the twelfth control example has a keep zone effect selection table 222na added to the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 101(a)). are different.
The keep zone effect selection table 222na shows the effect mode of the keep zone effect set corresponding to the first special symbol variation of the second probability change state, which is executed in the state where the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. It is a data table referred to when making a decision.
Here, with reference to FIG. 350, the contents of the keep zone effect selection table 222na will be described. FIG. 350 shows the contents defined in the keep zone effect selection table 222na. As shown in FIG. 350, the keep zone effect selection table 222na includes the length of the period in which the second probability variation state continues, and the variation time of the first special symbol variation that is executed when determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect A different effect mode (suggestion mode) is defined in association with the length and the acquired effect counter 223f, and the keep zone effect based on the effect mode determined by referring to the keep zone effect selection table 222na is performed. executed.

Specifically, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "40", that is, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state set when the jackpot A15 is won, the second to be executed 1 If the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is "short time (within 60 seconds)", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 79", the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed " A "high speed" suggestion mode 1 and a "big eater" suggestion mode 2 indicating a gluttonous fish 10801 are defined, and a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at a high speed with respect to the range of "80 to 99". , and a "small meal" suggestive mode 2 indicating small eating fish 10801 is defined.
And, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation to be executed is "long time (longer than 60 seconds)", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is transferred to the conveyor 10802 for the entire range of "0 to 99". A "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the fish moves slowly and a "small meal" suggestion mode 2 in which the fish 10801 eats little are defined.
Also, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "20", that is, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state set when the big hit B15 is won, the first special symbol to be executed When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation is "short time (within 60 seconds)", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39", and the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed, suggesting "high speed". A mode 1 and a "big eater" suggestive mode 2 indicating a gluttonous fish 10801 are defined. A “small meal” suggestion mode 2 indicating a fish 10801 is defined.
And, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation to be executed is "long time (longer than 60 seconds)", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is transferred to the conveyor 10802 for the entire range of "0 to 99". A "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the fish moves slowly and a "small meal" suggestion mode 2 in which the fish 10801 eats little are defined.

Finally, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "1", that is, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state set when the jackpot C15 is won, the first special Regardless of the fluctuation time of the pattern fluctuation and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, there are a "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at a low speed, and a "premium" suggestion mode 2 in which a special golden fish 10801 is displayed. stipulated.
That is, the harder the end condition for ending the second probability variable state is established (the longer the remaining period of the second probability variable state is set), the easier it is for the fish 10801 to eat more food to be displayed, and the second probability variable state The shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery executed during, that is, the shorter the period for acquiring the new special figure 1 reservation, the faster the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed. .
By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the difficulty of holding the special figure 2 hold in the second probability variable state set this time based on the production contents of the keep zone production.
Next, with reference to FIG. 349(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described. The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example (see FIG. 101(b) ), the difference is that a second variable probability counter 223na, a keep zone effect flag 223nb, and a keep determination flag 223nc are added. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The second probability variable counter 223na is a counter for measuring the period during which the second probability variable state continues, and in the second probability variable state effect setting process (see S9058 in FIG. 353), from the probability variable state to the second probability variable state When it is determined that the game state has shifted (S9402 in FIG. 353: Yes), a value corresponding to the probability variation counter 203i is set (see S9451 in FIG. 353). Then, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol lottery is executed (see S9566 in FIG. 354), and is referred to when determining that the acquired special figure 2 reservation is not digested during the second probability variation state. (See S9573 in FIG. 354).
The keep zone effecting flag 223nb is a flag for indicating that the effect mode of the keep zone effect is set and the keep zone effect is being executed. It is set to ON when the production mode of the keep zone production is determined corresponding to one special symbol lottery. By setting the flag 223nb during keep zone production to ON, when setting the variable production corresponding to the first special symbol lottery after the second time in the second probability variable state, the production mode of the new keep zone production is set. It suppresses the execution of the determining process.
The keep determination flag 223nc is that during the keep zone production, the special figure 2 suspension is not digested during the second probability variable state (the special figure 2 suspension can be held until it shifts to the normal state). It is a flag for indicating that special figure 2 suspension is not digested during the second probability variation state (can hold special figure 2 suspension until it shifts to normal state) Turn on when it is determined set. By setting this keep determination flag to ON, a keep determination effect is executed to indicate that the special figure 2 suspension is not digested during the second probability variable state.
Here, as the keep confirmation effect, for example, the food corresponding to the special figure 2 hold displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. An effect of not approaching the fish 10801 is executed, and an effect of displaying the characters "Succeeded in stocking SP bait" is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the SP bait has reached a state where the fish 10801 cannot eat it.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352, among the contents of the control processing of main controller 110 in the twelfth control example, differences from the above-described second control example will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is configured such that the first special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery as compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. The difference is that the execution conditions for the time-saving lottery are different.
Specifically, the difference is that the special symbol variation processing (see S15104 in FIG. 351) is executed instead of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 104). Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 351, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S15104) will be described. FIG. 351 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S15104). As shown in FIG. 351, the special symbol variation process (S15104) is different from the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 104), after finishing the process of S203, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is greater than 0 (S15204), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15204: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 Then (S15205), it is configured to execute the processing of S206 to S207 for executing the first special symbol lottery.
Then, in the processing of S15204, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S15204: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e ( N2) is greater than 0 (S15210), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15210: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S15211) ), the processing of S212 to S213 for executing the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the first special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery in the second control example. By configuring in this way, by continuing the state of acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to maintain the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.
Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the contents of the time saving lottery process (S8086) will be described. Figure 352 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8086). As shown in FIG. 352, the time saving lottery process (S8086) differs from the above-described time saving lottery process (see S8006 in FIG. 106) in that the game state in which the time saving lottery can be executed is different. It is different in that the data tables referred to in the determination of time-saving election are different.
Specifically, when the time saving lottery process (S8086) is executed, first, the same S8101 to S8102 processes as the time saving lottery process (see S8006 in FIG. 106) are executed. Then, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the second variable probability state (S8183), and if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the second variable probability state (S8183: Yes) , The random number table 222ne per time saving is referred to and determination of time saving election is executed (S8184). After that, the processes of S8105 and S8106, which are the same as the above-described time saving lottery process (see S8006 in FIG. 106), are executed, and this process ends.
As described above, in the twelfth control example, not only the normal state but also the second variable probability state is configured so that the time saving lottery can be executed. And, as described above, it is configured so that the time-saving lottery is executed in the normal state is more advantageous to the player when winning the time-saving than when the time-saving lottery is executed in the second probability variable state. there is In this way, the time-saving lottery can be executed in a plurality of game states, and by varying the benefits given when the time-saving lottery is won according to the game state in which the time-saving lottery is executed, which It is possible to make the player interested in whether the time-saving lottery will be executed at the timing (game state).

In addition, in this twelfth control example, by holding the special figure 2 hold acquired during the variable probability state until the end of the second variable state, it is possible to grant advantageous benefits to the player, so that the second special In order to provide a novel game property aiming not to execute the pattern lottery, the time-saving lottery is executed in the normal state rather than the time-saving lottery in the second probability variable state. Although it is configured to give advantageous benefits to the player at times, it is not limited to this, for example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability variable state, the time saving lottery is not executed. can be configured to In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to give the player the added value of execution of a time-saving lottery by holding the special figure 2 hold acquired during the variable probability state until the second variable state ends. becomes.
<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 353 to 355, among the control processes executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, characteristic contents different from those in the above-described second control example will be described. do. The control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example differs from the above-described second control example in that various processing for determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect executed during the second variable probability state is performed. It is configured to perform different control processes.
First, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the second probability variation state effect setting process (S9058) will be described. FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second probability variation state effect setting processing (S9058). In this second variable probability state effect setting process (S9058), when the second variable probability state is set, a process for determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect is executed.
When the second variable probability state effect setting process (S9058) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the secondary state setting area 223g (S9401), and it is determined whether the read game state is the variable probability state (S9402). ). When it is determined that the probability variable state is determined in the processing of S9402 (S9402: Yes), the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time period ends earlier than the probability variable period, and the second probability variable state is set Therefore, the value corresponding to the remaining probability variation counter 203i (the value of the probability variation counter 203i) is set to the value of the second probability variation counter 223na (S9451), and then the value of the second special symbol lottery counter 203e (N2) is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether it is in the state of acquiring special figure 2 reservation (S9452).

In the process of S9452, if it is determined that N2 is greater than 0 (S9452: Yes), read the value of the probability variation counter 203i (S9453), refer to the keep zone effect selection table 222na, determine the effect mode ( S9454), the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to ON (S9455), and the process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S9452, if it is determined that N2 is not greater than 0 (S9452: No), in a state in which the special figure 2 hold is not acquired during the probability variation state, it has moved to the second probability variation state Since it is the case, without executing the keep zone effect, the effect mode corresponding to the transition to the normal state is determined (S9456), and this processing is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 354, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S15483) will be described. Figure 354 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S15483). This special figure 1 production mode setting process (S15483) is a process for determining the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation, and in particular, the second in the second probability variation state The content of the processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to one special symbol change is different from the above-described second control example. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode setting processing in the second control example described above and the processing content thereof are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S15483) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes ), the same processing of S9502 to S9504 as in the above-described second control example is executed as it is, and this processing ends. In addition, in the process of S9501, the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is not greater than 0, that is, if neither the probability variable state nor the second time saving state (S9501: No), then the second probability variable counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565), and if it is determined that the value of the second probability variation counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565: Yes), the value of the second probability variation counter 223na is subtracted by 1 (S9566). Next, it is determined whether the keep zone effecting flag 223nb is on (S9571), and if it is set to on (S9571: Yes), then it is determined whether the keep determination flag 223nc is set to on. (S9572).

In the process of S9572, if it is determined that the keep determination flag 223nc is not set to ON (S9572: No), the value of the first special symbol retention ball number counter 203d (N1) is the value of the second probability variation counter 223na It is determined whether it is greater than or equal to the value (S9573), and when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is greater than or equal to the value of the second variable probability counter 223na (S9573: Yes), Next, it is determined whether information indicating jackpot winning is included in the acquired special figure 1 pending (S9574), and if it is determined that it is not included (S9574: No), the keep zone effect is completed. The effect mode indicating that the game is to be played is determined (S9575), the keep determination flag 223nc is set to ON (S9576), and the process proceeds to S9578. On the other hand, in the process of S9573, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (N1), when it is determined that it is less than the value of the second probability variable counter 223na (S9573: No), and the process of S9574 In, if it is determined that the information indicating the jackpot winning is included in the special figure 1 reservation that has been acquired (S9574: Yes), the production mode of the corresponding keep zone production is determined (S9577), and the process to S9578. If it is determined in the processing of S9572 that the keep determination flag 223nc is set to ON (S9572: Yes), the processing of S9573 to S9577 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9578.
In the process of S9578, it is determined whether the value of the second probability variable counter 223na after updating has reached 0 (S9578), and if it is determined that it has reached 0 (S9578: Yes), the flag 223nb during the keep zone effect is set to OFF (S9579), a display pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9504), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9565, when it is determined that the value of the second probability variable counter 223na is 0 (S9565: No), and when it is determined that the flag 223nb during the keep zone effect is off in the process of S9571 (S9565: No), the case processing of S9572 to S9579 is skipped, and the processing proceeds directly to S9504.
Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S15487) will be described. Figure 355 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S15487). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S15487) is different from the above-described special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4987 in FIG. 121), in the normal state or in the variable effect executed during the second probability variable state The difference is that the content of the processing for determining the corresponding effect mode is different.
Specifically, when the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S15487) is executed, the same S9601 process as the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4987 in FIG. 121) is executed. In the process of S9601, if it is determined that it is not the normal state or the second probability variation state (S9601: No), the above-described special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4987 in FIG. 121) Same as S9611 to S9619 Execute the process and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S9601, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the second probability variable state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to ON (S9651 ), if it is determined that the keep effecting flag 223nb is not set to ON (S9651: No), then it is determined whether the keep determination flag 223nc is set to ON (S9652), and if it is set to ON If it is determined that it is (S9652: Yes), the keep determination flag 223nc is set to OFF (S9653), the effect mode that suggests time saving is determined (S9654), the process of S9611 is executed, and this process is executed. finish.
If it is determined in the process of S9652 that the keep determination flag 223nc is not set to ON (S9652: No), the process of S9653 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9654.
On the other hand, in the processing of S9651, when it is determined that the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to ON (S9651: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the end of the keeping effect is determined (S9655), and the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to OFF (S9656), and the process proceeds to S9611. That is, when the second special symbol lottery is executed while the keep effect is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the end of the keep effect is determined, and the display screen shown in FIG. 344 (b) is included. An ending effect is executed.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example is configured to be able to execute a winning lottery using a plurality of symbol types, and a winning lottery using one symbol type can be executed using another symbol type. A first game state in which the winning lottery can be executed with priority over the winning lottery used and the lottery right for executing the winning lottery of other symbol types can be easily acquired, and the lottery right is acquired more than the first game state. The second game state, which is difficult to play, can be set.

Then, a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, one) of the acquired lottery right is provided, and the lottery right of the other symbol type stored in the storage means during the first game state is stored in the second game state. The memory is continued until a predetermined period (for example, 40 winning lotteries) elapses after the game state is set, and the winning lottery of other symbol types is executed after the predetermined period elapses, so that the predetermined period does not elapse. It is constructed so that a privilege advantageous to the player can be given more easily than when a winning lottery for another symbol type is executed before.
By constructing in this way, the winning lottery using the lottery right already stored in the storage means is not executed for a predetermined period, thereby making it possible to easily obtain an advantageous privilege, which is a novel game characteristic that has never existed before. can be provided.
In the twelfth control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for one symbol type can be stored in the storage means, and the number of lottery rights for other symbol types that can be stored in the storage means is one symbol type. (only one can be stored) than the number of lottery rights. Therefore, if the winning lottery for another symbol type is executed even once after the end of the first game state, the right to obtain an advantageous privilege disappears, so play the game with a sense of tension. can be done. In addition, since a plurality of lottery rights for one pattern type can be stored, the game for acquiring the lottery right for one pattern type can be easily continued after the second game state is set. In addition, by storing a plurality of lottery rights for one pattern type, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the winning lottery for other pattern types.
In the twelfth control example, only one lottery right for other symbol types can be stored in the storage means. Also good.

In addition, as the symbol variation time for indicating the result of winning lottery for one symbol type executed in the second game state, variation times with different lengths can be set. Therefore, when the symbol variation with a long variation time is executed, it is possible to lengthen the period until all the lottery rights of the one symbol type stored in the storage means are used. lottery right can be easily stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game while expecting that the symbol variation for a long variation time will be executed.
In addition, in the twelfth control, it is possible to change the period from the end of the first game state and the setting of the second game state to the time when advantageous benefits are likely to be given to the player. It consists of Specifically, the first game state is set after the winning game executed when the winning lottery is won, and the first game state continues according to the winning type set when the winning is won. The length of the period and the length of the period from when the second game state is set to when it becomes easier for the player to receive an advantageous privilege can be set differently.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period until the player is likely to be given an advantageous privilege, so that it is possible to easily provide the player with a game that the player will never get tired of. can.
In addition to the game characteristics used in the 12th control example, the game characteristics used in the 11th control example described above, that is, when the winning lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning, it is advantageous to the player. A game feature in which a privilege (ceiling privilege) is provided may be applied.

In this case, for example, when the number of times (the number of hits) of winning in succession in the winning lottery executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the first game state can be set. By storing the lottery right of the other pattern type in the storage means during the first game state, the game holding the lottery right of the other pattern type can be executed again until the player is likely to be given an advantageous privilege. may be configured.
Further, by executing a winning lottery for one pattern type for a predetermined number of times while holding the right of drawing for another pattern type, a third game state can be set as a ceiling privilege, and the third game state is set. By executing a winning lottery for another symbol type during the game, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to receive an advantageous privilege.
Furthermore, in this twelfth control example, a predetermined period of time has passed since the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 suspension) is set (the second variable probability state ends, and the normal state is set It is configured so that a privilege (second time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is easily given by executing the second special symbol lottery after the second game state (special figure 2 reserved Hard to acquire game state) is set, when a predetermined period of time has passed (the second variable state ends and the normal state is set) when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, that is , when the right to execute the second special symbol lottery has been obtained after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second game state was set, a privilege advantageous to the player may be given, For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that can set a plurality of set values that differ in the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, a second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a special figure 2 reservation) is set. When the period has elapsed (the second variable state has ended and the normal state has been set), if you have acquired the special figure 2 reservation, hold to indicate the number of special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired The display mode of the pattern may be configured to be capable of executing an effect of switching to a display mode corresponding to the set value.
As described above, in the twelfth control example described above, the first game state (the game state in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation) ends, and the second game state (the game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation) is set. Since then, the second special symbol lottery is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set), so that the predetermined period elapses (the second probability variable (during the state) than when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to make it easier to give a privilege (second time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, but not limited to this, the first The second special symbol lottery is executed after the game state (the game state in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation) is completed and the second game state (the game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation) is set. Therefore, it may be configured such that a privilege (second time-saving state) advantageous to the player is more likely to be given than when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the first game state is set. .

In addition, in the present twelfth control example, as the first game state (game state that is easy to acquire special figure 2 suspension), the variable probability state is the second game state (game state that is difficult to acquire special figure 2 suspension). Although it is configured to be able to set the 2 probability variable state or the normal state, it is not limited to this, and the various game states set in each control example described above are set to the second game state rather than the first game state. may be appropriately set so that it is relatively easy to acquire a special figure reservation for a specific special symbol type, for example, the time saving state (second time saving state) as the first game state, the first You may comprise so that a time saving state and a normal state may be set.
In addition, in this twelfth control example, it is configured to be able to acquire a maximum of one special figure 2 reservation, but it may be configured to be able to acquire a plurality of special figure 2 reservations, in this case, the second probability variable The remaining period until the state ends (the number of special symbol fluctuations) and the total value of the acquired special figure 1 pending number and the acquired special figure 2 pending number are compared, and the second probability variable state ends When it is determined that it is possible to determine whether the second special symbol lottery can be executed from the second special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery can be executed after the second probability variation state is completed. It is sufficient to configure the keep determination effect to be executable (to set the keep determination flag 223nc to ON).
By configuring in this way, since it is possible to display a plurality of SP bait (food icon corresponding to the special figure 2 hold) in the keep zone production, it is possible to enhance the production effect.
<Regarding the first modification of the twelfth control example>
Next, a modification will be described in which the game characteristics used in the twelfth control example are applied to the pachinko machine 10 having different game specifications. In the first modification of the present twelfth control example, in contrast to the above-described twelfth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel) (so-called , simultaneous fluctuation specifications).

By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within a predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.
In addition, since the configuration (so-called simultaneous variation specification) capable of executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel) is the same as the above-described ninth control example, A detailed description thereof is omitted.
<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the first modified example of the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 468, among the effects executed in the first modified example of the twelfth control example, the contents of the effects different from those in the above-described twelfth control example will be described.
First, when combining the game characteristics used in the twelfth control example described above with a configuration that allows the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed at the same time (in parallel) I will explain the characteristic gameplay in .

In the above-described twelfth control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, and the second game state (special figure 2 hold is acquired. It is advantageous to the player by executing the second special symbol lottery after a predetermined period has passed (until the second variable probability state ends and the normal state is set) after the hard game state) is set. Although it is configured to make it easier to grant a special benefit (second time saving state), in the first modification of the twelfth control example, the result of the first special symbol lottery is determined according to the game state to be set. The variation time of the first special symbol variation for showing and the variation time of the second special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery are made different according to the set game state. In the game state (first game state) in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, the second special symbol variation is likely to set a shorter variation time than the first special symbol variation, and the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. In a difficult game state (second game state), the first special symbol variation is configured to be easier to set a shorter variation time than the second special symbol variation.
In addition, in the first modification of the present twelfth control example, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four special figure 2 holds.
And, before the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the first game state (variable probability state) is completely digested during the second game state (second variable state), the second game state (second probability variable state ), the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the game reaches a predetermined number of times (number of times of remaining probability variation), so that the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed after the second probability variation state is completed. ing.
In the first modification of the twelfth control example configured in this manner, as the keep zone effect, the bait icon corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are made to correspond to the type of the special symbol lottery to be executed. The effect given to the fish 10801 is overlapped with the bait icon corresponding to . Then, until all the bait icons corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension that have been acquired are consumed, an effect aiming to fill the stomach of the fish 10801 using the bait icon corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension is executed. .

As described above, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel. Even if the game is played without interrupting the special design 1 reservation, if the fluctuation time of the second special design fluctuation for showing the result of the second special design lottery is short, or the result of the first special design lottery If the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation for showing is long, there was a risk of digesting all the special figures 2 pending during the second probability variation state.
Therefore, in the first modified example of the twelfth control example, the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol variation for each special symbol type. Therefore, in the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the twelfth control example, as the effect mode of the bait icon, the effect mode based on the fluctuation time of the corresponding special symbol fluctuation is changed from the above-described twelfth control example. is also configured to be able to determine multiple types.
FIG. 468(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen executed during the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 468(a), the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the twelfth control example is different from the keep zone effect executed in the above-described twelfth control example. The effect that the fish 10801 preys on the bait icons (hr0, hr0a) at the same time is executed, the number of bait icons corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is increased, and the display mode of each bait icon is different. are different, but otherwise identical. Descriptions of the same display modes are omitted.
Since the first modification of the twelfth control example is configured so that the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation can be executed in duplicate, the food corresponding to the first special symbol variation being executed An effect is executed in which the fish 10801 collectively eats the icon hr0 and the bait icon hr0a corresponding to the second special symbol variation being executed. Then, on the conveyor 10802, a bait icon hr1 and a bait icon hr2 corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, and a bait icon hr1a and a bait icon hr2a corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation are displayed.

In the first modification of the twelfth control example, the display mode of the corresponding bait icon is configured to be different according to the length of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to each special figure reservation. Specifically, as the bait icon corresponding to the special symbol variation, when the variation time is less than 10 seconds, a display mode simulating a small bait (see bait icon hr1) is displayed, and when the variation time is 180 seconds or more. , a display mode imitating hard bait is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation by grasping the display mode of the displayed bait icon.
It should be noted that, as described above, in the first modification, when a short variation time is set as the first special symbol variation in the second probability variation state, it becomes the first special symbol variation that is advantageous to the player, A game situation in which a bait icon in a display mode simulating a small bait is displayed is more advantageous to the player than when a bait icon in a display mode simulating a small bait is not displayed.
On the other hand, as the bait icon corresponding to the second special symbol variation, when the variation time is less than 30 seconds, a display mode simulating a small bait is displayed, and when the variation time is 300 seconds or more, a hard bait is displayed. A display mode (see bait icon hr1a) is displayed. By constructing in this way, by grasping the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the second special symbol variation to be displayed, the player can easily predict the variation time of the second special symbol variation.
It should be noted that, as described above, in the first modification, when the longer variation time is set as the second special symbol variation in the second probability variation state, it becomes the second special symbol variation that is advantageous to the player, A game situation in which a bait icon in a display mode imitating hard bait is displayed is more advantageous to the player than when the bait icon in a display mode imitating hard bait is not displayed.

Furthermore, among the acquired special figures 2 suspension, the total time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension excluding the last digested special figure 2 suspension, and the second special being executed If the total time of the remaining variation time of the symbol variation and the total time exceeds the predetermined time (the period during which the second probability variation state can be terminated by the first special symbol lottery if the game is played normally) When it is determined, it is configured to execute a special effect indicating that there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired at the time when the second variable probability state ends.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 468(a), the bait icon hr2a corresponding to the latest special figure 2 reservation floats in the air, and the display position does not move even when the conveyor 10802 is in operation. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, when the special effect is executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.
It should be noted that, while this special effect is being executed, compared to the normal keep zone effect, the emphasis guide notification that emphasizes and guides the player to continue the game to acquire the special figure 1 hold is provided. configured to run. By configuring in this way, the game is temporarily interrupted during the execution of the special performance, and the period in which the first special symbol lottery is not executed continues, so that all the special figures 2 pending are digested during the second probability variable state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where
In the above-described example, the total time of the second special symbol variation variation time corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension excluding the last digested special figure 2 suspension of the acquired special figure 2 suspension, and the execution It is configured to calculate the total time of the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation in the middle, but there is a possibility that the special figure 2 reservation will be acquired at the time when the second probability variation state ends For example, if the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation during execution is normally played, the first special symbol lottery will be the second probability variation state. To determine only whether it is longer than the period during which it is possible to terminate the It may be configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to a longer variation time than the period during which the second probability variation state can be terminated by one special symbol lottery is included.

In addition, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, when it is determined that the period in which the first special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed during the keep zone effect continues for a predetermined period, a special It is constructed so as to be able to execute a guidance effect that prompts a game to acquire the FIG. 1 hold.
Here, the display contents displayed when the first special symbol variation is not executed during the keep zone effect will be described with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 468(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 468(a) and the first special symbol variation is not executed during the keep zone production. is.
As shown in FIG. 468(b), when there is no special figure 1 suspension during the keep zone production and only the second special symbol variation is executed, the special figure 1 suspension is obtained for the player. In order to emphasize the guidance for the game, a display mode (indicated by a double frame in the figure) that emphasizes the effect of guiding the game method displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds "Special game" is displayed. There is no 1 hold! Hurry up and save the special figure 1 hold” is displayed.
In addition, on the conveyor 10802, in order to show that only the second special symbol variation is progressing, an effect in which the bait icon hr1a corresponding to the special symbol 2 hold approaches the fish 10801 is shown in FIG. 468(a). executed. Note that the bait icon hr2a is displayed at the same position as in FIG. 468(a) because the special effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, the game is temporarily interrupted during the execution of the special performance, and the period in which the first special symbol lottery is not executed continues, so that all the special figures 2 pending are digested during the second probability variable state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

It should be noted that, from the state shown in FIG. 468(b), the state in which the special figure 1 reservation is not acquired newly continues, and the second probability variable state is executed before the second special symbol variation corresponding to the bait icon hr2a When the situation becomes impossible to end, that is, the remaining time until the second special symbol variation corresponding to the bait icon hr2a is executed (remaining time until the second special symbol variation corresponding to the bait icon hr1a is completed) ), when it is determined that the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed does not reach the remaining probability variation number of times for ending the second probability variation state, the special effect ends and the bait The icon hr2a switches to a normal display that moves as the conveyor 10802 operates.
In the first modification of this twelfth control example, it is configured to be able to hold and store a plurality of special 2 reserves, and even if a situation occurs in which the special 1 reserve is not acquired, during execution Until the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, a new second special symbol variation using the acquired special symbol 2 reserve is not executed. That is, during the second probability variation state, in order to end the second probability variation state, the first special symbol variation with a shorter variation time is executed, and all special figures 2 pending are digested during the second probability variation state Execution of the second special symbol variation with a longer variation time is the most advantageous game content for the player.
Therefore, in the keep zone effect, the icon type that is advantageous to the player is easily set for the first special symbol variation with a short variation time. Also, for the second special symbol variation with a long variation time, it becomes easier to set icon types that are advantageous to the player.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire more special figure 1 reserves during the keep zone production.

Here, the variation time that can be determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the second probability variation state in the first modification of the twelfth control example will be described. Although not shown, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation executed during the second probability variation state and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation In addition, it is configured to refer to a dedicated fluctuation pattern table.
Although not shown, in the second probability variation pattern table referred to during the second probability variation state, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as the first special symbol variation, and the second special symbol variation An advantageous table in which a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected as the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is difficult to select as the first special symbol variation, and a relatively long variation time as the second special symbol variation. The variation pattern is difficult to select, and has a disadvantage table, and based on the setting opportunity (jackpot type) of the second probability variation state and the result of the determination lottery for determining the variation pattern table to refer to, whichever which table is determined.
The advantageous table has a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 to 60 seconds as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 100 to 300 seconds as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. , is defined to be selectable. Then, a different variation pattern is selected according to the stored number (special figure 1 reservation number) of the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation pattern type counter CS1. is doing.
More specifically, the larger the special figure 1 reserved number, the easier it is for a variation pattern with a short variation time to be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and the variation pattern with a long variation time as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. are stipulated to facilitate selection.

The disadvantage table has a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 to 45 seconds as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 to 300 seconds as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. , is defined to be selectable. Then, a different variation pattern is selected according to the stored number (special figure 1 reservation number) of the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation pattern type counter CS1. is doing.
More specifically, the larger the special figure 1 reserved number, the easier it is for a variation pattern with a short variation time to be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and the variation pattern with a long variation time as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. are stipulated to facilitate selection.
As described above, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, as the variation pattern of various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variation state, a variation pattern advantageous to the player is likely to be selected. , and a state in which it is difficult to be selected can be switched according to the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the success rate of the keep zone effect according to the type of the variation pattern table referred to.
In addition, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to is determined according to the gaming situation (jackpot type) when the second variable probability state is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, the scenario may be configured so that the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to is switched corresponding to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the second variable probability state.

Further, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, the variation pattern table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are defined is referred to. However, without being limited to this, a variation pattern table specifying only the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and a variation pattern table specifying only the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are provided, and each variation Tables with different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided for the pattern table, and the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to may differ for each special symbol type according to the game situation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the combination of variation patterns of various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variation state, and to improve the interest of the game.
<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 executed in the first modification of the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 469, characteristic processing contents of the control processing of main controller 110 executed in the first modification of the twelfth control example will be described. In the first modification of the present twelfth control example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (in parallel) with respect to the above-described twelfth control example. They are different in terms of their structure.
Also, when the game state is switched, specifically, when the second probability variation state ends based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, the process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed is executed. This is different from the ninth control example and the twelfth control example described above. By configuring in this way, even if the normal state is set while the second special symbol variation is being executed for a long time, it is possible to discard the second special symbol variation for a long time on the way, It is possible to facilitate execution of a new second special symbol lottery in the normal state.
In addition, as in the first modification of the twelfth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to discard the special pattern variation being executed at the timing when the ceiling privilege is awarded or when the time saving lottery is won, or the special symbol variation being executed may be discarded. It may be configured to continue the special symbol variation of.

Among the differences between the first modified example of the twelfth control example and the above-described twelfth control example, the portions where the various control processing contents described in the above-described ninth control example can be diverted are as follows: The explanation is omitted. That is, here, when the above-described gaming state is switched, specifically, when the second probability variation state ends based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, the process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed ( State transition change discard processing) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 469 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the state transition change discarding process (YS101). This state transition fluctuation discarding process (YS101) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 101 of the main control unit 110, and is specified when the game state shifts. When the conditions are satisfied, processing for discarding the special symbol variation being executed is executed.
When the state transition change discarding process (YS101) is executed, first, it is determined whether the game state has changed (YS201). exit. On the other hand, in the process of YS201, if it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (YS201: Yes), then it is determined whether the change from the second probability variable state to the normal state (YS202), the second probability variable If it is determined that there is no change from the state to the normal state (YS202: No), this processing ends.
In the process of YS202, if it is determined that it is a change from the second probability variable state to the normal state (YS202: Yes), it is determined whether the current is in special figure fluctuation (YS203), and it is not in special figure fluctuation (YS203: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of YS203, if it is determined that the current special figure fluctuation is in progress (YS203: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation (YS204), and during the jackpot fluctuation If it is determined that there is no (YS204: No), the fluctuation stop flag (special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf) corresponding to the special symbol type during special figure fluctuation is set to ON (YS205 ), the process ends.

By executing the process of YS205, in the special symbol variation process (see Y104 in FIG. 269) to be executed next, the special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure.
Also, in the process of YS204, when it is determined that the jackpot is fluctuating (YS204: Yes), a special continuation command is set (YS206), and this process ends. By receiving the special continuation command set by the processing of YS206 on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, a blessing showing the player that the jackpot variation is being executed at the timing of shifting from the second probability variation state to the normal state. A performance is performed.
As described above, in the first modified example of the twelfth control example, it is possible to cancel the special symbol variation being executed at the timing when the game state changes. Therefore, the special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) in which the special symbol variation is performed for a long time in the game state before the transition is easily performed in the game state after the transition for a short time. By doing so, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of varying the game property based on the transition of the game state, it is possible to easily execute a new special symbol variation along with the transition of the game state, so that the game property can be improved. It is possible to make it easier to provide a proper game along.
Also, as in the ninth control example described above, instead of discarding the special symbol variation being executed based on the start or stop of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation is discarded based on the transition of the game state. Therefore, for example, if the game state shifts regardless of the start or stop of the special symbol fluctuation (or the game state shifts after 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, or the game state based on the result of the normal symbol lottery ), the special symbol variation being executed can be discarded in correspondence with the game state transition timing. In addition, even if a plurality of types of special symbols are in the process of special symbol fluctuation at the timing when the game state shifts, the special symbol variation can be discarded for all the special symbol types during the special symbol variation. can.

In addition, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, when the game state switches from the second variable probability state to the normal state, it is configured to be able to execute the process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed. The process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed based on the transition of the game state may be diverted to another, for example, as in the tenth control example and the eleventh control example described above, the ceiling privilege is given. Based on that, it may be configured to execute a process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed.
<Regarding the control process of the sound ramp control device 113 executed in the first modification of the twelfth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 470, characteristic processing contents of the processing for determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the twelfth control example will be described. In the first modification of the present twelfth control example, for the above-described twelfth control example, in order not to digest all special figures 2 pending during the state in which the keep zone effect is being executed (second probability variable state) The difference is that the game method is different.
Specifically, in the twelfth control example described above, since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, during the keep zone production, the first special symbol As long as the lottery is continuously executed (as long as the special figure 1 reservation is not interrupted), the special figure 2 reservation will not be digested (until the second variable state ends) until the keep zone production ends (the second special symbol was configured so that the lottery was not run). On the other hand, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel). , Even in the state of always holding the special figure 1 reservation, if the variation time of the first special symbol variation to be executed is long and the variation time of the second special symbol variation to be performed is short, the second By the time the probability variation state ends, there is a risk that all the special figures 2 pending will be digested.
Therefore, in this twelfth control example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation being executed (first special symbol variation, second special symbol variation), and the special symbol reservation that has been acquired (special symbol 1 suspension, special symbol 2 suspension) and the variation time of the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation, second special symbol variation) corresponding to . .

By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to predict the difficulty of ending the keep zone performance while holding the special figure 2 reservation based on the performance mode of the keep zone performance to be executed.
FIG. 470 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second probability variation state effect setting processing (YS9058). As shown in FIG. 470, the second variable probability state effect setting process (YS9058) changes the display mode of the bait icon to the second variable probability state effect setting process (S9058) executed in the twelfth control example described above. The difference is that the processing for determination is added, and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the second probability variable state effect setting process (YS9058) is executed, first, the same S9401 to S9456 processes as the second probability variable state effect setting process (S9058) executed in the twelfth control example described above are executed. . Then, when the processing of S9455 is finished, next, the latest feature is selected from the information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the information stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Read out information other than FIG. 2 hold (last stored special figure 2 hold) (YS9001), and determine the display mode of each bait icon according to the variable time included in each of the read information (YS9002) .
By the processing of YS9002, as shown in FIG. 468(a), different display modes (small bait icon, hard bait icon) can be displayed for each bait icon.

Next, the information read from the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (among the information stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the latest special figure 2 reservation (last stored special figure 2 Information other than hold) is calculated (YS9003), and the calculated variation time and the remaining time of the special figure 2 variation being executed are added (YS9004). That is, in the process of YS9004, the remaining time until the final special figure 2 suspension is digested (special symbol variation is executed) among the acquired special figure 2 suspensions is calculated.
Then, the reference time corresponding to the value of the second variable probability counter 223na (the remaining period of the second variable probability state) is read (YS9005), and the total time calculated by the processing of YS9004 is the reference read by the processing of YS9005 It is determined whether it is longer than the time (YS9006), and when it is determined that it is longer, that is, when the game is played normally, the second probability variable state ends before the last special figure 2 hold is digested. If it is determined that there is a high possibility (YS9006: Yes), the special mode is determined as the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the latest special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 hold to be consumed last) (YS9007) . By determining the special mode in the processing of YS9007, the display mode of the bait icon hr2a shown in FIG. When the process of YS9007 is completed, a display command for indicating the display mode (effect mode) determined in this process is set (YS9009), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of YS9006 that the total time calculated in the process of YS9004 is shorter than the reference time read out in the process of YS9005, that is, when the game is played normally, the final special If it is determined that the possibility of the second probability variation state ending is not high before the FIG. (YS9008), sets a display command for indicating the display mode (drawing mode) determined in this process (YS9009), and terminates this process. do.
As described above, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, the special symbol retention stored at the time when the second probability variable state (keep zone effect) is set, and the special symbol variation during execution Predicting the fluctuation time regarding, at least one of the acquired special figures 2 pending is determined whether it is easy to be digested (execution of special symbol lottery) after the end of the second probability variation state, and based on the determination result It is configured to be able to execute the keep zone effect in a different display mode.

With this configuration, the player can predict whether or not the keep zone effect to be executed this time is likely to succeed, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
In addition, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, as a method of determining whether or not it is likely to be digested (execution of a special symbol lottery) after the end of the second variable probability state, the remaining period of the second variable probability state (the second 2 The value of the counter 223na during the probability variation) is used, but it is not limited to this. Based on the determination result, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is likely to be digested (execution of the special symbol lottery) after the second variable probability state ends.
Also, although detailed description is omitted, in the first modification of the twelfth control example, in the second variable state, periodically (when a new special figure hold is acquired, a new special symbol variation is executed In the case, when a predetermined time has elapsed), the value of the second probability variation counter 223na and new information related to the variation time (variation time information included in the acquired special figure hold, and the special symbol variation is actually executed Information indicating the difference between the fluctuation time determined when the change is made and the fluctuation time read at the time of look-ahead (preliminary determination)), and the process of updating (correcting) the production mode of the keep zone production is executed. It consists of
By executing this process, for example, in a state where a special effect (special mode) is being executed, the player interrupts the game, and a period in which the first special symbol variation is not executed occurs, or the special symbol variation When a variable time disadvantageous to a player, which can be set with a low probability as a variation pattern, is selected, it is possible to correct the effect mode of the keep zone effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute an effect suitable for the game state at the end of the second variable probability state that can actually occur.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 356 to 399. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, as in the tenth control example described above, the lottery result (lost) other than the jackpot winning was obtained continuously in the lottery of the special symbols a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times). In this case, on the premise of setting a game state (third time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, various devices (data display device 262, hall computer 263, etc.) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 An external signal output method will be described.
In addition, in the thirteenth control example, it is possible to execute a specific effect in the effect mode as if it were interlocked with the visual mode of a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10. Configure. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example, as a kind of effect for notifying the player of an advantageous state (for example, a big win or a time-saving state), a shift to an advantageous state is made. It is configured to be able to execute a display device interlocking effect in a mode of effect that keeps the fact that the player has done so hidden for a predetermined period, and prompts the user to visually recognize a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity after shifting to an advantageous state. . Various data (the number of lotteries between big wins, the number of big wins, the total number of lotteries, etc.) related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, which are currently in general circulation. In the data display device 262 for doing so, when an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability variable game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is set, it is in an advantageous state by emitting characters or decorative lamps. Since most of them are configured to be able to notify by such as, by executing the display device interlocking effect, it is very novel as if the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are interlocking and performing the effect. It is possible to realize a production mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the thirteenth control example, as a lottery result of the first special symbol that is mainly executed in the normal game state, almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in each round Also short) jackpot (special jackpot) is provided. In this special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal game state, so basically, the number of lotteries until the third time-saving state is set ) is responsible for resetting Furthermore, in the thirteenth control example, as a part of the removal of the special symbol, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is involved, and the opening and closing operation is common to the opening and closing operation (specific opening and closing operation) set at the time of the special jackpot. It is configured to provide a small hit lottery result. In other words, a lottery result that is difficult to distinguish from a special jackpot from the opening/closing operation of the specific winning port 65a and that the number of lotteries until the third time saving state is set is not reset is provided. With these, every time the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed by the specific opening and closing operation, the player can be made to recognize that the number of lotteries until the third time saving state is given may have been reset. Since it is difficult for a player to grasp the remaining number of lotteries until the 3 o'clock short state is granted (the remaining number of times until awarding of a privilege related to the number of ceiling lotteries reached), a game property to predict the number of remaining lotteries is imparted. be able to.
Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the ceiling lottery number of times is fixed to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, thereby transitioning to the third time saving state. It is configured to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won the lottery or whether the jackpot has just been won based on the number of lotteries on the ceiling. By configuring in this way, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the shift to the third time-saving state for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 10th control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the tenth control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 356, the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 356(a) is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the island facility in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 connected to the data display device 262 are arranged side by side in the hall. As illustrated in FIG. 356(a), in the state where the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the hall, the data display device 262 is basically installed directly above each pachinko machine 10. FIG. The data display device 262 includes, for example, a data display section 276 for displaying various data relating to the game status of the pachinko machine 10, and a light emitting device such as an LED. 278 and an input device 277 capable of receiving an input operation by the player for switching the display contents of the data display section 276 . Various data displayed on the data display device 262 are used as criteria for judgment when a player selects a pachinko machine 10 on which to play a game or whether or not to continue a game on the pachinko machine 10 currently in play. can be provided. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example sends a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot has been won to a predetermined device such as the data display device 262, and after the jackpot ends, a normal symbol is displayed. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 2 indicating that the game has shifted to the time saving state and a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the game has shifted to the third time saving state can be externally output. The data display device 262 monitors and collects game conditions such as jackpot wins and game conditions by means of external output signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, and displays part of the data on the data display unit 276. configured as possible.
Next, a display example of various data displayed on the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 356(b). As shown in FIG. 356(b), the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 is divided into, for example, a right display area 276R and a left display area 276L. For example, the number of first hits on the day (the number of times a jackpot was won in the normal state or the third time-saving state) is displayed. The example of FIG. 356(b) illustrates the case where the first hit occurs 12 times and the characters "first hit 12 times" are displayed in the left display area 276L. In addition, for the right display area 276R, for example, a display indicating the current number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations after the end of the previous big win), the number of lotteries at the time of winning in the first win up to five times before, and the first win The number of winning jackpots (so-called number of consecutive wins) and the like are displayed during the transition from the state to the normal state.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 356(b), below the right display area 276R, the characters "current", the characters "1", the characters "2", the characters "3", and the characters "4" are displayed. and the letter "5" are displayed. Above these characters, a bar graph indicating the number of special symbol lotteries and a number indicating the number of lotteries are displayed. The bar graph and numbers displayed above the letters “current” indicate the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the previous jackpot, and are displayed above the letters “1” to “5”. The bar graphs and numbers shown indicate the number of special symbol lotteries when winning the first hit (jackpot in the normal state or the third time saving state) 1 to 5 times before. In addition, characters displayed above the characters "1" to "5" and below the bar graph ("4 times", "1 time", "1 time", "6 times", and "1 time ”) indicates the number of consecutive winning jackpots (number of consecutive wins) from the occurrence of the first win 1 to 5 times before to the transition to the normal state. In other words, it shows the number of times that the game state (first probability variable state, second time saving state) set to the time saving state of normal symbols has been elected to the jackpot without interruption. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily grasp the tendency of the pachinko machine 10 (the tendency of the number of lotteries for winning big wins, the number of consecutive wins, etc.), so that the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to provide criteria for selecting the pachinko machine 10 to be played and for determining whether or not to continue the game on the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved. In the following description, for simplification of description, the display content displayed in the right display area 276R will be referred to as game history.

Further, the display contents of the data display section 276 are configured to be changeable by an input operation on the input device 277 . Here, the input device 277 is composed of at least a left input section 277a, a display switching input section 277b, a cancel input section 277c, and a right input section 277d. input operation), the display range of the game history displayed in the right display area 276R can be changed. Specifically, every time the right input portion 277d is pressed, a temporally old history (a combination of a display indicating the number of lotteries at the time of winning the first prize and characters indicating the number of consecutive wins) is displayed. That is, every time the right input section 277d is pressed in the state of FIG. 356(a), each history is shifted one by one to the left. Along with this, the history that is older in terms of time is displayed on the right end, and the display of the history that was displayed on the left end is erased. Conversely, each time the left input section 277a is pressed, each history is shifted one by one to the right, and the newer history is displayed on the left end and the display of the history displayed on the right end is erased. be. It should be noted that the game history is configured to store up to 10 previous histories.
The display switching input section 277b is an input section that can switch the display contents of the data display section 276 to the history of another day by pressing (input operation). Each time the display switching input unit 277b is pressed, the display contents of the data display unit 276 are changed to the number of first wins data and game history data one day ago, the number of first wins data and game history data two days ago, and the first win three days ago. The number data and the game history data are updated in such a manner. Further, by pressing the cancel input portion 277c, it is possible to return to the state in which the data on the number of first hits and the game history data for the day are displayed. With these functions, it is possible to provide the player with more information about the pachinko machine 10, thereby further improving convenience for the player.
Next, referring to FIGS. 357 and 358, the visual mode of the data display device 262 (the display mode of the data display section 276 and the light emission mode of the illumination section 262) when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific state ) will be explained. First, FIG. 357(a) is a diagram showing a visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot gaming state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins a big win, the pachinko machine 10 outputs a jackpot 1 signal for indicating a big win. Triggered by the reception of this jackpot 1 signal, the visual mode of the data display device 262 is set to the visual mode for the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 357(a). Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display portion 276 is erased, and the characters “big win!” are displayed over the entire data display portion 276 . Also, the right illumination portion 278R and the left illumination portion 278L, which constitute the illumination portion 278, appear to emit brighter light than in the normal state (when the game history is displayed on the data display portion 276). These visual aspects (visible aspects for big win) make it easy for the player to understand that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the big winning gaming state. The jackpot 1 signal is configured to continue to be output until the jackpot gaming state is terminated. The data display device 262 is configured to continue the visual mode for the big win until the output of the one-big win signal is finished.
Next, a visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the time-saving state of normal symbols after the end of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 357(b) is a diagram showing an example of the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 when the time saving state of normal symbols (one of the first probability variable state and the second time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot. . When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 shifts to the time-saving state of normal patterns after the end of the big win, the pachinko machine 10 starts outputting the jackpot 2 signal for indicating the shift to the time-saving state of normal patterns. . This jackpot 2 signal continues to be output until the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends (that is, until the jackpot is won or the time-saving number of times passes and the state shifts to the normal game state). The data display device 262 is triggered by the output of the jackpot 1 signal and the start of the jackpot 2 signal output, as shown in FIG. It is set to the visibility mode for Specifically, for example, the visual mode for a big win displayed on the data display section 276 is erased, and the characters "Continuously playing!" Also, the right illumination portion 278R and the left illumination portion 278L, which constitute the illumination portion 278, appear to emit brighter light than in the normal state (when the game history is displayed on the data display portion 276). These visual aspects (visual appearance aspects for the time-saving state) make it easy to understand that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the time-saving state with normal symbols after the end of the big win.

Next, the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 when the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches the ceiling number of lotteries (500 times) and shifts to the third time saving state will be described. FIG. 358 is a diagram showing a visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 after the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the third time saving state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins the third time-saving state, the pachinko machine 10 starts outputting a jackpot 2 signal indicating that the game has shifted to the time-saving state with normal symbols. In addition, a jackpot 3 signal is output for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) to indicate that the game is moving to a time-saving state related to reaching the number of ceiling lotteries. By combining these signal outputs, the data display device 262 can easily determine the transition to the third time saving state related to the ceiling lottery number of times, so the visual mode of the data display device 262 is for the third time saving state Set to visible mode. Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display section 276 is erased, and the characters "relief being activated" are displayed over the entire data display section 276 . Also, the right illumination portion 278R and the left illumination portion 278L, which constitute the illumination portion 278, appear to emit brighter light than in the normal state (when the game history is displayed on the data display portion 276). With these visual aspects (visual appearance aspects for the third time saving state), it is possible to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 has reached the ceiling lottery number of times and has shifted to the third time saving state.
In this way, the visual mode of the data display device 262 can be varied by linking to the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified to the player in a more comprehensible manner. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 359 to 361, a characteristic presentation mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 359, the data display device-linked jackpot notification effect will be described. This data display device interlocking jackpot notification performance is a performance in which a performance mode for drawing the attention of the data display device 262 is set after the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of misalignment in the variable display performance. If a big win is won in a lottery of special symbols, a big win 1 signal is output to the data display device 262, so that the data display device 262 is set to a visual mode for big win, thereby making the player win a big win. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the big win 1 signal is not output to the data display device 262, and the visual mode for big win is not set (game history remains displayed), it is possible to make the player understand that the big win has not been achieved.
Fig. 359(a) shows the third symbol display during execution of an effect (inflection effect of the data display device interlocking effect) that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the data display device interlocking jackpot notification effect will be executed. 8 is a diagram showing a display mode of the device 81; FIG. This data display device interlocking effect is a variable display mode corresponding to a variable type other than complete loss (SP reach, SP reach, super reach, super reach, normal reach, normal reach, etc.). It is an effect that can be executed as a part, and is an effect that is executed from 5 seconds before the fluctuation time elapses (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed).

As shown in FIG. 359(a), when the data display device interlocking effect is executed, a character 809 resembling an angel appears in the upper right corner of the main display area. An effect is executed in which light 809L is emitted upward in the main display area Dm from the cane 809 possesses. In addition, a balloon image 809F having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape and having the characters "Shine!" Furthermore, the text "If the data lamp lights up, the bonus is confirmed!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is as if the character 809 imitating an angel emits light 809L to the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby turning the data display device (data lamp). The player can be made to think that the electric decoration part 278 of 262 is about to emit light. In addition, the player can easily understand that the jackpot game is executed (the bonus is confirmed) when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 causes the illumination portion 278 to emit light.
FIG. 359(b) shows the third symbol display in the case where the big win is actually notified after the data display device interlocking effect is executed (when the data display device interlocking type big win notification effect is executed). 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the device 81; FIG. As shown in FIG. 359 (b), in the data display device-linked jackpot notification effect, first, at the jackpot start timing (at the start of the opening period of the jackpot), a signal (jackpot 1 signal) indicating the start of the jackpot is sent to a predetermined device. By outputting to (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), the visual mode of the data display device 262 that has received the one-jackpot signal is set to the visual mode for big win. In other words, the illumination part 278 of the data display device 262 looks like it was suggested by the character 809 or the like in the fanning effect of the data display device-linked effect. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 359(b), the same third symbol as the symbol on which the reach is applied descends from above the third symbol which has been stopped and displayed in the form of reach-off, and stops. An effect is executed in which the displayed middle symbol is replaced with the descending third symbol (the stopped middle symbol is pushed aside). In other words, an effect is executed as if the winning third symbol was released downward from the data display device 262 and the third symbol was replaced with the middle symbol. In addition, a balloon image 809F with the words "You did it!" is displayed on the upper left of the character 809 imitating an angel, and light appears to leak from above the main display area Dm. display mode. Further, the characters "Bonus confirmed!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 were interlocking to form one presentation mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode as if the data display device 262 rewrites the lottery result to a big win. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
At present, various devices with different specifications are widely used as the data display device 262, and the display contents of the game history and the viewing mode such as the viewing mode for the big win vary from device to device. Therefore, even if the same data display device-linked jackpot notification effect is executed, the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 on which the data display device-linked jackpot notification effect is executed. If the type of is different, the visual mode for the big win will also be different, so that it is possible to make the player have a completely different impression. Therefore, the performance mode can be diversified according to the number of types of the data display device 262 without increasing the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance of the data display device interlocking type, so that the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be saved. , the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 360(a), the small bonus effect in the thirteenth control example will be described. Here, in the thirteenth control example, as described above, the lottery results of the special big win and the small win in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed by the specific opening and closing operation in which the prize ball can hardly be obtained even if the ball is hit to the right are obtained. is provided. In this control example, these lottery results that are difficult for the player to distinguish from the appearance of the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a will be collectively referred to as a "small bonus". On the other hand, the jackpots (jackpots A17 to E16) other than the special jackpots that allow a relatively large amount of prize balls to be obtained are referred to as "normal bonuses."

FIG. 360(a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the end of the variable display effect corresponding to the small bonus (when the third symbol is stopped). As shown in FIG. 360(a), in this thirteenth control example, when a small bonus (special jackpot, small win) is won, the right symbol row, middle symbol row, and left symbol row of the main display area dm A third pattern imitating the same even number is displayed in a stopped state. The example of FIG. 360(a) illustrates the case where the third symbol imitating the number "2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row and the left symbol row. In addition, a small display area Dm4 with characters "Right shot" is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm. Further, as shown in FIG. 360(a), characters "small bonus" are displayed in the small display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the lottery result is a small bonus.
On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when a bonus (one of the jackpots A16 to E16) is won, the third pattern imitating the same odd number is the right pattern row, the middle pattern row, and the left pattern. A stop appears in the column. Therefore, since the type of the bonus can be easily determined from the type of the third symbols stopped and displayed, convenience for the player can be improved.
In addition, as described above, when the special jackpot is won in the normal game state, the normal game state is set even after the special jackpot ends, and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0, while the small hit , the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is maintained, so winning a small hit rather than winning a special jackpot does not reset the number of times of lottery until transition to the third time-saving state. It is advantageous for the minute player.
In the thirteenth control example, in the normal state, the number of lotteries after the last bonus is completed, not the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the big win, is set to the small display area Dm7 of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed as the number of "between". In other words, the lottery count on the display is reset not only for the big win but also for the small win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the special big win and the small win, so that the playability of predicting the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries can be added. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 360(b), an effect mode set in the variable display effect executed in the ceiling lottery number of times (500th time) will be described. FIG. 360(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling lottery frequency (500th) variable display effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 360(b), the ready-to-win effect occurs in the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th). Here, in the thirteenth control example, in order to always generate the ready-to-win effect in the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th), when the ceiling lottery number (500th) special symbol lottery is executed. is configured to set a variation time corresponding to 30 seconds of super ready-to-win variation regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it is possible to reliably secure the presentation time of the ready-to-win presentation. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that there is a possibility that the ready-to-win effect will inform the player of the transition to the third time-saving state related to reaching the number of ceiling lotteries. In addition, if the lottery result of the special pattern of the ceiling lottery number (500 times) is out, basically, the combination of the third pattern (see FIG. 130) similar to the time of the time saving pattern winning is stopped and displayed. State transitions are signaled. That is, after the ready-to-win effect has occurred, the transition to the time-saving state is notified by stop-displaying the symbol with the character "chance time" attached to the middle symbol row. As a result, the player can easily understand that the transition to the third time-saving state has occurred based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (not the transition to the time-saving state triggered by a big win). .
Also, as shown in FIG. 360(b), a small display area Dm7 with the characters "Ceiling!?" Further, the characters "Right-handed hitting strictly prohibited! Left-handed hitting!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By the display contents of the sub display area Ds, the player predicting that the state will shift to the third time saving state is prevented from starting hitting right before the state shifts to the third time saving state (normal game state). be able to. Here, if you start hitting to the right before shifting to the third time saving state (normal game state), the game ball passes through the through gate 67 during the normal game state and the normal symbol fluctuation display starts. There is a possibility that it will be done. And, in the thirteenth control example, it is configured such that the variation time of the normal symbols in the normal state of the normal symbols (normal game state) is set to 30 seconds. For this reason, for example, just before the fluctuation stop (immediately before moving to the third time saving state) the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (usually the fluctuation of the symbol is started), to the third time saving state After shifting to , it will be in a state in which it is impossible to hit the normal symbol for about 30 seconds. This is because the once set normal symbol variation time is not changed even if the game state changes during variation. For this reason, even though the transition to the third time saving state is notified, there is a possibility that the normal electric accessory 640a will be set to a disadvantageous situation in which the normal electric accessory 640a is not opened for a relatively long period of time, and the third time saving state There is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied with not being able to receive the benefit. On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, in the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th), a display urging the player not to hit to the right can be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. , it is possible to prevent the player from hitting right before shifting to the third time-saving state. Therefore, before the transition to the third time-saving state, the variable display of the normal symbol is started, and for a relatively long period of time until the variable display ends, the benefit of the third time-saving state (the right-handed game ball It is possible to prevent the ball from being unable to receive the ball (which makes it easier to enter the second ball entrance 640).
In addition, in the thirteenth control example, even in addition to the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th), the variable display effect of the effect mode (see FIG. 360(b)) suggesting that the ceiling lottery number has been reached is executed. Sometimes. More specifically, when one or more small bonuses are won after the bonus, at least one small bonus is a special jackpot, and the number of lotteries after the last bonus won is 500 times. and when the number of lotteries reaches 500 after the end of the small bonus won after the last bonus won. That is, from the player's point of view (a point of view that cannot determine whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win), there is a possibility that the ceiling lottery count has been reached. In other words, if the special jackpot is won after the bonus, the player cannot distinguish between the special jackpot and the small win. Since it is difficult for the player to be sure of the reset, when the number of lotteries after the end of the bonus won before the special jackpot reaches 500 times, the ceiling lottery is performed for the player. You can expect to reach the number of times. Therefore, by setting an effect mode (see FIG. 360(b)) suggesting that the ceiling lottery number has been reached at this timing, the player can continue to have expectations for reaching the ceiling lottery number for a longer period of time. can be done.
Similarly, when the number of lotteries after the bonus exceeds 500 times, it is confirmed that one of the small bonuses won during the 500 times is a special jackpot, but a plurality of small bonuses have been won. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to identify which small bonus was the special jackpot. Therefore, until the bonus is won or the ceiling lottery number is reached, every time the lottery number of times from the winning of each small bonus reaches 500 times, the effect mode suggesting that the ceiling lottery number has been reached (Fig. 360 ( b) is configured to execute the reference). By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the player's sense of anticipation for reaching the ceiling lottery count for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the data display device interlocking time saving effect, which is one of the characteristic effect modes in the thirteenth control example, will be described. This time-saving activation effect linked to the data display device is an effect that notifies the transition to a time-saving state (based on reaching the time-saving pattern winning or ceiling lottery number of times) without going through the jackpot in the normal game state. There is, the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 are interlocked in the same manner as the above-described data display device interlocking jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 359(b)). This is a presentation in a presentation mode as if the presentation is being executed. First, referring to FIG. 361(a), during the execution of an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that a data display device interlocking time saving effect will be executed (data display device interlocking effect) It is the figure which showed the display mode of the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81 in. This data display device interlocking production effect is a production that can be executed as part of the variable display mode corresponding to the SP reach out or super reach out, and the time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning or the ceiling lottery number reaching It is a production to suggest that there is a possibility of transition to. In this data display device interlocking performance effect, a variable time elapses (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed) in the same way as the data display device interlocking performance effect suggesting a big win (see FIG. 359(a)) 5 It is a production that is executed from seconds before. It should be noted that, similarly to the tenth control example described above, the winning lottery result also includes time-saving symbol winning. In addition, as described above, the variation pattern related to the lottery of the special symbol in the ceiling lottery number (500th) always selects the super reach fluctuation for 30 seconds, so as the ceiling lottery number (500th) Also, there is a possibility that the data display device interlocking effect will be executed.
As shown in FIG. 361(a), when the data display device interlocking effect is executed, a character 809 resembling an angel appears in the upper right corner of the main display area. An effect is executed in which light 809L is emitted upward in the main display area Dm from the cane 809 possesses. In addition, a balloon image 809F having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape and having the characters "Shine!" Furthermore, the text "If the data lamp lights up, chance time GET!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is as if the character 809 imitating an angel emits light 809L to the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby turning the data display device (data lamp). The player can be made to think that the electric decoration part 278 of 262 is about to emit light. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily understand that when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 causes the illumination portion 278 to emit light, the state shifts to the time saving state (chance time).
FIG. 361(b) shows that after the effect of the data display device interlocking effect is executed, when the transition to the time saving state is actually notified (when the data display device interlocking time saving effect is executed) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81. FIG. As shown in Figure 361 (b), in the time saving effect of the data display device interlocking type, first, at the timing of transition to the time saving state, a signal indicating that it is in the time saving state (2 jackpot signals), and a jackpot A signal (3 jackpot signals) indicating that the state has shifted to a time-saving state is output to a predetermined device (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), so that 2 jackpot signals and 3 jackpot signals are received. The visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 is set to the visual recognition mode for the time saving state. In other words, the illumination part 278 of the data display device 262 looks like it was suggested by the character 809 or the like in the fanning effect of the data display device-linked effect. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 361(b), the third symbol written as "chance time" descends from above the third symbol that has been temporarily stopped in the form of out of reach, and is stopped. An effect is executed in which the displayed medium symbol is replaced with the descending third symbol (the stationary displayed medium symbol is pushed aside). In other words, the effect is executed as if the third pattern described as "chance time" is released downward from the data display device 262, and the third pattern replaces the middle pattern. In addition, a balloon image 809F with the words "You did it!" is displayed to the upper right of the character 809 imitating an angel, and light appears to leak from above the main display area Dm. display mode. Further, the characters "Chance time GET!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 were interlocking to form one presentation mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode as if the data display device 262 was used to shift to a time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the hold change effect in the thirteenth control example will be described. Here, the pending change effect is a effect that changes the display mode of the pending ball number pattern displayed in the small display area Dm9 according to the result of the look-ahead. As shown in FIG. 362(a), in the thirteenth control example, at least six types of display modes are provided as the display modes of the reserved ball number symbols. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 362(a), there is a normal (default) display mode (normal suspension) composed of a black circular pattern, and a white circular pattern with an X inside. The display mode (change 1 pending), which suggests that the expectations for a relatively big hit and the expectation for a time-saving state are low, and the pattern that imitates a white circle, will be a big hit. The expectation is moderate, but the display mode (change 2 pending) that suggests that the expectation that it will be a time saving state is low, and the figure that imitates a double circle, and the expectation that it will be a relatively big hit is high. However, it is composed of a display mode (change 3 pending) that suggests that the expectation of a time-saving state is low, and a figure with a cross inside a white circle, and the expectation of a big hit is low, but it is a time-saving state. It consists of a display mode (change 4 pending) that suggests that the expectation is high, and a pattern with a figure imitating a star inside the white circle, looking ahead to either a jackpot or a time-saving state. There are six types of display mode (change 5 pending) that can be displayed only when a result is obtained. The execution timing of the pending change effect is the first timing when the pending ball number pattern is newly displayed, and the second timing when the display position of the pending ball number pattern is shifted by executing a new special symbol lottery. Alternatively, a third timing or the like defined according to the effect pattern of the variable effect to be executed can be considered. Then, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot or the time-saving state by the execution timing of the pending change performance. In this case, the pending change effect can be said to be a effect that can be notified by switching the content of the privilege and the degree of expectation of the awarding of the privilege depending on the execution timing.

In the thirteenth control example, when the start winning of the first special symbol is detected in the normal state, the lottery result is read in advance from various counter values (random numbers) obtained based on the start winning, and the result is read according to the look-ahead result. The lottery probability determines the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern showing the increased reserved balls based on the starting prize. As a result, even before the lottery of the special symbols is actually started, the player can have an expectation of a big win and an expectation of a time saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. The selection ratio of each display mode for each lottery result (variation type) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 362(b), conditions for suppressing the hold change effect in the thirteenth control example will be described. Here, as described above, in the thirteenth control example, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or after the end of the jackpot, the ceiling lottery number of times (500 times) is determined in advance. When a lottery result (losing lottery result including time-saving pattern winning and small win winning) is obtained, it is configured to shift to the third time-saving state after the ceiling lottery number (500 times) of fluctuation display ends. In other words, before and after the ceiling lottery number of times, the game is started by executing the lottery of the second special symbol mainly by hitting from the normal game state in which the game is progressed by mainly executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left. It switches to the 3rd time-saving state which advances. In the thirteenth control example, it is configured to suppress the continued display of the reserved ball number symbols (change 1 to change 5) in a display mode other than the normal hold over the switching of the game state.
Here, in the thirteenth control example, especially for the first special symbol, the advantage of winning a big win during the time saving state is higher than that of winning a big win after the time saving state ends. More specifically, when the special jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal game state, the normal game state is set even after the jackpot ends, but when the special jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the time saving state is set even after the end. In addition, in the thirteenth control example, like the tenth control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol. In other words, when a new lottery condition for special symbols is established in a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are reserved (when the fluctuation display ends, or when the jackpot is completed, etc.), the special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol reserved ball is preferentially executed. Therefore, under a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern and one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern are both reserved in a time saving state, a lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special pattern is executed to some extent. A player can adjust the timing. For this reason, when the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern is displayed in the display mode of change 3 or change 5 with a relatively high expectation of a big hit, and the state is shifted to the third time saving state, There is a possibility that the player may be tempted to confirm the lottery result based on the highly anticipated reserved ball without executing the lottery for the second special symbol. In other words, in the lottery of the first special symbol in which the degree of advantage is higher if the jackpot is achieved during the time-saving state, let's execute the lottery based on the reserved ball with a high degree of expectation for the jackpot before the third time-saving state ends. It may make you think. In other words, if the change suspension is continuously displayed before and after the third time saving state, there is a risk that it will be excessively advantageous for the player.
Therefore, in the present thirteenth control example, the number of held ball patterns (change 1 to change 5) in a display mode other than normal hold across the timing of switching to the third time saving state continue to be displayed (and the second during the time saving state In order to suppress the execution of the pending change effect of 1 special symbol), it is configured to set a prohibition state of the pending change effect (special figure 1 prefetch effect prohibition state). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 362(b), the start winning corresponding to the lottery of the special pattern of the number of ceiling lotteries (500 times) is detected, and the display mode of the pending ball number pattern based on the starting win. is set until the third time-saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (500 times) is completed, the special figure 1 pre-reading effect prohibition state is set. By configuring in this way, the first special pattern reserved ball used for the special pattern lottery after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (after shifting to the third time saving state) is reserved before reaching the ceiling lottery number of times. Intentionally adjusting the firing interval of game balls so that the lottery execution timing is in the third time-saving state, or conversely, intentionally so that the lottery execution timing of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is not in the third time-saving state. It is possible to configure such that the game method of adjusting the shooting interval of game balls cannot be realized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 363, a transition method between game states in the thirteenth control example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 363, in this thirteenth control example, four types of game states are provided as the game state: normal state, first variable probability state, second time saving state, and third time saving state. As in the tenth control example, the normal state is set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation shortening function (variable short) does not operate. . In other words, the game state is disadvantageous for the player who needs to proceed with the game by executing the lottery for the first special symbol having a low advantage by hitting left.
In addition, the first probability variable state is set to a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols, and is composed of a game state in which a variation reduction function (variable short) of normal symbols is operated, and the jackpot winning probability is high. It is composed of the most advantageous game state for the player who can frequently execute the lottery of the second special symbols which are advantageous by hitting to the right. In addition, the second time reduction state is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates, so that the jackpot probability is increased. Although the degree of advantage is lower than that of the first variable probability state due to the low probability, the game state is composed of a higher degree of advantage than the normal state due to the frequent execution of the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting to the right.
Furthermore, the third time saving state is set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state, and is composed of a game state in which a normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates. In other words, compared to the second time-saving state, the degree of advantage is low because the probability of winning the normal symbol is low, but the game state is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state. Here, in the thirteenth control example, as in the tenth control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be normal symbol hits is different by only one. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (that the degree of advantage of the third time saving state is lower than that of the second time saving state). Therefore, when shifting to the third time-saving state, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has obtained the same value as when shifting to the second time-saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can be done.
First, with reference to the upper portion of FIG. 363, a method of shifting from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of Fig. 363, the normal state may shift to another state when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving pattern is won, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached without winning a jackpot. There is Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 363, when winning the jackpot A16 determined at a rate of 80% when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous first probability variable state. In addition, if you win a big win B16 determined at a rate of 10% when you win a big win in the lottery of the first special symbols in a normal state, the game state after the big win is a second with a lower advantage than the first probability variable state. It is set to the 2 o'clock short state. Also, in the normal state, when the time-saving design is won in the lottery for the first special design, the second time-saving state is similarly set. Furthermore, when reaching the ceiling lottery number of times in the normal state, it is set to the third time saving state. On the other hand, if a special jackpot determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state again ( loop normal state). Therefore, in the normal state, basically, the player expects to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery and shift to the first probability variable state. In addition, when a certain number of lotteries have passed without winning the jackpot (so-called addiction occurs), the game can be played in anticipation of reaching the ceiling number of lotteries.

Next, referring to the central left side of FIG. 363, a method of shifting from the first variable probability state to another game state will be described. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 363, from the first variable probability state to another game state, either the jackpot is won or the number of probability variables set after the end of the previous jackpot has passed (the value of the variable probability counter 203i is 0 become), there is a possibility of migration. More specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 363, when winning the jackpot E16 determined at a rate of 20% when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the first variable state, the jackpot ends. The later game state is set to the second time saving state. Also, when the number of times of probability variation has passed in the first variable probability state (the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes 0), the gaming state is set to the normal state. On the other hand, when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbols in the first probability variable state, if one of the jackpots C16 and D16 determined at a rate of 80% is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is changed to the first again. It is set to the variable probability state (loop the first variable probability state). Therefore, in the first variable probability state, the player expects to win the big win before the number of times of the variable probability elapses, and expects to win the big wins C16 and D16.
In addition, it is configured so that the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed by hitting to the left even in the second variable probability state. When a jackpot B16 or a special jackpot is determined in the lottery of the first special symbols, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state. On the other hand, when the jackpot A16 is determined by lottery of the first special symbols, the first probability variable state is looped. In addition, when the time-saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design, the game state is not changed because the time-saving state of the normal design is already set. Strictly speaking, when the time saving pattern is won, the time saving number of times is reset to 100 times (100 is set to the time saving counter 203h). Therefore, in this case, an event occurs in which the probability variation number and the time saving number are shifted. Therefore, although omitted for illustration, only when this irregular event occurs, the situation that the time saving number of times remains even after the probability changing number of times in the first probability change state occurs, the second time saving state to move to.
Next, with reference to the part on the right side of the first probability variable state in FIG. 363, a method of shifting from the second time saving state and the third time saving state to another game state will be described. In addition, since the transition method to another game state is almost common between the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state, the explanation is collectively performed here as the time-saving state. As shown in the central right part of Fig. 363, it is possible to shift from the time saving state to another game state when a jackpot is won or when the number of time saving times has passed (the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0). have a nature. More specifically, as shown in the central right part of FIG. 363, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state, the jackpot C16 or D16 is determined at a rate of 80%. In the case, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the first probability variable state. In addition, if a jackpot E16 determined at a rate of 20% is won when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the second time-saving state (jackpot If the time saving state at the time of winning is the second time saving state, the second time saving state is looped, and if it is the third time saving state, it shifts to the second time saving state). Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours has passed, the state is directly shifted to the normal state. Although not shown in the drawings, the first special symbol lottery is executed by the player hitting left in the third time-saving state, and when the time-saving design is won, the state is shifted to the second time-saving state. .
In this way, in the thirteenth control example, the game state is changed at various occasions such as when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving symbol is won, and when the ceiling lottery count is reached. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to a game state with a high degree of advantage at more timings, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 364, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 364 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 364, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is different from the electrical configuration (see FIG. 21) in the tenth control example (and the first control example) described above. The only difference is that an external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the device 110 and the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111 . Other configurations are the same as the electrical configuration (see FIG. 21) in the tenth control example (and the first control example) described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example, through the external output terminal board 261, information indicating the start winning, information indicating the number of winning balls, information indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, etc. Information corresponding to the situation can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Data output to the outside is received by a data display device 262 electrically connected to the external output terminal board 261 and a hall computer 263 . The data display device 262 aggregates information output from one electrically connected pachinko machine 10 and is configured to be able to display the aggregated data as a game history on the data display unit 276 . Also, the hall computer 263 is electrically connected to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, and is configured to be able to collect information output from each pachinko machine 10 individually. More specifically, the hard disk 289 (see FIG. 365) of the hall computer 263 is provided with a data storage area corresponding to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall. Each time the data is received, the contents of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the data are updated. Based on the contents stored in this data storage area, the game history of each pachinko machine 10 (the number of jackpots per day, the number of fluctuations, the ball entrance of the lottery device 700 where the game ball entered in each jackpot, etc.) It is configured so that the ball rate, operating rate, presence or absence of fraudulent acts and abnormalities, etc. can be grasped.
The external output terminal board 261 is configured to have eleven output channels CN1 to CN11. Each of these 11 channels is configured to be capable of outputting either an H output signal (eg, 5 volt output) or an L output signal (eg, 0 volt output). Each of these channels is provided with a ground pin in addition to pins for outputting game information such as game status and game status. That is, each channel consists of two pins. The ground pins are connected to the common ground of the external output terminal plate 261 and are configured to always output 0 volt. The data display device 262 and hall computer 263 compare the reference voltage of 0 volts output from the ground pin with the voltage output from the information output pin, thereby determining the output pin for information output. It is possible to easily determine whether the state of is the H output state or the L output state. Note that it is not always necessary to provide a ground pin for each channel. For example, a dedicated channel may be provided for outputting a 0 volt reference voltage. As a result, since the number of pins in each channel can be reduced by one, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of harnesses and the number of connectors.
Next, with reference to FIG. 365, the configuration of the game system composed of the pachinko machine 10, the data display device 262, and the hall computer 263 in the thirteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 365, the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10, the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 are electrically connected. That is, signal lines leading to the external output terminal board 261 are connected to the input/output port 275 of the data display device 262 and the input/output port of the hall computer 263 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 365, the data display device 262 is equipped with an MPU 271 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 271, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 272. A RAM 273 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. For the input/output port 275 of the data display device 262, for example, a data display unit 276 configured by a liquid crystal display or the like and capable of displaying data such as game history, and a data display unit 276 At least an input device 277 capable of receiving an input operation for switching the display contents of , and an illumination section 278 made up of a light-emitting member such as an LED are connected. Based on the data stored in the ROM 272 and RAM 273, the MPU 271 controls the display contents of the data display unit 276, monitors whether there is an input operation on the input device 277, and displays the data when an input operation is detected. The display contents of the section 276 are switched. In addition, various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 are monitored to update the game history information stored in the RAM 273, update the display mode of the data display section 276, and Update the mode. As a result, the game history of the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed on the data display section 276 without time lag, so that convenience for the player can be improved.
Further, as shown in FIG. 365, the hall computer 263 is equipped with an MPU 281 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 281 includes a ROM 282 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 281, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 282. A RAM 283 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. For the input/output port 285 of the hall computer 263, a speaker 286 capable of outputting a predetermined sound and a display 287 composed of a liquid crystal display or the like and capable of displaying data such as game history are provided. and an input device 288 configured by a keyboard or the like and capable of accepting an input operation such as switching display contents on a display 287 is connected. Further, the hall computer 263 incorporates a hard disk 289 for individually summarizing the game histories of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall. Based on the data stored in the ROM 282, the RAM 283, and the hard disk 289, the MPU 281 controls the display contents of the display 287, monitors whether there is an input operation on the input device 288, and when an input operation is detected, The display contents of the data display section 287 are switched. In addition, various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 are monitored to update the game history information stored in the hard disk 289, to update the display mode of the display 287, and to update the voice output from the speaker 286. to control. As a result, the game history and game status of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall can be displayed on the display 287 without time lag, which is convenient for the operator of the hall computer (mainly the hall clerk, etc.). can improve sexuality.
Next, the details of the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 366, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with 11 channels from CN1 to CN11, and signals corresponding to game situations are output from each channel. Specifically, CN1 outputs a payout signal indicating that 10 prize balls have been paid out from the pachinko machine 10 . This payout signal is constructed such that the H output continues for 0.2 seconds every time the number of paid out prize balls reaches 10. The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls paid out from each pachinko machine 10 based on this payout signal. As a result, the ball output rate of each pachinko machine 10 and the sales of the hall can be calculated.
From CN2 of the external output terminal board 261, an inner frame open signal indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened is output. The output of the inner frame open signal is set to H while the inner frame 12 is open, and the output is set to L while the inner frame 12 is closed. The hall computer 263 can grasp whether or not the inner frame 12 of each pachinko machine 10 has been opened by an illegal player based on this inner frame opening signal, so that fraud can be suppressed.

A door open signal indicating whether or not the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is open is output from the CN3 of the external output terminal board 261 . The output of the door open signal is set to H while the front frame 14 is open, and the output is set to L while the front frame 14 is closed. Since the hall computer 263 can grasp whether or not the front frame 14 of each pachinko machine 10 is opened by an illegal player based on the door opening signal, illegal acts can be suppressed.
From CN4 of the external output terminal plate 261, a symbol stop signal indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped is output. This symbol stop signal is set to the state of H output for 1 second based on the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol (see S235A in FIG. 524). The hall computer 262 can grasp the number of fluctuations of the special symbols of each pachinko machine 10 based on the symbol stop signal.
From CN5 of the external output terminal plate 261, a start winning signal, which is a signal indicating that a starting winning to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected, is output. The output of the starting winning signal is set to H each time a starting winning is detected. Also, the H output is configured to continue for 0.2 seconds. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the starting winning of each pachinko machine 10 based on this starting winning signal.
From CN6 of the external output terminal plate 261, an out ball detection signal whose output becomes H (high output) is outputted every time the number of game balls entering the out port 66 reaches 10 balls. This out-ball detection signal is set to the L output state after being kept in the H output state for 0.2 seconds each time 10 out balls are detected. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of out balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on this out ball detection signal.

CN7 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a jackpot 1 signal indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state. The output of the jackpot 1 signal is set to H during the jackpot of the special symbol, and the output is set to L in the state other than the jackpot. The hall computer 263 can determine the number of jackpots of each pachinko machine 10 and the presence or absence of fraud based on this one jackpot signal. Specifically, when this jackpot 1 signal is set to the H output state, the hall computer 263 adds 1 to the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured to be able to grasp the number of jackpots in real time. It is Based on the number of jackpots, when an abnormal number of jackpots have occurred, it is possible to determine that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraudulent act, and to report the abnormality.
From CN8 of the external output terminal board 261, a jackpot 2 signal indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols is output. The output of the jackpot 2 signal is set to H while the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, and the output is set to L in the state other than the time saving state of the normal pattern. The hall computer 263 can determine the number of consecutive wins of each pachinko machine 10 and the presence or absence of fraud based on the two jackpot signals. Specifically, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot 1 signal is output while this jackpot 2 signal is in the H output state, the hall computer 263 adds 1 to the number of consecutive games of the pachinko machine 10, It is configured so that the number of consecutive chances can be grasped in real time. Based on the number of consecutive big wins, if an abnormal number of consecutive big wins have occurred, it can be determined that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraud, and the abnormality can be reported.
From CN9 of the external output terminal board 261, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, jackpot 3 signals indicating the start and end times of the third time-saving state are output. In addition to setting the output of the jackpot 3 signal to H during execution of the jackpot game as with the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot lottery number of times is reached and the third time-saving state is started, and the third Its output is set to H for 0.2 seconds when the time saving state is terminated. With this jackpot 3 signal, information indicating that it is in the jackpot gaming state, information indicating that the third time saving state related to reaching the ceiling lottery number of times has started, and information indicating that the third time saving state has ended, It is possible to output signals with different signal output modes in only one channel.
As with the jackpot 1 signal, by setting CN9 to the H output state even during execution of the jackpot game, predetermined devices (data display device 262, hall, etc.) electrically connected via the external output terminal plate 261 The information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the computer 263). That is, the function installed in the pachinko machine 10, which shifts to the time-saving state based on the number of ceiling lotteries reached, is a very special function of shifting to an advantageous game state without going through a big win. Depending on the specs of the predetermined device, there is a possibility that the shift to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating a time saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it is determined that the state has been shifted to a time saving state without a jackpot due to fraud, or an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and the output is disabled. There is a risk of being identified. Therefore, in the thirteenth control example, as the jackpot 3 signal, a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of the jackpot game but also when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, is provided. It is possible to treat the time-saving state that shifts based on reaching the number of times as a normal state regardless of the specs of the predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261 . In other words, if the signal indicating the time saving state is received without receiving the signal indicating the jackpot, even if the specification determines that it is illegal or abnormal, if the 3 jackpot signals are input as the signal indicating the jackpot, the ceiling Even when the number of times of lottery is reached, it is possible to realize a signal output mode as if a shift to the time-saving state occurred in a pseudo manner after a big win. That is, the jackpot 3 signal indicating the jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds, and the jackpot 2 signal indicating the transition to the time saving state is set to the H output state, so that the proper time saving state It can be judged as migration. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the time saving state set based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals is determined to be illegal or abnormal. In addition, in the case of a predetermined device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on the number of times the ceiling lottery has been reached, by determining the output period of the 3 jackpot signals, it is possible to determine whether the H output is based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. It is possible to distinguish whether it is the H output based on winning. Therefore, regardless of the specs of the predetermined device, it is possible to treat the transition to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times as justifiable.

From CN10 of the external output terminal plate 261, a winning detection signal indicating that the number of winning balls to be paid out has reached 10 based on the winning of game balls into various winning ports is output. This winning detection signal is constructed such that the H output continues for 0.2 seconds each time the number of winning balls to be paid out reaches 10. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on the winning detection signal.
Various security-related signals are output from CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 . More specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the output of the CN 11 is set to H for 0.2 seconds (power-on signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which the CN 11 is in H output, and if the period of H output is 0.2 seconds, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. . Also, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the output of the CN 11 is set to H for 0.4 seconds (power off signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which the CN 11 is in H output, and if the period of H output is 0.4 seconds, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered off. In the thirteenth control example, the hall computer 263 stores the game state when the power is cut off, and when it detects that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, The game state is compared with the game state when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that the game state has been changed to an advantageous game state by some illegal method, and if the game states do not match, an abnormality is notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of illegally changing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 to an advantageous game state (jackpot game state or first probability variable state).
If the power is cut off during the jackpot state (while the jackpot 1 signal is H output) and the power is turned on again, it was set to OFF (L output state) while the power was cut off. The jackpot 1 signal (CN7) becomes the H output state again. In this case, if the hall computer 263 adds the number of big wins, the actual number of big wins and the number of big wins grasped by the hall computer 263 will be different. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example, if it is determined that both the game state at the time of power-on and the game state at the time of the previous power-off are in the jackpot state, It is configured not to add the number of big wins when the power is turned on by discriminating that it is in the following big win state. Therefore, the hall computer 263 can accurately grasp the number of jackpots.
In addition, CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 is also set to the H output state when various abnormalities (magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, switch abnormality, abnormal winning, etc.) are detected in the pachinko machine 10. . When various abnormalities are detected, the output continues to be set to H until the abnormalities are resolved. The hall computer 263 can determine that an abnormality has occurred when the H output state of the CN 11 continues for more than 0.4 seconds. can be notified to Therefore, the abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10 can be resolved quickly.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, by outputting a signal according to the game situation from each of the 11 channels CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261, The provided predetermined devices (data display device 262 and hall computer 263) are configured so that the state of the game can be grasped. The data display device 262 grasps the state of the game based on various signals output from the connected pachinko machine 10, updates the display of the game history, and visually confirms the shift to an advantageous game state. can be notified. The hall computer 263 grasps the game situation based on various signals output from each pachinko machine 10, grasps the ball output rate of each pachinko machine 10, and determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity with respect to each pachinko machine 10. can
Next, with reference to FIG. 367, an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board 261 during the normal game will be described. FIG. 367 describes the signal output modes of CN4 and CN7 to CN9. As shown in FIG. 367, CN4 is set to the H output state for 1 second each time the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbols is reached until the jackpot is reached. The data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can count the number of variations of the special symbol by means of this output mode of CN4. During this period, CN7 to CN9 are kept in the L output state. Then, as shown in FIG. 367, a special pattern lottery results in a big win, and after the timing of stopping the big win fluctuation based on the big win winning, CN4 is set to the H output state for 1 second, at the start timing of the big win game. Then, CN4 is set to the L output state, and CN7 and CN9 are set to the H output state. This H output state continues until the end timing of the jackpot. Based on these outputs of CN7 and CN9, the data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can determine that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state.
Then, at the end timing of the jackpot (timing for setting the time-saving state of normal symbols after the jackpot), CN7 and CN9 are set to the L output state, and CN8 is set to the H output state. This state of H output of CN8 is maintained until it shifts to a jackpot state or shifts to a game state in which a normal state of normal symbols is set. That is, if the game state after the end of the big hit is the first probability variable state, the jackpot is won during the first probability variable state and the jackpot game is started, or the probability variable number of times has passed in the first probability variable state and the normal game The H output state is maintained until transition to state. In addition, if the game state after the end of the jackpot is the second time saving state, the jackpot is won during the second time saving state and the jackpot game is started, or the normal game is played after the number of time saving times has passed in the second time saving state. The H output state is maintained until transition to state. The data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can accurately grasp the so-called number of consecutive wins from the balance between the output mode of CN8 and the output modes of CN7 and CN9. That is, if CN7 and CN9 are switched to the H output state at the same time when CN8 is in the L output state, it is determined that the consecutive chance has occurred during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, and the consecutive chance is determined. While 1 can be added to the number of times, if the states of CN7 and CN9 remain L output, it can be determined that the continuous game has ended. Therefore, the game history of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately determined.
Furthermore, when the ceiling lottery count is reached during the normal game, CN8 is set to the H output state at the timing of transition to the third time saving state, and CN9 is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds. . In other words, by outputting an H output signal of a length (significantly shorter than the opening period of the jackpot) that cannot be output when the CN9 shifts to the jackpot state, the H output this time is triggered by the jackpot. It is possible to make the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 grasp that the signal output is not the signal output. In other words, the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 can be made to grasp that the state has shifted to the time saving state without going through the jackpot (the state has shifted to the third time saving state due to reaching the number of ceiling lotteries).

Next, with reference to FIG. 368, an example of a signal output mode at power-on will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when the power is turned on in the third time saving state (time saving state shifted based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times). As shown in FIG. 368, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the security signal (CN11) is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds to indicate the power on. In addition, when the game state at the time of power-on is the third time saving state, the output of the jackpot 2 signal (CN8) for indicating that the time saving state is in progress rises to H, indicating that it is the third time saving state. The jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for the win is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds. By these signal output modes, it is accurately notified to the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 that the game state at the time of power-on is a time-saving state (third time-saving state) shifted based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. can be notified to In other words, if the state at the time of power-on is a game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, is it the time saving state (either the first probability variable state or the second time saving state) set after the jackpot game ends? , It is possible to distinguish and notify whether it is a time saving state (third time saving state) based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals. Therefore, since the hole computer 263 can more accurately determine whether or not there is a possibility that the game state has been changed due to fraudulent activity while the power is shut off, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activity.
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 369(a). FIG. 369(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 369(a), the ROM 202 in the thirteenth control example replaces the first winning random number table 202la with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth control example (see FIG. 295(a)). A first winning random number table 202pa is provided, a variation pattern selection table 202pb is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202db, and a jackpot type selection table 202pd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202ld. It is different in that a random number table 202pe per time saving is provided instead of the random number table 202le per time saving. Moreover, it is different also in the point by which the time saving classification selection table 202lf is deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the tenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 370(a), details of the first winning random number table 202pa in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 370(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202pa in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 370(a), in the first hit random number table 202pa in the thirteenth control example, in addition to random numbers (counter values) determined to be big hits, random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits ) are also specified. Specifically, common to the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbols, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "20 to 44", and the lottery result of the small winning is defined in correspondence. ing. Of the 1000 counter values (random numbers) of ``0 to 999'' that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of counter values (random numbers) determined to be small hits is 25 of ``20 to 44''. Therefore, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/40. This small win is a kind of winning lottery result, and as described above, it is a lottery result in which a special big win opening/closing operation (specific opening/closing operation) that is particularly difficult is set in the specific winning opening 65a. By providing the result of the small winning lottery that is particularly difficult for the special big winning, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times are left until the number of times of the ceiling lottery. That is, when a specific opening/closing operation is executed (a small bonus is won), a special jackpot is generated and the value of the special lottery counter 203la is reset (remaining number of times up to ceiling lottery number of times is reset to 500). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is increased by 1 (the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number of times is subtracted by 1) as a small hit, so the ceiling lottery number of times It is possible to add a game feature that allows the player to predict the remaining number of times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the counter value (random value) determined as a big hit is the same as in the tenth control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
Next, with reference to FIG. 370(b), details of the variation pattern selection table 202pb in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 370(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202pb in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 370(b), the variation pattern selection table 202pb in the thirteenth control example selects a variation pattern according to the special symbol lottery result when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. For the normal table 202pb1, and when the special symbol lottery is executed in one of the first variable probability state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state, the variation pattern is selected according to the special symbol lottery result. It is comprised at least with the table 202pb2 for probability variation / time reduction for doing.

Details of the normal table 202pb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 370(c). FIG. 370(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202pb1. As shown in FIG. 370(c), in the normal table 202pb1, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the number of variations and the lottery results of special symbols. A range of values of the type counter CS1 is associated. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations (the value of the special lottery counter 203la) is 500 (that is, when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached), regardless of the lottery result, the entire range that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (0 198) is associated with super reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. Therefore, when the ceiling lottery frequency is reached, the variation time of 30 seconds is always set, so that the performance period for showing whether or not the ceiling lottery frequency has been reached can be surely secured.
In addition, in the number of fluctuations other than the number of ceiling lotteries, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 19", and the fluctuation time is 15 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. Normal (reach) is defined in correspondence, and super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "20 to 169", fluctuation The value of the type counter CS1 is "170 to 198", and SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.
Also, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a special hit or a small hit (that is, a small bonus), the fluctuation time as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range (0 to 198) that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take is defined in association with normal (reach) for 15 seconds. Therefore, when the small bonus is won, the variation time is always set to 15 seconds. As a result, a long variation time (30 seconds or 55 seconds) is set for a small bonus with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to suppress the expectation of the transition to the bonus or the first probability variation state. Since the winning of the small bonus can be easily notified, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.
In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol (result of judgment) is off (shorter time), that is, if the result of judgment is short-time winning, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 169" For the range, the variation pattern Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds as a fluctuation pattern for the range of "170 to 198" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when shifting to the advantageous second time-saving state, it is possible to set a relatively long variation time, so that when the variable display of the long variation time is executed, the player's big win or the time-saving state can be set. Expectations for migration can be further improved.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol (response judgment result) is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", and the variation pattern is associated with a short deviation with a variation time of 5 seconds. , and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined to be in the range of "150 to 189", and the variation pattern is defined to correspond to a variation time of 10 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined to be "190 to For the range of 196", the deviation of normal reach with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the value "197" of the variation type counter CS1, and the super reach with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern. The deviation is defined in association with the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1, and the SP reach deviation with a variation time of 55 seconds as a variation pattern is defined in association with the value "198". Therefore, when the lottery result is simply a loss, the selection rate of short loss or long loss with a short fluctuation time is extremely high. can be improved.
Although not shown in the drawings, the probability variation / time saving table 202pb2 is configured so that the selection ratio of short out and long out is higher when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost than the normal table 202pb1. It is As a result, the average variation time in the first probability variable state, the second time saving state and the third time saving state can be shortened, so that the game efficiency in the game state in which the advantageous normal pattern time saving state is set is improved. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage in the game state in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 371(a), details of the above-described jackpot type selection table 202pd will be described. This jackpot type selection table 202pd, like the jackpot type selection table 202ld (see FIG. 297) in the tenth control example, is data that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. is a table. As shown in FIG. 371(a), the jackpot type selection table 202pd in the thirteenth control example defines three types of jackpots, jackpot A16, jackpot B16, and special jackpot, as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. It is In addition, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of jackpots C16 to E16 are defined.
As shown in FIG. 371 (a), as the specified contents for the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79", "jackpot A16" is associated and defined. there is This "jackpot A16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state with a probability variable number of 80 times. That is, it is a jackpot type in which a counter value of 80 is set for both the short time counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i at the end of the jackpot. In the thirteenth control example, the first variable probability state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, so the jackpot A16 is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbols. Also, as for the number of rounds, it is the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds (advantageous in the prize sphere) among the jackpot types of the first special symbol, but the number of rounds is small compared to each jackpot of the second special symbol. It becomes a jackpot type (disadvantageous on the prize sphere). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A16" is "0 to 79 ', the ratio of determining (specifying) 'jackpot A16' as the jackpot type is 80% (80/100) when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 371(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 89" in association with "jackpot B16". This "jackpot B16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state with 100 times of time-saving times. That is, it is a jackpot type in which a counter value of 100 is set for the time-saving counter 203h at the end of the jackpot. In this thirteenth control example, the second time saving state than the first probability changing state has a lower probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot (the jackpot probability of the first probability changing state is 1/50, while the second time saving state The jackpot probability is 1/200), so even if you take into account the fact that the number of times of time saving is 20 times more, the "jackpot B16" is less advantageous than the "jackpot A16" in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends ( Unfavorable) jackpot type. In addition, in terms of the number of rounds, it is the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds (advantageous in terms of prize balls) among the jackpot types of the first special pattern, along with "jackpot A16", but each jackpot of the second special pattern Compared to , it is a jackpot type with a small number of rounds (disadvantageous on the prize sphere). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B16" is "80 to 89 , the ratio of determining (specifying) the "jackpot B16" as the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is 10% (10/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 371(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "special jackpot". This "special jackpot" has a jackpot type in which a specific opening/closing action common to the small win game (opening/closing action in which prize balls can hardly be obtained) is set as the opening/closing action of the specific winning hole 65a, and the game state after the jackpot ends. Is the jackpot type that is set to the normal state. Therefore, the "special jackpot" is configured as a jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage for the player in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot. In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a game state other than the normal state (game state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set), the game state after the special jackpot is finished is set to the second time saving state. . This shifts to a game state in which a time-saving state of normal patterns is set in a state in which one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern exist, and then a special jackpot is obtained by lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special pattern. If the configuration is such that the state is shifted to the normal state in such a case, the player may be excessively disadvantaged. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "special jackpot" is "90 to 99 , the rate at which "special jackpot" is determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 10% (10/100) when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols.
On the other hand, as the defined content for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot C16" is defined in association. This "jackpot C16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the first probability variable state with a probability variable number of 80 times, like the "jackpot A16". This "jackpot C16" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and is set to the most advantageous first probability variable state for the game state after the jackpot ends, so it is the most advantageous among all the jackpots. It is an advantageous jackpot type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C16" is "0 to 49 ', the ratio of determining (specifying) the 'jackpot C16' as the jackpot type is 50% (50/100) when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot.
In addition, "jackpot D16" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 79". This "jackpot D16" has 6 rounds, and like the "jackpot A16" and "jackpot C16", the game state after the jackpot is set to the first probability variable state with a probability variable number of 80 times. is. This ``jackpot D16'' has the second largest number of rounds after the ``jackpot C16'', and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous first probability variable state, so that the jackpot is the second most advantageous after the ``jackpot C16''. It is a type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot D16" is "50 to 79 , the ratio of determining (specifying) the "jackpot D16" as the jackpot type when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is 30% (30/100).

In addition, "jackpot E16" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot E16" has 6 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state with 100 times of time-savings, similar to the "jackpot B16". Like "jackpot D16," this "jackpot E16" is a jackpot type with the second largest number of rounds after "jackpot C16." It is a jackpot type with a low degree of advantage.
Next, with reference to Drawing 371 (b), the details of random number table 202pe per time saving mentioned above are explained. This time-saving random number table 202pe is similar to the time-saving random number table 202le (see FIG. 296(c)) in the tenth control example described above. It is a defined data table. As shown in FIG. 371(b), in this thirteenth control example, the random number (the value of the first per random number counter C1) that is determined to be short-time winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is "998,999". Two random numbers (counter values) are associated and defined. Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be short-time winning is 2, so the 13th In the example of control, the probability of being determined as the time-saving winning when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed is 1/500 (2/1000). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 371(b), the second special symbol is not associated with a random number (counter value) that is determined to be time-saving election, so the second special symbol lottery is time-saving. The possibility of winning is zero.
Next, with reference to FIG. 369(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 369(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 369(b), the RAM 203 in the thirteenth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the tenth control example described above (see FIG. 295(b)). 203pb is added. Another difference is that the first ceiling standby flag 203lb and the second ceiling standby flag 203lc are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the tenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Ceiling time saving flag 203pa is a flag for indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (third time saving state) set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times. If this ceiling time saving flag 203pa is on, it means that it is in the third time saving state, and if it is off, it means that the current gaming state is not the third time saving state. This ceiling time saving flag 203pa is set to ON when the initial state is set to OFF and the ceiling lottery number of times is reached and the third time saving state is set (see S38116A in FIG. 378). In addition, when the jackpot is won, and when the number of times of time saving (100 times) has passed without winning the jackpot during the third game state, it is set to OFF (see S8312A in FIG. 377). Since it is possible to easily identify whether it is the second time saving state or the third time saving state depending on the state of the ceiling time saving flag 203pa, in the second time saving state, the lottery probability corresponding to the high probability state of the normal pattern is normal While the lottery for the pattern can be executed, in the third time saving state, the lottery for the normal pattern can be executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the low probability state for the normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to execute a drawing of a normal symbol suitable for each game state.

The out ball counter 203pb is a counter for counting the number of game balls (out balls) entering the out port 66 . The initial value of the out-ball counter 203pb is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time an out-ball is detected (S142A in FIG. 381). Also, when the value of the out-ball counter 203pb is updated to 10 (10 out-balls are detected), the value is cleared to 0 (S144A in FIG. 381). Every time the value of the out-ball counter 203pb reaches 10, an out-ball detection signal (CN6) can be output from the external output terminal board 261. 10 can be accurately identified.
Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 372(a). FIG. 372(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 372 (a), the ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example is, with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the tenth control example described above (see FIG. 299 (a)), a holding mode selection table 222pa and a time saving suggestion The difference is that the effect selection table 222pb is added. It is also different in that the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 2221a and the ceiling reaching effect selection table 2221b are deleted.
First, with reference to FIG. 373, details of the above-described holding mode selection table 222pa will be described. This holding mode selection table 222pa, when detecting a new start winning, according to the look-ahead results of various counter values obtained based on the start winning, the number of holding balls indicating the number of held balls increased due to the start winning. It is a data table referred to in order to select the display mode of a design. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the holding mode selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 373, this reservation mode selection table 222pa is, for each look-ahead result (variation type) based on various counter values (random numbers) acquired based on the new start winning, the display mode of the number of pending ball symbols. The range of the determination value (the value of the effect counter 223f) that is determined when each of the six types of display modes (see FIG. 362(a)) that can be set as is selected is defined in association with the range.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 373, the variation type (prefetch result) is defined as "SP reach hit", the value of the effect counter 223f is "normal hold" for the range of "0 to 4" The display mode (default display mode) is defined in association with the value of the production counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", and the display mode of "change 1" (both the expectation of the jackpot and the expectation of time reduction. A display mode that suggests that both are low) is defined in association with the value of the production counter 223f in the range of "20 to 44", and a display mode of "change 2" (medium jackpot expectation, time saving A display mode that suggests that the expectation is low) is defined in association, and the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "45 to 84", and the display mode of "change 3" (high expectation of jackpot, time saving A display mode that suggests that the expectation is low) is defined in association with the value of the production counter 223f in the range of "85 to 89", and the display mode of "change 4" (low expectation of jackpot, time saving display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high) is associated and defined, and the value of the production counter 223f is defined in the range of "90 to 99", the display mode of "change 5" (transition to jackpot or time saving state display mode in which any one of is determined) is associated and defined. Since the production counter 223f can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the ratio of each display mode to be set when the look-ahead result is "SP reach hit" is 5% for "normal hold" and 5% for "change 1” is 15%, “change 2” is 25%, “change 3” is 40%, “change 4” is 5%, and “change 5” is 10%. In other words, when the start winning corresponding to "SP reach hit" is detected, the ratio of "change 2" and "change 3" to be selected is relatively high, while "normal hold" and "change 4" are selected. Relatively low selection rate.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 373, the display mode of "normal hold" for the range of "0 to 9" for the value of the production counter 223f as the specified content for the fluctuation type (prefetch result) "super reach hit" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "10 to 29", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "30 to 59" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f from "60 to 89", When the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "90 to 93", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "94 to 99", the display mode of "change 5” is associated with and defined. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "super reach hit", the percentage of each display mode set is 10% for "normal hold", 20% for "change 1", 30% for "change 2", and 30% for "change 3". " is 30%, "Change 4" is 4%, and "Change 5" is 6%. In other words, when the start winning corresponding to "super reach hit" is detected, the ratio of selecting "change 1", "change 2" and "change 3" is relatively high, while "change 4" is Relatively low selection rate. In addition, the selection rate of "Normal hold" and "Change 1" is higher than "SP reach hit".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 373, as a specified content for the variation type (prefetch result) "normal reach hit", the value of the production counter 223f is in the range "0 to 19", the display mode of "normal hold" The display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the range of "20 to 44" in which the value of the effect counter 223f is defined, and the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "45 to 79". , the display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "80 to 96", the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and the effect The display mode of "change 4" is defined in association with the value "97" of the counter 223f, and the display mode of "change 5" is defined for the range of the value of the effect counter 223f "98, 99". are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "normal reach hit", the percentage of each display mode set is 20% for "normal hold", 25% for "change 1", 35% for "change 2", and "change 3". is 17%, "change 4" is 1%, and "change 5" is 2%. In other words, when the start winning corresponding to "normal reach hit" is detected, the selection ratio of "normal hold", "change 1", "change 2" compared to "sp reach hit" and "super reach hit" becomes higher, and the selection rate of "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5" becomes lower.
In addition, as shown in Figure 373, the variation type (look-ahead result) is the specified content for "SP reach time saving", the value of the production counter 223f is the range of "0 to 4", the display mode of "normal hold" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "20 to 44" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range where the value of the effect counter 223f is "45 to 64", When the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "65 to 89", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "90 to 99", the display mode of "change 5” is associated with and defined. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "SP reach time saving", the percentage of each display mode set is 5% for "normal hold", 15% for "change 1", 25% for "change 2", and "change 3 " is 20%, "change 4" is 25%, and "change 5" is 10%. That is, when the start winning corresponding to the "SP reach time saving" is detected, the selection ratio of "change 4" is significantly higher than when the starting winning corresponding to the hit variation is detected.
In addition, as shown in Figure 373, the variation type (look-ahead result) is the specified content for "super reach time saving", the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 9" for the range of "normal pending" display mode is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "10 to 29", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "30 to 64" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f from "65 to 79", When the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "80 to 93", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "94 to 99", the display mode of "change 5” is associated with and defined. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "super reach time saving", the percentage of each display mode set is "normal hold" 10%, "change 1" 20%, "change 2" 35%, "change 3 ' is 15%, 'change 4' is 14%, and 'change 5' is 6%. That is, even when the start winning corresponding to the "super reach time saving" is detected, the selection ratio of "variation 4" is higher than when the starting winning corresponding to the hit variation is detected.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 373, the display mode of "normal hold" for the range of "0 to 9" for the value of the production counter 223f as the specified contents for the fluctuation type (prefetch result) "SP reach out" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "10 to 39", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "40 to 79" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f from "80 to 98", The display mode of "change 4" is defined in association with the value "99" of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated with the display mode of "change 5". Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "SP reach out", the ratio of each display mode to be set is 10% for "normal hold", 30% for "change 1", 40% for "change 2", and 40% for "change 3 ' is 19%, 'change 4' is 1%, and 'change 5' is 0%. In other words, when the start winning corresponding to "SP reach out" is detected, the selection ratio of "change 3" is lower than when the starting prize corresponding to SP reach hit or SP reach time reduction is detected, "Normal The rate of selection of "Hold" and "Change 1" increases. Also, "Change 5" is no longer selected. Therefore, when it develops to SP reach, if the display mode of the pending ball number pattern is "normal hold" or "change 1", the expectation of winning is relatively low, while at "change 3" In some cases, the odds of winning are relatively high. Also, if it is "variation 5", either a big win or a time-saving design is decided.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 373, the display mode of "normal hold" for the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the production counter 223f as the specified contents for the fluctuation type (prefetch result) "out of super reach" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "20 to 74", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "75 to 98" The display mode of "variation 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "variation 3" is defined in association with the value "99" of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, the display modes of "change 4" and "change 5" are not associated with the value of the effect counter 223f. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "out of super reach", the percentage of each display mode set is 20% for "normal hold", 55% for "change 1", 24% for "change 2", and 24% for "change 3". ' is 1%, and 'Change 4' and 'Change 5' are 0%. In other words, when the starting prize corresponding to "super reach out" is detected, the selection ratio of "change 3" is lower than when the starting prize corresponding to the super reach hit or the super reach time reduction is detected, and the "normal The rate of selection of "Hold" and "Change 1" increases. Also, "variation 4" and "variation 5" are no longer selected. Therefore, when it develops to super reach, if the display mode of the pending ball number pattern is "normal hold" or "change 1", the degree of expectation to be hit is relatively low, while "change 3" In some cases, the odds of winning are relatively high. Also, if it is "variation 5", either a big win or a time-saving design is decided.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 373, the fluctuation type (prefetching result) is defined as "normal reach out" and "normal reach small hit". The display mode of "suspension" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "50 to 94", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of " The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". On the other hand, the display modes of "Change 3", "Change 4", and "Change 5" are not associated with the value of the effect counter 223f. Therefore, when the look-ahead results are "normal reach off" and "normal reach small hit", the ratio of each display mode is set to 50% for "normal hold", 45% for "change 1", and 5 for "change 2". %, "Change 3", "Change 4", and "Change 5" are 0%. In other words, when detecting a starting prize corresponding to "normal reach out" and "normal reach small hit", "normal hold" or "change 1 ” is higher. In addition, "variation 3", "variation 4", and "variation 5" are not selected. Therefore, when the winning of a small bonus is announced as one of "change 3" to "change 5", it is determined that the small bonus was a special jackpot.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 373, as the specified content for "super reach out" associated with the fluctuation type (prefetch result) reaching the ceiling lottery number, the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 39" for the range of " The display mode of "Normal Suspension" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "40 to 49", the display mode of "Change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f. The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range of "50 to 53", and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f of "54". , and the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "55 to 84", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in association, and the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "85 to 99", The display mode of "change 5" is associated and defined. If the lottery result of the special pattern of the ceiling lottery number is out (moves to the 3rd time saving state), it becomes a hit (does not move to the 3rd time saving state) (i.e., variation type per super reach ), the selection rate of "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5" is significantly higher. For this reason, for the player who expects to shift to the third time saving state, the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the special pattern lottery of the number of times of the ceiling lottery is "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5".

In this way, in the thirteenth control example, by determining the display mode of the reserved number of ball symbols according to the look-ahead result based on the start winning, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for big wins and the degree of reduction in working hours. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the details of the time saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb described above will be described. This time-saving suggestive effect selection table 222pb is a data table that defines the execution ratio of the suggestive effect (see FIGS. 291(a) and (b)) suggesting transition to the time-saving state for each of various conditions. As shown in FIG. 374, when the value of the special lottery number counter 223lc is 496 to 500, regardless of the winning situation of the small bonus, the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 59". Suggestion mode of time saving suggestion (strong)" is defined in correspondence, and suggestion mode of "time saving suggestion (weak)" is defined in correspondence with the range of effect counter 223f of "60 to 89". On the other hand, the range of "90 to 99" of the effect counter 223f is not associated with any suggestive mode. Therefore, in each variable display effect of the number of ceiling lotteries from 4 times before reaching the number of ceiling lotteries, "time saving suggestion (strong)" (see FIG. 281 (b)) occurs at a rate of 60%, and 30% "Time saving suggestion (weak)" (see FIG. 281(a)) occurs at a rate of .
Also, if the value of the special drawing lottery counter 223lc is a value other than 496 to 500 (the number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling lottery number is 5 times or more), the number of lotteries after the previous bonus, and The selection ratio of the suggested mode varies according to the number of times of lottery after the end of the small bonus whose timing is the oldest among the 500 most recent lotteries of special symbols. Specifically, either the number of lotteries after the previous bonus or the number of lotteries after the end of the small bonus, which is the oldest among the last 500 special symbol lotteries, is between 496 and 500. If it is within the range (that is, under the situation where the number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling lottery number from the player's point of view may be within 4 times), the special symbol lottery result "probable variable hit" or "time saving For "hit", the value of the production counter 223f is defined to correspond to "0 to 4" with the suggestion mode of "suggestion of time saving (weak)", and the suggestion mode is not associated with "5 to 99". . In other words, in the case of winning a bonus, a “time saving suggestion (weak)” occurs at a rate of 5%.
In addition, the value of the production counter 223f is defined in association with the value of the production counter 223f to be ``0 to 49'' and ``suggestion of time reduction (strong)'' for the lottery result of the special symbol, ``suggestion of time reduction (strong)'', and ``suggestion of time reduction (strong)'' to ``50 to 74''. (weak)” is defined in association with “75 to 99”, and no suggestive mode is associated with “75-99”. In other words, in the case of winning the short working hours, "suggestion of short working hours (strong)" occurs at a rate of 50%, and "suggestive short working hours (weak)" occurs at a rate of 25%. In addition, for lottery results other than these (small bonus or loss), the value of the production counter 223f is defined in association with "0 to 4" and "suggestion of time saving (strong)", and to "5 to 49". "Working time reduction suggestion (weak)" is defined in association with "50 to 99", and no suggestion mode is associated with it. In other words, in the case of a small bonus or a loss, "time saving suggestion (strong)" occurs at a rate of 5%, and "time saving suggestion (weak)" occurs at a rate of 45%.

On the other hand, both the number of lotteries after the last bonus and the number of lotteries after the end of the small bonus, the timing of which was the oldest among the last 500 special symbol lotteries, are within the range of 496 to 500. In the case where it is not (that is, in a situation where there is no possibility that the number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling lottery number from the player's point of view is within 4 times), the lottery result of the special pattern is "probable variable hit" or "short time hit" On the other hand, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 4", the suggestion mode of "suggestion of time saving (weak)" is defined in correspondence, and "5 to 99" is not associated with the suggestion mode. In other words, in the case of winning a bonus, a “time saving suggestion (weak)” occurs at a rate of 5%.
In addition, the value of the production counter 223f is defined in association with "0 to 24" and "suggestion of time reduction (strong)" for the lottery result of the special symbol "suggestion of time reduction", and "25 to 49" is defined as "suggestion of time reduction". (weak)” is defined in association with “50 to 99”, and no suggestive mode is associated with “50 to 99”. In other words, in the case of winning the short working hours, the "suggestion of short working hours (strong)" occurs at a rate of 25%, and the "suggestive short working hours (weak)" occurs at a rate of 25%. In addition, for lottery results other than these (small bonus or loss), the value of the production counter 223f "0" is defined in association with "time saving suggestion (strong)", and "1 to 4" is defined as "time saving suggestion (weak)” is defined in association with “5 to 99”, and no suggestive mode is associated with “5 to 99”. In other words, in the case of a small bonus or a loss, "time saving suggestion (strong)" occurs at a rate of 1%, and "time saving suggestion (weak)" occurs at a rate of 4%.
Thus, in the thirteenth control example, even if the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number is 5 times or more, there is a possibility that the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number is less than 4 times from the player's point of view. The ratio of selection of suggestion mode at the time of miss and small bonus is greatly different between under the situation and under the situation where there is no possibility of less than 4 times. That is, in a situation where there is a possibility that the number of times remaining until the ceiling lottery number is four or less from the player's point of view, the suggestive mode is likely to occur. By constructing in this way, even if there are five or more remaining times until the ceiling lottery number is actually reached, the player can have a sense of expectation for reaching the ceiling lottery number, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. Interest can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 372(b), details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 372(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 372(b), the RAM 223 in the thirteenth control example has a bonus-to-bonus counter 223pa and a bonus history storage, which is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth control example (see FIG. 299(b)). The difference is that an area 223pb, a look-ahead suppression flag 223pc, a normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd, and an interlocking production flag 223pe are added.

The between-bonus counter 223pa is a counter that counts the number of special symbol lotteries that are executed after the bonus (either the big win or the small win) ends. This counter between bonuses 223pa is updated by adding one value each time the value of the special lottery counter 203la is notified from the main controller 110 (see S9015A in FIG. 389), and winning a big hit or a small hit is cleared to 0 (see S4724A in FIG. 391 and S4753A in FIG. 392). In synchronization with the between-bonus counter 223pa, the display number of times of lottery between bonuses in the normal state is updated. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of times remaining until the number of times of the ceiling lottery, so it is possible to add a game feature of predicting the number of times remaining until the number of times of the ceiling lottery. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
The bonus history storage area 223pb is a storage area for storing information indicating the winning history of bonuses (regular bonuses and small bonuses) within the range of special symbol lotteries within the last 500 times. This bonus history storage area 223pb stores information about the winning bonus each time a big win or small win (bonus) is won (see S4726A and S4727A in FIG. 391 and S4754A in FIG. 392). In addition, every time it is notified by a command that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la has been updated on the main controller 110 side, the data is updated according to the updated counter value (see S9015A in FIG. 389). In the normal state, the number of lotteries after the end of the normal bonus or the small bonus can be determined from the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb, and the number of lotteries (normal In the situation where the special jackpot is won once or more after the bonus, the number of lotteries just before the 500th lottery after the normal bonus and the number of lotteries just before the 500th lottery after the small bonus) can be executed to suggest the possibility of the number of ceiling lotteries just around the corner. . Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
The look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is a flag indicating whether or not to suppress execution of a look-ahead effect such as a pending change effect when the start winning of the first special symbol is detected. If the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on, it means that the look-ahead effect should be prohibited, and if it is off, it means that the look-ahead effect is allowed. This look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set to ON when it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times is reached by look-ahead (the transition to the third time saving state is confirmed) (see S4428A in FIG. 390), and when the jackpot is won, And it is set to off at the end of the third time saving state (see S9013A in FIG. 389). By prohibiting the look-ahead performance of the first special pattern when the shift to the third time-saving state is confirmed, the lottery of the first special pattern is dared to be executed without hitting to the right after shifting to the third time-saving state. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to obtain the material for determining whether it is better to start the lottery for the second special symbol without executing the lottery for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large difference in the degree of advantage due to the game method between a player with deep knowledge and a player with little knowledge.
The normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd is a timer for counting the fluctuation time in the normal pattern fluctuation display executed in the main control device 110 . This normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd, when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the main control device 110 and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined according to the lottery result is notified by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, the notification A timer value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation pattern is set (see S4252A in FIG. 393). During the execution of the ceiling lottery number of times (500th) variable display, the effect mode of the variable display effect being executed is varied (written replacement) is determined. That is, with reference to the value of the general pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd at a specific timing during fluctuation (for example, 5 seconds before the special symbol fluctuation time passes), a relatively long period after the special pattern fluctuation ends (for example , 5 seconds or more) When it is determined that the variable display of normal symbols is continued, the timing of informing the transition to the third time saving state is delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand during the variable display of the normal symbols in which the normal electric accessory 640a cannot be released, and wastefully consuming game balls. can.

The interlocking production flag 223pe is a flag indicating whether or not the data display device interlocking production is set. If this interlocking effect flag 223pe is on, it means that the data display device interlocking effect (jackpot notification, time saving effect) is set, and if it is off, the data display device interlocking effect is set. indicates that it is not This interlocking effect flag 223pe receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and every time a variation display mode is determined according to the variation pattern command, the state is updated according to the determined variation display mode. (See S34520A in FIG. 394). That is, when the variable display mode linked to the data display device is determined, it is set to ON, and when it is not determined, it is set to OFF.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 375 to 385. FIG. Specifically, in the thirteenth control example, the contents of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 375) and start-up processing (see FIG. 384) are changed from the tenth control example (first control example). differ. Since other configurations are the same as those of the tenth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 375, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 375 is a flow chart showing the contents of this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 375) in the thirteenth control example, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) in the tenth control example (and the first control example), special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 303 ) is changed to a special symbol variation process (see FIG. 376), and the outer end output setting process (S112A) is executed after the through gate passing process (S107) is completed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.), the process is for controlling the output of the signal to be externally output from the external output terminal board 261 . Other processing is the same as the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) in the tenth control example (and the first control example), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 376, the special symbol variation process (S111A), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 375) in the thirteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 376 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process (S111A). Of the special symbol variation processing, S201 to S207, S210 to S218, S220, and S30219, respectively, in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 302) in the tenth control example, S201 to S207, S210 to S218, The same processing as each processing of S220 and S30219 is executed.

Also, in the special symbol variation processing (S111A) in the thirteenth control example, when the processing of S207 or S213 is completed, the special symbol determination logic 13 in the tenth control example (see S30251 in FIG. 302) and special symbol variation pattern selection Instead of processing (see S30252 in FIG. 302), special design determination processing (S231A) and special design variation pattern selection processing (S232A) are executed. Although not shown, the special symbol determination process (S231A) in the thirteenth control example is different from the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 303) in the tenth control example described above, and the ceiling determination process (S38051) is deleted. The only difference is that Note that, in the thirteenth control example, ceiling determination processing corresponding to the ceiling determination processing (S38051) in the tenth control example is configured to be executed in update processing (S233A), which will be described later. Also, although not shown, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S232A) in the thirteenth control example is different from the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 306) in the tenth control example described above. The data table referred to in is replaced with the data table for the thirteenth control example. That is, the difference is that the jackpot type selection table 202pd is referred to instead of the jackpot type selection table 202ld, and the variation pattern selection table 202pb is referred to instead of the variation pattern selection table 202lb. In addition, in the thirteenth control example, there is only one type of time saving type (time saving pattern of 100 times of time saving), so that each process of S8209 and S38253 is deleted.
Further, in the special symbol variation process (S111A) in the thirteenth control example, when it is determined in the process of S217 that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S217: No), the update in the tenth control example Instead of processing (see S253 in FIG. 302) and working hours setting processing (see S30254 in FIG. 302), update processing (S233A) and working hours setting processing (S234A) are executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of this update process (S233A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. Details of the time saving setting process (S234A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the special symbol variation process (S111A) of this control example, after executing the process of S220, the symbol stop signal is output from CN4 of the external output terminal board 261 for 1 second (the output of CN4 is set to H output for 1 second). is set (S235A), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 377, update processing (S233A), which is one processing in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 376) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this thirteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 377 is a flow chart showing the contents of this update process (S233A).

In each of S8301 to S8307 of this update process (S233A), the same processes as S8301 to S8307 of the update process (see FIG. 108) in the tenth control example (and second control example) are executed. be done. Further, in the update process (S233A) in the thirteenth control example, after executing the process of S8306, it is determined whether or not the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is on (S8311A), and if the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is on When it is determined (S8311A: Yes), the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is set to OFF (S8312A), and then the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S8313A), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S8307. On the other hand, in the processing of S8311A, if it is determined that the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is not on (that is, it is off) (S8311A: No), the processing of S8312A and S8313A is skipped, and the processing proceeds directly to S8307 and migrate.
In addition, in the update process (see FIG. 377) in the thirteenth control example, after the process of S8307 ends, the ceiling determination process is executed (S8314A), and this process ends. This ceiling determination process (S8314A), similar to the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 304) in the tenth control example described above, updates the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, and counter value (lottery It is a process for setting the third time saving state when reaching the number of times). This ceiling determination process (S8314A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 378 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process (S8314A).
In the processes of S38101 to S38105 of the ceiling determination process (S8314A), the same processes as the processes of S38101 to S38105 of the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 304) in the tenth control example are executed. Further, in the ceiling determination process (S8314A) in the thirteenth control example, in the process of S38104, when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), 100 is set to the time saving counter 203h Then (S38111A), set the data indicating the third time saving state in the gaming state storage area 203g (S38112A), clear the information on this time saving lottery (S38113A), and show the information indicating the third time saving state and the number of times of time saving Set the state command including the information (S38114A), and clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38115A). After the processing of S38115A, turn on the ceiling time saving flag 203pa (S38116A), set to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S38117A), and end this processing.
That is, in the tenth control example described above, it is determined whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached at the start of the fluctuation, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, the third time saving state is set when the fluctuation is stopped. However, in this thirteenth control example, the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 378) is executed when the fluctuation stops, and the determination of whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and the setting of the third time saving state are collectively performed. It is configured. By configuring in this way, control processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 379, the time saving setting process (S234A), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 376) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 379 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving setting process (S234A).
In this time saving setting process (S234A), in each process of S8351 to S8354, the same process as each process of S8351 to S8354 of the time saving setting process (see FIG. 307) in the tenth control example is executed. Moreover, in the time saving setting process (S234A) in the thirteenth control example, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is 100 (S8361A). In the process of S8361A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 100 (S8361A: Yes), the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 378) executed before this time saving setting process (see FIG. 379) Ceiling Since it means that the third time saving state has been set on the basis of reaching the lottery number of times, this processing is terminated as it is in order to avoid setting the time saving state redundantly due to the time saving winning. On the other hand, in the process of S8361A, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 100 (S8361A: No), the process proceeds to S8351.
Next, referring to FIG. 380(a), outer end output setting processing (S112A) which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 375) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example. explain. FIG. 380(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this outer edge output setting process (S112A). In this outer end output setting process (S112A), first, it is determined whether or not various abnormalities have occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and an abnormality (error) is indicated from the external output terminal board 261 when an abnormality has occurred. Error signal processing for outputting the signal to the outside is executed (S121A), then the number of out-balls detected is monitored, and an out-ball detection signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 for each specific number of out-balls. Detection signal processing is executed (S122A). When the out-ball detection signal processing (S122A) is completed, next, the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is monitored, and when the start winning is detected, the start entrance signal is sent to the external output terminal. Start port signal processing for external output from plate 261 is executed (S123A), then the open/close state of inner frame 12 and front frame 14 is monitored, and a signal indicating the open/close state is output from external output terminal plate 261. An open signal process for opening the door is executed (S124A), and the process ends. A detailed description of each process will be given later with reference to FIG. 380(b) and FIGS.
Next, referring to FIG. 380(b), error signal processing (S121A), which is one of the outer end output setting processing (see FIG. 380), will be described. FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing error signal processing (S121A). In this error signal processing (S121A), first, it is determined whether or not various errors (magnetic anomaly, radio anomaly, switch anomaly, abnormal prize winning, etc.) are detected (S131A), and if various errors are detected (S131A: Yes), then the output of the security signal (CN11) is started (S132A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S131A, when various errors are not detected (S131A: No), this process is terminated as it is. When various errors are detected, the security signal continues to be output indefinitely, so that the hole computer 263 can continue to report the occurrence of the error. Therefore, the occurrence of various errors can be reliably recognized by hall staff and the like, so that various errors can be eliminated quickly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 381, out-ball detection signal processing (S122A), which is part of the outer edge output setting processing (see FIG. 380), will be described. FIG. 381 is a flow chart showing out ball detection signal processing (S122A). This out ball detection signal processing (S122A) is a process for monitoring the number of out balls detected and setting the output of the out ball detection signal (CN2) each time a specific number of out balls are detected.
In the out-ball detection signal processing (S122A), first, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball (out-ball) entering the out port 66 (S141A). : Yes), 1 is added to the value of the out ball counter 203pb (S142A). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the out-ball counter 203pb after addition is 10 (S143A), and if it is determined to be 10 (S143A: Yes), the value of the out-ball counter 203pb is set to 0. Thus, the out-ball counter 203pb is initialized (S144A), and it is determined whether or not the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A).
In the processing of S145A, if it is determined that the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A: Yes), the H output period of the out-ball detection signal (CN6) currently being output ends, and a predetermined After the period (0.2 seconds) has passed, processing for setting the output of the out-ball detection signal corresponding to the tenth out-ball detected this time is performed. Specifically, the remaining period until the out-ball detection signal (CN6), which is currently set to the H output state, changes to the L output state is obtained (S147A). Then, based on the obtained remaining period, a delay time is set for the out-ball detection signal to be output corresponding to the tenth out-ball detected this time (S148A), and this process is finished. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the out-ball detection signal (CN6) during H output becomes L output state is 0.1 second, then the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is set to H output state. A delay time of 0.3 seconds (0.1 second remaining period of H output state + 0.2 second of L output period) is set as the delay time until . By setting the L period of 0.2 seconds in this way, even if out balls are continuously detected in a short period of time, a predetermined number of times the out ball detection signal (CN2) is set to the H output state is determined. A device (hall computer 263, etc.) can accurately grasp this.
On the other hand, in the process of S145A, if it is determined that the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is not in the H output state (that is, it is in the L output state) (S145A: No), the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is set to 0. (S146A), and the process is terminated. Even if the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is in the L output state (S145A: No), if it is within 0.2 seconds after it was set to the L output state, the L output state will be changed to 0. (2) After continuing for 2 seconds, the H output state is set. In this way, by ensuring an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if an out ball is continuously detected in a short period of time, the out ball detection signal (CN6) will not cause an H output. A predetermined device electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 such as the hall computer 263 can accurately grasp the number of times set in the state.

If an out ball is not detected in the process of S141A (S141A: No), and if the value of the out ball counter 203pb is less than 10 in the process of S143A (S143A: No), the process proceeds to S149A. to move to. In the process of S149A, it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S149A).
When it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S149A: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S149A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has passed (S150A). If it is determined that it is not (S150A: No), this process is terminated. In the process of S150A, if it is determined that the delay period has passed (S150A: Yes), the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state (S151A), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the start opening signal processing (S123A), which is one of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 380(a)), will be described. FIG. 382 is a flow chart showing the starting port signal processing (S123A). This starting hole signal processing (S123A) monitors starting winnings to each starting hole (first ball hole 64, second ball hole 640), and generates a starting hole signal (CN5) each time a starting winning is detected. This is the processing for setting the output of .
In the starting hole signal processing (S123A), first, it is determined whether or not winning (starting winning) to the first ball hole 64 or the second ball hole 640 is detected (S161A). Specifically, the detection information of various switches stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 375) is read, and the winning to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is performed. It is determined whether detection information indicating is stored.

In the processing of S161A, if it is determined that the winning to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected (S161A: Yes), then the state of the starting gate signal (CN5) is the state of H output. (S162A), and if it is determined that it is in the H output state (S162A: Yes), the H output period of the starting signal (CN5) currently being output ends, and the predetermined period ( After 0.2 second) has passed, a process for setting the output of the start signal corresponding to the start winning detected this time is performed. Specifically, the remaining period until the starting signal (CN5), which is currently set to the H output state, changes to the L output state is acquired (S164A). Then, based on the acquired remaining period, a delay time is set for the starting opening signal to be output in response to the starting winning detected this time (S165A), and this process is finished. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the starting signal (CN5) during H output becomes L output state is 0.1 second, then the starting signal (CN5) is set to H output state. 0.3 seconds (remaining period of H output state: 0.1 seconds + L output period of 0.2 seconds) is set as a delay time to. In this way, by setting the L period of 0.2 seconds, even if the start winning is detected continuously in a short period of time, the number of times the start signal (CN5) is set to the H output state is counted by the hall computer. 263 or the like, which are electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10, can be accurately grasped.
On the other hand, in the process of S162A, if it is determined that the starter signal (CN5) is not in the H output state (that is, it is in the L output state) (S162A: No), the starter signal (CN5) is 0.2. The setting is made so that the H output state is set for a second (S163A), and this processing ends. Even if the start signal (CN5) is in the L output state (S162A: No), if it is within 0.2 seconds after setting to the L output state, the L output state is changed to 0.2 sec. After continuing for 2 seconds, the H output state is set. In this way, by securing an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if the start winning is continuously detected in a short period of time, the start signal (CN5) is in the H output state. The external device can accurately grasp the set number of times.
In the process of S161A, if the start winning is not detected (S161A: No), it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S166A). When it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has passed (S167A), and the delay period has passed. If it is determined that it is not (S167A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S167A that the delay period has elapsed (S167A: Yes), the starting port signal (CN5) is set to the H output state (S168A), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 383, the open signal processing (S124A), which is one of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 380(a)), will be described. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing open signal processing (S124A). As described above, this open signal processing (S124A) is processing for setting the output of the inner frame open signal (CN2) indicating the open/closed state of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 and the door open signal (CN3). .

In this open signal processing (S124A), first, it is determined whether or not the inner frame 12 is opened (S171A). ) is set to the H output state (S172A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S171A, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is opened (S171A: No), then it is determined whether or not it is detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A). If it is determined that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: Yes), the inner frame open signal (CN2), which has been set to H output state, is set to L output state (S174A), and this processing ends. do.
In the processing of S173A, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: No), then it is determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is opened (S175A). As a result of the process of S175A, when it is determined that the front frame 14 has been opened (S175A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3) is set to the H output state (S176A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the front frame 14 is opened (S175A: No), then it is determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A), and it is determined that it is closed. If so (S177A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3), which has been set to H output state, is set to L output state (S178A), and this process ends. Moreover, in the process of S177A, when it is not detected that the front frame 14 was closed (S177A:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example, the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 380(a)) is executed every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 375), Information corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to a predetermined device such as a hall computer 263 or the like. A predetermined device such as the hall computer 263 can grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10 in real time based on the information output from the external output terminal version 261 . As a result, it is possible to accurately manage the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10, the operation status, the presence or absence of anomalies, fraud, and the like.
Next, referring to FIG. 384, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 384 is a flow chart showing the contents of this start-up process.

Among the start-up processes, S1701-S1714, S31701 and S31702 are the same processes as S1701-S1714, S31701 and S31702 of the start-up process (see FIG. 309) in the tenth control example. be done. Further, in the start-up process of this control example, after executing the process of S1709, various data indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on (at the time of start-up) are output from the external output terminal board 261 to a predetermined device. A start-up signal output process is executed (S1721A), and the process proceeds to S31701. The details of this start-up signal output processing (S1721A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing signal output processing at startup (S1721A).
In the start-up signal output processing (S1721A), first, the security signal (CN11) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S1731A), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. (S1732A). In the process of S1732A, if it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203k is on (S1732A: Yes), it means that the jackpot game is currently being executed, so the jackpot 1 signal (CN7), the jackpot 3 signal ( CN9) is started to notify the predetermined device that the jackpot game is being executed (S1733A), and the process proceeds to S1734A. On the other hand, in the process of S1732A, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1732A: No), it means that the jackpot game is not being executed (normal game is being played). Therefore, the process of S1733A is skipped and the process proceeds to S1734A.
In the process of S1734A, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 1 or more (S1734A), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S1734A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. On the other hand, in the process of S1734A, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203i is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S1734A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more. However (S1735A), if it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than 1 (that is, it is 0) (S1735A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1735A, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S1735A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. One of the value of the variable probability counter 203i and the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (that is, it is a game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol) In the processing of S1736A executed when it is determined, 2 signal (CN8) is started to be output (S1736A). When the process of S1736A ends, then it is determined whether the ceiling time reduction flag 203pa is on (S1737A), and the ceiling time reduction flag 203pa is on (that is, the current is set based on the ceiling lottery number of times reached 3rd time saving state) (S1737A: Yes), set so as to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S1738A), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S1737A, when it is determined that the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1737A: No), the process of S1738A is skipped and this process ends. By configuring to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds only when it is in the third time-saving state in the processing of S1738A, the game state at the time of turning on the power (at the time of start-up) is set after the jackpot ends. It is possible to make a prescribed device easily grasp whether it is the time saving state of the normal pattern or the time saving state of the normal pattern set based on the reaching of the number of ceiling lottery times.
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 386 to 394, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. In this thirteenth control example, the contents of the main process are changed from the tenth control example described above, and the contents of the normal mode effect setting process, which is one process of the effect setting process (see FIG. 314). They differ in that they have been changed, and are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that each of the above-described control examples and elements that are the same as those explained in each control example are not explained in detail, and the contents explained in each of the above-described control examples and each control example are omitted. It is adapted. In addition, the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are naturally applied to the thirteenth control example, and the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are also applied. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the thirteenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 386, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 386 is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process. In the main process (see FIG. 386) in the thirteenth control example, the main process (see FIG. 58) in the tenth control example (and the first control example) is replaced with the effect update process (see FIG. 58). The only differences are that update processing (S4121A) is executed, and command determination processing (S4122A) is executed instead of command determination processing (see FIG. 58). Other processes are the same as those of the tenth control example (and the first control example), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 387, the rendering update process (S4121A), which is one of the main processes, will be described. FIG. 387 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4121A). In this effect update process (S4121A), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display effect of the special symbols is being executed (S4151A), and if it is determined that the variable display effect is not being executed (S4151A: No) , the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display effect is being executed (S4151A: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is 500 (S4152A), and the special figure lottery number counter If it is determined that the value of 223lc is not 500 (S4152A: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol notified in the variable display effect currently being executed is a time-saving symbol (S4153A). ). In the processing of S4153A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure is not the time saving design (S4153A: No), this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S4153, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display effect being executed is a time saving pattern (S4153A: Yes), and in the process of S4152A, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 If it is determined that there is (S4152A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result corresponding to a big hit (S4154A). In the process of S4154A, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to a big win (S4154A: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4154A, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a lottery result corresponding to a big win (S4154A: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the variable display effect being executed is 5 seconds. (S4155A), when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure is not 5 seconds (S4155A: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S4155A, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the variable display effect being executed is 5 seconds (S4155A: Yes), whether the remaining variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds or more It is determined by referring to the value of the normal pattern variation time timer 223pd (S4156A), and when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the normal pattern is not 10 seconds or more (S4156A: No), this process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, in the process of S4156A, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds or more (S4156A: Yes), the variable display effect currently being executed is in the variable display mode accompanied by the display device interlocking effect. It is determined whether or not there is (S4157A), and if it is determined that it is not a variable display mode with a display device interlocking effect (S4157A: No), the variable display mode is rewritten to a display device interlocking time saving effect (S4158A), the effect period of the time-saving activation inciting effect is set to the remaining variation time of the normal symbol (S4159A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4157A, when it is determined that the variable display effect being executed is the variable display mode accompanied by the display device-linked effect (S4157A: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Thus, in the present thirteenth control example, for a relatively long time of 5 seconds or more after shifting to the time saving state, the variation of the normal pattern continues to be executed (even if hitting to the right, the second ball entrance 640 When it is determined 5 seconds before the end of the fluctuation that the period in which the game ball cannot be entered continues for a relatively long time, the timing of notifying the shift to the time saving state is delayed. In other words, after the state in which the benefit of the time saving state is actually obtained (after it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right), the configuration for executing the time saving activation effect and As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from throwing to the right unnecessarily while the normal symbols are fluctuating.
Next, with reference to FIG. 388, the command determination process (S4122A), which is one process of the main process, will be described. FIG. 388 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4122A). In this command determination process (S4122A), S4201, S4203 to S4211, S4213, S4214, S4217, and S4219 correspond to S4201, S4203 to S4211, and S4213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 310) in the tenth control example. , S4214, S4217 and S4219 are executed. In addition, in the command determination processing (S4122A) of this control example, if it is determined in the processing of S4201 that a state command has been received (S4201: Yes), the state command reception processing in the tenth control example (see FIG. 311) status command reception processing is executed instead (S4221A), and this processing ends. The details of this status command reception process (S4221A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the command determination process (see FIG. 388) in the thirteenth control example, when it is determined that the winning command has been received in the process of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the tenth control example (and the first control example) Winning command processing (S4222A) is executed instead of the winning command processing (see FIG. 61), and this processing ends. Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 388) in the thirteenth control example, in the process of S4217, when it is determined that the jackpot related command is received (S4217: Yes), the tenth control example described above (and the first In place of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64) in control example), the jackpot-related processing is executed (S4223A), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4217, when it is determined that the command related to the big hit is not received (S4217: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the lottery of normal symbols is received (S4224A). In the processing of S4224A, when it is determined that the command related to the lottery of the normal symbol is received (S4224A: Yes), the normal symbol related process for executing the control according to the type of the command related to the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Execute (S4225A) and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4224A, when it is determined that the command related to the normal symbol lottery is not received (S4224A: No), the process proceeds to S4219. Details of the winning command process (S4222A), the jackpot related process (S4223A) and the general/universal figure related process (S4225A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 390, 391 and 393.

Next, with reference to FIG. 389, the status command reception process (S4221A), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 388), will be described. FIG. 389 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4221A).
In each of S9001, S9002, S9092 and S9093 of the state command reception processing (S4221A), each of S9001, S9002, S9092 and S9093 of the state command reception processing (see FIG. 311) in the tenth control example described above is executed. The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the state command reception process (S4221A) in the thirteenth control example, after the process of S9092 ends, it is then determined whether or not a change to the normal state has been notified by the received state command (S9011A).
In the processing of S9011A, if it is determined that the change to the normal state has been notified (S9011A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the prefetch suppression flag 223pc is on (S9012A). If it is determined that there is (S9012A: Yes), the prefetch suppression flag 223pc is set to OFF (S9013A), and the process proceeds to S9093. On the other hand, in the processing of S9011A, if it is determined that the change to the normal state has not been notified (S9011A: No), and in the processing of S9012A, if the prefetch suppression flag 223pc is not ON (that is, it is OFF). If so (S9012A: No), the process proceeds to S9093.
Further, in the state command receiving process (see FIG. 389) in the present thirteenth control example, in the process of S9093, when it is determined that there is information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S9093: Yes), the received value (S9014A), updates the data of the counter between bonuses 223pa and the bonus history storage area 223pb (S9015A), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9093, when it is determined that the information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is not notified (S9093: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390, the winning command process (S4222A), which is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 388), will be described. FIG. 390 is a flow chart showing this winning command process (S4222A).
Of the winning command process (S4222A), the processes of S4401 and S4413 are the same as the processes of S4401 and S4413 of the winning command process (see FIG. 61) in the tenth control example (and the first control example). is executed. Also, in the winning command process (S4222A) in the thirteenth control example, after executing the process of S4401, it is determined whether or not the winning information notified by the winning information command this time is the winning information of the first special symbol. (S4421A), when it is determined that it is the winning information of the first special symbol (S4421A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the prefetching suppression flag 223pc is on (S4422A), and the prefetching suppression flag 223pc is on. If it is determined that there is (S4422A: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4421A, if it is determined that it is not the winning information of the special figure 1 (S4421A: No), and in the process of S4422A, the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is not on (that is, off) and determined If so (S4422A: No), the process proceeds to S4423A.
In the processing of S4423A, the reservation mode selection table 222pa (see FIG. 373) is read out (S4423A), and then, according to the variation type indicated by the winning information to be selected by lottery, the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the winning information of this time is displayed. The mode is specified (S4424A), the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the specified display mode is set (S4425A), and the sum of the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 500. It is determined whether or not there is (S4426A).
In the process of S4426A, when it is determined that the sum of the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 500 (S4426A: No), the process proceeds to S4413. On the other hand, in the process of S4426A, when it is determined that the sum of the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 500 (S4426A: Yes), in the winning information storage area 223b It is determined whether or not there is winning information corresponding to the big win (S4427A), and if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the big win in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: No), reaching the ceiling lottery number of times is determined. It means that the third time saving state is set, so the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set to ON (S4428A), and the process proceeds to S4413.

On the other hand, in the process of S4427A, when it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the big win in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: Yes), the big win game is executed without setting the third time saving state. Therefore, the process of S4428A is skipped and the process proceeds to S4413.
By executing this prize winning command process (see FIG. 390), the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc can be turned on at the time when the held ball corresponding to the loss for which the lottery is executed in the ceiling lottery number is acquired. , Even if the holding ball of the first special symbol is obtained after that, it is possible to suppress the execution of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect). As a result, according to the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern digested after shifting to the third time saving state, the lottery corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern is selected in the third time saving state. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method that allows adjustment of whether or not it is executed in between.
Next, with reference to FIG. 391, the jackpot related process (S4223A), which is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 388), will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing (S4223A).
Of this jackpot related processing (S4223A), in each of the processing of S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714 and S4715, S4701, S4709, S4709, S4709, S4709, The same processing as each processing of S4710, S4714 and S4715 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot related processing (S4223A) in the thirteenth control example, in the processing of S4701, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4701: Yes), whether or not the interlocking effect flag 223pe is on (S4721A), and when it is determined that the interlocking production flag 223pe is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4721A: No), the opening command for display indicating the opening production corresponding to the jackpot type is set. (S4722A), the process proceeds to S4724A. On the other hand, in the processing of S4721A, if it is determined that the interlocking effect flag 223pe is ON (S4721A: Yes), the display opening command indicating the jackpot notification effect of the data display device interlocking type is set (S4723A), and the process is performed. to S4724.

In the process of S4724A executed after the process of S4722A or S4723A, the value of the counter between bonuses 223pa is reset (S4723A), and then it is determined whether or not the big win to be started this time is a special big win (S4725A). If it is determined to be a special jackpot (S4725A: Yes), the win information for the special jackpot this time is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4726A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a special jackpot (S4725A: No), the normal bonus winning information is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4727A), and this process is terminated.
Further, the processing of S4711 to S4713 of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64) in the tenth control example (and the first control example) is deleted in this control example. In the processing of S4714, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), it is determined whether a command related to a small hit has been received (S4728A), and it has been determined that a command related to a small hit has been received. In the case (S4728A: Yes), a small hit related process for performing control according to the type of various commands related to a small hit is executed (S4729A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command related to the small hit is not received (S4728A: No), this process is terminated. Details of the small hit related process (S4729A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 392, a small hit related process (S4729A), which is one process of the big hit related process (see FIG. 391), will be described. FIG. 392 is a flow chart showing this small hit related process (S4729A).
In this small per related process (S4729A), first, it is determined whether or not the small per start command is received (S4751A), and when it is determined that the small per start command is received (S4751A: Yes), the small per (S4752A), reset the value of the counter between bonuses 223pa (S4753A), and store the winning information of the current small win in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4754A). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4751A, if it is determined that the small winning start command is not received (S4751A: No), then it is determined whether the small winning ending command is received (S4755A), and the small winning ending If it is determined that the command has not been received (S4755A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small winning ending command has been received (S4755A: Yes), the small winning ending command for display indicating the small winning ending effect is set (S4756A), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 393, the normal figure related process (S4225A), which is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 388), will be described. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose map related process (S4225A).
In this general figure related process (S4225A), first, it is determined whether or not the general figure variation pattern command is received (S4251A), and when it is determined that the general figure variation pattern command is received (S4251A: Yes), The fluctuation time corresponding to the notified normal pattern fluctuation pattern is set to the normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd (S4252A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4251A, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4251A: No), the processing according to other commands is executed (S4253A), and this processing ends.
Next, referring to FIG. 394, normal mode effect setting processing executed instead of normal mode effect setting processing (see FIG. 315) in the tenth control example in the effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 314) (S34421A) will be described. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing the normal mode effect setting process (S34421A).

This normal mode effect setting process (S34421A) is, like the normal mode effect setting process (see FIG. 315) in the tenth control example, a process executed to determine the variable display mode in the normal mode. In the normal mode effect setting process (S34421A) in the thirteenth control example, first, the time saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), and the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc corresponds to the data of the bonus history storage area 223pb. The production mode of the suggestion production to be performed is determined (S34512A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A). If it is determined that the value of the special lottery number counter 223lc is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and whether the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is 500 It is determined whether or not (S34515A). When it is determined that the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether or not the number of lotteries after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A). When it is determined that the number of lotteries after the small bonus is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the history of the oldest small bonus is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517A), and then the player is prevented from hitting right. is set (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34519A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S34513A, when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A: Yes), and in the processing of S34515A, it was determined that the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is 500 If so (S34515A: Yes), the process proceeds to S34518A. Also, in the process of S34516A, when it is determined that the number of lotteries after the oldest small bonus is not 500 (S34516A: No), the processes of S34517A and S34518A are skipped, and the process proceeds to S34519A.
After executing the processing of S34518A, the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern is determined (S34519A), the interlocking effect flag 223pe is updated according to the determined effect mode (S34520A), and this process ends. By executing this normal mode effect setting process (see FIG. 394), in the variable display effect in which there is a possibility that the ceiling lottery count has been reached from the player's point of view, the effect of informing not to hit to the right is executed. Therefore, even if the ceiling lottery number has not actually been reached, the game can be played in anticipation that the ceiling lottery number has been reached. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
<Regarding the control process of the data display device in the thirteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 395, main processing executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flow chart showing this main process. In this main processing, based on various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 electrically connected to the data display device 262, data to be displayed on the data display unit 276 (data corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10). is updated, and control is executed to vary the visual recognition mode according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 .

In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101D). Next, display device signal reception processing is executed (S102D). Next, display update processing for updating the display content of the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 is executed (S103D). Then, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an input operation on the input device 277, and if there is an input operation, an operation means input monitoring process for executing a process corresponding to the operation is performed (S104D). ).
Next, it is determined whether or not there is power-off occurrence information (S105D), and if there is power-off occurrence information (S105D: Yes), power-off processing is executed (S107D), and thereafter the power is completely turned off. An infinite loop continues until it is interrupted and processing cannot be executed.
In the processing of S105D, if it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is not stored (S105D: No), then, whether 1 ms has passed since the processing of S101H or the start of the previous processing of S102H. (S106D), and if it is determined that 1 ms has not elapsed (S106D: No), the process returns to S106D. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S106D that 1 ms has passed (S106D: Yes), the process returns to S102D, and the processes of S102D to S104D are repeatedly executed.
Next, the display device signal reception process (S102D), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 395), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this display device signal reception processing (S102D), processing corresponding to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In the display device signal reception processing (S102D), first, it is determined whether or not external output signals (various signals in the state of H output) have been received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10 (S201D). , if the external output signal is not received (S201D: No), this process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 395).
On the other hand, in the process of S201D, if it is determined that the external output signal has been received (S201D: Yes), then the power-on signal has been received as the external output signal (that is, the CN11 has been in the H output state for 0.2 s. (S202D). If it is determined that the power-on signal has been received (S202D: Yes), then the current state is identified from the outputs of CN7 to CN9 (S203D), and the data display unit 276 and the illumination The aspect of the part 277 is updated (S204D), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S202D, if it is determined that the power-on signal has not been received (that is, the H output signal of 0.2 has not been received from CN 11) (S202D: No), a signal other than the power-on signal (S205D), update the display contents of the data display section 276 according to the received signal (S206D), and terminate this process.
<Regarding control processing of the hall computer in the thirteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 281 of the hall computer 263 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, with reference to FIG. 397, main processing executed by MPU 283 of hall computer 263 will be described. FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing this main process. In the main processing, based on various signals received from the pachinko machine 10, data corresponding to the game status of each pachinko machine 10 is updated, and whether or not there is an abnormality or fraudulent activity with respect to each pachinko machine 10 is determined. do.
In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101H). Next, a signal reception process is performed to execute a process corresponding to the signal received from each pachinko machine 10 (S102H), and then a display update process to update the display of the display 287 provided in the hall computer 263 is executed. (S103H). Then, it is determined whether or not the operator of the hall computer 263 has performed an input operation on the input device 288 of the hall computer 263, and if there is an input operation, an operation means input monitoring process for executing a process corresponding to the operation. (S104H).
Next, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the game state at the time of the previous power-off is compared with the game state at the time of power-on this time, and power recovery comparison for determining the presence or absence of abnormality. Processing is executed (S105H). Then, it is determined whether or not there is power-off occurrence information (S106H), and if there is power-off occurrence information (S106H: Yes), power-off processing is executed (S108H), and thereafter the power is completely cut off. continue the infinite loop until the process can no longer be executed.
In the process of S106H, if it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is not stored (S106H: No), then it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed (S107H), and it is determined that 1 ms has not passed. If so (S107H: No), the process returns to S107H. On the other hand, when it is determined that 1 ms has elapsed in the process of S107H (S107H: Yes), the process returns to S102H, and the processes of S102H to S105H are repeatedly executed.

Next, the signal reception process (S102H), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 397), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this signal reception processing (S102H), processing corresponding to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 is executed.
In the signal reception process (S102H), first, external output signals (various signals in the state of H output) are received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of one of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263. (S201H), and if the external output signal has not been received (S201H: No), this process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 397).
On the other hand, in the process of S201H, if it is determined that the external output signal has been received (S201H: Yes), then the power-on signal was received from the pachinko machine 10 to which the external output signal was output (that is, 0.0. 2s H output signal has been received) (S202H). Then, if it is determined that the power-on signal has not been received (that is, the H output signal of 0.2 s has not been received from CN 11) (S202H: No), then the power-off signal has been received (that is, (S203H). In the process of S203H, if it is determined that the power off signal has been received (that is, the H output signal of 0.4 seconds has been received from CN 11) (S203H: Yes), the power cut corresponding to the pachinko machine that output the signal Information corresponding to the current game state (at the time of power shutdown) is stored in the time information storage area (S204H), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S203H, if it is determined that the power off signal is not received (that is, the H output signal of 0.4 s is not received from CN11) (S203H: No), the pachinko that outputs the signal The information in the data storage area corresponding to the machine is updated (S204H), and this process ends. For example, if it is determined that the jackpot 1 signal (CN7) of the first pachinko machine 10 (1 series) installed in the hall is in the H output state and the other external output signal is in the L output state. , information indicating that the jackpot is in progress is stored in the data storage area corresponding to the first pachinko machine 10 (first series). The type (machine number) of the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is specified by the type of connection terminal for the hall computer 263 (the position of the terminal that received the external output signal).
In the processing of S202H, if it is determined that the power-on signal is received (that is, the H output signal of 0.2 seconds from CN 11 is received) (S202H: Yes), then to the pachinko machine 10 that outputs the external output signal It is determined whether or not the startup flag of the corresponding data storage area (flag indicating whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 10 is being started up based on power-on) is on (S206H). As a result of the determination by the processing of S206H, when it is determined that the start-up flag is off (S206H: No), the information in the power recovery information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has received the external output signal is updated ( S207H), update of the display contents of the display 287 is set (S208H), the start-up flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is set to ON (S209H), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 399, the power restoration comparison process (S105H) will be described. This power recovery time comparison process (S105H) is one process in the main process executed by the MPU 281, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the game state at the time of the previous power interruption, This is a process of comparing the game state with the game state when the power is turned on this time, and determining the presence or absence of an abnormality.
In this power recovery comparison process (S105H), first, it is determined whether or not the startup flag is on (S301H). (S301H: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S301H, if it is determined that the start-up flag is ON (S301H: Yes), then the information in the power failure information storage area and the information in the power recovery information storage area are compared ( S302H), and it is determined whether or not the compared information matches (S303H).
In the process of S303H, if it is determined that the compared information does not match (S303H: No), an abnormality notification is set (S304H), and the process proceeds to S305H. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303H that the compared information matches (S303H: Yes), the process of S304H is skipped and the process proceeds to S305H. In the process of S305H, the start-up flag is set to OFF (S305H), and the process ends.
By executing this power recovery comparison process (see FIG. 399), a power-on signal is sent to the hall computer 263 when power is turned on for any of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263. is output, it is possible to compare the data indicating the game state when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off with the data indicating the game state when the power is turned on this time. When an abnormal situation occurs, the fact can be grasped on the hall computer 263 side immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress cheating such as rewriting the game state (for example, illegally setting the jackpot state) while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, the presentation mode as if it were interlocked with the visual recognition mode of a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 specific effect (data display device interlocking effect) can be executed. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example, as a kind of effect for notifying the player of an advantageous state (for example, a big win or a time-saving state), a shift to an advantageous state is made. It is configured to be able to execute a display device interlocking effect in a mode of effect that keeps the fact that the player has done so hidden for a predetermined period, and prompts the user to visually recognize a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity after shifting to an advantageous state. . Various data (the number of lotteries between big wins, the number of big wins, the total number of lotteries, etc.) related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, which are currently in general circulation. In the data display device 262 for doing so, when an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability variable game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is set, it is in an advantageous state by emitting characters or decorative lamps. Since most of them are configured to be able to notify by such as, by executing the display device interlocking effect, it is very novel as if the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are interlocking and performing the effect. It is possible to realize a production mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the thirteenth control example, as a lottery result of the first special symbol that is mainly executed in the normal game state, almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in each round short) jackpot (special jackpot), and a small win in which the opening pattern (specific opening/closing operation) of the specific winning port 65a common to the special jackpot is set, and whether it was a special jackpot or a small win. is configured to be difficult for the player to distinguish. Due to these lottery results, every time the specific winning port 65a is opened and closed by a specific opening and closing operation, the number of lotteries until reaching the ceiling lottery number (the third time saving state is given) may be reset by special jackpot winning. To make it difficult for a player to grasp the number of remaining lotteries until the third time-saving state is granted (remaining number of times until awarding of a privilege related to reaching the number of ceiling lotteries) because the player can be made to recognize that there is a possibility. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game feature of predicting the number of remaining lotteries.
In addition, in the thirteenth control example, by fixing the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the ceiling lottery number of times to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, the transition to the third time saving state It is configured to make it difficult to understand whether the winning lottery is just the jackpot or the ceiling lottery number of times. By configuring in this way, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the shift to the third time-saving state for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, in the thirteenth control example, it is configured to suppress the execution of the holding change effect for the holding ball that is held before reaching the ceiling lottery number and digested in the third time saving state set after the ceiling lottery number is reached. . By configuring in this way, the holding ball of the first special pattern digested after shifting to the third time saving state is dared to be digested during the third time saving state by not generating the start prize of the second special pattern. Conversely, the first special symbol is quickly obtained by acquiring the second special symbol reserved ball, and then the game is played so as not to lose the second special symbol reserved ball. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the degree of advantage is increased by deliberately digesting the reserved ball with the pattern after the third time-saving state is finished.

In addition, in the present thirteenth control example, when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, and when shifting to the third time-saving state, the common signal output channel (CN9) in the external output terminal plate 261 from the common signal output channel (CN9) signal is configured to output As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of signal output channels, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 due to an increase in the number of parts. Here, in the thirteenth control example, similarly to the jackpot 1 signal, by setting the CN9 to the H output state even during the execution of the jackpot game, the predetermined Information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263). That is, the function installed in the pachinko machine 10, which shifts to the time-saving state based on the number of ceiling lotteries reached, is a very special function of shifting to an advantageous game state without going through a big win. Depending on the specs of the predetermined device, there is a possibility that the shift to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating a time saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it is determined that the state has been shifted to a time saving state without a jackpot due to fraud, or an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and the output is disabled. There is a risk of being identified. Therefore, in the thirteenth control example, as the jackpot 3 signal, a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of the jackpot game but also when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, is provided. It is possible to treat the time-saving state that shifts based on reaching the number of times as a normal state regardless of the specs of the predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261 . In other words, if the signal indicating the time saving state is received without receiving the signal indicating the jackpot, even if the specification determines that it is illegal or abnormal, if the 3 jackpot signals are input as the signal indicating the jackpot, the ceiling Even when the number of times of lottery is reached, it is possible to realize a signal output mode as if a shift to the time-saving state occurred in a pseudo manner after a big win. That is, the jackpot 3 signal indicating the jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds, and the jackpot 2 signal indicating the transition to the time saving state is set to the H output state, so that the proper time saving state It can be judged as migration. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the time saving state set based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals is determined to be illegal or abnormal. In addition, in the case of a predetermined device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on the number of times the ceiling lottery has been reached, by determining the output period of the 3 jackpot signals, it is possible to determine whether the H output is based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. It is possible to distinguish whether it is the H output based on winning. Therefore, regardless of the specs of the predetermined device, it is possible to treat the transition to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times as justifiable.
In the thirteenth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a signal indicating the gaming state is output from the external output terminal board 261. When it is in the normal state, it may be configured to externally output the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la. In this case, from one signal output channel (for example, CN9), it may be configured to output the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la as a signal indicating 9-bit data. More specifically, for example, in a situation where neither the jackpot 1 signal nor the jackpot 2 signal is output (neither the jackpot game state nor the time saving state), the jackpot 3 signal is output H for a predetermined period (for example, 0.4 seconds). By setting to , it is notified to the predetermined device that the jackpot 3 signal output from CN9 thereafter is the data indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la. Then, the data of the 1st bit to the 9th bit of the special figure lottery counter 203la are output in order in units of 0.2 seconds. More specifically, if the target bit of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 1, the output of CN9 is set to H output for 0.2 seconds, and if it is 0, the output of CN9 is L output for 0.2 seconds set to Then, after the output is completed, by outputting an H output signal with an output period different from 0.2 seconds and 0.4 seconds (for example, 0.6 seconds), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is indicated. It may be configured to notify the predetermined device that the data output is completed. With this configuration, the number of lotteries at power-on can be easily grasped simply by monitoring the output of the external output terminal board 261 on the side of a predetermined device (hall computer 263, etc.).
Furthermore, in this case, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la may be notified in a similar manner. By configuring in this way, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la can be output to a predetermined device when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, so the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la during the power off When a fraudulent act of illegally rewriting is performed, it can be configured so that it can be easily discovered on the side of the predetermined device. In other words, by installing a function of comparing the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la when the power is turned off and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la when the power is turned on next, in a predetermined device such as the hall computer 263 Since discrepancies in the drawing lottery counter 2031a can be easily detected on the side of the predetermined device, it is possible to determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.
In the thirteenth control example, 3 jackpot signals are provided separately from the 1 jackpot signal, but the 1 jackpot signal and the 3 jackpot signals may be output from one signal output channel (CN7). By configuring in this way, the number of signal output channels can be reduced.

In the thirteenth control example, the degree of advantage is differentiated depending on whether the special jackpot is won in the normal game state before the ceiling lottery number is reached or the special jackpot is won in the third time-saving state after the ceiling lottery number is reached. As a total, it was constructed so that the degree of advantage is higher when the first special pattern lottery wins after the ceiling lottery number of times has passed, but when the first special pattern lottery wins The method of varying the degree of advantage is not limited to this. For example, rather than winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal game state, it is better to win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern during the third time-saving state set after the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. It may be configured so that the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is higher (it becomes easier to shift to the second probability variable state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect to reach the ceiling lottery number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the thirteenth control example, a small bonus is provided to make it difficult to understand the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries. It is not something that can be done. For example, by varying the ceiling lottery frequency after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many ceiling lottery frequencies are set. Also, whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win can be grasped by visually recognizing the type of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 . Therefore, for example, at the timing when the stop symbol corresponding to the small bonus is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 may be erased, the common symbol may be temporarily displayed, or the second symbol may be temporarily displayed. The first pattern display device 37 may be hidden by moving a predetermined movable accessory in front of the one pattern display device 37 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win, so it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number. Also, the same control may be performed during the period from when the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on (the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed), the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are also cleared, while the pachinko machine 10 is cleared when the power is turned on. is not initialized, the display content of the first pattern display device 37 is normally restored to the display content at the time of power-off. In this case, if the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by a pachinko machine 10 outside the opening hours of the hall, the player only needs to visually recognize the first pattern display device 37 on the next business day, and the rest of the ceiling lottery count will be completed. It is possible to easily determine whether the number of lotteries has been reset or is maintained as it was at the end of business on the previous day. That is, if the display contents of the first pattern display device 37 are cleared, it is determined that the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries is reset, and the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from starting the game. There is a possibility that In order to avoid such a situation, when the power is turned on, the display of the first pattern display device 37 is erased regardless of whether or not the initialization is performed, or a common pattern is displayed regardless of whether or not the initialization is performed. The first pattern display device 37 may be hidden by temporarily displaying it or by moving a predetermined movable accessory in front of the first pattern display device 37 until the variable display of the special pattern is first started. With this configuration, it is difficult for a player to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized or not, so that the operation rate of the initialized pachinko machine 10 is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed. In particular, when the power is cut off during the jackpot fluctuation and the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, all the various settings of the pachinko machine 10 are initialized. Since the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b based on the winning of the jackpot is not performed (avoided), this series of operations is another form of control for avoiding the operation of a predetermined operation member in the 64th control example described later. be.
In the thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 361(a), the character 809 emits light 809 upward in the third symbol display device 81, thereby indirectly drawing attention to the top of the pachinko machine 10, By making the data display device 262, which is generally installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, pay attention (visible), the result of the lottery (whether or not it shifts to an advantageous state) is determined by the viewing mode of the data display device 262. ) to the player, but it is not limited to this. For example, a more direct expression to prompt attention to the data display device 262 (for example, to the third pattern display device 81, an effect such as displaying the characters "Look at the table!"). may be executed. By configuring in this manner, the data display device 262 can be visually recognized by the player more reliably, so that the performance effect of the data display device interlocking performance can be further improved.
In the thirteenth control example, the holding notice effect for the holding ball (holding ball that straddles the ceiling lottery number) that is acquired before reaching the ceiling lottery number (starting winning is detected) and used for special symbol lottery after the jackpot is completed. Although it is configured to suppress execution, it is not limited to this. For example, in a state where there are a plurality of reserved balls and a display mode different from normal reservation is set for at least one reserved ball number pattern as the reservation notice effect, a display mode different from normal reservation is displayed. A configuration may be provided in which the set display mode of one reserved ball number pattern and the display mode of one reserved ball number pattern set to the display mode of normal reservation are exchanged. In other words, the pending change effect is once set to a pending ball number pattern different from the pending ball number pattern determined as the target of the pending change effect, and a predetermined timing after the pending change effect is executed (for example , at the start of the next fluctuation, during variable display based on the held ball determined as the target of the hold change production, etc.), the display mode of the hold ball number pattern decided as the target of the hold change production is different from the normal hold As set in the display mode, an effect may be executed in which the display mode is replaced with the number of pending balls pattern temporarily set to a display mode different from the normal suspension. In this case, the holding change effect is allowed to be executed even for the held ball straddling the ceiling lottery number, and the held ball used for the ceiling lottery number lottery is to be used before the ceiling lottery number number variation display is completed. It may be configured to replace the number of reserved ball patterns and the display mode corresponding to . In other words, the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the reserved balls digested in the ceiling lottery number are basically set to the display mode of normal reservation, and if the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern increases after that, A lottery as to whether or not the pending change performance can be executed is executed in the same manner as in the normal time, and when the pending change performance of the display mode other than the normal suspension is executed, the performance of replacing the display mode of the pending ball number pattern is executed. Alternatively, the display mode of the reserved number of balls symbol of the first special symbol digested after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times may be unified to the display mode of normal suspension. By configuring in this way, similarly to the thirteenth control example described above, the third It is possible to start a time-saving state.

In this thirteenth control example, the third time saving state is set based on the second time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning after the jackpot is completed and the third time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times. Although the degree of advantage is slightly lower than that of the other, the difference in the degree of advantage is so small that it is difficult for the player to feel it, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third time saving state may be configured so that the degree of advantage is clearly lower. Specifically, for example, the probability of the normal design in the low probability state of the normal design (normal game state, the third time saving state) to the high probability state of the normal design (the second probability variable state, the second time saving state) It may be configured significantly lower (eg, 1/100). In other words, in both the normal state and the third time-saving state, by configuring so that the lottery of the normal symbols is almost impossible, it is configured as a game state in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left. You may Even if it is configured in this way, if it is configured so that the degree of advantage in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special pattern is higher in the third time-saving state, it is possible to reach the number of ceiling lotteries. Expected playability can be maintained. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which a disadvantageous left-handed game is maintained even after reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery, it is possible to suppress a significant change in the degree of advantage before and after reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery. Therefore, due to the presence of the third time saving state, the ball output performance of the pachinko machine 10 is improved too much, which is excessively advantageous to the player, or the output rate in the third time saving state is set by other factors (for example, It is possible to prevent players from being excessively disadvantageous as a result of trying to compensate for the jackpot probability, the number of payout balls for each ball entering each winning hole, the number of rounds of the jackpot, the rate of probability variation, etc.). can.
<Modification of the thirteenth control example>
Next, a modification of the thirteenth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 466 and 467. FIG. In the thirteenth control example described above, an effect for informing the player of the big win and an effect for informing the time-saving state are configured to execute an effect to encourage viewing the data display device 262 . In addition to this, in this modification, an upper role item UY that can appear and appear to a position where the data display device 262 can be physically concealed is mounted on the top of the pachinko machine 10. By concealing the viewing mode of the data display device 262, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the data display device interlocking effect is being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 466, in this modified example, an upper accessory UY capable of performing haunting action is provided in the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 as part of the entertainment effect associated with the variable display effect. This upper accessory UY is normally maintained in a state (original position) housed inside the pachinko machine 10, and mainly when the variation pattern of "SP reach" with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Then, in the latter half of the variable display presentation, the data display device 262 is stopped at a position where the front surface of the data display device 262 is covered (extended position). The state in which the upper accessory UY is stopped in front of the data display device 262 is basically maintained until the variable display effect is completely finished.
In this modification, as a kind of jackpot performance, the upper accessory UY is maintained in the overhanging position until the opening period of the jackpot game, and the third pattern display device 81 stops and displays the third patterns in a combination of disengagement. (See FIG. 467(a)). Then, after executing the effect (see FIG. 359(a)) to draw attention to the data display device 262, the upper accessory UY descends to the origin position, thereby exposing the front surface of the data display device 262. Then, an effect is executed in which the jackpot visual recognition mode set in the data display device 262 becomes visible. Based on the fact that the visual recognition mode for big win has become visible, the pachinko machine 10 side also informs of the big win winning in the same way as the data display interlocking effect in the thirteenth control example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262, so even if the timing of informing the pachinko machine 10 side of the transition to the big win or the time saving state is delayed, the big win or the time saving It can be configured such that it is difficult for the user to notice the transition to the state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the data display device-linked performance, and to further improve the degree of freedom of notification timing.
In the thirteenth control example and its modification described above, in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined device (data display device 262, etc.) is displayed, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a predetermined advantageous state (jackpot state, time-saving state with normal symbols) in a predetermined device. A data display device interlocking effect that notifies whether or not a predetermined advantageous state has occurred depending on whether or not it is set to a predetermined visual mode (big hit visual mode, visual mode for time saving state) to indicate that Although it is configured to execute, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 receives a predetermined signal indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in a predetermined advantageous state, the visual mode can be set to indicate that the predetermined advantageous state is reached. A predetermined device (for example, a display device set to a predetermined display mode upon receiving a predetermined signal indicating a predetermined advantageous state, a light emitting device set to a predetermined light emission mode, a predetermined displacement By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display a display mode that prompts attention (visual recognition) to a displacement device that is displaced (moved) in a manner, the predetermined device and the third pattern display device 81 It is good also as composition which performs interlocking type production. By constructing in this way, compared with the data display device 262 which is mostly installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, the degree of freedom of the installation position can be increased, so that the presentation mode can be diversified. can be done.

In the above-described thirteenth control example and its modification, even when a small win is won in which the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is not reset, the number of times between bonuses displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reset. However, in the pachinko machine 10 to which a predetermined device capable of displaying the game history such as the data display device 262 described above is connected, by visually recognizing the game history displayed on the data display device 262, the previous It is possible to grasp the number of special pattern lotteries executed after the end of the big win. In other words, by visually recognizing the data display device 262, it becomes possible to grasp the remaining number of lotteries until reaching the ceiling number of lotteries. On the other hand, after providing the upper accessory UY in the modification of the thirteenth control example described above, the initial arrangement (origin position) of the upper accessory 262 is arranged as shown in FIG. is blocked by the upper accessory UY, making it difficult to see the data display device 262), the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries can be grasped by visually recognizing the data display device 262. It may be configured to make it physically difficult. By constructing in this way, the number of lotteries remaining until reaching the number of ceiling lotteries can be determined by the player only from the number of times between bonuses displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the number of ceiling lotteries can be determined. It is possible to further entertain the game property of predicting the remaining number of times until reaching .
In the above-described thirteenth control example and its modification, the through gate 67 is provided only at the position where the game ball cannot enter unless it is hit to the right (position where it is difficult to enter), and the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number is provided. It is configured so that the variable display of the normal pattern is not started during the variable display of the number of times of the ceiling lottery unless the right shot is intentionally started during the game, but it is not limited to this. For example, a through gate 67 or a second ball entrance 640 may be provided at a position where both a left-handed game ball and a right-handed game ball can enter. In the case of such a configuration, it is likely that the fluctuation display of the normal symbols continues before and after the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped. By shifting (delaying) the timing of informing the transition to the time saving state according to, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wasted balls.
In the above-described thirteenth control example and its modification, when the time saving pattern is won during the third time saving state, the second time saving state is set, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached in the second time saving state, the third time saving It was configured so that the state is set (the time saving state is overwritten), but it is not necessary to overwrite the time saving type. For example, if the ceiling lottery number is reached in the second time-saving state with a high degree of advantage (high probability of winning a normal pattern), while maintaining the second time-saving state, only the number of time-saving numbers is based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals. It may be configured to update to the number of times of time saving (100 times) corresponding to the time saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming lower than the game state before reaching the ceiling lottery regardless of the game state at the time when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. It is possible to please the player regardless of the timing of reaching .
In the above-described thirteenth control example and its modification, when the time saving pattern is elected during the third time saving state and the second time saving state is shifted (accompanied by this, the number of time saving times increases to 100). When the ceiling lottery number of times is reached during the two hour reduction state and the state is shifted to the third hour reduction state (accompanied by this, the number of hour reduction numbers is increased to 100), a special presentation mode showing that the number of hour reduction numbers has increased. may be configured to execute Specifically, for example, in the variable display effect corresponding to the time saving pattern winning during the time saving state, and the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number of times during the time saving state, until the time saving state displayed in the display area Dm7 ends The number indicating the remaining number of times is increased to 100 (the number of times of saving time is recovered). You may perform the content presentation as if returning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize more diverse presentation modes, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, it may be configured such that the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied in a state where the remaining number of times of the time saving is smaller, the gorgeous (flashy) presentation mode is likely to be set. When the condition for setting the time saving state is established in a state where the number of times of time saving is small and the number of times of time saving is reset to 100 times, the player can be made to think that he has obtained more advantageous time saving states. In this case, by executing a more splendid presentation, the player can be made to feel greater joy and satisfaction.

In the above-described thirteenth control example and its modification, a state is set in which a look-ahead effect such as a hold change effect is prohibited based on the acquisition of a hold ball used for a special symbol lottery in the ceiling lottery number. However, the condition for setting the state in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that the reserved ball corresponding to the time-saving symbol winning is reserved, a state in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited may be set, or the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot other than the special jackpot is reserved (i.e. , After the end of the jackpot, a state in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited may be set based on the fact that the jackpot suspension of the type that shifts to the game state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set is suspended). By configuring in this way, similarly to the case where the third time saving state is set based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals, when the state is shifted to the time saving state with one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, Since it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not the reserved ball of the first special pattern will become a big hit, the reserved ball of the first special pattern is digested during the time saving state only when it is predicted that it is likely to become a big hit. When it is predicted that a big win is not likely to occur, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the game method is switched so that a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets the state which prefetch production|presentation is prohibited other than the case where it transfers to a time saving state. More specifically, for example, after the hold change effect set to the display mode other than normal hold (one of change 1 to change 5) is determined, the variation based on the hold ball in the display mode other than the normal hold A state may be set in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited until the display effect ends. By configuring in this way, a plurality of patterns of the number of held balls in a display mode other than the normal hold are displayed, and the player is at a loss as to which of the held balls to pay attention to. It is possible to suppress the difficulty of concentrating on the variable display effect based on the held ball.
In the above-described thirteenth control example and its modification, when the reserved ball used for the special symbol lottery is reserved in the ceiling lottery number of times, the reserved ball corresponding to the first special symbol reserved ball acquired after that is reserved. Although it was configured to suppress the setting of a display mode other than the normal hold for the number of balls pattern, it is not limited to this, for example, the first special digested after shifting to the third time saving state The reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball of the pattern may be configured to be set to a specific display mode different from any of the normal reserve and change 1 to change 5. Even if it is configured in this way, it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not it will be advantageous to consume it during the time-saving state. When it is predicted that the reserved ball of the first special pattern is digested and the big win is not likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method by switching the game method so that the lottery of the second special pattern is executed. Contrary to the thirteenth control example and its modified example described above, the configuration may be such that the suspension change effect is permitted in the same manner as in the normal time. In this case, in addition to the display mode that suggests the possibility of winning a big hit or the possibility of winning a time-saving pattern, there is a high possibility of a big win type (special jackpot) that is advantageous if you win a big win during the time-saving state ( In other words, it is likely that the degree of advantage will be higher if digested during the time-saving state), or the one that is digested after the time-saving state ends rather than being digested during the time-saving state It is also possible to provide a display mode that suggests that there is a high possibility that the degree of advantage will increase. By configuring in this way, it is possible to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the most advantageous timing for the player.
<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 400 to 427. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and the first special symbol lottery and the second In any of the special symbol lotteries, it is possible to execute time-saving winning determination. In addition, in the ninth control example described above, a plurality of time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) with different degrees of advantage (number of time-savings) are provided as the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the player.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 14th control example, as the time saving state, the time saving state (second time saving state A, third time saving state A) in which the lottery of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed, A time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery for a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is easily executed is provided, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, first, the third time-saving state is set. While B is set, when a big win is won in a normal state, the time saving state after the end of the big win is set to a second time saving state A with a low advantage at a high rate. By constructing in this way, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the ceiling lottery number of times will be reached, rather than winning the jackpot.

Further, in the 14th control example, when the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, the number of times of time saving corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is added. And, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is won at a higher probability (for example, at a rate of 90%) than in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, it moves to the second time saving state A or the third time saving state A by executing the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). It is configured to That is, during the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, every time the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, the time saving pattern is elected with a high probability and the number of time saving times is added. A novel game property is realized in which the number of continuations of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A that shifts after the lottery of the special symbols has passed can be varied.
The pachinko machine 10 in this fourteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described ninth control example in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed, and the control processing to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 9 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 400, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 400 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 400, in the game board 13 in the 14th control example, the small winning variable winning device is placed directly below the first ball entrance 64 with respect to the game board 13 in the 9th control example (see FIG. 258). 2650 is provided. The upper part of this small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is blocked by the first ball entrance 64 and a nail, and the game ball is arranged to make it difficult to enter. This small winning variable winning device 2650 is a variable winning device that is opened when the first special symbol lottery results in a small winning. That is, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650, so the first special symbol in the fourteenth control example. The small hit is almost the same value as the loss in a general gaming machine. The significance of providing the small winning of the first special symbol in the present 14th control example lies in the function of forcibly stopping the long variation of the second special symbol.
Here, in this 14th control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel, and while both special symbols are varying, one special symbol is displayed. When one becomes a big hit or a small hit, the specification is adopted that the variable display of the other special pattern being executed is off and the symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. And, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (49/50). By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol lottery is executed by hitting right in the normal state and the long variation of 600 seconds is set, by executing the first special symbol lottery, Without waiting for 600 seconds, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by the off symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery for the second special symbol continues to be executed endlessly.

In addition, the game board 13 in the 14th control example has the variable winning device 1065 removed from the game board 13 in the ninth control example, and the V winning device 1650 has the role of the variable winning device 1065 (in each round of the jackpot It is also different in that it also serves as a large winning opening that is open for a predetermined period of time). Thereby, the board configuration of the game board 13 can be simplified.
Furthermore, the game board 13 in the present 14th control example replaces the right side second ball entrance 1640 and the electric accessory 1640a that opens and closes the right side second ball entrance 1640 in the above-described ninth control example with the right side first It is also different in that an electric accessory 64ra for opening and closing the ball entrance 64r and the first right ball entrance 64r is provided. Like the first ball entrance 64, the right first ball entrance 64r is configured as a kind of starting prize winning opening that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, the electric accessary 64ra is controlled to open and close in an opening pattern according to the game state when winning the normal symbol lottery.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, a characteristic presentation mode in the fourteenth control example will be described. Here, as described above, in the 14th control example, the time saving state A (second time saving state A, third time saving state A, third time saving State A) and time-saving state B in which the lottery of the second special pattern, which has a high degree of advantage (high probability of winning the time-saving pattern and substantially confirms the big win if the small win is won), is executed. (Second time saving state B, third time saving state B) and two types of time saving states are provided. Then, in the 14th control example, when the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, control is adopted to add the number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern, and in the time saving state B, a specific number of times (for example, 11 times ) is executed to shift to the time saving state A by executing the lottery of the special symbols. In other words, in the time-saving state B, which is easy to win the time-saving pattern, the more time-saving times are added by the time-saving pattern winning, the more times the time-saving state A that shifts after that (after a specific number of times). , It is configured to realize novel gameplay. In other words, the time-saving state B is a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed with a substantially high probability of winning a jackpot (even if a small win is won, the jackpot is substantially confirmed), and the degree of advantage is extremely high. In addition to that, it is also a state for determining the number of continuations of the time saving state A to be shifted after that.
The effect mode in this time saving state B will be described with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402. FIG. FIG. 401(a) shows a lottery result different from the jackpot over the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times in this 14th control example) (that is, a loss including a small hit), and after shifting to the third time saving state It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect performed with the 3 design display apparatus 81. FIG. As described above, when moving to the third time saving state, first, the third time saving state B in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is set, and the variable display of the special symbol of the specific number of times in the third time saving state B is executed It shifts to the third time saving state A by being done. 401(a) is a diagram showing a display mode during the third time saving state B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 401 (a), in the third time saving state B, the characters "~ RUSH ~" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. At the same time, an effect is executed in which a character 801 imitating a rabbit is given a privilege of being in a treasure box 810 by a character 809 imitating an angel. In FIG. 401 (a), the contents including a pattern with the number “5” indicating that the number of times of working hours was reduced 5 times was added from the treasure box 810 (the number of times of working hours was 5 times was won). 810a is given to the character 801 as an example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 401(a), a small display area Dm4 with the characters "Right-handed" on the upper left of the main display area Dm, and "Last 8 shots" below the small display area Dm4. , and a small display area Dm13 with the characters "stock 50+10 times" are formed below the small display area Dm7.
In the small display area Dm7, the display content indicating the number of times of the remaining second special symbol lottery until the time saving state B is terminated (shift to the time saving state A) is displayed, and the second special symbol lottery is displayed in the time saving state B. Each time is executed, the value is decremented by 1 and displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm13, the display content indicating the number of times of time saving after shifting to the time saving state A is displayed. In , the number of times of time saving acquired (added) by winning time saving pattern is displayed respectively. That is, in the example of FIG. 401 (a), at the time of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (shifted to the third time saving state B), 50 times of time saving state A is guaranteed, and further, the lottery of the second special symbol , exemplifies a situation in which the number of times of time reduction for 10 times has been successfully acquired (added) by winning the time reduction pattern. In addition, in the present 14th control example, the number of times of time saving in the third time saving state related to reaching the ceiling lottery number of times is uniformly set to 61 times. Of these, 11 times are set to the third time saving state B, and 50 times are set to the third time saving state A.
Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a text saying "Increase the number of chance times!" is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the number of time saving times of the chance time (time saving state A) is added (stocked) every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. can. In addition, in the 14th control example, in the time-saving state, a game ball is configured to frequently enter both the first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting to the right. For this reason, if the player hits right after shifting to the third time-saving state B, not only the lottery for the second special symbol but also the lottery for the first special symbol is almost certainly executed. Here, in this 14th control example, a simultaneous variation specification is adopted in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. It is allowed to start the variable display of symbols and to start the variable display of the second special symbols during the variable display of the first special symbols. Further, in the time saving state B, a relatively long variation time (for example, 120 seconds) is set for the first special symbol. Therefore, while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed once, the lottery game with the second special symbol can be performed for the remaining number of times until shifting to the time saving state A.例文帳に追加The number of continuous times of the time saving state B is set to 11 times, which is an intermediate number, because one lottery of the first special pattern and 10 times of the lottery of the second special pattern are totaled. As a result, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol can be set to 10 times, which is a good number of times, before shifting to the time saving state A.例文帳に追加
FIG. 401(b) is the third time saving state B in the fourteenth control example, and is a diagram showing an effect mode after the eleventh variable display is completed. When the eleventh variable display ends in the third time saving state B, an effect is executed to notify the number of time saving times of the third time saving state A to be shifted to thereafter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 401(b), characters indicating the number of time reductions are displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. The example of FIG. 401 (b) illustrates a case where the characters "TOTAL 110 times" are displayed. The example shows a situation in which 60 times of working hours are added to the number of times. In addition, the characters "enter chance time" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand the number of time reductions in the third time reduction state A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402, an effect mode when a big hit or a small hit is won during the time saving state B (additional RUSH) will be described. In the 14th control example, when a big win is won during the time saving state B or when a V win occurs after the small win wins and the big win is won, the game state after the big win is set to the second time saving state. In this second time-saving state, similarly to the third time-saving state based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals, first, after the time-saving state B of 11 times is set, it shifts to the time-saving state A. Therefore, from the player's point of view, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state B (additional RUSH), it will be as if the time saving state B (additional RUSH) is restarted after the big win. Furthermore, since the number of time reductions after the second special symbol jackpot is configured to be set to 86 times, except for 11 times digested in the time reduction state B, the time reduction state A that shifts after the time reduction state B The time saving state B is restarted from the beginning in a state where 75 times are guaranteed as the number of times of time saving. Therefore, since the number of times of time saving is set larger than that of the third time saving state accompanying the reaching of the number of ceiling lottery times, a big hit can be expected during the time saving state B.例文帳に追加
As shown in FIG. 402, when a big win or a small win is won during the time-saving state B, contents 810a including a pattern with the letters “RUSH” appear from the treasure box 810, and an effect given to the character 801. is executed. In addition, the display indicating the number of times of time saving displayed in the small display area Dm13 is changed to the display content of "stock 75 times". Furthermore, the characters "Additional RUSH reset confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the additional RUSH can be restarted from the beginning after obtaining 75 time-saving times. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, referring to FIG. 403, a method of transitioning between game states in the fourteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 403, in this 14th control example, five types of game states of the normal state, the second time saving state A, the second time saving state B, the third time saving state A, and the third time saving state B as the game state is provided. The normal state is set to a low-probability state of normal symbols, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation shortening function (variable short) does not operate. In other words, the game state is disadvantageous for the player who needs to proceed with the game by executing the lottery for the first special symbol having a low advantage by hitting left.
In addition, the second time reduction state A is set to a high probability state of normal symbols, and since it is configured in a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates, right first ball entrance 64r by right hitting Although the game ball frequently enters both the second ball entrance 1641 and the second special symbol fluctuation time, an extremely long variation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set, so the right first ball entrance It is composed of a game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering 64r is executed. In addition, the second time saving state B is set to a high probability state of normal symbols similarly to the second time saving state A, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates. Unlike the time saving state A, the variation time of the first special symbol is longer and the variation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter, so the second special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 1641. It is configured in a game state in which only is executed. Here, since the lottery for the second special symbol has a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol, the game state is such that the second time-saving state B has a higher advantage than the second time-saving state A. .

Further, the third time reduction state A is set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state, and is composed of a game state in which a normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates. In addition, as in the second time-saving state A, the game ball frequently enters the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting to the right, but the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely Since a long variation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set, it is configured in a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64r is executed. That is, compared to the second time-saving state A, the degree of advantage is low because the probability of winning the normal symbol is low, but the game state is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state. Here, in the 14th control example, as in the 13th control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits is different by only one. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (that the degree of advantage of the third time saving state A is lower than that of the second time saving state A). Therefore, when the player shifts to the third time-saving state A, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has obtained the same value as when shifting to the second time-saving state A, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. can be made
Furthermore, the third time saving state B is set to a normal symbol low probability state like the third time saving state A, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates, but the third Unlike the time saving state A, the variation time of the first special symbol is longer and the variation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter, so the second special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 1641. It is configured in a game state in which only is executed. Therefore, the 3rd time saving state B turns into a game state with a higher advantage degree than the 3rd time saving state A.
First, with reference to the upper portion of FIG. 403, a method of shifting from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 403, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another game state when the jackpot is won or when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached without winning the jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 403, when the jackpot A17 determined at a rate of 90% is won when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the second. It is set to the time saving state A. In addition, if a jackpot B17 determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous than the second time-saving state A. The second time saving state B is set. Furthermore, when the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times) is reached without winning the jackpot in the normal state, the third time saving state B is set. The second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B have substantially the same degree of advantage, and the second time-saving state A is constituted by a game state in which the degree of advantage is clearly lower than that of the second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B. Therefore, in the normal state, the game is expected to reach the ceiling lottery number of times without winning the jackpot rather than the jackpot winning, which is likely to shift to the second time-saving state A with a low degree of advantage. can be done. In other words, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which the game is played while strongly expecting that the player will not win the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, referring to the middle left side of FIG. 403, a method of shifting from the second time saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown in the middle left side of FIG. 403, from the second time saving state A to another game state, when the jackpot is won, when the number of time saving times has passed without winning the jackpot, and when the jackpot is not won There is a possibility that it will be transferred when the number of lotteries is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 403, when winning the jackpot B17 determined at a rate of 10% when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in the second time saving state A, the game after the jackpot ends A state is set to the 2nd time saving state B. Further, when the number of times of time saving has passed in the second time saving state A, the game is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, when reaching the ceiling lottery frequency (150 times) without winning a jackpot in the second time saving state A, the second time saving state B is set. In addition, in order to reach the ceiling lottery number in the time saving state A, once transition to the second time saving state B, and in the second time saving state B, the number of times of lottery exceeding the number of times of the ceiling lottery is added. , it is necessary to shift to the time-saving state A, and reach the number of ceiling lotteries without winning a jackpot. Since the number of time reductions given at the end of the jackpot when transitioning to the second time reduction state B is 61 times or 86 times, in order to add the number of time reductions exceeding the ceiling lottery number, during the second time reduction state B It is necessary to generate at least 64 or more additions to . However, 80% of the number of time reductions added in the lottery of the second special pattern in 1 is 5 times, and the percentage of 10 or more time reductions added is only 20%. It becomes difficult to increase the number of times. Furthermore, since the event of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times without winning the jackpot is also a relatively unlikely phenomenon in the first place, the case of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times after the jackpot ends) while maintaining the second time saving state A is extremely rare.

On the other hand, if a jackpot A17 determined at a rate of 90% is won in the second time-saving state A by lottery of the first special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends again becomes the second time-saving state. Set to A (loop the second time saving state A). Therefore, in the second time-saving state A, the game is played with the expectation that the jackpot is basically won, and the jackpot B17 determined at a low rate (10% rate) is determined when the jackpot is won. It becomes a playability to perform.
Next, with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 403, a method of shifting from the second time saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown in the lower left side of FIG. 403, from the second time saving state B to another game state, a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (6 times or 11 times) is executed without winning either a big hit or a small hit. May migrate only if Specifically, as shown in the lower left side of FIG. 403, when the lottery of the special symbols of the specific number of times (6 times or 11 times) is completed in the second time saving state B, the advantage degree is lower than the second time saving state B It shifts to the second time saving state A. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state B, a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols before the lottery of the special symbols is executed for a specific number of times, or the big win is substantially fixed. When the jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the second time saving state B (the most advantageous second time saving state B is looped). Therefore, in the second time-saving state B, the player expects to win a big win or a small win before the lottery of special symbols of a specific number of times is completed. The probability of winning either a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols is 1/10, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols is basically 5 until the lottery of the special symbols of a specific number of times is completed. times or 10 times, the possibility of looping the second time saving state B is about 41% when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 5 times, and when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 10 times Approximately 65%. In addition, as described above, even if neither the jackpot nor the small hit is won during the second time saving state B, the number of time saving times is set to 5 with a high probability for each lottery of the second special symbol in the second time saving state B. Since it can be acquired (added) more than once, the degree of advantage (number of continuations) of the second time-saving state A, which is set after the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times, is normally It can be higher than the second time saving state A) set based on. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 403, the method of shifting from the third time saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown in the middle right side of FIG. 403, from the third game state B to another game state, when a big win or a small win is won, and when neither a big win nor a small win is won, a specific number of times (11 times) There is a possibility of shifting when the lottery of special symbols is executed. Specifically, as shown in the middle right side of FIG. 403, in the third time-saving state B, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, or the jackpot is substantially confirmed and the jackpot is won. Then, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the second time saving state B.例文帳に追加In addition, when the lottery of the special symbols for a specific number of times (11 times) is completed in the third time saving state B, the state shifts to the third time saving state A having a lower advantage than the third time saving state B. Therefore, in the third time-saving state B, the game can be played with a strong expectation that either a big win or a small win will be won in the lottery of special symbols within a specified number of times (11 times). In addition, like the second time saving state B described above, in the third time saving state B, it is possible to acquire (add) the number of time saving times 5 times or more with a high probability for each lottery of the second special symbol, so the specific number of times It is possible to improve the degree of advantage (the number of times of continuation) of the third time-saving state A that is set after the lottery of the special symbols is finished. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, by switching the variation pattern table in the third time saving state B, the variation time of the second special symbol is changed (the game efficiency of the second special symbol is changed) to set the third time saving state A Control, It can be said that this is another form of the setting means in the forty-fifth control example described later. That is, it is another form of setting means for setting a specific game state to a different degree of advantage when a specific condition is established in the specific game state.
Next, referring to the lower right side of FIG. 403, a method of shifting from the third time saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 403, from the third time saving state A to another game state, when the jackpot is won, when the time saving number of times has passed without winning the jackpot, and when the jackpot is not won There is a possibility that it will be transferred when the number of lotteries is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 403, when winning the jackpot A17 determined at a rate of 90% when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in the third time saving state A, the game after the jackpot ends A state is set to the 2nd time saving state A. In addition, when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbols in the third time saving state A, when winning the jackpot B17 determined at a rate of 10%, the game state after the jackpot is finished is set to the second time saving state B. be. Further, when the number of times of time saving has passed in the third time saving state A, it is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the third time-saving state A, when the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times) is reached without winning a jackpot, the third time-saving state B is set. As with the second time saving state A, it is extremely rare to reach the ceiling lottery number in the third time saving state A. , a phenomenon that can not occur unless you are hooked up to the ceiling lottery number of times). Therefore, in the third time-saving state A, similarly to the second time-saving state A, the jackpot is basically won, and the jackpot B17 determined at a low rate (10% rate) when the jackpot is won. It is a game property that the game is played in anticipation that is determined.

Thus, in the present 14th control example, in addition to the game property of going back and forth between five types of game states, even in the same time saving state, time saving state A (second time saving state A, third time saving state A ) and the time saving state B (the second time saving state B, the third time saving state B) are configured to greatly differ in the degree of advantage and game characteristics, so that the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
<Electrical Configuration in Fourteenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 404, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 404 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 404, the ROM 202 in the fourteenth control example is provided with a jackpot type selection table 202qb instead of the jackpot type selection table 202kb for the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 259). , the point that the second winning random number table 202qc is provided instead of the second winning random number table 202kc, the point that the variation pattern table 202qd is provided instead of the variation pattern table 202kd, the small winning random number table 202ke A point that a small hit random number table 202qe is provided instead of, a point that a small hit type selection table 202qf is provided instead of the small hit type selection table 202kf, and a time saving random number table 202qh instead of the time saving random number table 202kh. is provided, the point that type selection table 202qi per time saving is added, and the point that variation pattern scenario table 202qj is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the ninth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, with reference to FIG. 406(a), details of the jackpot type selection table 202qb in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 406(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection table 202qb in the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 406(a), the jackpot type selection table 202qb in the fourteenth control example includes a special figure 1 jackpot table 202qb1 and a second special It is configured at least with a special figure 2 jackpot table 202qb2 that is referred to for selecting the jackpot type of the symbol.
FIG. 406(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202qb1. As shown in FIG. 406(b), in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202qb1 in this 14th control example, there are two kinds of jackpot types of the first special symbol: "jackpot A17" and "jackpot B17". is stipulated. That is, in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202qb1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 89", and "jackpot A17" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the first hit type counter. "Jack B17" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of C2 in the range of "90 to 99".

"Jackpot A17" has 5 rounds of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state A (mainly the time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) with 51 times of time-saving times. It is a jackpot of the type that is played. In addition, "jackpot B17" has 5 rounds of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot is the second time-saving state B with 56 times of time-saving times (mainly the time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed). It is a jackpot of the type set to . In addition, when the lottery of 11 special symbols is executed in the second time saving state B, it shifts to the second time saving state A, and after that basically, the number of time saving times has passed (end) or a big hit is won. Until, the second time saving state A is maintained. As described above, since the second time saving state B is more advantageous for the player than the second time saving state A, the "jackpot B17" is a jackpot type with a higher advantage than the "jackpot A17". In addition, while 90 random numbers out of 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with "jackpot A17", "jackpot B17" Since 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with each other, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, ``jackpot A17'' occurs at a rate of 90%, and ``jackpot value B17'' occurs at a rate of 10%. ”.
Next, with reference to FIG. 406(c), details of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202qb2 described above will be described. FIG. 406(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this special figure 2 jackpot table 202qb2. As shown in FIG. 406(c), in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202qb2 in the fourteenth control example, as the second special symbol jackpot types, "jackpot C17", "jackpot D17", and "jackpot E17 , and three types are defined. That is, in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202qb2, the value of the first hit type counter C2 ranges from "0 to 84", and "jackpot C17" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the first hit type counter. When the value of C2 is in the range of ``85 to 89'', ``jackpot D17'' is defined as the jackpot type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of ``90 to 99''. As a type, "jackpot E17" is associated and defined.
As shown in FIG. 406(c), "jackpot C17", "jackpot D17", and "jackpot E17" differ in the number of rounds of jackpots from 15 rounds, 8 rounds, and 4 rounds, respectively. As the game state after the end, the second time saving state B of 86 time saving times is commonly set. Therefore, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the second time-saving state B with a high degree of advantage is set at a rate of 100%, so the lottery of the second special symbol is better than the lottery of the second special symbol. also become more advantageous. In addition, 85 random numbers out of 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with the "jackpot C17", and five random numbers are associated with the "jackpot D17". Numerical values (counter values) are associated, and 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E17", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, 85% of the At a rate of "jackpot C17", at a rate of 5% it is "jackpot D17", and at a rate of 10% it is "jackpot E17".
Thus, in this 14th control example, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol is transferred to the advantageous second time saving state B only at a rate of 10%. When the lottery is a big hit, the second time-saving state B, which is always advantageous, is set. can be made Therefore, since the game can be sharpened, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the second winning random number table 202qc in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 407(a). This second winning random number table 202qc, like the second winning random number table 202kc in the ninth control example described above, is referred to when performing a lottery for normal symbols, and is a random number (second winning random number This is a data table that defines the counter value of the counter C2).
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 407(a), 299 random numbers of "0 to 298" are used as random numbers (counter values) determined to be hits in the normal design in the low probability state of the normal design. While the (counter value) is defined in association, 300 random numbers of "0 to 299" ( counter value) are defined in association with each other. Since the second winning random number counter C4 can take a value in the range of "0 to 299", the probability of winning the normal pattern in the low probability state of the normal pattern is 299/300, and the normal pattern in the high probability state of the normal pattern. The probability of winning the symbol is 1 (300/300). In other words, in the 14th control example, even in the low probability state of normal symbols, it is determined that the lottery of normal symbols wins almost every time. This is for the purpose of almost eliminating the difference in the degree of advantage between the second time saving state and the third time saving state. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the case of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times and shifting to the third time saving state can be made substantially equal to the second time saving state, so reaching the ceiling lottery number of times is more likely. The game can be played with strong expectations.
Even in the normal state, if the through gate 67 is passed by hitting to the right and the normal pattern lottery is executed, the normal pattern wins with a high probability. , the opening period of the electric accessory 64ra is also shortened (for example, to 0.1 second), so even if the player continues to hit to the right, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the right first ball inlet 64r. . In other words, since the game efficiency is lower than when the game ball is continuously shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.
Next, details of the variation pattern table 202qd in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 407(b). Similar to the variation pattern table 202kd in the ninth control example, this variation pattern table 202qd is used to select a variation pattern (variation time) according to the result of the lottery when a special symbol lottery is executed. A referenced data table. FIG. 407(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202qd in the fourteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 407(b), the variation pattern table 202qd in the 14th control example is normally referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. A table 202qd1 and a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state A (second time saving state A, third time saving state A) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly performed. Special 1 time saving table 202qd2 referred to for selection and special design lottery is executed in time saving state B (2nd time saving state B, 3rd time saving state B) in which lottery of 2nd special design is mainly executed It is configured at least with a special 2 time reduction table 202qd3 that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern (variation time) when it is. Here, regarding the normal table 202qd1, since it has the same defined contents as the normal state variation pattern table 202kd1 (see FIG. 266) in the ninth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, in the 14th control example, there is no possibility of winning the time-saving symbol in the first special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery is different from the 9th control example in that there is a high probability that the special symbol lottery will come off with a small hit. is doing. For this reason, the defined contents related to the small hit of the first special symbol in the normal table 202qd1 of the 14th control example are the defined contents related to the deviation of the first special symbol in the normal state fluctuation pattern table 202kd1 of the ninth control example. becomes identical to
Next, with reference to FIG.407(c), the detail of table 202qd2 for special 1 time reduction which comprises the fluctuation pattern table 202qd mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG.407(c) is the figure which showed the specification content of this special 1 time reduction table 202qd2. As shown in FIG. 407 (c), the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (small hit), for the whole range (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1, variation as a variation pattern A short outage of 3 seconds is associated and defined. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, a short hit with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire possible range of the variation type counter CS1.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 407 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol is for the short-time election, the variation pattern for the full range (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take is defined in association with a long deviation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, a long win with a variation time of 600 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. there is Therefore, in the second time saving state A and the third time saving state A in which the table 202qd1 for special time saving is referred to, each time the first special symbol lottery is executed by hitting to the right, a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a very long variation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, forming a game state in which only the first special symbol lottery is executed. can do. Incidentally, as described above, in the fourteenth control example, when a right-handed hit is performed in the time-saving state, game balls frequently enter both the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641, and Since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, in the time saving state A, while the second special symbol is long varying, the first special symbol is displayed. lottery can be performed multiple times. That is, it is configured as a game state in which the game is progressed mainly by lottery of the first special symbols.
In addition, regarding the special 2 time saving table 202qd3, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds regardless of the lottery result for the time saving state variation pattern table 202kd2 (see FIG. 267) of the ninth control example described above. Since the only difference is in that they are different, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In the game state (2nd time saving state B, 3rd time saving state B) in which this special 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, the 2nd special design while the long variation (120 seconds) of the 1st special design is being performed can be continuously executed for 5 seconds or less, a game state is formed in which the game proceeds mainly by lottery of the second special symbols. In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol is changed from 600 seconds to 120 seconds in the ninth control example. It is intended to avoid a long period of time during which the lottery for the first special symbol cannot be executed because the lottery for the symbol remains for a long time. On the other hand, if the lottery time of the first special symbol is shortened too much, the lottery of the first special symbol will be executed multiple times in the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol will increase. Since there is a possibility that it will decrease, we have set a relatively long period of 120 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408(a), details of the small winning random number table 202qe will be described. This small hit random number table 202qe is, like the small hit random number table 202ke (see FIG. 261(d)) in the above-described ninth control example, a random number determined to be a small hit in a special symbol lottery (first random number This is a data table that defines the counter value of the counter C1). Drawing 408 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of small hit random number table 202qe in this 14th example of control. As shown in FIG. 408(a), in this 14th control example, the random number value (the counter value of the first per random number counter C1) is made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. ing. That is, the probability of winning a small hit is made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 408(a), as the range of the random number (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, "18 to 899" is defined. , "18 to 89" is defined as the range of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery. Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 899" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, random numbers that are determined to be small hits in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery ( Counter values) are 882 and 72 respectively, so the probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 49/50 (882/900), and the lottery of the second special symbol has a small hit. The probability is 2/25 (72/900). Considering that the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/50, the first special symbol lottery wins either a big win or a small win. Also, in the lottery for the second special symbol, a big win or a small win is won with a probability of 1/10 (2/25+1/10). Here, although the details will be described later, the small hit of the first special symbol is selected only for the disadvantageous small hit type that cannot win the jackpot (V winning cannot occur), so another control example is substantially the same as the deviation in On the other hand, as for the second special symbol small win, only the advantageous small win type that wins the big win by almost certainly generating the V prize by hitting right during the small win game is selected. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is not affected by the small win, so it is 1/50, whereas the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is substantially the total probability of the big win and the small win. Therefore, it becomes 1/10. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol.
Next, with reference to FIG. 408(b), details of the small hit type selection table 202qf in the fourteenth control example will be described. This small hit type selection table 202qf, like the small hit type selection table 202kf in the ninth control example described above, is referenced to determine the type of small hit when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery. data table. Figure 408 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this small hit type selection table 202qf. As shown in FIG. 408(b), in the small hit type selection table 202qf in the 14th control example, only one type of "small hit A17" is defined as the small hit type of the first special symbol. , three types of "small hit B17" to "small hit D17" are defined as the small hit type of the second special symbol.
"Small win A17" is a small win for which the small win winning device 2650 is opened and closed. In other words, since the V winning device 1650 provided with the specific area 1650a that triggers the winning of the big win is not opened, it is a small winning type with no possibility of winning the big win (V winning occurs). In addition, "small win B17" to "small win D17" are all small wins of the type that the V winning device 1650 is opened, and the game ball can be easily entered into the specific area 1650a by hitting to the right. Since it can be done, it is a small hit type that substantially determines the jackpot election. In addition, "jackpot B17" is a jackpot C17 (15 round special figure 2 hour short jackpot) is executed when V winning occurs, and "jackpot C17" is a jackpot D17 (8 round special figure 2 o'clock short jackpot) is executed, and as for "jackpot D17", jackpot E17 (4 round special figure 2 o'clock short jackpot) is executed when V winning occurs. Therefore, among the small hits of the second special symbols, the "small hit B17" has the highest advantage, and the "small hit D17" has the lowest advantage.

As shown in FIG. 408(b), the "small hit A17" is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 99) that the small hit type counter C5 can take. Therefore, when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, a "small win A17" that cannot generate a V prize is always determined. Therefore, the small hit of the first special symbol becomes a lottery result substantially equivalent to the loss in other control examples.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 408 (b), as the specified content for the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit B17" is defined in association Then, the value of the small per type counter C5 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69", "small per type C17" is defined, and the value of the small per type counter C5 is in the range of "70 to 99" , "small winning D17" is associated and defined. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the ratio of determining the "small hit B17" is 50%, and the ratio of determining the "small hit C17" is 20%. The rate at which the small hit D17” is determined is 30%. When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the distribution of the most advantageous "jackpot A17" is set to 85% (see Fig. 406(c)). It can be said that the setting is such that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher in the case of winning a big win in , than in the case of winning a small win and generating a V prize. Therefore, in the time-saving state B, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot with a low probability (1/50) rather than a small win with a high probability (2/25). , the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG.408(c), the detail of random-number table 202qh per time saving in this 14th control example is demonstrated. This time-saving random number table 202qh, like the time-saving random number table 202kh in the ninth control example described above, has a random value (the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined to be time-saving design winning in the special symbol lottery. It is a defined data table. FIG. 418(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving random number table 202qh. As shown in FIG. 408(c), in this 14th control example, the random number (the value of the first per random number counter C1) that is determined to be short-time winning in the second special symbol lottery is "90 to 899". 810 random numbers (counter values) are associated and defined. Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 899" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving winning is 810, so the 14th In the example of control, the probability of being determined to be short-time winning when the second special symbol lottery is executed is 9/10 (810/900). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 408(c), the first special symbol is not associated with a random number value (counter value) determined to be time saving election, so the first special symbol lottery is time saving. The possibility of winning is zero.
Thus, in the 14th control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the time-saving symbol is won with a high probability (probability of 9/10). By constructing in this way, in the time saving state B where the lottery of the second special pattern is mainly executed, the number of times of time saving can be added by winning the time saving pattern almost every fluctuation in the limited number of times of lottery. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the time saving state A can be determined according to the content of the lottery in the time saving state B set before the time saving state A, so that it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to Drawing 409 (a), the details of time saving per classification selection table 202qi added to ROM202 in the 14th example of control are explained. This time saving type selection table 202qi is a data table referred to for selecting the type of time saving design when winning the time saving design. As shown in FIG. 409(a), in this time saving winning type selection table 202qi, the type of time saving design (time saving winning type) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 409 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 "0", the number of times of time saving per type "time saving pattern A" is associated with 50 times and defined Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "1 to 19" in association with "time saving pattern B" with a time saving number of times of 10 times as a time saving hit type, and the first hit type counter C2 The value of "20 to 99" is defined in association with "time saving pattern C" with 5 times of time saving as a time saving per type.
Of the random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, random numbers associated with "time saving pattern A", "time saving pattern B", and "time saving pattern C" (Counter value) is 1, 19, and 80, respectively, so when the time-saving design is won in the lottery of the second special design, the percentage of "time-saving design A" is determined is 1%. The rate of determining the time saving pattern B" is 19%, and the rate of determining the time saving pattern C" is 80%. Therefore, in the time saving state B (second time saving state B, third time saving state B) in which the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, the number of time saving times is added 50 times at a rate of 1% when the time saving pattern is won. (Time-saving pattern A is determined), the number of time-savings is added 10 times at a rate of 19% (time-saving design B is determined), and the number of time-savings is added 5 times at a rate of 80% (time-saving design C is determined. ). As a result, variations can be provided in the number of times of time saving to be added to the time saving state B (during execution of additional RUSH), so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202qj added to the ROM 202 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 409(b). This variation pattern scenario table 202qj is a variation pattern table type (normal table 202qd1, special 1 hour reduction table 202qd2 or special 2 hour reduction table 202qd3) is defined. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is used to determine the type of variation pattern table referred to for selecting the variation pattern (variation time), and the determined variation pattern table is used. A variation pattern is selected with reference to it.
FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this variation pattern scenario table 202qj. As shown in FIG. 409(b), this variation pattern scenario table 202qj includes the previous jackpot type, the currently set game state, and the number of special symbol lotteries after the jackpot (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa ) is defined in association with the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to.

Specifically, in a situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" and the current game state is a normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is in the range of 52 to 150, and 212 to A normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the 300 range. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, no variation pattern table is associated with other ranges. This means that the range of 1 time to 51 times after the end of the jackpot A17 is always set to the second time saving state (51 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h at the end of the jackpot A17), and the end of the jackpot A17 The range of the last 151 times to 211 times is always set to the third time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number of times, so there is no possibility that the special symbol lottery will be executed in the normal state.
In addition, in the present 14th control example, when the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa reaches 300 (when the number of times of lottery of special symbols reaches 300 times without being won), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa The configuration is such that the value is updated to 150. That is, even when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached one or more times after the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, the third time saving state B can be set each time the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged. In addition, since it is not necessary to define the scenario of the special figure lottery frequency exceeding 300 times for the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj, the data amount of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.
As shown in FIG. 409(b), in the situation that the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" and the current gaming state is a time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is 1 to 51. and the range of 163 to 300, the table 202qd2 for special 1 hour reduction is defined in correspondence, and the number of lotteries of special symbols (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is 151 to 162 for the range, A special 2 hour reduction table 202qd3 is associated and defined. Therefore, the number of lotteries within 51 times after the end of the jackpot A17, and 163 times or more, as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving times remains), the special 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the first special symbol form a time-saving state A in which the lottery of is mainly executed. Moreover, since the table 202qd3 for special time reduction 202qd3 is referred in 151 times - 162 times of lotteries after the end of big hit A17, time reduction state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 409(b), in the situation where the previous big win type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the same variation as when the previous big win type is "jackpot A17" A pattern scenario is defined. That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 52-150 and the range of 212-300 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is in the range of 7 to 150 and 163 to 300. For the range, the special 1 time saving table 202qd2 is defined in association with the special symbol lottery number (value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa) for the range of 1 to 6 and the range of 151 to 162. A two-hour reduction table 202qd3 is associated and defined. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot B17 7 times to 150 times lottery number, and 163 times or more lottery number, as long as the time saving state continues (time saving number of times remains) special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to Therefore, a time saving state A in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is formed. Further, after the end of the big hit B17 1 times to 6 times, and 151 times to 162 times of lottery times, since the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed. In addition, unlike "jackpot A17", the possibility that the time saving state will continue even if the number of lotteries is in the range of 52 to 150 times is that the number of time saving conditions added in the second time saving state B immediately after the end of the jackpot This is because there is a possibility that the number of time reductions exceeding the number of lotteries will be added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 409(b), in the situation where the previous jackpot type is any one of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17". ” and “jackpot B17” are defined. That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 52-150 and the range of 212-300 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot type is one of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current gaming state is a time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is 12 to 150. , and the range of 163 ~ 300, special 1 time saving table 202qd2 is defined in association with the number of special symbol lotteries (value of special figure lottery counter 203qa) range of 1 ~ 11, and 151 ~ The table 202qd3 for special 2 time reduction is matched with respect to the range of 162, and is prescribed|regulated. Therefore, in the number of lotteries of 12 to 150 times after the end of jackpot C17 to jackpot E17, and the number of lotteries of 163 or more times, as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving times remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 Since it is referred to, the time saving state A in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed is formed. In addition, in the number of lotteries of 1 to 11 times and 151 to 162 times after the end of the jackpot C17 to jackpot E17, the time saving state B is formed because the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed. In the same way as "jackpot B17", "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" also set the second time saving state B immediately after the end of the jackpot, so depending on the number of time saving times added in the second time saving state B There is a possibility that the number of times of reduction of working hours exceeding the number of ceiling lotteries will be added.
Also, as shown in FIG. 409(b), in the situation where the jackpot has not been won (situation where the jackpot has not been won even once after the pachinko machine 10 was initialized), the current gaming state is the normal state. , the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa) ranges from 1 to 150 and from 212 to 300, and is defined in association with the normal table 202qd1. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, in a situation where the jackpot has not been won and the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa) is in the range of 163 to 300. A table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence, and a table 202qd3 for special 2 hour reduction is defined in association with the range of 151 to 162 for the number of times of lottery of special symbols (value of special lottery counter 203qa). Therefore, in the lottery number of 163 times or more after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, as long as the time saving state continues (the time saving number remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the lottery of the first special symbol forms a time-saving state A in which is mainly executed. Further, in the number of lotteries of 151 times to 162 times after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, so the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed.
Thus, in this 14th control example, the variation pattern scenario is defined by the variation pattern scenario table 202qj, and the variation pattern table is selected according to the previous big hit type, the current game state, and the number of lotteries of special symbols. Therefore, a relatively complicated game state transition method can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 405, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 405 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 405, the RAM 203 in the fourteenth control example has a special figure lottery counter 203qa, a jackpot flag 203qb, and a special figure 1 It is different in that the small hit flag 203qc and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203qd are added. Moreover, it is also different in that the small hit A counter 203fg and the small hit B counter 203fh are deleted.

The special figure lottery counter 203qa is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot (or after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized). This special figure lottery counter 203qa is updated by adding one value at a time to set the start of the variable display of special symbols (see S38103 in FIG. 416). By referring to the value of this special figure lottery counter 203qa, it is determined whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and selection processing of a variation pattern table corresponding to the lottery number of times from the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is executed.
The big hit flag 203qb is a flag that is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (see Y8011 in FIG. 413 and Y8111 in FIG. 420). This jackpot flag 203qb is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see Y727 in FIG. 417 and Y925 in FIG. 423). The jackpot flag 203qb is provided with a jackpot flag for the first special symbol and a jackpot flag for the second special symbol. When the variable display of the first special symbol ends while the variable display of the symbols is being executed, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol is performed (see Y726 in FIG. 417). Further, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the jackpot flag for the second special symbol is on and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol is displayed. A process of forcibly stopping the game at the outlier symbol is executed (see Y924 in FIG. 423). As a result, when one of the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern becomes a big win and the other becomes a big win or a small win, the big win and the big win or the big win and the small win are started in duplicate. It is possible to prevent troubles that may occur.
The special figure 1 small hit flag 203qc is a flag that is set to ON when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit (see Y8055 in FIG. 414). This special figure 1 small hit flag 203qc is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit of the first special symbol (see Y759 in FIG. 418). With the special figure 1 small hit flag 203qd ON, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is removed. A forced stop process is executed (see Y753 in FIG. 418). As a result, when one of the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern becomes a small hit, and the other becomes a big win or a small win, the small win and the big win or the small win and the small win overlap. It is possible to prevent a problem that is started by
The special figure 2 small hit flag 203qd is a flag that is set to ON when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit (see Y8055 in FIG. 414). This special figure 2 small hit flag 203qd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit of the second special symbol (see Y759 in FIG. 418). With the special figure 1 small hit flag 203qd ON, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is removed. A forced stop process is executed (see Y959 in FIG. 425). As a result, when one of the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern becomes a small hit, and the other becomes a big win or a small win, the small win and the big win or the small win and the small win overlap. It is possible to prevent a problem that is started by

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 410 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 410, the RAM 223 in the 14th control example has a configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example (and the second control example) described above (see FIG. 101(b)). 223lc, an add-on RUSH counter 223qa, a base number counter 223qb, and an add-on number counter 223qc are added. Moreover, it is different also in the point that time saving lottery frequency counter 223db, mode classification storage area 223dc, flag 223dd in long time saving, and initial setting flag 223de are deleted.
The special figure lottery counter 223lc is a counter having the same function as the special figure lottery counter 223lc such as the tenth control example described above. That is, it is a counter that is updated in synchronization with the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa provided in the RAM 223 in the main controller 110, and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is notified by the state command from the main controller 110. The value is updated each time The special symbol lottery counter 223lc always makes the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the big win grasped by the main control device 110 and the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big win grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 side always coincide. be able to.
Counter 223qa during add-on RUSH is a counter indicating the remaining number of times until add-on RUSH (time saving state B) ends. The initial value of this additional RUSH counter 223qa is set to 0, and when the time saving state B (either the second time saving state or the third time saving state) is set, the counter value (time saving A value corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries until transition to state A) is set. That is, in the case of transition to time saving state B based on reaching the number of ceiling lotteries (150 times), or transition to time saving state B based on winning big hits C17 to E17, the number of lotteries in time saving state B is 11 times. , 11 is set for the counter 223qa during addition RUSH (see S9314A in FIG. 426). In addition, in the case of transition to the time saving state B based on winning the big hit B17, the number of lotteries in the time saving state B is set to 6 times, so 6 is set for the counter 223qa during the addition RUSH (Fig. 426, S9317A). Also, every time a special symbol lottery is executed once in the add-on RUSH, the value is updated by subtracting one. Depending on the value of the add-on RUSH counter 223qa, the display of the remaining number of times until the end of the add-on RUSH is set.
The base number counter 223qb is already determined at the time of entering the time saving state B (additional RUSH) among the time saving times of the time saving state A that shifts after the time saving state B (additional RUSH) is completed (guaranteed It is a counter that indicates the number of times of reduced working hours (the number of reduced working hours of the base). The base number counter 223qb has an initial value set to 0, and when it shifts to the time saving state B, the number of times of lottery of special symbols between the time saving number set with the transition and the time saving state B is calculated. A reduced value is set. More specifically, when the time saving state B is set based on winning one of the big hits C17 to E17, 75 is set for this base number counter 223qb (see S9316A in FIG. 426) . In addition, when the time saving state B is set based on winning the jackpot B17, and when the time saving state B is set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number, 50 to this base number counter 223qb is set (see S9318A in FIG. 426). The value set in this base frequency counter 223qb continues to be displayed on the left side of the small display area Dm13 during the time saving state B (additional RUSH).

The number-of-additions counter 223qc is a counter for counting the number of time-savings added in the time-saving state B (additional RUSH). The initial value of this additional number counter 223qc is set to 0, and in the time saving state B (additional RUSH), the time saving pattern is elected in the lottery of the second special pattern, and the time saving number is added (for the time saving counter 203h The number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is added), the counter value corresponding to the added number of time saving times is added and updated (see S9629A in FIG. 427). The value set in this addition number counter 223qc continues to be displayed on the right side of the small display area Dm13 during the time saving state B (addition RUSH).
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourteenth control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 425. FIG. Specifically, in the 14th control example, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 411) is executed instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 269) in the ninth control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ninth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that the change from the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 269) to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 411) is mainly because one special symbol is displayed while the other special symbol is a big hit or a small winning symbol and the other special symbol is stopped and displayed. When it is done, it is accompanied by a change to the specification that one of the special symbols during variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol.
First, with reference to FIG. 411, the special symbol variation process (Y111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 411 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process (Y111). Of this special symbol variation process (Y111), each process of Y231, Y234 and Y238 is the same as each process of Y231, Y234 and Y238 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 269) in the ninth control example. is executed.
Also, in the special symbol variation process (Y111) of the present control example, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) in the process of Y234 (Y234: No ), instead of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 270) in the ninth control example, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (Y251), and the process proceeds to Y238. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (Y251) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y234, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is subtracted and updated (Y252), The display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device is updated (Y253), and then the first special symbol variation stop process instead of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 276) in the ninth control example described above. is executed (Y254), and the process proceeds to Y238. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (Y254) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Also, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 411) in the present 14th control example, in the process of Y238, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (Y238: No), instead of the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 279) in the ninth control example described above, the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (Y255), and this processing ends. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (Y255) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is subtracted and updated (Y256), The display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device is updated (Y257), and the second special symbol variation stop process is executed instead of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 285) in the ninth control example described above. (Y258), and this process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y258) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 412, the first special symbol variation start process (Y251), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 411) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 412 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process (Y251).

Of this first special symbol variation start process (Y251), in each process of Y302 to Y306 and Y309, each of Y302 to Y306 and Y309 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 270) in the ninth control example The same processing as the processing is executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process (Y251) in the fourteenth control example, the process of Y301 in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 270) in the ninth control example is deleted. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example, after executing the process of Y306, instead of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 271) in the ninth control example, The first special symbol determination process is executed (Y321), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (Y322) instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 272) in the ninth control example, and the process is performed. to Y309. Furthermore, in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the 14th control example, when the process of Y309 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached. When it does, the ceiling decision processing for setting the 3rd time saving state is executed (Y323), and this processing ends. Details of the first special symbol determination process (Y321), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y322), and the ceiling determination process (Y323) will be described later with reference to FIGS.
Next, with reference to FIG. 413, the first special symbol determination process (Y321), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 413 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol determination process (Y321).
Of this first special symbol determination process (Y321), each process of Y8001 to Y8006 is the same as each process of Y8001 to Y8006 of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 271) in the ninth control example. executed. In addition, in the first special symbol determination process (Y321) of this control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit at Y8003, (Y8003: Yes), the big hit flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is set. It is set to ON (Y8011), and the process proceeds to Y8004. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8003: No), a small winning lottery process is executed (Y8012), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 414, the small winning lottery process (Y8012), which is one process of the first special symbol determination process (FIG. 413) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 414 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning lottery process (Y8012).

In this small hit lottery process (Y8012), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is the time-saving winning (Y8051). In the process of Y8051, when it is determined that the lottery result is the time-saving election (Y8051: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving election (Y8051: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the small hit random number table 202qe (Y8052), and it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit ( Y8053), when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (Y8053: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (Y8053: Yes), based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, select a small hit type from the small hit type selection table 202qf, The small hit pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the 1-symbol display device is set (Y8054), the small hit flag corresponding to the special pattern won in the small hit this time is set to ON (Y8055), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y5053, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (Y8053: No), the processes of Y8054 and Y8055 are skipped, and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 415, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y322), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 415 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y322).
Of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y322), in each process of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, Y501 to Y503 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 272) in the ninth control example and the same processes as those of Y505 to Y508 are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y322) of this control example, after executing the process of Y503, the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is referred to and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the current special figure lottery counter 203qa The selection table is specified (Y511), the specified variation pattern selection table is read (Y512), and the process proceeds to Y505.
Next, with reference to FIG. 416, the ceiling determination process (Y323), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process (Y323).

In this ceiling determination process (Y323), first, add 1 to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa (S38103), determine whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is 300 (S38121A), special figure When it is determined that the value of the lottery counter 203qa is 300 (S38121A: Yes), the value of the special lottery counter 203qa is updated to 150 (S38122A), and the state including information indicating the value of the special lottery counter 203qa A command is set (S38105), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S38121A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is not 300 (S38121A: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is 151. (S38123A), when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is not 151 (S38123A: No), the process proceeds to S38105.
On the other hand, in the process of S38123A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is 151 (S38123A: Yes), it means that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, so 61 to the time saving counter 203h By adding, the third time saving state is set (S38124A), and the information indicating the third time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38112A). Next, the information about this time saving lottery is cleared (S38113A), the state command including the information indicating the third time saving state and the information indicating the number of times of working time saving is set (S38114A), and this process is finished.
Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y254), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 411) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation stop process (Y254).
Of this first special symbol variation stop process (Y254), in each process of Y701 and Y704 to Y707, each of Y701 and Y704 to Y707 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 276) in the ninth control example The same processing as the processing is executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation stop process (Y254) of this control example, when it is determined in the process of Y701 that the variation time has not ended (Y701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has ended (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot flag 203qb is ON (Y721), and the first special symbol When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb is not ON (Y721: No), it means that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot, so special figure 1 loss stop processing is executed (Y722). , the process ends. The details of the special figure 1 deviating stop process (Y722) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y721, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb in the first special symbol is ON (Y721: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is a value greater than 0 (Y723), when the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is a value greater than 0 (that is, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) (Y723: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop Set the flag 203kf to ON (Y724), set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the special figure 2 fluctuation stop (Y725), remove the second special pattern of the first design display device and stop display with the design ( Y726), and the process proceeds to Y727.
On the other hand, in the process of Y723, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0 (that is, not during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) (Y723: No), the process of Y724 to Y726 is performed. Skip and proceed to Y727. Next, the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is set to OFF (Y727), and the process proceeds to Y704.
Next, with reference to FIG. 418, special figure 1 loss stop processing (Y722), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 417) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 1 deviating stop process (Y722).
In this special figure 1 off stop processing (Y722), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small per flag 203qc is ON (Y751), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203qc is on (Y751: Yes), set a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (Y752), stop and display the second special symbol of the first symbol display device (Y753), and set a small hit scenario (Y754 ). Next, the small hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (Y755), the small hit medium flag 203fc is set to ON (Y756), and the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (Y757). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped by a small winning symbol (Y758), the special 1 small winning flag 203qc is set to OFF (Y759), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the process of Y751, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203qc is not on (that is, it is off) (Y751: No), the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (Y760), The first special symbol on the one-symbol display device is deviated and the fluctuation is stopped with the symbol (Y761), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the second special symbol variation start process (Y255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 411) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (Y255).
Among the second special symbol variation start processing (Y255), in each processing of Y832 to Y836 and Y839 (Y309), Y832 to Y836 and Y832 to Y836 of the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 279) in the ninth control example, respectively The same processing as each processing of Y839 (Y309) is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (Y255) of the present control example, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is ON (Y851), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is ON When it is determined that (Y851: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to OFF (Y852), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y851: No), the process proceeds to Y832.
Also, after executing the process of Y836, the second special symbol determination process is executed (Y853), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (Y854), then Y839 (Y309) is executed, and the ceiling is judged. The process is executed (Y855 (Y323)) and the process ends. Details of the second special symbol determination process (Y853) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y854) will be described later with reference to FIGS. Also, the ceiling determination process (Y855 (Y323)) has the same contents as those in FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 420, the second special symbol determination process (Y853), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 419) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol determination process (Y853).

Of this second special symbol determination process (Y853), each process of Y8101 to Y8106 is the same as each process of Y8101 to Y8106 of the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 280) in the ninth control example. executed. In addition, in the second special symbol determination process (Y853) of this control example, in the process of Y8103, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Y8103: Yes), the big hit flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is turned on (Y8111), and the process proceeds to Y8104. On the other hand, in the process of Y8103, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8103: No), the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process is executed (Y8112), and the small winning lottery process is executed (Y8113 (Y8012) ), the process ends. In addition, the details of the special figure 2 time saving lottery process (Y8112) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the small winning lottery process (Y8113 (Y8012)) has the same content as in FIG. 414 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 421, the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process (Y8112), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process (FIG. 420) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. Figure 421 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 time saving lottery processing (Y8112).
Of this special figure 2 time saving lottery process (Y8112), in each process of Y8202 and Y8206, the same process as each process of Y8202 and Y8206 of the special figure 2 time saving lottery process (see FIG. 281) in the ninth control example is performed. executed. Moreover, in the special figure 2 time saving lottery process (Y8112) of this control example, first, the lottery result is obtained based on the time saving random number table 202qh (Y8211), and the process proceeds to Y8202. In addition, in the special figure 2 time saving lottery process (see FIG. 421) in the present 14th control example, in the process of Y8202, when it is determined that the lottery result is time saving winning (Y8202: Yes), the first symbol display device A time-saving design is set as a special design to be displayed in (Y8212), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 422, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y854), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 419) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 422 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y854).

Of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y854), in each process of Y921 to Y928, each process of Y921 to Y928 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 283) in the ninth control example The same processing is performed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y854) of this control example, after executing the process of Y923, the current special figure lottery counter with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202qj (see FIG. 409 (b)) A variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of 203qa, the current gaming state, and the previous big hit type is specified (Y931), the specified variation pattern selection table is read out (Y932), and the process proceeds to Y924.
Next, with reference to FIG. 423, the second special symbol variation stop process (Y528), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 411) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 423 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation stop process (Y528).
Among the second special symbol variation stop processing (Y528), Y901, Y906 to Y909, and Y914, respectively, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 285) Y901, Y906 to Y914 in the ninth control example. The same processing as each of Y909 and Y914 is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process (Y528) in the present 14th control example, in the process of Y901, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation time (Y901: Yes), it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is determined whether the big hit flag 203qb is on (Y921), and when it is determined that the big hit flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y921: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation time It is determined whether or not the value of the timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y922). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is a value greater than 0 (Y922: Yes), it is the stop display timing of the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern during the fluctuation display of the first special pattern. In order to stop and display the fluctuation of the first special symbol being executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (Y923), and the first special symbol of the first symbol display device The symbol is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (Y924), then the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is set to OFF (Y925), and the process proceeds to Y906. On the other hand, in the process of Y922, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable time timer 203ka is not a value greater than 0 (that is, 0) (Y922: No), the processes of Y923 and Y924 are skipped, and the process to Y925.
On the other hand, in the process of Y921, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y921: No), the process of Y914 is executed, and the process of Y914 is performed. In, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is the time saving symbol winning (Y914: Yes), the time saving setting process is executed instead of the time saving setting process (see FIG. 278) in the ninth control example ( Y926), and the process proceeds to Y908. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not time-saving symbol winning (Y914: No), the special figure 2 loss stop process is executed (Y927), and the process is terminated. The details of the time saving setting process (Y926) and the special figure 2 deviating stop process (Y927) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 424 and 425. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the time saving setting process (Y926), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 423) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 424 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving setting process (Y926).
This time-saving setting process (Y926) is similar to the time-saving setting process (see FIG. 278) in the ninth control example described above, when a time-saving design is won in a special design lottery, setting of a time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving design. This is a process for performing Among the time saving setting process (see FIG. 424) in the fourteenth control example, each process of Y8354 and Y8455 is the same process as each process of Y8354 and Y8455 of the time saving setting process (see FIG. 278) in the ninth control example is executed. In addition, in the time saving setting process (see FIG. 424) in the present 14th control example, first, the value corresponding to the time saving pattern won this time is added to the time saving counter 203h (Y8361), and the process proceeds to Y8354.
Thus, in this 14th control example, every time a time saving pattern is won, the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern can be added to the time saving counter 203h. In the time saving state B in which the special pattern lottery is likely to be executed, every time the second special pattern lottery is executed, the number of times of time saving is added almost every time, thereby realizing a novel game property. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 425, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (Y927), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 423) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. This special figure 2 loss stop process (Y927) is a process for setting the stop display of the second special symbol loss (including a small hit) symbol. FIG. 425 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 2 deviating stop process (Y927).

In this special figure 2 off stop processing (Y927), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small per flag 203qd is ON (Y951), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 small per flag 203qd is on (Y951: Yes), set a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command (Y952), stop and display the first special symbol of the first symbol display device (Y953), and set a small hit scenario (Y954 ). Next, the small hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (Y955), the small hit medium flag 203fc is set to ON (Y956), and the special figure 2 decision command is set (Y957). Then, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped by the small winning symbol (Y958), the special figure 2 small winning flag 203qd is set to OFF (Y959), and this process is finished.
On the other hand, in the process of Y951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag 203qd is not on (that is, it is off) (Y951: No), the special figure 2 determination command is set (Y960), The second special symbol on the one-symbol display device is deviated and the fluctuation is stopped with the symbol (Y961), and this processing is terminated.
By executing this special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 425), when winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol and stopping and displaying the small winning symbol based on the small winning winning, the first It is possible to stop and display the variable display of the special symbols with the deviating symbols. As a result, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win, it is possible to suppress the overlapping execution of the big win and the small win or the small win and the small win.
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the fourteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 426 to 427, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. In this 14th control example, the content of the time saving state production setting process (S9011A), which is one process of the state command reception process (see FIG. 115), is changed with respect to the ninth control example (and the second control example) described above. The difference is that the content of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 121) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that each of the above-described control examples and elements that are the same as those explained in each control example are not explained in detail, and the contents explained in each control example and each control example are the same. It is adapted. In addition, the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are naturally applied to the 14th control example, and the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are also applied. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the fourteenth control example.

First, with reference to Drawing 426, time saving state production setting processing (S9011A) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example is explained. FIG. 426 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving state effect setting process (S9011A). In this time saving state effect setting process (S9011A), first, the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving counter 223da (S9311A), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving state B has been changed ( S9312A), when it is determined that the state has not been changed to the time saving state B (S9312A: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S9312A, if it is determined that it has changed to the time saving state B (S9312A: Yes), it is determined whether it is a time saving state triggered by the big hit B17 (S9313A), and the big hit B17 is triggered If it is determined that it is not a time saving state (S9313A: No), the counter 223qa during addition RUSH is set to 11 (S9314A), and it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A) . When it is determined that it is not the time-saving state triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: No), the base number counter 223qb is set to 75 (S9316A), and the process proceeds to S9319A.
On the other hand, in S9313A, when it is determined that it is a time saving state triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A: Yes), 6 is set to the counter 223qa during the addition RUSH (S9317A), and 50 is set to the base number counter 223qb (S9318A), the process proceeds to S9319A. In addition, in the processing of S9315A, when it is determined that it is a time saving state triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: Yes), the processing proceeds to S9318A. Next, according to each counter value, the display of the remaining number of RUSH and the number of initial stocks is set (S9319A), and this processing is finished.
Next, with reference to Drawing 427, special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S4991A) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in this 14th example of control is explained. Figure 427 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S4991A).

In the process of S9611 of this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4991A), the same process as the process of S9611 of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 121) in the ninth control example is executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4991A) of this control example, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving state (S9621A), and when it is determined that it is not the time saving state (S9621A: No), The effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern is determined (S6922A), the process of S9611 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a time saving state (S9621A: Yes), it is determined whether it is a time saving state A (S9623A), and if it is determined that it is a time saving state A (S9623A: Yes), It is determined whether it is the first special figure 2 variation after the end of the add-on RUSH (S9624A), and when it is determined that it is the first special figure 2 variation after the end of the add-on RUSH (S9624A: Yes), the special figure 1 A chance time entry display (see FIG. 401(b)) that continues until the end of the remaining fluctuation time is set (S9625A), and the total number of times is the value obtained by adding the value of the base number counter 223qb and the value of the additional number counter 223qc. Display is set (S9626A), and the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, in the process of S9624A, if it is determined that it is not the first special figure 2 variation after the end of the add-on RUSH (S9624A: No), the processes of S9625A and S9626A are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9622A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S9623A, when it is determined that it is not the time saving state A (S9623A: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is the time saving design winning (S9627A), and the time saving design winning If it is determined (S9627A: Yes), determine the variable display mode (see FIG. 401 (a)) for notifying the number of additions according to the winning time saving pattern (S9628A), corresponding to the winning time saving pattern The number of times of time saving is added to the time saving medium counter 223da and the additional number counter 223qc (S9629A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9627A, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving election (that is, a jackpot or a small hit that substantially confirms the jackpot) (S9627A: No), a variable display that informs the reset of the additional RUSH The mode (see FIG. 402) is determined (S9630A), the value of the addition number counter 223qc is cleared to 0 (S9631A), and the process proceeds to S9611.
By executing this special figure 2 performance mode setting process (see FIG. 427), every time the lottery of the second special pattern is executed in the time saving state B and the time saving pattern is won, the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern is added. can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to realize a very novel performance mode in which the time-saving pattern is added at almost every variation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present fourteenth control example, as the time saving state, the time saving state (second time saving state A, third time saving state A) in which the lottery of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed , and a time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which the lottery of the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage is easily executed, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, first, the third time-saving state is provided. While the state B is set, when the big win is won in the normal state, the time saving state after the end of the big win is set to the second time saving state A with a low advantage at a high rate. . By constructing in this way, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the ceiling lottery number of times will be reached, rather than winning the jackpot.

Further, in the 14th control example, when the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, the number of times of time saving corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is added. And, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is won at a higher probability (for example, at a rate of 90%) than in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, it moves to the second time saving state A or the third time saving state A by executing the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). It is configured to That is, during the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, every time the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, the time saving pattern is elected with a high probability and the number of time saving times is added. It is novel in that the number of continuations of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A that shifts after the special pattern lottery has passed can be varied according to the special pattern lottery result executed during the time-saving state B.例文帳に追加Realizes playability.
In addition, in the 14th control example, only the "small hit A17" in which the V prize cannot occur is provided as the small win of the first special symbol, but even the small win of the first special symbol is partly It may be configured so that a V prize can occur. Then, if there is a lottery result of the first special symbol that can cause V winning just before the ceiling (for example, the number of lotteries remaining until reaching the ceiling lottery number is within 5 times), V winning in the small winning It may be configured to execute an effect prompting not to generate. That is, in particular, when it becomes a small hit of the type that wins the "jackpot A17" in which the second time saving state A is set by generating the V winning prize, the V winning prize is generated and the second time saving state A is shifted to. Since it is more likely that it will be more advantageous to reach the ceiling lottery number of times and move to the third time saving state B than, in such a case, a novel production that urges the player to avoid the V prize is provided. may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.
In this 14th control example, every time a time saving pattern is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time saving state B (additional RUSH), an effect is executed to add the number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern. , but not limited to these. For example, halfway in the time saving state B (for example, until the 9th second special symbol lottery is executed), the number of times of saving time is hidden without notifying, and a predetermined notification timing (for example, time saving state B It is also possible to collectively notify the number of times of addition in the variable display effect related to the variable display of the last second special symbol in . By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player predicts how many times of time saving is added until a predetermined notification timing, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can be done. Also, in this case, every time the lottery for the special symbol is executed, an effect suggesting the added number of times of time saving may be executed, or the information on the number of times of time saving may not be suggested at all. In the former case, it is possible to easily predict the situation of adding the number of times of time saving, and in the latter case, the game is played by paying attention to whether or not the second special symbol lottery will be a big hit until the notification timing. can be done.
In this 14th control example, it was configured to win a jackpot or a small win with a probability of 1/10 in the lottery of the second special pattern, and to win a time-saving pattern with a probability of 9/10, but it is not limited to this. do not have. It may be configured to win the time saving pattern with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2). In other words, in the 14th control example, a mere lottery result of a loss is not provided, but a configuration may be provided in which a loss is provided. With this configuration, the player can be pleased only by winning the time saving pattern in the time saving state B, so that the player's interest in the game in the time saving state B can be improved. In addition, in the present 14th control example, the second special symbol lottery is executed which is advantageous by changing the variation pattern table to be referred to depending on whether it is the third time saving state A or the third time saving state B. Although the degree of advantage is differentiated by varying the ease, the method of differentiating the substantial degree of advantage by varying the variation pattern table referred to in the same game state is not limited to this. For example, in the third time-saving state A and the third time-saving state B, the lottery of the same special pattern (for example, the first special pattern) is configured to be easily executed, and the degree of advantage is varied by varying the game efficiency. can be different.

In the thirteenth to fourteenth control examples described above, it was configured to shift to the third time saving state when the ceiling lottery number was reached, but the game state set when the ceiling lottery number was reached is the third time saving state , but can be set to any game state. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to shift to a second time saving state more advantageous than the third time saving state, or may be configured to transfer to a more advantageous second probability variable state. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached can be varied, so the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
In the thirteenth to fourteenth control examples described above, it was configured to shift to an advantageous game state (third time saving state) when the fixed ceiling lottery number was reached, but the ceiling lottery number does not have to be fixed. . For example, the number of times that can be set as the ceiling lottery number of times (for example, 50 times, 300 times, 500 times, 1000 times, etc.) is provided, and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on) When the power is turned on at ) or at the end of the jackpot, the ceiling lottery number may be determined by lottery. By constructing in this way, it is possible to add a game property in which the game is performed in anticipation that a small number of lotteries will be selected as the ceiling number of lotteries, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. . In this case, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, during the first variable display effect after initialization) or at the end of the jackpot (for example, during the ending effect or during the first variable display effect after the end), It is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation which suggests the ceiling lottery frequency. By constructing in this way, it is possible to further add the playability of predicting the ceiling lottery number of times from the performance suggesting the ceiling lottery number of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, for example, the ceiling lottery frequency after the end of the jackpot may be changed for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of the jackpot when playing the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, the number of rounds and the game state after the end of the big win may be common, and the jackpot types may be provided in which the ceiling lottery number of times after the end of the big win is different. Specifically, for example, as a 4-round short-time jackpot, a type with a ceiling lottery number of 100 times and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 1000 times are provided, or as an 8-round short-time jackpot, a type with a ceiling lottery number of 400 times and a type of 600 times may be provided. By constructing in this way, when the 4-round short-time jackpot is won, there is a possibility that the ceiling lottery frequency is small, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, when an 8-round time-saving jackpot is won, there is no possibility that an extremely large ceiling lottery count of 1000 times is set, so that the game can be played with peace of mind.
In the thirteenth to fourteenth control examples described above, the RAM 203 is also initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, so that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is reset. , but not limited to these. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la may not be reset. By configuring in this way, there is a high possibility that the player has been initialized (for example, when it is the closing time of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed during the jackpot or the second probability variable state, etc. ) Since it is possible to suppress the avoidance of playing the pachinko machine 10, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved regardless of the possibility of initialization.
<Fifteenth control example>
Next, the contents of the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 428 to 458. FIG. This fifteenth control example has a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in contrast to the above-described fourth control example. If it is being displayed, the difference is that the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be able to store (hold storage) a predetermined number (up to 4 in this 15th control example). ing.

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, during execution of the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (read ahead). As a result, when there is a reservation (V reservation) that is a small winning, the difference is that the effect for informing that the V reservation exists can be executed.
Specifically, when the jackpot game is started, as a result of prefetching the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (reserved storage), when V reservation exists , an effect (V-icon acquisition effect) for acquiring a "V-icon", which is a notification mode indicating the presence of the V-hold, is executed. The acquired V icon is reduced and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the start of the variable display of the special symbols based on the V reserve, and is enlarged and displayed during the variable display of the special symbols based on the V reserve ( hereinafter referred to as activation of the V-icon), the player is informed that a small winning will be won by this variation.
By configuring in this way, the player is notified in advance that the small winning will be won in the special symbol lottery executed after the big winning game is over, so that the small winning will not be won after the big winning game is over. It is possible to suppress the player's anxiety that the number of fluctuations will be reached and the time saving state will end.
Here, as a result of prefetching the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (holding reservation storage) during execution of the jackpot game, if there is V reservation, be sure to Assuming that the V icon acquisition effect is executed, if the V icon acquisition effect is not executed, the special figure 2 reserve stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b. It turns out that there are no V-holds (ie, they are all out), which may disappoint the player.

Therefore, in the fifteenth control example, as a result of pre-reading the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b during execution of the jackpot game, V reservation is It is configured to execute the V-icon acquisition effect in part of the cases where it exists.
By configuring in this way, even if the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during execution of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Until the variable display of the special symbols based on the reservation is completed, the player can be expected to win a small prize.
Further, in the fifteenth control example, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the activation of the V icon in the variable display of the special symbol. and
Specifically, when starting the variable display of the special symbol based on V reservation (reservation to win a small hit), the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b Determining whether there is another V reservation in the game, and if there is a V reservation, activates the V icon (enlarging the V icon and notifying that the small win is won). Instead, the reduction display of the V icon can be continued until the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold that will be digested later.

With this configuration, even if the V icon is not activated during the variable display of the special symbols in the state where the V icon has been acquired, there is a possibility of winning a small prize. Even if the V icon is not activated until the end of the variable display, the player can have an expectation that he or she may win a small prize.
In addition, by configuring in this way, for example, there was only one V reservation during the jackpot game, but the period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reservation When V suspension is newly stored (holding storage) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it is possible to switch the activation target of the V icon to the new V holding. As a result, even if the last hold of the special figure 2 hold that is prefetched at the time when the V icon acquisition effect is executed is V hold, during the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold, V The icon is not always activated, and the non-activation of the V icon confirms consecutive chances (continuous winning of small wins). It is possible to improve the interest of
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, a plurality of V reserves are stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and when the V icon is displayed, the V reserve to be digested first is to be the activation target of the V icon, or the V icon to be activated later is determined when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V retention to be digested first is started. However, it is not limited to this, for example, it is set in advance that the activation of the V icon is easily executed with the V suspension that is digested first, or the activation of the V icon is executed with the V suspension that is digested later. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to select whether the setting is easy or not by operating a button according to the preference of the player.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is the number of special figure 2 reservations stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, and the number of V reservations. It has a different configuration depending on the position.

Specifically, when the top special figure 2 reservation (first reservation) of the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is V reservation, the second special The smaller the number of special figures 2 reserved stored (reserved storage) in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the easier the V icon acquisition effect is executed. Also, when four special figure 2 reservations stored (reserved memory) stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are stored (reserved memory), the special figure 2 reservation to be digested first is V When the special figure 2 suspension to be digested later is V suspension than when it is suspension, the ratio of execution of the V icon acquisition effect is configured to be higher.
By configuring in this way, when the activation of the V icon is executed, at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect that acquired the V icon, many special figures 2 reserves that have not been prefetched tend to remain, so the V icon It is possible to make it difficult to predict the lottery result of the special figure 2 pending remaining after the activation of.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, when the first reservation is V reservation (reservation to win a small hit), the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b Although the configuration is such that the smaller the number, the easier the V-icon acquisition effect is executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the larger the number of the special figure 2 reserves, the easier the V-icon acquisition effect is executed.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, when four special symbols 2 reserve stored (reserved memory) stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are stored (reserved memory), they are digested first. The ratio of executing the V icon acquisition effect is configured to be higher when the special figure 2 suspension to be consumed later is V suspension than when the special figure 2 suspension to be consumed is V suspension, but it is limited to this If the special figure 2 suspension that is digested first is V suspension rather than the case that the special figure 2 suspension that is digested later is V suspension, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is higher. You can configure it higher.

It should be noted that the larger the number of V reservations stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is executed.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, when a plurality of V reserves are stored (hold storage) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, the activation of the V icon is executed in the V reserve that is digested first. Whether or not to do so is determined according to the variation pattern.
Specifically, when a plurality of V reserves are stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, in the V reserve to be digested first, when a specific variation pattern is not set is configured to execute activation of the V icon, and a specific performance mode setting table having a setting ratio of the specific performance mode different from the performance mode setting table referred to when the V icon is not activated is referred to. In addition, the specific effect mode is, for example, an effect (so-called premium effect) that is executed only in the case of winning a big win or a small win, or a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. It refers to an effect (so-called resurrection effect) that is changed to a display mode showing .
By configuring in this way, the player can easily predict whether or not the V-icon will be activated from the effect mode to be executed, so it is possible to make the player interested in the effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the fifteenth control example, when the activation of the V icon is executed, the premier effect and the resurrection effect are difficult to be executed. A simple configuration may be used. Also, for example, in a part of the case where a plurality of V reservations (reservations for winning small hits) are stored (reservation storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, special symbols based on V reservations to be digested later. The period until the start of the variable display of the V icon may be configured so that the period during which activation of the V icon is prohibited can be set. , a display mode in which a chain is wrapped around the V icon to lock). By configuring in this way, when a performance with a high expectation of winning a small prize is executed during a period in which activation of the V icon is prohibited, the degree of expectation for winning a small prize in which the activation of the V icon is not executed is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance during the period in which activation of the V icon is prohibited.
It should be noted that during the variable display of one special symbol, there may be a timing at which the V icon is likely to be activated and a timing at which the V icon is difficult to be activated. For example, during the variable display of the special symbol. When the ready-to-win performance is executed, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols to the start of the ready-to-win performance is more likely to execute the activation of the V icon than the period from the start of the ready-to-win performance to the stop display of the special symbols. By doing so, if the activation of the V icon is not executed by the start of the ready-to-win effect, it is possible for the player to have expectations for consecutive chances, so the V icon is activated immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if it has not been done, the player can be interested in whether or not it will reach reach.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect during the jackpot game is determined by whether or not there is a V hold as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored. However, it is not limited to this. Whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition performance during the jackpot game may be determined based on the prefetch result of the reserved and stored special figure 1 reservation (winning information of the first special symbol). It is good also as a structure determined by the look-ahead result of both 2 reservation and special figure 1 reservation. In addition, when there is a V reserve in the special figure 2 reserve and when there is a V reserve in the special figure 1 reserve, the display mode of the V icon displayed may be different.
The pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described below, but the same reference numerals will be given to the same contents as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifteenth Control Example>
First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 428 to 433. FIG. 428 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example, and FIG. 429 is an enlarged view of the front view lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example, 430 to 433 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example.
As shown in FIG. 428, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.
The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 428, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.
In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is played). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 94) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 428) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 428) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 428). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 94), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the fifteenth control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. there is Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable display mode by the lighting state, or stop the display. The pattern is a pattern corresponding to the time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a missing pattern The number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.
Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is given (16R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and after the jackpot ends. 10R time-saving jackpot (10R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state, 7R time-saving jackpot (7R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state after the jackpot ends in 7 rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game There is a 7R normal jackpot (7R no time saving jackpot) in which a time saving state is not given after the 7R jackpot ends.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. In the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, not only is it indicated whether the lottery result is a big win (whether it is a small win or not) as a stop symbol after the end of the variable display, but also if it is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.
Here, the “16R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and the “10R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. It is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after that, and the “7R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds. In addition, the “7R time-saving no jackpot” is a jackpot in which the number of maximum rounds is not changed to the time-saving state after the jackpot of 7 rounds, but is shifted to the normal state.
In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when winning a jackpot with a special symbol, "16R time-saving jackpot" that can give the player the largest number of benefits, and the second highest number of benefits are provided. Possible “10R time saving jackpot”, “7R time saving jackpot” that can give the next largest number of benefits, and “7R time saving jackpot” that gives the fewest benefits to players among jackpot games. Among them, it is configured to provide any jackpot game. As a result, even if a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, the player can expect that the jackpot game with the largest number of benefits will be provided among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be given. can let
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends Although the size is defined, it is not limited to this, and the size of the benefits given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits may be defined without defining the size of the benefits. It is also possible to simply change the content of the jackpot game so as to be granted.

In addition, the “time-saving state” is a game in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the fifteenth control example, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the first special symbol lottery that can be executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 In the second special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity can be established when the ball is entered, it is configured to be able to win a time-saving election in addition to the above-mentioned big win and small win. Specifically, in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) executed in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, It is configured so that the determination of the time-saving election is executed.
Here, when time-saving is elected, a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big hit determination is executed in the special symbol lottery, and a special symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. At the timing when the variable display is started, a process (update process) for determining whether or not to end the time saving state is executed. For example, in the case of the time saving state set to the time saving number of times 1 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1), it is executed at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery that has won the time saving is started. In the update process, the number of remaining working hours (the value of the working hours counter 203h) is updated (decremented), the working hours ending condition is established, and it is determined that the working hours saving state is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a time saving state in which a value of multiple times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of time saving, the time saving state until the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the result of updating the remaining time saving number of times executed by the update process continues.
In other words, by using the setting timing of the time saving state and the end timing of the time saving state used in the fifteenth control example, only the special symbol lottery jackpot determination timing (special symbol It is possible to set a time saving state (except for the fluctuation period) or to set a time saving state including the special symbol fluctuation period.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, another processing timing may be set, for example, the time saving state is set at the stop timing of the special symbol variation that has been won in the same way as the second control example described above, and the next Before the special symbol variation to be executed is started, the update process of the time saving state (the process of determining whether or not to end the time saving state) may be configured to be executable. Even when configured in this way, the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is included by changing the number of time saving times to be set, or the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is not included. It becomes possible to In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, and the next special symbol lottery is not started with the time saving state set, the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied, so the time saving state will continue.
Therefore, in this case, by the time the special symbol variation that has won the time saving is stopped and displayed (before the time saving state is set), do you have the right to execute the next special symbol lottery (special figure pending)? If it is determined that the special figure reservation has been acquired, that is, after the time saving state is set, the next special pattern fluctuation will start immediately, and only if the time saving state can end. is preferably configured to notify the player. By constructing in this way, the player who grasps that the short-time winning has not executed the first special symbol lottery, performs the right-handed game, and suppresses the act of executing the second special symbol lottery. can.
Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the fifteenth control example, as a condition for ending the "time saving state", the first special symbol and the first special symbol and the second 2 When the number of times of variation of special symbols (total number of times of variation) reaches the first predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (first end condition), or winning a small hit in the lottery of special symbols (small winning game When the number of times (executed) reaches a second predetermined number of times (for example, once) (second end condition), the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. It is configured as follows. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to make the player play while exciting how long the time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. can.
Furthermore, in the fifteenth control example, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hits A, B, and C) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery). The number of times the second end condition is satisfied is set differently for each winning type. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small wins won during the time-saving state, so that the player is always given a sense of tension to reduce the time-saving state. You can play games.

On the other hand, in the fifteenth control example, when the time saving state (second time saving) is set based on the fact that the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state (first time saving) is set based on the jackpot winning. It is configured to set an end condition different from the case where it is set, and specifically, it is configured to set the number of times of time reduction "1". In other words, the first working hour reduction set based on the winning of the working hour reduction in the special symbol lottery is used as a special lottery function for executing only the judgment of the big win in the special symbol lottery in the hour saving state.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (a special discharge channel that is a specific area The V switch 650e3 provided in the 650e2 detects the ball), so that a big hit (so-called 2 types of hits) is achieved (see FIG. 432). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game is configured to differ according to the type of the small winning winning. Then, the number of times the second end condition set for each small hit type is satisfied (the number of small hits) is set so that the small hit type in which the small hit game with a high V winning expectation is executed is smaller. Configure.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the V winning expectation level for winning two types of wins when a small win is won during a time-saving game with the anxiety that the time-saving state may end, The player can be motivated to play the game.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, as described above, the first predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) for the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the end condition (first end condition) However, other end conditions may be set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, for example, the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol is the third predetermined number (for example, 50 times). or when the number of fluctuations of only the second special symbol reaches a fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times), the termination condition of the time saving state may be established. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two patterns is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 94) so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 6). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the fifteenth control example, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 94). A decorative display is performed according to the display of the 1-symbol display devices 37a and 37b.
That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbols.
That is, the determination is performed by the determination means (the lottery for the special symbol is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and the predetermined After the identification information (third pattern) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, in a display mode (combination of patterns) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of special symbols) of the discrimination means , the identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a part of the lottery result of the special symbol It may be a display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination result only), or it may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are four types of lottery results (for example, big hits, small hits, misses, and time saving) as the lottery results of special symbols, the above-mentioned three types of lottery results of special symbols are used as the display mode of the third symbol. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of lottery results (for example, a big win or a small win). In addition, in the case of duplicate winning determination (for example, jackpot determination, time saving determination), a display mode for indicating duplicate winning may be used, or based on duplicate winning If the content of the game to be executed based on the winning of the jackpot is the same as the content of the game to be executed based only on winning the jackpot, the same display mode may be used.
Further, instead of the display device used in the fifteenth control example, for example, reels or the like may be used to configure the third pattern display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices. .
In the fifteenth control example, if the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is higher than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be longer. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.
In addition, the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above-described content. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be used. In addition, when the time saving state is made to be a state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is irrespective of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time point, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the timing of the display of the second symbol) It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.
The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.
A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 . When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 94), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.
As shown in FIG. 428, the first ball entrance 64 is the left side of the variable display unit 80, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 is more likely to be played in a game (so-called left-handed game) in which the ball flows down. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 94), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.
In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the fifteenth control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are set to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special pattern lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the ball entrance. , While it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a ball passing through detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of special symbol lottery opportunities and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.
The second ball entrance 640 is attached with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side in the viewpoint of FIG. 428) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissive state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described. In the fifteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 428, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.
In the fifteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 428, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and the electric accessory 640a are selected by lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 serving as a trigger is arranged in a right hitting area, and when a time saving state is set as a game state, a right hitting game is performed.
A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball is entered during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 428, in the right-handed area, the upper surface of the V winning device 650 inclines downward to the left (lower left when viewed from the front in FIG. 428). is arranged, and each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 428). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.
In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case of using the configuration for changing the visibility of the inside using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 429, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 429, among the balls fired in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-shaped member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right in front view of FIG. 429). is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 429) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.
The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable prize winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state in a state where the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured such that the ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 that is opened. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates is different in the game state (normal symbol probability state), and the game state is the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) state) is set, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the projecting state reaches the area b (see FIG. 429). 640a is changed to the retracted state, and in the state in which the time saving state is set, the electric accessory is held for a period of time sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 429). 640a is configured to be positioned at the projecting position.
Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 429 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in the fifteenth control example). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.
Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 429, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, different ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 Alternatively, by configuring it so that the ball can be guided to the general winning hole 63), the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the time saving state.
As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than for the ball to enter the general winning opening 63. Advantageous benefits (i.e. special figure 2 lottery and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery cannot be executed (during special symbol fluctuation) If there is, it is configured so that the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give the player a more advantageous privilege (that is, 10 prize balls).
As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in special symbols), the player can change the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained), which saves time. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In the fifteenth control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. is set to a long period (2 seconds), and the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is operated. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a inside is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.8 seconds). 9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.
Returning to FIG. 428, the description continues. As described above with reference to FIG. 429, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. FIG. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.
In addition, in some of the "big wins" of the special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the "minor wins" described above. As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.
Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 429 to 430. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 429, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state that closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is can flow down, and the ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down toward the lower left side (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 429) on the open/close door 650f1. , to the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the fifteenth control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds×12 times, and at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the open/close door 650f1. The ball that is doing wins a prize to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 432(a)) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.
In the fifteenth control example, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1, Any other period may be set as long as it is a period during which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 . Also, in the fifteenth control example, the number of times the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.
As in the fourth control example described above, in the fifteenth control example, in the small winning game, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once and then opened next time (open interval period). 5 seconds are set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the winning game, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.
Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 is set longer than normal. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.
In the fifteenth control example, as in the fourth control example described above, after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small winning game, a longer special opening interval period than the others is set. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small win game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, as in the above-described fourth control example, in the fifteenth control example, by performing the right-handed game continuously during the small winning game, at least 1 Since it is configured so that 1 balls can be entered, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of prizes that will be the termination condition of the small winning game during the 10th opening operation (10 pieces) is reached, and the small winning game is ended.
That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.
It should be noted that, as in the fifteenth control example, when the first special opening interval period is set to the timing (after the fifth opening operation ends) reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed is the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered during the operation to be discharged from the V prize winning device 650 has passed, and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. When it is determined that it is, a notification effect is displayed to notify that effect during the first interval between special openings. should be configured to display As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game contents.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.
Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 430 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 430, the V winning device 650 is an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the V winning device 650 is combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of
431 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 431(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 431(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 431(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 431(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the rear side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 431(a).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 431(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the game ball can be entered by the open/close door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.
In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.
FIG. 431(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 431(b). As shown in FIG. 431(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.
Next, with reference to FIG. 432, a description will be given of a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 432(a) is a back view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 432(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h can be rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.
As shown in FIG. 432(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.
Here, as in the fourth control example described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example, the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is set after the small winning game. be done. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By turning on the flow path solenoid 650k, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (see FIG. 432(b)).
In the pachinko machine 10 used in the fifteenth control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured as follows. Then, when a small prize is won, the channel solenoid 650k is set to ON according to the contents stipulated in the above-mentioned open scenario table 202g, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. It is configured to be In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to OFF, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. Power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state (see FIG. 432(a)) in which the switching member 650h is maintained.

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.
In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.
In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball in the fifteenth control example) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out for winning a prize. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.
Furthermore, in the fifteenth control example, according to the small winning type (small winning A, B, C) set when winning the small winning, the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650 k to ON are different. It is configured so that games can be played. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is made different depending on the content of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high expectation of V winning will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 433, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 433(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. The open/close door 650f1 of the fifteenth control example, as shown in FIG. It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the device 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .
A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured so that the period of time during which the water flows down is 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.
In the state shown in FIG. 433(a), when the small winning game is executed and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 433(b). FIG. 433(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 433(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball that has flowed down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that winning is possible. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.
In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 428). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example, the privilege game (small hit game) that is given when the determination result of the determination means (lottery result of the special symbol) is a predetermined determination result (small hit) The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the open interval period (0.5 seconds) of the operating variable member (opening/closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the open/close door 650f1 is in a closed state) during the small winning game surely enters the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. can be made
In addition, only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of opening operations in the winning game (12 times) is set more than the number of winning prizes (10 pieces) for the end condition of the small winning game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short , a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.
<Regarding the production contents in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 434 and 435, description will be given of the characteristic effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example.
In the above-described fourth control example, the second special symbol winning information (winning information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not retained and stored. On the other hand, in the fifteenth control example, the winning information of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2 reservation) can be retained and stored, and the special figure 2 retained and stored before the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to preliminarily discriminate (read ahead) the result of the holding lottery, and when there is a holding (V holding) for winning a small win, an effect for notifying the existence of the V holding can be executed during the big winning game. It is different from the fourth control example in that it is configured to be possible.

Specifically, in the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols), up to a predetermined number (upper limit 4 in this 15th control example) of special symbols 2 can be retained and stored in the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b. When a jackpot game is started based on the fact that a special symbol wins a jackpot or wins a small prize, the lottery result of the reserved and stored special figure 2 reserve is read in advance, and V reserve exists therein. In this case, an effect (V-icon acquisition effect) for acquiring a V-icon indicating that there is a V-hold is executed. Then, the acquired V icon is reduced and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the V suspension is completed, and the V icon is enlarged and displayed during the variable display of the special symbols based on the V suspension ( Hereinafter, this is called activation of the V icon.) By doing so, the player is notified that the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner has won a small prize before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, during the period when the V icon is displayed in a reduced size, it is guaranteed that a small win will be won in any of the reserved and stored special figure 2 reserves, and the prescribed number of fluctuations will not be won in the big win or the small win. , and the time saving state does not end, the player can enjoy the game in the time saving state with peace of mind.
Here, the outline of the effect|presentation performed in the time saving state (high-probability state of a normal design) in this 15th control example is demonstrated. In the fifteenth control example, when the time-saving state is set, a character 802 resembling a hero advances through a dungeon, and when an enemy character 804 resembling a dinosaur is encountered, reach is achieved, and a battle effect is started. . In this battle presentation, if the character 802 wins against the enemy character 804, it is informed that the big win or the small win has been won.
With reference to FIG. 434(a), the display screen of the V-icon acquisition effect executed during the jackpot game in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 434(a) is an example of the display screen when the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the jackpot game. In the fifteenth control example, when the execution of the V-icon acquisition effect is set, the V-icon acquisition effect is executed instead of the normal ending effect during the ending period of the jackpot game. By executing the V-icon acquisition effect in the ending period in this manner, it is difficult to make the player feel that the period from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the first variable display of the special symbol is prolonged. can do.
In the small display area Dm8, a display mode indicating that the special symbols have won the jackpot is displayed, and the player can recognize that the special symbols have won the jackpot. In addition, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right-handed" so that the player can easily understand the game method in the jackpot game.

In the small display area Dm14, the number of winning jackpots up to the present from the jackpot winning in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is displayed. Since the number of jackpot wins is displayed in large numbers, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.
The number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm15. In FIG. 434(a), "ED" indicating that it is the ending period is displayed to inform the player that it is the ending period in an easy-to-understand manner.
In the small display area Dm9, a reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is displayed. In FIG. 434(a), the first reserved design hr1, the second reserved design hr2, and the third reserved design hr3 are displayed as white reserved designs, and the fourth reserved design hr4 is displayed as a black reserved design. . In the fifteenth control example, it is configured to indicate that the possibility of winning a big win or a small win is higher with a black reserved symbol than with a white reserved symbol. Therefore, FIG. 434(a) shows a state in which the probability that the fourth reserved symbol hr4 wins the big prize or the small prize is higher than the first reserved symbols hr1 to the third reserved symbols hr3.
After the jackpot game ends, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the reserved symbols are digested in order from the first reserved symbol hr1 to the youngest, and when the first reserved symbol hr1 is digested, the second reserved symbol hr2 is displayed. The position of the first reserved design hr1 is shifted and displayed, and the third reserved design hr3 is shifted and displayed in the space vacated by the shift of the second reserved design hr2. Similarly, the fourth reserved design hr4 is also shifted to the empty space of the third reserved design hr3 and displayed. The empty space due to the shift of the fourth reserved design hr4 becomes blank until the new special figure 2 reservation is stored, and when the new special figure 2 reservation is stored, the corresponding reserved design is displayed. be.

When the V icon acquisition effect is set, an effect is started in which the character 802 discovers the treasure box 810 in the main display area Dm during the ending period of the jackpot game, and the V sword 803 marked with "V" is displayed in the treasure box 810. The production that appears is executed. In addition, in the sub display area Ds, by displaying "V icon acquisition", the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the V icon acquisition effect has been executed. This V sword 803 is a V icon for notifying the player that there is a V reservation (reservation for winning a small hit) in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol). Also, during the period when the variable display of the special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot game, the symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the main display area Dm.
In the fifteenth control example, only when the V-icon acquisition effect is set, the effect of finding the treasure box 810 shown in FIG. 434(a) is executed. The ending effect may also be configured to discover the treasure box 810 . In this case, a sword that is not marked with a V may appear in the treasure chest 810 . Also, depending on the display mode of the sword, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big win or winning a small win in the reserve. In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that it is executed in a specific round. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the V-icon acquisition effect is executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the jackpot game period.
434(a) may execute an effect in which the character 802 discovers the treasure box 810 in a specific round of the jackpot game. A pattern in which a display mode (for example, a ball displaying the number of rounds to be added) appears to indicate that the number of rounds is to be added may be provided. By constructing in this way, even when the condition for executing the V icon acquisition performance is not established, the performance of finding the treasure box 810 is executed, thereby making the player expect to acquire the V icon. In addition, since the number of rounds is added when the V icon cannot be acquired, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
Next, referring to FIG. 434(b), this is an example of a display screen of a battle production when the V reservation (reservation for winning a small prize) is terminated in the fourth special symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot game. be.

In the small display area Dm6, the V sword 803 acquired in the V icon acquisition effect is displayed in a reduced size. is present to the player.
In the main display area Dm, a battle effect is started in which the character 802 encounters the enemy character 804, and in the sub-display area Ds, "Will you win a big win if you defeat the enemy?" Alternatively, the configuration is such that the player can easily recognize that a small prize has been won.
FIG. 435(a) is an example of the display screen when the V icon is activated during the battle effect. In the fifteenth control example, when the V-icon is activated, the V-sword 803 displayed in reduced size in the small display area Dm6 is enlarged and displayed in the main display area Dm, and the character 802 uses the V-sword 803 to attack the enemy. An effect of winning the character 804 is executed. In this case, "V icon activated" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to inform the player that the V icon has been activated in an easy-to-understand manner.
Thus, when the V-icon is activated (the V-sword 803 is displayed in an enlarged manner), the special symbol is always stop-displayed in a display mode indicating a small win. Therefore, when the V icon is activated, the player can recognize that the variable display of the special symbol wins a small hit before the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Figure 435 (b) is an example of the display screen of the battle production when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reservation is started and there is another V reservation in the remaining special figure 2 reservation. be. In this case, unlike FIG. 435(a), after the character 802 is defeated by the enemy character 804 once, a resurrection effect is executed in which the character 802 revives and wins. When the resurrection effect is executed, the character 802 defeats the character 804 using the normal sword 805 different from the V sword 803, as shown in FIG. 435(b). Therefore, the V-sword 803 continues to be displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6 as it is, and continues to be displayed in a reduced size even after the big winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning of this special symbol.
In this way, when the V reservation (reservation to win a small hit) is digested, if there is another V reservation in the remaining special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol), the V icon is not executed, it is possible to inform the player that the remaining special figure 2 hold will be a consecutive chance (continuous winning of small hits).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 434(a), the special figure 2 suspension at the end of the special figure 2 suspension that was reserved and stored at the time when the V icon acquisition effect was executed (4th reservation pattern hr4 in FIG. 434(a) ) is V pending, by not activating the V icon until the variable display of the special symbol 2 pending special symbol corresponding to the fourth pending symbol hr4 is started, corresponding to the fourth pending symbol hr4 It is clear to the player that the small winning will be won by holding the special figure 2, and since there is no change in winning the small winning no matter what kind of performance is executed in the variable display of the special symbol, Although there is a possibility that the player's interest will fade, as in the fifteenth control example, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the V hold is started, the V hold is included in the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored. If there is, it is configured so that the V icon can not be activated, and by switching the activation target of the V icon to the special figure 2 suspension that did not exist when the V icon acquisition effect was executed, the fourth suspension symbol It is possible to make the player expect that the activation of the V icon will not be executed during the variable display of the special symbol of hr4, and to make the player interested in the performance executed in the variable display.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, even if there are multiple V reservations in the special figure 2 reservations that are reserved and stored, only one V icon is displayed, but it is limited to this It is also possible to display a plurality of V icons corresponding to the number of V pending, instead of one.

Alternatively, when there are a plurality of V-holds, after the V-icon is activated in the variable display of the special symbols based on the V-holding to be executed first, the V-icon is reduced and displayed again in the small display area Dm6. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that Alternatively, in FIG. 435 (a), if there is a V hold in the reserved special figure 2 hold, the character 802 uses the V sword 803 for the period until the V hold in the hold is digested. You can continue the state you have.
In this way, the V icon activated based on the completion of one V suspension can be continuously displayed until the next V suspension is digested, so that the V icon can be displayed according to the activated V suspension. Even if a new V-icon acquisition performance is not executed during the jackpot game executed based on the above, the player can expect that the activated V-icon will continue to be displayed, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the type of weapon used by the character 802 (swords with different colors and shapes) and the type of enemy characters (enemy characters with different numbers and sizes of horns) suggest the degree of expectation for activating the V icon. It is good as With this configuration, the player can easily predict whether or not the V-icon will be activated, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
In the fifteenth control example, the configuration is such that a V icon imitating a sword is displayed. good.

It should be noted that the V sword 803 and the treasure box 810 displayed in the V icon acquisition effect may be displayed differently depending on whether there is only one V reserve in the reserve or when there are a plurality of V reserves. good. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect mode is determined based on the number of V-holds present in the hold, from among a plurality of types of V-icon acquisition effect effects. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the V-icon acquisition effect from becoming monotonous.
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 436, each counter of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described. Although the counters used in the control examples described above are different in that the update range of the counters is partly different, the basic configuration is the same. Description is omitted.
The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.
The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 166) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 177).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the fifteenth control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202ra stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a big hit set by 202ra, it is determined as a special symbol big win.
In addition, the first random number table 202ra is provided with two types of a special symbol 1 random number table 202ra1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202ra2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of different random numbers is the same, the number of small win random numbers is set differently (see FIG. 438). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that become small wins, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big wins or small wins) to players can be increased between the lottery for the first special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols. can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202ra1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202ra2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.
Here, with reference to FIG. 438, the first winning random number table 202ra will be described. Figure 438 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ra, Figure 438 (b) shows the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202ra1 FIG. 438(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ra2. In this first winning random number table 202ra, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a random number value (determined value) determined as a big hit and a random value (determined value) determined as a small win are set. is a table.
Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202ra1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 438(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202ra1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpots (that is, outside) is defined as a judgment value. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202ra2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 438(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ra2, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as the big hit determination values, and "5 to 144" are the small hit determination values. and "145 to 999" are defined as other (ie, outlier) judgment values. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win, and when the value is any one of "5 to 144". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.
The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first win type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the fifteenth control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, in a state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during fluctuation of special symbols and during a big win game or a small win game), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of hitting the ball.
Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number determined to be a special symbol big win or small win. That is, if it is a random number determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.
On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-999. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become a big hit in the special symbols when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn. are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202ra1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202ra2 of the first per random number table 202ra. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example has 1000 random numbers in total, and the total number of random numbers for a big win is 5. Therefore, the probability of a big win with special symbols is "1/200".
The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the fifteenth control example, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202rb to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202rb will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 439(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202rb. As shown in FIG. 439 (a), in the fifteenth control example, the special figure 1 jackpot used when determining the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) It has a type selection table 202rb1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202rb2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). there is As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratio can be changed, the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2) provide different game characteristics to the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202rb1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 439(b). FIG. 439(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202rb1. As shown in FIG. 439(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first per type counter C2 If it is "jackpot A", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" if it is any of "10 to 49", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C". . When the time-saving state is set as the game state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot D" and "10 to 49". ”, the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, and when it is any of “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers select "jackpot A", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot A" is 10%.
The "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers for which "jackpot B" is selected is 40, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot B" is 40%.
"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected as "jackpot C", so the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot C" is 50%.
"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win D" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Furthermore, the "jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to end the "jackpot A" described above. Therefore, the jackpot type is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A" in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example, 16 rounds at a rate of 10% of the jackpot winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in which the normal state is set. , and 90% of the time, 7 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.
On the other hand, 16 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and the rate is 50%. A jackpot game of 7 rounds is selected with . In addition, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished.
In other words, winning a jackpot in a time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in a normal state in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 439(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202rb2 used at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 439(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202rb2. As shown in FIG. 439(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 99" is "jackpot E". "Jack E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot E" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. That is, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the "jackpot E" advantageous for the player is always selected as the big win type.

In the fifteenth control example, there are five types of jackpots, but the number of types is not limited to five, and may be four or less, or may be six or more. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.
In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and has a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the fifteenth control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first Stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the ball is the first entering ball in the state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, the state other than during the variation of the special symbol and during the big winning game and the small winning game) It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the mouth 64 or the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁
The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection table 202rf (see FIG. 440) for determining the type of the small win to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is set.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202rf will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 440 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202rf. As shown in FIG. 440, the small hit type selection table 202rf is defined so that three types of small hits A, B, and C are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit types of the second special symbol. ing. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49", the small hit type becomes "small hit A (V passage time jackpot A)", "50 to 79" The small hit type in the case of either is "small hit B (V passing time jackpot B)", and the small hit type in the case of "80 to 99" is "small hit C ( It becomes a jackpot E) when passing through V).
Here, each small winning type (small winnings A, B, C) is executed after the small winning game ends when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of the small win A, the big win A (16R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 16R open state to execute the big win, and then the time-saving state. (Period until special symbol changes 7 times, or wins 2 times for small win A, wins 5 times for small win B, or wins 3 times for small win C) is set. . In addition, in the case of the small win B, the big win B (7R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state, and the big win is executed. A time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 7 times, wins the small win A twice, wins the small win B 5 times, or wins the small win C 3 times) is set. ing. In addition, in the case of the small win C, the big win E (10R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win C, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state, and the big win is executed. A time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 7 times, wins the small win A twice, wins the small win B 5 times, or wins the small win C 3 times) is set. ing.
Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the contents of the big winning game to be executed after finishing the small winning game can be varied. Specifically, the small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (16R), and the small win B is executed in the big win game. The number of rounds is small (7R) and is set more disadvantageously than the small hit A described above.
In addition, in the present fifteenth control example, depending on each small hit type, the time saving end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the big hitting game via the small hitting game is the same, but it is not limited to this, and the small hitting It is good also as a structure which changes the time saving end conditions of the time saving state to be set depending on the type.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in the fifteenth control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (the number of times of winning a small hit A, the small win B The number of times of winning, or the number of times of small win C winning, etc.) or the number of fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be set. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 1 or more, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the first special pattern (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot is finished. ) is executed, the time saving state will not end. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed and the small winning (small winning A, small winning B, small winning C) that can execute the big winning game is won, the special symbol Based on the number of fluctuations, the time-saving end condition is satisfied before the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the time-saving state can be ended. It is possible to suppress repeated execution of a game in which a game ball is not allowed to pass through a specific area during a winning game until a second end condition is satisfied.
Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202rd will be described with reference to FIG. 441(a). FIG. 441(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202rd. As shown in FIG. 441 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202rd includes the normal variation pattern selection table 202rd1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the time saving state. A time saving variation pattern selection table 202rd2 to be used is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the fifteenth control example, since the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. can let
FIG. 441(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202rd1 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202rd. As shown in FIG. 441(b), the normal variation pattern selection table 202rd1 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with the variation pattern.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 441 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is defined in the range of , and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "140 to 149", and fluctuations in the range of "150 to 179" Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other, and super reach with a variable time of 80 seconds is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the variation time is 40 seconds. A super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of "30 to 189", and a special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 198". It is
Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time in the entire range 180 seconds long out is stipulated, and if the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range has a variation time of 180 seconds. A long hit is defined.
In this way, according to the lottery result of the special symbol, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and a command indicating this variation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect corresponding to the variable time.
As shown in FIG. 441(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern selection table 202rd1 is 7 seconds (selection ratio is about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate is about 5%). there is Also, if the lottery result is a big hit, it is likely to be selected in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). stipulated in

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (variation time), and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the special It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected by the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the pattern is a loss. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).
In the fifteenth control example, the same variation pattern table is used irrespective of the type of jackpot won. A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicated and the case of the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern is easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.
Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end. In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the technique of varying the length of the period from when the jackpot is won until the jackpot game is executed according to the set game state is the fifty-first control example described later, and It is another form of the technique of varying the period from winning the time saving symbol in the 52nd control example to setting the second time saving state depending on the set game state.
Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202rd2 for reduction in working hours provided in the variation pattern selection table 202rd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 442 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time reduction variation pattern selection table 202rd2. As shown in FIG. 442, in the time saving variation pattern selection table 202rd2, the pattern type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 442, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, if the fluctuation time is defined as 2 seconds in the entire range, and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" A range, ie the entire range, defines a short jackpot with a variable time of 2 seconds. If the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 times or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range If the deviation of the variation time of 10 seconds is stipulated, and the lottery result is a "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 10 seconds in the entire range. is stipulated. Also, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the deviation of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in the entire range and the lottery result is "small win", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 160" There is a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. In the range of "161 to 198", long and small wins with a variation time of 30 seconds are specified, and when the lottery result is a "big win", a long and big win with a variation time of 30 seconds is specified.
Returning to FIG. 436, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the fifteenth control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 166), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is held and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .
Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202rc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202rc. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.
For example, as the second random number table 202rc, for normal design low probability (period in which normal design is normal state), and for high probability of normal design hit than low probability (normal design) It is possible to provide two types, one for the time period in which the working hours are shortened. In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning can be changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state, and if the game state is the time saving state, the second pattern is displayed. In the device 83, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not the time-saving state, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 30 seconds.
If the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is used as a stop symbol (second symbol). A symbol of "○" is illuminated. Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and When the second pattern variation start time is also in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation control (short opening control) of the electric accessory 640a is performed so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of openings of the second ball entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.
In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period of the second ball entrance 640, number of times of opening) are variable according to the set game state. When the game state at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbols is the time saving state, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from ``30 seconds to 3 seconds'' compared to the case of the normal state, and further, If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period in which the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts to operate, otherwise , the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. state. A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, depending on the game state at the start of variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. , the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a are set differently, but other configurations may be used, for example, the normal symbol (second symbol) A determination means for determining that the time saving state is continuously set is provided from the variation start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, and the variation time of the second pattern is used by using the determination result of the determination means. , and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a may be set.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, the normal symbol fluctuation start time and the operation start time of the electric accessory 640a It is necessary that the time saving state is set at any timing. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern, which starts to change at the timing when the normal state is set, is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or Based on the lottery of one second pattern, such as when the second pattern that starts to change at the timing when the time saving state is set is stopped with identification information indicating the win at the timing when the normal state is set. In the case where the variation of the second symbol and the action of the electric role product 640a executed by stepping across a plurality of game states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric role product 640a that is advantageous to the player is executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.
The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 166). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 177).
In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 437(a), the contents of the main controller 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 437(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains, as part of the fixed value data, a first winning random number table 202ra, a jackpot type selection table 202rb, a second winning random number table 202rc, and a variation pattern A selection table 202rd, a time reduction grant table 202re, a small hit type selection table 202rf, an open scenario table 202fg, a time reduction random number table 202rh, and a time reduction type selection table 202ri are stored at least.

Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first hit random number table 202ra, the jackpot type selection table 202rb, the second hit random number table 202rc, the variation pattern selection table 202rd, and the small hit type selection table 202rf are already Since the detailed contents are explained, the explanation is omitted.
The time saving provision table 202re is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state differently for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and the jackpot game ends (jackpot game ending When the period ends) (S1612 of FIG. 178: Yes) is referred to, a different number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) is set according to the jackpot type.
Here, with reference to FIG.439(d), the content prescribed|regulated by the time reduction provision table 202re is demonstrated. Drawing 439 (d) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents prescribed in time saving grant table 202re. In the fifteenth control example, a jackpot type (jackets A, B, D, E) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (normal state is set) , and as shown in FIG. 439(d), a plurality of time-saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.
In the fifteenth control example, the first time-saving end condition established according to the number of fluctuations of special symbols, the second time-saving end condition established according to the number of times a small hit A is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. A third time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win B is won in a lottery of special symbols, and a fourth time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win C is won in a lottery of special symbols.

Specifically, when the jackpot types are jackpots A, B and E, the time saving end condition is "7" to the time saving medium counter 203h (first time saving end condition), "2" to the small hit A counter 203fg, It is defined to set the value of "5" to the small hit B counter 203fh and "3" to the small hit C counter 203ra. condition), "4" to the small hit A counter 203fg, "10" to the small hit B counter 203fh, and "7" to the small hit C counter 203ra.
As described above, in the fifteenth control example, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot C of the time saving grant table 202re is set for the various counters described above. No value is specified. In this way, by differentiating the end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game for each jackpot type that has been won, even if it is notified in advance that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time saving, the game can be played until the end (until the time saving state ends) in a state of heightened play motivation.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, in addition to the time saving end state set using the time saving grant table 202re, the time saving state is also ended when a special symbol jackpot is won. Since the time saving end condition established based on does not differ depending on the set jackpot type, it is omitted from the time saving grant table 202re, but the above-mentioned time saving end condition (established based on the special figure jackpot winning It may be configured to define a value in the time saving provision table 202re for the time saving end condition).
Furthermore, in the fifteenth control example, it is configured to set the time saving state (second time saving) even when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, but regarding the time saving end condition set for the second time saving will be described with reference to a time saving type selection table 202ri, which will be described later. In addition, in this 15th control example, the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning is set by referring to the time saving type selection table 202ri instead of the time saving grant table 202re. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to define the time saving end condition corresponding to the second time saving in the time saving giving table 202re.

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, as a plurality of time saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time saving end condition to fourth time saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time saving end conditions. , For example, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times), the time saving end condition is established, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 80 times). The time-saving end condition to be established, the number of times the V winning device has been activated by winning a small hit (the number of times that the value of the small win A counter 203fg, the value of the small win B counter 203fh, and the value of the small win C counter 203ra are added) is a predetermined number of times ( For example, you may set the time-saving end conditions satisfied when it becomes 10 times.
In addition, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the lottery result. number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) You may comprise so that the time-saving end conditions etc. which are materialized in may be preset.
As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.
Furthermore, in the fifteenth control example, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions are predetermined You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized, when number (for example, two) is materialized. In this case, the establishment number determination means for determining the number of time-saving end conditions that are satisfied, and the condition attainment determination means for determining whether the number of establishment determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), is provided, and the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set) when it is determined that the condition attainment determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means is provided for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition that is established first, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means is varied based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. A discrimination reference number variable means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is established first, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.
In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period of time after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches 10 times) is measured, and the measurement result of the predetermined period of time measurement means is measured. A result determination means for determining is provided, and when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delaying means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means for invalidating the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period may be provided. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set according to each time saving end condition ) may not be executed.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, in the case of using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fact that a plurality of time saving end conditions are satisfied as described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions are prioritized time saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is Time-saving end conditions that are established when reaching 100 times) and non-priority time-saving end conditions (for example, time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and priority time-saving end It is preferable that the time saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated only when a plurality of non-prioritized time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.
Since the release scenario table 202fg is the same as the release scenario table 202fg of the fourth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the time saving random number table 202rh, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value (determination value) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as the time saving winning is data defined corresponding to the game state. is a table. Here, with reference to Drawing 443 (a), the contents of random number table 202rh per time saving are explained. FIG. 443(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the random number table 202rh per time saving.
Specifically, regardless of the special symbol type, when the game state is normal (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first per random number counter C1 is "3, 4, 140 to 287 , and is configured not to provide a judgment value for time-saving election for other game states.
Here, in the fifteenth control example, in one special symbol lottery, determination of big hit winning and determination of short working time winning can be executed in duplicate. In addition, the determination of the small hit winning and the determination of the time saving winning are configured to be executed in duplicate. Therefore, for example, when the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", in the big winning determination executed using the first winning random number table 202ra (see FIG. 438(a)), And, because it is determined to be a short-time winning in the short-time winning determination executed using the random number table 202rh (see FIG. 443 (a)), it is possible to win both the jackpot and the short-time. Similarly, when the value of the obtained first per random number counter C1 is "140 to 144", the small per small hit determination executed using the special symbol 2 random number table 202ra2 (see FIG. 438 (c)) It is determined to be a hit, and it is determined to be a short-time winning in the time-saving winning determination performed using the time-saving random number table 202rh (see FIG. 443 (a)). .
As described above, in the fifteenth control example, after the determination of the time-saving election is performed, it is configured to perform the big-hit (small-hit) determination. hit) will be elected. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player as compared with the case of winning the jackpot (minor win) without winning the time-saving prize.

In addition, in this 15th control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in one special symbol lottery is used to determine the big hit (small hit) and the time-saving winning decision. , The value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is the winning judgment value in any judgment, it is configured so that duplicate winning can be possible, but not limited to this, for example, execution of special symbol lottery When the right is acquired, the value of the random number counter for judging the jackpot (small hit) and the value of the random number counter for short-time winning are separately obtained, and the obtained values are used to judge the jackpot (small hit). And, it may be configured to execute time-saving winning determination.
The time reduction type selection table 202ri is a data table referred to when setting the time reduction end condition for the time reduction state (second time reduction) set when the time reduction is won in the special symbol lottery, and the time reduction type selection counter CC1. A time saving type is defined in correspondence with the value.
Here, with reference to Drawing 443 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection table 202ri are explained. FIG. 443(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving type selection table 202ri. As shown in FIG. 443 (b), in the time saving type selection table 202ri, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving end corresponding to the defined time saving type Conditions are specified.
Specifically, the time saving type A is defined as the time saving type for the entire range (“0 to 99”) of the time saving type selection counter CC1 that has been obtained. And, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition in which "1" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is defined. That is, the time saving end condition is set such that the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if you win the time saving in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set at the time of winning the time saving, and then the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery. A time saving state will be set until it starts.

In other words, when the special symbol lottery wins the time-saving lottery, the time-saving state can be set only for executing the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (executing the special lottery). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, it is possible to execute only the big hit determination during the time saving state without the player noticing that the time saving win is made. Potential benefits (jackpot game content, time saving state after the jackpot game ends) can be given.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 443 (b), in this 15th control example, when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving A is always set as the time saving type, but it is not limited to this. For example, according to the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, a time saving type different from the working time saving A may be configured to be selectable. In this case, for example, the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 defines time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "0 to 94", and time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "95 to 99" is configured to define a different time saving Z, and as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving Z, a time saving end condition in which "100" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is preferably defined.
By constructing in this way, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the time saving state for continuously executing the second special symbol lottery is set instead of the time saving state for executing the special lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more unexpected game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 437(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 437(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 437(b), the RAM 203 in the fifteenth control example differs from the above-described fourth control example in that a small hit C counter 203ra is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The small hit C counter 203ra is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small win set with the small win C as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 178), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of the jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 178: Yes), the value defined in the time reduction grant table 202re ( 1) is set (S11614 in FIG. 178).
And, for the small hit to be executed instead of the small hit time saving update process (S10405 in FIG. 173) executed in the small hit start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 172) of the special symbol variation process (S10104 in FIG. 167) When it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time in the time saving update process (S40405 in FIG. 449) is not the small hit B (S40510 in FIG. 449: No), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203ra after subtraction is 0 (S40514 in FIG. 449: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the game state (S40507 in FIG. 449) . In addition, the fifteenth control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S40606 in FIG. 448). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (fourth time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit C counter 203ra are met, the small hit C counter Since the value of 203fra is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit C counter 203ra is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as above, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated.
Next, referring to FIG. 444(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 444(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 444(a), the ROM 222 of the fifteenth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the fourth control example (see FIG. 163(a)) in the effect mode selection table 222ra and the V icon acquisition effect The difference is that a setting table 222rb is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 445(a), the contents defined in the presentation mode selection table 222ra will be described. FIG. 445(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the presentation mode selection table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 445(a), the production mode selection table 222ra includes a normal production mode setting table 222ra1, a time saving production mode setting A table 222ra2, and a time saving production mode setting B table 222ra3. ing.

The normal effect mode setting 222ra1 (not shown) is a table that is referred to when variable display of special symbols is performed in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.
FIG. 445(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time saving effect mode setting A table 222ra2. The time saving effect mode setting A table 222ra2 is a table that is referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.
FIG. 445(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time saving effect mode setting B table 222ra3. The time saving effect mode setting B table 222ra3 is a table that is referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.
Although the details will be described later, in the fifteenth control example, in the time-saving state, the activation of the V icon described above (the V icon notifying that there is a reservation (V reservation) to win a small hit) is enlarged. Informing the player that a small hit will be won in the variable display of the special symbol being executed) is executed, refer to the time saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3, otherwise, for time saving The rendering mode setting A table 222ra2 is referred to.

For example, in the time saving state, when "long and small hit" is set as the variation pattern type, the probability that "win" is selected in the time saving production mode setting A table 222ra3 is 150/199 (about 75%), " The probability that "Resurrection Victory" is selected is 40/199 (approximately 20%), and the probability that "Premium effect" is selected is 9/199 (approximately 5%). On the other hand, in the time-saving production mode setting B table 222ra3, the probability that "win" is selected is 190/199 (about 95%), and the probability that "revival victory" is selected is 9/199 (about 5%). , the premium effect is not selected.
By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated depending on the effect mode, and it is possible to make the player interested in the effect mode.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the ratio of the effect mode selected when the V icon is activated differs from when the V icon is not activated. Instead, an effect mode may be provided that can be selected only when the V icon is activated.
Next, referring to FIG. 446, the V-icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb will be described. In the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb, when a big win game is started, there is a reserve (V reserve) for winning a small win among the reserved and stored special figure 2 reserves (winning information of the second special symbol). This is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the V-icon acquisition effect during the ending period of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 446, it is determined whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect based on the position of the V reservation, the number of reservations, and the value of the effect counter CS1. The position of the V reservation is determined by which area of the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a the V reservation is stored. For example, the special figure 2 reservation stored in the fourth area is V reservation , then the Pending 4 column is referenced.
In the fifteenth control example, the V icon acquisition effect is most likely to be executed when the V hold is stored in the fourth area, followed by the third area, the second area, and the first area in this order. is doing.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a period to acquire a new special figure 2 hold until the V hold is digested, so when the V icon is activated, the V that has acquired the V icon At the time of execution of the icon acquisition performance, it becomes easy to leave a large number of reserved special figures 2 that have not been prefetched, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the lottery result of the reserved special figures 2 after the V icon is activated.
Also, when the V hold is stored in the first area, the ease with which the V icon acquisition effect is executed varies depending on the number of holds, and the number of holds of 1 is higher than the number of holds of 4. Also, the V icon acquisition effect is configured to be easily executed.

With this configuration, when the V icon acquired by the V icon acquisition effect is activated during the variable display of the special symbols after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbols remaining at the time when the V icon is activated. Of the 2 reserves, it is easy to leave a lot of special 2 reserves that have not been prefetched at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect that acquired the V icon, so the lottery result of the special 2 reserves after the V icon is activated It can be made difficult for the player to predict.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V icon acquisition effect is most likely to be executed when the V hold is stored in the first area, followed by the second area, the third area, and the fourth area in this order. You can Further, when the V reservation is stored in the first area, it may be configured such that the V icon acquisition effect is less likely to be executed when the number of reservations is 1 than when the number of reservations is 4.
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 444(b). As shown in FIG. 444(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fifteenth control example stores a special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223ra and a V icon acquisition effect for the above-described fourth control example. The difference is that an execution flag 223rb and a V icon display flag 223rc are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is set to ON in the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (see FIG. 454), and is set to OFF in the ending process (see FIG. 455), details of which will be described later.

The V-icon display flag 223rc is set to ON when the V-icon acquisition effect is executed in the ending process (see FIG. 455), and during the period set to ON, the V-icon is reduced even after the jackpot game ends. It is displayed and is set to OFF when the V icon is activated in the time saving effect mode setting process (see FIG. 458).
Next, with reference to FIG. 447, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 447 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 447, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example can retain and store the second special symbol winning prize information in the second special symbol retained ball storage area 203b in contrast to the above-described fourth control example. Since it is a possible configuration, when the time saving end condition is satisfied with the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) in the time saving state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal game state ( In the low probability state of the normal pattern), it is possible to win a big hit or a small win with the special figure 2 reserved. Therefore, in such a case, it is different from the fourth control example in that the time saving state is set after the end of the big winning game and that the small winning C is added, and the rest of the game flow is the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.
<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in fifteenth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 448 to 458. FIG. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the above-described fourth control example will be omitted. In addition, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are given to some of the control processes that are the same as the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the main controller 113 in the fourth control example described above. Although some parts are attached, the detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 448, the update process (S48253) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 448 is a flow chart showing this update process (S48253). This update process (S48253) is a process executed instead of the update process (S8253) executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S10210 in FIG. 170) of the fourth control example described above, and the update process (Fig. 171 S8253), the difference is that a configuration related to the small winning C is added, and the other processes are the same.

Specifically, after executing the processing of S40605 of FIG. 448 (corresponding to the processing of S10605 of FIG. 171 in the fourth control example), the small winning A counter, the small hitting B counter, and the small hitting C counter are set to 0. (S40606) The configuration is added.
Next, with reference to FIG. 449, the small winning time saving update process (S40405) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 449 is a flow chart showing this small winning time saving update process (S40405). This small hit time saving update process (S40405) is executed in place of the small hit time saving update process (S10405) executed in the small hit start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 172) of the fourth control example described above. , and is different in that a process related to the small hit C is added to the small hit time saving update process (S10405 in FIG. 173), and the other processes are the same.
Specifically, after executing the processing of S40505 (corresponding to the processing of S10505 in FIG. 173 in the fourth control example), the small hitting A counter, the small hitting B counter, and the small hitting C counter are set to 0 (S40506). Adding configuration.
Also, in the process of S40510 (corresponding to the process of S10510 in FIG. 173 in the fourth control example), when it is determined that it is not a small hit B (S40510: No), the value of the small hit C counter 203ra is subtracted by 1 (S40513), it is determined whether the small hit C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514). In the process of S40514, when it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514: Yes), the process proceeds to S40505, and in the process of S40514, the value of the small hit counter 203ra is 0 If it is determined that there is no (S40514: No), a configuration is added to shift to the processing of S40508.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the contents of the starting winning process (S40105) will be described. FIG. 450 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting winning process (S40105). In this starting winning process (S40105), in contrast to the above-described starting winning process (see S195 in FIG. 110), when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value of the small hit type counter C5 The only difference is that it is stored in the 2 special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S40712) and that the look-ahead process (S40713) is executed instead of the look-ahead process (S653). Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.
Next, the processing contents of the prefetch processing (S40713) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 451 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prefetching process (S40713). When this look-ahead process (S40713) is executed, first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, and small hit type counter C5 is read (S40801). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S40802).
Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S40803). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S40803: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S40804), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S40803 is not a big hit (S40803: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is elected (S40805), and if it is determined that the small hit is not elected (S40805: No), based on the read various counter values, set a prize winning command including information that can identify the lost win and the variation pattern (S40807), and then terminate this process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is won in the process of S40805 (S40805: Yes), based on the read various counter values, the small hit type and the variation pattern, set a winning command containing information that can be specified (S40806), this processing ends.
Here, the winning commands set in the processing of S40804, S40806, or S40807 include the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), as common information: The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S40801. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S11501) executed in the main process (see FIG. 177) of the main controller 110. FIG.
On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to perform a performance (read-ahead performance) of displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of variation and suggesting the result of winning judgment (whether a big win, a small win, or not) to a player.

In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.
By configuring in this way, to the audio lamp control device 113 side, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot or short-time winning Because it will output a winning command indicating jackpot or short-time winning, look ahead Expectation of winning a big win can be given to the special symbol variation in which the performance is not executed.
Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.
Further, in the fifteenth control example, when new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the winning information , and uses a configuration that predicts the success or failure determination in advance in the prefetching process, but is not limited to this, in the prefetching process of the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball storage Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set as a winning command, and the voice lamp control device 113 side It is also possible to predict the win/loss determination result based on the information included in the winning command received in .

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 452 to 458, the contents of control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described. In the fifteenth control example, command determination processing (see FIG. 452), jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 453), and variable display setting processing (see FIG. 456) are added to the above-described fourth control example. The only difference is that the two are identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
The command determination process (S44112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 452 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S44112). This command determination process (S44112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for
In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S44301). In the process of S44301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S44301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S44302), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S44303), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 456) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the processing of S44301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S44301: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S44304). Then, when the stop type command is received (S44304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S44305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S44306), and this End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 456) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.
On the other hand, in the process of S44304, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S44304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S44307). . Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S44307: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 The value of (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special design reserved ball number counter 203ra (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the second special design N2) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223e of the voice lamp control device 113 (S44308). In addition, in the processing of S44308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra is set. After the process of S44308 ends, this process ends.
Here, the number-of-holding-balls command is when the game ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the main controller 110 Since it is transmitted from, every time the starting winning prize is detected, or every time the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223ra can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, And even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball are detected when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol lottery is selected. The value of the number counter 223ra can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the processing of S44308 is executed, the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra are displayed to the display controller 114. is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
On the other hand, in the process of S44307, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S44307: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S44311). In the processing of S44311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S44311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of entrance where the new start winning was detected, and the lottery result information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the winning information storage area 223a (S44312), and the process ends.

In the processing of S44311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S44311: No), then whether a command related to the jackpot (any of the jackpot start command, round number command, and ending command) has been received It is determined whether or not (S44313). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S44313: Yes), the jackpot-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S44314), and this End the process. The details of this jackpot related process (S44314) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of S44313, when it is determined that the command related to the big win is not received (S44313: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S44315), and this process ends. In the process of S44315, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. is transmitted to the display control device 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 453, the jackpot related processing (S44314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 453 is a flow chart showing this jackpot-related processing (S44314).
In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command is received (S42101), and if the jackpot start command is received (S42101: Yes), the opening command for display for starting the opening effect is issued. Set (S42106). The display opening command set in the process of S42106 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4112) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the big win.

After the processing of S42106, it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107). If it is determined that the V-icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107: Yes), the processing of S42108 is skipped and this processing ends.
Although the details will be described later, in the fifteenth control example, when the variable display of special symbols based on V suspension (reservation to win a small hit) is started, V suspension is in the remaining special figure 2 suspension If it exists, it is configured to be able to notify the winning of a small prize without activating the acquired V icon. Therefore, when the V-icon display flag 223rc is ON at the start of the jackpot game, the V-icon is acquired in the previously executed jackpot game, and the V-icon is not activated and the small win is won. Since the player already recognizes that the V-icon is not activated, the player will have consecutive chances (continuous winning of small wins). The effect (see FIG. 434(a)) is not executed.
In the fifteenth control example, if the V icon is already displayed at the start of the jackpot game, the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even when the V icon is already displayed at the start of the jackpot game, the V icon acquisition effect (see FIG. 434(a)) may be executed. For example, when the V icon is already displayed at the start of the jackpot game, and there are a plurality of V reservations in the remaining special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol), a new A configuration may be adopted in which a V-icon acquisition effect is executed and a V-icon is added.
In the processing of S42107, when it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not ON (S42107: No), V icon acquisition effect setting processing is executed (S42108). Details of the V-icon acquisition effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42101, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S42101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S42102). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S42102: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S42104). ). The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing of S42104, this processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S42102 that the round number command has not been received (S42102: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S42103). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S42103: Yes), ending processing for setting the effect mode of the ending effect is executed (S42105), and this processing ends. Details of the ending process (S42105) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the processing of S42103, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S42103: No), this processing ends. By executing this jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 453), appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.
In the fifteenth control example, the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is executed when the jackpot game start command is received. It may be configured to be executed immediately, or may be configured to be executed when an ending command is received. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during execution of the jackpot game can also be read ahead.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 454 is a flow chart showing the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108). This V-icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is a process executed in the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 453), and is a process for determining whether or not to execute the V-icon acquisition effect during the ending period of the jackpot game. is.
When the V icon acquisition effect setting process is executed, first, the winning information of the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S42201). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning command processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4212 in FIG. 61) is executed. They are stored in order starting with area 1. The winning information command transmitted from main controller 110 is set when the prefetching process of main controller 110 (S40713 in FIG. 451) is executed, and the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 177) It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S11501 in FIG. 177) executed by the controller.
Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is displayed one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is shifted (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904 and S4908 in FIG. 66). As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, the sound lamp controller 113 side can surely grasp.
When winning information is acquired in S42201, next, it is determined whether or not the winning information (suspension 4) stored in the fourth area is small winning (S42202). If the reservation 4 is not a small hit, or if there is no reservation 4 (that is, if the winning information is not stored in the fourth area) (S42202: No), the winning stored in the third area It is determined whether or not the information (suspension 3) is winning a small hit (S42206). If the hold 3 is not a small hit, or if there is no hold 3 (that is, if the winning information is not stored in the third area) (S42206: No), the winning stored in the second area It is determined whether or not information (suspension 2) is winning a small hit (S42207). If the reservation 2 is not a small hit, or if there is no reservation 2 (that is, if the winning information is not stored in the second area) (S42207: No), the winning stored in the first area It is determined whether or not the information (suspension 1) is winning a small hit (S42208). If Hold 1 is not a small hit, or if there is no Hold 1 (that is, if winning information is not stored in the first area) (S42208: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S42202, if it is determined that the reservation 4 is a small winning (S42202: Yes), the above-described V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 446) is referred to, V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that reservation 4 is a small winning, V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.
Also, in the process of S42206, if it is determined that the reserve 3 is a small winning (S42206: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 446) described above is referred to, and V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that the reservation 3 is a small winning, V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.
Also, in the process of S42207, if it is determined that the reservation 2 is a small winning (S42207: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 446) described above is referred to, and V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that Hold 3 is a small winning, V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.
Also, in the process of S42208, if it is determined that the reservation 1 is a small winning (S42208: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 446) described above is referred to, and the V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that Hold 1 is a small hit, V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.

In this way, in the fifteenth control example, the lottery results are determined in advance (read ahead) in order from the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) that is digested most later after the end of the jackpot game, and if there is a V reservation At that time, it is determined whether or not to execute the V-icon acquisition effect. For example, when V suspension exists in suspension 2 and suspension 4, it is determined whether or not to set the V icon acquisition effect when suspension 4 is determined to be a small win. In this case, when it is decided not to execute the V-icon acquisition performance, even if the suspension 2 is V-suspension, determination as to whether or not to newly execute the V-icon acquisition performance is not executed.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started, it is configured to determine whether or not to activate the acquired V icon. Even when the V-icon acquisition effect is executed based on , the V-icon can be activated when the V-holding of the holding 2 is completed.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the lottery result is determined in order from the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) that is digested last after the end of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine the lottery results in order from the special figure 2 reservation that is consumed first after the jackpot game ends. Also, if there is even one V reservation, the lottery result of the subsequent special figure 2 reservation is not determined, but it may be configured to be determined.
After the processing of S42203 is completed, the processing of S42204 is executed. In the process of S42204, it is determined whether or not the effect mode to be executed during the ending period determined in the process of S42203 is the V icon acquisition effect. , S42205 are skipped, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42204, if it is determined that there is a V-icon acquisition effect (S42204: Yes), the V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is set to ON (S42205), and this processing ends.
Next, the ending process (S42105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 455 is a flow chart showing the ending process (S42105). This ending process (S42105) is a process executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 453), and is a process for executing an effect in the ending period of the jackpot game.
When the ending process (S42105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is ON (S42301). When it is determined that the V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is not ON (S42301: No), a normal ending effect execution command for display is set (S42305), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S42301, if it is determined that the V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is ON (S42301: Yes), a display V-icon acquisition effect execution command is set (S42302), and the V-icon acquisition effect execution command is set (S42302). The execution flag 223rb is set to off (S42303), the V-icon display flag 223rc is set to on (S42304), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the configuration is such that the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. It may be executed when a) is passed, or it may be executed during a period other than the ending period of the jackpot game. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of execution timings of the V-icon acquisition effect are set, and at which timing the effect is executed can be set at random. With this configuration, the player cannot predict at what timing the V-icon acquisition effect will be executed, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
Next, the variable display setting process (S44113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S44113). This variable display setting process (S44113) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58). Generate and set display variation pattern commands based on
In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S42401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S42401: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S42407. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S42401, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S42401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S42402). In the process of , the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S42403).
Then, an effect mode selection process (S42404) for setting the effect mode of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The details of this presentation mode selection process (S42404) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, based on the rendering mode set in S42404, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S42405). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.
Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S42406), and the process proceeds to S42407. In the process of S42406, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area.
In the processing of S42406, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S42407). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S42407: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. The setting process (see FIG. 456) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is ON (S42407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to OFF (S42408), and then the processing of S44306 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 452) , the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S42409). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S42409, a display stop type command is set (S42410), and this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to stop and display the third pattern in the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 457, the effect mode selection process (S42404) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 457 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection 18 (S42404). This effect mode selection process (S42404) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 456), and is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81.
When the effect mode selection process (S42404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (S42501). The current game state is determined based on the information stored in the game state storage area 223f, and when the game state is determined not to be a time saving state (that is, normal state (low probability state of normal symbol)) (S42501: No), based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S42403 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 456), the normal effect mode setting table 222ra1 (not shown) defined in the effect mode selection table 222ra (S42503), and ends the present process.
On the other hand, in the process of S42501, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S42501: Yes), the production mode setting process for time saving is executed (S42502), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to Drawing 458, production mode setting processing (S42502) for time saving performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 458 is a flow chart showing the production mode setting process for time saving (S42502). This time saving effect mode setting process (S42502) is a process executed in the effect mode selection process (see FIG. 457), and when the time saving state is set, the effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for setting the effect mode of .

When the time saving effect mode setting process (S42502) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbols to be started from now is a small hit (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (S42601: No), the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 456), and the value of the production counter CS1 Based on the time saving production A presentation mode is determined from the mode setting A table 222ra2 (S42609), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S42601, when it is determined that the win is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is ON (S42602). If it is determined that the V-icon display flag 223rc is not on (that is, off), the process proceeds to S42609. A state in which the V-icon display flag 223rc is off is a state in which the V-icon has not been obtained.
In the process of S42602, if it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602: Yes), the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S42603), It is determined whether or not there is a winning reservation (V reservation) (S42604). If there is no V pending (S42604: No), the execution of the V icon activation effect (see FIG. 435(a)) is set (S42605), the V icon display flag 223rc is set off (S42606), and the change Based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S42403 of the display setting process (see FIG. 456) and the value of the effect counter CS1, the effect mode is determined from the time saving effect mode setting B table 222ra3 (S42607), and this process is executed. finish.
On the other hand, in the processing of S42604, if it is determined that there is V pending (S42604: Yes), the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the variation display setting processing (see FIG. 456) is the variation pattern per length (S42608), and if it is not a long/small variation pattern (S42608: No), the process proceeds to S42605. In the processing of S42608, when it is determined that it is the variation pattern of long and small hits (S42608: Yes), the process proceeds to S42609.

Thus, in the fifteenth control example, when the variable display of the special symbols based on V suspension is started, whether or not there is V suspension in the remaining special symbols 2 suspension, and whether V suspension exists In this case, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed is a specific variation pattern, and it is determined whether or not to activate the V icon. , and when the V icon is not activated.
In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started while the V icon is acquired, it is possible to determine whether or not to activate the V icon. The special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol), which did not exist at the time of execution of the acquired V icon acquisition effect, can be set as the activation target of the V icon.
Here, for example, if only the special figure 2 hold (for example, hold 4) that is digested later among the special figure 2 holds that are prefetched at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect is V hold, that Since the V icon is not activated until the special figure 2 suspension is digested, even if the V icon is not activated, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the special figure 2 suspension of suspension 4, the player can win this variation. However, no matter what kind of effect is executed, it is still a small winning, so there is a possibility that the player will not be interested in the effect that is executed during the variation.
However, as in the fifteenth control example, by making it possible to activate the V icon, the special figure 2 hold that did not exist at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect that acquired the V icon. , Even in the variable display of special symbols when it is known that the small win is won regardless of whether the V icon is activated as described above, if the V icon is not activated, the newly acquired Since it is found that there is a V hold in the remaining special figure 2 hold (that is, it is confirmed that consecutive chances (small hits will be consecutively won)), the V icon is activated for the player. It is possible to make the user interested in whether or not there is a change, and it is possible to make the user pay attention to the effect executed during the change.

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, different presentation mode setting tables are referred to when the V icon is activated and when the V icon is not activated. Specifically, in the time saving production mode setting B table 222ra3 that is referred to when the V icon is activated, compared to the time saving production mode setting A table 222ra2 that is referred to when the V icon is not activated, The ratio of selecting the resurrection effect in winning is set low, and the premium winning is not selected.
By constructing in this way, the player can easily predict whether or not the V icon will be activated by the executed performance mode, and even when the V icon is acquired, the execution is performed during the variable display of the special symbols. By making the player interested in the performance, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
As described above, in the fifteenth control example, during execution of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 reservation (the winning information of the second special symbol) stored (memorized) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b ) as a result of preliminarily discriminating (pre-reading) the result of the lottery, if there is a reserve (V reserve) that is a small win, an effect for notifying the existence of the V reserve can be executed. Although it has a different technical idea from the other control examples in that it has a technical idea unique to the fifteenth control example, the technical idea specific to the fifteenth control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples.
In the fifteenth control example, the configuration is such that the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of pre-reading the lottery result of the reserved special figure 2 reserved. It may be configured to set the V icon acquisition effect based on the result of prefetching the winning information of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation), or the result of prefetching both special figure 1 reservation and special figure 2 reservation It is also possible to set the V-icon acquisition effect based on the above.

In the fifteenth control example, the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be executed during a period other than the jackpot game. good. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. With this configuration, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost, the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost are stopped and displayed. However, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs V icon acquisition production|presentation during the period when the small winning game is performed.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the V suspension is the suspension for winning the small prize, but the suspension for winning the big prize may be the V suspension. Alternatively, the V reservation may be a reservation for short-time winning.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, it is configured to display a "V icon" as a notification mode for indicating that V suspension exists in the reserved special figure 2 suspension, but it is limited to this Instead, it may be configured to notify using a character, or may be configured to notify by changing the background, as long as it is a display mode that can notify the player that there is a V hold. good.
In addition, in the first modification, when there is a V hold in the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored, a configuration for displaying a V icon, that is, a notification mode for notifying information advantageous to the player However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information. For example, in a configuration in which the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the first special symbol, the game state (for example, , In a gaming machine (so-called V probability machine) with different ratios of setting the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols), the probability variable jackpot (jackpot) of the first special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) When a jackpot type in which a variable probability state is set after the end of a game) is won, a normal jackpot (a jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game) is won in the first special symbols reserved and stored. exists, a notification mode (for example, an icon displaying "DANGER") may be displayed to notify that there is a hold for winning a normal jackpot. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that it will be disadvantageous if the reservation of the first special symbol is consumed, and the game can be played so as not to interrupt the reservation of the second special symbol. .

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can display the alerting|reporting aspect which alert|reports in advance that any of the 2nd time saving end conditions - 4th time saving end conditions are satisfied within suspension. By configuring in this way, if the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) remains after the time saving end condition is established, it is possible to expect a small winning in the remaining reservation, so within the reservation To make a player think to accumulate the special figure 2 reserve to the upper limit by the time the variable display of the special pattern satisfying the time saving end condition is finished by allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time saving end condition is satisfied. can be done.
It should be noted that, in a game machine (so-called ceiling) in which a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state is set) is given to the player when the winning in the special symbol lottery continues for a predetermined number of times, the ceiling is reached a predetermined number of times. It is good also as a structure which displays the icon (for example, time saving icon) which announces that an advantageous privilege is given before. In this case, if the time saving state is set before reaching the ceiling and the time saving state equivalent to the time saving state granted by reaching the ceiling is set, the time saving state is set without activating the time saving icon, and it is granted by the time saving winning. After the time saving state ends, the time saving state in which the time saving icon is activated may be settable. In addition, in a game machine with a specification that resets the ceiling count by a time saving win, the time saving icon displayed based on the predetermined number of times before reaching the ceiling is activated in the variable display of the special symbol for the time saving win. Also good.
Note that the introduction part of the V icon acquisition production (the production in which the character 802 discovers the treasure box 810 shown in FIG. 434(a)) and the introduction part of the round number addition production are the same production, and the V icon is acquired. An effect that can branch into an effect and an additional round number effect (for example, an effect in which either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appears from inside the treasure box 810) may be executed. With this configuration, even if there is no V hold in the hold, the player can expect to acquire the V icon, and even if the V icon cannot be acquired, Since the number of rounds of the jackpot game is added, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. Note that an effect pattern may be provided in which both the V icon and the icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appear in the treasure chest.
It should be noted that the effect of the introduction portion described above is not limited to this, for example, an effect is executed to prompt the player to operate the button, and when the player operates the button, the V icon or the number of additional rounds is displayed. It is good also as a structure which acquires any of the icons which show. In addition, in the fifteenth control example, when there is a special figure reservation (V reservation) that wins a small hit, the V acquisition effect is executed, and during the special symbol fluctuation that wins a small hit (during small hit fluctuation) In addition to this, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small win game executed after winning the small win. , a jackpot performance using the V icon (V jackpot performance) is executed, and when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small winning game, a jackpot disappearance performance (V disappearance effect) using the V icon is performed. You can configure it to run. In this case, the process of executing the big win effect using the V icon and the process of executing the V disappearance effect are different forms of the process of executing the effect using the P icon 802V in the fifty-first control example described later.

<First Modification of Fifteenth Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 459 to 465. FIG. In the fifteenth control example described above, the lottery result of the winning information (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during the jackpot game is determined in advance (read ahead). As a result, when there is a reservation (V reservation) to win a small hit, it is configured to execute the V icon acquisition effect.
On the other hand, in this first modification, as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during the jackpot game, there is a V reservation and that V reservation When the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds (16 rounds in the first modified example), the V-icon acquisition effect is executed.
Specifically, as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored during the big hit game, a small hit A If there is at least one V reservation that wins the jackpot), see FIG. 440), the V icon win effect is executed. Also, even if there is no V hold to win the small win A, there is a V hold to win the small win B (jackpot B (7R time-saving big win), see FIG. 440), and If there is also a V hold that wins a small hit C (a big hit E (10R time-saving big win with V passing), see FIG. 440), the V icon acquisition effect is executed. In other words, when the V-icon acquisition effect is executed, execution of the jackpot game for at least 16 rounds is guaranteed in the reserved special figure 2 reservation.
By constructing in this way, if the lottery result of the V reservation with the V icon activated is not the most advantageous small win A win for the player, consecutive chances (continuous small win wins) are guaranteed. As a result, execution of a jackpot game of at least 17 rounds is confirmed, so that the player is not discouraged, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's willingness to play.

<Regarding the production content of the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
459 to 460, the characteristic rendering contents executed in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 459(a) is an example of the display screen of the V-icon acquisition effect executed in the first modified example. Unlike the V-icon acquisition effect in the fifteenth control example described above, an effect is executed in which the rabbit-like character 801 acquires a flower 806, which is a flower-like V-icon. In the small display area Dm9, a black first reserved design hr1, a white second reserved design hr2, a third reserved design hr3, and a fourth reserved design hr4 are displayed.
As described above, in the first modification, as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during the jackpot game, there is V reservation, and the V reservation When the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds (16 rounds in the first modified example), the V-icon acquisition effect is executed. FIG. 459(a) shows a case where the first reserved symbol hr1 wins the small hit A and is V reserved, and the other reserved symbols are lost. In addition, in FIG. 459 (a), for convenience of explanation, the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation and the display mode of the reserved design are different corresponding to the small hit type, but it is not limited to this.
Here, the V icon in the first modified example will be described. The V icon in the first modified example has a display form imitating a flower, and is configured in a display form in which a flower 806 is surrounded by four petals 806a to 806d. These four petals 806a to 806d are digested corresponding to the winning small winning type when the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on the V reservation, and the flower 806 when all the petals are digested. The main body also disappears (that is, there is no guarantee of continuous chan).
A specific flow of activating the V icon will be described with reference to FIG. 459(b). Fig. 459(b) shows the display screen when the V icon is activated during the variable display of the special symbols in the case of winning the small hit A (V passing time jackpot A (16R time saving big hit), see Fig. 440) An example. In FIG. 459(b), in order to win the small win A, an effect is executed in which all the petals 806a to 806d attached to the flower 806 are digested (scattered). That is, in the first modification, the player is notified that the V-icon has been activated by digesting (scattering) the accompanying petals 806a to 806d rather than the main body of the flower 806, which is the V-icon. there is

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 460 (a), if the small hit type won by V holding is a small hit B (V passage time jackpot B (7R time saving big hit), see FIG. 440), only the petal 806a is digested, and the petals 806b to 806d continue to be attached to the flower 806. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the V reserve of the small winning B win is started, it is guaranteed that there is another V reserve in the remaining special figure 2 reserve.
In addition, the display mode of the second reserved pattern hr2 displayed in the small display area Dm9 of FIG. , and a display indicating that there is no special figure 2 reservation is displayed in the 4th reserved design hr4. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 460(a), seven rounds of jackpots and ten rounds of jackpots are executed during the period when the flower 806 is displayed, and the total number of rounds is 17 rounds. In other words, since the total number of rounds to be executed is larger than when the jackpot A, which is most advantageous to the player, is executed, when the flower 806 is displayed, the small winning type to be won for the player It is possible to make them interested in
FIG. 460(b) is an example of a display screen when an effect of canceling activation of the V icon is executed after activation of the V icon. Although the details will be described later, similar to FIG. 460(a), when the petal 806a is digested during the variable display of the special symbol based on V suspension, V suspension exists in the remaining special figure 2 suspension , when the total number of rounds of the V hold is 16 rounds or more, an effect (rewind effect) in which the petal 806a returns to the flower 806 is executed.
As a result, even when the V icon is activated immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbols based on the V hold, the player can expect the rewind performance to occur, thereby performing the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to draw attention to the production until the end of.

In the first modified example, the V icon is displayed in a flower display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display mode that can inform the player of the guaranteed number of rounds may be used. For example, an indicator may be used. It may be configured.
Also, in the first modification, when there is a V hold in the reserved and stored special figure 2 hold, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V hold is 16 rounds or more , the rewind effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V-icon may not be activated. Further, for example, when a new V hold is obtained, a petal may be newly added.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the flower petals 806a to 806d are digested only during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the flower petals are consumed during the jackpot game executed based on the consumption of the V reservation, and if the petals are not completely consumed during the jackpot game, consecutive wins are determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player execute the big win game while expecting that the petals will not be digested, and it is possible to suppress the big win game from becoming monotonous.
In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the presence of the V hold in the hold is notified by the V icon, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which alert|reports. For example, a flower displayed as "V?" For example, when a display mode indicating detachment is displayed), an effect that is digested is executed, and when all the accompanying petals are digested, the flower is also digested. It is possible to make the player expect that the ready-to-win performance will be generated immediately, and to make the player interested in the variable display of the special symbols based on the hold other than the V hold.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the first modification of the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 461 and 462, the electrical configuration of this first modification will be described. The first modified example is different from the fifteenth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 461, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example will be described. FIG. 461(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 461(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example has the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example described above. The difference is that an effect mode selection table 222rd is provided instead of the mode selection table 222ra, the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb is deleted, and the V icon display mode setting table 222rc is added. are identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The effect mode selection table 222rd (not shown) is a table referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed. An effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.
FIG. 462 is a diagram simulating the contents defined in the V-icon display mode setting table 222rc. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. It is a table referred to in order to vary the display mode of the V icon based on the type of small win won in the variable display. For example, after the jackpot game in which the V icon acquisition effect is executed, when the V reservation of the small win B winning is exhausted, the execution starts from the V icon display end counter value (maximum 16 in the first modification) 7, which is the value corresponding to the number of rounds played, is subtracted, and the V-icon display end counter value becomes 9. Therefore, in this case, as the display mode of the V icon, an effect in which one flower petal is digested is executed.

When the V icon display end counter value reaches 0, all the petals 806a to 806d associated with the displayed flower 806 (see FIG. 459(a)) are digested. and the flower 806 is also hidden.
Next, with reference to FIG. 461(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 461(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 461(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example is V The difference is that an icon display end counter 223rd is added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The V-icon display end counter 223rd is set to a counter value when the V-icon display flag 223rc is set to ON in the ending process (see FIG. 464). When a small hit is won based on , the counter value is updated, and when the counter value reaches 0, the V icon display flag 223rc is set to OFF.
<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 465, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this first modified example will be described. In the first modified example, in place of the V-icon acquisition effect setting process, the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (see FIG. 463) and the ending process (see FIG. 464) instead of the ending process are performed in place of the fifteenth control example described above. , and the production mode setting process for time reduction (see FIG. 465) is executed instead of the production mode setting process for time reduction, and the other processes are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 463, the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (S42110) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 463 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (S42110). The V-icon acquisition effect setting process (S42110) is a process executed in place of the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (see S42108 in FIG. 454) in the fifteenth control example described above, and is retained and stored during the jackpot game. As a result of preliminarily discriminating (pre-reading) the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation), there is a reservation (V reservation) to win a small hit, and a jackpot game executed based on the V reservation If the total number of rounds is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds, a process for executing the V icon acquisition effect is executed in the ending period of the jackpot game.
When the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42110) is executed, first, the winning information of the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S43601). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is displayed one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is shifted (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904 and S4908 in FIG. 66). As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, the sound lamp controller 113 side can surely grasp.
After the winning information is obtained in the process of S43601, it is determined whether or not there is a reserve (V reserve) for winning a small hit in the winning information (S43602). If it is determined that there is no V hold (S43602: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a V reservation (S43602: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a V reservation for winning a small hit A in the V reservation (S43603). When it is determined that there is a V hold for winning the small hit A (S43603: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is set to ON (S43607), and this processing is terminated.
In addition, as described above, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon is acquired. A performance is performed. Therefore, when winning a small hit A, the big hit A (16R time-saving big hit, see FIG. 440) by passing V (the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 432)) during the small hit game ) is executed, if there is a V hold for winning the small win A, the V icon acquisition effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S43603, when it is determined that there is no V reservation to win the small hit A (S43603: No), it is determined whether or not there is a V reservation to win the small hit C (S43604). . When it is determined that there is a V reservation for winning the small hit C (S43604: Yes), it is determined whether or not there are at least two V reservations (S43606). If it is determined that there are two or more V reservations (S43606: Yes), the process proceeds to S43607.
As described above, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is performed. executed. In the case of winning the small hit C, the big hit E (10R time-saving big hit, see FIG. 440) is executed by passing V during the small hit game, and in the first modification, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest. Since 7 rounds of jackpot games are executed even with a small number of jackpot types, the total number of rounds is 16 rounds or more if there are two or more V holds including the V hold of the small win C winning.
On the other hand, in the process of S43604, if it is determined that there is no V hold for the small hit C winning (S43604: No), the small hit B (jackpot B when passing V (7R time-saving big hit), see FIG. 440) winning Therefore, it is determined whether or not there are at least three V reservations (S43605). When it is determined that the number of V reservations is 3 or more (S43605: Yes), the process of S43607 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of V reservations is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) (S43605: No), this process is terminated.
As described above, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is performed. executed. In the case of winning the small winning B, the big winning B (7R time-saving big winning, see FIG. 440) is executed by passing V during the small winning game, so there are 3 or more V reservations for winning the small winning B total number of rounds will be 16 rounds or more.

Thus, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. It is configured to be As a result, when the V icon acquisition performance is executed, the player is guaranteed a jackpot game of at least 16 rounds with the special figure 2 suspension in the suspension.
Here, for example, when the V reservation that is first consumed after the end of the jackpot game is the V reservation that wins the small win A, 16 rounds of the jackpot game is executed based on the consumption of the V reservation. , Consecutive chances (continuous small winnings) are not guaranteed.
On the other hand, when the V reservation that is first digested after the end of the jackpot game is the V suspension that wins the small win C, even if 10 rounds of the jackpot game is executed based on the digestion of the V reservation, 16 rounds. is not reached, ream chances are guaranteed. In this case, even if the next V hold is a V hold that wins the small win B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the total number of rounds is 17 rounds, which is more than the case where the player wins the small win A, which is the most advantageous to the player. Also, many jackpot game rounds will be executed.
Furthermore, when the V reservation that is first consumed after the end of the jackpot game is the V reservation that wins the small prize B, even if the jackpot game of 7 rounds is executed based on the consumption of the V reservation, 16 rounds. Since it does not reach , consecutive wins are guaranteed, and if a small win B is won even in the next V reserve, the total number of rounds will be 16 even if 7 rounds of jackpot games are executed based on the consumption of the V reserve. Since it does not reach the round, more consecutive chances are guaranteed. In this case, the total number of rounds is 21 even if the small win B is won three times in a row.

Thus, in the first modification, when winning a relatively disadvantageous small hit type rather than winning the most advantageous small hit type while the V icon is displayed, the continuous chance The degree of expectation for the game is increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In the first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed when the total number of rounds is 16 rounds or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of rounds above may be set. Alternatively, in the case of a combination of specific small winning types, for example, when there are one each of V holding for small winning A winning, V holding for small winning B winning, and V holding for small winning C winning Alternatively, the V-icon acquisition effect may be executed.
In addition, in the first modification, when the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reserve existing in the special figure 2 reserve is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds, the V icon acquisition effect is always executed. However, it is not limited to this, and when the total number of rounds is a specific number In some cases where the number of rounds is equal to or more than the number of rounds, the V-icon acquisition effect may not be executed. By constructing in this way, even when the V icon acquisition performance is not executed during the big win game, the player is expected to win the small win A by the variable display of the special symbols after the end of the big win game. be able to.
Next, with reference to FIG. 464, the ending process (S42109) executed by MPU 221 in sound ramp control device 113 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 464 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S42109). Unlike the ending process (see S42105 in FIG. 455) in the fifteenth control example, the ending process (S42109) sets the value of the V icon display end counter when the V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON. differ in Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the ending process (S42109), after the process of S42304 ends, the V icon display end counter 223rd is set to "16" (S42306). This "16" is a value corresponding to the minimum guaranteed number of rounds, and when the V hold is consumed in the game after the end of the jackpot game, the counter value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is decremented. becomes "0" or less, the display of the V icon (the flower 806 (see FIG. 459(a)) in the first modified example) ends.
In addition, in the first modification, the counter value initially set to the V icon display end counter 223rd in the ending process is fixed at "16", but it is not limited to this, and exists in the special figure 2 pending It is also possible to set a value corresponding to the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V hold. For example, a small hit C (when V passes, jackpot E (10R time-saving big hit), see Figure 440) and small hit B (when V passes, jackpot B (17R short-time big hit), see Figure 440) V hold to win is present, the counter value may be set to "17".
Next, with reference to Drawing 465, production mode setting processing for time saving (S42504) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 1st modification is explained. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production mode setting process for time saving (S42504). This time saving effect mode setting process (S42504) is a process executed instead of the time saving effect mode setting process (see FIG. 458) in the fifteenth control example described above. In the fifteenth control example described above, the V-icon is activated only once during the period in which the V-icon is displayed. In contrast, in the first modified example, the V-icon can be activated multiple times until the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd becomes "0" or less.
When the time saving effect mode setting process (S42504) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbols to be started from now is a small hit (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (S42601: No), the effect mode selection table is referred to and the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern type acquired in S42403 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 456) is set. (S42610).

On the other hand, in the process of S42601, when it is determined that the win is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON (S42602). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not ON (S42602: No), the process proceeds to S42610.
In the process of S42602, when it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is ON (S42602: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit A (S42611). If it is determined to be a small hit A (S42611: Yes), 16 is subtracted from the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd (S42612). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd after the subtraction is 0 or more (S42613). 223rc is turned off (S42614), the V icon display mode setting table 222rc (see FIG. 462) is referenced, and the V icon display mode corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is set (S42615). On the other hand, in the process of S42613, when it is determined that the value is 0 or more (S42613: Yes), the process of S42614 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S42615.
In the process of S42611, when it is determined that it is not a small hit A (S42611: No), the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S42616), and the total number of rounds in the remaining special figure 2 pending It is determined whether or not there are 16 rounds or more (S42617). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 16 or more (S42617: Yes), the V icon rewind effect mode is set (S42621), and the process proceeds to S42610.
On the other hand, in the process of S42617, when it is determined that it is not 16 rounds or more (S42617: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be started from now is a small hit B winning (S42618 ). If it is determined to be a small win B (S42618: Yes), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted by 7 (S42620), and the process proceeds to S42613.

In the processing of S42618, when it is determined that the small winning B is not won (that is, when the small winning C is won) (S42618: No), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted by 10 (S42619). , S42613.
Thus, in the first modification, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reservation is started, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted according to the small winning type to be won, and after the subtraction The variable display mode of the V-icon corresponding to the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is set.
In addition, in the first modification, when winning the small win A, the rewinding effect of the V icon is not executed, and when winning the small win B or C, the rewinding effect of the V icon can be executed. It is configured. By constructing in this way, when the player wins the most advantageous small win A while acquiring the V icon, the display of the V icon can be terminated without fail. On the other hand, when winning a small win B or a small win C, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, while the player has acquired the V icon, the period during which the V icon is displayed more continuously than when the player wins the small win A. can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to set a small winning type in which only one small winning is guaranteed and a small winning classification in which multiple small winnings are guaranteed by the V icon, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.
In addition, in the first modification, when the winning small hit type is the small hit A, the rewind effect is not executed, but it is not limited to this, and S42616 and The processing of S42617 may be executed to enable execution of the V-icon rewind effect.

In addition, in the first modification, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reservation is started, if the execution condition of the V icon acquisition effect is satisfied with the remaining special figure 2 reservation, the V Although the icon rewinding effect is executed, it is not limited to this, and the V icon is rewound in part when the execution conditions for the V icon acquisition effect are satisfied with the remaining special figure 2 pending. It is good also as a structure by which production|presentation is performed. In addition, it is also possible to change the rate at which the rewinding effect of the V icon is executed depending on the type of the special symbol to be variably displayed from now on. The V icon rewind performance may be set more easily when the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on the V hold of the small win B winning than when the display is executed.
Further, in the first modified example, the rewind effect of the V icon is set at the time when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the activation effect of the V icon is executed during the variable display of the special symbols, the conditions for newly acquiring the V hold and executing the rewind effect of the V icon are set until the variable display is stopped. It may be configured such that the rewind effect of the V icon can be executed when the game is established. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player think to save the hold even during the variable display of the special symbol in which the V icon is activated, and the game efficiency can be improved.
Further, in the first modified example, the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is not incremented even when the V-icon is newly acquired while the V-icon is already acquired, but this is not the case. Instead, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd may be incremented when a new V suspension is acquired. For example, when the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is "9", when the V holding of the small win B winning is newly acquired, the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is added by "7", "16" may be used. In this case, an effect (for example, an effect of adding flower petals) is executed to change the display mode of the displayed V icon to the display mode of the V icon corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter after addition. It is good as
Also, in the processing of S42617, if there is a difference between the value of the counter corresponding to the display mode of the displayed V-icon and the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd, the rewind effect is set. It is good as For example, in a state in which three flower petals are digested as the display mode of the displayed V icon (a state in which the small win B is won twice and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is "2"), a new "7" is added to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd based on the acquisition of the V reservation for winning the small win B, and when the value of the display end counter 223rd becomes "9", it is consumed first. It is also possible to set the rewind effect of the V icon in the variable display of the special symbols based on the V hold. Alternatively, in the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold that is executed first, the activation effect of the V icon may not be executed.

As described above, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, during execution of the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored (stored) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b As a result of determining (pre-reading) in advance, when the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the small winning winning reservation (V reservation) in the reservation is a specific number of rounds, the jackpot game of the specific number of rounds It has a different technical idea from the other control examples in that it is configured to notify the player that is guaranteed, but the technical idea unique to the first modification of the fifteenth control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in other control examples.
In addition, in the first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of prefetching the lottery result of the reserved special figure 2 reserved, but it is not limited to this, and the reserved and stored It may be configured to set the V icon acquisition effect based on the result of pre-reading the winning information of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets V icon acquisition production based on the result of having prefetched both special figure 1 reservation and special figure 2 reservation.
In the first modified example, the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. good. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. With this configuration, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost, the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost are stopped and displayed. Even so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
In addition, in the first modification, the V reservation is a reservation for winning a small prize, but the reservation is not limited to this, and the reservation for winning a big prize may be V reservation. Alternatively, the V reservation may be a reservation for short-time winning.

In addition, in the first modified example, it is configured to display a "V icon" as a notification mode for indicating that V reservation exists in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation, but it is limited to this Instead, it may be configured to notify using a character instead of the V icon, or may be configured to change the background, as long as the display mode allows the player to recognize the minimum number of guaranteed jackpot rounds. .
In addition, in the first modification, when there is a V hold in the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored, a configuration for displaying a V icon, that is, a notification mode for notifying information advantageous to the player However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information. For example, in the first modification, if the small hit A is won twice during the time saving state, or if the small hit C is won three times, the time saving state ends. If there are two V-holds to win, or if there are three V-holds that win a small win C, an icon (for example, a skull icon) that foretells that a time-saving end condition will be satisfied in the hold. may be configured to display .
By configuring in this way, if the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) remains after the time saving end condition is established, it is possible to expect a small winning in the remaining reservation, so within the reservation To make a player think to accumulate the special figure 2 reserve to the upper limit by the time the variable display of the special pattern satisfying the time saving end condition is finished by allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time saving end condition is satisfied. can be done.
In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the display mode of V icon by the small hit classification of V reservation which exists in reservation. For example, the number of petals attached to the flower 806 may be more likely to increase when there is a V reserve for a small win B or C win than when there is a V reserve for a small win A win. Alternatively, the color of the flower petals may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for consecutive wins (continuous winning of small winnings).

<16th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 488. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example described above, when the special symbol lottery does not continuously hit the jackpot over the specified number of times (for example, 500 times), and when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery In addition, it was configured to set the time-saving game state directly (without going through the jackpot game).
The pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example has the following differences 1 to 3 from the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example. That is, as a different point 1, during the execution of the variable display effect based on the time saving symbol winning, as a kind of variable display mode, it is configured to execute the effect of notifying (suggesting) the number of time saving times. Then, the time-saving pattern is won, and the number of times of the time-saving state that is set directly based on the time-saving pattern winning (the number of fluctuations in the special design that ends the time-saving state if the jackpot is not won) is the number of ceiling lotteries If the number of lotteries remaining is greater than the number of lotteries remaining until (the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reached within the number of times of time saving in the time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning), the number of times of time saving to be notified (suggested) will be the time saving pattern winning. It is configured to execute a special performance control that can notify the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on. More specifically, if it is assumed that the jackpot will not be won in the time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries from the time-saving pattern winning until the time-saving state is actually interrupted (shift to normal state) (that is, for the time-saving design winning When the ceiling lottery frequency is reached during the time saving state based on the ceiling lottery frequency, the number of lotteries until the time saving state ends based on the ceiling lottery frequency arrival) is added to inform the apparent number of times of time saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate a case in which it is possible to inform the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on the winning of time saving symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .
Further, as a difference 2 from the thirteenth control example described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries is cleared. In addition to holding the data of the counter value for switching and setting the variation pattern group (variation pattern selection table) (holding the progress of the variation pattern scenario). By configuring in this way, even when processing such as RAM clearing is executed, a time saving state can be set when the variation of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling lottery number of times is reached). Above, regardless of the presence or absence of the RAM clear operation, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling lottery number. Therefore, until the ceiling lottery number is reached, it is possible to realize a game property in which the sense of anticipation is increased step by step, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear operation is performed. In addition, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number does not increase, so the pachinko machine 10 with a high possibility that the RAM clearing operation was performed (for example, the previous day When the hall is closed, it is in an advantageous state other than the normal state, etc.).
Furthermore, as difference 3 from the thirteenth control example described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times) without judging the jackpot. , On the premise that the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) is set without going through the jackpot game every time the variable display of the next special pattern stops, the ceiling lottery number is reached by reaching the ceiling lottery number. Configured so that the remaining count is reset. In other words, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the lottery of special symbols for the ceiling lottery number of times is further executed to set the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) again. As a result, even if the jackpot cannot be won during the time-saving game state set based on the number of times of the ceiling lottery, and the player shifts to the normal state (falls), the number of times of the ceiling lottery can be reached again. Since the player can be made to aim for (re-execution of the ceiling), it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's motivation for the game is less likely to decrease. Along with this, in the 16th control example, the configuration is such that the variation pattern scenario is reset based on reaching the ceiling lottery count. That is, based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the correspondence relationship between each variation count until reaching the next ceiling lottery number of times and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling lottery number has not been reached or the number of ceiling lotteries has been reached one or more times and the time saving state has passed, the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries is a specific number. (Remaining 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a special variation pattern can be selected. In other words, when the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries reaches a specific number, the ceiling fan effect can be executed. It is possible to realize a game property in which the player's sense of expectation is improved step by step until the game is reached.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in No. 13 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the thirteenth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
<Regarding the effects in the sixteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 to 474, an effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the difference 1 will be described. It should be noted that the main configuration of this control example will be briefly explained before the detailed explanation of the effect mode. When the ceiling lottery number of times is reached), the fluctuation in the specified number of times is completed, and at the fluctuation stop timing in the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed next, the frequency of opening the electric accessory 640a is set high and the opening period is set long. By doing so, the time-saving game state (ceiling game state), which is a game state in which the probability of entering the second ball entrance 640 is set high, is set continuously until the variation of the special symbol is executed up to 100 times. be. In addition, in this control example, in addition to the ceiling game state, the sudden time-saving game state that is set by winning in the lottery executed each time the special pattern variation starts in the time-saving winning pattern is set even if the jackpot game is not executed. configured as possible.
Below, until the ceiling game state shown in FIG. 474 is set, the effect mode executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIGS. 471 to 473 are displayed Each of the production mode and the production mode will be explained.
Figure 474 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect mode when the specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times) is reached during the time saving state based on winning the time saving pattern, and the time saving state is set redundantly. In FIG. 474, the case where the number of times of the number of drawing of the remaining special patterns until reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery is 25 times, and the number of times of working hours is 50 times of the time saving pattern is exemplified. The correspondence relationship with the number of lotteries is shown.

In the lottery at the start of the fluctuation of the 475th fluctuation number (the number of fluctuations without executing the jackpot game), which is 25 times remaining to the specified number of times (500 times in this control example), the time-saving pattern is elected, and the special During the variable display of the symbols (during the dynamic display), the time saving symbol winning effect shown in FIG. 471(a) is executed. FIG. 471(a) is an effect mode diagram showing an example of a time saving symbol winning effect. When the time-saving design is won, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variable display area Dm1 of the special symbol (third symbol) is reduced and displayed on the upper right. A rabbit character 801 is displayed in the display area where the special symbols are variably displayed (display area larger than the variable display area Dm1), and the number of variations in the time-saving gaming state given above it (the number of variations in the special symbols) ) are displayed in multiple rotations. Further above it, a mode for indicating that the time-saving design has been won is displayed as ``waiting for the chance time-'', and it is configured so that the player can identify that the time-saving design has been won.
When the time-saving pattern is won and the time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set, the number of fluctuations with the number of fluctuations being 1 is determined by lottery, and the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the number of fluctuations is executed. The time saving game state is continuously set until it is done. In addition, if the jackpot is won before the set number of fluctuations is executed, the game state drawn by the jackpot lottery is set after the jackpot game, so rather than executing the set number of fluctuations There is a possibility that the time saving game state ends before.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 471(a), in the small display area Dm4 in the upper left area of the third symbol display device 81, the character "Right shot" is displayed, and the right side of the third symbol display device 81 (Right shot) is displayed. area) is displayed to suggest that the player shoot the game ball so that the game ball passes through. In addition, in this control example, by notifying the right hitting from the fluctuation of the special pattern winning the time saving pattern, the player was notified that the time saving pattern was won in a more easy-to-understand manner, but not limited to that, the right hitting notice suddenly appeared in the time saving game. It may be configured to be notified from the start of the next variation (476th time) of the special symbol in which the state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give more advantageous information to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 471(a), in the sub display area Ds (below the display area), the display of the pending symbol is hidden, and suddenly a time-saving game state of "Determine the number of chance times!" A character display is provided to suggest that the mode for suggesting the number of times of variation to be continued is determined from among the candidates.
Here, in the state in which the production mode of FIG. 471 (a) is being executed, just before the fluctuation time of the special symbol passes (the timing when the fluctuation time ends) (5 seconds before the fluctuation stops, etc.), FIG. 471 ( As shown in b), one variation number is determined among the candidates 811a to 811d for variation number of times that the sudden time-saving gaming state is continued. In the example of FIG. 471(b), the number of fluctuations of 100 times is reported as the number of continuations. In addition, in this control example, the number of fluctuations notified to the player is the number of fluctuations that is actually determined (the actual number of fluctuations until the sudden time-saving game state is continued). It is configured to be notified as By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the time-saving game state will continue even when the number of variations in the performance becomes 0 times, and diversify the performance mode. . When the number of fluctuations in the effect of continuously executing the time-saving game state is determined, a mode ("GET 100 times!!" character display) is displayed. In addition, the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1 in a combination mode indicating the deviation.

As shown in FIG. 471(b), from the state in which the variation frequency candidates 811a to 811d on the presentation of the time-saving gaming state are displayed in rotation, when the timing is just before the variation time of the special symbol passes, the rabbit 801 A player jumps upward to punch, hits a variation number mode on one performance to determine it, and the variation number mode (variation number pattern) is enlarged and displayed. The other variable number modes are scattered while being reduced in the direction outside the display area, so that the determined variable number mode can be easily understood.
In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the number of times of variation is automatically determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol. When the valid time has passed (timing when the valid time ends), the variation number of the candidates 811a to 811d for the sudden reduction in working hours displayed as shown in FIG. It may be configured to be determined.
Here, as shown in FIG. 474, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol that is actually elected in the time saving winning symbol and the sudden time saving gaming state is continued is 50 times in the example shown here, but the variation in the production 100 times is determined as the number mode. This is the time when 26 times have passed until the ceiling game state is set before the actually determined 50 times special symbols are changed, and the time-saving game state has passed 26 times as the ceiling game state. , the remaining number of times is updated to 100 times, so in reality, the time saving state will continue from the time the time saving pattern is won until the 126 special pattern fluctuation display ends, so 126 times or less This is because even if 100 times, which is the number of times of , is determined, no contradiction in presentation occurs.
By constructing in this way, even if the number of times of variation in which the actual sudden time-saving game state is continued is 50 times, in the performance for determining the number of times of variation in performance, the mode of variation frequency of candidates exceeding 50 times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to give more advantageous information to the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Furthermore, although it is an effect to be described later, even if the actual number of fluctuations is 50 times, even if 100 times are reported, the total number of fluctuations from the start of the time saving game state to the end of the ceiling game state is 126 times at maximum. As a result, it becomes more than 100 times in the notified effect, and it is possible to use a maximum of 26 times as an additional effect as an intermediate effect. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of fluctuations in which the actual time-saving game state (suddenly time-saving game state or ceiling game state) is continued, and allows the player to have a sense of expectation that the remaining number of fluctuations will be infinitely added. .

Next, the number of fluctuations in FIG. 474 is the 476th time (remaining time reduction number (remaining number of fluctuations in the special symbol that suddenly continues the time reduction game state) is 50 times) Effect that is executed during the sudden time reduction game state The production during the chance time will be described. FIG. 472(a) is a diagram showing an example of the aspect of the effect during the chance time. During the chance time (a period during which the time-saving game state is suddenly set), the number of times of remaining time-saving in the performance is displayed in a small area Ds7 below the small area Dm4 in which the right-handed hitting notification is executed in the display area. In FIG. 472(a), the timing when the variable display of the special symbol stopped when the number of times of remaining time reduction on the effect became 0 times (the special symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 (second special symbol) was stopped timing). In the main display area Dm, a rabbit character 801 and an angel character 809 are displayed, and an effect is executed as to whether or not the number of remaining time reductions is executed when the treasure box 810 is emptied. , an addition mode 810a indicating "10" indicating the number of remaining time reductions in the effect to be added with smoke from the middle is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, a character "Add chance time!" is displayed to indicate that the number of remaining time reductions has been added.
After the additional mode 810a in which the number of remaining time reductions is added is displayed, the number (10) indicating the number of time reductions of the additional mode 810a is moved to the small area Ds7, and then the remaining time reduction of the small area Ds7 is performed. The number of times is updated to 10 times. By performing in this way, it is possible to easily notify that the displayed additional mode 810a was the effect of increasing the number of remaining time reductions. As for the effects during the chance time, the effect that the rabbit character 801 dashes is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the effect such as searching for the treasure box 810 is executed while the special symbols are changing. By configuring in this way, in the sudden time-saving game state, mainly the variation of the second special symbol is executed, and the variation time is likely to be selected shorter than the normal game state, but a plurality of special symbols can be used to provide a consistent and easy-to-understand presentation. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win, a letter "V" is displayed from inside the treasure box 810 to indicate a big win. After that, the big winning game is started after the special symbols are stopped. It should be noted that the production during this chance time can also be said to be the production of adding the given privilege without going through the big hit. In addition, a predetermined operation of the frame button 22 by the player may be set as an execution condition of the effect for increasing the number of remaining time reductions.
Also, during the chance time, if the time-saving pattern is won (lottery result in which the time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set when the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped without the jackpot game being executed), a new game from the treasure box 810 The number of times of continuous time reduction determined in (the number of times of special pattern fluctuations in which the ceiling game state is continued) or the number of times of continuous time reduction and the number of times of continuous time reduction with the ceiling game state set after that are discriminated. determined and notified.
In addition, in this control example, although it was configured to win the time saving pattern during the chance time, it is not limited to that, if it suddenly becomes a time saving game state (during the chance time), the time saving game state suddenly ends until the time saving game state ends It may be controlled so as not to win the symbol. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the lottery for the time saving pattern, and control may be executed to invalidate when the lottery for the time saving pattern is won.

In the production during the chance time, the production that the treasure box 810 is displayed is executed by drawing lottery on the condition that the production of the treasure box 810 is not executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, and the production of the treasure box 810 is executed. It is configured to run when determined. In this case, the greater the difference between the number of times of shortening remaining time on the effect and the actual number of times of shortening remaining time, the higher the probability that the treasure box 810 effect will be determined to be set. Further, when it is determined to execute the effect of the treasure box 810, the content of the effect mode to be executed when the treasure box 810 is emptied is determined based on the difference in the number of remaining time reductions and the result of the prediction of the reserved balls. be. In this case, if no effect mode is determined, an effect is executed in which the treasure box 810 is not empty. Although the treasure box 810 is configured not to be empty when it is determined that there is no effect mode, it may be configured so that it is empty and only smoke is notified. Also, when determining the execution of the effect of the treasure box 810, it may be configured to determine whether the treasure box 810 will be emptied with a predetermined probability.
Next, the ceiling game state (continuous time reduction number of times 100 times) is set at the timing when the 501st special symbol variation in FIG. 474 stops. Here, the time-saving game state suddenly shifts to the ceiling game state, but as for the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the previously explained effect during the chance time is continuously executed.
Next, in FIG. 474, when the number of variations of the special symbol is 575 times, an example is shown in which the above-described effect mode of FIG. 472(a) is executed as the additional effect. Here, it is decided to execute the treasure box effect by lottery when the 575th variation of the special symbol is executed, and since 10 times is determined as the addition mode, the number of additions is increased as shown in FIG. 472(a). An extra mode indicating 10 times is executed. After that, the effect during the chance time is continuously executed from the 576th change of the special symbol. After that, at the 595th time (remaining time reduction number of times in the ceiling game state is 6 times), the end standby effect is executed in the variation of the special symbol. In this 16th control example, since it is configured to add the number of times that is a multiple of 10 as an additional effect, when the number of times of time saving on the display becomes 0 times, the remaining number of times of the actual time saving state is 10 Fractional remainders may occur. Therefore, while the fractional remaining number of time reductions is used, a display mode is set in which the number of remaining time reductions is not notified as an end standby effect. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a thrill of not knowing how long the time-saving state will continue.
FIG. 472(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this end standby effect. In the end standby effect, after the number of times of remaining short time is updated to 0 times in a small display area Dm7 below the small display area Dm4, the number of times of short time remaining in the effect cannot be identified, and the display of "last ??? times" is displayed. is done. In addition, in the main display area Dm, a hole 812 is formed in a part of the cloud where the rabbit 801 dashes. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, there is a character mode of "~Waiting for completion~" indicating that the number of remaining time reductions in the performance is less than 0 times, and the mode of suggesting the remaining number of times is a period in which it is impossible to identify. Is displayed. In the small display area Dm1, the second special symbol is reduced and variably displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the ceiling game state may end each time the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The characters "end waiting zone" are displayed to indicate that there is. By configuring in this way, the player does not end the ceiling game state even if the number of times of the remaining time reduction on the performance becomes 0 times, and continues even with the next special pattern fluctuation, and the remaining time reduction on the performance. If you feel a sense of danger that the ceiling game state will end every time the fluctuation of the special symbol stops by notifying you with the character display of "last ??? times" that makes it difficult to identify the number of times, and you do not finish. You can enjoy the contrast with the sense of relief of the game, and you can improve the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 474, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (1 time of the remaining time reduction in the ceiling game state), the ceiling game state ends at the timing when the fluctuation stops, and the timing of shifting to the normal game state Then, the end effect is executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol. FIG. 473 is a diagram showing an example of the content of the effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this end effect. In the end effect mode, the rabbit 801 dashes above a cloud with holes in the same way as the end standby effect described above from the start of the special symbol fluctuation, and five seconds before the special symbol fluctuation stops, as shown in FIG. Then, an effect of falling from the hole 812 is executed. In addition, in the small display area Dm7, a mode in which it is difficult to identify the remaining time short number of times in the effect of "last ??? times" is displayed, and the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the variable time has elapsed. (see small display area Dm1). Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "Chance time is over!" is displayed to indicate that the chance time (ceiling game state (time-saving game state)) has ended. Also, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, the characters "-end-" are displayed to indicate the end of the chance time.
In this way, if the number of remaining times of the specified number of times due to the configuration of the above-described difference 1 is less than the number of fluctuations set by winning the time saving pattern and suddenly the time saving game state is continuously set, at the time of the time saving pattern winning Then, the performance is executed as the settable number of times of time reduction taking into consideration the number of times of fluctuations in which the ceiling game state set thereafter is continued. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the number of remaining time reductions more than the number of times actually given at the timing based on the time reduction pattern winning, and the number of remaining time reductions larger than the actual number Since it is also possible to execute the additional effect so as to make it possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how many times the actual number of times will be. In addition, since the number of times the remaining time is shortened, which is unexpected for the player, is notified, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect.
<Regarding production in differences 2 and 3>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 475 to 477, an example of the effects displayed by the third pattern display device 81 in the above-described differences 2 and 3 will be described. In the above difference 2, even if the RAM clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, the value of the counter for counting the specified number of times the ceiling game state is set is not initialized, and the count value is held. , the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) for variably displaying the special symbol is switched based on the value of the count value. In addition, in the above-described difference 3, the ceiling game state is set, and after the shift to the normal game state based on the execution of the set number of times of time reduction, the variation of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed again. When shifting to the game state, the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) is switched each time the game state shifts to the ceiling game state, and a specific variation pattern is made easier to be selected.
FIGS. 475(a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect of a variation pattern executed in the next first variation after the specified number of special symbol variations are stopped and displayed. Based on the stop display of the special symbol variation for the specified number of times, the variation pattern group for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the ceiling reaching time table 202sb4 (see FIG. 480(c)). is set as The variation pattern selected from the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 (variation pattern group) is that the special symbol is reduced to the upper right small display area Ds1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 475(a). A rabbit character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an angel character 809 is displayed on the upper right of the rabbit 801 holding a board on which character information is displayed. On the board, character information "trajectory to the ceiling" for indicating the game state until reaching the ceiling game state is displayed, and further, the number of small winning games executed until the ceiling game state is set. (small bonus: character display twice) and the number of times of variation of special symbols (number of starts: character display 500 times) are character-displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm7, character information is displayed to suggest that the special symbols have changed a specified number of times, such as "Ceiling!?". In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode for indicating that the special symbols have been changed a specified number of times is displayed as character information, "Ceiling Reached!! Chance Time GET!".

After the mode shown in FIG. 475(a) is displayed (dynamically displayed) for 10 seconds, the rendering mode shown in FIG. 475(b) is displayed. In the production mode shown in FIG. 475(b), which is displayed after the production mode in FIG. In Dm, the rabbit character 801 continues to be displayed, the board held by the angel character 809 is hidden, and the comment from the angel 809 is displayed in a speech bubble, "If you win during the chance time, you have a great chance!?" Then, when a jackpot lottery is drawn in the ceiling game state, a mode for suggesting that the player is more advantageous than in the normal game state is notified.
Here, in this control example, when the jackpot is won during the ceiling game state, the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set to be more likely to be selected than when the jackpot is won in the normal game state. As a result, by executing the performance to encourage the player to be advantageous if the jackpot wins while the 100 times special symbols for which the ceiling game state is set are drawn, it is possible to increase the chances of winning the jackpot during the ceiling game state. Interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the player can expect to shift to the ceiling game state, the player can continue to play the game for a long period of time aiming at the execution of the variation of the special symbols up to the prescribed number of times. .
In addition, as shown in FIG. 475(b), in the small display area Dm4, the text "Right-handed" is displayed, and since the game shifts to the ceiling game state, it is notified to suggest that the right-handed game is executed. is executed. In addition, in the small display area Dm7, characters "Last 100 times" are displayed, and the number of times the remaining time is shortened is notified. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode for indicating that the special symbols have been changed a specified number of times is displayed as character information, ``Ceiling Reached!! Chance Time GET!''.
By configuring in this way, the prescribed number of times (500 times in this control example) for setting the ceiling game state has passed, and when it reaches the 501st time, the variation pattern table is switched, so that the 501st time A dedicated variation pattern can be executed for variation, and the transition to the ceiling game state can be notified in advance, and the game method etc. in the ceiling game state can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

With reference to FIGS. 476(a) and (b), the ceiling game state executed by switching the variation pattern table based on the number of variations of the special symbols in the above-described differences 2 and 3 in this control example is set. An effect for suggesting the remaining number of times up to the prescribed number of times to be performed will be described. FIG. 476(a) is a diagram showing an example of a low-intensity production mode executed when the expectation for reaching the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set is low.
As shown in FIG. 476(a), in the small display area Dm1 arranged in the upper right of the display area, the special symbols are reduced and variably displayed, and also in the main display area Dm, the large special symbols are variably displayed. At the lower right of the main display area Dm, reserved symbols hr1 and hr2 (black circle symbols) are displayed to notify that the number of reserved balls is two. An angel character 809 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a mode for indicating the degree of expectation for the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times is displayed as a comment display of "Approaching...?". In the small display area Dm7, there is displayed a mode for suggesting the number of times the special symbols have changed since the big win game was executed, "350 times between bonuses". In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character display of "An angel appears!" .
In this way, the variation pattern table is determined based on the count value of the number of variations of the special symbols after the jackpot that is not initialized even if the RAM clear is performed, and the number of variations reaches the specified number of times with the predetermined number of variations. By executing the notice performance indicating the degree of expectation, the player can play the game by predicting the remaining number of times until reaching the prescribed number of times from the notice performance, and determines whether or not to continue the game. can give you pleasure.
Next, with reference to FIG. 476(b), an example of a strong effect mode in which the degree of expectation for reaching the specified number of times is high will be described. In the rousing production mode, characters are displayed in the small display area Dm7, suggesting that the number of variations of the special symbol is 450 times after the big win game "450 times between bonuses" is executed. Also, in the main display area Dm, in addition to the variable display of the special symbols, an archangel character 809z different from the angel character 809 is displayed, and a ceiling game state of "Close approaching!!" is set in the comment display. A mode for suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation that the remaining number of times up to the prescribed number of times to be played is small is displayed in characters.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the variation pattern table is switched based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la for counting the number of variations of the special symbols between the big winning games that are not reset even if the ram clear is executed. set. In this control example, as defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202sj of FIG. Table 202sb3 is configured to be set. In the table for ceiling tilting, it is assigned so that the variation pattern is set by lottery, and the value of the special lottery counter 203la is closer to the specified number of times (500 times, 1000 times ...). It is set so that the ratio of determination of the strong effect mode is high. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the remaining number of times is small when the rousing effect mode is executed, so that the player can continue to play the game. In addition, as in the thirteenth control example described above, even in this sixteenth control example, a small bonus (special jackpot and small win) is installed, and the number of lotteries on the display (the number of lotteries between bonuses) indicates that the small bonus is won. It is configured to be reset by In other words, even if the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is not reset, the apparent number of lotteries (the number of times between bonuses) is reset to 0, so the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number can be completely seen from the number of lotteries on the display. difficult to configure. Under such circumstances, by setting a ceiling fanning performance in which an archangel character 809z is displayed as the number of ceiling lottery draws approaches, the player can predict the remaining number of times up to the number of ceiling lottery draws from the performance mode. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, referring to FIG. 477, after shifting to the ceiling game state once, the variation of the special symbol is executed up to the number of continuations, and after shifting to the normal game state, the jackpot game is executed again and the specified number of times. It is the figure which shows an example of the production|presentation aspect performed by the fluctuation|variation pattern which the ceiling fanning table 202sb3 is set, and the number of times of variation|variation of the special design which becomes 150 times remaining becomes the 850th time. As shown in FIG. 477, in addition to the variable display of the special symbols in the main display area Dm, an angel character 809 is displayed, and the comment "Approaching again...?" A mode for suggesting the remaining number of times of the specified number of times to be played is displayed in characters. In this way, when the ceiling game state is set continuously without executing the jackpot game, a performance mode different from the first ceiling swing performance mode is executed. The game can be played while recognizing that it is the degree of expectation for setting the ceiling game state again, and the player determines the probability of executing the jackpot game, etc., and decides whether to continue the game. can make judgments.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 478 to 482, the electrical configuration in this 16th control example will be described. Only points different from the thirteenth control example will be described, and illustration and description of the same contents will be omitted.
FIG. 478(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example. In this 16th control example, the contents of the first hit random number table 202sa, variation pattern selection table 202sb, time saving per type selection table 202si, and variation pattern scenario table 202sj are changed.

FIG. 479 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202sa. The first winning random number table 202sa executes the right/wrong determination (discrimination) of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. information is set for If the game state is a normal game state or a time-saving game state (including a sudden time-saving game state and a ceiling game state), the judgment probability of a jackpot is set to a low probability. A setting value (judgment value) for judging a big hit is set for each of 1 to 6 as a high probability state in which the probability of judging a big hit is set higher than the low probability state. ing. As shown in FIG. 479, in the low probability state, 0 to 4 for setting 1, 0 to 5 for setting 2, 0 to 6 for setting 3, and 0 to 4 for setting 4. 7, 0 to 8 for setting 5, and 0 to 9 for setting 6 are set as judgment values, respectively. Also, if it is a high probability state, 0 to 19 for setting 1, 0 to 23 for setting 2, 0 to 27 for setting 3, 0 to 31 for setting 4, setting 5 0 to 36 for setting 6, and 0 to 39 for setting 6, respectively. Further, the determination values are set so that each value of 40 to 64 of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined as a small winning.
Next, with reference to FIG. 480, the variation pattern selection table 202sb will be described. The variation pattern selection table 202sb is for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of the variation of the acquired special symbol, the propriety determination result of the special symbol, and the current number of pending balls. It is a selection table for determining a variation pattern table (variation pattern group). The variation pattern table to be selected is 1 based on the currently set game state type (normal game state, time-saving game state, sudden time-saving game state, ceiling game state, probability variable game state) and the number of variations of special symbols. is determined. In addition, in this control example, the variation pattern table is selected as described above, but it is not limited to that, a predetermined lottery may be executed to determine the type of variation pattern table, the end timing of the jackpot game, , the result of the selection lottery executed by executing one variation pattern table with a predetermined selection probability after the execution of the small winning game, the game state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern, the information on the number of times of the big win and the small win, and the ceiling game state. The number of remaining fluctuations, the number of times of shifting to the ceiling game state, etc., or information combining some of them may be used for selection.
FIG. 480(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202sb. In the variation pattern selection table 202sb, a normal table 202sb1, a probability variable/time saving table 202sb2, a ceiling tilting table 202sb3, and a ceiling reaching table 202sb4 are set.
The normal table 202sb1 and the probability variable/shortening time table 202sb2 are not shown, but in brief, the normal table 202sb1 selects a variation pattern when the normal game state is set. It is a table set as a table. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the result of big hit determination (hit, miss, small hit), the number of currently held balls, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In each variation pattern, since the variation time of the special symbol (execution period of the variation pattern) is set in advance, the selection of the variation pattern can be rephrased as the selection of the variation period (dynamic display period). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the period until the result of winning/failure determination is displayed in terms of design, so that it is possible to limit the number of times of lottery per time, and the game is improved. It can be designed by adjusting the gambling nature.

The variable probability/time saving table 202sb2 is selected as a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern in the case of the variable probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. A plurality of variation patterns are set in correspondence with the result of determination of success or failure, the current number of pending items, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. In addition, the variation pattern set in the table 202sb2 for probability variation and time reduction is set to have a shorter variation time than the variation pattern set in the normal table 202sb1, and it is possible to execute many lotteries in a short time. It is possible.
Next, with reference to FIG. 480(b), the ceiling fan table 202sb3 will be described. FIG. 480(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this ceiling tilting table 202sb3. This table for tilting the ceiling 202sb3 has 350 times, 400 times, and 450 times the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the execution of the jackpot game (the number of fluctuations of the special symbols from the start of the game on a gaming machine where the jackpot game is not executed). This table is selected when . In addition, determination of the number of fluctuations for selection is selected based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la.
Ceiling tilting table 202sb3 is assigned the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the result of determination of the special pattern (hit, special hit, small hit, loss (when winning the time saving pattern), loss). A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. In each variation pattern selected by the table for raising the ceiling 202sb3, the effect for raising the ceiling (FIGS. 476 and 625) described above is executed.
Next, the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 480(b). FIG. 480(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ceiling reaching table 202sb4. The ceiling reaching time table 202sb4 is a variation pattern selected when the number of special symbol variations reaches the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set, and the next special symbol variation is executed (that is, the 501st time). is a table.

Table 202sb4 for the time of reaching the ceiling is assigned a value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the success/failure determination result of the special symbol (hit, special hit, other than hit and special hit), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 A plurality of fluctuation patterns are respectively set corresponding to the . In each variation pattern selected in the ceiling reaching table 202sb4, the above-described effect for ceiling reaching (FIG. 475) is executed.
Next, with reference to Drawing 481 (a), per time saving classification selection table 202si is explained. Drawing 481 (a) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of classification selection table 202si per time saving. This time saving type selection table 202si is a data table for selecting the number of times of special design fluctuations (number of times of time saving) for which the ceiling time saving game state is continuously set when the time saving pattern is won in the lottery of the success or failure determination ( lottery table). Types of time-saving symbols are set corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of starting winning.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 481 (a), when the value of the first per type counter C2 is 0, the time saving pattern A (time saving number of times 100 times) is selected, and the value of the first per type counter C2 When is 1 to 19, time saving pattern B (time saving number of times 50 times) is selected, and when the value of the first per type counter C2 is 20 to 99, time saving pattern C (time saving number of times 30 times) is selected. configured to be
Next, the variation pattern scenario table 202sj will be described with reference to FIG. 481(b). FIG. 481(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj. This variation pattern scenario table 202sj is a data table in which data for selecting a variation pattern table is defined based on the number of variations of special symbols (value of special symbol lottery counter 203la) after a big win game is executed. . In this scenario table, when the ceiling game state has not been reached, the scenario table corresponding to the ceiling non-reaching is stored in a scenario storage area 203sb described later, and the variation pattern is based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la. A type is selected. On the other hand, when the ceiling game state is reached and the set time-saving game state (ceiling game state) ends, the scenario table corresponding to the ceiling game is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb, and the special figure lottery counter 203la is displayed. A variation pattern type is selected based on the value.

As shown in FIG. 481(b), scenarios when the ceiling has not been reached are set in a normal state (normal game state) and a scenario other than the normal state. In the normal state, when the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la (the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the jackpot game) is 1 to 349, the normal (normal table 202sb1) is selected, and 350 If it is, the ceiling fan (table for ceiling fan 203sb3) is selected, if it is 351 to 399, the normal one (normal table 202sb1) is selected, and if it is 400, the ceiling fan (ceiling tilting table 203sb3) is selected, and when it is 401 to 449, normal use (normal table 202sb1) is selected, and when it is 450, for ceiling tilting (ceiling tilting table 203sb3) is selected, and if it is between 451 and 500, the normal use (normal use table 202sb1) is set to be selected. In addition, when it is other than a normal state, it sets so that the table 202sb2 for probability variation / time reduction may always be selected.
On the other hand, scenarios for reaching the ceiling are set for the normal state (normal game state) and other than the normal state. In the normal state, when the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game) is 1, the ceiling reaching time (ceiling reaching table 202sb4) is selected. , If it is 2 to 349, the normal use (normal table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 350, the ceiling tilting use (ceiling tilting table 203sb3) is selected, , the normal use (normal table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 400, the ceiling tilting use (ceiling tilting table 203sb3) is selected, and if it is 401 to 449, the normal use (normal table 202sb1) is selected, and if it is 450, the ceiling fan (ceiling fan table 203sb3) is selected, and if it is 451 to 500, the normal (normal table 202sb1) is selected. is set. In addition, when it is other than a normal state, it sets so that the table 202sb2 for probability variation / time reduction may always be selected.
By configuring in this way, every time the ceiling is reached (every time the number of variations of the special symbol is executed 500 times after the game of the big win), the next variation pattern can be a variation pattern dedicated to the time of reaching the ceiling. Thus, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state will be shifted to the ceiling game state, and it is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity caused by the sudden transition of the game state without executing the jackpot game.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 481, both the variation pattern scenario for not reaching the ceiling and the variation pattern scenario for reaching the ceiling are configured as a set of two scenarios, a scenario in a normal state and a scenario in a game state other than the normal state. ing. In other words, when setting the variation pattern scenario (storing it in the scenario storage area 223sb), the scenario in the normal state and the scenario in the game state other than the normal state are set as a set. refers to a normal state scenario among a set of scenarios to identify the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries, while a game state different from the normal state (probability variable state and time saving state), the type of the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of lotteries of special symbols is specified by referring to scenarios other than the normal state among a set of set scenarios. In other words, even if the game state is changed in the middle (for example, if the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state and changed to the time-saving state, etc.), the number of special symbol lotteries when referring to the variation pattern scenario (variation number of times), the scenario for the corresponding game state out of a set of set scenarios can be referenced to specify the variation pattern selection table, so without shifting to another game state. Even if the normal state continues, or if the normal state is set by shifting to the time-saving state one or more times, while staying in the normal state, the special symbols from the end of the previous jackpot The correspondence relationship between the number of lotteries and the type of variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common. Therefore, regardless of how the normal state is set, when the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number reaches a specific number of times (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), it is possible to select the variation pattern for ceiling tilting. It is possible to execute a production for ceiling fanning. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the presentation mode in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 478(b), the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this 16th control example will be described. The RAM 203 in the 16th control example differs from the 13th control example in a shop where a ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa and a scenario storage area 203sb are added. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
In addition, the special figure lottery counter 203la is not reset even if normal ram clear is executed, and is configured to hold a backed up value. This special drawing lottery counter 203la is configured to be reset by clearing the ram as a special ram clear, turning on the power, turning off the power, clearing the ram again within 5 seconds, and turning on the power.
The ceiling standby flag 203sa is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuations in the special symbol has reached the prescribed number of times for which the ceiling game state is set. It is set to ON when reaching a specified number of times, and is set to OFF when shifting to the ceiling game state.
The scenario storage area 203pb is an area for storing scenarios for not reaching the ceiling or for reaching the ceiling acquired from the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202sj. Even if the RAM is cleared, the information is backed up and held until the special RAM clear is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 482, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 482 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 482, the RAM 223 in the 16th control example has a time saving display frequency counter 223sa and a ceiling reached flag 223sb for the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 13th control example described above (see FIG. 372(b)). and are added.
The time saving display number counter 223sa is a counter that indicates the remaining number of lotteries on the display of the time saving state, and when the time saving state is set, a counter value corresponding to the number of times of the time saving state to be set is set. . Also, exceptionally, if there is a possibility of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times during the time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning (if you do not win, you will reach the ceiling lottery number within the time saving number of times), A counter value is set according to the number of determinations from the start of the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern winning to the end of the time-saving state set based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery times (see S34558A and S34559A in FIG. 488). While the time saving state continues, the number of time saving times corresponding to the counter value of this time saving display number counter 223sa is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the remaining number of time saving times.
The ceiling reached flag 223sb is a flag indicating whether or not the transition to the time-saving state (ceiling game state) based on reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery has been completed one or more times after the previous jackpot is completed. If this ceiling reaching completion flag 223sb is ON, it means that the transition to the ceiling game state has been completed, and if it is OFF, it means that the ceiling game state has not been set yet. The ceiling reached flag 223sb is set to OFF by default, and is set to ON when the ceiling lottery count is reached (see S34521A in FIG. 487). When the variation pattern for ceiling fanning is notified by the variation pattern command, the state of this ceiling reached flag 223sb is referred to, and the ceiling not reaching presentation mode (Fig. 476(a)) is set as the ceiling fanning presentation. , (b)) or to set the effect mode (see FIG. 477) for when the ceiling game state ends once or more (see S34573A in FIG. 489).
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 483 to 633, control processing executed by main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example will be described. Illustrations and descriptions of the same contents as in the thirteenth control example are omitted.

FIG. 483 is a flow chart showing the details of the control process of the ceiling determination process (S8321A) executed by main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example. In this ceiling determination process, it is determined whether or not the special figure lottery counter 203la (the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the jackpot game) has reached the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set, and when it reaches the ceiling game state. is executed.
When the ceiling determination process is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a special symbol low probability state (S38102). If it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special lottery counter 203la (S38103), and it is determined whether the ceiling time reduction standby flag 203sa is on (S38121A ). This ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa is a flag that is set to ON when the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la becomes 500, which is the specified number of times, and the variation of the special symbol up to the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state is executed (if it is on). When the ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa is off (S38121A: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la after addition has reached 500 (S38104).
In the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), set the state command including information indicating the current value of the special figure lottery counter 203la ( S38105), the process ends. The state command set by the process of S38105 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other state commands set in the second control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a state command indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is received, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is updated. As a result, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, that is, the number of times of hooking can be determined also on the sound lamp control device 113 side.
On the other hand, in the process of S38104, when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), data indicating the third time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S38112A), A process of clearing the information based on the time saving lottery this time is executed (S38113A), and a state command including information indicating the third time saving state and information indicating the number of time saving times (100 times) is set (S38114A). Add 1 to the value of the special lottery counter 203la and update it (S38124A), set the ceiling time reduction standby flag 203sa to ON (S38125A), and change the scenario after reaching the ceiling to the scenario storage area 203sb Change pattern scenario table 202sj is selected and set (S38126A). It is set to output 3 jackpot signals (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S3817A). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S38121A, if it is determined that the ceiling time saving flag 203sa is on (S38121A: Yes), the time saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38122A), the ceiling waiting flag 203sa and the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is set to ON (S38123A), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 484, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 484 is a flow chart showing this startup process. It should be noted that although there are some overlaps with the contents explained with reference to FIG. 50, they will be explained again for easier understanding.
This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 484), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).
After that, it is determined whether the setting key is turned to the ON position (S1751A). If the setting key is in the ON position, the process ends after executing the set value control process (S1752A). The set value control processing (S1752A) will be described in detail later, but if the operation of clearing the RAM is performed, after the initialization processing is performed, the processing related to the gaming machine settings (1 to 6) is executed. On the other hand, if the setting key is at the OFF position, the processing of S1704 is executed. In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not stored (S1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.
In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, the area other than the special figure lottery counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb is initialized (cleared) in the RAM area used as the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1753A). to run. After that, among RAM222, the initial data is set with the area other than special figure lottery counter 203la and scenario storage area 203sb as initial setting (S1754A).
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the start-up process, the area other than the special drawing lottery counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb is initialized (cleared) out of the RAM area used as the initialization process of the RAM 203. The process (S1753A) is executed. After that, among RAM222, the initial data is set with the area other than special figure lottery counter 203la and scenario storage area 203sb as initial setting (S1754A). After that, the process of S1710 is executed.
Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the processing of S1710 is performed after the processing of S1712, S1753A, and S1754A is executed. Go to processing.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1721A. In the processing of S1721A, signal output processing at startup (S1721A) is executed. This start-up signal output process (S1721A) is the same process as the process in FIG. 385 in the thirteenth control example, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
After the start-up signal output process (S1721A) is executed, a process (S31701) of transmitting a state command including information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la to the sound lamp control device 113, and the game state storage area 203g A process (S31702) of sending a status command containing the stored information to the audio lamp controller 113 is executed.
Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process which will be described later.
Next, with reference to FIG. 485, the set value control process (S1752A), which is one process in the start-up process (FIG. 484) executed by main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 485 is a flow chart showing the control contents of this set value control process (S1752A). In the setting value control process (S1752A), mainly the process for changing and confirming the setting of the game machine is executed.

First, in the set value control process (S1752A), it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (operated) (S1761A). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1761A: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1712), as the initialization process of the RAM 203, the area other than the special figure lottery counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb is initialized (cleared) (S1763A). After that, among RAM222, the initial data is set with the area other than special figure lottery counter 203la and scenario storage area 203sb as initial setting (S1764A).
After that, a state command indicating the setting change state is set to indicate that the setting change is to be executed (S1765A). It is determined whether the setting switch is on (S1766A). If it is determined that the setting switch is on (S1766A: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area is updated to the set setting type (S1767A). It is determined whether the setting key is in the OFF position (S1768A), and if it is determined that the setting key is in the OFF position (S1768A: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key is at the ON position (S1768: No), the processes of S1766A, S1767A and S1768A are repeated until the setting key is at the OFF position.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is off in the processing of S1761A (S1761A: No), power is restored to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power source was cut off. A time payout return command is sent (S1769A), the data in the set value storage area is read (S1770A), the set value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting display device (S1771A), and a state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (S1772A), and it is determined whether the setting key is off (S1773A). If it is determined that the setting key is at the OFF position (S1773A: Yes), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the setting key is at the ON position (S1773A: No), the process of S1773A is repeatedly executed until the setting key is at the ON position.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 489, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. Illustrations and descriptions of the same contents as in the thirteenth control example are omitted.

The effect mode setting process (S5001A) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 486 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control processing of this presentation mode setting processing (S5001A).
In this production mode setting process (S5001), a process for setting the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed. , a process for setting various effects is executed according to the game state that has been set.
When the production mode setting process (S5001A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0, that is, whether the current is the second time saving state or the third time saving state ( S34401), if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), normal mode effect setting processing is executed (S34431A), and then this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result (determination result) of the special symbol is a big hit (S34432A), and the big hit If it is determined to be (S34432A: Yes), the effect mode indicating the jackpot winning is set (S3433A), and after executing the processing of S34407, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S34432A, if it is determined that the lottery result is other than the jackpot (S34432: No), the value of the time saving counter 223da is subtracted by 1 (S34403), and the variation pattern for reaching the ceiling is set. (S34434A), and if it is determined that the variation pattern for reaching the ceiling is set (S34434A: Yes), based on the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb, the performance mode for reaching the ceiling is changed. After setting (S34435A) and executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern for reaching the ceiling (S34434A: No), the value of the time reduction display number counter is greater than 0, that is, the number of remaining time reductions in the effect is greater than 0. (S34436A). When it is determined that the value of the time saving display number counter is 0 or less (S34436A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is 0 (S34437: Yes), and if it is determined to be 0 (S34437A: Yes), decides the effect mode indicating that the chance time (time saving game state) ends (S34438A), executes the processing of S34407, and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S34437A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is not 0 (S34437A: No), the production mode for avoiding the end of the chance time (the production mode where the rabbit character does not fall into a hole in the cloud) etc. (see FIG. 472(b))) is determined (S34439A), and after the process of S34407 is executed, this process ends.
Also, in the process of S34436A, if it is determined that the hit of the time saving display number counter 223sa is a value greater than 0 (S34436A: Yes), the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa is subtracted by 1, and the time saving display after subtraction A display command for indicating the value of the number counter 223sa is set (S34441A). After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa is 0 (S34442A), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa is 0 (S34442: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 223da It is determined whether the value is greater than 10 (S34444A), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 10 (34444A: Yes), 10 below the value of the time saving counter as the number of times of time saving Of the multiples, the effect mode in which the maximum value is added is determined (S34448A). Then, after executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends. In the process of S34407, a variation pattern command for display indicating the determined effect mode is set.
On the other hand, in the process of S34442A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa is not 0 (S34442A: No), the production mode for chance time according to the received variation pattern is determined (S34443A), and then , and S34407, the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S34444A, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 10 or less (S34444A: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 0 (S34445A), and it is 0 In that case (S34445A: Yes), the effect mode indicating that the chance time (time saving game state) ends is determined (S34447A). After that, the process of S34407 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S34445A, when it is determined that the counter 223da during time saving is not 0 (S3445A: No), the effect mode indicating transition to the end waiting zone (see FIG. 472(b)) is determined (S3446A) . Then, after executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 487, the normal mode effect setting process (S34431A), which is one process in the effect mode setting process (S5001: FIG. 486) described above, will be described. FIG. 487 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of this normal mode effect setting processing (S34431A). In this normal effect setting process (S34431A), a process for setting the effect mode executed until the ceiling game state is set is executed.

In the normal mode production setting process (S34431A), first, the time saving suggestion production selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), and the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc and the production of the suggestion production corresponding to the data of the bonus history storage area 223pb. A mode is determined (S34512A). It is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 indicating the specified number of times the ceiling game state is set (S3413A). When the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A: Yes), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the prescribed number of times for setting the ceiling game state, the transition to the ceiling game state After setting the ceiling reached flag 223sb for indicating to ON, the process proceeds to S34518A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S34513A, if the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is 500. It is determined whether there is (S34515A). When it is determined that the number of lotteries is 500 (S34515A: Yes), the process proceeds to S34518A. On the other hand, in the process of S34515A, when it is determined that the number of lotteries is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether the number of lotteries after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A). If it is determined that the number of lotteries is not 500 (S34516A: No), the process proceeds to S34522. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of lotteries is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the oldest small bonus history is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517), and the process proceeds to S34518.
In the process of S34518A, a display mode is set to prompt not to play the game to the right (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34522A. In S34522A, a variation pattern setting process is executed (S34522A). After that, the interlocking effect flag 223pe is updated according to the determined effect mode (S34520A), and the process is terminated. Details of the variation pattern setting process (S34522A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 488, the variation pattern setting process (S34522), which is one process in the normal effect setting process (S34431: FIG. 487) described above, will be described. FIG. 488 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control processing of this fluctuation pattern setting processing (S34522A).

In the variation pattern setting process (S34522A), first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure determination result of the special symbol is the time reduction symbol election (S34551A). If it is determined that the success/failure determination result is a time-saving pattern winning (S34551A: Yes), the number of time-saving times corresponding to this time-saving pattern is the number of ceiling lottery times (prescribed number of times the ceiling game state is set). It is determined whether the above is satisfied (S34553A). When it is determined that it is equal to or more than the remaining number of times (S34553A: Yes), a value indicating the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling time reduction (ceiling game state) ends is set in the time reduction number counter (S34556A). It is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter is less than 150 (S34557A). When it is determined that the value of the time saving frequency counter is less than 150 (S34557A: Yes), the effect mode in which the time saving frequency of 150 times is notified is determined (S34559A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S34557A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not less than 150 (S34557A: No), the effect mode in which the number of time saving times is notified is determined (S34558A), and this process is terminated. .
Also, in the processing of S34553A, if it is determined that the number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving pattern of this time is not more than the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number of times (the specified number of times the ceiling game state is set) (S34553A: No), A performance mode in which the number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving pattern is notified is determined (S34554A), and the value of the number of times of time saving corresponding to one of the selected time saving patterns A to C is set in the time saving number counter (S34555A). After that, this process is terminated.
In the process of S34551A, when it is determined that the time saving symbol is not elected (S34551A: No), ceiling related effect setting process is executed (S34552A).
FIG. 489 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling-related effect setting process (S34552A) executed by the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In this ceiling-related effect setting process (S34552A), when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern for ceiling fanning, it is determined whether or not the ceiling game state has already been entered by the ceiling reached flag. , the setting for executing the corresponding effect mode is executed.

First, in the ceiling-related effect setting process (S34552), it is determined whether or not the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern for ceiling tilting (S34571A). When it is determined that the variation pattern is for ceiling fanning (S34571A: Yes), it is determined whether the ceiling reached flag 223sb indicating whether or not the ceiling game state has been transitioned is on (S34574A). When it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is ON (S34573A: Yes), the effect mode for ceiling tilting corresponding to the second ceiling is determined by lottery. Here, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 477 is determined. After that, this process ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S34571A, if it is determined that the variation pattern is not for ceiling fanning (S34571A: No), the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected, and this processing ends. When it is determined in the process of S34573A that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is off (S34573A: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 476) for ceiling tilting corresponding to the first ceiling is determined (S34575A). End the process.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example, when the special symbol lottery does not hit the jackpot continuously over the specified number of times (for example, 500 times), and when the special symbol lottery is used to shorten the working hours On the premise of setting the time-saving game state directly (without going through the jackpot game) when winning, during the execution of the variable display effect based on the time-saving pattern winning, the number of times of time-saving is displayed as a kind of variable display mode. It is configured to execute an effect to notify (suggest). Then, the time-saving pattern is won, and the number of times of the time-saving state that is set directly based on the time-saving pattern winning (the number of fluctuations in the special design that ends the time-saving state if the jackpot is not won) is the number of ceiling lotteries If the number of lotteries remaining is greater than the number of lotteries remaining until (the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reached within the number of times of time saving in the time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning), the number of times of time saving to be notified (suggested) will be the time saving pattern winning. It is configured to execute a special performance control that can notify the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on. More specifically, if it is assumed that the jackpot will not be won in the time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries from the time-saving pattern winning until the time-saving state is actually interrupted (shift to normal state) (that is, for the time-saving design winning When the ceiling lottery frequency is reached during the time saving state based on the ceiling lottery frequency, the number of lotteries until the time saving state ends based on the ceiling lottery frequency arrival) is added to inform the apparent number of times of time saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate a case in which it is possible to inform the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on the winning of time saving symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining lottery number up to the ceiling lottery number is suppressed from being cleared, and the variation pattern group ( It is configured to also hold counter value data for switching and setting the fluctuation pattern selection table (to hold the progress of the fluctuation pattern scenario). By configuring in this way, even when processing such as RAM clearing is executed, a time saving state can be set when the variation of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling lottery number of times is reached). Above, regardless of the presence or absence of the RAM clear operation, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling lottery number. Therefore, until the ceiling lottery number is reached, it is possible to realize a game property in which the sense of anticipation is increased step by step, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear operation is performed. In addition, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number does not increase, so the pachinko machine 10 with a high possibility that the RAM clearing operation was performed (for example, the previous day When the hall is closed, it is in an advantageous state other than the normal state, etc.).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example, when the big win is completed and a new variation pattern scenario is set, the progress of the variation pattern scenario (the number of special symbol lotteries (variations)) is managed. The counter value of a specific counter (special figure lottery counter 203la) for doing is updated every time a specific update condition (execution condition for lottery of special symbols) is satisfied, and the value of the specific counter is predetermined. When the counter value (first counter value) corresponding to the specified number of times (ceiling lottery number) is updated, control (specific control) for setting a new fluctuation pattern scenario is executed and the value of the specific counter is changed. It is configured to update to a second counter value (for example, 0) that is less than the first counter value. More specifically, the value of a specific counter is cleared to 0 each time a big win is won, a new variation pattern scenario is set, and the value of a specific counter is reset to 1 each time a lottery for special symbols is executed. The value of the specific counter is updated to 500 corresponding to the ceiling lottery frequency, the value of the specific counter is cleared to 0, and specific control is executed. In more detail, the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches the specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times) without being judged as a big hit, and every time the fluctuation display of the next special design stops, the time-saving game state (ceiling game State) is set without going through a jackpot game, and the number of times remaining until the ceiling lottery number is reset when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. In other words, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the lottery of special symbols for the ceiling lottery number of times is further executed to set the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) again. As a result, even if the jackpot cannot be won during the time-saving game state set based on the number of times of the ceiling lottery, and the player shifts to the normal state (falls), the number of times of the ceiling lottery can be reached again. Since the player can be made to aim for (re-execution of the ceiling), it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's motivation for the game is less likely to decrease. Along with this, in the 16th control example, the configuration is such that the variation pattern scenario is reset based on reaching the ceiling lottery count. That is, based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the correspondence relationship between each variation count until reaching the next ceiling lottery number of times and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling lottery number has not been reached or the number of ceiling lotteries has been reached one or more times and the time saving state has passed, the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries is a specific number. (Remaining 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a special variation pattern can be selected. In other words, when the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries reaches a specific number, the ceiling fan effect can be executed. It is possible to realize a game property in which the player's sense of expectation is gradually improved until the game is reached.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example, as a variation pattern scenario (a data table that defines the correspondence between the type of variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern and the number of times of lottery of special symbols), usually A scenario in a state and a scenario in a game state other than the normal state are set as a set (stored in the scenario storage area 223sb). While specifying the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of lotteries of special symbols by referring to the scenario, during the game state (probability variable state and time saving state) different from the normal state, one set that is set The scenario other than the normal state among the scenarios is referred to to specify the type of the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of lotteries of the special symbols. In other words, even if the game state is changed in the middle (for example, if the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state and changed to the time-saving state, etc.), the number of special symbol lotteries when referring to the variation pattern scenario (variation number of times), the variation pattern selection table can be specified by referring to the scenario for the corresponding game state out of the set of set scenarios, without shifting to another game state. Even if the normal state continues, even if the normal state is set by shifting to the time-saving state one or more times, while staying in the normal state, the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the previous jackpot will be counted. , the corresponding relationship with the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common. Therefore, regardless of how the normal state is set, when the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number reaches a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), it is possible to select the variation pattern for ceiling tilting. It is possible to execute a production for ceiling fanning. In other words, in the sixteenth control example, in the state (normal state) in which the control for specifying the variation pattern selection table is executed with reference to the variation pattern scenario for the normal state for each variation, the condition for changing the game state is established. In this case, for each variation, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after change is referred to, control is executed to identify the variation pattern selection table, and when the end condition of the game state after change is met, the game returns to the normal state again. In this case, the specification of the variation pattern selection table is restarted from the number of special symbol lotteries that takes into account the number of special symbol lotteries executed while the game state in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state is changed. . In other words, regardless of the timing and the number of lotteries set in other game states, if the normal state is set and the number of lotteries of special symbols after the previous jackpot (or reaching the ceiling lottery number) is common. , the variation pattern is selected by referring to the same variation pattern selection table. Thereby, regardless of how the normal state is set, when the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number becomes the specific number of times (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), the variation pattern for ceiling fanning can be selected. It is possible to execute a production for ceiling fanning. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the presentation mode in the normal state.
In addition, in this 16th control example, after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state is set when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached first without winning the jackpot, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached after the second time. Although it is configured to have exactly the same degree of advantage in the time saving state, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to have different degrees of advantage. More specifically, in the ceiling game state of the first time and the ceiling game state of the second and subsequent times, it may be configured to vary the degree of advantage by differentiating the number of times of time saving, for example, as in the fourteenth control example described above. , a time-saving state A (a time-saving state in which a lottery for a first special pattern with a low degree of advantage is mainly executed) and a time-saving state B (a time-saving state in which a lottery for a second special pattern with a high degree of advantage is mainly executed) are provided. Alternatively, the degree of advantage may be differentiated by differentiating the type of time saving state set in the ceiling game state for the first time and the ceiling game state for the second and subsequent times. In this case, the ceiling game state after the second time may be more advantageous than the ceiling game state of the first time, or the ceiling game state of the first time may be more advantageous. By configuring so that the degree of advantage is higher in the ceiling game state from the second time onwards, even if the player shifts to the normal game state without winning the jackpot in the ceiling game state of the first time, the second time is not possible. Since the player can aim for a ceiling game state with a higher degree of advantage, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. In addition, by configuring so that the first ceiling game state has a higher degree of advantage, after passing the ceiling game state, the next ceiling lottery number of times is used as a mental support, and the game is continued until the jackpot is won. It is possible to suppress the selection of a game method that cannot be quit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game.
In this 16th control example, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is held as it is when the power is turned off, regardless of whether the setting has been changed or not, even when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation. It was configured so as not to increase the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number. That is, the power-on without the RAM clear operation and the power-on with the RAM clear operation share the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries after power-on. Elements other than the number of times may also be shared. Specifically, for example, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at power-on may be made common. More specifically, for example, during the period from when the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started, the display of the first pattern display device 37 is erased or a common pattern is temporarily displayed. Alternatively, the first symbol display device 37 may be hidden by moving a predetermined movable accessory in front of the first symbol display device 37 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the power is simply turned on or whether the power is turned on along with the RAM clearing operation. In this case, even if the power supply is interrupted while the variable display is being executed and the power is simply turned on (that is, the RAM clear operation is not performed), the variable display is not restarted and the above-mentioned (Control to erase the display of the first symbol display device 37 or control to temporarily display a common symbol) may be executed. Conversely, information indicating the state of special symbols at the time of power shutdown (for example, whether variable display is being executed or not) is held so as not to be cleared even if power is turned on with RAM clear operation. However, if it is determined that the variable display was being performed at the previous power shutdown, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the variable display will be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 when the power is turned on. may be configured to set a display mode as if the was resumed in a pseudo manner. Further, when it is determined that the previous power cut-off is in the jackpot game state, the first symbol display device 37 may be configured to set a display mode indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the power was turned on with the RAM clearing operation or not with the RAM clearing operation. , the player can predict whether or not the RAM clear operation has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this 16th control example, when the ceiling lottery number is reached, the value of the special lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0 to reset the variation pattern scenario up to the next ceiling lottery number and to reset the ceiling lottery number. Although the configuration resets the remaining number of times, it is not limited to this. For example, a counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario is separately provided, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, the counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario is not cleared to 0, but a specific value (for example, return to 250, which is half the ceiling lottery number). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a variation pattern scenario that is significantly different from the scenario up to the number of ceiling lotteries reached in the first time.
In this 16th control example, when the big hit ends and a new variation pattern scenario is set, the counter value of a specific counter (special figure lottery counter 203la) is set to a specific update condition (special symbol lottery execution condition) is satisfied, and when the value of a specific counter is updated to a counter value (first counter value) corresponding to a predetermined specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times), a new While executing control (specific control) to set a variation pattern scenario, the value of a specific counter is updated to a second counter value (for example, 0) that is less than the first counter value. , The specific counter is not limited to a counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario, and the specific control is not limited to control for setting the variation pattern scenario, and is installed in the pachinko machine 10. The control of this 16th control example may be diverted to other counters and controls. For example, the first winning random number counter C1 for executing the special symbol lottery may be employed as a specific counter, or the variation type counter CS1 for selecting a variation pattern may be employed as a specific counter. Alternatively, it may be employed as a counter for selecting the mode of presentation on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, the control process for executing the winning game may be employed as specific control, the process of selecting a variation pattern may be employed as specific control, and the variation pattern command for the sound lamp control device 113 Control for determining the effect mode according to the notified variation type may be adopted as specific control, or the effect mode according to the look-ahead result notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the winning information command You may employ|adopt the control to determine as specific control.
In this 16th control example, in the state (normal state) in which the control for specifying the variation pattern selection table is executed by referring to the variation pattern scenario for the normal state for each variation, when the condition for changing the game state is satisfied, For each variation, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after the change is referred to, and control is executed to specify the variation pattern selection table. It was configured to resume specifying the variation pattern selection table from the number of special symbol lotteries that took into account the number of special symbol lotteries executed while the game state was changed in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state. The control is not limited to the control of specifying the variation pattern selection table from the variation pattern scenario. While the first control and the second control are being executed in a predetermined order, when the conditions for executing the third control having a higher priority are satisfied, If a situation arises in which the control of 3 is preferentially executed, it can be adopted. For example, if the playback condition for a high-priority audio is met during execution of control for playing back audio such as music, the volume of the originally-played music may be reduced even while the high-priority audio is being played. 0, and when the playback of the high-priority audio ends, the volume of the originally-played song is returned to normal volume, so that the output period of the high-priority audio is taken into consideration. Control may be such that the originally reproduced sound is reproduced from the continuation. In the configuration of the sixteenth control example described above, when winning a big win in the normal state, it is more desirable for the player to win a big win while the ceiling is far away than to win a big win just before the ceiling. In other words, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to win a jackpot in a situation where there are many remaining times until the ceiling than to win a jackpot that can end the time-saving state just before the ceiling. This configuration is the fifty-fifth control example in which the degree of advantage varies depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied in the first situation or the specific condition is satisfied in the second situation in a specific game state. It corresponds to another form of the invention concerned.
<17th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 490 to 501. FIG. In the above-described 14th control example, as the variation pattern scenario, a scenario is defined in advance for the number of special symbol lotteries in the range up to the number of times the ceiling lottery number is reached twice (that is, 300 times). When the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reached without winning the second time, the counter value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is updated to the counter value (that is, 150) corresponding to the number of times of the ceiling lottery of the first time. In other words, after reaching the number of ceiling lotteries once, the number of special lotteries in the variation pattern scenario is in the range of 150 to 300 times. The range of the number of times of lottery until reaching) is configured to repeat the scenario, so that the variation pattern scenario in the range where the number of times of lottery of special symbols exceeds 300 times can be omitted, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 is reduced. was. In addition, as a counter for determining the number of special symbol lotteries when specifying the variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario, by using a special figure lottery counter 203qa for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number has been reached. Regardless of whether or not power is turned on with a RAM clear operation (that is, an operation to turn on the RAM clear switch 122), the number of times of variation of special symbols and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are always matched.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example, a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries (special symbol lottery counter 203qa) and a special symbol lottery when specifying a variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario A counter (scenario counter 203tb) for determining the number of times is provided separately, and when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, a special drawing lottery counter 203qa. is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is held. In other words, only the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is reset while the progress of the variation pattern scenario is maintained from the state at the time of power shutdown. In addition, in this 17th control example, a specific lottery result (for example, A lottery result corresponding to a small hit) is set to set a variation pattern scenario over the number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries. In addition, in the seventeenth control example, in order to reliably set the variation pattern scenario with the first special symbol lottery after the power is turned on, the first special symbol lottery is performed in the same manner as the fourteenth control example described above. It adopts a specification that is either a big hit or a small hit. More specifically, similar to the 14th control example, the specification of a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine is adopted, and when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a big hit is 1/50 (18/900). 1/49 (872/900), it is possible to obtain almost no prize balls and it is difficult (impossible) to generate a V prize. By constructing in this manner, the variation pattern scenario is reset by executing the lottery for the first special symbol once after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the variable pattern performance up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery.
The pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 14 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 14th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 490, a characteristic presentation mode in the seventeenth control example will be described. As described above, in this 17th control example, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number of times is reset, while the fluctuation pattern The progress of the scenario is configured to be held, and after the power is turned on, based on the first small winning, the variation pattern scenario is set up to the ceiling lottery number. Further, as described above, in this 17th control example, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, either the big win or the small win is always won. As a result, if the first lottery for the first special symbol is a big hit after turning on the power, the remaining number of times up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reset in the same manner as in other control examples, and the fluctuation according to the reset remaining number of times. While the pattern scenario can be reset, even if the first lottery of the first special pattern results in a lottery result other than a big hit (that is, a small hit), the ceiling lottery number of times It is possible to set a variation pattern scenario over the number of lotteries. In Figure 490, the lottery of the first special symbol is a specific lottery result different from the big hit (that is, a small hit), and shows the effect mode when the condition for newly setting the variation pattern scenario is established. .
FIG. 490(a) is an example of a variable display mode when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, and the first special symbol lottery result is a small hit. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 490(a), after the power is turned on, when the first lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and the main display area Dm , a futon 852, a character 801 that resembles a rabbit sleeping in the futon 852, and an alarm clock 851 that sounds an alarm are displayed. In addition, the characters "Waiting for waking up..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that something will happen when the rabbit character 801 wakes up.

FIG. 490(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of stopping the variation among the variation display modes when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit. As shown in FIG. 490(b), when it comes to the stop timing of the variable display corresponding to the small hit of the first special symbol (that is, the lottery result which is substantially the same as the loss in other control examples), the main display area Dm In , the third pattern is displayed in a stopped state with a combination of disengagement, and a display mode in which the rabbit character 801 throws off the futon 852 is displayed. In addition, a balloon image FD imitating a balloon is displayed on the left side of the rabbit character 801, and the characters "Departure!" are displayed for the balloon image FD. Further, the text "Wake-up complete!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents can suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has completed some internal preparations. In addition, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the RAM is cleared by generating a special effect mode in the variable display mode based on the lottery for the first special symbol. It is possible to allow the player to easily determine whether or not the game has been completed. In other words, since it is possible to determine whether or not the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is cleared by the first lottery of the first special pattern, the lottery of the special pattern is executed at least once after the power is turned on. It is possible to make the player want to try it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall. Further, as in the sixteenth control example described above, if the pachinko machine 10 has a specification that allows the setting to be changed in a plurality of stages, by providing a production mode in which it is determined that the RAM has been cleared, the setting can be performed. It is possible to allow the player to determine whether or not there is a possibility of change. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall.
In this 17th control example, when the rabbit-like character 801 wakes up, it is configured not to indicate what has been set inside the pachinko machine 10, but a variation pattern scenario is set depending on the presentation mode. You can specify that. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the state has shifted to some advantageous state.
<Electrical Configuration in Seventeenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 491, the details of the ROM 202 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 491 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 491, the ROM 202 in the seventeenth control example is provided with a variation pattern scenario table 202tj instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202qj in the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth control example described above (see FIG. 404). The difference is that In addition, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202qd are partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fourteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Details of this variation pattern scenario table 202tj will be described with reference to FIGS. 493 and 494. FIG.
FIG. 493(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern scenario table 202tj in the seventeenth control example. This variation pattern scenario table 202tj is a data table in which a variation pattern table to be referred to for each number of special symbol lotteries is defined in association with the variation pattern scenario table 202qj in the fourteenth control example described above. As shown in FIG. 493(a), the variation pattern scenario table 202tj in the seventeenth control example defines the correspondence relationship between the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to. table 202tj1 for after RAM, table 202tj2 for post-small hit that defines the correspondence relationship between the number of lotteries of special symbols after the small win of the first special symbol is won after clearing the RAM and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to, It is composed of at least a ceiling reaching table 202tj3 that defines the correspondence relationship between the number of special symbol lotteries after reaching the ceiling lottery number and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to. First, with reference to FIG. 493(b), the details of the above-described post-winning table 202tj1 will be described.

FIG. 493(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the post-hit table 202tj1. As shown in FIG. 493(b), the post-hit table 202tj1 in the seventeenth control example shows the number of special symbol lotteries (scenario counter) and the current gaming state for each type of the previously executed big winning game. The type of the variation pattern table corresponding to the combination of is associated and defined.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 493(b), in a situation where the previous big win type is "big win A17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of lotteries for special symbols (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150 are defined in association with the normal table 202qd1. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, the number of special symbol lotteries of 100 and 140 are defined in association with the ceiling tilting table 202sb3. This ceiling tilting table 202sb3 is the same data table as the ceiling tilting table 202sb3 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202sb in the above-described 16th control example. is also added to the fluctuation pattern table 202qd in . In addition, as described above, the small hit of the first special symbol in the seventeenth control example is a lottery result corresponding to the loss in other control examples, so in the seventeenth control example, the small hit of the first special symbol If not, the variation pattern is selected by the sorting corresponding to the result of the losing lottery. In other words, it is configured such that either normal reach loss with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or super reach loss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is always selected. Therefore, when the variable display performance of the variable time of 15 seconds or 30 seconds is set, the player can be made to think that the ceiling lottery number is close, so that the player's expectation for reaching the ceiling lottery number is improved. be able to. In the seventeenth control example, when the ceiling lottery count is reached, the variation pattern scenario switches to a scenario that refers to the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached. only is specified.
Also, as shown in FIG. 493(b), in the situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" and the current game state is a time saving state, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) , special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 are defined in association with each other. Therefore, during the period from the end of the jackpot A17 to the ceiling lottery number of times, as long as the time saving state continues (the time saving number of times remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the first special A time-saving state A in which lottery of symbols is mainly executed is formed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 493(b), in the situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the same variation as when the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" A pattern scenario is defined. That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 1 to 99, the range of 101 to 139, and the range of 141 to 150 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). The table 202sb3 for ceiling fanning is defined in association with the number of lotteries of symbols of 100 and 140. FIG. On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the time saving state, the special symbol lottery number (value of the scenario counter 203tb) is in the range of 7 to 150, and the special figure 1 A time saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence, and a special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the range of 1 to 6 for the number of lotteries of special symbols (value of the scenario counter 203tb). Therefore, in the lottery number of 7 times to 150 times after the end of the jackpot B17, as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving times remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the first special symbol lottery forms a time-saving state A in which is mainly executed. In addition, in the number of lotteries of 1 to 6 times after the end of the big hit B17, the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, so the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 493(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot C17 to E17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" or "jackpot B17". The same variation pattern scenario is defined as in the case of That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 1 to 99, the range of 101 to 139, and the range of 141 to 150 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). The table 202sb3 for ceiling fanning is defined in association with the number of lotteries of symbols of 100 and 140. FIG. On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot type is “jackpot C17-E17” and the current gaming state is the time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is in the range of 12-150. Fig. 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence, and special pattern 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in association with the range of 1 to 11 for the number of times of lottery of special symbols (value of scenario counter 203tb) there is Therefore, in the number of lotteries of 12 to 150 times after the end of the jackpot C17 to E17, as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the first special symbol form a time-saving state A in which the lottery of is mainly executed. In addition, in the number of lotteries of 1 to 11 times after the end of the big hit B17, the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, so the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 494(a), details of the post-small hit table 202tj2, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj described above, will be described. As described above, this post-small winning table 202tj2 is a data table defining a variation pattern scenario that is set when a small winning of the first special symbol is first won after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 494(a), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is 1 to 99, 101 to 139, , and 141 to 150 range, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in correspondence, and the special symbol lottery times of 100 and 140 are defined in association with the ceiling tilting table 202sb3. On the other hand, in the situation that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of lotteries of special symbols (value of the scenario counter 203tb) is associated with the entire range of 1 to 150, the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 stipulated. Therefore, after turning on the power with RAM clearing operation, when shifting to the time saving state 150 times (the number of lotteries equal to or less than the ceiling lottery number), the time saving state A with a relatively low degree of advantage is formed. In addition, this 17th control example is based on the 14th control example, and since there is no allocation of time saving pattern winning in the lottery of the 1st special pattern, after turning on the power with RAM clear operation, time saving state within 150 times As a case of shifting to , it is only when winning the time-saving design in the lottery of the second special design. In other words, it is a case that basically does not occur because it is a case where an irregular game method is performed in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by striking to the right even though it is not in the time saving state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 494(b), details of the ceiling reaching table 202tj3, which is one of the data tables forming the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj described above, will be described. This ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is, as described above, a data table defining a variation pattern scenario that is set when the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the number of ceiling lotteries. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 494(b), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is 1 to 99, 101 to 139, , and 141 to 150 range, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in correspondence, and the special symbol lottery times of 100 and 140 are defined in association with the ceiling tilting table 202sb3. On the other hand, in the situation that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the special symbol lottery number (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is 1, and the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 is defined in association with the special symbol. The number of lotteries (value of scenario counter 203tb) is defined in the range of 2 to 12 in association with special figure 2 time-saving table 202qd3, and the number of lotteries of special symbols (value of scenario counter 203tb) is 13 to 12. To the range of 150, table 202qd2 for special figure 1 time reduction is defined in association. Therefore, when the first special pattern lottery does not win after reaching the ceiling lottery frequency, the super ready-to-win variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is always set. That is, it is possible to ensure a sufficient performance period for performing various notifications such as a performance mode for congratulating the reaching of the ceiling lottery count, so that the performance mode can be set favorably. In addition, after reaching the ceiling lottery number, in the number of lotteries of 2 times to 12 times, since the table 202qd3 for special figure 2 time saving is referred to, the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, an extremely advantageous time-saving state B in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed. Further, in the number of lotteries after the 13th time, as long as the number of times of time saving remains, a time saving state A with a comparatively low degree of advantage in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is formed. In addition, when the number of times of saving time reaches 0, the scenario for the normal state is referenced, so if the 100th or 140th special pattern lottery does not win after reaching the ceiling, the effect for ceiling fanning is executed. can do. Therefore, the player can be expected to reach the ceiling lottery count again.
Thus, in this 17th control example, the number of special drawing lots when referring to the variation pattern scenario is configured to be grasped by the value of the scenario counter 203tb, and the scenario counter 203tb is powered on with RAM clearing operation. It is configured so that the value is retained even when Then, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, and the first lottery of the first special symbol is a small hit, the post-small hit table 202tj2 is set as a variation pattern scenario. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suitably reset the variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling lottery number without initializing the scenario counter 203tb by the RAM clearing operation. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 492, details of the RAM 203 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 492 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 492, the RAM 203 in this 17th control example is the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 405). 203ta and scenario counter 203tb are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fourteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa is the same as the ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa that has been added to the RAM 203 in the sixteenth control example described above. , is a flag for making the occurrence of the time-saving state wait until the end of the variable display executed for the first time after the variable display of the number of times of the ceiling lottery is completed. The scenario storage area 203sb is the same as the scenario storage area 203sb added to the RAM 203 in the sixteenth control example described above, and is a storage area for storing data indicating the currently set variation pattern scenario. .
After the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on (after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation), the first small hit flag 203ta indicates whether or not the small win of the first special symbol has occurred one or more times. flag to indicate If this first small hit flag 203ta is ON, it means that the small win has already been won once or more, and if it is OFF, it means that the small win has not been won even once. The initial value of the first small hit flag 203ta is set to OFF, and is set to ON when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (see Y773 in FIG. 498). When the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the state of the first small hit flag 203ta is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the first small hit is won after clearing the RAM. In the case of the first small hit, the fluctuation pattern scenario within the range up to the ceiling lottery frequency (150 times) is overwritten.
The scenario counter 203tb is a counter for determining the current lottery number of special symbols when selecting a variation pattern table corresponding to a variation pattern scenario. This scenario counter 203tb has a value of 1 when the small winning of the first special symbol is first won after clearing the RAM and the variation pattern scenario for the end of the small winning (table 202tj2 for after the small winning) is set. It is set (see Y773 in FIG. 498). Also, at the end of the jackpot or the number of ceiling lotteries reached, the corresponding variation pattern scenario is set and the value is reset to 0 (see S38133A in FIG. 497 and Y2712 in FIG. 500). Also, 1 is added to the value at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (see Y521 in FIG. 496). By configuring the scenario counter 203tb to manage the number of special pattern lotteries, a variation pattern for indicating that the ceiling lottery number is approaching 50 times or 10 times before reaching the ceiling lottery number is generated. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the player's sense of expectation until the ceiling lottery number.

Next, with reference to FIG. 495, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 495 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 495, the RAM 223 in the seventeenth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example described above (see FIG. 410) only in that a scenario set completion flag 223ta is added. ing. This scenario set completion flag 223ta is a flag indicating whether or not the variation pattern scenario has been set once or more after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clearing operation. It means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has been set one or more times, and if it is off, it means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has not been set. The initial value of the scenario set flag 223ta is set to OFF, and when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM or when the power is turned on with the clearing of the RAM, the fluctuation pattern scenario is set first. 501 and S9515A in FIG. 502). When a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, this scenario set flag 223ta is referred to, and when the scenario set flag 223ta is off, the fluctuation pattern scenario can be reset by this small win. Since it means that it will be performed, it is possible to suggest to the player that some setting has been completed as internal control of the pachinko machine 10 by executing the wake-up completion effect (see FIG. 490(b)). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 to some extent.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the seventeenth control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 496 to 500. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 496, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y331) in the seventeenth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y331) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 416) in the fourteenth control example described above, and is the first special symbol described above. Similar to the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 416), this process is executed to select a variation pattern when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed.
Among the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 496) in the seventeenth control example, in each of the processes Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512, the first special symbol variation in the fourteenth control example described above, respectively The same processes as Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512 of the pattern selection process (see FIG. 415) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 496) in the seventeenth control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is updated by adding 1 (Y521), and the scenario is stored. A variation pattern selection table corresponding to the updated value of the scenario counter 203tb is identified from the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the data stored in the area 203sb (Y522), and the process proceeds to Y512.
By executing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 496), the scenario counter 203tb is updated independently of the special figure lottery counter 203qa, and the independently updated special figure The corresponding variation pattern selection table can be accurately specified from the variation pattern scenario according to the value of the lottery counter 203qa.

Next, with reference to FIG. 497, details of the ceiling determination process (Y332) in the seventeenth control example will be described. This ceiling determination process (Y332) is a process executed in place of the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 416) in the fourteenth control example described above. This is a process for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery count has been reached according to the value of 203qa. FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing this ceiling determination process (Y332).
Of the ceiling determination processing (see FIG. 497) in the 17th control example, in each of the processing of S38103, S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A, S38103 of the ceiling determination processing (see FIG. 416) in the 14th control example , S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A are executed. Further, in the 17th control example, the processes of S38121A and S38122A are deleted.
Also, in the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 497) in the present 17th control example, when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa has been updated to 151 in the process of S38123A (S38123A: Yes), the special figure lottery counter 203qa is updated to 1 (S38131A), and data indicating the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb to set a variation pattern scenario referring to the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 (S38132A). Next, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is cleared to 0 (S38133A), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 498, the details of the special figure 1 deviating stop process (Y731) in the seventeenth control example will be described. This special figure 1 out stop processing (Y731) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 out stop processing (see FIG. 418) in the 14th control example described above, and the special figure 1 out stop in the 14th control example Similar to the process (see FIG. 418), this is a process for setting stop display of the missing symbol when the variation time of the variable display corresponding to the loss of the first special symbol has elapsed.

Of the special figure 1 deviating stop processing (see FIG. 498) in this 17th control example, in each process of Y751 to Y761, the special figure 1 deviating stop processing (see FIG. 418) of the above-described 14th control example Y751 to The same processing as each processing of Y761 is executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (see FIG. 498) in the present 17th control example, when the processing of S759 is completed, it is determined whether or not the first small hit flag 203ta is ON (Y771), and the first small hit If it is determined that the flag 203ta is ON (Y771: Yes), this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y771, if it is determined that the first small hit flag 203ta is off (Y771: No), after the power is turned on with RAM clear operation, the first first special symbol small hit Since it means that the corresponding variation display has ended, a variation pattern scenario that refers to the post-small hit table 202tj2 is set by storing data indicating the post-small hit table 202tj2 in the scenario storage area 203sb ( Y772), the first small hit flag 203ta is set to ON and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is set to 1 (Y773), and this process is terminated.
By executing this special figure 1 off stop processing (see FIG. 498), when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once. A variation pattern scenario can be set up to the number of ceiling lotteries. Also, in the process of Y771, when the first small hit flag 203ta is ON and the small hit of the first special symbol is won under the situation where the fluctuation pattern scenario has already been set, the fluctuation pattern scenario is reset. can be suppressed, it is possible to share the setting timing of the variation pattern scenario (at the time of the first lottery after the RAM clearing operation).
Next, with reference to FIG. 499, the details of the start-up process executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example will be described. This start-up process, like the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the fourteenth control example (and the first control example) described above, is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. be.

Of the start-up processing (see FIG. 499) in the 17th control example, each processing of S1701 to S1712 is the same as each of S1701 to S1712 of the start-up processing in the 14th control example (and the first control example). process is executed. Further, in the start-up process (see FIG. 499) in the seventeenth control example, when the process of S1712 is completed, the storage areas other than the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb among the used RAM areas are cleared (S1761A). , in the RAM 203 except for the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb (S1762A), and the process proceeds to S1710.
By executing the start-up process (see FIG. 499) in this 17th control example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the set fluctuation pattern scenario information (the data in the scenario storage area 203sb ), and the progress of the variation pattern scenario (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) at the time of power-off, other data in the RAM 203 can be initialized.
Next, with reference to FIG. 500, details of the jackpot ending process (Y11621) in the seventeenth control example will be described. This jackpot end process (Y11621) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 289) in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example) described above, and is the jackpot end process (see FIG. 289). Similarly, it is a process for performing various settings based on the end of the jackpot.
Of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 500) in the seventeenth control example, in each of the processes Y2704 to Y2707, Y2704 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 289) in the above-described fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example) The same processing as each processing of Y2707 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 500) in the seventeenth control example, when the process of Y2707 ends, the data indicating the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type this time is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb (Y2711 ), the scenario counter 203tb is reset to 0 (Y2712), and this processing ends.

<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the seventeenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 501 and 502. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 501, details of the normal state effect setting process (S9011A) in the seventeenth control example will be described. This normal state effect setting process (S9011A) is a process executed in place of the normal state effect setting process (see FIG. 116) in the fourteenth control example (and second control example) described above, and is a normal state effect setting process. (Refer to FIG. 116), this is a process for setting the effect mode when the normal state is notified by the state command as the game state.
When this normal state effect setting process (see FIG. 501) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal state is notified as the game state at the time of power-on to the pachinko machine 10 (S9111A), and based on power-on If it is determined that it is not the notified normal state (S9111A: No), the display command for the effect mode corresponding to the normal state is set (S9112A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9111A, if it is determined that the normal state is notified based on the power-on (S9111A: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal state has been set by the power-on accompanied by the RAM clearing operation. If it is determined (S9113A) and it is determined that the power is turned on without RAM clear operation (S9113A: No), the scenario set flag 223ta is set to ON (S9114A), and the process proceeds to S9112A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S9113A, if it is determined that the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation (S9113A: Yes), by setting the display command for the wake-up standby mode, a special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, the setting is made so that the effect during waiting for wakeup (see FIG. 490(a)) is executed (see S9115A), and this process is terminated. By executing this normal state effect setting process (see FIG. 501), when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the scenario set flag 223ta remains in the OFF state, and the effect for the wake-up standby mode is set. Aspects can be set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 502, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4991A) in the seventeenth control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4991A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 120) in the 14th control example (and the second control example), Similar to the production mode setting process (see FIG. 2573), this is a process for setting the variable display mode of the first special symbol. Figure 502 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4991A).

Of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 502) in the 17th control example, in each process of S9501 to S9504, the special figure 1 effect mode setting process ( 120) are executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 502) in the 17th control example, when each process of S9501 to S9503 is completed, it is then determined whether the scenario set flag 223ta is on ( S9511A), if the scenario set flag 223ta is ON (S9511A: Yes), determine the variation display mode according to the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command (S9512A), and proceed to s9504.
On the other hand, in the processing of S9511A, if it is determined that the scenario set flag 223ta is off (S9511A: No), then the current variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit It is determined whether or not Then (S9513A), if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern command corresponding to a small hit (that is, a variation pattern command corresponding to a big hit) (S9513A: No), the process proceeds to S9512A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9513A, if it is determined that it is a variation pattern command corresponding to a small hit (S9513A: Yes), a variation display mode accompanied by a wake-up completion effect (see FIG. 490 (b)) is determined ( S9514A), the scenario set completion flag 223ta is set to ON (S9515A), and the process proceeds to S9504.
By executing this special figure 1 production mode setting process (see FIG. 502), after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, when it becomes a small hit in the first lottery of the first special symbol, the wake-up completion production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that some setting has been made as internal control of the pachinko machine 10 .
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example, a predetermined specific Control (setting of a new variation pattern scenario) is executed, and once the specific control is executed, the execution of the specific control can be avoided (suppressed) even if the first condition is satisfied. In other words, only when the first condition is met in a situation where the specific condition is not met, execution of the specific control is allowed, and even if the first condition is met in a situation where the specific condition is met, the specific It is configured to perform characteristic control that avoids the execution of control. More specifically, in this 17th control example, after power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on (after power is turned on with RAM clear operation), a special symbol lottery is drawn. First, it is assumed that a lottery result different from a big win (for example, a lottery result corresponding to a small win) is established as a first condition, and a variation pattern scenario is set over the number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries. So, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, in the situation where you have already won the small win one or more times (under the situation where the specific conditions are met), even if you win the small win, you will not be able to set the variation pattern scenario. It is configured to avoid In other words, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the variation pattern scenario according to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot, while the lottery result (small Even in the case of winning), it is configured to set a variation pattern scenario up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery. In addition, once the fluctuation pattern scenario is set, it is configured to be regulated so that the fluctuation pattern scenario is not overwritten. As a result, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the first special symbol lottery is executed, so that the variation pattern scenario can be almost certainly set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set a variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling lottery number regardless of whether or not power is turned on with a RAM clearing operation. Along with this, in this 17th control example, a counter (special figure lottery counter 203qa) for counting the number of times of lottery of special symbols, and the number of times of lottery of special symbols when specifying the variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario A counter (scenario counter 203tb) for determining is separately provided, and when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the special figure lottery counter 203qa Only the value is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is held.

Further, in the seventeenth control example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the first effect mode (wake-up waiting mode) is set to suggest that some setting is waiting, and the When the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the execution of the first performance mode, the second performance mode (wake-up performance) capable of suggesting to the player that some setting has been made is executed. . With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the power has been turned on with the operation of clearing the RAM. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the RAM clearing operation has been performed, at least one special symbol lottery is executed in the pachinko machine 10 where the first special symbol lottery has not been executed after the opening of the hall. Since it can make you think, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall.
In this 17th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the first special symbol lottery is executed for the first time and the second pattern scenario is set. (wake-up effect), but it is not limited to this. For example, on the premise that a plurality of ceiling lottery numbers can be set when the power is turned on with a RAM clearing operation, a second effect is provided to suggest to the player that the ceiling lottery number has been reset. A configuration may be adopted in which the second effect mode (wake-up effect) is executed. By configuring in this manner, the second effect mode can be configured as an effect indicating that the setting content that directly affects the player's advantage has been set. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect suggesting which value is set as the ceiling lottery number of times is executed in the second effect mode. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to want to check the second performance mode more strongly, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall can be further improved. Also, for example, in a specification that can be changed to any one of a plurality of settings, such as the 16th control example, when the setting is changed at power-on accompanied by RAM clear operation, the second presentation mode is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this case, since the player can recognize that the setting has been changed by executing the second effect mode, convenience for the player can be improved.
In addition, in this 17th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, after the small hit of the first special symbol (the first condition is established) While setting a variation pattern scenario for specifying a variation pattern selection table with reference to the table 202tj2 and executing control (specific control) for resetting the value of the scenario counter 203tb, at the time of winning the second and subsequent small hits Although the configuration is such that the execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed), the conditions for executing and avoiding the specific control are not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the specific control when the small hit of the first special symbol is won consecutively over a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) of two or more. In addition, as the execution condition (first condition) of the specific control, instead of the small hit, for example, simple deviation may be adopted, or a specific variation type (eg, short deviation, normal reach deviation, etc.) is adopted. Alternatively, a jackpot election of a predetermined jackpot type may be adopted. By permitting various controls and conditions as specific controls and first conditions in this manner, the degree of freedom in development can be improved.
In this 17th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the table for after the small hit is based on the first small hit of the first special symbol (the first condition is established). 202tj2 to set the variation pattern scenario for specifying the variation pattern selection table and execute control (specific control) to reset the value of the scenario counter 203tb, while performing the specific control at the time of the second and subsequent small hits Although it was configured to avoid (suppress) the execution of, at first the setting of a new fluctuation pattern scenario (execution of specific control) is avoided (the fluctuation pattern scenario at the time of power shutdown and the progress of the scenario are inherited) is set, and when a predetermined cancellation condition is met (for example, after turning on the power with a RAM clear operation, a special pattern lottery is executed a specific number of times (for example, 100 times) less than the ceiling lottery number), It may be configured to form a state in which execution of specific control is permitted. In this configuration, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is reset, while the RAM is cleared until the special pattern lottery of 100 times is executed. Whether the power is turned on with an operation or without a RAM clearing operation, the selection tendency of the variation pattern is a common tendency, so that the player can grasp the presence or absence of the RAM clearing operation. can be configured without difficulty. In this case, the fluctuation pattern scenario set as the specific control is sufficient to prepare a scenario ranging from the number of lotteries of the special symbol of the specific number to the number of lotteries of the special symbol of the number of times of the ceiling lottery. A secondary effect of being able to reduce the storage capacity is also obtained.

In this 17th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the table for after the small hit is based on the first small hit of the first special symbol (the first condition is established). 202tj2 to set a variation pattern scenario that specifies the variation pattern selection table and to execute control (specific control) to reset the value of the scenario counter 203tb, while avoiding when winning the second and subsequent small hits Although it is configured to avoid (suppress) the execution of the specific control by determining that the condition is established, the first condition, the specific control, and the avoidance condition are not limited to these. Other conditions that can be established in the pachinko machine 10 may be adopted as the first condition or the avoidance condition, and other mounted controls may be adopted as the specific control. For example, it may be adopted for effect control on the sound lamp control device 113 side. More specifically, for example, the setting of the pending change effect in the thirteenth control example described above may be adopted as the specific control, and the first condition may be adopted as reception of the prize information command based on the new start prize. In this case, as the avoidance condition, for example, a state while the pending change effect is already set may be set, or a state during execution of the jackpot game may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably set the timing at which the pending change effect is executed.
<18th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 503 to 516. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example described above, the counter value of the counter (special figure lottery counter 203la) for counting the number of lotteries after the end of the jackpot determines whether or not the ceiling lottery number has been reached, and the fluctuation pattern scenario It was configured to determine the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) when specifying the fluctuation pattern selection table from. And, even when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is not cleared and is held. In other words, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off or the RAM is cleared, the number of lotteries remaining up to the number of ceiling lotteries and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are not cleared and are held. Was. In the 16th control example, as a variation pattern scenario, a set of a variation pattern scenario for the normal state and a variation pattern scenario for a game state other than the normal state is set at the end of the jackpot or the ceiling lottery number of times. If the game state is the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified by referring to the specified contents for the normal state among the set variation pattern scenarios, and if the game state is other than the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified. It was configured to identify the variation pattern selection table by referring to the stipulated contents of. In other words, by unifying the setting timing of the variation pattern scenario to the timing when the ceiling lottery count is reset, the variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling lottery count in the case of shifting to the normal state regardless of the game state after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that it can be shared. That is, when the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries is 150 times, 100 times and 50 times in a normal state, a special variation pattern for tilting the ceiling is always easily selected.
On the other hand, in this 18th control example, the time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, and the end of the time saving state set based on winning the time saving pattern, the variation pattern The scenario is switched, and the selection ratio of the variation pattern is made different from the normal selection ratio over the predetermined number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the time saving state. In other words, by differentiating the relationship between the lottery results and the selection ratios of the various variation patterns, the trend of the variation time is varied, and the variation display mode set according to the variation time is also varied to create a special effect. configured to form modes. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a big hit ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special production mode is formed. , it is possible to relieve the disappointment of the player and make him/her want to continue the game until the end of the special performance mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the end of the time saving state.
The pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 16 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 16th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 503 and 504, a characteristic presentation mode in the eighteenth control example will be described. Here, in the eighteenth control example, either the time saving state activated based on winning the time saving pattern or the time saving state activated based on reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery has ended, It is configured to reset the fluctuation pattern scenario. More specifically, based on the fact that the time saving state has ended, in order to form a special production mode, a special state in which various variation patterns are selected at a selection ratio different from usual is held for a predetermined period (lottery of special symbols is formed 20 times). First, with reference to FIG. 503(a), either the time saving state activated based on winning the time saving pattern in the eighteenth control example or the time saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times A description will be given of the mode of presentation after the end of . In the following explanation, to simplify the explanation, the time saving state activated based on winning the time saving pattern, and the time saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number (directly without going through the jackpot) Time saving state to transition) is collectively referred to as normal working time saving. In this 17th control example, when there are one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol when the normal time saving ends, until the second special symbol reserved balls are completely digested in the normal state after the normal time saving ends. It is configured to execute a presentation mode indicating the end of the normal working hours state by using the period of . It should be noted that, in the normal time-saving state, by continuing to hit to the right, almost, when the normal time-saving state ends, the second special symbol holding ball is accumulated up to the upper limit number (4 pieces). Drawing 503 (a) is a figure showing an example of the production mode (ending production for normal time saving state) which shows the end of this normal time saving state.
As shown in FIG. 503(a), when the normal time-saving state ends, a character 801 imitating a rabbit appears in the central portion of the main display area Dm until the reserved ball of the second special symbol is digested. A display mode in which the character 801 is drooping and tears are displayed, and the characters "-END-" are displayed above the character 801. FIG. Further, the characters "Chance Time End..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the normal time saving state has completely ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 503(a), during the execution of the ending effect for the normal time saving state, the second special symbol is configured to perform a variable display of
Although omitted for illustration, if the second special symbol lottery hits a big hit during the execution of the ending production for the normal time saving state (normal time saving end production), a character 809 imitating an angel in the big hit change Appears to notify the rabbit character 801 of the big win, which has a relatively short duration. Also, when the second special symbol reserved ball does not exist at the end of the normal time saving state, and only the first special symbol reserved ball exists, the variable display period based on the first special symbol reserved ball Use to control to execute the ending effect for the normal time saving state. Furthermore, when neither the reserved ball of the first special pattern nor the reserved ball of the second special pattern exists at the end of the normal time reduction, the normal time reduction end performance is started at the end of the normal time reduction, and the lottery of the new special pattern is executed. It is configured to terminate the ending effect for the normal time saving state (normal time saving end effect). Thus, the ending effect for the normal time saving state (normal time saving end effect) can be executed regardless of the number of held balls at the end of the normal time saving state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 503(b), after the end of the normal time saving, until the lottery of the special symbol ends 20 times (and after the end of the normal time saving end effect) will be described. FIG. 503(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode after the end of the normal time saving until the lottery of the special symbol ends 20 times (and after the end of the normal time saving end effect). Here, details will be described later, but in this 18th control example, the fluctuation time when the first special symbol is out during the period from the end of the normal time saving to the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times The variation pattern scenario is set so that the rate of selecting a short variation time (for example, 5 seconds) is greatly increased (the rate of selection of a variation time of 15 seconds or more is greatly reduced). In other words, by making it difficult to select a long variation time due to the deviation, the expectation of winning a big hit or a short time symbol winning is relatively increased when the variation time is relatively long. While this special variation pattern scenario is set (until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the end of normal time saving), as shown in FIG. A representation mode in which the imitated character 801 climbs a rocky mountain is displayed, and above the character 801, the characters "~training zone~" are displayed. In addition, a character saying "A big chance with reach occurrence!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Depending on the contents of these displays, if a special fluctuation pattern scenario is set (a special production mode is set) and a long fluctuation time is set (a fluctuation type that causes reach is selected) It is possible to make the player easily understand that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than usual.

Fig. 504 shows that the conditions for shifting to the normal time saving state are established again while the special production mode (training zone production) is set (or reaches the ceiling lottery number of times or wins the time saving pattern) production mode in the case It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 504 illustrates a case where the ceiling lottery number of times is reached and 100 times of time saving number of times is given. As shown in FIG. 504, when the conditions for shifting to the normal time-saving state are established in the special production mode (training zone production), in the main display area Dm, the character 801 climbs the rocky mountain and reaches the top of the rocky mountain. A production is executed. In addition, a display mode is set in which the same cloud as the rabbit-like character 801 staying in the production during the chance time spreads around the top of the rocky mountain. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Get 100 chance times!" are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the normal time saving state is entered.
Next, with reference to FIG. 505, the transition of the effect mode before and after the normal time saving state ends will be described by taking as an example the case where the time saving state ends by the end of the 250th special symbol fluctuation display after the big win. . As shown in FIG. 505, when the normal time saving state ends in the 250th special symbol lottery after the big hit, the 16th control described above is used as the effect mode in the 250th (that is, the last time in the normal time saving state) variable display effect. As in the example, a variable display effect is executed with an effect mode (see FIG. 473) indicating the end of the chance time (time saving state). In addition, when the last variable display performance in the normal time-saving state ends and the game state in which the drawing of the second special pattern is likely to be executed by hitting to the right ends, the second special pattern that has been reserved during the normal time-saving state is reserved. Using the period until all the variation display based on the sphere is completed, the ending effect of the normal time saving state (see FIG. 503(a)) is executed. Thereby, it can be emphasized more that the normal time saving state has ended. Although the details will be described later, as a variation pattern scenario after the normal time saving ends, the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the time saving ends is in the range of 1 to 4 times, the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is configured to be immobilized at Therefore, when the second special symbol holding ball is out, the ending effect of the normal time saving state is executed in the production period of the second special symbol holding ball number × 1 second, so the normal time saving state The ending effect of is 4 seconds at maximum (situation where 4 pending are accumulated).
Also, as shown in FIG. 505, when the second special symbol holding balls are completely digested and the ending effect of the normal time-saving state ends, a training zone effect indicating a special effect mode is executed. This training zone production continues until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the end of the normal time saving state. During the 20 fluctuation times during which this training zone production is executed, a fluctuation type with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or more (variation time when reach production occurs) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is lost. significantly lower than normal. In other words, when the ready-to-win effect occurs, the degree of expectation for a big win is significantly higher than usual, so that the player can be made to strongly expect the ready-to-win effect to occur. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the game characteristics are different from usual (game characteristics that greatly increase the expectation of reach production), it is possible to make the player feel novelty, and while the training zone production is being performed, It can make you want to continue the game. Therefore, quitting the game immediately after the normal time saving state ends can be suppressed, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. When the lottery for the special symbols is completed 20 times and the training zone effect is completed, the state shifts to a state in which the effect for the normal mode is executed.
In this way, in the eighteenth control example, the change pattern selection table is specified by referring to the dedicated variation pattern scenario (after the end of the time saving end table 202uj3 (see FIG. 509) to be described later) triggered by the end of the normal time saving state By setting the scenario), after the normal time-saving state ends and shifts to the normal state, the execution period of the ending production of the normal time-saving state is secured, or after the second special symbol holding ball is digested. , It is possible to shift to a special production mode (a game mode in which the expectation of a big hit jumps when a ready-to-win production occurs). As a result, the player's interest in the game after the normal time-saving state ends can be further improved.

In this case, without considering the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number, because it is configured to set a dedicated variation pattern scenario simply based on the end of the normal time saving state, as a detriment, the above-mentioned 16th control example , it is difficult to select a special variation pattern for ceiling fanning when the number of lotteries after the jackpot ends (or after the power is turned on with RAM clearing operation) is a specific number of times (350, 400, and 450). becomes. This can be arbitrarily selected depending on which control is emphasized by the developer.
<Electrical configuration in the eighteenth control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 506(a). FIG. 506(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 506(a), the ROM 202 in the 18th control example changes instead of the variation pattern selection table 202sb for the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 16th control example described above (see FIG. 478(a)). The only differences are that a pattern selection table 202ub is provided and that a variation pattern scenario table 202uj is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the sixteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, with reference to FIG. 507(a), details of the variation pattern selection table 202ub in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 507(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202ub in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 507(a), the variation pattern selection table 202ub in the eighteenth control example is the variation pattern selection table 202sb in the sixteenth control example described above (see FIG. 480(a)). The difference is that a table 202ub5 for use and a table 202ub6 for after the end of time saving are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the variation pattern selection table 202sb in the sixteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, with reference to FIG. 507(b), the details of the time saving end notification table 202ub5, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection table 202ub in the eighteenth control example, will be described. This time-saving end notification table 202ub5 is a variation pattern selection table that is referred to within a range of 4 times or less for the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the normal time-saving state, and is the second special symbol accumulated at the end of the normal time-saving state. 2 is a data table for fixing the variation time to 1 second at the time of detachment when digesting the retained ball.

FIG. 507(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving end notification table 202ub5. As shown in FIG. 507(b), in the time saving end notification table 202ub5, the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to various variation patterns is associated with each special symbol type and special symbol lottery result. ing. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149 for the special symbol lottery result "jackpot", and the variation time is 15 seconds. A normal reach hit is defined in correspondence, and a super reach hit in the range of 150 to 198 with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is "special winning" and "small winning", normal reach winning with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. It is In addition, for the lottery result of the special symbol "time saving symbol winning", the normal reach with the variation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Furthermore, for the lottery result "out" of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of 0 to 196 and the short deviation of the variation time of 5 seconds is associated with the range of 197, 198. is defined in association with normal reach deviation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in a situation in which the time saving end notification table 202ub5 is referred to, the rate of selecting the variation type with a variation time of 15 seconds or more in the case of loss is extremely low. (becomes 2/199). Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, it is possible to greatly improve the expectation for the big win just by generating the ready-to-win effect.
Also, as shown in FIG. 507(b), when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, for the lottery result "jackpot" of the special symbol, for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take Therefore, a short win with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with it. On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol lottery result "out", "super short out" with a variation time of 1 second is defined in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. For this reason, after the end of the normal time-saving state, when the lottery of special symbols within four times is executed by the second special symbol, when the lottery result becomes a big hit, a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is always set, and it is not lost. Then, a variation time of 1 second is always set. As a result, it is possible to fix the digestion time when digesting the second special symbol holding balls accumulated at the end of the normal time saving state, so that the production period of the ending production after the end of the normal time saving state can be secured. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 507(c), the details of the table 202ub6 for after the end of time saving, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection table 202ub in the eighteenth control example, will be described. This table 202ub6 for after the end of time saving is a variation pattern selection table referred to in the range of 5 times to 20 times for the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the normal time saving state, and the degree of expectation of a big hit when a ready-to-win effect occurs. It is a data table that is referenced to form a special production mode that greatly improves over normal performances. As shown in FIG. 507(c), this table 202ub for after the end of time saving is defined contents corresponding to the first special symbol in the time saving end notification table 202ub5 (see FIG. 507(b)). It is set as a prescribed content common to the second special symbol. Therefore, when the table 202ub6 for after the end of time saving is referred to, the rate of selecting the variation type with a variation time of 15 seconds or more in the deviation of the special symbol is extremely low (to 2/199). Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbols is executed, novel game characteristics can be realized which can greatly improve the expectation for the big win just by generating the ready-to-win performance. To improve the operation rate of a pachinko machine 10 by making a player think to continue the game until at least 20 special symbol lotteries are executed even after the normal time saving state is finished. can be done.
Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202uj in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 508(a). FIG. 508(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern scenario table 202uj in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 508(a), the variation pattern scenario table 202uj in the eighteenth control example includes a post-hit table 202uj1 that is a data table that defines a variation pattern scenario that is set when the jackpot ends, and a ceiling lottery. After reaching the ceiling table 202uj2, which is a data table that defines the variation pattern scenario set when the number of times has been reached, and the normal time saving state (time saving state based on time saving pattern winning, and time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times ) is configured at least with a table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving, which is a data table that defines a variation pattern scenario set with the end of the time. First, with reference to FIG. 508(b), the details of the post-win table 202uj1 will be described. FIG. 508(b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the post-hit table 202uj1.

As shown in FIG. 508(b), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) is 1 to 349, 351 to 399, 401 to 449, and 451. A normal table 202sb1 is defined in association with the range of .about.500, and a ceiling tilting table 202sb3 is defined in association with the special symbol lottery numbers of 350, 400, and 450. On the other hand, in the situation where the current game state is a game state other than the normal state, the probability variation/time reduction table 202sb2 is set for the entire range of 1 to 500 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203ua). are defined in association with each other. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, if the game state is the normal state, a special variation pattern for ceiling tilting is selected each time the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number reaches 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect for ceiling fanning (see FIGS. 476 and 477).
Next, with reference to FIG. 508(c), details of the table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling will be described. FIG. 508(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the post-ceiling table 202uj2. As shown in FIG. 508(c), only scenarios for game states other than the normal state are associated with the after-ceiling table 202j2. In other words, the normal working hours state of the number of working hours set based on the number of times of ceiling lottery reaches ends, or the normal working hours state set by winning the working hours pattern during the normal working hours state ends. Only scenarios are specified. This is, as described above, at the timing when the normal working hours state ends (that is, the timing of moving to the normal state), the fluctuation pattern scenario for the normal working hours end (variation pattern scenario referring to the table 202uj3 for after the working hours ending) This is because there is no possibility of referring to the post-ceiling table 202uj2 in the normal state because it is switched.
As shown in FIG. 508(c), in a situation where the current game state is a game state other than the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) is 1, and the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 are defined in association with each other, and a table 202sb2 for probability variation/time reduction is defined in association with the range of the number of lotteries of special symbols ranging from 2 to 500. Therefore, as in the 16th control example, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times and setting the time saving state, the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation display can be fixed to 30 seconds in the case of loss. It is possible to sufficiently secure a presentation period for performing various notifications to be executed based on entering into the time saving state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 509, the details of the table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving described above will be described. FIG. 509 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving. As shown in FIG. 509, in the situation where the current game state is the normal state, the number of lotteries for special symbols (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) is in the range of 1 to 4, and the time saving end notification table 202ub5 (Fig. 507 (b)) is associated and described, and the number of times of lottery of special symbols (value of scenario counter 203ua) is in the range of 5 to 20, table 202ub6 after the end of time saving (see FIG. 507 (c)) are defined in association with each other, and the normal table 202sb1 is defined in association with the range of the number of lotteries of special symbols after 21 times. On the other hand, in a situation where the current game state is other than the normal state, regardless of the number of lotteries of special symbols, the table 202sb2 for variable probability/time reduction is defined in association.

By setting a variation pattern scenario that refers to the table 202uj3 for after the end of the time saving state after the end of the normal time saving state, the period from the end of the normal time saving state to the digestion of all the holding balls of the second special symbol. It is possible to execute the ending production of the normal time saving state in the period. In addition, a special mode can be formed in which the degree of expectation for a big win when the ready-to-win performance is generated is greatly improved during the period from the end of the normal time-saving state to the end of the lottery of 20 special symbols. Therefore, after the end of the normal time-saving state, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game at least until the lottery of 20 times of special symbols is completed, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. can.
Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 506(b). FIG. 506(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 506(b), the RAM 203 in the 18th control example has a scenario counter 203ua and a normal time reduction flag 203ub added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 16th control example described above. They differ only in respect.
Similar to the scenario counter 203tb in the seventeenth control example described above, the scenario counter 203ua is a counter for determining the current number of lotteries for special symbols when selecting a variation pattern table according to the variation pattern scenario. be. That is, in the eighteenth control example, as in the above-described seventeenth control example, the special figure lottery counter 203la and the scenario counter 203tb are provided separately, and control to update them separately is adopted. Specifically, the value of the scenario counter 203tb in the eighteenth control example is reset to 0 when various variation pattern scenarios are set (see S8323A in FIG. 512 and S38131A in FIG. 513), and the special symbol variation pattern is updated by incrementing the value by one (S38263 in FIG. 511). The scenario counter 203ua is referenced to identify the corresponding variation pattern selection table from the currently set variation pattern scenario.
The normal time-saving flag 203ub is a flag indicating whether the time-saving state is the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot or the normal time-saving state (time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern winning or time-saving state based on the ceiling lottery number of times reached). . If this normal time saving flag 203ub is on, it means that it is in the normal time saving state, and if it is off, it means that it is in the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot. The initial value of the normal working hours flag 203ub is set to OFF, and is set to ON when shifting to the normal working hours saving state (see S38132A in FIG. 513). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the normal working hours state (see S8322A in FIG. 512). When the normal working hours flag 203ub is ON and the working hours saving state ends, it is determined that the normal working hours saving state has ended, and the variation pattern table is reset. That is, it is possible to set a variable pattern scenario that can realize the ending effect of the normal time-saving state and the effect mode in which the ready-to-win effect is highly expected, so that the player quits the game after the normal time-saving state ends. Can be configured as hard as you want. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 510 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 510, the RAM 223 in the eighteenth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixteenth control example described above (see FIG. 482) only in that an effect mode flag 223ua is added. there is Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the sixteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The effect mode flag 223ua is a flag indicating the current effect mode. When determining the variable display mode according to this variation pattern command, the variable display mode corresponding to the performance mode indicated by this performance mode flag 223ua is selected.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 511 to 514. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 511, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S30261A) in the eighteenth control example will be described. This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S30261A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 306) in the sixteenth control example (and tenth control example) described above, and special symbol variation. Similar to the pattern selection process (see FIG. 306), when a special symbol lottery is executed, it is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result. FIG. 511 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S30261A).
Of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 511) in the eighteenth control example, in each of S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209, the special symbol variation pattern selection processing in the sixteenth control example described above (see FIG. 306 See), the same processes as the processes of S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209 are executed. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 511) in the eighteenth control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit in the process of S8201 (S8201: Yes), the big hit type selection table 202pd Then, the jackpot type of this time is determined (S38261A), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 511) in the eighteenth control example, in the process of S8209, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the time saving symbol winning (S8209: Yes), time saving per type With reference to the selection table 202si (see FIG. 481(a)), the type per time saving is specified (S38262A), and the process proceeds to S8203.
Furthermore, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 511) in the eighteenth control example, when the process of S8203 ends, the value of the scenario counter 203ua is updated by adding 1 (S38263A), and then the scenario The currently set variation pattern scenario is read based on the data in the storage area 203sb (S38264A). When the processing of S38264A ends, based on the read variation pattern scenario, the current game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203ua are specified (S38265A), and the processing is performed. The process proceeds to S8205.
Next, with reference to FIG. 512, the updating process (S241A) in the eighteenth control example will be described. This update process (S241A) is a process executed instead of the update process (see FIG. 377) in the sixteenth control example (and the thirteenth control example) described above, and is similar to the update process (see S233A in FIG. 377). Second, it is a process for updating the game state when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.
Of the update process (see FIG. 512) in the eighteenth control example, the processes in S8301 to S8307 and S8313 are different from those in the sixteenth control example (and the thirteenth control example) (see S233A in FIG. 377). The same processes as those of S8301 to S8307 and S8313 are executed. In addition, in the update process (see FIG. 512) in the eighteenth control example, when the process of S8306 ends, it is determined whether or not the normal time saving flag 203ub is ON (S8321), and if it is determined that it is ON (S8321: Yes), then, the data indicating the scenario specifying the variation pattern selection table is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb by referring to the table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving (S8322A). When the processing of S8322A ends, the normal time saving flag 203ub is set to OFF (S8323), the value of the scenario counter 203sa is reset to 0 (S8324A), and the processing proceeds to S8313. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S8321A that the normal working hours reduction flag 203ub is off, the process proceeds to S8307.

Further, in the updating process (see FIG. 512) in the eighteenth control example, when the process of S8307 ends, the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 483) in the sixteenth control example described above is replaced with the ceiling determination process (S8325). ), the process ends. The details of this ceiling determination process (S8325) will be described later with reference to FIG.
By executing this update process (see FIG. 512), when the normal time saving state ends, it is possible to set a variation pattern scenario for after the time saving end, so it develops into the ending production and reach production of the normal time saving state It is possible to form a special mode or the like that improves the degree of expectation when the game is played.
Next, with reference to FIG. 513, details of the ceiling determination process (S8325A) described above will be described. As described above, this ceiling determination process (S8325A) is a process that is executed in place of the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 483) in the sixteenth control example. It is a process for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached from the number of lotteries of , and generating a time saving state when the number of ceiling lotteries is reached.
Of the ceiling determination processing (see FIG. 513) in the eighteenth control example, in each of the processing of S38101 to S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38117A, S38121A to S38123A, and S38126A, the ceiling determination processing in the sixteenth control example described above (see FIG. 483) are executed.

In addition, in the ceiling determination process (see FIG. 513) in the eighteenth control example, when the process of S38114A ends, the value of the special lottery counter 203la and the value of the scenario counter 203ua are cleared to 0 (S38131), and the ceiling The time saving standby flag 203sa and the normal working time saving flag 203ub are set to ON (S38132), and the process proceeds to S38126A.
Next, with reference to FIG. 514, details of the start-up processing in the eighteenth control example will be described. This start-up process, like the start-up process in the sixteenth control example described above, is a process that is executed based on power-on of the pachinko machine 10 . FIG. 514 is a flow chart showing the start-up process in this eighteenth control example.
Of the start-up processing in the 18th control example, S1701-S1712, S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A, and S31702A correspond to S1701-S1712, S1712, S1712, S1712, and S1712 of the start-up processing in the 16th control example (see FIG. The same processing as each of S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A and S31702A is executed.
In addition, in the start-up process (see FIG. 514) in the eighteenth control example, when the process of S1712 ends, the special figure lottery counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb other than the special figure lottery counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb Clear the storage area (S1761A), set the initial value for storage areas other than the special drawing lottery counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb in the RAM 203 (S1762A), and proceed to S1710. Transition. As a result, even when power is turned on with a RAM clearing operation, it is possible to maintain the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries, the progress of the variation pattern scenario, and the like.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the eighteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 515, the rendering mode setting process (S5011A) in the eighteenth control example will be described. This effect mode setting process (S5011A) is a process executed in place of the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 486) in the sixteenth control example described above, and the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 486) in the sixteenth control example. Similarly, when a variation pattern command is received, it is a process for setting a variation display mode according to the variation type notified by the received variation pattern command.
In each of S34401, S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A of the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 515) in the eighteenth control example, S34401 of the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 486) in the sixteenth control example , S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A are executed. In addition, in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 515) in the eighteenth control example, when the process of S34447A ends, the effect mode flag 223ua is updated to the value for the ending effect of the normal time saving state (S34451A), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S34407.
Next, with reference to FIG. 516, details of the ceiling-related effect setting process (S34561A) in the eighteenth control example will be described. This ceiling-related effect setting process (S34561A) is a process executed instead of the ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 489) in the sixteenth control example described above, and the ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 489) in the sixteenth control example. 489), this is a process for setting a rendering mode related to the ceiling.
Of the ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 516) in this eighteenth control example, in each process of S34571A and S34573A to S34575A, S34571A of the above-described ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 516) in the sixteenth control example , and S34573A to S34575A are executed. In addition, in the ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 516) in the eighteenth control example, when it is determined in the process of S34571A that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern for ceiling tilting (S34571A: No), the received An effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern and the effect mode indicated by the effect mode flag 223ua is determined (S34581A), and it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the effect mode (S34582A). Specifically, the production mode is a mode for ending production after the end of the normal time saving state, and when the second special symbol holding ball becomes 0, it is updated to the state indicating the training zone, and the normal time saving state When the number of lotteries for the special symbols reaches 20 after the end of , the state is updated to show the normal presentation mode.

In the processing of S34582A, if it is determined that it is time to switch the production mode (S34582A: Yes), the production mode flag 223ua is updated to a state corresponding to the production mode after switching (S34583A), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S34582A, when it is determined that it is not the switching timing of the effect mode (S34582A: No), the process of S34583A is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example, the time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, and the time saving state set based on winning the time saving pattern (normal time saving Triggered by the end of the state), the variable pattern scenario is switched, and the variable display mode set according to the variable time is also changed to form a special performance mode. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a big hit ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special production mode is formed. , it is possible to relieve the disappointment of the player and make him/her want to continue the game until the end of the special performance mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the end of the time saving state.
In addition, in the eighteenth control example, at the end of the jackpot, at the time of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, and at the end of the normal time saving state, the variation pattern scenario is reset, but it is not limited to this. Even when the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot ends, the variation pattern scenario may be reset. By configuring in this way, even when the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot ends, a special performance mode can be formed, so the game is continued while the special performance mode is set. It can be configured to make it easy to make people think about it. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since the end timing of the time-saving state set after the jackpot is fixed (ends 100 times after the jackpot ends), the remaining number of times until the number of times of the ceiling lottery at the time the time-saving state and the variable state ends is every time. Common (400 times). Therefore, in the variation pattern scenario set when the time saving state after the jackpot ends, the number of lotteries after the scenario set is 250 times, 300 times, and 350 times, and the variation pattern table for ceiling tilting (ceiling tilting table 202sb3), it is possible to execute ceiling fanning effects at timings of 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times remaining until the ceiling lottery number. That is, the same behavior as in the 16th control example and the 18th control example described above can be realized.
In the 16th to 18th control examples described above, the configuration is such that the initialization of part of the data in the RAM 203 is avoided when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the address for storing data that avoids being initialized is fixed. That is, the scenario storage area 203sb and the special lottery counter 203la whose initialization is avoided in the 16th control example, the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb whose initialization is avoided in the 17th control example, and in the 18th control example The special figure lottery counter 203la, the scenario storage area 203sb, and the scenario counter 203ua for which initialization is avoided may be stored in a fixed address range of the RAM203. When configured in this way, when developing a pachinko machine 10 with other specifications based on the pachinko machine 10 with one specification among at least the 16th control example to the 18th control example, the program can be diverted. can be made easier. In other words, when the program corresponding to the start-up processing (see FIGS. 489, 499, and 514) of the main controller 110 is rewritten in accordance with the specification of the diversion destination, the power is turned on accompanied by the RAM clearing operation. Since the address range for which initialization is avoided can be made common, there is no need to change the program for this part, and the effort of the program developer can be reduced. In addition, since it becomes unnecessary to change the program, it is possible to prevent the address from being initialized from being rewritten to an erroneous address at the stage of program development, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from malfunctioning. .

<Nineteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 586. FIG. Conventionally, some machines have a light amount adjustment function that allows the player to operate a selection button (operating means) to adjust the light amount of the pachinko machine 10 (the brightness of the LED or the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display). . By using this light amount adjustment function, it is possible to perform a variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a jackpot game effect during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and a state effect for indicating the set game state. Since the player can adjust the brightness (the brightness of the decorative LED and the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display used as the third pattern display device 81) to any brightness, the player desires. It was able to provide a comfortable performance. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, it is common to adjust the light amount during the standby period (the period during which the special symbol lottery is not executed and the winning game is not executed). At the time of adjusting the light intensity using the adjustment function, the brightness of the decorative LED that emits light and the degree of change in the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display on which the standby screen is displayed are visually checked to achieve the desired light intensity. It was an adjustment.
Here, in recent years, there is an attempt to save energy in the pachinko machine 10 by suppressing the amount of light of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole while a standby screen (demonstration screen) is displayed when the player is not playing a game. Also, even during the game of the player, by varying the amount of light of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole in correspondence with the degree of expectation of the big win for the performance to be executed, it is possible to execute a sharp performance for the player. At the same time, the light intensity of the whole pachinko machine 10 is increased at the timing to make the player pay attention to the content of the performance being executed (for example, the timing to inform the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot or the timing to inform the content of the winning game). Some of them are constructed so as to prevent the player from overlooking the performance.
In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the light amount adjustment operation is performed based on the light amount of the pachinko machine 10 in the standby screen, that is, the light amount different from that during the game (set lower than during the game). Therefore, when the game is actually executed, there is a problem that the player notices that the desired light amount and the set light amount are different, and causes the player to perform the light amount adjustment operation again. rice field.
On the other hand, in the 19th control example, when the light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the standby screen, the decorative movable object (sword object Ym3) provided with a relatively high-brightness LED is moved to the light intensity adjustment position. , and the amount of light can be adjusted while the LED of the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is illuminated. In other words, even when the game is not being played, the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3) used for the variable effect is used to adjust the light amount. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate appropriate adjustment to the amount of light desired by the player.

Further, in the 19th control example, the movable role for decoration (sword role Ym3) is varied to the variable position (the position covering the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) which is changed by the actual variation effect. This state is defined as the environment adjustment position, and the light emitting means (LED) provided in the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3) positioned at the environment adjustment position is configured to emit light.
In the conventional pachinko machine 10, as a performance mode of the variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, the contents of the variable performance are the timing of informing the presence or absence of the winning of the big win and the performance mode with a high expectation of winning the big win. At the timing of informing whether or not to switch, the movable accessory for decoration is moved to make the player pay attention to the variable performance being executed. In this case, it is common to perform a lighting effect by increasing the amount of light emitted from decorative light-emitting means (LED) provided in the pachinko machine 10 at the same time.
In other words, according to the 19th control example, the same state as the state in which the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is moved is simulated in the actual variation effect, and the light amount adjustment operation is performed in that state. is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, in order to suppress the execution of an effect that is too dazzling, the light amount adjustment operation is performed, and the effect with a relatively high light amount is used as a reference for the player who is trying to reduce the light amount. Since it is possible to adjust the amount of light, it is possible to easily adjust the amount of light to the amount desired by the player.
In addition, in the 19th control example, not only during the standby screen, but also during the execution of the special symbol variation, while the jackpot game is being executed, that is, the game in which the player is executing the game The light quantity adjustment operation is executable even during the period, and when the light quantity adjustment operation is executed during the game period, the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is moved to the environment adjustment position. It is configured so that the light quantity adjustment is executed without any need. By configuring in this way, the movable accessory for decoration (sword role Ym3) is moved based on the light amount adjustment operation executed during the game period, and the movable accessory for decoration (sword Ym3) is moved as part of the variable effect. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the accessory Ym3) has moved.

Here, the player operates the operation handle 21 while the player is performing the light amount adjustment operation while the standby screen is being displayed, that is, the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position. Then, when the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol variation starts during the light amount adjustment operation, and the executed second symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An event occurs in which a variation effect corresponding to one special symbol variation is executed.
In this case, if the state in which the decorative movable role object (sword object Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position is continued until the light amount adjustment operation is completed, the decorative movable role object (sword object Ym3) positioned at the environment adjustment position There is a problem that the object (sword object Ym3) overlaps with the variable effect being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, providing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, since the position where the decorative movable accessory (sword Ym3) can move is set as the environment adjustment position as part of the variable performance, the decorative movable accessory positioned at the environment adjustment position based on the light amount adjustment operation (Sword Ym3) has a problem of misleading the player if it is movable as a variable effect.
Therefore, in the 19th control example, when the special symbol variation is started (when the game is executed) while the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position, The decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is configured to move from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) while continuing the light amount adjustment operation.
By constructing in this way, even when the special pattern variation is started while the light quantity adjusting operation is being performed in the standby screen, the player can be provided with a performance without discomfort.

More specifically, when the movable role for decoration (sword role Ym3) is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) based on the execution of the special symbol variation, the decoration Before moving the movable accessory for decoration (sword Ym3), extinguishing control is performed to extinguish the light emitting means (LED) of the movable accessory for decoration (sword Ym3) that has been illuminated for checking the amount of light, It is configured to execute the movement control to move the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) to the initial position in a state where all the LEDs are turned off.
With this configuration, the light-emitting means (LED) of the movable decorative accessory is lit while the movable decorative accessory (sword role Ym3) is being moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. Since it can be set to a non-moving state, the player can easily grasp that the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is not moving as part of the variable presentation. In addition, when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the state (standby state) in which the execution of movable control is determined for the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3), the standby movable accessory In this case, the process of canceling the execution of the movable control that has been on standby will cancel the movable control even if a predetermined condition in the 61st control example described later is satisfied. It becomes another form when not executed.
In addition, in the 19th control example, the light amount adjustment operation executed while the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position is completed, and the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is completed. Ym3) is stored in the initial position (storage position), it is possible to set a period during which the sword object Ym3 is not moved for 10 seconds thereafter.
Specifically, when the light amount adjustment operation is executed again immediately after the light amount adjustment operation is completed in the standby screen, the light amount adjustment operation is performed without moving the decorative movable accessory (sword role item Ym3). A light amount adjustment operation is executed in a manner in which the screen is displayed. Further, when the special symbol variation is started (when the game is executed) while the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position, the special symbol variation is dealt with. As the production pattern of the variable production, a production pattern in which the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is not moved is determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the movement control of the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3) from being executed in a short period of time, so that the sword role Ym3 is frequently moved. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the sword object Ym3 breaks down. In addition, the movement control for the next sword object Ym3 is executed before the sword object Ym3 becomes movable, and the movement period of the sword object Ym3 may be shifted or the normal movement may not be performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations in which execution is not performed.
Next, in each of the above-described control examples, a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls obtained is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and a reservation corresponding to the reserved ball is based on the result of pre-reading (preliminary determination) of the lottery result of the reserved ball. By changing the display mode of the symbols, the third symbol display device 81 alone performs an effect (suspended change effect) for informing the player of the result of the prefetching.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example, when this pending change effect is executed, a character other than the pending symbols to be changed displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is configured to hide the reserved design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify to the player which reserved symbol is a change target.
More specifically, in the hold change effect in the 19th control example, two decorative movable accessories (left change accessory Ym1 and right change accessory Ym2, see FIG. 524(b)) are displayed on the display device. The display area in which the reserved symbols are displayed can be covered, and the display area of the reserved symbols can be hidden by the player by changing the position of the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2). It can be divided into visible and invisible parts. As a result, only the display area where the pending symbols to be changed are displayed can be made visible to the player, and the pending symbols to be changed can be easily understood by the player.

Here, conventionally, there is one that executes a hold change effect using a flashy effect to draw the player's attention to the hold change effect. For example, it is an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved design after making the reserved design to be changed intensely emit light. In such a pending change effect, when the pending pattern is displayed in addition to the pending pattern to be changed, the effect of the pending change effect overlaps with the pending pattern displayed adjacent to the pending pattern to be changed. By being displayed, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the reserved symbol to be changed. If, among the plurality of reserved symbols displayed, it is desirable for the player to change the reserved pattern adjacent to the reserved pattern to be changed (for example, the reserved pattern to be changed is a white reserved pattern (usually reserved pattern ), and the adjacent reserved pattern is a green reserved pattern (a reserved pattern that changes to a red reserved pattern with the highest expectation for a big win when it changes), such a misunderstanding may cause the player to lose weight. There is a risk that this will make the player happy, leading to a decrease in the player's desire to play.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are used in the pending change effect to cover the pending symbols other than the change target displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to clarify to the player which reserved pattern is to be changed, and to prevent the player from misunderstanding which reserved pattern is to be changed.
In addition, in the 19th control example, the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) are placed at the initial position (Fig. 521 ( (See a)), and when the pending change effect is started, the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) move from the initial position to the action position according to the action scenario.
Specifically, the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) do not directly make the display area where the reserved symbols other than the change target are displayed difficult to see from the initial position, but gradually It is configured to perform an operation of narrowing the visually recognizable reserved symbols from 4 to 2, and from 2 to 1.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which reserved pattern will change step by step during the period from the start of the reserved change performance to the end of the reserved change performance. Interest in the game can be improved by making the player interested in how the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) move.
Furthermore, in the 19th control example, when a plurality of reserved symbols are displayed, the display mode of the adjacent reserved symbols is reflected in the display mode of the pending symbol to be changed.
More specifically, in this 19th control example, one color is given from all seven colors (white, blue, yellow, purple, green, red, rainbow) to one reserved symbol, and given The reserved color of the reserved symbol becomes the reserved color. In the pending change effect in the 19th control example, it is possible to change the pending color of the pending symbol to be changed by transplanting from the pending color of the adjacent pending symbol. Blue", and if the reserved pattern displayed one before is "yellow", by transplanting "yellow" from the previous reserved pattern to the reserved pattern of the change target, the change target is changed to "green", and the previous reserved pattern is changed to "white". In this case, the reserved color "green" is a reserved color that is more likely to be displayed when the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than the reserved colors "blue" and "white". It is a higher reserved color than white.
On the other hand, if the reserved pattern to be changed is "blue" and the previous reserved pattern is "white", even if the reserved color is transplanted, it cannot change to a higher reserved color, but the change target If the reserved color of the reserved pattern displayed next to the reserved pattern is "yellow", by transplanting "yellow" from the next reserved pattern to the reserved pattern to be changed, the reserved pattern to be changed is " It has a configuration that allows it to be green.

By constructing in this way, even if the reserved color of the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved color with a low degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, it can be changed to a higher reserved color by acquiring a new reserved pattern. It is possible to make the player think that he may be able to do so, and to motivate him to play the game in order to obtain the reserved symbols.
<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example>
517 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example, FIG. 518 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.
As shown in FIG. 517, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 517). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.
A game board 13 (see FIG. 518) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 539) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 517). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.
The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加
The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls which protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 517), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. Also, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a production button 22 (see FIG. 520(a)) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 520(b)) are provided. The effect button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 518) to be described later is varied.
The selection switches 600 include, as shown in FIG. 520(b), a determination switch 600a for determining the selection of effects, etc., an up switch 600b for instructing selection in the upward direction, and a right switch for instructing selection in the right direction. 600c, a down switch 600d for instructing selection in the downward direction, and a left switch 600e for instructing selection in the left direction.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, in the front view (see FIG. 517) upper left portion of the front frame 14, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.
In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 518) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.
A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be fully stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.
A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .
As shown in FIG. 518, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills (movable members 310 are shown). not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start It is constructed by assembling a port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 517). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.
The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 517). Mainly referring to FIG. 518, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 517). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).
The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 539) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 518) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 518) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 518). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 539), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this 19th control example, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .
Here, the “10R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state with special symbols after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the “3R probability variable jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is 3. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot of the round. In addition, the "3R time-saving jackpot" shifts to a low-probability state with special symbols after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's about.
In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).
During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67 Triggered by the passage of the ball, the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 539), for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 539). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.
The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.
In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.
The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the balls flow down the right side of the game board. is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .
The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the 19th control example. A part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.
Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 539), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.
On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 539), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the 19th control example, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. However, if the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be five.
The second prize winning port 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加
As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.
Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.
On the other hand, during probability variation and time saving, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 Since the state is easy to win, the ball is shot toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate ) 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640, which is more advantageous for the player.
In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example provides the player with a ball It is possible to change the way of firing to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.
A first variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won). The termination condition that is established when the round game has passed for 30 seconds and the termination condition that is established when 10 prizes are won during the round game are respectively termination conditions for terminating the movable control during the round game. Therefore, this is another form of different conditions for ending the control of the movable means in the 61st control example described later.

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.
Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted downward in the front by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.
Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.
An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 517).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .
The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 in front view, and is illustrated in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 519, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.
The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.
In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.
The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 539). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .
The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 539) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 521, the decorative movable accessory in the nineteenth control example will be described. In the 19th control example, the movable accessory for decoration includes a left change accessory Ym1, a right change accessory Ym2, and a sword accessory Ym3. The change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are decorative movable accessories used in the pending change effect in the 19th control example, and when the pending change effect is not executed, they are in a stored state, as shown in FIG. 521(a). As it is, it is stored below the third symbol display device 81 (initial position), so that the player can easily visually recognize the variation effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 .
On the other hand, when the pending change effect is executed, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 partially overlap the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 521(b). In the 19th control example, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 partly overlap the display area of the third symbol display device 81, thereby covering up the reserved symbols displayed in the overlapping display area and making it difficult to see. becomes possible. Note that detailed operation patterns of the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 will be described later with reference to FIG.
The sword accessory Ym3 is not only used as a part of the variable performance of the special symbols, but is also moved as an adjustment accessory when the player executes light intensity adjustment during the demonstration performance, and is stored in other cases. 521(a), since it is stored on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 (initial position), the player executes on the third symbol display device 81 It is configured to make it easy to visually recognize the variable production that is performed.
On the other hand, when the sword object Ym3 becomes movable, as shown in FIG. , the player can visually recognize the sword character Ym3, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on which the sword character Ym3 is superimposed. It should be noted that the variable production mode using the sword object Ym3 in the 19th control example is configured to be easily set when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, and the sword object Ym3 is movable during the variable production. By entering the state, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect than the effect executed only by the third pattern display device 81, and to improve the interest of the game.

522 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. FIG. 522(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 522(b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 522(b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a first specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The first specific prize winning port 65a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 522(b). A sloped bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 523(b).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 522(b), the opening of the first specific prize winning port 65a is opened and closed so that a game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It is changed to a closed state in which the ball is impossible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the first specific winning port 65a.
By configuring in this way, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 to the second ball entrance 640 side. is configured to be induced. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the variable probability game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second start port 640 while keeping the right-handed state, and immediately change the game method to left-handed after the big hit game. It can reduce the time and effort required to make changes. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.
In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the first specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 522(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 522(b). As shown in FIG. 522(a), the detection switch 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.
With reference to FIG. 523, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge port 65e1 and a special discharge port 65e2, which will be described later.
FIG. 523(a) is a back view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 523(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.
As shown in FIG. 523(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . A game ball passing through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability variable switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a high probability game state. (probability variation gaming state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing the variable probability gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to a low probability game state (normal game state ST1) or a probability variable game state.
In this way, the game state set after the big win game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that have entered the first specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the player's interest is improved even during the big win game. can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable prize winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. . The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this 19th control example, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. is configured to Also, when the jackpot B or jackpot E is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.
Therefore, in the jackpot A, the winning game ball of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured to be impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. It is Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variable grant ratio according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to prevent excessive advantage and disadvantage from occurring.
With reference to FIG. 523(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1 will be described. FIG. 523(b) shows a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of game balls is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all game balls entering the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player wins in the 14th round while the game ball that won before the 14th round is not discharged, and wins even if the jackpot B is the variable probability switch 65e3.
In this way, the game ball that has entered the first specific prize winning port 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the detection switch 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball (in this embodiment, one ball winning prize) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting variable probability game states separately from the first variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.
<Regarding the effect content in the 19th control example>
Here, with reference to FIG. 524 to FIG. 538, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example, the characteristic effect contents will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 524 to 529, the content of the hold change effect using the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) will be described. As described above, in the 19th control example, when the pending change effect is executed, by hiding the pending symbols other than the pending symbols to be changed by the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2, which of the pending symbols is to be changed. It is configured to make it easy for the player to understand whether there is. Then, in the pending change performance, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 act so as to hide the pending symbols other than the change object in stages, thereby providing the player with the pleasure of predicting which of the pending symbols is the change object. be able to. Specific contents of the pending change effect executed in the nineteenth control example will be described below.
FIG. 524(a) is an example of a display screen during special symbol variation in a state in which change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are stored. As shown in FIG. 524(a), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery situation (whether the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed, The 4th design (special design 1 4th design) for showing the lottery situation of the special design (special design) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display area Dm1 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display area Dm1 ( Fig. 524 (a) small display area Dm1 reference) shows a situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display area Dm1 (Fig. 530 (a) small display area Dm1 ), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but it is not limited to this, for example, a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle mark and a cross mark as the fourth pattern, or a display showing a plurality of colors Using the mode, it shows that the special design is changing by the display mode that changes the number and the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific design and color, the lottery result of the special design is shown. can be configured to
Furthermore, in this 19th control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result). It may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 524(a), in the 19th control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery situation is displayed is the main display area. Although an example is shown in which it is formed on the upper right side of Dm, the position and size where this fourth pattern display area is formed can be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. It may be configured to be variable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the small display area Dm1 is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. You can configure it to run.
Further, on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, there is formed a small display area Dm4 in which a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game method in the currently set game state is displayed, as shown in FIG. 524(a). In the example shown in the example, since the set game state is a normal game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the game for causing the player to execute the first special symbol lottery In order to guide (left-handed game), characters of "left-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4. In this way, by configuring the game method so that it can be displayed during the normal game state, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in the case of a variable gaming state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or a short-time gaming state (low probability state of special benefits, high probability state of normal symbols), the player In order to guide the game (right-handed game) for executing the 2 special symbol lottery, characters of "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4.
Further, in the upper center of the main display area Dm, the third pattern, which is decoratively displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the fourth pattern, is variably displayed. Since the third symbol is displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm in this manner, the player does not see the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the variation executed in the main display area Dm is The game can be played while watching the performance and the lottery situation of the special symbols indicated by the third symbols at the same time.
Next, a display area HR1, which is an area in which reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbols currently being executed are displayed, is formed in the lower center of the main display area Dm. In the display area HR1, characters "NOW" are displayed to indicate that the reserved symbols being executed are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the display area HR1 is an area where the reserved symbols being executed are displayed. In addition, since the pending pattern hr0 during execution is displayed, the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special symbol being executed from the display mode of the pending pattern hr0 during execution, and the pending pattern hr0 is not displayed. In this case, the player can easily understand that the special symbol lottery game is not executed.
In addition, in the 19th control example, the currently-executed reserved symbol hr0 and the other reserved symbols are displayed in different display areas, but any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify the currently-executed reserved symbol h0. It is also possible to make a configuration in which the player can identify by displaying in the same display area and differentiating the sizes of the reserved symbols during execution hr0 from the other reserved symbols.

Below the display area HR1, a display area HR2 is formed in which reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls being obtained are displayed. Numbers 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the left in the display area HR2, and the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner as to which reserved symbols are to be consumed in order.
The display area HR2 displays the first reserved symbol hr1 to the fourth reserved symbol hr4, each of which is given a different color. The first reserved symbol hr1 to the fourth reserved symbol hr4 are stored in the reserved balls stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203va (the second special symbol reserved ball storage area vb), respectively. Correspondingly, when the player acquires a reserved ball, the reserved patterns are displayed in order from the first reserved pattern hr1 to the youngest. The display position of the reserved pattern is variable. Specifically, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the active pending symbol hr0 is completed, the pending symbol displayed at the position of the first pending symbol hr1 is shifted to the position where the active pending symbol hr0 was displayed, The reserved design displayed at the position of the second reserved design hr2 is shifted to the position where the first reserved design hr1 was displayed. The reserved design displayed at the position of the third reserved design hr3 is the position where the second reserved design hr2 was displayed, and the reserved design displayed at the position of the fourth reserved design hr4 is the third reserved design hr3. is shifted to the position where was displayed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 529(a), the display mode of the pending symbol in the nineteenth control example will be described. FIG. 529(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the color of the reserved symbol and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 529(a), "Rainbow" has the highest expectation of winning the jackpot, followed by "Red" and "Green", and the expectation increases in the order of "White", "Blue", "Yellow", " Purple” has the same degree of expectation. In addition, when it is determined not to execute the pending change effect in the pending effect setting process (see FIG. 574, F2504) to be described later, the pending color “white” is set, and the pending color “white” is the standard color. is the reserved color of
FIG. 529(b) shows an example of a variable pattern of colors of reserved symbols. As shown in FIG. 529(b), the retained color “rainbow” is a retained color that changes when combining three or more different retained color elements excluding “white”. The reserved color “red” is a reserved color that can be changed by transplanting “blue”, which is one of the elements constituting “purple” to “purple”, to another reserved pattern. The reserved color “green” is a variable reserved color by synthesizing the reserved color “blue” element and the “yellow” element. In this way, by synthesizing the colors of a plurality of reserved patterns and making it possible to change to a higher display mode (color), the currently displayed reserved patterns are all reserved patterns with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. However, since the player can expect to change to a higher reserved design by combining the elements that constitute them, the reserved design that can be changed from the display mode of the displayed reserved design It is possible to allow the player to predict the display mode of , thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As described above, in the 19th control example, the color elements of adjacent reserved symbols are synthesized. Therefore, for example, when the first reserved design hr1 is "purple" and the second reserved design hr2 is "blue", the color of the next reserved design (in this case, the third reserved design hr3) is "white". , ``purple'', and ``blue'' can be changed to ``rainbow'', and ``yellow'' can be changed to ``green''. It is possible to make the player interested in the colors of the reserved symbols to be displayed, and to motivate the player to play the game in order to acquire the reserved balls.
Returning to FIG. 524(a), the description is continued. As described above, "white", "blue", "yellow", and "purple" have the same degree of expectation, so in the example shown in FIG. It remains unchanged. In the example shown in FIG. 524(a), the first reserved design hr1 to the fourth reserved design hr4 are displayed in different display modes (colors), but in the nineteenth control example, the display mode of the reserved design Since (color) is randomly determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the same color may be consecutive, for example, "white", "white", "white", and "white".
As shown in FIG. 524(a), change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are stored below the third symbol display device 81 (initial position). The change character objects Ym1 and Ym2 are composed of a character object having the same size as the display area HR2 or a character object larger than the size of the display area HR2. It is configured so that the displayed reserved pattern is in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. In the 19th control example, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 become movable when the pending change effect is executed. Therefore, when the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 become movable, It is possible to notify that the pending change effect is executed. The action patterns of the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 524(b) to 526(a).
FIG. 524(b) is an example of the display screen when the pending change effect is started and the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 start to move. As shown in FIG. 524(b), the left change character Ym1 slides to the left and hides the first reserved symbol hr1, and the right change character Ym2 slides to the right and hides the fourth reserved symbol hr4. Each moves to a hidden position (first operation). When the first action is finished, the player does not know which of the second reserved pattern hr2 and the third reserved pattern hr3 is the reserved pattern to be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which of the reserved symbols is to be changed.

FIG. 525(a) is an example of a display screen when the second action is executed after the first action is completed. In the second action, the right change accessory Ym2 slides leftward in a front view to hide the third reserved symbol hr3. Then, in the main display area Dm, in conjunction with the action of the right change character Ym2, there is an effect to make it look as if the reserved color "blue" of the third reserved symbol hr3 has been transplanted from the display area HR2 to the second reserved symbol hr2. As shown in FIG. 525(b), "blue" of the third reserved symbol hr3 is transplanted to "yellow" of the second reserved symbol hr2, and an effect of changing to "green" is performed. In this way, the reserved symbols other than the change target displayed in the display area HR2 are hidden by the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, so that the player can easily understand the change target reserved symbols.
After that, the left change accessory Ym1 descends and then slides in the right direction in front view, and the right change accessory Ym2 descends as it is and returns to the stored state (initial position) (third operation).
FIG. 526(a) is an example of the display screen when the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 have returned to their initial positions from the state of FIG. 525(b). Unlike the state of FIG. 524(a), the second reserved pattern hr2 displayed in the display area HR2 is changed from "yellow" to "green", and the third reserved pattern hr3 is changed from "blue" to "white". there is As a result, the player can predict that the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved symbol hr2 among the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 is highly expected to win the jackpot.
Here, for example, the pending change scenario 8 (see FIG. 547) is set as the pending change scenario of the second pending symbol hr2, the pending color of the first pending symbol hr1 is "yellow", and the pending color of the second pending symbol hr2 is When "blue" and "red" are displayed as the reserved colors of the third reserved pattern hr3, the elements constituting the reserved colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 are transplanted to the second reserved pattern hr2. Then, after the pending change effect that changes the reserved color to “rainbow” is executed, the reserved colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 are left as they are (that is, the first reserved pattern hr1 is “yellow”, the third 3 reserved pattern hr3 remains "red"), in fact, although only the second reserved pattern hr2 wins the jackpot, the player receives the second reserved pattern hr2 and the third reserved pattern hr3. If the expectation of winning the jackpot is high, it will give a misunderstanding. In order to prevent this, in the 19th control example, when an element constituting the color of the reserved symbol is transplanted, the color corresponding to the transplantation is variably displayed.

FIG. 526(b) is an example of a display screen when part of the reserved color of a reserved design is transplanted to an adjacent reserved design. When the first action is completed, the second reserved pattern hr2 is displayed in the "purple" display mode and the third reserved pattern hr3 is displayed in the "white" display mode in the display area HR2. After that, when the second action is started, the left change character Ym1 slides to the right in the front view to perform the action of hiding the second reserved symbol hr2. At this time, in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 527(a), "blue", which is one of the components of "purple" of the second reserved symbol hr2, is displayed in the third reserved symbol r3. The production that is ported to is executed. When the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 return to their initial positions, the second reserved design hr2 is changed to "red" and the third reserved design hr3 is changed to "blue". Therefore, in this case, the second reserved symbol hr2 hidden by the change role product Ym1 has a higher expectation of winning the big prize than the other reserved symbols.
In addition, in the 19th control example, only the colors forming the reserved symbols are transplanted, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols themselves may be transplanted. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 525(a), an effect is executed in which the reserved design displayed at the position of the third reserved design hr3 is transplanted to the second reserved design hr2, and the display after the end of the reserved change effect is executed. In the position of the third reserved design hr3 in the area HR2, the reserved design originally displayed at the position of the fourth reserved design hr4 is displayed, and the position of the fourth reserved design hr4 is left blank (no reserved design is displayed). state), and when the special symbol variation based on the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 is executed, the lottery result of the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 and the reservation corresponding to the third reserved pattern hr3 A configuration may be adopted in which ball lottery results are collectively notified. By configuring in this way, the number of times the player is informed that the player has won a missed prize can be reduced. can make you think.
In addition, in the state of FIG. 527(a), a pattern is also set in which the transplant color hr2a transplanted from the second reserved pattern hr2 is "red". It is a reserved design with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot. By constructing in this way, the player can be interested not only in the movements of the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, but also in the performance performed by the third pattern display device 81, so that the amusement of the game is improved. be able to.
Fig. 528(a) shows the state of Fig. 526(b), even if the second action is executed, the hidden reserved pattern is not transplanted, and the reserved pattern to be changed is changed alone. It is an example of a display screen. Although the second reserved symbol hr2 is hidden, the color is not transplanted, and the third reserved symbol hr3 is changed to "green". In this way, by setting various patterns of hold change, the hold change effect does not become monotonous, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

As described above, in the 19th control example, by hiding the reserved symbols other than the changed objects using the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, the reserved symbols to be changed can be made clear to the player. . In this way, in order to hide a part of the reserved symbol display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, the third symbol display device 81 executes a suspended change effect using an effect such as light emission. In addition, even if the effect of the pending symbol to be changed overlaps with other pending symbols, the other pending symbols are hidden by the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, so that the player can determine which pending symbol is to be changed. can be clarified.
In addition, in the 19th control example, it is configured to be hidden by the change character Ym1 and Ym2, but it is not limited to this. The design may be hidden, or the reserved design other than the change target may be hidden by enlarging and displaying the third design.
Also, in the 19th control example, only the pattern of transferring the color of the second reserved design hr2 to the third reserved design hr3 and the pattern of transferring the color of the third reserved design hr3 to the second reserved design hr2 were explained. , but not limited to this, for example, a pattern may be set in which the color of the second reserved pattern hr2 is transferred to the first reserved pattern hr1, or the color of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transferred to the fourth reserved pattern hr4. You may set a pattern to
In this 19th control example, the configuration is such that the color of the reserved pattern to be changed and the adjacent reserved pattern are synthesized, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a pattern to be transplanted to hr1 is provided.

In addition, in the 19th control example, the configuration is such that the colors of the reserved symbols are given at random, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is two, "white" is displayed in the first reserved pattern hr1 and "purple" is displayed in the second reserved pattern hr2, one reserved ball is digested, and the number of reserved balls is displayed. becomes one, the "purple" reserved design displayed in the second reserved design hr2 changes to the "white" reserved design when shifting to the first reserved design hr1. When the number of reserved balls is four, "white" is displayed in the first reserved pattern hr1, "purple" is displayed in the second reserved pattern hr2, "yellow" is displayed in the third reserved pattern hr3, and "yellow" is displayed in the fourth reserved pattern hr4. Display "blue". In this case, when the holding change effect is executed at the positions of the first holding symbol hr1 and the second holding symbol hr2, it is possible to make the player expect that one of the holding symbols will change to "red". Yes, when the pending change effect is executed at the position of the third pending symbol hr3, it is possible to make the player expect a change to "rainbow" or "green", and the fourth pending symbol hr4. When the pending change effect is executed at the position of , the player can expect a change to "green".
In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a color is given corresponding to the position where each reserved pattern is normally displayed in the display area HR2, the reserved color that varies depending on the position when the reserved pattern to be changed changes are different, the player can be interested in the position where the pending change effect is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 530 to 532, the details of the light amount adjustment function executed in the nineteenth control example will be described. This 19th control example has an environment adjustment function that allows the player to adjust the gaming environment (volume and light intensity) of the pachinko machine 10, and when adjusting the light intensity during the standby screen (during the demonstration effect), , By moving the decorative movable accessory (sword Ym3) to the environment adjustment position (see FIG. 530(b)), a state similar to the state in which the decorative movable accessory is moved in the actual variation effect. is reproduced in a pseudo manner, and the light amount adjustment operation can be executed in that state.
FIG. 530(a) is an example of a demo screen (demonstration screen) displayed during the standby period in which the special symbols are not varied. A small display area Dm3 in which display selection buttons Sw1 to Sw5 modeled after the selection button 600 are displayed is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm in front view. In this small display area Dm3, a character saying "You can adjust by pressing the button" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the operation method for adjusting the game environment. "+" is displayed, "-" is displayed on the lower display button Sw3, and "volume" is displayed on the upper side of the upper display button Sw1. A player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the adjustment is possible.

In addition, "+" is displayed on the right display button Sw2, "-" is displayed on the left display button Sw4, and "light amount" is displayed on the right side of the right display button Sw2. The player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the button 600e.
A small sound volume gauge ga1 and a small light quantity gauge ga2, which are environmental information notification modes for showing the currently set sound volume and light quantity to the player, are displayed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm in front view. The volume gauge small ga1 and the light amount gauge small ga2 are composed of five stages, and "MIN" is displayed on the left side of each gauge, and "MAX" is displayed on the right side. In this case, the environmental setting values ga1a and ga2a are interlocked and varied, so that the difference between the player's preferred gaming environment and the current gaming environment can be easily recognized.
In the sub-display area Ds formed below the main ideographic area Dm, the characters "Demonstration in progress", which is the game information display mode for displaying the game information, are displayed, thereby changing the current special symbol. A player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that it is in a waiting period that is not being executed.
FIG. 530(b) is an example of a light amount adjustment screen when the player operates a button for light amount adjustment during the waiting period. The example shown in FIG. 530(b) is a state in which the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) is changed to the environment adjustment position based on the player's operation of the left button 600e. In conjunction with the player's operation of the left button 600e, the light amount set value ga2a of the light amount gauge small ga2 is decreased by one step. The LED set value Ym3a of the LED attached to the sword object Ym3 is also variable in 5 steps, and is variable in conjunction with the light amount gauge small ga2.

By configuring in this way, even when a game is not being executed, it is possible to adjust the light amount using the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3) used for the variable effect, so that the amount of light desired by the player can be adjusted. It is possible to make it easier to appropriately adjust the amount of light to be used.
On the upper right side of the main display area Dm in the front view, there is a display area HR3 that displays a notification mode for notifying that the sword character Ym3 is moved to the environment adjustment position and that it is simulated movement for light amount adjustment. It is formed. The display area HR3 displays the characters ``moving the character for light amount adjustment'' to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current movement of the sword character Ym3 is not related to the variable performance. It is configured so as not to mislead the player.
FIG. 531(a) is an example of an adjustment completion screen when the light intensity adjustment is completed and the player operates the decision button 600a. When the player operates the enter button 600a, an environment adjustment end display cm1, which is a guide mode for indicating that the environment adjustment is completed, is displayed above the light amount gauge small ga2. As a result, the player can recognize that the currently displayed light amount setting value ga2a has been set.
Also, based on the player's operation of the decision button 600a, the sword character Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (see FIG. 521(a)).

Here, if the variation of the special symbol starts before the end of the light amount adjustment, the sword symbol Ym3 overlaps the third symbol display device 81 in the state where the sword symbol Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, and the player cannot There arises a problem that it is difficult to visually recognize the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 .
On the other hand, in the 19th control example, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate during the light amount adjustment, the sword object Ym3 is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position while continuing the light amount adjustment. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 531(b), the sword character Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in accordance with the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and the light gauge small ga2 changes to the light gauge large ga3. switch. By switching to the light amount gauge large ga3 in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the light amount adjustment is continuing even if the sword character Ym3 is changed to the initial position.
Also, if the movement of the sword object Ym3 to the initial position is executed during the variable production, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that the current movement of the sword object Ym3 is part of the variable production. Therefore, in the nineteenth control example, when the sword character Ym3 is changed based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, unlike the case where the sword character Ym3 is changed by operating the enter button 600a, the sword character Ym3 It is configured to be variable to the initial position after all the accompanying LEDs are turned off. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the sword Ym3 is not moving as part of the variable presentation.
FIG. 532 is an example of the light amount adjustment screen when the movement of the sword character Ym3 is restricted. In the nineteenth control example, when the sword object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, the movement of the sword object Ym3 is restricted for a certain period of time (10 seconds). By configuring in this way, when the effect mode of moving the sword object Ym3 is set as part of the variable effect, the execution timing of the effect becomes the period during which the environment adjustment position is changed to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sword character Ym3 from performing unnatural motions, and the sword character Ym3 from being overloaded and broken.

When the movement of the sword object Ym3 is restricted during the standby period, that is, when the player who has finished adjusting the light intensity adjusts the light intensity again, the sword object Ym3 is displayed above the center of the main display area Dm. A display area HR4 is formed to display a guidance mode indicating that the operation is restricted. In the display area HR4, by displaying the characters "Restriction of operation of the character", the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the failure of the sword character Ym3 is not due to a malfunction.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 533 to 637, the contents of the shutter closed ready-to-win effect, which is one of the ready-to-win effects to be executed in the nineteenth control example, will be described. In the shutter closing ready-to-win performance, one ready-to-reach performance is divided into six stages, and if the final stage (sixth stage) can be reached (that is, if the shutter opens and closes a predetermined number of times), it is notified that the jackpot is won. It is a reach production. Specific contents of the shutter closing reach effect will be described below.
First, with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, the basic pattern of the shutter closing reach effect will be described.
FIG. 533(a) is an example of the display screen at the start of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect. Shutters St1 and St2 are displayed on the left side and right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front to indicate whether or not it is possible to proceed to the next stage. A display area HR4 is formed in which a guidance mode for notifying the degree of progress is displayed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a game information notification mode for notifying success conditions of the effect is displayed. The characters "Shutter closed to continue 1/6" are displayed in the display area HR4, and the characters "If you can finish the race, you win big" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, thereby the shutter St1 displayed in the main display area Dm. , St2 are closed, the stage progresses, and when the display in the display area HR4 becomes "6/6", the player can be easily notified of the big win.

Also, in the center of the main display area Dm, two "3" symbols are displayed as the third symbols, and a downward arrow indicating that the third symbol is fluctuating is displayed. It shows that
As shown in FIG. 533(a), in the shutter close reach effect, the state in which the shutters St1 and St2 are vibrating rattlingly is a branch effect as to whether or not to proceed to the next stage. As shown in FIG. 533(b), by closing the shutters St1 and St2, the characters St1a of "continued" displayed on the shutter St1 and the characters St1a of "continued" displayed on the shutter St2 are displayed. When St2a is united, it becomes "continuation", and the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect will continue.
In addition, when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed, the degree of progress of the presentation displayed in the display area HR4 is changed from "1/6" to "2/6", so that the shutters St1 and St2 are closed and the next image is displayed. The player can recognize that it has progressed to the stage of .
On the other hand, although not shown, if the branch effect does not proceed to the next stage, the shutters St1 and St2 are not closed and the vibration stops, and the end mode (for example, the characters "failure") indicating the end of the effect is displayed. Is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the ready-to-win effect has ended.

FIG. 534(a) is an example of the display screen when reaching the fifth stage of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect. Unlike the state shown in FIG. 533(a), in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the symbol "7" is displayed as the third symbol in the reach state, and the character St1a of "tsugi" displayed on the shutter St1 is changed to " The characters St1b of "Congratulations" and the characters St2a of "Continued" displayed on the shutter St2 are changed to the characters St2b of "Fuku". In this way, the characters of the shutters St1 and St2 are changed from "Continue" indicating that the character advances to the next stage to "Blessing" indicating that the big win is won. Something is reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.
Here, in the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect of the 19th control example, each time the shutters St1 and St2 are closed, the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm is incremented by one. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 534(a), since the shutters St1 and St2 are closed four times from the state of FIG. 533(a), 4 is added to the "3" symbol to change to the "7" symbol. . Therefore, when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed in the fifth step, the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm becomes the "8" symbol, and as shown in FIG. 534(b), the shutter St1 and St2 are completely opened, and a notification mode nz1 indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed between the two "8" symbols, thereby announcing the jackpot winning.
In this 19th control example, the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach is configured to be randomly determined based on the determination result of the special symbol. If the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the first stage of is a "2" symbol, a "7" symbol will be displayed when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached.
As will be described later, in this 19th control example, the player can predict the type of jackpot by the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. , It is the third pattern type displayed only when "jackpot A", which is a jackpot type in which the variable probability game state is set after the jackpot game ends, is won, and the other patterns are the number of rounds of the jackpot game than the jackpot A. ``jackpot B'', which is a jackpot type with a small number of jackpots, and ``jackpot C,'' in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is smaller than that of the jackpot A and the probability variable game state is not set after the jackpot game is finished.

In this way, the player can predict the number of the third symbol that will be displayed when the final stage is reached from the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage. It is possible to make the player interested in the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed with , and the amusement of the game can be improved.
The basic pattern of the shutter closing reach effect has been described above. As described above, the basic pattern of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect entertains the player whether or not he or she can reach the final stage. However, simply showing whether or not the shutters St1 and St2 are closed in the branching effect results in a monotonous effect, causing the player to quickly become bored with the effect.
To solve this problem, in the 19th control example, a configuration is added in which the aspect of the effect executed in the final stage is varied depending on the aspect of the effect executed in the process of reaching the final stage. With reference to FIG. 535, an example of the special pattern of the shutter closing reach effect will be described.
FIG. 535(a) is an example of the display screen when the capsule acquisition effect is generated in the third stage of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect. After the shutters St1 and St2 are closed in the second step branch effect of the shutter closing reach, when the third step of the shutter closing reach is started, the effect of obtaining the capsule Cp1 may be executed. This capsule Cp1 is displayed in such a manner that the content is unknown at the time of the third stage. When the capsule Cp1 is acquired, a display area HR4 for displaying a game information notification mode for notifying the number of capsules held is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm in front view (see FIG. 535(b)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 535(b), in the fifth-stage branch effect, the capsule Cp1 displayed in the display area HR4 is released, the HOLD ticket Cp1a pops out of the capsule Cp1, and appears in the main display area Dm. An effect of sticking to the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is executed. This HOLD ticket Cp1a does not allow the number of the currently displayed symbol to be updated even if the shutters St1 and St2 are closed. , the jackpot winning is notified by the "7" symbol.
It should be noted that the contents of the capsule Cp1 define patterns for selecting not only the HOLD ticket Cp1a but also other display modes imitating a "key". When this key is selected, the shutters St1 and St2 are completely opened at the stage when the key is successfully used, and the number of the pattern displayed at that time informs that the jackpot is won.
Even if an item such as a HOLD ticket Cp1a emerges from the capsule Cp1, there may be a case where the winning of the jackpot is not reported (that is, the case of winning without winning). , the contents of the capsule Cp1, and whether the use of the item is successful.
In this way, in the 19th control example, by adding a configuration that enables acquisition of the capsule Cp1, which is the effect variable mode for varying the effect mode of the shutter-closed ready-to-reach effect, display is performed in the first stage of the shutter-closed ready-to-reach effect. It is possible to make people interested in the number of the symbol to be drawn, the presence or absence of the capsule acquisition effect in the 3rd stage, and the contents of the capsule Cp1 in the 4th and 5th stages. It is possible to keep the player's attention on the performance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 536 to 538, the movie execution ready-to-win effect, which is one of the ready-to-win effects executed in the nineteenth control example, will be described. This movie execution ready-to-win effect is divided into a first half part and a second half part, and when the first half part of the ready-to-win effect ends, a branch effect is executed as to whether or not to shift to the latter half effect. When this branch effect succeeds, a special movie, which is the second half of the ready-to-win effect, is started. Then, when the special movie ends, it is reported that the player has won the jackpot.
FIG. 536(a) is a display screen when the branch effect of the movie execution reach effect is executed. A display effect button Sw6 imitating the effect button 22 is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and an effective period gauge ga4, which is a notification mode for indicating the SW effective period, is displayed below it. This validity period gauge ga4 is composed of a remaining validity period ga4a for indicating the remaining validity period and an elapsed time ga4b for indicating the elapsed time. By increasing the display portion of the elapsed time ga4b, the player is notified of the remaining period during which the operation of the effect button 22 is valid.
Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "Start special movie with button PUSH?" is displayed as a guide mode for indicating game information that is a condition for success of the movie execution ready-to-win effect. In addition to displaying a display effect button Sw6 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm and a downward arrow as a suggestive mode for prompting the player to operate the effect button thereon, the sub display area By displaying the guidance mode of Ds, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that there is a possibility that the performance will develop if the performance button 22 is operated.
FIG. 536(b) is an example of the display screen at the end of the special movie when the effect button 22 is operated during the branch effect. A display area HR4 for displaying a notification mode indicating that the special movie has ended is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm. By displaying "Special Movie End" in the display area HR4, the player can easily recognize that the special movie has ended.

In this 19th control example, when the special movie ends, the notification mode is displayed in the display area HR4. It is acceptable if it can be done.
Here, the special movie of the movie execution reach effect in the 19th control example sets the reproduction time of the movie assuming that the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the SW effective period. By constructing in this way, there is no problem that the special movie does not end within the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the player does not operate the effect button 22. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 22 during the valid period of the SW, the special movie starts at the time when the player operates the effect button 22. Therefore, when the special movie ends, the special pattern variation time is Not finished. Therefore, in the 19th control example, if the special symbols have not finished changing at the end of the special movie, the temporarily stopped symbols are shaken and waited from the end of the special movie until the special symbols stop changing. and
Therefore, if the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the valid period of the SW, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 is also a big hit when the special movie ends, as shown in FIG. The game is stopped in a display mode indicating winning, the third pattern is also stopped in a display mode indicating winning in a big win, and a notification mode for indicating winning in a big win is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, so that the player can win a big win. Something is reported.
On the other hand, when the player operates the production button 22 during the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won, and a notification mode for indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this manner, in the movie execution ready-to-win effect, the player who has operated the effect button 22 during the SW effective period is notified of the big winning before the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

FIG. 538 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the performance time of the special movie and the fluctuation time of the special symbols. As described above, when the effect button 22 is operated during the branching effect, the pattern fluctuation period is set in the period from the end of the special movie to the stop of the fluctuation, and the big win notification may be executed before the stop of the fluctuation. It is shown.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the nineteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 539, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 539 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.
The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.
In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 540, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 540 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .
In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.
In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.
Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 550), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 561). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203sa corresponding to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding area). to the fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa includes the Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special In the symbol holding ball storage area 203sb, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64. Each value of is stored.

Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb Of the various values stored in the reserved first area, the special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed is shifted to the special symbol execution area, and based on the stored various values Special symbol variation is started.
In addition, in the 19th control example, the type of special design uses the configuration of two types (first special design, second special design). good. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.
Furthermore, as in the 19th control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb) It may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.
In addition, in the 19th control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a loss, but it is not limited to this, for example, a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. , it may be constructed so that the player can win a small prize that can be awarded to the player with a smaller benefit than when the big win is won (privilege different from when the big win is won). With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.

In addition, when a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. For example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. It may be configured such that when a small winning is won, the small winning game is executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the game state is not shifted even after the small winning game is finished.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.
Furthermore, the RAM 203 of the 19th control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203vc, each value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.
Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 540, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.
The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 550) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 561).
The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this 19th control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the random number counter C1 is stored in the RAM 203. The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202va stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. 202va, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when it matches the value of the random number set by 202va.
Here, with reference to FIG. 542, the first winning random number table 202va will be described. FIG. 542 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202va. This first winning random number table 202va is a table in which random numbers (determined values) for determining a big winning are defined in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202va, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined differently according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 542, for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, "0 to 4" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values (“5 to 999”) are defined as outlier judgment values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 19" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "20 to 999") is defined as the deviation determination value. That is, since the update range of the first random number table 202a is 1000 of "0 to 999", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000). Thus, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).
In addition, in the 19th control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state. It may be constructed so as to be probabilities, or it may be constructed so that three or more types of jackpot probabilities are set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.
In addition, in the 19th control example, two types of lottery results, "big hit" and "loss", are determined as the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, it may be possible to determine a "minor win" as one type of "loss". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.
As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is configured so as to be able to win a "small win", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202va. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this 19th control example), and is updated in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa.
The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2, the first winning type selection table 202sc is referred to to determine the big winning type when the big winning is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202sb will be described with reference to FIG. 543(a).
FIG. 543(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202vb. As described above, the first hit type selection table 202vb is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol or the lottery for the second special symbol. Different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.
Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0", as the jackpot type A "jackpot A" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds, and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot A" is one, so the lottery of the first special symbol. , the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 1% (1/100).
The value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range “0 to 99”) is defined in association with “jackpot B” as the jackpot type with respect to the range of “1”. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot B" is one, so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 1% (1/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "2 to 99". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds, and the jackpot game is usually executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value of .

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 98 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C" is 98% (98/100).
That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot B, jackpot C) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same. The easiness of passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the "jackpot B" is different than that of the "jackpot C", and it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game. It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot C".
Next, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", and "jackpot A" is defined as the jackpot type. there is This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds, and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, 25 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A", so in the lottery of the second special symbol In the case of a big win, the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 25% (25/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 41". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 12 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 12% (12/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "42 to 51". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot D" is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "52 to 68". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 17 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot E" is 17% (17/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot F" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "69 to 82". This "jackpot F" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 14 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot F", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot F" is 14% (14/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot G" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "83 to 90". This "jackpot G" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, there are 8 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot G", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot G" is 8% (8/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot H" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "91 to 97". This "jackpot H" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, seven random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot H", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot H" is 7% (7/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot I" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "98". This "jackpot I" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot I" is one, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot I" is 1% (1/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 543(a), "jackpot J" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "99". This "jackpot J" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 9 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot J" is one, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining the "jackpot J" is 1% (1/100).

That is, nine types of jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F, jackpot G, jackpot H, jackpot I jackpot J) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are: In both cases, the probability variable jackpot game is executed, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is made different, and the "jackpot A" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and the "jackpot D". is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.
As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed, so the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 2% than the first special symbol lottery. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it is an advantageous jackpot type.
Returning to FIG. 540, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 561) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 544) storing a random number for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is
Here, with reference to FIG. 544, the variation pattern table 202sc will be described. As shown in FIG. 544(a), this variation pattern table 202sc includes a variation pattern table 202vc1 for big hits (see FIG. 544(b)) and a variation pattern table 202sc2 for loss (normal) (see FIG. 544(c)). And, at least the variation pattern table 202sc3 (see FIG. 544(d)) for deviation (probability variation/time reduction) is defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 544(b), the jackpot table 202sc1 will be described. FIG. 544(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202vc1. The big win variation pattern table 202vc1 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202vc1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.
Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Selection is made from the jackpot variation pattern table 202vc1.
FIG. 544(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).
Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, there are various types of normal reach (30 seconds) that are out of the range of "0 to 149" in the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and various kinds of outlier super reach in the range of "150 to 197" (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).
In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.
FIG. 544(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202sc3. This deviation (probability variation / time reduction) variation pattern table 202sc3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. be. In this deviation (probability variation/time reduction) variation pattern table 202sc3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2.
In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , and within the range of “90 to 99”, the out-of-reach reach (front-to-rear out-of-reach reach, reach other than front-to-rear out-of-order reach) is determined.

In this way, when the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.
Returning to FIG. 540, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 550), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc of the RAM203.
Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202vd stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202vd. If it matches the value of the random number set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202vd is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and the other for when probability of winning is higher than when the probability is low for normal symbols, and included in each table. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.
The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202vd will be described with reference to FIG. 543(b). FIG. 543(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 543(b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined as "0 to 2" for the normal design, and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined to be in the range of "0 to 149".

That is, in the 19th control example, when the normal symbol low probability state is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to a low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal game, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal game to be executed during the normal state and the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.
In addition, in this 19th control example, it is configured such that the variation time of different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state. A longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the normal pattern low probability state is set than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation according to the game state, winning in the normal symbol lottery and entering the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to easily set a game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.
Furthermore, in the 19th control example, when winning is won in the normal symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, a plurality of balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640. It is configured to be able to execute a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in an operation mode (long opening) that can be performed. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so any game state is possible. Even in the set state, the possibility of execution of the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.
The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 550). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 561).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.
Returning to FIG. 539, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 540, and the like. Here, with reference to FIG. 541(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth control example will be described. FIG. 541(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example.
As shown in FIG. 541(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example includes the first winning random number table 202va, the first winning type selection table 202vb, the variation pattern selection table 202vc, the 2 has at least a random number table 202vd. The first winning random number table 202va, the first winning type selection table 202vb, the variation pattern selection table 202vc, and the second winning random number table 202vd were described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. omitted.
Returning to FIG. 539, the description continues. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in FIG. 540, the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, etc., a stack area, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .
When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 50) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 559) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
Also, as shown in FIG. 541(c), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf, variable probability flag 203vg, variable probability setting flag 203vh, variable probability passing counter 203vi, winning number counter 203vj, operation counter 203vk, notification counter 203vm, remaining ball timer flag 203vn, It has at least a remaining ball timer 203vo, a probability variable effective flag 203vp, a probability variable effective timer 203vr, a discharge number counter 203vs, a time saving counter 203vt, a probability variable counter 203vu, and a memory area 203vz.
The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning in the first winning port 64 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.
After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.
When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.
The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 640 are respectively stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.
More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.
After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.
In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 . The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is set to zero. It is added (see F604 in FIG. 555). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see F211 in FIG. 551).
The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (F212 in FIG. 551, FIG. 555 (see F605). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is changed.
The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223vb of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.
In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second prize winning opening 640 and are reserved is stored. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve is changed, it is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.
The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf sets the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal start port 67 to a maximum of 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See F904 in FIG. 558). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see F805 in FIG. 557).
When the ball passes through either the left or right normal start opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4. is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905 in FIG. 558). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc ( F903 in FIG. 558: No).
The probability variation flag 203vg is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the variable probability flag 203vg is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low probability gaming state (including a time-saving gaming state). In the 19th control example, when the variable probability setting flag 203vh, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203vg is set to ON (see F1304 in FIG. 564). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The variable probability setting flag 203vh is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 523(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203vh is set to ON (F1242 in FIG. 566). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203vh is set to OFF based on the fact that the variable probability flag 203vg is set to ON (F1306 in FIG. 564). The variable probability setting flag 203vh is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.
In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203vh is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. 203vh may be formally set to ON and restored. In this case, whether the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203vi, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203vh to ON and turning on the power again. can.
The variable probability passing counter 203vi is for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round (two rounds of the jackpots A, B, and D to J in this 19th control example) during the jackpot game. is a counter. In addition, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203vi and the discharge number counter 203vs, which will be described later. This probability variation passing counter 203vi is updated by adding one by one when passing probability variation switch 65e3 (F1241 in FIG. 566). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls and the number of discharged game balls match the first variable prize winning device 65, the initial value is reset to "0" (F1271 in FIG. 567). It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203vi is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.
The prize winning number counter 203vj counts the number of game balls that have entered the specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize winning device 65). A counter for counting. Specifically, based on detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 523) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one by one (in FIG. 566 F1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the first variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203vj) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203vs and the probability variable passage counter 203vi) match (F1267 in FIG. 567), the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203vj is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203vk is a counter for timing (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 2nd round for the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 2nd round for the jackpot C. set. In the operation counter 203vk, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 2 rounds for the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the jackpot C (F1202 in FIG. 563). On the other hand, in the process of F1239 of the winning process (FIG. 566, F1115) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Also, when the value of the operation counter 203vk is determined to be 0 (F1243 in FIG. 566: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. The operation counter 203vk is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203vk and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.
The notification counter 203vm is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this 19th control example, the sound "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In this 19th control example, the notification counter 203vm corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the second round (10 balls won in the first variable prize winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203vm is decremented by one and updated by the processing of F1224 of the notification processing of main controller 110 (FIG. 565, F1114). When the notification counter 203vm becomes 0, the notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the processing for outputting the sound described above.
With this configuration, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the second round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. In the second round, the flow path solenoid 65k is activated, and when the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to make the player continue to expect that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, a notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 523 (a)). A performance is running. However, when the second round is over, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so the player is notified by voice to keep an eye on the third symbol display device 81 during the interval display. A notification effect is executed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display contents after the interval effect is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.
In the 19th control example, the third symbol display device 81 is notified to be shown, thereby diverting the player's attention away from the switching member 65h. The motion of the switching member 65h may be reported to be hidden by the player's hand by notifying that the player's hand is held over the first variable prize winning device 65 . Also, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the decorative lamp 34 may be notified to the player to look at, thereby diverting the player's attention. Furthermore, during the second round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to alert the player to read it with a mobile phone, thereby diverting the player's attention. In the 19th control example, the maximum time (five seconds from the start of the second round) until the action of the switching member 65h ends is set for the distraction effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined depending on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203vn is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203vn to ON, the remaining ball timer 203vo described later is incremented by one and updated (see F1264 in FIG. 567). The remaining ball timer 203vo is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. It is a counter for
The remaining ball timer 203vo is set so that the winning game balls are discharged to the first variable prize winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether the required time has passed. In the 19th control example, the time required until the winning game ball in the first variable winning device 81 is discharged is 2 seconds. It is set as the upper limit value of the sphere timer 203vo. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203vo reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds in this 19th control example), it is determined whether or not the winning number to the first variable winning device 65 and the discharged number match. is executed (F1267 in FIG. 567). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable prize winning device 65, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of the second round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and the big hit B is achieved. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.
In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203vh is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.
Probability variation effective flag 203vp is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203vp is set to ON, based on the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the gaming ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 523 (a)) the variable probability switch 65e3 indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through the That is, the period in which the variable probability effective flag 203vp is ON indicates that the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during a normal period.

The variable probability valid timer 203vr is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203vp is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203vr, it is possible to determine (measure) the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In the 19th control example, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203vr is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.
As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the game ball is played with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the ball to pass through or misdetecting the passage of the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.
The discharge number counter 203vs is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 523(a)) in one round. This discharge number counter 203vs is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of winning game balls and the discharge number of the first variable winning device 65 are determined (F1271 in FIG. 567).
The counter 203vt during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. During this time saving counter 203vt, 100 is set when the variable probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the 19th control example, when the variable probability game state is not set after the jackpot game, the state is shifted to the time saving game state of 100 times.

During probability variation counter 203vu is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in probability variation gaming state. This variable probability counter 203vu is set to 120 when the variable probability setting flag is ON at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the 19th control example, when the probability variation gaming state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state of 120 times.
The other memory area 203vz is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.
Returning to FIG. 539, the description continues. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.
The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .
The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .
The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (speaker 308, etc.) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable effects (variable display ) and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.
As shown in FIG. 539, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22A (the production button 22, the selection button 600), and the driving motor group. ing. This drive motor group includes a motor 771 for a sword role, motors 773 and 774 for a change role, and other motors.

Each motor described above is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation step) for setting the operation content for each motor driver from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 A command that can specify the number and direction of movement (rotation) is output. The motor operation command output from the audio lamp control device 113 is set by referring to the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222vf stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 .
Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22A, and when the frame button 22A is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .
In addition, when the frame button 22A is operated by the player, a role product driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance role product (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation contents of the frame button 22A is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22A is set. can be configured to
Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.
Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the nineteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 545(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222va, a hold change effect lottery table 222vb, a hold color selection table 222vc, a hold change scenario selection table 222vd, At least a shutter closing reach selection table 222ve and an operation scenario table 222vf are stored.
In the variation pattern selection table 222va, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.
In the variation pattern selection table 222va, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In the holding change effect lottery table 222vb, the counter value of the first effect counter 223vf is set with the mode of the holding change effect (do not execute, single hold change effect, compound hold change effect). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command for a special figure from the main control device 110, based on this pending change effect lottery table 222vb, the pending change effect is applied to the pending symbol corresponding to the winning information. Decide whether to execute or not.
Here, with reference to FIG. 546(a), the contents of the pending change effect lottery table 222vb will be described. FIG. 546(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending change effect lottery table 222vb. As shown in FIG. 546(a), in the 19th control example, the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning command for the special figure received from the main controller 110 is reserved based on the counter value of the first effect counter 223vf. It decides whether or not to execute the change production.
The value of the first effect counter 223vf is defined in association with the range of "0 to 29" to "do not execute the pending change effect", and the range of "30 to 89" is defined to be "single pending change effect". The range of "90 to 98" is defined in association with "composite hold change effect".
Here, the single pending change effect means that when a winning command for a special figure is received from the main controller 110, the pending color at the start of display of the pending design is the pending color determined from the pending color selection table 222vc. This is the presentation to display. Incidentally, when the pending change effect is not executed, "white" is set as the pending color.

In addition, the composite pending change effect is a pending change effect using multiple pending patterns, and based on the preset pending change scenario, the pending color of the multiple pending patterns displayed at the start of the special pattern fluctuation It is a production that changes the
Returning to FIG. 545(a), the description continues. In the reserved color selection table 222vc, reserved colors are set to the counter values of the second effect counter 223vg. This pending color selection table 222vc is a table that is referenced to determine the pending symbol color corresponding to the winning command received from main controller 110 when the single pending change effect is executed (see FIG. 574). F2559).
Here, the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc will be described with reference to FIG. 546(b). FIG. 546(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc. As shown in FIG. 546(b), in the 19th control example, the reserved color of the reserved symbol is determined based on the result of the success/failure determination and the counter value of the second effect counter 223vg.
If the success or failure determination result is "hit", the value of the second effect counter 223vg is defined in association with the reserved color "white" for the range of "0 to 29", for the range of "30 to 59" , the reserved color "blue" is defined in correspondence, the reserved color "yellow" is defined in correspondence with the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved color "purple" is defined in the range of "90 to 119" is defined in correspondence, the reserved color "green" is defined in correspondence with the range of "120 to 179", and the reserved color "red" is defined in correspondence with the range of "180 to 194" , and the range of "195 to 198" are defined in association with the reserved color "rainbow". When the success/failure determination result is "hit", the flag 223vm during restriction of the reserved effect is set to ON regardless of which reserved color is selected, indicating "hit reserved" in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. Information is stored.

The pending effect information storage area 223vl is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the pending effect information for executing the pending change effect on the pending pattern.
The pending performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new pending change performance for other pending patterns from being set during the period when the pending pattern targeted for the pending change performance is displayed. As described above, in the 19th control example, the reserved change effect of combining the reserved color of the target reserved symbol and the reserved colors of the preceding and subsequent reserved symbols is executed (see FIGS. 524 to 529). In this pending change effect, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are movable in an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined pending change scenario. When a different pending change scenario is set for the pending pattern, the execution timing of the pending change performance overlaps, and there is a risk of giving wrong game information to the player. During the period in which the medium flag 223vm is ON, the pending change effect is not newly executed.
On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is "off", the value of the second effect counter 223vg is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with the reserved color "white", and the range of "50 to 149" is defined. The reserved color "blue" is defined in association with the range "150 to 174", the reserved color "yellow" is defined in association with the range "175 to 194", and the reserved color " Purple” is defined in correspondence, the reserved color “green” is defined in correspondence with the range of “195 to 197”, and the reserved color “red” is defined in correspondence with the range of “198”. ing. When the success/failure determination result is "out", regardless of which reserved color is selected, the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF, and the reserved effect information storage area 223vl corresponds to the selected reserved color. Reserved color information is stored.
As shown in FIG. 546(b), when the success/failure determination result is “hit”, the range in which the reserved colors “green” and “red” are selected is larger than when the success/failure determination result is “miss”. , and "Rainbow" can be selected. In this way, by setting a reserved color that is likely to be selected depending on whether the success/failure determination result is "hit" or "miss", the player can make a success/failure determination based on the reserved color of the displayed reserved symbol. You can predict the outcome.

In addition, in the 19th control example, seven reserved colors are used, but the number of reserved colors is not limited to seven.
Returning to FIG. 545(a), the description is continued. The pending change scenario selection table 222vd is received from the main controller 110 based on the success/failure determination result, the previous pending color, and the value of the second effect counter 223vg when the composite pending change effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine the pending effect information such as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the winning command and the pending change scenario.
Here, with reference to FIG. 547, the contents of pending change scenario selection table 222vd will be described. FIG. 547 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending change scenario selection table 222vd. As shown in FIG. 547, the pending change scenario selection table 222vd contains the result of winning judgment included in the winning command received from main controller 110, the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the previous winning command, and the second effect. Based on the value of the counter 223vg, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received prize command is determined, and whether or not to turn on the pending change effect limiting flag 223sm and the post-holding setting flag 223vn is set. In addition, a pending effect information storage area 223vl stores information for executing an effect in which a pending change scenario is set and the pending color changes at a predetermined timing during the period until the variation of the special pattern based on the pending pattern is started. store in
The post-hold setting flag 223vn is provided in the sound lamp control device 113, and when the hold change scenario of the compound hold change effect is set, the hold color of the hold pattern corresponding to the next received winning command is set. This is a flag for forcibly deciding. Turned on when a specific hold change scenario is determined in the composite hold change effect setting process (see F2517 in FIG. 575) (see F2605 in FIG. 575), and turned off when the hold color of the next received winning command is determined (See F2553 in FIG. 574).

Returning to FIG. 547, the description continues. If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 49" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "white", the received winning command "Purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to , and the reserved effect restricted flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "purple" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 1" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 1, the reserved color of the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved color of the target reserved pattern "purple" is "white". This is a scenario where no color is transplanted and the reserved color of the reserved symbol does not change. In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
In this 19th control example, when the "white" reserved pattern is hidden, the reserved color of the reserved pattern is not changed, but it is not limited to this, and the reserved pattern to be changed is executed alone. It is good also as a structure to carry out.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "50 to 89" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", the received winning command "Purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to , and the reserved effect restricted flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "purple" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 2" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 2, since the reserved color of the reserved design immediately before the reserved color "purple" of the target reserved design is "white", when the target reserved design is hidden by the right change accessory Ym1, In this scenario, the target reserved pattern "purple" to "blue" is transplanted to the previous reserved pattern, the target reserved pattern is changed to "red", and the previous reserved pattern is changed to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
In this manner, the reserved symbols hidden by the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 can be changed to a display mode in which the probability of winning the big win is high, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect. .

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "90 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, "yellow" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 3" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the hold change scenario 3, the hold color of the target hold design "blue" is transplanted with the hold color of the next hold design "yellow", the target hold design is changed to "green", and the next hold design is held. This is a scenario where the color changes from 'yellow' to 'white'. In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "yellow", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 69" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "yellow" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 4" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 4, the pending color “yellow” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “blue”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and the previous pending pattern is changed to “white”. This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the reserved pattern changes from "yellow" to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "70 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the pending effect information storage area 223vl stores "white" as the pending color, "purple" as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 5" as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 5, the pending color “white” of the target pending design is transplanted from “purple” to “red”, which is the pending color of the next pending design, and the target pending design is changed to “red”. This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the reserved pattern changes from "purple" to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "purple", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending performance information storage area 223vl, "yellow" is stored as the pending color, "red" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 6" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 6, the pending color “yellow” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “blue”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and “red”, which is the pending color of the next pending pattern, and the target In this scenario, the reserved pattern is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is changed from "blue" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed from "red" to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is designated as "red", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

In this way, even if a reserved pattern (red reserved pattern) with a high probability of winning a jackpot is displayed, by transplanting to another reserved pattern, a reserved pattern with a higher probability of winning a jackpot ( rainbow reserved pattern), and even if the reserved pattern in the display mode with high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed first, it is not known to which reserved pattern it will be transplanted until the reserved change effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lottery game based on the reserved ball acquired before the reserved pattern of the display mode with high expectation of winning the jackpot from becoming a dead game.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 7" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 7, the pending color “blue” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “yellow”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and the previous pending pattern is changed to “white”. This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the reserved pattern is variable to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending performance information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, "red" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 8" is stored as the pending change scenario. Reservation change scenario 8 transplants the reservation color of the next reserved pattern, ``red'', to the reserved color of the target reserved pattern, ``blue'', changes the target reserved pattern to ``purple'', and holds the next reserved pattern. This is a scenario where the color changes to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "red", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.
As described above, in the 19th control example, the reserved color "red" is a display mode with a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the reserved color "purple", and the display mode of the reserved pattern is a lower display mode. However, in the 19th control example, only when a jackpot is won, it is possible to change to a lower display mode. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 99" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 9" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 9, the pending color "white" of the target pending design is transplanted from the pending color "purple" of the previous pending design to "red", and the pending color of the target pending design is changed to "red". This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is changed to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "100 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 10" is stored as the pending change scenario. The pending change scenario 10 is a scenario in which the pending color "white" of the target pending pattern is changed to "green" alone. In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Green" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "green" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "yellow" is stored as the pending color, "blue" is the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 11" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 11, the pending color “yellow” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “red”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and “blue”, which is the pending color of the next pending pattern, and the target In this scenario, the reserved pattern is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is changed from "red" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed from "blue" to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is designated as "blue", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "white", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, "yellow" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 3" is stored as the pending change scenario. In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "yellow", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "yellow" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 4" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 7" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 129" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.
If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "130 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 9" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second production counter 223vg is "0 to 198" when the result of the judgment is "off" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is other than "white, blue, yellow, purple" , "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 8" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.
Thus, in the 19th control example, the pending pattern acquired after the pending change scenario of the pending change effect is set can be incorporated as part of the pending change effect, and the next pending pattern Since there is also a pattern in which the reserved color of the target reserved pattern is changed by acquiring , the player can be made to think to obtain the reserved pattern by making the player expect the reserved color to be changed.
Returning to FIG. 545(a), the description continues. The shutter closing reach selection table 222ve is a table referred to for setting the effect mode of the "shutter closing reach" executed as one of the special symbol variation effects in the 19th control example. The contents of the shutter closing reach are as described above.
Here, with reference to FIG. 548, the contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve will be described. FIG. 548 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve. This shutter closing reach selection table 222ve determines the effect mode based on the determination result of the special symbol in the variation, the hit type, and the value of the first effect counter 223vf.

If the result of the determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149", "closed reach 1" is determined. As for the closed reach 1, a "2" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "7" symbols are displayed.
On the other hand, when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149", "closed reach 4" is determined. be done. A "3" pattern is set as an initial pattern for the closing reach 4, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "8" symbols are displayed.
In the 19th control example, only when the hit type is the jackpot A, three "7" symbols are displayed together, and when the hit types are the jackpots B and C, symbols other than the "7" pattern are displayed. It is configured to be displayed in a state in which three patterns are aligned. In this 19th control example, since the number of rounds of the jackpot game is larger for the jackpot A than for the jackpots B and C, it is better for the player to have three "7" symbols in the shutter closing reach. , is more advantageous than other symbols are displayed. In this way, in the shutter-closed reach, the player can predict the type of win based on the type of pattern set as the initial pattern, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
If the result of the win/fail determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "150 to 174", "closed reach 2" is determined. As for the closing reach 2, a "3" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "8" symbols are displayed. However, in Closed Reach 2, a "HOLD" capsule is granted upon reaching the third stage. This "HOLD" capsule is used when reaching the 5th stage as described above, and the pattern displayed at the time of reaching the 5th step ("7" pattern in this case) is maintained until reaching the 6th step. Therefore, in the closed reach 2, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are aligned when the final stage is reached.

Further, when the result of the success/failure determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 3" is determined. . As for the closing reach 3, a "3" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "8" symbols are displayed. However, Closed Reach 3 grants a "key" capsule upon reaching the third stage. When this "key" capsule is granted, an effect of completely opening the shutter is executed in the fifth stage. Therefore, the symbols displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage ("7" symbols in this case) are displayed in a state in which three are aligned. Therefore, in the closed reach 3, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are aligned.
In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "150 to 174", "closed reach 5" is determined. be done. Although "2" symbols are set as the initial symbols for the closed reach 5, the symbols remain "5" symbols from the time of reaching the 4th step to the time of reaching the 6th step, and the pattern does not change. Therefore, when reaching the sixth stage, a state in which three "5" symbols are aligned is displayed.
When the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 6" is determined. . In the closed reach 6, a "2" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (6th stage), three "7" symbols will be displayed, but as with closed reach 3, a "key" capsule will be given when reaching the 3rd stage. Then, in the fifth step, an effect of completely opening the shutter is executed. Therefore, the symbols displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage ("6" symbols in this case) are displayed in a state in which three are aligned. Therefore, in closed reach 6, although "2" symbols are set as the initial symbols, three "6" symbols are aligned. It should be noted that the contents of the capsules provided in closed reach 2, 3 and 6 are configured so that the player does not know until reaching the fifth stage.
If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 99", "closed reach 7" is determined. The closed reach 7 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the second stage shifts to the third stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "100 to 159", "closed reach 8" is determined. The closing reach 8 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the third stage shifts to the fourth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when the third stage is reached, an effect of capsule giving failure is executed.
If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "160 to 169", "closed reach 9" is determined. The closing reach 9 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when shifting from the 4th stage to the 5th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends.
If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "170 to 179", "closed reach 10" is determined. The closing reach 10 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the 5th stage is shifted to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends.
If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "180 to 189", "closed reach 11" is determined. The closing reach 11 is set with a "2" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the 5th stage is shifted to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when shifting from the 4th stage to the 5th stage, the "5" pattern is not updated.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "190 to 194", "closed reach 12" is determined. The closing reach 12 is set with a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the fifth stage shifts to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when reaching the 3rd stage, a "HOLD" capsule is given and used in the 5th stage, but since the 6th stage is not reached, the display mode for notifying the winning of the jackpot is not displayed.
If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "195 to 198", "closed reach 13" is determined. The closing reach 13 is set with a "2" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the fifth stage shifts to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when reaching the 3rd stage, a "key" capsule is given, and although it is used in the 5th stage, the effect that the key does not match is executed, and the effect of fully opening the shutter is not executed, so the display notifies that the jackpot has been won. mode is not displayed.
In this way, in the shutter closing reach in the 19th control example, not only does the player not only know whether or not the final stage can be reached, but also the initial pattern type at the start of the shutter closing reach, and the capsule at the third stage. It is possible to suppress early boredom of the player by making the player interested in whether or not the symbol is given or not, and whether the pattern is not updated even if the stage progresses.
Returning to FIG. 545(a), the description continues. The action scenario table 222vf is a table for setting action scenarios of the left change character Ym1 and the right change character Ym2. The action scenario type is set to an action scenario corresponding to the hold change scenario set when the compound hold change effect is executed in the change start time hold effect execution process (see F3109 in FIG. 582), which will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 549, the contents of the action scenario table 222vf will be described. FIG. 549 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the action scenario table 222vf. The operation scenario table 222vf defines an operation pattern for each operation scenario type.
Operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario used when a hold change effect is executed with the second hold hr2 (see FIG. 524(a)) as a change target. As a first action, the left change role Ym1 rises from its initial position to hide the first hold hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from its initial position to hide the fourth hold hr4, thereby forming the second hold hr2. This is the position where only the third hold hr3 is displayed (see FIG. 524(b)). After that, as the second operation, the right change accessory Ym2 is moved leftward to hide the third reservation hr3 (see FIG. 525(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the reserved color of the third reserved hr3 is transplanted to the second reserved hr2 based on the reserved change scenario. After that, as the third action, the left change role item Ym1 and the right change role item Ym2 descend from the second action position and return to the initial position.
Operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario used when a hold change effect is executed with the third hold hr3 (see FIG. 524(a)) as a change target. As a first action, the left change role Ym1 rises from its initial position to hide the first hold hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from its initial position to hide the fourth hold hr4, thereby forming the second hold hr2. This is the position where only the third hold hr3 is displayed (see FIG. 524(b)). After that, as a second operation, the left change accessory Ym1 moves rightward to hide the second hold hr2 (see FIG. 527(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the reserved color of the second reserved hr2 is transplanted to the third reserved hr3 based on the reserved change scenario. After that, as the third action, the left change role item Ym1 and the right change role item Ym2 descend from the second action position and return to the initial position.
Operation scenario 3 is an operation scenario used when a hold change effect is executed with the second hold hr2 (see FIG. 524(a)) as a change target. As the first action, the left change role item Ym1 rises from the initial position and the right change role item Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth hold hr4, the first hold hr1, the second hold hr2 and the third hold. This is the position where hr3 is displayed (not shown). After that, as a second operation, the left change accessory Ym1 moves rightward to hide the first hold hr1, and the right change accessory Ym2 moves leftward to hide the third hold hr3 (not shown). . At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the reserved colors of the first reserved hr1 and the third reserved hr3 are transplanted to the second reserved hr2 based on the reserved change scenario. After that, as the third action, the left change role item Ym1 and the right change role item Ym2 descend from the second action position and return to the initial position.

Thus, in the 19th control example, by moving the left change character Ym1 and the right change character Ym2 in an operation pattern corresponding to the hold change scenario, the third symbol display device 81 and the left change character Ym1 It is configured to be able to execute a pending change effect in conjunction with the right change accessory Ym2. When the pending change performance is executed, the pending pattern that changes depending on the action pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 changes, so that the player can see the action pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2. It is possible to make them interested in
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 539(b). As shown in FIG. 539(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223va, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc, a fluctuation start flag 223vd, a stop Type selection flag 223ve, first effect counter 223vf, second effect counter 223vg, secondary state storage area 223vh, adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi, limit timer 223vj, environment information storage area 223vk, pending effect information storage area 223vl, pending Effect restriction flag 223vm, post-suspension setting flag 223vn, effect SW effective time storage area 223vp, time saving counter 223vq, probability variable counter 223sr, V effect execution flag 223vs, V winning flag 223vt, V notification flag 223vu, during movie flag 223vv, a shaking standby flag 223vw, an adjustment period flag 223vx, an elapsed timer 223vy, and a memory area 223vz. Details of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the nineteenth control example will be described below.
The winning information storage area 223va has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.
The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb counts the reserved ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.
Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203vd after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .
When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb (see F2210 in FIG. 570). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203vd.
The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 vb in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223vb, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 vb of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved balls. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the display area HR4 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sa of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203sa of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.
The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see F2204 in FIG. 570), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See F2907 in FIG. 580). When the fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.
The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (F2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 569), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see F2207 in FIG. 570), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See F2912 in FIG. 580). When the stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.
The first effect counter 223vf is a counter used for notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 569) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.
The second effect counter 223vg is a counter used for setting the color (reserved color) of the reserved symbol in the reserved change effect of the nineteenth control example. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 569) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.
The sub-state storage area 223vh stores a current state area that stores the game state corresponding to the information indicated by the state command transmitted from the main controller 110, and stores the game state that was stored in the current state area immediately before. and a previous state area. The currently set game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the game state stored in the current state area.

The adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is turned on when the sword accessory Ym3 (adjustment accessory) is changed to the environment adjustment position (see F3308 in FIG. 584), and the variable display of the special symbol is started. is turned off (see F2903 in FIG. 580). By setting this adjustment role object movable flag 223vi to ON, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the sword role object Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position. As a result, when the variation of the special symbol is started while the sword object Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, the process of changing the sword object Ym3 to the initial position is executed, which is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the special symbol to be displayed from becoming difficult to see due to the sword character Ym3 in the environment adjustment position.
The limit timer 223vj keeps the sword object Ym3 movable for a certain period of time (10 seconds in this 19th control example) when the sword object Ym3 (adjustment object) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. It is a timer for limiting. A timer value is set when an operation scenario for moving the sword object Ym3 to the initial position is set (see F2906 in FIG. 579 and F3507 in FIG. is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 569) executed by is executed. When the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 seconds or more, the effect mode of operating the sword Ym3 is excluded from the candidates of the effect mode that can be determined when setting the variable effect of the special symbols (Fig. 580). (see F3009 of ).
In this way, when the sword object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, by restricting the movement of the sword object Ym3 for a certain period of time, the load caused by the frequent movement of the sword object Ym3 is reduced. can be reduced.
The environment information storage area 223vk is an area for storing environment information adjusted by the player's operation of the volume adjustment button or the light amount adjustment button. Since the environment information stored in the environment information storage area 223vk is updated in accordance with the details of the player's button operation (see F3311 in FIG. 583), it is possible to provide a game environment that matches the preferences of the player. can be done.

The pending effect information storage area 223vl is an area for storing information about the color of each pending symbol and the pending change scenario in the pending effect. When a winning command is received from the main controller 110, pending effect information corresponding to the winning command is determined and stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl.
As described above, the pending effect information storage area 223vl stores the pending effect information for executing the pending change effect on the pending symbol.
The pending performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new pending change performance for other pending patterns from being set during the period when the pending pattern targeted for the pending change performance is displayed. As described above, in the 19th control example, the reserved change effect of combining the reserved color of the target reserved symbol and the reserved colors of the preceding and subsequent reserved symbols is executed (see FIGS. 524 to 529). In this pending change effect, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are movable in an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined pending change scenario. When a different pending change scenario is set for the pending pattern, the execution timing of the pending change performance overlaps, and there is a risk of giving wrong game information to the player. During the period in which the medium flag 223vm is ON, the pending change effect is not newly executed.
Post-suspension setting flag 223vn is a flag for forcibly determining the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next received winning command when the pending change scenario of the compound pending change effect is set as described above. be. Turned on when a specific hold change scenario is determined in the composite hold change effect setting process (see F2517 in FIG. 575) (see F2605 in FIG. 575), and turned off when the hold color of the next received winning command is determined (See F2553 in FIG. 574).

The effect SW valid time storage area 223vp is a storage area for storing a period during which the effect button 22 is determined to be valid. In the 19th control example, when the effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is stored in the effect SW effective time storage area 223vp ( (See F3106 in FIG. 581).
The time saving counter 223vq is a counter for measuring the period in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of the jackpot game), A predetermined value (“100” or “120” in this 19th control example) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the counter 223vq during time saving is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter 223vq during time saving becomes "0", normal symbols are displayed. It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the counter 223vq during time saving, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol.
The variable probability state counter 223sr is a counter for measuring the period during which the variable probability state continues. (F2308 in FIG. 571: Yes), "120" is set as the counter value (see F673 in FIG. 571). Then, when the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the probability variation counter 223sr is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the probability variation counter 223sr becomes "0", the special symbol It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the variable probability counter 223sr, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the special symbol.
The V effect execution flag 223vs is turned on when a jackpot start command is received from the main controller 110 and the jackpot type information included in the jackpot start command is a jackpot A (see F2706 in FIG. 577), and the V prize is won. It is turned off when a command is received (see F2406 in FIG. 572). When the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON, the V effect is executed in a specific round (second round in the 19th control example) during the jackpot game. The V winning command is a command for notifying that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate) 65v.

The V winning flag 223vt is turned on when a V winning command is received from main controller 110 (see F2404 in FIG. 572), and turned off in the ending process (see F2802 in FIG. 578). This V winning flag 223vt is a flag for determining by the sound lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65V disposed in the variable winning device 65, and execution of the V effect. The display mode of the second half period of the ending effect can be switched depending on whether the game ball passes through (V gate) 65V or not.
V notification flag 223vu is turned on when a display command for notifying V winning is set when a V winning command is received from main controller 110 (see F2408 in FIG. It is turned off when a state command to change the game state to a variable probability state is received (see F2311 in FIG. 571).
The during-movie flag 223vv is turned on when the effect button 22 is operated during the valid period of the effect SW in the movie execution reach (see F3404 in FIG. 585). When this movie flag 223vv is ON at the end of the movie, it indicates that the special symbol variation time has not yet passed. Until elapses, the shaking display mode is set (see F3512 in FIG. 586).
Shaking standby flag 223vw is turned on when the shaking display mode is set (F3513 in FIG. 586) during the period from the end of the movie until the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses in the movie execution reach (F3513 in FIG. 586), and a stop command is received from main controller 110. is received (see F2653 in FIG. 576). When this shaking standby flag 223vw is on, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a stop command from the main control device 110, a display command for showing a display mode indicating a jackpot winning is set (see FIG. 576). F2652).

The adjustment period flag 223vx is turned on when the environment information adjustment screen is displayed (see F3304 in FIG. 583). This adjustment period flag 223vx is a flag for indicating that the player is currently adjusting the volume or the amount of light.
The elapsed timer 223vy is a timer set to display a display mode indicating the end of the environment adjustment when a certain period of time (10 seconds in this 19th control example) has elapsed since the adjustment information adjustment screen started to be displayed. . The timer value of the elapsed timer 223vy is set to a timer value corresponding to when the effect button 22 or the selection button 600 is operated, and is updated by "1" each time the effect update process is executed.
The other memory area 223vz also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method.
Returning to FIG. 539, the description continues. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 519). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).
The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 519) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .
<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the nineteenth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 550 to 567. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

In the 19th control example, as described above, in a state where both the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) are stored, It is configured to preferentially execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Also, while the jackpot game is being executed, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable prize winning device 65, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured so that Furthermore, as an end condition for ending the probability variable state which is a game state advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in addition to the end condition established when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is configured to provide a termination condition that is satisfied when executed.
550 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (F101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).
Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .
Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (F103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, 99, 999) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (F104). After that, the start winning process associated with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (F105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.
After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (F106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passing process is executed (F107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 557 and 558. FIG. After executing the through-gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (F108), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (F109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.
Next, with reference to FIG. 551, the special symbol variation process (F104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 551 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (F104). Special symbol variation processing (see F104 in FIG. 551) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination of special symbols based on each counter value acquired, and in the determined variable display mode by predetermined control, Control the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display, set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and determine the result ( Control is executed to stop and display in a display mode showing the result of the determination of success or failure. The special symbol variation process (see F104 in FIG. 551) will be described below.
In this special symbol variation process (F104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (F201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203vv is on. As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (during the jackpot game) (F201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the process of F201, if it is determined that the special symbols are not being hit (during the jackpot game) (F201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (F202). ), if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (F202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter Acquire the value of 203sd (the number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special design ball number counter 203se (the number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2). (F203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is greater than 0 (F204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is not 0 (F204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is subtracted by 1 (F205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is set (F206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223. Store.
After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of F206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb is shifted (F207). In the process of F207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203sb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift the data and move to the process of F208.
On the other hand, in the process of F204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is 0 (F204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd acquired in the process of F203 It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (F210).
In the processing of F210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is 0 (F210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of F210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (F210: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the counter 203sd (F211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd changed by calculation is set (F212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of F212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa is shifted by the same method as the process of F207 (F213), and the process is changed to the process of F208. to move to. In the process of F208 executed after the process of F207 or F213, the special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (F208), then the special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (F209), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (F208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209) will be described later with reference to FIGS.
In the process of F202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (F202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (F214). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (F214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (F215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of F215, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in correspondence with the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209) is set in this variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and then the process of F215 is executed. It is updated (decremented) each time. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of F214 (F214: Yes), that is, when the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of F215 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 (F216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to E is determined.
In the 19th control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 lights the blue LED, when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit, and when the jackpot C is achieved. , the green LED is lit, and when the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.
After the process of F216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (F217). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (F217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON (F218), and the values of the time reduction counter 203sh and the probability variation counter 203si are cleared (set to 0) (F219) ), and the process proceeds to F220. When the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON by the processing of S220, when the jackpot control processing (see F1004 in FIG. 562) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, to F1101: Yes By branching, an opening command is set (F1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of F217, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (F217: No), the processes of F218 and F219 are skipped, the update process is executed (F221), and then the process proceeds to F220.
The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during an external output process (F1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent to. When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the process of S220, a special figure confirmation command is set (F220), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 552, the special symbol jackpot determination process (F208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (F104 in FIG. 551), will be described. FIG. 552 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (F208).
In the special symbol jackpot determination process (F208 in FIG. 552), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (F301). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202va (see FIG. 542), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of F301 matches the big winning determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (F302).

When the process of F302 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (F303), and if it is determined as a big win (F303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a big win. (F304), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2, set the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (F305), and finish this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of F303 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (F303: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (F306), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 553, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (F104 in FIG. 551), will be described. FIG. 553 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209).
In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209 in FIG. 553), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (F208 in FIG. 552), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not it is set (F401).
In the process of F401, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (F401: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202vb (see FIG. 543) and the acquired first hit type counter The jackpot type is determined based on the value of C2 (F402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (F403), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203sg (F404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of F403 and the variation pattern selection table 202vc read out in the process of F404 (F405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of F405 Then, set the special figure variation pattern command (F406). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (F1801 in FIG. 561 ) to the audio lamp controller 113 .
Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (F407), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (F408), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (F409), and the process is terminated. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of F407 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see F1801 in FIG. 561) of the main process (FIG. 561) of the main controller 110.
On the other hand, in the process of F401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out (F401: No), the process of F402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F403.
Next, with reference to FIG. 554, the contents of the update process (F221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see F104 in FIG. 551) will be described. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of update processing (F221). In this update process (F221), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (at the time of fluctuation stop), it is a process that is executed, and the remaining period of the period in which the probability fluctuation state is continuously set is updated, Processing for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

When the update process (F221) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203si is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current is a high probability state of special symbols (F501), and the value of the probability variation counter 203si is 0 If it is determined to be greater than (F501: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203si is subtracted (updated) by 1 (F502), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203si after updating is 0 (F503 ), when it is determined to be 0 (F503: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203sg (F504), and the process proceeds to F505. In addition, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203si is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of F501 (F501: No), the current is not in the high probability state of the special symbol, so the value of the probability variation counter 203si The above-described processing of F502 to F504 for updating is skipped, and the processing shifts to F505.
Also, in the process of F503, the value of the probability variation counter 203si is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203si is greater than 0, even if the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (F503: No) , the process of F504 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F505.
In the process of F505, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203sh is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, if the current is a high probability state of normal symbols (F505: Yes), time saving 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203sh (F506), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203sh after the subtraction is 0 (F507). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203sh is 0 in the processing of F507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203sg (F508), the value of the probability variation counter 203si, the value of the time saving counter 203sh, the current game state is set (F509), and the process ends. Also, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203sh is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of F505 (F505: No), or the value of the time saving counter 203sh is not 0 in the process of F507 In the case (F507: No), the process proceeds directly to F509.
Next, with reference to FIG. 555, the start winning process (F105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 550) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 555 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (F105). In the starting winning process (F105 in FIG. 555), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Up to the maximum number of reserved balls (up to 4 in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb. This is the process of storing each.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa. Or based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, a process (so-called look-ahead process) is executed to predict the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. . The start winning process (F105 in FIG. 555) will be described below.
In the starting winning process (F105 in FIG. 555), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64 which is the first starting opening (F601). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (F601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is acquired (F602), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (F603).
In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (F603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is added by 1 (F604), and the voice lamp control device 113 A reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first ball entrance 64 (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) is set (F605).
Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 (F606), and the process proceeds to F607.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of F601 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (F601: No), or in the processing of F603, the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (F603: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to F607.
Next, each process from F607 to F612 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entrance 64) executed in each process from F601 to F606. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
After executing each process from F601 to F612, the prefetch process is executed (F613), and this process ends.
This look-ahead processing (F613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 556, but it is determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. A process for determining the result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like is executed. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination of validity, the determined variation pattern, the type of stop, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but this is not the only option. For example, when there is a new start winning prize, the validity of all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb It may be configured to execute processing for determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like.

Further, in the 19th control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, that is, the special symbol lottery right is renewed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the normal symbol lottery Depending on the results, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.
As described above, in the 19th control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is added, the added prize Although it is configured to execute the look-ahead process (F613) based on the information (winning information) related to this, for example, in the process of F603, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd (N1 ) is the upper limit number (4) (F603: No), that is, when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 while the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that the prefetching process (F613) can be executed immediately. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.
Next, with reference to FIG. 556, the look-ahead process (F613), which is one process of the starting winning process (F105 in FIG. 556), will be described. FIG. 556 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (F613).
In the look-ahead process (F613 in FIG. 556), first, a first hit random number, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 is read (F701). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (F702).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of the determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbols are in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbols are in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb), and the new this time. Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the probability state of special symbols.
Next, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result is a jackpot (F703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (F703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (F704), After that, this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of F703 is not a big hit (F703: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the lost winning and the variation pattern is issued. Set (F705), and then terminate this process.
Here, the prize winning command set in the process of F704 or F705 includes the above-described information for indicating the result of winning/failure determination (information that has a different meaning based on the result of winning/failure determination), and common information of F701. The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (F1801) executed in the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 561).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.
In addition, in the 19th control example, since there is only one probability state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols), it is possible to set information (results of winning/failure determination) to be set in the winning command regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the result of judgment in the case of a high probability state of special symbols, and the special symbol It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of a low probability state and set a winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state, in a low probability state. A determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a big win even if there is a big win is defined, and only when the determination value is read out, a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set. .
By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.
Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203sb is accurately determined. , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in the 19th control example, when new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, the winning information , and uses a configuration that predicts the success or failure determination in advance in the prefetching process, but is not limited to this, in the prefetching process of the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball storage Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (memorized) in the area 203sa or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203sb is set as a winning command, and the voice lamp control device 113 side It is also possible to predict the win/loss determination result based on the information included in the winning command received in .
With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.
Next, with reference to FIG. 557, the normal symbol variation process (F106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 557 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (F106). The normal symbol variation process (F106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery). (Processing for executing normal design variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal design variation to be performed, processing for updating normal design variation during execution, processing for stopping normal design variation, result of normal design lottery Processing to determine the game content of the normal figure per game executed when is a hit) is executed.
In this normal symbol variation process (F106 in FIG. 557), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (F801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (F801: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (F801: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (F802). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, the current state is that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (F802: No), then the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203vf A value (M) is acquired (F803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (F804).
When it is determined in the process of F804 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is 0 (F804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is greater than 0 (F804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is subtracted by 1 (F805). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of F804 (that the winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied, the retained memory is stored. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is subtracted by 1.
Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted (F806). In the process of F806, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203vc are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (F807).
Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203sh is on, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of the normal pattern (time saving medium) (F808), and the time saving counter 203sh is set to on. If it is determined (F808: Yes), the winning judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hitting judgment value of the second winning random number table 202sc for high probability (see FIG. 543 (b)) (F809) , F811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203sh is off (F808: No), the second per random number table 202sc for low probability (see FIG. 543 (b)) based on the per determination value, the success or failure determination result is obtained (F810), and the process proceeds to F811.

In the process of F811, it is determined whether this normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (F811), and if it is determined to be a hit (F811: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit. The display mode is set (F812), and the process proceeds to F814. On the other hand, in the processing of F811, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (no) (F811: No), set the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of loss (F813), and the process proceeds to F814.
In the processing of F814, the current game state is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) or not is determined by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203sh (F814), during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) If it is determined that there is (F814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (F815), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of F814 that the time is not shortened (high probability state of normal symbols) (F814: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (F816), and this process is terminated.
In addition, in this 19th control example, as described above, depending on the set probability state of normal symbols, the normal symbol fluctuation time is varied. Regardless, the variable time may be set to 3 seconds at all times. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set, a short fluctuation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.
In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the game state, or the fluctuation time can be changed according to the number of normal pattern pending balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this manner, by varying the degree of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 according to the length of the set normal symbol variation time, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is changed. Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.
On the other hand, in the processing of F802, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner (F802: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (F817), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (F817: No), this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of F817 (F817: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (F818). In the process of F818, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. In other words, setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the process of F812 or F813 described above.
When the stop display is set by the process of F818, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of F812 or the process of F813. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (F819). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (no) (F819: No), this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal pattern is a hit (F819: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203sh is checked to see if the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state). Refer to and discriminate (F820), and when it is determined that it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (F820: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is 1 as the game content of the game per normal symbol The game content (release operation) of 2 times per second is set (F823), and the process proceeds to F822.
On the other hand, in the process of F820, if it is determined that it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (F820: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds × 1 as the game content of the game per normal symbol. The contents of the game to be played (release action) are set (F821), and the process proceeds to F822.
In the process of F822, based on the scenario set in the process of F821 or F823, the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set (F822), and this process ends.
Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in the nineteenth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example, the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of processing F808 to F811) Based on, the normal design is determined at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of F817). The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in this 19th control example, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation regarding special symbols. Based on the result of the processing (lottery processing), the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is configured to vary. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.
In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the open pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set ) was a problem.
Therefore, in the 19th control example, the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.
In addition, in the 19th control example, the normal design success/failure determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the success/failure determination of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol is released. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the control mode (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, determination of whether the normal symbol The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of performing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set even at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Only when it is set, the electric accessory 640a may be opened for a long time, or the electric accessory 640a may be opened based on the game state set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to set a pattern.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal design lottery results, normal design fluctuation fluctuation time, normal design per scenario, etc.) determined in normal design fluctuation processing (see F106 in FIG. 557) , commands indicating the contents of various information are set, and output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see F1801 in FIG. 561) of the main process (see FIG. 561) of the main controller 110.
Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (F107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 558 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see F660). This through gate passage processing (F107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 550) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area. Also, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual right or wrong determination is executed (normal symbol fluctuation process (see F106 in FIG. 557) right or wrong determination (see F811) is executed This is a process for obtaining the lottery results (whether or not winning judgment results) in advance.
In the through gate passing process (F107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (F901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (F901: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is acquired (F902), and then , It is determined whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is larger than 4 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (F903).
In the processing of F903, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (F903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203vf is not greater than 4 (F903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203vf (F904 ), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 559, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 559 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (F1601), and terminates the NMI interruption processing. do.
The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.
Next, with reference to FIG. 560, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 560 is a flow chart showing this startup process.
This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 560), first, the initial setting process is executed upon power-on (F1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 519) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705), and if not stored (F1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.
If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (F1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.
In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during startup processing, the RAM 203 initialization processing (F1713, F1714) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (F1713, F1714) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to F1710.
On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( F1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (F1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (F1709), and the process proceeds to F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .
Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (F1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (F1711), and the process shifts to the main process which will be described later.
Next, with reference to FIG. 561, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 561 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 561), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 550), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (F1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch read processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 550) is determined. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 551) and the start winning process (see FIG. 555). Furthermore, by this external output processing (F1801 in FIG. 561), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are sent to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 562) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.
Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (F1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this 19th control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.
When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (F1803), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 are executed (F1804).
Details of the jackpot control process (F1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (F1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (F1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of F822 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 557), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the processing of F821 and the processing of F823 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.
Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (F1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209 in FIG. 553), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. do. In this 19th control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red If the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is lit. LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.
Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.
Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (F209 in FIG. 553) has ended, it is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. 553), and the stop symbols are stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in F407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see F209 in FIG. 553). .

Furthermore, in the 19th control example, when one of the special symbols is stop-displayed in a display mode (jackpot symbol) indicating a big win, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (loss symbol) indicating a loss. and the stop display for that purpose is also executed.
Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (F1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of F815 and the process of F816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 557), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (F1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of F818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 557), it is executed in the second symbol display device. 557) in the display mode set by the processing of F812 or F813 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 557), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device ( display).
After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1809). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (F1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (F1810: Yes), the process moves to F1801, and the above-described processes after F1801 are repeatedly executed.
On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (F1810: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (F1811, F1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of F1811 (F1812). In addition, in the process of this F1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is also updated like the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.
Here, since the execution time of each process of F1801 to F1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.
In the process of F1809, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (F1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 49 has been executed, so the power-off processing after F1813 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process (F1813), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off (F1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (F1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (F1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .
It should be noted that the process of F1809 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state changes performed in F1801 to F1808, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of F1811 and F1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of F1801. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of F1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the initialization process (FIG. 560, F1701) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of F1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (F1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 562 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (F1804). This jackpot control process (F1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 561), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.
In the jackpot control process (FIG. 562, F1804), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (F1101). Specifically, the process of F218 or F220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 551) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of F1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (F1101: Yes), the opening command is set (F1102), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203vv is set to ON. (F1103) to terminate this process.
On the other hand, in the process of F1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (F1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (F1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of F1103, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (F1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of F1104, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (F1104: Yes), the process of F1105 is executed. In the process of F1105, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (F1105). In the process of F1105, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (F1105: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (F1106).

Here, with reference to FIG. 563, the jackpot operation setting process will be described (F1106). FIG. 563 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (F1106). In the jackpot action setting process (FIG. 563, F1106), first, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (F1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in F1201 (F1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of F1201. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the process of F1202, the operation of the channel solenoid 65k and the operation of the open/close door 65f1 are set for each round.
In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.
Returning to FIG. 562, the description continues. In the processing of F1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (F1105: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k (F1107). When it is determined that it is time to operate (F1107: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is turned on (F1108). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is turned on (F1109). After that, this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of F1106, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (F1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (F1110). The start timing of the ending production is the time when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after the final round corresponding to the jackpot type determined in F402 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 553) is completed and the ball is thrown. When the waiting time (three seconds in this embodiment) has passed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (F1110: Yes), an ending command is set (F1111), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of F1110, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (F1110: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (F1112). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of F1112, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (F1112: Yes), a big win end process for setting the gaming state after the big win is completed is executed (F1113), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of F1112, when it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (F1112: No), the notification process is executed (F1114). Details of the notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the notification process (FIG. 565, F1114) is executed, the winning process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning hole 65a is executed (F1115), and the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a Abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the sheet has been discharged normally (F1116), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 566 and 567. FIG.
Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (F1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 563 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (F1106). This jackpot operation setting process (F1106) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.
When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 563) is started, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (F1201), the opening operation of the probability variable solenoid is set (F1202), and the variable winning device 65 is increased. The opening operation of the opening 65c is set (F1203), and this processing ends. Although not shown, in the process of F1201, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.
Here, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the contents of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (second round) is different depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), the ball is made to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) as the second round game. It is configured so that a round game that operates the switching valve 65y is executed so as to make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only for a specific period of the jackpot game that is executed for a long period of time, so that the player loses concentration. A game can be executed during a big winning game without any trouble.
In addition, in the 19th control example, when the second round of the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot A is won, the player is directed to the specific area (V gate) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. 65V), as a guide notification mode for indicating that it is a chance period to make the ball flow down to 65V), a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed is configured to be executable. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) in the long-running jackpot game. Furthermore, based on the detecting means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 detects that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). It is configured so that the characters "VGET" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for guidance. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.
It should be noted that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of the conditions. For example, "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. It is preferable to change the character color of , change the size of the display area, or change to characters with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, in the 19th control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V function for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the ball is specified by varying the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y. Although it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to flow down to the gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down, it is not limited to this. By varying the timing at which 65a is opened according to the type of big win, it may be possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period during which it is difficult. As a result, since the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be shared, even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is grasped, the big winning game this time easily makes the ball pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it is a game. Further, since the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y can be standardized, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V function (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.
By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 563), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) in the second round. Can be set. As a result, in the jackpots A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) just by shooting the ball in the second round, so after the jackpot game ends, the variable state ( High probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be set.
Next, details of the jackpot ending process (F1113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 564 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (F1113). This jackpot end process (F1113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see F1804 in FIG. 562), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.
In this jackpot end processing (F1113), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203sm is ON (F1301). In the process of F1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203sm is on (F1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the big hit, so the variable probability counter 203vu Set the value to 120 (F1302), set the value of the time saving counter 203vt to 120 (F1303), set the variable probability flag 203vg to ON (F1304), and proceed to the process of F1305. On the other hand, in the process of F1301, if the variable probability setting flag 203sm is off (F1301: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203vt is set to 100, and the process proceeds to S2105.

In the process of S2105, the state command is set based on the value of the counter 203vt during time saving and the value of the counter 203vu during probability variation (F1305). The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output process (F1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the sub-state setting area 223sh according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the flag 203vv during the big hit and the variable probability setting flag 203vh are set to OFF (F1306), and the process is terminated.
By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 564), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game. can.
In the notification process (F1114), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1221: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the second round (F1222). The end timing of the second round is determined by detecting that 10 winning balls have been won in the second round or by determining that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is time to end the second round (F1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203vm. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of F1222, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second round (F1222: No), this processing ends. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in F1223, the notification counter 203vm becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball-scoring time after the end of the 2nd round, and the voice prompting to look at the liquid crystal is heard. output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the second round, but since the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the second round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 can be identified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game.
In this 19th control example, by providing the notification counter 203vm, an effect is performed to draw attention to the liquid crystal over the second round from one second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

On the other hand, in the process of F1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203vm is updated by -1 (F1224). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203vm after updating is 0 (F1225). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1225: Yes), a notification command is set (F1226). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the audio output of "look at the liquid crystal".
Next, the details of the winning process (F1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 566 is a flow chart showing this winning process (F1115). This winning process (F1115) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 562), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning hole 65a.
In the winning process (FIG. 566, F1115), first, it is determined whether or not the round valid period is reached (F1231). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (F1231: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (F1231: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (F1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203vj is updated by adding 1 (F1233). After that, the process of F1234 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 is not passed (F1232: No), the process of F1234 is executed.
In the processing of F1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (F1236). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to ON (F1237). After that, the process of F1238 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203vn to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 203n is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (F1235). When it is determined that the round time has passed (F1235: Yes), the process of F1236 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (F1235: No), the process of F1238 is executed.
In the process of F1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203vk is decremented by 1 and updated (F1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (F1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability passage switch 65e3 (F1240: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203vi is updated by adding 1 (F1241). The variable probability setting flag 203vh is set to ON (F1242), the V winning command is set (F1243), and then the process of F1244 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of F1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (F1240: No), the process of F1244 is executed. In the process of F1244, it is determined whether the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1244). When it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (F1245). The variable probability valid flag 203vp is set to ON (F1246). After that, this process ends. Here, when the probability variable effective flag 203vp is set to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, when the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variable switch 65e3, the probability variable game can be controlled to be set.
On the other hand, in the process of F1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1238: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203vp is ON (F1247). If the variable probability effective flag 203vp is off (F1247: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability valid flag 203vp is ON (F1247: Yes), the variable probability valid timer 203vr is updated by adding 1 (F1248). It is determined whether the value of the variable probability valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (F1249). When it is determined that the variable probability valid timer 203vr is at the upper limit (F1249: Yes), the variable probability valid flag 203vp is set to OFF (F1250). The variable probability effective timer 203vr is reset to 0, which is the initial value (F1251). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of F1249, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203vr is not the upper limit value (F1249: No), the process of F1240 is executed.
As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203vr is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball blowing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

Next, the abnormality processing (F1116) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 567 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (F1116). In the abnormality process (F1116), a process of monitoring whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.
In the abnormality processing (FIG. 567, F1116), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (F1261). If it is outside the round valid period (F1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round valid period (F1261: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (F1263). After that, the process of F1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: No), the process of F1264 is executed.
In the process of F1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (F1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is off (F1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is ON (F1264: Yes), it is during the ball-draining time period, so the remaining ball timer 203vo is updated by adding 1 (F1265). The remaining ball timer 203vo determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this 19th control example) has elapsed (F1266). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (F1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (F1266: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variable passage counter 203vi and the discharge number counter 203vs) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203vj) match. (F1267).
If it is determined that they match (F1267: Yes), the process of F1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (F1267: No), an error command is set (F1268). After that, the process of F1269 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegality such that the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65 and the game ball is passed through the probability variable switch 65e3 even if it is a big hit C.例文帳に追加

In the process of F1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to OFF (F1269), and the remaining ball timer 203vo is reset to 0 which is the initial value (F1270). After that, the winning number counter 203vj, the discharge number counter 203vs, and the variable probability passage counter 203vi are reset to their initial values (F1271), and then this process ends.
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the nineteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 568 to 586, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.
First, with reference to FIG. 568, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 568 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.
When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process is executed upon power-on (F2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of F2117 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (F2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 569, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see F2114 in FIG. 569), it executes power-off processing in F2117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of F2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (F2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power of F2117 was turned off. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2003).
Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of F2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed (F2003: Yes), the process proceeds to F2004 to start initialization of the RAM 223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (F2003: No), the process proceeds to F2008.
It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to F2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing of F2117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (F2003: No), and the process proceeds to F2008.
If the power-off processing flag is on (F2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of F2117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (F2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .
If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (F2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (F2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (F2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (F2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be
In the process of F2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (F2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing of F2117 is executed (see F2116 in FIG. 569). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of F2117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off processing in F2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (F2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (F2009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (F2010), an interrupt Permission is set (F2011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .
On the other hand, the reason why the process of F2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that, for example, the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, and the process of F2008 is performed via the processes from F2004 to F2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (F2008: No), skip F2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, and shift the processing to F2010, set the initial value of the RAM 223 (F2010), and set interrupt permission (F2011), and shift to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of F2009 is skipped is that when the process of F2008 is reached from F2004 via the process of F2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of F2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.
Next, referring to FIG. 569, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 569 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of F2101 was executed (F2101), and 1 msec or more has passed. If not (F2101: No), the process proceeds to F2112 without performing the processes of F2102 to F2111. In the process of F2101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed because F2102 to F2111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , F2112 and the variable display setting process of F2113 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of F2112 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of F2113 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.
If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of F2101 (F2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of F2103 to F2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (F2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of F2108 described later (F2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (F2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to F2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.
In the process of F2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (F2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (F2107). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22A operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22A is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22A by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22A is set in the display control device 114. FIG. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (F2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (F2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.
After the process of F2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (F2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of F2008 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of F2009 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.
After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the effect update process is executed (F2111). In effect update processing, processing for updating the values of various counters and various timers in RAM 223 of sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Details of the rendering update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After effect update processing, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (F2112). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, the processing moves to F2113. In the process of F2113, a variable display setting process is executed (F2113). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (F2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of F2114 (F2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (F2116), and the power-off processing is executed (F2117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (F2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.
On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of F2114 (F2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (F2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (F2115: No), the process returns to F2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (F2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 570 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (F2112). This command determination process (F2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 569) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .
In the command determination process (FIG. 570, F2112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (F2201). If a status command has been received (F2201: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (F2202), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main processing. This state command reception process (F2202) is a process for setting a display mode corresponding to the changed game state in the third display control device 81 when the game state is changed in the main controller 110. FIG. Details of the status command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.
If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. A command is set so as to be transmitted to the device 114 .
On the other hand, if no state command has been received (F2203: No), then it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from main controller 110 (F2203). Then, when the variation pattern command is received (F2203: Yes), the variation start flag 223vd is set to ON (F2204), the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (F2205), and other commands The corresponding process is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (F2203: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (F2206). When the stop type command is received (F2206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve of the RAM 223 is set to ON (F2207), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (F2208), and other command is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 579) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.
On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (F2206: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (F2209). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (F2209: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main control device 110 (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1), or the special symbol 2 reservation of the main control device 110 Extract the value of the number of balls counter 203ve (the number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) and store it in the special symbol 1 suspension number of balls counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 suspension number of balls counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113. (F2210). In addition, in the process of F2210, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc is set. After the process of F2210 ends, the process corresponding to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process.
Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or when a lottery of special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is selected, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of F2210. The values of the number counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning prize or the special symbol lottery. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of F2210 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
In the process of F2209, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (F2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (F2211). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (F2211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (F2212), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This winning command processing is a winning command (winning information command) set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, and a normal symbol lottery lottery right set when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process that is executed when receiving a winning information command or a V winning command that is set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (variable probability switch) during a jackpot game. The details of the winning command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in the process of F2211, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (F2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (F2213). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (F2213: Yes), the stop command process is executed, the process corresponding to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. In this stop command process, when a stop command is received from the main control device 110, that is, various processes are executed at the special symbol stop timing. Details of the stop command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of F2213, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (F2213: No), it is determined whether a jackpot related command has been received (F2215). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (F2215: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (F2216), a process according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This jackpot-related processing is to perform processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the device 110 is executed. Details of the jackpot-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, the status command reception process (F2202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 571 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (F2202). This state command reception process (F2202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 570) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the status command reception process (F2202) will be described below.
When the status command reception process (F2202) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set game status is to be changed (F2301). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state storage area 223vh is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the processing of F2301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (F2301: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (F2301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (F2302).

In the processing of F2302, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: Yes), the display command indicating the normal mode is issued. Set (F2303) and move to the process of F2304.
In the processing of F2302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: No), then the game state after the change is It is determined whether it is a time saving state (F2305), and if it is determined that the gaming state is a time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state) (F2305: Yes), the time saving medium counter 223vq A value of 100 is set (F2306), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (F2307), and the process proceeds to F2304.
In the processing of F2305, if it is determined that the gaming state does not have a time saving state (F2305: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is a variable probability state (F2308), and the gaming state is a variable probability state (F2308: Yes) If it is determined that (the state command received this time is a command indicating a variable probability state), the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is set to 120 (F2309), and whether the V notification flag 223vu is on It is determined whether or not (F2310). When the V notification flag 223vu is off (F2310: No), the process proceeds to F2306 described above. If the V notification flag 223vu is ON (F2310: Yes), the V notification flag 223vu is set to OFF (F2311), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (F2312), and the process proceeds to F2304. .
In the process of F2304, the game state set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223sh is set in the past state area (F2304), and the information indicated by the received state command is set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223sh. The corresponding game state is set (F2304), and this process is terminated.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of F2303, F2307 and F2312, the variable effect display corresponding to the game state is executed. As described above, in the 19th control example, various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 are controlled by the sound lamp control device 113. A type (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114 .
By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, it outputs to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.
In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.
With this configuration, if proper display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating proper information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.

In addition, in the 19th control example, the configuration described above is used, but it is not limited to this, and the present game state and the received variation pattern command display variation pattern command on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to set
Next, with reference to FIG. 572, the contents of the winning command process (see F2212) executed in the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 570) will be described. FIG. 572 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (F2212). This winning command process (F2212) is set when the winning command (winning information command) is set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, or when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process that is executed when receiving a winning information command for a normal figure or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during a jackpot game.
When the winning command process (F2212) is executed, first, the information of the winning command (winning information command) received this time is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (F2401). ), the special figure winning information command processing is executed (F2402). The details of the special figure winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the special figure winning information command processing is over, then the command received this time is V winning command (winning processing (see F1115 in Figure 566). It is determined whether it is a command (see F1243)) (F2403). When the received command is the V winning command (F2403: Yes), the V winning flag 223vt is set to ON (F2406), and it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2405). When the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2407: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223vs is set to OFF (F2406), and a display command for informing of V winning is set (F2407). Then, the V notification flag 223vu is set to ON (F2408), other processes are executed (F2409), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F2403, if the received command is not the V winning command (F2403: No), the process of F2405 to F2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.
Also, in the process of F2405, if the V effect execution flag 223vs is not ON (F2405: No), the process of F2406 to F2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.
In the process of F2409, other processes are executed (S4413), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 573, the contents of the special figure winning information command process (F2402) executed in the winning command process (F2212 in FIG. 572) will be described. FIG. 573 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure winning information command process (F2402).

When the special figure winning information command process (F2402) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a special figure winning command (F2501). If the received command is a special figure winning command (F2501: Yes), the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223sh (F2502), and the normal game state (special It is determined whether or not the information indicates the low probability state of the symbol or the low probability state of the normal symbol (F2503). When the game is in the normal game state (F2503: Yes), a pending effect setting process is executed (F2504), and the process proceeds to F2505. This pending effect setting process is a process for setting the effect contents of the above-described pending change effect. Details of the pending effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the game is not in the normal game state (F2503: No), the process of F2504 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2505.
In addition, in the 19th control example, when the normal game state is set as the game state, it is configured to be able to execute the pending change effect, but it is not limited to this, and the pending effect is not limited to the probability variable state and the time saving state. can be implemented.
In the processing of F2505, the display command based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command is set (F2505), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 574, the contents of the pending effect setting process (F2504) executed in the special figure winning command process (F2402 in FIG. 573) will be described. FIG. 574 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending effect setting process (F2504).

When the pending effect setting process (F2504) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the post-holding setting flag 223vn is ON (F2551). As described above, the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is set to ON when the suspension change scenario of the compound suspension change effect is set and the color of the suspension pattern of the suspension ball acquired next to the suspension ball to be changed is specified. be done. Therefore, when the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is ON (F2551: Yes), the color of the corresponding pending design is determined based on the pending effect information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl (F2552). , the post-reservation flag 223sn is set to OFF (F2553), a display command for indicating the display mode (color) of the determined reserved pattern is set, and the process proceeds to F2555.
On the other hand, in the processing of F2551, when the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is not ON (F2551: No), it is determined whether the suspension effect restriction flag 223vm is ON (F2556). If the pending effect restricted flag 223vm is ON (F2556: Yes), since it is a period in which the setting of a new pending change effect is restricted, the process related to the setting of the pending change effect is skipped. , F2555.
In the process of F2556, if the pending effect restriction flag 223vm is not ON (F2556: No), the pending change effect lottery table 222vb (see FIG. 546(a)) is referred to determine whether or not to execute the pending change effect. (F2557). Then, in the process of F2557, it is determined whether execution of the single pending change effect is determined (F2558), and if execution of the single pending change effect is determined (F2558: Yes), the pending color selection table 222vc (Fig. 546(b)), the color of the pending symbol corresponding to the current winning command is determined (F2559), and the determined pending effect information is stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl (F2560). After that, the pending effect restriction flag 223vm is set corresponding to the determined content (F2561), and the process proceeds to F2554.
On the other hand, in the process of F2558, when it is determined that the single suspension change effect is not executed (F2558: No), it is determined whether the execution of the compound suspension change effect is determined in the process of F2557 (F2562). When the execution of the composite pending change effect is determined (F2562: Yes), the composite pending change effect setting process is executed (F2563), and the process proceeds to the process of F2554.

Here, with reference to FIG. 575, the composite pending change effect setting process will be described. FIG. 575 is a flow chart showing the contents of the composite pending change effect setting process.
When the composite hold change effect setting process (F2517) is executed, first, the hold change scenario is determined by referring to the hold change scenario selection table 222vd (see FIG. 547) (F2601), and the content determined in the process of F2601 is determined. The color of the corresponding reserved symbol is determined (F2602). Then, the pending effect information indicating the content determined in the process of F2601 is stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl (F2603). Thereafter, the pending effect restriction flag 223vm is set corresponding to the content determined in the processing of F2601 (F2604), and the post-holding setting flag 223vn is set corresponding to the content determined in the processing of F2601 (F2605). , returns to the pending effect setting process (see FIG. 574).
Returning to FIG. 574, the description continues. In the process of F2562, when it is determined that the composite pending change effect is not executed (F2562: No), the process proceeds to F2555.
In the process of F2555, the display command based on the information contained in the special figure winning information command received this time is set (F2555), and after the end of the process of F2555, the process returns to the special figure winning information command process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 576, the contents of the stop command process (F2214) executed in the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 570) will be described. FIG. 576 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop command process (F2214). When a stop command is received from the main controller 110, that is, various processes are executed at the timing of stopping the special symbols.
When the stop command process (F2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the shaking standby flag 223vw is ON (F2651). When the shaking standby flag 223vw is ON (F2652: Yes), a display command for indicating the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot (in the 19th control example, display of "blessing") is set (F2652). , the shaking standby flag 223vw is set to OFF (F2653), and the process proceeds to F2654. On the other hand, in the process of F2651, if the shaking standby flag 223vw is not ON (F2651: No), the processes of F2652 and F2653 are skipped and the process of F2654 is executed.
In the process of F2654, the pending effect information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is read (F2654), and it is determined whether there is a pending change scenario in which the pending pattern corresponding to the special symbol being executed is changed ( F2655), if there is a pending change scenario in which the pending symbol corresponding to the special symbol being executed is changed (F2655: Yes), set the pending effect restriction flag 223vm to OFF (F2656), The stop display of the symbol is determined (F2657), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of F2655, if there is no pending change scenario that changes the pending symbols corresponding to the special symbols that are being changed (F2655: No), the processing of F2656 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of F2657. .
Next, with reference to FIG. 578, the contents of the jackpot related process (F2216) will be described. FIG. 578 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (F2216). In the jackpot-related process (F2216), a process is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

In the jackpot related process (F2216), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (F2701). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (F2701: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (F2702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 569). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .
Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot C (3R time-saving jackpot) (F2703), and if it is determined to be jackpot C (F2703: Yes), the ending display mode indicating entering the chance mode is set. (F2704), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot C (F2703: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a jackpot A (10R probability variable jackpot) (F2505), and if it is not a jackpot A (F2705: No ), that is, in the case of a jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), the process proceeds to F2704.
Here, the chance mode in the 19th control example is configured as a mode in which the player cannot identify whether the set gaming state is the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Even if the display mode set after the end of the jackpot game is not a super chance mode (a display mode set only when the variable probability game state is set), the player expects that the variable probability state is set. It is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to play.
However, during the jackpot game that is executed when the probability variable jackpot is won, the V effect (the effect for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the specific area (V gate) 65v) is executed. Since the players can recognize that they have won the variable probability big win, there is a possibility that the chance mode set after the end of the big win game in which the V performance is not executed is not the variable probability game state.

Therefore, in the 19th control example, when the jackpot B, which is a variable probability jackpot, is won, the V effect is not executed during execution of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current chance mode is the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state, and by making the player expect that the variable probability state is set, the player's desire to play is reduced. can be suppressed.
On the other hand, in the process of F2705, when it is determined that the jackpot A is (F2705: Yes), set the V effect execution flag 223 vs ON (F2706), enter the super chance mode (probability variable state is set) is set (F2707), and the process ends.
Thus, in this 19th control example, as described above with reference to FIG. The ending display mode corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the game is started. By configuring in this way, various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information for indicating the number of won prize balls and control during execution) Control for displaying information for indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed. Since there is no need to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, in the 19th control example, the process of setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, but not limited to this, the special symbol that the jackpot game is confirmed to be executed. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation, or the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period when the control processing is small in the jackpot game period. You can
On the other hand, in the process of F2701, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (F2701: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (F2708), and the round number command has been received (F2708: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (F2710), and it is determined whether the current number of rounds is 2 rounds (V rounds) (F2710). When it is determined that it is the second round (V round) (F2710: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2711). When it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2711: Yes), a display command for guiding the V prize is set (F2712), and this processing ends. In addition, when it is determined in the process of F2710 that the current round number is not 2 rounds (V round), that is, when it is determined that a round game other than the second round is started (F2710: No), in the process of F2711, V Also when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223vs is off (F2711: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of F2708 that the round number command has not been received (F2708: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (F2713), and if it is determined that it has been received (F2713: Yes ), the ending process is executed (F2714), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of F2713 that the ending command has not been received (F2713: No), this processing ends.
Next, the ending process (F2714) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 579 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (F2714). This ending process (F2714) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command is received in the above-described jackpot-related process (see F2216 in FIG. 577), and an ending display mode executed during the ending period. is to execute a process for finally determining the
When the ending process (F2714) is executed, it is first determined whether the V winning flag 223vt is set to ON (F2801), and if it is determined to be ON (F2801: Yes), the V winning The flag 223vt is set to OFF (F2802), execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (F2805), and this processing ends. Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223vt is not set to ON in the process of F2801 (F2801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2803), and the V effect execution flag 223vs is determined. is off (F2803: No), the process proceeds directly to F2804.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2803 that the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2803: Yes), a display switching command is set for switching the display mode of the second half period (7 seconds) of the ending period. (F2804), and the process moves to F2805.

When the display switching command is set in the process of F2804, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set in advance corresponding to the setting of the super chance mode is changed to the chance mode. A process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the setting of the mode is executed. In the nineteenth control example, the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.
Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (F2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 579 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (F2113). This variable display setting process (F2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 569) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .
In the fluctuation display setting process (F2113), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223vd provided in the RAM 223 is on (F2901). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223vd is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (F2901: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to F2911. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223vd is ON (F2901: Yes), next, it is determined whether the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is ON (F2902). When the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is on (F2902: Yes), the adjustment movable accessory (sword role Ym3) is in the adjustment position (see FIG. 530(b)), so the adjustment Set the role movable flag 223vi to OFF (F2903), and set a lamp control command for turning off all the LEDs associated with the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) (F2904). After that, a role object action scenario for moving the adjustment role object (sword object Ym3) to the initial position (see FIG. 521(a)) is set (F2905), and the limit timer 223vj is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds. is set (F2906), and the process proceeds to F2907.
As described above, in the 19th control example, when the player is performing the light amount adjustment using the sword object Ym3 during the waiting period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is performed. is started, a process for storing the sword object Ym3 is executed so that the player can easily visually recognize the variable effect. Also, at this time, if the action of returning from the adjusted position to the initial position is performed while the sword Ym3 is emitting light, the player may misunderstand that the action is part of the effect in the variable effect. Therefore, in order to suppress this, all the LEDs attached to the sword character Ym3 are turned off before the sword character Ym3 returns from the adjustment position to the initial position, thereby reducing the current sword character Ym3. It is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the action has nothing to do with the variable presentation.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols started with the sword object Ym3 in the adjustment position is a jackpot, instead of turning off all the LEDs attached to the sword object Ym3, for example, a rainbow A configuration may be adopted in which the light is emitted in different colors and then returned to the initial position.
On the other hand, in the process of F2902, if the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is not ON (F2902: No), the process of F2903 to F2906 is skipped, and the process proceeds to F2907.
In the process of F2907, the fluctuation start flag 223vd is set to OFF (F2907), and then the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of F2205 of the command determination process (see F2203 in FIG. 570) is obtained (F2908). Then, a variation effect setting process for generating a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (F2909), and the display variation pattern command is set ( F2910), and shifts to the processing of F2911. Details of the variable effect setting process (F2909) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of F2911, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223ve provided in the RAM 223 is ON (F2911). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (F2911: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this process is executed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is ON (F2911: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve that is set to ON is set to OFF (F2912). The stop type extracted in the process of S2208 of S2112) is acquired (F2913), and the extracted stop type is set as it is (F2914). After that, a stop type command for display is set (F2915), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 580, the contents of the variable effect setting process (F2909) executed in the variable display setting process (see F2113 in FIG. 579) will be described. FIG. 580 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process (F2909). This variable effect setting process (F2909) is executed when setting the variable effect of special symbols in the variable display setting process (see F2113 in FIG. 579), and corresponds to the set game state. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect is executed.
When the variable effect setting process (F2909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223vq during time saving is 0 or more (F3001). When the value of the counter sq during time saving is not 0 or more (F3001: No), that is, when the chance mode is set as the display mode, the processes of F3002 and F3003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to F3004. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving counter 223vq is 0 or more (F3001: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223vq is subtracted by 1 (F3002), and the display command for indicating the value of the time saving counter 223vq after the subtraction is set (F3003), and the process proceeds to F3004.
In the processing of F3004, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is 0 or more (F3004). If the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is not 0 or more (F3004: No), that is, if the variable probability gaming state is not set, skip the processing of F3005 to F3007 and proceed to the processing of F3008.
On the other hand, in the process of F3004, when the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is 0 or more (F3004: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is subtracted by 1 (F3005), and then the super chance mode is set as the display mode. It is determined whether it is set (F3006). When the super chance mode is set (F3006: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the value of the variable probability counter 223sr after subtraction. On the other hand, in the process of F3006, if the super chance mode is not set (F3006: No), the process of F3007 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F3008.

In the process of F3008, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or more (F3008). If the value of the limit timer 223vj is equal to or greater than 0 (F3008: Yes), that is, if 10 seconds have not passed since the sword object Ym3 returned from the adjustment position to the initial position, there is a candidate for a determinable presentation mode. (F3009). On the other hand, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not equal to or greater than 0 (F3008: No), skip the process of F3009 and proceed to F3010.
As described above, in the 19th control example, the effect mode for moving the sword Ym3 is not selected until a certain period of time (10 seconds) has passed after the sword Ym3 is moved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the movement control of the sword object Ym3 in a short period of time. can be suppressed from occurring. In addition, the movement control for the next sword object Ym3 is executed before the sword object Ym3 becomes movable, and the movement period of the sword object Ym3 may be shifted or the normal movement may not be performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations in which execution is not performed.
In the process of F3010, the game state stored in the secondary state storage area 223vh is read (F3010), and it is determined whether the game state is the time saving game state (F3011). If it is in the time-saving gaming state (F3011: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3012). The production mode of the time saving end suggestion production is determined (F3013), and the process proceeds to F3014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vq is not 1 (F3012: No), the process of F3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to F3014. In the process of F3014, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined, and the process proceeds to F3019.
In the processing of F3011, if it is determined that it is not in the time-saving gaming state (F3011: No), it is determined whether it is in the probability variation gaming state (F3013). If it is determined to be in a variable probability state (F3015: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3016), and if it is 1 (F3016: Yes), the effect result is super The performance mode of the time-saving end suggestion performance that is promoted to the chance mode is determined (F3017), and the process proceeds to F3014.

Thus, in the 19th control example, when the probability variable gaming state is set based on winning the jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), even if the chance mode is set after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined number of times When the variable display of the special symbols is executed (100 times), the mode is promoted to the super chance mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that he may be promoted to the super chance mode in the final change of the chance mode, and when the remaining number of times of the chance mode becomes 0, the player can It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.
In the process of F3015, when it is determined that the variable probability game state is not set (F3015: No), since the normal game state is set, the normal state effect mode determination process is executed (F3018). Here, with reference to FIG. 581, the contents of the normal state effect mode determination process (F3018) will be described. FIG. 581 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state rendering mode determination process (F3018).
When the normal state effect mode determination process (F3018) is executed, first, the variation pattern selection table (not shown) is referred to based on the variation pattern acquired in the process of F2908 of the variation display setting process (F2113 in FIG. 579). Then, the variable effect type is determined (F3101). Then, it is determined whether or not the determined variable effect mode is shutter closing reach (F3102). When the shutter closing reach is determined (F3102: Yes), based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the first production counter 223vf, the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve (see FIG. 548) is referred to and the production is performed. The mode is determined (F3103), and the process moves to F3108.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3102 that the shutter closing reach is not reached (F3102: No), it is determined whether it is the movie execution reach (F3104). When it is determined that the movie execution reach is reached (F3104: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (F3105), and the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is set to the effect SW. Store it in the valid time storage area 223vp (F3106), and proceed to the process of F3108.

In the process of F3104, when it is determined that the movie execution reach is not reached (F3104: No), the effect mode corresponding to the determined variable effect type is determined (F3107), and the process proceeds to F3108. In the process of F3108, a suspension effect execution process (F3108) at the start of fluctuation is executed. Incidentally, the content of the holding effect execution processing at the start of fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 582 . After that, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set, and this process is terminated.
Thus, in this 19th control example, in the normal game state, since it is configured to be able to execute various reach effects than the variable probability game state and the time saving game state, the player than the variable probability game state and the time saving game state It is possible to suppress early boredom of a player in a game in a normal game state which is disadvantageous to the player.
Next, with reference to FIG. 582, the contents of the holding effect execution process at the start of fluctuation will be described. FIG. 582 is a flow chart showing the contents of the holding effect execution process at the start of fluctuation. This suspension effect execution processing at the start of fluctuation (F3109) is a process for executing a compound suspension change effect based on the suspension change scenario stored in the suspension effect information storage area 223vl.
When the pending effect setting process at the start of fluctuation (F3109) is executed, first, the pending effect information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is read out (F3201), and it is determined whether there is pending change scenario information (F3202). . If there is no hold change scenario (F3202: No), this processing is terminated because the composite hold change effect is not set. On the other hand, if there is pending change scenario information (F3202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation time is 10 seconds or longer (F3203). If the variation time is not 10 seconds or more (F3203: No), this process is terminated.

Thus, in the 19th control example, the composite hold change effect corresponding to the hold change scenario is executed only when the change time is 10 seconds or longer. This is because the pending change effect executed in the 19th control example is the effect in which the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are operated, so the suspension change effect is executed and the left change role Ym1 is executed. , the variation of the special symbol ends in the period from the movement of the right change accessory Ym2 to the storage state, and the next variation starts while the left change accessory Ym1 and the right change accessory Ym2 are in the movable state. This is to prevent
In the processing of F3203, if the variation time is 10 seconds or longer (F3203: Yes), it is determined whether the stored pending change scenario is 1, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204). If the pending change scenario is one of 1, 4, 7, and 9 (F3204: Yes), it is determined whether the target pending pattern of the pending change is the third pending design hr3 (see FIG. 524) (F3205 ), and if it is the third reserved symbol hr3 (F3205: Yes), the character product action scenario 2 (see FIG. 549) is determined (F3206), and the process proceeds to F3207. On the other hand, when the target reserved design of the reserved change is not the third reserved design hr3, this processing is terminated.
It should be noted that all of the pending change scenarios 1, 4, 7, and 9 are scenarios in which the color of the pending pattern that is the target of the pending change is transplanted into the color of the pending pattern that is the target of the pending change. An action of hiding the previous pending symbol by the left change accessory Ym1 is performed. The hold change scenario 2 is a special scenario that changes the color of the target hold by hiding the target hold of the hold change with the change accessory Ym2.
In the processing of F3204, if the pending change scenario is none of 1, 2, 4, 7, and 9 (F3204: No), the target pending pattern of the pending change is the second pending pattern hr2 (see FIG. 524). (F3210). If it is not the second reserved symbol hr2 (F3210: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the second reserved symbol hr2 (F3210: Yes), it is determined whether the post-hold setting flag 223vn is ON (F3211). If the post-reservation setting flag 223vn is ON (F3211: Yes), that is, if the next reservation ball is not obtained after acquiring the reservation ball corresponding to the target reservation pattern of the reservation change, The post-suspension setting flag 223vn is set to OFF (F3215), the suspension change scenario stored in the suspension effect information storage area 223vl is cleared (F3216), and this processing ends.

In this way, when the post-hold setting flag 223vn is ON, the configuration is such that the compound hold change effect is not executed. This is because it is a scenario in which the color of the target reserved pattern of the reserved change is transplanted into the color of the reserved pattern acquired after the target reserved pattern of , and by configuring in this way, an unnatural effect is given to the player. You can prevent it from being executed.
In the process of F3211, if the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is not ON (F3211: No), then it is determined whether the stored suspension change scenario is 5 or 9 (F3212). When it is determined that the pending change scenario is not either 6 or 11 (F3212: No), the role product action scenario 1 is determined (F3213), and the process proceeds to F3207. As described above, all of the pending change scenarios 3, 5, 8, and 10 are scenarios in which the color of the pending pattern acquired after the target pending pattern of the pending change is transplanted to the color of the target pending pattern of the pending change, An operation of hiding the target reserved pattern of the reserved change is performed by the right change accessory Ym2.
On the other hand, in the process of F3212, if it is determined to be one of the pending change scenarios 6 and 11 (F3214: Yes), the character action scenario 3 (see FIG. 549) is determined (F3214), and the process of F3207 transition to In addition, both of the pending change scenarios 6 and 11 are scenarios in which the colors of the pending symbols before and after the target pending pattern of the pending change are transplanted to the target pending pattern, so in the role product operation scenario 3, the first pending pattern hr1 is left. The operation of hiding with the change character Ym1 and hiding the third reserved pattern hr3 with the right change character Ym2 is performed.
In the processing of F3207, the effect mode corresponding to the pending change scenario stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is determined (F3207), and the display pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (F3208). Then, a role product action command indicating the determined role product action scenario is set (F3209), the pending effect limiting flag 223vm is set to OFF (F3217), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the 19th control example, based on the preset hold change scenario, it is determined whether or not the hold change effect corresponding to the hold change scenario can be executed in the change, and if it is executable, the hold change effect is configured to execute By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience caused by the end of the variation of the special symbol during execution of the pending change performance and the execution of unnatural performance for the player.
Next, with reference to FIG. 583, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (F2107) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 583 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (F2107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (F2107) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 569) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to enhance the effect. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22A in order to execute an effect according to the player's operation.
In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 583, F2107), first, the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or light amount adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) is operated. (F3301). If there is an operation (F3301: Yes), determine whether the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3302), and if not (F3302: No), determine the display of the environment information adjustment screen ( F3303), sets the adjustment period flag 223vx to ON (F3304), and sets the elapsed timer 223vy to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3305).
After that, it is determined whether it is in the standby period (F3306), and if it is determined that it is in the standby period (F3306: Yes), the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is set to the environment adjustment position (Fig. 530 (b )) to set the action scenario for changing to (F3307), and set the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi to ON (F3308). Then, the mode (display of the display area HR3 in FIG. 530) for indicating that the adjusting accessory is in motion is determined (F3309), and the process proceeds to F3310.

On the other hand, in the process of F3306, if it is determined that it is not in the waiting period (F3306: No), that is, during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, the process of F3307 to F3309 is skipped. , F3310. As described above, in the nineteenth control example, when the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position. , the adjustment accessory (sword role Ym3) overlaps the variable performance, and the player cannot visually recognize the variable performance.
In addition, in the 19th control example, when the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position. However, for example, the adjustment accessory Ym3 may be changed to the environment adjustment position, and the variable performance of the special symbol may be reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment accessory (sword role Ym3).
In the process of F3302, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is ON (F3302: Yes), the environment information adjustment screen has already been displayed. The information is updated in correspondence with the contents of the button operation (F3311), and the mode corresponding to the updated environment information is determined (F3312). Then, the elapsed timer 223vy is reset to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3313), and the process proceeds to F3310.
In the processing of F3301, if the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or light intensity adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) is not operated (F3301: No), It is determined whether or not the enter button 600a has been operated (F3314). If the OK button 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), the OK button operation process (F3315) is executed, and the process proceeds to F3310. The content of the enter button operation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of F3314, when the decision button is not operated (F3314: No), the effect button operation process is executed (F3316), and the process of F3310 is executed. In the process of F3310, a display command corresponding to the determined mode is set (F3310), and the process ends. The contents of the effect button operation process will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 584, the content of decision button operation processing (F3315) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see F2107 in FIG. 583) will be described. FIG. 584 is a flow chart showing the contents of the enter button operation process.
When the decision button operation process (F3315) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the adjustment period flag 223vx is ON (F3351). If it is determined that the adjustment period flag 223vx is not ON (F3351: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is ON (F3351: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer is set to 1 (F3352), and it is determined whether the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is ON (F3353 ). If the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is not ON (F3353: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is on (F3352: Yes), the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, so the adjustment accessory (sword The action scenario for changing the character Ym3) to the initial position is set (F3354), and the display mode indicating the end of environment adjustment (environment adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 531(a)) is determined (F3355). Then, the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is set to OFF (F3356), the limit timer 223vj is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3357), and this process is terminated.

In addition, when the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the process of turning off all the LEDs attached to the adjustment accessory Ym3 (Fig. 579 F2904 reference) was executed, but when the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in response to the operation of the enter button, the special symbol is still displayed. Since this is a state in which the variable performance is not being executed, and there is no risk of misleading the player that the action of the adjustment accessory (sword Ym3) is part of the variable performance, the adjustment accessory (sword The LEDs associated with the role item Ym3) are changed to their initial positions without being completely turned off.
Also, by setting the value of the elapsed timer 223vy to 1 in the decision button operation process, the value of the elapsed timer 223vy can be set to 0 when the next rendering update process (see F2111 in FIG. 586) is executed. Therefore, the processing for setting the adjustment period flag 223vx to off can be unified.
Next, with reference to FIG. 585, the content of the effect button operation process (F3319) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see F2107 in FIG. 583) will be described. FIG. 585 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect button operation process (F3319).
When the effect button operation process (F3319) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401). If the effect button 22 has not been operated (F3401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401: Yes), it is determined whether the effect SW valid period is in effect (F3402). It is set based on stored information. If it is determined that the SW for effect is valid (F342: Yes), the mode of movie reproduction is determined (F3403), and the in-movie flag 223vv is set to ON (F3404). After that, the effect mode corresponding to pressing of the other effect button is determined (F3405), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of F3402, if it is determined that the SW for effect is not valid (F3402: No), the process of F3405 is executed, and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 586, the content of the rendering update process (F2111) will be described. FIG. 586 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering update process (F2111). When the effect update process (F2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 or more (F3501).
When the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 or more (F3501: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is updated (F3502), and it is determined whether the updated value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503). If the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not 0 (F3503: No), the process proceeds to F3510.
On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503: Yes), the display mode indicating the end of the environmental adjustment (environmental adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 531) is set (F3504), and the in-adjustment flag 223vx is set. It is set to off (F3505). Then, it is determined whether the flag 223vi during adjustment accessory movement is ON (F3506). If the flag 223vi for adjustment accessory movement is not ON (F3506: No), the process proceeds to F3510. When the adjustment role object moving flag 223vi is on (F3506: Yes), an action scenario for moving the adjustment role object (sword role object Ym3) to the initial position is set (F3507), and adjustment The service item movable flag 223vi is set to OFF (F3508), the limit timer 223vj is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3509), and the process proceeds to F3510.

In the processing of F3501, if the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not 0 or more (F3501: No), that is, if the environment information adjustment screen is not displayed, the processing of F3502 to F3509 is skipped, and the processing of F3510 is skipped. Go to processing.
In the process of F3510, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or more (F3510), and if the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or more (F3511: Yes), the value of the limit timer 223vj is updated ( F3511), and shifts to the processing of F3512. On the other hand, in the process of F3510, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not 0 or more (F3510), that is, if the value is not set to the limit timer 223vj, the process proceeds to F3512.
In the process of F3512, it is determined whether or not the movie execution has ended in the movie execution reach (F3512). If the movie execution has not ended (F3512: No), the process proceeds to F3517. On the other hand, if the movie execution has ended (F3512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-movie flag 223vv is on (F3513). If the in-movie flag 223vv is not ON (F3513: No), it means that the movie execution reach is not being executed, so the processes of F3514 to F3516 are skipped and the process proceeds to F3517.
In the processing of F3513, if the movie flag 223vv is ON (F3513: Ye number), the shaking display mode (display mode where the third symbol is shaking as shown in FIG. 536(b)) is set (F3514 ), the shaking standby flag 223vw is set to ON (F3515), the movie flag 223vv is set to OFF (F3516), and the process proceeds to F3517.

In the process of F3517, other various counters and various timers are updated (F3517), and this process ends.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, when an effect (reserved change effect) for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the obtained reserved ball is executed, the reserved symbols other than the change target are hidden by decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it clear to the player which of the reserved symbols to be changed is.
Further, when the decorative movable accessories (decorative movable accessories Ym1 and Ym2) perform the operation of hiding the reserved symbols other than the change target, the operation of hiding the reserved symbols other than the change target is performed step by step. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which reserved pattern is to be changed during the period from the start of the reserved change performance to the end of the reserved change performance.
In this 19th control example, the configuration is such that the reserved symbols other than those to be changed are hidden by the decorative movable accessory, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved symbols other than those to be changed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a blocking mode (for example, a display mode imitating a shutter, etc.) for making the displayed display area invisible is displayed. Alternatively, the third symbol may be used to hide reserved symbols other than those to be changed.

<Modification of 19th Control Example>
Next, a modification of the nineteenth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the 19th control example described above, the movable accessory for decoration (sword role Ym3) has the function of adjusting the amount of light of the pachinko machine 10, and is used in the variable effect of the special symbol when adjusting the amount of light performed during the standby period. is changed to the environment adjustment position, and the light amount can be adjusted by the LED attached to the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3). On the other hand, the modified example of the nineteenth control example is different in that the light amount is adjusted using the large sword character Ym4 instead of the sword character Ym3.
Here, in recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine 10 equipped with a decorative movable accessory having a size that hides most of the display area of the third symbol representation device 81 . In such a pachinko machine 10, there is one in which the decorative movable accessory is moved in accordance with the demonstration effect executed during the standby period. With this configuration, the movable accessory for decoration can be moved in the demonstration effect, so that the player can easily have an image of the variable effect executed during the game, and the movable accessory for decoration can be used. By making the player want to see the variable presentation, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
However, in such a pachinko machine 10, if it is attempted to adjust the amount of light during the execution of the demonstration effect, the movable accessory for decoration moves according to the operation scenario, so the indicator for adjusting the amount of light displayed on the liquid crystal display is not displayed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to visually recognize and hinders the adjustment of the amount of light. A modified example of the nineteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 649(a) shows an example of the pachinko machine 10 in which the decorative movable accessory (large sword accessory Ym4) is in motion during the demonstration production. As shown in FIG. 649(a), when the large sword Ym4 becomes movable, most of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see. In a state where the player does not operate the selection button 600, the large sword role Ym4 operates according to the set action scenario. This operation scenario is set in the customer waiting effect process of the nineteenth control example (see F2105 in FIG. 569).

On the other hand, when the player operates the selection button 600, light amount adjustment corresponding to the movement pattern of the largesword role Ym4 and the position of the largesword role Ym4 at the time of operation is executed. More specifically, in the processing of F3306 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see F2107 in FIG. 583) of the 19th control example, when it is determined that it is in the standby period (F3306: Yes), the large sword It is determined whether or not the position of the role object Ym4 is the initial position (position in the stored state that does not overlap with the third symbol display device 81). In the case of the initial position, the light amount gauge large ga3 is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 without changing the large sword Ym4 to the environment adjustment position a (the position shown in FIG. 603(a)). (See FIG. 531(b)) is displayed.
On the other hand, if it is not at the initial position, it is determined whether the large sword Ym4 is at the environment adjustment position a. When the largesword role Ym4 is at the environment adjustment position a, the largesword role Ym4 is stopped at the environment adjustment position, and the light amount is adjusted using the LED attached to the largesword role Ym4. process.
In the modification of the 19th control example, when the largesword role Ym4 is not at the environment adjustment position a, the largesword role Ym4 is in operation, so the largesword role Ym4 is placed at the initial position or In order to wait (delay) the start of the light amount adjustment until it is changed to the environment adjustment position a, a notification mode (for example, the large sword Ym4 and In the display area of the third pattern display device 81 which is not overlapped, a process for displaying characters "preparing for light amount adjustment") is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the motion pattern of the large sword Ym4 is a motion pattern (motion pattern A) that changes from the initial position to the environment adjustment position a. If the operation pattern is A, the large sword Ym4 is stopped at the environment adjustment position a, the set operation scenario is discarded (or interrupted), and the player waits (delays). Processing is performed to hide the notification mode for notifying that it is. On the other hand, if the action pattern of the large sword Ym4 is not the action pattern A, that is, if it is the action pattern (action pattern B) that changes from the environmental adjustment position a to the initial position, the large sword Ym4 is the initial position. The player is stopped at the position, the light amount gauge ga3 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the notification mode for notifying the player that the player is waiting (delayed) is not displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of resetting a different action pattern for the large sword Ym4 that is moving in the action pattern in line with the action scenario.
It should be noted that it may be configured to determine whether to change to the initial position or to the environment adjustment position a according to the position of the large sword Ym4 during its action. For example, even if the action pattern A is set, if the current position of the large sword Ym4 is closer to the initial position than the environmental adjustment position a, the light amount is adjusted by changing the position to the initial position. The period of waiting for the start can be shortened.
FIG. 649(b) is an example of the display screen when the special symbol starts to change during the light amount adjustment. In the 19th control example described above, when the movement of the special symbol is started while the movable accessory for decoration is in the environment adjustment position, the movable accessory for decoration is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. was the configuration. On the other hand, in the modification of the nineteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 649(b), the large sword Ym4 is placed at the environmental adjustment position b (FIG. 649(b)) until the light amount adjustment is completed. position), and the variation of the special pattern is reduced and displayed in the display area HR7 on the left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Then, when the player operates the enter button 600a and the light intensity adjustment is completed, the large sword Ym4 is changed to the retracted state (position not overlapping the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81).
In addition, when the large sword Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position b (that is, when the light amount adjustment is being performed while the special symbols are fluctuating), for example, as a mode of special symbol fluctuation production, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot When a variable performance mode using a high sword role Ym4 is selected, or when a variable pattern in which a ready-to-win performance (special ready-to-win) with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is executed is selected, light amount adjustment is performed. Before the end (that is, without depending on the operation of the decision button 600a by the player), the large sword role Ym4 may be changed to the retracted state, and the display area HR7 in which the variable effect of the special symbol is displayed may be enlarged and displayed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect with a high degree of expectation of winning a big win. In addition, since it is possible to make the player interested in the action of the large sword Ym4 during the light amount adjustment, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 650 and 651, a modification of the shutter closing reach effect executed in the nineteenth control example will be described. In the above-mentioned shutter closing reach effect (see Figures 533 to 535), the shutter is closed to proceed to the next stage, and when the final stage is reached, or the item obtained in the middle stage is used, the shutter is completely opened. It was a configuration in which it is notified that the jackpot is won when the player wins. On the other hand, in the modified example of the shutter closing ready-to-win production, it is not always notified that the jackpot is won when the final stage is reached, but it is configured to be notified that the jackpot is won at any stage. There is a big difference. Further, the color of the shutter suggests the type of pattern when the middle pattern in fluctuation in the ready-to-reach state stops, and the number of times the shutter closes suggests the type of the third pattern to be finally stopped and displayed. More specifically, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 650 and 651. FIG.
FIG. 650(a) is an example of a display screen in the case where, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the expansion of the shutter closing ready-to-win effect variation occurs. In the center of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "11" is stopped and displayed in two of the three symbol rows, and the third symbol (final stop symbol) is displayed in the remaining one symbol row. is displayed, and a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm to display a guide mode for notifying the player of the reach state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the game is in the ready-to-win state.
In addition, shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in a rattling manner at the left and right ends of the main display area Dm, and in a notification mode for informing the player of game information related to the effect in the sub display area Ds. A certain character "If the shutter is closed, it will develop into a shutter closing reach" is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that when the shutters St3 and St4 displayed in the main display area Dm are closed, a high-level ready-to-win effect (shutter closed ready-to-win effect) is developed.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 650(a), the third symbol is stop-displayed as "11" in the two symbol rows in the center of the main display area Dm. It is configured to set the number based on the lottery result of the special pattern from among the numbers of ~ "8".

FIG. 650(b) is an example of the display screen in the case of development to the shutter closing reach effect. As shown in FIG. 650(b), in the main display area Dm, the shutters St3 and St4 displaying characters St3a and St4a of "blue" for indicating that the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode are closed. A performance is executed, and the characters ``Shutter closed reach start, even number pattern is a chance'' are displayed in the sub display area Ds as a notification mode for notifying the game information related to the performance to the player.
Here, in the modified example of the shutter closing reach effect, the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 are the first display mode in which the characters "blue" are displayed and the second display mode in which the characters "red" are displayed. It is configured to set either. When the first display mode is displayed, it suggests that the final stop pattern will be stopped with an even number pattern, and when the second display mode is displayed, the final stop pattern will be stopped with an odd number pattern. Suggest. In the example shown in FIG. 650(b), the characters St3a and St4a of "blue" are displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (that is, the first display mode). A notification mode of "chance" is displayed. On the other hand, when the characters "red" are displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (that is, when it is in the second display mode), the notification mode of "odd symbols are a chance" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.
Further, in the modified example of the shutter closing reach effect, the final stop pattern is stopped and displayed when the shutter is completely opened, and when the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, the final Any one of the numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" is stop-displayed as the stop symbol, and when it is displayed in the second display mode, one of "1, 3, 7, 9" is displayed as the final stop symbol. A number is displayed stopped.
In addition, in the modified example of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect, the shutters St3 and St4 have two types of display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types may be used. For example, the third display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 displaying the characters "rainbow" may be settable. Even if the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened, it is reported that the jackpot is won.

Further, as the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4, the characters St3a and St4a of "blue" (or "red") are not displayed, and the color of the shutters St3 and St4 is set to blue (or red). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a person can identify which display mode it is.
On the other hand, if the development fanning (see FIG. 651 (a)) of the shutter closing reach production modification fails, the final stop symbol, which is a combination indicating that the winning is lost, is stopped and displayed, and the shutter closing reach production is performed. A notification mode (for example, the characters "Failed") is displayed to indicate that the development has failed.
FIG. 651(a) is an example of the display screen when the branch effect in the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect variation is being executed from the state of FIG. 650(b). In the main display area Dm, the shutters St3 and St4 are changed from the closed state (see FIG. 650(b)) to the half-open state, and the rattling vibrates to prompt whether or not the shutters should be closed again. executed.
In addition, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the third pattern is stopped at "22" in two of the three pattern rows, and the third pattern (last) is displayed in the remaining one pattern row. The ready-to-win state where the stop symbol) is variably displayed is displayed.

In addition, in the upper center of the main display area Dm, a display area HR4 in which a guide mode for indicating the currently reached stage and the final stage is displayed, "If the shutter is closed, continue 2/6" is displayed. Is displayed. By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the current stage is the second stage of the shutter-closing ready-to-reach performance, and that the current shutter-closing ready-to-reach performance is up to the sixth stage.
In addition, in the shutter closed ready-to-reach effect modification, it is possible to set either a pattern in which the final stage is the 6th stage or a pattern in which the final stage is the 5th stage.
Here, in the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect, when the shutters St3 and St4 are closed, the process proceeds to the next stage, and 1 is added to the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. In the example shown in FIG. 651(a), since the shutters St3 and St4 are closed once from the state of FIG. 1 is added to the symbol "1", resulting in "2" as shown in FIG. 651(a).
In the example shown in FIG. 651(a), since the sixth stage is the final stage, the shutters St3 and St4 are closed five times before reaching the sixth stage. Therefore, when the final stage is reached, the third symbol stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm becomes "66". Then, as described above, when the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, the final stop symbol is an even number, so when the final stage is reached, it is notified that the jackpot has been won. It suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that

On the other hand, when the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the second display mode, since the final stop pattern is an odd number, it is possible to be informed that a jackpot is won when the final stage is reached. It suggests to the player that the sex is low. Therefore, in this case, if the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened in an odd-numbered stage before reaching the final stage, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that a jackpot winning will be announced. .
FIG. 651(b) is an example of the display screen when the shutter is fully opened in the fourth stage. In the example shown in FIG. 651(b), characters "4/6" are displayed in the display area HR4 as a guidance mode for informing the player that the current stage is the fourth stage, and the main display area Dm is displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened from the closed state (see FIG. 650(b)). Then, the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed in the display mode "444" for notifying that the jackpot has been won, and the sub-display area Ds indicates that the jackpot has been won. By displaying characters ``big win'', which is a mode, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the player has won a big win by executing the performance of completely opening the shutters St3 and St4 in the fourth step.
As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbols is not a jackpot winning, the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is lost when the shutter is completely opened to notify that the winning has been won. (for example, "454"), and in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode (for example, the characters "Unfortunately") is displayed for notifying that the winning has been lost.
As described above, in the modified example of shutter close reach, information about the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm at the start of the shutter close reach effect and the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed. By displaying the information of the type and the information of the final stage pattern displayed in the display area HR4 in stages, the player is provided with the pleasure of predicting the third pattern to be stopped and displayed by combining the information. be able to.

The display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 suggest an advantageous stage and a disadvantageous stage for the player, and the player expects the shutter to be completely opened in the advantageous stage, and expects the shutter to close in the unfavorable stage. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to execute the reach variation performance until the end without getting bored.
In the example shown in FIG. 651(a), the display area HR4 displays the currently reached stage and the guidance mode for indicating the final stage, but the configuration is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a number corresponding to the current number of times the shutter is closed and the maximum number of times the shutter can be closed are displayed.
Also, the configuration may be such that the effect for obtaining the capsule Cp1 described with reference to FIG. 535 is executed. For example, when the HOLD ticket Cp1a shown in FIG. 535(b) is used, the number of the third symbol currently stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm will be maintained even if the next stage is advanced. Therefore, when the third pattern corresponding to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode, the displayed third pattern is an even number). When the HOLD ticket Cp1a is used in case ), the possibility of winning the jackpot increases. On the other hand, when a third symbol that does not correspond to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is an odd number If the HOLD ticket Cp1a is used in case of a number), the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes low. In this way, the player's advantage or disadvantage can be varied depending on the timing of using the HOLD ticket Cp1a, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.
Note that, for example, the second display mode is set as the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 (that is, when the odd-numbered third pattern is a chance), and when the fifth stage is reached, "55" is displayed in the main display area Dm. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the player recognizes that when the shutters St3 and St4 are closed, the third symbol in the reach state is "66" and the last stopped symbol is an odd number. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player will find out that he or she has lost the winning before the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened, and the expectation of the player cannot be maintained until the end of the shutter closing reach. On the other hand, since the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 suggests the type (even or odd) of the final stop symbol, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the second display mode, even numbers are displayed as the final stop symbol. If the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the credibility of the information suggested by the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 will be lost. Therefore, when the information indicated by the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 does not correspond to the display mode for notifying that the jackpot has been won, the characters "jackpot" shown in FIG. 534(b) are displayed. By stop-displaying the drawn middle pattern nz1 as the final stop pattern, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result with unexpectedness without giving the player a sense of incongruity, so that the player can reach the end of the shutter closing reach. A player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

<Twentyth control example>
Next, the twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 587 to 607. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth control example, the player can arbitrarily select an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot with respect to the variable effect to be executed is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described nineteenth control example (effect Customizable), and as a variation performance to increase the expectation that the special symbol variation being executed is a big hit, it is possible to execute a pending change performance that moves the change roles Ym1 and Ym2. It is different in that it consists of Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a selection operation (effect custom operation) for differentiating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot indicated by each effect mode of the variable effect to be executed. Here, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot indicates the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot when the variable performance in which the target performance mode is set is executed, and when the target performance mode wins the jackpot. Specified based on the ratio set as the performance mode of the variable performance (jackpot variable performance) executed at the time and the ratio set as the performance mode of the variable performance (losing variable performance) executed when the winning is lost The higher the ratio set during the big win fluctuation performance or the lower the ratio set during the loss fluctuation performance, the higher the expectation of winning the big win. On the other hand, the lower the ratio set during the big win fluctuation performance or the higher the ratio set during the loss fluctuation performance, the lower the expectation of winning the big win.
In other words, by increasing the ratio of selecting the specific production mode as the production mode of the big hit variation production or by lowering the ratio of selecting the specific production mode as the production mode of the loss variation production, the expectation of winning the jackpot for the specific production mode degree increases. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to set an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for winning a big win is set high when the big win is not won. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to set an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for winning a big win is set low when a big win is won.
In the twentieth control example, as in the above-described control examples, the probability of not winning a big win (probability of winning a miss) is higher than the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery. Therefore, when the expectation of winning the big win is set lower than when the expectation of winning the big win is set high, the execution frequency can be increased by the extent that it is easier to execute the loss fluctuation performance.

By configuring the performance custom operation to be executable in this manner, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot when a specific performance mode (for example, chance notice) is set, depending on the set performance mode. Therefore, for example, regardless of whether or not a big win is won, a player who wants to experience a variable effect in which a specific effect mode is set executes a custom effect operation so as to lower the expectation of winning a big win for each effect mode. , it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the variable performance in which various performance modes are set. On the other hand, a player who pays attention to the presence or absence of winning a jackpot executes a performance custom operation so as to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot in a variable performance in which a specific performance mode (for example, chance notice) is set. , the high possibility of winning the jackpot can be grasped in advance by the content of the effect to be executed.
Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, when the above-described effect custom operation is executed during the special symbol variation, after the variable effect of the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the executed effect custom operation is performed. It is common that the corresponding production mode can be set. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed during the special symbol variation period is determined, and the variable performance is executed based on the determined performance mode. Since it is configured, the performance mode cannot be switched in the middle of the variable performance being executed, and the performance mode corresponding to the performance mode set from the variable performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation is set. was common.
In this case, the timing at which the player executes the effect custom operation and the timing at which the effect mode is switched based on the execution of the effect custom operation deviate, which makes it difficult to execute the variable effect desired by the player. there were.
On the other hand, in the twentieth control example, when the effect custom operation is executed during the period during which the special symbol variation is being executed, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is changed to the effect custom. It is configured to be able to correspond to a newly set production mode based on the operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the conventional problem that the timing at which the player executes the custom production operation and the timing at which the production mode is switched based on the execution of the custom production operation are not aligned.

Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, the type of effect mode selectable by the custom effect operation is configured to vary according to the timing at which the custom effect operation is executed. Specifically, it is equipped with a special production mode (premium mode) that can be selected when the production custom operation is executed during the big hit fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the jackpot has been won by executing the effect custom operation. It is possible to make the operation voluntarily.
Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation based on the execution of the determination operation (pressing of the determination button 600a) when determining a new performance mode by the performance custom operation. A notification effect capable of notifying the player of this fact is configured to be executable.
That is, in the twentieth control example, when an operation for selecting an effect mode is executed in the effect custom operation (when the right button 600c and the left button 600e are operated), the player is notified that the big win is fluctuating. A first notification effect that allows the player to be notified that the big hit is fluctuating when an operation to determine the effect mode is executed by the effect custom operation (when the decision button 600a is pressed). 2 notification effect and are configured to be executable.
By configuring in this way, when the first notification effect is executed, the special effect mode (premium mode) is selected as the effect mode for the special symbol variation being executed (special symbol variation for winning the jackpot). Then, it is possible for the player to choose whether to see the performance that cannot be seen normally or to watch the variable performance that is normally executed without worrying about selecting the special performance mode (premium mode). It is possible to easily provide a performance that matches the taste of the user.

In addition, since the second notification effect is executed based on the decision operation of the effect custom operation, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player who has executed the decision operation to switch the effect mode.
In this twentieth control example, since the first notification effect and the second notification effect can be combined and executed, the effect mode is applied to the player who executes the effect custom operation during the special symbol fluctuation. In the selection operation stage of , it is possible to notify whether or not there is a big hit change, and furthermore, even if the first notification performance indicating the big hit change is not executed in the selection operation stage of the performance mode, A second notification effect can be executed at the decision operation stage of the effect mode.
By configuring in this way, by executing the production custom operation during the special pattern fluctuation, it is possible to notify that the big hit is changing at various timings, so that the production effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, an effect mode (chance-up mode) is determined in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot when a specific effect mode is set by the effect custom operation is higher than the other effect modes (normal mode). In this case, the second notification effect is more likely to be executed than when another effect mode (normal mode) is determined. In other words, when the desired performance mode type is determined by the player who wants to grasp (predict) the presence or absence of a big win as soon as possible, the second notification performance is relatively easily executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect that matches the taste of the player.

Next, in the twentieth control example, as described above, when the production pattern (reach mode) of the variable production being executed progresses (develops) to the production pattern with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the reserved symbol Configured to hide the display. In other words, in order to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol variation being executed, reserved symbol display is performed. is configured to be hidden.
Then, as an effect mode for hiding the reserved symbol, a performance mode for moving the change character Ym1 and Ym2 is set in the same manner as in the case where the hold change effect is executed in the nineteenth control example described above, and the change character Ym1 is set. , Ym2 is moved, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the pending change performance for changing the display mode of the pending symbols is executed or the performance for hiding the pending symbols is executed. It consists of
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which one is the target of the effect when the change accessory Ym1, Ym2 is moved.
Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, when the effect mode of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 to hide the reserved symbols is set as the variable effect, the reserved symbol display is performed in a display mode of three or more colors. When reserved symbols are displayed and when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed is a big win, the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 hide all the reserved symbol displays, It is constituted so as to be able to execute the performance of changing the display mode of the execution pending pattern (executing pending pattern) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed to the display mode (rainbow color) indicating the winning of the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, the function of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is added to the effect for simply hiding the reserved symbol display (the effect of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2). Since the player can hold it, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
<Regarding the effect content in the twentieth control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 587 to 592, among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth control example, characteristic effects will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth control example has an effect mode selection function (effect custom function) capable of varying the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot with respect to the variable effect to be executed, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example described above. ), and the fact that it is possible to execute the production based on the production custom operation for selecting the production mode, and the pending design display as a variable production corresponding to the special design fluctuation being executed The difference is that the presentation to be displayed is configured to be executable.
First, with reference to FIGS. 587 to 590, the content of effects executed based on the custom effects operation will be described. Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. Premium mode) can be selected, and a production custom operation for selecting the production mode can be executed in a state where the special symbol variation is not executed or in a state where the special symbol variation is executed. ing.
Figure 587 (a) is a state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the normal mode is set as the production mode, during the second half period of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation (reach establishment After) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the chance up mode is determined by the effect custom operation.

As shown in FIG. 587(a), when the normal state is set as the game state, similar to the 19th control example described above, the game method guide for guiding the game method that gives the player an advantage. As a mode, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the left-handed game is played during the normal state, that is, the variable display unit 80 (See FIG. 472), the player is notified that the left-handed hitting game in which the game ball is shot toward the game area (left side area) formed on the left side of the drawing is an advantageous game method for the player.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the twentieth control example, the small display area Dm4 in which the game method guidance mode is displayed is always at the same position (upper left position) on the display screen regardless of the set game state or whether or not there is a jackpot game. ). By constructing in this way, it is possible to always display the guidance of the game method at the same position for a player who is unfamiliar with the game of the pachinko machine 10, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.
Note that, in the twentieth control example, as in the nineteenth control example described above, the game method guide mode (left-handed, right-handed) for showing the game method (left-handed, right-handed) that gives the player an advantage. ) is always displayed in the small display area Dm4, but it is not limited to this. A state in which the game is not played is defined as a game state in which the normal game (left-handed game) is advantageous to the player, and when a game method (right-handed game) different from the normal game is advantageous to the player, the small display area Dm4 may be configured to display the characters "Right-handed". By configuring in this way, in a game state in which the normal game (left-handed game) is advantageous to the player, there is no need to display the game method guide mode (left-handed game), so the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The display area of the surface can be used for other purposes (for example, variable effects).
Further, instead of always displaying the game method guide mode in the small display area Dm4, the game method guide mode is displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when the player wants to grasp the game method that is advantageous to the player. For example, when a predetermined operation (long press) is performed on the operation means (frame button 22), the game method guidance mode may be displayed in the small display area Dm4. good. With this configuration, a game method guidance mode is displayed in the small display area Dm4 for a player unfamiliar with the game of the pachinko machine 10 so that the player can easily understand the game, and a skilled player can play the game. On the other hand, the effect of the performance can be enhanced by executing a powerful performance (a performance with a larger execution region than when the small display region Dm4 is formed) using the display area in which the game method guidance mode can be displayed. can be done. In this case, instead of switching between display and non-display of the small display area Dm4, the size of the small display area Dm4 may be changed based on the operation of the operating means.

As shown in FIG. 587(a), a small display area Dm15 is formed below the small display area Dm4, and "Normal mode is being set" as a setting mode display mode for indicating the effect mode currently set. characters are displayed. Since FIG. 587(a) shows the display screen in the state where the normal mode is set as the effect mode, the small display area Dm15 displays "NORMAL MODE SETTING" indicating that the normal mode is set. characters are displayed. It should be noted that, when the chance up mode is set, the small display area Dm15 "chance up mode setting" characters, when the variable probability notification mode is set, the small display area Dm15 "variable probability notification When the premium mode is set, the text "Premium mode is being set" is displayed in the small display area Dm15. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp the presently set production mode at a glance.
Various aspects related to the effect custom operation are displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. In the twentieth control example, by pressing the middle button 600a in a state in which the light amount adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are not performed, the production custom state in which the production mode can be selected and operated is set. By pressing the button 600c or the left button 600e, the effect mode can be selected. By operating (pressing down) the middle button 600a with the desired effect mode selected, the selected effect mode can be set.
When the effect custom state is set, as shown in FIG. 587(a), the display area HR6 is formed and the selected effect mode is displayed. A small display area Dm16 is formed above the display area HR6. You can switch the mode with ." is displayed.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, until the effect custom state is set, that is, until the middle button 600a is pressed to select the effect mode, below the small display area Dm15, As a guidance mode for guiding the player on the operation method for setting the production custom state, it is configured to display the characters "When you press the middle button, the production mode selection screen will be displayed." . In other words, the operation method for changing the effect mode is displayed near the small display area Dm15 for indicating the currently set effect mode. By configuring in this way, the player who has grasped the currently set production mode is provided with a function capable of changing the production mode and an operation method for changing the production mode. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the effect custom state is set, a display mode for indicating the currently set effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6. A left arrow LY is displayed on the left side of the display area HR6, and a right arrow RY is displayed on the right side of the display area HR6. The left arrow LY and the right arrow RY are display modes for guiding a switching operation for switching the effect mode displayed in the display area HR6 to another effect mode, and the player presses the right button 600c. When operated, the right arrow RY is illuminated, and when the left button 600e is operated, the left arrow LY is illuminated.
By operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e, an effect mode different from the currently set effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6. As shown in FIG. 587(a), in the twentieth control example, only one effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6. It is configured so that the player does not know whether the display mode indicating the effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6.
Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth control example is configured so that a special performance mode (premium mode) can be selected when a performance custom operation for changing the performance mode is executed during the variation of the jackpot. . Therefore, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the type of performance mode that can be selected in the current performance custom operation, the next performance mode is not displayed in the display area HR6 until the selection operation of the performance mode is executed. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to perform the selection operation of the production mode in order to grasp whether or not the special production mode (premium mode) is selectable.
Note that the display content of the display area HR6 in the state in which the effect custom state is set is not limited to this. At least part of the display mode indicating the effect mode to be selected and at least part of the display mode indicating the effect mode selected when the right button 600c is operated are displayed in the display area HR6. Also good.

By configuring in this way, a player who intends to select an arbitrary production mode can be made to efficiently execute the production custom operation.
Then, by pressing the middle button 600a again in a state in which the display mode for indicating the desired effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6 by the effect custom operation, the effect mode switching operation is completed.
FIG. 587(a) shows a display screen for indicating that the production mode cannot be switched immediately when a different production mode is determined by the production custom operation. The switching operation is normally accepted, and the character "Standby" is displayed as a standby mode for indicating that the production mode has not been switched.
By displaying this standby mode "standby", it is possible to inform the player that the switching operation of the production mode has been performed normally. , it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order in the situation where the performance mode displayed in the small display area Dm15 is not switched.

In FIG. 587(a), by forming a preliminary display area HR6a in the vicinity of the display area HR6, the player who performs the effect mode switching operation while grasping the display contents of the display area HR6 can receive the message " The spare display area HR6a is formed in the vicinity of the small display area Dm15 or so as to overlap the display position of the small display area Dm15. You can By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player who tries to check the display contents of the small display area Dm15 in order to grasp whether or not the effect mode has been switched based on the effect mode switching operation being executed. , it is possible to make it easier for the user to grasp that it is "on standby".
On the other hand, when the production mode can be switched immediately at the timing when the production mode switching operation is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 587(b) is displayed. Figure 587 (b) is a state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the normal mode is set as the production mode, during the first half period of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation (reach establishment It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed when chance up mode is determined by production|presentation custom operation before).
As shown in FIG. 587(b), when the production mode is immediately switched based on the execution of the production mode switching operation, a guide for indicating that the production mode has been switched is displayed in the preliminary display area HR6a. The characters "set complete" are displayed as the mode, and the characters "chance up mode being set" indicating the changed effect mode are displayed in the small display area Dm15.
Although detailed description will be given later, in the twentieth control example, when the production custom operation is executed in a state where the special symbol variation is being executed, the timing of switching the production mode according to the progress of the variable production being executed are configured to be different. Moreover, it is configured to vary the timing of switching the production mode according to the type of the selected production mode. In addition, it is configured to vary the timing of switching the production mode according to the content of the variable production to be executed later.

In this way, when the production custom operation is executed during the special pattern fluctuation, by varying the timing of switching the production mode according to various factors, the player can understand the timing of switching the production mode and the variable production during execution. It is possible to provide a novel game property of predicting the result of the variable performance being executed by combining the contents of
Next, with reference to FIG. 588, display contents displayed during selection operation of the production mode in the production custom state will be described. FIG. 588(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the production mode is selected during the loss variation for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.
The display example shown in FIG. 588 (a) is a state where "chance up mode" is set as the production mode, and from the state where "probability change notification mode" is selected by production custom operation, further left button It is a display example showing a state of selecting "normal mode" by operating 600e. Accordingly, in FIG. 588(a), the characters "CHANCE UP MODE SETTING" are displayed in the small display area Dm15. Then, the left arrow LY is displayed in a manner indicating that the left button 600e has been operated, and the selected effect mode is switched from the "probability variable notification mode" to the "normal mode" in the display area HR6. As a display mode indicating that, part of the display mode indicating "probability variable notification mode" (display of "notification mode" in the figure) and part of the display mode indicating "normal mode"("normal" display in the figure ) is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 588(a) shows a display mode in which the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is being scrolled leftward by operating the left button 600e. The display is scrolled until "normal mode" is displayed in the display area HR6.
FIG. 588(a) shows a display example when the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is scrolled to the left by operating the left button 600e during the custom effect state. However, when the effect mode is selected by operating the right button 600c, the right arrow RY is displayed in a display mode to indicate that the right button 600c has been operated, and the display mode of the display area HR6 is displayed. is displayed by scrolling to the right.

In addition, in the twentieth control example, as shown in FIG. 587(a), only the display mode for indicating the effect mode being selected is displayed in the display area HR6. Unless the operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) are operated to scroll the display mode displayed in the display area HR6, all the production modes that can be selected in the current production custom state cannot be grasped. Configure. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 589, but in the twentieth control example, the types of selectable production modes are configured to differ according to the timing of setting the production custom state. there is
Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who desires to play a game in various production modes to perform an operation (operation of the middle button 600a) for setting a custom production state at various timings. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to actively participate in the game in which the operation means is operated.
Further, in the twentieth control example, in a part of the case where the performance custom state is set during the jackpot fluctuation executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the selection is made when the jackpot fluctuation is not executed. A dedicated production mode (premium mode) that cannot be selected (difficult to select) is configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed based on the execution of the selection operation for selecting the performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to positively set the effect custom state for the player who wants to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible.
In addition, in the twentieth control example, when the custom performance state is set, the display mode for showing the performance mode other than the currently selected performance mode is not displayed in the display area HR6. By configuring in this way, since it is not possible to grasp the other settable production modes only by setting the production custom state, the operation (middle button 600a) for setting the production custom state for the player ), as well as the operation for selecting the effect mode (the operation of the right button 600c and the left button 600e). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to actively participate in the game in which the operation means is operated.

In addition, in the present twentieth control example, as described above, only the display mode for indicating one production mode is displayed in the display area HR6. In addition to the display mode for indicating , the effect mode selected when the right button 600c is operated and the effect mode selected when the left button 600e is operated are displayed when the player presses the right button 600c and the left button 600e. At least a part of the display mode corresponding to the display area HR6 may be displayed so that the player can grasp it before the operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the desired effect mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 588(b), the contents of the effect when the effect custom operation is executed in the state where the "premium mode" can be selected will be described. FIG. 588(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the effect mode is selected during the big hit variation for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win. In the twentieth control example, the production custom operation is executed during the jackpot variation when the "jackpot A", which is the jackpot type in which the probability variable state, which is the game state advantageous to the player, is set after the jackpot game ends. In this case, a production mode "premium mode", which cannot be selected except during the fluctuation of the jackpot, is configured to be selectable.
Therefore, when the effect custom operation (the operation of the right button 600c and the left button 600e in the effect custom state) is executed in a state in which the "premium mode" can be selected, a display corresponding to the "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6. Aspects are displayed. As described above, in the twentieth control example, the display area HR6 only displays the display mode for indicating the currently selected production mode. is operated, the display mode corresponding to the "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6 for the first time.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player who is executing the production custom operation for the purpose of simply changing the production mode of the result of the special symbol variation being executed. It is possible to provide an unexpected performance. In addition, it is possible to make the player who wants to quickly grasp the fluctuation result of the special symbol fluctuation under execution (the lottery result of the special symbol lottery) positively perform the performance custom operation.

Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, the player cannot know whether or not the "premium mode" can be selected simply by setting the effect custom state. Even if the player accidentally operates the middle button 600a and the custom production state is set unintentionally, the display mode (display area) displayed based on the custom production state being set is displayed. The display mode displayed on the HR 6) can prevent informing the player of the variation result of the special symbol variation being executed.
In addition, in the display example shown in FIG. 588(b), as a display mode corresponding to the production mode displayed in the display area HR6, identification information for indicating the corresponding production mode (characters for showing the production mode) is displayed. The display modes are the same except that they are different. A display mode may be decorated to make it easier for the player to look at than the display modes corresponding to other production modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to visually inform the player that the effect mode that is advantageous to the player can be selected, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.
Here, with reference to FIG. 589, the selection range of the production mode that can be selected by the production custom operation will be described. Figure 589 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the selection range of the effect mode set during the deviation fluctuation for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out, and Figure 589 (b) , It is a diagram schematically showing the selection range of the production mode that can be set during the big hit fluctuation for showing that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.
As shown in FIG. 589 (a), during the deviation fluctuation, the normal selection range (normal production mode selection area) is set, and as shown in FIG. 589(b), during the jackpot fluctuation, there are four types of production modes: "normal mode", "chance up mode", "probability change notification mode", and "premium mode". It is configured so that a selectable special selection range (special effect mode selection area) can be set.

Although detailed description will be given later, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth control example is provided with an effect custom information table 222wa. Effect regulation information corresponding to the effect mode and information indicating the selection order of the effect mode to be selected when the player executes the effect custom operation are defined. The production mode selection area shown in FIG. 589 schematically shows the selection order of the production modes defined in this production custom information table 222wa.
In the twentieth control example, the player presses the middle button (decision button) 600a, and based on the gaming situation (whether or not the jackpot is fluctuating) at the timing when the custom production state is set, the selectable production It is configured to determine the type of mode, and when the player presses the middle button (determination button) 600a and the effect custom state is set, the player is awarded the most advantageous privilege (jackpot). The number of rounds of the game is 10 rounds, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is changed to a probability variable state. When the lottery for determination is won, the "premium mode" can be selected as the production mode.
Then, when a selectable effect mode is determined by the effect custom operation, the effect mode can be selected within the selection range according to the selection order defined in the effect custom information table 222wa. Therefore, when the right button 600c is operated as a production custom operation during the special symbol variation period for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and won, "probability change notification mode", "chance up mode", " The production modes are selected in the order of "normal mode". Further, when the right button 600c is operated while the "normal mode" is selected, the "variable probability notification mode" is selected in a rotary manner. By configuring in this way, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the effect custom state, all selectable selection modes can be reliably selected. Even a player who feels troublesome to operate a plurality of operation means (the right button 600c and the left button 600e) in the custom production state can be made to execute the custom production operation without fail.
In the twentieth control example, when the effect custom state is set, the display mode for indicating the currently set effect mode is first displayed in the display area HR6. Therefore, for example, when the effect custom state is set during the deviation fluctuation in which the "chance up mode" is set, the display mode of the "chance up mode" is displayed in the display area HR6. Then, according to the operation contents of the right button 600c and the left button 600e, the production mode is selected according to the order shown in FIG. 589(a), and the display mode corresponding to the selected production mode is displayed in the display area HR6. be. With this configuration, the operation for changing the production mode can be executed based on the display mode displayed in the display area HR6, so that the player can perform the production custom operation in an easy-to-understand manner. can.

Also, in the state where "premium mode" can be selected, when the left button 600e is operated as a production custom operation, "normal mode", "chance up mode", "probability change announcement mode", "premium mode" in that order A presentation mode is selected. When the left button 600e is further operated while the "premium mode" is selected, the "normal mode" is selected in a rotary manner. By configuring in this way, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the effect custom state, all selectable selection modes can be reliably selected. Even a player who feels troublesome to operate a plurality of operation means (the right button 600c and the left button 600e) in the custom production state can be made to execute the custom production operation without fail.
In this twentieth control example, as shown in FIG. 589, the player is made to select a plurality of effect modes based on a predetermined selection order. When an operation for selecting a mode is executed, one production mode may be selected at random (in no particular order) from a plurality of selectable production modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the types of currently selectable production modes. The means can be made easier to operate more.
Next, with reference to FIG. 590, the contents of the effect executed when the effect mode switching operation (effect custom operation) is executed (when the enter button 600a is operated) will be described. FIG. 590 is a diagram showing an example in which a notification effect (second notification effect) for notifying a jackpot winning is executed when the effect mode switching operation is executed.
As described above with reference to FIG. 587 (a), normally, in the second half of the variable production, if the production custom operation is executed, until the variable production being executed ends (special symbol being executed Until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed), the production mode is not switched, and "Standby" is displayed in the preliminary display area HR6a. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 590, the effect mode is configured to be switchable while the variable effect is being executed.

Specifically, in the second half of the variable performance corresponding to the variation of the big hit, when the "chance up mode" is determined as the performance mode after switching by the performance custom operation, the predetermined condition is established and the variable performance is executed. It is configured so that the production mode can be switched while it is being performed. In this case, as a display mode for indicating that the production mode has been switched, "set completion" is displayed in the preliminary display area HR6a, and the speaker unit 308 connected to the voice output device 226 indicates the jackpot winning. is configured to output the speech Ke1 of "congratulations".
In this way, by configuring it so that it can be notified that it is a big hit change by the production custom operation executed during the special symbol fluctuation, benefits other than switching the production mode are given according to the timing of executing the production custom operation. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute the effect custom operation at various timings.
In the twentieth control example, in the second half period of the variation performance corresponding to the variation of the big hit, when the "chance up mode" is determined as the performance mode after switching by the performance custom operation, a privilege is given to the player. When a predetermined condition for winning is satisfied and a voice saying "congratulations" is output, the player is given a privilege to notify the player of the winning of the jackpot. For example, the operation means (such as the determination button 600a) used for the effect custom operation is provided with light emitting means (such as LED), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation means is illuminated in a specific manner (for example, rainbow colors). It may be configured to emit light.
Further, as a privilege to be granted when a predetermined condition is established by executing a performance custom operation, a privilege other than the privilege of notifying the winning of the jackpot may be granted. In order to suggest the setting value currently set if the pachinko machine 10 has a setting function (for details, see the 21st control example described later) that provides a privilege for notifying the state or can set different jackpot probabilities. You may comprise so that the privilege of may be provided.

By configuring in this way, in the twentieth control example, the predetermined condition can be established only during the big hit variation, but it is possible to establish the predetermined condition even in other cases, and various It is possible to give benefits based on the production custom operation at such timing.
As described above, in the twentieth control example, it is possible to allow the player to select various presentation modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
In addition, in the twentieth control example, the degree of expectation for winning is made different when the performance (notice performance) is executed in the same performance mode according to the selected performance mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a game according to the game content desired by the player.
Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, when an operation (custom production operation) for switching the production mode is executed during the fluctuation of the jackpot, an operation (custom production operation) for switching the production mode is executed except during the fluctuation of the jackpot. A production mode that cannot be selected in the case of being selected is configured to be selectable. That is, when the timing of executing the effect custom operation satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect mode that cannot be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is selectable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the performance custom operation at various timings, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
In addition, in the twentieth control example, as a predetermined condition for changing the selectable production mode by the production custom operation, information regarding whether or not the big win is fluctuating is used. The type of production mode selectable by the production custom operation may be changed between the state in which the pattern variation is being executed and the state in which the special pattern variation is not being executed. Depending on whether the number of executed special symbol lottery times exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) or not, the type of production mode selectable by the production custom operation may be changed or set. The type of production mode that can be selected by the production custom operation may be varied according to the game state being played.
Also, the types of selectable effect modes may be varied according to the history of the effect modes that have been set in the past. In this case, for example, as an initial state, production mode A, production mode B, and production mode C are configured to be selectable, and when production mode A is selected in that state, as the next selectable production mode, Effect mode A1, effect mode A2, and effect mode A3 may be configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the selectable production modes according to the history of selecting the production mode, so that various production modes are available for the player who wants to execute the game in all production modes. can be set.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 591 and 592, in the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, the pending symbol display is hidden using change roles Ym1 and Ym2, and only the pending symbol during execution is displayed. will be described. FIG. 591(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the pending effect during execution is started and the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are moving so as to hide part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 591(b) is a diagram showing a state in which change character products Ym1 and Ym2 are moved so as to completely hide the display area (display area HR2) of the reserved symbol as a pending effect during execution.

In the twentieth control example, as described above, when the effect pattern (ready mode) of the variable effect being executed progresses (develops) to the effect pattern with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the reserved symbol display is turned off. configured to be displayed. In other words, in order to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol variation being executed, reserved symbol display is performed. is configured to be hidden.
Then, as an effect mode for hiding the reserved symbol, a performance mode for moving the change character Ym1 and Ym2 is set as in the case where the change character object Ym2 is executed in the nineteenth control example, and the change character Ym1 is set. , Ym2 is moved, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the pending change performance for changing the display mode of the pending symbols is executed or the performance for hiding the pending symbols is executed. It consists of
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which one is the target of the effect when the change accessory Ym1 and Ym2 are moved.
Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, when the effect mode of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 in order to hide the reserved symbols is set as the variable effect, the reserved symbol display is performed in a display mode of three or more colors. When reserved symbols are displayed and when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed is a big win, the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 hide all the reserved symbols display, It is constituted so as to be able to execute the performance of changing the display mode of the execution pending pattern (executing pending pattern) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed to the display mode (rainbow color) indicating the winning of the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, the function of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is added to the effect for simply hiding the reserved symbol display (the effect of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2). Since the player can hold it, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
When the pending effect during execution is started, a movable action is executed in which the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are moved from the storage position to the movable position covering part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加The suspended performance during execution is changed from a first performance mode (for example, a normal ready-to-win mode) in which the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is low in the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot to a second performance in which the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is higher than the first performance mode. It is executed in conjunction with the timing of switching to the mode (for example, the super reach mode). In other words, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect mode of the variable effect being executed is switched by moving the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 by the pending effect during execution.
In the pending performance during execution, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 move to cover part of the display area HR2 where the pending symbols are displayed, as in the pending change performance in the 19th control example described above, as shown in FIG. 591 ( The state shown in a) is obtained. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the movement trigger of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 is the pending change effect or the pending effect during execution.
The movable modes of the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 are configured to be different according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 and the display mode, as shown in FIG. 591(a). In the display example, four reserved designs are displayed in the display area HR2, and the first reserved design hr1 is "yellow", the second reserved design hr2 is "blue", and the third reserved design hr3 is "green", and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is displayed in a "red" display mode, that is, the first reserved pattern hr1 to the third reserved pattern hr3 are displayed in three different colors, This shows an example in which only the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is hidden by the change role product Ym2.

Then, when the pending effect during execution progresses, as shown in FIG. On the display surface of the symbol display device 81, a decorative display (black dark display in the drawing) corresponding to the movement of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position is executed. Then, a display element (each An effect is executed in which an additional symbol corresponding to the element indicating the color of the pending symbol is released toward the active pending hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.
In FIG. 591(b), the first reserved design hr1, the second reserved design hr2, and the fourth reserved design hr4 displayed in the display area HR2 are released from the display area HR2, and are absorbed into the in-execution reserved design hr0. shows an example. As a display mode of the additional symbols released from the display area HR2 based on the movement of the change character Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the reserved design that has been held may be used as it is, or a display mode showing only specific elements (color information) constituting the display mode of the reserved design may be used. As shown in FIG. 591(b), the display area HR1 in which the execution pending symbol hr0 is displayed is formed above the central portion of the display area HR2, and the left change accessory Ym1 and the right change accessory Ym2 is provided above the position where it abuts when Ym2 is moved to the second movable position. Therefore, the pending effect during execution is executed, the effect that the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 move to the second movable position, and the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 (the first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 ) is released, and the player can easily understand that it is related to the effect absorbed by the pending-in-execution symbol hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.
Then, the first reserved design hr1, the second reserved design hr2, and the fourth reserved design hr4 displayed in the display area HR2 are absorbed into the in-execution reserved design hr0, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the symbol hr0 changes from "white" to "rainbow", and the pending effect during execution ends. By changing the display mode of the pending symbol hr0 during execution to "rainbow", it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol variation during execution has won a jackpot. In addition, when the effect result of the pending effect during execution is an effect result that is advantageous to the player, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays the decoration mode corresponding to the effect result (in FIG. 592, a star display mode) is displayed.
The pending performance during execution is the time before the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed informs the performance result (the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is the first performance mode with a low jackpot winning expectation (for example , normal reach mode) to a second effect mode (for example, super reach mode) with a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the first effect mode). Regardless of the performance result of the pending performance during execution, the preset variable performance is continuously executed, and the performance mode is switched from normal reach to SP reach (super reach) in the sub display area Ds. "SP Reach", which is a display mode for notifying of, is displayed.

In other words, when a performance result advantageous to the player (a performance result in which the running pending pattern hr0 changes to a rainbow color) is displayed as the performance result of the pending performance during execution, the performance result of the variable performance is a jackpot winning. Since the variable performance can be seen in a state in which it is grasped in advance that the performance result will be shown, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, since it is possible to grasp in advance that the performance result of the variable performance will be the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the performance mode of the variable performance is set as low as possible in the degree of expectation for the big win, and is experienced frequently. It is possible to play the game while expecting to be notified (displayed) of the performance result that cannot be performed.
When the pending effect during execution shown in FIG. 592 ends, the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 move to the initial positions, and the display area HR2 becomes visible to the player. In this case, the display modes (colors) of the reserved patterns (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) displayed before execution of the pending effect during execution are all the default display patterns (white). is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily think that the display mode (color) added by the pending change effect executed for each pending pattern is used for the pending effect during execution. , it is possible to easily associate the pending change performance for each pending symbol with the pending performance during execution. In addition, as shown in FIG. 592, when the performance result of the suspension performance during execution is the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the suspension performance during execution continues until the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed. When the third symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot, the suspension performance during execution is terminated.
Therefore, the display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved information used in the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game can be temporarily set to the default (white) display mode. , After the end, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is changed (when the probability state of the special symbol is switched), the display mode set by the holding change effect executed before the jackpot game is the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the execution of the advance notice effect which is continuously displayed even after the end and which is difficult for the player to understand.
Next, referring to FIGS. 593 to 595, among the execution timings of the production custom operation in the twentieth control example, the execution timing of the production custom operation during the special symbol fluctuation period and the special effect custom operation execution timing The flow of setting the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the pattern fluctuation will be explained.

As described above, in this twentieth control example, the effect custom operation is configured to be executable during the special symbol variation period, and according to the execution timing of the effect custom operation, even during the special symbol variation period, the effect mode are switchable. Here, the difference between the case where the production mode can be switched during the special symbol fluctuation period and the case where it cannot be switched will be explained.
First, with reference to FIG. 593, the flow of determining the effect mode of the variable effect executed corresponding to the special symbol change period will be described. Figure 593 is the figure which shows the flow which sets fluctuation production during special figure fluctuation. In Figure 593, in order to explain the basic flow of determining the effect mode of the variable effect, it shows the flow when the effect custom operation is not executed during the special figure fluctuation.
Therefore, as shown in Figure 593 (a), "normal mode" is always set as the production mode during the corresponding special figure fluctuation period. As shown in Figure 593 (b), at the start timing of the special symbol variation with a variation time of 30 seconds, as the effect mode of the corresponding variation effect, the overall effect pattern (effect A) and the first half period (10 seconds) The type (blue) of the chance-up effect (first half notice mode) to be executed is determined, and the variation effect is executed corresponding to the start of the special symbol variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 593 (c), when 6 seconds have passed since the variable production (production A) started, the first half notice of 2 seconds is executed, and after 2 seconds have passed since the first half notice is finished ( Elapsed timing of the first half period), that is, at the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the special symbol fluctuation started, the type of chance-up effect (second half advance notice mode) executed in the second half period (20 seconds) (blue) is determined.
That is, in the twentieth control example, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to one special symbol variation is determined at a plurality of timings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine at least a part of the performance mode of the variable performance being executed according to the requirements established during the variable performance period in which one variable performance is being executed. , it is possible to make it easy to determine without delay the mode of presentation corresponding to the fulfillment of the requirements.

In the twentieth control example, one variable effect is divided into two effect periods, the first half period and the second half period, and the mode of the advance notice effect (prediction mode) to be executed in each effect period is determined at different timings. However, one variable performance may be divided into three or more performance periods. Thus, the length of one performance period can be easily shortened as the variable performance is divided into a plurality of performance periods, so that the advance notice mode corresponding to the requirements established during the variable performance can be determined without delay. can be made easier.
Further, in the twentieth control example, at the timing when one variable performance is executed, the performance pattern (performance mode) of the variable performance to be executed over the entire one variable performance period is determined, and the variable performance period is determined. Of these, a specific period (the first notice period, which is 2 seconds after 6 seconds have passed since the variable effect started, and the second notice period, which is 2 seconds after 28 seconds have passed since the variable effect started ) can be determined at different timings. By constructing in this way, it is possible to set the mode of the advance notice performance (prediction mode) at different timings while continuously executing the performance pattern (performance mode) executed over the entire one variable performance period. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.
In addition, in this twentieth control example, the production pattern (production mode) executed over the entire production period is set in advance (variation is set at the start timing of the performance), and the performance mode (notice mode) of the notice performance to be executed within the specific period of the performance period is appropriately determined at different timings, but is limited to this. A performance pattern (performance mode) to be executed over the entire performance period is set in advance (at the start timing of the variable performance) for the performance period of the variable performance executed corresponding to a plurality of special pattern variations. It may be configured to appropriately determine at different timings the effect mode (notice mode) of the notice effect to be executed within a specific period of the effect period, or a plurality of special symbol variations are executed. For an effect period to be obtained (for example, an effect period in which a state effect for indicating the set game state is executed), an effect pattern (for example, background effect) to be executed over the entire effect period is set in advance ( (at the timing when the game state is set), and the performance mode of the performance (for example, the performance mode of the variable performance) to be executed within the specific period of the performance period is appropriately determined at different timings. can be
Next, with reference to FIG. 594, the flow of setting the variable production during the special figure fluctuation and the transition of the production mode when the production custom operation is executed in the first half period of the variable production will be described. Figure 594 is the figure which shows the flow which sets fluctuation production during special figure fluctuation and the flow of production mode shift when production custom operation is executed in the first half period of fluctuation production.

594 described above is different in that the production custom operation is executed during the first half period of the variable production, and the production mode is switched during the variable production period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 594(a), "normal mode" is set as the effect mode when the corresponding special figure variation is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 594 (b), at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, the overall production pattern (production A) and the first half period (10 seconds ), the type (blue) of the chance-up effect (first half announcement mode) to be executed is determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 594(c), when 6 seconds have passed since the variable effect (effect A) was started, the first half announcement for 2 seconds is executed.
Then, if the production custom operation is executed during the first half of the variable production and the "chance up mode" is selected, the advance notice production (second half notice mode ) is performed. FIG. 594(b) shows an example in which (red) is determined as the second half announcement mode at the timing when the effect custom operation is executed. This second half notice mode (red) is an effect mode that can be executed when the "chance up mode" is set, so as shown in FIG. A display mode for indicating that the "normal mode" has been switched to the "chance up mode" is displayed.
On the other hand, with respect to the flow of FIG. 594, if the production custom operation is executed during the first half period of the variable production and the "chance up mode" is selected, the notice production executed in the second half period (second half notice mode) ), if (blue) is determined as the second half notice mode, this second half notice mode (blue) is an effect mode that cannot be executed when the "chance up mode" is set. , As shown in FIG. 595(a), at the timing when the performance custom operation is executed, the "normal mode" is continuously displayed, and the display mode for indicating that the next variation is switched to the "chance up mode" is changed. Is displayed.
That is, in the twentieth control example, when the effect custom operation is executed during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the effect custom operation is performed according to the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed during the remaining remaining period. The timing of notifying that the production mode has switched is made different. Specifically, when the production custom operation is executed, if the production mode of the variable production executed during the remaining remaining period is a production mode that conforms to the production mode after the change, the production mode is immediately changed. When the switching is notified and the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period is a performance mode that does not match the performance mode after the change, or the performance mode is executed in common regardless of the set performance mode. In the case of an effect mode that is likely to be played, it is configured to notify that the effect mode has been switched after the remaining period has elapsed.

By constructing in this way, when the performance custom operation is executed during the variable performance, the player can be interested in at what timing the performance mode is switched based on the performance custom operation. Further, in the twentieth control example, the timing of notifying that the production mode has been switched by the production custom operation is changed according to the production mode of the advance notice production that is executed after the production custom operation is executed. , In the case of setting the "chance up mode", which is a production mode that can notify that the expectation of winning a jackpot is high just by executing the advance notice production by the production custom operation, the production mode is switched during the variable production period. It is possible to make it easy for the player to predict that there is a high possibility that the variable performance being executed is the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot just by being notified of this fact.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twentieth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 596 to 599. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 are different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example described above. , and are different, and the other configurations are the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 596, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth control example will be described. FIG. 596 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 596, this twentieth control example differs from the above-described nineteenth control example in that an effect custom information table 222wa and a late notice effect selection table 222wb are added. Other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The effect custom information table 222wa is a data table that defines information corresponding to each effect mode selectable by the player. ) is referenced when reading the information corresponding to the rendered effect mode. The information read here is stored in a custom information storage area 223wb, which will be described later, and is referred to when determining the effect mode of the variable effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 597, the contents defined in the effect custom information table 222wa will be described. FIG. 597 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect custom information table 222wa. As shown in FIG. 597, the effect custom information table 222wa includes a selection condition that enables selection by the effect custom operation for four types of custom types (effect mode types) selectable by the player, and The set contents (specified contents) of the presentation mode in the case are defined.
In the twentieth control example, a maximum of four types of production mode types (custom types) can be selected by executing the production custom operation, and according to the selected production mode type (custom type), It is configured so that the execution frequency of the effects to be executed (read-ahead effects, advance notice effects, etc.) and the degree of expectation for winning can be varied.
More specifically, depending on the production mode type (custom type), each production mode type (custom type) so that the execution frequency of the pending change production, the execution frequency of the probability change notification production, and the execution frequency of the late notice production are different On the other hand, the setting condition of the presentation mode is defined.
As shown in FIG. 597, for the custom type (production mode type) "normal mode", "always" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "normal mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can always be selected by the production custom operation. Then, the execution frequency of the pending change effect is "medium", the execution frequency of the probability change notification is "medium", and the execution frequency of the second half advance notice effect is "medium". That is, when the "normal mode" is selected, various effects are executed at normal frequencies.

For the custom type (production mode type) "chance up mode", "always" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "chance up mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can always be selected by the production custom operation. And, the execution frequency "low" of the pending change effect, the execution frequency "middle" of the probability change notification, and the execution frequency "low" of the latter half notice effect are defined. In other words, when the "chance-up mode" is selected, the execution frequency of the pending change effect and the second-half notice effect is made lower than when the "normal mode" is selected.
In the twentieth control example, the lower the execution frequency of various effects is set, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot when they are executed. In other words, the execution frequency of various performances is changed by changing the selection ratio of the performance mode at the time of losing the winning without changing the selection ratio of selecting the performance mode at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, when the ``chance-up mode'' is selected for the ``normal mode'', it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot when the pending change effect or the second half notice effect is executed.
Next, for the custom type (production mode type) "probability variable notification mode", "always" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "variable probability notification mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can always be selected by production custom operation. Then, the execution frequency of the pending change effect is "medium", the execution frequency of the probability change notification is "high", and the execution frequency of the second half advance notice effect is "medium". That is, when the "probability variation notification mode" is selected, the pending change performance and the second half notice performance are executed at the same frequency as in the "normal mode", and the execution frequency of the probability variation notification is increased.
Finally, for the custom type (production mode type) "premium mode", "a portion of the jackpot fluctuating" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "premium mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can be selected when the production custom operation is executed in one of the variations of the jackpot.

When this "premium mode" is selected, regardless of the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the contents of the already set effect mode, a special It is configured so that a special production (blessing production) is executed. Therefore, the pending change effect and the second half advance notice effect are not executed, and the execution frequency "-" of the hold change effect and the execution frequency "-" of the second half notice effect are defined. In addition, the "premium mode" is configured to be selectable only when the jackpot type "jackpot A" in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is set, so the "premium mode" is selected. A special dedicated effect (blessing effect) that is executed in the case of having a probability variable notification function to indicate that the probability variable state is set, so "definite notification" is defined as the probability variable notification. .
In addition, in the twentieth control example, the four types of effect modes described above are configured to be selectable, but the player may be configured to be able to select five or more types of effect modes as the selectable effect modes. . In this case, as a selectable production mode, for example, a production mode (silent mode) in which the production (notice production) for suggesting the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is not executed (hardly executed) may be set. good. By providing such a performance mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in advance whether or not he or she will win the big win, so that the player can always play the game while expecting to win the big win. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing an effect that can gradually suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by changing the display mode of the specific identification information step by step, the display for showing the degree of expectation for the big win step by step. A production mode (happening mode) in which aspects are exchanged may be configured to be settable. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a pending change effect that can suggest to a player the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot by gradually changing the color of the pending symbol, normally, the color of the pending symbol is "blue." → green → red → rainbow”, whereas the expectation of winning a jackpot increases in the order of “rainbow → red → green → blue” by setting the above-mentioned happening mode. It is better to configure it so that it is higher. It should be noted that when a predetermined condition (while the big win is fluctuating) is established, the configuration may be such that selectable production modes are limited, and only the big win blessing mode may be selectable. This configuration can be said to be a configuration in which an effect mode different from usual is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the relationship between the display mode of the identification information and the degree of expectation for the big win according to the set production mode, so that normally, it is easy to lose and win. is a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and if it is normal, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is off, and it becomes a performance that makes it easy to win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
The second half notice effect selection table 222wb is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode (notice mode) of the second half notice executed in the second half period of the variable effect, and is a data table for determining the effect pattern of the target variable effect. Correspondingly, different advance notice modes are stipulated, and in the variable effect update process (see F3551 in FIG. 607) executed in the effect update process (see F2161 in FIG. 606), it is determined that it is the first half period end timing of the variable effect. If it is determined (F3902 in FIG. 607: Yes), it is referred to determine the effect mode of the latter half of the advance notice effect. Also, when the effect custom operation is executed during the first half of the variable effect and the effect mode is switched (F3709 in FIG. 604: Yes), reference is made to determine the effect mode of the second half notice effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 598, the contents defined in the second half announcement effect selection table 222wb will be described. FIG. 598 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the second half announcement effect selection table 222wb. As shown in Figure 598, the latter half of the advance notice effect selection table 222wb, the currently set custom type (effect mode type), and the success or failure determination result (lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the target variable effect) and , different production modes (notice modes) of the second half of the advance notice effects are defined in association with the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf and the execution effects (target effect patterns of the variable effects).
As shown in Figure 598, there are "effect A" and "effect B" in the effect pattern executed as the variable effect, and according to the effect pattern of the variable effect to be executed, it is executed in the latter half of the variable effect period. The number of notice productions to be performed is different. Specifically, when "effect A" is set as the effect pattern, the notice effect is performed once in the second half period, and when "effect B" is set, the notice effect is performed twice in the second half period. configured to be possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the advance notice performance to be executed in the second half period according to the performance pattern of the variable performance to be executed, and to enhance the performance effect.
Specifically, when "normal mode" or "variable probability notification mode" is set as the custom type (production mode type), that is, the custom type (production mode type) is set, and if the success/failure determination result is "win", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf For the range of "0 to 39", the second half first notice "blue" is for the range "40 to 69", and the second half first notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98". , the second half first notice "red" is defined, and if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect B", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf falls within the range of "0 to 39". On the other hand, the first half notice “blue” and the second half notice “red” are in the range of “40 to 69”, the first half notice “green” and the second notice “green” are in the range of “70 98”, the first half notice “green” and the second half notice “red” are defined.
In addition, if the result of the judgment is "off", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 39" , the second half first notice "blue" is for the range "40 to 69", the second half first notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98", the second half first notice "red" is defined, and if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect B", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 39", the second half first notice "blue" , The second half notice "red" is for the range "40 to 69", the first half notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98", and the second notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98". The first notice "green" and the second half notice "red" are defined.

Here, the types of each advance notice mode defined in the second half advance notice effect selection table 222wb will be described. As shown in FIG. 598, in this twentieth control example, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot (win) is configured to differ according to the type of each notification mode, namely, "blue", "green", and "red". It is configured so that the expectation of winning will be higher in the order of.
Specifically, in the second half of the first notice when the effect pattern "effect A" is being executed, the advance notice mode "blue" is selected at a rate of 40/90 when the success/failure determination result is "hit". , is selected at 30/99 in the case of "miss", and the advance notice mode "green" is selected at a rate of 30/90 when the hit/fail judgment result is "hit", and is selected at a rate of 9/99 in the case of "miss" The selected advance notice mode "red" is selected at a rate of 29/90 when the win/loss determination result is "hit", and is not selected when it is "miss".
In other words, by making the selection ratio of each notice mode in the case of a mis-win greatly different from the selection ratio of each notice mode in the case of winning, it is possible to achieve a winning when each notice mode is set. It is configured so that the degree of expectation is different, and the prediction mode "blue" has the lowest winning expectation, followed by the notice mode "green" and the notice mode "red", so that the winning expectation is higher. It consists of
Further, in contrast to the notice modes "blue" and "green", the notice mode "red" is configured to be selected only when the player wins. By configuring in this way, if "normal mode" or "probability change notification mode" is set as the production mode type, even if the result of the judgment is "hit", even if it is "off" Second-half notice performances of various notice modes can be easily executed, and performances that prevent the player from getting tired of the game early can be provided.

On the other hand, when "chance up mode" is set as the custom type (production mode type), that is, when the custom type (production mode type) is set with the execution frequency "low" of the second half advance notice production, If the success/failure determination result is "win", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59" , the second half first notice ``no'' is specified in the range of ``60 to 98'', the second half first notice ``red'' is specified, and the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is ``effect B''. For example, when the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf is in the range of “0 to 59”, the second half of the first notice is “none” and the second half of the notice is “none” to the range of “60 to 79”. , the first half notice ``no'' and the second half notice ``red'', and the second half notice ``red'' and the second half notice ``red'' are defined for the range of ``80 to 98''.
In addition, if the result of the judgment is "off", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94" , the second half first notice ``no'' is specified in the range of ``95 to 98'', the second half first notice ``red'' is specified, and the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is ``effect B'' , the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94", the second half of the first notice is "none", and the second half of the second notice is "none" to the range of "95 to 98", The first half notice "none" and the second half notice "red" are defined.
In other words, when the "chance up mode" is set, it is difficult to execute the second half notice effect than when the "normal mode" or "variable probability notice mode" is set (difficult to set the notice mode), At the time when the second-half announcement effect is executed (an announcement mode is set), it is possible to increase the expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to quickly predict whether or not the jackpot will be won.
In addition, in the present twentieth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. In a ``chance-up mode'' in which the mode ``red'' is set and the latter half of the announcement effect is executed only in a specific notification mode, the notification mode ``red'' is set even when the game is not won. . In other words, when "normal mode" and "probability variable notification mode" are set, the expectation of winning is low only by executing the second half notice effect (setting the notice mode), and the specific notice mode When "red" is set, the expectation of winning is high, whereas when "chance up mode" is set, the second half notice effect is executed (the notice mode is set). While the degree of expectation for winning by only winning is high, a specific notice mode "red" is set in a part of cases where winning is lost.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the attention point regarding the second half notice effect according to the set effect mode type (custom type), so that various effect mode types (custom type) ) to make it easier to play.
Next, when "premium mode" is set as a custom type (production mode type), that is, when the jackpot is fluctuating, the production patterns of the variable production being executed are "production A" and "production B". In either case, the forewarning mode "rainbow" is always set for the second half foretelling effect that can be executed. In other words, as described above, the "premium mode" is a custom type (production mode type) that can be selected only during the jackpot fluctuation in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is set. , At the time when the "premium mode" is selected, the player is notified that the jackpot is fluctuating. It is configured so that a special notice mode "rainbow" is always set to indicate that the
By configuring in this way, by setting the "premium mode", a notice form (for example, "blue") indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is given to the player who knows that the jackpot will be won. , "Green") has been executed in the second half of the announcement, and you may not have won the jackpot? It is possible to suppress the confusion.
Next, referring to FIG. 599, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth control example will be described. FIG. 599 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twentieth control example. As shown in FIG. 599 , in the twentieth control example, in contrast to the nineteenth control example described above, the production customizing flag 223wa, the custom information storage area 223wb, the mode change waiting flag 223wc, the second half advance notice set flag 223wd, the second half The difference is that an announcement information storage area 223we is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The production customizing flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that the player is executing a production custom operation for changing the production mode type, and is turned on while the production custom operation is being executed. is set to This effect customizing flag 223wa allows the player to operate (press) the decision button (middle button) 600a while the player is not performing the volume adjustment operation or the light amount adjustment operation (environment adjustment operation), and select the effect mode type. state (custom production state) is set (see F3806 in FIG. 605), it is set to ON, and in the custom production state, the determination button (middle button) 600a for determining the production mode type is operated. is set to off (see F3707 in FIG. 604).
In this way, by providing the effect customizing flag 223wa that can determine that the effect customizing state is set, the content of the control processing when the right button 600c and the left button 600e are operated can be changed to the setting state of the effect customizing flag 223wa. can be different depending on Specifically, in the state in which the production customizing flag 223wa is set to ON, that is, in the production customizing state, the production mode is activated based on the operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e. The selection control for selecting the type is executed, and the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated when the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to OFF, that is, when the effect customizing state is not set. Based on the above, selection control can be executed to select the light amount level.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute different selection controls using the same operation means (right button 600c, left button 600e). In a pachinko machine 10 capable of causing a player to execute an operation for changing the mode, etc., the types of operation means can be reduced compared to the case where dedicated operation means are provided corresponding to each change operation. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure an area for providing the operating means. In addition, by reducing the types of operation means provided for the same area, it is possible to design one operation means (press button) to be large, thus providing an operation means that is easy for the player to operate. can be made easier.
Furthermore, in the twentieth control example, the change state (light amount adjustment operation state, effect custom state) for changing each game environment can be terminated by the player operating the decision button (middle button) 600a. It is configured so that In other words, it is configured so that each change state can be ended when the player decides on an arbitrary game environment. Therefore, when each change state is set, the period during which the change state is set can be shortened compared to the case where the control for ending the change state set based on the elapsed time is executed. To make it easy to change a plurality of types of game environments in a short period of time.

The custom information storage area 223wb is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the effect mode type (custom type) selected by the effect custom operation. 600c, 600e) to select a game mode, information for indicating the selected game mode is stored. Information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (information indicating the selected presentation mode) is referred to when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation.
The information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb is cleared when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the start-up process executed when the power supply is started "normal mode ” is stored. Therefore, in the initial state when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the "normal mode" is set as the effect mode type.
By constructing in this manner, the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed using the performance mode in which various performances are evenly executed for the player who is not interested in changing the performance mode. , it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.
The mode change waiting flag 223wc is a period from when the effect custom operation is executed in the effect custom state and the effect mode different from the current one is determined until the display mode indicating that the effect mode is actually switched is displayed. It is set to ON at the timing when a production mode different from the current one is determined, and the ON state continues until the display mode for indicating that the production mode has actually switched is displayed. It consists of

In the twentieth control example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 waits for the effect mode change condition to be satisfied based on the fact that the mode change wait flag 223wc is set to ON. It is configured so that a “waiting” image is displayed. By configuring in this way, the production mode is not switched even though the production custom operation is normally executed, or the production custom operation is not normally executed in the first place, and the production mode is not switched. can be easily grasped by the player.
The second half advance notice set flag 223wd is a flag for indicating that the effect mode of the second half advance notice effect to be executed in the second half period of the variable effect is determined, and the variable effect is being executed and the variable effect is being executed. It is set to ON when the effect mode of the second half advance notice effect is determined based on the execution of the effect custom operation before the first half period elapses. Then, the setting state is discriminated in the first half period of the variable performance, and when it is discriminated that it is not set to ON, the performance mode of the second half notice performance is determined when the first half period of the variable performance elapses. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON, the process of determining the effect mode of the latter half notice effect when the first half period of the variable effect has passed is skipped.
In the twentieth control example, a plurality of performance modes set as one variable performance (variation performance set corresponding to one special symbol variation) are performed at one timing (for example, the start timing of the variable performance). Not all of them are determined, but some of the performance modes are configured to be determined after the variable performance is executed. Specifically, the execution period of one variable performance is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the performance mode of the notice performance (second half notice performance) executed in the second half period is determined when the first half period has passed. is doing. By configuring in this way, the production mode corresponding to various events (for example, the change operation of the production mode, the acquisition of a new special figure reservation, etc.) that occurred in the first half period of the variable production is changed to the production form of the second half notice production. Therefore, compared to the case where all of the multiple production modes set as one variable production are determined at the start timing of the variable production, various events during the variable production (for example, the production mode When a change operation, acquisition of a new special figure reservation, etc.) occurs, it is possible to quickly determine the performance mode corresponding to the event that occurred (during the variable performance execution period).
Furthermore, when the performance mode is changed by executing the performance custom operation before the first half period of the variable performance period elapses, the performance mode of the second half notice performance is based on the performance mode after the change at that time. is determinable. Then, when it is determined that the effect mode of the latter half of the advance notice effect matches the contents of the effect mode after the change, a display mode (" Set completion") is displayed, and if it is determined that the production mode of the second half notice production does not match the contents of the production mode after the change, the display form indicating that the production mode is waiting for switching ("Waiting") is configured to be displayed. By constructing in this way, the player who has executed the production custom operation during the variable production period is immediately switched to the production mode without waiting until the variable production being executed ends before the production mode is switched. A switching display can be executed. Further, immediately after the effect mode switching display is executed, the notice effect (second half notice effect) is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the switched (changed) effect mode. It is possible to make it easier to realize.

In addition, in the twentieth control example, when the effect custom operation is executed during the first half period of the variable effect, among the advance notice effects to be executed during the variable effect period, the effect mode (notice mode) is not determined. Although it is configured to execute the process of determining the effect mode based on the changed effect mode for the effect (second half preview effect), it is not limited to this, for example, at the start timing of the variable effect, The effect mode (notice mode) of various advance notice effects to be executed during the variable effect period is determined, and at the time when the operation for switching the effect mode is executed by the effect custom operation, the notice effect that has not yet been executed is determined. to determine the content of the effect mode (notice mode) that has already been set, and if the content of the determined effect mode (notice mode) matches the effect mode after the change, perform switching display of the effect mode, If they do not match, it may be configured to execute standby display for switching the effect mode.
In other words, it is preferable to configure so as to execute a display that accepts a change in the effect mode only when the effect mode of the preset advance notice effect matches the content of the effect mode set based on the effect custom operation. . By configuring in this way, immediately after the switching display of the production mode is executed, the notice production (second half notice production) is executed in the production mode corresponding to the switched (changed) production mode, so that the production mode is changed. It is possible to make it easy for the player to realize that the switching has been made.
The second half notice information storage area 223we is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the effect mode of the second half notice effect determined during the first half of the variable effect period. When an operation is executed and a performance mode (announcement mode) of the second half notice performance is determined before the first half period elapses, information for indicating the determined performance mode (announcement mode) is stored. (See F3711 in FIG. 604). Then, when the first half period of the variable effect period has passed and the effect mode (notice mode) of the second half notice effect is determined at the timing when the effect mode (notice mode) of the second half notice effect is set ( In F3903 of FIG. 607: Yes), the information stored in the second-half announcement information storage area 223we is read out, and an effect mode (announcement mode) based on the read information is set (F3905 of FIG. 607). .
<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twentieth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 600 to 607, among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th control example, control processes different from the 19th control example described above are performed. Explain the content. In the twentieth control example, as described above, it is possible to select a plurality of effect modes with different winning expectation levels for the notice effect to be executed, and an effect (execution) of hiding the reserved symbol. and the 19th control example described above, and the control processing related to the difference is executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, This is different from the nineteenth control example described above.

Specifically, instead of the hold effect execution process at the start of fluctuation (see F3109 in FIG. 582), the hold effect execution process at the start of fluctuation (see F3159 in FIG. 600) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring and effect process (F2107 in FIG. 583). ) instead of frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see F2137 in FIG. 602), enter button operation processing (see F3315 in FIG. 584) instead of enter button operation processing (see F3332 in FIG. The difference is that the effect update process (see F2161 in FIG. 606) is executed instead of the process (see F2111 in FIG. 586), and the other control process contents are the same. The same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 600, the holding effect execution processing at the start of fluctuation (F3159) will be described. FIG. 600 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the holding effect execution processing at the start of fluctuation (F3159). As shown in FIG. 600, in the twentieth control example, a pending change scenario is stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl for the suspension effect execution process at the start of variation (see F31909 in FIG. 582) of the nineteenth control example described above. When it is determined that there is no information to indicate (F3201: No), for setting an execution suspension change effect to change the display mode of the execution suspension pattern (execution suspension hr0 displayed in the display area HR1 in FIG. 591) The difference is that the pending change effect setting process during execution (F3251) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 601, the processing contents of the in-execution pending change effect setting process (F3251) will be described. FIG. 601 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the in-execution pending change effect setting process (F3251). In this in-execution pending change effect setting process (F3251), a process for setting the effect mode of the in-execution pending effect is executed.
When the pending change effect setting process during execution (F3251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the current variable effect is a movable effect in which the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are moved (F3601), and the movable effect is performed. If it is determined to be (F3601: Yes), the information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is read (F3602). It is discriminated whether or not there is a reserved design that triggers the execution of the reserved change effect among the obtained reserved designs (F3603).

In the process of F3603, if it is determined that there is no information indicating the pending change scenario (F3603: No), then the acquired pending design (first pending design hr1 to fourth pending design hr4) is three or more colors It is determined whether it is displayed in the display mode (F3604). In the process of F3604, the display mode (color) of the displayed reserved design is determined based on the information (reserved color information) indicating the display mode of each reserved design stored in the reserved information storage area 223vl.
In the process of F3604, if it is determined that three or more reserved symbols are displayed (F3604: Yes), then it is determined whether the special symbol variation corresponding to this variation effect is a big hit variation ( F3605), when it is determined that it is a jackpot change (F3605: Yes), a display change pattern command for indicating a pending change effect during execution is set (F3606), and a character action scenario 4 is determined (F3607) , sets a role product motion command indicating the determined role product motion scenario (F3608), and terminates this process.
Here, in the process of F3605, based on the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, it is determined whether or not the current variation effect is the variation effect corresponding to the big hit variation. That is, the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes information for indicating the variation time of the special symbol variation, information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and Information including at least is set.
In the twentieth control example, similarly to the nineteenth control example described above, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, based on the variation time of the special symbol variation. In order to suppress it, the same length of fluctuation time (variation pattern) can be set regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so the fluctuation pattern command (variation time) set this time is Apart from the information shown, it is configured to include information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, but not limited to this, for example, based on the length of the set fluctuation pattern (variation time) When the result of the special symbol lottery can be discriminated on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot and when the loser wins, different lengths of fluctuation time are set. If it is, there is no need to separately set information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and only the information indicating the length of the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol variation is included in the variation pattern command. do it. In this case, as a variation time (variation pattern) with a different length set based on the result of the special symbol lottery, various variation patterns set at the time of winning are different from various variation patterns set at the time of jackpot winning. It is preferable to configure the lengths to be slightly different (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the difference). For example, when a variation pattern that can be set when a big win is won has a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. 3, it is preferable to have a variation pattern with a variation time of 60.5 seconds as a variation pattern that can be set at the time of a lost winning.

By configuring in this way, only by including information for indicating the set variation pattern (variation time) in the variation pattern command, the variation effect set this time is the special symbol variation that is winning the jackpot. A voice lamp control device 113 side makes it easy to determine whether it is a variation performance executed in correspondence with or a variation performance executed in correspondence with a special symbol variation that is not won (lost winning). In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the set fluctuation pattern (difference in fluctuation time).
In addition, since the variation time of substantially the same length can be set for the jackpot variation and the loss variation, the variation performance executed during the jackpot variation and the variation performance performed during the loss variation are different. It is possible to make it easy to execute the same variable performance except that only the performance result is different.
Here, the contents of the character product action scenario (character product action scenario 4) set in the execution pending change effect setting process (F3251) described with reference to FIG. 601 will be described. This role product motion scenario is a scenario for causing the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 to operate in a predetermined mode, as in the 19th control example described above, and is defined in advance in the motion scenario table 222wf. Note that the action scenario table 222wf corresponds to the role action scenario 1 to the role action scenario 3 having the same content as the 19th control example described above, as well as the role action scenario 4 that can be selected during the pending change effect during execution. When the role product action scenario 4 is set, first, among the plurality of (maximum 4) reserved patterns displayed in the display area HR2, specific three reserved patterns ( 591(a)), and then the reserved design (first reserved design) displayed in the display area HR2 The change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to the second specific position (see FIG. 591(b)) to hide all the symbols to the fourth reserved symbols), and then the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to the initial position (storage position). The change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are movably controlled so as to be movable.
Then, when the pending performance during execution is executed, a suspended symbol is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the movable state of the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 corresponding to the above-described role product action scenario 4. is hidden, and an effect (see FIGS. 591 and 592) is executed to change the display mode of the pending design during execution.

In the twentieth control example, the change role Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to a position where the reserved symbol display area HR2 becomes difficult to see, and the reserved symbol displayed in the display area HR2 is the change role. By using the display mode of the pending symbols displayed in the display area HR2 in accordance with the timing when it becomes difficult to see due to the objects Ym1 and Ym2, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the pending symbols during execution. The movement of the objects Ym1 and Ym2 does not simply make the reserved patterns difficult to see, but makes the player think that the change character Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to change the reserved patterns during execution. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.
Here, in the twentieth control example, an example is shown in which the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to a position where the reserved symbol display area HR2 becomes difficult to see. By moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 to the variable display position of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the display device 81, the degree of expectation for the player to win the special symbol being executed is increased. It may be configured to suggest high. In this case, in addition to the display area HR2 where the reserved symbols are displayed, the display area HR1 where the pending symbols during execution hr0 are displayed becomes difficult to see due to the movable change roles Ym1 and Ym2, and the suspended symbols during execution are displayed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to predict the result of the special symbol lottery that is being executed, including the mode.
In this case, it is preferable to change the display position of the execution pending symbol (the position where the display area HR1 is formed) corresponding to the execution of the movable effect of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2. It is preferable to form the display region HR1 outside the movable regions Ym1 and Ym2. As a result, even when the change hands Ym1 and Ym2 are in a movable state, the pending symbols during execution can be visually recognized with certainty, so that the player can easily predict the result of the special symbol lottery during execution. can do.
However, when the above-described configuration is used, that is, when the position of the display area HR1 in which the pending design is displayed is changed while the pending design is being displayed, the display area after the change There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the pending symbols displayed in HR1 are the pending symbols during execution or the pending symbols before execution. That is, in a state in which the pending symbol hr0 during execution is displayed in the "white" display mode and the first suspended symbol hr1 is also displayed in the "white" display mode, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are movable. Then, when the display area HR2 displaying the first pending symbol hr1 and the display area HR1 displaying the pending symbol hr0 during execution are covered with the change character goods Ym1 and Ym2, the display area HR2 is When the display area HR1 is hidden, the display area HR1 is formed at a different display position (the display position which does not overlap with the movable change character Ym1, Ym2), and the execution pending pattern hr0 is displayed in the "white" display mode. , since the first reserved symbol hr1 is hidden in accordance with the movement of the change hand parts Ym1 and Ym2, the currently displayed reserved symbol hr0 in the display mode of "white" There is a problem that the player cannot immediately determine whether the reserved symbol hr1.

Therefore, in this case, the reserved symbols (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) displayed in the display region HR2 are not displayed in correspondence with the timing when the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display region HR2. It is preferable to set an effect mode indicating that the position of the display area HR1 moves corresponding to the timing when the change character Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display area HR1. By configuring in this way, even after the display position of the reserved pattern is moved, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the reserved pattern being displayed is the reserved pattern being executed or the reserved pattern before execution. can do.
Next, with reference to FIG. 602, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (F2137) will be described. FIG. 602 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (F2137). As shown in FIG. 602, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (F2137), the effect mode is selected for the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see F2107 in FIG. 583) of the 19th control example described above. In addition to adding processing related to the production custom operation (production custom selection) for the purpose, instead of the decision button operation processing (F3315) that is executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is pressed, the decision button operation processing (F3332 ) is different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (F2137) is executed, first, the effect custom selection process is executed (F3331). (see F2107 of )) are executed. If it is determined in the process of F3314 that the enter button (middle button) 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), the enter button operation process is executed (F3332), F3310 is executed, and this process ends.
Also, in the process of F3314, if it is determined that the enter button (middle button) 600a is not operated (F3314: No), the frame button input monitoring/effect process of the 19th control example described above (see F2107 in FIG. 583). ), the same F3316 processing (effect button operation processing) is executed, then the processing of F3310 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 603, the contents of the effect custom selection process (F3331) will be described. FIG. 603 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect custom selection process (F3331). In this effect custom selection process (F3331), a process for selecting the effect mode is executed based on the operation contents of the operating means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e) during the effect custom state.
When the effect custom selection process (F3331) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to ON (F3701). If it is determined that it is not (F3701: No), the operation means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e) is operated, instead of the production mode selection control, other selection control (for example, light amount adjustment) is executed, all processing of the production custom selection processing (F3331) is skipped, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3701 that the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to ON (F3701: Yes), then it is determined whether the right button 600c or the left button 600e has been operated. (F3702), if it is determined that there has been an operation (F3702: Yes), the selected effect mode is updated in correspondence with the determined operation content (F3703), and the information for indicating the updated effect mode is customized. Stores in the information storage area 223wb (F3704), sets a display command for indicating the updated effect mode (F3705), and proceeds to the process of F3706.
Corresponding to the display command set in the process of F3705, the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 (see FIG. 587 (a)) formed on the display surface of the third symbol display area 81 display mode for indicating the mode) is determined. Note that this state is a state in which only the change candidates for the effect mode are displayed in the display area HR6, and the effect mode after change is not determined by the effect custom operation. In this state, when the player presses the decision button (middle button) 600a, decision processing for deciding the effect mode corresponding to the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3702 that the right button 600c or the left button 600e has not been operated (F3702: No), then it is determined whether the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated. Then (F3706), if it is determined that there is an operation to the decision button (middle button) 600a, that is, if an operation for determining the changed production mode in the production custom state is executed (F3706: Yes ), set the production customizing flag 223wa to OFF (F3707), determine whether the current is during special figure fluctuation (F3708), and if it is determined that it is during special figure fluctuation ( F3708: Yes), it is determined whether the present is the first half period of fluctuation (the first half period of the fluctuation effect) (F3709).
In the processing of F3709, if it is determined that it is the first half of the variable period (F3709: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (the production mode displayed in the display area HR6) is entered. Based on this, the second half notice effect selection table 222wb is referred to determine the effect mode of the second half notice effect (F3710), and the information for indicating the determined effect mode is stored in the second half notice information storage area 223we (F3711).
As described with reference to FIG. 598, the second half notice effect selection table 222wb also defines the content indicating that the second half notice effect will not be executed (described as "none" in the figure), and "none". is determined, the second-half announcement effect is not executed. Therefore, in the process of F3710, the process of determining whether or not to execute the second half announcement effect and the effect mode (preview mode) in the case of execution is executed. Then, in the processing of F3711, the processing result of F3710, that is, the information indicating whether or not the second half notice effect is executed and the effect mode set as the second half notice effect is stored in the second half notice information storage area 223we. In other words, in the processing of F3711, information indicating that the second half announcement effect is not executed is also stored.
When the process of F3711 is finished, next, the second half advance notice set flag 223wd is set to ON (F3712), and the effect mode of the second half advance notice effect determined in the process of F3710 matches the type of effect mode after the update. (F3713), and if it is determined to be suitable (F3713: Yes), set a display command to indicate that the production mode is changed (F3719), and end this process do.

Also, in the process of F3713, if it is determined that it does not match (F3713: No), from the next variation (after the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed) to indicate that the production mode is changed is set (F3714), the mode change standby flag 223wc is set to ON (F3715), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of F3709, if it is determined that the current period is not the first half of the fluctuation, that is, the second half of the fluctuation during the special figure fluctuation (F3709: No), the special symbol fluctuation being executed is set to the jackpot A. (F3716), and if it is determined to be a jackpot A variation (F3716: Yes), set a display command to indicate that the production mode is changed (F3717) , sets a voice command indicating that a jackpot has been won (F3718), and terminates this process.
Finally, in the process of F3706, if it is determined that the decision button (middle button) 600a has not been operated (F3706: No), this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 604, the details of the decision button operation process (F3332) will be described. FIG. 604 is a flow chart showing the contents of the decision button operation process (F3332). This determination button operation process (F3332) is executed based on the player's operation (pressing) of the determination button (middle button) 600a. ), the process executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is operated in a state in which the adjustment period flag 223sx is not set to ON, that is, in a state in which light intensity adjustment or volume adjustment is not performed. are the same except for the addition of The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the determination button operation process (F3332) is executed, first, it is determined whether the period adjusting flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351). When it is determined that the player has operated (depressed) the decision button (middle button) 600a while the volume adjustment is not being performed (F3351: No), the effect custom execution process is executed (F3371), and then this End the process. On the other hand, in the process of F3351, if it is determined that the period adjusting flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351; Yes), the decision button operation process of the nineteenth control example described above (see F3315 in FIG. 584) is the same. The processing of F3352 to F3357 is executed, and this processing ends.
Here, with reference to FIG. 605, the processing contents of the effect custom execution processing (F3371) will be described. FIG. 605 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect custom execution process (F3371). In this effect custom execution process (F3371), a process for setting the effect custom state, that is, the state in which selection operation of the effect mode can be executed is executed.
When the performance custom execution process (F3371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot A is fluctuating (F3801), and if it is determined that the jackpot A is fluctuating (F3801: Yes), premium mode is selectable (F3802), and it is determined whether or not the lottery in F3802 is successful (F3803). If it is determined that the player wins in the process of F3803 (F3803: Yes), the effect custom selection target "with premium mode" (see FIG. 590(b)) that can be selected by the effect custom operation is determined (F3804). , F3806.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3803 that the game has not been won (F3803: No), the effect custom selection target "Normal" (see FIG. 590(a)) is determined (F3805), and the process proceeds to F3806. In addition, in the processing of F3801, if it is determined that the jackpot A is not fluctuating, that is, if it is determined that the condition that the "premium mode" can be selected as the production mode is not satisfied (F3801: No), the process proceeds to F3805. Then, the effect custom selection target "Normal" (see FIG. 590(a)) is determined.

Next, in the process of F3806, the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to ON (F3806), a display command for indicating that effect customizing is in progress is set (F3807), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 606, the contents of the rendering update process (F2161) will be described. FIG. 606 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering update process (F2161). This effect update process (F2161) is different from the effect update process (see F2111 in FIG. 586) executed in the above-described 19th control example in that an update process (fluctuation effect update process) relating to a variable effect is executed. They are different and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the effect update process (F2161) is executed, first, the same F3501 to F3516 processes as the above-described effect update process (see F2111 in FIG. 586) are executed, and then the variable effect update process is executed (F3551 ), then the process of F3517 is executed, and this process ends.
Here, with reference to FIG. 607, the processing contents of the fluctuation effect update process (F3551) will be described. FIG. 607 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect update process (F3551). In this fluctuation production update process (F3551), the process based on the elapsed time after the fluctuation production is executed is executed. In the twentieth control example, a part of the effect mode of the variable effect (the effect mode of the advance notice effect executed in the second half period) can be set after the variable effect is executed (at the time when the first half period has elapsed). . By configuring in this way, even if a part of the condition for determining the performance mode (the performance mode type) is changed after the variable performance is executed, the part of the performance mode set to the variable performance being executed is changed. can be set in correspondence with the changed decision condition. Therefore, since it is possible to immediately execute the variable production corresponding to the changed determination condition, even though the operation for selecting the production mode (production custom operation) is executed, the production corresponding to the production mode after the change It is possible to prevent the player's desire to change the performance mode from declining due to the fact that it takes time until the mode is determined.

When the variable effect update process (F3551) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A" or "effect B" (F3901). Here, the effect patterns "effect A" and "effect B" are effect patterns in which the effect mode of the advance notice effect in the second half period of the variable effect is determined in advance when the first half period has passed.
In the processing of F3901, if it is determined that the effect patterns are "effect A" and "effect B" (F3901: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to end the first half period (F3902), and the first half period ends. (F3902: Yes), it is determined whether the second half advance notice setting completion flag 223wd is set to ON (F3903).
In the process of F3903, if it is determined that the second half advance notice setting completion flag 223wd is set to ON, that is, during the first half period, an operation for changing the production mode (custom production operation) is executed, and the second half is already executed at the execution timing. When it is determined that the effect mode (notice mode) of the notice effect is determined (F3903: Yes), the second half notice set flag 223wd is set to OFF (F3907), and stored in the second half notice information storage area 223we. Information indicating the effect mode of the second half of the advance notice effect is read out (F3908), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the second half notice effect is set (F3906), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of F3903, when it is determined that the second half advance notice setting flag 223wd is not set to ON, that is, during the first half period, it is determined that the operation for changing the production mode (custom production operation) is not executed. If so (F3903: No), the current custom information (effect mode) is specified from the custom information storage area 223wb (F3904), and based on the specified custom information (effect mode), the second half preview effect selection table 222wb is referred to. to determine the effect mode of the latter half of the advance notice effect (F3905), set a display command for indicating the effect mode of the latter half notice effect (F3906), and terminate this processing.

In addition, in the processing of F3901, if it is determined that the production pattern is not “production A” or “production B”, that is, the production pattern of the variable production being executed is a production that can determine a new production mode during the variable production. If it is determined that it is not the pattern (F3901: No), or if it is determined that the current timing is not the end of the first half period (F3902: No), this process does not set the effect mode related to the second half preview effect. exit.
<21st control example>
Next, the twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 608 to 634. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 21st control example has the same probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example described above. It has a setting change function that can be set differently, and voice data corresponding to various characters displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the voice output device 226 in advance. The major difference is that the type of voice output from the pachinko machine 10 can be switched based on the voice command output from the lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, regarding the effect to be executed, a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value set by the setting change function to the player, and a pending symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (display area HR2 Execution of a hold shift effect capable of suggesting whether or not the jackpot information is included in the target hold information when the display position of the displayed first hold pattern hr1 to fourth hold pattern hr4) is shifted. It is different in that it is configured to be possible.
Conventionally, various characters have been used in the game of the pachinko machine 10, and the voice of a specific character among them is used to guide the game situation or to output lively voice. So, there is something that enhances the performance effect. However, if the sound (voice) of a specific character is always output, a player who has been playing for a long time will become accustomed to the type of voice that is output, resulting in a problem that the production effect is reduced. rice field.
In addition, when the contents (lines) of the output voice are the same, the meaning of the game indicated by the voice is always the same. There is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the twenty-first control example, when the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stop-displayed, a different type of voice is generated based on the combination of the stop-displayed third symbols. It is configured to be able to output sound with By configuring in this way, it is possible to output various types of voices based on the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the performance effect is reduced even for players who have been playing games for a long time. can be suppressed.
Furthermore, in this 21st control example, it is possible to determine the contents (words) of the sound to be output based on the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed. Specifically, the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot is won (zorome), the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when the reach is lost, and the third pattern that is stopped and displayed without entering the reach state. Depending on the combination of three patterns (separate eyes), it is possible to output sounds of different contents. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress monotony in the content (speech) of the output sound.
In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is configured to be able to output a voice (speech) that can give a privilege (suggestion of setting) to the player. By configuring in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player, so that the player can enjoy the game. It can prevent premature boredom.
Furthermore, when the jackpot is not won despite the fact that the performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, the ready-to-win performance with a specific pattern (7 patterns)) is executed, that is, the player wins the jackpot. In spite of the execution of the performance with an extremely high possibility of winning, when the performance result is a failure, a privilege (for example, setting notification) that is more advantageous to the player can be given. By configuring in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player, so that the player can enjoy the game. It can prevent premature boredom.

In addition, in this 21st control example, identification information (number icon) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the character are configured to form one third symbol, and the combination can be switched. It consists of That is, it is possible to change the type of character associated with a specific numeric icon (for example, 7). As the content of the speech output as voice, speech suggesting the character associated with the third design can be output.
By configuring in this way, even when the lines suggesting the same character are output, the meaning of the lines can be greatly changed by differentiating the types of the numeric icons attached to the character. can. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who has been playing the game for a long time with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the character indicated by the same line is an advantageous character when the same line is output. can.
In addition, in the twenty-first control example, the voice type is determined in correspondence with the stop display mode of the third symbol, and a specific stop display mode (the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot) is determined. When the voice type is determined based on, the player can select whether or not to continue the voice output based on the voice type for a specific period. With this configuration, when the third pattern with the player's favorite character is stop-displayed in the display mode indicating that the player has won the jackpot, the voice output based on the voice type of the favorite character is output for a long time. It is possible to execute.
First, with reference to FIG. 608, the structure of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 608 is a rear view schematically showing the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 608, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example has a set value display device 110a capable of displaying set values and a setting change operation, in contrast to the pachinko machine of the nineteenth control example described above. A setting key 110b that can switch between a state of accepting (and setting confirmation operation) and a state of not accepting (normal game state), and an operator (for example, a pachinko machine) in a state of accepting setting change operation (setting change state) A setting change mechanism comprising at least a setting switch 110c capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with the operation of the pachinko machine 10 (clerk of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed) is provided in the main controller 110. There is a difference. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 609, a setting change method using the setting change mechanism and a setting confirmation method will be described in detail. First, with reference to FIGS. 609(a) to (d), the setting change procedure of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described. As shown in FIGS. 609(a) to (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. By doing so, it is rotated to the ON position (see FIG. 609(a)). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 first. Next, while turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 609(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state indicating that the setting is being changed. In the setting change state, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display content allows the operator (for example, a store clerk in a hall) to easily understand that the setting change state has been normally entered.
When the setting change state is entered, the setting value is switched by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 609(c)). In addition, in the 21st control example, three types of setting values 1 to 3 are provided, and the larger the numerical value, the higher the probability of a big win. That is, setting 1 has the lowest jackpot probability (for example, 1/262 in a low probability state, 1/65 in a high probability (variable) state), and setting 3 has the highest jackpot probability (for example, 1 in a low probability state /218, 1/55 in the high-probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed in the order of 1→2→3→1 . . . every time the setting switch 110c is pressed. In addition, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the setting value is 3, the setting value is returned to 1 by a rotary type. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a. FIG. 609(c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the set value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 609(c), when the setting value is switched to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "3" indicating setting 3 is displayed for the last digit of the setting value display device 110a. be done.
After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting change state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b at the OFF position (FIG. 609). (d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped keyhole portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. As a result, the key portion can be inserted into the keyhole portion only when an operator (for example, a hall clerk) changes settings, and the key portion can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is completed. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized players from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, so that the hall can be prevented from suffering unexpected disadvantages. can.
When the setting change operation ends, the initial setting process of main controller 110 is resumed. In the initial setting process after restart, there is a process for transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113 a setting change completion command indicating completion of the setting change operation and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation. executed. Further, a process for transmitting a command (initialization command) for resuming the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113, which is on standby until the setting change operation is completed, is executed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 609(e) to 609(g), a procedure for confirming settings (setting confirmation operation) will be described. In order to confirm the setting, first, the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as in the setting change operation (see FIG. 609(e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while it is in the off state), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 609(f)). When the setting confirmation state is entered, the currently set values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example of FIG. 609(f) shows a state in which "3" is set as the set value. When the confirmation of the setting by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is shifted to the state in which the normal game can be played (see FIG. 609(g)).
In the twenty-first control example, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, every time the setting key 110b is rotated by 60 degrees, the setting changes from 1→2→3→1 . It can be configured to return. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
In the twenty-first control example, as shown in FIG. 609, the setting change mechanism is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, at a position that cannot be visually recognized by the player during the game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during the game. Also, when actually changing the settings, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. , and when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are supported only by the opening/closing shafts, resulting in a relatively unstable state. In such a situation, if the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the return action of the ornamental accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is executed, an excessive load is applied to the opening/closing shaft and the like, causing damage. You may be invited.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the standby process of waiting for the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, the return operation of the character is performed. In other words, the configuration is such that the return operation of the role object is not executed during the setting change operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 is damaged due to execution of the return operation of the role during the setting change operation. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 can be made less likely to vibrate during the setting change operation compared to the case where the return operation of the character is executed while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c, the setting switch 110c can be set. It is possible to make it difficult for the erroneous operation of 110c to occur.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change operation is executed, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON. Setting change operation cannot be performed. That is, the game state set after the setting change operation is executed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, since the game conditions other than the difference in the big win probability based on the set value can be unified for the game executed after the setting change operation is performed, it is easy to provide the player with a fair game. can do.
<Regarding the effect content in the 21st control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 610 to FIG. 612, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example, based on the combination of the display modes of the plurality of third symbols statically displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect is executed in which voice output is performed with different voice types. configured as possible. Further, when the display positions of the reserved patterns (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are shifted, the reserved patterns to be targeted and a pending shift presentation capable of suggesting whether or not the information includes big win information.
First, with reference to FIG. 610(a), an example of the effect at the start timing of the special symbol variation will be described. FIG. 610(a) is a diagram showing the third symbol at the start timing of the special symbol variation and the sound output from the speaker section 308. FIG. As shown in FIG. 610(a), in this 21st control example, the display mode of the third symbol used for the variable effect is the identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, which is "number part (number icon) and a decorative character portion (character icon). As a basic pattern, a basic third pattern is formed in which a different character icon is attached corresponding to each number portion, A variation performance using the basic third symbol is executed.
Specifically, the display mode of the basic third pattern will be described. A third pattern D1 with a character icon resembling an octopus is attached to the numeric icon "1", and the numeric icon "4" is formed as the basic third pattern. , a third pattern D4 attached with a character icon imitating a shark is formed as a basic third pattern. The display data of the basic third pattern is stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, unless a special command for using the special third pattern, which is a display mode other than the basic third pattern, is output. , a variation effect using the display mode of the basic third symbol is executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the result of the special symbol lottery only by grasping the character icon displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand performance. can.

Here, in the twenty-first control example, instead of the basic third symbol, a special third symbol having a different combination of the type of the number icon and the type of the character icon can be variably displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 610(a), a special third pattern in which a character icon imitating an octopus is added to the number icon "3" can be displayed. By configuring in this way, the phenomenon that the type of the number icon (identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery) cannot be grasped only by confirming the character icon attached to the variably displayed third symbol. can be generated, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variation performance result.
Furthermore, in this 21st control example, a voice corresponding to the character icon type (character type) attached to the third symbol (basic third symbol, special third symbol) displayed on the display screen is generated. It is configured to be able to output, and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the character type attached to the third symbol to be stopped and displayed in the next variation using the voice. In addition, when the variable display using the special third symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 610(a), the player is once notified of the display mode of the special third symbol, and then the variable effect is performed. is configured to start By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the effect result of the suggestive effect executed by voice.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 610(a), when the variation performance is executed corresponding to the start of the special symbol variation, the third symbol corresponding to the previous special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. From the state where it is, the variable production is started. In this case, when the variable effect using the special third pattern is executed, as shown in the third pattern D3, a special third pattern with a character icon imitating a turtle attached to the number icon "3" is displayed. A variable production is executed in the displayed state. Then, from the speaker unit 308, as a suggestion effect for suggesting the stop display mode of the third pattern for indicating the effect result of the variable effect to be executed this time, "I wonder if Mr. Octopus will win next time, Mr. Turtle will go". Sound is output.
With this suggestive effect, the third pattern attached with the octopus character icon or the turtle character icon can be stopped and displayed as a stop display mode of the third pattern for showing the effect result of the variable effect to be executed this time. It is suggested to the player that the quality is high. By grasping the content of the voice output as the suggestive effect, the player can play the game while calculating (predicting) the possibility that the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot will be stopped and displayed. Here, as described above, in this 21st control example, since the special third symbol is configured to be displayable, the content (character icon type that can be stopped and displayed) provided to the player by the above-described suggestive effect Based on this, it is possible to increase the number of stop display patterns of the third symbols that can be predicted, and the enjoyment of predicting future game contents (results of performance) for the player can be increased.

Furthermore, when the special third symbol is used, as shown in FIG. 610(a), before the variable effect is started, a notification effect capable of informing the player that the special third symbol is used is provided. configured to be executable. Then, as a notification effect, at least a part of the display mode of the special third symbol that is actually used is configured to be able to be notified to the player. By configuring in this manner, the stop display pattern of the third symbol is predicted based on the content (character icon type that can be stopped and displayed) provided to the player by the suggestive effect, including the display mode of the special third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily improve the prediction accuracy.
In addition, in the diagram shown in FIG. 610(a), in order to show that the special third pattern is used, the display mode of the special third pattern that is actually used is configured to be displayable, but it is limited to this. Instead, a notification performance (for example, character display during character shuffling) only indicating that a variable performance using a special third pattern different from the basic third pattern is executed is executed. can be
Furthermore, the diagram shown in FIG. 610(a) shows an example in which one type of special third pattern is displayed, but two or more types of special third patterns may be used in one variation effect. . In this case, the display mode of the special third symbol used in one variable effect may be configured so that it can be notified to the player before the variable effect is started, or at least a part of it may be displayed to the player. may be configured to be notified to.
Further, in this 21st control example, whether or not to use the special third symbol, or the display mode of the special third symbol to be used is determined by the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10. Although it is configured so as to decide, it is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the player can generate special third symbols in any combination.

Next, with reference to FIG. 610(b), another effect content using voice output will be described. FIG. 610(b) shows the voice effect to be executed during the next variation when the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the result of the previous variation effect is a specific stop display mode (7 reach losing). It is a diagram. As described above, in the twenty-first control example, the voice effect using the sound corresponding to the character icon type (character type) attached to the third symbol that was stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variation effect is performed. It is configured so that it can be executed after the production is finished. Further, it is possible to provide the player with a privilege according to the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variable presentation by voice presentation.
Specifically, in FIG. 610(b), the character voice (7 reach character ) is set, while the variable effect is being executed, "Chara Voice 7 Chara" is displayed in the display area HR30 as a guidance mode for indicating the currently set voice data (character voice). is displayed. Then, from the speaker unit 308, a setting suggesting effect "Today's fortune is good luck", which is a privilege given to the player, is output as a sound effect corresponding to "7 out of reach".
By configuring in this way, even if the stop display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed in the previous fluctuation production cannot be visually recognized due to the execution of the next fluctuation production, the character whose voice is being output It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which character icon the voice corresponds to.
Next, the state in which the third symbol for indicating the effect result of the variation effect executed corresponding to the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed continues, that is, the state in which the next special symbol lottery is not executed (standby state )) will be described with reference to FIG. 611(a). FIG. 611(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the voice effect executed during the standby state (during the demonstration effect). As shown in FIG. 611(a), as the effect result of the previous variable effect, a third pattern D1 in which a character icon imitating an octopus is attached to the number icon "1", and a shark is attached to the number icon "4". When a standby state is set in a state in which a third pattern D4 with a character icon and a third pattern D3 with a character icon resembling a turtle attached to the number icon "3" are stopped and displayed, normal If so, the character corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol D1 stopped in the symbol row on the left side (the first symbol row that is stopped and displayed) among the three third symbols that are stopped and displayed. A voice (voice data) is used to perform an audio effect during the standby state. In this way, the voice data of the sound output during the standby state is changed according to the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed (the third symbol that is stopped and displayed to indicate the effect result of the previous variable effect). Since it can be made different, various effects (voice effects) can be executed for the player, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

In the twenty-first control example, as described above, the type of voice data used for the sound effect to be executed can be changed according to the type of character added to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. ing. In order to prevent the type of voice data from being switched each time the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the voice data used for voice output can be fixed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot is won, voice output using the voice data of the character type corresponding to the third symbol is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that it can continue to be executed until it is completed. In other words, when the third symbol is statically displayed in a display mode indicating winning of a jackpot, the same voice data is continued as a benefit different from when the third symbol is statically displayed in a display mode other than winning a jackpot. It is configured to be able to give a privilege that can be output by doing.
By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win with the third symbol to which the player's desired favorite character type is assigned. Also, it is possible to prevent the voice data from being switched each time the special symbol lottery is executed, and the performance effect from being lowered due to the execution of the voice performance without uniformity.
As shown in FIG. 611(b), when the voice data is fixed, the display mode for showing the currently set voice data in the display area HR30 on the right side of the main display area Dm is "Chara Voice 7". "Character" is displayed, and in the display area HR31 formed above it, a display mode of "Voice fixed" is displayed to indicate that the voice data is fixed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the voice data currently corresponding to "7 characters" is fixed.
Further, in the display area HR32, a button icon imitating the effect button 22 is displayed as a display mode for guiding a game method (operation method) for canceling the fixed state of the voice data. You can release the fixed voice by pressing it." is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the voice output based on the currently fixed voice data can be canceled.

In the example shown in FIG. 611(b), the big win is won with the third symbol corresponding to 7 characters, and since the voice data of "7 characters" is fixed, the special symbol lottery is executed multiple times after the big win game. , As the effect result of the previous variable effect, a third pattern D1 in which a character icon imitating an octopus is added to the number icon "1", and a third pattern D1 in which a character icon imitating a shark is added to the number icon "4". Even if the standby state is set in a state in which D4 and the third symbol D3 with a character icon resembling a turtle attached to the number icon "3" are stopped, " A voice effect using the voice data of "7 characters" is executed.
Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when a voice effect using "7 character voices" is executed, a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 as a privilege is executed. Since it is configured to be possible, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in part of the audio effect executed during the standby state. When the setting suggesting effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 611(b), the sound "Today's fortune is great" is output from the speaker unit 308 in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. 610(b). and informs the player that the set value is advantageous to the player.
Thus, in the twenty-first control example, not only is the voice effect executed with different voice data according to the stop display mode of the third symbol, but also a special privilege is given according to the type of the stop display mode of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect according to the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 612, among the effects (prefetching effects) using the reserved symbols in the twenty-first control example, a chance effect at the time of holding shift executed when the display position of the reserved symbols shifts (shifts). I will explain the contents of the production. FIG. 612(a) shows a screen (a pending change sign display screen) in which a pending symbol to be executed for the pending change effect is displayed in the display area HR2, and is displayed in a state in which a special symbol variation is being executed. FIG. 612(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen, and FIG. 612(b) is a screen (a pending change precursor display screen) in which a pending symbol to be executed for the pending change effect is displayed in the display area HR2. 612(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state where the special symbol variation is not executed (a state in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), and FIG. FIG. 612(d) is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect at the time of holding shift that is executed when the reserved symbol shifts the display position, and FIG. is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect at the time of holding shift, which is executed when shifting .

In the above-described 19th control example, until the pending change effect is executed, the pending symbol is displayed until the pending change effect is executed so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the pending symbol that is the target of the pending change effect. The display mode is the same as the display mode of the reserved pattern which is not subject to the pending change effect. On the other hand, in the twenty-first control example, the pending symbol to be the target of the pending change effect is displayed in a dedicated display mode (prediction) so that the player can identify it before the pending change effect is executed. display mode) can be set.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 612(a), similar to the 19th control example described above, the normal reserved symbols are colored display modes (first reserved symbol hr1, second reserved symbol hr2, fourth reserved symbol hr2, Although it is displayed in the reserved pattern hr4), for the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change effect, as a display mode different from the normal display mode, as shown in the third reserved pattern hr3, a spiral display mode It is configured to be displayed in (precursor display mode). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pending change performance may be executed before the pending change performance is executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 612(a), the precursor display mode is rotated clockwise while the special symbol variation is being executed, that is, while the display position of the reserved symbol is not shifted (shifted). It is configured as follows. By dynamically displaying (rotating) the precursor display mode in this manner, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the difference from the normal reserved symbols that are statically displayed (stopped display).
Then, as shown in FIG. 612(b), the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, and a new special symbol variation (special symbol variation using the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the first reserved symbol hr1). is executed, similarly to the 19th control example described above, the display position of each reserved design is shifted (the first reserved design hr1 is displayed in the display area HR1 (see FIG. 524) where the reserved design being executed is displayed. ), and then the display position of each reserved symbol displayed in the display area HR2 is shifted to the left by one) effect is executed.

Here, since the variation time of the special symbol variation is configured so that various variation times are set according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the display of the omen pending symbol at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. An event occurs that changes the mode. Specifically, if the display mode in which the precursor display mode is dynamically displayed from the first mode to the first mode through the second mode is repeatedly executed, at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, The omen pending symbol may be displayed in the first mode or may be displayed in the second mode.
In the 21st control example, the sign pending symbol to which the sign display mode dynamically (rotating) display is attached is statically (stopped) displayed at the stop display timing of the special symbol variation. Specifically, the dynamically displayed precursor display mode is configured to be displayed in a predetermined initial stop mode (first mode). Then, in the case of executing the effect of shifting the reserved pattern, it is possible to set the effect pattern in which various action effects are executed from the state of the initial stop mode (first mode) with respect to the reserved symbol of the omen display mode. It consists of
By configuring in this way, the production pattern set when executing the shift production of the reserved pattern can be only the production pattern started from the initial stop mode, so that the sign at the time of shifting to the shift of the reserved pattern Compared with the case where the effect pattern is provided corresponding to the dynamic position (operation position) of the display mode, the number of effect patterns can be reduced.
Although a detailed description will be given later, in this 21st control example, it is configured to be able to execute the chance effect during the pending shift when the omen pending pattern shifts to the shift. Depending on the type, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot and the set value. That is, the player pays more attention to the pending portent symbol at the timing when the porting pending symbol shifts than at the timing when the dynamically displayed porting pending symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, even if it is forcibly stopped and displayed in the initial stop mode (first mode) regardless of the mode in which the omen pending symbols are displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the player will feel uncomfortable. It can be difficult to give.

In the twenty-first control example, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the omen suspended symbol is forced to be in the initial stop mode regardless of the display mode of the omen reserved symbol at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be stopped and displayed, and when the omen pending pattern shifts to the shift, it is configured to set a production pattern that starts from the initial stop mode, but is not limited to this, for example, the initial stop mode. At least two types of stop modes (first initial stop mode, second initial stop mode) can be set, and based on the display mode of the omen pending symbol at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, any An initial stop mode is set, and the performance pattern started from the first initial stop mode and the performance started from the second initial stop mode are the performance patterns to be executed when the portent holding pattern shifts to the shift. A pattern may be configured to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity even when the dynamically displayed omen pending symbol is stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, in the period from immediately before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed until the omen pending symbol is shift-shifted (for example, the fixed display period of the special symbol), the omen pending symbol being dynamically displayed is in the initial stop mode. When it is determined that the symbol is displayed in the first mode corresponding to , the omen pending symbol may be stopped and displayed. In other words, by shifting the stop display timing of the special symbol variation and the stop display timing of the omen pending symbol, the dynamic display of the omen pending symbol may be terminated without discomfort. In this case, the dynamic display period of the omen pending symbol (the period from the first mode to dynamic display until the first mode again) should be shorter than the fixed display period of the special symbol. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to stop and display the omen pending symbol in the first mode without discomfort during the period in which the special symbol is fixedly displayed.
FIG. 612(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the vicinity of the display area HR2 when "jump" is set as the production mode of the chance production during the holding shift. As shown in FIG. 612(c), when the holding shift chance effect is executed, only the omen pending symbol shifts in a different effect mode (dynamic display mode) from the other pending symbols. FIG. 612(c) shows an effect mode in which the third reserved symbol hr3, which is an omen reserved symbol, pops out above the display area HR2 and then moves to the shift destination display position. In other words, only the omen reserved symbol shows a performance mode in which the moving distance is longer than the other reserved symbols. Therefore, when "jump" is set as the effect mode of the chance effect during the pending shift, while the omen pending symbol is moving outside the display area HR2, the other pending symbols are shifted to the display position ( display area) is completed, and then an effect is executed in which the omen pending symbol is shifted to the shift destination display position (display area).
By configuring in this way, the timing of completion of shift transition of the display position (display area) can be made different between the normal pending symbol and the portent pending symbol, so that the player can receive the portent pending symbol. It is possible to make the user pay more attention to the production mode of. In addition, the timing of completion of the shift transition of the display position (display area) is delayed in the portent pending symbol as compared with the normal pending symbol. That is, since the period required for the omen pending pattern to shift to the shift is configured to be longer than the period required for the normal suspended pattern to shift to the shift, the performance period of the chance performance during the pending shift is made longer. can do.

Next, FIG. 612(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen near the display region HR2 when "high speed" is set as the presentation mode of the chance presentation during the holding shift. As shown in FIG. 612(d), when the holding shift chance effect is executed, only the omen pending symbol is shifted in a different effect mode (dynamic display mode) from the other pending symbols. FIG. 612(d) shows an effect mode in which the third reserved design hr3, which is an omen reserved design, moves to the display position after the shift earlier than the other normal reserved designs. Therefore, when "high speed" is set as the production mode of the chance production at the time of holding shift, the omen holding pattern is shifted to the display position (display area) of the shift destination, so that (at least part of) a plurality of (two) reserved symbols are temporarily displayed in the same display position (display area). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and enhance the performance effect.
The display mode of the omen pending symbol in the twenty-first control example may be applied to the nineteenth control example described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the pending symbol to be the target of the pending change effect in an easy-to-understand manner.
In addition, in the 21st control example, as in the 19th control example described above, without using the omen pending symbol, at the execution timing of the chance effect during shift, only the target pending symbol is used as the effect mode at the time of shift transition. 612(c) and FIG. 612(d) may be configured to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.
In addition, in the 21st control example, only the omen pending symbol is configured to be able to execute the shift chance effect. It may be configured such that the other reserved symbols are shifted to the shift by using the effect mode of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a production mode ("jump", "high speed") different from usual for the plurality of reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2, so that the player can It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the shift-time chance presentation has been executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 21st control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 613, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 613 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 613, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example (see FIG. 539). A setting value display device 110a, a setting switch 110c, and a setting key 110b are connected to an input/output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204. The difference is that the process of changing the set value based on the output signal and the process of displaying the set value are executed. The contents of various operations using the setting keys 110b and the setting switches 110c and the contents of the display displayed on the setting value display device 110a have been described above with reference to FIG. 609, so description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 614, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 614 is a block diagram simply showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 614, the audio output device 226 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so as to be able to transmit and receive data.
As shown in FIG. 614, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 has a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data (voice data) to be executed by the MPU 301, and temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A RAM 203, which is a memory for
The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 , the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 .

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 . In the twenty-first control example, the synthesized speech data generated by the speech synthesizing section 306 is input not only to the amplifier section 307 but also to the ADC 309 configured by a known AC-DC converter. The ADC 309 is configured to convert synthesized speech data, which is analog data, into digital data and output the digital data to the MPU 301 .
More specifically, the ADC 309 has at least comparators 309a1 to 309a15 and a decoding section 309b. Each comparator 309a1-309a15 can determine whether or not the amplitude (voltage) of the received analog data is greater than the voltage corresponding to each comparator 309a1-309a15. The voltage corresponding to each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 is set by 1 volt in a range from 7 volts to -7 volts. Each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 outputs L when the voltage value of the synthesized speech data is larger than the corresponding voltage value, and outputs H when the synthesized speech data is smaller.
The decoding unit 309b identifies the range of voltage values of the current synthetic speech data from the combination of the outputs of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15, and converts it into a 4-bit digital value. That is, the digital values are converted into digital values from "0000B" to "1111B" in descending order of voltage. Specifically, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized voice data is greater than 7 volts, "1111B" is output as the digital value. Also, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized speech data is greater than 3 volts and less than or equal to 4 volts, "1011B" is output as the digital value.
The MPU 301 samples the synthesized audio data output from the ADC 309 over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) and outputs the average value (average amplitude) to the audio ramp controller 113. It is configured. The audio ramp controller 113 identifies the corresponding vibration strength (DUTY ratio) from the received average amplitude. Then, an operation command for driving a vibration imparting motor (not shown) among the driving motors 770 connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 with the specified vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is issued. Set for the motor control IC. As a result, since the vibration intensity can be varied in accordance with the sound output from the speaker unit 308, it is possible to provide a realistic effect.

In the twenty-first control example, the digital value output from the ADC 309 is output to the MPU 301. However, by outputting the digital value directly to the input/output port 305, the digital value can be directly sent to the sound lamp control device 113. may be configured to output Then, when executing a variable effect accompanied by a vibration effect, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to sample digital values over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) to calculate an average amplitude. may be Then, the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the calculated average amplitude may be notified to the motor control IC by an operation command. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 301 can be reduced.
In the twenty-first control example, the synthesized voice data is converted into the average value of the absolute values of the amplitudes, and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is specified based on the average value, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the maximum absolute value in a predetermined sampling period (for example, 0.1 second) may be output from the audio output device 226 to the audio ramp control device 113, or the effective value (maximum amplitude A value obtained by dividing the value by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113 .
Further, the type of operation command for driving the vibration imparting motor may be variably set in correspondence with the voice command output from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, voice data of a high range may be set. If a voice command to specify is set, the vibration intensity corresponding to the short amplitude is set as an operation command, and if a voice command to specify voice data in the low range is set, a long It may be configured to set the vibration intensity according to the amplitude as the operation command.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a clearer difference in the voice output executed by making the types of voice data different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa in the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twenty-first control example will be described. The ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example determines whether or not the special symbol lottery The difference is that the data table referred to when determining the judgment (jackpot judgment) is different, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 615, the contents defined in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa will be described. This special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa is a data table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed. Defined for each value. FIG. 615 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a.
As shown in FIG. 615, 250 of "0 to 249" are set for the set value "1" as a random number (counter value) determined as a special symbol jackpot in the special symbol low probability state, 275 items "0 to 274" are set for the set value "2", and 300 items "0 to 299" are set for the set value "3". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 615, as a random number (counter value) determined to be a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state), 1000 of "0 to 999" for the set value "1" 1,100 from "0 to 1099" are set for the set value "2", and 1,200 from "0 to 1199" are set for the set value "3".
In this 21st control example, since the value that the first hit random number counter can take is 65536 kinds of "0 to 65535", the setting "1" is set, and the special symbol low probability state , the probability of winning a jackpot (jackpot probability) is about 1/262, and the jackpot probability is about 1/65 in the high-probability state of special symbols. In addition, when setting "2" is set, the probability of big win is about 1/238 in the low probability state of special symbols, and the probability of big win is about 1/60 in the high probability state of special symbols. Further, when the setting "3" is set, the probability of big win is about 1/218 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the probability of big win is about 1/55 in the high probability state of the special pattern.

Therefore, setting "1" is a setting value (disadvantageous setting value) that makes it most difficult to win a big win, and setting "3" is a setting value (advantageous setting value) that makes it most likely to win a big win. And, as described above, in the present 21st control example, regardless of which set value is set, the jackpot probability in the special symbol high probability state is higher than the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state. It is configured to be four times as large. That is, regardless of which setting value is set, when the transition from the low probability state of the special design to the high probability state of the special design, the same privilege (privilege for making it easier to win the jackpot) is configured to provide to the player. By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the set values in a plurality of stages, the benefits given when the probability state of the special symbols is switched can be made uniform regardless of the set values. , it is possible to prevent the game content from being excessively different depending on the set value.
In addition, depending on the setting value, it is possible to change the content of the privilege to be given when the special symbol low probability state transitions to the special symbol high probability state. ” may be configured to increase the degree of variation of the probability of a big win in the case of shifting from a low-probability state of special symbols to a high-probability state of special symbols. The jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special pattern is quadrupled against the jackpot probability in the low probability state, and in the case of setting "3", in the high probability state of the special pattern against the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special pattern It may be configured such that the probability of a big win is six times. With this configuration, the degree of advantage of the setting "3", which is the advantageous setting, relative to the setting "1", which is the disadvantageous setting, can be increased. The pachinko machine 10 that is in use can be made to play a game with motivation.
In the 21st control example, the set values provided in the pachinko machine 10 are set to three stages, but the set values may be set to two stages or set to four stages or more (for example, six stages) without being limited to this. can be Furthermore, in this 21st control example, a setting difference is provided in the special symbol jackpot probability, but not limited to this, for example, the setting probability of the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the probability variation state, and the period during which the probability variation state continues Alternatively, it may be configured such that setting differences are provided for various elements capable of varying the degree of advantage of the game, such as the game contents of the jackpot game. Even in such a case, it is possible to provide different degrees of advantage to the player according to the setting values that are set. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 616, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 616 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 616, the RAM 203 in the twenty-first control example differs from the RAM 203 in the nineteenth control example (see FIG. 541(b)) in that a set value storage area 203xa is added. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The set value storage area 203xa is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set values of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. More specifically, if "00H" is stored as data in the set value storage area 203xa, it indicates that the set value "1" is set, and if "01H" is stored as data, This indicates that the set value "2" is set, and if "02H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "3" is set. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the data in the set value storage area 203xa is read out, and the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, among the special symbol big hit random number table 202xa (see FIG. 615), the range of random numbers corresponding to the set values indicated by the data in the set value storage area 203xa and the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area. A lottery for special symbols is executed by comparing the values. The initial value of the setting value storage area 203xa is set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, the value changes from "01H" to "02H" and "01H". , and when the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is "02H", the data is updated to "01H". When the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on, all data in the RAM 203 are reset (cleared) to initial values. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value "00H". That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without executing the setting change operation, the setting can be changed to 1. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.
Next, referring to FIG. 617, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 617 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 617, the ROM 222 possessed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example is the ROM 222 possessed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the above-described nineteenth control example (see FIG. 545(a)). , except that a voice command selection table 222xa and a pending action selection table 222xb are added. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The voice command selection table 222xa is a data table referred to when selecting the voice type corresponding to the character of the third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81. FIG. In this 21st control example, as the type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, one of the seven number icons "1" to "7" corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery, and seven types. characters (“1 character” to “7 characters”) are displayed in a stopped manner.
Basically, the number icon "1" and the character "1 character" are combined to form the "first and third pattern", and the number icon "2" and the character "2 character" are combined to form the "third pattern". The 2nd 3rd pattern” is a combination of the number icon 3 and the character 3 character, and the 3rd 3rd pattern is a combination of the number icon 4 and the character 4 character. The "fourth third pattern" is a combination of the number icon "5" and the character "5 characters", and the "fifth third pattern" is a combination of the number icon "6" and the character "6 characters". Thus, the "sixth third pattern" is formed by combining the number icon "7" and the character "seven characters" to form the "seventh third pattern".

Furthermore, the combination change condition of the third symbol (for example, the change condition that is established when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (500 times), and the number of times that the jackpot wins reach a predetermined number of times (5 times) If a change condition, etc., is established, a special third pattern can be formed in which different types of characters are combined with the numeric icons forming the third pattern.
In the twenty-first control example, the voice data corresponding to the character type can be used for the voice output from the voice output device 226 regardless of the type of the number icon of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. there is By configuring in this way, every time a special symbol lottery is executed (every time a game is executed), sound using voice data of a different type is output from the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can enjoy the game. It can prevent premature boredom.
Furthermore, in this 21st control example, according to the combination of the third symbols stop-displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of character types), a special benefit can be given. Specifically, when the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed, whether or not the game is played while the voice output based on the voice data corresponding to the character type associated with the third symbol is continued. It is possible to provide a privilege that the player can select, and when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, reach loss) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it will be in that reach state. A setting suggestion in which a line capable of suggesting a setting value ("1" to "3") set in the pachinko machine 10 is issued by voice based on voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol. It is configured so that a privilege can be given. It should be noted that, when a predetermined condition (while the jackpot fluctuates) is established, all character types may be selectable, and in other situations, only a specific character type may be selectable. It can be said that this is a configuration in which an effect mode different from usual is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
By constructing in this manner, the result of the special symbol lottery while expecting that a privilege other than the winning prize will be granted to the player who has been paying attention only to the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win. (The stationary display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) can be gazed at. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the twenty-first control example, as the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the special third pattern in which the type of the number icon and the type of character are different from those of the normal ones is stopped. Configured to be visible. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to output by voice a line that can suggest a character associated with the third symbol that is statically displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .
In other words, while the player can predict the type of the third symbol that will be stopped and displayed next based on the speech output by voice, the type of the number icon and the type of the character are usually set as the third symbol. Since it is configured to be able to display a special third pattern that is different from, for example, a third pattern corresponding to the number icon "1" and a third pattern corresponding to the number icon "3" for "1 character" , the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "1" is displayed to the player when the dialogue suggesting that the "1 character" is stopped is output. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "3" will be displayed or stopped.
Here, with reference to FIG. 618, the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa, which is a data table referred to when determining voice data in the twenty-first control example, will be described. FIG. 618 shows the contents defined in the voice command selection table 222xa.
The voice command selection table 222xa selects the corresponding voice based on the stop display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the stop command process (see F2273 in FIG. 629) executed when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. It is referred to when determining a command (see F2672 in FIG. 629). As shown in FIG. 618, a voice command for specifying voice data corresponding to each character type is defined according to the character type associated with the stopped third symbol. In addition, a privilege according to the combination of the character types attached to the stopped third symbol is also defined.

When the voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa, the voice command for voice corresponding to the determined voice command is output to the voice output device 226. FIG. Then, the voice output device 226 specifies corresponding voice data based on the received voice command, and outputs common voice for game using the specified voice data. In other words, it is possible to change only the voice data of the sound that is always output from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, when the voice command received by the voice output device 226 contains information indicating a specific line output, the corresponding line data is read and the received line is output using the received voice data. is configured to be possible. By constructing in this manner, only the voice data of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 is changed depending on the stop display mode (character type) of the third symbol stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is also possible to output dedicated lines instead of the lines, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
In addition, in this 21st control example, as the lines dedicated to specific voice commands, lines capable of suggesting information advantageous to the player (for example, set value information) are also included. In addition to the improvement of the production effect due to the output, it is possible to give the player an advantageous privilege, so that the player can be interested in the change of the voice data.
Next, the contents defined in the voice command selection table 222xa will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 618, the voice command selection table 222xa includes, as the third symbol types stopped and displayed, a third symbol type indicating a jackpot winning, a third symbol type indicating a reach-losing, and a complete loss (discrete eyes). and a third symbol type indicating . For each of the roughly classified third symbol types, a voice corresponding to the third symbol type (character type) actually stopped and displayed is defined.

Specifically, when the third symbol type is "big hit", that is, when three identical number icons are displayed side by side and stop-displayed, the character attached to the stopped-displayed third symbol is "one character". ”, a voice command “command 1” for specifying the selected voice “1 character” is specified, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is “2 characters”. , a voice command "Command 2" for specifying the selected voice "2 characters" is defined, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is the selected voice "3 characters". A voice command "command 3" for specifying "3 characters" is defined, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is "4 characters", and the selected voice "4 characters" is specified. A voice command "command 4" for specifying is specified, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is "5 characters", and the selected voice "5 characters" is specified. A voice command "command 5" is defined, and a voice command "command 6" is defined, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is "7 character", and the voice command "command 7" for specifying the selected voice "7 character" is defined. It is
Then, when the third symbol type is "jackpot", as a special privilege to be granted, a special privilege that allows continuous setting of the set voice data is defined. In other words, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, voice data corresponding to the character attached to the jackpot pattern is used to output voice regarding subsequent games (games during the jackpot and games after the jackpot game is over). It is configured so that In this 21st control example, the voice output using the same voice data is continued until the next jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the voice data corresponding to the favorite character from being immediately specified, even though the voice data corresponding to the favorite character is specified.
In addition, in the 21st control example, since the privilege of continuing the voice output corresponding to the specific voice data can be given when the jackpot is won, various game voices can be voiced to the favorite character. A player who desires data output can continue to play while expecting a big win display with a third pattern to which a specific character type is assigned.
In addition, in the 21st control example, the voice output using the voice data specified based on the winning of the jackpot (stop display of the jackpot pattern) is configured to continue until the next winning of the jackpot, but it is limited to this. Instead, the player may operate the operation means (for example, the effect button 22) to clear the special privilege provided based on the winning of the big win. With this configuration, even if the third symbol attached with the character specifying the voice data that the player does not desire is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot, the third symbol is based on the voice data. It is possible to prevent the sound output from continuing for a long time.

Furthermore, in the 21st control example, by constructing so that the voice output using the voice data specified based on the winning of the jackpot (stop display of the jackpot pattern) is continued until the next winning of the jackpot, it is possible to make the favorite character It is intended to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game until the corresponding voice data is specified, but it is not limited to this, for example, based on the number of times the jackpot has been won or the game time (the number of times of special symbol lottery). In addition, the player may arbitrarily select the character type attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot is won. By constructing in this manner, the third pattern with the favorite character is not stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot even though the player has played the game for a long time and won the jackpot many times. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play the game.
Next, as the third symbol type, "reach loss", that is, among the plurality of third symbols stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, some of the third symbols are stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot winning. After the displayed state (reach state) is displayed, if the remaining third symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the combination indicating the winning of the jackpot, the third symbol displayed in the reach state is attached. A voice command "command 8" for specifying the selected voice "reach character (7 characters)" is defined for "7 characters", and the third symbol displayed in the reach state Voice for specifying the selected voice "Reach character (1 character, 3 characters, 5 characters)" for "odd number characters excluding 7 (1 character, 3 characters, 5 characters)" Commands "command 9" to "command 11" are defined, and the characters attached to the third symbol displayed in the reach state are "even characters (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)" , voice commands "command 12" to "command 14" for specifying the selected voice "reach characters (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)" are defined.
Then, when the third symbol type is "reach lost", information is stipulated that a dialogue output (conversation dialogue) capable of suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 can be given as a special benefit. Here, detailed description is omitted, but in this 21st control example, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is varied according to the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state, and the number icon "7" is attached. When ``7 ready-to-win'' is established in which the drawn third pattern is in a ready-to-reach state, the degree of expectation for winning a big win is higher than when other third patterns are in a ready-to-reach state. Specifically, it is configured so that about 90% of the time when "7 reach" is established, a jackpot is won.
By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to predict the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot before all the third symbols are stop-displayed according to the type of the third symbols in the ready-to-win state. . Moreover, even when the variable performance (ready-to-win performance) of the same performance mode is executed, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot according to the type of the third pattern in the ready-to-win state. Therefore, it is possible to provide variable performances with different degrees of expectation for big wins using the same performance mode, so that the amount of image data (ready-to-win video data) used for variable performances can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, after the ready-to-win state (7 ready-to-win state) is displayed by the type of the third pattern with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the third pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating the winning of the missed prize. When the game is won, that is, when the player loses and wins despite the execution of the variable presentation with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, there is a problem that the player's desire to play the game is remarkably lowered.
On the other hand, in the present 21st control example, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the third symbols (7 reach losing) which is stopped and displayed when the win is lost in spite of the high expectation of winning the jackpot. In this case, it is configured to be able to provide the player with a benefit (setting suggestion) different from the winning of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly decreasing.
In addition, in this 21st control example, according to the type of the third pattern when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot (normal (shorter time) jackpot, probability variable jackpot) is set according to the type of the third pattern. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player, and when the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed is the number icon "odd number (1, 3, 5, 7)", the number icon "even number (2, 4)" is better. , 6)”, so that the possibility of winning a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) advantageous to the player is increased.
Therefore, in the case where the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in a combination indicating that the reach is lost, the reach state of the number icon "odd number" becomes the reach loss, and the reach state of the number icon "even number" is changed. The degree of decrease in the player's willingness to play differs between when the reach is lost and when the game is lost.

Here, in this 21st control example, the content of the special privilege given when the stopped and displayed third symbol type is "reach-losing" differs depending on the type of the third symbol that is "reach-losing". The higher the degree of decrease in the player's desire to play when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "ready-to-lose", that is, the higher the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is, the higher is the ready-to-win state. It is constructed so that a special privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player who wins the prize or loses the win in the ready-to-reach state of the third pattern in which the player is likely to be given a privilege when the jackpot is won. .
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 618, when the object of "reach loss" is "7 reach", the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is clearly indicated as "setting suggestion strong". A special privilege that can execute voice output (see FIG. 610(b)) is defined, and if the target of "reach loss" is "odd number reach other than 7", the setting that is set in the pachinko machine 10 A special privilege that can execute voice output of "weak setting suggestion" that can suggest a value is specified, and if the target of "reach loss" is "even number reach", the setting set in the pachinko machine 10 A special privilege is defined that allows for a lively audio output for which no value is implied.
By configuring in this way, the player can not only know whether or not the third symbol stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is in a display mode indicating a big win, but also which third symbol. Since it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the symbol type was stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In addition, since the stop display mode of the third symbols that can give a special benefit advantageous to the player is defined as "ready-to-miss", for example, regardless of the stop display mode of the third symbols, all the third symbols are stopped. At the displayed timing, in the case where a special privilege (setting suggestion) can be granted with a predetermined probability, the fact that the special privilege can be granted is indicated before the special privilege is granted (the reach state is Since the player can be made aware of the information given as the special privilege, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player fails to grasp the information given as the special privilege due to the sudden award of the special privilege. .
In addition, since the stop display mode of the third pattern that can give a special benefit advantageous to the player is defined as "ready to lose", as a variation effect of the third pattern, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the jackpot. It is possible to make it easier to give a special privilege when the prize is not won (when the prize is lost). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's desire to play is excessively lowered.

In addition, in this 21st control example, "reach loss" is defined as a general classification of the third symbol type, and the contents of the special benefits given according to the type of the third symbol in the reach state (reach type) are different. In addition to this configuration, according to the type of the final stop 3rd pattern in the case of "reach loss", the 3rd pattern type is further subdivided, and the contents of the special benefits to be given It may be configured to be different.
In this case, for example, the reach state of the same type (for example, "5 reach") and the final stop third symbol is close to the third symbol "5" which is the reach state (for example, "4" or "6 ”), a special privilege advantageous to the player is more likely to be given than when the third symbol “5”, which is the ready-to-win state, is not close (for example, “1” or “2”). Good to configure.
That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in recent years, in the ready-to-win effect executed when the third pattern in the variable display is in the ready-to-win state, when the ready-to-win effect with high expectation of winning the jackpot (high reach effect) is executed A ready-to-win state is provided to arouse the player whether or not the third symbol combination ("555") corresponding to the winning of the jackpot will be stop-displayed immediately before the performance result indicating whether or not to win the jackpot is displayed. , and the third patterns ``4'' and ``6'' displayed before and after the third pattern ``5'' and the third patterns ``4'' and ``6'' displayed before and after the third pattern ``4'' and ``6'' are displayed in a stopped manner. When a ready-to-win performance with a low degree of winning expectation (low-to-win performance) is executed, the final stop third pattern at the time of ready-to-win failure is set to a ready-to-win state in order to suppress the player's excessive expectation of winning a big win. It is common to configure the pattern so as to be greatly different from the third pattern.
Therefore, by subdividing and stipulating "reach loss" defined as the third pattern type into "reach loss (1 frame)" and "reach loss (other than that)", the reach performance with high expectation of winning the jackpot is achieved. It is possible to make it easy to grant a special privilege when the prize is lost despite the execution.

Also, in the twenty-first control example, the voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa shown in FIG. Instead, the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa may be defined so that different voice commands are determined according to the set game state. In this case, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a different probability of establishing a ready-to-win state according to the set game state, it is better to set a game state in which the ready-to-win state is difficult to establish. , a game state in which the set game state is advantageous to the player ( For example, if it is a variable probability state), it is specified that it is difficult to give special benefits as a whole compared to when the set game state is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state) You can do it.
Returning to FIG. 618, the description continues. When the third symbol type is "loose eyes", that is, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination to indicate a win without reaching a ready-to-win state, the left stop symbol (symbol in FIG. 610(a) D1), the voice data corresponding to the character type (“Octopus” in FIG. 610(a)) displayed is specified, and the combination of the character types of the third symbol displayed stopped (in FIG. 610(a) A voice command (command 15 . In this 21st control example, the special benefits that can be granted when the third symbol type "barakeme" is stopped and displayed are the special benefit of voice-outputting lines for liveliness and the stop at the next change. It is configured to be able to provide a special privilege in which a speech is voice-output for suggesting the type of character to be displayed.
With this configuration, even if the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is the "separate eyes", the stop display mode (left stop symbol) is displayed. Since it is possible to output voice using voice data corresponding to , and voice output of conversation lines corresponding to a combination of stop display modes, it is possible to prevent a player from quickly getting bored with the game. can be done. In addition, a special benefit is given for suggesting the type of stop symbol in the next variation (character type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed) in a part of the dialogue that is voice-output based on "Barakeme". It is possible to make the player who is trying to quickly grasp the result of the special pattern lottery be interested in the content of the voice-output conversation lines.
Furthermore, in this 21st control example, since it is configured to be able to display a special third symbol in which the number icon and character type are different from normal, the stop symbol type in the variation (the third symbol to be stopped and displayed) When a special privilege for suggesting a character type) is given, the type of the third symbol to be stopped (the type of the number icon) is predicted based on the character type of the third symbol to be stopped. can provide entertainment.

The pending action selection table 222xb is referred to when determining the operation pattern when moving the pending symbol displayed in the display area HR2, that is, the display mode for indicating the number of rights to execute the acquired special symbol lottery. It is a data table, which is referred to when determining an action mode (action) in shifting the display area of reserved symbols based on the start of a new special symbol variation (see F4101 in FIG. 631).
Here, in the 19th control example described above, the reservation information including the execution right of the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to store (hold storage) up to 4 pieces for each special symbol type, and the stored reservation A reserved symbol for showing the number of information to the player can be displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Then, when a new special symbol lottery is executed, the special symbol lottery is executed based on the information contained in the reserved and stored reservation information. That is, in the reserved information, the information (acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1) referred to when judging the big win in the special symbol lottery to be executed later is reserved and stored. Therefore, in the 19th control example described above, in the pending information (holding information corresponding to the pending design displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third design display device 81) in which the special symbol lottery is not executed The included information is discriminated in advance, and a pending change effect (see FIGS. 524 to 528) for suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot can be executed.
However, the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 shift the display position of the reserved symbols each time a new special symbol variation is executed. In the case of executing the pending change effect of moving the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 in a state where the position is fixed, when the special symbol fluctuation is executed in a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined period (10 seconds) or more, that is, the predetermined period Only when the condition that the display position of the reserved pattern does not change for (10 seconds) is established, the pending change performance can be executed, and when the condition is not established, the pending change performance can be executed. I had a problem that I couldn't.
On the other hand, for example, the suspension change effect used in the above-described 19th control example, that is, the suspension change effect that specifies the pending symbol that can be changed by moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 is suspended. In order to be able to continue execution even when the display position of the symbol is shifted, the timing at which the display position of the reserved symbol is shifted is specified based on the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed, and at the specified timing In addition, it is necessary to control the movable positions of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2, and there is a problem that the contents of the control processing for executing the pending change effect become enormous. In addition, when the short-time special symbol variation is continuously executed, the special symbol using the suspension information corresponding to the suspension symbol to be subjected to the suspension variation performance while the suspension variation performance is being executed. There was a problem that the lottery was executed.

On the other hand, in the twenty-first control example, the execution condition of the pending change effect for varying the display mode of the pending symbol is satisfied, and the special symbol to be executed (in progress) When a short period of time (for example, 5 seconds) is set (set) as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, a holding action presentation is executed in which the operation pattern (action) of the operation of shifting the display position of the holding pattern is changed. Thus, it is possible to notify the player of the expected degree of winning the jackpot of the reserved symbol to be subjected to the reserved change performance.
By configuring in this way, even if there is a situation where the reserved design is not maintained at a specific display position for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) (a situation where a short-time variation of the special design is executed), the game It is possible to notify the user of the preliminary determination result for the pending information in an easy-to-understand manner.
Furthermore, in the twenty-first control example, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is changed based on the mode of the pending action executed as the pending action effect and the result of the special symbol lottery based on the target pending information. It is structured so that it can be suggested. Specifically, even though a pending action mode (for example, a jump mode) with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is executed, the result of the special symbol lottery based on the pending information that is the target of the pending action production is lost. , it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a setting value (setting "3") that is advantageous to the player is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the pending action mode executed when the display position of the pending symbol shifts.
Here, with reference to FIG. 619, the contents defined in the pending action selection table 222xb will be described. FIG. 619 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the pending action selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 619, in the pending action selection table 222xb, there are a plurality of types of action modes (normal, high speed, jump) as action modes (normal, high speed, jump) to be executed when the pending symbol targeted for the pending action effect is shifted. Prefetch result (preliminary determination result for target hold information), the presence or absence of hold change scenario setting, the setting value, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (winning information) corresponding to the pending symbol to be the target of the pending action effect is a jackpot winning, and the pending change effect is executed for the pending symbol. When the setting value "1" is set in a state where the information (holding scenario information) for A pending action “jump” is defined, a pending action “fast” is defined for the range “60-89”, and a pending action “jump” is defined for the range “90-98”. Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "high speed" is in the range of "60 to 89". , and a pending action "jump" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "3" is set, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "jump" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action "fast" is defined for the range "90-98", and a pending action "fast" is defined for the range "90-98".
On the other hand, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (winning information) corresponding to the pending pattern that is the target of the pending action production is a jackpot winning, and the information for executing the pending change production for the pending pattern (suspended scenario information) is not set, and if the set value "1" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59". "Normal" is defined, the pending action "Normal" is defined for the range "60-89", and the pending action "Fast" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "normal" is in the range of "60 to 89". , and the pending action "jump" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "3" is set, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "jump" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “fast” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”.
Furthermore, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (prize information) corresponding to the pending pattern that is the target of the pending action effect is an outlier winning, and information for executing the pending change effect for the pending pattern (suspended scenario information) is set, if the set value "1" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59" pending action " High speed” is defined, pending action “normal” is defined for the range “60-89”, and pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”. Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "high speed" is in the range of "60 to 89". , and the pending action "jump" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the set value "3" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "high speed" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “jump” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”.
On the other hand, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (winning information) corresponding to the pending pattern that is the target of the pending action effect is a winning win, and information for executing the pending change effect for the pending pattern (suspended scenario information) is not set, and if the set value "1" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59". "Normal" is defined, the pending action "Normal" is defined for the range "60-89", and the pending action "Fast" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "normal" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “fast” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”. Further, when the setting value "3" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "normal" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “fast” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “jump” is defined for the range “90-98”.

Next, with reference to FIG. 620, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 620 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 620, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example has a RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the nineteenth control example (see FIG. The difference is that a setting value storage area 223xa, a setting changing flag 223xb, and a fixed voice flag 223xc are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The setting value storage area 223xa is a storage area for storing a setting value based on the information about the setting value output from the main controller 110 when the information is received. Specifically, when the state command including information about the set value is set (see S1753 in FIG. 622) in the start-up process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 622), and the received state command is received, A setting value is specified based on the information included in the status command, and information indicating the specified setting value is stored in the setting value storage area 223xa.
The information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa is referred to when determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when executing a setting change operation for changing the setting value, it is configured to always require an operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, and After the setting change operation is completed, a status command containing information about the setting value is configured to be set. Furthermore, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (every time the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 622) is executed), a state command including information on the setting value is voiced from the main controller 110. It is configured to be output to the lamp control device 113 . With this configuration, even if the information about the set value is output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 only at a limited timing such as when the power is turned on, the audio lamp controller 113 side The current set value can be reliably grasped by .
In addition, by minimizing the chances of outputting information about the setting value, it is possible to prevent the illegal acquisition of the information about the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the signal indicating the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly output to the outside, but the information about the setting value is output. Even if this is the case, it becomes difficult to specify the setting value indicated by the information, so that it is possible to suppress the act of illegally acquiring the information regarding the setting value. In addition, in this embodiment, a part of the state command for indicating the gaming state (for example, the upper bits that are likely to be empty bits among the 8 bits for generating the state command) are used to set information about the setting value. Therefore, it is more difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information than when the information about the setting value is output alone. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the setting value storage area 223xa is configured to store information indicating the setting value, not the value indicating the setting value, the information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa may be illegally acquired. Even if the setting value is specified, it becomes difficult to specify the setting value indicated by the output information.
In this control example, a dedicated storage area called the setting value storage area 223xa is provided as a storage area for storing information about the setting value (information indicating the setting value). A part of another storage area (empty area) is configured to store information for indicating the setting value, and the storage area in which the information on the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored It may be configured to store the address to be indicated in a specific area. In this case, it is configured to periodically or irregularly change the area for storing the information on the set value (information for indicating the set value). good to do
Further, it is preferable that the information about the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is processed according to a predetermined rule corresponding to the specification of the storage area for storing the information about the setting value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally obtained based on the information stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 .
Setting changing flag 223xb is a flag for indicating that the setting is currently being changed, and is set to ON when a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from main controller 110. (See F2072 in FIG. 625). Then, when it is determined that a change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed is received, it is set to OFF (see F2074 in FIG. 625).

By providing this setting changing flag 223xb, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the operation status of the setting changing operation executed by the main control device 110, so that until the setting changing operation is completed, The process of the standby process (see F2051 in FIG. 625) executed during the period can be switched according to the operation status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.
The fixed voice flag 223xc is a flag for indicating a period in which voice data to be output as voice is not changed, and is set to ON when a period in which voice data to be output as voice is not changed is set. In the twenty-first control example, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 using the voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. type can be determined. When the third pattern for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, the character type attached to the third pattern for indicating that the jackpot has been won is handled until the next jackpot is won. It is configured so that the voice output using the voice data to be executed can be continuously executed.
The fixed voice flag 223xc indicates that the third symbol to be stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot winning in the stop command process (see F2273 in FIG. 629) which is executed when a stop command for stopping and displaying the third symbol is received. When it is determined that it is a pattern (the third pattern corresponding to the big hit winning variation), it is set to ON (F2675 in FIG. 629), and the setting status is determined each time a stop command is received (F2671 in FIG. 629) ). Here, when it is determined that the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671 in FIG. 629: Yes), processing for specifying a new voice command for this third symbol stop display is executed. Skipped. And it is set to OFF when setting the stop type corresponding to the big hit winning variation (see F4003 in FIG. 628).
Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the twenty-first control example, the player can turn off the fixed voice flag 223xc, which has been set to on, by operating the operation means (effect button 22). configured as possible. With this configuration, when the player wins the jackpot with the third pattern to which the character type not intended by the player is attached, the voice output using the voice data corresponding to the character type unintended is continued for a long period of time. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, referring to FIG. 621, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 621(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 302. FIG. As shown in FIG. 621(a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least a voice file storage area 302xa.
The voice file storage area 302xa stores voice data corresponding to character types in addition to voice files (voice data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. storage area. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the effects is read out from the audio file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.
Further, when a voice command for voice indicating the type of voice data is notified by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice data corresponding to the voice command is read out from the voice file storage area 302xa and voice synthesized. It is output to the corresponding channel of the unit 306 .
Further, the audio file storage area 302xa stores a dedicated audio file that is output when an audio voice command is notified by the audio lamp control device 113. The audio file is used to indicate the type of voice data. When a command is notified by the voice lamp controller 113, a dedicated voice file corresponding to the voice command is read out from the voice file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesizing section 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the sound output device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. 621(b). FIG. 621(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 621(b), the RAM 303 has at least a command storage area 303xa and a selected voice storage area 303xb.
The command storage area 303a is an area in which various commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing of the voice output device 226 (see F6002 in FIG. 633) is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 303a is read, and the command determination processing is performed. parses the command and performs processing according to the command.
The selected voice storage area 303xb is a storage area for storing the type of voice data read out from the voice file storage area 302xa in response to the voice command for voice notified from the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. When an audio voice command is output from the audio lamp control device 113, the type of voice data corresponding to the audio voice command received from the audio file storage area 302xa is stored. When executing the process of outputting such voice, the voice data of the voice to be output is formed based on the information indicating the type of voice data stored in the selected voice storage area 303xb.
<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the 21st control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 622, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 622 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (F1701). In the initial setting process (F1701), a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position (F1751). In the processing of F1751, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position (F1751: Yes), it means that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set. A set value control process for performing corresponding control is executed (F1752), and the process proceeds to F1710, which will be described later. Details of this set value control process (F1752) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of F1751, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not at the ON position (F1751: No), the process proceeds to F1704.
In the process of F1704, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 608) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712 do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705). If (F1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.
If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (F1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.
In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (F1713, F1714) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to F1710.
On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( F1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (F1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (F1709), and the process proceeds to F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .
In the processing of F1710, an initialization command indicating permission of effect is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, a status command including information indicating the current game status and information about the current set value is set (F1753), interrupt permission is set (F1712), and the process proceeds to the main process.
Next, referring to FIG. 623, the contents of the set value control process (F1752), which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 622) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the set value control process (F1752).

As shown in FIG. 623, in the set value control process (F1752), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 608) is turned on (F1901), and if it is turned on (F1901: Yes ), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1902). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1903, F1904). In the RAM initialization process (F1903, F1904), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared (F1903), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1904). After executing the initialization processing of the RAM 203, a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted (F1905), and the processing proceeds to F1906.
In the process of F1906, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (F1906). In the process of F1906, if it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (F1906: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203xa is updated by adding 1 (F1907), and the process of F1908 is performed. to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1906 that the setting switch is off (F1906: No), the process of F1907 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F1908.
In the processing of F1908, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (F1908). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the OFF position (F1908: Yes), a change completion command indicating completion of setting change is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (F1909), and this processing ends. That is, the setting change state is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 622). As a result, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which a normal game can be played.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (F1908: No), the process returns to F1906. That is, the processes of F1906 to F1908 are repeated until it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Also, in the process of F1901, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1901: No), first, the payout return command is sent to the payout control device 111 (F1910), then the set value storage area 203xa data is read (F1911). When the processing of F1911 is completed, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (F1912), the state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (F1913), and the setting key 110b is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is arranged at the OFF position (F1914). In the processing of F1914, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (F1914: Yes), this processing ends. That is, the game is shifted to a playable state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1914 that the setting key 110b is not set to the OFF position (F1914: No), the process of F1914 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.
By executing this set value control process (F1752: see FIG. 623), it is possible to change the set value according to the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed at the OFF position.
<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 21st control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 624 to 631, the contents of control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example will be described. In this 21st control example, for the content of the control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example described above, instead of the start-up processing (see FIG. 568), the start-up processing (see F2112 in FIG. 570), executing command determination processing (see F2172 in FIG. 570) instead of command determination processing (see F2112 in FIG. 570), and status command reception processing (see F2202 in FIG. 571). Instead of executing the state command reception process (see F2271 in FIG. 627), and executing the stop symbol type setting process (see F2272 in FIG. 628) when the stop type command is received from the main control unit 110 and are different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 624, the contents of the start-up process will be described. FIG. 624 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-up process. As shown in FIG. 624, the start-up process is performed before the start-up process (see FIG. 568) executed in the above-described 19th control example, before executing the process of F2010 for executing the initial value setting of the RAM. The difference is that the standby process (F2051) is executed in 1, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the standby process (F2051) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 624) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 625 is a flow chart showing the contents of the standby process (F2051). In this standby process (F2051), when the setting change operation is being performed, a process for waiting the start-up process by the sound lamp control device 113 until the setting change operation is completed is performed. .
When the standby process (F2051) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a changing command has been received (F2071). (F2072), then it is determined whether or not a change completion command has been received (F2073).
In the processing of F2073, if it is determined that a change completion command has been received, that is, if it has been determined that a command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed (F2073: Yes), the setting changing flag 223xb is turned off. Set (F2074) and move to start-up processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2073 that the change completion command has not been received, that is, if the command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed has not been received (F2073: No), the change completion command is received. The processing of F2073 is looped until it is done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the start-up process (see FIG. 624) of the audio lamp control device 113 from ending during the setting change operation.
If it is determined in the process of F2071 that the changing command has not been received, that is, if the setting change operation has not been executed (F2071), the processes of F2072 to F2074 are skipped and the process proceeds to the startup process. Transition. By configuring in this way, when the setting change operation is not executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is not waited unnecessarily, so the power of the pachinko machine 10 is eliminated. It is possible to make it easier to quickly complete various processes (start-up processes in each control device) that are executed at the time of turning on.

Next, the contents of the command determination process (F2172) in the twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 626 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (F2172). As shown in FIG. 626, the command determination process (F2172) is different from the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. Command reception processing (see F2202 in Figure 571) is changed to state command reception processing (F2271 in Figure 627), and when a stop type command is received, stop symbol type determination processing (see F2272 in Figure 628) is executed. and that the process executed when a stop command is received is changed from the stop command process (see F2214 in FIG. 576) to the stop command process (see F2273 in FIG. 629). Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 627, the contents of the status command reception process (F2271) will be described. FIG. 627 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process (F2271). This status command reception process (F2271) is different from the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 570) in the above-described 19th control example, in that a process to be executed when it is determined that the set value information has been received is added. are different, and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 570) is executed, it is first determined whether setting value information has been received (F2371). The set value information included in the received command is stored in the set value storage area 223xa (F2372), and the process proceeds to F2301.
In the process of F2371, if it is determined that the set value information has not been received (F2371: No), or if the process of F2372 is completed, the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 570) in the nineteenth control example described above and The same processing of F2301 to F2312 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, by storing the setting value information in the setting value storage area 223xa by the processing of F2372, when setting the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value, the currently set setting A performance mode based on a value can be surely set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 628, the contents of the stop symbol type setting process (F2272) will be described. FIG. 628 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol type setting process (F2272). In this stop symbol type setting process (F2272), a process for setting the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed this time based on the stop type command (jackpot, out of reach, loose eye) received from the main controller 110 is performed. executed.
When the stop pattern type setting process (F2272) is executed, first, the stop type selection flag is set to ON (F4001), it is determined whether or not the current stop pattern type is "jackpot" (F4002), and "jackpot ” (F4002: Yes), the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON. In other words, the privilege to be given when the jackpot is won is set (F4003).
Next, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "jackpot A", that is, the jackpot advantageous to the player (F4004). A lottery for determining the type of the third pattern (odd winning pattern) with a numeric icon indicating an odd number is determined, and the stop type corresponding to the determined third pattern type is set (F4005), and then , F4010.

On the other hand, in the process of F4004, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not "jackpot A" (F4004: No), the lottery for determining the type of the third symbol is the number icon indicating an even number. 3 symbols (symbols per even number) are determined, the stop type corresponding to the determined 3rd symbol type is set (F4005), and then the process proceeds to F4010.
In addition, in the processing of F4002, if it is determined that the current stop symbol type is not "jackpot" (F4002: No), it is determined whether the received stop type is "out of reach" (F4007), and "reach (F4007: Yes), the lottery for determining the type of the third symbol is used to set the stop type corresponding to reach loss (F4008), and then the process proceeds to F4010. When it is determined that it is not "out of reach" in the process of F4007 (F4007: No), the stop type of the lost symbol corresponding to the variation type is set (F4009), and the process proceeds to F4010.
That is, in the 21st control example, only when the "jackpot A" is won, the third pattern with the odd number pattern is stop-displayed in the display mode for indicating the jackpot win. Therefore, the plurality of numbers (number icons) attached to the third pattern serve as identification information capable of suggesting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The third symbols attached with odd numbers are more advantageous to the player than the third symbols attached with even numbers because they are associated with winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It becomes the third pattern.
In the process of F4010, a character change lottery is executed (F4010), next it is determined whether or not the character change lottery has been won (F4011). The display of the special third pattern is determined (F4012), a display command corresponding to the determined content is set (F4013), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F4011 that the prize has not been won (F4011: No), this process ends.

In addition, in the twenty-first control example, the determination of the display of the special third pattern (the third pattern displayed with the type of the number icon and the type of the character different from the basic third pattern) is executed by lottery. However, the configuration is not limited to this and may be configured so that the player can arbitrarily select. In this case, the presence or absence of display determination of the special third pattern may be configured so that the player can select, or the combination of the special third patterns (determining the character type attached to a specific number icon, (determining the type of numeric icon attached to the character type) may also be selectable by the player. Furthermore, when the player is configured to be able to select (determine) a combination of the special third symbols, the display mode of the special third symbols selected (determined) by the player is different from the variable display of the third symbols. It is preferable to configure such that it can be displayed separately so that the player can arbitrarily check the display mode of the special third symbol.
Next, the contents of the stop command process (F2273) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 629 is a flowchart showing the details of the stop command process (F2273). As shown in FIG. 629, the stop command process (F2273) differs from the stop command process (see F2214 in FIG. 576) in the 19th control example in that a process related to voice data setting is added. Otherwise, they are identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
When the stop command process (F2273) is executed, first, the same processes of F2651 to F2656 as the stop command process (see F2214 in FIG. 576) of the 19th control example described above are executed. After completing the process of F2656, it is determined whether the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (F2671: No), the voice command selection table 222xa A voice command is determined by referring to it (F2672), a voice command for voice for indicating the determined voice command is set (F2673), and the process proceeds to F2674. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2671 that the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671: Yes), there is no need to determine new voice data based on this stop display. The process of F2673 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2674.
In the process of F2674, it is determined whether or not the third symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is a jackpot stop (whether it is a third symbol stop corresponding to the special pattern of the jackpot winning) (F2674), and it is determined that the jackpot has been won. If so (F2674: Yes), the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2675), the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of F2674 that the jackpot is not won (F2674: No), the process of F2675 is skipped, the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 630, the processing contents of the holding effect execution processing at the start of fluctuation (F3179) will be described. FIG. 630 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the holding effect execution processing at the start of fluctuation (F3179). As shown in FIG. 630, the suspension performance execution processing at the start of fluctuation (F3179) determines that the variation time is less than 10 seconds, as compared with the suspension performance execution processing at the start of fluctuation (F3109) in the 19th control example described above. The difference is that the pending action determination process (F3271) is executed when the process is executed (F3203: No), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 631, the content of the pending action determination process (F3271) will be described. FIG. 631 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending action determination process (F3271). In this pending action determination process (F3271), the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed is short (less than 10 seconds), and the pending change effect is maintained in the same display area (see 19th control example). is difficult to execute, a process for setting the shift chance effect is performed.
As shown in FIG. 631, when the pending action determination process (F3271) is executed, first, the pending action is determined by referring to the pending action selection table 222xb (F4101), and the effect mode corresponding to the determined pending action is displayed. The display command shown is set (F4102), and this processing ends.
<Regarding control processing in the audio output device 226>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 632 to 634, the contents of control processing executed by the audio output device 226 in the twenty-first control example will be described.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 632(a). FIG. 632(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.
When the main processing of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, based on the average amplitude obtained by sampling the synthesized voice data for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) in the command determination processing (F6002) A command output process for transmitting the generated synthesized voice command to the voice lamp controller 113 is executed (F6001). Next, command determination processing is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the ADC 309 (F6002). The details of this command determination process (F6002) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of F6002, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) corresponding to the effect is executed (F6003). Details of this audio setting process (F6003) will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the process of F6003 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power-off occurrence information (F6004). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of F6004 (F6004: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (F6006), and power-off processing is executed (F6007). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (F6008), and then the processing is looped infinitely.
On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of F6004 (F6004: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (F6005), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (F6005: No), the process returns to F6001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (F6005: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 632(b). FIG. 632(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing.
This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 632(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .
In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (F6501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 633, the command determination process (F6002), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 632) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 633 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (F6002).

In the command determination process (F6002), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (F6101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (F6101: No), the command determination process is terminated. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (F6101: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (F6102). For all the commands of the process, the command type is analyzed (F6103).
Then, it is first determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (F6104). This audio variation pattern command is set at the timing when the detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected (see F2910 in FIG. 579) in the variation display setting process (see F2113 in FIG. are set to notify the type of sound to be reproduced and the output timing corresponding to the display mode.
In the process of F6104, when it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (F6104: Yes), the music and sound effects used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (F6105 ), set the specified song, the output channel and the output timing of the sound effect (F6106), and return to the process of F6101.
In the processing of F6104, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (F6104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a voice command (voice voice command for voice) among the unprocessed commands ( F6107). This voice voice command is a process (see FIG. 629) for determining voice data based on the character type attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the stop command process (see FIG. 629) of the audio lamp control device 113. 569), and is output to the audio output device 226 by command output processing (F2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 569) of the audio lamp control device 113.

In the processing of F6107, if it is determined that there is a voice command for voice among the unprocessed commands (F6107: Yes), the voice data corresponding to the notified voice type is identified (obtained) (F6108), The received voice data is stored in the currently selected voice storage area 303xb (F6109), and it is determined whether or not the voice command for voice received this time contains information for giving a special privilege (F6110). If it is determined that there is a special privilege (F6110: Yes), the corresponding privilege sound is read from the sound file storage area 302xa, the output timing of the privilege sound is set (F6111), and the process returns to S6101.
Next, with reference to FIG. 634, the details of the audio setting process (F6003), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 632) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 634 is a flow chart showing the contents of this audio setting process (F6003).
In the audio setting process (F6003), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output (reproduce) music (F6201). In the process of F6201, if it is determined that it is time to output the music (F6201: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (F6202), and the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6203). ), the music output flag is set to ON (F6204), and the process proceeds to F6205. Note that a channel for outputting an audio file is predetermined for each file. For example, it is preset to output the audio file of the music used for the variable effect to channel 1.
On the other hand, in the processing of F6201, if it is determined that it is not the time to output the music (F6201: No), the processing from F6202 to F6204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to F6205.

In the process of F6205, it is determined whether or not it is time to output a sound effect (F6205). If it is not the sound effect output timing (F6205: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the output timing of the sound effect (F6205: Yes), the sound file corresponding to the current sound effect is read (F6206), the read sound file is output to the corresponding channel (F6207), and the bonus sound is produced. It is determined whether it is the output timing (F6208). In the process of F6208, if it is determined that it is not the time to output the bonus sound (F6208: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of F6208, if it is determined that it is time to output the bonus audio (F6208: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the bonus audio this time is read (F6209), and the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel. (F6210), and the process ends.
<22nd control example>
Next, the twenty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 635 to 646. FIG. Conventionally, a variable effect indicating that a jackpot has been won by stopping and displaying a plurality of (three) third symbols in a specific combination (same pattern), and a part of the plurality of third symbols (for example, three 2 out of 3 third symbols) are stop-displayed in a manner showing a part of a specific combination indicating winning of the jackpot, and the remaining 3 rd symbols (for example, the remaining 1 out of 3 3rd symbols). is variably displayed (a so-called ready-to-win state), a variable effect (ready-to-win variable effect) is executed to prompt the player in which mode the remaining third symbols are stopped and displayed. Are known.
Then, as a ready-to-win variation performance, the player is notified of the number of types of the third symbols that can be stopped and displayed within a range limited to the number of types of the third symbols that are variably displayed, and the notified third symbol types. Among them, there is one that executes a reach variation effect that stops and displays one third symbol.
By configuring in this manner, the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is predicted to the player before the third symbol (final stop symbol) displayed in a variable manner during the ready-to-win variation effect is stopped and displayed. For example, if the notified content indicates that there is a high possibility that the final stop symbol will be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won (stop as the final stop symbol When the occupancy rate of the third pattern type indicating the winning of the jackpot is high among the third pattern types notified as the types of the third patterns that can be displayed, the game reaches the player while heightening the expectation of winning the jackpot. It was possible to make the player pay attention to the variable performance, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, it is also known that the number of types of the third symbols that can be stop-displayed during the ready-to-win variation performance is notified in a plurality of modes in which the types of the third symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are the same. Specifically, for example, a combination of "111" and the third symbol being stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot winning, and two third symbols are left in the state of being stopped and displayed with "11". In the ready-to-win state in which one third symbol (final stop symbol) is variably displayed, two "1"s indicating a jackpot win and "2"s indicating a miss win are displayed as stop display mode candidates for the final stop symbol. There is known a system capable of notifying three candidates in total of five before the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily change the ratio of the stop display mode indicating winning to the entire stop display mode candidates of the final stop symbol, so that the effect result of the variable effect being executed can be changed. To make it easy for a player to predict in advance whether the performance result indicates a jackpot winning or the performance result indicating a losing win.
However, in the above-described reach variation effect, when the effect result is the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the stop display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot occupies a high proportion as the stop display mode of the final stop symbol notified in advance. By doing so, it is possible to provide an effect that gradually raises the player's expectation of winning the jackpot, while if the result of the effect is not the winning of the jackpot, the stop display mode of the final stop pattern notified in advance. As a result, the proportion occupied by the stop display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot becomes low, and the player's willingness to play is reduced before the stop display of the reach variation effect is displayed (the final stop symbol is stop displayed). There was a problem of hoarding.
On the other hand, in the twenty-second control example, in a specific ready-to-win state, the type of the third symbol displayed as the ready-to-win state is configured to be variable after notification of the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol. there is Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 2" is notified as a stop display mode candidate for the final stop symbol notified during the ready state of "22", the state of the ready state is changed to "22". to "11".

That is, in a specific ready-to-win state, the third symbol types in the ready-to-win state are made different so that the stop display mode of the final stop symbol indicating the winning win becomes the stop display mode of the final stop symbol indicating the winning win. ing.
By configuring in this way, even when the proportion of the stop display mode indicating winning is low at the time when the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol is notified, the third symbol type in the ready-to-win state is switched, Since it is possible to leave the possibility of increasing the ratio of the stop display mode indicating winning, it is possible to allow the player to execute the ready-to-reach variation presentation without getting bored until the end.
Further, in this 22nd control example, after notification of the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol in a specific ready-to-win state, the types of the third symbols displayed in the ready-to-win state can be increased. Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 3" is notified as a stop display mode candidate for the final stop symbol notified during the ready state of "22", the state of the ready state is changed to "22". (single reach) to "11" and "22" (double reach).
By configuring in this way, even when the proportion of the stop display mode indicating winning is low when the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol is notified, the number of the third symbol types that are in the ready-to-win state is reduced. Since it is possible to increase the possibility of increasing the ratio of the stop display mode indicating winning, the player can be made to execute the reach variation presentation without getting bored until the end. It should be noted that a configuration may be used in which the types of all the third symbols that are variably displayed are switched to the stop display mode of the final stop symbol. It can be said that the configuration of switching to the symbol stop display mode is a configuration in which an effect mode different from usual is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, during the period when the identification information (special pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the special pattern is displayed on the display screen (third pattern display device) configured by the liquid crystal display. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable performance for variably displaying a corresponding third symbol. In this conventional type pachinko machine 10, the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (jackpot winning) that is advantageous to the player or a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (losing winning) depending on the contents of the variable performance to be executed. It is common for a player to predict whether there is a lottery before the lottery result is notified, and by making it possible to execute variable performances of different performance modes based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, When the jackpot is won, it is easier to execute the fluctuation performance (advantageous fluctuation performance) than when the jackpot is not won (when the jackpot is won). It is known that a variable performance (disadvantageous variable performance) that is more likely to be executed in the case of no winning (lost winning) can be executed.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set lower than the probability of losing the winning due to the game characteristics that advantageous benefits are given to the player when the jackpot is won. In order to suppress the decline of the player's desire to play, even when the player continues for a long time the game in which the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the game is won, which is common. In some cases, a wide variety of performance modes can be set as the performance mode of the disadvantageous fluctuation performance to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
According to the conventional type pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the player is less likely to get bored with the game as it is configured so that more production modes can be determined as the production modes of the variable performance. There is a problem that the capacity of the display data required for executing the variable presentation increases due to the increase in the number of presentation modes, and the manufacturing cost increases.
On the other hand, in the 22nd control example, by varying the scale of the display area without changing the display data set as the effect mode of the variable effect, different variable effects can be provided to the player. is doing. Specifically, by transmitting a scale command for changing the scale of the display area to the display control device 114, the display image displayed on the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is reduced. is displayed in a partial area of the display screen, or the display image displayed in a partial area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be enlarged and displayed so as to occupy the entire display screen. It consists of In addition to changing the scale of the displayed image, it is also possible to add a twist to the displayed image and change the three-dimensional balance in the depth direction.

By constructing in this way, the player can experience the variable performance in many display modes without increasing the display data of the variable performance, thereby preventing the player from quickly getting bored with the game. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that does not exist.
In addition, in the twenty-second control example, a plurality of layers are provided to form the display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the display area scale setting described above is performed. can be set for each layer. By configuring in this way, for example, among the various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the image layer on which the display image corresponding to the variable effect being executed is displayed, and the information on the game ( For example, the display image corresponding to the reserved information indicating the number of reserved symbols, the time saving information indicating the number of time saving, etc.) is formed differently, and the display image corresponding to the variable effect is displayed. Scaling can be performed on layers only. Therefore, by varying the scale of the display image, while providing the player with a novel effect, the display image corresponding to the information (game information) to be notified to the player (e.g. Since the pattern display) can be continuously displayed without being reduced in scale, it is possible to inform the player of the information regarding the game in an easy-to-understand manner while providing various effects to the player.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example has a plurality of layers as layers corresponding to the variable effect (variation display layers), and for example, at least the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It has a main layer and a sub-layer that is formed on the back side of the main layer and on which a background image with a variable effect is displayed. When the scale of the main layer is set to a normal scale, the display mode displayed on the sub-layer is configured to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.
Then, when the scale setting for reducing the display area of the main image layer is executed, the image is displayed on the main image layer in an area smaller than the display area, which is the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Since the display image is displayed, from the area (empty display area) where the display image displayed on the reduced main image layer is not displayed in the display area which is the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, The display image displayed on the sub-layer is configured so that the player can visually recognize it.

With this configuration, not only the scale of the display image is reduced, but also the new display mode (the display mode displayed on the sub-layer) can be visually recognized by the player, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can be enhanced.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example is configured to be able to execute scale setting for changing the scale of the display image at various timings for the variable performance being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the reduction effect for reducing the display image is executed, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. can do.
Further, in this 22nd control example, when the variable performance being executed has won a big win, the scale performance described above is more likely to be executed than when the big win has not been won. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that the reduced-scale presentation will be executed.
In this case, when the scale effect is executed, the reduced main image among the layers (sub-layers) formed behind the layer (main layer) whose display area is reduced A display for notifying the player that the scale effect is being executed in a display area that does not overlap with the layer, that is, a display area that can be visually recognized by the player when the display area of the main layer is reduced. Mode (for example, display of "running scale effect") and display mode (for example, display of "chance") for indicating that the expectation of winning a jackpot is high. It is preferable to configure the display mode to be set in advance.

With this configuration, when the effect (reduced scale effect) of changing the scale of the display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is executed, the player thinks that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. You can suppress what seems to be In addition, when the reduced-scale production is executed, it is possible to provide the player with information that is advantageous to the player as visible information. You can play games.
Here, as in the twenty-second control example, without changing the display data constituting the display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the display area in which the display image is displayed is set to be reduced. When configured to be executable, the scale of the display mode displayed on the display image (for example, the number icon indicating the third pattern) corresponding to the set scale is also changed. When the ratio is changed, the aspect ratio of the displayed display mode is also changed. In this case, when the scale effect is executed while the number icon (third pattern) is being displayed as a variation effect for suggesting whether or not the player has won the jackpot, the third pattern is displayed. There is a problem in that the displayed numbers are deformed and misidentified by the player.
In addition, a plurality of third symbols are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state, and the remaining third symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the reduced-scale effect is executed in a state in which each third symbol fluctuates while temporarily stopping on the establishment line), the type of the third symbol that is temporarily stopped on the ready-to-reach establishment line ( There is a problem that the player misunderstands the number type).
In addition, as a variable performance, the third pattern is temporarily stopped with a combination indicating a failure during the variable performance period, and then the third pattern is again variably displayed to execute a performance (advancement performance) with a high expectation of a big win. In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the variable performance, when the scale performance is executed in a state where the third pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped third pattern is deformed, so that the player can move to the third pattern. There is a problem that the type of the three symbols (type of number) is misidentified.

As described above, in the event that the player misunderstands the type of the third symbols (the type of number), even if the combination of the third symbols indicating the failure is displayed, it is as if the There is a possibility that the players misunderstand that the three symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a winning of the jackpot, and give a sense of disbelief to the fact that the jackpot game is not executed.
Specifically, when the third symbol corresponding to the number "9" is in the ready-to-win state, and the remaining third symbol temporarily stops "8" on the ready-to-win establishment line, the scale effect is executed. In addition, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the display mode of the deformed "9" and the display mode of "8", and the third symbol of the same type is stopped and displayed on the established line (the third symbol is is displayed in a stopped state), there is a risk that the player may be misunderstood.
To deal with such a problem, in the twenty-second control example, all the third symbols are stopped on the established line (including temporary stop display), or all the third symbols are displayed on the established line. When the reduced-scale effect is executed in a state immediately before the stop display (including the temporary stop display), at least the third symbol (the final third symbol) that is stopped and displayed last is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Configure the control to be executable.
Specifically, a preliminary layer with a transmittance of 100% is always provided on the front side of the main layer (layer) where the third pattern is displayed. It is configured so that the same scale setting can be executed for the preliminary layers. Then, when the reduced scale effect is executed, the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed in the main image layer is discriminated, and the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is the effect pattern in which the above-described problem may occur. When it is determined that the final third pattern is difficult for the player to see, the excess rate of the display region overlapping the display region of the final third pattern in the main layer is reduced among the display regions of the auxiliary layer. It is configured to be

By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the final third symbol in a state where the scaled effect is executed, so that the third symbol that is stopped and displayed (including temporary stop display) on the establishment line is displayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the player misunderstands the combination of symbols.
In this way, by configuring the display areas to be scaled to the same scale for the main layer and the reserve layer, even if the scale effect is executed, the display area will be displayed on the reserve layer. Any portion of the main layer can be hidden (invisible state) by using the display mode.
Further, in the twenty-second control example, the player is shown that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high in the display area of the spare layer, which overlaps at least the display area of the final third symbol in the main layer. A display mode (for example, the characters "chance") is displayed in advance, and the transmittance of a partial area of the preliminary layer is reduced based on the execution of the reduced scale effect. In such a case, the display mode (for example, the characters "chance") for indicating to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot displayed on the preliminary layer is high is displayed in a manner that is visible to the player. It consists of
<Regarding the effect contents in the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 635 to 639, the contents of the characteristic effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example will be described. In the twenty-second control example, after the ready-to-win state is displayed, a plurality of symbol icons are displayed to indicate the type of the third symbol (final stop third symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed. A symbol stock ready-to-win effect for finally stop-displaying a third symbol corresponding to any one symbol icon among a plurality of symbol icons is configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, after the ready-to-win state is established, it is possible to inform the player of the candidate that can be stopped and displayed as the final stop third symbol, so that the player is made to predict the effect result of the current variable effect. can be made easier.
Here, with reference to FIGS. 635 to 636, the contents of the design stock reach effect will be described. FIG. 635(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the symbol stock reach effect is started, and FIG. FIG. 636(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the time of stocking, and FIG. 636(a) shows the display screen when a plurality of stocked pattern icons are temporarily hidden from the display screen. FIG. 636(b) is a diagram showing an example, and FIG. 636(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the symbol stock reach effect.
As shown in FIG. 635(a), above the main display area Dm, the third pattern is variably displayed in the display mode "2↓2" to indicate that the reach state is present, and the reach state is indicated. In the display area HR3 formed in the vicinity of the third symbol displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. When the ready-to-win effect is started, the sub-display area Ds displays a comment "stock the pattern" as a guidance mode for guiding the effect contents of the symbol stock ready-to-win effect, and is displayed below the main display area Dm. At , an effect is executed in which the character 801 collects pattern icons.
The example shown in FIG. 635(a) shows a state in which one pattern icon (first pattern icon 802a) has already been acquired (accumulated). The symbol icon has a display mode that allows the player to recognize the type of the corresponding third symbol. The first symbol icon 802a shown in FIG. A display mode "1" is attached to indicate compatibility. In the twenty-second control example, a symbol icon can be displayed as a display mode for suggesting the display mode of the final stop third symbol, and the display mode of the symbol icon indicates the type of the corresponding third symbol. It is formed in a display mode that allows the player to comprehend and that the symbol icon is not the third symbol.

Specifically, the pattern icon (first pattern icon 802a) is formed in a display mode in which a mark indicating the type (number) of the corresponding third pattern is attached in a sphere imitating a round ball. . With this configuration, when the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is displayed while the third symbol is in the reach state, the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is the final stop third symbol. It is possible to suppress the player from being misunderstood.
Further, as shown in FIG. 635(a), the pattern icon is displayed in a location that is significantly different from the variable display area of the third pattern. By configuring in this way, when one pattern icon (for example, the first pattern icon 802a) is displayed while the variable effect is being executed, the third pattern (two pieces) that is in the ready-to-win state. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third symbol has been stop-displayed by combining the symbol icons (one) to indicate a big win.
Next, in the symbol stock reach effect, when a plurality of symbol icons are acquired (stocked), as shown in FIG. 635(b), a plurality of symbol icons (first symbol icon 802a to fourth symbol icon 802d) are displayed. be. In the twenty-second control example, the maximum stock number of pattern icons is four, so the state shown in FIG. 635(b) is the state in which the maximum number of pattern icons are stocked. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "stock completed" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding that the maximum number of pattern icons has been obtained (stocked).
With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the number of stocked symbol icons is the maximum number during the symbol stock ready-to-win effect, so that the number of stocked symbol icons is more than this. Even in a state where there is no increase, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the user unnecessarily expects more pattern icons to be stocked.

By positioning the character 801 between the first pattern icon 802a and the second pattern icon 802b, the three pattern icons are not displayed side by side. With this configuration, the pattern icons corresponding to the same third pattern type (for example, "1") are displayed side by side with no other display modes in between, and the third pattern indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by the display.
In the example shown in FIG. 635(b), since four pattern icons are displayed on a straight line, for example, the first pattern icon 802a displayed on the right side of the character 801 and the fourth pattern icon 802d and 802d are displayed in a display mode for indicating the same third symbol type, a new ready-to-win establishment line may be established by the first symbol icon 802a and the fourth symbol icon 802d. There is a problem that the player is misunderstood.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 635(b), when a plurality of pattern icons (the first pattern icon 802a to the fourth pattern icon 802d) are displayed, the pattern icons are arranged so as not to be positioned on a straight line. It is preferable to determine the display position of each pattern icon. With this configuration, even if a plurality of pattern icons are displayed on the display screen, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a new ready-to-win establishment line has been established. In addition to this, the design icons may be configured to have different display modes or different sizes. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand that a new ready-to-win establishment line has been established.
After that, when the maximum number of stocks (acquisition) is acquired in the symbol stock reach effect, the acquired symbol icon rises as shown in FIG. After that, the character 801 executes the action of displaying the acquired symbol icon on the display screen again, and the third symbol corresponding to one of the stock symbol icons is stopped and displayed as the final stop third symbol. .

Here, in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect described above, when the effect result is the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the pattern icon corresponding to the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is selected as the type of the symbol icon to be displayed in advance. By increasing the occupied ratio, it is possible to provide an effect that gradually raises the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. As a type, the proportion of the symbol icon corresponding to the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot becomes low, and before the effect result of the symbol stock reach effect is stopped and displayed (the final stop third symbol is stopped and displayed). There is a problem that the player's desire to play is lowered.
On the other hand, in the twenty-second control example, the type of the third symbol in which the ready-to-win state is established can be changed using the stocked symbol icons. In this case, in FIG. 636(b), in the state shown in FIG. 636(a), the reach state of "2 ↓ 2" was displayed, but by the pattern icon, the reach state of "1 ↓ 1" was displayed. , "1" is stop-displayed as the final stop third symbol, and the third symbol is stop-displayed in combination to indicate to the player that the jackpot has been won.
That is, in the first half period of the symbol stock ready-to-win effect, the symbol icon corresponding to the final stop 3rd symbol indicating a winning win is switched to the symbol icon corresponding to the final stop 3rd symbol indicating a winning win. there is
By configuring in this way, even when the proportion of the symbol icons indicating winning is low when all the symbol icons are displayed in the symbol stock ready-to-win production, the third symbol type in the ready-to-win state is switched, Since it is possible to leave the possibility of increasing the ratio of the symbol icon indicating winning, the symbol stock ready-to-win performance can be executed to the end without getting tired of the player.

Although illustration is omitted, in this 22nd control example, as the symbol stock ready-to-win effect, after all the symbol icons are displayed, the type of the third symbol displayed as the ready-to-win state is increased. configured as possible. Specifically, from the reach state of "2↓2" shown in FIG. Configure.
By constructing in this way, even when the percentage of the symbol icons indicating winning is low when all the symbol icons which are stop display mode candidates for the final stop third symbol are displayed, the ready-to-win state is reached. By increasing the number of the third pattern types, it is possible to leave the possibility of increasing the ratio of the pattern icons indicating winning, so that the pattern stock reach effect is executed until the player gets bored until the end. can be made
Next, with reference to FIGS. 637 and 638, the effect contents of the screen press effect in the twenty-second control example will be described. In the twenty-second control example, after creating a display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, processing processing for processing the display image can be executed. Then, the processing is performed not on the entire display image, but on various sprites displayed in the display image, divided into a plurality of layer units, and the processing can be executed corresponding to each layer.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 637(a), at least a sub-layer fr, a main layer sr, a spare layer yr, and a main layer hr are provided from the rear side as layers for forming a display image. there is The display image that is normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and that can be visually recognized by the player includes the main image layer sr in which the main effect such as the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed, and the fourth symbol related to the game result. It is formed by the display image generated on the main layer hr to be displayed.

The sub-layer fr is always made invisible to the player by the display image displayed on the main layer sr. It becomes visible to the player only when the process is performed. Further, the spare layer yr is normally set to have a transmittance of 100%, so that the player cannot visually recognize the display image displayed on the spare layer yr. This preliminary layer yr is defined so that processing is executed in combination with the main layer sr.
In other words, when processing is performed on the main layer sr at a reduction rate of A%, processing is also performed on the auxiliary layer yr at a reduction rate of A%. Therefore, the display image displayed on the main layer sr and the display image displayed on the auxiliary layer yr are configured so that their display positions are always synchronized regardless of the content of processing. The preliminary layer yr is configured to be processed to vary the transmittance as a processing process. By configuring in this way, for example, when processing for changing the aspect ratio is executed on the main layer sr, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the main layer sr is deformed. If there is a risk that the player may misidentify the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed, the transmissivity of the spare layer yr is reduced (0%) so that the deformed third symbol can be displayed. It can be hidden.
Next, with reference to FIG. 637(b), the display image of the preliminary layer yr will be described. As shown in FIG. 637(b), the spare layer yr is a display area for the third symbols displayed on the main layer sr (at least the display area for displaying the third symbol to be finally stopped among the third symbols). This is a layer in which a display image for blindfold is displayed in an area where the display position overlaps with the area). In this 22nd control example, the display processing is always executed for the preliminary layer yr, and the transmittance is set to 100%. Then, when a screen press effect in which the aspect ratio of the main layer sr is changed is executed as a variable effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, processing is performed to change the transmittance from 100% to 0%. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 637(b), as a display image for blindfolding, a display image with the characters "chance" attached is used as a display mode for indicating to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. is displayed.
Next, on the main layer sr, display images corresponding to various variable effects executed in each control example described above are displayed (see FIG. 637(c)). On the sub-layer fr, as shown in FIG. 637(b), as a variation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, a screen press effect is executed in which the aspect ratio of the main layer sr is changed. Display image is always displayed. Although illustration is omitted, game information related to the game result (information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and error display) is displayed on this layer hr. This real layer hr is a layer on which no processing is applied to the display image. By configuring in this way, important information related to the game can always be notified in the same manner even when processing to change the scale of the display image is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 638, the contents of the screen press effect will be described. FIG. 638(a) is a diagram showing a normal display screen immediately before the screen press effect is started, and FIG. 638(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the screen press effect. The diagram shown in FIG. 638(a) is a state in which processing has not been performed on any layer. Therefore, the display image of the sub-layer fr cannot be visually recognized, and the display image of the preliminary layer yr cannot be visually recognized. Note that even in this state, display processing is being executed for the sub-layer fr and the spare layer yr.
Then, when the screen press effect is executed, the main layer sr and the auxiliary layer yr are processed according to scale A (a scale of 1:8 for the normal aspect ratio of 1:2). is applied, and a variable effect is executed in which the display area (display image) of the main layer sr is compressed in the vertical direction compared to the normal time. In this case, since the third symbols "9" and "8" displayed on the main layer sr are visually similar to "0", the third symbol shown in FIG. 638(a) is displayed. If the press effect is executed without changing the mode, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the third symbol with "0" is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the player wins the jackpot. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 638(b), the main layer sr and the auxiliary layer yr are processed at scale A (normal aspect ratio is 1:2, but scale is 1:8). The processing includes processing information for setting the transmittance of the preliminary layer yr to 0%, and the display image of the preliminary layer yr is displayed at the position corresponding to the medium pattern "8". This prevents the player from erroneously recognizing that the third symbol to which "0" is attached is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that a big win has been won.
Furthermore, since the display image with the characters "Chance" attached as the display image of the spare layer yr is made visible to the player, it is possible to not only hide the third symbol but also increase the expectation of winning the jackpot. It can also be used as a display mode for indicating high.
Then, the display image of the sub-layer fr is displayed so as to be visible to the player in the empty display area generated by processing the main layer sr. A display image (arrow) is displayed on the sub-layer fr to enhance the rendering effect for the collapse of the main layer sr. In addition, the characters "Screen Press Effect Occurrence" are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order when the display area of the main layer sr is suddenly deformed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 22nd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 639, the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 of the twenty-second control example will be described. FIG. 639 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the sound ramp control device 113 of the twenty-second control example. As shown in FIG. 639, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twenty-second control example has the The difference is that a symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the symbol stock reach effect, and is used to select a variable effect corresponding to the special symbol change when the normal state is set as the game state. In the normal state production mode determination process for setting (see F3098 in FIG. 643), when it is determined that the variable production type is symbol stock reach (F3191 in FIG. 643: Yes), it is referred.
Here, with reference to FIG. 640, the contents of the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya will be described. FIG. 640 shows the contents defined in the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya. As shown in FIG. 640, different effect patterns are defined according to the success/failure determination result and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg. Here, in this 22nd control example, odd-numbered symbols are configured to make it easier to notify that a player has won a big win that is more advantageous to the player than even-numbered symbols. Therefore, as the effect mode of the symbol stock reach, each effect pattern is defined so as not to switch from the reach state of the odd number symbol "1.1" to the reach state of "2.2". By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from declining in the process of progressing the variable presentation.
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the 22nd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 641, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the twenty-second control example will be described. The display control device 114 in the twenty-second control example differs from the display control device 114 in the first control example in that an image processing data storage area 234a3 is provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and a work area 234a3 is provided. The difference is that the RAM 233 is provided with a processing information storage area 233aa.

The image processing data storage area 234a3 stores a display image to be displayed based on the drawing information stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list. This is a storage area for storing processing information (image processing data) for changing the scale and tilt of the display image for the entire display image displayed on the display surface.
In the twenty-second control example, the display image generated by the image controller 237 of the display control device 114 can be processed based on the processing information read out from the image processing data storage area 234a3. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the appearance of display images generated by the same drawing process. Therefore, display images with different display modes can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without increasing the processing load of the drawing process.
The processing information storage area 233aa is a storage area for temporarily storing the processing information read from the image processing data storage area 234a3. When the display control device 114 executes the display process, in parallel with the process of storing the drawing information in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list, the other Display processing is executed based on the drawing information already stored in the frame buffer and the processing data stored in the processing information storage area 233aa.
Next, with reference to FIG. 642, the contents of the drawing list generated by the display control device 114 in the twenty-second control example will be described. FIG. 642 is a diagram schematically showing a drawing list in the twenty-second control example.

As shown in FIG. 642, in the twenty-second control example, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is rearranged for each sprite, This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the drawing list is created with the layer types roughly classified. In other words, as in the first control example described above, when the MPU 231 generates a drawing list, the sprites to be arranged in the image for one frame are rearranged in order from the sprite to be arranged on the backmost side to the sprite to be arranged on the front side. , detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite is described, and the layer type is defined for the order of the sprites. Then, it is configured such that image processing can be executed for each layer type.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 642, sub-layer fr, main layer sr, preliminary layer yr, and main layer hr are defined as layer types in order from the back side.
<Regarding the processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 22nd control example>
Next, the processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-second control example will be described. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-second control example is performed by replacing the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described nineteenth control example with the normal state production mode determination processing (see F3018 in FIG. 580). 643), and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 643, the processing contents of the normal state rendering mode determination processing (F3098) will be described. FIG. 643 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal state rendering mode determination processing (F3098). This normal state effect mode determination process (F3098) is different in that a control process to be executed is added depending on whether the pattern stock reach is determined or the processing reach is determined as the variable effect type, Other than that, they are identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state effect mode determination process (F3098) is executed, first, the same processes of F3101 to F3106 as the normal state effect mode determination process (see F3018 in FIG. 581) are executed. Then, in the processing of F3104, if it is determined that it is not the movie execution reach (F3104: No), next, it is determined whether or not the current variable effect type is the symbol stock reach (F3191), and the symbol stock reach is determined. If so (F3191: Yes), the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is referred to determine the effect mode (F3192), and the process proceeds to F3108.
Also, in the processing of F3191, if it is determined that it is not the pattern stock reach (F3191: No), then it is determined whether the current variable effect type is the processing reach (F3193), and it is determined that it is the processing reach. If so (F3193: Yes), a corresponding processing command (a command including image processing information and information indicating an effect period for processing the image) is set (F3194), and the process proceeds to F3108. On the other hand, in the processing of F3194, when it is determined that it is not the processing reach (F3194: No), the same processing of F3107 to F3108 as the above-described normal state production mode determination processing (see F3018 in FIG. 581) is executed and this processing is performed. exit.
The processing command set in the processing of F3194 is output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see F2102 in FIG. 569) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 569) of the sound lamp control device 113. . When the display control device 114 receives the processing command, the processing information for processing the displayed image from the information included in the received processing command, and the period information indicating the performance period during which the displayed image is processed are transmitted. The processing data corresponding to the specified processing information is read from the image processing data storage area, and the read processing data and period information are stored in the processing information storage area 233aa.
Then, when the display processing is executed, image processing is performed for each layer type (layer type) based on various information stored in the processing information storage area 233aa, and the display image is displayed on the display screen. By configuring in this way, only some layers (for example, the main layer sr) out of the plurality of layers forming the display image are subjected to reduction processing, so that the It is possible for the player to visually recognize the display image displayed on the formed sub-layer fr.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display different display modes using the display image formed using the same drawing list, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 644 to 646, the contents of control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the twenty-second control example will be described. In the twenty-second control example, the command determination process (see F6302 in FIG. 644) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 74) for the control processing contents of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above. and that drawing processing (see F6306 in FIG. 646) is executed instead of drawing processing. Other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, the contents of the command determination process (F6302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing details of the command determination process (F6302). This command determination process (F6302) differs from the command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 74) in the above-described first control example in that a process to be executed when a processing command is received is added. Otherwise, they are identical. In addition, in the command determination processing (F6302) shown in FIG. 644, for convenience of explanation, the letters attached to each processing content are replaced with "S" is changed to "F", but since the control processing with the same number has the same content, the detailed description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 644, when the command determination process (F6302) is executed, first, the same processes from F6401 to F6417 as the above-described command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 74) are executed. In the process of F6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (F6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a processing command in the unprocessed commands (F6451). If so (F6451: Yes), the processing command process is executed (F6452), and then the process proceeds to F6401.

On the other hand, in the process of F6451, if it is determined that there is no processing command (F6451: No), the same processes of F6420 to F6422 as the above-described command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 74) are executed, and then the process proceeds to F6401. Transition.
Next, the processing contents of the processing command processing (F6452) executed in the command determination processing (F6302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 645 is a flow chart showing the contents of processing command processing (F6452). In this processing command processing (F6452), the processing command output from the sound lamp control device 113 (each layer forming the display image (sub-layer fr, main layer sr, spare layer yr, main layer hr) Processing for setting processing information used when processing a display image is executed based on a command including processing information set in units and information indicating a rendering period for processing each layer.
First, when the processing command process (F6452) is executed. The processing information corresponding to the processing command received this time is read from the image processing data storage area 234a3 (F6901), and the processing information included in the read information and its execution period (performance period) are stored in the processing information storage area 233aa. Set (F6902) and terminate this process. By executing this process, when executing the display process, each layer forming the display image can be processed (scale change, tilt change, transmittance change, etc.) on a layer-by-layer basis. It becomes possible.
Next, with reference to FIG. 646, the details of the rendering process (F6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 646 is a flow chart showing this rendering process (F6306). This drawing process (F6306) is different from the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 85) in the first control example described above in that the display process is executed based on the processing information. In addition, in the rendering process (F6306) shown in FIG. 646, for convenience of explanation, the alphabets assigned to each process content are replaced with "S is changed from "" to "F", but since the control processes with the same number have the same content, detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the drawing process (F6306) is executed, first, the same processes of F7801 to F7803 as S7801 to S7803 in the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 85) in the first control example described above are executed. After that, it is determined whether information for processing the display image is stored in the processing information storage area 233aa (F7851). The image information developed in the frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer where the image drawing processing was executed is processed (F7852), displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (F7853), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of F7851 that there is no information in the processing information storage area 233aa, the image is developed in a frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer where the image drawing process is executed based on the drawing list in this process. A display process is executed to display the image information displayed as it is on the third pattern display device 81 (F7854), and this process is terminated.
With this configuration, image information developed in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list is used to execute processing based on the processing information, so that a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to display. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.
In addition, in the twenty-second control example, since it is possible to perform processing on a layer type (layer type) basis rather than on the entire display image, a specific layer (main layer sr) On the other hand, by executing processing to reduce the display area, the player can see the display mode of a layer (sub-layer fr) formed behind a specific layer (main layer sr). becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to display images with greatly different display modes by using the image information developed in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list.
Furthermore, when the display image of the main layer sr where the third decorative pattern (number icon) is displayed is processed to change the aspect ratio, the third symbol displayed on the main layer sr There is a risk that the aspect ratio of the symbols (number icons) will also be deformed, and the third symbols that are difficult for the player to identify may be displayed. A preliminary layer yr is provided that is processed in the same manner as sr. Therefore, the third pattern with a deformed aspect ratio is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. By constructing in this way, the third pattern for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed although the third pattern for indicating that the winning has been lost is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the players from being misunderstood.

In addition, in the twenty-second control example, in the display area of the spare layer yr, the position overlaps the display position where the third symbol (final stop third symbol) is stop-displayed on the main layer sr. By arranging a display mode for making the third pattern difficult to see and always setting the transmittance of the spare layer yr to 100%, the display normally displayed on the spare layer yr can be displayed. The mode is configured so that the player cannot visually recognize it, and when the main layer sr is processed to change the aspect ratio, by setting the transmittance of the spare layer yr to 0%, the deformation can be performed. It is configured so that the player cannot visually recognize the final stop third symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to develop the display mode for hiding the deformed final stop third pattern based on the drawing list in advance, so that the drawing list differs depending on the presence or absence of processing. can be saved.
<Regarding the first modification of the twenty-second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 647 and 648, a first modification of the twenty-second control example described above will be described. The first modified example of the twenty-second control example is different in that the effect mode of the symbol stock ready-to-win effect executed in the above-described twenty-second control example is different. Since other contents are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.
In the twenty-second control example described above, as described above with reference to FIGS. 1 pattern icon 802a to 4th pattern icon 802d) are displayed (see FIG. 635(b)), and after execution of an effect (see FIG. 636(a)) of once lifting the plurality of pattern icons out of the display area, In conjunction with the action of the character 801 (movement of swinging down the sword), the display mode of the third pattern indicated by one of the plurality of pattern icons (the first pattern icon 802a to the fourth pattern icon 802d) is finally displayed. It is configured to execute an effect of stopping and displaying the third stop symbol. In addition, along with the action of the character 801 (movement of swinging down the sword), a plurality of symbol icons (first symbol icon 802a to fourth symbol icon 802d) are used to switch the display mode to the third symbol that is in the reach state ( (see FIG. 636(b)).
That is, in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect in the above-described twenty-second control example, after the player grasps the contents of the acquired (stocked) plurality of symbol icons, they are temporarily hidden and displayed again. Either the performance of stopping and displaying only the pattern corresponding to any of the stocked pattern icons, or the performance of stopping and displaying the stocked pattern icons including the third pattern in the ready-to-reach state. was to be executed.

In this way, by temporarily hiding all of the stocked pattern icons after the player has grasped them, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of effect results are displayed using the pattern icons. , it is possible to easily provide an unexpected performance result.
Therefore, for example, when the symbol stock ready-to-win effect is executed and a large number of symbol icons having a display mode corresponding to the third symbol to win the jackpot in the current ready-to-win state are acquired as the acquired (stocked) plurality of symbol icons. , as a pattern stock ready-to-win effect, the player expects that a stop display mode effect corresponding to the symbol icon in which only the final stop third pattern is stocked is executed, and in the current ready-to-win state, it is possible to win a jackpot. Even if a large number of symbol icons with a display mode corresponding to the 3rd symbol that should not be obtained have been obtained, as a symbol stock reach effect, the stock symbol icon including the display mode of the 3rd symbol that indicates the reach state will be displayed. Since it is possible to make the player expect that the performance of the corresponding stop display mode will be executed, the performance can be enjoyed while expecting the jackpot winning until the performance result of the pattern stock reach performance is stopped and displayed. there were.
However, in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect executed in the 22nd control example described above, only the final stop third symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the symbol icon, and the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state. is switched to the type (display mode) corresponding to the symbol icon, and both are after the symbol icon is once hidden. There is a problem that it is difficult to vary the degree of expectation for a big hit.
On the other hand, in the symbol stock reach effect in the first modified example of the twenty-second control example, in the effect of temporarily lifting the plurality of symbol icons out of the display area from the state in which the plurality of symbol icons are displayed, the display screen part of the plurality of pattern icons displayed in the display screen is left on the display screen, and by using the left-displayed pattern icons, the effect of increasing the type of the third pattern indicating the reach state can be executed. ing.

With this configuration, when the symbol stock ready-to-reach effect is executed, the player is first interested in the type of the acquired (stocked) symbol icon, and then the effect of lifting the symbol icon ( The effect of hiding the displayed pattern icon) can be made interesting, and finally, the effect result of the pattern stock ready-to-win effect can be made interesting. Therefore, during the performance period in which the pattern stock reach performance is executed, it is possible to set the timing at which the player pays attention to the performance contents at various timings, and the performance that keeps the player interested is executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.
In the first modification of the twenty-second control example, when the symbol stock ready-to-win effect is executed, similarly to the symbol stock ready-to-win effect in the twenty-second control example described above, the third symbol display during the ready-to-win state A 1-symbol icon 802a is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 647, the first pattern icon 802a is displayed in the display mode "9" corresponding to the third pattern type "9". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 647, since the type of the third symbol indicating the reach state is "1", the third symbol corresponding to "9" indicated by the display mode of the first symbol icon 802a is the final stop number. When the symbols are stopped and displayed as 3 symbols, the combination of the 3rd symbols indicating that the win is lost is made.
As described above, in this modification, when the symbol stock ready-to-win effect is executed, the type of the symbol icon to be displayed first is the third symbol type to be won out of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state. It is configured to be a type corresponding to With this configuration, when the first symbol icon is stopped and displayed in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect (the state shown in FIG. 647(a)), the ready-to-win state displayed on the display screen is displayed. To prevent a player from misunderstanding that he or she has won a jackpot because the display modes attached to a total of three patterns, that is, three patterns (two) and a pattern icon (one) are the same. can be suppressed.
<Twenty-third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 652 to 679. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example adds a new variable performance as a variable performance executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state to the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example described above. The difference is that a new variable performance is added as a variable performance executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

Here, among the variable effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example, the variable effects different from the above-described nineteenth control example will be briefly described.
Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Further, as an effect mode of the operation effect, for example, there is a effect mode of decreasing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction effect).
When this gauge decrease effect is executed as an effect mode of the operation effect, the player operates the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) during a predetermined operation effective period, thereby displaying the third symbol display device 81. A performance of gradually decreasing the physical strength value (HP gauge) displayed on the screen is executed, and the performance result of the executed operation performance is advantageous to the player (for example, a performance result indicating winning of a jackpot). In this case, the physical strength value (HP gauge) of the enemy character becomes 0 and an effect to defeat the enemy character is executed. In the case of the effect result indicating winning, an effect is executed in which the enemy character counterattacks while the enemy character's physical strength (HP gauge) remains.
In other words, when the above-described gauge reduction effect is executed, the player is interested in the degree of reduction of the HP gauge during the valid operation period. However, as described above, in the conventional gauge decrease effect, the physical strength value that can be finally decreased is determined according to the result of the effect. If the decrease in the physical strength value stops in the middle of the gauge reduction effect, the effect result will be displayed to indicate that the effect result is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it is easily predicted before the time, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the twenty-third control example, it is possible to set a non-decrease period in which the physical strength value is not decreased regardless of the result of the effect during a part of the operation effective period during which the gauge decrease effect is executed. there is By configuring in this way, even if the reduction of the physical strength value is stopped in the middle of the gauge reduction effect, it is possible to leave the possibility that the result of the effect will be advantageous to the player. You can enjoy the gauge reduction effect to the end.
Specifically, each time the physical strength value is decreased based on the operation of the operating means, a rush lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-decrease period, and if the rush lottery is won, the non-decrease period is set. It is configured as follows. Then, when the non-decrease period is set, an effect in which the physical strength value is not decreased is executed until a predetermined time elapses or until the cancellation lottery for whether or not to cancel the non-decrease period is won. It is configured as follows. In this way, by adding processing for varying the degree of reduction of the physical strength value even while the gauge reduction effect is being executed, the player can perform the same operation on the operation means. Even in such a case, the reduction pattern of the physical strength value in the gauge decrease performance can be increased more easily than in the case of setting only based on the predetermined performance pattern when the gauge decrease performance is executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can.
Further, in the twenty-third control example, the winning probability of the cancellation lottery is configured to be different based on the remaining physical strength at the time when the non-decrease period is set and the effect result of the gauge decrease effect being executed. The higher the remaining physical strength value, the higher the winning probability of the release lottery. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge reduction effect, it is easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set at the end of the gauge decrease effect. Therefore, even though the gauge decrease effect was executed, the immediately set non-decrease period continues for a long time, and the physical strength value is reduced to the value that can be decreased by this gauge decrease effect. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of situations that cannot be caused.
Further, the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is higher when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed becomes an advantageous performance result than when the performance result becomes a disadvantageous performance result. Here, in the twenty-third control example, the case where the effect result of the gauge decrease effect is advantageous to the player is more likely to be the effect result than the case where the effect result is disadvantageous to the player. The physical strength value is greatly reduced (the remaining physical strength value is set to 0) by pressing the player so that the effect is easily executed. In other words, the greater the physical strength value that can be reduced by this gauge reduction effect, the higher the winning probability of the cancellation lottery. By configuring in this way, the production result of the gauge reduction production is an advantageous production result When the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction production, the production result of the gauge reduction production becomes a disadvantageous production result It is possible to make it easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction effect, so even though the gauge decrease effect that can greatly reduce the physical strength value is executed, it does not decrease. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of a situation where the period continues for a long time and the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced by this gauge reduction effect.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, an upper limit (limit) is set for the duration of the non-decrease period, and when the non-decrease period reaches the upper limit without winning the release lottery, the non-decrease period is forcibly terminated. configured to be released. With this configuration, even if the release lottery is used to randomize the timing at which the non-decrease period is released, the non-decrease period will not be won in the release lottery and the gauge decrease effect will end. is continued, and the production effect of the gauge decrease production is remarkably lowered.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, when the non-decrease period is canceled and a decrease period in which the physical strength can be decreased is set, the physical strength is reduced according to the length of the set non-decrease period. It is configured to be able to execute the additional reduction performance to reduce. Specifically, when the non-decrease period is set with the effect result that the effect result of the current gauge decrease effect is advantageous to the player, or when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge decrease effect, that is, , If the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is set high and the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction effect that is executed when the non-decrease period is canceled. configured to be possible.
By configuring in this way, even if the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional decrease effect, so the game in which the non-decrease period continues for a long time. The player can also play the game while expecting that the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed will be a performance result that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of a situation in which the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced in the gauge reduction effect this time.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the effect pattern for decreasing the physical strength value is changed according to the operation method of the player to the operation means during the gauge reduction effect. Specifically, when the player continuously presses the operating means during the operation valid period in the gauge reduction effect (so-called long press operation), and when the player continuously presses the operating means (so-called , in the case of performing a continuous hit operation), and in the case of executing a long press operation, the effect pattern that allows setting of the above-mentioned non-decrease period is determined. , when the continuous hitting operation is executed, an effect pattern in which the above-described non-decrease period is not set (no rush lottery is executed) is determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the process of decreasing the physical strength value in the gauge decrease effect for showing the same effect result according to the operation method of the operating means. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to execute the gauge decrease effect in various effect patterns to operate the operation means by different operation methods, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. can improve interest in
Also, in the twenty-third control example, the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means. In other words, during the gauge decrease effect prompting the player to operate (press down) the operation means, the player can be provided with an option to stop the operation of the operation means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the options of operation methods for the operation means.
In addition, in this 23rd control example, when a long press operation is executed for a gauge decrease effect, the effect scenario for decreasing the physical strength value progresses according to the duration of the long press operation. It is configured such that the longer the time, the easier it is to set a production scenario in which the physical strength value tends to decrease. When the long-pressing operation in progress is canceled halfway, the update of the pressing duration is interrupted, and when the long-pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. is doing. Therefore, even if the long-pressing operation is interrupted in the middle, it is possible to make it easier to continue operating the operating means.
Further, as described above, when the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means, and when the long-pressing operation being executed is canceled in the middle, When the update of the pressing duration is interrupted and the long pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. By configuring in this way, the player who is executing the long-pressing operation during the gauge reduction effect is interrupted once in the middle of the long-pressing operation, rather than continuing to perform the long-pressing operation. When the long-pressing operation is performed again, the non-decrease period is shorter, and it is possible to provide a situation in which the physical strength value can be greatly decreased in the gauge decrease effect.

In addition, conventionally, by executing the variable production for showing the result of the special pattern lottery in various production modes, the period in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result other than the big win (lost) is long. There is a pachinko machine 10 that prevents a player from quickly getting bored with the game even if the game continues. In such a conventional type pachinko machine 10, the ratio of the selection ratio when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the ratio of the selection when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is adjusted. Various performance modes with different degrees of expectation for winning a big hit can be determined, and based on the result of a special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable performance and the result of the performance lottery for determining the performance mode of the variable performance. By constructing the performance mode so as to be determinable, even when a game in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result other than the big win (loss) continues a plurality of times, the player's degree of expectation for the big win is increased. Since it is possible to execute various variable performances with different values, the player can play the game while having an appropriate sense of anticipation for a big win.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is determined by lottery (lottery lottery), so depending on the case, it may take a long time. In the meantime, there is a problem that only the variable performance with low expectation of winning the jackpot is executed, and the player easily gets bored with the game. In addition, there is a problem that the player selects a plurality of times in a short period of time an effect mode in which the selection ratio is defined so as to increase the expectation of winning a big win, which gives the player a sense of distrust.
On the other hand, in this 23rd control example, information (production history information) related to the performance mode of the variable performance executed in the past and the variable performance (loss) for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery Based on the information about the number of times the variable performance) is continuously executed (the number of consecutive failures), the performance mode of the variable performance can be determined.
Specifically, a specific counter value (the value of the execution effect counter) is added based on the increase in the number of times of consecutive failures, and when the value of the execution effect counter reaches a specific value (for example, 50), the variable effect As a data table referred to when determining the performance mode, a special performance mode selection table different from the data table normally referred to (normal performance mode selection table) is referred to, and the jackpot expectation degree is It is configured to make it easier to determine a high presentation mode than in normal times.

By configuring in this way, a variable performance in a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win can be executed periodically, so that only the variable performance with a low degree of expectation for winning a big win is executed, and the player gets bored with the game. can be made difficult to occur.
Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the process of subtracting the value of the execution effect counter described above is configured to be executable. In this case, the value of the execution effect counter is decremented according to the determined effect mode. Concretely, when the performance mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is determined as the performance mode of the variable performance, the value of the execution performance counter is subtracted by 30.例文帳に追加
By configuring in this way, immediately after execution of the failure variation performance in the performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the failure variation performance in which the performance mode is determined by referring to the special performance mode selection table is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustfulness due to the continuous execution of the deviating variable performance in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the value of the execution effect counter described above is configured to be able to execute the process of adding more than the number of executions of the special symbol variation. When a performance mode with the lowest level of expectation for winning is set as a performance mode in which the desire to play may decrease, for example, as a performance mode for a chance-up performance in which the expectation for winning increases in stages (chance-up performance is executed) If the probability of winning is higher if the chance-up effect is not executed despite the fact that the It is constructed so that a large value of "2" is added to the execution performance counter.

By constructing in this way, the chance-up performance with a lower expectation of the big win (lower than the case where the chance-up performance is not executed) than the case where the special symbol variation is continued to be executed calmly without the chance-up performance being executed. is executed, it is possible to make it easier to execute the losing variation performance in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot at a short interval.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when determining the effect mode with reference to the special effect mode selection table, the type of effect mode is determined based on the information regarding the effect mode of the previously executed deviating variable effect. are configured to be different. Specifically, it is structured so as to make it difficult to determine a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot determined by referring to a normal performance mode selection table referred to in normal times by referring to a special performance mode selection table. ing. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the same performance mode for the loss fluctuation performance, so that the content is different from the normal time performance mode selection table in which the normal jackpot winning expectation is stipulated. Even if a performance mode can be determined by referring to a special performance mode selection table in which various performance modes are defined, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot for a specific performance mode from remarkably lowering. .
<Regarding the production content executed in the 23rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 652 to 661, the contents of the characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 652 to 658, the contents of the battle effect executed during the time saving state will be described. This battle production is a variation production executed during a special symbol variation period for showing the result of one special symbol lottery. When the value (HP value) decreases to 0 (when the enemy character is defeated), the effect result of the effect mode (victory mode) indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, and finally the physical strength value (HP value) of the enemy character is displayed. is 1 or more, the effect is displayed in which the effect result of the effect mode (defeat mode) indicating a lost win is displayed.
In this battle production, it is possible to execute a preemptive attack production (first part production) in which allied characters attack enemy characters, and an attack production (second part production) in which allied characters directly attack enemy characters. When the battle effect is executed, the above-mentioned second part effect is always executed, and whether or not the above-described first part effect is executed is determined according to the determined effect pattern of the battle effect. It is configured as follows.

Then, the battle effect in which the first part effect is executed (the first part effect and the battle effect in which the second part effect is executed) is the battle effect in which the first part effect is not executed (only the second part effect is performed). It is configured to be more likely to be selected when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery rather than a battle performance to be executed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the battle effect while expecting that the first part effect will be executed during the battle effect.
Further, when the battle effect in which the first part effect is executed is executed, the more the HP value of the enemy character is reduced in the first part effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. . By configuring in this way, when the first part performance is executed as the battle performance, that is, when the battle performance with a higher expectation of big win than the battle performance in which the first part performance is not executed is executed. , next, the amount of damage (the HP value to be reduced) given to the enemy character in the first part production can be made interesting.
Here, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the battle effect is executed will be described. FIG. 652(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the battle effect is started. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the first part effect is executed).
As shown in FIG. 652(a), when the battle effect is started, a friendly character 801a imitating a hero is displayed in the main display area Dm formed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and then An enemy character 880a imitating a monster is displayed on the screen, and a display screen is displayed in which the ally character 801a and the enemy character 880a are facing each other. An HP gauge 890 is displayed as a display mode for indicating the physical strength value (HP value) corresponding to the displayed enemy character 880a. The characters "Defeat the enemy!" are displayed as a guidance mode. With this display, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect being executed (battle effect) is intended to defeat the enemy character 880a.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the main display area Dm, there is a detailed guidance mode for explaining the content of the battle production in more detail. is displayed. In the twenty-third control example, similarly to the control examples described above, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a display area (main display area Dm) in which a variable effect (battle effect) is executed, and a variable effect ( A display area (sub-display area Ds) in which the battle effect is not executed, and a detailed guidance mode in which the content of the effect being executed is explained in detail by characters is displayed in the display area (sub display area Ds) in which the variable effect (battle effect) is not executed. It is configured to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds).
By configuring in this way, the player is made to select and pay attention to the execution area of the variable effect executed using the moving image (animation) and the guidance notification executed using the still image (character). can be made easier.
As shown in FIG. 652(a), the upper right corner of the HP gauge 890 displays "MAX" indicating the upper limit of the HP of the enemy character 880a, and the upper left corner of the HP gauge 890 displays the HP of the enemy character 880a. "0" is displayed to indicate the lower limit of the HP of the enemy character 880a. It is shown occupying the entire area of gauge 890 .
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an index "50 %” index, or may be configured to display a more subdivided index.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to more clearly grasp the HP value of the enemy character 880a that decreases during the battle production. Also, by displaying not only the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the HP value, but also an index indicating values in between, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the degree of decrease in the remaining HP value indicated by the HP gauge 890 . Specifically, when the middle position of the HP gauge 890 displays a “50%” indicator indicating that the HP value is half of the upper limit, the entire area of the HP gauge 890 decreases. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict that the HP value will decrease evenly.
In the twenty-third control example, the enemy character 880a to be confronted in the battle effect can be determined from different types, and the upper limit of the HP value is configured to differ according to the type of the selected enemy character 880a. is doing. Therefore, when the battle effect is executed, the enemy character 880a is made to appear while the ally character 801a in which the same character appears first is displayed first. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period from the start of the battle effect until the type of the enemy character 880a to be confronted in the current battle effect is notified, so that the effect executed by the player can be lengthened. It is possible to suppress early boredom.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when reporting the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a using the HP gauge 890 for indicating the HP value of the enemy character 880a, the percentage (% ) is configured to be displayed. Therefore, even when an enemy character 880a having a different upper limit HP value is displayed, a battle effect can be executed without changing the display mode of the HP gauge 890. FIG. However, in this case, even if an enemy character 880a of a different type appears, the player cannot tell whether the enemy character 880a has a high upper limit HP value or a low upper limit HP value just by looking at the display mode of the HP gauge 890. Therefore, when an enemy character 880a with a high upper limit HP value is displayed as the type of enemy character 880a, an HP As a notification mode for notifying that it is the enemy character 880a whose upper limit value is higher than the others, it is preferable to display the characters "Formidable Enemy Appears". On the other hand, when an enemy character 880a whose upper limit HP value is lower than that of the other enemy character 880a is displayed, an enemy character 880a whose upper limit HP value is lower than the other enemy character 880a is displayed near the displayed enemy character 880a. It is preferable to display characters of "weak and small appearance" as a notification mode for notifying that it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily predict the effect result of the current battle effect when the enemy character 880a is displayed during the battle effect.
Furthermore, as another method for achieving the same effect, a numerical value indicating the upper limit of the HP value of the appearing enemy character 880a is displayed along with "MAX" displayed on the HP gauge 890. Alternatively, all types of enemy characters 880a that may appear in the battle production may be displayed with a rank of ease of defeat (a rank that is likely to be selected when winning a jackpot). Also, the display mode (length) of the HP gauge 890 may be changed according to the upper limit of the HP value.

In the battle production, when the first part production (production in which a companion performs a preemptive attack on an enemy) is executed, as shown in FIG. An attack effect is executed, and the remaining HP value displayed on the HP gauge 890 is reduced according to the damage given to the enemy character 880a by the attack of the fellow character 801c. Specifically, the enemy character 880a displayed using FIG. 652 has a maximum HP value of “100”, and the companion character 801c has dealt damage of “40” due to the preemptive attack, so the remaining HP value is 890a. The display area is reduced to 60% of the HP gauge 890 as a whole. In a display area of the HP gauge 890 where the remaining HP value 890a is not displayed, a damage amount 890b indicating the reduced HP value of the enemy character 880a is displayed. That is, the display area of the HP gauge 890 is always configured to be either the remaining HP value 890a or the damage amount 890b.
With this configuration, the player can compare the amount of damage already dealt to the enemy character 880a with the remaining HP value. (Production contents) can be made easier to predict.
Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Preemptive attack!! Damage to the enemy!!" is displayed.
In the twenty-third control example, by configuring the damage amount 890b to be displayed continuously, it is possible to determine how much the HP value is compared to the case where the HP value is the upper limit value when the remaining HP value is decreased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the damage amount 890b that has already been dealt may not be displayed. In this case, it is only necessary to display the display mode corresponding to the remaining HP value on the display screen. It is possible to simplify the control process for displaying information about.

Also, in the twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. By configuring to inform the player of the damage amount (remaining HP value) at the degree of decrease of 890, the display control for displaying a specific numerical value and the processing for calculating a specific numerical value are simplified. However, without being limited to this, the HP value (damage amount) of the enemy character 880a reduced by attacking the enemy character 880a may be displayed numerically.
After the first part effect is completed, the second part effect is executed in which the friendly character 801a directly attacks the enemy character 880a. In this second part effect, an effect of decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the enemy character 880a is executed based on the operation of the effect button 22 by the player. Next, with reference to FIGS. 653 and 654, display contents displayed during the second part effect in the battle effect will be described. FIG. 653(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the second part of the battle effect is started, and FIG. 653(b) is during the second part of the battle effect FIG. 654 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a repeated hit operation is performed on the effect button 22, and FIG. 654 shows a long press operation on the effect button 22 during the second part effect in the battle effect. is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when is executed.
As shown in FIG. 653(a), when the second part effect is executed, the effect in which the ally character 801a directly fights the enemy character 880a is executed in the main display area Dm. Since this second part effect is an effect that is executed after the first part effect described above with reference to FIG. The indicated value is displayed continuously.
On the left side of the display area Dm, a display effect button Sw6 imitating the effect button 22 and an operation effect are provided as a suggestion mode for suggesting the start of an operation effect for the player to operate the effect button 22. A validity period gauge ga4 for indicating the validity period (operation valid period) of is displayed. In addition, the characters "ready for repeated hits" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the operation content during the operation presentation. In other words, by displaying the suggestive mode shown in FIG. 653(a) before the operation effect is actually started, the operation effect that requires the player to repeatedly press the effect button 22 is displayed. Since it is possible to inform the player that the game will be started soon in an easy-to-understand manner, the player can be made to prepare for the continuous hitting operation before the operation performance is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation effect is suddenly started and the effect button 22 cannot be operated in the initial stage of the effective period.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. A countdown display may be performed to indicate the timing at which is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the timing at which the operation effect is started in a more comprehensible manner.
Furthermore, subtraction of the effective period gauge is started in a manner including a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the effective period (operation effective period) in the operation effect is actually set (operation effect is started). to). That is, the operation performance is started earlier than the timing at which the valid period is actually set by the reaction time until the player who immediately grasps that the operation performance has started presses the performance button 22 for the first time ( It may be configured to start subtraction of the validity period gauge). With this configuration, the player can easily press the effect button 22 immediately after the effective period is set, so that the operation effect can be enjoyed to the maximum.
Here, as shown in FIG. 653(a), in the twenty-third control example, it is configured to execute an operation effect in which the effect button 22 is operated repeatedly. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in recent years, instead of repeatedly hitting the operation means (the effect button 22), even if the long-pressing operation is performed, there is something that can internally execute the same pressing control as the repeated hitting operation. be. By configuring in this way, even for a player who has difficulty in executing repeated hitting operations that require multiple operations of the operating means in a short period of time, the repeated hitting operations can be performed simply by continuously pressing the operating means. Since it is possible to provide an effect similar to that in the case of , the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
However, if the long press operation is executed instead of the repeated hit operation, the player can perform the high speed repeat operation (for example, once every 0.5 seconds) during the period in which the long press operation continues. Since the same pressing control as in the situation in which the button is repeatedly pressed) is executed, based on the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed (number of repeated hits) during a predetermined effective period (for example, 10 seconds) In the operation effect that gradually destroys obstacles, the number of presses (number of repeated hits) increases in a short period of time when the long press operation is performed compared to the normal repeated hit operation. The effect result of the operation effect (the final destruction mode of the obstacle in the current operation effect) is likely to be displayed early, and a situation occurs in which the operation effect using the effective period to the full extent cannot be provided. was there. Further, if the interval at which the same press control as when the effect button 22 is pressed is extended as the press control for the long press operation, the effect result of the operation effect cannot be displayed within the valid period. There is a possibility that the problem of (the pressing control cannot be executed for the number of times required to display the final destruction mode of the obstacle in the current operation effect) occurs.

On the other hand, if the mode of destruction of obstacles in the repeated hitting operation presentation is determined based on the content of the depression control (pressing control during high-speed repeated hitting operation) executed when the long-pressing operation is executed, the normal repeated hitting operation will not be possible. It is not possible to display the effect result of the operation effect to the player who is executing the operation (for example, the continuous hitting operation of pressing the effect button 22 at intervals of once per second) (the failure in this operation effect There is a possibility that the pressing control cannot be executed for the number of times required to display the final destruction mode of the object.
In other words, it is possible to execute a continuous hitting operation performance for repeatedly hitting the performance button 22, and in addition to the continuous hitting operation to the performance button 22, the continuous hitting operation performance is advanced even when the long pressing operation to the performance button 22 is executed. In the pachinko machine 10 having a function capable of performing repeated hitting operations, if the same pressing control is executed when the effect button 22 is pressed repeatedly and when the effect button 22 is pressed for a long time, the continuous hitting operation effect is being performed. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a suitable effect (repeating operation effect) to both the player who repeatedly hits the effect button 22 and the player who presses and holds the effect button 22 for a long time.
On the other hand, in the twenty-third control example, when the effect button 22 is long-pressed during the continuous-hit operation effect, the effect scenario is determined according to the length of the period during which the long-press operation continues. , an effect is executed in which the effect mode (HP gauge) is varied (decreased) at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals), and a non-variable period (non-decrease period) in which the effect mode is not changed. is configured to be configurable.
By configuring in this way, the operation (pressing) of the effect button 22 by the player is effectively performed in the case of executing the long-pressing operation, which makes it easier to change the effect mode in a shorter period than in the case of executing the continuous hitting operation. It is possible to provide a period during which the effect mode does not change during the identifiable effective period (operation effective period). Therefore, even when a long-pressing operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the presentation result of the current operation presentation from being displayed with a large remaining period remaining, thereby reducing the presentation effect of the operation presentation. can be done.

In the twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. 653(b), when the continuous hitting operation is executed in the second part effect of the battle effect, the physical strength of the enemy character 880a is increased according to the pressing operation of the selection button 22. An effect of decreasing the value (the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 gradually becomes shorter) is executed. Specifically, in the twenty-third control example, an effective period of 3 seconds is set as a period during which the operation (pressing) of the effect button 22 by the player is determined to be effective during the period during which the second part effect is executed. When the effective period is set (when the player enters into the period during which the effect button 22 can be operated), a ``continuous hit preparation'' ( (see FIG. 653(a)), the characters "Consecutive hits!!" are displayed.
Furthermore, the validity period gauge ga4 displayed below the display effect button Sw6 is variably displayed according to the passage of time. As shown in FIG. 653(b), the effective period gauge ga4 uses the size (length) of all display areas to indicate the length of the current effective period, and immediately after the effective period is set. When the remaining valid period has not decreased, the remaining valid period ga4a is displayed so as to occupy the entire area of the valid period gauge ga4 (see, for example, FIG. 653(a)). The display mode of the valid period gauge ga4 is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining valid period ga4a gradually becomes smaller (shorter) from the right end to the left end of the gauge ga4. Of the display areas of the valid period gauge ga4, an elapsed time ga4b indicating the elapsed time since the valid period was set is displayed in a display area where the remaining valid period ga4a is not displayed.
That is, the longer the elapsed time after the effective period is set (the shorter the remaining period of the effective period), the smaller (shorter) the ratio of the remaining effective period ga4a to the display area of the effective period gauge ga4. , the effective period ga4a is variably displayed so that the elapsed time ga4b occupies a larger (longer) proportion.
With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining time of the valid period in the current operation presentation only by confirming the display mode of the display of the valid period ga4. Furthermore, information corresponding to the length of the validity period set this time (display form of the validity period gauge ga4) and information indicating the already elapsed time (display form of the elapsed time ga4b) are displayed together. , the player can grasp the length of the remaining time of the validity period in more detail based on the length of time that has elapsed since the validity period was set.

In this twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. By continuously displaying the corresponding information (the display mode of the valid period gauge ga4) and the information indicating the elapsed time (the display mode of the elapsed time ga4b) during the valid period, the valid period is displayed to the player. However, it is not limited to this, and only information indicating only the remaining time of the valid period (display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a) is variably displayed. Also good.
Incidentally, the flow of decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 in the case of executing the continuous hitting operation in the second part effect of the battle effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 654(a).
Next, with reference to FIG. 654, an example of a display screen when a long press operation is performed in the second part effect of the battle effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 654, when the long press operation is executed in the second part effect, the same effect screen as when the repeated hit operation is executed is displayed. It should be noted that only the display mode of the display effect button Sw6 is different from that during the continuous pressing operation, and in order to indicate that the current long-pressing operation is being performed, the display mode of the display effect button Sw6 is continuously pressed. A display mode indicating the state is displayed, and the letters "Continuous hits (during long press)" are displayed above to indicate that a long press operation is currently being performed (a state in which a long press operation is determined).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the long-pressing operation is normally determined in the second part effect, which is a repeated-hit operation effect. Therefore, the display mode of the HP gauge 890 does not change for a certain period of time even though the effect button 22 is long-pressed during the second part effect. It is possible to make the user easily understand that the long press operation is not determined to be invalid even if the operation is not performed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, when it is determined that the long-pressing operation is being performed, regardless of the result of the lottery for decreasing the remaining HP value 890a, the moving image ( animation) is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm. In this way, it is possible to notify that the player is properly operating the production button 22 (continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation) during the continuous hitting operation production, so that the production button 22 is properly operated. Since it is possible to provide a bonus image that will not be provided to a player who does not have it, the player can operate the operation means (the effect button 22 ) can be made easier to operate.
Therefore, for example, even if the effect result of the current battle effect is the effect result of losing to the enemy character 880a, that is, the effect result that the remaining HP value 890a does not become 0, the operating means (the effect button 22) can be operated. As a result, it is possible to provide the privilege video, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to operate the operation means from significantly declining.
In addition, as the information included in the privilege video, it is preferable to be configured to be able to provide information about the game of the pachinko machine 10. For example, it has a setting function that can set the probability of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery from a plurality of set values. If so, it is preferable to include information corresponding to the currently set value in the privilege video to be reproduced. By constructing in this way, it is possible not only to provide valuable images to the player, but also to acquire information useful for the game, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means to watch the privilege image. be able to. It should be noted that while the bonus image is being displayed, the setting value can be estimated, and it can be said that the player is in a more pleasing state (higher advantage) than when the bonus image is not being displayed. The control for displaying the privilege image is performed by setting means for setting the advantage level of a specific game state set to the first advantage level in the forty-fifth control example described later to a second game state different from the first advantage level. can be said to be another form of
Next, with reference to FIGS. 655 and 656, the flow of change in the display mode of the HP gauge 890 in battle presentation will be described. FIG. 655 shows the flow of changes in the display mode of the HP gauge 890 when the performance button 22 is hit repeatedly. When the operation (pressing) to the production button 22 is determined in the state shown in FIG. A variable display is executed to reduce the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the gauge 890 (display mode indicating that the remaining HP value has decreased by the decrease value “A”). A damage amount 890b is displayed where the display area of the remaining HP value 890a is reduced. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player how much damage has been done to the enemy character 880a in an easy-to-understand manner.

On the other hand, when the effect button 22 is long pressed, as shown in FIG. 656, the non-decrease period is set. When the long-pressing operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 656(a) and the decrease value "A" and the non-decrease period are set, the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 is reduced (remaining HP value is reduced by the decrement value "A"). Then, a non-decrease period 890c indicating that the non-decrease period is set is displayed in the area where the display area of the remaining HP value 890a is reduced (see FIG. 656(b)).
The non-decrease period is configured to be canceled when any one of the termination conditions of the cancellation lottery, the elapse of the upper limit period, or the cancellation of the long-press operation is satisfied, and the non-decrease period is the upper limit period (2 seconds), an effect is executed in which the display area of the non-decrease period 890c is reduced so as to indicate the remaining period. Then, at the timing when the non-decrease period is canceled, the display area of the HP gauge 890 is displayed with the remaining HP value 890a and the damage amount 890b.
The display area of the non-decrease period 890c is configured to evenly decrease corresponding to the remaining period until the non-decrease period reaches the upper limit period (2 seconds). Therefore, the player can predict the maximum remaining period during which the non-decrease period can continue based on the variable state of the display mode of the non-decrease period 890c. Further, when the termination condition other than the elapse of the upper limit period is met, the display area of the non-decrease period 890c is hidden in 0.1 seconds regardless of the display mode (size of the display area) of the non-decrease period 890c. is executed, and the area where the non-decrease period 890c is displayed is switched to the display area of the damage amount 890b. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the non-decrease period has been canceled in an easy-to-understand manner.
Then, when a specific termination condition (won a cancellation lottery, elapse of the upper limit period) is satisfied among a plurality of termination conditions for canceling the non-decrease period, without operating the production button 22, An additional reduction effect for reducing the remaining HP value is executed. Here, when the decrease value "B" is determined as the additional decrease effect, as shown in FIG. is reduced (a display mode indicating that the remaining HP value has decreased by the decrease value "B").

In the twenty-third control example, as the battle effect in the state where the non-decrease period 890c is displayed, the battle effect corresponding to the content of the attack at the timing when the non-decrease period 890c is set is continuously executed. However, without being limited to this, the battle during the non-decrease period 890c is performed in a production mode for indicating the remaining time until the non-decrease period 890c is canceled and the determination result of whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied. You may decide the production|presentation mode of production|presentation.
In other words, as a condition for canceling the non-decrease period, if you win the cancellation lottery, you will have a production mode to indicate that you have won the cancellation lottery (for example, once the characters face each other, the interval between them will be widened, and the next attack will be It is preferable to make it possible to determine the presentation mode provided) and the presentation mode for indicating that the player did not win in the cancellation lottery (for example, the presentation mode in which the characters are stuck together). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the non-decrease period is likely to end even by grasping the content of the battle effect executed in the main display area Dm. .
Next, with reference to FIGS. 657 to 660, the content of the subjugation ready-to-win effect will be described. Figure 657(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed at the start of the subjugation reach production, and Figure 657(b) is displayed when starting the first attack in the subjugation reach production. FIG. 658(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during the first attack in the subjugation reach production, and FIG. 658(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed 659(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when starting the second attack in the subjugation ready-to-win production, and FIG. 659(a) is displayed during the second attack in the subjugation reach production. FIG. 659(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content, and FIG. 659(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when starting the third attack in the subjugation reach effect. , is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the third attack in the subjugation ready-to-win effect.
When the subjugation reach is executed, a display area HR50 is formed in the main display area Dm, and a display mode for showing the history of three attack presentations executed during the subjugation reach is displayed. Since FIG. 657(a) is a display screen showing the stage before the execution of the first attack effect, it shows the first history HR50a indicating the first attack effect history and the second attack effect history. Neither the second history HR50b nor the third history HR50c indicating the history of the third attack effect are displayed in a display mode indicating the history.

Also, in subjugation reach, the effect of subjugating three enemy characters 880a to 880c is executed, and HP gauges 881a to 881c that indicate the physical strength (HP value) of each enemy character 880a to 880c are displayed on each enemy character 880a to 880c. displayed in close proximity. As an effect for determining the ally character to attack in the current attack effect, an ally character determination effect is displayed in which the first ally character 801a and the second ally character 801b are alternately enlarged. .
As the subjugation reach effect, a effect is executed in which various types of friendly characters 801a attack enemy characters 880a to 880c three times.
The types of the allied characters 801a are a first allied character 801a imitating a hero who can easily inflict great damage on one enemy character, and a second allied character 801a imitating a rabbit who can easily inflict damage on multiple enemy characters. The ally character 801b is configured to be selectable. In this way, by configuring the easy-to-execute attack content to differ according to the type of the allied character that executes the attack, the content of the attack that has already been executed (remaining HP value of each enemy character) during the subjugation reach effect ), it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the type of friendly character that executes the attack.
In other words, when the friendly character 801b executes the first and second attacks in the subjugation reach effect, each of the enemy characters 880a to 880c tends to be in a state where the remaining HP value is low. ) is easier to defeat all enemy characters 880a to 880c than the allied character 801a. can do. Also, when the friendly character 801a executes the first and second attacks, it is easier to execute the third attack while two of the enemy characters 880a to 880c have been defeated. Therefore, when the type of the friendly character that executes the third attack is the friendly character 801a, the enemy characters 880a to 880c are more effective as a result of the subjugation reach effect than when the friendly character 801b is used. It is possible to make it easier to produce a performance result of defeating all of them.

FIG. 657(b) is a display screen in which, as the first attack effect, an attack content determination effect for determining the attack content is executed after the first teammate character is determined. As shown in FIG. 657(b), when the first ally character 801a is determined, information indicating the number of attacks is first displayed as an attack content determination effect, and then information indicating the amount of damage is displayed. It is configured so that In FIG. 657(b), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped and displayed as "1", and the damage amount roulette HR51b is "fluctuating".
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 657(b), the damage amount roulette HR51b is displayed in a display mode (for example, large, medium, small, etc.) indicating the amount of damage corresponding to the attack executed in the current attack production. A stop display is displayed, and the attack content production ends.
When the attack content presentation ends, next, the attack presentation shown in FIG. 658(a) is executed. In this attack effect, an attack corresponding to the effect result of the attack content effect is executed near the center of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 658(a), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped and displayed as "1", and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped and displayed as "large". On the other hand, an attack production that deals a large amount of damage is displayed. Then, in order to guide the content of the attack this time, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "Severe damage to monster A" as a guidance mode.
When executing the second and third attack effects, the same effect display is executed. In FIG. Indicates a determined state. When the second ally character 801b is determined, the information indicating the number of attacks is displayed later, and the information indicating the amount of damage is displayed first as the attack content determination effect. In other words, the order of the information notified to the player in the attack content presentation is changed according to the type of the attacking ally character. In FIG. 658(b), the number-of-attacks roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is in the state of "fluctuating", and the damage-amount roulette HR51b is stopped at "medium".

When the second attack content presentation is completed, next, the attack presentation shown in FIG. 659(a) is executed. In this attack effect, an attack corresponding to the effect result of the attack content effect is executed near the center of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 659(a), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped and displayed at "3", and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped and displayed at "medium". An attack effect that deals medium damage is displayed. Then, since the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has become 0, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "1 enemy defeated, 2 remaining".
Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, only when the character attacking for the first time and the attacking character for the second time are different, as the third attack effect, a double attack effect in which a plurality of allied characters attack can be executed. is doing.
FIG. 659(b) shows an attack content effect when a double attack effect is executed. This double attack effect is more likely to cause great damage to a large number of enemy characters than other attack effects. It is structured so that it is easy to As shown in FIG. 659(b), before the ally character determination effect ends, the effect result of the attack content effect is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 660, attacks are executed by a plurality of ally characters. be.
With this configuration, the player is interested in the order in which the information used in the attack presentation is displayed in the presentation (friend character determination presentation, attack content presentation) until the attack presentation is executed. Since it is possible to have a

Furthermore, as described above, if the display order of the attack content effect is specified in correspondence with the determined ally character, a part of the effect pattern in which the attack content effect is displayed in a display order different from the normal display order will be executed. should be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict various production elements (type of ally character, number of attacks, amount of damage) used in the attack production. In addition, the production patterns in which the attack content productions are displayed in a display order different from normal are configured to be more likely to be selected when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win than when the result is a loss. good. As a result, the player who notices that the attack performance has been executed in a performance mode different from usual can enjoy the subjugation ready-to-win performance while having a feeling of anticipation for winning the jackpot.
In addition, in this subjugation reach effect, different attacks can be executed depending on the type of the friendly character that executes the attack. As the number of enemy characters (number of attacks), "1" is more likely to be selected than other numbers, and as the amount of damage to be inflicted on the attack target, "large damage" is different from other damage amounts (medium damage, small damage etc.). Therefore, when the ally character 801a is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the amount of damage rather than the number of attacks. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 657(b), when the ally character 801a is selected, the display order of the suggestive mode for showing the details of the current attack is displayed as "number of attacks" and "amount of damage". Order is determined.
On the other hand, when the ally character 801b is selected, multiple numbers are more likely to be selected than a single number as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (the number of attacks). "Medium damage" is configured to be more likely to be selected than other damage amounts (large damage, small damage). Therefore, when the ally character 801b is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the number of attacks rather than the amount of damage. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 658(b), when the ally character 801b is selected, "damage amount" and "number of attacks" are displayed as the display order of the suggestive mode for sequentially indicating the details of the current attack. Order is determined.
As described above, in the subjugation reach effect executed in the 23rd control example, it is possible to determine the type of allied character that is likely to select different attack contents as the type of allied character that executes the attack. The display order of the suggestion mode for indicating the content of the attack is configured to be different according to the type of the ally character. Specifically, it is possible to display each of the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) that determine the content of the attack as a suggestive mode, and the display order of the plurality of suggested modes to be displayed is the determined ally character. It is configured so that the display order is determined such that the element that is good at the type is displayed after the other elements.

By configuring in this way, even when the type of any friendly character is determined, it is possible to delay the timing at which the suggestive mode that the player pays attention to is displayed. During, you can enjoy the subjugation reach production.
In the twenty-third control example, the display order of the suggestive modes is determined according to the determined friendly character type. Among the elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage), the display order of the suggestive mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player is determined is determined after the other elements, or the content of the attack is determined. Among the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) to be displayed, the display order of the suggested mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player has been determined is determined before the other elements. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the content of the next displayed suggestion mode based on the content of the previously displayed suggestion mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 661, the contents of the chance announcement effect executed in the twenty-third control example will be described. FIG. 661 is a diagram showing an example of a target aspect of the chance advance notice effect. In this 23rd control example, by varying the display mode of the target mode used for the variable presentation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to execute the chance notice presentation for suggesting the degree of expectation of winning the big win. is doing.
For example, as shown in FIG. 661, a chance notice effect that varies the display mode (comment display mode Ch1) of the comment display section HR52 where various comments are displayed, and a display mode of the pending symbol hr0 in execution (suspend during execution) It is configured to be able to execute a chance notice effect by varying the display mode Ch2), a chance notice effect by varying the display mode (character display mode Ch3) of the character 801 used for the variable display, and the like.

The display mode of each target mode can be changed to 4 stages including the initial mode (default). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases every time. For example, the comment display mode Ch1 (see FIG. 661), which is the target mode of the chance notice effect, is set so that the chance notice effect of variably displaying the background color of the comment display part HR52 is executed according to the set stage level. It is configured so that "LV1" has a background color of "white", "LV2" has a background color of "yellow", "LV3" has a background color of "red", and "LV4" has a background color of "rainbow color". It consists of
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, when the period in which the chance advance notice effect is not executed continues for a predetermined period, the chance advance notice effect can be executed forcibly.
Here, with reference to FIG. 662, the flow of forcibly executing the chance announcement effect will be described. FIG. 662 is a diagram showing the number of special symbol variations and the flow of the executed chance-up effect. In accordance with the execution of the special symbol variation, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the chance advance notice performance when setting the performance mode of the variable performance. Then, when the execution lottery for the chance notice effect is not won, 1 is added to the effect execution counter 223aah (see FIGS. 662(a) and 662(b)). Then, when the value of the production execution counter 223aah after addition reaches 50, the chance announcement production is forcibly executed.
In addition, when the execution lottery for the chance notice effect is won and the decided effect mode of the chance notice effect is a mode (LV2) with a low degree of expectation for the big win, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is changed to the usual value of "1." ” and the low-expectation mode “1” are added. That is, "2" is added to the value of the effect execution counter 223aah with one special symbol variation (see FIG. 662(b)). By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the update contents of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation and the value of the production execution counter 223aah different, so that whether the chance advance notice production is forcibly executed or not is determined by the chance advance notice production lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the chance notice effect is executed based on the fact that the player wins the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 662(c), when the chance notice effect is executed based on the winning of the chance notice effect lottery, there is a high degree of expectation for the big hit with respect to the loss fluctuation effect (LV4). is set, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is subtracted (30 subtraction). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the chance notice effect with an excessively high degree of expectation in the loss variation effect.
In addition, in this 23rd control example, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is configured to be added each time the special symbol lottery is executed. A management means for managing the variation pattern (variation time) of is provided, and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be added every time the special symbol variation is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds).
By configuring in this way, according to the contents of the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation to be executed, it is possible to change the number of additions of the effect execution counter 223aah for one special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the chance foretelling performance was executed at the beginning of the game or whether the chance foretelling performance was executed based on the winning of the chance foretelling performance lottery.
In addition, regardless of the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, the chance notice effect can be forcibly executed at predetermined intervals (predetermined intervals with respect to the game time when the special symbol variation is performed), so the chance notice effect is performed. It is possible to suppress the long continuation of the game time which is not executed.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of the determined special symbol variation is made different according to the set game state, for example, when the time saving state is set than when the normal state is set, To facilitate the setting of a short variable time and to forcibly execute a chance notice performance based on the value of a performance execution counter 223aah regardless of which game state is set. , the frequency of forcibly executing the chance notice effect can be varied according to the set game state. In this case, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be set than when a game state disadvantageous to the player is set. should be configured to By configuring in this way, when a game state disadvantageous to the player is set, it is possible to forcibly execute the chance notice effect with a small number of execution times of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent a person from getting bored with the game early.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of storing the right to execute the special symbol lottery (special figure reservation), the fluctuation pattern of longer fluctuation time when the number of stored special figure reservations is smaller than when the number of stored special figure reservations is large. is configured to be easily selected, and when many special symbol reservations are not acquired, it is forced to execute fewer special symbol lotteries than when the game is played so as to acquire many special symbol reservations. It may be configured to make it easier to execute the chance notice effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early due to the special symbol lottery not being frequently executed.
Furthermore, depending on the effect content of the variable effect executed in correspondence with the special symbol variation, the update contents of the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be changed. For example, during one special symbol variation, the special symbol variation If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing a pseudo-variation effect of restarting after temporarily stopping the third symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the , the variation of the third symbol is not the actual number of special symbol variations. It may be configured to update (add) the value of the effect execution counter 223aah based on the number of times (including restart). By configuring in this way, it is possible to forcibly change the frequency with which the chance notice effect is executed according to the effect contents of the variable effect to be executed.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, every time the special symbol lottery is executed (every time the update condition for updating (adding) the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is established), the value of the counter is incremented by "1". However, without being limited to this, for example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the effect execution counter updated when the update condition is satisfied The value of 223aah may be different, and when the normal state is set, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is added by "1" when the update condition is satisfied, and when the time saving state is set may be configured to add "2" to the value of the effect execution counter 223aah when the update condition is established. Further, when a variable probability state, which is a game state most advantageous to the player, is set, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be subtracted by "1" when the update condition is met.

By configuring in this way, the frequency of forcibly executing the chance notice effect can be varied according to the set game state. In addition, when a variable probability state is set in which it is easy to win a jackpot in a short period of time, it is possible to make it difficult to forcibly execute the chance notice effect, and the chance notice effect is executed unnecessarily for the player. It can be suppressed.
In addition, conditions other than the set game state may be provided as conditions for changing the value to be updated when the update condition for updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is established. There are a plurality of production modes that can be switched and set, and when an update condition is established when one production mode is set and when another production mode different from the one production mode is set. The effect execution counter 223aah may be updated with different contents. By configuring in this way, when the performance mode in which a large value is added as the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is set, the chance notice performance is executed more than when other performance modes are set. easier to be Therefore, it is possible to easily change the content of the presentation provided to the player by switching the presentation mode, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Further, in the twenty-third control example, when the update condition for updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is met, a predetermined value is added (subtracted). Without limitation, when the update condition is satisfied, it may be configured to execute the process of determining the current update contents (addition value and subtraction value of the effect execution counter 223aah). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the value of the effect execution counter 223aah. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the chance notice effect is executed based on the fact that the notice effect lottery is won.
On the other hand, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect that can suggest to the player. In this case, the first suggested effect suggesting the current value of the effect execution counter 223aah, or the remaining number until the execution condition of the chance notice effect is established (the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches 50) is suggested. Either or all of the second suggesting effect or the third suggesting effect suggesting remaining information until the chance notice effect is forcibly executed may be configured to be executable.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the timing at which the chance notice effect is forcibly executed. Since it is possible to make it easy to predict whether the performance has been executed or whether the chance foretelling performance has been executed based on the winning of the chance foretelling performance lottery, for example, it is predicted that the chance foretelling performance will be forcibly executed. When the chance notice effect is executed at a timing different from the timing when the chance notice effect is executed, it is possible to easily predict that the chance notice effect is executed based on the winning of the chance notice effect lottery, so that the chance notice effect is performed. The player can be interested in the timing of execution.
In this case, the above-described first to third suggestion effects are executed not for all the chance announcement effects that are forcibly executed based on the value of the effect execution counter 223aah, but for some of them. should be configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to mix the chance forewarning performance with which the player can easily grasp which opportunity the chance forewarning performance is executed and the chance forewarning performance which is difficult to grasp. Therefore, the enjoyment of predicting can be increased.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-third control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 663, of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described nineteenth control example Explain what is different.
The long-press effect scenario table 222aaa is data that defines a plurality of scenarios for decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 when the player performs a long-press operation during the second part effect (continuous hit operation effect) of the battle effect. This table is referred to for determining a reduction scenario when it is determined that a long-pressing operation has been performed during the valid period of operation during the second part production.

In the twenty-third control example, the remaining HP value 890a is reduced in different manners according to the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (effect button 22) in the repeated hitting operation effect, and during the repeated hitting operation effect. , the remaining HP value 890a decreases according to the length of the period during which the long press is determined. On the other hand, when the repeated hit operation is executed during the repeated hit operation effect, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to decrease the remaining HP value 890a each time it is determined that the operation means (the effect button 22) has been pressed, It is configured to decrease the remaining HP value 890a when winning the lottery.
By constructing in this way, the process up to the display of the effect result of the repeated hitting operation effect to the player can be made different according to the operation method of the operation means executed by the player for the repeated hitting operation effect. becomes possible. Therefore, a player who wants to enjoy various processes can operate the operation means in different operation methods, thereby preventing the player from getting bored early.
Here, with reference to FIG. 665, the contents defined in the long press effect scenario table 222aaa will be described. FIG. 665 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents specified in the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa. As shown in FIG. 665, in the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa, different scenario types are defined in association with the success/fail determination result and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf.
Scenarios are defined for each scenario type, in which the tendency of the HP value to decrease varies according to the length of the long-pressing period. Then, the decrease value of the HP value at each timing is determined based on the remaining HP value and the final HP value.

Specifically, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect in which the current battle effect is executed (result of winning or not) is "win", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is "0 to For the range of 19”, there is “winning scenario 1”, for the range of “20 to 69”, there is “winning scenario 2”, and for the range of “70 to 98”, there is “winning scenario 3”. , is defined, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect in which the current battle effect is executed (result of determination of success or failure) is "miss", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is "0 ~ 19" range, "outlier scenario 1", "20 ~ 69" range, "outlier scenario 2", and "70 ~ 98" range, "outer scenario 3" is stipulated.
Here, detailed contents of various scenarios (effect scenarios) defined in the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa will be described. "Hit Scenario 1" and "Loss Scenario 1" are designed so that the remaining HP is more likely to decrease in the first half than in the second half of the elapsed time during which the long press operation is continuously performed. Scenario content (preceding type) is specified, when the long press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "Decrease: Medium", when the long press duration reaches 1 second, "Decrease: Medium", When the long-press duration reaches 1.5 seconds, "decrease: large" is defined, and when the long-press duration reaches 2 seconds, "upper limit" is defined. In other words, even though the maximum duration of the long press can be set to 3 seconds during the operation valid period, when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, there is a scenario content that reduces the remaining HP value to the upper limit. stipulated.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to form a period in which the remaining HP value cannot be decreased even though the long-pressing operation is continued while the remaining time of the operation valid period remains. When the above-described non-decrease period is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the non-decrease period has been set or the remaining HP value has reached the upper limit. Therefore, even when the remaining HP value reaches the upper limit, the performance button 22 (operating means) can be continuously operated while expecting the possibility that the remaining HP value will decrease again.
"Hit Scenario 2" and "Loss Scenario 2" are defined in scenario content (balanced type) so that remaining HP tends to decrease on average during the elapsed time during which the long press operation is continuously performed. When the long-press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "decrease: medium", when the long-press duration reaches 1 second, "decrease: medium", and the long-press duration is 1.5. "Decrease: Medium" when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, "Decrease: Medium" when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, "Decrease: Medium" when the duration of the long press reaches 2.5 seconds, An "upper limit" is defined when the long-press duration reaches 3 seconds. That is, an effect is executed in which the remaining HP value gradually decreases according to the length of the long-press duration.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to decrease the remaining HP value to the upper limit unless the long-pressing operation is performed immediately after the operation effective period is set, so that the player is made to predict the success/failure determination result. can be made difficult.
The “hit scenario 3” and the “losing scenario 3” are scenarios in which the remaining HP is more easily reduced in the second half period than in the first half period during the elapsed time in which the long press operation is continuously performed. The content (second half type) is defined, and when the long-press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "decrease: small", when the long-press duration reaches 1 second, "decrease: small", long "Decrease: Small" when the duration of the press reaches 1.5 seconds, "Decrease: Small" when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, and when the duration of the long press reaches 2.5 seconds , the "decrease: large" is defined, and the "upper limit" is defined when the long-press duration reaches 3 seconds. In other words, an effect is executed in which the remaining HP value is gradually greatly reduced in accordance with the length of the long-press duration.
As described above, in the twenty-third control example, if a long press operation is performed within the operation valid period during the battle effect, when it is determined that the long press operation has been performed, the long press effect scenario The effect scenario is determined by referring to the table 222aaa, and the determined scenario is referred to, and the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value according to the duration of the long press is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value with a different effect pattern from the case of executing the continuous hitting operation within the operation valid period during the battle effect. On the other hand, it is possible to easily provide the enjoyment of selecting the operating method for the effect button 22 (operating means).
Returning to FIG. 663, the description continues. The final HP selection table 222aab when out is a data table that is referred to when determining the final display mode (the upper limit of the HP value that can be decreased) of the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a as the effect result of the battle effect. is.

Here, as described above, the battle effect is a effect of gradually decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a. If the effect result of defeating 880a (reducing the HP value to 0) is determined, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a loss, the effect result is that the enemy character 880a cannot be defeated (the HP value is reduced to 0). (cannot be reduced to) is configured so that the production result is determined.
Furthermore, in the 23rd control example, when the result of the failure effect is displayed, the HP value of the enemy character 880a that can be decreased is set to 1 out of a plurality of values. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the HP value that can be reduced even when a battle effect resulting in a failure effect is executed.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, it is possible to set a non-decrease period in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a cannot be decreased for a predetermined period (up to 2 seconds) when a long press operation is performed. is doing. Therefore, if a situation occurs in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a does not decrease even though the operation means is being operated during the battle production, the production result of the battle production being executed will not be the production result. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the HP value cannot be decreased any more or the HP value 890a cannot be decreased because the non-decrease period is set. can.
Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means until the expiration of the effective period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 666(a), the contents of the final HP selection table 222aab when out will be described. FIG. 666(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final HP selection table 222aab when out. As shown in FIG. 666(a), in the final HP selection table 222aab when out, various final HP values are defined in association with the acquired values of the first effect counter 223vf.
Specifically, when the obtained value of the first effect counter 223vf is in the range of “0 to 4”, the final HP value is set to “50”, and when the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of “5 to 14”, the final HP value is “50”. "30" as the value, "20" as the final HP value for the range of "15 to 24", and "10" as the final HP value for the range of "25 to 44". For the range of 45 to 98", a final HP value of 5 is defined respectively.
For example, when "50" is selected as the final HP value, even if the effect button 22 is operated during the second part effect of the battle effect, the remaining HP value does not fall below 50. An effect is executed in which 890a does not variably display (decrease display) from the display mode in which 890a indicates 50 (the display mode occupies an intermediate position between 0 and MAX). Therefore, depending on the final HP value selected, the situation in which the HP value cannot be decreased despite the fact that the effect button 22 is operated during the second part effect can be changed at various timings (different remaining HP values). can be generated in
Therefore, when a small HP value is selected as the final HP value of the battle effect, the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 is made smaller (shorter) than when a large HP value is selected as the final HP value. ), it is possible to make the player expect that the performance result of the battle performance being executed will be the performance result corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (the performance result in which the HP value becomes 0). .

Here, even if the effect result of the battle effect indicates that the result is other than the big win (lost win), that is, even if the battle effect in which a value other than "0" is selected as the final HP value is executed, The HP value that can be finally decreased (final HP value) can be set differently in order to make the user expect that the performance result corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (the performance result in which the HP value becomes 0) will be displayed. can be considered to be
In other words, in the case where the result of the battle production is a win, the HP value can be reduced to near "0" (a battle production in which a small value (such as "5") is set as the final HP value ) and a battle effect in which the HP value cannot be reduced to near “0” (a battle effect in which a large value (such as “50”) is set as the final HP value) can be executed. Compared to the case where a battle effect is executed that can always reduce the HP value to a certain HP value (for example, "5") when winning, it is possible to reduce the HP value to a predetermined HP value (for example, "5"). Since the battle performance that cannot be reduced is executed, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased when the HP value is decreased to a predetermined HP value (for example, "5") in the battle performance.
With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in whether the HP value becomes "0", but also in the process of decreasing the HP value, so that the battle effect is executed. For a long period of time, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the effect that is executed.
As described above, in the case where the HP value (final HP value) that can be finally reduced can be set to be different, at least the final HP value ( For example, it is necessary to execute a battle effect in which "50" etc.) is set. When a battle effect in which a large HP value is set as the final HP value is executed, the HP value reaches the final HP value at an earlier stage than the other battle effects, thereby As a result, there is a problem that the fact that the effect result of the battle effect being executed is an incorrect effect result is quickly grasped.

On the other hand, in the twenty-third control example, even though the operation means is operated during the operation presentation period in which the HP value can be decreased based on the operation to the operation means, and the final HP value is A non-decrease period can be set as a period in which the HP value cannot be decreased (is difficult) even though the HP value has not reached the target.
By configuring the non-decrease period to be settable in this way, it is possible to stop decreasing the HP value while the non-decrease period is set even if the final HP value has not been reached. To make it difficult for a player to grasp whether the final HP value has been reached or a non-decrease period has been set, even if the HP value does not decrease despite the operation of an operating means during performance. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the HP value will be reduced again (the non-decrease period will be canceled) during the battle production, and the production effect can be enhanced.
As shown in FIG. 666(a), in this 23rd control example, the final HP values of the battle effect (losing battle effect) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a lost win are "5" and "10". , ``20'', ``30'', and ``50'' can be determined, and a smaller final HP value is more likely to be selected than a larger final HP value. is executed, the final HP value will be "50" in about 5%, the final HP value will be "30" in about 10%, the final HP value will be "20" in about 10%, and the final HP value will be "20" in about 20%. 10" is configured to be selected at approximately 55% with a final HP value of "5".
Therefore, when the battle effect is executed, every time the HP value decreases to any of the HP values "50", "30", "20", "10", and "5", the HP value end of the decrease (whether it is the final HP value) and increase the expectation of winning a jackpot when the HP value continues to decrease. .

The entry lottery table 222aac has an operation valid period (valid period), the data table is referred to when executing a rush lottery for determining whether or not to set a non-variable period (non-decrease period) in which the performance mode is not changed, It is referred to when it is decided to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the operation means by the player during the second part of the effect.
When the rush lottery executed with reference to the rush lottery table 222aac is won, a non-decrease period is set. During this non-decrease period, even if the player operates the operation means, the HP value is not reduced based on the operation. While the non-decrease period is set, a cancellation lottery for determining whether or not to cancel the non-decrease period is executed at predetermined intervals (0.5 second intervals). or when the upper limit period (3 seconds) of the predetermined non-decrease period has passed, the non-decrease period is canceled.
Here, with reference to FIG. 666(b), detailed contents of the entry lottery table 222aac will be described. FIG. 666(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the entry lottery table 222aac. As shown in FIG. 666(b), the rush lottery table 222aac is associated with the success/failure determination result (special symbol lottery result), the current remaining HP value, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf, The result of rush lottery (winning, non-winning) is defined.
Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the remaining HP value is "100", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223vf can take the entire range "0 to 98", Rush lottery "non-winning" is stipulated. That is, when the remaining HP value is "100", that is, when the HP value of the enemy character 880a has not decreased, the non-decrease period is not set. With this configuration, even though the battle performance has been executed, the battle performance ends without reducing the HP value based on the operation of the operation means, and the player tries to operate the operation means. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to operate.

Further, when the remaining HP value is in the range of "99 to 70", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 79", and "non-winning" is "80 to 98". , and the remaining HP value is in the range of "69 to 40", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 54" , the range of "55 to 98" is defined as "non-winning", and the range of "55 to 98" is defined to be "winning". "Non-winning" is defined for the range of "0 to 34", "winning" is defined for the range of "35 to 98", and the remaining HP value is within the range of "19 to 1" In some cases, rush lottery “winning” is defined for the entire range “0 to 98” that the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf can take.
Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination is "out" and the remaining HP value is "100", a rush lottery "Non-winning" is specified, and when the remaining HP value is in the range of "99 to 70", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94". ” is defined as “winning” in the range of “95 to 98”, and the remaining HP value is in the range of “69 to 40”, the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf is “ "Non-winning" is defined for the range of 0 to 79, "winning" is defined for the range of "80 to 98", and if the remaining HP value is within the range of "39 to 20" , "non-winning" is defined when the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 54", and "winning" is defined in the range of "55 to 98", and the remaining HP value is If the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "19 to 1", "non-winning" is in the range of "0 to 94", and " Election” is stipulated.
That is, in the twenty-third control example, the probability of winning the entry lottery increases as the remaining HP value decreases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the non-decrease period from being set in a state in which the HP value is not reduced much even though the battle effect has been executed.
In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot lottery, the winning probability of the rush lottery is higher than when the lottery is lost. That is, when a battle effect (winning battle effect) in which the final HP value is set to "0" is executed, a battle effect (loss battle effect) in which a value other than "0" is set as the final HP value is executed. is executed so that the non-decrease period can be set more easily.

By configuring in this way, regardless of which effect result is set in the battle effect, at a predetermined timing before the HP value becomes "0", a period during which the HP value does not decrease (a non-decreasing period is set, the period after reaching the final HP value) can be easily set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect result of the battle effect being executed when the period in which the HP value does not decrease is set.
Furthermore, even if a period in which the HP value does not decrease is set, there is still the possibility of another period in which the HP value decreases, so a period in which the HP value does not decrease has been set. After that, it is possible to continue the battle effect (continue to operate the operation means) while expecting the HP value to decrease again.
Further, although detailed description will be given later, in the twenty-third control example, only one non-decreasing period can be set for one operation valid period (valid period). In other words, the entry lottery can be executed only during the operation valid period and in a state where the non-decrease period has never been set. Therefore, it is suppressed that the non-decrease period is set multiple times within one operation effective period, and the operation effective period elapses without almost setting the period in which the HP value can be reduced. be able to.
The cancellation lottery table 222aad is a data table referred to when executing a cancellation lottery for canceling the set non-decrease period. The cancellation lottery is executed at predetermined intervals (0.5 second intervals) while the non-decrease period is set, and the longer the elapsed time during the non-decrease period (the shorter the remaining operation valid period (approximately), so that the winning probability of the release lottery is high. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-decrease period from continuing unnecessarily long.

In the twenty-third control example, the duration of the non-decrease period is set to a period shorter than the valid operation period (5 seconds). It is configured so that the upper limit is reached and the non-decreasing period ends. In other words, even if a cancellation lottery is repeatedly executed without winning the cancellation lottery to cancel the non-decrease period, the non-decrease period can be terminated based on the passage of time. It consists of With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-decrease period from continuing unnecessarily long.
Further, when the remaining HP value at the time when the non-decrease period is set is large, the winning probability of the release lottery is higher than when the remaining HP value is small. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set in a state where the remaining HP value is large, the non-decrease period can be made difficult to continue for a long time.
The additional reduction value selection table 222aae is a data table that is referenced when determining the reduction value of the HP value to be granted when the non-decrease period is canceled, and is a data table for ending the non-decrease period ( It is referenced when the release lottery winning, time elapsed) is established. The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example has a non-decrease period in which the HP value is not decreased based on the operation of the operation means even when the remaining HP value has not reached the final HP value. It is configured to be settable, and even if the remaining HP value does not decrease despite operating the operation means within the operation valid period during the battle production, the remaining HP value will be the final HP value. It is constructed so as to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it has reached.
If a non-decrease period is set within the operation effective period, that is, even if the period during which the remaining HP value can be decreased based on the operation of the operation means becomes short, the operation effective period In order to make it easier for the remaining HP value to reach the final HP value within a certain period of time, at the time when the non-decrease period ends, an additional decrease performance for decreasing the remaining HP value can be executed without being based on the operation of the operating means. is doing. With this configuration, even if the non-decrease period is set, the remaining HP value can be easily reached to the final HP value during the operation valid period, so the final HP value is "0". The remaining HP value cannot be reduced to "0" within the operation valid period, It is possible to suppress the player's desire to use the operation means from decreasing.

Here, detailed contents defined in the additional decrease value selection table 222aae referred to when determining the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 668 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the additional decrement value selection table 222aae. As shown in FIG. 668, the additional decrease value selection table 222aae contains the result of determination of whether the special symbol lottery corresponding to the effect result of the battle effect being executed, the remaining HP value, and the difference HP indicating the difference between the final HP value. Different decrease values are defined in correspondence with the value, the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab for indicating the length of the period in which the non-decrease period continues, and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.
Specifically, when the win/fail judgment result is “win”, the difference HP value is within the range of “1 to 19”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1 to 500”, the obtained second A decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of the effect counter 223vg of "0-179", and a decrement value of "5" is defined for the range of "180-198". Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "0" is "100 to 198". ], and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is ``1501 to 2999'', the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is ``0 to 99''. A decrease value of "0" is defined for the range, a decrease value of "5" is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrease value of "all differential HP" is defined for the range of "180 to 198". . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, the upper limit, the decrease value "all difference HP" is defined regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.
Here, the decrease value “all the difference HP” indicates the same value as the calculated difference HP value. In other words, when "all the difference HP" is selected as the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect, the effect is executed to decrease the total HP value that can be decreased in the additional decrease effect. . For example, in a winning battle effect in which the final HP value is set to "0", when "all difference HP" is selected as the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect, the enemy character 880a is defeated by the additional decrease effect. An effect (effect of decreasing the remaining HP value to 0) is executed. Thus, even if a non-decrease period is set in which the HP value cannot be decreased, depending on the effect mode of the additional decrease effect that is executed when the non-decrease period is canceled, the non-decrease period When the non-decrease period is set, the player can be notified of the effect result of the battle effect earlier than when the non-decrease period is set. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play the game.
On the other hand, in the out-of-battle effect in which the final HP value is set to a value other than "0", when the "all difference HP" is selected as the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect, the enemy character 880a is reduced by the additional decrease effect. An effect of reducing the remaining HP value to the final HP value is executed. By configuring in this way, the HP value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction effect, so that the remaining HP value can be reduced to "0" in the remaining period, and the player is willingly operated. You can operate the means.

Also, at the timing when the non-decrease period is canceled, an additional reduction effect is executed with the "all HP difference" as the reduction value, and the remaining HP value is reduced to the final HP value, so the additional reduction effect is executed. The HP value can be decreased both during the period before the additional decrease effect is executed (period of non-decrease) and the period after the additional decrease effect is executed (period after the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value). can be a period of time. With this configuration, in a state in which the player cannot decrease the HP value based on the operation of the operating means, the effect of decreasing the HP value is interrupted on the way. I can make you think it's possible. Therefore, even if the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value and the situation continues in which the remaining HP value cannot be decreased even if the operation means is operated, Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the battle effect while having the possibility that the remaining HP value decreases.
That is, in the twenty-third control example, when the difference HP value is within the same range, the longer the non-decrease period, the more the HP is decreased in the additional decrease effect executed when the non-decrease period is canceled. It is configured so that the HP value of the player can easily increase. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the HP value cannot be decreased to the final HP value in the battle effect due to the long non-decrease period being set.
In addition, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches the upper limit, that is, when the upper limit period of the non-decrease period is reached without winning the cancellation lottery executed during the non-decrease period, It is configured to make it easier to execute the additional reduction performance for greatly reducing the HP value than when the release lottery is won on the way. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set, a game in which the non-decrease period is desired to be canceled as soon as possible and a game in which the non-decrease period is desired to continue up to the upper limit are played. You can have someone do it.
Returning to FIG. 668, the contents defined in the additional decrement value selection table 222aae will be continued. If the success/failure determination result is "win", the difference HP value is within the range of "20 to 69", and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg Decrease value "0" for range "0-99", Decrease value "5" for range "100-179", Decrease value "10" for range "180-198" is stipulated. Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "10" is "100 to 179". , and the decrement value "15" for the range "180 to 198". , the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is in the range of 0 to 99, the decrease value is 15, and the range of 100 to 179 is 10, 180 to 198 A reduction value "all differential HP" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is reduced to the range of "0 to 99""all difference HP" However, a decrement value of "15" is defined for the range of "100-179", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180-198".

If the success/failure determination result is "win", the difference HP value is within the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg A decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of "0-179", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180-198". Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "15" is "100 to 179". , a decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of "180 to 198", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180 to 198". , the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is in the range of 0 to 99, the decrease value is 15, and the range of 100 to 179 is 20, and 180 to 198 A reduction value "all differential HP" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg falls within the range of "0 to 99" and the decrease value "25" A reduction value of “all HP differences” is defined for the range of “100 to 179”, and a reduction value of “20” is defined for the range of “180 to 198”.
As described above, in the additional decrease value selection table 222aae, the corresponding special symbol lottery results (results of judgment) are the same, and the values of the non-decrease period counters 223aab are in the same range. When the difference is within the range, the larger the difference HP value at the time when the additional reduction performance is executed, the more likely a large value is selected as the HP value that can be reduced by the additional reduction performance. there is With this configuration, if the non-decrease period is set while the HP value is hardly reduced during the operation effective period of the battle effect, the non-decrease period is set while the HP value is reduced. Since the HP value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction performance than in the case of the additional reduction effect, even if the non-decrease period is set during the operation valid period, the non-decrease period does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of the operation to the performance button 22 even after the release.
In addition, when the difference HP value is small, the ratio of selecting the difference HP value as the HP value (decrease value) to be decreased in the additional decrease effect is higher than when the difference HP value is large. With this configuration, when the non-decrease period is set in a state in which the difference HP value is large, that is, in a state in which the HP value has not been decreased since the battle effect was executed, the non-decrease period is canceled. It is possible to make it difficult for the HP value to decrease to the final HP value in the additional decrease effect executed when Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary elimination of an opportunity to decrease the HP value based on the player's operation of the effect button 22 during the battle effect.
On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is “off”, the difference HP value is within the range of “1 to 19”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1 to 500”, the obtained second effect counter 223vg , that is, the decrement value "0" is defined for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg. Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 179", and the decrease value "0" is "180 to 198". ], and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is ``1501 to 2999'', the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is ``0 to 99''. A decrement value of '0' is defined for the range, a decrement value of '5' for the range of '100-179', and a decrement value of '3' for the range of '180-198'. Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg decreases to the range of "0 to 99", A reduction value of "15" is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and a reduction value of "all differential HP" is defined for the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination is “off”, the difference HP value is within the range of “20 to 69”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1 to 500”, the obtained second effect counter 223vg A decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of "0 to 99", and a decrement value of "5" is defined for the range of "100 to 198". Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "0" is "100 to 179". , and the decrement value "15" for the range "180 to 198". , the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", the decrease value is "0", and in the range of "100 to 179", the decrease value is "15", A decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg decreases to the range of "0 to 99", A reduction value of "all HP differences" is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and a reduction value of "15" is defined for the range of "180 to 198".
If the success/failure determination result is “off”, the difference HP value is within the range of “70 to 99”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1 to 500”, the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg A decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of "0-179", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180-198". Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "0" is "100 to 179". , and the decrement value "15" for the range "180 to 198". , the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", the decrease value is "0", and in the range of "100 to 179", the decrease value is "15", A reduction value "all differential HP" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg decreases to the range of "0 to 99", A reduction value “all differential HP” is defined for the range “100 to 198”.
As described above, when the battle effect being executed is the lost battle effect, it is configured so that the additional decrease effect for decreasing the HP value is less likely to be executed than in the case of the winning battle effect. . With this configuration, in the losing battle effect in which the final HP value is set to a value greater than that of the winning battle effect, the HP value decreases due to the additional decrease effect, and the player presses the effect button 22 during the battle effect. It is possible to suppress unnecessary elimination of the opportunity to decrease the HP value based on the operation of .
In this twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. 668, the HP value (decrease value) to be decreased in the additional decrease effect is configured to be selectable as "0". When the decrease value "0" is selected, only the effect indicating that the non-decrease period has been canceled is executed, and the effect mode in which the friend character 801a reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a is not executed. It is configured so that With this configuration, even when the decrease value "0" is selected, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the non-decrease period has been cancelled.

It should be noted that another effect mode may be set as the effect mode of the additional decrease effect executed when the decrease value "0" is set. However, the enemy character 880a may be configured to be able to set an effect mode indicating that the enemy character 880a avoids the attack so that the HP value does not decrease. With this configuration, when the additional reduction effect is executed, regardless of the selected reduction value, the effect of the friendly character 801a attacking the enemy character 880a is executed. You can make it hard to be noticed that you have been selected. Also, in this case, even in part of the effect for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the effect button 22, the effect mode is set such that the enemy character 880a avoids the attack of the allied character 801a. good to do By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the decrease value "0" even in effects other than the additional decrease effect, the effect corresponding to the decrease value "0" is executed in the additional decrease effect. Even in the case where the game is played, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.
The chance notice lottery table 222aaf is a data table referred to when determining whether or not to execute a chance-up performance for increasing the expectation of winning a big win in the variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. . In this 23rd control example, as in each of the control examples described above, when a variation pattern command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device At 113, a process of setting a display variation pattern (effect pattern of variation effect) corresponding to the received variation pattern command is executed.
The type of the display variation pattern is determined based on information included in the variation pattern command set by the main controller 110, and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs according to the set type. is. Specifically, in the special figure symbol variation pattern selection process (see F209 in FIG. 553) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 550) of the main controller 110, the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 544 ) to select (determine) the variation pattern with reference to (see F403 ~ F405 in Figure 553) is executed, the special figure variation pattern command for showing the selected variation pattern is set (F406 in Figure 553 reference).
In the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 544), different data tables are defined corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set game state, and different variation patterns (variation time ) is configured to select More specifically, in the same game state (for example, normal state), the variation pattern with a long variation time (90 seconds) as a variation pattern is out when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. It is stipulated that it is easier to be selected than in the case of winning, and on the other hand, the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (7 seconds) is more likely to be lost than in the case of winning the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery. is defined to be easier to select. In other words, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is configured to differ depending on the selected variation pattern (variation time).

Here, the variation pattern for display (effect pattern of variation effect) set by the audio lamp control device 113 when receiving the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) output from the main controller 110 is at least , the effect pattern corresponding to the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is set. That is, when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds is received, an effect pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the effect mode in which a variation effect of 90 seconds is executed is determined, and the determined effect It is configured such that a display variation pattern command corresponding to the pattern is set. Therefore, depending on the type of variation pattern (effect pattern) set by the sound ramp control device 113, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs.
The chance notice lottery table 222aaf prescribes that the winning probability of the chance notice lottery is different for each variation pattern type set by the sound lamp control device 113. Variation patterns (long The production pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of time) is configured so that the winning probability of the chance notice lottery is higher than the fluctuation pattern (the production pattern corresponding to the short-time special figure fluctuation) with a low expectation of winning the jackpot. is doing. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for winning a big win when the chance notice is executed, so that the chance notice performance is a performance mode for showing that the degree of expectation for winning a big win is high.
Here, with reference to FIG. 669(a), detailed contents of the chance advance notice lottery table 222aaf will be described. FIG. 669(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the chance advance notice lottery table 222aaf. As shown in Figure 669 (a), in the chance notice lottery table 222aaf, the result of determination corresponding to this variation production (lottery result of special symbol lottery) and the variation pattern type of this variation production (production pattern type) and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf, the propriety of the chance advance notice lottery is defined.
Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the selected variation pattern type is "variation pattern 1", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 98". Chance notice lottery "winning" is defined for the entire range of . In addition, when the variation pattern type is "variation pattern 2", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94", and the chance notice lottery "winning" is "95 to 98 ”, the chance notice lottery “non-winning” is defined. Then, when the selected variation pattern type is the variation pattern type "variation pattern n", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94", the chance notice lottery " A chance advance lottery "win" is stipulated for a range of "95-98" for non-win".

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is "off" and the selected variation pattern type is "variation pattern 2", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is within the range of "0 to 94". On the other hand, the chance advance notice lottery "won" is stipulated for the range of "95 to 98", and the chance notice lottery "non-win" is defined. Then, when the selected variation pattern type is the variation pattern type "variation pattern n+1", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is for the entire range of "0 to 98", the chance notice lottery "Non-election" is stipulated.
Here, the type of variation pattern (effect pattern) selectable by the sound lamp control device 113 is determined based on the information (information indicating the variation type) included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A variation effect corresponding to the determined variation pattern (effect pattern) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .
In addition, in order to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, in recent years, it has become mainstream to provide many types of variation patterns (effect patterns) determined by the sound ramp control device 113. . In this case, when a specific variation pattern command is output from the main controller 110, based on the specific information included in the specific variation pattern command and the effect random value randomly updated by the sound lamp control device 113 It is preferable to configure so that different types of variation patterns (effect patterns) can be selected.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the types of variation patterns (effect patterns) set by the sound lamp control device 113 than the types of variation patterns set by the main controller 110. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the types of variation effects to be executed without increasing the types of variation types selected by the main controller 110 having a limited capacity.

In the chance advance notice lottery table 222aaf shown in FIG. 669(a), when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, each variation pattern is more likely to be selected than when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. types are specified. Specifically, "variation pattern 1" is the variation pattern with the highest percentage of selection at the time of winning the jackpot (selected only at the time of winning the jackpot), and "variation pattern n+1" is the most selected at the time of winning the jackpot. This is a variation pattern with a low percentage (selected only when winning a losing prize).
Here, in the twenty-third control example, among the variation pattern types selected by the sound ramp control device 113, a variation pattern (variation pattern 1) selected only when a jackpot is won, and a variation pattern when a jackpot is not won It has a variation pattern (variation pattern n+1) that is selected only when In other words, the variation pattern type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that won the jackpot is selected from the range of "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern n", and the variation pattern type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that was won out is "variation Pattern 2” to “variation pattern n+1” are selected.
Then, "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern n" are the variation pattern types that can be selected regardless of whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a lost election, and are in ascending order from "variation pattern 2". It is configured so that the jackpot expectation is high.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a variation pattern for a confirmed big win and a variation pattern for a confirmed loss as the types of variation patterns to be selected. As compared with the case, the distribution at the time of selecting the variation pattern (performance pattern) is biased, and it is possible to make it difficult for the variation performance to be executed at a frequency different from the expected degree of winning the jackpot for the predetermined variation pattern type. .

The chance mode selection table 222aag is a data table that is referred to when selecting the performance mode of the chance prediction to be executed when the chance prediction lottery is won. In the twenty-third control example, a plurality of chance notices can be executed in one variable effect. For example, as described above with reference to FIG. Chance forewarning effect by varying the display mode (comment display mode ch1), chance forewarning effect by varying the display mode (execution suspension display mode) of the pending symbol hr0 in execution, and the display mode of the character 801 used for the variable display. It is configured to be able to execute a chance announcement effect that changes (character display mode ch3).
In the chance mode selection table 222aag, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg are associated with each other to determine which display mode is to be varied and how much. A mode change scenario (change scenario) including information indicating (level information after change) is defined. In addition, for the variable performance determined to forcibly execute the chance notice performance, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg are made to correspond. , special change scenarios are defined.
Here, in this 23rd control example, depending on the number of times of execution of variation performance (loss variation performance) corresponding to multiple special symbol variations (loss variation) executed without winning a jackpot, and the execution content, forced It is configured so that the chance notice effect can be executed. For example, in the case where the loss variation performance is executed 50 times in a row without winning a jackpot, and the chance notice performance is never executed as the performance mode of the 50 times loss variation performance. is configured such that the performance mode including the chance notice performance is forcibly selected as the performance mode of the next variational performance.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the continuous execution of the missing variable effect in which the chance advance notice effect is not executed.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, there is provided a storage means capable of storing information relating to the effect mode of the chance notice effect used in the variable effect executed in the past, and when the chance notice effect is forcibly executed. A performance mode of the chance advance notice performance used for the determined variable performance can be selected based on the information stored in the storage means. For example, in a state in which information indicating that the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance notice performance with a high probability of winning the jackpot (high expectation of the jackpot) is lost and selected as the performance mode of the variable performance is stored in the storage means. , when the chance notice effect is forcibly selected, if the result of the change effect in which the chance notice effect is forcibly executed becomes the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot (the winning change effect), it is stored. A performance mode included in the information stored in the means is configured to be selectable as a performance mode of the chance notice performance. By constructing in this way, the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance notice performance in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high (the degree of expectation for the big win is high) is set as the performance mode of the continuous loss fluctuation performance, and the player is distrusted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives a feeling.
On the other hand, in the case where the performance result of the variable performance forcibly executed is the performance result indicating the loss (is the loss variable performance), a performance mode other than the performance mode included in the information stored in the storage means is selected. The performance mode is configured to be selectable as the performance mode of the chance advance notice performance. By constructing in this way, the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance notice performance in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high (the degree of expectation for the big win is high) is set as the performance mode of the continuous loss fluctuation performance, and the player is distrusted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives an impression.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, based on the information stored in the storage means, the effect mode of the chance notice effect used in the previous hit variation effect is read out, and the read effect mode is forcibly changed to the chance effect mode. It is configured so that it can be set as an effect mode of a non-variable effect in which the advance notice effect is executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a part of the performance modes from the performance modes of the chance advance notice performance from being biased and continued to be selected only as the performance modes of the winning variation performance, so that the chance advance notice performance can be suppressed. It is possible to appropriately maintain the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot for each of a plurality of performance modes selectable as the performance modes of .

In addition, in the case of using a configuration that can set the performance mode of the chance notice performance set in the previous hit fluctuation performance as the performance mode of the loss fluctuation performance in which the chance notice performance is forcibly executed, for example, , When the performance mode of the chance notice performance set in the previous hit variation performance is specified to be selectable only for the hit variation performance, the performance mode may be removed as a special specification and used for the variation performance. good. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute a variable performance different from the prescribed content that is predetermined, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable performance to be executed. In addition, when the production mode of the chance notice production set in the previous hit fluctuation production is specified to be selectable only for the hit fluctuation production, the chance notice production set in the hit fluctuation production before the last time is specified. In order to be able to set the performance mode of (1) as the performance mode of the loss variation performance in which the chance notice performance is forcibly executed, the storage means may be configured to store a plurality of pieces of information.
Here, the detailed contents of the chance mode selection table 222aag will be described with reference to FIG. 669(b). FIG. 669(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the chance mode selection table 222aag. As shown in FIG. 669 (b), the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is "hit (normal)", and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99""Change scenario 1" for the range "100-159", "Change scenario 2" for the range "160-189", "Change scenario 3" for the range "190-196""Change scenario 4" is defined for the range of , and "Change scenario 5" is defined for the range of "197, 198". In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is "off (normal)" and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", "change scenario 6" is applied. , "change scenario 7" for the range "100 to 159", "change scenario 8" for the range "160 to 189", and "change scenario 8" for the range "190 to 195" Scenario 9” is defined, “Change scenario 10” is defined for the range of “196, 197”, and “Change scenario 11” is defined for the value of “198”.
Here, "hit (normal)" and "loss (normal)" of the special symbol lottery result (win/fail judgment result) means winning the chance lottery executed with reference to the chance lottery lottery table 222aaf. It shows the normal pattern in which the chance notice effect is executed based on, and when selecting the effect mode of the chance notice effect when winning the chance notice lottery, the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) The effect mode is selected from either "hit (normal)" or "loss (normal)".
Next, among the mode change scenarios defined in the chance mode selection table 222aag, mode change scenarios (“change scenario 1” to “change scenario 11”) are selected when the chance announcement effect is executed in a normal pattern. ) will be explained. This mode change scenario is a target mode (comment display part HR52, running pending symbol hr0, execution pending symbol hr0, Among the information for varying the display mode (comment display mode Ch1, in-execution suspension display mode Ch2, character display mode Ch3) of the character 810), at least the upper limit value of the step level that can be varied is defined. There is.

In the twenty-third control example, the display mode of each object mode is configured to be variable and displayable in four stages including the initial mode (default). LV4", and is configured so that the expectation of a big hit increases as the level rises. For example, the comment display mode Ch1 (see FIG. 661), which is the target mode of the chance notice effect, is set so that the chance notice effect of variably displaying the background color of the comment display part HR52 is executed according to the set stage level. It is configured so that "LV1" has a background color of "white", "LV2" has a background color of "yellow", "LV3" has a background color of "red", and "LV4" has a background color of "rainbow color". It consists of
Note that the chance mode selection table 222aag shown in FIG. 669(b) describes the upper limit value of the variable stage level as information included in the mode change scenario. For example, the process for changing from the initial mode "LV1" to the step level of the upper limit (for example, "LV3") (the process of directly changing from "LV1" to "LV3", or "LV1", "LV2" , the process of changing in the order of "LV3", or the process of displaying "LV3" without displaying the initial mode "LV1", etc.) and the timing of changing the stage level (for example, when the target mode is displayed immediately after being displayed, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being displayed). Accordingly, by referring to the set change scenario, the display mode of each target mode can be appropriately variably displayed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 669(b), the chance mode selection table 222aag includes a normal data table to be referred to when winning the chance advance notice effect lottery, and an execution condition for forcibly executing the chance notice effect effect. and a compulsory data table to be referred to when is established, and different mode change scenarios are defined in correspondence with the success/failure determination result and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.
As shown in FIG. 669(b), the stage level "LV4" is a stage level determined only when a jackpot is won, and is configured to be difficult to be selected with respect to other stage levels. By constructing in this way, when the chance notice performance of the stage level 'LV4' is executed, the player is made to know that the big win is won before the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed. be able to.

Further, during the special symbol variation period, among the target modes (ch1 to ch3) of the chance notice effect executed in chronological order, the target mode (comment display mode ch1) executed first is executed later. The target mode (character display mode ch3) is configured so that the step level "LV4" is more likely to be determined. By constructing in this way, immediately after the execution of the special symbol variation, the stage level ``LV4'' chance notice performance is executed, and a situation occurs in which the player is not interested in the variation performance being executed. can be suppressed.
Next, the contents of the forced data table included in the chance mode selection table 222aag will be described. If the result of the success/failure determination is “win”, the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg is “0 to 198”, that is, “special change scenario 1” is defined as the mode change scenario for the entire range. ing. Further, in the range of "0 to 99" in which the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 99", the "special change scenario 2" is defined as the mode change scenario, and "100 to In the range of "159", "special change scenario 3" is defined as a mode change scenario, and in the range of "160 to 198", "special change scenario 4" is defined as a mode change scenario.
Here, when "special change scenario 1" is set, that is, when the special symbol lottery in which the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches 50 is won, it is stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag. A change scenario is determined that defines a high-level target aspect that is the same as the previous missing high-level target aspect.
In other words, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the chance notice effect is forcibly executed, the target used for the chance notice effect when the success judgment result is out despite the high level ("LV3") Aspects are forced to run. By constructing in this way, the higher the stage level of the chance notice performance executed by the pachinko machine 10, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

As information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag that is referred to when "special change scenario 1" is set, the previously used high-level target mode wins the chance notice effect lottery and is executed. It is preferable to refer to what is executed in the forcibly executed chance forewarning effect, rather than the one that is just one. In other words, as described above, when the player wins the lottery for the chance advance notice effect, the stage level of each target mode is determined by referring to the above-mentioned normal data table. is defined such that the higher the stage level, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.
However, in the case of forcibly executing the chance notice effect, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a high stage level is forcibly determined. It becomes easy to lose the balance between the level and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. Therefore, when the "special change scenario 1" is set, the pachinko machine 10 can be executed by adopting the target mode executed in the last time forcibly executed chance notice effect. The higher the stage level of the chance notice performance, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.
When "special change scenario 2" is set, one of "change scenario 8" to "change scenario 11" including a high level ("LV3") is determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, even when the chance notice effect is forcibly executed, the chance notice effect having the same content as the change scenario determined when winning the chance notice effect lottery can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opportunity to execute the chance announcement effect.
When the "special change scenario 3" is set, the step level of the target mode different from the last-time high-level target mode stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is defined as high level (LV3). A change scenario is determined. By configuring in this way, the loss chance notice effect is executed by forcibly increasing the stage level only for the same target mode, and the balance between the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning the jackpot is greatly disturbed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an accidental situation.

When "special change scenario 4" is set, the stage level of the same target mode as the previous high-level target mode stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is defined as high level (LV3). A change scenario is determined. By configuring in this way, the winning chance notice performance forcing only the same target mode to a high stage level is frequently executed, and the balance between the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning the jackpot is large. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a collapse situation.
In the twenty-third control example, when "special change scenarios 1, 3, and 4" are set, the information used for the previous chance notice effect stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is referred to. However, without being limited to this, only the high-level object mode used for the previous chance notice effect stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is referred to, and individual may be configured to determine the step level for the target aspect of
In addition, the chance mode information storage area 223aag is made to store the information of the chance forewarning performance of a plurality of times in the past, and the performance mode can be determined based on the information regarding the chance forefrontiy performance executed two or more times before, not the last time. Alternatively, game information related to the set game state and effect mode may be associated and stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag, and the same game state and effect mode at the time when the special change scenario is determined may be stored. It may be configured such that the mode of performance can be determined based on information relating to the chance forewarning performance performed in the past under the conditions. By configuring in this way, even if the degree of expectation of the chance notice effect and the type of the target mode are changed according to the game state and the effect mode, it is possible to forcibly correspond to the game state and the effect mode. can be made easier to execute the chance notice effect.
Furthermore, the history information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag may be configured to be erasable on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed (one hour has elapsed) or the standby screen is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the chance notice effect from being forcibly executed in the effect mode influenced by the game histories of different players. Also, in this case, when the "special change scenario" is determined, the normal data table may be referenced to determine the mode of presentation.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, when the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value and the chance notice effect is forcibly executed, the forced data table is referred to. Without limitation, each time a chance notice effect lottery is won, one of a plurality of chance mode selection tables 222aag defining different contents is determined, and the determined type of chance mode selection table 222aag is referred to, A data table (ordinary data table) for determining a performance mode by lottery and a specific performance mode forcibly are determined for a plurality of chance mode selection tables 222aag. The ratio of the data table (forced data table) to be used may be set differently.
By constructing in this way, when the chance notice performance is executed a predetermined number of times without using the structure of the performance execution counter 223aah, one of the performance modes of the chance notice performance is determined by referring to the forced data table. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a period in which the chance advance notice effect is not executed in the effect mode with a high stage level continues for a long time.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the technical idea of periodically executing the chance forewarning performance of the performance mode of the high stage level is used, but without being limited to this, the chance forewarning performance of the performance mode of the low stage level is used. may be applied to the technical concept of periodically executing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of times the chance notice effect of the effect mode with the lower stage level is executed, and as a result, the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning the jackpot are increased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balance is greatly collapsed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 664, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example will be described. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example has a non-decreasing period of Medium flag 223aaa, non-decrease period counter 223aab, non-decrease period set flag 223aac, remaining HP storage area 223aad, long-press flag 223aae, long-press counter 223aaf, long-press scenario storage area 223i are added. The difference is that a chance mode information storage area 223aag and an effect execution counter 223aah are added in order to manage information for executing the chance prediction effect. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The non-decrease period flag 223aaa is a flag for indicating that the non-decrease period is set during the operation valid period in the battle effect, and is set to ON when the non-decrease period is set. While the non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to ON, even if the long-pressing operation is continuously performed, the operation period is invalidated. That is, even during the operation valid period, the HP value of the enemy character 880a will not be subtracted based on the long press operation while the non-decrease period is set.
The non-decrease period is configured to end when any of the termination conditions (elapse of the predetermined period, winning the release lottery, discontinuation of the long-pressing operation) is satisfied, and the non-decrease period ends when the non-decrease period ends. During the decreasing period, the flag 223aaa is set off.
The non-decrease period counter 223aab is a counter for measuring the duration of the non-decrease period, and is set to "1" as the counter value when the non-decrease period is set. Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "1" or more, the effect update process ( Every time F2171 in FIG. 678) is executed, "1" is added to the counter value (see F4713 in FIG. 679).
The value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is referred to when determining whether or not the duration of the non-decrease period has reached the upper limit (3 seconds). Further, it is referred to when determining the decrease value of the HP value in the additional decrease effect executed when the non-decrease period ends (cancels).

The non-decrease period set flag 223aac is a flag for indicating that a non-decrease period has already been set in one battle effect, and is turned on when the set non-decrease period ends (cancels). is set to Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not the player performs a long-pressing operation during the operation valid period in the battle presentation and executes the entry lottery during the non-decrease period.
In the twenty-third control example, the non-decrease period is not set twice or more in one battle effect. In other words, when determining whether or not to execute the entry lottery for the non-decrease period, it is determined whether the non-decrease period set flag 223aac is set to ON, and if it is determined to be ON. It is configured so that rush lottery is not executed (process of F4707: No in FIG. 679).
By configuring in this way, the non-decrease period is set multiple times in one battle effect, and the chances of decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the operation means (the effect button 22) are reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the player's desire to operate the operation means. In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the non-decrease period is set so that the non-decrease period can be canceled by the player ending the long-pressing operation (releasing the effect button 22). In this case, a game aiming to reduce the HP value of the enemy based on the operation of the operating means by causing the player to end the long-pressing operation to end (cancel) the non-decrease period early, or a long-pressing operation. It is possible to select a game that aims to execute an additional reduction effect by continuing the non-decrease period until another end condition (winning the cancellation lottery, elapse of the upper limit period) is established by continuing the push operation. It becomes possible.
By configuring in this way, in the operation performance in which the long press operation is effective (during the operation valid period of the battle performance), the player is asked to continue the long press operation or temporarily interrupt and perform the long press operation again. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the user to select either. In addition, from the viewpoint of varying the presentation mode (the HP value of the enemy character 880a) based on the operation of the operation means, interrupting the long-pressing operation makes it easier to end the non-decrease period early. It is a game that is advantageous to

In the 23rd control example, the upper limit of the number of times the non-decrease period is set in one battle effect is set to once, but the non-decrease period can be set two or more times without being limited to this. can be In this case, it is preferable to set different entry conditions and cancellation conditions for the first non-decrease period and the second non-decrease period. It is preferable that the second non-decrease period is set more easily in the case of a production result indicating a failure than in the case of a disadvantageous production result (a production result indicating a failure). By configuring in this way, the player expects that the period during which the HP value of the enemy character 880a does not decrease is set multiple times during the effective operation period of the battle effect. That is, conventionally, in the operation effect that makes the player expect that the effect mode (HP value) will be more varied (decreased) by operating the operation means, the effect mode is changed based on the operation to the operation means. It is possible to provide novel playability that makes the player expect that (HP value) will not decrease.
The remaining HP storage area 223aad is a storage area for storing the HP value of the enemy character 880a in the battle production. type) is stored to indicate the HP value (MAX value) (see F4207 in FIG. 671). Furthermore, information for indicating the final result of the executed battle presentation, that is, the final HP value of the enemy character that can be decreased is stored (see F4210 in FIG. 671). In addition, information about the HP value decrease value determined based on the player's operation of the operation means (continuous hit operation, long press operation), and information about the HP value decrease value determined by the additional decrease effect. is also stored.
By reading each information stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad, it is possible to calculate the current remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a and the HP difference value (the difference value between the remaining HP value and the final HP value). .
The long-pressing flag 223aae is a flag for indicating that a long-pressing operation is being performed, and is information output when the player operates the operation means (effect button 22) (when the effect button 22 is pressed). It is set to ON when it is determined that a long-pressing operation is being performed based on an output signal or the like output by a detecting means capable of detecting that the button has been pressed. It should be noted that whether the player's operation on the effect button 22 is a pressing operation or a long pressing operation is determined based on the length of the period during which the effect button 22 is continuously pressed. Since the detailed contents have been explained in the control example described above, they are omitted. It should be noted that, even with methods other than those described in the control examples described above, a well-known and commonly used technique may be used to make it possible to distinguish between different operation methods.

The long-press counter 223aaf is a counter for measuring the duration of the long-press operation. "1" is set. Then, when the value of the long press counter 223aaf is "1" or more, the effect update process (Fig. 678), "1" is added to the counter value (see F4703 in FIG. 679).
The value of this long-press counter 223aaf is used to update the production scenario for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a during the long-press operation. Then, it is cleared to 0 when the valid operation period expires.
In the twenty-third control example, even when the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON (a state in which the long-pressing operation continues), the long-pressing counter 223aaf is not updated (F4701 in FIG. 679: Yes). Further, even if the long-pressing operation is interrupted once, the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf is not cleared until the operation valid period ends.
Therefore, even if the player erroneously releases his/her hand during the long-pressing operation, by long-pressing the performance button 22 again, the performance executed based on the update of the performance scenario is continued. becomes possible. In this case, it is necessary to perform the long-press determination again for the operation of the effect button 22, so the effect scenario update period for the entire period during which the effect button 22 is pressed (the long-press operation is determined) ) is slightly shorter than when the long-pressing operation is never interrupted, but if the player accidentally releases the hand during the long-pressing operation, the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf becomes 0. It is possible to make it easier to update the production scenario more reliably than the specification that is cleared immediately.

The long press scenario storage area 223aai is a storage area for storing an effect scenario determined when it is determined that the operation method of the operation means by the player during the effective operation period of the battle effect is a long press operation. be. While the long-pressing operation is being performed, the effect mode (HP value of the enemy character 880a) is variably displayed based on the effect scenario stored in the long-pressing scenario storage area 223aai.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the effect mode (HP value) during the long-pressing operation is configured to vary based on the elapsed time (the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf) during the execution of the long-pressing operation. However, without being limited to this, another method may be used to vary the effect mode (HP value) during the long-pressing operation.
For example, the number of times the effect button 22 is pseudo-pressed (pseudo-press count) is determined according to the length of the period during which the long-press operation is being performed, and the long-press operation is performed based on the pseudo-press count. It may also be configured to determine the variable mode of the performance mode (HP value) in .
The chance mode information storage area 223aag is for storing information (chance mode information) indicating the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance preview effect determined when the chance preview effect is executed as the effect mode of the variable effect. This is a storage area for storing chance mode information corresponding to variable performance. This chance mode is determined by the chance-up effect determination process (see F3153 in FIG. 675) executed in the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect (normal state effect mode determination process (see F3053 in FIG. 673)), It is stored in the chance mode selection table 222aag.

The chance mode information stored in the chance mode selection table 222aag is read during execution of the variable effect, and when the target mode variable timing arrives, a display command for varying the display mode of the target mode is set. be done. The chance mode information storage area 223aag has a past information area capable of storing a plurality (three pieces) of chance mode information set in the past. , the chance mode information corresponding to the variable performance performed in the past can also be stored for a predetermined period.
In the twenty-third control example, if the specific condition is satisfied when determining the chance mode, the chance mode can be determined by referring to the past information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag. is doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the same chance mode is continuously determined, and the chance notice effect with little variation is executed, and the effect of the effect is lowered.
The effect execution counter 223aah is a counter that is referred to when determining whether or not an execution condition for forcibly executing the chance notice effect is satisfied. 1”. Further, update processing is executed to add or subtract the counter value according to the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, and when the counter value reaches "50", the chance notice effect is forcibly executed. is determined to be satisfied. Then, it is cleared to "0" when the effect mode for forcibly executing the chance notice effect is determined.
<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 670 to 679, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example are different from those of the nineteenth control example described above. Mainly explain. It should be noted that the description of the same processing contents as those of the nineteenth control example described above will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 670, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (F2959) will be described. FIG. 670 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (F2959). As shown in FIG. 670, in the variable effect setting process (F2959), the process contents (F3051 to F3053) is different, and the rest is the same.
When the variable effect setting process (F2959) is executed, first, the same F3001 to F3011 processes as the variable effect setting process (see F2909 in FIG. 580) are executed. Then, in the process of F3011, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (F3011: Yes), time saving state production mode determination processing for determining the production mode of the variable production executed during the time saving state is executed (F3051), after that, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (F3019), and this process is terminated. In addition, the detailed content of the time saving state production mode determination process (F3051) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of F3011, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (F3011: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (F3015), and if it is determined to be a variable probability state (F3015: Yes), to execute the variable probability state effect mode determination process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed during the variable probability state (F3052), then, to execute the process of F3019 described above, this process exit. The detailed contents of the variable probability state effect mode determination process (F3052) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Also, in the process of F3015, if it is determined that it is not in the probability variable state (F3015: No), the current gaming state is not the time saving state and is not in the probability variable state, that is, when the normal state is set Therefore, the normal state effect mode determination process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed during the normal state is executed (F3053), then the above-described F3019 process is executed, and this process ends. . Details of the normal state effect mode determination process (F3053) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the twenty-third control example, the game states that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 are the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). probability state), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set. Then, in a state in which a new special symbol lottery can be executed, one of the above-described three types of game states is always set. Therefore, in the variation performance setting process (F2959) executed when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command indicating the execution of the special symbol lottery, it is determined that the current game state is neither the time saving state nor the probability variation state. If (F3015: No), the normal state is set, so the normal state effect mode determination process (F3053) is executed.
It should be noted that, in place of the processing content executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example, when it is determined that the current game state is neither the time saving state nor the variable probability state (F3015: No), the current game state is It may be configured to execute a process for determining whether it is in the normal state, and to execute the normal state effect mode determination process (F3053) when it is determined that it is in the normal state. In this case, when it is determined that the current game state is neither the time-saving state, the variable probability state, nor the normal state, an error command indicating that the current game state cannot be normally determined is set. , When the error command is set, without setting the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol change, the display mode indicating that the special symbol variation is being executed and the effect mode of the normal variation effect and a display mode indicating that the setting has not been made.
By configuring in this way, when the current game state cannot be determined normally, the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the game state different from the set game state is set, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the person.
Next, with reference to FIG. 671, in the fluctuation production setting process (F2959), processing contents of the time saving state production mode determination processing (F3051) executed when setting the fluctuation production when the time saving state is set explain about Figure 671 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production feature decision processing (F3051).

This 23rd control example is different from the 19th control example described above in that the battle production reach (see FIGS. 652 to 654) is configured to be executable during the time saving state, and is shown in FIG. As you can see, in the time saving state production mode determination process (F3051), the process of determining the production mode of the battle production reach is executed.
Specifically, when the time saving state production mode determination processing (F3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223vp is 1 (F4201), and the value of the time saving counter 223vp is 1. When it is determined that (F4201: Yes), the performance mode of the time-saving end suggestion performance that the performance result of the variable performance is the end of the chance mode is determined (F4202), and this processing is terminated.
Here, in the 23rd control example, as in the 19th control example described above, while the time saving state is set, the "chance mode" is set as a mode effect for suggesting the set gaming state. It is configured so that This "chance mode" is configured to be set even in part when the variable probability state is set. Then, in the variable performance corresponding to the last special symbol variation (time saving final variation) executed in the time saving state (variation performance corresponding to the 100th special symbol variation after the time saving state is set), the time saving state ends , the time-saving end suggesting effect of the effect mode indicating that the "chance mode" ends is executed. On the other hand, when "chance mode" is set as the probability variation state, the variation effect corresponding to the 100th special symbol variation after the probability variation state is set, that is, even if the time saving state is set. For example, as a variation performance corresponding to the final variation of the time reduction, a time reduction end suggesting performance of a performance mode indicating that the ``chance mode'' is promoted to the ``super chance mode'' is executed.
Specifically, in the early stage of the time-saving end suggestive effect, a guidance mode (characters of "chance mode end") to guide the player that the "chance mode" will end due to the end of the variable effect being executed. Suggests that either a mode effect corresponding to the normal state (normal mode) or a mode effect corresponding to the variable probability state (super chance mode) is set as the mode effect after the "chance mode" ends. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a suggestive mode (characters of "Throw a coin, and if heads come up, enter the super chance mode! If tails come out, it's a disappointing normal mode" and an animation of throwing a coin). to be displayed.

After that, if the time saving state is set, the production mode determined in F4202 of the time saving state production mode determination process (see F3051 in FIG. 671) is performed, and the animation in which the coin tossed is turned upside down is executed. A variable effect is executed to indicate that the "chance mode" is shifted to the "normal mode". On the other hand, when the variable probability state is set, an animation in which the coin tossed turns to face is executed by the production mode determined in F4302 of the variable probability state production mode determination process (see F3052 in FIG. 672), which will be described later. , a variable effect indicating that the "chance mode" is shifted to the "super chance mode" is executed.
By configuring in this way, when the time saving final variation or the special symbol variation corresponding to the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving end suggestion production can be started in the same production mode, so the "chance mode , even if the final variation of the special symbols is started, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the currently set game state is the time saving state or the variable probability state. Note that the effect executed during the "chance mode" in the twenty-third control example can also be said to be an effect suggesting a game state.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the time-saving end suggestion effect is configured to be executed using the period in which the final variation of the special symbol in the "chance mode" is executed, but it is not limited to this, at least It may be configured to execute the time-saving end suggesting effect using a plurality of special symbol variation periods including the final variation of the special symbol. In this case, for example, it is preferable that the time-saving end suggesting performance is executed using the three remaining fluctuation periods of the special symbol fluctuation in the "chance mode". That is, the number of special symbol variations smaller than the upper limit number of reserved storage of the second special symbol in which the special symbol variation is mainly executed during the ``chance mode'' is defined as the performance period in which the time-saving end suggesting performance is performed, and the time-saving is performed. It is determined that the number of retained memories of the acquired second special symbols is greater than the number of special symbol variations required until the end of the ``chance mode'' at the time when the second special symbol variation capable of starting the end suggesting performance is executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure so as to execute a time-saving end suggestion effect. Note that this time saving end suggesting effect is also another form of the time saving extension suggesting mode effect for suggesting that the second time saving state in the fifty-second control example described later is set.
By configuring in this way, when it is confirmed that the second special symbol variation is continuously executed a plurality of times from the start of the time saving end suggesting effect to the end of the "chance mode" Since the time-saving end suggesting production can be configured to be executable, a situation occurs in which the special symbol variation is not executed while the time-saving end suggesting production is being executed, and the time-saving end suggesting production is delayed. can be suppressed.

In addition, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation at which the time-saving end suggestion production starts and the special symbol variation variation pattern (variation time) and, because it is possible to determine the performance period of the time-saving end suggestion performance, the timing at which the "chance mode" ends, that is, the special symbol variation that will end the "chance mode" is stopped and displayed. It is possible to easily inform the player of the performance result of the time-saving end suggesting performance corresponding to the timing to do so.
In addition, a special symbol variation that includes at least a special symbol variation that ends the "chance mode" (for example, a special symbol variation that has a remaining number of 0 to 3 times until the special symbol variation that ends the chance mode is executed) ), when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot, the same variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set, so that the winning included in the second special symbol reservation already acquired. The performance period of the time-saving end suggesting performance may be determined without prefetching the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation to be executed later based on the information.
In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time-saving end suggestion production is executed is a big hit, the result of the time-saving end suggestion production will be changed from "chance mode" to "jackpot game". A special performance mode indicating the shift to the player can be determined, and when the special performance mode is determined, the player determines whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state. It may be constructed so as to make it difficult for the player to grasp it easily, or even when the variable probability state is set, it may be constructed so as to be able to decide the performance mode that makes the player think that he or she has won a jackpot during the time-saving state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the players think that they have won a jackpot in the time-saving state in which the low-probability state of the special symbol is set.
Returning to FIG. 671, the description continues. In the process of F4201, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vp is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vp is greater than 1 (F4201: No), based on the acquired variation pattern By referring to the variation pattern selection table 222va, the variation effect type is determined (F4203). It should be noted that, based on the specific processing content executed in F4203, that is, the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the processing content for determining the type of variable effect (eg, reach type, etc.) is the same as the control examples described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable effect type determined in the process of F4203 is the battle effect reach (F4204), and when it is determined that the variable effect type is not the battle effect reach (F4204: No), the process of F4203 A performance mode corresponding to the determined variable performance type is determined (F4205), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of F4204, when it is determined that the variable production type is the battle production reach (F4204: Yes), the production mode of the battle production is determined by lottery (F4206). In the process of F4206, the type of the ally character 801a, the type of the enemy character 880a, and the presence or absence of the first part effect (see FIG. 652(b)) in the battle effect are decided by lottery.
Here, the details of the presentation mode determined by the process of F4206 will be described. In this 23rd control example, as the performance mode of the battle performance reach, it is possible to determine "winning battle performance reach" and "losing battle performance reach" based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. When the "winning battle production reach" is determined, the production result (victory production) in which the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a (see FIG. 652) becomes "0" is executed, and the "losing battle production" is executed. When "Reach" is determined, a performance result (defeat performance) in which the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a does not become "0" is executed.
Further, various display modes displayed during the period from the execution of the battle production ready-to-win until the display of the production result can be changed and determined according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. there is Specifically, in the "winning battle presentation reach", it is easier to select a hero-like character as the ally character 801a than in the "losing battle presentation reach", and the first part presentation is easier to execute, and , the enemy character 880a with a small HP value is easily selected. By configuring in this way, when the battle production ready-to-win is executed, by grasping the production contents of the battle production ready-to-win to be executed, the game determines whether the current production result is the victory production or the defeat production. Since it is possible to make the player predict, in the performance period in which the battle performance is executed, the battle performance reach is expected to be displayed in a display mode that is easily selected in the win battle performance reach in which the victory performance is executed. can be watched.

In addition, in this battle production ready-to-win, various display modes determined according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery are not displayed at the same time, but are displayed at different display timings. Specifically, after the start of the battle effect reach, the enemy character 880a is displayed after the ally character 801a is displayed first. After that, the first part effect is executed. In this way, the display mode in which the selection ratio of the mode displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery is changed is displayed at different timings. During this period, it is possible to make it easier to make people interested in the content of the battle production reach.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, for each of the display modes that can display different modes according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, the winning battle production reach is the losing battle production reach. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured so that the selection ratio of the combination of various display modes is changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery, producing a winning battle. As a combination of various display modes that are more likely to be selected in the case of ready-to-win than in the case of off-battle production ready-to-win, as the type of display mode (ally character 801a) displayed first, as a single display mode, It is preferable to define a combination including the types of display modes that are more likely to be selected in the case of the winning battle presentation reach than in the case of the winning battle presentation reach. By configuring in this way, even if the type of the friendly character 801a that is displayed first after the start of the battle effect ready-to-win battle is any type, it is possible to continue to expect the win battle effect ready-to-win battle. can be made
Next, specific contents of various display modes determined by the process of F4206 will be described. First, the type of the ally character 801a (see FIG. 652) will be described. In the battle production ready-to-win, either a first ally character imitating a hero (see FIG. 652(a)) or a second ally character imitating a rabbit (not shown) is displayed as the ally character 801a. It is structured in such a manner that the first ally character is more likely to be selected than the second ally character as the effect mode of the winning battle effect reach. On the other hand, it is configured such that the second ally character is more likely to be selected than the first ally character as the production mode of the out-of-battle production reach. Therefore, when the battle effect reach is started, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is first displayed as the type of the ally character 801a.
Here, when the first ally character imitating a hero is selected as the type of the ally character 801a, the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced more than the second ally character imitating a rabbit with one attack. is configured to be possible. In other words, the first ally character, which is likely to be selected in the hit battle production reach, is configured to be more likely to execute an attack that greatly reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a. By configuring in this way, the less the HP gauge 890 (remaining HP value 890a) of the enemy character 880a in the battle production reach, the higher the possibility of the winning battle production reach. It is possible to make it easier for the player who is playing to recognize that the type of the selected ally character 801a is advantageous to the player (suggesting that the player has a winning battle effect reach).

In the twenty-third control example, both the first ally character and the second ally character are configured to be selected regardless of the type of battle effect reach (hitting battle effect reach, losing battle effect reach). The proportions are configured to be different, but in addition, for example, it is configured to be selectable, for example, a third ally character from which only winning battle production reach can be selected, and a fourth ally character from which only losing battle production reach can be selected. can be By configuring in this way, since it is possible for the player to grasp the production result (victory production, defeat production) immediately after the battle production ready-to-reach is started, a winning battle is performed every time the battle production ready-to-reach is executed. It is possible to suppress excessive expectation of the production reach.
In addition, since the timing at which the player grasps the effect result of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed can be varied according to the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed, the effect result of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed can be quickly displayed. It is possible to make the player who wants to grasp the details of the effect of the battle effect reach to be executed more closely.
Next, the types of the enemy character 880a (see FIG. 652(a)) will be described. In the battle production reach, the enemy characters 880a are the enemy character A with the lowest HP value (see FIG. 652(a)), the enemy character B with the higher HP value than the enemy character A (not shown), and the highest HP value. It is constructed so that one of the enemy characters C (not shown) is displayed, and the enemy character A is more likely to be selected in the case of winning battle production reach than in the case of losing battle production reach. , the enemy character C is configured to be difficult to be selected.
Next, the display mode of the HP gauge 890 corresponding to the type of the displayed enemy character 880a will be described. In the battle effect reach executed in the twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. 652(a), the HP value " It is configured to display an HP gauge 890 with only indicators indicating "0" and the HP value "MAX". Even if an enemy character 880a with a different HP value is displayed, the HP gauge 890 with the same length is displayed, and if the HP value does not decrease (“MAX” state), the remaining HP value The HP gauge 890 is configured so that the display mode (see FIG. 652(a)) that 890a occupies the entirety of the HP gauge 890 is displayed.

That is, for example, when the HP value of enemy character A is "50" and the HP value of enemy character C is "150", the same type of enemy character 880a is displayed. The HP gauge 890 is displayed with a length of . Then, when the friendly character 801a attacks and inflicts "25" damage to the enemy character 880a, the remaining HP value becomes "25 (50-25)" when the enemy character A is selected. An effect is executed in which the remaining HP value 890a decreases to the position of 1/2 of the HP gauge 890, and when the enemy character C is selected, the remaining HP value becomes “125 (150-25)”. An effect in which the remaining HP value 890a decreases only up to the 5/6 position of the HP gauge 890 is executed.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is experiencing the battle production reach for the first time to notice that the HP value set differs depending on the type of the enemy character 880a, and to make it difficult for the player to notice that the HP value is different depending on the type of the enemy character 880a. Since the degree of decrease in the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 can be varied when the character attacks, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. In addition, since the player who has experienced the battle effect reach many times can grasp the HP value at the time when the type of the enemy character 880a is displayed, the battle effect reach of this time is a hit battle effect. It is possible to quickly predict whether or not there is a high possibility of reach.
Next, the content of the determination regarding the first part effect (see FIG. 652(b)) will be described. In the process of F4206, in addition to the display mode types of the friend character 801a and the enemy character 880a described above, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the first part effect. Specifically, whether or not to execute the first part effect is determined based on the type of the friend character 801a determined by lottery, the type of the enemy character 880a, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. For example, in the production mode of hit battle production reach, the friendly character 801a is the second friendly character (a type that makes it difficult to decrease the remaining HP value 890a of the enemy character 880a), and the enemy character 880a is the enemy character C (HP value is selected, that is, when the combination makes it more difficult than other combinations to set the HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" during the battle production reach, the first part It is configured to determine execution of production.
By configuring in this way, even if the type of the friendly character 801a and the type of the enemy character 880a are individually selected, it is possible to execute the battle production reach without making the player feel uncomfortable. becomes.

More specifically, when the second ally character is selected, an effect that can reduce the HP value by up to 100 is executed during the battle effect, and the first ally character is selected. In this case, an effect capable of reducing the HP value by 150 at maximum is executed during the battle effect. That is, when the first ally character is selected, any type (enemy character A (HP value "50") to enemy character C (HP value "150")) is selected as the type of the enemy character 880a. Even in this case, the HP value of the enemy character 880a can be reduced to "0", and when the second ally character is selected, the type of the enemy character 880a is enemy character A or enemy character B. When selected, the HP value of the enemy character 880a can be reduced to "0", and when the enemy character C is selected, the HP value can be reduced to "0" by attacking only the second ally character. It is configured so that it cannot (is difficult) to be reduced to
Then, the type of the friendly character 801a and the type of the enemy character 880a are determined, and after determining the HP value to be reduced by the attack of the friendly character 801a (determining the attack mode), the HP value after reduction (remaining HP value ), determines whether the calculated remaining HP value indicates the production result (hit or miss), and indicates the production result (remaining HP value “0” if hit battle production reach, lose If it is a battle production reach, the remaining HP value is other than “0”), the first part production is not executed, and the production result is not shown (although it is a winning battle production reach, it is calculated. If the calculated remaining HP value is other than "0"), execution of the first part effect is determined to reduce the HP value of the enemy character 880a so that the calculated remaining HP value becomes "0". is doing.
Also, for example, if the calculated remaining HP value is "0" in spite of the outlier battle effect reach, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is increased or reduced by the recovery effect or the allied character 801a. The remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is configured not to become "0" by executing the correction effect of reducing the HP value when the losing battle effect reach is executed.
By configuring in this way, the type of the friendly character 801a and the type of the enemy character 880a can be randomly determined, and the HP value of the enemy character 880a to be decreased by the attack of the friendly character 801a is determined. Even when a situation occurs that does not correspond to the performance result of the battle performance ready-to-win which is executed by determining based on the types of various characters, the performance result can be notified without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

Here, if the configuration is such that the HP value of the enemy character 880a to be reduced by the attack of the allied character 801a is determined based on the performance result of the battle production reach, the battle production reach is determined only by the attack production executed by the allied character 801a. Since it is possible to reliably notify the effect result of , it is not necessary to execute the first part effect, the recovery effect, and the correction effect, and the processing for determining the effect mode can be reduced. , the HP value to be reduced by the attack of the allied character 801a will differ according to the effect result of the battle production reach. It becomes difficult for the player to predict the HP value to be decreased by grasping the attack mode. As a result, the player loses interest in the performance mode (attack mode) of the battle performance ready-to-win, and the performance effect is reduced.
On the other hand, in the twenty-third control example, when the friendly character 801a attacks, only the HP value corresponding to the selected attack mode is decreased, and the HP value after the decrease (remaining HP value) , and the remaining HP value indicating the result of the effect diverges, another effect (first part effect, recovery effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the remaining HP value 890a after the decrease before the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 decreases based on the effect content (attack mode) of the battle effect reach. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who tries to perceive the effect result of the battle effect reach as soon as possible to pay attention to the effect contents of the battle effect reach which is being executed.
As described above, in the twenty-third control example, as the battle effect reach, the friend character 801a and the enemy character Depending on the type of the character 880a, the player can predict whether the combination will easily bring the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0". By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of combination the battle production reach progresses.
In the twenty-third control example, as described above, depending on the type (brave or rabbit) of the selected friendly character 801a, the maximum HP value of the enemy character 880a that can be decreased by the attack of the friendly character 801a is By varying the value and varying the upper limit (MAX value) of the HP value according to the type of the selected enemy character 880a (enemy character A to enemy character C), the enemy character is displayed based on the type of each character. It is configured so that the player can predict whether or not the remaining HP value of 880a is likely to be set to "0", but it is not limited to this, and the remaining HP value is reduced by the attack of the ally character 801a. It is possible to change the minimum HP value of the enemy character 880a, or to change the number of attacks (the number of times the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced) during one battle effect. Alternatively, the degree of decrease in the HP value (defense power) may differ depending on the type of enemy character 880a (enemy character A to enemy character C). Even in this configuration, the types of the friendly character 801a and the enemy character 880a that are displayed before the actual execution of the effect of decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a are displayed as the battle effect reach. , the player can predict whether or not the combination will easily bring the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0". By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of combination the battle production reach progresses.

In addition, as the production mode of the battle production reach, each determined character type is a type that is advantageous to the player (a winning battle production reach is a type that is more likely to be selected than a losing battle production reach). In the case where the combination of each character type determined is a combination that is advantageous to the player (a winning battle production reach is a combination that is more likely to be selected than a losing battle production reach), an advantageous production mode is determined. It is preferable to display characters "chance up" on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guidance mode for indicating that. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect mode of the current battle effect ready-to-win is the effect mode that is advantageous to the player.
The timing of displaying the guidance mode may be the same timing as the presentation mode advantageous to the player is displayed, or the guidance mode may be displayed after the presentation mode advantageous to the player is displayed. It may be configured to display. In this case, the player who can grasp that the presentation mode is advantageous only by confirming the displayed presentation mode, and the player who understands that the presentation mode is advantageous due to the guidance mode being displayed. It is possible to make the player realize that the effect executed this time is an advantageous effect to the player at an earlier stage.
On the other hand, it may be configured such that the characters "chance up", which is a guidance mode for indicating that an advantageous mode of presentation has been determined, are displayed before the corresponding mode of presentation is displayed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to display an advantageous effect mode in a state in which the player is made aware in advance that an advantageous effect mode will be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of effect mode is displayed as an advantageous effect mode. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be capable of determining a plurality of performance modes with different degrees of advantage, the player is expected to display a performance mode with a higher degree of advantage, and the player is expected to watch the progressing performance. can be done.
Returning to FIG. 671, the description continues. The HP value (MAX value) corresponding to the determined type of the enemy character 880a among the various effects determined in the process of F4206 is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad (F4207). In other words, when "enemy character A" is determined as the type of the enemy character 880a in the processing of F4206, information corresponding to the HP value "50" is determined as "enemy character B" in the remaining HP storage area 223aad. In this case, information corresponding to the HP value "100" is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad, and information corresponding to the HP value "150" is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad when "enemy character C" is determined. do.

Next, in order to determine the final HP value in the current battle effect, first, it is determined whether the current variation effect is a hit change effect (F4208), and if it is determined to be a hit change effect (F4208: Yes ), "0" is determined as the final HP value (F4211), and the determined final HP value is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad (F4210).
On the other hand, in the processing of F4208, if it is determined that the current variation performance is not a hit variation performance (is a loss variation performance) (F4208: No), the final HP value is determined by referring to the final HP selection table 222aad when losing. It is determined (F4209), and the process moves to F4210. As described above, in the twenty-third control example, the upper limit (MAX value) and lower limit (final HP value) of the HP value of the enemy character 880a are determined by different lotteries when determining the effect mode of the battle effect. configured to decide. By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the upper limit (MAX value) and lower limit (final HP value) of the HP value of the enemy character 880a are determined by one lottery, each lottery result can be combined. In the case where the same number of performance patterns can be executed, the amount of data of the performance patterns to be stored in advance can be reduced by the amount that the performance patterns can be generated.
In addition, in the battle effect in the twenty-third control example, the effect mode can be determined based on the differential HP value (the difference between the remaining HP value and the final HP value). is selected, and even if the remaining HP is the same, if the final HP value is different, the differential HP value will also be different. can let Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the variations of effects that are executed when the conditions are the same in terms of appearance.
When the process of F4210 is completed, next, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is stored in the effect SW effective time storage area 223vp (F4212), and this process is ended. Here, the contents of the effect SW valid time storage area 223vp will be described. The effect SW effective time storage area 223vp contains setting information for indicating a period (start timing and end timing) for which an operation effective period is set for each effect type in which an operation effective period can be set, and an operation effective period. Preparation information indicating two seconds before the set period, the valid period gauge ga4 (see FIG. 653 (a)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the display production button Sw6 (FIG. 653 ( a) display information about the display mode of (see) can be stored.

Then, based on the preparation information stored in the effect SW effective time storage area 223vp, a preparation screen (see FIG. 653(a)) is displayed before the operation effective period is actually set. The display mode displayed on this preparation screen (see FIG. 653(a)) is set based on the display information stored in the effect SW valid time storage area 223vp.
Here, in the twenty-third control example, the length of the operation valid period set during the battle effect can be determined based on the effect result of the battle effect. It is configured such that a longer operation valid period is more likely to be set in the case of a performance result corresponding to winning (winning battle performance). By configuring in this way, the winning battle production in which the final HP value is set to “0” is longer than the outlier battle production in which the final HP value is set to a value larger than “0”. can be lengthened, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect of decreasing the HP value based on the operation to the operation means.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the length of the operation valid period actually set and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (valid period gauge ga4 (see FIG. 653(a)), , the display effect button Sw6 (see FIG. 653(a))) can be varied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from judging the effect result at an early stage based on the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .
Next, with reference to FIG. 672, in the variable production setting process (F2959), the processing contents of the probability variable state production mode determination processing (F3052) executed when setting the variable production when the probability variable state is set explain about FIG. 672 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable probability state effect mode determination processing (F3052).

In this 23rd control example, it is possible to set a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. This probability variable state is set to a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will win a jackpot than the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the time saving state. This game state is more advantageous to the player than other game states in terms of the degree of expectation for winning a big win when the symbol lottery is executed. In addition, since it becomes easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbols is set, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in terms of the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery. becomes. Therefore, in the twenty-third control example, the variable probability state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.
In this 23rd control example, when the jackpot is won in the state where the variable probability state is set, or when the special symbol lottery of a specific number (120 times) is executed, the variable probability state is configured to end. there is Then, when the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" that can suggest (notify) that the probability variable state is set as a mode effect for suggesting the set game state Production", or a "chance mode production" that can suggest (notify) that the time saving state or the variable probability state is set is executed.
Specifically, when it is notified that the probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game during the period from the start of the special symbol variation for winning the big win to the end of the big win game, that is, the probability change after the end of the big win game Effect for letting the player know that the state is set (variable probability promotion effect, stop display of the third symbol (for example, 777) corresponding to the big hit (variable probability big win) for which the variable probability state is set, etc.) is executed If so, a "super chance mode effect" is executed after the jackpot game ends.
On the other hand, during the period from the start of the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, an effect is executed to make the player understand that the game state set after the jackpot game is a probability variable state. First, in at least a part of the case where it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the game state set after the big win game is the variable probability state or the time saving state, the ``chance mode performance'' is executed after the big win game is over.

By configuring in this way, when it is notified in advance that the variable probability state is set, the player can easily understand that the currently set game state is the variable probability state, so that the player can feel at ease. A game can be played, and if it is not notified in advance that the probability variable state is set, an effect (time saving state or probability variable state) that makes it difficult to grasp whether the probability variable state is set is set), even if the time saving state is set, the game can be played while expecting that the variable probability state is set.
Here, in the twenty-third control example, 100 special symbol variations are defined as the maximum period during which the time saving state continues, and 120 special symbol variations are defined as the maximum period during which the probability variable state continues. Therefore, when the "chance mode production" that makes it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the probability variable state is set, the final period of the "chance mode production" (100th special symbol fluctuation period) , the time-saving end suggestion production is executed to guide the player that the “chance mode production” ends, and as the production result of the time-saving end suggestion production, the “super chance mode production” corresponding to the probability change state. An effect result indicating that the mode effect shifts (promotes) is executed.
That is, in the twenty-third control example, the timing of notifying the player that the variable probability state is set is determined by the type of mode effect set when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the variable probability state. configured to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game at various timings, so that the player expects that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game. It is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game.
In addition, in this 23rd control example, the timing of informing the player that the variable probability state is set is varied according to the type of mode effect set after the end of the jackpot game. Not limited to, for example, when the "chance mode effect" is executed in a state in which the probability variation state is set, the notification effect for notifying that the probability variation state is performed each time the special symbol lottery is executed It may be configured to execute a notification lottery that determines whether or not to execute a notification lottery, and to execute a notification effect that notifies that the probability variable state is set when the notification lottery is won. The above-described notification effect may be executed when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operable operation means (frame button 22, etc.). Even in this case, it is possible to establish, at various timings, execution conditions for executing a notification effect for notifying that the variable probability state is set.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the period in which the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation times (the number of lotteries) that can be executed during the probability variation state is 20 times or less, that is, 100 times of special symbol variation after the probability variation state is set The period after the (lottery) is executed (the second half of the probability variation period) and the period from the time the probability variation state is set until the 100th special symbol variation (lottery) is executed (the first half period of the probability variation), the special design. A notification mode for notifying the result of the lottery to the player is varied, and in the probability variable first half period, a variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is executed each time one special symbol lottery is executed, In the probability variation latter half period, the mode variation performance for showing the results of the special symbol lottery of a plurality of times is configured to be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.
That is, the first situation in which the production result of one variable production is determined based on the lottery result of one special symbol lottery, and the production result of one variable production is determined based on the lottery results of a plurality of special symbol lotteries. It is configured to be able to create a second situation where With this configuration, in the first situation, the number of executions of the variable performance and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery can be synchronized, so that the player can easily grasp the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. be able to. On the other hand, in the second situation, the special symbol lottery can be executed more than the number of executions of the variable performance, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. In addition, since it is possible to notify the result of the special symbol lottery a plurality of times by using the effect result of one variable effect, the number of times of informing the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is other than a big win (loss) can be reduced. , can be reduced compared to the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is notified each time the special symbol lottery is executed.
As shown in FIG. 672, in the variable probability state effect mode determination process (F3052), the final variation of the chance mode, which is a mode effect for making it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a time saving state or a variable probability state, is executed. In this case, that is, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223vq is 1 (F4301: Yes), the effect mode of the time saving end suggesting effect that the effect result of the variable effect is promoted to the super chance mode is determined (F4302). , F4311, the same processing as in the 19th control example is executed.
In the definite variable state effect mode determination process (F3052), in contrast to the process of determining the effect mode during the definite variable state in the nineteenth control example described above, different It differs in that mode production is executed.

In this 23rd control example, when the variable probability state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, then the special symbol lottery is executed 120 times, or special The variable probability state is continued until a big win is won before the symbol lottery is executed 120 times. Specifically, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is set to "120". Then, the value of the during probability variation counter 223vr is subtracted by 1 based on the fact that the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the probability variation counter 223vr is "1" or more. Thus, by reading the value of the variable probability counter 223vr, it is possible to determine the remaining period of the variable probability state (remaining probability variable number of times).
Then, in the present twenty-third control example, when the number of remaining probability variations falls below 20 times, a mode effect is executed in which the player is notified of the results of the special symbol lottery for a plurality of times using the effect result of one period effect. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to execute a variable effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. In addition, since one period performance can be executed across the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times, it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state. can do.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 672, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vp is not "1" (F4301: No), then the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "20" (F4303), and if it is determined to be "20" (F4303: Yes), determine the production mode of the first mode variation production (F4304), and then correspond to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command The effect mode to be played is determined (F4311), and this process is terminated.
Also, in the process of F4303, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "20" (F4303: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "14" ( F4305), if it is determined to be "14" (F4305: Yes), determine the effect mode of the second mode variation effect (F4306), execute the above-described process of F4311, and then end this process. .

On the other hand, in the process of F4305, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "14" (F4305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "7" ( F4307), if it is determined to be "7" (F4307: Yes), the effect mode of the third mode variation effect is determined (F4308), then the above-described F4311 processing is executed, and this processing ends. .
In the process of F4307, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "7" (F4307: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "1" (F4309) , When it is determined to be "1" (F4309: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the end of probability variation is determined (F4310), and then the process of F4311 is executed to end this process. Further, in the process of F4309, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "1", that is, the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "1" or more, and "1", "7" , "14" and "20" (F4309: No), since it is not the situation to determine a new mode change effect (mode effect), the effect mode of various mode change effects is determined. This processing is terminated by skipping the various processing for the purpose and executing the processing of F4311.
In this 23rd control example, by executing the processing of F4303 to F4310 in FIG. 672, using a special symbol fluctuation period showing the results of the special symbol lottery of 6 times from 20 times to 15 times of the remaining probability variation number A first mode performance is executed as a period performance, and a second mode performance is executed as a period performance using a special symbol variation period showing the results of seven special symbol lotteries with the number of times of remaining probability variation being 14 to 8 times, A third mode performance is executed as a period performance using a special symbol variation period showing the results of 7 special symbol lotteries with the number of remaining probability variations ranging from 7 times to 1 time.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the effect mode (result of effect) of each mode effect can be determined based on newly acquired information (pending and stored winning information) while the mode effect is already being executed. Configure. More specifically, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223va (reserved storage information), and preliminarily determines (reads ahead) the result of the special symbol lottery based on the stored reserved memory information. As a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reserved memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, the performance result of the first mode performance is rewritten to the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the first mode performance is performed. , the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot is extended until it is stopped and displayed.

In this way, based on the information acquired after executing the first mode production (period production), by variably configuring the number of special symbol lotteries targeted for the first mode production (period production), the probability variable state It is possible to make it difficult for a player to grasp the remaining number of executable special symbol lotteries.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the period during which one period effect is executed is configured to be variable based on the look-ahead result. Alternatively, the player may select an arbitrary period. In addition, the timing of executing the look-ahead (preliminary determination) is not the timing at which the last special symbol variation in the target period of the predetermined mode production is started, but the timing at which the previous special symbol variation is started. Alternatively, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last special symbol variation was started (a specific timing before the effect result is notified to the player). Furthermore, when performing pre-determination, all of the acquired pending storage information may be pre-determined, or only a specific range (for example, two items with the oldest order stored in the winning information storage area 223va) It may be configured to perform determination.
In addition, as a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reserved memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to extend the period production, and based on the lottery result, the period production is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to rewrite the effect result of or to determine whether or not to extend the period effect.
Next, with reference to FIG. 673, the details of the normal state effect mode determination processing (F3053) for determining the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the state where the normal state is set will be described. FIG. 673 is a flow chart showing the details of the normal state rendering mode determination process (F3053). This normal state effect mode determination processing (F3053) is executed when the determined variable effect type is subjugation reach (see FIG. 657) for the above-described normal state effect mode determination processing (see F3018 in FIG. 581). addition of subjugation reach performance determination processing (F3152) and chance up for determining the performance mode of the chance up performance for suggesting to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high. The difference is that an effect determination process (F3153) is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the normal state effect mode determination process (F3053) is executed, first, the same processes of F3101 to F3106 as the normal state effect mode determination process (see F3018 in FIG. 581) are executed. Then, in the process of F3104, if it is determined that the variable effect type determined this time is not the movie execution reach (F3104: No), then it is determined whether the variable effect type determined this time is the subjugation reach. (F3151) If it is determined that it is subjugation reach (F3151: Yes), subjugation reach effect determination processing is executed (F3152), and the process proceeds to F3153. Details of the subjugation ready-to-win effect determination process (F3152) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the processing of F3151, if it is determined that the variable effect type determined this time is not the subjugation reach (F3151: No), the effect mode corresponding to the determined variable effect type is determined (F3107), Thereafter, a chance-up effect determination process is executed (F3153), a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined by each process is set (F3109), and this process ends.
The detailed contents of the chance-up effect determination process (F3153) will be described later with reference to FIG. 675, so a detailed description will be omitted here. For the same effect mode set when the effect type is determined, a process for adding additional information for making the player predict the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is executed. If the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot can be notified by changing the color of one display element included in the presentation mode, a process for determining the type of color to be changed is performed. In addition, there is a process for executing a chance-up effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot by additionally displaying a new effect mode including additional information with respect to the effect mode set corresponding to the variable effect type. done.
By configuring in this way, even when a variable performance with almost the same performance mode in terms of appearance is executed, only a part of the plurality of display elements constituting the variable performance can be changed or the variable performance can be changed. By adding a new display element to the plurality of display elements that constitute the , it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is any change in the plurality of display elements constituting the variable performance being executed, so that the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 674, the details of the subjugation ready-to-win effect determination process (F3152) will be described. FIG. 674 is a flow chart showing the details of the subjugation ready-to-win effect determination process (F3152). In this subjugation reach effect determination process (F3152), a process for determining the effect mode of the subjugation reach effect is executed.
When the subjugation reach effect determination process (F3152) is executed, first, based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf, the effect mode (attack character , attack content) and the production result of subjugation reach production (F4401), based on the determined content (production mode), the display order of the suggestive mode is determined (F4402), and the display variation indicating the determined mode A pattern command is set (F4403), and this processing ends.
Here, the details determined by various processes of the subjugation reach effect determination process (F3152) will be specifically described. First, various contents determined by the processing of F4401 will be described. In the twenty-third control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 657(a), an effect in which various types of friendly characters 801a attack enemy characters 880a to 880c three times is executed as a subjugation reach effect.
As for the types of the allied characters 801a, there are an allied character 801a modeled after a hero who can easily inflict a large amount of damage on one enemy character, and an allied character 801b modeled after a rabbit who can easily inflict damage on multiple enemy characters. , can be selected. In this way, by configuring the easy-to-execute attack content to differ according to the type of the allied character that executes the attack, the content of the attack that has already been executed (remaining HP value of each enemy character) during the subjugation reach effect ), it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the type of friendly character that executes the attack.

In other words, when the friendly character 801b executes the first and second attacks in the subjugation reach effect, each of the enemy characters 880a to 880c tends to be in a state where the remaining HP value is low. ) is easier to defeat all enemy characters 880a to 880c than the allied character 801a. can do. Also, when the friendly character 801a executes the first and second attacks, it is easier to execute the third attack while two of the enemy characters 880a to 880c have been defeated. Therefore, when the type of the friendly character that executes the third attack is the friendly character 801a, the enemy characters 880a to 880c are more effective as a result of the subjugation reach effect than when the friendly character 801b is used. It is possible to make it easier to produce a production result of subjugating all of them.
In addition, in this subjugation reach effect, different attacks can be executed depending on the type of the friendly character that executes the attack. As the number of enemy characters (number of attacks), "1" is more likely to be selected than other numbers, and as the amount of damage to be inflicted on the attack target, "large damage" is different from other damage amounts (medium damage, small damage etc.). Therefore, when the ally character 801a is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the amount of damage rather than the number of attacks. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 657(b), when the ally character 801a is selected, the display order of the suggestive mode for showing the details of the current attack is displayed as "number of attacks" and "amount of damage". Order is determined.
On the other hand, when the ally character 801b is selected, multiple numbers are more likely to be selected than a single number as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (the number of attacks). "Medium damage" is configured to be more likely to be selected than other damage amounts (large damage, small damage). Therefore, when the ally character 801b is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the number of attacks rather than the amount of damage. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 658(b), when the ally character 801b is selected, "damage amount" and "number of attacks" are displayed as the display order of the suggestive mode for sequentially indicating the details of the current attack. Order is determined.
As described above, in the subjugation reach effect executed in the 23rd control example, it is possible to determine the type of allied character that is likely to select different attack contents as the type of allied character that executes the attack. The display order of the suggestion mode for indicating the content of the attack is configured to be different according to the type of the ally character. Specifically, it is possible to display each of the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) that determine the content of the attack as a suggestive mode, and the display order of the plurality of suggested modes to be displayed is the determined ally character. It is configured so that the display order is determined such that the element that is good at the type is displayed after the other elements.

By configuring in this way, even when the type of any friendly character is determined, it is possible to delay the timing at which the suggestive mode that the player pays attention to is displayed. During, you can enjoy the subjugation reach production.
In the twenty-third control example, the display order of the suggestive modes is determined according to the determined friendly character type. Among the elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage), the display order of the suggestive mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player is determined is determined after the other elements, or the content of the attack is determined. Among the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) to be displayed, the display order of the suggested mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player has been determined is determined before the other elements. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the content of the next displayed suggestion mode based on the content of the previously displayed suggestion mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 675, the process contents of the chance-up effect determination process (F3153) will be described. FIG. 675 is a flow chart showing the details of the chance-up effect determination process (F3153). In this chance-up effect determination process (F3153), a process of determining whether or not to execute the chance advance notice effect and a process of determining the effect mode in the case of execution are executed.
When the chance-up effect determination process (F3153) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is "50" (F4501), and if it is determined to be "50" (F4501: Yes ), since the execution condition for forcibly executing the chance notice effect is established, the data table of the forced patterns included in the chance mode selection table 222aag is referred to determine the effect mode of the chance notice effect. (F4502), the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is cleared to "0" (F4503). After that, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (F4510), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of F4501, when it is determined that the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is not "50" (F4501: No), next, the chance notice lottery table 222aaf is referred to execute the chance notice lottery (F4504 ), it is determined whether or not the player has won the chance advance notice lottery executed in the process of F4504 (F4505). If it is determined in the processing of F4505 that the chance advance notice lottery is not won (F4505: No), the chance advance notice effect is not executed in the executed variable effect, so the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is updated (added) by 1. (F4506), the processing of F4510 described above is executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of F4505, if it is determined that the chance notice lottery is won (F4505: Yes), the normal pattern data table included in the chance mode selection table 222aag is referred to, and the chance notice effect effect mode is determined. (F4507), information indicating the determined effect mode is stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag (F4508), and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is updated in correspondence with the determined effect mode of the chance notice effect (F4509). ), the processing of F4510 described above is executed, and this processing ends.
Here, details of the processing executed in F4509 will be described. In this 23rd control example, every time the variable effect is executed, a chance advance notice lottery for determining whether or not to execute the chance notice effect is executed, and a normal execution condition that is established when the chance notice lottery is won, or , The value of the production execution counter 223aah is updated based on the production mode of the continuously executed variable production, and the forced execution that is established when the value of the updated production execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value ("50") It is configured to be able to execute the chance announcement effect when any one of the conditions is satisfied.
Then, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is normally configured to be incremented by "1" each time the effect mode of the variable effect is determined. In other words, the forced execution condition is established based on the number of executions of the variable performance, and the chance notice performance is executed. However, if the value of the production execution counter 223aah that satisfies the forced execution condition is defined as "50" by simply adding "1" to the value of the production execution counter 223aah each time the variable production is executed. The chance notice performance is forcibly executed every time the variable performance is executed 50 times, and the player is notified that the chance notice performance executed this time is forcibly executed. There was a problem that it was easily grasped.

On the other hand, in this 23rd control example, based on the contents set as the effect mode of the variable effect, it is configured to vary the content of updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah. Specifically, when a performance mode (LV1, LV2) with a low degree of expectation for a big win is set as a performance mode of the chance notice performance, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is added by "2", When a performance mode (LV4) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is set as the performance mode of the chance advance notice performance, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is decremented by "30".
In this way, by configuring the value of the effect execution counter 223aah to increase or decrease irregularly according to the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches "50". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the required number of executions of the variable performance. Therefore, when the chance notice effect is executed, the execution opportunity is based on winning the chance notice lottery, that is, it is established based on the result of the special symbol lottery, or the value of the effect execution counter 223aah. reaches a predetermined value, i.e., by making it difficult for the player to understand whether it is established based on the execution history of the variable performance, the degree of expectation for the big win as the forcibly executed chance notice performance. Even when a performance mode with a high value is set, the performance effect can be enhanced by making the player think that it is the chance foretelling performance executed after winning the chance foretelling lottery.
In the twenty-third control example, when the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches "50", the forced execution condition is satisfied and the chance notice effect is executed. , the value of the effect execution counter 223aah that satisfies the forced execution condition may be configured to be variable. It may be configured to be determined from a plurality of values (“10”, “30”, “50”). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the forced execution condition is satisfied.
Also, when the value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 10), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the forced execution condition is satisfied, and forced execution is performed when the lottery is won. It may be configured to satisfy the conditions. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the forced execution condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the content for updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is changed according to the number of executions of the variable effect and the effect mode of the executed chance notice effect. , the update contents of the production execution counter 223aah may be configured to be different based on other factors, for example, the update contents of the production execution counter 223aah according to the production mode of the variable production and the special symbol fluctuation period. can be different. Furthermore, the timing for establishing the next forced execution condition may be determined based on the elapsed time from the establishment of the forced execution condition instead of the number of executions in the variable performance.
In the twenty-third control example, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is cleared to 0 when the forced execution condition is established. A subtraction process for subtracting a predetermined number from the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be configured to be executable, and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah to be subtracted in the subtraction process may be determined from a plurality of values. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to easily vary the interval at which the forced execution condition is satisfied.
Next, with reference to FIG. 676, the contents of the effect button operation process (F3379) will be described. FIG. 676 is a flow chart showing the contents of the production button operation process (F3379). In this production button operation process (F3379), various processes are executed based on the operation of the production button 22 by the player. The difference is that the content of the process executed when the production button 22 is operated during the operation valid period set during the battle production is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the effect button operation process (F3379) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect button 22 is operated (F3451). In the process of F3451, it is determined whether or not the effect button 22 is being pressed. In the processing of F3451, if it is determined that the effect button 22 is not operated (not pressed) (F3451: No), then it is checked whether the during non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON. If it is determined to be ON (F3452: Yes), the non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to OFF, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is cleared to "0" ( F3453), sets the non-decrease period set completion flag 223aac to ON (F3454), then executes the same F3405 processing as the effect button operation processing described above (see F3319 in FIG. 585), and ends this processing.

Here, details of the processing from F3452 to F3454 will be described. In the twenty-third control example, when the friendly character 801a attacks the enemy character 880a in the battle effect ready-to-win mode, an operation effect is executed in which the player operates the effect button 22 (FIG. 653(b)). )reference). During this operation presentation, an operation valid period is set for validly determining that the player has operated the presentation button 22, and the player operates the presentation button 22 in the state in which the operation valid period is set. As a result, a gauge decrease effect for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a is executed.
In the 23rd control example, the gauge decrease that decreases the HP value of the enemy character 880a is performed even if the player repeatedly presses the production button 22 or long-presses the production button 22 within the operation valid period during the battle production reach. The performance is configured to be executable, and the performance mode of the gauge decrease performance is configured to be varied based on the operation contents of the performance button 22 executed during the operation effective period. Specifically, when a long-pressing operation is performed on the effect button 22 during the operation valid period, a gauge decrease effect scenario is performed in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a is decreased corresponding to the elapsed time of the long-pressing operation. A lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-decrease period during which HP value reduction is interrupted for a predetermined period each time the HP value decreases. Then, when the non-decrease period is set, the during non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON, and when the predetermined period has passed and the cancellation lottery for canceling the non-decrease period is won, a long press operation is performed. is terminated, the non-decreasing period is terminated.
In the process of F3452, since it is determined whether or not the non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON while the effect button 22 is not operated (F3451: No), the non-decrease period is set. In this state, it is determined whether the player has finished the long-pressing operation (released the effect button 22). Therefore, in the process of F3452, if it is determined that the non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON, that is, if the player releases the effect button 22 while the non-decrease period is set, , a process (F3453) for canceling the non-decrease period is executed. By configuring in this way, when the non-decreasing period is set based on the long-pressing operation of the effect button 22, the player is made to select whether or not to continue the long-pressing operation. can be provided.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when the non-decrease period is canceled, the non-decrease period set flag 223aac is set to ON, whereby the non-decrease period is set multiple times during one operation valid period. It is configured so that there is no such thing as By configuring in this way, the non-decrease period is set a plurality of times during the operation valid period set during the battle production reach, and the player who has performed the long press operation on the production button 22, It is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the battle effect ready-to-reach ends without almost decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, by setting a limit on the number of non-decrease periods that can be set within one operation valid period, the occupation ratio of the non-decrease period within one operation valid period becomes excessive. However, another technique may be used to achieve the same effect. For example, a measuring means capable of measuring the length of the period in which the non-decreasing period is set is provided. , within the effective period of operation 1, the length of the period measured by the measuring means (the length of the already set non-decrease period) in order to prevent the setting of the non-decrease period longer than a predetermined period. Whether or not to set the non-decrease period may be determined based on the above.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the first operation (long press operation) in which the non-decrease period can be set during the operation valid period and the second operation (continuous hit operation) in which the non-decrease period is not set can be executed. It is configured so that the HP value of the enemy character 880 can be reduced regardless of which operation is performed. It may be configured such that the probability of setting the non-decrease period is different between when two operations are performed.
Furthermore, when the non-decrease period can be set based on the continuous hitting operation, for example, the probability of setting the non-decrease period is changed based on the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period or the pressing interval. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, in the case of executing a continuous hit operation during the operation effective period, a situation in which the non-decrease period is easily set and a situation in which it is difficult to be set are created according to the interval and number of times of pressing the effect button 22. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the details of the continuous hitting operation.
Also, in this case, it is preferable to provide notification means capable of informing the player of a situation in which the non-decrease period is likely to be set or a situation in which it is difficult to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the operation effect desired by the player (the effect during the effective period of the operation of the battle reach).

Returning to FIG. 676, the description continues. In the process of F3451, if it is determined that the effect button 22 has not been operated (F3421: No), then it is determined whether the movie effect SW valid period is in effect (F3455), and the movie effect SW valid period is reached. If it is determined that the effect button 22 has been operated during (F3455: Yes), the movie playback mode is determined (F3403), and the during movie flag is set to ON (see F3404 in FIG. 676).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3455 that the SW for movie effect is not valid (F3455: No), then it is determined whether the SW for battle effect is valid (F3456). If it is determined to be within the effective period (F3456: Yes), then it is determined whether the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON (F3458), and the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON. If so (F3457: Yes), the long press operation is being continued, so the process of F3405 is executed as it is, and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of F3457, if it is determined that the long-pressing flag 223aae is not set to ON (F3457: No), the button operation mode is changed based on the information indicating the details of the operation performed on the effect button 22. (F3458), then it is determined whether the button operation mode determined in the processing of F3458 is a long press operation (F3459), and if it is determined to be a long press operation (F3459: Yes), Long-press effect setting processing for setting the effect mode during the long-press operation is executed (F3463), the above-described processing of F3405 is executed, and this processing ends.
In addition, in the process of F3459, if it is determined that the button operation mode is not a long press operation, that is, if it is determined that it is a continuous hit operation (F3459: No), the HP value to be reduced by this button press is A decrease lottery for determination is executed (F3460), the remaining HP value is calculated based on the result of the decrease lottery executed in the process of F3460, and the calculated value is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad (F3461). , determines the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the decreasing lottery (F3462), executes the process of F3405, and terminates this process.

Here, the flow of decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a in the case of executing the continuous hit operation during the SW effective period (operation effective period) set during the battle production reach will be described in detail along the contents of the executed processing. give an explanation. When it is determined that the continuous hit operation is performed during the SW effective period (operation effective period) set during the battle effect reach, that is, the period in which the effect button 22 is continuously pressed is determined as the long press operation. If it is determined to be shorter than the determined period (F3459: No), a decrease lottery is executed to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a.
In this decrease lottery, a lottery is executed to determine any value from "0" to "5" as the HP value to be decreased (reduced HP value), based on a decrease value lottery table (not shown). to determine the reduced HP value. In the decrease value lottery table, different decrease HP values are defined corresponding to the obtained value of the first effect counter 223vf, the length of the remaining period of the SW valid period, and the remaining HP value.
Specifically, the various HP reduction values are defined so that a large HP reduction value is more likely to be set when the remaining HP value is large than when the remaining HP value is small. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the remaining HP value by grasping the tendency of the HP value of the enemy character 880a to decrease based on repeated hitting operations. As described above, in the twenty-third control example, the final HP value of the enemy character 880a in the battle production reach is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. Because it is configured so that a smaller value is determined as the final HP value than when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss when the is won, if the jackpot is won, the remaining The HP value (difference value between the current HP value and the final HP value) tends to increase.
In other words, by grasping the tendency of the HP value of the enemy character 880a to decrease based on the continuous hitting operation and predicting the remaining HP value to the player, it is possible to determine whether or not the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery will be a jackpot. Prediction becomes possible. Therefore, by making the player predict the remaining HP value willingly, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the battle production ready-to-play, thereby enhancing the production effect.

Furthermore, in the decrease value lottery table, a larger value is determined as the decrease HP value when the remaining HP value is the same when the remaining period of the SW valid period in the battle production reach is shorter than when the remaining period is longer. It is stipulated to make it easier for By configuring in this way, when the player executes the continuous hitting operation within the SW effective period, the SW effective period elapses without the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreasing to the final HP value due to the continuous hitting operation. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.
In addition, the decrease value lottery table defines that when the remaining period of the SW valid period in the battle production reach is long, a small value is more likely to be determined as the decrease HP value than when the remaining period is short. . By configuring in this way, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a reaches the final HP value in a state where the remaining period of the SW valid period remains sufficiently (that is, the remaining HP value is decreased further). (The effect of prompting the player to repeat the operation is executed for a long time by reaching a state in which it is impossible to do so at a relatively early stage), and the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22 is remarkably reduced. can be suppressed.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the reduced HP value to be determined at the time of repeated hit operation in the battle effect reach is configured to be determined by referring to the reduced value lottery table, but control processing other than this configuration is executed. may be configured to be able to determine the reduced HP value. For example, at least one predetermined index HP value (eg, 50) included between the HP value (eg, 100) of the enemy character 880a and the final HP value (eg, 0) is determined, and the remaining HP value is A regulation period may be set so that the HP is limited (regulated) so as not to become smaller than the index HP value.
More specifically, when 3 seconds is set as the SW effective period, by setting the first 2 seconds as the restriction period, the continuous hitting operation is performed earnestly after the SW effective period is set. However, the remaining HP value may not become smaller than the index HP value until two seconds have passed since the SW valid period was set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the remaining HP value from reaching the final HP value with a sufficient remaining period of the SW valid period left. Further, when the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value before the regulation period elapses, the remaining HP value does not decrease until the regulation period elapses, and after the regulation period elapses, the remaining HP value is reduced from the index HP value toward the final HP value. Since it is possible to create a situation in which the remaining HP value can decrease, even if the situation where the remaining HP value does not decrease based on the repeated hitting operation continues for a predetermined period, the player can continue to perform the repeated hitting operation. can be made easier to implement.

In this case, for example, if the player interrupts the continuous hitting operation in a state where the remaining HP value does not decrease until the index HP value is reached and the regulation period elapses, the regulation After the period has passed or just before the regulation period has passed, it is preferable to perform an effect for prompting the player to repeat the operation. In other words, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a no longer decreases (in the situation before the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value, it becomes difficult for the remaining HP value to decrease based on repeated hitting operations). Therefore, it is preferable to notify the player that the remaining HP value has shifted to a state in which the remaining HP value can be relatively easily decreased based on the continuous hitting operation.
By configuring in this way, not only the player who continues to perform the continuous hit operation even after the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value before the regulation period elapses, but also the player who To make it easy for a player who has interrupted a repeated hitting operation due to the remaining HP value reaching an index HP value to execute a performance of decreasing the remaining HP value toward the final HP value after the lapse of a regulation period. can be done.
In the above example, a value of 1 is determined as the index HP value. In addition, in the case where two or more values can be determined as the index HP value, it is preferable to configure so that different regulation periods can be set for each value of the determined index HP value. By constructing in this way, the remaining HP value is decreased step by step using the remaining range of the SW valid period, and the final HP value is obtained for the player who willingly executes the continuous hitting operation during the SW valid period. can be easily reached.
Further, even in the case where the index HP value is determined and the regulation period can be set in correspondence with the determined index HP value, the operation speed of the player's continuous hitting operation does not exceed the regulation period during the SW effective period. If the operation speed (relatively slow operation speed) is such that the index HP value cannot be reached (difficult to reach) during the regulation period, the index HP value is not reached during the regulation period, and the entire SW valid period is The HP value of the enemy character 880a continuously decreases until the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value. Therefore, depending on the operation speed of the player's continuous hit operation, whether the operation speed is such that the index HP value can be reached within the regulation period (for example, a relatively high operation speed with an operation interval of 0.5 seconds or less), Depending on whether the operating speed is unattainable (difficult to reach), it is possible to change the transition of the HP value when the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreases. It is possible to realize a game feature in which the player himself/herself selects the mode of transition. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, based on the determined value of the index HP value and the length of the set regulation period, there is privilege information that is advantageous to the player, such as the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the currently set game state. can be configured to be notified. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to execute repeated hitting operations so that the remaining HP value quickly decreases to the index HP value. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the same value as the final HP value that can be determined when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a loss can be determined as the value of the index HP value. By configuring in this way, when a state occurs in which the remaining HP value does not (is difficult to decrease) even though the continuous hit operation is being performed, the current HP value is the index HP value or the final HP value. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the presence.
Further, it may be configured such that a longer period is set as the regulation period more easily when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning than when the winning is a miss. By constructing in this way, the longer the period from when the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value to when the regulation period elapses, the higher the possibility that the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is winning the jackpot. be able to. Therefore, even a player whose remaining HP value reaches the final HP value and cannot reduce the remaining HP value any more is made to think that a long regulation period is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the effect result of the battle effect reach at an early stage.
On the other hand, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, it may be easier to set a shorter period as the regulating period than in the case of a losing winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the proportion of the regulation period in the entire SW effective period of the battle production reach, so that the remaining HP value can be easily reduced by repeated hitting operations.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when the continuous hit operation is performed during the battle production reach, a decrease lottery for decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is executed at each pressing timing. However, without being limited to this, a pressing number measuring means for counting the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed by repeated hitting operations is provided, and the number of pressing times measured by the pressing number measuring means corresponds to a specific number (for example, the number of times corresponding to a multiple of 5). ), the decreasing lottery may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the first pressing operation that can decrease the remaining HP value and the second pressing operation that makes it difficult to decrease the remaining HP value in the continuous hitting operation. , the player who presses the effect button 22 more often during the continuous hitting operation can make it easier for the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to reach the final HP value.

Further, the process of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a in the case of performing the continuous hit operation during the battle production reach may be determined based on a predetermined press scenario. In this case, at the timing when the execution of the battle effect reach is determined, one type of push scenario is determined from among multiple types of push scenarios, and the number of pushes is determined according to the content stipulated in the decided push scenario. The reduced HP value may be determined by referring to the number of presses counted by the measuring means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the remaining HP value easily reach the final HP value using the entire SW valid period. In addition, as multiple types of press scenarios, for example, during a period when the effect button 22 is pressed less frequently (the beginning of the SW valid period), the reduced HP value is greater than during a period when the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed is large (the end of the SW valid period). In the first press scenario where It is preferable that one press scenario can be determined from among a plurality of press scenarios including at least the defined second press scenario.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the battle effect ready-to-win battle, in which the process of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is clearly different depending on the type of the determined press-down scenario. It is possible to suppress early boredom.
Further, in the above-described example, the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed (the number of repeated hits) is used as a depression scenario for determining the process of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a when the effect button 22 is repeatedly hit during the battle effect reach. In addition to or instead of this, the SW valid period of the battle effect reach is provided. A press scenario (third press scenario) may be provided in which a decreased HP value is defined in association with the remaining period of .
Then, in the third press scenario, a decrease HP value is defined in units of 0.05 seconds for the remaining period of the SW valid period, and when it is determined that the effect button 22 has been pressed (depression determination). It is preferable to determine the reduced HP value corresponding to the remaining period of the SW valid period in . By configuring in this way, when it is determined that the production button 22 is pressed in each period in which the reduced HP value is defined, the reduced HP value can be reduced more, so that the A player who performs repeated hitting operations (a player who presses the effect button 22 at short intervals) can make it easier to decrease the remaining HP value.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to define the third pressing scenario so that the unit of the remaining period for which each decreased HP value is defined can be shorter than the interval at which the depression of the effect button 22 can be determined. In other words, even if the performance button 22 is repeatedly hit at the fastest speed during the SW valid period, it is preferable that all the reduced HP values stipulated in the third depression scenario are not determined. By constructing in this way, even for a player who willingly presses the performance button 22 repeatedly during the battle performance reach, a different reduced HP value is determined according to the pressing timing of the performance button 22 by the continuous hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the battle effect reach (decrease process of the remaining HP value). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win from becoming monotonous and the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22 to decrease.
Next, in the processing of F3462 in FIG. 676, in addition to the effect mode of varying (decreasing) the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 shown in FIG. and a large damage notification presentation mode for informing the player that the reduced HP value determined by one reduction lottery is a value larger than usual (for example, "5"). Or, the remaining HP value becomes a specific value (for example, "33", "77", etc.), and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning. be.
Specifically, as the damage presentation modes, there is a first damage presentation mode for indicating that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has become 1/2 or less of the MAX value, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is MAX. A second damage effect mode for indicating that the value has become 1/4 or less can be set. As the display mode of the enemy character 880a, the display mode of "broken horn" is displayed. Also, although not shown, when the second damage effect mode is set, the display mode of "whole body is injured" is displayed as the display mode of the enemy character 880a.
With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the remaining HP value not only by the variableness of the HP gauge 890 but also by the display mode of the enemy character 880a. Also, in this case, the timing at which the display mode of the HP gauge 890 changes and the timing at which the display mode of the enemy character 880a changes due to one attack in the battle production reach may be configured to be different. , the display mode of the enemy character 880a may be changed before the display mode of the HP gauge 890 is changed.

In other words, rather than the display mode of the HP gauge 890 for showing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, it is easier for the player to grasp the variable contents of other display modes as soon as possible. It is preferable to configure so that the player can grasp that the value has reached a specific value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the display mode of the enemy character 880a and the remaining HP value rather than the player who grasps the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a by checking the display mode of the HP gauge 890. However, a player who can grasp the remaining HP value based on the change in the display mode of the enemy character 880a can quickly grasp the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a after being attacked. In order to understand the relationship between the display mode of the enemy character 880a and the remaining HP value, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the battle effect reach.
In addition, as a large damage notification effect mode, when "5" is determined as the decrease HP value for decreasing the remaining HP value by the decrease lottery, a large value is determined as the decrease HP value on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The text "Critical Hit" is displayed to indicate that it has been hit. By displaying the large damage notification effect mode in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the enemy character 880a has been dealt more damage than normal by the current attack. Therefore, even for a player who is playing the pachinko machine 10 for the first time, that is, a player who has a small number of experience of the battle production reach and relatively difficult to determine the HP value of the enemy character 880a to be decreased by one attack, It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that this attack is special.
Next, the jackpot notification effect mode will be described. In this 23rd control example, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is a specific value (for example, "33", "77 It is configured to be easy to become a grid such as "". Then, when the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a reaches a specific value, at least part of the case where the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win, the player is informed that the big win is won at that time. It is configured to be able to display on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 a jackpot notification effect mode for notification.
Specifically, when the execution condition for executing the jackpot notification effect mode is established, the display mode of the friend character 801a (see FIG. 653(a)) is changed to a special mode (for example, rainbow color ) is displayed, and an attack presentation in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0" is executed by the ally character 801a in the special mode. In other words, when the condition for executing the big win notification effect mode is established, it is notified that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0" before the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0". configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, in the battle production reach, in addition to the game aiming to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0", a specific value (for example, "33", "77", etc.) Since it is possible to make the player play a game aiming at becoming, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to grasp that the big win has been won before the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0", it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.
It should be noted that the execution conditions for the big win notification effect mode are the attacks of the friendly character 801a executed during the period from when the execution conditions for the big win notification effect mode are satisfied until the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is set to "0". The attack based on the decreasing lottery may be continued to be executed in the same manner as when it is not established. In this case, since the player can continue the continuous hitting operation while knowing that the final HP value of the enemy character 880a is "0", the effect button 22 can be operated without anxiety.
Further, when the conditions for execution of the big hit notification performance mode are established, the SW effective period may be discarded and a special attack may be executed regardless of the operation of the performance button 22.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a series of effects as a special effect from when the conditions for executing the big win notification effect mode are satisfied until the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is set to "0". Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand presentation.
As described above, in the twenty-third control example, based on the operation content of the effect button 22 during the operation valid period during the battle effect, whether the repeated hitting operation (pressing operation) was executed or the long pressing operation was performed. It is configured such that a process for determining whether or not it is being executed is executed, and different processes for varying the effect mode of the battle effect are executed based on the result of the determination. Here, when it is determined that a repeated hit operation is being performed, a decrease lottery is executed to determine the decrease value of the HP value each time it is determined that the button is pressed.

Then, the decrease value corresponding to the lottery result of the decrease lottery is subtracted from the remaining HP value, the subtraction result is stored as the remaining HP value in the remaining HP storage area 223aad, and the HP value of the enemy character 880a is subtracted. , and an effect mode for varying the display mode of the HP gauge 890 are set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 677, the processing contents of the effect setting process (F3463) at the time of long press executed in the effect button operation process (see F3379 in FIG. 676) will be described. FIG. 677 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process for long press (F3463). In this long-press effect setting process (F3463), a process for determining an effect scenario for decreasing the HP value based on the long-press operation and various processes for measuring the long-press operation period are executed. .
In the twenty-third control example, the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced using different controls according to the method of operating the effect button 22 during the SW effective period of the battle effect reach. Then, as an operation method for the production button 22, it is configured to be capable of effectively distinguishing between a continuous hitting operation and a long pressing operation.
Specifically, when the repeated hit operation is executed, as described above, the reduced HP value is determined based on the lottery result of the decrease lottery executed when the effect button 22 is pressed as the repeated hit operation. An effect of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a in correspondence with the decreased HP value is executed. On the other hand, when the long-pressing operation is performed, if it is determined that the long-pressing operation is performed during the SW effective period of the battle effect reach, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a at the time of the long-pressing operation is decreased. A scenario (production scenario) in which a process is defined is determined, and while the long-pressing operation is continued, the content stipulated in the determined production scenario is referred to, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced. is executed.

That is, by making the player select which operation method to operate the production button 22 during the SW effective period of the battle production ready-to-win, it is possible to execute the battle production ready-to-win in different production modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the battle production ready-to-win in different production modes, so that the production effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, as the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win, the effect scenario that determines the effect mode to be executed at the time of the long-pressing operation is executed not at the timing of executing the battle effect ready-to-reach, but the long-pressing operation. It is configured so that it can be determined at the timing. In other words, when the continuous hit operation is performed during the battle production reach, the battle production reach progresses without determining the production scenario at the time of the long press operation.
By configuring in this way, since it is not necessary to execute the process of determining in advance the production data (the production scenario for the long press operation) that is not used in the actual production, the process for executing the battle production reach is eliminated. load can be reduced.
When the long-press effect setting process (F3463) is executed, first, the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa is referenced to determine the long-press effect scenario (F4601), and the determined long-press scenario is stored. Store in area 223aai (F4602).

Then, the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON (F4603), the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf is set to "1" (F4604), and this processing ends.
As described above, in the effect button operation process (see F3379 in FIG. 676), if the long press operation is performed during the operation valid period (battle effect SW valid period) set during the battle effect reach. When it is determined (F3459: Yes), the long-press effect setting process (F3463) is configured to determine the effect scenario for the long-press operation (scenario to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a). Therefore, when the player performs the continuous hit operation during the operation valid period during the battle production reach, the production scenario for the long press operation (the scenario for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a) is set. There is nothing
By being configured in this way, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to discriminate between a continuous hitting operation and a long pressing operation in one operation effective period, and to execute different modes of presentation according to the determined operation contents. In 10, regardless of the operation content actually executed by the player, the effect data to be referred to when the player performs a repeated hit operation and the effect data to be referred to when the player performs a long press operation, Processing load can be reduced by omitting processing for determining performance data (performance data for long-pressing operation) that may become unnecessary, compared to the case of determining the operation effective period at the set timing.
In the twenty-third control example, the effect scenario referred to when the long-pressing operation is performed is not determined when the operation effective period is set, but the long-pressing operation is performed during the operation effective period. By structuring so as to be determined when the operation is actually executed, the trouble of determining an unnecessary production scenario is omitted. Triggered by the execution of processing to determine the production scenario to be referred to during the long-press operation, and the production scenario to be referred to when the repeated hit operation is actually executed during the operation valid period is executed. It may be configured to be determinable. In addition, when each operation is actually executed, the production scenario to be used for each executed operation is determined without determining any production scenario when the operation effective period is set. may be configured.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, processing is performed to determine the effect scenario to be referred to when the long-pressing operation is performed, and until the operation effective period elapses, Even if the long press operation is interrupted, the same production scenario is referred to. When the long-press operation is interrupted, updating of the counter value for updating the effect scenario is also interrupted, and when the long-press operation is performed again, the interrupted update of the counter value is resumed. It is configured as follows.
By configuring in this way, even if the operation means (the production button 22) is erroneously operated and the hand is once released, the operation production can be continued by executing the long-pressing operation again. becomes.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, while the long-pressing operation is executed during the effective period of the SW of the battle effect reach, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is being decreased by referring to the determined effect scenario, When the long-pressing operation is interrupted and switched to the continuous-hitting operation, the reduced HP value can be determined by a decrease lottery based on the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a that was decreased during the long-pressing operation. In addition, if a continuous hit operation is performed during the SW valid period of the battle effect reach, and after the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is decreased, a long press operation is performed, the effect determined at the time of the long press operation is performed. The reduced HP value can be determined based on the content of the scenario and the remaining HP value.
That is, even if the player switches the operation method of the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a can be continuously decreased. By configuring in this way, the player is not only allowed to select the operation method of the effect button 22 to be executed during the SW effective period, but also can perform an operation to switch the operation method of the effect button 22 during the SW effective period. Since the effect mode during the battle effect ready-to-win mode can be greatly changed by setting the button 22, the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, as described above, even if the selection button 22 is operated differently during the SW valid period, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a can be continuously decreased. However, without being limited to this, if the operation method of the selection button 22 is changed during the SW valid period, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is restored to the MAX value. Alternatively, the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a may be executed from the beginning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the effect button 22 in the same operation method in order to set the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0". In addition, it is possible for a player who is dissatisfied with the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed to redo the battle effect ready-to-win with another effect mode. In this case, the remaining period of the SW valid period may also be returned to the initial value, or may be configured to be longer than the remaining period at the time of switching the operation method by a predetermined period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the battle production reach based on the operation method after switching.
As shown in FIG. 679, in this 23rd control example, one effect scenario can be determined from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario to be referred to during the long press operation, and the long press counter is updated periodically. 223aaf, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced by referring to the production scenario determined based on the value of 223aaf. You can make it different.
Specifically, the frequency of updating the value of the long-press counter 223aaf includes a first frequency that is normal, a second frequency that the value is updated faster than usual, and a third frequency that the value is updated later than usual. 677. In this case, the value of the long press counter 223aaf may be updated based on the determined frequency. After finishing the processing of F4604, the processing for determining the update frequency of the long-press counter 223aaf is executed, the determined update frequency is temporarily stored in the storage means, and the long-press processing (see FIG. 679) is executed. (see F3551 of )) may be configured to differ based on the update frequency stored in the storage means. For example, when the first frequency is stored as the update frequency, the When "2" is stored as the value of the press counter 223aaf and the second frequency is stored as the update frequency, "3" is stored as the value of the long press counter 223aaf and the third frequency is stored as the update frequency. In this case, it is preferable that the process of adding "1" to the value of the long press counter 223aaf can be executed.
By configuring in this way, the value of the long-press counter 223aaf can be changed at different frequencies simply by changing the value to be updated (added) in the process of updating (adding) the value of the long-press counter 223aaf which is periodically executed. can be updated, even if the same production scenario is determined, the production mode of the battle production reach can be varied. In addition, instead of executing the process of determining the effect scenario and the process of determining the update frequency of the long-press counter 223aaf separately, the update frequency of the long-press counter 223aaf is defined for each effect scenario, The update frequency may be determined according to the determined production scenario.

Next, with reference to FIG. 678, the contents of the rendering update process (F2171) will be described. FIG. 678 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering update process (F2171). This effect update process (F2171) differs from the above-described 19th control example in that a process regarding the long press is added.
Here, the contents of the long press process (F3551) executed in the effect update process (F2171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 679 is a flow chart showing the contents of the long press process (F3551). In this long-pressing process (F3551), a process of updating the period during which the long-pressing operation is continuously performed, a process of determining whether or not to set a non-decreasing period during the long-pressing operation, and a process for determining the effect mode of the additional decrease effect to be executed when the non-decrease period ends.
As described above, in the twenty-third control example, during a part of the operation effective period during which the gauge reduction effect (battle effect) is being executed, regardless of the result of the effect, a non-decrease period is set. Configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, even if the reduction of the physical strength value is stopped in the middle of the gauge reduction effect (battle effect), it is possible to leave the possibility that the result of the effect will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the gauge reduction effect to the end.
Specifically, every time the physical strength value is decreased based on the operation of the operation means, a rush lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-decrease period, and if the rush lottery is won, the non-decrease period is set. It is configured as follows. Then, when the non-decrease period is set, an effect in which the physical strength value is not decreased is executed until a predetermined time elapses or until the cancellation lottery for whether or not to cancel the non-decrease period is won. It is configured as follows. In this way, the player can perform the same operation on the operation means by adding the processing for varying the degree of reduction of the physical strength value even while the gauge reduction effect is being executed. Even in such a case, the reduction pattern of the physical strength value in the gauge decrease performance can be increased more easily than in the case of setting only based on the predetermined performance pattern when the gauge decrease performance is executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can.

Further, in the twenty-third control example, the winning probability of the cancellation lottery is configured to be different based on the remaining physical strength at the time when the non-decrease period is set and the effect result of the gauge decrease effect being executed. The higher the remaining physical strength value, the higher the winning probability of the release lottery. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge reduction effect, it is easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set at the end of the gauge decrease effect. Therefore, even though the gauge decrease effect was executed, the immediately set non-decrease period continues for a long time, and the physical strength value is reduced to the value that can be decreased by this gauge decrease effect. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of situations that cannot be caused.
Further, the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is higher when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed becomes an advantageous performance result than when the performance result becomes a disadvantageous performance result. Here, in the twenty-third control example, the case where the effect result of the gauge decrease effect is advantageous to the player is more likely to be the effect result than the case where the effect result is disadvantageous to the player. The physical strength value is greatly reduced (the remaining physical strength value is set to 0) by pressing the player so that the effect is easily executed. In other words, the greater the physical strength value that can be reduced by this gauge reduction effect, the higher the winning probability of the cancellation lottery. By configuring in this way, the production result of the gauge reduction production is an advantageous production result When the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction production, the production result of the gauge reduction production becomes a disadvantageous production result It is possible to make it easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction effect, so even though the gauge decrease effect that can greatly reduce the physical strength value is executed, it does not decrease. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of a situation where the period continues for a long time and the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced by this gauge reduction effect.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, an upper limit (limit) is set for the duration of the non-decrease period, and when the non-decrease period reaches the upper limit without winning the release lottery, the non-decrease period is forcibly terminated. configured to be released. With this configuration, even if the release lottery is used to randomize the timing at which the non-decrease period is released, the non-decrease period will not be won in the release lottery and the gauge decrease effect will end. is continued, and the production effect of the gauge decrease production is remarkably lowered.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, when the non-decrease period is canceled and a decrease period in which the physical strength can be decreased is set, the physical strength is reduced according to the length of the set non-decrease period. It is configured to be able to execute the additional reduction performance to reduce. Specifically, when the non-decrease period is set with the effect result that the effect result of the current gauge decrease effect is advantageous to the player, or when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge decrease effect, that is, , If the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is set high and the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction effect that is executed when the non-decrease period is canceled. configured to be possible.

By configuring in this way, even if the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional decrease effect, so the game in which the non-decrease period continues for a long time. The player can also play the game while expecting that the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed will be a performance result that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of a situation in which the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced in the gauge reduction effect this time.
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the effect pattern for decreasing the physical strength value is changed according to the operation method of the player to the operation means during the gauge reduction effect. Specifically, when the player continuously presses the operating means during the operation valid period in the gauge reduction effect (so-called long press operation), and when the player continuously presses the operating means (so-called , in the case of performing a continuous hit operation), and in the case of executing a long press operation, the effect pattern that allows setting of the above-mentioned non-decrease period is determined. , when the continuous hitting operation is executed, an effect pattern in which the above-described non-decrease period is not set (no rush lottery is executed) is determined.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the process of decreasing the physical strength value in the gauge reduction effect for showing the same effect result according to the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to execute the gauge decrease effect in various effect patterns to operate the operation means by different operation methods, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. can improve interest in
Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, it is possible to suggest the effect result of the gauge decrease effect according to the length of the non-decrease period during which the physical strength value is not decreased. Specifically, during the non-decrease period, an effect (charge effect) will be executed for allied characters to accumulate power. ing. The greater the power stored during the charging effect, the easier it is to execute the effect of greatly decreasing the physical strength value after the non-decrease period elapses.

By constructing in this way, even when the non-reduction period is set during the gauge reduction performance period, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the gauge reduction performance being executed early.
In addition, in this 23rd control example, in the gauge decrease effect in which the effect result is the effect result that is disadvantageous to the player, the gauge decrease effect can be ended without ending the charge effect. . In other words, it is possible to set an effect pattern in which the effect result of the gauge decrease effect is displayed without attacking the enemy character by using the power even though the power is accumulated in the charge effect. By configuring in this way, even if the effect result of the gauge decrease effect is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the charge effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
Also, in the twenty-third control example, the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means. In other words, during the gauge decrease effect prompting the player to operate (press down) the operation means, the player can be provided with an option to stop the operation of the operation means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the options of operation methods for the operation means.
In addition, in this 23rd control example, when a long press operation is executed for a gauge decrease effect, the effect scenario for decreasing the physical strength value progresses according to the duration of the long press operation. It is configured such that the longer the time, the easier it is to set the effect scenario in which the physical strength value is likely to decrease. When the long-pressing operation in progress is canceled halfway, the update of the pressing duration is interrupted, and when the long-pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. is doing. Therefore, even if the long-pressing operation is interrupted in the middle, it is possible to make it easier to continue operating the operating means.

Further, as described above, when the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means, and when the long-pressing operation being executed is canceled in the middle, When the update of the pressing duration is interrupted and the long pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. By configuring in this way, the player who is executing the long-pressing operation during the gauge reduction effect is interrupted once in the middle of the long-pressing operation, rather than continuing to perform the long-pressing operation. When the long-pressing operation is performed again, the non-decrease period is shorter, and it is possible to provide a situation in which the physical strength value can be greatly decreased in the gauge decrease effect.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, during the execution period of the gauge reduction effect, the effective period (operation effective period) during which the player's operation to the operation means is effectively determined is displayed. The length of the displayed operation valid period is made different. Specifically, when the effect result of the gauge reduction effect is the effect result that is advantageous to the player, the display indicating the longer operation effective period is more likely to be executed than the effect result that is disadvantageous to the player. It consists of
By configuring in this way, before the physical strength value of the enemy character is reduced in the gauge reduction effect (when the display mode indicating the effective period of operation is displayed), the player is allowed to predict the effect result of this time. can be made easier. In addition, the effect of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character based on the operation (long press operation) on the operation means not only decreases the physical strength value (relationship between the elapsed time and the decreased value), but also decreases the physical strength value. Since the effect result is predicted in consideration of the length of the remaining time (remaining operation effective period) that can be performed, the effect result is predicted by increasing the element for making the player predict the effect result. It can be made difficult, and the effect of the effect (gauge reduction effect) to be executed can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, the same effect scenario (operating means Decrease value of physical strength value according to the operation time to ) can be set, and the physical strength value that can be finally displayed can be changed according to the length of the set operation valid time. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create different effects results using the same effect scenario. The amount of performance data (performance scenario) relating to the gauge decrease performance can be reduced more than when only the performance scenario dedicated to the performance result that is unfavorable to the player and the performance scenario dedicated to the performance result that is disadvantageous to the player are used.
In addition, conventionally, by executing the variable production for showing the result of the special pattern lottery in various production modes, the period in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result other than the big win (lost) is long. There is a pachinko machine 10 that prevents a player from quickly getting bored with the game even if the game continues. In such a conventional type pachinko machine 10, the ratio of the selection ratio when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the ratio of the selection when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is adjusted. Various performance modes with different degrees of expectation for winning a big hit can be determined, and based on the result of a special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable performance and the result of the performance lottery for determining the performance mode of the variable performance. By constructing the performance mode so as to be determinable, even when a game in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result other than the big win (loss) continues a plurality of times, the player's degree of expectation for the big win is increased. Since it is possible to execute various variable performances with different values, the player can play the game while having an appropriate sense of anticipation for a big win.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is determined by lottery (lottery lottery), so depending on the case, it may take a long time. In the meantime, there is a problem that only the variable performance with low expectation of winning the jackpot is executed, and the player easily gets bored with the game. In addition, there is a problem that the player selects a plurality of times in a short period of time an effect mode in which the selection ratio is defined so as to increase the expectation of winning a big win, which gives the player a sense of distrust.
On the other hand, in this 23rd control example, information (production history information) related to the performance mode of the variable performance executed in the past and the variable performance (loss) for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery Based on the information about the number of times the variable performance) is continuously executed (the number of consecutive failures), the performance mode of the variable performance can be determined.

Specifically, a specific counter value (the value of the execution effect counter) is added based on the increase in the number of times of consecutive failures, and when the value of the execution effect counter reaches a specific value (for example, 100), the variable effect As a data table referred to when determining the performance mode, a special performance mode selection table different from the data table normally referred to (normal performance mode selection table) is referred to, and the jackpot expectation degree is It is configured to make it easier to determine a high performance mode than in normal times.
By configuring in this way, a variable performance in a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win can be executed periodically, so that only the variable performance with a low degree of expectation for winning a big win is executed, and the player gets bored with the game. can be made difficult to occur.
Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the process of subtracting the value of the execution effect counter described above is configured to be executable. In this case, the value of the execution effect counter is decremented according to the determined effect mode. Concretely, when the performance mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is determined as the performance mode of the variable performance, the value of the execution performance counter is subtracted by 30.例文帳に追加
By configuring in this way, immediately after execution of the failure variation performance in the performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the failure variation performance in which the performance mode is determined by referring to the special performance mode selection table is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustfulness due to the continuous execution of the deviating variable performance in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when determining the effect mode with reference to the special effect mode selection table, the type of effect mode is determined based on the information regarding the effect mode of the previously executed deviating variable effect. are configured to be different. Specifically, it is structured so as to make it difficult to determine a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot determined by referring to a normal performance mode selection table referred to in normal times by referring to a special performance mode selection table. ing. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the same performance mode for the loss fluctuation performance, so that the content is different from the normal time performance mode selection table in which the normal jackpot winning expectation is stipulated. Even if a performance mode can be determined by referring to a special performance mode selection table in which various performance modes are defined, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot for a specific performance mode from remarkably lowering. .
Conventionally, before executing one performance, a plurality of pieces of information (performance elements) used in the performance are sequentially notified to the player, thereby making the player predict the content of the performance to be executed later. There is something that runs Specifically, when executing a battle effect in which an enemy character is attacked, information indicating the type of the allied character used in the battle effect is notified, and then information indicating the type of weapon used by the allied character in the battle effect. There is one that executes a notification effect to notify and executes a battle effect using the effect element notified by the notification effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually notify the player of the contents of the battle production to be executed later, so that the player can be executed later compared to the case where the battle production is executed without any foreshadowing. By providing a period (notification performance period) in which the contents of the battle performance to be executed can be predicted, the period for making the player interested in the performance to be executed can be lengthened, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the order in which the effect elements are notified by the notification effect is fixed. If the effect element is more likely to be selected than if the effect result is more advantageous to the player, the expectation for the battle effect to be executed later at that time is greatly reduced, and the desire to play the game is reduced. There was a problem that the .
On the other hand, in the twenty-third control example, it is possible to change the notification order of a plurality of pieces of information to be notified to the player in the notification effect in the subjugation ready-to-win effect. Specifically, among a plurality of pieces of information that can be notified by the notification effect, the information that makes the player more likely to predict the effect result of the attack effect to be executed later makes the player predict the effect result of the attack effect. It is configured so that it is easier to notify later than difficult information.

Specifically, at least a first ally character and a second ally character can be determined as types of ally characters used in the attack effect, and the first ally character is the second effect element rather than the first effect element. The second ally character is configured so that the first effect element makes it easier to predict the effect result of the battle effect than the second effect element, When the first ally character is determined, the information regarding the first effect element is notified, and then the information regarding the second effect element is notified, and when the second ally character is determined, the information regarding the second effect element is notified. is configured to notify the information about the first effect element after the notification.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the expectation for the battle performance to be executed later is greatly reduced in the middle of the notification performance, and the willingness to play is reduced early. can be done.
Conventionally, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the results of a plurality of special symbol lotteries executed during a specific period (for example, a period in which the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times) can be reported using one mode performance. , Execute the first mode production in the first specific period (for example, the 1st to 5th special pattern lottery), and the 2nd mode production in the second specific period (for example, the 6th to 10th special pattern lottery). there is something to do. In such a conventional type pachinko machine 10, the result of a plurality of special symbol lotteries can be notified by one mode performance, so that the player can be notified of the plurality of special symbol lotteries targeted for one mode performance. If an advantageous lottery result (for example, winning a jackpot) is included, it is possible to display an effect result that is advantageous to the player as the effect result of the mode effect. Therefore, compared to the case of executing an effect for indicating the lottery result for each special symbol lottery that is executed, the effect ( Since it is possible to reduce the number of times of execution of the losing effect), it is possible to reduce the player's willingness to play due to the frequent execution of the effect showing the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (losing effect). It could be suppressed.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the number of times of special symbol lottery that suggests the lottery result in each mode effect is fixed, so there is a probability that the effect result of each mode effect will be an effect result that is advantageous to the player. was always fixed. Therefore, among the mode effects, the mode effect with a large number of special symbol lotteries that affect the effect result is more advantageous to the player than the mode effect with a small number of special symbol lotteries that affect the effect result. Results are likely to be displayed, and it is easy to provide biased performances to the player who expects the display of performance results that are advantageous to the player in various mode performances, and the performance effect is reduced. There was a problem of hoarding.

On the other hand, in this 23rd control example, when the number of remaining probability variations falls below 20 times, a mode effect is executed in which the player is notified of the results of the special symbol lottery for a plurality of times using the effect result of the effect of one period effect. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to execute a variable effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. In addition, since one period performance can be executed across the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times, it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state. can do.
Specifically, in the twenty-third control example, by executing the processing of F4303 to F4310 in FIG. A first mode performance is executed as a period performance using the variable period, and a second mode as a period performance using the special symbol variation period showing the results of 7 special symbol lotteries with the number of remaining probability variations from 14 times to 8 times. A performance is executed, and a third mode performance is executed as a period performance using a special symbol variation period showing the results of 7 special symbol lotteries with a remaining probability variation frequency of 7 times to 1 time. .
In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the effect mode (result of effect) of each mode effect can be determined based on newly acquired information (pending and stored winning information) while the mode effect is already being executed. Configure. More specifically, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223va (reserved storage information), and preliminarily determines (reads ahead) the result of the special symbol lottery based on the stored reserved memory information. As a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reserved memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, the performance result of the first mode performance is rewritten to the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the first mode performance is performed. , the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot is extended and executed until it is stopped and displayed.
In this way, based on the information acquired after executing the first mode production (period production), by variably configuring the number of special symbol lotteries targeted for the first mode production (period production), the probability variable state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the game.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the period during which one period effect is executed is configured to be variable based on the look-ahead result. Alternatively, the player may select an arbitrary period. In addition, the timing of executing the look-ahead (preliminary determination) is not the timing at which the last special symbol variation in the target period of the predetermined mode production is started, but the timing at which the previous special symbol variation is started. Alternatively, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last special symbol variation was started (a specific timing before the effect result is notified to the player). Furthermore, when performing pre-determination, all of the acquired pending storage information may be pre-determined, or only a specific range (for example, two items with the oldest order stored in the winning information storage area 223va) It may be configured to perform determination.
In addition, as a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reserved memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to extend the period production, and based on the lottery result, the period production is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to rewrite the effect result of or to determine whether or not to extend the period effect.
Conventionally, an operation effect for allowing a player to operate the operation means (effect button 22) is configured to be executable, and when the operation effect is executed, the period during which the operation to the operation means is effectively determined (effective period) can be notified to the player. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining period of the effective period, and the effect result of the operation effect can be obtained based on the effect mode of the operation effect and the remaining period of the effective period. could be predicted.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, regardless of the performance result of the operation performance, the valid period of the same length is set as the period (valid period) during which the operation to the operating means is effectively determined. If the valid period is notified, the remaining period of the valid period can be easily grasped, and based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation and the remaining period of the valid period, the effect result of this time is displayed to the player. There is a problem that it is determined early that the performance result is disadvantageous to the player, and the player's motivation to operate the operating means is reduced.

On the other hand, in the twenty-third control example, the length of the effective period to be set can be changed according to the effect result of the operation effect. As the length of the notification period to be notified to the player, a period shorter than the valid period actually set can be notified.
In the twenty-third control example described above, as a method of setting the non-decrease period during the battle effect, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the non-decrease period is determined when the condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is satisfied. However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to determine whether or not to determine the non-decrease period based on the amount of the remaining HP value to be decreased.
In this case, for example, if the effect (strong attack effect) that greatly reduces the remaining HP value with one attack is determined, the effect (weak attack effect) that decreases the remaining HP value with one attack is better. The non-decrease period may be set more easily than when is determined.
In addition, as a method of setting the non-decrease period during the battle production, the non-decrease period is set each time when the condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is satisfied, and the length of the set non-decrease period is set. It may be configured to be different. In the twenty-third control example, the setting value can be suggested by the privilege video, but the information included in the privilege video is not limited to this. For example, if a video that can please the player by being displayed, such as a rare video of a character that appears in the performance of the pachinko machine 10 (rarely or never displayed in a normal performance), it can be adopted as a privilege video. can be done.

In addition, a non-decrease period may be set in accordance with the start timing of the operation valid period so that the HP value does not decrease unless the non-decrease period is canceled. In this case, it is preferable that the timing at which the non-decrease period is canceled (the timing at which the period is likely to be canceled) is varied based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the reduction of the remaining HP value started.
Also, regardless of whether or not the condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is met, the non-decrease period may be set for a predetermined period at a specific timing in the valid operation period. Also, it may be configured such that two or more non-decreasing periods can be set for one operation effective period.
<24th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 680 to 713. FIG. In the 14th control example described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification), and the type of time saving state Accordingly, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed by lottery are differentiated. That is, in the second time-saving state A and the third time-saving state A, while forming a time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed, in the second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B is configured to form a time-saving state in which the lottery for the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is easily executed.
On the other hand, in this 24th control example, by changing the lottery frequency of the first special symbol (tendency of the selected fluctuation time) according to the setting opportunity (jackpot type) of the time saving state, until the end of the time saving state The number of lotteries of the second special symbols to be executed each time is made different. More specifically, as the time-saving end condition, the first end condition established by executing the lottery of the first special symbol for the first number of times (for example, 50 times), or the lottery of the first special symbol and the second A configuration is provided with a second end condition established by executing the lottery of special symbols a second number of times (for example, 100 times) larger than the first number of times in total, and a time saving state is basically provided according to the first end condition. configured to terminate. That is, basically, the period from when the time saving state is set to when the lottery for the first special symbol is completed for the first number of times is configured to be the time saving state. A plurality of time-saving states with different numbers of times of executing the lottery of the second special symbols are made different by configuring to vary the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time-saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time-saving state. , substantially forming a plurality of time-saving states with different degrees of advantage (possibility of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state). As a result, when the time saving state is set, the game can be played while paying attention to which type of time saving state is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.

In addition, in this 24th control example, it is configured so that a small win can be won only in the lottery of the second special symbol, and as in the above-described 14th control example, etc., a small win is won and a small win game is executed. By continuing to hit to the right during the game, it is possible to almost generate a V prize and execute a jackpot game. In other words, in the lottery of the second special symbol, not only when the big win is won, but also when the small win is won, the big win is substantially determined. In the twenty-fourth control example, in the normal state, basically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, an extremely long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set so that the second While the lottery of the special pattern is made difficult to be executed, only the lottery of the second special pattern of the specified number of times after the end of the time saving state is constituted so that the fluctuation time is shortened. As a result, it is possible to secure a lottery opportunity for the second special symbols for the specific number of times after the time saving state is finished.
Here, conventionally, a plurality of special symbols with different degrees of advantage (a first special symbol and a second special symbol with a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) are provided, and during a disadvantageous game state, a first disadvantageous symbol is provided. Lottery of special symbols is easier to be executed (start winning of the second special symbols is less likely to occur), while the lottery of the second special symbols is easier to be executed when the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state ( A gaming machine that employs a control that makes it easier for the second special symbol to start winning a prize is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the last variation display in an advantageous gaming state, a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is activated to start winning. Whether the lottery result corresponding to winning is included in the lottery result of the final lottery of the second special pattern and the lottery result of the ball of the second special pattern in an advantageous game state by accumulating the reserved balls of the special pattern. There are also those that execute an effect to notify whether or not. However, as in the twenty-fourth control example, when adopting a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), the second There is a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed multiple times during the execution of the variable display of the two special symbols, and a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed at all during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the number of times of time saving is in the state of one time remaining at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is judged that there is a high possibility that the last second special symbol will be displayed in an advantageous game state. The lottery for the first special pattern is not executed during the variable display of the second special pattern and the time saving state is the next second special pattern lottery despite the execution of the performance for accumulating the reserved balls of the second special pattern. Or, on the contrary, for example, when the lottery of the second special symbol was started, the number of times of shortening time remained relatively large (for example, 8 times, etc.), so the production to accumulate the reserved balls was not executed. Nevertheless, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is frequently executed, and the advantageous game state ends before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There is a possibility, and it may become difficult to execute the effect of storing the second special symbol reserved balls at an appropriate timing.
On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth control example, the second ball entrance 640 as a start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbols can be easily thrown into the second ball entrance 640 simply by hitting to the right regardless of the game state. A second special symbol advantageous in a normal state is configured as a starting prize winning port that allows a ball to be entered, and is controlled so that the variation time of the second special symbol is basically set to an extremely long time in a normal state. While suppressing the execution of the lottery, only the lottery of the second special symbol of a specific number after the advantageous time saving state is completed is executed immediately after the time saving state by shortening the fluctuation time. 2 It is constructed so as to be able to execute the effect of accumulating the reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbols. By constructing in this way, the performance for accumulating the reserved balls can be reliably executed, and the series of performances indicating whether or not there is a win in the lottery of the second special symbols being executed and reserved is more reliable. Since it can be executed at any time, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode.
The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above in that the board structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control process to be executed is partially changed, and the control process to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 14 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 14th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 680, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 680 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 680, in the game board 13 in the twenty-fourth control example, a The difference is that the variable prize winning device 2650 for small hits that has been used is deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 680, in the flow path formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery for normal symbols is arranged on the upstream side, and a through gate 67 is arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. A right first ball entrance 64r that is opened and closed by an electric accessary 64ra is provided. Like the first ball entrance 64r, the right first ball entrance 64r is configured as one of the start winning openings that trigger the lottery of the first special symbols. The electric accessory 64ra is normally maintained in a closed position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64r. It is configured to be displaced (variably) to an open position where a game ball can be entered into the ball inlet 64r.
For this reason, it is easy to hit the normal pattern (the probability of hitting the normal pattern is higher than in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter, and the opening time of the electric accessory 64ra at the time of hitting the normal pattern In the time-saving state, the game ball frequently enters the right first ball entrance 64r by continuing to hit to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 680, a second ball entrance 640 through which game balls can be entered is provided directly below the right first ball entrance 64r. This second ball entrance 640 is configured as a start prize winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Unlike the right first ball entrance 64r, the second ball entrance 640 does not have anything that prevents the ball from entering. It is possible to enter the ball easily. In addition, in the time-saving state, a state is formed in which the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64a on the upstream side each time the normal symbol is hit, so the game ball is the second entrance compared to the normal state. Although it becomes difficult to enter the opening 640, it is designed so that about 5 game balls enter during the second special symbol fluctuation time (fixed for 10 seconds in this 24th control example) in the time saving state. Therefore, when the player continuously hits to the right in the time saving state, the phenomenon that the second special symbol holding ball becomes 0 does not occur. Therefore, in the twenty-fourth control example, since game balls frequently enter both the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol is also the second. A lottery for special symbols is also frequently executed.
In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to 1/200, and the second special symbol jackpot probability is set to 1/20. For this reason, even if the lottery of the first special symbol that cannot win the small win is executed, the big win is won only with a probability of 1/200, whereas the special symbol lottery has a big win and a small win that substantially determines the big win. When the lottery for the second special symbol that can win any prize is executed, the player wins the jackpot with a probability of substantially 11/200. Therefore, the more the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the player can expect that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed more often, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Further, as shown in FIG. 680, in the twenty-fourth control example, a variable prize winning device 1065 that is opened during the jackpot game is disposed on the downstream side of the V prize winning device 650 . Since this variable winning device 1650 is the same as the variable winning device 1065 (see FIG. 258) provided in the above-described ninth control example and the like, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 681 to 685, a characteristic effect mode in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 681 and 682(a), an effect mode during execution of the big win game in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. Here, as described above, in the twenty-fourth control example, a plurality of time saving states having different average values of the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols executed until the end of the time saving state are provided. More specifically, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to an average of about 1.4 seconds, the first time saving end condition (first special The time-saving state (E rank rush) where the time-saving state ends when the symbol lottery 50 times) is established, and the fluctuation time of the first special design is set to an average of about 2 seconds, so after moving to the time-saving state Time-saving state (D rank rush) where the first time-saving end condition (lottery 50 times of the first special symbol) is established in an average of about 99.4 seconds and the time-saving state ends (D rank rush), and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol Since it is set to about 3.2 seconds on average, the first time-saving end condition (50 times of the first special symbol lottery) is established in about 155.3 seconds on average after shifting to the time-saving state, and the time-saving state ends. The time saving state (C rank rush) and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol are set to about 3.8 seconds on average, so the first time saving ends in about 186.2 seconds on average after moving to the time saving state Since the time-saving state (B rank rush) where the condition (lottery 50 times of the first special symbol) is satisfied and the time-saving state is terminated, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to about 6.2 seconds on average, A time saving state (A rank crash) in which the first time saving end condition (50 times of the first special symbol lottery) is satisfied and the time saving state ends in about 302.3 seconds on average after moving to the time saving state, and a time saving state. (6) a time-saving state (S rank rush) in which only the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed during time-saving because the fluctuation time of the first special pattern in the state is always long (250 seconds); There are two time-saving states (Rush ranks). As mentioned above, in the twenty-fourth control example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 10 seconds, so the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state is the first time saving end condition. The longer it takes to establish, the more. That is, the longer the period until the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, the higher the expectation of the big hit. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot, the second special symbol jackpot, and the second special symbol jackpot are all taken into account, after the time saving state ends after the time saving state is started, the second of the specific number of times (5 times) The percentage of winning the jackpot before the special pattern lottery ends is about 59.8% for E-rank rush, about 66.6% for D-rank rush, about 75.6% for C-rank rush, and B-rank. Rush is about 79.5%, A-rank rush is about 89.4%, and S-rank rush is about 99.7%. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with the aim of providing a higher-ranked rush after the end of the big win. In the twenty-fourth control example, an effect (rank-up effect) for informing in advance the rank of the time-saving state (rush) given after the big win is executed during the opening period of the big win.
FIG. 681(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of a rank-up effect executed as an opening effect for a big win. When this rank-up effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 681(a), the third symbol stopped and displayed when announcing the big win is reduced in the small display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. FIG. 681(a) illustrates a case where a big hit is notified by the third pattern matching imitating the number "4". In addition, in the small display area Dm2, the characters "right-handed" indicating the game method during execution of the jackpot game are displayed. Furthermore, in the main display area Dm, one small enemy character ZE appears from the cave DG inhabited by a large number of enemies, and the appearance of the small enemy character ZE and the adventurer character 801 fight. executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 681(a), when the character 801 of the adventurer was able to defeat the small enemy character ZE, the character ZE of the subdued small enemy was marked with the words "RANK UP". An effect of dropping a rank-up image (rank-up icon) RG is executed. Also, an image indicating the number of rank-up images RG obtained so far is displayed in the display area HR3 formed in the information of the main display area Dm. FIG. 681(a) illustrates a case where the second rank-up image RG is acquired by the rank-up image RG dropped by the character ZE of the small enemy defeated this time. Furthermore, the text "Stock up rank every time you defeat an enemy!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that more rank-up images RG can be acquired (stocked) as the smaller enemy character ZE is subdued.
FIG. 681(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect of increasing the rank by consuming the stocked rank-up images RG, which is executed after the end of the effect of fighting the small enemy character ZE. Here, in the twenty-fourth control example, there are provided two types of targets for increasing the rank using the rank-up image RG: the bonus rank and the rush rank. The bonus rank is linked to the number of rounds of the jackpot, and there are four ranks from A to D. Of the bonus ranks, A rank corresponds to 12 rounds, B rank corresponds to 8 rounds, C rank corresponds to 6 rounds, and D rank corresponds to 4 rounds. Also, as described above, there are six rush ranks from S to E.
As shown in FIG. 681(b), when the rank-up image RG is consumed to raise the rank, the number of rank-up images RG displayed in the display area HR3 is reduced by one, and the main An effect is executed in which the rank-up image RG is split in half in the display area Dm and an image indicating a bonus rank or a rush rank appears. FIG. 681(b) illustrates a case where a bonus rank image BRG with characters "BONUS RANK" appears from a rank-up image RG split in two. In this case, it means that the bonus rank is raised by one rank (stage) or more. A display area HR33 for displaying information indicating the current bonus rank and rush rank is formed on the right side of the main display area Dm. In the example of FIG. 681(b), the bonus rank image BRG acquired this time raises (ranks up) the bonus rank to C rank, while the rush rank remains at E rank. In addition, the text "Consume stock to increase your bonus rank and rush rank!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the effects in which either the bonus rank or the rush rank is raised by one rank or more are executed by the number of stocked rank-up images RG.

It should be noted that the number of times of rank-up and to which rank each rank is ranked-up are determined in advance by the jackpot type. For example, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot K28) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the jackpot shifts to an A rank crash after the jackpot ends, 5 rank-up images are obtained in the first half of the opening production, and the bonus rank is 1 in the second half. An effect is set in which the rank rises to C rank, and the rush rank rises by 4 ranks to A rank. However, which rank is raised when each rank-up image RG is consumed is determined by lottery for each effect. For example, while the bonus rank and the rush rank have not risen to the rank corresponding to the type of jackpot this time, when the effect that consumes the rank-up image RG is executed, the bonus rank is distributed at a rate of 50%, and the rate is 50%. It is drawn by lottery so that it can be distributed to the rush rank. On the other hand, after one rank rises to the upper limit, it is always distributed to the ranks that have not yet reached the upper limit. As a result, randomness can be imparted to the rank-up, so that the game can be played while paying attention to which rank is raised. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, for a player who wants to win more prize balls with one jackpot, it is possible to make the player play while wishing that more rank-up images RG are consumed in the bonus rank than in the rush rank. On the other hand, for the player who thinks that it is better to increase the possibility of the occurrence of consecutive wins, the game is played while hoping that more rank-up images RG will be consumed in the rush rank than in the bonus rank. can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the target to be expected to be ranked up is exactly the opposite according to the player's preference, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
FIG. 682(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode after all stocked rank-up images RG are consumed. As shown in FIG. 682(a), when the rank-up image RG is consumed (the rank-up of bonus rank and rush rank is completed), an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 801 raises his sword in the main display area Dm. At the same time, the text "Ranking up finished" is displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the number of rounds of the jackpot corresponding to the bonus rank reported this time, and the continuation rate of the rush corresponding to the rush rank (until the lottery of the second special symbol five times after the end of the time saving is completed) information indicating the percentage of winning the jackpot) is displayed. FIG. 682(a) illustrates a case where a C rank corresponding to a 6-round jackpot is reported as a bonus rank, and a B rank corresponding to a continuation rate of 79.5% is reported as a rush rank. For Ds, the text "Bonus 6 rounds over, rush continuation rate 79% over confirmed!" is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the bonus rank and the rush rank.
In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, as the bonus rank, the rank linked to the number of rounds of the big win this time is simply notified, but it is not limited to this. For example, when there is a jackpot in the reserve, it may be configured to notify the rank in consideration of the number of rounds of the jackpot in the reserve. More specifically, for example, taking into account the big hits and pending balls this time, if the total number of rounds is 4 rounds, the E rank is reported, and if the total number of rounds is 6 rounds, the D rank is reported. , if the total number of rounds is 8 rounds, the C rank is reported; if the total number of rounds is 10 rounds, the B rank is reported; if the total number of rounds is 12 rounds, the A rank is reported; It may be configured to notify the S rank if it is a round or more. Further, for example, when there is simply a jackpot in the reserve, the S rank may be notified as the bonus rank. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into consideration the presence or absence of the in-hold jackpot, so it is possible to diversify the effect mode. In addition, when the effect mode in which the on-hold jackpot is determined is executed, the player's interest in the game can be greatly improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the twenty-fourth control example, a rank-up image RG of 1 is acquired each time an effect of subjugating one small enemy character ZE is executed. A performance pattern may be provided in which a plurality of rank-up images RG are obtained when the character ZE of is defeated. In this case, an enemy type that is highly expected to obtain multiple rank-up images RG when subjugated, or an enemy type that is confirmed to be subjugated and obtain multiple rank-up images RG may be provided. . By configuring in this way, not only can the adventurer character 801 be able to subjugate the enemy, but also the type of the enemy that appears can be noticed during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 682(b), FIG. 683, and FIG. 684, a characteristic presentation mode during the time saving state (rush) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG.682(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in a time saving state. As shown in FIG. 682(b), during the time-saving state, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the main display area Dm in the same manner as during the execution of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to more reliably execute right-handed hitting, which is a game method that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player in the time-saving state. In addition, in a relatively wide area (central portion of the screen) in the main display area Dm, a variable display effect of the third symbol (the right symbol RD, the middle symbol CD, and the left symbol LD) indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. do. In addition, information indicating the currently set rush rank is displayed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. FIG. 682(b) illustrates a case where "B rank" is set as the rush rank. Further, on the left side of the small display area Dm, a small display area Dm8a is formed for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 682(b), the small display area Dm8a is composed of a display area that is significantly smaller than the display area for executing the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol (hardly visible to the player). be done. This confirms the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol with a high expectation (advantage) of winning rather than the variable display effect corresponding to the first special symbol with a low expectation (advantage) of winning. This is because the majority of players are thought to want to play. Although not shown in the drawings, only when a big win is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in a larger display area than the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. It is configured to display More specifically, for example, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is enlarged and displayed at the timing of one second before the fluctuation stop of the hit variation of the first special symbol, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. is displayed in a reduced size, and the jackpot of the first special symbol is reported in a more conspicuous manner than the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, even if a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern with a low expectation of winning during the time saving state, the player can surely understand that the big win has occurred.
Further, as shown in FIG. 682(b), the small display area Dm includes the reserved symbols Dsa corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, and the reserved first to second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b2. A small display area Ds1 for displaying reserved symbols Dsb1 to Dsb4 corresponding to the reserved balls reserved in the fourth area, a small display area Ds2 for displaying information on the current rush (continuation rate information), It is divided into a small display area Ds3 for displaying reserved symbols Dsc1 to Dsc4 corresponding to the reserved balls reserved in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first special reserved ball storage area 203b1. As shown in FIG. 682(b), the small display area Ds1 is configured as a larger display area than the small display area Ds3. This is because it is desired to check the reserved design corresponding to the second special design with a high expectation of winning (advantage) rather than the reserved design corresponding to the first special design with a low expectation of winning (advantage). This is because it is considered that the majority of the players think about it.
Further, in the small display area Dm2 in the main display area Dm, information (countdown display of seconds) indicating the remaining time until the time saving state ends is displayed. In FIG. 682(b), it is assumed that the time saving state may end after 47 seconds have passed, and the characters "47:00 until the final judge" are displayed in the small display area Dm1. exemplified. Here, the final judge is the effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol variable display effect that is executed first after the time saving state is completed (and during the second special symbol pending digestion period). , and after urging to accumulate the second special symbol reserved ball by hitting to the right, hit in the lottery result of the second special symbol variation display in execution and the lottery result of the second special symbol being reserved. It refers to an effect that notifies whether (big hit or small hit) is included.
As described above, in the twenty-fourth control example, basically, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is ended by executing the lottery for the first special symbol the first number of times (50 times). Therefore, in the twenty-fourth control example, after the time saving state is started, the first special symbol lottery is executed as a trigger, and the remaining time until the time saving state ends. Display the shortest time (1 second) x 49 times (first time - 1 time) in the special pattern variation time in the small display area Dm1 (that is, display the characters "49:00 until the final judge" ), and the remaining time is updated and displayed as time elapses. In other words, it is configured to display the minimum guaranteed time (guaranteed time) as the time saving state. Then, the deviation from the guaranteed time (remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm1) is measured (accumulated) from the selected state of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and when the deviation is accumulated by a predetermined amount or more , and a configuration for executing an effect for adding the remaining time (remaining time adding effect) at a predetermined opportunity. Details of this remaining time addition effect will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 683(a) and 683(b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode when the remaining time extra effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 683(a), when it is decided to execute the additional effect for the remaining time, a special third pattern ( The variable display effect of the effect mode in which the additional symbol) is stopped and displayed is executed. Further, when the variation is stopped, the characters "addition occurrence" are displayed in the display area HR3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the remaining time until the time saving state ends has been added.
After the added symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 683(b), an effect is executed in which the stopped added symbols are split in half and an image (icon) showing the number of seconds to be added appears. be. The example of FIG. 683(b) illustrates a case where an additional seconds icon with characters "+20" for notifying an additional 20 seconds appears. In addition, when the additional seconds icon appears, the same number of seconds as the number of seconds indicated by the additional seconds icon is added to the remaining seconds until the end of the time saving state (until the final judge) displayed in the small display area Dm1. A production is executed. By these display contents, the remaining time until the end of the time saving state is added, and the player can easily understand that the chances of executing the lottery of the second special symbol are increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 684, the continuation rate increase effect in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This continuation rate increasing production is a production that may be executed especially when an extremely long fluctuation time that is selected with a low probability in the lottery of the first special symbol is selected, and the rush rank (continuation rate) It consists of a production that notifies that the will rise. Here, as described above, in the twenty-fourth control example, the continuation rate of each rank (the continuation rate displayed in the small display area Ds during the time saving state) is set by the average value of the variation time of the first special symbol. there is Therefore, when the fluctuation time significantly longer than the average value is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the substantial continuation rate increases with respect to the continuation rate calculated from the average value. Therefore, in the twenty-fourth control example, a long variation time is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, and the continuation rate corresponding to the rank higher than the continuation rate corresponding to the currently set rush type (rank). When it becomes, it is configured to execute an effect (continuation rate increasing effect) for increasing the rank of the rush. By configuring in this way, it is possible to update and notify the substantial continuation rate according to the change in the situation during the time saving state (rush), so that the player can receive more accurate information (continuation rate) can be provided.
As shown in FIG. 684(a), when execution of the continuation rate increasing effect is determined, a special third pattern with characters "RANK UP" added as a medium pattern UG is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. A variable display effect in which the (rank-up symbol) is stop-displayed is executed. In addition, when the variation is stopped, the characters "Ranked up" are displayed in the display area HR3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the rush rank has increased (the rush continuation rate has increased).

After the rank-up pattern is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 684(b), an image (icon) showing the number of ranks (number of stages) to which the stopped rank-up pattern is divided into two to rank up is displayed. The production that appears is executed. The example of FIG. 684(b) illustrates a case where a rank-up icon RRG with characters "+1RANK" for notifying a one-level rank-up appears. Further, when the rank-up icon appears, an effect is executed in which the rank-up in the same number of stages as the number of stages indicated by the rank-up icon RRG is generated for the rush rank displayed in the small display area Dm3. By these display contents, the continuation rate of the time-saving state is increased, and the player can easily understand that the possibility of winning again during the rush is increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the twenty-fourth control example, the remaining time addition effect and the continuation rate increase effect are executed in synchronization with the variable display period of the variable display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. , but may be configured to be executed in synchronization with the variable display period of the first special symbol. In this case, as in the case of winning the lottery for the first special symbol, the variable display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is temporarily changed from the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol. may be configured to be executed in a conspicuous display mode (wide display area). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the additional effect for the remaining time has occurred.
Next, with reference to FIG. 685, the details of the final judge effect in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. As described above, this final judge effect is a effect that is executed over the variable display period of the second special symbol a specific number of times (five times) that is executed after the time saving state ends, and the second special symbol After executing the performance prompting the player to hit to the right in order to accumulate the reserved balls, the lottery result of the second special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed and the second special corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol. This is an effect for notifying whether or not at least one win (big win or small win) is included in the lottery results of symbols.
As shown in FIG. 685 (a), the time saving state ends (that is, the remaining seconds until the final judge displayed in the small display area Dm1 becomes 0) When the final judge effect is executed, Five display areas HR34 to HR38 are formed on the right side of the adventurer character 801. FIG. Among these five display areas, the display area HR34 is a display area in which a key image corresponding to the lottery result of the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed, and the display areas HR35 to HR38 , It is a display area where the image of the key of the mode corresponding to the lottery result of the reservation first to fourth areas of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is displayed. FIG. 685(a) illustrates a situation in which the final judge effect is started in a state in which two reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated, and the image of the key is displayed in the display areas HR34 to HR36. On the other hand, the key image is not displayed in the display areas HR37 and HR38 corresponding to the third and fourth reserved areas in which the reserved data are not stored. In this final judge effect, every time the player hits to the right and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls increases, a key image corresponding to the reserved ball is added. is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 685(a), the characters "Pump right to save keys!!" are displayed in the display area HR3. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that the keys are accumulated in the display areas HR34 to HR38 by hitting right. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 685(a), during execution of the final judge effect, the small display area Dm2 in which the character "right shot" was displayed during the time saving state is erased. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the time-saving state has ended and that the player has shifted (falled) to the normal state in which the degree of advantage is low when hitting to the right.

Here, the image of the key displayed in the display areas HR34 to HR38 has a plurality of modes. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the expected degree of winning by means of the mode of the key. More specifically, there are provided keys in the mode (normal mode) shown in the display areas HR34 and HR35 in FIG. Although not shown in the drawings, there are provided a mode with a key that is larger than the normal mode and a mode that is more tattered than the normal mode. As for the degree of expectation that will be a hit, the tattered aspect has the lowest expectation, followed by the normal aspect. Designed to raise expectations. Depending on the display mode of these keys, the player can predict whether or not the win will be notified by the final judge effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
When the effect of collecting the keys ends, the effect of the adventurer character 801 discovering the door TG is executed as shown in FIG. 685(b). In addition, the text "If you can break through the door with the stocked key, the continuation is confirmed!?" is displayed in the display area HR3. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that if the door can be opened with any of the stocked keys, a big win or a small win will occur and the rush will continue.
In addition, in this 24th control example, regardless of the lottery result, after the time saving state ends, the fluctuation time related to the lottery of the first second special symbol is set to 30 seconds, and the second to fifth second special symbols is set to 10 seconds. Then, the player is made to store the reserved balls of the second special pattern by executing the performance of collecting the keys until 10 seconds have passed since the first variable display of the second special pattern is started. After 10 seconds have passed, the door TG is found, and the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR34) is used to break through the door TG. . If the first lottery result of the second special symbol is lost, the effect of failing to break through the door TG with the first key is executed, and thereafter, the variable display based on the second special symbol held ball is executed. Each time, during the variable time of 10 seconds, an effect is executed to attempt to break through the door TG using the corresponding key. Then, when a win (big win or small win) is won in the lottery of any of the second special symbols, the performance of breaking through the door TG is executed using the corresponding key, and the win is notified.
Thus, in the present twenty-fourth control example, even in a disadvantageous normal state, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 as a start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous by hitting to the right. Assuming a board structure that can enter the ball, basically set the variation time of the second special symbol to an extremely long variation time in the normal state, and the second special of a specific number of times after the end of the time saving state Only in the lottery of symbols, a relatively short time (30 seconds or 10 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbols. Then, in the first half 10 seconds of the first variable display performance of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving state, the performance of urging the holding ball of the second special symbol to be stored by hitting to the right is executed, and the first second special symbol is executed. In the latter half of the variable display performance and the second to fifth variable display performance of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state, the performance of notifying the success or failure is executed. In other words, generally, in a normal state composed of a game state in which hitting to the right is disadvantageous, an extremely special production mode of prompting to hit to the right and storing the second special symbol reserved balls is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, after the end of the time-saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol for a specific number of times is almost certain (the player deliberately adopts a special game method such as not hitting the right despite being urged to hit the right). (unless you do) can be guaranteed.

Here, conventionally, a plurality of special symbols with different degrees of advantage (a first special symbol and a second special symbol with a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) are provided, and during a disadvantageous game state, a first disadvantageous symbol is provided. Lottery of special symbols is easier to be executed (start winning of the second special symbols is less likely to occur), while the lottery of the second special symbols is easier to be executed when the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state ( A game machine that employs a control that makes it easier for the second special symbol to start winning is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the last variation display in an advantageous gaming state, a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is activated to start winning. Whether the lottery result corresponding to winning is included in the lottery result of the final lottery of the second special pattern and the lottery result of the ball of the second special pattern in an advantageous game state by accumulating the reserved balls of the special pattern. There are also those that execute an effect to notify whether or not. However, as in the twenty-fourth control example, when adopting a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), the second There is a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed multiple times during the execution of the variable display of the two special symbols, and a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed at all during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the number of times of time saving is in the state of one time remaining at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is judged that there is a high possibility that the last second special symbol will be displayed in an advantageous game state. The lottery for the first special pattern is not executed during the variable display of the second special pattern and the time saving state is the next second special pattern lottery despite the execution of the performance for accumulating the reserved balls of the second special pattern. Or, on the contrary, for example, when the lottery of the second special symbol was started, the number of times of shortening time remained relatively large (for example, 8 times, etc.), so the production to accumulate the reserved balls was not executed. Nevertheless, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is frequently executed, and the advantageous game state ends before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There is a possibility, and it may become difficult to execute the effect of storing the second special symbol reserved balls at an appropriate timing.
On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth control example, after the end of the time saving state, the fluctuation time related to the first lottery of the second special symbol is fixed, so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is accumulated after the end of the time saving state. You can secure the period. Therefore, by playing the game in accordance with the content of the presentation, the player can reliably accumulate the upper limit number (four) of the reserved balls of the second special symbol, so that the final judge presentation can be executed favorably. .
In addition, in this 24th control example, after the end of the time saving state (that is, immediately after the transition to the normal state), the execution of the final judge effect is set over the variable display period of the second special symbol five times, and the first time During the variable display period of the second special symbol, it was configured to execute an effect that suggests accumulating the reserved ball of the second special symbol by hitting to the right, but the start timing of the final judge effect and the execution period (second The number of fluctuations of special symbols) is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to execute the final judge effect in a shorter period (for example, during the variable display period of the second special symbol four times or two times after the end of the time saving state). , the configuration may be such that the final judge effect is executed in many periods. In other words, to change the lottery number of the second special symbol referring to the table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of time saving (see FIG. 691 (b)) and the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time saving (normal fluctuation pattern By changing the defined contents of the scenario table 202wa), the range (period) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened in the normal state may be arbitrarily changed. By shortening the period, it is possible to reduce the possibility of winning a winning (big win or small win) in the advantageous second special symbol lottery after the end of the time-saving state, and by making the period longer, Since it is possible to increase the possibility of winning a win (big win or small win) in the lottery of the second special pattern, the continuation rate for each rank of the rush (the possibility of winning a big win before the final judge production ends) can be adjusted.
In addition, in this 24th control example, after the big win, during the execution of the variable display performance based on the first lottery for the second special symbol, it is suggested to the player to save the reserved balls of the second special symbol by striking to the right. However, before the time-saving state ends, it is also possible to execute an effect of accumulating the second special symbol reserved balls by striking to the right. Specifically, for example, from the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the number of remaining lotteries in the time saving state is within 10 times to the end of the time saving state, every time the second special symbol It is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation which prompts to save the holding|maintenance of the 2nd special design in the variable display (that is, the variable display of the some 2nd special design within the number of times of time saving). By constructing in this way, regardless of the end timing of the time-saving state, the performance of accumulating the reserved balls of the second special pattern is executed during the execution of the variable display performance of the second special pattern last executed in the time-saving state. can do. In addition, as in this specific example, when executing the same type of effect that urges the player to hit to the right over a plurality of times of variable display of the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls is kept at the upper limit. It may be a production content that prompts you to do so. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to play the game while paying attention so that the number of reserved balls is always the upper limit (4), so that the reserved ball can be placed in the middle of the production period of the final judge production. It is possible to prevent it from becoming 0.

Next, with reference to FIG. 686, a description will be given of changes over time in the effect mode from the jackpot win to the end of the rush in the twenty-fourth control example. FIG. 686 is a time chart showing changes over time in the mode of presentation after winning the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 686, when the jackpot opening period starts with the start of the jackpot game, the rank-up effect (see FIGS. 681 and 682(a)) is executed as the opening effect. When the opening period ends after the bonus rank (number of rounds of the jackpot) and rush rank (continuation rate of the time-saving state after the jackpot ends) are announced by the rank-up production, the first round of the jackpot will start and the jackpot production will start. executed. Then, when the big win ends and the timing of starting the time saving state comes, the big win effect is ended and the during rush effect (see FIG. 682(b)) is started. In the time saving state (rush), depending on the selection of the variable time of the first special symbol, there is a possibility that the remaining time addition effect (see Figure 683), the continuation rate increase effect (see Figure 684), etc. . Then, the end condition of the time saving state (the first end condition established when the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed without winning the winning (jackpot or small win) during the time saving state, and the first special A second end condition that is established when the symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed a total of 100 times) is established, and was executed at the time of establishment (or the end condition When the variable display of the second special symbol (which triggered the establishment of ) ends, the production during the rush is ended with the end of the time saving state, and the final judge production (see FIG. 685) is started. If the player does not win the lottery for the second special symbol five times during the final judge effect period, the effect is executed that the door TG cannot be broken through even if all the keys are used. be. Then, after finishing the time saving state, when the lottery of the second special symbols is completed five times and the performance period of the final judge performance is completed, the performance mode is switched to the performance mode for the normal state.
In addition, in the 24th control example, the number of rounds of the jackpot (bonus rank) and the degree of advantage of the time-saving state after the jackpot (rush rank) are displayed. , but not limited to these. For example, it may be executed during a jackpot round game or during an interval period. Also, the notification of the bonus rank and the notification of the rush rank do not necessarily have to be collectively notified by one rank-up effect, and may be configured to be notified by separate effects. More specifically, for example, the bonus rank (the number of rounds of the jackpot) is configured to be notified at any timing up to the fourth round of the jackpot, and the rush rank (continuation rate of the time saving state) is the ending period of the jackpot or It may be configured to be notified during the variable display effect related to the lottery of the second special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, the first time or the fifth time) after the shift to the time saving state (rush).
In the twenty-fourth control example, the bonus rank and the rush rank corresponding to the jackpot pattern are always notified by the rank-up effect, but a rank lower than the actual one may be notified at a predetermined rate. Then, when a rank lower than the actual rank is reported in the rank-up effect, the effect of increasing the rank to the actual rank may be executed at a predetermined notification timing. As the predetermined notification timing, for example, when the bonus rank is notified lower in the rank-up effect, the final round corresponding to the notified rank (8th round for B rank, 6th round for C rank) A configuration may be adopted in which an effect for increasing the rank to the actual rank is generated in the 4th round if the player is in the D rank). Also, for example, when the rush rank is reported to be low in the rank-up effect, the final round of the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot, and the second special symbol fluctuation display period of the specified number of times (for example, the first time) after the end of the jackpot A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated in which the rank is increased to the actual rank in the middle. With this configuration, even if a low rank is reported in the rank-up performance, the player can expect a further rank-up after that, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.
In the twenty-fourth control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 684), when announcing the occurrence of a rank up, it is configured to notify the rank up to the corresponding rank in the variation display effect of the second special symbol of 1. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when notifying a rank-up in a plurality of steps, the rank-up may be notified step by step (for example, one step at a time for one variation) over a plurality of second special symbol fluctuation display effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In the case of stepwise notification, it is not always necessary to notify the rank over a plurality of fluctuations, and an effect may be executed in which the rank is raised step by step within one fluctuation. Specifically, for example, after executing an effect in which the rank-up image RG is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank-up to a rank lower than the original rank appears, the rank-up icon RRG is displayed. is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a higher rank appears. Thereafter, the rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank higher than the rank indicated by the rank-up icon RRG that appeared immediately before is displayed until the rank-up to the actual rank is reported. The rank may be notified step by step by repeating the effect that appears from the inside. By constructing in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank continuously, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-fourth control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 684), the number of rank increases ( number of rank-ups), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, the type of rank-up icon RRG that appears can be suggested by the display mode (for example, color, size, etc.) of the rank-up image RG, how the rank-up image RG is split, or the like. may More specifically, for example, as types of rank-up images RG, a white rank-up image RG, a red rank-up image, and a red rank-up image having a size larger than normal are provided, and a red rank-up image is provided. It may be configured such that when the image is statically displayed, there is a higher possibility that the rank-up of multiple stages is notified than when the white rank-up image RG is statically displayed. Also, a red rank-up image having a size larger than usual may be configured to be selected only when a plurality of stages of rank-up is reported. In addition, as the method of breaking the rank-up image RG, in addition to the method of breaking into two, the method of breaking into four, and the method of breaking into pieces are provided. It may be configured such that the possibility of being notified of a rank-up in multiple stages is higher than the way of splitting into two. In addition, in the case of a crack that shatters into pieces, it may be configured such that a rank increase to A rank or higher is determined. With this configuration, not only the type of the rank-up icon RRG but also the performance mode before the rank-up icon RRG appears can be focused on during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.
<Electrical configuration in the 24th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 687(a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 687(a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-fourth control example replaces the first win random number table 202ka with the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth control example described above (see FIG. A random number table 202aw is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202bw is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202qb, and a second hit random number table 202cw is provided instead of the second hit random number table 202qc. The difference is that a small winning random number table 202ew is provided instead of the small winning random number table 202qe, and a normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj. Moreover, it is also different in that the small hit type selection table 202qf, the open scenario table 202fg, the time saving random number table 202qh, and the time saving type selection table 202qi in the 14th control example are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fourteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, with reference to FIG. 688(a), details of the first winning random number table 202aw in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This first winning random number table 202aw, like the first winning random number table 202ka and the like in the fourteenth control example described above, is a random number value (first winning random number counter C1 value) is defined in the data table. FIG. 688(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202aw. As shown in FIG. 688(a), in the twenty-fourth control example, regardless of the type of special symbol, the random number (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery is " Five random numbers (counter values) from 0 to 4 are defined in association with each other. Since the first winning random number counter C1 in the twenty-fourth control example is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", the special symbol lottery was executed in the twenty-fourth control example. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot directly is 1/200 (5/1000) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.
Next, with reference to FIG. 688(b), details of the second winning random number table 202cw in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This second winning random number table 202cw is a random number value (second This is a data table that defines the value of the winning random number counter C4).

As shown in FIG. 688(b), in the second winning random number table 202cw in the twenty-fourth control example, there is a random value determined to be a winning of the normal design in the low probability state of the normal design (the second winning random number counter C4 As a counter value), only one "0" is associated and defined. Among the 300 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 299'' that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits in the normal symbol low probability state. is one, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is 1/300. In addition, as shown in FIG. 688 (b), 299 random numbers (counter value of the second random number counter C4) determined to hit the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol are "0 to 298". A random value (counter value) is associated and defined. Among the 300 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 299'' that can be taken by the second random number counter C4, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits in a normal symbol high probability state. is 299, the probability of winning the normal design in the high probability state of the normal design is 299/300. In this way, in the 24th control example, in the normal state set to the low probability state of the normal design, the winning of the normal design is rarely won, while in the time saving state set to the high probability state of the normal design, almost Since the winning of the normal pattern is won every time the lottery of the normal pattern is executed, the superiority in the time saving state can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 688(c), details of the small winning random number table 202ew in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This small winning random number table 202ew, like the small winning random number table 202qe and the like in the above-described fourteenth control example, is a random value (first winning random number counter C1 value) is defined in the data table. As shown in FIG. 688(c), in this 24th control example, a random number value (counter value) determined as a small hit is associated only with the second special symbol, and the value range is " 5 to 54”. Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery is "5 54”, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 1/20 (50/1000).
Next, with reference to FIGS. 688(d) and 689, details of the jackpot type selection table 202bw in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. Although illustration is omitted, the jackpot type selection table 202bw in the twenty-fourth control example includes a direct hit table 202bw1 and a small hit table 202bw1 that are referred to for specifying the jackpot type when winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. It comprises at least a V winning table 202bw2 that is referred to for specifying the jackpot type when a jackpot is won due to the occurrence of a V prize during execution of a game. First, the details of the direct hit table 202bw1 will be described with reference to FIG. 688(d).
FIG. 688(d) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the direct hit table 202bw1 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 688(d), in this direct hit table 202bw1, the jackpot type that can be selected for each type of special symbol and the value range of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. It is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 688(d), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the range of "0 to 4", "jackpot A27". "Big win B27" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". “Jackpot A27” is a jackpot (12-round continuation rate S-rank jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 12 rounds and an S-rank time-saving state (rush) is set as a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot B27" is a jackpot (4-round continuation rate E-rank jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and an E-rank time-saving state is set as a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random numbers associated with "jackpot A27" and "jackpot B27" are 5 and 95, respectively. , When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining "jackpot A27" is 5% (5/100), and the percentage of determining "jackpot B27" is 95% (95/100). becomes. In other words, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot B27) with the lowest number of rounds and the lowest continuation rate (rush rank) is determined, so the first special symbol The lottery is a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.

In addition, as shown in Figure 688 (d), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, for the entire range ("0 to 99" range) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, "jackpot C27 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot C27" is a jackpot (12-round continuation rate S-rank jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 12 rounds and an S-rank time-reduction state (rush) is set as a time-reduction state after the end of the jackpot. That is, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds and the highest continuation rate is always determined, so the second special symbol lottery is highly advantageous for the player. It is a lottery.
Next, with reference to FIG. 689, details of the above-described V winning table 202bw2 will be described. FIG. 689 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V-per table 202bw. As shown in FIG. 689, in this V winning table 202bw, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with 13 kinds of jackpot types from "jackpot D27" to "jackpot P27". there is
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 689, "jackpot D27" (12-round continuation rate S rank jackpot) is defined in association with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. "Jack E27" (12-round continuity rate A rank jackpot) is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2 in the range of "1 to 39", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to "40 to 42” range is defined in association with “jackpot F27” (12-round continuity rate B rank jackpot), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “43, 44” for the range of “jackpot G27" (12-round continuation rate C rank jackpot) is defined in association, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of '45 to 49', and 'jackpot H27' (12-round continuation rate D rank jackpot ) is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 52”, “jackpot I27” (8 round continuity rate A rank jackpot) is defined in correspondence, and the first The value of the hit type counter C2 is in the range of "53, 54", and the "jackpot J27" (8-round continuation rate B rank jackpot) is defined in correspondence, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "55 to 57” range is defined in association with “jackpot K27” (6-round continuation rate A rank jackpot), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “58, 59” for the range of “jackpot L27" (6-round continuity rate B rank jackpot) is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 64", "jackpot M27" (4-round continuity rate A rank jackpot ) is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 69”, “jackpot N27” (4 round continuity rate B rank jackpot) is associated and defined, and the first The value of the hit type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 79", and the "jackpot O27" (4 round continuity rate C rank jackpot) is defined in correspondence, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to "80 to 79". 99” is defined in association with “jackpot P27” (4-round continuation rate D-rank jackpot).
That is, among the 100 possible random numbers of the first hit type counter C2, the random number associated with the "jackpot D27" is one, and the random number associated with the "jackpot E27" is 39, 3 random numbers associated with "jackpot F27", 2 random numbers associated with "jackpot G27", and "jackpot H27" There are 5 random numbers, 3 random numbers associated with "jackpot I27", 2 random numbers associated with "jackpot J27", and "jackpot K27". The number of associated random numbers is 3, the number of random numbers associated with "jackpot L27" is 2, the number of random numbers associated with "jackpot M27" is 5, and the number of random numbers associated with "jackpot M27" is 5. There are 5 random numbers associated with the "jackpot N27", 10 random numbers associated with the "jackpot O27", and 20 random numbers associated with the "jackpot P27". is. Therefore, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V prize is awarded, the percentage of determining the "jackpot D27" as the jackpot type is 1%, and the percentage of determining the "jackpot E27". 39%, the percentage of determining "jackpot F27" is 3%, the percentage of determining "jackpot G27" is 2%, the percentage of determining "jackpot H27" is 5%, The percentage of determining “jackpot I27” is 3%, the percentage of determining “jackpot J27” is 2%, the percentage of determining “jackpot K27” is 3%, and the percentage of “jackpot L27” is determined. The percentage of determination is 2%, the percentage of determination of "jackpot M27" is 5%, the percentage of determination of "jackpot N27" is 5%, and the percentage of determination of "jackpot O27" is 10%, and the rate at which the “jackpot P27” is determined is 20.

Thus, in the twenty-fourth control example, 13 types of jackpot types are provided as the jackpot types determined when a V prize occurs in a small win game, and the combination of the number of rounds and the rush continuation rate is diversified. Since it is crossed, when a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time saving state and a V prize is generated, the big prize type notified by the rank-up performance is predicted from the acquired number of the rank-up images RG. can be made difficult. Therefore, every time the effect of consuming the rank-up image RG is executed, the player can play the game while paying more attention to whether the rank of the bonus rank or the rush rank is raised. Interest can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 690(a), the details of the variation pattern table 202dw in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 690(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202dw in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 690(a), the variation pattern table 202dw in the twenty-fourth control example is normally referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. table 202dw1, S rank table 202dw2 referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in S rank rush (time saving state), A rank rush ( A table 202dw3 for A rank, which is referred to for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state), and the special symbol lottery is executed in the B rank rush (time saving state). A table 202dw4 for B rank that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when it is changed, and a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a rush of C rank (time saving state) The S rank table 202dw5 referred to select the S rank referred to select the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the D rank rush (time saving state) table 202dw6, S rank table 202dw7 referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when special symbol lottery is executed in E rank rush (time saving state), normal state, and , a table 202dw8 for one variation after the end of time saving, which is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) until the first lottery for the second special symbol is executed after the end of time saving, and in a normal state, In addition, in order to select a variation pattern (fluctuation time) from the end of the first lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving to the execution of the fifth lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving. It is composed of 9 types of data tables, 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of the shortened working hours to be referred to. Of these, the normal table 202dw1 has the same specified contents as the normal state fluctuation pattern table 202kd1 (see FIG. 266) in the 14th control example (and the ninth control example) (in the lottery for the first special symbol, the lottery Depending on the result, a variable time in the range of 7 seconds to 140 seconds is selected, while the second special symbol lottery has a regulation content that always selects a variable time of 600 seconds), so here it is. Detailed description is omitted.
First, the details of the S rank table 202dw2 will be described with reference to FIG. 690(b). FIG. 690(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the S rank table 202dw2. As shown in FIG. 690 (b), the S rank table 202dw2 defines a fixed variable time associated with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol regardless of the lottery result. It is Specifically, regarding the first special symbol, even if the lottery result is lost or a big hit, the fluctuation time is A 250000ms (250 seconds) variation pattern (missing long variation, winning long variation) is associated and defined. In addition, regarding the second special symbol, even if the lottery result is a loss or a big hit, the variation time is 10000 ms (10 Seconds) variation patterns (missing short variation, winning short variation) are defined in association with each other.
Due to these stipulations, in the S-rank rush (time saving state set after the end of the jackpot A27, C27, D27), every time the lottery of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous (substantially low probability of winning) is executed While an extremely long variation time of 250 seconds is selected for the second special symbol lottery, a short variation time of 10 seconds is set compared to 250 seconds each time the advantageous second special symbol lottery is executed, so the first special It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol which is advantageous (substantial winning probability is high) a plurality of times (around 25 times) during the long fluctuation time of the symbol. In other words, since the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols in the time saving state can be extremely increased, the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased until the lottery of the second special symbols of a specific number of times is executed after the time saving state and the time saving state are ended. Forms a very high state. Specifically, the rate (continuation rate) of winning a win (a jackpot or a small win that is substantially confirmed as a jackpot) in the S-rank rush is 99.7%. Therefore, when the S-rank rush is selected, the situation is almost the same as the next big win is decided, so when the S-rank time-saving state is set, the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made

Next, with reference to FIG. 691(a), details of the A rank table 202dw3 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. As described above, the A rank table 202dw3 is a data table referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state (rush) of the A rank. As shown in FIG. 691 (a), in the A rank table 202dw3, as the variation pattern when the first special symbol is deviated, 6 types of variation patterns are defined for deviating short time variation A to E and deviating long variation. ing. Specifically, as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139", and the variation time is 1000 ms (1 second). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "140 to 310", and the fluctuation time 3000 ms (3 seconds) is defined in association with the deviation B for short time fluctuation, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined. With respect to the range of "311 to 481", the fluctuation time of 5000ms (5 seconds) is defined in association with the fluctuation C for short working hours, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "482 to 742" , the fluctuation time 7000ms (7 seconds) out of time-saving fluctuation D is defined in association, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "743 to 998", the fluctuation time is 10000ms (10 seconds) Outgoing time-saving fluctuation E is defined in correspondence, and outgoing long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 250000 ms (250 seconds) is defined in association with the value "999" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, as a variation pattern at the time of hitting the first special symbol, the variation time is 10000 ms (10 seconds ) is defined in association with the hit time-saving variation E. Moreover, regarding the variation time of the second special symbol, it is common to the S rank table 202dw2, and is set to 10 seconds regardless of the lottery result.
According to these provisions, if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the A-rank rush and the probability is out of 199/200, the fluctuation time is 1 at a rate of 14.0% (140/1000). seconds, 17.1% (171/1000) set the variation time to 3 seconds, 17.1% (171/1000) set the variation time to 5 seconds, and set the variation time to 26.1 % (261/1000) set the variable time to 7 seconds, 25.6% (256/1000) set the variable time to 10 seconds, and 0.1% (1/10000) is set to 250 seconds. On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and a jackpot with a probability of 1/200 is achieved, the variation time is always set to 10 seconds. When these are added up, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 6.17 seconds, and the first end condition is satisfied (the 50th first special symbol lottery is executed after the time saving state is started. The average time until the For this reason, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol 30.2 times on average during the time saving state, so if the lottery of the second special symbol for the final judge effect is also taken into consideration, 35.2 times. The lottery for the second special symbol can be executed.
It should be noted that the B rank table 202dw4 to E rank table 202dw7 are different from the A rank table 202dw3 only in that the distribution of the time saving fluctuation A to the time saving fluctuation E is different. Therefore, the detailed description of the contents of the provisions is omitted, and with reference to FIG. Only the performance will be summarized and explained.
FIG. 692(b) is a diagram showing the rush performance of each rank. As shown in FIG. 692(b), in the S-rank rush in which the S-rank table 202dw2 is referenced, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time is set for 250 seconds at a rate of 100%. Therefore, basically, the time saving state is ended by establishment of the second end condition (the condition that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total). In the S rank rush, the variation time of the first special symbol is 250 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is fixed at 10 seconds, so each special The number of fluctuations in the design is approximately 4 times for the first special design and 96 times for the second special design. Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times executable during the performance of the final judge, the lottery of the second special symbols can be executed 101 times before the final judge performance is finished. Therefore, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again before the final judge effect ends is 2.0% for the first special pattern (percentage of winning a 1/200 jackpot within 4 times) and 99% for the second special pattern. 7% (percentage of 11/200 jackpots or small hits in total within 101 times), and when the first special pattern and the second special pattern are added up, some hit is won at a rate of 99.7%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 692(b), in the A-rank rush in which the A-rank table 202dw3 is referred to, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 13.9% when the first special symbol lottery is executed time was selected, 17% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 17% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 26% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, and 26% selected a variation time of 7 seconds. Since the A rank table 202dw3 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 6.17 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the 49th fluctuation display of the first special symbol is completed) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied The average time to ) is 302.3 seconds (6.17 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery for five times that can be executed during the final judge production is also taken into account, the average number of times is 35.2 times (302.3 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) before the final judge production ends. Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special pattern is 86.4% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small hits within 35.2 times), and when the first special pattern and the second special pattern are combined, 89 .4% chance of winning something.
Further, as shown in FIG. 692(b), in the B-rank rush in which the B-rank table 202dw4 is referred to, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 53.9% time was selected, 10% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 10% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 13% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, and 13% selected a variation time of 5 seconds. Since the B rank table 202dw4 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 3.8 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the 49th fluctuation display of the first special symbol is completed) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied (average time to ) is 186.2 seconds (3.8 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production is also taken into account, the average number of 23.6 times (186.2 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) is Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special symbol is 73.7% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small wins within 23.6 times), and when the first and second special symbols are combined, 79 .5% chance of winning something.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 692(b), in the C-rank rush in which the C-rank table 202dw5 is referred to, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 65.9% time was selected, 7% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 7% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 10% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, 10% Since the C rank table 202dw5 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 3.17 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the 1st special symbol is executed (until the 49th variation display of the 1st special symbol ends) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied The average time until ) is 155.3 seconds (3.17 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production, an average of 20.5 times (155.3 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) by the time the final judge production ends Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special pattern is 68.7% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small hits within 20.5 times), and when the first and second special patterns are combined, 75 .6% chance of winning something.
Further, as shown in FIG. 692(b), in the D rank rush in which the D rank table 202dw6 is referred to, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 85.9% 3% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 3% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 4% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, and 4% selected a variation time of 7 seconds. Since the D rank table 202dw6 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 2.03 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the 49th variation display of the first special symbol is completed) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied The average time to ) is 99.4 seconds (2.03 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production, an average of 14.9 times (99.4 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) by the time the final judge production ends Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special symbol is 57.1% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small wins within 14.9 times), and when the first and second special symbols are combined, 66 .6% chance of winning something.

Further, as shown in FIG. 692(b), in the E-rank rush in which the E-rank table 202dw7 is referred to, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 98.9% Time is selected, 0.5% selects a variation time of 3 seconds, 0.5% selects a variation time of 5 seconds, 0.5% selects a variation time of 7 seconds The E rank table 202dw7 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.5% and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%. The average variation time of 1 special symbol is 1.36 seconds, and the average time until the 50th lottery of the 1st special symbol is executed (until the 49th variation display of the 1st special symbol is completed) (that is, The average time until the first end condition is satisfied is 66.8 seconds (1.36 seconds×49 times). Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production, an average of 11.7 times (66.8 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) by the time the final judge production ends Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special pattern is 48.4% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small hits within 11.7 times), and when the first and second special patterns are combined, 59 .8% chance of winning something.
Thus, in the twenty-fourth control example, by differentiating the variation pattern table to be referred to during the time saving state for each type of rush (time saving state) (jackpot type that triggered the setting of the time saving state), the first The selection ratio of each variable time when the special symbol is out is made different, and the average time until the time saving state ends is made different for each rush type. In other words, by varying the average value of the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed by the end of the rush (time saving state) for each rush type, some kind of hit (jackpot or The ratio of winning a small hit (rush continuation rate) is made different for each type of rush. As a result, it is possible to realize a plurality of rushes with different performances, so that the game characteristics can be varied according to the type of rush. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
It should be noted that the ratio of winning some hits before the end of the rush for each rank shown in FIG. 692(b), the ratio shown in FIG. That is, if left-handed hitting is continued, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into either the right first ball entrance 64r or the second right ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the special symbols is almost the first. A lottery for the first special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the entrance 64 is made. Therefore, since the time-saving state is terminated based on the establishment of the first termination condition, the degree of expectation for a jackpot is 22.2% (percentage of winning a jackpot of 1/200 within 50 times) regardless of the rank. becomes. That is, compared to the case of hitting right, the game method is disadvantageous in that a jackpot can be won only at a very low rate.
Returning to FIG. 691, the description of the variation pattern table 202dw is continued. FIG. 691(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202dw8 for one change after the end of time saving. As described above, the table 202dw8 for one fluctuation after the end of time saving is a data table that is referred to in the normal state until the first lottery for the second special symbol is executed after the end of time saving. As shown in Figure 691 (b), when the table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of this time saving is referenced, regardless of the type of special symbol and the lottery result, data so that the fluctuation time is fixed to 30 seconds is stipulated. That is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the variation time of 30 seconds is always selected and the middle variation is selected, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the medium variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is always selected. As a result, when the second special symbol lottery is executed for the first time after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to set a fluctuation time of 30 seconds without fail, so that the player is prompted to hit the right hand (Fig. 685) (a)) and the effect period for finding the door TG and using the first key (see FIG. 685(b)). can be done.

In addition, although omitted for illustration, in the normal state, and after the first lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving ends until the fifth time the second special symbol lottery after the end of the time saving is executed In the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time reduction, which is referred to for selecting a fluctuation pattern (variation time) between, the fluctuation time of the first special design is fixed for 30 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second special design is fixed. The data are defined so that is fixed for 10 seconds. As a result, it is possible to secure an effect period for reliably executing the effect indicating whether or not the door TG can be broken through every time the reserved ball of the second special symbol is digested.
Next, with reference to FIG. 692(a), the details of the normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa defines a variation pattern table to be referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state for each number of variations of the second special symbol after the normal state is set. Data table. FIG. 692(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa.
As shown in Figure 692 (a), the normal state for the variation pattern scenario table 202wa, any of the jackpot A27 ~ P27 ends, and as a variation pattern scenario after the time saving state ends, to the normal state A table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of time saving is defined in correspondence with the period in which the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol after the shift is up to 1 time, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 2 times to 5 times. For the period, the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of the time saving is defined in correspondence, and the normal table 202dw1 is defined in association with the range where the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 6 times or more. It is On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 692(a), the normal state (perfectly In the state where no prize is won), a scenario is set that is defined in association with the normal table 202dw1 regardless of the number of lotteries.
By selecting a variation pattern with reference to this normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa, the variation time is longer than normal (600 seconds) only for the first to fifth second special symbol lotteries after the end of the time saving state. Since it can be shortened, it is possible to form a period in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed immediately after the end of the time saving state, and to execute the final judge presentation. Therefore, even if the time-saving state ends, an advantageous state can be formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of expectation is executed a plurality of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 687(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 687(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 687(b), the RAM 203 in the twenty-fourth control example has a rush type storage area 203wa and The difference is that a counter 203wb, a special figure 2 variation counter 203wc, a small hit flag 203we, and a winning state storage area 203wf are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fourteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The rush type storage area 203wa is a storage area for storing information indicating the rush type. The initial value of this rush type storage area 203wa is set to "00H", and data indicating the rush type corresponding to the current jackpot type is stored at the end of the jackpot (at the time of transition to the rush) (Y11631 in FIG. 707). reference). More specifically, if the current rush is an S-rank rush, "01H" is stored in the rush type storage area 203wa, if an A-rank rush, "02H" is stored, and if a B-rank rush, "02H" is stored. If there is, "03H" is stored, if there is a C-rank crash, "04H" is stored, if there is a D-rank crash, "05H" is stored, and if there is an E-rank crash, "06H" is stored. On the other hand, the stored data is set to "00H" in a state other than the rush (normal state or during execution of a jackpot game). The rush type (time saving state type) is determined by the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa, and the rush type (time saving type) is determined each time the lottery condition for the first special symbol is satisfied during the time saving state. A variation time (variation pattern) can be selected by reading a variation pattern corresponding to . Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a plurality of time saving states with different continuation rates.
Special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203wb is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the first special symbol executed after the normal state or time saving state is set, and the second fluctuation counter 203wc is normal state or It is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the first special symbols executed after the time saving state is set. In the normal state, one variation pattern table is identified from the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa by referring to the values of the special figure 1 variation counter 203wb and the special figure 2 variation counter 203wc.
The small hit flag 203we is a flag that is set to ON when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit (see Y8061 in FIG. 702). This small hit flag 203we is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit of the second special symbol (see Y971 in FIG. 706). While the small hit flag 203we is on and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the first special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped. 706 is executed (see Y958 in FIG. 706). As a result, when the lottery for the first special symbol becomes a big win and the lottery for the second special symbol becomes a small win, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the small win and the big win are started at the same time. In addition, the win state storage area 203wf is a storage area for storing data indicating the game state when the big win is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 693(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 693(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 693(a), the ROM 222 in the twenty-fourth control example has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described fourteenth control example (and the fourth control example) (see FIG. The only difference is that the notification mode selection table 222fa is deleted and a rank-up effect table 222wa and a rank-up determination table 222wb are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fourteenth control example (and the fourth control example), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
FIG. 694(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rank-up effect table 222wa described above. The rank-up effect table 222wa is a data table that defines the number of times the effect of acquiring the rank-up image RG occurs in the rank-up effect for each jackpot type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 694(a), the jackpot A27 (12-round continuation rate S rank jackpot) is defined in association with the number of acquisitions of the rank-up image RG 5 times, and the jackpot B27 (4 The number of acquisition times 0 is defined in association with the round continuation rate E rank jackpot), jackpots C27, D27 (12 round continuation rate S rank jackpot), jackpot E27 (12 round continuation rate A rank jackpot), jackpot F27. (12-round continuation rate B rank jackpot), 5 wins are defined in association with the jackpot G27 (12-round continuation rate C rank jackpot), and for the jackpot H27 (12-round continuation rate D rank jackpot) , 4 acquisition times are defined in association with jackpot I27 (8-round continuity rate A rank jackpot), jackpot J27 (8-round continuity rate B-rank jackpot), and jackpot K27 (6-round continuity rate A rank jackpot). , the number of acquisitions of 5 times is defined in correspondence, and the number of acquisitions of 4 times is defined in association with the jackpot L27 (6-round continuation rate B rank jackpot) and the jackpot M27 (4-round continuation rate A rank jackpot), The number of wins of 3 times is defined in association with the jackpot N27 (continuation rate of 4 rounds B rank jackpot), and the number of times of acquisition of 2 times is defined in correspondence with the jackpot O27 (continuation rate of 4 rounds C rank jackpot). , and the number of wins of 1 is defined in association with the jackpot P27 (4-round continuation rate D rank jackpot).
In this way, by providing variations in the number of acquisitions of the rank-up image RG according to the type of jackpot, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, there are jackpot types with a number of ranks exceeding 5 ranks due to the rank-up effect (for example, jackpots A27, C27, and D27 rise by 8 ranks, jackpot E27 rises by 7 ranks, and jackpot F27 rises by 6 ranks). Nevertheless, by setting the upper limit of the number of acquisition times of the rank-up image RG to 5 times, it is made impossible to specify the type of jackpot by the number of times of acquisition of the rank-up image RG, and each rank is determined in the rank-up effect. It is possible to make the player perform the game while paying more attention to whether the player will rise to the rank. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, the details of the rank-up determination table 222wb will be described with reference to FIG. 694(b). This rank-up determination table 222wb is a data table referred to when determining whether or not the rank-up effect (see FIG. 684) can be executed in the time saving state (rush). FIG. 694(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the rank-up discrimination table 222wb. As shown in FIG. 694(b), the rank-up determination table 222wb stores the remaining time on the display (the time indicated by the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc) and the surplus time with respect to the minimum guaranteed time (surplus time storage area 223wd). The corresponding rank is defined in association with each range of values of the sum (T) with the time indicated by the data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 694(b), the S rank is defined in association with the range where T is 850 seconds or more, and the range where T is 302.3 seconds or more and less than 850 seconds A rank is defined in correspondence, B rank is defined in association with T in the range of 186.2 seconds or more and less than 302.3 seconds, and T is 155.3 seconds or more and less than 186.2 seconds C rank is defined in correspondence with the range, D rank is defined in correspondence with the range where T is 99.4 seconds or more and less than 155.3 seconds, and T is defined in the range of less than 99.4 seconds The E rank is defined in association with this.

In the twenty-fourth control example, the sum (T) of the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is calculated each time the second special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state. , the rank corresponding to the calculated time T is identified by referring to the rank-up determination table 222wb. Then, when the identified rank is higher than the currently set rank, a rank-up effect (see FIG. 684) is executed. In other words, if a long variable time continues to be fortunately selected in the first special symbol lottery, there is a situation in which surplus time corresponding to a rank higher than the rank of the time-saving state actually set occurs. In such a case, an effect to rank up to the higher rank is executed. By configuring in this manner, the rush rank can be suitably updated in accordance with the game situation of the player (variation time selection situation), so that the effect mode can be suitably set. In addition, even if a low rank is notified, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a rank-up effect (see FIG. 684). can be suppressed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 693(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 693(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 693(b), the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth control example has a winning type storage area 223wa and a rank-up frequency counter 223wb in comparison with the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourteenth control example (see FIG. 410). , and a guaranteed time timer 223wc and a surplus time storage area 223wd are added. Another difference is that the add-on RUSH counter 223qa, the base count counter 223qb, and the add-on count counter 223qc are eliminated.
The hit type storage area 223wa is a storage area for storing information indicating the jackpot type. Various information about the big win and the rush is displayed according to the data stored in the win type storage area 223wa. For example, the ranks corresponding to the data stored in the win type storage area 223wa are notified as the bonus rank and the rush rank finally notified in the rank-up effect. Moreover, after shifting to the time saving state, the rush rank corresponding to the data stored in the hit type storage area 223wa is displayed.
The rank-up number counter 223wb is a counter in which a counter value indicating the remaining number of rank-up occurrences in the rank-up effect is set. The rank-up number counter 223wb has an initial value set to 0, and when the jackpot starts, the rank-up number corresponding to the jackpot type is specified from the rank-up performance table 222wa, and the specified rank-up number is set. (S4761 in FIG. 711). In addition, the value is decremented by 1 and updated every time a rank-up effect is set in the rank-up effect (see S5422 in FIG. 708). By managing the number of times of rank-up by means of this rank-up number counter 223wb, it is possible to reliably generate the number of times of rank-up corresponding to the jackpot type.

Guaranteed time timer 223wc is a timer in which the minimum guaranteed period (displayed period) is set as the period until the time saving state ends. In this guarantee time timer 223wc, a timer value corresponding to 49 seconds (shortest variation time of the first special symbol 1 second x 49 times) is set when the first lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state. (see S9703A in FIG. 712), and the timer value is decremented as time passes (see S21043 in FIG. 710). Also, when the remaining time added effect (see FIG. 683) is executed, the timer value corresponding to the number of seconds notified by the remaining time added effect is added.
The surplus time storage area 223wd is a storage area for storing data indicating deviation from the guaranteed time. Here, as described above, after entering the time saving state, the first guaranteed time displayed is the time (49 seconds) when it is assumed that the first special symbol lottery is set to 1 second, which is the shortest variation time. is set. Therefore, if a variation time longer than 1 second is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, the end timing of the actual time saving state is shifted (extended) with respect to the guaranteed time. In the twenty-fourth control example, every time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the deviation time from the shortest variation time of one second is added to the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9704A in FIG. 712). See), when the difference is accumulated over a predetermined amount, the configuration is such that an effect for adding the remaining time (remaining time adding effect) is executed with a predetermined trigger. As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which the time-saving state does not know how long it will last. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 695 to 707. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 695, details of the first special symbol variation start process (Y261) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 695 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (Y261) in the twenty-fourth control example. This first special symbol variation start process (Y261) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation start process ( Figure 412 reference), while executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it is a process for starting the variable display according to the lottery result.
Of the first special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 695) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each processing of Y302 to Y306, Y302 to Y302 of the first special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example respectively The same processing as each processing of Y306 is executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 695) in the twenty-fourth control example, when the process of S306 ends, instead of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413) in the fourteenth control example, the first A special symbol determination process (Y341) is executed, and then a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y342) is performed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 415) in the fourteenth control example. Next, instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example), the first special symbol game state update process is executed (Y343), and this process ends. For details of these first special symbol determination processing (Y341), first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (Y342), and first special symbol game state update processing (Y343), see FIGS. 698 as described below.

Next, with reference to FIG. 696, details of the first special symbol determination process (Y341) described above will be described. FIG. 696 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol determination process (Y341). This first special symbol determination process (Y341) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413). ), it is a process for executing the jackpot determination of the first special symbol.
Among the first special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 696) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each of Y8001 to Y8006 and Y8011 processing, Y8001 of the first special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 413) in the fourteenth control example ˜ Y8006 and the same processing as Y8011 are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 696) in the twenty-fourth control example, in the process of Y8003, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (Y8003: No), the The first special symbol is set to the one-symbol display device 37 (Y8021), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 697, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y342) described above will be described. FIG. 697 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y342). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y342) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 415) in the fourteenth control example described above, and is the first special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 415), this is a process for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol according to the lottery result of the first special symbol.
Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 697) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512, the first special symbol variation pattern selection in the fourteenth control example The same processes as Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512 of the process (see FIG. 415) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 697) in the twenty-fourth control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, then the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is greater than 0 (1 or more value) (Y531), and if it is determined to be a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y531: Yes), the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa indicates A variation pattern table corresponding to the rush type (rush rank) is specified (Y532), and the process proceeds to Y512. On the other hand, in the process of Y531, if it is determined that the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is 0 (Y531: No), the value of the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa and the special figure 1 variation counter 203wb , and the corresponding variation pattern table is specified (Y533), and the process proceeds to Y512.

Next, with reference to FIG. 698, details of the special figure 1 game state update process (Y343) described above will be described. Figure 698 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 game state update process (Y343). This special figure 1 game state update process (Y343) is a process executed instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) in the 14th control example (and the ninth control example), and the game state update process (FIG. 274 reference), it is a process for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and shifting to the normal state when the end condition is satisfied.
In this special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 698), first, add 1 to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203wb and update (Y611), then the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (value equal to or greater than 1) (Y612). In the process of Y612, if it is determined that the value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is 0 (Y612: No), it means that it is not in the time saving state (normal state), so this process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, in the process of Y612, if it is determined that the value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Y612: Yes), it means that the current time is in a time saving state Then, the values of the first counter 203h1 during time saving and the second counter 203h2 during time saving are updated by subtracting 1 (Y613), and the values of the first counter 203h1 during time saving after updating and the second counter 203h2 during time saving (Y614).
When the process of Y614 is completed, it is then determined whether or not at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 by the process of Y613 (Y615). This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 in the process of Y615 (Y615: Yes), the state command indicating the transition to the normal state is set (Y616), and the first counter 203h1 during time saving , the second counter 203h2 during time saving, and the data of the rush type storage area 203wa are all cleared to 0 (Y617). Then, the value of the special figure 1 variation counter 203wb and the special figure 2 variation counter 203wc is reset to 1 (Y618), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 699, the details of the first special symbol variation stop process (Y262) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process (Y262) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 417) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation stop process ( Figure 417 reference), when the fluctuation time in the 1st special design passes, it is the processing in order to set the stop indication in the 1st special design.

Of the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 699) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each of the processes Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, and Y723 to Y726, the first special symbol variation stop in the fourteenth control example The same processes as Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, and Y723 to Y726 of the process (see FIG. 417) are executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 699) in the twenty-fourth control example, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is not ON in the processing of Y721 (Y721: No) , Set the special figure 1 confirmation command (Y732), stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (Y733), and finish this process.
In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 699) in the twenty-fourth control example, instead of the processing of Y727, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol, the first counter 203h1 during time saving, and during time saving A process of resetting all the second counters 203h2 to initial values is executed (Y731), and the process proceeds to Y704.
Next, with reference to FIG. 700, details of the second special symbol variation start process (Y263) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This second special symbol variation start process (Y263) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 419) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the second special symbol variation start process ( Figure 419 reference), while executing the lottery of the second special symbol, it is a process for starting the variable display according to the lottery result.
Of the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 700) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each of the processes Y832 to Y836, Y851, and Y852, the second special symbol variation start processing in the fourteenth control example (FIG. 419 reference), the same processes as those of Y832 to Y836, Y851 and Y852 are executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 700) in the twenty-fourth control example, when the process of S836 ends, the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420) in the fourteenth control example is replaced with the second A special symbol determination process (Y861) is executed, and then a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y862) is performed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 422) in the fourteenth control example. Then, instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example), the special figure 2 game state update process is executed (Y863), and this process ends. Details of these second special symbol determination processing (Y861), second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (Y862), and special figure 2 game state update processing (Y863) are shown in FIGS. 701, 703, and 704, respectively. will be described later with reference to

Next, with reference to FIG. 701, details of the second special symbol determination process (Y861) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 701 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol determination process (Y861). This second special symbol determination process (Y861) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420). ), it is a process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol.
Of the second special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 701) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each of Y8101 to Y8106 and Y8111, Y8101 of the second special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 420) in the fourteenth control example ˜ Y8106 and the same processing as Y8111 are executed. Also, in the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 701) in the twenty-fourth control example, in the process of Y8103, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is not a big hit (Y8103: No), a small A small winning lottery process for lottery for the presence or absence of a winning lottery is executed (Y8121), and this process is terminated. The details of this small winning lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 702 is a flow chart showing the small winning lottery process (Y8121) in the twenty-fourth control example. In this small hit lottery process (Y8121), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (Y8053), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (Y8053 : Yes), set the small hit flag 203we to ON (Y8061). When the process of Y8061 is finished, then the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small winning (Y8062), and the small winning symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y8063). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y8053, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is not a small hit (it is a complete loss) (Y8053: No), the second symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 A special symbol is set (Y8064), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 703, the details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y862) described above will be described. FIG. 703 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y862). This second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y862) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 422) in the fourteenth control example described above, and is the second special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 422), it is a process for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 703) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each process of Y921 to Y923 and Y925 to Y928, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the fourteenth control example ( The same processes as those of Y921 to Y923 and Y925 to Y928 of (see Y854 in FIG. 422) are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 703) in the twenty-fourth control example, when the process of Y923 is completed, then the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is greater than 0 (1 or more value) (Y941), and if it is determined to be a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y941: Yes), the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa indicates A variation pattern table corresponding to the rush type (rush rank) is identified (Y942), and the process proceeds to Y944. On the other hand, in the process of Y941, when it is determined that the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is 0 (Y941: No), the value of the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa and the special figure 2 variation counter 203wc , and the corresponding variation pattern table is specified (Y943), and the process proceeds to Y944. In the process of Y944, the variation pattern table specified in the process of Y942 or Y943 is read (Y944), and the process proceeds to Y925.
Next, with reference to FIG. 704, details of the above-described special figure 2 game state update process (Y863) will be described. Figure 704 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 game state update process (Y863). This special figure 2 game state update process (Y863) is a process executed instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) in the 14th control example (and the ninth control example), and the game state update process (Fig. 274 reference), it is a process for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and shifting to the normal state when the end condition is satisfied.
In this special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 704), first, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203wc and updated (Y621), then the counter value of the second counter 203h1 during time saving It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (value equal to or greater than 1) (Y622). In the process of Y622, if it is determined that the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is 0 (Y622: No), it means that it is not in the time saving state (it is in the normal state), so this process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, in the process of Y622, if it is determined that the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Y622: Yes), it means that the current time is a time saving state Then, the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is updated by subtracting 1 (Y623), and the remaining time saving command indicating the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving after updating is set (Y624).
After the process of Y624 is completed, it is then determined whether or not at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 by the process of Y623 (Y625). This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 in the process of Y625 (Y625: Yes), the state command indicating the transition to the normal state is set (Y626), and the first counter 203h1 during time saving , the second counter 203h2 during time saving, and the data of the rush type storage area 203wa are all cleared to 0 (Y627). Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203wb and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203wc are reset to 1 (Y628), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 705, details of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y264) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This second special symbol variation stop process (Y264) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 423) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the second special symbol variation stop process ( Figure 423 reference), when fluctuation time in the 2nd special design passes, it is the processing in order to set the stop indication in the 1st special design.
Of the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 705) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each of Y1101, Y1102, Y1104, Y1105, Y1106, Y1108, Y1109, Y1110, and Y1111 processing, in the fourteenth control example The same processes as Y901, Y921, Y922, Y923, Y924, Y925, Y906, Y908, and Y909 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 423) are executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 705) in the twenty-fourth control example, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is not ON in the processing of Y1102 (Y1102: No) , the special figure 2 deviating stop processing for stop-displaying the deviating symbol of the second special symbol is executed (Y1103), and this processing is terminated. The details of this special figure 2 out stop processing (Y1103) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 705) in the twenty-fourth control example, instead of the process of Y925, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol, the first counter 203h1 during time saving, and during time saving A process of resetting all the second counters 203h2 to initial values is executed (Y1107), and the process proceeds to Y1108.
Next, with reference to FIG. 706, the details of the special figure 2 deviating stop process (Y1103) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. Figure 706 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviating stop processing (Y1103). This special figure 2 out stop processing (Y1103) is similar to the special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 425) in the above-described 14th control example, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (completely out or small hit) It is a process for setting a stop symbol when it becomes.

Of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (see FIG. 706) in this 24th control example, in each process of Y952 to Y958, Y960, and Y961, the special figure 2 deviating stop processing in the 14th control example (see FIG. 425) , Y952 to Y958, Y960, and Y961 are executed. Also, when the special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 706) in the 24th control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203we is on (Y971), and when it is on If it is determined (Y971), the process proceeds to Y952, and if it is determined to be off (Y971: No), the process proceeds to Y960. In addition, in the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (see FIG. 706) in the twenty-fourth control example, when the processing of Y958 ends, the small hit flag 203we is set to OFF (Y972), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 707, details of the jackpot control process (Y1011) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 707 is a flow chart showing the jackpot control process (Y1011) in the twenty-fourth control example. This jackpot control process (Y1011) is, like the jackpot control process (see FIG. 288) in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example) described above, a process for executing various controls during execution of the jackpot game. be.
Among the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 707) in the twenty-fourth control example, Y11601 to Y11612 of the jackpot control processing in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example) (see FIG. 288) are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 707) in the twenty-fourth control example, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come in the processing of Y11612 (Y11612: Yes), then the rush corresponding to the jackpot type this time Data indicating the type (lash rank) is stored in the rush type storage area 203wa (Y11631). In the processing of Y11631, if the current jackpot is a jackpot type corresponding to an S-rank rush, "01H" is stored, and if it is a jackpot type corresponding to an A-rank rush, "02H" is stored, and a B-rank rush is stored. "03H" is stored for the corresponding jackpot type, "04H" is stored for the jackpot type corresponding to the C-rank rush, and "05H" is stored for the jackpot type corresponding to the D-rank rush, If the jackpot type corresponds to the E-rank crash, "06H" is stored.
When the process of Y11631 is completed, then, by setting the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving to 50 and setting the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving to 100, the first condition for ending the time saving state The end condition (end condition established when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed 50 times) and the second end condition (the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed a total of 100 times (Y11632). Next, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (Y11633), the end of the jackpot is set (Y11634), the flag 203k during jackpot is set to OFF (Y11635), and this processing is finished.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 708 to 713. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 708, details of the rendering update process (S4161) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This effect update process (S4161) is executed in place of the effect update process (S4111) in the fourteenth control example (and first control example) in the main process (see FIG. 58) of the sound lamp control device 113. , which is a process for periodically (at each execution interval of the main process) updating various presentation modes being executed.
As shown in FIG. 708, when the effect update process (FIG. 708) is executed, whether or not the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether or not the rank-up effect is being executed) (S5411), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5411: No), it means that the rank-up effect is not being executed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S5412). In the processing of S5412, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S5412: No), the final judge production process for updating the production mode when the final judge production is being executed is executed (S5413), and the process ends. The details of this final judge rendering process (S5413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5412, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S5412: Yes), the time saving production setting process for updating the production during the time saving state is executed (S5414 ), the process ends. The details of the effect setting process (S5414) during this time reduction will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the processing of S5411, when it is determined that the counter value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is a value greater than 0 (S5411: Yes), the effect of consuming the rank-up image RG (see FIG. 681(b)) is executed. It is determined whether or not it is time to generate (S5415), and if it is determined that it is not time to generate an effect (see FIG. 681(b)) that consumes the rank-up image RG (S5415: No), this process is continued. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S5415, if it is determined that it is time to generate an effect (see FIG. 681(b)) that consumes the rank-up image RG (S5415: Yes), then the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is 1 (that is, it is time to consume the last rank-up image RG stocked) (S5416). (S5416: Yes), the bonus rank corresponding to the jackpot type of this time, the effect of the effect mode to rank up to the rush rank is set (S5417), and the process proceeds to S5422.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5416, if it is determined that the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is not 1 (S5416: No), one of the bonus rank and the rush rank is up to the upper limit value corresponding to the current hit type. It is determined whether or not the rank has already increased (S5418), and if it is determined that one rank has already reached the upper limit (S5418: Yes), the rank of the side that has not reached the upper limit is changed to 1 The effect mode for increasing the rank is set (S5419), and the process proceeds to S5422. On the other hand, in the processing of S5418, if it is determined that neither the bonus rank nor the rush rank has reached the upper limit (S5418: No), it is determined whether the rank to be upgraded this time is the bonus rank or the rush rank. It is determined by lottery (S5420). This lottery is configured so that the ratio of the bonus rank and the rush rank are both 50%. As a result, when the effect of consuming the rank-up image RG is executed, it is possible to give randomness to the type of the rank that is actually upgraded, so that the player can feel the thrill of not knowing which rank will be raised. can be held against Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. When the processing of S5420 ends, the effect mode is set to raise the rank of the type determined by the processing of S5420 by one rank (S5421), and the processing proceeds to S5422. In the processing of S5422, which is executed after any one of S5417, S5419, and S5421 is finished, the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is updated by subtracting 1 (S5422), and this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 709, the details of the above-described final judge effect processing (S5413) will be described. When the final judge effect in progress processing (S5413) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the final judge effect is being executed (S21031). ), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S21031, if it is determined that the final judge effect is being executed (S21031: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command of the second special symbol is received (S21032), winning a prize If it is determined that the information command has been received (S21032: Yes), then it is determined whether the elapsed time from the start of the first variation display of the second special symbol in the final judge production is less than 10 seconds. (S21033). In the process of S21033, if it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the first variation of the second special symbol is less than 10 seconds (S21033: Yes), the key of the mode according to the look-ahead result indicated by the winning information command An effect to be stocked is set (S21034), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S21033, if it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first second special symbol is not less than 10 seconds (10 seconds or more have passed) (S21033: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to S21035.
On the other hand, in the process of S21032, if it is determined that the winning information command of the second special symbol has not been received (S21032: No), then 10 seconds have passed since the first fluctuation start of the second special symbol (S21035), and if it is determined that 10 seconds have passed (S21035: Yes), the variable display lottery currently being executed indicated by the data in the winning information storage area 223b. Based on the result, the effect mode of the remaining variation time (whether to execute the effect of successfully breaking through the door TG or to execute the effect of failing) is determined (S21036), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 710, the details of the effect setting process (S5414) during time reduction described above will be described. FIG. 710 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process (S5414) during this reduction in working hours. When the time saving effect setting process (S5414) is executed, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is a value greater than 0 (S21041). ) (S21041: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S21041, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is greater than 0 (S21041: Yes), then the first special symbol variation is stopped to form a non-variation state It is determined whether or not (S21042). In the processing of S21042, when it is determined that the first special symbol forms a non-variable state (S21042: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S21402, if it is determined that the second special symbol does not form a non-fluctuation state (S21042: No), the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is updated (S21043), after the update According to the timer value, the display of the remaining time until the final judge effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated (S21044), and it is checked whether the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc after the update has become 0. It discriminates (S21045). In the process of S21045, if it is determined that the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is not 0 (S21045: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S21045 that the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc has been updated to 0 (S21045: Yes), then the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is data indicating the number of seconds greater than 0. It is determined whether or not (S21046). In the process of S21046, if it is determined that data indicating the number of seconds greater than 0 is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S21046: Yes), the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wd is set to the value of the surplus time storage area 223wc. The displayed surplus time is added and updated (S21047), the effect mode in which the added surplus time is added to the display of the remaining time until the final judge effect is set (S21048), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S21046, if it is determined that the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is data indicating 0 seconds (S21046: No), it means that the time saving state ends, so the final judge production The start is set (S21049), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 711, the details of the jackpot related process (S44321) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This jackpot-related process (S44321) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 64) in the fourteenth control example (and the first control example) described above. Similarly, when a jackpot-related command is received from the main controller 110, it is a process for executing control according to the type of the received command.
Among the jackpot-related processes (see FIG. 711) in the twenty-fourth control example, in each of the processes of S4701, S4709, S4710, and S4714, the jackpot-related processes in the fourteenth control example (and the first control example) (see FIG. 64) ) are executed in steps S4701, S4709, S4710, and S4714. In addition, in the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 711) in the twenty-fourth control example, when it is determined that the jackpot start command is received in the processing of S4701 (S4701: Yes), then the rank up corresponding to this jackpot type The number of times is specified by referring to the rank-up effect table 222wa (S4761), and the specified number of times of rank-up is set as the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb (S4762). Next, the rank-up effect (see FIG. 681(a)) of the effect mode for acquiring the rank-up image for the set counter value is set (S4763), and the generation timing of the effect of consuming the rank-up image RG is set to S4762. (S4764), and this process ends.
Also, in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 711) in the twenty-fourth control example, when it is determined that the ending command is received in the process of S4714 (S4714: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4765). , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 712, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5101A) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. Figure 712 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5101A). The special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5101A) in the 24th control example is executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 67) in the 14th control example (and the 1st control example). There is, similar to the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 67), when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol is received from the main control device 110, the variation display effect according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command It is a process for setting the effect mode of.
As shown in FIG. 712, when the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 712) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (S9701A), and it is a time saving state. If it is determined (S9701A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the first variation display of the first special symbol in the time saving state (S9702A). In the processing of S9702A, when it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed for the first time (S9702A: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 49 seconds is set for the guaranteed time timer 223wc (S9703A), and processing is performed. to S9704A. On the other hand, in the process of S9702A, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in the first variable display (S9702A: No), the process of S9703A is skipped and the process proceeds to S9704A.
In the process of S9704A, the time obtained by subtracting one second from the current variation time is added to the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd for updating (S9704A), and the process proceeds to S9705A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9701A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S9701A: No), the processing of S9702A to S9704A is skipped, and the processing is shifted to S9705A .
In the processing of S9705A, the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9705A), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9706A), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 713, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. Figure 713 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 68) in the 14th control example (and the first control example) described above. 2 production mode setting process (see FIG. 68), when the variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received from the main control device 110, the production mode of the variation display performance corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command This is a process for setting
When this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 713) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (S9621A), and if it is determined that it is a time saving state ( S9621A: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is completely lost (neither the big hit nor the small hit is won) (S9641A). In the processing of S9621A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S9621A: No), and in the processing of S9641A, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not completely out (jackpot or It is a small hit) (S9641A: No), the production mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9622A), and the process proceeds to S9611.
On the other hand, in the process of S9641A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is completely out (S9641A: Yes), the data defined in the rank-up determination table 222wb (see FIG. 694 (b)) , the rank corresponding to the sum (T) of the time indicated by the current timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd is specified (S9642A). Next, it is determined whether or not the rank specified in the process of S9642A is higher than the currently set rank (S9643A), and it is determined that a higher rank than the currently set rank has been specified. If so (S9643A: Yes), the effect mode with the rank-up effect to the specified rank is determined (S9644A), and the process proceeds to S9611.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9643A that a rank lower than the current rank is identified (S9643A: No), whether or not data indicating a surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd. (S9645A). In the processing of S9645A, when it is determined that data indicating the surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored (S9645A: Yes), the time to add the remaining time by adding effect is determined by lottery (S9646A), and the determination result (S9647A), the added time is added to the guaranteed time timer 223wc and subtracted from the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9648A), and the process proceeds to S9611. In the process of S9646A, the ratio of determining not to execute the additional effect for the remaining time (determining the additional time to be 0 seconds) is set to 75%, and the remaining 25% is a multiple of 10 in the range below the surplus time. seconds are evenly distributed. For example, if the surplus time is 45 seconds, 75% of the remaining time does not add production, 6.25% of 10 seconds is added, and 6.25% of 20 seconds is added. Override is determined, and controlled to determine overtime of 30 seconds at a rate of 6.25% and overtime of 40 seconds at a rate of 6.25%.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9645A, if it is determined that the data indicating the surplus time of less than 10 seconds is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9645A: No), the processing of S9646A to S9648A is skipped and the processing is performed. to S9611. In the processing of S9611, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9611), and this processing ends.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example, by varying the lottery frequency of the first special symbol (the tendency of the variation time to be selected) according to the setting opportunity (jackpot type) of the time saving state, the time saving The number of lotteries of the second special symbols executed until the end of the state is made different. More specifically, by changing the variation pattern table to be referenced during the time saving state for each type of rush (time saving state) (jackpot type that triggered the setting of the time saving state), when the first special symbol is off , and the average time until the time saving state ends (the first end condition is satisfied by executing the first special symbol lottery 50 times) for each rush type It is configured to be different. In other words, by varying the average value of the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed by the end of the rush (time saving state) for each rush type, some kind of hit (jackpot or The ratio of winning a small hit (rush continuation rate) is made different for each type of rush. As a result, it is possible to realize a plurality of rushes with different performances, so that the game characteristics can be varied according to the type of rush. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in this 24th control example, it is configured so that a small win can be won only in the lottery of the second special symbol, and as in the above-described 14th control example, etc., a small win is won and a small win game is executed. By continuing to hit to the right during the game, it is possible to almost generate a V prize and execute a jackpot game. In other words, in the lottery of the second special symbol, not only when the big win is won, but also when the small win is won, the big win is substantially determined. In the twenty-fourth control example, in the normal state, basically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, an extremely long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set so that the second While the lottery of the special pattern is made difficult to be executed, only the lottery of the second special pattern of the specified number of times after the end of the time saving state is constituted so that the fluctuation time is shortened. As a result, it is possible to secure the lottery opportunities for the second special symbols for the specific number of times after the time saving state is finished.
Here, conventionally, a plurality of special symbols with different degrees of advantage (a first special symbol and a second special symbol with a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) are provided, and during a disadvantageous game state, a first disadvantageous symbol is provided. Lottery of special symbols is easier to be executed (start winning of the second special symbols is less likely to occur), while the lottery of the second special symbols is easier to be executed when the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state ( A game machine that employs a control that makes it easier for the second special symbol to start winning is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the last variation display in an advantageous gaming state, a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is activated to start winning. Whether the lottery result corresponding to winning is included in the lottery result of the final lottery of the second special pattern and the lottery result of the ball of the second special pattern in an advantageous game state by accumulating the reserved balls of the special pattern. There are also those that execute an effect to notify whether or not. However, as in the twenty-fourth control example, when adopting a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed at the same time (in parallel), in an advantageous gaming state, the second There is a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed multiple times during the execution of the variable display of the two special symbols, and a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed at all during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the number of times of time saving is in the state of one time remaining at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is judged that there is a high possibility that the last second special symbol will be displayed in an advantageous game state. The lottery for the first special pattern is not executed during the variable display of the second special pattern and the time saving state is the next second special pattern lottery despite the execution of the performance of storing the reserved balls of the second special pattern. Or, conversely, for example, when the lottery of the second special symbol was started, the number of time reductions remained relatively large (e.g., 8 times, etc.), so the production to accumulate the reserved balls was not executed. Nevertheless, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is frequently executed, and the advantageous game state ends before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There is a possibility, and it may become difficult to execute the effect of accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol at an appropriate timing.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth control example, the second ball entrance 640 as a start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbols can be easily thrown into the second ball entrance 640 simply by hitting to the right regardless of the game state. A second special pattern advantageous in a normal state is configured as a starting prize winning port that allows a ball to enter, and is controlled so that the variation time of the second special pattern is basically set to an extremely long time in a normal state. While suppressing the execution of the lottery, only the lottery of the second special symbol of a specific number after the advantageous time saving state ends, by shortening the fluctuation time, the second executed immediately after the time saving state ends. 2 It is constructed so as to be able to execute the effect of accumulating the reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbols. By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely execute the performance for accumulating the reserved balls, and also more reliably perform a series of performances indicating whether or not there is a win in the lottery of the second special symbols being executed and reserved. Since it can be executed at any time, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode.
In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, when many long fluctuation times are fortunately selected in the time saving state, there is a large margin with respect to the average time until the end of the time saving corresponding to the set rush type (rank). Under the situation that occurs, it is configured to be able to execute a rank-up effect that raises the rank of the rush. As a result, even if a low rush rank is notified, the player can play the game in anticipation of the occurrence of a rank increase during the rush, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the 24th control example, the number of rounds of the jackpot (bonus rank) and the degree of advantage of the time-saving state after the jackpot (rush rank) are displayed. , but not limited to these. For example, it may be executed during execution of a jackpot round game, or may be executed during an interval period. Also, the notification of the bonus rank and the notification of the rush rank do not necessarily have to be collectively notified by one rank-up effect, and may be configured to be notified by separate effects. More specifically, for example, the bonus rank (the number of rounds of the jackpot) is configured to be notified at any timing up to the fourth round of the jackpot, and the rush rank (continuation rate of the time saving state) is the ending period of the jackpot or It may be configured to be notified during the variable display effect related to the lottery of the second special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, the first time or the fifth time) after the shift to the time saving state (rush).
In the twenty-fourth control example, the bonus rank and the rush rank corresponding to the jackpot pattern are always notified by the rank-up effect, but a rank lower than the actual one may be notified at a predetermined rate. Then, when a rank lower than the actual rank is reported in the rank-up effect, the effect of increasing the rank to the actual rank may be executed at a predetermined notification timing. Specifically, for example, as a predetermined notification timing, for example, when the bonus rank is notified lower in the rank-up effect, the final round corresponding to the notified rank (8th round if B rank) , 6th round for C rank, and 4th round for D rank), an effect for increasing the rank to the actual rank may be generated. Also, for example, when the rush rank is reported to be low in the rank-up effect, the final round of the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot, and the second special symbol fluctuation display period of the specified number of times (for example, the first time) after the end of the jackpot A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated in which the player ranks up to the actual rank moderately. With this configuration, even if a low rank is reported in the rank-up performance, the player can expect a further rank-up after that, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.

In this 24th control example, the table 202dw8 (see FIG. 691 (b)) for 1 fluctuation after the end of the time saving is changed from the end of the time saving state until the first lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It was configured to refer only and refer to the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of the time saving only until the second to fifth second special symbol lottery is executed, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Instead of this, or in addition, even when the specific condition is established in the normal state, table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of time saving (see FIG. 691 (b)) or table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time saving may be configured to refer to. Specifically, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, V winning cannot occur with a predetermined probability (for example, probability of 1/100) (or V winning occurs more than the small winning of the second special symbol) Difficult) It is configured to win a small hit of the operating pattern, and with the small win winning as an opportunity, a table 202dw8 for 1 change after the end of time saving (see FIG. 691 (b)) and a table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 changes after the end of time saving Along with resetting the variation pattern scenario that refers to one or both of the above, the final judge production or a production similar to the final judge production (a production mode that encourages the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right) It may be configured to execute at least a production including. That is, it may be possible to temporarily create a state in which, when a small win is won in the normal state, the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed a predetermined number of times. By constructing in this way, a game can be played in anticipation of winning a small win in addition to winning a big win in the normal state, so that the game in the disadvantageous normal state becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as a specific condition, for example, based on the fact that a special pattern lottery has been executed a specific number of times (for example, 500 times) without winning a big hit after the normal state is set, after the end of the time saving, 1 fluctuation time While forming a state that refers to one or both of the table 202dw8 (see FIG. 691 (b)) and the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time saving, production similar to final judge production or final judge production (by hitting right It may be configured to execute an effect including at least an effect mode prompting the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . By constructing in this manner, even if the number of times of lottery of special symbols increases without winning the jackpot, the game can be played with the aim of reaching the specified number of times, thus motivating the player to play the game. can be suppressed.
In this 24th control example, when setting the variable display effect according to the lottery result of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc (the remaining time on the display until the end of the time saving) and the surplus time are stored The sum (T) of the time indicated by the data in the area 223wd (the time indicating the deviation from the minimum guaranteed time (remaining time until the end of the time saving assuming that the lottery of the first special symbol is all set to 1 second)) Calculated, the rank corresponding to the calculated time T is identified by referring to the rank-up determination table 222wb, and the identified rank (substantial If the rank) is higher than the currently set rank, the rank-up production that rises to the specified rank is executed, but the method of specifying the rank is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the actual rank is specified taking into account the time already spent, and whether or not the rank-up effect can be executed is determined. By configuring in this way, a higher rank can be easily identified when determining a substantial rank, so the frequency of occurrence of the rank-up effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to these, the lottery result of the variable display of the second special symbol to be newly started, and the lottery result of the first and second special symbols that are withheld are also taken into consideration, and the rank-up effect is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that determines whether or not execution is possible. More specifically, for example, when a jackpot is included in the lottery results corresponding to the newly started second special symbol fluctuation display, or the suspended lottery results of the first and second special symbols. Additionally, the rank-up effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 1/4). By configuring in this way, the run-up effect not only suggests to the player that the possibility of winning the jackpot again is improved by the time the rush ends (the final judge effect ends), Since it is possible to make the player expect a big hit by the time the ball is consumed, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the performance mode until the reserved ball is completely consumed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In this case, when the rank-up effect is executed as a effect for notifying that a big hit will occur before the reserved ball is completely consumed, control is performed so that a plurality of stages of rank-up are likely to occur. good too. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of a big win when a plurality of stages of rank-up is reported. In addition, even if the player does not win the jackpot, it is a fact that the rank (continuation rate) has increased. can.
In this 24th control example, regardless of the type of the time saving state, the number of times of saving time for commonization (50 times of lottery of the first special symbol, or 100 times of lottery of special symbol in total) is set as the number of times of time saving. However, it is not necessary to share the number of working hours. It is also possible to provide a time saving state in which one or both of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the total special symbol are different. By increasing the number of lotteries of the first special pattern, the time until the time-saving state is completed is extended even at a low rank, and the number of lotteries of the second special pattern is increased, thereby increasing the possibility of a big win. be able to. Conversely, by reducing the number of lotteries for the first special symbol, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a big hit. The same applies to the sum of the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol. can be lowered.
In the twenty-fourth control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 684), when announcing the occurrence of a rank up, it is configured to notify the rank up to the corresponding rank in the variation display effect of the second special symbol of 1. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when notifying a rank-up in a plurality of steps, the rank-up may be notified step by step (for example, one step at a time for one variation) over a plurality of second special symbol fluctuation display effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In the case of stepwise notification, it is not always necessary to notify the rank over a plurality of fluctuations, and an effect may be executed in which the rank is raised step by step within one fluctuation. Specifically, for example, after executing an effect in which the rank-up image RG is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank-up to a rank lower than the original rank appears, the rank-up icon RRG is displayed. is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a higher rank appears. Thereafter, the rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank higher than the rank indicated by the rank-up icon RRG that appeared immediately before is displayed until the rank-up to the actual rank is reported. The rank may be notified step by step by repeating the effect that appears from the inside. By constructing in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank continuously, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-fourth control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 684), the number of rank increases ( number of rank-ups), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, the type of rank-up icon RRG that appears can be suggested by the display mode (for example, color, size, etc.) of the rank-up image RG, how the rank-up image RG is split, or the like. may More specifically, for example, as types of rank-up images RG, a white rank-up image RG, a red rank-up image, and a red rank-up image having a size larger than normal are provided, and a red rank-up image is provided. It may be configured such that when the image is statically displayed, there is a higher possibility that the rank-up of multiple stages is notified than when the white rank-up image RG is statically displayed. Also, a red rank-up image having a size larger than usual may be configured to be selected only when a plurality of stages of rank-up is reported. In addition, as the method of breaking the rank-up image RG, in addition to the method of breaking into two, the method of breaking into four, and the method of breaking into pieces are provided. It may be configured such that the possibility of being notified of a rank-up in multiple stages is higher than the way of splitting into two. Also, in the case of a crack that shatters into pieces, it may be configured so that a rank increase to A rank or higher is determined. With this configuration, not only the type of the rank-up icon RRG but also the performance mode before the rank-up icon RRG appears can be focused on during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.
In the twenty-fourth control example, even after the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state, the characters displayed in the display area HR3 ("Right stroke Collect the keys!”) was configured to encourage the player to hit the right hand in the same way as in the time saving state, but the production mode for making the same game as in the time saving state is It is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, an effect prompting right-handed hitting may be performed by voice, or a display prompting right-handed hitting is set in the small display area Dm2 as in the time-saving state. may be In addition, when setting the display prompting to hit the right in the small display area Dm2, the same display as in the time saving state (characters “right hitting”) may be performed, or the time saving state and the normal state may be displayed. The mode may be changed (for example, in the normal state, an image simulating a rightward arrow may be displayed).
<Modification of the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 756 to 762, various modifications in which time-saving design winning (lottery result of special design in which time-saving state is given without going through a jackpot) is combined with the 24th control example described above. will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 756, the 1st modification which simply added only the lottery result of time-saving design election to the 24th control example mentioned above is demonstrated.
<First modification of the twenty-fourth control example>
When the lottery result of the time-saving pattern winning is simply added to the 24th control example, even if the time-saving pattern is won and the right hand is hit, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery is low. Therefore, the electric accessory 64ra is hardly opened, and a state is formed in which it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the right first ball entrance 64r. In such a situation, when the variation pattern table for the time saving state (one of the S rank table 202dw2 to E rank table 202dw7) is referred to and the variation pattern is selected, 10 each time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since a relatively short variation time of seconds is set, a very advantageous game state is formed in which only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed by hitting to the right. Temporarily, the end condition of the time-saving state based on the time-saving design winning is the same as the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot (the first special design lottery is executed 50 times, or the special design lottery is executed 100 times. ), an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the ratio of winning the jackpot is equal to or higher than the S-rank rush. It should be noted that since the winning of the normal symbols is rarely won, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64r, and a prize is paid out based on the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64r. Since it is almost impossible to acquire balls, the degree of advantage in terms of the number of prize balls paid out is lower than in the time saving state.

FIG. 756(a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when time-saving symbol winning occurs during the normal state in this modification. As shown in FIG. 756(a), when the time-saving symbol winning occurs in the normal state, in the center of the main display area Dm, the surroundings of the adventurer's character 801 stand in a luminous state (wearing an aura). is set, and the text "Preparing for bonus" is displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, the characters "preparation state" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she should hit right and that the big win is near (it is in the preparation stage for winning the big win). In addition, as described above, the probability of winning some hit (small hit or jackpot) in the lottery of the second special pattern is 11/200, so at a rate of more than 99%, the jackpot within the number of times based on the time-saving design winning be elected.
FIG. 756(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when time saving symbol winning occurs in the time saving state in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 756(b), when time-saving symbol winning occurs, a rank-up effect is generated, and the effect of rank-up to extra rank (EX RANK) is executed. By executing the effect of being ranked up to the extra rank, the player can easily understand that the state has shifted to a time-saving state in which the possibility of winning a jackpot is extremely high. In addition, by naming it extra rank, which is different from any of S rank to E rank, even if the electric accessory 64ra is hardly released by right-handed hitting, it is said that it is due to the transition to a special state called extra rank. can convince people. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort or distrust.
<Second modification of the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 757 to 762, a description will be given of a second modification in which time-saving symbol winning is combined with the twenty-fourth control example. In the second modification, as in the 14th control example described above, the time saving performance is substantially the same in the time saving state set when the time saving pattern winning occurs and the time saving state set after the jackpot ends. A case will be described in which the time reduction state related to the time reduction design winning is combined in such a manner that the probability of winning the normal design is substantially the same in the low probability state of the normal design and the time reduction state of the normal design. . In this case, by setting a time saving pattern in which a time saving state in which a variation pattern is selected with reference to the S rank table 202dw2 to E rank table 202dw7 as the type of time saving pattern is provided respectively, Time saving in the time saving state It is possible to realize a game property in which state performance (rank of rush) is switched in the middle. Specifically, for example, when a time-saving pattern election in which a time-saving state is set in which the A-rank table 202dw3 is referred to during the B-rank rush, the rank of the time-saving state (rush) rises, and the number of time-saving times is reset (the number of times of time saving related to time saving symbol winning is reset), which is advantageous for the player. Also, for example, when a time-saving pattern election in which a time-saving state is set in which a time-saving state is set with reference to the D-rank table 202dw5 during the B-rank rush, the rank of the time-saving state (rush) is lowered, Since the number of times of time saving is reset, it may be advantageous for the player if the time saving state is about to end.
First, with reference to FIG. 757, the presentation mode in this modified example will be described. FIG. 757 is a diagram showing an effect mode when time saving symbol winning occurs in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 757(a), when the time saving pattern is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time saving state, a variable display effect is executed in which the reset pattern with the character "RESET" is stopped as a medium pattern. At the same time, the text "Reset Occurred!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Then, as shown in FIG. 757(b), in the main display area Dm, the reset symbol is enlarged and displayed to inform the reset of the time saving state, and the remaining time until the final judge displayed in the display area Dm. It is reset to 49 seconds (the state immediately after the end of the jackpot). Furthermore, the lash rank displayed in the small display area Dm3 is updated to "? RANK", and the continuation rate displayed in the small display area Ds2 is updated to "continuation rate??%over". . These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time saving state including the rank has been reset. The state in which the rank and the continuation rate are concealed by the symbol "?" continues until the rank notification effect described later is executed. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the state where the rank and continuation rate which are set based on time-saving design election are concealed is called a concealment state.

Figure 758 shows the effect mode of the rank notification effect for notifying the rank of the time saving state set (reset) based on the time saving pattern winning, which is executed when the predetermined execution lottery is won in the concealed state. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 758(a), when the rank notification effect is executed in the concealed state, first, the character "? RANK" is displayed as the variable display effect of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variable display effect is executed in which the rank notification pattern with is stopped and displayed as a medium pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 758 (b), the stopped displayed middle pattern (rank notification pattern) is divided into two, and the rank with the letters corresponding to the rank set based on the time-saving design winning An effect in which a notification image (rank-up icon) RRG appears is executed. Also, an effect is executed in which the display contents of the small display areas Dm3 and Ds2 are updated according to the rank notified by the rank notification image RRG. In the example of FIG. 758 (b), the rank of the time saving state set (reset) based on the time saving symbol winning is A rank, and the notification image RRG with the letters "A RANK" appears. The rush rank displayed for the display area Dm3 is updated to "A RANK", and the continuity rate displayed for the small display area Ds2 is updated to "continuation rate 89% over" corresponding to the A-rank rush. exemplifies the case.
In addition, the rank notification effect is configured to occur only in the hidden state that is set when it is reset to a rank higher than the rank of the time-saving state that was set when the time-saving pattern was won, and was reset to a low rank by the time-saving pattern winning. In this case, the execution of the rank notification effect is prohibited (restricted). By configuring in this way, when the rank is lowered based on the time-saving pattern winning, the fact can be kept secret from the player, so that the player is not disappointed. can be suppressed.
<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 759, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 759 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 759, the RAM 223 in this modified example has a rush rank storage area 223we, a previous rank storage area 223wf, and a rank concealment flag, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth control example described above (see FIG. 693). 223wg and are different in that they are added.
The rush rank storage area 223we is a storage area for storing information indicating the rank of the currently set time saving state (rush), and the previous rank storage area 223wf is when time saving symbol winning occurs in the time saving state. , It is a storage area for storing information indicating the rank of the time saving state that was set before the time saving symbol winning occurred. In addition, the rank secrecy flag 223wg is a flag indicating whether or not the secrecy state is set based on the time-saving symbol winning. It means that it is not hidden.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 760 to 762, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 760, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A) in this modification will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 713) in the 24th control example described above, Special figure 2 effect mode setting process ( Figure 713 reference), it is the processing in order to set the fluctuation display mode which responds to the lottery result of the 2nd special design. Figure 760 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A).
Of the special figure 2 effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 760) in the second modification, in each process of S9611, S9621A, S9622A, and S9641A, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process in the 24th control example respectively described above The same processes as those of S9611, S9621A, S9622A, and S9641A (see FIG. 713) are executed. Also, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 760) in this modification, in the process of S9641A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not completely out (S9641A: No), It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is the time-saving design winning (S9671A), and when it is determined that the time-saving design is not winning (S9671A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.
On the other hand, in the process of S9671A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is the time saving symbol winning (S9671A: Yes), the effect mode of the variable display effect with the reset effect is specified (S9672A). . Next, the data in the rush rank storage area 223we is overwritten in the previous rank storage area 223wf, and the data indicating the rush rank corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is stored in the rush rank storage area 223we (S9673A), and the rank concealment flag 223wg is set. It is set to ON (S9674A), and this processing ends.
Also, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 760) in this modification, in the process of S9641A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is completely out (S9641A: Yes), then, It is determined whether or not the rank concealment flag 223wg is ON (S9675A), and if it is determined that the rank concealment flag 223wg is ON (S9675A: Yes), the concealment for setting the variable display mode during the concealment state is performed. A medium effect setting process is executed (S9676A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9675A, if it is determined that the rank concealment flag 223wg is off (S9675A: No), the effect setting process during non-secrecy is executed (S9677A), and the process proceeds to S9611. The details of the effect setting processing during concealment (S9676A) and the effect setting processing during non-secrecy (S9677A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 761 and 762, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 761, the details of the concealment effect setting process (S9676A) will be described. FIG. 761 is a flow chart showing the secrecy effect setting process (S9676A). In this secrecy effect setting process (S9676A), first, the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is referenced to determine whether or not there is surplus time of 10 seconds or more (S9681A). If it is determined (S9681A: Yes), the variable display mode with the added effect of the effect mode that adds the time obtained by rounding down the fraction less than 10 seconds from the surplus time is determined (S9682A), and this processing ends. .
On the other hand, in the processing of S9681A, if it is determined that there is no surplus time of 10 seconds or longer (S9681A: No), by comparing the data in the rush rank storage area 223we with the data in the previous rank storage area 223wf, It is determined whether or not the rush rank before the time saving state is reset (winning the time saving symbol) is higher than the currently set rank (S9683A). In the processing of S9683A, if it is determined that the rush rank before the time saving state is reset (winning the time saving pattern) is a higher rank than the currently set rank (S9683A: Yes), the rank notification effect Without lottery for execution, the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9684A), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S9683A, if it is determined that the rush rank before the time saving state is reset (winning the time saving pattern) is a rank below the currently set rank (S9683A: No), rank notification effect (S9685A). In this lottery, the execution of the rank notification effect is determined with a probability of 1/20. Therefore, even if the rank notification effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol a plurality of times, the player can be made to think that the player has simply missed the lottery and the rank has not been lowered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.
When the processing of S9685A is finished, it is then determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the rank notification effect is obtained (S9686A). : Yes), determine the variable display mode accompanied by the rank notification effect for notifying the current rank (S9687A), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9686A, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the rank notification effect is not obtained (S9686A: No), the process proceeds to S9684A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 762, details of the non-secrecy effect setting process (S9677A) will be described. FIG. 762 is a flow chart showing this non-secrecy effect setting process (S9677A). In this non-secrecy effect setting process (S9677A), first, the data defined in the rank-up determination table 222wb (see FIG. 694(b)) is referred to, and the time indicated by the timer value of the current guarantee time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9691A). Next, it is determined whether or not the rank specified in the processing of S9691A is higher than the currently set rank (S9692A), and it is determined that a higher rank than the currently set rank has been specified. If so (S9692A: Yes), the effect mode with the rank-up effect to the specified rank is determined (S9697A), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9692A that a rank lower than the current rank has been identified (S9692A: No), whether or not data indicating a surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd. (S9693A). In the processing of S9693A, when it is determined that data indicating the surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored (S9693A: Yes), the time to add the remaining time by adding effect is determined by lottery (S9694A), and the determination result (S9695A), the added time is added to the guaranteed time timer 223wc and subtracted from the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9696A), and this process ends. In the process of S9694A, the ratio of determining not to execute the additional effect for the remaining time (determining the additional time to be 0 seconds) is set to 75%, and the remaining 25% is a multiple of 10 in the range below the surplus time. seconds are evenly distributed. For example, if the surplus time is 45 seconds, 75% of the remaining time does not add production, 6.25% of 10 seconds is added, and 6.25% of 20 seconds is added. Override is determined, and controlled to determine overtime of 30 seconds at a rate of 6.25% and overtime of 40 seconds at a rate of 6.25%.
On the other hand, in the process of S9693A, if it is determined that the data indicating the surplus time of less than 10 seconds is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9693A: No), the processes of S9694A to S9696A are skipped and left as they are. End this process.
As in the second modified example, by adding the specification of winning time-saving symbols to the star of the 24th control example, it is possible to generate a situation in which the rush rank is updated in the time-saving state. Therefore, when time-saving symbol winning occurs, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the player expect that the rank of the rush will rise.

<25th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 714 to 734. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification), and time saving By changing the lottery frequency of the first special symbol (tendency of the selected fluctuation time) according to the state setting opportunity (jackpot type), the number of lotteries of the second special symbol to be executed until the end of the time saving state is increased. It was configured to be different. In addition, there are only two types of game states, normal state and time-saving state, and it adopts a specification that wins a big hit by winning a special pattern lottery or winning a V prize as a small win. rice field.
On the other hand, in the 25th control example, on the premise of the simultaneous variation specification, in addition to the normal state and the time saving state as the game state, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery increases, and the electric role is increased as in the time saving state. A variable probability state in which the object 640a is easily opened is provided, and a specification is adopted in which the opportunity for a big win is only when a special symbol lottery results in a big win. In addition, in the above-described twenty-fourth control example, it was allowed to win a big hit in the lottery of the other special symbol even while one of the special symbol variations was being executed, but in the present twenty-fifth control example. , When the lottery of one special pattern becomes a big hit, it adopts a control that prohibits (suppresses) winning a big hit in the lottery of the other special pattern. In other words, during one big hit fluctuation, the specification that the other special symbol lottery is lost (including a small hit) is adopted. Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth control example, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the ratio of setting the most advantageous probability variable state is low, while the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit. By configuring so that the ratio of setting the most advantageous probability state is high. It adopts a specification that makes it possible to strongly expect that it will be a big hit in the lottery of the second special pattern.
Based on such specifications, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-fifth control example, when hitting the right hand in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the start winning opening (right first entrance 64r) as well as the start winning opening (second ball entrance 640) that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol, and the board surface configuration that allows the game ball to enter, especially in the variable probability state, in the lottery of the first special symbol A game property that makes a player strongly expect not to win a jackpot is realized. Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth control example, it is configured to be a small hit in some cases when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery. Unlike the small win in the 24th control example, etc., this small win is a lottery result that only opens the variable winning device 1065 that is opened in the big win game for a short time (the possibility of winning a big win in the small win game There is no prize), so basically even if you win, it does not contribute to the player's degree of advantage. However, when a small win is won and the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the other special pattern is forcibly detached and stopped and displayed in the same way as when the big winning pattern is stopped and displayed. In particular, it is possible to realize a game property that is advantageous to the player by winning a small win during the big win variation of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous. In other words, in the variable probability state, when a normal jackpot to which the variable probability state is not given is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the big win variation is executed, a disadvantageous state is formed in which the variable probability state is highly likely to be terminated. During the big hit fluctuation of the disadvantageous first special pattern, a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, and when the small prize fluctuation is completed first, the first special pattern being displayed in fluctuation is forcibly stopped with the missing pattern. It is possible to continue the definite variable state by making sure that there is no big hit of the disadvantageous first special symbol. Therefore, basically, by winning a small hit that does not contribute to the player's advantage at all under specific conditions (during the variable probability state and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol jackpot), Since it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an extremely disadvantageous situation (situation in which the variable probability state is ended), it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example described above, when subtracting the number of times of time saving, the subtraction processing is uniformly performed at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example is basically configured to execute subtraction processing when fluctuation stops, and only the last fluctuation display in the time saving state is configured to execute subtraction processing when fluctuation starts. . In addition, if one special pattern is stopped and displayed with a winning (big hit or small) pattern, and the other special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost pattern, the number of times of time reduction at the timing of the forced stop display It is configured to avoid execution of the subtraction process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of the number of times of time reduction due to the variable display that is forcibly changed to an out (that is, it is equal to that the winning is not drawn), so that the number of times of time reduction is more preferable. can be subtracted.

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes The only difference is that the control process is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the V.24 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twenty-fourth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 714, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 714 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twenty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 714, the game board 13 in the twenty-fifth control example differs from the board surface configuration (see FIG. 680) of the game board 13 in the twenty-fourth control example described above. The position of the ball entrance 640 is reversed (the right first ball entrance 64r is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640), and the second The point that the electric accessory 640a that can open and close the ball entrance 640 is provided in association with the electric accessory 64ra that was provided in association with the right first ball entrance 64r in the 24th control example. A retractable member 64rb capable of retracting and retracting at a predetermined cycle while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is provided directly above the right first ball entrance 64. They are different in that respect. This retractable member 64rb prevents the game ball from entering the right first ball inlet 64r by being displaced to a protruding position protruding to the front side in a front view, and by being immersed in the game board 13, the right first ball entering. A state is formed in which a game ball can enter the opening 64r. This haunting member 64rb, for example, in the game state (time saving state or probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, the game ball fired by hitting to the right is the right first entry at a rate of about 1 out of 25 The period of displacement to the retracted position and the length of the displacement period are determined so that the ball enters the ball opening 64r. In other words, rather than hitting the right in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the first special symbol is higher when hitting the left, and the first special in the time saving state and the variable state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set. The period of displacement to the retracted position and the length of the displacement period are determined so that the reserved ball of the symbol is unlikely to become 0. As a result, it is possible to perform the lottery for the first special symbol at a relatively high frequency in the time-saving state and the probability-variable state while suppressing the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.
Further, as shown in FIG. 714, the game board 13 in the twenty-fifth control example has the variable winning device 1065 and the V winning device 650 provided in the game board 13 in the twenty-fourth control example described above deleted. It is also different in that the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 in the control example and the like is provided. This is because, in the twenty-fifth control example, as in the first control example, etc., a specification is adopted in which a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a jackpot game, and a variable probability state is given after the jackpot ends. By being there. In the twenty-fifth control example, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the variable winning device 65 opens and closes for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball in a small winning game. Also, in the small winning game (and the normal big winning), the game ball is controlled to be difficult (impossible) to pass through the specific area.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 715 and 716, a characteristic presentation mode in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. First, FIG. 715(a) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case of shifting to the variable probability state with the highest degree of advantage in the twenty-fifth control example. In the variable probability state, similarly to the time saving state in the twenty-fourth control example described above, the variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and the main display area. In a relatively narrow display area (small display area Dm8a) on the lower right of Dm, a variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed. In the twenty-fifth control example, once the variable probability state is reached, the variable probability state is not terminated until the next big hit is achieved. Therefore, the termination conditions (the number of remaining lotteries, the remaining time, etc.) are not displayed on the screen.

FIG. 715(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state and the jackpot variation is started. Here, in the twenty-fifth control example, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the normal jackpot is won with a high probability (90% ratio), while the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. always becomes a definite variable jackpot, and an advantageous definite variable state continues even after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the variable probability state in which the ball can be entered into either the right first ball entrance 64r or the second right ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, the game characteristic that makes a strong expectation of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol. becomes. In other words, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big win, the player is likely to be in a disadvantageous state.
As shown in FIG. 715(b), when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started in the variable probability state, an enemy character 811 appears in the main display area Dm and an effect is executed in which the adventurer's character 801 faces each other. be. In addition, the text "Kill the enemy and continue the RUSH!!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Furthermore, information indicating the remaining time until the probability changing state ends (that is, until the jackpot variation in the first special symbol ends) is displayed in the small display region Dm2 formed on the upper right of the main display region Dm. be. The example of FIG. 715(b) illustrates a case where the remaining variation time until the end of the variation is 28.05 seconds, and the text "28:05 until the end of RUSH" is displayed in the small display area Dm1. It is In addition, the characters "RUSH end pinch!" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. According to these display contents, if the enemy character 811 cannot be subjugated before the remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm1 elapses, the variable probability state (rush) may end. It is easy for people to understand. As described above, in the twenty-fifth control example, even if the lottery for the other special symbol is executed after the big hit variation of one special symbol is started, the winning will not be drawn. In other words, since there is no possibility of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed first, and the first special symbol jackpot is displayed. It is configured so that it cannot be converted to an outlier pattern. On the other hand, since the small hit is part of the loss, it is configured to be able to win even during the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special pattern, by winning the small hit, the jackpot fluctuation can be forcibly stopped with the pattern out of the jackpot, avoiding the disadvantageous jackpot of the first special pattern and continuing the variable state. can be made
FIG. 716(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the fluctuation time has elapsed without winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 716(a), when the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the first special symbol has passed and the remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm reaches "00:00", the adventurer character 801 An effect of being defeated by being attacked by the enemy character 811 is executed. Further, the characters "Unfortunate..." are displayed in the display area HR3, and the characters "RUSH finished..." are displayed in the small display area Ds2. Also, a third symbol indicating the winning of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm8a. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that there is a high possibility that the variable probability state has ended.
FIG. 716(b) is a display in the case where a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, and the big winning variation of the first special symbol is out of the big winning variation and the symbol can be forcibly stopped. An example of an aspect is shown. As shown in FIG. 716(b), when the small winning pattern is won during the big winning variation of the first special pattern and the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed first, the adventurer's character 801 attempts to defeat the enemy character 811. A successful rendition is performed. In addition, the characters "Victory!!" are displayed in the display area HR3, and the characters "RUSH continue!!" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. Also, in the small display area Dm8a, the first special symbol's outlier pattern (so-called loose eye) is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8b, the second special symbol's small winning pattern (in this 25th control example, different odd numbers pattern) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the variable probability state has continued.

<Electrical configuration in the 25th control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 717(a). As shown in FIG. 717(a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-fifth control example has the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-fourth control example described above (see FIG. A first win random number table 202ax is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202bx is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202bw, and a variation pattern table 202dx is provided instead of the variation pattern table 202dw. , is different in that a small hit random number table 202ex is provided instead of the small hit random number table 202ew. Another difference is that the normal fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa is deleted.
First, with reference to FIG. 718(a), details of the first winning random number table 202ax in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This first winning random number table 202ax, like the first winning random number table 202aw in the twenty-fourth control example described above, is a random number value (first winning random number counter C1 value) is defined in the data table. FIG. 718(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202ax. As shown in FIG. 718(a), in the twenty-fifth control example, regardless of the type of special symbol, a random number determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery in the high probability state of the special symbol (first random number counter 40 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 39" are associated and defined as the value of C1). Since the first winning random number counter C1 in the twenty-fifth control example is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol high probability state. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/25 (40/1000) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.
Also, as shown in FIG. 718(a), in the first winning random number table 202ax in the twenty-fifth control example, regardless of the type of the special symbol, it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol. 10 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 9" are defined in association with each other as random numbers (values of the first random number counter C1). Since the first winning random number counter C1 in the twenty-fifth control example is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol low probability state. The probability of winning the jackpot is 1/100 (10/1000) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.
Next, with reference to FIG. 718(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bx in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 718(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bx in the twenty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 718(b), in this jackpot type selection table 202bx, for each type of special symbol, the jackpot type that can be selected and the value range of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. It is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 718(b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the range of "0 to 9", "jackpot A28". "Big win B28" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 99". The "jackpot A28" is a jackpot (4-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot B28" is a jackpot (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and a time-saving state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random numbers associated with "jackpot A28" and "jackpot B28" are 10 and 90, respectively. , If the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining "jackpot A28" is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of determining "jackpot B28" is 90% (90/100). becomes. In other words, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot B28) set in a time-saving state with the lowest number of rounds and a low degree of advantage is determined, so the first special symbol is a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 718(b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 24" with "jackpot C28". , The value of the first per type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "25 to 34" with "jackpot D28", and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "35 to 99" A "jackpot E28" is associated and defined. The "jackpot C28" is a jackpot (10 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot D28" is a jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds, and the variable probability state most advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Furthermore, "jackpot E28" is a jackpot (4 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, the random numbers associated with "jackpot C28", "jackpot D28", and "jackpot E28" are 25 each. Since there are 1, 10, and 65, the ratio of determining "jackpot C28" when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern is 25% (25/100), and "jackpot D28" is decided. 10% (10/100), and the percentage at which the "jackpot E28" is determined is 65% (65/100). Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the majority is set to the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds), but the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous regardless of which jackpot type is selected. is set to a high probability variable state, the lottery for the second special symbol can be said to be a lottery with a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol.
Next, with reference to FIG. 718(c), details of the small winning random number table 202ex in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This small winning random number table 202ex, like the small winning random number table 202ew in the 24th control example described above, is a random number determined to be a small winning when a special symbol lottery is executed (first winning random number counter C1 value) is defined. As shown in FIG. 718(c), in the twenty-fifth control example, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit is associated only with the second special symbol, and the value range is " 40 to 49”. Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 999" that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol is "40". 49”, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 1/100 (10/1000).
Next, details of the variation pattern table 202dx in the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 719(a). FIG. 719(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202dx in the twenty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 719 (a), the variation pattern table 202dx in the twenty-fifth control example is a normal table 202dx1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. , variable probability/time reduction table 202dx2 referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state and time reduction state. Regarding the normal table 202dx1, the same specified contents as the normal table 202dw1 in the above-described 24th control example (in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time in the range of 7 seconds to 140 seconds is selected according to the lottery result. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the 600-second fluctuation time is always selected), so the detailed description is omitted here.
FIG. 719(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the probability variation/time reduction table 202dx2 that constitutes the variation pattern table 202dx. This table 202dx2 for probability variation and time reduction is a data table referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, as described above. As shown in FIG. 719 (b), in the table 202dx2 for probability variation/time reduction, as a variation pattern at the time of deviation of the first special symbol, the entire range that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 999" range ) is associated with an out-short variation with a variation time of 10000 ms (10 seconds).

On the other hand, as the variation pattern at the time of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 249", and the variation time is 30000 ms (30 seconds) per long variation as the variation pattern. A is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "250 to 899", and a long fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is defined in association with the fluctuation type counter CS1. The value of is in the range of "900 to 999", and per long fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 180000 ms (180 seconds) is defined in correspondence. For this reason, if the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected at a rate of 25% (250/1000), and the time of 60 seconds is selected at a rate of 65% (650/1000). A variation time is selected and a variation time of 10% (100/1000) is selected for 180 seconds. As the fluctuation time becomes longer, it becomes easier to execute lottery of the second special symbols during the fluctuation, so the degree of expectation for winning the small prize also increases. Therefore, when winning a normal jackpot, selection of a longer variation time is more advantageous for the player.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 719 (b), as a variation pattern at the time of the probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 999"), variation A time of 500 ms (0.5 seconds) per super-short variation is defined in association. The reason why the short fluctuation time is set when the probability variable jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is that the second special pattern small hit is stopped and displayed first, and the advantageous probability variable jackpot is forcibly converted into a loss. This is to prevent it from being put away as much as possible. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 719 (b), as a variation pattern of the second special symbol, even if it is out or hit, the whole range that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 999" range) , a variation pattern (missing short variation, hit short variation) with a variation time of 6000 ms (6 seconds) is associated and defined. Therefore, in the variable probability state, the variation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 6 seconds.
In addition, when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set, the second special pattern is stopped and displayed a maximum of 5 times (30 seconds / 6 seconds) during the winning fluctuation. Therefore, the rate at which a small hit with a probability of 1/100 can convert a normal jackpot into a loss and continue the variable probability state is about 4.9%. Similarly, if a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set, the second special pattern is stopped and displayed a maximum of 10 times (60 seconds / 6 seconds) during the winning fluctuation. Therefore, the ratio of converting a normal jackpot to a loss by a small hit and continuing the variable probability state is about 9.6%. Furthermore, when a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is set, the second special pattern is stopped and displayed a maximum of 30 times (180 seconds/6 seconds) during the winning fluctuation. Therefore, the ratio of converting a normal jackpot to a loss by a small hit and continuing the variable probability state is about 26%.
Thus, in the twenty-fifth control example, when the normal jackpot is won in the variable probability state, a relatively long (long enough to execute the second special symbol lottery multiple times) variation time is selected. Since it is constructed, when the big winning variation of the second special pattern is started, the expectation that the second special pattern will be a small winning and the normal big winning will be converted into a loss is generated by the lottery of the second special pattern a plurality of times. It can be crossed over and held by the player. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 717(b). FIG. 717(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 717(b), the RAM 203 in the twenty-fifth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-fourth control example described above (see FIG. 687(b)). The difference is that a counter 203h is provided instead of the second counter 203h2. This change is accompanied by the change to the specification of only one termination condition for the time saving state (only the termination condition that is satisfied when the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number). It is a thing. In addition, a variable probability setting flag 203m, a variable probability passage counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a variable probability effective flag 203r, a variable probability effective timer 203s, and a discharge number counter 203t. , and the variable probability flag 203xa are also added to the twenty-fourth control example. As in the first control example, the addition of these configurations is that the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability variable state by passing the game ball through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game. , and since it is exactly the same as the configuration of the same name provided in the first control example except for the variable probability flag 203xa, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
Furthermore, it is different from the twenty-fourth control example in that the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd, the V flag 203fe, and the V passage flag 203ff are deleted. It should be noted that the change to delete these configurations is due to abolishing the specification that a big win is generated by a V prize during a small win game.
The variable probability flag 203xa is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (variable probability gaming state). When the variable probability flag 203xa is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a variable probability state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low probability game state (normal state or time saving state). In the twenty-fifth control example, when the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203xa is set to ON. On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started. It should be noted that the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set to OFF when the settings are initialized, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.
Next, with reference to FIG. 720, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 720 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 720, the RAM 223 in the twenty-fifth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-fourth control example described above (see FIG. 693) in that an end time timer 223xa is added. . Another difference is that the rank-up number counter 223wb, the guaranteed time timer 223wc, and the surplus time storage area 223wd are deleted.

The end time timer 223xa is a timer that indicates the time from when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol until the variable probability state ends. The end time timer 223xa has an initial value set to 0, and when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable probability state, the timer value according to the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the normal jackpot. is set, and the number of seconds corresponding to the timer value is displayed as the remaining time until the end on the third symbol display device 81 (see S9714A and S9715A in FIG. 733). Also, the timer value is decremented and updated each time the main process is executed (see S5433 in FIG. 732).
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-fifth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 721 to 731. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 721, details of the first special symbol variation start process (Y271) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 721 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (Y271) in the twenty-fifth control example. This first special symbol variation start process (Y271) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 695) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation start process in the twenty-fourth control example. Like the symbol variation start process (see FIG. 695), this is a process for executing the lottery for the first special symbol and starting the variation display according to the lottery result.
Of the first special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 721) in the twenty-fifth control example, in each processing of Y302 to Y306, Y302 to Y302 of the first special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 695) in the twenty-fourth control example The same processing as each processing of Y306 is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 721) in the twenty-fifth control example, when the process of Y306 ends, then instead of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 696) in the twenty-fourth control example The first special symbol determination process is executed (Y351), and then the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 697) in the twenty-fourth control example (Y352). . Then, instead of the special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 698) in the twenty-fourth control example, the update process at the time of fluctuation start is executed (Y353), and this process ends. For details of these first special symbol determination processing (Y351), first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (Y352), and variation start update processing (Y353), see FIGS. 722, 723, and 724, respectively. and will be described later.
First, with reference to FIG. 722, details of the first special symbol determination process (Y351) described above will be described. This first special symbol determination process (Y351) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 696) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 696) ), it is a process for executing the jackpot determination of the first special symbol. FIG. 722 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol determination process.

Among the first special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 722), Y8001, Y8003 to Y8006, Y8011, and Y8021 of the first special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 696) in the 24th control example. The same processes as Y8003 to Y8006, Y8011 and Y8021 are executed. Also, when the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 722) in the twenty-fifth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is ON (Y8031). , If it is determined to be on (Y8031: Yes), it means that the second special symbol jackpot variation is already being executed, so by shifting the process to Y8021, the first special symbol reserved ball storage Regardless of the data in the execution area of the area 203a, the lottery result is set to be out. On the other hand, in the process of S8031, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (Y8031: No), the process proceeds to Y8001.
In addition, in the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 722) in the twenty-fifth control example, when the process of Y8001 is completed, it is then determined whether the probability variation flag 203xa is ON (Y8032), and the probability variation flag 203xa is on (that is, a high probability state of special symbols) (Y8032: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol with reference to the first per random number table 202ax for high probability (Y8033), and the process proceeds to Y8003. On the other hand, in the process of Y8032, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203xa is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y8032: No), the first per random number table 202ax for low probability (Y8034), and the process proceeds to Y8003.
Next, with reference to FIG. 723, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y352) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y352) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 697) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and is the first special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 697), this is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 723 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y352).
Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 723) in the twenty-fifth control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the twenty-fourth control example ( 697) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 723) in the twenty-fifth control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is changed to the variation pattern table 202dx (see FIG. 719(a)). ) (Y541) from the two types of tables (normal table 202dx1, variable probability/time reduction table 202dx2), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Next, with reference to FIG. 724, the details of the change start update process (Y353) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This update process at the start of fluctuation (Y353) is a process for updating the game state at the start of fluctuation. FIG. 724 is a flow chart showing this updating process at the start of fluctuation (Y353). Here, in the twenty-fifth control example, the number of remaining time reductions (counter value of the counter 203h during time reduction) is basically updated at the time of fluctuation stop, and under certain conditions (the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state is 1 Only when the lottery of special symbols is executed in the state), it is configured to be updated at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a general gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation It is possible to set a case where the timing at which the time reduction state ends can be delayed with respect to the timing of subtraction of the number of remaining time reductions adopted by the machine) (always at the start of the fluctuation), so it is possible to set up a case that can delay Therefore, the game in the time-saving state can be played more efficiently (without waste). The difference in time saving end timing with respect to the simultaneous variation machine adopting the subtraction method of the number of remaining time saving times of this conventional type will be described later with reference to FIG. 725 . In addition, in the twenty-fifth control example, when one special symbol is fluctuating, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a win (big win or small win) symbol. When it is stopped and displayed, it is configured to suppress the subtraction of the number of times of shortening of working hours by the special symbol stopped and displayed as the forcedly out symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of the number of times of time reduction for one time due to the variable display that is forcibly stop-displayed with the winning pattern (variable display that is useless for the player who cannot win). .
Here, with reference to FIG. 725, a case in which the time reduction end timing can be delayed with respect to a general simultaneous variation machine will be described. As described above, in the twenty-fifth control example, basically, the remaining time reduction number is updated (subtracted) at the fluctuation end timing, and a new special symbol lottery is executed with the remaining time reduction number of times remaining. It is configured to subtract the remaining time reduction number at the start of fluctuation only when it is. For this reason, if the number of remaining time reductions is one remaining while the variable display of both special symbols is stopped, the same timing as the conventional subtraction timing of the remaining number of time reductions (the last variation display within the number of time reductions At the start timing of ), the number of times of working hours is updated to 0 and the working hours state is terminated.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 725 (a) and FIG. 725 (b), at the start of the last variable display in the time saving state (70 times or 30 times in this 25th control example) of the other special symbol When the variable display is in progress, the number of times of variable display is greater than the set number of times while ensuring the time-saving state for a longer period of time compared to the conventional subtraction timing of the number of times of time-saving. It is possible to suppress the continuation of the number of times of working hours reduction. In the example of Figure 725 (a) and Figure 725 (b), in the time saving state in which the number of times of working hours is set to 70 times, when the second special symbol lottery is executed as the 70th special symbol fluctuation lottery It is a diagram showing the time-saving end timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.
First, with reference to FIG. 725(a), after the time saving state is set (after the end of the jackpot), the variable display of the first special symbol based on the 69th special symbol lottery is executed. A lottery for the second special pattern is executed as the lottery for the special pattern of the 69th time, and the second special pattern based on the lottery for the special pattern for the 70th time is performed before the fluctuation display of the first special pattern based on the lottery for the special pattern for the 69th time. A case in which the variable display of is terminated will be described. In the example of FIG. 725(a), at the timing of time t1, the first special symbol lottery is executed as the 69th special symbol lottery, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and the variation of the first special symbol is executed. At time t2 during execution of the display, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed as the 70th lottery for the special symbol, and after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the first special symbol is displayed at time t3. A case where the variable display of the second special symbol is started prior to the variable display and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed at time t4 as the 71st lottery of the special symbol after the end of the big win will be explained as an example.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 725 (a), in the conventional simultaneous variation machine (always updating the number of reduced hours at the start of variation), the number of remaining reduced hours at time t1 (at the start of variation of the first special symbol) The time reduction state is ended when the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted and the remaining time is 0 at time t2. That is, since the time saving state ends at the timing when the last variable display in the time saving state starts, the time saving state is substantially reduced by one time (the amount during the fluctuation period of the last variable display).
On the other hand, in this 25th control example, the number of time reductions is basically updated at the time of stopping the fluctuation until the number of times of remaining time reduction becomes 1 time, and the fluctuation of the new special symbol starts when the number of times of remaining time reduction is 1 time. Since it is configured to update the number of remaining time reductions at the start of fluctuation only when the timing is reached, the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t1 (at the start of the 69th fluctuation). Therefore, at time t2 (at the start of the 70th variation), the number of remaining time reductions is 2 times, so the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t2, and at time t3 (the 70th variation started When the display is stopped), the number of times of shortening remaining time is updated, and the number of times of shortening remaining time becomes a state of one time remaining. As a result, in the twenty-fifth control example, the time saving frequency becomes 0 at time t4 (at the start of the 71st fluctuation), and the time saving state ends. In other words, during the execution of the variable display started 69 times after the end of the jackpot, and before the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state is terminated. The time saving state can be continued for a long time (T1) which is the difference between time t4 and time t2. In addition, since the time saving state is terminated at the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, it is suppressed that the number of variable displays exceeding the set number of times of time saving (70 times) is executed during the time saving state. can do. Therefore, the game in the time saving state can be played without waste. In addition, in this 25th control example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed before the variable display of the special symbol is started with the number of times of time saving remaining in the state of one time, the number of times of time saving is subtracted by 1 as a rule. is configured to Therefore, in FIG. 725(a), the first special symbol variable display as the 71st special symbol variable display is not started, and the second special symbol variable display as the 69th special symbol variable display is performed first. is stopped, the number of remaining time reductions is updated to 0 at the stop display timing, and the time reduction state is terminated. In this case, since the time saving state can be ended after all the variable display periods for 70 times are completed, the time saving state can be continued longer than the time saving end timing of the conventional simultaneous changer. Therefore, the game in the time saving state can be played without waste.
Next, with reference to FIG. 725(b), after the time saving state is set (after the end of the jackpot), the variable display of the first special symbol based on the lottery of the 69th special symbol is executed. The second special symbol lottery is executed as the 70th special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation display based on the 69th special symbol lottery is completed, and the 71st special symbol variation display is performed. A case will be described where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the 70th special symbol lottery ends after the start of the lottery of one special symbol. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 725 (b), in the conventional simultaneous variation machine (always updating the number of reduced hours at the start of variation), the number of remaining reduced hours at time t5 (at the start of variation of the first special symbol) The time reduction state is terminated when the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted and the number of remaining time reductions becomes 0 at time t6. That is, since the time saving state ends at the timing when the last variable display in the time saving state starts, the time saving state is substantially reduced by one time (the amount during the fluctuation period of the last variable display).
On the other hand, the control in the 25th control example (the number of times of shortening of remaining time is basically updated at the time of fluctuation stop until the number of times of shortening of remaining time reaches 1 time, and the number of times of shortening of remaining time is changed to 1 time) Only when the start timing is reached, the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t5 (when the fluctuation starts for the 69th time). Therefore, at time t6 (at the start of the 70th fluctuation), the number of remaining time reductions is 2 times, so the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t6, and at time t7 (the 69th fluctuation started When the display is stopped), the number of times of shortening remaining time is updated, and the number of times of shortening remaining time becomes a state of one time remaining. As a result, in the twenty-fifth control example, the time saving count becomes 0 at time t8 (at the start of the 71st fluctuation), and the time saving state ends. In other words, during the execution of the variable display that started 70 times after the end of the jackpot, and before the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state is terminated. The time saving state can be continued for a longer time (T2) which is the difference between time t8 and time t6. In addition, since the time saving state is terminated at the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, it is suppressed that the number of variable displays exceeding the set number of times of time saving (70 times) is executed during the time saving state. can do. Therefore, the game in the time saving state can be played without waste.

Returning to FIG. 724, the description continues. As shown in FIG. 724, in the fluctuation start update process (see FIG. 724) in the twenty-fifth control example, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (Y631), and the time saving counter If it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 (Y631: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y631, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 1 (Y631: Yes), the value of the counter 203h during time saving is subtracted by 1 and updated to 0 (Y632), and the normal state (Y633), and the process is terminated. By executing this update process at the time of fluctuation start (see FIG. 724), only the lottery of the last special symbol in the time saving state can subtract the number of time saving at the time of fluctuation start.
Next, with reference to FIG. 726, the details of the first special symbol variation stop process (Y272) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process (Y272) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 699) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation stop process ( Figure 699 reference), it is the processing in order to set the stop indication in the 1st special design at the end of fluctuation in the 1st special design. FIG. 726 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop process (Y272).
Among the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 726) in the twenty-fifth control example, in each processing of Y701, Y704-Y707, Y721, Y723-Y726, Y732, and Y733, the first in the twenty-fourth control example The same processes as Y701, Y704-Y707, Y721, Y723-Y726, Y732 and Y733 of the special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 699) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 726) in the twenty-fifth control example, in the process of Y721, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is off (that is, the current first special symbol (Y721: No), when it is determined that (Y721: No), the fluctuation stop time update process for updating the remaining time reduction number at the fluctuation stop timing is executed (Y741), and the process moves to Y732 do. The details of this updating process when fluctuation is stopped (Y741) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 726) in the twenty-fifth control example, it is determined that the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is 0 in the processing of Y723 (Y723: No) or Y726 When the process is completed, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol, the counter 203h during time saving, and the variable probability flag 203xa are all reset (Y742), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 727, the details of the update process (Y741) at the time of fluctuation stop will be described. This update process at the time of fluctuation stop (Y741) is a process for updating the number of time saving at the fluctuation stop timing when the game state is the time saving state. FIG. 727 is a flow chart showing this updating process when fluctuation is stopped (Y741). Here, as described above, in the twenty-fifth control example, the number of times of remaining time reduction (counter value of counter 203h during time saving) is updated basically when fluctuation is stopped, and under specific conditions (number of times of remaining time reduction in time saving state is updated at the start of fluctuation only in the state of one time). Then, when one of the special symbols is fluctuating and the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a win (big win or small win) symbol, the special symbol being fluctuated is forcibly lost and stopped and displayed as a symbol, It is configured to suppress the subtraction of the number of times of shortening of working hours by the special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the forced out symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of the number of times of time reduction for one time due to the variable display that is forcibly stop-displayed with the winning pattern (variable display that is useless for the player who cannot win). .
As shown in FIG. 727, the update process at the time of fluctuation stop (see FIG. 727), first, the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) It is determined (Y635), time saving If it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203h is 0 (Y635: No), it means that the current state is not the time-saving state, and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y635, if it is determined that the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving is greater than 0 (Y635: Yes), the value of the counter 203h during time saving is updated by subtracting 1 (Y636), and then , it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203h after the subtraction has become 0 (Y637). In the processing of Y637, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction has become 0 (Y637: Yes), a state command indicating transition to the normal state is set (Y638), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y637 that the counter value after the subtraction is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (Y637: No), the process of Y638 is skipped and the present process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 728, the second special symbol variation start process (Y273) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This second special symbol variation start process (Y273) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 700) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and the second special symbol variation start process ( Figure 700 reference), it is the processing for executing the lottery of the second special symbol and starting the variable display of the second special symbol according to the lottery result. FIG. 728 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (Y273).
Of the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 728) in the twenty-fifth control example, in each of Y832 to Y836, Y851, and Y852 processing, the second special symbol variation start processing in the twenty-fourth control example (see FIG. 700 reference), the same processes as those of Y832 to Y836, Y851 and Y852 are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 728) in the twenty-fifth control example, when the process of Y836 ends, then instead of the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 701) in the twenty-fourth control example The second special symbol determination process is executed (Y871), and then the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 703) in the twenty-fourth control example (Y872). . Then, instead of the special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 704) in the twenty-fourth control example, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed (Y873), and this process ends. Details of the second special symbol determination process (Y871) will be described later with reference to FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y872) differs from the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see Figure 703) in the same manner as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see Figure 723). is only the point of reading the variation pattern table corresponding to the game state when selecting the variation pattern, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, the update process at the start of fluctuation (Y873) is the same process as the update process at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 724), which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 721). , the detailed description of which is omitted here.

Next, with reference to FIG. 729, details of the second special symbol determination process (Y871) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This second special symbol determination process (Y871) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 701) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 701). ), it is a process for executing the hit determination of the second special symbol. FIG. 729 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol determination process (Y871).
Of the second special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 729) in the twenty-fifth control example, in each of the processes Y8101, Y8103 to Y8106, Y8111, and Y8121, the second special symbol determination processing in the twenty-fourth control example (see FIG. 701 ), Y8101, Y8103 to Y8106, Y8111, and Y8121 are executed. Also, when the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 729) in the twenty-fifth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is ON (Y8131). , If it is determined to be on (Y8131: Yes), it means that the first special symbol jackpot variation is already being executed, so by shifting the process to Y8121, the first special symbol reserved ball storage To avoid a lottery result from becoming a big win regardless of the data in the execution area of an area 203a. On the other hand, in the process of Y8131, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (Y8031: No), the process proceeds to Y8101.
In addition, in the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 729) in the twenty-fifth control example, when the process of Y8101 is completed, it is then determined whether the probability variation flag 203xa is ON (Y8132), and the probability variation flag 203xa is on (that is, a high probability state of special symbols) (Y8132: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol with reference to the first per random number table 202ax for high probability (Y8133), and the process proceeds to Y8103. On the other hand, in the process of Y8132, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203xa is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y8132: No), the first per random number table 202ax for low probability (Y8134), and the process proceeds to Y8103.
Next, with reference to FIG. 730, details of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y274) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This second special symbol variation stop process (Y274) is similar to the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 705) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and when the variation of the second special symbol ends, the first special symbol stops. This is processing for setting the display. FIG. 730 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (Y274).

Of the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 730) in the twenty-fifth control example, in each of Y1101 to Y1106 and Y1108 to Y1111 processing, the second special symbol variation stop processing in the twenty-fourth control example (see FIG. 705 reference), the same processes as Y1101 to Y1106 and Y1108 to Y1111 are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 730) in the twenty-fifth control example, in the process of Y1102, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (that is, the current second special symbol (Y1102: No), when it is determined that the lottery result is out (completely out or small hit)), the fluctuation stop update process is executed to update the remaining short time number at the fluctuation stop timing (Y1121) , the process proceeds to Y1103. This update process at fluctuation stop (Y1121) is exactly the same as the update process at fluctuation stop (see FIG. 727) executed in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 726).
In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 730) in the twenty-fifth control example, it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka is 0 in the processing of Y1104 (Y1104: No) or Y1106 When the process is completed, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol, the time saving medium counter 203h, and the variable probability flag 203xa are all reset (Y1122), and the process proceeds to Y1108.
Next, with reference to FIG. 731, the details of the jackpot control process (Y1021) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. The jackpot control process (Y1021) in the twenty-fifth control example is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 707) in the twenty-fourth control example described above, and is similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 707). , It is a process for executing various controls during execution of the jackpot game. FIG. 731 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (Y1021).
Among the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 731) in the twenty-fifth control example, Y11601 to Y11612 and Y11633 to Y11635, respectively, Y11601 to Y11612 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 707) in the twenty-fourth control example, and The same processing as each of Y11633 to Y11635 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 731) in the twenty-fifth control example, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the processing of Y11612 (Y11612: Yes), whether or not the jackpot this time is a variable probability jackpot. Determine whether (Y11641), if it is determined to be a probability variation jackpot (Y11641: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203xa on to set the gaming state after the jackpot to a probability variation state (Y11642), The process shifts to Y11633.

On the other hand, in the process of Y11641, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot (it is a normal jackpot) (Y11641: No), then it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. Determined based on the data in the state storage area 203wf at the time of winning (Y11643), when it is determined that it is normal state (Y11643: Yes), by setting 70 to the counter 203h during time saving, the game state after the end of the jackpot The number of times of time saving is set to the time saving state of 70 times (Y11644), and the process proceeds to Y11633. On the other hand, in the process of Y11643, if it is determined that the game state at the time of jackpot winning is not the normal state (time saving state or variable probability state) (Y11643: No), the jackpot is set to 30 in the time saving medium counter 203h The game state after the end is set to a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 30 (Y11645), and the process proceeds to Y11633. Here, the reason why the number of times of time saving is changed according to the game state is that only the lottery of the first special symbol, which usually determines the jackpot, is executed at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the normal state. This is because if the number of times of time saving is reduced, it is excessively disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, the reason for reducing the number of times of saving time when it becomes a normal jackpot in a state other than the normal state is that after the probability change state ends, the event that the jackpot is won again in the time saving state and returns to the probability change state is excessive. This is to make it difficult to occur in In other words, it is intended to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous and unintentionally disadvantageous to the hole when the state is once shifted to the variable probability state.
In addition, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 731) in the twenty-fifth control example, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect in the process of Y11612 (Y11612: No), then the winning to the specific winning hole 65a Winning processing for performing control according to the above is executed (S1911), abnormal processing is executed for determining whether or not the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is discharged normally (S1912), and then this End the process. These winning process (S1911) and abnormal process (S1912) are the same as the 25th control example. Since this process is exactly the same as the winning process (see FIG. 55) and the abnormality process (see FIG. 56) that have been executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 732 to 734. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 732, the rendering update process (S4171) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This effect update process (S4171) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 708) in the twenty-fourth control example described above. This is a process for periodically updating the effect mode (every main process execution interval). FIG. 732 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4171).
When the rendering update process (see FIG. 732) in the twenty-fifth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is a value greater than 0 (S5431), and a value greater than 0 is determined. If it is determined that it is not (that is, it is 0) (S5431: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5431, if it is determined that the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is a value greater than 0 (S5431: Yes), the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol in the probability variation state is being executed Therefore, first, the value of the end time timer 223xa is updated by subtracting it (S5432), and then the variable probability state (RUSH) is terminated according to the updated timer value (that is, the normal jackpot starts (until it is completed) is updated (S5433).

When the process of S5433 is completed, next, in the process of S5432, it is determined whether or not the value of the end time timer 223xa has been updated to 0 (S5434), and if it is determined that it has been updated to 0 (S5434: Yes) , the adventurer character 801 is attacked by the enemy character 811 and defeated (S5435), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5434 that the value of the end time timer 223xa has not been updated to 0 (S5434: No), the processing of S5435 is skipped and the present processing ends.
By executing this effect update processing (see FIG. 732), when the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state, the remaining time until the normal jackpot starts is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can be displayed accurately in Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand how much time remains for the variable probability state to be continued by winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbols.
Next, with reference to FIG. 733, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5111A) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5111A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 712) in the 24th control example described above, Special figure 1 effect mode setting process ( Figure 712 reference), it is the processing in order to set the production mode of the fluctuation display production which responds to the lottery result of the 1st special design. Figure 733 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5111A).
As shown in FIG. 733, when the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 733) in the twenty-fifth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a variable probability state (S9771A ), when it is determined that it is not in the variable probability state (S9771A: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is determined (S9712A), and the process proceeds to S9706A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9711A, if it is determined that the gaming state is the variable probability state (S9711A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol of this time is a normal jackpot (S9713A). .

In the processing of S9713A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a normal jackpot (S9713A: Yes), the fluctuation time of this normal jackpot is set to the timer value of the end time timer 223xa (S9714A), and the set timer A variable display mode with an end pinch effect (see FIG. 715(b)) with the value as the end time is determined (S9715A), and the process proceeds to S9706A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9713A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a normal jackpot (S9713A: No), the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9716A ), and the process proceeds to S9706A. In the processing of S9706A, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9706A), and this processing ends.
By executing this special figure 1 production mode setting process (see FIG. 733), when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, the probability variation state (RUSH) is in danger of ending. Since the player can be notified by the effect mode executed by the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy for the player to understand.
Next, with reference to FIG. 734, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A) in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 713) in the 24th control example described above, Special figure 2 effect mode setting process ( Figure 713 reference), it is the processing which is executed in order to set the fluctuation display mode which responds to the lottery result of the 2nd special design. Figure 734 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5201A).
Among the special figure 2 effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 734) in the 25th control example, in each process of S9611 and S9622A, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 713) in the 24th control example described above The same processes as those of S9611 and S9622A of are executed. Also, when the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 734) in the 25th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S9651A), and in the variable probability state If it is determined that there is no (S9651A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, in the process of S9651A, if it is determined that the game state is the variable probability state (S9651A: Yes), then the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is a value greater than 0 (that is, the current is the first special (S9652A), and when it is determined that the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is 0 (S9652A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the end time timer 223xa is greater than 0 (S9652A: Yes), then the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is shorter than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa It is determined whether or not it is time (S9653A).

In the processing of S9653A, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is shorter than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa (S9653A: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is complete. It is determined whether or not it is out (S9654A), and if it is determined that it is completely out (S9654A: Yes), a variable display mode with an effect that the enemy character 811 can avoid an attack is determined (S9655A). , the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9654A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a complete loss (that is, a small win) (S9654A: No), the adventurer character 801 defeats the enemy character 811 (Fig. 716). (b)) is determined (S9656A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9653A, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol of this time is longer than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa (S9653A: No), the second special symbol of this time It means that the variation display related to the lottery of the 2 special symbols is stopped and displayed with the completely missing symbol at the same time as the end of the normal jackpot variation of the 1st special symbol, and it is confirmed that the probability variation state cannot be continued. Therefore, each process of S9654A to S9656A is skipped, and the process proceeds to S9611.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example, once it shifts to the most advantageous variable probability state, the variable probability state and the big win are repeated unless a disadvantageous normal big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured to form an extremely advantageous state. That is, when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern, a disadvantageous normal jackpot is won with a high probability (at a rate of 90%), while when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern, an advantageous probability change. It is configured so that the jackpot is fixed and then the variable probability state is continued until the next jackpot is won. Further, in the twenty-fifth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of one of the special symbols is being executed. When the other special pattern is stop-displayed as a jackpot or a small-win pattern, the other special pattern during variable display is forced to come off and stop-displayed as a pattern. As a result, even if a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern that is disadvantageous, depending on the result of the lottery of the second special pattern, the fluctuation of the normal jackpot is forcibly stopped and displayed with the pattern, and the advantageous variable probability state is normal. It is constructed so as to be able to suppress the end of the game due to a big hit. Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth control example, it is configured such that, while one special symbol is fluctuating, the other special symbol cannot win a big hit in the lottery of the other special symbol. As a result, when the first special pattern lottery turns into a disadvantageous normal jackpot in the variable probability state and the big hit variation starts, the jackpot cannot be won in the second special pattern lottery, so the small prize is won. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player wishes only to forcibly stop the game with a symbol that usually misses the jackpot.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example is basically configured to execute update (subtraction) processing of a specific counter (counter value of the time saving counter 203h) at the time of stopping the fluctuation, and the final fluctuation in the time saving state Only the display is configured to be able to execute update (subtraction) processing of a specific counter (counter value of counter 203h during time saving) at the start of fluctuation. In addition, if one special pattern is stopped and displayed with a winning (big hit or small) pattern, and the other special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost pattern, the number of times of time reduction at the timing of the forced stop display It is configured to avoid execution of the subtraction process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of one time-saving number of times due to the variable display that is forcibly changed to an out (that is, it is equal to that the winning is not drawn), so that the number of time-saving times is more preferable. can be subtracted.
Here, conventionally, a game machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) equipped with control capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol has been widely and generally used. Are known. In such a conventional gaming machine, when a game state such as a time-saving state that continues only for a specific number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is set, the game state continues beyond the set number of times. In order to prevent this, it was common to employ control to update a counter value indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the game state at the start of the fluctuation. However, when adopting such control, whether or not the other winning (small winning or big winning) variation ends first (the other winning pattern is stopped and displayed first) is specified at the start of the variation. Since it is uncertain whether or not the change will be forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, it will be forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (useless for the player). Even if it is a variable display, there is a problem that the counter value indicating the number of remaining variations must be updated.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth control example, the update (subtraction) timing of a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is basically set at the time of stopping the fluctuation. By simply executing a relatively simple process of skipping the update (subtraction) processing of a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) for the variable display that is forcibly stopped and displayed with the outlier pattern at the time of stopping the fluctuation, the outlier pattern is forced. Since it is possible to suppress the wasteful subtraction of the number of residual fluctuations when the fluctuation display is executed which is useless for the player who is stopped and displayed, the number of residual fluctuations which is actually set can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of execution times of the lottery that properly draws a big win. In addition, only when the number of remaining fluctuations is to start a new fluctuation display in the state of one remaining time, it is configured to update (decrease) a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) at the start of fluctuation, so it is set It is also possible to prevent the gaming state from continuing beyond the number of remaining fluctuations. Therefore, a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) can be updated more suitably.
In addition, in this 25th control example, as a specific counter, the update timing of the counter 203h during time saving is basically at the time of fluctuation stop, and only when the fluctuation start timing comes in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations is 1 , Adopting a control to update the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the start of fluctuation, and skipping the update processing of the time saving medium counter 203h for the variable display that is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off pattern. The specific counter that is the target of this control is not limited to the counter 203h during the time saving. For example, in the specification that the probability variation state is terminated by executing a specific number of special symbol lotteries in the probability variation state, the counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol lottery in the probability variation state is used as a specific counter. The configuration may be such that the same control as in the twenty-fifth control example is executed.
In the twenty-fifth control example, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated (subtracted) at either the time when the fluctuation stops or the time when the fluctuation starts depending on the situation. 81, and the update timing of the number of times of reduced working hours displayed may be changed according to the situation. In this case, it may be linked with the update timing of the time saving medium counter 203h, or the update timing may be switched under another condition. Another condition is, for example, a special symbol lottery result. More specifically, for example, basically, when the display of the number of times of working hours is configured to be updated at the start of fluctuation, and the update timing is delayed (updated after the start of fluctuation or updated at the time of stoppage of fluctuation) In addition, it may be configured to increase the possibility of winning the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of time reductions on the display, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<26th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 735, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example described above, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a disadvantageous normal jackpot is won with a high probability, whereas when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. is constructed so as to determine an advantageous probability variable jackpot, and is constructed so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). Then, when the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big win or a small winning symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, the other special symbol during the variable display is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol. In addition, it is configured so that, while one special pattern is fluctuating, the other special pattern cannot win the big prize in the lottery of the other special pattern. By constructing in this way, when a disadvantageous normal big win is started in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variable state and the big win fluctuation is started, only the winning of the small win in the lottery of the second special symbol is desired. Realized innovative playability.

In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example, in the variable probability state of 1, the state where the lottery of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed and the state where the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed are switched. configured to More specifically, depending on the type of jackpot, after moving to the variable state, the lottery of the first special symbol is one to three times (prescribed number of times) until the end of the first special A variation pattern scenario is constructed so that the symbol variation time is long, and when the lottery of the first special symbol is completed for a specified number of times, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are performed until the jackpot is won. and are executed almost evenly. By constructing in this way, until the lottery of the first special symbols of the specified number of times is completed, it is an advantageous game state in which only the lottery of the second special symbols with a high probability variation ratio at the time of winning the big win can be biased and executed. On the other hand, after the specified number of times is completed, in order to form a relatively disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is likely to be executed, the game can be sharpened without changing the game state in the variable probability state. can be attached. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 25 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twenty-fifth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIGS. 735 and 736, the characteristic presentation mode in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. Fig. 735 (a) shows that the variable probability state is set in this 26th control example, and while the state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol is set It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in. As shown in FIG. 735(a), in the state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, the display area HR3 is displayed with " The characters "probability change rate super UP zone" are displayed. Further, information indicating the remaining time until the over probability variation rate UP zone ends is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Here, as described above, in the twenty-sixth control example, after shifting to the variable probability state, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed one to three times (specified number of times), so that the first The lottery for the special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols are almost evenly executed and the degree of advantage is relatively low. In other words, until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed for the specified number of times predetermined for each jackpot type, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which only the lottery of the second special symbol can be overemphasized and executed. do. Therefore, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed within the prescribed number of times, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 as the remaining time until the end of the zone. there is By constructing in this way, the player is asked how long the advantageous state in which only the lottery of the second special symbols, which is advantageous (the probability variable jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won) can be executed, will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the remaining time until the end of the zone is configured so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for one time (remaining fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during execution) is displayed regardless of the specified number of times. ing. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed in a state where the specified number of times remains, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed next time, an effect indicating zone continuation is executed. , to reset the remaining time until the end of the zone. By configuring in this way, the player can have a thrilling feeling of not knowing how long the probability variable rate super UP zone will last, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 735(b), a pinch effect that may be executed during the probability variation ratio excess UP zone will be described. Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, similarly to the twenty-fifth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small prize with a probability of 1/100. As described above, when winning a small hit, when the fluctuation display of the first special design is being executed at the stop display timing of the small hit, regardless of the remaining fluctuation time, the first special design at the same time as the small hit stop display It is also configured to be forcibly stopped by the off pattern. Therefore, if you win a small hit in the probability variable rate super UP zone, the zone will be terminated at the stop timing of the small hit regardless of the remaining time until the end of the zone (that is, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol). put away. FIG. 735(b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the zone is terminated by the small hit of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 735(b), when a small win is won in a special symbol lottery during the probability variable ratio super UP zone, an effect is executed in which an enemy character 811 appears directly below the small display area Dm1. . In addition, the text "Interfere with the enemy to avoid zone cutoff!!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Further, a character "Pinch of zone discontinuation!" is displayed in the small display area Ds2. With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that if the enemy character 811 cannot be hindered, the high probability variable ratio UP zone will be terminated.
FIG. 736 is a diagram showing a display mode when a small hit symbol is stop-displayed during the probability variation ratio excess UP zone (during long variation of the first special symbol). As shown in FIG. 736, when the stop display timing of the small winning pattern comes in the high probability variable rate zone, the adventurer character 801 fails to interfere with the enemy character 811, and the enemy character 811 spews out flames, resulting in a small winning pattern. An effect of burning out the display area Dm1 is executed. In addition, a character "Exceeding probability variation ratio UP zone discontinued!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Furthermore, in the small display area Dm8a, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a disjoint combination (discrete), and the second symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm8b. 3 symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of small hits (matching different odd-numbered symbols). With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the over probability variable ratio UP zone has ended.
It should be noted that the effect mode in which the enemy character 811 appears directly below the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 735(b)) has a predetermined probability ( For example, it is executed with a probability of 1/20). In the case of a complete miss, the adventurer character 801 attacks the enemy character 811 to succeed in obstruction, and an effect is executed to prevent the remaining time display in the small display area Dm1 from being burned. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the over probability variable rate UP zone has continued.
<Electrical configuration in the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 737(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 737(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 737(a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-sixth control example replaces the jackpot type selection table 202bx with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-fifth control example described above (see FIG. 717(a)). The difference is that a type selection table 202by is provided, a variation pattern table 202dy is provided instead of the variation pattern table 202dx, and a variation pattern scenario table 202ya is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the twenty-fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 738, details of the jackpot type selection table 202by in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 738 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202by in the twenty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 738, in this jackpot type selection table 202by, for each type of special symbol, the jackpot type that can be selected and the value range of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 738, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" as associated with "jackpot A29". A "jackpot B29" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "50 to 99". The "jackpot A29" is a jackpot (4-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot B29" is a jackpot (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and a time-saving state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set as the game state after the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A29" and "jackpot B29". Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the percentage of determining the “jackpot A29” is 50% (50/100), and the percentage of determining the “jackpot B29” is 50% (50/100). 100). In other words, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, half of the players are set in a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage, so the lottery of the first special pattern becomes a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.
Further, as shown in FIG. 738, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 19" with "jackpot C29". "Big win D29" is defined in association with the value of the winning type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 23", and "Big winning E29" is associated with the value "24" of the first winning type counter C2. It is defined, the value of the first per type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 29", and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "30 to 33". On the other hand, "jackpot G29" is defined in correspondence, "jackpot H29" is defined in correspondence with the value "34" of the first hit type counter C2, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to "jackpot I29" is defined in correspondence with the range of "89", and "jackpot J29" is defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the first win type counter C2 of "90 to 96". A "jackpot K29" is defined in association with the range of "97 to 99" of the value of the hit type counter C2.
'Big win C29' to 'Big win E29' are big wins (10-round definite variable big win) in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable definite state for the player is set as the game state after the end of the big win. Then, in the "jackpot C29", the specified number of times of the probability variable rate exceeding UP zone (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is set to 1 time, and in the "jackpot D29", the specified number of times is set to 2 times, and the "jackpot E29". is a jackpot in which the specified number of times is set to 3 times. Therefore, although the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the probability variable state after the winning, the "jackpot E29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by the "jackpot D29", and the "jackpot C29". ” has the lowest advantage.
In addition, "jackpot F29" to "jackpot H29" are jackpots (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds and the most advantageous probability variable state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. . Then, in the "jackpot F29", the specified number of times of the probability variable rate super UP zone (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is set to 1 time, and in the "jackpot G29", the specified number of times is set to 2 times, and the "jackpot H29". is a jackpot in which the specified number of times is set to 3 times. Therefore, although the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the probability variable state after the winning, "jackpot H29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by "jackpot G29" and "jackpot F29". ” has the lowest advantage.

Furthermore, "jackpot I29" to "jackpot K29" are jackpots (4 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. . Then, in the "jackpot I29", the specified number of times of the probability variable rate super UP zone (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is set to 1 time, and in the "jackpot J29", the specified number of times is set to 2 times, and the "jackpot K29". is a jackpot in which the prescribed number of times is set to 3 times. Therefore, although the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the probability variable state after the winning, "jackpot K29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by "jackpot J29", and "jackpot I29". ” has the lowest advantage.
Of the 100 random values ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, ``jackpot C29'', ``jackpot D29'', ``jackpot E29'', ``jackpot F29'', ``jackpot G29'', ``jackpot H29”, “jackpot I29”, “jackpot J29”, and “jackpot K29” are associated with 20, 4, 1, 5, 4, 1, 55, and 7 random numbers, respectively. , and three, the ratio of determining "jackpot C29" when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 20% (20/100), and the ratio of determining "jackpot D29" is 4% (4/100), the percentage of determining the "jackpot E29" is 1% (1/100), the percentage of determining the "jackpot F29" is 5% (5/100), and the "jackpot G29 ” is determined at 4% (4/100), the percentage at which “jackpot H29” is determined is 1% (1/100), and the percentage at which “jackpot I29” is determined is 55% (55/100). 100), the ratio of determining "jackpot J29" is 7% (7/100), and the percentage of determining "jackpot K29" is 3% (3/100).
In other words, the percentage of 10 round jackpots (jackpots C29 to E29) is 25% (20% + 4% + 1%), the percentage of 8 round jackpots (jackpots F29 to H29) is 10% (5% + 4% + 1%), The ratio of 4 round jackpots (jackpots I29 to K29) is 65% (55% + 7% + 3%). In addition, the ratio of the jackpot (jackpot C29, F29, I29) where the specified number of times until the end of the probability change rate UP zone is set to 1 time is 80% (20% + 5% + 55%), and the specified number of times is set to 2 times The ratio of the jackpots (jackets D29, G29, J29) is 15% (4% + 4% + 7%), and the ratio of the jackpots (jackets E29, H29, K29) where the specified number of times is set to 3 times is 5% ( 1% + 1% + 3%).
Thus, in the twenty-sixth control example, the number of rounds of the big hit and the combination of the first special symbol lottery number (prescribed number of times) until the end of the probability variable ratio super UP zone ends in the probability variable state set after the end of the big hit Various Since it is configured to provide various jackpot types, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the specified number of times and the number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202dy in the twenty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 739(a). FIG. 739(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern table 202dy. As shown in FIG. 739(a), the variation pattern table 202dy in the twenty-sixth control example is a normal table 202dy1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. , a zone table 202dy2 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a situation where a probability variation rate super UP zone is set, and a probability variation state (probability variation Limited to situations where the rate exceeding UP zone is not set), and at least a table 202dy3 for probability variation / time reduction referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time reduction state. ing. Among these, the normal table 202dy1 has the same defined contents as the normal table 202dx1 of the variation pattern table 202dx in the above-described 25th control example (in the lottery of the first special symbol, 7 seconds to 140 seconds depending on the lottery result) While the range of variation time is selected, the second special symbol lottery is defined as the variation time of 600 seconds is always selected), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
Next, details of the zone table 202dy2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 739(b). FIG. 739(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the zone table 202dy2. This zone table 202dy2 is a table that is referred to in the probability variation state and in a situation where the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is set. Here, the probability variation probability super UP zone is the first special symbol after the probability variation state is started (set) in the case of the probability variation state set based on winning one of the jackpots A29, C29, F29, and I29. is set until the fluctuation display ends once (until the second lottery for the first special symbol is executed), and is set based on winning one of the jackpots D29, G29, or J29. In the case of the probability variable state, the period from the start (set) of the probability variable state to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol twice (until the third first special symbol lottery is executed) , and in the case of the probability variable state set based on winning one of the big hits E29, H29, K29, the variable display of the first special symbol ends three times after the probability variable state is started (set). It is set until (until the third first special symbol lottery is executed).
As shown in FIG. 739(b), in the zone table 202dy2, as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is removed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 999") On the other hand, a deviation long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is defined in correspondence. In addition, as a variation pattern at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, variation time is 60000 ms (60 seconds) per long variation for the entire range (range of "0 to 999") that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take are defined in association with each other.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 739 (b), as a variation pattern when the second special symbol is out (completely out or small hit), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" , an outlier short-circuit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms (1 second) is associated and defined, and an out-of-short variation with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) for the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 949" B is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and an out-of-short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is defined in association with the range of "950 to 999" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short-circuit variation A whose variation time is 1 second, and 900 random numbers (counter values) are defined for the deviation short-circuit variation B whose variation time is 3 seconds. 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short fluctuation C whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds. Since the variation type counter CS1 can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", if the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the rate of selecting a variation time of 1 second is 5% (50 /1000), the percentage of selecting a variation time of 3 seconds is 90% (900/1000), and the percentage of selecting a variation time of 5 seconds is 5% (50/1000). Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the second special symbol comes off is 3 seconds (1 second x 5% + 3 seconds x 90% + 5 seconds x 5%). In addition, as shown in FIG. 739 (b), as a variation pattern at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, the variation time is defined in association with a per-short variation of 3000 ms (3 seconds).

From these stipulations, when this zone table 202dy2 is referred to, the fluctuation time in the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed is fixed to 60 seconds, while the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since the variation time is 3 seconds on average when the second special symbol is drawn, the second special symbol lottery can be performed 20 times on average while the first special symbol lottery is performed once. In other words, when the jackpot is won, the disadvantageous first special pattern lottery, in which the disadvantageous normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 50%, is hardly performed, and the advantageous second special pattern, in which the probability variable jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won. In order to form an extremely advantageous state in which the symbol lottery can be executed, when the zone table 202dy2 is referred to and a state in which a variation pattern is selected (probability variation rate exceeding UP zone) is set, the player can bring great joy to
Next, with reference to FIG.739(c), the detail of table 202dy3 for probability variation / time reduction mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 739(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the variable probability/time saving table 202dy3. As shown in FIG. 739 (c), the probability variation/time saving table 202dy3 defines the contents common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the defined contents are the zone table 202dy2 (Fig. 739(b) reference) is the same as the second special symbol. Therefore, when the probability variation/time reduction table 202dy3 is referred to, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are 3 seconds on average. That is, a state is formed in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed substantially equally. For this reason, compared to the state in which the zone table 202dy2 is referred to (probability variable ratio exceeding UP zone), the possibility of winning a big hit in the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol increases, so the degree of advantage for the player increases. lower.
Next, with reference to FIG. 740, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ya in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. In this variation pattern scenario table 202ya, each combination of the type of the previously won big win and the number of variations of the special symbol after the end of the big win is defined in association with the type of the variation pattern table referred to for selecting the variation pattern. ing. FIG. 740 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ya in the twenty-sixth control example.
As shown in FIG. 740, as a variation pattern scenario after the jackpot A29, C29, F29, I29 ends, for the period from when the probability variation state is reached to when the variation display of the first special symbol ends once , while the zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 739(b)) is defined in association, after the first special symbol has been changed once (after the second lottery of the first special symbol) is defined in association with the table 202dy3 for probability variation/time reduction (see FIG. 739(c)) regardless of the number of fluctuations. Also, as shown in FIG. 740, as a variation pattern scenario after the end of the jackpots D29, G29, J29, for the period from when the variable state is reached to when the variation display of the first special symbol ends twice , while the zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 739(b)) is defined in association, after the variable display of the first special symbol is completed twice (after the third lottery of the first special symbol) is defined in association with the table 202dy3 for probability variation/time reduction (see FIG. 739(c)) regardless of the number of fluctuations. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 740, as a variation pattern scenario after the end of the big hits E29, H29, K29, for the period from the time when the variable state is reached to the end of the variation display of the first special symbol three times , while the zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 739(b)) is defined in association, after the variable display of the first special symbol is completed three times (after the fourth lottery of the first special symbol) is defined in association with the table 202dy3 for probability variation/time reduction (see FIG. 739(c)) regardless of the number of fluctuations.

According to these stipulations, when the jackpot A29, C29, F29, I29 is won, the probability variation rate super UP zone (state where only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed) is for one time of the variable display of the first special symbol. While it continues only for 60 seconds, which is the period, when the jackpot D29, G29, J29 is won, the probability variable rate super UP zone continues for 120 seconds, which is the period for two times of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot E29. , H29, K29, the probability variable rate super UP zone will continue over 180 seconds, which is a period corresponding to three variable displays of the first special symbol. Therefore, since the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed in the probability variable rate super UP zone can be changed according to the jackpot type, a common game state (variable probability state) is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot. Even so, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of expectation for the variable probability big win is varied according to the kind of the big win. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Further, as shown in FIG. 740, as a variation pattern scenario after the jackpot B29 (the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state) is completed, a lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol Until the total number of times reaches 100 times (that is, within the number of times of time saving), the table 202dy3 (see FIG. 739 (c)) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations, while the second A normal table 202dy1 is defined in association with a range in which the total number of lotteries of one special symbol and the second special symbol is 101 or more. Therefore, while the lottery of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous and the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous are equally executed within the number of times of time saving, the second special symbol is after the number of times of time saving passes and the state shifts to the normal state. Since the fluctuation time of is remarkably long (600 seconds), a state is formed in which only the first special symbol lottery is executed and the degree of advantage is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 740, after initializing the settings of the pachinko machine 10, in the normal state until the jackpot is won, regardless of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is defined in association with a disadvantageous normal table 202dy1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unduly disadvantaged when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, resulting in an excessive advantage for the player.
Next, with reference to FIG. 741, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 741 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 741, the RAM 223 in the twenty-sixth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the twenty-fifth control example described above in that an in-zone timer 223ya is added. Another difference is that the end time timer 223xa in the twenty-fifth control example is deleted.
Timer 223ya in the zone is a timer indicating the period to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the remaining time until the probability variation ratio excess UP zone ends, and while the probability variation ratio excess UP zone continues, the second When the lottery for one special symbol is executed, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (see S9725A in FIG. 745). In addition, the value is subtracted and updated periodically (each time the effect update process (see FIG. 744) is executed) according to the passage of time (see S5442 in FIG. 744). By displaying the remaining time corresponding to the counter 223ya in the zone on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to clearly show the player the time until the zone for exceeding the probability variation ratio UP ends. can.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the twenty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 742 and 743. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 742, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y361) in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y361) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 723) in the twenty-fifth control example described above, and is the first special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 723), it is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 742 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y361).
Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 742) in the twenty-sixth control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection in the above-described twenty-fifth control example The same processes as Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 of the process (see FIG. 723) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 742) in the twenty-sixth control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern scenario table 202ya and the special figure 1 variation counter Identify (Y551), read out the identified variation pattern table (Y552), and proceed to Y505.
Although not shown, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 742) is also performed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y871). ) is modified so that the fluctuation pattern table is read out by the same processing as each of Y551 and Y552 of ).
Next, with reference to FIG. 743, the details of the jackpot control process (Y1031) in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. This jackpot control process (Y1031) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 731) in the above-described twenty-fifth control example. It is a process for executing various controls inside. FIG. 743 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (Y1031).

Of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 743) in the twenty-sixth control example, in each of Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, Y11641, Y11642, and Y11645, the jackpot control processing in the twenty-fifth control example described above (FIG. 731 ), Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, Y11641, Y11642, and Y11645.
In addition, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 743) in the twenty-sixth control example, when the processing of S11642 or S11645 ends, then the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is specified (Y11651), and the specified scenario is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203ya (Y11652), and this process is terminated.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 744 to 746. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 744, details of the rendering update process (S4181) in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. This effect update process (S4181) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 732) in the above-described twenty-fifth control example. This is a process for periodically updating the presentation mode (at each execution interval of the main process). FIG. 744 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4181).
When this effect update process (see FIG. 744) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the zone timer 223ya is greater than 0 (S5441), and is not greater than 0 (that is, 0 ) (S5441: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5441, if it is determined that the timer value of the timer 223ya in the zone is a value greater than 0 (S5441: Yes), since it means that the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is set, Update by subtracting the value of the timer 223ya in the zone (S5442), and then update the remaining time display until the probability variation ratio excess UP zone ends according to the updated timer value (S5443).

When the process of S5443 is completed, next, in the process of S5442, it is determined whether or not the value of the in-zone timer 223ya has been updated to 0 (S5444), and if it is determined that it has been updated to 0 (S5444: Yes). , an effect indicating the end of the probability change rate exceeding UP zone is executed (S5445), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5444 that the value of the in-zone timer 223ya has not been updated to 0 (S5444: No), the processing of S5445 is skipped and this processing ends.
By executing this effect update processing (see FIG. 744), when the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is set in the probability variation state, the remaining time until the zone ends is displayed accurately on the third symbol display device 81 be able to. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand how many advantageous states remain in which only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 745, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5121A) in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5121A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 733) in the 25th control example described above, Special figure 1 effect mode setting process ( Figure 733 reference), it is the processing in order to set the production mode of the fluctuation display production in order to show the lottery result of the 1st special design. FIG. 745 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S5121A) in the twenty-sixth control example.
Of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 745) in the 26th control example, in each process of S9706A, S9711A, and S9712A, the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 733) in the 25th control example The same processes as the processes of S9706A, S9711A, and S9712A are executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 745) in the twenty-sixth control example, when it is determined that the current game state is a variable probability state in the process of S9711A (S9711A: Yes), It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S9721A).

In the process of S9721A, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S9721A: No), it means that the current probability variation rate is not in the UP zone, so the process is performed. The process proceeds to S9712A. On the other hand, in the process of S9721A, if it is determined that the variation time is a variation pattern of 60 seconds (S9721A: Yes), it means that it is in the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone, so the first time after the end of the jackpot Determining whether or not it is a variable display of the first special symbol (S9722A), and if it is the first variable display of the first special symbol (S9722A: Yes), an effect to notify the entry into the probability variation ratio super UP zone is determined (S9724A), and the process proceeds to S9725A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9722A, if it is determined that it is not the first variable display of the first special symbol (S9722A: No), the variable display mode with the effect of notifying the continuation of the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is determined. (S9723A), the process proceeds to S9725A. In the process of S9725A, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set for the timer value of the in-zone timer 223ya (S9725A), and the process proceeds to S9706.
Next, with reference to FIG. 746, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5221A) in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S5221A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 734) in the 25th control example described above, Special figure 2 effect mode setting process ( Figure 734 reference), it is the processing in order to set the production mode of the fluctuation display production in order to show the lottery result of the 2nd special design.
In the processing of S9611, S9622A, and S9651A among the special figure 2 effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 746) in the 26th control example, the special figure 2 effect mode setting processing (see FIG. 734 See), the same processes as the processes of S9611, S9622A, and S9651A are executed. Also, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 746) in the twenty-sixth control example, in the process of S9651A, when it is determined that the current game state is a variable probability state (S9651A: Yes), then the zone It is determined whether the value of the medium timer 223ya is greater than 0 (ie, the probability variation rate is in the UP zone) (S9661A), and the value of the zone timer 223ya is 0 (ie, the probability variation rate is exceeded). is not in the UP zone) (S9661A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.
On the other hand, in the process of S9661A, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223ya in the zone is a value greater than 0 (that is, in the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone) (S9661A: Yes), then this second special It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol is shorter than the value of the timer 223ya during the zone (S9662A), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is not shorter than the value of the timer 223ya during the zone ( long time) (S9662A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, in the process of S9622A, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is shorter than the value of the timer 223ya in the zone (S9662A: Yes), whether the lottery result is a small hit It is determined whether or not (S9663A), and if it is determined that it is a small hit (S9663A: Yes), the variable display mode with the termination effect of the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone (see FIGS. 735(b) and 736) is determined. (S9664A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9663A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (S9663A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example, after the variable probability state is set, the variable display of the first special symbol (1 to 3 times) predetermined for each jackpot type ( A lottery for a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is executed at a high frequency over the period until the end of the disadvantageous fluctuation display (a lottery for the first special symbol that is disadvantageous is difficult to execute). It was configured to form a state (probability variable rate super UP zone). Specifically, a simultaneous variation specification that can execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel) is adopted, and at least a specific number of times (1 The variation time of the first special symbol is set to be significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed. In other words, it is configured to be able to execute the variable display of the second special symbol a plurality of times (around 20 times) during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, during the probability variation state of 1, only the lottery of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is executed, and the advantage degree is high (probability variation rate super UP zone) and the advantage degree is high. Since it is possible to set a state in which the execution frequency of the first special symbol having a lower advantage than the state is increased, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in this 26th control example, the state of selecting a variation pattern with reference to the zone table 202dy2 (probability variation rate exceeding UP zone) is shifted to the probability variation state, and the variation display of the first special symbol is a specific number of times ( 1 times to 3 times) was configured to be set only until the end, but the setting timing of the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is not limited to this. For example, for the period from the transition to the time saving state to the end of the variation display of the first special symbol of the specific number of times, the probability variation ratio super UP zone is set (see the zone table 202dy2 for the variation pattern selected) configuration. By configuring in this way, even in a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage (disadvantageous), the game can be sharpened, so it is possible to further suppress the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, instead of immediately after the start of the probability variation state, from the middle of the probability variation state (for example, after the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol is completed 50 times in total) A probability variation ratio super UP zone is set. It may be configured as To make a player think that he/she does not want to win a big win until reaching a zone with a super probability variable ratio UP (want to win a big win after reaching a zone with a super probability variable ratio UP) by configuring in this way. Because it is possible, even though an advantageous variable state is set, it is expected that the special symbol lottery will continue to come off until the predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of lotteries in which the probability variable rate super UP zone is set). It is possible to realize novel playability.
In the twenty-sixth control example, the state of selecting a variation pattern with reference to the zone table 202dy2 (probability variation rate exceeding UP zone), the variation display of the first special symbol is executed up to three times in the probability variation state of 1. Although it was configured to be limited to until, the number of fluctuations to set the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, in some jackpot types, it may be configured such that the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone continues until the variation display of the first special symbol 5 times or 10 times ends. Also, from the start of the probability variation state to the end, there may be provided a jackpot type in which the probability variation ratio super UP zone is always set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the variations of the higher probability variable ratio UP zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the twenty-sixth control example, similarly to the twenty-fifth control example described above, when one of the special symbols is in the process of executing the variable display corresponding to the big win, even if the other special symbol is drawn by lottery, the big win is won. (Completely missed or can be elected only in a small hit) specification was adopted, but not limited to this, as in the 24th control example described above, even during a big hit fluctuation of one special symbol, the other It is configured to be able to draw a big hit with a special pattern, and the lottery of the special pattern on the side that was stopped and displayed with the first winning pattern (small hit or big hit pattern) becomes effective (the fluctuation display of the other special pattern is removed and the pattern is forced to stop. specification) may be adopted. By configuring in this way, in particular, the first special symbol in the probability variation probability super UP zone in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a significantly longer time (60 seconds) than the variation time of the second special symbol Even if the jackpot is won, it becomes a jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern after that, and it is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the jackpot of the first special pattern. 2 It is possible to further improve the rate of occurrence of the jackpot of the special symbol.

In the twenty-sixth control example, in the variable probability state, whether to refer to the zone table 202dy2 or to refer to the variable probability/time reduction table 202dy3 is determined based only on the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery. , but not limited to these. For example, by referring to both the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol, it is determined whether to refer to the zone table 202dy2 or to refer to the probability variation/time reduction table 202dy3. good too. More specifically, for example, in the variable probability state set after the end of the big hit A29, C29, F29, I29, the lottery of the first special symbol ends once (variation display of the first special symbol ends once ), or refer to the zone table 202dy2 until the lottery of the second special symbols is completed 30 times, and refer to the variable probability/time reduction table 202dy3 after any condition is satisfied. Similarly, in the variable probability state set after the end of the big hits D29, G29, J29, the lottery of the first special symbol ends twice (the variable display of the first special symbol ends twice), or the second special symbol The zone table 202dy2 may be referenced until the lottery is completed 60 times, and the probability variable/time reduction table 202dy3 may be referenced after any condition is met. Furthermore, in the probability variable state set after the end of the big hits E29, H29, K29, the lottery of the first special symbol ends three times (the variable display of the first special symbol ends three times), or the second special symbol Until the lottery is completed 90 times, the zone table 202dy2 may be referred to, and after any condition is established, the variable probability/time reduction table 202dy3 may be referred to. In the case of such a configuration, after entering the variable probability state, the game ball does not enter the right first ball entrance 64r, but enters only the second ball entrance 640. Even so, it is possible to suppress the fact that the probability variable rate super UP zone continues too long (the lottery of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage increases too much), so it is excessively advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.
<27th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 747 to 755. FIG. In the twenty-sixth control example described above, after the variable probability state is set, over the period until the variable display of the first special symbol of the number of times predetermined for each jackpot type (variable display on the disadvantageous side) ends In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is frequently executed (the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is difficult to be executed) to form an advantageous state (probability variable rate super UP zone). Specifically, a simultaneous variation specification that can execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel) is adopted, and at least a specific number of times (1 The variation time of the first special symbol is set to be significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed. In other words, during the execution of the variable display of one first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times (around 20 times).
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed are made different in the probability variable state and the time saving state set to the time saving state of normal symbols. That is, in the variable probability state, while controlling so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed substantially equally, in the time saving state, the probability variable ratio super UP zone in the 26th control example Similarly, it was configured to form an advantageous state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the present twenty-seventh control example, when the lottery of the special symbol of the first number of times predetermined in the variable probability state is completed, the specification that the variable probability state is terminated (so-called ST type probability variable state) is adopted. The number of times until the time-saving state of normal patterns ends (second number) than the number of times (first number) until the high probability probability state of special symbols ends after the probability state is set It consists of That is, when the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big win, first, the variable probability state continues until the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big win reaches the first number (10 times), and the big win ends. The game state is set to a time-saving state by setting the low probability state of the special pattern by setting the number of times of lottery of the later special pattern to the first number, and after that, the number of times of lottery of the special pattern after the end of the big win is the second number. It is configured so that the time saving state continues until the number of times (50 times) is reached. In addition, when the lottery for the special symbols is executed 50 times, the time-saving state for the normal symbols is terminated and the normal state is set. Therefore, in the twenty-seventh control example, when the probability variable jackpot ends, first, although the jackpot probability is higher than usual (1/25), the advantage degree (proportion of the probability variable jackpot) is low. A probability variable state is formed in which the second special symbol lottery with a high degree (percentage of probability variable jackpot) is executed almost equally (half and half), and the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the first number (10 times). Although the jackpot probability becomes a normal probability (1/100), it is configured to form a time-saving state in which only the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to sequentially set the probability variable state and the time saving state that are configured to have different merits (big hit probability, frequency of the second special symbol lottery), so that the game characteristics are switched on the way (merit, demerit) are replaced), a novel operation can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the V.26 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twenty-sixth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 747, a characteristic presentation mode in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. Figure 747 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode during the variable probability state in the twenty-seventh control example, Figure 747 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the time saving state in the twenty-seventh control example be. Here, as described above, in the twenty-seventh control example, different merits (superiorities) are provided for both the variable probability state and the time saving state. Specifically, in the variable state, the probability of the jackpot is higher than in the short-time state, so that it is superior to the short-time state. It is configured to be superior to the probability variable state in that the ratio of For this reason, it cannot be unconditionally determined which game state has a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, in the twenty-seventh control example, both the variable probability state and the time saving state are unified under the name of "chance time".
As shown in FIG. 747 (a), in the variable probability state in the twenty-seventh control example, the variation of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage relative to the substantially left half of the main display area Dm A left display area DmL for executing a display effect is formed, and a right display area for executing a variable display effect of a third symbol indicating a lottery result of a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage in the substantially right half. DmR is formed. An enemy character 811 is displayed in the left display area DmL to indicate that the degree of advantage is relatively low in the case of a big win, and the right display area DmR is relatively advantageous in the case of a big win. An adventurer character 801 is displayed to imply that the degree is high. These allow the player to easily understand in which display area it is more advantageous to report the big win.
Also, as shown in FIG. 747(a), the characters "chance time A", the characters "high expectation of jackpot", and the characters " The text "Probability variation expectation medium" is displayed. To make a player easily understand that the currently set chance time is a chance time A (probability variable state) in which there is a high chance of winning a jackpot normally, though the probability of the jackpot is high, by these display contents. can be done. In addition, information indicating the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the chance time ends (until the variable probability state and the time saving state after the variable probability state ends) is displayed in the display area Dm1. The example of FIG. 747(a) illustrates a state in which the fifth variable display is started in the variable probability state, and the characters "45 times remaining until the end of the chance time" are displayed. In addition, the characters "In Chance Time" are displayed in the small display area Ds2.
Next, with reference to FIG. 747(b), an effect mode in the time saving state will be described. As shown in Figure 747 (b), in the time saving state, similar to the UP zone (see Figure 735 (a)) in the 26th control example described above, the advantage degree in most of the main display area Dm The variable display of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the high second special symbol is executed, and the variable display performance of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is formed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous (difficult to see) manner in the small display area Dm8a. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage and a high execution frequency.

Further, as shown in FIG. 747(b), the characters "chance time B", the characters "low expectations for jackpot", and the characters " The characters "Probability variation expectation high" and are displayed. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the currently set chance time is the chance time B (variable probability state) which has a low probability of winning the big win but has a very high possibility of winning the variable probability big win. be able to. In addition, for the display area Dm1, until the chance time ends (until the probability variable state and the time saving state after the probability variable state end) are displayed. The fact that the characters "during chance time" are displayed in the small display area Ds2 is common to the case where the variable probability state (chance time A) is set (see FIG. 747(a)).
<Electrical configuration in the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 748(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 748(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 748(a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-seventh control example replaces the jackpot type selection table 202by with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-sixth control example described above (see FIG. 737(a)). The difference is that a type selection table 202bα is provided, a variation pattern table 202dα is provided instead of the variation pattern table 202dy, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ya is deleted. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the twenty-sixth control example described above (see FIG. 737(a)), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, with reference to FIG. 749, details of the jackpot type selection table 202bα in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 749 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bα in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 749, in this jackpot type selection table 202bα, the jackpot type that can be selected for each type of special symbol and the value range of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 749, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" as associated with "jackpot A30". "Big win B30" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". The "big win A30" is a big win (4 rounds variable probability big win) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big win. In addition, "jackpot B30" is a jackpot (4 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are associated with "jackpot A30" and "jackpot B30". When a jackpot is won in the lottery of one special symbol, the ratio of determining the "jackpot A30" and the percentage of deciding the "jackpot B30" are both 50% (50/100).
In addition, when the probability variable state is set as the probability variable jackpot, the probability variable number of times of 10 times and the time saving number of times of 50 times are set, so the lottery of special symbols is executed 10 times after the probability variable jackpot ends. Until then, it is set to a variable probability state, set to a time saving state within a range from 10 times to 50 times for the number of lotteries of special symbols, and then set to a normal state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set as a normal jackpot, the number of times of time saving is set to 25 times. is set to the time-saving state, and then shifts to the normal state. In other words, when the probability variable jackpot is set, 10 times the probability variable state and 40 times the time saving state are set, while when the normal jackpot is set, only 25 times the time saving state is set, so the probability variable jackpot is better than the normal jackpot. higher advantage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 749, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the "jackpot C30" with respect to the range of "0 to 24". "Jackpot D30" is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 34", and "jackpot E30" is defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "35 to 99". ” are defined in association with each other. The “jackpot C30” is a jackpot (10 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot D30" is a jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds and the variable probability state most advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Furthermore, "jackpot E30" is a jackpot (4 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first win type counter C2, 25 random numbers are associated with "jackpot C30", "jackpot D30", and "jackpot E30". Since there are 10 pieces and 65 pieces, the ratio of determining "jackpot C30" when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 25% (25/100), and "jackpot D30" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of determining the "jackpot E30" is 65% (65/100). Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the majority is set to the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds), but the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous regardless of which jackpot type is selected. is set to a high probability variable state, the lottery for the second special symbol can be said to be a lottery with a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol.
Next, details of the variation pattern table 202dα in the twenty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 750(a). FIG. 750(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202dα in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 750 (a), the variation pattern table 202dα in the twenty-seventh control example is the normal table 202dα1 and the normal table 202dα1 that are referred to for selecting the variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. , a time saving table 202dα2 referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is performed in a time saving state, and a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is performed in a variable probability state. and a probability variation table 202dα3 to be referred to. Among these, the normal table 202dα1 has the same specified contents as the normal table 202dy1 of the variation pattern table 202dy in the 26th control example described above (in the first special symbol lottery, 7 seconds to 140 seconds depending on the lottery result) While the range of variation time is selected, the second special symbol lottery is defined as the variation time of 600 seconds is always selected), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
FIG. 750(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving table 202dα2 in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 750 (b), in the time saving table 202dα2, as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is removed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take the entire range ("0 to 999" range) On the other hand, a deviation long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is defined in correspondence. In addition, as a variation pattern at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, variation time is 60000 ms (60 seconds) per long variation for the entire range (range of "0 to 999") that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take are defined in association with each other.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 750 (b), as a variation pattern when the second special symbol is out (completely out or small hit), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" , an outlier short-circuit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms (1 second) is associated and defined, and an out-of-short variation with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) for the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 949" B is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and an out-of-short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is defined in association with the range of "950 to 999" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short-circuit variation A with a variation time of 1 second, and 900 random values (counter values) are defined for the deviation short-circuit variation B with a variation time of 3 seconds. 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short fluctuation C whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds. Since the variation type counter CS1 can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", if the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the rate of selecting the variation time of 1 second is 5% (50 /1000), the percentage of selecting a variation time of 3 seconds is 90% (900/1000), and the percentage of selecting a variation time of 5 seconds is 5% (50/1000). Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the second special symbol comes off is 3 seconds (1 second x 5% + 3 seconds x 90% + 5 seconds x 5%). In addition, as shown in FIG. 750 (b), as a variation pattern at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, the variation time is defined in association with a per-short variation of 3000 ms (3 seconds).

From these stipulations, when this time saving table 202dα2 is referred to, the fluctuation time in the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed is fixed to 60 seconds, while the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since the variation time is 3 seconds on average when the second special symbol is drawn, the second special symbol lottery can be performed 20 times on average while the first special symbol lottery is performed once. In other words, when the jackpot is won, the disadvantageous first special pattern lottery, in which the disadvantageous normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 50%, is hardly performed, and the advantageous second special pattern, in which the probability variable jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won. To form an advantageous state in which drawing of symbols can be executed. Therefore, the time saving state can be configured to have a higher degree of advantage than the variable probability state in terms of the rate at which the variable probability state is provided at the time of winning the jackpot.
Next, with reference to FIG. 750(c), details of the probability variation table 202dα3 will be described. FIG. 750(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this probability variation table 202dα3. As shown in FIG. 750 (c), in the probability variation table 202dα3, the contents common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are defined, and the defined contents are the time saving table 202dα2 (Fig. 750 ( It is the same as the defined contents of the second special symbol in b) see). Therefore, when the probability variation table 202dα3 is referred to, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are 3 seconds on average. That is, a state is formed in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed substantially equally. Therefore, compared to the time saving state, the possibility of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol is increased in the probability changing state, so in terms of the game state set when the jackpot is won, the probability changing state is higher than the time saving state. method is less advantageous for the player.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 751 to 754. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 751, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y371) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y371) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 742) in the twenty-sixth control example described above, and is the first special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 742), it is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 751 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y371).
Among the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 751) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y552 processes, the first special symbol variation in the twenty-sixth control example described above The same processes as Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y552 of the pattern selection process (see FIG. 742) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 751) in the twenty-seventh control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern table corresponding to the current game state is specified (Y561), and the process is started. Move to Y552.

Although not shown, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process also includes Y561 of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 751). is modified so that the variation pattern table is read out by the same processing as the processing of .
Next, with reference to FIG. 752, the details of the change start update process (Y372) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This update process at the start of fluctuation (Y372) is a process that is executed in place of the update process at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 724) in the twenty-sixth control example (and the twenty-fifth control example) described above, and is the update process at the start of fluctuation. (See FIG. 724), this is a process for updating the game state at the fluctuation start timing. FIG. 752 is a flow chart showing this updating process at the start of fluctuation (Y372).
In each of the processes Y631 to Y633 of the fluctuation start update process (see FIG. 752) in the twenty-seventh control example, the fluctuation start update process (FIG. 724) in the twenty-sixth control example (and twenty-fifth control example) ) are executed. In addition, when the update process at the start of variation in the twenty-seventh control example (see FIG. 752) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203αa is 1 (Y641), and the probability variation counter 203αa If it is determined that the value of is 1 (Y641: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is decremented by 1 and updated to 0 (Y642), and the state command indicating the transition to the time saving state is set ( Y643), and the process proceeds to Y631. On the other hand, in the process of Y641, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is not 1 (Y641: No), it means that it is not time to subtract the number of variable probability, so the processing of Y642 and Y643 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to Y631.
Next, with reference to FIG. 753, the details of the update process (Y751) at the time of fluctuation stop in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This update process at fluctuation stop (Y751) is a process executed instead of the update process at fluctuation stop (see FIG. 727) in the twenty-sixth control example (and twenty-fifth control example) described above. (Refer to FIG. 727) is a process executed in order to update the game state at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols. FIG. 753 is a flow chart showing this updating process when fluctuation stops (Y751).

In each of the processes Y635 to Y638 in the change stop update process (see FIG. 753) in the twenty-seventh control example, the change stop update process (see FIG. 727) in the twenty-sixth control example (and twenty-fifth control example) described above. ) are executed. In addition, when the update process (see FIG. 753) at the time of fluctuation stop in the twenty-seventh control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203αa is greater than 0 (Y645), and the probability change If it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203αa is greater than 0 (Y645: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is updated by subtracting 1 (Y646), and the value of the variable probability counter 203αa after subtraction is It is determined whether or not it has become 0 (Y647). In the process of Y647, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa after subtraction has become 0 (Y647: Yes), set the state command indicating the transition to the time saving state (Y648), and proceed to Y635 and migrate. On the other hand, in the process of Y647, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa after subtraction is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (Y647: No), the process of Y648 is skipped. , the process proceeds to Y635. Also, in the process of Y645, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (Y645: No), it means that it is not time to subtract the number of variable probability. Therefore, each process of Y646 to Y648 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y635.
Next, with reference to FIG. 754, details of the jackpot control process (Y1041) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This jackpot control process (Y1041) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 731) in the twenty-sixth control example described above. It is a process for executing various controls inside. FIG. 754 is a flow chart showing the jackpot control process (Y1041) in this twenty-seventh control example.
Of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 754) in this twenty-seventh control example, in each of Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, and Y11641, Y11601 of the jackpot control processing in the twenty-sixth control example (see FIG. 731) Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, and the same processing as Y11641 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 754) in the twenty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot in the processing of Y11641 (Y11641: Yes), the counter value of the probability variable counter 203αa is 10 is set to 50 in the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving (Y11661), and the process proceeds to Y11633. On the other hand, in the process of Y11641, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot) (Y11641: No), set 25 to the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving (Y11662) , the process proceeds to Y11633.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 755 is a flow chart showing the state command reception process in the twenty-seventh control example. This state command reception process (S4231A) is a process executed in place of the state command reception process (see FIG. 115) in the twenty-sixth control example (and the second control example) described above. ), this is a process for performing control according to the information indicating the game state notified by the main controller 110 by the state command.

Of the state command reception processing (see FIG. 755) in the twenty-seventh control example, each of the processing in S9001, S9003, S9005, and S9009 corresponds to the state command reception processing (FIG. 755) in the twenty-sixth control example (and the second control example). 115) are executed. In addition, in the state command reception processing (see FIG. 755) in the twenty-seventh control example, if it is determined in the processing of S9003 that a state command indicating a change to the normal state has been received (S9003: Yes), The presentation mode is set (S9021A), and this process is terminated.
In addition, in the state command reception processing (see FIG. 755) in the twenty-seventh control example, if it is determined in the processing of S9005 that a state command indicating that the gaming state has been changed to the time saving state is received (S9005: Yes ), set an effect mode indicating the entry into chance time B (S9022A), and terminate this process. Furthermore, in the state command reception process (see FIG. 755) in the twenty-seventh control example, if it is determined in the process of S9009 that a state command indicating that the game state has been changed to the variable probability state is received (S9009: Yes ), set an effect mode indicating entry into chance time A (S9023A), and terminate this process.
By executing this state command reception processing (see FIG. 755), it is possible to set a production mode (see FIG. 747) corresponding to the type of chance time. The playability can be easily understood.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example, in the probability variable state and the time saving state set to the time saving state of the normal symbols, by making the type of the special symbol that is likely to be executed different, both It is configured such that merits different from each other are imparted to the game state. Specifically, in the variable probability state, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are controlled to be executed almost evenly, while in the time saving state, only the lottery for the second special symbol is performed. was configured to form an advantageous condition in which In addition, in the present twenty-seventh control example, when the lottery of the special symbol of the first number of times predetermined in the variable probability state is completed, the specification that the variable probability state is terminated (so-called ST type probability variable state) is adopted. The number of times until the time-saving state of normal patterns ends (second number) than the number of times (first number) until the high probability probability state of special symbols ends after the probability state is set It consists of That is, when the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big win, first, the variable probability state continues until the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big win reaches the first number (10 times), and the big win ends. The game state is set to a time-saving state by setting the low probability state of the special pattern by setting the number of times of lottery of the later special pattern to the first number, and after that, the number of times of lottery of the special pattern after the end of the big win is the second number. It is configured so that the time saving state continues until the number of times (50 times) is reached. In addition, when the lottery for the special symbols is executed 50 times, the time-saving state for the normal symbols is terminated and the normal state is set. Therefore, in the twenty-seventh control example, when the probability variable jackpot ends, first, although the jackpot probability is higher than usual (1/25), the advantage degree (proportion of the probability variable jackpot) is low. A probability variable state is formed in which the second special symbol lottery with a high degree (percentage of probability variable jackpot) is executed almost equally (half and half), and the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the first number (10 times). Although the jackpot probability becomes a normal probability (1/100), it is configured to form a time-saving state in which only the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to sequentially set the probability variable state and the time saving state that are configured to have different merits (big hit probability, frequency of the second special symbol lottery), so that the game characteristics are switched on the way (merit, demerit) are replaced), a novel operation can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-seventh control example, similarly to the twenty-fifth control example and the twenty-sixth control example described above, when one special symbol is in the process of executing the variable display corresponding to the big hit, the other special symbol will be selected by lottery. Although a specification was adopted in which a jackpot could not be won even if it was executed (only a complete loss or a small win could be won) was adopted, but not limited to this, one special symbol as in the above-mentioned 24th control example etc. Even during the fluctuation of the big hit, the other special pattern is configured to be able to draw a big hit, and the lottery of the special pattern on the side stopped and displayed with the first winning pattern (small hit or big hit pattern) becomes effective (fluctuation of the other special pattern The display may come off and be forcibly stopped by the pattern) specification may be adopted. By configuring in this way, especially in the time-saving state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a significantly longer time (60 seconds) than the variation time of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is a big hit. Even if it wins the lottery, it becomes a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern after that, and the big win fluctuation of the first special pattern can be forced to stop without being out of order, so that the big win of the second special pattern advantageous in the time-saving state can be obtained. The occurrence rate can be further improved.
In the twenty-seventh control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed substantially equally in the variable probability state, while the variation time of the first special symbol is the second special symbol in the time saving state. It was constituted so that only the lottery of the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage was executed by greatly lengthening the fluctuation time of the pattern, but on the contrary, in the time-saving state, the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the first special pattern were executed. While the lottery of the second special symbol is executed almost evenly, the degree of advantage is high by significantly lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol with respect to the variation time of the second special symbol in the variable probability state. It may be configured such that only the lottery of 2 special symbols is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the superiority in the variable probability state, so that it is possible to strongly expect to win a big hit during the variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the twenty-seventh control example, by differentiating the variation time of the first special symbol in the variable probability state and the time saving state (differentiating the variation pattern table to be referred to), the lottery frequency of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is different. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table to be referred to in the first half and the second half of the variable probability state may be different, and the game characteristics may be different between the first half and the second half of the variable probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous in the variable probability state.
In the twenty-seventh control example, the special symbol lottery of the first number of times (10 times) is executed in the variable probability state to shift to the time saving state, and the second number of times (40 times) after shifting to the time saving state. Although it was configured to shift to the normal state by executing the lottery of the special symbols, the number of times the variable probability state continues does not have to be fixed. For example, every time a special pattern lottery is executed in a variable probability state, a lottery (falling lottery) is performed to determine whether to fall from a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state of a special pattern, and a fall lottery is performed. It may be constructed so that the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer (the lottery frequency of the first special symbol with a lower degree of advantage becomes lower) when the player is elected to the time-saving state. By constructing in this way, the lottery frequency of the second special pattern having a high degree of advantage is increased when a generally unpleasant situation such as falling from the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state occurs. can alleviate the player's disappointment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.

<First Effect Modification of Twenty-Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 763 to 765, a modification of the battle effect (see FIG. 652) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example described above will be described. In the twenty-third control example described above, when a predetermined operation (continuous hit operation or long-press operation) is performed on the effect button 22 (operating means) operable by the player, the remaining enemy character 880a is displayed. A battle effect (operation effect) that reduces (variable) the HP value (level information) is configured to be executable, and as a result of the battle effect, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is "0" When an advantageous performance result) is displayed, the player can be notified that the player has won a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (a benefit that is advantageous to the player is given).
Furthermore, during the production period during which the battle production is executed, during the preparation period before the SW valid period (operation valid period) in which the player can effectively operate the production button 22 is set, the enemy character 880a remains. A preemptive attack effect (see FIG. 652(b)) that reduces the HP value in advance is configured to be executable, and the effect of the current battle effect is highly likely to be advantageous to the player. The player is made to operate the performance button 22 willingly by making the player grasp the setting before the is set.
However, in the twenty-third control example described above, when the SW valid period is set without executing the preemptive attack effect (without previously decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a), the same SW valid There is a problem that the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22 is gradually reduced because the battle effect that reduces the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a toward "0" is executed within the period. rice field.
On the other hand, in this modified example, the length of the SW valid period set in the battle production reach can be changed, and the effect result advantageous to the player is displayed as the production result of the battle production reach. When possible (when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit), rather than when a disadvantageous production result is displayed for the player (when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is lost) It is configured to facilitate the setting of a long SW valid period.

With this configuration, even if the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has not been decreased in advance, it is possible to decrease the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the effect button 22. By varying the length of the effective period (SW effective period), it is possible for the player to predict that the effect result of the current battle effect is highly likely to be an effect advantageous to the player.
In addition, when it is possible to display a performance result advantageous to the player as the performance result of the battle performance (a performance result in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is "0"), a long SW effective period is configured to be easily set. Therefore, the period required to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" can be lengthened, and the player can easily enjoy operating the performance button 22 for a long time.
Furthermore, in this modification, when the SW valid period (5 seconds) longer than the normal SW valid period (3 seconds) is set, the player is informed that the long SW valid period is set (has been set). A plurality of notification timings can be set as notification timings to be notified. Specifically, before the SW valid period is actually set, the first notification timing capable of informing the player that the long SW valid period is set and the actual SW valid period are set. a second notification timing capable of informing the player that a long SW valid period has been set after the SW effective period is set.
By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the battle production reach while expecting that a long SW effective period is set (has been set), and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modification, as a notification mode for informing the player that the SW effective period (5 seconds) longer than the normal SW effective period (3 seconds) is set (has been set), the normal After displaying the validity period gauge ga4 corresponding to the SW validity period (3 seconds), the display form corresponding to the SW validity period (2 seconds), which is the difference, can be displayed. In other words, it is configured so that the player can recognize that a long SW valid period has been set after making the player think that a normal SW valid period has been set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player who is watching the battle effect reach while expecting a long SW valid period to be set. In addition, compared to the case where the display mode corresponding to the long SW valid period (5 seconds) is displayed from the beginning, it is possible to visually grasp how much longer the SW valid period is set compared to normal. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.
<Regarding the effect content in the first modified example of effect of the twenty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 763, the characteristic contents of effects among the various effects executed in the first modification of the twenty-third control example will be described. This first effect modification example is different from the above-described 23rd control example in that the content of the effect executed in the battle effect is different, but the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
In the first modified example of effect, similarly to the twenty-third control example described above, in the battle effect, the first part effect (effect executed before the SW effective period is set) and the second part effect (the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the effect button 22), and the content of the effect executed during the first part effect is made different. there is

Here, with reference to FIG. 763, the effect contents of the first part effect in the battle effect ready-to-win which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this first effect modification will be described. FIG. 763(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an effect for powering up the ally character 801a is executed as the first part effect. As shown in FIG. 763(a), when the first part effect is executed, a friendly character 801a and an enemy character 880a are displayed in the same manner as the display screen of the twenty-third control example (see FIG. 652(a)). are displayed, and an HP gauge 890 for indicating the HP value of the enemy character 880a is displayed. Of the various display modes displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 763(a), the same display modes as those of the twenty-third control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. .
In this first modified example of production, as the production of the first part, in addition to the preemptive attack production that reduces the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a, an attack assistance production that powers up the ally character 801a is configured to be executable. When the attack assistance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 763(a), a character 801d imitating an angel is displayed, and the effect of powering up the ally character 801a is executed by the character 801d.
Then, as a display mode for informing the player that the friendly character 801a has been powered up by the attack assist effect, an aura 801a1 is displayed around the friendly character 801a, and "Blessed by an angel" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Power up" comment is displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the effect executed as the first part effect (attack assistance effect) in an easy-to-understand manner. The state in which the display screen shown in FIG. 763(a) is displayed is the state in which the player is notified that the ally character 801a has been powered up by the attack assistance effect. It is configured so that the player cannot grasp whether the is given. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the production effect given by the attack assistance production.

Next, an example of the display screen displayed during the second part effect executed after the display of FIG. 763(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 763(b). FIG. 763(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen notifying that a long SW valid period will be set during the second part production.
As shown in FIG. 763(b), in the second part production, the display mode of the friendly character 801a displayed in the first part production executed before the second part production (the friendly character wearing the aura 801a1 801a) is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the second part effect is being executed according to the effect result of the first part effect. In FIG. 763(b), as the production result of the first part production (production effect of the attack assist production), a longer SW effective period than usual is set as the length of the SW effective period set during the second part production. A display mode is displayed for informing the player that the game will be played.
Specifically, "Long button is occurring!" A display mode corresponding to a long SW effective period (5 seconds) is displayed. Then, as the additional period gauge ga4c indicating the difference (2 seconds) from the normal SW valid period (3 seconds), a display mode with a special effect (a mode indicating light emission is displayed in the drawing) is displayed.
Note that the state shown in FIG. 763(b) is a state in which the second part is being produced and the SW effective period is not set, so the SW effective period is set above the display effect button Sw6b. The letters "ready for repeated hits" are displayed to indicate that it is before the game is played (preparation period). In other words, when the display mode shown in FIG. 763(b) is displayed, the SW valid period set this time is longer than usual at a stage before the SW valid period is actually set. The player is informed that it is the period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player willingly operate the production button 22 to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0".

In addition, by applying a special effect to the additional period gauge ga4c that indicates the difference from the normal SW valid period, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current SW valid period is longer than usual. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually grasp the length of the additional period.
Next, with reference to FIG. 764, each display mode for notifying the player of the length of the SW valid period in the battle effect reach of the first effect modification will be described. FIG. 763(b) described above is an example of a case in which the player is notified that a long SW effective period is set at a timing (first notification timing) before the timing at which the SW effective period is actually set. The display pattern for displaying the effective period gauge ga4 indicating the long SW effective period at the first notification timing has been described.
In this way, by notifying that a long SW effective period is set at the first notification timing, the player is notified that the long SW effective period is set before the SW effective period is actually set. Since the notification can be made, the player can be motivated to operate the performance button 22 while knowing that the situation is likely to result in an advantageous performance result.
However, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 763(b), when the effective period gauge ga4 indicating the length of the SW effective period is displayed and the additional period gauge ga4c is not displayed, the set Since the length of the SW effective period is determined to be the normal length (3 seconds), there is a problem that the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this first modified example of effect, as shown in FIG. The effective period gauge ga4 indicating the period is displayed, and then the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed (see FIG. 764(b)). In other words, unlike the effect mode shown in FIG. 763(b), the timing of notifying that the SW effective period is set is different from the timing of notifying that the long SW effective period is set. It is configured to be able to notify at the first notification timing that a long SW effective period is set in the mode.
By configuring in this way, when the effect of notifying that the long SW valid period is set is executed at the first notification timing, the player is notified that the long SW valid period is set. It is possible to expect it for a longer period of time. Also, even if the long SW valid period is not set, at the time when FIG. Since it is possible to leave the character, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the executed battle presentation reach at an early stage.
Here, with reference to FIGS. 764(a) and 764(b), specific display contents of the time difference effect mode executed at the first notification timing will be described. FIG. 764(a) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen displayed in the first half period when the time difference effect mode is set as a long button display indicating that a long SW effective period is set, FIG. 764(b) is a diagram showing part of the display screen in the second half period when the time difference rendering mode is set.
When the time lag effect mode is set as the second part effect of the battle effect ready-to-reach, as shown in FIG. Then, the same display mode as the normal display mode (see FIG. 653(a)) for notifying that the SW valid period is set is displayed. In addition, since the display mode shown in FIG. 764(a) is the same as FIG. Detailed description is omitted.

When the first half period has passed, as shown in FIG. 764(b), the effective period gauge ga4 is displayed as a display mode for informing the player that the currently set SW effective period is a long SW effective period. An additional period gauge ga4c is additionally displayed, and a display mode with a flame Sw6a is displayed on the display effect button Sw6b as a long button display mode indicating that a long SW effective period is set. Then, the characters "Generate long button!!" and the characters "Extension of period!!" are displayed, and the player is informed that the valid period of the SW that can be operated repeatedly is longer than usual.
The timing at which the display screen shown in FIG. 764(b) is displayed is the timing before the SW effective period is set, and the remaining effective period ga4a indicated using the effective period gauge ga4 decreases. Since it is in a state where it has not been completed, the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed on the right side of the valid period gauge ga4. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the length of the remaining valid period ga4a has been extended by the additional period gauge ga4c.
Further, the display mode (display color) of the additional period gauge ga4c is configured to be the same as the display mode (display color) of the remaining valid period ga4a. With this configuration, when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed, it is possible for the player to be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining valid period ga4a has increased. The display mode (display color) of the additional period gauge ga4c may be displayed in a display mode (display color) different from that of the remaining valid period ga4a. With this configuration, it is possible to determine how much the remaining effective period ga4a has increased during the period from when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed until when the SW effective period is actually set. The prediction can be facilitated by comparing the length with the length of the additional period gauge ga4c.
Further, in the present first modified example of effect, similarly to the above-described 23rd control example, the length of the gauge indicating the remaining valid period ga4a and the degree of decrease of the gauge are used to play the remaining period of the SW valid period. Although a configuration is used in which the operator can grasp the values, the present invention is not limited to this, and specific numerical values may be used for display. In this case, a numerical value corresponding to the length indicated by the additional period gauge ga4c may be added to the numerical value indicating the remaining effective period ga4a.

Furthermore, if the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a is configured to vary according to the length of the remaining valid period, for example, when the remaining valid period ga4a has not decreased, it is displayed in blue and the remaining valid period If the display mode is configured to be variable such that "yellow" is displayed when ga4a has decreased by 50% or more, and "red" is displayed when the remaining valid period ga4a has decreased by 90% or more, additional When "white" is displayed as the display mode of the period gauge ga4c and the remaining period of time additionally displayed on the additional period gauge ga4c is reduced (the remaining period of validity ga4a before the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed It is good to configure it so that it is displayed in "blue" when the period is reached). By configuring in this way, the relationship between the remaining length of the remaining effective period ga4a and the variable mode of the display mode can be unified between when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed and when it is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the display mode for indicating the remaining valid period.
In addition, without being limited to this, even when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed, the display mode can be changed in the order of "blue", "yellow", and "red" according to the decrease rate of the remaining valid period ga4a. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, the relationship between the elapsed time after the SW valid period is set and the remaining valid period of the SW valid period, depending on whether the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed or not is displayed. Since the nature (ratio) can be notified to the player in the same display mode, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.
As described above with reference to FIGS. 764(a) and 764(b), in the effect mode in which the length of the SW effective period is notified at the first notification timing, the SW effective period is actually set. Since the effect mode was to notify the player of the length of the SW valid period to be set before, the player is not expected to set a long SW valid period until the SW valid period is actually set. Although it was expected, it was understood that a short SW valid period was set because the length of the current SW valid period was grasped by the player when the SW valid period was actually set. There is a risk that the player will not intentionally operate the effect button 22 during the SW valid period.
On the other hand, in the present modified example of effect, in addition to the above-described first notification timing, that is, the timing before the SW effective period is actually set, the predetermined timing after the SW effective period is actually set Also at the timing (second notification timing), the additional period gauge ga4c is configured to be displayable. Here, with reference to FIGS. 764(c) and (d), display contents when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed at the second notification timing will be described.

FIG. 764(c) is a display screen displayed during the first half of the SW effective period when the long button display is executed at the second notification timing as a long button display indicating that a long SW effective period is set. FIG. 764(d) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen in the latter half of the SW effective period when the long button display is executed at the second notification timing. .
As shown in FIG. 764(c), when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed at the second notification timing, after the SW valid period is set, that is, during the period in which the player is performing the repeat operation, Also, the valid period gauge ga4 of normal length is continuously displayed, and variable display is executed in which the remaining valid period ga4a decreases according to the elapsed time. In other words, a display mode in which the player has difficulty in understanding that a long SW effective period is set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 even though a long SW effective period is actually set. is displayed.
After that, when the remaining effective period ga4a decreases to 50% or less, the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 764(d), the SW valid period has already been set and the elapsed time ga4b is being displayed. ga4c is displayed to connect to the left of validity period gauge ga4.
With this configuration, even when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed after the SW valid period is set (the player is notified that the long SW valid period is set at the second notification timing). However, since the additional period gauge ga4c and the remaining valid period ga4a can be continuously displayed, the player can easily understand that the remaining valid period ga4a has increased. be able to.

In addition, in the first modified example of effect, when informing the player that a long SW effective period is set at the second notification timing (timing after the SW effective period is set), the effective period Since the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed near (on the left side) of the gauge ga4, the length of the SW valid period set this time (the first displayed valid period gauge ga4 and the additional period gauge ga4c ) can be easily grasped by the player in the state where the SW valid period is set, but other configurations may be used, for example, the additional period gauge ga4c (2 seconds, which is the difference between the normal length of the SW valid period (3 seconds) and the long SW valid period (5 seconds)), the remaining valid period The display may be such that ga4a is increased (in FIG. 764(c), the right end line of the remaining valid period ga4a is moved rightward). By configuring in this way, the remaining valid period ga4a that decreases (in FIG. 764(c), the right end line of the remaining valid period ga4a is moved leftward) as time passes increases. is displayed, the player can easily grasp that the remaining period of the SW valid period has increased.
Further, in this case, as the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a, the remaining period of the SW valid period displayed on the display surface is made different between the display mode before the remaining period is increased and the display mode after the increase. For example, the display color of the remaining valid period ga4a is set to "yellow" as the display mode before the remaining period is increased, and the display color of the remaining valid period ga4a is set as "white" as the display mode before the remaining period is increased. should be configured to With such a configuration, the player can grasp the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a, thereby easily grasping whether or not the remaining valid period ga4a indicating the remaining period of the SW valid period can increase. can be made
In addition, in the first modified example of effect, when the length of the SW effective period actually set is notified at the second notification timing, the display mode indicating the length of the SW effective period is additionally displayed only once. Although the configuration is described, the length of the remaining period of the SW valid period may be divided into a plurality of times and additionally displayed. With this configuration, even when the length of the remaining SW valid period is additionally displayed at the second notification timing, the length of the remaining SW valid period can be additionally displayed. Therefore, the player can easily play the game while expecting that a longer SW valid period is set.
In addition, in this first modified example of effect, either a normal SW effective period (3 seconds) or a long SW effective period (5 seconds) can be set as the length of the SW effective period that can be set. However, one SW valid period may be selected and set from three or more SW valid periods having different lengths.

With this configuration, when the length of the SW valid period already displayed is increased in the middle, that is, when the SW valid period of length 1 is displayed, the length of 1 is When SW effective periods with different lengths (longer than the length of 1) are displayed, a situation is created in which the SW effective period having a length different from the length of 1 differs from the actually set SW effective period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily play the game while anticipating that a longer SW valid period is set.
In addition, in the present modification of the first effect, the length of the SW valid period set for execution and the length of the SW valid period notified to the player (the length of the displayed valid period gauge ga4). As a configuration for differentiating , a length shorter than the length of the actually set SW valid period (the length of the period including at least part of the actually set SW valid period) is notified to the player. However, without being limited to this, a period (pseudo period) longer than the actually set length of the SW valid period may be displayed as the length of the SW valid period.
By constructing in this way, a situation is created in which the length of the SW valid period (the length of the pseudo period) displayed to the player is longer than the actually set length of the SW valid period. Therefore, when the display mode (effective period gauge ga4) indicating the length of the SW effective period is displayed, the length of the SW effective period indicated by the effective period gauge ga4 is the actually set SW effective period. Considering the possibility that the period is longer than the length of the period, the performance button 22 can be motivated to operate before the actually set SW effective period elapses.
Note that if a period (pseudo period) longer than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set can be displayed as the length of the SW valid period, the length of the displayed pseudo period may differ from the actual length. In order to match the length of the SW valid period set in the , it is preferable to configure to be able to execute a shortened display effect that shortens the length of the displayed pseudo period. For example, the valid period displayed as the pseudo period By constructing the gauge ga4 so that the remaining valid period ga4a decreases faster than the actual SW valid period decreases, at least the actual remaining valid period of the SW becomes zero. It is preferable that the length of the remaining valid period of the SW valid period indicated by the pseudo period matches the length of the actual SW valid period.

With this configuration, when the valid period gauge ga4 is displayed as the pseudo period, the length of the SW valid period actually set on the premise that the remaining valid period ga4a decreases at a normal decreasing speed is From the state in which the player is made to think that a very long SW valid period is set, an effect is executed in which the remaining valid period ga4a is decreased and displayed at a speed of decrease faster than usual. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the decreasing speed of the remaining valid period ga4a.
Also, as a shortened display effect, by executing an effect of hiding (deleting) a partial area of the remaining effective period ga4a that has already been displayed, the effective period gauge ga4 that indicates the pseudo period is actually set. It may be configured to variably display to a display mode corresponding to the length of the SW valid period. With this configuration, the valid period gauge ga4 indicating the pseudo period is changed to the valid period gauge ga4 indicating the actually set SW valid period without changing the decreasing speed of the remaining valid period ga4a. becomes possible. Therefore, since it is not necessary to perform control for varying the speed of decrease of the remaining valid period ga4a, it is possible to simplify the display control processing for the remaining valid period ga4a.
<Regarding the content of control processing of the first modified example of effect in the twenty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 765 , among the control processes executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example of production, the contents of the processes different from the control process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example described above. give an explanation.
This first production modification differs from the above-described 23rd control example in that the production content (production mode) of the battle production is different. The content of processing is different. Specifically, for the 23rd control example described above, instead of the time saving state production mode determination process (see F3051 in FIG. 671) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the time saving state production mode determination process (See F3051a in FIG. 765). Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

Figure 765 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production feature decision processing (F3051a). This time saving state production mode determination processing (F3051a) includes production modes of various variable productions for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state and suggestion production for suggesting that the time saving state ends. A process for setting a display command for determining an effect mode and displaying various effects corresponding to the determined effect mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. With respect to the time saving state production mode determination process (see F3051 in FIG. 671) in the 23rd control example, the processing content of the process for determining the production mode of the battle production (see F4206) is changed, and it is set during the battle production The difference is that processing (F4201a to F4203a) for determining the SW valid time (operation valid period) is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the time saving state effect mode determination process (F3051a) is executed, first, the same F4201 to F4211 processes as the time saving state effect mode determination process (see F3051 in FIG. 671) in the twenty-third control example described above are performed. When the process of F4210 is finished, next, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is determined (F4201a), and whether the determined setting information is the setting information corresponding to the long operation effective period or not. is determined (F4202a).
In the process of F4202a, if it is determined that the setting information is not long, that is, the setting information indicates a normal operation valid period (F4202a: No), the process of F4212 is executed as it is, and this process ends. do.
On the other hand, in the process of F4202a, if it is determined that it is a long time, that is, if it is determined that the setting information indicates an operation valid period longer than usual (F4202a: Yes), the notification timing of the long button is decided by lottery. It is determined (F4203a), the process of F4212 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in this first production modification, in the process of determining the variable production (time-saving state production mode determination process (see F3051a in FIG. 765)), it is configured to determine the operation valid period. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be possible to execute a process of determining whether or not to increase the operation valid period based on the details of the operation executed during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means so that more operation effective periods are set.
Also, in this case, a privilege that can be given to the player only based on the operation of the operation means during the increased operation valid period may be provided. , ``Enemy escape'' can be set, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, ``defeat'', and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, ``victory'', Alternatively, it is configured so that "enemy flees" is determined. In addition, when "winning" is determined as the detection result, not only the privilege indicating the winning of the jackpot, but also the jackpot game in which the content of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (jackpot game with a large number of rounds) and the jackpot game A second privilege indicating that an advantageous game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set is also notified after the end.
When the operation means is operated during the increased operation effective period, "victory" is more likely to be determined as the production result of the battle production than when the operation means is operated only during the operation effective period before the increase. It is better to configure it so that With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.
In addition, based on the operation of the operating means during the increased effective period of operation, it is possible to switch the contents of the already determined jackpot game to contents advantageous to the player (for example, increase the number of rounds of the jackpot game). or set the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, which predefines a variable scenario that changes the effect mode according to the lapse of the operation duration time during the operation valid period, the location (operation Scenario content corresponding to operation continuation time that can be continued only when the valid period is extended) can be configured to set a scenario that defines the content of changing the presentation mode to a specific mode indicating winning of a jackpot. However, based on the result of the special symbol lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to extend the valid period of operation.
By configuring in this way, the same scenario can be used when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit and when it is a loss, and the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
<Second Modification of Effect in Twenty-Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 766 to 771, the jackpot game effects executed during the jackpot game will be described as the second modified example of effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example described above.
In this second effect modification, as in the fifteenth control example described above, as the jackpot game effect, the content of the jackpot game being executed and the prefetching of the already acquired special symbol reservation (winning information used for the special symbol lottery) Based on the results, it is possible to execute an additional effect of notifying the payout number of prize balls that can be obtained in the running jackpot game, and a pending continuous effect of notifying that the jackpot game is continuously executed. It consists of

Furthermore, in this second effect modification, when it is determined that there is a special symbol reservation for winning a jackpot as a result of pre-reading of the special symbol reservation acquired at the time the jackpot game is started, the next execution is performed. Including the contents of the jackpot game to be played, it is configured to be able to execute an additional performance for the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, the jackpot game being executed is a 4R jackpot game in which the round game is executed four times, and a 6R jackpot game in which the round game is executed six times is executed in the pre-read special symbol reserve. When winning information as a lottery result of a special pattern lottery is included, a pseudo-addition performance for pseudo-notifying the number of payouts corresponding to a 10R jackpot game in which a round game is executed 10 times can be executed. there is
By configuring in this way, the number of times of actually executing the jackpot game, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot game notified to the player as the jackpot game effect. content can be different.
In addition, in this second production modification, the number of executions of the jackpot game actually executed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot reported to the player as the jackpot game production As a technique for differentiating the content of the game, a pseudo holding continuous effect (pseudo holding continuous effect) can be executed during the period in which one jackpot game is executed.
In addition, in this second effect modification, a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed. The ratio is different, and the number of payouts (number of rounds) notified in the pseudo-additional effect and the contents of the latter jackpot game (number of rounds) executed in the pseudo-hold continuous effect are set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that it can be determined based on the game state to be played.

For example, if the variable probability state is always set after the end of the 10R jackpot game, the setting condition of the effect mode in which the number of payouts for 10 rounds is displayed as a pseudo-addition effect is the jackpot game. (after the end of the second jackpot game) is established when the variable probability state is set.
In other words, in the case of pseudo-executing a jackpot game effect that differs from the content of the jackpot game that is actually executed, the content of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed and the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that there is no contradiction in the relationship between By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot game effect with contents different from the contents of the jackpot game actually executed is pseudo-executed, the player can understand the contents of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed. can make it difficult to feel uncomfortable.
<Regarding the content of the effect in the second modification of the twenty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 766 to 768, the effect contents of the big win game effect executed in the second modified example of effect will be described. FIG. 766(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an additional effect that is part of the jackpot game effect, and FIG. 766(b) shows the effect result of the additional effect. It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen. In addition, among the display screens for the jackpot game effects, the same display elements as those displayed in the jackpot game effects (see FIG. 459(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example described above are Reference numerals are attached and description thereof is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 766(a), in the small display area Dm8, a display mode indicating that the special symbols have won the jackpot is displayed, and the player can recognize that the special symbols have won the jackpot. there is In addition, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right-handed" so that the player can easily understand the game method in the jackpot game.

In the small display area Dm14, the number of consecutive wins in the jackpot game is displayed. It should be noted that the number of consecutive chances displayed in the small display area Dm14 is not the actual number of times of the jackpot game, but the number of times the jackpot game effect is executed (the number of consecutive chances of the jackpot game) is displayed. By configuring in this way, by executing the pseudo-additional effect or the pseudo-holding continuous effect, even if the number of times of the actually executed jackpot game and the number of times of the executed jackpot game effect are different. Also, since the number of consecutive wins displayed in the small display area Dm14 can be updated in correspondence with the number of times of the executed big winning game performance, the big winning game performance can be executed without causing a sense of incongruity to the player.
Further, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot game effect being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm15. That is, when the pseudo-additional effect is executed and the jackpot game effect is executed over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, the number of rounds corresponding to the pseudo-additional effect is displayed in the small display area Dm15. is doing. By configuring in this way, when the pseudo-additional performance is executed across a plurality of jackpot games, the number of rounds displayed in the small display area Dm15 each time a new jackpot game is started after the second time. ``Round 1'' is not displayed as , and a jackpot game performance can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.
A display area HR60 is formed on the upper right side of the display screen. The display area HR60 is composed of a display area HR60a for displaying the total number of prize balls that can be paid out during the jackpot game, and a display area HR60b for displaying the number of prize balls that have already been paid out. The player can be notified in advance how many prize balls can be obtained in the jackpot game. It should be noted that the display regarding the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game is another form of display of the information regarding the condition established for establishing the end condition in the 62nd control example described later.
It should be noted that the various values displayed in the display area HR60 are similar to the above-described display modes displayed in the small display areas Dm14 and Dm15. It is constructed so that a value corresponding to the middle jackpot game effect is displayed. In other words, when the pseudo-additional effect is executed and the jackpot game effect is executed over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, the total number of prize balls that can be paid out notified by the pseudo-additional effect is displayed in the display area HR60a. , and the number of winning balls obtained during the jackpot game effect being executed is displayed in the display area HR60b. By constructing in this way, a value associated with the contents of the executed big win game performance can be displayed in the display area HR60, so that the player can execute the big win game performance without any sense of incongruity.

FIG. 766(a) is a display displayed in an additional effect executed in the first round of the 10R jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. A diagram showing an example of the screen, in which the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 for guiding the player that the game method to be executed during the jackpot game is the right-handed game, "444" is displayed in the small display area Dm8 as the stop display mode (combination of symbols) of the third symbol stopped and displayed when the jackpot is won.
In addition, "jackpot x 1" for indicating that it is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) based on winning a jackpot in the normal state is displayed in the small display area Dm14, and the present is the first round game ( The letters "Round 1" are displayed in the small display area Dm15 to indicate that it is the first round. In addition, a value of "600" is displayed in the display area HR60a as the total number of prize balls that can be paid out to the player in the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds) of the jackpot game that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of effect. A value of "60" is displayed in the display area HR60b as the number of prize balls already obtained during the first round of the game being displayed.
Here, the detailed content is omitted because it is the same as the above-described fifteenth control example, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification of the second effect, there is a specific winning port 65a in which game balls can win during the jackpot game. 15 prize balls are paid out in response to the fact that one game ball wins at the end of the round game period. It is constructed so that the end condition of one round game is established when seconds have passed.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 766(a), in the display area HR60a, there are 40 prizes and 15 prize balls that can be awarded to the specific prize winning port 65a in the round game of 4 rounds. "600P" corresponding to the multiplied value is displayed. Also, since it shows a state in which four game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a during the first round of the game, it corresponds to a value obtained by multiplying the number of winning balls by the number of winning balls of 15. "60P" is displayed in the display area HR60b.

Then, in the central part of the main display area Dm, an additional effect is executed to increase (add) the total number of prize balls that can be acquired during the running jackpot game (the value displayed in the display area HR60a). A display area HR61 to be displayed is formed, and in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "chance to add the number of payouts" are displayed to indicate that the additional effect has been executed.
When the additional effect is executed, a plurality of numerical information including numerical information for indicating an increased value (P) with respect to the value (P) displayed in the display region HR60a is dynamically displayed in the display region HR61, An effect is executed in which a value corresponding to the numerical information stopped and displayed is additionally displayed in the display region HR60a.
Here, the plurality of numerical information dynamically displayed in the display area HR61 is numerical information corresponding to the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game that can actually be executed, for example, corresponding to the jackpot game of 6 rounds. As numerical information, "300P" corresponding to the value obtained by dividing the total number of prize balls for 4 rounds from the total number of prize balls for 6 rounds, that is, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value already displayed in the display area HR60a. , the total number of prize balls for 4 rounds, that is, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value already displayed in the display area HR60a is subtracted from the total number of prize balls for 8 rounds as numerical information corresponding to the jackpot game of 8 rounds. "600P" corresponding to the value is already displayed in the display area HR60a, which is the total number of prize balls for 10 rounds from the total number of prize balls for 6 rounds as numerical information corresponding to the jackpot game of 6 rounds. "900P" corresponding to the value obtained by dividing the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value, and "0P" as numerical information corresponding to the 4-round jackpot game are displayed dynamically at a speed that is visible to the player. is displayed.
By configuring in this way, the total number of prize balls (the value displayed in the display area HR60a) after the execution of the additional production becomes a value corresponding to each type of jackpot game, so that the additional production can be performed during execution. It is possible to easily make the player think that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is notified.

Therefore, even when the pseudo-additional effect is executed over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, it is easy for the player to think that the jackpot game with a large number of rounds is executed as one jackpot game. can do.
When the additional effect displayed in FIG. 766(a) ends and the effect result is displayed in the display area HR61, the effect result display screen of the additional effect shown in FIG. 766(b) is displayed. In FIG. 766(b), since the jackpot game being executed is the 10-round jackpot game, "+900P" is displayed in the display area HR61 as the effect result of the additional effect, and "900P" is added as the value of the display area HR60a. "1500P" is displayed.
Then, as a display mode for indicating that the present production result is the most advantageous production result for the player (the production result indicating that the maximum number of rounds that can be executed is a jackpot game (MAX jackpot game)), "MAX ' is displayed in the lower vicinity of the display area HR61, and the characters 'Congratulations on exceeding the limit' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the current effect result is an advantageous effect result.
Next, with reference to FIG. 767, display contents when a jackpot game effect (pseudo MAX jackpot effect) corresponding to the MAX jackpot game is executed by a pseudo-additional effect when the condition for generating the holding train is established. give an explanation. FIG. 767(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first jackpot game out of two jackpot games in which the pseudo MAX jackpot effect is straddled, and FIG. 767(b). is a display displayed during a special symbol variation period for showing the result of a special symbol lottery in which the second big winning game is executed out of two big winning games executed across the pseudo MAX jackpot effect. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen.

As shown in FIG. 767(a), as a result of the look-ahead executed at a predetermined timing (including the start timing) during the jackpot game, a state in which reserved symbols that can win a jackpot are obtained (in the figure, a double circle mark display), it is configured to execute an additional effect based on the pre-read information.
In the example shown in FIG. 767 (a), as a result of the pre-reading, it is a 6-round jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, it is determined that the winning prize information for winning the jackpot in which the variable probability state is set is stored. An additional performance is performed so that one jackpot game performance is executed across the jackpot game being executed (4-round jackpot game) and the next jackpot game (6-round jackpot game). executed.
The additional effect executed in the final round (fourth round) of the first jackpot game is during the special symbol fluctuation (jackpot fluctuation) that causes the second jackpot game to be executed after the first jackpot game is completed. , the effect result is displayed (see FIG. 767(b)).
In this case, since the one-time jackpot game effect is executed straddling the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game, even when the second jackpot game is executed, the small display area is displayed. The value described in Dm14 is not updated (retains the jackpot×1), and the display mode indicating the final round number of the first jackpot game is continuously updated (added) in the small display area Dm15. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 768, the effect contents of the pseudo-holding continuous effect that make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are executed using the round game executed in one jackpot game will be described. FIG. 768(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen in which it is pseudo-notified that the first jackpot game has ended as a pseudo-holding continuous effect, and FIG. 768(b) is a pseudo-holding continuous effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in which the 2nd big-hit winning was notified as an effect|presentation.
In Figure 768 (a) and (b), during the game period of the 10 rounds of the jackpot game, two times of jackpot games (4 rounds of jackpot games and 6 rounds of jackpot games) are shown to be executed Pseudo hold It shows a production screen for continuous production.
First, the same effect as in the display area HR61 of FIG. 766(a) is executed, and an additional effect is executed for the player. As a result, as shown in FIG. 768(a), as a result of the additional effect, "0P" is displayed in the display area HR61, indicating that there are no prize balls that can be paid out, and the jackpot game of this time is displayed. A 4-round jackpot is announced. In addition, "V" is displayed in the display area HR62 as a display mode indicating that there is a jackpot pending in the reserve as the effect result of the additional effect.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the same effect screen as the effect screen shown in FIG. A display mode is displayed. Since the holding continuous performance is a performance mode different from the variable performance (jackpot variable performance) executed when the first big win is won, the continuous setting of the same performance mode is suppressed. It can be said that it is a process for

Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Congratulations on getting V" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the holding replay. With this configuration, a 10-round jackpot game is actually being executed, but as a result of the additional performance, the jackpot game being executed is a 4-round jackpot game. It is possible to pseudo-notify that the user is on hold and that the user is on hold.
Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the holding continuous effect in which the execution condition is difficult to be satisfied, and to enhance the effect of the effect.
Then, in the interval period set between the fourth and fifth rounds of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 768(b), the display area HR63 is formed, and the pseudo symbols stop in the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. It is displayed to inform the player that he or she has newly won a jackpot. Then, in the display area Dm14, the number of consecutive big wins (number of consecutive wins) is added and "big win x 2" is displayed in the same manner as when a new big win is won. Then, when the fifth round of the game is actually started, Dm15 displays "Round 1" indicating that the first round of the new jackpot game has been executed.
By configuring in this way, all the information related to the jackpot game displayed on the display screen can be displayed in correspondence with the pseudo-hold continuous effect, so that the player can receive the information in one jackpot game. Using the executed round game, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the pseudo-retaining continuous effect that makes it appear as if the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, information indicating that the pseudo-holding continuous effect is executed and information indicating the number of pseudo-rounds displayed in the pseudo-holding continuous effect are managed, and during the OP period or The execution timing of various performances executed during the ED period or the round period is configured to correspond to the contents of the second jackpot game that is pseudo-executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the pseudo-hold continuous effect that makes it appear to the player that a plurality of jackpot games are executed using the round game that is executed in one jackpot game.
In addition, in this second effect modification, when the 10-round jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game, the above-described pseudo-holding continuous effect can be executed, and the fourth round and the 10-round jackpot game A long interval period is set in advance during the fifth round. Therefore, the effect shown in FIG. 768(b) can be reliably executed. In addition, in the 10-round jackpot game in which the pseudo-holding continuous effect is not executed, the interval period set between the 4th round and the 5th round is used to execute the additional effect shown in FIG. 766. there is By constructing in this way, even when the pseudo-holding continuous performance is not executed, the interval period set between the fourth round and the fifth round can be effectively utilized, and the game period of the jackpot game can be effectively utilized. is unnecessarily slowed down, and the player's desire to play can be suppressed.
As described above, in this second production modification, as the jackpot game production executed during the jackpot game, an additional production, a holding continuous production, a pseudo-additional production, and a pseudo holding production can be executed. is executed, the effect is started in the same specific effect mode (see display area HR61 in FIG. 766(a)).
By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to have the pleasure of predicting what kind of privilege will be granted (which performance will be executed) when the specific performance mode is displayed during the jackpot game. can provide.

In addition, since it is configured to be able to execute a pseudo-additional effect and a pseudo-holding continuous effect, execution conditions such as an additional effect (MAX jackpot effect) and a pending continuous effect indicating that a jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds is being executed It is possible to make it easy for the player to experience the performance of the same contents as the performance in which is difficult to be established. As a result, the state in which benefits (maximum jackpot, holding series) advantageous to the player are not granted (state in which the effect indicating that the benefit is provided to the player is not executed) continues, and the player's willingness to play decreases. You can prevent it from happening.
In addition, in the present second modification, the above-mentioned various effects (additional effects, holding continuous effects, pseudo-additional effects, pseudo-holding continuous effects) are executed during the execution of the jackpot game. For example, the above-described various effects may be configured to be executable during the special symbol jackpot fluctuation period (the period until the jackpot round game is started).
In this case, regardless of which effect is executed, there is a privilege of informing the player that the big win game is being executed. It is preferable that the content of the additional privilege to be granted is different, for example, when the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect) is executed, the jackpot game to be executed later when the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect) is executed. is a round game other than the minimum number of rounds, and according to the result of the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect), an additional benefit that suggests a specific round game is given. When the pseudo-holding continuous effect) is executed, there is a high possibility that the jackpot game will be executed again after the jackpot game to be executed later (there is a jackpot reservation in the reservation, or A variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game) can be provided to the player as an additional benefit.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which effect will be executed. Also, in this case, the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect) and the holding continuous effect (pseudo holding continuous effect) may be configured to be executable during the fluctuation of one jackpot, and in this case, the execution timing of each effect They may be duplicated, or they may be executed separately.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of displaying information on the accumulated number of winning balls obtained during the advantageous game period in which the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player continues. , As the additional effect, instead of the effect of adding the total number of prize balls obtainable during the jackpot game, the effect of adding the total number of prize balls obtainable during the advantageous game period may be executed. good.
In this case, for example, in a situation where you have the right to execute multiple jackpot games, the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game The number of prize balls larger than the corresponding 1500 pieces) can be added by one additional performance. Therefore, when the additional performance is executed, the upper limit number of benefits (the number of prize balls) that can be given to the player as a result of the performance of the additional performance increases, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second production modification>
Next, referring to FIG. 769, of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification, the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example described above Contents different from those of the RAM 223 will be explained. FIG. 769 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in this second modification of effect.
As shown in FIG. 769, this second effect modification example differs from the above-described 23rd control example in that a pseudo-addition effect flag 223aaaa is added, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

The flag 223aaaa during pseudo-additional effect is a flag for indicating a state in which the pseudo-additional effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the pseudo-additional effect is being executed. Then, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the second big win game included in the pseudo add-on performance is executed. In the state where the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON, the processing for determining the variation performance of the special symbol variation is skipped, and the processing for continuously executing the pseudo-additional effect is executed.
<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second modified example of effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 770 and 771, control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second modified example of effect will be described. In this second effect modification, in the above-described 23rd control example, instead of the fluctuation effect setting process (F2959), the fluctuation effect setting process (F2959a in FIG. 770) is replaced with the jackpot related process (F2216). The difference is that related processing (F2216a) is executed, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 770, the contents of the variable effect setting process (F2959a) will be described. FIG. 770 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (F2959a). When the variable effect setting process (F2959a) is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON (F3001a). If the jackpot game effect continues until the jackpot game is started, the continuation of the pseudo-additional effect is determined (F3002a), and the process proceeds to F3019. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special symbol variation effect during the pseudo-additional effect.
Next, with reference to FIG. 771, the contents of the jackpot related process (F2216a) will be described. FIG. 771 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot related process (F2216a). This jackpot-related processing (F2216a) differs from the above-described jackpot-related processing (F2216) in that a process for executing a pseudo-additional effect or a pseudo-holding consecutive effect during the jackpot game is added. .

When the jackpot related process (F2216a) is executed, first, the process of F2701 is executed, and when it is determined that the jackpot start command is received (F2701: Yes), the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON. (F2701a), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (F2701a: Yes), set the pseudo-addition effect flag 223aaaa to OFF (F2702a), skip the processing of F2702 and F2703a, and F2704a to process. That is, in the state where the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set, since the big win game effect executed in the previous big win game continues, the display (opening display) when the new big win game is executed ) is skipped.
On the other hand, in the processing of F2701a, if it is determined that the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is not set to ON (F2701a: No), the command for starting the jackpot for display is set (F2702), and the payout corresponding to the minimum number of rounds A display command indicating the number is set (F2703a), and the process proceeds to F2704a.
In the process of F2704a, the winning information is read from the winning information storage area 223va (F2704a), and then it is determined whether or not the read winning information includes information indicating a jackpot winning (F2705a), and it is determined that there is information indicating a jackpot winning. If so (F2705a: Yes), the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time and the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the hold are added (F2706a), and it is determined whether the total number of rounds is 10 (10 rounds) ( F2707a).
If it is determined that the total number of rounds is 10 (10 rounds) (F2707a: Yes), then it is determined whether the pending jackpot is a variable jackpot (F2708a), and if it is determined to be a variable jackpot (F2708a: Yes), since the conditions for executing the pseudo-additional effect are established, the effect mode of the pseudo-MAX jackpot effect is determined as the pseudo-additional effect (F2709a), and the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON ( F2710a), sets a display command indicating the determined effect mode (F2711a), and terminates this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined No in the process of F2707a or the process of F2708a, the conditions for executing the pseudo-additional effect are not established, so the processes of F2709a to F2711a are skipped, and this process ends.
In the process of F2705a, when it is determined that there is no information indicating the winning of the jackpot (F2705a: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds of the current jackpot game is 10 rounds (F2712a), and it is determined that there are 10 rounds. If (F2712a: Yes), the execution lottery of the pseudo-holding consecutive effect is executed (F2713a), and if the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo-holding consecutive effect is obtained (F2713: Yes), the execution of the pseudo-holding consecutive effect Since the condition is established, the effect mode of the pseudo-hold continuous effect is determined (F2714a), and the process proceeds to F2711a.
On the other hand, if No is determined in the process of F2712a or the process of F2713a, the execution condition of the pseudo-hold continuous effect is not established, so the process proceeds to F2708.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the jackpot related process (F2216a), depending on the content of the jackpot game effect being executed, it is determined when the round number command is received or when the ending command is received. The production modes are different. Concretely, when the pseudo holding continuous performance is executed, the performance mode in each round period is determined corresponding to the performance contents of the pseudo holding continuous performance being executed.

As described above, in this second production modification, similar to the fifteenth control example described above, the jackpot game production includes the content of the jackpot game being executed and the special Based on the look-ahead result for the winning information used), an additional effect that informs the payout number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game being executed, and a hold that informs that the jackpot game will be executed continuously A continuous performance is configured to be executable.
Furthermore, in this second effect modification, when it is determined that there is a special symbol reservation for winning a jackpot as a result of pre-reading of the special symbol reservation acquired at the time the jackpot game is started, the next execution is performed. Including the content of the jackpot game to be played, it is configured to be able to execute an additional performance to the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, the jackpot game being executed is a 4R jackpot game in which the round game is executed four times, and a 6R jackpot game in which the round game is executed six times is executed in the pre-read special symbol reserve. When winning information as a lottery result of a special pattern lottery is included, a pseudo-additional performance for pseudo-notifying the number of payouts corresponding to a 10R jackpot game in which a round game is executed 10 times can be executed. there is
By configuring in this way, the number of times of execution of the jackpot game actually executed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot game notified to the player as the jackpot game effect. content can be different.
In addition, in this second production modification, the number of executions of the jackpot game actually executed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot reported to the player as the jackpot game production As a technique for differentiating the content of the game, it is configured to be able to execute a pseudo holding continuous effect (pseudo holding continuous effect) during the period in which one jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, in this second effect modification, a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed. The ratio is different, and the number of payouts (number of rounds) notified in the pseudo-additional effect and the contents of the latter jackpot game (number of rounds) executed in the pseudo-hold continuous effect are set after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be determined based on the game state to be played.
For example, if the variable probability state is always set after the end of the 10R jackpot game, the setting condition of the effect mode in which the number of payouts for 10 rounds is displayed as a pseudo-addition effect is the jackpot game. (after the end of the second jackpot game) is established when the variable probability state is set.
In other words, in the case of pseudo-executing a jackpot game effect that differs from the content of the jackpot game that is actually executed, the content of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed and the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that there is no contradiction in the relationship between By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot game effect with contents different from the contents of the jackpot game actually executed is pseudo-executed, the player can understand the contents of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed. can make it difficult to feel uncomfortable.
As described above, in this second effect modification, as a jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, an additional effect indicating the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being executed and the presence or absence of a pending series are indicated. The number of jackpot games actually executed and the number of jackpot game performances are executed by constructing the holding continuous performance so as to be executable, and further by configuring the pseudo-additional performance and the pseudo-holding continuous performance so as to be executable. The number of times the Ideas can be applied.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example described above is part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a jackpot winning (symbol jackpot winning) (missing) as in the fourth control example described above. , it is possible to win a small win, and a big win game (V big win game) can be executed by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small win game executed based on the winning of a small win. It consists of Then, when the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the symbol jackpot or the V jackpot game is executed, as the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, the acquired special pattern reservation (special pattern reservation ) is configured to be able to execute a holding continuous effect capable of notifying that the winning information indicating the winning of a jackpot is included in the ( As a result of pre-determining (pre-reading) the lottery result of the special figure 2 pending stored), the pre-determination result indicating that the small winning game in which the small winning game that can execute the V big winning game is executed is won. If there is a special figure 2 reservation (V reservation) or a special figure 2 reservation (jackpot reservation) that wins a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, that is, after the jackpot game being executed is completed, a new jackpot When the player has the execution right for executing the game, it is configured to be able to execute an effect (reservation continuous effect) for notifying that there is a V-reservation or a jackpot reservation.
Combining the technical idea of the second production modification described above with the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example configured in this way, when there is a V hold in the acquired special figure 2 hold, a pseudo-addition It may be configured to be able to execute an effect or a pseudo-holding continuous effect. In this case, it is not based on the contents of the small winning game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), but based on entering the game ball into the specific area during the small winning game being executed. Based on the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed, the content of the pseudo-additional performance or the pseudo-holding consecutive performance may be determined, or the content of the small win game and the V jackpot game It may be configured to determine the contents of the pseudo-additional effect and the pseudo-holding continuous effect, including the contents.
In this way, not only the jackpot game that is determined to be executed (jackpot game based on winning the symbol jackpot), but also the jackpot game that has the right to execute (V jackpot game) is simulated based on the contents. By determining the performance contents of the additional performance and the pseudo-holding continuous performance, the motivation to enter the game ball into the specific area during the small winning game can be enhanced based on the performance contents to be executed.
Furthermore, the technical idea of the second modified example of effect may be applied to the first modified example of the fifteenth control example described above. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example described above, as described above with reference to FIGS. When a plurality of V reservations are acquired and the total number of rounds obtained by totaling the contents (number of rounds) of a plurality of jackpot games executed corresponding to each of the plurality of V reservations satisfies a predetermined condition, A V-icon acquisition effect (holding consecutive effect) of a specific effect mode is configured to be executable.

The pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fifteenth control example configured in this way is combined with the technical idea of the second effect modification described above, and the contents of the jackpot game being executed and the acquired special figure 2 are reserved. , or the content of the jackpot game to be executed corresponding to the jackpot hold, or the content of the pseudo-additional performance or the pseudo-hold continuous performance may be determined. .
That is, in the second effect modification of the twenty-third control example described above, the game contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being executed and the game contents of the jackpot game executed corresponding to one jackpot reservation that has already been obtained (number of rounds) and, based on, the description has been made of a configuration that can determine the content of the pseudo-additional production and pseudo-holding continuous production, but not limited to this, the game content of the jackpot game being executed (number of rounds) And, based on the game contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game a plurality of times in the state of having the execution right, the effect contents of the pseudo-additional effect and the pseudo-hold continuous effect may be determined.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect mode of the pseudo-additional effect and the effect mode of the pseudo-holding continuous effect by combining the game contents (number of rounds) of three or more jackpot games. It becomes possible to execute more various effects for the pachinko machine 10 in the 2-effect modification.
In addition, as in the second effect modification of the twenty-third control example described above, the number of round games executed in one jackpot game (the number of rounds) is the maximum number (10 rounds) of the jackpot game (MAX When the jackpot game performance (additional performance) corresponding to the jackpot game) is executed as a pseudo-additional performance, it is possible to combine the game contents (number of rounds) of three or more jackpot games, so that the MAX jackpot game It is possible to make it easier to execute the corresponding additional effect in a pseudo fashion (as the pseudo additional effect, it is possible to make it easier to establish an execution condition for executing the MAX jackpot effect).

In addition, based on the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being executed and the game content (number of rounds) of multiple jackpot games in the state of having the right to execute, pseudo-addition production and pseudo-holding series When the effect content of the effect is configured to be determinable, the game period of the jackpot game being executed, the plurality of V reservations included in the acquired special figure 2 reservation, or the special symbol first among the jackpot reservations One jackpot game performance is executed across the game period of the jackpot game executed corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in which the lottery is executed, and included in the acquired special figure 2 reservation. A plurality of V suspensions or jackpot suspensions may be configured so as to be able to execute the suspension continuous effect for the jackpot game executed corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension in which the special symbol lottery is executed later. Alternatively, one jackpot game effect may be executed across a game period in which three or more executable jackpot games are executed.
In this case, as an effect period in which one jackpot game effect (for example, a pseudo-additional effect) is executed, a plurality of effects (number of rounds) corresponding to the effect contents (number of rounds) notified to the player in the executed jackpot game effect It suffices to include at least a part of each game period in which the jackpot game is executed, for example, the pseudo-additional effect is started in the final round of the jackpot game executed first, and executed later. It may be configured so as to be able to notify the performance result of the pseudo-additional performance during the opening period of the jackpot game.
By constructing in this way, even if the length of the performance period in which the pseudo-additional performance is executed is fixed to a specific period, the pseudo-additional performance can be easily executed across the periods in which a plurality of jackpot games are executed. can be done.
In addition, the period from the end of the previously executed jackpot game to the start of the next executed jackpot game, that is, the special symbol in which the next jackpot game can be executed after the jackpot game ends. Depending on the length of the period until the lottery is stopped and displayed (the total period of the special design fluctuation period in which the lottery result is out and the special design fluctuation period in which the lottery result is a hit (jackpot, small hit)), A game period of a plurality of jackpot games (a jackpot game to be executed first and a jackpot game to be executed later) and a performance period during which a pseudo-additional performance is executed may be configured to have different overlapping periods, The length of the performance period of the pseudo-additional performance may be adjustable according to the length of the period from the end of the first executed jackpot game to the start of the next executed jackpot game. .

<28th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 772 to 775. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the present twenty-eighth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example described above in that the remaining period of the variable probability state, that is, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is predetermined. It explains in detail the effect content of the variable effect executed when the number of times (20 times) is reached.
In the 23rd control example described above, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is set to 120 times as the period during which the variable probability state continues, and the remaining period of the period during which the variable probability state continues is 20 times of execution of the special symbol lottery. When reaching the time, it is configured to execute a series of variation performance (mode variation performance) across the variation period of the special symbol variation of a plurality of times.
Specifically, the value of the variable probability counter 223vr executes the first mode variation effect in the range of "20 to 15", executes the second mode variation effect in the range of "14 to 8", to 1” is configured to execute the third mode variation effect (see FIG. 672).
By configuring in this way, when an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.

In the twenty-eighth control example, the content of the mode variation effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example described above will be described in detail. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the twenty-third control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding the effect content in the 28th control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 772, the characteristic contents of the effect contents executed during the mode variation effect in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. In this 28th control example, as in the 23rd control example described above, the special symbol lottery can be executed 120 times during the variable probability state, and the "101" to "106" special symbols during the variable probability state. A lottery result, that is, a lottery result of a special pattern lottery executed in the range of ``20 to 15'' of a probability variable counter 223vr is notified to a player by using the performance result of the first mode variable performance, and the probability variable state is established. In the "107" to "113" times of the special symbol lottery, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the range of "14 to 8" during the variable probability counter 223vr, the second mode variation effect The player is notified using the effect result, and the special symbol lottery of "114" to "120" times during the probability change state, that is, the value of the probability change counter 223vr is a special executed in the range of "7 to 1". The lottery result of the symbol lottery is notified to the player by using the performance result of the third mode variation performance.
FIG. 772(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the special symbol lottery that can be executed during the variable probability state reaches the remaining 20 rotations. In this 28th control example, as in the 19th control example described above, in a part of the case where the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the "chance mode" which is the same effect mode as when the time saving state is set ”, and when the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times with the “chance mode” set, that is, if the time saving state is set, the time saving state A ``super chance mode'' capable of executing a mode variation performance for informing the player that the currently set game state is a variable probability state is set when the end condition is established. there is
Then, when the "chance mode" is set, a special symbol lottery that can be executed until the "chance mode" ends (until the time saving end condition is satisfied) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (For example, see FIG. 12(a)), and when the "chance mode" ends and the "super chance mode" is set, the "super chance mode" It is configured to display the remaining period (remaining time) until the "super chance mode" ends, not the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed until the end.

By configuring in this way, even if the player is notified that the variable probability state is set in a state where the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is greatly reduced, the variable probability state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to clearly grasp the remaining number of executable special symbol lotteries until the end of the game. In addition, by making the player grasp the remaining time until the "super chance mode", which is a production mode for indicating that the probability change state is set, ends, the remaining period until the probability change state ends Since the game can be easily grasped by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied due to sudden termination of the variable probability state.
Specifically, when the remaining number of special symbol lotteries executed during the variable probability state becomes 20, that is, when the "chance mode" ends and the "super chance mode" is set, FIG. As shown in (a), the normal background display screen is displayed as the first mode variable effect, and the effect in which the rabbit-like character 801 runs around is executed. Then, as a guide display for showing the effect content of the first mode variable effect, the sub-display area Ds displays characters "find the treasure within the time limit". In addition, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, characters of "first stage" are displayed as a mode variation effect type display mode indicating that the first mode variation effect is being executed.
Here, in this 28th control example, according to the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery executed during the "super chance mode", three types of mode variation effects can be executed continuously. In the first mode variation production to be executed, as shown in FIG. 772 (a), the “normal background (first stage)” is displayed, and in the second mode 2nd stage)” is displayed, and in the third mode variation effect executed last, “heaven background (third stage)” (see FIG. 772(b)) is displayed.
In other words, when all the lottery results of the special symbol lottery executed during the "super chance mode" are lost, the character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed with the backgrounds of "normal", "outer space", and "heaven". At each stage displayed, a treasure hunting effect is executed, and the effect result that the treasure cannot be finally found (the effect result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out) is displayed. mode" is configured to end.

When the "super chance mode" is set, the remaining period until the "super chance mode" ends is displayed in the display area Dm7 by subtracting it based on the passage of time. In this 28th control example, it is configured so that "60 seconds" is set as the effect period during which the all-mode variable effect is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. Since it is shown immediately after the setting, the display area Dm7 displays "60 seconds left" as a display mode indicating that the remaining period of the "super chance mode" is "60 seconds".
With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining period of the "super chance mode" in an easy-to-understand manner only by visually recognizing the display mode of the subtraction display in the display area Dm7. In addition, even if the player is notified that the variable probability state is set in a state where the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is greatly reduced, it will be executed before the variable probability state ends. To make it difficult for a player to clearly grasp the remaining number of possible special symbol lotteries.
Furthermore, a display area Dm32 is formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and the number and types of mode variation effects that can be executed during the "super chance mode" are displayed as a guide mode for notifying the player of "normal → The display mode of "outer space→heaven" is displayed. A mark (indicated by a circle in the figure) for informing the player of the type of mode variation effect currently being executed is attached to the display mode indicating the type of mode variation effect being executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the type of mode variation effect executed during the "super chance mode" and the state of transition in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the twenty-eighth control example, when the type of mode variation effect is switched, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery can be collectively notified, so that the effect period of each mode variation effect is "20 seconds". It consists of Specifically, the special symbol lottery for the "101" to "106" times during the variable probability state, that is, the value of the counter 223vr during the variable probability is in the range of "20 to 15". If all are out, the effect result of the mode variation effect executed for 20 seconds is that the treasure cannot be found in the first stage and the effect shifts to the second stage. On the other hand, "101" to "106" special symbol lottery during the probability variation state, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 223vr is executed in the range of "20 to 15". When the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, the effect result of finding a treasure in the first stage is displayed as the effect result of the mode variation effect executed for 20 seconds.
Although detailed description will be given later, in this 28th control example, the variation pattern (fluctuation time) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the "super chance mode" is set to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined differently depending on the probability, and even if the jackpot is won in any of the ``101'' to ``106'' special symbol lotteries in the variable state, the ``101'' special symbol variation. is started (after the first mode variation effect is executed) and the period until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is "20 seconds". Also, even if the results of the "101" to "106" special symbol lottery during the probability variation state are all out, after the "101" special symbol variation starts (the first mode variation effect is executed ), and the period until the "106th" special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is "20 seconds".
Therefore, it is possible to execute the first mode variation effect without making the player feel uncomfortable, targeting the "101" to "106" times of the special symbol lottery during the variable probability state. In addition, even if the results of the special symbol lottery for the "101" to "106" times during the variable state are all out, the effect result that is disadvantageous to the player as the effect result of the first mode variation effect (special symbol lottery ) is displayed only once. Since it is possible to reduce the number of displayed performance results that are disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose his desire to play.
In addition, even if the jackpot is won in any of the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the variable probability state, the effect result (special symbol Since the performance result indicating that the jackpot has been won in the lottery is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery has won the jackpot.

In this 28th control example, as described above, "20 seconds" is set as the effect period of each mode variation effect, and using the effect result of each mode variation effect, the lottery result of the target special symbol lottery is displayed to the player. is configured to notify In other words, the results of 20 special symbol lotteries executed from the setting of the "super chance mode" to the end of the "super chance mode" are divided into three stages and notified to the player. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 772(a), the display screen is configured to display the remaining period until the "super chance mode" ends, not the remaining period until each mode variation effect ends. is doing.
In other words, by configuring to display only the remaining time until the end of the "super chance mode" instead of the remaining time until the end of each mode change effect, to determine the effect result of each mode change effect Even if the timing for stop-displaying the lottery result of the special pattern lottery referred to is slightly different, it is only necessary to execute processing for correcting the end timing of each mode variation performance, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is possible to make it easier to provide a variable performance.
In addition, without being limited to this, instead of the remaining time until the "super chance mode" ends, the player may be notified of the remaining time until each mode variation effect ends. As in the 28th control example, the remaining time until the end of the "super chance mode" is notified by counting down the numerical value so that the player can clearly grasp it, and the remaining time until the end of each mode variation effect. may be configured to allow the player to vaguely grasp the state of the effect mode (for example, the movement state of the character 801). In this way, as a notification mode for notifying the remaining time, the first notification mode (countdown notification, timer notification, etc.) in which the player can clearly grasp the remaining time, and the first notification mode in which the player can vaguely grasp the remaining time. By using this in combination with the second notification mode (variable state of performance mode, etc.), it is possible for the player to easily comprehend various performances to be executed during the "super chance mode".
Next, with reference to FIG. 772(b), the contents of the effect indicating the winning of the jackpot in the "super chance mode" will be described. FIG. 772(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in which the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is two.

As shown in FIG. 772(b), when the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is two, the third mode variation effect is executed as the mode variation effect, and the main display area Dm As the background image, a "heaven background" corresponding to the third mode variation effect is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect image is displayed in which the character 801 opens the treasure box 810 and discovers the treasure 810a.
In the example shown in FIG. 772(b), since the effect result that is advantageous to the player is displayed as the effect result of the third mode variable effect, the remaining period of the "super chance mode" is displayed in the display area Dm7. ``Remaining ? seconds'' is displayed as a display mode indicating that it has reached 0 seconds, and ``Heaven ' is attached to the characters, and the player is notified that this is the last mode variation effect to be executed during the 'super chance mode'. Further, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, "third stage" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the mode variation effect being executed is the third (third stage) mode variation effect. Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "congratulations on the big win" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding that the effect result of this time is the effect result that is advantageous to the player.
In the twenty-eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 772(b), when the "60 seconds" set when the "super chance mode" has elapsed, the "super chance mode" is immediately activated. Instead of ending immediately, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm7 is variably displayed as "3 seconds remaining", "1 second remaining", and "? seconds remaining". Then, based on the display of the effect result of the mode variation effect being executed (the third mode variation effect), the display mode of the display area Dm7 is variably displayed from "seconds remaining" to "end". , is configured to end the "super chance mode".
With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the state in which "? seconds remaining" is displayed is a state in which the "super chance mode" can end at any time. At the same time, even if there is a slight error between the contents of the remaining time display displayed in the display area Dm7 and the timing at which the effect result of the third mode variable effect is displayed, the message “Remaining??” continues. Since only the length of time displayed is different, the effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth control example, the predetermined effect period of the "super chance mode" is set to 60 seconds, the display area Dm7 executes the subtraction display of 60 seconds, and the display area Dm7 displays the subtraction. Seconds remaining” is displayed at the timing when the display mode indicates “0 seconds”. seconds) is displayed in the display area Dm7 in a subtractive manner, and at the timing when the display mode displayed in the display area Dm7 in a subtractive manner indicates "0 seconds", "remainder? ? seconds” may be displayed.
By configuring in this way, the end timing of the final mode variation effect (third mode variation effect) executed during the "super chance mode" is earlier than the predetermined effect period (for example, 61 seconds). (for example, 60.8 seconds), it is possible to end the "super chance mode" while "remaining ? seconds" is displayed, so the display area Dm7 displays a subtraction. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the "super chance mode" ends with the number of seconds remaining.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 28th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 773 and 774, the electrical configuration in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. In this 28th control example, for the 23rd control example described above, the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 544) possessed by the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is referred to during the probability variation variation pattern The difference is that a table 202aba is added, and that an effect mode storage area 223aba is added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. Other than that, they are the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 773, the probability variation variation pattern table 202aba will be described. FIG. 773 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probability variation variation pattern table 202aba. As shown in FIG. 773, the probability variation variation pattern table 202aba is configured so that different variation patterns are determined based on the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, for the range of "1 to 100" for the number of special symbol variations (number of variations) after the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery result and the acquired variation type counter CS1 Various variation patterns are defined in which variation times of 2 seconds to 60 seconds are defined in association with values.
Then, for the number of fluctuations "101", if the lottery result is "loss", regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, if a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot" , regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "20 seconds" is defined as a variation pattern, and for the number of variations "102", if the lottery result is "loss" , regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, if a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is a hit of "18 seconds" For the number of fluctuations "103", if the lottery result is "loss", regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot ”, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the hit of “16 seconds” is defined as the variation pattern, and the lottery result is “loss” for the number of variations “104”. In some cases, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, if a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "14 seconds" Hit is defined as a variation pattern, and for the number of variations "105", if the lottery result is "loss", a short loss of "2 seconds" regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 However, in the case of a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the winning of "12 seconds" is defined as the variation pattern, and for the number of variations "106", the lottery result is If it is a "loss", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, if the loss of "10 seconds" is a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "10 Seconds hit is defined as a variation pattern.
In other words, in the range of the number of fluctuations "101" to "106", if all the special symbol lotteries are out, or if any special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, continue On the premise that the special symbol variation is executed, each variation pattern is defined so that the lottery result is announced 20 seconds after the 101st special symbol variation is started.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily display the effect result of the first mode variable effect performed for the range of the number of times of change from "101" to "106" at a specific timing.

In addition, in the twenty-eighth control example, as described above, even if all the special symbol lotteries are lost, or if any of the special symbol lotteries wins a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation continues. On the premise that is executed, the lottery result is notified 20 seconds after the 101st special symbol variation is started, but not limited to this, some jackpot winnings As the variation pattern to be selected from time to time, it may be possible to select variation patterns with different lengths of variation time. By configuring in this way, normally, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed at the timing when 20 seconds have passed, and the effect result of the first mode variation effect is displayed, whereas, for example, the first mode To provide a player with a sense of incongruity that special symbol variation is stopped before the performance result of the variable performance is displayed or that the special symbol variation is continued while the performance result of the first mode variable performance is displayed. can do.
Next, for the number of fluctuations "107, 108", if the lottery result is "loss", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0.2" for the range "0 to 99" If the ultra-short deviation of “seconds” is “jackpot” when the deviation of “2 seconds” is in the range of “100 to 198”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 169”. A super-short hit of "0.2 seconds" for the range and a hit of "20 seconds" for the range of "170 to 198" are defined as variation patterns.
Here, when a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.2 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern with the number of variations "107, 108", the period until the special symbol variation is stopped, the first mode It is configured to continuously display the variable production.
By configuring in this manner, the number of special symbol lotteries referred to as the effect result of the first mode variable effect can be varied according to the type of the selected variation pattern.

In addition, in the range of the number of fluctuations "109" to "111", that is, in the range targeted for the second mode fluctuation production, all the special symbols are the same as each fluctuation targeted for the first mode fluctuation production described above. Even if the lottery is lost or if a big hit is won in any special symbol lottery, the 107th special symbol variation is performed on the premise that the special symbol variation is continuously executed. Each variation pattern is defined so that the result of the lottery will be announced 20 seconds after the start.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 773, even in the range of the number of times of variation “112” to “120”, even in the range subject to the third mode variation performance, the above-described first mode variation performance is targeted. As with each variation, if all the special symbol lotteries are lost, or if any special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the special symbol variation is continuously executed. As a premise, each variation pattern is defined so that the lottery result is announced 20 seconds after the 120th special symbol variation is started.
Next, with reference to FIG. 774, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 774 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 774, this twenty-eighth control example differs from the above-described twenty-third control example in that an effect mode storage area 223aba is added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.
The effect mode storage area 223aba is a storage means for storing the type of mode change effect being executed, and when the mode change effect is determined in the variable probability state effect mode determination process (see F3092 in FIG. 775), , information corresponding to the type of determined mode variation effect is stored. Then, each time the special symbol variation is executed, the type of the stored mode variation effect is referred to, and the corresponding effect mode is determined.

Furthermore, the production mode storage area 223aba is configured to be able to store an extension state for temporarily extending the mode variation production, and when the extension state is stored, a new mode variation production type is determined. configured to prevent By configuring in this way, by selecting the ultra-short variation (variation of 0.2 seconds), it is possible to smoothly execute the effect control without switching the type of the mode variation effect.
Next, with reference to FIG. 775, the contents of the control processing in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. The twenty-eighth control example is different from the twenty-third control example described above in that the processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect executed during the variable probability state is different. Specifically, instead of the probability changing state effect mode determination process (see F3052 in FIG. 672), the difference is that the probability change state effect mode determination process (see F3092 in FIG. 775) is executed. Since the other processing contents are the same, the description thereof is omitted.
FIG. 775 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable probability state effect mode determination process (see F3092). As shown in FIG. 775, in the probability variation state effect mode determination process (see F3092), the above-described probability variation state effect mode determination process (see F3052 in FIG. 672) continues (extends) the mode variation effect being executed. The difference is that a control process for Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
When the probability changing state effect mode determination process (see F3052 in FIG. 672) is executed, first, the same F4301 to F4310 processes as the above-described probability changing state effect mode determination process (see F3052 in FIG. 672) are executed. After executing the processes of F4304, F4306, and F4308, the determined type of mode change effect is stored in the mode effect storage area 223aba (F4351), and the process proceeds to F4356.

On the other hand, after completing the process of F4309 or the process of F4310, the type stored in the mode effect storage area 223aba is read (F4352) and used in the next mode (mode change effect to be set next). It is determined based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223va whether the special figure reservation is stored. Then, if it is determined that there is a special figure hold in the next mode (F4353: Yes), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation to be executed in the special figure hold of the target is pre-determined (look ahead), ultra-short fluctuation (0 .2 second fluctuation) (F4354), and if it is determined to be an ultra-short fluctuation (F4354: Yes), determine the continuation of the current mode production until the special figure fluctuation period related to the next mode special figure hold Then, the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined (F4355), and the process proceeds to F4356.
On the other hand, in the processing of F4353, if it is determined that there is no special figure suspension in the next mode (F4353: No), or in the processing of F4354, if it is determined that the next mode special figure suspension is not an ultra-short variation (F4354 : No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined (F4356), and this process is terminated.
That is, for example, when determining the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation of the number of times of variation "106", which is the final variation of the first mode variation performance, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is lost and won. , The number of times of variation "107", "108" It is determined whether it has a special symbol reservation used for the special symbol variation (F4353). It is determined in advance whether the "108" special symbol variation is a super-short variation (F4354). When it is pre-determined that it is an ultra-short variation, the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is an ultra-short variation is pre-determined, and when the pre-determination result is a jackpot winning, the first mode variation performance is performed. As a result, a performance result indicating winning of a jackpot is determined, and when the preliminary determination result is a loss, a performance result indicating failure is determined as a performance result of the first mode variation performance, and a performance corresponding to the determined performance result. A mode is determined (F4356). In addition, the determined effect mode is a process of continuously displaying until the corresponding special symbol variation (special symbol variation that is an ultra-short variation among the special symbol variations of the number of times of variation "107" and "108") is stopped and displayed. is executed.
In addition, the range in which the process of F4356 is executed is only the range in which the ultra-short variation is set as the special symbol variation of the number of variations "107" and "108". Variation, if the "108" time is an ultra-short variation, the range is until the "108" special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the number of variations "107" is an ultra-short variation, and the "108" time is normal In the case of fluctuation, the range is until the "107" special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and if the fluctuation number "107" is a normal fluctuation, and if the fluctuation number "108" is an ultra-short fluctuation. Even so, the process of F4356 is not executed.

Therefore, when the number of fluctuations "107" is normal fluctuation and "108" is ultra-short fluctuation, the second mode fluctuation effect is executed within the range including the fluctuation time of ultra-short fluctuation, and normal There will be a difference between the variation (2 seconds) and the ultra-short variation (0.2 seconds). However, in the twenty-eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 772(a), an effect suggesting the end timing of each mode variation effect is not executed. Each mode variation performance can be executed smoothly without any trouble.
In this case, as the second mode variation effect, the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed when all target special symbol lotteries are lost and when a jackpot is won in any special symbol lottery. However, by configuring the length of the period during which the effect result of the second mode variable effect is stopped and displayed (the effect result finalizing period) to be longer than the above-described difference (1.8 seconds), the player can It is possible to execute a production that does not give a sense of incongruity.
As described above, in the twenty-eighth control example, when the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player satisfies the predetermined condition (remaining 20 times), multiple special symbol lotteries It is constructed so that one variable effect (mode variable effect) is executed across the period in which is executed. By configuring in this way, when an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play while expecting that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.
Further, in the twenty-eighth control example, the range of the special symbol lottery referred to for determining the effect result of one mode variation effect can be varied. Specifically, as the range of the special symbol lottery referred to for determining the effect result of the first mode variable effect, the range of "the value of the probability variable counter 223vr is "20 to 15"" is defined in advance, The variation time is short as the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery executed a plurality of times after the first mode variation performance is finished, that is, the value of the probability variable counter 223vr corresponds to the range of "14, 13". When the variation pattern (ultra-short variation) is selected, the first mode variation performance is executed using the period until the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol lottery in which the ultra-short variation is selected is completed. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the performance result of one mode variation performance, so that one mode variation performance is provided to the player. It is possible to differentiate the possibility of determining the effect result (the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot) that is advantageous to the player as the effect result of .
In the twenty-eighth control example, as described above, when the predetermined condition is established, the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the effect result of one mode variation effect is set to the predetermined number of times. Although the configuration has been described that can be increased more than 1, it is sufficient if the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the effect result of one mode variation effect can be varied. A configuration may be used in which the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the performance result can be reduced below a predetermined number of times.
In this case, for example, as the range of the special symbol lottery referred to for determining the effect result of the first mode variable effect, the range of "the value of the probability variable counter 223vr is '20 to 15'" is defined in advance, When a long variation pattern in which a longer variation time than usual is set is determined as a variation pattern of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the range of "16, 15" for the value of the probability variation counter 223vr, the special of the long variation pattern It may be configured to perform control for forcibly ending the first mode variation performance so that the range in which the first mode variation performance is performed is up to the special symbol lottery immediately before the symbol variation is performed.
In addition, as described above, when the control to forcibly terminate the first mode variable effect is executed, the effect period of the first mode variable effect becomes shorter than when the normal first mode variable effect is executed. Therefore, for example, as a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the range of "16, 15" for the value of the variable probability counter 223vr, the case where the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery wins the jackpot wins. It is preferable to configure such that the long fluctuation pattern is determined more easily than when there is no such device. With this configuration, the first mode variation performance is forcibly terminated, and when the performance period is shorter than usual, the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot is executed after the first mode variation performance is completed. Therefore, the first mode variation executed to feel discomfort when the first mode variation effect ends (uncomfortable due to the end of the first mode variation effect earlier than usual) You can pay attention to the performance.

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example is configured to determine the type of mode variation effect to be executed and the effect period of the mode change effect to be executed based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed. However, another configuration may be used without being limited to this. For example, when the remaining period of the probability variation state (the number of remaining special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the probability variation state) satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 20 times), the mode variation effect is started, and the mode variation effect is executed. When a specific time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the game is played, the performance result of the mode variation performance is notified in a display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed at that time. can be
In this case, according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation executed during the performance period during which the mode variation performance is performed, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the specific time is different, so the mode variation performance It is possible to easily vary the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the effect result of .
Also, as described above, when the effect period of the mode variation effect is set not by the number of executions of the special symbol lottery but by the elapsed time, the special symbol lottery is not executed during the mode variation effect by the player stopping the game. An incident is likely to occur. In this case, for example, a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the last special symbol variation was stop-displayed with the lottery result indicating the failure, and the display condition for displaying the standby screen of the pachinko machine 10 has been established. Based on this, the effect result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out is determined as the effect result of the mode change effect being executed, and the mode change effect is terminated.
<29th control example>
The twenty-ninth control example will be described below with reference to FIGS. 776 to 853. FIG. FIG. 776 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, FIG. 777 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 779 to 782 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided in the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. FIG. 784 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 776, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 776). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.
A game board 13 (see FIG. 777) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (game balls) to flow down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 802) that shoots game balls to the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the player to the area (game area).
On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 776). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.
The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls which protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in front view (see FIG. 776), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. A frame button 22 that can be operated by the player and a selection button 600 (not shown) are provided on the upper surface of the upper tray 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player in order to vary the effect mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 777) and the like. A button 22a is provided. The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example is configured to be able to execute an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the operation of the effect button 22a by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game.
The selection button 600 is operated by the player to determine the game environment of the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 600d and a left button 600e are provided. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, as the game environment of the pachinko machine 10, the volume level of the sound output from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 802) and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 777) A backlight (not shown) that illuminates the displayed display screen and the light amount level of the decorative LED attached to the pachinko machine 10 are configured so that the player can adjust them. Further, the player can select one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes having different effect patterns of various display effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 . By constructing in this way, even if various players with different tastes play the pachinko machine 10, each player can select (determine) a game environment suitable for his taste. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example includes, as operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 operated at the time of operation presentation and the selection button 600 operated at the time of selecting the game environment. have. In other words, although a plurality of operation means are provided for different uses, they are not limited to this, and the frame button 22 can be operated when selecting a game environment, or the selection button 600 can be operated as an operation presentation. It may be configured to
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, as the operating means (the frame button 22) operated during the operation performance, a configuration having one effect button 22a is used. It may be configured to have two or more operating means.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, a button configuration that can determine that the operating means has been operated by detecting that the player has pressed it is used. However, any configuration other than the button configuration may be used as long as it can detect the operation by the player. An operation means having a detection means capable of detecting that the user is performing a pulling action (for example, a pulling action) may be used. In addition, instead of the player directly touching the operation means, a non-contact device that can detect the presence of a part of the player's body (such as a hand) in a predetermined space area (detection range of the sensor) A type of operation detection means (sensor, etc.) may be used. In this case, instead of simply detecting a part of the player's body (for example, a hand, etc.), the player's body is detected within a predetermined space area. is preferably moved according to a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, for example, when the player leaves the seat to temporarily suspend the game of the pachinko machine 10, a part of the player's body (for example, the head) is erroneously operated. Even if it enters into the detection range of the means, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation presentation triggered by it.
The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 776), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.
In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 777) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.
A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.
Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.
A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the game balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .
As shown in FIG. 777, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. Ball mouth 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (V winning device) 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable display device It is configured by assembling the unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 776). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable prize winning device 65, the second variable prize winning device (V winning device) 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 776). Mainly referring to FIG. 777, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.
In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 776). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). This is the area where the game ball flows down).
The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 802) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 777) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 777) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
On the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 777), a display corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as the first symbol display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. A device 37a and a display device 37b corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 802), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the twenty-ninth control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be used properly according to whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is Specifically, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the display device 37a operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, A display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 lights and displays an LED (status LED) capable of notifying the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 by the lighting state, and the stop symbol is a pattern corresponding to the short-time jackpot or the normal jackpot. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.
In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when the result of the determination is a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, 6R short-time jackpots (jackpot A), 6R normal jackpots (jackpot B), and 9R short-time jackpots (jackpot C) are prepared. The first pattern display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also shows a pattern corresponding to the type of the big win in the case of a big win.
Here, "6R short time jackpot" is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds. It is a jackpot type (jackpot A) that shifts to a time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), and “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds. It is a jackpot type (jackpot B) that shifts to a normal state after . In addition, "9R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot type (jackpot C) that shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 9 rounds.
Here, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example will be briefly described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, the first symbol in which the lottery is executed when the execution condition is established based on the fact that the game ball launched into the game area enters the first ball entrance 64. (first special symbol), and a first symbol (second special symbol) in which a lottery is executed when an execution condition is established based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. there is Then, as a result of lottery for each first symbol (special symbol), it is configured to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

When a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the opening/closing door 65b (see FIG. 777) of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, making it easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 777). It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed. When a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 11 prize balls are paid out for one winning game ball. Therefore, in order to obtain many prize balls in the game on the pachinko machine 10, the player can play the game with enthusiasm with the aim of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols.
Furthermore, when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the opening/closing door 650f (see FIG. 777) of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is opened, and the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 777). And it is configured to execute a small winning game that makes it easier to win a game ball. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a, 11 prize balls are paid out for one winning game ball.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 650a passes through the specific area (V area) 650e4 provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 , the jackpot game can be executed by opening the opening/closing door 65b of the first variable winning device 65 after the small prize game is finished.
That is, in the twenty-ninth control example, the execution trigger for executing the jackpot game is the first jackpot trigger that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the game ball is in the specific area (V area) during the small hit game. ) and a second jackpot opportunity that is established when passing through 650e4. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the jackpot game at various opportunities, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example is configured to be able to execute a big winning game and a small winning game as winning games that can award prize balls to the player. The contents of each winning game are determined in advance so that more prize balls can be given to the player (more game balls can be won) during the jackpot game than during the game. . That is, the big winning game is a winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the small winning game in terms of the number of winning balls that the player can acquire.
Further, when the jackpot game is executed, the game state corresponding to the jackpot type can be set after the jackpot game ends, whereas the small win game starts after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the game state that was set at the time of being set is set again. That is, for example, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, based on the jackpot type of the jackpot game, the jackpot game A game state (time saving state) different from the normal state can be set after the end, and when the small winning game is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the small winning game is completed. It consists of
Therefore, for a player who is playing a game expecting that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the currently set game state is set, a new game state can be set. becomes a winning game more advantageous than the small winning game.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, in addition to the above-described special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), a lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) can be executed. When the execution condition is satisfied based on the passage (entering) of the game ball to the through gate 67, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Then, as a result of the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), it is configured to determine whether it is hit or lost. When winning the lottery of the normal pattern, by activating the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 777), the normal pattern winning game that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is executed. be.

That is, by executing the game per normal pattern, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 than when the game per normal pattern is not executed. Therefore, for the player, by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery is executed to aim for a big win game, and the game ball is entered into the through gate 67 ( pass), execute the normal symbol lottery, and enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the second special symbol lottery and aim for a big hit game. , the player can be provided with a variety of games, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example is configured to be able to set a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as the normal symbol probability state. When the low probability state of the pattern is set, the game ball is put into the second ball entrance 640 based on the result of one normal pattern lottery than when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. It is configured so that the expectation that it will be possible to enter the ball is low.
Specifically, the "normal pattern high probability state" means that the winning probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) lottery is increased, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. Changed and set to a longer time than normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the number of game balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is higher than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to enter the ball. Therefore, during the high-probability state of normal symbols, game balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is performed can be increased.
In addition, instead of lengthening the opening time of the electric accessary 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to lengthening the opening time, as a normal pattern winning game during the high probability state of the normal symbol Then, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one normal pattern per game may be changed to be increased more than the normal pattern per game executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern. In addition, during the high probability state of normal symbols, the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbol) is not changed, and the time and one normal symbol that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in a winning game may be changed. In addition, during the normal pattern high probability state, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one game per normal pattern cannot be changed. Instead, only the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the low probability state of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this 29th control example, as described above, the probability state of normal symbols is configured to be changeable between "low probability state" and "high probability state", and the probability state of special symbols is configured not to be changed. However, without being limited to this, the probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be changeable to "low probability state" and "high probability state" in the same manner as the probability state of the normal symbol described above. In this case, when the high probability state of the special design is set, than when the low probability state of the special design is set, so as to increase the probability that the lottery result of the special design will be a big hit (jackpot probability). Good to configure. In addition to the big win probability, it may be constructed so as to increase the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a small win (small win probability), or it may be constituted so as to increase both the big win probability and the small win probability. Good, when the high probability state of the special design is set, than when the low probability state of the special design is set, so that the probability that the lottery result of the special design is out (loss probability) is low can be configured to
The game area is provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first pattern display device 37, the decorative second A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of three symbols, and a game ball passing through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two symbols (normal symbols) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large-sized liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 802) so that, for example, left, middle, and right three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the twenty-ninth control example, the first symbol display device 37 displays the special symbols under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 802). A decorative display according to the display of the pattern display device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.
The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this control example), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed at a predetermined value. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.
The time required for the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) is shorter in the time-saving state (high probability state in normal patterns) than in the normal state (low probability state in normal patterns). set. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) is performed in a short time during the time saving state, so that the number of execution times of the normal pattern lottery per unit period can be increased more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning the result of the normal symbol lottery increase, the player is given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second ball entrance 640 (opportunity to execute the normal symbol winning game). be able to. Therefore, during the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols), the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .
The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the right region of the variable display unit 80, and the game balls launched to the game board 13 flow down the right side of the game board 13. A part of the sphere is configured to be passable. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a lottery for the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed. After the normal symbol lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed. If it is out of line, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.
The number of times the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to 4 times in total, and the number of suspended balls (normal symbol suspension number) is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37. A second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

Note that the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device, as in the twenty-ninth control example, as well as the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). May be set. In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80. For example, the left side (left side area) of the variable display device unit 80 good. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reserved lamp.
Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, a special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 802), and the display device 37a of the first symbol display device 37 shows a display corresponding to the lottery result.
On the other hand, below the right side area of the game board 13, a second ball entrance 640 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the second ball inlet 640, a second ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, a special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 802), and the display device 37b of the first symbol display device 37 shows a display according to the lottery result.
Also, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four game balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one ball becomes a prize ball. It is configured to be paid out. In other words, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 have both the role of a start winning opening for executing the special symbol lottery and the role of a winning opening for paying out prize balls. In the twenty-ninth control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the same number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is 1, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is paid out. It may be configured to be the same as the number of prize balls.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (embedded state), making it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. . On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (protruding state), and the game ball is easily entered into the second ball inlet 640. As shown in FIG.
As described above, during the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol (normal symbol) (Normal figure fluctuation time) Since the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable display, the "o" symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (protruding state) increases. Furthermore, during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the time-saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during the normal state.
More specifically, in the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, the player executes a right-handed game in which the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game board 13, and the through gate 67 is entered. Even if the normal game is executed by passing the game ball, the game ball can hardly enter the second ball entrance 640, and the game ball is directed to the left area of the game board 13. It is constructed so that more special symbol lotteries can be executed by executing a left-handed game of shooting and entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加.
On the other hand, in the time-saving state in which the normal symbol high probability state is set, the player executes a right-handed game in which the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game board 13, and the game ball is sent to the through gate 67. When a game per normal pattern is executed by passing, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the game ball can be launched toward the left area of the game board 13. More special symbol lotteries can be executed than when a hitting game is executed and a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous than the right-handed game from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery, When the time-saving state is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery. As described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, the game method advantageous to the player is changed according to the set game state. can be played while changing , and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.
Here, a first special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and a second special lottery executed when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 The pattern lottery is configured to have the same probability (approximately 1/300) that the lottery result will result in a big win. However, as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won, the probability that the number of round games executed during the jackpot game will be the maximum 9 rounds (R) is the second special symbol lottery. It is set higher than the pattern lottery. In addition, the probability of setting a time-saving state advantageous to the player as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set higher in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, unlike the second ball entrance 640, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory 640a, and is in a state in which game balls can be entered at all times.
Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often closed, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A game ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 toward the first ball entrance 64 without a ball (so-called "left hitting"), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities for the first special symbol lottery and aim for a big hit.
On the other hand, during the time saving state, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 640 Since it is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the game ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hit"), and the normal symbol is started. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by passing through the opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and entering the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example, the jackpot winning in the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery. A game (jackpot game with a large number of rounds) is configured to be easily executed, and a time-saving state advantageous to the player is easily set after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed.
In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example instructs the player how to shoot the ball according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the time-saving state or in the normal state). can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.
Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 777 and 778. FIG. In the twenty-ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 777, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.
As shown in FIG. 777, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal symbol start that triggers the lottery as to whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a A mouth (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right hitting area, and when the time saving state is set as the game state, the right hitting game is performed.

A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball is entered during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is performed. A game can be played in which game balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery, and different game properties can be appropriately provided according to the game method.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 777, in the right-handed area, from the upstream side, the through gate 67, the second variable winning device 650, the electric accessory 640a, and the first variable winning device 65 Each mechanism is arranged in order, and a plurality of nails planted on the upstream side of the through gate 67 in the right area irregularly vary the flow speed and direction of the game balls flowing down the right area. , about 2/3 of the game balls flowing down the right side area pass through the through gate 67 . The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second variable winning device 650 while being guided upstream of the second variable winning device 650 by a plurality of nails planted below the through gate 67. It is configured to
On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the second variable winning device 650 without passing through the through gate 67 (flowing down the channel formed on the left side of the through gate 67) is more likely than the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 Also reaches the downstream side of the second variable winning device 650, or to the electric role product 640a disposed downstream of the second variable winning device 650 without reaching the second variable winning device 650 and is configured to reach
As shown in FIG. 777, the second variable prize winning device 650 is arranged on the game board 13 so that its upper surface forms a ball flow path that slopes downward toward the lower left direction (the lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 777). The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the second variable prize winning device 650 (the upper surface of the open/close door 650f1 in the closed state) is configured to flow down toward the electric accessory 640a. Although the details will be described later, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed by a small winning game executed when a small winning prize is won in a special symbol lottery, and a state in which a small winning game is not executed. , the opening of the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is covered by the open/close door 650f1 in a closed state, and most of the game balls that reach the second variable winning device 650 enter the V winning port 650a. It is discharged toward the downstream side without

On the other hand, while the small winning game is being executed, the opening and closing operation in which the opening and closing door 650f1 is repeatedly switched between the open state and the closed state is executed, so that the game ball reaching the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 ( A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is easily entered into the V winning opening 650a. That is, in the right area, there are a first flow path (a flow path through which game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game, and a second variable A second flow path (a flow path through which game balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 flow down) is formed to make it difficult for the winning device 650 to win a prize. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed, while expecting that the ratio of the number of winnings to the second variable winning device 650 with respect to the number of fired game balls increases, pay attention to the behavior of the game balls flowing down the right side area. can be made
As described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, about two-thirds of the game balls fired by the right-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650, The remaining 1/2 is configured to flow down toward the second variable winning device 650 without passing through the through gate 67 . Then, while the small winning game is not being executed, all the game balls that are shot by the right-handed game and flowed down the right side area do not enter the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The character 640a is reached.
Then, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the retracted state (buried state), the game ball flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 through the retracted electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the protruding state, the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a moves the upper surface of the protruding electric accessory 640a to the lower right direction (lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 777). ). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case of using the configuration for changing the visibility of the inside using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.
Here, with reference to FIG. 778, the configuration of the electric accessory 640a provided in the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 778, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the game balls flowing down from the second variable winning device 650 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-shaped member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right in front view of FIG. 777). It is disposed on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . Then, the game ball flowing down from the second variable winning device 650 flows down to the area a (see FIG. 778) corresponding to the range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.
The game ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the game ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a directed to the right end side. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state in a state where the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. The game ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning hole 63 which is closed. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 10 mm from the right end of electric accessory 640 a ), the ball enters second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continues to protrude differs depending on the game state (probability state of normal symbols). probability state) is set, the electric accessory 640a operates (performs a normal game), the game ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a positioned in the projecting state is in the area b (Fig. 778), the electric accessory 640a is changed to a retracted state, and in a state in which the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, the game ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a is in the area c (see FIG. 778), the electric accessory 640a is configured to continue the projecting state for a sufficient period of time.
Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is continuously in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the falling period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 778 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in the 29th control example). With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the game ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation. , The operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed before the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. can be suppressed.
In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a protrudes for a period longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the game ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640. In order to continue the state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the projecting state can be made easier to reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.
Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 778, such game balls enter the general prize winning slot 63 provided below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, a different ball entrance (second ball entrance) is generated depending on the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the arrival timing of the game ball to the electric accessory 640a. 640 or the general winning hole 63) can be configured to guide the game ball, it is possible to allow the player to continuously play the right-handed game during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 29th control example, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be able to hold (reserve storage) at most one. That is, even if the execution condition for executing a new special symbol lottery is not established, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired by entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, When the execution condition for executing the special symbol lottery is established in the state of acquiring the FIG. ing.
Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, if the execution conditions for executing the special symbol lottery are not satisfied, for example, even if the special symbol variation is being executed, the special figure 2 hold A player can be motivated to play a right-handed game in order to win.
Furthermore, even in the state where the maximum number (one) of the special figure 2 reservation has already been acquired, the general winning prize provided below the second ball entrance 640 by performing the right-handed game during the time saving state Since the game ball can be easily made to enter the mouth 63, the player who wants to win many prize balls during the time-saving state can be made to willingly play the right-handed game.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the number of prize balls (one) paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the general In addition to the game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the time saving state, It is structured so as to provide a player with a game aiming to acquire many prize balls. By configuring in this way, the player can play a game with a different purpose according to the game situation in the time-saving state, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. .

In the twenty-ninth control example, as described above, during the time saving state, as a game different from the game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, it is possible to execute the game aiming to acquire many prize balls. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on the entry of a game ball into the general winning hole 63, it may be configured to provide the player with a privilege different from the prize ball, or the general winning Instead of the mouth 63, it is configured to provide a winning mouth capable of acquiring the execution right of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) and a winning mouth capable of acquiring the execution right of the normal symbol lottery (ordinary figure reservation). You can
As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is ten, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is one. Therefore, if the execution conditions for the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) are satisfied, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to the general winning mouth 63. It is possible to provide a privilege (that is, special figure 2 lottery and one prize ball) that is more advantageous to the player than the ball entering, and the execution condition of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is established. If not, and if the number of conditions for holding the special figure 2 is obtained, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the general winning port 63 than the second ball entrance 640 ( That is, it is configured so that 10 prize balls can be awarded.
As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in special symbols), the player can change the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained), which saves time. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.
In addition, in the 29th control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. A sufficiently long period (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the game ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, , 0.9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the game ball is stopped to be launched, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated, the game ball is started to be launched again. Since it is possible to suppress the action (so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular special prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses when the result of the special symbol lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is a jackpot winning. After that, the first symbol display device 37 lights up and displays the special symbol so as to become a stop symbol for indicating the winning of the big win, and the third symbol corresponding to the winning of the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加, the player is notified of the jackpot winning.
Then, a jackpot game is executed in which the game balls are likely to enter the first variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加In the special game state in which the jackpot game is being executed, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed (during the non-jackpot game) is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds, or 10 balls). (until you win a prize). The termination condition that is met when 10 prizes are won is another form of the termination condition that can be met based on the operation of the firing handle. Also, the termination condition that is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed is another form of the termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the firing handle is not operated than when the firing handle is operated.
Then, a jackpot game is executed in which the game balls are likely to enter the first variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加In the special game state in which the jackpot game is being executed, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed (during the non-jackpot game) is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds, or 10 balls). (until you win a prize). The termination condition that is met when 10 prizes are won is another form of the termination condition that can be met based on the operation of the operating means in the 61st control example described later. Also, the end condition that is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed is another form of the end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the operation means is not operated than when the operation means is operated in the 61st control example described later.
Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing door 65b that covers the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, and the opening/closing door 65b can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction (the depth direction from the viewpoint in FIG. 777). It has a specific winning opening solenoid 209a (see FIG. 802) for driving. The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. , the opening of the specific prize winning port 65a is covered with the opening/closing door 65b in the closed state. In addition, when the open/close door 65b is positioned in the closed state, a flow path is formed on the upper surface of the open/close door 65b so that the game ball can flow down, and the game ball flows to the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state. When it reaches, it flows down the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65b, flows down to the downstream side of the first variable winning device 65 without winning into the specific winning opening 65a, and the game board 13 A ball enters an out port 66 provided on the lower side of the game area and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is driven to operate the open/close door 65b to the back side (the back side in the view point of FIG. 777), so that the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. An easy open state is temporarily formed, and the open state and the closed state are alternately repeated.
In addition, the special game state (contents of the jackpot game) is not limited to the configuration described above. When a special symbol indicating winning is displayed, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning hole 65a is opened when a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a while the specific winning hole 65a is open. Alternatively, a game state in which a large opening provided separately is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the lower left side of the entrance 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.
Specifically, the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing door 650f1 that covers the opening of the V winning opening 650a, and the opening/closing door 650f1 that extends forward and backward (in the depth direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 777). direction) is provided with a V winning opening solenoid 209b (see FIG. 802) for driving to open and close. The V winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. , the opening of the V prize opening 650a is covered with the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state. In addition, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned in the closed state, a flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 so that the game ball can flow down, and the game ball flows to the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state. When it reaches, it flows down the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1, and flows down to the downstream side of the second variable winning device 650 without winning to the V winning opening 650a, and the second variable winning It flows down toward the electric accessory 640a provided downstream of the device 650 in the right area.
Then, when the small winning game is executed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is driven to operate the open/close door 650f1 to the back side (the back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 777), so that the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a. It temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy to break, and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the closed state. The detailed structure of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 779 to 782. FIG.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 779 to 782. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 777, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state closing the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is played. A game ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed is directed toward the lower left side (the lower left side in the front view of FIG. 777) above the open/close door 650f1. It flows down and flows out toward the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in the open state (that is, during the small winning game), the game ball enters the V winning device 650 .
In this 29th control example, as the opening operation of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, after the closed state (opening period) for 2 seconds, the open state (0.1 seconds), the closed state (0.4 seconds) , open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0 .4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (1.5 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (1.5 sec), open state (0.2 sec), An open period (round game period) of closed state (4.8 seconds), open state (0.8 seconds), and closed state (9 seconds) is executed.
In this way, the period during which one open state (open period) continues is set as short as 0.1 seconds at the shortest, but at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the opening and closing door 650f1. This period is sufficient for the game ball to enter the V winning device 650 . A game ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650 is arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 781(a)) while flowing down on the first or second regulating member. . With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the shortest period of the period in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds. Any other period may be set as long as the game ball flowing down can enter the V winning device 650 . In addition, in the 29th control example, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is eight times, but other times may be set.

Although the details will be described later, in this 29th control example, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game. A longer closing period is set after the fifth opening operation than up to the fifth opening operation. This is to make it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the game ball during the period when the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the specific area (V switch) 650e3 does not detect the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hit game, the right-handed game is emphasized to the player. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display prompting the player to play the game.
Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval between opening is set so that the game ball can enter the V winning device 650 Set a long period.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.
In addition, since the closing period is set to be short (0.4 seconds) until the fifth opening operation executed during the small winning game, the right hitting game is executed immediately after the small winning game is executed. until the fifth opening operation is completed for the player who is in the game, a predetermined number (10) of game balls are awarded to the V prize winning device 650, thereby establishing the end condition of the small winning game. , the small winning game can be easily ended before the long closing period is set. Therefore, compared with the case where a long closing period is set after the end of the first opening operation executed during the small winning game, the small winning game period becomes unnecessarily long and the game is executed properly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 779 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 779, the V winning device 650 is an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the V winning device 650 is combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of
FIG. 780 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. FIG. 780(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 780(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 780(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 780(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 781(a).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 780(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.
By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.
FIG. 780(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 780(b). As shown in FIG. 780(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.
Next, with reference to FIG. 781, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.
FIG. 781(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 781(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h can be rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 781(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 650h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example, the game ball passes through the V switch (specific area) 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is started after the small winning game. Start is set. That is, the V switch (specific area) 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game can pass through the V switch 650e3, or cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). (ordinary discharge flow path 650e1), and when the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. 781(b)).
In the pachinko machine 10 used in the twenty-ninth control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured to Then, when a small win is won, the passage solenoid 650k is set to ON in accordance with the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g, which will be described later with reference to FIG. The discharge channel 650e2 is configured to be able to flow down. In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to be off, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 781(a)).
In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the downstream end of the normal discharge channel 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the total number of detections of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.
In this way, the game ball that has entered the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1. ) can be paid out. In addition, it is possible to sort whether or not the game ball passes through the V switch 650e4 by using the game ball after it is detected, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.
In addition, in this 29th control example, when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, one small hit type (small hits A to C) can be set from among a plurality of types of small hit types, and any small hit can be set. Even when a small winning game in which the winning type is set is executed, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON so that the game ball can enter the specific area during the small winning game. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and the probability that the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game passes through the specific area (V switch 650e3) can be changed according to the set small winning type. It may be configured to allow
For example, according to the small hit type (small hit A to C) set when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, a small hit game with different periods and timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON is executed. The degree of expectation (V winning expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is varied according to the contents of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. good to do By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while expecting not only to win a small prize, but also to execute a small prize game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 782, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 782(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. In the opening/closing door 650f1 of the twenty-ninth control example, as shown in FIG. It is configured such that the left upper surface 650y2 flows down from the right upper surface 650y1 of the prize winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 and flows toward the variable prize winning device 65. FIG.
A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of game balls. It is configured so that the period of time for flowing down the upper surface is 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.4 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. With this configuration, the game ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game. . It should be noted that, when executing the movable control to open and close the open/close door 650f1 multiple times during one round game, the control in the closed state without ending the round game is also performed by specifying the movable accessory in the 61st control example described later. This is another form of control that does not determine whether or not the end condition is satisfied, regardless of the position.
In the state shown in FIG. 782(a), when the small winning game is executed and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 782(b). FIG. 782(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 782(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retract inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the player can win. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.
In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided. After aligning in a line through, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is a passage width for one game ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, a game ball that has won a prize vigorously from the open/close door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening. Since collision with 650a1 can be prevented, failure of ball detection switch 650c1 provided in detection port 650a1 can be suppressed. In addition, a flow path for aligning the game balls until the game balls pass through the detection port 650a1 with a passage width of one game ball (a flow path flowing down on the first regulation member 651 and the second regulation member 652 ) can be ensured, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, the privilege game (small winning game) executed when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery of the special symbols) is a predetermined discrimination result (small winning) The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.4 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in Since it is configured to be longer, the game ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the open/close door 650f1 is closed) during the small winning game is surely released at the next opening timing. can win a prize.
In addition, only the game balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of opening operations (8 times) in the small winning game is set, even if one opening period (0.1 second) is set short, a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one open period to be long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.
Returning to FIG. 776, the description continues. An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 777).
The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Game balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a pass through the out opening 66 in the drawing. It is guided to the ball ejection path that does not. The out port 66 is arranged below the first ball entrance port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. These various members function as adjustment means for varying the flowing direction and the flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the game area.
As shown in FIG. 784, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.
The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.
The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.
The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 802). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .
The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 802) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.
Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The display surface of the third design display device 81 is configured to display the third design corresponding to the special design (the first special design or the second special design). It is configured to display a display mode including 10 types of main symbols imitating numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (to be described later) is a big win, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are arranged (for example, "777"). It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display.

This third pattern is variably displayed in the same manner as the fluctuating special pattern during the special pattern fluctuation period for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, and the special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the result of the special pattern lottery. When it is displayed, it is configured to be stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the stop-displayed special symbol. That is, the player predicts the result of the special symbol lottery while watching the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and then the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. By visually recognizing, it is configured to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery.
Here, the content of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the twenty-ninth control example, a plurality of third symbols can be variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode (combination) of the plurality of third symbols stopped and displayed. By, it is configured to notify the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.
Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.
In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above.

A small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm4 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character takes an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dm4 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.
As shown in FIG. 785(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 785(b), this sub-display area Ds displays a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters the predetermined number (first Entry 64 is reserved 4 times, and second entry 640 is reserved 1 time. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this control example, the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for the first special symbol and 1 for the second special symbol. Since the special figure 1 reserved design) is configured to be displayable, a maximum of 4 reserved designs (special figure 1 reserved design) are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, FIG. 785 (b) shows an example of displaying the reserved design (special figure 1 reserved design) in the sub display area Ds, but the display position of the reserved design is not limited to this, and the main display area Ds It may be configured to display reserved symbols in a partial area.
In addition, it is not necessary to display all the reserved patterns that are reserved and stored. is to display only the reserved design of the second special design (special design 2 reserved design), and when the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design is set, the reserved design of the first special design (special design 1 reserved pattern) may be displayed, or the degree of recognition of the reserved pattern corresponding to each special pattern type may be changed according to the game state, for example, the high probability state of the normal pattern. When (time saving state) is set, the special figure 2 reserved pattern is displayed so that it is easier for the player to visually recognize it than the special figure 1 reserved pattern, and the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern is set. If it is, the special figure 1 reserved pattern may be displayed so as to be easier for the player to visually recognize than the special figure 2 reserved pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the special symbol type mainly executed according to the set game state in an easy-to-understand manner.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the number of reserved symbols is varied according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically. In addition, the display mode of the reserved design is changed according to the special design type so that the player can identify whether the displayed reserved design is the special design 1 reserved design or the special design 2 reserved design. Alternatively, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand how many reserved symbols correspond to which special symbol type, each reservation is made in the same display mode (idea including completely the same display mode) It may be configured to display a pattern.

<Regarding the effect content in the 29th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 786 to 800, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example will be described.
The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example is configured to set the normal state or the time-saving state as the game state after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery. there is Then, the game state set after the end of the big win game is changed by the big win game performance executed during the big win game executed when the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state wins the big win (first win). It is configured to notify the player. By constructing in this way, during the jackpot game which is a monotonous game of only winning prize balls, it is possible to execute a performance that the player is strongly interested in, and the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed.
In the twenty-ninth control example, as a jackpot game effect for notifying the game state set after the jackpot game is over, it is possible to execute a subjugation effect in which a predetermined number of enemies are subjugated by a ally character by attacking multiple times. is doing. In this subjugation effect, when the number of enemies becomes 0 as a result of the effect, it is informed that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game being executed is completed, and the number of enemies is increased as a result of the effect. When the number of bodies is other than 0 (for example, 12 bodies), it is notified that a normal state disadvantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game being executed is finished.
Here, conventionally, an effect is executed in which the displayed predetermined value is subtracted multiple times by operating an operation means that the player can operate. There is one that executes an operation subtraction effect that notifies that an advantageous privilege is given to.

In this conventional operation subtraction effect, a predetermined value to be displayed first and a value to be finally displayed are determined in advance, and each effect for subtracting the value is repeated multiple times within the determined range. Generally, it is configured to be executed, and when the player operates the operation means in a short period of time, the value to be finally displayed is displayed immediately after the operation subtraction effect is started. Since the period during which the value is not subtracted based on the operation of the operation means continues for a long time, the player's desire to operate the operation device is lowered.
In the subjugation effect executed in the twenty-ninth control example, the number of executions of the attack effect that reduces the number of enemies based on the operation of the effect button 22a, and the individual execution opportunities of the attack effect can be subtracted (subjugated). The number of subjugated enemies (the number of remaining enemies) can be determined in advance. While each attack effect is executed, the number of remaining enemies determined in advance can be displayed as the effect result of the attack effect by operating the operation means by the player, and the player can perform the attack effect in each attack effect. does not operate the operation means, or if the number of remaining enemies displayed is greater than the number of remaining enemies determined in advance despite the operation of the operation means, the number of enemies actually displayed It is possible to execute an additional attack production that reduces the number of remaining enemies by an additional attack.
Further, when the additional attack effect is executed, the first attack effect that reduces the number of enemies to a predetermined number of remaining enemies, the number of remaining enemies that is actually displayed, and the number of remaining enemies that are determined in advance. and a second attack effect in which the number of enemies is reduced to a specific number of remaining enemies within the range of the number of enemies. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the effect result of the additional attack effect from always becoming the predetermined number of remaining enemies.
Furthermore, in the 29th control example, in addition to the case where all enemies have been defeated (when the number of remaining enemies is 0), the number of remaining enemies is a specific number (for example, "111" etc.) during the defeat production. By being displayed in the square eyes), it is possible to notify that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game before the subjugation effect ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to quickly perceive the game state set after the end of the jackpot game to pay attention to the performance contents of the subjugation performance (the performance result of each attack performance). You can increase the effect.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the setting of the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game is set as the specific number of the number of remaining enemies that can be notified before the subjugation effect is finished. In addition to a common specific number regardless of the type of pattern (type of jackpot pattern), a unique specific number corresponding to a third pattern type (type of jackpot pattern) for indicating jackpot winning can be set. .
By configuring the unique specific number to be settable in this way, the number of remaining enemies expected to be displayed during the subjugation performance can be varied according to the type of the third pattern displayed when the jackpot is won. It is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the subjugation performance.
Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, a specific number of remaining enemies can be determined as the effect result of the above-described second attack effect. In other words, instead of reducing the displayed number of remaining enemies to the predetermined number of remaining enemies in one attack effect, the predetermined number of remaining enemies is displayed in one attack effect. When the number of remaining enemies is not reduced, a specific number is included in the range between the displayed number of remaining enemies and the predetermined number of remaining enemies, and the specific number of remaining enemies When the display condition for displaying the number is satisfied, the number of remaining enemies of a specific number is displayed as the effect result of the second attack effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to operate the operating means (the effect button 22a) in each attack effect.
In addition, grasp the number of remaining enemies displayed at the start of the attack production, and predict the number of remaining enemies (predetermined number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in this attack production. predicts whether or not a specific number of enemies is included in the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in the current attack effect, and based on the prediction result, operates means (effect button 22a) in each attack effect. Since it is possible to select whether to operate or not, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, by making it possible to set a unique specific number in addition to a common specific number as the number of remaining enemies that will be a specific number, a specific number will be included within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in this attack production. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the attack is performed, it is possible to suppress monotonous selection results as to whether or not to operate the operation means (the effect button 22a) in each attack effect. .
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, as a unique specific number corresponding to the third symbol type (type of jackpot symbol) for indicating jackpot winning, a number attached to the third symbol for indicating jackpot winning (for example, When the third symbol of "444" is stop-displayed, a part of the number of remaining enemies including at least "4") can be set. Then, the greater the number of numbers attached to the third symbol for indicating the winning of the jackpot, the easier it is to be set as the unique specific number. Specifically, in the subjugation effect during the jackpot game executed based on the stop display of the third symbol of "444", "444" is most likely to be set as the unique specific number, followed by the last two digits. is "44", the number of remaining enemies with two numbers of "4", and the number of remaining enemies with the last digit of "4". With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which number of remaining enemies is set as the unique specific number.
In addition, when any one of a plurality of types of remaining enemy numbers including the number attached to the third pattern for indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, the displayed remaining enemy number is expected to be a unique specific number. Therefore, the subjugation effect can be executed without getting tired of the player.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the unique specific number can be determined by lottery. A specific number may be determined in advance. Also, only one specific number may be determined, or three or more may be determined.

In addition, while the subjugation effect is being executed, a unique specific number suggesting effect including information for making it easy for the player to predict the unique specific number set this time may be executed. By constructing in this manner, every time the number of remaining enemies including the number attached to the third pattern for indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, the player is unnecessarily expected to be the unique specific number. can be suppressed.
First, with reference to FIGS. 786 to 789, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 786(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a subjugation effect is executed as an effect for informing the player of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the subjugation effect is a part of the big win game effect that is executed during the big win game, and is a effect in which the allied character subjugates a predetermined number of enemies. In this case, after the jackpot game being executed is finished, it is notified that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set, and when the number of enemies becomes other than 0 (for example, 12) as a result of the performance. , to notify that a normal state disadvantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game being executed is finished.
Specifically, in the first round game (1st round) of the jackpot game, the number of enemies in this subjugation production is displayed, and the subsequent round games (2nd round to Every sixth round), an attack presentation for defeating the enemy is executed, and the number of enemies displayed after the last attack presentation is completed is displayed as the presentation result of this subjugation presentation.
FIG. 786(a) is a display screen showing the first round of the jackpot game, and on the upper right of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, there is a third symbol for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery. In the display area Dm1 where the symbols are displayed, "444" is stopped and displayed as the stopped display mode of the third symbol for indicating the winning of the jackpot. In addition, in FIG. 786(a), in order to show the display screen during the jackpot game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area Dm1 in a manner recognizable by the player. The third symbol may be stopped and displayed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to identify it, or the third symbol may not be stopped and displayed during the jackpot game. Furthermore, instead of the identification information (third pattern) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, a special pattern imitating "V" is displayed in the main display area as identification information (special pattern) for indicating that the jackpot has been won. Dm1 may be configured to stop display.

In addition, a display area Dm4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm to display a guidance display mode for guiding the game method to the player, and guides the game method to be executed by the player during the jackpot game. As a display mode for playing, characters of "Right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game are displayed. Further, below the display area Dm4, "Round 1" indicating the number of round games being executed is displayed as a jackpot game status display mode for informing the player of the progress of the jackpot game.
In the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a display area is displayed in which a point display mode is displayed for indicating information corresponding to the total number of winning balls won during a period in which the game state is favorable to the player. Dm6 is formed. FIG. 786(a) shows the display screen of the first round of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning the jackpot (first hit) in the normal state. "33P" is displayed as information corresponding to the number of prize balls already obtained. That is, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the jackpot game is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, and when the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65, 11 786(a) shows that 3 game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round game, and 33 prizes in total. It shows the display screen when the ball is paid out.
A display area HR1 for displaying the total number of enemies to be subjugated in the current subjugation effect is formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the characters "500 remaining" are displayed. In other words, it is notified that the present subjugation presentation is a presentation mode for subjugating 500 enemies.
Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, a different value can be determined as the total number of enemies in the subjugation effect. is determined, and when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is easier to determine “1000 bodies” than when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. ``500 bodies'' is more likely to be determined when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big win game than when the normal state is set after the end of the big win game. Also, the total number of enemies "777 bodies" is configured to be determined only when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, the performance result of the subjugation performance is displayed by grasping the total number of enemies displayed in the display area HR1 immediately after the subjugation performance is started (first round of the jackpot game). A player can predict the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game before the start of the game, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, when the total number of enemies ``777 bodies'' is displayed, it is possible for the player to grasp that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game at the start of the subjugation presentation. Therefore, during the production period in which the subjugation production is executed, it is possible to notify that the time saving state is set at various timings. During the production period in which the subjugation production is executed, the production can be continuously watched.
In addition, a display area Dm7 is formed in the upper right side of the main display area, in which a plurality of button icons Pu1 to Pu5 imitating the effect button 22a are displayed. In this display area Dm7, there are information suggesting the number of times an attack presentation for reducing the total number of enemies in this subjugation presentation is executed and the number of enemies to be reduced in one attack presentation (the number of subjugations). A plurality of button icons Pu1 to Pu5 are displayed in a display mode determined based on .
In the example shown in FIG. 786(a), the first button icon Pu1, the second button icon Pu2, the third button icon Pu3, the fourth button icon Pu4, and the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in this order from the left. In the subjugation effect, the player is informed that the attack effect using the effect button 22a will be executed five times. Further, the first button icon Pu1, the third button icon Pu3, the fourth button icon Pu4, and the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in a normal display mode suggesting that a normal attack effect is executed, and the second button icon Pu2 is displayed in a strong display mode (in the drawing, it is displayed in a display mode that is thicker than usual) suggesting that a strong attack effect will be executed.
By configuring in this way, the number of attack productions to be executed in the current subjugation production and the production contents of each attack production are performed in the period from the execution of the subjugation production to the execution of the first attack production. Since it is possible to make the player easily predict , it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation.

Further, in the twenty-ninth control example, the first attack effect corresponds to the first button icon Pu1, and the second attack effect corresponds to the second button icon Pu2. The attack effect corresponding to the third button icon Pu3 in the attack effect, the attack effect corresponding to the fourth button icon Pu4 in the fourth attack effect, and the fifth button icon Pu5 in the fifth attack effect. It is configured so that an attack production is executed. In other words, the plurality of button icons displayed in the display area Dm7 are configured to be able to suggest not only the number of times of attack effects executed in the subjugation effects, but also the effect mode of each attack effect. By configuring in this way, the player can predict in advance how many times the attack effect in the subjugation effect will result in a effect that greatly reduces the number of remaining enemies. The number of enemies) and the display mode of the remaining button icons displayed in the display area Dm7 can be expected to change the remaining number of enemies to a unique specific number or a common specific number.
In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "If all enemies are defeated, a rush will start!" By configuring in this way, when the subjugation effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that some kind of privilege will be granted by changing the displayed value of the remaining 500 bodies to 0, so that the subjugation effect You can enjoy the process of decreasing the number of remaining enemies during the execution of.
When the first attack effect in the subjugation effect is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 786(b) is displayed. FIG. 786(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the first attack effect in the subjugation effect. In the twenty-ninth control example, as described above, the attack effect in the subjugation effect is executed from the second round to the sixth round of the jackpot game, and the first attack effect is executed in the second round. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 786(b), "Round 2" indicating that the second round is being played is displayed in the display area Dm5.
Then, the display area HR1, which was formed in the center of the main display area Dm at the start of the subjugation effect, is reduced and formed above the center of the display area Dm. On the other hand, the first button icon Pu1, the display mode indicating the pressing direction (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure), and the operation of the effect button 22a in the first attack effect are effective as the display mode for prompting the pressing of the effect button 22a. A time gauge ga1 is displayed as a display mode indicating the period (SW effective period) determined by .

In the twenty-ninth control example, 3 seconds is set as the SW valid period corresponding to one attack effect, and the display mode of the time gauge ga1 is the remaining period display ga1a for indicating the remaining period. and an elapsed period display ga1b for indicating the elapsed period. Every time a period elapses after the SW valid period is set, the ratio occupied by the elapsed period display ga1b increases, and the remaining period display ga1a becomes The display mode of the time gauge ga1 is configured to be variable so that the ratio occupied by the time gauge is reduced. Note that the example shown in FIG. 786(b) shows the point in time when 1 second has passed since the SW valid period was set, and the elapsed A state is displayed in which the period display ga1b indicates a range of 1 second and the remaining period display ga1a indicates a range of 2 seconds.
By configuring in this way, the player can visually grasp the remaining period until the SW effective period elapses, so that the player will not forget to operate the production button 22a during the attack production. can be suppressed.
Furthermore, a character 801a imitating a rabbit is displayed as a display mode for suggesting the contents of the effect to be executed in the current attack effect. In the twenty-ninth control example, the player selects the display mode for showing the friendly characters used in the effect of reducing the number of remaining enemies executed based on the pressing of the effect button 22a during the attack effect. is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device before pressing (after the SW effective period is set).
In the attack presentation, the range of the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced is made different according to the type of the friendly character and the type of attack to be executed. Specifically, as the types of friendly characters, a rabbit-like character 801a (see FIG. 786(b)) and a hero-like character 801b (see FIG. 787(a)) having higher attack power than the character 801a. and can be set so that each character can execute a normal attack and a strong attack that tends to reduce the number of enemies more than the normal attack. Therefore, the normal attack by the character 801a is the combination of attack effects that makes it difficult to reduce the number of remaining enemies, and the strong attack by the character 801b is the combination that makes it the easiest to reduce the number of remaining enemies.

In this way, the range of the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced in one attack effect can be notified to the player in advance by at least a part of the plurality of constituent elements forming the effect mode of the attack effect. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the effect result of the attack effect to be executed this time.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, there are two types of allied characters used in the attack effect, but the number of types of allied characters may be one, or three or more. Also, the types of attacks that can be executed by the ally character may be set to three or more types, or the type of attack executed may be varied according to the type of the ally character. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in which type is selected as the type of the ally character used in the attack production.
The first button icon Pu1 displayed during the attack effect is configured to be displayed in the same display mode as the first button icon Pu1 displayed in the display area Dm7 at the start of the subjugation effect. Specifically, when the attack effect is started, a button icon movement effect is executed in which the first button icon Pu1 displayed in the display area Dm7 is enlarged and moved to the center of the main display area Dm. be done. With this configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the attack effect is executed by actually using each button icon displayed in the display area Dm7 at the start of the subjugation effect. It is possible to make the player interested in the display mode displayed in .
Since the first button icon Pu1 was used for the attack effect, only the unused second button icon Pu2 to fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the display area Dm7, and the first button icon Pu1 was displayed in the past. A display mode (indicated by "-" in the figure) is displayed in the area that was used to indicate that it was used for the attack effect.

With this configuration, by checking each button icon displayed in the display area Dm7, the number of attack effects already executed during the subjugation effect and the remaining number of attack effects can be easily determined. can grasp.
When the player presses the effect button 22a in the state shown in FIG. 786(b), a effect is executed in which the character 801a attacks the enemy, and the number of remaining enemies after the attack is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 787(a), description will be given of the effect contents during the interval period after the second round of the round game in which the first attack effect is executed is completed. FIG. 787(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the interval after the end of the second round. In the interval period set between the round games of the 2nd round to the 6th round, the display mode showing the production result (number of remaining enemies) of the attack production executed in the previous round game, and in the next round game A display mode indicating the effect content of the attack effect to be executed is displayed.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the interval period is set to 1.5 seconds, and the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect executed in the previous round game (during the SW valid period). If not, the effect result (the number of remaining enemies) of the attack effect executed in the previous round game is displayed using the interval period. On the other hand, when the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect executed in the previous round game (while the SW is valid), the effect in which the ally character attacks is executed immediately after pressing the effect button 22a. After that, the production result (number of remaining enemies) of this attack production is displayed and it shifts to the interval period, and the production result (number of remaining enemies) of the attack production is displayed and executed in the next round game. A display mode indicating the content of the attack effect is displayed.
More specifically, in the twenty-ninth control example, the first end condition established when 10 game balls enter the first variable winning device 65 as the condition for ending the round game executed during the jackpot game. and a second end condition that is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed without the first end condition being satisfied since the round game was started. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. The game board 13 is configured to reach the winning device 65 .

Since the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to shoot 100 game balls in one minute (60 seconds), when the game balls are continuously shot during the jackpot game, a round game starts. After about 6 seconds, the first end condition is satisfied and the round game ends. Then, as the round game effect executed during the round game, an attack effect in which the SW effective time of 3 seconds is set is executed after 3 seconds from the start of the round game.
In other words, the length of the SW effective time (3 seconds) in the attack effect executed during the round game is configured to be shorter than the length of the round game period (about 6 seconds) that continues in the normal game. is doing. By configuring in this way, even if the game ball efficiently wins the first variable winning device 65 during the round game, the round game ends while the SW valid time is set. Since it is possible to suppress the closing of the effect button 22a, the player who tries to operate the effect button 22a within the SW effective time will be told that the round game will end before the effect button 22a is operated and the effect button 22a will be operated. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to operate.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the SW effective time set during the round game is defined in advance so as to be shorter than the round game period (about 6 seconds) that can be continued when the normal game is being executed. Then, by executing the attack performance so that the SW effective time elapses before the round game period (about 6 seconds) elapses, the player tries to operate the effect button 22a within the SW effective time. On the other hand, it is suppressed that the round game ends before the production button 22a is operated and the motivation to operate the production button 22a is reduced, but not limited to this, for example, the round game The length of the SW effective time set inside may be configured to be variable according to the number of game balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 65 during the round game.
Specifically, as the SW valid time set during the round game, the same length (30 seconds) as the period in which the second end condition (30 seconds elapsed) for ending the round game based on the elapsed time is satisfied After that, every time one game ball wins to the first variable winning device 65 during the round game, the remaining period of the SW effective time is subtracted by 3 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably end the SW effective time before the round game ends. In addition, during the round game, it is possible to provide a long SW effective time (up to 30 seconds) to the player who interrupts the shooting of the game ball and tries to operate the effect button 22a. As a result, the SW effective time elapses before the player operates the effect button 22a, and the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22a decreases. It can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 787(a), the description is continued. As shown in FIG. 787(a), during the interval period after the end of the second round, the effect result of the attack effect (see FIG. 786(b)) executed in the second round is shown in the display area HR1 as "Remaining 385 ” is displayed. In addition, as a display mode for suggesting the content of the attack effect to be executed in the third round, a character 801b imitating a hero is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and the following characters are displayed in the display area Dm7: The second button icon Pu2 corresponding to the attack effect is displayed in the high display mode. In the sub-display area Ds, a display mode of "4 remaining" is displayed for guiding the remaining number of attack effects in the current subjugation effect and that the next attack effect is an attack effect that significantly reduces the number of remaining enemies. times!! Next is a chance for mass subjugation!!" is displayed.
Therefore, a player who looks at the display screen shown in FIG. You can enjoy the attack production of the third round while expecting the remaining number of enemies to become 0.
In the twenty-ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 787(a), the effect content of the attack effect to be executed in the next round game is displayed using three display elements (the display mode of the display area Dm7, the display of the character 801b). , comments in the sub-display area Ds). These display elements are not displayed in all interval periods, and at least one display element may be used to suggest the effect content of the attack effect to be executed in the next round game.
In this case, the greater the number of display elements used among the three display elements described above, the higher the possibility that the next attack effect will greatly reduce the number of remaining enemies. If there is a contradiction in the contents of the attack effects suggested by the elements, it is preferable to increase the possibility that the next attack effect will greatly reduce the number of remaining enemies. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the various display modes displayed during the interval period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, of the three display elements described above, only the display mode Dm7 is displayed in advance, and the interval period is set for the remaining two display elements. Although it is configured to be displayed at the same time as the display mode showing the effect content of the effect is displayed, it is not limited to this and suggests the character used in the attack effect executed in the next round game. The display timing of the display mode (first display element) and the display timing of the comment display (second display element) in the sub-display area Ds may be different.
In this case, for example, the display timing of each display element may be set so that the display element whose display mode is determined to be advantageous to the player is displayed later. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player gazes at the display contents displayed during the interval period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
Further, the display timing of each display element may be set so that the display element whose display mode is determined to be advantageous to the player is displayed first. With this configuration, when the display element displayed first is in a display mode advantageous to the player, it is possible to leave the possibility that both of the two display elements are in a display mode advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to display elements that will be displayed later.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the types of button icons used in each attack effect (strong display mode, normal display mode) are displayed to the player in advance at the start of the subjugation effect (Fig. 786 ( a) See), but not limited to this, for example, when the subjugation production is started, the number of button icons corresponding to the number of attack productions to be executed in the current subjugation production is displayed. , the type of only the first button icon Pu1 is determined according to the effect content of the first attack effect, and the remaining second button icon Pu2 to fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the normal display mode, and the subjugation effect is performed. At the time of starting, a display mode is displayed to notify the player of only the number of attack effects to be executed in this subjugation effect and the effect contents of the first attack effect, and during the interval period from the second round onwards. Alternatively, the display mode of the second button icon Pu2 to the fifth button icon Pu5 may be variably displayed in accordance with the effect content of the corresponding attack effect.

With this configuration, in the process of determining the display timing of each display element displayed during the interval period, in addition to the above-described first display element and second display element, the variable display mode of the button icon It is preferable that the display timing is determined including the display timing of (the third display element).
Further, when using a configuration in which the display modes of the second button icon Pu2 to the fifth button icon Pu5 are varied during the interval period from the second round onwards, the content of each attack effect executed in the subjugation effect can be changed. , Instead of being determined in advance before the subjugation presentation starts, it may be configured to be determined during the interval period, or the content of the attack presentation determined in advance at the start of the subjugation presentation is It may be configured to be variable according to the effect result of the attack effect executed before (operation status of the effect button 22a).
In this way, even if the production content of the remaining attack production (the number of remaining enemies to be reduced) is configured to be variable while the subjugation production is being executed, the display corresponding to the production content of the attack production after the change is made. Since the button icons can be displayed in different modes, it is possible to prevent the execution of effects that make the player feel uncomfortable.
Then, when all the enemies are subdued in the final attack presentation (6th round attack presentation) executed in the subjugation presentation, the display screen shown in FIG. 787(b) is displayed. FIG. 787(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when all the enemies have been subdued in the subjugation effect.

As shown in FIG. 787(b), "0 remaining" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of remaining enemies displayed in the display area HR1, and the character 801a and character 801b used in the attack production congratulate. A presentation mode is displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the display area Dm7, as a display mode that enables the user to grasp the number of times of the attack effects executed in the subjugation effect this time, a consumed icon (indicated by "-" in the figure) is displayed, indicating the number of times the attack effects have been executed. 5 are displayed corresponding to .
In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Punishment completed!! Rush!" By constructing in this manner, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the performance result of the subjugation performance is a successful performance advantageous to the player and that a time-saving state (rush) is set after the end of the jackpot game. can be done. It should be noted that this character "subjugation completed! Rush rush!" is set, the characters "Continue Rush" are displayed instead of "Subjugation Completed!! Rush Rush!!". It can be said that the switching of this display mode is a configuration for displaying a different display mode when the same condition is established in a short period of time (when the time saving state is set).
Next, with reference to FIGS. 788 and 789(a), the display contents of the display screen displayed according to whether or not the effect button 22a is operated during the attack effect executed in the subjugation effect will be described. do. Fig. 788(a) shows an example of a display screen displayed during the SW valid time during the third round attack effect which is executed after the interval period shown in Fig. 787(a) has passed. FIG. 788(b) shows an example of a display screen displayed when the player operates (presses) the effect button 22a within the SW valid time of the attack effect displayed in FIG. 788(a). FIG. 789(a) is a display screen displayed when the player does not operate (press) the effect button 22a within the SW valid time of the attack effect displayed in FIG. 788(a). It is the figure which showed an example.
In the 29th control example, the number of remaining enemies is common to show that the effect result of the subjugation effect is the effect result that is advantageous to the player (the effect result that notifies that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends). It is configured so that it is possible to determine the mode of production for a specific number (0 bodies). Furthermore, before the number of remaining enemies becomes a common specific number (0 bodies) in the subjugation production that is an advantageous production result for the player, a unique specific number (for example, 333 or a jackpot) is set as the number of remaining enemies. The value corresponding to the symbol) is displayed so that the player can be notified of the performance result of the current subjugation performance during the subjugation performance.

In addition, according to the operation status (whether pressed or not) of the effect button 22a in each attack effect, the effect result of each attack effect is changed. For example, the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect , the effect result (number of remaining enemies) of each predetermined attack effect is displayed, and if the effect button 22a is not pressed during the attack effect, the predetermined effect result (number of remaining enemies) is displayed. ) is configured to be able to display a larger number of remaining enemies. In other words, the production result of the attack production is determined in advance, and a plurality of numbers of remaining enemies can be displayed up to the upper limit of the number of remaining enemies indicated by the production result predetermined according to the conditions established during the attack production. ing.
By configuring in this way, by prescribing in advance the total number of enemies that can be reduced in each attack presentation executed in the subjugation presentation, the number of remaining enemies can be disproportionately distributed during the presentation period of the subjugation presentation. In addition to suppressing the decrease in the number of remaining enemies, variation can be given to the number of remaining enemies that is decreased in each attack production.
Further, a state in which a unique specific number is included between the number of remaining enemies determined in advance as the effect result of the attack effect and the number of remaining enemies displayed at the start of the attack effect, and the attack effect When the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 22a during the game, an additional attack effect can be executed in which the number of remaining enemies is a unique specific number. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to operate the effect button 22a during the attack effect.
In addition, as described above, the unique specific number is configured to be determined according to the number included in the jackpot pattern, and is configured not to inform the player of the number of remaining enemies determined as the unique specific number. Therefore, every time the attack effect is executed, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the unique specific number is included in the range of the number of remaining enemies that is reduced in the current attack effect. .

In addition, by notifying the player of the size of the number of remaining enemies that will be reduced in the next attack production, it is possible to provide hints for predicting the number of remaining enemies that will be reduced during the attack production to be executed. , it is possible to make it easier to predict the range of the number of remaining enemies that will be reduced in this attack production.
As shown in FIG. 788(a), when the third round attack effect is executed, the character 801b displayed on the display screen during the interval period after the end of the second round (see FIG. 787(b)) is the main player. Displayed in the display area Dm, a second button icon Pu2 in a strong display mode is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a time gauge ga1 for indicating the SW valid time set in the current attack effect is displayed. Is displayed. Similar to the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 786(b), this time gauge ga1 is displayed with a remaining period display ga1a and an elapsed period display ga1b so as to indicate the elapsed time of the SW valid time of 3 seconds. .
In addition, since the attack effect using the second button icon Pu2 is executed in the attack effect of the third round, the third button icon Pu3 to the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the display area Dm7, and the display area HR1 "Remaining 385 bodies" indicating the number of remaining enemies, which is the effect result of the attack effect of the second round, is displayed. In this way, the display mode of the button icon indicating the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced by the current attack effect during the period (within the SW valid time of the attack effect) in which the player operates the effect button 22a. , and the current number of remaining enemies, the player can easily decide whether or not to operate the effect button 22a for the attack effect being executed.
When the effect button 22a is pressed during the third round attack effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 788(b) is displayed. FIG. 788(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the effect button 22a is operated (depressed) during the attack effect of the third round. As shown in FIG. 788(b), when the effect button 22a is operated (depressed) during the attack effect, the effect is executed in which the ally character 801b executes the attack action without waiting for the end of the round game. As a display mode for showing the effect result of the attack effect, characters of "99 bodies remaining" are displayed in the display area HR1.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 788(b), the total number of enemies "500" is determined as the production mode of the subjugation production, and the attack production (second attack production) to be executed in the third round is produced. As a result, "remaining 99 bodies" are determined in advance, and the effect result is displayed in which the number of remaining enemies is reduced to the predetermined number of remaining enemies by the second attack effect. The display area HR1 indicating the number of remaining enemies is configured so that the display mode (background) can be variably set according to the number of remaining enemies displayed. A display mode (cracked background) is displayed to indicate that (number of remaining enemies) is 100 or less. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Just a little more!!" are displayed as a guidance display mode for informing the player that the number of remaining enemies is 100 or less.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the display mode of the display area where the number of remaining enemies is displayed is configured to be variable according to the number of remaining enemies. A condition may be set, and if the ratio of the current number of remaining enemies to the total number of enemies in the subjugation effect (the number of remaining enemies initially displayed in the display area HR1) is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 1000 The condition for changing the display mode may be established when the number of remaining enemies reaches 100 (10% or less of the total number of enemies) in the subjugation effect of subduing the enemies.
With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode of the display area HR1 not by the number of remaining enemies but by the degree of decrease in the number of enemies with respect to the total number of enemies in the subjugation effect. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp whether the game has been completed.
Next, when the effect button 22a is not pressed during the third round attack effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 789(a) is displayed. Fig. 789(a) shows the display screen displayed during the interval period after the end of the third round when the third round ends without operating the effect button 22a from the state shown in Fig. 788(a). It is the figure which showed an example.

In the state shown in FIG. 788(a) (the number of remaining enemies is "385"), when the SW effective time elapses without operating the production button 22a, the remaining period display ga1a of the time gauge ga1 decreases, and the SW Validity period expires. When the round game of the third round ends in that state, the interval period set after the round game of the third round ends, and an additional attack effect executed when the effect button 22a is not operated is executed. , "Remaining 333 bodies" is displayed in the display area HR1 as the effect result of the additional attack effect.
In other words, the diagram shown in FIG. 789(a) shows that the jackpot game this time is a jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and "333" as the unique specific number of the subjugation production in which the successful production is executed. is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the subjugation effect set is being executed.
Then, as the effect result of the attack effect to be executed in the third round, the number of remaining enemies "99 bodies" is determined, and when the player operates the effect button 22a, the effect shown in FIG. 788(b) is displayed. As you can see, the effect result that the number of remaining enemies is reduced from "385 bodies" to "99 bodies" is displayed. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 22a, an additional attack effect is executed to reduce the number of remaining enemies from "385" by a predetermined number. When the condition for executing this additional attack presentation is established, the presentation mode (result of presentation) of the additional attack presentation is determined by a special lottery.
Specifically, when the SW effective time elapses without operating the effect button 22a, the condition for executing the additional attack effect is satisfied, and the current number of remaining enemies (for example, "385 bodies") and the attack effect Whether the unique specific number (eg, "333") determined in this subjugation rendering is included between the number of remaining enemies (eg, "99") determined in advance as a result of the production is determined, and if it is determined that the unique specific number is not included, the number of remaining enemies (for example, "99 bodies") that was previously determined as a result of the attack production at a rate of 70%. The mode is determined, and the production mode is determined to reduce to the first pseudo remnant number (eg, "104 bodies") in which the last digit is the number of jackpot symbols (eg, "4") at a rate of 20%, A performance mode is determined in which the last two digits are reduced to a second pseudo number of remaining enemies (eg, "144 bodies") in which the last two digits are the number of jackpot symbols (eg, "4") at a rate of 10%.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a unique specific number is included, there is a production mode that reduces the number of remaining enemies (for example, "99 bodies") that was previously determined as the production result of the attack production at a rate of 40%. is determined, and a production mode is determined that reduces the number to a unique specific number (eg, "333 bodies") at a rate of 30%, and the last digit is the number of jackpot patterns (eg, "4") at a rate of 10%. A production mode that reduces the number of first pseudo remnants (for example, "104 bodies") is determined, and the second pseudo remnants in which the last two digits are the number of jackpot symbols (for example, "4") at a rate of 20% A presentation mode is determined to reduce the number (for example, "144 bodies").
Then, an additional attack effect is executed according to the determined effect mode. By configuring in this way, the effect result of one attack effect can be made different between when the effect button 22a is operated during the attack effect and when it is not operated, so that variations of the attack effect can be increased. can be done. In addition, even if the unique specific number is not included in the range of reduction of the number of remaining enemies, the number of enemies will be reduced to the number of remaining enemies (pseudo number of remaining enemies) related to the number included in the jackpot pattern. Since it is made easy, it is possible to easily make the player think that the effect result of the additional attack effect is the unique specific number.
Furthermore, if a unique specific number is included within the range of decreasing the number of remaining enemies, that is, the subjugation production that is being executed is a successful subjugation production ), compared to the case where the unique specific number is not included in the decreasing range of the number of remaining enemies, the pseudo number of remaining enemies is more likely to be determined. Therefore, even if the number of remaining enemies cannot be reduced to the unique specific number, in the subjugation effect of 1, the game is performed so that the additional attack effect is executed multiple times, and the number of pseudo remaining enemies is increased. By being displayed a plurality of times, it is possible for the player to predict that the current subjugation presentation will be a success presentation.
Also, as shown in FIG. 789(a), when the number of remaining enemies of the unique specific number ("333") is displayed in the display area HR1, that is, before the number of remaining enemies becomes "0" When it is notified to the player that a success effect (subjugation effect that notifies that the time saving state is set) will be executed, the display mode of the display area HR1 is different from the normal display mode (in the figure The button icons (the third button icon Pu3 to the fifth button icon Pu5) displayed in the display area Dm7 are changed so that the number of remaining enemies is finally "0". It is displayed in a special display mode (displayed in a shining mode in the drawing) to indicate that the rest of the attack effects are to be executed.

In the twenty-ninth control example, even if a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies during the subjugation presentation, the rest of the attack presentation is executed according to the predetermined contents. In other words, even after the unique specific number is displayed, the attack effect is executed to reduce the number of remaining enemies until the number of remaining enemies becomes zero. Therefore, even when the unique specific number of remaining enemies is displayed once, the number of remaining enemies different from the unique specific number is displayed in the display area HR1 when the subjugation effect progresses. Therefore, the display mode of the button icon displayed in the display area Dm7 and the display mode of the display area HR1 can be displayed in a display mode for notifying that the unique specific number has been displayed, so that the subjugation effect can be achieved. It is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies at an intermediate stage continuously over the remaining period of the subjugation presentation.
In the twenty-ninth control example, as described above, even if a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies during the subjugation presentation, the rest of the attack presentation is configured to be executed according to the predetermined content. This suppresses an increase in the load of the control processing for executing the subjugation effect. In other words, when the player already knows that the success effect is being executed, the player's interest in the degree of decrease in the number of remaining enemies in each attack effect decreases, so the unique specific number is displayed. Even if it is possible to set a dedicated presentation mode (for example, a presentation mode in which the number of remaining enemies is all aligned as a result of each attack presentation) as the presentation mode of the attack presentation to be executed after the attack, the presentation effect will still be effective. Since it is difficult to increase the target performance effectively, the control processing load for executing the subjugation performance is restrained from increasing excessively by configuring the performance mode of the attack performance determined in advance to be used as it is. can do.
It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration used in the twenty-ninth control example, in the case where a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies during the subjugation presentation, instead of the predetermined attack presentation presentation mode, , it may be configured to execute a dedicated effect mode, for example, when the next attack effect is executed in a state in which a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies, the attack effect in the subjugation effect Configured to execute an attack production in which the number of remaining enemies is ``0'' regardless of the remaining number of times, and then use the remaining period until the subjugation production ends (time after confirmation) to perform the remaining attack production. It may be configured to execute a blessing effect for congratulating the player without executing it, or another privilege (for example, , presence/absence of a holding series) may be executed. By configuring in this way, when the subjugation effect that becomes a successful effect is executed, depending on the progress of the effect until the effect result is displayed (whether or not the unique specific number is displayed) Since different benefits can be provided by each player, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to press the performance button 22a during the period during which the subjugation performance is executed.
In addition, it is possible to set a special effect mode (for example, the effect mode in which the number of remaining enemies is all aligned as a result of each attack effect effect) as the effect mode of the attack effect that is executed after the unique specific number is displayed. may be configured. With this configuration, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the unique specific number has been displayed only by grasping the number of remaining enemies displayed in the display area HR1. There is no need to prepare display data for displaying a dedicated display mode (eg, shining mode) as the display mode of the display element (eg, button icon) displayed in the display area (eg, display area Dm7). .

FIG. 789(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the unique specific number is displayed in the final attack effect in the subjugation effect. In the 29th control example, in the subjugation effect that is a successful effect, as the effect result of the last attack effect, the number of remaining enemies is not "0", but a unique specific number (for example, "44") is displayed. A resurrection effect that sets the number of remaining enemies to "0" can be executed by an attack effect.
In other words, the number of remaining enemies other than "0" is displayed as the effect result of the final attack effect while letting the player know that the attack effect to be executed this time is the final attack effect in the subjugation effect. , After making the player think that a failure performance (a performance notifying that the time-saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game) has been executed, a resurrection performance is executed and the number of remaining enemies is variably displayed to ``0''. configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the success effect is executed until the end of the subjugation effect.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 789(b), "remaining 44 bodies" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode for showing the effect result of the final attack effect during the sixth round of the round game. In the example shown in FIG. 789(b), "44" using the number "4" included in the jackpot symbol is determined as the unique specific number, and "44 bodies" displayed in the display area HR1 is It becomes a unique specific number. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 801c corresponding to the resurrection effect attacks the display area HR1, and a resurrection effect (additional attack effect) is executed in which the unique specific number once displayed is further decreased.
When this resurrection effect is completed, similarly to the display screen shown in FIG. 787(b), "remaining 0 bodies" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode for indicating the success effect, and the success effect is given to the player. is executed. Although not shown, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the performance result of the subjugation performance is a failure performance, the number of remaining enemies other than the unique specific number is randomly determined as the performance result of the final attack performance. Instead, it is configured so that the number of pseudo remnants using the numbers included in the jackpot symbols can be easily determined.

In other words, in the subjugation effect when the jackpot is won with "444", the number "4" is attached to the display area HR1 of the display screen for showing the effect result of the failure effect (the display screen showing the result of the last attack effect). It is configured so that the pseudo number of remaining enemies (for example, "14 bodies" or "4 bodies"), which is the number of remaining enemies determined and is not determined as a unique specific number, is easily displayed. By configuring in this way, when the performance result of the failure performance is displayed, the performance result of the failure performance can be displayed while leaving the possibility of executing the resurrection performance.
As described above, in the 29th control example, it is possible to inform in advance that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game using the effect result of the subjugation effect executed during the first jackpot game. had configured. Furthermore, by making it possible to report the performance result of the subjugation performance before the performance result of the subjugation performance (the performance result of the last attack performance) is displayed, the game state set after the end of the big win game can be quickly changed. It is configured so that a player who wants to perceive is likely to be interested not only in the performance result of the subjugation performance but also in the performance process of the subjugation performance (the performance result of each attack performance).
Specifically, by displaying a specific number (common specific number, unique specific number) as the production result of each attack production, the production result of the subjugation production is the production result for indicating that the time saving state is set ( It was configured to be able to notify in advance that the number of remaining enemies 0 display) will be displayed.
That is, in the twenty-ninth control example, when a specific number is displayed as the subjugation effect, and when the effect result (remaining enemy number 0 display) for indicating that the time saving state is set is displayed, It is configured to be able to notify that the same privilege is given at different notification timings. It should be noted that the content of the privilege given to the player when the specific number is displayed and the content given to the player when the effect result of the subjugation effect is displayed may be configured to be different. Well, for example, as a privilege given by displaying the production result of the subjugation production, set a privilege indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and given when a specific number is displayed As a privilege, it may be configured to provide a privilege indicating that the next big winning game will be executed immediately after the big winning game is finished (retained).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a plurality of benefits to the player by the subjugation production, so that the player can receive not only the production result of the subjugation production but also the production process. It can be made easier to pay attention.
Next, with reference to FIG. 790, the effect contents of the variable effect executed during the time saving state (rush) will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as game states. and can be set, and the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed when the time saving state is set than when the normal state is set. It consists of
The second special symbol lottery is stipulated to win a small win with a high probability (probability of 1/2), and the second variable is opened during a small win game executed when a small win is won. A winning device (V winning device) 650 is configured so that a game ball that has won a prize can pass through a specific area, and a jackpot (V jackpot) game is executed based on the game ball passing through the specific area. ing.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example, a short time (for example, 1 second) is changed as the second special symbol variation time for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. By configuring the time so as to be settable and shortening the period from the end of one big winning game to the execution of the next big winning game, the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time can be easily increased. Configure.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, the variable performance executed during the normal state, that is, the lottery result is shown as the variable performance for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. After variably displaying a plurality of symbols contained in a plurality of symbol columns (eg, left column, middle column, right column) including at least the third symbol for, some symbol columns (eg, left column, right column) ) are stop-displayed in a combination indicating a big win, and the stop display mode of the third symbols variably displayed in the remaining pattern rows (for example, the middle row) is created. It is constructed so as to execute a variable performance dedicated to the time-saving state without executing a ready-to-win performance to amuse the player while predicting it.
In other words, the ready-to-win production described above is a variable production that gradually increases the expectation of winning a big hit using the fluctuation period in which the special symbol fluctuation is executed, and the special symbol lottery is frequently executed. Even if a long fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds) is set to prevent the In addition, when the special symbol variation with a short variation time (for example, 1 second) is configured to be easily executed during the time saving state, even if the ready-to-win production is performed using the variation time of one special symbol variation Therefore, there is a problem that the time spent from creating the ready-to-win state to stopping and displaying the result of the special symbol lottery is shortened, and the player is provided with an effect that is difficult to understand.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, in the rush period in which the time saving state is set, the remaining number of second special symbol fluctuations (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations) that can be executed during the time saving state is counted down. The performance is mainly executed, and when the result of the second special symbol lottery is winning, the display mode of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed in place of the countdown displayed numbers. It consists of
By constructing in this way, in a time-saving state in which special symbol variations with short variation times are continuously executed, a player wins and wins a special symbol lottery while informing a player of the period during which the time-saving state continues in an easy-to-understand manner. can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 790(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed while the first second special symbol variation is being executed after the time saving state (three times of time saving) is set. As shown in FIG. 790(a), during the rush which is the production mode during the time saving state, the production that the character 801 is charging the attack is executed, and the front side shows the number of remaining special figures 2 fluctuations. A number icon 808 is displayed as a display mode. In the diagram shown in FIG. 790 (a), since the first second special symbol variation is being executed, the second special symbol variation is executed three times including the second special symbol variation being executed. A number icon 808 is displayed in a display mode of "3" indicating that the number is displayed.
In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm8 for displaying a duration display for indicating the period during which the time saving state (rush) continues is formed, and the duration of the time saving state (rush) period is displayed. A display mode of "00:02:44" is displayed as the display mode shown. This "00:02:44" indicates that two seconds have passed since the time saving state was set.
Specifically, the duration display displayed in the display area Dm8 is configured to be able to display a maximum period of 99 minutes and 59 seconds. The area on the right side of the area where the time in seconds (middle two-digit area) is displayed (the area where "44" is displayed in FIG. 790(a) in the two-digit area on the right) is It is formed as a pseudo elapsed time display area, and is configured to be able to display values from "00" at the minimum to "99" at the maximum. The value can be updated from the minimum value to the maximum value until one second elapses, and after reaching the maximum value, the minimum value is displayed again and the value is repeatedly updated. there is
In other words, the pseudo elapsed time display area is a display area where the value appears to be updated in units of 1/100 seconds. In addition, if the time saving state continues beyond the maximum value (99 minutes 59 seconds) of the duration display displayed in the display area Dm8, the time saving state will not be displayed for a longer duration and the time saving state will continue for a long time. It is configured to display a blessing display (for example, a display of "excellent!!") to show that it has been done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a special effect.

In addition, in the present 29th control example, the period during which the time saving state continues (including the period of the big winning game or the small winning game executed in the middle), regardless of the presence or absence of the game, the display of the duration period Since it is configured to be updated, for example, when the game is interrupted for a long time during the time saving state, the duration display easily reaches the maximum value. Therefore, as conditions for executing the above-mentioned blessing display, in addition to reaching the maximum duration display, the condition that is satisfied when the number of prize balls obtained during the rush period exceeds a predetermined number, The condition for executing the blessing display may be that the number of times of the jackpot game executed during the time saving state or the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number of times.
By constructing in this way, only the player who has played many games (special pattern lottery) during the rush period can display the blessing display, so that the satisfaction of the player to whom the blessing display is displayed can be enhanced. can be done. In this case, when the duration display reaches the maximum value while the conditions for executing the blessing display are not satisfied, the maximum duration display is continuously displayed. It is preferable that the congratulatory display is executed when the condition for executing the congratulatory display is satisfied while the period display is continuing.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate a player whose rush period continues for a long time to play a game to perform the blessing display.
In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "destroy the screen before the countdown reaches 0" are displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the content of the variable presentation to be executed during the rush period (time-saving state). there is By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that a privilege (win) is given when the character 801 attacks and destroys the screen.

Then, when the player wins in the second special symbol lottery executed during the rush period, the display screen shown in FIG. 790(b) is displayed. FIG. 790(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the winning special symbol variation during the rush period is stopped and displayed. When the winning second special symbol variation is executed, the character 801 charging the attack destroys the screen, destroying the screen and hiding the number icon 808 that had been displayed as a countdown. , instead, the third symbol ("555" in the figure) is displayed in the display area HR2 in a combination indicating winning.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 791 and 792, the contents of the effect during the small winning game executed when the special symbol lottery wins the small winning will be described. Figure 791 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the small winning game is started, Figure 791 (b) is a game within 4 seconds after the small winning game is started It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the ball is entered into the specific area (V area), FIG. 792 specifies the game ball within 4 seconds after the small hit game is started It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when four seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game with the ball entered into the area (V area).
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present twenty-ninth control example, in order to increase the number of executions of the jackpot game executed per unit time, the second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state (rush period) It shortens the change time. Furthermore, the period from when the small winning is won until the small winning game is executed, and the period from when the small winning game is executed until the game ball can enter the specific area (V area) is also short.
Here, conventionally, a pachinko machine 10 acquires the right to execute the big winning game by entering a game ball into a specific area (V area) during the small winning game, and executes the big winning game after finishing the small winning game. It has been known. In this conventional type pachinko machine 10, in order to enter a game ball into a specific area within a limited period during which a small winning game is executed, a small winning is made as a result of a special symbol lottery. The game contents to be executed during the small winning game using the period until the game is started or the period during which the game ball can be entered into the specific area after the small winning game is started ( For example, it is configured to execute a game guidance notification that notifies the player in advance of the display of "Aim for V by hitting right".

In the conventional type pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, the period from when the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the small winning game to the start of the small winning game, or after the small winning game is started, the game ball is played. can be entered into the specific area, by setting the length of the game guide notification described above to the extent that it can be repeatedly executed, the game to be executed during the small winning game for the player It is configured so that the player can grasp the contents.
In the conventional pachinko machine 10 in which the game guidance notification is repeatedly executed until the game ball can enter the specific area, the game ball cannot enter the specific area. To repeatedly execute the game guidance notification even in a state where it is possible, stop the game guidance notification based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and notify that the game ball has entered the specific area (for example, "V" get) is displayed so that the player can easily understand that a proper game has been played.
However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters the specific area during a small winning game, the game guide notification is stopped, and it is notified that the game ball has entered the specific area. Since it is configured to display a display mode for notification (for example, "V" get), the game guidance notification is repeated until the game ball can be entered into the specific area. It is necessary to provide a period for execution, and the period from when a small win is won until a state in which a game ball can be entered into a specific area is set is prolonged, and the number of big win games per unit time is increased. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the number of executions.
In addition, the period from the start of the small winning game to the state in which the game ball can be entered into the specific area is set short, and the game is started before the end of the initial game guide notification period. When it is possible to make a ball enter a specific area, it is possible to easily increase the number of jackpot game executions per unit time. There is a problem that the game guidance notification ends before the player grasps the content, and the player is puzzled over the game to be executed after the game ball enters the specific area.

On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth control example, the length of the period from the start of the small winning game to the state in which it is possible to enter the game ball into the specific area is the first game guidance When the game ball is configured to be shorter than the notification period (4 seconds), and the game ball enters the specific area before the first game guidance notification period (4 seconds) elapses, After the first game guide notification has passed, a display mode (for example, "V Get") for notifying that a game ball has entered a specific area is displayed. Then, when a game ball enters the specific area during the period in which the second and subsequent game guidance notifications are executed after the first game guidance notification has passed, the game guidance notification being executed is executed. is stopped, and a display mode (for example, "V get") for notifying that the game ball has entered the specific area is displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the jackpot game per unit time, and to guide the player to the contents of the game to be executed after the game ball enters the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to reliably secure the notification period (the initial game guidance notification period).
As shown in FIG. 791 (a), when a small winning game is executed, the game ball is entered toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 provided in the right area of the game board 13. As a guidance notification for guiding the player to execute the right-handed game, "Right-handed" is displayed in the display area Dm4, and the second variable An image showing the vicinity of the game area in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is arranged is displayed so that the player can easily grasp the location of the prize winning device 650 . Furthermore, as a game content during the small winning game, a first arrow 810 is displayed in the main display area Dm.
The first arrow 810 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode indicating the direction (right direction) in which the second variable winning device 650 is arranged. Aim" characters are attached. The first arrow 810 is displayed so as to move in the horizontal direction of the display surface, and the first arrow 810 is displayed so as to reciprocate in the horizontal direction twice during one game guide notification period of 4 seconds. be. Further, in the sub-display area Ds1, as a guide mode for guiding the game method during the small winning game, characters of "Right hit and let the V attacker win a prize! Win a V prize and get a big win!" are displayed.

Also, the first arrow 810 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice output device 226 outputs the voice "Aim right" twice in four seconds. In the twenty-ninth control example, as the game guidance notification for guiding the game method of the small winning game, the game guidance notification is executed in which the notification period of one time is 4 seconds. When one game guidance notification is completed, it is determined whether or not to continue the game guidance notification, and if it is determined that it is necessary to continue the game guidance notification, the same game guidance notification can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. It consists of
By configuring in this way, in the state where the small winning game is executed, the game ball is entered into the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 by the right-handed game, thereby executing the big winning game. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the
Furthermore, below the first arrow 810 displayed in the main display area Dm, the remaining time of the period (round game period) in which the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 650 in the small winning game A second time gauge ga2 for indicating is displayed. The display mode of the second time gauge ga2 is composed of a remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the round game period of the small winning game and an elapsed period display ga2b for indicating the elapsed period. The display mode of the second time gauge ga2 is variable so that the ratio of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the ratio of the remaining period display ga2a decreases every time the time elapses after the round game of the game is executed. It is configured to
In the 29th control example, when the small winning game is started, the round game is executed for a maximum of 20 seconds after the opening period of 2 seconds has passed, and then the ending period of 2 seconds is set. is doing. The opening period is a period during which the second variable prize winning device (V prize winning device) 650 is not opened, that is, a period during which game balls cannot enter the second variable prize winning device 650, and a special symbol lottery is won. This is a period for notifying the player who is playing the game that the second variable prize winning device 650 will be opened based on the winning of the small prize. When the opening period is set, the display mode for guiding the start of the small hit game (for example, "small hit game start") is displayed, and as the first game guidance notification, shown in FIG. 791 (a) A first arrow 810 is displayed for four seconds.

That is, in the twenty-ninth control example, the game guidance notification for guiding the game content during the small winning game is configured to be executed from the stage (opening period) before the round game is executed. . By configuring in this way, even if a player who understands the game during the small winning game by grasping the contents of the game guidance notification executes the right-handed game from the stage when he understands the game during the small winning game. , the game ball can be easily entered into the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round game is started.
During the round game of the small winning game, the open state in which the game ball can be won to the second variable prize winning device 650 and the open state in which it is difficult to win the game ball (not closed) and the opening/closing door 650f1 is variably operated. Specifically, open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), Closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (1.5 sec), open state (0.5 sec) 1 second), closed state (1.5 seconds), open state (0.2 seconds), closed state (4.8 seconds), open state (0.8 seconds), closed state (9 seconds) , the opening/closing door 650f1 is variably controlled.
Here, in the small winning game in the twenty-ninth control example, when the above-described 20-second variable control ends, or when a predetermined number (10) of game balls are sent to the second variable winning device 650 during the round game When a prize is won, the end condition of the round game is satisfied and the round game is ended. Then, as the variable control contents of the open/close door 650f1 executed during the round game, the first half period of the round game is configured so that the open state period occupies a higher proportion than the second half period. Then, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the small winning game, the number of winnings to the second variable winning device 650 is set to 10 at the timing of the fifth open state. there is
That is, after the small winning game is executed (after the opening period is set), when the right-handed game is continuously executed, the game period of the round game tends to be 2.1 seconds, and during the round game When the right hitting game is not executed continuously, the game period of the round game is configured to be 20 seconds at maximum. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to increase the number of executions of the big winning game per unit time can be motivated to play the right-handed game immediately after the small winning game is started.

In addition, as the round game progresses, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed becomes longer, so the round game is terminated by causing the second variable winning device 650 to win a predetermined number (10) of game balls. Even in this case, the length of the round game period can be greatly varied depending on the timing of winning the tenth game ball. Therefore, since the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time varies depending on the game situation during the small winning game, the player can be interested in the game situation during the small winning game.
In addition, a long closed state (closed state of 9 seconds) set in the latter half of the round game, that is, during the small hit game, when the right-handed game is normally executed, it is difficult to set the closed state When the state is set, for example, since it is possible that the right-handed game is not executed without noticing that the small winning game is being executed, the game ball is already entered into the specific area. If it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the specific area, and if it is determined that the game ball is not entered into the specific area, the player is instructed to emphasize and guide the right-handed game. It consists of By constructing in this way, the game ball is not entered into the specific area even though the small winning game is executed, and the small winning game ends without acquiring the right to execute the big winning game. can be suppressed.
In addition, during the round game of the small winning game, in the first half period, 0.1 seconds are repeatedly set as the period in which the opening and closing door 650f1 is open, and in the second half period, a longer period than the first half period (0.2 seconds, 0 .8 seconds) is set to be open. By configuring in this way, a game can be reliably played for a player who could not finish the small winning game in a short time, for example, a player who did not notice until the middle of the execution of the small winning game. The opportunity to land the ball into the second variable winning device 650 can remain.
In addition, in this 29th control example, the variable control during the round game is executed so that the ratio of the open state period is higher in the first half period of the round game than in the second half period. It is possible to finish the round game in a short time, but the content of the variable control during the round game is not limited to this, and the ratio of the open state period to the entire period of the round game is equal. It may be configured to be

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the open/close door 650f1 is variably controlled so that the time during which one open state continues is longer in the second half period of the round game than in the first half period. Although it is configured to suppress the end of the round game without allowing the game ball to enter the second variable prize winning device 650, the first half of the round game is not limited to this. , the opening/closing door 650f1 may be variably controlled so that the time during which one open state continues is longer than the second half period. By configuring in this way, game balls can be easily entered into the second variable winning device 650 during the first half of the round game, so the round game can be easily finished in a short time. On the other hand, a small winning game in which a short open state and a long closed state are repeated is executed for a player who could not finish the round game in the first half of the round game. The period can be lengthened unnecessarily. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who executes the small winning game to actively perform the right-handed game for winning the game ball to the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round game is started. can.
Also, the ending period of the small winning game is the period during which the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is not opened, that is, the game ball enters the second variable winning device 650, similarly to the opening period described above. A display mode based on the game contents executed during the round game of the small winning game is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the game cannot be performed.
Specifically, when the game ball is entered into a specific area during the round game of the small winning game and the right to execute the big winning game is acquired, information for indicating that the small winning game has ended and information for indicating that the big winning game will be executed after the small winning game is finished. On the other hand, when the game ball cannot enter the specific area during the round game of the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed after the small winning game ends, so that the small winning game ends. and information for indicating that the state will be shifted to the normal state after the end of the small winning game.
Here, in the example shown in FIG. 791 (a), when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, that is, the opening period of 2 seconds has ended, and 1 second has passed since the round game was executed. A first arrow 810 is displayed in the main display area Dm as the first game guidance notification, and the elapsed time is shown with respect to the round game period (20 seconds) indicated by the entire time gauge ga2. A state is displayed in which the period display ga2b indicates a range of 1 second and the remaining period display ga2a indicates a range of 19 seconds.

Then, when the game ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 passes through the specific area (V gate) during the period when the first game guide notification is executed (when V wins), that is, the round game If the game ball wins V within 2 seconds after the start, as shown in FIG. Guidance information (first arrow 810) is continuously displayed, and in the secondary display area Ds, for guiding the game method during the small winning game, ``Rit right and let the V attacker win! !” continues to be displayed.
By configuring in this way, even if the game ball wins V immediately after the round game of the small winning game is started, the game content executed after winning V (the big winning game is executed) It is possible to make the player easily understand the game content).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 791(b), when the game ball wins V during the initial game guidance notification period (4 seconds), the main display area Dm where the initial game guidance notification is executed A V-winning icon 811 is displayed in the empty area to indicate that a V-winning has already been made. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the game ball has won a V prize during the initial game guide notification period.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the V winning icon 811 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can determine whether or not the V winning has occurred even during the initial game guidance notification period. Although it is configured to be possible, it may be configured to notify that it is in a V winning state other than the third symbol display device 81, for example, light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine ) may be made to emit light to notify that the V prize has been won. By configuring in this way, the display screen during the first game guide notification period can be unified regardless of whether or not there is a V win, so the display control for the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is simplified. be able to.

Then, when the first game guidance notification period has passed in the state of V winning, as shown in FIG. "V Get" is displayed using the V winning icon 811 enlarged and displayed in the upper part. In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Lucky Jackpot!!" are displayed to indicate that a jackpot game will be executed based on the V win.
In other words, a player who wins a V prize with a game ball during the period of the first game guidance notification grasps the content of the game guidance notification until the first game guidance notification is completed, and wins a jackpot after making a V prize. The game is executed after the V prize is won while understanding that the game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
As described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, during the small winning game so that the small winning game does not end during the initial game guidance notification period (4 seconds) executed during the small winning game Although the contents of the opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 are defined, for example, in order to shorten the execution period of the small winning game, the first game The contents of the opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 during the small winning game are defined so that the small winning game can be finished before the guidance notification period (4 seconds) elapses. You can
In this case, for example, the opening period of the small winning game is 0.5 seconds, and the opening operation content of the opening and closing door 650f1 after the small winning game is started is 0.2 seconds opening and 0.3 seconds closing. By setting the content of the repeated opening operation, and by configuring so that the small winning game end condition is satisfied when three game balls enter the second variable winning device 650, the initial game guidance notification period (4 Seconds), three game balls enter the second variable winning device 650 and the small winning game ends. Then, when the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 enters the specific area (V gate) during the small winning game, the big winning game is started after the small winning game ends. When the technical idea of the twenty-ninth control example, in which the first game guide notification is reliably executed regardless of the progress of the game, is applied to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, execution of the jackpot game. There is a possibility that the first game guide notification will be executed during the period as well.

In such a case, the display timing of the various display modes may be delayed so that the various display modes to be executed during the jackpot game are displayed after the initial game guidance notification is completed, By shortening the period during which various display modes executed during the jackpot game are displayed, processing for gradually reducing the width of deviation may be executed, for example, at the time when the initial game guidance notification is completed. discriminating the game situation of the jackpot game, and based on the discriminated game situation, the difference between the timing of displaying a specific display mode in the normal jackpot game and the timing of displaying the specific display mode with a delay. Calculate Then, in order to eliminate the calculated difference, it is preferable to configure so that a shortening process for shortening the display period of various display modes can be executed. With this configuration, even when the initial game guidance notification is executed for a fixed period (4 seconds) regardless of the progress of the game, the game can be continued while all the various display modes to be executed later are displayed. It is possible to make it easier to display a display mode according to the progress.
Also, for example, the game status of the jackpot game at the time when the first game guidance notification is completed is determined, and among the various display modes that are normally displayed, a display mode with a low priority (for example, display during the opening period) By executing the process of canceling the display of the display mode), even if the initial game guidance notification is executed for a fixed period (4 seconds) regardless of the progress of the game, various displays to be executed later It may be configured to make it easier to display the display mode according to the progress of the game while displaying all the modes.
As described above, even if there is a discrepancy between the actual game situation and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the third symbol display device It is preferable that only some of the display modes displayed on the display surface of 81 are displayed in correspondence with the actual game situation.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the game ball wins (V wins) to the specific area during the first game guidance notification period (4 seconds), as shown in FIG. 792, the first time When the game guidance notification period has passed, it is determined whether or not there is a V prize, and when it is determined that the V prize has been won, the V performance is executed. When a timer is set (for example, set to 4 seconds) for a period until the V effect is executed when a V prize is won during the notification period (4 seconds), and the timer determines that 4 seconds have passed. may be configured to execute the V effect. In other words, the value set in the timer is changed according to the timing of the V winning, and when the V winning occurs during the first game guide notification period, a delay value (for example, 4 seconds) is set in the timer. However, when a V prize is won after the lapse of the first game guidance notification period, a V performance is executed after the V prize is won by setting an immediate effect value (for example, 0.1 second) in the timer. The length of the period from the execution of the small winning game to the V winning may be varied depending on the length of the period required.

By configuring in this way, even if the V prize is won at any timing, the processing contents executed for executing the V effect can be unified. Processing can be simplified.
Next, with reference to FIG. 793(a), the effect contents of the variation effect executed during the final variation in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 793(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the last second special symbol variation executed in the time saving state (during rush) is a deviation variation. In this twenty-ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 790 (a), a short variation time (1 second) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and during the variation period, A variable performance for indicating the remaining number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state and the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variation can be executed.
Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed continuously during the time saving state, and if the lottery results are all out, the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state A countdown display that changes the display mode of the number icon 808 to ``3'', ``2'', ``1'' at intervals of 1 second corresponding to the remaining number of times is executed, and the final fluctuation of the second special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is executed. It is configured so that On the other hand, before the final variation of the second special symbol variation in the time saving state is executed, in the case of winning, the number icon 808 displayed as a countdown is destroyed, and a display mode indicating winning is displayed. (See FIG. 790(b)).
In the final variation of the second special symbol variation during the time saving state, it is constructed so that a different variation time can be determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery. In part, it is configured such that a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is determined. When this variation pattern is determined, the effect in which the number icon 808 is counted down continues until the final variation, and the number icon 808 indicating "0" is destroyed to display a display mode indicating a small winning. Variation production is executed.

In addition, when the lottery result is partly winning a small prize or winning a big prize, a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds is determined. When this 20-second variation pattern was determined, the number icon 808 was countdown displayed, and after the number icon 808 indicating "0" was displayed, the number icon 808 was not destroyed during the countdown display. A display mode (for example, "END") indicating that is displayed until 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the final variation. After that, by terminating the time-saving state with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, a guidance performance (retraction guidance performance) that guides the player that it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state. is executed, and a display mode for showing that the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed is winning (small winning or big winning) is displayed in the middle of the guidance presentation. Since the presentation mode of the countdown display presentation using the number icons 808 is a presentation mode that is set in both the case of winning the big prize and the case of winning the small prize, it is a presentation mode for showing different types of lottery results. can be said to be the process of making the Further, in the case of executing an effect for informing the player of the lottery result of this time due to the establishment of a predetermined condition during the countdown display effect, it can be said that the specific effect is executed at a specific timing during the execution of the effect.
Finally, when the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is the final variation of the time saving state, is out, the variation pattern of 30 seconds is determined. When this 30-second variation pattern is determined, similarly to the 20-second variation pattern described above, a countdown display of the number icon 808 is executed, and after the number icon 808 indicating "0" is displayed, the countdown is performed. A display mode (for example, "END") indicating that the number icon 808 was not destroyed during display is displayed until 10 seconds have passed since the final change was started. After that, by terminating the time-saving state with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, a guidance performance (retraction guidance performance) that guides the player that it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state. is executed. Then, after the guidance effect is completed, a reserved ball acquisition effect (FINAL charge effect) for guiding the acquisition of the special figure 2 reserve is executed.
FIG. 793(a) is a display screen displayed when the FINAL charge effect is being executed, and is displayed when the upper limit number (1) of the special figure 2 hold is obtained during the FINAL charge effect. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. As shown in FIG. 793(a), when the FINAL charge effect is executed, a display region HR11 is formed near the center of the main display region Dm, and "FINAL CHARGE" is displayed to indicate that the FINAL charge effect is being executed. "Medium" is displayed. In the display area Dm10, in order to guide the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, the vicinity of the game board 13 where the second ball entrance 640 is arranged is simulated. An image is displayed. The image displayed in the display area Dm10 is intended to allow the player to visually grasp that the game ball is currently in a state where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 (normal pattern high probability state). , an image (luminous display in the figure) emphasizing that the electric accessory 640a is in the guided state is displayed.
Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "accumulate the charge within the time" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the game method during the FINAL charge effect. A third time gauge ga3 is displayed below the display area HR10 to indicate the remaining period of the effect period during which the FINAL charge effect is executed. The display mode of the third time gauge ga3 is composed of a remaining period display ga3a for indicating the remaining period and an elapsed period display ga3b for indicating the elapsed period. The display mode of the third time gauge ga3 is configured to change so that the proportion of the elapsed period display ga3b increases and the proportion of the remaining period display ga3a decreases with the passage of time.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 793(a) shows the point in time when 3 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed. A state is displayed in which the elapsed period display ga3b indicates a range of 3 seconds, and the remaining period display ga3a indicates a range of 4 seconds.
A status display mode for indicating the game status during the FINAL charge effect is displayed on the lower side of the main display area Dm. The diagram shown in FIG. 793 (a) is a state in which 3 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed, and the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit. Since it is in a state where the number has been obtained, the characters "charging complete" are displayed as the status display mode.
Here, the display contents of the status display mode displayed on the lower side of the main display area Dm will be described. In this situation display mode, when the FINAL charge effect is executed, if the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired to the upper limit, the characters "uncharged state" are displayed, and the player is informed that the current state is It is configured to be able to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure 2 reservation has not been acquired to the upper limit number.
The display of this "uncharged state" is always displayed until a predetermined period (1 second) elapses after the FINAL charge effect is executed. In other words, even if 0.5 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed, even if the special figure 2 hold is acquired to the upper limit, the "uncharged state" will be displayed continuously for 1 second. Configure. After the "uncharged state" is continuously displayed for one second, the characters "charging completed" indicating that the special figure 2 hold has been acquired up to the upper limit number are displayed. On the other hand, when 1 second has passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed, if the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired to the upper limit, the display of "uncharged state" until the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit is continued, and the characters "charge complete" are displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired to the upper limit.

In addition, since this FINAL charge effect is executed when 20 seconds or more have passed since the final variation of the second special symbol variation in the time saving state started, the special figure 2 suspension has already been acquired to the upper limit number. In some cases, the FINAL charge effect is executed while the character is present. Even in this case, the characters "uncharged" are displayed until one second elapses after the FINAL charge effect is executed, and then the characters "charged" are displayed.
In this way, even if the special figure 2 suspension is acquired to the maximum number, the special figure 2 suspension is acquired to the maximum number from the state where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired to the maximum number during the FINAL charge production It is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player has acquired the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit number by configuring the display mode to be able to display the display mode that pseudo-shows that the state has shifted to the can.
In addition, in this 29th control example, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation, it is configured to execute the FINAL charge effect during the final change of the time saving state, but not limited to this, the FINAL charge effect At the execution timing of , when the special figure 2 suspension has already been acquired up to the upper limit number, it may be configured not to execute the FINAL charge effect. By configuring in this way, the FINAL charge performance is executed in a state in which a new special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained, and the player is prevented from executing a right-handed game unnecessarily. can be done.
In addition, it may be configured to vary the effect mode during the FINAL charge effect according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 pending at the timing when the FINAL charge effect is executed, for example, the timing when the FINAL charge effect is executed. , if the special figure 2 reservation has not been acquired to the upper limit number, as described above, it is configured to execute the FINAL charge production in the production mode for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit number, and the FINAL At the timing when the charge effect is executed, if the special figure 2 suspension has been acquired up to the upper limit number, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the FINAL charge effect, so that it has been acquired. It may be configured to execute the FINAL charge effect in an effect mode that can suggest the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold of 1 to the player.

By configuring in this way, even if the FINAL charge effect is executed in a state where it is not possible to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation, the second executed based on the acquired special figure 2 reservation In order to quickly perceive the result of the 2 special symbol lottery, it is possible to motivate the player to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.
In addition, as in the 29th control example, even if it is configured to execute the FINAL charge effect in the effect mode for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number, the special figure 2 reservation is up to the upper limit number After winning, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (so-called, when over winning), FINAL charge in a production mode that can suggest to the player the look-ahead result of the acquired special figure 2 hold. You may comprise so that production may be performed. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while the FINAL charge effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, it is possible to execute the FINAL charge effect that overlaps the effect mode for acquiring the special figure 2 suspension up to the upper limit number and the effect mode that can suggest the prefetch result of the acquired special figure 2 suspension to the player. may be configured. In addition, in this 29th control example, by configuring not to display the display mode for showing the number of special figures 2 pending acquired during the time saving state, the special figure 2 pending to the upper limit number for the player It is configured to make it difficult to grasp whether or not it has reached, and to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right-handed game during the time-saving state, but not limited to this, the third game during the time-saving state. It may be configured to display a display mode (special figure 2 reserved pattern) for indicating the number of acquired special figures 2 reserved on the display surface of the symbol display device 81, in this case, currently acquired special figure 2 It is preferable to display a display mode in which the player can grasp the number of reservations and the upper limit number of the special figure 2 reservations that can be obtained. In addition, it may be configured to switch the display mode for showing the special figure 2 pending number during the final fluctuation in the time saving state and other than that. In addition, as shown in Figure 793 (b), in this 29th control example, after the end of the time saving state, when the normal state is set, the second special symbol variation based on the acquired special figure 2 suspension ends However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to end the pull-back effect while the special figure 2 hold is acquired, or the normal state is set. It may be configured so as not to execute the pull-back effect when it is done.
As described above, in this 29th control example, as the variation pattern of the final variation of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a small hit is configured to be able to set a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (1 second) and a variation pattern with a long variation time (20 seconds). In other words, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that has been won during the time saving state, the second special symbol variation that is the final variation of the time saving state rather than the second special symbol variation that does not become the final variation of the time saving state is configured to facilitate setting of a longer fluctuation time. By constructing in this way, when the small winning is won in the second special pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, the number of execution times of the big winning game per unit time is greatly varied according to the variation frequency of winning the small winning. be able to.
Therefore, in order to increase the number of executions of the big winning game per unit time, as well as aiming for the small winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, It is possible to play a game aiming at winning by winning.

In addition, in the present 29th control example, the second special symbol variation which is the final variation of the time saving state and the final variation of the time saving state are used as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that is executed during the time saving state. By making it easy to set a longer variation time than the second special symbol variation that does not occur, the previous big winning game is completed according to the number of second special symbol variations executed until the small winning is won. The period required until the next small winning game is started is designed to diverge greatly, but without being limited to this, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that is executed during the time saving state and wins the small winning It may be configured such that the same variation time (for example, 1 second) is set. Even in this case, the period from the end of the previous big win game to the start of the next small win game is lengthened as the number of second special symbol variations executed during the time saving state increases. Therefore, in order to increase the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time, the player can be made to play a game aiming at winning a small winning with as few variation times as possible.
Furthermore, in this 29th control example, in a part of the case where the second special symbol variation that is the final variation of the time saving state is the second special symbol variation that has won the small hit, it is the same as the other second special symbol variation is configured to select a variation pattern in which a short variation time (1 second) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variation effect (countdown display) using a variation pattern of a short variation time, targeting up to the final variation of the time saving state.
In addition, when a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, it takes from the end of the previous big hit game to the start of the next small hit game according to the type of the set fluctuation pattern. Since the period can be greatly different, not only the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, but also Variation patterns can also be of interest.
In addition, in the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving state, as the variation pattern set when the small hit is won, a variation pattern with a different variation time is configured to be selectable, so the second special symbol By grasping the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the small winning is won.

That is, when only the variation pattern of a short variation time (for example, 1 second) can be set for the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 final variation) that is the final variation of the time saving state, special figure 2 Until the player grasps that the special figure 2 final variation being executed has not won a small hit at the time when the variation time of the final variation has passed 1 second, and the special figure 2 final variation is stopped and displayed. However, as in the 29th control example, a variation pattern with a different variation time can be set as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 final variation in which the small hit is won. By doing so, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which it is possible to grasp whether or not a small prize has been won, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not a small prize has been won.
As described above, in this 29th control example, as the variation pattern set to the special figure 2 final variation, the variation pattern set when the winning is out is the longest variation time (30 seconds) variation It is configured so that a pattern is set. Then, using the remaining 10 seconds for the variation pattern (30 seconds variation) of the special figure 2 final variation that has been lost and won, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery for the player (special figure 2 reserved ) is executed (FINAL charge effect).
By configuring in this way, when the winning game is executed after the special figure 2 final variation is stopped and displayed (when the special figure 2 final variation is a small hit variation or a big hit variation), the hit When the time saving state is set again after the game is over, that is, when a period (time saving state) in which a new special figure 2 reservation can be acquired later is set, the FINAL charge effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the useless right-handed game for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.
In addition, without being limited to the configuration in the 29th control example, for example, when the special figure 2 final variation is a per variation, the variation time (30 seconds) of the same length as when it is an off variation, or off It may be configured such that a variation pattern with a longer variation time (for example, 40 seconds) can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a winning variation to the player who is prepared that the special figure 2 final variation is an off variation, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided. Also, in this case, the FINAL charge effect may be executed even during the winning variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game in a state in which the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, so that the player is suggested the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) for the acquired special figure 2 reservation. It is possible to make it easy to execute an effect for (holding consecutive effect) during a jackpot game.
Then, the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation in the time saving state, is stopped and displayed, and after the normal state is set, the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state is started. Then, the pull-back effect shown in FIG. 793(b) is executed. FIG. 793(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the pullback effect.
Since the pull-back effect shown in FIG. 793(b) is a variable effect executed during the normal state, the display area Dm4 in which the guidance mode for guiding the game method to the player is displayed is not displayed. Become. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the right-handed game that has been executed during the time-saving state during the pulling-back performance that is executed after the time-saving state ends.
In addition, the second special symbol lottery corresponding to this pull-back effect (the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state) has the same probability as the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (about 1/2 ), so that the winning game (small winning game, big winning game) is executed after the pull-back production, so that there is a high possibility that the player will play the right-handed game, so the normal state is set, the guidance information for switching the game method to the left-handed game is not executed.

By configuring in this way, the player who changes the game method according to the guidance information of the game method to be executed is prevented from losing the desire to play due to frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game. can do.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so as not to display the guidance information for guiding the game method to the player while the pull-back effect is being executed. However, without being limited to this, it is configured to display the guidance notification indicating "right hitting" in a display mode different from the display mode of "right hitting" which is the guidance notification executed during the time saving state. Alternatively, for example, instead of the guidance notification executed during the time saving state, the guidance notification may be executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to identify, and the right-handed game may be executed again after the pullback effect is completed. It may be configured so that the player can be notified that the probability is high.
Furthermore, as a guidance notification displayed while the pull-back effect is being executed, a display mode (for example, a display of "Please stop launching the game ball") is displayed to guide the game method for interrupting the shooting of the game ball. Further, a display mode (for example, display of ``right-handed game for successful pull-back, left-handed game for unsuccessful pull-back'') is displayed in which a game method corresponding to the performance result of the pull-back performance can be guided in advance. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the game method to be executed next can be guided in advance to the player based on the effect result of the pull-back effect, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.
In addition, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the pull-back effect, the display mode of the guidance notification executed during the pull-back effect may be changed. When the result of the 2 special symbol lottery is winning, it is preferable to emphasize the display mode of "right hitting" for guiding the right hitting game rather than the case of losing. By configuring in this way, based on the display mode of the guidance notification executed during the pull-back performance, the game situation in which the case where the right-handed game is continued is more advantageous than the case where it is not continued, that is, the pull-back performance It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that it is a game situation in which a winning game is executed after the end of .

When the pull-back effect is executed, a button Pu simulating the effect button 22a is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect (in the figure, prompting the player to press the button Pu) is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect button 22a. downward arrow) is executed. Below the button Pu, a time gauge ga1 is displayed for indicating the length of the operation effective period during which the player's pressing operation on the effect button 22a can be effectively determined. Note that the display mode of the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 793(b) and the variable contents of the display mode are the same as those of the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. is omitted.
In addition, in the diagram shown in FIG. 793(b), the button Pu is displayed in the normal display mode, but the display mode of the button Pu or the Alternatively, the presentation mode of the pull-back presentation, such as the display mode of the presentation (indicated by an arrow in the figure) for making the player press the presentation button 22a, may be varied. As a presentation mode that is more likely to be selected than when it is out, the display mode of the button Pu is a special display mode (for example, a display mode that imitates a button with a thickness or a display in which the color of the button Pu is red). mode), and the display mode of the displayed arrow is a special display mode (a display mode in which the size of the arrow is larger than usual, or a display mode in which the color of the arrow is red). It should be configured as possible.
By configuring in this way, the effect result of the pull-back effect (lottery result of the corresponding special pattern lottery) is predicted at a stage before the player presses the effect button 22a during the period when the pull-back effect is being executed. It becomes possible to do so, and the production effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, the display area Dm8 in which the duration display for indicating the duration of the time saving state (rush) is displayed is hidden. In this 29th control example, if there is a special figure 2 hold when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, that is, if the pullback effect is executed, the counter used for the duration display ( When the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m) is continuously updated without being cleared, and is won in the second special symbol lottery in which the pullback performance is executed, and the time saving state is restored. , the duration display is also configured to continue.

In this way, even if the value of the counter (the rush period measuring counter 223m) used for the duration display is continuously updated, the duration display is not executed while the pullback effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the time saving state (rush) has ended, so compared to the case where the continuous period display is continued even during the execution period of the withdrawal effect , it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that a game is being executed to enter the time saving state (rush) again from the state in which the time saving state (rush) has ended. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect content of the pullback effect.
Then, when the player presses the performance button 22a during the pullback performance, the performance result based on the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is displayed. Specifically, when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is winning, a display mode (for example, display of "V") for indicating winning is displayed immediately after pressing the production button 22a. After that, a display screen similar to the display screen (see FIG. 790(b)) when winning a small hit during the time saving state is displayed.
Next, the contents of the effect when the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the pullback effect is lost will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 794(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a failure effect corresponding to a case where the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a loss is executed as a pullback effect. 794(b) is a diagram showing an example of the game result display screen displayed after the failure effect is executed as the withdrawal effect.
When the player presses the effect button 22a in the pull-back effect in which the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. V”) is not displayed, and the standing character 801 is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Unfortunately! Rush is over!" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating that the rush period (time saving state) is over.

The display screen shown in FIG. 794(a) is displayed, and when the pull-back effect that is the failure effect ends, the game result display screen shown in FIG. 794(b) is displayed. On this game result display screen, as a result of the game executed during the time saving state (rush), an acquired point display k1 indicating a value corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the time saving state (rush), and a time saving A duration display k2 indicating the period during which the state (rush) continued, a rush continuation number display k3 indicating the number of times the time saving state (rush) was set (reset) through a jackpot game, and a time saving state period of 1 ( A jackpot number display k4 indicating the number of jackpot games executed during the rush period) is displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 794(b), "Total 660P" is displayed as the earned point display k1, "00:36:44" is displayed as the duration display k2, and "1 rush" is displayed as the rush duration display k3. ” is displayed, and “bonus 0 times” is displayed as the number of big wins display k4. That is, in the time-saving state (rush) executed this time, the time-saving jackpot game of six rounds executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is executed once, and the jackpot is executed. A game result in which no jackpot game was executed in the time saving state (rush) set after the end of the game is displayed, and it is displayed that 36 seconds have elapsed since the time saving state was set. ing.
Then, of the display mode indicating the period during which the time saving state (rush) continued indicated by the duration display k2, the value k2a in the two digits from the right, which corresponds to a unit smaller than the unit of seconds, is regardless of the actual elapsed period. Instead, it is configured to be determined based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is the target of the pull-back effect, and when the result of the lottery is a win, the value k2a is displayed in a "zorome" display mode. is displayed, and when the result of the lottery is a loss, the value k2a is displayed in the display mode of "random".
In the diagram shown in FIG. 794(b), "44" is displayed as the value k2a displayed as the duration display k2. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 794(b) is displayed when the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed is winning and the failure effect is set in the pullback effect. In this way, in a part of the case where the result of the second special symbol lottery targeted for the pull-back production is winning, the failure production is executed as the pull-back production, and after the game result display screen is displayed, the winning is made. Even after the failure performance is displayed in the pullback performance, the player can play the game while having expectations for winning by making the revival performance for informing the player that the player has won the game to be executable. can.

Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, although the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is the target of the pull-back performance, is a winning lottery, the pull-back performance is targeted as a condition for executing the above-described revival performance. A condition is established when a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery for determining the performance mode of the variable performance executed at the timing when the second special symbol variation is started, but not limited to this, It may be possible to set conditions to be established based on the timing at which the player presses the effect button 22a in the pull-back effect. In this case, for example, when the effect button 22a is pressed while the remaining period of the operation valid period set during the pullback effect is longer than the predetermined period, that is, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed When the effect button 22a is pressed with a large amount remaining, it is preferable that the resurrection effect is executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the success effect from continuing for a long time and the effect of the effect from deteriorating when the effect button 22a is pressed early during the pull-back effect.
In addition, since the game result display screen is a display mode for indicating to the player that the time saving state has ended, a display area Dm4 is formed to guide the left-handed game, which is an appropriate game method during the normal state. "Left-handed" for is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Thank you for your hard work" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding that the time-saving state (rush) has ended. With this configuration, when the display screen shown in FIG. 794(b) is displayed, the player can strongly feel that the advantageous game period has ended, so the resurrection effect is executed. The unexpectedness of the case can be strengthened.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 795 to 798, the contents of the jackpot game effects performed during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example, during the execution period of the jackpot game (jackpot game during the rush) executed based on the jackpot winning in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state (during the rush), the jackpot A jackpot game performance (promoting performance) for announcing the game contents (number of rounds) of the game and a jackpot for informing that the second special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game is won (small win) is won. A game effect (holding continuous effect) is executable, and the effect screen of the same mode is displayed regardless of whether the promotion effect or the holding continuous effect is executed. there is By configuring in this way, when the jackpot game production is executed, the production result of the jackpot game executed this time becomes the production result indicating the game contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, or after the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the effect result indicating that the possibility of executing the big win game again is high (holding consecutive state). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player interested in the performance contents of the jackpot game performance to be executed.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the holding continuous production is executed as the jackpot game production, as the jackpot game production of the big winning game based on the special figure reservation that is the production target of the executed holding continuous production. , is configured to facilitate execution of the holding consecutive effect again. In other words, as a condition for executing the holding consecutive production as a jackpot game production, the special figure reservation that has been acquired by the predetermined timing of the jackpot game (for example, the start timing of the final round game) is a special symbol lottery. FIG. 1 is a first condition that is satisfied when the suspension is established, and when the first condition is satisfied, execution of the suspension continuous performance is performed in the processing for determining whether or not to execute the suspension continuous performance as the jackpot game performance. A second condition that is established when the decision is made and a second condition that is established when both are established, the holding consecutive production is executed, and a state in which the holding consecutive production is being executed (a jackpot game notified by the holding consecutive production) (during a jackpot game in which the execution right was acquired during a small winning game notified by a pending continuous effect), the second condition is satisfied than when the pending continuous effect is not executed. It is designed to be easy. That is, when the first condition is established, the possibility of execution of the holding continuous effect being determined is increased.
By constructing in this way, the player who once executed the holding consecutive effect can play the game with a desire to continuously execute the holding consecutive effect. Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the holding consecutive effects are continuously executed, the information indicating the game content of the jackpot game is accumulated, and the display mode indicating the accumulated information can be displayed. It consists of Specifically, the display mode for displaying the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is configured to display cumulatively. By configuring in this way, when the holding continuous effect is executed continuously, the display mode in which the number of round games executed in a plurality of jackpot games is accumulated is displayed as the display mode of the number of round games. will be By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of displaying a display mode corresponding to a larger number of rounds as the display mode of the number of rounds played.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the information regarding the game content of the jackpot game accumulated when the holding consecutive effects are executed continuously satisfies a predetermined condition, the privilege effect can be executed. ing. Specifically, as the display mode of the number of round games, when the display mode corresponding to the number of rounds larger than the maximum number of round games that can be executed in one jackpot game (for example, 9 rounds) is displayed. , a congratulatory performance for congratulating the player for the consecutive execution of the holding consecutive performances can be executed. In this case, it can be said that the display mode of the accumulated information on the game content of the jackpot game is also a display mode in which the benefits are summarized.
By configuring in this way, not only the player who is playing the game but also the players around him can be notified that the continuous holding effect is being executed continuously. , the game can be played with a sense of superiority.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the number of round games is accumulated when the holding consecutive effects are continuously executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be played back, the number of consecutive executions of holding consecutive performances may be accumulated, and music to be played back may be switched according to the accumulated number of times, or a big win may be achieved. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the player can select a piece of music to be played back during the game from among a plurality of pieces of music, the player selects the piece according to the cumulative number of successive executions of the holding consecutive performance. It may be configured to increase the types of possible music. In addition, when the cumulative number of successive executions of the holding consecutive effects reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times), a specific congratulatory music is played without the player's selection. You can
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide music that cannot be reproduced unless the suspension continuous effect is continuously executed a predetermined number of times. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute the continuous performance. In addition, in the above-described example, the music played during the jackpot game is taken as an example, but without being limited to this, the above-described technical concept can be applied to still images and moving images displayed during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the technical concept described above may be applied to the effect mode itself of the holding consecutive effect.
FIG. 795(a) is a view showing a display screen displayed when the NEXT effect is executed as a jackpot game effect, and FIG. 795(b) shows the effect result of the NEXT effect added to the player. FIG. 796(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in the case of an effect result in which no privilege is given, and FIG. FIG. 796(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the effect result is that an additional privilege is given to indicate that the effect is increased, and FIG. 796(b) shows that the effect result of the NEXT effect is is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the effect result is that an additional privilege for indicating that is executed. In addition, among the display elements displayed in each figure (the display elements displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game), the same display elements as described in the above-described control examples Contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
When the second round game of the jackpot game (3-round jackpot game or 9-round jackpot game) executed during the rush period is executed, as shown in FIG. Characters of NEXT indicating that the NEXT effect is started are displayed in the central part, and the effect result is displayed in a display area Dm9 formed below the character and for displaying the effect result of the NEXT effect. is displayed (an arrow in the figure). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "What is the additional privilege?" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the NEXT effect has been executed.

In this 29th control example, among the jackpot games executed during the time saving state, the final round game in the 3-round jackpot game in which the minimum number of round games is executed (round game of the third round) is one round before A NEXT effect is started in a game (second round round game), and in a round game (third round round game) to be executed after the round game (second round round game) in which the NEXT effect is executed. It is constructed so that the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. That is, the number of rounds in which the NEXT effect is executed is the specific number of rounds (second round) regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing (the number of rounds) at which the NEXT effect is executed during the jackpot game.
Then, when the round game in which the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed (round game of the third round) is started, a display mode for indicating the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. Here, when the jackpot game being executed is a 3-round jackpot game and there is no special figure 2 reservation indicating winning in the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the time when the round game of the 3rd round is started 795(b), because neither the display condition for determining the effect result indicating the round promotion nor the display condition for determining the effect result indicating the holding group as the effect result of the NEXT effect is satisfied. As you can see, in the display area Dm9, the characters "continue rush" are displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect.
In the twenty-ninth control example, after the jackpot game executed during the rush period ends, the time saving state is always set (the rush continues). As shown in 795(b), when neither the display condition for determining the effect result indicating the promotion to the round nor the display condition for determining the effect result indicating the holding group is satisfied, that is, an additional privilege is given to the player. Even if (round promotion, pending group) is not given, the display mode (“continue rush”) for showing basic information (setting of time saving state) that is advantageous to the player as a result of the NEXT production configured to be displayed.
By configuring in this way, an additional privilege that the rush period continues is given to the player who does not understand that the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game executed during the rush period. I can make you think. Also, as shown in FIG. 795(b), when "continue rush" is displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect, the sub display area Ds displays the game method corresponding to the current effect result to the player. As a guidance mode for guidance, characters of "Rush back the hit" are displayed.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 795(b), "Final Round" is displayed in the display area Dm5. It consists of Although detailed illustration is omitted, when "continue rush" is displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect, when the third round game is started, the display area Dm5 shows the third round game. "Round 3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the has started. Then, after the display mode ("continue rush") for indicating the effect result is displayed in the display area Dm9 where the effect mode (arrow in the figure) is displayed until the effect result is displayed, the display area Dm5 is displayed. , is configured to be switched from "Round 3" to "Last Round".
With this configuration, the player can understand that the current jackpot game is a 3-round jackpot game by the display mode displayed in the display area Dm5 before the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the NEXT performance. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the round game being executed is the final round, compared to the case where "Round 3" is continuously displayed even after the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the abrupt end of the jackpot game.
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to display "last round" in the display area Dm5 from the start of the third round. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp that the jackpot game being executed is a three-round jackpot game before the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. A player can predict while limiting the options of the effect result that can be displayed as the effect result of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the effect result of the NEXT effect using display elements other than the NEXT effect.
In this case, for example, as an effect mode for displaying the effect result of the NEXT effect, a plurality of display modes that can be the effect result of the NEXT effect are displayed, and one of the display modes is displayed as the final effect. Aspects should be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the content of the privilege indicated by the plurality of display modes that can be the result of the effect displayed in the middle of the NEXT effect and the information indicating the content of the current jackpot game (three-round jackpot game) are displayed. By performing a composite analysis, it is possible for the player to quickly identify the display mode to be displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In addition, among the additional benefits shown as the effect result of the NEXT effect, any information related to the effect other than the contents of the jackpot game (the number of round games played) can be notified before the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. Also good.
On the other hand, as the effect result of the NEXT effect, when the effect result for indicating that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is other than 3 rounds (9 rounds) is displayed (when the promotion effect is executed), FIG. As shown in a), the display area Dm9 displays "Rush promotion" as the effect result for indicating that the content of the jackpot game is not a 3-round game, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Rush promotion". Characters of "Congratulations on the promotion to the 9th round jackpot" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the game content when the effect result is displayed.
In this case, since the third round game in which the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed is in the middle of the jackpot game (9-round jackpot game) being executed, even after the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. , "Round 3" is continuously displayed in the display area Dm5.
Also, as the production result of the NEXT production, the production result for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation for indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired (when the reservation continuous production is executed) , as shown in FIG. 796(b), the display area Dm9 displays "Bonus" as the effect result for indicating that the hold is connected, and the sub-display area Ds displays the "Bonus" effect result. The characters "Congratulations on the consecutive bonuses" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the game content when the game is played.

Here, the example shown in FIG. 796(b) shows the display screen displayed when the holding continuous effect is executed as the effect result of the NEXT effect executed during the 3-round jackpot game. Therefore, the round game in which the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed is the final round game in the jackpot game being executed. However, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the holding continuous effect is executed, the display mode (the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5) indicating the game content of the jackpot game being executed is handed over to the next jackpot game. It is configured to display in Therefore, "round 3" is displayed in the display area Dm5, and "final round" indicating the final round of the jackpot game being executed is not displayed.
By configuring in this way, when the holding consecutive production is executed, the jackpot game being executed and the jackpot game to be executed next (the winning game targeted for the holding consecutive production) are one jackpot game. You can make it easier to think that it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 797, the effect contents after execution of the holding consecutive effect will be described. FIG. 797(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a small winning game, which is the target of the holding consecutive production, when the holding consecutive production is executed during the jackpot game. FIG. 797(b) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the holding consecutive production is executed again (when the holding consecutive production is continuously executed) during the jackpot game targeted for the holding consecutive production. FIG. 798 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the special effect that is executed based on the continuous execution of the holding consecutive effect.
When the jackpot game in which the holding consecutive effect shown in FIG. 796(b) is executed ends, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 holding already acquired is executed. In this 29th control example, since it is configured to be able to store a maximum of one special figure 2 hold, when the hold continuous effect is executed, the first second special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is performed. Winning (small winning, jackpot winning) will be won. The period (special symbol fluctuation period) until the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed is configured to be a short time (1 second), and during the special symbol fluctuation period, the figure 796 ( The display screen shown in b) continues to be displayed.

Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery for the first time is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the winning of the small hit, and when the small hit game is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 797(a) is displayed. . As shown in Figure 797 (a), during the small winning game to be the target of the holding continuous production, the display screen displayed during the normal small winning game that is not the target of the holding continuous production (see Figure 791 (a)) It is configured so that a different display screen is displayed.
Specifically, the display mode "Round 4" for indicating the number of rounds obtained by adding 1 to the number of rounds displayed in the previous jackpot game is displayed in the display area Dm5. Also, normally, the arrow 810 with the characters "Aim right" displayed large in the center of the main display area Dm is not displayed, and instead, "Aim V" is displayed in the display area Dm11. characters are displayed. In the center of the main display area Dm, a character 801a for indicating that the jackpot game is continuing, that is, the display displayed during the previous jackpot game as shown in FIG. 796(b). The character 801a, which is the mode, is continuously displayed.
In this way, by continuing to display at least a part of the display modes displayed during the previous big win game, even when the big win game is executed a plurality of times, one To make it easy for a player to think that big winning games are continuously executed.
In addition, by changing the display mode ("Aim right", "Aim for V") indicating the content of the game during the small winning game, it is possible to tell that the present is not a small winning game but a part of the big winning game. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think. In addition, in this 29th control example, the display screen (see FIG. 791 (a)) that is displayed during the normal small winning game that is not the target of the holding continuous production, and the small winning game that is the target of the holding continuous production The displayed display screen (see FIG. 797 (a)) and the display mode showing the game content during the small winning game ("Aim right", "Aim V") are different. Without limitation, for example, the arrow 810 may be displayed in a smaller size during a small winning game to be the target of the holding continuous effect than during other small winning games.

By entering the game ball into the specific area (V gate) 650e3 during the small winning game shown in FIG. 797 (a), when the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends, FIG. As shown in b), in the display area Dm5, a display mode is displayed in which the number of rounds of the previous big winning game and the number of round games executed in the previous small winning game are accumulated. .
The display screen shown in FIG. 797(b) is a display screen showing the final round (3rd round) of the 3-round big winning game, in which the 3-round big winning game is executed after the end of the small winning game targeted for the holding continuous effect. is. Therefore, "Round 7" is displayed in the display area Dm5. Then, as the effect result of the NEXT effect, it is in a state where the holding continuous effect is being executed. When the holding consecutive effects are executed continuously, "Round 8" is displayed in the display area Dm9 as the effect result of the NEXT production, and a character corresponding to the number of consecutive holding continuous effects is displayed. 801a and 801b are displayed.
After that, as shown in FIG. 798, the display mode of the display area Dm5 displayed during the jackpot game is changed to the maximum number of rounds (9 rounds) in one jackpot game due to the successive execution of the holding consecutive effects. When the special display mode ("Round 10") indicating the number of rounds larger than "MAX over" is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the characters "How long will this jackpot last?" are displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the jackpot game is being continuously executed. In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, as a condition for displaying the special display mode, the accumulated value of the number of round games during the period in which the holding continuous effect is continuously executed is executed in one jackpot game. There is a condition that is established when the upper limit of the number of round games to be obtained is exceeded, but without being limited to this, the cumulative value of the number of round games during the period in which the continuous suspension continuous effect is being executed is a specific number ( For example, a multiple of 10), or when the number of consecutive executions of the holding consecutive effect exceeds a specific number (for example, 5 times), or a display showing the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period A condition may be provided that is established when the number of points displayed in the area Dm6 reaches a specific number (for example, 10000P).

In addition, as a special display mode, a plurality of display modes can be displayed step by step, and the condition for displaying each display mode is set to , the number of consecutive executions of the holding streak effect is a specific number, and the point display displayed in the display area Dm6 indicating the number of prize balls obtained during the rush period is stepped with respect to the specific number. , and a different display mode may be displayed step by step each time the display condition provided step by step is established.
By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to display more diverse special display modes.
Next, with reference to FIG. 799, the display screen displayed when setting the game environment in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example will be described. In the twenty-ninth control example, as an operation for changing the game environment of the pachinko machine 10, a volume level selection operation that allows selection of the volume level of the sound output from the audio output device 226 from four levels, A light amount level operation that can select the light amount level of the backlight of the LED for decorative light emission and the liquid crystal display provided in the third pattern display device 81 from four levels, and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and a mode type selection operation for changing the frequency of switching the type of presentation mode (stage type) to be displayed.
When the pachinko machine 10 is not being played (standby state), the display screen shown in FIG. 799(a) is displayed. FIG. 799(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the standby state. As shown in FIG. 799(a), during the standby state, the currently set stage type ("rabbit stage" in the drawing) is displayed in the display area Dm5, and the currently set mode type ( "Normal mode" in the figure) is displayed, and in the display area Dm1, a display mode ("316" in the figure) showing the result of the last executed special symbol lottery is displayed as a display mode indicating that the game is not currently in progress. ) is displayed.

A display area HR1 for volume adjustment, a display area HR2 for light amount adjustment, and a display area HR3 for mode type selection are formed below the main display area Dm. In the display area HR1, a display mode indicating a selectable range (LV1 to LV4 (MAX)) as the volume level and a display mode indicating the currently set volume level (displayed in black in the figure) are displayed. , and below it, as a display mode for showing the operation method for changing the volume level, it is indicated that the volume level can be changed by operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e of the selection buttons 600. For purposes of illustration, a right button icon Sw2 corresponding to the right button 600c and a left button icon Sw4 corresponding to the left button 600e are displayed.
In addition, in the display area HR2, there are a display mode showing a selectable range (LV1 to LV4 (MAX)) as the light intensity level and a display mode showing the currently set light intensity level (displayed in black in the drawing). The light amount level can be changed by operating the upper button 600b or the lower button 600d of the selection buttons 600 as a display mode for indicating the operation method for changing the light amount level below it. To indicate this, an upper button icon Sw5 corresponding to the upper button 600b and a lower button icon Sw3 corresponding to the lower button 600d are displayed.
In the display area HR3, a middle button corresponding to the decision button (middle button) 600a of the selection buttons 600 is displayed as a display mode for showing an operation method for displaying a selection screen (menu) for selecting the mode type. A button icon Sw1 is displayed.
When the player presses the right button 600c while the display screen shown in FIG. step down. Further, pressing the upper button 600b raises the light amount level by one step, and pressing the lower button 600d lowers the light amount level by one step. Then, the volume level and light amount level selected based on the operation of the selection button 600 by the player are stored in the game environment storage area 223u, which will be described later.

When the player presses the decision button (middle button) 600a while the display screen shown in FIG. 799(a) is being displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 799(b) is displayed. FIG. 799(b) is a diagram schematically showing an effect mode selection screen on which the effect mode can be selected. As shown in FIG. 799(b), when the production mode selection screen is displayed, pressing the up button 600b or the down button 600d causes the arrow icon ya1 indicating the mode type to be selected to move up and down. By moving and pressing the effect button 22a, a display mode showing an operation method that can determine the mode type indicated by the arrow icon ya1 is displayed in the display area Dm8.
In addition, in the main display area Dm, as a display mode for indicating that the effect mode selection screen is currently being displayed, the display area Dm7 displays "effect mode selection screen", selectable mode types, The contents of each mode type are displayed.
Specifically, in the twenty-ninth control example, "normal mode", "active mode", and "fixed mode" are selectable as mode types, and normal mode M1, Active mode M2 and fixed mode M3 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. A return icon M4 is displayed below the fixed mode M3 as a display mode selected when ending the presentation mode selection screen without changing the mode type. The content of each mode type will be described later.
As described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, the game environment can be selected while the player is not playing a game. A game can be started in this state.

In the twenty-ninth control example, the player cannot select the stage type (rabbit stage, hero stage). may be configured to be selectable.
Next, referring to FIG. 800(b), a game environment change operation that can be executed during special symbol variation will be described. FIG. 800(b) is a diagram showing the display screen when the fixed mode is set during the special symbol variation. In the twenty-ninth control example, even during execution of the special symbol variation, by pressing the enter button (middle button) 600a, the currently set stage type can be fixed. .
In other words, it is difficult for a player who is playing the pachinko machine 10 for the first time to select the fixed mode in order to prevent the stage type that suits his/her preference from being switched to another stage type during the standby state. rice field. On the other hand, in a state in which the game is executed and the outline of the effects to be executed in each stage type is grasped, it is possible to determine the stage type that suits one's taste among the stage types.
In this case, if an operation to set the fixed mode is executed after temporarily suspending the game and putting it in a standby state, there is a problem that the operation of the game is lowered. Therefore, in the twenty-ninth control example, the mode type can be switched to the fixed mode by the player executing a predetermined operation (depression of the determination button 600a) even during the special symbol fluctuation. Configure.

With this configuration, the fixed mode can be set immediately after the player finds the stage type that he/she likes during the game. In addition, since the fixed mode can be set with a simpler operation than the simple operation of pressing the enter button 600a, that is, the operation for setting the fixed mode in the standby state, Therefore, the user does not have to worry about setting the fixed mode.
When the fixed mode is set during the special symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 800(b), an icon resembling a key is displayed in the display area Dm5 as a display mode for indicating that the stage type is not changed. be. Accordingly, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the fixed mode has been set. Although detailed description is omitted, the fixed mode is canceled when the player presses the enter button 600a again while the fixed mode is set.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the twenty-ninth control example, the stage type is switched each time a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute) elapses during which the standby state continues. That is, it is configured such that the stage type is more easily switched when the standby state is set than when the special symbol variation is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate selection of the stage type when setting the fixed mode during the standby state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 800(a), the effect contents of the variable effect executed in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 800(a) is a diagram showing an effect screen when a stage transition effect is executed during special symbol variation. As shown in FIG. 800(a), in the twenty-ninth control example, when the transition condition of the stage type (the condition established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations and the result of the special symbol lottery) is met, the third symbol display device A transition suggesting effect is executed in which shutters st1 and st2 covering the display surface of 81 are displayed, after which the shutters st1 and st2 are hidden and a display mode corresponding to the type of stage after transition is displayed. ing. Furthermore, by using this transition suggestion production, it is configured to be able to execute a variable production other than the transition of the stage type, for example, although the transition suggestion production was executed, the stage type did not shift In this case, it is possible to perform a stage change performance that increases the possibility of winning the special symbol lottery that is being executed.

When this stage change effect is executed, the shutters st1 and st2 are displayed as shown in FIG. As a display mode, guide display areas st1a and st1b are formed, and the characters "Stage change!?" are displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Big chance if the stage does not change" are displayed as a guide mode for guiding the player to the contents of the stage change effect.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to use the shift suggestion effect for suggesting that the stage type shifts as part of the effect (stage change effect) that indicates the player's expectation of winning the jackpot (stage change effect). When the shutters st1 and st2 for changing the type are displayed, it is possible to provide a novel game feature in which the player expects that the stage type will not change.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the stage change effect including this transition suggesting effect may be executed during the fixed mode. For example, when the transition suggesting effect is executed during the fixed mode, the secondary display It is preferable to display a guidance mode of "a chance when the stage changes" in the area Ds. Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, even when the fixed mode is set, the stage type can be changed during the special symbol variation in which the jackpot is won. Therefore, when the stage change effect is executed during the fixed mode and the stage type shifts as a result of the effect, it is possible to notify the winning of the jackpot.
Also, the stage change production described above may be configured to be executable not only during the period of the special symbol variation but also during the jackpot game period. In this case, for example, the jackpot game is executed in a state where the fixed mode is set, and the stage change effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. By making the stage type set after the end of the jackpot game different from the stage type set before the jackpot game, it is preferable to notify the player of the holding series.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the stage types set before and after the jackpot game, that is, the stage types displayed across the execution period of the jackpot game effect are the same or different. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the holding series will be executed after the effect result of the stage change effect (the stage type after the shutters st1 and st2 are not displayed) is displayed.
<Regarding the game state transition in the 29th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 801, the game contents (transition contents of each game state) in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 801 is a game flow showing transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 801, in this 29th control example, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols). Probability state) and can be set, and it is configured so that the left-handed game in the normal state and the right-handed game in the time-saving state are advantageous to the player.
As the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a normal state is set in a state in which special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension are not acquired. In this normal state, a game for entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. In this normal state, the special symbol low probability state is set, so the first special symbol lottery that wins a jackpot with a probability of 208/65536 (about 1/300) and wins a small win with a probability of 1/65536 executed.
Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, and after the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, After the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set to "jackpot B" is finished, the normal state is set. The ratio of the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won is prescribed in advance, and when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the "jackpot A" has a probability of 60% and the "jackpot A" has a probability of 40%. A "jackpot B" is set with a probability.

Further, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win game in which "small win A" is set as a small win type is executed. This "small win A" specifies the game ball by executing a normal game (right-handed game) for winning the game ball to the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small win game. This is a small winning game in which a ball can be entered into an area (V winning), and when V winning is achieved, a big winning game in which "big winning C" is set is executed after the small winning game is finished.
When the jackpot games of "jackpot A" and "jackpot C" are completed, a time saving state is set. On the other hand, when the "jackpot B" jackpot game ends, or when the small win game ends without V winning during the small win game (in the case of non-V winning), the normal state returns after the jackpot game ends. set.
Next, the contents of the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 801, in this 29th control example, a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state are set during the time saving state. A game state is entered in which the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加This time-saving state is configured to end when a predetermined end condition is established, and specifically, as the time-saving end condition, the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed three times. (The third special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed) When the special symbol indicating that the small hit is stopped is displayed, the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation) and the special figure 2 variation There is provided a time saving end condition that is established when any of the conditions when the total number of times reaches 10 times (the 10th special figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed) is met.
During the time saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by the right hitting game, the normal pattern lottery is executed, and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game. Then, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a small win is won with a probability of 1/2, and a big win is won with a probability of 208/65536 (approximately 1/300). A lottery is carried out.

That is, when the time-saving state is set, a game aiming at winning a small win or a big win before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times is performed. In this 29th control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state, it is configured to win a big win or a small win at a higher probability than the first special symbol lottery. , When the small winning game is executed, by executing the game (right-handed game) normally during the small winning game, the execution right of the big winning game (the game ball to the specific area (V gate) 650e3 Entering ball) is configured so that it can be acquired.
'Small win B' and 'Small win C' can be set as the small win types set when the small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state. Then, regardless of which type of small winning is set, a small winning game capable of winning a V prize is executed, and a big winning game having different contents of the big winning game executed based on the V winning is executed. . In addition, even if any small hit type is set, the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game.
That is, in the present 29th control example, as long as a small hit that is elected with a probability of 1/2 is won in any of the three second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the time saving state, continuously during the time saving state game can be executed.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed, if the special figure 2 hold is acquired, the second special symbol lottery in the state where the normal state is set as the game state is executed (pull-back game). During this pullback game, the pullback effect shown in FIG. 793(b) is executed.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (pull-back game), the second special symbol lottery is executed with the same probability (1/2) as during the time saving state. Then, the small hit type is selected at the same selection ratio as the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state.
In addition, in this 29th control example, the selection ratio of the small hit type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small hit type in the time saving state are set to be the same, but not limited to this, one game state may be configured so that it is easier for the player to select a small win type that is more advantageous to the player than the other game state. It is preferable to make it easy to select the winning type (small winning C). By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantageous degree of ending the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-ninth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 802, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 802 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.
The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.
In the main control device 110, a lottery for special symbols, a lottery for normal symbols, display settings in the first symbol display device 37, display settings in the second symbol display device, and display settings in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 803, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 803 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device, the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform
In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the small hit type counter C5 used to select the small hit type of the special design, and the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the off in the special design , an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.
Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 815), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 830). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one reserved area (reserved number 1). 1 area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the ball mouth 64. , In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a small winning Each value of the type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.
Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Of the various values stored in the reserved first area, the special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed is shifted to the special symbol execution area, and based on the stored various values A special symbol variation (special symbol lottery) is started.
In addition, in this 29th control example, the type of the special design uses the configuration of two types (first special design, second special design), but without being limited to this, even if the type of special design is one type good. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. The various values stored in the area may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values may be started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.
Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the special symbol lottery execution condition (special symbol variation start condition) is satisfied, the second special The information stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is preferentially read out. In other words, the second special symbol lottery can be executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery. Also, the second special symbol lottery is constructed so that a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, when the execution condition for the special symbol lottery is established in a state where information is stored in both the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Even if there is, a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player can be preferentially executed.

In addition, as in the twenty-ninth control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for one of the special symbol types may Storage order storage capable of storing the order in which information is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b instead of being executed with priority over the lottery of the symbol type. Means may be provided so that the special symbol lottery can be executed based on the order (winning order) stored in the storage order storage means. Furthermore, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball The storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may each have a special symbol execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be a big win, a small win, and a loss. Specifically, in some cases where the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a loss, it is possible to win a small win that can give the player a smaller benefit (a different privilege from the one when the big win is won) than when the big win is won. can be configured to With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
In this 29th control example, the normal state is set when the special symbol for indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the special symbol lottery wins the big win or the small win wins. (Big hit type, small hit type) corresponding to the game (big hit game, small hit game) is configured to be executed in the normal state. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the game state is set according to the set jackpot type, whereas after the small hit game is over, the normal state continues (the game is played according to the small hit type) It does not have a function to set the state). In other words, in the big win (first privilege) and the small win (second privilege) given to the player based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, not only the content of the winning game executed but also the transition of the game state The content is also structured differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily provide variations in the types of benefits given to the player based on the result of the special symbol lottery.
In addition, as a method for changing the contents of the game state transition depending on whether the jackpot is won or the small win, a method other than the method used in the 29th control example may be used. The game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and further, based on the set jackpot type, a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends, whereas when the small win is won. Alternatively, the small winning game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small winning game is finished.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.
Furthermore, the RAM 203 of the twenty-ninth control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter (not shown) is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. .
Then, when the normal symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.
Next, referring to FIG. 803, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 65,535, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 65,535. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 815) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 830).
The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the special symbol small hit is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a small hit set by the table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol small hit.
Here, referring to FIG. 805, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 805(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery are specified, and are used for the special symbol lottery. It has a data table in which different random values (determined values) are defined according to the conditions.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 805(a), the first winning random number table 202a has a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. This special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a data table that is referred to for determining the lottery result when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a data table that is used when the second special symbol lottery is performed. It is a data table that is referenced to determine the lottery result when executed.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 will be described with reference to FIG. 805(b). FIG. 805(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 defines a judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is judged to be a big hit and a judgment value (value of the first random number counter C1) that is judged to be a small hit. ing.
Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines the jackpot determination value for determining that the jackpot winning is in the range of "0 to 207", and the value of the first random number counter C1 is "65535". It defines a small hit judgment value for winning a small hit. In other words, the update range of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 65535", and the possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 are 65536 in total, of which 208 are big winning determination values, and 208 are small winning values. Since the judgment value is defined as one, the probability that it will be judged as a big hit when the first special symbol lottery is executed is 208/65536 (about 1/300), and the probability that it will be judged as a small hit is , 1/65536.
Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning the big win is higher than the probability of winning the small win, so the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set. If so, the first special symbol lottery is executed, and a game aiming at winning a jackpot is performed.
Next, referring to FIG. 805(c), the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 will be described. FIG. 805(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, a determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit and a determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a small hit are defined. ing.

Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines the jackpot determination value for judging that the jackpot winning is in the range of "0 to 207", and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "32768 to 65535". It defines a small hit determination value for determining that a small hit is won for the range of. In other words, the update range of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 65535", and the possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 are 65536 in total, of which 208 are big winning determination values, and 208 are small winning values. Since the determination value is defined as 32768 pieces, the probability of being determined as a big hit when the second special symbol lottery is executed is 208/65536 (about 1/300), and the probability of being determined as a small hit is , 32768/65536 (about 1/2).
Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning a small win is higher than the probability of winning a big win, so a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set. If so, a second special symbol lottery is executed, and a game aiming at winning a small prize is played.
As described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, the type of privilege (big win, small win) that is likely to be given based on the special symbol lottery is made different according to the special symbol type. By configuring in this way, different benefits are likely to be given when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, it is configured to vary the special symbol type that facilitates execution of the special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, the normal state is set. When there is, the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured as follows. In addition, when the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied during the jackpot game executed when the small hit is won (by winning the game ball into the specific area (V area)), after the small hit game is completed A jackpot game can be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the process for executing the big winning game according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the jackpot game execution condition (first execution condition) is established based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery, and the jackpot game is executed. When the player is mainly made to play the game aiming at and the time-saving state is set, the small winning game is executed based on the winning of the small winning in the second special symbol lottery, and during the small winning game. A game ball is entered into a specific area (V area) at a time to establish a jackpot game execution condition (second execution condition) to make a player mainly play a game for the purpose of executing a jackpot game. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the execution conditions of the jackpot game that are likely to be established according to the set game state, so that the jackpot game can be executed based on the establishment of various execution conditions. , the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, the execution conditions for executing the jackpot game are more likely to be satisfied when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the 2 execution conditions are easily established), and the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed in the time saving state than in the normal state. Further, the time saving state is configured to be set after the jackpot game ends.
By constructing in this way, the player who is playing the game in the normal state first aims at winning the jackpot in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished in the first special symbol lottery, and then the time saving. In order to execute a game aiming to win a small prize in the second special symbol lottery in the state, that is, a game that is most advantageous to the player, the game can be played in stages, so that the player can It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that does not quickly get bored with games.
In addition, in this 29th control example, according to the set game state (normal state, time saving state), it is configured so that the big hit determination value does not change, but it is not limited to this, depending on the game state may be configured to vary the big hit determination value. In this case, for example, a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols is set and a game state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set can be set as the game state, and from the low probability state of special symbols. Also, it is preferable that the high-probability state of the special symbol is configured to increase the jackpot determination value. Also, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be set after the end of the jackpot game when a specific jackpot type is set.

By constructing in this way, even if the game state is one in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the probability of winning the jackpot can be varied according to the set probability state of the special symbols. , it is possible to set a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game by having the player play the game in a game state with various degrees of advantage.
In addition, in this 29th control example, depending on the set game state (normal state, time saving state), it is configured so that the small hit determination value does not change, but it is not limited to this, depending on the game state It may be configured to vary the small hit determination value accordingly. In this case, for example, a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols is set and a game state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set can be set as the game state, and from the low probability state of special symbols. Also, it is preferable to configure so that the high probability state of the special symbol increases the small hit determination value. Also, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be set after the end of the jackpot game when a specific jackpot type is set.
By constructing in this way, even if the game state is such that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the probability of winning a small hit can be varied according to the set probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game by having the player play the game in a game state with various degrees of advantage.
In addition, when a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability state can be set as special symbol probability states, when the special symbol high probability state is set, special Both the probability of winning a big win and the probability of winning a small win may be higher than when the low probability state of the pattern is set, or only one of them may be higher than the low probability state of the special pattern. can be configured to In this case, for example, a first high probability state, a second high probability state, and a third high probability state can be set as the high probability state of the special symbol, and when the first high probability state is set, The odds of winning a big win and the odds of winning a small win are set higher than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set, and when the second high probability state is set, the low probability state of the special pattern is set. is set, only the jackpot winning probability is set higher, and when the third high-probability state is set, the probability is lower than when the low-probability state of special symbols is set. It is preferable to configure so that only the winning probability is increased.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set more diverse states as the probability state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game. Moreover, as the probability state of the special symbol, it may be configured such that three or more kinds of the big winning probability and the small winning probability can be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Three or more types of special pattern states, such as a high-probability state, a normal-probability state, and a low-probability state, can be simply set, and a different big win probability or small win probability is set for each state. Also good.
In this 29th control example, as shown in FIGS. 805(b) and 805(c), the jackpot probability in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special symbol lottery are set to be the same. However, without being limited to this, the probability of winning a jackpot may be varied according to the type of special symbol lottery to be executed (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery).
Also, in this 29th control example, as shown in FIGS. 805(b) and 805(c), the small winning probability in the first special symbol lottery and the small winning probability in the second special symbol lottery must be different. However, without being limited to this, the small winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the small winning probability of the second special symbol lottery may be configured to be the same. Furthermore, in this 29th control example, although the winning probability is different, it is configured so that a small hit can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, but it is not limited to this. A special symbol lottery in which only one of the special symbol types can win a small hit may be configured to be executable.
The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, and is one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is incremented and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in this 29th control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and is updated in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, the obtained value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 806(a).
FIG. 806(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 806(a), this jackpot type selection table 202b includes information to be referred to when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Information to be referred to and are specified.
Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 59". As a type, "jackpot A" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished. "1" is set to the value of the winning counter 203s, and "3" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t.
Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 806(b), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions can be set simultaneously as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state. It is configured to end the time saving state when any one of the set time saving end conditions is satisfied. The time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t mentioned above are counters referred to when determining whether different time saving end conditions are satisfied, and are executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that the corresponding counter value is updated based on the pattern lottery. By configuring in this way, different time-saving end conditions are established according to the contents of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the time-saving state can be ended, so that the game is advantageous to the player. In the state in which the time saving state is set, intentionally inappropriate games (for example, not the right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery, but the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery Since the time saving state can be ended even when the game) is executed, it is possible to suppress the time saving state from continuing for an excessively long time.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 60% (60/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 806(b), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6, and the normal jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to "0", "0" is set to the value of the small hit counter 203s, and "0" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 40% (40/100).
That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the game state is set after the jackpot game ends. 'jackpot A' is more advantageous than 'jackpot B' because a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set after the completion of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "jackpot C" corresponding to the entire range of "0 to 99" as the jackpot type. It is This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9 rounds, a time saving jackpot game is executed in which a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the time saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. "10" is a big hit type in which "1" is set to the value of the small hit counter 203s and "3" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 100 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C" is 100% (30/100).
That is, when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, a specific big win type (jackpot C) is always set, and the "jackpot C" is a big win in the first special pattern lottery. The number of rounds of the jackpot game is configured to be larger than the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) set in the case. Also, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured so as to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, similarly to the "jackpot A".
Therefore, the "jackpot C" set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and then the "jackpot C" is set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Jackpot A" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Then, the "jackpot B" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the small winning is won with a probability of about 1/2, and during the small winning game executed based on the small winning. The conditions for executing the big winning game are easily established, and the game is mainly executed in which the big winning game is executed after the small winning game is finished. In addition, the time saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed is configured so that the time saving end condition is established based on the small hit winning of a predetermined number of times (once). That is, in order to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to win a big win with a probability of about 1/300 without winning a small win with a probability of about 1/2.
In this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game, and addition of winning a jackpot set to a lower probability than the winning probability of the jackpot rather than a jackpot that can be won with a high probability. In order to give value to the player, the "jackpot C" is configured to be the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give added value to the player who wins the jackpot during the time saving state, so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is more successful than the small win. It is possible to suppress the decline of the player's willingness to play, who has previously won the jackpot.
As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving jackpot game is always executed, so the time-saving jackpot game is executed at a rate of 60%. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes an advantageous special symbol lottery. In addition, in terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the second special symbol is the maximum number, the minimum number, and the average number that can be obtained. It is stipulated that the lottery will be more frequent.
In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, the same number of rounds of jackpot games are executed for all the jackpots, and the jackpot game periods are set to be the same. Configure. Then, using the same jackpot game period, a jackpot game effect (subjugation effect) for suggesting in advance a game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the game state set after the end of the big winning game based on the game contents of the big winning game to be executed, and the subjugation performance executed during the big winning game. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in.

In addition, without being limited to this, according to the selected jackpot type, a different number of round games may be configured to be executable. In this case, the production period of the subjugation production is configured to correspond to the jackpot game period in which a small number of round games are executed, and in the jackpot game in which a large number of round games are executed, the production period of the subjugation production elapses. After that, it is preferable to execute a jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of remaining rounds. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the game state set after the big winning game based on the game contents of the big winning game at least during the performance period of the subjugation performance. Also, in this case, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game in which a small number of round games are executed is more likely to set the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed than the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game in which a large number of round games are performed. It is preferable to define the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202b as follows.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the time saving state immediately after the production result (success production) indicating that the time saving state is set as the production result of the subjugation production is displayed. Easy game can be provided. Also, the jackpot game in which the game state advantageous to the player is set reduces the number of prize balls that the player can obtain during the jackpot game, as compared to the jackpot game in which the game state disadvantageous to the player is set. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player receives an excessive number of prize balls. In addition, a player who is set to a disadvantageous game state (normal state) after the end of the big win game is more likely to receive one big win than a player who is set to the advantageous game state (time saving state) after the end of the big win game. Since a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the game, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining due to a shift to a normal state only by obtaining a small number of prize balls despite the execution of the jackpot game. can be suppressed.
In addition, in this 29th control example, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is configured to be set for the same period (time saving number of times 3 times), but without being limited to this, time saving according to the jackpot type You may comprise so that the frequency|count (time saving end conditions) may be changed.
Returning to FIG. 803, the description continues. The small hit type counter C5 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this 29th control example), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, using the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5, it is configured to determine the small hit type when the small hit is won with reference to the small hit type selection table 202f. Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 807 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 807, this small hit type selection table 202f is information to be referred to when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Information to be referred to and are specified.
Specifically, as the small hit type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the small hit type counter C5 (update range "0 to 99") is for the entire range of "0 to 99", As a small hit type, "small hit A" is associated and defined. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which a small hit game that can easily enter a game ball into a specific area (V area) during a small hit game is executed, and a specific area ( It is a small hit type in which the big hit type "jackpot C" is set based on the entry of the game ball into the V area).
On the other hand, as the small hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the small hit type counter C5 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 79", as a small hit type "Small hit B" is defined in correspondence, and "small hit C" is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" as a small hit type. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which a small hit game that can easily enter a game ball into a specific area (V area) during a small hit game is executed, and a specific area ( It is a small hit type in which a big hit type “jackpot D” is set based on the entry of a game ball into the V area). In addition, "small hit C" is a small hit type in which a small hit game that can easily enter a game ball into a specific area (V area) during a small hit game is executed, and is a specific area It is a small hit type in which the big hit type "jackpot C" is set based on the entry of the game ball to (V area).

In other words, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random value associated with the "small hit A" ( Since the counter value) is 100, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a small win, the ratio of determining the "small win A" is 100% (100/100). On the other hand, when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random value associated with the "small hit B" ( Since the counter value) is 80, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, the ratio of determining the "small win B" is 80% (80/100). In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit C" is 20, the "small hit C" is determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit. The proportion is 20% (20/100).
Here, the big hit type that can be set based on the execution of each small hit game will be described. In the twenty-ninth control example, a specific area (V area) is provided in the game ball flow path through which the winning game ball can pass to the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game. When a game ball passes through a specific area (V area) during a small winning game, the execution condition (V condition) of the big winning game is established, and the big winning game can be executed after the small winning game is finished. there is The contents of the big win game executed when the V condition is established are determined in advance according to the small win type set when the small win is won.
That is, the small winning type set when the small winning is won defines the big winning type related to the big winning game executed based on the establishment of the V condition. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 807, for "small hit A" and "small hit C", the jackpot type of "jackpot C" is defined, and for "small hit B" , a jackpot type of “jackpot D” is defined.
Here, when the "jackpot C" is set, the same jackpot game as the jackpot game (jackpot game in which the "jackpot C" is set) executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, that is, , the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9 rounds, and a time-saving jackpot game is executed in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, "jackpot D" is a jackpot type that is not set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is three, and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot type in which a time-saving jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "10", the value of the small hit counter 203s is "1", and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is "3". ” is the jackpot type that is set.

That is, in the twenty-ninth control example, the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured so that four types of jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D) can be set, and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are special symbol lotteries. "Jack C" is a jackpot type that can be set only when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and when a small win is won in a special pattern lottery. is a big hit type that can be set only when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery.
In this way, a jackpot game can be executed for a player by making it possible to execute a jackpot game of a different jackpot type according to an execution condition established among a plurality of execution conditions for executing a jackpot game. The game can be played with motivation to establish various execution conditions in order to make it possible.
In addition, in this 29th control example, a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot and a part of the case where the V condition is established during the small win game are the same contents of the jackpot game (based on "jackpot C" However, it is not limited to this, and different contents of the jackpot game are executed depending on whether the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery or when the V condition is established during the jackpot game. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of execution conditions for executing a jackpot game, jackpot games with different contents can be executed according to the established execution conditions.
Returning to FIG. 803, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 830), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 808(a)) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 808(a). FIG. 808(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 808 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 that is used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time saving state. A time saving variation pattern table 202d2, a special time saving variation pattern table 202d3, and a time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 are defined. Although details will be described later, in this control example, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined according to the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202h. It consists of
With this configuration, even if the same game state is set, the special symbol can be obtained by referring to different types of variation pattern selection tables based on the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202h. It becomes possible to determine the variation pattern of variation.
Returning to FIG. 803, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 815), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .
Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is defined by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal pattern (second pattern) (per normal pattern). In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and one for when probability of winning is higher for normal symbols than when the probability is low, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

Details of the contents defined in this second winning random number table 202c will be described in detail. When the figure hit is defined and the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 149".
That is, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal game, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal game to be executed during the normal state and the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.
In addition, in this 29th control example, it is configured such that the variation time of different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state. A longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the normal pattern low probability state is set than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation according to the game state, winning in the normal symbol lottery and entering the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to easily set a game state (time saving state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.
Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, when winning the normal symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640. It is configured to execute a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in a difficult operation mode (short open). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 even if the normal symbol lottery wins in the game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, when the normal state is set, a right-handed game aiming at executing the second special symbol lottery is executed instead of a left-handed game aiming at executing the first special symbol lottery. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, in order to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the game state (normal state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the normal symbol is displayed. During the low probability state, it is made difficult to win in the normal pattern lottery compared to the high probability state of the normal pattern, and even if the normal pattern lottery wins (wins in the normal pattern), the second Although it is configured to operate the electric accessory 640a in an operation mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entrance 640, the game is not limited to this, for example A right-handed area (the left side of the variable display unit 80) through which the game ball fired by the left-handed game can pass through the through gate 67 so that the normal symbol lottery can be executed even while the left-handed game is being executed. provided in the game area), and in a part of the case where the winning is won by the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the operation mode that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 It may be configured to be executable per normal game (long normal per game) in which the electric accessary 640a is operated in (long open). By configuring in this way, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. The possibility of execution of the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player regardless of what game state is set, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
Also, in this case, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation (fluctuation time per long normal pattern) to indicate that the game per long normal pattern has been won per normal pattern is longer than the fluctuation time of other normal patterns. It is configured to be longer, and during the fluctuation time per long normal pattern, information for indicating to the player that the game per long normal pattern is executed, and switching the game method to the right-handed game. It is preferable to configure so as to execute a normal drawing performance including at least information for guiding. By configuring in this way, in the normal state, for the player who is executing the left-handed game, when the long normal figure per game is executed, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 can be made easier to enter the ball.
Further, the normal pattern winning probability is set to an extremely low probability (for example, 1/65536) during the normal pattern low probability state, and the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal pattern low probability state is successful. If you do, it may be configured so that the long normal figure per game is always executed. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the second special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times with one long normal pattern per game as a trigger.
Specifically, as the operation pattern of the game per long normal figure, the operation pattern is determined so that the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 multiple times at intervals of the first period, and the second It is preferable that the variation time of the 2 special symbol variation is configured to be a second period shorter than the first period. By configuring in this way, every time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a long normal game, it is possible to make it easier to execute a new second special symbol variation. It is possible to make it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery a plurality of times in the wake of the long normal pattern winning game of the time.

By configuring in this way, a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is provided to a player who is playing a game in a normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) based on the lottery result of a special symbol lottery. The second special symbol lottery is executed by executing the long general pattern winning game based on the first game aiming to execute the second special symbol lottery by setting and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. can be executed in parallel with the second game aiming at .
In addition, in this case, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed by one game per long normal pattern is greater than the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state. can be configured to In other words, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed in the period from the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set until the time saving end condition of the time saving state is satisfied (this 29th control example 3 times), there are many second special symbols when the normal symbol lottery executed during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is won and the long normal symbol game is executed. It may be configured such that a lottery can be executed.
By configuring in this way, as a transition opportunity to a state that facilitates execution of the second special symbol lottery, the case where the transition opportunity that is difficult to be established is established is more than the case where the transition opportunity that is easy to be established is established. Since it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery, an added value can be given to the player who establishes the transition opportunity that is difficult to establish.
The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 815). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 830).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.
Returning to FIG. 802, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 803 . Here, with reference to FIG. 804(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 804(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example.
As shown in FIG. 804(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example contains the first winning random number table 202a, the jackpot type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the variation pattern It has at least a selection table 202d, a time reduction grant table 202e, a small hit type selection table 202f, an open scenario table 202g, and a variation pattern scenario table 202h. In addition, the first per random number table 202a, the jackpot type selection table 202b, the second per random number table 202c, and the small per type selection table 202f were described above when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. 803, so the description thereof is omitted. do.
As shown in FIG. 808 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 that is used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a time saving state. A time saving variation pattern table 202d2, a special time saving variation pattern table 202d3, and a time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 are defined. Although details will be described later, in this control example, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined according to the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202h. It consists of

The normal variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery that is executed when the normal state is set as the gaming state. Here, with reference to FIG. 808(b), the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 808(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1.
As shown in FIG. 808(b), the normal variation pattern table 202d1 includes the special symbol type used for the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the acquired variation type counter CS1. Different variation patterns (variation times) are defined corresponding to the values of . In other words, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of different variation times according to the special symbol type and the lottery result.
Specifically, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". For the range of "150 to 179", "out of" with a variation time of 7 seconds as a variation pattern, and "150 to 179" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "140 to 149" For the range of ", "various types of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined as the fluctuation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198", "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. there is
In addition, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds is in the range of "30 to 189", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds as a variation pattern is "190 to 198". A "special reach" with a variation time of 140 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.

Furthermore, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". For the range, as a variation pattern, a "long and small win" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined.
In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the fluctuation of the fluctuation time is shorter when the lottery result is a loss than when the lottery result is other than a loss (big win or small win). The pattern is configured to be easily determined, and the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is higher when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined. is doing. By constructing in this way, the special symbol fluctuations in which the lottery results are not obtained continue for a long time for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is not performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to an extremely small number of executions.
In addition, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced, that is, when the special symbol variation is executed for a long time, the winning (big win, small win) is won. Since the sense of anticipation can be heightened, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.
Furthermore, among the variation patterns that can be determined as the first special symbol variation in the normal state, the variation pattern that has a variation time (90 seconds, 140 seconds) longer than the predetermined time (80 seconds) is excluded from the result of the special symbol lottery. Since it is configured to be able to determine when it is other than, when the special symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern with an excessively long variation time, before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the player It is possible to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, even if the special symbol variation is executed in an excessively long variation time, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

In addition, at least part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and at least part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the same variation time (40 seconds, 80 seconds) is set. It configures the pattern to be determinable. By configuring in this way, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation being executed is grasped before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the result.
Here, when the variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern command for indicating the determined variation pattern is set, and the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 830) output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 830) executed by Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, based on the information (lottery result, variation time, etc.) included in the received variation pattern command, it is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 A process of determining the effect mode of the variable effect is executed.
On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" , "off" with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery results are "big hit" and "small hit". , the variation pattern is defined as “hit” with a variation time of 20 seconds for the entire range of “0 to 198” for the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.
In the twenty-ninth control example, various mechanisms are arranged on the game board 13 to make it difficult (impossible) for a game ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 when the normal state is set. Even if the right-handed game is executed during the normal state and the normal pattern winning game is executed, the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed. In addition, the execution right (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special symbol lottery can be acquired at maximum one.

Therefore, as a game situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired during the time saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed, and the acquired special figure 2 The state of holding the reservation shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, and after the normal state is set, a game situation is entered in which the second special symbol lottery based on the held special figure 2 reservation is executed.
In other words, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed ends, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state as the last second special symbol lottery executed with the time-saving state as a trigger. will be Therefore, in this 29th control example, as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variation for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a constant length (20 seconds) regardless of the lottery result is configured to determine a variation pattern in which the variation time of is set. Then, it is configured to execute the pullback effect (see FIG. 793(b)) after the end of the time saving state using this variable time.
In this way, when a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state (normal state), the same lottery result is obtained regardless of the lottery result. By determining the variation pattern in which the length variation time is set, the performance period of the specific performance executed during the special symbol variation can be unified regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery.
Next, the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 809(a). FIG. 809(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. This time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that is mainly referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and is used during the time-saving state. It is a data table that is referred to more frequently than other referenced data tables (special working hours fluctuation pattern table 202d3, working hours final fluctuation pattern table 202d4).

Specifically, this time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 shows the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery of the 1st to 4th execution times after the time-saving state is set. It is referred to when determining, or when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery for which the number of executions after the time saving state is set is 1 or 2.
In this 29th control example, when the time saving state is set, the normal pattern winning game (long normal pattern) is operated in an operation mode that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 when winning in the normal pattern lottery. Winning game) is configured to be executed. Therefore, while the time-saving state is set, a game aiming at execution of the second special symbol lottery is performed by performing a right-handed game.
Here, for example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is executed, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 The time-saving state will be set in the state of acquiring the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery will be executed until the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired. there was a case. The pachinko machine 10 in the present twenty-ninth control example shortens the variation time set in the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state in order to increase the number of times the jackpot game is executed per unit time. However, when the first special symbol lottery is executed before the second special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, the second for showing the result of the executed first special symbol lottery. Until the 1 special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed, and as a result, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per period in which the time saving state is set is reduced. I had a problem.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example is configured to be able to store a maximum of one special figure 2 hold, and a short time ( 1 second) is set. In other words, during the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery using the special figure 2 suspension is frequently executed, so depending on the flow situation of the game ball fired by the right-handed game, the special figure 2 suspension is acquired. A non-existent situation can occur. In such a state, when the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the first special symbol lottery is executed, so even if the special figure 2 reservation is newly acquired, the first special symbol is changing at that time. In some cases, the second special symbol variation based on the newly acquired special figure 2 reservation cannot be immediately executed, and as a result, the execution of the second special symbol lottery per unit time in which the time saving state is set. There was a problem that the number of times decreased.

On the other hand, in this 29th control example, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state, it is configured to be able to determine a short fluctuation time, and the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, When the time saving state is set in a state where only the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the special figure 1 reservation is digested in a short time. By configuring in this way, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired while the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by the first special symbol variation executed based on the special figure 1 reservation. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the efficiency to be applied.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 809 (a), the special symbol type is "special figure 1 (first special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "off", the acquired variation type counter For the entire range of values of CS1 "0 to 198", "super short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is "big hit", the acquired fluctuation A "short and big win" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the type counter CS1, and when the lottery result is a "small win", the acquired fluctuation For the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the type counter CS1, a "long and small win" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.
On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is defined as "short out" with a fluctuation time of 1 second, and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range Then, as the variation pattern, a variation time of 1 second is defined as "super short and big win", and when the lottery result is "small win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the entire range of "0 to 198". On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "ultra-short hit" with a variation time of 1 second is defined.
As described above, the 1st to 4th first special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is determined by referring to the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, that is, the upper limit number that can be acquired as special figure 1 reservation (4 pieces) The number of fluctuations that corresponds to the number of times that can be executed during the time saving state based on the special figure 1 hold acquired during the normal state. , a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set in the state where the special figure 1 reservation is obtained, until the special figure 2 reservation is obtained (normal pattern lottery executed during the time saving state) Until the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the normal figure winning game based on the winning), it is possible to make it easy to digest all the acquired special figure 1 reservations.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is not winning (big win, small win), a fluctuation time is set to the extent that the player can grasp the lottery result, and the time-saving. A dedicated performance is executed for notifying the player of the winning in the first special symbol lottery executed during the state. By constructing in this way, the player can easily understand the details of the execution of the winning game before the execution of the second special symbol lottery despite the fact that the time saving state is set. In addition, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the same variation pattern (90 seconds) will be determined as when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state. It consists of Then, during the special symbol variation corresponding to the small winning, the same variation performance is executed regardless of the game state.
In addition, in the first and second second special symbol variations in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is determined regardless of the lottery result. During this period, the countdown effect (see FIG. 790(a)) is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, the number icon 808 (see FIG. 790 (a)) for indicating the number of remaining time reductions is variably displayed by the countdown effect, and the number icon 808 is hidden to indicate winning. Since the timing of stopping and displaying the three patterns can be easily matched, the third pattern indicating winning can be stopped and displayed as part of the countdown performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to Drawing 809 (b), the contents of fluctuation pattern table 202d3 for special time saving are explained. FIG. 809(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3. This special time-saving variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table referred to when determining the variation time of some first special symbol variations executed during the time-saving state. It is referred to when determining the variation time of the 10th first special symbol variation.
As shown in Figure 809 (b), in the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3, only the variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is defined as the special symbol type, and if the lottery result is "off" , The value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of “0 to 198”, the variation pattern is defined as “out” with a variation time of 20 seconds, and if the lottery result is a “jackpot”, the acquired For the entire range of ``0 to 198'' for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained, ``winning'' with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is ``small winning'', the acquired For the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the variation type counter CS1, "long and small hits" with a variation time of 90 seconds are defined as the variation pattern.

In this 29th control example, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving end condition that is established when the number of times of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state reaches three times, and a time saving end condition during the time saving state It has at least a time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the number of second special symbol variations executed in 1 reaches 10 times.
That is, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set, and in any second special symbol lottery By winning a win (small win, big win) with a probability of about 1/2, the time saving state is repeated through the big win game, and winning is won in the second special pattern lottery executed three times during the time saving state. If not, the time saving state ends, and if the second special pattern lottery (1 time) using the remaining special pattern 2 reservation does not win, it will move to the normal state (continuous chang state is terminated) has a playability.
Here, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches three times, the first Even when the special pattern lottery is executed three times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed despite the time saving state being set. There was a possibility that such a situation could occur. That is, in this 29th control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is configured to be able to acquire a maximum of 4 pieces, for example, 4 special figure 1 reservations, special figure 2 reservations When the time-saving state is set in a state in which 0 pieces are acquired, the first special symbol variation is executed prior to the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time saving end condition is satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time saving state ends without exhibiting the original game property, and the player's willingness to play. There was a problem that the
In addition, even in a state where four special 1 reserves are acquired when the time saving state is set, in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time saving state, for example, a special symbol lottery When the time-saving end condition is established when the number of executions reaches 7 times, when the time-saving state is set without acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, the second special symbol variation It becomes possible to execute the game more than three times, and there is a problem that a game that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided to the original game property.

Therefore, in this 29th control example, the time saving end condition established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol variation, and the time saving established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation End conditions are set, and the time saving state is ended when any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied. By configuring in this way, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times, and when the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is performed You can definitely end the time saving state.
Furthermore, in this 29th control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation corresponding to the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the time saving state is set until the 4th first special symbol variation is executed, a short time (0.5 seconds) variation time is It is configured to be set, and for the subsequent first special symbol variation, a variation time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even though the time saving state is set, when the player who does not understand the game method in the time saving state plays a left-handed game, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state If the fluctuation time of a short time (0.5 seconds) is set, new first special symbol variations are executed one after another, and the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are added up. There was a possibility that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times, may be established.
On the other hand, in this 29th control example, only when the first special symbol variation after the fifth time executed after the time saving state is set, that is, when the special figure 1 suspension is newly acquired during the time saving state For the first special symbol variation to be executed, a long variation time (20 seconds) is configured to lengthen the period required until one first special symbol variation is completed. , it is configured to allow the player to secure a period for grasping the game method during the time-saving state. That is, it is configured to suppress the establishment of the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation.
Furthermore, when the first special symbol variation is executed five times or more during the time saving state, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game (special figure 2 reserved) as a variation effect of the first special symbol variation ) is configured to be executed, including an effect mode that prompts the player to acquire By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the game method to be executed during the time-saving state can grasp the correct game method more easily.

It should be noted that the fifth and subsequent first special symbol variations during the time-saving state described above cannot be executed when performing a normal game, that is, a game in which a right-handed game is executed continuously from the jackpot game. Since it becomes the first special pattern variation, even if it is configured to set a long variation time (20 seconds), the game efficiency during the time saving state is reduced for the player who is playing a normal game. is not.
Next, with reference to FIG. 809(c), the contents of the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. FIG. 809(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4. This time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 is the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition, that is, the variation pattern that is set when the second special symbol variation is executed for the third time after the time saving state is set. It is a data table referred to when determining , and only the variation pattern for the second special symbol is defined as the special symbol type.
Specifically, in the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4, only the variation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol is defined as the special symbol type, and when the lottery result is "out", the acquired variation type counter For the entire range of CS1 value "0 to 198", "out" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and when the lottery result is "small win", the acquired variation type counter CS1 For the range of "0 to 99", the variation pattern is defined as "super short and small" with a variation time of 1 second, and for the range of "100 to 198", the variation pattern is a variation time of 20 A second "small hit" is defined. Then, when the lottery result is a "big win", a "big win" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". there is
That is, during the variation period of the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving, after displaying the final result of the countdown production executed during the time saving state (“0” display of the number icon 808), the time saving state ends. It is configured so that the charge effect (see FIG. 793 (a)) for prompting the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation is executed. Therefore, since the time saving state is set, the third (final) second special symbol variation is longer than the first or second second special symbol variation to ensure the effect period of the charge effect. It is configured so that the time is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation. Also, even in the case of winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the case of winning in the first or second second special symbol lottery, and the third second special symbol Since the time efficiency (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed per unit time in the time saving state) can be greatly different from the case of winning the lottery, the player can receive the second lottery during the time saving state. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not he/she wins in the special symbol lottery, but also how many times the second special symbol lottery wins in the time-saving state.
Further, as shown in FIG. 809(c), when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery which is the time saving final variation (third time), two types of variation time can be set. Here, when "ultra-short win" with a variation time of 1 second is set as the variation pattern, the screen is destroyed while the number icon 808 "1" is displayed as a result of the countdown effect. , Effect of stop-displaying the 3rd symbol indicating winning, that is, variation effect indicating small winning by using the same performance mode as when small winning is won in the first and second second special symbol lotteries. is configured to run.
Then, when a "small win" with a variation time of 20 seconds is set as the variation pattern, the countdown is terminated from the state where "1" of the number icon 808 is displayed as the result of the countdown presentation. is displayed, the display screen is destroyed when switching to the charging effect, and the third symbol indicating winning is stopped and displayed.
In this way, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery of the time saving final variation (third time), the variation pattern of stopping and displaying the third symbol indicating the small winning in a short time (1 second) and a long A second special symbol lottery for a time-saving final variation (third time) is provided to a player by configuring a variation pattern for stopping and displaying a third symbol indicating small winning in a time period (20 seconds). Since it is possible to notify that the small winning is won at various timings, the production effect of the countdown production can be enhanced. In addition, when a long (20 seconds) variation time is set, a countdown performance is executed in a performance mode to indicate that the second special symbol lottery for the final variation of time saving (third time) has been lost. Afterwards, the effect result indicating the winning of the small prize is displayed, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 809 (c), when the second special symbol lottery of the time saving final variation (third time) is out, that is, after the second special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed When the state is set, when the second special symbol lottery of the time saving final variation (third time) is a hit, that is, after the second special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the winning game is executed. It is configured to set a variation pattern with a longer variation time than when it is set, and it is configured to be able to execute a charge performance that prompts the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold using the difference variation time. . Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state while acquiring the special figure 2 hold, and if there is a high possibility that the time saving state will continue and when the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends), by eliminating the period in which the charging performance is executed even during the fluctuation period of the final time saving fluctuation (third time), It is possible to make it easier to increase the number of executions of the jackpot game to be executed.
Returning to FIG. 804(a), the description is continued. The time saving grant table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot). A game state (time saving end condition) is defined.
Here, with reference to FIG.806(b), the content of the time reduction provision table 202e is demonstrated. FIG.806(b) is the figure which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by the time reduction provision table 202e. As shown in FIG. 806(b), the time saving provision table 202e defines the value of each counter referred to when determining whether or not the time saving end condition is established corresponding to each jackpot type.
Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D", the value of the short-time counter 203h is set to "10", and the value of the small hit counter 203s is set to "1". "3" is defined in the value of the counter 203t in FIG. In the figure, "-"indicates)" is defined.

Although detailed description will be described later, the information is defined in the time saving grant table 202e, the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t are all updated during the time saving state. Then, when the value of the counter is updated to a value that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is determined that the time saving end condition is met, and processing for ending the time saving state is executed.
The time saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol variations executed during the time saving state, and is based on the execution of the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation during the time saving state. The counter value is updated (decremented). In other words, the time saving counter 203h determines whether the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the total number of special symbols obtained by adding the first special symbol variation frequency and the second special symbol variation frequency executed during the time saving state. is a counter used for
The small winning counter 203s is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the small winning game executed during the time saving state, and when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is a small winning. The counter value is updated (decremented). That is, the small hit counter 203s is a counter used to determine whether the time saving end condition is established based on the number of small hitting games executed during the time saving state.
The special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for measuring the number of times of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and the counter value is updated based on the fact that the second special symbol variation is performed during the time saving state. (subtracted). In other words, the special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter used to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol variation count executed during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 806(b), when the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, when setting the game state after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "10". "1" is set to the value of the hit counter 203s, and "3" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t. Therefore, the time saving state set based on the jackpot type "jackpot A" is "10 times" for the total number of special fluctuations, "1 time" for the number of winnings for the small hit, and "3 times" for the number of second special symbol fluctuations. When any one of the conditions is satisfied, it becomes a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied.
In the twenty-ninth control example, when the value of each counter described above is 1 or more, it is configured to determine that it is in the time saving state. Therefore, when the jackpot type "jackpot B" is set, the contents of the time saving grant table 202e are defined so that the values of each counter are not set, so that after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state None, and the normal state is set.
In addition, in this 29th control example, the value of each counter when the time saving state is set regardless of the set jackpot type is unified as the contents defined in the time saving grant table 202e. Without limitation, depending on the jackpot type, it may be configured to vary the value of each counter (especially the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t). By configuring in this way, it is possible to set time-saving end conditions with different contents according to the set jackpot type. In this case, for example, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t that defines the contents of the time saving end condition based on the second special symbol fluctuation frequency executed during the time saving state may be changed according to the jackpot type, 1 jackpot type is set, the number of second special symbol variations that can be executed during the time saving state can be increased more than when other jackpot types are set. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while expecting that the player will set an advantageous time-saving state after the jackpot game ends.
In addition, it may be configured to vary the values other than the special figure 2 counter 203t, for example, when a specific jackpot type is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "4" which is less than "10" ” may be set. In this case, the second special symbol variation that can be executed during the time saving state by setting the time saving state in a state where the special figure 1 reservation is obtained and the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained The number of times will decrease (before the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t satisfies the predetermined condition and the time saving end condition is established, the value of the time saving counter 203h satisfies the predetermined condition and the time saving end condition is established Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of second special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, you may comprise so that "90" more than "10" may be set as a value of the time saving counter 203h. In this case, even if the left-handed game is continuously executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition becomes difficult to be satisfied, so the first special symbol lottery is dared to be executed during the time-saving state, and a game aiming at winning a jackpot is played. It is possible to have a person do it. In this case, the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. For example, it is preferable to provide a privilege such as increasing the probability that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or increasing the number of round games executed during the jackpot game. By constructing in this way, the enjoyment of making the player select whether to play the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery or the right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state is provided. can do.

As shown in FIG. 806 (b), in this 29th control example, three types of time saving end conditions are set for any jackpot type in which the time saving state is set, Without being limited to this, according to the jackpot type, it may be configured so that the type of the time saving end condition to be set is different, for example, the second that can be executed during the time saving state than other jackpot types When a special jackpot type capable of providing a time-saving state advantageous to the player by extremely increasing the number of 2 special symbol variations is set, without setting a numerical value to the special figure 2 counter 203t, You may comprise so that "1000" may be set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. In addition, by providing a big winning type in which no numerical value is set for the small winning counter 203s, the time saving state is continued even if V is not won during the small winning game executed after winning the small winning in the time saving state. You can
Furthermore, in this 29th control example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation (the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation) and the number of winnings of the small hit are used as the elements that satisfy the time saving end condition. You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized using another element, without restricting to this. For example, a counter (special figure 2 reservation acquisition number counter) for measuring the acquisition number of the second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) that is easier to acquire during the time saving state is provided, and special figure 2 reservation acquisition When the value of the number counter satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, "4"), the time saving end condition may be established, or the special figure 2 during the second special symbol fluctuation period of the specific number of times You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized triggered by the number of reservations having reached the upper limit. In addition, a time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time after the time saving state is set is provided, and when the elapsed time measured by the time measuring means satisfies a predetermined condition, the time saving end condition is established. Alternatively, every time a special pattern lottery is executed, an end lottery for determining whether or not to establish the time saving end condition is executed, and when the end lottery is won, the time saving end condition is established. You can
In this way, by configuring it so that various time saving end conditions can be established, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time saving state continues, so that the game can be played during the time saving state. In order to prevent the time saving state from ending in a state where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired (a state in which a small special figure 2 suspension is acquired) for the player who is becomes the upper limit number, the game can be played enthusiastically, and the operation of the game can be easily improved.
In addition, in this 29th control example, every time the second special symbol variation is executed, the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t are subtracted by a fixed number ("1"). However, for example, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific loss result, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t may be configured not to be subtracted. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed is the same, according to the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained, the value of various counters referred to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied. may be configured to have different update contents.

By configuring in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is grasped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the time saving state ends.
In addition, the value of the time saving counter 203h may be decremented when an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of the various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the time saving counter 203h may be subtracted.
In addition, in this control example, the value of the time saving counter 203h is configured to be decremented by 1, but according to the type of the established end condition, a plurality of values of the time saving counter 203h are collectively (for example, 2) It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203h. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.
Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time saving state may be changed according to the establishment content (jackpot type) of the conditions for which the time saving state is set. As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The open scenario table 202g is a data table that defines operation modes for various mechanisms (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the electric accessory 640a) whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110. , is referred to when setting the release scenario corresponding to the operation control to be executed when the operation conditions for operating the various mechanisms described above are satisfied.
The variation pattern scenario table 202h defines a data table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed in correspondence with the game state and the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. is.
Here, with reference to FIG. 810, the contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202h will be described. FIG. 810 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202h. As shown in Figure 810, in the variation pattern scenario table 202h, the number of variations after the end of the jackpot game (number of special figure 1 variations, number of special figure 2 variations, total number of times), and various variation pattern tables for the game state is stipulated.
By configuring in this way, even during the time saving state in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, for example, regardless of the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation, to the special figure 2 fluctuation that will be the final fluctuation of the time saving state The variation pattern can be determined by referring to the variation pattern table for time saving final variation.

Without being limited to this, it may be configured such that different variation pattern tables can be determined under the same conditions. For example, the variation pattern scenario table to be determined may be determined by lottery.
Returning to FIG. 802, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 802, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.
The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .
When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 830) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process (see FIG. 829) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 828) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 804(b), the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a number of first special symbol reserved balls. Counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, small hit type storage area 203m, small hit It has a start flag 203n, a small hit medium flag 203o, a V passage big hit type storage area 203p, a V flag 203q, a V passage flag 203r, a small hit counter 203s, a special figure 2 counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.
The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. is winning information (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, small winning type counter C5, stop type selection counter C3 , each value of the variation type counter CS1) are stored.
More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C5 and CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest start winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing is newly stored.
After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each value (winning information) is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the start winning data is stored.
The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the counter value acquired for the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and The only difference is that the number of reserved areas is changed to one, and the rest of the configuration is the same, so detailed description will be omitted.
Like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.
More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning (normal drawing winning information) is stored while the order of starting winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is set in the execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 that is shifted (moved) to the execution area and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed.
In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the winning information data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Further, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area in which the winning information data is stored.
The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) ( It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. 1 is added up to (see S804 in FIG. 822). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S212 in FIG. 816).
The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command (S213 in FIG. 816, FIG. (see S805 of 822). The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls itself in the variable display. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.
In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.
The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e starts winning the second ball entrance 640 with respect to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved) is Since they are different in that they are stored, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command.
The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number (standby number of times) up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the game ball passes through the normal starting port (through gate) 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases. 1 is added up to (see S1204 in FIG. 825). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1105 in FIG. 824).

When the game ball passes through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of change display in the normal symbol is reserved) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1206 in FIG. 825). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S1203 in FIG. 825: No).
The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game (the setting state of the time reduction counter 203h, the small win counter 203s The game state corresponding to the setting situation, the setting situation of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the value of the time saving counter 203h, the small hitting counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t is 0, and the time saving counter 203h, the small hitting counter 203s, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t When a value greater than 0 is set, the time saving state is stored.
Furthermore, when the jackpot game is being executed, there is also a jackpot game state (jackpot state) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed. A small winning game state (small winning state) indicating that the small winning game is being executed in a state in which the small winning game is being executed, and a small winning state being executed. It is configured to also store type information (type information on the corresponding big hit type) indicating the small hit type corresponding to the small hit game. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.
A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command, and temporarily stores information about the current game state in the secondary game state storage area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 829), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is set.
As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.
The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. In this time-saving counter 203h, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 831) executed by the main controller 110, when it is determined that the ending period ends (S1913 in FIG. 831: Yes), execution A value corresponding to the jackpot type of the middle jackpot game is set (see S1915 in FIG. 831). Then, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed (see S220 in FIG. 816), or because the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set during the jackpot game, excessive benefits are given to the player during the jackpot game. can be suppressed.
In addition, in this 29th control example, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set, based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the time saving When the value of the counter 203h becomes 0, the high-probability state of the normal design ends, and the state shifts to the low-probability state of the normal design. Also, when the value of the small hit counter 203s described later becomes 0 (S703 of FIG. 821: Yes), when the value of the special figure 2 counter becomes 0 (S611 of FIG. 820: Yes), that is, other It is also cleared to 0 when the time saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, a value greater than 0 is held as the value of the time saving counter 203h when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied, and although the normal state is set, the time saving end condition can be suppressed.

In addition, in the 29th control example, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the normal state is set before the start of the big win game. Without being limited to this, for example, until the next big winning game is executed (until the big winning is won), the normal symbol high probability state may be continued. By configuring in this way, it is possible to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol even during the jackpot game, so that the game ball is entered into the first variable winning device 65 by the right-handed game, and the second winning game. A game of entering a game ball into the ball opening 640 can be executed in parallel.
In addition, in the 29th control example, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the normal state is set before the small win game is started. However, without being limited to this, for example, the high probability state of normal symbols may be continued until the small winning game ends. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continued even during the small winning game, so that the game ball is entered into the second variable winning device 650 by the right-handed game, and the second A game in which a game ball is entered into the ball entrance 640 can be executed in parallel. Therefore, even if the small winning game is started before acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation after the time saving state is set, it is possible to acquire the new special figure 2 reservation during the small winning game. becomes possible.
The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203j is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON when the end timing of the fluctuation display indicating the jackpot has come (see S219 in FIG. 816). Also, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1903 in FIG. 831).
The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203k is ON, it means that the big winning game is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the big winning game is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery and a jackpot game (special game state) is started (see S1904 in FIG. 831). Moreover, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (special game state) (see S1919 in FIG. 831). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 816), this during-big-hit flag 203k is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is during a big-hit (see S201 in FIG. 816).

The small hit type storage area 203m is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set for the won small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit is won (S409 in FIG. 818: Yes ), the acquired small hit type is temporarily stored. Then, in the small winning start setting process (see S223 in FIG. 819) executed to start the small winning game, the stored small winning type is read, and the opening scenario corresponding to the read small winning type is set. (see S501 in FIG. 819). Also, the big hit type corresponding to the read small hit type is stored in the V passage big hit type storage area 203p (see S502 in FIG. 819).
The small winning start flag 203n is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. The lottery result of the special symbol lottery is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol that is the small hit is stopped (see S504 in FIG. 819). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203n is ON, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (see S2003 in FIG. 832). This small winning start flag 203n is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs. configured to be
The small hit medium flag 203o is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The lottery result of the special symbol lottery is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol that is the small hit is stopped (see S504 in FIG. 819). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (see S2018 in FIG. 832). This small hit medium flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure etc. occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before power failure etc. configured to be
The V passing jackpot type storage area 203p is stored when a game ball that has won a prize in the second variable prize device (V prize device) 650 is detected by a specific region (V switch 650e3) while a small prize game is being executed. This is a storage area in which data for determining the set jackpot type is stored. The V passage big win type storage area 203p stores the data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the judged small win type when the special symbol lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a small win winning and the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. (see S502 in FIG. 819). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 and the gaming ball is detected by the specific area (V switch 650e3), it is stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203p. The V flag 203q corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203p is cleared. This V pass jackpot type storage area 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

The V flag 203q is set when the game ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the second variable prize winning device (V prize winning device) 650 during the small winning game and the game ball is detected by the specific area (V switch 650e3). In addition, a flag corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed is set to ON. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether this V flag 203q is on (see S2013 in FIG. 832), and when it is determined that the V flag 203q is on (S2013 in FIG. 832: Yes), it is turned on The jackpot type to be executed is determined from the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (see S2015 in FIG. 9691). This V flag 203q is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as
The V passage flag 203r is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203q is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203q is set to ON. be done. In the twenty-ninth control example, most of the game balls that have won the second variable winning device (V winning device 650) during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. It is set to ON in the V passing process (see S109 in FIG. 827) corresponding to the game ball that first wins (see S1407 in FIG. 827).
Then, in the V passage processing (see S109 in FIG. 827), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203r is set to ON (S1401 in FIG. 827). : Yes), the processing of S1402 to S1409 of the V passing processing (see S109 in FIG. 827) is skipped. As a result, even when the prescribed area (V switch 650e3) detects a plurality of game balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected game ball is executed. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small winning game, and the V passing command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 is complicated. can be prevented from becoming
The small win counter 203s is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win is won in a special pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, and determines whether or not a time saving end condition is established based on the number of times the small win wins. referred to when In the small hit counter 203s, in the big hit control process (S1804 in FIG. 831), when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending period (the end timing of the jackpot game) (S1913 in FIG. 831: Yes), time saving grant A value defined in the table 202e is set (S1915 in FIG. 831).

And, in the small winning time saving update process (see S615 in Figure 821) executed in the time saving update process (see S224 in Figure 820) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in Figure 816), it was determined that the small hit was won. If so (S701 in FIG. 821: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction is 0 (S703 in FIG. 821: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the game state (S704 in FIG. 821 ). In addition, the 29th control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is satisfied), the value of the small winning counter 203s is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 820). Thus, among the plurality of time saving end conditions, even if the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition referring to the value of the small hit counter 203 s is met, the value of the small hit counter 203 s is set to 0 (reset ), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small winning counter 203s is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is ended.
The special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, and whether or not the time saving end condition established based on the number of second special symbol fluctuations is established. Referred when making a decision. In this special figure 2 counter 203t, in the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 831), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period (end timing of the jackpot game) (S1913 in FIG. 831: Yes), time saving A value defined in the grant table 202e is set (S1915 in FIG. 831).
Then, in the time saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 820) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 816), when it is determined that the type of the special symbol variation executed this time is the second special symbol variation (Figure S608 of 820: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after the subtraction is 0 (S611 of FIG. 820: Yes), since the time saving end condition is established, the normal state is set as the game state (of FIG. 820 S612). In addition, the 29th control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is established), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 820). Thus, among the plurality of time saving end conditions, even if the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition referring to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is established, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 Since it is (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is terminated.
The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 802, the description continues. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.
The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .
The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.
An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, the selection button 600, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .
Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.).
In addition, the frame button 22 connected to the sound lamp control device 113 has a production button 22a. The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the production button 22a, When operated, the display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the effect button 22a is operated by the player, a character object driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the character object for effect (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation contents of the effect button 22a is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the production button 22a is set. can be configured to
Further, the selection button 600 connected to the audio lamp control device 113 has a middle button 600a, an up button 600b, a right button 600c, a down button 600d, and a left button 600e, as shown in FIG. The lamp control device 113 monitors input from each button included in the selection button 600, executes processing for changing the game environment according to the content of the input, and displays a display for changing the game environment. The display control device 114 is instructed on the content and the display content for showing the game environment after the change.
Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 811(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a subjugation number selection table 222b, a subjugation performance mode selection table 222c, an additional decrease value selection table 222d, At least an effect stage data table 222e and a game environment data table 222f are stored.
In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.
The subjugation number selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining the total number of enemies in the initial stage of the subjugation performance executed during the jackpot game, and is a data table that is used to determine the total number of enemies in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is referenced in the opening period of the jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed when winning (see S3803 in FIG. 841).
Here, the details defined in the subjugation number selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 812(a). FIG. 812(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the subjugation number selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 812(a), the kill count selection table 222b has different kill counts corresponding to the jackpot type set for the jackpot game to be executed and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1. stipulated.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A, jackpot C" corresponding to the short-time jackpot, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 44", and the number of kills is "1000". , the number of defeats "777" is defined for the range of "45-89", and the number of defeats "500" is defined for the range of "90-99". In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B" corresponding to a normal jackpot, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 79", the number of kills "1000" is "80 to The subjugation number "500" is defined for the range of "99".
In other words, when the number of subjugations (total number of enemies) displayed when the subjugation production is started is "1000", the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, rather than when it is "500". The ratio of each subjugation number is stipulated so that the probability is high. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends when the subjugation effect is started.
In addition, only when the jackpot type corresponding to the time-saving jackpot is set, the number of defeats "777" can be determined. When the performance mode of subjugation is determined, the player can be informed that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game without waiting for the end of the subjugation performance. In this way, in the case of executing an effect (subjugation effect) for notifying the player of the game state set after the end of the big win game before the end of the big win game, the player is given time saving after the end of the big win game. The timing of notifying that a state (game state advantageous to the player) is set arrives at various timings, so that the player can always watch the subjugation performance executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.
The subjugation performance mode selection table 222c is a data table referred to when determining the performance scenario in the subjugation performance, and is a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is referenced in the opening period of (first time jackpot game) (see S3803 in FIG. 841).

Here, the contents defined in the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 812(b). FIG. 812(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 812(b), the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c is associated with the jackpot type, the subjugation number determined by referring to the subjugation number selection table 222b, and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2. , different scenario types are defined. Each scenario type includes, as a subjugation production scenario, the upper limit of the number of enemies (number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in each of the five attack productions executed during the subjugation production, and the production of the subjugation production. and the minimum number of remaining enemies that can be displayed as a result.
Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A, jackpot C" corresponding to the time-saving jackpot, the number of subjugations is "1000", and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 49" Then, "scenario type 1" as the subjugation production scenario, for the range of "50 to 79", "scenario type 2" as the subjugation production scenario, for the range of "80 to 99", as the subjugation production scenario "Scenario type 3" is defined. Further, when the defeat number is "777", "scenario type 4" is defined as the defeat effect scenario for the entire range of "0 to 99" for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2. Then, the subjugation number is "500", the acquired value of the second production counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the subjugation production scenario "scenario type 5" is applied to the range of "50 to 79". "Scenario type 6" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario, and "Scenario type 7" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario for the range of "80 to 99".
On the other hand, the jackpot type is "jackpot B" corresponding to the normal jackpot, the number of defeats is "1000", and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 59". "Scenario type 8" is "scenario type 9" as subjugation production scenario for the range of "60 to 89", and "scenario type 10" is subjugation production scenario for the range of "90 to 99". stipulated. The subjugation number is "500", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 59", and the subjugation effect scenario "scenario type 11" is in the range of "60 to 79". "Scenario type 12" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario, and "Scenario type 13" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario for the range of "80 to 99".
Here, as described above with reference to FIGS. 786 to 789, when the subjugation effect is executed, the attack effect is executed five times. is configured to execute an effect that reduces the Further, in each attack effect, if the player does not press the effect button 22a, an additional attack effect for reducing the number of enemies is performed during an interval period set after the end of the attack effect (after the end of the round game). is configured to be executable.

In the twenty-ninth control example, the upper limit of the number of enemies (the number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in each attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation is configured to be determined in advance based on the subjugation presentation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of a subjugation effect in which the degree of decrease in the number of enemies is biased, thereby reducing the effect of the effect.
In addition, instead of scenario management of the number of remaining enemies displayed after each attack production is finished, only the minimum number of remaining enemies that can be displayed after the end of each attack production is scenario managed, and the number of remaining enemies actually displayed is calculated. Since the numbers are configured to have a range, the subjugation performance can be executed with more performance patterns than the predetermined number of scenario types, so the performance effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, the effect mode for reducing the number of enemies is configured and executed to vary depending on whether or not the player presses the effect button 22a during the attack effect. The number of enemies displayed as the number of remaining enemies after the attack is configured to differ depending on the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to press the effect button 22a during the attack effect.
The additional decrease value selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when an additional attack effect is executed during an interval period without the player pressing the effect button 22a in each attack effect in the subjugation effect, It is referred to during the first interval effect processing (see S3809 in FIG. 844). By referring to this additional reduction value selection table 222d, the number of enemies to be reduced in the additional attack effect is determined.

Here, the contents defined in the additional decrease value selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 813 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional decrement value selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 813, the additional decrease value selection table 222d contains the scenario type determined with reference to the subjugation mode selection table 222c, the current number of remaining enemies (the value of the remaining subjugation number counter 223j), and the subjugation The number of differences from the number of enemies stipulated in the production scenario, the presence or absence of a specific number (unique specific number, common specific number) in the range of the difference, and the acquired value of the first production counter 223f1 are associated with each other. , The number of enemies (additional reduction value) to be reduced in the additional attack production is specified.
Specifically, when the scenario type is "scenario type 1, 8", the number of differences is "401 or more", and the specific number is "present", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 is "0 to 99”, the additional decrement value is defined as “decrease to a specific number”, and when the specific number is “none”, the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 is “0 to 99”. For the entire range of , "decrease to determined value" is specified as an additional reduction value. Further, when the number of differences is "101 to 400" and the specific number is "yes", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the additional decrease value is "specific number "Current status -50" is defined as an additional reduction value for the range of "50 to 99". On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "current state -50" as the additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 49", and "50 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.
Then, if the number of differences is "100 or less" and the specific number is "present", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the additional decrease value is "up to the specific number "Decrease" is specified, and "Decrease to a determined value" is specified as an additional decrease value for the range of "30 to 99". On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "determined value + 10" as the additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 29", and "30 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.
When the scenario type is "scenario type 2, 3, 9, 10", the number of differences is "51 or more", and the specific number is "yes", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 is "0 to 49 ”, the additional decrement value is defined as “decrease to a specific number”, and the additional decrement value is defined as “current state-20” for the range of “50 to 99”. On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "current state -20" as an additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 49", and "50 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.

Then, if the number of differences is "50 or less" and the specific number is "present", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the additional decrement value is "up to the specific number". "Decrease" is specified, and "Decrease to a determined value" is specified as an additional decrease value for the range of "30 to 99". On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "determined value + 10" as the additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 29", and "30 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.
When the scenario type is "scenario type 5, 11, 12", the number of differences is "21 or more", and the specific number is "yes", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is between "0 to 49". For the range, "decrease to a specific number" is specified as an additional decrement value, and for the range of "50 to 99", "current state -5" is specified as an additional decrement value. On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is set to "0 to 49", and "current status -5" is specified as the additional decrease value, and "50 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.
Then, if the number of differences is “20 or less” and the specific number is “present”, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is “determined value” for the entire range of “0 to 99”. If the specific number is "None", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is reduced to the entire range of "0 to 99", and the additional decrement value is "decrease to the determined value. ” is stipulated.
When the scenario type is "scenario type 6, 7, 13", regardless of the number of differences, when the specific number is "yes", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is "0 to 99". For the entire range, "decrease to a specific number" is specified as an additional decrease value, and if the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 falls within the range of "0 to 19". On the other hand, "no decrease" is specified as the additional decrease value, and "decrease to the determined value" is specified as the additional decrease value for the range of "20 to 99". Finally, when the scenario type is "scenario type 4", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is for the entire range of "0 to 99" regardless of the number of differences and the presence or absence of the specific number. Therefore, "decrease to determined value" is specified as an additional decrease value.

The effect stage data table 222e is a data table in which information about the effect stage that can be set as the background type is defined in advance. Then, transition conditions for each stage type (rabbit stage, hero stage) are defined. In the twenty-ninth control example, it is determined whether or not the transition condition for the stage type is satisfied based on the progress of the game and the set mode type, and the stage is changed.
Here, the contents defined in the effect stage data table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 814(a). FIG. 814(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the production stage data table 222e. As shown in FIG. 814(a), the effect stage data table 222e defines mode types and transition conditions for the stage types in association with the stage types, and roughly speaking, the active mode is set. When the transition condition of the stage type is most likely to be satisfied, when the normal mode is set, the transition condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the active mode, and when the fixed mode is set, the transition condition is not satisfied. Each content is specified.
Specifically, if the mode type is "normal" and the stage type is "rabbit", the transition condition for the stage type is "special figure fluctuation 50 times" or "part of the jackpot fluctuation start ( Low probability)” is stipulated, and for the stage type “brave”, as a transition condition for the stage type, “50 special fluctuations” or “part of the start of the jackpot fluctuation (low probability)” stipulated. In addition, if the mode type is "active" and the stage type is "rabbit", the transition condition for the stage type is "special figure fluctuation 20 times" or "part of the jackpot fluctuation start (high probability) ", "5 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation when the special figure transition condition is established" is defined, and for the stage type "brave", the stage type transition condition is 20 special figure fluctuations", Or "a part of the start of jackpot fluctuation (high probability)" is defined. For the mode type "fixed", transition conditions are not defined regardless of the stage type.
Here, each transition condition will be explained. "Special figure variation 50 times" is a transition condition (special figure variation transition condition) that is established when the number of executions of special symbol variation executed after the stage type is set reaches 50 times. That is, when the normal mode is set, the stage change effect for changing the stage type is executed every time the special symbol variation is executed 50 times. It should be noted that, in the present 29th control example, as a special figure fluctuation transition condition, for the mode type that is set, the fixed number of times is defined in advance, but not limited to this, special figure fluctuation of a predetermined range A means for determining the number of times (eg, 10 to 50 times) by lottery may be provided, and the number of special figure fluctuations determined by the means may be configured to be able to be set as special figure fluctuation transition conditions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the stage change effect will be executed.

Also, in this case, it is configured so that the number of special figure fluctuations determined by lottery according to the set mode type is different, and mode types (for example, "normal mode") in which transition conditions are difficult to hold However, different data tables are set according to the mode type that is set so that the number of special figure fluctuations that is greater than the mode type in which the transition condition is likely to be established (for example, "active mode") is more likely to be determined by lottery. It is preferable to configure so that the lottery used is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the stage change effect at intervals corresponding to the mode type (the frequency of execution of the stage change effect) arbitrarily set by the player.
"A part of the start of the big hit fluctuation", which is one of the transition conditions, is a fluctuation effect setting process for setting the fluctuation display of the third symbol set based on the start of the special symbol fluctuation (see S4304 in FIG. 847) ), it is a transition condition (hit variation transition condition) established when a performance mode with a stage change performance is determined as a performance mode of a variable performance corresponding to a special symbol variation for winning a big hit. Although detailed description is omitted, in the twenty-ninth control example, in the processing of S4404 in FIG. The mode type in which the transition condition is difficult to satisfy (for example, "normal mode") is more likely to satisfy the transition condition (for example, "active mode"). Rather, it is configured to make it more difficult to determine an effect mode involving a stage change effect.
By configuring in this way, even in a state where the special figure fluctuation transition condition is not established, the stage change effect can be executed by the establishment of the hit fluctuation transition condition, so that the player is unexpected. A stage change effect can be executed at a certain timing, for example, two special symbol variations executed continuously. Furthermore, since the win fluctuation transition condition is established only when the big win is won, the degree of expectation for the big win can be increased when the stage change performance is executed at unexpected timing.
In the twenty-ninth control example, since the predetermined number of times is set as the special figure fluctuation transition condition, the player can easily grasp the interval at which the stage change performance is executed according to the special figure fluctuation transition condition. Therefore, it is possible to easily comprehend the stage change effect to be executed based on the establishment of the hit variation transition condition. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a player who wants to quickly perceive the winning of the jackpot to play the game to grasp the interval at which the special figure fluctuation transition condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, one of the transition conditions "5 seconds after the start of the special pattern fluctuation when the special pattern transition condition is established" is for setting the fluctuation display of the third pattern that is set based on the start of the special pattern fluctuation In the fluctuation production setting process (see S4304 in FIG. 847), as the production mode of the variation production of the third symbol, the transition condition established when the production mode for executing the stage change production during the special figure fluctuation is determined (special Figure transition condition).
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the three transition conditions described above are defined as conditions for executing the stage change effect, but other transition conditions may be set, and the special symbol variation is executed. In this state, the player may operate the operating means (the frame button 22 and the selection button 600) to execute the stage change effect. In this case, the selectable stage types may be notified to the player in advance, and the selectable stage types may be provided only when a predetermined condition (such as during a big hit change) is satisfied. Furthermore, it may be configured so that the player is not notified in advance of only the selectable stage types only when a predetermined condition (such as during the fluctuation of the big win) is established. In addition, different stage types may be selected by performing different operations on the operating means.
Further, as described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, even in the same mode type, different transition conditions are defined according to the set stage type. The "rabbit stage" is configured so that the transition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the "brave stage". By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of predicting which transition condition will be satisfied when the stage change effect is executed based on the set stage type.
The game environment data table 222f is a data table in which the contents of each game environment are defined in advance, and when a game environment is selected by the player, data corresponding to the selected game environment is read out, It is stored in the game environment storage area 223u.

Furthermore, when the fixed mode is set, the stage change effect is executed only partly when the first special symbol variation is started after the end of the jackpot game in the state where the holding train is confirmed. It consists of In other words, when the stage change effect is executed in spite of the fixed mode being set, the player is notified of the winning of the big win. Therefore, even for a player who selects the fixed mode, that is, a player who desires that the stage change effect is not executed, the stage change effect is executed on the condition that the privilege of winning the jackpot is granted. can be increased, and discomfort caused by the execution of the stage change effect can be reduced.
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 811(b). As shown in FIG. 811(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1, second effect counter 223f2), secondary game state storage area 223g, time saving information update area 223h, subjugation number counter 223i, remaining subjugation number counter 223j, specific number displayed Flag 223k, Rush period measurement counter 223m, Prize ball counter 223n, Retained consecutive flag 223o, Round number counter 223p, SW effective time counter 223q, Right hitting flag 223r, V winning flag 223s, Effect fixed flag 223t, Game environment storage At least an area 223u and another memory area 223z are provided.
The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas (first area for special figure 1 to fourth area for special figure 1) corresponding to the first special symbol, and one area corresponding to the second special symbol. It has two areas (first area for special figure 2), and each of these areas stores winning information output from the main controller 110, respectively. Based on the information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery results based on the winning information are pre-determined (read ahead) by the voice lamp control device 113 before the special symbol lottery is executed. In the winning information storage area 223a, when it is determined that a winning information command has been received in the command determination processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3113 in FIG. 835) (S3209 in FIG. 835: Yes), the main control The first area corresponding to the special symbol type included in the winning information based on the winning information command (winning command) transmitted from the device 110 is stored in order. The winning information command (winning command) transmitted from main controller 110 is set when the prefetching process of main controller 110 (see S807 in FIG. 823) is executed, and the main process of main controller 110 ( 830), is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 830).
Each winning information stored in each area of this winning information storage area 223a is shifted by one (second area ) is transferred to the first area. As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, the sound lamp controller 113 side can surely grasp.

In addition, since it is possible to shift the winning information (special symbol prefetch information) transmitted by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, winning Based on the reception of the information command, the effect using the period from the start timing of the special symbol variation to be executed next to the timing until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command ends (so-called look-ahead continuous effect), the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-described look-ahead continuous effect ends.
In addition, in the 29th control example, since up to four pieces of winning information related to the first special symbol (information that can be acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be retained and stored, the winning information The storage area 223a is configured to have first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area. If up to four pieces of prize winning information related to special symbols can be retained and stored, the winning prize information storage area 223a includes, in addition to the execution area, four areas for the first special symbol (reserved information area) and the second It is sufficient to provide four areas (holding information areas) for two special symbols.
The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is the special symbol variation performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending storage of execution rights. That is, the number of special figure 1 reservations corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 .
As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved storage (special figure 1 reserved number) of the execution right of the first special symbol lottery is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) Or, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the main control device 110 and the special figure 1 reserved number is subtracted, the reserved ball indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction A number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 .
When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command (special figure 1 pending ball number command) transmitted from the main control device 110, from the pending ball number command (special figure 1 pending ball number command), the main control The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the device 110 is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S3301 in FIG. 836). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is updated, the first special symbol reservation of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number-of-balls counter 203d.
The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used when determining the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (display mode for indicating the special symbol 1 reserved ball number). That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special symbol 1 reservation number indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reservation ball number command in the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reservation after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223b, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.
When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the special figure 1 reserved number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved design is displayed on the third design display device 81. - 特許庁As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The information contained in the number-of-holding-balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 may be the actual number of holding-balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the first special symbol-holding-balls counter 203d, or the first special Information indicating that the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has been incremented by 1 or decremented by 1 may be used. In addition, when transmitting information indicating that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 added or subtracted by 1 as the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113 It is sufficient to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information contained in.
The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c changes the object to be counted from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b to the execution right (special figure 2 reserved) of the second special symbol lottery included in the reserved ball number command. However, since the other points are the same, the detailed description will be omitted. In the twenty-ninth control example, since the upper limit number of the special symbol 2 reservation is set to 1, the upper limit number of the value measured by the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c is also 1.
The value measured by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is used when determining the reserved symbol (display mode for indicating the special symbol 2 reserved ball number) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special symbol 2 reservation number indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reservation ball number command in the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c, and the special design 2 reservation after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.
When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the special figure 2 reserved number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 Drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved design is displayed on the third design display device 81.例文帳に追加As described above, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

Furthermore, in this 29th control example, during the final variation period of the second special symbol in the time saving state, a charge effect for prompting the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (Fig. 793 (a) ), and while this charge effect is being executed, a new special figure 2 based on receiving a pending ball number command indicating the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending A display mode (“charging complete”) for indicating that a hold cannot be obtained is configured to be displayable. In other words, based on the reception of the pending ball number command, it is configured not only to display the acquired special figure 2 pending number, but also to switch the effect mode of the effect being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the presentation mode according to various conditions, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.
The fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 835), and when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set It is set to OFF (see S4302 in FIG. 846). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.
The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S3102 in FIG. 834) of the main processing (see FIG. 834) executed by the MPU 221 Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.
The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3205 in FIG. 835), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4307 in FIG. 846). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type for display is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (see S4309 in FIG. 846).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 834) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. In the twenty-ninth control example, the effect counter 223f has a plurality of loop counters (for example, a counter that is repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 99) (first effect counter 223f1, second effect counter 223f2, etc.). The value of the performance counter is configured to be updated without synchronization.
Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters with different values updated each time the main process (see FIG. 834) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Furthermore, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used in lottery when determining the content of various effects. By configuring in this way, when determining at the same timing (within one main process) the effect mode of a plurality of effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is determined at the same timing. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the performance modes of a plurality of performances are synchronized and the performances cannot be executed in various combinations.
The secondary game state storage area 223g is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main control device 110. FIG. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared of data when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The stored information indicating the current game state is also erased. However, in the twenty-ninth control example, the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 829) of the main controller 110 that is executed after power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (see S1712 in FIG. 829), so power is restored. Immediately after that, the information indicating the game state set before the power shutdown is stored in the sub-game state storage area 223g. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main controller 110, a state command indicating the game state after variably set is set (see S1917 of FIG. 831, etc.).

The time saving information update area 223h includes a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state and the progress status for each time saving end condition (game elements subject to the time saving end conditions (for example, special symbol fluctuations, small hits, and big hits This is a data area for storing the number of times winning) has been executed. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (time saving end condition and progress) stored in the time saving information update area 223h. This time saving information update area 223h is a time saving setting information command including information about the contents of the time saving state set from the main control device 110, that is, the main control device 110 jackpot control processing (S1804 in FIG. 831) of the ending period When determining the end timing (S1913 in FIG. 831: Yes) and setting the time saving end condition (S1916 in FIG. 831) when receiving the set time saving setting information command, the time saving state for ending this time A time saving end condition is set (see S3412 in FIG. 837).
Then, in the time saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 820) of the main control device 110, update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that the special symbol variation has been executed, and winning a small hit When it is determined that a short remaining time command has been set to indicate a small hit information), and it is determined that the short remaining time command has been received, it corresponds to the update information included in the received short remaining time command. Various information included in the time saving information update area 223h is updated. By configuring in this way, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, not only whether the current gaming state is the time saving state, but also when the time saving state is set, until the remaining time saving end condition is satisfied It is possible to grasp the remaining status of each time saving end condition.
To specifically explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223h, in the time saving information update area 223h, each item that can be the end condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second special Information corresponding to the number of fluctuations in the design, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of fluctuations in the first special design and the number of fluctuations in the second special design, and the number of winnings of the small hit (the number of times the operation of the V winning device 600 is started) is temporarily stored. For each item, time saving setting information (the number of times the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied) and updating of each item during the period when the time saving state is set continuously information (information indicating the number of times actually executed) and are stored respectively.
In this 29th control example, among the update information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, the main production during the time saving state based on the update information regarding the time saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol It is configured to determine the aspect. In this 29th control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times during the time saving state, or when the result of the executed special symbol lottery is winning, the time saving state is ended. is doing. Here, when the time-saving state ends based on winning, the player is provided with a privilege by executing the winning game, and the time-saving state is easily set again after the big win game ends. ing. On the other hand, when the time-saving state ends based on the execution of the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times, the normal state is set without giving the player a privilege.

Therefore, the player who is playing the game during the time saving state is not the time saving end condition that is established based on the winning winning, but the remaining time until the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed is satisfied. We request that you provide information on the period. Furthermore, in this 29th control example, as a time saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it is established based on the total number of times that the first special symbol fluctuation frequency and the second special symbol fluctuation frequency are added. and a special figure 2 fluctuation time reduction end condition established based only on the second special symbol fluctuation frequency. Then, when a proper game (right-handed game) is executed in the time saving state, the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the total change time saving end condition.
In other words, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is not won, the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition is most likely to be established. Therefore, while the time saving state is set, based on the update information on the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition (information about the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t updated by the main controller 110) By executing an effect (countdown effect) to indicate the remaining period until the time-saving state ends, the player can receive an accurate remaining period until the time-saving state ends (executable during the time-saving state The remaining number of second special symbol variations) can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.
In addition, in the present 29th control example, as described above, when an appropriate game (right-handed game) is executed in the time saving state, the most likely time saving end condition (special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition) is established. Although it is configured to execute an effect for letting the player grasp the remaining period until, without being limited to this, for example, depending on the game content executed during the time saving state, other time saving end conditions is likely to be established, it may be configured to switch the type of the time saving end condition used for the effect for indicating the remaining period until the time saving state ends, or a plurality of time saving end conditions You may comprise so that the production|presentation which can report the remaining period until each time saving end condition is satisfied may be performed with respect to each.
In addition, in this 29th control example, as a countdown effect indicating the remaining period until the time saving end condition (special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition) is satisfied, the second special symbol variation that can be executed during the time saving state Although it is configured to execute an effect that indicates the remaining number of times by a numerical value, it is not limited to this, for example, the remaining number of second special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state is a mode other than the numerical value ( For example, an animation that changes the mode every time the remaining number of second special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state is subtracted), that is, for the player, it can be executed before the time saving state ends The number of times of the second special symbol lottery may not be concrete, but may be configured to execute the effect in a manner that can be reported abstractly. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the time saving state in which the second special symbol fluctuation frequency required until the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition is satisfied is set so as to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the number of Toku-zu 2 fluctuations that can be executed before the time saving state ends.

Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information is calculated, It may be configured to display the degree of time saving progress by a numerical value (for example, percentage).
In addition, in the 29th control example, as the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, it is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times it has already been executed (number of fluctuations, number of winnings)), Without being limited to this, the remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) is satisfied may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223h. .
The subjugation number counter 223i is a counter for managing the number of attack effects (the number of subjugations) set as the subjugation effects executed during the jackpot game, and is used for determining the subjugation effects mode. In the determination process (see S3803 in FIG. 842), the value of "5" is set (S3907 in FIG. 842). Then, the value of the counter is decremented in the first-time big-hit round production process (see S3807 in FIG. 843) executed when a new round game is started in the big-hit game in which the subjugation production is executed (FIG. 843 S4009).
The value of this subjugation number counter 223i is referred to when determining the display mode (the number of button icons displayed in the display area Dm7) for indicating the number of times of the attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation. In addition, based on the subjugation production scenario that has been set, it is referred to when determining the production mode of the attack production to be executed in each round game.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, six rounds of the jackpot game are always executed, and a subjugation is performed during the jackpot game. It is configured to execute a production. Then, during the 1st round game period, the content of the subjugation production (number of remaining enemies, number of attack productions, etc.) to be executed this time is announced, and the attack production is performed during each round game period of the 2nd to 6th rounds. configured to run. In other words, when the subjugation effect is executed, the attack effect is always executed a fixed number of times (five times). Therefore, although the subjugation number counter 223i is set to a value of "5" as an initial value, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to be different.
For example, as a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won in a first special symbol lottery executed in a normal state, a jackpot game with a different number of round games can be executed, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed. Depending on the situation, the number of times of the attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation may be varied. In this case, at least, as the types of jackpot games, a standard jackpot game in which the number of round games is a standard number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds) and a specification in which the number of round games is larger than the standard jackpot game (for example, 8 rounds) A jackpot game is configured to be executable, and the number of attack performances executed during the subjugation performance is increased when the specific jackpot game is executed than when the standard jackpot game is executed. Good to configure.
Further, it is preferable to make it easier to set the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game when the specific jackpot game (8-round jackpot game) is executed rather than the standard jackpot game (6-round jackpot game). Specifically, as the jackpot types corresponding to the standard jackpot game, a first jackpot type in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and a second jackpot type in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends can be set. and, as jackpot types corresponding to the specific jackpot game, a third jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and a fourth jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished are set. configure as possible.
Then, the selection ratio of the fourth jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot in which the specific jackpot game is executed is higher than the selection ratio of the second jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot in which the standard jackpot game is executed. It should be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, as the number of attack effects executed during the subjugation effect increases, it becomes easier to display the effect result (result of successful subjugation) that is advantageous to the player as the effect result of the subjugation effect. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating that many attack effects will be executed in the subjugation effect.
In addition, the greater the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the easier it is to increase the number of executions of the attack effect. As a result, it is possible to easily display a production result that is advantageous to the player (a production result that succeeds in subjugation), so that the player can be provided with a plurality of benefits at once. It can increase motivation.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the number of attack effects to be executed during the subjugation effect is determined in correspondence with the number of round games to be executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of round games to be executed may be set as the maximum number, and the number of times of the attack performance to be executed during the subjugation performance may be determined by lottery.
In this case, no matter which number of rounds is set in the jackpot game, the case where the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over than the case where the normal state is set after the jackpot game is over. It is preferable to configure so that a large number of times can be easily determined as the number of times of presentation. By configuring in this way, when the subjugation performance is executed during the jackpot game, the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed and the number of attack performances to be executed are grasped, and the execution is performed after the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the game state to be played.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the jackpot game in which the subjugation effect is executed is executed, during the game period of the round game (first round game) that is executed first, the subjugation that is executed this time An initial display mode is displayed to notify the player of the effect content of the effect, and the attack effect is executed a plurality of times using the remaining game period of the round game, but it is not limited to this. As the round game in which the initial display mode of the subjugation effect is displayed, a round game different from the first round game (round game of the first round) may be set.
Specifically, a management means for managing the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed this time and a management means for managing the number of times of the attack performance to be executed during the subjugation performance to be executed this time are provided. It is preferable to provide means for determining the number of rounds for displaying the initial display mode of the subjugation effect within a range where the number of rounds for the number of attack effects can be secured. By configuring in this way, when the subjugation production is started in a short time after the start of the jackpot game (when the initial display mode of the subjugation production is displayed), more attack productions are executed. Since it is possible to increase the possibility that the game will be executed, the player can be interested in the execution timing of the subjugation effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
In the example described above, according to the number of attack productions executed during the subjugation production, the result of the production of the subjugation production can be suggested. , As the effect result of the subjugation effect, an example of making it easy to display the effect result that is advantageous to the player (the effect result of successful subjugation) has been shown, but the attack effect executed during the subjugation effect is not limited to this. The smaller the number of times of or the more specific times (for example, 3 times) the attack performance is executed, the more advantageous the player is as the performance result of the subjugation performance (the performance result of successful subjugation) is displayed. It may be configured to make it easier to In addition, when a small number of rounds is set in the jackpot game in which the subjugation effect is executed, it is easier to set the time saving state after the jackpot game is finished than when a large number of rounds is set. can be
The remaining subjugation number counter 223j is a counter for measuring the number of enemies subtracted by the attack presentation executed in the subjugation presentation, and corresponds to the total number of enemies as an initial value when the subjugation presentation is performed. A value is set, and then subtracted to a value corresponding to the effect result of the executed attack effect each time the attack effect is executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the opening command of the jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed in the normal state is received (S3801 of FIG. 841: Yes), the subjugation effect mode determination process (of FIG. 842 In S3803), a value corresponding to the determined total number of enemies is set (see S3902 in FIG. 842), and when it is determined that an interval command for indicating an interval period to be set after the end of the round game is received (see FIG. 841). (S3808: Yes)) during the first interval effect processing (S3809 in FIG. 844), the content of the subjugation production scenario and the value of the remaining subjugation number counter 223j are referred to when determining whether or not they match. (S4102).
Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, the mode of the subjugation effect is scenario-managed. Specifically, when determining the production mode of the subjugation production, the total number of enemies to be defeated in this subjugation production, the number of times the attack production is executed, and the number of enemies that can be reduced in each attack production (remaining number of subjugation) and subjugation presentation scenarios are configured so that one subjugation presentation scenario can be determined from among a plurality of subjugation presentation scenarios having different stipulated contents.
Then, during the effect period of the attack effect (round game period), the SW effective time is set as a period during which the operation of the effect button 22a by the player can be effectively determined, and during the SW effective time. When the player operates the performance button 22a at the beginning, the performance for reducing the number of enemies is executed based on the content defined in the determined subjugation performance scenario. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 22a during the SW effective time, the effect of reducing the number of enemies is not executed during the round game period.
That is, the number of enemies displayed at the end of the round game period differs depending on whether or not the effect button 22a is operated during the round game. Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, the number of enemies reduced by the attack effect is managed by the value of the remaining defeat number counter 223j. It is determined whether the value of the subjugation number counter 223j matches the content of the determined subjugation effect scenario (S4102 in FIG. 844). It is configured to execute an effect (additional attack effect) for reducing the number of enemies using the interval period.

By configuring in this manner, regardless of whether or not the player operates the performance button 22a, it is possible to easily determine the degree of reduction in the number of enemies according to the content of the determined subjugation performance scenario. . Furthermore, in this 29th control example, in addition to the basic production mode of reducing the number of displayed enemies to the number of enemies stipulated in the subjugation production scenario, as the production mode of the additional attack production, the production of this subjugation production is performed. A special performance mode for reducing the number of enemies to a specific number for notifying that the result is a performance result that is advantageous to the player can be determined.
Specifically, when the number of enemies specified in the subjugation scenario (for example, 99) differs from the number of enemies actually displayed (for example, 385), the difference (99 ~ 385 bodies), in some cases where a unique specific number (for example, 333 bodies) is set, as a production mode of the additional attack production, a special that reduces the number of enemies to a specific number (for example, 333 bodies) It is configured so that the mode of presentation can be set. That is, during the round game period in which the attack effect is executed, if the effect button 22a is operated and the number of enemies is not reduced to the number of enemies specified in the subjugation effect scenario (for example, 99), the special effect mode By executing the additional attack effect by , it is configured to be able to quickly notify the player of the effect result of this subjugation effect.
By configuring in this way, depending on whether or not the production button 22a is operated (pressed) during the attack production executed as the subjugation production, the timing at which the performance result of the subjugation production can be grasped can be changed. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether or not to operate the effect button 22a.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the player does not operate the effect button 22a, the effect mode (special effect mode) in which the result of the subjugation effect can be grasped at an earlier timing than when the effect button 22a is operated. ) is determinable. That is, in the subjugation production, if the operation method to be selected is not selected when the objective is to reduce the number of enemies to zero, the subjugation production is performed before the number of enemies is reduced to zero. It is configured to be able to display a specific number (for example, 333 bodies) capable of grasping the effect result. Therefore, since the operation method for the effect button 22a can be selected corresponding to the content of the effect that the player aims for, the operation method selected by the player is less likely to be biased.

In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, it is possible to change the timing of notifying that the effect result of the subjugation effect being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player, depending on the selection method selected by the player. is doing. Then, as the timing of notifying that the effect result of the subjugation effect being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player, the timing is earlier than when the operation method 1 is operated (the operation of pressing the effect button 22a). In the case of operation by another operation method that can be notified (operation without pressing the effect button 22a), not only the operation method, but also the number of enemies displayed and the number of enemies specified in the subjugation effect scenario Only when the notification condition is satisfied, the number of remaining enemies is set to a specific number (for example, 333) as an effect mode for indicating that the effect result of the subjugation effect being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that an additional attack production is executed.
That is, when an operation of not pressing the effect button 22a is executed in a state in which the notification condition cannot be satisfied, the additional attack effect in which the number of remaining enemies is a specific number (for example, 333) is not executed, and , an additional attack effect can be executed in which the number of remaining enemies is greater than the number of enemies specified in the subjugation effect scenario. In this way, when the operation method capable of informing the player that the effect result of the subjugation effect that is being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player is executed, the effect result of the subjugation effect that is being executed will be displayed to the player. Since there is a possibility that an advantageous performance result will not be notified, the player can more enjoyably decide which operation method to select.
In the twenty-ninth control example, regardless of which operation method the effect button 22a is operated, the privilege given to the player (the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends) However, without being limited to this, when the operation method 1 is selected, the above-mentioned privilege can be obtained. In addition, another first privilege (for example, a privilege to notify in advance whether there is a special figure reservation to be won in the acquired special figure reservation) can be granted, and is different from the operation method of 1 If another operation method is selected, in addition to the above-mentioned benefits, a second benefit different from the first benefit (for example, a benefit of notifying in advance the number of remaining round games to be executed during the jackpot game) is given. It may be configured as possible.
By configuring in this way, different benefits can be given to the player according to the game method selected by the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the operation method. Further, in the above-described example, the second privilege (advance notification of the number of round games) can be granted as a privilege that can be granted according to the operation method of the production button 22a during the attack production in the subjugation production executed during the jackpot game. However, in this case, for example, every time the number of round games executed during the jackpot game increases, the number of remaining rounds decreases, so the merit of giving the second privilege is lower.

Therefore, according to the progress of the round game during the jackpot game, it is possible for the player to switch the operation method to be selected during one subjugation effect, so that more advantageous benefits are given. The performance effect can be further enhanced for the player who watches the subjugation performance while anticipating it.
In the twenty-ninth control example, the player can select an operation method regardless of which attack effect is executed. The method may be configured to be capable of executing an attack effect that cannot be selected by the player. For example, by executing an attack effect in which the SW effective time is not set, the operation method of pressing the effect button 22a can be selected. Alternatively, by setting an extremely short SW effective time as the SW effective time, it may be possible to execute an attack effect such as making it difficult to press the effect button 22a.
Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, as an operation method for the effect button 22a, a configuration is used in which the player selects from two types of operations, that is, an operation of pressing the effect button 22a and an operation of not pressing the effect button 22a. , Without being limited to this, an operation method (so-called continuous hitting operation) of operating the production button 22a a plurality of times (for example, two or more times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second), or operating the production button 22a for a predetermined period ( For example, it may be configured such that the player can select an operation method (so-called long-pressing operation) of continuously pressing the button for one second.
In addition, when the player is allowed to select a plurality of operation methods in this way, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the operation methods that can be selected by the player and the operation methods that can be given when each operation method is selected. It is preferable to display the content of special privilege and the display mode in which notification can be made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the operation method to be selected.

The specific number displayed flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the effect mode indicating the specific number is displayed as the effect mode of the subjugation effect, and is set to ON when the effect mode indicating the specific number is displayed. be done. In the twenty-ninth control example, the number of enemies to be reduced in the subjugation presentation is to indicate the effect result of the subjugation presentation being executed before the performance result of the subjugation presentation is displayed when a specific condition is met. A specific number of enemies (for example, 333) can be displayed. Then, when a specific number of enemies (for example, 333) are displayed, the result of the subjugation effect is notified according to the display mode. A dedicated effect (blessing effect) indicating that a specific number of enemies has been displayed is executed during the remaining period until the result is displayed.
In other words, by making it possible to determine that a specific number of enemies have been displayed based on the setting status of the specific number of displayed flag 223k, an attack that reduces the number of enemies even after the specific number of enemies has been displayed. Even when the production is continued, the blessing production can be continuously executed based on the display of the specific number.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, even after the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON, the attack effect is executed based on the content specified in the subjugation effect scenario that has been set. . In other words, regardless of whether or not the specific number of enemies is displayed, the attack effect is continuously executed. Then, when the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON, in addition to the attack effect, the blessing effect is executed. In other words, regardless of whether or not a specific number of enemies are displayed, the content of the main production in the subjugation production (the production mode of the attack production) is shared, and only when the specific number of enemies is displayed, the third Some of the display elements displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 81 (for example, button icons displayed in the display area Dm7, comments displayed in the sub-display area Ds, etc.) are used to display a specific number of enemies. is configured to execute a blessing effect for indicating that is displayed.
By configuring in this way, when a specific number of enemies are displayed, the processing load for executing the subjugation effect is reduced compared to the case where a special effect can be executed instead of the attack effect. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the effect data used for the subjugation effect.

Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the subjugation presentation is executed, whether or not the specific number of enemies is displayed is determined by the player's presentation button 22a in the attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation. It is configured to be determined according to the operation content of. Furthermore, the timing at which a specific number of enemies can be displayed differs depending on the content of the subjugation scenario set and the number of enemies actually displayed (number of remaining enemies). there is
More specifically, within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in the first attack production executed during the second round round game, the unique specific number determined for this subjugation production is included, the interval period set after the end of the 2nd round game is the timing at which the specific number of enemies can be displayed, and it is executed during the 4th round game. If the number of enemies that can be reduced in the third attack effect includes the unique specific number determined for this subjugation effect, after the second round round game ends The set interval period is the timing at which a specific number of enemies can be displayed.
In addition, the unique specific number is configured to be determined each time the subjugation effect is executed based on the numerical value included in the third symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. For example, 1 enemy) to 3-digit enemy numbers (e.g. 999 enemies). The interval period can be varied for each jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the performance content of the subjugation performance from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
However, the timing at which the unique specific number can be displayed can be made different, and whether or not the unique specific number is displayed is determined according to the operation method of the effect button 22a by the player. By configuring it, the remaining period of the subjugation production after the unique specific number is displayed is different, so if the unique specific number is not displayed between the display of the unique specific number and the end of the subjugation production In the case of executing a completely different dedicated performance, it is necessary to prepare dedicated performance data corresponding to each remaining period, and there is a problem that the capacity of the performance data increases.

Furthermore, even if the timing (interval period) at which the unique specific number can be displayed is specified based on the effect content determined when executing the subjugation effect, the operation content of the effect button 22a performed by the player Depending on whether or not the unique specific number is actually displayed, it is not possible to set the effect data in advance on the premise that the unique specific number will be displayed, and the unique specific number is displayed. , and until the subjugation effect is completed, if a special effect that is completely different from the case where the unique specific number is not displayed is executed, the process of setting the effect data becomes complicated. I had a problem with it.
On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth control example, even when the unique specific number is displayed, the attack effect is continuously executed in the same manner as when the unique specific number is not displayed. Therefore, between the time the unique specific number is displayed and the subjugation production is completed, the production related to the subjugation production is compared to the case where the specific production is completely different from when the unique specific number is not displayed. Data capacity can be reduced.
In addition, even if the attack effect is continuously executed and the total number of displayed enemies decreases below a specific number, a partial area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be used to Since the blessing effect for indicating that the specific number has been displayed is executed, it is possible to make it easy for the player to trace back and grasp that the unique specific number has been displayed.
The rush period measuring counter 223m is a counter for measuring a period (rush period) during which a game state advantageous to the player continues, and the value of the counter is referred to when displaying the rush period. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example executes a jackpot game with a high probability when the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, and after the jackpot game ends, again It is configured so that the time saving state is set. Furthermore, it is configured so that a short variation time can be easily determined as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and after the small winning game is executed, the game ball can win a V prize. By configuring so that the period until the transition is also shortened, it is configured to make it easier to increase the number of jackpot games per unit time.

Then, the number of times the jackpot game is executed per unit time (the number of prize balls won per unit time) is displayed together with the display mode for indicating the measurement period of the rush period (see FIG. 793(a)). , the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls per unit time when the rush period continues. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to determine the content of the game to be executed during the rush period in order to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained per unit time.
Specifically, a value of "1" is set when a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set (see S3414 in FIG. 837). Then, in the main process (see FIG. 834) executed periodically (every 1 ms) in the sound lamp control device 113, when the effect update process (see S3112 in FIG. 849) is executed, the counter value is incremented by 1 ( updated) (S4604 in FIG. 849). Then, a display command for indicating the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m after addition is set (S4605 in FIG. 849).
The display command set in the process of S4605 in FIG. 849 is a command output executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 834) of the sound lamp control device 113, like other display commands. By the processing (S3102), it is output to the display control device 114, and the effect mode (display data, etc.) to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is determined. A time-saving state (rush period) is displayed in an effect mode according to the determined display data.
Then, when it is determined that the normal state is set as the game state and there is no unused special figure 2 hold, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared. Specifically, in the state command process (see S3212 in FIG. 837), when it is determined that the information for indicating that the normal state has been set is received (S3402 in FIG. 837: Yes), special figure 2 Whether or not there is a hold is determined (see S3405 in FIG. 837), and when it is determined that there is no special figure 2 hold, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared (see S3406 in FIG. 837).

Here, in this 29th control example, after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state can be executed a predetermined number of times (once). , and the period until the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed becomes a rush period advantageous to the player. In other words, the period in which the time-saving state advantageous to the player is set as the game state, plus a part of the period in which the normal state is set, is the advantageous period in which the game advantageous to the player is executed ( rush period).
By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the game state is switched can be made different from the timing at which the advantageous period in which the game advantageous to the player is executed ends, so that the player is surprised. Games can be provided.
The prize ball number counter 223n is a counter for holding at least the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period (jackpot game, time saving state), and is awarded when prize balls are awarded during the rush period. A value corresponding to the number of awarded balls is added (see S3217 in FIG. 835). The value of the counter is referred to when determining the point display mode to be displayed in the display area Dm6 formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the rush period. Then, the normal state is set as the game state, and when it is determined that there is no unused special figure 2 reservation, the value of the winning balls counter 223n is cleared. Specifically, in the state command process (see S3212 in FIG. 837), when it is determined that the information for indicating that the normal state has been set is received (S3402 in FIG. 837: Yes), special figure 2 Whether or not there is a hold is determined (see S3405 in FIG. 837), and when it is determined that there is no special figure 2 hold, the value of the prize ball number counter 223n is cleared (see S3407 in FIG. 837).
By configuring in this way, during the rush period (time reduction state, jackpot game state, normal state (retraction game state) in which the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time reduction state is digested during the continuous period) Award won Only the number of balls can be accumulated.

In the twenty-ninth control example, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m for measuring the rush period is set to 1 when the time saving state is first set, and the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is set to 1. is 1 or more, the value of the winning ball counter 223n is incremented based on the received winning ball number command. The value of the prize ball number counter 223n is configured to be incrementable, and when a jackpot game in which the time saving state is set is executed, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m including the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is increased. It may be configured to accumulate. In this way, the display mode (continuation period display displayed in the display area Dm8) for indicating the length of time that the specific period (rush period) continues, and the prize balls won during the specific period (rush period) In a configuration that can display a display mode for indicating the number (point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6), and a period before the specific period (execution period of the jackpot game that triggers setting of the specific period) A display mode (point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6) for indicating the number of prize balls won during a specific period (rush period) including the number of won prize balls can be displayed. The number of prize balls obtained during the period can be shown to the player more than the number of prize balls actually obtained during the specific period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In this case, since the display mode corresponding to the number of prize balls actually provided (provided) to the player is displayed in the display area Dm6, the display mode (point display) displayed in the display area Dm6 mode) and the number of prize balls actually won, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6.
In addition, in the 29th control example, the elapsed time after the time saving state is set for the first time is configured to be measurable using the rush period measurement counter 223m, but the jackpot game starts without being limited to this. The elapsed time after the rush period measurement counter 223m may be used to measure the elapsed time. In this case, when a jackpot game is executed based on winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in a normal state, the rush period is measured regardless of the type of jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type). When the value of the counter 223m is set to 1 and the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is cleared at that time, and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m may be continuously updated.
Furthermore, even during the period during which the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is updated, the period during which the jackpot game is executed (first time The jackpot game period) should be configured so that the elapsed time is not displayed. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the rush game is not started, it is possible to prevent the elapsed time from being displayed unnecessarily.

In this way, even during the period in which the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is being updated, the control not to display the display mode (continuation period display) indicating the elapsed period on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is performed as described above. For example, during the rush period, the display mode indicating that the winning (small winning, jackpot winning) is displayed, or during the small winning game. On the other hand, the period during which the game content (game result) needs to be notified using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, such as the period during which the guidance display mode for guiding the game method is displayed, is displayed for the duration. It may be configured to execute control to hide. With this configuration, it is possible to expand the display area for displaying the game content (game result) to be notified to the player, thereby providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.
Further, in order to achieve the same purpose, the size of the display area Dm6 in which the duration display is displayed is reduced, or the display area Dm6 is formed, instead of the control to hide the display mode of the display of the duration. By changing the positions of the buttons, the display mode showing the game content (game results) to be notified to the player may be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, while the rush period is set, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is continuously updated. During the period, during the interruption period during which the player is interrupting the game, specifically during the period during which the demo screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is updated. Instead, the process of updating the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m may be resumed when the game is restarted. By configuring in this way, only the period during which the player is actually playing the game can be accumulated and displayed as the continuous period display in the rush period, so the number of prize balls per unit time in the rush period can be made easier for the player to grasp.
Furthermore, during the rush period, the period during which the player cannot proceed with the game, specifically, the first waiting period (symbol confirmation period) from when the small win is won until the small win game is executed, After the winning game is executed, the second waiting period (opening period of the small winning game) until it becomes possible to win the V prize, and the third waiting period (small winning game (ending period of ) may also be configured to perform control in which the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is not updated.

By configuring in this manner, the rush period measuring counter 223m is used only during the period during which the player can actively proceed with the game, and during the period during which the player is actually playing the game. Since it can be measured, the number of prize balls per unit time during the rush period can be provided to the player with improved accuracy.
The holding consecutive flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the holding consecutive production has been executed, and is set to ON when the holding consecutive production is executed during the jackpot game. The holding consecutive performance is a performance for indicating that an advantageous privilege is given to the player executed during the jackpot game, and is a special figure 2 that has been acquired at the time the final round of the jackpot game is executed. If it is determined that the winning information indicating winning is included in the reservation, and if it is determined that the winning information indicating winning is included (If it is determined that there is a winning special figure 2 reservation ).
In other words, by executing the holding continuous effect, the player is notified in advance that an execution opportunity (small winning) for executing the next big winning game is established during the period in which the big winning game is being executed. Therefore, even if the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is short, the player can play the game with peace of mind.
In this 29th control example, when the holding continuous performance is executed during the jackpot game, the holding continuous performance is performed in the state of having the winning special figure 2 suspension compared to the case where the holding continuous performance is not executed. is configured to facilitate execution. Specifically, when the holding consecutive flag 223o is not set to ON, when it is determined that the final round of the jackpot game is started (S3701 in FIG. 840: Yes), the winning holding (hitting special figure 2 holding ) (see S3703 in FIG. 840), and if it is determined that there is a hit hold (S3703 in FIG. 840: Yes), that is, it is determined that the right to execute a hold consecutive effect is acquired. If so, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the holding consecutive effect, and if the execution lottery is won (S3707 in FIG. 840: Yes), the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (see S3709), and then , to determine the execution of the holding consecutive effect (see S3705 in FIG. 840).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the right to execute the holding consecutive effect is acquired in the state where the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S3704 in FIG. 840: Yes), the execution lottery is not performed. , to determine the execution of the holding consecutive effect (see S3705 in FIG. 840).
In other words, when the holding continuous effect is executed, the holding continuous effect is always executed in a state where the right to execute the holding continuous effect is obtained. By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to continuously execute the holding consecutive effect, it is possible to actively right during the time saving state so that the jackpot game is executed in the state where the special figure 2 holding is acquired. A beating game can be played.
Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery can be executed three times with an extremely short variation time (1 second) as the variation time. And, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be obtainable at most one. Furthermore, the winning information included in the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the timing of the start of the final round of the jackpot game is read in advance, and as a result of the look-ahead, winning (small winning, jackpot winning) per special figure 2 pending When it is determined that the information is included, the final round of the jackpot game is used to show that the second special pattern lottery using the acquired special figure 2 reservation is won. (See FIG. 796(b)).
In this case, in this 29th control example in which the maximum acquisition number of the special figure 2 suspension is 1, the winning of the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the big winning game is notified by the suspension continuous effect. Become. In other words, the player understands that a small win will be won one second after the end of the big win game. In the 29th control example, the normal state is set during the jackpot game, and when the special symbol indicating the small win winning is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the time saving end condition is established and the normal state is set. Therefore, after the jackpot game in which the continuous suspension performance is executed is finished, the period during which the time saving state continues becomes 1 second. Therefore, when the normal pattern lottery is executed immediately before the end of the jackpot game in the normal state, time is spent until the result of the normal pattern lottery executed in the normal state is displayed. The player predicts that it will be difficult to obtain a new special figure 2 reserve during the state, and the player shoots a game ball from the end of the big win game to the start of the next small win game. There is a risk that the game (right-handed game) to be played will be interrupted, and the operation of the game will be lowered.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set and then the right-handed game is performed, it takes at least a predetermined period of time (0.5 second), even if the normal pattern lottery in the time saving state is executed immediately after passing through the through gate 67, the normal state is set before the normal pattern per game is executed, and a new Since it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, the game (right-handed game) in which the player shoots the game ball is interrupted from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next small hit game. There was a possibility that the operation of the game would be lowered.
On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth control example, as described above, after execution of the holding continuous effect, when the right to execute the holding continuous effect is acquired, the holding continuous effect is always executed. there is By configuring in this way, the player who wants to continue execution of the holding continuous effect is motivated to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during a short time-saving state. Since the right-handed game can be made to be played, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the game.
In addition, in the 29th control example, in the state where the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, the conditions under which the holding consecutive effect can be executed It is configured such that the holding consecutive effect is always executed when the condition that is established when the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON. However, it may be configured such that the probability of execution of the holding consecutive effect is higher than when the holding consecutive effect is not set to ON.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON when the holding consecutive effect is executed. The processing may be configured to be executable. For example, when the cumulative number of prize balls obtained during the rush period exceeds a specific number (for example, 10,000), the pending flag 223o may be set to ON, or the number of prize balls obtained during the rush period may be set to ON. During the period when a specific display mode is displayed as a display mode for indicating the cumulative value of points (a point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6 in FIG. 796(a)), the holding run flag 223o is set to ON. configuration may be used.

Furthermore, a configuration may be used in which the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON based on the length of the period during which the rush state continues (rush duration). In this case, if the rush duration exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 100 seconds), the holding consecutive flag 223o may be set to ON, or the holding consecutive flag 223o may be set ON only when the rush duration is within a predetermined range. The configuration may be such that the flag 223o is set to ON.
In addition, a measuring means for measuring the cumulative number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is provided, and the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the rush continuation period exceeds a predetermined number. In this case, the holding consecutive flag 223o may be set to ON, and when the big winning game is executed based on the second special symbol lottery executed in the state where the holding consecutive flag 223o is OFF, the big winning game is executed. A discriminating means capable of discriminating how many special figure 2 lotteries the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery for winning a small hit) is after the setting of the time-saving state is provided, and by the discriminating means, 1.例文帳に追加The third special figure 2 lottery (special figure 2 that will be the final change in the time saving state) than the third special figure 2 lottery A lottery) may be configured so that the pending consecutive flag 223o is more likely to be set to ON.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the conditions for setting the holding consecutive flag 223o to ON are satisfied, the holding consecutive flag 223o is always set to ON, but this is not limitative. A lottery means capable of determining whether or not to set the reserved consecutive flag 223o to ON when a condition for setting the reserved consecutive flag 223o to ON is satisfied is provided, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means is set to ON. If it is determined that this is the case, the pending flag 223o may be set to ON. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the pending flag 223o is set to ON based on the game situation. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected game in which a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation, which is the target of the reservation series performance, although the reservation series performance is not executed. .
The round number counter 223p is a counter for measuring the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the counter value is updated when a new round game is executed. to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner as to which round the round game being executed is.

Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the above-described holding continuous effect is executed, the number of rounds of the big winning game to be executed next by inheriting the number of rounds of the previous big winning game can be displayed in the display area Dm5. Configure.
That is, normally, the process of clearing the value of the round number counter 223p at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S3612 in FIG. 839) is executed. S3611 in FIG. 839: Yes), configured so that the process of clearing the value of the round number counter 223p is skipped, and when the winning game targeted for the holding continuous effect is executed, as the number of rounds of the big winning game , the number of rounds added to the value of the round number counter 223p measured in the previous jackpot game is displayed in the display area Dm5. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5 increases as the holding consecutive effects continue, so that added value is provided to the player who continues the holding consecutive effects. can provide.
Further, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5 becomes larger than the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot game, a special effect (see FIG. 798) is executed. It is configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to give more added value to the player who continues the holding consecutive effect.
The SW effective time counter 223q is a counter for measuring the operation effective period during which the effect button 22a is determined to be effective, and the operation effect is made such that the effect mode can be changed by having the player operate the effect button 22a. When it is executed, a production scenario is set that defines the timing for setting the operation effective period, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the operation effective period based on the set production scenario, the predetermined operation is performed. A value corresponding to the length of the validity period is set.

The value set in the SW effective time counter 223q is subtracted by the effect update process (see S3112 in FIG. 849) executed in the main process (see FIG. 834) of the audio lamp control device 113 executed in 1 millisecond cycles. (see S4607 in FIG. 849). Then, a display command for indicating a display mode corresponding to the value of the SW effective time counter 223q that has been subtracted is set (see S4608 in FIG. 849). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S3102 in FIG. 834) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 834) of the audio lamp control device 113, and output. Based on the display command received by the display control device 114, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 displays a time gauge ga1 (see FIG. 786(b)) for indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period. It is displayed by changing the display mode.
The right-handed flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the game state (hitting game state, time-saving state) for executing the right-handed game is set for the player, and the right-handed game is started from the main control device 110. It is set to ON when a command is output to indicate that the game state to be executed has been set. Then, it is set to OFF when a state command for indicating that the normal state has been set is output. In the state where the right-handed flag 223r is set to ON, the guide display of "right-handed" is performed in the display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.
The V winning flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V winning) within a predetermined period (within 4 seconds) after the start of the small winning game, and It is set to ON when the game ball passes through the specific area within a predetermined period (within 4 seconds) after the start of the game (see S4213 in FIG. 845). Then, when it is determined that a predetermined period of time (4 seconds) has passed since the start of the small winning game (S4701 in FIG. 850: Yes), the setting status of the V winning flag 223s is determined (S4702 in FIG. 850 (see S4703 in FIG. 850), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4702 in FIG. 850: Yes), a V effect command for display is set to indicate that the V prize has been won (see S4703 in FIG. 850), and then OFF (see S4704 in FIG. 850).
In the twenty-ninth control example, when the small winning game is started, the game guidance information for a specific period (4 seconds) can be repeatedly executed as a display mode for guiding the game method during the small winning game. (See Figure 791(a)). Also during the period when the first game guide notification is executed (four seconds after the start of the small winning game), it is possible to win a V prize.

Specifically, an opening period is set in which the second variable prize winning device (V prize winning device) 650 is not opened for two seconds after the start of the small winning game, and after the opening period ends, the second variable prize winning device is set. A round game is executed in which the device (V winning device) 650 is opened. Then, 0.5 seconds after the start of the round game, the switching member 650h operates (see FIG. 781(a)) so that the game ball can enter the specific area 650e3 (V win possible). Configure.
In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example is configured to allow the game ball to win a V prize during the period from the start of the small winning game to the end of the first game guidance notification. Since the period from the start of the small winning game to the execution of the big winning game triggered by the V prize is shortened, it is possible to easily increase the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time. Thus, even a player who has a limited playing time can be motivated to play the game.
Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth control example, the execution timing of the V effect for informing the player that the game ball has won a V prize is varied according to the timing at which the game ball has won a V prize during the small winning game. Configure. Specifically, when the game ball wins V while the initial game guidance notification is being executed, the V effect is executed after the initial game guidance notification is completed, and the initial game guidance notification is completed. When the game ball wins the V prize later (while the game guide information is being executed for the second and subsequent times), the V performance is executed in accordance with the timing of the V prize winning.
With this configuration, even if the game ball wins V while the initial game guidance notification is being executed, it is possible to prevent the initial game guidance notification from ending in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, when the game ball is made to win a V prize after the first game guidance notification is completed, the V performance can be executed immediately, so that the game ball can be made to win a V prize during the small winning game. can be reliably reported.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, the game period of the small winning game (the period during which the game ball can win a V prize) continues longer than the timing at which the first game guidance notification ends. Configure. In other words, even if a right-handed game is played after the first game guidance notification is completed, the game ball can win a V prize. By constructing in this way, a skilled player can be made to play a right-handed game immediately after the small winning game is started, and a game aimed at winning a V prize in a short time can be made, and a beginner can be made to play. The player can be made to play a game aimed at winning a V prize even if he is made to play a right-handed game after having him understand the game method during the small winning game notified by the game guide notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately play a game according to the skill level of the player.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, the elapsed time (shortest small winning game time) when the player finishes the small winning game at the shortest is the period (4 seconds). Specifically, the period required from the start of the round game of the small winning game until the winning number (10) of game balls satisfying the end condition of the round game wins the second variable winning device 650 , 5 seconds at the shortest.
By configuring in this way, the right-handed game is continuously executed before the small winning game is started, and the game ball is sent to the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round game of the small winning game is started. Even if a winning situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the end of the small win game before the end of the first game guide notification, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.
The effect fixed flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the fixed mode is set as the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10, and is set to ON when the fixed mode is set. The game environment storage area 223u is a storage area for temporarily storing information about the game environment selected by the player, and is used to indicate the contents of each game environment selected by referring to the game environment data table 222f. information is stored.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 815 to 832. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.
In this 29th control example, as described above, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved) are both stored. In, it is configured to preferentially execute the second special symbol lottery. Also, in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the lottery result is configured to be capable of judging the small winning in some of the outliers in addition to the big winning winning. Then, during the small winning game that is executed when the small winning is won, by passing the game ball through the specific area (V area) 650e3 arranged in the second variable winning device 650 (V winning), V A condition for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on winning is established, and the jackpot game can be executed after the small prize game is finished.
In addition, as a game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set, A time-saving state can be set after part of a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, or after a V jackpot game executed based on a small jackpot win. .
When the time-saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is made easier to execute than when the normal state is set, and the second special symbol lottery is performed more than the first special symbol lottery. Also, by stipulating that the probability of winning the small winning is high, the second special symbol lottery makes it easier to execute the big winning game (symbol big winning game, V big winning game) than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured as follows.

A plurality of time-saving end conditions can be set as time-saving end conditions for ending the set time-saving state, and unnecessary execution of many first special symbol lotteries during the time-saving state is suppressed. In addition, it is configured to facilitate execution of the second special symbol lottery of the number of times (three times) specified during the time saving state. In addition, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, can be obtained up to a predetermined number (one), and the time-saving state ends and the normal state returns. Even after being set, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving state can be executed a predetermined number of times (once).
In the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example configured as described above, in the normal state which is the initial state, the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery, and the symbol jackpot is won. When a game aiming at execution of the game is performed and a time-saving state is set after the completion of the symbol jackpot game, a second special symbol lottery is executed by a right-handed game, and a V jackpot is won based on the small win. A game aiming to be executed is played. Also, even if the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied and the normal state (initial state) is set, in order to end the time saving state with the special figure 2 pending, just before the time saving state ends A right-handed game is performed continuously until.
815 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).
Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (65536 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the values (65535, 99, 99, 299 and 99 respectively in this control example) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3, C4 and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.
Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process associated with entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.
After executing the start winning process (S105), the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. Through gate passage processing associated with is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 824 and 825. After executing the through gate passage processing (S107), the V entrance passage processing is executed (S108), and then the V passage processing (S109) is executed. Details of the V entrance passage processing (S108) and the V passage processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 826 and 827. FIG.
After executing the V-passing process (S109), the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process (S110) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. , is the process of determining on/off of ball launch. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 816, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 816 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 816) performs various determinations (validity determination) and determination based on the acquired counter values, and the first symbol display is performed in the determined variable display mode by predetermined control. To control the device 37 to enable variable display, to execute transition management control of the set game state, and to make the third pattern display device 81 execute the variable display effect of the third and fourth patterns. , and stop display in a display mode showing the determination result (validity determination result). The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 816) will be described below.
In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.
In the processing of S201, if it is determined that the special symbols are not being hit (during the jackpot game) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202). ), if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter Obtain the value of 203d (the number of holdings of variation display based on the first special symbol lottery N1) and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings of variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2). (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. store in
After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side, and the process proceeds to S209.

In addition, in this 29th control example, since the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be obtainable up to one, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is: Although it has only a reservation first area for storing data (each counter value) related to one special figure 2 reservation, it is possible to acquire more than one special figure 2 reservation (for example, 4) If it is configured, it is sufficient to provide a number of reservation areas (reservation 1st area to reservation 4th area) according to the number that can acquire special figure 2 reservation, in this case, reservation 1st area → execution The data in each area may be shifted in the order of area, reserved second area→first reserved area, third reserved area→second reserved area, fourth reserved area→third reserved area.
On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (S211).
In the processing of S211, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S211: No), the data capable of newly executing the special symbol lottery is held. Since it is not in a state where the On the other hand, in the process of S211, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S211: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S212), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S213). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. store in
After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207 (S214), and the processing is changed to the processing of S209. to move to. In the process of S209 executed after the process of S207 or S214, a special design determination process is executed (S209), then a special design variation pattern selection process is executed (S210), and then this process is terminated. The details of the special symbol determination process (S209) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S215). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S216, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in correspondence with the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and then the process of S216 is executed. It is updated (decremented) each time.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S215 (S215: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S216 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 A display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether the result of this special symbol lottery is a big win, a small win, or a loss, and when the lottery result is a big win. , one of jackpot A to jackpot C is determined as the jackpot type according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, one of the small hits A to C is determined as the small hit type according to the value of the small hit type counter C5.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win with the big win A set, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED and the big win with the big win B set. If , the red LED is lit, and if the jackpot C is a set jackpot, the green LED is lit. Further, when the small win A is set, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on in the first pattern display device 37, and when the small win B is set. , The first pattern display device 37 lights the blue LED and the green LED, and when the small hit C is the set small hit, the red LED and the green LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, and if it is out, the red LED, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.
That is, the first symbol display device 37, as a display mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, not only the results of the special symbol lottery (big win, small win, loss), but also hit winning (big win winning, small winning winning) It is configured to display different display modes according to the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) set when it is done. By configuring in this way, by grasping the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the result of the special symbol lottery can be grasped in detail.

As described above, the twenty-ninth control example is configured so that it is difficult for the player to associate the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the result of the special symbol lottery. . In other words, it is configured to display the result of the special symbol lottery by combining the displayed display modes (lighting modes of the LEDs) regardless of the lottery result. Further, in the first symbol display device 37, while the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is being executed, each LED is simply blinked to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery of this time. It is configured so that the suggestion mode for the special symbol variation is not displayed until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. In addition, since the display mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed (lighting display of each LED) at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the display mode for showing the lottery result is configured to be displayed for a short period of time.
With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery based on the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect based on the symbol variation is executed.
In addition, in the twenty-ninth control example, as a display mode for indicating the lottery result displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a combination of lighting states of LEDs having a plurality of luminescent colors is used, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of LEDs that light up in the same color may be provided, and the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the combination of the LEDs that light up and the winning type may be displayed.
After the process of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S219), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is cleared (set to 0) (S220). ), set a special figure determination command for indicating that the current special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed (S221), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S218, if it is determined that there is no special pattern jackpot (S218: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a special pattern small hit (S222). If it is determined that there is (S222: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S223), then the time saving update process is executed (S224), the above-described S221 process is executed, and this process ends . In addition, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S222: No), the processing of S223 is skipped and the time saving update processing is executed (S224), and the processing of S221 is performed. . In addition, the detailed contents of the small hit start setting process (S223) executed in the process of S223 will be described later with reference to FIG. will be described later with reference to FIG.

The special figure confirmation command set by the process of S221 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process of the main process described later (see S1801 in FIG. 830). , and transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the special figure confirmation command, executes a process for stopping and displaying the variation performance (third symbol variation) being executed. By configuring in this way, for example, based on the reception of the variation pattern command, power to the pachinko machine 10 is supplied after executing the variation performance corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation included in the variation pattern command. Even if the supply is interrupted (power failure etc.) and the voice lamp control device 113 side can no longer manage the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, by receiving the special figure confirmation command output after power restoration , it is possible to reliably stop and display the third symbol variation being executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 817, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S209) will be described. FIG. 817 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S209). In this special symbol determination process (S209), the hit determination (big hit determination, small hit determination) in the special symbol lottery is executed.
When the special symbol determination process (S209) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S301), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a (S302). , When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a big hit (S304), and based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) , sets the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S305), and terminates this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S303: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S306), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit ( S306: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to a small hit (S307), and the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2). is set (S308), and the process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S306 that it is not a small hit, that is, if the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a loss (S306: No), this process is terminated as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 818, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 816), will be described. FIG. 818 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210), first, in the special symbol determination process (see S209 in FIG. 817), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big win, that is, whether a special symbol big win is set. It is determined whether or not (S401).
In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S401: Yes), based on the jackpot type selection table 202b and the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired , determine the jackpot type (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the current game state (normal state, time saving state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. The corresponding variation pattern selection table 202d is read (S404).
Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 , to set the special figure variation pattern command (S406). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (S1801 in FIG. 830 ) to the audio lamp controller 113 .
Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S407), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of special symbol fluctuation (S408), and the process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, a rough type such as reach out or non-reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 830) of the main processing (FIG. 830) of the main controller 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S401: No), next, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S409), and a small hit is made. If it is determined to be winning (S409: Yes), the small hit type is determined based on the small hit type selection table 202f and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 (S410). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S403 described above. Also, in the process of S409, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a small hit (no) (S409: No), the process of S410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.
Next, with reference to FIG. 819, the small hit start setting process (S223) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 819 is a flowchart showing the small winning start setting process (S223). This small hit start setting process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 816) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 815), and the small hit type (small hit A, B, C), the start of the small winning game is set, and processing for updating the time saving information according to the winning small winning (update processing for the winning number end condition) is executed.
Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 to an open state in which the game ball can win (easy), and the V winning device 650 By passing the winning ball through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game is finished.
That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability. Although the details will be described later, in this 29th control example, different small winning games are executed corresponding to the small winning types (small winning A, B, C) set when winning the small winning. It is constructed so that the possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game differs according to each small winning type.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the possibility (expectation) of executing (setting) the big winning game (per two types) by the small winning game to be executed, so that the small winning game for the player Since it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the player wins the prize, but also in the type of the small prize won, the amusement of the game can be improved.
When the small winning start setting process (S223) is executed, first, the opening scenario corresponding to the small winning type is set (S501). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203p (S502). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202f, the V passing big hit type (jackpot game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A (6 rounds with short time), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (6 rounds with no short time). discriminate.
In this way, when two types of winning are obtained, a jackpot type is set, and a process of starting a jackpot game based on the set jackpot type is executed, thereby winning one type and two types. The processing related to the jackpot game can be shared between the case of winning and the processing, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.
In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the twenty-ninth control example, a jackpot game that can be executed only when one type is won or only when two types are won may be set. It may be configured to execute different jackpot game processing for one kind and for two kinds.

Returning to FIG. 819, the description continues. When the processing of S502 is completed, the start of the small hit is then set based on the small hit type (S503), and the small hit start flag 203n and the small hit medium flag 203o are set to ON (S504). After that, this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 820, the time saving update process (S224) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 820 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (S224). This time saving update process (S224) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 816) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 815), updates the time saving number of times, and changes the game state to normal. This is a process for setting the state.
In the time saving update process (S224), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S601). In the process of S601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603.
In the process of S603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtracted) is set (S603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing described later (see FIG. 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S605), and the values of the small hit counter 203s and the special figure 2 counter 203t are set to 0 ( S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S607), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S604: No), it is determined whether the special symbol variation executed this time is the special symbol variation 2 (second special symbol variation). Determined (S608), if it is determined that it is a special figure 2 fluctuation (S608: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t (S609), and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is shown Set the remaining time short command (S610), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0 (S611).
In the process of S611, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 0 (S611: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S612), and the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the small hit counter 203s 0 is set (S613). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S614), and this process is terminated.
Also, in the process of S608, if it is determined that the special symbol variation executed this time is not the special figure 2 variation (second special symbol variation) (S608: No), or in the process of S611, the special figure after the subtraction If it is determined that the value of the 2 counter 203t is not 0 (S611: No), the small winning time saving update process is executed (S615), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to Drawing 821, small hit time saving update processing (S615) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. Figure 821 is the flowchart which shows the contents of small hitting time saving renewal processing (S615). This small hit time saving update process (S615) is a process executed in the time saving update process (see S224 of Figure 820) of the special symbol variation process (see S104 of Figure 816) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 815) It is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small hit, and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.
In the small hit time saving update process (S615), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit has been won (S701), and if it is determined that the small hit has not been won (S701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the small hit is elected (S701: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit counter 203s (S702), and whether the value of the small hit counter 203s is 0 Determine (S703). In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is 0 (S703: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S704), the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 (S705). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S706), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S703, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is not 0 (S703: No), it is in a state where the time saving end condition based on the number of times the small hit is won is not established, so S704 described above. This processing ends without executing the processing of S706.
In addition, in this 29th control example, among the plurality of time saving end conditions, when any end condition is satisfied, the value of various counters for updating the time saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions Since it is only configured to be set to 0 (a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied), after the time saving state ends, it is determined which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended in the previous time saving state. Although it is not possible, for example, a storage means that can store the satisfied time saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time saving end conditions that have been met in the past and the number of times they have been met may be determined.
By configuring in this way, for example, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishments, and the player is established based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) an easy time-saving end condition. Furthermore, the update status of the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end conditions when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, the small hit counter 203s at the time when the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0, the special figure 2 counter 203t (each value of ) can be stored, and the time saving end condition that is most difficult to be satisfied, that is, at the time when one time saving end condition is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, the time saving end having the largest value of time saving information It may be configured to determine the conditions.

As described above, in the 29th control example, whether or not the time saving end condition (change number end condition) established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is satisfied is determined by the time saving update process (see FIG. 820), Whether or not the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition) established based on the number of winning times of the special symbol winning is configured to be determined by the small-time saving update process (see FIG. 821). Then, in any process, if one of the multiple set time-saving end conditions is met, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions It is configured to be set to a value (0) for indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when any time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to unify the processing contents for ending the time saving state.
In addition, in this 29th control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, the value indicating each time saving end condition is set to various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set, and each When the time saving information corresponding to the time saving end condition is determined, the value of various counters is subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. , In addition, when the time saving state is set, the value of various counters is set to 0, and when the corresponding time saving information is determined, the value of the counter is added by 1, and the value of the counter after addition is time saving You may comprise so that a time saving state may be complete|finished when it discriminate|determines that it is the value which shows end conditions. In other words, means for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established, and in the state where the time-saving state is set, time-saving information corresponding to various time-saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small winnings, etc.) is updated. It is sufficient if the configuration is provided with updating means.
Next, with reference to FIG. 822, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 815) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 822 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105), it is determined whether the game ball has entered (start winning) into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Up to the number (maximum 4 for the first ball entrance 64, maximum 1 for the second ball entrance 640), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.
Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 822) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S801). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S801: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S802). , determines whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S803).
In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S803: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S804), and the voice lamp control device 113 , a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of the first ball entrance 64 (lottery right reserved number of the first special symbol) is set (S805).
Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area of RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number storage area of 203a (S806), the prefetching process is executed (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.
Also, if it is determined in the process of S801 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S801: No), or in the process of S803, the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (S803: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S808.

Next, each process from S808 to S814 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entrance 64) executed in each process from S801 to S807. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The look-ahead processing (S807, S814) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process of determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like is executed. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination of validity, the determined variation pattern, the type of stop, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but this is not the only option. For example, when there is a new start winning prize, the validity of all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b It may be configured to execute processing for determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like.
Also, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined. Accordingly, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.
As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added, information about the added prize Although it is configured to execute the prefetching process (S813) based on (winning information), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to If it is determined to be the upper limit number (4) (S803: No), that is, if the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, look ahead. It may be configured so that the process (S813) can be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 823, the look-ahead process (S807), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 822), will be described. FIG. 823 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S807).
In the look-ahead process (S807), first, a first hit random number counter C1, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 is read (S901). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area.
Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of the determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbols are in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbols are in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the probability state of special symbols.
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S902). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S902: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S903), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the process of S902 is not a big hit (S902: No), it is determined whether the result of the determination is a small hit based on the read various counter values (S904). Based on the winning/failing determination result, a prize winning command including information capable of specifying the winning of the winning prize, the winning of the small winning prize, and the variation pattern is set (S905, S906), and then the process is terminated.
Here, the prize winning command set in the processing of S903, S905 or S906 is the information for indicating the result of winning/failure determination (information that has a different meaning based on the result of winning/failure determination) as well as the common information of S901. is set including information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the processing of . Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 830).
On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.
In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.
Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.
Further, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which prefetching processing is executed and the success/failure determination is predicted in advance in the prefetching processing. Or set information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b as a winning command, and received at the voice lamp control device 113 side It may be configured to predict the result of winning/failure determination based on the information included in the winning command.
With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 824, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 824 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc., and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery). (Processing for executing normal design variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal design variation to be performed, processing for updating normal design variation during execution, processing for stopping normal design variation, result of normal design lottery Processing to determine the game content of the normal figure per game executed when is a hit) is executed.
In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S1101). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1101: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S1102). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, if it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) is currently executable (S1102: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f A value (M) is acquired (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).
When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S1104 (S1104: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1105). That is, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied in the processing of S1104, the retained and stored 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S1107).
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of normal symbols (during time saving) (S1108), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined to be large (S1108: Yes), the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for high probability (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1111. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1108: No), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for low probability time, the success or failure determination A result is obtained (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.
In the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S1111), and if it is determined to be a hit (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1114. On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (no) (S1111: No), the display mode of "x" is set, which is the display mode at the time of loss. (S1113), and the process proceeds to S1114.
In the processing of S1114, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds, and this processing ends.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, depending on the set probability state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is varied, but without being limited to this, regardless of the set game state , 3 seconds may be set as the variable time. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set, a short fluctuation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.
In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the game state, or the fluctuation time can be changed according to the number of normal pattern pending balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.
In this manner, by varying the degree of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 according to the length of the set normal symbol variation time, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is changed. Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.
On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1102: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S1115), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S1115: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the normal symbol lottery of this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 described above.
When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).
Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1117). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (no) (S1117: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is checked to see if the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal symbol high probability state). Refer to and discriminate (S1118), when it is determined that it is in the time saving (high probability state of the normal pattern) (S1118: Yes), as the game contents of the game per normal pattern, the scenario action per normal pattern for time saving, specific Specifically, the game content (opening action) is set such that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 1 second×2 times (S1120), and the process proceeds to S1121.
On the other hand, in the processing of S1118, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving (normal high probability state of the symbol) (S1118: No), as the game content of the game per normal pattern, scenario operation per normal pattern, specifically , the game content (opening operation) is set such that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds×1 time (S1119), and the process proceeds to S1121.

In the process of S1121, based on the scenario set in the process of S1119 or S1120, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S1121), and this process ends.
Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, based on the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of processing S1108 to S1111) Probability of normal symbols set at the timing (timing determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a by executing the judgment of normal symbols. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).
That is, in this control example, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing regarding special symbols ( It is configured so that the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal design is variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.
In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the open pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.
In addition, in this control example, the normal design success/failure determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the success/failure determination of the normal symbol, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to open for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is open. It may be configured to set
In addition, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal symbol lottery results, normal symbol fluctuation fluctuation time, normal pattern per scenario, etc.) determined in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106) A command indicating the content of the information is set and output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .
Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 825 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing, and determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. When the ball has passed, the second This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the hit random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. Also, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual propriety determination is executed (normally before the propriety determination (see S1111) is executed in the symbol variation process), This is a process for obtaining the lottery results (results of winning/failing determination) in advance.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1202), and then , determines whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S1203).
In the processing of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S1203: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S1203: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1204 ), set a normal pattern reserved ball number command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f after addition (S1205), and store the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S1206), and the process ends. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, in the same way as when acquiring a special symbol reservation ball (special figure reservation), when acquiring a normal symbol reservation (general figure reservation), the acquisition The second winning random number counter C4 included in the general pattern reservation is configured so that the lottery result can be obtained in advance by referring to the second winning random number table 202c (the general pattern prediction can be executed). . And, it is configured to be able to set the winning prize information command for general figure including information indicating the result of general figure prefetching.
The general figure winning information command set here is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the same processing as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each control example described above. By constructing in this way, it is possible to previously discriminate the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved and stored normal symbol lottery right, and to execute the performance based on the preliminary determination result.
Next, the contents of the V entrance passage processing (S108) and the V passage processing (S109) will be described with reference to FIGS. 826 and 827. FIG. The V entrance passage processing (S108) and V passage processing (S109) shown in FIGS. 826 and 827 are the same as the V entrance passage processing and V passage processing described in the control example described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 828, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 828 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.
The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.
Next, with reference to FIG. 829, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 829 is a flow chart showing this startup process.
This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 829), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1715. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not stored (S1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.
If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.
In the processing of S1715, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1715). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1716, S1717).
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1716, S1717).

Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1716, S1717) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1716, S1717), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1716), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1717). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.
On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .
Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the value of the time saving counter is read (S1711), the state command based on the read value is set (S1712), the flow path solenoid is set to OFF (S1713), the interrupt is permitted (S1714), and the main Go to processing.
Next, with reference to FIG. 830, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 830 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 830), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. . In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process and the start winning process. Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (variation information for setting effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.
Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.
When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the sound lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 are executed (S1804).
Details of the jackpot control processing (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIG. ) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a small winning control process (S1805) in which various operation controls related to a small winning game are executed is executed, and the process proceeds to S1806.
Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S1121 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 824), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.
Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S210 in FIG. 818), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Start. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.
Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated. Then, in the display mode set in S407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process, stop symbols are displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.
Furthermore, in this control example, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating an omission. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.
Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the normal symbol variation process, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the normal symbol variation process, the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is ended, and the normal In the display mode set by the symbol variation process, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.
After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the above-described processes after S1801 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).
First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.
Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.
In addition, in the processing of S1809, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 828 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S1813 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1813), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1809 is performed at the time when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the initial setting process (FIG. 829, S1701) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.
Next, with reference to FIG. 831, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described. FIG. 831 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 830) of the main controller 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, various It is a process for executing an effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the control examples described above, the detailed description will be omitted.
In the twenty-ninth control example, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot type selection table 202b is used to execute processing for determining the jackpot type, and the ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. It consists of Therefore, in the processing of S1912, the ending command for display corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. As in the 29th control example, instead of setting the length of the ending period at the time of winning the jackpot, the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 650e3)) The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined in accordance with .
Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 831), when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (the end timing of the final round), the game content executed during this jackpot game is determined, The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined based on the determination result, and it is possible to vary the game state set after the jackpot game is finished, especially based on the result of the game executed during the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, the length of the ending period may be longer than in other cases. .

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of changing the game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the game result during the jackpot game, the ending corresponding to the game state actually set. A period can be set.
In addition, in the case of using the configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game result during the jackpot game, any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period It may be configured to determine the ending period of the jackpot game at that timing. later), the presence or absence of V winning is determined, and based on the determination result, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set during the period in which the round games of the second round to the final round are being executed. good.
Furthermore, in the above-described example, the length of the ending period is set based on the presence or absence of a V prize during the jackpot game. An ending period of a jackpot game is set, specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when winning a probability variable jackpot, and 15 seconds when a normal jackpot is won, and the ending period is set in advance during the jackpot game. If it becomes necessary to vary the length of the ending period based on the game result of , that is, if the V prize cannot be won during the jackpot game even though the probability variable jackpot game is executed, It may be configured such that the length of the set ending period is variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the frequency of setting the length of the ending period during the jackpot game.
On the other hand, in the process of S1911, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1911: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1913). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1913: Yes), the jackpot type being executed is read (S1914), and based on the read jackpot type, the corresponding time reduction using the time reduction grant table 202e Set the end condition (S1915), set the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content set by the processing of S1915 (S1916), set the state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot (S1917), The end of the jackpot is set (S1918), the flag 203k during the jackpot is set to OFF (S1919), and the process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 832, the processing contents of the small hit control processing (S1805) will be described. FIG. 832 is a flow chart showing the details of the small winning control process (S1805). It should be noted that the small winning control processing (S1805) executed in the twenty-ninth control example is the same as the small winning control processing in each of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the twenty-ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 833 to 853, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.
First, referring to FIG. 833, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 833 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.
When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S3118 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 834, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of power failure from the main controller 110 (see S3115 in FIG. 834), it executes power failure processing in S3118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S3118. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).
Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.
It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.
If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S3118, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .
If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be
In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 is executed (see S3117 in FIG. 834). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), an interrupt Permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .
On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010).

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 via the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.
Next, referring to FIG. 834, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 834 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S3101 was last executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the processing of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S3102 to S3112 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S3113 and the variable display setting process of S3114 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3113 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3113 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.
If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3114 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S3102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.
In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, input as to whether or not various buttons such as the frame button 22 (rendering button 22a) and the selection button 600 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect are monitored. This is a process of setting so as to perform corresponding effects and game environment settings when input of various buttons is confirmed. In this process, when the player's operation of various buttons (frame button 22, select button 600) is detected, the display control device 114 is notified that the various buttons (frame button 22, select button 600) have been operated. Set the frame button operation command to be notified. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.
After the processing of S3109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110), and then various counter updating processing is executed (S3111). Thereafter, effect update processing is executed (S3112). After executing the process of S3112, the process proceeds to S3113. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.
After the processing of S3112, command determination processing (S3113) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S3114. Details of this command determination process (S3113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3114, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the process of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3115 (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed (S3118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.
On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .
Next, the command determination processing (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 835 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 834) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S3113) will be described below.

When the command determination process (S3113) is executed, it is first determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S3201), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation start corresponding to the received variation pattern command The flag 223d is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S3203). Then, the process ends.
If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received in the process of S3201 (S3201: No), then it is determined whether the stop type command has been received (S3204), and if it is determined that it has been received ( S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the received stop type command is set to ON (S3205), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3206). Then, the process ends.
If it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3207). Here, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S3207: Yes), pending information related processing is executed (S3208), and then this processing ends. In the reservation information related process, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Processing is performed to determine the mode of presentation based on the acquisition of the ball. A detailed description of the pending information related process (S3208) will be given later with reference to FIG.
Also, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). In the process of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), the process of storing the winning information based on the received winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a is executed (S3210). End the process. Specifically, in the process of S3210, the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command is analyzed, and the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (voice lamp control device 113 223a) in the RAM 223, and processing for executing an effect (prefetching effect) based on the received prize information.

In the processing of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S3211). Yes), the status command process is executed (S3212), and this process ends. This state command processing (S3212) receives the state command indicating the current game state, sets the mode effect mode according to the game state, and displays the corresponding effect mode ( For example, a display command for displaying a rear image) is set. The details of this state command processing (S3212) will be described later with reference to FIG.
If it is determined that the status command has not been received in the process of S3211 (S3211: No), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S3213), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3213: Yes ), the hit-related process is executed (S3214), and then the process ends. A detailed description of the hit-related process (S3214) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether the command for the number of prize balls has been received (S3215), and if it is determined that the command for the number of prize balls has been received (S3215 : Yes), it is determined whether the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is 1 or more, that is, whether the current period (rush period) is for measuring the total number of prize balls (S3216), and the rush period measuring counter 223m is greater than or equal to 1 (S3216: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of prize balls included in the command for the number of prize balls received this time is added to the value of the number of prize balls counter 223n (S3217), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3216 that the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is not 1, the present process is not in the rush period, so the process of S3217 is skipped and this process ends.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, the game is started from a state in which the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, and the first entry is made by the left-handed game. A game for executing a first special symbol lottery is performed by entering a game ball into the ball opening 64.例文帳に追加Then, when a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when winning (big winning, small winning) is started in the first special symbol lottery, a winning device (variable A right-handed game is performed in order to win the game ball to the winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).
When the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the winning game, the game ball fired by the right-handed game enters than when the normal state is set. A second ball entrance 640 is arranged so as to make it easier to throw a ball, and by entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, a game for executing a second special symbol lottery is performed.

Here, the second special symbol lottery is constructed so that the probability of winning a winning prize (probability of winning a small winning prize) is higher than that of the first special symbol lottery, and when the second special symbol lottery wins a prize. , it is configured so that the time saving state is more likely to be set after the winning game is finished than in the case of winning in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, it is configured to facilitate execution of the time-saving state game for a long period of time while performing a plurality of winning games.
In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example configured in this way, the game period including at least the period in which the right-handed game is continuously executed (the winning game period, the period in which the time saving state is set) is given to the player. In order to notify the player that it is an advantageous playing period, a rush state is set as a game state in terms of presentation. In this way, by executing a common effect (rush effect) while the advantageous game period that is advantageous to the player continues, the player is informed that the advantageous game period continues. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.
Then, in the twenty-ninth control example, the point display mode for showing information corresponding to the total value of benefits (the number of prize balls) acquired by the player during the advantageous game period is displayed in the display area Dm6. (see display area Dm6 in FIG. 786(a)). In the process of S3216, by referring to the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m, it is determined whether the current period is an advantageous game period. The value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is configured to be set to 1 when the time saving state is set as the game state. Then, when the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained in the normal state, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is cleared.
With this configuration, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m can be updated (cleared) in correspondence with the timing at which the advantageous game period starts and the timing at which the advantageous game period ends. An appropriate value corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the period can be added to the prize ball number counter 223n.

If it is determined in the processing of S3215 that the number-of-balls command has not been received (S3215: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S3218), and this processing ends. Here, a part of detailed processing contents executed in the processing of S3218 will be described. In the process of S3218, for example, a process based on the reception of the special figure confirmation command output when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command has been received, and if it is determined that the symbol determination command has been received, the stop display of the third symbol is set, and this processing is terminated. By executing this process, the timing at which the main controller 110 stopped displaying the special symbol variation can be reliably determined by the audio lamp control device 113 side. Even if the voice lamp control device 113 side cannot determine the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation after the power is restored due to the power being cut off during the game, it is made to correspond to the stop display timing of the special symbol variation. can determine the stop display timing of the variable effect.
Furthermore, in the process of S3218, various processes relating to the normal symbol lottery are also executed. Specifically, when the normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the normal symbol variable display is reserved The number of balls) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.
Here, the reserved ball number command is that a game ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, through gate 67), and various reserved ball number counters It is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value is added, or when the value of the various reserved ball number counters is subtracted when executing various fluctuation start processing, so it is possible to start winning and fluctuation Each time the display is set, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) of the voice lamp control device 113 are It is possible to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.
Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are Even if the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203d, 203e, and 203f of the main controller 110 deviate, the reserved ball number command will is notified, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) of the voice lamp control device 113 are corrected, and the main control device It is possible to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 836, the hold information related process (S3208) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 836 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending information related process (S3208). This pending information related process (S3208) is executed in the command determination process (see S3113 in FIG. 835) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Based on the processing for managing the number of reserved balls (special figure reserved number) of special symbols on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and for setting the production mode in the case of acquiring special figure 2 reserved in the time saving state It executes the process. Details of the pending information related process (S3208) will be described below.
When the pending information related process (S3208) is executed, first, the special symbol type and the number of pending balls are extracted from the received pending ball number command, and the special symbol pending ball number counter corresponding to the pending ball number command received this time. (Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) (S3301), stored special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number A display command corresponding to the value of the counter 223c) is set (S3302). The display command set by the processing of S3302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the command output processing (see FIG. 834) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 ( 834), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Display control device 114, when receiving the display command set by the processing of S3302, displays on the third symbol display device 81 a display mode for indicating the special figure pending number included in the received display command.
Next, it is determined whether the pending ball number command received this time is a pending ball number command (command indicating special figure 2 suspension) related to the second special symbol (S3303), and it is determined that it is not a command indicating special figure 2 suspension If so (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3310. On the other hand, in the processing of S3303, if it is determined that it is a command indicating the special figure 2 hold (S3303: Yes), then read the current time saving situation from the time saving information update area 223h (S3304). Here, the time saving information update area 223h is configured to store various game contents executed during the time saving state. It is configured to store information and information indicating updated contents of elements (for example, information on small winnings and information on the number of special symbol fluctuations) for establishing each time saving end condition.
Therefore, by reading the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, not only whether the present is the time saving state, but also whether it is during the special symbol fluctuation period, and the final fluctuation of the time saving state For example, even if the second special symbol variation in the time saving state is executed, the second special symbol variation is the final variation in the time saving state. Different effects can be determined depending on whether or not there is.

When the process of S3304 is finished, next, it is determined whether the current is in the final fluctuation in the time saving state (during the special symbol fluctuation of the number of fluctuations in which the time saving end condition is satisfied) (S3305), and it is in the final fluctuation If so (S3305: Yes), a display command for indicating completion of charging is set (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3310. In other words, when receiving the pending ball number command indicating the acquisition of special figure 2 suspension during the final fluctuation in the time saving state, after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, the second based on the acquired special figure 2 suspension Since it is possible to execute the 2 special symbol lottery, a display command indicating that the time saving state ends in the state where the special figure 2 reservation is acquired is set by the processing of S3306. The display command set by the processing of S3306 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the command output processing (see FIG. 834) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 ( 834), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display command set by the processing of S3306 is received, the display control device 114 displays the display mode for indicating the charge completion included in the received display command on the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 793 ( a) see).
Here, in this 29th control example, among the special symbol final fluctuation (special figure 2 final fluctuation) in the time saving state, out of the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 final fluctuation for indicating that the lottery result is out, The effect (FINAL charge effect) that prompts the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation using a partial period is configured to be executable (Fig. 793 (a)). Then, immediately after the FINAL charge performance is executed (within 1 second), when the special figure 2 suspension is obtained, the special figure 2 suspension is obtained after the FINAL charge performance has passed for 1 second. (“Charging completed” display) is configured to be executed.
Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S3306, the current time is the charge completion display standby period (the period from the start of the FINAL charge effect to the elapse of one second). ), and if it is not the waiting period, display mode for notifying that charging is completed in a mode corresponding to the effect currently being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. indicate. On the other hand, if it is the standby period, only the process of temporarily storing the reception of the display command indicating the completion of charging (the process of setting a dedicated standby flag to ON) is executed to indicate that the charging is completed. The display of the display mode for notification is made to stand by. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period has passed, it is determined whether the standby flag is set to ON, that is, whether the display of the display mode for notifying the completion of charging is waiting. When it is determined that the battery is on standby, a display mode is displayed to indicate that charging is completed, and the standby flag is turned off.
In the processing of S3305, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving final variation (S3305: No), then it is determined whether the current special symbol variation (during special figure variation) (S3307), special figure variation If it is determined that it is in the middle (S3307: Yes), it is determined whether the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S3308), and if it is determined that the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, If the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set is a special symbol variation that wins and is a special symbol variation that corresponds to the winning that has already been notified in the holding continuous production (S3308 : Yes), set a display command for indicating the effect mode suggesting the next holding group (S3309), and shift to the process of S3310. On the other hand, in the process of S3307, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure fluctuation (S3307: No), the process of S3308 and S3309 is skipped, the process of S3310 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 837, the state command processing (S3212) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 837 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S3212). This state command processing (S3212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 835) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the state command processing (S3212) will be described below.
When the state command process (S3212) is executed, first, information for indicating the current game state included in the state command received this time is stored in the subsidiary game state storage area 223g (S3401). Then, it is determined whether the game state has shifted to the normal state (S3402), and if it is determined that it has shifted to the normal state (S3402: Yes), the right-handed flag 223r is set to OFF (S3403), and the time saving The information stored in the information update area 223h is cleared (S3404). Concretely, it clears the information (the number of small hits, the number of special symbol variations, the number of second special symbol variations) for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, although the normal state is set, the production based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h is executed, and the production that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed. It can be suppressed. After that, it is determined whether there is a second special symbol pending memory (special figure 2 pending) (S3405), and if it is determined that there is a special figure 2 pending (S3405: Yes), a display command indicating that it is being pulled back Set (S3410), and terminate this process. A display mode (see FIG. 793(b)) indicating that the current is being pulled back is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display command set in the process of S3410. On the other hand, in the process of S3405, if it is determined that there is no special figure 2 reservation, that is, if it is determined that the normal state is set in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired (S3405: No), rush period measurement The value of the counter 223m is cleared to 0 (S3407), a display command indicating the normal state (normal state) is set (S3408), a display command for guiding left-handed hitting is set (S3409), and this processing ends. do. That is, in this control example, the duration of the rush period, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is not limited only to the time when the time saving state is set, but the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is executed. It is configured so that the measurement can be continued even in the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game period is advantageous to the player regardless of the set game state. Also, in the processing of S3402, if it is determined that the game state has not transitioned to the normal state (S3402), then it is determined whether the state has shifted to the time saving state (S3411), and the state has shifted to the time saving state If it is determined (value 3411 of the SW effective time counter 223q: Yes), the time saving information included in the received status command is stored in the time saving information update area 223h (S3412), and a display command indicating that the rush is in progress is set. (S3413), the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is set to 1 (S3414), and this processing ends. Moreover, in the process of S3411, when it discriminate|determines that it has not shifted to a time saving state (S3411:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 838, the processing contents of the win-related processing (S3214) will be described. FIG. 838 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S3214). This hit-related process (S3214) is a process that is executed when a command related to a big win game or a small win game is received, and determines the effect mode of the effect (hit game effect) that is executed during each win game. process is executed.
When the hit related process (S3214) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot start command is received (S3501), and if it is determined that the jackpot start command is received (S3501: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S3502), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3501: No), then it is determined whether a jackpot related command (opening command, interval command, ending command, etc.) has been received (S3503), and the jackpot When it is determined that the related command has been received (S3503: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S3504), and then the process ends.

In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the jackpot related command is not received (S3503: No), then it is determined whether the small hit start command is received (S3505), and the small hit start command is received When it is determined (S3505: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S3506), and this process ends. In the process of S3505, if it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S3505: No), then small hit related commands (small hit start command, small hit end command, V passing command, etc.) are received It is determined whether (S3507), and if it is determined that the small hit related command has been received (S3507: Yes), the small hit related process is executed (S3508) and this process ends. Moreover, in the process of S3507, when it determines with not having received the small hitting related command (S3507:No), this process is complete|finished as it is. In addition, the detailed contents of the small hit related process (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 839, the processing contents of the jackpot related processing (S3504) will be described. FIG. 839 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S3504). In this jackpot-related processing (S3504), the jackpot game (initial jackpot game) executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the jackpot game other than the jackpot game are determined. processing is executed. When the jackpot related process (S3504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot game to be executed this time is the jackpot game (initial jackpot game) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state. It is determined (S3601), and when it is determined that it is the first jackpot game (S3601: Yes), first jackpot related processing is executed (S3602), and the process proceeds to S3614. Also, if it is determined that it is not the first big hit game in the processing of S3601 (S3601: No), then it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S3603), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3603 : Yes), sets an opening command for display (S3604), and proceeds to the processing of S3614.
In the processing of S3603, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3603: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3605). Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3606), the round number command for display is set (S3607), the value of the round number counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S3608), and the during-round effect processing is executed. (S3609), and the process proceeds to S3614.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3605 that the round number command has not been received (S3605: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S3610), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3610 : Yes), it is determined whether the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S3611), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3611: No), the value of the round number counter is cleared (S3612) , the ending command for display is set (S3613), and the process proceeds to S3614. Also, when it is determined in the process of S3611 that the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S3611: Yes), the process of S3612 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3613.

In other words, when the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, the value of the round number counter for accumulating the number of rounds of the big winning game is not cleared when the big winning game ends. Therefore, when the second big winning game (the big winning game targeted for the holding continuous production) is executed after the holding consecutive production is executed, the display indicating the number of rounds of the big winning game is the number of the previous big winning game. It will be displayed taking over the number of rounds. By configuring in this way, when the holding continuous performance is executed, it becomes easy to execute a series of performances over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to easily provide a performance with a sense of unity. .
In addition, when the holding continuous effect is continuously executed, the display mode for displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game becomes a display mode corresponding to a large number of rounds. It is possible to display a display mode corresponding to the number of rounds exceeding the possible number of rounds. By configuring in this way, a jackpot game is played in a state where a special figure 2 hold is acquired, with the aim of continuously executing the holding series production for the player in order to display a larger number of rounds. It is possible to make it easier to play a right-handed game aiming to execute.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3610 that the ending command has not been received (S3610: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S3614), and then this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 840, the processing contents of the during-round effect processing (S3609) executed in the jackpot related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 839) will be described. FIG. 840 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the during-round effect processing (S3609). In this round production process (S3609), other than the first jackpot game, that is, among the jackpot productions in the jackpot game executed during the rush period including the time saving state, the production mode executed during the round game (holding continuous production) A process for determining the effect mode) is executed.

When the round production process (S3609) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is a command indicating the final round of the jackpot game (S3701), and it is determined that it is not a command indicating the final round. If so (S3701: No), the process corresponding to other commands for determining the effect mode corresponding to the received round number is executed (S3708), and this process ends.
In the processing of S3701, if it is determined that the command indicates the final round (S3701: Yes), then read the special figure 2 pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S3702), read It is determined whether or not winning information (hitting pending) for winning (minor winning, big winning) is included in the winning information (S3703). In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the hit hold is included (S3703: Yes), it is determined whether the hold run flag 223o is set to ON (S3704), and it is determined that it is set to ON. If so (S3704: Yes), an effect mode (holding continuous effect) for indicating the holding continuous effect is determined (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708.
In addition, in the processing of S3704, if it is determined that the holding consecutive effect is not set to ON (S3704: No), whether or not to execute the holding consecutive effect is determined by lottery (S3706), and the execution of the holding consecutive effect is executed. If determined (S3707: Yes), the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3707, when it is determined that the holding continuous effect is not executed (S3707: No), the process relating to the holding continuous effect is skipped and the process proceeds to S3708. On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the winning suspension is not included (S3703: No), it is determined whether the suspension consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S3710), and if it is set to ON If so (S3710: Yes), the pending flag 223o is set to OFF (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3708. If it is determined in the process of S3710 that the pending flag 223o is not set to ON (S3710: No), the process of S3712 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3708.
Next, with reference to FIG. 841, the processing contents of the first-time jackpot-related processing (S3602) executed in the jackpot-related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 839) will be described. FIG. 841 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first-time jackpot-related processing (S3602). In this first-time jackpot-related processing (S3602), a process for determining various production modes of the jackpot production in the first-time jackpot game (production mode of the subjugation production) is executed.

When the first jackpot related process (S3602) is executed, it is first determined whether an opening command has been received (S3801), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3801: Yes), an opening command for display is set. Then (S3802), the subjugation effect mode determination process is executed (S3803), the process of S3812 is executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S3801, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3804), and if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3804: Yes), extracts the number of rounds from the received command (S3805), sets the number-of-rounds command for display (S3806), executes the first-time jackpot round production process (S3807), and proceeds to S3812. .
In the process of S3804, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3804: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S3808). Yes), effect processing during the first interval is executed (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. Also, in the process of S3808, if it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S3808: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S3810), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3810: Yes). , sets an ending command for display (S3811), proceeds to the processing of S3812, and when it is determined in the processing of S3810 that the ending command has not been received (S3812: No), proceeds to S3812.
Next, with reference to FIG. 842, the details of the subjugation presentation mode determination process (S3803) will be described. FIG. 842 is a flow chart showing the details of the subjugation effect mode determination process (S3803). In this subjugation performance mode determination process (S3803), a process for determining the performance mode of the subjugation performance to be executed during the initial jackpot game is executed.
When the subjugation effect mode determination process (S3803) is executed, first, based on the jackpot type set this time and the value of the first effect counter 223f1, the defeat number selection table 222b is referred to, and the total number of enemies is determined. It determines (S3901), and sets a value corresponding to the determined total number of enemies to the number-of-remains-defeated counter 223j (S3902). After that, it is determined whether the total number of enemies determined this time (the value set in the number of remaining subjugation counter 223j) is "777" (S3903). The number displayed flag 223k is set to ON (S3905), the special subjugation effect scenario is determined from the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c (S3906), the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is set to "5" (S3907), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3903, if it is determined that the total number of enemies is not "777"("1000" or "500") (S3903: No), the determined total number of enemies, the jackpot type, and the acquired Based on the value of the second effect counter 223f2, the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c is referred to determine the subjugation effect scenario (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3907.
The effect scenario determined in the processing of S3904 and S3906 is temporarily stored in the storage area of the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the subjugation effect executed this time ends. It is configured to be readable until
Next, with reference to FIG. 843, the processing contents of the effect processing during the first big winning round (S3807) will be described. FIG. 843 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect processing during the first big winning round (S3807). In this first-time jackpot round production process (S3807), a process for determining the production mode of the attack production executed during the round game of the first-time jackpot game in which the subjugation production is executed is executed.
When the effect processing during the first big hit round (S3807) is executed, first, it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the command indicating the first round (S4001), and it is determined that it is the command indicating the first round. If so (S4001: Yes), set a display command to indicate the total number of enemies corresponding to the value of the number of remaining defeated counter 223j (S4002), and then check whether the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON. (S4003), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4003: No), the timing of occurrence of the hard attack effect specified by referring to the determined subjugation production scenario and the value of the subjugation number counter 223i Based on this, the display mode of the button icon is determined (S4005), a display command for indicating the determined display mode of the button icon is set (S4006), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4003, if it is determined that the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON (S4003: Yes), the button icon displayed in a special display mode based on the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is determined (S4004), a display command for indicating the display mode of the determined button icon is set (S4006), and this processing ends. That is, when the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON, since the player has already been informed that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, using the display mode of the button icon A special display mode is determined for informing the player that the time saving state is set without suggesting the performance contents of the subjugation performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contradiction in the performance modes of the plurality of performances for suggesting the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. can do.
In the processing of S4001, if it is determined that the command does not indicate the first round (S4001: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command indicating the second to sixth rounds has been received (S4007). If it is determined that the round number command indicating the sixth round has been received (S4007: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4008), and is not greater than 0 ( 0) (S4008: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4008, if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4008: Yes), the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is subtracted by 1 (S4009), and the attack presentation is performed based on the content of the subjugation presentation scenario that has been determined. is determined (S4010), the operation effective time corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the SW effective time counter 223q (S4011), the display command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (S4012), End this process.
Also, in the process of S4007, if it is determined that the round number command indicating the second to sixth rounds has not been received (S4007: No), the process corresponding to other commands (S4013) is executed, and this process is executed. finish.
Next, with reference to FIG. 844, the processing contents of the effect processing during the first interval (S3809) will be described. FIG. 844 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect processing during the first interval (S3809). In the first interval production process (S3809), during the jackpot game in which the subjugation production is executed, if the interval period is set, the production mode according to the production result of the attack production executed during the previous round game. is executed.

When the effect processing during the first interval (S3809) is executed, first, the value of the remaining subjugation number counter 223j is read (S4101), and whether it matches the content of the subjugation effect scenario that has been set (same as the determined value). (S4102), and if it is determined that they are the same (S4102: Yes), the normal interval effect mode during the subjugation effect is determined (S4103), and a display command corresponding to each determined effect mode is set. (S4111), this processing ends. That is, when the interval effect mode is determined by the process of S4103, the additional attack effect is not executed.
If it is determined in the process of S4102 that they are not the same (S4102: No), then the additional decrease value is determined by referring to the additional decrease value selection table 222d (S4104), and the determined additional decrease value is specified. It is determined whether it is a decrease value (a specific number) (S4105), and if it is determined that it is not a specific decrease value (S4105: No), an interval effect mode (additional attack effect Mode) is determined (S4106), the value of the remaining defeat number counter 223j is updated to a value corresponding to the additional decrease value (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4111.
In addition, in the processing of S4105, if it is determined that it is a specific reduction value (S4105: Yes), the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON (S4108), and rewriting to a special subjugation effect scenario is determined (S4109 ), determine the effect mode corresponding to the special subjugation effect scenario (S4110), and shift to the process of S4111. Next, with reference to FIG. 845, the processing contents of the small winning related processing (S3508) will be described. FIG. 845 is a flow chart showing the details of the small hit related process (S3508). This small winning related process (S3508) is a process executed during a small winning game like the small winning related process (see S4729 in FIG. 392) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example described above. At the timing when the small hit game is started (S4201: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4202), and when the right hitting flag 223r is not set to ON (S4203: No) , the right-handed flag 223r is set to ON (S4204), and the processing (S4205) of setting the display command for guiding the right-handed game is executed. Also, at the end timing of the small hit game, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag (flag indicating that V is not won during the small hit game) is set to ON (S4207: Yes), the small (S4210) indicating that the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the winning game (indicating that the punctured) display small winning end command is set (S4210), or when it is determined that the small winning attention flag is not ON (S4207: No) , a small winning end command for display is set to indicate that the big winning game is started (S4208). Furthermore, when the V passing command is received during the small hitting game (S4211: Yes), it is determined whether the timing of receiving the V passing command is 4 seconds after the start of the small hitting (S4212), 4 seconds If it has passed (S4212: Yes), a display V effect command for informing the player of the V prize is set (S4214), and a process relating to a small hit caution flag is executed. Also, if the timing of receiving the V passing command is within 4 seconds from the start of the small hit, that is, if it is determined that the first guidance notification in the small hit game has not been completed (S4212: No ), the V winning flag 223s is set to ON without setting the V effect command for display (S4213), and this processing is terminated. By configuring in this way, the execution timing of the V effect for informing the player of the V winning can be varied according to the timing of the V winning of the game ball during the small winning game.
Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S3114) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 846 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S3114). As shown in FIG. 846, the variable display setting process (S3114) executes the same process as the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66) in the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. . Next, with reference to FIG. 847, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304) will be described. FIG. 847 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304). This variable effect setting process (S4304) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 846), and is for determining the effect mode of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation. process is executed.

When the variable effect setting process (S4304) is executed, first, the current game state is read out from the sub-game state storage area 223g (S4401), and it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S4402). If it is determined to be in the state (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation to be executed is the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) (S4403), and it is determined that it is a special figure 2 variation. If so (S4403: Yes), based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern, the effect mode for the pullback mode (for the pullback effect) is determined (S4409), and this processing ends.
In the process of S4403, when it is determined that it is not a special figure 2 variation (it is a first special symbol variation) (S4403: No), it is determined whether the effect fixed flag 223t is set to ON (S4404), ON (S4404: Yes) Based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern, the effect mode of the variation effect is determined (S4405), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the effect fixing flag 223t is not set to ON, that is, it is possible to change the stage transition (S4404: No), the effect stage data table 222e is referred to. Whether or not the transition condition is satisfied is specified (S4406), and then it is determined whether the stage transition condition is satisfied (S4407). If it is determined (S4408), the process proceeds to S4405, and if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the transition condition for stage transition is not satisfied (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. do. Also, in the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (S4402: No), time saving production for determining the production mode of the variable production during the time saving state Setting processing (S4410) is executed, and this processing ends.
Here, with reference to FIG. 848, the processing contents of the effect setting processing for time saving (S4410) will be described. FIG. 848 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting process for time saving (S4410). In this time saving effect setting process (S4410), the process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect during the time saving state, and the time saving final change among the variable effects corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time saving state A process for setting a display mode for prompting acquisition of special figure 2 reservation is executed.
When the time saving effect setting process (S4410) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation of this time is the special figure 2 (special figure 2 fluctuation) (S4501), and it is determined that it is the special figure 2 fluctuation If (S4501: Yes), then it is determined whether it is a time saving final variation (S4502), and if it is determined that it is a time saving final variation (S4502: Yes), then the lottery result is out is determined (S4503).

In the process of S4503, if it is determined that the lottery result is out (S4503: Yes), that is, if the special symbol fluctuation of this time is the final special figure 2 deviation fluctuation in the time saving state, special figure 2 hold is set (S4504), the effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4505), and the process ends. Also, S4501: No, S4502: No, or S4503: If the processing of No is executed, the conditions for setting the display command for prompting acquisition of special figure 2 pending are not met, so the processing of S4505 as it is to
Next, with reference to FIG. 849, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S3112) will be described. FIG. 849 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering update process (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is a process that is executed periodically (2 milliseconds). Then, a process for determining the effect mode is executed.
When the performance update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress (S4601), and if it is determined that the small hit game is in progress (S4601: Yes), the small hit game Medium update processing is executed (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (S4601: No), then the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is greater than 1, that is, the current rush state. (S4603), and if it is greater than 1 (S4603: Yes), the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is updated (S4604) to correspond to the updated value of the rush period measuring counter 223m. A display command for indicating the rush period to be displayed is set (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4606.
In the process of S4606, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is greater than 1, that is, whether the operation valid period (SW valid time) is currently in progress (S4606). (S4606: Yes), update the value of the SW valid time counter 223q (S4607), set a display command to indicate the period corresponding to the updated value of the SW valid time counter 223q (S4608), S4609 to process.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is not greater than 1 (S4606: No), or if the process of S4608 is completed, other effects update process is executed (S4609), End this process. Here, in the processing of S4609, processing for updating the values of various counters (not shown in FIG. 849) is executed, and an effect mode is determined according to the update result.
Next, with reference to FIG. 850, the processing contents of the update processing during small winning game (S4602) executed in the effect update processing (see S3112 in FIG. 849) will be described. FIG. 850 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the update processing during small winning game (S4602). In this small winning game updating process (S4602), a process for setting the display of the display mode displayed based on the passage of time during the small winning game is executed.
When the update process during the small hit game (S4602) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game (S4701). That is, in the processing of S4701, it is determined whether or not the notification period of the initial game guidance notification executed during the small winning game has ended. In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the timing has passed four seconds (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the V winning flag 223s is set to ON (S4702), and if it is set to ON. If it is determined that the player has won the game (S4702: Yes), the V effect command for display is set (S4703), the V winning flag 223s is set to OFF (S4704), and the process ends.
In other words, in the process of S4703, the game ball entered the specific area (V gate) during the notification period of the initial game guide notification, and in a state where the player is waiting for the execution of the V effect, A process for executing the V effect is executed based on the fulfillment of the condition for executing the V effect. By configuring in this manner, the V effect can be executed immediately after the notification period of the initial game guidance notification has passed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that it is not the timing that 4 seconds have passed (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the small hit caution flag is set to ON (S4705) and set to ON If it is determined that it is not (S4705: No), then 5 seconds have passed since the start of the winning game (5 seconds have passed since the round game in the small winning game started) is determined (S4706 ), if it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed (S4706: Yes), it is determined whether V has passed (whether the game ball has already entered the specific area) (S4707), and V has passed If it is determined that it is not (S4707: No), the small hit caution flag is set to ON (S4708), and the display warning command for prompting the V winning is set (S4709), and this process ends do.
Also, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag is set to ON in the process of S4705 (S4705: Yes), in the process of S4706, if it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed (S4706: No), S4707 In the processing of , when it is determined that there is V passage (the game ball has already entered the specific area) (S4707: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 851, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 851 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 is operated by the player to enhance the effect. In order to execute an effect corresponding to the , processing for generating and setting a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection button 600 is executed.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) is executed, first, the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light amount adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) is pressed. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (S4801). If it is determined that there has been an operation (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is standby (demonstration screen is being displayed) (S4802). ), the environment information corresponding to the game environment storage area 223u is updated corresponding to the contents of the button operation (S4803), the mode corresponding to the updated environment information is determined (S4804), and the determined mode is supported. A display command to be displayed is set (S4816), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that it is not in the standby state (S4802: No), then it is determined whether it is in the mode selection state (S4805), and if it is determined that it is in the mode selection state (S4805) : Yes), the display position of the selection cursor is determined in accordance with the button operation content (S4806), and the process proceeds to S4816. By the processing of this S4806, the position of the arrow ya1 is switched on the effect mode selection screen which is the mode selection state described above with reference to FIG. 799(b). In the process of S4805, if it is determined that the mode is not selected (S4805: No), the process proceeds directly to S4816.
If it is determined in the processing of S4801 that the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or light intensity adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has not been operated (S4801: No), then it is determined whether or not the decision button 600a has been operated (S4807), and if it is determined that there has been an operation (S4807: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is standby (demonstration screen is being displayed). Then (S4808), if it is determined that it is in the standby state (S4808: Yes), display of the mode selection state is determined (S4809), and the process proceeds to S4816.
On the other hand, in the process of S4808, if it is determined that it is not in the standby state (S4808: No), then it is determined whether it is in the mode selection state (S4810), and if it is determined that it is in the mode selection state (S4810) : Yes), the effect mode being selected is stored in the game environment storage area 223u (S4811), then it is determined whether the selected effect mode is the fixed mode (S4812), and if it is determined to be the fixed mode (S4812: Yes), the fixed mode setting process is executed (S4813), and the process proceeds to S4816.
In the process of S4812, when it is determined that the mode is not fixed (S4812: No), the effect fixed flag 223t is set to OFF (S4814), and the process proceeds to S4816. Also, in the process of S4807, if it is determined that the decision button 600a is not operated (S4807: No), then the effect button operation process is executed (S4815), and then the process proceeds to S4816.

Here, the processing contents of the fixed mode setting processing (S4813) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 852 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fixed mode setting process (S4813). This fixed mode setting process (S4813) is performed when the fixed mode is selected. In the twenty-ninth control example, the fixed mode is configured to be arbitrarily selectable by the player, and when this fixed mode is set, the stage change effect is not executed. However, there is a case where an effect mode including a stage change effect is set as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed later. In this case, when the fixed mode is selected while the look-ahead effect of the effect mode including the stage change effect is being executed, the stage change effect is executed even though the fixed mode is set. There was a problem.
In addition, when the special 1 suspension is obtained in a state where another production mode is selected in which the stage change production is executed when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), In some cases, a look-ahead effect accompanied by a stage change effect may be set for the special figure 1 suspension in which the special symbol lottery is executed after the stage change effect is executed, and even in this case, the effect including the stage change effect When the fixed mode is selected while the look-ahead effect of the mode is being executed, there is a problem that the stage change effect is executed in spite of the fixed mode being set.
On the other hand, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the fixed mode is selected while the stage change effect is waiting, it is possible to variably set whether or not to execute the stage change effect and the effect mode of the stage change effect. It consists of
Specifically, when the fixed mode setting process (S4813) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the stage is waiting for a change (S4901), and if it is determined that the stage is not on standby (S4901: No) Since it is not in a state where it has already been determined that the stage change effect is to be executed, the effect fixed flag 223t is set to ON (S4902), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S4901, if it is determined that the stage is waiting for change (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether the prefetching effect is in progress (waiting for the stage change based on the prefetching effect) (S4903), and the prefetching effect If it is determined that it is in the middle (S4903: Yes), the special symbol lottery result of the next change (result of the special symbol lottery to be read ahead) is pre-determined (S4904), suggesting that the stage change effect will be executed. stage change suggestion effect (see FIG. 800(a)) is executed (S4905). Yes), the stage change mode is determined as it is (S4909), the process of S4902 is executed, and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4903, if it is determined that the present is not in the pre-reading effect, that is, it is in the standby state of the stage change effect that is executed based on the number of special symbol changes (S4903: No), the stage change effect The effect information is cleared (S4907), the effect mode in which the stage change is not executed is determined instead (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. By constructing in this way, after the fixed mode is set, the stage change performance executed as the lively performance is executed instead of the look-ahead performance for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery in advance. can be suppressed, it is possible to easily provide an effect desired by the player.
Also, in the processing of S4906, if it is determined that the win has not been made, that is, in a state where the stage change effect is determined as the pre-reading effect based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result), and the pre-reading effect is targeted. If the result of the special symbol lottery (preliminary determination result) is out (S4906: No), the processing of S4907 and S4908 described above is executed, then the processing of S4902 is executed, and this processing ends .
In other words, even if the stage change effect is determined as the look-ahead effect, if the result of the look-ahead effect (lottery result of the target special symbol lottery) is out, the stage change effect is executed. It is configured to determine a new performance mode so that it is not done. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a player who has arbitrarily selected the fixed mode from being less motivated to play due to the execution of the stage change effect.

As described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the player selects the fixed mode, the stage change effect is determined as the effect mode of the effect (prefetch effect) to be executed later. Also, it is configured to be able to additionally execute the process of determining the performance mode so that the stage change performance is not executed except when the performance result of the look-ahead performance for executing the stage change performance is the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot. is doing.
By configuring in this way, when the stage change effect is executed after the player arbitrarily selects the fixed mode, that is, when the effect contradicting the mode type selected by the player is executed Since the privilege can be given to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to play due to the execution of an undesired performance.
Next, with reference to FIG. 853, the processing contents of the production button operation processing (S4815) will be described. FIG. 853 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect button operation process (S4815). In this effect button operation process (S4815), the game contents at the time when the effect button 22a is pressed are determined, and the process for determining the effect mode corresponding to the game contents being executed is executed.
When the production button operation process (S4815) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is during the effective period of the production SW, that is, whether the pressing operation to the production button 22a can be effectively determined (S5001), If it is determined that it is the effect SW effective period (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether the present pull-back effect is being performed (S5002), and if it is determined that the pull-back effect is being performed (S5002: Yes) , determines an effect mode for indicating the effect result determined as the effect result of the pullback effect (S5003), and proceeds to the processing of S5008.

On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if it is determined that it is not in the pullback effect (S5002: No), then it is determined whether it is in the subjugation effect (S5004), and if it is determined that it is in the subjugation effect ( S5004: Yes), with the determined value as the upper limit, the number of enemy reductions this time is determined by lottery (S5005), the presentation mode corresponding to the determined number of enemy reductions is determined (S5006), and the determined number of enemy reductions is determined. Then, the value of the counter for the number of remaining defeats is updated (S5007), and the process proceeds to S5008.
If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the effective SW for effect is not valid (S5001: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5004 that the subjugation effect is not in progress (S5004: No), the process of S5008 is performed. Move to In the process of S5008, various effects modes to be executed when the effect button 22a is pressed are determined, and this process ends.
By executing the processes of S5005 to S5007, the number of enemies to be reduced when the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect is determined. Here, the number of enemy reductions determined in the processing of S5005 is configured so that prohibition processing is executed, and the number of remaining enemies corresponds to a specific number during the attack production that is executed during the normal jackpot game. Constraint processing is performed so that the number of enemy reductions that would result in a value that would be By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the display of a specific number as the effect result of the attack effect executed during the normal jackpot game.
<Thirtieth Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 854 to 861. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example differs from the above-described twenty-ninth control example in that the timing at which the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established is different. The pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example described above, when a small hit is won in a special pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, is a time saving at the timing when the special pattern (small hit pattern) indicating the small win winning is stopped and displayed. It was configured so that the termination condition was met and the normal state was set. In other words, it is configured to be in a normal state during the execution period of the small winning game.

By configuring in this way, the game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 out of the game balls shot by the right-handed game that is executed during the small winning game are transferred to the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the entry of balls into the ball and suppress the excessive provision of prize balls to the player during the small winning game.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example is different from the twenty-ninth control example described above in that the establishment timing of the time saving end condition based on the winning of the small prize is different. Specifically, the difference is that the time-saving end condition is established at the timing when the small winning game ends, not at the timing when the special symbol (small winning symbol) indicating the winning of the small winning is stopped and displayed. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even during the small winning game, so the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) It is possible to make it easy to execute a jackpot game in the state of winning.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above ends the time saving state at the timing when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of winning, the time saving state will be set only for the fluctuation time (1 second) of the second special symbol lottery that won the small winning, and it is difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 hold during that time saving state. There was a problem that such an event would occur. In addition, during the jackpot game, a suspension continuous effect, that is, an effect for indicating that the winning information indicating winning (small winning, jackpot winning) is included in the acquired special figure 2 reservation is executed. In this case, the player can grasp that the next winning game (small winning game, big winning game) will be executed without executing a right-handed game for acquiring a new special figure 2 reservation, There is a possibility that the player interrupts the right-handed game during the period from execution of the holding continuous effect to the start of the next winning game.
In this way, when the right-handed game is interrupted, at the time when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery notified in advance that the winning will be won by the one-time reservation continuous effect. Since the special figure 2 suspension has not been acquired, there was a problem that the condition for continuously executing a plurality of suspension consecutive effects is difficult to be established. Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, in a state where the holding continuous effect has been executed once, the condition for executing the holding continuous effect is satisfied ( By structuring so that the holding consecutive performance can be easily executed when the special figure 2 holding that wins the winning is acquired), the holding consecutive production is biased (continuously) to be executed, and the performance effect is enhanced. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a game in which the execution condition of the holding continuous effect is difficult to be satisfied There is a problem in that the execution of the "pull out game" reduces the chances of successive execution of the holding consecutive effect, and the effect of the effect cannot be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example, since the time saving state can be continued until the small winning game ends, the right-handed game executed during the small winning game is fired. It is possible to make it easier for the game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 to enter the second ball entrance 640 out of the game balls that have entered. Therefore, as in the 29th control example described above, when the time saving state is established at the timing when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (when the time saving end condition is established before the small winning game is executed), The period in which the time saving state continues can be lengthened, and the jackpot game can be easily executed in the state that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired.
Also, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, during the small winning game period, that is, the period during which the right-handed game for passing the game ball to the specific area (V gate) 650e3 is executed is shortened. state, even if the holding continuous effect is executed, the player can reliably play the right-handed game (play the game ball in a specific area (V gate ) 650e3 (Right-handed game for passing (V winning)) can be performed, so it is possible to make it easier to acquire special figure 2 reservation.
That is, in the thirtieth control example, it is configured so that the second privilege (special figure 2 hold) can also be acquired during the period of the right-handed game for acquiring the first privilege (V prize). This control example differs from the above-described twenty-ninth control example in that By configuring in this way, even if the player does not execute the right-handed game only for the purpose of acquiring the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation), the first privilege is acquired. Since the second privilege can be acquired during the right-handed game aiming to play, the player can play the game efficiently.
It should be noted that, as in the thirtieth control example, when a plurality of benefits can be acquired in duplicate, the period during which only one benefit can be acquired may be set short. The right-handed game for obtaining the privilege (V prize) is the right-handed game during the small winning game, and the right-handed game for obtaining the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation) is the right hand in the time saving state. In the case of a hitting game, if it is configured so that part of the game balls fired by the right-handed game during the small winning game can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, the small A short-time (0.5 second) variation time may be determined as the variation time of the special symbol variation for winning.

In other words, as the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation that won the small hit during the time saving state (the period during which the right-handed game is executed to acquire the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation)), the game ball is the second ball Even if a short period is set in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the mouth 640, a small winning game period (first Since the period during which a right-handed game is executed to obtain a privilege (V prize) is also a period during which the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, the game ball is placed in the second It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance 640 .
In this case, it corresponds to the special symbol variation that is performed as the variation time of the special symbol variation that is performed during the time saving state (right-handed game period for acquiring the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation)) Regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a uniform short variation time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The ease with which the ball can be hit may be varied. That is, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the lost winning is executed, the period during which the time saving state continues for the execution period of the small winning game is longer than when the special symbol variation corresponding to the small winning winning is executed. By configuring to be short, the time until the next special symbol variation is started is longer in the case where the special symbol variation in which the winning is lost is performed than in the case where the special symbol variation in which the small win is won is performed. It may be configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the ease with which a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state according to the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the result of the special symbol lottery not only in terms of whether or not the winning game is executed, but also in terms of whether or not the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained. can.
In addition, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation that is performed as the variation time of the special symbol variation that is performed during the time saving state (right-handed game period for acquiring the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation)) In this case, it corresponds to a small winning winning state in which the time saving state continues even during the small winning game period (period A (for example, 3 seconds)). For the special symbol variation, the variation time is B period (0.5 seconds), and for the special symbol variation corresponding to the lost winning, the variation time is 3.5 seconds C period (A (3 seconds) + B (0 .5 seconds)) can be set.
By configuring in this way, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the length of the time saving state that can be continued based on one special symbol lottery can be unified, so regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, It is possible to acquire a special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, in the above-described example, as elements included in the period in which the time saving state continues, the period during which the special symbol variation is executed and the period during which the small winning game is executed, but in detail , The period during which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (symbol fixed period) is also included. Therefore, the above-described technical concept may be applied by varying the length of the design fixing period instead of the variation time of the special symbol variation according to the result of the special symbol lottery.
<Regarding the effect content in the thirtieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 854, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example, the content of the characteristic effects different from the twenty-ninth control example described above will be described. This 30th control example is different from the 29th control example described above in that the time saving state continues even during the small winning game, and the contents of the display screen displayed during the small winning game (during the small winning game The content of the performance to be executed) is also made different correspondingly.
FIG. 854(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the small winning game targeted for the holding consecutive effect, and FIG. 854(b) is the display shown in FIG. 854(a). It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when special figure 2 pending is acquired in a state where the screen is displayed.
The display screen of FIG. 854(a) is during the small winning game notified by the holding consecutive effect with respect to the display screen during the small winning game (see FIG. 791(a)) in the 29th control example described above. The difference is that a display mode is displayed to indicate that a game ball is to be entered into the second ball entrance 640, and that a game guidance notification is displayed to guide the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. there is Other display contents are the same, and the same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 854(a), when the holding continuous effect is executed during the previous jackpot game, the main display is displayed after the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot game is executed. On the upper side of the area Dm, characters of "holding consecutive effect high probability" are displayed as an effect state display mode for indicating that the holding consecutive effect is executed with a high probability.
That is, in the thirtieth control example, similarly to the twenty-ninth control example described above, a state in which the holding continuous effect is being executed during the previous jackpot game, and the final round of the jackpot game to be executed next starts. If there is winning information indicating that the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired has been won (if the conditions for executing the holding consecutive production are satisfied), the holding consecutive production will be executed without fail. It is configured as follows. Therefore, by displaying the characters ``high probability of holding continuous effect'' on the display screen, the player is motivated to move the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to continuously execute the holding continuous effect. It is possible to play a game (acquire a special figure 2 hold) to enter the ball.
Then, in order to guide the player that the time saving state continues even during the small winning game period being executed and that it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, game guidance notification is provided. , in addition to the first arrow 810 that guides the game aiming at the V prize, the second arrow 810a that guides the game aiming at entering the second ball entrance 640 (acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation) is displayed. . In addition, FIG. 854(a) displays the display screen during the small hit game when the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired at the time when the small hit game is started.
By configuring in this way, a game aiming at the V prize indicated by the first arrow 810 and a game aiming at acquiring the special figure 2 reservation indicated by the second arrow 810a by the right hitting game executed during the small winning game , can be easily understood by the player.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 854(a), when a plurality of game guide notifications are displayed simultaneously, the display mode is set according to the game content notified by each game guide notification. Specifically, the V winning, which is the execution opportunity for executing the jackpot game, has a higher priority as game content than the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold required for continuing the holding continuous effect. The first arrow 810 is displayed larger than the second arrow 810a because it is higher (because the loss is greater if it cannot be obtained). With this configuration, even when a plurality of game guidance notifications for guiding different game contents are executed, the game can be executed based on the game guidance notification displayed in the largest size. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for a person.
In the thirtieth control example, the first arrow 810 is always displayed larger than the second arrow 810a. Depending on the situation, the notification mode (display mode) of each game guide notification may be configured to be variable. For example, the first arrow 810 is displayed larger than the second arrow 810a between the execution of the small winning game and the V winning of the game ball, and the small winning game is executed after the V winning of the game ball. If it is a period until, and the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, the second arrow 810a may be displayed larger than the first arrow 810. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand by the notification mode (display mode) of each game guide notification displayed on the display screen.
In addition, in the thirtieth control example, when a small winning game is executed, the display mode (each arrow) of each game guide notification described above is displayed, but the display timing is limited to this. It is sufficient that a player who has grasped the contents notified by each game guidance notification can execute the game notified by each game guidance notification, for example, before the small winning game is started. Each display mode may be displayed. Further, each display mode may be displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the small winning game was executed.
Furthermore, in the thirtieth control example, the first arrow 810 and the second arrow 810a are configured to be displayed at the same time. Immediately after the start, only the first arrow 810 may be displayed, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the second arrow 810a may be displayed. By configuring in this way, only the first arrow 810 can be displayed immediately after the small winning game is started, so that the player can see the main game to be executed during the small winning game ( A game aimed at winning a V prize) can be easily understood.

In addition, it may be configured to display the second arrow 810a before the first arrow 810, in this case, the second arrow 810a based on the fact that the time saving state is set, that is, the special figure 2 pending It is only necessary to execute the game guidance information for guiding the game aiming at winning, and to continue to display the second arrow 810a even after the small winning game is executed.
In the state shown in FIG. 854(a), when the special figure 2 reservation is obtained before the game ball wins V, the display screen shown in FIG. 854(b) is displayed. FIG. 854(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired in the state where the V prize is not won during the small hit game.
As shown in Figure 854 (b), when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, since it is not possible to acquire the special figure 2 reservation any more, the game guidance notification for aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation The second arrow 810a is hidden, the area around the second ball entrance 640 disappears from the image displayed in the display area Dm10, and the area around the second variable winning device 650 is enlarged and displayed. Then, based on the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation, the display mode of the remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the small hit game among the small hit time gauges ga2 is different from the normal display mode (in the figure, luminous display), and in the sub-display area Ds, while continuing the display of "Right hit and let the V attacker win!"
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game aiming at acquiring the special figure 2 reservation has been completed among the games executed during the small winning game. In addition, in FIG. 854(b), before the game ball is V winning, the display screen when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired is shown. When the game ball is V-won, different display screens are displayed depending on the timing.

Specifically, before acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, the game ball was made to win V during the period during which the first game guidance notification was executed (4 seconds after the small winning game was started) 854(a), that is, the display screen on which the first arrow 810 and the second arrow 810a are displayed, is displayed until the first game guidance notification is completed. After completion of the game guidance notification, a V effect screen indicating that the V prize has been won is displayed, and a display screen continuously displaying the second arrow 810a is displayed. In addition, when the game ball wins the V prize after the first game guidance notification is completed (while the second and subsequent game guidance notifications are executed), the V performance screen is displayed immediately after the V winning. At the same time, a display screen continuously displaying the second arrow 810a is displayed.
On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold is acquired during the period in which the first game guidance notification is executed (4 seconds after the start of the small winning game), wait for the end timing of the first game guidance notification. Without doing so, the second arrow 810a is hidden, and the display screen shown in FIG. 854(b) is displayed. In other words, among the plurality of game guidance notifications that can be displayed during the small winning game, the first game guidance notification for guiding the game aiming for V winning is a certain period of notification period regardless of whether there is a V winning. The second game guide notification for guiding the game aiming at acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation by constructing it so as to be secured ends at the time when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired regardless of the length of the notified period. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the contents of the main game to be executed during the small winning game in an easy-to-understand manner.
Also, although detailed illustration is omitted, if the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired at the time the small hitting game is started, the display screen displayed in FIG. 854 (b) immediately after the small hitting game is started, That is, the display mode (second arrow 810a) of the game guide notification for aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation is hidden, and the display mode for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has already been acquired is displayed. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the game contents to be executed during the small winning game in an easy-to-understand manner.
In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired at the time the small winning game is started, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the small winning game is started, specifically, the game ball is V winning The second arrow 810a is displayed in the period until the round game that makes it easy to make is executed, and the display screen displayed in FIG. The display mode (second arrow 810a) of the game guide notification for aiming at acquisition may be hidden, and the display mode for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has already been acquired may be displayed. . In this way, by configuring the effect for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired in a pseudo-executable manner, compared to the case where the second arrow 810a is hidden from the beginning, the special figure 2 reservation It is possible to notify the player of the acquisition in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the thirtieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 855 to 857, among the control processes executed by the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example, the main control in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above Contents different from the control processing executed by the device 110 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above in that the establishment timing of the time-saving end condition that is established when a small win is won is different. The contents of the control processing for updating various information regarding the establishment of the time saving end condition for ending the state are varied.
Specifically, for the 29th control example described above, instead of the time saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 820), the time saving update process (see S274 in FIG. 855), the small hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 832) ) in place of the small winning control process (see S1855 in FIG. 856) is executed. Other control processing contents are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same processing contents are omitted.
Figure 855 is part of the special symbol time variation process (see S104 in Figure 816) executed within the timer interrupt process (see Figure 815) executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 Time saving update It is the flowchart which showed the processing content of a process (S274). As shown in FIG. 855, the time saving update process (S274) is the time saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 820) of the twenty-ninth control example described above, and the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 820) executed when the small hit is won. 820 (see S615 of 820) is deleted, and the rest is the same.
That is, in the 29th control example described above, the time-saving end condition established based on the winning of the small hit is established when the special symbol (small winning symbol) for indicating the winning of the small win is stopped and displayed. It was configured so that the small winning time saving update process was executed. On the other hand, in the present thirtieth control example, the time-saving end condition is not established at the timing when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, but the time-saving end condition is established at the timing when the small winning game ends. there is Therefore, in the time-saving update process (S274) executed at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving update process (small hit time-saving update process) based on the small hit winning is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the establishment of the time saving end condition based on the stop display of the small winning symbol.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 855, the time saving update process (S274) is only different from the time saving update process (S224) in that the time saving update process based on the small hit winning is not executed, and other time saving end conditions The processing timing regarding the establishment of is the same. Therefore, for example, if the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation), that is, if the small hit is won in the final variation in the time saving state, the stop display timing of the special symbol variation (time saving update At the timing of processing execution), the time saving update process based on the small hit winning is not executed, but since the time saving update process based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, the time saving state at the stop display timing of the special symbol fluctuation will end. Therefore, the normal state is set during the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning in the final variation in the time saving state.
In addition, in the present thirtieth control example, as in the above-described twenty-ninth control example, the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving state, is longer than the other second special symbol variation during the time saving state. It is configured so that the variation time (20 seconds to 30 seconds) can be easily set, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving state, the special symbol variation is executed. Since it is possible to sufficiently secure a period during which the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the period, even if a small winning game in which the normal state is set at the start is executed Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 856, the contents of the small winning control process (S1855) will be described. FIG. 856 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the small hit control process (S1855). This small hit control process (S1855) is different from the above-described small hit control process (S1805 in FIG. 832) for updating the information on the elements for establishing the time saving end condition at the end timing of the small hit game. The difference is that processing is added, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
When the small hit control process (S1855) is executed, first, the same S2001 to S2018 processes as the above-described small hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 832) are executed. And, when the processing of S2018 is finished, the small winning time saving update processing is executed (S2051), and this processing is finished. In the small hit time saving update process (S2051), a process for subtracting the value of the small hit counter 203s at the end timing of the small hit game is executed, and when the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction becomes 0 , processing for ending the time saving state and setting the normal state is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 857, the processing contents of the small winning time saving update processing (S2051) will be described. Figure 857 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of small hitting time saving renewal processing (S2051). In this small winning time saving update process (S2051), a process for establishing a time saving end condition based on the fact that the small winning game has ended is executed. In addition, in the 29th control example described above, the small winning time saving update process (see S615 in FIG. 821) for establishing the time saving end condition based on the small winning winning is performed as a special symbol (small winning symbol ) is executed at the timing when is stopped and displayed, in this thirtieth control example, the processing for establishing the time-saving end condition based on the winning of the small winning is executed at the timing when the small winning game ends. However, among the processing contents to be executed, the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the small hit time saving update process (S2051) is executed, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit counter 203s (S702), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction is 0 (S703) . In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is 0 (S703: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S704), the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 (S705), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S706), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is not 0 in the process of S703 (S703: No), the various processes of S704 to S706 for ending the time saving state are skipped and this process ends.
As described above, in the thirtieth control example, the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the winning of the small winning, can be established at the timing when the small winning game ends. By configuring in this way, when the small winning is won during the time saving state, the small winning game can be executed in the time saving state, so the time from setting the time saving state to executing the small winning game Even if the period is short and the new special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained, it is possible to obtain the new special figure 2 reservation during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered because the jackpot game is easily started in a state in which the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained, making it difficult to execute the suspension continuous performance. can.
In addition, in this 30th control example, like the 29th control example described above, it is configured so that the time saving end condition is established based on the fact that the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state has won a small hit once. Therefore, the time saving state will end after the first small winning game is completed during the time saving state, but it is not limited to this, and the time saving end condition is established based on two or more small winnings. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific number of times a small win for which a specific small win type is set is won. Furthermore, it may be possible to set a time-saving end condition that associates the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the time-saving state with the result of the special symbol lottery. If the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a small win), the time-saving end condition is established based on the small win, and the result of the third special symbol lottery is a specific lottery. In the case of a result (for example, loss), it may be configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the loss winning. Moreover, when the special symbol lottery that results in a specific lottery result (for example, loss) continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the time saving end condition may be established.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the time saving state continues than the Pachinko machine 10 in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is fixed, the time saving state is achieved. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and the player getting bored with the game.
In addition, in the thirtieth control example, by configuring so as to end the time saving state at the timing when the small winning game ends, the second ball entrance 640 is opened using the small winning game period in which the right hitting game is executed. Although it is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball, it may be configured to be able to set a different timing as the timing to end the time saving state in order to achieve the same purpose. It may be configured to establish the time saving end condition at the timing when the round game is started. Even in this case, compared to the case where the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the time saving state can be set during the opening period of the small winning game, so the second ball entrance It is possible to make it easier to enter a game ball into 640. - 特許庁In particular, during the opening period of the small winning game, the second variable winning device 650 is not operated to the winning state even though the game guidance notification for aiming at the V winning is being executed. Therefore, the game ball fired by the right-handed game does not enter the second variable winning device 650, and reaches the electric accessory 640a provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650. As a result, the game ball can be efficiently reached to the second ball entrance 640, and the game ball shot by the right-handed game executed prior to the start of the round game can be effectively utilized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the timing at which the game guidance announcement for aiming for the V prize is executed.
In addition, the player is motivated to execute a right-handed game to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 before the round game is started and to acquire the special figure 2 reservation. As a result, since it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to win V immediately after the round game is started, the game ball cannot win V during the round game, and the player's willingness to play remarkably decreases. It is possible to prevent this from being put away and to facilitate increasing the number of jackpot games executed per unit time.
In the thirtieth control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is a small winning, the small winning game in which the time saving state continues and the small winning game in which the time saving state does not continue are reduced. Although it is configured to be able to be determined according to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the special symbol lottery that has been won, the timing at which the time-saving end condition is established can be changed according to the type of small winning, for example, without being limited to this. For example, when the time saving end condition is established based on the small winning winning in which the first small winning type is set, the time saving state is terminated after the small winning game ends, and the first small winning type is different. When the time-saving end condition is established based on the small-hit winning in which the second small-hit type is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the stop display timing of the small-hit pattern (or the start timing of the small-hit game) can be configured to

By constructing in this way, when the small win game that ends the time saving state is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the time saving state will continue even during the small win game. Therefore, in order to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the opening period of the small winning game, the game ball fired by the right-handed game continuously from the timing when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed is the second variable winning device 650 or It is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 .
Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to continue the right-handed game when a small hit is won during the time-saving state. In this case, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 is set so as to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the round game of the small winning game, It is preferable that the opening period of the winning game is the period in which the game ball is most likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 .
Furthermore, when the right-handed game is performed after grasping whether the time saving state continues during the small winning game, the fired game ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 during the opening period. It is preferable to configure the game board 13 so as to make it difficult to play. By configuring in this way, in order to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the small winning game, the right-handed game is continuously played before the small winning game is started. Since it is necessary to do so, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the subsequent game situation and selecting a game method.
<Regarding the processing contents of the audio ramp control device in the thirtieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 858 to 861, among the control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirtieth control example, processing contents different from those of the twenty-ninth control example described above will be described. do. In the thirtieth control example, in contrast to the twenty-ninth control example described above, among the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, the establishment timing of the time-saving end condition established based on the small winning win is the end of the small winning game. It is different in that the time saving state is continued even during the small winning game by configuring the timing. And also in the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113, there is a difference in that the content of the effect executed during the small winning game is different.

Specifically, in the thirtieth control example, in place of the pending information related process (see S3208 in FIG. 836), the pending information related process (see S3258 in FIG. The difference is that the small hit related process (see S3558 in FIG. 860) is executed instead of the hit related process (see S3508 in FIG. 845), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 858, the contents of the pending information related process (S3258) will be described. FIG. 858 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending information related process (S3258). This pending information related process (S3258) is different from the pending information related process (S3208 in FIG. 836) of the 29th control example described above, and the timing of receiving the pending ball number command indicating acquisition of special figure 2 pending is a small hit. A point of determining whether or not the game is in progress, and a point of executing a small hit pending acquisition process when a pending ball number command indicating the acquisition of the special figure 2 pending during the small hit game is received. different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the hold information related process (S3258) is executed, first, the same processes of S3301 to S3310 as the hold information related process (S3208 in FIG. 836) of the twenty-ninth control example described above are executed. And, in the processing of S3307, when it is determined that it is not during the special figure fluctuation (S3307: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning game is currently in progress (S3351). In addition, in the process of S3351, the information stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g, that is, the information for indicating the current game state stored based on the state command output from the main controller 110 is used. Determination of whether or not a small winning game is in progress is executed.
In the process of S3351, when it is determined that it is during the small hit game (S3351: Yes), the small hit during reservation acquisition process for determining the effect mode when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired during the small hit game Execute (S3352), and then proceed to the processing of S3310. On the other hand, in the process of S3351, when it is determined that the small winning game is not currently in progress (S3351: No), the process proceeds to S3310 without executing the process of S3352.

Next, with reference to FIG. 859, the contents of the small winning pending acquisition process (S3352) executed in the pending information related process (see S3258 in FIG. 858) will be described. Figure 859 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of reservation acquisition processing (S3352) in small hit. In this small hit pending acquisition process (S3352), when the special figure 2 suspension is acquired during the small winning game which is the target of the holding continuous production, that is, the holding continuous production is performed in a state where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired. In the state where the target small hit game is executed and the display screen of FIG. 854 (a) is displayed, processing for determining the effect mode that can be done when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired is executed.
When the small winning pending acquisition process (S3352) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S5101), and if it is determined to be ON (S5101: Yes ), determines the effect mode for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired during the small hit game, sets the display command corresponding to the determined effect mode (S5102), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5101 that the pending flag 223o is not set to ON (S5101: No), the process of S5102 is skipped and the present process ends.
The display command set by the process of S5102 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the command output process (see FIG. 834) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 ( 834), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S5102, the display mode indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 854 (b)). .
Next, with reference to FIG. 860, the processing contents of the small winning related processing (S3558) will be described. FIG. 860 is a flow chart showing the details of the small hit related process (S3558). In this small hit related process (S3558), when a small hit start command is received with respect to the small hit related process (see S3508 in FIG. 845) in the 29th control example described above, special figure 2 during the small hit game It is different in that a small hit middle guidance mode setting process for setting game guidance information for prompting acquisition of a hold is executed, and other processing contents are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit related process (S3558) is executed, first, similarly to the small hit related process (see S3508 in FIG. 845) of the 29th control example described above, it is determined whether the small hit start command is received (S4201 ), when it is determined that a small hit start command is received (S4201: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4202). The small hit start command for display set by the process of S4202 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the command of the main process (see FIG. 834) executed by the MPU 221 It is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the output process (see S3102 in FIG. 834). When the display control device 114 receives the small winning start command for display, in addition to the display mode for indicating that the small winning game has started, V as a game guide notification for guiding the game method during the small winning game. A display mode (first arrow 810) for aiming at winning is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 854(a)).
When the processing of S4202 is finished, then it is determined whether the right-handed flag is set to ON (S4203), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4203: Yes), special during the small hit game FIG. 2 Executes a guide mode setting process during a small hit for setting a game guide notification for prompting acquisition of a hold (S4251), and ends this process.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the right-handed flag is not set to ON in the processing of S4203 (S4203: No), the right-handed flag is set to ON (S4204), and a display command for guiding the right-handed game is set. (S4205), then the process of S4251 is executed, and this process ends. Here, in the processing of S4203, if it is determined that the right-handed flag is not set to ON, it is a case where the small hit is won in a state where the normal state is set, specifically, in the normal state The second special symbol lottery that was executed during the normal state using the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state when the small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery that was mainly executed (1/65536 winning probability) This is a case where a small hit is won (winning probability 1/2).
In the process of S4201, if it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S4201: No), S4206 to S4216 same as the small hit control process of the 29th control example (see S3508 in FIG. 845) Execute the process and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 861, the contents of the guidance mode setting process (S4251) during the small hit executed in the small hit related process (see S3558 in FIG. 860) will be described. FIG. 861 is a flow chart showing the contents of the guide mode setting process (S4251) during the small hit. In this small hit guide mode setting process (S4251), a process for determining the effect mode when the small hit game is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired is executed.
When the small hit guidance mode setting process (S4251) is executed, first, whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is 0, that is, whether the special figure 2 reservation is acquired It is determined (S5201), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is 0 (S5201: Yes), then it is determined whether the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S5202 ). In the processing of S5202, if it is determined that the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S5202: Yes), that is, when the small winning game that is the target of the holding consecutive production is executed, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. If it is not in the state, set the display command indicating the guidance mode for guiding the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation (S5204), and terminate this process.
The display command set by the process of S5204 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the command output process (see FIG. 834) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 ( 834), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S5204, the display mode (second arrow 810a, display 854(a)).
On the other hand, in the processing of S5202, if it is determined that the pending flag 223o is not set to ON (S5202: No), a display command is set to indicate that the time saving state continues (S5203 ), the process ends.

The display command set by the processing of S5203 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the command output processing (see FIG. 834) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 ( 834), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S5203, the display mode for indicating that the time saving state continues during the small winning game (the second image display including the area near the entrance 640) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 854(a)).
As described above, in the thirtieth control example, the display mode during the small winning game executed during the time saving state is based on the setting status of the pending consecutive flag 223o and the acquisition status of the special figure 2 pending. When the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, that is, when the holding consecutive effect is likely to be executed continuously, the holding consecutive flag 223o is not set to ON. Rather, it is configured to make it easier to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the small winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the jackpot game is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired.
<Thirty-first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 862 to 877. FIG. In the 31st control example, in contrast to the 29th control example described above, the production mode of the special figure 1 reserved symbol for showing the player the right to execute the acquired first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) They are different in that they are different. Other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
The pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example is configured so as to easily acquire the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) in the normal state, as in the 29th control example described above, and Special figure 1 reservation is configured to be able to acquire up to 4 pieces. And, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed as a display mode for letting the player grasp the number of acquired special figure 1 reserved. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to grasp whether it is possible to acquire a new special figure 1 reservation (whether the number of acquired special figure 1 reservations has reached the upper limit). Therefore, if it is possible to acquire a new special figure 1 reservation (the number of acquired special figure 1 reservations has not reached the upper limit), a new special figure 1 reservation In addition to being able to play games willingly to acquire , if it is not possible to acquire a new special figure 1 reservation (the number of special figure 1 reservations that have already been acquired has reached the upper limit), By interrupting the game for obtaining the FIG. 1 hold, it is possible to suppress the shooting of useless game balls.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 31st control example is configured to be able to execute a pending change effect using the special figure 1 pending symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . This hold change production is a production for suggesting to the player the preliminary determination result (prefetch result) of the prize information included in the acquired special figure 1 hold, and after acquiring the special figure 1 hold, the acquisition It is executed using the period (prefetching period) until the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed.
In other words, if the execution of the pending change effect is decided when the third special figure 1 suspension is acquired out of the special figure 1 suspension that can be acquired up to 4, the third special figure 1 suspension After the special figure 1 reserved design corresponding to is displayed on the display surface of the 3rd design display device 81, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed, the first and second special figure 1 reservation Over the period in which the special symbol variation based on is executed, a reservation change performance is executed for suggesting the preliminary determination result (prefetch result) of the winning information included in the third special symbol 1 reservation.
By configuring in this way, when the game is played while continuing the state in which a lot of special figure 1 reservations are acquired, the number of acquisitions of special figure 1 reservations is small (not acquired). It becomes easier to predict the result of the special symbol lottery in advance by the holding change performance than when playing a game. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to acquire more special figure 1 reserves.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example, in order to enhance the production effect by displaying the special figure 1 reserved pattern, the special figure 1 reserved pattern other than the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the reserved change effect is performed It is configured to be displayed in a display mode accompanied by a predetermined action. Specifically, each special figure 1 reserved design is displayed in a display mode (reference display mode) that sways in the vertical direction within a range that does not deviate from the display area (reserved display area) where each special figure 1 reserved design is displayed It consists of

By configuring in this way, the player has expectations that the pending change effect will be executed even for the special figure 1 pending pattern displayed in the standard display mode, not the object of the pending change effect. can be made easier.
Here, as described above, when the display mode with a predetermined action can be displayed as the reference display mode of the special figure 1 reserved symbol, a plurality of symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 There was a problem that it was difficult to synchronize the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design (up to 4 pieces).
In other words, it is configured so that the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquisition of the special figure 1 reserved, and in a display mode with a predetermined action from the display timing. When configured so that the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed according to the acquisition timing of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the timing of entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64. Since the timing is different, the special figure 1 reserved pattern already displayed is displayed as a predetermined action, and a new special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed at the initial position while being displayed at a position different from the initial position. When a predetermined action is executed, the action contents of the two special 1 reserved patterns are shifted, a plurality of special 1 reserved patterns are displayed in a display mode without a sense of unity, and the production effect is reduced. I had a problem with it.
On the other hand, in this 31st control example, it is configured to be able to execute a synchronization process for synchronizing the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design that has already been displayed. Specifically, when it is determined that it is time to execute a new effect, such as the timing at which a new special symbol variation is started, or the timing at which the stage is shifted, all the displayed special figures 1 reserved symbols , a process for executing a predetermined action from the initial position is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the display mode of each special figure 1 reserved pattern which has been executed separately based on the displayed timing, so that the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern has a sense of unity. It can be held, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, unify the control for displaying the special figure 1 suspension to indicate that the special figure 1 suspension has been acquired, and the control for executing a predetermined action for the displayed special figure 1 suspension Since it is possible, it is possible to simplify the control contents for displaying the special figure 1 reserved design.
In addition, in this 31st control example, regardless of the display timing of the special figure 1 reserved design, the same action is configured to be executed, and even if the display contents (action contents) of each special figure 1 reserved design are shifted Even if there is, it is configured to unify the display contents (action contents) of each special figure 1 reserved design by the synchronization process executed later, but not limited to this, for example, in the main controller 110, A special figure is provided based on the fact that the display timing is specified by the specifying means when the special figure 1 reservation is obtained by providing a specifying means that can specify the display timing for displaying the special figure 1 reserved pattern in the standard display mode. It may be constructed such that one reserved symbol is displayed in the standard display mode.
By configuring in this way, the timing at which the special figure 1 reservation is actually acquired and the timing at which the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed are slightly shifted, but the display mode of the plurality of special figure 1 reserved designs Since (action content) can always be synchronized and displayed, it is possible to omit the process of synchronizing the display mode of a plurality of special-figure 1 reserved symbols that are shifted and displayed.
Furthermore, at the timing of acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, a new special figure 1 reserved design is displayed in a still image, and then based on the display timing being specified by the specifying means, the special that was displayed in the still image The FIG. 1 reserved pattern may be configured to be displayed in a standard display mode. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to immediately grasp the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, and it is possible to prevent the action contents of a plurality of special figure 1 reservation patterns from being displaced and displayed. be able to.

Further, in the thirty-first control example, a plurality of stage types (rabbit stage, hero stage) can be determined as the type of effect to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the stage can be switched at the timing when the special pattern variation is started. With this configuration, even if the special symbol lottery continues for a long time in which the lottery result is lost, the player can quickly get tired of the game by executing different effects by switching the stage type. It can be suppressed.
Furthermore, in this 31st control example, as described above, since it is configured so that the pending change effect is executed across the period in which a plurality of special symbol variations are executed, during the execution period of the pending change effect An event that changes the stage type may occur. Then, the effect mode of the pending change effect is varied according to the stage type. That is, when the stage type is switched while the pending change effect is being executed, a process for switching the effect mode of the pending change effect in the middle is executed.
In addition, in this 31st control example, even when the stage type is switched, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to continue to be visible to the player. A part of the display mode of the stage switching effect executed when switching is performed before switching the stage type by displaying the display area where the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. The display mode (contents of action) of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that was previously switched to the display mode (contents of action) corresponding to the stage type after switching is configured to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the effect mode of the pending change effect based on the switching of the stage type without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example, a synchronous period in which the display contents (action contents) of the special figure 1 reserved pattern are synchronized and an asynchronous period in which they are not synchronized are generated. When the stage type is switched during the synchronization period, the pending change effect that inherits the effect content of the pending change effect that was executed before switching is executed in correspondence with the stage type after switching. is doing. On the other hand, if the stage type is switched during the asynchronous period, a process for re-determining the effect mode of the pending change effect is executed when the stage type is switched, and the stage type after switching is performed based on the determined effect mode. It is configured to execute a pending change performance.

In other words, depending on the switching timing of the stage type, the performance mode of the pending change performance that has been executed before switching the stage type is changed so that it can be executed corresponding to the stage type after switching. By enabling the stage type to be switched in this way, it is possible not only to provide the player with a variety of effects, but also to provide information on the game given to the player at the timing of switching the stage type (holding change effect). (effect result) can be varied, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the stage type is switched.
Furthermore, in the 31st control example, when the pending change effect corresponding to winning is being executed, the case where the stage type is switched during the asynchronous period is more favorable than the case where the stage type is switched during the synchronous period. However, it is configured such that a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is easily determined as a performance mode of the pending change performance corresponding to the stage type after switching.
<Regarding the effect content in the 31st control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 862 to 866, among the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-first control example, the special figure 1 reserved symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 I will explain the details of the production content related to. Note that elements (display elements displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that are the same as the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals. , the detailed description of which will be omitted.
Figure 862(a) is displayed when the right to execute the third special symbol lottery (third special symbol 1 pending) is acquired during the execution of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation. It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen. As shown in FIG. 862(a), in the sub-display area Ds formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the right to execute the acquired first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) is displayed. 1st sub-display area Ds1 which is a reserved design display area for, and a second sub-display area Ds2 which is an active reserved design display area for displaying the active reserved design corresponding to the special design lottery being executed, is formed.

In the first sub-display area Ds1, a first pedestal m1, a second pedestal m2, a third pedestal m3, a third When the 4 pedestals m4 are displayed and the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the special figure 1 reserved designs are displayed at the corresponding positions in order from the first pedestal m1. Then, when a new special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed, the special figure 1 reserved (first special FIG. 1 pending) hr1 is rendered to move to a position corresponding to the 0th pedestal m0 displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2.
In other words, the display mode that was displayed as the special figure 1 reserved symbol is not the period until the corresponding special symbol lottery is executed, but the period after the corresponding special symbol lottery is executed (the corresponding special symbol fluctuation is The period until it is stopped and displayed) is also configured to be visible to the player. By configuring in this way, the special figure 1 reserved pattern whose display mode is changed by the reserved change effect is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 as an in-execution reserved pattern even during the execution period of the corresponding special pattern variation. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to determine the variable performance of the special symbol fluctuation with the content of the preliminary determination result notified to the player by the pending change performance (result of the pending change performance). It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance for the person.
In addition, in this 31st control example, it is constructed so as to continue to display the pending symbols during execution until the special symbol variation is completed. It may be configured to display the suspended design during execution for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from , and then not to display the suspended design during execution. In this 31st control example, when the normal state is set as the game state and the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, as shown in FIG. 862(a), the third symbol display device In the sub-display area Ds of the display surface of 81, a maximum of four special figure 1 reserved symbols for indicating the number of rights to execute the first special symbol lottery that has already been acquired can be displayed. In addition, in contrast to the above-described 29th control example, this 31st control example is a special figure 1 reserved symbol production mode for showing the player the right to execute the first special symbol lottery that has been acquired (special figure 1 reserved). Since it is only different in that it is different, when the time saving state is set as the game state as in the 29th control example described above, the special figure 1 reserved design is the 3rd design display It is configured so that it is not displayed on the display surface of the device 81 (see FIG. 790(a)). In other words, even if the special figure 1 reservation is acquired during the time saving state, it only updates the value of the counting means (first special symbol reservation ball number counter) that counts the special figure 1 reservation number, and the special figure 1 reservation design is configured so that it is not displayed.
The diagram shown in FIG. 862(a) shows that in the state where the rabbit stage is set as the stage type, the first special symbol variation is being executed, the third special figure 1 pending is acquired, and the third It shows the time point when the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed, and in the display area Dm4, the first special symbol variation is displayed in a display mode (three arrows are displayed in the figure) indicating that the first special symbol variation is being executed. 3 patterns are displayed in a variable manner. In the display area Dm5, "rabbit stage" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the current stage type is the rabbit stage. In the main display area Dm, as a variable effect to be executed during the rabbit stage, a variable effect is executed in a production mode using a character 801 imitating a rabbit (a production mode dedicated to the rabbit stage).

Also, in the first sub-display area Ds1 formed in the sub-display area Ds, the first pedestal m1 to the fourth pedestal m4 are displayed, and the already obtained first special figure 1 reserved symbol hr1 is displayed on the first pedestal m1. It is displayed at the corresponding position, and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 is displayed at the position corresponding to the second pedestal m2. The first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 are displayed in a normal display mode (indicated by a circle in the figure) indicating that they are not subject to the reservation change effect, Each reserved pattern is oscillatingly displayed on the corresponding pedestals m1 and m2 in synchronization with the vertical direction.
Then, based on the acquisition of the third special figure 1 reservation, the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is displayed to move to a position corresponding to the third pedestal m3. The third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is a special figure 1 reserved design to be subjected to a reserved change effect, and is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the reserved change effect.
Here, the content of the pending change effect that is executed in a state where the rabbit stage is set as the stage type will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example, the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved change effect can be changed in three stages, and the special figure 1 reserved corresponding to the reserved change effect Based on the pre-determination result (prefetch result) based on the winning information included in , the display mode (step) to be finally displayed in the pending change effect is determined. Specifically, as the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design, the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage are configured to be determinable. However, it is constructed so that the display mode of the third stage is more likely to be determined than in the case of other than winning. In addition, when the preliminary determination result (prefetching result) is a winning result, the display mode of the third stage is easier to determine than the display mode of the first stage. It is configured such that the display mode of the first stage is more easily tied than in the case of .
In other words, when the production result of the pending change production is the first stage display mode, the third stage display mode is the target of the holding change production special figure 1 suspension Winning a prize indicating winning You can increase the likelihood that the information is included.

The display mode of the 3rd special figure 1 reserved design shown in FIG. 862(a) is a display mode of the first stage in the pending change effect, and is a display mode corresponding to the rabbit stage, imitating a rabbit silhouette. displayed in the form. In this 31st control example, as the pending change effect, it is configured to execute the effect of changing the display mode of the target special figure 1 reserved pattern in stages, and the display shown in FIG. 862 (a) Since the mode is the display mode of the first stage executed in the rabbit stage, "1" indicating the number of stages is attached to the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the number of steps displayed in the pending effect being executed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the 31st control example, it is configured to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand by displaying the current stage number in the display mode that is variably displayed by the pending change effect. For example, it may be configured to display the total number of stages whose display mode can be changed by the pending change effect and the current number of stages, instead of the current number of stages, It may be configured to display the number of times the display mode is changed by the pending change effect of this time. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 862 (a) is a state in which the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is not acquired, but for example, in a normal state, the first special symbol lottery If the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired during the period in which the first special symbol variation is executed to show the result of, it will be notified that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired. It may be configured to execute a notification effect for doing or to display the display mode for showing the acquired special figure 2 reservation smaller than the special figure 1 reserved design.
When the production progresses from the state shown in FIG. 862(a) and the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is displayed at the position corresponding to the third pedestal m3, the display screen shown in FIG. 862(b) is displayed. be done. Figure 862 (b), from the first special figure 1 reserved design (first special figure 1 reserved design hr1) to the third special figure 1 reserved design (third special figure 1 reserved design hr3), each It is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state corresponding to a pedestal.
In this 31st control example, when the special figure 1 reserved design (for example, the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1) is positioned at a location corresponding to the display position (for example, the first pedestal m1), a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) action motion (after a 0.5 second rising motion, a 0.5 second falling motion followed by a rocking motion to the initial position) is repeatedly executed. there is Here, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is a game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and a reserved ball number command indicating that a new special figure 1 reservation has been acquired is voice lamp control from the main controller 110 It is configured to be output to the device 113 and to be displayed based on the reception of the reserved ball number command by the voice lamp control device 113 .
In other words, regardless of the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation that has already been acquired (whether it is the aspect during the rising operation or the aspect during the descending operation), the new special figure 1 reservation It is configured so that a new special figure 1 reserved design is displayed to show that it has been acquired. Therefore, in the second sub-display area Ds2, the content of the action operation is the same, but a plurality of special figure 1 reserved symbols with different start timings of the action operation are displayed, and the production without unity continues. As a result, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

Also in this 31st control example, the newly displayed special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to start the action operation at its own timing regardless of the action operation timing of the already displayed special figure 1 reserved pattern. is doing.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 862(b), the already displayed first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 synchronize the action operation. Then, the newly displayed third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 starts the action operation at different timing from the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2.
However, in this 31st control example, when a new special symbol variation is started, for each special symbol 1 reserved symbol being displayed, the synchronization process for synchronizing the action operation is configured to be executed. is doing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 863 (a), at the timing when the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the action operation of each special figure 1 reserved symbol is stopped, and each special figure 1 reserved symbol is initial Execute the process to stop and display at the position. Then, as shown in FIG. 863 (b), the timing at which a new special symbol variation is started, that is, each special figure at the same timing in accordance with the display timing at which the display position of each special figure 1 reserved symbol is shifted It is configured so that the action operation of one reserved symbol is started.
In this way, for each special figure 1 reserved pattern that has started the action operation in accordance with the display timing, when a predetermined synchronization condition is satisfied (when a new special symbol variation is started), each special figure By synchronizing the action motions of the 1-reserved patterns, it is possible to prevent the continuous display of a plurality of 1-reserved special patterns with different start timings of the action motions, thereby reducing the performance effect. can do.

In addition, in this 31st control example, when a new special symbol variation is executed, since it is configured to synchronize the action operation of each special symbol 1 reserved symbol, 1 special symbol variation is executed The special figure 1 reserved design corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation acquired while the The action operation is executed at a timing different from the special figure 1 reserved design corresponding to 1 reserved. Therefore, by visually recognizing the display mode of each special figure 1 reserved symbol displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2, this special symbol variation (1 special symbol variation) was acquired during the period being executed It is possible to grasp the number of special figures 1 pending.
Here, with reference to FIG. 864, the effect mode of the pending change effect executed in the thirty-first control example will be described in detail. FIG. 864(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the display mode of the first stage is displayed in the pending change effect, and FIG. 864(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the display mode of is switched to the second stage display mode, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when switching to a staged display mode;
In this 31st control example, as a pending change effect, using a production period including at least a period (prefetching period) until the special symbol lottery based on the target special figure 1 suspension is executed, the special figure 1 reserved symbol An effect of switching the display mode in three stages at maximum is executed in a mode corresponding to the set stage type. FIGS. 864(a) to (c) show the suspension change effect executed when the rabbit stage is set.
As shown in FIG. 864 (a), when the pending change effect is executed, a display simulating a rabbit silhouette as a display mode different from the normal special figure 1 reserved design (first special figure 1 reserved design hr1) A special figure 1 reserved design (second special figure 1 reserved design hr2) is displayed in the mode. This display mode simulating the silhouette of a rabbit shows the display mode of the first stage in the pending change effect of the rabbit stage. In this way, by making the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the pending change production different from the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is not the target of the reserved change production, it is possible to display a maximum of 4 It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which special figure 1 reserved pattern is the object of the reserved change performance among the possible special figure 1 reserved patterns.

In addition, in the 31st control example, by synchronizing the contents of the action operation with the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the pending change production and the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is not the target of the pending change production, a sense of unity While executing a certain performance, by making the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern different, it is configured to make it easy for the player to grasp which special figure 1 reserved pattern is the target of the reserved change performance. Without being limited to this, for example, without changing the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern, the content of the action operation is changed to grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance for the player. It may be configured to allow
In this case, when a new special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the action operation is configured to be executed based on the unique timing as in the 31st control example, and when the synchronization condition is established, It is preferable to configure so that the action operation is executed in a manner different from the other special figure 1 reserved symbols for the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the reserved change production. By configuring in this way, immediately after the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the action operation is executed at different timings, so that all the special figure 1 reserved patterns are subject to the reserved change effect. It can give you a sense of hope. In addition, if a plurality of (three or more) special figure 1 reserved patterns are not displayed, specify the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the action operation is performed in a manner different from the other special figure 1 reserved patterns Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to motivate the player watching the pending change performance to play the game continuously in a state where many special figure 1 pending patterns are displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 864 (a), the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 are synchronously executing an action operation, and are subject to the reservation change effect. When the display mode of the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 switches from the first stage to the second stage, as shown in FIG. 864(b), a dedicated action operation is executed. Specifically, normally, an action motion for 1 second (after a 0.5 second rising motion, a 0.5 second falling motion to return to the initial position) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when the display mode is changed by the pending change effect, as a dedicated action motion for 2 seconds, after the rising motion for 0.5 seconds, the additional rising motion for 0.2 seconds and the display mode for 0.6 seconds It is configured to perform a switching display, an additional descent operation for 0.2 seconds, and a descent operation for 0.5 seconds.
In this way, by enlarging the area in which the special figure 1 reserved pattern moves more than the normal action operation, the player can easily grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern whose display mode is changed by the reserved change performance. be able to. Also, the execution period length (2 seconds) of the dedicated action operation for changing the display mode in the pending change effect is twice the execution period length (1 second) of the normal action operation. Since it is configured, the action operation of the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the exclusive action operation is completed and the other special figure 1 reserved pattern can be continuously synchronized, and the performance with a sense of unity can be executed. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 864(c), in the pending change effect, the display mode is configured to be variable not only during the special symbol variation period but also at the timing when a new special symbol variation is started. In FIG. 864(c), when the first special figure 1 reserved pattern hr1 indicating the second stage display mode in the pending change effect shifts to the running pedestal m0 showing the running reserved design, the third stage The display screen when switching to the display mode is displayed.
As shown in Figure 864 (c), when shifting the display position of the special figure 1 reserved pattern, from the second stage display mode imitating the rabbit's face to the third stage display mode imitating the whole rabbit , and is displayed as an in-execution pending design hr0. After that, the suspended pattern hr0 during execution displayed in the display mode of the third stage is displayed at the position corresponding to the pedestal m0 during execution.
By configuring in this way, various timings can be set as the timing at which the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern is changed by the pending change effect, so that the player gets tired of the effect performed early. It can be suppressed.
In addition, in this 31st control example, the operation contents when the display position of the special figure 1 reserved design shifts to another display position are the special figure 1 reserved design that is the target of the reserved change production and the reserved change production Although it is the same as the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is not targeted, it is not limited to this, depending on the operation content when shifting the special figure 1 reserved pattern, whether the player is subject to the reserved change effect It may be configured to grasp whether or not, for example, using a period longer than the period used for normal shift movement, a special operation to shift the special figure 1 reserved pattern can be configured to be executable and reserved It is preferable that the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the change performance is more easily shift-moved by the special action than the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is not the target of the reserved change performance.

By configuring in this way, when a new special symbol variation is started, it is possible to make the player interested in how the special figure 1 reserved symbol is shifted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 865, the contents of the effect when the stage type is switched during the period during which the pending change effect is executed will be described in detail. As with the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example has a plurality of stage types in order to vary the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By determining one stage type from among them and displaying the display mode corresponding to the determined stage type (executing the stage change effect), various effects are provided to the player and the effect of the effect is enhanced. It consists of
The stage change effect is executed based on the number of times the special symbol variation is executed, or is executed based on the operation of the selection button 600 by the player, and whether or not the pending change effect is executed. Regardless, the stage change production is configured to be executable. Furthermore, in order to enhance the effect of production, it is configured to vary the production mode of the pending change production according to the set stage type. In addition, when the stage change effect is executed during the execution period of the pending change effect, while synchronizing the action operation of each special figure 1 reserved pattern, the pending change effect in the effect mode according to the stage type after switching is configured to continue.
FIG. 865(a) shows a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in a state in which action actions of all special 1 reserved symbols are synchronized and a rabbit stage is displayed. FIG. 865(b) is a state in which the display screen shown in FIG. 865(a) is displayed, and a part of the display screen after the stage change effect is executed and the hero stage is set. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 865(a), while the rabbit stage is set, the display area Dm5 displays "rabbit stage", and the third special figure 1 reserved pattern hr3 that is the target of the reserved change effect is displayed in the first stage display mode (display mode imitating a rabbit silhouette). Then, the action operation of the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 to the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is synchronized.

In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 865(a), the special figure 1 reserved design displayed as the 4th special figure 1 reserved design hr4 during the special design fluctuation period executed before is the target of the reserved change effect. After that, at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started, each special figure 1 reserved symbol shifts and moves, and shows the state after executing the synchronization process for synchronizing the action operation. In this way, when the stage change production is executed in a state in which the action actions of all the special figure 1 reserved patterns are synchronized, all the special figure 1 reserved patterns are aligned with the timing at the initial position, It is configured to be changed to the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design after switching.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 865(b), a display mode imitating a sword corresponding to the hero stage is displayed as the display mode of the third special figure 1 pending symbol hr3 that is the target of the pending change effect. . Then, from the state of being positioned at the initial position, all the special figure 1 reserved symbols are operated by an action motion corresponding to the hero stage. In this way, when the action actions of all the displayed special 1 reserved patterns are synchronized, all the special 1 reserved patterns are positioned at the initial position, corresponding to the stage type after switching By configuring to switch to the display mode that has been set, it is possible to continue the pending change effect without giving the player a sense of incompatibility.
On the other hand, in this 31st control example, there is an asynchronous period before synchronizing the action operation of the displayed special figure 1 reserved design. In other words, after the new special figure 1 reserved design is displayed, the timing at which each special figure 1 reserved design starts the action operation is not synchronized and is scattered until the next special design fluctuation is started. At the timing of each special figure 1 reserved design is the period during which the action operation is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 866, the contents of the effect when the stage change effect is executed during the asynchronous period in which the action motion of each special figure 1 reserved symbol is not synchronized will be described. Figure 866 (a) is a state in which the action action of the special figure 1 reserved symbol is not synchronized, and a diagram showing a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the rabbit stage is displayed FIG. 866(b) shows a part of the display screen after the stage change effect is executed and the hero stage is set while the display screen shown in FIG. 866(a) is displayed. FIG. 866(c) is a diagram showing the action motion of the hold change effect after the transition to the hero stage. As shown in FIG. 866(a), while the rabbit stage is set, "rabbit stage" is displayed in the display area Dm5, and the third special figure 1 reserved pattern hr3 which is the target of the reserved change effect is displayed in the first stage display mode (display mode imitating a rabbit silhouette).

And, in the state where the action action of the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 are synchronized, only the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3, the other special figure 1 reserved An action motion is executed at a timing different from the pattern. That is, the state shown in FIG. 866(a) is a state in which only the 3rd special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is not synchronized, that is, the 1st special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the 2nd special figure 1 reserved design hr2 is a special symbol 1 reserved symbol that has been displayed before the start of the special symbol variation that is currently being executed, and the synchronization process is being performed at the timing of the start of this special symbol variation. And, the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is displayed during the special design fluctuation period currently being executed.
In the state shown in FIG. 866 (a), when the stage change effect is executed, that is, when the stage change effect is executed in a state where all the special figure 1 reserved symbols are not synchronized, the stage change effect Triggered by the execution of, synchronous processing for synchronizing the action action of each special figure 1 reserved pattern is executed, and an additional lottery is executed to change the production mode of the pending change production, and based on the result of the additional lottery It is configured to execute the pending change effect after the stage type is switched.
Specifically, as part of the stage change production, as shown in FIG. 866 (b), the display mode for making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design to be the target of the pending change production (In the figure, a display mode that imitates smoke) is displayed, and an effect is executed that suggests that the stage indicated by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the pending change effect can be promoted.
After that, as shown in FIG. 866(c), the display mode of the third special figure 1 reserved pattern hr3 to be the target of the pending change effect is a display mode imitating a sword corresponding to the hero stage, and the second stage is displayed. In other words, in the diagram shown in FIG. 866(c), as a result of the additional lottery, a display mode in which the number of stages is increased as the pending change effect is determined, and is displayed before the stage change effect is executed. A display mode with a higher level (second level) than the number of levels of the display mode (see FIG. 866(a)) is displayed.

In this way, when the stage change production is executed in a state where the action operation of the special figure 1 reserved design that is the target of the pending change production is not synchronized with the action operation of the other special figure 1 reserved design, It is possible to make it difficult to see the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the pending change production, and to vary (increase) the number of steps indicated by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the pending change production. By structuring as possible, even if the process of synchronizing the action motion of each special figure 1 reserved pattern is executed based on the execution of the stage change performance, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity. can be done. In addition, in this 31st control example, the special figure 1 reserved symbol is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal game in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed. When the time-saving state where the symbol lottery is executed or the normal state is set, and when the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired, the special figure 1 reserved symbol Although it is configured not to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the technology related to the special figure 1 reserved symbol display in the 31st control example has the number of remaining time reductions during the time reduction state in the 44th control example described later. The technical concept of display, that is, a counting means for counting the number of stored special figure 1 reserved symbols is provided, and a first state in which the number of memories counted by the counting means is displayed and a second state in which it is not displayed can be set. It is of course possible to apply a technical idea that enables the first state to be set when a predetermined display condition is established while the second state is set.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 31st control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 867 to 869. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. is doing. Other than that, the electrical configuration is the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.
In this 31st control example, the number of acquisitions of the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in contrast to the above-described 29th control example. It is different in that it is configured so that it can be displayed as a pattern. And, as the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, it is different in that various data tables and various flags used for executing the processing for displaying the special figure 1 reserved design are provided.
First, referring to FIG. 867, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example will be described. FIG. 867 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 867, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example stores the pending action data table 222aa in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 811(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example. They are different in that they are added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The reserved action data table 222aa displays the special figure 1 reserved design (first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 to fourth special figure 1 reserved design hr4) in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the display surface of the third design display device 81. This is a data table that is referenced when In this 31st control example, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to be displayed with a predetermined action (up and down movement), and when a new special figure 1 reserved is displayed, A special figure 1 reserved design is displayed with a predetermined action from the display timing, and when a predetermined synchronization condition (for example, a condition that is established when a new special symbol variation is started) is established, it is displayed. It is configured so that the action actions of a plurality of special figure 1 reserved designs are synchronized.
By configuring in this way, when the synchronization condition is established when a new special symbol variation is started, the special figure 1 obtained during the period in which the 1 special symbol variation is executed It is possible to grasp the number of reservations by the action operation contents (action operation gap) of a plurality of acquired special figure 1 reserved designs. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who tries to acquire many special figure 1 reserves during one special symbol variation to grasp the acquisition result of the special figure 1 reserves.
Here, with reference to FIG. 868, the contents defined in the pending action data table 222aa will be described. FIG. 868 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the pending action data table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 868, in the pending action data table 222aa, the set stage type, the type of pending pattern to execute the action action (holding type), the type of the action action to be executed (action type), , an action display scenario (action content) with a 1-second cycle or a 2-second cycle is defined. Each special figure 1 reserved pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of the action display scenarios defined in the reserved action data table 222aa. ing.
Specifically, when the stage type is "Rabbit Stage", the hold type is "Normal Hold", and the action type is "Normal Time", the action display scenario is "0 seconds to 0.5 seconds rising display, falling display of 0.5 seconds to 1 second” is stipulated. That is, in the winning command process (see S3271 in FIG. 871), when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design based on the newly received winning information command, for the special figure 1 reserved design for which the reservation change notice was not set defines an action display scenario such that a one-second period display mode in which rising display is performed for 0.5 seconds and then falling display is performed for 0.5 seconds is repeatedly displayed.

In addition, when the stage type is "rabbit stage", the hold type is "change object hold", and the action type is "normal time", the action display scenario is "display rising from 0 to 0.5 seconds." , 0.5 seconds to 1 second" is stipulated, and when the action type is "at the time of change", the action display scenario is "0 seconds to 0.5 seconds of rising display, 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. 5 seconds to 1.5 seconds of changing action display and 1.5 seconds to 2 seconds of falling display” are stipulated. Here, in the winning command process (see S3271 in FIG. 871), when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design based on the newly received winning information command, for the special figure 1 reserved design in which the reservation change notice is set , the timing to execute the pending change effect (the timing at which the change action is set) is determined, and the "normal" action display is executed during the period when the pending change effect is not executed, and the period during which the pending change effect is executed It is configured so that the action display of "at the time of change" is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 866, for the special figure 1 reserved design for which the reservation change notice is determined, a display mode different from the normal special figure 1 reserved design is configured to be displayed.
As described above, when the "rabbit stage" is set, the "normal" action display is stipulated in the action display scenario for 1 second, and the "change" action display is stipulated in the action display scenario for 2 seconds. Because it is defined in, the action operation timing of the normal special figure 1 reserved design and the special figure 1 reserved design to be changed is synchronized, so that the action display at normal time is synchronized Of course, That is, even after executing the action display of "at the time of change" for the special figure 1 reserved pattern to be changed, the action operation can be synchronized. Therefore, since it is possible to synchronize and display the action actions of the plurality of special 1 reserved patterns displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the production effect is achieved by executing the production with a sense of unity. can increase
On the other hand, if the stage type is "brave stage", the hold type is "normal hold", and the action type is "normal time", the action display scenario is "rising display for 0 to 1 second, 1 second ~ 2 seconds descending display” is stipulated. That is, in the winning command process (see S3271 in FIG. 871), when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design based on the newly received winning information command, for the special figure 1 reserved design for which the reservation change notice was not set defines an action display scenario such that a display mode of a 2-second cycle, in which rising display is performed for 1 second and then falling display is performed for 1 second, is repeatedly displayed.
In addition, when the stage type is "brave stage", the hold type is "change target hold", and the action type is "normal time", the action display scenario is "rising display for 0 to 1 second, 1 seconds to 2 seconds" is stipulated, and when the action type is "at the time of change", the action display scenario is "0 seconds to 0.5 seconds rising display, 0.5 seconds to 1 second .5 second changing action display, 1.5 to 2 second descending display” is stipulated.

As described above, in this 31st control example, according to the set stage type, the length of the period used for one action operation at the normal time of the special figure 1 reserved pattern is changed. Configure. By configuring in this way, only by switching the stage type, the action operation mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern can be changed, so that the production effect by switching the stage type can be enhanced.
In addition, since it is configured so that the length of the period used for one action action is different from the action action at normal time and the action action at the time of change, the action action content of the special figure 1 reserved pattern By watching, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the pending change effect will be executed.
In addition, compared to the rabbit stage, in the brave stage, the length of the period used for the normal action action is increased, and it is the same as the period used for the action action when the suspension change effect is executed in the rabbit stage. A period (2 seconds) is used to perform normal action motions. By configuring in this way, it is possible for a player who has been playing a game in the rabbit stage to play while expecting that many pending change effects will be executed by switching to the hero stage. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 869, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example will be described. FIG. 869 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 869, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example is different from the twenty-ninth control example in that an asynchronous flag 223aa is provided. They are different and otherwise identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The asynchronous flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that there is a special figure 1 reserved design in which the action operation display is not synchronized among the special figure 1 reserved designs displayed on the display surface of the third design display device 81. And it is set to ON when the special figure 1 reserved design that executes the action operation display without synchronizing with other special figure 1 reserved designs is displayed (see S5304 in FIG. 871). Then, when the synchronization condition for synchronizing the action operation display of the special figure 1 reserved design is established, the setting status of the asynchronous flag 223aa is referred to (see S5402 and S5407 in FIG. 873), and if it is set to ON When it is determined, a synchronization process is executed for synchronizing the action motion display, and then the setting is turned off (see S5406 in FIG. 873).
In this 31st control example, various effects can be executed based on the action operation status of the special figure 1 reserved pattern and the execution timing of the stage change effect. When the stage change performance is executed, the performance mode of the pending change performance is set so that the pending change performance that is more advantageous to the player than the performance result of the pending change performance being executed is executed. The rewriting process is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game feature of paying attention to the timing at which the stage change effect is executed.
In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, the stage change effect, which was only for the purpose of switching the effect mode of the decorative effect (background display, etc.), Since it is possible to add the purpose of changing the effect result of the effect (suspended change effect) for suggesting the game result in advance, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.
<Regarding control processing in the 31st control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 870 to 877, among the various control processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-first control example, the content of the control process different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example described above. explain about In the pachinko machine 10 of the 31st control example, the acquisition number (special figure 1 reservation number) of the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the 29th control example described above It is greatly different in that it is configured to display the special figure 1 reserved pattern for showing on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the control processing for determining the effect mode regarding this special figure 1 reserved pattern The difference is that they are added. Therefore, in the thirty-first control example, part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is different from that in the twenty-ninth control example described above, and other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process (S3173) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 870 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S3173). As shown in FIG. 870, the command determination process (S3173) executes the winning command process (S3271) when the winning information command is received in contrast to the command determining process (S3113) of the twenty-ninth control example. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
Next, the details of the winning command process (S3271) executed in the command determination process (S3173) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 871 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning command process (S3271). This winning command process (S3271) is a process executed based on the reception of the winning information command from the main control device 110, and based on the information included in the received winning information command, the special figure 1 reserved design A process for determining the display mode is executed.
When the winning command process (S3271) is executed, first, the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (S5301), and then it is determined whether or not there is a pending change notice (S5302). . If it is determined that there is a pending change notice (S5302: Yes), the effect mode of the pending change notice is determined as the effect mode of the special figure 1 pending symbol corresponding to the winning information command received this time (S5303), and during asynchronous The flag 223aa is set to ON (S5304), the pending action data table 222aa is referred to, the start of the pending action operation is set (S5305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5302 that there is no pending change notice (S5302: No), the process of S5303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5304.
Next, with reference to FIG. 872, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4374) will be described. FIG. 872 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4374). This variable effect setting process (S4374) is different from the variable effect setting process (S4304) of the 29th control example described above, with the addition of processing for determining the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design at the time of starting the change. is different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the variable effect setting process (S4374) is executed, the same processes of S4401 to S4410 as the variable effect setting process (S4304) of the twenty-ninth control example described above are executed. Then, after the processing of S4408 is completed, the processing of S4405 is not performed, and the pending state determination processing is executed (S4471), and then the processing of S4405 is performed.
In the reserved mode determination process (S4471) executed by the process of S4471, based on the action operation content of the special figure 1 reserved design being executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is started, the special figure 1 after the start of the special symbol variation A process for setting the action operation of the reserved symbol is executed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 873, the contents of the holding mode determination process (S4471) will be described. FIG. 873 is a flow chart showing the contents of the holding mode determination process (S4471). When the hold state determination process (S4471) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the change notice of the hold is currently being made (S5401). , the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5402).
In the processing of S5402, when it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5402: Yes), the promotion lottery of the performance mode of the hold change notice is executed (S5403), and a new hold based on the promotion lottery is executed. The effect mode of change notice is determined (S5404), synchronous processing is executed for each reserved design to start the reserved design action from the initial position (S5405), and the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to off (S5406). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5401 that the pending change notice is not in progress (S5401: No), it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5407), and it is determined that it is set to ON. If so (S5407: Yes), the process proceeds to S5405. If it is determined in the process of S5402 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to ON (S5402: No), or if it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to ON in the process of S5407 (S5407 : No), since there is no need to correct (synchronize) the action operation display of the already displayed special figure 1 reserved symbol at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the process ends as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 874, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S3172) will be described. FIG. 874 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering update process (S3172). This effect update process (S3172) is different from the effect update process (S3112) of the 29th control example described above, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved symbol is being displayed, and when special symbol variation is executed The difference is that a dedicated process is executed when it is determined that the stage transition condition is satisfied during the process. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the effect update process (S3172) is executed, first, the same processes of S4601 to S4608 as the effect update process (S3112) of the twenty-ninth control example described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S4606, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is not 1 or more (S4606: No), or if the processing of S4608 is completed, the reserved display (display of the special figure 1 reserved design ) is determined (S4671), and if it is determined that there is a pending display (display of special figure 1 pending pattern) (S4671: Yes), the pending effect update process is executed (S4672), to the process of S4673 Transition.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4671, if it is determined that there is no reserved display (display of special figure 1 reserved pattern) (S4671: No), then it is determined whether the condition for transitioning to the stage during fluctuation is satisfied (S4673), If it is determined that this is established (S4673: Yes), the changing stage transition process is executed (S4674), and then the process of S4609, which is the same as the effect update process (S3112) of the 29th control example described above, is executed, End this process. Also, in the process of S4673, if it is determined that the changing stage transition condition is not satisfied (S4673: No), the process of S4674 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4609, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 875, the content of the pending effect update process (S4672) executed in the effect update process (see S3172 in FIG. 874) will be described. FIG. 875 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending effect update process (S4672). In this pending effect update process (S4672), for each special figure 1 reserved design displayed on the display surface of the third design display device 81, the display content determined when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design A process for determining a display mode based on is executed.
When the pending effect update process (S4672) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 reserved design that is the start timing of the change effect (S5501), and the special figure 1 reserved design that is the start timing of the change effect is If it is determined that there is (S5501: Yes), the reserved action data table 222aa is referred to for the special figure 1 reserved pattern to be changed, and the production mode corresponding to the content of change is determined (S5502), S5503 to process. In the processing of S5501, when it is determined that there is no special figure 1 reserved design that is the start timing of the change effect (S5501: No), the processing of S5502 is skipped and the processing of S5503 is performed.
Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is on (S5503), and if it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is on (S5503: Yes), asynchronous special figure 1 pending For the symbol, the pending action data table 222aa is referred to determine the presentation mode (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505. If it is determined in the process of S5503 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not ON (S5503: No), the process of S5504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5505.
In the process of S5505, other special figure 1 reserved design, that is, the effect mode is determined with reference to the reserved action data table 222aa for the synchronized special figure 1 reserved design in which the normal action operation is executed (S5505 ), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 876, the contents of the changing stage transition process (S4674) executed in the effect update process (see S3172 in FIG. 874) will be described. FIG. 876 is a flowchart showing the contents of the changing stage transition process (S4674). In this variable stage transition process (S4674), a process for determining the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved symbol is performed when the stage change effect is performed while the special symbol variation is being performed. .
When the changing stage transition process (S4674) is executed, first, it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5601), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S5601: Yes) , Specify whether the type of special figure 1 reserved design during asynchronization is usually reserved, or whether it is change target reserved (S5602). Then, it is determined whether the asynchronous special figure 1 reserved design is subject to change (S5603), and if it is determined that it is subject to change (S5603: Yes), special mode determination processing is executed (S5604), and this End the process.
In the processing of S5603, if it is determined that the asynchronous special figure 1 reserved design is not a change target (S5603: No), the production mode for performing the stage transition is determined (S5605), and the asynchronous flag 223aa is turned off. (S5606), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S5601 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to ON (S5601: No), this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 877, the processing contents of the special mode determination processing (S5604) executed in the changing stage transition processing (see S4674 in FIG. 876) of the effect update processing (see S3172 in FIG. 874) will be described. do. FIG. 877 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special mode determination processing (S5604). In this special mode determination process (S5604), while the special figure 1 reserved pattern for which the pending change notice is determined is performing an action operation in an asynchronous state, the special figure 1 reserved pattern in the case where the stage change effect is executed A process for determining an effect mode is executed.

When the special mode determination process (S5604) is executed, first, the operation status of the target special figure 1 reserved design (change target reservation, special figure 1 reserved design in which the action operation is asynchronous) is specified ( S5701), it is determined whether the action operation status is the initial position (S5702), and if it is determined that it is the initial position (S5702: Yes), with respect to other reserved symbols, at a timing shifted by 0.5 seconds The normal action operation is set (S5703), the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to off (S5708), and the process ends.
In the processing of S5702, if it is determined that it is not the initial position (S5702: No), then the state before the change effect, that is, the display of the special figure 1 pending design set when the pending change notice is determined As content, it is determined whether the action display scenario based on the action type at the time of change has not been determined (S5704). The corresponding display mode is displayed, and then the special effect mode for executing the change effect in the remaining period of the action operation period is determined (S5705), and the process proceeds to S5708.
Also, in the process of S5704, if it is determined that it is not before the change effect (S5704: No), it is determined whether the change effect is in progress, that is, whether the action display scenario based on the action type at the time of change is determined. Then (S5706), if it is determined that the change effect is being performed (S5706: Yes), after displaying the blindfold mode, the effect is to display the display mode corresponding to the stage after the change, which is the number of stages after the change. The mode is determined (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5708. In the processing of S5708, the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to OFF, and this processing ends.
As described above, in the 31st control example, while the special figure 1 pending symbol for which the pending change notice is determined is performing an action action in an asynchronous state, when the stage change effect is executed, the pending A different presentation mode can be determined as a special mode according to the action operation situation of the special figure 1 reserved pattern for which the change notice has been determined. Specifically, when the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the pending change notice is in an asynchronous state and is performing normal action, after the stage change, the timing of intentionally shifting the action configured to run in By configuring in this way, even after the stage change, it is possible to allow the player to easily grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change notice.

In addition, it is configured so that the player can easily grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change notice even after the stage change only by changing the execution timing of the action operation at the normal time. Therefore, when the stage is changed while the special figure 1 reserved pattern, which is the target of the pending change notice, is displayed, there is no need to use the display data for executing the special action operation, and the special figure 1 reserved pattern The data capacity for displaying can be reduced.
Furthermore, even at normal times, until the synchronization process is executed, the action operation of each special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to be shifted depending on the timing of receiving the winning information command. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is absent is displayed or the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the reservation change notice is displayed.
In addition, when the stage change production is executed before the special figure 1 reserved design subject to the reservation change notice executes the change production, the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design after the stage change Since it is configured to execute a change performance that can be displayed in the remaining time, even if the stage change performance is executed, the player grasps the contents of the change performance of the special figure 1 reserved pattern. can be made easier. In addition, in this 31st control example, as a condition for synchronizing the action of each special figure 1 reserved design, the start of a new special figure fluctuation and the start of stage change production were provided, but not limited to this, A condition may be provided that is established when the processing after power-on of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. For example, after the power supply is interrupted while a plurality of special figure 1 reserved symbols are displayed, a command regarding winning information is transmitted in the start-up process executed when the power supply is restored. In other words, regardless of the timing of starting winning, it is configured to transmit a command related to winning information related to a plurality of special figure 1 reservations at the timing when the start-up process is executed. By configuring in this way, the audio lamp control device 113 side receives the winning information on a plurality of special figures 1 reservation at the same timing, so that the action operation of each special figure 1 reservation pattern can be synchronized. . In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to include information indicating execution of the pending change effect in the command related to the winning information output in the start-up process of the main controller 110, special In the pending symbol display process of FIG. 1, the effect mode of the pending change effect may be determined again. By configuring in this way, the effect information related to the display mode (production mode) of the special figure 1 reserved design is cleared by temporarily cutting off the power supply while the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed. Even if it is done, it is possible to determine the performance mode of the pending change performance again. In addition, in this 31st control example, the number of stages in which the special figure 1 reserved design is variable is the same according to the stage type, but the number of stages in which the special figure 1 reserved design can be varied is made different according to the stage type can be configured to In this case, when the stage type is changed, it is preferable to display the special figure 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the stage type after the change in the number of stages in which the degree of expectation is relatively higher than before the change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the value of the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design is lowered due to the stage type being switched. Furthermore, when the stage type is switched while the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the pending change effect is executed is displayed, after the stage type is switched, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is temporarily displayed in the initial state. After that, it is preferable to execute the pending change effect after the stage type is switched. In addition, the control for displaying the display mode (special figure 1 reserved symbol) for indicating the acquisition number of the execution right (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special symbol lottery in the 31st control example, the 44th control example described later When applying the technical concept in, that is, as a display condition of the special figure 1 reserved design, whether the second condition is satisfied (whether or not special figure 2 is reserved) when the first condition (setting of normal state) is satisfied Accordingly, when the technical idea of differentiating the display timing of the special figure 1 reserved design is used, the first special design reserved ball number counter 203d possessed by the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 31st control example , corresponds to the remaining time short counter in the 44th control example described later, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e corresponds to the counter during final production in the 44th control example described later. Then, in a state where the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 1, a variable performance related to the second special symbol lottery (such as a performance during the time saving state and a pullback performance) is executed, and the second special symbol reserved ball is executed. When the value of the number counter 203e becomes 0, display control may be performed so as to display the special figure 1 reserved design corresponding to the value of the first special design reserved ball number counter 203d. In addition, in the present 31st control example, when the time saving state (game state in which the special figure 1 reserved pattern is not displayed) ends in the same way as the 29th control example described above, when the special figure 2 is reserved, Until a predetermined period elapses after shifting to the normal state (until the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation is completed), the special figure 1 reserved pattern is not displayed. You may comprise so that a special figure 1 reservation design may be displayed when it transfers to a normal state, without restricting to.
<Thirty-Second Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 878 to 916. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example described above, and is equipped with a decorative movable accessory that is used as part of the variable performance that is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. , is different in that it adds a new variable production using the decorative movable accessory.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine 10 that executes an effect using a decorative movable accessory as part of a variable effect that is executed during variable display of special symbols. In such a pachinko machine 10, when the movable accessory for decoration moves at a predetermined timing of the variable performance, it indicates that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high, and when the movable accessory for decoration does not move. By executing an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for winning a big hit is relatively low, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the lottery result of the special symbols.
However, in such a pachinko machine 10, if an effect using a movable decorative accessory is set in a state in which the movable decorative accessory cannot be moved normally due to defects such as deterioration over time or failure of the electrical system, the effect will be lost. There is a risk that the decorative movable accessory does not perform the action specified in the action scenario at a predetermined timing, and incorrect game information is provided to the player.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-second control example, when executing an effect using the movable decorative accessory, it is determined whether the movable decorative accessory can execute the action specified in the action scenario. , when it is determined that it cannot be executed, it is configured so that it can be switched to an alternative performance by a liquid crystal display that does not use the decorative movable accessory. By configuring in this way, appropriate game information can be provided to the player.
Further, conventionally, a plurality (eg, three) of symbol rows formed by a plurality of special symbols (eg, special symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are used in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In some cases, symbol variation display is executed, and the success/failure determination result is notified by a combination of special symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line set in the display area. In such a pachinko machine 10, the player is interested in the special symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, at the time when the special symbols of the two symbol rows are stopped and displayed on the activated line, it must be in a mode (so-called ready-to-win mode) showing a part of the specific combination indicating the winning of the jackpot. There is a problem that the player loses interest in the middle of the symbol variation display because the player can predict that the big winning is not won before the special symbols of the remaining symbol rows are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in this 32nd control example, the board surface decoration applied to the game board surface, the decorative movable accessories, and some of the special symbols displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 A valid line is formed, and it is configured so as to be able to notify the result of the determination of success or failure.
Specifically, the special symbols in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example include numerical symbols with numbers "1" to "8" and letters related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10. (See FIG. 892). Although the details will be described later, this logo character pattern is on the effective line. and when the "sea" pattern D4, the "thing" pattern D7, and the "word" pattern D10 are stopped and displayed in order from the left on the active line (i.e., When the character string of "sea story" is formed on the active line), it is configured to indicate that the special symbol jackpot is won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 878, a logo lamp Rg1 incorporating an LED is installed at the upper center of the variable display device unit 80 of the game board when viewed from the front. The surface of this logo lamp Rg1 is decorated with a character design of "sea".
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a logo accessory 902 as a movable accessory for decoration. It is housed on the rear side of the display device unit 80 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 884(a)). This logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a that drives up and down, and a rotating body accessory 902b on which a character design of "thing" is written (see FIG. 884(a)). Although details will be described later, when this logo accessory 902 is used as part of the variable effect, the bar accessory 902a descends to the lower limit (see FIG. 884 (b)), and the third symbol display device 81 The rotator accessory 902b moves left and right while rotating based on the action scenario on the front side when viewed from the front, and stops at the position specified in the action scenario.

In this 32nd control example, as shown in FIG. 893(a), after the special symbols are temporarily stopped on the activated line L1 on the activated line L1 in the combination indicating the deviation, the logo accessory 902 is lowered to the lower limit. (See FIG. 893(b)), and the rotating body accessory 902b stops at the position indicated by the upward arrow 802, so that the logo lamp Rg1 is decorated with the “sea” design and the rotating body accessory 902b is decorated. A character string of "Sea Story", which is a mode for notifying a jackpot winning, is vertically formed by the "thing" design and the "word" design of the middle and lower design Z2c (see FIG. 894(a)).
By configuring in this way, even if the special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 does not become the ready-to-win mode, it is expected that an effective line with the logo decoration Rg1 will be formed. is possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest before the special symbols of the remaining symbol rows are stopped and displayed.
The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above in that it is equipped with a decorative movable accessory, the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 and the The points are that the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 29 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twenty-ninth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example>
First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 878 to 883. FIG. Fig. 878 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, Fig. 879 is an enlarged view of the lower right area in front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, 880 to 883 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example.

As shown in FIG. 878, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.
The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 878, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.
In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is played). area where the ball flows down).
The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 895) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 878) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 878) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 878). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 895), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the thirty-second control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. there is Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable display mode by the lighting state, or stop the display. The pattern is a pattern corresponding to the time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a missing pattern The number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.
Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is given 9R time saving jackpot (9R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds and after the jackpot ends. 6R time-saving jackpot (6R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state, 3R time-saving jackpot (3R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state after the jackpot ends in 3 rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game There is a 6R normal jackpot (6R no time saving jackpot) that does not give a time saving state after the 6R jackpot ends.
In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. In the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, not only is it indicated whether the lottery result is a big win (whether it is a small win or not) as a stop symbol after the end of the variable display, but also if it is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “9R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 9 rounds, and the “6R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds. It is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after that, and the “3R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds. In addition, the “6R time-saving no jackpot” is a jackpot in which the number of maximum rounds does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot of 6 rounds, but shifts to the normal state.
In addition, in the 32nd control example, the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends Although the size is defined, it is not limited to this, and the size of the benefits given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits may be defined without defining the size of the benefits. It is also possible to simply change the content of the jackpot game so as to be granted.
In addition, the “time-saving state” is a game in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the thirty-second control example, the variation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.
In addition, in the 32nd control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (a special discharge channel that is a specific area The V switch 650e3 provided in the 650e2 detects the ball), so that a big hit (so-called 2 types of hits) is achieved.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two patterns is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large-sized liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 895) so that, for example, left, middle, and right three patterns are displayed. One symbol row is displayed (see Fig. 892). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the 3rd symbol display device 81 of the 32nd control example, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 895) is performed by the 1st symbol display devices 37a and 37b. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the 1-symbol display devices 37a and 37b.
That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbol.
That is, the determination is performed by the determination means (the lottery for the special symbol is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and the predetermined After the identification information (special pattern) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, in a display mode (combination of patterns) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of the special pattern) of the discrimination means, Identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a part of the lottery result of the special symbol It may be a display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination result only), or it may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are four types of lottery results (for example, big hits, small hits, misses, and time saving) as the lottery results of special symbols, the above-mentioned three types of lottery results of special symbols are used as the display mode of the third symbol. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of lottery results (for example, a big win or a small win). In addition, in the case of duplicate winning determination (for example, jackpot determination, time saving determination), a display mode for indicating duplicate winning may be used, or based on duplicate winning If the content of the game to be executed based on the winning of the jackpot is the same as the content of the game to be executed based only on winning the jackpot, the same display mode may be used.
Further, instead of the display device used in the 32nd control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices. .
In this 32nd control example, when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the time saving state, the electric accessary 640a is higher than when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be longer. This makes it possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.
In addition, the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above-described content. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be used. In addition, when the time saving state is made to be a state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is irrespective of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time point, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the timing of the display of the second symbol) It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.
The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.
A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 . When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Main controller 110 (see FIG. 895) draws a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on first symbol display device 37a.
As shown in FIG. 878 , the first ball entrance 64 is played on the left side of the variable display unit 80 so that the ball flows down (so-called left-handed game), the right side of the variable display unit 80 A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 895), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.
In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the thirty-second control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are set to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.
In addition, in the 32nd control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special pattern lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the ball entrance. , While it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a ball passing through detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of special symbol lottery opportunities and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.
The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 878) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissive state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example will be described. In the 32nd control example, as shown in FIG. 878, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.
In the thirty-second control example, as shown in FIG. 878, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the electric accessory 640a are selected by lottery to determine whether or not to operate. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 serving as a trigger is arranged in a right hitting area, and when a time saving state is set as a game state, a right hitting game is performed.
A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball shot in a left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example, as shown in FIG. 878, in the right-handed area, the upper surface of the V winning device 650 is inclined downward to the left (lower left when viewed from the front in FIG. 878). is arranged, and each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

When the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the retracted electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the protruded state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 878). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.
In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case of using the configuration for changing the visibility of the inside using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 879, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 879, of the balls fired in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-shaped member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right in front view of FIG. 879). is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 879) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.
The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable prize winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state in a state where the ball reaches the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured such that the ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 that is opened. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.
In addition, in the 32nd control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates is different in the game state (normal symbol probability state), and the game state is the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) is set and the electric accessory 640a operates, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the projecting state reaches the area b (see FIG. 640a is variable to the standby state, in the state in which the time-saving state is set, during a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 879), the electric accessory 640a is configured to be positioned at the projecting position.
Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the falling period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 879 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in the 32nd control example). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.
Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 879, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, different ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 Alternatively, by configuring it so that the ball can be guided to the general winning hole 63), the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the time saving state.
As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than for the ball to enter the general winning opening 63. Advantageous benefits (i.e. special figure 2 lottery and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery cannot be executed (during special symbol fluctuation) If there is, it is configured so that the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give the player a more advantageous privilege (that is, 10 prize balls).
As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in special symbols), the player can change the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained), which saves time. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. is set to a long period (2 seconds), and the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is operated. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a inside is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.8 seconds). 9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.
Returning to FIG. 878, the description continues. As described above with reference to FIG. 879, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.
In addition, in some of the "big wins" of the special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the "minor wins" described above. As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.
Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 879 to 883. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 879, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state that closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is can flow down, and the ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down toward the lower left side (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 879) on the open/close door 650f1. , to the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the 32nd control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times. The ball that is doing wins a prize to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are configured to align and flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 882(a)) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.
In the thirty-second control example, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1, the opening/closing door 650f1 flows down. Any other period may be set as long as the ball can enter the V winning device 650 during the period. In addition, in the 32nd control example, the number of times the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.
In the 32nd control example, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game and then opened next time (opening interval period), the fifth time and the tenth time during the small winning game Five seconds are set after the opening operation, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.
Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 is set longer than normal. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.
In the 32nd control example, after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the small winning game, a longer special opening interval period than the others is set. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small win game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. If the game guide display is displayed multiple times, at least the second and subsequent notification timings should be set to timings that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, as in the 29th control example described above, in the 32nd control example, by performing the right-handed game continuously during the small winning game, at least 1 Since it is configured so that 1 balls can be entered, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of prizes that will be the termination condition of the small winning game during the 10th opening operation (10 pieces) is reached, and the small winning game is ended.
That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.
It should be noted that, as in the 32nd control example, when the first special opening interval period is set to the timing (after the fifth opening operation ends) reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed is the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered during the operation to be discharged from the V prize winning device 650 has passed, and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. When it is determined that it is, a notification effect is displayed to notify that effect during the first interval between special openings. should be configured to display As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.
Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 880 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 880, the V winning device 650 is an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the V winning device 650 is combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of
FIG. 881 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. FIG. 881(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 881(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 881(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 881(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 881(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that game balls can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.
In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.
FIG. 881(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 881(b). As shown in FIG. 881(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.
Next, with reference to FIG. 882, a description will be given of a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 882(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 882(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.
As shown in FIG. 882(a), the game ball guided into the sorting channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.
Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, the game ball passes through the above-described V switch 650e3 during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By turning on the flow path solenoid 650k, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (see FIG. 882(b)).
In the pachinko machine 10 used in the 32nd control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured as follows. Then, when a small prize is won, the channel solenoid 650k is set to ON according to the contents stipulated in the above-mentioned open scenario table 202g, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. It is configured to be In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to OFF, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state (see FIG. 882(a)) in which the switching member 650h is maintained.

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.
In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.
In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball in the 32nd control example) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out for winning a prize. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.
Furthermore, in the 32nd control example, according to the small winning type (small winning A, B, C) set when winning a small winning, the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650 k to ON are different small winning It is configured so that games can be played. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is made different depending on the content of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high expectation of V winning will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 883, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 883(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. In the opening/closing door 650f1 of the thirty-second control example, as shown in FIG. It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the device 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .
A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured to be 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.
In the state shown in FIG. 883(a), when the small winning game is executed and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 883(b). FIG. 883(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 883(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the player can win. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.
In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 878). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

Returning to FIG. 878, the description continues. A logo character Rg2 representing the title of the animation or drama that is the model of the pachinko machine 10 is decorated on the upper center side of the game board when viewed from the front, and the model of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the upper center of the variable display device unit 80. A decorative structure (logo decoration Rg1) that imitates the logo mark of an anime or drama that has become popular is arranged. This logo decoration Rg1 has a built-in LED and can perform light emission and blinking in accordance with the variable effect. Incidentally, the logo decoration Rg1 is fixed to the game board 13, and its position is not changed.
The position of the logo decoration Rg1 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. For example, the logo decoration Rg1 may be placed outside the variable display unit 80 in the lower right area in front view or in the lower left area in front view.
<Regarding the decorative movable accessory in the 32nd control example>
Next, the decorative movable accessory (logo accessory 902) provided in the thirty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 884 to 891. FIG. FIG. 884(a) is a diagram schematically showing the state (storage position) in which the logo accessory 902 is stored. As shown in FIG. 884(a), this logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a, a rotating body accessory 902b, and left and right lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. The configuration of the logo accessory 902 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 886 to 891 as appropriate.
The bar accessory 902a has lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d at both left and right ends. The lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d are symmetrical and have substantially the same shape. Therefore, in the left raising mechanism 902c, the description of the right raising mechanism 902d will be omitted for the same components as those described above.

The left lifting mechanism 902c has a two-stage rack composed of an upper rack 902c1 and a boot-shaped lower rack 902c2. It is connected with the rack 902c1. The height of the two-stage rack is variable by rotating the upper drive cam 902c3 to change the position of the cylindrical pin 902c3p provided on the upper drive cam 902c3.
Here, with reference to FIGS. 886 to 889, the detailed structure of the left lifting mechanism 902c will be described. Figures 886 and 888 are exploded perspective views of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d, and Figures 887 and 889 are exploded rear perspective views of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d. As shown in FIG. 886, the left raising mechanism 902c is provided with a bar accessory motor 902c7, which is a stepping motor for upward driving. The bar accessory motor 902c7 is provided with an upper drive gear 902c4 that engages with the upper drive cam 902c3. The bar accessory motor 902c7 operates to rotate the upper driving gear 902c4, thereby rotating the upper driving cam 902c3. A cylinder pin 902c3p is provided on the upper drive cam 902c3, and the position of the cylinder pin 902c3p is varied by rotating the upper drive cam 903c3.
The cylindrical pin 902c3p protrudes forward in a front view, and when the bar accessory 902a is in the storage position, the bottom of the lower rack 902c2 is supported from below by the cylindrical pin 902c3p. By moving the cylindrical pin 902c3p clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right lifting mechanism 902d) from the position shown in FIG. Cylinder pin 902c3p loses support. The bar function 902a is supported by a stopper 902c5 (see FIG. 887), and when the stopper 902c5 is in a locked state, the bar function 902a falls even if the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p. do not do.
This stopper 902c5 slides the arm member 902c6 connected to the upper drive cam 902c3 by rotating the bar accessory motor 902c7 by a predetermined number of steps (25 steps in this 32nd control example), and moves the arm member 902c6. By moving the connecting link member 902c5L up and down, it can be changed between the locked state and the unlocked state. When the stopper 902c5 is in the released state and the cylindrical pin 902c3p does not enter the lower portion of the lower rack 902c2, the lower rack 902c2 drops due to its own weight. At this time, the connecting gear 902c8a that connects the lower rack 902c2 and the upper rack 902c1 is engaged with the lower protruding piece 902c8c provided on the column portion of the lifting mechanism 902c and rotates counterclockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper projecting piece 902c8b (see FIG. 887) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates counterclockwise to lower the upper rack 902c1. As a result, the bar accessory 902a falls to its lower limit.

Only the right raising mechanism 902d is provided with a right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 shown in FIG. 884(a). When the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is ON, the valve protrudes toward the back side in the front view, and the bar accessory 902a falling under its own weight can be stopped at the position shown in FIG. 885(a). . On the other hand, when the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, the valve retracts and the bar accessory 902a drops to the lower limit.
Here, in the thirty-second control example, two types of falling patterns can be set as the falling pattern of the bar accessory 902a. First, the first drop pattern is a right intermediate one-sided drop state in which the left stopper 902c5 remains locked, only the right stopper 902d5 is released, and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned ON (see FIG. 885(a)). After that, the left stopper 902c5 is released from the right intermediate one-sided drop state, and the left end of the bar accessory 902a is dropped to the lower limit (see FIG. 885(b)). This is the first drop pattern in which the stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off and the right end of the bar accessory 902a is also dropped to the lower limit (the position shown in FIG. 884(b)).
The second drop pattern is the second drop pattern in which the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are simultaneously released and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, so that the bar accessory 902a drops to its lower limit at once under its own weight. .
In this way, even with the structure in which the bar accessory 902a is dropped by its own weight, it is possible to set various drop patterns by varying the release timings of the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 and the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5.

Returning to FIG. 886, the description continues. When the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit (in the state shown in FIG. 884(b)), the upper driving cam 902c3 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in the right raising mechanism 902d) to 902c3p moves clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 884(b), enters the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, and pushes up the lower rack 902c2. When the lower rack 902c2 is pushed up by the columnar pin 902c3p, the connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 887) engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c (see FIG. 887) provided on the pillar portion of the lifting mechanism 902c, and the connecting gear 902c8a Rotate clockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper projecting piece 902c8b (see FIG. 887) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates clockwise to raise the upper rack 902c1.
In this way, the two-stage rack of the upper rack 902c1 and the lower rack 902c2 enables vertical driving with a stroke longer than the diameter of the upper drive cam 902c3, so that the weight of the upper drive cam 902c3 can be reduced. , the output of the stepping motor for driving can be suppressed and driven. Therefore, power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 888 to 891, the structure of the rotary accessory 902b will be described. Figure 888 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a, and Figure 889 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a. Also, FIG. 890 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body accessory 902b, and FIG. 891 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body accessory. The rotating body 902b1 is a member whose surface is decorated, and in this 32nd control example, the character "object" related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10 is decorated (see FIG. 884(a)). A rotating body motor 902b2, which is a stepping motor for rotational driving, and a roller slider 902b6 are provided on the back side of the rotating body 902b1 (see FIG. 889). When the rotating body motor 902b2 is driven based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, the rotating gear 902b7 rotates, and the rotation of the rotating gear 902b7 rotates the rotating body 902b1.
The rotor motor 902b2 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the rotation direction of the rotor 902b1 corresponds to the rotation direction of the rotor motor 902b2. is variable.

In addition, the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the rotation speed of the rotor 902b1 can be adjusted in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2. Variable.
As shown in FIG. 888, a roller slider 902b6 provided on the rotary accessory 902b is configured to allow the ball screw 902b5 to pass therethrough. The ball screw 902b5 is provided with a lateral drive gear 902b4 and a lateral drive stepping motor 902b3 on the left end in front view. It rotates and the ball screw 902b5 rotates. When the ball screw 902b5 rotates, the roller slider 902b6 moves left and right. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b can be moved left and right.
Here, with reference to FIG. 884(b), the right and left movable range of the rotary accessory 902b will be described. The rotator accessory 902b is configured to be able to move left and right within the range from the left range of motion limit Pt2 to the right range of motion limit Pt3 on the front side of the bar accessory 902a in front view. A reference position Pt1 is set between the left and right movable range limits Pt2 and Pt3, and is configured to stop at the reference position Pt1 when the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.
The traversing motor-902b3 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise according to the operation data set by the audio ramp controller 113, and when the traversing motor 902b3 rotates clockwise, the rotator accessory 902b moves to the right when viewed from the front, and rotates counterclockwise, the rotary accessory 902b moves to the left when viewed from the front.

The bar accessory 902a is provided with sensors (not shown) at positions corresponding to the reference position Pt1, the left range of motion limit Pt2, and the right range of motion limit Pt3, so that the left and right positions of the rotating body accessory 902b can be detected. Configure.
In addition, the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound ramp control device 113, and the rotating accessory 902b moves according to the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3. The speed is also variable.
<Regarding the effect contents in the 32nd control example>
With reference to FIGS. 892 to 894, the characteristic effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example will be described. FIG. 893(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special symbol (third symbol) is temporarily stopped on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, left, middle and right three pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 892(a), the configuration of the symbol sequence of the thirty-second control example will be described. FIG. 892(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the third symbol in the thirty-second control example. The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is There are eight types of main patterns with identification information imitating numbers "1" to "8" and identification information imitating characters "sea", "things" and "words" related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10. Each is composed of three types of attached main patterns. These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Each number pattern is a state in which three of the same number patterns are aligned on the activated line L1 (for example, 7 patterns D9 are stopped and displayed in the left middle pattern Z1b, the middle middle pattern Z2b, and the right middle pattern Z3b). state), it indicates that a special symbol jackpot is won.
On the other hand, the character pattern is a state in which three identical character patterns are aligned on the activated line L1 (for example, a state in which the left middle pattern Z1b, the middle middle pattern Z2b, and the right middle pattern Z3b are each stopped and displayed with the "sea" pattern D4). ), and when the "sea" symbol D4 is displayed in the middle left symbol Z1b, the "object" symbol D7 is displayed in the middle middle symbol Z2b, and the "word" symbol D10 is displayed in the middle right symbol Z3b. It is configured to indicate that the jackpot is won.
FIGS. 892(b) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of the stop pattern of the rotary accessory 902b. The normal rotation state shown in FIG. 892(b) is the orientation when the rotating body motor 902b2 is at the origin position. (c) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a case other than the origin position.
Returning to FIG. 893(a), the description is continued. As shown in FIG. 893(a), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery situation (whether the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed, 4th design (special 1 4th design) for indicating the lottery status of the 1st special design (special 1), or 4th design for indicating the lottery status of the 2nd special design (special 2) ( Special figure 2 fourth pattern) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1. In the example shown in FIG. 893(a), the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating that the fourth symbol is being variably displayed in the small display area Dm1.

In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols are aligned on the effective line L1, a big winning notification performance is executed as a big winning.
Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 893(a), the upper and lower third symbols are displayed in a half-hidden state. This indicates that no effective line is set in the upper and lower stages.
In the example shown in FIG. 893(a), 1 symbol D1 as the middle left symbol Z1b, 8 symbols D11 as the middle middle symbol Z2b, and a nautical pattern D4 as the right middle symbol Z3b are stopped and displayed in a swaying state. The state in which the main symbols are shaken is a state in which the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the main symbol is completely stopped.
Further, as shown in FIG. 893(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved storage). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example executes a new special symbol lottery when the first symbol display device 37 is performing a variable display or when a winning game is being executed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in such a state that the ball cannot be entered, the number of times the ball enters each entrance is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this 32nd control example, the maximum value of the number of held balls stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is four, and for a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, Since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls to be stored is set to 4, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 893(a), the sub display area Ds is divided into a special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1, a running area Ds2, and a special figure 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3. be done. The special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the upper limit number (4) that can be reserved and stored. Four pedestals m1 to m4 are displayed in order from the right. Then, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol is obtained, the reserved symbol is displayed on the pedestal of the lowest number among the four pedestals m1 to m4 on which the reserved symbol is not displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 893(a), two holding balls of the first special symbol are held and stored. Two reserved patterns (hr1 to hr2) of the display mode (white circle mark) corresponding to (special figure 1 reserved ball) are displayed on the first pedestal m1 and the second pedestal m2.
In addition, the special figure 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of reserved patterns corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and the upper limit number (4) that can be reserved and stored Four corresponding pedestals m5 to m8 are displayed in order from the left. Then, when the reserved ball of the second special pattern is obtained, the reserved pattern is displayed on the pedestal with the lowest number among the four pedestals m5 to m8 on which the reserved pattern is not displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 893 (a), since it is a state in which no one reserved ball of the second special symbol is stored, even one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3. not

The running area Ds2 is a display area in which the pending symbols displayed corresponding to the currently running special symbol variation are shifted and displayed, and the running pending symbols hr0 are displayed on the running base m0. be. That is, when a new special symbol variation is started, the reserved symbol hr1 displayed on the pedestal m1 of the special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1 is shifted to the pedestal m0 of the active area Ds2 and displayed. be done. By configuring in this way, for example, for the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1, a notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols ) is executed, the player can easily discriminate that the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the notice performance is executed is being executed.
In addition, by making it possible to display the reserved design (executing design) corresponding to the special design variation being executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved design (executing design) corresponds to the special design variation being executed Since it can be executed also for the reserved design (executing design), the display mode of the reserved design is variable for a longer time than when the reserved design corresponding to the special design variation being executed is not displayed. The game can be played while making the player anticipate it.
In addition, when the reserved design is displayed on the pedestal m5 of the special figure 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3, it is prioritized over the reserved design hr1 displayed on the pedestal m1 of the special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1. is shifted to the pedestal m0 of the in-execution area Ds2 and displayed.
Thus, in this 32nd control example, the display area of the special figure 1 reserved design and the display area of the special figure 2 reserved design are configured to be displayed separately, so that the displayed reserved design The player can identify whether it is a reserved design (special figure 1 reserved design) indicating the reserved ball of the first special design or a reserved design (special figure 2 reserved design) indicating the reserved ball of the second special design. It consists of As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol. It is possible to make it easier to judge whether or not to continue the game.

FIG. 893(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the start of the relief chance presentation. This relief chance effect is a kind of effect (so-called resurrection effect) in which the display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost is displayed, and then the display mode is changed to indicate that a big win or a small win is won. When the rotary accessory 902b stops in the normal rotation state (see FIG. 892(b)) on the line connecting the "word" pattern D10 displayed in the main display area Dm of the three-pattern display device 81, the jackpot is won. This is an effect in which the winning is announced. The details of the relief chance presentation will be described below.
When the relief chance presentation is started, the logo accessory 902 starts to operate based on the operation scenario preset by the sound lamp control device 113 . Specifically, the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit, and the rotating body accessory 902b starts to move left and right and rotate.
As shown in FIG. 894(b), when the relief chance effect is started, the bar accessory 902a is positioned in front of the temporarily stopped third symbol on the activated line L1, so that the player sees it as effective. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the third pattern on the line L1. This is because, when the third pattern, which is entirely displayed on the line connecting the logo lamp Rg1 and the "word" pattern D7, can be visually recognized, the production succeeds and the character string of "sea story" is formed. Even so, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the character string "Sea Story" has been formed due to the existence of the other third symbols on the line in a visible state. Therefore, the third pattern on the effective line L1 is covered by the bar symbol 902a so that there is no unnecessary third pattern on the line of the logo lamp Rg1, the rotating body symbol 902b, and the "word" symbol D10. It consists of
A display area HR1 is formed in the upper center area of the main display area Dm, and an up arrow 802 is displayed in the lower center area of the main display area Dm to indicate the stop position of the rotating body accessory 902b where the production is successful. . In the display area HR1, a guidance mode for notifying success conditions of the relief chance presentation is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to recognize the content of the relief chance presentation in an easy-to-understand manner.

The rotator role object 902b continues to move and rotate left and right for about 6 seconds based on an operation scenario preset by the sound lamp control device 113, and then stops at a stop position for announcing the result of success/failure determination. .
FIG. 894(a) is a diagram showing the content of the effect when the rescue chance effect is successful. When the operation scenario of the success pattern of the rescue chance effect is set (that is, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot winning), when the operation scenario stop timing comes, the rotary accessory 902b reaches the winning notification position (Fig. In the example shown in 894(a), it stops in the forward rotation state at the position of the intersection of the activated line L1 and the middle symbol row Z2. When it is confirmed that the rotary accessory 902b has stopped at the hit notification position, the middle pattern row Z2 returns by half a frame, and the middle and lower pattern Z2c displayed in a half-hidden state rises to the position of the rising line L2. , the entire middle and lower stage pattern Z2c is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the middle and lower pattern Z2c is a constituent element forming the character string of "Sea Story" with the logo lamp Rg1 and the rotary accessory 902b. It should be noted that this character string of "sea story" is a form indicating that the jackpot has been won.
In addition, as the middle pattern row Z2 moves back by half a frame, the bar accessory 902a also rises to a corresponding position, thereby covering the middle and middle row pattern Z2b. As a result, there is no unnecessary third pattern on the line of the logo lamp Rg1, the rotary accessory 902b, and the "word" pattern D10, and the character string of "sea story" is completed for the player. can make things easier to understand.
Furthermore, in response to the completion of the character string "Sea Story", the logo lamp Rg1 and the LEDs built in the rotating body accessory 902b are caused to emit light, thereby causing the logo lamp Rg1 and the rotating body accessory 902b to emit light. The formation of a line with the middle and lower pattern Z2c is emphasized to prevent the player from overlooking it.

In addition, in the display area HR1, the characters "Congratulations" are displayed as a guide mode for notifying that the relief chance presentation has been successful. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the relief chance presentation has succeeded.
On the other hand, in the case of a rescue chance effect failure (that is, in the case where the success/failure determination result is a loss), the loss notification position (in the example shown in FIG. 894(b), the position of the intersection of the effective line L1 and the right symbol row Z3) , the rotary accessory 902b stops. In the example shown in FIG. 894(b), an example in which the rotary accessory 902b stops at the intersection of the effective line L1 and the right symbol column Z3 has been described. Any position outside the line connecting the "word" pattern D10 displayed on the three-pattern display device 81 is acceptable.
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 895, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example will be described. FIG. 895 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example. In the thirty-second control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-ninth control example described above. The difference is that a drive motor for the logo accessory 902 is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.
The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs a logo accessory 902. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the output of the drive control data and the variable effect (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the drive motor group 770, and the right halfway stop solenoid 775, respectively. Here, the drive motor group 770 includes drive sources (motors) for driving various decorative movable members (variable members) that can be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, It has bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7, a rotor motor 902b2, a lateral movement motor 902b3, and other motors 771.
The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.
Here, with reference to FIG. 896(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the thirty-second control example will be described. FIG. 896(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirty-second control example. The difference is that a variation pattern selection table 222xa is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 222a and a new operation scenario selection table 222xb is added to the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the twenty-ninth control example described above. .
In the variation pattern selection table 222xa, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outgoing, false out, various types of reach, etc.) is set in the counter value for variation pattern selection. The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variably displayed by vertical scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the executed special symbol variation. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. A game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加
The operation scenario selection table 222xb is a table for setting an operation scenario for each drive motor that constitutes the logo accessory 902. FIG. In the action scenario selection table 222xb, the action scenario corresponding to the result of the suitability determination is set to the scenario selection counter value. The sound lamp control device 113 selects the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 based on the success/failure determination result and the acquired counter value for scenario selection when execution of the relief chance presentation described above is determined as the variation mode. .
Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222xa will be described with reference to FIGS. 897 and 898. FIG. FIG. 897(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222xa. As shown in FIG. 897 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222xa includes a normal variation pattern selection table 222xa1, a time saving variation pattern selection table 222xa2, a special time saving variation pattern selection table 222xa3, and a time saving final variation pattern A selection table 222xa4 is defined.
FIG. 897(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 222xa1. The normal variation pattern selection table 222xa1 is a table that is referred to when the special symbol variation display is executed in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state). A variation pattern for display is set based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the determination, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first effect counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 897(b), in the thirty-second control example, execution/non-execution of the relief chance effect is defined for each display variation pattern.

Specifically, the special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", the success/failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". "0 to 199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern A" and no relief chance effect.
In addition, in the case of the variation pattern type "out", the relief chance effect is not set. This is because the rendering time of the relief chance rendering is 12 seconds, and the relief chance rendering does not end within the variable time.
Special figure type is "1st special pattern (special figure 1)", the result of success or failure is "out", and the variation pattern type is "out of guess", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 179""Variation pattern B" and no relief chance effect are associated with each other, and "Variation pattern C" and relief chance effect are associated with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". stipulated. That is, when the variation pattern type is "false", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 10%.
Special figure type is "1st special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 179" On the other hand, "fluctuation pattern D" and no relief chance effect are defined in correspondence, and "fluctuation pattern E" and relief chance effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". It is That is, when the result of the judgment is "miss" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 10%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 149""Variation pattern F" and no relief chance effect are associated with each other, and "Variation pattern G" and relief chance effect are associated with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". stipulated. That is, when the result of the determination is "miss" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 25%.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 149" On the other hand, "fluctuation pattern H" and no relief chance effect are defined in correspondence, and "fluctuation pattern I" and relief chance effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". It is That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 25%.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 129""Variation pattern J" and no relief chance effect are associated with each other, and "Variation pattern K" and relief chance effect are associated with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "130 to 199". stipulated. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big win" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 35%.
It should be noted that, if the success/failure determination result is "big win" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", and if the rescue chance effect is executed, the third symbol will not be in the reach state and will be temporarily stopped in a combination that indicates an outfall, and then relief. Chance production is started.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is "jackpot" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", and if the rescue chance effect is executed, the third pattern becomes the reach state, and after the reach effect is executed, a combination indicating a failure. is temporarily stopped, and a relief chance presentation is started.
In addition, if the variation pattern type is "Normal Reach" or "Super Reach", the ease of setting the rescue chance effect will differ depending on whether the result of the success/fail judgment is "miss" or "jackpot". In the case of "jackpot", it is easier to set the relief chance presentation than in the case of "loss".
As a result, even when the third symbol does not reach the ready-to-win state, the player expects that the relief chance presentation will be executed, and the player has a feeling of anticipation for winning the jackpot until the last moment when the variable display ends. It is possible to let
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "special reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern L" and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other. That is, when the result of the win/fail determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "special reach", the relief chance effect is not set. This is because, in this 32nd control example, "special reach" is set as the variation pattern type only when the success/failure determination result is "jackpot". This is because, since it is possible to recognize that the player has won the jackpot, even if the relief chance presentation is executed, the presentation effect is low.

Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to "199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern M" and no relief chance effect. That is, when the result of the win/loss determination is "small hit" and the variation pattern type is "long hit", the relief chance effect is not set.
The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". On the other hand, "fluctuation pattern N" and no relief chance effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern P" and relief chance effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". It is That is, when the result of the determination is "miss" and the variation pattern type is "miss", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 10%.
The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "big hit" or "small hit", and the variation pattern type is "hit". ``Variation pattern Q'' and no relief chance presentation are defined in association with ``0 to 149'', and ``variation pattern R'' and relief chance presentation are defined for values of the first presentation counter CS1 of ``150 to 199''. There is associated with and defined. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big win" or "small win" and the variation pattern type is "win", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 25%.
FIG. 898(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern selection table 222xa2. The time saving variation pattern selection table 222xa2 is a table referred to when special symbol variation display is executed in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). As with the normal variation pattern selection table 222xa1, display based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success or failure determination result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first production counter CS1 This is to set the fluctuation pattern for use.

Specifically, the special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", the success or failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "super short out" as the specified contents, the value of the first production counter CS1 "0 to 199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern S" and no relief chance effect.
Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern T" and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 189”, “variation pattern U” and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other, the special figure type is “first special symbol (special figure 1)”, the success/failure determination result is “small hit”, and the variation pattern type is defined for the "long and small win", the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "190 to 199", and the "fluctuation pattern V" and the presence of the relief chance effect are defined in association with each other. That is, when the result of the judgment is "small win" and the variation pattern type is "long win", the relief chance effect is set at a rate of 5%.
The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "short off", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199". , "fluctuation pattern W" and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other.

Special figure type is "second special pattern (special figure 2)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "super short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199 ', 'fluctuation pattern X' and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other.
The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "small hit", and the variation pattern type is "super short and small hit". "199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern Y" and no relief chance effect.
Thus, in the time-saving state, the relief chance effect is not set except for the case where the variation pattern type of the first special symbol is "long and small winning". This is because, in the time saving state, the variation time is set to 2 seconds or less except for the case where the variation pattern type is "long and small win", which is shorter than the presentation time of the relief chance presentation.
Drawing 898 (b) is a figure showing typically the contents of fluctuation pattern selection table 222xa3 for special time saving. The special time saving variation pattern selection table 222xa3 is a table that is referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the special time saving state.

Here, in the present 32nd control example, as in the 29th control example described above, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the second special symbol variation count executed during the time saving state reaches three times. A time saving end condition that is established when the time saving end condition is established, and the time saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol fluctuation frequency executed during the time saving state and the second special symbol fluctuation frequency reaches 10 times, have at least
That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 32nd control example executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set, and any second special symbol is selected. By winning a win (small win, big win) with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery, the time saving state is repeated through the big win game, and in the second special symbol lottery executed three times during the time saving state. If you do not win, the time-saving state ends, and if you do not win even in the second special symbol lottery (once) using the remaining special figure 2 reservation, move to the normal state ( It has a game property that the continuous chan state ends).
Here, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches three times, the first Even when the special pattern lottery is executed three times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed despite the time saving state being set. There was a possibility that such a situation could occur. That is, in this 32nd control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is configured to be able to acquire a maximum of 4 pieces, for example, 4 special figure 1 reservations, special figure 2 reservations When the time-saving state is set in a state in which 0 pieces are acquired, the first special symbol variation is executed prior to the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time saving end condition is satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time saving state ends without exhibiting the original game property, and the player's willingness to play. There was a problem that the
In addition, even in a state where four special 1 reserves are acquired when the time saving state is set, in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time saving state, for example, a special symbol lottery When the time-saving end condition is established when the number of executions reaches 7 times, when the time-saving state is set without acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, the second special symbol variation It becomes possible to execute the game more than three times, and there is a problem that a game that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided to the original game property.

Therefore, in this 32nd control example, the time saving end condition established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol variation, and the time saving established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation End conditions are set, and the time saving state is ended when one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied. By configuring in this way, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times, and when the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is performed You can definitely end the time saving state.
Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation corresponding to the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the time saving state is set until the 4th first special symbol variation is executed, a short time (0.5 seconds) variation time is It is configured to be set, and for the subsequent first special symbol variation, a variation time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even though the time saving state is set, when the player who does not understand the game method in the time saving state plays a left-handed game, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state If the fluctuation time of a short time (0.5 seconds) is set, new first special symbol variations are executed one after another, and the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are added up. There was a possibility that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times, may be established.
On the other hand, in this 29th control example, only when the first special symbol variation after the fifth time executed after the time saving state is set, that is, when the special figure 1 suspension is newly acquired during the time saving state For the first special symbol variation to be executed, a long variation time (20 seconds) is configured to lengthen the period required until one first special symbol variation is completed. , By ensuring a period for the player to grasp the game method in the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is established It is configured so as to prevent it from happening.
In addition, in the special time-saving state (state in which the first special symbol variation is executed five times or more during the time-saving state), as a variation effect of the first special symbol variation, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game ( It is configured to execute a variable performance including a performance mode prompting to acquire special figure 2 reservation). By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the game method to be executed during the time-saving state can grasp the correct game method more easily.

FIG. 898(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving final variation pattern selection table 222xa4. The time saving final variation pattern selection table 222xa4 is a table referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the time saving final variation.
In this 32nd control example, as in the 29th control example described above, during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation that is the time saving final fluctuation, the final result of the countdown effect executed during the time saving state (number icon 808 '0' display) is displayed, and the charge effect (see FIG. 793 (a)) is configured to prompt the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold until the time saving state ends. . Therefore, since the time saving state is set, the third (final) second special symbol variation is longer than the first or second second special symbol variation to ensure the effect period of the charge effect. It is configured so that the time is set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation. Also, even in the case of winning the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the case of winning the first or second second special symbol lottery, and the third second special symbol lottery. Since the time efficiency (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed per unit time in the time saving state) can be greatly different from the case of winning in the lottery, the player is given a second lottery during the time saving state. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not he/she wins in the special symbol lottery, but also how many times of the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state he/she wins.
Next, referring to FIG. 899, the contents of the operation scenario selection table 222xb will be described. FIG. 899 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 899, in the action scenario selection table 222xb, action scenarios corresponding to the results of right/wrong determination are set for the values of the second effect counters, which are counters for scenario selection.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “miss”, “action scenario A” is defined for the value of the second effect counter CS2 of “0 to 19”. Now, with reference to FIG. 900, the contents of operation scenario A will be described. FIG. 900(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to the vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario A of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 900(a), the operation scenario A for vertically driving the bar accessory 902a is such that the left bar accessory motor 902c7, the right bar accessory motor 902d7, and the right midway stop solenoid The action data (action content) of 902d9 are specified, and the position (state) of the bar role 902a and the states of the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 at that stage are shown.
The scenario counter 223xh is a counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is used to set operation data for each driving motor of the logo accessory 902 at predetermined timings. The counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 in the relief chance effect execution process (S3159) of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see FIG. 913), which will be described later. Although details will be described later, this liquid crystal effect execution management process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 908). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.
In this 32nd control example, when the start timing of the relief chance presentation set in advance in the display variation pattern has come, the sound lamp control device 113 starts counting the scenario counter 223xh, and the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes the operation scenario. When the specified value is reached, the corresponding operation data is set.
As shown in FIG. 900(a), the scenario counter value indicates the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh. 1 is added in the in-execution process (S3159). Although details will be described later, this liquid crystal effect execution management process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 908). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

The number of steps of the left bar accessory motor operation data and the right bar accessory motor operation data indicates the number of rotation steps of the left bar accessory motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7, and the speed is the left bar role. The speed for operating the stepping motors of the object motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 is defined.
The "+ (forward direction)" and "- (reverse direction)" of the number of steps indicate the direction in which the motor rotates. In the reverse direction, the motor is rotated in the direction in which the step counter is decremented and updated. The left bar accessory motor 902c7 in the 32nd control example rotates clockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates counterclockwise when the reverse direction is set. The right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates clockwise when the reverse direction is set.
In the thirty-second control example, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms (high speed), and when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms. When the speed is 3, the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms (medium low speed), and when the speed is 4, the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms. speed (low speed). In other words, speed 1 is set as the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1/1 of speed 1. It has 4 speeds.
Also, the bar role object position indicates the position (state) of the bar role object 902a at the time of setting the action data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh.

When the start timing of the relief chance presentation set in the display variation pattern comes, the scenario counter 223xh starts counting. Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the number of steps +25 and the speed 4 are set as the motor operation data for the right bar accessory. As a result, the right bar accessory motor 902d7 starts rotating counterclockwise at a speed of 4 until the step counter value reaches 25. In this 32nd control example, the stepping motors of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are configured to rotate once in 100 steps, and the position where the step counter value is 0 (origin position) is the stored position, and the step counter is is 25, the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are in a released state (OFF state), and the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit. In the thirty-second control example, the time required to drive the step counters from 0 to 25 at speed 4 is set to 500 ms.
When the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "500", the number of steps +25 and the speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar accessory. As a result, the left bar accessory motor 902c7 rotates clockwise at a speed of 2 until the step counter value reaches 25. If the value of the scenario counter 223xh is "500", it means that 500 ms have passed since the start of the action scenario, so the right bar accessory motor 902d7 has rotated to the step counter value of 25. . As described above, when the step counter value reaches the position of 25, the right bar accessory stopper 902d5 is released (OFF state), and the right end of the bar accessory 902a in front view starts falling under its own weight. Since it is in the ON state, it is stopped at the position shown in FIG.
Then, when 250 ms have passed since the scenario counter value of 500 and the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches "750", the left bar accessory motor 902c7 has rotated to the position of the step counter value of 25, and the left bar accessory. Since the stopper 902d5 is in a released state (OFF state), the left end of the bar accessory 902a in a front view falls under its own weight. In addition, since the left lifting mechanism 902c is not provided with an intermediate stop solenoid, the left end of the bar accessory 902a in front view falls to the lowering limit, resulting in the state shown in FIG. one-sided state). After that, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1000", the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is set to OFF state, and the right end of the bar accessory 902a also drops to the lower limit (see FIG. 884(b)).
When the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches "11250", the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar accessory and the motor operation data for the right bar accessory. Since the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 25 at this point, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in opposite directions until the step counter values reach 100. Rotate at speed 2. In the thirty-second control example, at the step counter value of 60, the cylindrical pins 902c3p and 902d3p start pushing up the lower racks 902c2 and 902d2, respectively, and at the step counter value of 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the storage position.

Therefore, after 750 ms have elapsed since the operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value of 11250 was set, that is, at the time of the scenario counter value of 12000, the bar accessory 902a reaches the retracted position. Since the scenario counter value "12000" is the end time of the operation scenario A, END data is defined. By defining the END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is time to end the operation scenario.
FIG. 900(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario A of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 900(b), similar to the operation scenario for vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a, the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3 and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 are defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. It is The position and direction of the rotator role show the position and direction (state) of the rotator role 902b when it operates according to the scenario. Further, when the origin sensor data is set to ON, it is set to operate until the origin sensor (not shown) for the rotating body motor provided in the rotating body accessory 902b is turned on. indicates that there is
In operation scenario A, speed 3 and "+rotation" are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2 with respect to the counter value 500 of the scenario counter 223xh. This "+rotation" is motion data that continues to rotate in the forward direction until the next motion data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotator accessory 902b2 starts rotating in the positive direction at speed 3.
With the counter value 1000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps -100 and the speed 4 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3. The lateral movement motor 902b3 in the thirty-second control example is a stepping motor with a total number of steps of 200, and is configured so that the position of 100 steps becomes the reference stop position Pt1 (see FIG. 884(b)). 0 is the left excursion limit Pt2, and 200 steps is the right excursion limit Pt3. Therefore, in this case, the rotating accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 toward the left movable range limit Pt2.

Speed 3 and "-rotation" are set as rotating body motor operation data. This "-rotation" is motion data that continues to rotate in the opposite direction until the next motion data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotary accessory 902b starts to rotate in the opposite direction at speed 3.
For the counter value 3000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps +100 and the speed 4 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3. At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the reverse direction (that is, the step counter value is 0), so the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the left movable range limit Pt2. (See FIG. 884(b)). Therefore, according to the action data set by the scenario counter value 3000, the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 to the reference position Pt1 (see FIG. 884(b)). In addition, speed 3 and "+rotation" are set as rotating body motor operation data. As a result, the rotator accessory 902b starts rotating in the forward direction at speed 3.
For the counter value 5000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps +100 and speed 4 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3. At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the forward direction (that is, the step counter value is 100), so the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the reference position Pt1 (Fig. 884(b)). Therefore, according to the action data set by the scenario counter value 5000, the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 to the right movable range limit position Pt3 (see FIG. 884(b)).
At the counter value 7000 of the scenario counter 223xh, rotation stop is set as the rotating body motor operation data. As a result, the rotor motor 902b2 stops rotating. At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the forward direction (that is, the step counter value is 200), so the position of the rotator accessory 902b is the right movable range limit Pt3. (See FIG. 884(b)). In addition, since the rotating body motor 902b2 continues to rotate without setting the number of steps, the orientation becomes undefined when the operation data for stopping rotation is set.

Note that the scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing at which the success/failure determination result notification effect is executed in the operation scenario A of the relief chance effect. Therefore, information indicating that it is time to execute the out-of-failure notification effect is defined. This makes it possible for the sound lamp control device 113 to easily determine that it is time to notify the success/failure determination result.
In the scenario counter value of 11250, the number of steps -50 and speed 1 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the right range of motion limit Pt3 (see FIG. 884(b)), and the step counter value is 200. , the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 1 to the reference position Pt1. In addition, speed 1 and "-rotation" are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2, and the rotor motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotating body motor 902b2 rotates until it reaches the origin position, so that the rotating body accessory 902b can return to the storage position in the forward rotation state.
As described above, in the operation scenario A, the fall pattern (the first drop pattern) in which the bar accessory 902a drops to the lower limit in stages is executed, and the horizontal movement pattern of the rotating body accessory 902b is initially Then, a movement pattern (first movement pattern) from the reference position Pt1 toward the left movable range limit Pt2 is executed.
Note that, in the thirty-second control example, there is an operation scenario E in addition to the operation scenario A as an operation scenario in which the first drop pattern and the first movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 899, this operation scenario E is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the win/fail judgment is "winning" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79". is.

Here, the contents of operation scenario E will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 904(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to the vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario E of the logo accessory 902. FIG. Until the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the motion of the first drop pattern is executed in the same manner as in the motion scenario A.
When the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value of 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value of 6700 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. 894(a) after 100 ms has elapsed, the hit notification position is reached.
After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this time, the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65, so the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 4, and when the step counter value is 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.
Next, with reference to FIG. 904(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and lateral drive of the rotary body accessory 902b among the action scenario E of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 904(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario E of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 904(b), up to the scenario counter value of 5000, the motion scenario of the first movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the left range of motion limit Pt2) is executed in the same manner as the motion scenario A described above. executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 5000, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position, and by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the right movable range limit Pt3. In the thirty-second control example, the time required to drive 100 steps at speed 2 is set to 1000 ms.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6000, step number -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and speed 3 and "-rotation" are set as the rotor motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the right range of motion limit Pt3. By setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b moves to the reference position Pt1 at speed 2. to start.
Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 7000, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Note that the scenario counter value 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario E of the relief chance effect, and the jackpot winning is achieved by stopping the rotary accessory 902b in the forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Inform the player of something.
As described above, in the operation scenario E, the same operation pattern (first fall pattern and first movement pattern) as in the operation scenario A is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the rescue chance presentation, and the player rotates at the start of the hit notification presentation. A scenario is executed in which the body object 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG. 893(b) (that is, the reference position Pt1).
Here, as described above, the operation scenario A is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 19" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is "miss". Operation scenario E is an operation scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79" when the result of judging whether the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199", the operation scenario A is set at a rate of 10% of the case where the success/failure judgment result is "miss", and the operation scenario E It is set at a rate of 40% when the success/failure determination result is "hit". In other words, the motion scenarios of the first falling pattern and the first moving pattern are more likely to be selected when the result of the decision is "hit" than when the result is "miss". In this way, the setting probabilities of the action scenarios of the first falling pattern and the first moving pattern are set differently depending on whether the result of the success/failure determination is "miss" or "hit". A person can easily predict the result of judgment based on the operation pattern of the logo accessory 902 .

Next, the contents of operation scenario B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 901(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario B of the logo accessory 902. FIG. This operation scenario B is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the success/failure determination is "miss" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "20 to 99". This is an operation scenario of the second drop pattern, which is a drop pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops all at once from the storage position to the descent limit. In the second drop pattern, once the bar accessory 902a has fallen to the lower limit, the operation of confirming the origin of the rotating accessory 902b is executed. When it is determined that is confirmed, the operation of falling to the descent limit is performed again. This is because, in the second drop pattern, the bar object 902a drops to the lower limit at once, so that the width of the drop at one time of the bar object 902a is larger than in the first drop pattern, and especially the impact of the drop causes an abnormality in the origin sensor. This is because there is a risk of occurrence. In addition, as shown in FIG. 888, since the rotator accessory 902b of the logo accessory 902 in the thirty-second control example is angular rather than circular, when the origin is confirmed at the retracted position, the rear side of the operation unit Since there is a risk of interference with other structures provided in the base, the origin confirmation operation is performed at a position that does not interfere with other structures. When the origin position cannot be confirmed in the origin confirming operation, the second drop is stopped, and processing is executed to switch to an alternative relief chance presentation by the liquid crystal display.
As shown in FIG. 901(a), when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the number of steps +25 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the left bar accessory motor 902c7 starts rotating clockwise at speed 2 until the step counter value reaches 25, and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise until the step counter value reaches 25. , start rotating at the speed of speed 2. Then, when the scenario counter value is 250, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are rotated to the step counter value of 25, and the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released (OFF state). Therefore, the bar accessory 902a starts falling under its own weight to the lower limit.
After 2000 ms have passed since the ball fell to the lower limit, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 2250, the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the bar accessory 902a starts moving to the storage position. It should be noted that the origin confirmation operation of the rotary accessory 902b is executed in a period of 2000 ms after it falls to the lower limit.
When 750 ms have passed since the scenario counter value of 2250 and the scenario counter value reaches 3000, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position. Here, when the origin position can be confirmed in the origin confirming operation of the rotating body accessory 902b, the number of steps +25 and the speed 4 are set as the operation data of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7, and the scenario counter value is set. At the time point 3500, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are rotated to the step counter value of 25, and the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released (OFF state). 902a starts to drop under its own weight to the lower limit.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 11250, the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the bar accessory 902a starts moving to the storage position.
Next, with reference to FIG. 901(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the left-right drive and the rotational drive of the rotary accessory 902b in the action scenario B will be described. FIG. 901(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotary accessory 902b in the action scenario B. FIG. The operation scenario B is an operation scenario in which the operation of confirming the origin of the rotary accessory 902b and the operation of the first movement pattern are executed.
When the scenario counter value reaches 250, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and speed 3 and +rotation are set as the rotor motor operation data. Also, the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotator accessory 902b rotates clockwise to start moving to the right movable range limit Pt3, and the origin confirmation operation of the rotator motor 902b2 is started.
In the origin confirmation operation, when the rotator motor origin sensor detects the origin position of the rotator motor 902b, the origin flag 223xk is set to ON in the audio lamp controller 113. FIG. By setting the origin flag 223xk to ON, the continuation of the action scenario being executed is determined in the special scenario execution processing (see FIG. 915) described later, and the origin flag 223xk is set to ON by the end of the origin confirming operation. If not (that is, if the rotator motor origin sensor cannot detect the origin position), it is decided to stop the operation scenario being executed, and an alternative relief chance presentation is set by the liquid crystal display.

When the scenario counter value reaches 1250, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and "-rotation" are set as the rotor motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is positioned at the right range of motion limit Pt3, so that movement to the reference position Pt1 is started by setting this action data.
After 2000 ms have elapsed from the start of the origin confirming operation, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 2250, rotation stop is set as the rotating body motor operation data. As a result, even if the rotator motor origin sensor fails to detect the origin position of the rotator motor 902b2, the rotator 902b stops rotating. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the rotary accessory 902b from continuing to rotate even at the retracted position. Since the scenario counter value 2250 is the timing of the end of the origin confirmation operation, information indicating the timing of the end of the origin confirmation operation is defined. As a result, the audio ramp control device 113 can determine that it is time to end the origin confirming operation.
After the origin confirming operation is completed and the bar object 902a falls to the lower limit again, the operation of the first movement pattern (the operation pattern of moving from the reference position Pt1 to the left movable range limit Pt2 first) similar to the operation scenario A. is executed.
In operation scenario B, there is a deviation in the scenario counter value in which the operation data is defined by the amount of execution of the origin confirming operation with respect to operation scenario A. By shortening the performance time of the notification performance, the time required until the action scenario ends is adjusted. By configuring in this manner, the time required to complete the action scenario is constant regardless of whether or not the origin confirmation action is performed, and regardless of which action scenario is selected, the action scenario is executed within the special pattern variation time. can be terminated.

In the thirty-second control example, the effect time of the notification effect of the success/failure determination result is shortened to match the time required until the end of the action scenario. A configuration may be adopted in which the time required for movement of the rotating body accessory 902b is shortened by increasing the moving speed of the accessory 902b.
As described above, in the operation scenario B, the movement of the second falling pattern (the pattern of falling all at once from the storage position to the lower limit) is executed as the falling pattern of the bar accessory 902a, and the movement pattern of the rotating body accessory 902b is the second falling pattern. One movement pattern (a pattern in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 to the left movable range limit Pt2) is set.
Note that, in the thirty-second control example, there is an operation scenario F in addition to the operation scenario B as an operation scenario in which the second fall pattern and the first movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 899, this operation scenario F is set when the win/loss determination result is "win" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "80 to 99". is.
Here, the contents of operation scenario F will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 905(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario F of the logo accessory 902. FIG. Until the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the motion of the second drop pattern is executed in the same manner as in the motion scenario B.

When the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value 9200 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. 894(a) after 100 ms has elapsed, the hit notification position is reached.
After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this time, the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65, so the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 2, and when the step counter value is 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.
Next, with reference to FIG. 905(b), of the action scenario F of the logo accessory 902, the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotating body accessory 902b will be described. FIG. 905(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b among the action scenario F of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 905(b), until the scenario counter value reaches 2250, the origin confirmation operation is executed in the same manner as in the operation scenario B described above. After that, unlike the motion scenario B described above, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern is executed in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3. Specifically, when the scenario counter value reaches 3500, the number of steps +100 and speed 4 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and + rotation are set as the rotating body motor operation data. Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 5500, the rotator accessory 902b rotates at the right movable range limit Pt3, and the number of steps -100 and speed 4 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the rotator motor operates. At speed 3 as data - rotation is set. Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the motion scenario of the first movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the left movable range limit Pt2) is executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the rotating accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position at this time. start moving to In addition, the rotating body accessory 902b is positioned at the left movable range limit Pt2.
When the scenario counter value reaches 8500, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and + rotation are set as the rotating body motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the left movable range limit Pt2, so by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b moves at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1. to start.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 9500, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Note that the scenario counter value 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario F of the relief chance effect, and the jackpot winning is achieved by stopping the rotary accessory 902b in the forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Inform the player of something.
As described above, in the operation scenario F, the same operation pattern (the second fall pattern and the first movement pattern) as in the operation scenario B is performed for a predetermined period (the period up to the scenario counter value of 2250) from the start of the relief chance presentation. , a scenario is executed in which the rotary accessory 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG.
Here, as described above, the action scenario B is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "20 to 99" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is "miss". Operation scenario F is an operation scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "80 to 99" when the result of judging whether the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", the action scenario B is set at a rate of 40% of the case where the result of the success/failure judgment is "miss", and the action scenario F is It is set at a rate of 10% when the success/failure determination result is "hit". In other words, the action scenario of the second falling pattern and the first moving pattern is more likely to be selected when the result of the decision is "miss" than when the result is "hit".
Next, the contents of operation scenario C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 902(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario C of the logo accessory 902. FIG. This operation scenario C is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the success/failure determination is "miss" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 139". As shown in FIG. 902(a), similarly to the operation scenario A described above, the first drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the lower limit step by step) as the drop pattern of the bar accessory 902a. is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 902(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and lateral drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario C of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 902(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario C of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 902(b), unlike the motion scenario A described above, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3 is executed. It should be noted that this operation scenario differs from operation scenario A in that the rotation direction of the operation data specified in each scenario counter value is reversed, and the rest is the same.
Note that, in the thirty-second control example, there is an operation scenario G in addition to the operation scenario C as an operation scenario in which the first drop pattern and the second movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 899, this operation scenario G is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the success/failure determination is "win" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 159". is.
Here, with reference to FIG. 906, the contents of the action scenario G of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 906(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to the vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario G of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 906(a), until the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the operation of the first fall pattern is executed in the same manner as in the operation scenario C.
When the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value of 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value of 6700 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. 894(a) after 100 ms has elapsed, the hit notification position is reached.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this time, the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65, so the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 4, and at the position of the step counter value of 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.
Next, with reference to FIG. 906(b), of the action scenario G of the logo accessory 902, the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotator accessory 902b will be described. FIG. 906(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b among the action scenarios G of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 906(b), up to the scenario counter value of 5000, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the right range of motion limit Pt3) is performed in the same manner as the motion scenario C described above. executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 5000, step number -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position, and by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the left movable range limit Pt2.
When the scenario counter value reaches 6000, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and + rotation are set as the rotating body motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the left movable range limit Pt2, so by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b moves at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1. to start.
Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 7000, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario G of the relief chance effect. Inform the player of something.

As described above, in the operation scenario G, the same operation pattern (the first fall pattern and the second movement pattern) as in the operation scenario C is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the relief chance presentation, and the player rotates at the start of the hit notification presentation. A scenario is executed in which the body object 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG. 893(b) (that is, the reference position Pt1).
Here, as described above, the operation scenario C is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 139" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is "miss". , and the operation scenario G is an operation scenario set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 159" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", the operation scenario C is set at a rate of 20% of the case where the success/failure judgment result is "miss", and the operation scenario G It is set at a rate of 30% when the success/failure determination result is "hit". In other words, the operation scenarios of the first drop pattern and the second movement pattern are more likely to be selected when the result of the hit/fail determination is "hit" than when the result is "miss".
Next, the contents of operation scenario D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 903(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario D of the logo accessory 902. FIG. This operation scenario D is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "140 to 199". As shown in FIG. 903(a), similar to the operation scenario B described above, the operation of the second drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the descent limit at once) as the drop pattern of the bar accessory 902a. is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 903(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario D of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 903(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario D of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 903(b), unlike the motion scenario B described above, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3 is executed. It should be noted that this operation scenario differs from operation scenario B in that the rotation direction of the operation data specified in each scenario counter value is reversed, and the rest is the same.

Note that, in the thirty-second control example, there is an operation scenario H in addition to the operation scenario D as an operation scenario in which the second fall pattern and the second movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 899, this action scenario H is set when the win/loss judgment result is "win" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "160 to 199". is.
Here, with reference to FIG. 907, the contents of the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 907(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to the vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a among the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902. FIG. Until the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the motion of the second drop pattern is executed in the same manner as in the motion scenario D.
When the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value 9200 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. 894(a) after 100 ms has elapsed, the hit notification position is reached.
After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this time, the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65, so the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 2, and when the step counter value is 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 907(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and lateral drive of the rotary body accessory 902b among the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 907(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b among the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 907(b), up to the scenario counter value of 7500, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the right range of motion limit Pt3) is executed in the same manner as the motion scenario B described above. executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position, so by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b starts moving to the right range of motion limit Pt3 at speed 2. .
When the scenario counter value reaches 8500, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and -rotation are set as the rotor motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the right range of motion limit Pt3. By setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b moves to the reference position Pt1 at speed 2. to start.
Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 9500, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario H of the relief chance effect. Inform the player of something.
Thus, in action scenario H, the same action pattern (second fall pattern and second movement pattern) as in action scenario D is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the relief chance presentation, and the player rotates at the start of the hit notification presentation. A scenario is executed in which the body object 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG. 893(b) (that is, the reference position Pt1).

Here, as described above, the operation scenario D is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "140 to 199" in the case where the result of the judgment of whether the special symbols are right or wrong is "miss". Operation scenario H is an operation scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "160 to 199" when the result of judging the suitability of the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199", the action scenario D is set at a rate of 30% of the case where the success/failure judgment result is "miss", and the action scenario H is It is set at a rate of 20% when the success/failure determination result is "hit". In other words, the action scenarios of the second falling pattern and the second moving pattern are more likely to be selected when the result of the decision is "miss" than when the result is "hit".
Thus, in the thirty-second control example, when the result of the success/failure determination is "miss", the operation scenario B (second drop pattern, first movement pattern), the operation scenario D (second drop pattern, second movement pattern), action scenario C (first fall pattern, second movement pattern), and action scenario A (first fall pattern, first movement pattern). are motion scenario E (first fall pattern, first movement pattern), motion scenario G (first fall pattern, second motion pattern), motion scenario H (second fall pattern, second motion pattern), motion scenario F (Second drop pattern, first movement pattern) are configured to be easily selected in this order. That is, the possibility of winning the jackpot is higher when the action of the first pattern is performed than when the action of the second falling pattern is performed, and the first movement is more likely to be won than when the action of the second movement pattern is performed. The possibility of winning the jackpot is higher when the pattern action is executed, and the player can predict whether or not the jackpot will be won based on the action pattern of the logo accessory 902. Therefore, the interest in the game. can be improved.
In the thirty-second control example, the origin confirmation operation is performed only in the case of the second drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the lower limit at once), but the configuration is not limited to this. The origin confirmation operation may also be performed in the first drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops step by step from the storage position). In this case, when the bar accessory 902a is in the right middle one-sided state (see FIG. 885(a)), the origin confirmation operation is performed, and if the origin position cannot be confirmed, the bar accessory 902a is moved to the storage position. It is preferable to set the operation data to be returned. In addition, in the thirty-second control example, various operation scenarios are defined by only rotating the various motors (motor for the left bar accessory, motor for the right bar accessory) in the direction in which the number of steps is added. However, without being limited to this, various motors may be specified to rotate in the direction in which the number of steps is reduced. In addition, instead of prescribing the rotation instruction contents for various motors, when the conditions for driving various motors are satisfied, the status of various accessories to be driven is determined, and based on the determination result, various It may be configured to determine the content of rotation instruction (rotation direction) to the motor, or to vary the content of rotation instruction to various motors based on the result of the target special symbol lottery. In this case, for example, only when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific jackpot, at least one of the various motors may be driven in a rotating direction different from the normal one. By constructing in this way, the player is interested not only in the details of movement of various accessories (details of falling and details of horizontal movement), but also in the rotation directions of various motors for moving various accessories. can let
In the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, a first effect counter xa, a second effect counter xb, and a character standby flag xc , an action scenario storage area 223xd, a moving accessory flag xe, a fluctuating flag xf, a fluctuating time counter 223xg, a scenario counter xh, each step counter xi, a special scenario flag 223xj, and an origin flag 223xk. , and a memory area 223z.

The first effect counter 223xa is a counter used for selecting a display variation pattern, and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199". It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed.
The second effect counter 223xb is a counter used for selecting the action scenario of the logo accessory 902, and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199". It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed.
The character object standby flag 223xc is a flag for indicating that the action scenario of the logo character object 902 is stored in the action scenario storage area 223xd. is set as a display variation pattern with relief chance effect, and is set to ON when the determined action scenario is stored in the action scenario storage area 223xd (see S4536 in FIG. 912). Then, when it is time to start the relief chance presentation and the action scenario is read out from the action scenario storage area 223xd in the relief chance presentation start process (see S3155 in FIG. 914), it is set to OFF (see S3235 in FIG. 914). .
The action scenario storage area 223xd is an area for storing the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 determined in the presentation mode setting process (see S4311A in FIG. 912). The information (action scenario) stored in this action scenario storage area 223xd is read when the rescue chance presentation is started (see S3232 in FIG. 914).

The character object movable flag 223xe is a flag for indicating that the action scenario of the logo character object 902 is being set. It is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 914). Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (see S4653 in FIG. 916), or when the action scenario is set to stop (see S4362 in FIG. 915), it is set to OFF.
During fluctuation flag 223xf is a flag for indicating that it is a fluctuation display period of special symbols, and fluctuation time counter 223xg is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of special symbols. In the thirty-second control example, when the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON, the value of the fluctuating time counter 223xg is updated in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S3120 in FIG. 913).
The scenario counter 223xh is a counter for setting operation data defined in the operation scenario according to the elapse of the special symbol variation time. The scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 each time the special scenario execution process (S3157) or the relief chance effect execution process (S3159) in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S3120 in FIG. 913) is executed. Note that the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3120) is a process that is executed each time 1 ms elapses in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 908). Therefore, the scenario counter is updated every 1 ms like the variable time counter 223xg.
The step counter xi is a counter for counting the number of steps of each stepping motor of the left bar accessory motor 902c7, the right bar accessory motor 902d7, the lateral movement motor 902b3, and the rotator motor 902b2.

The special scenario flag 223xj is a flag that is referred to for determining whether one of action scenarios B, D, F, and H is set as the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 in the relief chance presentation. Although the details will be described later, in these operation scenarios, the operation of the second drop pattern (the operation pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the lower limit at once) is executed, so the special scenario flag 223xj is turned on. If there is, a special scenario executing process (see FIG. 915) for controlling origin confirmation operation is executed. The special scenario flag 223xj is set to OFF when the origin confirmation operation is completed.
The origin flag 223xk is a flag that is set to ON when the rotator motor origin sensor detects the origin position of the rotator motor, and this origin flag 223xk is set to ON in the origin confirmation operation of the rotator accessory 902b. As a result, it is decided to continue the action scenario being executed, and if the origin flag 223xk is not set to ON in the origin confirming action, it is decided to stop the action scenario being executed.
The RAM 223 also has a command storage area as a memory area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command is analyzed by the command determination processing. Then, the processing corresponding to the command is performed.
The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) is controlled. The details of the display control device 114 are already known and therefore omitted.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 828).
The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the 32nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 908 to 916, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 908, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 908 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S3101 was last executed (S3101). If the time has not elapsed (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3121 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the processing of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S3102 to S3112 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S3121 and the variable display setting process of S3122 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3121 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3121 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.
If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3112 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S3102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.
In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114.
After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.
After the processing of S3109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3120), then various counter update processes are executed (S3111), and effect update process is executed (S3112). After executing the process of S3112, the process proceeds to S3121. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The details of this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After the processing of S3112, the command determination processing (S3121) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S3122. Details of this command determination processing (S3121) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S3122, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S3122 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3115 (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed (S3118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.
On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .
Next, the command determination processing (S3121) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 909 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S3121). As shown in FIG. 909, the command determination process (S3121) is different from the command determination process in the twenty-ninth control example (see S3113 in FIG. : Yes), the difference is that the symbol confirmation command process (see S3219 in FIG. 910) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 910, the contents of the design determination command process (see S3219) executed in the command determination process (see S3121 in FIG. 909) will be described. FIG. 910 is a flow chart showing the details of the pattern confirmation command process (S3219). This symbol confirmation command process (S3219) is a process executed when a symbol confirmation command (stop command) set when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is over is received from the main controller 110. FIG.

When the symbol determination command process (S3219) is executed, first, a display stop command for stopping the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3651). The display stop command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 908) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display pattern confirmation command is received, the display control device 114 ends the variable display of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 . When the processing of S3651 ends, the variable flag xf is set to OFF (S3652), and the value of the variable time counter xg is reset (S3653).
Next, referring to FIG. 911, the contents of the variable display setting process (S3122) will be described. FIG. 911 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S3122). This variable display setting process (S3122) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 908) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .
In the variable display setting process (S3122), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4301). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4301: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S4306. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S4301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S4302), the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (S4303), and then the display control device 114 Based on the obtained variation pattern type display variation pattern command for notification to Execute production mode setting processing for generating (S4311), display variation for showing the production mode set by the processing of S4311 A pattern command is set (S4305), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4312), and the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON (S4313). Details of the rendering mode setting process (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S4306, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4306). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4306: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this process is continued. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S4306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4307), and then displayed based on the stop type extracted from the command in the processing of S4308. A stop type command is set (S4309), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 912, the contents of the rendering mode setting process (S4311) will be described. FIG. 912 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the rendering mode setting processing (S4311). This effect mode setting process (S4311) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation, and the result of the special symbol lottery for which the effect mode is set, , a process for setting various effects is executed according to the game state that has been set. Further, when execution of the performance using the logo accessory 902 is determined as the variable performance, the operation scenario of the logo accessory 902 corresponding to the result of the target special symbol lottery is determined.
When the effect mode setting process (S4311) is executed, first, the counter values of the first effect counter 223xa and the second effect counter xb are acquired (S4531), and the obtained counter value of the first effect counter 223xa and the variable display are displayed. Based on the variation pattern type of the variation pattern extracted in the process of S4303 in the setting process (S3121 in FIG. 911), the variation pattern for display is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222xa (S4532).
Next, it is determined whether the display variation pattern determined in the process of S4532 is a display variation pattern with a relief chance effect (S4533). If it is determined to be a display variation pattern with a relief chance effect (S4533: Yes), the operation scenario selection table 222xb determines whether the special symbol lottery result for which the effect mode is to be set and the second effect. The operation scenario is determined based on the counter value of the counter 223xb (S4534), the determined operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 223xd (S4535), the role item standby flag 223xc is set to ON (S4536), and this End the process.
On the other hand, in the process of S4533, if it is determined that the display variation pattern does not include a relief chance effect (S4533: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 913, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3120) will be described. FIG. 913 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3120). This liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3120) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 908) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 A process for updating the value of the variable time counter 223xg, which is set to a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81, is executed, and the effect mode corresponding to the updated value is determined. process is executed.
When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3120) is executed, first, it is determined whether the fluctuating flag 223xf is ON (S3151). If it is determined that the fluctuating flag 223xf is not ON (that is, the special symbol fluctuating display is not executed) (S3151: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the fluctuating flag 223xf is ON (that is, when the special symbol fluctuating display is being executed) (S3151: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation time counter 223xg (S3152).
When the processing of S3152 ends, it is determined whether or not the character product standby flag 223xc is on (S3153). (S3153: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 223xg updated in the process of S3152 is the start time of the relief chance presentation (S3154). If it is determined that it is not the start time of the relief chance presentation (S3154: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3154, when it is determined that it is time to start the relief chance presentation (S3154: Yes), the relief chance presentation start processing is executed (S3155). After that, this process is terminated.
Here, with reference to FIG. 914, the contents of the relief chance presentation start process (S3155) will be described. FIG. 914 is a flow chart showing the contents of the relief chance presentation start process (S3155). This relief chance presentation start process (S3155) executes a process for starting the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 in accordance with the start of the relief chance presentation.

When the rescue chance effect start process (S3155) is started, first, a display command is set for displaying a notification mode (display in the display area HR1 in FIG. 893(b)) for notifying the start of the rescue chance effect. (S3231), the action scenario stored in the action scenario storage area 223xd is set (S3232).
When the processing of S3232 ends, it is determined whether the set operation scenario is one of operation scenarios B, D, G, and H (S3233). If it is determined to be one of operation scenarios B, D, G, or H (S3233: Yes), the special scenario flag 223xj is set to ON (S3234), and the process of S3235 is performed. On the other hand, in the processing of S3233, if it is determined that none of the operation scenarios B, D, G, or H is determined (that is, if the set operation scenario is any one of the operation scenarios A, C, E, or F), (S3233: No), the process of S3237 is skipped and the process of S3235 is performed.
In the processing of S3235, the role product standby flag 223xc is set to OFF (S3235), the role product movable flag 223xe is set to ON (S3236), and this processing ends.
By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to start the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has passed since the special symbol variation is executed.

Returning to FIG. 913, the description continues. In the process of S3153, if it is determined that the character product standby flag 223xc is not on (S3153: No), it is determined whether the special scenario flag 223xj is on (S3156). If it is determined that the special scenario flag 223xj is ON (S3156: Yes), special scenario execution processing (S3157) is performed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 915, the contents of the special scenario execution process (S3157) will be described. FIG. 915 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special scenario execution process. This special scenario executing process (S3157) is a process that is executed when any one of action scenarios B, D, G, and H is set. This is a process for stopping the operation scenario of the logo accessory 902 and switching to an alternative relief chance presentation by liquid crystal display when the origin position cannot be detected by the confirmation operation.
When the special scenario execution process (S3157) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is the origin confirmation end value (S4351). If it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the value indicating the completion of origin confirmation (S4351: No), it is determined whether or not the origin flag 223xk is on (S4352). If it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is not on (that is, if the origin position cannot be detected) (S4352: No), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor (not shown) is on ( S4353). This origin sensor is a sensor for detecting the origin position of the rotator accessory 902b, and is turned on when the rotator accessory 902b is at the origin position. In the process of S4353, if it is determined that the origin sensor is ON (S4353: Yes), the origin flag 223xk is set to ON (S4354), and the process proceeds to S4355. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4353 that the origin sensor 223xk is not ON (S4353: No), the process of S4354 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4355.
In the process of S4352, when it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is ON (S4352: Yes), the processes of S4353 and S4354 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4355.

In the process of S4355, the scenario counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 (S4355), the action data corresponding to the updated scenario counter value is set (S4356), and this process ends.
In the process of S4351, if it is determined that the scenario counter value is the value indicating the completion of origin confirmation (S4351: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the origin flag 223xk is ON (S4357). If it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is on (S4357: Yes), the origin flag 223xk is set off (S4358), the special scenario flag 223xj is set off (S4359), and the process proceeds to S4355. do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4357 that the origin flag 223xk is not ON (that is, if the origin position cannot be detected in the origin confirming operation) (S4357: No), the set operation scenario is canceled. is set (S4360), the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4361), and the accessory movable flag 223xf is set to OFF (S4362). After that, a display command for displaying an alternative relief chance presentation corresponding to the success/failure determination result is set (S4363), and this process is terminated.
Returning to FIG. 913, the description continues. In the processing of S3156, if it is determined that the special scenario flag 223xj is not on (S3156: No), then it is determined whether or not the accessory movable flag 223xe is on (S3158). When it is determined that the accessory movable flag 223xe is not ON (that is, when the relief chance effect is not being executed) (S3158: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3158, when it is determined that the accessory movable flag 223xe is ON (S3158: Yes), the rescue chance effect in-execution process is executed (S3159). After that, this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 916, the contents of the relief chance presentation in-execution process (S3159) will be described. FIG. 916 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the relief chance presentation in-execution processing (S3159). This relief chance effect in-execution process (S3159) is a process for setting operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value of the scenario counter 223xh.
When the relief chance effect in-execution process (S3159) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating the end of the scenario (that is, END information) (S4651). If it is determined to be the end value of the scenario (S4651: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4652), the accessory movable flag 223xe is set to off (S4653), and this processing is terminated. do.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4651: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating the timing of the notification effect. (S4654). If it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh does not indicate the timing of the notification effect (S4654: No), 1 is added to the scenario counter 223xh (S4659), and the updated scenario counter 223xh is updated. Operation data corresponding to the counter value is set (S4660), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S4654, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is the value indicating the timing of the notification effect (S4654: Yes), then the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is a win. It is determined whether there is (S4655). If it is determined that the success/failure determination result is not hit (that is, if the success/failure determination result is out) (S4655: No), the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is the hit notification position (in FIG. 893(b) position indicated by the up arrow 802) (S4656). If it is determined to be the hit notification position (S4656: Yes), the lateral movement motor 902b3 is set to 30 steps (S4657), and the notification mode indicating failure (display of the display area HR in FIG. 894(b)) is displayed. A display failure notification command for display is set (S4658), and the process proceeds to S4659.

On the other hand, in the process of S4656, when it is determined that the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is not the hit notification position (S4656: No), the process of S4657 is skipped and the process of S4658 is performed.
With this configuration, even if the rotary accessory 902b stops at the hit notification position despite being out of step due to a problem caused by a step-out or failure, additional operation data is set. By moving from the winning notification position, it is possible to prevent incorrect game information from being provided to the player.
In the process of S4655, when it is determined that the result of the determination is a hit (S4655: Yes), it is determined whether the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is the hit notification position (S4661). When it is determined that the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is the hit notification position (S4661: Yes), a display symbol movement command is set (S4662). This display symbol movement command moves the middle symbol row shown in FIG. 893(b) by half a frame, and as shown in FIG. This is a command for displaying the entire pattern (middle and lower pattern Z2c shown in FIG. 894(a)).
When the process of S4662 ends, a display success notification command for displaying a notification mode (display of the display area HR shown in FIG. 894(a)) indicating the success of the rescue chance presentation is set (S4663), and the process of S4659 is performed. transition to

On the other hand, in the process of S4661, when it is determined that the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is not the winning notification position (S4661: No), the big winning is won after the notification mode indicating the failure is displayed on the liquid crystal display. A display resurrection notification command for displaying an effect (so-called resurrection effect) for displaying a notification mode indicating that is set (S4664), and the process proceeds to S4659.
By configuring in this way, the player can experience a strange effect such as displaying a notification mode indicating that the relief chance effect has succeeded even though the rotary accessory 902b has not stopped at the winning notification position. can be suppressed.
As described above, in the thirty-second control example, the decoration of the game board, the decorative movable accessory (logo accessory 902), and part of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are combined. An effect of forming a valid line is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the positional relationship between the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration of the game board surface, thereby improving the amusement of the game.
In this 32nd control example, the configuration is such that the effective line is formed by the decoration of the game board surface, the decorative movable accessory, and the third symbol. , the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may form an activated line.

Here, with reference to FIG. 917, a modification of the thirty-second control example will be described. In the modification of the thirty-second control example, the activated line is formed by the decoration of the game board surface, the third symbol, and the reserved symbol, without using the movable accessory for decoration. As shown in FIG. 917(a), when the rescue chance effect is started, a character 801 is displayed, which is a mode suggesting that the display mode of the pending pattern hr0 during execution is changed, and the pending pattern hr0 is displayed. Change the mode to indicate that the mode is being changed. Then, in HR1 displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, there is displayed a guide mode for informing the effect success condition of "Relief Chance! Jackpot if reserved symbols change to 'Word'".
Then, after a predetermined period of time (three seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 917(b), the pending pattern hr0 during execution is displayed in a preset display mode. FIG. 917(b) is a diagram showing the case of success of the production, and by changing the execution pending pattern hr0 to the "word" pending pattern, the logo decoration Rg1, the middle/middle stage pattern Z2b, and the execution pending pattern are displayed. A character string of "sea story" is formed vertically by hr0, the LED built in logo decoration Rg1 blinks to indicate that a valid line is formed, and an effect is applied to emphasize the middle and middle pattern Z2b. be done.
By configuring in this manner, even in a game machine in which no decorative movable accessory is mounted, it is possible to execute an effect combining the decoration of the game board surface and the third pattern.
In this 32nd control example, the character string "Sea Story" is formed as a mode for notifying that the jackpot has been won, but the configuration is not limited to this, and other character strings are formed. You can

<Thirty-third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 918 to 966. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example has a plurality of decorative movable accessories that are used as part of the variable performance executed during the variable display of the special symbols, in contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example described above. (3 pieces) are installed, and the difference is that a new variable effect using the plurality of decorative movable accessories is added.
In the thirty-second control example described above, the effect (relief chance effect) using the decorative movable accessory is executed after the third symbol indicating the failure is displayed. On the other hand, in the thirty-third control example, a new effect using the decorative movable accessory is executed during the period before the third symbol is stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the winning/failing determination.
Here, conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine 10 that executes an effect using a decorative movable accessory as a part of a variable effect for notifying the result of judging whether a special symbol is appropriate. In such a pachinko machine 10, advance notice effects using decorative movable accessories are executed at various timings during the fluctuation period.
By the way, since the movable accessory for decoration in the pachinko machine 10 is movable on the front side of the display screen when viewed from the front, the display area overlapping the movable accessory for decoration on the display screen is visually recognized by the player while the movable accessory for decoration is moving. Difficulties are common.

Therefore, at the timing when an effect using the decorative movable accessory is executed, when another effect (for example, the ready-to-win state of the third symbol) for providing the game information is displayed on the display screen, If it overlaps with the decorative movable accessory, it cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the composite effect is a troublesome effect for the player who expects that the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot will be stopped and displayed. There is a risk that the performance effect will be reduced.
On the other hand, in the thirty-third control example, the same performance result ("Gekiatsu" in FIG. Formation of mode for notifying that the value is high), and the type of element used to create the control content for each element are different, so that the composite effect can be executed without interfering with the variable effect of the third symbol. is doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player regardless of when the composite effect is executed. In addition, since it is possible to change the effect mode of the compound effect showing the same effect result corresponding to the content of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the compound effect is executed at various timings. It is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.
The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example described above in that a plurality of decorative movable accessories are mounted, and the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 Also, the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 32 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 32nd control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 918 to 940, the configuration of the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example will be described. FIG. 918 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game board surface of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example. Compared to the 32nd control example described above, the difference is that a plurality of decorative movable accessories are mounted, and the arrangement of the variable prize winning device 650, the specific prize winning port 65a, and the second ball entrance 640 is changed. is doing. Since the structure of the variable winning device 650 is the same as that of the thirty-second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example, three movable decorative accessories, ie, a logo accessory 902, an "a" accessory 903, and a shutter accessory 904 are mounted as movable decorative accessories. As shown in FIG. 918, the logo component 902 is normally stored in the upper part of the third pattern display device 81, the "a" component 903 is stored in the lower center of the third pattern display device 81, and the shutter component 904 is stored. are housed on the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81 . The detailed configuration of each decorative movable accessory will be described below.
FIG. 919 is a front view of the action units of the logo character 902 and the "a" character 903. FIG. The logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a and a rotating accessory 902b, and the surface of the rotating accessory 902b is decorated with the character "ki". This logo accessory 902b incorporates an LED and can be illuminated by a command from the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.
The "a" accessory 903 is a decorative movable accessory decorated with the character "a" on its surface. Although the details will be described later, in the thirty-third control example, the logo accessory 902, the "a" accessory 903, the "ge" character decoration 904a4 (see FIG. 921) decorated with the shutter accessory 904, and the game board surface An effect of forming a character string "Gekiatsu" indicating that the expectation of winning a big hit is high is executed by character decoration 905 decorated with "tsu" (see FIG. 942).
FIG. 920(a) is a diagram schematically showing the action units of the logo accessory 902. FIG. The configuration of this logo accessory 902 is the same as that of the logo accessory 902 in the thirty-second control example described above, except for the decoration applied to the surface.

As shown in FIG. 920(a), this logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a, a rotating body accessory 902b, and left and right lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. The configuration of the logo accessory 902 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 928 to 933 as appropriate.
The bar accessory 902a has lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d at both left and right ends. The lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d are symmetrical and have substantially the same shape. Therefore, in the left raising mechanism 902c, the description of the right raising mechanism 902d will be omitted for the same components as those described above.
The left lifting mechanism 902c has a two-stage rack composed of an upper rack 902c1 and a boot-shaped lower rack 902c2. It is connected with the rack 902c1. The height of the two-stage rack is variable by rotating the upper drive cam 902c3 to change the position of the cylindrical pin 902c3p provided on the upper drive cam 902c3.
Here, with reference to FIGS. 928-929, the detailed structure of the left raising mechanism 902c will be described. Figure 928 is an exploded front perspective view of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d, and Figure 929 is an exploded rear perspective view of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d. As shown in FIG. 928, the left raising mechanism 902c is provided with a bar accessory motor 902c7, which is a stepping motor for upward driving. The bar accessory motor 902c7 is provided with an upper drive gear 902c4 that engages with the upper drive cam 902c3. The bar accessory motor 902c7 operates to rotate the upper driving gear 902c4, thereby rotating the upper driving cam 902c3. A cylinder pin 902c3p is provided on the upper drive cam 902c3, and the position of the cylinder pin 902c3p is varied by rotating the upper drive cam 903c3.

The cylindrical pin 902c3p protrudes forward in a front view, and when the bar accessory 902a is in the storage position, the bottom of the lower rack 902c2 is supported from below by the cylindrical pin 902c3p. By moving the cylindrical pin 902c3p clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right lifting mechanism 902d) from the position shown in FIG. Cylinder pin 902c3p loses support. The bar function 902a is supported by a stopper 902c5 (see FIG. 929), and when the stopper 902c5 is in a locked state, the bar function 902a falls even if the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p. do not do.
This stopper 902c5 slides the arm member 902c6 connected to the upper drive cam 902c3 by rotating the bar accessory motor 902c7 by a predetermined number of steps (25 steps in this 32nd control example), and moves the arm member 902c6. By moving the connecting link member 902c5L up and down, it can be changed between the locked state and the unlocked state. When the stopper 902c5 is in the released state and the cylindrical pin 902c3p does not enter the lower portion of the lower rack 902c2, the lower rack 902c2 drops due to its own weight. At this time, the connecting gear 902c8a that connects the lower rack 902c2 and the upper rack 902c1 is engaged with the lower protruding piece 902c8c provided on the column portion of the lifting mechanism 902c and rotates counterclockwise. The connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper projecting piece 902c8b (see FIG. 929) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates counterclockwise to lower the upper rack 902c1. As a result, the bar accessory 902a falls to its lower limit.
Only the right raising mechanism 902d is provided with a right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 shown in FIG. 884(a). When the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is ON, the valve protrudes toward the back side in the front view, and the bar accessory 902a falling under its own weight can be stopped at the position shown in FIG. 885(a). . On the other hand, when the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, the valve retracts and the bar accessory 902a drops to the lower limit.
Here, in the thirty-second control example, two types of falling patterns can be set as the falling pattern of the bar accessory 902a. First, the first drop pattern is a right intermediate one-sided drop state in which the left stopper 902c5 remains locked, only the right stopper 902d5 is released, and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned ON (see FIG. 885(a)). After that, the left stopper 902c5 is released from the right intermediate one-sided drop state, and the left end of the bar accessory 902a is dropped to the lower limit (see FIG. 885(b)). This is the first drop pattern in which the stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off and the right end of the bar accessory 902a is also dropped to the lower limit (the position shown in FIG. 884(b)).

The second drop pattern is the second drop pattern in which the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are simultaneously released and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, so that the bar accessory 902a drops to its lower limit at once under its own weight. .
In this way, even with the structure in which the bar accessory 902a is dropped by its own weight, it is possible to set various drop patterns by varying the release timings of the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 and the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5.
Returning to FIG. 928, the description continues. When the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit (in the state shown in FIG. 922), the upper driving cam 902c3 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in the right raising mechanism 902d), so that the cylindrical pin 902c3p It moves clockwise from the position shown in 884(b), enters the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, and pushes up the lower rack 902c2. When the lower rack 902c2 is pushed up by the cylindrical pin 902c3p, the connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 929) engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c (see FIG. 929) provided on the supporting column of the lifting mechanism 902c, and the connecting gear 902c8a Rotate clockwise. The connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper protruding piece 902c8b (see FIG. 929) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the clockwise rotation of the connecting gear 902c8a raises the upper rack 902c1.
In this way, the two-stage rack of the upper rack 902c1 and the lower rack 902c2 enables vertical driving with a stroke longer than the diameter of the upper drive cam 902c3, so that the weight of the upper drive cam 902c3 can be reduced. , the output of the stepping motor for driving can be suppressed and driven. Therefore, power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 932 and 933, the structure of the rotator accessory 902b will be described. FIG. 932 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotator accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a, and FIG. 933 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotator accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a. The rotating body 902b1 is a member whose surface is decorated, and in this 32nd control example, the character "object" related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10 is decorated (see Fig. 922). A rotating body motor 902b2, which is a stepping motor for rotational driving, and a roller slider 902b6 are provided on the back side of the rotating body 902b1 (see FIG. 931). When the rotating body motor 902b2 is driven based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, the rotating gear 902b7 rotates, and the rotation of the rotating gear 902b7 rotates the rotating body 902b1.
Rotor motor 902b2 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by sound lamp control device 113, and the rotation of rotor 902b1 corresponds to the direction of rotation of rotor motor 902b2. Direction is variable.
In addition, the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the rotation speed of the rotor 902b1 can be adjusted in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2. Variable.
As shown in FIG. 930, a roller slider 902b6 provided on the rotating body accessory 902b is configured so that a ball screw 902b5 can be inserted therethrough. This ball screw 902b5 is provided with a lateral drive gear 902b4 and a lateral movement motor 902b3, which is a stepping motor for lateral drive, on the left end in a front view. Then, the ball screw 902b5 rotates. When the ball screw 902b5 rotates, the roller slider 902b6 moves left and right. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b can be moved left and right.

Here, with reference to FIG. 942(a), the right and left movable range of the rotary accessory 902b will be described. The rotating body accessory 902b can move left and right on the front side of the bar accessory 902a in a front view within a range from the left range of motion limit Pt2 to the right range of motion limit Pt3. Also, a reference position Pt1 is set between the left and right movable range limits Pt2 and Pt3, and when the bar accessory 902a is at the retracted position, it stops at the reference position Pt1.
The traversing motor-902b3 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise according to the operation data set by the audio ramp controller 113, and when the traversing motor 902b3 rotates clockwise, the rotator accessory 902b moves to the right when viewed from the front, and rotates counterclockwise, the rotary accessory 902b moves to the left when viewed from the front.
The bar accessory 902a is provided with sensors (not shown) at positions corresponding to the reference position Pt1, the left range of motion limit Pt2, and the right range of motion limit Pt3, so that the left and right positions of the rotating body accessory 902b can be detected. Configure.
In addition, the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound ramp control device 113, and the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3 corresponds to the rotation speed of the rotating accessory 902b. The speed is also variable.

Returning to FIG. 920(b), the description is continued. FIG. 920(b) is a diagram schematically showing the action unit of the "A" role product 903, showing a state in which the "A" role product 903 has risen to the upper limit. The detailed structure of the "a" character will be described below with reference to FIGS. 934 to 937 as appropriate.
934 and 936 are exploded front perspective views of the "a" accessory 903, and FIGS. 935 and 937 are exploded rear perspective views of the "a" accessory 903. FIG. As shown in FIG. 934, the "A" accessory 903 is composed of a rising accessory 903a and an ascending rail 903b.
As shown in FIG. 936, the ascending accessory 903a is provided with an accessory motor 903a3, which is a stepping motor for vertical driving. A gear 903a2 attached to an arm member is connected to the accessory motor 903a3, and when the accessory motor 903a3 is driven clockwise, the arm member rises and is driven counterclockwise. to descend. As this arm member moves up and down, the height of the rising accessory 903a is variable.
FIG. 921 is a diagram schematically showing the operation unit of the shutter accessory 904, and shows the case where the shutter accessory 904 is in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 921, when the shutter accessory 904 is closed, a "ge" character decoration 904a4 is formed across the first left shutter door 904a1 and the left shutter door 904a2. The detailed structure of the shutter accessory 904 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 938 and 939 as appropriate.

FIG. 938 is a front perspective view showing the operation unit when the shutter accessory 904 is in the open state. The shutter accessory 904 in the open state is stored in a state in which three shutter doors 904a1 to 904a3 and 904b1 to 904b3 provided on each side are overlapped. A rail mechanism 904c having a shutter accessory motor, which is a stepping motor for opening and closing the shutter door, is provided above the shutter door.
The rail mechanism 904c is provided with a left shutter accessory motor 904c1 for driving the opening and closing of the left shutter doors 904a1 to 904a3 and a right shutter accessory motor 904c5 for driving the opening and closing of the right shutter doors 904b1 to 904b3. By driving the shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 clockwise, the slide gears 904c4a and 904c4b respectively connected to the shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 slide in the closing direction. Shutter gears 904c3a and 904c3b connected to the slide gears 904c4a and 904c4b, respectively, also slide in conjunction with each other, thereby forming a third left shutter door 904a3 connected to the shutter gear 904c3a and a third right shutter door connected to the shutter gear 904c3b. 904b3 slides in the closing direction. The left shutter doors 904a1-904a3 are connected by connecting members, and the right shutter doors 904b1-904b3 are also connected by connecting members. Therefore, when the left and right third shutter doors 904a3 and 904b3 slide in the closing direction, the shutter doors 904a1, 904a2, 904b1 and 904b2 also slide together. In addition, the shutter accessory 904 can be opened by driving the left and right shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 counterclockwise.
FIG. 922 is a diagram showing a state in which the logo accessory 902 is at the lower limit position, FIG. 923 is a diagram showing a case in which the logo accessory 902 is in a right middle one-sided state, and FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing a case where the logo accessory 902 is in a state where the right middle part falls and the left part falls. Also, FIG. 925 is a diagram showing a state in which the "A" accessory 903 has risen to the upper limit.
FIG. 926 is a diagram showing a case where the shutter accessory 904 is closed. As shown in FIG. 926, the shutter accessory 904 is composed of a plurality of shutter doors 904a1 to 904a3 and 904b1 to 904b3. When the shutter accessory 904 is in a closed state, the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81 is covered, so that the player cannot visually recognize the effect displayed in the display area.

FIG. 927 is a diagram showing a case where all decorative movable accessories are in a movable state. As shown in FIG. 927, all the decorative movable accessories are moved and stopped at predetermined positions to form a character string "GEKIATSU" in combination with the "tsu" character decoration 905 on the game board surface.
<Regarding the effect content in the 33rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 941 to 948, the characteristic presentation contents executed in the thirty-third control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example, as an effect suggesting that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high, a composite effect (character effect) is performed in which all the decorative movable accessories are used to form the character string "Gekiatsu". Run. In the thirty-third control example, this composite effect is executed at various timings during the variable display period of the special symbols. Specifically, the execution timing is defined for each set variation pattern, and there are cases where it is executed during the pre-reach performance period of the special symbol and during the ready-hiz performance period.
By making the execution timing of the composite effect different depending on the variation pattern in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the composite effect. It becomes possible.
First, with reference to FIGS. 941 to 942(a) and FIG. 946, the composite effect of the normal pattern will be described. The composite effect of the normal pattern is a pattern of the composite effect executed during the pre-reach effect period of the variable display period of the special symbols. The pre-reach production period is a period from when the variable display of the third pattern is started in the third pattern display device 81 until the third pattern becomes a ready-to-win mode, and in addition to the composite production, the result of the winning/failure determination is announced. Various foretelling effects are executed for the purpose. In the normal pattern composite production, all the decorative movable accessories are used to form the character string "Gekiatsu".

Here, with reference to FIG. 946, the relationship between the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed will be described. FIG. 946 is a timing chart showing the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the state of each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed.
In FIG. 946, a case where "super reach (variation time 80 s)" is set as the variation pattern type of the special symbol will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 946, in the "super reach" variation pattern, the pre-reach effect period is 40 seconds, and the reach effect period is 40 seconds. When the variable display of the special symbols is started, in the third symbol display device 81, a liquid crystal effect including an advance notice effect for announcing the success/failure determination result is executed for 20 seconds. During this period, each decorative movable accessory is in the retracted state, so the player can visually recognize the effect displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 .
When 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, a 20-second composite effect is started. Although the details will be described later, in the thirty-third control example, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period at the start timing of the composite effect, and the operation scenario of the decorative movable accessory is set according to the determination result. (See Figure 963). In the example shown in FIG. 946, since it is the pre-reach production period, a normal pattern operation scenario is set. In the operation scenario of the normal pattern, when the composite effect is started, the logo accessory 902 falls to the lower limit, and the rotary accessory 902b rotates and moves to the right range of motion limit Pt3. FIG. 941(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display state of the third symbol display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory at the time when three seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect.
As shown in FIG. 941(a), the third pattern is variably displayed in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Since the object 902 is positioned on the near side, it cannot be visually recognized by the player. The rotating body accessory 902b has moved from the reference position Pt1 to the right movable range limit Pt3. After that, the rotator accessory 902b starts moving toward the left range of motion limit Pt2 while rotating counterclockwise. At this point, the "a" role 903 and the shutter role 904 are in a stored state.

Returning to FIG. 946, the description continues. When 5 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect, the shutter accessory 904 is closed. FIG. 941(b) is a diagram simply showing the display state of the third symbol display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory at the point where 5 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect. The shutter accessory 904 is in a closed state and a "ge" character decoration 904a4 is formed. The portion of the shutter accessory 904 decorated with the "ge" character decoration 904a4 is composed of a member that can be seen through the back surface, and by displaying the effect in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, It is possible to make it look as if the portion of the "ge" character decoration 904a4 is emitting light. In the thirty-third control example, as a mode for indicating that each decorative accessory has reached the final stop position in the composite effect, the decorative movable accessory at the final stop position is made to emit light.
Note that the rotary accessory 902b is in the process of moving from the right range of motion limit Pt3 toward the left range of motion limit Pt2.
Returning to FIG. 946, the description continues. After 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the composite effect, the "a" accessory 903 is in an elevated state. FIG. 942(a) is a diagram simply showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory when seven seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect. In response to the rotator accessory 902b arriving at the left movable range limit Pt2, which is the final stop position, the LED built in the rotator accessory 902b is in a state of emitting light. In addition, when the "A" role object 903 has ascended to the final stop position, that is, the upper limit, the LED built in the "A" role object 903 emits light. Then, in response to all the decorative movable accessories stopping at the final stop position, the LED attached to the "tsu" character decoration 905 on the game board surface emits light, so that "Gekiatsu" appears on the production line EL1. The player can easily recognize that the character string is formed.
Returning to FIG. 946, the description continues. Each decorative movable accessory that has entered a movable state returns to the stored state at the timing specified in the action scenario before the end of the composite production period. The role item is stored. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ready-to-reach mode of the third symbol from becoming invisible due to the decorative movable accessory.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 942(b) to 945, 947 and 948, an example in which the composite effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period will be described. First, the alternate pattern 1 of the composite effect executed during the ready-to-win effect period will be described. The alternative pattern 1 of the composite effect is an alternative pattern of the composite effect executed when the reach line displaying the reach state of the third symbol is other than the middle line L2. As described above, by closing the shutter accessory 904, the player cannot visually recognize the third symbol in the reach state displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the player cannot see the reach state. Since it may give a misunderstanding that the effect has ended, in the alternative pattern 1, the shutter function 904 is not closed, and the liquid crystal display is used to display the character "ge" at a position that does not overlap with the third symbol of the reach mode. display.
Here, with reference to FIG. 947, the relationship between the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and each decorative movable accessory when the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1 is executed will be described. FIG. 947 is a timing chart showing the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the state of each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed. In addition, as in the example shown in FIG. 946, the case where "super reach" is set as the variation pattern type will be described as an example.
After the liquid crystal performance is executed in the pre-ready performance period of 40 seconds from the start of the variation of the special symbols, the third pattern is stopped on the effective line in the ready-to-win mode. In the example shown in FIG. 947, the start timing of the composite effect is the same as the start of the ready-to-win effect period. Here, if it is determined that it is during the ready-to-win effect period, it is determined whether or not the active line displaying the ready-to-win state of the third symbol is the middle line L2 (see FIG. 944(a)), When it is determined that it is not the middle line L2, the operation scenario of the alternative pattern 1 is set.
FIG. 942(b) is a diagram simply showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory at the time when three seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1. FIG. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 941(a), the third symbol is displayed stationary in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is being variably displayed. In addition, a third symbol with the same number is stopped and displayed on the upward left line L5, and is in a reach state. A guidance mode is displayed to notify that the mode is in effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 942(b), the left middle pattern z1b and the right middle pattern z3b displayed on the middle line L2 are located behind the logo accessory 902. becomes invisible.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1, unlike the composite effect of the normal pattern, the shutter accessory 904 does not enter the closed state, and the upper line L1 of the main display area Dm and the middle pattern Z2 are displayed. A "ge" character display 810 is displayed at the intersection. Also, the rotary accessory 902b stops at the reference position Pt1. This is because when the rotary accessory 902b stops at the left movable range limit Pt2, the upper left pattern z1a forming the reach mode appears on the extension of the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b. Since it is displayed, the "ge" character display 810 cannot be displayed, and the character string "gekiatsu" cannot be formed on the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b and its extension line. is.
After that, when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1, instead of the "a" character 903 not rising to the upper limit, the intersection of the second special line tL2 and the lower line L3 in the main display area Dm ” character display 811 is displayed. When the "a" character display 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, the "ge" character display 810 moves from the intersection of the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper line L1 to the intersection of the first special line tL1 and the upper line L1. displayed. As a result, a character string of "gekiatsu" is formed on the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b and its extension line. Then, when the character string "gekiatsu" is formed, the "ge" character display 810 and the "a" character display 811 forming the character string "gekiatsu" emit light by the effect, and the rotary accessory 902b and The LEDs incorporated in the "tsu" character decoration 905 emit light. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 944 to 945 and 948, an example in which the alternative pattern 2 composite effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period will be described. The composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 is executed when the third symbol is in the ready-to-win state on the middle line L2. In this case, if the logo accessory 902 is dropped to the lower limit, it will cover the third pattern in the reach mode. The "tsu" character decoration 905 forms the "gekiatsu" character string.
Here, with reference to FIG. 948, the relationship between the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and each decorative movable accessory when the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 is executed will be described. FIG. 948 is a timing chart showing the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the state of each decorative movable accessory when the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 is executed.

In FIG. 948, a case where "super reach (variation time 80 s)" is set as the variation pattern type of the special symbol will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 948, the example of the case where the above-described alternative pattern 1 composite effect is executed is that all the decorative movable accessories remain in the retracted state during the composite effect effect period. They are different and otherwise the same.
FIG. 944(a) is a diagram simply showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory when three seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2. FIG. be. A third pattern is stopped and displayed in each of the left pattern row Z1 and the right pattern row Z3, and the third pattern is displayed in a ready-to-win mode on the upper line L1, the middle line L2 and the lower line L3. Also, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a "ki" character display 812 is displayed instead of the rotary accessory 902b.
When five seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2, the shutter accessory 904 does not enter the closed state as in the alternative pattern 1, and the crossing point of the upper line L1 of the main display area Dm and the middle pattern Z2 is "ga". A character representation 810 is displayed.
After that, when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2, similarly to the alternative pattern 1, instead of the "a" character 903 not rising to the upper limit, the second special line tL2 and the lower stage of the main display area Dm A character display 811 is displayed at the intersection of the line L3. When the "a" character display 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, the "ge" character display 810 moves from the intersection of the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper line L1 to the intersection of the first special line tL1 and the upper line L1. displayed. As a result, a character string of "gekiatsu" is formed on the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b and its extension line. Then, when the character string "gekiatsu" is formed, the "ge" character display 810 and the "a" character display 811 forming the character string "gekiatsu" emit light by the effect, and the rotary accessory 902b and The LEDs incorporated in the "tsu" character decoration 905 emit light. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed.

As described above, in the thirty-third control example, at the timing when the composite effect is started, it is determined whether or not the reach mode of the third symbol is displayed and the display position of the reach line, and the operation of the decorative movable accessory is determined. By setting the scenario, it is possible to prevent the reach mode of the third pattern from being visually recognized by the player due to the decorative movable accessory, and give the player the misunderstanding that the reach performance has ended. It is configured so that
In the thirty-third control example, the action scenario is set depending on whether or not the ready-to-win state of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to the announcement effects to be executed, and the operation scenario of the decorative movable accessory is set depending on whether or not the announcement effects with the higher priority are being executed.
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 949, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example will be described. FIG. 949 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example. In the thirty-third control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example described above. The difference is that a drive motor for the shutter accessory 903 and a drive motor for the shutter accessory 904 are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7, the rotating body motor 902b2, the lateral movement motor 902b3, An accessory motor 903a3, left and right shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5, and a right midway stop solenoid 902d9 are connected, respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 950(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the thirty-third control example will be described. FIG. 950(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirty-third control example. A variation pattern selection table 222xc is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 222xa for the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the above-described 32nd control example. 222xe and a second alternative operation scenario table 222xf.
In the variation pattern selection table 222xc, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (off, false out, various types of reach, etc.) is set in the counter value for variation pattern selection. The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.
In addition, in this 33rd control example, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variably displayed by vertical scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the executed special symbol variation. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. A game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加
The composite effect operation scenario table 222xd is a table for setting the operation scenario of the driving motor of each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed. Operation data for each drive motor is specified for the scenario counter value, and predetermined operation data is set when the scenario counter value reaches the specified value.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222xc will be described with reference to FIGS. 951 and 952. FIG. FIG. 951(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222xc. As shown in FIG. 951 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222xc includes a normal variation pattern selection table 222xc1, a time saving variation pattern selection table 222xc2, a special time saving variation pattern selection table 222xc3, and a time saving final variation pattern A selection table 222xc4 is defined.
FIG. 951(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 222xc1. The normal variation pattern selection table 222xc1 is a table that is referred to when the special symbol variation display is performed in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state). A variation pattern for display is set based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the determination, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first effect counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 951(b), in the thirty-third control example, execution/non-execution of the above-described composite effect is specified for each display variation pattern.
Specifically, the special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", the success/failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". "0 to 199" is defined in association with "variation pattern Aa" and no composite effect. That is, when the variation pattern type is "off", the composite effect is not set.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", the result of success or failure is "out", and the variation pattern type is "out of guess", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199". , "fluctuation pattern Ba" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other. In other words, when the variation pattern type is "false", the composite effect is not set.

Special figure type is "1st special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 179" On the other hand, "variation pattern Da" and no composite effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern Ea" and composite effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". there is That is, when the result of the determination is "out" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 10%.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 149""Variation pattern Fa" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other, and "Variation pattern Ga" and composite effect are defined in association with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". ing. That is, when the result of the determination is "miss" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 25%.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 149" On the other hand, "variation pattern Ha" and no composite effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern Ia" and composite effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". there is That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 25%.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 129""Variation pattern Ja" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other, and "Variation pattern Ka" and composite effect are defined in association with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "130 to 199". ing. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 35%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "special reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern La" and the presence of composite effect are defined in association with each other. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "special reach", the composite effect is always set.
Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199” is defined in association with “fluctuation pattern Ma” and no composite effect. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "small win" and the variation pattern type is "long and small win", the composite effect is not set.
The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". On the other hand, "variation pattern Na" and no composite effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern Pa" and composite effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". there is In other words, when the result of the judgment is "off" and the variation pattern type is "off", the composite effect is set at a rate of 10%.
The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "big hit" or "small hit", and the variation pattern type is "hit". For "0 to 149", "variation pattern Qa" and no composite effect are defined in correspondence, and for the value of the first effect counter CS1 "150 to 199", "variation pattern Ra" and composite effect are defined. are defined in association with each other. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big win" or "small win" and the variation pattern type is "win", the composite effect is set at a rate of 25%.

FIG. 952(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern selection table 222xc2. The time saving variation pattern selection table 222xc2 is a table referred to when special symbol variation display is executed in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). Similar to the normal variation pattern selection table 222xc1, display based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success or failure determination result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first production counter CS1 This is to set the fluctuation pattern for use.
Specifically, the special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", the success or failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "super short out" as the specified contents, the value of the first production counter CS1 "0 to 199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern Sa" and no composite effect.
Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern Ta" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other.
Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 189” is defined in association with “variation pattern Ua” and no composite effect, the special figure type is “first special symbol (special figure 1)”, the success/failure determination result is “small hit”, and the variation pattern type is As the stipulated contents for the ``long and small win'', the value of the first effect counter CS1 is ``190 to 199'' and the ``fluctuation pattern Va'' and the composite effect are defined in association with each other. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "small win" and the variation pattern type is "long and small win", the composite effect is set at a rate of 5%.

The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "short off", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199". , "fluctuation pattern Wa" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other.
Special figure type is "second special pattern (special figure 2)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "super short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199 , "variation pattern Xa" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other.
The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "small hit", and the variation pattern type is "super short and small hit". 199” is defined in association with “variation pattern Ya” and no composite effect.
Thus, in the time-saving state, the configuration is such that the composite effect is not set except for the case where the variation pattern type of the first special symbol is "long and small winning". This is because, in the time saving state, the variation time is set to 2 seconds or less except for the case where the variation pattern type is "long and small win", which is shorter than the presentation time of the composite presentation.

Drawing 952 (b) is a figure showing typically the contents of fluctuation pattern selection table 222xc3 for special time saving. The special time saving variation pattern selection table 222xc3 is a table that is referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the special time saving state.
Here, in the 33rd control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the second special symbol variation number executed during the time saving state reaches three times. A time saving end condition that is established when the time saving end condition is established, and the time saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol fluctuation frequency executed during the time saving state and the second special symbol fluctuation frequency reaches 10 times, have at least
That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set, and any second special symbol is selected. By winning a win (small win, big win) with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery, the time saving state is repeated through the big win game, and in the second special symbol lottery executed three times during the time saving state. If you do not win, the time-saving state ends, and if you do not win even in the second special symbol lottery (once) using the remaining special figure 2 reservation, move to the normal state ( It has a game property that the continuous chan state ends).
Here, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches three times, the first Even when the special pattern lottery is executed three times, the time saving end condition is established, and the time saving state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed despite the time saving state being set. There was a possibility that such a situation could occur. That is, in this 32nd control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is configured to be able to acquire up to 4 pieces, for example, 4 special figure 1 reservations, special figure 2 reservations When the time-saving state is set in a state in which 0 pieces have been acquired, the first special symbol variation is executed prior to the second special symbol variation. In this case, before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the time-saving state ends without exhibiting the original game characteristics, and the player's willingness to play. There was a problem that the

In addition, even in a state where four special 1 reserves are acquired when the time saving state is set, in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time saving state, for example, a special symbol lottery When the time-saving end condition is established when the number of executions reaches 7 times, when the time-saving state is set without acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, the second special symbol variation It becomes possible to execute the game more than three times, and there is a problem that a game that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided to the original game property.
Therefore, in this 33rd control example, the time saving end condition established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol variation, and the time saving established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation End conditions are set, and the time saving state is ended when one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied. By configuring in this way, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times, and when the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is performed You can definitely end the time saving state.
Furthermore, in this 33rd control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation corresponding to the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the time saving state is set until the 4th first special symbol variation is executed, a short time (0.5 seconds) variation time is It is configured to be set, and for the subsequent first special symbol variation, a variation time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even though the time saving state is set, when the player who does not understand the game method in the time saving state plays a left-handed game, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state If the fluctuation time of a short time (0.5 seconds) is set, new first special symbol variations are executed one after another, and the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are added up. There was a possibility that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times, may be established.
On the other hand, in this 33rd control example, only when the first special symbol variation after the fifth time executed after the time saving state is set, that is, when the special figure 1 suspension is newly acquired during the time saving state For the first special symbol variation to be executed, a long variation time (20 seconds) is configured to lengthen the period required until one first special symbol variation is completed. , By ensuring a period for the player to grasp the game method in the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is established It is configured so as to prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the special time-saving state (state in which the first special symbol variation is executed five times or more during the time-saving state), as a variation effect of the first special symbol variation, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game ( It is configured to execute a variable performance including a performance mode prompting to acquire special figure 2 reservation). By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the game method to be executed during the time-saving state can grasp the correct game method more easily.
FIG. 952(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving final variation pattern selection table 222xc4. The time saving final variation pattern selection table 222xc4 is a table referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the time saving final variation.
In this 33rd control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation that is the time saving final fluctuation, the final result of the countdown effect executed during the time saving state (number icon 808 '0' display) is displayed, and the charge effect (see FIG. 793 (a)) is configured to prompt the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold until the time saving state ends. . Therefore, since the time saving state is set, the third (final) second special symbol variation is longer than the first or second second special symbol variation to ensure the effect period of the charge effect. It is configured so that the time is set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation. Also, even in the case of winning the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the case of winning the first or second second special symbol lottery, and the third second special symbol lottery. Since the time efficiency (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed per unit time in the time saving state) can be greatly different from the case of winning in the lottery, the player is given a second lottery during the time saving state. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not he/she wins in the special symbol lottery, but also how many times of the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state he/she wins.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 953 and 954, the contents of the composite effect motion scenario table 222xd will be described. FIG. 953(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a in the combined effect action scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 953(a), the operation data (operation details) of the left bar accessory motor 902c7, the right bar accessory motor 902d7, and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 are defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. In addition, the position (state) of the bar function 902a and the states of the left and right bar function stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 at that stage are shown.
The scenario counter 223xh is a counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is used to set operation data for each driving motor of the logo accessory 902 at predetermined timings. The counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 in the first action process (S3161), the second action process (S3163), and the character object moving process (S3165) of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see FIG. 962), which will be described later. be. This liquid crystal effect execution management process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 959). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.
In this 33rd control example, when it is time to start the composite effect preset in the display variation pattern, the sound lamp control device 113 starts counting the scenario counter 223xh, and the value of the scenario counter 223xh corresponds to the operation scenario. When the specified value is obtained, the corresponding operation data is set.
As shown in FIG. 953(a), the scenario counter value indicates the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh, and the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is the first action process ( S3161), the second action process (S3163), 1 is added in the processing during the movement of the role object (S3165).

The number of steps of the left bar accessory motor operation data and the right bar accessory motor operation data indicates the number of rotation steps of the left bar accessory motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7, and the speed is the left bar role. The speed for operating the stepping motors of the object motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 is defined.
The "+ (forward direction)" and "- (reverse direction)" of the number of steps indicate the direction in which the motor rotates. In the reverse direction, the motor is rotated in the direction in which the step counter is decremented and updated. The left bar accessory motor 902c7 in the 32nd control example rotates clockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates counterclockwise when the reverse direction is set. The right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates clockwise when the reverse direction is set.
In the thirty-third control example, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms (high speed), and when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms. When the speed is 3, the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms (medium low speed), and when the speed is 4, the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms. speed (low speed). In other words, speed 1 is set as the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1/1 of speed 1. It has 4 speeds.
Also, the bar role object position indicates the position (state) of the bar role object 902a at the time of setting the action data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh.

When the start timing of the composite effect set in the display variation pattern comes, the scenario counter 223xh starts counting. Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the number of steps +25 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the left bar accessory motor 902c7 starts rotating clockwise and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise at a speed of 4 until the step counter value reaches 25. In this 33rd control example, the stepping motors of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are configured to rotate once in 100 steps, and the position where the step counter value is 0 (origin position) is the stored position, and the step counter is 25, the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are in a released state (OFF state), and the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit. In the thirty-third control example, the time required to drive the step counters from 0 to 25 at speed 2 is set to 250 ms.
When the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches "250", the left and right bar function motors 902c7 and 902d7 are rotated to the step counter value of 25, and the left and right bar function stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released ( OFF state), the bar accessory 902a drops by its own weight to the lower limit.
After that, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "19250", the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar accessory and the motor operation data for the right bar accessory. Since the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 25 at this point, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in opposite directions until the step counter values reach 100. Rotate at speed 2. In the thirty-third control example, at the step counter value of 60, the cylindrical pins 902c3p and 902d3p start pushing up the lower racks 902c2 and 902d2, respectively, and at the step counter value of 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the storage position.
Therefore, after 750 ms have elapsed since the operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value of 19250 was set, that is, when the scenario counter value is 20000, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position. Since the scenario counter value "20000" is the end time of the composite effect operation scenario, END data is defined. By defining the END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is time to end the operation scenario.

FIG. 953(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotating body accessory 902b among the combined effect action scenarios of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 953(b), similarly to the operation scenario for driving the bar accessory 902a up and down, the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3 and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 are defined with respect to the value of the scenario counter 223xh. It is The position and direction of the rotator role show the position and direction (state) of the rotator role 902b when it operates according to the scenario. Further, when the origin sensor data is set to ON, it is set to operate until the origin sensor (not shown) for the rotating body motor provided in the rotating body accessory 902b is turned on. indicates that there is
In the composite effect motion scenario, the number of steps +100 and the speed 4 are set as the motion data of the lateral movement motor 902b3 with respect to the counter value 250 of the scenario counter 223xh. The lateral movement motor 902b3 in the thirty-third control example is a stepping motor with a total number of steps of 200, and is configured so that the position of 100 steps is the reference stop position Pt1 (see FIG. 941(b)). 0 is the left excursion limit Pt2, and 200 steps is the right excursion limit Pt3. Therefore, in this case, the rotating accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3.
Speed 3 and "+rotation" are set as rotating body motor operation data. This "+rotation" is motion data that continues to rotate in the forward direction until the next motion data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotator accessory 902b starts rotating in the positive direction at speed 3.
In the counter value 2250 of the scenario counter 223xh, "+rotation" and speed 3 are set as the operation data of the rotating accessory 902b, and the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotator accessory 902b rotates in the forward direction until it reaches the origin position (forward rotation state), and stops rotating when it reaches the origin position (forward rotation state). At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the forward direction (that is, the step counter value is 200), so the position of the rotator accessory 902b is the right movable range limit Pt3. (See FIG. 941(a)).

In the counter value 4000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3, and "-rotation" and speed 3 are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1 (see FIG. 941(b)).
In the counter value 5000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3, and "-rotation" and speed 3 are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2. Also, the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotating body accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the left movable range limit Pt2 (see FIG. 941(a)), and when the rotating body accessory 902b reaches the origin position, the rotating body motor 902b stops rotating.
With the scenario counter value of 6000, rotation stop is set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2. At this time, the position of the rotating accessory 902b is the left movable range limit Pt2 (see FIG. 942(a)). It should be noted that this scenario counter value of 6000 is the timing at which the rotary accessory 902b comes to the final stop position in the normal pattern composite effect.
After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 18250, operation data for returning to the reference position Pt1 is set, and the rotating body accessory 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1 before the bar accessory 902a reaches the retracted position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 954(a), the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the "A" accessory 903 in the composite effect action scenario table 222xd will be described. FIG. 954(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the "a" accessory 903 in the composite effect action scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 954(a), the accessory motor operation data is defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The role item position indicates the position of the role item 903 when it operates according to the scenario.
When the scenario counter value reaches 6500, +100 and speed 1 are set as the accessory motor operation data. As a result, the accessory 903 rises from the storage position, and after 500 ms elapses, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 7000, it moves to the upper limit (see FIG. 942(a)). After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 18250, action data for returning to the retracted position is set, and the accessory 903 enters the retracted state before the effect time of the composite effect ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 954(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the left and right driving of the left and right shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 in the composite effect operation scenario table 222xd will be described. FIG. 954(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the lateral drive of the shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 in the composite effect action scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 954(b), the left and right shutter accessory motor operation data are defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The shutter accessory position indicates the open/closed state of the shutter accessory 904 when operating according to the scenario.
When the scenario counter value reaches 4500, operation data for closing the shutter accessory 904 is set as left and right shutter accessory operation data, and when the scenario counter value reaches 18750, the shutter accessory 904 is opened. When the scenario counter value reaches 19750, the shutter accessory 904 is opened.

Next, the contents of the first alternative operation scenario 223xe will be described with reference to FIGS. 955-956. This first alternative action scenario 223xe is an action scenario that is set when the alternative pattern 1 composite effect is executed.
FIG. 955(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 in the first alternative action scenario table 222xe. As shown in FIG. 955(a), the action scenario of the bar accessory 902a of the first alternative action scenario 223xe is the same as the above-described normal pattern combined effect action scenario.
FIG. 955(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of action scenarios related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotator accessory 902b in the first alternative action scenario table 222xe. As shown in FIG. 955(b), the action scenario of the rotating body accessory 902b of the first alternative action scenario 223xe is the same up to a scenario counter value of 5000 as the normal pattern composite effect action scenario described above. When the scenario counter value reaches 5000, "-rotation" and speed 3 are set as the rotating body motor operation data, and the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. On the other hand, the traverse motor operating data is not set. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b rotates counterclockwise until it reaches the origin position (normal rotation state) at the reference position Pt1.
After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 6000, rotation stop is set as the rotor motor operation data. As a result, even when the scenario counter value is 6000, if the rotary accessory 902b is rotating, the rotation is stopped.

In the first alternative action scenario 223xe, the final stop position for forming the character string "Gekiatsu" is the reference position Pt1, so unlike the normal pattern combined effect action scenario table 222xd, the character moves to the reference position Pt1. No operational data is set for
Next, referring to FIGS. 956(a) and 956(b), the first alternative operation scenario table 222xe shows an operation scenario related to vertical driving of the accessory 903 and a horizontal driving of the shutter component 904. The contents of the operation scenario to be performed will be explained. As described above, the composite production of the alternative pattern 1 is a production that does not use the a role 903 and the shutter role 904. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 956(a) and 956(b), Motor operation data and left and right shutter accessory motor operation data are not specified.
Next, referring to FIGS. 957(a) and (b), in the second alternative action scenario table 222xf, actions related to vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a and horizontal drive and rotational drive of the rotating body accessory 902b are shown. Describe the contents of the scenario. This second alternative action scenario table 222xf is an action scenario set when the alternative pattern 2 composite effect is executed. As described above, since the composite effect of alternative pattern 2 is a effect that does not use decorative movable accessories, as shown in FIGS. 957(a) and 957(b), left and right bar accessory motor operation data and rotating body motor operating data are not specified.
Next, referring to FIGS. 958(a) and 958(b), the second alternative operation scenario table 222xf shows an operation scenario related to the vertical drive of the shutter component 903 and a motion scenario related to the horizontal drive of the shutter component 904. The contents of the operation scenario to be performed will be explained. As described above, since the composite performance of the alternative pattern 2 is a performance that does not use any decorative movable accessories, as shown in FIGS. , Left and right shutter accessory motor operation data are not specified.

As described above, in the thirty-third control example, the operation scenario of the driving motor of each decorative movable accessory corresponding to each pattern of the composite effect is defined, and is configured to be set at the start timing of the composite effect. . As a result, it is possible to set an operation scenario suitable for the display situation of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the composite effect is started, and it is possible to execute a suitable composite effect for the player.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the 33rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 959 to 966, among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-third control example, points that differ from the thirty-second control example described above will be described. . In the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-third control example, the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described thirty-second control example is executed in the main processing. The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3123) is executed instead of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110), and the variable display setting process (S4124) is executed instead of the variable display setting process. . The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes, and the description thereof is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 959, the processing contents of the main processing in the thirty-third control example will be described. FIG. 959 is a flow chart showing the details of the main process in the thirty-third control example. In the main process in the thirty-third control example, instead of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110), the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3123) is executed, and instead of the variable display setting process, the variable display setting process (S4124) is executed. The difference is that
Here, with reference to FIG. 960, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4124) executed in the main process (see FIG. 959) in the thirty-third control example will be described. FIG. 960 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4124). As shown in FIG. 960, in this variable display setting process (S4124), the effect mode setting process (see S4311 in FIG. 912) is performed in contrast to the variable display setting process (see S4122 in FIG. 911) of the thirty-second control example described above. Instead, it is different in that the effect mode setting process (S4314) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 961, the processing contents of the rendering mode setting processing (S4314) will be described. FIG. 961 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the rendering mode setting processing (S4314). This effect mode setting process (S4314) is different from the above-described effect mode setting process (see S4311 in FIG. 912) in that the processing contents when the composite effect is selected are added.
Specifically, when the effect mode setting process (S4314) is executed, first, the values of the first effect counter 223xa and the second effect counter 223xb are acquired (S4531), and the type of the extracted variation pattern and the acquired The variation pattern for display is determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222xc based on the value of the first effect counter 223xa (S4532).
Then, it is determined whether the display variation pattern determined by the processing of S4532 includes a composite effect (S4537), and if it is determined that the composite effect is included (S4537: Yes), the role standby The flag 223xc is set to ON (S4536), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4537, when it is determined that the composite effect is not included (S4537: No), this process is terminated without setting the role standby flag 223xc to ON.
Next, with reference to FIG. 962, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3123) will be described. FIG. 962 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3123). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3123), a process for executing different operation processes at different timings for each role is executed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variable effect being executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3123) is executed, first, it is determined whether the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON (S3151), and the fluctuating flag 223xf is not set to ON. If it is determined that the special symbol is not fluctuating (S3151: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S3151, if it is determined that the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON (S3151: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuating time counter 223xg (S3152), and then the role standby It is determined whether the flag 223xc is set to ON (S3153). Here, when it is determined that the role item standby flag 223xc is set to ON (S3153: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 223xg is referred to determine whether it is the production start time (S3154), When it is determined that it is the production start time (S3154: Yes), a composite production start process is executed (S3166), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3154, if it is determined that it is not the production start time, that is, the role standby flag 223xc is set to ON (a variation pattern in which a composite production using a role is executed is set ), but if the timing for executing the effect has not come (S3154: No), this process ends.
That is, when the variable effect is executed in the variable pattern in which the compound effect is executed, the processing of S3151 to S3254 is repeatedly executed until the start timing of the compound effect is reached. Then, when the start timing of the composite effect is reached, a composite effect start process (S3166) is executed as a process for starting the composite effect.
Here, with reference to FIG. 963, the processing contents of the composite effect start process (S3166) executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S3123 in FIG. 962) will be described. FIG. 963 is a flow chart showing the details of the composite effect start process (S3166). This composite effect start process (S3166) is a process executed when the start timing of the composite effect arrives, and is a process for determining different effect control according to the execution timing of the composite effect.

In the thirty-third control example, a plurality of display variation patterns with different execution timings of the composite effect can be determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table 222xc. Specifically, it is configured to be able to determine a display variation pattern to be executed while the composite effect is in reach and a display variation pattern to be executed during non-reach.
In this 33rd control example, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variation performance of the third symbol, and it is suggested that the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is likely to be a big win. It is configured to be able to execute a composite effect (“Gekiatsu” display using characters and liquid crystal display) for the purpose. Then, when executing this composite effect, the player's attention is better when the composite effect is executed using various elements (liquid crystal display, decorative movable accessories 90, 903, 904, decoration 905). Since it is possible to increase the degree of performance, it is conceivable to execute a composite effect using more modes.
However, as described above with reference to FIGS. 941 to 945, this composite effect is executed so as to cover the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 Depending on the content of the variable performance of the third pattern being executed, a part of the variable performance is hidden (becomes difficult to see) by the combined performance, so that the player watching the variable performance of the third pattern feels uncomfortable. I had a problem with it.
In particular, using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, when the ready-to-win effect is executed as a variable effect for indicating that the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is highly likely to be a big hit, complex By executing the performance, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the type of the third symbol displayed in the ready-to-win state, and the player who expects that the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed, There is a problem that the composite effect becomes a troublesome effect and the effect of the effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this 33rd control example, the types of elements used to create the same effect result ("Gekiatsu display") and the control details for each element are changed depending on the timing at which the composite effect is executed. By making them different, it is possible to execute a composite effect without interfering with the variable effect of the third symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player regardless of when the composite effect is executed. In addition, since it is possible to change the effect mode of the compound effect showing the same effect result corresponding to the content of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the compound effect is executed at various timings. It is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.
When the composite effect start process (S3166) is executed, first, a display command for displaying the notification mode for notifying the start of the composite effect is set (S3231), and the current variable effect effect mode is in reach. (S3237), and if it is determined that it is not in the reach state (S3237: No), the display mode that the player pays particular attention to is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the operation data for executing the composite effect using all the movable accessories for decoration is set by referring to the composite effect operation scenario table 222xd (S3238), and the movable role flag 223xe is set to ON ( S3239), sets the role product standby flag 223xc to off (S3245), and terminates this process. Based on the action data set by the process of S3238, the normal pattern composite effect described above with reference to FIG. 941 is executed.
In the process of S3237, if it is determined that the reach is in progress (S3237: Yes), then it is determined whether the reach type being executed is medium line reach (S3240), and it is determined that it is medium line reach. If so (S3240: Yes), the second alternative action scenario table 222xf is referenced to set the action data (S3241), the second action flag 223xy is set to ON (S3242), and the process proceeds to S3245.
That is, when the middle line reach is in progress, as described above with reference to FIG. 944, the movable position of the decorative movable accessory 902a overlaps with a part of the reach line (the effective line L2) in the middle line reach. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to identify the type of the third symbol displayed on the reach line L2. An effect mode that does not use the accessory 902a is set, and the composite effect of the mode shown in FIG. 944 is executed.

By configuring in this way, even when the middle line (effective line L2) is in the reach state, it is possible to execute the composite effect without impairing the effect of the variable effect.
On the other hand, in the process of S3240, if it is determined that the reach is other than the middle line reach (S3240: No), the first alternative action scenario table 222xe is referred to set the action data (S3243), and the first action is set. The flag 223xx is set to ON (S3244), and the process proceeds to S3245.
That is, when the ready-to-win effect is being executed on an effective line other than the middle line (effective line L2), even if the decorative movable accessory 902a is moved to the movable position that overlaps with the middle line, the decorative movable accessory 902a is moved to the movable position overlapping the middle line. Since the accessory 902a does not cover the effective line in the ready-to-reach state, action data for executing a composite effect using the decorative movable accessory 902a is set by the processing of S3243.
As shown in FIG. 943(a), when the effective line L5 is in the ready-to-win state, part of the effective line L5 is covered when the decorative movable accessory 902a is moved. Since the movable accessory for decoration 902a is moved to the position, in the process of S3243, among the movable accessories for decoration, the operation data for moving the movable accessory for decoration other than the movable accessory for decoration 902a is set. configured to prevent

That is, in the thirty-third control example, when executing the composite effect during the ready-to-win state, it is determined whether the ready-to-win effect using a specific effective line (effective line L5) is being executed (executed), When the ready-to-win effect using the specific effective line is executed, the composite effect is executed in the effect mode without using the decorative movable accessory (decorative movable accessory 902a) that covers the specific effective line. However, when the ready-to-win effect is executed (performed) without using a specific effective line (effective line L5), a decorative movable movable to cover only the specific effective line (effective line L5). It is configured so as to execute a combined production in a production mode using the accessory (decorative movable accessory 902a).
By constructing in this way, the composite performance can be executed without lowering the performance effect of the ready-to-win performance even if the performance mode of the composite performance is not set in a pattern corresponding to all the performance modes of the ready-to-win performance. can be done.
Next, the processing contents of the first operation processing (S3161) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 964 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first operation processing (S3161). This first action process (S3161) is a process executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S3123 in FIG. 962), and is executed when the first action flag 223xx is set to ON.
When the first action process (S3161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4751). 3, the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4752), the first operation flag 223xx is set to off (S4753), and this process ends. Also, in the process of S4751, if it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4751: No), then it is determined whether it is time to stop the rotating accessory 902b (S4754), and the stop timing If it is determined that it is not (S4754: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4754, if it is determined that it is time to stop the rotary accessory 902b (S4754: Yes), the "ge" displayed on the liquid crystal display is moved to the designated position (see FIG. 943(b)). The display command to be displayed is set (S4755), the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 (S4756), the operation data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4757), and this processing is terminated.
As described above, in the first action process described with reference to S206, when the rotating accessory 902b is stopped, the position corresponding to the stop position of the rotating accessory 902b Since the display position of the elements (“ge”, “a”) expressed in the liquid crystal display in the composite effect is set, the position corresponding to the rotary character 902b is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is possible to display elements (“ge”, “a”) represented by
Next, the processing contents of the second operation processing (S3163) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 965 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second operation process (S3163). This second action process (S3163) is a process executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S3123 in FIG. 962), and is executed when the second action flag 223xy is set to ON.
When the second action process (S3163) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4851). In order to end the operation process in , the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4852), the second operation flag 223xx is set to off (S4853), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4851 that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4851: No), then the display command of the second operation display table is set (S4854), and the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set. The value is incremented by 1 (S4855), action data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4856), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the second operation process (S3163), as the effect mode of the combined effect, the effect mode using only the liquid crystal display and the decoration 905, that is, the effect mode without using each decorative movable accessory (Fig. 944) is determined, the action data for operating the decorative movable accessory is not set as a composite effect. Even when the second action process (S3163) is executed, the timing of displaying the symbols "ge", "ki", and "a" displayed on the liquid crystal display is the same as for other composite effects. Good to set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the same composite effect is being executed with different elements.
In addition, without being limited to this, as the effect mode of the compound effect, it is possible to determine the effect mode in which the order of displaying the patterns of "ge", "ki", and "a" displayed on the liquid crystal is different. It may be constructed so that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is higher when the patterns are displayed in the same order as the composite performance of (1) than when the patterns are displayed in a different order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the variation of the contents of the effect only for the composite effect that does not require setting the operation data of the decorative movable accessory, compared to the other composite effects.
Next, with reference to FIG. 966, the processing contents of the processing during the movable role processing (S3165) will be described. FIG. 966 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the process during movable accessory movement (S3165). This process during movable role (S3165) is a process executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S3123 in FIG. 962), and is executed when the during movable role flag 223xe is set to ON. .
When the role object movable process (S3165) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4951). In order to end the action processing in the effect, the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4952), the movable character object flag 223xe is set to OFF (S4953), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4951: No), 1 is added to the value of the scenario counter 223xh (S4954), and the Operation data is set (S4955), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the 33rd control example, the variation pattern in which the composite effect is executed at various timings is configured to be determinable, and the variable effect content of the third symbol (reach content), it is possible to execute a composite effect using different elements, so that a suitable effect can be provided to the player regardless of when the composite effect is executed . In addition, since it is possible to change the effect mode of the compound effect showing the same effect result corresponding to the content of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the compound effect is executed at various timings. It is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.
In addition, in the thirty-third control example, an example is shown in which the timing at which the composite effect is executed is determined in advance based on the determined variation pattern. The timing may be configured to be arbitrarily selectable by the player. In this case, for example, the operation effective period (SW effective time) in which the operation to the operation means (the effect button 22a) that the player can operate is effectively determined is at least set as the variable effect of the third symbol, and the ready-to-win state is It is configured to be settable within a range from the period before creation to the period after reaching the ready-to-win state, and based on the player's operation of the operation means during the effective operation period, the composite effect is produced. Configure it to start. Then, the performance contents of the variable performance of the third pattern when the composite performance is started, or the elapsed time and remaining time of the operation effective period are determined, and the performance mode that does not overlap with the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is determined. Then, it is preferable to configure so as to execute a composite effect corresponding to the determined effect mode. In this case, the type of composite effect may be configured to be selectable. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a type of compound effect that can be selected only when a predetermined condition (such as during a big hit change) is satisfied. In addition, different stage types may be selected by performing different operations on the operating means.
With this configuration, the player can arbitrarily select the timing for executing the composite effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, when each decorative movable accessory is configured to be usable for purposes other than the composite performance, the movable state of each decorative movable accessory at the time when the conditions for executing the composite performance are satisfied is determined, and the composite performance is determined. A specifying means is provided for specifying a decorative movable accessory that can be used as a decoration, a performance mode that can be performed within the range of the decorative movable accessory specified by the specifying means is determined, and the determined performance mode is used to perform a composite The production may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, even if the execution period of various effects other than the variable effect of the third pattern (effect using the decorative movable accessory) and the composite effect overlap, the player can It is possible to provide a suitable production for

Furthermore, in the thirty-third control example, the configuration is shown in which the composite effect is executed in an executable effect mode without shifting the execution timing of the composite effect from the timing determined in advance. The execution timing of the composite effect may be configured so as to be capable of being corrected before or after a predetermined execution timing. In addition, if an abnormality occurs in the operation of some or all of the movable decorative accessories used in the production after the variable display mode of the production mode that accompanies the action of the movable decorative accessories such as composite effects is determined. , the movement of the decorative movable accessory may be canceled and replaced with a similar or completely different display effect. It should be noted that the determination of the variable display mode accompanying the movement of the decorative movable accessory is another form of the determination of the execution of the operation of the predetermined action member in the 64th control example described later, and the operation of the decorative movable accessory is abnormal. The control for canceling the motion of the decorative movable accessory when it is detected that is occurring is another form of control for avoiding the motion of a predetermined motion member in the 64th control example described later.
In this case, when the ready-to-win effect is executed when the remaining period until the end of the composite effect is 1 second, the execution timing of the composite effect is advanced by 1 second, and the normal pattern composite effect ( 941) can be executed. Thus, by providing the correction process for correcting the execution timing of the composite effect, it is possible to provide the player with more diverse effects.
Further, when the ready-to-win effect is started during the execution period of the composite effect, the start of the ready-to-win effect may be delayed until the end of the composite effect.
In addition, in the 33rd control example, the movable accessory for decoration is arranged on the front side of the three-symbol display device 81 (the front side from the player's line of sight), so that the liquid crystal display on the back side of the movable accessory for decoration is displayed. Since (the third pattern and other advance notice effects) cannot be visually recognized by the player, the technical concept of controlling the liquid crystal display, which is highly important as game information, and the decorative movable accessory not to overlap has been explained.

Here, by applying this technical idea, a modification will be described in which one decorative movable accessory and another decorative movable accessory can be moved so as to overlap each other. Hereinafter, the first modification of the thirty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 967 to 969. FIG.
In the first modified example of the thirty-third control example, a character presentation combining the decorative movable accessory and the liquid crystal display and a character presentation using the character accessory (rabbit accessory) are executed. The character effect is one of the advance notice effects executed during the variable display period of the special symbols, and the characters ``ge'' 815 and the characters ``a'' displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. 816, a decorative movable accessory 815 decorated with the character "ki", and a character "tsu" 817b that is a part of the characters "Katsutsuzo" decorated on the game board surface bn. By combining the characters to form the character string "Gekiatsu", it is an effect that informs that the expectation of winning the jackpot of the special symbol during the variable display is high.
Here, with reference to FIG. 967(b), the display contents of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 during execution of the character effect will be described. During execution of the character rendering, as shown in FIG. 967(b), the main display area Dm contains the characters "ge" 814 and "a" 816, which are components of the character rendering, and a background image. A picture of the sun is displayed. By arranging the key character 815 on the line connecting the character 814 of "ge" and the character 816 of "a", the character string of "gekia" is formed and decorated on the game board bn. By being combined with the character 817b of "tsu", the character string of "gekiatsu" is formed.
Returning to FIG. 967(a), the description continues. The game board surface bn is decorated with characters of "win!". Each character decoration 817a to 817c of "Katsutsuzo" on the game board surface bn has a built-in LED. It's becoming As for the LEDs of this character decoration portion, when the character string "GEKIATSU" is formed in the character presentation, the LEDs for the character "WIN" 817a and the character "ZO" 817c are turned off, and only the character "TSU" 817b is turned off. lights up. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the character string 817b of "tsu" has been switched from the element constituting the character string "Katsutsuzo" to the element constituting the character string "Gekiatsu".

The key character 815 used in the character effect is stored outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the left side of the third symbol display device when viewed from the front), except for the execution period of the character effect. is started, it moves so as to be placed at the position shown in FIG. 968(b).
The character effect start timing in the first modified example of the thirty-third control example is randomly determined by lottery in the liquid crystal effect execution management process in the sound lamp control device 113 . By constructing in this manner, the timing of starting the character presentation is determined in advance by the player according to the variation type of the special pattern, etc., and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed, and the character presentation is performed at unexpected timing. can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.
The character effect is an advance notice effect in which a character object decorated with a rabbit character (rabbit object 813) moves on the front side of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The character role item 813 is housed outside the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the upper side of the third pattern display device when viewed from the front) except for the execution period of the character production, and the character production is started. and the third pattern display device 81 so as to be arranged in front of the main display area of the third pattern display device 81 . An LED is built in the flame decoration portion surrounding the rabbit character of the character role 813, and the color of the flame decoration portion can be changed by light emission of the LED. The color of the decorative portion of the flame is used to suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. For example, if the decorative portion of the flame emits blue light, it suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively low, and if it emits light of red, it suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high.
This character accessory 813 is configured to be movable up, down, left, and right on the front side of the main display area Dm. In addition, in the first modification of the thirty-third control example, as described above, the character effect start timing is determined by lottery. If they overlap, there is a risk that the movable key role 815 and the character role 813 will interfere with each other.

In order to solve this problem, the key object 815 in the thirty-third control example is configured so that the front and rear positions can be set. Specifically, a first position where the key role 815 is arranged on the front side of the character role 813 (the front side of the player's line of sight), and a position where the key role 815 is on the back side of the character role 813 (the game It is configured to be able to set a second position that is arranged on the back side of the person's line of sight. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the key role 815 and the character role 813 from interfering with each other.
Further, in the first modified example of the thirty-third control example, the effect result of the character effect is variable depending on the front and rear positions of the key role 815 and the character role 813 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 969(a), when the character presentation is executed and the key role 815 is movable at the second position, the character role (rabbit role) 813 moves to the key role 815. , the key role 815 is hidden by the character role 813 . Then, in the third pattern display device 81, the character 814 of ``ge'' is not displayed, and the character string of ``Atsu'' is changed so that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is lowered compared to the case where the character string of ``Gekiatsu'' is formed. .
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 969(b), when the character presentation is executed and the key role 815 is movable at the first position, the character role (rabbit role) 813 is placed on the key role 815. When it reaches the position where it is located, the key role 815 is arranged on the front side of the character role 813, and the character role 813 is hidden by the key role 815. - 特許庁In this case, as shown in FIG. 969(b), since the character role 813 is larger in size than the key role 815, part of the character role 813 (flame decoration part) is visible to the player. Thus, from the player's point of view, the key role 815 looks like it has a flame decoration. The character string "Gekiatsu" composed of the kiyakumono 815 with the flame decoration has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the case where the normal character string "Gekiatsu" (see FIG. 967(a)) is formed. has been ranked up. In other words, when the character presentation and the character presentation are performed at the same timing, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot suggested by the character presentation varies depending on the positional relationship between the character role 813 and the key role 815.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify various effect results in the character effect according to the positional relationship between the character role 813 and the key role 815, and it is possible to suppress the character effect from becoming monotonous. .
In addition, in the first modification of the thirty-third control example, only the front and rear positions of the character role 813 can be varied. It may be configured as possible.

It should be noted that the position where the character string of "gekiatsu" is formed is not fixed, and the position where the character string of "gekiatsu" is formed may be variable according to the state of the liquid crystal display. For example, when an error display is displayed in the main display area Dm, the characters "ge" 814 and "a" 816 are displayed while avoiding the position where the error display is displayed. A key character 815 is arranged on a line connecting a character 814 of "ge" and a character 816 of "a". In this case, since the position of the character "tsu" 817b, which is the decoration of the game board surface bn, is fixed, the line connecting the character "ge" 814 and the character "tsu" 817b is based on the character "tsu" 817b. It is preferable to display the letter 816 of "A" on the top.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that the error display is hidden by the character presentation and the occurrence of the error is not recognized by the player or the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example is configured to execute a character effect (composite effect) using the movable accessory for decoration, but the characters are displayed only on the liquid crystal display without using the movable accessory for decoration. It is good also as composition which performs production. A control example in the case of executing a character presentation only on the liquid crystal display will be described below. Note that the control example for executing the character presentation only on the liquid crystal display is the second modification of the thirty-third control example.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the thirty-third control example, a plurality of display layers are arranged to display the display mode on the third symbol display device 81 . A reserved pattern layer ry1, a first effect layer ry2a, a second effect layer ry2b, a third effect layer ry2c, a special pattern layer ry3, and a background layer ry4 are arranged from the front side of the display surface. , background, etc. can be displayed, and by overlapping and displaying, a display effect with a sense of depth can be displayed.

The reserved pattern layer ry1 is a layer in which a display mode such as a reserved pattern that needs to be displayed in the foreground is displayed. The display mode displayed on the reserved pattern layer ry1 is configured so that it can always be displayed in the foreground because no layer is set on the front side. The first effect layer ry2a is a layer that is set one behind the reserved pattern layer ry1, and is a layer that mainly sets an advance notice effect and a character effect. As the layers in which the notice effect and character effect are set, the second effect layer ry2b arranged on the back side of the first effect layer ry2a and the third effect layer ry2b arranged on the back side of the second effect layer ry2b. Rendering layers ry2c and ry2c are respectively set.
The special pattern layer ry3 is a layer in which a special pattern (third pattern) is displayed, and since it is arranged on the front side of the background layer ry4, the special pattern can always be displayed on the front side of the background image. can. The background layer ry4 is a layer in which a background image is displayed, is a layer set in the backmost layer, and is set with a background image during movement, standby, and the like.
The character presentation in the second modification of the thirty-third control example is performed by displaying a plurality of characters and displaying a combination of arbitrary words during the period of variation of the special symbols (dynamic display period). It is a production that is made possible to suggest the result of the judgment of the special symbol inside (notify the degree of expectation that is a hit). Here, in the special pattern layer ry3, a special pattern is displayed, and when a ready-to-win effect or the like is displayed, the special pattern forming the ready-to-win pattern is hidden by characters in the character effect, thereby reducing the reach. A problem arises in that it is difficult to determine whether or not they are formed. In addition, the character effect is displayed in a variation pattern of the special symbols so as to prevent the player from losing interest due to the fact that the execution timing of the character effect is determined in advance by the variation type of the special symbol. It is set so that the execution timing is randomly selected by lottery within the period during which the character effect can be executed, and the character effect is executed. By configuring in this way, the execution timing of the character presentation can be made at random, and while it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, it is difficult to respond to the contents of the variable display of the special symbols being executed. As a result, there may be problems such as obstructing the player's visual recognition of the special symbols that must be visually recognized by the player, or concealing the advance notice effect or the like. Below, a description will be given of a configuration in which the character effects in the present control example correspond to the problems described above so as to be able to be resolved.
For example, the character effect set in the first effect layer ry2a is such that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the left symbol row z1, and the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the middle line L2 and the left symbol row z1 The character "ki" is arranged, the character "a" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2 intersect, and the character "tsu" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the right symbol row z3 intersect. Display controlled to be arranged. A character effect set in the first effect layer ry2a is called a first character effect.

In this first character effect, characters are not arranged on the upward right line L4, so the ready-to-win effect is executed at the timing before the ready-to-win effect is executed at the execution timing of the character effect and on the upward right line L4. is controlled to run when and if
In addition, the character effect set in the second effect layer ry2b is such that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the middle symbol row z2, and The character "ki" is arranged, the character "a" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2 intersect, and the character "tsu" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the right symbol row z3 intersect. Display controlled to be arranged. The character effect set in the second effect layer ry2a is called a second character effect.
In this second character effect, characters are not arranged at the position where the left symbol row z1 and the middle line L2 intersect and the position where the right symbol row z3 and the middle row line L2 intersect, and the third symbol in the reach state is placed on the middle row L2. is displayed, the characters in the character effect do not overlap, so control is performed mainly when the reach line is the middle line L2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that the character in the character presentation hides the ready-to-win pattern during the ready-to-win presentation, making it difficult to understand whether or not the ready-to-win game is in progress.
In addition, the character effect set in the third effect layer ry2c is such that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the right symbol row z3, and The character "ki" is arranged, the character "a" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2 intersect, and the character "tsu" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the right symbol row z2 intersect. Display controlled to be arranged. The character effect set in the third effect layer ry2c is called a third character effect.

This third character effect is controlled so as not to be used at the timing after the ready-to-win effect is executed because the characters are arranged on the right symbol row z3. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that the character in the character presentation hides the ready-to-win pattern during the ready-to-win presentation, making it difficult to understand whether or not the ready-to-win game is in progress.
Here, for example, when the third symbol is stop-displayed on the middle line L2 in the ready-to-win state, if the character effect using the first effect layer ry2a is executed, the character "ki" constituting the character effect The third pattern is hidden, and the player cannot recognize the ready-to-win mode. On the other hand, if the character effect is executed using the second effect layer ry2b instead of the first effect layer ry2a, the character effect can be executed without hiding the third pattern.
In this manner, a suitable character effect can be executed by switching the display layer for drawing the character effect image depending on the display state of the third symbol at the time when the character effect is started.
As the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 for executing the above-described character effect only by the liquid crystal display, the following configuration is conceivable.

First, as an electrical configuration of the display control device 114, a character effect flag 233xa and a character effect execution flag 233xb are provided in the work RAM 233, and the character effect flag 233xb is provided in the NAND flash memory 234a in the character ROM. A display data selection table 234xa is newly defined. Other processing is the same as the thirty-third control example (and the first control example) described above.
The character effect flag 233xa is a flag that is set to ON when information indicating execution of character effect is included in the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and the character effect flag 233xa is turned on. If set, the character effect process is executed in the display setting process. The character effect flag 233xa set to ON is set to OFF when a fluctuation stop command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the character effect processing will be described later.
The character rendering in-execution flag 233xb is a flag that is set to ON when a character display table for character rendering is set in the character rendering process. In the process, a character rendering in-execution process is executed. The character effect execution flag 233xb set to ON is set to OFF when the address indicated by the character pointer in the character effect execution process becomes the END data of the character display data). The details of the character effect execution process will be described later.
The character effect display data selection table 234xa is a table in which character effect display data is defined with respect to the adequacy determination result of the special symbol and the value of the display effect counter CS3. Specifically, if the result of the right/fail judgment is out, if the value of the display effect counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 199, 500 to 899", "no character effect" is selected, and "200 to 299, 900 If it is in the range of "999", "first effect layer display data" is selected, if it is in the range of "300 to 399", "second effect layer display data" is selected, and if it is in the range of "400 to 499", the "second effect layer display data" is selected. For example, "third effect layer display data" is selected.

When the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit, if the value of the display effect counter CS3 is within the range of "0 to 99, 800 to 899", "no character effect" is selected, and the range of "200 to 299, 900 to 999" is selected. If so, the "first effect layer display data" is selected, if the range is "300 to 399", the "second effect layer display data" is selected, and if the range is "100 to 199, 500 to 799", "Third effect layer display data" is selected.
Here, the first effect layer display data is a display data table for drawing a character effect image on the first effect layer ry2a among the character effect display data, and the second effect layer display data is the second effect layer display data. This is a display data table for drawing a character effect image on the second effect layer ry2b, and the third effect layer display data is a display data table for drawing a character effect image on the third effect layer ry2c. Each display data table is associated with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and is displayed at that time. The contents of an image for one frame to be drawn (drawing contents) are specified in detail.
Also, "no character effect" indicates that display data for character effect is not set at the present time, that is, it is not an execution value for character effect. In the second modification of the thirty-third control example, as described above, when the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes information indicating execution of character rendering, the display control device 114 , an execution timing is randomly selected by lottery within a period in which the character presentation can be executed, and the character presentation is executed. Specifically, when the value of the display effect counter CS3 becomes the character effect execution value in the character effect process, the character effect display data table is set and the character effect is started.
In addition, since the value of the display effect counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 999", if the result of the success/failure judgment is out, 60% of the time, "no character effect" is selected, and 20% of the time, "no character effect" is selected. "First effect layer display data" is selected, "second effect layer display data" is selected at a rate of 10%, and "third effect layer display data" is selected at a rate of 10%. That is, when the result of the suitability determination is out of line, the ratio of the execution value of the character effect is 40%.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, 20% of the selection is for "no text effect", 20% is for selecting the "first effect layer display data", and 20% is for ""Second effect layer display data" is selected, and "third effect layer display data" is selected at a rate of 40%. In other words, when the win/loss determination result is a jackpot, the ratio of the execution value of the character effect is 80%. Therefore, the execution value of the character effect is more likely to be selected and the character effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of the result of the win/loss determination. In addition, since the ratio of selecting the "second effect layer display data" and the "third effect layer display data" is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a hit/fail judgment result, the character effect display is performed. The mode (arrangement of the characters "Gekiatsu") also makes it easier to predict the success/failure determination result, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modification of the thirty-third control example will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example is different from the control processing of the display control device 114 in the above-described thirty-third control example (and the first control example). Variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 949(a)) is executed instead of variation pattern command processing, variation stop command processing is executed instead of variation stop command processing (see FIG. 952(a)), display setting The difference is that the display setting process is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 954), and the character effect process, the character effect in-execution process, and the ready-to-win effect process are additionally executed. Other processing is the same as in the thirty-third control example (and the first control example) described above.
First, details of the variation pattern command process (S6431) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modification of the thirty-third control example will be described. The variation pattern command process (S6431) in the second modification of the thirty-third control example is executed instead of the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 949) of the thirty-third control example (and the first control example) described above. is.
In the variation pattern command process (S6431), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes execution information for character rendering (S6506). If it is determined that there is character effect execution information (S6506: Yes), the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6506), and the process proceeds to S6501. Then, the processing of S6501 to S6505 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6506, if it is determined that there is no character effect execution information (S6506: No), the above-described process of S6507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6501. Then, the processing of S6501 to S6505 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6432) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. The fluctuation stop command process (S6432) in the second modification of the thirty-third control example is executed instead of the fluctuation stop command process (see FIG. 952) in the thirty-third control example (and the first control example). is.
In the fluctuation stop command 6 process (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6936). When it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6936: Yes), the character effect flag 233xa is set to OFF (S6937), and the process proceeds to S6931. Then, the processing of S6931 to S6935 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6936, when it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is not set to ON (S6936: No), the process of S6937 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6931. Then, the processing of S6931 to S6935 described above is executed, and this processing ends.
Next, details of the display setting process (S6331) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. The display setting process (S6331) in the second modification of the thirty-third control example is a process executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 954) in the thirty-third control example (and the first control example) described above. .
In the display setting process (S6331), first, the processes of S7201 to S7205 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S7222). When it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S7222: Yes), the character effect process (S7223) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S7206 described above. A detailed description of the character rendering process (S7223) will be given later. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S7222 that the character effect flag 233xa is not set to ON (S7222: No), the process of S7223 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7206.

Next, the character rendering process (S7223) executed in the display setting process (S6331) in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. In the character effect processing (S7223), first, it is determined whether or not the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7251). If it is determined that the character effect in-execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7251: Yes), the character effect in-execution process (S7252) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the character rendering in-execution process (S7252) will be given later. On the other hand, in the process of S7251, if it is determined that the character effect execution flag 233xb is not set to ON (S7251: No), it is determined whether it is the character effect executable period (S7253). If it is determined that it is not the character effect executable period (S7253: No), this process is terminated. Determination of whether or not it is the character rendering executable period is made by determining whether the value of the clock counter 233h is greater than the value corresponding to the character rendering period (5 seconds in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example). It is determined by That is, when the value of the clock counter 233h is less than the value corresponding to 5 seconds, the character effect cannot be finished within the variable display period of the special symbols, so the character effect is not executed.
On the other hand, in the process of S7253, when it is determined that it is the character effect executable period, the value of the display effect counter CS3 is acquired (S7254). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter CS3 acquired in the process of S7254 is the character effect execution value (S7255). If it is determined that the obtained value of the display effect counter CS3 is not the execution value of the character effect (S7255: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S7255, when it is determined that the acquired value of the display effect counter CS3 is the execution value of the character effect (S7255: Yes), it is determined whether or not reach is in progress (S7256). When it is determined that it is in reach (S7256: Yes), reach effect processing (S7257) is executed, and this processing ends. A detailed description of the ready-to-win effect processing (S7257) will be given later. On the other hand, in the process of S7256, if it is determined that the reach is not in progress (S7256: No), the character effect display data corresponding to the acquired display effect counter CS3 is set in the character display data table buffer (S7258), and the character The effect executing flag 233xb is set to ON (S7259), and this process is terminated.
Next, a description will be given of the processing during character presentation execution (S7252) executed in the character presentation processing (S7223) in the second modification of the thirty-third control example. In the character rendering in-execution process (S7252), first, 1 is added to the character pointer (S7351). Next, it is determined whether or not the drawing contents of the address indicated by the character pointer after addition are END data (S7352). If it is determined that the drawing content of the address indicated by the character pointer after the addition is END data (S7352: Yes), the value of the character pointer is initialized (S7353), and the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to off. (S7354), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7352 that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after addition is not END data (S7352: No), the address indicated by the character pointer in the character display data table buffer is obtained (S7355), and the process ends.

Next, the process of the ready-to-win effect process (S7257) executed in the character effect process (S7223) in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. In the reach effect processing (S7257), first, it is determined whether or not the current reach is the middle row (x2 lines) reach (S7451). If it is determined that the current reach is not the middle row (x2 lines) reach (S7451: No), it is determined whether it is the right-up row (x2 lines) reach (S7452). When it is determined to be the right-up row (Z2 line) reach (S7452: Yes), the character display data of the first effect layer ry2a is set in the character display data table buffer (S7453), and the character effect execution flag 233xb. is set to ON (S7455), and the process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S7451, if it is determined that the current reach is the middle row (x2 lines) reach (S7451: Yes), the character display data of the second effect layer ry2b is set in the character display data table buffer. (S7454), the character effect executing flag 233xb is set to ON (S7455), and this process is terminated.
As described above, in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example, in each layer for displaying the display mode on the third pattern display device 81, by switching the effect layer for displaying the character effect, the optimal character The production is configured to be executable.
As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as hindering the visual recognition of the special symbols by the character presentation and concealing the other advance notice presentation, and the character presentation is executed while providing appropriate game information to the player. can do.

In addition, in the second modification of the thirty-third control example, when the third symbol is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, by switching the display layer in which the character effect is displayed, the third symbol and the character effect are displayed. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the ready-to-win effect period is reached during execution of the character effect, the timing of stopping and displaying the third symbol in the ready-to-win mode may be shifted (delayed), or the ready-to-win line may be displayed during execution. The reach line may be changed to a reach line that does not overlap with the character presentation.
Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example, by displaying a character effect (a combination of a plurality of characters to form an arbitrary word (for example, the character "Gekiatsu"), It has a plurality (three) of effect layers with different character arrangements in the effect that suggests the result of determination of whether the special symbol is changing, and is used according to the display situation of the third symbol at the timing when the character effect is started. By switching the effect layer, the third pattern of the ready-to-win state and the characters constituting the character effect are prevented from overlapping, and the configuration for executing the optimum character effect has been described.
However, in the character effect of the second modified example of the thirty-third control example, all the characters are drawn in one effect layer, so the character effect cannot have a sense of depth. Therefore, the 33rd control is an example of control in the case where different characters are drawn in a plurality of effect layers, and character effects with a sense of depth can be displayed by superimposing and displaying all the effect layers. A third modification of the example will be described.
A characteristic effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. As effects for giving advance notice of the result of determination of suitability of the special symbol, two effects, a character effect and a character effect, are executed. The character effect is an effect that foretells that the expectation of winning the jackpot of the special symbol being changed is high by displaying the character line "Gekiatsu" in the display area of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character effect is a effect that foretells the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot by the display mode of the character 813 imitating a rabbit. Specifically, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs depending on the color of the effect displayed surrounding the character 813 and the size of the effect. For example, when the blue effect is displayed, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is lowest. Then, the probability of winning the jackpot increases in the order of the red effect and the gold effect.
Whether or not the character effect and the character effect are executed is defined in the display variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113, and both the character effect and the character effect are performed during the variable display period of one special pattern. There are a variation pattern in which no effect is performed, a variation pattern in which only one of the effects is performed, and a variation pattern in which both effects are performed. Further, the display variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command specifies the start timing of the character presentation, but does not specify the start timing of the character presentation. determined by lottery. For this reason, the effect execution period of the character effect and the effect execution period of the character effect may overlap.
Here, an example of the display screen when the effect period of the character effect and the effect period of the character effect overlap will be described. In the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, there are a background image, characters ``ge'' 814, characters ``ki'' 815, and characters ``a'' 816, which are constituent elements of the character presentation. A character 813, which is a component of the character presentation, is displayed.
The sub display area Ds includes an active pending symbol display area Ds1 which is a display area for displaying an active pending symbol hr0 indicating a pending ball corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, and an active pending symbol display area Ds1 for displaying the pending pending symbol. A message in which characters 817a of "win", characters 817b of "tsu", and characters 817c of "zo" are displayed regardless of the determination result of special symbols and the type of display fluctuation pattern. display area Ds3. It should be noted that the display of the characters "win!" is displayed even during a period in which the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, and does not give advance notice of the result of determination of whether or not the special symbols are appropriate, but is merely a message to the player. is displayed. In addition, in the third modification of the thirty-third control example, the message is displayed in the message display area Ds3, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is a normal state, the display of "Usual") may be displayed, or the stage name of the currently set background stage may be displayed.

Here, the flow of character rendering in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. When it comes to the start timing of the character effect specified in the set display variation pattern, first the character 815 of "ge" is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 103, and then the character 814 of "ge" is displayed. , and the character "A" 816 is displayed. Then, when the character 816 of "a" is displayed, the characters 817a of "win" and the characters 817c of "win" of the characters of "win" displayed in the message display area Ds3 are hidden. , and only the character "tsu" 817b is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize that the character "tsu" 817b has become a constituent element forming the character string "gekiatsu" in the character presentation from the constituent element of the message.
The display position of the character 813 in the character effect differs depending on the set display variation pattern, and is displayed at various positions in the main display area Dm. Specifically, in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example, a plurality of display data tables for character presentation are provided, and the variation pattern type included in the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is A display data table for one character effect is set according to . This display data table for character presentation is associated with an address that expresses the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time. The drawing content defines drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the character 813, such as the display position of the character 813, the color and size of the effect surrounding the character 813, and display data for character production. Different drawing information is defined for each table. With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to predict where the character 813 will be displayed, and the enjoyment of searching for the character 813 displayed in the main display area Dm can be provided.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the thirty-third control example, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification of the thirty-third control example, displays the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a plurality of ways. In this configuration, the images displayed on the display layer are combined and displayed. As for the display layers, the reserved pattern layer ry1 is on the forefront side (on the player's line of sight), followed by the first effect layer ry2a, the second effect layer ry2b, the third effect layer ry2c, the special pattern layer ry3, and the background layer ry4. It is configured to be arranged in the order of
Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), characters (character 1, character 2, . Layers are formed. As for the portion where the display images overlap, the display image displayed in the front layer (layer) is preferentially visible.

In the reserved pattern layer ry1, there are mainly held patterns hr0 during execution in the sub-display area Ds, reserved patterns displayed in the standby reserved pattern display area Ds2, and character images of "winning" displayed in the message display area Ds3. is drawn.
A character 816 and an image of a character 813 are displayed on the first rendering layer ry2a. The second effect layer ry2b displays an image of the character "ki" 815, the third effect layer ry2c displays an image of the character "ge" 814, and the background layer ry4 displays a background image. be done.
In this way, the images of the characters 814 to 816 and 817b, which are the constituent elements of the character presentation, are displayed in different display layers, respectively, thereby creating a three-dimensional presentation with depth, giving the player a realistic presentation. can provide.
Note that the display layer for drawing the character 813 in the character presentation is defined by the type of display data table for character presentation. For example, when the effect surrounding the character 813 is blue (that is, when it is in a mode suggesting that the probability of winning the jackpot is relatively low (for example, 5%)), the importance of the game information provided to the player is is low, and it is better to display other advance notice effects preferentially, so the character 813 is drawn on the third effect layer ry2c, which is arranged on the rearmost side among the effect layers. On the other hand, when the effect surrounding the character 813 is gold (that is, when it is in a mode suggesting that the probability of winning the jackpot is relatively high (for example, 60%)), the importance of the game information provided to the player is The character 813 is drawn on the first effect layer ry2a, which is arranged on the frontmost side among the effect layers, because it is preferable to display it preferentially over the other notice effects.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game information, which is highly important for the player, from being hidden by being overlapped with other advance notice effects. Since the display position of 813 is not fixed, for example, the character 813 surrounded by a gold effect is one of the constituent elements of the character string "gekiatsu" (the characters "ge", "ki", and "a") in the character presentation. , character 815 is displayed at the display position, the character 813 and the character 815, which is a constituent element of the character effect, are displayed overlapping each other. . In this case, the character 813 is drawn on the first effect layer ry2a, and the character "ki" 815 is drawn on the second effect layer ry2b. The character 813 displayed is preferentially displayed. Therefore, a part of the character 815 (the part overlapping the character 813) is hidden from the player by the display of the character 813, and the character string "gekiatsu" is formed. It is difficult to understand whether or not the character "ki" 815 is displayed from the screen, and there is a possibility that the effect of the character effect is lowered. It should be noted that, when the character effect is executed, it suggests that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is extremely high (for example, 80%), and is the notice effect with the highest importance of the game information to be provided to the player.
Therefore, in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example, it is determined whether or not the character rendering is being executed at the timing when the characters (for example, the character “ki” 815) constituting the character rendering are drawn on the display layer. If it is determined and overlaps with the effect execution period of the character effect, the display layer for drawing the character "ki" 815 can be changed from the second effect layer ry2b to the reserved pattern layer ry1. By configuring in this way, since the reserved pattern layer ry1 is the display layer arranged on the frontmost side (on the player's line of sight) among the display layers, the characters drawn on the first effect layer ry2a The character “ki” 815 is displayed on the front side of the character 813 , so that the player can easily visually recognize the character “ki” 815 without changing the display position of the first effect layer 813 .
Control for executing the above-described character rendering will be described below. First, the contents of the character effect display data table of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a character effect display data table; The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.
The drawing content defines the position where each character in the character rendering is to be displayed and information indicating the display layer to be drawn. In the character effect display data table, drawing contents are defined for character pointer values. The character pointer value "0" defines Start data indicating the start of the character presentation. The character pointer value “1000” defines the drawing instruction of the character “ki” 815 and the information indicating the display layer to be drawn. The character pointer value "1500" defines the drawing instruction of the character 814 of "ge" and the information indicating the display layer to be drawn. The character pointer value "2000" defines the drawing instruction of the character "A" 816 and the information indicating the display layer to be drawn. The character pointer value "2500" defines a drawing instruction to hide the "win" character 817a and the "zo" character 817c displayed in the message display area Ds3, and information indicating the display layer for drawing. . The character pointer value "5000" defines END data indicating the end of the character presentation. Thus, the display control device 114 determines that the character effect has ended.

In the third modified example of the thirty-third control example, the character string "gekiatsu" is always formed when the character effect is executed, but the character string "gekiatsu" is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide a pattern (so-called ghost pattern) in which the character presentation ends without the formation of the .
In addition, in the third modification of the thirty-third control example, the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed in the character rendering, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other character strings may be formed. , a pattern may be formed instead of a character string.
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modification of the thirty-third control example is different from the control processing of the display control device 114 in the second modification of the thirty-third control example. Display setting processing (S6351) is executed instead of processing, character effect processing (S7224) is executed instead of character effect processing, character effect executing processing (S7552) is executed instead of character effect executing processing (S7552). The difference is that Other processing is the same.
First, the display setting process (S6351) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the display setting process (S6351). The display setting process (S6351) in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example replaces the character effect process (S7223) with respect to the display setting process in the second modified example of the thirty-third control example. The difference is that (S7224) is executed. Other processing is the same.

Next, the character rendering process (S7224) executed within the display setting process (S6351) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example will be described.
In the character effect processing (S7224), first, it is determined whether or not the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7551). If it is determined that the character effect in-execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7551: Yes), the character effect in-execution process (S7552) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the character rendering in-execution process (S7552) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S7551, if it is determined that the character effect execution flag 233xb is not set to ON (S7551: No), it is determined whether it is the character effect executable period (S7553). If it is determined that it is not the character effect executable period (S7553: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S7553 that it is the character effect executable period, the value of the display effect counter CS3 is acquired (S7554). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter CS3 acquired in the process of S7554 is the character effect execution value (S7555). If it is determined that the acquired value of the display effect counter CS3 is not the execution value (S7555: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S7555, when it is determined that the acquired value of the display effect counter CS3 is the character effect execution value (S7555: Yes), the character effect executing flag 223xc is set to ON (S7556), A character effect data table is set (S7557), and this process ends.
Next, a description will be given of the processing during character presentation execution (S7552) executed within the character presentation processing (S7224) in the third modification of the thirty-third control example. In the character rendering in-execution process (S7552), first, 1 is added to the character pointer (S7651). Next, it is determined whether or not the drawing contents of the address indicated by the character pointer after addition are END data (S7654). If it is determined that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after the addition is END data (S7654: Yes), the value of the character pointer is initialized (S7652), and the character effect execution flag 233xb is turned off. (S7653), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S7654, if it is determined that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after addition is not END data (S7654: No), the address indicated by the character pointer in the character display data table buffer is acquired (S7655), and it is determined whether the acquired data of the content of drawing is the data of the content of drawing indicating the character "ki" (S7656).

In the processing of S7656, if it is determined that the acquired drawing content data is the drawing content data indicating the character “ki” (S7656: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed. (S7657). When it is determined that the advance notice effect is being executed (S7657: Yes), the display layer is changed to the reserved symbol layer ry1 (S7658), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S7657, when it is determined that the advance notice effect is not being executed (S7657: No), the process of S7658 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the processing of S7656, if it is determined that the acquired drawing content data is not the drawing content data of the character “ki” (S7656: No), the above-described S7657 processing is skipped, and the display layer is changed to the reserved pattern layer ry1 (S7658), and the process is terminated.
As described above, in the third modified example of the thirty-third control example, different characters are drawn in a plurality of effect layers, and all the effect layers are superimposed and displayed to create characters with a sense of depth. It is configured so that the production can be displayed.
In addition, when the rendering period of the character rendering and other advance notice rendering overlaps and there is a risk that the constituent elements (characters) of the character rendering may be hidden by the other notice rendering, a display that renders the constituent elements (characters) of the character rendering. By switching the layer to the display layer (reserved pattern layer ry1) arranged in the foreground, it is configured to be displayed on the front side rather than other notice effects.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to solve the problem that the character presentation is hidden by other advance notice presentation and the character presentation is not executed from the player's point of view.
In the third modified example of the thirty-third control example, when the character effect and the character effect effect periods overlap, the character effect is hidden by the character effect by switching the drawing of the character effect to the display layer arranged on the front side. However, a part of the character presentation may be hidden by the character presentation, and an presentation may be executed in which the content of the game information provided by the character presentation is varied. Specifically, the character 813 is displayed so as to hide the part where "Geki" is displayed among the characters "Gekiatsu" displayed by the character presentation, and the jackpot is won more than when "Gekiatsu" is displayed. You may perform the production|presentation which displays the character "hot" which ranks down expectation. In this case, for example, it is preferable to execute an effect that encourages the change of the display position of the character 813 or the switching of the display layer. By configuring in this way, when the character 813 does not overlap the character presentation or is displayed on the back side of the character presentation, the character "Atsu" is promoted to the character "Gekiatsu". It is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the character 813, thereby improving the interest in the game.
<34th control example>
Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. There is a pachinko machine 10 for playing games.
In addition, by making it easier to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time when the result of the special symbol lottery is a win than when the result is a loss, the special symbol lottery can be adjusted according to the length of the special symbol variation during execution. There is a pachinko machine 10 capable of allowing a player to predict the result of a special symbol lottery corresponding to a special symbol variation being executed before the variation is stopped and displayed.

Further, even during a period in which the same game state continues, a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game. In some cases, a player who has been playing the game for a long time in the same game state can play the game without getting tired of it. Specifically, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, every time the special symbol variation is executed 100 times, the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern is switched. There is a configuration in which a variation pattern (variation time) can be set.
According to the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, even if the same game state continues for a long time, a completely different variation pattern can be set according to the number of executions of the special symbol variation. Therefore, it was possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game, but as the specified content (variation pattern selection scenario) for switching the variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol variation is executed, a huge amount of Therefore, it is necessary to define data corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations, which may increase the processing load of the main controller 110 .
Also, if the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to are completely associated, the player will easily predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. , It is desirable to diversify the combination of the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to, and to make it difficult for the player to predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. When such a configuration is used, there is a problem that the specified contents of the variation pattern selection scenario become more diversified and the processing load of the main controller 110 is further increased.
On the other hand, in the thirty-fourth control example, the same game state is managed by the state table whose minimum unit is the range in which the referenced variation pattern table is the same. Specifically, for the same game state, a plurality of state tables with different reference variation pattern tables are provided, and when the transition condition in each state table is satisfied, it is configured to shift to a different state table. is doing.

By configuring in this way, since there is no need to measure the number of special symbol variations after the last big winning game is finished, there is an effect that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 970 to 978. FIG. In the thirty-fourth control example, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partly different from those in the twenty-ninth control example. Other configurations are the same, so description thereof is omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 970, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 970 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 970, in the thirty-fourth control example, a variation pattern selection table 202ha is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202d for the twenty-ninth control example described above, and a state transition table 202hb and a jackpot transition are provided. The difference is that a setting table 202hc is added.
Here, with reference to FIG. 972, the variation pattern selection table 202ha will be described. FIG. 972(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202ha. As shown in Figure 972 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202ha includes three variation pattern tables that are referred to when the normal state is set, and three that are referred to when the time saving state is set. Two variation pattern tables are defined, and different variation pattern tables are read according to the type of set status (ST).

The normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when ST1 is set as the state status. "ST1" is a state status set when the pachinko machine 10 executes initialization processing or after the rush period ends, and is a state that continues until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times.
Here, with reference to FIG. 972(b), the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 will be described. FIG. 972(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1. As shown in FIG. 972(b), the content described in the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is the second special symbol lottery for the normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the 29th control example described above. The difference is that the content of the variation pattern to be selected is different in the case of the other than that, and the other points are the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
As described above, the state in which the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is referenced is set after the rush period ends (after the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state ends). Therefore, the second special symbol variation whose variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is the second special symbol variation that cannot occur when the normal game is executed. becomes. Therefore, by defining a variation pattern so that a long variation with a variation time of 100 seconds is executed, an inappropriate game (a right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery during the normal state) is executed. The progress of the game can be delayed with respect to the player who is playing.
In addition, when a determination means capable of determining that the second special symbol variation is executed in a state where the state status "ST1" is set is provided, and the determination means determines that the second special symbol variation is performed. In addition, notification means capable of informing the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that a fraudulent game has been executed may be provided.

The normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST2 is set as the state status. "ST2" is a state status that is set when the transition condition of "ST1" is satisfied, and is a state that continues until the special symbol variation is executed 80 times.
Here, the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 will be described with reference to FIG. 973(a). FIG. 973(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2. As shown in FIG. 973(a), the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 is different from the above-described normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 (see FIG. 972(b)) as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. The difference is that it is defined so that "Normal Reach" is not selected, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
As described above, the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 are different from the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 in the type of variation pattern that can be selected. Based on the variation pattern of symbol variation, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set state status.
In addition, even if the same game state is set, the selection contents of the variation pattern can be changed according to the set state status, so that the game can be played for a long time in the same game state. It is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game from getting tired of the game early. Specifically, when "ST2" is set as the state status than when "ST1" is set, it is configured so that the variation pattern corresponding to super reach is more likely to be selected. there is

The normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST3 is set as the state status. "ST3" is a state status set when the transition condition is established in a state in which the state status "ST6" corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation is executed once. It is a state that continues until
Here, with reference to FIG. 973(b), the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 will be described. FIG. 973(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3. As shown in FIG. 973(b), the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 selects a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds regardless of the special symbol type and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Configure. This normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 is usually referred to when executing the second special symbol variation in the normal state during the rush period (the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state). It is a thing.
The variation pattern 1 table for time saving 202ha4 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST4 is set as the state status. "ST4" is a state status that is set after the time-saving jackpots (jackpots A, C, and D) are completed. In other words, it is a state status corresponding to at least the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state.
Here, with reference to FIG. 974(a), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 1 table 202ha4 will be described. FIG. 974(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 1 table 202ha4. As shown in FIG. 974(a), the time saving variation pattern 1 table 202ha4 has the same contents as the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 809(a)) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. .

The variation pattern 2 table for time saving 202ha5 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST5 is set as the state status. "ST5" is a state status that is set when a transition condition is established in a state where "ST4" is set as the state status.
Here, with reference to FIG. 974(b), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 2 table 202ha5 will be described. FIG. 974(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 2 table 202ha5. As shown in FIG. 974(b), in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ha5, for the first special symbol variation, the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3 in the above-described 29th control example (FIG. 809(b) ), the same contents as the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 809(a)) in the twenty-ninth control example described above are defined for the second special symbol variation.
Next, the time saving variation pattern 3 table 202ha6 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST6 is set as the state status. "ST6" is a state status that is set when a transition condition is satisfied in a state where "ST5" is set as the state status.
Here, with reference to FIG. 975, the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 3 table 202ha6 will be described. FIG. 975 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 3 table 202ha6. As shown in FIG. 975, in the time saving variation pattern 3 table 202ha6, for the first special symbol variation, the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3 in the above-described 29th control example (see FIG. 809 (b)) and The same contents are specified for the second special symbol variation as the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 809(c)) in the twenty-ninth control example described above.

The state transition table 202hb is a data table in which the content of the state status set in the pachinko machine 10 is defined in advance. Here, the contents defined in the state transition table 202hb will be described with reference to FIG. 976(a). FIG. 976(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 976(a), the state transition table 202hb stores six types of state transition tables. Each state transition table defines the type of variation pattern table to be referenced, the transition condition to a different state status, and the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied, and varies depending on the progress of the game It is configured to transition to the state transition table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select various variation patterns according to the game state and the number of times of special symbol variation only by executing management regarding the transition conditions for shifting the state transition table.
The state transition 1 table 202hb1 is a state status set when the pachinko machine 10 executes initialization processing or after the rush period ends. That is, when the initialized pachinko machine 10 is started up, first, a variation pattern is selected with reference to the state transition 1 table 202hb1.
Here, the contents of the state transition 1 table 202hb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 976(b). FIG. 976(b) schematically shows the contents defined in the state transition 1 table 202hb1. As shown in Figure 976 (b), in the state transition 1 table 202hb1, the type of variation pattern table to be referred to "normal 1 (normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1)", the transition condition "special figure variation 20 times", The state status "ST2" of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied is defined.
Next, the contents of the state transition 2 table 202hb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 976(c). FIG. 976(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202hb2. As shown in FIG. 976 (c), the state transition 2 table 202hb2 includes the type of variation pattern table to be referred to "normal 2 (normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2)", the transition condition "special figure variation 80 times", The state status "ST1" of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied is defined.

Next, the contents of the state transition 3 table 202hb3 will be described with reference to FIG. 976(d). FIG. 976(d) schematically shows the contents defined in the state transition 3 table 202hb3. As shown in FIG. 976 (d), the state transition 3 table 202hb3 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "normal 3 (normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3)", the transition condition "special figure variation 1 time", The state status "ST1" of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied is defined.
Next, the contents of the state transition 4 table 202hb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 977(a). FIG. 977(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 4 table 202hb4. As shown in FIG. 977 (a), the state transition 4 table 202hb4 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "time saving 1 (time saving variation pattern 1 table 202ha4)", as a transition condition, transition condition 1 "special figure 1 fluctuation 4 times or special figure 2 fluctuation 1 time", transition condition 2 "small winning" is the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied, "ST5" when the transition condition 1 is satisfied, transition condition If 2 is established, "ST3" is defined.
Next, the contents of the state transition 5 table 202hb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 977(b). FIG. 977(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 5 table 202hb5. As shown in FIG. 977(b), the state transition 5 table 202hb5 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "time saving 2 (time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ha5)", as a transition condition, transition condition 1 "special figure 1 fluctuation 1 time or special figure 2 fluctuation 1 time", transition condition 2 "small winning" is the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied, "ST6" when the transition condition 1 is satisfied, transition condition If 2 is established, "ST3" is defined.
Next, the contents of the state transition table 202hb6 will be described with reference to FIG. 977(c). FIG. 977(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition table 202hb6. As shown in FIG. 977 (c), the state transition table 202hb6 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "time saving 3 (time saving variation pattern 3 table 202ha6)", as the transition condition, transition condition 1 "special figure 1 When the transition condition 1 is satisfied, "ST3" is defined as the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied.

The jackpot transition setting table 202hc is a data table that stores the types of state statuses set after the jackpot game ends, and is referenced when the jackpot game ends, and is a state corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed. A status (ST1 or ST4) is set.
Here, with reference to FIG. 978, the contents defined in the jackpot transition setting table 202hc will be described. FIG. 978 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot transition setting table 202hc. As shown in FIG. 978, the jackpot transfer setting table 202hc defines the state status (transfer destination ST) of the transfer destination corresponding to the jackpot type. Specifically, for "jackets A, C, D" in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, "ST4", which is the first state status in the time saving state, is defined as the transition destination ST, "ST1", which is the first state status in the normal state, is stipulated as the shift destination ST for the "jackpot B" in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 971 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 971, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-fourth control example differs from the RAM 203 in the twenty-ninth control example in that a state status 203ha and a specified number of times counter 203hb are added. are otherwise identical.
The state status 203ha is a storage area for storing the type of the state transition table currently being referred to among various state transition tables defined in the state transition table 202hb.

The specified number of times counter 203hb is a counter for measuring the number of times (the number of special symbol fluctuations in the normal state) until the transition condition for shifting the state transition table is satisfied.
<Regarding control processing in the thirty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 979 to 981, among the contents of the control processing in the thirty-fourth control example, points that differ from the above-described twenty-ninth control example will be described. In the thirty-fourth control example, the content of the control process for selecting the variation pattern for the special symbol variation is different from the above-described twenty-ninth control example.
First, with reference to FIG. 979, the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S184) will be described. FIG. 979 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S184). This special symbol variation process (S184) is a special symbol variation pattern selection process (S290) instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) in the special symbol variation process (S104) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. , and after finishing the time saving update process (S224), the difference is that the change number of times subtraction process (S291) is performed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 980, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S290) will be described. FIG. 980 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S290). As shown in FIG. 980, when the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S290) is executed, the same S401 to S403 processes as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) of the twenty-ninth control example described above are executed, After that, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current state status is read out (S484), and the processes of S405 to S410 are executed.

Next, the processing contents of the variation count subtraction processing (S291) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 981 is a flow chart showing the details of the change number subtraction process (S291). In this change number subtraction process (S291), a process for updating (subtracting) various elements used for determining whether or not the state status transition condition is satisfied is executed.
When the variation count subtraction process (S291) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the specified number counter 203hb is greater than 0 (S681). is subtracted by 1 (S682), and it is determined whether the status transition condition is met (S683). In the process of S683, when it is determined that the status transition condition is satisfied (S683: Yes), the state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202hb, the corresponding state command is set (S684), and the state transition after transition is performed. The transition condition according to the table is set to the specified number counter 203hb, the special figure 2 counter 203q, the time saving counter 203h, and the small hit counter 203r (S685), and the process is terminated. By configuring in this way, the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the state transition table of the transition destination from the special symbol variation to be executed next.
<Thirty-fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 982 to 988. FIG. In the twenty-ninth control example described above, when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern selection table 202b is referred to, and the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined. configured to run. When configured in this way, in order to determine variation patterns for various variation times, it is necessary to predefine variation patterns corresponding to various variation times in the variation pattern selection table 202b, and the types of variation patterns are increased. There is a problem that the capacity of the storage area for storing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b increases as the number of the variation pattern selection table 202b increases.
In contrast, in the thirty-fifth control example, the first element (main fluctuation time) and the second element (additional fluctuation time) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) can be determined independently. The total fluctuation time calculated by the summing process of summing the first element and the second element can be determined as the fluctuation pattern. By configuring in this way, more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time after summation) than the number of data of predetermined fluctuation patterns (part of fluctuation patterns) are determined by combining multiple elements. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the capacity of the storage area for storing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b increases when the types of variation patterns are increased. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fifth control example, the method of storing the determined variation pattern differs depending on whether the length of the variation time indicated by the total variation time is longer than or shorter than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds). It is configured so that
Specifically, a variable time counter for storing the length of variable time is configured with a 2-byte capacity, and a value up to 65536 can be set. The value of the variable time counter 203ib can be updated (decremented) by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 815) of the main controller 110, which is executed in units of 2 milliseconds. That is, when the length of the variable time indicated by the total variable time is shorter than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds), the value corresponding to the variable time can be stored by setting the value of the variable time counter 203ib. Configure.
On the other hand, when the length of the variable time indicated by the total variable time is longer than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds), the overflow flag 203ia for indicating that the variable time counter 203ib overflows the settable value. is turned on, and a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds) from the total variable time is set in the variable time counter 203ib. Then, when the value of the variable time counter 203ib becomes 0, it is determined whether the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON. is configured to reset the
By configuring in this way, assuming that the length of the variable time indicated by the total variable time is longer than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds), the variable time counter 203ib is configured with a 3-byte capacity. Since it is no longer necessary, the processing capacity for managing variable time can be reduced.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth control example, the overflow flag 203ia is provided using the free space (1 bit of boredom) of the control data used in other processing. No data capacity is used.
For example, the overflow flag 203ia may be provided by using an area that is not used when subtracting the variable time from the 2-byte data capacity used by the variable time counter 203ib.
Further, in this control example, the value of the variable time counter 203ib is configured to be updated by timer interrupt processing (every 2 milliseconds) periodically executed by the main controller 110 . Here, in the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to execute loop processing at short timings in order to detect winning of game balls and to output set commands to other control devices. It is configured so that timer interrupt processing is executed in units of seconds.
Therefore, for example, by executing loop processing so as to update the value of the variable time counter 203ib in units of, for example, one second, a maximum variable time of 65536 seconds can be obtained using a data capacity of 2 bytes. It becomes measurable. However, if the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 is set to 1 second in correspondence with the update interval of the variable time counter 203ia, the control processing related to other games will be greatly affected. A problem arises. On the other hand, while the timer interrupt processing is executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds, the update processing of the variable time counter 203ia is executed not at intervals of 2 milliseconds but at intervals equal to that (for example, at intervals of 20 milliseconds). Then, using a data capacity of 2 bytes, it is possible to measure a fluctuation time of 65536×20 milliseconds at maximum. However, when such a configuration is used, dedicated processing is required to update the variable time counter 203ia when the timer interrupt processing has been executed a predetermined number of times (10 times). Therefore, there is a problem that the processing load of the main controller 110 increases as a whole process for managing the variable time. On the other hand, in the thirty-fifth control example, when the variable time is determined to be larger than the variable time that can be managed with the data capacity of 2 bytes, the process of setting the overflow flag 203ib to ON is executed. It is good, and the processing capacity for managing variable time can be reduced.

Also, when outputting information about the fluctuation time as a command, 2-byte data and 1-bit information (“0”=off, “1”=on) for indicating the setting information of the overflow flag 203ib are output. It is only necessary to output, and the amount of data to be output as a command (the number of bits included in the data) can be reduced compared to, for example, the case where variable time is managed using 3-byte data.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-fifth control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 982 to 985, the electrical configuration in the thirty-fifth control example will be described. The thirty-fifth control example differs from the above-described twenty-ninth control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed, and the rest is the same. . A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
FIG. 982(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202ia. As shown in Figure 982 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202ia includes a normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 for selecting the main fluctuation time in the normal state, and a time saving for selecting the main fluctuation time in the time saving state A main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 and a normal addition fluctuation pattern table 202ia3 for selecting the addition fluctuation time in the normal state are provided. In addition, in the 35th control example, the game state (normal state) in which the variation time is determined using the main variation time and the addition variation time, and the game state (shortening state) in which the variation time is determined only by the main variation time ) and are configurable. Therefore, the data table for selecting the addition fluctuation time is not provided for the time saving state.
In addition, without being limited to this, even in the time saving state, the variable time may be configured to be determined using the main variable time and the additional variable time. Further, the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state may be configured to be determined using only the normal addition fluctuation pattern table 202ia3 for selecting the addition fluctuation time in the normal state.

Here, the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 will be described with reference to FIG. 982(b). FIG. 982(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 982 (b), the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 has the same fluctuation pattern as the normal fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha1 (see FIG. 972 (b)) in the 34th control example described above. A variable time value (a value set in the variable time counter 203ib) corresponding to the specified variation pattern (variation time) is specified.
Next, the time saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 will be described with reference to FIG. 983(a). FIG. 983(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 983 (a), the main fluctuation pattern table for time saving 202ia2, the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha4 (see FIG. 974 (a)) in the 34th control example described above is defined. A variable time value (a value set in the variable time counter 203ib) corresponding to the specified variation pattern (variation time) is specified.
Next, the normal addition fluctuation pattern table 202ia3 will be described with reference to FIG. 983(b). FIG. 983(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal addition fluctuation pattern table 202ia3. As shown in FIG. 983(b), in the normal addition variation pattern table 202ia3, the addition variation time corresponding to the type of effect to be executed (corresponding effect) is the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (special symbol Lottery result) is defined according to the acquired second variation type counter CS11. 20-second addition variation time, 30-second addition variation time corresponding to "pseudo-run 3 times", and 40-second addition variation time corresponding to "pseudo-run 4 times" can be selected.
By configuring in this way, since the variable time corresponding to the corresponding performance to be executed can be added to the main variable time, the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, in this 35th control example, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (winning probability 1/65536), the addition fluctuation time is not selected. That is, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a special special effect (for example, freeze effect) is executed as the main variation time, and immediately after the special symbol variation starts, a small It is configured so as to notify the player that he or she has won a prize. In this way, when a variation pattern that enables the player to quickly determine the result of the special symbol lottery is selected as the main variation time, the addition variation time is not determined. It is possible to prevent a useless effect (for example, a pseudo-continuation) from being executed and the effect of the effect from deteriorating.

Next, with reference to FIG. 984, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 984 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 984, this thirty-fifth control example differs from the above-described twenty-ninth control example in that an overflow flag 203ia and a variable time counter 203ib are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
The overflow flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that the value indicating the total variable time obtained by summing the main variable time and the additional variable time exceeds the upper limit value (65536) that can be set in the variable time counter 203ib. is set to ON when the upper limit (65536) is exceeded (see S404a in FIG. 987). When it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 203ib has become 1 (S502a in FIG. 988: Yes), reference is made (see S503a in FIG. 988), and it is determined that the variable time counter 203ib is set to 65536. is set to OFF (see S504a in FIG. 988).
The fluctuation time counter 203ib is a counter for indicating the fluctuation time of the determined special symbol fluctuation, and a value corresponding to the total fluctuation time obtained by summing the main fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time is set (Fig. 987 (see S405a and S409a of ). Then, while the special symbol variation is being executed, it is subtracted every 2 milliseconds (S501a in FIG. 988). Then, when the value indicated by the variation time counter 203ib becomes 0, processing for stopping and displaying the special symbol variation is executed.
As shown in FIG. 985, this variable time counter 203ib is a 2-byte (16-bit) data area, and binary information can be written to each bit. In other words, 65536 (2 to the 16th power) types of information from "0000000000000000" to "1111111111111111" can be written into the variable time counter 203ib.

<Regarding control processing in the thirty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 986 to 988, among the control processing in the thirty-fifth control example, the content of the control processing different from that in the twenty-ninth control example described above will be described. In the thirty-fifth control example, as described above, the contents of the processing for determining the variation time of the special symbol variation and the processing for managing the determined variation time are different. Specifically, the difference is that a special symbol variation process (S104a) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104). Other processing contents are the same, and the description thereof is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 986, the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104a) will be described. FIG. 986 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104a). As shown in FIG. 986, the special symbol variation process (S104a) replaces the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) with the special symbol variation process (S104) described above, and special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210a ) is executed, and when it is determined that the variable time of the special symbol has not passed (S215: No), the variable time update process (S216a) is executed. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
Here, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S210a) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 987 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S210a). In this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210a), as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, a process of determining the main variation time as the first element of the variation time and the additional variation time as the second element of the variation time; A process of calculating a total variable time by summing the calculated main variable time and the added variable time, and a process of storing the variable time according to the length of the total variable time are executed.
Specifically, when the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210a) is executed, the same S401 to S404 processes as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) of the twenty-ninth control example described above are executed, and then, Select the fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation time) and addition time (addition fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of each fluctuation type counter from the read table (the value 401a of the SW effective time counter 223q), the main fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time ( addition time) are summed up (S402a).

Then, it is determined whether or not the total value for indicating the sum total fluctuation time is greater than 65536 (S403a), and if it is determined to be greater (S403a: Yes), the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON (S404a). , the value obtained by subtracting 65536 from the total value is stored (set) in the variable time counter 203ib (S405a), and then the same processing of S406 to S408 as in the twenty-ninth control example is executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403a that the total value is not greater than 65536 (S403a: No), the total value is stored (set) in the fluctuation time counter 203ib as it is, and the process proceeds to S406.
Next, with reference to FIG. 988, the process contents of the variable time update process (S216a) will be described. FIG. 988 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable time update process (S216a). In this variable time update process (S216a), a process for updating the variable time is executed.
When the variable time update process (S216a) is executed, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable time counter 203ib (S501a), and it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter 203ib after the subtraction is 1 (S502a). If it is determined by the process of S502a that the value of the variable time counter 203ib is 1 (S502a: Yes), then it is determined whether the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON (S503a). (S503a: Yes), the overflow flag 203ia is set to OFF (S504a), the value of the variable time counter 203ib is set to 65536 (S505a), and the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S506a), and the process ends.

Further, when it is determined in the processing of S502a that the value of the variable time counter 203ib is not 1 (S502a: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S503a that the overflow flag 203ia is not set to ON (S503a : No) skips the processes of S504a and S505a and proceeds to the process of S506a.
<Thirty-sixth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 989 to 995. FIG. In each control example described above, by executing a variable performance using the third symbol as a variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation starts and ends for the player. During the period until (special symbol fluctuation period), it was configured so as not to get bored with the game. In particular, in the thirty-second control example described above, the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the variable performance using the decorative movable accessory provided near the third pattern display device 81 A technique was used that enhanced the production effect by executing
However, in any of the control examples, since the fixed display mode is used as the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player who is playing the game for a long time There is a problem that it is easy to get bored with the game.
On the other hand, in the thirty-sixth control example, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is changed in a complicated manner, so that the player does not get tired of the game early. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the third pattern is configured by combining a number pattern and a box pattern, and each pattern is configured to be capable of determining the effect mode of the variable effect.

By configuring in this manner, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a combination of the presentation mode of the number pattern and the presentation mode of the box pattern. Therefore, it is possible to create a more complicated production mode of the third symbol.
<Regarding the effect contents in the 36th control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 989 and 990, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-sixth control example, a characteristic effect content different from that of the twenty-ninth control example described above will be described. do. FIG. 989(a) is a diagram showing the display screen during the third symbol variation.
As shown in FIG. 989(a), in the thirty-sixth control example, three third patterns (left third symbol Z1, middle third symbol Z2, and right third symbol Z3) are configured to be variably displayed, and when three third symbols are stopped in a specific combination (for example, a combination of the same numbers) In addition, the player can be notified that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.
As shown in FIG. 989(a), each third design is formed from a box design ZA and a number design ZB. Normally, the box design ZA and the number design ZB are the same variation mode ( It is configured to be variably displayed in a variable mode rotating from the back side to the front side). Therefore, in the variation effect of the third symbol in the normal time, as shown in FIG. 989(a), the variation such that the third symbol of one united with the box symbol ZA and the number symbol ZB is variably displayed. A performance is performed.

However, in the thirty-sixth control example, since the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB are configured to be able to execute the variation effect with different variation patterns, the variation effect shown in FIG. The third pattern can be variably displayed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 989(b) and FIG. 990, an effect mode of the variable effect of the third symbol that can be executed in the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 989(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the delayed effect is started. As shown in FIG. 989(b), when the delay effect is started, only the box patterns ZA1 to ZA3 are variably displayed first while the number patterns ZB1 to ZB3 are stopped and displayed.
After that, when 0.2 seconds have passed, the number symbols ZB1 to ZB3 which have been stopped and displayed start to be variably displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the mode at the start of variation of the third symbol different from the normal time, so that it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the delay effect has been executed at the time when each number pattern ZB starts to be variably displayed, the variable display of the third pattern is started for the player. It is possible to make it easier for the user to pay attention to the timing of
Next, the development effect will be described with reference to FIG. 990(a). FIG. 990(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the development effect. In the development effect, the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed using only the specific third symbol (Z2) among the three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) variably displayed on the activated line L1. It is a variable performance.

Specifically, it is a variation pattern of 60 seconds, and is an effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and until 56 seconds have passed since the start of the variation, three A variable effect using the third symbols (Z1 to Z3) is executed. Then, after the three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) are stopped and displayed in a combination (for example, "2.5.7") indicating a winning result, the left third symbol Z1 and the right third symbol Z3 A display mode is displayed in which only the middle third symbol Z2 is positioned on the activated line L1 after moving from the activated line L1, and then constitutes a part of the middle third symbol Z2 as shown in FIG. The left side ZAa and the right side ZAb are displayed. 5” are used, three “5”s are stop-displayed on the activated line L1, and a combination indicating a jackpot winning is displayed.
By configuring in this way, even when the display mode using the three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) is displaced and the stop display is made in the display mode indicating winning, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be left. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable performance until the end. In the diagram shown in FIG. 990(a), the left third pattern Z1 and the right third pattern Z3 moved from the effective line L1 are displayed in the corners of the main display area Dm, but this is not the only option. It may be omitted or hidden.
Next, with reference to FIG. 990(b), the effect contents of the horizontal rotation effect will be described. FIG. 990(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the horizontal rotation effect.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 991 and 992, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 991 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 991, the thirty-sixth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the twenty-ninth control example described above in that a chance mode selection table 222ja is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The chance mode selection table 222ja is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation time of 60 seconds is received from the main controller 110. (See S4503a in FIG. 994). In the chance mode selection table 222ja, an additional performance mode is defined for each of the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB forming the third pattern, and the chance mode selection table 222ja is referred to for the additional performance. When the mode is determined, different display commands are determined for the box design ZA and the number design ZB.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 992, when the success/failure determination is “hit” and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the mode type of the additional effect mode "Delay" is defined as the range of "50 to 69", "development" is defined as the mode type of the additional effect mode for the range of "70 to 74", "Reversal" is specified as the mode type of the additional effect mode, "horizontal rotation" is specified as the mode type of the additional effect mode for the range of "75 to 79", and "80 to 99". In the range of , the additional effect mode "none" is defined.
Also, for the case where the pass/fail judgment is "out" and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 29", "delay" is defined as the mode type of the additional effect mode, For the range of "30 to 32", "reversal" is defined as the mode type of the additional effect mode, and for the range of "33, 34", "horizontal rotation" is defined as the mode type of the additional effect mode. ” is defined, and the additional effect mode “none” is defined for the range of “35 to 99”.
<Regarding control processing in the thirty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 993 to 995, among the control processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-sixth control example, the processing contents of the control process different from the above-described twenty-ninth control example will be described. . In the thirty-sixth control example, part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and part of the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are performed in contrast to the above-described twenty-ninth control example. , and are otherwise the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

Specifically, instead of the variable effect setting process (S4304) as the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the variable effect setting process (S4304a) is executed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 The difference is that the variation pattern command process (S6405a) is performed instead of the variation pattern command process (S6405) as the control process to be executed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 993, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304a) will be described. FIG. 993 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304a). As shown in FIG. 993, the variable effect setting process (S4304a) is different from the above-described variable effect setting process (S4304) in that the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol change executed in the normal state The processing for determining the mode of presentation is made different.
Specifically, the processing of S4401 to S4408, which is the same as the variable effect setting process (S4304) described above, is executed, and in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the fixed effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4404: Yes ), or when the process of S4408 is finished, the normal effect setting process is executed (S4401a), and this process is finished.
Here, with reference to FIG. 994, the processing contents of the normal effect setting processing (S4401a) will be described. FIG. 994 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of normal effect setting processing (S4401a). In this normal effect setting process (S4401a), the process for determining the chance effect mode is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation in the normal state.

When the normal effect setting process (S4401a) is executed, first, the effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted change pattern (S4501a), and the determined effect mode is the chance effect. It is determined whether it is a mode (S4502a). In the thirty-sixth control example, when a variation pattern command for indicating a variation pattern (super reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds as a variation pattern is output from the main controller 110, it is determined to be the chance presentation mode.
In the processing of S4502a, when it is determined that the chance effect mode is selected (S4502a: Yes), the chance mode selection table 222ja is referred to determine the effect mode (S4503a), and then the determined effect mode (additional effect mode) determines whether it is a number pattern delay (delay) (S4504a), and when it is determined that it is a number pattern delay (delay) (S4504a: Yes), the delay time corresponding to the determined production mode ( 0.2 seconds) is set (S4505a), and the process ends.
Also, in the processing of S4504a, if it is determined that there is no number pattern delay (delay) (S4504a: No), next, whether the determined effect mode (additional effect mode) is box symbol development (development) is determined (S4506a), and if it is determined that it is a box design development (development) (S4506a: Yes), a display composite design command is set according to the determined effect mode (S4507a), and this process is terminated do.
In the processing of S4506a, if it is determined that the determined effect mode (additional effect mode) is not the box pattern expansion (development) (S4506a: No), the number pattern ZB, A display command for showing the effect mode of the box pattern ZA is set (S4508a), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 995, the processing contents of the variation pattern command processing (S6405a) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 995 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variation pattern command processing (S6405a). In this variation pattern command process (S6405a), the display command set in the chance production mode is changed to the variation pattern command process (S6405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the twenty-ninth control example described above. The difference is that when a display command is received, the information corresponding to the received display command is set in the display data table.
When the variation pattern command process (S6405a) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a numerical pattern delay command has been received (S6501a), and if it is determined that it has been received (S6501a: Yes), a variation display data table for numerical symbols is set with information corresponding to the delay time (S6502a). This processing makes it possible to delay the timing at which the drawing information for variably displaying the number pattern ZB is set in the display data table by the delay time (0.2 seconds). In other words, a process of shifting (delaying) the timing of setting drawing information for variably displaying the number pattern ZB without using a display command indicating a variable effect dedicated to the delayed effect and a display data table dedicated to the delayed effect is performed. Only by executing it, the delay effect shown in FIG. 989(b) can be executed.
After S6502a is completed, it is next determined whether or not a reverse rotation command has been received (S6503a). If it is determined that a reverse rotation command has been received (S6503a: Yes), it corresponds to the command received in the variation display data table regarding the box design ZA. Information is set (S6504a), and the process proceeds to S6505a.
In the processing of S6505a, it is determined whether or not a horizontal rotation command has been received (S6505a), and if it is determined that it has been received (S6505a: Yes), the variation information included in the display variation pattern command (the effect mode of the variation effect is displayed) information for causing the horizontal rotation) to be erased, and the variation information corresponding to the horizontal rotation effect is set in the variation display data table (S6506a), and S6501 to S6506, which are the same as the variation pattern command processing (S6405) of the twenty-ninth control example described above, are performed. Execute the process and terminate this process.

<Regarding the modification of the thirty-sixth control example>
Next, a modification of the thirty-sixth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 996 to 999. FIG. In the thirty-sixth control example described above, the third symbols Z1 to Z3 displayed corresponding to the special symbols are formed by a box symbol ZA imitating a box and a number symbol ZB imitating a number. , and number patterns ZB, different variation patterns can be determined, variations in the variation pattern (performance mode) of the third pattern formed by combining the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB can be realized. was rich.
However, in the thirty-sixth control example described above, the degree of freedom of the third symbol variation pattern (performance aspect) is too high, and the player is asked to confirm the variation state of the third symbol, thereby causing a stop display. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to predict the third symbol to be displayed.
On the other hand, in this modified example, the variation mode of the box pattern ZA and the variation mode of the number pattern ZB are related to each other. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the type of the third symbol to be stop-displayed during the variable display of the third symbol.
This modification differs from the thirty-sixth control example described above in that the contents of the box design ZA and the number design ZB are different, and that the contents of the effect to be executed are different. is. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 996, the box design ZA used in this modified example will be described. FIG. 996 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the expansion of the box design ZA. As shown in FIG. 996, the box design ZA is formed in a hexahedral dice shape, and each surface (first surface ZAa, second surface ZAb, third surface ZAc, fourth surface ZAd, fifth surface ZAe, Each of the sixth planes ZAf) is configured to be displayable on the display plane of the third pattern display device 81 .
Here, in this modified example, the operation pattern of the rotation operation of the box pattern ZA is defined in advance, and the display surfaces are repeated in the order of the fourth surface ZAd, the third surface ZAc, the second surface ZAb, and the first surface ZAa. A first rotation operation (main rotation operation) that is rotated and displayed, and a second rotation operation (sub-rotation operation) that rotates and displays the display surfaces repeatedly in the order of the sixth surface ZAf, the second surface ZAb, the fifth surface ZAe, and the fourth surface ZAd. a first rolling motion of switching the rotating motion of the box pattern ZA from the main rotating motion to the sub-rotating motion; and a second rolling motion of switching from the sub-rotating motion to the main rotating motion. ing.
Then, as shown in FIG. 997(a), the first number pattern row ZBA is formed on the display surface rotated and displayed by the first rotation operation, and the display surface rotated and displayed by the second rotation operation. , a second number pattern row ZBB is formed, and display or non-display of each number pattern row can be determined according to the type of rotating motion being executed. .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 997(b), only the first number pattern row ZBA is displayed during the main rotation motion, and only the second number pattern row ZBB is displayed during the sub-rotation motion. Configure.

Here, with reference to FIG. 998, the patterns of the symbol data displayed in each numerical symbol row will be described. As described above, in this modified example, the first number pattern row ZBA and the second number pattern row ZBB are formed so as to be orthogonal to the box pattern ZA, and both are configured so that the number patterns can be variably displayed. . The number pattern data displayed in each number pattern row can be determined according to the variation effect to be executed.
Specifically, four kinds of number patterns (nautical pattern D0, one pattern D1, two patterns D2, three patterns D3) are provided for the first number pattern row ZBA, and four patterns are provided for the second number pattern row ZBB. The first symbol data (see FIG. 998(a)) to which different number symbols (4 symbols D4, 5 symbols D5, 6 symbols D6, 7 symbols D7) are given, and the first number symbol row ZBA, 8 There are 4 types of number patterns (sea pattern D0, 1 pattern D1, 2 patterns D2, 3 patterns D3, 4 patterns D4, 5 patterns D5, 6 patterns D6, 7 patterns D7) for the second number pattern row ZBB. 2nd pattern data (see FIG. 998(b)) to which different types of number patterns (1 pattern D1, 3 patterns D3, 7 patterns D7, nautical pattern D0) are given, and a plurality of number pattern data including at least According to the variation effect to be executed, the number pattern data used for the current third pattern variation is determined, and the third pattern display combined with the box pattern ZA can be executed.
For example, in the third symbol in which the first symbol data is set, when the box symbol ZA performs the main rotation motion, the number symbols "Sea.1.2.3" are associated with each of the four displayable faces When the variable display marked with is executed, the main rotation movement is followed by the first rollover movement, and then the sub-rotation movement is executed, "4 .5, 6, 7" will be displayed.
By constructing in this way, during one variable effect, the third pattern can be variably displayed in a state in which each face of the box pattern ZA and the number pattern are associated with each other, so that the player is stopped and displayed. The type of the third symbol to be displayed can be easily predicted at a stage before the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the third pattern to which the second pattern data is set, the box pattern ZA is basically rotated and all the number patterns of "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. sea" are variably displayed. . In the meantime, the number patterns of "1.3.7. sea" are controlled to fluctuate in the second number pattern row ZBB corresponding to the sub-rotation operation in a non-display state. The four types of number patterns (1, 3, 7, sea) corresponding to this second number pattern ZBB are types of number patterns that are likely to be displayed when the player wins a big win advantageous to the player.
Here, with reference to FIG. 999, the effect contents of the variable effect using the second symbol data will be described. Figure 999(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a winning win during the variable effect, and Figure 999(b) shows a combination indicating a winning win. After the third symbol is stop-displayed in , a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the case where a horizontal rotation effect is executed to rotate the box symbol ZA.
A combination ( The third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the split stitch). In this state, since the special symbols are fluctuating, the variation control of the numerical symbols is continuously executed in the second numerical symbols ZBB which are not displayed.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 999(b), each third symbol is rolled over, and the second number symbol ZBB is displayed. Then, when the second number pattern row ZBB is completely displayed, that is, the box pattern ZA is displayed in a state in which the side displayed when the sub-rotation operation is performed can be viewed from the front. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed using the number symbol.

By configuring in this way, the variation time of the special symbol variation, the number symbols attached to the display surface of the box symbol ZA displayed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and the numbers to be finally stopped and displayed. Based on the type of the pattern, a production pattern for displaying the number patterns that are finally stopped and displayed only by the main rotation motion, and a production pattern for displaying the number patterns that are finally stopped and displayed by also using the sub-rotation motion, can be set, for example, in order to stop and display an arbitrary number pattern, it is possible to suppress the complicated execution of the process of changing the rotation speed of the box pattern ZA and the variable display speed of the number pattern. can be done.
<Modification of the 29th Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1000, the effect screen when the stage change effect is executed during the fixed mode will be described. FIG. 1000 is a display screen when the stage change effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game. Regarding this stage change effect, only the differences from the stage change effect (see FIG. 800) in the twenty-ninth control example described above will be explained, and the same contents will be omitted.
A jackpot game is executed in a state where the fixed mode is set, and when a stage change effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. If it changes, the guidance mode of "chance" is displayed. Here, in this modification, even if the fixed mode is set, the stage type set after the jackpot game is different from the stage type set before the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to notify the player of what to do.
With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the stage types set before and after the jackpot game, that is, the stage types displayed across the execution period of the jackpot game effect are the same or different. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the holding series will be executed after the effect result of the stage change effect (the stage type after the shutters st1 and st2 are not displayed) is displayed.

<37th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1001 to 1034. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, the game state is a normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is unlikely to be executed in a normal low probability state, and the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. It is configured to provide two types of game states, ie, a time-saving state set to a high probability state of normal patterns, and a lottery of a second special pattern is so much more advantageous than a lottery of a first special pattern. , the time-saving state is set as a game state advantageous to the player, and the normal state is set as a game state disadvantageous to the player. More specifically, in the lottery for the first special symbol, a jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/300, and a small win is substantially confirmed with a probability of 1/65536. In the lottery of special symbols, a big win is won with a probability of about 1/300, and a small win with a probability of about 1/2 is substantially determined. In other words, in the lottery for the first special symbol, the substantial jackpot probability is about 1/300, while in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is about 1/2. Further, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the game state after the big win is set to a disadvantageous normal state at a rate of 40%, while the second special symbol lottery directly wins the big win. In the case of winning, and in the case of detecting the entry of the game ball into the specific area (V gate) 650e3 as a small hit and winning the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is a game at a rate of 100%. It was configured to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to workers. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above is configured such that the game characteristics are greatly different between the disadvantageous normal state and the advantageous time-saving condition, and a sharp game characteristic can be realized.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example, a normal state as a game state disadvantageous to the player and a time-saving state as a game state advantageous to the player are provided in the twenty-ninth control. Although it is common to the example, it is different in that it is configured to provide a plurality of advantageous time-saving states with different degrees of advantage. Specifically, a first time-saving state with a high substantial jackpot probability, and a substantial jackpot probability lower than the first time-saving state and higher than the normal state (lower advantage than the first time-saving state and a second time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is higher than that in the normal state). Here, the first time-saving state is a game state that can be set as a game state after the end of the big hit, and the second time-saving state is the same as the above-described second control example, etc., and is elected to a time-saving design in a special design lottery. It is a game state that can be set when the lottery result is changed to the time saving state without going through the jackpot. Although details will be described later, in this 37th control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, at a rate of 100%, either a big hit or a small hit that substantially determines the big hit Instead of winning the lottery in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is never executed in the time saving state and the end condition of the time saving state can be established. More specifically, as a time-saving end condition that triggers the end of the time-saving state, the number of fluctuations in the sum of the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation) and the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is specified. The first end condition that is established when the number of times (any of 10 to 1000 times) is reached (the specified number of special figure fluctuations are stopped and displayed), and the special symbol indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed stopped. In addition to the second end condition that is established when the winning game is executed, the third end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game reaching a specified number of times (1 to 1000 times) is set. ing. Due to the presence of the third end condition, even if the player continues to hit to the right in the advantageous first time-saving state, there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end without the second special symbol lottery being executed even once. . In addition, in the present 37th control example, in any of the normal state, the first time saving state, and the second time saving state, when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed, it is configured to be a 100% ratio out normal symbol hit. , The selection ratio of the displacement pattern set for the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits is made different for each game state. Specifically, in the normal state, there is always a first displacement pattern in which it is extremely difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, which is an advantageous second special symbol lottery opportunity. Set, in the first time-saving state, the first displacement pattern is set at a rate of 20%, and the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball inlet 640 at a rate of 80%. Two displacement patterns are set, and in the second time saving state, the first displacement pattern is set at a rate of about 97% and the second displacement pattern is set at a rate of about 3%. Therefore, when the second displacement pattern is set in the case of a win in the lottery of the normal symbols, the lottery of the second special symbol that substantially determines the big win can be executed, so that the lottery of the normal symbols can be executed. Winning a win corresponding to the second displacement pattern is substantially synonymous with winning a jackpot.
In addition, in the thirty-seventh control example, the game ball that enters the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the lottery for the first special symbol, always passes before entering the first ball entrance 64. A central through gate 67c, which triggers the drawing of normal symbols, is arranged at a position (above the first entrance 64), and the drawing of normal symbols starts before the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the period from when it is done until the winning of the normal symbol based on the lottery of the normal symbol is completed is shorter. In other words, every time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the lottery for the normal symbol is also executed almost at the same time (immediately before the lottery for the first special symbol is executed). In addition, a right through gate 67r is separately provided at a position through which a game ball can pass when hit to the right, which triggers a normal pattern lottery. The ratio of passing through the gate 67c and the ratio of passing through the right through gate 67r of the game ball shot by hitting to the right are substantially the same. As a result, especially in the second time-saving state, it is better to execute the lottery of the normal symbols and the lottery of the first special symbols almost simultaneously by hitting the left rather than executing only the lottery of the normal symbols by hitting the right. The possibility of winning the jackpot during the time saving state increases. That is, if you hit right in the second time-saving state, you will get a big hit only when you win the second displacement pattern that wins at a rate of about 3% in the normal pattern lottery (substantially, the big win is confirmed. 2 special symbol lottery can be executed) On the other hand, when hitting left, in addition to winning the second displacement pattern in the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery Since there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with , the game can be played by hitting left in the second time-saving state. Then, as described above, when hitting left, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c always enters the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are almost simultaneously performed. Since it is executed, the substantial jackpot probability per lottery of the first special symbol increases (substantially, the probability of the first special symbol jackpot is about 1/320, and the second displacement pattern is It is possible to realize an extremely novel game property that the total probability is about 1/33, which is the probability of winning the set normal symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed, and the control processing to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 29 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twenty-ninth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1001, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1001 is a front view of the game board 13 in the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1001, the game board 13 in the thirty-seventh control example is normally located above the first ball entrance 64 in contrast to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twenty-ninth control example (see FIG. 777). The difference is that a central through gate 67c, which triggers the lottery of symbols, is arranged. As a result, a game ball that is shot left-handed and enters the first ball entrance 64 always passes through the central through gate 67 c immediately before entering the first ball entrance 64 . In other words, when the player continues to hit to the left, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are likely to be executed substantially at the same time. In particular, in the second time-saving state, after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the lottery of the normal symbol are started, the first displacement pattern (It is impossible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 ( Since it is controlled so that the period until the winning of the normal symbol corresponding to the displacement pattern of the electric accessory 640a that becomes difficult) is the same, the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the normal symbol are both It can be constructed such that when left-handed hitting is performed in the state of 0, a lottery for a normal symbol is started almost at the same time every time a lottery for the first special symbol is executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1001, in the game board 13 in the thirty-seventh control example, the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twenty-ninth control example (see FIG. 777). It is also different in that the configuration of the flow path on the right side (right-handed flow path) has been changed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1001, the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the lottery for the second special symbol, is moved upstream of the right through gate 67r in the right-handed flow path, The second entrance 640 is decorated to resemble the letter "V". By arranging the second ball inlet 640 on the upstream side of the right-handed flow path and relatively shortening the distance from the return ball prevention member 68 to the second ball inlet 640, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball inlet. 640. When winning the normal pattern in which the second displacement pattern that allows the ball to enter 640 is set, it is displaced to the protruding state (open state) along with the hitting of the normal pattern after hitting to the right. It is possible to shorten the time to reach the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the period (open period) in which the electric accessory 640a is set to the protruded state (open state). In the time-saving state or the second time-saving state, although the lottery of the normal symbols corresponds to the second displacement pattern in which the big win is substantially determined, the winning of the normal symbols is won during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. For a player who cannot enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 and loses the opportunity to win a big win (opportunity to execute a lottery for the second special symbol that substantially confirms the big win). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of extremely disadvantageous events.
In the thirty-seventh control example, the winning of the normal symbols is terminated based on the entry of one game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during execution of the winning game of the normal symbols. . Also, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is configured to be only one, as in the twenty-ninth control example described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of one second displacement pattern, and even if a plurality of game balls It can be constructed so that even if a ball is entered, the number of held balls is increased by only one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol, which substantially determine a big win, are obtained at once, which is excessively advantageous to the player.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1001, in the thirty-seventh control example, instead of the through-gate 67 in the twenty-ninth control example, a right through-gate 67r decorated to resemble the character "GO" is provided. . In addition, the arrangement of the game nail on the left side of the right through gate 67r in front view is also changed from the game board 13 (see FIG. 777) in the 29th control example. It is configured so that it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter the right through gate 67r. More specifically, the game ball that is shot to the right and has passed through the front side of the electric accessory 640a in the closed state (buried state) collides with the game nail group YK1 or the game nail group YK2. , from the gap between the game nail group YK1 and the game nail group YK2 to the downstream side (the direction in which it cannot pass through the right through gate 67r). In order for the game ball that has collided with the game nail group YK1 to pass through the right through gate 67r, it bounces to the right in front view and collides with the game nail group YK2, and bounces to the right in front view due to the impact of the collision. It needs to collide with the game nail YK3, bounce to the right side in the front view due to the impact of the collision, collide with the game nail YK4, and further bounce to the right side in the front view due to the collision. When a game nail collides with one of the game nails, if the flight distance is insufficient or the rebound direction is the left side when viewed from the front, the gap between the game nail group YK1 and the game nail group YK2, or the gap between the game nail group YK2 and the game nail group YK2. It flows downstream from the gap between the game nail group YK3 and the gap between the game nail YK3 and the game nail YK4, making it impossible to pass through the right through gate 67r.

Similarly, the game ball that first collides with the game nail group YK2 bounces to the right side in front view and collides with the game nail YK3, and bounces to the right side in front view due to the impact of the collision and hits the game nail YK4. Further, when it bounces to the right side in the front view due to the collision, it can pass through the right through gate 67r, and the gap between the game nail group YK2 and the game nail group YK3, and the gap between the game nail group YK3 and the game nail YK4 If it flows downstream from the gap between, it becomes impossible to pass through the right through gate 67r. By adopting this board configuration, the rate at which the game ball hit by the right hand passes through the right through gate 67r is substantially the same as the rate at which the game ball fired by the left hand passes through the center through gate 67 (approximately It is a ratio of the extent that one passes for every 10 to 15 balls fired).
In addition, in the thirty-seventh control example, the ratio of game balls passing through the through gate (central through gate 67c or right through gate 67r) is substantially the same for left-handed and right-handed players, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, the percentage of game balls shot to the right that pass through the right through gate 67r is higher than the percentage of game balls shot to the left that pass the left through gate 67c (for example, two ball shots to the right). , one game ball passes through the right through gate 67r every time one game ball is shot). When configured in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to select a game method in the first time saving state or the second time saving state. In other words, when left-handed in the time-saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols is low (every 10 to 15 game balls are fired by left-handed, the frequency is about once). Since the lottery for the first special symbol is executed each time the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, not only the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern is won in the lottery for the normal symbol, but also the first special symbol. It can be expected that a lottery of patterns will result in a big hit. On the other hand, when hitting to the right in the time saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols increases (the frequency is about to be executed once every time two game balls are fired by hitting to the right), While the lottery efficiency of the normal symbols in the time saving state can be increased, the lottery of the first special pattern is not executed, so that the possibility of winning the jackpot during the time saving state can be realized. . Therefore, depending on the game method in the time saving state (whether to hit left or right), the possibility that the player will win a big hit during the time saving state is relatively high, but the lottery efficiency of normal symbols is poor. (It takes a relatively long time to digest the time-saving state, and a relatively large number of waste balls are generated.) The playability and the lottery efficiency of normal patterns are improved, but there is a possibility of a big hit during the time-saving state. It is possible to realize a very novel game property that allows the user to select a relatively low game property (the degree of expectation for a big win is reduced by the amount of 1/320, which is the probability of a big win for the first special symbol). Therefore, since each player can select a game property that matches his or her taste, a game property that matches the tastes of more players can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game is further improved. can be made
Further, as shown in FIG. 1001, a plurality of game nails are formed on the downstream side of the right through gate 67r so as to form an inclination downward from the upper left direction in front view to the lower right direction. All game balls that have not entered the second ball entrance 640 can be guided to the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 . With this configuration, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and a small win is won, and the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the right-handed game ball is placed in the second position. Since the ball can be surely entered into the V winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650, the V winning opening is closed during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1 even though the small winning that substantially determines the big winning is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an extremely disadvantageous event for the player such that the game ball cannot be entered into the 650a and the player loses the chance of winning the jackpot.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1002 to 1007, a characteristic effect in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1002(a), description will be given of the production mode in the case where the time saving symbol winning (lottery result of giving the time saving state directly without going through the jackpot) occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Here, as described above, the second time saving state is the second state in which it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of about 3% when the normal symbol lottery is executed. It is a game state in which the electric accessary 640a is released in the displacement pattern (normal figure winning B). That is, compared to the normal state that can not be elected to the normal pattern B (can only be elected to the first displacement pattern (per normal pattern A) that cannot enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640) This is a game state in which the degree of advantage is increased by executing the lottery of the second special symbol that at least substantially determines the big win. In the normal state, the probability of winning a jackpot when a left-handed game is performed is about 1/320 each time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once, and the first time-saving state is the game state after the jackpot. Since the set ratio is set to 50%, the possibility of shifting to the first time saving state every time the first special symbol lottery is executed is about 1/500 in total. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state, the probability that the first special symbol lottery will be a big hit when the left-handed game is performed is about 1/320, and the normal symbol lottery will lead to the second ball entrance 640. The probability of winning the normal pattern B that can enter the ball is about 1/33, and the lottery of the normal pattern is executed every time the lottery of the first special pattern is executed, so the lottery of the first special pattern is performed. The actual jackpot probability for each execution is about 1/29.8. In addition, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state, the game state after the jackpot is set to the first time saving state even if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won. The possibility of shifting to the first time saving state every time the special symbol lottery is executed is about 1/29.8 in total. For this reason, the second time saving state forms an advantageous state in which the possibility of shifting to the first time saving state increases significantly compared to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 1002 (a), when the variable display effect corresponding to the time-saving design winning is executed, a special third A variable display effect is executed in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1002(a), after the third symbol imitating the same number is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column and the right symbol column to generate the ready-to-win effect, A variable display performance is executed in which a special symbol with the characters "chance time" attached to the symbol row is stopped and displayed. Also, at the fluctuation stop timing, the characters "Chance time GET!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, the player is informed that a state more advantageous than the normal state (substantial jackpot probability and the second time saving state in which the rate of transition to the first time saving state is both significantly increased) is set. can be easily understood.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1002 (a), in the upper right part of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol lottery situation (whether it is during lottery (during fluctuation) and the lottery result) A small area for displaying the identification information (4th pattern) of the 4th pattern (special 1 4th pattern) for indicating the lottery status of the 1st special pattern (special 1) A display area Dm1 is formed. Also, a small display area Dm9 for displaying a reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is formed in the lower right portion of the sub-display area Ds.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1002(b), the chance time waiting effect to be executed after the time saving symbol winning is reported (after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed) will be described. This chance time waiting effect is mainly executed for notifying the number of times of time saving according to the type of the time saving pattern that has been won. In this chance time standby effect, a character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the lower left of the main display area Dm, and above it, the number of special symbol lotteries (normal symbol lottery) until the second time saving state set this time is completed. Symbols 811a to 811d suggesting the number of times the winning game is executed are rotated and displayed. Further above it, the characters "~waiting for chance time~" are displayed. In addition, the text "Determine the number of chance times!" is displayed in the small display area Ds. These display contents can make the player think as if the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state has not yet been set. In other words, the player can be made to feel as if the second time saving state has not yet started (waiting). In fact, at the start of this chance time standby production, it has transitioned to the second time saving state, and the first special that was suspended at the end of the variable display accompanying the winning of the time saving pattern (stop display of the time saving pattern) Variation display of symbols is executed. The variable display based on the remaining hold at the time of winning the time saving symbol is executed in a small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm in a manner (narrow display area) that is relatively difficult for the player to visually recognize. . In addition, reserved symbols are also executed in the small display area Dm9 that is relatively difficult for the player to visually recognize (the display area is narrow). In other words, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed (that the second time saving state has already started) based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol. This is to prevent the player from starting a left-handed stroke by judging that the second time-saving state has already started.
Here, after shifting to the second time saving state, if the player hits left while the reserved ball of the first special symbol that was already reserved before the transition still remains, the remaining There is a possibility that a ball will pass through the central through gate 67c and enter the first ball entrance 64 during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold. In this case, although the normal symbol lottery is immediately started, the first special symbol lottery based on the new starting winnings for the first ball entrance 64 is not started until all the reserved balls are consumed, so the first special There is a possibility that the fluctuation display period of the symbols and the fluctuation display period of the normal symbols (and the winning game period of the normal symbols) are shifted. As described above, in the second time saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are started substantially at the same time each time, so that the substantial jackpot probability when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. , It is configured higher than the normal state, and as a production mode, in the variable display production of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the normal symbol that started substantially at the same time as the lottery of the first special symbol (started immediately before) It is configured to set the production that takes into account. That is, when the lottery of the first special pattern is a big hit, or the lottery result of the normal pattern is the lottery result corresponding to the normal pattern B, the 3rd pattern imitating (attached) the same number is aligned. A variable display effect of the effect mode is executed, and when the lottery of the first special pattern is lost and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a normal pattern A, the third pattern is stop-displayed in combination with the loss. It is configured to execute the variable display effect of the mode. Under such circumstances, if the lottery start timing of the first special symbol and the lottery start timing of the normal symbol deviate, a variable display effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed in the variable display period of the first special symbol. It may become difficult to do so. Therefore, in the thirty-seventh control example, by executing the chance time standby effect, a situation is formed in which it is difficult for the player to shoot the game ball by pretending as if the second time saving state has not started, It is configured to establish a situation in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0 during execution of this chance time standby performance. By configuring in this way, in the second time-saving state, after the holding ball of the first special symbol becomes a fluctuation stop state of 0, it is possible to make it easier to start hitting left, so in the second time-saving state, It is possible to suppress the deviation between the lottery start timing of the first special symbol and the lottery start timing of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the variable display presentation of the first special pattern, the variable display mode can be surely set in consideration of the lottery result of the normal pattern executed immediately before the lottery of the first special pattern is executed.

In addition, in this 37th control example, among the end conditions of the second time saving state, the end condition (first end condition) that is established based on the fact that the number of times of lottery of special symbols has reached the specified number of times, and the hit of normal symbols The stipulated number of times is set to be different between the end condition (third end condition) established based on the number of game executions reaching the stipulated number of times. Specifically, the specified number of times for the first termination condition is four times greater than the specified number of times for the third termination condition. By configuring in this way, when the second time-saving state is set, regardless of whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is any number from 0 to 4, when the jackpot is not won, the normal symbol is displayed. The second time saving state can be reliably continued until the number of times the winning game is executed reaches the specified number of times. In other words, even if a plurality of reserved balls of the first special symbol are digested during the chance time standby performance, the number of lotteries of the normal symbols that can be executed during the second time saving state is not reduced. The number of executions of the normal pattern lottery, which has a significantly higher possibility of leading to a big win than the lottery of the first special pattern, can be made common regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and in the second time-saving state. It is possible to suppress the drop in the degree of expectation for a big win. In the following description, when the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state is mentioned, it means the number of times of execution of the winning game of normal symbols in which the fourth end condition is satisfied.
Returning to FIG. 1002(b), the description continues. The symbol (icon) rotated and displayed in the chance time standby effect is, for example, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811a with the characters "10 times" indicating that the number of times of time saving has been given at least 10 times. , Suggestion pattern (icon) 811b with the letters “30 times” indicating that the number of times of time saving has been given at least 30 times, and the letters “Continue” suggesting that the chance time standby effect will continue. It is composed of a suggestive pattern (icon) 811c attached thereto and a suggestive pattern (icon) 811d with the character "celebration" indicating a big win. In addition to this, a suggestive pattern (icon) with the letters “100 times” indicating that the number of times of time saving has been granted more than 100 times, and that the second time saving state will continue until the next big hit. A suggestive pattern (icon) with the character "∞" suggesting is also provided. Depending on the type of winning time-saving design (time-saving number of times), the number of pending balls of the first special design, and the lottery result of the first special design, any type of suggestive design as suggestive designs (icons) 811a to 811d (Icon) is determined by lottery.
After a specific period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the chance time standby effect, as shown in FIG. A performance of hitting is executed, and it is reported that the suggestive content indicated by the suggestive design of the hitting is obtained. The example of FIG. 1003(a) illustrates a case in which an effect is executed in which the suggestive symbol 811a with the characters "10 times" is beaten. In this case, in the sub-display area Ds, by displaying the characters "10 times GET!! Left strike!!" It can be easily understood by a player.
Also, FIG. 1003(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode when a big hit is won in the lottery for the first special symbol during execution of the chance time standby effect. In other words, it is a diagram showing a performance mode when a jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol that has already been reserved when the time-saving symbol is stop-displayed. As shown in FIG. 1003(b), when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol remaining reserved, the rabbit character 801 beats the suggestive symbol (icon) 811d to which the word "celebration" is attached. executed. In addition, the characters "Get a jackpot!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she has won the jackpot.

In the thirty-seventh control example, the variation time of the first special symbol in the second time saving state is fixed to 5 seconds. In accordance with this, the effect of selecting one suggested symbol (the rabbit character 801 strikes) in the chance time standby effect is also fixed to 5 seconds. Then, when there are one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, a 5-second production to always select the suggestive symbol with the word "continue" is executed. Then, in the next variation, a new combination of four suggestive patterns is displayed, and one suggestive pattern is selected from among these four suggestive patterns. Then, if the lottery result of the special pattern based on the remaining reservation is lost and the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 0, 1 suggestion that suggests the number of times of time saving according to the type of this time saving pattern A 5-second effect for selecting a symbol is executed, and the start of the second time-saving state (chance time) is notified. In addition, even at the start of the second time saving state when the reserved ball of the first special symbol is 0 at the time of winning the time saving pattern, similarly, 1 suggestive pattern that suggests the number of times of time saving in this second time saving state is executed for 5 seconds. By constructing in this way, the player who wants to know the number of times of time saving this time can be made to pay attention to the contents of the chance time standby performance, so that until the chance time standby performance is finished, It is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult for a game ball to be shot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the lottery for the first special symbol and the execution timing of the lottery for the normal symbol from being deviated.
Here, in the thirty-seventh control example, the game balls are not fired during the chance time standby effect, and the left shot is started after all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed, and the chance time standby effect is started. The degree of advantage is almost the same as when you start hitting left immediately after and accumulate a new reserved ball with the first special pattern while the reserved ball with the first special pattern is digested (those who waited for the reserved digestion However, the number of lotteries for the first special symbol that is executed during the time saving state increases, and is slightly advantageous). That is, in the thirty-seventh control example, as described above, the end condition (third end condition) established based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game reaching the specified number of times is provided, and the chance time ( In the second time-saving state), the end condition (first It is configured such that the third termination condition is satisfied prior to the termination condition). That is, the number of lotteries of special symbols until the first end condition is satisfied is the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved balls (4 pieces) of the upper limit number, and the normal symbol winning game until the third end condition is satisfied. is configured to be executed more times than the By configuring in this way, even if left-handed hitting is started after all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are digested in the second time-saving state, it is assumed that left-handed hitting is started immediately after the second time-saving state is set. Also, since the time-saving state can be continued until the number of normal symbol winning games corresponding to the third end condition is executed, the number of times of normal symbol winning games having a substantially high jackpot probability is lost. , it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player who continues to pay attention to the chance time standby effect without shooting the game ball, so that a suitable effect mode can be realized.
Next, referring to FIGS. 1004 to 1006 (a), in the chance time (second time saving state), the effect when winning the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern in which the big win is substantially determined Aspects will be described. First, in FIG. 1004 (a), the lottery of the normal symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously in the chance time (second time saving state), and the second displacement pattern (second entering ball) is normally executed in the lottery of the symbol It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when winning the normal symbol corresponding to the long open that allows the ball to enter the mouth 640.
Here, in the thirty-seventh control example, when the transition to the chance time (the second time-saving state) occurs, a character 801 imitating a rabbit in the main display area Dm moves above the clouds in the same manner as the chance time in the other control examples. is executed, and thereafter until the chance time ends, an effect is executed in which the character 801 performs various actions on the cloud. Further, as shown in FIG. 1004 (a), in the chance time (second time saving state) in the thirty-seventh control example, the variable display effect of the third symbol is executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the main In the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the display area Dm, the variable display effect of the fourth symbol is executed. The variable display effect of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, but the variable display of the third symbol is not necessarily the variable display of the special symbol. They are not executed synchronously. That is, in the thirty-seventh control example, when the normal symbol lottery during the chance time wins the normal symbol B set to the long open (second displacement pattern), the normal symbol is displayed by the variable display of the third symbol. It is configured to be able to show the lottery result. In this case, the variation display of the third symbol is executed in accordance with the variation time of the normal symbol.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1004(a), the characters "~high probability medium~" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, and a small display area is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm. For Dm4, the characters "left-handed" are displayed. Further, a display content suggesting the remaining number of lotteries until the chance time (second time saving state) ends is displayed in a small display area Dm7 formed below the small display area Dm4. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the game should be played by the game method of entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by striking to the left even in an advantageous chance time. be able to. In addition, in the chance time (second time reduction state), it is possible to make the player grasp that the substantial jackpot probability increases and how long the substantial jackpot probability will continue. can.
In the chance time, when winning the normal pattern winning (normal pattern winning B) set to long open (second displacement pattern) in the normal pattern lottery, first, the normal pattern fluctuation corresponding to the normal pattern winning B As a variable display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display period of the first special symbol started almost at the same time as the display (immediately after the start of the variable display corresponding to the normal pattern B), As shown in 1004(a), a variable display effect is executed in which third symbols imitating the same number are stopped and displayed for the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row. Further, when the symbols are stopped, as shown in FIG. 1004(a), the characters "bonus confirmed" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In other words, the pseudo-win performance of the variable display mode for announcing the normal pattern win B is executed in a manner that is difficult to distinguish (same as) from the variable display performance executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbols.
In addition, in this pseudo winning effect, the third symbol imitating the even-numbered symbol is always stop-displayed. This is a state in which it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot is substantially determined at the time when the normal symbol B is won (the electric accessory 640a is operated for a relatively long time (for example, 2. 5 seconds) open state) is only confirmed, and the type of jackpot to be won cannot be specified (the second ball entry means 640 that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol). This is because there is no ball entry). Therefore, if you execute a variable display effect with a production mode in which numbers (for example, "7") that are generally used in a sense of a high degree of advantage are aligned, then a type with a low degree of advantage in the second special symbol lottery There is a possibility that the player may be confused when winning a big win or a small win. Therefore, in the thirty-seventh control example, in the simulated win effect, a variable display effect is executed in which the third patterns imitating even-numbered numbers, which are generally used with the meaning of a relatively low degree of advantage, are aligned. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.
When the pseudo-hit effect is completed and the open period of the normal hit B is started, then, during the open period of the electric accessory 640a based on the normal hit B, the game is played to the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. A first suggesting performance capable of suggesting to the player that the ball should be entered is executed. The effect mode of the first suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. 1004(b). FIG. 1004(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the first suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 1004(b), when the first suggestive effect is executed, the display content of the small display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the characters "Right shot". . In addition, the third symbol, which has been determined and displayed in the previous variable display effect (pseudo win effect), is displayed in a reduced size in the display area HR10. In addition, an arrow image YG resembling a rightward arrow is formed below the display area HR10, and the text "Aim right" is displayed on the arrow image YG. Furthermore, below the arrow image YG, there is a time gauge ga2 for indicating the remaining time of the period (long open period) during which the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal hit B. is displayed. The display mode of this time gauge ga2 is formed from a remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the open period of B per normal pattern, and an elapsed period display ga2b for indicating the elapsed period. The time gauge ga2 is variably displayed according to the passage of time so that the ratio of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the ratio of the remaining period display ga2a decreases every time the time elapses after the round game is executed. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1004(b), while the first suggestive effect is being executed, the second ball entrance 640 and its surrounding area on the game board 13 are simulated in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular small display area Dm6 in which the captured image is displayed is formed, and the characters "Aim for the upper V with a right shot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, while the remaining period display ga2a remains, the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640 and the second variable prize winning device 650, which are decorated to resemble the letter "V", The player can easily understand that a big win can be obtained by hitting the game ball rightward into the second ball inlet 640 provided in the .
In addition, in the thirty-seventh control example, the first suggestion effect is executed in synchronization with the open period of B per normal pattern, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to start the first suggestion effect from a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) before the start of the opening period of B per normal pattern. By configuring in this way, the player can start hitting to the right before the start of the opening period based on the normal hit B, so that the electric accessory 640a can be more reliably played during the opening period. The game ball can reach the second ball entrance 640 more reliably.
When the player hits to the right in the first suggestion performance (performance suggesting aiming for the upper V), the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Then, for example, a promotion effect as shown in FIG. 1005 is executed as a variable display effect of the second special symbol for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 1005(a), first, in the main display area Dm, the third pattern (in the example of FIG. A third symbol imitating "2") is displayed again, and an effect is executed in which a third symbol imitating the number "7" descends from above the third symbol. In addition, the text "Promote your symbol!" is displayed in the display area HR10, and the text "Chance to promote!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, the third pattern imitating an even number is replaced (promoted) with the third pattern imitating the pattern of "7" for the player, so that an advantageous jackpot type jackpot game is played. It is possible to make the player easily understand that it will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.
In addition, as described above, when the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, it is possible to win either a small hit or a big hit, and when the small hit is won, just continue to hit the right during the small win game. Since the game ball can be easily entered into the specific area 650e3, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the big hit is substantially decided. And, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, and when it is a small hit and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit A40, and the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit A40, A jackpot C40 having the largest number of rounds (10 rounds) is determined as the jackpot type. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit B40, and the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B40, the number of rounds is determined as the big hit type. The fewest (three rounds) jackpot D40 is determined. In the promotion effect, if the lottery result of the second special pattern is a big hit or a small hit A40, the promotion is successful (the third pattern imitating an even number becomes the third pattern imitating "7" On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit B, the promotion mode is set to fail in promotion.

FIG. 1005(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode when the promotion effect of the effect mode of successful promotion is executed. As shown in FIG. 1005(b), in the promotion effect of the effect mode in which the promotion is successful, the third pattern imitating the number “7” descending from above the third pattern imitating the even number A third pattern simulating the number of 1 is flipped away, and an effect of replacing it with a third pattern simulating the number "7" is executed. In addition, the characters "Successfully promoted!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she has won the jackpot with the largest number of rounds (either the jackpot or jackpot A40 has been won in the lottery of the second special symbols). can.
It should be noted that, although not shown in the drawings, the degree of advantage is low in the lottery of the second special symbol (when the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3, the jackpot D40 with the smallest number of rounds is won) When winning a small hit B40 , the third pattern simulating ``7'' is rebounded without being able to repel the third pattern simulating an even number, and a performance mode of blowing upward is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that promotion has failed (winning the jackpot D40 with a low degree of advantage).
If a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, then the game ball is hit to the V winning opening 650a by striking to the right during the opening period of the open/close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 based on the small win. A second suggesting effect is executed that can suggest to the player that the player should enter the ball. The effect mode of the second suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. 1006(a). FIG. 1006(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the second suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 1006(a), when the second suggestive effect is executed, the third symbol confirmed and displayed in the previous variable display effect (promotion effect) is reduced and displayed in the display area HR10. Further, similarly to the first suggestion effect (aim for the upper V effect), an arrow image YG resembling a rightward arrow is formed below the display region HR10, and the arrow image YG is displayed with the message "Aim right. Aim" is displayed. Further, below the arrow image YG, a time gauge ga2 is displayed for indicating the remaining time of the period during which the game ball can be entered into the V winning opening 650a in the small win. The display mode of the time gauge ga2 is composed of a remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the small winning opening period and an elapsed period display ga2b for indicating the elapsed period, and the small winning game is started. The time gauge ga2 is variably displayed according to the passage of time so that the ratio of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the ratio of the remaining period display ga2a decreases as time passes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1006(a), while the second suggestive effect is being executed, the second variable winning device 650 and its surrounding area on the game board 13 are simulated in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular small display area Dm6 in which the captured image is displayed is formed, and a character saying "Aim for the lower V by hitting right" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, while the remaining period display ga2a remains, the downstream side of the second ball entrance 640 and the second variable prize winning device 650, which are decorated to resemble the letter "V", The player can easily understand that a big win can be obtained by hitting the game ball rightward into the second variable prize winning device 650 provided in the .

Here, taking into account the production mode (production mode described with reference to Figure 1002 to Figure 1006 (a)) in the chance time (second time saving state) described so far, chance time (second time saving state) will be described. FIG. 1008 is a time chart showing the transition of the effect mode from before the transition to chance time to after winning the jackpot.
As shown in Figure 1008, when the time-saving design (suddenly time-saving) is elected in the lottery of the first special design in the normal state, the time-saving design variation for 80 seconds with super reach is executed, and finally for the middle design row. 1002(a), a special symbol with the characters "Chance Time" is stopped and displayed. When the stop display period (determined display period) of this time saving pattern variation ends, the game state is changed from the normal state to the second time saving state. If it transfers to a 2nd time saving state, first, the chance time standby production (refer FIG.1003(b), FIG.1004) will be performed. This chance time standby production is a production that is executed for a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 20 seconds. By executing the effect that notifies the specified third end condition), the player's attention is focused on the effect content and the game (shooting of the game ball) is stopped, and already at the time of transition to the second time saving state It is executed to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol that has been reserved.
By extinguishing the reserved ball of the first special symbol during execution of the chance time standby performance, the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be set to 0 at the end of the chance time standby performance, and thereafter. When the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 to execute the lottery for the first special symbol, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are performed each time. It is possible to realize an operation that starts almost at the same time (the lottery for the first special symbol is started immediately after the lottery for the normal symbol is started). Therefore, in the variable display effect of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the effect mode in consideration of the lottery result of the normal symbol started immediately before. As described above, in the second time-saving state, the ratio of B, which is advantageous when the normal pattern is hit (substantially confirms the jackpot), is higher than the normal state (0% → 3%), the behavior can be substantially equivalent to drawing a big win at a rate of more than 3% each time the drawing of one first special symbol is executed. That is, in the chance time (second time-saving state), as in the normal state, the game progresses by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by striking to the left, but the apparent jackpot probability is high. An advantageous game state is formed that dramatically increases (substantial jackpot probability rises from about 1/320 to about 1/30).
As shown in FIG. 1008, when the chance time waiting effect is completed, the rabbit character 801 performs various actions on the cloud and the variable display of the third pattern is executed, thereby effecting a effect mode suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. Switches to the production during the chance time when is executed. In the chance time production, if the first special pattern lottery hits a big hit, and if the normal pattern lottery started just before the first special pattern lottery hits B, the same number. A variable display effect in which the 3rd pattern imitating the When the figure hits A, a variable display performance is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with the winning combination.

Here, the correspondence relationship between the variation time in the variation display of the first special symbols and the variation time in the variation display of the normal symbols in the chance time will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 1009, the game ball almost enters the through gate 67 and the first ball entrance 64 while neither the first special symbol variable display nor the normal symbol variable display (the second special symbol variable display) is executed. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the fluctuation|variation time of a 1st special design, and the fluctuation|variation time of a normal design at the time of entering a ball simultaneously. FIG. 1009(a) shows the correspondence relationship when the lottery result of the normal symbol wins the normal symbol B (the normal symbol hit of the short open that is difficult to enter the second entrance 640), and FIG. (b) shows the correspondence relationship when the lottery result of the normal symbol wins the normal pattern A (long open normal pattern winning that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 easily).
As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1009(a), when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the chance time (second time saving state), a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is set. This five-second variable time is set as a fixed variable time regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a loss. On the other hand, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 1009(a), the variation time of the normal symbols started almost simultaneously with the variation display of the first special symbol in the chance time is set to 1 second. In addition, in FIG. 1009(a), for simplification of explanation, it is illustrated as if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol are started at exactly the same time, but in reality The variable display of normal symbols is started slightly (for example, around 0.05 seconds) earlier. Since the lottery for the normal symbol is executed slightly before the start timing of the lottery for the first special symbol (the central through gate 67c is arranged on the upstream side of the first entrance 64), the first special symbol is selected. As the pattern variable display performance, a performance mode (variable display mode) is set in consideration of the result of the lottery of the normal symbols executed immediately before. FIG. 1009(a) illustrates the case where the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, and the normal pattern is won. As a variable display effect showing the lottery result of the pattern, a variable display mode is set in which the third pattern is stop-displayed in combination with the missing pattern, and if the lottery result of the first special pattern is a big hit, the lottery result of the first special pattern. As a variable display mode indicating , a variable display mode in which the third symbols imitating the same number are aligned is set.
As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1009(a), when the fluctuation time (1 second) of the normal pattern elapses, A per normal pattern is started. When A per normal figure is started, an opening period of 1.5 seconds (closing period of the electric accessory 640a) is set, and then an opening period of 0.1 seconds is set, and thereafter 2.4 seconds. ending period (closing period of the electric accessory 640a) is set. As a result, the ending period of the normal pattern A is ended almost at the same time as the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. That is, almost at the same time that a new lottery for the first special symbol can be started, a state is formed in which a new lottery for the normal symbol can be started. The lottery of patterns is started almost at the same time, and the performance mode of the variable display performance of the first special symbol can be set in consideration of the lottery result of the normal symbol. In other words, a novel performance mode is realized in which the variable display performance each time executed in the chance time can be set to a variable display mode taking into consideration both the lottery result of the normal symbols and the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1009(b), the correspondence relationship between the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol when the lottery result of the normal symbol is B per normal symbol will be described. As shown in the upper and middle stages of FIG. 1009(b), the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are common to the case of A per normal symbol (see FIG. 1009(a)). That is, the variation display of the first special symbol is set to a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol that was started almost simultaneously (immediately before) with the variation display of the first special symbol is 1 second. set. In addition, in the example of FIG. 1009 (b), in the lottery of normal symbols, since it illustrates the case of winning the B per normal pattern that the jackpot is substantially determined, synchronizing with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol As the variable display effect of the third symbols to be executed, a variable display mode is set in which the third symbols imitating the same number are aligned regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbols.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1009(b), when the variation time (1 second) of the normal pattern elapses, B per normal pattern is started. When B is started, an opening period of 1.5 seconds (closing period of the electric accessory 640a) is set, and then an opening period of 2.5 seconds is set, and the ending period is almost 0. It is set and the normal pattern B is terminated. As a result, the general pattern winning B is ended almost at the same time as the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. In other words, regardless of whether it is a normal pattern A or a normal pattern B, a new drawing of the normal pattern can be started almost at the same time that a new drawing of the first special pattern can be started. Therefore, even in the lottery of the first special symbol after the next time, the lottery of the normal symbol is started almost at the same time, and the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is taken into account as the performance mode of the variable display performance of the first special symbol. Aspects can be set. In other words, a novel presentation mode is realized in which the variable display presentation each time executed in the chance time can be set to a variable display mode taking into consideration both the lottery results of the normal symbols and the lottery results of the first special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in this 37th control example, in the chance time, even when winning the general pattern per B that substantially determines the jackpot, the period from the start of the normal pattern variation to the end of the general pattern per B , the variation time of the first special symbol is matched (5 seconds), but it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of B per normal pattern, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (for example, 3.5 seconds) or by lengthening the opening period (for example, 4 seconds), 5 seconds It may be configured so that the open period of the normal symbol is started after the lapse. By configuring in this way, the variable display effect can be executed using the entire 5-second variable period, so that the effect mode can be further diversified. To be more specific, in the configuration of the 37th control example described above, when the general pattern per B is elected, the opening period based on the general pattern per B starts at about 2.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. As a result, only 2.5 seconds can be substantially secured as the effect period of the variable display effect. In other words, regardless of the result of the lottery for the normal symbols, the control for ending the winning of the normal symbols almost at the same time as the end of the variable display of the first special symbol was adopted. This means that even if the game ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 because the player did not hit right in the normal game B, and the normal game B is finished, the remaining This is the result of consideration so as to surely realize the game property in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are executed almost simultaneously again at the chance time. In other words, while the lottery of the first special symbol ends in 5 seconds, when the normal pattern per B continues for 5 seconds or more, the fluctuation display of the next first special symbol is started during the execution of the general pattern per B. After that, it is intended to prevent the phenomenon that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol at almost the same time. However, it is thought that there is almost no player who ignores the suggested contents of the first suggested effect (see FIG. 1004(b)) and continues to hit left even though he or she has won B per normal pattern. , Only during the period from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation based on the normal pattern A to the end of the normal pattern per A, if it matches the fluctuation time of the first special pattern, no big problem will occur. You might also say that. Therefore, the open period of B per normal pattern is configured to be started after at least 5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern, so that 5 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special pattern, is fully used. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting whether or not it becomes a normal figure hit B (whether the electric accessory 640a opens long) or not. As a result, the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately.
Returning to FIG. 1008, the description continues. In the chance time (second time-saving state), if you win the normal pattern B (per normal pattern in which a long opening of 2.5 seconds is set for the electric accessory 640a), the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern per B As a variation display mode in the variation display of the first special symbol that is started immediately after the start of the variation display of , a pseudo hit variation effect (see FIG. 1004(a)) is executed. As described above, this pseudo-hit variation effect is the same as when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, and the third symbols imitating the same number are stopped in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row, respectively. This is the presentation of the presentation mode to be displayed. In other words, it is a production mode that is difficult to distinguish from the case of winning a jackpot in a lottery of special symbols.
As shown in FIG. 1008, when the pseudo-hit variation effect is completed, an effect to aim for the upper V (first suggestive effect, see FIG. 1004(b)) is executed, and the player is hit for the first time to the right. Prompted (suggested). By hitting right during the execution of the above V aiming effect (first suggestive effect), the game ball can reach the electric accessory 640a set in the open state (protruding state). A game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the electric accessory 640a. Aim for the upper V effect (see FIG. 1004(b)) ends when the ball is detected to enter the second ball hole 640 or when the normal hit B ends. When the entry of the ball into the second ball opening 640 is detected (the held ball of the second special symbol is acquired), the production of the production mode that informs that the ball has been successfully entered into the upper V is the first. While it is executed during the period until the end of the variable display of the special symbol, if the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 due to not hitting the right hand, etc., the upper V is displayed at the end of the winning of the normal symbol. A short-time (for example, 1 second) effect is executed to indicate that the ball has failed to enter the upper V.

In addition, the same applies if you win a normal pattern lottery B (a normal pattern per which a jackpot is virtually determined) and win a jackpot in the first special pattern lottery that is executed immediately after. Then, the effect of aiming for the upper V is executed. In this case, when the variation time of the first special symbol ends, the effect of aiming for the upper V is terminated, and the jackpot of the first special symbol is started. In other words, the promotion effect and the effect of aiming for the lower V do not occur, and the big win effect suddenly starts. This can bring great surprise and joy to the player. After the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, if the ball with the second special symbol is held by hitting right in the aim of the upper V effect, the variable display based on the held ball with the second special symbol will be displayed. Then, a big winning game or a small winning game in which the big winning is substantially decided is executed. That is, an extremely advantageous situation is established in which the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the second special symbol are consecutive.
As shown in FIG. 1008, the ball entering the second ball opening 640 was detected during execution of the upper V aiming effect (first suggestion effect, see FIG. 1004(b)) (second special symbol ), the promotion effect (see FIG. 1005) is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. As described above, this promotion effect is a production mode (Fig. 1005 (b) reference), and is set to a production mode in which promotion fails when a lottery result corresponding to a small number of rounds is obtained (small hit B is won).
When the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 1008, the effect of aiming for the lower V (second suggestive effect, see FIG. 1006(a)) is executed, and the player A second right stroke is prompted (suggested). Aim for the lower V by hitting right during the execution of the effect (second suggestive effect), the game ball can enter the V winning opening 650a set in the open state, and enter the specific area 650e3. and a game ball can be entered. Aim for the lower V effect (see FIG. 1006(a)) is terminated by detecting the ball entering the specific area 650e3 or by completing the small winning game. When the entry into the specific area 650e3 is detected (the big win is confirmed), the production of the production mode notifying that the ball has been successfully entered into the lower V is executed during the period until the end timing of the small winning game. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 650e3 due to, for example, not hitting to the right, aim for the lower V at the end of the open period of the small winning game. A short-time (for example, one second) effect is executed to indicate that the ball has failed to enter the V.
As shown in FIG. 1008, when a ball entering the specific area 650e3 is detected during execution of the "Aim for the lower V" effect, the big win is started and the big win effect is executed. In addition, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big win game is started at the end of the big win variation of the second special symbol without executing the effect of aiming for the lower V, and the big win effect is performed. is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG.1006(b) and FIG.1007, the production|presentation aspect of the 1st time saving state in this 37th control example is demonstrated. As described above, the first time-saving state is a gaming state that can be set as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot. More specifically, while it is set at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, the first time in the time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state) This is a game state set at a rate of 100% when a big win is achieved in the special symbol lottery or when a big win is achieved in the second special symbol lottery directly or via a small win. In this first time-saving state, the jackpot is won at a rate of 80%, and when the jackpot is won, the first time-saving state is set again after the jackpot ends (the first time-saving state is looped). Therefore, once transferred, a very advantageous state is formed in which the first time saving state and the jackpot are repeated at a rate of 80%.
As described above, in the first time saving state, as the third end condition, the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game is set to one. And, since the ratio of winning the normal pattern B, which substantially determines the jackpot in the normal pattern lottery, is 80%. The loop of the time saving state will be confirmed. For this reason, in the first time-saving state in the present 37th control example, when the lottery of normal symbols is executed, as a configuration to set the effect mode of pseudo-notifying the player whether or not it will be a big hit. there is
Drawing 1006 (b) is a figure showing an example of the production mode in the 1st time saving state (rush state). In the first time-saving state (rush state), a character 801 imitating a rabbit discovers a plurality of treasure boxes 810a to 810c in the main display area Dm under the condition that neither the special pattern lottery nor the normal pattern lottery is executed. Then, an effect for examining which treasure box to open is executed. In addition, the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm. In the display area HR10, the text "Bonus when V appears from the selected box!?" be done. According to these display contents, the rabbit character 801 is caused to select one of the treasure chests by hitting the right hand to pass through the right through gate 67r decorated with the character "GO". It can be easily understood that
Drawing 1007 (a) is a figure showing an example of an effect mode when a game ball passes right through gate 67r in the 1st time saving state. As shown in FIG. 1007(a), when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67r in the first time-saving state, an effect that the rabbit character 801 selects one treasure box according to the lottery result of the normal pattern based on the passage. is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 1007(a), an effect is executed in which the rabbit character 801 selects the treasure box 810b, and a message "Selection completed!" characters are displayed. In addition, the display area HR10 continues to display the text "Bonus when V appears from the selected box!?" With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the appearance of "V" from the selected treasure box will result in a big win.

As shown in FIGS. 1006(b) and 1007(a), there are multiple variations of treasure chests. That is, there are three types of treasure chests: a shining treasure chest 810a, a normal treasure chest 810b, and a small treasure chest 810c. Depending on the type of treasure box selected by the rabbit character 801, it is configured to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that B is won in the normal pattern. Specifically, when winning per normal pattern B, the selection ratio of treasure box 810a is higher than when winning per normal pattern A, while the selection ratio of treasure box 810c per normal pattern is A It is configured to be lower than if you were elected. As a result, when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67r, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of treasure box selected by the character 801, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the example of FIG. 1007(a) illustrates a case where the rabbit character 801 selects the treasure box 810b.
FIG. 1007(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the winning of the general pattern B, which substantially determines the jackpot, is notified. As shown in FIG. 1007(b), in the case of notifying that the winner of the normal game B is selected, the character "V" is attached to the treasure box selected by the rabbit character 801 in the main display area Dm. An effect in which the icon 810ba appears is executed. Also, the characters "Bonus confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the big win has been confirmed (the winning of the normal pattern B that substantially confirms the winning of the big win). It should be noted that, after this, as in the case of winning the normal game B during the chance time, first, after the effect of aiming for the upper V occurs, the lottery result based on the start winning to the second entrance 640 If the lottery of the second special symbol is a big win, the big win game is started as it is, while if it is a small win, aim for the lower V through the performance to the specific area 650e3. A jackpot game is started on the condition that a ball is entered.
Next, referring to FIG. 1010, a transition method between states in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. Here, in the thirty-seventh control example, three game states are provided. That is, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a first time-saving state that is most advantageous to the player, and a second time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state and lower than the first time-saving state. Different game states are provided. In the normal state, there is no possibility of determining the normal pattern hit B that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the normal pattern lottery, and in the first time saving state, the normal pattern lottery. In the second time-saving state, it is a game state in which the normal pattern B is elected at a rate of about 3% in the normal pattern lottery.
First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1010, a game state transition method in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1010, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state (normal mode) to another state when winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery or winning a time-saving symbol. More specifically, when the jackpot A40 determined (selected) at a rate of 50% is determined (selected) at a rate of 50% in the case of a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320 in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot is determined as the jackpot type. A first time saving state is set as the game state after the end. In addition, when a special pattern lottery is won with a probability of about 1/200 for a time saving pattern (sudden time saving), the second time saving state is set directly. On the other hand, when the jackpot B40, which is determined (selected) at a rate of 50% when winning the jackpot, is determined as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the normal state. For this reason, in the normal state, by winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery or winning a time-saving pattern, the game state will shift to a game state with a high degree of advantage, so we expect these lottery results. It becomes a game property to play a game.

In addition, as shown in the lower left side of FIG. 1010, from the first time saving state to another game state, it is possible to shift only when the end condition of the time saving state (one of the first to third end conditions) is satisfied have a nature. That is, the first end condition is established when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation) and the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is 10 times, or a small The second end condition established by winning once per hit is established, or the third end condition established by the number of executions of the winning game of the normal symbol (the number of times of operation of the normal electric accessory 640a) becomes one. is established, the game state is set to a disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the first time-saving state, if the normal pattern winning B (long open normal pattern winning) winning at a rate of 80% is won, the jackpot is substantially determined. In other words, it is possible to obtain the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol that wins either the big win or the small win that is substantially confirmed, and after the big win ends, the first time-saving state is set again ( Loop the first time-saving state).
Here, in fact, when the normal figure winning B is started, the number of times of operation of the electric accessory 640a reaches one time, which is the specified number of times, and the time saving state is ended (the third end condition is satisfied ), but in FIG. 1010, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the second special symbol hit (jackpot or small hit) generated by winning the general pattern B is treated as a hit in the first time saving state. ing.
In addition, as shown in the lower right side of FIG. 1010, from the second time-saving state to another game state, when winning a jackpot, and winning a normal pattern lottery B (long open normal pattern) may migrate if More specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 1010, in the case of a jackpot that is won with a probability of about 1/320 in a special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends. However, it is always set to the first time saving state with a high degree of advantage. In addition, even when winning the normal pattern B, which substantially determines the big win, by continuing to hit the right according to the suggested content of the production, the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed, and the big win or substantially Since it is possible to win a small win that determines the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is set to an advantageous first time-saving state.
In this way, in the present thirty-seventh control example, three game states are provided, and in each game state, by differentiating the winning ratio of the normal pattern per B in which the jackpot is substantially determined, the difference in the degree of advantage can be achieved. It realizes novel playability to be provided. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration of the thirty-seventh control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1011(a). FIG. 1011(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1011(a), the ROM 202 in the thirty-seventh control example has a A first winning random number table 202aj is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202bj is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202cj is provided instead of the second winning random number table 202c. point, the point that the variation pattern selection table 202dj is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d, the point that the time reduction grant table 202ej is provided instead of the time reduction grant table 202e, the small hit type selection table 202f Instead, the small hit type selection table 202fj is provided, the time saving type selection table 202ja is added, the per normal figure type selection table 202jb is added, and the variation pattern scenario table 202h is deleted. The difference is that Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, details of the first winning random number table 202aj in the thirty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1012(a) and 1012(b). Here, the first winning random number table 202aj in the thirty-seventh control example is referred in the lottery for the first special symbol in the same manner as the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 805(a)) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. and a special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 referred to in the lottery for the second special symbol. First, the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202aj1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1012(a). FIG. 1012(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202aj1.
As shown in FIG. 1012(a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202aj1 in the present thirty-seventh control example has "0 to 204 205 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and 328 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 532" are defined as the range of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving symbol winning. is defined in association with the range of On the other hand, the random number determined to be a small hit is not associated.
Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit is 205, so the first special The probability of winning the jackpot in the symbol lottery is about 1/320 (205/65536). In addition, out of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving symbol winning is 328, so the first special symbol The probability of winning the time-saving symbol in the lottery is about 1/200 (328/65536).

Next, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 will be described with reference to FIG. 1012(b). FIG. 1012(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2. As shown in FIG. 1012(b), the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 in the thirty-seventh control example has "0 to 204 "205 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 65331 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 65535". A range is associated and defined. On the other hand, the random number determined as time-saving symbol winning is not associated.
Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 65331 out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the lottery for the second special symbol The probability of winning a small prize is about 319/320 (65331/65536).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1012(c), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bj in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1012(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bj in the thirty-seventh control example. This jackpot type selection table 202bj is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 806(a)) in the twenty-ninth control example described above, in order to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. is a data table referenced by As shown in FIG. 1012(c), in the jackpot type selection table 202bj in the thirty-seventh control example, two types of jackpot A40 and jackpot B40 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C40 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol.
As shown in FIG. 1012 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A40" is defined in correspondence, "Big win B40" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". "Jackpot A40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the first time-saving state is set in which the number of times of time-saving (prescribed number of times of normal symbol wins) is once after the jackpot ends. In addition, "jackpot B40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and basically the time-saving state is not set (set to the normal state) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in terms of the number of rounds, there is no difference between the "jackpot A40" and the "jackpot B40", but in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, the "jackpot A40" is more advantageous than the "jackpot B40". get higher

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A40" and "jackpot B40" are 50 each, the ratio of winning ``jackpot A40'' and ``jackpot B40'' when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is 50% each. Therefore, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal state, the game is shifted to the most advantageous first time-saving state only at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state, even if the jackpot type is "jackpot B40", the state shifts to the first time saving state. That is, in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, by winning a jackpot, an advantageous game state is formed in which the game always shifts to the most advantageous first time-saving state.
Also, as shown in FIG. 1012 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot C40 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot C40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first time-saving state in which the game state is advantageous regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Since ``big win C40'' is associated with the whole range of possible values of the first win type counter C2, ``big win C40'' is always determined when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1013(a), details of the second winning random number table 202cj in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This second winning random number table 202cj is a data table referred to for judging whether or not a normal symbol is appropriate when a lottery for a normal symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 1013(a), in the second winning random number table 202cj in the thirty-seventh control example, regardless of the game state, the range of the random number (counter value) determined to be the winning of the normal symbol is set to the second The entire range of possible values of the winning random number counter C4 (range of "0 to 299") is associated. Therefore, in the thirty-seventh control example, regardless of the gaming state, when the lottery for the normal symbols is executed, the normal symbols are always won. In addition, as described above, the selection ratio of the winning type of the normal symbol executed when winning the winning of the normal symbol differs depending on the game state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state, the normal pattern per B that can enter the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 is not selected, and the rate of 80% in the first time saving state B per normal pattern is selected, and in the second time saving state, B per normal pattern is selected at a rate of 3%. As a result, the degree of advantage between game states is greatly different.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1013(b), details of the variation pattern selection table 202dj in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202dj, similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 808(a)) in the twenty-ninth control example, is a variation pattern (variation time ) is a data table referenced to select FIG. 1013(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern selection table 202dj.

As shown in FIG. 1013(b), the variation pattern selection table 202dj in the thirty-seventh control example is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. A normal table 202dj1, a time saving table 202dj2 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state), consists of at least First, details of the normal table 202dj1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1013(c).
FIG. 1013(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202dj1 in the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1013(c), the normal table 202dj1 includes the special symbol type used for the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , and different variation patterns (variation times) are defined correspondingly. In other words, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of different variation times according to the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". For the range of "150 to 179", "out of" with a variation time of 7 seconds as a variation pattern, and "150 to 179" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "140 to 149" For the range of ", "various types of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined as the fluctuation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198", "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. there is
In addition, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds is in the range of "30 to 189", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds as a variation pattern is "190 to 198". A "special reach" with a variation time of 140 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.
Furthermore, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "time saving symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". A "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, when the lottery result is out, the variation of the short variation time is shorter than when the lottery result is other than (big hit or time saving pattern). It is configured so that the pattern can be easily determined, and when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined, the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a big hit or a time-saving symbol. is doing. By constructing in this way, the special symbol variation in which the lottery results are out of order continues for a long time for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is not performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to an extremely small number of executions.
Also, if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced, that is, if a long-time special symbol variation is executed, the winning (jackpot, time-saving symbol) is won. Since it is possible to increase the expectation of the game, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as the variation pattern, "hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of “0 to 198”, as a variation pattern “small win” with a variation time of 10 seconds. In addition, as described above, in this 37th control example, as a lottery result of the second special symbol, only either the big win or the small win can be won. Outliers no longer exist. Therefore, the normal table 202dj1 also defines only the lottery results of "big hit" and "small hit".
As described above, in the thirty-seventh control example, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the normal symbol win is won, the game ball is sent to the second ball entrance 640 as the normal symbol win. Since the normal pattern hit A in which the opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) of the electric accessory 640a that is impossible (difficult) to enter is set is always executed, the normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state. Even so, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 . In the 37th control example, as a situation where the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the second entrance is elected in the normal symbol in the time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state) The normal pattern hit B that can easily enter the game ball to 640 is determined, and the time saving end condition (third end condition) is established first by the operation of the electric accessory 640a by the normal pattern hit B. After the time saving state is terminated, the game ball enters the second ball inlet 640 during the open period of the normal pattern hit B being executed. In particular, this situation is a situation that is likely to be established in the first time-saving state in which the prescribed number of times per normal pattern is set to once as the third end condition. That is, if you win the normal figure per B after moving to the first time saving state, the start of the general figure per B will be almost certainly ahead of the entry to the second entrance 640. , When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed after the first time-saving state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is started after temporarily shifting (falling) to the normal state. Therefore, in this 37th control example, as the variation time of the second special symbol variation for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a constant length (10 seconds) regardless of the lottery result is configured to determine a variation pattern in which the variation time of is set. And it is configured to execute the promotion effect (see FIG. 1005) using this variable time.

In this way, when a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state (normal state), the same lottery result is obtained regardless of the lottery result. By determining the variation pattern in which the length variation time is set, the performance period of the specific performance executed during the special symbol variation can be unified regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1014(a), details of the time saving table 202j2 described above will be described. FIG. 1014(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202j2. As shown in FIG. 1014 (a), in the time saving table 202dj2, if the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern of ``short deviation'' with a variation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of ``0 to 198'', and the lottery result is a ``jackpot'', the acquired For the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the variation type counter CS1, "short hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as the variation pattern, and if the lottery result is "short time pattern", obtain For the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from "0 to 198", "short collision" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1014(a), the stipulated contents for the second special symbol are common to the normal table 202dj1 (see FIG. 1013(c)). That is, when the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as the variation pattern, "hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of “0 to 198”, as a variation pattern “small win” with a variation time of 10 seconds.
According to these regulations, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state can be fixed to 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 10 seconds. Therefore, as described above in FIG. 1009, in the chance time (second time saving state), the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol can be started almost at the same time, and the variation end timing of the first special symbol It is possible to substantially match the winning end timing of the normal symbol. Therefore, as the variable display effect of the first special symbol every time in the chance time, it is possible to set a variable display mode in consideration of the lottery result of the normal symbol. Further, by fixing the variation time of the second special symbol, the effect period of the promotion effect can be fixed each time.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1014 (b), the details of time reduction grant table 202ej in this 37th example of control are explained. This time saving grant table 202ej is similar to the time saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 806(b)) in the 29th control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions. FIG. 1014(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time reduction provision table 202ej.
As shown in FIG. 1014 (b), in the time reduction grant table 202ej in the thirty-seventh control example, the value of each counter referred to when determining whether each jackpot type, time reduction pattern type and time reduction end condition are satisfied and are defined in association with each other. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), in the present thirty-seventh control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving counter 203h, the small winning counter 203s, and the normal electric operation counter 203ja , are provided. The time saving counter 203h is a counter for judging whether or not an end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time saving state is set is established (judgment), and is a small hit counter. 203s is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not an end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of small winning games executed after the time-saving state is set is satisfied, and a general electric operation counter 203ja is a counter for determining whether or not an end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of hits of normal symbols executed after the time saving state is set is met.
As shown in FIG. 1014 (b), in this 37th control example, four types of "jackpot A40" to "jackpot D40" are provided as jackpot types, and "time reduction patterns A40" to " There are four types of time saving pattern E40”, and the time saving table 202ej has the values of the time saving counter 203h, the small winning counter 203s, and the general electric operation counter 203ja for each jackpot type and each time saving pattern type (i.e. , first to third end conditions) are defined in association with each other.
As shown in FIG. 1014(b), for "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40" as jackpot types, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "10" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. , the value "1" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "1" of the general electric operation counter 203ja are defined. Therefore, when one of the "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40" and "jackpot D40" is won, the number of times the special symbol changes is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the second end condition is a small number of times. One execution frequency of the winning game is set, and one winning frequency of the normal symbol is set as the third end condition. Since the first time-saving state is set after the end of these jackpots, the time-saving end condition is established by the establishment of the third end condition, which is established by executing the normal symbol winning game once. If the normal pattern winning game is a normal pattern winning B, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, but the second special in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the jackpot is substantially confirmed. Since the lottery of symbols can be executed, the state can be shifted to the first time saving state again. On the other hand, if the hit of the normal pattern is A, the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the first displacement pattern in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, it becomes impossible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, in the first time-saving state set after the end of "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40", it becomes a game property that strongly expects to win the normal pattern B. In addition, the ratio of winning the normal pattern B in the first time saving state is 80% of the normal pattern lottery.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1014(b), for the "jackpot B40", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the small hit counter 203s, and the "No numerical value (indicated by "-" in the figure)" is defined for each value of the operation counter 203ja. Therefore, when "jackpot B40" is won in the normal state, the state after the jackpot is not set to the time-saving state, but is set to the normal state. Therefore, the "jackpot B40" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. When the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the same ending condition as the other jackpot types (“jackpot A40”, “jackpot C40”, and “jackpot D40”) is defined. Since the details are as described above, the description thereof is omitted here.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), for the "time saving pattern A40", the value "14" of the time saving counter 203h and the small winning counter 203s for the case where the game state at the time of winning is the normal state and a value of "10" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are defined. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern A40" is won in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 14 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, the number of normal symbol hits of 10 is set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of "time-saving design A40" is executed 14 times of special design lottery, 1 time of small winning game, or winning of normal design. is executed 10 times. Here, as described above, the second time-saving state is a game state in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are executed almost simultaneously each time when hitting to the left, and substantially a big hit. Since the winning percentage of B per normal pattern that is determined is a gaming state in which the ratio of 3% per lottery of normal patterns is taken into consideration, the special pattern jackpot probability (about 1/320) Each time a lottery is executed, an advantageous game state is formed in which a jackpot is won with a probability of substantially about 1/30. The possibility of winning a total of about 1/30 jackpot by lottery of 10 times of special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 28.5%, so the second based on winning the "time saving pattern A40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 28.5%.
In addition, the first end condition (end condition based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols) is set four times more than the third end condition (end condition based on the number of hits of normal symbols), which is the reason why the time saving symbol is elected This is to allow the game to be played in the second time-saving state without impairing the number of hits of the normal symbols, regardless of the value of the number of balls held at the time of playing. More specifically, when the first end condition and the third end condition are matched, when the second time saving state is started and the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists, the lottery of the normal symbol is not executed, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the value of the time saving counter 203h corresponding to the first end condition is subtracted. In other words, there is a possibility that the first end condition will be satisfied before the third end condition is satisfied, and the more the number of pending balls of the first special symbol, the more substantial the lottery of the first special symbol will be. There is a risk of losing the number of lotteries for normal symbols with a high possibility of a big win. Therefore, in this 37th control example, even if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the second time saving state is any of 0 to 4, the first before the third end condition In order to make it extremely difficult for the termination condition to be satisfied, the first termination condition is set to a number larger than the third termination condition by the maximum number of held balls (that is, four times). By configuring in this way, even if left-handed hitting is started after all the reserved balls of the first special pattern are digested in the second time saving state, the winning game of the normal pattern is executed the number of times corresponding to the third end condition. To prevent a player from being extremely disadvantageous by losing the number of winning games of normal patterns having a substantially high probability of big winning by continuing the time saving state until the game is played. can be done.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), if the game state at the time of winning is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the normal electric operation counter 203ja is defined as "1000". Therefore, when "time saving pattern A40" is won in the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 1004 times as the first end condition, and the execution number of times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, the number of normal symbol hits of 1000 is set. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by the lottery of 1000 special patterns and normal patterns at almost the same time is almost 100%. The second time-saving state set by is substantially a time-saving state in which a jackpot is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), for the "time saving pattern B40", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "34", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1" and the value "30" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern B40" is won in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 34 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, 30 hits of normal symbols are set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design B40" is executed 34 times of the lottery of the special design, or the small winning game is executed once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 30 times. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 30 times of special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 63.5%, so the second based on winning the "time saving pattern B40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 63.5%. It should be noted that, if the game state at the time of winning is a time saving state, similarly to "time saving pattern A40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the normal electric operation counter 203ja Since the value "1000" is associated and defined, the second time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined is set.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), for the "time saving pattern C40", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value "54" of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the small hit counter 203s "1" and the value "50" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern C40" is won in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 54 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, 50 hits of normal symbols are set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design C40" is executed 54 times of the lottery of the special design, or the execution of the small winning game once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 50 times. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 50 special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 81.3%, so the second based on winning the "time saving symbol C40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 81.3%. It should be noted that, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state, like "time saving pattern A40" and "time saving state B40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and Since the value "1000" of the general electric operation counter 203ja is associated and defined, the second time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined is set.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), for the "time saving pattern D40", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "104", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1" and the value "100" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern D40" is won in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 104 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, the number of normal symbol hits of 100 is set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design D40" is executed 104 times of the lottery of the special design, or the execution of the small winning game once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 100 times. The probability of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 100 times of special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 96.5%, so the second based on winning the "time saving symbol D40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 96.5%. It should be noted that, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state, similarly to "time saving pattern A40" ~ "time saving pattern C40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and Since the value "1000" of the general electric operation counter 203ja is associated and defined, the second time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined is set.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), for the "time saving pattern E40", regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the value "1000" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are respectively defined. Therefore, when "time saving pattern E40" is won, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 1004 times as the first end condition regardless of the game state, and the number of executions of the small winning game is 1 time as the second end condition. is set, and as the third end condition, 1000 normal symbol hits are set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design E40" is executed 1004 times of the lottery of the special design, or the execution of the small winning game once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 1000 times. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 1000 special patterns and normal patterns at almost the same time is almost 100%. The state is a time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined.

In this way, in the thirty-seventh control example, the end condition of the second time-saving state given according to the type of time-saving pattern is changed to make the degree of expectation for a big hit different for each type of time-saving pattern. In other words, the possibility of winning a big win is made different by changing the number of execution times of winning games of normal patterns until the second time saving state is completed according to the type of time saving patterns. By constructing in this way, when the time-saving pattern is won, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the time-saving pattern, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1015(a), details of the small hit type selection table 202fj in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. Drawing 1015 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of this small hit classification selection table 202fj. As shown in FIG. 1015 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 79", "small hit A40" is associated with the small hit type, and the small hit type "Small hit B40" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range of "80 to 99" for the value of the counter C5. Here, both "small win A40" and "small win B40" can easily enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 simply by continuing to hit right during execution of the small win game. It is a type, and when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit A40", while winning the big hit C40 (10 round big hit), the game ball moves to the specific area 650e3 in "small hit B40". It is configured to win a jackpot D40 (three-round jackpot) when a ball is entered. Even if any jackpot is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the first time-saving state, so only in terms of the number of rounds when the jackpot is won ” It is a small hit type with a higher degree of advantage. Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random value (counter value) associated with "small hit A40" and "small hit B40" Since they are 80 pieces and 20 pieces, respectively, the ratio of determining "small prize A40" and "small prize B40" when winning the small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 80% (80/100). and 20% (20/100).
Next, with reference to Drawing 1015 (b), the details of time saving classification selection table 202ja in this 37th example of control are explained. This time-saving type selection table 202ja is a data table referred to for determining the type of time-saving design when the time-saving design is won in the special design lottery. As shown in FIG. 1015 (b), in the time saving type selection table 202ja, for each of the five types of time saving design types of "time saving design A40" to "time saving design E40", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1015 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 89", "time saving pattern A40" is associated with the time saving pattern type. ing. As described above, this "time saving pattern A40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is set to 10 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern A40" is 90. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design A40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 90% (90/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1015(b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 94" in association with "time saving pattern B40" as the time saving pattern type. As described above, this "time saving pattern B40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is set to 30 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern B40" is five. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design B40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 5% (5/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1015(b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "95 to 97" in association with "time saving design C40" as time saving design type. As described above, this "time saving pattern C40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal pattern winning game) is set to 50 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern C40" is 3. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design C40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 3% (3/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1015(b), the value "98" of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with "time saving pattern D40" as the time saving pattern type. As described above, this "time saving pattern D40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is set to 100 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern D40" is one. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design D40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 1% (1/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1015(b), the value "99" of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with "time saving pattern E40" as the time saving pattern type. As described above, this "time saving pattern E40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal pattern winning game) is set to 1000 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "time saving pattern E40" is one. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design E40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 1% (1/100).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1015(c), the general/universal figure per type selection table 202jb in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This normal pattern winning type selection table 202jb is a data table that is referred to for selecting (determining) the normal pattern winning type when the normal pattern is a winning in the normal design lottery. As shown in FIG. 1015(c), in this general pattern per type selection table 202jb, the normal per pattern per type and the value range of the second per type counter C6 are defined in association with each other for each game state. ing.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1015 (c), when the game state at the time of the normal symbol lottery is the normal state, the entire range of the value of the second hit type counter C6 ("0 to 99" Range) is defined in association with A per normal pattern as a type per normal pattern. As described above, this normal game hit A is an opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a opens and closes (displaces ) is a general map per type.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1015 (c), when the game state at the time of the lottery of normal symbols is the first time saving state, the value of the second per type counter C2 is for the range of "0 to 19""Per normal map A" is defined in association, and the value of the second per type counter C6 "20 to 99" is defined in association with "per normal pattern B". As described above, in the normal figure hit B, the electric accessory 640a is opened and closed (displaced) in an opening and closing pattern (second displacement pattern) that allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entrance 640. It is a general map of the type. And, since the lottery of the second special symbol is a lottery in which the big hit is substantially determined, the general pattern hit B can be said to be a general pattern hit of the type in which the big hit is substantially determined. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the second per type counter C6 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern (counter value) Since the number of is 20 and 80, respectively, the ratio of determining A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern when winning the normal pattern in the first time saving state is 20% (20/100 ) and 80% (80/100). Since the first time-saving state is a game state that ends when the normal symbol winning game is executed once (it falls to the normal state), in the first time-saving state, substantially at a rate of 80% While the jackpot game is executed by winning the normal game B where the jackpot is fixed, the game ball cannot be entered into the second ball inlet 640 at a rate of 20%, and the normal state is entered as it is. A game state in which the player falls is formed.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1015 (c), when the game state at the time of the lottery of normal symbols is the second time saving state, the value of the second hit type counter C2 is for the range of "0 to 96""Per normal map A" is defined in association, and the value of the second per type counter C6 "97 to 99" is defined in association with "per normal pattern B". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the second per type counter C6 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern (counter value) Since the number of is 97 and 3 respectively, the ratio of determining A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern when winning the normal pattern in the first time saving state is 97% (97/100 ) and 3% (3/100). In the second time-saving state, since the game state is ended by executing any number of times of 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, and 1000 times of normal symbol hits, in the second time-saving state is a game property aiming to win 3% normal pattern B before reaching the number of times of normal pattern winning games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1011(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 of the thirty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1011(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1011 (b), the RAM 203 in the thirty-seventh control example is the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-ninth control example described above (see FIG. 804 (b)), instead of the special figure 2 counter 203t. The only difference is that an electrically operated counter 203ja is provided. This normal electric operation counter 203ja, as described above, is for determining whether or not the end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of normal symbol hits executed after the time saving state is set is established (determines). It is a counter, and a counter value corresponding to the jackpot type or the time saving type is set at the end of the jackpot or when the time saving pattern is stopped (see S226A in FIG. 1018). In addition, the normal electric operation counter 203ja is updated by subtracting 1 from the value each time the start timing of the normal symbol winning game is reached (see S2332A in FIG. 1025(b)). Based on the value of the general electric operation counter 203ja, it is determined whether or not the third end condition (time reduction end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is established.
In addition, as one of the time saving end conditions in the 37th control example, the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of times the game is executed per normal pattern is defined. 1. Because it has a board structure capable of executing only the lottery of normal symbols without executing the lottery of 1 special symbols, and has a game property that a big win is substantially determined by winning a normal pattern B. , If only the end condition (first end condition) based on the number of lotteries of special symbols and the end condition (second end condition) based on the number of executions of small winning games are specified as time saving end conditions, the first time saving state or the second This is because if the player continues to hit to the right after transitioning to the time-saving state, a problem arises that the time-saving state continues until the winning of the normal pattern B, in which the jackpot is substantially determined. Therefore, in this 37th control example, as the time saving end condition, it is configured to define the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game, and the right hitting is continued in the time saving state, and the special symbol is executed. Even if the lottery is not performed at all, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the regular pattern winning game over the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the time saving state always continues until the normal drawing B is won.
Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1016(a). FIG. 1016(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1016(a), the ROM 222 in the thirty-seventh control example has a standby effect selection table 222ja added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-ninth control example (see FIG. 811(a)). The difference is that the defeat number selection table 222b, the defeat effect mode selection table 222c, the additional reduction value selection table 222d, the effect stage data table 222e, and the game environment data table 222f are deleted. The standby effect selection table 222ja is a data table referred to for determining the effect mode of the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1002(b) and 1003). Details of this standby effect selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1017 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the standby effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 1017, this standby effect selection table 222ja is a combination of icon (suggestion pattern) and the first effect for each combination of the number of times of time saving corresponding to the type of time saving pattern won this time, and the situation at the start of the effect. A correspondence relationship with the range of values of the counter 223f1 is defined. Here, as described above, the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1002(b) and 1003) is from the end of the variable display corresponding to the time saving design until all the reserved balls of the first special design are consumed ( If the number of pending balls is 0, it is an effect that is executed using a period of 5 seconds after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed), and the variable display based on the suspended ball of the first special symbol is being executed. This effect is executed to prevent the game ball from entering (passing through) the first ball entrance 64 (and the central through gate 67c). Therefore, after the time saving pattern is stop-displayed and the transition is made to the second time saving state, the variable display effect can be continuously executed up to four times (up to the upper limit number of the balls held in the first special pattern). composed of performances.

As shown in FIG. 1017, as a situation when executing a new production within the production period of the chance time standby production, for the situation at the start of the big hit fluctuation, regardless of the number of times of shortening (third end condition) , the icon with the characters "10 times", the icon with the characters "30 times", and the characters "continue" for the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 49". A combination of an icon with the character "congratulation" and an icon with the character "congratulation" is displayed. A notification effect A) is associated and defined. Similarly, when the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "50 to 89", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", and the characters "continue" are displayed. A combination of an icon with the character "congratulation" and an icon with the character "congratulation" is displayed. The notification effect B) is defined in association with the first effect counter 223f1 value in the range of "90 to 99", two icons with the characters "∞" and the character "Congratulations". A combination of the two icons shown above is displayed, and an effect (hit notification effect C) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 hitting the icon with the word "celebration". there is
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first effect counter 223f1, the random values associated with the winning notification effect A, the winning reporting effect B, and the winning reporting effect C counter value) are 50, 40, and 10, respectively, so that when the winning variation is started within the performance period of the chance time standby performance, the winning notification performance A, the winning reporting performance B, and the winning reporting are performed. The ratios at which production C is determined are 50% (50/100), 40% (40/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. In addition, the combination of the icons (suggestion patterns) displayed first in the hit notification effect A is a combination that is determined at a relatively high rate even when notifying a small number of times of time saving (10 times of time saving times). This is positioned as a mode of presentation with a low degree of expectation in which a notification that is relatively advantageous to the player is made. In addition, the combination of icons (suggestion patterns) that are first displayed in the hit notification effect B is a combination that is selected even when a relatively large number of times of time reduction (100 times or 1000 times) is set. This is positioned as an effect mode with a high degree of expectation that a notice advantageous to the target player is made. Furthermore, the combination of icons (suggestion patterns) displayed first in the winning notification effect C is a combination that can be selected only in a situation where 1000 time-saving times, which is substantially equivalent to continuing until a big win, is reported, At the stage when the combination of icons is displayed, it is positioned as an extremely advantageous presentation mode in which it is determined that it is either a win or a 1000 time reduction state in which a big win is substantially determined.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 10 times, and in the state of 0 hold off fluctuation is started, or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 79”. A combination of an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "Continue", and an icon with the characters "Congratulations" is displayed. Ultimately, an effect (10 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters “10 times” are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined as “10 times”. 80 to 98”, an icon with the characters “10 times”, an icon with the characters “30 times”, an icon with the characters “50 times”, and an icon with the characters “Continue” A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (10 times notification effect B) is associated with the rabbit character 801 striking the icon with the letters “10 times” attached. An icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", and the characters "∞" are added to the value "99" of the first effect counter 223f1. A combination of an icon and an icon with the characters "continue" is displayed, and finally an effect in which the rabbit character 801 hits the icon with the characters "10 times" to notify (10 times notification effect) C) is associated and defined.
On the other hand, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to a time saving state of 10 times, and the situation where the number of pending balls is 1 or more and the fluctuation is started (that is, in the production period Execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last time), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 94", and the character "10 times" is attached. A combination of one icon and one icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with the characters "Continue" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification. (Continuous notification effect A) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "95 to 99", an icon with the characters "10 times" and the characters "30 times". An icon with the characters "50 times" and an icon with the characters "Continued" are displayed. An effect (continuous notification effect B) for notifying by the character 801 striking is associated and defined. As a result, when the second time saving state of 10 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby effect, the continuous notification effect A is executed at a high rate while the number of pending balls is 1 or more, and the number of pending balls is executed. becomes 0, the notification effect A is executed 10 times at a high rate.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 30 times, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 39”. A combination of two icons with characters "10 times", one icon with characters "30 times", and one icon with characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally "30 times" is displayed. An effect (30 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters "three times" is attached is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is "40 to 98". For the range, an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continue" A combination of icons is displayed, and finally an effect (30 times notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon with the characters "30 times" is associated and defined. For the value "99" of the production counter 223f1, an icon with the characters "30", an icon with the characters "∞", an icon with the characters "continuation", and an icon with the characters "celebration" are displayed. A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (30 times report effect C) is associated with the rabbit character 801 beating the icon with the letters “30 times” attached. stipulated.
On the other hand, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to a time saving state of 30 times, and the situation where the number of pending balls is 1 or more and the fluctuation is started (that is, in the production period Execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last time), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 94", and the character "10 times" is attached. A combination of one icon and one icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with the characters "Continue" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification. (Continuous notification effect A) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "95 to 98", an icon with the characters "10 times" and the characters "30 times". An icon with the characters "50 times" and an icon with the characters "Continued" are displayed. An effect (continuous notification effect B) that is notified by the character 801 striking is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1, which is "99," and an icon with the characters "30 times" attached. A combination of an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continued", and an icon with the characters "celebration" was displayed, and finally the characters "continued" were added. An effect (continuous notification effect C) in which the icon is hit by the rabbit character 801 is defined in association with it. As a result, when the second time saving state with the number of time saving times of 30 times is set, as a chance time standby effect, the ratio of continuous notification effect A while the number of pending balls is 1 or more is higher than when the number of time saving times is 10 times As it becomes lower, the ratio of the continuous notification effect B becomes higher. Further, there is a possibility that the continuous notification effect C, which cannot be selected with ten times of time saving, is selected. Further, when the number of pending balls becomes 0, the notification effect B is executed 30 times at a relatively high rate.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 50 times, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect that is executed last in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 9”. A combination of an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "Continue", and an icon with the characters "Congratulations" is displayed. Ultimately, an effect (30 times notification effect D) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters "30 times" are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined as " 10 to 12”, an icon with the characters “10 times”, an icon with the characters “30 times”, an icon with the characters “50 times”, and an icon with the characters “Continue” A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (30 times report effect B) is associated with the rabbit character 801 hitting an icon with letters "30 times" attached. An icon with the character "30 times", an icon with the character "∞", and the character "Continue" for the defined range in which the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is "13, 14". A combination of an icon marked with and an icon marked with the word “congratulations” is displayed, and finally the icon marked with the word “30 times” is beaten by the rabbit character 801 to notify the effect ( 30 times notification effect C) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "15 to 89", the icon with the characters "10 times" and the characters "30 times". A combination of an icon with the characters "50 times" and an icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally an icon with the characters "50 times" is displayed. The effect (50 times notification effect A) that is notified by the character 801 hitting is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of “90 to 99”, the character “50 times” icon with , icon with characters "100 times", icon with characters "∞", icon with "Continue" and A combination of icons with the letters "50 times" is displayed, and finally an effect (50 times report effect B) is associated with the rabbit character 801 hitting the icon with the letters "50 times". are stipulated.
That is, when the number of times of time saving is 50 times, it is configured so that there is a possibility that the number of times of time saving (30 times) less than the actual number is notified. Therefore, even if a small number of times of time saving (30 times) is notified, the player can expect that there is a possibility that a larger number of times of time saving is set. In addition, when the number of times of time saving that is smaller than the actual number is notified, when the number of times of time saving on the display becomes 0, an effect of adding the remaining number of times of time saving that has not been notified is executed. Similarly, when the number of times of time saving is increased by winning the time saving pattern during the chance time, when the number of times of time saving on the display becomes 0, the performance of adding the remaining number of times of time saving is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the number of times of time saving on the display is reduced, the game can be played in anticipation that the number of times of time saving will be added, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. can be made

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, in the situation that the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 50 times, and the state that the number of pending balls is 1 or more and the deviation is started (That is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect that is executed other than the last in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to "10 times" for the range of "0 to 79". A combination of three icons with letters and one icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with letters "Continue" is beaten by the rabbit character 801. The effect (continuous notification effect A) to be notified by doing is defined in association, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "80 to 94", the icon with the characters "10 times" attached, A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continued" is displayed, and finally the characters "Continued" are added. An effect (continuous notification effect B) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking the selected icon to notify that the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "95 to 99", and "30 A combination of an icon with the characters "times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "celebration" is displayed. An effect (continuation notification effect C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the character "continue" is attached is associated and defined. As a result, when the second time saving state of 50 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby effect, the rate of continuous notification effect A is 10 times or 30 times of time saving while the number of pending balls is 1 or more It becomes lower than the case, and the ratio of the continuous information effect B and the continuous information effect C becomes high. Further, when the number of held balls becomes 0, the 50-time notification effect A is executed at a relatively high rate.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, in a situation in which the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to 100 times of time saving state, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 14”. A combination of an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed. , and finally, an effect (50 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters "50 times" are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined. For the range of "15 to 24", an icon with the characters "50 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", and an icon with the characters "Continue" A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (50 times notification effect B) is associated with the rabbit character 801 beating the icon with the letters “50 times” attached. An icon with the character "10 times", an icon with the character "100 times", and an icon with the character "∞" are defined and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "25 to 69". A combination of an icon with letters and an icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally an icon with letters "100 times" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification. (100 times notification effect A) is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "70 to 99", the icon with the characters "50 times", and the icon "100 times". A combination of an icon with letters, an icon with letters "∞", and an icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally an icon with letters "100 times" is displayed. A performance (100-time reporting performance B) for notifying by hitting by the character 801 of is associated with and defined.
That is, even when the number of times of time saving is 100 times, similarly to the case of 50 times, the number of times of time saving (50 times) less than the actual number may be notified. Therefore, even if a small number of times of time saving (50 times) is notified, it is possible to make the player expect that there is a possibility that a larger number of times of time saving is set.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 100 times, and the number of pending balls is 1 or more. (That is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last in the effect period) is set to "10 times" for the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 49". A combination of three icons with letters and one icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with letters "Continue" is beaten by the rabbit character 801. The effect (continuous notification effect A) to be notified by doing is defined in association, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "50 to 89", the icon with the characters "10 times" attached, A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continued" is displayed, and finally the characters "Continued" are added. An effect (continuous notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the selected icon is associated with and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to "30 A combination of an icon with the characters "times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "celebration" is displayed. An effect (continuation notification effect C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the word “continue” is attached to the icon is associated with and defined, and the value “99” of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined. , an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", an icon with the characters "Continue", and an icon with the characters "Congratulations" are displayed. Finally, an effect (continuation notification effect D) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking an icon with the word "continuation". With these, if the second time saving state of 100 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby production, the rate of continuous notification production A is 10 times to 50 times of time saving while the number of pending balls is 1 or more It becomes lower than the case, and the ratio of the continuous information effect B and the continuous information effect C becomes high. Moreover, when the number of times of time saving is 10 times to 50 times, there is a possibility that the continuous notification effect D that cannot be selected is selected.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, in a situation in which the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to 1000 times of time saving state, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 49”. A combination of an icon with the characters "50 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", and an icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed. Ultimately, an effect (100 times notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters “100 times” are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to “100 times”. 50 to 64”, an icon with the characters “10 times”, an icon with the characters “100 times”, an icon with the characters “∞”, and the characters “Continue” A combination of icons marked with is displayed, and finally, an effect (∞ notification effect A) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking an icon marked with the letter “∞”, An icon with the characters "50 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", and an icon with the characters "∞" are added to the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "65 to 98". and an icon with the character "continue" are displayed, and finally the icon with the character "∞" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification (∞ notification effect). B) is defined in association with the first effect counter 223f1 value of "99", two icons with the characters "∞" and two icons with the characters "celebration". A combination with an icon is displayed, and an effect (∞ notification effect C) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking the icon with the letter "∞".
That is, even when the number of times of time saving is 1000 times, similarly to the case of 50 times or 100 times, the number of times of time saving (100 times) less than the actual number may be notified. Therefore, even if a small number of times of time saving (100 times) is notified, the player can expect that there is a possibility that a larger number of times of time saving is set.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1017, in the situation that the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 1000 times, and the number of pending balls is 1 or more state, the situation that deviation starts (That is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last in the effect period) is set to "10 times" for the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 49". A combination of three icons with letters and one icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with letters "Continue" is beaten by the rabbit character 801. The effect (continuous notification effect A) to be notified by doing is defined in association, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "50 to 74", the icon with the characters "10 times" attached, A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continued" is displayed, and finally the characters "Continued" are added. An effect (continuous notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the selected icon is associated with and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to "30 A combination of an icon with the characters "times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "celebration" is displayed. An effect (continuation notification effect C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters “continued” are attached is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to “95 to 99”. ”, an icon with the characters “100 times”, an icon with the characters “∞”, an icon with the characters “continue”, and the characters “celebration” A combination of icons is displayed, and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect D) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking an icon to which the word "continue" is added. As a result, if the second time saving state of 1000 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby production, the rate of continuous notification production A is 10 times to 50 times of time saving while the ball is held 1 or more. It becomes lower than the case, and the ratio of the continuous information effect B and the continuous information effect C becomes high. Further, the possibility that the continuous notification effect D, which cannot be selected when the number of times of time saving is 10 times to 50 times, is selected is higher than when the number of times of time saving is 100 times.
In this way, in the thirty-seventh control example, the chance time standby effect is configured to execute the effect of notifying the number of times of time saving, and the selection ratio of the combination of icons displayed first in the notification effect is set to the number of times of time saving. By differentiating the icon accordingly, it is possible to realize a playability in which the number of times of time saving is predicted by the combination of the icons. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game during execution of the chance time standby effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1016(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1016(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1016(b), the RAM 223 in the thirty-seventh control example has a standby effect flag 223ja and the number of times The difference is that a counter 223jb and a waiting period timer 223jc are added. In addition, a subjugation number counter 223i, a remaining subjugation number counter 223j, a specific number of top ground completed flag 223k, a rush period measurement counter 223m, a prize ball number counter 223n, a pending ream flag 223o, a round number counter 223p, and SW It is also different in that the effective time counter 223q, the right-handed flag 223r, the V-winning flag 223s, the effect fixed flag 223t, and the game environment storage area 223u are deleted.
The standby effect flag 223ja is a flag indicating whether or not the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1002(b) and 1003) is being executed. If it is ON, it indicates that the chance time standby effect is being executed. If it is off, it means that the chance time standby effect is not being executed. This standby effect flag 223ja is set to ON when a state command indicating that the transition to the second time saving state is received from the main control device 110 (see S3451A in FIG. 1028), at the end timing of the chance time standby effect It is set to OFF (see S5711A in FIG. 1033 and S4617A in FIG. 1034). When a new variable display effect is started with the standby effect flag 223ja turned on, the above-described standby effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1017) is referred to, and the variation of the variable display mode accompanied by the new chance time standby effect is changed. A display effect is set.
The standby effect frequency counter 223jb is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations during the execution period of the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1002(b) and 1003). The initial value of the waiting effect number counter 223jb is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time a new effect mode is executed during the execution period of the chance time waiting effect of 1 (Fig. 1028). (see S3455A in FIG. 1033 and S5709A in FIG. 1033). In the chance time standby performance, when the standby performance frequency counter 223jb reaches 4, the performance is terminated and the normal chance time performance is started. This means that if an irregular game method is executed in which the player continues to hit to the left while the chance time waiting effect is being executed and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is maintained at 1 or more, then the chances are endless. This is intended to prevent the time standby effect from continuing.
The waiting period timer 223jc is a timer that measures the elapsed time after the lottery of normal symbols is started in the chance time (second time saving state). The initial value of this waiting period timer 223jc is set to 0, and a timer value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set each time a normal symbol lottery is executed after the chance time waiting effect is completed (Fig. 1031 S5608A reference), the value is subtracted and updated each time the effect update process (see FIG. 1034) is executed. When this standby period timer 223jc is updated to 0, it is determined that the lottery timing of the normal symbol and the timing of the lottery start of the first special symbol are significantly different, and the normal symbol that was started 0.2 seconds before. A pseudo variation display effect for notifying the lottery result of figure variation is started (see S4614A in FIG. 1034). As a result, even if the lottery timing of the first special symbol and the lottery timing of the normal symbol deviate, the variable display performance can be executed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol with a substantially higher expectation for the big win. , it is possible to realize a suitable production mode.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1018 to 1025, details of various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1018, details of the special symbol variation process (S104A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1018 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104A). This special symbol variation process (S104A), like the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 816) in the twenty-ninth control example described above, changes the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b during the variable display of the special symbol. It is a process to do.
Of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1018) in the thirty-seventh control example, in each of the processes of S201 to S207 and S211 to S223, S201 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 816) in the above-described twenty-ninth control example to S207 and S211 to S223 are executed. Also, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 1018) in the thirty-seventh control example, when the process of S207 or the process of S214 ends, the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 817) in the twenty-ninth control example is replaced with a special symbol. Determination processing is executed (S209A), then special symbol variation pattern selection processing is executed instead of special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 818) in the twenty-ninth control example (S210A), and this processing ends. Details of these special symbol determination processing (S209A) and special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S210A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 1019 and 1020, and FIGS. 1021 and 1022, respectively.
In addition, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 1018) in the present 37th control example, in the process of S218, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S218: No), then this time (S225A), if the lottery result is the time-saving pattern winning (S225A: Yes), the time-saving end condition corresponding to the type of the time-saving pattern won this time is set to the time-saving counter 203h. , the small hit counter 203s and the normal electric operation counter 203ja (S226A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S225A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not the time saving symbol winning (S225A: No), the process proceeds to S222.
In addition, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 1018) in the present 37th control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit in the process of S222 (S222: No), or the S223 process ends When it does, it replaces with the time saving update process (refer FIG. 820) in the 29th control example mentioned above, and performs a time saving update process (S224A), and complete|finishes this process. The details of this time saving update process (S224A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1019, details of the special symbol determination process (S209A) described above will be described. This special symbol determination process (S209A) is a process executed instead of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 817) in the twenty-ninth control example, and is similar to the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 817) in the twenty-ninth control example. Second, it is a process for executing a special symbol lottery. Of the special symbol determination process (S209A) in this 37th control example, in each process of S301 to S305, the same process as each process of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 817) in the 29th control example is executed.
Also, in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1019) in the present 37th control example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit in the process of S303 (S303: No), control according to the type of loss is executed (S311A), and the process ends. Details of this out-of-office processing (S311A) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1020 is a flow chart showing this out-time processing (S311A). In this off-time processing (S311A), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is time-saving design winning (S2101A), and when it is determined that the lottery result is time-saving design winning (S2101A: Yes), the time-saving design type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the time-saving design to be displayed on the first design display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S2101A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2101A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a small hit. Then (S2103A), when it is determined that it is a small hit (S2103A: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a small hit (S2104A), and the small hit type corresponding to the value of the small hit type counter C5 is It is set as a small hit symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S2105A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2103A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S2103A: No), the processes of S2104A and S2105A are skipped, and the process is finished as it is.

By executing this loss processing (see FIG. 1020), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss (other than a big win), the display of the first symbol can be preferably set according to the lottery result.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1021, details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1021 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210A). This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210A) selects the first symbol variation pattern according to the special symbol lottery result, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 818) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. This is a process for
Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1021) in this 37th control example, in each process of S401 to S408, each process of S401 to S408 of the variation pattern selection process in the 29th control example (see FIG. 818) The same processing as is performed. In addition, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1021) in the thirty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the deviation (small hit, time saving (Including symbol winning) is performed (S421A), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of the out-of-time type determination processing (S421A) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1022 is a flow chart showing this out-time type determination processing (S421A). In the out time type determination process (S421A), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the time saving design winning (S2201A), and if it is determined that the time saving design is winning (S2201A: Yes), time saving The type selection table 202ja (see FIG. 1015(b)) is referred to determine the type of the time saving design (S2202A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S2203A). , When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2203A: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection table 202fj (see FIG. 1015 (a)) (S2204A), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S2203A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a normal loss (complete loss)) (S2203A: No), the processing of S2204A is skipped. and terminate this process.

By executing this off time type determination processing (see FIG. 1022), when the lottery result of the special symbol is the time reduction design winning or the small hit, the time reduction design type or the small hit type can be suitably determined. .
Next, with reference to FIG. 1023, details of the time saving update process (S224A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This time saving update process (S224A) is a process executed instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 820) in the 29th control example, and determines the time saving end condition in the same manner as the time saving update process (see FIG. 820) It is a process for terminating the time saving state when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied while updating the various counter values for the purpose.
Of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023) in the thirty-seventh control example, in each process of S601 to S605 and S607, respectively S601 to S605 of the time saving update process (see FIG. 820) in the twenty-ninth control example described above, and The same processing as each processing of S607 is executed.
In addition, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023) in the present 37th control example, when the process of S605 ends, the values of the small hit counter 203s and the general electric operation counter 203ja are reset (set) to 0 (S621A), The process proceeds to S607. The processing of this S621A is executed instead of S606 of the time saving update processing (see FIG. 820) in the 29th control example is simply the special figure 2 counter for determining the third end condition in the 29th control example In place of 203t, in the thirty-seventh control example, the change is due to the provision of a normal electric operation counter 203ja. In other words, in the 29th control example, the time-saving end condition is established when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches the specified number of times, but in the 37th control example, instead of this, the normal symbol wins. This is a change due to the provision of a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of game executions reaches a specified number of times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1023, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023) in the thirty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted to 0 in the process of S604 (S604: No), then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display at the current variation stop timing is a small win (S622A), and if it is determined that it is not a small win (S622A: No). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the current variation display is a small hit (S622A: Yes), first, to set the start of the small hit game The small hit start flag 203n is set to ON (S623A), and then the value of the small hit counter 203s is subtracted by 1 (S624A).
When the processing of S624A ends, then it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit counter 203s is decremented to 0 (S625A), and if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is decremented to 0 (S625A: Yes ), because it means that the time-saving end condition (second end condition) based on the fact that the number of small hits has reached the specified number of times, each process of S626A to S628A for ending the time-saving state is executed. More specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by updating the data in the game state storage area 203g to the data corresponding to the normal state (S626A), and each value of the time reduction counter 203h and the general electric operation counter 203ja is changed. The time saving end condition is cleared by resetting (setting) to 0 (S627A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S628A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S625, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is not decremented to 0 (S625A: No), it means that the second end condition is not satisfied, so S626A This process is terminated by skipping the processes from S628A.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1024, normal symbol variation processing (S106A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This normal design variation process (S106A) is a process that is executed in place of the normal design variation process (see FIG. 824) in the above-described twenty-ninth control example. This is a process for executing a symbol lottery and setting the opening/closing control of the electric accessary 640a when a normal symbol wins. FIG. 1024 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106A).
Of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1624) in this 37th control example, in each of the processes of S1101 to S1108, S1111, S1113, S1115 to S1117, and S1121, the normal symbol variation processing in the above-described 29th control example ( 824) are executed.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1024) in the thirty-seventh control example, in the process of S1108, the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (that is, the current game state is the first or second time saving state) (S1108: Yes), the second per random number table 202cj for the time saving state (see FIG. 1013 (a)) to obtain the lottery result of the normal symbol (S1131A), process to S1111. On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (that is, the current gaming state is the normal state) (S1108: No), the normal state for the With reference to the random number table 202cj (see FIG. 1013(a)) per 2, the lottery result of the normal symbol is acquired (S1132A), and the process proceeds to S1111.
Also, as shown in FIG. 1024, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1024) in the present 37th control example, in the process of S1111, when it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a normal symbol win, (S1111: Yes), the normal pattern hit type is specified and the normal pattern hit time process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the hit type is executed (S1133A), and the process proceeds to S1134A. The details of the processing (S1133A) at the time of this general pattern will be described later with reference to FIG. 1025(a). In the process of S1133A or the process of S1134A executed after the process of S1113 is completed, the variation time is set to 1 second (S1134A), and this process is terminated.
Also, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1024) in the present 37th control example, in the process of S1117, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit, first, based on the number of times the normal symbol hits A third end condition determination process for determining whether or not the time saving end condition (third end condition) is satisfied is executed (S1135A). Details of the third termination condition determination process (S1135A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1025(b). When the processing of S1135A is completed, it is then determined whether or not the normal pattern hit of this time is the normal pattern hit A (S1136A), and if it is determined that the normal pattern hit of this time is the normal pattern hit A (S1136A: Yes), the displacement pattern of the electric accessary 640a is set to the first displacement pattern for A per normal figure (that is, the displacement pattern that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640). After setting (S1137A), the process proceeds to S1121. On the other hand, in the processing of S1136, if it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol this time is not the normal pattern hit A (that is, the normal pattern hit B) (S1136A: No), the displacement pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second displacement pattern for the normal figure B (that is, the displacement pattern that allows the game ball to be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 and substantially determines the jackpot winning). (S1138A), the process proceeds to S1121.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1025(a), the details of the process (S1133A) at the time of the above-described general pattern will be described. FIG. 1025(a) is a flow chart showing the process (S1133A) at the time of this general pattern. When this general pattern hit time process (S1133A) is executed, first, with reference to the general pattern per type selection table 202jb (see FIG. 1015 (c)), the general pattern per type according to the current game state is determined (S2301A), and then set a command per normal pattern for notifying the determined normal pattern per type to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2302A). The command per normal figure set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. be done. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the normal pattern per command, specifies the normal pattern per type from the normal pattern per command, and performs effect control in consideration of the specified per pattern. In particular, in a time-saving state in which it is possible to win a normal pattern win B in which a big win is substantially determined, a performance indicating whether or not a normal pattern win B is executed every time a lottery of normal patterns is executed. After the processing of S2302A ends, the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 for indicating the normal pattern hit is set (S2303A), and this processing ends.

By executing this normal figure per time process (see FIG. 1025 (a)), it is possible to determine the normal figure per type at a rate corresponding to the game state (normal state, first time saving state, second time saving state) can. That is, since the probability of the normal pattern hit B in which the jackpot is substantially determined can be varied according to the game state, it is possible to form game states with different substantial jackpot probabilities.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1025(b), details of the above-described third termination condition determination process (S1135A) will be described. FIG. 1025(b) is a flow chart showing this third termination condition determination process (S1135A). As shown in FIG. 1025(b), when the third end condition determination process (S1135A) is executed, first, whether the counter value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (1 or more) Yes) or not (S2331A), and if it is determined that the counter value of the general electric operation counter 203ja is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2331A: No), the current gaming state is the normal state , which means that there is no need to determine whether the third end condition is satisfied or not, so the process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the processing of S2331A, if it is determined that the value of the general electric operation counter 203ja is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2331A: Yes), the current gaming state is a time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state), the value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja is then updated by subtracting 1 (S2332A), and the value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja after the subtraction is updated to 0. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S2333A). In the processing of S2333A, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja has been updated to 0 (S2333A: Yes), it is determined that the third end condition is satisfied, and S2334 to S2336 for ending the time saving state Execute each process of Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by updating the data in the game state storage area 203g to the data corresponding to the normal state (S2334A), and then the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the small hit counter 203s are set together. It is reset to 0 (S2335A). Next, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2336A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2333A, if it is determined that the counter value of the general electric operation counter 203ja after subtraction has not been updated to 0 (updated to a value of 1 or more) (S2333A: No), the third It is determined that the end condition is not satisfied, the processes of S2334A to S2336A are skipped, and the present process is ended.
By executing this third end condition determination process (see FIG. 1025(b)), the time saving state can be terminated when the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game reaches the specified number of times. As a result, even if the player continues to hit to the right in which the lottery of the first special symbol cannot be executed in the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated by executing the winning game of the normal symbols for the prescribed number of times. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the time saving state continues until the normal hit B is achieved without fail even if the player continuously hits to the right.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-seventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1026 to 1034. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1026, details of the command determination process (S3113A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This command determination process (S3113A) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 835) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. This is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from.
In each of S3201 to S3211, S3213, and S3218 of the command determination process (see FIG. 1026) in the thirty-seventh control example, S3201 to S3211 and S3213 of the command determination process in the twenty-ninth control example (see FIG. 835) , and S3218 are executed. In addition, in the command determination processing (see FIG. 1026) in the thirty-seventh control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3211 that a state command has been received (S3211: Yes), the state command processing in the twenty-ninth control example (see FIG. 837 reference), the status command process is executed (S3231A), and this process ends. Details of this state command processing (S3231A) will be described later with reference to FIGS.
Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 1026) in the thirty-seventh control example, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the process of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the hit-related process in the twenty-ninth control example ( FIG. 838) is replaced with a hit-related process (S3232A), and this process ends. Although not shown, in this hit-related process (S3232A), the hit-related process (see FIG. 838) in the twenty-ninth control example is replaced with the jackpot-related process (S3504) instead of the jackpot-related process (S3504A). is executed, and the only difference is that the small hit related process (S3508A) is executed instead of the small hit related process (S3508). Details of these jackpot related processing (S3504A) and small winning related processing (S3508A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 1029 and 1030, respectively.
On the other hand, in the process of S3213, if it is determined that the commands received from the main controller 110 do not include a hit-related command (S3213: No), then the commands received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not the command per normal pattern is included (S3233A), and if it is determined that the command per normal pattern is included (S3233A: Yes), the control according to the type per normal pattern that is notified Execute command processing per general pattern for performing (S3234A), and terminate this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S3233A, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the general pattern hit command (S3233A: No), the process proceeds to S3218.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1027, details of the above-described state command processing (S3231A) will be described. As described above, this state command processing (S3231A) is processing executed instead of the state command processing (see FIG. 837) in the twenty-ninth control example. It is a process for performing control according to the game state notified by.
Of the state command processing (see FIG. 1027) in the thirty-seventh control example, the processing of S3401 and S3402 is the same as the processing of S3401 and S3402 of the state command processing (see FIG. 837) in the twenty-ninth control example. process is executed. In the state command processing (see FIG. 1027) in the thirty-seventh control example, when it is determined in the processing of S3402 that the state command received this time is a state command for notifying the transition to the normal state (S3402: Yes ), set the back image command for display for setting the back image for the normal state (S3421A), clear the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h (S3422A), and finish this process. If the transition timing to the normal state is the start timing of B per normal pattern, the first suggestion effect based on winning per normal pattern B (Aim for V above, see FIG. 1004 (b)) Since the back image is set in the layer on the front side of the back image, the back image for the normal state becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the player can be made to pay attention to the first suggestive effect.
On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command that notifies the transition to the normal state (S3402: No), then the state command indicating the transition to the first time saving state It is determined whether there is (S3423A), and if it is determined that it is a state command indicating the transition to the first time saving state (S3423A: Yes), the time saving information included in the received state command is stored in the time saving information storage area 223h (S3424A), sets a display command indicating that the rush is in progress (S3425A), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3423A, if it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command that notifies the transition to the first time saving state (S3423A: No), then the received state command is the second time saving Determining whether it is a state command that notifies the transition to the state (S3426A), and if it is determined that it is a state command that notifies the transition to the second time saving state (S3426A: Yes), the received state command is stored in the time saving information storage area 223h (S3424A), and a display command indicating the rear image for the chance time standby effect is set (S3428A). Next, a standby effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the chance time standby effect is executed (S3429A), and this process ends. The details of this standby effect setting process (S3429A) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3426A, if it is determined that the received state command is not a state command to notify the transition to the second time saving state (S3426A: No), the processing of S3427A ~ S3429A is skipped, and this process is carried out as it is. finish.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1028, the details of the standby effect setting process (S3429A) described above will be described. FIG. 1028 is a flow chart showing this standby effect setting process (S3429A). In this standby effect setting process (S3429A), first, the standby effect flag 223ja is set to ON (S3451A), and then it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S3452A). In the process of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S3452A: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the time saving type (time saving number of times) is set to the standby effect selection table 222ja (Fig. 1017 reference) is specified (S3453A), and execution of the standby effect of the specified effect mode is set (S3454A). Next, the value of the waiting effect number counter 223jb is set to 1 (S3455A), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is not 0 (1 or more) (S3452A: No), the processing of S3453A to S3455A is skipped, and this End the process. When there is a ball on hold, it is sufficient to set the standby effect as the effect mode of the variable display effect executed in synchronism with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the ball on hold, and the effect mode is set in this process. This is because there is no need to

By executing this standby effect setting process (see FIG. 1028), when the transition to the second time saving state in a situation where the holding ball of the first special symbol does not exist, according to the second time saving state type (time saving number of times) It is possible to execute a chance time standby effect of a different effect mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1029, the details of the above-described jackpot-related processing (S3504A) will be described. This jackpot-related process (S3504A) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 839) in the twenty-ninth control example described above, and is related to the jackpot like the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 839). This is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command when various commands are received.
The jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1029) in the thirty-seventh control example is different from the jackpot-related processing in the twenty-ninth control example (see FIG. 839) in that S3601, S3602, S3608, S3609, S3611, and S3612 are deleted. differ only in that This is because various effects during the jackpot are deleted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1030, details of the small hit related process (S3508A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This small hit related process (S3508A) is a process executed instead of the small hit related process (see FIG. 845) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. FIG. 1030 is a flow chart showing this small hit related process (S3508A).

Of the small hit related processing (see FIG. 1030) in this 37th control example, in each of the processing of S4201, S4206, and S4211, S4201, S4206 of the small hit related processing (see FIG. 845) in the 29th control example described above , and S4211 are executed. In addition, in the small hit related process (see FIG. 1030) in the 37th control example, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S4201: Yes), Aim for the lower V effect (No. 2 suggestion effect (see FIG. 1006(a)) is set (S4221A), and this process ends. By executing the effect of aiming for the lower V (second suggestive effect), the player can shoot the game ball aiming at the V winning device 650 by striking to the right during execution of the small winning game. During the open period of the open/close door 650f1 in the small winning game, the game ball can be reliably entered into the V winning device 650 and entered into the specific area 650e3.
In addition, in the small hit related processing (see FIG. 1030) in the present 37th control example, when it is determined that the small hit end command is received in the processing of S4206 (S4206: Yes), the small hit of this time is the first time saving Small winning game executed in the state (strictly speaking, after the normal pattern per B is started in the first time saving state and falls to the normal state, the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the normal pattern per B It is determined whether or not it is a small winning game executed based on the game ball entering into (S4222A). In the process of S4222A, if it is determined that it is a small winning game executed in the first time saving state (S4222A: Yes), despite winning a small winning in the first time saving state (rush), the player It means that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 650e3 during the small winning game due to not hitting right, etc., and since it will shift to the normal state, it is necessary to execute the effect indicating the end of the rush. A small hit end command for display is set (S4223A), and this process is ended.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4222A, it was determined that it is not a small winning game executed in the first time saving state (it is a small winning game executed based on winning the normal figure B in the second time saving state) In the case (S4222A: No), the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 during the small winning game due to the fact that the player did not hit to the right even though the small winning was won in the first time saving state (rush). It means that it did not, and since it will shift to the normal state, a display small winning end command for executing an effect indicating the end of the chance tim is set (S4224A), and this processing is ended. .
In addition, in the small hit related processing in the present 37th control example, when it is determined that the V passing command is received in the processing of S4211 (S4211: Yes), a display command for executing an effect indicating the winning of the jackpot After setting (S4225A), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1031, the details of the command processing (S3234A) per normal pattern in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This general pattern per command process (S3234A), as described above, is a process for performing control according to the normal pattern per type notified by the general pattern per command. FIG. 1031 is a flow chart showing this per normal pattern command process (S3234A).
As shown in FIG. 1031, in the general pattern per command process (S3234A), first, whether the current game state is the first time saving state or not is determined based on the data stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g. Then (S5601A), if it is determined that it is in the first time saving state (S5601A: Yes), then according to the general pattern per type notified by the general pattern per command, the rabbit character 801 selects the type of treasure box (See FIGS. 1006(b) and 39), the type of treasure box to be selected is determined by lottery (S5602A), and the rush effect of selecting the treasure box of the determined type is performed during the normal symbol fluctuation time. Execute (S5603A). In addition, in the lottery by the processing of this S5602A, for example, when the lottery result of this time is A, the normal treasure box 810b is selected at a rate of 80%, and the small treasure box 810c is selected at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, in the case of B per normal, the shining treasure box 810a is selected at a rate of 35%, the normal treasure box 810b is selected at a rate of 55%, and the small treasure box 810c is selected at a rate of 10%. Lottery contents are specified. As a result, when the shining treasure box 810a is selected, it is determined that the winning of the general pattern B that substantially determines the jackpot, while when the small treasure box 810c is selected, it is a disadvantageous general pattern. Since the possibility of A increases, it is possible to make the game more focused on the type of treasure box selected by the rabbit character 801 . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5601A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the first time saving state (S5601A: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S5604A ), If it is determined that it is not in the second time-saving state (S5604A: No), it means that you have won the normal pattern in the normal state where you cannot win the normal pattern B, and the production based on the fluctuation of the normal pattern Since it means that it is a game state that does not need to be set, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5604A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S5604A: Yes), whether the standby production flag 223ja is ON (that is, the execution period of the chance time standby production It is determined whether or not (S5605A), and if it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is on (that is, it is during the execution period of the chance time standby effect) (S5605A: Yes), then this time It is determined whether the lottery result is a normal pattern B (S5606A), and if it is determined that it is a normal pattern B (S5606A: Yes), the result of the chance time standby effect being executed is “celebration ” (suggestive pattern) is rewritten and set to the effect mode for selecting (S5607A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5606A, if it is determined that the normal pattern per this time is not per normal pattern B (that is, per normal pattern A) (S5606A: No), the process of S5607A is skipped, and this End the process.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5605A, if it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is off (that is, it is not during the execution period of the chance time standby effect) (S5605A: No), 0.2 is set to the standby period timer 223jc. A timer value corresponding to seconds is set (S5608A), and this processing ends. By executing this general pattern per command process (see FIG. 1031), it is possible to set the effect mode according to the lottery result of the normal pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1032, details of the variation effect setting process (S4304A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This variable effect setting process (S4304A) is a process that is executed in place of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 847) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol.
Of the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 1032) in the thirty-seventh control example, in each process of S4401 and S4403, each process of S4401 and S4403 of the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 847) in the twenty-ninth control example The same processing as is performed. Further, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 1032) in the present thirty-seventh control example, in the process of S4403, the variation display effect to be started based on the variation pattern command received this time is changed based on the variation display of the second special symbol. When it is determined that it is a display effect (S4403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit B40 (S4412A). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit type in which a 3-round big hit with a small number of rounds (disadvantageous) is executed when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 (S4412A), and the second special symbol If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit B40 (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit A40, and in any case, the advantageous 10-round big win is executed) ( S4412A: No), as the variable display effect of the second special symbol, determine the variable display mode accompanied by the promotion effect (see Figure 1005) of the effect mode that succeeds in promotion (S4413A), and finish this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4412A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a disadvantageous small hit B40 (S4412A: Yes), the second special symbol variation display effect is the effect mode of failing in promotion. A variable display mode accompanied by a promotion effect is determined (S4414A), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the variable display effect to be started based on the variation pattern command received this time is not the variable display effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol (S4403: No), Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal state (S4415A), and if it is determined to be a normal state (S4415A: Yes), the lottery result notified by the variation pattern command received this time, Based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command, the variation display mode of the variation display effect is determined (S4416A), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4415A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S4415A: No), at the start timing of the variable display effect of the first special symbol during the chance time (second time saving state) Since it means that there is, a chance time effect setting process for setting the effect mode during the chance time is executed (S4417A), and this process ends. Details of the effect setting process (S4417A) during the chance time will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1033 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process during chance time (S4417A). As shown in FIG. 1033, when this chance time production setting process (S4417A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the standby production flag 223ja is ON (S5701A), and the standby production flag 223ja is OFF. If it is determined that there is (S5701A: No), it means that the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1002(b) and 1003) is not being executed, and the normal symbol lottery and the first special symbol lottery are not performed. Since there is a high possibility of forming a state in which they are executed almost simultaneously, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S5702A), and the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0. If it is determined that it is not a value (that is, 0) (S5702A: No), although the chance time has already entered, the lottery timing of the general pattern and the first special symbol is a relatively long time (at least 0.2 seconds or more), and means that a pseudo variable display effect for showing the lottery result of normal symbols is preferentially executed as a variable display effect, First, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B is currently being displayed in a variable display (S5703A). ), Since a pseudo-performing variation effect for showing the normal pattern B should already be set, without setting (overwriting) the variable display effect for indicating the lottery result of this special symbol, This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5703, if it is determined that the normal symbol corresponding to the normal pattern B is not currently displayed in a variable display (S5703A: No), a pseudo-off variation effect for showing the normal pattern per A Since there is a high possibility that is being executed, it is then determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit (S5704A). (S5705A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5704A, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is out (S5704A: No), the processing of S5705A is skipped and the processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5702A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S5702A: Yes), immediately after the normal symbol lottery is started (within 0.2 seconds) Since it means that the lottery of the first special symbol has been started and that it is a normal operation in the chance time, then, the lottery result of the normal symbol corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed and The effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is determined (S5706A), the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is reset to 0 (S5707A), and this process is terminated. By the processing of S5706A, it is possible to set a variable display mode that takes into account the lottery result of the normal symbol, and whether the normal symbol B per lot determined at a rate of 3% in the normal symbol lottery is determined or 1/320. If the jackpot of the probability special pattern is won, the variable display mode is set in which the same third patterns are arranged as in the case of the jackpot, so that the apparent probability of the first special pattern is high in the chance time. It is possible to realize a novel behavior as if it had become. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the processing of S5701A, when it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is ON (S5701A: Yes), with reference to the standby effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1017), the lottery result of this time is set. The number of times of time saving in the second time saving state and the number of reserved balls of the current first special symbol are determined (S5708A), and the value of the waiting effect number counter 223jb is updated by adding 1 (S5709A). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting effect number counter 223jb after addition has reached 4 (S5710A). (S5711A), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5710A, when it is determined that the value of the waiting effect number counter 223jb after addition is not 4 (S5710A: No), the process of S5711A is skipped and the process ends as it is. By executing the processes of S5710A and S5711A, the number of fluctuations in the chance time standby effect can be limited to four at maximum, so that the player hits left during the chance time standby effect to hold the first special symbol. Even if the ball does not break, it is possible to prevent the chance time standby effect from continuing endlessly.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1034, details of the rendering update process (S3112A) in the thirty-seventh control example will be described. This effect update process (S3112A) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 849) in the twenty-ninth control example described above, and updates the effect mode in the same manner as the effect update process (see FIG. 849). It is a process for

In the rendering update process (see FIG. 1034) in the thirty-seventh control example, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S4611A), and the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc is If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4611A: Yes), then the value of the waiting period timer is updated by subtracting it (S4612A), and whether the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc after the update is 0 It is determined whether or not (S4613A). In the processing of S4613A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc has been updated to 0 (S4613A: Yes), even if a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has passed since the normal symbol lottery was executed, the first It means that the lottery for the 1 special symbol has not started, and the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the 1st special symbol are performed almost at the same time. The pseudo-variation performance of the performance mode according to the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed in the period until the end of the normal pattern winning based on the fluctuation display of the normal pattern being executed (S4614A), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S4613A, when it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc after updating is not 0 (S4613A: No), the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are performed almost simultaneously. Since it cannot be determined whether or not the motion is out of the basic motion of the chance time, the processing of S4614A is skipped and the present processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4611A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is 0 (S4611A: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the chance time standby effect (S4615A). If it is determined that it is time to end the time standby effect (S4615A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current state is the fluctuation stop state (S4616A). In the processing of S4616A, when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped (S4616A: Yes), when the time-saving symbol is won, the chance time standby effect is executed for 5 seconds with the first special symbol reserved ball being 0, and the reserved ball is executed. Since this means that the chance time standby effect has ended while the number remains 0, the standby effect flag 223ja is set to OFF (S4617A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4615A, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the standby effect (S4615A: No), and if it is determined that it is not in the fluctuation stop state in the processing of S4616A (S4616A: No), the processing of S4617A is skipped, and this processing ends.
By executing this effect update process (see FIG. 1034), in the chance time, when the operation deviates from the basic operation that the normal symbol lottery and the first special symbol lottery are executed almost simultaneously. In addition, prior to the variable display effect for showing the lottery result of the first special pattern with a jackpot probability of 1/320, the actual jackpot probability (per normal pattern B determination ratio) is 3% of the normal pattern. Since a pseudo-fluctuation effect for indicating the lottery result can be executed, a more suitable effect mode can be realized.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 37th control example, as a time saving state more advantageous than the normal state, the first time saving state with a high substantial jackpot probability and the substantial jackpot probability are higher than the first time saving state It is configured to be able to form a second time saving state that is low and higher than the normal state (the advantage is lower than the first time saving state and the advantage is higher than the normal state). More specifically, while the first time-saving state can be set as one type of game state after the end of the jackpot, the second time-saving state is set when the time-saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery. It consists of Further, in the thirty-seventh control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of 100%, either a big win or a small win in which the big win is substantially determined is won (second special When the lottery of the pattern is executed, the jackpot is substantially confirmed), while depending on the type of the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery opportunity is set until the time saving state ends. The configuration is such that the possibility of entering a ball into the second ball entrance 640 is made different. That is, in the thirty-seventh control example, when the normal symbol lottery is executed, the normal symbol is won at a rate of 100% regardless of the game state, and then the second ball entrance 640 is entered. It is possible to enter the game ball (that is, the jackpot is substantially determined) per normal pattern type (per normal pattern B) is determined, in the normal state, low probability (0% rate) , High probability (80% ratio) in the first time saving state, by setting the probability (3% ratio) between the first time saving state and the normal state in the second time saving state, Normal design for each game state It is configured to vary the jackpot probability when the lottery is executed. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win in the case where the lottery of normal symbols is executed can be varied for each game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the thirty-seventh control example, the game ball that enters the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the lottery for the first special symbol, always passes before entering the first ball entrance 64. A central through gate 67c, which triggers the drawing of normal symbols, is arranged at a position (above the first entrance 64), and the drawing of normal symbols starts before the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the period from when it is done until the winning of the normal symbol based on the lottery of the normal symbol is completed is shorter. In other words, every time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the lottery for the normal symbol is also executed almost at the same time (immediately before the lottery for the first special symbol is executed). In addition, a right through gate 67r is separately provided at a position through which a game ball can pass when hit to the right, which triggers a normal pattern lottery. The ratio of passing through the gate 67c and the ratio of passing through the right through gate 67r of the game ball shot by hitting to the right are substantially the same. As a result, especially in the second time-saving state, it is better to execute the lottery of the normal symbols and the lottery of the first special symbols almost simultaneously by hitting the left rather than executing only the lottery of the normal symbols by hitting the right. It is configured to increase the possibility of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state. Specifically, when hitting to the right in the second time-saving state, the normal pattern lottery is about 3% per normal pattern B (game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 The jackpot is only achieved when the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the second displacement pattern (normal pattern hit) (it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special pattern that substantially confirms the jackpot). , In the case of hitting left, in addition to the possibility of winning the normal pattern winning B (performing the electric accessory 640a being displaced in the second displacement pattern) in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the possibility of winning the first special symbol lottery Since there is a possibility of winning a jackpot, the game can be played by hitting left in the second time-saving state. Then, as described above, when hitting left, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c always enters the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are almost simultaneously performed. Since it is executed, the substantial jackpot probability per lottery of the first special symbol increases (substantially, the probability of the first special symbol jackpot is about 1/320, and the second displacement pattern is It becomes about 1/30 which is the combined probability with about 1/33 which is the probability of winning the set normal symbol, which is about 1/30 big hit probability). In other words, a plurality of game states (normal state, normal state, and the second time-saving state), it is possible to realize a novel game property that the substantial jackpot probability can be changed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in this 37th control example, as one of the time saving end conditions, the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of executions of the game per normal pattern is defined. More specifically, in the first time-saving state, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the winning game of the normal symbol once, and in the second time-saving state, the type of the winning time-saving symbol. It is configured so that the time-saving state ends when the normal symbol winning game is executed 10 times to 1000 times. The reason for this is that, in the thirty-seventh control example, by hitting to the right, it is possible to execute only the normal symbol lottery without executing the first special symbol lottery, and Since it is a game property that the jackpot is substantially confirmed by winning the normal pattern B, the end condition (first end condition) based on the number of special symbol lotteries and the end condition (first end condition) based on the number of times the small winning game is executed (second 2 end condition) is specified as the time saving end condition, if you continue to hit the right after moving to the first time saving state or the second time saving state, the jackpot will be substantially confirmed until you win the normal pattern B This is because there is a problem that the time saving state continues. Therefore, in this 37th control example, as the time saving end condition, it is configured to define the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game, and the right hitting is continued in the time saving state, and the special symbol is executed. Even if the lottery is not performed at all, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the regular pattern winning game over the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the time saving state always continues until the normal drawing B is won (that is, until the jackpot is substantially won).
In addition, in the present 37th control example, in the second time-saving state, when executing the variable display effect for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol, the effect that takes into consideration the lottery result of the normal symbol executed immediately before that. It is configured to set the mode. That is, when winning the normal pattern winning B that substantially determines the jackpot in the lottery of the normal pattern, even if the lottery result of the first special pattern is out, it is difficult to distinguish from the variable display mode that notifies the jackpot. It is configured to execute a variable display effect of a different effect mode. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the normal symbol can be notified collectively by one variable display performance, so the apparent probability of big win in the one variable display performance. can make the player think as if the Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game, and to realize a suitable presentation mode. Furthermore, in the second time-saving state in the 37th control example, an operation that deviates from the basic operation that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the normal symbol are executed almost simultaneously (the timing of the lottery of the first special symbol is the normal symbol (Operation deviated from the lottery timing of at least 0.2 seconds), the lottery result of the normal symbol is preferentially notified rather than the lottery result of the first special symbol by the variable display effect. . In other words, a pseudo-variation display effect is executed based on the execution of the lottery of the normal symbols, and when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the execution of the pseudo-variation display effect, the first Variation to notify that the lottery result of 1 special symbol is a big hit and the pseudo variation display effect being executed is off (a normal symbol hit A that is impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 640) Only in the case of the display effect, it is configured to set the effect mode in which the lottery result (jackpot) of the first special symbol is notified. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the normal pattern with a substantial high probability of big win can be reported preferentially over the result of the lottery of the first special pattern with a low probability of substantial big win, which is more preferable. It is possible to realize a production mode.
In addition, in the thirty-seventh control example, the ratio of game balls passing through the through gate (central through gate 67c or right through gate 67r) is substantially the same for left-handed and right-handed players, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, the percentage of game balls shot to the right that pass through the right through gate 67r is higher than the percentage of game balls shot to the left that pass the left through gate 67c (for example, two ball shots to the right). , one game ball passes through the right through gate 67r every time one game ball is shot). When configured in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to select a game method in the first time saving state or the second time saving state. In other words, when left-handed in the time-saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols is low (every 10 to 15 game balls are fired by left-handed, the frequency is about once). Since the lottery for the first special symbol is executed each time the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, not only the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern is won in the lottery for the normal symbol, but also the first special symbol. It can be expected that a lottery of patterns will result in a big hit. On the other hand, when hitting to the right in the time saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols increases (the frequency is about to be executed once every time two game balls are fired by hitting to the right), While the lottery efficiency of the normal symbols in the time saving state can be increased, the lottery of the first special pattern is not executed, so that the possibility of winning the jackpot during the time saving state can be realized. . Therefore, depending on the game method in the time saving state (whether to hit left or right), the possibility that the player will win a big hit during the time saving state is relatively high, but the lottery efficiency of normal symbols is poor. (It takes a relatively long time to digest the time-saving state, and a relatively large number of waste balls are generated.) The playability and the lottery efficiency of normal patterns are improved, but there is a possibility of a big hit during the time-saving state. It is possible to realize a very novel game property that allows the user to select a relatively low game property (the degree of expectation for a big win is reduced by the amount of 1/320, which is the probability of a big win for the first special symbol). Therefore, since each player can select a game property that matches his or her taste, a game property that matches the tastes of more players can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game is further improved. can be made

In this 37th control example, the first time saving state is configured as a game state that can be set as a game state after the end of the jackpot, and the second time saving state is configured as a game state that is set when the time saving pattern is won. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first time saving state may be set in part or all when the time saving pattern is won, or the second time saving state may be set as the game state after the big win. may
In this 37th control example, the first time saving state and the second time saving state, by differentiating the ratio of determining the general figure hit B that substantially determines the jackpot, the normal state and the first time saving state , and the second time-saving state, the substantial jackpot probabilities are made different from each other, but the method of making the substantial jackpot probabilities different is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to provide three types of states with different jackpot probabilities of special symbols. That is, the normal state in which the special pattern jackpot probability is about 1/320, the first time-saving state in which the special pattern jackpot probability is about 1/1.25, and the special pattern jackpot probability is about 1/30. A second time saving state may be formed. By configuring in this way, at least the central through gate 67c can be eliminated, so that the board configuration can be simplified.
In the 37th control example, while the right-handed hitting is notified in the first time-saving state, the left-handed hitting is notified in the second time-saving state. good. That is, even in the second time-saving state, if left-handed hitting is performed, the possibility of winning a big hit increases as much as the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed, so the left-handed hitting slightly increases the advantage. . Therefore, the player's advantage degree can be improved by notifying the left-handed hit in the second time-saving state. In addition, in the 37th control example, in the first time-saving state, there is a possibility of a 3-round jackpot where the jackpot ends in 3 rounds. Although it has been configured to execute the effect of promoting to the "7" symbol), this promotion effect is another form of the specific effect of the 46th control example described later. In other words, when it is determined that an advantageous specific state continues beyond a specific period, it is executed at a timing different from the determined timing, and a specific effect corresponding to the effect that notifies that it will continue beyond the specific period. is another form of
In this 37th control example, as the time saving end condition, the first end condition established based on the total number of lottery times of special symbols becoming the specified number of times, and the number of times the small winning winning number became the specified number of times , and the third end condition, which is established when the number of executions of the winning game of the normal symbol reaches the specified number. It is also possible to impose a fourth termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times the symbol lottery result becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small win that cannot win a V prize) reaches a specified number of times. By configuring in this way, especially in the second time saving state, the second time saving state can be ended before the number of times of execution of the normal symbol winning game reaches the specified number of times. In the 2-hour saving state, even if there is a margin in the number of times of working hours (the number of execution times of normal symbol winning games), the player can be made to play the game while having a sense of tension. In this case, as a variable display effect when a predetermined lottery result is obtained, a fixed effect is executed so that the player can grasp that a predetermined lottery result has been obtained (for example, out of reach effect). execution) configuration. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to realize a game property in which the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times of the predetermined lottery result can be grasped from the number of executions of the fixed performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .

In this 37th control example, the ceiling function (a function to set the second time-saving state when the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot reaches the ceiling lottery number) was not provided, but the ceiling function is installed. good too. In this case, the second time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number is the same advantage as the second time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning (substantially at a rate of about 3% It may be set to the distribution of the general pattern to be elected to the general pattern per B in which the jackpot is determined, or may be set to a different degree of advantage. By setting it to a higher degree of advantage than the second time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern winning (for example, the distribution of the general-to-universal pattern that wins the general-to-universal pattern B, which substantially confirms the jackpot at a rate of about 10%), the ceiling It is possible to make people expect to reach the number of lotteries more strongly, and the degree of advantage is lower than the second time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern winning (e.g., at a rate of about 1%, the jackpot is substantially confirmed. By setting it to the normal figure winning distribution), the game can be played aiming at the ceiling lottery number from a small number of lotteries, and the player can be suppressed from being too absorbed in the game. In any case, by providing a ceiling function, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the game can be played with the goal of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, so the player's motivation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.
In the thirty-seventh control example, the game ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is open, but this is not the only option. For example, it may be combined with the sixth control example described above. That is, it is opened and closed by a so-called non-electric accessory (first non-electric accessory), and is opened and closed by a first start port that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, and a non-electric accessory (second non-electric accessory), A second starting port that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol is provided. Furthermore, a first non-electrically actuated gate that opens the first non-electrical accessory when the game ball passes through, and a second non-electrically operated gate that opens the second non-electrical accessory when the game ball passes through, A prize-winning device provided with a distribution function for distributing a game ball entered inside the device to either a first non-electrically operated gate or a second non-electrically operated gate is provided, and a normal pattern wins. An electric accessory may be provided at a position where the prize winning device is opened in the event of an accident. Then, based on the winning of the normal symbol, the distribution accessory is displaced by a fixed displacement operation, and the distribution accessory is distributed to the first non-electrically operated gate by the distribution accessory as the type of winning of the normal symbol. There is a general pattern per A in which the winning device is opened in between, and a general pattern per B in which the prize device is opened between the arrangements distributed to the second non-electrically operated gate, and the general pattern per B is selected. As in the thirty-seventh control example described above, the ratio may be different between the normal state, the first time saving state, and the second time saving state. With this configuration, the same behavior as in the thirty-seventh control example described above can be realized.
In this 37th control example, when the transition to the second time-saving state occurs, while the reserved ball of the first special symbol is digested, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed by executing the chance time standby effect. It is configured to make it easier to hit left after setting 0 pieces, and to make it difficult to deviate from the basic operation in which the lottery for the normal pattern and the lottery for the first special pattern are executed almost simultaneously, but during the chance time. The method of making it difficult to deviate from the basic operation (the operation in which the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously) is not limited to this. Instead of this, or in addition, for example, when the number of held balls of the first special symbol is 1 or more in the chance time (second time saving state), the variation time of the first special symbol is extremely short variation time ( For example, it may be configured to be set to 0.1 second). By configuring in this way, it is possible to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol in a relatively short time after shifting to the chance time, so that the operation during the chance time is the basic operation (normal symbol lottery) It is possible to make it more difficult to deviate from the operation in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed almost simultaneously. Also, for example, the first special symbol and the normal symbol pending storage function may be abolished. By constructing in this manner, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed and shifts to the chance time (second time saving state), both the first special pattern and the normal pattern can be brought into the fluctuation stop state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from deviating from the basic operation (the operation in which the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously).
In this 37th control example, when the time-saving symbol winning occurs and the chance time is entered, until the variable display based on the holding ball of the first special symbol is terminated (or after the chance time is entered, a specific period elapses) ), the chance time standby effect is executed, and the effect mode is set as if the chance time has not started, but the effect mode is not limited to the chance time standby effect. . For example, the variable display effect based on the time-saving symbol winning is continuously executed until all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed, thereby making the player think that the chance time has not started. Alternatively, the stop display period of the third symbol indicating winning of the time-saving symbol may be continuously executed until all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed even after the chance time is entered. In addition, after the variable display effect based on the time-saving design winning is completed (after the third design indicating the time-saving design winning is stopped and displayed), the transition to the chance time is made until the reserved ball of the first special design is digested. is determined, and based on detecting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 (and the central through gate 67c) after the reserved ball is digested, the chance time You may perform the production|presentation which notifies clearly that is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the chance time (second time saving state) has not started, so the player left while the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the start timing of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation start timing of the normal symbol due to the start of beating. Namely, by the variable display performance, the performance result in consideration of both the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the normal symbol executed almost simultaneously (immediately before) with the lottery of the first special symbol is reported. Since the playability can be realized more reliably, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this 37th control example, the ratio of B per normal pattern in the normal state is 0%, the ratio of B per normal pattern in the first time saving state is 80%, and the B per normal pattern in the second time saving state Although the ratio at which is determined is set to 3%, it is not limited to this, and can be set to any ratio. For example, by configuring so that the normal pattern per B can be determined in the normal state (for example, determined at a rate of 0.1%), even in the normal state, the first special pattern lottery will be a big hit. In addition to this, it is possible to make the player expect to win a normal pattern B in the normal pattern lottery, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state. In addition, by increasing the determination ratio of B per normal figure in the second time saving state, it is possible to improve the substantial jackpot expectation degree for each variable display effect in the second time saving state, and by reducing it, It is possible to reduce the degree of expectation for a big hit in the two-hour short state. Furthermore, by increasing the determination ratio of B per normal figure in the first time saving state, it is possible to improve the expectation of winning the jackpot (continuous chance occurrence rate) when moving to the first time saving state, and per normal figure By lowering the decision ratio of B, it is possible to lower the expectation of winning the jackpot in the case of shifting to the first time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state A, the execution of the normal pattern per game related to the normal pattern per A that is difficult to enter into the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern perion B that is easy to enter into the second ball entrance 640 Execution of the game per normal pattern is another form of control that makes it difficult to increase the number of reserved balls and control that makes it easy to increase the number of reserved balls in the fifty-ninth control example described later.
In the thirty-seventh control example, when the lottery for normal symbols is executed, the probability of winning the normal symbols is set to 1/1 (100%) regardless of the game state, but it is limited to this. It can be set to any probability, not one. As in the other control examples, a low probability state of normal symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are provided, and the normal state and the second time saving state are treated as normal low probability states of the symbols, while the first time saving The state may be configured to be treated as a high probability state of normal symbols. In this case, the probability of winning the normal design is set to 1/1.25 (80%) in the high probability state of the normal design, and 3/100 (3%) in the low probability state of the normal design, and the time saving state (First time-saving state, second time-saving state) When the hit of the normal pattern is always set to B (the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the second displacement pattern), the normal state In the case of hitting the normal pattern, it is always set to the normal pattern hit A (the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the first displacement pattern). That is, in the first time-saving state, which is set to the high probability state of the normal design, the normal design hit B, which substantially determines the jackpot, is always determined by the normal design lottery at a rate of 80%. , In the second time-saving state, which is set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hit B is always determined by the normal pattern lottery at a rate of 3%. In a normal state, a normal pattern wins at a rate of 3% in a normal pattern lottery, but a normal pattern hit A is always determined, so it is impossible to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁(difficult). By configuring in this way, when the normal pattern hits, the normal pattern hit B is determined in the time saving state, and the normal pattern hit A is determined in the normal state, which is a relatively simple control. , the same operation as in the thirty-seventh control example described above can be realized, so that the processing load after winning the normal symbol can be reduced.
In this 37th control example, regardless of whether it is a normal pattern hit A or a normal pattern hit B, after the normal pattern lottery is started in the second time saving state, the normal pattern hit ends and the next normal pattern The length of the period until the symbol lottery can be executed is configured to be the same period as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is not detected. So, during the second time-saving state, the lottery of the normal pattern and the lottery of the first special pattern are configured to be able to maintain the game property that is executed almost at the same time, but at least in the normal pattern winning B, the normal pattern winning. The period until the end of the game does not necessarily have to match the variation time of the first special symbol. For example, when winning B per normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 1 second, the opening period of the normal pattern is 7 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is a maximum of 2 seconds, so that the total is 10 seconds. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a longer performance period can be ensured in the case of a normal game winning B (that is, in the case of executing a big win performance), so that the performance mode can be set more favorably.
In the 37th control example, by winning the time saving pattern in the normal state, it was configured to directly shift to the second time saving state without going through the jackpot, but the combination of the game state is not limited to this. . Instead of this, or in addition, for example, when the time saving pattern is elected in the second time saving state, the first time saving state (or the second time saving state that becomes the determination ratio of B per normal pattern equivalent to the first time saving state It may be configured to shift to B). By configuring in this way, in addition to winning the jackpot in the second time saving state, it is extremely advantageous to repeat (loop) the time saving state and the jackpot at a rate of 80% even when the time saving pattern winning occurs. Since the state can be formed, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, for example, when time-saving symbol winning occurs in the first time-saving state, the game state with a low winning rate of B per normal pattern (for example, the second time-saving state, or the second time-saving state B You may comprise so that it may transfer to the 1st time saving state B) used as a determination ratio. By constructing in this way, when hitting to the left in the first time-saving state, the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the normal pattern can be executed almost simultaneously, thereby winning the jackpot of the first special pattern. As much as possible, there is an advantage that the expectation of the jackpot is high, but when a time-saving pattern winning occurs, the advantage of the time-saving state itself is reduced. It is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select a game method. In addition, the game state is not limited to the time saving state and the normal state, for example, a special symbol high probability state with a special symbol lottery probability higher than usual is provided, and the game state set to the special symbol low probability state (normal state, the first time-saving state, the second time-saving state) is set to a high probability state of special symbols (high probability state, non-time-saving state, high probability state, and first time-saving state, high probability state , and the second time-saving state) may be configured so as to be able to shift directly without going through the jackpot. Conversely, the game state set to the high probability state may be configured to be directly transitionable to the game state set to the low probability state without going through the big win, or the game set to the high probability state It may be configured such that the state can be directly shifted to another game state set to the high-probability state without going through the jackpot. Also, in all the above cases, the conditions for changing the gaming state without going through the jackpot are not limited to time-saving symbol winning. Triggered by winning a small win (non-V small win) set in the opening pattern of the door 650f1, the game state may be changed, or the total number of lotteries of special symbols has reached a specified number. It may be configured to change the game state based on, it may be configured to change the game state based on the total number of lottery times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times, or the normal symbol winning game A configuration may be adopted in which the game state is changed based on the number of times of execution reaching a specified number of times. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<38th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1035 to 1063. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example described above, in the time-saving state, the ease of entering the second ball opening 640 (the second ball By providing a plurality of time-saving states (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) with different ratios of winning in B per normal pattern that allows game balls to enter the mouth 640, special symbols are provided. Although the lottery probability is common, a plurality of game states having different substantial jackpot probabilities are provided.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example, as in the thirty-seventh control example described above, there is a substantial jackpot probability (substantial jackpot probability) in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Although the probability of a fixed small hit is different, it is different from the 37th control example in that the lottery result of complete loss is provided in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the substantial big win probability (the sum of the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win in the special symbol lottery) The control example differs from the thirty-seventh control example in that the probability is about 1/3 (probability of failure is about 2/3). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 37th control example, although the number of times of time saving is common, after shifting to the time saving state, the second special symbol based on all the starting winnings detected during the time saving state It is different in that a plurality of time-saving states are provided in which the number of substantial lottery times of the second special symbol is different until the lottery is finished. More specifically, a time-saving state A in which the special symbol lottery can be executed substantially twice and a time-saving state B in which the special symbol lottery can be substantially executed four times are provided. Here, in the present 37th control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of lotteries of special symbols (the number of lotteries of the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is established based on the specified number of times A first end condition to be established, a second end condition established based on the number of executions of the small winning game becoming a specified number of times, and a second end condition established based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbol becoming a specified number of times. In addition to the third termination condition, there is provided a fourth termination condition that is established based on the fact that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached a specified number during execution of the time-saving final variation. The time saving state A and the time saving state B share the first to third end conditions, and differ only in the fourth end condition, thereby making the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols different.
Further, in the 38th control example, in addition to the time-saving states A and B, a time-saving state C is provided in which a time-saving end condition that almost certainly continues until the next big hit is set. In addition, in this 38th control example, the number of consecutive times of the time saving state (the number of repetitions of the time saving state and the jackpot are repeated without going through the normal state) is limited (the time saving limit number of times is set). When a jackpot is won during the time-saving state C, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C again unless the time-saving limit number of times is reached. That is, once the time-saving state C is set, the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached (the jackpot winning for the time-saving limit number of times is almost decided). and By configuring in this way, the player can be strongly expected to shift to the time saving state C, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Furthermore, in this 38th control example, in the time-saving state C, by setting the variation time of the normal symbols, the variation time of the special symbols, and the release pattern of the normal symbols so that the reserved balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit number. When the time-saving state C and the big hit are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the state shifts to the normal state, the upper limit number (four times) of the second special symbol reserved balls is likely to be held. is doing. As a result, even after falling to the normal state, the player can be given an opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special pattern with a jackpot probability of about 1/3 four times, so that the time-saving limit number of times is reached. The degree of advantage afterward can be set to be greater than or equal to the degree of advantage in other time-saving states. Specifically, the expectation of a big hit is higher than the time-saving state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed substantially twice, and the time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be substantially executed four times. It is possible to form an advantageous state with a jackpot expectation equivalent to B. Therefore, even when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, it is possible to make the player feel a great sense of anticipation for the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the thirty-eighth control example, when the small winning game of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small winning (the small winning counter 203s is subtracted On the other hand, when the small hit game of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state C, the second end condition is established after the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 (small hit decrement the counter 203s). By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won after shifting to the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state or during the time saving state The game state at the time when the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 regardless of whether it is a lottery of the second special symbol started after the transition to the normal state based on the second special symbol reserved ball held in Can be set to normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether it is the second special symbol lottery started during the time saving state or the second special symbol lottery started after shifting to the normal state, the degree of advantage at the time of winning the jackpot is determined. Can be shared. In addition, in the time saving state C, when a small win is won, the game state at the time of winning can be fixed to the time saving state, so the repetition of the time saving state C and the big win continues beyond the time saving limit number of times. Conversely, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the time saving state C and the jackpot from ending before reaching the time saving limit number of times.
The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed, and the control processing to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 37 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirty-seventh control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1035, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1035 is a front view of the game board 13 in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1035, the game board 13 in the thirty-eighth control example is provided above the first ball entrance 64 in contrast to the board configuration of the game board 13 in the thirty-seventh control example (see FIG. 1001). The difference is that a single through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the V winning device 650 instead of the through gate 67c provided on the variable display unit 80 and the right through gate 67r provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. there is As shown in FIG. 1035, this through gate 67 is launched into the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front by hitting to the right, and game balls that do not enter the second ball entrance 640 always pass through. It is set in a position where In other words, in the thirty-eighth control example, the normal symbol lottery is not executed and the electric accessory 640a is not opened unless the right-handed hit is performed, in contrast to the thirty-seventh control example. The difference is that the board has a board structure in which the rate of passage through the through gate 67 is high.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1036 to 1038, the characteristic presentation modes in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1036, in the time saving state A that is set at a high rate (95% rate) after the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state (so-called first hit) A presentation mode will be described. First, FIG. 1036(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode from when the time saving state A is started until the lottery for the second special symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 1036(a), when the time-saving state A is entered after the first hit, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 face each other in the main display area Dm. In addition, a character saying "Stock attack icons with right-handed strokes!" In addition, a small display area Dm4 displaying characters "Right-handed" is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm, and an attack icon display for displaying an attack icon, which will be described later, is formed in the lower left of the main display area Dm. Areas AI1 and AI2 are formed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "If you defeat the enemy, rush into RUSH!?" is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to acquire (stock) an attack icon by hitting the right hand, and if the adventurer character 811 can defeat the monster character 821, the rush mode (time saving state more advantageous than time saving state A) It is possible to make the player easily understand that the game will enter B).
In addition, FIG. 1036(b) is a display in the case where one game ball fired by hitting to the right in the time saving state A enters the second ball entrance 640 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. As shown in FIG. 1036(b), when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the variable display of the second special symbol starts, a relatively narrow (difficult to see by the player) small In the display area Dm8, variable display of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is started. A time gauge ga3 is also displayed between the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 . This time gauge ga3 is displayed in a state in which the remaining time display ga3a occupies the entire time gauge ga3 at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the right end of the remaining time display ga3a moves leftward in front view according to the passage of time. It is configured so that the area of the elapsed time display ga3b increases as it moves and the area narrows, and the right end of the remaining time display ga3a when 10 seconds have passed since the variable display of the second special symbol was started. reaches the left end of the time gauge ga3, the area of the remaining time display ga3a becomes zero, and the entire time gauge ga3 is occupied by the elapsed time display ga3b. When the time gauge ga3 becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed according to the lottery result of the change and the prefetch result of the remaining reservation of the second special symbol.
Furthermore, based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, an attack icon of a type corresponding to the current lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the attack icon display area AI1. The example in FIG. 1036(b) illustrates a case where an icon with the character "cutting" is acquired. These display contents suggest that an attack icon is obtained based on the starting prize of the second special symbol, and that the type of the attack icon suggests the degree of expectation of winning (defeating the monster character 821). can be intuitively understood by the player. In addition, in the thirty-eighth control example, four types of icons are provided: "punch", "kick", "slash", and "killer move". The "punch" icon is configured to be more likely to be selected in the case of a miss and less likely to be selected in the case of a big or small win, and the "kick" icon is more likely to be selected in the time-saving state B than in other cases. , and the "slashing" icon is configured to be difficult to select in the case of a miss. In addition, the "special move" icon can be selected only in the case of a big hit or a small hit, and the selection rate is higher when moving to the advantageous time saving state C than when moving to the time saving state B after the big hit. configured to be high. With these selection ratios, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting the lottery result of the second special symbol according to the type of the attack icon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1037 (a), display when the number of times of time saving (regular lottery number of times of the second special symbol) is one in the time saving state A and the second special symbol reserved ball is acquired. Aspects will be described. As shown in FIG. 1037 (a), the first second special symbol holding ball is acquired, and the fourth end condition (the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is the specified number in the time saving final fluctuation (time saving state A In the case of 1, it is a diagram showing a situation where the time saving end condition) is established and the time saving state A is ended. As shown in FIG. 1037 (a), in the first variation (final variation) of the time saving state A, the holding ball of the second special symbol becomes one, and when the fourth end condition is satisfied, the second attack icon display area An attack icon corresponding to the result of prefetching of the second special symbol reserved ball acquired this time is displayed for AI2. The example of FIG. 1037(a) illustrates a case where the "kick" icon is obtained. In addition, the characters "preparation completed" are displayed on the time gauge ga3. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that all the reserve balls of the second special symbol that can be obtained in the time saving state A have been obtained. Also, the player is informed that the type of each attack icon corresponds to the lottery results corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed and the newly obtained held ball of the second special symbol. can be easily understood.

Although not shown in the figure, after the second special symbol holding ball is accumulated and the time saving state is terminated, the adventurer character 811 consumes the attack icon and attacks the monster character 821. executed. That is, the attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI1 (in the example of FIG. 1037 (a) , and “last attack” icon) are used to launch an attack on the monster character 821 . If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, an effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed. A performance is performed. When the monster character 821 cannot be defeated, the variable display of the second special symbol using the held ball of the second special symbol acquired in the time saving state A is started and displayed in the attack icon display area AI2. An effect is executed in which an attack is launched against the monster character 821 using the attack icon (“kick” icon in the example of FIG. 1037(a)). If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, an effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed. A performance is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1037(b), when a jackpot is won in the time saving state A (so-called consecutive chances occur), the effect mode in the time saving state B that can shift after the consecutive chances hit will be described. . As shown in FIG. 1037(b), the display content of the main display area Dm is similar to the presentation mode in the time saving state A, only in that the number of attack icon display areas is changed from 2 to 4. are different. In the time saving state B, as the fourth end condition (time saving end condition established when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the specified number in the time saving final fluctuation), the number of reserved balls is set to 3 It corresponds to what is being done. That is, one second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving state B, and three second special symbol lotteries based on the three second special symbol holding balls that can be obtained during the time saving state B. , in that four display areas are formed for displaying attack icons corresponding to each of the second special symbols for a total of four times. Moreover, the time saving state A and the time saving state B are different also about the display content of the sub-display area Ds. That is, in the time-saving state B, characters such as "Bonus if the attack hits! MAX if the enemy is defeated!?" are displayed. By means of these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the attack hits the monster character 821 alone, it will be a big hit, and if the effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed, the MAX bonus will be fixed. be able to. In addition, the MAX bonus means that after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the most advantageous time-saving state C (substantially continued until the next jackpot). In other words, the jackpot and the time-saving state C mean a transition to a state in which the time-saving limit number of times (three times) is reached, forming an extremely advantageous state in which four jackpots are guaranteed in total. It is shown that. In the thirty-eighth control example, a 4-round jackpot game is executed as the second special symbol jackpot, and 600 or more prize balls are paid out per jackpot, so an effect to defeat the monster character 821 is executed. By doing so, it is possible to receive the same benefit as winning a jackpot of 16 rounds (2400 or more prize balls are paid out). Therefore, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls at once, despite the fact that only 4 rounds of jackpots are installed, so that it is possible to realize well-balanced playability. .
FIG. 1038(a) is a diagram showing a production mode when the winning of the jackpot (MAX bonus) corresponding to the time saving state C is confirmed (the jackpot or small hit A41 is won in the lottery of the second special symbol). be. As shown in FIG. 1038(a), when the MAX bonus is won, the monster character 821 is defeated by the adventurer character 811 in the main display area Dm, and the number "7" is displayed. An effect in which the simulated third symbols are aligned is executed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "MAX BONUS FINAL!!" are displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the player has won the MAX bonus.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1038 (b), the production mode in each time saving state C until reaching the time saving limit number of times after winning the MAX bonus will be described. Here, in the 38th control example, the 4-round jackpot and the time saving state C are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached after winning the jackpot corresponding to the time saving state C for the first time (MAX bonus mode). The performance mode during the winning is set to a performance mode as if one big win continues. That is, in the first time-saving state C after the end of the first jackpot, the production is performed as if it is in the interval production after the end of the 4th round (5 rounds before), and the second 4th round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode. Then, the effect is executed as if it is the 5th to 8th round of the jackpot, and in the second time-saving state C, it is assumed that the interval effect after the end of the 8th round (before the 9th round) is being performed. In the 3rd 4th round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, the 9th to 12th round of the jackpot is simulated, and the 3rd time (the last in the time reduction limit number ), in the time-saving state C, after the end of 12 rounds (before 13 rounds), an effect is performed as if it is in an interval effect, and in the 4th round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, 13 rounds of a pseudo jackpot. It is configured to execute an effect as if it is the 16th round from the eye. With this configuration, the player can be made to think that four big wins are one big win. , the number of rounds is extremely large, and it is possible to make it seem as if one has won a jackpot that can win a large number of prize balls. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 1038(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of time saving state C between jackpots in the MAX bonus mode. As shown in FIG. 1038(b), in the short time state C between the jackpots in the MAX bonus mode, a pseudo interval performance is executed as if it were during the interval period. That is, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 is pleased with the large amount of gold coins that have appeared from the treasure chest 810, and the text "5 rounds" indicating the next pseudo number of rounds is displayed in the small display area Dm9. is displayed. In the small consular area Dm2, characters (800) indicating the number of prize balls already paid out in the MAX mode and characters (2400) indicating the total number of prize balls to be paid out in the MAX bonus mode are displayed. be done. Further, in the small display area Dm8, the variable display effect of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed in a relatively unnoticeable manner. Further, the characters "MAX BONUS ON" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can be made to feel as if a jackpot of 16 rounds is being executed, so that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1039, the transition of the presentation mode in the case of shifting to the time saving state A after the occurrence of the first hit in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. Fig. 1039 is a production mode from the end of the first hit won in the normal mode in this 38th control example to the end of the time saving state A, digesting the second special symbol holding ball, and returning to the normal mode. is a diagram showing changes over time. As shown in FIG. 1039, when the first hit ends, first, an effect (hold charge effect, see FIG. 1036 and FIG. 1037(a)) prompting the player to obtain a hold ball (attack icon) by hitting to the right is executed. . The pending charge effect is executed until 10 seconds elapse after the first variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state A is started. In addition, by continuing right-handed hitting during the variable display effect of the second special symbol, when the start winning prize corresponding to the second special symbol occurs and the number of pending balls becomes 1, the time saving state A is terminated and the normal state to move to.
As shown in FIG. 1039, during the period of 20 seconds from the end of the pending charge effect to the end of the first variable display of the second special symbol, the first attack is made on the monster character 821. An effect of attempting an attack corresponding to the icon (attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI1) is executed, and the result of the effect is notified during the fixed display period (1 second) of the pattern. FIG. 1039 exemplifies the case where the effect result indicating that the subjugation of the monster character 821 has failed is reported, and when the notification period ends, the second variable display effect (the second A variable display effect based on the ball with 2 special symbols on hold) is started, a effect of attempting an attack corresponding to the second attack icon (attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI2) is executed, and the symbol is confirmed and displayed. A performance result is notified in a period (1 second). FIG. 1039 illustrates the case where the performance result indicating that the subjugation of the monster character 821 has failed even in the second attack is reported, and after the reporting period ends, the performance mode is switched to the normal mode.
In this way, in the period from the transition to the time-saving state A to the digestion of all the second special symbol holding balls acquired during the time-saving state A, a series of productions with continuity (story) Since it is possible to notify whether or not to enter the rush mode (time saving state B) or the MAX bonus mode, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1040, the effects in the MAX bonus mode will be described. FIG. 1040 is a diagram showing the change over time of the performance mode from winning the jackpot that shifts to the time saving state C to reaching the time saving limit number of times in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1040, when the 4-round jackpot (jackpot A41 to jackpot C41) of the type that shifts to the time-saving state C in the time-saving state is executed, first, the 1st to 4th rounds in the MAX bonus mode After the 4th round is finished, a pseudo interval effect is executed. Then, during the first time-saving state C, the pseudo interval production is continued, and when the 4-round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, in the 1st to 4th rounds of the 4-round jackpot, the pseudo-interval production is continued. A performance as if it were the 5th to 8th rounds is executed immediately, and when the pseudo 8th round ends, the pseudo interval performance is executed again. Then, during the second time-saving state C, the pseudo interval production is continued, and when the 4-round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, in the 1st to 4th rounds of the 4-round jackpot, the pseudo-interval production is continued. 9th to 12th rounds are executed, and when the pseudo 12th round ends, the pseudo interval performance is executed again. Then, during the third time (time saving limit number) time saving state C, the pseudo interval production is continued, and when the 4 round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, the 1st round to 4 of the 4 round jackpot In the 13th round, a pseudo effect is executed as if it were the 13th to 16th rounds, and when the pseudo 16th round ends and the ending period begins, the ending period is suspended at the beginning of the ending period. The effect of acquiring the attack icon is executed by the number of the second special symbol holding balls (almost four if the ball is continuously hit to the right during execution of the pseudo interval effect). After the jackpot is over, the attack icon acquired in the ending period is consumed to launch an attack on the monster character 821, which is performed up to four times. That is, the production of the same number of times as in the time saving state B is executed.
Thus, in this 38th control example, when the time saving state C is set after the end of the jackpot, four jackpot games and three times between the start of the first jackpot and reaching the time saving limit number of times During the time saving state C, since it is configured to execute a novel performance mode as if one jackpot game is continuously executed, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained for the player at one opportunity. It is possible to make the player think as if the player were playing a game, and to add sharpness to the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game, and to realize a suitable presentation mode.
Next, referring to FIG. 1041, a transition method between states in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 1041, in the thirty-eighth control example, mainly five types of states (modes) are provided. That is, it is set to the normal state of normal symbols (low probability state of normal symbols, no variation shortening, no open extension), and the game progresses by making the first special symbol lottery by hitting left (second special It is set to the normal state A (normal mode), which is an impossible (difficult) state to execute the lottery of symbols, and the time-saving state of normal symbols (high probability state of normal symbols, with fluctuation reduction, with open extension). Time-saving state A (chance mode), time-saving state B (time-saving mode), and time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode), which are states in which the game is progressed by making the lottery of the second special pattern by hitting, and normal patterns A state in which the normal state (normal symbol low probability state, no variation shortening, no open extension) is set, and the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed due to the presence of one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol. A normal state B (retraction mode) is provided at least.
Here, the time-saving states A to C are different in that different time-saving end conditions are set, and the easiness of entering the second ball entrance 640 is common. More specifically, in the time-saving state A, the first end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 10 times, and the second end condition is satisfied by executing the small winning game once. Then, the third end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the second special symbol once, and the fourth end condition is satisfied by accumulating one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation. . Therefore, in the time-saving state A, if the player continues to hit to the right according to the suggestion of the production, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the first entry into the second ball entrance 640, and the time-saving final variation is started. During the time saving final variation, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 again, so that the second special symbol reserved ball becomes one and the time saving state is completed. there is After the time saving state is ended, it becomes impossible (extremely difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if it hits the normal symbol, so two or more second special It is also impossible to acquire the holding ball of the design. In addition, in the hit of the normal symbol in the 38th control example, the end condition is established by detecting the entry of one game ball, and the electric accessory 640a is immediately closed (immersed), so the time saving state Only one game ball is allowed to enter (two or more game balls are excluded) during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a based on one normal symbol hit in ing. Therefore, when shifting to the time saving state A, it is possible to obtain a total of two opportunities for the advantageous second special symbol lottery.

In addition, the time saving state B is different from the time saving state A in that the first to third end conditions are common to the time saving state A, but the fourth end condition is set to three. Therefore, when the right-handed hitting is continued in the time saving state B, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the first entry into the second ball entrance 640, the time saving final variation is started, and the time saving is started. It is configured such that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 three times during the final variation, and thus the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes three and the time saving state is terminated. Thereby, when it shifts to the time saving state B, it is possible to obtain a total of four opportunities for the advantageous second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, in the time-saving state C, the first end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 100 times, the second end condition is satisfied by executing the small winning game once, and the second end condition is established. The third end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbol 100 times, and the fourth end condition is satisfied by accumulating 65535 or more reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time saving final variation. That is, when neither the big win nor the small win is won, the time-saving state continues until the lottery for the special symbols is executed 100 times. Here, in this 38th control example, the probability of winning a big win or a small win in the second special symbol lottery is set to about 1/3, so the big win is possible over 100 special symbol lotteries. The event of not winning even a jackpot has a very low probability (approximately 2/3 to the 100th power) that does not occur. Therefore, the time-saving state C is positioned as a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot is determined substantially.
First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1041, a method of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1041, there is a possibility of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a big win is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1041, in the normal state A, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320, and when the jackpot B41 determined at a rate of 95% is determined, the jackpot ends. The later game state is set to the time saving state A. On the other hand, when a jackpot A41 determined at a rate of 5% is determined when a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B.例文帳に追加As described above, the time saving state B is more advantageous than the time saving state A (substantial jackpot probability is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol) Because it is possible to acquire many lottery opportunities for the second special symbol When a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot type is the jackpot A41. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to the middle left side of FIG. 1041, a method of shifting from the time saving state A (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the middle left side of FIG. 1041, from the time-saving state A (chance mode) to another state, when a big hit is won, when a small hit is won, and when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed. may move to More specifically, as shown on the middle left side of FIG. 1041, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the time saving state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be done. Also, as shown on the left side of the middle of FIG. 1041, in the case of a small hit that is won with a probability of about 1/3 in the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state A, it is determined at a rate of 54% as a small hit type. When it becomes a small hit A41, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% is obtained as a small win type, the condition is that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, the time saving state C is an advantageous gaming state that substantially continues until the next big hit, while the time saving state B is a gaming state in which the advantageous second special symbol lottery opportunity is given only four times in total. is. In other words, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when a small win is won in the time saving state A, it is strongly expected that the small win A41 is won and the time saving state C is set. be able to. On the other hand, when all the held balls of the second special symbol acquired in the time saving state A are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that makes a player strongly expect to win a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3 between two lottery opportunities for the second special symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be improved. It should be noted that, strictly speaking, when the holding ball of the first second special symbol is acquired in the time saving state A, the normal state is transferred, but in FIG. 1041, the second special The period until all the holding balls of the pattern are digested is called the time saving state A.
Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 1041, a method of shifting from the time saving state B (time saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the middle right side of FIG. 1041, when the time-saving state B (time-saving mode) is changed to another state, when a big hit is won, when a small hit is won, and when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested may move to More specifically, as shown on the middle right side of FIG. 1041, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the time saving state B, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be done. Also, as shown on the middle right side of FIG. 1041, if the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state B becomes a small hit with a probability of about 1/3, it is determined at a rate of 54% as a small hit type. When it becomes a small hit A41, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. Further, when all the second special symbol holding balls acquired in the time saving state B are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. On the other hand, when winning a small hit, when it becomes a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% as a small win type, it is determined that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. As a condition, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state B (the time saving state B is looped). As a result, in the time-saving state B, as in the time-saving state A, it is strongly hoped that the ball of the second special symbol acquired during the time-saving state will win a small hit or a big hit with a probability of about 1/3. When a small win is won, the game has a game property that makes the player strongly desire to be set to a more advantageous time saving state C, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1041, a method of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1041, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second stage from the bottom of FIG. The state is set to normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1041, in the time saving state C, the jackpot or small win with a probability of about 1/3 is elected, and if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot ends The later game state is again set to the time saving state C (the time saving state is looped). For this reason, once it shifts to the time saving state C, a very advantageous state is formed in which the time saving state C and the jackpot are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached. In addition, as described above, in the 38th control example, the number of rounds of the jackpot is all 4 rounds, and the number of times of the time saving limit is set to 3 times. Big hits are guaranteed. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which prize balls for 16 rounds can be obtained almost at once, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 1041, a method of shifting from normal state B (retraction mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1041, from the normal state B (pull-back mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and the second special held during the time saving state C There is a possibility of migration when all the holding balls of the pattern are digested. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1041, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state B, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1041, in the normal state B, when it becomes a small hit that is elected with a probability of about 1/3 in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined as a small hit type at a rate of 54%. When the small win A41 is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% is obtained as a small win type, the condition is that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when the small hit is won in the normal state B, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested in the normal state B (all are removed), the state after digestion becomes the normal state A.
Thus, in the thirty-eighth control example, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the normal state B, when winning a small win with a high probability of about 1/3, the small win type is a small win A41. or the small win B41, the profit obtained by the player is largely different. Therefore, it wins the small win A41 and shifts to the time saving state C, and whether it is possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls (balls for 16 rounds) at once, wins the small win B41 and shifts to the time saving state B Since it is possible to make the player play the game while paying more attention to the situation, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Electrical configuration of the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1042(a). FIG. 1042(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1042(a), the ROM 202 in the thirty-eighth control example has a A first win random number table 202ak is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202bk is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202bj, and a second win random number table 202ck is provided instead of the second win random number table 202cj. point, the point that the variation pattern selection table 202dk is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202dj, the point that the time reduction grant table 202ek is provided instead of the time reduction grant table 202ej, the small hit type selection table 202fj Instead, it is different in that a small hit type selection table 202fk is provided, a time saving type selection table 202ja, and a normal pattern type selection table 202jb are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the thirty-seventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIGS. 1043(a) and (b), the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 that constitute the first winning random number table 202ak in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. . Figure 1043 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 in the present 38th control example, Figure 1043 (b) is the specification of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the present 38th control example It is a figure showing the contents. First, with reference to FIG. 1043(a), the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 referred to when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the thirty-eighth control example will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1043(a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 in the present 38th control example has "0 to 204 ” are defined in association with 205 random numbers (counter values), but random numbers determined as small hits are not associated. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit is 205, so the first special The probability of winning the jackpot in the symbol lottery is about 1/320 (205/65536).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1043(b), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 referred to when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1043(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1043(b), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the 38th control example, the range of random numbers (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a jackpot is set to "0 to 204 205 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 21845 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 22049". A range is associated and defined.
Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, among 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 21845, so the lottery for the second special symbol. The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/3 (21845/65536).

Thus, in the thirty-eighth control example, the random number value determined as the special symbol jackpot is shared between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (that is, the jackpot probability is shared). ) On the other hand, the random number determined to be a small hit is provided only in the lottery of the second special symbol. And, just like the small hits in the 37th control example and the 29th control example described above, the small hit in the 38th control example is almost certainly the specific region 650e3 just by continuing to hit to the right during the small win game. Since it is constructed so that a game ball can pass through and it is possible to win a big win, it is a lottery result that substantially confirms the winning of a big win. Therefore, the substantial jackpot probability (probability of sum of jackpot and small hit) is about 1/320 in the lottery of the first special symbol, while it is about 1/3 in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the lottery of the second special symbol can be made extremely high with respect to the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to realize well-balanced gameplay, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1043(c), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1043(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the thirty-eighth control example. This jackpot type selection table 202bk is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202bj (see FIG. 1012(c)) in the thirty-seventh control example described above. is a data table referenced by As shown in FIG. 1043(c), in the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the thirty-eighth control example, two types of jackpot A41 and jackpot B41 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C41 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol.
As shown in FIG. 1043 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" with "jackpot A41" associated with it, A "jackpot B41" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "5 to 99". "Jackpot A41" has 4 rounds, and basically, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state B (the time-saving state in which the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is given a total of 4 times). It is a type. In addition, "jackpot B41" has 4 rounds, and basically, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state A (the time-saving state in which the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol is given twice in total). It is a jackpot type. Therefore, there is no difference between the ``jackpot A41'' and the ``jackpot B41'' in terms of the number of rounds, but the ``jackpot A41'' is more advantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished. is provided twice more than the "jackpot B41", the "jackpot A41" is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than the "jackpot B41".
Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41" are 5 and 95, respectively, the ratios of winning ``jackpot A41'' and ``jackpot B41'' when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern are 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, a time-saving state B with a relatively low probability (5% rate) and a high degree of advantage is set, and a relatively high probability (95% rate) ), a time-saving state A with a low advantageous degree is set. In addition, this is a story limited to the normal state, and if you win the "jackpot A41" or "jackpot B41" in the time-saving state (the jackpot is started), the number of times of the time-saving limit has not been reached. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state C.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1043 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, for the entire range (range of "0 to 99") that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, "jackpot C41 ” are defined in association with each other. Since the ``big win C41'' is associated with the whole range that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, the ``big win C41'' is always decided when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern. This "jackpot C41" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state C. The number of rounds is the same as that of other jackpots, but since the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C with the highest degree of advantage, it is the most advantageous jackpot type among all the jackpot types.
In addition to these "big win A41" to "big win C41", "big win D41" is also provided in the thirty-eighth control example. This "jackpot D41" is a jackpot type that is won when a small win is won, a small win B41 is determined as a small win type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed during the small win B41 game. The game state after the end is basically a 4-round jackpot set to the time-saving state B. In addition, when "jackpot D41" is won in the time saving state, the time saving state C is set on the condition that the time saving limit number of times is not reached in the same manner as other jackpot types.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1044(a), details of the second winning random number table 202ck in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This second winning random number table 202ck is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not a normal symbol is appropriate when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 1044(a), in the second winning random number table 202ck in the thirty-eighth control example, "0" is set as a random value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning of a normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol. are mapped. On the other hand, as a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a hit of a normal pattern in the time saving state of the normal pattern, the whole range of values that the second hit random number counter C4 can take ("0 to 299" range) corresponds. attached. For this reason, in this 38th control example, even if the normal pattern is hit to the right in the normal state, the normal pattern is won only with a low probability (probability of 1/300), while in the normal pattern time-saving state , the player wins the normal symbol every time the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right.
Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the thirty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1044(b). This variation pattern selection table 202dk is similar to the variation pattern selection table 202dj (see FIG. 1013 (b)) in the above-described thirty-seventh control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern according to the lottery result ( It is a data table referred to for selecting the variable time). FIG. 1044(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk.

As shown in FIG. 1044(b), the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the thirty-eighth control example is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. A normal table 202dk1, a time saving table 202dk2 that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving states A and B, and a time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) and a MAX bonus table 202dk3 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in . First, details of the normal table 202dk1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1044(c).
FIG. 1044(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202dk1 in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1044(c), the normal table 202dk1 includes the special symbol type used for the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , and different variation patterns (variation times) are defined correspondingly. In other words, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of different variation times according to the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". For the range of "150 to 179", "out of" with a variation time of 7 seconds as a variation pattern, and "150 to 179" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "140 to 149" For the range of ", "various types of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined as the fluctuation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198", "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. there is
In addition, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds is in the range of "30 to 189", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds as a variation pattern is "190 to 198". A "special reach" with a variation time of 140 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.
In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, when the lottery result is a loss, the variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be determined than when the lottery result is a big hit. It is configured so that the possibility of the result of the special symbol lottery being a big win is higher when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined. By constructing in this way, the special symbol variation, in which the lottery result is out, continues for a long period of time for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery executed per unit time continues. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to an extremely small number of executions.

In addition, when the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced, that is, when the special symbol variation is executed for a long time, the expectation for winning the jackpot is heightened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "gull out" with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)", and the lottery result is "jackpot" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as "hit" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first Special symbol)” and the lottery result is “small win”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198” "Small hit" is stipulated.
In addition, in the 38th control example, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the winning of the normal symbol is won, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 as the winning of the normal symbol. Since the opening and closing pattern (short open for 0.1 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a is set, which makes it impossible (difficult) to open the second ball entrance 640 even if the normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state. and game balls cannot be entered. In this 38th control example, as a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, one or more holding balls of the second special symbol are struck to the right in the time saving state (any of the time saving states A to C). It is a case where the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is ended before digesting the reserved ball after acquiring it. That is, after the fourth end condition is satisfied by continuing to hit right in time saving state A or time saving state B, and in the state where the reserved ball is acquired by continuing to hit right in time saving state C This is the case where the normal state B is reached after reaching the time saving limit number of times. In both cases, the second special symbol variable display period is a period during which the adventurer character 811 attacks the monster character 821 using the attack icon. By fixing the fluctuation time to 20 seconds regardless of the result, the presentation period can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1045(a), details of the time saving table 202dk2 described above will be described. FIG. 1045(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dk2. As shown in FIG. 1045 (a), in the time saving table 202dk2, if the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the acquired If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as "super short out" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the lottery result is "big hit" , "super short winning" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. This means that when one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol are held and the state shifts to a time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage can be executed, the first ball based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol is selected. To prevent a player from getting impatient due to a long continuation of the variable display performance of special symbols (a period during which the lottery of a second special symbol with a high substantial expectation for a big win cannot be executed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1045 (a), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)", and the lottery result is "out" In, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as "long out" with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 ( 2nd special symbol)” and the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is 30 as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198”. Second "long win" is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 A "long small win" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198". That is, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 30 seconds. Therefore, 10 seconds, which is the presentation period of the pending charge presentation (see FIGS. 1036(b) and 1037(b)), and the presentation in which the adventurer character 811 attacks the monster character 821 corresponding to the attack icon. 20 seconds, which is the effect period of , can be secured regardless of the lottery result.
Next, details of the MAX bonus table 202dk3 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 1045(b). FIG. 1045(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this MAX bonus table 202dk3. As shown in FIG. 1045 (b), in the MAX bonus table 202dk3, the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" in the same way as the time saving table 202dk2, and the lottery result is "off ”, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as “ultra-short out” with a variation time of 0.5 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198”, and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as a "super short hit" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198". ing. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. This is similar to the case of referring to the time saving table 202dk2, when moving to the time saving state C while holding one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol It is intended to prevent a player from becoming impatient due to a long continuation of the fluctuation display performance of patterns (a period during which the lottery of the second special patterns with a high substantial expectation for a big win cannot be executed).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1045 (b), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "out" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as "short out" with a variation time of 5 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second 2 special symbol)” and the lottery result is “big hit”, the variation time is 5 seconds as the variation pattern for the entire range of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 “0 to 198” If the "short hit" is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is For the entire range of '0 to 198', a 'small hit' with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. That is, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 5 seconds. The reason why the variable time is shorter than the time saving table 202dk2 is that, as described above, while the time saving state C is set, an effect mode (pseudo interval effect) as if a jackpot game is in progress is set. This is because the period during which the big win and the time-saving state C are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached is a performance operation that makes the player think that one big win is continuing. . In other words, if the fluctuation time is made too long, the effect period of the pseudo-interval effect becomes too long, and there is a possibility that the player will feel distrust and the game in the time-saving state C will be prolonged. , by setting a relatively short period of 5 seconds as the variation time, the variation time of each time is kept short, and the performance period of the pseudo interval performance is minimized. On the other hand, if each variation time is shortened too much, it will be difficult for the ball to accumulate to the upper limit when the time limit is reached, and the chance of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state B will decrease. Since there is a possibility that the fluctuation time may be over, it is configured to avoid an extremely short fluctuation time such as 0.1 second or 0.5 second. As a result, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily think that the time until reaching the time-saving limit number of times is 1 jackpot while appropriately storing the second special pattern reserved balls in the time-saving state C.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1046 (a), the details of time reduction grant table 202ek in the 38th example of control are explained. This time saving grant table 202ek is similar to the time saving grant table 202ej (see FIG. 1014(b)) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions. FIG. 1046(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction provision table 202ek.

As shown in FIG. 1046 (a), the time reduction grant table 202ek in the present 38th control example is associated with the value of each counter referred to when determining whether or not the time reduction end condition is satisfied for each jackpot type. are stipulated. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1046 (a), in this 38th control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t , and a prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are provided. The time saving counter 203h is a counter for judging whether or not an end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time saving state is set is established (judgment), and is a small winning counter. 203s is a counter for determining whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of small winning games executed after the time saving state is established (determines), and a special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed after the time-saving state is set, and the prescribed number of pending balls The counter 203ka is a counter for judging whether or not an end condition (fourth end condition) corresponding to the number of held balls of the second special symbol accumulated during execution of the final variable display of the time saving state is established. be.
As shown in FIG. 1046 (a), in this 38th control example, four types of "jackpot A41" to "jackpot D41" are provided as jackpot types, and the time reduction grant table 202ek has for each jackpot type Then, the value of the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (that is, the first to fourth end conditions) are defined in association.
As shown in FIG. 1046 (a), for "jackpot A41" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "3" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when "jackpot A41" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third termination condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 1, and as the fourth termination condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 3. That is, the time saving state B is set. When the player continuously hits to the right in this time-saving state B, the fourth end condition is almost satisfied and the time-saving state is terminated. In other words, after shifting to the time saving state B, the fourth end condition is established by acquiring three second special symbol holding balls during the execution of the first second special symbol variation display (time saving final variation). In most cases, when shifting to the time saving state B, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol four times.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1046 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "jackpot A41" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure A value of "100" for the 2 counter 203t and a value of "65535" for the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined. Therefore, when "jackpot A41" is won in the time-saving state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition, As the third end condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 100 times, and as the fourth end condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 65535. That is, the time saving state C is set. In the time-saving state C, a jackpot or a small win that is substantially determined is won with a probability of about 1/3, so there is almost no possibility that the time-saving state will continue until the final change of the time-saving state, and the second end condition, Alternatively, the time saving state is ended based on the jackpot winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1046 (a), for "jackpot B41" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the small hit counter 203s The value "1", the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "1" of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot B41" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third end condition, one lottery number of the second special symbol is set, and as the fourth end condition, the number of the second special symbol reserved balls in the time-saving final variation is set as one. That is, the time saving state A is set. When the player continuously hits to the right in this time saving state A, the fourth end condition is almost satisfied and the time saving state is ended. That is, after shifting to the time saving state A, the fourth end condition is established by acquiring one second special symbol holding ball during the execution of the first second special symbol variation display (time saving final variation). In most cases, when shifting to the time saving state B, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol twice.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1046 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "jackpot B41" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure The value "100" of the 2 counter 203t and the value "65535" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time saving state C is set in the same manner as the "jackpot A41".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1046 (a), for "jackpot C41" as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "100", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1 ", the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "65535" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time-saving state C is set in the same way as when "jackpot A41" or "jackpot B41" is won in the time-saving state.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1046 (a), for "jackpot D41" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the small hit counter 203s The value of "1", the value of special figure 2 counter 203t "1", and the value of specified reserved ball number counter 203ka "3" are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot D41" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third termination condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 1, and as the fourth termination condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 3. That is, it is set to the time-saving state B, and the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol can be obtained almost four times.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1046 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "jackpot D41" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure The value "100" of the 2 counter 203t and the value "65535" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time saving state C is set in the same manner as the "jackpot A41".
Thus, in the 38th control example, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, one of the time-saving states A to C is set according to the jackpot type, while when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state , the game state after the end of the big win is set to the most advantageous time-saving state C regardless of the kind of the big win. As a result, when a big win is won directly or via a small win in the normal state, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the big win. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state, the game can be played while giving a sense of security that the most advantageous time saving state C has been established. In addition, as described above, even if the jackpot is won in the time saving state C, if the time saving limit number of times is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state.
Here, in the thirty-eighth control example, when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the game state when the big win symbols are stopped and displayed is determined as the game state when the big win is won, while the special symbol lottery is determined. When the big win is won based on the game ball passing through the specific area 650e3 as a result of a small win, the game state at the time of passing through the specific area 650e3 is determined as the game state at the time of winning the big win. there is And, as described above, in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, as long as the normal game method (the game method that continues to hit the right continuously) is performed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the first time is almost During the execution of , the fourth termination condition is established and the time saving state is terminated. In other words, since the time saving state is terminated before the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol for the first time, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, A game state at the time of winning a jackpot can be handled as a normal state. That is, in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, if the lottery result of the first second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the lottery result of the first second special symbol will be out, and it will shift to the normal state. The degree of advantage can be the same in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed from 1 is a big win or a small win. In other words, even if it becomes a big hit or a small hit in the first second special symbol lottery, it does not become a big hit in the time saving state (the transition to the time saving state C is not confirmed), so the first time to be executed in the time saving state The lottery for the second special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern for the second shift executed after shifting to the normal state can make the player have the same expectation. Therefore, even if the first lottery for the second special symbol is lost, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling excessive disappointment.
In addition, if the game is played so that the fourth end condition is not satisfied in the time saving state A or the time saving state B (the game is played so that the number of reserved balls is less than the specified number), 1 started in the time saving state The time-saving state can be continued until the second special symbol variation stop timing, but in the case of this game method, the substantial jackpot probability is extremely high (approximately 1/3 probability). A lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. will be lost more than once. In addition, since the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small hit, the transition to the normal state is completed before the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3, so the big win can be started in the time-saving state. Only if you win a jackpot in a special drawing lottery. Furthermore, in this case, it is treated as a jackpot in the time saving state, and the remaining number of times with respect to the time saving limit number is subtracted by 1, so compared to the case of shifting to the time saving state C in the normal game method, the set number of times of the time saving state C is reduced by one, resulting in one loss of the number of jackpots. For this reason, the risk is high (the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is lost one or more times), but the return is small (set to time saving state C, but the number of jackpots is one less than usual). , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to try to execute an irregular game method in which the game is played so that the fourth end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1046(b), details of the small hit type selection table 202fk in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This small hit type selection table 202fk, similar to the small hit type selection table 202fj (see FIG. 1015 (a)) in the above-described 37th control example, selects the small hit type when it becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery. It is a data table referred to for determination. Figure 1046 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this small hit type selection table 202fk. As shown in FIG. 1046 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 53", "small hit A41" is associated with the small hit type, and the small hit type "Small hit B41" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range of "54 to 99" for the value of the counter C5. Here, both the "small hit A41" and the "small hit B41" can easily enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 simply by continuing to hit to the right during execution of the small win game. It is a type, and when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit A41", it wins the big hit C41, while when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit B41" It is configured to win the jackpot D41. As described above, the jackpot C41 is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot D41 ends when the jackpot is won in the normal state. The later game state is set to the time saving state B, while the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C when winning in the time saving state is set. In addition, the number of rounds for each jackpot is 4 rounds. Therefore, since the big win C41 has a higher degree of advantage than the big win B41, the small win A41 is a small win type with a higher degree of advantage than the small win B41.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random number (counter value) associated with "small hit A41" and "small hit B41" Since they are 54 and 46, respectively, the ratio of determining "small hit A41" and "small hit B41" when winning the small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 54% (54/100). and 46% (46/100).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1042(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1042(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1042 (b), the RAM 203 in the thirty-eighth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 1011 (b)). The difference is that a number-of-balls counter 203ka, a time-saving limit counter 203kb, a subtraction waiting flag 203kc, and a winning state storage area 203kd are added. Another difference is that the general electric operation counter 203ja is omitted.
The special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter used for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state has reached the specified number of times. The initial value of this special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0, and a counter value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot. In addition, this special figure 2 counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 from the counter value each time the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is reached in the time saving state (see S634A in FIG. 1051), and the value is updated to 0. By doing so, it is determined that the third end condition of the time saving state is established, and the game state is set to the normal state (see S637A in FIG. 1051).

The prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka is a counter used for determining whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the prescribed number in the final variation in the time saving state. The initial value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka is set to 0, and a counter value corresponding to the type of the big win is set when the big win ends. In the final variation of the time-saving state, each time a start winning prize of a new second special symbol is detected, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has exceeded the value of the prescribed number of reserved balls counter 203ka (Fig. 1054 S852A), when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol exceeds the value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka, it is determined that the fourth end condition is satisfied, and the game state is set to the normal state ( See S853A in FIG. 1054).
The time saving limit counter 203kb is a counter used for determining whether or not the time saving limit number of times has been reached. The initial value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is set to 0, and the value is set to 3 when a big win is won in the normal state and the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state. In addition, this time saving limit counter 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 each time a jackpot is won in the time saving state (see S2409A in FIG. 1058), and when the value is updated to 0, regardless of the jackpot type , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal state. Thereby, the number of consecutive times of the time saving state can be limited to a fixed number of times.
The subtraction standby flag 203kc is a flag indicating whether or not the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s is made to wait when the small hit is won. If this subtraction standby flag 203kc is on, it means that the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s was waited (the small hit counter 203kc was not subtracted at the small hit winning timing), and if it is off, the subtraction is waited. It means not let. This subtraction standby flag 203kc is set to ON when the state at the time of winning the small hit is the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) (see S712A in FIG. 1052). When the entry of the game ball into the specific area 650e3 is detected during the small winning game, when the state of the subtraction standby flag 203kc is ON, the subtraction processing of the small winning counter 203s which has been waiting is executed. (see S1413A in FIG. 1056). By configuring in this way, even if a small win is won in the time saving state C, the small win counter 203s can be subtracted after the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 instead of at the start of the small win. The game state when the game ball enters the area 650e3 can be reliably set to the time-saving state.
The winning state storage area 203kd is a storage area for storing data indicating the gaming state when a big win is won. In the winning state storage area 203kd, data indicating the game state at the stop timing of the jackpot symbols is stored when the lottery result of the special symbols is a jackpot. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, data indicating the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in the small hit game is stored (see S1411A in FIG. 1056). At the end of the jackpot, the data stored in the state storage area 203kd at the time of winning and the game state (time saving end condition) corresponding to the jackpot type are read from the time saving giving table 202ek (see FIG. 1046(a)). set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1047(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1047(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1047(a), the ROM 222 in the thirty-eighth control example has an attack icon selection table 222ka added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 1016(a)). It is different in that it is present and that the standby effect selection table 222ja is deleted.
The attack icon selection table 222ka is a data table referred to in order to select the type of attack icon acquired in the battle production executed in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the normal state B. Details of the attack icon selection table 222ka will be described with reference to FIG. 1047(b).
FIG. 1047(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the attack icon selection table 222ka. As shown in FIG. 1047(b), this attack icon selection table 222ka defines the range of values of the first effect counter 223f1 and the type of attack icon in association with each lottery result of the second special symbol. It is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1047(b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit A41, the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is within the range of "0 to 19". On the other hand, a "special move" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "20 to 89", and a "cutting attack" icon is defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter 223f1. A "kick" icon is defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" for the value of 223f1. Therefore, when the lottery result is a big win or a small win A41 (that is, when the transition to the advantageous time-saving state C) occurs, the "slashing" icon is selected at a relatively high rate, and the "kicking" icon at a low rate. is selected.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1047 (b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit B41 (when the advantage shifts to the time saving state B lower than the time saving state C), the first production When the value of the counter 223f1 ranges from "0 to 4", the "deathblow" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1. " icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50 to 84", the "kick" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "85 to 84". 99” is defined in association with a “punch” icon. Therefore, if the lottery result is a small hit B41 (that is, if the advantage is shifted to the relatively low time-saving state B), than the case of moving to the time-saving state C As the selection ratio of the “hit” icon decreases, the selection ratio of the “kick” icon increases. Moreover, the selection rate of the "punch" icon which is not selected when shifting to the time saving state C is set to 15%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1047(b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 9", the "slashing" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "10 to 49", the "kick" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50 to 99". A "punch" icon is defined in association with the range of . Therefore, when the lottery result is a loss, the "special move" icon is not selected. That is, when the "special move" icon appears, a big win or a small win is confirmed. In addition, the selection ratio of the "punch" icon is greatly increased as compared with the case of winning a big win or a small win.
In this way, according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, since the selection ratio for each type of attack icon is configured to be different, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 Each time it is detected, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the displayed attack icon. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1048, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1048 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1048, the RAM 223 in the thirty-eighth control example has an icon information storage area 223ka and a remaining hit count counter 223kb in comparison with the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 1016(b)). and are added, and the standby effect flag 223ja, the standby effect frequency counter 223jb, and the standby period timer 223jc are deleted.
The icon information storage area 223ka is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of attack icon selected with reference to the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1047(b)). In the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the normal state B, the data stored in the icon information storage area 223ka is referred to until the second special symbol holding ball becomes 0 (or until the jackpot is won). The content of the attack to be made to the adventurer character 811 in the variable display effect of each second special symbol is set (see S4424A in FIG. 1063). As a result, it is possible to prevent setting an effect for performing an attack that differs from the type of attack icon acquired in the pending charge effect (see FIGS. 1036(b) and 1037(b)). A more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

The remaining hit number counter 223kb is a counter indicating the number of remaining jackpots until reaching the time saving limit number of times in the case of shifting to the time saving state C. The initial value of the remaining hit number counter 223kb is set to 0, and the value is set to 4 when winning a jackpot that shifts to the time saving state C (see S3623A in FIG. 1061). In addition, the value of the remaining value number counter 223kb is updated by subtracting 1 each time the ending period of the jackpot is reached. In this 38th control example, the value of the remaining hit count counter 223 kb is referred to, and the number of rounds in each jackpot until reaching the time reduction limit count is displayed as if one jackpot game continues. set to display.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1049 to 1058. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1049, details of the special symbol determination process (S231A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This special symbol determination process (S231A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1019) in the thirty-seventh control example described above. It is a process for executing the lottery of symbols.
Among the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 1049) in this 38th control example, each processing of S301 to S305 is the same as each processing of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 1019) in the 37th control example. process is executed. In addition, in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1049) in the present 38th control example, in the process of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S303: No), It is determined whether or not the special pattern lottery result is a small hit (S321A), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S321A: Yes), the special pattern lottery result is set to a small hit (S322A). , the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the small winning symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S323A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S321A, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S321A: No), the processes of S322A and S323A are skipped and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1050, details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S232A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S232A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1021) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, and is a special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1021). ), it is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol. FIG. 1050 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S232A).

Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1050) in this 38th control example, in each process of S401 to S408, S401 to S401 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1021) in the above-described 37th control example The same processing as each processing of S408 is executed. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1050) in the present 38th control example, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S401: No), then, It is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S431A), and if it is determined to be a small hit (S431A: Yes), a small hit type selection table 202fk (see FIG. 1046 (b)) ) to determine the type of small hit (S432A), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, in the process of S431A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S431A: No), the process of S432A is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1051, details of the time saving update process (S233A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This time saving update process (S233A) is a process that is executed instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, and similarly to the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023), the time saving end condition is set. While updating various counter values for determining, it is a process for ending the time saving state when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied.
Of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1051) in the thirty-eighth control example, in each process of S601 to S605 and S607, respectively S601 to S605 of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, and The same processing as each processing of S607 is executed. In addition, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1051) in the present 38th control example, when the process of S605 ends, the values of the special figure 2 counter 203t, the small hit counter 203s, and the specified number of pending ball counter 203ka are all reset to 0 (S631A), and the process proceeds to S607. In the processing of this S631A, as various counters for determining the time saving end condition, the normal electric operation counter 203ka is deleted from the 37th control example, and the special figure 2 counter 203t and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka are added. This is a change that accompanies the fact that
In addition, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1051) in the present 38th control example, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 in the process of S604 (S604: No), then the number of winning times of the small hit A small winning time saving update process for determining whether or not the time saving end condition (second end condition) is established is executed (S632A). The details of this small hit time saving update process (S632A) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S632A is completed, it is then determined whether or not the variable display of the special symbol for which the stop display is set this time is the variable display of the second special symbol (S633A), and it is not the variable display of the second special symbol ( (S633A: No), since there is no possibility that the time-saving end condition is satisfied, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S633A, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display (S633A: Yes), the counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S634A), and the special after subtraction A remaining time reduction command indicating the counter value of the counter 203t in FIG. 2 is set (S635A).

When the processing of S635A ends, then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0 (S636A), and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0. In the case (S636A: Yes), each process of S637A to S639A for ending the time saving state and setting to the normal state is executed. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S637A), and the time reduction counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the specified number of reserved balls counter are set. By resetting all the values of 203ka to 0, the time saving end condition is cleared (S638A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S639A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S636A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (S636A: No), because it means that the time saving state continues, S637A ~ S639A Each process is skipped and the present process is ended as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1052, the details of the above-described small winning time saving update process (S632A) will be described. Figure 1052 is a flow chart showing this small winning time saving update process (S632A). When this small hit time saving update process (S632) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S701), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S701 : No), since the time-saving end condition (second end condition) based on the number of winning small hits cannot be established, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current state is the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C). Determine (S711A).
In the process of S711A, if it is determined that the current state is the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C) (S711A: Yes), wait for the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s by setting the subtraction waiting flag 203kc to ON ( delay) (S712A), and the process ends. In the time-saving state C, by waiting for the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s, the time-saving state can be continued until the generation timing of V winning (entering the game ball into the specific area 650e3). That is, when a small win is won in the time saving state C and a V prize is generated during the small win game and a big win is won, the game state at the time of winning the big win can be changed to the time saving state. That is, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state C, the time saving state C can be set regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, once shifting to the time-saving state C, an extremely advantageous situation in which the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached can be surely established, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.
On the other hand, in the processing of S711A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C) (S711A: No), the counter value of the small hit counter 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S702) , and determines whether or not the counter value after the subtraction has reached 0 (S703). In the process of S703, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s has been updated to 0 (S703: Yes), each process of S704, S713A, and S706 for ending the time saving state and setting it to the normal state is performed. Run. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S704), and the time saving counter 203h, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the prescribed number of reserved balls By resetting all the values of the counter 203ka to 0, the time saving end condition is cleared (S713A). Next, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S706), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S703, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s after subtraction is not 0 (S703: No), it means that the time saving state continues, S704, S713A, and Each process of S706 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1053, details of the starting winning process (S112A) will be described. This start winning process (S112A) is a process that is executed in place of the starting winning process (see FIG. 822) in the thirty-seventh control example (and twenty-ninth control example) described above. Similarly, when a game ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), each counter value obtained according to the entrance is This is a process for storing in a storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) corresponding to the type of detected entrance. FIG. 1053 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S112A).
Of the starting winning process (see FIG. 1053) in the thirty-eighth control example, each of the processes of S801 to S809 and S811 to S813 corresponds to the starting winning process (see FIG. 1053) in the thirty-seventh control example (and twenty-ninth control example). 822), the same processes as the processes of S801 to S809 and S811 to S813 are executed. In addition, in the starting winning process (see FIG. 1053) in the present 38th control example, when the process of S809 ends, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a value smaller than 4. If it is determined (S821A) that the value is not less than 4 (that is, it is the upper limit value of 4) (S821A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S821A, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S821A: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N2 ) is updated by adding 1 (S811), and then the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after updating is reserved for determining whether or not the time saving end condition (fourth end condition) is satisfied. A number-of-balls determination process is executed (S822A), and the process proceeds to S812. The details of this pending ball number determination process (S822A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Thus, in the thirty-eighth control example, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set to four, as in the case of the first special symbol. As a result, variation can be given to the number of remaining reserved balls of the second special symbol when the time-saving state is terminated and the state returns to the normal state, so that the number of substantial second special symbols according to the type of the time-saving state can be given. Since the lottery opportunities can be made different and the possibility of winning a big win can also be made different, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1054, details of the above-described pending ball number determination process (S822A) will be described. FIG. 1054 is a flowchart showing the pending ball number determination process (S822A). In the pending ball number determination process (S822A), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 (S851A), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is not 1 ( S851A: No), meaning that it is not the final variation in the time saving state, meaning that the time saving state cannot be ended regardless of the number of balls held (or it is not the time saving state in the first place), so this process ends as it is do.

On the other hand, in the process of S851A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 (S851: Yes), then the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is the specified reserved ball It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the counter value of the number counter 203ka (S852A), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka If (S852A: No), it means that the end condition (fourth end condition) of the time saving state is not satisfied, so this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S852A, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is equal to or greater than the counter value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (S852A: Yes), the fourth Since it means that the end condition is satisfied, each process of S852A to S855A for ending the time saving state is executed. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S853A), the time reduction counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the special figure 2 counter 203t, And the time saving end condition is cleared by resetting all the values of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka to 0 (S854A). Next, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S855A), and this processing ends.
By executing this pending ball number determination processing (see FIG. 1054), the time saving state can be ended based on the number of pending balls reaching the specified number in the final variation of the time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, although the number of times of time saving is the same (the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is once), the number of times of lottery of the substantial second special symbol can be made different. can. That is, in the time saving state A, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed only twice at most from the time when the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state until all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested, while the time saving state. In B, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special pattern up to four times from the time when the state is shifted to the time saving state to the time when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are digested, it is advantageous for each type of the time saving state. The degree can vary greatly. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1055, details of the normal symbol variation process (S113A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. In this normal symbol variation process (S113A), as in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1024) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, a normal symbol lottery is executed, and when the normal symbol wins, the electric role is executed. This is a process for setting the opening/closing control of the object 640a. FIG. 1055 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S113A).
Of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1055) in this 38th control example, in each of the processes of S1101 to S1108, S1111, S1113, S1115 to S1117, and S1121, the normal symbol variation processing in the above-described 37th control example ( 1024) are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1055) in the present 38th control example, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S1108: Yes), at the time of high probability With reference to the second winning random number table 202ck (see FIG. 1044(a)), the normal symbol lottery result is acquired (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S1108: No), the second per random number table 202ck for low probability (Fig. 1044(a) reference), the lottery result of the normal symbol is acquired (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1055) in the present 38th control example, in the process of S1111, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a normal symbol hit (S1111: Yes), normal The display mode of the second symbol display device 84 for winning symbols is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1131A. In the process of S1131A, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S1131A), and when it is determined that it is the time saving state (S1131A: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 1 second. (S1132A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1131A, if it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (normal state) (S1131A: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 10 seconds (S1133A), and this process is terminated. do.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1055) in the present 38th control example, in the process of S1117, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a normal symbol hit (S1117: Yes), then , It is determined whether the current game state is a time saving state (S1134A), and if it is determined that it is not a time saving state (normal state) (S1134A: No), the opening pattern (displacement pattern) is set to an open pattern (displacement pattern) that is opened only once for 0.1 seconds, making it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 (S1135A). , the process proceeds to S1121. On the other hand, in the processing of S1134A, if it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S1134A: Yes), the opening pattern (displacement pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is moved to the second ball entrance 640. An open pattern (displacement pattern) of 2 seconds×1 time that allows the ball to enter is set (S1136A), and the process proceeds to S1121.
Thus, in this 38th control example, in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter than the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols), and the normal symbol hit It is configured so that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is long. That is, in the time-saving state, the winning probability of normal symbols is increased, the variation shortening function is activated, and the opening extension function is activated. As a result, the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 more efficiently in the time-saving state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1056, details of the V passage processing (S114A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This V passing process (S114A) is a process that is executed instead of the V passing process (see FIG. 827) in the thirty-seventh control example (and the twenty-ninth control example). Similarly, it is a process for monitoring the passage of the game ball to the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 and performing control corresponding to the passage of the game ball.
In each of the processes of S1401 to S1407 and S1409 of the V passing process (see FIG. 1056) in the thirty-eighth control example, the V passing process (see FIG. 827) in the thirty-seventh control example (and the twenty-ninth control example) ) are executed in steps S1401 to S1407 and S1409. In addition, in the V passing process (see FIG. 1056) in the thirty-eighth control example, after the process of S1407 is completed, data indicating the current game state is stored in the win state storage area 203kd (S1411A), and waits for subtraction. It is determined whether the flag 203kc is on (S1412A). In the processing of S1412A, if it is determined that the subtraction standby flag 203kc is off (S1412A: No), the small hit counter 203s has already been updated at the start of the small hit, and the value of the small hit counter 203s is updated any more. Since it means that it is not necessary, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1412A, if it is determined that the subtraction standby flag 203kc is ON (S1412A: Yes), by winning the small hit in the time saving state C, the small hit counter 203s at the start of the small hit Since it means that the update is waiting (delayed), the value of the small hit counter 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S1413A), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction has become 0. (S1414A). In the processing of S1414A, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s has become 0 (S1414A: Yes), it means that the number of executions of the small hit game has reached the specified number of times and the second end condition has been established. Therefore, each process of S1415A to S1417A for ending the time saving state is executed. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S1415A), and the time reduction counter 203h, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the prescribed number of reserved balls By resetting all the values of the counter 203ka to 0, the time saving end condition is cleared (S1416A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S1417A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1414A, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s after subtraction is not 0 (S1414A: No), it means that the second end condition is not satisfied, so the time saving state This processing ends without skipping the processing of S1415A to S1417A for ending.
By executing this V passing process (see FIG. 1056), when a small hit is won in the time saving state C, the update process of the small hit counter 203s that was kept waiting at the start of the small hit is V winning (specific area 650e3) has occurred. That is, after the data corresponding to the time-saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd as the data indicating the game state when the big win is won, the time-saving state can be ended, so the game state after the big win is set. When doing so, it is possible to set a game state when a jackpot is won during the time saving state. In other words, since the time saving state C can be set regardless of the type of big win, when shifting to the time saving state C, the time saving state C and the big win can be reliably repeated until reaching the time saving limit number of times. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving state C, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has won a jackpot of 16 rounds, so that a well-balanced game can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1057, the details of the jackpot control process (S1821A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This jackpot control process (S1821A) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 831) in the thirty-seventh control example (and the twenty-ninth control example) described above, and the jackpot control process (see FIG. 831). Similarly, it is a process for performing various controls during execution of the jackpot game.
Of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 1057) in the thirty-eighth control example, in each processing of S1901 to S1913, S1901 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 831) in the above-described thirty-seventh control example (and the twenty-ninth control example) The same processing as each processing of S1913 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 1057) in the thirty-eighth control example, in the process of S1913, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period (S1913: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set. (S1921A) and ends this process. Details of this jackpot end processing (S1921A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1058 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (S1921A). In the jackpot end processing (S1921A), first, it is determined whether the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is a value greater than 0 (S2401A), and the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is a value greater than 0 If so (S2401A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd corresponds to the normal state (S2402A). In the process of S2402A, if it is determined that the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is data corresponding to the normal state (S2402A: Yes), the value of the time reduction limit counter 203kb is cleared to 0 (S2403A ), and the process proceeds to S2404A. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2401A: No), each processing of S2402A and S2403A is skipped, The process moves to S2404A.
In the process of S2404A, the jackpot type being executed is read out (S2404A), and the time-saving end condition is set according to the read-out jackpot type and the game state corresponding to the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd. Provided table 202ek (see FIG. 1046 (a)) specified from the data specified (S2405A), the specified time-saving end conditions (various counter values) time-saving counter 203h, small hit counter 203s, special figure 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (S2406A). When the processing of S2406A is completed, it is determined whether or not the time saving state is set (S2407A), and if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S2407A: Yes), 3 is set to the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb. (S2408A), the process proceeds to S2414A. On the other hand, in the process of S2407A, when it is determined that the time saving state is not set (S2407A: No), the process of S2408A is skipped and the process proceeds to S2414A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S2402A, if it is determined that the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is not data corresponding to the normal state (data corresponding to the time saving state) (S2402A: No) , the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (S2409A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb after the subtraction has become 0 (S2410A). In the processing of S2410A, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit counter 203kb after subtraction is not 0 (S2410A: No), the jackpot type being executed is read (S2411A), and the read jackpot type and winning state The game state corresponding to the data stored in the storage area 203kd and the time-saving end condition corresponding thereto are specified from the data defined in the time-saving provision table 202ek (see FIG. 1046(a)) (S2412A). Then, set the specified time-saving end conditions (various counter values) to each of the time-saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (S2413A), and the process proceeds to S2414A and migrate.
In the process of S2414A, set the time saving setting information command indicating each place of the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the prescribed holding ball number counter 203ka (S2414A), then to the state after the big hit A corresponding state command is set (S2415A). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S2416A), the flag 203k during the jackpot is set to OFF (S2417A), and the process is finished.

By executing this process at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 1058), the gaming state after the jackpot ends can be preferably set in consideration of the time reduction limit number of times.
<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1059 to 1063. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1059, details of the command determination process (S3121A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This command determination process (S3121A) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 1026) in the thirty-seventh control example described above. This is a process for performing control according to the types of various commands received from.
Of the command determination processing in the thirty-eighth control example (see FIG. 1059), each of the processing of S3201 to S3209, S3211, S3213, S3218, and S3231A performs the command determination processing in the above-described thirty-seventh control example (see FIG. 1026). , S3201 to S3209, S3211, S3213, S3218, and S3231A are executed.
Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 1059) in the thirty-eighth control example, when it is determined in the process of S3209 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the winning information command (S3209: If Yes), winning information command processing for performing control according to the prefetch result notified by the received winning information command is executed (S3241A), and the process proceeds to S3218. The details of this winning information command process (S3241A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 1059) in the thirty-eighth control example, when it is determined in the process of S3213 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes a hit-related command (S3213: Yes), instead of the hit-related process (S3232A) in the thirty-seventh control example, the hit-related process is executed (S3242A), and the process proceeds to S3218. Although not shown, in this hit-related process (S3242A), the hit-related process (S3232A) in the thirty-seventh control example is replaced with the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 1029) (S3511A). The only difference is that the The details of this jackpot related process (S3511A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1060, details of the winning information command process (S3241A) described above will be described. FIG. 1060 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process (S3241A). In the winning information command process (S3241A), first, the winning information notified by the winning information command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S5801A). It is determined by referring to the data in the secondary game state storage area 223g whether it is the time saving state A) or the chance mode (time saving state B) (S5802A). In the processing of S5802A, if it is determined that it is the time saving mode (time saving state A) or chance mode (time saving state B) (S5802A: Yes), the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1047 (b)) is read ( S5803A), from the read attack icon selection table 222ka, determine the attack icon type according to the lottery result corresponding to the winning information notified by the winning information command and the counter value of the first effect counter 223f1 (S5804A) . Then, execution of a notification effect for notifying the determined attack icon type (displayed in one of the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4) is set (S5805A), and the icon information storage area is set according to the determined attack icon type. 223ka information is updated (S5806A), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5802A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is neither the time saving mode nor the chance mode (S5802A: No), the winning information command received this time is the winning information command based on the starting winning of the first special symbol. (S5807A), and if it is determined to be the winning information command based on the start winning of the first special symbol (S5807: Yes), then the current gaming state is the normal mode (normal state , and there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol) (S5808A), and when it is determined that it is in the normal mode (S5808A: Yes), a lottery as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is performed (S5809A) ). Next, the display of the reserved number of balls pattern in the display mode according to the lottery result is set (S5810A), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the processing of S5807A, if it is determined that the starting winning of the first special symbol is detected (S5807A: No), and in the processing of S5808A, if it is determined that it is not the normal mode (S5808A: No), look-ahead effect This processing is terminated as it is without performing a lottery as to whether or not the execution of is possible. As a result, while the remaining hold of the second special symbol acquired in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B is digested, even if the start winning of the first special symbol is detected, the pre-reading effect is not set. It is possible to draw attention to the battle production based on the remaining reservation of the 2 special symbols. In addition, in the time saving state C, it is possible to suppress the fact that the look-ahead performance is executed during the execution of the pseudo interval performance, and the player perceives that the interval game for the jackpot is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1061, the details of the jackpot related process (S3511A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This jackpot-related process (S3511A) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 1029) in the thirty-seventh control example described above. This is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command when a jackpot-related command is received from. FIG. 1061 is a flow chart showing this jackpot-related processing (S3511A).

Of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1061) in the thirty-eighth control example, in each of the processing of S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, and S3614, S3603 of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1029) in the above-described thirty-seventh control example , S3605, S3606, S3610, and S3614 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 1061) in the thirty-eighth control example, when it is determined that the opening command is received from the main controller 110 in the processing of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the jackpot type and the number of remaining hits The opening effect corresponding to the value of the counter 223kb is determined (S3621A). That is, in the process of S3621A, if the value of the remaining hit number counter 223 kb is 0, the opening effect indicating the start of the MAX bonus is determined when the jackpot type is the jackpot C41, while the jackpot type other than the jackpot C41 is determined. If there is, determine the opening effect for the 4-round jackpot. Further, when the value of the remaining winning number counter 223 kb is 1 or more, it means that the jackpot is being won in the MAX bonus mode, and means that an effect is being executed to make it look like a single jackpot for a plurality of jackpots. Therefore, the opening performance of the performance mode in which the pseudo interval performance continues from the time saving state C before winning the jackpot is determined.
When the processing of S3621A ends, the display opening command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (S3622A), and it is determined whether or not this big win is the first big win in the MAX bonus mode (S3623A). In the processing of S3623A, when it is determined that the first jackpot in the MAX bonus mode (S3623A: Yes), 4 is set to the remaining winning number counter 223kb (S3624A), and the processing proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, in the processing of S3623A, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the first jackpot of the MAX bonus mode (S3623A: No), the processing of S3624A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3614.
In addition, in the big hit related process (see FIG. 1061) in the present 38th control example, when the process of S3606 ends, the number of rounds extracted in the process of S3606 and the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the remaining number counter 223 kb are indicated. A display round number command is set (S3625A), and the process proceeds to S3614A. In the processing of S3625A, when the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is 0 or 4, the actual number of rounds is set, and when the value of the remaining hit counter 223kb is 3, the actual number of rounds is increased by 4. If the number of rounds is set to be more than the number of rounds and the value of the remaining number of hits counter 223kb is 2, the number of rounds is set to be 8 rounds more than the actual number of rounds and the value of the number of remaining hits counter 223kb is 1. In this case, the number of rounds is set to be 12 rounds larger than the actual number of rounds. As a result, in the four jackpots in the MAX bonus mode, the number of rounds can be inherited and displayed from the previous jackpot without resetting the number of rounds, so the number of times of short time limit is reached after shifting to MAX bonus mode. In between, the player can be made to feel as if the 1 16-round jackpot continues. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Also, in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 1061) in the thirty-eighth control example, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the ending command is received from the main controller 110 (S3610: Yes), the ending effect is set. is executed (S3626A), and the process proceeds to S3614. Details of this ending command processing (S3626A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1062 is a flow chart showing the ending command process (S3626A) described above. As shown in FIG. 1062, in the ending command process (S3626A) in the thirty-eighth control example, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining hit number counter 223 kb is greater than 0 (S5901A), and the remaining hit number If it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223kb is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5901A: No), it means that it is not a jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, so an ending corresponding to the winning type An ending command for display indicating an effect is set (S5902A), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5901A, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223kb is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S5901A: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of the remaining number counter 223kb It is updated (S5903A), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after subtraction has become 0 (S5904A). In the processing of S5904A, if it is determined that the value of the remaining hit number counter 223kb after subtraction has not been updated to 0 (S5904A: No), it means that the MAX bonus mode continues even after the end of the jackpot, so the ending As the effect, the start of the ending effect in which the pseudo interval effect is executed is set (S5905A), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5904A, if it is determined that the value of the remaining winning number counter 223kb after subtraction has become 0 (S5904A: Yes), each data of the winning information storage area 223a is read (S5906A), The attack icon corresponding to the old winning information is determined by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (S5907A), and the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S5908A). When the processing of S5908A ends, next, the attack icon corresponding to the winning information that is newer than the winning information that was referred to in the determination for determining the type of the attack icon last time is determined by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (S5909A). ), the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S5910A).
When the processing of S5910A ends, it is determined whether or not the attack icon types corresponding to all the winning information have been determined (S5911A), and it is determined that the attack icon types corresponding to all the winning information have not been determined. If so (S5911A: No), by returning the process to S5909, each of S5909 to S5911A is performed until the type of attack icon corresponding to all winning information is determined and reflected in the data of the icon information storage area 223ka. Execute the process repeatedly. Then, in the processing of S5911A, if it is determined that the types of attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S5911A: Yes), each attack icon corresponding to each data stored in the icon information storage area 223ka is set (S5912A), and the process ends.

By the processing of S5912A, it is used in the normal state B when reaching the time saving limit number of times and ending the MAX bonus mode and shifting to the normal state B in which a maximum of 4 second special symbol holding balls are digested. It is possible to realize a novel performance mode in which the player is notified in advance of the types of up to four attack icons by the ending performance. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1063, details of the variation effect setting process (S4311A) in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. This variable effect setting process (S4311A) is a process that is executed instead of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1032) in the thirty-seventh control example described above. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol. FIG. 1063 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process (S4311A).
Of the fluctuation production setting process (see FIG. 1063) in the thirty-eighth control example, in each process of S4401 and S4403, S4401 and S4403 of the fluctuation production setting process (see FIG. 1032) in the above-described thirty-seventh control example The same processing as each processing is executed. Also, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 1063) in the present 38th control example, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is not a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol (S4403 : No), based on the lottery result of the variation notified by the variation pattern command and the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command, the effect mode of the variation display effect is determined (S4421A), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current is the MAX bonus mode. (S4422A), if it is determined that the mode is not the MAX bonus mode (S4422A: No), the oldest data among the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is read (S4423A), and the read data and the current lottery result are combined. The production mode of the variable production corresponding to is set (S4424A). For example, the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is the data corresponding to the remaining attack icon, and if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the monster character 821 is attacked by the remaining attack corresponding to the remaining attack icon. A performance mode is determined in which the player is set against the player, the last attack is avoided, and the failure is reported. When the process of S4424A ends, the data read this time is deleted from the icon information storage area 223ka (S4425A), and this process ends. The attack corresponding to the same attack icon as the attack icon previously stored in the icon information storage area 223ka and displayed in the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4 can be reliably carried out at the start winning. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4422A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the MAX bonus mode (S4422A: Yes), the variable display mode during execution of the pseudo interval effect (that is, most of the main display area Dm (S4426A) is set (S4426A), and the process is terminated.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 38th control example, even though the number of times of saving time (specified number of times of the total number of times of lottery of special symbols, specified number of times of total number of times of lottery of second special symbols) is common Regardless, after moving to the time saving state until the lottery of the second special symbol based on all the start winning prizes detected during the time saving state is completed, the number of times of lottery of the substantial second special symbol is different. We have set up a short-time state. More specifically, a time-saving state A in which the special symbol lottery can be executed substantially twice and a time-saving state B in which the special symbol lottery can be substantially executed four times are provided. Here, in the present 37th control example, the number of lotteries of special symbols (the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches a specified number of times as the end condition of the time saving state. A first end condition to be established, a second end condition established based on the fact that the number of executions of the small winning game has reached a specified number of times, and a second end condition established based on the fact that the number of lotteries of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. In addition to the third termination condition, a fourth termination condition established based on the fact that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached a prescribed number during execution of the time-saving final variation is provided. The time saving state A and the time saving state B share the first to third end conditions, and differ only in the fourth end condition, thereby making the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols different. That is, in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state is terminated when the number of pending balls of the second special symbol becomes one during the variable display of the last second special symbol of the time-saving state, while in the time-saving state B , By constructing the time saving state to end when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern reaches 3 during the variable display of the last second special pattern in the time saving state, the substantial advantage degree is increased. It is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the 38th control example, in addition to the time-saving states A and B, a time-saving state C in which a time-saving end condition that will almost certainly continue until the next big hit is set is provided, and the number of consecutive times of the time-saving state (The number of repetitions of the time saving state and the jackpot are repeated without going through the normal state) is set to a limit (the time saving limit number of times is set). Then, if the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied during the time saving state (execution of the jackpot game is set), as long as the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is the time saving state C configured to be set. That is, once the time-saving state C is set, the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached (the jackpot winning for the time-saving limit number of times is almost decided). and By configuring in this way, the player can be strongly expected to shift to the time saving state C, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, in this 38th control example, 1 jackpot game is performed as an effect mode from the transition to the time saving state C until the time saving limit number of times is reached (while the big hit and the time saving state C are repeated). Since it is configured to set a series of presentation modes as if they are continuing, even though the jackpot of 4 rounds is actually won 4 times, 16 rounds worth of prize balls are won by winning one jackpot. can be made to make the player feel as if he or she has won In other words, it is possible to make the player feel as if an extremely lucky situation has occurred in which a relatively large amount of prize balls can be obtained at one time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. In addition, in this 38th control example, either the second special symbol lottery is executed once for both the time saving states A and B, or the time saving state is terminated by executing the special symbol lottery 10 times. Therefore, if you hit the left where the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed, the time saving state will tend to continue for a long time, while if you hit the right where the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the time saving end condition is a relatively short period. becomes easier to establish. Therefore, the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the thirty-eighth control example are respectively a gaming method in which the predetermined advantageous game state in the fifty-eighth control example described later tends to continue for a long time, and a predetermined advantageous game state continues for a long time. This is another form of a game method that is difficult to play.
Furthermore, in this 38th control example, in the time-saving state C, by setting the variation time of the normal symbols, the variation time of the special symbols, and the release pattern of the normal symbols so that the reserved balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit number. When the time-saving state C and the big hit are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the state shifts to the normal state, the upper limit number (four times) of the second special symbol reserved balls is likely to be held. is doing. As a result, even after falling to the normal state, the degree of advantage is high (the combined probability of the big and small wins is about 1/3, and the most advantageous with a relatively high percentage when winning the big or small win Since it is possible to give the player the opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol four times (which is set in the time saving state C), the degree of advantage after reaching the time saving limit number of times can be compared with other time saving states. It can be more than advantageous. Specifically, the expectation of a big win is higher than the time-saving state A in which the second special symbol lottery can be substantially executed twice, and the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be substantially executed four times. It is possible to form an advantageous state with a jackpot expectation equivalent to B. That is, the normal state B set based on having reached|attained the time-saving limit frequency|count in the time-saving state C can be substantially made into the advantage degree equivalent to the time-saving state B. In the thirty-eighth control example, the game state after the end of the big win is always one of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C, and the normal state B, except at the time of the first hit. In other words, from the player's point of view, the game state after the big win is configured to be either the time saving state B or the normal state B (while the time saving state C and the big win are repeated, the game state is 1 (Set to look as if the jackpot continues), so if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery opportunity given after the jackpot ends will be given the same number of times (4 times). can be Therefore, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the degree of advantage is suppressed from being lowered, and when winning a jackpot (MAX bonus) that shifts to the time saving state C, the player is given great joy. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the thirty-eighth control example, when the small winning game of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small winning (the small winning counter 203s On the other hand, when the small winning game of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state C, the second end condition is established after the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 (small decrement the winning counter 203s). By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won after shifting to the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state or during the time saving state Regardless of whether it is a lottery of the second special symbol started after the transition to the normal state based on the second special symbol retained ball retained in the game state at the time when the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 ( The game state at the time when the execution of the jackpot game is set) can be set to the normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether it is the second special symbol lottery started during the time saving state or the second special symbol lottery started after shifting to the normal state, the degree of advantage at the time of winning the jackpot is determined. Can be shared. In addition, in the time saving state C, when a small win is won, the game state at the time of winning (the game state at the time when the execution of the big win game is set) can be fixed to the time saving state, so the time saving limit number of times can be set. It is possible to suppress the continuation of the repetition of the time saving state C and the big win after exceeding the limit, or conversely, the end of the repetition of the time saving state C and the big win before reaching the time saving limit number of times.
In addition, in this 38th control example, although it was set as the structure which sets the time-saving limit frequency|count to 3 times, it is not restricted to this and the time-saving limit frequency|count can be determined arbitrarily. If the number of time reduction limits is increased, the number of winnings of the jackpot in the MAX bonus mode can be increased, so that the degree of advantage can be increased when the mode is shifted to the MAX bonus mode. In addition, if the number of times of the time saving limit is reduced, the number of times of the time saving state C set in the MAX bonus mode can be reduced, so it is possible to make a pseudo It is possible to make it difficult to cause the phenomenon that the performance period of the interval performance becomes long and the game in the MAX bonus mode is delayed. In addition, the time gauge ga3 displayed to indicate whether or not the reserved ball of the second special symbol has accumulated to the prescribed number in the time saving state A and the time saving state B in the 38th control example is the 59th control example described later. This is another mode of presentation in which the player can recognize whether or not there is room for accumulating reserved balls.
<First modification of the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1064 to 1067, a first modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above, in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, a time saving end condition (fourth end condition) is established when the number of held balls reaches a specified number, and the fourth end condition is established. By providing variations in the specified number of times until the game is played, it is configured to provide a plurality of time-saving states with different performances (jackpot winning rates).
On the other hand, in the first modified example, the control is made simpler by abolishing the fourth end condition, and a game property similar to that of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above is realized. First, referring to FIG. 1064, a transition method between states in the first modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1064, in the first modified example, mainly four types of states (modes) are provided. That is, the normal state A, the normal state B, and the time saving state C in the 38th control example described above are provided. Further, the time saving states A and B are deleted, and the time saving state D is newly established. In the time-saving state D, the first end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 10 times, the second end condition is satisfied by executing the small winning game once, and the second special symbol. This is a game state in which the third end condition is established by executing the variable display of . Therefore, when the player continues to hit to the right in the time saving state A, the number of reserved balls accumulates up to the upper limit (4 pieces), and the time saving state is ended at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. Even in this configuration, when the small winning is won, the value of the small winning counter 203s is subtracted at the start of the small winning, so the time saving state should be terminated before passing through the specific area 650e3. can be done. Therefore, based on the case where a small hit is won in one lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state D, and the held ball held during the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state D The game state at the time of winning can be set to the normal state in both cases in which a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols executed up to four times after the shift to the normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether it is the second special symbol lottery started during the time saving state or the second special symbol lottery started after the time saving state is ended, the expectation of transition to the MAX bonus mode degree can be shared. Therefore, in the lottery of each second special symbol until all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested after shifting to the time saving state D, it is possible to make the player have substantially the same expectation. can.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1064, a method of shifting from the normal state A (normal mode) to another state in the first modified example will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1064, there is a possibility of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a big win is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1064, in the normal state A, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320, and when the jackpot A41 determined at a rate of 50% is determined, the jackpot ends. The subsequent game state is set to the time saving state D. On the other hand, when a jackpot B41 determined at a rate of 50% is determined when a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state A again. Therefore, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state A, it is possible to strongly expect a big win A41.
Next, with reference to the second row from the top of FIG. 1064, a method of shifting from the time saving state D (time saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 1064, from the time-saving state D (time-saving mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and all the reserved balls of the second special symbol May migrate if ingested. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 1064, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the time saving state D, regardless of the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is a time saving state. set to C. Also, as shown in the second row from the top of FIG. %, the game state after the end of the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. be. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% is obtained as a small win type, the condition is that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time-saving state D (the time-saving state D is looped). In the first modification, as in the 38th control example described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when a small hit is won in the time saving state D, the small hit A41 It is possible to make the player expect more strongly that the time-saving state C will be set by winning the election. On the other hand, when all the held balls of the second special symbol acquired in the time saving state A are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player strongly expect to win a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3.5 during the five times of lottery opportunities of the second special symbols. can improve interest in
Next, with reference to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1064, a method of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1064, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. , the game state is set to the normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. The game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state C (the time saving state is looped). For this reason, once it shifts to the time saving state C, a very advantageous state is formed in which the time saving state C and the jackpot are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached. In addition, as in the above-described 38th control example, in the present first modification, the number of rounds of the jackpot is all 4 rounds, and the number of times of the time saving limit is set to 3 times. 4 jackpots are guaranteed, including a double jackpot. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which prize balls for 16 rounds can be obtained almost at once, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 1064, a method of shifting from normal state B (retraction mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1064, from the normal state B (retraction mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and the second special held during the time saving state C There is a possibility of migration when all the holding balls of the design are digested. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1064, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state B, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1064, in the normal state B, if it becomes a small hit with a probability of about 1/3.5 in the lottery of the second special symbol, at a rate of 54% as a small hit type When the determined small win A41 is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% is obtained as a small win type, the condition is that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state D. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when the small hit is won in the normal state B, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested in the normal state B (all are removed), the state after digestion becomes the normal state A.

Thus, in the first modification, in the time-saving state D and the normal state B, when winning a small hit with a high probability of about 1/3.5, the small hit type is a small hit A41 It is configured such that the profit obtained by the player is largely different depending on whether it is decided or the small win B41. Therefore, it wins the small win A41 and shifts to the time saving state C, and whether a large amount of prize balls (balls for 16 rounds) can be obtained at once, wins the small win B41 and shifts to the time saving state D Since it is possible to make the player play the game while paying more attention to the situation, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1066 and 1067, details of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. Here, in the ROM 202 in the first modified example, the prescribed contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 constituting the first winning random number table 202ak are partially changed from the ROM 202 in the thirty-eighth control example described above. The difference is that there is a partial change in the specified content of the jackpot type selection table 202bk, and that the specified content of the time reduction grant table 202ek is partially changed. First, with reference to FIG. 1066(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1066(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1066(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the first modified example includes the above-described random number value (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined as a big hit. 205 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 204" are defined in association with each other, similarly to the T.38 control example. On the other hand, in the first modification, the range of 18725 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 18929" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits. is modified from the thirty-eighth control example.
Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the 38th control example. Also, out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits is 18725, so the lottery for the second special symbol. The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/3.5 (18725/65536).
Thus, in the first modified example, the above-described thirty-eighth control example is modified so that the probability of a small hit is lowered. Since this is set to the game state in which the second special symbol lottery opportunity is given five times as the time saving state D, the probability that the small hit probability remains in the 38th control example (about 1/3), the game This is because there is a risk that it will be excessively advantageous for the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1066(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1066(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the first modified example. This jackpot type selection table 202bk differs from the jackpot type selection table 202k (Fig. 1043(c)) in the above-described thirty-eighth control example only in that the determination ratio of jackpot A41 and jackpot B41 is changed. ing. That is, as shown in FIG. 1066(b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "jackpot A41" is defined in correspondence. A "jackpot B41" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "50 to 99". That is, in the first modification, 50 random numbers (counter values) are distributed to each of the "jackpot A41" and the "jackpot B41". It is configured such that "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41" are determined at a ratio of 50:50. This is due to the change so that the normal state A is set as the game state after the end of the big win B41. This is intended to prevent excessive disadvantages for those involved.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1067, the details of time reduction grant table 202ek in the 1st modification are explained. As shown in FIG. 1067, in the first modification, the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka is deleted from the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1046(a)) in the thirty-eighth control example. They are different in that respect. In addition, the game state after the jackpot A41 and jackpot D41 won in the normal state is changed to the time-saving state D. - 特許庁That is, the difference is that the value "10" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "1" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. Further, the game state is changed to the normal state A after the jackpot B41 won in the normal state. That is, the difference is that the value "0" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "0" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "0" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. Other specified contents are the same as those of the thirty-eighth control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1065, the details of RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1065 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 1065, the RAM 203 in the first modified example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-eighth control example described above (see FIG. 1042(b)) in that the normal electric operation number counter 203ka is deleted. They differ only in respect. This is because the fourth end condition in the above-described 38th control example (end condition established when the number of balls held in the second special symbol in the final time-saving variation reaches the specified number) is abolished as the time-saving end condition. attributed to Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification, by abolishing the time saving end condition (fourth end condition) that is established when the number of reserved balls reaches the specified number, the above-mentioned 38th control A simpler control than that of the pachinko machine 10 in the example is realized, and a game property similar to that of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above is realized.

<Second Modification of Thirty-Eighth Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1068 to 1083. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above, as the end condition of the time saving state, the fourth end that is established based on the number of pending balls of the second special symbol in the last variation display of the time saving state becoming a specified number By introducing conditions, the number of reserved balls is configured not to accumulate to the upper limit number in the time saving state B, and the second special symbol lottery opportunity after shifting to the time saving state B and after shifting to the time saving state C. The lottery opportunity for the second special pattern in the normal state B, which is shifted when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, is made the same number of times, and it is configured to suppress the reduction of the big win expectation when the time-saving limit number of times is reached. . In addition, it is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit between the time saving state B and the normal state B is substantially the same.
On the other hand, in the second modification, without adopting the fourth end condition in the 38th control example described above, the second special symbol lottery opportunity after shifting to a predetermined time saving state and the time saving limit number of times Novel control is realized to equalize the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol after arrival. More specifically, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, it is configured to win any one of the big win, the small win, or the time-saving symbol, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Set the value to 1. Then, after reaching the time-saving limit number of times and setting the normal state B, the time-saving design is won by lottery based on the remaining reservation of the second special design, and the second special design lottery until the second time-saving state ends. The number of lotteries is configured to be the same as the number of lotteries in the time saving state B.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, even if the relatively complicated process of monitoring the number of pending balls in the time saving final fluctuation and determining whether the time saving state ends or not, the time saving state B is set and the time saving limit After reaching the number of times, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol can be made common.
First, with reference to FIGS. 1068 and 1069, the characteristic presentation mode in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 1068(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the time-saving state A that shifts with a relatively high probability after the occurrence of the first hit in the second modified example. Here, in the time saving state A in the second modification, the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is given five times. That is, the time saving state A is ended based on the fact that the number of lotteries of the second special symbols has reached five times. Also, during the time saving state, it is configured to be impossible (difficult) to obtain the second special symbol reserved ball. That is, the period from the start of the variation of the normal symbols to the end of the winning of the normal symbols is surely longer than the variation time of the second special symbols. As a result, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols in the time saving state A can be fixed each time, so that the big hit expectation degree in the time saving state A can be made common every time.
As shown in FIG. 1068(a), when the time-saving state A is entered, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 stare at each other. In addition, the text "Hit the attack within 5 times!!" is displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, the character "Right stroke" is displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the character indicating the remaining number of times of time reduction (in the example of FIG. 1068 (a), "remaining 5 times") character) is displayed. Furthermore, the characters "breakthrough challenge" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, if the adventurer character 811 can hit the monster character 821 by the time the variable display of the second special symbol is completed five times, the big hit is confirmed and the rush (time saving mode) is performed. ) can be easily understood by the player.

FIG. 1068(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1068(b), when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the time saving state A and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the third symbol is started. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 attacks the monster character 821 . In this presentation, if the monster character 821 can be hit with an attack, it is reported that a big win (or a small win in which a big win is substantially confirmed) has been won, and if the attack is avoided, a loss is reported. be.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1069 (a), the display mode at the start of the time saving mode (time saving state B) or the pullback mode (normal state B, second time saving state) in the second modification will be described. . As shown in FIG. 1069(a), the number of times of time saving is set to 11 times in the time saving mode and the pullback mode in the second modified example. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 1069(a), the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the small display area Dm5 is set to "remaining 11 times". In addition, the text "Hit an attack within 11 times!" is displayed in the display area HR10. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that in the time saving mode and the pullback mode, 11 second special symbol lottery opportunities are given.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1069 (b), in the case of winning a big hit or a small hit in the time saving state C at the end of the MAX bonus mode (time saving limit number of times) in the second modification A presentation mode will be described. In the second modification, as in the thirty-eighth control example described above, in the period from the start of the first jackpot in which the time saving state C is set until the time saving limit number of times is reached, 1 of 16 It is configured to execute a series of effects as if the round jackpot continues. Then, in the pullback mode that shifts after reaching the time-saving limit number of times, on the premise that one second special design ball is reserved, the time-saving design is selected in the first second special design lottery in the normal state. By winning the lottery and shifting to the second time saving state, the total number of lotteries of the second special symbols is set to 11 in common in the time saving mode and the withdrawal mode. Conversely, if the second special symbol holding ball is not acquired when the time reduction limit number of times is reached, the pullback mode is not established, and the disadvantageous normal state A (normal mode ), an extremely unfavorable situation may arise. For this reason, in the second modified example, an effect is executed to prompt the player to store the reserved balls in the final hit variation in the MAX bonus mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1069(b), a rightward arrow image YG accompanied by characters "Aim right" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the pseudo interval effect. be. In addition, the time gauge ga3 notifies the remaining fluctuation time. As a result, the player can easily understand that the game ball should be entered into the second ball entrance 640 while the remaining time display ga3a of the time gauge ga3 remains. .
Although illustration is omitted, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, an icon indicating the degree of expectation of a big win or a small win according to the prediction result based on the entering ball is displayed in a treasure box. An effect appearing from 810 is executed. As a result, the player can be made to think that there is an advantage in hitting to the right, so that the reserved balls of the second special pattern are surely stored during the hit variation in the time saving state C for the number of times of the time saving limit. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the establishment of an extremely disadvantageous situation in which the state shifts to the normal state A immediately after reaching the time-saving limit number of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1070, the corresponding relationship between the variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol during the time saving state in the second modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1070, when the state is shifted to the time saving state and the player continues to hit to the right, first, the through gate 67 is passed and the lottery of the normal symbols is performed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is executed. be. In the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 1070, the variation time of normal symbols is fixed to 1 second. Then, when the variation time of the normal symbols ends and the lottery result of the normal symbols is winning, the winning of the normal symbols is started together with the stop of the variation of the normal symbols. That is, the electric accessory 640a is opened until 2 seconds have passed or one or more game balls have entered the second ball entrance 640, and 2 seconds have passed or one or more game balls have entered. The electric accessory 640a is closed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁When the electric accessory 640a is closed, an ending period of 6 seconds is set, and then the normal symbol winning game is terminated.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1070, the variable display of the second special symbol indicates that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the winning of the normal symbol. It is started as an opportunity. In the time saving state, the variation period of the second special symbol is fixed to 5 seconds, so the variable display of the special symbol is finished before the ending period of the winning game of the normal symbol is terminated. Therefore, when the next normal pattern starts to fluctuate, the special pattern fluctuation display is already finished, and it is impossible to additionally generate the start winning of the second special pattern during the special pattern fluctuation display. (Difficult). That is, since it is configured so that it is impossible to acquire the second special symbol holding ball, basically, in the time saving state, it is terminated with the set time saving number of times, and the second special There is no carrying over the holding ball of the design. Exceptionally, only in the time saving state C, when a big hit or a small hit is won, the length (15 seconds) of the fluctuation time that can store the second special symbol holding ball is set, so only during this time. , it is possible to store the ball on hold. That is, when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, a state in which one reserved ball of the second special symbol is possessed can be obtained, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in the normal state B.例文帳に追加Thus, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won in the normal state B with the second special pattern remaining reserved, the time saving pattern can be won and the second time saving state can be set, and the time saving mode and the pullback mode can be set. mode, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol can be substantially the same.
Next, referring to FIG. 1071, a transition method between states in the second modified example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 1071, in the second modification, mainly six types of states (five types of modes) are provided. That is, normal states A and B, time saving states A to C, and a second time saving state are provided. The normal state A is set to the normal state of the normal design (low probability state of the normal design, no variation shortening, no open extension) similarly to the 38th control example described above, and the first special design lottery is performed by hitting left. It is a state in which the game is progressed by making it play. In addition, the time saving states A to C are set to the time saving state of normal symbols (high probability state of normal symbols, with fluctuation reduction, with open extension), as in the 38th control example described above. It is a state in which the game proceeds by drawing lots for symbols. In addition, about time saving end conditions, the 1st end condition and the 3rd end condition are changed from the 38th control example. In addition, the fourth end condition (end condition that is established when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time saving final fluctuation becomes the specified number) is abolished. That is, in the time-saving state A, the first end condition is satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries is 10 times in total, and the third end condition is satisfied when the number of times of the second special symbol lottery is 5 times. is configured to In addition, in the time saving state B, the first end condition is established when the number of lotteries of the special symbols is 20 times in total, and the third end condition is established when the number of times of the lottery of the second special symbols is 11 times. is configured to On the other hand, in the time saving state C, the first to third end conditions are all common to the 38th control example, and the fourth end condition is not imposed on the time saving state C in the 38th control example. is doing. As described above, in the second modification, the execution interval of the normal symbol winning game is set to the second special symbol so that the number of held balls of the second special symbol is less likely to increase during the variable display of the second special symbol. is longer than the fluctuation time of In other words, the period from the end of the open period based on the win of the normal symbol to the start of the open period of the next normal symbol win is set to 7 seconds at the shortest, while the second It is configured to fix the variation time of the special symbol to 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the lottery for the second special symbol after the time-saving end condition is established in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B and the state is shifted to the normal state. In other words, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a normal state other than the normal state B after reaching the time saving limit number of times, and suppress the shift to the second time saving state.
In addition, the second time-saving state, which was not provided in the 38th control example, is set to a time-saving state of normal symbols (low-probability state of normal symbols, with fluctuation reduction, with open extension), and the second special by hitting to the right It is a state in which the game proceeds by drawing lots for symbols. Unlike the time saving states A to C, this second time saving state is a game state set to a low probability state of normal symbols. To make it difficult for a player to perceive the difference because the winning probability of normal patterns is substantially the same in the low probability state (300/300 in the high probability state of the normal patterns and 299/300 in the low probability state). can be done. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the second time-saving state is a time-saving state having the same performance as the time-saving states A to C.

A method of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1071, there is a possibility of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a big win is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1071, in the normal state A, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320, and when the jackpot B41 determined at a rate of 95% is determined, the jackpot ends. The later game state is set to the time saving state A. On the other hand, when a jackpot A41 determined at a rate of 5% is determined when a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B.例文帳に追加As described above, the time saving state B is more advantageous than the time saving state A (substantial jackpot probability is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol) Because it is possible to acquire many lottery opportunities for the second special symbol When a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot type is the jackpot A41. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1071, a method of shifting from the time saving state A (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1071, from time saving state A (chance mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and when the number of times of time saving is consumed (second 1 or the 3rd termination condition is met). More specifically, as shown on the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. It is set to the time saving state C. Also, as shown on the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. When it becomes a small hit A41 determined at a rate of 54% as a condition, the game state after the jackpot ends is changed to the time saving state C on the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit A41. set. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% is obtained as a small win type, the condition is that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when a small hit is won in the time saving state A, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when the number of times of time saving has passed in the time saving state A, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. Therefore, game characteristics that strongly expect to win a big win with a probability of 1/320 or a small win with a probability of about 1/7.4 during the five second special symbol lottery opportunities given in the time saving state A. can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1071, a method of shifting from the time saving state B (time saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1071, when the time saving state B (time saving mode) is changed to another state, when a big hit is won, when a small hit is won, and when the number of times of time saving is consumed May migrate. More specifically, as shown on the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. It is set to the time saving state C. Also, as shown on the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. When it becomes a small hit A41 determined at a rate of 54% as a condition, the game state after the jackpot ends is changed to the time saving state C on the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit A41. set. Further, when all the second special symbol holding balls acquired in the time saving state B are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. On the other hand, when winning a small hit, when it becomes a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% as a small win type, it is determined that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. As a condition, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state B (the time saving state B is looped). As a result, in the time-saving state B, as in the time-saving state A, the holding ball of the second special pattern acquired during the time-saving state is a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320 or a small probability of about 1/7.4. To further improve a player's interest in the game, because the player strongly desires to win a prize and, when winning a small prize, strongly desires to be set to a more advantageous time-saving state C.例文帳に追加be able to.
Next, with reference to the second row from the bottom in FIG. 1071, a method of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1071, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1071, in the time saving state C, the total probability of about 1/7.2 is about 1/7.2. , the game state is set to the normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1071, in the time saving state C, the total probability of about 1/7.2 is elected to the jackpot or small hit, and the time saving limit number of times has not been reached , the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state C (the time saving state is looped). For this reason, once it shifts to the time saving state C, a very advantageous state is formed in which the time saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached. It should be noted that, in the same manner as the 38th control example and the first modification of the 38th control example described above, even in this second modification, the number of rounds for the jackpot is all 4 rounds, and the number of time reduction limits is set to 3 times. ing. Therefore, four big wins are guaranteed, including the big win that triggered the transition to the time-saving state. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which prize balls for 16 rounds can be obtained almost at once, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to the lower stage of FIG. 1071, the transfer method from pullback mode (normal state B and 2nd time saving state) to another state is demonstrated. Here, as shown in FIG. 1071, the pull-back mode in the second modification is the normal state B, and in the normal state B, the time-saving design is elected by lottery based on the remaining reservation of the second special design (also for the jackpot It is composed of a second time-saving state that transitions by not even hitting a small hit. In the second time-saving state, the number of times of time-saving (the number of lotteries of the second special pattern) is set to 10 times, so it is suspended when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, and one second special symbol that is digested in the normal state B is reserved. Combined with the one ball-based second special symbol draw, the player may be given eleven second special symbol drawing opportunities in the pullback mode. In other words, it is possible to provide the same number of times of lottery opportunities for the second special symbols as in the time saving state B, and to form a state of substantially the same performance as in the time saving state B.
As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1071, from the pullback mode (normal state B or the second time saving state) to another state, when winning the big hit, when winning the small hit, and the number of time saving times in the second time saving state may migrate when digested. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1071, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. . In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1071, when it becomes a small hit that is elected with a probability of about 1/7.4 in the second special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, it is determined at a rate of 54% as a small hit type. When it becomes a small hit A41, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 determined at a rate of 46% is obtained as a small win type, the condition is that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when the small hit is won in the normal state B, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when the time reduction number of times is digested in pullback mode, the state after digestion will be the normal state A.
Thus, in this second modification, when the second special symbol holding ball is digested in the normal normal state B, which shifts when the time reduction limit number of times is reached, both the small hit and the big hit are won. If not, it is configured so that time-saving design winning always occurs. And when the time saving pattern winning occurs, since it is configured to shift to the second time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 10 times, the lottery of the second special pattern is 11 times in total in the normal state B and the second time saving state. Opportunities can be given to players. That is, since the advantage degree can be substantially the same in the time saving state B and the pullback mode, when the time saving limit number of times is reached after shifting to the time saving state C, it is suppressed that the advantage degree decreases. be able to. Therefore, when shifting to the time saving state C, it is possible to make the player feel a great joy without a single dissatisfaction, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1072 to 1075, details of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the second modification will be described. Here, the ROM 202 in the second modified example is different from the ROM 202 in the above-described 38th control example in that the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 constituting the first winning random number table 202ak are partially changed. There is a point, the content of the second random number table 202ck is partially changed, the content of the table constituting the variation pattern selection table 202dk is partially changed, and the time saving grant table 202ek The difference is that the content of the provisions has been partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the thirty-eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1072(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 1072(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1072(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the second modification includes the above-described random number value (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined as a big hit. 205 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 204" are defined in association with each other, similarly to the T.38 control example. On the other hand, in the second modification, a range of 8856 random numbers (counter values) from "205 to 9060" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits. is modified from the thirty-eighth control example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1072(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the second modification has a range of random numbers (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined to be time-saving symbol winning. has been added. That is, the range of 56475 random numbers (counter values) from "9061 to 65535" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving symbol winning.
Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the 38th control example. In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 8856 out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the lottery for the second special symbol The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/7.4 (8856/65536). Furthermore, out of the 65536 random numbers that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving design winning is 56475, so the time-saving design in the lottery of the second special design. The probability of winning is approximately 1/1.16 (56475/65536).
Thus, in the second modified example, the above-described 38th control example is modified so that the probability of a small hit is lowered. This balances with increasing the number of lotteries of the second special symbols in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the pullback mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1072(b), details of the second winning random number table 202ck in the second modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1072(b), in this second modification, the second per random number table 202ck (see FIG. 1044(a)) in the 38th control example is normally designed in the low probability state of the normal design. The difference is that the range of the random number value (the counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a hit is changed. That is, in the second modification, the range of "0 to 298" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits in the normal symbol low probability state. . That is, in the second modification, even in the low-probability state of the normal design, the range of the random number (counter value) determined to hit the normal design is the high-probability state of the normal design and one random number (counter value). Since it is configured so that it differs by only a minute, the winning probability of the normal design is almost the same between the low probability state of the normal design and the high probability state of the normal design. This is when the second time saving state (low probability state of normal pattern, variable reduction, open extension) set based on time saving symbol winning is set, other time saving state (time saving state A to C) It is a modification for realizing the same ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 as.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1073 and 1074, details of the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the second modified example will be described. Figure 1073 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202dk1 out of the normal table 202dk1, the time saving table 202dk2, and the MAX bonus table 202dk3 that constitute the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the second modification. FIG. 1074(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table for time reduction 202dk2, and FIG. 1074(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the MAX table 202dk3. First, details of the normal table 202dk1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1073 is a diagram showing defined contents of the normal table 202dk1 in the second modified example. This normal table 202dk1 is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when performing a special symbol lottery in normal state A or normal state B. Here, as shown in FIG. 1073, in the normal table 202dk1 in the second modification, the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" Since it is the same as the normal table 202dk1 (see FIG. 1044(c)) in the T.38 control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1073, when the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is " For the entire range of 0 to 198", the variation pattern is defined as "hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is " If the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", a "small hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and a special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and if the lottery result is "time saving symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, As a variation pattern, a “sudden time” with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined. That is, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time is set to 5 seconds.
It should be noted that in the second modification, as in the thirty-eighth control example described above, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the normal symbol win is won, the normal symbol win is the second ball entry. Since the opening/closing pattern (short open for 0.1 seconds) of the electric accessary 640a that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the opening 640 is set, the lottery for the normal symbol is executed in the normal state. Even if it does, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 . In the second modified example, as a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the jackpot is started in a state in which one reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired by hitting to the right in the time saving state C, This is the case where the gaming state after the jackpot reaches the time-saving limit number of times and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state B.例文帳に追加The reason why the variation time is fixed to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result is to match the variation time in the time saving states A and B. That is, in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a based on the hit of the normal design is shorter than the variation time of the second special design, so that the second special design is reserved. In order to maintain the state of zero balls, the fluctuation time is fixed to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result. By setting both the variation time of the second special pattern in the time saving states A and B and the variation time of the second special pattern in the normal state B to 5 seconds, the variation time when shifting to the pullback mode and the time saving state B. It is possible to make the player feel as if the time saving state B and the pullback mode are the same game state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode. It should be noted that even if the winning of the normal symbol is started in the normal state B, the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 640a that makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is set. If the action of the object 640a is noticed, the player may perceive that the pullback mode is a state different from the time saving state B.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1074(a), details of the time saving table 202dk2 in the second modified example will be described. This time saving table 202dk2 is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when executing a special symbol lottery in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the second time saving state. FIG. 1074(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dk2. As shown in FIG. 1074 (a), among the time saving table 202dk2 in the second modification, the special symbol type is the specified content corresponding to "special figure 1 (first special symbol)" It is the same as the time saving table 202dk2 (see FIG. 1045(a)) in the T.38 control example. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. This is the same as the 38th control example, in the state where one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol are held, when the state shifts to the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be executed, the first special To prevent a player from getting frustrated by continuing a variable display performance of a first special symbol based on a reserved ball of the symbol (a period in which a lottery of a second special symbol having a high substantial expectation of a big win cannot be executed) continues for a long time. It is intended to prevent this.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1074(a), the stipulated contents for the second special symbol are common to the normal table 202dk1 (see FIG. 1073). That is, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time is fixed to 5 seconds. Therefore, since the variable display of the second special symbol can be completed in a period shorter than the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the second time saving state, the second special symbol holding ball can be prevented from obtaining In the time saving state, when the time saving pattern is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the time saving state for the time saving pattern winning is invalidated without being overwritten or added. In other words, the time saving symbol winning in the time saving state is positioned as a lottery result that is substantially the same as the complete loss in other control examples.
Next, details of the MAX bonus table 202dk3 will be described with reference to FIG. 1074(b). This MAX bonus table 202dk3 is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when executing a special symbol lottery in the time saving state C. FIG. 1074(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this MAX bonus table 202dk3. As shown in FIG. 1074 (b), in the MAX bonus table 202dk3, the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" in the same way as the time saving table 202dk2, and the lottery result is "off ”, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as “ultra-short out” with a variation time of 0.5 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198”, and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as a "super short hit" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198". ing. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. This is similar to the case of referring to the time saving table 202dk2, when moving to the time saving state C while holding one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol It is intended to prevent a player from becoming impatient due to a long continuation of the fluctuation display performance of patterns (a period during which the lottery of the second special patterns with a high substantial expectation for a big win cannot be executed).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1074 (b), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot" , the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is defined as "long hit" with a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second 2 special symbol)” and the lottery result is “small win”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of “0 to 198”, and the variation time is 15 as the variation pattern. When the second "long and small hit" is defined, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "short time symbol", the acquired variation type counter CS1 For the entire range of values "0 to 198", "sudden" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. In other words, when a big win or a substantively fixed big win is won, the variable time is set to 15 seconds, while when a time-saving pattern win occurs, the variable time is set to 5 seconds.

The fluctuation time of 15 seconds set in the big hit or the small hit is a fluctuation time of a length in which the normal symbol winning game can be executed twice or so during the fluctuation. That is, when a big win or a small win is won in the time saving state C, it becomes possible to store the reserved balls of the second special pattern, and when the time saving pattern win occurs, it becomes difficult to save the reserved balls. As a result, when the player continuously hits to the right during the time-saving state C, the second special pattern holding balls (in the second modification, the upper limit number is one) are accumulated at the start of the big win. can be done. That is, when the number of time reduction limit is reached and the state is shifted to the normal state B, the second special symbol reserved ball can be accumulated, and in the normal state B, the second special symbol reserved ball is used. A lottery for 2 special symbols can be executed, and a transition to a second time-saving state can be made on the condition that neither a small win nor a big win is made. That is, it is possible to form a pullback mode in which a total of 11 second special symbol lottery opportunities can be obtained in the normal state B and the second time saving state. Therefore, the operation when reaching the time saving limit number of times can be made substantially the same as the operation when shifting to the time saving state B, so when shifting to the time saving state C, the player is dissatisfied with one point. It can make you feel great joy without feeling it. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1075, the details of time reduction grant table 202ek in the 2nd modification are explained. As shown in FIG. 1075, in the second modification, the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka is deleted from the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1046(a)) in the thirty-eighth control example. They are different in that respect. In addition, along with the end conditions of the time saving state A and the time saving state B being changed from the 38th control example, various counter values associated with the jackpot A41, jackpot B41, and jackpot D41 won in the normal state has changed. That is, the value "20" of the time-saving counter 203h, the value "1" of the small winning counter 203s, and the value "11" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are associated with the big hits A41 and D41 won in the normal state. It is In addition, with respect to the jackpot B41 won in the normal state, the value "10" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "1" of the small winning counter 203s, and the value "5" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. there is
Moreover, as shown in FIG. 1075, the time reduction provision table 202ek in the second modified example is also different in that the time reduction provision content for the time reduction design is added. Specifically, the value of the time saving counter 203h "20", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t "10" are associated with the time saving pattern won in the normal state. stipulated. On the other hand, with respect to the time saving pattern won in the time saving state, the value "0" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "0" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "0" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. there is In the second modification, when the time saving provision condition is satisfied, the time saving state is provided by adding each counter value specified in the present time saving provision table 202ek for various counters. When the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, 0 is added to each counter value. In other words, when time-saving symbol winning occurs during the time-saving state, it is configured so as not to substantially affect the number of times of time-saving. As a result, when the time saving pattern winning occurs in the normal state B, while configuring it so that the second time saving state can be set, when the time saving pattern winning occurs in the time saving state, complete in another control example A behavior equivalent to detachment can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 1076 to 1081. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1076, the special symbol variation process (S104B) in the second modification will be described. This special symbol variation process (S104B) is a process that is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S111A) in the above-described 38th control example, and similar to the special symbol variation process (S111A), the special symbol variation display. This is a process for performing display settings and the like of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b inside. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (S111A) in the 38th control example replaces the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 1019) with respect to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1018) in the 37th control example. (Refer to FIG. 1049) is executed, and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (Refer to FIG. 1021) is performed instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (Refer to FIG. 1050). Since illustration is omitted, the special symbol variation processing (S104B) in this second modification will be described here by comparison with the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1018).

Of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1076) in this second modification, in each of S201 to S207, S211 to S223, and S225A, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1018) in the thirty-seventh control example described above , S201 to S207, 211 to S223, and S225A are executed. Also, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 1076) in the second modification, when either the process of S207 or the process of S214 ends, the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1019) is replaced with the special symbol determination. Processing is executed (S231B), then special design variation pattern selection processing is executed instead of special design variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 1021) (S232B), and this processing ends. Details of these special symbol determination processing (S231B) and special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S232B) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 1077 and 1078, and FIGS. 1079 and 1080, respectively.
Also, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 1076) in the second modification, in the process of S225A, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is the time saving symbol election (S225A: Yes), then the current It is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S233B), and if the current game state is the time saving state (S233B: Yes), the process proceeds to S233A. On the other hand, in the process of S233B, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S233B: No), the time saving end condition corresponding to the current time saving pattern type (counter value of various counters ) is read from the time saving provision table 202ek, and the read end condition is updated by adding it to the current various counters (S234B), and the process is finished. That is, the second time-saving state is set only when the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state, and when the time-saving pattern is won in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled so as not to be substantially changed. As a result, it is possible to move to the second time-saving state by lottery of the second special pattern that is executed when the MAX bonus mode ends and the state shifts to the normal state B. When it occurs, an operation similar to complete disconnection can be realized.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1077, details of the special symbol determination process (S231B) described above will be described. This special symbol determination process (S231B) is a process executed instead of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1049) in the 38th control example, and is similar to the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1049) in the 38th control example. Second, it is a process for executing a special symbol lottery. Among the special symbol determination processing (S231B) in the second modification, in each processing of S301 to S305, each processing of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination processing in the 38th control example (see FIG. 1049) is the same. Processing is performed.
Also, in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1077) in the second modification, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S303 (S303: No), The out-of-time processing for executing the control is executed (S321B), and the present processing ends. The details of this out-time processing (S321B) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1078 is a flow chart showing this out-time processing (S321B). In this off-time processing (S321B), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a time-saving design winning (S2101A), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a time-saving design winning (S2101A: Yes), the time-saving design type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the time-saving design to be displayed on the first design display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S2101A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2101A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a small hit. Then (S2103A), when it is determined that it is a small hit (S2103A: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a small hit (S2104A), and the small hit type corresponding to the value of the small hit type counter C5 is It is set as a small hit symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S2105A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2103A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S2103A: No), the processes of S2104A and S2105A are skipped, and the process is finished as it is.
By executing this loss processing (see FIG. 1078), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss (other than a big hit), the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result can be preferably set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1079, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S232B) in the second modification will be described. FIG. 1079 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S232B). This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S232B) selects the first symbol variation pattern according to the special symbol lottery result, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1050) in the thirty-eighth control example described above. This is a process for

Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1079) in this second modification, in each process of S401 to S408, each of S401 to S408 of the variation pattern selection process in the 38th control example (see FIG. 1050) The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1079) in the second modification, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (S401: No), off (small hit, Including the time saving symbol winning), the type determination process for selecting the variation pattern at the time is executed (S421B), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of the out-of-time type determination processing (S421B) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1080 is a flow chart showing this out-time type determination processing (S421B). In the out time type determination process (S421B), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the time saving design winning (S2201A), and if it is determined that the time saving design is winning (S2201A: Yes), time saving The type of the symbol is determined to be the time saving symbol A (S2202B), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S2203A). , If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2203A: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection table 202fk (see FIG. 1046 (b)) (S2204A), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S2203A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a normal loss (complete loss)) (S2203A: No), the processing of S2204A is skipped. and terminate this process.
By executing the type determination processing (see FIG. 1080) at the time of deviation, when the lottery result of the special symbol is the time reduction design winning or the small hit, the time reduction design type or the small hit type can be suitably determined. .
Next, with reference to FIG. 1081, details of the normal symbol variation process (S113B) in the second modification will be described. In this normal symbol variation process (S113B), like the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1055) in the 38th control example described above, a normal symbol lottery is executed, and when the normal symbol wins, the electric role is executed. This is a process for setting the opening/closing control of the object 640a. FIG. 1081 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S113B).

Of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1081) in this second modification, in each of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to S1117, S1221, and S1132A to S1136A, the normal symbol variation processing in the 38th control example described above, respectively The same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to S1117, S1221, and S1132A to S1136A of (see FIG. 1055) are executed. Also, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1081) in the second modification, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 in the process of S1108 (that is, the current time saving state) (S1108: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S1131B). In the process of S1131B, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S1131B: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110, while determining that the current gaming state is not the second time saving state If so (S1131B: No), the process proceeds to S1109. Thereby, in the present second modification, when the second time saving state is set, normally using the second per random number table 202ck (see FIG. 1072 (b)) for low probability of the normal design lottery can be carried out. That is, the second time saving state can be set to a low probability state of normal symbols.
<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1082 and 1083, various control processes executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the second modification will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1082, details of the variable effect setting process (S4311B) in the second modified example will be described. This variable effect setting process (S4311B) is a process that is executed in place of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1063) in the thirty-eighth control example described above. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in synchronization with the variable display of the symbol. FIG. 1082 is a flowchart showing this variable effect setting process (S4311B).
Of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1082) in the second modification, in each process of S4401, S4403, S4421A, and S4422A, the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1063) in the above-described 38th control example The same processing as each of S4401, S4403, S4421A, and S4422A is executed. Also, in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1082) in the second modification, in the process of S4422A, when the current gaming state is determined not to be the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C) (S4422A: No), The effect mode of the variable effect according to the lottery result of this time is determined (S4431B), and this process is terminated. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big win or a small win, the monster character 821 is hit with an attack and a hit is announced for 5 seconds. A 5-second effect is executed in which the character 821 of .
On the other hand, in the process of S4422A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the MAX bonus mode (S4422B: Yes), the variable display mode in the small display area Dm8 is determined according to the lottery result (S4432B), It is determined whether or not the pseudo interval presentation before the pseudo 13th round is in progress (S4433B). In the processing of S4433B, if it is determined that the pseudo interval effect before the pseudo 13th round is being executed (S4433B: Yes), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is either a big win or a small win. Then (S4434B), if it is determined that the result of this lottery is either a big win or a small win (S4434B: Yes), the execution of the pseudo interval effect aiming for the right (see FIG. 1069(b)) is set. (S4435B), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4333B, if it is determined that the present is not in the pseudo interval rendering of the pseudo 13th round before (S4433B: No), and in the processing of S4434B, it is determined that the current lottery result is neither a big win nor a small win. If so (S4434B: No), the process of S4435B is skipped and the process ends.

By executing this fluctuation production setting process (see FIG. 1082), during the execution of the big hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation just before reaching the time saving limit number of times, the right aim production (see FIG. 1069 (b)) is executed. It is possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the state shifts to the normal state B, a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special pattern is executed, the time-saving pattern is won, and the state is shifted to the second time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state B and the pullback mode can be made into a state of substantially the same performance (big hit expectation).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1083, details of the rendering update process (S3121B) in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 1083 is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 1034) in the thirty-eighth control example (and the thirty-seventh control example) described above. This is a process for updating the
In this effect update process (see FIG. 1083), first, it is determined whether or not it is during the execution period of the aim right effect (see FIG. 1069(b)) (S4621B). If so (S4621B: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4621B, if it is determined that the current is during the execution period of the effect aiming to the right (S4621B: Yes), then the start winning of the new second special symbol is detected (the winning information command is received It is determined whether or not (S4622B), and if it is determined that the start winning of the new second special symbol is detected (the winning information command is received) (S4622B: Yes), the prefetch result of the detected start winning In response, the type of notification icon to appear from the treasure box 810 is determined by lottery (S4623B), and execution of the notification effect in which the determined type of notification icon appears from the treasure box 810 is set (S4624B). Then, the end of the aim to the right effect is set (S4626B), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that a new starting prize has not been detected in the processing of S4622B (S4622B: No), it is determined whether or not the effect period of the aim to the right effect has passed (S4625B), and the effect period is If it is determined that the period has elapsed (S4625B: Yes), the process proceeds to S4626B. That is, the effect of aiming to the right ends without causing the notification icon to appear. On the other hand, in the process of S4625B, if it is determined that the effect period of the aim right effect has not passed (S4625B: No), this process ends.

By executing this production update process (see FIG. 1083), the hit expectation degree of the reserved ball is increased only when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases by hitting right during the execution of the production aiming for the right. Since the indicated notification icon is notified, it is possible to force the player to positively hit to the right during the execution of the effect of aiming for the right.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example, the fourth end condition in the above-described thirty-eighth control example (the number of held balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation reaches the specified number A lottery opportunity for the second special symbol after shifting to a predetermined time-saving state (time-saving state B) without adopting the time-saving end condition established based on the fact that it was done, and the second special symbol after reaching the time-saving limit number of times. It realizes a novel control that equals the lottery opportunity of In other words, even when the advantageous first gaming state (time saving state B) is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, the establishment of the second setting condition (reaching the time saving limit number of times) based on Also, when the second game state (normal state B), which is less advantageous than the first game state (it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the second special symbol is set. The lottery opportunities for the second special symbols are given the same number of times (11 times) until the transition to the normal state A in which the lottery cannot be executed (difficult to execute). More specifically, in the time saving state B, the fluctuation time of the special design, the fluctuation time of the normal design, and the opening and closing pattern per normal pattern ( Displacement pattern) is set, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes zero when the termination condition (third termination condition) based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is established. In other words, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol in the case of shifting to the time saving state B is configured to be the maximum number of lotteries (11 times) until the third end condition is satisfied. Then, the lottery results of the second special symbols are limited to only three kinds of big hits, small wins, and time-saving symbols, and the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols is set to one. Then, after reaching the time-saving limit number of times and setting the normal state B, winning the time-saving design by lottery based on the remaining reservation (1 piece) of the second special design, and the second time-saving state until the end of the second time-saving state The number of lotteries for special symbols is set to be the same as the maximum number of lotteries in time-saving state B (that is, 11 times, which is the number of lotteries until transition to normal state A without winning either a big win or a small win). configured to By configuring in this way, even if the relatively complicated process of monitoring the number of pending balls in the time saving final fluctuation and determining whether the time saving state ends or not, the time saving state B is set and the time saving limit After reaching the number of times, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol can be made common.
In addition, in the second modification, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol after shifting to the time saving state B and the normal state B was configured to be 11 times at maximum, but the lottery opportunity is arbitrary. can be set to the number of If the number of lotteries is increased, the game can be enjoyed for a longer period of time from the shift to the time-saving state B and the normal state B to the shift to the normal state A, so that the player can enjoy the game more easily. Interest can be enhanced. In addition, when the number of lotteries is reduced, the period from shifting to the time saving state B or normal state B to winning a big win or shifting to the time saving state A can be shortened, so the game time can be shortened. Efficiency can be improved.
In the second modification, the lottery result of the second special pattern was configured to be either a jackpot, a small hit, or a short-time pattern winning (there is no complete loss), but a complete loss is provided. may be configured. In this case, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state B after reaching the time saving limit number of times, it becomes impossible to shift to the second time saving state by being completely out, so in the normal state B In the variable display effect of the second special symbol, it may be configured to execute a judgment effect for indicating whether or not to enter the pullback mode (time-saving symbol winning occurs). By constructing in this manner, the player can have a sense of tension that the pullback mode will not always be entered, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when the mode is shifted to the MAX bonus mode. However, while the game has a possibility that the advantage of the pullback mode that shifts after that may be low, if you win the 4-round jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state B, the number of prize balls will decrease, but the jackpot. As the game state after the end, the game property guarantees the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol of fixed number of times (11 times), so the game property can be greatly varied depending on the type of jackpot to be won. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the second modification, the maximum number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the time saving state B and the pullback mode (normal state B and the second time saving state) (the number of lotteries until shifting to normal state A) , but this is not the only option, and the number of lotteries may be varied. By increasing the number of lotteries in the withdrawal mode than in the time-saving state B, the degree of advantage in shifting to the MAX bonus mode can be increased, and the satisfaction of shifting to the MAX bonus mode can be increased. be able to. In addition, by making the number of lotteries in the pullback mode smaller than in the time saving state B, it is possible to suppress excessive advantages for the player when shifting to the MAX bonus mode. In addition, when shifting to the MAX bonus mode, although a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, the degree of advantage of the pullback mode that shifts after that is lower than the time saving state B. When the four-round jackpot to be transferred is won, the number of prize balls is reduced, but the number of lotteries increases as a game state after the end of the jackpot. can be done. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.
In the second modification, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state given when the time saving symbol winning occurs in the normal state B (the prescribed number of times of the lottery of the second special symbols) is fixed to 10 times. However, as time-saving patterns, a plurality of time-saving patterns with different number of time-saving patterns are provided, and when a time-saving design election occurs, one of the multiple time-saving design types is configured to be determined as a time-saving design. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of advantage of the pullback mode varies according to the type of the time saving pattern. In other words, depending on the lottery result of the second special symbol executed in the normal state B (type of time saving pattern to be selected), the degree of advantage (time saving number of times) common to the time saving state B or higher than the time saving state B Since it is possible to change whether the degree of advantage is low or the degree of advantage is higher than that of the time-saving state, the game can be played while paying attention to the first lottery result of the second special symbol in the pull-back mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the above-described thirty-eighth control example and its various modifications, a so-called one-kind-two-mixer specification without a probability variation function is used, but the specification may be applied to a specification equipped with a probability variation function. In other words, instead of the time-saving limit number of times, applying the probability variable limit number of times, during the period from the transition to the predetermined probability variable state to reaching the probability variable limit number of times, as if one jackpot game continues. It is good also as composition which performs a series of productions. By constructing in this way, the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the probability variation function is also provided with only the jackpots of a small number of rounds, and the jackpots of an extremely large number of rounds are won with the winning of one jackpot as a trigger. It is possible to realize novel gameplay that makes the player think like this. Further, in this case, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, only the probability variation function is deactivated, and the time saving state may be provided. By configuring in this way, even if the ball of the second special pattern is not reserved at the time when the variable probability limit number of times is reached, the lottery for the second special pattern is performed by shifting to the time saving state after the probability variable limit number of times is reached. A state that is easy to execute can be formed.
In the above-described 38th control example and its various modifications, when a small hit is won in the time saving state C, the small hit counter 203s after V winning (entering the game ball into the specific area 650e3) occurs By configuring the value to be subtracted, if a jackpot is won based on the V winning during execution of a small winning game in the time saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (execution of the jackpot game is set) The game state at the time when the game was played) was always configured to be fixed to the time saving state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in some small hit types (specific small hits), the small hit counter 203s may be subtracted at the start of the small hit game regardless of the type of the time saving state. That is, when a specific small hit is won in the time saving state C, the time saving state can be terminated before the occurrence of the V prize (the timing at which the execution of the jackpot game is set), and the remaining number of times up to the time saving limit number Since it can be reset, it is possible to provide the possibility that the MAX bonus mode will continue longer than usual (4 jackpots), or conversely, the number of times of continuation will be less. In particular, when a V prize occurs, the game state after the end of the big win is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the game state. To realize an operation as if the MAX bonus mode was reset with a big win based on the specific small win as a chance to continue the MAX bonus mode while resetting the time-saving limit number of times when the win is set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the MAX bonus mode does not know how long it will continue. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the above-described 38th control example and its various modifications, if a small hit is won in the time saving state C, the counter value of the small hitting counter 203s is updated after the V winning occurs, while other time saving states Then, although it was set as the structure which updates the counter value of the small hit counter 203s at the time of a small hit start, it is not restricted to this. In the time saving state C, while the small hit counter 203s is updated after the V winning (the timing at which the execution of the big winning game is set), in the time saving states other than the time saving state C, the small win is made before the V winning. It is sufficient if the win counter 203s can be controlled to be updated. For example, if a small win is won in the time saving state C, the timing when the small win opening period ends or the small win ends (at the start of the big win based on the V prize). It may be configured to update the counter value of the small hit counter 203s. Also, if you win a small hit other than the time saving state C, the small winning pattern will be stopped at the timing of stopping the small win, at the start of the open period of the opening and closing door 650f1 based on the small win, at the start of the variable display corresponding to the small win, etc. The configuration may be such that the win counter 203s is updated.
In the above-described 38th control example and its various modifications, the condition for updating the small hit counter 203 s is satisfied depending on whether it is the time saving state C or the time saving state other than the time saving state C (second special symbol ), the update timing of the small winning counter 203s is made different. That is, according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state, it was configured to vary the timing of updating the small winning counter 203s during the time saving state, but this control is not limited to the small winning counter 203s. Other counters may be applied as long as they are counters that can be updated at least in the time-saving state. More specifically, for example, it may be applied to the time saving counter 203h. That is, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols in the time saving state C, the time saving counter is set after the data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd (execution of the jackpot game is set). While updating 203h, in the time saving state other than the time saving state C, before (for example , at the start of fluctuation), the time saving counter 203h may be updated. By configuring in this way, in the time saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (game state when setting the execution of the jackpot game) is more easily handled as the time saving state, while the time saving other than the time saving state C In the state, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state when setting the execution of the jackpot game) can be configured to be handled more easily as a normal state. Further, in addition to the time saving counter 203h, it is also possible to employ a control that changes the update timing of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka and the update timing of the special figure 2 counter 203t according to the timing of setting the time saving state. Furthermore, it is not limited to the counter value for determining the end condition of the time saving state, for example, the probability variation function is installed, and the number of times of continuation of the probability variation state (ST number) is predetermined In the specification, the end condition of the probability variation state The update timing for updating the counter value for determining may be configured to vary depending on the trigger set to the variable probability state. Furthermore, counters related to lottery of special symbols (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop type counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, second per random number counter C4, etc.) and counters for production (production lottery counter 223f1, 223f2, etc.).
In the above-mentioned 38th control example and its various modifications, the ceiling function (function to set the second time saving state when the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the jackpot reaches the number of ceiling lotteries) was not provided. , may be equipped with a ceiling function. In this case, the time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times may be set to a second time saving state with substantially the same degree of advantage as the MAX bonus mode, or equivalent to the time saving mode It may be set to the second time saving state, or may be set to the second time saving state with a different degree of advantage from any time saving state started after the big win (and when the time saving symbol is won). By configuring in this way, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the game can be played with the goal of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, so that the player's motivation for playing the game is suppressed. can do.
In the above-described 38th control example and its various modifications, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving state C, and V winning (entering the specific area 650e3) in the small hit When a jackpot is won by generating a prize, the value of the small prize counter 203s is subtracted after the occurrence of the V prize, and a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern executed in another time-saving state. controls to end the time saving state before the V winning occurs by subtracting the value of the small winning counter 203s at the start of the small winning. That is, in the time saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (game state at the time of setting the execution of the jackpot game) is treated as a time saving state (time saving end corresponding to the case of winning in the time saving state from the time saving grant table 202ek Conditions are read and set) On the other hand, in the other time saving state, the game state at the time of jackpot winning (game state at the time of setting the execution of the jackpot game) is treated as a normal state (time saving grant table 202ek The time-saving end condition corresponding to the case of winning in the normal state is read out and set from ), so that when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the time-saving state C Unless it reaches the time saving limit number of times, it will always shift to the time saving state C, and if you win a small win in a time saving state other than the time saving state C, the same distribution as when you win a small win in the normal state. Either the time-saving state B or the time-saving state C is set, but in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state, regardless of the type of the time-saving state, the game at the time of winning the jackpot. You may comprise so that a state may be handled as a time saving state. More specifically, for example, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot may be set to the game state at the time when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. That is, when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit or a small hit, at that time (at the time when the special symbol fluctuation start is set), the data indicating the time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd. good too. By configuring in this way, in the above-described 38th control example and the first modification of the 38th control example, a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is executed first in the time saving state other than the time saving state C If you win, the transition to the most advantageous time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) is confirmed, while if you win a small hit with the remaining reservation of the second special pattern after the time saving ends, time saving state C Since it can be configured so that there is a possibility of shifting to a time-saving state other than the time-saving state (the time-saving state in which the next big hit is not confirmed), the first special pattern is given while the lottery opportunity of the second special pattern is given multiple times. It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the player strongly expect to win a big win or a small win in the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Further, in the first modification and the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, the game state at the time of winning the big win is set to the game state at the time when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win. In addition to the method, regardless of the type of the time-saving state, a V prize is generated and the execution of the jackpot game is set (data indicating the time-saving state is set as the game state when the jackpot is won in the winning state storage area 203kd). You may control so that the small hit counter 203s may be updated later. By configuring in this way, when the V prize is not generated in the small winning game, the control for storing the data indicating the game state in the winning state storage area 203kd can be skipped. It is possible to prevent the processing load from increasing due to the processing of storing data in the winning state storage area 203kd.

<Thirty-ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1084 to 1104. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, as the time saving end condition, the time saving state is ended based on the fact that any one of the plurality of end conditions is met. had configured. That is, the first end condition established when the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches the prescribed number of times, the second end condition established when the number of executions of the small winning game reaches the prescribed number of times, and the second special symbol. Of the third end conditions that are satisfied when the number of lotteries reaches the specified number of times, any one of the end conditions is satisfied, so that the time saving state is ended regardless of the situation of the other end conditions. had configured.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-ninth control example, as the time-saving end condition, a termination condition that is established when all of a plurality of different conditions are established is provided. More specifically, as the small hit type, in addition to the V small hit that substantially determines the big hit, even if the game ball is entered, the game ball cannot be guided to the specific area 650e3 (switching member 650h The open/close door 650f1 is opened only during the period in which it is arranged to guide the game ball to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 side). That is, a first small win, a second small win, and a third small win are provided. In the 39th control example, after shifting to the time saving state, the first condition that is established when the first small hit (first lottery result) is predetermined for the first number of times in the special symbol lottery, A second condition that is established when the second small hit (second lottery result) is predetermined for the second number of times, and a predetermined third number of times for the third small hit (third lottery result). It is configured to provide a time saving termination condition (third termination condition) that is satisfied only when all the third conditions are satisfied. With this configuration, even if one or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are satisfied, while at least one condition is not satisfied, Since novel control that allows the advantageous time-saving state to be continued can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-ninth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changes, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the sound The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the T.38 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second modified example of the thirty-seventh control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIGS. 1084 to 1089, the characteristic presentation mode in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1084(a), details of the remaining machine stock effect executed during the execution period of the jackpot game in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. Here, as described above, in the thirty-ninth control example, the first to third small wins are considered to be impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 (generate V winning). It is configured to provide a hit. In addition, in this 39th control example, the number of winning times of each of the first to third small wins is configured so that the time saving state can continue until it reaches the specified number of times that is predetermined for each type of time saving state. It is That is, other time-saving end conditions (the first end condition that is established when the total number of lotteries of special symbols reaches the specified number of times, the number of executions of V small hits that can generate V winnings reaches the specified number of times The second end condition established by doing, and the third end condition established when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches the specified number) are not established, the first to third small hits As long as the number of winnings of at least one of the small hits has not reached the prescribed number of times (first to third times), the time saving state is continued. In the thirty-ninth control example, the specified number of winning times for these first to third small wins can be suggested by the presentation mode. More specifically, when winning a jackpot in which a time saving state is granted after the jackpot ends, a number that suggests the prescribed number of times corresponding to each of the first to third small wins in the time saving state set after the jackpot ends The effect (remaining machine stock effect) for notifying (remaining machine) is configured to be executable. After shifting to the time saving state, the number of remaining machines notified during the big win is continuously displayed, and the corresponding number of remaining machines is subtracted each time the first to third small wins are won. Then, an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not each small win has reached a specified number of times.

FIG. 1084(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode when the remaining machine stock effect is started during execution of the jackpot game. This remaining machine stock effect is executed, for example, as an effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 1084(a), when the remaining machine stock effect is executed, an adventurer character 811a is first displayed in the main display area Ds. Then, in the display area HR10 formed above the adventurer character 811a, the text "Push to stock the remaining lives!" , a display area HR11 is formed in which a push button image PB imitating the frame button 22 and a gauge indicating the effective period of operation of the frame button 22 are displayed. In addition, display areas Dm6a to Dm6d are formed on the right side of the adventurer character 811a when viewed from the front to display an image suggesting the prescribed number of times of each small win. In the display area Dm6a, the characters "remaining life" are displayed, and in the display areas Dm6b to Dm6d, the face image of the adventurer character, the face image of the rabbit character, and the face of the gunman character are displayed. A partial image is displayed. Further, the text "remaining machine stock chance" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, by pressing the frame button 22, out of the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c, the adventurer character 811a is notified of the remaining lives. It is easy for people to understand. Note that the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a correspond to the specified number of times of the first small win (the number of wins of the first small win required until the first condition is satisfied), and the rabbit character 811b corresponds to the second small win. Corresponding to the specified number of hits (the number of wins of the second small win required until the second condition is satisfied), the gunman character 811c is the specified number of times of the third small win (the number of times required until the third condition is satisfied). It corresponds to the winning number of times per 3 small).
FIG. 1084(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the player presses the frame button 22 in the remaining machine stock chance effect. As shown in FIG. 1084(b), when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the remaining machine stock effect, the displayed character will display the remaining machine (corresponding small A specified number of hits) is executed. FIG. 1084(b) illustrates a situation in which "5" is notified as the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1084(b), an effect in which the adventurer character 811a shouts "5" is executed (a balloon image SG displaying the character "5" is formed). In addition, in the display area Dm6b for indicating the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a, a number "x5" is displayed on the right side of the image of the face portion of the adventurer character 811a. Further, the text "5 planes in stock!!" is displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the adventurer character 811a has five remaining lives. When the notification of the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a ends, the remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b and the gunman character 811c are also notified in the same manner. As a result, the number (remaining machine) indicating the prescribed number of times of each small hit in the time saving state set after the end of the big win can be notified to the player during the execution of the big win game, so the number of times of time saving It is possible to realize a novel presentation mode in which a player is previously suggested an indication of how long the game will continue. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
After shifting to the time-saving state, each time one of the first to third small hits is won, the corresponding character's remaining machine is reduced, and the remaining machine of all characters becomes 0. This ends the time-saving state. A series of presentation modes in this time-saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 1085 to 1088. FIG.
FIG. 1085(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state (rush) is started. In FIG. 1085, the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c are reported to have 5, 3, and 1 remaining lives in the jackpot, respectively. Rush) is shown as an example. As shown in FIG. 1085(a), when the time saving state (rush) is started, an adventurer character 811a, a rabbit character 811b, a gunman character 811c, and an enemy monster appear in the main display area Dm. An effect of glaring at each other with the character 821 is executed. In addition, the text "Kill the target before you run out of lives!!" is displayed in the display area HR10. Further, the display areas Dm6a to Dm6d continue to be displayed at the right end of the main display area Dm during execution of the jackpot game. Furthermore, the characters "RUSH start" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, the player is intuitively informed that the time-saving state will continue as long as each character has a remaining machine, and that defeating the monster character 821, which is an enemy, will result in a big win. can be understood effectively.

FIG. 1085(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when reach occurs during the time saving state. Here, in the thirty-ninth control example, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win, a variable display mode accompanied by a ready-to-win effect is set as the variable display effect. That is, at the time reach occurs, it is determined that it is one of the big hit, the V small hit that substantially determines the big hit, and the first to third small hits. In other words, when a ready-to-win hit occurs, either a big win or the number of executions of any one of the first to third small wins is increased by 1 (remaining lives of the corresponding character are subtracted). Therefore, in the time-saving state in the thirty-ninth control example, after the reach has occurred, the character defeated by defeating the monster character 821, which is an enemy, becomes a big hit, while the defeated character is defeated by the monster character 821. The effect of subtracting 1 from the remaining machine is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1085(b), when reach occurs, an effect is executed in which one of the three characters is selected. The example of FIG. 1085(b) illustrates a case where a rabbit character 811b is selected, and the surroundings of the rabbit character 811b are set to emit light, and the other characters are displayed in black silhouettes. set. That is, the rabbit character 811b is displayed more emphasized than the other characters. In addition, the characters "Competitor Determined!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the rabbit character 811b has been selected as the character to battle with the monster character 821 .
Basically, when the lottery results in the first small win, the adventurer character 811a is determined as the opponent, and in the case of the second small win, the rabbit character 811b is determined. , when the third small win is obtained, the gunman character 811c is determined. On the other hand, in the case of a big win or a V small win that is substantially guaranteed to be a big win, the selection ratio of the gunman character 811c is relatively high and the selection ratio of the adventurer character 811a is relatively low. Proportions are distributed. Specifically, for example, if a big win or V small win is won in a state in which all characters have one or more lives remaining, the selection rate of the adventurer character 811a is 25%, and the selection rate of the rabbit character 811b is 25%. 30%, and the selection ratio of the gunman character 811c is 45%. If there are one or more characters with 0 remaining lives, the character with 1 remaining life is selected from the characters with 1 or more remaining lives. In this case as well, the selection ratios are distributed so that the selection ratio of the gunman character 811c is relatively high and the selection ratio of the adventurer character 811a is relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the character selected when reach occurs, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1086(a), description will be given of the mode of presentation in the case of winning a non-V small win (any of the first to third small wins) in which V winning is impossible. FIG. 1086(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a second small win corresponding to the rabbit character 811b is won as a non-V small win. If the rabbit character 811b wins the second small prize while the rabbit character 811b has one or more remaining machines, the rabbit character 811b is selected as the opponent when the reach occurs (see FIG. 1085(b)). , as shown in FIG. 1086(a), an effect is executed in which the rabbit character 811b is finally defeated in the battle. Also, an effect is executed in which the remaining life of the rabbit character 811b is reduced by one. FIG. 1086(a) exemplifies a situation in which the number of remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b (that is, the remaining number of times until the number of winnings of the second small win reaches the specified number of times) has decreased from 3 to 2. The number of remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b displayed in the area Dm6c is reduced from three to two.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1086(b), description will be given of the mode of presentation when the number of wins for the first to third small hits reaches the specified number of times and the time saving end condition is satisfied. In this case, the basic production flow is the same as the production in which a non-V small win is won and the remaining lives are reduced (see FIGS. 1085(b) and 1086(a)), but the player is defeated by the monster character 821. 1086(b), the remaining life corresponding to the defeated character (the rabbit character 811b in the example of FIG. 1086(b)) is updated to 0, and the text "RUSH finished..." is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. is displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the time-saving state (rush state) has ended in conjunction with the fact that the remaining lives of all the characters have become 0.例文帳に追加Therefore, since it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand, it is possible to realize a suitable effect mode.

In addition, in the variable display effect that is executed based on winning the last non-V small hit in the time saving state, there is a performance mode that takes into account the look-ahead result of the second special symbol held ball that was held at the time of the start of the fluctuation. set. In other words, even if the non-V small hit is won and the time saving end condition is satisfied, if the lottery result corresponding to the big hit or V small hit is reserved in the second special symbol holding ball, the normal state Immediately after moving to, you will be elected to the jackpot and move to the time saving state. In this case, the completion of the time-saving state (rush) is not notified, but the effect of subjugating the monster character 821 is executed as the variation display effect of the time-saving final variation to notify the jackpot. On the other hand, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are neither the big hit nor the V small hit, the rush end effect is executed as shown in FIG. 1086(b). By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation for a big hit in the time-saving final variation. That is, there is an effect in which a character with one character has one remaining life and another character has zero remaining life, and the character with one remaining life and the monster character 821 battle each other. When it is started, if at least 1 big win (or V small win) is included in the variation and the remaining reserve of the second special symbol, an effect of winning the monster character 821 is executed, so 1 The degree of expectation of a battle performance started with a character's remaining life of 1 and other characters' remaining lives of 0 can be made higher than the expectation of a battle performance performed at other timings. Therefore, it is possible to realize well-balanced playability.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1087, the remaining machine recovery effect that may be executed during the time saving state in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. In the thirty-ninth control example, similarly to the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, there is a possibility that the time-saving symbol winning will occur in the second special symbol lottery. In this 39th control example, when time-saving symbol winning occurs in the time-saving state, the prescribed number of first to third small hits is added. That is, since the time saving end condition (second end condition) becomes difficult to be established, it is possible to please the player when the time saving symbol winning occurs. As shown in FIG. 1087(a), when the time-saving symbol is won in the time-saving state (rush state) and the remaining machine increasing condition is established, a ready-to-win effect is generated and a treasure box 810 is displayed. In addition, the text "Treasure box appears! Get recovery medicine!" is displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to intuitively understand that if the treasure box 810 that has appeared contains a recovery medicine, it will be advantageous to the player.
Then, as shown in FIG. 1087(b), when an effect is executed in which the recovery medicine 810d appears from the treasure box 810, characters "remaining machine recovery" are displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, an effect is executed in which 10, 7, and 3 aircraft are added to the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c, respectively. Chance symbols indicating winning of time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed as 3 symbols. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the remaining machines have been recovered based on the time-saving symbol winning.
In addition, in the thirty-ninth control example, there is also provided a false remaining machine recovery effect in which the content of the treasure box 810 is empty and the remaining lives are not recovered. This false remaining life recovery presentation is executed when a non-V small win of a type corresponding to a character whose remaining life has already been reduced to 0 is won. By constructing in this way, in the variable display performance corresponding to the non-V small hits that have already reached the prescribed number of times, it is possible to prevent the content of the variable display from becoming incoherent, in which the characters whose lives have become 0 are further battled. At the same time, it is possible to make the player expect recovery of remaining machines. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1088, the result effect executed during the period from the notification of the end of the time saving state (rush state) until all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested will be described. FIG. 1088(a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the result effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 1088(a), when the result effect is executed, the number of jackpots won before the end of the time-saving state and the payout are displayed on the display area HR10 formed in the center of the main display area Dm. Characters indicating the number of awarded balls and . FIG. 1088(a) illustrates a case where 5850 prize balls are paid out by winning 6 jackpots before the time saving state ends. ” and the characters “total 5850pt” are displayed. These display contents allow the player to confirm the game result in the current time-saving state, so that convenience for the player can be improved. Also, in the small display area Dm8, a variable display effect corresponding to the remaining hold of the second special symbol is executed in a relatively inconspicuous display mode (narrow display area). Further, the characters "RUSH finished..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time saving state has ended. In addition, in the thirty-ninth control example, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, even if the upper limit number (4) of the second special symbol reserved balls is reserved, the remaining reserved balls are digested in about 2 seconds. It should be noted that the control for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 1088 can be said to be a process of differentiating the timing of switching the game state from the timing of switching the display mode corresponding to the game state when the game state is switched. Moreover, you may display special figure 2 reservation on the display screen of FIG.
FIG. 1088(b) is a diagram showing the production mode at the time of digestion of the hit holding in the case where the holding ball of the second special symbol increased after the start of the time saving final fluctuation is the hit (big hit or V small hit). . Here, as described above, in the 39th control example, in the final time-saving variation, it is configured to set the effect result that takes into consideration the second special symbol holding ball, but after the time-saving final variation is started (that is, The second special symbol reserved ball increased (after the variable display effect is started) cannot be reflected in the effect. Therefore, if the second special symbol holding ball that increased after the start of the time saving final fluctuation was a hit, when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hit hold was started in the result production, for a short time (0.5 seconds ) is configured to be executable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1088(b), when the winning variation is executed during the result effect, the third symbol of the winning combination (the same 3) descends, and an effect of pushing away the display area HR10 is executed, and a symbol indicating a big win or a small win is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm8. More specifically, three identical numbers are stop-displayed in the case of a big win, and three different odd numbers are stop-displayed in the case of a small win. Furthermore, the characters "Bonus confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that a big win or a small V win has been won with the second special symbols remaining reserved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1089, the invincible mode, which is a type of time-saving state in the thirty-ninth control example, will be described. This invincible mode is a first time-saving state C that shifts in some cases when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern and a part of when a small win is won, and a second state that shifts when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. Two types of time saving state A and , are provided, and are almost composed of a game state in which the time saving state (first time saving state C or second time saving state A) continues until the next big win is won. As shown in FIG. 1089, when the invincible mode is set, all remaining lives of each character are displayed as "∞". In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, the characters "invincible mode" are displayed. Due to these display contents, the player has an infinite number of remaining machines for each character, and until the monster character 821 is defeated. It can be easily understood that the time saving state will always continue. In addition, actually, the specified number of first to third small hits in the invincible mode are all set to 100 times.
Next, referring to FIG. 1090, a transition method between states in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. Here, in the thirty-ninth control example, four modes are mainly provided. That is, a normal mode (normal state A) that is disadvantageous to the player, a chance mode (first time-saving state A) that has the lowest degree of advantage in the time-saving state (hard to win a big hit), and a relatively high degree of advantage. (Relatively easy to win a jackpot) Rush mode (1st time saving state B, 2nd time saving state B) and the most advantageous degree (almost continuing until the next jackpot) Invincible mode (1st time saving state C, A second time saving state A) is provided. Like the time saving mode in the first modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, the chance mode is set to one time saving time, and the upper limit number (4 ), it is possible to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol, so that it is a game state in which a special symbol lottery opportunity for five times is practically given. In addition, the rush mode is mainly a state in which the time saving state ends when the number of winnings of the first to third small hits described above reaches the specified number of times, and it is hoped that the remaining machines of each character will not run out. It is a game state with a novel game property in which a game can be played while playing. In addition, the invincible mode is the most advantageous game state that is substantially continued until the next big win.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1090, the game state transition method in the normal mode (normal state A) that is disadvantageous to the player will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1090, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state A (normal mode) to another state when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery or when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. More specifically, when the jackpot A42, which is determined (selected) at a rate of 5% when a jackpot of winning with a probability of about 1/320 in a special pattern lottery is determined as the jackpot type, the jackpot A first time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode) is set as a game state after the end. In addition, when the jackpot B42, which is determined at a rate of 95% when the jackpot hits, is determined as the jackpot type, the first time-saving state A (chance mode) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries for special symbols reaches the ceiling number of lotteries (950 times) without winning the jackpot in the normal state A, the second time-saving state A (a kind of invincible mode) is set. For this reason, in the normal state, the game is played in anticipation of winning a big win in a special symbol lottery or reaching the number of ceiling lotteries. In addition, since the invincible mode is the most advantageous game state, especially after a certain number of special symbol lotteries (for example, 600 times) and the number of times of lottery of special symbols has been consecutively lost, it is preferable to win a jackpot. , it can be expected that the loss will continue until the ceiling lottery number. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.
In addition, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 1090, from the first time-saving state A (chance mode) to other game states, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, when winning a time-saving symbol, and time-saving state When the end condition of is satisfied and all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested, there is a possibility of shifting. More specifically, as shown in the middle of FIG. 1090, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is the first time-saving state C (invincible mode ) is set. In addition, if the second special symbol lottery has a small hit with a probability of about 1/10, if the small hit A42 is determined at a rate of 5% as the small hit type, the small hit On the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the hit A42, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the first time-saving state C (a kind of invincible mode). On the other hand, when a small win is won, when one of the small wins B42 to H42 determined at a rate of 95% as a small win type, the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win. As a condition, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the first time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode). Also, in the first time-saving state A (chance mode), if a time-saving design winning occurs with a probability of 1/500 in the second special symbol lottery, the game state is the second time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode ). Furthermore, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol reserved in the chance mode are consumed (all are lost), the game shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player.
Next, with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 1090, a method of shifting from the rush mode (first time saving state B, second time saving state B) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 1090, from the rush mode to another state, when the jackpot is won, when the small win is won, and when the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, the second special symbol is held. There is a possibility of migration when all is digested. More specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 1090, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the first time-saving state C (invincible mode). In addition, if the second special symbol lottery has a small hit with a probability of about 1/10, if the small hit A42 is determined at a rate of 5% as the small hit type, the small hit On the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the hit A42, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the first time-saving state C (a kind of invincible mode). In addition, when the time-saving end condition is established (mainly when the number of wins of the first to third small hits all reach the specified number of times), the normal mode disadvantageous to the player is set. On the other hand, when winning a small win, when it becomes one of the small wins B42 to H42 determined at a rate of 95% as a small win type, the small win passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. On the condition that it has been done, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the first time saving state B (a kind of rush mode) (loop the rush mode). In addition, although omitted for illustration, when the time saving symbol winning occurs, it is set to the second time saving state B (a kind of rush mode) (loops the rush mode).
Next, with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 1090, a method of shifting from the invincible mode to another state will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 1090, there is a possibility that the invincible mode will shift to another state when a small win is won. More specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 1090, when the small hit is won with a probability of 1/10 in the invincible mode, the small hit B42 determined at a rate of 95% as the small hit type ~H42, on the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit, the game state after the jackpot ends again, the first time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode) is set to On the other hand, when a big win is won in the invincible mode, when a small win A42 is determined, and when a time-saving symbol win occurs, the invincible mode is looped.

As described above, in the thirty-ninth control example, three types of modes (chance mode, rush mode, and invincible mode) with greatly different game characteristics are provided as modes advantageous to the player. That is, a game-like chance mode in which players expect to win a big win or a small win in a fixed number of times, and a game-like rush mode in which the number of continuous time-saving states changes fluidly according to the winning status of the first to third small wins. , and an invincible mode that lasts substantially until the next big win. Therefore, since the playability can be greatly changed depending on the mode to be set, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Electrical configuration of the thirty-ninth control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1091(a). FIG. 1091(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1091(a), the ROM 202 in the thirty-ninth control example has the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second modification (and the thirty-eighth control example) of the thirty-eighth control example (see FIG. 1042(a)). In contrast, the first winning random number table 202am is provided instead of the first winning random number table 202ak, the jackpot type selection table 202bm is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202bk, and the variation pattern selection table A point that a variation pattern selection table 202dm is provided instead of 202dk, a point that a time reduction grant table 202em is provided instead of the time reduction grant table 202ek, and a small hit type selection table 202fm instead of the small hit type selection table 202fk. is provided. Since the rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second modification (and the thirty-eighth control example) of the thirty-eighth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, details of the first winning random number table 202am in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. Here, when the first winning random number table 202am in the present thirty-ninth control example performs the lottery for the second special symbol with respect to the first winning random number table 202ak in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, The only difference is that the content of the referenced data table has been changed. With reference to FIG. 1092(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 referred to when performing the lottery for the second special symbol in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1092(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this special symbol 2 random number table 202am2. As shown in FIG. 1092(a), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 in the thirty-ninth control example, the above-described thirty-eighth As in the first modification of the control example, 205 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 204" are associated and defined. On the other hand, in the 39th control example, the range of 48066 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 48270" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits. . It should be noted that the small hit here includes all of the V small win and the first to third small wins. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1092 (a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 in the present 39th control example has, as a range of random numbers (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined as time-saving symbol winning, A range of 131 random numbers (counter values) from "48271 to 48401" is associated and defined.
Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. The odds of winning are approximately 1/320 (205/65536). In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 48066 out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the lottery for the second special symbol The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/1.36 (48066/65536). Furthermore, among the 65536 random numbers that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving design winning is 131, so the time-saving design is selected by lottery for the second special design. The probability of winning is approximately 1/500 (131/65536).

Thus, in this 39th control example, as compared with the second modification of the 38th control example described above, the probability of a small hit is greatly increased, and the probability of a time-saving pattern is modified so as to be decreased. .
Next, with reference to FIG. 1092(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bm in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1092(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bm in the thirty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1092(b), in the jackpot type selection table 202bm in the thirty-ninth control example, two types of jackpot A42 and jackpot B42 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C42 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol.
As shown in FIG. 1092 (b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", "jackpot A42" is defined in correspondence, A "jackpot B42" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A42" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the rush mode (first time-saving state B). In addition, "jackpot B42" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 3 and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode (first time-saving state A). Therefore, the "jackpot A42" is more advantageous than the "jackpot B42" in terms of the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot.
Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A42" and "jackpot B42" are 5 and 95, respectively, the ratios of winning ``jackpot A42'' and ``jackpot B42'' when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern are 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, if you win a big hit in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the first time-saving state B, which has a relatively low probability (5% rate) and a high degree of advantage, is set, and a relatively high probability (95% A first time saving state A with a low advantage is set. In addition, this is a story limited to the normal state, and if you win the "jackpot A42" or "jackpot B42" in the time saving state (the jackpot is started), the game state after the jackpot ends is invincible mode (time saving state C).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1092 (b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot C42 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot C42" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type set to an invincible mode (first time-saving state C) in which the game state after the jackpot is advantageous regardless of the game state at the time of winning. . Since the ``big win C42'' is associated with the whole range that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, the ``big win C42'' is always decided when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols. This "jackpot C42" is the most advantageous jackpot type among all the jackpot types.
In addition to these "jackpot A42" to "jackpot C42", "jackpot D42" to "jackpot J42" are also provided in the thirty-ninth control example. These "jackets D42" to "jackpots J42" are jackpot types that are won when a small win is won, a small win A42 to H42 is determined as a small win type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed between the small wins. The game state after the end of the jackpot is basically a jackpot set to the rush mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1093(a), details of the variation pattern selection table 202dm in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1093(a) is a block diagram showing the structure of this variation pattern selection table 202dm. As shown in FIG. 1093(a), the variation pattern selection table 202dm in the thirty-ninth control example is a normal table 202dm1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. A time saving table 202dm2 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, and a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery is performed in the final variation of the time saving state. It is configured at least with a time saving final variation table 202dm3 that is referred to for selection. First, the details of the normal table 202dm1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1093(b).
FIG. 1093(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202dm1 in the thirty-ninth control example. Here, as shown in FIG. 1093, in the normal table 202dm1 in the thirty-ninth control example, the specified contents when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" Since it is the same as the normal table 202dk1 (see FIG. 1073) in the second modification of the control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1093, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "completely lost", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is For the entire range of "0 to 198", "super short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" , If the lottery result is a "big hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, and the variation pattern is a "super short win" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds. is defined, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" For the entire range of the variation pattern, "ultra-short and small hit" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is " In the case of "time saving pattern", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, "ultra-short collision" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. ing. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variation time is set to 0.5 seconds.
In addition, in the thirty-ninth control example, as in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, even if a normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the winning of the normal symbol is won, the normal symbol Since the opening and closing pattern (short open for 0.1 second) of the electric accessory 640a is set to make it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a win, the normal state is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is executed, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the 39th control example, as a situation where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, in the chance mode or the rush mode, in the time-saving final variation, the second special symbol holding ball is acquired by hitting to the right. This is the case where the change ends and the state shifts to the normal state. In addition, the reason why the fluctuation time is fixed at 0.5 seconds regardless of the lottery result is that when setting the 1 production mode based on the remaining pending lottery result in the time saving final fluctuation, the number of pending balls is produced. This is intended to prevent a significant shift in the period.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1094(a), details of the time saving table 202dm2 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1094(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving table 202dm2 in the thirty-ninth control example. This time saving table 202dm2 is in chance mode (first time saving state A), rush mode (first time saving state B, second time saving state B), or invincible mode (first time saving state C, second time saving state A) It is a data table referred to in order to select a variation pattern (variation time) when executing a special symbol lottery. FIG. 1094(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dm2. As shown in FIG. 1094 (a), among the time saving table 202dm2 in the thirty-ninth control example, the special symbol type is the specified content corresponding to "special figure 1 (first special symbol)", the above-mentioned 38th It is the same as the time saving table 202dk2 (see FIG. 1074(a)) in the second modification of the control example. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. As in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example, this shifts to a time-saving state in which the lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be executed while holding one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol. In this case, the variable display performance of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol (the period in which the second special symbol lottery with a high substantial expectation of a big hit cannot be executed) continues for a long time, and the player is dissuaded. This is intended to prevent frustration.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1094 (a), as the specified content for the second special symbol, when the lottery result is "completely out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 178" , "out" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "179 to 198", and a variation time of 15 seconds is specified as a variation pattern. ” is stipulated. Also, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" For, as the variation pattern, "long hit" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit" In, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", "long and small per" with a variation time of 15 seconds, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "time saving symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198", the variation time as the variation pattern is stipulated as a "long collision" of 15 seconds.

That is, in the thirty-ninth control example, when the lottery results are other than complete failure, the variation pattern for 15 seconds is always selected. During this 15-second variation time, a battle effect (see FIGS. 1085(b) and 1086) in which a monster character 821 battles or a remaining machine recovery effect (see FIG. 1087) is executed. In addition, since it is configured to set a relatively long variation time (15 seconds) regardless of the type of small hit in the case of a small hit, in the rush mode (first time saving state B, second time saving state B) When the third small win is won and a time-saving end condition (third end condition) is established, the second special pattern reserved balls are easily stored up to the upper limit number by continuing to hit right during the change of the small win. be able to. Therefore, in a situation where one character has one remaining life and another character has zero remaining life, reach occurs, and the character with one remaining life and the monster character 821 battle. When it develops into a production, it is possible to make the degree of expectation for the battle production higher than usual. In other words, even when a big win or a small V win is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the effect of winning the battle is selected, so that the actual winning percentage can be improved more than usual. . Therefore, in a situation where one character has only one remaining life and the remaining lives of the other characters are zero, the player can have a great sense of expectation, so that the game can be played until the end of the rush mode. can keep people motivated.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1094 (b), the details of table 202dm3 for a final change in working hours are explained. In this time saving final variation table 202dm3, in the time saving state (chance mode, rush mode, invincible mode), when the number of times of time saving (the number of times of lottery until reaching the specified number of times of lottery of the second special symbol) remains 1 , and is a data table that is referenced only in the chance mode in which the number of times of time saving is one. FIG. 1094(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving final variation table 202dm3. As shown in FIG. 1094(b), the contents of regulation for the first special symbol are common to the table 202dm2 for time saving described above (see FIG. 1094(a)). That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1094 (b), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)", and the lottery result is "completely lost". In the case, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of "0 to 198", the variation time is 15 seconds "out of guess" as a variation pattern, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (Second special symbol)” and the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198” for the entire range, the variation time as the variation pattern 15 seconds of "long hit" is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit", the acquired variation type counter CS1 For the entire range of values "0 to 198", "long and small hit" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)" , If the lottery result is "time saving pattern", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, the variation time is 15 seconds as a variation pattern "long collision" stipulated. That is, regardless of the lottery result, a variation pattern of 15 seconds with a relatively long variation time is set. As a result, when the player continues hitting to the right in the time-saving final variation, it is possible to easily accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls up to the upper limit regardless of the lottery result.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1095, details of the time reduction provision table 202em in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. This time saving grant table 202em is similar to the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1075) in the modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions.

As shown in FIG. 1095, the time saving grant table 202em in the present 39th control example has a time saving state grant opportunity (jackpot type, time saving pattern winning, or reaching the ceiling lottery number of times) for each time, determining whether or not the time saving end condition is established. The values of each counter referred to when performing are defined in association with each other. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1095, in this 39th control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving counter 203h, the V small hitting counter 203s1, the first small hitting counter 203s2, Six of the second small hit counter 203s3, the third small hit counter 203s4, and the special figure 2 counter 203t are provided. About time saving counter 203h and special figure 2 counter 203t, since it is the same as the counter of the same name in the 2nd modification of the 38th control example mentioned above, it omits about the detailed explanation here.
V small hit counter 203s1 is a counter for determining whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of winning times of the V small hit executed after the time saving state is set is satisfied, and the above-described second It is a counter having the same function as the small hit counter 203s in the second modification of the T.38 control example. In addition, the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 end based on the winning times of the first to third small hits executed after the time saving state is set. A counter for determining whether or not a condition (third end condition) is satisfied. Here, as described above, in the 39th control example, all the winning times of the first to third small per reach the specified number of times set at the start of time saving, time saving end condition (third end condition ) is established. That is, until all of the first small winning counter 203s2, the second small winning counter 203s3, and the third small winning counter 203s4 are updated to 0 in the time saving state, the second end condition is not established.
As shown in FIG. 1095, in this 39th control example, 10 types of "jackpot A42" to "jackpot J42" are provided as jackpot types, and time saving pattern winning and time saving opportunity based on ceiling lottery number reaching is also provided. The time reduction grant table 202em in the present 39th control example includes, for each time reduction grant opportunity, a time reduction counter 203h, a V small per counter 203s1, a first small per counter 203s2, a second small per counter 203s3, a third small per counter 203s4, And the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t (that is, the first to fourth end conditions) are defined in association.
As shown in FIG. 1095, the game state at the time of winning is the normal state for "jackpot A42" determined at a rate of 5% when the jackpot type is the first special symbol lottery. In the case, the value of the short time counter 203h "100", the value of the V small per counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small per counter 203s2 "5", the value of the second small per counter 203s3 "3", the third small The value "1" of the hit counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when "jackpot A42" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. Then, as the third end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game is set to 5 times, the number of times of executing the second small winning game is 3 times, and the number of times of executing the third small winning game is set to 1 time. As the end condition, 100 times of variation of the second special symbol is set. The probability of winning the first small hit (small hit I42), the second small hit (small hit J42), and the third small hit (small hit K42) in the lottery of the second special pattern is about 1/3, about Since it is set to 1/5 and about 1/10, in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set by winning the "jackpot A42" in the normal state, almost the first and fourth end conditions is not established, and the time saving state is ended by the second end condition, the third end condition, or the jackpot winning. In addition, the probability that the second end condition is met (the V small win (small win A42 to H42) is won) is about 1/10. On the other hand, since the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 15 times, the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of "jackpot A42" The percentage of winning a big win or a small win before the end condition is satisfied is about 80.4%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1095, when the jackpot type "jackpot A42" and the game state at the time of winning are the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hitting counter 203s1 "1", the Value of 1 small per counter 203s2 "100", value of second small per counter 203s3 "100", value of third small per counter 203s4 "100", and value of special figure 2 counter 203t "100" are defined respectively. ing. In other words, the first time-saving state C (invincible mode) is set in which the time-saving state is not terminated until the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches 100 times, a V small win is won, or a big win is won. There is almost 100% chance of winning about 1/10 of the total jackpot or small hit in the lottery of special symbols within 100 times, so if you win the jackpot A42 during the time saving state, the next big hit will be virtually A time-saving state that continues until is set.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1095, the game state at the time of winning is the normal state for "jackpot B42" which is determined at a rate of 95% when the jackpot type is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the case, the value of the time saving counter 203h "5", the value of the V small per counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small per counter 203s2 "100", the value of the second small per counter 203s3 "100", the The value "100" of the 3 small per counter 203s4 and the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot B42" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 5 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game 100 times, the number of times of executing the second small winning game 100 times, and the number of times of executing the third small winning game 100 times are set. As the end condition, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is set to 1. Therefore, when the ``jackpot B42'' is won in the normal state, the drawing of the second special pattern is executed once, the V small prize is won, or the time saving state continues until the jackpot is won. It is possible to acquire the upper limit number (4) of the second special symbol reserved balls by continuously hitting to the right while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed once in the time saving state. Therefore, it becomes a game property aiming to win a big hit or a V small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol five times. In addition, the ratio of winning about 1/10 total jackpot or V small hit in the lottery of the second special symbols within 5 times is about 41%. Winning a big win or V small win shifts to an invincible mode or a rush mode, so that a game is played with a strong expectation of winning a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols five times. can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1095, when the jackpot type "jackpot B42" and the game state at the time of winning are the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hitting counter 203s1 "1", the Value of 1 small per counter 203s2 "100", value of second small per counter 203s3 "100", value of third small per counter 203s4 "100", and value of special figure 2 counter 203t "100" are defined respectively. ing. That is, it is set to the first time-saving state C (invincible mode) similarly to the case of winning the ``jackpot A42'' during the time-saving state, and forms an advantageous state in which the time-saving state is substantially continued until the next big win.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1095, as the jackpot type, "jackpot C42" is determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol or when a V win occurs in a small hit A42 which is a kind of V small hit. For, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "100", the second small hit The value "100" of the counter 203s3, the value "100" of the third small hit counter 203s4, and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. That is, the 1st time saving state C (invincible mode) is matched and prescribed|regulated. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, an advantageous state is formed in which the time-saving state continues substantially until the next big win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1095, as a jackpot type, "jackpot D42" determined when V winning occurs in a small win B42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "5", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "3", the third small hit The value "1" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. In other words, since the same termination conditions as in the case of winning the ``jackpot A42'' in the normal state are stipulated, when the ``jackpot D42'' is won, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed 15 times on average. A time-saving state (a time-saving state in which the jackpot winning ratio is about 80.4%) is set in which the third end condition is satisfied.
Also, as shown in FIG. 1095, as a jackpot type, "jackpot E42" determined when a V prize occurs in a small win C42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "7", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "5", the third small hit The value "2" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot E42" is won, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the 3 end condition, the number of times of execution of the first small winning game is set to 7 times, the number of times of executing the second small winning game is 5 times, and the number of times of executing the third small winning game is set to 2 times, and as the fourth end condition , 100 times of variation of the second special symbol is set. As described above, the probability of winning the first small win (small win I42), the second small win (small win J42), and the third small win (small win K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1. /3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 25 times. Therefore, the ratio of winning a total of about 1/10 jackpot or small hit before the second end condition is satisfied in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of “jackpot E42” is about 93.4%.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1095, as a jackpot type, "jackpot F42" determined when a V prize occurs in a small hit D42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "10", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "7", the third small hit The value "3" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot F42" is won, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. 3 As the end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game is set to 10 times, the number of times of execution of the second small winning game is 7 times, and the number of times of execution of the third small winning game is set to 3 times, and as the fourth end condition , 100 times of variation of the second special symbol is set. As described above, the probability of winning the first small win (small win I42), the second small win (small win J42), and the third small win (small win K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1. /3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 50 times. Therefore, the ratio of winning a total of about 1/10 jackpot or small hit before the second end condition is satisfied in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of “jackpot F42” is about 99.6%.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1095, as a jackpot type, "jackpot G42" determined when a V prize occurs in a small hit E42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "3", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "2", the third small hit The value "1" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot G42" is won, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. 3 As the end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game is set to 3 times, the number of times of execution of the second small winning game is 2 times, and the number of times of execution of the 3rd small winning game is set to 1 time, and as the fourth end condition , 100 times of variation of the second special symbol is set. As described above, the probability of winning the first small win (small win I42), the second small win (small win J42), and the third small win (small win K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1. /3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 10 times. Therefore, the ratio of winning a total of about 1/10 jackpot or small hit before the second end condition is satisfied in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of "jackpot G42" is about 66.4%.

As shown in FIG. 1095, the "jackpot H42" determined when a V prize occurs in the small win F42, which is a kind of V small win, has exactly the same termination conditions as the above-described "jackpot D42". stipulated. Similarly, the "jackpot I42", which is determined when a V prize is won in the small win G42, which is a kind of V small win, has exactly the same ending conditions as the above-mentioned "jackpot E42". "Jack J42" determined when a V prize is won in a small hit H42, which is a kind of small hit, and the time-saving pattern winning are completely the same end conditions as the above-mentioned "jack F42". , the detailed description of which is omitted here.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1095, when the time saving opportunity is the ceiling lottery number of times reached, "jackpot A42" in the time saving state, "jackpot B42" winning, "jackpot C42" time saving opportunity by winning The same end conditions are associated. That is, an end condition corresponding to the invincible mode is associated.
Thus, in the thirty-ninth control example, variations are provided for the third end condition (combination of the initial values of the remaining lives of each character). Since the possibility of winning can be made different, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1096, details of the small hit type selection table 202fm in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1096 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202fm. As shown in FIG. 1096, in the small hit type selection table 202fm in the 39th control example, 11 types of small hit types of "small hit A42" to "small hit K42" are provided as small hit types. . Among these, "small win A42" to "small win H42" are V small wins, and "small win I42" to "small win K42" are small wins in which V winning is impossible.

As shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 corresponds to the range of "0 to 447", and "small hit A42" is defined as the small hit type. This "small win A42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of a type that wins a big win C42 (10 round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit A42" is "0 to 447 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit A42” as the small hit type is about 0.7% (448/65536).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit B42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "448 to 3130". This "small win B42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win D42 (10 round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit B42" is "448 to 3130 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit B42” as the small hit type is about 4.1% (2683/65536).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "3131 to 4740". This "small win C42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win E42 (10-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit C42" is "3131 to 4740 ”, the rate at which “small hit C42” is determined as the small hit type is about 2.5% (1610/65536).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit D42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "4741 to 4919". This "small win D42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win F42 (10 round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit D42" is "4741 to 4919 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit C42” as the small hit type is about 0.3% (179/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit E42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "4920 to 7937". This "small win E42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win G42 (3-round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit E42" is "4920 to 7937 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit C42” as the small hit type is about 4.6% (3018/65536).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit F42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "7938 to 8742". This "small win F42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win H42 (3-round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit F42" is "7938 to 8742 ”, the rate at which “small hit F42” is determined as the small hit type is about 1.2% (805/65536).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit G42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "8743 to 8903". This "small win G42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win I42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit G42" is "8743 to 8903 ”, the rate at which “small hit F42” is determined as the small hit type is about 0.2% (161/65536).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit H42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "8904 to 8943". This "small win H42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win J42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit H42" is "8904 to 8943 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit H42” as the small hit type is about 0.1% (40/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit I42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "8944 to 38728". This "small win I42" is a kind of small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a V prize. It is also a small hit type (first small hit) that triggers the subtraction. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit I42" is "8944 to 38728 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit H42” as the small hit type is about 45.4% (29785/65536). Since the probability of winning the small prize in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/1.36, the probability of winning the first small prize (small prize I42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/3. (45.4%×1/1.36).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit J42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "38729 to 56599". This "small win J42" is a kind of small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a V prize. It is also a small hit type (second small hit) that serves as a trigger for subtraction. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit J42" is "38729 to 56599 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit J42” as the small hit type is about 27.3% (17871/65536). Since the probability of winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/1.36, the probability of winning the second small hit (small hit J42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/5. (27.3%×1/1.36).
Further, as shown in FIG. 1096, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit K42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "56600 to 65535". This "small win K42" is a kind of small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a V prize. It is also a small hit type (second small hit) that serves as a trigger for subtraction. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit K42" is "56600 to 65535 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit K42” as the small hit type is about 13.6% (8936/65536). Since the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/1.36, the probability of winning the second small hit (small hit K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/10. (13.6% x 1/1.36).
Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 1091(b). FIG. 1091(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1091(b), the RAM 203 in the thirty-ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second modification (and the first modification) of the thirty-eighth control example (see FIG. 1065). Then, instead of the small winning counter 203s, a V small winning counter 203s1, a first small winning counter 203s2, a second small winning counter 203s3, and a third small winning counter 203s4 are provided, and a special drawing lottery counter 203ma It is different in that it is provided, and that the time saving limit counter 203kb and the subtraction waiting flag 203kc are deleted.

The V small winning counter 203s1 is a counter that is referred to for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of winnings of the small winning that can be won in the time saving state, and the first small winning counter 203s2 is the time saving state. It is a counter that is referenced to determine whether the number of winning times of the first small hit has reached the specified number of times, and the second small hitting counter 203s3 is the number of winning times of the second small hit in the time saving state. It is a counter that is referenced to determine whether or not it has reached, and the third small hit counter 203s4 refers to determine whether or not the number of winning times of the third small hit has reached a specified number in the time saving state. is a counter that These V small winning counters 203s1, 1st small winning counter 203s2, 2nd small winning counter 203s3, and 3rd small winning counter 203s4 have a counter value corresponding to the big winning type and the game state at the time of winning the big winning at the end of the big winning. is read and set from the time reduction grant table 202em (see FIG. 1095).
The special figure lottery counter 203ma is a counter referred to for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached. This special figure lottery counter 203ma has an initial value set to 0, and each time a special symbol lottery is executed, the value is updated by adding 1 (see S651A in FIG. 1100), and when the jackpot is won, the value is Reset to 0. When the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma reaches 950, it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and the second time saving state A which is a kind of invincible mode is set. That is, a time-saving state is set to continue substantially until the next big hit.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1097, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1097 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this thirty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1097, the RAM 223 in the thirty-ninth control example has an end condition It differs in that a storage area 223ma and a final variation effect counter 223mb are added. It is also different in that the icon information storage area 223ka and the remaining win count counter 223kb are deleted.
The termination condition storage area 223ma is a storage area for storing data indicating the time saving termination condition. According to the data stored in the end condition storage area 223ma, display setting of remaining lives of each character, subtraction display of remaining lives, and the like are executed.

The final variation production counter 223mb is a counter in which a counter value indicating the number of fluctuations in which the battle production started based on the start of the time saving final variation continues is set. In this final variation production counter 223mb, the number of balls of the second special symbol that is suspended at the start of the final variation is set (see S4453A in FIG. 1104), and each time the variation display of the second special symbol is executed The value is decremented by 1 (see S4444A in FIG. 1103).
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirty-ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1098 to 1101. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1098, details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S241A) in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S241A) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1079) in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, and is a special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 1079), this is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol.
In the processing of S401 to S403, S405 to S408, and S421B of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 1098) in this 39th control example, the special symbol in the second modification of the 38th control example described above, respectively. The same processes as S401-S403, S405-S408, and S421B of the symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1079) are executed.
In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1098) in the present 39th control example, when the process of S403 ends, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 (S431A), If it is determined that the value of the counter 203t in FIG. 2 is 1 (S431A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery (S432A). In the process of S432A, if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery (S432A: Yes), the time saving state is terminated by the end of the second special symbol variation display to be started this time. (the current fluctuation display is the final fluctuation of working hours), the table 202dm3 for the final fluctuation of working hours (see FIG. 1094(b)) is read (S433A), and the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, in the processing of S431A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is not 1 (S431A: No), and in the processing of S432A, the lottery for this special symbol is not the lottery for the second special symbol ( (S432A: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the game state is read out (S434A), and the process proceeds to S405. In the process of S434A, if the gaming state is the normal state, the normal table 202dm1 (see FIG. 1093(b)) is read, while if the time saving state, the time saving table 202dm2 (see FIG. 1094(a)) is read.
By executing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1098), it is possible to switch the variation pattern selection table depending on whether it is the time saving final variation, so it is possible to set the variation pattern more preferably. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1099, details of the time saving update process (S242A) in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. This time saving update process is a process that is executed instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1051) in the second modification (and the 38th control example) of the thirty-eighth control example described above (see FIG. 1051). Reference) is a process for updating the various counter values for determining the time saving end condition and determining whether or not the time saving end condition is established.
Of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1099) in this 39th control example, in each process of S601 to S605, S607, S633A to S637A, and S639A, the second modification of the 38th control example described above (and the 38 control example) S601 ~ S605, S607, S633A ~ S637A of the time saving update process (see Figure 1051) in), and the same processing as each of S639A is executed.

In addition, when the time saving update process (see FIG. 1099) in the 39th control example is started, first, the ceiling determination process for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached is executed (S641A), and the process proceeds to S601 and migrate. The details of this ceiling determination process (S641A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1099) in the present 39th control example, when the process of S605 ends, the special figure 2 counter 203t, various small hit counters (V small hit counter 203s1, first small hit counter 203s2, The values of the 2nd small hit counter 203s3 and the 3rd small hit counter 203s4) are all reset to 0 (S641A), and the process proceeds to S607. In the processing of S641A, as various counters for determining the time saving end condition, instead of the small hitting counter 203s, the V small hitting counter 203s1, the first small hitting counter 203s2, the third This is a change accompanying the provision of the 2nd small winning counter 203s3 and the 3rd small winning counter 203s4.
In addition, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1099) in the present 39th control example, when the process of S604 ends, the second modified example of the 38th control example (and the 38th control example) in the small hit time saving update process (Fig. 1052 reference) is replaced with a small winning time saving update process (S642A), and the process is shifted to S633A. The details of this small hit time saving update process (S642A) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Furthermore, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1099) in the 39th control example, when the process of S637A ends, the time saving counter 203h and various small hit counters (V small hit counter 203s1, first small hit counter 203s2, second The values of the small hit counter 203s3 and the third small hit counter 203s4) are all reset to 0 (S643A), and the process proceeds to S639A. As with the processing of S641A, the processing of S643A is performed as various counters for determining the time saving end condition, for the modification of the 38th control example, instead of the small winning counter 203s, the V small winning counter 203s1, the It is a change accompanying the provision of the 1 small per counter 203s2, the second small per counter 203s3, and the third small per counter 203s4.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1100, details of the ceiling determination process (S641A) in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1100 is a flow chart showing this ceiling determination process (S641A). In this ceiling determination process (S641A), first, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma is updated by adding 1 (S651A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma after the addition has reached 950. (S652A). In the process of S652A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma has become 950 (S652A: Yes), it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, S653A for setting the second time saving state A ~ Each process of S655A is executed. That is, the game state is set to the second time saving state (S653A), and the time saving end condition with the arrival of the number of ceiling lottery times as a time saving opportunity is read from the time saving giving table 202em (see FIG. 1095) and various counters (time saving counter 203h, V Small hit counter 203s1, first small hit counter 203s2, second small hit counter 203s3, third small hit counter 203s4, special figure 2 counter 203t) and update (S654A), state command indicating the second time saving state is set (S655A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S652A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma after addition is not 950 (S652A: No), it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times has not been reached, S653A ~ Each process of S655A is skipped, and the present process ends.
By executing this ceiling determination processing (see FIG. 1100), the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches 950 times without winning the jackpot, thereby shifting to the advantageous second time-saving state A (invincible mode). Therefore, especially after losing continuously over a certain number of special symbol lotteries (for example, 600 times), it is more important to continue losing until the number of ceiling lotteries than to win a big win. can be expected. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1101, the details of small hit time saving update processing (S642A) mentioned above are explained. This small hit time saving update process (S642A) is a process executed instead of the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1052) in the second modification (and the 38th control example) of the 38th control example described above. , Small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1052) Similarly, it is a process for determining whether or not the time saving end condition based on the small hit winning is established. FIG. 1101 is a flow chart showing this small winning time saving update process (S642A).
Of the small winning time saving update process (see FIG. 1101) in the 39th control example, in each process of S701, S704, and S706, the second modification of the 38th control example (and the 38th control example) The same processing as each processing of S701, S704, and S706 of the small hit time saving update processing (see FIG. 1052) is executed. In addition, in the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1101) in the present 39th control example, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S701: Yes), then, It is determined whether or not the type of the small hit of this time is the V small hit (any of the small hits A42 to H42) (S721A).

In the processing of S721A, if it is determined that the current small hit is a V small hit (any of the small hits A42 to H42) (S721A: Yes), the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 is subtracted by 1 It is updated (S722A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 after the subtraction has become 0 (S723A). In the process of S723A, if it is determined that the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 after subtraction has been updated to 0 (S723A: Yes), it means that the termination condition (second termination condition) of the time saving state has been met. , each process of S704, S724A, and S706 for ending the time saving state is executed. That is, the game state is set to the normal state (S704), the time reduction counter 203h, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and all the small hit counters (V small hit counter 203s1, first small hit counter 203s2, second small hit counter 203s3 , the counter value of the third small winning counter 203s4) is reset to 0 (S724A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S706A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S723A, if it is determined that the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 after subtraction is not 0 (S723A: No), it means that the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. Therefore, the processing of S704, S724A, and S706 is skipped, and the present processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S721A, if it is determined that the small hit of this time is not the V small hit (S721A: No), the small hit of this time is any of the first to third small hits (small hit I42 to K42) Since it means that it is, the value of the small hit counter corresponding to the small hit type of this time is updated by subtracting 1 (S725A). In the process of S725A, if the current small win is the first small win (small win I42), the first small win counter 203s2 is updated by subtracting 1, and if the second small win (small win J42), The second small hit counter 203s3 is updated by subtracting 1, and if it is the third small hit (small hit K42), the third small hit counter 203s4 is updated by subtracting 1.
When the processing of S725A ends, then, it is determined whether or not the counter values of the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 have all become 0 (S726A), and the first When it is determined that the counter values of the small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 have all become 0 (S726A: Yes), the time saving end condition (third end condition) has been established. In order to mean that, each process of S704, S724A, and S706 for ending the time saving state is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S726A, if it is determined that any one of the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 is not 0 (S726A: No) , It means that the end condition (third end condition) of the time saving state is not satisfied, so that the processing of S704, S724A, S706 for ending the time saving state is skipped, and this processing is ended as it is.
By executing this small winning time saving update process (see FIG. 1101), it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the time saving state can continue until the number of winning times of the first to third small wins reaches a specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1102 to 1104. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1102, details of the variation effect setting process (S4321A) in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. This variable effect setting process (S4321A) is a process that is executed instead of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1082) in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example described above, and the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1082). ), it is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 1102 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process (S4321A).
In the processing of S4401, S4403, and S4421A among the variable effect setting processing (see FIG. 1102) in the thirty-ninth control example, the variable effect setting processing in the second modification of the thirty-eighth control example (FIG. 1082) See), the same processes as the processes of S4401, S4403, and S4421A are executed. In addition, in the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 1102) in the present 39th control example, when the process of S4401 ends, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (S4441A), and if it is a time saving state When it is determined (S4441A: Yes), a production setting process during time saving is executed for setting the production mode of the variable display production in the time saving state (S4442A), and this process ends. The details of the effect setting process (S4442A) during this time reduction will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 1102) in the present 39th control example, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is the lottery of the second special symbol (S4403: Yes), It is determined whether the value of the final variation production counter 223mb is a value greater than 0 (S4443A), and if it is determined that the value of the final variation production counter 223mb is a value greater than 0 (S4443A: Yes), the final The value of the variable effect counter 223mb is updated by subtracting 1 (S4444A), and the process proceeds to S4447A. On the other hand, in the processing of S4443A, if it is determined that the value of the final variation effect counter 223mb is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S4443A: No), then the lottery result is completely out or non-V small It is determined whether it is a hit or not (S4445A), and if the lottery result of this special pattern is neither complete failure nor a non-V small hit (that is, it is either a big hit, a small V hit, or a time-saving design winning). When it is determined (S4445A: No), a notification effect for notifying the lottery result is set (S4446A), and the process proceeds to S4447A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4445A, when it is determined that the current special symbol lottery result is a complete loss or a non-V small hit (S4445A), the processing of S4446A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4447A. In the process of S4447A, the variable display mode in the small display area Dm8 is set according to the result of the lottery (S4447A), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1103, the details of production setting processing (S4442A) during time saving mentioned above are explained. FIG. 1103 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process (S4442A) during this reduction in working hours. When this time-saving production setting process (S4442A) is executed, first, whether it is the final variation in the time-saving state (that is, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 The variation corresponding to the second special symbol Whether or not a pattern command has been received) is determined (S4451A), and if it is determined that it is the final variation in the time saving state (S4451A: Yes), the variation display mode is set in consideration of the look-ahead result of the second special symbol. (S4452A). That is, if there is a big win or a V small win in the lottery result of this special symbol and in the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the variable display of the performance mode to notify the win (win the monster character 821). While setting the mode, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are all completely lost or non-V small hits, the failure is notified (defeated by the monster character 821 ) Set the variable display mode of the production mode. When the processing of S4452A ends, the counter value indicating the number of times of variation until the second special symbol to be notified is set to the final variation effect counter 223mb (S4453A), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4453A, in the case of the production mode of notifying the loss, the counter value corresponding to the current number of held balls is set, while in the case of the production mode of notifying the hit, the number of held balls up to the winning ball is set. Sets the corresponding counter value.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4451A, if it is determined that it is not the final variation of the time saving (S4451A: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of this special symbol is either a big hit or a small V hit (S4454A ), if it is determined that the lottery result is either a big win or a V small win (S4454A: Yes), the production mode of the variable production according to this lottery result is determined (S4456A), and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4454A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is neither a big win nor a V small win (S4454A: No), next, whether the lottery result of this time is a complete deviation fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds It is determined whether or not (S4455A), and if the result of the lottery is a change completely out of the change time of 5 seconds (S4455A: Yes), the process proceeds to S4456A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4455A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a complete deviation of the variation time of 5 seconds (S4455A: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a time-saving design winning. (S4457A), if the time saving pattern winning (S4457A: Yes), 10 times, 7 times, and 3 times are added to the specified number of times corresponding to the 1st to 3rd small hits in the end condition storage area 223ma and updated. (S4458A), the execution of the remaining machine recovery effect (see FIG. 1087) is set (S4459A), and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S4457A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a time-saving symbol winning (S4457A: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is a non-V small hit (S4460A), and the lottery result is If it is a non-V small hit (S4460A: Yes), a non-V small-hit time process for setting the effect mode at the time of the non-V small-hit is executed (S4461A), and this process ends. The details of this non-V small hit time process (S4461A) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4460A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a non-V small win (S4460A: No), it means that the lottery result of this time is a complete deviation fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 15 seconds. 1087), the treasure box 810 appears, but the recovery medicine 810d does not appear and the remaining lives are not recovered. S4462A), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1104, the details of the non-V small hit time processing (S4461A) described above will be described. FIG. 1104 is a flow chart showing this non-V small hit time process (S4461A). As shown in FIG. 1104, when the non-V small hit time process (S4461A) is executed, first, the data of the end condition storage area 223ma is read (S4471A), and the specified number of times corresponding to this non-V small hit is It is determined whether or not it is already 0 (S4473A). In the processing of S4473A, when it is determined that the prescribed number of times corresponding to the current non-V small win is already 0 (S4473A: Yes), the execution of the counterfeit remaining machine recovery effect is set (S4472A), and this processing is executed. finish.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4473A, if it is determined that the prescribed number of times corresponding to this non-V small hit is not 0 (S4473A: No), the prescribed number of times corresponding to this non-V small hit is updated by subtracting 1 Then (S4474A), it is determined whether or not the prescribed number of all non-V small hits has become 0 by this subtraction (S4475A). In the processing of S4475A, if it is determined that the prescribed number of all non-V small hits is not 0 (S4475A: No), the remaining machine reduction effect corresponding to this non-V small hit (Fig. 1086 (a )) is set (S4476A), and the process ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4475A, if it is determined that the specified number of times for all non-V small hits has become 0 (S4475A: Yes), a variable display mode is set that also takes into account the look-ahead result of the held ball of the second special symbol. (S4477A). That is, if there is a big win or a V small win in the lottery result of this special symbol and in the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the variable display of the performance mode to notify the win (win the monster character 821). While setting the mode, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are all completely missed or non-V small hits, the end of the rush is notified (monster character 821 Set the variable display mode of the production mode (defeat). When the processing of S4477A ends, the counter value indicating the number of fluctuations until the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to be notified is set to the final fluctuation production counter 223mb (S4478A), and this processing is ended. In the processing of S4478A, in the case of the production mode of notifying the loss, the counter value corresponding to the current number of held balls is set, while in the case of the production mode of notifying the hit, the number of held balls up to the winning ball is set. Sets the corresponding counter value.
By executing this non-V small winning time processing, if the corresponding character has a remaining life left, when the non-V small winning is won, it is possible to execute an effect for reducing the remaining life of the corresponding character. If the remaining life of the corresponding character is already 0, the fake remaining life recovery effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the character with 0 remaining lives from being defeated by the monster character 821, which is a contradictory effect, so that the effect mode can be set more appropriately.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-ninth control example is configured to provide an end condition that is satisfied when all of a plurality of different conditions are satisfied as the time saving end condition. More specifically, as the small hit type, in addition to the V small hit that substantially determines the big hit, even if the game ball is entered, the game ball cannot be guided to the specific area 650e3 (switching member 650h The opening and closing door 650f1 is opened only during the period in which the is arranged to guide the game ball to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 side. ), and after shifting to the time saving state, the first condition that is established when the first number of times predetermined for the first small hit (first lottery result) is won in the special symbol lottery, and the second A second condition that is established when a small win (second lottery result) is won a predetermined number of times, and a third small win (third lottery result) is won a predetermined number of times. It is configured to provide a time saving end condition (third end condition) that is established only when the third condition that is established in and is all established. With this configuration, even if one or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are satisfied, while at least one condition is not satisfied, Since novel control that allows the advantageous time-saving state to be continued can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in this 39th control example, when the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the specified number of winning times for each of the first to third small hits is set, and the first to third small hits are set in the time saving state When the number of winning times reaches the specified number of times, the third end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is terminated, while at least the number of winning times of at least 1 has not reached the specified number of times, at least Although it was configured so that the third end condition was not satisfied (other end conditions could be satisfied), the type of small hit to be judged for the third end condition is not limited to this. There may be more or less than the three types in the control example. By reducing the types of small hits, the game property in the time saving state can be simplified, so that the game property that is easy for the player to understand can be realized. Conversely, by increasing the types of small wins, it is possible to increase the types of characters that may battle with the monster character 821 during the time saving state, thereby diversifying the mode of presentation. can.
In this 39th control example, when the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the specified number of winning times of each of the first to third small hits is set, and the winning of the first to third small hits in the time saving state When all the number of times reaches the specified number of times, the third end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is terminated, while at least the number of winnings of at least 1 small hit has not reached the specified number of times, at least the third Although the termination condition is not satisfied (other termination conditions may be satisfied), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to terminate the time saving state when the number of winnings of any one of the first to third small hits reaches a specified number of times. That is, the time saving state may be terminated when the remaining lives of one character among a plurality of characters that may battle with the monster character 821 in the time saving state become zero. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to realize a game property in which a character with as many remaining lives as possible is determined by the opponent when a ready-to-win situation occurs. be able to.
In this 39th control example, the prescribed number of winning times for each of the 1st to 3rd small hits in the time saving state is fixed until the time saving state of 1 ends, but depending on the situation It may be configured such that the prescribed number of times is variable. That is, if the number of winnings for the first small win is less than the specified number of times, the number of winnings for the first small win reaches the first number, which is the number of times less than the specified number of times, and the number of winnings for the second small win reaches the second number. The time-saving state is terminated based on the fact that the number of times has been reached and the number of wins for the third small hit has reached the third number (the third end condition is met), while the number of wins for the first small win is specified. If the number of wins is equal to or more than the number of times, the number of winning times of the first small hit reaches the fourth time, which is the number of times equal to or more than the specific number of times, and the number of winning times of the second small win reaches the fifth time, which is higher than the second number. , The time saving state may be terminated (the third termination condition is satisfied) based on the fact that the number of winnings of the third small hit reaches the sixth number, which is greater than the third number. More specifically, for example, within the range of less than 10 wins for the first small win in the time saving state, the number of wins for the first small win is 5 times or more, and the number of wins for the second small win is 3. times or more, and the third end condition is established based on the fact that the number of times the third small win has been won is 1 or more, while the number of times the first small win has been won is 10 times or more, the first The third end condition is established based on the fact that the number of winnings of the small win is 15 times or more, the number of times of winning the second small win is 6 times or more, and the number of times of winning the third small win is 2 times or more. can be configured to By constructing in this way, in the beginning of the time-saving state, the number of winning times of the first small win is expected not to increase, while the number of winning times of the first small win exceeds 5 times. After the player's character 811a has 0 remaining machines, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player expect to win more first small wins and win more than 10 times. In other words, depending on whether the number of winnings of the first small win is less than the first number (five times) or is equal to or greater than the first number of times, it is possible to realize completely opposite novel game characteristics. interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, as another example of a configuration that varies the number of times of time saving according to the situation, in the range where the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state is less than the specific number of times of lottery, the number of winning times of the first small per is the first number of times The time-saving state is ended based on the fact that the number of winning times for the second small hit reaches the second number and the number of winning times for the third small hit reaches the third number (the third end condition is established ) On the other hand, if the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is a specific number of lotteries or more, the number of winnings for the first small hit reaches the fourth number, which is greater than the first number, and the second small win is won. The number of times reaches the 5th number, which is higher than the 2nd number, and the time saving state is terminated based on the fact that the number of winnings for the 3rd small hit reaches the 6th number, which is higher than the 3rd number (3rd end condition holds). By configuring in this way, unless the third end condition is satisfied until the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol reaches the specific number, the third end condition is difficult to be satisfied, so the lottery of the second special symbol. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of times. In these cases, when the condition for increasing the prescribed number of times of the first to third small hits is established, as in the case where the time saving symbol winning occurs, the remaining machine recovery effect (see FIG. 1087) is executed. good too. By constructing in this manner, the player can easily understand that the prescribed number of times has increased and the third end condition has become difficult to be satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to. In addition, in the above-mentioned modification, the case of increasing the specified number of winning times of the first to third small hits by establishing a predetermined condition was illustrated, but on the contrary, some or all of the small hits may be configured to reduce the specified number of times. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that makes players expect to win a big win or a V small win at an early stage. In addition, in the 39th control example, since the time saving state is more likely to generate a big win based on the V small win than in the normal state, the big win game is an advantageous predetermined game state in the 58th control example described later. It is another form of an advantageous game that is likely to be executed in.

In the 39th control example, in the time saving state, by displaying the number of remaining machines of the characters 811a to 811c, the third end condition that is established based on the fact that all the first to third small hits have reached the specified number of times Although the game player is configured to be able to easily grasp the remaining number of wins for each small win until it is established, it is not limited to this. For example, the character type may be kept secret, and an effect may be executed to notify only that the number of remaining lives of any character has decreased (the remaining number of times up to a specified number of small wins has decreased). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to accurately grasp the number of winning times remaining for each small win until the third end condition is satisfied, so that the game property of not knowing how long the time saving state will continue is provided. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In this 39th control example, the number of wins for the 1st to 3rd small wins that are difficult to generate V prizes in the time saving state reaches the prescribed number of times, so that the 3rd end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. However, the lottery result that satisfies the third end condition is not limited to a small prize that makes it difficult to generate a V prize, but can be determined arbitrarily. For example, a specified number of times is set for the lost lottery result set in the first period, the lost lottery result set in the second period, and the lost lottery result set in the third period, and all the lost lottery results are set. It may be configured to end the time saving state when the number of times of becoming won is the specified number of times. Also, the number of times of winning a big win or winning a small V win may be included in the third end condition. Specifically, for example, if you win five small wins that cannot win a V prize, win one V small win, and win a big win in a special symbol lottery, the third end condition is It may be configured to be established. In particular, this control can realize novel game characteristics that have never existed before, in a specification in which it is more advantageous to set the execution of the jackpot game in the normal state than in the time-saving state. In other words, when winning the V small prize, the player dares to avoid the V prize, and after that, when the jackpot is won after the number of times of winning the small prize that cannot win the V reaches the prescribed number of times, the big prize is won. Since it is possible to raise the degree of advantage by establishing time-saving end conditions at the time of winning, the degree of advantage is lowered when the V small prize is won during the time-saving state, but the V prize is generated to surely play the jackpot game. or there is a risk that the time saving state will be terminated without winning the jackpot, but avoiding the V prize and aiming for a jackpot winning with a high degree of advantage It is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select . Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Moreover, the condition that can satisfy the third termination condition is not limited to the lottery result, and other conditions may be employed. Specifically, for example, the total number of lotteries for special symbols or the number of lotteries for second special symbols may be employed as part or all of the conditions that can satisfy the third end condition. Specifically, for example, the number of winning times of the first to third small hits is 1 or more, and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 10 or more so that the third end condition is established. may be configured. By configuring in this way, the minimum number of special symbol lotteries until the third end condition is satisfied can be fixed to 10 times. In other words, even if the specified number of times of the first to third small hits is reached early, the continuation of the time saving state is guaranteed until the specified number of times of the lottery of the second special symbol is satisfied. It can be discouraging and difficult. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In this 39th control example, the number of remaining machines of each character in the time saving state is calculated as the number of winnings remaining with respect to the specified number of times of the first to third small hits (first small hit counter 203s2, second small hit counter 203s3, third The counter value of the small winning counter 203s4) was configured to match, but it is not limited to this. Although the counter value is not actually decremented (for example, winning a small win corresponding to a character who is completely out of play or whose remaining lives have already become 0), the effect of decreasing the remaining lives is executed at a predetermined rate. may be configured to be Further, for example, as the number of remaining lives reported in the remaining lives stock effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of remaining lives less than the prescribed number of actual wins for the first to third small wins can be reported. In other words, the effect operation may be such that the number of remaining lives is less than the actual counter value. In this case, when the number of remaining lives is reported to be less than the actual counter value, predetermined notification conditions (for example, the timing when the number of remaining lives of all characters becomes 0, or the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times) is executed), an effect may be executed in which the actual number of remaining lives is reported by adding the number of remaining lives. By constructing in this way, even if the number of remaining lives of each character is reduced, it is possible to make the player expect the production to increase the number of remaining lives, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.
In addition, the number of remaining machines of each character and the number of winnings remaining for the specified number of times of the first to third small hits (counter values of the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4) As another example of the effect control that allows the mismatch between the characters, for example, the character corresponding to the type of small win actually won under a predetermined condition so that the number of remaining lives of each character is unlikely to become 0 It may be configured such that the remaining life of a character different from the character can be reduced. More specifically, for example, in a situation where both the adventurer character 811a and the gunman character 811c have 1 remaining life, and the rabbit character 811b has 4 remaining lives, the first small win (for the adventurer character 811a (corresponding small win) or the third small win (small win corresponding to the gunman character 811c), that is, the remaining life of the corresponding character is reduced to 0 by reducing the remaining life of the corresponding character. In this case, an effect may be executed to reduce the remaining lives of a character (a rabbit character 811b) who has a spare life (two or more lives remaining). In other words, in a situation where some characters (first character) have a specific number of remaining lives (one), the number of remaining lives of a character (second character) that has a margin of remaining lives is set as a corresponding number. Instead of notifying the number of remaining lives that is less than the value of the small winning counter, avoids the effect of reducing the remaining lives of the first character whose remaining lives are less than a specific number (the value of the corresponding small winning counter is less than It may be configured to notify the number of remaining lives with a large number). Then, in a state in which the number of remaining lives of the second character, which was reported to be less than the actual number of remaining lives, is below a predetermined number (for example, two or less), a small prize corresponding to the second character is won. In this case, the balance is balanced by executing an effect of subtracting the number of remaining lives of the first character instead of the number of remaining lives of the second character, and the timing at which the third end condition is finally satisfied, and all may be configured to coincide with the timing when the remaining life of the character becomes 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the remaining lives of each character to become 0, so that the player can easily feel a sense of security with respect to the remaining lives of a plurality of characters. Therefore, it is possible to play a game during the time-saving state with more peace of mind. Conversely, it may be configured such that some characters are more likely to have more remaining lives. In other words, when winning a small prize corresponding to some characters (specific characters) with a predetermined number or more of remaining lives (for example, 5 or more), instead of the number of remaining lives of the first character, , the number of remaining lives of other characters whose number of remaining lives is 1 or more may be reduced. Then, in a state where the number of remaining lives of other characters appears to be 0 (a state in which only the remaining lives are displayed as 0 even though the value of the corresponding small hit counter is 1 or more), another character is displayed. When a small prize corresponding to a character is won, a performance for reducing the remaining lives of a specific character is executed to balance the balance, and finally, the timing when the third end condition is satisfied and the remaining lives of all the characters. may be configured to coincide with the timing when becomes 0. By configuring in this way, the state in which the number of remaining lives of a specific character is large can be continued for a longer period of time. , and the player can be made to think that the time saving state is likely to continue for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the thirty-ninth control example, only one type of character (monster character 821) is provided as an enemy character that fights (battles) with allied characters (characters 811a to 811c) when the ready-to-win effect develops in the time-saving state. Although it is configured, the enemy character may be configured to have a plurality of types. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the presentation mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, the number of remaining lives to be reduced when the ally character is defeated may be changed according to the type of the selected enemy character. Specifically, for example, first to third enemy characters are provided as enemy characters, and when the first enemy character is defeated, the number of remaining lives of the friendly character determined as the opponent is reduced by one. However, if the character is defeated by the second enemy character, the number of remaining lives of the ally character determined as the opponent is reduced by a maximum of 2 (if the number of remaining lives is 1 or less, the number of remaining lives is reduced to 0). , when defeated by the third enemy character, the number of remaining lives of the ally character determined as the opponent is reduced by a maximum of 3 (if the number of remaining lives is 2 or less, the number of remaining lives is reduced to 0). can be configured to In this case, a case is provided in which the number of remaining machines is reported more than the actual number in the remaining machine stock chance production (or even if the small winning counter value corresponding to the first to third small winnings is not 0, it is false at a predetermined rate. A case where the number of remaining lives becomes larger than the actual number is provided by executing the remaining machine recovery presentation), and a production of being defeated by the second enemy character or the third enemy character is carried out at a predetermined opportunity to give more notification. You can reduce the number of remaining lives by reducing the number of remaining lives to balance the balance of remaining lives, or conversely, execute an effect of losing to the second enemy character or the third enemy character to make the counter value of the small win counter smaller than the actual value of the small hit counter. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of remaining lives is notified, and then an effect operation to balance the balance is performed by adding the remaining lives effect or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of remaining machines is reduced, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, in this case, the ratio of selection at the time of winning the big win or V small win may be configured so that the third enemy character is the highest and the first enemy character is the lowest. By configuring in this way, when the third enemy character is selected, the expectation of a big win or a V small win is high, but if the character is defeated, the number of remaining lives is reduced. When the first character is selected, the expectation of a big win or a small V win is low, but even if defeated, the remaining life is reduced by only 1, resulting in a low-risk, low-return battle production, and the second enemy character. is a battle effect of these intermediate risks and returns, so that the game can be played while paying more attention to the type of the determined enemy character. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Further, for example, it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win (or V small win) depending on the combination of a friend character and an enemy character. Specifically, for example, basically, when the adventurer character 811a performs a battle (competition), the second enemy character has a higher expectation of a big win than the first enemy character (first small The third enemy character is more likely to be selected for the big win than the second enemy character (becomes less likely to be selected for the first small win), while the rabbit When the character 811b of (1) battles, the second enemy character may have the highest expectation for a big win, and the first enemy character may have the lowest expectation for a big win. Further, when the gunman character 811c battles, the selection of the first enemy character confirms the winning of the big win or the small win (cannot be selected in the third small win), and the Also, the second small win may be configured so that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher. With such a configuration, the player can play the game while paying attention to the combination of the ally character and the enemy character, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the thirty-ninth control example, when time-saving symbol winning occurs in the time-saving state, counter values corresponding to time-saving symbols are added to various counters. In other words, when time-saving symbol winning occurs, the advantageous degree is always high, but it is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of time-saving patterns with different time-saving end conditions may be provided, and when a time-saving pattern winning occurs in the time-saving state, the corresponding time-saving end conditions may be overwritten on various counter values. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving symbol winning occurs, the game can be played by paying attention to the set time-saving end condition (remaining machine of each character), so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.
In this 39th control example, as the time saving end condition, it is configured to provide a third end condition that is satisfied when all of a plurality of different conditions are satisfied, and while any one condition is not satisfied, the other end conditions Although it is configured such that the time saving state is maintained (the degree of advantage is maintained) on the condition that it is not established, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the degree of advantage of the time saving state varies each time each condition constituting the end condition is satisfied in the time saving state. Specifically, for example, it is configured to provide first to third conditions as conditions constituting the end condition, and when the first condition is satisfied, a fluctuation pattern table with a long fluctuation time is referred to and a fluctuation pattern is selected. By switching to the control and establishing the second condition, the ratio of selection of the open pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the electric accessary 640a when winning the normal symbol increases, and the third condition is established. By doing so, it may be controlled so that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer. The time saving state may be terminated when all of the first to third conditions are met. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of advantage of the time-saving state is lowered each time the conditions are met, so that a big win or a small win is won before each condition is met. You can have high hopes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Moreover, conversely, it may be configured such that the advantage degree of the time saving state increases as the number of satisfied conditions increases. In this case, it is possible to realize novel gameplay that makes the player expect that any of the conditions will be met early and that all the conditions will not be met, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a condition for increasing the advantageous degree of the time saving state and a condition for decreasing the advantageous degree are provided, or the advantageous degree may be configured to vary depending on the order in which it is established. By configuring in this way, while the time saving state continues, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed while paying attention to the type and the order of establishment of the conditions established, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be further improved. In addition, the control is not limited to changing the degree of advantage of the same time-saving state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state shifts to a disadvantageous normal state when the condition of is satisfied. Specifically, for example, a first advantageous state, a second advantageous state, and a third advantageous state are provided as advantageous states, and when the first condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is entered. When the second condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the state transitions to the third advantageous state, and the second condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, or the first condition is satisfied in the third advantageous state. By doing so, it may be configured to shift to the normal state. In addition, the conditions in these cases are not limited to the number of times the first to third small wins are won, but the number of special symbol lotteries, the V small win, the number of times the normal symbol winning game is executed, and the second special. Arbitrary conditions can be set, such as the number of reserved balls in the design, and winning a jackpot of a predetermined type.
<Fortieth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1105 to 1135. FIG. As with the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 40th control example has a normal state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state) and a time saving state. (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and further, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (number of times of special symbol lottery) satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 999 times). When it is satisfied (when the ceiling granting condition is satisfied), it is configured to be able to grant a benefit that is advantageous to the player (a state that makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery than in the normal state). By constructing in this way, a privilege can be given to a player who has been playing a game for executing the special symbol lottery for a long time regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player's willingness to play is reduced. You can prevent it from happening.

Furthermore, in the 40th control example, as in the 29th control example described above, as a game state (time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, part of the case where the time saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery, or A second short time state (slightly short time state) set when the number of times the special pattern lottery is continuously executed without winning the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of times (999 times), and set after the end of the jackpot game. A first time saving state (time saving state) is configured to be settable.
Although a detailed description will be given later, it is configured such that the degree of advantage of a plurality of types (two types) of time saving states executed in this 40th control example is different. Specifically, in any time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state), the game state is more advantageous than the normal state, and the first time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time saving state. It is configured to be in a game state. That is, among the two types of time saving states that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, the second time saving state is the most disadvantageous time saving state for the player, and the first time saving state is the most advantageous for the player. It will be short-lived.
Here, the elements that determine the degree of advantage to the player during the time saving state include the ease of executing the special symbol lottery in the set game state, the type of special symbol lottery to be executed, and the special symbol lottery. The type of the jackpot game executed based on the result, the type of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery, and the time saving pattern lottery The type of the time saving state that is set when winning is exemplified.
In this 40th control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to make it easier to execute the big win game based on the lottery result than the first special symbol lottery. The 2 special symbol lottery is configured to be a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player. Specifically, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are elected with the same probability (about 1/250), and only the second special symbol lottery is elected with a small hit at about 1/25. Configure. By entering the game ball into the specific area during the small winning game executed when the small winning game is won, the big winning game can be executed after the small winning game is finished. By configuring in this way, the jackpot game is more likely to occur when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol lottery. Since the probability of execution can be increased, the second special symbol lottery can be a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this 40th control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the time saving symbol is elected at a probability of about 1/40. Then, the setting ratio of the time-saving state type set when the time-saving pattern is won is different according to the game state set at the time of the time-saving pattern winning, and is higher than when the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state. , It is configured so that it is easier to set the time-saving state type advantageous to the player when the time-saving symbol is won in the time-saving state.
Specifically, when the time saving pattern is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the ratio of setting the second time saving state (slight time saving state) is set to 50%, the first time saving state (time saving state) is set to 50%, and if the time-saving design is elected in the first special symbol lottery executed in the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state (slight time-saving state) is set. 30%, the ratio of setting the first time-saving state (time-saving state) is 70%, and when the time-saving design is elected in the first special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state (time-saving state), the second It is configured such that the rate of setting the time saving state (slight time saving state) is 0% and the rate of setting the first time saving state (time saving state) is 100%.
Furthermore, in the 40th control example, when the normal state or the second time saving state is set, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The target left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol lottery is executed (the special symbol lottery is executed). When the first time-saving state is set, a left-handed game aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 A right-handed game aiming at execution of a second special symbol lottery by entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more advantageous to the player.
By configuring in this way, the normal state is disadvantageous to the most advantageous person in terms of the ease of setting the first time-saving state that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player when the time-saving symbol is won. Then, the game state becomes advantageous to the player in the order of the second time saving state and the first time saving state.

Further, in the 40th control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed and the time-saving symbol is won, for example, the first time-saving state When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by mistake during the left-handed game and the first special symbol lottery is executed, or the right to execute the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game ( After the first time saving state is set by winning the time saving pattern while acquiring the special figure 1 reservation), the time saving pattern is won when the first special drawing lottery using the special figure 1 reservation already acquired is executed. Even if it does, it is configured so that the game state does not shift from the first time-saving state, which is the time-saving state most advantageous to the player, to another time-saving state (second time-saving state).
By configuring in this way, it is suppressed that the first time saving state ends without executing the second special symbol lottery even though the first time saving state is set. be able to. In addition, in this 40th control example, regardless of the set game state, it is configured to execute the time-saving design lottery (judgment of time-saving design winning) in the first special design lottery, but it is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to change whether or not the time-reduction symbol lottery is executed according to the set game state. In this case, for example, when the first time-saving state is set, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed, the time-saving design lottery (judgment of the time-saving design winning) should not be executed. Even if it is configured in this way, as in the 40th control example, the time saving pattern winning is the most advantageous time saving state for the player from the first time saving state to the other time saving state (second time saving state) It can be configured so that the game state does not shift to.
In addition, in this 40th control example, it is configured to vary the duration of the second time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the second time saving state (slight time saving state), and the time saving pattern winning (first setting opportunity ), the period in which the second time saving state can continue (the number of times of time saving) is set to any one of "1 time to 100 times", and a big hit When the second time saving state is set based on the fact that the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed continuously without winning reaches a predetermined number of times (999 times) (second setting opportunity), the second time saving It is configured so that "40 times" is set as a period (time reduction number of times) in which the state can continue. And it is configured so that the average value of the number of times of time saving set in the second time saving state based on the first setting opportunity is "five times".
That is, the second time-saving state that is set when the first setting opportunity that can be established every time the special symbol lottery is executed is the predetermined number of times (999 times) when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to facilitate setting of the number of times of shortening working hours, which is shorter than the second state of shortening of working hours set when the second setting opportunity to be established is established, and configured to increase the maximum number of times of shortening of working hours that can be set. is doing.

By configuring in this way, the long-term second time saving state is set while suppressing excessive setting of the long-term second time saving state based on the establishment of the first setting opportunity. Since the special symbol lottery can be executed each time while expecting that the special symbol lottery is expected, the player's desire to play can be enhanced. In addition, when the second setting opportunity is established, the number of times of time reduction (40 times) that is larger than the average value (5 times) of the number of times of time reduction that can be set when the first setting opportunity is established is set. It is possible to suppress setting of an excessively small second time saving state to a player who has played a game for a long time without winning a prize.
In addition, in this 40th control example, the first special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state is configured to win the time saving symbol, and the number of remaining time saving times in the set second time saving state, Depending on the number of time reductions in the second time reduction state newly set based on the time reduction symbol winning, the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction state increases, decreases, or does not change, can be created. By configuring in this way, even if the same time-saving type (time-saving type in which the second time-saving state of the same number of times of time-saving is set) is set by the time-saving symbol winning, it is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to cause a disadvantageous case, the player can be interested in the result of the time saving pattern lottery.
Also, as described above, even if the same time-saving type (time-saving type in which the second time-saving state of the same number of times of time-saving is set) is set by the time-saving symbol winning, even if it is advantageous to the player, it is disadvantageous Since there are cases where the same time saving type is set, when winning the time saving pattern, the display mode of the identification information (third pattern) for indicating the lottery result is set to the player's advantage. It is configured to vary accordingly. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the set game state, the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player (normal state, second time saving state) ) is set, there is a background mode (dedicated mode) in which the player can grasp which game state is set, and a background mode (dedicated mode) in which it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is set. A background mode (common mode) can be set, and the stop display mode of identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be different according to the set background mode.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the time saving pattern for a specific time saving type is the normal state, the first privilege is given, and when it is the second time saving state, the player is more than the first privilege. In the case where the second benefit that is advantageous to is granted, even if the time saving state is set, if the common mode is set as the background mode, the result of the special symbol lottery is shown. As the stopped display mode of the identification information, the stopped display mode of the identification information for indicating that the first privilege is given can be set.
By configuring in this way, when a background mode is set in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the set game state, the player can use the stop display mode of the identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress that the game state is grasped by the player.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, by grasping the combination of the set background mode and the stop display mode of the stop-displayed identification information, the privilege given to the player can be determined. It is configured so that the player can grasp the contents.
Specifically, the identification information in the first stop display mode is stopped in a state where the common mode is set, and the identification information in the first stop display mode is stopped in a state where the dedicated mode is set. It is structured so that different benefits are granted depending on whether the By constructing in this way, not only the identification information stop display mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery but also the identification information is stopped and displayed for the player who wants to grasp the privilege given by the special symbol lottery. Since the type of the background mode at the time point (when the special symbol lottery is executed) can also make the player interested, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this 40th control example, when the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) is set based on the time saving symbol winning, it is configured to be able to set the time saving state with a different number of time saving times. It is configured to be able to determine the setting of the notification mode (stop display mode of the identification pattern) for indicating that the time saving pattern has been won in the special pattern lottery according to the number of time saving times.
Specifically, when the number of times of time saving to be set is small (for example, once), the special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) that has already been acquired at the time of winning the time saving pattern is read ahead, and the time saving state is set. When it is determined that the result of the first special symbol lottery to be executed in the state of being out is lost (non-winning of the time saving pattern), the fact that the time saving pattern is won is not notified to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the time-saving state ends early despite winning the time-saving symbol, and the player's desire to play is lowered. In addition, when the result of the look-ahead is other than the result of the first special symbol lottery being lost (non-winning of the time saving pattern), it is possible to notify that the time saving state with a small number of times of time saving is set. In other words, if it is notified that the time-saving state with a small number of times of time-saving is set, there is a possibility that some benefits (hit, time-saving design) are won in the special symbol lottery that is executed during the time-saving state. can be raised.
Here, conventionally, it is possible to set a time saving state with a different number of times of time saving, and when a time saving state with a large number of time saving times is set, the player is more likely than a case where a time saving state with a small number of time saving times is set. An advantageous pachinko machine 10 is known. A pachinko machine 10 capable of informing the player of at least a part of the number of times of time saving currently set when the time saving state is set is known. In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, the greater the number of time-savings notified, the more advantageous it is for the player, so the player is only interested in the number of time-savings notified, and the small number of time-savings. There is a problem that the player's motivation to play is lowered when is reported.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, similarly to the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, it is advantageous for the player to set a long number of times of shortening time, but a short number of times of shortening time is set. If it is, it is configured to be able to notify that the time-saving state is set when the result of the special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is read in advance, so the time-saving state in which a small number of times of time-saving is set is set. It is constructed so that the player can be interested in what is done. Therefore, when it is notified that the time saving state is set, it is possible to make the user interested in the number of time saving times to be set.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 in the 40th control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 1105, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be described. Since the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is the same as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example (see FIG. 777), detailed description is omitted. do. Here, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be briefly described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, the first symbol in which the lottery is executed when the execution condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball launched into the game area enters the first ball entrance 64. (first special symbol), and a first symbol (second special symbol) in which a lottery is executed when an execution condition is established based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. there is Then, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, any one of the jackpot winning, the time-saving symbol winning, and the loss is determined, and as the result of the second special symbol lottery, one of the big winning, the small win, and the loss is determined. It is configured as follows.
When a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols, the opening/closing door 65b (see FIG. 1105) of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, making it easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 1105). It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed. When a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 11 prize balls are paid out for one winning game ball. Therefore, in order to obtain many prize balls in the game on the pachinko machine 10, the player can play the game with enthusiasm with the aim of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols.
Furthermore, when a small prize is won in the lottery of special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f (see FIG. 1105) of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is opened, leading to the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 1105). And it is configured to execute a small winning game that makes it easier to win a game ball. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a, 11 prize balls are paid out for one winning game ball.
In addition, in the 40th control example, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 650a passes through the specific area (V area) 650e3 provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 , the jackpot game can be executed by opening the opening/closing door 65b of the first variable winning device 65 after the small prize game is finished.

That is, in the 40th control example, the execution trigger for executing the jackpot game is the first jackpot trigger that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the game ball is in the specific area (V area) during the small hit game. ) and a second jackpot opportunity that is established when passing through 650e3. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the jackpot game at various opportunities, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured to be able to execute a big winning game and a small winning game as winning games that can award prize balls to the player. The contents of each winning game are determined in advance so that more prize balls can be given to the player (more game balls can be won) during the jackpot game than during the game. . That is, the big winning game is a winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the small winning game in terms of the number of winning balls that the player can acquire.
Further, when the jackpot game is executed, the game state corresponding to the jackpot type can be set after the jackpot game ends, whereas the small win game starts after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the game state that was set at the time of being set is set again. That is, for example, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, based on the jackpot type of the jackpot game, the jackpot game A game state (time saving state) different from the normal state can be set after the end, and when the small winning game is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the small winning game is completed. It consists of
Therefore, for a player who is playing a game expecting that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the currently set game state is set, a new game state can be set. becomes a winning game more advantageous than the small winning game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured to be able to execute a lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) in addition to the above-described special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery). When the execution condition is satisfied based on the passage (entering) of the game ball to the through gate 67, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Then, as a result of the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), it is configured to determine whether it is hit or lost. When winning the lottery of the normal pattern, by activating the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 1105), the normal pattern winning game that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is executed. be.
That is, by executing the game per normal pattern, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 than when the game per normal pattern is not executed. Therefore, for the player, by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery is executed to aim for a big win game, and the game ball is entered into the through gate 67 ( pass), execute the normal symbol lottery, and enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the second special symbol lottery and aim for a big hit game. , the player can be provided with a variety of games, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured to be able to set a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as the normal symbol probability state. When the low probability state of the pattern is set, the game ball is put into the second ball entrance 640 based on the result of one normal pattern lottery than when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. It is configured so that the expectation that it will be possible to enter the ball is low.
Specifically, the "normal pattern high probability state" means that the winning probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) lottery is increased, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. Changed and set to a longer time than normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the number of game balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is higher than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to enter the ball. Therefore, during the high-probability state of normal symbols, game balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is performed can be increased.

In addition, as in the thirty-seventh control example described above, even in the game state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, the opening control of the same electric accessory 640a as the normal symbol high probability state can be executed. A game state (first time saving state) can be set.
In addition, instead of lengthening the opening time of the electric accessary 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to lengthening the opening time, as a normal pattern winning game during the high probability state of the normal symbol Then, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one normal pattern per game may be changed to be increased more than the normal pattern per game executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern. In addition, during the high probability state of normal symbols, the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbol) is not changed, and the time and one normal symbol that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in the winning game may be changed. In addition, during the normal pattern high probability state, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one game per normal pattern cannot be changed. Instead, only the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the low probability state of the normal symbol.
In addition, in the 40th control example, as described above, the probability state of normal symbols is configured to be changeable to "low probability state" and "high probability state", and the probability state of special symbols is configured not to be changed. However, without being limited to this, the probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be changeable to "low probability state" and "high probability state" in the same manner as the probability state of the normal symbol described above. In this case, when the high probability state of the special design is set, than when the low probability state of the special design is set, so as to increase the probability that the lottery result of the special design will be a big hit (jackpot probability). Good to configure. In addition to the big win probability, it may be constructed so as to increase the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a small win (small win probability), or it may be constituted so as to increase both the big win probability and the small win probability. Good, when the high probability state of the special design is set, than when the low probability state of the special design is set, so that the probability that the lottery result of the special design is out (loss probability) is low can be configured to
The specific configuration of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 used in the 40th control example is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 778 to 782 of the 29th control example. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding the production contents of the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1106 to 1111, the content of characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured to be able to set the normal state and the time saving state as the game state, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the 29th control example described above. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to set a plurality of time saving state types as the time saving state, and the degree of advantage to the player is varied according to the set time saving state type. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, when the normal state is set and when the second time saving state is set, the player is made to execute a left-handed game Configure. Then, during the game period in which the player executes the left-handed game, that is, during the game period in which the normal state or the second time-saving state is set, a plurality of background modes (advantageous mode, normal mode, disadvantageous mode) are set. The background image corresponding to the set background mode type is configured to be displayed on the display surface (back surface) of the third pattern display device 81 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is playing a left-handed game to grasp the currently set game state.
In addition, in this 40th control example, based on the fact that the time-saving pattern is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second time-saving state can be set without going through the jackpot game, so the left-handed game is executed. It is difficult for the player who is playing to grasp whether or not the state has shifted to the second time saving state based on the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, since it is configured to be able to set a different period (time saving number of times) as the period during which the second time saving state continues (time saving number of times), the game that the second time saving state has been set based on the time saving symbol winning Even if the person grasps it, it is possible to make it difficult for him/her to grasp the timing when the second time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state.
FIG. 1106(a) is a background mode for showing that the second time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, has been set. FIG. 1106(b) is a diagram schematically showing an effect screen in the disadvantage mode, which is the background mode for indicating that the normal state has been set.
As shown in FIG. 1106(a), when the advantageous mode is set, a rear image simulating heaven is displayed as the rear image of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and a character 801 simulating a rabbit. Then, a character 809 imitating an angel is dynamically displayed. In addition, in the upper center of the main display area Dm, characters "advantageous" are displayed to indicate that the currently set background mode is an advantageous mode advantageous to the player, and in the sub-display area Ds, As a guidance mode for indicating that the probability of shifting to the first time-saving state (time-saving state in which a right-handed game is executed) is higher than when the normal state is set "chance for time-saving rush" characters are displayed.

In addition, since the advantageous mode screen shown in FIG. 1106(a) shows the second time saving state in which the left-handed game is executed, the small display area Dm4 prompts the player to play the left-handed game. The characters for "left-handed" are displayed. Here, in this 40th control example, when the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set by the special pattern lottery is won, at the timing when the special pattern for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed. It is configured to set the second time saving state, and when the special symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed next is started, the process for switching the background mode (background mode transition processing) is executed.
The background image shown in FIG. 1106(a) is displayed when the background mode transition processing satisfies the conditions for transition to the advantageous mode. That is, in part when the second time saving state is set, the background mode is shifted to the advantageous mode so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the second time saving state has been set. is doing.
On the other hand, the conditions for ending the advantageous mode are separately defined, for example, every time the special symbol lottery is executed after the condition for ending the second time saving state is established and the normal state is set, the advantageous mode is ended. An end lottery is executed for making the player win, and the advantageous mode is ended when winning the end lottery.
By configuring in this way, by setting the advantageous mode for notifying the player that the second time saving state has been set, for the player who grasps that the second time saving state has been set Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the advantageous mode continued. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play while expecting that the first time saving state is set. In addition, even if the advantageous mode is not set, it is possible to leave the possibility that the second time saving state is set internally, so that the advantageous mode is set during the left-handed game. Even if there is no situation (situation where the normal mode is set), it is possible to make it easy to expect that the first time saving state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1106(b), the contents of the effect screen during the disadvantage mode will be described. This disadvantage mode is an effect screen for notifying the player that the normal state is set as the game state. By setting this disadvantageous mode, it is notified that the currently set game state is a normal state that is not advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, since it is not possible to grasp which game state is set, the player cannot find the end of the game, and the player may play the game for an excessively long time, resulting in loss of interest in the game. can be suppressed from decreasing.
Furthermore, in the 40th control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (999 times) without winning the jackpot, the ceiling privilege can be given. As the number of required special symbol lotteries is reduced (as the number of special symbol lotteries not winning the jackpot increases), the disadvantage mode is more likely to be displayed when the normal state is set. Then, as shown in FIG. 1106(b), while the disadvantage mode is displayed, the remaining number of times notification for indicating the number of executions of the special symbol lottery required until the ceiling privilege is granted is displayed in the small display area Dm7. configured to be displayed in
Specifically, on the display screen shown in FIG. 1106(b), the characters "50 times to the ceiling" are displayed in the small display area Dm7. Therefore, the display screen shown in FIG. 1106(b) is the third symbol display during the period during which the special symbol variation for showing the result of the 950th special symbol lottery after the end of the previous jackpot game is executed. 8 is a diagram showing a display screen of device 81. FIG.
Although not shown, in the 40th control example, a normal mode can be set as the background mode in addition to the above-described advantageous mode and disadvantageous mode. This normal mode is configured to be settable both when the normal state is set as the game state and when the second time saving state is set. That is, the advantageous mode and the disadvantageous mode are exclusive modes that are background modes that can inform the player of the set game state, and the normal mode is a common mode that does not inform the player of the set game state. By configuring the common mode to be settable in this way, the exclusive mode is set for the player each time the normal state and the second time saving state are changed, and the set game state can be easily displayed to the player. It is possible to suppress being grasped.

In this 40th control example, the above-mentioned three types (disadvantage mode, normal mode, and advantageous mode) can be set as the type of background mode. good. In addition, in the 40th control example, it is possible to set two types of game states (for example, normal state, second time reduction state) as game states with the same game method (for example, left-handed game) that is advantageous to the player. However, in three or more types of game states, the game method that is advantageous to the player may be the same. In this case, as the types of background modes, in addition to a background mode (dedicated mode) corresponding to the set game state and a background mode (common mode) not corresponding to the set game state, at least A background mode (limited mode) in which only one game state can be excluded may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the game state that is set according to the type of background mode that is set.
Furthermore, it may be possible to notify the player of information indicating that the background mode has not been switched even though the game state has changed. It is good to configure the background mode so that it can be set. With this configuration, the player can enjoy predicting the currently set game state based on the information that the same background mode is commonly set before and after the transition of the game state. can provide.
Further, it may be possible to notify the player of information indicating that the background mode has been switched even though the game state has not changed. With this configuration, the player can be made aware that the background mode before switching and the background mode after switching are set in the same game state, so the current game state can be predicted. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of playing the game, and to provide the player who has grasped the current game state with the pleasure of predicting when the game state has been set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1107, the contents of the effect executed when the time-saving symbol is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state will be described. Figure 1107 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when winning the time saving pattern in which the time saving type "time saving A" is set during the normal mode, and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving classification "time saving A" is elected during advantageous mode.

In this 40th control example, when the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, it is configured to execute the determination of the time-saving design winning (time-saving design lottery), and when the time-saving design is won, the jackpot. A time saving state can be set without executing a game. Then, when the time-saving design is elected, the second time-saving state is set as the time-saving design type "time-saving A (time-saving design A)", and the first time-saving state is set "time-saving B (time-saving design B). , and is configured to be set. Furthermore, it is configured to set different number of times of time saving according to the type of time saving pattern that has been won.
The display screen shown in FIG. 1107(a) is in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and in a state where the "normal mode" is set as the background mode, the number of times of time reduction is 10 times. It is a display screen for showing that the time saving pattern in which the two time saving state is set has been won, and the treasure box 810C displayed in the center of the main display area Dm is opened, and the second time saving state is set as the content 810Ca. "advantageous" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that. Then, the character 801 determines that the result of this special symbol lottery (the result of the time-saving symbol lottery) is advantageous to the player (the game state after winning is more advantageous to the player than the game state before winning). is displayed in a display mode (indicated by a V sign in the figure) to indicate that the player is in a game state), and the characters "advantageous mode entry" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1107(a), in the display area Dm1 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the display mode of the third symbol for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery , a time-saving pattern display mode (“3.5.3”) different from the jackpot display mode (for example, three zoro) for indicating the jackpot winning is displayed. Here, the display mode for indicating that the time-saving design has been won as a result of the special design lottery is different from the time-saving display mode for showing complete loss in which neither the jackpot winning nor the time-saving design has been won as a result of the special design lottery. Although the symbol display mode is configured to be displayed, the time-saving symbol display mode is configured to be displayed in a display mode that is difficult to distinguish from the winning display mode as compared with the jackpot display mode.
Specifically, as a jackpot display mode for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a combination of only the same numbers such as "333" is set in the display area Dm1, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is set. A different combination of numbers such as "363" is set in the display area Dm1 as a failure display mode for indicating that is neither a big hit nor a time-saving symbol winning. Then, as a time-saving design display mode for indicating that the lottery result of the special design lottery is a time-saving design winning, a specific combination (for example, 353) is set as a combination of different numbers in the same manner as the above-described outlier display mode. be done.

In other words, when the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the jackpot, the player is quickly informed of the winning of the jackpot before the execution of the jackpot game based on the winning of the jackpot. In order to provide a sense of satisfaction, the display area Dm1 is configured to display the big win display mode in a display mode that is easy for the player to identify.
On the other hand, by making it difficult for the player to easily distinguish between the time-saving design display mode for indicating that the time-saving design has been won and the out-of-off display mode for indicating that it is completely out, this special It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the time saving state has been set based on the result of the symbol lottery (whether or not the time saving symbol has been won). The effect (background mode display) displayed on the display surface of the 3-symbol display device 81 can be easily made interesting.
When the display screen shown in FIG. 1107(a) is displayed and it is notified that the advantageous mode is set, the background mode is changed from the normal mode to the advantageous mode during the next special symbol variation period. executed. In addition, in this 40th control example, as shown in FIG. When the production is executed in the production mode in which the displayed contents 810Ca are displayed), and in the production mode in which the player is not notified that the time-saving symbol has been won, for example, the treasure box 810C opens and the contents 810Ca are displayed in the time-saving mode. In some cases, the performance is executed in a performance mode in which ``???'' is displayed, which makes it difficult (impossible) for the player to determine whether or not the symbol has been won.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that allows the player to grasp that the time-saving pattern has been won in the special pattern lottery, and an effect that is difficult to grasp, which is currently set for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the game state.

Next, a description will be given of the content of the effect when the time saving symbol in which the second time saving state ("time saving A") is set is won during the second time saving state. In FIG. 1107(b), as a display mode for showing that the time saving pattern of the same type as in FIG. "3.5.3" is displayed in the area Dm1. Then, the contents 810Ca with the characters "pinch" are displayed from among the treasure chest 810C displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds "may have shortened the advantageous period". characters are displayed.
Here, in FIG. 1107 (b), the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state (remaining time saving number of times 30 times) is displayed, based on the time saving symbol winning in this special symbol lottery When the second time saving state is newly set by the second time saving state, characters of "pinch" are displayed to inform the player that the number of remaining time saving times becomes smaller than the already set second time saving state.
That is, when the background mode for informing the player that the advantage mode is set, that is, the second time saving state is set, is displayed, the second time saving state is set Time saving A display mode that enables a player to predict whether or not the number of remaining time reductions will decrease due to a newly set second time reduction state when a symbol is won can be set as the display mode of the content 810Ca. Configure.
On the other hand, even if the second time saving state is set, in the situation where the advantageous mode is not set as the background mode (the situation where the normal mode is set), the second time saving state is set Even when the time saving pattern is won, the display mode is configured not to allow the player to predict whether or not the number of remaining time saving times will decrease due to the newly set second time saving state. is doing.

That is, in the 40th control example, in the state where the same game state (second time saving state) is set, the time saving pattern of the same type (time saving pattern in which the second time saving state of 10 times of time saving is set) Even in the case of winning, the time-saving pattern won this time is disadvantageous to the player according to the type of the set background mode (performance mode for making the player predict the set game state). Dedicated background mode (advantageous mode ) is set, it is more difficult to grasp whether the second time-saving state is set than the dedicated background mode. It is configured to facilitate provision of information on whether or not the time-saving pattern is disadvantageous to the player.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the easiness of obtaining information regarding whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player according to the type of the effect mode (background mode) being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of effect mode to be executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1108, the contents of the effect executed when the first time-saving state ("time-saving B") is set in the special symbol lottery is won will be described. In this 40th control example, when the time saving symbol is won, the time saving type A, in which the second time saving state is set, or the time saving B, in which the first time saving state is set, is set. When the first time-saving state is set, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state and the second time-saving state, and the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640. Since the right-handed game for making the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game for making the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64, the guidance mode for promoting the right-handed game is displayed. It is displayed in area Dm4. That is, the first time saving state is a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time saving state.
First, with reference to FIG. 1108(a), description will be given of the effect executed when winning the time saving pattern in which the first time saving state is set while the normal mode is set as the background mode. FIG. 1108(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when "time saving B" is won in the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 1108 (a), when "time saving B" is won, the display area Dm1 displays "3 .7.3” is displayed statically. “Normal” is displayed in the main display area Dm to indicate that the current background mode is the normal mode, and the time-saving pattern in which “time-saving B” is set as the display mode of the contents 810Ca of the treasure box 810C is won. A pattern resembling a watermelon is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the watermelon has been completed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "lucky chance time entry" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating that the first time saving state (right-handed game state) is set.
Then, after the display screen shown in FIG. 1108 (a) is displayed, when the next special symbol variation is started, chance time is set as a background mode for showing the first time saving state, and is displayed in the display area Dm4. "Right" is displayed. The display contents during this chance time will be described later with reference to FIG.
In this 40th control example, the first time saving state is set as the game state at the time when the special symbol variation that wins the "time saving B" in which the first time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, but the following special symbol variation is started, it is configured to switch to the background mode in the first time saving state. That is, after the display screen shown in FIG. 1108(a) is displayed, if the next special symbol variation is not started, the display screen showing the chance time entry is continuously displayed. . By constructing in this way, the player is notified of entering the chance time, compared with the case where the background mode corresponding to the chance time is set at the time when the special symbol winning the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to make it easy to secure a long period for
In other words, if you win a time-saving lottery in a special symbol lottery and the time-saving state is set after the time-saving game ends, the winning game period is set between the special symbol variation that was won per time-saving and the next special symbol variation. Therefore, it was possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand by making it easy to secure a period for informing the player that the time saving state will be set in advance. When the time saving state is set based on the winning, the time saving state is set unexpectedly because the game period is not set between the special symbol variation in which the time saving symbol is won and the next special symbol variation. Therefore, there is a problem that a game that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

On the other hand, in the 40th control example, when the time saving state is set based on the fact that the time saving pattern is won, the effect indicating the time saving state after the time when the time saving state is set (chance time display ) is executed, and a period for executing an effect (chance time rush display) for indicating that the time saving state is set can be secured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the winning game and when the time saving state is set based on the time saving pattern winning, at the timing when the time saving state is set On the other hand, the timing at which the effect indicating the time saving state is executed is varied. That is, the notification timing of the time saving state is varied according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state. By configuring in this way, since it is reported that the time saving state has been set at various timings, the game can be played while always expecting that the time saving state is set.
In addition, even if it is other than the configuration used for the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, it is during the time saving state without notifying the player that the time saving state is set based on the time saving symbol winning for a sufficient period of time. For example, if a variable time of 60 seconds is set as a special symbol variation to indicate that the time saving symbol has been won, the first 50 seconds A performance (variation performance) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is executed using the remaining 10 seconds, and then the player may be notified that the time saving state is set using the remaining 10 seconds. By constructing in this way, even if the performance during the time saving state is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, enough time is secured for informing the player that the time saving state is set. be able to.
Also, in this 40th control example, as shown in FIG. 1108 (a), when the special symbol variation won in the "time saving B" in which the first time saving state is set is stopped and displayed (the first time saving state is set ), the guidance mode for guiding the player to the right-handed game ("Right-handed" display in the display area Dm4) is configured not to be displayed. Then, when the next special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to display a guidance mode for guiding the player to a right-handed game. By configuring in this way, compared with the case where the background mode corresponding to the chance time is set at the time when the special symbol winning the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can play the right-handed game with a margin. can be done. In addition, it is possible to facilitate execution of the first special symbol lottery even after the first time saving state is set. Furthermore, since it is possible to make it difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery immediately after the first time saving state is set, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the 40th control example, it is possible to set a different number of times of time saving as the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state according to the type of the winning time saving pattern and the set game state. Then, the display mode for indicating the winning of the time saving pattern in which the first time saving state is set is displayed in a display mode in which the player can predict the number of time saving times to be set.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1108(b), description will be given of the effect contents when the time saving pattern (time saving B) in which the first time saving state is set during the advantageous mode is won. FIG. 1108(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when "time saving B" is won during the advantageous mode.
As described above, in the 40th control example, a plurality of foods (watermelon , Cherry, Carrot) is configured so that one display mode is determined from the icons imitating the time saving pattern, and is set by the game state at the time of winning the time saving pattern, the set background mode, and the time saving pattern winning. It is configured to determine the icon to be displayed based on the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state.
Specifically, when the game state is the normal state and the normal mode is set as the background mode, and the "time saving B" is won, either the watermelon icon or the cherry icon is determined, and the game is played. When the state is the time saving state and the normal mode is set as the background mode, and when the 'time saving B' is won, either the cherry icon or the carrot icon is determined. Then, when the gaming state is the second time-saving state and the advantage mode is set as the background mode, and when "time-saving B" is won, one of the watermelon icon, the cherry icon, and the carrot icon is determined. , When the game state is the normal state and the advantageous mode is set as the background mode, that is, after the advantageous mode is set based on the setting of the second time saving state, the second time saving state ends However, in spite of the fact that the normal state is set, only the watermelon icon is determined when "time saving B" is won in a state in which the condition for ending the advantageous mode is not satisfied.

In other words, when the watermelon icon is displayed in a state where the normal mode is set as the background mode, it is possible to predict that the game state will be the normal state at the time when the player wins "time saving B". When the carrot icon is displayed in the state where the normal mode is set, it is possible for the player to predict that the game state will be the time-saving state at the time of winning 'time-saving B'. In addition, when the cherry icon and the carrot icon are displayed in a state where the advantage mode is set as the background mode, the game state at the time when the player wins "time saving B" is the second time saving state. It makes something predictable.
With this configuration, the player can predict the currently set game state based on the set background mode and the type of the displayed icon. , a plurality of display modes (background images, food-like icons) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and having overlapping display periods can make the player interested.
Furthermore, as described above, even if the same type of icon (watermelon icon, cherry icon, carrot icon) is displayed when "time saving B" is won, depending on the type of background mode set , Since the meaning of the displayed icon is different, regardless of the type of background mode, compared to the case where each icon has a unique meaning, the icon displayed when winning "Time saving B" It is possible to provide enjoyment that makes you predict the meaning of.
In addition, in this 40th control example, both when the normal mode is set and when the advantageous mode is set, the plurality of icon types determined to indicate that the "time saving B" has been won are unified. By doing so, the number of icon types displayed on the display screen is reduced, and the amount of display data is reduced. As an icon type displayed only in the normal mode, an apple icon imitating an apple can be determined, and when the apple icon is displayed, the game state at the time of short-time winning is the normal state, and It is preferable to configure so that the player can be notified that the set number of times of time saving is the maximum (40 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the time-saving winning this time has a low probability and is most advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1109, the contents of the effect executed in the special symbol variation executed during the first time saving state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, after the special symbol indicating the time saving symbol winning is stopped and displayed, the first time saving using the variation period of the first special symbol variation using the remaining reservation of the first special symbol It is configured to execute a time-saving number of times notification effect for notifying the number of time-savings in the state. FIG. 1109(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during execution of the time reduction number of times notification effect, and FIG. 1109(b) is a display screen on which the effect result of the time reduction number of times notification effect is displayed It is the figure which showed an example.
The time-saving number of times notification effect is the number of executions (time-saving times) of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that can be executed before the end condition of the first time-saving state set this time is satisfied. It is a production to inform the Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 40th control example, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) as the end condition of the first time saving state The number of times of execution and the number of times of the total special drawing lottery summed up reaches the predetermined number of times (10000 times). It has a second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times (1 to 10000 times) is reached, and the special figure 2 lottery number that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is the first time-saving end condition. It is configured to be less than the total special figure lottery number of times.
That is, in the present 40th control example, when the first time saving state is set, the game state is such that the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. become. However, if you have the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) with the first time saving state set, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 hold), the special 1 lottery will be executed using the winning information contained in the acquired special 1 hold, so the 1st special design during the 1st time saving state A lottery was likely to take place.
Therefore, due to the execution of the first special symbol lottery during the first time saving state, the number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the first time saving state is reduced. In order to suppress, it is configured to be able to set multiple types of time saving end conditions. Then, the number of remaining special figure 2 lotteries until the second time saving end condition, which is established based only on the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery, is established can be notified to the player as the number of times of time saving.

By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state, the number of remaining time saving times displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (the second time saving end condition is established Since it is possible to suppress the decrease in the remaining special figure 2 lottery number), even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the first time saving state, it can be executed during the first time saving state A player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure 2 lottery number does not decrease.
In addition, when the first special symbol variation is started after the special symbol variation won in the time-saving symbol for which the first time-saving state is set is stopped and displayed, the remaining time-saving number of times of the first time-saving state set this time Since it is configured to execute the number of times of reduced working hours notification performance without displaying , it is possible to reliably notify the player that the first reduced working hours state has been set.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, after the special symbol won in the time saving pattern in which the first time saving state is set in the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the above The number of times of remaining time reduction is displayed based on the start of the second special symbol variation without execution of the number of times of time reduction notification performance.
As shown in FIG. 1109(a), when the number of times of working hours notification effect is executed, the effect for notifying the number of times of working hours corresponding to the type of the winning time saving pattern is mainly executed. In this time-saving frequency notification effect, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed at the bottom left of the main display area Dm, and above it, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol until the end of the first time-saving state set this time is suggested. The symbols 811a to 811d are rotated and displayed. Further above it, the characters "~waiting for chance time~" are displayed. In addition, the text "Determine the number of chance times!" is displayed in the small display area Ds. By these display contents, the player can be made to think as if the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state has not yet been set. In other words, the player can be made to feel as if the first time saving state has not yet started (waiting).

In addition, actually, at the time of starting this time saving number of times information production, it has already shifted to the first time saving state. In other words, the number of times of shortening working hours informing performance is executed during the variable display period of the first special pattern held at the end of the first special pattern varying display accompanying the winning of the shortening working hours pattern (at the time of stopping display of the shortening working hours pattern). In this way, even if a new first special pattern variation is executed after the first time saving state is set, the time saving number of times notification effect is executed using the first special pattern variation display period. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the time saving end condition (the number of times of time saving) that is established based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbol without making the player feel uncomfortable.
As described above, the state shown in FIG. 1109(a) is the first time saving state and the first special symbol variation is being executed, so the display area formed in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm In Dm1, the first special symbol variation is executed in a mode (narrow display area) that is relatively difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the reserved symbol display is performed in the display area Dm9 which is relatively difficult for the player to visually recognize (the display area is narrow). In other words, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed (that the first time saving state has already started) based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol.
Here, when the time-saving pattern is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed game (normal state, second time-saving state) and the first time-saving state is set, or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game ends When the first time-saving state is set later, before the first time-saving state set this time, the right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery is not executed, so the first It is likely to be in a state where a special symbol reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved) is obtained and a second special symbol reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved) is not obtained. In this case, even if the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the first special symbol lottery will be executed based on the acquired special figure 1 reservation.
Therefore, in this 40th control example, when the first time-saving state that facilitates execution of the second special symbol lottery is set, in order to facilitate execution of the second special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times, As an end condition for ending the time saving state, in addition to the total end condition established based on the total number of lotteries obtained by adding the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol, the second special symbol A special figure 2 end condition established only by the number of times of lottery is provided, and the number of times specified as the sum end condition is configured to be greater than the number of times specified as the special figure 2 end condition.

By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed based on the acquired special figure 1 reservation immediately after the first time saving state is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the first time saving state is reduced.
More specifically, in the 40th control example, the total lottery number of times when the summing end condition is satisfied is the special figure 1 reservation with respect to the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol when the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied. It is configured to be greater than the number of special symbol lotteries (4 times) corresponding to the upper limit number (4) that can be stored. By configuring in this way, the number of special figures 1 pending acquired at the time the first time saving state is set is the upper limit number, and before the second special symbol lottery is executed, the acquired Even if the first special symbol lottery is executed four times using all the special figure 1 reservations, the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the first time saving state is performed by executing the first special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of times is reduced. Therefore, without caring whether the first time saving state is executed or not, the player can be motivated to execute the left-handed game in order to acquire more special figure 1 reserves.
It should be noted that, instead of setting the combined lottery number of times when the summing end condition is satisfied, for example, when 10 times is set as the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol when the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied, It is preferable to configure so as to set about 20 times as the number of combined special figure lotteries where the combined end condition is established. By configuring in this way, the left-handed game is continuously executed during the first time-saving state, and the game of intentionally executing only the first special symbol lottery, that is, without establishing the special figure 2 end condition. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game in which the first time saving state is continued for a long period of time.
In this case, the first special symbol lottery of more times than the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure 1 suspension that can be reserved and stored (4 times of the first special symbol lottery) is in the first time saving state When executed, as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the right-handed game, emphasis is given to guide the player with the right-handed game emphasized rather than the guidance mode for guiding the normal right-handed game. It is preferable to configure so that the guidance mode can be set. By configuring in this way, the right-handed game can be guided more emphasized to the player who has been guided to the right-handed game in the emphasized guidance mode, so that the first time-saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the continuation of a left-handed game by a player who has not noticed.

Also, as described above, if the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the emphasized guidance mode, when the setting condition of the emphasized guidance mode is satisfied (for example, the fifth first special symbol lottery during the first time saving state at the time of execution), even if the upper limit number of special figure 1 reservations (4 pieces) is acquired, the special figure 2 end condition is performed by performing a right-handed game after grasping the contents of the emphasized guidance mode In order to suppress the fact that the sum end condition is satisfied before the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied, the total special figure lottery number when the sum end condition is satisfied is set to 10 more than the second special symbol lottery number when the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied. It is better to set as many times as possible. By configuring in this way, although the player hastily executed the right-handed game after grasping the content of the emphasis guidance mode, the summing end condition is established earlier than the special figure 2 end condition, and the player It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play the game.
Furthermore, in the 40th control example, in the state where the first time saving state is set, it is possible to notify part of the information until the time saving end condition for ending the first time saving state is satisfied for the player Configure. Specifically, among the time saving end conditions for ending the first time saving state, the information until the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied (the number of lotteries of the second special symbol) is configured to notify the player. is doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols that can be executed during the first time saving state set this time, so the first time saving state advantageous to the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp whether or not (the first time saving state in which the special figure 2 end condition is difficult to be established) is set.
Here, as described above, in the 40th control example, the first special symbol lottery may be executed after the first time saving state is set. In this case, immediately after the first time-saving state is set, if the player is notified of the number of times of the second special symbol lottery (remaining time-saving number of times) that can be executed before the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied (the second If it is displayed on the display surface of the 3-symbol display device 81), the remaining displayed despite the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) being executed with the first time-saving state set. There is a problem that the number of times of shortening of working hours is not subtracted, giving the player a sense of distrust.
On the other hand, in this 40th control example, using the period from when the first time saving state is set until the second special symbol lottery is executed, the special figure 2 end in the first time saving state set this time It is constituted so as to be able to execute a time-saving number of times informing performance for informing the number of times of lottery (number of time-savings) of the second special symbol until the conditions are satisfied.

By configuring in this way, the period during which the second special symbol lottery is not executed immediately after the first time saving state is set (the period during which the first special symbol lottery is executed and the period during which any special symbol lottery is not executed) is set, it is possible to effectively utilize the period and execute the performance that makes the player interested, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.
Returning to FIG. 1109(a), the description continues. The design (icon) rotated and displayed in the time saving number notification effect is, for example, a suggestive design (icon) 811a with the letters "10 times" indicating that the number of time saving is given at least 10 times or more. , Suggestion pattern (icon) 811b with the word "once" suggesting that the number of time reductions has been given at least once, and the character "Continue" suggesting that the time reduction number of times notification effect will continue. It is composed of a suggestive pattern (icon) 811c attached thereto and a suggestive pattern (icon) 811d with the character "celebration" indicating a big win. In addition to this, a suggestive symbol (icon) with the letters “100 times” indicating that the number of times of time saving has been granted more than 100 times, and that the first time saving state will continue until the next big hit. A suggestive pattern (icon) with the character "∞" suggesting is also provided. Depending on the type of winning time-saving design (time-saving number of times), the number of pending balls of the first special design, and the lottery result of the first special design, any type of suggestive design as suggestive designs (icons) 811a to 811d (Icon) is determined by lottery.
When a specific period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the time-saving number of times notification effect, as shown in FIG. A performance of beating is executed, and it is reported that the suggestive content indicated by the beating suggestive pattern has been acquired. The example of FIG. 1109(b) illustrates a case where an effect is executed in which the suggestion pattern 811a to which the character "10 times" is attached is beaten. In this case, in the sub-display area Ds, by displaying the characters "10 times GET!! Start hitting to the right!!" can be easily understood by the player.
Although illustration is omitted, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol during execution of the time-saving number-of-time notification effect, the suggestive symbol (icon) 811d with the character "celebration" is placed on the rabbit character 801. is executed. In addition, the characters "Get a jackpot!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she has won the jackpot.

That is, in the present 40th control example, the first special symbol lottery is executed after the first time saving state is set until the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the first time saving state is executed. , when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the big win is notified without informing the player of the number of times of time saving set for the first time saving state of this time. . By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a plurality of types of times of time saving, even though a large number of times of time saving (for example, 100 times) is set, the second special symbol lottery is never held. It is possible to suppress the fact that a big win game is executed without being executed and the player's desire to play is lowered.
In addition, the production mode of the time saving number of times notification effect (display mode of the suggested pattern icons 811a to 811d to be displayed) is, as described above, the type of the winning time saving pattern (time saving number of times), and the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern. , and the lottery result of the first special pattern, a suggestive pattern (icon) 811d with the character "congratulation" indicating the jackpot winning is displayed as the effect result of the number of time-saving notification effects. To provide enjoyment of predicting the number of time saving times set for the current first time saving state based on the types of other suggestive patterns (icons) 811a to 811c that are not stop-displayed even in the case of can be done.
In addition, in this 40th control example, after the first time saving state is set, a big hit is made by the first special symbol lottery executed before the second special symbol lottery executed mainly during the first time saving state is executed. In the case of winning, the jackpot winning is notified without notifying the number of times of working hours by the number of times of working hours notification performance executed during the first special symbol variation, but it is not limited to this, for example. , When a big win is won by the first special symbol lottery executed before the second special symbol lottery executed mainly during the first time-saving state is executed, the number of times of time-saving is smaller than the number of times of time-saving actually set. The suggestive symbol icon corresponding to is stop-displayed, and then the effect indicating the winning of the jackpot can be executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the first time saving state with a small number of time saving times and the second game state that is disadvantageous to the player in the first time saving state are set. It is better to win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state than to end the first time-saving state without winning the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. Since the game results are advantageous, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play due to winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the present 40th control example, the variation time of the first special symbol in the first time saving state is fixed to 5 seconds. In accordance with this, the effect of selecting one suggestion pattern (the rabbit character 801 strikes) in the number of times of working hours notification effect is also fixed to 5 seconds. Then, the number of times of shortening of working hours informing performance is executed using the fluctuation period of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the first of shortening of working hours state. In addition, in a state in which neither the first special symbol reserved ball nor the second special symbol reserved ball is possessed, the 5-second production of selecting the suggestive symbol to which the character "Continue" is attached is always performed. After that, when the first special symbol variation is performed, 4 suggested symbols of a new combination are displayed in the variation, and the 5-second production of selecting 1 suggested pattern from among them is performed again. executed. Further, when the next variation satisfies the condition of the second special symbol variation, the suggestive symbol icon to be stop-displayed as the effect result of the time-saving number of times notification effect being executed is changed to the predetermined suggestive symbol icon mode. It is configured to switch from to the aspect of the suggestive pattern icon for indicating the number of times of time saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably execute the performance (time-reduction number of times notification performance) using the period from when the first time-reduction state is set until the second special symbol lottery is executed.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1110(a) and 1110(b), the effect contents of the variation effect executed during the variation period of the second special symbol in the first time saving state will be described. Figure 1110 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the variation production during the time saving (during the first time saving state), Figure 1110 (b) is displayed at the end of the fluctuation period of the second special symbol won a small hit and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
In this 40th control example, when the second special symbol lottery during the first time saving state is executed, a plurality of suggested symbol icons 811e to 811g including suggested symbols for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed. is executed, and a plurality of suggestive symbol icons 811e to 811g, which are being variably displayed, are stopped and displayed by a character 801 imitating a rabbit in accordance with the end timing of the special symbol variation (special symbol stop display timing). An action (attacking action) is executed, and the suggestive symbol icon corresponding to the special symbol lottery result is stop-displayed from among the plural suggestive symbol icons 811e to 811g that are variably displayed.
As shown in FIG. 1110 (a), when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the first time saving state, the current gaming state is the first time saving state as a display mode "chance zone". is displayed above the main display area Dm. In addition, on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm2 for showing the variation status of the second special symbol is formed, and a display mode for indicating that the second special symbol is changing (indicated by an arrow in the figure display) is displayed.

A display area Dm4 for guiding the game method to the player is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and guides the right-handed game which is the most advantageous game method for the player in the first time-saving state. "Right-handed" for doing is displayed. Below the main display area Dm4, as information until the time saving end condition for ending the currently set first time saving state is satisfied, a second special executable before the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied A display area Dm7 is formed for indicating the number of remaining symbol lotteries (remaining time reduction number). In this display area Dm7, the number of time reductions notified by the number of time reductions notification effect, that is, the second special symbol lottery number of times (time reduction number of times) is displayed, and after that, after the second special symbol variation is executed, the number of time saving times is subtracted and displayed.
In this 40th control example, since the number of times of remaining time reduction until the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied is displayed, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the chance zone, the remaining time displayed in the display area Dm7 The number of times of shortening of working hours is not displayed by subtraction. In this way, among a plurality of time saving end conditions, by configuring the player to be able to notify the number of time saving times until the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied, the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the first time saving state It is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the remaining number of times.
In addition, the figure shown in FIG. 1110 (a) shows an example of the display screen displayed during the second special symbol variation for the seventh time after the first time saving state of ten times of time saving is set. In the area Dm7, "last 3 times" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the number of remaining time reductions. The display mode for indicating the number of times of remaining time reduction is, when the number of times of time reduction is set to 10 times, until 1 second elapses after the first second special symbol variation is started, "Last 10 times" is displayed, and then the number of times is decremented by one and "Last 9 times" is displayed. After that, the number of times is subtracted each time a new second special symbol variation is started, and when the second special symbol variation (shortening final variation) that satisfies the special figure 2 end condition is executed, it is being executed "Last" is displayed to indicate that the second special symbol variation is the last special symbol variation executed during the time saving state.
By configuring in this way, the number of times of shortening time set this time can be notified to the player for a predetermined period (one second) even after the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Here, the contents of the suggestive pattern icons 811e to 811g displayed in the effect executed during the chance zone will be explained. The suggestive symbol icon 811e with the character "?" is a display mode for providing information about the result of the special symbol lottery, and is intended to make it difficult for the player to understand the result of the special symbol lottery being executed. This is the display mode. The suggested symbol icon 811e can be selected with a predetermined probability regardless of whether the result of the special symbol lottery is winning (big winning, small winning) or not winning. The suggestion symbol icon 811f with the letter "V" attached is a display mode for providing information about the result of the special symbol lottery, and the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is a win (jackpot win, small win). elected) is selected. The suggestive pattern icon 811g to which the character "horizontal" is attached is a display mode for providing information about the time saving end condition of the set first time saving state in addition to the information about the result of the special pattern lottery. This suggestive symbol icon 811g indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is out, and the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area Dm7 is less than the number of remaining time reductions satisfying the special figure 2 end condition. selected if
In other words, when the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is "Loss", the suggestive symbol icon 811e or the suggestive symbol icon 811g can be selected, and the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is "Loss". In the case of "hit", the suggesting pattern icon 811e or the suggesting pattern icon 811f can be selected. In addition, when the number of times of remaining time reduction displayed in the display area Dm7 is less than the number of times of remaining time reduction that satisfies the special figure 2 end condition, the suggestive pattern icon 811g is configured to be selectable, and is displayed in the display area Dm7. If the remaining time reduction number of times is not less than the remaining time reduction number of times that the special figure 2 end condition is satisfied, the suggested design icon 811e and the suggested design icon 811f are configured to be selectable.
Then, at the timing when the second special symbol variation in the first time saving state is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Then, the suggesting pattern icon 811f imitating "V" is stop-displayed, and the remaining suggesting pattern icon 811e and the suggesting pattern icon 811g are ejected from the main display area Dm. FIG. 1110(b) shows the display screen when the second special symbol variation in which the small hit is won is stopped and displayed. 3 symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "BONUS GET" are displayed to indicate that the lottery result of this time is winning.
In this control example, the suggestive symbol icon 811f with "V" is stop-displayed both when the big win is won and when the small win is won. It may also be possible to stop and display suggestive symbol icons in different modes depending on whether or not a small win is won. In addition, it is possible to set a plurality of performance modes as a performance mode of variable performance from when the plurality of suggestive pattern icons 811e to 811g are variably displayed until any one of the suggestive pattern icons is stopped and displayed. , depending on the set effect mode, the player may be able to predict the presence or absence of winning. The second speed, which is faster than the first speed, can be set, and the variable performance of the second speed is more likely to be selected than the variable performance of the first speed when the lottery result is winning. good. With this configuration, the player can predict the result of the special symbol lottery according to the performance mode of the variable performance, so that the player does not get bored even during the variable performance period until the suggestive symbol icon is stopped and displayed. The game can be played without

Furthermore, as a production mode of the variable production, the result of the special pattern lottery is displayed in the game by changing the number and types of the suggested pattern icons that are displayed in a variable manner instead of changing the variable display speed of the suggested pattern icons. It may be configured so that the player can predict, or it may be configured so that the player can predict the result of the special symbol lottery according to the length of the variable performance period.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1111, the effect content when the ceiling privilege is provided will be described. FIG. 1111(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the ceiling privilege is given during the normal mode, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when
In this 40th control example, when the number of times the special symbol lottery is lost (the number of times of addiction) reaches 999 times, the privilege (ceiling privilege) can be given to the player regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. , As a ceiling privilege, it is configured to set a second time-saving state of 40 times of time-savings. Furthermore, when the second time saving state is set as a ceiling privilege, unlike the case where the second time saving state is set in the time saving pattern winning, the first special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state It is constructed so as not to win the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set to the second time saving state. In other words, the second time-saving state provided by the ceiling privilege is configured so as not to win the time-saving design until the special symbol lottery for the number of times of time-saving (40 times) is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress winning the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state with a short number of times of working time saving is set during the second time saving state.
In other words, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game, and in the second time-saving state in which the benefit given when the time-saving pattern is won is more advantageous than the normal state, the setting opportunity of the second time-saving state is used to play the game. It is configured so that the degree of advantage to each person is different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily provide a moderate privilege to the player by means of the ceiling privilege. In addition, in this 40th control example, it is configured to set a second time saving state that can ensure execution of a certain number of special symbol lotteries as a ceiling privilege, but without being limited to this, the first time saving state You may comprise so that a setting may be carried out, and you may comprise so that the 2nd time saving state of specific times and the 1st time saving state of specific times may be set continuously.

When the ceiling privilege is given during the normal mode shown in FIG. Contents 810Ca with the characters "advantageous" to indicate that the advantageous mode is entered from the inside and the characters "40" to indicate the number of times the second time saving state continues (time saving number of times) are displayed. , the character 801 is displayed in a mode of congratulating the player for transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "advantageous mode entry" are displayed to indicate that the ceiling privilege is given.
After the display screen shown in FIG. 1107(a) is displayed, when the special symbol variation is completed (the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the background image showing the advantageous mode is displayed, and the display screen shown in FIG. 1111(b) is displayed. is displayed. Here, when the advantageous mode (second time saving state) is set based on the time saving pattern winning, the time saving pattern is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the second time saving state, and immediately the second time saving state. is likely to end, and for the purpose of making it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the second time saving state continues, the remaining period during which the advantageous mode (second time saving state) continues On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set by the ceiling privilege, until the special pattern lottery of a certain number of times (40 times) is executed, it will return to the normal state. Since it is configured so that the game state does not shift, it is configured to display the number of remaining time reductions in the display area Dm7. In the sub-display area Ds, there is displayed the text "Don't fall down 40 turns in advantageous mode".
By configuring in this way, when the second time-saving state (advantageous mode) is set by the ceiling privilege, compared to the case where the second time-saving state (advantageous mode) is set by the time-saving pattern winning, stable To allow a player to easily understand that a game can be executed.
<Regarding the game state transition in the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1112, the transition contents of the game state in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1112 is a diagram showing transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1112, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example aims to enter a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 1105) which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery. A left-handed game state in which a left-handed game in which a game ball is shot toward the left side area (left side of the variable display unit 80) of the game areas formed on the game board 13 is a game method advantageous to the player. , The right side area (variable A right-handed game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right side of the display unit 80 is an advantageous game method for the player, and a right-handed game state can be set.

More specifically, normal state as the game state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), second time-saving state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design, electric accessories 640 open low frequency state) is set, it becomes a left-handed gaming state, and the first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols, or low probability state of special symbols, normal symbols) low probability state, high frequency state of opening of the electric accessory 640) is set, it is configured to be a right-handed game state.
Here, the time-saving state (second time-saving state and first time-saving state) set at the time of time-saving symbol winning will be described. Detailed contents are omitted because they are the same as the 37th control example described above, but when the time saving state (second time saving state, first time saving state) is set based on the time saving symbol winning, based on the jackpot winning It is different in that the high probability state of normal symbols is not set with respect to the case where the time saving state is set.
In other words, when the time saving state (second time saving state, first time saving state) is set based on the time saving symbol winning, while maintaining the same normal low probability state as the normal state, the second than the normal state It is configured to set a game state in which a game ball can be easily entered into the ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, as the fluctuation time of normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern fluctuation time), normal pattern fluctuation time shorter than normal state (normal pattern fluctuation time same as normal pattern fluctuation executed during high probability state of normal pattern ) is set, and by increasing the number of executions of the normal symbol lottery executed per unit time than in the normal state, the game ball is pushed to the second ball entrance 640 more than in the normal state. We have built a game state that makes it easy to enter the ball.
Furthermore, when the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving pattern winning, the game content of the normal-per-game that is executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery is the same as the high-probability state of the normal design. It is constructed so that a per-figure game is executed. By configuring in this way, when the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving design election, even if the high probability state of the normal design is not set, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern The content of the winning game can be made the same as the high probability state of the normal pattern, and a game method in which the right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed game can be played for the player. In addition, when the second time saving state is set, the game content per normal pattern becomes the same game content as the normal state, and the left hitting game is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting game.

That is, in the 40th control example, as the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, three game states of the normal state, the first time saving state, and the second time saving state can be set. The 2 o'clock short state is different only in that the normal pattern fluctuation time is set shorter than the normal state, and the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern per game in the same way as the normal state. It becomes a game state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns, low frequency state of opening), and the first time saving state is the same as the high probability state of normal patterns during the game per normal pattern. It becomes a game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, high frequency open state) in which game balls can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加
In addition, in this 40th control example, similarly to the 37th control example described above, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is defined to be slightly different between the low probability state of normal symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the normal pattern lottery can be executed without delay by the game balls shot by executing the right-handed game, the probability difference is difficult for the player to recognize. . Therefore, the situation in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set and the situation in which the low probability state of normal symbols and the high frequency of opening state are set are the same without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. A right-handed game can be played. Henceforth, the game state which the right-handed game becomes advantageous to a player is generically called a 1st time saving state.
Furthermore, in the 40th control example, two types of second time saving state (second time saving state a, second time saving state b) are configured to be settable, and different types depending on the setting trigger of the second time saving state The second time-saving state of is configured to be settable. Specifically, when the time-saving pattern is won by the special pattern lottery, the second time-saving state a is set, and the number of times of the special pattern lottery executed continuously without executing the jackpot game is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. is satisfied (when reaching 999 times), the second time saving state b is set.
When any type of second time saving state is set, the probability state of the special design, the probability state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design fluctuation, and the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the game per normal design are the same. It is configured to be different, and the type of privilege to be granted when winning (jackpot winning, time saving pattern winning) is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state is configured to be different. is different.

By configuring in this way, even if the same game state (second time saving state) is set, the content of the game to be executed later can be changed according to the established setting opportunity, It is possible to make the player interested not only in which game state has been set but also in the timing of the setting, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In the following description, when both the second time saving state a and the second time saving state b are shown, they are simply referred to as the second time saving state, and when showing detailed types, the second time saving state a (second 2 time saving a), referred to as second time saving state b (second time saving b).
First, the game contents in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) will be explained. The normal state is a game state in which a game (special figure 1 game) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed by entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. When the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the special symbol lottery is executed such that a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/250 and a time-saving symbol is won with a probability of 1/40.
A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 1123, but the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured so that a single special symbol lottery cannot win both a big win and a time-saving symbol. is doing. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is elected (jackpot determination), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not elected by the jackpot determination, then the time-saving pattern winning is determined. configured to run
By configuring in this way, a plurality of benefits (jackpot winning, time-saving symbol winning) are not given to the player in one special symbol lottery, and benefits are given excessively to the player. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring. In addition, in this 40th control example, it is configured so as to execute the jackpot judgment before the judgment of the time-saving symbol winning, but it is important to prevent that the player is given an excessive privilege by one special symbol lottery. As long as it can be suppressed, for example, the determination of the time-saving pattern winning is configured to be executed before the jackpot determination, and when it is determined that the time-saving pattern winning has not been won by the determination of the time-saving pattern winning, the judgment of the jackpot winning is performed. You can configure it to run.

In addition, in the 40th control example, the range of values for jackpot winning and the range of values for winning time-saving symbols overlap with respect to the value that one piece of information can take (the value of the first winning random number counter C1). By defining without, in one special symbol lottery (hit determination executed based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 of 1), the jackpot winning and the time-saving symbol winning are determined in duplicate. Since it is configured so that there is no such a case, it may be configured to appropriately change the order of determination in one special symbol lottery.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured so that the jackpot winning and the time-saving symbol winning are not repeatedly determined, but depending on the contents of the various benefits determined to be winning Alternatively, a plurality of benefits may be provided in duplicate. For example, when a jackpot is won, if the set jackpot type is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, the jackpot is won. Even in the case, it may be configured to be executable determination of time-saving symbol winning. Furthermore, in addition to the winning of the big win and the winning of time-saving symbols, the determination of the winning of the small win, which triggers the execution of the small winning game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the big winning game executed when winning the big win, can be executed once. By the special symbol lottery, the time-saving symbol winning and the small win winning may be determined in duplicate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the contents of the privilege that can be granted by one special symbol lottery while suppressing that the privilege is excessively granted to the player. interest in the game can be improved.
First, when a big win is won in a first special symbol lottery executed in a normal state, one of two types of big win types (big win A43, big win B43) is set. As the selection ratio of the jackpot type, it is defined that the jackpot A43 has a selection ratio of 10% and the jackpot B43 has a selection ratio of 90%.
When the jackpot A43 is set as the jackpot type, a jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) of round games is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the first time saving state (lower special symbol) with a time saving number of 10000 times Probability state, high probability state of normal design) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot B43 is set, a jackpot game with 4 rounds (R) is executed, and after the jackpot game is finished, the second time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal Symbol low probability state, open low frequency state) is set.

The probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (jackpot winning probability) is 1/250, and the ratio of setting the jackpot A43 as the jackpot type is 10%. The probability that the first time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning from one special symbol lottery is 1/2500. In addition, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (jackpot winning probability) is 1/250, and the ratio of setting the jackpot B43 as the jackpot type is 90%, so it is executed during the left-handed game. The probability that the second time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning from the first special symbol lottery is about 1/277. Although detailed contents will be described later, since the first time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time saving state, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot A43 When set, the big win is more advantageous to the player than when the big win B43 is set. Therefore, although the probability is low, the player can play the game with the aim of winning the jackpot where the jackpot A43 is set.
On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, time-saving design determination is performed to win the time-saving design with a probability of 1/40. When the time-saving design is elected in this time-saving design determination (time-saving design lottery), the second time-saving state or the first time-saving state after the special design variation for showing the result of the first special design lottery is stopped and displayed. State is set.
In this 40th control example, when the time saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery, one of the two time saving types is set, and the second time saving state is set. The selection rate of the time saving type (time saving A) is set to 50%, and the selection rate of the time saving type (time saving B) in which the first time saving state is set is configured to be 50%. Furthermore, as each time saving type (time saving A, time saving B), it is possible to set a time saving type with different time saving end conditions. For example, time saving type A (time saving A group), four types of time saving A1, time saving A2, time saving A3, and time saving A4 are set as time saving B (time saving B group), which is a time saving type in which the first time saving state is set, time saving B1, time saving B2 , and three types of time saving B3 can be set.
Detailed contents of the time saving end condition set for each time saving type will be described later with reference to the time saving grant table 202Ae (see FIG. 1117), but different time saving end conditions are set according to the game state at the time of the time saving design winning In any time reduction type, the time reduction end condition that is most likely to be established when the game state at the time of the time reduction pattern winning is the normal state is set, and then at the time of the time reduction design winning. When the game state is the second time-saving state, when it is the first time-saving state, and in order, the time-saving end condition, which is difficult to be satisfied, is configured to be easily set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the game state at the time of winning the time-saving symbol.

In addition, in the time saving A group, the time saving end condition (time saving end condition that is likely to be satisfied) is set for the time saving A1 that is most disadvantageous to the player among the time saving A1 to the time saving A4, and then the time saving A2, the time saving A3, and the time saving A4. It is configured so that the time-saving end condition that is difficult to be established is easily set in the order of. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the time saving type set when winning the time saving symbol.
In the time saving group B, among the time saving B1 to the time saving B3, the time saving end condition (time saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied) is set for the time saving B1 that is most disadvantageous to the player, and then the time saving B2 and the time saving B3 are established in order. It is configured so that difficult time-saving end conditions can be easily set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the time saving type set when winning the time saving symbol.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (999 times) without executing a jackpot game, the second time saving state b of 40 times of time saving is set. It is configured to be able to grant a ceiling privilege that By constructing in this way, the game state of the player who did not win the jackpot despite executing a large number of special symbol lotteries is based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery instead of the result of the special symbol lottery. can be shifted, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game for a long time.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured to be able to set the second time-saving state b of a predetermined number of times (40 times of time-saving times) as the ceiling privilege, but the contents of the ceiling privilege are not limited to this. , You may comprise so that a 1st time saving state can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege, so that it is possible to provide the player with novel game characteristics aimed at giving the ceiling privilege. .

In addition, when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied (when the special symbol lottery is executed 999 times), it is possible to execute the ceiling privilege determination process that determines the content of the ceiling privilege to be granted this time by lottery from multiple can be configured to Then, as the type of ceiling privilege that can be determined by the ceiling privilege determination process, benefits that differ in the degree of advantage to the player (for example, benefits to set the first time saving state, benefits to set the second time saving state, and , contents of time saving end conditions for ending each time saving state), it is preferable to configure so that one privilege can be determined.
By configuring in this way, when the condition for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the player can be more interested in what the ceiling privilege to be given this time is. Furthermore, as part of the ceiling privilege, even if a privilege with a high degree of advantage to the player (for example, a privilege to set the first time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied) can be granted, the ceiling When a privilege is granted, it is possible to suppress the granting of a privilege having a high degree of advantage each time, so that it is possible to suppress the granting of an excessively advantageous privilege to a player as a ceiling privilege. .
In addition, the content of the ceiling privilege granted as the ceiling privilege is not when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established, but before the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established (for example, at the end of the jackpot game) ), and using the period until the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied, it is possible to suggest to the player the contents of the ceiling privilege to be granted when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. It is also possible to configure such a suggestive effect so that it can be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can decide whether or not to execute the game aiming at giving the ceiling privilege based on the content of the suggestive performance, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, when the time saving end condition of the second time saving state granted as a ceiling privilege is established and the normal state is set again, that is, the previous jackpot game ends A second time-saving state (time-saving frequency of 40 times) is set as a ceiling privilege without winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery 999 times after that, and a special pattern lottery is executed 40 times during the second time-saving state to save time. When the termination condition is satisfied and the normal state is set, the information is not updated to satisfy the condition for granting the ceiling privilege.

In other words, it is configured so that the number of times that the ceiling privilege can be provided is one time between the jackpot winnings. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the ceiling privilege from being excessively given to the player who does not win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.
Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example is configured to be able to provide the ceiling privilege only once during the winning of the jackpot, but is not limited to this, and can be configured to be able to provide the ceiling privilege twice or more. In this case, the conditions under which the ceiling privilege can be granted may be different between the first ceiling privilege (first ceiling) and the second ceiling privilege (second ceiling). The content of the ceiling privilege given to the player (degree of advantage) may be different between the first ceiling and the second ceiling.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, as information (ceiling-related information) for establishing the condition (ceiling granting condition) for granting the ceiling privilege, the number of special symbol lotteries (number of addictions) between jackpot winnings is used, and if the special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot, it is configured to update the number of special symbol lotteries. A means capable of measuring the number of times (for example, the number of times a small prize is won) is provided, and if the number of times measured by the means satisfies a ceiling giving condition (for example, the number of times a small prize is won 100 times), a ceiling privilege can be given. can be configured to
By constructing in this way, the ceiling related information is not updated each time the special pattern lottery is executed, but the ceiling related information is updated when the result of the special pattern lottery becomes a specific lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ceiling provision condition is satisfied. Therefore, the ceiling privilege can be given at a timing not expected by the player, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, in the second time-saving state, a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, the time-saving pattern is won, and the time-saving group A is set as the time-saving type. In this case, the game state is set when the ceiling privilege is granted, and as described above, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.
Specifically, in this 40th control example, it has a second time saving state a and a second time saving state b as types of the second time saving state, and after winning the time saving symbol or after the jackpot game ends, the second A time saving state a is set, and when a ceiling privilege is given, a second time saving state b is set. Even if any of the second time saving state a and the second time saving state b is set, the probability of winning various winnings in the special symbol lottery, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, and the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation to be selected The pattern (fluctuation time), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol fluctuation to be selected, and the normal pattern winning game content (operation content of the electric accessory 640a) executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery are the same. . Therefore, in the state where the second time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which type of the second time saving state is set based on the game contents regarding the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery. .
In addition, in this 40th control example, it is configured so that the player can grasp the type of the set second time saving state by the content of the effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. there is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1111, when the second time saving state b is set by the grant of the ceiling privilege, executable before the second time saving state b that is set is completed It is configured to inform the player of the number of special symbol lotteries. By configuring in this way, even if the same game state is set, whether or not to provide information on the end condition for ending the set game state (whether or not to make the player understand easily) ) can be changed according to the timing for setting the game state, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing for setting the new game state.
Next, the contents of the special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state will be explained. Even when this second time-saving state is set, a game for executing the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is performed by the left-handed game as in the above-described normal state. In this second time-saving state, since the probability state of special symbols and the probability state of normal symbols are the same as the normal state, the jackpot winning probability (1/250) when the special symbol lottery is executed, The time saving symbol winning probability (1/40) is the same as the normal state. However, the time saving type set when the time saving pattern is won is different, and if the time saving pattern is won during the second time saving state a, the time saving type (time saving A group) in which the second time saving state a is set It is configured so that the ratio of setting is 30%, and the ratio of setting the time saving type (time saving B group) in which the first time saving state is set is 70%.

Moreover, when the time saving pattern is won during the second time saving state b, the ratio of setting the second time saving state b is set to 100%. In other words, the second time-saving state (second time-saving state b) set by granting the ceiling privilege is the second time-saving state (second time-saving state a) set by the time-saving pattern winning, etc. Based on the winning of the time saving pattern in the second special symbol lottery executed during the 2 time saving state, the number of times of saving time less than the number of times of saving time remaining in the already set second time saving state (second time saving state a). It is possible to prevent the game period of the second time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, from being shortened due to the setting of the two time saving state (second time saving state a).
By configuring in this way, in the second time saving state a and the second time saving state b in which the game is performed with the same game content, the second time saving state b is more time saving than the second time saving state a. Since the degree of advantage of the privilege given when winning can be increased, the second time-saving state advantageous to the player is established. Therefore, a comparatively advantageous privilege (second time-saving state b) can be given to a player who has been playing for a long time without winning a jackpot. In addition, the second time-saving state provided by the ceiling privilege ends in a short time (without performing the special symbol lottery for the set number of times of time-saving), and the player's willingness to play is reduced. can be suppressed. In addition, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the second time saving state which is more advantageous than the second time saving state set based on the time saving symbol winning.
In addition, in this 40th control example, when the time saving pattern is elected during the second time saving state b, the second time saving state b is set, but not limited to this, the first time saving A time saving type for which a state is set (time saving group B) and a time saving type for which a second time saving state is set (working time saving group A) are selectable, and a time saving type for which the second time saving state is set is selected. If it is, it may be configured to set the second time saving state b in which the number of time saving times greater than the number of time saving times of the second time saving state b given as a ceiling privilege is set, in this case, the second When the time saving pattern is won during the second time saving state a and when the time saving pattern is won during the second time saving state b, the selection ratio between the time saving group A and the time saving group B is made the same, and the time saving group A is selected. It is only necessary to change the number of times of time saving set in each case, and each process executed in each game state can be made common.
Further, in the 40th control example, even if the second time saving state is set based on the fact that the special symbol lottery has won a jackpot, the second time saving state a (ordinary symbol low probability state) is set. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set the second time saving state c in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, in this case, the second time saving state c Even if it is set, the game content in the second time saving state c should be the same as the game content in the second time saving state a or the second time saving state b described above. By configuring in this way, even when the second time saving state c is set, it is difficult for the player playing the game in the second time saving state to grasp the type of the second time saving state. can do.

Furthermore, in this case, any one of the normal state, the second time-saving state a, and the second time-saving state c can be set after the end of the jackpot game, and even if any game state is set. , By configuring the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 so that the same left-handed game is executed, the type of game state set for the player can be changed. After making it difficult to understand, the game state at the time of winning the time saving pattern or the jackpot is the normal state, the second time saving state a, and the second time saving state c, based on the winning. It is good to configure so that the degree of advantage of the privilege to be granted is different, for example, when the time saving pattern is won in the state where the second time saving state c is set, the first time saving state ( It is preferable to configure so that a time-saving state advantageous to the player can be easily set.
That is, the normal state and the second time saving state a are gaming states that can be set even when a game is played in which the jackpot is not won in the first special symbol lottery, whereas the second time saving state c Since the game state can be set only after the end of the jackpot game, the game state is not set unless the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (the game state is harder to set than other game states). In this way, during the period when the game state that is difficult to set is set (during the period when the second time saving state c is set), if the time saving pattern is elected, during the other period (normal state, second By facilitating giving a privilege more advantageous to the player than when the time saving pattern is won during the period when the time saving state a is set, the player can be interested in the winning timing of the time saving pattern. Further, even if the first time-saving state (right-handed game state) is not set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
As described above, if the time-saving design is won in the special design lottery executed during the second time-saving state than when the time-saving design is elected in the special design lottery executed during the normal state, the player It makes it easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to By configuring in this way, the player who is playing the left-handed game can play the game while paying attention to the currently set game state.
Here, the contents of the background mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed and the second time-saving state will be described. As shown in Figure 1112, when the normal state is set, it is configured to be able to set either "disadvantageous mode" or "normal mode" as the background mode, and when the second time saving state is set is configured to be able to set either "normal mode" or "advantageous mode" as the background mode. Then, the background mode transition lottery is executed based on the fact that the second time saving state is terminated and the normal state is set, and when the background mode transition lottery is won, the background mode corresponding to the normal state can be set. ing.

That is, when the "disadvantageous mode" is set as the background mode, the player can identify that the current game state is the normal state, and when the "normal mode" is set, the current game It becomes difficult for the player to identify whether the state is the normal state or the second time saving state, and when the "advantageous mode" is set, the second time saving state is set or the second time saving state is set. It is configured so that the player can identify that the state has ended and the background mode transition lottery has not been won.
By configuring in this way, it is the same game method (left-handed game), and the situation where the normal state or the second time saving state in which the jackpot winning probability and the time saving pattern winning probability are the same is set , it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the currently set game state.
Next, a 1st time saving state is demonstrated. In this first time-saving state, a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and a left-handed game is played when a right-handed game is performed to execute a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). This is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than performing . In the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, as the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, Normal pattern high probability state) and 1st time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern, high frequency open state) set based on time saving pattern winning Set two types of game states. Although it is configured to be possible, the content of the game executed during the right-handed game does not differ greatly regardless of the first time-saving state set at any opportunity, so the description will be made collectively.
Unlike the above-described first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery is constructed so that the determination of the time-saving symbol winning is not executed, and the determination of the small winning winning (probability of winning the small winning 1/25) is executed. It is configured as follows. When a small winning prize is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small winning game is executed to open the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 1105), and the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is specified. It is constructed so as to pass through the area (V gate), and based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), the big winning game is executed after the small winning game is finished. In other words, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the execution right of the big win game can be easily acquired by continuously executing a proper game during the small win game.

By configuring in this way, as a condition for acquiring the right to execute the jackpot game, in the first special symbol lottery, only the jackpot winning (jackpot winning probability 1/250) was the only second special In the symbol lottery, in addition to winning a big win (probability of winning a big win of 1/250), there is also a winning of a small win (probability of winning a small win of 1/25). The second special symbol lottery is a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the special symbol lottery.
In addition, when the first time-saving state is set, even when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, and the jackpot game is played. It is configured such that the first time saving state is set after the end. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery during the first time saving state than in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state or the second time saving state. It is configured so that a privilege can be given. By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the first time saving state is set and the jackpot is won, the game state other than the first time saving state after the jackpot game ends. is set and the player's desire to play is reduced.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, the number of times of special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state or the state where the second time saving state is set (the special symbol lottery that has been lost is continuously executed) reaches a specific number of times (999 times), the second time saving state (time saving number of times 40 times) can be set as a ceiling privilege. In addition, as the second time-saving state that can be set when the time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the left-handed game state, the second time-saving state with less time-saving times than the ceiling privilege and the time-saving number of times than the ceiling privilege It is configured to be able to set a second time saving state in which there are many.
Therefore, depending on the time saving situation (remaining time saving number of times) of the second time saving state set at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, for example, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied when the normal state is set When it is advantageous for the player to give the ceiling privilege, such as when the number of times of the remaining time reduction in the second time reduction state is less than the number of time reductions given as the ceiling privilege, and when the number of times of the remaining time reduction in the second time reduction state is It is possible to create a case where it is disadvantageous for the player to be given a ceiling privilege, such as a case where the number of times of time reduction given as a ceiling privilege is greater than the number of times.

By constructing in this way, the game is played while expecting the ceiling privilege to be given as an advantageous privilege to the player instead of playing the game while simply expecting the ceiling privilege to be given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the result of the special symbol lottery that is executed immediately before the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1113 to 1121, the electrical configuration in the 40th control example will be described. In this 43rd example, for the pachinko machine 10 of the 37th control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirty-seventh control example, regardless of the game state that is set, in the first special symbol lottery, time-saving symbol determination can be executed in addition to the jackpot determination, and in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot determination is performed. In contrast, in the 40th control example, the content of the determination executed at the time of the special symbol lottery according to each special symbol type is the same as the 37th control example described above. Although it is the same, it is different in that the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state is configured so that the time saving symbol determination is not performed.
That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 40th control example, when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing time-saving design determination is executed, time-saving design determination is performed according to the set gaming state. Determines whether or not to execute. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to vary the lottery result of the special pattern lottery according to the set game state, and by providing the player with various lottery results, the player does not get bored early. Games can be provided. In addition, the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the first time-saving state in the state where the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is acquired is set, and the first special symbol lottery executed without acquiring the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) can suppress the end of the first time saving state. Therefore, even though the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state ends without the second special symbol lottery being executed, and the player's desire to play is suppressed. can do.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 37th control example described above, when the time-saving pattern is determined in the special symbol lottery (the time-saving pattern is elected), the left-handed game is advantageous to the player. The second time-saving state (this 40th The second time saving state in the control example) was configured to be settable, whereas in the pachinko machine 10 in this 40th control example, when the time saving pattern is won, the second time saving state and the first time saving state The difference is that either of them can be set. Furthermore, the difference is that the number of times of time saving set when the time saving pattern is won can be changed according to the game state at the time when the time saving pattern is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the contents of the game state set based on the winning of time-saving symbols, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example described above, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, the number of executions of the small winning game, and the number of executions of the game per normal pattern are the time reduction end conditions for ending the set time reduction state. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery are the time saving end conditions. It is different in that it is possible to set the time saving end condition established based on the combined special figure lottery number of times and the time saving end condition established based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. there is
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1113 to 1118. FIG. FIG. 1113(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1113(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 40th control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 37th control example described above (see FIG. 1011(a)). Instead, the first winning random number table 202Aa is replaced with the jackpot type selection table 202bj, the jackpot type selection table 202Ab is replaced with the second winning random number table 202cj, the second winning random number table 202Ac is replaced with the variation pattern selection table 202dj. The variation pattern selection table 202Ad is replaced with the time reduction grant table 202ej, the time reduction grant table 202Ae is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202fj, the small hit type selection table 202Af is replaced with the time reduction type selection table 202ja, and the time reduction type selection table Ah is replaced. is provided, and the point of deleting the type selection table 202jb per normal figure is different. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.
Next, the first winning random number table 202Aa in the 40th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1114(a) and (b). This first per random number table 202Aa is a data table referred to when determining the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, and the first per random number counter value C1 (0 to 65535) used for the determination of the special symbol lottery. A big hit determination value, a small hit determination value, and a time saving design determination value are defined correspondingly. More specifically, according to the type of special symbol lottery (special symbol type), it has a different data table, special symbol 1 random number table 202Aa1 referred to when performing the determination of the first special symbol lottery , and a special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2 that is referred to when determining the second special symbol lottery.

Figure 1114 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202Aa1 in the 40th control example, Figure 1114 (b) is the specification of the special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2 in the 40th control example It is a figure showing the contents. As shown in FIG. 1114(a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202Aa1 is the first hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit against the special symbol 1 random number table 202aj1 (see FIG. 1012(a)). and the range of values of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as time-saving symbol winning are different. Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1114(a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202Aa1 in the 40th control example has a range of random numbers (value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit, "0 to 259 ” 260 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and 1620 random numbers (counter values) of “260 to 1879” are defined as the range of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving symbol winning. is defined in association with the range of On the other hand, the random number determined to be a small hit is not associated.
Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be big hits is 260, so the first special The probability of winning the jackpot in the symbol lottery is about 1/250 (260/65536). Also, out of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving symbol winning is 1620, so the first special symbol The probability of winning the time saving pattern in the lottery is about 1/40 (1620/65536).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1114(b), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2 will be described. FIG. 1014(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2. As shown in FIG. 1014(b), the special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2 in the 40th control example has a range of random numbers (value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit, "0 to 259 ” 260 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association, and the range of 2620 random numbers (counter values) of “260 to 2879” as the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, the random number determined as time-saving symbol winning is not associated.

Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be big hits is 260, so that the lottery for the second special symbol is a big hit. The probability of winning is about 1/250 (260/65536) as in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, out of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits is 2620, so the lottery for the second special symbol. The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/25 (2620/65536).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1114(c), details of the jackpot type selection table 202Ab in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1114(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202Ab. This jackpot type selection table 202Ab is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202bj (see FIG. 1012(c)) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, in order to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. is a data table referenced by As shown in FIG. 1114(c), in the jackpot type selection table 202Ab in the 40th control example, two types of jackpot A43 and jackpot B43 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot A43 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol.
As shown in FIG. 1114 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" with "jackpot A43" associated with it, "Big win B43" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 99". "Jackpot A43" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the first time-saving state is set in which the number of times of time-saving (the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery) is 10000 times after the end of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot B43" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the second time-saving state is set with the number of times of time-saving (the number of executions of the special symbol lottery) of 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in terms of the number of rounds, the "jackpot A43" is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot B43". Also, in terms of the game state after the end of the big win, the "big win A43" is more advantageous to the player than the "big win B43".
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A43" is 10. , Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B43" is 90, the ratio of setting the "jackpot A43" when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 10. %, and the ratio of setting "jackpot B43" is 90%.

Therefore, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal state and the second time-saving state, the most advantageous first time-saving state is entered only at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the first time saving state, the game moves to the first time saving state even if the jackpot type is "jackpot B43". That is, in the first time saving state, by winning a jackpot, an advantageous game state is formed in which the most advantageous first time saving state is set again.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1114 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot A43 ” are defined in association with each other. Since this "jackpot A43" is the same as the "jackpot A43" set as the jackpot type of the first special symbol described above, the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1115(a), the details of the variation pattern selection table 202Ad in the 40th control example will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202Ad, similar to the variation pattern selection table 202dj (see FIG. 1013 (b)) in the above-described thirty-seventh control example, is a variation pattern ( It is a data table referred to for selecting the variable time). FIG. 1115(a) is a block diagram showing the structure of this fluctuation pattern selection table 202Ad.
As shown in FIG. 1115 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202Ad in the 40th control example selects a variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the second time saving state. A normal table 202Ad1 that is referred to for the purpose, and a time saving table 202Ad2 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the first time saving state. ing. First, the details of the normal table 202Ad1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1115(b).

FIG. 1115(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202Ad1 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1115(b), the normal table 202Ad1 contains the special symbol type used for the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , and different variation patterns (variation times) are defined correspondingly. In other words, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of different variation times according to the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". For the range of "150 to 179", "out of" with a variation time of 7 seconds as a variation pattern, and "150 to 179" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "140 to 149" For the range of ", "various types of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined as the fluctuation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198", "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. there is
In addition, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds is in the range of "30 to 189", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds as a variation pattern is "190 to 198". A "special reach" with a variation time of 140 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.
Furthermore, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "time saving symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". A "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.
In other words, in the first special symbol lottery in which the variation pattern (variation time) is determined with reference to the normal table 202Ad1, the person who is out of the lottery result is not out of the lottery result (big hit or time saving pattern) It is configured to make it easier to determine a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than in the case of , and when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined, the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or a shorter time. It is configured to increase the possibility that it is a pattern. By constructing in this way, the special symbol variation in which the lottery results are out of order continues for a long time for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is not performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to an extremely small number of executions.

Also, if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced, that is, if a long-time special symbol variation is executed, the winning (jackpot, time-saving symbol) is won. Since it is possible to increase the expectation of the game, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
Furthermore, in this 40th control example, when the game state in which the left-handed game is executed, that is, when the normal state and the second time-saving state are set, the variation of the special symbol lottery with reference to the normal table 202Ad1 It is configured so that the pattern is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the current game state by the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 40th control example is configured to determine the variation pattern by referring to the same variation pattern table (normal table 202Ad1) in the normal state and the second time saving state, Without being limited to this, it may be configured to refer to a variation pattern table in which some prescribed contents are different from the variation pattern table referred to during the normal state during the second time saving state. In the case, if the variation pattern table referred to during the second time saving state is defined so that the variation pattern of the variation time that cannot be selected in the normal state is selected with a low probability (eg, 1% at the time of winning out) good. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the game state by the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, so that the player is interested in not only the result of the special symbol lottery but also the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. can have.
On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "off (including small hits)" , the variation pattern is defined as "non-win" with a variation time of 10 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.

In addition, in this 40th control example, as in the above-described 37th control example, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state or the second time saving state and the normal symbol win is won, the normal symbol winning game The opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) of the electric accessory 640a that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is set. Therefore, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁
Therefore, in the 40th control example, as a situation where the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state or the second time saving state, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery acquired during the first time saving state (special figure 2 hold), the game state shifts to the normal state or the second time saving state, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the acquired special figure 2 hold. In this situation, in particular, when a small number of times (for example, once) as the time saving end condition of the first time saving state (the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery) is set, a large number of times (for example, 10000 times ) is more likely to occur than when the number of times of time reduction is set. That is, when the first time-saving state is set, the right to execute the jackpot game (jackpot winning (winning probability 1/250), small winning winning (winning probability 1/25)) is acquired more than the first special symbol lottery. Since the second special symbol lottery that is easy to perform is executed, when the first time-saving state with many times of time-saving is set, there is a high possibility that the jackpot game will be executed before the time-saving end condition is satisfied. , When the first time saving state with a small number of time saving times is set, the possibility that the time saving end condition is satisfied before the jackpot game is executed is high, especially the time saving end condition of the first time saving state When a small number of times (for example, 1 time) of time saving (the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery) is set, it is more likely to occur than when a large number of times (for example, 10000 times) is set. Become.
Thus, when a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state (normal state, second time saving state), the lottery By configuring so as to determine the variation pattern in which the same length of variation time is set regardless of the result, the performance period of the specific performance executed during the special symbol variation is set regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. can be unified.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1116, details of the time saving table 202Ad2 described above will be described. FIG. 1116 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202Ad2. As shown in FIG. 1116, in the time saving table 202Ad2, when the special symbol type is "special figure 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the acquired variation type counter For the entire range of CS1 value "0 to 198", "short deviation" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and when the lottery result is "big hit", the acquired variation type counter For the entire range of CS1 value "0 to 198", "short hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as the variation pattern, and when the lottery result is "short time pattern", the acquired variation type For the entire range of the value of the counter CS1 from "0 to 198", a "short impact" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1116, the stipulated contents for the second special symbol are common to the normal table 202Ad1 (see FIG. 1115(b)). That is, when the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "off (including small hits)" , the variation pattern is defined as "non-win" with a variation time of 10 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.
By these defined contents, the variation time of the first special symbol in the first time saving state can be fixed to 5 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 10 seconds. Therefore, as described above in FIG. 1110, by fixing the variation time of the second special symbol variation in the chance zone (first time saving state), the effect period during the first time saving state can be fixed every time. .
In addition, the situation where the first special symbol lottery is executed in the first time saving state is when the first time saving state is set while the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is acquired. can occur. In this case, after the first time-saving state is set, until the player executes the right-handed game and acquires the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation), based on the acquired special figure 1 reservation The first special symbol lottery will be executed. Here, in the 40th control example, when the first time saving state is set, as the time saving end condition, the time saving end condition established based on the total special figure lottery number of times, and the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery ( The time saving end condition established based on the special figure 2 lottery number) is set, and on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. It is configured to display the number of times of remaining short time (the number of times of remaining special figure 2 lottery) until the end condition is satisfied.
And, as shown in FIG. 1109, when the first special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the first time saving state is set, the fluctuation period of the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state ( Standby period) is used to execute a time-saving number of notification performance for informing the player of the time-saving end condition (special figure 2 lottery number) corresponding to the first time-saving state set this time. By configuring in this way, using the period (first special symbol fluctuation period) from when the first time saving state is set until the second special symbol lottery is executed, the first time saving state set this time Since the content can be notified to the player, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Furthermore, immediately after the first time saving state is set, the time saving end condition (the number of remaining special figures 2 lottery) corresponding to the first time saving state is displayed, and the time saving end condition (the number of remaining special figures 2 lottery) is displayed. Compared to the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed in the state, the number of times for indicating the time saving end condition is not subtracted even though the special symbol lottery is executed, and a game difficult for the player to understand is provided. You can prevent it from being done. Also, as shown in FIG. 1116, the time saving table 202Ad2 referred to during the first time saving state has a variation time of 5 seconds as a variation pattern of the first special symbol variation regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery. is configured to select the variation pattern of Therefore, the effect period of the effect (see FIG. 1109) executed during the standby period can be fixed.
In addition, after the first time saving state is set, if the first special symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery, the above-described waiting period (first special symbol fluctuation period in the first time saving state) is not set, the effect screen in the chance zone described above with reference to FIG. In this case, every time the second special symbol lottery is executed, the value of the remaining short time number (number of remaining special figure 2 lotteries) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is subtracted. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.
Also, during the first time saving state, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the chance zone described above in FIG. However, when the game ball is erroneously entered into the first ball entrance 64 when executing the right-handed game again and the first special symbol lottery is executed, the result of the previous second special symbol lottery is displayed. The display screen for is configured to be displayed continuously until the special figure 1 fluctuation is stopped and displayed. That is, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the first special symbol lottery has been executed. By configuring in this way, a new special symbol lottery is executed without subtracting the remaining time reduction number displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, thereby providing a game difficult for the player to understand. can be suppressed.
Also, in this case, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, the previous second special symbol lottery corresponding to the timing when the result of the first special symbol lottery in which the big win is won is stopped is displayed. The display screen for showing the result of the pattern lottery is switched to the display screen for showing the winning of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, in a state in which a new second special symbol lottery is not executed (a state in which the number of remaining time reductions is not subtracted), the jackpot winning is suddenly notified, so that the player is unexpected. It is possible to provide a certain innovative game.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1117, the details of time reduction grant table 202Ae in this 40th example of control are explained. This time saving grant table 202Ae is similar to the time saving grant table 202ej (see FIG. 1014(b)) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state corresponding to the setting opportunity of the time saving state This is a data table referenced to set the end condition of . FIG. 1117 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time reduction provision table 202Ae.
As shown in FIG. 1117, in the time saving grant table 202Ae in the 40th control example, each jackpot type, time saving pattern type and the value of each counter referred to when determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied or not are elected. It is defined in association with each game state at the time. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 1117, in this 40th control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, two counters, the time saving counter 203h and the special figure 2 counter 203Ab, are provided. there is The time saving counter 203h determines whether or not the end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time saving state is set (total number of special symbol lotteries) is satisfied (determines). It is a counter, special figure 2 counter 203Ab is whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed after the time saving state is set (number of special figure 2 lottery) is established. is a counter for determining (judgment).
As shown in FIG. 1117, in this 40th control example, "jackpot A43". Two types of "big hit B43" are provided, and seven types of "time saving pattern A1" to "time saving pattern B3" are provided as time saving pattern types, and the time saving grant table 202Ae includes each jackpot type and each Values of the time saving counter 203h and the special figure 2 counter 203Ab (that is, the first end condition and the second end condition) are defined in association with the time saving pattern type.
As shown in Figure 1117, for "jackpot A43" as the jackpot type, the value "10000" of the time-saving counter 203h and the value "10000" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. It is Therefore, when "jackpot A43" is won, 10000 times of total variation of special symbols is set as the first end condition, and 10000 times of second special symbol variation is set as the second end condition. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game in which the "jackpot A43" is set, the first time saving state is set, so when the "jackpot A43" is set, the time saving end condition (first end condition, second end condition) is not satisfied, the next jackpot game is executed before the first time saving state ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1117, for the "jackpot B43", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state and the second time saving state, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h is defined, and winning When the game state of time is the first time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "10000" and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab "10000" are defined. When a big win is won in a special symbol lottery executed during the normal state and the second time saving state and 'big win B43' is set, the second time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. As the first end condition of the second time saving state, 100 times of the total fluctuation number of special symbols is set. In addition, when the second time saving state is set, it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery even if the right-handed game is performed, so the value for setting the second end condition (special figure 2 counter 203Aa) is not specified.
On the other hand, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state and "big win B43" is set, the first time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. As the first end condition of the first time saving state, 10000 times of total variation of special symbols is set, and as the second condition of termination, 10000 times of second special symbol variation is set.
In other words, when the "jackpot B43" is set during the first time saving state, the time saving state with the same contents as when the "jackpot A43" is set (the first time saving state with the number of time saving times of 10000 times) is set. It will be. By configuring in this way, when the first time saving state is set, even if the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery of any special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) After the end of the jackpot game, the first time-saving state is set to continue until the next jackpot game is executed, so that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being lowered due to the setting of the second time saving state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1117, the contents of the time-saving end condition given when the time-saving design is won in the special symbol lottery will be described in detail. In this 40th control example, when the time saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving pattern A group (time saving A group) in which the second time saving state is set as the time saving pattern type, and the first time saving state are set. It is configured to be able to determine any one of the time saving pattern types included in the time saving pattern B group (time saving B group).

First, the value "1" of the time saving counter 203h is defined for the "time saving pattern A1" among the time saving pattern A group regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, when "time saving pattern A1" is won, the number of fluctuations of special patterns (total number of special drawing lotteries) is set once as the first end condition of the second time saving state. Here, in this 40th control example, even if any game state is set, it is configured to execute the determination of time-saving symbol winning in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern A1" is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, the game state can be shifted from the normal state to the second time saving state, which is advantageous to the player. benefits will be granted. On the other hand, if you win the "time saving pattern A1" in the first special symbol lottery executed in the second time saving state and the first time saving state, the time saving situation at the time of winning (set time saving type, Regardless of the number of remaining time reductions), the second time reduction state of one time reduction is set, so a disadvantageous benefit is given to the player.
In other words, in the 40th control example, even if the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, it is configured so that a disadvantageous privilege can be given to the player, so the game state that is advantageous to the player ( For example, even while the first time-saving state) is set, it is possible to play a game with a constant sense of danger. In addition, as described above, in the 40th control example, only the first special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute the time-saving design determination, and the second special symbol lottery is configured so that the time-saving design determination is not performed.
Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, when the first time-saving state is set in the state of acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, for example, the second time-saving state If the time saving pattern is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during and the first time saving state is set, the first time saving state is set without acquiring the special figure 1 reservation , For example, the first time saving state than the case where the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state and the first time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends Since the first special symbol lottery is easier to be executed during the time saving, the possibility of forcibly ending the first time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning is increased without satisfying the time saving end condition of the first time saving state. Therefore, it can be said that this is the first time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.
On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot game is executed multiple times based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the right-handed game is continuously executed for a long time. , The possibility that the special figure 1 reservation remains is extremely low. Therefore, the possibility that the first time saving state is forcibly ended based on the time saving symbol winning is low, and it can be said that the first time saving state is advantageous to the player. Thus, the longer the game in the first time saving state continues, the more difficult it is to end the first time saving state, which is advantageous for the player who has continued the first time saving state for a long time It is possible to make it easier to give a special privilege.

Next, for the "time saving pattern A2", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state and the second time saving state, the second time saving state is set, and the game state at the time of winning is the first time saving state. , it is defined that the first time saving state is set. More specifically, the value "10" of the time saving counter 203h is defined for the normal state when winning, and the value "20" of the time saving counter 203h is defined for the second time saving state when winning. On the other hand, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the first time saving state when winning.
That is, when the "time saving pattern A2" is elected during the normal state, the second time saving state in which the number of special figure fluctuations (total special figure lottery number) 10 times is defined as the first end condition is set, and the second When "time saving pattern A2" is won during the time saving state, the second time saving state in which the number of special figure fluctuations (total special figure lottery number) 20 times is defined as the first end condition is set, and the first time saving state If you win the "time saving pattern A2", the number of special figure fluctuations (total number of special figure lotteries) is 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of special figure 2 fluctuations is 1 time as the second end condition. A short hour state is set.
Next, for the "time saving pattern A3", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state and the second time saving state, the second time saving state is set, and the game state at the time of winning is the first time saving state. , it is defined that the first time saving state is set. More specifically, when winning, the value "30" of the time saving counter 203h is defined for the normal state, and when winning, the value "50" of the time saving counter 203h is defined for the second time saving state. On the other hand, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "5" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the first time saving state when winning.
That is, when "time saving pattern A3" is elected during the normal state, the second time saving state in which the number of special figure fluctuations (total special figure lottery number) 30 times is defined as the first end condition is set, and the second When "time saving pattern A3" is won during the time saving state, the second time saving state in which the number of special figure fluctuations (total special figure lottery number) 50 times is defined as the first end condition is set, and the first time saving state If you win "time saving pattern A3", the number of special figure fluctuations (total number of special figure lotteries) is 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of special figure 2 fluctuations is 5 times as the second end condition. A short hour state is set.

Next, for the "time saving pattern A4", if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state and the second time saving state, the second time saving state is set, and the game state at the time of winning is the first time saving state. , it is defined that the first time saving state is set. More specifically, the value "70" of the time saving counter 203h is defined for the normal state when winning, and the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h is defined for the second time saving state when winning. On the other hand, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "10" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the first time saving state when winning.
In other words, when the "time saving pattern A4" is elected during the normal state, the second time saving state in which the number of special figure fluctuations (total special figure lottery number) 70 times is defined as the first end condition is set, and the second When "time saving pattern A4" is won during the time saving state, the second time saving state in which the number of special figure fluctuations (total special figure lottery number) 100 times is defined as the first end condition is set, and the first time saving state If you win the "time saving pattern A4", the number of special figure fluctuations (total number of special figure lotteries) is 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of special figure 2 fluctuations is 10 times as the second end condition. A short hour state is set.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 40th control example is the normal state, the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set when the time saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the second time saving state. As group A, there are four types of time saving pattern types (time saving pattern A1 to A4), and depending on the time saving pattern type to be set, time saving end conditions (first end conditions) with different easiness to be established configured to be set. Then, regardless of the time-saving pattern type, it is more difficult to establish a time-saving end condition (first end condition) when the time-saving pattern is won in the second time-saving state than when the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state. ) is configured to be set.
By constructing in this way, when the time saving pattern is won in the second time saving state, the number of times of shortening of working hours larger than the number of times of remaining time saving of the second time saving state already set can be easily newly set.

In addition, when the time-saving design is elected in the first special design lottery executed during the first time-saving state, and the time-saving design group A is set, a time-saving design type other than some time-saving design type (time-saving design A1) (A2 to A4), it is configured to be able to set the first time saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the setting of the second time saving state based on the fact that the first special symbol lottery is executed during the first time saving state. In addition, when some time saving pattern type (time saving pattern A1) is set, even if the end condition of the first time saving state is not satisfied, the second time saving state is newly set and the game Since the game result is disadvantageous to the player, a penalty can be imposed on the player who performs an inappropriate game such as continuing the first special symbol lottery during the first time saving state.
Next, the contents of the time saving pattern B group will be explained. In this 40th control example, there are three types of time-saving design types (time-saving design B1 to time-saving design B3) as the time-saving design B group, and when any of the time-saving design types (time-saving design B1 to B3) is won Even so, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the first time saving state is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1117, depending on the type of time saving pattern to be set, it is defined that the end condition of the first time saving state is different, specifically, "time saving pattern B1", winning When the game state is the normal state, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined. Therefore, when winning the "time saving pattern B1" in the normal state, the number of times of special design fluctuation (total number of special drawing lots) is set to 100 times as the first end condition of the first time saving state, and the first time saving As the second end condition of the state, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (the number of times of special figure 2 variation) is set once. In addition, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "8" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the second time saving state when the game state is won. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B1" is elected in the second time saving state, the number of times of special design fluctuation (total special drawing lottery number) is set to 100 times as the first end condition of the first time saving state. As the second end condition of the 1 hour short state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (number of special figure 2 fluctuations) 8 times is set. Furthermore, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "10" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the first time saving state when the game state is won. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B1" is elected in the first time saving state, the number of times of special pattern fluctuation (total special drawing lottery number) is set to 100 times as the first end condition of the first time saving state. As the second end condition of the one hour short state, the number of variations of the second special symbol (the number of variations of the special figure 2) 10 times is set.
Next, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "5" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the "time saving pattern B2" and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B2" is won in the normal state, the number of times of special pattern fluctuation (total number of special drawing lots) is set to 100 times as the first end condition of the first time saving state, and the first time saving As the second end condition of the state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (number of special figure 2 fluctuations) 5 times is set. In addition, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "15" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the second time saving state when the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B2" is won in the second time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern (total special drawing lottery number) 100 times is set as the first end condition of the first time saving state. As the second end condition of the one hour short state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (number of special figure 2 fluctuations) 15 times is set. Furthermore, the value "100" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "10" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the first time saving state when the game state is won. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B2" is elected in the first time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern (total special drawing lottery number) 100 times is set as the first end condition of the first time saving state. As the second end condition of the one hour short state, the number of variations of the second special symbol (the number of variations of the special figure 2) 10 times is set.
Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100" and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab "8" are defined for the "time saving pattern B3" and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B3" is won in the normal state, the number of times of special pattern fluctuation (total special drawing lottery number) 100 times is set as the first end condition of the first time saving state, and the first time saving As the second end condition of the state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (number of special figure 2 fluctuations) 8 times is set. In addition, the value "1000" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the second time saving state when the game state is won. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B3" is elected in the second time saving state, the number of fluctuations of special patterns (total special drawing lottery number) 1000 times is set as the first end condition of the first time saving state. As the second end condition of the 1 hour short state, 100 times of the number of variations of the second special symbol (the number of variations of the special figure 2) is set. Furthermore, the value "1000" of the time saving counter 203h and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are defined for the first time saving state when the game state is won. Therefore, when "time saving pattern B3" is elected in the first time saving state, the number of times of special pattern fluctuation (total number of special drawing lots) is set to 1000 times as the first end condition of the first time saving state. As the second end condition of the 1 hour short state, 100 times of the number of variations of the second special symbol (the number of variations of the special figure 2) is set.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1118 (a), details of small hit classification selection table 202Af in this 40th example of control are explained. Drawing 1118 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of this small hit classification selection table 202Af. As shown in FIG. 1118 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit A43" as the small hit type for the entire range of "0 to 99". Here, in the small winning game executed when "small winning A43" is won, the game ball can be easily moved to the specific area (V gate) 650e3 simply by continuing to play the right-handed game during execution of the small winning game. The V winning device 650 is controlled to be opened so that the ball can be entered.
Then, when the game ball is entered into the specific area (V gate) 650e3 during the small winning game, the right to execute the big winning game (big winning A43) is acquired, and the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends. It is configured as follows.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1118 (b), the details of time saving classification selection table 202Ah in the 40th example of control are explained. This time reduction type selection table 202Ah is similar to the time reduction type selection table 202ja (see FIG. 1015 (b)) in the above-described 37th control example, when the time reduction design is won in the special design lottery, the type of time reduction design It is a data table referred to for determination. As shown in FIG. 1118 (b), in the time saving type selection table 202Ah, for each of the seven types of time saving design types of "time saving design A1" to "time saving design B3", the value of the first per type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1118 (b), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", time saving "Time reduction pattern A1" is defined as a pattern type, and "50 to 59" is defined in association with "Time reduction pattern A2" as a time reduction pattern type, and in the range of "60 to 64" On the other hand, "time saving pattern A3" is defined in correspondence as the time saving pattern type, and "65 to 69" is defined in association with "time saving pattern A4" as the time saving pattern type, "70 to 94 ”, “Time reduction pattern B1” is defined as a time reduction design type in association with the range of “95 to 98”, “Time reduction design B2” is defined as a time reduction design type in correspondence, A value of "99" is defined in association with "time saving pattern B3" as a time saving pattern type.

On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning is the first time saving state or the second time saving state, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", as the time saving symbol type " Time reduction pattern A1" is defined in association with the range of "30 to 39", and "time reduction pattern A2" is defined in association with the range of "30 to 39" as the type of time reduction pattern, and the range of "40 to 44" is defined in association with time reduction. "Time reduction pattern A3" is defined as a pattern type in association with the range of "45 to 49", "Time reduction pattern A4" is defined in association with the range of "45 to 49", and "50 to 79" On the other hand, "time saving pattern B1" is defined in correspondence as the time saving pattern type, and "80 to 89" is defined in association with "time saving pattern B2" as the time saving pattern type, "90 to 99 ” is defined in association with “time saving pattern B3” as the time saving pattern type.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1113(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 of the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1113(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1113(b), the RAM 203 in the forty-seventh control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. The only difference is that the counter 203Ab is provided in FIG. 2, and the special figure lottery counter 203Aa and the ceiling reached flag 203Ac are newly provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is a counter for determining the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, and is set to 0 when a big winning game is executed. Then, the value of the counter is incremented by 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed (see S702B in FIG. 1128). Based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203Aa, it is determined whether or not the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied (see S704B in FIG. 1128), and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203Aa is "999". (S704B in FIG. 1128: Yes), the ceiling privilege is given.
Special figure 2 counter 203Ab is a counter for determining the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery, and as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state), the second When the second end condition to be established based on the execution number of special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery number) is set, a value corresponding to the number of special figure 2 lotteries until the second end condition is established is set. (See S226A in FIG. 1122). Then, every time the second special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) in which the second end condition is set, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (see S609B in FIG. 1127). Based on the value of this special figure 2 counter 203Ab, the determination of whether or not the time saving end condition (second end condition) is established is executed (see S610B in FIG. 1127), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab is 0 When it is determined that there is (S610B of FIG. 1127: Yes), it is determined that the second end condition is satisfied, and the process of ending the time saving state is executed.

The ceiling reached flag 203Ac is a flag for indicating that the ceiling privilege has been given, and when it is determined in the ceiling update process (see S252B in FIG. 1128) to give the ceiling privilege (see S252B in FIG. 1128). S704B: Yes), set to ON. Then, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is executed (see S251B in FIG. 1122).
In this 40th control example, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the previous jackpot game reaches a predetermined number of times (999 times), the number of time saving times is 40 times regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to give a ceiling privilege in which a two-hour short state is set. And when the time-saving end conditions of the 2nd time-saving state set by the ceiling privilege are satisfied, it comprises so that a normal state may be set. Here, in the tenth control example described above, ceiling benefits with different degrees of advantage can be provided in stages according to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed between the jackpot games, but the present 40th control. In the example, the ceiling privilege is provided only once during the jackpot game. That is, when the time saving end condition of the second time saving state set by the ceiling privilege is satisfied and the normal state is set, the information for giving the ceiling privilege is not updated until the next jackpot game is executed. It is configured as follows.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the granting of a privilege that is excessively advantageous to the player based on the game result other than the conventional game purpose such as aiming for a big win in the special symbol lottery. Also, when playing the pachinko machine 10 in the normal state, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the player is in the normal state in which the ceiling privilege is not given.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1119(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1119(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1119(a), the ROM 222 in the forty-seventh control example has a background mode selection table 222Aa, effect symbol selection The difference is that a table 222Ab is added.

The background mode selection table 222Aa is a data table referred to for determining the background mode type (see FIG. 1106) in the left-handed gaming state, and is a time-saving design in which the second time-saving state is set in the special design lottery. This is a data table to be referred to when winning a prize. Details of the background mode selection table 222Aa will now be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1120 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the background mode selection table 222Aa. As shown in Figure 1120, this background mode selection table 222Aa, the game state when the time saving pattern is elected, the time saving end condition (time saving number of times) of the winning second time saving state, and the prefetch result of the acquired special figure 1 reservation , and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1, various background modes are defined respectively.
Here, in the 40th control example, as the background mode type during the left-handed gaming state, three types of background mode types, "disadvantage mode", "normal mode", and "advantage mode", can be set. When the ``disadvantage mode'' is set, the possibility of the normal state is highest, and when the ``advantage mode'' is set, the possibility of the second time saving state is highest. Therefore, in the background mode selection table 222Aa referred to when the second time saving state is elected in the time saving pattern is set, it is difficult to set the "disadvantage mode", each background so that the "advantageous mode" is likely to be set Mode types are specified.
Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state" and the second time saving state of the number of time saving times "1 time" is set, the first time saving state that can be executed during the second time saving state If you already have the right to execute a special symbol lottery (special drawing 1 reservation), and if the look-ahead result of the special drawing 1 reservation is a win (in the case of "subject per reservation"), you have acquired The background mode type "advantage mode" is defined for the entire range "0 to 99" that the first effect counter 223f1 can take. for the range of "0-79", the background mode type "normal mode", for the range "80-84", the background mode type "disadvantage mode", for the range "85-99"""advantagemode" is defined.

Also, if the game state at the time of winning is "normal state" and the second time saving state of the number of times of time saving "10 times to 29 times" is set, if there is a hold for the target, the acquired second The background mode type is "normal mode" for the value of the 1 effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 49", and the background mode type is "disadvantage mode" and "55 to 99" in the range of "50 to 54". A "favorable mode" is defined for the range of . In the case of no hold per target, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the background mode type is “normal mode”, and the range of “50 to 54” is the background A mode type "disadvantageous mode" and a "advantageous mode" are defined for the range of "55 to 99".
Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state" and the second time saving state with the number of times of time saving "30 times or more" is set, if there is a hold for the target, the acquired first effect If the value of the counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 29", the background mode type is "normal mode". A "advantage mode" is defined for In the case of no hold per target, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, the background mode type is “normal mode”, and the range of “30 to 34” is the background A mode type "disadvantage mode" and a "advantage mode" are defined for the range of "35 to 99".
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning is "second time saving state" and the second time saving state of the number of time saving "20 times" is set, the first that can be executed during the second time saving state If you already have the right to execute a special symbol lottery (special drawing 1 reservation), and if the look-ahead result of the special drawing 1 reservation is a win (in the case of "subject per reservation"), you have acquired The background mode type "advantage mode" is defined for the entire range "0 to 99" that the first effect counter 223f1 can take. for the range of "0 to 9", the background mode type "normal mode", for the range "10 to 14", the background mode type "disadvantage mode", for the range "15 to 99"""advantagemode" is defined.
In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the "second time saving state" and the second time saving state of the number of time saving times "50 times" is set, if there is a hold for the target, the acquired first For the value of the effect counter 223f1 in the range of "0 to 4", the background mode type is "normal mode", and in the range of "5 to 14", the background mode type is "disadvantage mode" and "15 to 99". A "favourable mode" is defined for the range. In the case of no object hit hold, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 4", the background mode type is "normal mode", and the range of "5 to 99" is "advantageous mode is specified.

Furthermore, when the gaming state at the time of winning is the "second time saving state" and the second time saving state of the number of time saving times "100 times" is set, if there is a hold for the target, the acquired first The background mode type "disadvantage mode" is defined for the range of the value of the effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 29", and the "advantage mode" is defined for the range from "30 to 99". In the case of no object per hold, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 4", the background mode type is "normal mode", and the range of "4 to 99" is "advantageous mode is specified.
The production pattern selection table 222Ab is a data table referred to when determining the display mode of the production time reduction pattern for indicating that the time reduction pattern for which the first time reduction state is set has been won, and is referred to when the time reduction pattern is won. and the background mode type at the time of winning the time-saving design, the display mode of each performance design (time-saving design for performance) is defined corresponding to the acquired value of the first performance counter 223f1.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1121, detailed contents of the effect symbol selection table 222Ab will be described. FIG. 1121 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect symbol selection table 222Ab. As shown in FIG. 1121, the effect symbol selection table 222Ab includes the game state at the time of winning, the number of time reductions to be set, the background mode type that is set, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1. Design types determined as symbols are defined respectively.
Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state", and the first time saving state with the number of time saving times "1 time" is set, the current background mode is "disadvantage mode", " In the case of "normal mode", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 69", the effect symbol is "watermelon", and the range of "70 to 99" is the effect symbol ""cherry" is specified and the current background mode is "advantageous mode", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is the entire range of "0 to 99", the effect symbol "watermelon" is stipulated.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state", the first time saving state of "5 times" is set, and the current background mode is "disadvantage mode", "normal mode" , the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the effect symbol is "watermelon", and in the range of "50 to 99", the effect symbol is "cherry". If the current background mode is the "advantageous mode", the effect symbol "watermelon" is defined for the range of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 value of "0 to 99". there is
Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning is "normal state", the first time saving state with the number of times of time saving "8 times" is set, and the current background mode is "disadvantage mode", "normal mode" , the effect symbol “cherry” is specified for the range of the obtained value of the first effect counter 223f1 from “0 to 99”, and the current background mode is the “advantageous mode”. , the effect symbol “watermelon” is defined for the range of the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 from “0 to 99”.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning is "second time saving state" and the first time saving state with the number of times of time saving "8 times" is set, the current background mode is "disadvantage mode", "normal mode ”, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 19”, the effect symbol is “watermelon”, and in the range of “20 to 99”, the effect symbol is “cherry”. is stipulated, and when the current background mode is the "advantageous mode", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the effect symbols "watermelon", "50 ~ 99”, the effect symbol “cherry” is defined.
In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is the "second time saving state" and the first time saving state with the number of time saving times "15 times" is set, the current background mode is "disadvantage mode", "normal mode”, the obtained value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 89”, the effect symbol is “cherry”, and the range of “90 to 99” is the effect symbol “carrot ” is defined, and when the current background mode is the “advantageous mode”, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 69”, the effect symbols “cherry”, “ 70 to 99”, the performance symbol “carrot” is defined.

Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning is the "second time saving state" and the first time saving state with the number of time saving times "100 times" is set, the current background mode is "disadvantage mode", "normal mode”, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 79”, the effect symbol is “cherry”, and the range of “80 to 99” is the effect symbol “carrot ” is specified, and when the current background mode is the “advantageous mode”, the effect symbol “carrot” is specified for the range of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 value of “0 to 99”. It is
As described above, in the 40th control example, even if the first time-saving state of the same time-saving type is set, time-saving design winning with different production patterns according to the set background mode type It is configured to notify the player of what has been done. By configuring in this way, the player can predict the number of time reductions in the first time reduction state by combining the background mode type and the production pattern, and can enhance the production effect.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1122 to 1128, details of various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fortieth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present 40th control example, for various control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the 37th control example described above, the content of the processing executed when the time-saving symbol is won, and the ceiling The difference is that the content of the processing for giving the privilege is changed, and the other processing content is the same. More specifically, for the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example described above, instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1018), the special symbol variation processing (see S104B in FIG. 1023 reference) is replaced with a time saving update process (S224B in FIG. 1127), and a new ceiling update process (S252B in FIG. 1128) is added. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1122, the details of the special symbol variation process (S104B) in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1122 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104B). This special symbol variation process (S104B), like the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 1018) in the thirty-seventh control example described above, changes the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b during the variable display of the special symbol. It is a process to do.

Of the special symbol variation processing (S104B) in this 40th control example, in each of S201 to S207, S211 to S219, S221 to S223, S209B, S210A, S225A, and S226A, the special symbol in the 37th control example described above, respectively The same processes as S201 to S207, S211 to S219, S221 to S223, S209A, S210A, S225A, and S226A of the variation process (see FIG. 1018) are executed.
In addition, in the special symbol variation process (S104B) in the 40th control example, when the process of S219 ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab are set to 0 as a process for starting the jackpot game. A process of resetting is executed (S220B), then the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to OFF (S251B), the process of S221 is executed, and this process ends. By executing the process of S251B, the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is turned off when the big win game is over, so that the special figure lottery counter is set corresponding to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed after the big win game is over. A value of 203Aa can be added.
In addition, in the special symbol variation process (see S104B in FIG. 1122) in the 40th control example, in the process of S218, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S218: No), then , Determine whether or not the lottery result of this time is a time-saving design winning (S225A), and if it is a time-saving design winning (S225A: Yes), set the time-saving end condition corresponding to the type of time-saving design won this time. Counter 203h, it sets to special figure 2 counter 203Ab (S226A), ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S225A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not the time saving symbol winning (S225A: No), the process proceeds to S222.
In addition, in the special symbol variation process (see S104B of FIG. 1122) in the present 40th control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit in the process of S222 (S222: No), or S223 process is finished, the time saving update process is executed (S224B), then the ceiling update process is executed (S252B), and this process is finished. Details of the time saving update process (S224B) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1127, and details of the ceiling update process (S252B) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1123, details of the special symbol determination process (S209B) described above will be described. This special symbol determination process (S209B) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 817) in the twenty-ninth control example, and is similar to the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 817) in the twenty-ninth control example. Second, it is a process for executing a special symbol lottery. Of the special symbol determination processing (S209B) in this 40th control example, each processing of S301 to S305 is the same as each processing of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 817) in the 29th control example. is executed.
In addition, in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1123) in the 40th control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S303 (S303: No), control according to the type of loss is executed (S311B), and the process ends. The details of this out-time processing (S311B) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1124 is a flow chart showing this out-time processing (S311B). In this off time processing (S311B), first, it is determined whether the current is in the ceiling (S2101B). (S2101A), if it is determined that the lottery result is time-saving design winning (S2101A: Yes), the time-saving design type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 , is set as a time-saving design to be displayed on the first design display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and the process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S2101A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not the time saving symbol winning (S2101A: No), or in the processing of S2101B, if it is determined that it is in the ceiling (S2101B: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S2103A). Set (S2104A), set the small winning type corresponding to the value of the small winning type counter C5 as the small winning design to be displayed on the first design display devices 37a and 37b (S2105A), and finish this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2103A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S2103A: No), the processes of S2104A and S2105A are skipped, and the process is finished as it is.

By executing this loss time process (S311B) (see FIG. 1124), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss (other than a big hit), the display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result is preferably set. can be done.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1125, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210A) in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1125 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210A). This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210A) selects the first symbol variation pattern according to the special symbol lottery result, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 818) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. It is a process for
Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1125) in this 40th control example, in each process of S401 to S408, each process of S401 to S408 of the variation pattern selection process in the 29th control example (see FIG. 818) The same processing as is performed. In addition, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 1125) in the 40th control example, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (S401: No), the deviation (small hit, time saving (Including symbol winning) is performed (S421A), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of the out-of-time type determination processing (S421A) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1126 is a flow chart showing this out-time type determination processing (S421A). In the out time type determination process (S421A), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the time saving design winning (S2201A), and if it is determined that the time saving design is winning (S2201A: Yes), time saving The type selection table 202Ah (see FIG. 1118(b)) is referred to determine the type of time saving design (S2202A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S2203A). , If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2203A: Yes), the small hit type is determined with reference to the small hit type selection table 202Af (see FIG. 1118 (a)) (S2204A), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S2203A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a normal loss (complete loss)) (S2203A: No), the processing of S2204A is skipped. and terminate this process.

By executing the type determination process when out (see FIG. 1126), when the lottery result of the special symbol is the time reduction design winning or the small hit, the time reduction design type or the small hit type can be suitably determined. .
Next, with reference to FIG. 1127, the details of the time saving update process (S224B) in the 40th control example will be described. This time saving update process (S224B) is a process that is executed instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023) in the 37th control example, and similarly to the time saving update process (see FIG. 1023), the time saving end condition is determined. It is a process for terminating the time saving state when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied while updating the various counter values for the purpose.
When the time saving update process (S224B) in this 40th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S601B), and it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (is 0) If so (S601B: No), the present process is terminated because the current state is not the time-saving state. Also, in the processing of S601B, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S601B: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S602B), and the remaining time saving indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h A number command is set (S603B), and then it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h after subtraction is 0 (S604B).
In the process of S604B, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S604B: Yes), the time saving end condition (first end condition) based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is satisfied, The game state is set to the normal state (S605B), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab is set to 0 (S606B), the state command indicating the normal state is set (S607B), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604B, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (larger than 0) (S604B: No), then this lottery (special symbol lottery) is a special figure 2 (second 2 special design) is determined (S608B), and if it is determined that it is a special figure 2 (S608: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab (S609B), and the special figure after subtraction It is determined whether the value of the 2 counter 203Ab is 0 (S610B).
In the process of S610B, when it is determined that the special figure 2 counter 203Ab after subtraction is 0 (S610B: Yes), the time saving end established based on the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery (the number of variations of the special figure 2) Since the condition (second end condition) is established, the game state is set to the normal state (S611B), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S612B), and a state command indicating the normal state is set. (S613B), this processing ends. Also, in the process of S608B, if it is determined that this lottery is not special figure 2 (S608B: No), or in the process of S610B, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab is not 0 (greater than 0) If it is determined that (S610B: No), the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is not satisfied, so this process is ended as it is.
In addition, in this 40th control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first end condition established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (total number of special symbol lotteries) and the second special symbol lottery Although it is configured to be able to set the second end condition that is established based on the number of times of execution (special figure 2 fluctuation number), three or more types of time saving end conditions may be configured to be settable, for example, the above As in the pachinko machine 10 in the 37th control example, set a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times a small win is won or the number of times a normal pattern winning game is executed based on a win in a normal symbol lottery. It may be configured as possible.
In addition, in the 40th control example, regardless of the type of time saving state that has been set (second time saving state, first time saving state) and setting opportunity of time saving state (time saving pattern winning, jackpot winning, ceiling privilege), Although it is configured to execute the same content of time saving update processing (see FIG. 1127), it is not limited to this, and the type of time saving state that is set (first time saving state, second time saving state) and time saving Depending on the state setting opportunity (time saving pattern winning, jackpot winning, ceiling privilege), the content of the update process for establishing the time saving end condition may be changed.

Next, the contents of the ceiling update process (S252B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1128 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling update process (S252B). This ceiling update process (S252B) is a process executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost (including a small hit) in the special symbol variation process (S104B in FIG. 1122), and the ceiling privilege is given. A process for updating information on the condition for the ceiling (ceiling grant condition) and a process for granting the ceiling privilege when the ceiling grant condition is satisfied are executed.
When the ceiling update process (S252B) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to ON (S701B), and if it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to ON, That is, if it is determined that the ceiling privilege has already been given (S701B: Yes), the ceiling giving condition cannot be established again, so this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S701B, if it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is not set to ON (S701B: No), 1 is added to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203Aa (S702B), and the special figure lottery counter 203Aa A remaining count command indicating the value of is set (S703B). When the remaining count command is set by the process of S703B, it is output to the sound lamp control device 113 as part of various state commands set by other processes. Then, by receiving the state command including the remaining number command on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, the total number of execution times of the special symbol lottery executed after the previous jackpot game is completed is stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g. is stored (variation frequency information). Based on the information on the number of fluctuations stored here, the number of remaining fluctuations required until the ceiling privilege is given is calculated, and the display area Dm7 on the effect screen during the disadvantage mode (see FIG. 1106(b)). , the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is given is displayed.
In addition, in this 40th control example, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203Aa is added corresponding to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game. After the end of the jackpot game, a value (for example, 999) corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling giving condition is established is set as the value of the special figure lottery counter 203Aa, and each time the special symbol lottery is executed, the special figure lottery counter is set. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the value of 203Aa. By configuring in this way, when the information command indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203Aa is set, and the information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the value included in the received information command corresponds to Since the number of fluctuations is the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling provision condition is satisfied, the value contained in the received information command can be displayed in the display area Dm7 as it is. The process for determining the display mode to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 1128, the description of the ceiling update process (S252B) is continued. In the process of S704B, it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 203Aa added by the process of S702B has reached 999 (S704B). Since it is the case, the game state is set to the second time saving state to give the ceiling privilege (S705B), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "40" (S706B), and the state indicating the second time saving state A command is set (S707B), the ceiling reached flag 203Ac is set to ON (S708B), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S704B, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203Aa is not 999 (S704B: No), since the ceiling grant condition is not satisfied, S705B to S708B for granting the ceiling privilege Skip the process and end this process.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1129 to 1135, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 40th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1129, the details of the command determination process (S3113B) in the 40th control example will be described. This command determination process (S3113B) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 1026) in the thirty-seventh control example described above. This is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from.
Of the command determination processing (see FIG. 1129) in the 40th control example, S3201 to S3211, S3213, and S3218 each correspond to S3201 to S3211 of the command determination processing in the 29th control example (see FIG. 835). , S3213, and S3218 are executed. Further, the processes of S3232A to S3234A in the command determination process (see FIG. 1129) in the 40th control example correspond to the processes in S3232A to S3234A of the command determination process in the thirty-seventh control example (see FIG. 1026). The same processing as is performed.
In addition, in the command determination process (see FIG. 1129) in the fortieth control example, when it is determined in the process of S3211 that a state command has been received (S3211: Yes), the state command process is executed (S3231B). End the process. The details of this state command processing (S3231B) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1130, details of the above-described state command processing (S3231B) will be described. This state command process (S3231B) is, as described above, a process executed instead of the state command process (see FIG. 1027) in the thirty-seventh control example. It is a process for performing control according to the game state notified by.
Of the state command processing (see FIG. 1130) in the 40th control example, the processing of S3401 and S3402 and the processing of S3421A and S3426A to S3428A are performed in the state command 40 processing (see FIG. 1027) in the 37th control example. ), and the same processes as the processes of S3401 and S3402 and the processes of S3421A and S3426A to S3428A are executed.
In the state command processing (see FIG. 1130) in the 40th control example, when it is determined in the processing of S3402 that the state command received this time is a state command notifying the transition to the normal state (S3402: Yes ), clear the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h (S3421A), then determine whether the current game state transition is from the second time saving state to the normal state (S3430A), If it is determined to be the transition from the second time saving state (S3430A: Yes), the background mode transition lottery is executed (S3401B), it is determined whether the background mode transition lottery is won (S3402B), and the lottery is won (S3402B: Yes), the back image command for display indicating the back image corresponding to the winning result (back image corresponding to the back image mode type) is set (S3403B), and the notified flag 223Ab is set to off. (S3404B), and the process ends.
Also, in the processing of S3402B, if it is determined that the background mode transition lottery was not won (S3402B: No), the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S3405B), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no transition from the second time saving state in the process of S3430A (S3430A: No), this process ends without executing the processes of S3401B to S3405B. Also, after executing the processing of S3428A, the standby effect setting processing (S3429) is executed, and this processing ends. This standby effect setting process (S3429) is, if the new special symbol variation is not executed at the timing of transition to the first time saving state, that is, if the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed immediately after the first time saving state transition A process for determining the display mode of is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1131, the details of the standby effect setting process (S3429B) will be described. FIG. 1131 is a flow chart showing this standby effect setting process (S3429B). When this standby effect setting process (S3429B) is executed, first, the standby effect flag 223ja is set to ON (S3451A), and then it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is 0 ( S3452A). In the process of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S3452A: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S3451B), If it is determined that the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is 0 (S3451B: Yes), the conditions for executing a new special symbol lottery are not satisfied, so this time reduction type (time reduction number of times) is specified by referring to the standby effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1017) (S3453A), and execution of the standby effect of the specified effect mode is set (S3454A). Next, the value of the waiting effect counter 223jb is set to 1 (S3455A), the notified flag 223Ab is set to ON (S3452B), and the process ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is not 0 (1 or more) (S3452A: No), the processing of S3453A to S3455A is skipped, and the processing of S3452B is performed. Execute the process and end the process. Also, when it is determined that the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is not 0 in the process of S3451B (S3451B: No), that is, when it is determined that the execution condition for the second special symbol lottery is satisfied, End this process. When there is a ball on hold, it is sufficient to set the standby effect as the effect mode of the variable display effect to be executed in synchronism with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the ball on hold, and the effect mode is set in this process. This is because there is no need to
By executing this standby effect setting process (S3429B), when the first special symbol reserved ball and the second special symbol reserved ball are not present and the transition to the first time saving state occurs, the first time saving state It is possible to execute the chance time standby production of the production mode according to the type (number of times of time saving).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1132, the processing contents of the variation effect setting processing (S4304B) in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1132 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304B). In this variable effect setting process (S4304B), a process for determining a different effect mode is executed according to the set game state.

Specifically, when the variable effect setting process (S4304B) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the secondary game state storage area 223g (S4401), and it is determined whether the game state is the first time saving state. (S4401B), if it is determined that it is not in the first time-saving state (S4401B: No), then it is determined whether the time-saving design has been elected (S4402B), and if it is determined that the time-saving design has been elected (S4402B : Yes), the effect setting process at the time of winning the time-saving design is executed (S4404B), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4402B, if it is determined that the time saving symbol has not been won (S4402B: No), the production mode of the variation production is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4403B), End this process.
Also, in the process of S4401B, if it is determined that it is the first time saving state (S4401B: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is the special figure 1 variation (S4405B), and it is not the special figure 1 variation If it is determined (S4405B: No), the effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on the lottery result of the change and the extracted variation pattern (S4406B), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S4405B, if it is determined to be special figure 1 fluctuation (S4405B: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223Ab is set to ON (S4407B), If it is set to ON (S4407B: Yes), the process proceeds to S4406B and ends. Also, in the process of S4407B, if it is determined that the notified flag 223Ab is not set to ON (S4407B: No), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223h is read (S4408B), and the variation Based on the lottery result and the extracted variation pattern, the effect mode of the variable effect is determined (S4409B), the notified flag 223Ab is set to ON (S4410B), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1133, the processing contents of the performance setting processing (S4404B) at the time of time-saving design winning will be described. FIG. 1133 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting processing (S4404B) at the time of winning the time saving design. In this time-saving symbol winning performance setting process (S4404B), when a game state other than the first time-saving state is set (during left-handed game), a variable performance when the time-saving design is won in the executed special symbol lottery. A process for determining the effect mode of is executed.

Specifically, when the performance setting process (S4404B) at the time of winning the time saving pattern is executed, first, the time saving type won this time is read (S5701B), and it is determined whether the read time saving type is the time saving A group (S5702B) ), when it is determined that it is the time saving group A (S5702B: Yes), the current background mode is read from the background mode storage area (S5703B), and the background mode type is determined by referring to the background mode selection table 222Aa ( S5704B), then it is determined whether the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S5705B).
In the process of S5705B, if it is determined that the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S5705B: Yes), the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to OFF (S5706B), and the background image corresponding to the determined background mode is displayed. A back image command for display is set (S5707B), the determined background mode type is stored in the background mode storage area (S5708B), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S5705B that the non-transition flag 223Ac is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (S5705B: No), the process of S5706B is skipped and the process proceeds to S5707B. do.
On the other hand, in the process of S5702B, when it is determined that it is not the time saving A group (is the time saving B group) (S5702B: No), the time saving pattern determination process for production is executed (S5709B), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1134, the processing contents of the production time saving pattern determination processing (S5709B) will be described. FIG. 1134 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the production time saving pattern determination processing (S5709B). When the production time saving pattern determination process (S5709B) is executed, first, the current background mode is read from the background mode storage area (S5751B), and it is determined whether the advantageous mode is in progress (S5752B). In the processing of S5752B, if it is determined that the mode is in the advantageous mode (S5752B: Yes), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S5755B), and it is determined whether there is a hit pending (S5756B). , When it is determined that there is a hit hold (S5756B: Yes), "carrot" is determined as the effect symbol type (S5757B), and the process proceeds to S5754B. Also, in the process of S5756B, if it is determined that there is no hit hold (S5756B: No), the conditions for determining a specific effect pattern based on the winning information are not met, so the normal effect pattern type is determined. to the processing of S5753B, which is the processing to be performed.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the advantageous mode is set as the production mode, when the time saving pattern of the time saving group B is won, if there is a winning reservation, "carrot" as the production pattern type. can be set. Therefore, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of the hit hold depending on the performance symbol type only during the specific performance mode. In addition, when the time-saving pattern with a small number of times of time-saving is elected as the time-saving B group, that is, when the time-saving state in which it is difficult to select "carrot" is set, "carrot" is displayed, It is possible to make the player predict that there will be a hit.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5752B, when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous mode (S5752B: No), the production design table (production design selection table) 222Ab is referred to, and the production design type is determined (S5753B). A display command for indicating a display mode corresponding to the effect symbol type is set (S5754B), and the process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1135, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S3112B) will be described. FIG. 1135 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering update process (S3112B). This effect update process (S3112B) is different from the effect update process (see FIG. 1034) of the thirty-seventh control example described above, and is a process for determining the effect mode in the state where the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON. The difference is in the added point, but the other control processing contents are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the effect update process (S3112B) is executed, first, the same processes of S4611A to S4617A as the effect update process (see FIG. 1034) of the thirty-seventh control example described above are executed. After that, it is determined whether the non-transition flag 223Ac is set to ON (S4601B), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4601B: Yes), the elapsed time after being set to ON is set to 20 seconds. It is determined whether or not it has reached (S4602B). If it is determined that 20 seconds have elapsed in the process of S4602B (S4602B: Yes), the background mode transition lottery is executed (S4603B), it is determined whether the lottery has been won (S4604B), and if it is determined that the lottery has been won (S4604B: Yes), the back image command for display indicating the back image corresponding to the winning result is set (S4605B), the notified flag 223Ab is set to OFF (S4606B), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601B that the non-transition flag 223Ac is not set to ON (S4601B: No), if it is determined that 20 seconds have not passed in the processing of S4602B (S4602: No), or , in the process of S4604B, if it is determined that the background mode transition lottery has not been won (S4604B: No), the notification completion flag is set without setting the display background image command for showing a new background image. This processing ends without setting to OFF.

By configuring in this way, regardless of the execution of the special symbol lottery, the background mode can be changed based on the elapsed time as well, so the production effect can be enhanced.
<Forty-first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1136 to 1168. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fortieth control example described above, while one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. On the other hand, this 41st control example is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). are different.
By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within a predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.
In addition, in this 41st control example, the upper limit is set for the number of times the first game state is set continuously, and in the state where the first time saving state is set nine times continuously, the jackpot winning (per time saving limit reached) winning), and when a jackpot game is executed, it is different from the above-described 40th control example in that the normal state is forcibly set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the privilege (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set excessively and continuously, and that the player is excessively given prize balls. can. In addition, even if the number of prize balls that can be obtained during one jackpot game is increased, the number of times the first time-saving state is set in succession has an upper limit, so the player receives excessive prize balls. It is possible to suppress that it is given. In addition, since the upper limit is set for the number of times that the first time saving state is set continuously, the first time saving state is set again based on the second special symbol lottery that is mainly performed during the first time saving state. It is possible to increase the probability of executing the big winning game to be played (big winning winning probability, small winning winning probability).

Furthermore, in this 41st control example, the time saving state is ended by executing the first special symbol variation during the special figure variation period in which the second special symbol variation corresponding to the winning per reaching the time saving limit is executed. By setting the normal state, it is possible to reset the state in which the first time saving state is continuously set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game to finish the first time saving state during the special figure fluctuation period for winning per time saving limit reaching.
In addition, in a game machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or a small win) is won in one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol's variable display is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily It is common to have a specification that only one of stopping (interrupting) is executed, but in this 41st control example, depending on the jackpot type (or small hit type), the other special symbol fluctuation display is forced It is configured to determine whether to stop or temporarily stop. In other words, a big hit type for forcibly stopping (discarding) the fluctuation of the other special symbol and a big hitting type for temporarily stopping (suspending) the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are defined.
By configuring in this way, when a game state disadvantageous to the player can be set by stopping and displaying one of the special symbols in a state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the other special symbol can be set. When winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that can cancel the fluctuation of special patterns, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous game state from being set, but winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts other special patterns is possible. In such a case, a situation in which a disadvantageous game state can be set continues, so that when a big win is won, the player can be interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols can be discarded, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved. In this case, both of the special symbol variations are jackpot variations, the information on the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol variation stopped and displayed first is held, and the information on the jackpot corresponding to the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed later. can be said to be a process of discarding part of the acquired game information.

The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example follows the basic specifications (configuration of the ROM 202) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fortieth control example described above, and the pachinko machine in the forty-first control example described above. 10 is a combination of various control processes executed by the main controller 110 in 10. FIG. Therefore, descriptions of parts that overlap with the contents described in each of the control examples described above will be omitted.
<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 in the 41st control example>
First, referring to FIG. 1136, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1136 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1136, the game board 13 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example is the game board 13 (see FIG. 258) possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described ninth control example. The difference is that the first ball entrance 1640 is deleted and a second ball entrance 640 accompanied by an electric accessory 640 is provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1136, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example, when a left-handed game is executed, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 than the second ball entrance 640. , when a right-handed game is executed, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁In addition, the electric accessory 640a is in a state where the first time saving state is set in the same manner as the 40th control example described above, and a state (open state), while the normal state and the second time-saving state are set, the game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed by the left-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player, While the first time-saving state is set, a game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1136, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example described above, in the right area, the starting ball that triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery It differs in that it does not have a mouth. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is not executed by the game ball launched by the right-handed game executed during the first time-saving state.

<Regarding the production content in the 41st control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1137 and FIG. 1138, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example, characteristic effects will be described. In this 41st control example, after the jackpot game executed based on winning (jackpot winning, small winning) in the second special symbol lottery executed in the state where the first time saving state is set is configured to set the first time saving state. That is, the big winning game executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a time saving big winning game in which the first time saving state is set in the same way as the above-described 40th control example.
In addition, in the present 41st control example, as described above, the upper limit is set to the number of times the first time saving state is set continuously, and the first time saving state is set continuously 10 times across the jackpot game. When the conditions are satisfied, it is configured to execute time-saving limit processing for forcibly setting the normal state after the end of the jackpot game.
Therefore, in this 41st control example, the first time saving state continues during the second special symbol fluctuation period for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery that is the trigger for the execution of the jackpot game in which the time saving limit process is executed. It is configured to be able to execute an effect for guiding the player to the game method for avoiding the setting of the game.
Specifically, the first special symbol lottery is executed during the second special symbol lottery period for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery that triggers the execution of the jackpot game in which the time-saving limit process is executed. , Before the second special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the time saving end condition is established based on the execution of the first special symbol lottery, and the normal state is set, thereby the second special being executed. The game state at the time when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed is the normal state, and in order to prevent the time saving limit processing from being executed, the effect (pseudo left It is configured to execute a hitting performance).

By constructing in this way, in order to avoid execution of the time-saving limit process, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game even during the winning fluctuation period of the second special symbol.
First, with reference to FIG. 1137(a), the contents of the variation performance during time saving when the time saving limit is not reached will be described. Drawing 1137 (a) is a figure showing an example of the per variation screen of time saving in non-arrival of time saving limit.
As shown in FIG. 1137 (a), when the hit variation of the second special symbol is executed during the first time saving state, the hit expectation degree of the variation production during the first time saving state of the above-described 40th control example high-speed fluctuation production is executed. In addition, since the state shown in FIG. 1137(a) is a state in which the first special symbol variation is not performed and the second special symbol variation is performed, the third special symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol variation As a symbol, a stop display mode (stop display at "245") is displayed in the display area Dm1, and a dynamic display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) is displayed in the display area Dm2 as a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variation. is displayed in Then, the characters "chance zone" for indicating that the first time-saving state is in progress are displayed in the central part of the main display area Dm, and the display area Dm4a displays "right Hit” is displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 1137(a), a display area Dm4 is formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm, in which a moving image swirling clockwise is displayed. It is constructed so as to guide the player to the most advantageous game method depending on the direction of rotation.
In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Fast change!! Chance to win!!" is displayed to indicate that the effect mode of the variable effect being executed is an effect mode advantageous to the player. . After the display screen shown in FIG. 1137(a) is displayed, the V icon 811f indicating winning is stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm in accordance with the stop display timing of the second special symbol variation, and the game is played. The winner will be notified that they have won the prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1137(b), the contents of the time-saving per variation performance when reaching the time-saving limit will be described. FIG. 1137(b) is a diagram showing an example of a variable screen during time saving when reaching the time saving limit.
As shown in FIG. 1137 (b), when the time-saving limit is reached (the normal state is forcibly set after the jackpot game ends) per variation is executed, the characters "chance zone end" are displayed in the main display area Dm. is displayed, and a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in a depressed state. Then, in the display area Dm4a, "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance mode for prompting the player to play left-handed. In addition, in the display area Dm7 for displaying the number of remaining time reductions, an explosion mode is displayed as a mode that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions.
However, as shown in the display area Dm2, the state shown in FIG. 1137(b) is during the winning variation period of the second special symbol in the first time saving state. In other words, FIG. 1137(b) is a pseudo-left-handed production that prompts the player to play a left-handed game despite being in the first time-saving state. In the display area Dm4, since the vortex is rotating clockwise, it is notified that the most advantageous game method for the player is the right-handed game.
Then, after the display screen shown in FIG. 1137(b) is displayed, when the left-handed game is executed and the first special symbol variation is executed, the effect screen shown in FIG. 1138(a) is displayed. FIG. 1138(a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed when the first special symbol variation is executed during the pseudo left-handed effect.

As shown in FIG. 1138(a), when the first special symbol variation is executed during the pseudo left-handed effect, a character 809 imitating an angel and a character 801 imitating a rabbit are displayed, and the main display area Dm is displayed. A treasure box 810 is displayed in the center. Then, based on the first special symbol lottery being executed, an effect of displaying the contents 810a of the treasure box 810 is executed.
In addition, the display area Dm13 displays the degree of happiness for indicating information until the time saving end condition is satisfied. This happiness level is a value with 100% as the MAX, and when the happiness level of 100% is displayed, it is configured to notify (suggest) to the player that the time saving end condition is satisfied. The initial happiness level (%) when the pseudo-left-handed production is executed is the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during execution, and the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery required until the time saving end condition is satisfied. Basically, it is configured to increase by "10%" every time the special symbol lottery is executed once.
Then, when the degree of happiness reaches 100%, as shown in FIG. 1138(b), "100%" is displayed in the display area Dm13 as a display mode for indicating that the time saving state has ended. Then, the character "15 seconds left until lucky" indicating the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed is displayed in the display area Dm14. Furthermore, a comment "Happiness MAX! Something good will happen in 15 seconds" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Moreover, since the time saving state has ended at this point, a counterclockwise vortex is displayed in the display area Dm4.
In addition, in the production shown in FIG. 1138 (a), the game content (the number of special symbol lotteries) necessary for establishing the time saving end condition and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation are clearly notified to the player. It is configured to let the player predict based on the percentage displayed as the degree of happiness without doing anything, but without being limited to this, the game content necessary to satisfy the time saving end condition (the number of special symbol lottery ) and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation, or either one of them may be configured to be able to be notified to the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the forty-first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1139 to 1143. FIG. The 41st control example differs from the 40th control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed. Otherwise, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1139, the ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the forty-first control example replaces the variation pattern selection table 202Ad with respect to the ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the above-described forty-first control example. The difference is that a selection table 202Bd is provided, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Regarding the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202Bd, as shown in FIGS. The data table to be referenced is changed from the normal table (see FIG. 1115 (b)) to the normal state variation pattern table (see FIG. 1142), and the data table to be referred to when the time saving state is set. 1116) to the time saving state variation pattern table (see FIG. 1143). Here, with reference to FIG. 1142, among the contents defined in the normal state fluctuation pattern table 202Bd1, contents different from the above-described normal table (see FIG. 1115(b)) will be described. FIG. 1142 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal state fluctuation pattern table 202Bb1. As shown in FIG. 1142, in the normal state variation pattern table 202Bd1, as a variation pattern selected when the time-saving design is elected in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is selected when the jackpot is elected. It is different from the above-described normal table (see FIG. 1115(b)) in that it is configured to select the same "super reach" as the variation pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the variation performance based on the same variation pattern in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and in the case of winning the time saving symbol, so that the player can It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting which one has been won. Next, with reference to FIG. 1143, the contents defined in the time saving state variation pattern table 202Bd2 will be described. FIG. 1143 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving state variation pattern table 202Bd2. As shown in FIG. 1143, the time saving state variation pattern table 202Bd2 is longer than the above-described time saving table (see FIG. 1116) when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. The point that the variable time is defined so that the variable time (600 seconds) is selected, and the different length as a relatively short variable time when the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is lost. The difference is that the fluctuation time (1 second, 3 seconds, 10 seconds) of is specified. In addition, if you win a big hit or a small win in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, 5 seconds (selection rate about 25%), 60 seconds (selection rate about 50%), 180 seconds ( 25%) is defined to be selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily vary the number of times of the first special symbol variation which can be executed during the winning variation of the second special symbol lottery reaching the time saving limit.
Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1140 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. For the 40th control example described above, the time reduction limit counter 203Ba, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203Bb, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg, time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg, and time saving limit reaching flag 203Bh are added and differ in points. Other configurations are the same as those of the fortieth control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Time saving limit frequency counter 203Ba is a counter for measuring the number of times the first time saving state is continuously set. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this 41st control example is configured to be able to measure the number of times the first time saving state is continuously set (the number of time saving continuous setting times) except during the jackpot game, and the time saving When the number of continuous settings reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time saving limit is reached), the normal state is forced even if the conditions for setting the first time saving state are satisfied. The setting process (time saving limit process) is configured to be executable, and it is suppressed that the game state (first time saving state) advantageous to the player is excessively continuously set.

In this time saving limit number counter 203Ba, when the first time saving state is set in the normal state or the second time saving state is set, "10" is set as the initial value (Y3005 in FIG. 1165 reference). Then, the value of the counter is subtracted each time the time saving continuous setting number of times is updated (see Y3002 in FIG. 1165), and the counter value after subtraction is referenced in the determination process of whether or not the time saving limit has been reached (Fig. 1165, Y3003). Then, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is cleared to 0 when the time saving limit is reached or when the jackpot type being executed sets a low probability state of normal symbols.
Information indicating the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is set as a state command for output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot ending process.
In addition, in this 41st control example, as described above, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba for measuring the number of time saving continuous setting times is set to the number of time saving continuous setting times until reaching the time saving limit, and the number of time saving continuous setting times is set. is configured to decrement the counter value each time is subtracted, but is not limited to this. Thereafter, every time the time saving continuous setting number is updated, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is configured to be incremented by 1, and the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba after addition indicates that the value has reached the time saving limit. (For example, 10) may be determined, and if the determination result indicates that the time saving limit has been reached, the time saving limit process may be executed.
When configured in this way, for example, when the second special condition (for example, winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, the time reduction limit Even if it is configured to change the establishment condition (reaching condition) of, the time saving limit is reached by simply comparing the changed establishment condition (reaching condition) with the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba. It is possible to determine whether or not

In addition, when the special conditions in the above-mentioned example content are established, the conditions for establishment of the time reduction limit may be changed to make it more difficult to be established than before the change, or changed to be easier to be established than before the change. You can In addition, when the establishment condition (arrival condition) of the time saving limit is changed, it is immediately determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba at the present time satisfies the establishment condition (arrival condition) of the time saving limit. It may be configured, and even if the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit is changed, it is determined whether or not the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is satisfied. It may be configured to run at times. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the normal design is suppressed immediately when the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit is changed, and the high probability state of the normal design is set. Since the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery is guaranteed at least (one time) during the period of stay, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's willingness to play.
In this 41st control example, as the opportunity to set the high probability state of the normal symbol, the opportunity to set the value in the time saving limit number counter 203Ba (the opportunity to set the time saving limit) and the opportunity not to set (not setting the time saving limit Opportunity) and are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger the time saving state was set.
Special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203Bb and special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc are timers for timing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. This special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203Bb and special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc it is decided whether or not the fluctuation time of each special design has ended (see Y701 in Figure 1152, Y901 in Figure 1160).
Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON when the lottery result stops the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that is a jackpot other than the jackpot D (Y903 in FIG. 1160), and the first special It is referenced in the symbol variation running process (see FIG. 1151) and the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 1152, Y708). As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON, so that it is possible to notify that the variation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 1151) (Y2801 in FIG. 1151: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 1151). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is the same process as when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit. is executed and set to on.
Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the fluctuation time of special figure 2, and stops updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.
This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) where the lottery result is a big hit (Y703 in FIG. 1152), and the second special symbol variation is being executed Referred in the process (see Figure 1159) and the second special symbol variation stop process (see Figure 1160). In addition, since it is the same as that of special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd mentioned above about the content referred in this process, the description is abbreviate|omitted. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special symbol variation in-execution process (see FIG. 1159) (Y2901 in FIG. 1159: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 1159).
The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit D or the small hit B is stopped for the second special symbol (see Y905 in FIG. 1160 and Y932 in FIG. 1162). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203Bf is on during variation of the first special symbol, it is set to off (see Y722 in FIG. 1153). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the variation of the big win D or the small win B of the second special symbol stops first.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is set to ON when the first special symbol wins short working hours and fluctuation display is started (Y405 in FIG. 1149). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203Bg is ON during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to OFF (Y632 in FIG. 1161). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the first special symbol is won in a short time and the variation is started.
The time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has won time-saving is being displayed in a variable manner (that is, the time-saving winning variation state). This time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is time saving winning (see Y403 in FIG. 1149). On the other hand, when the first special symbol winning the time saving is stopped and displayed and the time saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 1154), the second special symbol wins the jackpot D or the small win B, and the first special symbol is discarded (see Y726 in FIG. 1153). As a result, the time-saving winning variation state can be set in a period until the time-saving winning of the first special symbol and the end of the variation of the first special symbol.
Time saving limit reaching flag 203Bh is a flag for indicating that the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (normal pattern continuous setting number) reaches the upper limit, and the normal pattern continuous setting number is the upper limit. It is set to ON when reaching the value and forcibly changing the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1144, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1144 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1144, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-first control example is the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fortieth control example (FIG. 1119 ( b), the difference is that a pseudo left-handed flag 223Ba and a happiness level counter 223Bb are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pseudo left-handed flag 223Ba indicates that the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is winning per reaching the time-saving limit, and that the first special symbol lottery is executed during the fluctuation period. A flag for indicating that a pseudo-left-handed performance prompting to end the time-saving state is being executed, and is set to ON when the pseudo-left-handed performance is performed.
The happiness level counter 223Bb is a counter for measuring the value corresponding to the happiness level (%) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the pseudo left-handed effect.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the 41st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the 41st control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1145 to 1165. FIG. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the forty-first control example is the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 104) instead of the special symbol variation processing ( 1145), and the game state update process (see FIG. 1150) is executed instead of the update process (see FIG. 108), and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processes are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As described above, in this 41st control example, the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1), which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol), and the 1st special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1) 2 special symbols (hereinafter referred to as special symbols 2) are greatly different in that they are configured to be able to perform variable display at the same time (in parallel).

First, with reference to FIG. 1145, the contents of the special symbol variation process (Y104) in the 41st control example will be described. FIG. 1145 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (Y104). When the special symbol variation process (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is currently in progress (Y231). When it is determined that it is during the big hit or the small hit (Y231: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON (Y232) . In the process of Y232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is suspended because one special figure is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit. In the process of Y232, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON (Y232: Yes), the first corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (Y233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special symbols in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing exit. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.
On the other hand, in the process of Y231, if it is determined that the current is not a big hit or a small hit (Y231: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203Bb is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 is fluctuating (Y234), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time timer 203Bb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y234: No), the first special symbol variation start process ( Y237) process is executed, and then the process moves to Y238 which executes the variation process regarding special figure 2.
In the process of Y234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203Bb is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation executing process (Y235) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is finished, next, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y236) is performed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.

In the process of Y238-Y241, the same process as Y234-Y237 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of Y238 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (Y238), special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time timer 203Bc is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol variation start process (Y239) is executed, and then this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation executing process (Y240) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
When the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is finished, next, the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) is performed, and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1146, the first special symbol variation start process (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 1145, Y104), will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (Y237).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 1145, Y237), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (Y302), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter It is determined whether (N1) is a value greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (Y304), and a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (Y305). .
The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 4) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 230. store in Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is updated, the first special symbol reservation of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number-of-balls counter 203d.
When the process of Y305 ends, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.
When the process of Y306 is finished, then the first special symbol determination process is executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process (FIG. 1146, Y307) will be described later in detail, but is set based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. It is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the game state being played. Incidentally, the game state update process (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.

When the process of Y307 is finished, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 1148, Y308). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.
When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (Y309). This game state update process (FIG. 1150, Y309) updates the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time reduction counter 203h) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, although the details will be described later. This process is for When the process of Y309 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), whether the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on It is determined (Y311), and if it is determined that it is on (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y311: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on After setting (Y313), this processing is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1147, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination processing (Y307) will be described. FIG. 1147 is a flow chart showing the details of the first special symbol determination process (Y307). This first special symbol determination process (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process (S251 in FIG. 105) of the second control example described above, and in addition to the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, time-saving winning Determination (special figure 1 time saving lottery process) is executed.

When the first special symbol determination process (Y307) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (Y8001), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202Aa. Then (Y8002), when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), and the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2 ), set the jackpot pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8005), store the value indicating the current game state in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and perform this process. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8003: No), the special figure 1 hour-saving lottery process is executed (Y8007), and the process ends.
Here, the special figure 1 time saving lottery process (Y8007) is a process for executing determination of time saving election in this special symbol lottery. That is, in the 41st control example, first, in the first special symbol lottery, the judgment of the jackpot election is executed (Y8003), and when the jackpot is elected, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing the judgment of the time-saving election. And, it is constructed so as to execute the determination of the short-time winning only when the jackpot is not won. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, short-time winning) are not given to the player, a game excessively advantageous to the player is provided. You can prevent it from happening.
Next, referring to FIG. 1148, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 1146, Y237), will be described. FIG. 1148 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y308).
In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 1148, Y308), first, in the first special symbol determination process (FIG. 1147, Y307), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol was determined to be a big hit, that is, the first It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (Y501).

In the process of Y501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y501: Yes), the first Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the first per random number table 202Aa (Y502), and the process proceeds to Y503.
On the other hand, in the process of Y501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y503.
In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 1141 to 1291) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( Y506).
When the process of Y506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (Y508), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1149, the process content of special figure 1 time saving lottery process (Y8007) is demonstrated. Figure 1149 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 time saving lottery processing (Y8007).
When the special figure 1 time-saving lottery process (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning determination result) is acquired based on the first per random number table 202Aa (Y401), and it is determined whether the time-saving winning is done ( Y402), when it is determined that the time reduction is elected (Y402: Yes), the time reduction election fluctuation state flag is set to ON (Y403), and the time reduction A is used as the time reduction design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37. is set (Y404), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag Bg is set to ON (Y405), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving has not been won in the process of Y402 (Y402: No), it is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2). A special symbol is set (Y406), and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1150, the content of the game state update process (Y309) will be described. FIG. 1150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process (Y309).

When the gaming state update process (Y309) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If so (Y601: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (Y602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined to be 0 (Y604: Yes), the time saving game is not given (that is, normal state). Therefore, a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (Y606), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and the present process ends. Also, in the process of Y601, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (Y601: No), the game situation (time saving state), this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1151, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) executed in the special symbol variation process (see Y104 in FIG. 1145) will be described. FIG. 1151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235). In this first special symbol variation executing process (Y235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.
When the first special symbol variation executing process (Y235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON (Y2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON will be briefly described. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a specific hit (big hit A to C or small hit A) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. It is a thing. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON) special symbol variation process (FIG. 1145) is executed, the process of Y231 is in the midst of a jackpot. Therefore, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is not executed. Then, the big winning game (or small winning game) is completed, and it is determined that it is not during the big winning (or during the small winning) in the process of Y231, so that the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process (Y235) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON is a jackpot (or a small hit) game It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 1151, the description continues. In the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON (Y2801: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command (Y2802), special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203Bd is set to OFF (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, in the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2801: No), Y2802 and Y2803 are skipped and Y2804 to process.
In the process of Y2804, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203Bb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1152, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 1145, Y104), will be described. FIG. 1152 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop process (Y236).
In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 1152, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set. (Y702). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON (Y703). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be has been turned on is set.

After finishing the process of Y703, the special figure 1 stop classification command indicating the set stop classification is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (Y706). Then, the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (Y707), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether the time-saving winning of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, when it is determined that the time saving election is set (Y710: Yes), the time saving setting process (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time saving setting process (Y711), the process related to the setting of the time saving state corresponding to the winning time saving type is executed. In addition, this time saving setting process (Y711) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: No), then the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203Bf is on (Y708). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is off in the process of Y708 (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is ON in the process of Y708 (Y708: Yes), when the second special symbol is stopped with a big hit or a small hit Therefore, in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the first special symbol being executed, special figure 1 forced stop processing is executed (Y709). In addition, the details of this special figure 1 forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (Y236), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game A process (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) for stopping the variable display is executed. Also, when the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small win) and the variation is stopped, and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), the variable display is performed. A process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol (Y709) is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big win (or small win) (Y702: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the variable display is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may
Next, with reference to FIG. 1153, special figure 1 forced stop processing (Y709), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 1152, Y236), will be described. FIG. 1153 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 forced stop processing (Y709).
In the special figure 1 forced stop process (Figure 1153, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is on (Y721). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is on (Y721: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is set to OFF (Y722), then the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf Set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating off (Y723). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to be off (Y724), and it is determined whether the time reduction winning variation state flag 203kg is on (Y725). In addition, although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped by the off symbol, and the special figure 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set.
In the process of Y725, when it is determined that the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is ON (that is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is time saving election) (Y725: Yes), the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is set to OFF (Y726), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is not ON (that is, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is not time saving election) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped, and this processing is performed. finish.

In addition, since it is only when the time saving B state is set that it is possible to win the jackpot D that can cancel the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the time saving election is based on the jackpot winning of the second special symbol in the normal state. Although the fluctuation state flag 203kg is configured not to be set to OFF, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that the jackpot D can be won in the normal state. In that case, after the process of Y725, a process of setting the special flag to ON when the jackpot D is won in the normal state is provided, and a game state (for example, a probability variable state (high special symbol) is provided that is more advantageous than the time saving B state. Probability state, high probability state of normal design)) may be configured to be set. By configuring in this way, different game states are set for the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the normal state and the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the time-saving state, and the game is performed. It is possible to improve interest.
On the other hand, in the process of Y721, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is not on (Y721: No), since the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is on, the first special symbol A command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the fluctuation is set (Y727), and this processing is terminated.
Thus, in this 41st control example, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is turned on (timing to stop the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit in the second special symbol) , Even if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has not passed, the fluctuation is forcibly interrupted, or is forcibly stopped as a result of the determination of the deviation. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is only necessary to execute a small win or a big win for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.
In addition, in this 41st control example, the case where the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped by the type of the second special symbol big win or small win, and the case of temporary stop (suspension) are provided. and

As described above, in the forty-first control example, the time saving A and the time saving B can be set as the types of the time saving state. In addition, time saving A has 5 times of time saving (see FIG. 263), and the probability that the second special symbol will win a big hit (winning probability 1/50) or a small win (winning probability 1/50) with 5 times of working time saving has a low probability of about 18%, it is almost impossible to expect a big win or a small win in the second special symbol in the time saving A state. On the other hand, since the time saving B has 10000 times of time saving times (see FIG. 263), when the time saving B is set, the next big hit or small win can be expected with a high probability. Therefore, it can be said that the time saving B state is a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the time saving A state.
Here, in the period until the first special symbol is elected for a short time and the first special symbol indicating that the short time is elected is stopped and displayed (that is, when the short time winning fluctuation state is set), the second special symbol When the time saving B state is set by winning a big win, a small win, or a time saving win, it indicates that the time saving win was made without being able to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a missing symbol. When the first special symbol is stop-displayed, the set time saving B state is discarded and the time saving A state is newly set. That is, in this case, the time saving B state continues only until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that has won the time saving (300 seconds in this 41st control example) elapses, before reaching the time saving limit There is a high possibility that the time saving state will end.
On the other hand, during the period until the first special symbol indicating that the first special symbol has been elected for a short time and the first special symbol indicating that the short time has been won is stopped and displayed (that is, when the short time winning fluctuation state is set), the second special symbol is When a time-saving B state is set by winning a big win, a small win, or a short-time win, a specific big win (jack D) or small win (small win B) is won, and the first special pattern is forced to change. When the game can be stopped as a target missing symbol, the time saving B state can be continued until the time saving limit is reached, and the player can win a large amount of prize balls.
Thus, in this 41st control example, the period until the first special symbol is elected for the time reduction and the first special symbol indicating that the time reduction is elected is stopped and displayed (that is, the time reduction election fluctuation state is set. case), when the time-saving B state is set due to the second special symbol winning a jackpot, a small winning, or a time-saving election, the first special symbol displayed in a variable manner is forcibly removed and stopped (discarded) ), it is possible to provide the player with a new game property such as whether it is possible to continue the advantageous time-saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1154, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (Y711) will be described. FIG. 1154 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (Y711). In this time saving setting process (Y711), the process for setting the time saving state is executed when the time saving is won by the time saving winning determination. When the time saving setting process (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving type is time saving A (Y8351), and when it is determined that it is time saving A (Y8351: Yes), time saving election fluctuation state The flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y8352), the value corresponding to the determined time saving type is set in the time saving counter 203h (Y8353), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (Y8354), and the time saving counter 203h , a state command indicating the time saving type game state (information indicating the time saving state and information indicating the set time saving type) is set (Y8355), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y8351, when it is determined that it is not time saving A (that is, when it is time saving B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. In addition, although not illustrated, in the process of Y8353, after clearing the value of the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the determined time saving classification is newly set. Therefore, when the time saving A state is set based on the time saving election, if the value corresponding to the time saving B (for example, 10000 times) is already set to the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the time saving B Discard and set a value (5 times) corresponding to time saving A.
Thus, in this 41st control example, it is configured so that the time saving state is set at different timings according to the time saving winning opportunity, and when the time saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation When the time-saving state is set at the stop timing and the time-saving state is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is set not at the stop timing of the special symbol variation but at the jackpot game end timing. .
By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state is set can be varied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to get tired of.

Next, with reference to Figure 1155, the second special symbol variation start process (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (Figure 1145, Y104), will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (Y239).
In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 1155, Y239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is ON (Y831). In the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is ON (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is not ON (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Y832), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is Subtract 1 (Y834), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203e after the subtraction (Y835). .
The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 230. store in Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the second special symbol reservation of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number-of-balls counter 203e.

When the process of Y835 ends, next, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.
When the process of Y836 is completed, then the second special symbol determination process is executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process (FIG. 1156, Y837) will be described later in detail, but is set based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is a process for executing a big hit determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the game state being played.
When the process of Y837 is finished, next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 1158, Y838). Although the details will be described later, this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838) includes the second special symbol validity determination result and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.
When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game state update process (FIG. 1150, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed in the first special symbol, and the details are explained with reference to FIG. 1150, so detailed explanation are omitted. When the process of Y839 ends, the special figure 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. The game state update process (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag is ON. (Y841), and if it is determined that it is on (Y841: Yes), this processing is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y841: No), set the special figure 2 standby flag to on (Y842), set the special figure 2 standby command indicating on After (Y843), this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1156, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing (Y837) will be described. FIG. 1156 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing (Y837). In this second special symbol determination process (Y837), unlike the above-described first special symbol determination process (Y307 in FIG. 1147), when it is determined that the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery is out, In addition to determination (special figure 2 time-saving lottery process), determination of small hit winning (small hit lottery process) is executed.
When the second special symbol determination process (Y837) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (Y8101), and the lottery result is determined based on the first winning random number table 202Aa. Acquired (Y8102), when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Y8103: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a big hit (Y8104), and the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2) Based on the value of C2), the jackpot pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (Y8105), the value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8106), and this End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8103: No), a small winning lottery process is executed (Y8108), and this process ends.
Thus, in this 41st control example, when it is not a big hit determination in the big hit lottery of the second special symbol, the small winning lottery is executed, for example, the big hit of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute a time-saving pattern lottery when a big hit is not determined in the lottery.In this case, there are many opportunities to be in a state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player compared to the first special pattern. As a result, the second special symbol is a special symbol type that is more advantageous than the first special symbol. In addition, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long time (600 seconds), and the gaming efficiency of the player who intends to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state deteriorates. It is configured as follows.

Also, when executing the time-saving design lottery in the second special symbol lottery, as a special figure 2 time-saving lottery process, unlike the special figure 1 time-saving lottery process (Y8007 in FIG. 1149), when time-saving winning You may comprise so that the time saving classification to set may be determined by whether the fluctuation|variation state flag 203kg is ON. Specifically, the time saving B state is set only when the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is ON. In other words, the time saving B state is set only when the second special symbol wins the time saving during the variable display of the first special symbol indicating that the time saving is won, and the time saving A state is set in other cases. do it. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction when it is not in the time reduction winning fluctuation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the first special symbol is not changed. It is possible to prevent the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery from becoming excessively advantageous.
More specifically, when the special figure 2 time-saving lottery process is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning determination result) is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202Aa, and it is determined whether the time-saving winning is made.
When it is determined that the time reduction election is made, it is determined whether the time reduction election variation state flag 203kg is ON, and when it is determined that the time reduction election variation state flag 203kg is ON, the first pattern display device 37. Time reduction B is set as a time reduction design of the special design to be displayed in , and this processing is terminated.
When it is determined that the time-saving winning has not been made, based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), set the off design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37, and perform this processing. exit.

When it is determined that the time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is off, the time saving A is set as the special working time symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and this process is finished.
In this way, only when the time-saving election variation state flag kg is on (that is, when the first special symbol is selected for time-saving and the variation display of the first special symbol indicating that the time-saving election is being executed), the second When the special symbol wins the time saving, the time saving B state is set. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction in the absence of the time reduction winning fluctuation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the first special symbol is not changed. It is possible to prevent the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery from becoming excessively advantageous. In addition, within the period until the first special symbol wins the short-time winning and the first special symbol indicating that the short-time winning is stopped and displayed, a new game feature of aiming for the short-time winning of the second special symbol is given to the player. It can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1157, the small winning lottery process (Y8108), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process (FIG. 1156, Y837), will be described. FIG. 1157 is a flow chart showing this small winning lottery process (Y8108).
In the small winning lottery process (FIG. 1157, Y8108), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving election, that is, whether the time-saving election of the second special symbol is set (Y8301 ).

In the process of Y8301, when it is determined that the time-saving election of the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the time-saving election of the second special symbol is not set (Y8301: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table 202Aa (Y8302). , When it is determined that the small hit is won (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired, the small hit type is selected from the small hit type selection table 202Af, and the first symbol display device Set the small winning design of the special design to be displayed (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, when it is determined that the small hit is not won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and the present process ends.
In this way, in the 41st control example, by not overlapping the jackpot winning, the short-time winning, and the small winning in one second special symbol lottery, the player is suppressed from being given a plurality of benefits, It is configured so that the player does not become excessively advantageous.
It should be noted that it is also possible to have a configuration in which the jackpot winning or the small winning and the short-time winning overlap. By adopting a configuration in which the time saving state is set, even if the jackpot of the same kind of jackpot type is won, the game state after the jackpot game is finished can be diversified depending on whether or not the time saving win is won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1158, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 1155, Y239), will be described. FIG. 1158 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y838).
In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 1158, Y838), first, in the second special symbol determination process (FIG. 1156, Y8103), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, the second It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (Y921).
In the process of Y921, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (Y921: Yes), the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1156) described above obtained in the process of Y8105 Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202Ab (Y922), and the process proceeds to Y923.
On the other hand, in the process of Y921, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y923.

In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 1141 to 1291) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. The game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (Y926 ).
When the process of Y926 is completed, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (Y928), and ends this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1159, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) executed in the special symbol variation process (see Y104 in FIG. 1145) will be described. FIG. 1159 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240). In this second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the second special symbol is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.
When the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON (Y2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special figure 2 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON) special symbol variation process (FIG. 1145, Y104) is executed, during the jackpot in the process of Y231 Therefore, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the process of Y231, the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in-execution process (Y240) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON, the jackpot game ends, and the variation time It is configured to be the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that had been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 1159, the description continues. In the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is set to ON (Y2901: Yes), then set the special figure 2 fluctuation resume command (Y2902), special figure 2 provisional The stop flag 203Be is set to OFF (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, in the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2901: No), Y2902 and Y2903 are skipped and Y2904 to process.
In the process of Y2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is updated (Y2905), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1160, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) will be described. FIG. 1160 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241). This second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) is for executing the process of stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and for the above-described first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 1152), When the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, in addition to the configuration of interrupting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time), the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot D ), the difference is that a configuration for forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure 1 is provided, and a process that is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added.
When the second special symbol variation stop process (Y241) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol variation time has ended (Y901). Whether or not the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether or not the counter value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203Bc is 0.

When it is determined that the fluctuation time has ended in the process of Y901 (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (Y902), and it is not a big hit ( (Y902: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (Y912). In the process of Y912, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (Y912: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a time-saving election (Y914). When it is determined that it is not time-saving winning, the second special symbol confirmation command is set (Y908), the variation of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped (Y909), and this processing is terminated.
In the process of Y914, when it is determined that the time saving is won (Y914: Yes), the time saving setting process is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is performed. In addition, since the time saving setting process is the same as the time saving setting process (Y711) executed as one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 1152, Y236), detailed description thereof will be omitted.
In the process of Y912, when it is determined that the small hit is won (Y912: Yes), the special figure 2 small hit stop process is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is performed. The special figure 2 small hit stop processing (Y913) is forcibly stopping (discarding) or temporarily stopping (suspending) the fluctuation display of the first special symbol depending on the small hit type of the won small hit. 1162, which will be detailed later with reference to FIG.
In the process of Y902, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot D (Y903), and when it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No) sets the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd to ON (Y904), sets the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type (Y906), sets the jackpot scenario (Y907), and then , Y908 and Y909.

On the other hand, in the process of Y903, when it is determined that it is a big hit D (Y903: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Be is set to ON (Y905), and the process of Y906 to Y909 is executed.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 41st control example, when the jackpot type is the jackpot D, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Be is set to ON, and in the case of other jackpot types, the special figure By setting the 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd to ON, the case where the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) depending on the jackpot type, and the case where it is temporarily stopped (interrupted) are variable. can be made
As shown in FIG. 1160, the jackpot type determined when the second special symbol hits the jackpot differs depending on the number of variations of the executed second special symbol. , is configured to be easily determined. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol cannot win the jackpot and winning continues (so-called addiction), it becomes easy to determine the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play when he is hooked.
In the process of Y901, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y901: No), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be or the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203Bg is turned on (Y910). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is off in the process of Y910 (Y910: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is ON in the process of Y910 (Y910: Yes), when the first special symbol is stopped with a big hit or time saving election Since it is the case, special figure 2 forced stop processing is executed in order to stop (temporary stop) the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y911). In addition, the details of this special figure 2 forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
Thus, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (Y241), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol during variation display has elapsed (Y901: Yes), the determination result of the second special symbol lottery game A process of stopping the variable display with the indicated symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit and a big hit game with the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins short time and a short time winning fluctuation state is set ( Y910: Yes), a process (Y911) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1161, special figure 2 forced stop processing (Y911), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 1160, Y241), will be described. FIG. 1161 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 forced stop processing (Y911).
In the special figure 2 forced stop processing (Figure 1161, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is on (Y631). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is on (Y631: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is set to off (Y632), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating off (Y633). Then, the stop type of the second special symbol is set to be off (Y634). In addition, although not shown, after the process of Y634, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stopped, and the special figure 2 confirmation command of the second special symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg is not on (Y631: No), since the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is on, the second special symbol A command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the fluctuation is set (Y635), and this process is terminated.
Thus, in this 41st control example, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203Be is turned on (timing to stop the variation that becomes a big hit with the first special symbol), the variation time of the second special symbol has not elapsed Even if it is, it is forcibly interrupted and forcibly stopped. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is sufficient to execute the jackpot game only for one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the 41st control example, when the first special symbol wins the short-time winning, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203Bg of the second special symbol is turned on at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. In this 41st control example, as described above, in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds). If the variation of the second special symbol is continued when the variation display of the symbol is started, the set time-saving winning variation state ends before the stop display of the second special symbol during variation, A problem may occur that the player cannot execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving winning fluctuation state.
Here, when the first special symbol is elected in a short time, at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, by turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203Bg, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in which the short time is won is started. In this case, the variation of the second special symbol during variation is discarded, so that a new lottery of the second special symbol can be received in the time-saving winning variation state, and the player can draw the second special symbol in the time-saving winning variation state. It is possible to prevent the problem that the lottery of symbols cannot be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1162, special figure 2 small hit stop processing (Y913), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 1160, Y241), will be described. Figure 1162 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hit stop processing (Y913).
In the special figure 2 small per stop processing (Fig. 1162, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small per type is a small per B (Y931), and when it is determined that it is a small per B (Y931: Yes) , Set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf to ON (Y932), and set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf (Y933). Then, a small winning scenario corresponding to the selected small winning type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y931, when it is determined that it is not a small hit B (Y931: No), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is set to ON, (Y937), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203Bd is turned on Set the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating (Y938), and perform the process of Y934.
Thus, in this 41st control example, it is possible to discard the first special symbol during variation not only by the specific big win type but also by the specific small win type. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small wins, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 41st control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf is set to ON when the fluctuation of the second special symbol indicating the small winning B winning is stopped, but it is not limited to this. , It may be configured to set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203Bf to ON at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol that has been elected to the small hit B. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which discards a 1st special design at the time of the start of a small winning game, and it is good also as a structure which discards at the time of the completion|finish of a small winning game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1163, the contents of the jackpot control process (Y1004) executed in the main process will be described. FIG. 1163 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot control process (Y1004). This jackpot control process (Y1004) is different only in that the jackpot end process (Y11613) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (S11651) of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 255) of the eighth control example described above, Other processes are the same as those of the eighth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1164, the contents of the jackpot ending process (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 1164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (Y11613). When the jackpot end process is executed, first, the time saving limit update process (Y2701) is executed. The detailed explanation of the time saving limit update process (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for updating (subtracting) the value of the set time saving limit counter 203Ba is executed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1165, details of the time saving limit update process (Y2701), which is one process in the jackpot end process (see Y11613 in FIG. 1164), will be described. FIG. 1165 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process (Y2701). In this time-saving limit update process (Y2701), a process for setting an upper limit that can continuously set a high probability state of normal symbols and updating the remaining number of times for the set upper limit is executed.

In the time saving limit update process (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving limit counter 203Ba is greater than 0 (Y3001). The value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is not a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the probability state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the time saving limit number counter 203Ba Since the value that can set the high probability state of the normal design continuously is not set to the value, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is set to 10 (Y3005), and the time saving flag is set to ON (Y3006). Then, this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, if it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is subtracted by 1 (Y3002), then , It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203Ba after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203Ba after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003: Yes), since the upper limit value for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is reached continuously, the time saving limit reaching flag 203Bh is set. It is set to ON (Y3004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y3003, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203Ba after subtraction is not 0 (Y3003: No), this process is terminated.
In the present embodiment, 10 times are set as the time saving limit number of times, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be determined from a plurality of set numbers such as 20 times and 30 times. .
Returning to FIG. 1164, the description continues. After executing the time saving limit update process (Y2701), it is determined whether the time saving limit reaching flag 203Bh is ON (Y2702), and when it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203Bh is ON (Y2702: Yes) , the information indicating the normal state (low-probability state of normal symbols) as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703), and the state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game is sent. It sets (Y2707) and terminates this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, when it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203Bh is not ON (Y2702: No), the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state set after the jackpot game ends. The information shown is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g, (Y2704), and based on the jackpot type selection table 202Ab, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is set to the counter value of the time reduction counter 203h and the special figure 2 counter 203Ab. (Y2705), set the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content (Y2706), and perform the process of Y2707.
In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 41st control example, the upper limit value for setting the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) continuously after the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the state advantageous to the player continues. By limiting the number of times set by , it is possible to suppress the player's gambling spirit from being excessively obtained.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 41st control example, the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is finished, but it is not limited to this, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is finished. It is good also as a structure made.
<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the forty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1166 to 1168, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example is, as shown in FIGS. The content is different, and the difference is that the process for determining the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the first time saving state is executed. The contents of the control processing related to the differences described above will be described below.

In addition, in this 41st control example, the control processing related to the execution processing of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110 and the execution processing of the special symbol fluctuation are made different from the above-described 40th control example. Therefore, the contents of various commands output from the main controller 110 are also different, and the contents of the control processing on the side of the sound lamp controller 113 executed based on the reception of the various commands output from the main controller 110 are also different. Although different, this difference is similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example such as the 9th control example and the 10th control example described above, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol Since it is the same as the control processing on the side of the sound ramp control device 113 that is executed in the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification), the description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1166, the contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304C in FIG. 1166) will be described. FIG. 1166 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304C). This variable effect setting process (S4304C) is the effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the first time saving state, in contrast to the variable effect setting process (see S4304B in FIG. 1132) in the 40th control example described above. Special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (S4402C) for setting the mode, Special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process ( S4401C) and S4401C) are added and executed, and other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1167, the processing contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting processing (S4401C) will be described. Figure 1167 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing (S4401C). In this special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process (S4401C), the second special symbol for indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state is winning (jackpot, small winning). Various processes are executed for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the variation.
First, when the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting process (S4401C) is executed, the result of this special symbol lottery is read (S4501C), and it is determined whether the read result is winning (jackpot winning, small winning). Then (S4502C), if it is determined that it is not winning (S4502C: No), the effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4503C), and this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502C, if it is determined to be winning (S4502C: Yes), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223h is read (S4504C), and this time winning is per time saving limit reaching It is determined whether it is winning (S4505C), and if it is determined that it is not winning per reaching the time saving limit (S4505C: No), the process proceeds to S4503C described above.
In the process of S4505C, if it is determined that the time saving limit is reached, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery this time is the lottery result in which the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the normal state is set by the limit processing (S4505C: Yes), execution of the pseudo left-handed mode (effect) is determined based on the variation time of the variation and the number of remaining short time (S4506C).
Here, details of the processing executed in S4506C will be described. In this 41st control example, by executing the first special symbol lottery during the variation period of the second special symbol variation indicating winning per reaching the time saving limit, by the time the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the current It is configured to be able to terminate the set first time saving state. Then, during the period (remaining variation time) until the second special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the time saving end condition of the currently set first time saving state can be established by the left-handed game. When it is determined that the time saving end condition of the currently set first time saving state can be established by the left handed game, the player is prompted to play the left handed game Pseudo left It is configured to execute a hitting effect (see FIGS. 1137(b) and 1138).
In the pachinko machine 10 in the present 41st control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 1143, when a hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the corresponding variation of the second special symbol It is configured to be able to determine any variation time from 5 seconds, 60 seconds, and 180 seconds. In other words, if it is at the time of winning other than winning per time reduction limit, it is advantageous for the player to improve the time efficiency of the game by setting a short variation time (for example, 5 seconds), but the time reduction limit At the time of winning per arrival, the longer the per variation time, the easier it is to establish the time saving end condition within that variation time, so the longer variation time (eg, 180 seconds) is the shorter variation time (eg, 5 seconds). It is more advantageous to the player than

In the process of S4506C, at least when the variation time of the variation is 60 seconds or 180 seconds, execution of the pseudo-left-handed effect (mode) is determined. In addition, if the execution of the pseudo-left-handed effect (mode) is not determined, even if the time-saving limit is reached, the pseudo-left-handed effect is not executed, and the time-saving limit is reached. A second special symbol variation performance is executed in the same performance mode, and the player is notified during the big winning game that the current big winning game is a big winning game based on winning per reaching the time reduction limit. In this way, a part of the second special symbol variation effect indicating winning per reaching the time limit (when the pseudo left-handed effect is not executed), and a second special symbol variation effect indicating winning other than winning per reaching the time limit By making it possible to determine the same performance mode in , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time reduction limit processing is executed.
In the processing of S4507C, if it is determined that the pseudo-left-handed mode (effect) has been determined (S4507C: Yes), then a display command corresponding to the pseudo-left-handed mode is set (S4508C), and then the current setting is performed. It is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions until the time reduction end condition of the first time reduction state is satisfied is less than 3 times (S4509C), and if it is determined that it is less than 3 times (S4509C: Yes), Since it is a situation in which it is easy to establish the time-saving end condition based on the first special symbol lottery during the fluctuation period of fluctuation, a display command indicating a production mode with a happiness level of 80% is set (S4510C), and a pseudo left-handed flag is set. 223Ba is set to ON (S4512C), the determined value is set to the happiness degree counter 223Bb (S4513C), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4507C, if it is determined that the pseudo-left-handed mode (effect) has not been determined (S4507C: No), the process of S4503C is executed, and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4509C, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not less than 3 times, that is, during the fluctuation period of the fluctuation, it is determined that it is difficult to establish the time reduction end condition based on the first special symbol lottery. If it does (S4509C: No), it sets a display command indicating a rendering mode with a happiness level of 20% (S4511C), executes the processes of S4512C and S4513C, and terminates this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1168, the processing contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting processing (S4402C) will be described. Figure 1168 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing (S4402C). In this special figure 1 variable production setting process (S4402C), the first time saving state is set, and the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the pseudo left-handed production A process is performed to determine the

When the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (S4402C) is executed, first. It is determined whether the pseudo left-handed flag 223Ba is set to ON (S4601C), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4601C: Yes), the result of this first special symbol lottery is acquired ( S4602C), it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by the first special symbol lottery of this time (S4603C). When it is determined by the processing of S4603C that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S4603C: No), the happiness value corresponding to the number of remaining time saving times is determined (S4604C), and the determined value is added to the happiness counter 223Bb. (S4605C), a display command corresponding to the value of the happiness degree counter 223Bb after addition is set (S4606C), and this processing is terminated. Also, in the process of S4601C, if it is determined that the pseudo left-handed flag 223Ba is not set to ON (S4601C: No), this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4603C, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied (S4603C: Yes), set the display command indicating the production mode corresponding to the degree of happiness 100% (S4607C), special figure 2 during execution A display command for indicating the remaining variation time of the hit variation is set (S4608C), the pseudo left-handed flag 223Ba is set to OFF (S4609C), the value of the happiness counter 223Bb is cleared to 0 (S4610C), End this process.
Conventionally, there is a machine configured to execute a jackpot game based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. Then, as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols) is more likely to be executed than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). There is a configuration that can set a high probability state of normal symbols). In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the time-saving state in this way, it is possible to facilitate execution of the special symbol lottery for the player who expects to execute more jackpot games. Advantageous game state.
Furthermore, a jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, and the probability that the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game is finished (continuation probability of the time saving state) is increased. A pachinko machine 10 designed to increase the probability of continuation of the time saving state has been proposed since the player can be motivated to play a game aimed at setting the time saving state.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 designed to have a high continuation probability of the time-saving state, there is a risk that excessive benefits (prize balls paid out by the jackpot game) are given to the player, so there is a risk that one jackpot game will be given. It is generally known that the number of prize balls that can be given is reduced. In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, the number of prize balls provided to the player in one big winning game is small, but the player is provided with many big winning games by continuing the time-saving state a plurality of times. It was possible to increase the player's willingness to play. However, only a small number of prize balls can be given to a player who ends the time saving state after only one big winning game is executed despite the fact that the time saving state is set. There was a problem that the .
Therefore, as a game specification that does not reduce the number of prize balls that can be awarded in one jackpot game and does not lower the probability of continuing the time saving state, an upper limit is set for the number of times the time saving state is repeatedly set. A pachinko machine 10 having a game specification (so-called time saving limit) has been proposed. By using this time-saving limit, even in the pachinko machine 10 designed to set the time-saving state with high continuation, the number of times the time-saving state is repeatedly set reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times). If the jackpot game is executed in the state (when the time-saving limit number of times is reached), it is possible to forcibly set the normal state after the jackpot game ends, so the probability of continuing the time-saving state is high. Also, it is possible to suppress excessive continuation of the time saving state, and it is possible to suppress excessive awarding of benefits (prize balls) to the player.
However, in the pachinko machine 10 having the time-saving limit described above, an upper limit is provided for the number of jackpot games that can be executed during the period in which the time-saving state continues (advantageous period), and when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the normal state is changed. Since it is set, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play more jackpot games is reduced.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example is configured to be able to end the time saving state while the special symbol variation for winning is being executed in the time saving state. That is, it is a state in which winning has already been determined, and the time saving state can be shifted to the normal state before the big winning game is executed.

Specifically, while the first special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is being executed (during the special figure 1 variation period), to show the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery The second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) can be executed, for example, special figure 2 to indicate that it has been won in the second special symbol lottery that is mainly performed during the time saving state By executing the first special symbol lottery during the variable period, it is possible to establish a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state.
By constructing in this way, even if the winning variation that reaches the time saving limit is executed, the time saving state can be terminated before the winning variation is stopped and displayed. , It is possible to suppress that the normal state is forcibly set by the time saving limit.
Furthermore, in this 41st control example, during the second special symbol variation period for winning per time reduction limit reaching, it is possible to establish the time reduction end condition by executing the first special symbol lottery, or it is difficult If it is determined whether it is in a state and it is possible to establish the time saving end condition, for example, a long time (180 seconds) as the variation time of the second special symbol variation for winning per time saving limit reached is set, or if the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state set at the time the second special symbol variation for winning per time reduction limit is executed is small, while the first time reduction state is being executed ( Even if the time saving limit is reached and the winning fluctuation is occurring), a pseudo-left-handed production is executed to notify the player that the first time-saving state has ended, and to encourage the player to play a left-handed game. It consists of
In this way, instead of urging the player to play the left-handed game in the state that the first time-saving state continues, the left-handed game is played after pseudo-notifying that the first time-saving state has ended. By executing the effect to prompt the player, it is possible to smoothly execute the left-handed game.

In addition, in this 41st control example, as in the 40th control example described above, since it has an end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery as a time saving end condition, the time saving limit reaching per election It is possible to determine in advance whether it is possible to establish the time-saving end condition during the 2 special symbol fluctuation period (whether it is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery until the time-saving end condition is established). However, for example, as a time-saving end condition, the end condition established based on the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, the small hit in the first special symbol lottery, or the end condition established when a specific time-saving symbol is elected may be provided, in this case, it is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery multiple times (for example, twice) during the second special symbol variation period for winning per time reduction limit reached, When it is determined that it is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery multiple times (for example, twice) by determining based only on the variation time of the second special symbol variation for winning per time reduction limit, pseudo left It may be configured to be able to execute the hitting effect.
In this case, the value of the happiness counter 223Bb is set according to the number of times of remaining time reduction, and when the time reduction end condition is satisfied based on the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the pseudo left-handed production, It is preferable to determine an effect mode in which the value of the happiness level counter 223Bb suddenly increases to a value corresponding to 100%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to establish the time-saving end condition at any timing, so that the second special symbol variation for winning per reaching the time-saving limit is executed for the player, based on the time-saving limit In order to avoid the setting of the normal state, a left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery can be performed willingly until the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.
<First modification of the 41st control example>
A first modification of the forty-first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example described above executes the first special symbol lottery during the period in which the second special symbol variation is being executed when the time-saving limit is won by the second special symbol lottery. By establishing the time saving end condition, it was configured to be able to avoid the execution of the time saving limit process. Then, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation at the time of winning per reaching the time reduction limit, any one of variation times (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 180 seconds) having different lengths is selected. By doing so, it is configured to vary the easiness of establishment of the time-saving end condition during the second special symbol variation that is won per time-saving limit reached.
However, in the above-described 41st control example, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is winning (small winning, big winning), the same variation pattern table regardless of the hit type and whether or not the time reduction limit has been reached (Variation pattern table for time saving state 202Bd2) Since it was configured so that the variation pattern (variation time) was determined, it was unnecessarily long variation time even when winning without reaching the time saving limit (for example, 180 seconds) There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced as the game efficiency is lowered by selecting the variation pattern of .

On the other hand, in the first modification of the present 41st control example, the structure of the variation pattern table to be referred to when winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (during the first time saving state) is different from the above-described 41st control example.
The variation pattern table used in the first modification has a different variation pattern when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) and when the small hit is won. Each variation pattern is defined so that is selected.
Specifically, when the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) is a small hit, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" A variation pattern with a variation time of “5 seconds” for the range, a variation time of “60 seconds” for the range of “50 to 149”, and a variation time of “90 seconds” for the range of “150 to 198” is defined. And when the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) is a big hit, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" , a variation pattern of variation time "120 seconds" for variation time "90 seconds" and the range "50 to 149" and variation time "180 seconds" for the range "150 to 198" is defined.
That is, it is configured such that a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when a big win is won than when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, as a winning per reaching the time limit, if you win a win with a low winning probability (jackpot), the special pattern is better than if you win a win with a high winning probability (small win). Since the time-saving end condition can be easily satisfied during the variable period, it is possible to provide the player with the added value of winning a win (jackpot) with a low winning probability.

In addition, in the first modification, as described above, the variation time varies depending on whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a small win (for example, the variation time "5 seconds" at the time of the small win, It is configured to be able to select the variation pattern of the variation time "180 seconds" etc. at the time of winning the jackpot, or to vary the selection ratio of the variation time (eg "90 seconds") that can be selected in any case. , without being limited to this, according to the type of winning, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time that can be commonly selected may be eliminated, or only the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time that can be commonly selected can be selected, It may be configured such that only the selection ratio of each variation pattern is made different. In this case, as in the first modification of the 41st control example, both when a small win is won and when a big win is won, at least one variation pattern (common variation pattern) of selectable variation time is provided. Good to configure. With this configuration, when the common variation pattern is selected, it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the current special symbol lottery until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for showing the lottery result. can do.
Furthermore, when the time saving state (first time saving state) is configured to be continuously settable via a jackpot game, and the number of times of continuous setting of the time saving state (first time saving state) can be determined, the time saving limit It is also possible to comprehend the number of wins (remaining limit number of times) until the process is executed, and to select a different variation pattern based on the value indicated by the remaining limit number of times.
In this case, for example, when the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state is won, the above-described remaining limit number (value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba) is determined, and based on the determination result It is preferable to determine the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation by referring to a different variation pattern table. It is preferable to configure so that the winning variation for a long variation time can be easily executed.
By configuring in this way, in the first time-saving state, when winning a hit without the time-saving limit processing being executed, an unnecessarily long variation time (for example, 180 seconds) is set, It is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from dropping.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example described above, the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) is the same Although it is configured to be selected by referring to the variation pattern table (time saving state variation pattern table 202Bd2), it is not limited to this, for example, the variation pattern table referred to during the first time saving state, It may be configured to be different from the variation pattern table referred to during winning variation per reaching the time saving limit.
In this case, for example, the variation pattern table referred to during the winning variation per time-saving limit arrival in the first time-saving state rather than the variation pattern table referenced during the winning variation per non-time-saving limit arrival in the first time-saving state , As the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, it is preferable to configure so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected.
By configuring in this way, while setting a variation pattern with a short variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation executed during the winning variation per reaching the time reduction limit (during pseudo left-handed production), the time reduction limit is reached. Since it is possible to suppress the setting of a variation pattern with a short variation time in the first time-saving state other than during the winning winning variation, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery multiple times during the first time-saving state. can.
Furthermore, by changing the variation pattern table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol according to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203Ba is "1", that is, the following A first special symbol executed in a state in which a first time-saving state in which a time-saving limit can be won by winning a prize is set is set to be a short-time variation. By configuring in this way, at the time when the winning fluctuation per reach of the time reduction limit of the second special pattern is executed, the first special pattern is in the middle of long fluctuation (for example, 600 seconds fluctuation), pseudo left hitting It is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which a plurality of first special symbol lotteries are difficult to execute during performance.

In addition, without being limited to this, when one special symbol lottery is hit and won, the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol variation being executed may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, when the second special symbol lottery reaches the time reduction limit and wins, the first special symbol variation being executed can be stopped and displayed at the timing when the second special symbol variation is started. can. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game during the pseudo-left-handed performance.
Also, in the above-described 41st control example, in the case of winning per time reduction limit reached in the second special symbol lottery, the number of remaining time reductions for establishing the time reduction end conditions of the currently set first time reduction state, setting Based on the variation time of the second special symbol variation obtained, it is determined whether the time-saving state can be terminated before the second special symbol variation indicating winning per reaching the time-saving limit by the left-handed game is stopped and displayed. , When it is determined that it is possible to terminate the time saving state, it is configured to be able to execute the pseudo left-handed production, but as the execution condition of the pseudo left-handed production, other elements may be used, For example, at the time when the winning variation per time reduction limit is started, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol variation is being performed, and when it is determined that the first special symbol variation is being performed, during execution If the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is determined, and the remaining variation time is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol variation (winning variation per reaching the time saving limit) executed this time, that is, winning per reaching the time saving limit If it is not possible to execute the new first special symbol variation during the variation, it may be configured not to execute the pseudo left-handed effect, or the second special symbol variation executed this time (per reaching the time saving limit Even if the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed is shorter than the winning variation), the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed and the variation time of winning variation per reaching the short time limit. The difference time is calculated, and the execution ratio of the pseudo left-handed effect is different depending on whether the difference time is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or longer (the longer case is the shorter than the short case) It may be configured to make it easier to execute the pseudo left-handed effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time-saving end condition cannot be satisfied even though the pseudo-left-handed performance is executed.
As described above, in the forty-first control example described above, similarly to the ninth control example and the tenth control example described above, while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the second special symbol is variably displayed. can be executed (while the second special symbol is being variably displayed, the first special symbol can be variably displayed). Then, in the same way as the ninth control example described above, in the case of winning (big winning, small winning) in one of the special symbol lotteries, the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is determined according to the type of winning. At the timing of the stop display, the other special symbol variation being executed is interrupted, or the stop display is performed in a display mode that forcibly indicates a failure, but this is not the only option. Regardless of the type of the other special symbol variation, it may be configured to forcibly stop and display in a display mode indicating winning without fail, or to be configured to always interrupt the other special symbol variation. You can
In addition, in the forty-first control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executable in parallel, and regardless of the type of the special symbol lottery executed earlier, the first stop is made. Based on the lottery result of the displayed special symbol, a special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery to be stopped and displayed later (the other special symbol variation being executed at the time when the special symbol variation of 1 is stopped and displayed ) is configured to be variable (stopped display mode), but without being limited to this, the contents of the special symbol lottery to be executed later can be changed based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed earlier. You can make it different. In this case, for example, if one of the special symbol lotteries wins, it is not possible to hit and win the other special symbol lottery until the special symbol variation for indicating that winning is stopped and displayed. It is preferable to configure so as to execute a non-existent lottery (invalid lottery). By constructing in this manner, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel to provide the player with an efficient game, and in any special symbol type. It is possible to suppress the fact that a player wins a prize and is excessively given a privilege in a short period of time.

In addition, as an opportunity (lottery result) to execute an invalid lottery based on the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, the result of the special pattern lottery is any winning (for example, jackpot winning, small winning, time saving pattern winning) Alternatively, the invalid lottery execution opportunity may be established only when a specific win (for example, a big win) is won. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is one of the hits (for example, a big hit, a small hit, a time-saving pattern) during the period during which the variable effect is executed to indicate that the other It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the invalid lottery is being executed as the special symbol lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the suggestive effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the execution trigger of the invalid lottery has been established can be executed using part of the effect mode of the variable effect described above. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the invalid lottery will be executed, and to the player who grasps the execution trigger of the invalid lottery. By grasping the effect mode of the suggestive effect, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting which special symbol variation is the special symbol variation for indicating which winning is the special symbol variation being executed.
In addition, in the special symbol lottery executed as an invalid lottery, a special symbol lottery that does not win all hits (for example, a big hit, a small hit, a time saving pattern) may be configured to be executable, or any hit A special symbol lottery that cannot be won only (for example, a big hit) may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, during the invalid lottery, a special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than a normal special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity of the invalid lottery is not established (a special symbol lottery with fewer winning types that can be won) ) will be executed, but since at least one type of winning lottery will be executed, a special symbol lottery that is useless to the player (no type of winning lottery will be executed) will be executed, and the game will be played. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
Also, in this case, as a time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state that has been set, a winning that can be won in another special symbol lottery that is executed during the winning fluctuation per limit reaching (for example, a small winning It is preferable to configure so that the time-saving end condition that is established based on winning) can be set. By configuring in this way, even if it is difficult to establish the time-saving end condition (time-saving number of times end condition) established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery during the remaining fluctuation period of the winning fluctuation per limit reached , Since it is possible to establish the time-saving end condition based on the winning, the player is motivated to play a game to end the time-saving state until the winning fluctuation per limit is stopped and displayed. can be done.
Furthermore, in the forty-first control example described above, the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, that is, the processing for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied is executed at the end timing of the special symbol variation. , Without being limited to this, it may be configured to be able to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is established at the timing when the special symbol variation is executed, that is, at the start timing of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied or not, so during the period until the winning fluctuation per limit is stopped and displayed In addition, it is possible to make it easier to motivate the game to execute a new special symbol lottery to the end.

<Forty-Second Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1169 to 1180. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-second control example is a time-saving symbol in which the second time-saving state is set as a result of the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-second control example described above. It is different in that the content of the effect executed when winning (time saving pattern A) is different. In addition, it is different in that the contents of the effect executed to suggest the currently set game state during the left-handed game (normal state or during the game in the second time saving state) are different. Other contents are the same, and the description of the same contents is omitted.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example described above, when winning the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set, the process of selecting the background mode type is executed, and the background mode corresponding to the selected background mode type was configured to display images of By configuring in this way, the player can predict that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery was the time-saving symbol winning by the background mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. rice field. However, in the above-described 40th control example, the process of selecting the background mode type is executed each time the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set in the special symbol lottery is won, so the display of the third symbol display device 81 There is a problem that the background mode displayed on the screen is frequently switched, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example, when the identification information (second production pattern) for indicating that the time-saving drawing has been won in the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, the normal production mode (normal mode) to shift to a performance mode (high probability mode) for indicating that the possibility that the second time saving state is set is high, and during the high probability mode, a special pattern lottery draws time saving patterns. It is configured to execute an effect that makes it difficult for the player to grasp that he/she has won the lottery.
That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example, a production mode (normal mode) in which it is easy to notify the player that the winning of the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set, and a production mode (high accuracy) in which it is difficult to notify the player mode) and can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the presence or absence of the time saving pattern winning, so the player predicts whether the current game state is the normal state or the second time saving state. It can provide fun to do.

In addition, in the state where the high probability mode is set as the production mode, even if the special symbol lottery wins the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set, the production mode in the high probability mode that has already been executed is changed. Since there is no switching, even when the time saving pattern for which the second time saving state is set is frequently won, the frequent switching of the presentation mode and the execution of the performance difficult for the player to understand are suppressed. be able to.
Furthermore, in this 42nd control example, as the display mode of the identification information (second production pattern) for indicating that the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set is won, the period in which the high probability mode set continues Display modes with different lengths (watermelon, cherry, carrot) are configured to be selectable, and included in the type of time-saving pattern won and the first special pattern reservation already acquired (special 1 reservation) It is constructed so that the display mode of the second production pattern is selected based on the result of reading the winning information.
In other words, if the time-saving design is won in this special design lottery, the duration of the second time-saving state (time-saving number of times) set based on the time-saving design won in this special design lottery will be executed later. The duration of the second time saving state (number of times of time saving) set based on the result of the special pattern lottery The second production pattern to indicate that the second time saving state is set based on the winning The display mode is configured to be determinable.
Specifically, based on the results of this special symbol lottery and the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 1 hold, the duration of the second time-saving state is calculated, and according to the length of the calculated duration It is configured to display the second production pattern in different types of display modes.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving pattern that was elected this time is a time saving pattern that can set the second time saving state for a short period of time (for example, a time saving pattern A1 to which one time saving is given), the prefetched winning information Since the display mode of the second production pattern can be changed depending on whether there is a winning state including time-saving design winning in the The second performance pattern can be easily displayed in a display mode for suggesting that the second time saving state continues for a long time, and the performance effect can be enhanced as compared with the case of being determined.
Then, when the second production pattern is displayed, the production mode shifts to the high accuracy mode. This high probability mode is configured to continue for a period corresponding to the type of the displayed second effect symbol. For example, when "watermelon" is displayed as the display mode of the second effect symbol, The high probability mode continues until the symbol lottery is executed 10 times, and when "cherry" is displayed, the high probability mode continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times, When "carrot" is displayed, the high probability mode is continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times.
When the duration calculated including the look-ahead result is long, it is easier to set the high accuracy mode with a longer duration than when it is short. By configuring in this way, the second time saving state continues for a longer time when "cherry" or "carrot" is displayed than when "watermelon" is displayed as the display mode of the second production pattern. Since the player can predict what can be done, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance for the player.
In addition, in this 42nd control example, similarly to the 40th control example described above, when the short time pattern (time saving pattern A1) in which the second time saving state for a short period of time (time saving number of times) is set is elected, Regardless of the remaining period of the currently set second time saving state (remaining time saving number of times), the second time saving state of one time saving is set. In other words, even if you win the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state for a long time is set (for example, the time saving pattern A3), you won the time saving pattern A1 in the special pattern lottery to be executed next. In that case, there is a possibility that the second time saving state will end only after the second time saving state is first set and the special symbol lottery is executed twice.

In this case, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example described above, based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed this time (time saving symbol winning), when determining the effect mode for indicating the time saving symbol winning , During the next first special symbol variation after the performance indicating that the time saving symbol A3 has been won (the effect of shifting to the advantageous mode) is executed, as shown in FIG. There is a problem that an effect symbol (content 810Ca with "pinch" attached) is displayed, which reduces the player's desire to play.
On the other hand, in the 42nd control example, not only the result of the special symbol lottery, but also based on the look-ahead result for the acquired special figure 1 hold, the time saving symbol in which the second time saving state is set is elected. Since it is possible to determine the display mode of the second production pattern to indicate, even if the time saving pattern A3 is won, the time saving pattern A1 (time saving once ) contains prize winning information for indicating winning, a display mode ("watermelon") for indicating a high probability mode with a short duration is displayed as the display mode of the second effect pattern. be able to.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the second time saving state disadvantageous to the player is set immediately after the second time saving state advantageous to the player is set, so that the player's willingness to play. can be suppressed.
Further, in the 42nd control example, when the high-precision mode is set, the high-precision mode continues for a predetermined period regardless of the set gaming state, and then the configuration is such that the mode shifts to the normal mode. is doing. Then, after the high probability mode is finished, if the remaining period of the second time saving state is a predetermined period (for example, remaining time saving 10 times or more), the result of the special symbol lottery is out. As a display mode, the pseudo second effect symbol can be stopped and displayed in the same display mode as the second effect symbol. Then, it is configured to shift to the high accuracy mode based on the stop display of the pseudo second effect symbol.

That is, in the present 42nd control example, when the second time saving state is set, since it is configured to set the high-precision mode of the predetermined period, the special executed during the high-precision mode Depending on the lottery result of the pattern lottery, the game state (remaining time reduction number of times) at the end of the high probability mode will be different. For example, if you win the time saving pattern A1 during the high probability mode and the normal state is already set at the end of the high probability mode, or if you win the time saving pattern A3 just before the end of the high probability mode, many at the end of the high probability mode Since there may be a case where the second time saving state with the number of remaining time saving times left is set, when the second time saving state with the remaining time saving count of 10 times or more is set at the time when the high accuracy mode ends, Even when the time-saving pattern is not won (lost) in the special pattern lottery, by stop-displaying the pseudo second performance pattern, it is possible to shift to the high accuracy mode again.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the player's willingness to play is lowered because the high-precision mode is not set for a long time despite the second time-saving state being set. can. In addition, as a display mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery that has not actually won the time-saving symbol, the pseudo second performance symbol, which is the same display mode as the second performance symbol, is stopped and displayed. As a display mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal mode, it is possible to make it easier to stop and display the second performance symbol indicating winning of time saving symbol.
Furthermore, in this 42nd control example, once the high probability mode is set, regardless of the result of the subsequent special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery is executed a fixed number of times (10 times, 20 times, 30 times). Since the high-precision mode is configured to continue until the second production pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode ("carrot") to indicate that the second time saving state continues for a long time Then, the player can be motivated to continue the game at least until the high-probability mode ends.
<Regarding the production contents of the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1169 to FIG. 1171, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example, characteristic effects will be described. In this 42nd control example, as described above, the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the game state (normal state, second time reduction state) in which the left-handed game is executed is the time reduction design winning (time reduction design A1) It is configured so as to be able to execute a notification effect for suggesting to the player whether the game has been completed.

Figure 1169 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed when winning the time saving A1 (time saving number of times) during the normal mode, Figure 1169 (b) is during the high probability mode FIG. 1170(a) is a diagram showing a part of various variable performances executed in the high probability mode, and is elected in the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set in the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode. FIG. 1170(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed in a case, and FIG. 1170(b) is a diagram showing an example of the end screen of the high accuracy mode. And FIG. 1171 is the second time saving state in which the normal mode is set as the production mode, and the display contents displayed when shifting to the high accuracy mode by stopping and displaying the pseudo second production pattern It is the figure which showed an example.
As shown in FIG. 1169(a), the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example is, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example described above, a normal state in which a left-handed game is executed, and a second time-saving state. is constructed such that a display mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed from inside the treasure box 810C as a variable effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery.
FIG. 1169(a) shows a state in which the special symbol won in the time saving A1 (time saving symbol A1) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, and in the display area Dm1, this time The third symbol to indicate that the first special symbol lottery has won the time-saving design of the type (time-saving design A1) in which the second time-saving state is set once, is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "353". It is Furthermore, in the display area Dm9 formed in the sub-display area Ds, as a display mode indicating the acquired special figure 1 suspension, a reserved icon hr1 to a reserved icon hr3 for indicating that there are three special figure 1 reservations is displayed.
The state shown in FIG. 1169 (a) is a state in which the second time saving state of one time saving is won, but among the three special figures 1 pending that have been acquired, the first special symbol lottery to be executed next The look-ahead result of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon hr1) corresponding to the time saving A2 (time saving pattern A2) in which the second time saving state of 20 times is set in the second time saving state Therefore, as a second effect symbol for indicating the result of this special symbol lottery, the contents 810Ca with "cherry" added as the display mode of the contents 810Ca of the treasure chest 810C are displayed, and the secondary display area Ds continues. As a display mode for guiding the player to shift to the high probability mode with a period of 20 times (20 times of the special figure lottery), the characters "entering the high probability mode 20 times" are displayed.

In this way, based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the look-ahead result of the special symbol 1 reservation, the display mode of the second effect symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be determined. Even when time-saving symbols are won consecutively, frequent switching of the performance mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and execution of performance difficult for the player to understand are suppressed. can do.
Although detailed description is omitted, in this 42nd control example, the second time saving state (for example, time saving once) in which the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied is elected in the time saving pattern set, and , Even if the winning information indicating the time-saving design winning is not included in the acquired special figure 1 reservation, the second production design in the display mode with "Cherry" is displayed with a low probability. It consists of By configuring in this way, even if the second time saving state ends immediately, it is possible to set a high accuracy mode for a predetermined period (a period in which the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times). Therefore, even in the normal state, the player can play the game while expecting that the second time saving state is set, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.
Then, after the second production pattern (cherry) shown in FIG. 1169 (a) is stopped and displayed, the result of the next first special pattern lottery (the result of winning the time saving A2 (time saving pattern A2)) is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 1169(b) is displayed.
Specifically, when the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the high-precision mode, and the central upper part of the main display area Dm shows that it is in the high-precision mode. "High accuracy mode" is displayed, and "Last 19 times" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the remaining period of the high accuracy mode in a display area Dm7 formed below the display area Dm4. That is, until the special symbol lottery is executed 19 more times, the high probability mode continues regardless of the special symbol lottery result during that time.

Then, when a time-saving pattern lottery is won in a special pattern lottery executed during the high-accuracy mode, the special pattern lottery in which the time-saving pattern is won is already referred to when determining the display mode of the second effect pattern by the look-ahead process. If it is, the effect result of the target variable effect will be the effect result (the second effect symbol is not stop-displayed) without indicating the time saving symbol winning. Therefore, in FIG. 1169 (b), although the display mode "363" indicating that the time-saving design has been elected (the time-saving design A2) is stopped and displayed in the display area Dm1, in the central part of the main display area Dm As the effect result of the variable effect being executed, the variable effect is being executed in which the content 810Ca with “?” is displayed.
On the other hand, if the time-saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the high-accuracy mode, the pre-reading information about the special symbol lottery that has won the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed when shifting to the high-accuracy mode. 2 If it is not referred to when determining the display mode of the production pattern, that is, the time saving pattern of the time saving A group in the first special pattern lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation that has not been acquired at the time of shifting to the high accuracy mode , the remaining number of times (the number of remaining special pattern lottery times) until the ceiling privilege is given can be displayed instead of stopping and displaying the second performance pattern as the performance result of the variable performance. .
Although detailed description will be given later, in this 42nd control example, once the mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is predetermined regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode. It is configured to continue for the specified period. Therefore, even if a time-saving symbol is won in a special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode and the duration of the second time-saving state is varied, the degree of variation can be made difficult for the player to grasp. In contrast, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the current game state.
Furthermore, when the time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the high-probability mode, information on the conditions (the number of remaining special pattern lotteries) until the ceiling privilege is given can be provided. By configuring in this way, information for predicting whether or not the time-saving pattern is elected during the high probability mode is provided, and when the time-saving design is elected during the high probability mode, the time-saving design is not elected. Since it is possible to provide more advantageous information to the player aiming to give the ceiling privilege than in the case where the ceiling privilege is given, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the 42nd control example, the situation in which the condition until the ceiling privilege is granted is likely to be satisfied, that is, the smaller the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the more during the high probability mode It is configured to facilitate the provision of information for indicating the number of remaining special symbol lotteries when the time-saving symbol is won. That is, when the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is given is small, the number of remaining special symbol lotteries is easily displayed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a large value (for example, 800 times of remaining special symbol lottery) from being displayed as the number of remaining special symbol lotteries and lowering the player's willingness to play. .
Next, when winning the time saving A group in which the second time saving state is set during the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. As a given benefit, an effect is executed in which the remaining number of times up to the ceiling (number of remaining special figure lottery numbers) is displayed. In FIG. 1170(a), since the last big hit game is over, the special symbol is changing for the 969th time, so the display mode for indicating the remaining number of times to the ceiling is displayed in the display area Dm7b as "30 more to the ceiling". Times” is displayed, and “Start countdown to ceiling” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.
Once the display area Dm7b is formed, it is continuously displayed until the ceiling privilege is given or until the jackpot game is executed, and the number of remaining special figure lotteries is subtracted every time the special symbol lottery is executed. will be displayed. In this way, when the time saving pattern is won during the high probability mode, instead of displaying the time saving number of times newly set based on the time saving pattern winning, information different from the time saving number (remaining number of times up to the ceiling) Since it can be given to the player, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, even if the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode is out, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling (number of remaining special symbol lotteries) is displayed with a low probability (for example, 1/100). It should be configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the time-saving pattern is won when the performance of displaying the remaining number of times up to the ceiling (the number of remaining special drawing lotteries) is executed.
Then, when the high-accuracy mode ends, the display mode shown in FIG. 1170(b), that is, the contents 810Ca marked with "END" from the treasure chest 810C is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Go to normal mode."I'm going to shift" is displayed, and it shifts to normal mode. The state shown in FIG. 1170 (b) is a state in which the second time saving state with the number of remaining time saving times of 20 times is set, but the high probability mode is a predetermined period regardless of the presence or absence of the time saving symbol winning Since it is configured to continue only, even if the second time saving state is set, it ends as it is and shifts to the normal mode.

After that, when the resurrection condition is satisfied in the state of shifting to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. An effect of shifting to a mode is executed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1171, since the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction state is 10 times or more and less than 20 times, the pseudo second Contents 810Ca with an icon imitating a "watermelon" as a production pattern are displayed, and "Enter high accuracy mode 10 times" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds.
Thus, in the present 42nd control example, the gaming state that is set when the high-precision mode ends is the second time-saving state, and when the remaining time-saving number of times is 10 times or more, the pseudo By temporarily stopping and displaying the second performance pattern, it is possible to shift to the high accuracy mode again. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that the stay period of high probability mode and the continuation period of a 2nd time saving state deviate greatly.
In addition, when a long-term second time-saving state is set by winning one time-saving pattern, by making it easier to stop and display the second effect pattern in a pseudo manner, it is as if the time-saving pattern was won multiple times. Because it is possible to carry out the production. It is possible to increase the winning probability of the time-saving pattern in appearance, and to increase the willingness of the player to play the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1172, the progress of the game in the 42nd control example and the flow of effects to be executed will be described. Figure 1172 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery), Figure 1172 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number) FIG. 1172(c) is a diagram showing the flow of the second effect symbol set for the result of the special symbol lottery, and FIG. 1172(d) shows the flow of the game state to be set. FIG. 1172(e) is a diagram showing the flow of the number of remaining time reductions, FIG. 1172(f) is a diagram showing the flow of the production mode to be set, and FIG. 1172(g) 1172(h) is a diagram showing the flow of other effects to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 1172 (a) to (h), when the normal state is set, if the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the contents 810Ca with "?" is displayed as (see FIG. 1169(b)). And, when winning the time saving A1 (time saving pattern A1) in which the second time saving state with one time saving time is set in the third special symbol lottery ch3, there are three special figure 1 reservations already acquired. Therefore (see FIG. 1172 (b)), the pre-reading process is executed for the three special figure 1 reservations, and the time saving design A2 is elected to the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the special symbol lottery ch4 to be executed next. After it is determined that the winning information is included, the contents 810Ca imitating a cherry (see FIG. 1169(a)) are displayed as the second effect symbol, and the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the game state is changed to the normal state. With the transition to the second time-saving state from, production mode is normal mode to high-precision mode (20 times) (see Figure 1172 (f)), "20" is set to the value of the high-probability counter 223Ca (See FIG. 1172(g)). In addition, in the special symbol lottery ch3, only the second time saving state of one time saving time is set, so at that time, one time is set as the remaining time saving number (see FIG. 1172(e)).
Next, the special symbol lottery ch4 is executed during the second time saving state, and the time saving symbol A2 is won, but the performance mode is the high probability mode, and the look-ahead result indicating the lottery result is the lottery of the special symbol lottery ch3. Since it is referred to when determining the display mode of the second effect symbol indicating the result, the content 810Ca with "?" is displayed as the second effect symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the time-saving symbol has been won in the special symbol lottery ch4.
In fact, since the special symbol lottery ch4 wins the time saving pattern A2 in which the second time saving state of 20 times is set, the number of remaining time saving times is updated to 20 times. After that, the deviation variation is executed a plurality of times, and even if the time-saving pattern A2 is won in the special pattern lottery ch7 executed when the value of the high probability medium counter 223Ca is decremented to 2, the production mode is in the high probability mode. Therefore, the content 810Ca with "?" is displayed as the second effect symbol. And, as a given privilege by having won the time saving pattern during the second time saving state, the countdown display to the ceiling is executed (see FIG. 1172(h)).
Furthermore, when the value of the high-probability medium counter 223Ca is subtracted to 0, the effect mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the normal mode, and when the special symbol lottery ch11 is executed, the recovery condition is set to the high-probability mode. Established, and although the performance result of the special symbol lottery ch11 is lost, the content 810Ca with a pseudo "watermelon" is displayed as the second performance symbol, and the high accuracy mode is set again.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device in the forty-second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1173 to 1175, the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 42nd control example will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example has a display mode of the identification information for indicating that the time-saving symbol has been won (display of the second effect symbol mode) and the type of background image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the game state (normal state, second time saving state) in which the left-handed game is executed (production mode Type) is different, and information on the conditions (number of remaining special design lotteries) until the ceiling privilege is granted when the time-saving design is won is displayed. Various electrical configurations related to the differences discussed above are different.
Specifically, the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-second control example is the ROM 222 (Fig. 1119(a)), in that a second effect symbol selection table 222Ca and a ceiling information selection table 222Cb are added. Also, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-second control example is the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fortieth control example (FIG. 1119(b) )), a high-probability medium counter 223Ca, an effect mode storage area 223Cb, a ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, and a ceiling information flag 223Cd are added, a background mode storage area 223Aa, and a non-transition flag 223Ac is deleted. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 1173(a), the electrical configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1173(a) is a diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 42nd control example. As shown in FIG. 1173(a), the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-second control example is the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fortieth control example. The difference is that a second effect symbol selection table 222Ca and a ceiling information selection table 222Cb are added to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 1119(a)). Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The second production pattern selection table 222Ca is the second production pattern selection table 222Ca in the second production pattern selection when winning the production pattern in which the second production pattern is set in the first special pattern lottery executed in the state where the normal mode is set as the production mode. is a data table that is referenced to select the display mode (display mode of the second production pattern) for indicating that the time saving pattern is set, and the type of the winning time saving pattern (time saving pattern A1 to A different display mode is defined based on the time saving pattern A4) and the information on the result of the prefetching process (preliminary discrimination process) for the reserved storage of the first special pattern (special figure 1 reserved).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 42nd control example has the normal mode and the high A certain mode can be set, and in the normal mode, the second performance pattern for showing that the time saving pattern for setting the second time saving state is won can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the second production pattern is stop-displayed, the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the high-precision mode, and the high-probability mode continues for a period corresponding to the display mode of the second production pattern stopped and displayed. It consists of
During the high probability mode, the second performance pattern is not stop-displayed even when the time-saving pattern for which the second time-saving state is set is won in the first special pattern lottery. In other words, during the high probability mode, it is configured to make it more difficult for the player to grasp that the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set is won than during the normal mode. By configuring in this way, while making it possible to shift to the high probability mode with the opportunity of winning the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set, the type of the set production mode and the actual game state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the correspondence between (normal state, second time saving state), and to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state.
In addition, as the display mode of the second production pattern, the duration of the high probability mode is relatively short (for 10 special symbol lotteries), the first display mode (watermelon icon), and the duration of the high probability mode is the first display mode ( A second display mode (cherry icon) longer than the watermelon icon) and a third display mode (carrot icon) in which the duration of the high accuracy mode is longer than the second display mode (cherry icon) can be set. Therefore, it is easier to set the third display mode in a situation where the second time saving state is likely to continue for a long time than in a situation where it is difficult to continue. However, the first display mode is configured to be easier to set than the situation that is easy to continue. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in the display mode of the second time saving pattern that is stopped and displayed, so that the production effect can be enhanced.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1174, detailed contents defined in the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca will be described. FIG. 1174 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca. As shown in FIG. 1174, the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca includes the time reduction type (time reduction symbol type) won in the first special symbol lottery of this time, the prefetch result for the acquired special figure 1 reservation, and the acquired Each selected symbol (display mode of the second effect symbol) is defined in advance in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter 223f1.

Specifically, the time-saving type (time-saving design type) won in the first special design lottery this time is "time-saving A1 (time-saving design A1)", and as a result of the look-ahead, the look-ahead number is "1, 2", When the time reduction is "1" and the jackpot winning is "yes", the selected symbol "watermelon" is defined for the range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 69", and "70 to 99” range, the selected symbol “carrot” is defined, and in the case of “no” jackpot winning, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is “selected symbol” for the range of “0 to 69” "none" is specified, and the selected symbol "watermelon" is specified for the range of "70 to 99".
In addition, the time-saving type (time-saving design type) won in the first special design lottery this time is "time-saving design A1 (time-saving design A1)". In the case of "2 to 15" and the jackpot winning "yes", the selected symbol "cherry" is defined for the entire range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 "0 to 99", and the jackpot winning " In the case of "none", "watermelon" is specified for the entire range of "0 to 99" for the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1.
In addition, the time-saving type (time-saving design type) won in the first special design lottery this time is "time-saving design A1 (time-saving design A1)". In the case of "16 to 29" and the jackpot winning "Yes", the selected symbol "carrot" is defined for the entire range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 "0 to 99", and the jackpot winning " In the case of "none", "cherry" is defined for the entire range of "0 to 99" for the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1.
In addition, the time-saving type (time-saving design type) won in the first special design lottery this time is "time-saving design A1 (time-saving design A1)". In the case of "30 or more", the selected symbol "carrot" is defined for the entire range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 "0 to 99" regardless of the result of the look-ahead related to whether or not the jackpot has been won. there is

Among the information defined in the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca, the information regarding the look-ahead result will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present 42nd control example, when the time-saving pattern (time-saving A group) in which the second time-saving state is set in the first special design lottery executed in the state where the normal mode is set is won, that Pre-reading processing for the special figure 1 reservation already acquired at the time (whether the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a contains information corresponding to winning before the special symbol lottery is executed determining process), and as a result of the look-ahead process, the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the presence or absence of the time-saving design winning, and the time-saving design type set when the time-saving design is won are determined at least in advance. configured as possible.
And, based on the result of the look-ahead processing, it is configured to be able to calculate the number of times of shortening of working hours given by the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation that has already been acquired at the present time. For example, even if the time saving pattern won this time is the time saving pattern A1 in which the second time saving state with one time saving time is set, it has already been acquired at that point. If the result of the first special symbol lottery executed first is the time saving pattern A2 as a result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 reservation, the time saving pattern A2 in the first special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state If you win and the second time-saving state with 20 times of time-saving is set, and the remaining special figure 1 reservations (for example, 2 pieces) are all off, all the special figure 1 reservations to be read ahead are digested. At the time point, the second time saving state set by the time saving pattern A2 is set (remaining time saving number of times 18 times).
In this case, based on the special pattern lottery that won the time saving pattern A1, the second time saving state of 20 times of time saving is set in the next fluctuation, so the number of time saving given by the look-ahead result is 21 times. . Therefore, as a result of the look-ahead process (look-ahead result), the number of look-ahead is "3", the time saving is "21 times", and the presence or absence of a big hit is "none".
In addition, in this 42nd control example, as a look-ahead result, the number of times of reduced working hours (the number of times that indicates the maximum value of the calculated number of reduced working hours based on the special symbol variation in which the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed) is calculated. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and is configured to be able to calculate the game state and the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently acquired special figure 1 reservation is completed, The display mode of the second effect symbol may be selectable based on the calculation result. Even in such a configuration, the display mode of the second effect symbol can be selected with the same technical concept as in the forty-second control example.

Next, the ceiling information selection table 222Cb is a data table referred to when the first condition for reporting ceiling information is satisfied. When the second condition for is satisfied, the player is notified of information (the number of remaining special symbol lotteries) regarding the establishment of the condition (ceiling grant condition) for granting the ceiling privilege.
The contents of the ceiling information selection table 222Cb will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1175 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ceiling information selection table 222Cb. As shown in FIG. 1175, in the ceiling information selection table 222Cb, the specified information indicating whether or not to notify the ceiling information (whether or not to satisfy the second condition) is set to the value of the remaining ceiling number counter 223Cc. The time saving pattern type is defined in advance in correspondence with the acquired value of the first production counter 223f1.
Specifically, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is "999 to 400" and the winning time reduction type is "time reduction A1 (time reduction pattern A1)", the acquired value of the first production counter 223f1 is stipulated for “0”, ceiling information notification “yes”, ceiling information notification “no” for the range of “1 to 99”, and the winning time reduction type is “time reduction A2 (time reduction pattern A2) ”, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is “0 to 5” for the ceiling information notification “yes”, and for the range “6 to 99” the ceiling information notification “ None” is defined, and the winning time reduction type is “time reduction A3 (time reduction pattern A3), time reduction A4 (time reduction pattern A4)”, the value of the acquired first production counter 223f1 is “0 to 9”. , and the range of "10 to 99" specifies that the ceiling information is "absent".
In addition, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is "399 to 100" and the winning time reduction type is "time reduction A1 (time reduction pattern A1)", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is "0 ~ 9” range, ceiling information notification “Yes” is defined, ceiling information notification “No” is defined for the range “10 to 99”, and the winning time reduction type is “time reduction A2 (time reduction pattern A2 )”, if the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 19”, the ceiling information is “yes”, and the ceiling information is in the range of “20 to 99”. "No" is defined, and if the winning time reduction type is "time reduction A3 (time reduction design A3), time reduction A4 (time reduction design A4)", the value of the acquired first production counter 223f1 is "0 to 29 , the ceiling information notification is ``yes'', and the ceiling information notification is ``no'' for the range of ``30 to 99''.

Furthermore, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is “99 to 40” and the winning time reduction type is “time reduction A1 (time reduction pattern A1)”, the value of the acquired first production counter 223f1 is “0 ~ 39” range, ceiling information notification “Yes”, ceiling information notification “No” for the range “40 to 99”, and the winning time reduction type is “time reduction A2 (time reduction pattern A2 )”, if the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the ceiling information is “yes”, and the ceiling information is in the range of “50 to 99”. "No" is defined, and if the winning time reduction type is "time reduction A3 (time reduction pattern A3), time reduction A4 (time reduction design A4)", the value of the acquired first production counter 223f1 is "0 to 79 ”, the ceiling information reporting “yes” is defined, and the ceiling information reporting “no” is defined for the range “80 to 99”.
In addition, when the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is "39 to 1" and the winning time reduction type is "time reduction A1 (time reduction pattern A1)", the value of the acquired first production counter 223f1 is "0 ~ 89” range, ceiling information notification “Yes” is defined, ceiling information notification “No” is defined for the range “90 to 99”, and the winning time reduction type is “time reduction A2 (time reduction pattern A2 )”, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is “yes” for the range of “0 to 98”, and “no” for the range of “99”. If the winning time reduction type is "time reduction A3 (time reduction design A3), time reduction A4 (time reduction design A4)", the value of the acquired first production counter 223f1 is the entire range of "0 to 99" , ceiling information reporting "yes" is defined.
As described above, in the 42nd control example, the second time saving state is set in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode. , the ceiling information selection table 222Cb is referred to and whether or not the second condition is satisfied is determined based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied. Then, the smaller the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of remaining special symbol lotteries) required for granting the ceiling privilege, that is, the smaller the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, the more the second condition is established. It is configured to make it easier (to make it easier to select "Yes" for ceiling information reporting). By configuring in this way, in a state where the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is large, the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is displayed, which discourages the player from playing the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease.
Also, as described above, time saving type (time saving A3 (time saving pattern A3), working time saving A4 (working time saving pattern A4)) that is difficult to be set rather than time saving type (working time saving A1 (working time saving pattern A1)) that is easy to set when winning time saving pattern It is configured to make it easier to inform the ceiling information (easier to establish the second condition) when the time saving pattern is elected. By configuring in this way, when the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode is a result that is unlikely to occur, the player is given a privilege ( (Provision of information indicating the number of remaining special symbol lotteries required until the ceiling privilege is granted) can be easily given, so that the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the high accuracy mode can also be played. can make people interested.

In addition, in this 42nd control example, when the first condition and the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification are satisfied, the remaining special figure until the ceiling privilege is given is given. Although the number of lotteries is continuously displayed, the ceiling information is notified according to the timing when the first condition and the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification are established. may be executed in a different period, for example, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in a state where the number of remaining special symbol lotteries is large (for example, 400 times or more) until the ceiling privilege is granted is configured to end the ceiling information notification based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times), and the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is given is small ( For example, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the state of 50 times or less, the ceiling information notification may be continuously performed until the ceiling privilege is given.
By constructing in this way, even if the ceiling information notification is executed in a situation where the number of times of the remaining special symbol lottery is large until the ceiling privilege is given, the notification is finished after the lapse of the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the next player cannot (difficultly) grasp the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is given, so that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from being lowered. can do.
In addition, in this 42nd control example, when the first condition for executing the ceiling information notification is elected to the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state is set in the first special pattern lottery executed during the high probability mode However, without being limited to this, it is configured so that the first condition is satisfied in part when the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode is out. You can By configuring in this way, the first condition can be easily satisfied at various timings, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the ceiling information notification is executed even when the time saving pattern winning is not performed, it is possible to make it difficult to associate execution of the ceiling information notification and the time saving pattern winning.
Further, as described above, in the forty-second control example, the smaller the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, the easier it is for the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification to be satisfied. , the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is a predetermined value (for example, the value of the last digit is 7), or the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the previous jackpot game is finished is a predetermined value. When the number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to a multiple of 7) is reached, the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification may be established more easily than in other cases.

By configuring in this way, the period until the ceiling privilege is granted (the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 999 times) is a period in which the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification is likely to be satisfied. , and a period in which it is difficult to establish can be alternately set, so that a game that is difficult for the player to get tired of can be provided. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a plurality of stages (for example, three stages) of set values that differ in the probability of winning (jackpot winning, small winning, time-saving symbol winning, etc.) in a special symbol lottery, It is preferable that the period during which the second condition for executing the ceiling information notification is likely to be satisfied is varied according to the set value.
By constructing in this way, the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc at the time when the ceiling information is announced and the number of executed special symbol lotteries are set for the pachinko machine 10 in play. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the set value.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1173(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1173(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-second control example.
As shown in FIG. 1173(b), the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-second control example is the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fortieth control example. With respect to the RAM223 (see FIG. 1119 (b)), a high probability medium counter 223Ca, a production mode storage area 223Cb, a ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc, and a ceiling information flag 223Cd were added, and the background mode The difference is that the storage area 223Aa and the non-migration flag 223Ac are deleted. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The high-probability medium counter 223Ca is a counter for measuring the duration of the high-probability mode, and is executed in response to the special symbol variation in which the high-probability mode is set. In S4401D), a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the second effect symbol is set (see S4457D in FIG. 1179). Then, in the confirmation command process (see S3202D in FIG. 1177) executed when a symbol confirmation command for indicating that the special symbol variation executed during the high accuracy mode is stopped and displayed is received, it is set The value is decremented and referred to when determining the end of the high accuracy mode (S3256D in FIG. 1177).
In this 42nd control example, the second time saving state is set when the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the high accuracy mode by making it possible to shift to the high accuracy mode based on the time saving symbol winning. It is configured to be able to inform the player that the winning time saving pattern is set (the second time saving state is set). After shifting to the high-accuracy mode, the high-accuracy mode continues until the value of the high-accuracy counter 223Ca becomes 0, and the value of the high-accuracy counter 223Ca indicates whether or not the time-saving symbol has been won in the special symbol lottery. Regardless, it is configured to be subtracted each time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.
That is, in this 42nd control example, it is possible to inform the player that the second time saving state is set at the timing of transition to the high probability mode, but in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability mode Even when the time-saving pattern is won and a new number of times of time-saving is set, the end timing of the high-accuracy mode is not changed in correspondence with the number of times of time-saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the second time saving state continues.
The effect mode storage area 223Cb is a storage area for storing the currently set effect mode, and stores information indicating the effect mode after switching when the effect mode is switched. The information stored here is referred to when setting the variable effect.

The ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc is a counter for indicating the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of remaining special figure lotteries) required until the ceiling privilege is awarded, and is used at the time of starting a jackpot game or pachinko. A value of "999" is set as an initial value when the machine 10 is initialized. After that, the value is subtracted by "1" when a confirmation command indicating that the special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed is received.
The ceiling information flag 223Cd is a flag for indicating that it is possible to display the number of remaining special symbol lotteries required until the ceiling privilege is given, and is a state in which it is possible to display the number of remaining special symbol lotteries. is set to on if The ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to OFF when the jackpot is won or when the ceiling is reached.
<Contents of control processing executed by the sound lamp control device in the 42nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1176 to 1180, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 42nd control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example described above in that the contents of the effects executed during the normal state and the second time saving state are different. ing. Specifically, instead of the command determination process (see S3113B in FIG. 1129), the command process (S3113D in FIG. 1176) is replaced by the variable effect setting process (S4304B in FIG. 1132), and the variable effect setting process (FIG. 1178 S4304D) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, the contents of the command processing (S3113D) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1176 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command processing (S3113D). As shown in FIG. 1176, in command processing (S3113D), when it is determined that a pattern confirmation command has been received (S3201D: Yes) for the above-described command determination processing (see S3113B in FIG. 1129), confirmation command processing (S3202D) is described in detail. The rest is the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1177, the contents of the fixed command process (S3202D) executed in the command process (S3113D in FIG. 1176) will be described. FIG. 1177 is a flow chart showing the details of the confirmation command process (S3202D). In this confirmation command process (S3202D), the update process of various counters when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is executed.
When the confirmation command process (S3202D) is executed, first, it is determined whether the confirmation command of this time is a confirmation command for indicating the jackpot winning (S3251D), and if it is determined to indicate the jackpot winning (S3251D: Yes ), clear the value of the high probability counter 223Ca and the value of the ceiling remaining number counter 223Cc (S3252D), clear the information in the time saving information update area 223h and the production mode storage area 223Cb (S3253D), and end this process. Although illustration is omitted, in the process of S3252D, when the ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to ON, a process to set it to OFF is also executed.
That is, in the processing of S3252D and S3253D, the processing for clearing the time saving state and the high probability mode effect is executed based on the execution of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance executed after the end of the jackpot game from being executed based on the information set before the jackpot game is executed.
On the other hand, in the processing of S3251D, if it is determined that the jackpot winning is not indicated (S3251D: No), then it is determined whether the value of the high probability medium counter 223Ca is greater than 0 (S3254D), and determined as large If so (S3254D: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high probability medium counter 223Ca (S3255D), and it is determined whether the value after the subtraction is 0 (S3256D). If it is determined to be 0 (S3256D: Yes), it is time to end the high-precision mode, so a display command for indicating normal mode transition is set (S3257D), and the process proceeds to S3258D. In addition, in the process of S3257D, the process of storing information about the normal mode in the presentation mode storage area 223Cb is also executed.

In the processing of S3254D, the value of the counter 223Ca during high probability is not greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current production mode is the normal mode (S3254D: No), or in the processing of S3256D, during high probability If it is determined that the value of the counter 223Ca is not 0, that is, it is not the end timing of the high accuracy mode (S3256D: No), the process proceeds to S3258D.
In the processing of S3258D, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ceiling number counter 223Cc is greater than 1 (S3258D). ), then it is determined whether the ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to ON (S3260D), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3260D: Yes), a display indicating the remaining number of times to the ceiling command is set (S3261D), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3258D, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ceiling number counter 223Cc is not greater than 1, i.e., the state in which the ceiling privilege has already been given or the state in which the ceiling privilege has been given ( S3258D: No), or if it is determined that the ceiling information flag 223Cd is not set to ON (S3260D: No), the condition indicating the remaining number of times to the ceiling is not satisfied, so this process is terminated. .
In addition, in this 42nd control example, by receiving a confirmation command for indicating that the special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed, the values of the various counters described above are configured to be able to be updated, but this is not the only option. Instead, based on the reception of the variation pattern command for indicating that the special symbol variation has started, the values of the various counters described above may be configured to be able to be updated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1178, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304D) will be described. FIG. 1178 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304D). In this variable production setting process (S4304D), when it is determined that the gaming state is not the first time saving state (S4401B: No), the second production The difference is that the design setting process (S4401D) is configured to be executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1179, the processing contents of the second effect symbol setting processing (S4401D) will be described. FIG. 1179 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second effect symbol setting process (S4401D). In this second effect symbol setting process (S4401D), a process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state or the first time saving state is executed. be.
When the second effect symbol setting process (S4401D) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is a time saving symbol winning variation (S4451D), and if it is determined that it is a time saving symbol winning variation (S4451D : Yes), read the winning time saving type (S4452D), and determine whether the winning time saving group A was won (S4453D).
In the processing of S4453D, if it is determined that the time saving pattern of the time saving A group has been won (S4453D: Yes), the current production mode is read from the production mode storage area 223Cb (S4454D), and it is determined whether it is the normal mode ( S4455D), when it is determined that it is the normal mode (S4455D: Yes), the display mode of the second effect symbol is determined by referring to the second effect symbol selection table 222Ca (S4456D), and the determined display mode corresponds to The value is set to the value of the high-probability medium counter 223Ca (S4457D), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4453D, when it is determined that the time saving type won this time is not the time saving A group (S4453D: No), the time saving pattern determination processing for performance is executed (S5709B), and this processing ends. In addition, since the processing content of the time saving pattern determination processing for production|presentation (S5709B) is the same as that of the 40th control example mentioned above, the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Also, in the processing of S4455D, if it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (the high accuracy mode) (S4455D: No), ceiling information notification setting processing is executed (S4458D), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4451D, if it is determined that there is no time saving pattern winning variation (S4451D: No), the number of remaining time saving times is read from the time saving information update area 223h (S4459D), and it is determined whether the remaining time saving times is 10 or more. Then (S4460D), if it is determined to be 10 or more (S4460: Yes), read the current production mode from the production mode storage area 223Cb (S4461D), determine whether it is normal mode (S4462), normal mode If so (S4462D: Yes), the display mode of the pseudo second effect symbol is determined by lottery (S4463D), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4460D that the number of remaining time reductions is less than 10 (S4460D: No), or if it is determined that the normal mode is not in the processing of S4462D (S4462D), this processing ends.
Next, the contents of the ceiling information notification setting process (S4458D) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1180 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling information notification setting process (S4458D). This ceiling information notification setting process (S4458D) determines whether the conditions for displaying the remaining number of times to the ceiling are satisfied in the state where the high accuracy mode is set, and determines whether the conditions are satisfied. In this case, processing for displaying the remaining number of times up to the ceiling is executed.
When the ceiling information notification setting process (S4458D) is executed, it is first determined whether the ceiling information flag 223Cd is set to ON (S4461D). If it is determined that the condition for displaying the remaining number of times is satisfied and the remaining number of times up to the ceiling (the number of remaining special symbol lottery times) is displayed (S4461D: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4461D that the ceiling information flag 223Cd is not set to ON (S4461D; No), the ceiling information selection table 222Cb is referenced to determine whether or not to report the ceiling information (S4462D). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a ceiling information notification (S4463D), and if it is determined that there is a notification (S4463D: Yes), a display command for indicating the value of the remaining ceiling number counter 223Cc is set (S4464D), and a ceiling information flag is set. 223Cd is set to ON (S4465D), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4463D, if it is determined that there is no notification (S4463D: No), this process ends.

<Forty-third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1181 to 1191. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example is configured to be capable of executing various effects that encourage a left-handed game during a short-time state in which a right-handed game is executed, in contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example described above. There is a difference.
In the above-described 41st control example, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the left-handed game during the variation of winning when the time-saving limit is reached during the time-saving state (election for reaching the time-saving limit), and executing the first special symbol lottery. It was configured to be possible. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state is ended after winning the time-saving limit until the winning variation is stopped and displayed, so that the game state after the jackpot game is finished by the time-saving limit processing. Since it is possible to suppress the normal state forcibly, a novel game property is provided in which the player is motivated to play a left-handed game during the time-saving state.
However, since it was a game property in which the left-handed game was effective only during the winning fluctuation per reaching the time limit, for example, when performing a fake effect that urges the player to play left-handed at a timing other than the fluctuation per reaching the time limit However, there is a problem that the player who has executed the left-handed game can only feel uncomfortable based on the fake effect, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. In addition, when configured so as not to execute the fake effect, when the pseudo left-handed effect prompting the left-handed game is executed, it is determined that the second special symbol variation being executed is the winning variation per reaching the time reduction limit. There is a problem that the game is easily predicted by the player.
On the other hand, in this 43rd control example, even if a left-handed game is performed at a timing other than during the time-saving state and during the time-saving limit reaching winning fluctuation, advantageous benefits can be given to the player. It is different from the above-described 41st control example in that it is configured as follows.

Specifically, part of the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113, part of the configuration of the RAM 223, and part of the control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113. The difference is that the part is changed. Otherwise, they are identical.
<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the 43rd control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 1181, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example will be described. FIG. 1181 is a front view showing the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example. As shown in FIG. 1181, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example is the left side of the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example (see FIG. 1136). The only difference is that a through gate 67a is added to the region. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
In the 43rd control example, as described above, even when a left-handed game is executed, the game ball can be passed through the through gate 67a, and the normal symbol lottery can be executed. And, during the time saving state, by passing the game ball to the through gate 67a, it is configured to be able to notify the number of remaining time saving times of the time saving state currently set. In other words, the player who continues to play the right-handed game after the time-reduction state is set will play without being able to grasp the remaining time-reduction number of times, and the player who has played the left-handed game has the remaining time-reduction number of times. It is configured so that the game can be played while grasping the
By configuring in this way, by executing the left-handed game during the time saving state, it is possible to easily provide a game that is more advantageous to the player than the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed. In addition, in this 43rd control example, it is configured to give the player the privilege of leaving the number of remaining time reductions by left-handed games in the time saving state, but it is configured to be able to give other benefits. Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 with specifications that can set the winning probability in multiple stages, a privilege that can suggest the set value may be given, or a left-handed game may be played to the through gate 67a. When the number of balls passed exceeds a predetermined number, a privilege may be provided in which the probability of winning a prize in a special symbol lottery changes. Furthermore, although it does not directly affect the game result, it is configured so that a privilege image is displayed based on the game ball being passed through the through gate 67a by performing a left-handed game during the time saving state. Also good.

Further, based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 67a, it may be configured to notify the remaining number of times (remaining number of hits) until reaching the time reduction limit.
<Regarding the effect content executed in the 43rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1182, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example, the content of the characteristic effects not executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-first control example will be described. do.
First, with reference to FIG. 1182(a), the production contents of the chance zone displayed during the time saving state will be described. In addition, the basic effect mode is the same as the effect contents of the chance zone (see FIG. 1137 (a)) executed during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the 41st control example described above, and the same effect element are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
FIG. 1182(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed in the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 1182(a), in the display area Dm7, "Last? Times" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the number of remaining time reductions, and an effect is executed in which the player cannot grasp the number of remaining time reductions. It is Also, a display area Dm9 for showing the number of special figures 2 reserved is formed, and special figure 2 reserved icons hr5 to hr8 indicating that 4 special figures 2 reserved are displayed.

Then, in the sub display area Ds, a character saying "You may find out how many times you can save time if you hit through with a left hand" is displayed, and an effect (challenge effect) prompting the player to play a left-handed game is executed. Although details will be described later, in this 43rd control example, the challenge production is configured to be executable based on the acquisition of the upper limit number of special figure 2 suspensions during the time saving state. When the challenge effect is executed, "Right-handed?" is displayed in the guide display area Dm4a to prompt the player to play left-handed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to display "left-handed".
Then, when the left-handed game is performed during the challenge effect, the game ball is passed through the through gate 67a, and the notification condition for the number of remaining time reductions is established, the display screen shown in FIG. 1182(b) is displayed. FIG. 1182(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen displayed when a left-handed shot is passed through in the chance zone.
As shown in FIG. 1182(b), when the notification condition for the number of remaining time reductions is established, an effect to obtain the treasure box 810d is executed, and the display mode indicating the number of remaining time reductions from the treasure box 810d ("3 times" in the figure). The effect of displaying the content 810da of is executed. Then, "Last 3 times" is displayed in the display area Dm7 to indicate the number of times the remaining time is shortened, and the challenge effect ends.
As described above, in the 43rd control example, when a predetermined condition (condition established according to the number of special figures 2 pending) is satisfied during the time saving state, the challenge production is configured to be executable, and the challenge It is configured to be able to notify the number of remaining time reductions by passing a game ball through the through gate 67a during presentation. By configuring in this way, even in the time saving state, since it is possible to make the player willingly execute the left-handed game, pseudo-left-handed production is executed during winning fluctuation per reaching the time saving limit. It is possible to allow the player to play a left-handed game without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

In addition, by combining the false pattern of the pseudo-left-handed performance and the challenge performance, the player is prevented from playing an unnecessary left-handed game, and the winning variation per reaching the time-saving limit is executed. can make things difficult to understand.
Furthermore, as the execution condition of the challenge production, since the execution condition is established when the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the second special symbol lottery is performed by playing the left-handed game during the time saving state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no execution is performed.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the forty-third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example will be described. This 43rd control example differs from the 41st control example described above in that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. there is Other configurations are the same, and descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 1183(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-third control example will be described. FIG. 1183(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-third control example. As shown in FIG. 1183(a), the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 43rd control example has a reduced remaining time number notification selection table 222Ea added to the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 41st control example described above. The difference is that Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining time reduction number notification selection table 222Ea is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to notify the remaining time reduction number based on the passage of the game ball during the challenge production, and is used during one challenge production. The number of game balls passed through the through gate 67a (the value of the through passage counter 223Ea) and the acquired first effect counter 223f1 are associated with each other to determine whether or not to notify the number of times of remaining short time and the manner of notification.
Specifically, when the value of the through passage counter 223Ea is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 29", "yes (all times)" is set as the remaining short time number notification. "None" is defined as the number of times of remaining short time notification for the range of "30 to 99". In addition, the value of the first effect counter 223f1 acquired when the value of the through passing counter 223E1 is "2 to 20" is defined as "Yes (all times)" as the number of times of remaining short time notification for the range of "0 to 9". Then, for the range of "10 to 14", "Yes (upper limit 2 times)" is specified as the number of times of remaining time reduction, and "No" is specified as the number of times of remaining time reduction for the range of "15 to 99". stipulated. In addition, the value of the first effect counter 223f1 obtained when the value of the through passage counter 223Ea is "21-" is defined as "present (all times)" as the remaining short time number notification for the range of "0-39". , For the range of “40 to 89”, “Yes (upper limit 2 times)” is specified as the number of times of remaining time reduction, and “No” is specified as the number of times of remaining time reduction for the range of “90 to 99”. It is
That is, as the number of game balls passed through the through gate 67a during the challenge effect increases, the number of remaining time reductions is made easier to notify. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to perform a left-handed game for a long time during the challenge production. In addition, as the mode of the number of times of remaining time reduction, it is possible to select a mode of reporting "all times" and a mode of reporting "upper limit 2 times", so while gradually increasing the number of times of remaining time reduction It is possible to notify the player. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the challenge performance until the full picture of the number of remaining time reductions becomes clear.
Furthermore, based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67a for the first time, although it is a low probability (30/100), when the conditions for the number of remaining time reduction notification are satisfied, the remaining time reduction number corresponding to all times Since it is configured so as to be notified, it is possible to prevent the challenge performance from being unnecessarily prolonged each time, and to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In addition, in the 43rd control example, the value of the through passage counter 223Ea is added each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67a during the challenge effect, and whether or not to notify the number of remaining time reductions is determined based on the value after the addition. However, without being limited to this, the number of game balls passed through the through gate 67a within a predetermined period during the challenge effect is added, and the added value is used after the predetermined period has passed. You may comprise so that the presence or absence of time saving frequency|count alerting|reporting may be determined.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1184, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-third control example will be described. FIG. 1184 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1184, the RAM 223 of the forty-third control example has a through passing counter 223Ea and a challenging flag 223Eb added to the RAM 223 of the forty-first control example (see FIG. 1144). They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and the description thereof is omitted.
The through passing counter 223Ea is a counter for measuring the number of game balls passed through the through gate 67a during the challenge effect, and is cleared to 0 when the challenge effect is executed (see S4560E in FIG. 1190). , the value is incremented by 1 each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67a during the challenge effect (see S3293 in FIG. 1188). Then, the value after the addition is used to determine the notification mode of the number of remaining time reductions (see S3294 in FIG. 1188).
The in-challenge flag 223Eb is a flag for indicating that the challenge effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the challenge effect is to be executed. Then, when the special figure 2 variation being executed during the challenge production is displayed stopped, or when the total number of times of the remaining time reduction is notified, it is set to OFF.

<Regarding the control process of the sound ramp control device in the forty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1185 to 1191, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the forty-third control example will be described. In this 43rd control example, in contrast to the 41st control example described above, the command determination process (see S3113E in FIG. 1185) is executed, and instead of the second fluctuation effect setting process (see S4401C in FIG. 1167), 2nd fluctuation production setting processing (S4401E of Figure 1189), instead of special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing (see S4402C of Figure 1168) special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing (see S4402E of Figure 1191) is executed are different. Other control processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, the contents of the command determination process (S3113E) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1185 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S3113E). In this command determination process (S3113E), in contrast to the above-described 41st control example, when the pending ball number command is received, the pending information related process (S3208E) is executed, and when the symbol confirmation command is received, (S3201D: Yes), the difference is that the confirmation command process (S3202E) is executed. Other control processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1186, the contents of the pending information related process (S3208E) will be described. FIG. 1186 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending information related process (S3208E). This pending information related process (S3208E) is a process that is executed when a pending ball number command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 1185), extracting the pending ball number from the received command, and corresponding In addition to the processing (S3301E) of storing in the special symbol reserved ball number counter and the processing of setting the display command corresponding to the value of each special symbol reserved ball number counter (S3302E), the received command is special figure 2 pending. Determine whether (S3303E), if it is determined that the special figure 2 pending (S3303E: Yes), read the current time saving state from the time saving state update area 223h (S3304E), during the first time saving state (time saving state) It is determined whether (S3305E), when it is determined that it is in the first time saving state (time saving state) (S3305: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 pending number is 4 (S3306E), When it is determined that the FIG. 2 pending number is 4 (S3306E: Yes), a process (S3307E) of setting the challenging flag 223Eb to ON is executed.
In other words, in the 43rd control example, when the special figure 2 suspension acquired during the time saving state reaches the upper limit number, the challenge flag 223Eb is set to ON, and the challenge effect is performed. . By configuring in this way, the challenge production is executed in a situation where the number of special 2 reserved balls is not acquired or the number of acquired special 2 reserved balls is small, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which it is not performed.

Although illustration is omitted, after executing the processing of S3307E, the same processing (challenge effect execution processing) as the processing of S4559E and S4560 of FIG. 1190 to be described later is executed. . Since the contents of this challenge effect execution process will be described later, they are omitted here.
Next, the contents of the confirmation command process (S3202E) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1187 is a flow chart showing the details of the confirmation command process (S3202E). This confirmation command process (S3202E) is a process that is executed when a confirmation command for indicating that the special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed is received, and includes various processes for ending the challenge effect, pseudo left Various processes for ending the hitting effect are executed. Specifically, when the confirmation command process (S3202E) is executed, first, it is determined whether the challenge flag 223Eb is set to ON (S3251E), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3251E : Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped (S3252E). In the processing of S3252E, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop (S3252E: Yes), set a display command indicating the end of the production during the challenge (S3253E), set the flag 223Eb during the challenge to off ( S3254E), it is determined whether or not all the number of remaining time reductions have been notified (S3255E). In the process of S3255E, if it is determined that all the number of remaining time reductions have been notified (S3255E: Yes), the flag 223Eb during challenge is set to OFF, and then the flag 223Ba during pseudo left hitting is set to ON. (S3257E), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3257E: Yes), a display command indicating the end of the pseudo-left-handed effect is set (S3258E), and the pseudo-left-handed flag 223Ba is set. It is set to off (S3259E), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3251E, if it is determined that the challenge flag 223Eb is not set to ON (S3251E: No), in the process of S3255E, if it is determined that all the number of times the remaining time is shortened has not been notified (S3255E: No ) proceeds to the process of S3257E without executing the process of setting the challenge flag 223Eb to OFF. Also, in the processing of S3257E, if it is determined that the pseudo-left-handed flag 223Ba is not set to ON (S3257E: No), the processing of S3258E and S3259E is skipped and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1188, the processing contents of the through passage processing (S3281E) will be described. FIG. 1188 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through passage processing (S3281E). This through passage processing (S3281E) is control processing that is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 58) that is periodically (every 1 millisecond) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the forty-third control example, a detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the through gate 67a (see FIG. 1181) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is provided. , a signal indicating that the passage of the game ball has been detected by the detection means is output to the sound lamp control device 113 . The number of game balls passing through the through gate 67a can be measured and managed by the through passing process (S3281E).
When the through passage processing (S3281E) is executed, first, it is determined whether the challenge flag 223Eb is set to ON (S3291E), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3291E: Yes), Then, it is determined whether a signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67a is received (S3292E), and if it is determined that it is received (S3292E: Yes), the value of the through passage counter 223Ea is incremented by 1 ( S3293E), referring to the remaining time reduction number of times notification selection table 222Ea, determines the notification mode (notification presence/absence) of the remaining time reduction number of times (S3294E).

Then, by the processing of S3294E, it is determined whether there is a notification of the number of times of remaining time reduction (S3295E). is set (S3296E), and it is determined whether or not the total number of remaining time reduction times has been notified (S3297E).
In the process of S3297E, if it is determined that all times have been notified (S3297E: Yes), a display command indicating the all times notification is set (S3298E), the challenge flag 223Eb is set off (S3299E), and this process exit.
By the processing of S3298E, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the remaining number of times displayed in the display area Dm7 is the total number of remaining time reduction times by the set display command. Further, in a state where the display command is not set by the processing of S3298E, it is possible for the player to understand that only a part of the number of remaining time reductions is displayed in the display area Dm7, so the remaining number of times increases. It is possible to motivate the player to play the left-handed game during the challenge performance while expecting that the game will be played.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1189, the processing contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect setting processing (S4401E) will be described. Figure 1189 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 2 fluctuation production setting processing (S4401E). As shown in FIG. 1189, in this special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process (S4401E), the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation production setting process (see S4401C in FIG. 1167) of the above-described 41st control example has not been hit. If it is determined (S4502C: No), or if it is determined that the time reduction limit has not been reached (S4505C: No), the difference is that the non-time reduction limit time effect setting process (S4501E) is executed, and otherwise the same is. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1190, processing contents of production setting processing (S4501E) at the time of non-time-saving limit are explained. Figure 1190 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of production setting processing (S4501E) at the time of non time saving limit. In this non-time saving limit production setting process (S4501E), among the fluctuation production of the second special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state, the processing for setting the fluctuation production other than winning fluctuation per reaching the time saving limit is executed.
When the performance setting process at the time of the non-time saving limit (S4501E) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S4551E), and it is a variation pattern of 60 seconds or more. When it is determined (S4551E: Yes), the execution of the pseudo-left-handed mode is determined based on the variation time of the variation and the number of remaining time reductions (S4552E), and the execution of the pseudo-left-handed mode is determined. If so (S4553E: Yes), a display command corresponding to the pseudo-left-handed mode (pseudo-left-handed effect) is set (S4554E), and a display command indicating a presentation mode with a happiness level of 50% is set (S4555E). , the pseudo left-handed flag 223Ba is set to ON (S4556E), the determined value (value corresponding to 50%) is set to the happiness level counter 223Bb (S4557E), and this processing ends.
That is, in this process, when a variation pattern of 60 seconds or more is set as a hit variation that has not reached the time saving limit, or when a variation pattern of 60 seconds or more is set as an off variation, and When the execution is determined by the processing of S4552E, it is configured to set an effect mode that is a false pattern of pseudo left-handed effect.
By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute a pseudo-left-handed effect using a long variation (fluctuation of 60 seconds or more) other than the winning variation per reaching the time reduction limit, the winning per reaching the time reduction limit can be performed for the player. It can make it difficult to grasp fluctuations. In addition, when the pseudo left-handed effect of the fake pattern is executed and the corresponding special symbol variation is a winning variation, regardless of the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery during the pseudo left-handed performance, A performance result with a happiness level of 100% (a performance result indicating that the time-saving limit processing is not executed) is displayed, and when the corresponding special symbol variation is a deviation variation, the first special symbol lottery during the pseudo left-handed performance. Regardless of the number of executions of , after the performance result with the degree of happiness being less than 100% is displayed, the notification performance indicating that the winning has not been won is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game feature of appreciating that the variation was a wrong variation.

On the other hand, in the process of S4551E, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation time of less than 60 seconds (S4551E: No), determine whether the current special figure 2 pending number is 3 (S4558E), in 3 If it is determined that there is (S4558E: Yes), the execution of the challenge effect is determined (S4559E), the value of the through passage counter 223Ea is reset (S4560E), the during-challenge flag 223Eb is set to ON (S4561E), and S4503C to process. Also, in the process of S4558E, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 pending number is not 3 (S4558E: No), since the execution conditions for the challenge effect are not met, the process proceeds to S4503C as it is. Furthermore, in the processing of S4553E, if it is determined that the execution of the pseudo-left-handed mode has not been determined (S4553E: No), the processing also proceeds to S4503C. After completing the processing of S4503C, this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1191, the processing contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting processing (S4402E) will be described. Figure 1191 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 fluctuation production setting processing (S4402E). This special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (S4402E) is the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (S4402C in FIG. 1168) of the 41st control example. The difference is that the value of happiness displayed in each case is different, but otherwise they are the same.
When the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (S4402E) is executed, first, the same S4601C to S4606C processes as the special figure 1 fluctuation production setting process (S4402C in FIG. 1168) of the 41st control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4603C, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is established (S4603C: Yes), then it is determined whether it is during the time saving limit (whether it is a winning fluctuation per reaching the time saving limit) (S4601E), When it is determined that the time is limited (S4601E: Yes), a display command indicating a presentation mode corresponding to 200% happiness is set (S4602E), and the process proceeds to S4608C.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4601E, if it is determined that it is not in the time reduction limit (S4601E: No), set a display command indicating the effect mode corresponding to the happiness level of 100% (S4603E), and proceed to the processing of S4608C . Then, the processing of S4608C to S4610C, which is the same as the special figure 1 fluctuation effect setting processing (S4402C in FIG. 1168) of the 41st control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in this 43rd control example, even in fluctuations other than winning fluctuations per reaching the time saving limit, since it is configured to be able to execute a pseudo left-handed effect (gase pattern), the time saving end condition is established. By differentiating the percentage of the degree of happiness to be displayed in the case of a change, the lottery result of the variation (whether or not the time reduction limit has been reached) can be comprehended by the player.
By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the effectiveness of establishing the time-saving end condition by the left-handed game in an easy-to-understand manner.
<Regarding the first modification of the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1192 and 1193, a first modification of the fortieth control example described above will be described. In the above-described 40th control example, when the time-saving pattern is won in the left-handed game state (normal state, second time-saving state), the effect of switching the background mode (normal mode, disadvantageous mode, advantageous mode) is configured to be executable. The background mode selection table 222Aa (see FIG. 1120) referred to when selecting the background mode type includes the game state at the time of winning, the winning time saving pattern type, and the look-ahead result. background mode was specified.
On the other hand, the first modification differs in that a background mode selection table 222Aaa (see FIG. 1192) is used instead of the background mode selection table 222Aa (see FIG. 1120). Also, when the remaining number of times to the ceiling (number of remaining special drawing lots) is less than a predetermined number (less than 50 times), even if the second time saving state is set in the normal state, it is always disadvantageous The difference is that the mode is configured to be set. Other contents are the same, and the description of the same contents is omitted.

The contents of the background mode selection table 222Aaa will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1192 shows the contents defined in the background mode selection table 222Aaa. As shown in FIG. 1192, the background mode selection table 222Aaa defines different background modes according to the remaining number of times up to the ceiling (the number of remaining special figure lottery numbers).
Specifically, the less the remaining number of times to the ceiling, the easier it is for the disadvantage mode to be selected. Here, when the disadvantage mode is selected, as shown in FIG. Indeed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling from being displayed when the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling is excessively large, and when the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling is low, the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling is displayed. By facilitating the display of the number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game just before the ceiling.
Furthermore, when there is a hit in the target hold, the disadvantageous mode is more likely to be selected in a state where there are more remaining times to the ceiling (for example, 999 times to 500 times) than when there is no hit. there is Therefore, when the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is displayed in a state in which the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is excessively large, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1193, the processing contents of the performance setting processing (S4404Ba) at the time of time saving design winning executed in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1193 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting processing (S4404Ba) at the time of winning the time saving design. This time-saving design winning effect setting process (S4404Ba) is the time-saving design winning time effect setting process (see S4404B in FIG. 1133) of the above-described 40th control example. The difference is that the content of the mode selection process is different, and the rest is the same.

Specifically, in the process of S5702B, when it is determined that it is the time saving A group (S5702B: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining number of times to the ceiling is less than 50 times (S5701Ba), and is less than 50 times If so (S5701Ba: Yes), the disadvantage mode is determined as the background mode (S5702Ba), and the process proceeds to S5705B.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5701Ba, if it is determined that the number of times is not less than 50 (S5701Ba: No), the current background mode is read from the background mode storage area (S5703B), and the background mode selection table 222Aaa is referred to. The type is determined (S5703Ba), and the process proceeds to S5705B.
That is, when the remaining number of times to the ceiling is less than 50 at the time of winning the time saving pattern of the time saving A group, the disadvantage mode is forcibly set. By configuring in this way, when the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is reduced, the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is easily displayed, thereby preventing the player from stopping the game just before the ceiling. can.
<Second modification of the 40th control example>
Next, a second modification of the fortieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1194 and 1195. FIG. In the above-described 40th control example, regardless of the remaining number of times up to the ceiling, the process of selecting the background mode based on the time-saving design winning was configured to be executable, but in this second modification , Determine the remaining number of times to the ceiling at the time of winning the time saving A group in which the second time saving state is set, and if it is confirmed that the second time saving state will continue until the ceiling privilege is granted, the ceiling privilege The difference is that an effect mode (background mode of the ceiling privilege) indicating that the ceiling privilege is given can be set before the is given.

By configuring in this way, the execution timing of the presentation corresponding to the ceiling privilege can be varied according to the time-saving pattern winning situation, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the timing of granting the ceiling privilege. . In addition, since the ceiling privilege itself sets the second time-saving state for a fixed period, if the production corresponding to the ceiling privilege is executed before the ceiling privilege is granted, the production corresponding to the ceiling privilege is executed. can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player think that there are multiple contents of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege.
In the second modified example, in place of the production setting process (see S4404B in FIG. 1133) for the 40th control example described above, the production setting process (see S4404Bb in FIG. 1194) at the time of winning the time saving design is executed instead of the production setting process (see S4404B in FIG. 1133). They are different in that they are configured to Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1194, the processing contents of the performance setting processing (S4404Bb) at the time of time-saving symbol winning will be described. FIG. 1194 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting processing (S4404Bb) at the time of winning the time saving design. In this time-saving symbol winning effect setting process (S4404Bb), when it is determined that it is the time-saving A group with respect to the time-saving symbol winning effect setting process (see S4404B in FIG. 1133) of the 40th control example described above (S5702B: Yes), the difference is that the ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1195, the contents of the ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb) will be described. FIG. 1195 is a flow chart showing the details of the ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb). In this ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb), when the time saving pattern (time saving A group) in which the second time saving state is set is won, the second time saving state won this time continues until the ceiling privilege is given is determined, and when it is determined to continue, a process of setting an effect mode corresponding to the ceiling privilege is executed based on the time saving symbol winning.

Specifically, when the ceiling mode determination process (S5701Bb) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 223b is read (S5721Bb), and the time saving type (time saving A Any of the groups) and the look-ahead result of the read prize information are used to calculate the time-saving continuation period (S5722Bb). Thereafter, it is determined whether the time saving duration calculated in the process of S5722Bb continues up to the ceiling (S5723Bb), and the determination result determines whether it continues up to the ceiling (S5724Bb).
In the process of S5724Bb, if it is determined to continue up to the ceiling (S5724Bb: Yes), a back image command for display indicating a back image corresponding to the background mode of the ceiling privilege is set (S5725Bb), and the determined background mode type is displayed as the background. Store in the mode storage area (S5726Bb), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5724Bb, if it is determined not to continue to the ceiling (S5724Bb: No), this process ends.
As described above, in the second modification, when it is confirmed that the same game state as the game state set when the ceiling privilege is granted continues until the ceiling privilege is granted Since it is configured to execute an effect indicating that the ceiling privilege is granted at the time of confirmation, the player can be made to think that the ceiling privilege is granted at various timings, Interest in games can be improved.
In addition, in the second modification, when the time-saving pattern is won, it is determined whether the effect of giving the ceiling privilege can be executed before the ceiling privilege is given, and executed based on the determination result. However, without being limited to this, the game progresses in the state where the same game state as the game state (second time saving state) given by the ceiling privilege is set, and the current setting When it is determined that the current game state will continue until the timing of awarding the ceiling privilege, an effect indicating that the ceiling privilege will be awarded may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the effect indicating that the ceiling privilege will be awarded before the ceiling privilege is awarded.

<44th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1196 to 1211. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example has the same configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 1105) as the pachinko machine 10 in the fortieth control example described above, and has a normal state (special Low probability state of the pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) and short-time state (low-probability state of the special pattern, high-probability state of the normal pattern) can be set, and when the time-saving design is elected in the special design lottery. It is also configured to be able to set the time saving state.
In addition, in the first special symbol lottery, only the determination of the winning of the big win is executed, and in the second special symbol lottery, in addition to the determination of the winning of the big win, the determination of the small winning and the determination of the time-saving pattern winning are executed. A jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area (V gate in the V winning device 650) during the small win game executed when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example is configured to be able to set the first time saving state and the second time saving state as the time saving state, and even if any time saving state is set , so that the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 (FIG. 1105) more easily than in the normal state. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example, when the time-saving state is set, a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot toward the right area of the game board 13 becomes a game method advantageous to the player. .
In addition, the second special symbol lottery pending memory (special figure 2 pending) is configured to be able to acquire up to 4 pieces, and once the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery until the time saving state ends. is executed, and if the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state does not win (jackpot winning, small winning), it shifts to the normal state, and the special figure 2 already acquired during the time saving state By enabling execution of the second special symbol lottery using the hold, the game period (retraction period) that is more advantageous to the player than usual for a predetermined period even after the end of the time-saving state advantageous to the player. is configured to be able to provide

Here, conventionally, the game period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the fact that the time saving state is set (the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery during the withdrawal period A series of period effects are executed across the game period to be executed). For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to acquire a maximum of four special figure 2 reservations and a time saving state of four times of time saving is set, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery By executing the period production in the production mode (such as displaying 8 times for chance) to show that it can be executed up to 8 times, the game content during the period production (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery) is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player expects that the performance result indicating winning is displayed during the performance period, thereby enhancing the performance effect.
In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a machine in which the performance effect is further enhanced by devising the performance mode of the performance during the period, for example, the second special symbol variation executed during the performance during the period. Instead of executing the production individually for each, by gradually varying the production mode each time the second special pattern lottery is executed, the entire period of the period production (the second special pattern lottery (period until is executed eight times) is used to execute an effect with a story, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect more than repeating the same effect.
In this 44th control example, it is configured so that the time saving pattern can be won in the second special pattern lottery, and when the time saving pattern is won, the number of time saving times according to the type of the winning time saving pattern is set again. Therefore, when the time-saving symbol is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the performance during the period described above, the number of times the second special symbol lottery can be executed is increased.
Therefore, when the conventional period effect is used for the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example, the remaining number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the execution period of the period effect increases. , it is necessary to extend the performance period of the period performance in the middle, and the period performance corresponding to the period in which the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) is delayed. There is a problem that the production effect is lowered.

In addition, assuming that the time saving symbol is won during the execution period of the period production, it is conceivable to prepare in advance the production pattern of the period production to be executed when the production period of the period production is extended, but in this case , The timing of the time-saving design winning in the second special design lottery executed during the period production (the number of times of the time-saving design lottery) and the time-saving number of times newly set based on the winning of the time-saving design. Since it is necessary to prepare an effect pattern to be set, there is a problem that the capacity of the effect data increases.
On the other hand, in this 44th control example, even if the time saving symbol is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the period performance, the preset period performance is executed as it is, and the period performance ends. At the timing, it is possible to execute the second period performance for informing the player that the period (time saving state, normal state in which the special figure 2 reservation is acquired) continues during which the second special symbol lottery is easy to execute. Configure.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the preset period effect is slowed down based on the time saving symbol winning. In addition, since there is no indication of the presence or absence of the time-saving design winning to the player using the period performance for suggesting the presence or absence of the winning, if the time-saving design is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the period performance In the above, it is possible to suppress the display of the performance result for showing that the time-saving pattern has been won as the performance result of the period performance being executed, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand performance.
In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example is set based on the production contents being executed when the predetermined number of times of reduced working hours is set based on the winning of the reduced working hours symbol in the special symbol lottery. It is configured to vary the timing of informing the player of the number of times of time saving (number of times of remaining time saving). For example, in a state where the period effect is not executed, the type of the time saving pattern set this time at the timing when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed to indicate that the time saving pattern has been won (remaining time saving number of times) etc., and the game In a state where the period performance is executed, it is constructed so as not to notify (make it difficult to) that the winning of the time-saving pattern is completed until the period performance is finished. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time-saving symbol is won.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example is configured to be able to set the first time saving state and the second time saving state as the time saving state. In the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, a game for entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game is executed, and in either time-saving state, the second time-saving state is executed. The easiness of entering the game ball into the 2-ball entrance 640 is the same (concept that includes an error that the player does not notice, for example, a slight error that occurs in the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery). is doing. That is, it is configured so that it is difficult for a player who is playing a right-handed game to grasp whether the currently set time-saving state is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state.
Then, when the second time saving state is set than when the first time saving state is set, when the time saving pattern is won, when the small hit is won, the player is given a privilege that is advantageous. It is designed to be easy. Specifically, it is configured to facilitate setting of a time saving state (second time saving state) in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to grasp the type of the time-saving state that is currently set.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example, at least a part of the effect mode of the period effect executed during the time saving state is configured to differ according to the type of the time saving state that is set. . With this configuration, the presently set game state (type of time saving state) can be grasped by grasping the performance mode of the period performance to be executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.
<Regarding the effect content in the 44th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1196 to 1198, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example, the period during which the second special symbol lottery set based on the time saving state is set can be executed (the first period in which the time saving state is set, the normal state The second period with the special figure 2 reservation) is characterized by the production contents of the first period production executed in the second period) and the production contents of the second period production executed after the first period production is completed. I have it.

In the forty-fourth control example, the final countdown effect using the game period of eight times of the second special symbol lottery can be executed as the first period effect, and the additional effect can be executed as the second period effect. ing.
The final countdown effect is a period effect (first period effect) executed when the first time saving state of four times of time saving is set after the end of the jackpot game, and is the first half part until the first time saving state ends. (2nd special symbol lottery 4 times) and the second half part (2nd special symbol lottery 4 times) in which the special symbol 2 remaining reservation can be executed.
First, with reference to FIG. 1196(a), the content of the effect when the final countdown effect is started will be described. FIG. 1196(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the final countdown effect is started. As shown in FIG. 1196 (a), the final countdown effect is a period effect that is executed when the first time-saving state is set. A display mode (indicated by an arrow in the drawing) for indicating that the pattern is changing is displayed in the display area Dm2. In addition, in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm9 for indicating the number of reserved memories (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special symbol is formed, and the player can check the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations. making it easy to understand. In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 1196 (a) shows a state (four circles are displayed with a dashed line) that has not acquired even one special figure 2 reservation, and acquires special figure 2 reservation Each time, the circles in the display area Dm9 are displayed in solid lines in order from the left.
When the final countdown effect is executed, the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state set this time (the first time saving state of four time saving times) is displayed above the main display area Dm. As a display mode for indicating , characters of "A maximum of 8 chances!!" are displayed. Here, by acquiring the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the last second special symbol variation (time saving final variation) period in the time saving state, four times during the first time saving state, the first time saving It shows that the second special symbol lottery can be executed 4 times in total 8 times during the normal state after the end of the state.

In addition, the first time saving state, like the 40th control example described above, has a plurality of time saving end conditions, and the first time saving end established based on the second special symbol lottery being executed four times In addition to the conditions, there is also a second time-saving end condition that is established based on the fact that the total number of special symbol lotteries, which is the sum of the number of times of execution of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery, reaches 10 times. ing.
In other words, if the second time-saving end condition is established before the first end condition is established, the first time-saving state ends before the second special symbol lottery is executed four times, so this time The number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the set time saving state (the first time saving state with four times of time saving) is reduced. In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) during the time saving final variation period, the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is reduced.
In addition, in this 44th control example, as shown in FIG. 1196 (a), immediately after the first time-saving state is set, the guidance mode of "right-handed" is displayed, and the right-handed game is executed according to the contents of the guidance mode. By doing so, a situation where the second time-saving end condition is satisfied before the first time-saving end condition, or a situation where the maximum number (4) of special 2 holds cannot be acquired during the time-saving final fluctuation period. Since it is configured so that there is no (it is difficult to occur), when the final countdown effect is started, "A maximum of 8 chances!" is displayed.
In this way, even if the first time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, if the player does not execute a normal game, the second special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (8 times) is performed. A game state (left-handed game state) in which it is difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery is entered without executing the game. In this case, that is, when the final countdown production is not executed to the end and the normal state is obtained without acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, the situation is configured to be distinguishable, and the final countdown production is produced as a result. , the effect result (forced end mode) indicating that the final countdown effect has ended is displayed to the forced enemy.

Although illustration is omitted, when the effect result of the forced termination mode is displayed, a guidance mode for indicating that the opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery has been lost, and a game method (right A guidance mode for indicating the game method for continuing the beating game) is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the game content executed this time was a game content disadvantageous to the player, and to notify the appropriate game content, so that the first time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a proper game.
During the execution period of the final countdown effect, a battle effect in which the friendly character 801F fights against the enemy character E1 is executed, and basically one battle effect is executed for each second special symbol lottery. is doing. As a result of the battle production, if the friendly character 801F wins, it is reported that the result of the target second special symbol lottery is a win (small win, big win), and the friendly character 801F falls down. In that case, it is notified that the result of the target second special symbol lottery is out (including time-saving symbol winning).
The display screen shown in FIG. 1196 (a) shows the second special symbol fluctuation period for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery executed first after the first time saving state is set, this time As a display screen showing the first battle effect in the final countdown effect of , a state in which an ally 801F1 imitating a hero as the first ally character 801F confronts an enemy character E1 is displayed. In addition, a display area Dm1F is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm in which an ally stock display mode indicating the number of ally characters in stock is displayed.
The allied stock display mode displayed in this display area Dm1F is configured to be able to notify the number of allied characters 801 used in each battle effect executed in the final countdown effect this time. Stock icons ms1 to ms8 imitating up to eight ally characters 801 can be displayed.

This stock icon ms1 to ms8 is configured to be displayed corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 pending, and on the display screen shown in FIG. As shown, the second special symbol is changing and the special symbol 2 reserve is not acquired, so only the stock icon ms1 corresponding to the ally character 801F1 used for the battle effect is displayed. The stock icon ms1 is displayed in a manner (in the drawing, it is displayed in a lighting manner) to indicate that it corresponds to the battle effect currently being executed.
By configuring in this way, in a state in which a plurality of stock icons ms1 to ms8 have been obtained, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the type of stock icon used in the current battle effect.
Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 1196(b), the ally stock display mode displayed in the display area Dm1F is a display mode that allows the player to identify the stock icons that have already been used for the battle effect. configured to be displayed. In other words, by checking the ally stock display mode, the player can easily grasp the number of acquired stock icons (special figure 2 pending number) and the number of battle effects executed in this final countdown effect. can be made Therefore, it is possible for the player to play an easy-to-understand game while checking the remaining number of battle productions executed during the final countdown production and the remaining number of special figure 2 reserves that can be acquired during the first time saving state. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1196(b), the contents of the effect executed when the time-saving symbol is won during the final countdown effect will be described. FIG. 1196(b) is during the final countdown effect, the normal state is set as the game state, and the display displayed when the time-saving symbol B is won in the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the battle effect being executed. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen.

Figure 1196 (b) is the sixth second special symbol lottery after the first time saving state is set, that is, the second special symbol lottery of four times executed during the first time saving state ends, normal state is set, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed, and the display area Dm2 shows that the result of the second special symbol lottery is the time-saving symbol B winning. The third symbol (identification information) is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "353" to indicate the number of times of the battle effect executed in the final countdown effect (current "3 times left" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the battle effect of (including the battle effect of ) is 3 times.
In addition, a display mode for showing a state in which two special figure 2 reservations are acquired is displayed in the display area Dm9, and a first special figure 2 reservation icon hr5 indicating a special figure 2 reservation and a second special figure 2 hold icon hr6 is displayed. In addition, in the display area Dm1F, stock icons ms1 to ms5 are displayed in a display mode (a display mode with a cross mark in the drawing) to indicate that an ally has been defeated in the past five battle effects. , the stock icon ms6 corresponding to the ally character 801F corresponding to the battle effect being executed is illuminated. In addition, since two special figure 2 reservations are acquired, the remaining number of battle productions that can be executed during the final countdown production (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery) is 2 Stock icon ms7 , the stock icon ms8 is displayed.
In the main display area Dm, an effect is being executed in which a friend character 801F6 resembling a rabbit is defeated by an enemy character E1 as a result of the battle effect being executed, and in the secondary display area Ds, the effect of the current battle effect is displayed. ``Unfortunately, there are two remaining chances'' is displayed to indicate that the effect result is not advantageous to the player.
As shown in FIG. 1196(b), the friendly character 801F is configured to be selected from a plurality of types of characters based on the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery (prefetching result). Depending on the type of character, the degree of expectation for the provision of advantageous benefits to the player is varied. For example, the ally character 801F imitating a hero shown in FIG. The ally character 801F imitating a rabbit is more likely to be selected than the ally character 801F imitating a hero. In addition, although details will be described later, although the possibility of winning is low, the friendly character 801F imitating a turtle that increases the possibility of winning the time-saving symbol is also configured to be selectable.

In addition, even when a battle effect is executed in which the friendly character 801F is defeated, the display mode of the enemy character E1 can be changed. As a mode, the first mode (see FIG. 1196 (a)) and the second mode (see FIG. 1196 (a)) and the second mode (see FIG. 1196 (a)) and the second mode ( 1196(b)) can be displayed.
Then, in the diagram shown in FIG. 1196(b), the enemy character E1 is displayed in the second mode indicating that it has suffered a predetermined amount of damage. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game in which the player can easily understand that the effect mode of the battle effect executed this time is the effect mode that is difficult to be selected at the time of losing winning.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1197(a), the contents of the effect executed when a small win is won during the final countdown effect will be described. FIG. 1197(a) is an example of a display screen for showing that a small hit has been won in the second special symbol effect executed during the final countdown effect.
As shown in FIG. 1197(a), when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, "341" is stopped and displayed in the display area Dm2 as the display mode of the third symbol to indicate the small hit. At the same time, an effect for defeating the enemy character E1 is executed as a result of the battle effect executed during the countdown effect. In the sub-display area Ds, characters "Congratulations on defeating the enemy" are displayed as a message for congratulating the defeat of the enemy. Also, when the enemy character E1 has fallen, a V icon appears and "V Get" is displayed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 1196(b), during the final countdown production, even if the time saving symbol is won and the remaining time saving number of times increases, the player is not notified that the remaining time saving number of times has increased. Therefore, if a small hit is won during the final countdown production, the remaining number of battle productions (second special symbol lottery) executed during the final countdown production can be grasped, but the remaining period of the time saving state is played. difficult for people to comprehend. Therefore, for example, even if you win a time-saving pattern that gives a large number of time-savings during the final countdown production, and you win a small win with a large number of remaining time-savings left, many time-savings are given. Since the player cannot grasp the fact, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the useless time-saving symbol winning.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1197(b), the content of the effect executed when the final countdown effect ends will be described. FIG. 1197(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the final countdown effect ends. The display screen shown in FIG. 1197(b) is the state shown in FIG. It is a display screen at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed twice from the state that the time saving symbol B is won in the second special symbol lottery).
In other words, based on the fact that the time saving pattern B was elected in the 6th second special pattern lottery (the second special pattern lottery executed during the normal state) after the first time saving state was set, the time saving number of times 20 times. Since the second special symbol lottery is executed twice after the 2 hour-shortening state is set, the second hour-shortening state with 18 remaining number of times of shortening working hours is internally set.
In this case, in order to show that the time saving state (second time saving state) continues even after the final countdown production ends, the last battle production in the final countdown production (the friend character 801F8 corresponding to the stock icon ms8 was used. After the ally character 801F8 is defeated in the battle production), a character 802F imitating an angel appears, and a production is executed to revive the character 801F8. is executed.

Then, in the display area Dm2F formed near the center of the main display area Dm, "+18 times" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the number of remaining time reductions, and in the sub display area Ds, "An angel appears! Lucky ” is displayed. After that, the second period production (additional production) using the number of times of remaining short time (18 times in the figure) is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1198(a), the effect contents of the second period effect (additional effect) executed after the end of the first period effect (final countdown effect) will be described. FIG. 1198(a) is a diagram schematically showing the effect content of the additional effect. In this additional effect, a variation effect is executed in which the symbol icons 811e to 811g are variably displayed in the horizontal direction (to the left), and the rabbit is displayed at the timing when the corresponding second special symbol variation is stop-displayed. An effect is executed in which the imitated character 801 stops displaying any of the pattern icons 811 . The content of the variable display effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm during the additional effect is the same as the effect executed during the chance zone in the fortieth control example (see FIG. 1110(a)). Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.
This additional performance is configured to be performed each time the second special symbol lottery is executed, and the display area Dm3F shows the remaining number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the additional performance. "Remaining 18 times" is displayed as .
In the case of winning a small prize in the second special lottery executed during the addition performance, the symbol icon 811f is stop-displayed, and in the case of winning the time-saving symbol, the symbol icon 811g is stop-displayed, and in the case of a loss. , the symbol icon 811e is stopped and displayed. Here, when the time saving pattern is won, the remaining number of times displayed in the display area Dm3F is increased or decreased corresponding to the newly set number of times of time saving.

Then, if you do not win in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (second time saving state) in which the additional production is performed, the final change of the time saving state (the time saving end condition is satisfied) 2 special symbol fluctuation), an effect to prompt acquisition of special figure 2 reservation is executed. It should be noted that, for the effect to encourage the acquisition of special figure 2 reservation, similar to the display screen shown in FIG. An effect including at least an effect mode for indicating that the upper limit number of has been obtained and an effect mode for continuing the right-handed game is executed.
After that, "Last Chance" is displayed in the display area Dm3F, and the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (up to 4 times) using the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the end of the time saving state is changed during the production It is executed in the same production mode as the display (see FIG. 1198(a)). It should be noted that the variation effect that is executed in the state where "last chance" is displayed in the display area Dm3F is the second special using the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the end of the time saving state. It is constituted so as to continue from the start of the pattern lottery until all the special 2 reserves are consumed, or until any second special pattern lottery wins or the time-saving pattern is won.
By configuring in this way, when all the acquired special figure 2 reserves are out, it can be executed with the effect result indicating the loss as a single variable effect, so that the effect result is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the unnecessary execution of a large number of fluctuation performances.
Next, during the final countdown production, see FIG. to explain. FIG. 1198(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving symbol is won during the final countdown effect.

The display screen described above with reference to FIG. 1196(b) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the time-saving symbol is won during the final countdown production and during the normal state (during the second half part). By executing an effect that does not notify the player that the time saving pattern has been won (notifies the player in an incomprehensible manner), it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the time saving state continues after the end of the final countdown effect. .
On the other hand, the display screen shown in FIG. 1198 (b) is a display screen displayed when the time saving pattern is won during the time saving state even during the same final countdown production, And, it notifies the player of the newly set number of times of time saving (number of times of remaining time saving).
In the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example, it is configured so that the number of times of time saving is always set to 4 times as the first time saving state, and the time saving symbol is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state. When doing so, it is configured so that the time saving pattern type (time saving pattern A) in which the first time saving state is set is always selected. Then, the variation time of 20 seconds longer than the first to third second special symbol variations is set for the fourth second special symbol variations executed during the first time saving state. there is
In other words, during the second special symbol fluctuation period (during the second special symbol fluctuation period of the fourth time since the new first time saving state is set), which is the final fluctuation of the first time saving state, it indicates the presence or absence of winning. It is configured to execute a battle effect (10 seconds) for the purpose and a effect (10 seconds) to prompt acquisition of special figure 2 reservation.

By configuring in this way, while executing the same battle production for each second special symbol fluctuation executed during the final countdown production, the upper limit number of special symbols during the final fluctuation of the first short time state 2 reservations can be made easier to obtain.
Here, if the player is not notified that the time saving pattern has been won in the first half part of the final countdown production (during the first time saving state), the first time saving state with the second half part of the final countdown production left. Since the final change of is not executed, the remaining number of times (number of remaining battle effects) announced in advance using the final countdown effect, and the special figure that encourages acquisition during the final change of the first short time state 2 There was a problem that the number of reservations does not match.
Specifically, if the time-saving pattern is won in the third special symbol lottery (the third battle effect of the final countdown effect) after the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state is set at that point. It is newly set, and the remaining time reduction number of times becomes 4 times. When the second special symbol lottery executed after that is continuously lost, the second special symbol variation of the seventh time after the first time saving state is first set (after the final countdown effect is executed) However, the final variation of the first time-saving state (the second special symbol variation with a variation time of 20 seconds) is performed, and after the battle effect is completed, the effect of prompting the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation is executed. However, since the 7th battle effect in the final countdown effect is being executed at this time, the display screen shows "Two remaining times", and during the final countdown effect, the battle effect being executed is displayed. Except for this, it indicates that only one more battle production will be executed, so the number of executions of the battle production notified at the start of the final countdown production (8 times) and the number of times acquired during the final change of the first time-saving state The player is advised that the second special symbol lottery will be executed even after the final countdown performance ends before the performance result of the final countdown performance is stopped and displayed due to the difference from the special figure 2 reserved number. However, there is a problem that it is easily grasped by the user, and the performance effect is deteriorated.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 44th control example, when the time saving symbol is elected in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, as shown in FIG. 1198 (b), the battle It is configured to inform the player that the time-saving pattern has been won by using the performance.

Specifically, as a battle effect, an effect is executed in which the friendly character 801F3 imitating a turtle facing off against the enemy character E1 calls allies without attacking the enemy character E1. A display area Dm1Fa is formed to indicate the number of teammate characters 801 that can respond to the call of the teammate character 801F3. The display screen shown in FIG. 1198(b) shows that the time saving symbol was won in the third special symbol lottery after the final countdown production was executed (after the first time saving state was set). , At the timing when the change is stopped and displayed, the first time saving state with four times of time saving is newly set, so the size corresponding to the difference value “3 times” of the number of remaining time saving (stock icon ms is set to 3 A display area Dm1Fa is formed with a size that allows individual display.
Then, above the main display area Dm, "remaining 6 times + 3" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the number of times of the battle effect executed during the final countdown effect increases corresponding to the increasing number of times of shortening remaining time. be. In addition, in FIG. 1198(b), "remaining 6 times" is displayed as the number of times including the battle effect being executed. After that, when a new battle effect is executed corresponding to the start of the next second special symbol variation, "remaining 8 times" is displayed above the main display area Dm.
By configuring in this way, the timing at which the final variation of the first time saving state is executed can be set to the second special symbol variation period in which "remaining 5 times" is always displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to match the remaining number of battle effects displayed during the final countdown effect with the number of special figures 2 pending acquired at that time, the second special symbol lottery at the end of the final countdown effect It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the game period in which the game can be executed ends or not, and enhance the performance effect.
As described above, when the battle effect that notifies the time-saving symbol winning is executed, the friend character 801 (friend character 801F3) does not attack the enemy character E1, that is, the effect result of winning (the effect of defeating the enemy character E1 ) is not displayed, the battle effect is started. In other words, if it is normal, even though it is a battle production for letting the player predict whether or not to win, if the conditions are met (if the time saving pattern is won during the first time saving state) , the battle performance is executed in a performance mode suggesting whether or not the time-saving pattern is won in preference to the performance of whether or not the game is won. By constructing in this way, as the performance mode of the variable performance for showing the result of one special symbol lottery, the lottery result to be prioritized can be varied, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

In addition, the production mode of the battle production shown in FIG. 1198 (b) is configured to be set at a low probability (even if it is out) even when the time saving pattern is elected. After the character 801 executes an effect in which the character 801 calls a companion, an effect is executed in an effect mode (for example, display of "...") corresponding to the effect result indicating that the friend does not respond to the call.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the time-saving symbol is won when the ally character 801 performs the effect of calling a friend. Furthermore, as a battle effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation in which the small prize is won, the allied character 801F may be configured to execute the effect of calling a friend. After the effect indicating that there is no response from the friend, the effect (reversal effect) in which the angry ally character 801F blows away the enemy character E1 may be executed. As a result, even if the ally character 801F calls a friend, the possibility of winning a winning prize (small winning prize) can be left, so that the effect of the performance can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1199, the flow of execution of the above-described first period effect (final countdown effect) and second period effect (additional effect) will be described in correspondence with the progress of the game. FIG. 1199 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the progress of the game and the content of the effects to be executed, and FIG. 1199 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) to be executed, FIG. 1199 (c) is a diagram showing the increase and decrease of the number of remaining time reduction in the time reduction state, FIG. 1199(d) is a diagram showing the flow of effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 1199(a) to (d), during the small winning game, the special symbol variation is not executed, and the time saving state is not set. Then, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an effect indicating the game content during the small winning game (for example, "Aim for V", etc.) and an effect for congratulating the small winning game are executed. In addition, as for the content of the effect during the small winning game executed during the small winning game, any of the contents of the effect executed during the small winning game described in each control example described above is applied. There is, and the explanation is omitted.

When the game ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game and acquires the execution right of the big winning game, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game is finished, and the performance during the big winning game is executed. When the first time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of time saving is set four times as the time saving state (first time saving state) in accordance with the end timing of the jackpot game, and the final countdown performance is started.
<Regarding transition contents of the game state in the 44th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1200, the game state transition contents in the forty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 1200 is a diagram showing transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 1200, in the forty-fourth control example, the normal state, the first time saving state, and the second time saving state can be set. In addition, in FIG. 1200, for convenience of explanation, the normal state is the first normal state aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game, and the second special symbol using the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving state. Although described separately from the second normal state in which the lottery is executed, the first normal state and the second normal state are both the same game state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) , without electric support).
During the first normal state, a game is executed aiming at winning a jackpot with a probability of 1/250 in the first special symbol lottery. Then, when the jackpot is won in the first normal state, the first time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) of four times of time saving times is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a right-handed game is set. is started. Then, when the first time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the final countdown effect is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加
As described above, the final countdown performance is a period performance corresponding to the period during which the second special symbol lottery is executed eight times, and during the first time-saving state, the first half period (four times) is the performance period. In the second special symbol lottery executed during the first short time state, in addition to the jackpot winning with a probability of 1/250, the small winning with a probability of 1/8 and the winning with a probability of 1/50 A game aiming at the time-saving symbol winning is executed.

First, the flow when a small hit is won during the first time saving state will be explained. When the small win is won during the first time saving state, the first time saving state is set again after the big win game executed based on the small win winning is finished. That is, when a small hit is won during the first time saving state, a game in which the first time saving state is repeatedly set is executed. On the other hand, when the time saving pattern is elected during the first time saving state, the selection ratio between the time saving pattern A in which the first time saving state is set and the time saving pattern B in which the second time saving state is set is 1:1. It is configured to be
Next, when the second special symbol lottery of four times executed during the first time saving state continues to come off and shifts to the second normal state, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous than during the first time saving state. Is executed a number (up to 4) corresponding to the number of special figures 2 pending. Specifically, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (second normal state), the second time saving state is set after the big win game ends at a rate of 20%. It is configured so that a small hit C, which is a small hit type, is selected. Furthermore, when the time-saving design is won, the time-saving design B in which the second time-saving state is always set is set.
In other words, it is constructed so that it is easier for the player to shift to the second time-saving state, which is most advantageous to the player, when a small win or a time-saving pattern is won in the normal state than in the first time-saving state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with a sense of anticipation until the final second special symbol lottery is executed.
Then, when the second time saving state is set, 50% of the time when a small prize is won loops the second time saving state, and the remaining 50% shifts to the first time saving state, thereby reducing the time. When the symbol is won, the time saving pattern B in which the second time saving state is set is always set.

Therefore, once the second time saving state is set, it is possible to play a game in which the second time saving state is looped with a high probability. In addition, in the present 44th control example, by configuring so that other than the second time saving state is set with a probability of 50% when a small hit is won in the second time saving state, the second time saving state for a long time However, without being limited to this, for example, as in the 41st control example described above, the time saving limit function that also has an upper limit on the number of times the time saving state is set continuously may be provided, and may be configured to forcibly shift to the normal state when the time saving state is set continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times).
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller in the forty-fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 1201 to 1204, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 44th control example will be described. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-fourth control example in that the contents defined in advance for various configurations are different. is doing. Other configurations are the same, and descriptions of the same configurations are omitted. In addition, various configurations (special symbol 1 random number table 202Fa1, special symbol 2 random number table 202Fa2, jackpot type selection table 202Fb, variation pattern selection table 202Fd, time saving grant table 202Fe, small About hit classification selection table 202Ff and time saving classification selection table 202Fh), since the use is the same as that of the 40th control example mentioned above, detailed explanation is omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 1201(a), the configuration of the special symbol 1 random number table 202Fa1 will be described. FIG. 1201(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202Fa1. This special symbol 1 random number table 202Fa1 is different from the above-described special symbol 1 random number table 202Aa1 (see FIG. 1114(a)) in that the range of the jackpot determination value is changed and the time reduction symbol determination value is deleted. There is a difference.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example is configured so that the range of values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 1000 values of "0 to 999". ~ 3” is defined to be a range determined as a big hit, and it is configured not to define a value determined as a small hit or a value determined as a time saving pattern. In other words, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of the game state that is set, the lottery is executed with a probability of 4/1000 (1/250) to determine a big win. ing.

Next, the configuration of the special symbol 2 random number table 202Fa2 will be described with reference to FIG. 1201(b). FIG. 1201(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202Fa2. This special symbol 2 random number table 202Fa2 is different from the above-described special symbol 2 random number table 202Aa2 (see FIG. 1114(b)) in that the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are changed. , It is different in that it newly defines the time saving pattern determination value. As described above, the range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is configured to be 1000 "0 to 999".
Specifically, when the obtained first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is in the range of "40 to 164", it is determined to be a small hit. A range determined as a time saving design is defined for the range of "165 to 184". That is, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of the set game state, it is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 40/1000, determined to be a small hit with a probability of 125/1000, and is determined to be a small win with a probability of 20/1000. It is configured to be determined as a time-saving design winning with a probability of 1000. - 特許庁
As described above, in the 44th control example, the first special symbol lottery that wins the jackpot with a probability of 1/250, the jackpot wins with a probability of 1/250, and the small win with a probability of 1/8. A second special symbol lottery that wins time-saving symbols with a probability of 1/50 is constituted so as to be executable, and it is advantageous to the player in any of the case of winning the jackpot, the small winning, and the time-saving symbols. It is configured so that benefits are granted. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.
Also, as described above, when the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) is set than when the normal state is set as the game state, the second special symbol lottery is executed It is configured so that it can be easily done. Therefore, the time-saving state becomes a game state (advantageous game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1201(c), the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202Fb will be described. FIG. 1201(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202Fb. As shown in FIG. 1201(c), the jackpot type selection table 202Fb is defined for each special symbol type for the jackpot type selection table 202Ab (see FIG. 1114(c)). The difference is that the content is different and that the jackpot type for the jackpot game (for the jackpot) that is executed based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the jackpot game is defined. is doing.
Specifically, for the special symbol type "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)", the jackpot type " jackpot A47” is defined, and for the special symbol type “special symbol 2 (second special symbol)”, the acquired first per type counter C2 can take the entire range of “0 to 99” , the jackpot type "jackpot C47" is defined, and the jackpot type "jackpot B47" is defined as the jackpot type for the small hit.
The jackpot type “jackpot A47” is a jackpot type in which five rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving state of four times of time-saving is set. The jackpot type “jackpot B47” is a jackpot type in which 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving state of four times of time-savings is set. The jackpot type “jackpot C47” is a jackpot type in which 10 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the second time saving state of 10 times of time saving is set.
In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the jackpot A47 is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player, and the jackpot B47 and jackpot C47 are the jackpot types that are most advantageous to the player. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, jackpot A47 and jackpot B47 are the jackpot types that are most disadvantageous to the player, and jackpot C47 is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Overall, the jackpot C47 is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player. Next, as the number of round games is large, the jackpot B47 becomes an advantageous jackpot type, and the jackpot A47 becomes the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player.

In this 44th control example, in a state where the normal state is set, a left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery is performed, and a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (winning probability 1/250). The desired game is executed. Then, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a big win type "big win 47" is set, and after the big win game is finished, a first time saving state of four times of time saving is set. Then, the second special symbol lottery executed based on the setting of the first time saving state (the second special symbol lottery four times executed during the first time saving state and the special pattern lottery executed after the normal state transition In the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved portion (maximum of 4) in FIG. will be
In other words, in the second special symbol lottery that can be executed only a specified number of times based on the setting of the time-saving state, if the big win is won before the small win is won, the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. It is configured so that "jackpot C47" is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with added value by winning the hard-to-win big win before the easy-to-win small win.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1202, the contents of the normal table 202Fd1 included in the variation pattern selection table 202Fd (not shown) will be described. FIG. 1202 shows the contents defined in the normal table 202Fd1. This normal table 202Fd1 is configured so as to be referred to only when the normal state is set with respect to the normal table 202Ad1 (see FIG. 1115(b)) in the above-described 40th control example; To show the result of special figure 2 (second special symbol) lottery, and to show the result of special figure 1 (first special symbol) lottery The difference is that the contents stipulated as the fluctuation pattern of are different.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1202, in this 44th control example, different variation patterns are configured to be selectable according to the number of variations after the game state shifts. , various variation patterns are defined at the same selection rate as the above-described 40th control example for the range of variation counts “1 to 10000”. Next, for the special figure 2, it is configured so that different variation patterns are selected for the number of variations "1 to 3", the number of variations "4", and the number of variations "5 ~". For the number of times "1 to 3", a "common fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined for the entire range of "0 to 198" that the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. 4”, a “common medium fluctuation” with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined for the entire range of “0 to 198” that the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the number of fluctuations is “5 to”. , a "common length variation" with a variation time of 100 seconds is defined for the entire range of "0 to 198" that the acquired variation type counter CS1 can take.

That is, in the forty-fourth control example, even if a right-handed game is executed in the normal state, the game ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640 (almost no ball is entered). Since the game board 13 is configured, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state becomes the second special symbol lottery using the special symbol 2 reserve acquired during the time saving state. By configuring in this way, as long as the appropriate game is played, the second special symbol lottery of the number of times greater than the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 2 reservation (for example, the second special symbol lottery of 5 times) is never executed during normal state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed more times than the upper limit number of the special figure 2 reservation, it becomes a case where an inappropriate game is being performed, and the inappropriate game is continuously performed. In order to suppress this, the configuration is such that a variation pattern with a long variation time (100 seconds) is selected.
By configuring in this way, many second special symbols are generated in a state where various configurations provided on the game board 13 have a problem (for example, a malfunction in which the electric accessory 640 is always open). It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed and the awarding of excessively many benefits to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game from illegally entering the second ball entrance 640 using a dedicated jig during the normal state from being executed for a long period of time.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this 44th control example, the contents of the time saving table 202Fd2 (not shown) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state Some have changed. Specifically, similar to the normal table 202Fd1 described above, according to the number of times of variation of the second special symbol variation, it is configured so that a variation pattern of different variation time is selected, the last of the first time saving state For the variation (second special symbol variation of the fourth rotation), a variation pattern with a longer variation time (20 seconds) than other variations (variation other than the final variation in the time saving state) is selected. , Of the 20-second variable time, the first 10 seconds are used to execute the battle production, and the remaining 10 seconds are used to execute the production for prompting acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily acquire the special figure 2 reservation in the final variation during the time saving state. In the forty-fourth control example, as the variation pattern for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery, only the variation pattern of the fixed variation time corresponding to the number of variations is selected. Without limitation, it may be possible to select a plurality of variation patterns of different variation times. In this case, for different number of times of variation, a variation pattern of the same variation time and a variation pattern of different variation times are selected. It is better to configure it so that it can be selected. By configuring in this way, the selected variation pattern tells the player how many times the second special symbol variation during execution is (how many times the variation is after the new game state is set). Since it is possible to create a situation that is easy to comprehend and a situation that is difficult to comprehend, it is possible to make the player interested in the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1203 (a), the contents of reduction in working hours grant table 202Fe are explained. Drawing 1203 (a) is a figure showing the contents specified by time saving grant table 202Fe. This time reduction grant table 202Fe is defined for the time reduction grant table 202Ae (see FIG. 1117) of the above-described 40th control example (jackpot type, time reduction design type) and time reduction grant content for each design type. are different in that they differ from each other.
Specifically, for the jackpot type "jackpot A47", "first time saving" as the time saving type, the value of the time saving counter 203h as the time saving content "10", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", the special figure 2 counter 203Ab value "4" is defined, for the jackpot type "jackpot B47", "first time saving" as the time saving type, the time saving counter 203h value "10" as the time saving grant content, small hit counter The value of 203s "1", the value of special figure 2 counter 203Ab "4" are defined, and for the jackpot type "jackpot C47", the "second time saving" as the time saving type and the time saving counter 203h as the time saving grant content The value of "20", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab "10" are defined, and the time reduction type "1st Time reduction" is defined as time reduction counter 203h value '10', small hit counter 203s value '1', special figure 2 counter 203Ab value '4', and time reduction design type 'time reduction design B47 ”, “Second time saving” is defined as the time saving type, the value of the time saving counter 203h “20” as the time saving content, the value of the small hit counter 203s “1”, and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab “10” It is
Here, the values of various counters defined as the number of times of time saving give indicate time saving end conditions with different contents, and when any counter value becomes "0", time saving end conditions are established , It is configured so that the process of ending the time saving state is executed. Specifically, the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value subtracted based on the special symbol lottery being executed during the time saving state, and when the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, or the second When the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the value is subtracted by "1". That is, the time-saving end condition established based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h is the time-saving end condition established when the total number of times obtained by adding the first special symbol variation frequency and the second special symbol variation frequency becomes a predetermined number of times. becomes.
In addition, the small hit counter 203s is a value that is subtracted based on the fact that the small hit is won during the time saving state, and when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit win (the small hit game is is executed), the value is decremented by "1". That is, the time-saving end condition established based on the value of the small hit counter 203s becomes the time-saving end condition established when the number of times the small win is won during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number. In this 44th control example, by properly executing the right-handed game during the small winning game, it is possible to reliably establish the execution opportunity of the big winning game (allow the game ball to pass through the specific area). Therefore, by providing this time-saving end condition, it is determined whether the type of the winning small winning pattern is an advantageous type for the player, and if it is determined to be a disadvantageous type, the small winning It is possible to suppress the execution of the game aiming at winning the next small hit without passing the game ball to the specific area during the game.

Finally, the special figure 2 counter 203Ab is a value that is subtracted based on the second special symbol lottery being executed during the time saving state, and when the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the value is "1" is subtracted. That is, the time-saving end condition established based on the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab becomes the time-saving end condition established when the number of second special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number.
As described above, in the forty-fourth control example, three types of time-saving end conditions can be set. Among them, as for the time-saving end condition that is established based on the winning of the small prize, since the big-hit game is actually executed even if it is established, there are 2 time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state without executing the big-hit game. be a type. Then, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab becomes the time saving end condition that is most likely to be established. Therefore, as the remaining time reduction number of times until the time saving state ends, the second special symbol variation number (remaining special figure 2 variation number) until the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the value of the special figure 2 counter 203Ab is displayed. It is configured as follows.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the number of remaining time reduction corresponding to the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation that is likely to be executed when the time reduction state is set, so that it is executed during the time reduction state The number of possible second special symbol variations can be easily understood by the player.
Also, as described above, when "second time saving (second time saving state)" is set than when "first time saving (first time saving state)" is set as the time saving type, the special figure It is configured so that the time saving end condition, which is established based on the value of the 2 counter 203Ab, is difficult to be established. That is, the second time saving state is a time saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed more often than the first time saving state. Therefore, the second time saving state becomes a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1203 (b), the contents of small hit classification selection table 202Ff are explained. Figure 1203 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202Ff. This small hit type selection table 202Ff is, with respect to the small hit type selection table 202Af (see FIG. 1118 (a)) of the 40th control example described above, the game state at the time of winning the small hit, and the acquired small hit type counter C5 It is different in that each small hit type is defined so that a different small hit type is selected corresponding to the value of. In addition, in this 44th control example, as in the 40th control example described above, since it is configured so that a small hit can be won only in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol type "special figure 2 (second special A small hit type is defined only for "symbol)".
Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is "normal (normal state)", the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 29", The type "small hit A47" is for the range of "30 to 79", the small hit type "small hit B47" is for the range "80 to 99", the small hit type "small hit C47" is defined respectively. Also. When the game state at the time of winning the small hit is "first time saving (first time saving state)", the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", the small hit type A small hit type "small hit B47" is defined for a range of "50 to 99" for "small hit A47". Finally, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is "second time saving (second time saving state)", the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", The small hit type "small hit A47" is defined for the range of "50 to 99", and the small hit type "small hit C47" is defined, respectively.
Here, each small hit classification is explained. In the forty-fourth control example, even when any of the small winning types (small winning A47, small winning B47, small winning C47) is set, a small winning game in which the V winning device 650 is opened is executed. , it is constructed so that the game ball can be easily entered into the specific area (V gate) during the small winning game. That is, in the forty-fourth control example, when a small win is won, the right to execute a substantially big win game can be obtained. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their willingness to play because the right to execute the big winning game cannot be obtained even though the small winning is won.
Then, a different jackpot type is associated with each small hit type, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are changed according to the set small hit type. Configure. In particular. When the right to execute the big winning game is acquired during the small winning game of A47, "big winning A47" is set as the kind of big winning, and when the right to execute the big winning game is acquired during the small winning game of B47. , "jackpot B47" is set as the jackpot type, and "jackpot C47" is set as the jackpot type when the right to execute the jackpot game is acquired during the jackpot game of the jackpot C47.

Since the contents of each jackpot type have been described above with reference to FIG. 1201(c), the description thereof will be omitted. It becomes a jackpot type, and "jackpot A47" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.
As described above, if you win a small hit during the second time saving state, "small hit C47" is set at a rate of 1/2, and if you win a small hit during normal state, at a rate of 1/5 " A small win C47" is set, and when a small win is won during the first time saving state, the "small win C47" is not set. Therefore, as the game state at the time when the small hit is won, the second time saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player, then the normal state is the advantageous game state, and the first time saving state is the most disadvantageous game state. Become.
In this 44th control example, since it is configured so that a small win can be won only in the second special symbol lottery, during the first time saving state set based on the fact that the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. A second special symbol lottery is first executed. Then, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is set because the jackpot type in which the first time-saving state is set after the end of the big win game is set. A right hitting game to be looped is executed.
On the other hand, when the game shifts to the normal state without winning the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the second special symbol lottery using the acquired special symbol 2 reservation is executed. If a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during this normal state, a small win C47 is set with a probability of 1/5. In other words, when the first time saving state is set, the player is more likely to win a small hit with the remaining special figure 2 pending than if the small hit is won early (during the first time saving state). It is configured so as to easily become an advantageous small hit.

By configuring in this way, when the first time-saving state is set, it is desired to execute a game with peace of mind by winning a small prize early, and it is desired to win a small prize early. Without this, the state where the remaining number of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed based on the setting of the first time saving state is small (the second special symbol lottery using the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal state is executed It is possible to provide the player with a novel game property that the player can play a game in which he/she desires to win a small prize in a state where the player is in a state where the small prize is won.
Furthermore, once the second time-saving state is set, a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established than the first time-saving state is set, and more second special symbol lotteries are executed than when the first time-saving state is set. It is constructed so that it can be made possible, and when a small win is won during the second time saving state, a small win C47 is set with a probability of 1/2. In other words, when the second time saving state is set, the second time saving state is likely to be repeatedly set with a higher probability than when another game state is set.
By configuring in this way, since the second time saving state can make the game state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state, it is motivated to set the second time saving state. can be made to play.
In addition, in this 44th control example, when the time saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed is set, rather than winning a small hit in the first half period (during the time saving state), the second half period (the remaining time in the normal state) Although it is configured so that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player when the small winning is won in the special figure 2 reservation consumption period), the second special symbol lottery is easily executed without being limited to this. When the time saving state is set, the player who wins the small prize in the first half period (during the time saving state) is more likely to win the small prize in the second half period (remaining special figure 2 retention digestion period in the normal state). may be configured to give a privilege advantageous to By configuring in this way, the situation where the remaining number of times that the second special symbol lottery can be executed remains large, that is, the timing without thinking deeply about the result of the second special symbol lottery executed this time, When the player wins a small prize at a timing when it is difficult for the player to concentrate on the game, a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so immediately after the time-saving state is set, the player is interested in the result of the second special symbol lottery. can have

Next, with reference to Drawing 1204, the contents of time saving classification selection table 202Fh are explained. Drawing 1204 is a figure showing typically the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection table 202Fh. This time-saving type selection table 202Fh is different from the time-saving type selection table 202Ah (see FIG. 1118(b)) in the above-described 40th control example, which is defined for each game state. They are different in that respect.
Specifically, when the normal state and the second time saving state are set as the gaming state, the first per type counter C2 can take the entire range of "0 to 99", as the time saving symbol type " Time saving pattern B47” is defined, and when the first time saving state is set as the gaming state, the time saving pattern type for the entire range of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first per type counter C2 "Time saving pattern A47" is defined as. That is, when the time saving pattern is elected in the second special pattern lottery executed during the normal state or the second time saving state, the time saving pattern B47 is always set, and the second special executed during the first time saving state When the time saving pattern is won in the pattern lottery, the time saving pattern A47 is always set.
Here, the contents of the time saving state given when each time saving pattern type is set are described above with reference to FIG. In this case, the first time-saving state of four times of time-saving is set, and when the time-saving pattern B47 is set, the second time-saving state of ten times of time-saving is set. In this 44th control example, as described above, the second time saving state is configured to be a time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state, so the time saving pattern in the second special symbol lottery As for the degree of advantage of the game state when winning, the normal state and the second time saving state are the most advantageous game state for the player, and the first time saving state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player.
In addition, in this 44th control example, as shown in FIG. 1204, when the time saving pattern is won in the normal state and when the time saving pattern is won in the second time saving state, the second time saving state is always set. However, without being limited to this, the first time saving state and the second time saving state can be set in any game state, and the selection ratio is changed according to the game state. It can be configured as follows. In this case, when the time saving pattern is won in the normal state where the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed is small, the second time saving state is set more easily than when the time saving pattern is won in the second time saving state. Good to configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with added value by winning the time-saving symbol within a limited short period of time.

On the other hand, the second time saving state may be set more easily when the time saving pattern is won in the second time saving state than when the time saving pattern is won in the normal state. By configuring in this way, the second time saving state can be easily set repeatedly, so that the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the second time saving state. .
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device in the forty-fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example will be described. The forty-fourth control example differs from the fortieth control example described above in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other elements are the same, and descriptions of the same contents are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 1205, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the forty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 1205 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1205, the RAM 223 in the forty-fourth control example differs from the above-described RAM 223 in the fortieth control example (see FIG. 1119 (b)) in the final effect counter 223Fa, the remaining time short counter 223Fb, is added, and other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
The final effect counter 223Fa is a counter for indicating that the final countdown effect is being executed, and when the execution opportunity of the final countdown effect is established (when the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends). , the value "9" corresponding to the number of times of the second special symbol lottery (8 times) executed during the final countdown effect is set (see S3410F in Fig. 1206). Then, the value is subtracted by "1" each time the process for setting a new variable effect is executed during the final countdown effect (see S4403F in Fig. 1208).

When the value of the counter 223Fa during the final effect is "1" or more (larger than "0"), it is a period during which the final countdown effect is being executed. Then, at various timings for setting the variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223Fa during the final performance is greater than 0, and the performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on the determination result. .
In the forty-fourth control example, during the period in which the final countdown effect is being executed, any of the first time-saving state, the second time-saving state, and the normal state can be set as the game state. The effect mode of the variable effect to be executed during the game is determined differently depending on the presence or absence of the final countdown effect. By configuring in this way, regardless of the game state that has been set, it is possible to execute a variable production (battle production) with a sense of unity during the period in which the final countdown production is executed.
The remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is a counter for indicating the number of remaining time reductions in the currently set time reduction state (second special symbol lottery number of times that can be executed until the time reduction end condition is satisfied), and the time reduction state is set. In the state command processing (see S3231F in FIG. 1206) that is executed when a state command is received to indicate that the value of the remaining time reduction number corresponding to the type of time reduction state set this time is set ( See S3409F in FIG. 1206 and S3503F in FIG. 1207). Then, every time the second special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state, the value is subtracted by "1" (see S4406F in FIG. 1208).
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the forty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1206 to 1211, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example will be described. In the forty-fourth control example, the content of the control processing executed when receiving the state command and the special symbol variation corresponding to the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-fourth control example described above The difference is that the contents of the control processing for setting the effects have been changed. More specifically, instead of the state command processing (see S3231B of FIG. 1130), the state command processing (S3231F of FIG. 1206) is replaced with the variable performance setting processing (see S4304B of FIG. 1132), and the variable performance setting processing (S4304F in FIG. 1208) are executed respectively. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the contents of the control processing of the state command processing (S3231F) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1206 is a flow chart showing the contents of the state command process (S3231F). This state command processing (S3231F) is control processing executed when it is determined that a state command has been received from main controller 110, similar to the above-described state command processing (see S3232B in FIG. 1130). A process is executed according to the contents of the status command.
Specifically, when the state command process (S3231F) is executed, first, the information contained in the received state command is analyzed, and the information for indicating the current game state is stored in the subsidiary game state storage area 223g. (S3401). After that, based on the information included in the status command received this time, it is determined whether the game state has shifted to the normal state (S3402). If it is determined that information corresponding to the normal state is included in (S3402: Yes), then clear the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h (S3421A), hold special symbol 2 Based on the value of the number of balls counter 223c, it is determined whether it is in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation (S3401F), and when it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation (S3401F: Yes), the normal state Since it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery even after the shift, this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the processing of S3401F, if it is determined that there is no special figure 2 reservation, that is, the normal state is set without allowing the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery. If so (S3401F: No), the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is cleared to 0 (S3402F) as processing for ending the final countdown effect without executing the battle effect for the number of times set in advance (S3402F). A display command to indicate the end of the final countdown effect is set (S3403F), the value of the remaining short time counter 223Fb is cleared to 0 (S3404F), and a back image command for display indicating the back image for normal mode is set. (S3405F), and the process ends.
Also, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that it does not transition to the normal state (S3402: No), then it is determined whether it has transitioned to the first time saving state (S3406F), and if it is determined that it has transitioned (S3406F : Yes), the time saving information included in the received state command is stored in the time saving information update area 223h (S3407F), the back image command for display indicating the back image for the final countdown effect is set (S3408F), and the number of remaining time saving times The value of the counter 223Fb is set to 4 (S3409F), the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is set to 9 (S3410F), and this processing ends.

In the process of S3406, if it is determined that it does not move to the first time saving state (S3406F: No), it is determined whether it has moved to the second time saving state (S3411F), and if it is determined that it has moved to the second time saving state (S3411F: Yes), the second time saving state transition processing (S3412F) is executed, and this processing ends. Moreover, in the process of S3411F, when it discriminate|determines not having shifted to the 2nd time saving state (S3411F:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1207, the processing contents of the 2nd time saving state transition processing (S3412F) performed by state command processing (refer to S3231F of Drawing 1206) are explained. Figure 1207 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of the 2nd time saving state transition processing (S3412F). In this second time saving state transition process (S3412F), it is determined whether or not to display the number of remaining time saving times according to the effect being executed (whether there is a final countdown effect) at the time of transition to the second time saving state. Processing is performed.
When the second time saving state transition process (S3412F) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the secondary game state storage area 223g (S3501F), and the time saving information included in the received state command is stored in the time saving information update area 223h. Store (S3502F), and set the value corresponding to the received time saving information to the value of the remaining time saving counter 223Fb (S3503F).
Then, it is determined whether the value of the final effect in-progress counter 223Fa is greater than 0, that is, whether the final countdown effect is being executed (S3504F). Since the number of times of working hours is not displayed, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3504F, if it is determined that the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if it is determined that the final countdown effect is not currently being executed. (S3504F: No), the production mode of the additional production corresponding to the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is determined (S3505F), and this processing is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1208, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304F) will be described. FIG. 1208 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304F). In this variable production setting process (S4304F), the process of updating the values of various counters at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is started, and the process of determining the production mode of the variable production according to the set game state. and is executed.
Specifically, when the variable effect setting process (S4304F) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is greater than 0 (S4401F), and if it is determined to be greater (S4401F: Yes ), Next, it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is the special figure 2 variation (S4402F). In the process of S4402F, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation (S4402F: Yes), the value of the counter 223Fa during final production is subtracted by 1 (S4403F), and the process proceeds to S4404F.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4401F, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223Fa during the final production is not greater than 0 (S4401F: No), or in the processing of S4402F, if it is determined that there is no special figure 2 fluctuation (S4402F : No), the process proceeds to S4404F.

In the processing of S4404F, it is determined whether the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is greater than 1 (S4404F), and if it is determined that it is greater (S4404F: Yes), is this special symbol variation special figure 2 variation? is determined (S4405F). In the processing of S4405F, if it is determined that it is a special figure 2 fluctuation (S4405F: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining time short counter 223Fb (S4406F), and the process proceeds to S4407F.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4404F, if it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is not greater than 1 (S4404F: No), or in the processing of S4405F, if it is determined that there is no special figure 2 fluctuation (S4405F : No), the process proceeds directly to S4407F.
In the processing of S4407F, the current game state is read out from the secondary game state storage area 223g (S4407F), it is determined whether the game state is the first time saving state (S4408F), and if it is determined that it is the first time saving state (S4408F: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is a time-saving design winning (S4409F), and if it is determined that the time-saving design is winning (S4409F: Yes), production at the time of time-saving design winning Setting processing is executed (S4410F), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4409F, if it is determined that the time saving symbol has not been won (S4409F: No), the production mode of the fluctuation production is determined based on the lottery result of the fluctuation and the extracted fluctuation pattern (S4411F), End this process.
Also, in the processing of S4408F, if it is determined that it is not the first time saving state (S4408F: No), then it is determined whether the gaming state is the second time saving state (S4412F), and if it is the second time saving state When it is determined (S4412F: Yes), the second time saving state effect setting process is executed (S4413F), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4412F, if it is determined that it is not the second time saving state (normal state) (S4412F: No), the normal state effect setting process is executed (S4414F), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1209, the processing contents of the effect setting processing (S4410F) at the time of time saving symbol winning will be described. FIG. 1209 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting processing (S4410F) at the time of winning the time-saving design. In this time saving pattern winning production setting process (S4410F), processing for determining the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation in the case where the time saving pattern is won in the state where the first time saving state is set is executed. be.
Specifically, when the production setting process (S4410F) at the time of winning the time saving pattern is executed, the time saving type (time saving pattern type) won this time is read (S4501F), and the read time saving type is working time saving A (working time saving pattern A). It is determined whether there is (S4502F). In the processing of S4502F, if it is determined that it is time saving A (S4502F: Yes), the value of the final production counter 223Fa is set to 9 (S4503F), and the production mode in which the remaining number of final countdown production increases to 9 It decides (S4504F) and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the processing of S4502F, if it is determined that it is not the time saving A (S4502F: No), the production mode of the fluctuation production is determined based on the lottery result of the fluctuation and the extracted fluctuation pattern (S4505F), and this processing exit.
As described above, if the special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is elected to the time-saving design of the time-saving A (time-saving design type in which the first time-saving state is set), the final countdown production remains. It is configured so as to execute an effect that increases the number of times. By configuring in this way, the final variation period of the first short time state during the final countdown production can be fixed to the timing when the value of the counter 223Fa is 5 during the final production.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1210, the processing contents of the 2nd time saving state production setting processing (S4413F) are explained. Figure 1210 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of the 2nd time saving state production setting processing (S4413F). In this second time saving state effect setting process (S4413F), the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) executed during the second time saving state is changed according to the effect contents being executed. A process of determining differently is performed.
Specifically, when the second time saving state production setting process (S4413F) is executed, first, the value of the final production counter 223Fa is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the final countdown production is currently being performed. Then (S4601F), if it is determined that the value of the counter 223Fa during the final effect is greater than 0 (S4601F: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the counter 223Fa during the final effect is 0 (S4602F). That is, in the process of S4602F, it is determined whether the change is the final change of the final countdown effect.
In the process of S4602F, when it is determined that the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is 0 (S4602F: Yes), the value of the short remaining time counter 223Fb is read (S4603F), and the read value of the short remaining time counter 223Fb It is determined whether it is greater than 1 (S4604F). In the processing of S4604F, if it is not greater than 1, that is, if it is determined that the time saving state ends due to the variation (S4604F: No), the end timing of the final countdown effect and the end timing of the time saving state match Therefore, without determining the production mode of the additional production to indicate that the time saving state (second time saving state) continues even after the end of the final countdown production, the lottery result of the fluctuation and the extracted fluctuation pattern Based on this, the production mode of the variable production is determined (S4606F), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S4604F, if it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223Fb is greater than 1 (S4604F: Yes), the second time reduction state continues when the final countdown effect ends, The value corresponding to the difference (the value indicating the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction state at the end of the final countdown production) is determined as the second half production (S4605F), and the processing of S4606F described above is performed. and terminate this process.

Also, in the process of S4601F, if the value of the final effect counter 223Fa is not greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the present is not in the final countdown effect (S4601F: No), then the special symbol change of this time (S4607F), and if it is determined that the time reduction symbol has not been won (S4607F: No), the process of S4606F is executed and the process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4607F that the reduction in working hours is won (S4607: Yes), the effect mode for suggesting the addition of the number of reduction in remaining working hours is determined (S4608F), and this processing ends.
Now refer to FIG. The processing contents of the normal state effect setting processing (S4414F) will be explained. FIG. 1211 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state effect setting process (S4414F). In this normal state effect setting process (S4414F), the process of determining the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the normal state is changed according to the effect contents being executed.
Specifically, when the normal state effect setting process (S4414F) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is the special figure 2 variation (S4701F), and it is not the special figure 2 variation (special figure 1 variation) is determined (S4701F: No), the effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4706F), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S4701F, if it is determined to be special figure 2 fluctuation (S4701F: Yes), then the value of the counter 223Fa during the final production is greater than 0, that is, the special acquired during the time saving state If it is determined whether it is special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state using FIG. It is determined whether the value of the counter 223Fa during the final effect is 1, that is, whether it is the final variation of the final countdown effect (S4703F), and if it is determined to be 1 (S4703F: Yes), the final countdown effect ends. is determined as the second half effect (S4704F), the process of S4706F is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S4702F, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223Fa during the final effect is not greater than 0 (S4702F: No), the final countdown effect is not executed, and the second special symbol Since this is a case where variation has been executed, a display command for displaying a warning image is set (S4705F), and the process proceeds to S4706F. That is, in the forty-fourth control example, even if a right-handed game is played during the normal state, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, and the final countdown effect is performed. When the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the normal state other than the middle, when the player illegally enters the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, or the electric accessory 640a breaks down and is always open state. If the game is allowed to continue while such a situation is left unattended, the player will be given an excessive amount of benefits. It makes it easier for them to understand what they are doing. Although detailed description is omitted, when the process of S4705F is executed, the abnormality notification is also output by voice. This makes it easier for the hall clerk to grasp that an abnormal situation has occurred.
<Regarding the first modification of the forty-fourth control example>
Next, a first modification of the forty-fourth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1212 to 1217. FIG. In the forty-fourth control example described above, the effect period of one battle effect executed during the final countdown effect is configured to be 10 seconds regardless of the result of the target special symbol lottery. Then, in the case of a lottery result (time-saving pattern winning, losing) other than winning (big win, small win), a defeat effect in which the ally character 801F is defeated is executed as a result of the battle effect. By making it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the time-saving pattern is won, it can be executed at the timing when the final countdown performance ends, that is, the first time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game. At the timing when the second special symbol lottery is executed for the number of times (eight times), the game is played by allowing the player to play while expecting that the time saving state will continue (the time saving symbol was won on the way). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play.
On the other hand, in the first modification, it is possible to select a variation pattern of different variation time according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to execute the battle production in a different production mode according to the selected variation pattern. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the presence or absence of time-saving symbol winning by grasping the effect mode of the battle effect.
In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is out, it is longer than the normal variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds when it is winning or when the short-time symbol is winning. The variation pattern (variation time of 20 seconds) is configured to be easily selected, and the battle effect (battle effect of unleashing a special move) is configured to be executable in the effect mode dedicated to the long variation pattern, so during the final countdown effect To make a player look at the performance with interest while expecting a win when the battle performance of performing a special move is executed. In addition, even if the ally character 801F is defeated in the battle production of performing a special move, the player can expect that the time-saving pattern has been won, so the player's willingness to play is reduced until the final countdown production ends. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the first modification, the second special symbol reservation memory (special figure 2 reservation) is prefetched, and the period during which a plurality of second special symbol variations are executed based on the prefetch result is 1. Execution of battle production It is configured to be a period. In other words, the result of a plurality of consecutive second special symbol lotteries can be notified by the effect result of one battle effect (combi battle effect). With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of executions of the battle effect in which the ally character 801F is defeated, so it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from deteriorating.
In addition, it is constructed so that the combination battle performance is more likely to be executed in the case of winning winning or time-saving pattern winning than in the case that the look-ahead result using the acquired special figure 2 reservation is lost. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the battle performance while expecting to win a winning prize or a time-saving symbol prize at the time when the combination battle performance is executed.
In addition, in the first modification, in the second special symbol lottery executed when a specific game state (for example, second time saving state) is set as the game state during the final countdown production, a specific time saving pattern When winning a time-saving pattern whose type (for example, time-saving pattern B47) is set, the background change performance for switching the background image of the battle performance to a special background image (for example, heavenly background) can be executed.
In this case, the production content of the battle production is the same as the normal battle production (defeat production in which the ally character 801F is defeated), but since the background change production is executed, the player is notified that the time saving pattern has been won. It can be made easier to understand.

As described above, in the first modified example of the forty-fourth control example, the effect result of each battle effect executed during the final countdown effect is changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example described above. However, the difference is that various variations are added as the performance contents of each battle performance, and a second special symbol lottery corresponding to various timings when the battle performance is executed is provided to the player. It is configured to be able to provide the enjoyment of predicting the results of Since the configuration other than the configuration related to the content described above is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding the contents of the effect in the first modification of the forty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1212 and 1213, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example, a characteristic effect different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example described above. explain the contents of FIG. 1212(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a long battle effect displayed when a long variation of 20 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol lottery executed during the final countdown effect. FIG. 1212(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the combination battle effect is executed during the final countdown effect, and FIG. 1213 shows a background change effect during the final countdown effect. is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when is executed.
First, with reference to FIG. 1212(a), the effect contents of the long battle effect will be described. This long battle effect is a battle effect executed when a long variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the corresponding second special symbol variation. In FIG. 1212(a), the 6th second special symbol variation is performed after the final countdown effect is performed, and the display screen during the long variation period in which the short time symbol is won during the normal state is shown.
As shown in FIG. 1212(a), in the vicinity of the center of the main display area Dm, a battle effect is started in which the friend character 801F6 corresponding to the sixth second special symbol lottery confronts the enemy character E1. In this battle production (long battle production) and the normal battle production, the production is executed in the same production mode until two seconds have elapsed since the battle production was started. After the lapse of seconds, the allied character 801F6 launches an attack, and an action of unleashing a special move is executed. be.

After that, either the first effect in which the special move explodes at the enemy or the second effect in which the enemy evades is executed. A fourth effect is executed in which the character does not fall down and counterattacks. On the other hand, when the second effect is executed, the fifth effect is executed in which the enemy character E1 attacks the ally character 801F6 with a counter.
In FIG. 1212 (a), the results of the 1st to 5th second special symbol lottery are all out, and the second special symbol lottery after moving to the normal state Long based on winning the time saving symbol in the second special symbol lottery Since the battle effect is being executed, the effect of defeating the enemy (third effect) is not executed, the fourth effect is executed after the first effect is executed, and the defeat effect of defeating the ally character 801F6 is executed. be done. Although the details will be described later, the ratio of selecting the long variation pattern as the variation pattern for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery for the second time after moving to the normal state is that the result of the special symbol lottery is out. It is about 2% (4/199) of the case, and it is configured to be about 90% (189/199) when the time saving pattern is elected.
In addition, the probability that the result of the second special symbol lottery will be lost is about 85% (851/1000), which is the same as the above-described 44th control example, and the probability that the time saving symbol will be won is 2% (20/1000 ). That is, when the defeat effect is executed in the long battle effect, the probability that the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is lost is higher than the probability that the time saving symbol is won. Therefore, even if the battle effect resulting in the effect of defeating the enemy is executed, the game can be played without lowering the player's desire to play until the final countdown effect ends, expecting that the time-saving pattern has been won. can be done.
When the final countdown effect ends while the time saving state continues, an additional effect is executed in the same manner as in the forty-fourth control example described above.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the first modified example, the above-described plurality of production patterns (the second production to the fifth production are executed) as the production contents during the long battle production that is the defeat production. 1 performance pattern, a second performance pattern in which the first performance to the fourth performance are executed) can be set, and the selection ratio of each performance pattern is different according to the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery. I'm letting Specifically, the long variation pattern in which the lottery result is out is more likely to set the first production pattern than the long variation pattern in which the lottery result is a time-saving symbol winning, and the second production pattern is less likely to be set. It consists of
By configuring in this way, when the defeat performance of the second performance pattern is executed, the player can expect to win the time-saving symbol more than when the defeat performance of the first performance pattern is executed. On the other hand, not only whether or not the long battle effect is executed and the result of the effect, but also the process of effect (effect pattern) can be made interesting, and the effect of effect can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1212(b), the effect contents of the combination battle effect will be described. This combination battle production is a battle production executed using the fluctuation time of a plurality of continuous second special symbol fluctuations, and the production result of the battle production in which the result of the target plurality of second special symbol lotteries is 1. is reported as Specifically, when setting the production mode of the battle production corresponding to the new second special symbol variation (when determining the production mode of the variation production), hit in the acquired special figure 2 pending, or A process of determining whether or not winning information corresponding to time-saving symbol winning is included and setting the effect mode of the combination battle effect based on the determination result is executed.
In FIG. 1212 (b), the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (special figure 2 reservation icon hr5) corresponding to the next variation contains information indicating the time saving pattern winning in which the time saving pattern A is set. Based on this, it shows the display screen in which the combination battle effect using the second special symbol variation period (20 seconds in total) of the variation (10 seconds variation) and the next variation (10 variations) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 1212(b), when the combination battle effect is executed, the ally characters 801F6 and 801F7 corresponding to the stock icons ms6 and ms7 corresponding to the target second special symbol variation form a combination. An effect of attacking the enemy character E1 is executed, and in the secondary display area Ds, the second special symbol lottery is being executed (executed) in which the combination battle effect is advantageous to the player. The characters "Attack with a combination!! Big chance!!" are displayed.
To explain the effect content of the combination battle effect more specifically, during the first half period of the effect period of the combination battle effect (the second special symbol fluctuation period of the sixth time), "remaining 3 times" is displayed above the main display area Dm. Characters are displayed, and the friendly character 801F6 launches an attack on the enemy character E1. Then, when the second half period (the 7th second special symbol variation period) is reached, the characters "Two times left" are displayed above the display area Dm, and an effect is executed in which the friendly character 801F7 launches a follow-up attack on the enemy character E1. be done.
In other words, an effect is executed in which the friendly character 801F attacks continuously a plurality of times without being counterattacked by the enemy character E1. By executing such an effect, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the combination battle effect is an effect that is advantageous to the player, because the effect that makes it easy to defeat the enemy character E1 is executed.
Although detailed explanation is omitted, the type of the friendly character 801F forming a combination in the combination battle production is configured to be determined based on the result of the second special symbol lottery (prefetching result) targeted for the combination battle production. A combination of types that are easily determined when the result of the second special symbol lottery (prefetching result) that is the target of the combination battle production is a result that is advantageous to the player, and a combination of types that is difficult to be determined. At least configured to be determinable. By configuring in this way, when this combination battle effect is executed and a plurality of allied characters 801F are displayed, the result of the current combination battle effect and the second special symbol lottery for the combination battle effect are displayed. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the result of (read-ahead result).

Furthermore, although not shown, it is also possible to execute a trio battle production in which up to three ally characters 801F fight together. configured to be higher. In this case, three friendly characters 801F may be displayed from the start of the battle production, or a third friendly character 801F may appear in the course of the combination battle production. Also good.
As described above, in the first modified example, in contrast to the forty-fourth control example described above, instead of a battle effect for a fixed period (10 seconds), a battle effect using 20 seconds is provided. production, combination battle production) are configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting not only the presence or absence of winning, but also the presence or absence of time-saving pattern winning for the contents of individual battle effects executed during the final countdown effect. We can provide innovative performances.
In addition to the various battle effects used in the first modified example, the following battle effects may be executed. For example, as a look-ahead effect, when two consecutive second special symbol variations are both 10-second variations, a long battle effect may be configured to be executable, and a long variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds may be configured. When selected, the combination battle effect may be configured to be executable.
In addition, using the look-ahead result used in the first modification, the type of the enemy character E1 and the display mode may be changed. If the information is included, in the battle production corresponding to the second special symbol lottery before the second special symbol lottery based on the winning information is executed, an enemy character E1 different from usual (for example, 1212(b), etc.), and the display mode of the enemy character E1, which is different from the normal display mode, is continuously displayed in a plurality of battle effects. Then, it may be configured to increase the possibility that winning information for winning or winning a time-saving design is included in the reserved special figure 2 that has already been acquired.

By configuring in this way, when a display mode different from the normal display mode is displayed as the display mode of the enemy character E1, the second special symbol lottery to be executed later has a lottery result (such as winning or It is possible to keep the player interested in the game while making him/her expect to win the time-saving pattern.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1213, the contents of the background change effect during the final countdown effect will be described. FIG. 1213 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the background change effect. This background change effect is an effect capable of notifying the player of the time-saving pattern winning by switching the background image without changing the effect content of the battle effect.
As described above, in the battle production executed during the final countdown production, the production for indicating whether the target second special symbol lottery is hit or not is executed. In other words, when the win is not made, the same effect (defeat effect) as in the case of loss is produced.
Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the time-saving symbol has been won from the performance result of the battle performance. However, as the performance result of the battle performance, when the same performance result (winning performance) as when winning the time-saving pattern winning is set, the winning game is not executed even though the winning performance is executed. There was a problem that it gave discomfort to.

Furthermore, when a performance result dedicated to the time-saving pattern winning is provided, there is a problem that the battle performance itself becomes a performance difficult for the player to understand and the performance effect is lowered. Therefore, in the first modified example, as a battle effect, the effect mode for indicating the presence or absence of winning to the player can be determined, and the background image is switched at least in part when the time-saving pattern is won. Background change production is configured to be executable.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the presence or absence of winning during the battle performance and the presence or absence of winning of the time-saving symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.
As shown in FIG. 1213, when the background change effect is executed, a background imitating heaven is displayed as the background image of the battle effect, and the characters "The background is heaven! You might be lucky" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. be done. A defeat effect is executed as the battle effect being executed.
In the first modified example, the background change performance is not necessarily executed when the time saving pattern is won, but the execution condition of the background change performance is established partly when the time saving pattern is won. By constructing in this way, even in the battle performance in which the background change performance is not executed, the performance can be executed without impairing the expectation for the time-saving symbol winning.

Furthermore, in the first modification, when the second special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state wins the time saving pattern in which the time saving pattern B is set, that is, at the end timing of the final countdown production, many When the second time saving state with the number of remaining time saving times remaining (at least 10 times or more) can continue, the execution condition of the background change effect is established.
By configuring in this way, when the background change performance is executed and the heaven background is displayed, the next jackpot game can be executed with a high probability, and the second time-saving state advantageous to the player is repeated. Since the player can be made aware of the high possibility of being set, the effect of production can be enhanced.
<Regarding the electrical configuration of the first modified example in the forty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1214, of the electrical configuration in the first modification of the forty-fourth control example, the configuration different from the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fourth control example described above will be described. The first modification of the forty-fourth control example is different from the forty-fourth control example described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is different. Specifically, the difference is that a normal table 202Fad1 is used instead of the normal table 202Fd1 (see FIG. 1202). Other configurations are the same, and descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1214, the contents of normal table 202Fad1 will be described. FIG. 1214 is a diagram showing the contents defined in normal table 202Fad1. As shown in Figure 1214, in the normal table 202Fad1, for the normal table 202Fd1 (see Figure 1202) described above, defined in the data table referred to when determining the variation pattern of special figure 2 variation The difference is that the contents of the two are different.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations is "1 to 3" and the lottery result is "big hit, lose", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates within the range of "0 to 194" A “common variation” with a time of 10 seconds is defined, and a “long variation” with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined for the range of “195 to 198”. In addition, when the lottery result is "small win", "common variation" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined for the range of the acquired variation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 149", A “long variation” with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined for the range of “150 to 198”. In addition, when the lottery result is "time saving pattern", "common variation" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 19", A “long variation” with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined for the range of “20 to 198”.
Furthermore, when the number of fluctuations is "4" and the lottery result is "big hit, lose", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds for the entire range of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" A "common medium variation" of Further, when the lottery result is "small win", "common medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined for the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149". , “150 to 198”, a “normal variation” with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined. In addition, when the lottery result is "time saving pattern", "common medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined for the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 59". , “60 to 198”, a “special variation” with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined.
<Regarding control processing contents of the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the forty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1215 to 1217, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the forty-fourth control example will be described. In the first modification, in place of the second time saving state production setting processing (S4413F in FIG. 1210), the second time saving state production setting processing (S4413Fa in FIG. The difference is that the normal state effect setting process (S5709Fa in FIG. 1217) is executed instead of the state effect setting process (see S4414F in FIG. 1211), and the rest is the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to Drawing 1215, the processing contents of the 2nd time saving state production setting processing (S4413Fa) are explained. Figure 1215 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of the 2nd time saving state production setting processing (S4413Fa). In this second time saving state production setting process (S4413Fa), when it is determined that the value of the final production counter 223Fa is not 0 for the second time saving state production setting process (S4413F in FIG. 1210) described above, special background The difference is that the setting process (S4601Fa) is executed, but the other control process contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the special background setting processing (S4601Fa) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1216 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special background setting processing (S4601Fa). In this special background setting process (S4601Fa), in the state in which the second time saving state is set, based on the winning of the time saving pattern (time saving B) in which the second time saving state is set, the number of remaining time saving times is large. A process for setting an effect mode (see FIG. 1213) to indicate that there are remaining is executed.
When the special background setting process (S4601Fa) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving has been elected (S4651Fa). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving has been won (S4651Fa: Yes), it is determined whether the time saving pattern type that has been won is the time saving pattern B (S4652Fa), and if it is determined to be the time saving pattern B (S4652Fa: Yes) , a back image command for display indicating a back image for heaven background is set (S4653Fa), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time saving pattern B (S4652Fa: No), the background image transition lottery is executed (S4654Fa), and if it is determined that the background image is transitioned (S4655Fa: Yes), the process of S4653Fa and terminate this process. If it is not determined that the background image has been transferred (S4655Fa: No), this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1217, the processing contents of the normal state effect setting processing (S5709Fa) will be described. FIG. 1217 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state effect setting process (S5709Fa). In this normal state effect setting process (S5709Fa), the process content for determining the effect mode to be executed during the final countdown effect is different from the above-described normal state effect setting process (see S4414F in FIG. 1211). There is a difference.

Specifically, when the normal state effect setting process (S5709Fa) is executed, the same S4701F to S4703F processes as the normal state effect setting process (see S4414F in FIG. 1211) are executed, and in the process of S4703F, If it is determined that the value of the counter 223Fa during the final effect is not 1 (S4703F: No), the winning prize information reserved for the special figure 2 is read from the winning prize information storage area 223a (S4701Fa), and the winning prize information corresponding to the small winning is included. (S4702Fa). Then, if it is determined that there is a small hit information (S4702Fa: Yes), the continuous production (combi battle production, etc.) using the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation that wins the small hit is stopped and displayed is selected by lottery ( Winning probability about 1/10) (S4703Fa), it is determined whether or not there is a continuous effect (S4704Fa), and if it is determined that there is a continuous effect (S4704Fa: Yes), this processing ends as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S4704Fa, if it is determined that there is no continuous effect (S4704Fa: No), the effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on the lottery result of the change and the extracted change pattern (S4706F), and this process is executed. finish. Also, in the process of S4702Fa, when it is determined that there is no small hit information (S4702Fa: No), the effect mode of the continuous effect is determined with a low probability (1/60) (S4705Fa), and the process proceeds to S4704Fa.
By configuring in this way, by the look-ahead processing (S4701Fa), if you have a special figure 2 reservation to win a small hit, it will be easier to execute continuous production (combi battle production etc.), continuous production is executed, the degree of expectation for winning can be increased, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.
In the processing of S4703F, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223Fa during the final effect is 1 (S4703F: Yes), it is determined whether the current variation pattern is "special variation" (S4706Fa), and it is a special variation If it is determined (S4706Fa: Yes), the effect mode indicating the short-time winning is determined (S4707Fa), and the process ends. If it is determined that there is no special fluctuation (S4706Fa: No), the process proceeds to S4704F, then executes the process of S4706, and ends this process.

As described above, in the 44th control example and the first modification of the 44th control example, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state and the second special executed after the time saving state ends A pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery executed based on the remaining special figure 2 reservation) and an effect for showing the lottery result are executed using a predetermined first period effect (final countdown effect). Even if a new time saving symbol is won during the first period performance, the predetermined performance period is used without informing the player that the number of remaining time reduction times has increased at that time. After the first period performance to be executed is finished, the second period performance (additional performance) using the remaining number of times of time reduction is executed.
By constructing in this way, even when the time-saving symbol is won on the way, it is possible to provide a suitable performance to the player without lowering the performance effect of the first period performance.
In addition, in the above-described 44th control example, the timing of notifying the remaining time reduction number of times is changed according to the situation at the time of winning the time reduction symbol lottery, but various numbers of times set for the special symbol lottery ( The number of special symbol lotteries, the number of jackpot wins, the number of small wins, etc.) and the number of rights to execute the special symbol lottery that has already been acquired (the number of special symbol reservations) The notification timing may be set differently depending on the situation.
In this case, for example, it is configured so that the conditions that can be notified are established based on the switching of the game state, and other game situations at the time when the game state is switched (for example, execution of special symbol variation, specific It may be configured to vary the notification timing depending on whether or not special symbol variation is executed for the special symbol type (special symbol type on the side that is difficult to be executed in the game state after switching), and the game state after switching (normal state), the special symbol type (second Special symbol) may be configured to be displayed after the special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is all digested.

In addition, in the above-described forty-fourth control example, as the variable performance executed during the time saving state, the performance for indicating whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit is preferentially executed, and the time saving symbol winning is performed. The variable performance that executes (does not execute) the performance to indicate whether or not it is performed is mainly executed, and when a specific condition is established, the time-saving pattern winning is given priority over the performance showing the small winning. It is configured to execute a production for showing.
In this way, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance by configuring the variable performance to be executable with a different priority from the variable performance that is usually mainly executed.
Here, referring to FIGS. 1218 to 1220, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to give a plurality of types of benefits based on one special symbol lottery, a variable performance effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. An additional example explains the setting contents of the mode.
In this additional example, it is configured to be able to execute determination of jackpot election and determination of time-saving symbol election by special symbol lottery. Since any of the configurations described in the above-described control examples is applied to detailed control contents and electrical configuration, description thereof will be omitted.

In this additional example, as a production mode for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, a production mode (jackpot suggestion production mode) for indicating the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, and a production mode for indicating the presence or absence of the time-saving design winning (time-saving design Suggestion mode) and can be set independently or in combination.
FIG. 1218(a) is a diagram showing a display screen regarding a jackpot suggesting effect mode, and FIG. 1218(b) is a diagram showing a display screen regarding a time saving symbol suggesting effect mode. In the case of a normal effect pattern, when the 90-second variation pattern is set as the variation pattern, effect pattern A or effect pattern B shown in FIG. 1220(a) is set.
That is, as a result of the 60-second super ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. 1218(a), the medium pattern Z3b is stopped and displayed instead of the display mode (777) indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the display screen shown in FIG. 1219 is displayed. After that, the reduction in working hours suggesting effect shown in FIG. 1218(b) is executed. That is, in the variable performance of the performance pattern A, the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot is preferentially notified to the player, and then the presence or absence of the time-saving symbol winning is notified to the player.
In addition, in the production pattern B shown in FIG. 1220 (b), it is a variable production in which the jackpot suggestion production mode is set using all of the fluctuation time 90 seconds, and in this case also, the presence or absence of the jackpot winning is determined by the time saving pattern winning. It becomes a variable performance that notifies the player with priority over the presence or absence of.

For such a configuration, for example, it is preferable to configure the effect pattern C shown in FIG. 1220(c) to be settable. In other words, as the variable performance (30 seconds), it is preferable to configure the variable performance in which only the time saving pattern performance mode is set without setting the jackpot suggestive performance mode. By constructing in this way, the player can be notified of the presence or absence of the time-saving pattern winning with priority over the presence or absence of the big win winning, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected presentation. Furthermore, the effect pattern D shown in FIG. 1220(d) may be configured to be settable.
In this case, the display screen shown in FIG. 1219 is displayed after executing the time-saving design suggestion production shown in FIG. 1218(b), and then the jackpot suggestion production shown in FIG. good to do By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute a variable effect in which the priority is changed from the normal effect pattern (effect pattern A), the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.
<Forty-fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1221 to 1260. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above, every time the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a multiple of 150 after the end of the jackpot (or after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized), it is determined that the ceiling lottery number has been reached. , irrespective of the game state at the time when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, the advantageous third time saving state B or the second time saving state B is set.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example, when a specific condition is established in a specific advantageous game state (the number of times of lottery of special symbols reaches a specific number), the degree of advantage of the specific game state (The rate at which the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the specific game state again when the jackpot game is executed) is configured to be variable. More specifically, in the 45th control example, the game state is configured to provide three types of game states, namely, the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state, and the variable probability state with the highest degree of advantage among the three types of game states By reaching the ceiling lottery number (either 20 times, 40 times, or 60 times), the ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot is increased. It is configured to be raised (controlled so that the probability variable jackpot is confirmed). As a result, when an advantageous variable probability state is set, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot after continuing to miss the ceiling lottery number of times than to win the jackpot early, which is a novel game characteristic. can be realized.

Here, among game machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided to give a sharpness to the game. Furthermore, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, the period from when an advantageous gaming state is set to when the next jackpot is won is lengthened. Easy control (for example, control to make the probability of jackpot in the high probability state of special symbols low compared to conventional game machines, control to lengthen the fluctuation time of special symbols compared to conventional game machines) A game machine that employs it has also been proposed. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the length of the period from when an advantageous gaming state is reached until the winning of the jackpot is prolonged. Since there is a possibility that the number of game balls consumed (shot) before reaching a big win becomes too large, there is a problem that the player's motivation for playing the game tends to decrease.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example, the degree of advantage is higher after reaching the number of ceiling lotteries than before reaching the predetermined number of ceiling lotteries in the advantageous variable probability state. It is configured as follows. That is, when the jackpot game is executed before reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the probability variable jackpot game with a high degree of advantage is executed at a rate of 50%, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state again. A normal jackpot game with a low degree of advantage is executed at a rate of 50%, and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a time-saving state with a lower degree of advantage than the variable probability state, while the jackpot is won after reaching the ceiling lottery frequency. When the game is executed, the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of substantially 100%, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state. By constructing in this way, when the variable probability state is set, a novel game is played with the expectation that the game will continue to be lost in the lottery of special symbols without being a big hit until at least the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. Therefore, even if it takes a long period of time to achieve a big win, the player's motivation for playing the game can be hardly lowered. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the 45th control example, before and after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the variation pattern table referred to for determining the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is changed to make the variation pattern table substantially unchanged without changing the game state. It realizes control to change the ratio of a certain probability variable jackpot. More specifically, in the forty-fifth control example, similarly to the fourteenth control example described above, the so-called Simultaneous variation specification is adopted. In this 45th control example, when the variable display of one of the special symbols is stopped as a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variable display of both special symbols, the other special symbol will be displayed according to the lottery result. Adopted a control that stops and displays with a misplaced pattern. In addition, in this 45th control example, when hitting to the right in the variable probability state (and the time saving state), the second In addition to the board configuration in which the game ball frequently enters the start winning opening (second ball opening 1641) that triggers the lottery of the special symbol, in the variable state, even the lottery of the first special symbol is the second special. Even in the lottery of patterns, it is configured so that all the misses of the special symbols become small hits (there is no sorting of the complete misses). Furthermore, in this 45th control example, in the variable probability state, before reaching the number of ceiling lotteries, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is always shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. By constructing it, basically it is possible to win a big hit only by lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern and in the case of a normal jackpot, the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern is almost before the variable display of the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. is stop-displayed, the distribution of the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes substantially the same as the distribution of the jackpot in the variable probability state. On the other hand, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, only when the lottery result of the first special pattern is a normal jackpot, the variation time is set longer than the variation time of the second special symbol. Configured. In other words, when the lottery result of the first special symbol results in a normal jackpot, the second special symbol small win or jackpot variation is stopped and displayed first, so the normal jackpot variation is lost and replaced with the symbol. (The normal jackpot is discarded) On the other hand, if the lottery result (probable variable jackpot or small hit) other than the normal jackpot is obtained, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. In addition, it is configured to form an extremely advantageous state that continues until the next probability variable jackpot. By configuring in this way, the probability variable jackpot game is performed during the period until the ceiling lottery number of times is reached with a short fluctuation time of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol (that is, the average fluctuation time is short) in the probability variable state. While it can be configured as a state with a relatively low possibility of being executed (low advantage), only the fluctuation time of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol is lengthened (that is, the average fluctuation time is long). The ceiling lottery number is reached. The period after the game can be configured as a state in which the possibility of the variable probability jackpot game being executed is relatively high (the degree of advantage is high).
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied in one game state, a variation time (variation time) is selected when a special symbol lottery is executed without changing the game state. A gaming machine is widely known that has a specification in which the tendency of the selected variation time (variation pattern) is varied by switching a data table to be referred to to a different table to give a sharpness to the game. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the special symbol lottery results are displayed when a table is set in which a long fluctuation time tends to be selected when the special symbol lottery is lost, the table is referred to. Since the period until the game is played tends to be long, the game is delayed, and if the game balls are continuously shot at approximately the same pace before and after the table is switched, more balls are consumed ( There is a problem that it becomes difficult to keep the player's motivation for the game because the possibility that the game efficiency will be deteriorated increases.

On the other hand, in the 45th control example, the variation time at the time of winning the normal jackpot (the period until the new special symbol lottery can be executed) is short, so the average variation time is also short. Compared to the previous state, the state after reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery where the average fluctuation time is longer due to the longer fluctuation time at the time of winning the normal jackpot (the period until the new special pattern lottery can be executed) However, in order to form an extremely advantageous situation in which the execution ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot game increases while the game state is the same, the average fluctuation time is generally long and the motivation for the game tends to decrease. On the contrary, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes it easier to improve the player's motivation for playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Furthermore, in the 45th control example, as described above, when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached in the variable probability state, the rate at which the variable probability jackpot game is executed without changing the game state is increased. The configuration is such that the influencing factors are greatly different. In other words, it is configured to be able to implement novel control that changes the degree of advantage without changing the game state. Along with this, in the forty-fifth control example, the player can easily grasp that the degree of advantage has been changed by changing the effect mode before and after reaching the ceiling lottery count. is doing. In other words, in the forty-fifth control example, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to a plurality of different degrees of advantage are executable even though the game state is not changed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide game characteristics that are easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, in the 45th control example, an effect suggesting reaching the ceiling lottery (changing the degree of advantage) can be executed before reaching the ceiling lottery number. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the advantageous degree increases by reaching the ceiling lottery number before reaching the ceiling lottery number.
The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fifth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the audio lamp controller 113 The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 14 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 14th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1221, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example will be described. FIG. 1221 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 45th control example. As shown in FIG. 1221, the game board 13 in the forty-fifth control example is provided at the bottom right of the board surface in the fourteenth control example, in contrast to the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth control example described above (see FIG. 400). The first variable winning device 65 is provided in place of the V winning device 1650, and the small prize winning device 2650 provided below the first ball entrance 64 in the fourteenth control example is deleted. Instead, the second variable winning device 2065 is provided on the lower right side of the front view of the first ball entrance 64, and in the 14th control example, the V winning device 1650 is provided on the lower right side of the front view. Instead of removing the first right ball entrance 64r, a first right ball entrance 2640 and an electric accessory 2640a for opening and closing the first right ball entrance 2640 are provided on the right side of the board surface. , the placement of the through gate 67 is changed to the upstream side in the right channel, and the game ball hit to the right enters the right first ball entrance 2640 and the second ball entrance 1641 as the first variable winning. The difference is that the plate configuration such as the arrangement of nails in the channel on the right side of the plate is changed so as to reach the device 65 relatively frequently.

The first variable winning device 65 is the same winning device as the first variable winning device 65 (see FIGS. 522 and 523) provided in the nineteenth control example. When the game ball entering the first specific winning port 65a is guided by the induction piece 65h2 to the special discharge port 65e2 provided with the variable probability switch 65e3, the game state after the jackpot is changed to the variable state (special symbol While set to high probability state), if the game ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols). be. That is, the first variable winning device 65 plays a role as a lottery device for lottery for the game state after the end of the big win. It also plays a role as a prize winning opening through which a specific number (15) of prize balls are paid out when game balls enter. In this 45th control example, the induction piece 65h2 has a common operation pattern independent of the jackpot type, triggered by the start of the V round (first round) (special exclusion for 5 seconds, triggered by the start of the first round). It is set to an arrangement that guides the player to the exit 65e2, and after that, it is operated in an operation pattern that is set to an arrangement that closes the special discharge port 65e2 until the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, the opening and closing door 65f1 that opens and closes the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the V round in the case of the variable probability jackpot, and for 5 seconds from the start of the V round in the case of the normal jackpot. It is configured to be opened for 4.5 seconds after the elapse of . By constructing in this way, in the event of a probability variable jackpot, the game is played while the guiding piece 65h2 is set to the arrangement that guides the player to the special discharge port 65e2 simply by continuing to hit to the right during the V round. A ball can be entered into the first specific winning hole 65a, and the game ball can be passed through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, even if the ball is hit to the right during the V round, the ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a, but passage to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be restricted. Therefore, in the normal jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player from passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 and becoming excessively advantageous to the player.
In each round other than the V round, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened at the start of each round. is detected, the closed state is set and the round ends. Therefore, in each round other than the V round, it is relatively easy to enter 10 or more game balls into the first specific winning hole 65a by simply continuing to hit to the right, and 150 (15 x 10 ) or more prize balls can be paid out. Here, in the forty-fifth control example, about half of the game balls hit to the right during the big win reach the first variable winning device 65 . In this 45th control example, the game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest. That is, a maximum of 50 (30 seconds/0.6 seconds) game balls can be shot in 30 seconds, and about 25 of them reach the first variable winning device 65 . Therefore, if you continue to hit right in rounds other than the V round, 10 game balls enter the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 before 30 seconds have passed ( ball) can be allowed.
The second variable prize winning device 2065 is a prize winning device that is opened and closed at the small win. This second variable prize winning device 2065 is configured as a prize winning opening that triggers the payout of three prize balls each time one game ball enters. In the case of a small win, the second variable winning device 2065 is opened only for 0.1 seconds regardless of whether the small win is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Since it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 2065 during the opening period of 0.1 second, even if the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the second special Even when the lottery of symbols results in a small hit, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the second specific prize winning port 2065a during the small win game to win the prize ball. In addition, even if the game ball can enter the game ball luckily, since only a small number of prize balls are paid out compared to the number of balls entering the first specific prize winning port 65a, the degree of advantage for entering the ball is also low. . Therefore, even if a small win is won, the degree of advantage can be substantially the same as in the case of a mere loss (complete loss) without the opening and closing operation of the second variable winning device 2065 . That is, in the forty-fifth control example, it is provided only for forcibly stopping (discarding) the other variable display with an off symbol. That is, before reaching the ceiling lottery number of times in the variable probability state, by discarding the variable display of all the second special symbols by the small hit (or big hit) of the first special symbol, substantially the first special symbol A situation in which the game is progressed only by lottery is established, and after reaching the number of ceiling lotteries, the fluctuation display of the second special pattern is basically discarded by the small win (or big win) of the first special pattern, and the first Winning the definite variable jackpot of the first special pattern (or the definite variable jackpot of the second special pattern) by discarding only the variable display corresponding to the normal jackpot of the special pattern by the small win (or big win) of the second special pattern. It is provided to establish a situation in which the variable state continues until.
The right first ball entrance 2640, like the first ball entrance 64, is configured as a starting prize winning opening that triggers the first special symbol lottery. An electric accessory 2640a capable of opening and closing the right first ball entrance 2640 is attached to the right first ball entrance 2640, and the electric accessory 2640a is closed when the electric accessory 2640a is closed. The game ball that reaches 2640a is blocked by the electric accessory 2640a and cannot enter the right first ball entrance 2640, and flows downstream. That is, it flows down substantially in the direction of the second ball inlet 1641 . On the other hand, a game ball reaching the electric accessory 2640a with the electric accessory 2640a in the open state is guided by the electric accessory 2640a in the open state and enters the right first ball entrance 2640. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1222 to 1229, the characteristic presentation mode in the 45th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1222(a), an effect mode in the state (normal rush mode, variable probability state A) in the variable probability state and before reaching the ceiling lottery number will be described. FIG. 1222(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode while the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the normal rush mode (variable probability state A). As shown in FIG. 1222(a), in the normal rush mode (variable probability state A), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a character 801 imitating a rabbit climbs a rocky mountain. is used as the back image, the variable display of the third pattern is executed. Also, above the character 801 imitating a rabbit, the characters "RUSH" are displayed, and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm. be done. These allow the player to easily understand that he is staying in an advantageous RUSH state (normal rush mode) and that he should proceed with the game by hitting to the right.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1222(a), in the small display area Dm1 and the small display area Dm8 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. A corresponding variable display effect is executed in a relatively narrow display range (in a display mode that is difficult to see). With these display contents, individual lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be shown to the player, so that convenience for the player can be improved. In the variable probability state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is notified by the variable display effect of the third symbol executed in a relatively wide display range near the center of the main display area Dm (in a display mode that is easy to see). be done. That is, a variable display effect is executed to notify the lottery result of the special symbol on the side that is difficult to discard (shorter variable time). As a result, the display screen can be effectively used as compared with the case where the variable display effects of both special symbols are executed in parallel, so that a suitable effect mode can be realized.
Furthermore, in the small display area Dm7 formed below the small display area Dm4 in the main display area Dm, the characters "15 times until promotion chance" are displayed, and "Achieve the summit" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Promoted to invincible RUSH!?” is displayed. According to these display contents, by reaching the top, it will be promoted to a probability variable state (variable probability state B, invincible mode) with a higher degree of advantage than the current one, and a variable display of the number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7. is executed, the player can easily understand that he/she is given a chance to be promoted to the invincible mode. In addition, this invincible mode (invincible RUSH, variable state B) means the state after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, and as described above, when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, almost the second 2. By a small win (or a big win) of a special pattern, it is possible to forcibly stop and display the symbols (discard the normal big win) by deviating from the normal big win fluctuation, and shift to another game state until the substantial probability variable big win is achieved. This creates an extremely advantageous situation in which there is no
FIG. 1222(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of a pinch effect that is executed when reach occurs in the normal rush mode (probability variable state A). Here, as described above, in this 45th control example, the lottery of the first special symbol until the ceiling lottery number of times is reached after being set in the variable probability state (while the normal rush mode is set) Even if it becomes a normal jackpot or a probability variable jackpot, the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed before the fluctuation display of the second special pattern (variation display corresponding to the small hit or the jackpot), so the first special The distribution of the jackpot type of the pattern is directly the distribution of the jackpot type in the normal rush mode. That is, at a rate of 50%, it usually becomes a jackpot, and a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage is set. In other words, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (invincible mode in which the probability variable jackpot is virtually confirmed because only the normal jackpot fluctuation is discarded by the small hit or jackpot of the second special symbol), the degree of advantage is greater when the jackpot is won. more likely to be lower. Therefore, in the forty-fifth control example, in the normal rush mode (probability variable state A), an effect is executed in such an effect mode that the player will be at a disadvantage when the jackpot hits. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1222 (b), the variable display effect in which the reach effect occurs (one of the first special symbol deviation normal reach variation, deviation super reach variation, winning normal reach variation, and winning super reach variation ) is executed, a pinch effect is executed in which a rock 861 falls from above a rocky mountain toward a character 801 imitating a rabbit at the timing when the ready-to-win effect is generated. In addition, the characters "Avoid rocks!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents can make the player understand that if the rock 861 is not avoided, it may be disadvantageous to the player. In addition, since the pinch performance is generated every time the ready-to-win effect is generated, the player can easily understand that the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect may be disadvantageous to the player. In other words, it is possible to imply (suggest) to the player that it is advantageous not to win the jackpot. Therefore, in the normal rush mode (probability variable state A), it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player performs the game while hoping that he will not win a big win (no reach effect occurs). Interest can be enhanced.

FIG. 1223(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode when a jackpot is won in the normal rush mode (probability variable state A). As shown in FIG. 1223(a), when a jackpot is won in the normal rush mode, regardless of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, a pinch effect (see FIG. 1222(b)) is followed by a fall. The character 801 resembling a rabbit cannot avoid and collide with the rock 861 that has come down. Dm. Also, the characters "NEXT→Challenge Bonus" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that winning the jackpot may put the player at a disadvantage. In addition, the disadvantage suggested by this pinch production|presentation is that it may transfer to the time-saving state with a lower advantageous degree than a variable probability state specifically.
Although illustration is omitted, when the pinch effect (see FIG. 1222(b)) is executed in the variable display effect corresponding to the loss of normal reach or the loss of super reach, the character 801 resembling a rabbit turns into a rock 861. is successfully avoided, and the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination of out of reach, and the continuation of the normal rush mode (probability variable state A) is notified. As a result, when the ready-to-win performance is generated, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode set to the content of suggestion that the degree of advantage is higher for a loss than for a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1223(b) and 1224(a), an effect during execution of a jackpot game when a jackpot (variable probability jackpot or normal jackpot) is won in the normal rush mode (variable probability state A) Aspects will be described. FIG. 1223(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as challenge bonus) in the normal rush mode. As shown in FIG. 1223(b), in the opening effect executed during the opening period of the challenge bonus, the effect is executed from the continuation of the effect mode of the variable display effect that has been executed until immediately before the start of the challenge bonus. be. That is, the effect is executed from the continuation of the effect in which the rabbit character 801 collides with the rock 861 and the rabbit character 801 is knocked off and falls from the rocky mountain.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1223(b), below the rabbit character 801 falling from the rocky mountain, a branch 862 growing substantially horizontally from the surface of the rocky mountain to the left in the front view is found. An effect is executed in the main display area Dm. In addition, the characters "grab the branch and continue the RUSH!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, if the rabbit character 801 succeeds in grabbing the branch, it is easy to set the game state after the big win (challenge bonus) to the probability variable state again (RUSH continues). can be understood.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1223(b), during the opening period of the challenge bonus, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm, and "~ Challenge" is displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm. "Bonus in progress~" is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the challenge bonus has started (during the opening period of the jackpot).
FIG. 1224(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the opening effect of the challenge bonus when the current challenge bonus is a normal jackpot. As shown in FIG. 1224(a), when the normal jackpot is won, an effect in which the rabbit character 801 fails to grab the branch 862 and falls to the ground is executed as an effect during the challenge bonus. In addition, a message "Challenge failed..." is displayed in the display area HR10 formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, and a message "NEXT→chance time" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. characters are displayed. By these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand that after the end of the jackpot is set to a short-time state (chance time) instead of the variable-probability state.
Although illustration is omitted, if the challenge bonus this time is a variable hit, the rabbit-like character 801 successfully grabs the branch 862 and returns to the rocky mountain along the grabbed branch 862 to climb the mountain. The resuming production is executed. To realize game characteristics that are easy for a player to understand, since the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not a variable probability state is set after the end of a big win (challenge bonus) by these performance contents. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suitable presentation mode.
In the forty-fifth control example, when a jackpot is won during the normal rush mode, regardless of the jackpot type (whether it is a normal jackpot or a variable jackpot), the rock 861 cannot be avoided and collides. Through the pinch effect (see FIG. 1223(a)), the winning of the challenge bonus is notified, but it is not necessary to notify the winning of the challenge bonus for all jackpots. For example, in at least a part of the winning of the variable probability jackpot, an effect of successfully avoiding the rock 861 is executed in the pinch effect (see FIG. 1222 (b)), and then the winning of the probability variable jackpot is notified. may be configured to execute By configuring in this way, when the effect of avoiding the rock 861 is executed, not only the variable probability state is simply continued, but also the possibility of winning the variable probability jackpot can be achieved. On the other hand, it is possible to strongly anticipate that the effect of avoiding the rock 861 will be executed. In this case, in the forty-fifth control example described above, as the pinch effect, the third pattern imitating an even number is used to generate a ready-to-win effect. It is good also as a structure which can occur. More specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a normal jackpot, a reach effect always occurs in the third symbol imitating an even number, while the lottery result is off normal reach, off super reach, and In the case of any of the probability variable jackpots, the ready-to-win performance may be generated with the third symbols imitating even-numbered numbers and the third symbols imitating odd-numbered numbers. Then, when the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot and a ready-to-win effect occurs in the third pattern imitating an even number, the winning of the challenge bonus is notified (see FIG. 1223 (a)), while the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot, and when the ready-to-win effect occurs in the third pattern imitating an odd number, the effect of notifying the winning of the probability variable jackpot (effect of notifying the jackpot by avoiding the rock 861) is executed. It may be configured as By configuring in this way, when the reach effect occurs in the third pattern imitating an odd number, there is no possibility of a normal jackpot (whether the normal rush mode continues or whether the probability variable jackpot is won) ), so when the ready-to-win effect occurs, the type of the third symbol that constitutes the ready-to-win effect (the third symbol imitating even numbers or the third symbol imitating odd numbers). The game can be played by paying attention to whether it is the third symbol that has been drawn). Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a configuration in which, in at least a part of the case of a variable probability big win, the big win is notified without using the pinch effect. By constructing in this way, when the ready-to-win performance without the pinch performance occurs, the player can be made to recognize that he/she has won the probability variable jackpot at that time, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be further improved. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1224(b), 1225, and 1226(a), the number of variations of the special symbols after the jackpot ends in the normal rush mode (probability variation state A) becomes a predetermined specific number of times. A description will be given of the promotion chance production executed when the player wins. Here, in the 45th control example, the lottery of special symbols 20 times, 40 times, or 60 times after the normal rush mode (variable probability state A) is set is completed, so that an advantageous (normal jackpot is won Even if the jackpot game is not executed, it is discarded (rewritten to the missing pattern), so it continues until the probability variable jackpot game is actually executed). and The number of times of lottery until shifting to the invincible mode (variable probability state B) is predetermined according to the type of the previous variable probability big hit. Specifically, if the jackpot type is either jackpot A48 or D48, when the number of lotteries after the end of the jackpot reaches 20 times, it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and the game shifts to an invincible mode, If the type of jackpot is either jackpot B48 or E48, it is determined that the number of times of the lottery has reached the ceiling when the number of times of lottery after the end of the jackpot reaches 40 times, the mode shifts to an invincible mode, and the type of jackpot is jackpot C48. , F48, when the number of lotteries after the end of the jackpot reaches 60 times, it is determined that the ceiling number of lotteries has been reached, and the mode shifts to the invincible mode. Therefore, in the forty-fifth control example, it is determined whether or not to shift to the invincible mode each time the lottery number of times (20 times, 40 times, and 60 times after the end of the probability variable jackpot) with the possibility of shifting to the invincible mode. It is configured to execute a promotion chance production for informing the player of.
FIG. 1224(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the promotion chance effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 1224(b), when the promotion chance presentation is executed, the rabbit character 801 climbing the rocky mountain discovers a branch 862 growing substantially horizontally from the surface of the rocky mountain to the left in the front view. A production is executed. In addition, the characters "Use branches to jump to the top!" are displayed in the display area HR10. Furthermore, the characters "Promotion Chance" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that it is the number of lotteries that may lead to promotion to the invincible mode.
After the effect of discovering the branch 862 is executed, as shown in FIG. An effect of bending the branch 862 downward (accumulating a restoring force that causes the branch 862 to return to a horizontal state) is executed in the main display area Dm. As a result, the player can easily understand that the rabbit character 801 jumps using the restoring force of the bent branches 862, and if it can reach the top of the rocky mountain, it will shift to the invincible mode. can be made
FIG. 1225(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when it is notified that promotion has failed in the promotion effect. As shown in FIG. 1225(b), if the promotion effect fails (that is, if the ceiling lottery count has not been reached and the transition to the invincible mode is not made), the rabbit that jumped due to the restoring force of the branch 862 The jumping direction of the character 801 is the upper right direction, and an effect of colliding with a rocky mountain is executed, and an effect of stop-displaying the combination of the third pattern indicating a miss (small win) is executed. In addition, the characters "Failure to promote..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the promotion to the invincible mode was not possible (the ceiling lottery count was not reached).

FIG. 1226(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when it is notified that the promotion has succeeded in the promotion chance effect (the ceiling lottery count has been reached). As shown in FIG. 1226(a), when the success of the promotion is notified, the rabbit character 801 jumping using the resilience of the branch 862 jumps to reach the top of the rocky mountain. , 3rd symbols are stop-displayed in a combination indicating a win (minor win). In addition, the characters "Invincible RUSH Promotion!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she has been promoted to the invincible mode (the ceiling lottery count has been reached).
FIG. 1226(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode after shifting to the invincible mode (variable probability state B) (reaching the ceiling lottery count). As shown in FIG. 1226(b), after shifting to the invincible mode (probability variable state B), the display effect of the third variation is executed against the background of the rabbit character 801 running on clouds. In addition, the small display area Dm7 that was displayed in the normal rush mode (variable probability state A) is hidden. This is because the small display area Dm7 is a display area for displaying the remaining number of lotteries (the number of executions of the variable display effect) until the promotion chance effect is executed in the normal rush mode (variable probability state A). This is because there is no need to display it after being promoted to the invincible mode. Furthermore, a character saying "If you hit the jackpot, RUSH is confirmed!?" With these display contents, the player can easily understand that when a big win is won in the invincible mode (variable probability state B), the variable probability big win is guaranteed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1227(a), the effect mode when the normal big hit variation is executed in the first special symbol lottery in the invincible mode will be described. FIG. 1227(a) shows an example of an effect mode when the normal big hit variation of the first special symbol and the small winning variation of the second special symbol are started almost at the same time, and these variation displays are executed in duplicate. showing. As shown in FIG. 1227 (a), when the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol and the small hit variation of the second special symbol are overlapped, reach production with the third symbol imitating an even number is generated, and a variable display performance is executed in which only the third symbol simulating a number other than the ready-to-win symbol is variably displayed in the middle symbol row. In other words, without waiting for the stop display, a variable display effect is executed in a special effect mode in which it is possible to know that the player is out. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the normal big winning variation of the first special symbol is a variation display that is discarded (rewritten to a loss) by the small winning of the second special symbol.
In addition, in this 45th control example, while the fluctuation time is set to 80 seconds when the lottery result of the first special symbol in the invincible mode is a normal jackpot, the lottery of the second special symbol results in a small win. The variation time is set to 30 seconds. As a result, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be started before 50 seconds (80 seconds-30 seconds) elapse after the start of the normal jackpot variation at worst, the second special symbol is stopped first. By being displayed, it is possible to stop and display the symbols out of the normal big hit variation of the first special symbols being executed. In other words, it is possible to almost certainly avoid execution of a disadvantageous normal jackpot game, and it is possible to continue the invincible mode (variable probability state B) until the probability variable jackpot is reached, which is extremely advantageous for the player. can be formed. Therefore, when shifting to the invincible mode, it is possible to make the player feel great joy and satisfaction, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1227(b) and 1228(a), the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol is alone without the variation display of the second special symbol being executed in the invincible mode (probability variation state B). A description will be given of the mode of presentation when executed in . Here, in the 45th control example, when a right-handed game is performed in the variable probability state or the time-saving state (that is, the game state set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol), the right first ball entrance 2640 and the second Since it has a board surface configuration in which game balls enter both the ball entrance 1641 and the ball entrance 1641 at approximately the same ratio, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, just by continuing to play the right-handed game, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the second 2 It is possible to easily increase both the reserved balls of special symbols. In addition, in the variable state, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol will be either a big hit or a small hit (the other variable display cannot be rewritten (discarded) by removing the symbol). It is configured so that it cannot be a result of a lottery that completely misses. Therefore, after having one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, the first special symbol fluctuates until the number of reserved balls of at least one becomes 0. Every time the display is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is started substantially at the same time. At the timing when one variation display ends, the other variation display is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that the next variation start timing is aligned (at the end of one small winning game or big winning game, both special This is because the variable display of the symbols is started). Therefore, in the invincible mode, basically, as long as you continue to hit to the right, even if the normal big hit fluctuation of the first special pattern is started, the small second special pattern whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal big hit fluctuation By starting the winning variation at the same time, the normal big winning variation can be forcibly stopped by the off symbol. However, there is a possibility that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed alone when the player plays the game without accumulating the reserved balls.
FIG. 1227(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed alone and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a normal jackpot. In this case, when the ready-to-win effect occurs, an effect is executed in which all the third patterns including the ready-to-win pattern are variably displayed in the medium pattern row, and the rabbit character 801 looks at the third pattern with an uneasy expression. is executed. In addition, a small display area Dm7 is formed immediately below the small display area Dm4, and a character (remaining time display) indicating the remaining time until the execution of the normal jackpot game is confirmed (the end of the advantageous variable probability state is confirmed) is displayed. be done. That is, even if the remaining variation time of the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time (30 seconds) of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, 2 It is configured to display the remaining time until it becomes impossible to first stop and display the variable display of the special pattern (forcibly stop and display the pattern out of the normal jackpot variation being executed). In addition, the text "Remove 4 symbols by hitting right!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that unless the player hits right, the normal jackpot game will be executed, which is disadvantageous for the player.
FIG. 1228(a) performs a right-handed game during execution of the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol (not accompanied by the variation display of the second special symbol) started alone, and enters the second ball entrance 1641. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of being in the state which can be stop-displayed with a symbol out of normal big-hit fluctuation|variation by the game ball having entered. As shown in FIG. 1228(a), when it is detected that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 1641, the rabbit character 801 is displayed in the middle symbol row in a variety of third symbols. By hitting the third pattern imitating the number 4, which is the same number as the pattern, an effect of flicking away is executed. Also, the subtraction of the remaining time display is stopped in the small display area Dm7, and the characters "Invincible RUSH continue!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the third symbol cannot be stop-displayed in combination with a big win in the variable display performance and the invincible RUSH (probability variable state B) continues. Therefore, since it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand, it is possible to realize a suitable effect mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1228(b), the display mode when execution of the second special symbol jackpot game is confirmed in the invincible mode will be described. Here, in the forty-fifth control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, it is configured to be a probability variable big win at a rate of 100%. However, as described above, in the variable probability state (and time saving state), basically, the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol, so that the variation of the second special symbol Even if the display is executed, the stop display timing of the first special symbol or the big winning symbol comes first, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) with the lost symbol. That is, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed first in the variable probability state is basically extremely limited when the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol is executed in the invincible mode (variable probability state B). only under appropriate circumstances. In the forty-fifth control example, when the second special symbol is a jackpot during execution of the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol in the invincible mode in which the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated first. , The game state after the end of the second special symbol jackpot is set to a premium rush mode (probability variable state C) that is more advantageous than the invincible mode. This premium rush mode (probability variable state C) is basically a game state in which the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol jackpot game is executed. When it is done, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the premium rush mode (probability variable state C). In this premium rush mode, only when winning the probability variable jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, and only when a short hit variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern, the variation display of the first special symbol is first. , and there is a possibility that the probability variable jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. That is, there is a possibility that the game state after the end of the big win is set to the normal rush mode (probability variable state A). In the premium rush mode, only about 1/3 of the time when the 1st special symbol is won, the short hit variation of 5 seconds is selected, so the 1st special symbol lottery A very advantageous game in which a big win and a premium rush mode are repeated as long as the big win is continued in the lottery of the second special pattern before the big win and the selection of the 1/3 short win variation. form a state. Furthermore, even if the probability variable jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed, the game state after the jackpot is set to the probability variable state, so at least two jackpots (premium rush mode at least 1 jackpot during normal rush mode, and at least 1 jackpot after transitioning to normal rush mode). Therefore, when shifting to the premium rush mode, it is possible to make the player feel extremely happy and satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

Figure 1228 (b), when the transition to the premium rush mode (probability variation state C) is confirmed (that is, in the invincible mode, the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol and the probability variation jackpot variation of the second special symbol overlap is executed) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode. As shown in FIG. 1228(b), when the shift to the premium rush mode is confirmed, a blackout effect is executed in which substantially the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly blacks out. In other words, an extremely high-impact effect in which the screen suddenly turns black is executed. With this configuration, when the blackout effect is executed, the player can be given a great surprise, and at the same time, the player can intuitively feel that a very special effect, which is greatly different from the usual one, has been executed. can be understood. Therefore, when the premium rush mode is set after that, even a player who is not familiar with the specifications of the premium rush mode has transitioned to a special mode (state) with a higher degree of advantage than the invincible mode. can be made easier to understand intuitively. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.
FIG. 1229 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the premium rush mode. As shown in FIG. 1229, in the premium rush mode, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a shining vertically elongated substantially rectangular area and stairs for climbing to the area are displayed. The clouds that were displayed even in invincible mode (variable state B) are displayed. In addition, the characters "~premium RUSH in progress~" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm. To make a player easily understand that a special state having a higher degree of advantage than a normal rush mode (probability variable state A) or an invincible mode (probability variable state B) is set by these display contents. can be done.
In addition, in a small area Dm31 formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, the characters "Probability of falling 1/480" are displayed, and "Even if you fall, the destination is RUSH" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. is displayed. Due to these display contents, from the special state premium rush mode (variable probability state C) to other states with a low It is possible to make the player easily understand that the transition destination is limited to the RUSH mode (normal rush mode, variable probability state A). Therefore, when the premium RUSH mode (probable variable state C) is set, the premium RUSH mode itself is easy to continue for a long time (difficult to shift to another state with a low degree of advantage), and even if it shifts, an advantageous normal rush Mode (probable variable state A) stops (no possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous normal state or a relatively low advantageous degree (jackpot winning is not guaranteed) time-saving state) Premium rush because it forms an extremely advantageous gaming state When shifting to the mode (probability variable state C), it is possible to make the player feel extremely happy and satisfied.
Next, referring to FIG. 1230, a transition method between states in the forty-fifth control example will be described. Here, in the present 45th control example, as the game state, the normal state (non-probability variable non-time-saving state) set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, In addition, three of the time-saving state (non-probable variable time-saving state) set to the time-saving state of the normal design, the high probability state of the special design, and the probability variable state (probable variable time-saving state) set to the time-saving state of the normal design. There are two game states. In the normal state, the jackpot probability is set to a low probability (probability of about 1/320), and the electric accessory 2640a is difficult to open (normal pattern fluctuation time is long, normal pattern hit probability is low, In addition, the opening period of the electric accessory 2640a is short when the normal symbol wins), so it is a disadvantageous game state in which it is necessary to shoot a game ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game. is.

As described above, in the forty-fifth control example, in addition to the right first ball entrance 2640 attached to the electric accessory 2640a on the right side of the board surface of the game board 13, a game ball fired rightward is always entered. A second entry port 1641 is provided that is enabled. In other words, when hitting to the right in the normal state, it is difficult (impossible) to enter the first right ball entrance 2640, but it is possible to enter the second ball entrance 1641, resulting in the second special symbol. A lottery can be easily executed. However, in the normal state in the 45th control example, regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol, the extremely long variation time of 600 seconds is set as the variation time. The game efficiency in the case of playing the game method can be extremely deteriorated. In addition, as described above, in the forty-fifth control example, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, there is a high probability that a big win or a small win will be won (in the case of a high probability state of the special symbol, the big win and the small win). Win either the winning or the winning, and even in the case of a low probability state of the special pattern, win either the big winning or the small winning at a rate of 99% or more). Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the execution of the variable display with the variable time of 10 minutes (600 seconds), the ratio is 99% or more. When the small winning or big winning pattern is stopped, the variable display of the second special pattern is removed and the pattern is forcibly stopped (discarded). In other words, when trying to win the jackpot of the second special symbol in the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol must be executed at intervals of 10 minutes without executing the lottery of the first special symbol at all. It becomes relatively easy for the surroundings to recognize that the game efficiency is low and that the player is playing an irregular game method. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed by hitting to the right in the normal state to aim for a big hit with the second special symbol.
In addition, in the time saving state, the jackpot probability is the same as in the normal state (about 1/320), but the electric accessory 2640a is easier to open (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state of the normal symbol, The probability of winning the normal pattern increases, and the opening period of the electric accessory 2640a becomes longer when the normal pattern wins). As a result of hitting the ball, a game state is formed in which the lottery for the first special symbol can be efficiently executed as compared with the case of hitting to the left. That is, the game state is formed to have a higher degree of advantage than the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, so basically Only the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is almost discarded by the small hit or the big hit of the first special symbol stopped and displayed first (the lottery result of the second special symbol). Regardless, it will be forcibly stopped by the off pattern). In other words, if you win a jackpot, the first special pattern with a relatively low degree of advantage will be distributed (50% will be a normal jackpot, and 50% will be a variable jackpot), so the degree of advantage when you win a jackpot Equivalent to normal state. This time-saving state is terminated when at least one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery reaches 50 times, and a disadvantageous normal state is set.
In addition, in the variable state, the probability of a big hit is high (about 1/80), and the electric accessory 2640a is easily opened like the time-saving state. As a result of frequent entry of game balls, a game state is formed in which the lottery for the first special symbol can be efficiently executed as compared with the case of left-handed hitting. In addition, since the variable probability state continues until the next big win is won, it is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the next big win is decided when the variable probability state is set. The variable probability state is further subdivided into three types of states with different degrees of advantage. That is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is mainly derived (the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is discarded), and the probability variable state that wins the probability variable jackpot at a rate of 50% (wins the normal jackpot at a rate of 50%). A (normal rush mode) and mainly the lottery result of the first special symbol are derived, but when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a normal jackpot, the variable display for indicating the normal jackpot is discarded. By doing so, the probability variable state B (invincible mode) that continues until the next probability variable jackpot game is executed substantially, and the second special, which has a high degree of advantage (when the jackpot is won, the probability variable jackpot becomes a 100% ratio) Even when the lottery result of the symbol is derived and the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived with a low probability, the probability variable big winning game of the first special symbol is executed, so that the probability variable big winning game is substantially next. There are provided three types of game states: variable probability state C (premium rush mode) that continues until is executed. The variable probability state A is the most disadvantageous gaming state among the variable probability states A to C because there is a possibility that a normal jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the probability variable state B, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability variable state A by executing the probability variable jackpot game, while in the probability variable state C, as long as the probability variable jackpot of the second special symbol continues to be won. Since the game state after the end of the big win is set to the variable probability state C again, the variable probability state C is more advantageous than the variable probability state B in terms of the game state after the end of the big win. Hereinafter, the state transition method in each of the five states of the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state AC will be described.
First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1230, a method of shifting from the normal state (normal mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1230, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state (normal mode) to another state only when the jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 1230, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, if the jackpot type is one of the jackpots A48 to F48 (any of the probability variable jackpots) , The game state after the end of the big hit is set to the variable probability state A on the premise that the right hitting game is performed according to the right hitting display during execution of the variable probability big winning game and the game ball has passed the variable probability switch 65e3 in the V round. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is the jackpot G48 (normal jackpot), the game ball cannot (difficultly) pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during execution of the jackpot game, so the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. be done. Therefore, in the normal state, winning the variable probability jackpot is more advantageous than winning the normal jackpot.

Next, with reference to the middle left side of FIG. 1230, a method of shifting from the variable probability state A (normal rush mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the middle left side of FIG. 1230, from the variable probability state A (normal rush mode) to another state, in addition to winning the jackpot, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is the specified ceiling without winning the jackpot. There is a possibility that it will be transferred even when the number of lotteries has been reached. Specifically, as shown on the middle left side of FIG. 1230, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state A, and if the jackpot type is the jackpot G48 (normal jackpot), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage. In addition, when the specified ceiling lottery number of times (either 20 times, 40 times, or 60 times) is reached in the probability change state A, the probability change state B, which has a higher degree of advantage than the probability change state A, does not go through a big hit. set directly to On the other hand, if you win the probability variable jackpot (any of the jackpots A48 to F48) in the first special symbol lottery, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state A again (the probability variable state A loop). Therefore, in the variable probability state A, the player expects to win a variable probability jackpot or to reach the ceiling lottery frequency.
Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 1230, a method of shifting from the time saving state (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the middle right side of FIG. 1230, from the time-saving state (chance mode) to another state, in addition to winning the jackpot, the number of time-savings became 0 without winning the jackpot (the number of time-savings has passed ) may also migrate. Specifically, as shown in the middle right side of FIG. 1230, if the probability variable jackpot (any of the jackpots A48 to F48) is won in the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends State A is set. On the other hand, when the number of times of time saving becomes 0 (the number of times of time saving has passed) in the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated and the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state for the player. On the other hand, when a normal big win (big win G48) is won in the first special pattern lottery in the time saving state, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state again (the time saving state is looped). Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is advantageous when the probability variable jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol.
Although not shown, there is a very low probability that the jackpot game with the second special symbol will be executed in the time saving state. In the time-saving state, which is the low probability state of the special symbols, the range of the random number determined to be a big win only in the high probability state of the special symbols is set completely out of range. That is, in the time-saving state, the probability of complete failure is approximately 1/106.7 (approximately 1/80-approximately 1/320). In the case of this complete miss, the variation time is set to be shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol, so that it is stopped and displayed first, although it is the same as the small hit or big hit of the first special symbol. , Even if the completely lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued without being discarded, so the fluctuation time of the completely lost variation and the first special symbol executed next to the completely lost variation If the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the total variation time of the variation display, the variation time of the second special symbol ends earlier during the execution of the variation display next to the complete deviation variation, and the second special symbol is displayed. A stop symbol corresponding to the drawing result of the symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win, the big win game with the second special symbol is executed, and the game state after the big win is set to the variable probability state C. - 特許庁In addition, while the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the time saving state is fixed for 30 seconds regardless of the lottery result, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is either 3 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 25 seconds A variable time is selected. Therefore, in order for the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed without being discarded, it is necessary that the time exceeds 30 seconds for the two variations of the completely missing variation and the next variation. . That is, 10 seconds + 25 seconds, 20 seconds + 20 seconds, 20 seconds + 25 seconds, and 25 seconds + 25 seconds must be one of the four combinations, but if the lottery result of the first special symbol is completely off Since most of the time is set to 3 seconds, it is difficult to generate an event that is a combination of a completely out-of-range variation and the next two variations that result in a variation time exceeding 30 seconds. Then, even if the fluctuation time exceeds 30 seconds, the probability of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is low (about 1/320), so the second special symbol big winning game is executed in the time saving state. It is extremely rare. When the jackpot game with the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state, a blackout effect (see FIG. 1228(b)) is executed in the same manner as when the jackpot game with the second special symbol is executed in the invincible mode. Then, the transition to the probability change state C (premium rush mode) is notified.
Next, with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 1230, a method of shifting from the variable probability state B (invincible mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the lower left side of FIG. 1230, there is a possibility of transition from the variable probability state B (invincible mode) to another state only when a big win is won. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 1230, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the variable probability state B, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the variable probability state A. In the probability variation state B, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a normal jackpot, the variation time of the normal jackpot variation is longer than the second special symbol variation time (30 seconds) (80 seconds). ) is set, the lottery result of the normal jackpot is not derived (the small hit pattern or the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern is stopped and displayed first during the fluctuation, and the normal jackpot fluctuation is discarded. ). Therefore, in the variable probability state B, only the variable probability jackpot game can be executed as the jackpot of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 1230, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the variable probability state B, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the variable probability state C. Here, in the variable probability state B, basically, the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol, so even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed , the stop display timing of the first special symbol or the big winning symbol comes first, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) with the lost symbol. The second special symbol is stopped and displayed first in the probability variation state B. Basically, the second special symbol is set to a longer variation time (80 seconds) than the variation time (30 seconds) of the second special symbol. This is the case where the normal jackpot variation of 1 special symbol is executed. That is, only when the extremely rare situation occurs that the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol and the jackpot variation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate, the second special symbol jackpot game is executed, The game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the variable probability state C. - 特許庁In the variable state B, the probability of a normal jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol is about 1/160, and the probability of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is about 1/80. It is approximately 1/12800 (approximately 1/160×approximately 1/80). In this case, as described above, a blackout effect (see FIG. 1228(b)) is generated along with the start of variation, and a shift to probability variation state C is notified.
Next, with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 1230, a method of shifting from the variable probability state C (premium rush mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 1230, there is a possibility of transition from variable probability state C to another state only when a big win is won. Specifically, when the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the variable probability state A. In addition, in the probability variation state C, the variation time of the second special symbol (10 seconds to 25 second) is set, the fluctuation is discarded at the stop timing of the second special symbol or the big winning symbol. The jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed in the probability variable state C because the probability variable jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the variation time (5 seconds) is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol. (approximately 1/3 of winning the probability variable jackpot). That is, the probability variable jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed with a probability of about 1/480 (about 1/80*50%*1/3) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the variable probability state C, the game state after the end of the big win is again set to the variable probability state C (the variable probability state C is looped). Therefore, in the definite variable state C, before the definite variable jackpot game of the first special symbol with a probability of about 1/480 is executed, it is possible to win the jackpot with the second special symbol with a probability of about 1/80. Since the desired game property is obtained, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Thus, in the forty-fifth control example, it is configured to provide three variable probability states with different degrees of advantage. A periodic state transition method is realized. Despite the same game state (probability variable state), by making the degree of advantage different from each other, it is possible to realize behavior as if various game states are provided apparently. Games can be diversified without increasing. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in this 45th control example, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely lengthened regardless of the lottery result (to 10 minutes set) configuration, but the method of suppressing the right-handed game in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, it is configured to be set to the latent probability state set to the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol instead of the variable probability state. good too. In the latent state, as in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, and even in the latent state, the right-handed game is played and a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the game state after the end of the big hit may be set to the latent state again. By configuring in this way, the merit (shifting to the premium rush mode with the highest degree of advantage for the player) in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol can be transferred to the normal state (and the latent state). Since it is possible to eliminate only , it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the right-handed game is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable probability state A, and the variable probability state B, in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is mainly derived by the right-handed game, one game ball is fired and one of the starting ports (right first 2640 (ball entrance 2640, second ball entrance 1641), when a ball is entered (start winning), a game method of waiting without firing a game ball until the end of the variable display based on the start winning (so-called single-shot game) ), there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed alone without accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, even in situations other than the normal jackpot fluctuation in the variable probability state B, the lottery result of the second special pattern is derived (it becomes impossible to discard due to the small hit or jackpot of the first special pattern). be. As a countermeasure, for example, in the time-saving state in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived mainly by the right-handed game, the variable probability state A, and the variable probability state B, the number of balls held in the first special symbol is 0. When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it may be constructed such that an extremely long variation time (for example, 1800 seconds) is always selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the game efficiency when a single-shot game is performed, and if a single-shot game is performed, it is extremely long every time the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. The game method involves waiting for a time, and the irregular game method (single-shot game) is easily recognized by the hall clerk, so that the irregular game method can be suppressed.
<Electrical configuration in the forty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1231, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the forty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1231 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 45th control example. As shown in FIG. 1231, the ROM 202 in the forty-fifth control example has a first winning random number table 202Ga instead of the first winning random number table 202ka in the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fourteenth control example (see FIG. 404). is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202Gb is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202qb, a second hit random number table 202Gc is provided instead of the second hit random number table 202qc, and variations A variation pattern table 202Gd is provided instead of the pattern table 202qd, a variation pattern scenario table 202Gj is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202qj, and a small winning random number table 202Ge is provided instead of the small winning random number table 202qe. is provided, the small hit type selection table 202qf is deleted, the time saving random number table 202qh is deleted, and the time saving type selection table 202qi is deleted. First, with reference to FIG. 1233(a), details of the first winning random number table 202Ga in the forty-fifth control example will be described.
FIG. 1233(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202Ga in the forty-fifth control example. Similar to the first winning random number table 202ka (see FIG. 261(a)) in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example), this first winning random number table 202Ga is special when a special symbol lottery is executed. It is a data table referred to for determining whether or not the symbol is a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 1233(a), the first hit random number table 202Ga in the forty-fifth control example is a random number (the counter value of the first hit type counter C1) determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol. A range and a range of random numbers (counter values) determined as a jackpot in a high probability state of special symbols are defined respectively.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1233 (a), 205 random numbers (counter value ) is specified. In addition, a range of 819 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 818" is defined as the random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. In this 45th control example, since the first winning random number counter C1 can take 65536 values of "0 to 65535", it is determined as a big hit when a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol low probability state. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536), and the probability of being judged as a big hit when the special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is about 1/80 (819/65536) is. In both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol, the first winning random number table 202Ga is referenced to determine whether or not the winning is a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1233(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202Gb in the forty-fifth control example will be described. Like the jackpot type selection table 202qb (see FIG. 406) in the fourteenth control example described above, this jackpot type selection table 202Gb is referred to in order to select a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. data table. FIG. 1233(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202Gb in the forty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1233(b), in the jackpot type selection table 202Gb in the 45th control example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type to be selected correspond to each type of special symbol. It is stipulated with
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1233(b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot A48" is set. Defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 8", "jackpot B48" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 "9" , "jackpot C48" is defined in correspondence, and "jackpot D48" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 17", and the first winning type counter C2 The value of "18 to 37" is defined in association with "jackpot E48", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "38 to 49", "jackpot F48" is A "jackpot G48" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99".
“Jack A48” to “Jack C48” are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the open/close door 65f1 is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern that allows passage of the variable probability switch 65e3 in the V round (10 rounds variable probability big win). In addition, the ``jackpot A48'' to the ``jackpot C48'' are configured with different number of lotteries (number of ceiling lottery numbers) until shifting to the invincible mode (variable probability state B) in the variable probability state after the end of the big win. Specifically, the "jackpot A48" shifts to the invincible mode (variable probability state B) when the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed in the probability variable state after the jackpot ends, and the "jackpot B48" ends the jackpot. When the lottery of 40 times of special patterns is completed in the later variable state, the mode shifts to an invincible mode, and "jackpot C48" is invincible when the lottery of 60 times of special patterns is completed in the variable state after the end of the big win. switch to mode. For this reason, "jackpot A48" to "jackpot C48" have the same degree of advantage in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, but the set ceiling lottery number (that is, the degree of advantage is higher) In terms of easiness to shift to the invincible mode with a high , "jackpot A48" is the most advantageous, and "jackpot C48" is the most disadvantageous.
In addition, "jackpot D48" to "jackpot F48" have 6 rounds, and are jackpot types in which the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened and closed in an opening and closing pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the V round (6 rounds variable probability jackpot ). In addition, the "jackpot D48" shifts to the invincible mode (variable probability state B) when the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed in the probability variable state after the jackpot ends, and the "jackpot E48" is the probability variable after the jackpot ends. In the state, when the lottery of 40 special patterns is completed, it shifts to invincible mode. controlled to migrate. For this reason, "jackpot D48" to "jackpot F48" have the same degree of advantage in terms of the number of rounds of the jackpot and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, but the set ceiling lottery number (that is, the degree of advantage is higher) In terms of easiness to shift to the invincible mode with a high , "jackpot A48" is the most advantageous, and "jackpot C48" is the most disadvantageous.

In addition, "jackpot G48" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 6 rounds, and the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened and closed in an opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible (difficult) to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the V round (6 rounds normal jackpot). . This "jackpot G48" is the jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is the smallest among the jackpots of the first special symbol, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage. It is a disadvantageous jackpot type.
Number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A48" to "jackpot G48" among 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2 are 5, 4, 1, 8, 20, 12, and 50, respectively. 5% (5/100), the percentage of determining the “jackpot B48” is 4% (4/100), the percentage of determining the “jackpot C48” is 1% (1/100), The percentage of determining "jackpot D48" is 8% (8/100), the percentage of determining "jackpot E48" is 20% (20/100), and the percentage of determining "jackpot F48" is It is 12% (12/100), and the rate at which the “jackpot G48” is determined is 50% (50/100). That is, the rate at which the probability variable jackpot (that is, any of "jackpot A48" to "jackpot F48") is determined is 50% (5% + 4% + 1% + 8% + 20% + 12%), and the normal jackpot (that is, The rate at which the “jackpot G48”) is determined is also 50%. In addition, among the probability variable jackpots (“jackpot A48” to “jackpot F48”), the percentage of jackpots (“jackpot A48” and “jackpot D48”) with the ceiling lottery number set to 20 times is 13% ( 5% + 8%), and the percentage of jackpots (“jackpot B48” and “jackpot E48”) with the ceiling lottery number set to 40 times is 24% (4% + 20%), and the ceiling lottery The rate at which the jackpot (“jackpot C48” and “jackpot F48”) whose number of times is set to 60 is determined is 13% (1%+12%). Therefore, the average value of ceiling lottery times when winning the variable probability jackpot is 40 times (20 times×13%/50%+40 times×24%/50%+60 times×13%/50%). The percentage of reaching the ceiling lottery number of 40 times on average without winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/80 and confirming the variable jackpot is 60.5% (79/80 to the 40th power). The percentage of winning about 1/80 jackpot within the ceiling lottery number of 40 times is 39.5% (100%-60.5%), so the percentage of winning the variable probability jackpot again in the variable probability state is 80. .2% (60.5%*100%+39.5%*50%). That is, although the distribution of the normal jackpot is set to 50%, by shifting to the variable probability state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the actual ratio of the variable probability jackpot is 80% or more. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1233 (b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot H48 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot H48" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds and the open/close door 65f1 is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern that allows passage of the variable probability switch 65e3 in the V round (4 rounds variable probability jackpot). Although the number of rounds is the smallest among all the jackpots, as described above, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state C that is most advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot H48" is the most pleasing to the player. It can be said that it is a kind of jackpot.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1234(a), details of the second winning random number table 202Gc in the forty-fifth control example will be described. This second winning random number table 202Gc, like the second winning random number table 202qc (see FIG. 407(a)) in the fourteenth control example described above, is a random number value (second winning random number counter) determined to be a normal symbol hit. C4 counter value) is a data table in which the range is specified. FIG. 1234(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202Gc. As shown in FIG. 1234(a), in the second winning random number table 202Gc in the forty-fifth control example, the random value (counter value) determined to be a winning of the normal design in the low probability state of the normal design is "0". only is specified. On the other hand, as a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a winning of a normal symbol in a high probability state of a normal symbol, the whole range ("0 to 299" range) that the second winning random number counter C4 can take is defined. ing. For this reason, in the normal state that is set to the low probability (normal) state of the normal pattern, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 1/300, while the time saving state that is set to the high probability (time saving) state of the normal pattern In the probability variation state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is 100%. Therefore, the game can be played efficiently in the time-saving state and the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1234(b), details of the variation pattern table 202Gd in the forty-fifth control example will be described. Similar to the variation pattern table 202qd (see FIG. 407(b)) in the fourteenth control example described above, this variation pattern table 202Gd has a variation pattern (variation This is a data table referenced to select time). FIG. 1234(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this variation pattern table 202Gd. As shown in FIG. 1234 (b), the variation pattern table 202Gd in the 45th control example is for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (normal state). A normal table 202Gd1 and a time-saving/probability-variable A table 202Gd2 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the chance mode (time-saving state) or normal rush mode (probability variation state A). And, table 202Gd3 for probability variation B for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery of special symbols is executed in invincible mode (variability state B), and special symbols in premium rush mode (variability state C) Probability variation C table 202Gd4 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery is executed, normal rush mode (probability variation state A), and possibility of promotion to invincible mode (probability variation state B) A promotion effect table 202Gd5 that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a certain number of lotteries (20 times, 40 times, and 60 times after the probability variable jackpot). At least configured. First, details of the normal table 202Gd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1234(c).
FIG. 1234(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202Gd1. As shown in FIG. 1234 (c), as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "first special symbol", if the success or failure determination result is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the variation type counter CS1 "Short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds (7000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the value range of "0 to 139", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "140 to 149" On the other hand, a variation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) is defined in association with "disengagement". (40000 milliseconds) of "normal reach" is defined in correspondence, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "180 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) of "super Reach" is associated and defined. In addition, when the success/failure determination result is a "jackpot", a "normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds (40000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 29". "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "30 to 189", and the fluctuation type counter CS1 A "special reach" with a variable time of 140 seconds (140000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the value range of "190 to 198".
On the other hand, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "second special symbol", if the success or failure determination result is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" A "long deviation" with a variation time of 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds) is defined for the range (that is, the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take). A "long win" with a variable time of 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the range of the value of the type counter CS1 of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range that the variable type counter CS1 can take). It is
Due to these stipulations, in the normal state, an extremely long fluctuation time is selected when the second special symbol lottery is executed rather than when the first special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to deteriorate the game efficiency in the case of performing an irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed game is performed in a normal state, which is a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1235, the details of the time saving/probability variation A table 202Gd2 described above will be described. FIG. 1235 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving/probability variation A table 202Gd2. As shown in FIG. 1235, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "first special symbol", if the success or failure determination result is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ""0 to 149" is defined in association with "short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 189", A variation time of 10 seconds (10,000 milliseconds) is defined in association with a "false error", and the variation type counter CS1 value ranges from "190 to 196", and the variation time is 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds). seconds) are defined in association with "various types of normal reach", and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds (25000 milliseconds) is defined for the range of "197, 198" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. are defined in association with each other. In addition, when the success/failure determination result is a "jackpot", a "normal reach" with a variation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 149". A "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds (25000 milliseconds) is defined in association with a range of "150 to 198" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.
On the other hand, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "second special symbol", if the result of the success or failure determination is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" For the range (that is, the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take), a "long deviation" with a variation time of 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) is defined. The value of the type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range that the variable type counter CS1 can take), and the "long win" with a variable time of 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) is defined in correspondence. It is
According to these stipulations, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time based on the lottery of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time based on the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state or the probability variable state A.例文帳に追加In addition, in the present 45th control example, when hitting to the right in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to start substantially simultaneously. . That is, in the time-saving state and probability variable state set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol, when the right-handed game is performed, both the right first ball entrance 2640 and the second ball entrance 1641 have substantially the same ratio. Since the board surface structure allows game balls to enter, both the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be easily increased simply by continuing to play the right-handed game in the variable probability state and the time-saving state. can be made In addition, in this 45th control example, both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol will be either a big hit or a small hit (the other fluctuation display will be rewritten to the off symbol (discarded) ) is less than 1/100 in the time-saving state and 0 in the variable probability state). Therefore, after having one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, the first special symbol fluctuates until the number of reserved balls of at least one becomes 0. Every time the display is started, the variable display of the second special symbol is started substantially at the same time. At the timing when one variation display ends, the other variation display is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that the next variation start timing is aligned (at the end of one small winning game or big winning game, both special This is because the variable display of the symbols is started). Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable probability state, the lottery result of the first special symbol with a short fluctuation time is derived in the lottery of the special symbols almost every time, and the lottery result of the second special symbol with a long fluctuation time is drawn in the off symbol. be replaced.
In addition, in this 45th control example, each variation pattern (short loss for 3 seconds, short loss for 3 seconds, 10 seconds off, normal reach for 20 seconds, and super reach for 25 seconds), but it is not limited to this. It may be configured to always select a variation time (for example, 40 seconds) longer than the variation time of the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be derived only when the complete deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed, so that the complete deviation variation of the first special symbol and the second When the jackpot return of the special pattern overlaps, the probability change of the second special pattern is the same as when the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special pattern and the jackpot fluctuation of the second special pattern overlap in the probability variation state B (invincible mode). A jackpot game can be executed, and after the jackpot is finished, the player can be shifted to a variable probability state C (premium rush mode) in which the degree of advantage is extremely high for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a role of giving the player an opportunity to shift to the variable probability state C with a low probability even in a completely lost lottery result that can occur only in the low probability state of the special symbol, so in the time saving state. When the lottery for the first special symbol is completely lost, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, in this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is completely lost in the time saving state, a very short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be selected. By constructing in this way, when the completely missing variation of the first special symbol and the completely missing variation of the second special symbol are executed in duplicate, the completely missing variation of the second special symbol is immediately terminated. , the variation display of the next second special symbol can be finished within the remaining variation time of the complete deviation variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, despite the execution of the completely missing variation of the first special symbol, which is a chance to shift to the variable state C, the drawing of the second special symbol is wasted due to the completely missing variation of the second special symbol. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1236, details of the variable probability B table 202Gd3 described above will be described. FIG. 1236 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this variable probability B table 202Gd3. As shown in FIG. 1236, this variable probability B table 202Gd3 is different from the above-described time saving/variable probability A table 202Gd2 (see FIG. 1235), and a part of the contents of the first special symbol jackpot is changed. differ only in that Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1236, if the propriety determination result of the first special symbol is "probability variation jackpot", the time saving and probability variation A table 202Gd2 (see FIG. 1235) is the same as the defined contents, If the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is "normal jackpot", a long reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is associated with the entire range that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. stipulated.
According to this provision, in the variable probability state B (invincible mode) in which the variable probability B table 202Gd3 is referred to, only when the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol variation time (30 second) is set, so even if you win the normal jackpot in the first special pattern lottery in the variable probability state B, the small hit or jackpot pattern of the second special pattern is first. Since the variable display based on the winning of the normal jackpot is discarded (stopped and displayed in the winning pattern) by the stop display, the execution of the jackpot game can be avoided in the variable probability state B.例文帳に追加That is, it is possible to form a very advantageous game state that continues until winning the variable probability jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1237(a), details of the variable probability C table 202Gd4 will be described. FIG. 1237(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this variable probability C table 202Gd4. As shown in FIG. 1237 (a), as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "first special symbol", if the success or failure determination result is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the variation type counter CS1 A "long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values (range of "0 to 198"). Also, if the result of the success/failure determination is "probable variable jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 65", and the "short hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds (5000 milliseconds) is associated. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "66 to 198", and the variation time is 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds). Furthermore, when the success/failure determination result is a "normal jackpot", a "long "hit" is associated with and defined.
On the other hand, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "second special symbol", if the result of the determination is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 189" A variation time of 10 seconds (10000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the range. "Normal reach" of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is associated and defined, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "197, 198", and the fluctuation time is 25 seconds (25000 milliseconds) ""SuperReach" is associated and defined. In addition, when the success/failure determination result is a "jackpot", a "normal reach" with a variation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 149". A "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds (25000 milliseconds) is defined in association with a range of "150 to 198" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

According to these stipulations, the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, unless it becomes a definite variable jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol and "short hit" is selected as the variation pattern. Therefore, in the variable probability state C (premium rush mode) in which the variable probability C table 202Gd4 is referred to, the game state is such that the lottery result of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is mainly derived. When the lottery of the second special pattern results in a jackpot, the probability variable jackpot is always achieved, and the probability variable state after the jackpot is completed is set to the probability variable state C, so when the probability variable state C is shifted, the jackpot and the probability variable are set. A very advantageous state is formed in which state C and C are easily repeated. Therefore, when shifting to the variable probability state C, it is possible to make the player feel great satisfaction and joy. In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the "short hit" variation pattern is selected to execute the probability variable jackpot game of the first special symbol, the game state after the jackpot is completed. is set to probability variable state A. In other words, once it shifts to the variable probability state C, two jackpots, at least one or more jackpots in the variable probability state C and at least one or more jackpots after being set to the variable probability state A, are guaranteed. It is possible to make the player feel a great sense of security. In addition, the probability of winning the probability variation jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol is about 1/160, and the probability of selecting the "short hit" variation pattern is about 1/3, so in the probability variation state C, the first The probability that the special symbol probability variable jackpot game is executed is about 1/480. For this reason, before the probability variable jackpot game of the first special symbol with a probability of about 1/480 is executed, as long as the jackpot with the second special symbol with a probability of about 1/80 continues to be won, the probability variable state C is changed. Create a very favorable situation to continue. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1237(b), details of the promotion effect table 202Gd5 described above will be described. FIG. 1237(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this promotion effect table 202Gd5. As shown in FIG. 1237 (b), as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "first special symbol", if the success or failure determination result is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the variation type counter CS1 A “special deviation” with a variation time of 15 seconds (15000 milliseconds) is defined for the range of values “0 to 198” (that is, the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take). is a "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take), and the variation time is 15 seconds (15000 milliseconds) ""Specialhit" is defined in correspondence.
On the other hand, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "second special symbol", if the result of the success or failure determination is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" For the range (that is, the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take), a "long deviation" with a variation time of 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) is defined. The value of the type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range that the variable type counter CS1 can take), and the "long win" with a variable time of 30 seconds (30000 milliseconds) is defined in correspondence. It is
According to these stipulations, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed for the specific number of times (20th, 40th, and 60th times) after shifting to the variable probability state A in which the promotion effect table 202Gd5 is referred to. , the first special symbol is set to 15 seconds regardless of the lottery result, and the second special symbol is set to 30 seconds regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, 15 seconds of the effect period for executing the promotion chance effect (see FIG. 1225(a)) can be reliably secured.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1238 (a), details of small hit random number table 202Ge in this 45th example of control are explained. FIG. 1238(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this small winning random number table 202Ge. As shown in FIG. 1238 (a), in the small hit random number table 202Ge in the 45th control example, as a random number determined as a small hit in the special symbol lottery (counter value of the first hit random number counter C1), A range of "819 to 65535" is associated and defined regardless of the type of special symbol. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits is 64717, so special symbols The percentage determined to be a small hit in the lottery is about 98.7% (64717/65536). Considering the probability of a big win, a small win or a big win is won at a rate of 100% in the variable probability state. Thereby, in the variable probability state A, the variable display of the second special symbol having a long variable time can be discarded at the stop display timing of the variable display of the first special symbol having a short variable time. In addition, in the probability variation state B, if the lottery result other than the normal jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is the same as the probability variation state A, and when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, The normal jackpot can be discarded at the timing of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol. Furthermore, in the variable probability state C, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first only in 1/3 of the case where the probability variable jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed first, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the probability variable state C and the second special symbol jackpot are repeated at a high rate.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1238(b), details of the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the forty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1238(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the forty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1238(b), the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the forty-fifth control example is the variation pattern table referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed each time the first special symbol lottery is performed. Types are defined in association with each other. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1238(b), as a variation pattern scenario in the normal state after initialization (that is, before winning the jackpot), regardless of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol, normal A variation pattern scenario (scenario 1) is defined in which the table 202Gd1 (see FIG. 1234(c)) is referenced. Further, as shown in FIG. 1238 (b), as a variation pattern scenario in the case where the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is a time saving state, regardless of the jackpot type that triggered the setting of the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol The number of times is referred to the table 202Gd2 for time saving / probability variation A in the range of 50 times or less (see FIG. 1235), and the normal table 202Gd1 (see FIG. 1234 (b)) in the range of the lottery number of times of the first special symbol is 51 times or more. A variation pattern scenario (scenario 2) is defined.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1238(b), four types of variation pattern scenarios are provided as variation pattern scenarios when the game state after the end of the jackpot is the probability variation state. That is, as a variation pattern scenario for the variable probability state that is set after winning one of the big hits A48 and D48, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is within the range of 19 times or less. ) is referred to, and when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 20 times, the promotion effect table 202Gd5 (see FIG. 1237 (b)) is referred to, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is in the range of 21 times or more. A scenario (scenario 3) in which the probability variation B table 202Gd3 (see FIG. 1236) is referenced is defined in association. In other words, after either the jackpot A48 or the jackpot D48 is completed, if the jackpot is not won until the lottery of the first special symbol is completed 20 times, the advantageous variable state B (invincible mode) is set. be.
In addition, as a variation pattern scenario for the variable probability state set after winning one of the big hits B48 and E48, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 19 times or less. ) is referred to, and when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 20 times, the promotion effect table 202Gd5 (see FIG. 1237 (b)) is referred to, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 21 to 39 times. In the range, the table 202Gd2 for time saving/probability variation A (see FIG. 1235) is referred to, and the promotion effect table 202Gd5 (see FIG. 1237 (b)) is referred to when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 40 times, and the first A scenario (scenario 4) in which the variable probability B table 202Gd3 (see FIG. 1236) is referred to is defined in association with a range in which the number of lotteries of special symbols is 41 or more. In other words, after either the jackpot B48 or the jackpot E48 is completed, if the jackpot is not won until the lottery of the first special symbol is completed 40 times, the advantageous variable state B (invincible mode) is set. be. That is, compared to the jackpots A48 and D48, the degree of advantage is lower because the number of lotteries before shifting to the variable probability state B (invincible mode) increases.

In addition, as a variation pattern scenario for the variable probability state set after winning one of the big hits C48 and F48, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 19 times or less. ) is referred to, and when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 20 times, the promotion effect table 202Gd5 (see FIG. 1237(b)) is referred to, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 21 to 39 times. In the range, the table 202Gd2 for time saving/probability variation A (see FIG. 1235) is referred to, and the promotion effect table 202Gd5 (see FIG. 1237 (b)) is referred to when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 40 times, and the first In the range of 41 times to 59 times the number of lotteries of special symbols, the table 202Gd2 for time saving / probability variation A (see FIG. 1235) is referred, and when the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is 60 times, the promotion effect table 202Gd5 (Figure 1237 (b)) is referenced, and the scenario (scenario 5) in which the probability variation B table 202Gd3 (see FIG. 1236) is referenced in the range of 61 times or more of the lottery number of the first special symbol is defined in association there is In other words, after either the jackpot C48 or the jackpot F48 is completed, if the jackpot is not won until the lottery of the first special symbols is completed 60 times, the advantageous variable state B (invincible mode) is set. be. That is, compared to the big hits A48, B48, D48, and E48, the number of times of lottery before shifting to the variable probability state B (invincible mode) increases, and the advantage becomes lower.
Furthermore, as a variation pattern scenario for the probability variation state set after winning the big hit H48, the scenario (see FIG. 1237 (a)) for probability variation C table 202Gd4 (see FIG. 1237 (a)) is referred to regardless of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol ( Scenario 5) is associated and defined. In other words, after the jackpot H48, which is the jackpot of the second special pattern, is completed, by setting to the variable probability state C, the probability variable jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, and 5 seconds at a rate of 1/3. is not selected, a very advantageous state is formed in which the probability variable state C and the second special symbol jackpot are repeated. Therefore, when the jackpot game of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to give great joy to the player.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1232, the details of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the forty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1232 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 45th control example. As shown in FIG. 1232, the RAM 203 in the 45th control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 405). A flag 203Gc, a variable probability setting flag 203Gd, a variable probability passage counter 203Ge, a prize number counter 203Gf, an operation counter 203Gg, a ball timer flag 203Gi, a ball timer 203Gj, a variable probability effective flag 203Gk, and a variable probability effective timer 203Gm. , and a discharge number counter 203Gn are added. Moreover, it is different also in that it replaces with the time reduction counter 203h and the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 and the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 are each provided. This special figure 1 hour-shortening counter 203h1 and special figure 2 hour-shortening counter 203h2, in this 45th control example, the number of hours of shortening of the first special symbol and the number of hours of shortening of the second special symbol are set separately. , The time saving counter 203h1 is merely divided into the counter for the first special symbol and the counter for the second special symbol, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, the small hit type storage area 203fa, the V passage big hit type storage area 203fd, the V flag 203fe, the V passage flag 203ff, the time reduction limit counter 203ja, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, the special figure lottery counter 203qa are deleted. They are also different in some respects. For the deletion of these configurations, this 45th control example is equipped with a specification (specifications per 2 types) that wins a big win when a V winning is detected in a small winning game, which was adopted in the 14th control example. Deletion based on nonexistence.
The special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot (or after initialization (reset) of the pachinko machine 10). The initial value of this special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed (see Y601G in FIG. 1243). When selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the special design, the number of lotteries of the first special design of the big hit (or after initialization) is determined and set based on the value of this special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga. A corresponding variation pattern table is specified from the variation pattern scenario.

The scenario storage area 203Gb is a storage area in which data indicating the currently set variation pattern scenario is stored. The initial value of this scenario storage area 203Gb is set to "00H" indicating scenario 1 (scenario corresponding to the normal state after initialization), and when the jackpot ends, scenario 2 (corresponding to the time saving state after the jackpot ends). "01H" indicating Scenario 1), "02H" Scenario 4 indicating Scenario 3 (scenario corresponding to the variable state after the end of the jackpots A48, D48) (scenario corresponding to the variable state after the end of the jackpots B48, E48) "03H" indicating scenario 5 (scenario corresponding to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot C48, F48) "04H" indicating scenario 6 (scenario corresponding to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot H48) "05H ” (see Y2706G in FIG. 1254). When executing the special symbol lottery, refer to the scenario corresponding to the data indicated by the scenario storage area 203Gb and the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the number of lotteries of the first special symbol (the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga). to select a variation pattern.
The variable probability flag 203Gc is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols). If this variable probability flag 203Gc is ON, it indicates that the game state is variable probability state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is a special symbol low probability state (normal state or time saving state). In the forty-fifth control example, the variable probability flag 203Gc is set to ON when the variable probability setting flag 203Gd, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see Y2702G in FIG. 1254). On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the start of the jackpot game (see Y702G in FIG. 1244 and Y912G in FIG. 1250). In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.
The variable probability setting flag 203Gd is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the forty-fifth control example, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203Gd is set to ON (Y2212G in FIG. 1255). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203Gd is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see Y2705G in FIG. 1254). The variable probability setting flag 203Gd is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.
In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203Gd is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. 203Gd may be formally set to ON and restored. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203Ge, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203Gd to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203Ge is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round of the jackpot game (in the 45th control example, the first round of the jackpot game). Incidentally, it is possible to determine whether or not all the winning game balls of the first variable prize winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203Ge and the discharge number counter 203Gn, which will be described later. This definite variable passage counter 203Ge is updated by incrementing the value by 1 when the definite variable switch 65e3 is passed (Y2211G in FIG. 1255). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharge matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (Y2311G in FIG. 1256). It should be noted that the probability variable passing counter 203Ge is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.
The prize winning number counter 203Gf counts the number of game balls that have entered the specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize winning device 65). A counter for counting. This winning number counter 203Gf is updated by incrementing the value by 1 each time it detects that a game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a (Y2203G in FIG. 1255). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the first variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203Gf) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203Gn and the probability variable passage counter 203Ge) match (Y2307G in FIG. 1256), the initial value is reset to "0" (see Y2311G in FIG. 1256). The value of the winning number counter 203Gf is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.
The operation counter 203Gg is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the forty-fifth control example, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the first round of the jackpot. Along with this, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the operation counter 203Gg. On the other hand, in the process of Y2209G of the prize winning process (FIG. 1255) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Also, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203Gg is 0 (Y2214G in FIG. 1255: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203Gg is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203Gg and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.
The remaining ball timer flag 203Gi is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203Gi is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203Gi to ON, the remaining ball timer 203Gj, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see Y2305G in FIG. 1256). The remaining ball timer 203Gj is a counter for determining the time after the open/close door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. It is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203Gj discharges the winning game balls to the first variable prize winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether the required time has passed. In the forty-fifth control example, the time required until the winning game ball 65 is discharged is two seconds. It is set as the upper limit value of the sphere timer 203Gj. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203Gj reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds in this 45th control example), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the first variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. is executed (Y2307G in FIG. 1256). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable prize winning device 65, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of one round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and the normal jackpot ( Even if it is a jackpot G48), it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.
In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a special flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203Gd is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.
Probability variation effective flag 203Gk is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203Gk is set to ON, the time required for the game ball flowing into the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 based on the passage solenoid 65k being ON It shows that: That is, the period in which the variable probability effective flag 203Gd is on indicates that the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during a normal period.
The variable probability valid timer 203Gm is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203Gk described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203Gm, it is possible to determine (measure) the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In the forty-fifth control example, it takes one second for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. The upper limit of the variable probability valid timer 203Gm is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 after that, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to pass.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the game ball is played with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the ball to pass through or misdetecting the passage of the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.
The discharge number counter 203Gn is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. This ejection number counter 203Gn is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls winning the first variable prize winning device 65 and the ejection number are determined (Y2311G in FIG. 1256).
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the forty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1239 to 1256, various processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the forty-fifth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1239, the special symbol variation process (Y111G) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the 45th control example will be described. This special symbol variation process (Y111G) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 411) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 411) in the fourteenth control example. Mainly, when one of the special symbols is variably displayed and the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big win or a small winning symbol, the one special symbol during the variable display is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. It reflects the changes that accompany the change to the specifications that make it possible. FIG. 1239 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process (Y111G).
Of this special symbol variation processing (Y111G), Y231, Y234, Y238, Y252, Y253, Y256 and Y257 are respectively Y231, Y234, Y231, Y234, The same processing as Y238, Y252, Y253, Y256 and Y257 is executed. Also, in the special symbol variation process (Y111G) of this control example, in the process of Y234, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (Y234: No), instead of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example, the first special symbol variation start process is executed (Y201G), and the process proceeds to Y238. The details of this first special symbol variation start process (Y201G) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y234, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable time timer 203ka is a value greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the processes of Y252 and Y253 are executed, and then the above-described 14th control example In place of the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 417), the first special symbol variation stop processing is executed (Y202G), and the processing proceeds to Y238. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process (Y202G) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 1239) in the present 45th control example, in the process of Y238, the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is not a value greater than 0 (that is, 0) when it is determined that (Y238: No), instead of the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 419) in the fourteenth control example described above, the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (Y203G), and this processing ends. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (Y203G) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of Y238, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variable time timer 203kb is a value greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the processes of Y256 and Y257 are executed, and the above-described 14th control example Instead of the 2 special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 423), the second special symbol variation stop processing is executed (Y204G), and this processing ends. Details of the second special symbol variation stop process (Y204G) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1240, the first special symbol variation start process (Y201G), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 1239) in the above-described 45th control example, will be described. This first special symbol variation start process (Y201G) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation start process ( Figure 412 reference), while executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it is a process for starting the variable display according to the lottery result. FIG. 1240 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation start process (Y201G).

Of this first special symbol variation start process (Y201G), each process of Y302 to Y306 is the same as each process of Y302 to Y306 of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 412) in the fourteenth control example. Processing is performed. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 1240) in the 45th control example, after executing the process of Y306, instead of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413) in the 14th control example, The first special symbol determination process is executed (Y301G), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is performed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 415) in the fourteenth control example (Y302G), and then , Instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example), the special figure 1 game state update process is executed (Y303G), and this process ends. For details of the first special symbol determination process (Y301G), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y302G), and the special figure 1 game state update process (Y303G), see FIGS. 1241, 1242, and 1243, respectively. and will be described later.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1241, the first special symbol determination process (Y301G), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 1240) in the above-described 45th control example, will be described. This first special symbol determination process (Y301G) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413). ), it is a process for executing the jackpot determination of the first special symbol. FIG. 1241 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol determination process (Y301G).
Of this first special symbol determination process (Y301G), in each process of Y8001 to Y8006 and Y8011, each process of Y8001 to Y8006 and Y8011 of the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413) in the fourteenth control example. The same processing is performed. In addition, in the first special symbol determination process (Y301G) of this control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit in Y8003 (Y8003: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the small hit random number table 202Ge. (Y8001G), and it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery is a small hit (Y8002G). When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (Y8002G: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y8002G, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (Y8002G: Yes), the small hit flag corresponding to the special symbol that has won the small hit this time is set to ON (Y8003G), End this process. It should be noted that these modifications to the first special symbol determination process (see FIG. 413) are mainly modifications corresponding to the absence of lottery results for winning time-saving symbols in the 45th control example.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1242, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y302G), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 1240) in the 45th control example, will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y302G) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 415) in the fourteenth control example described above, and is the first special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 415), this is a process for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 1242 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y302G).

Of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y302G), in each process of Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508 and Y512, Y501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 415) in the fourteenth control example . . Y503, Y505 to Y508, and the same processing as Y512 are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y302G) of this control example, after executing the process of Y503, the variation pattern corresponding to the data in the scenario storage area 203Gb and the value of the current special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga A selection table is identified (Y501G), and the process proceeds to Y512.
By this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y302G), the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the set variation pattern scenario and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol. In the variable probability state after the variable probability big hit of the first special symbol, it is possible to realize the game property of shifting from the variable probability state A to the variable probability state B with different numbers of lotteries according to the type of the previous big win. In addition, in the probability variation state after the probability variation big hit of the second special symbol, basically, the variation time of the first special symbol can be made longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, so the second with a high degree of advantage It is possible to realize a game property in which the lottery result of the special symbol is easily derived.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1243, the special figure 1 game state update process (Y303G), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 1240) in the 45th control example, will be described. This special figure 1 game state update process (Y303G) is a process executed instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) in the above-described fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example), and the game state update process (See FIG. 274), this is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 . Figure 1243 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 1 game state update processing (Y303G).
In this special figure 1 game state update process (Y303G), first, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga (Y601G), then the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 is greater than 0 or not is discriminated (Y602G). In the process of S602G, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (Y602G: No), the current game state is a game state other than the time saving state It means that there is (a normal state or a probability variable state), and since the game state will not be changed until the next big win is won, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y602G, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 is a value greater than 0 (Y602G: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 is subtracted by 1 (Y603G), Set a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 (Y604G), then determine whether the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 after subtraction is 0 (Y605G).

In the process of Y605G, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 is not 0 (Y605G: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the time saving state, so the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y605G, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 after subtraction is 0 (Y605G: Yes), set the state command indicating the normal state (Y605), and perform this process finish.
By executing this special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 1243), it is possible to determine whether or not there is a shift to the normal state in the number of lotteries of the first special symbol.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1244, the first special symbol variation stop process (Y202G), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 1239) in the 45th control example, will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process (Y202G) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 417) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation stop process ( Figure 417 reference), when the fluctuation time in the 1st special design passes, it is the processing in order to set the stop indication in the 1st special design. FIG. 1244 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation stop process (Y202G).
In each of Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721 and Y723 to Y727 of this first special symbol variation stop processing (Y202G), Y701 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 417) in the fourteenth control example. , Y704 to Y707, Y721 and Y723 to Y727 are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process (Y202G) of the 45th control example, in the process of Y721, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot flag 203qb is ON (Y721), and the first special When it is determined that the symbol jackpot flag 203qb is not ON (Y721: No), it means that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot. (Refer to FIG. 418) Instead, the special figure 1 out stop processing is executed (Y701G), and this processing ends. In addition, the details of the special figure 1 deviating stop processing (Y701G) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 1244) in the present 45th control example, after executing the processing of Y704, the time saving counter (both the special figure 1 hour saving counter 203h1 and the special figure 2 hour saving counter 203h2) , and the variable probability flag 203Gc are reset to the initial values (Y702G), and the process proceeds to Y705.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1245, the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (Y701G), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 1244) in the above-described 45th control example, will be described. This special figure 1 out stop processing (Y701G) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 out stop processing (see FIG. 418) in the 14th control example described above, special figure 1 out stop processing (see FIG. 418 ), it is a process for setting a stop display when the first special symbol comes off (small win or complete come off). FIG. 1245 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 1 deviating stop process (Y701G).
Of this special figure 1 deviating stop processing (Y701G), in each processing of Y751 and Y753 to Y761, each processing of Y751 and Y753 to Y761 of the special figure 1 deviating stop processing (see FIG. 418) in the fourteenth control example respectively The same processing is performed. In addition, in the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (Y701G) of the 45th control example, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203qc is ON in the process of Y751 (Y751: Yes), the special figure 2 It is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y751G), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variable time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y751G: Yes) Then, set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf to ON (Y752G), set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the special figure 2 fluctuation stop (Y753G), and move the process to Y753. On the other hand, in the process of Y751G, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variable time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (Y751G: No), the processes of Y752G, Y753G and Y753 Skip and proceed to Y754.
By executing this special figure 1 out stop processing (see FIG. 1245), when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed at the stop display timing of the small hit of the first special symbol, the second special symbol It is possible to forcibly stop the variable display (discard the variable display of the second special symbol) with the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, basically, in the variable state A or the variable state B in which the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol, the game property that the lottery result of the first special symbol is mainly derived. can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1246, the second special symbol variation start process (Y203G), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 1239) in the 45th control example, will be described. This second special symbol variation start process (Y203G) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 419) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the second special symbol variation start process ( Figure 419 reference), while executing the lottery of the second special symbol, it is a process for starting the variable display according to the lottery result. FIG. 1246 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation start process (Y203G).
Among the second special symbol variation start processing (Y203G), Y832 to Y836, Y851 and Y852, respectively, Y832 to Y836 and Y851 of the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 419) in the fourteenth control example and Y852 are executed.
Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (Y203G) of this control example, after executing the process of Y836, instead of the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420) in the fourteenth control example, the second special symbol Judgment processing is executed (Y801G), second special symbol variation pattern selection processing is executed instead of second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 422) in the fourteenth control example (Y802G), and then fourteenth control Example (and the ninth control example) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) to execute the special figure 2 game state update process (Y803G), and terminate this process. For details of the second special symbol determination process (Y801G), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y802G), and the special figure 2 game state update process (Y803G), see Figures 1247, 1248, and 1249 will be described later.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1247, the second special symbol determination process (Y801G), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 1246) in the forty-fifth control example described above, will be described. This second special symbol determination process (Y801G) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420). ), it is a process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. FIG. 1247 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol determination process (Y801G).

Of this second special symbol determination process (Y801G), in each process of Y8101 to Y8106 and Y8111, each process of Y8101 to Y8106 and Y8111 of the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420) in the fourteenth control example. The same processing is performed. In addition, in the second special symbol determination process (Y801G) of this control example, in the process of Y8103, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8103: No), the lottery result based on the small hit random number table 202Ge (Y8101G), determine whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (Y8102G), and if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (Y8102G: No), end this process . On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is the small winning (Y8102G: Yes), the small winning flag corresponding to the special symbol that has won the small winning this time is set to ON (Y8103G), and this processing is terminated. . It should be noted that these modifications to the second special symbol determination process (see FIG. 420) are mainly modifications corresponding to the absence of lottery results for time-saving symbol winning in the 45th control example.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1248, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y802G), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 1246) in the 45th control example, will be described. This second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y802G) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 422) in the fourteenth control example described above, and is the second special symbol variation pattern. Similar to the selection process (see FIG. 422), it is a process for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. FIG. 1248 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y802G).
Of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y802G), in each process of Y921 to Y923, Y925 to Y928 and Y932, Y921 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 422) in the fourteenth control example Y923, Y925 to Y928, and the same processing as Y932 are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y802G) of this control example, after executing the process of Y923, the variation pattern corresponding to the data of the scenario storage area 203Gb and the value of the current special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga A selection table is identified (Y901G), and the process proceeds to Y932.
By this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Y802G), the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the set variation pattern scenario and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol. In the normal state, the game efficiency is deteriorated when the second special symbol lottery is executed by right hitting (extremely lengthening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol), so that the right hitting is performed in the normal state. It is possible to suppress the typical game method. In addition, in the probability variation state after the probability variation big hit of the first special symbol, basically, the variation time of the second special symbol can be made longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, so the lottery of the first special symbol It is possible to realize game characteristics in which results are easily derived. Furthermore, in the probability variation state after the probability variation big hit of the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be easily configured to be shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage. Therefore, once the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, it is possible to realize a game property in which the variable probability state C with a high degree of advantage and the jackpot of the second special symbol are easily repeated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1249, the special figure 2 game state update process (Y803G), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 1246) in the 45th control example, will be described. This special figure 2 game state update process (Y803G) is a process executed instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 274) in the fourteenth control example (and the ninth control example) described above, and the game state update process (See FIG. 274), this is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 . Figure 1249 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 game state update processing (Y803G).
In this special figure 2 game state update process (Y803G), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203h2 is greater than 0 (Y851G), and the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203h2 is 0 If it is determined that the value is not greater (that is, it is 0) (Y851G: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y851G, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 is a value greater than 0 (Y851G: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 is subtracted by 1 (Y852G), Set the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 (Y853G). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 is 0 (Y854G), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 is not 0 (Y854G: No), this processing exit. On the other hand, in the process of Y854G, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 time-saving counter 203h2 is 0 (Y854G: Yes), the state command indicating the normal state is set (Y855G), and this process ends.
By this special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 1249) and the special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 1243) described above, the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 and the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 are updated separately. As a result, even if the lottery of one special pattern is executed biasedly, the time saving state can be terminated when the number of times of lottery of the special pattern biasedly executed reaches 50 times, so that one of the special patterns can be selected in the time saving state. It is possible to suppress execution of lottery of special symbols in an extremely large number.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1250, the second special symbol variation stop process (Y204G), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 1239) in the 45th control example, will be described. This second special symbol variation stop process (Y204G) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 423) in the fourteenth control example described above, and the second special symbol variation stop process ( Figure 423 reference), when fluctuation time in the 2nd special design passes, it is the processing in order to set the stop indication in the 1st special design. FIG. 1250 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation stop process (Y204G).

Among the second special symbol variation stop processing (Y204G), Y901, Y906 to Y909, and Y921 to Y925, respectively, Y901 of the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 423) in the fourteenth control example, The same processes as Y906-Y909 and Y921-Y925 are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process (Y204G) in the present 45th control example, in the process of Y921, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is not ON (that is, it is OFF) In (Y921: No), the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (Y911G) is executed instead of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (see FIG. 425) in the 14th control example, and this processing ends as it is. In addition, the details of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (Y911G) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, after executing the processing of Y906, the time saving counter (special figure 1 hour saving counter 203h1, special figure 2 hour saving counter 203h2) and the probability variation flag 203Gc are reset (Y912G), and the process proceeds to Y907.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1251, the special figure 2 out stop processing (Y911G), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 1250) in the 45th control example, will be described. This special figure 2 out stop processing (Y911G) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 425) in the 14th control example described above, special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 425 ), it is a process for setting the stop display when the second special symbol comes off (small win or complete come off). Figure 1251 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 2 deviating stop processing (Y901G).
Of this special figure 2 deviating stop processing (Y911G), in each processing of Y951 and Y953 to Y961, each processing of Y951 and Y953 to Y961 of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (see FIG. 425) in the fourteenth control example respectively The same processing is performed. Further, in the special figure 2 out stop processing (Y911G) of this control example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small per flag 203qd is ON in the process of Y951 (Y951: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation time Determining whether the value of the timer 203ka is a value greater than 0 (Y951G), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variable time timer 203ka is a value greater than 0 (Y951G: Yes), then , Set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the special figure 1 fluctuation stop (Y952G), and move the process to Y953. On the other hand, in the process of Y951G, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variable time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (Y951G: No), skip the processes of Y952G and Y953 , the process moves to Y954. On the other hand, in the process of Y951, when it is determined that the flag 203qd per special figure is off (Y951: No), the special figure 2 confirmation command is set (Y960), and the first special symbol display device The second special symbol of 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (Y961), and the process is terminated.
By executing this special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 1251), when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being executed at the stop display timing of the small hit of the second special symbol, the first special symbol It is possible to forcibly stop the variable display (discard the variable display of the first special symbol) with the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when a normal jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state B, the normal jackpot variation can be discarded by the small hit or jackpot pattern of the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed first, The variable probability state B can be substantially configured as an advantageous game state that continues until the variable probability big hit of the first special symbol. Also, basically, in the variable probability state C where the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to realize the game property that the lottery result of the second special symbol is mainly derived. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1252, the contents of the jackpot control process (Y1004G) executed in the main process will be described. FIG. 1252 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (Y1004G). Of this jackpot control processing (Y1004G), Y11601, Y11602, Y11604, Y11605 and Y11610 to Y11612, respectively, Y11601, Y11602 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 288) in the 14th control example (9th control example) , Y11604, Y11605 and Y11610 to Y11612 are executed.
In addition, in the jackpot control process (Y1004G) in the 45th control example, after executing the process of Y11602, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON (Y1901G), and this process is performed as it is. finish. In addition, in the process of Y11605, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (Y11605: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening and closing operation in the new round is executed (Y1902G), and this End the process. Details of the jackpot action setting process (Y1902G) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of Y11605, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (Y11605: No), then it is determined whether it is time for the opening operation (Y1903G). When it is determined (Y1903G: Yes), the open solenoid is set to ON (Y1904G), the variable probability solenoid is set to ON (Y1905G), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y1903G, if it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (Y1903G: No), the process proceeds to Y11610.
Also, in the process of Y11612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (Y11612: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends (Y1906G), and this process is finished. do. Details of the jackpot ending process (Y1906G) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Y11612, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (Y11612: No), the winning process for controlling the first variable winning device 65 based on the winning is executed (Y1907G), Then, abnormal processing for determining whether or not there is abnormal winning for the first variable winning device 65 is executed (Y1908G), and this processing ends. Details of the winning process (Y1907G) and the abnormality process (Y1908G) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1253, the jackpot operation setting process (Y1902G), which is one process of the jackpot control process (FIG. 1252) in the forty-fifth control example, will be described. FIG. 1253 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot action setting process (Y1902G).
In this jackpot action setting process (Y1902G), first, an opening action corresponding to the number of rounds is read (Y1931G). Specifically, as the operation of the probability variable solenoid, it is changed to ON for 5 seconds at the start of the first round (position to open the special discharge port 65e2), and is changed to OFF after 5 seconds have passed, each subsequent round Loads an action that is kept off. In addition, as the operation of the opening and closing door 65f1, in the first round of the probability variable jackpot, 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the round, or until 10 or more game balls are detected. The motion is read, and in other rounds, the opening and closing motion of opening until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the round or until 10 or more game balls are detected is read. In addition, in the first round of the normal jackpot, the opening and closing operation is opened until 4.5 seconds have passed or 10 or more game balls have been detected after 5 seconds have passed since the start of the round. In other rounds, an open/close operation is read that is opened until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the round or until 10 or more game balls are detected.
When the processing of Y1931G is completed, then, along with setting the opening operation of the probability variable solenoid read in the processing of Y1931G (Y1932G), the opening operation of the first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a read in the processing of Y1931G is set. (Y1933G), and terminates this process. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 1253), it is possible to suitably set the action according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1254, the jackpot ending process (Y1906G), which is one process of the jackpot control process (FIG. 1252) in the forty-fifth control example, will be described. This jackpot end process (Y1906G) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 1254 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (Y1906G).

In this jackpot end processing (Y1906G), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203Gd is on (Y2701G), and when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203Gd is on (Y2701G: Yes), this time In the V round (first round) of the jackpot game, it means that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability flag 203Gc is set to ON in order to set the game state after the end of the big win to the variable probability state. (Y2702G), and the process proceeds to Y2704G. On the other hand, in the process of Y2701G, when it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203Gd is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y2701G: No), the game ball is in the V round (first round) of this jackpot game Since it means that the variable probability switch 65e3 was not passed, in order to set the game state after the jackpot to a time saving state with a time saving number of times of 50 times, the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 and the special figure 2 time saving counter 203h2 are both set to 50 (Y2703G), and the process proceeds to Y2704G.
In Y2704G, the state command is set based on the value of the variable probability flag 203Gc and the time-saving counter (special figure 1 hour-shorter counter 203h1 and special figure 2 hour-shorter counter 203h2) (Y2704G), then the jackpot medium flag 203k and the probability variation setting flag 203Gd is turned off to set the end of the jackpot game (Y2705G). Next, from the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj (see FIG. 1238(b)), the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type and the set gaming state is specified (Y2706G), and data indicating the specified scenario (01H to 05H Either) is stored in the scenario storage area 203Gb (Y2707G), and this process is terminated.
By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 1254), it is possible to suitably set the game state after the jackpot ends according to whether or not the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot game, and refer to it after the jackpot ends. A variation pattern scenario can be preferably set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1255, the winning process (Y1907G), which is one process of the jackpot control process (FIG. 1252) in the 45th control example, will be described. This winning process (Y1907G) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the winning to the first specific winning opening 65a. FIG. 1255 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (Y1907G).

In the winning process (Y1907G), first, it is determined whether or not the round valid period has passed (Y2201G), and if it is determined that the round valid period has not expired (Y2201G: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the round effective period (Y2201G: Yes), it is determined whether or not winning of the game ball into the first specific winning hole 65a is detected (Y2202G), and the first specific winning hole 65a (Y2202G: Yes), the winning number counter 203Gf is incremented by 1 (Y2203G), and the process proceeds to Y2204G. On the other hand, in the process of Y2202G, when it is determined that the winning to the first fixed winning hole 65a is not detected (Y2202G: No), the process of Y2203G is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2204G.
In the process of Y2204G, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203Gf is 10 or more (that is, the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a is 10 or more) (Y2204G), and a winning is made. If it is determined that the value of the number counter 203Gf is not 10 or more (the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a is less than 10) (Y2204G: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed. Then (Y2205G), if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (Y2205G: No), the process proceeds to Y2208.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y2204G that the value of the winning number counter 203Gf is 10 or more (the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a is 10 or more) (Y2204G: Yes), or , In the process of Y2205G, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (Y2205G: Yes), the closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 for opening/closing the first specific winning opening 65a is set (Y2206G), and the remaining ball timer flag 203Gi is set. It is set to ON (Y2207G), and the process proceeds to Y2208G.
In the processing of Y2208G, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203Gg is greater than 0 (Y2208G), and if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203Gg is greater than 0 (Y2208G: Yes). , the value of the operation counter 203Gg is subtracted by 1 (Y2209G), and then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (Y2210G). In the process of Y2210G, when it is determined that the variable probability switch 65e3 has passed (Y2210G: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203Ge is updated by adding 1 (Y2211G), and the variable probability setting flag 203Gd is set to ON. By doing so, control is performed so that the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the variable probability state based on the passage of the variable probability switch 65e3 (Y2212G). Next, a V winning command indicating that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (V winning has occurred) is set (Y2213G), and the process proceeds to Y2214G. On the other hand, in the process of Y2210G, if it is determined that the variable probability switch 65e3 is not passed (Y2210G: No), the process of Y2211G to Y2213G is skipped, and the process proceeds to Y2214G.

In the processing of Y2214G, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203Gg is 0 (Y2214G), and if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203Gg is not 0 (Y2214G: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y2214, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203Gg is 0 (Y2214G: Yes), the special discharge port 65e2 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k to OFF. (Y2215G), the variable probability effective flag 203Gk is set to ON (Y2216G), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of Y2208G, if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203Gg is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0) (Y2208G: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203Gk is on. (Y2217G), when it is determined that the variable probability effective flag 203Gk is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y2217G: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability valid flag 203Gk is on (Y2217G: Yes), the value of the variable probability valid timer 203Gm is incremented by 1 (Y2218G), and it is determined whether the value of the variable probability valid timer 203Gm is the upper limit. (Y2219G).
In the process of Y2219G, when it is determined that the value of the probability variable effective timer 203Gm is not the upper limit (Y2219G: No), the special discharge port 65e2 is guided to the special discharge port 65e2 side by the guide piece 65h2 immediately before it is closed. It is a period in which the game ball can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, which means that it is within the ball sweeping period in which passage to the variable probability switch 65e3 is treated as normal passage. It is determined whether or not the switch 65e3 has passed. On the other hand, in the process of Y2219G, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability valid timer 203Gm is the upper limit (Y2219G: Yes), the variable probability valid flag 203Gk is set to OFF (Y2220G), and the value of the variable probability valid timer 203Gm is reset. (Y2221G), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1256, the abnormal process (Y1908G), which is one process of the jackpot control process (FIG. 1252) in the 45th control example, will be described. FIG. 1256 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (Y1908G).

In this abnormal process (Y1908G), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (Y2301G), and if it is determined that the round valid period is not reached (Y2301G: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y2301G, if it is determined that the round is valid (Y2301G: Yes), it is determined whether the ball discharge port switch 65e4 has been passed (Y2302G), and it is determined that the ball discharge port switch 65e4 has been passed. If so (Y2302G: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203Gn is incremented by 1 (Y2303G), and the process proceeds to Y2304G. On the other hand, in the process of Y2302G, when it is determined that the ball discharge port switch 65e4 has not been passed (Y2302G: No), the process of Y2303G is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2304G.
In the process of Y2304G, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203Gi is on (Y2304G), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203Gi is not on (that is, off) (Y2304G: No), Terminate the process as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2304G, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203Gi is ON (Y2304G: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203Gj (Y2305G), and then the updated timer value is It is determined whether the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203Gj is reached (Y2306G), and if it is determined that the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203Gj is not reached (Y2306G: No), the process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of Y2306G, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer 203Gj reaches the upper limit value (Y2306G: Yes), it is determined whether the number of discharged balls matches the winning number (Y2307G). If it is determined that the winning number does not match (Y2307G: No), an error command is set (Y2308G), and the remaining ball timer flag 203Gi is set off (Y2309G). On the other hand, in the process of Y2307G, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins matches the number of winning prizes (Y2307G: Yes), the process of Y2308G is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2309G.
After executing the process of Y2309G, the remaining ball timer 203Gj is reset (Y2310G), the winning number counter 203Gf, the discharge number counter 203Gn and the variable passing counter 203Ge are reset (Y2311G), and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the forty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1257 to 1260, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the 45th control example will be described. In the 45th control example, the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218), which is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 59), are changed from the above-described 14th control example (and the first control example). , the special figure 1 production mode setting process (S4903) which is one process of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is changed, and the special figure which is one process of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) The difference is that the content of the 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is changed, and the rest is the same. It should be noted that each control example described above and the technical concept described in each control example is naturally applied to the 45th control example, and the control example described above and each control example have been described. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the 45th control example.
First, with reference to FIG. 1257, the jackpot-related processing (S4201G) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-fifth control example will be described. This jackpot-related process (S4201G) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 64) in the fourteenth control example (and the first control example) described above. Similarly, this is a process for performing control according to the type of the jackpot-related command received from the main controller 110 . FIG. 1257 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot related process (S4201G).
Of this jackpot related processing (S4201G), in each of the processing of S4701, S4709, S4710, S4713, and S4714, S4701, S4709 of the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 64) in the fourteenth control example (and first control example) , S4710, S4713, and S4714 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot related processing (S4201G) in the 45th control example, when it is determined that the opening command is received in the processing of S4701 (S4701: Yes), the jackpot this time is the second special symbol jackpot ( That is, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot H48) (S4701G), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the second special pattern (it is a jackpot H48) (S4701G: Yes), as a jackpot effect, to a premium rush It decides the opening effect of the effect mode for notifying the entry of (S4702G), and shifts the processing to S4706G.
On the other hand, in the process of S4701G, if it is determined that it is not the second special symbol jackpot (not the jackpot H48) (S4701G: No), it is determined whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot in the invincible mode (S4703G). , When it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot in the invincible mode (S4703G: Yes), the opening effect of the effect mode indicating rushing into the normal rush is determined (S4704G), and the process proceeds to S4706G. On the other hand, in the processing of S4703G, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not in the invincible mode (S4703G: No), the opening effect of the effect mode corresponding to the game state and the jackpot pattern is determined (S4705G), and the process is performed. to S4706G. Specifically, in the process of S4705G, when the probability variable jackpot in the normal state is determined, the opening performance of the performance mode for notifying the transition to the probability variable state A (normal rush mode) is determined, and the normal jackpot in the normal state is determined. In the case, the opening effect of the effect mode that notifies the transition to the time saving state (chance mode) is determined, and if the probability variable jackpot in the probability variable state A is successful, the branch 862 is successfully grasped and the RUSH continuation is notified. The opening effect of the effect mode is determined, and if it is a normal jackpot in the variable probability state A, the opening of the effect mode (see FIG. 1224 (a)) in which the transition to the chance mode is notified by failing to grab the branch 862 performance is determined. In the process of S4706G executed after any one of S4702G, S4704G, and S4705G is completed, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect of the effect mode determined in any of the processes of S4702G, S4704G, and S4705G is set. (S4706G), and the process ends.

In addition, in the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 1257) in the 45th control example, when the processing of S4710 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot of this time is a variable probability jackpot (S4707G). When it is determined (S4707G: Yes), it is determined whether or not the round to be started this time is the V round (1st round) (S4708G). In the process of S4708G, if it is determined that the current round is the V round (1st round) (S4708G: Yes), a display command for guiding the V prize is set (S4713), and this process ends. . On the other hand, in the processing of S4707G, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (S4707G: No), and in the processing of S4708G, if it is determined that this round is not a V round (1 round) (S4708G: No), this process is terminated as it is.
In addition, in the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 1257) in the 45th control example, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S4714 (S4714: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot (whether it is a time saving state , probability variable state A or probability variable state C) is determined (S4709G), an ending command for display corresponding to the ending effect of the determined effect mode is set (S4710G), and this processing exit.
By executing this jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1257), a suitable production mode during execution of the jackpot game can be adjusted according to the game state when the jackpot is won, the type of the jackpot that was won, the game state after the jackpot is finished, and the like. Can be set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1258, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4901G) in the 45th control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4901G) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 67) in the 14th control example (and the first control example) described above. Similar to the FIG. 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 67), this is a process for determining the effect mode of the variable display effect for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Figure 1258 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S4901G).

In this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4901G), first, it is determined whether the current state is normal (S5001G), and when it is determined that it is normal (S5001G: Yes), the variation pattern command indicates A presentation mode corresponding to the basic command is determined (S5002G), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, in the processing of S5001G, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S5001G: No), it is determined whether the current state is a time saving state (S5003G), and if it is determined that it is a time saving state In (S5003G: Yes), the value of the counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5004G), and the process proceeds to S5002G.
On the other hand, in the process of S5003G, if it is determined that it is not a time saving state (S5003G: No), it means that the current gaming state is a probability variable state, so first, in probability variable state A, probability variable state B It is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter for counting the number of lotteries of the first special symbols until transition to (invincible mode) is greater than 0 (S5005G). Although not shown, this promotion counter is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and at the end of the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A48 to F48) of the first special symbol, corresponds to the jackpot type. A counter value corresponding to the ceiling lottery number of times (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol until shifting to the variable probability state B) is set. That is, the counter value is set to 20 at the end of the big wins A48 and D48, the counter value is set to 40 at the end of the big wins B48 and E48, and the counter value is set to 60 at the end of the big wins C48 and F48.
In the processing of S5005G, if it is determined that the value of the promotion counter is greater than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (S5005G: Yes), the value of the promotion counter is subtracted by 1 (S5006G), The process proceeds to S5007G. On the other hand, in the process of S5005G, if it is determined that the value of the promotion counter is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5005G: No), the process of S5506G is skipped and the process proceeds to S5007G. do.
In the process of S5007G, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is the variation pattern for the promotion effect (S5007G), and if it is determined to be the variation pattern for the promotion effect (S5007G: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is 0 (S5008G). In the processing of S5008G, when it is determined that the value of the promotion counter is 0 (S5008G: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big win (S5010G), and when it is determined to be a big win (S5010G: Yes), and when it is determined in the process of S5008G that the value of the promotion counter is not 0 (S5008G: No), a production mode with promotion failure production (see FIG. 1225(b)) is determined. (S5009G), and the process proceeds to S5009. In addition, in the case of a big hit, an effect mode is set in which a transition to a challenge bonus is notified through a promotion failure effect (see FIG. 1225(b)). Specifically, for example, after the rabbit character 801 collides with a rocky mountain, it bounces back in the upper left direction to reach directly above the branch 862, and the transition to the challenge bonus is notified (that is, the third symbol are stopped and displayed in a pattern imitating the same even number). Thus, if the rabbit character 801 falling from above the branch 862 succeeds in grabbing the branch 862, entry into the variable probability state A is reported, as in the case of shifting to the challenge bonus in other situations. In this case, it is possible to use the content of the presentation as it is, in which the shift to the time-saving state is notified if the operation fails. On the other hand, in the process of S5010G, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S5010G: No), it means that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, so the effect mode accompanied by promotion success effect (see FIG. 1226 (a)) is performed. is determined (S5011G), and the process proceeds to S5009.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5007G, if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern for promotion effect (S5007G: No), it is determined whether the current state is the variable probability state B (invincible mode) (S5012G), If it is determined that the variable probability state B (invincible mode) is determined (S5012G: Yes), an invincible mode production setting process for setting the production mode of the variable display production in the variable probability state B (invincible mode) is executed ( S5013G), the process moves to S5009. The details of this invincible mode effect setting process (Y5013G) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1259(a).
On the other hand, in the processing of S5012G, if it is determined that the current state is not the variable probability state B (invincible mode) (S5012G: No), then whether the current state is the variable probability state C (premium rush mode) Determine whether or not (Y5014G), if it is determined that it is not the variable probability state C (premium rush mode) (Y5014G: No), in the variable probability state A, and promotion chance production (see FIG. 1224 (b)) Since it means that it is not the execution timing either, the production mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (Y5015G), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, in the processing of S5014G, if it is determined that the current state is the variable probability state C (premium rush mode) (Y5014G: Yes), the effect mode of the variable display effect in the variable probability state C (premium rush mode) is set. Effect setting processing during premium rush is executed (Y5016G), and the processing proceeds to S5009. Details of the premium rush effect setting process (Y5016G) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1259(b).
In the process of S5009 executed after the process of S5002G, S5009G, S5011G, S5013G, S5015G, or S5016G, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5009), and this process ends. By executing this special figure 1 production mode setting process (see FIG. 1258), the fluctuation display mode is preferably changed according to the state when the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. can be set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1259(a), the invincible mode effect setting process (S5013G), which is one process of the above-described special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 1258), will be described. This invincible mode effect setting process (S5013G) is, as described above, a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state B (invincible mode). . FIG. 1259(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this invincible mode effect setting process (S5013G).

In this invincible mode production setting process (S5013G), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot variation pattern (S5401G), and when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot variation pattern. (S5401G: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5402G), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5401G, when it is determined that it is a normal jackpot variation pattern (S5401G: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of held balls of the second special symbol is a value greater than 1 (S5403G). , When it is determined that the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is greater than 1 (S5403G: Yes), the second special symbol is retained substantially at the same time as the start of the normal jackpot variation pattern of the first special symbol. By executing the variation display based on the sphere, it is confirmed that the normal jackpot variation is discarded (forcibly stopped by the missing symbol) due to the small hit or the jackpot of the second special symbol, so the variation pattern command is A small display area deviation effect mode corresponding to the indicated basic command is determined (S5404G), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S5403G, when it is determined that the number of balls held in the second special symbol is not greater than 1 (S5403G: No), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the normal Since it means that whether or not the big hit fluctuation is discarded is undefined (it is a disadvantageous state in which a normal jackpot game can be executed), the end pinch production of the invincible mode (see FIG. 1227 (b)) production accompanied The mode is determined (S5405G), and this processing ends.
Next, referring to FIG. 1259(b), premium rush which is one process of special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 1258) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 45th control example The medium effect setting process (S5016G) will be described. This premium rush effect setting process (S5016G) is, as described above, a process for determining the effect mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol in the variable probability state C (premium rush mode). FIG. 1259(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of the premium rush effect setting process (S5016G).
In this premium rush effect setting process (S5016G), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern notified from the main controller 110 is a "short win" variation pattern corresponding to a variation time of 5 seconds (S5501G). ). Here, in the premium rush mode, the "short hit" corresponding to the variable time of 5 seconds is set only about 1/3 of the time when the probability variable jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (Fig. 1237 (a)). That is, the probability variable jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed before the variable display of the second special symbol, so that the probability variation state C (premium rush mode) is terminated and the probability variation state A (falling Because it is only the case), in the process of S5501G, if it is determined that it is a “short hit” variation pattern corresponding to the variation time of 5 seconds (S5501G: Yes), the fall to the probability variation state A is notified It determines the effect mode for the jackpot accompanied by the effect (falling effect) (S5503G), and terminates this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5501G, when it is determined that it is not a "short hit" variation pattern corresponding to a variation time of 5 seconds (a variation pattern corresponding to a variation time longer than the variation time of the second special symbol) (S5501G: No), regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol this time, it will be discarded by the lottery result of the second special symbol, so the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the second special symbol Since it should be executed using a large number of display areas, the effect mode of the small display area Dm1 corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5502G), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1260, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902G) in the 45th control example will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902G) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 68) in the 14th control example (and the first control example) described above. Similar to the FIG. 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 68), this is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol. FIG. 1260 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902G).
In this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902G), first, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state C (S5101G), and when it is determined that the probability variation state C (S5101G: Yes) , It is determined whether or not it is during the fluctuation display for 5 seconds corresponding to the "short hit" of the special figure 1 (S5102G), and if it is determined that it is not during the "short hit" fluctuation of the special figure 1 (S5102G : No), determines the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command (S5103G), and proceeds to S5107. On the other hand, in the process of S5102G, when it is determined that the special figure 1 "short hit" is fluctuating (S5102G: Yes), the stop symbol indicating the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. This means that the falling effect has already been set as the variable display mode of the first special symbol, so that the falling effect is not overwritten with the effect corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. A deviating rendering mode for the small display area Dm8 corresponding to the basic command indicated by the command is determined (S5104G), and the process proceeds to S5107.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5101G, if it is determined that the current state is not the variable probability state C (premium rush mode) (S5101G: No), it is determined whether the current state is the variable probability state B (S5105G ), when it is determined that it is not the probability variable state B (S5105G: No), it is either the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variable state A, and mainly in the gaming state where the variable display of the first special symbol should be executed. Since it means that there is, the effect mode of the small display area Dm8 corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5106G), and the process proceeds to S5107. On the other hand, in the process of S5105G, if it is determined that the variable probability state B (S5105G: Yes), it is determined whether the end pinch effect (see FIG. 1227 (b)) is being executed (S5107G), end pinch If it is determined that the effect (see FIG. 1227 (b)) is being executed (S5107G: Yes), the variation time of the second special symbol notified by this variation pattern command is the normal time of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not the time is shorter than the remaining variation time of the jackpot variation (S5108G), and it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the remaining variation time of the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol. If so (S5108G: Yes), the production mode with winning symbol hitting production (see FIG. 1228(a)) is determined (S5109G), and the process proceeds to S5107. On the other hand, in the process of S5108G, it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is not shorter than the remaining variation time of the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol (it is longer than the remaining variation time of the normal jackpot variation). If so (S5108G: No), the process proceeds to S5106G.
On the other hand, in the process of S5107G, if it is determined that the end pinch effect (see FIG. 1227 (b)) is not being executed (S5107G: No), it is determined whether the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. (S5110G), when it is determined that the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress (S5110G: No), the effect mode of the small display area Dm8 corresponding to the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S5111G). , the process proceeds to S5107. On the other hand, in the process of S5110G, when it is determined that the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress (S5110G: Yes), the production mode accompanied by the out-fixed ready-to-win production (see FIG. 1227 (a)) is determined ( S5112G), the process moves to S5107. In the process of S5107 executed after any one of S5103G, S5104G, S5106G, S5109G, S5111G and S5112G is executed, the effect determined in any one of S5103G, S5104G, S5106G, S5109G, S5111G and S5112G A display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S5107), and the process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fifth control example, when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol reaches the specific number of times in a specific advantageous game state, the degree of advantage of the specific game state (the jackpot game When executed, the ratio of setting the game state after the end of the jackpot to a specific game state again) is made variable. That is, after the specific game state (probability variable state in which the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the specific game state again at the first rate) set to the predetermined first advantage degree is set. Based on the establishment of the specific condition (the number of lotteries for the first special symbol has reached a specific number), the degree of advantage of the specific gaming state is set to a second degree of advantage (second setting means for setting the ratio to a second ratio different from the ratio of 1; More specifically, in the 45th control example, the game state is configured to provide three types of game states, namely, the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state, and the variable probability state with the highest degree of advantage among the three types of game states By reaching the ceiling lottery number (either 20 times, 40 times, or 60 times), the ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot is increased. It is configured to be raised (controlled so that the probability variable jackpot is confirmed). As a result, when an advantageous variable probability state is set, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot after continuing to miss the ceiling lottery number of times than to win the jackpot early, which is a novel game characteristic. can be realized.
Here, among game machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided to give a sharpness to the game. Furthermore, in such conventional gaming machines, in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, the period from when an advantageous gaming state is set to when the next jackpot is won is lengthened. Easy control (for example, control to make the probability of jackpot in the high probability state of special symbols low compared to conventional game machines, control to lengthen the fluctuation time of special symbols compared to conventional game machines) A game machine that employs it has also been proposed. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the length of the period from when an advantageous gaming state is reached until the winning of the jackpot is prolonged. Since there is a possibility that the number of game balls consumed (shot) before reaching a big win becomes too large, there is a problem that the player's motivation for playing the game tends to decrease.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 45th control example, the degree of advantage is higher after reaching the number of ceiling lotteries than before reaching the predetermined number of ceiling lotteries in the advantageous variable probability state. It is configured as follows. That is, when the jackpot game is executed before reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the probability variable jackpot game with a high degree of advantage is executed at a rate of 50%, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state again. A normal jackpot game with a low degree of advantage is executed at a rate of 50%, and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a time-saving state with a lower degree of advantage than the variable probability state, while the jackpot is won after reaching the ceiling lottery frequency. When the game is executed, the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of substantially 100%, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state. By constructing in this way, when the variable probability state is set, a novel game is played with the expectation that the game will continue to be lost in the lottery of special symbols without being a big hit until at least the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. Therefore, even if it takes a long period of time to achieve a big win, the player's motivation for playing the game can be hardly lowered. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the 45th control example, before and after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the variation pattern table referred to for determining the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is changed to make the variation pattern table substantially unchanged without changing the game state. It realizes control to change the ratio of a certain probability variable jackpot. More specifically, in the forty-fifth control example, similarly to the fourteenth control example described above, the so-called Simultaneous variation specification is adopted. In this 45th control example, when the variable display of one of the special symbols is stopped as a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variable display of both special symbols, the other special symbol will be displayed according to the lottery result. Adopted a control that stops and displays with a misplaced pattern. In addition, in this 45th control example, when hitting to the right in the variable probability state (and the time saving state), the second In addition to the board configuration in which the game ball frequently enters the start winning opening (second ball opening 1641) that triggers the lottery of the special symbol, in the variable state, even the lottery of the first special symbol is the second special. Even in the lottery of patterns, it is configured so that all the misses of the special symbols become small hits (there is no sorting of the complete misses). Furthermore, in the 45th control example, in the variable probability state, before reaching the ceiling lottery number, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (after the special symbol lottery is executed, a new special symbol lottery The period until it becomes executable) is shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the new special symbol lottery can be executed) By constructing it, basically it is possible to win a big hit only by lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern and in the case of a normal jackpot, the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern is almost before the variable display of the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. is stop-displayed, the distribution of the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes substantially the same as the distribution of the jackpot in the variable probability state. On the other hand, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, only when the lottery result of the first special pattern is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation time of the second special pattern (new after the lottery of the special pattern is executed) A longer fluctuation time (period from the execution of the special design lottery to the execution of the new special design lottery) is set so that the period until the special design lottery can be executed Configured. In other words, when the lottery result of the first special symbol results in a normal jackpot, the second special symbol small win or jackpot variation is stopped and displayed first, so the normal jackpot variation is lost and replaced with the symbol. (The normal jackpot is discarded) On the other hand, if the lottery result (probable variable jackpot or small hit) other than the normal jackpot is obtained, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first. In addition, it is configured to form an extremely advantageous state that continues until the next probability variable jackpot. By configuring in this way, the probability variable jackpot game is performed during the period until the ceiling lottery number of times is reached with a short fluctuation time of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol (that is, the average fluctuation time is short) in the probability variable state. While it can be configured as a state with a relatively low possibility of being executed (low advantage), only the fluctuation time of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol is lengthened (that is, the average fluctuation time is long). The ceiling lottery number is reached. The period after the game can be configured as a state in which the possibility of the variable probability jackpot game being executed is relatively high (the degree of advantage is high).

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied in one game state, a variation time (variation time) is selected when a special symbol lottery is executed without changing the game state. A gaming machine is widely known that has a specification in which the tendency of the selected variation time (variation pattern) is varied by switching a data table to be referred to to a different table to give a sharpness to the game. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the special symbol lottery results are displayed when a table is set in which a long fluctuation time tends to be selected when the special symbol lottery is lost, the table is referred to. Since the period until the game is played tends to be long, the game is delayed, and if the game balls are continuously shot at approximately the same pace before and after the table is switched, more balls are consumed ( There is a problem that it becomes difficult to keep the player's motivation for the game because the possibility that the game efficiency will be deteriorated increases.
On the other hand, in the forty-fifth control example, the period from the execution of the lottery of one special symbol until the execution of the lottery of a new special symbol is relatively short, compared to the first state, one special symbol. The degree of advantage is higher in the second state in which the period from the execution of the lottery to the execution of the lottery of the new special symbol is relatively long. More specifically, the variation time at the time of winning the normal jackpot is longer than the state before reaching the number of ceiling lotteries (probability variation state A) in which the average variation time is short due to the short variation time at the time of winning the normal jackpot. The state (probability variable state B) after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, which is longer as the average fluctuation time, is the same game state (probability variable state), but the execution ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot game is extremely high. In order to form an advantageous situation, a state in which the average fluctuation time is generally long, in which the motivation for the game tends to decrease, conversely, has a novel game property that makes it easier to improve the player's motivation for the game. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Furthermore, in the 45th control example, as described above, when the specific condition is satisfied (the ceiling lottery number of times is reached) in a specific game state (variable probability state), the variable probability jackpot game is executed without changing the game state. The ratio of execution, which is a factor that greatly affects the degree of advantage of the player, is configured to vary greatly. In other words, when a specific condition is satisfied, a novel control can be realized in which the degree of advantage of the specific game state is changed from the first degree of advantage to the second degree of advantage while maintaining the specific game state. is doing. Along with this, in the 45th control example, as an effect in a specific game state (variable probability state), the first effect ( A first effect execution means capable of executing a normal rush mode effect) and a second execution condition being satisfied in a specific game state (reaching the ceiling lottery number in the variable probability state A). a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect (effect for an invincible mode) capable of suggesting to the player a degree of advantage higher than the degree of advantage suggested by the first effect; A player can easily grasp that the degree of advantage is different depending on whether the second performance is executed (that is, before or after reaching the ceiling lottery number). configured as possible. In other words, in the forty-fifth control example, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to a plurality of different degrees of advantage are executable even though the game state is not changed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide game characteristics that are easier for the player to understand. Furthermore, in the 45th control example, an effect suggesting reaching the ceiling lottery (changing the degree of advantage) can be executed before reaching the ceiling lottery number. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the advantageous degree increases by reaching the ceiling lottery number before the ceiling lottery number is reached.
<First modification of the forty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1261 and 1262, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the forty-fifth control example described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fifth control example described above, by reaching the ceiling lottery number of times in the probability variable state A in which the probability variable jackpot ratio is substantially 50%, the probability variable jackpot ratio is substantially 100%. It was configured to shift to state B. That is, according to the lottery frequency of the first special symbol, the ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot is variable in two stages.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the forty-fifth control example, the substantial variable probability big win ratio is varied in three stages according to the number of special symbol lotteries after being set to the variable probability state. It is configured. More specifically, by reaching the first ceiling lottery number (for example, 25 times) in the variable probability state A, the ratio of the substantial variable probability big hit is 75%. By reaching the second ceiling lottery frequency (for example, 60 times) without winning, it is configured to shift to the probability variable state B2 in which the ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot becomes 100%.
The pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the forty-fifth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. The only point is that Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the forty-fifth control. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the forty-fifth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the forty-fifth control example>
Details of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 1261 and 1262. FIG. Here, in the ROM 202 in the first modified example, the specified contents of the fluctuation table 202Gd and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202Gj are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the forty-fifth control example (see FIG. 1231). The only difference is that First, with reference to FIG. 1261(a), details of the variation table 202Gd in the first modified example will be described.
FIG. 1261(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation table 202Gd in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 1261(a), the variation table 202Gd in the first modified example is the configuration of the variation table 202Gd in the above-described 45th control example (see FIG. 1234(b)). Instead of 202Gd3, a table 202Gd31 for probability variation B1 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in probability variation state B1 in which the ratio of substantial probability variation big hit is 75%, and substantially The only difference is that a table 202Gd32 for probability variation B2, which is referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in probability variation state B2 where the probability variation jackpot ratio is 100%, is provided. is doing. Here, since the variable probability state B2 in the first modification is exactly the same as the variable probability state B (invincible mode) in the 45th control example described above, the table 202Gd32 for the variable probability B2 in the first modification is also the same as the defined content of the variable probability B table 202Gd3 in the forty-fifth control example described above. Therefore, only the details of the variable probability B1 table 202Gd31 will be described here.

FIG. 1261(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202Gd31 for variable probability B1 described above. As shown in FIG. 1261(b), this variable probability B1 table 202Gd3 is different from the above-described variable probability B table 202Gd3 (see FIG. 1236). The only difference is that Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1261 (b), when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is "normal jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 49" variation time for the range is defined in association with a normal reach of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds), and a super reach with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds (25000 milliseconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 65" A long reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is defined in association with the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from "66 to 198".
According to this provision, in the variable probability state B1 in which the table 202Gd31 for the variable probability B1 is referred to, the second While the variation time (80 seconds) is set longer than the variation time (30 seconds) of the special symbol, the ratio is about 1/3 (66/199) when winning the normal jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. , a variation time (20 seconds or 25 seconds) shorter than the variation time (30 seconds) of the second special symbol is set. That is, 2/3 of winning the normal jackpot of the first special symbol is discarded by the small win or jackpot of the second special symbol, and only 1/3 of winning the normal jackpot is used to execute the normal jackpot game. Form a connected state. In other words, if the probability variable jackpot (any of the jackpots A48 to F48) is determined at a rate of 50% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the normal determined at a rate of 50% Since the jackpot game with the first special symbol is executed when the big win (big win G48) is set to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 25 seconds or less at the ratio of 1/3, it is considered as the probability variable jackpot that is actually executed. The ratio to the normal jackpot is 3:1. That is, since it is possible to form a relatively advantageous jackpot distribution state in which the substantial probability variable jackpot ratio is 75% (ratio of 3/4), the probability variable state B1 in which the probability variable B1 table 202Gd31 is referred to , the player can be made to strongly expect the probability variable jackpot.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1262, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1262 is a diagram showing defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 1262, the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the first modified example is different from the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the above-described 45th control example (see FIG. 1238(b)) after the probability variable jackpot The only difference is that part of the variation pattern scenario is changed when the variable probability state is set as the game state. Other scenarios (scenarios 1, 2, and 6) are the same as the above-described 45th control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
As shown in Figure 1262, in the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj in the first modification, as a variation pattern scenario for the probability variation state set after winning the probability variation jackpot other than the jackpot H48, the first special symbol lottery The table 202Gd2 for time saving/probability variation A is referred to within the range of 24 times or less (see FIG. 1235), and when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 25 times, the promotion effect table 202Gd5 (see FIG. 1237(b)). is referred to, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is referred to the table 202Gd31 (see FIG. 1261 (b)) in the range of 26 times or more and 59 times or less, and the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is 60 times Table 202Gd5 for promotion effect (see FIG. 1237 (b)) is referred to, and the scenario (scenario 7) in which table 202Gd32 for probability variation B2 is referred to in the range of 61 times or more of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is associated. stipulated. In other words, after the definite variable jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, if the jackpot is not won until the lottery of the first special symbol is completed 25 times, the advantageous variable state B1 (the ratio of the substantial definite variable jackpot is 75% state), and furthermore, when the jackpot is not won until the lottery of the 60th first special symbol is completed, the probability change state B2 (invincible mode), which is more advantageous, is set. It is configured. In addition, along with this, according to the stage of the degree of advantage of the variable probability state (the ratio of the substantial variable probability big hit), the effect is executed in a manner that the player can recognize the number of stages. Specifically, for example, in the variable probability state A, similar to the 45th control example described above, an effect of climbing a rocky mountain (see FIG. 1222 (a)) is developed, and when promoted to the variable probability state B1, a helicopter A production to board is executed, and in the variable probability state B1, a production to fly with a helicopter aiming at the sky is developed, and when it is promoted to the variable probability state B2, a production to reach above the clouds is executed, and in the variable probability state B2. , Similar to the forty-fifth control example described above, an effect is developed in which the rabbit character 801 runs on clouds. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suggest to the player that the higher the altitude of the rabbit character 801 is, the higher the degree of advantage is, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be realized.

That is, in the first modification, from the probability variation state A in which the ratio of the substantial probability variation big hit is 50%, the ratio of the probability variation big hit increases step by step as the number of lotteries of the first special symbol increases. It is possible to realize a very special and novel game. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the first modification, the ratio of the actual variable probability jackpot in the variable probability state was configured to be variable in three stages, but it is not limited to this, and the number of stages of the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is more. You can set more. In this case, by providing a variation pattern table in which the selection ratio of the variation time that is longer than the length of the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal jackpot is changed according to the ratio of the probability variable jackpot to be realized, It is possible to form a multi-stage probability variable state with different probability variable jackpot ratios.
<Second modification of the forty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1280 and 1281, a second modification of the forty-fifth control example described above will be described. In the above-described 45th control example and its first modification, in the variable probability state A, it is always configured to be longer than the variation time of the first special symbol.
On the other hand, in the second modification, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, a variation time (for example, 19 seconds) shorter than the variation time of a part of the first special symbol is selected. and That is, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed substantially simultaneously, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a variation time of 20 seconds or more, and the result of the lottery of the second special symbol is In the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation time based on the jackpot fluctuation of the second special pattern elapses earlier, the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation display of the first special pattern is removed and the pattern is forced. It was configured to be stopped. In other words, although not shown, the time saving/probability variation A table 202Gd2 (see FIG. 1235) was modified so that the variation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol jackpot was 19 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a case where the mode is shifted to the premium rush mode even in the variable probability state A, so that the player's expectation for the premium rush mode can be further improved.

With reference to FIGS. 1280 and 1281, a characteristic presentation mode executed in the variable probability state A in the second modified example will be described. In the second modification, like the above-described 45th control example and its first modification, almost every time in the probability changing state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are almost started at the same time. Then, as described above, if the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state A results in a big hit, the ratio of the relatively advantageous variable probability jackpot to be determined is 50% (the ratio of the disadvantageous normal jackpot to be determined). is 50%). On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, it is confirmed that the state will shift to an advantageous probability change state C. And, as described above, in the second modification, even in the variable probability state A, part of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol started approximately at the same time is 20 seconds or more), there is a possibility that the jackpot game symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in the second modification, the first special symbol lottery results in a big win and the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol lottery results in a big win and the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed. It is formed as a state in which both the event and Therefore, in the second modification, part of the case where the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern is stopped and displayed before the second special pattern, and the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern is larger than the first special pattern. When both are stop-displayed first, a race performance is executed to suggest which special pattern's jackpot pattern is stop-displayed. The details of this race effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 1280 and 1281. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1280 (a), in this second modification, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable probability state A are started at substantially the same time, Part of the case where the first special symbol is stopped and displayed before the second special symbol, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed before the first special symbol, for example, Triggered by the occurrence of ready-to-win, a race performance is executed in which a rabbit character corresponding to the first special symbol and a turtle character corresponding to the second special symbol run a foot race. As shown in FIG. 1280(a), when the race effect is started, a rabbit character 801 and a turtle character 865 are vertically arranged and displayed on the left side of the display screen in the main display area Dm. A vertically elongated substantially rectangular starting line is displayed on the right side of the front view. In addition, the characters "If the tortoise wins the race, you have a chance!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the turtle character 865 wins the competition, which is advantageous for the player.
FIG. 1280(b) shows a display mode when the race is started in the race presentation. As shown in FIG. 1280(b), the turtle character 865 corresponding to the second special symbol jackpot with a high degree of advantage is basically the rabbit character 801 corresponding to the first special symbol jackpot with a low degree of advantage. The race unfolds at a slower speed than Then, in this race effect, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first (the variable display of the second special symbol is discarded), as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which the character 801 reaches the finish line before the turtle character 865 (see FIG. 1281(a)), and the second special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed first (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is discarded). 1281(b)), an effect is executed in which the turtle character 865 reaches the goal ahead of the rabbit character 801 (see FIG. 1281(b)). In other words, in the race production, a series of productions (first production) in which the rabbit character 801 moves from the start to the finish line and a series of productions (second production) in which the turtle character 865 moves from the start to the finish line overlap. It can also be said that it is a performance that is executed by When the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first, the rabbit character 801 reaches the goal while the turtle character 865 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol reaches the goal. It can also be said that the second effect is cut off in the middle of a series of effects (second effect) in which the character 865 moves from the start to the goal. Similarly, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed first, the turtle character 865 reaches the goal while the rabbit character 801 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is on the way to the goal. It can also be said that the first effect is cut off in the middle of a series of effects (first effect) in which the character 801 moves from the start to the goal.
A race effect in which the rabbit character 801 reaches the goal (wins the race) before the turtle character 865, which indicates that the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed first (see FIG. 1281(a)). ) is completed, entry into the challenge bonus is notified, and after the jackpot of the first special symbol is started, the challenge bonus effect (see FIG. 1223(b)) is executed. On the other hand, after the race effect in which the turtle character 865 reaches the goal first (wins the race), a blackout effect ( (see FIG. 1228(b)) is executed. With these presentation modes, the player can confirm the race presentation with a strong expectation that the turtle character 865 will win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

Thus, in the second modification, the first execution condition is satisfied in a specific gaming state (probability variable state) (the first special symbol is a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect (a effect in which the rabbit character 801 runs from the start to the goal) based on the end of the variable display of the second effect, and the establishment of the second execution condition (the second 2nd production different from the 1st production (a production in which the turtle character 865 runs from the start to the goal) based on the fact that the variable display of the 2nd special pattern is completed in a state where one or more reserved balls of the special pattern exist. and a second effect executing means capable of executing the first effect and the second effect are executed in duplicate (a race effect in which the rabbit character 801 and the turtle character 865 compete is executed), the effect period of the second effect elapses earlier than the effect period of the first effect elapses (the rabbit character 801 reaches the goal first) (the turtle character 865 reaches the goal first) is more likely to be advantageous to the player.
In addition, in the second modification, the race effect is executed only when the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern is stopped and displayed first, or when the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern is stopped and displayed first. Although it has been configured to obtain, it is not limited to this. For example, even when the jackpot symbols are not stopped and displayed, a fake race effect may be executed. In addition, as the variable display effect of the first special symbol, the performance of the rabbit character 801 running from the start to the goal may be executed alone (without displaying the turtle character 865), or the variation of the second special symbol. As a display effect, the effect in which the turtle character 865 runs from the start to the goal may be executed alone (without displaying the rabbit character 801). In other words, as the variable display performance of the first special symbol, it is notified that the rabbit character 801 reaches the goal within the time limit to execute the jackpot game with the first special symbol and that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached. On the other hand, if the goal cannot be reached within the time limit, it may be configured to notify that the lottery result was a loss (small win) or that the ceiling lottery number of times has not been reached. Similarly, as the variable display effect of the second special symbol, while notifying that the turtle character 865 reaches the goal within the time limit to execute the second special symbol jackpot game, within the time limit. If the goal cannot be reached, it may be configured to notify that the lottery result was a loss (small win). By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the presentation mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the above-described 45th control example and its various modifications, in the probability variation state after the completion of the probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol, the more the number of fluctuations after the completion of the jackpot, the higher the ratio of the substantial probability variation jackpot. However, conversely, it may be configured such that the smaller the number of fluctuations after the end of the big win, the higher the ratio of the probability variable big win. In this case, as a variation pattern scenario, a variation pattern table (for example, a variation pattern table ( For example, the probability variation B table 202Gd3 in the 45th control example and the probability variation B1 table 202Gd31 in the modification of the 45th control example) are associated, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is relatively large (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol The variation pattern table (for example, time saving/probability variation A table 202Gd2) in which the ratio of the substantial probability variation jackpot is low may be associated with the number of times in the range of 41 times or more). Also, for example, it may be configured such that a variation pattern in which the ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot is high only within a specific lottery frequency range (or value) is referred to. Specifically, for example, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol after the probability variation state A is set is 30 times to 39 times, 50 times to 59 times, 70 times to 79 times, 100 times or more probability variation jackpot The ratio of the variation pattern table (for example, the probability variation B table 202Gd3 in the 45th control example and the probability variation B1 table 202Gd31 in the modification of the 45th control example) are associated with each other, and the probability variation jackpot ratio is low in other ranges. It is good also as a structure which matches the variation pattern table (for example, table 202Gd2 for time saving and probability variation A). By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that strongly expects to win a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol within the range of the specific number of lotteries, so that the game in the variable probability state can be sharpened. can be done. In this case, the range (zone) of the number of lotteries in which a variation pattern in which the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is high is selected may be changed according to the type of the probability variable jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the first type of jackpot, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 30 times to 39 times, 50 times to 59 times, 70 times to 79 times, 100 times or more. The variation pattern table with a higher ratio (for example, the probability variation B table 202Gd3 in the 45th control example and the probability variation B1 table 202Gd31 in the modification of the 45th control example) are associated, and in the second type of jackpot, the first special Variation pattern table (for example, probability variation B table 202Gd3 in the 45th control example and the 45th control example) Table 202Gd31) for variable probability B1 in the modification is associated, and in the third type of jackpot, a variation pattern table (for example , The variable probability B table 202Gd3 in the 45th control example and the variable probability B1 table 202Gd31) in the modified example of the 45th control example may be associated with each other. In other words, the range (first zone) where the degree of advantage of the variable probability state (percentage of the probability variable jackpot) does not improve only in the predetermined jackpot type, and the range (second zone) where the degree of advantage of the variable state improves regardless of the jackpot type , may be provided. Furthermore, in this case, in the first zone (9 times or less, 30 to 49 times, 60 to 79 times) in which the degree of advantage of the probability state improves only in the predetermined jackpot type, the normal probability state production ( A production mode (a production mode different from the production mode of the first production) that suggests that the degree of advantage of the probability change state (probability change ratio) may be higher than the first production) (second production ) is executed, and in the second zone (50 times to 59 times, 100 times or more) where the advantage of the probability change state improves regardless of the jackpot type, the player is informed that the probability change ratio is improving. It may be configured to execute the effect (third effect) of the effect mode (the effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect). By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize the game property of estimating the advantageous degree of the variable probability state from the type of the performance being executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, for example, a variation pattern table in which the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is high only for the number of lotteries (11 times, 22 times, 33 times, . . . ) (for example, for the probability variable B in the 45th control example The table 202Gd3 and the variable probability B1 table 202Gd31) in the modified example of the 45th control example may be associated with each other. Even in the case of such a configuration, the game can be played while paying attention to the number of lotteries after the end of the big win, so the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the above-described 45th control example and its various modifications, when the normal jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state B (invincible mode), the small hit (or jackpot) of the second special symbol usually In order to facilitate the discarding of the jackpot, only the normal jackpot fluctuation of the first special pattern is set to a longer fluctuation time than that of the second special pattern. A variation time longer than the variation time of the second special symbol is set in part or all when the probability variation jackpot is reached in the lottery of the symbols (that is, the percentage of the probability variation jackpot is lower than the probability variation state A, or substantially It may be configured to provide a variable probability state (variable probability state D), which is generally determined to be a jackpot. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the variable probability state can be further subdivided, so that the degree of freedom in design can be further improved.

In the forty-fifth control example and its various modifications described above, by reaching a predetermined lottery number (ceiling lottery number) after the variable probability state is set, the degree of advantage of the variable probability state is varied (variable probability However, it is not necessary to change the degree of advantage at a fixed number of times. For example, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbols in the variable probability state, the advantage degree may be varied. More specifically, for example, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, it is configured to provide a normal small hit and a special small hit, and when the special small hit is won (for example, about 1/40 probability) , It may be configured to vary the degree of advantage (switch to the state of selecting a variation pattern with reference to the probability variation B table 202Gd3). In addition, as in the modification of the 45th control example described above, the advantage degree of the variable probability state is provided in three or more stages, and a special small hit corresponding to each advantage degree is provided, and the special small hit is won. In the case of doing, it may be configured to set a state in which a variation pattern is selected by referring to a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of special small hit that has been won. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player expect to win a special small prize in each special symbol lottery, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In these cases, as a variable display effect when winning a special small win in the first special symbol lottery, and part of the variable display effect when winning a normal small win (for example, a normal small win) 1/10), the promotion chance effect (see FIGS. 1225 and 1226(a)) may be executed. That is, when the special small hit is won, the effect of reaching the top (see FIG. 1226 (a)) is executed. 1225(b)) may be executed to suggest that promotion has failed due to collision. By configuring in this way, even if the special small prize is not won, the player can be expected to be promoted (improvement of the probability change ratio) every time the promotion chance production is executed, so that the game can be played. It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, it may be configured to vary the degree of advantage of the variable probability state when winning the special figure 2 small per. Specifically, for example, with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/40 probability) in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit set to a longer variation time (eg, 60 seconds) than the variation time of the second special symbol , and the small winning symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed first during this long variation time, so that the variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched to the probability variation B table 202Gd3. In this case, when the long variation of the first special symbol is executed, the possibility of shifting to the invincible mode increases, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small win but a big win, Since it is also possible to shift from the normal rush mode to the premium rush mode, it is possible to heighten expectations in the case of winning the long fluctuation small winning of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Also, apart from the lottery for special symbols, a lottery for whether or not to switch the variation pattern table may be executed. By constructing in this way, the variation pattern table can be switched regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the timing of switching the variation pattern table (variable probability variation ratio) can be diversified.
In the above-described 45th control example and its various modifications, the variable display of the first special symbol in the ceiling lottery number of times is stopped and displayed with a small winning symbol, so that the degree of advantage of a specific game state (probability variable state) is increased. , the change is made while the game state is maintained, but the change timing of the advantage level is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage is changed (the variation pattern table is switched) at a predetermined timing during execution of the variable display, or the degree of advantage is changed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of variation (the variation pattern table is switched). can be configured to Also, it may be configured such that the degree of advantage is changed (the variation pattern table is switched) a plurality of times during one variation display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the change timing of the degree of advantage, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the above-mentioned 45th control example and its various modifications, unlike the above-mentioned 14th control example etc., the lottery result of the time-saving symbol winning in which the second time-saving state is set directly without going through the jackpot was not provided. , It is good also as a structure which also provides the lottery result of time-saving design election. In this case, in the second time-saving state based on the time-saving symbol winning, a variation pattern may be selected with reference to the same variation pattern table (time-saving/probability variation A table 202Gd2) as the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot, or a different variation A pattern table (variable probability B table 202Gd3 and variable probability C table 202Gd4) may be referred to to select a variation pattern. In particular, when the variation pattern table with a high degree of advantage (probability variation B table 202Gd3 and probability variation C table 202Gd4) is configured to be referenced, the game is strongly expected to be a lottery result of time saving symbol winning in the normal state can be performed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
In the above-described 45th control example and its various modifications, when the variable probability state A (normal rush mode) shifts to the variable probability state B (invincible mode) or the variable probability state B1, the fluctuation time at the time of winning the normal jackpot (special By lengthening only the time from when the lottery of symbols is executed until the lottery of new special symbols can be executed), the average fluctuation time (after the lottery of special symbols is executed and the lottery of new special symbols The probability variable state B and the probability variable state B1, which have a longer probability variable state B and the variable probability state B1, have a higher degree of advantage than the variable probability state A, which has a short average variation time. A predetermined lottery result other than the result may be configured to facilitate selection of a long variation time (80 seconds). For example, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is partly lost (small hit) or partly in the case of a probability variable big hit, a long variation time (80 seconds) can be easily selected. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the chance of deriving the lottery result of the second special symbol, so that the possibility of shifting to the probability variable state C (premium rush mode) with a higher degree of advantage is higher. can do. In other words, as the variation time of the first special symbol, the longer the variation time (longer than 30 seconds, which is the variation time of the second special symbol), the more the normal jackpot variation can be discarded. Not only that, but it is also possible to improve the possibility of shifting to the premium rush mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-described 45th control example and its various modifications, the variable probability state A, the variable probability state B1, and the variable probability state B (variable probability state B2) are different in the ratio of the substantial probability variable jackpot, respectively. However, the method of changing the advantage degree of a specific game state (probability variable state) without changing the game state is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of the variable probability state, the length of the opening period of the second specific winning opening 2065a in the small winning game of the first special symbol is varied, and the second specific winning opening 2065a is entered during execution of the small winning game. The advantage may be varied by varying the number of game balls to be played (differentiating the number of prize balls to be paid out). In addition, for example, by varying the release pattern of the electric accessory 2640a when winning the normal symbol according to the type of probability variable state, the game efficiency (the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls paid out) ratio) may be varied for each type of variable probability state to vary the degree of advantage.
In the above-described forty-fifth control example and its various modifications, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely long regardless of the lottery result in order to suppress the irregular game method in which the right-handed game is performed in the normal state. (Set to 10 minutes), but the method of suppressing right-handed games in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, it is configured to be set to the latent probability state set to the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol instead of the variable probability state. good too. In the latent state, as in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, and even in the latent state, the right-handed game is played and a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot may be set to the latent state again. By configuring in this way, the merit (shifting to the premium rush mode with the highest degree of advantage for the player) in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol can be transferred to the normal state (and the latent state). Since it is possible to eliminate only , it is possible to suppress the irregular game method in which the right-handed game is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.
In addition, in the time-saving state in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is mainly derived by the right-handed game, the variable probability state A, and the variable probability state B, one game ball is fired and one of the start ports (first input A game method of waiting without firing a game ball until the variable display based on the start winning is completed when the ball enters (start winning) (so-called single shot game). If the game is played with , there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed alone without accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, even in situations other than the normal big hit fluctuation in the variable probability state B, the lottery result of the second special symbol is derived (it becomes impossible to discard due to the small hit or big hit of the first special symbol). be. As a countermeasure, for example, in the time-saving state in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is derived mainly by the right-handed game, the variable probability state A, and the variable probability state B, the number of balls held in the first special symbol is 0. When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, it may be constructed such that an extremely long variation time (for example, 1800 seconds) is always selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the game efficiency when a single-shot game is performed, and if a single-shot game is performed, it is extremely long every time the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. The game method involves waiting for a time, and the irregular game method (single-shot game) is easily recognized by the hall clerk, so that the irregular game method can be suppressed.
<46th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1263 to 1279. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above, the second special symbol from when it is set to the time saving state until all the reserved balls of the second special symbols acquired during the time saving state are digested and transferred to the normal state Three types of time-saving states (time-saving state A to time-saving state C) with different numbers of lotteries are provided, and once it shifts to time-saving state C in which a time-saving end condition that almost certainly continues until the next big hit is set, It is configured to form an extremely advantageous state (MAX bonus mode) in which the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached (the jackpot winning for the time-saving limit number of times is almost decided). However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 38th control example, since the advantageous state in which the time saving state C and the jackpot are repeated is surely ended in the time saving limit number of times, the time saving state C is first shifted to the time saving limit. There is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous because the game until the number of times is reached becomes like an operation for simply obtaining prize balls.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example, when a predetermined specific condition is established in the time saving state C, the number of repetitions of the time saving state C and the jackpot exceeds the number of times corresponding to the time saving limit number of times. configured so that it can be repeated over More specifically, in the time saving state C, basically after the timing of setting the execution of the jackpot (after setting the jackpot in the lottery of special symbols and setting the execution of the jackpot game, or becoming a small hit The game state at the time of setting the execution of the big winning game is set to the time reducing state by ending the time saving state after detecting the V prize during the small winning game and setting the execution of the big winning game, and the time saving state is set at the end of the big winning game. While configured to subtract 1 from the remaining number of times up to the number of times (the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb), only when a specific type of small win is won, before the timing of setting the execution of the big win (small It is configured to terminate the time saving state at the start of a winning game. That is, when a small win of a specific type is won, the game state at the timing of setting the execution of the big win game is changed to the normal state because the time saving state is ended before the V prize is generated, and the big win is made. It is configured to reset the remaining number of times (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) to the initial value of 3 up to the time saving limit number of times at the end. As a result, when a small win of a specific type is won during the repetition of the time saving state C and the second special symbol big win, the jackpot winning for the number of times of the time saving limit is further guaranteed from there, so it is substantial. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel behavior as if a jackpot corresponding to the number of time-saving limits was added, triggered by winning a small prize of a specific type. Therefore, even while the time-saving state C and the big win are being repeated, the game can be played in anticipation of winning a small win of a specific type, so how long the time-saving state C and the big win continue. It is possible to make the player have an incomprehensible sense of excitement. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the time saving state C and the big win are repeated.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above, the game (4 As an effect in the MAX bonus mode, which is a 4-round jackpot and a duration of the time-saving state C three times between each jackpot), the player feels as if a 16-round jackpot is being executed. It was configured to execute an effect (pseudo MAX jackpot effect) to let the player win. As a result, although the player has actually won the jackpot four times in four rounds, the player is made to think that he or she has won prize balls for 16 rounds by winning one jackpot. I was trying to improve the interest of.
In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example, a specific type of small win is won, and the number of time reduction limits (counter value of the time reduction limit counter 203 kb) is reset to the initial value (specific type of small win Including the jackpot based on the winning, four more jackpots are added), the reset of the number of time-saving limit times (the counter value of the time-saving limit counter 203 kb) is notified (that the jackpot has been added) at a predetermined opportunity. It is configured to execute the production to be performed. More specifically, at the end timing of the fourth jackpot (that is, the ending period after the end of the pseudo 16 round game in the pseudo MAX jackpot effect), the jackpot continues (16 rounds, which are pseudo MAX rounds) It is configured to execute a MAX breakthrough effect indicating that it will break through). Then, once the MAX breakthrough effect is executed, the time-saving limit number of times is determined by a continuous judge effect indicating whether or not the MAX bonus mode continues for each jackpot (that is, each pseudo 4-round game in the pseudo MAX jackpot effect). It is configured to notify whether or not it has reached In other words, at the timing when the time saving limit number (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) is reset, the reset is not notified, and the time saving limit number (time saving The counter value of the limit counter 203 kb) has been reset (the MAX bonus mode continues beyond the pseudo 16 rounds). In addition, it is not clearly notified how long the MAX bonus mode will continue at one opportunity, but the continuation or non-continuation is notified in units of pseudo 4-round game (that is, one jackpot game unit). By configuring in this way, since it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not to continue in the pseudo 4-round game unit (that is, 1 jackpot game unit), after the MAX round breakthrough effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous until the termination of the MAX bonus mode (reaching the time reduction limit number of times) is notified by the continuous judge performance. Therefore, it is possible to realize an extremely novel and highly interesting presentation mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Furthermore, in the 38th control example described above, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, despite the fact that the number of times of time saving is common, all the starting detected during the time saving state after transitioning to the time saving state A novel control is adopted in which the actual number of times of lottery of the second special symbols is changed until the lottery of the second special symbols based on winning prizes is completed. Specifically, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of lotteries of special symbols (the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is established based on the specified number of first end conditions And, a second end condition established based on the number of executions of the small winning game becoming a specified number of times, and a third end condition established based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbols becoming a specified number of times. In addition to , a fourth end condition is provided when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches a specified number during execution of the time saving final variation. In the thirty-eighth control example described above, the first to third end conditions are common in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, and only the fourth end condition is different, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially performed. A time-saving state A that can be executed twice and a time-saving state B that can substantially execute the lottery of the second special symbol four times are formed.

In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example, by changing the timing of subtracting the number of times of working hours (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) in the working hour saving state according to the conditions, it is the same working hour saving state Also, the easiness of accumulating the reserved balls of the second special pattern is varied according to the conditions, and even in the same time-saving state, the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols is changed according to the conditions. More specifically, in the time-saving state, a first timing between the execution of the special symbol lottery and the end of the variable display for showing the lottery result, and a second timing different from the first timing. 2 timing, the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at one of the timings, and the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at the first timing In this case, it is configured to make it more difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls during the execution of the special symbol variable display than when the second timing is subtracted. More specifically, in the 46th control example, as the type of complete loss when the lottery result of the special symbol is completely lost, two types of loss A and loss B are provided, and in the time saving state When it is completely lost in the lottery of the special symbols and the loss A is determined as the type of loss, in the same way as when it is completely lost in the 38th control example described above, time is reduced at the fluctuation stop timing (first timing). While the number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted, if the out B is determined as the out type, the time saving number of times (special The counter value of the counter 203t in FIG. 2) is decremented. Thereby, when the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 (that is, the time saving final fluctuation) and A is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted until the end of the fluctuation display Therefore, just by continuing to play the right-handed game during the execution of the time-saving final variation, the fourth end condition (end condition established based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becoming a specified number) It is possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol until is established. On the other hand, if the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 state (that is, time saving final fluctuation) and B is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted at the start of the fluctuation Since the time-saving state is ended by doing so, the state has already fallen to the normal state during execution of the variable display. In other words, since it becomes extremely difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls in the time saving final variation, it is also difficult to increase the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Therefore, in this 46th control example, the subtraction timing of the special figure 2 counter 203t in the time saving final fluctuation is set to the second timing (variation start timing) than the first timing (variation stop timing) In the case, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol tends to decrease even in the same time-saving state, so even in the same time-saving state It is possible to realize a novel game property by changing the number of executions).
The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-eighth control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp The configuration of the RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 executes The only difference is that some of the control processing has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 38 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the thirty-eighth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIGS. 1263 to 1266, the characteristic presentation mode in the 46th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1263(a), the ending effect of the MAX bonus mode in the forty-sixth control example will be described. Here, in the forty-sixth control example, as in the thirty-eighth control example described above, when the transition to the most advantageous time-saving state C after the end of the jackpot (substantially continues until the next jackpot), the jackpot and time-saving State C is repeated until the time-saving limit number of times (three times) is reached, thereby forming an extremely advantageous state in which four big wins including the first big win are guaranteed. In the forty-sixth control example, as in the thirty-eighth control example described above, four second special symbol jackpot games (four rounds) from the start of the first jackpot to the end of the time-saving limit number of jackpots During the execution period of the jackpot game) and the period of time-saving state C between each jackpot, a pseudo MAX jackpot performance (see FIG. 1038) is executed to make it look as if the jackpot of 1 16 rounds is continuing.
FIG. 1263(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the ending effect of the pseudo MAX jackpot effect in the forty-sixth control example. Here, the ending effect of the pseudo MAX jackpot effect is executed in the ending period of the jackpot won for the fourth time after shifting to the MAX bonus mode. In addition, as described above, in the 46th control example, there is a possibility that the number of times of the time saving limit (the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) is reset while winning the jackpot four times, but the number of times of the time saving limit (time saving limit Regardless of whether or not the counter value of the counter 203 kb is reset, the ending effect of the pseudo MAX jackpot effect is once executed in the ending period of the fourth big win after shifting to the MAX bonus mode. As an effect mode of the ending effect of this pseudo MAX jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. A small display area Dm2 showing characters indicating the number of awarded balls (2400 in the example of FIG. 1263(a)) and characters indicating the total number of awarded balls paid out in the MAX bonus mode (2400). At the same time, a small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm with the characters "Right shot" indicating the game method in the MAX bonus mode. In addition, an adventurer character 811 is displayed in the lower center of the main display area Dm, and above the adventurer character 811, the characters "NEXT" are displayed, and below the characters "NEXT", " A small display area Dm9 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape with characters "RUSH mode" is formed. In addition, the characters "MAX BONUS END" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the MAX bonus mode may have ended.

FIG. 1263(b) is a diagram showing an example of a production mode when a MAX breakthrough production for informing that the MAX bonus mode continues beyond the pseudo 16 rounds is executed in the ending production of the pseudo MAX jackpot production. be. That is, during the continuation of the MAX bonus mode, at least once, a small hit of a specific type has been won, and the number of time reduction limits (the counter value of the time reduction limit counter 203 kb) has been reset, so that the number of time reduction limits is reached. It shows an example of an effect mode that is executed when the number of remaining jackpots (pseudo 4-round game) until 1 or more remains.
When the MAX bonus mode continues beyond four jackpots, the end of the MAX bonus mode is temporarily notified during the ending period of the fourth jackpot (ending effect of the pseudo MAX jackpot effect) (Fig. 1263 ( a) is executed, as shown in FIG. 1263(b), in the main display area Dm, a substantially hexagonal continuous image KG with the character "Continue" appears in the small display area Dm9. An effect of popping out from below and flicking away both the small display area Dm9 and the characters "NEXT" is executed. In addition, the characters "Break through the MAX round!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the MAX bonus mode will continue beyond the MAX round (16 rounds).
Next, referring to FIG. 1264, the jackpot game executed in the variable probability state C after being informed that the MAX bonus mode continues beyond 16 rounds by the MAX round breakthrough effect (see FIG. 1263(b)) Next, a description will be given of the continuous judgment effect that is executed during the ending period of . Here, in the 46th control example, when the MAX bonus mode continues beyond 16 rounds (4 jackpot wins), it is notified only that it will continue beyond 16 rounds at the end of the pseudo 16-round game. It is configured so as not to inform how many more times the MAX bonus mode will continue until the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in the forty-sixth control example, after notifying that the MAX bonus mode continues beyond 16 rounds by the MAX round breakthrough effect (see FIG. 1263(b)), the continuous judge effect is performed each time the jackpot ends. It is configured to inform whether or not the number of time reduction limits has been reached in this big hit. As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the continuous judgment effect every time the big win is completed, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.
FIG. 1264(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the start of the continuous judgment effect. The example of FIG. 1264(a) illustrates the case where the continuous judgment effect is generated in the ending period of the next big win after the MAX round breakthrough effect. That is, it illustrates the case where the continuous judgment effect is executed after the completion of the pseudo 20 rounds (the pseudo 16 rounds + the pseudo 4 rounds). In this case, as shown in FIG. 1264(a), the display contents of the small display area Dm2 (number of prize balls actually paid out/display of total number of prize balls paid out) corresponds to 20 rounds. 3000/3000”. In addition, the characters "CONTINUE JUDGING" are displayed in the small display area Dm9. In addition, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, above the adventurer character 811, there are four substantially circular icons (notification icons 811a and 811b with the characters "end" and the characters "continue"). Notification icons 811c and 811d) are rotated and displayed. Furthermore, the characters "Choose an icon!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, when the adventurer character 811 selects an icon (notification icons 811a, 811b) with the word "end" attached, the MAX bonus mode is terminated, while the word "continue" is displayed. The player can intuitively understand that the MAX bonus mode will continue if the attached icons (notification icons 811c, 811d) can be selected.

FIG. 1264(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when continuation of the MAX bonus mode is notified in the continuous judge effect. As shown in FIG. 1264(b), when the continuation of the MAX bonus mode is notified, the adventurer character 811 displays an icon (FIG. 1264(b) In this example, an effect of stabbing the notification icon 811c) with a sword is executed. Also, characters indicating the number of pseudo rounds to be started next in the MAX bonus mode are displayed in the small display area Dm9. FIG. 1264(b) exemplifies a case in which characters "21 rounds" are displayed. Further, the characters "BONUS CONTINUE!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the MAX bonus mode will continue.
Thus, in the 46th control example, a specific type of small hit was won in the MAX bonus mode, and the time reduction limit number of times (counter value of the time reduction limit counter 203 kb) was reset (the MAX bonus mode exceeded 16 rounds). 1263 (b )) is configured to execute. Then, in the MAX bonus mode after the MAX round breakthrough effect (see FIG. 1263 (b)) is executed, each time the jackpot is won, the time reduction limit number of times has not been reached in the ending period, and the MAX bonus mode It is configured to execute a continuous judgment effect (see FIG. 1264) that notifies the player only whether the MAX bonus mode is terminated by reaching the time reduction limit number of times. That is, at the time the time-saving limit number of times (counter value of the time-saving limit counter 203kb) is reset, no special effect is performed, and the time-saving limit number of times (time-saving limit counter 203 kb counter value) has been reset, and in the subsequent MAX bonus mode, each time a jackpot is won, only whether or not the MAX bonus mode will be terminated with the current jackpot is notified. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many rounds the pseudo-MAX bonus mode continues. The excitement of not knowing how long the bonus mode will last can be continuously given to the player until the MAX bonus mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1265 and FIG. 1266(a), an effect mode when shifting to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 46th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1265(a), in the forty-sixth control example, as in the thirty-eighth control example, when the time-saving state A is entered after the first hit, the adventurer character 801 and the monster appear in the main display area Dm. An effect in which the character 821 faces each other is executed. In addition, a character saying "Stock attack icons with right-handed strokes!" In addition, a small display area Dm4 in which characters "Right shot" are displayed is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "If you defeat the enemy, rush into RUSH!?" is displayed.
On the other hand, in the forty-sixth control example, unlike the thirty-eighth control example, only an attack icon display area AI1 for displaying an attack icon is formed in the lower left corner of the main display area Dm. That is, in the thirty-eighth control example described above, the two display areas of the attack icon display areas AI1 and AI2 are formed (see FIG. 1036(a)), whereas in the forty-sixth control example, the display areas are reduced to one. Depending on the lottery result of the second special symbol that is executed first in the time saving state A, the number of time saving times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) that makes it difficult to acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol This is because there is a possibility that it will be set at the subtraction timing (that is, the fluctuation start timing). More specifically, as described above, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is completely out and the type is out and it is determined to be A, the time saving number is subtracted at the fluctuation end timing (first timing). By doing so, while the opportunity to acquire the second special symbol holding ball is given during the execution period of the variable display, when the loss type is determined to be loss B, at the variation start timing (second timing) By subtracting the number of time saving times, the time saving state A has already ended during the execution period of the variable display, so the opportunity to acquire the second special symbol reserved ball is not given (through gate 67 is a game ball is configured so that the electric accessary 640a is not opened even if it passes. Therefore, considering the possibility that the out B is determined (the possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol that is executed first after the time saving state A is set will be the lottery of the last second special symbol), In the forty-sixth control example, only one attack icon display area AI1 is displayed.

FIG. 1265(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a game ball first enters the second ball entrance 640 in the time saving state A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1265 (b), in the time saving state A, when the game ball first enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol variation display is started, it is relatively narrow (the player In the small display area Dm8 where the second special symbol is hard to be visually recognized, the variable display of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is started. In addition, regardless of the second special symbol lottery result, a time gauge ga3 with a character "prepared" is displayed between the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821.例文帳に追加Furthermore, based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, an attack icon of a type corresponding to the current lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the attack icon display area AI1. The example in FIG. 1265(b) illustrates a case where an icon with the characters "slashing" is acquired. These display contents suggest that an attack icon is obtained based on the starting prize of the second special symbol, and that the type of the attack icon suggests the degree of expectation of winning (defeating the monster character 821). can be intuitively understood by the player. In addition, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost B (that is, if the opportunity to acquire an additional hold ball is not given during the variable display of the second special symbol), one attack that has been acquired as it is An effect of attacking the monster character 821 using the icon is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is other than Lost B, an effect is executed to inform the player that the player will be additionally given an opportunity to acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol. An example of this effect will be described with reference to FIG. 1266(a).
In FIG. 1266(a), the first lottery for the second special symbol in the time saving state A is lost, so that it is other than B, so that the opportunity to additionally acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol during the variable display is given. is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when an effect for informing the player (attack icon added effect) is executed. As shown in FIG. 1266(a), when the attack icon superimposed effect is executed, the time gauge ga3 displaying the characters “prepared” is broken, and the remaining time is An effect is executed in which the right end of the display ga3a moves leftward in the front view to narrow the area, and a new time gauge ga3 appears in which the area of the elapsed time display ga3b increases. In addition, a balloon image FG with the words “Additional!!” is displayed above the adventurer character 811 . Furthermore, an attack icon display area AI2 is newly formed above the attack icon display area AI1. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the player has been given an additional opportunity to acquire the second special symbol reserved ball.
In addition, in the case of the time saving state B, the same effect is developed. That is, at the start of the time-saving state B, as shown in FIG. If the lottery result of the symbol is a failure other than B, as shown in FIG. In response to , the right end of the remaining time display ga3a moves leftward in the front view to narrow the area, and a new time gauge ga3 appears with a larger area of the elapsed time display ga3b. In addition, a speech balloon image FG with the characters “Additional!!” is displayed above the adventurer character 811 . Furthermore, an effect is executed in which three areas of attack icon display areas AI2 to AI4 are newly formed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he or she has an opportunity to obtain three additional attack icons.
Thus, in the 46th control example, depending on whether the final variation of the time saving state (the first variation of the time saving state A or the time saving state B) is the variation display corresponding to the out B, in the time saving final variation It has a configuration in which the easiness of accumulating the second special symbol ball is greatly changed. Then, in the forty-sixth control example, as in the thirty-eighth control example described above, the substantial big-hit probability (total probability of the big-hit and small-hit) per second special symbol lottery is 1/3. It is configured as follows. That is, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol changes even by one, the degree of expectation for the big hit changes significantly. Therefore, when the attack icon added effect is generated, the player can feel great joy and a sense of security, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the forty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1267(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the forty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1267(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the forty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 1267(a), the ROM 202 in the 46th control example replaces the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 38th control example (see FIG. 1042(a)) with the jackpot type selection table 202bk. Type selection table 202bH is provided, time reduction grant table 202eH is provided instead of time reduction grant table 202ek, small hit type selection table 202fH is provided instead of small hit type selection table 202fk , and an exclusion type selection table 202Ha are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the thirty-eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, with reference to FIG. 1267(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bH in the forty-sixth control example will be described. This jackpot type selection table 202bH is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202bk (see FIG. 1043(c)) in the thirty-eighth control example described above, in order to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. is a data table referenced by FIG. 1267(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bH in the forty-sixth control example.
As shown in FIG. 1267(b), in the jackpot type selection table 202bH in the forty-sixth control example, two types of jackpot A49 and jackpot B49 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C49 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 1267 (b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", "jackpot A49" is defined in correspondence, A "jackpot B49" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A49" has four rounds, and basically, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state B (the time-saving state in which the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is given up to four times). It is a jackpot type. In addition, "jackpot B49" has four rounds, and basically, the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state A (the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery opportunity is given up to twice). It is a jackpot type that is played. Therefore, there is no difference between the ``jackpot A49'' and the ``jackpot B49'' in terms of the number of rounds, but the ``jackpot A49'' is more advantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished. can be provided twice more than the "jackpot B49", the "jackpot A49" is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than the "jackpot B49".
Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A49" and "jackpot B49" are 5 and 95, respectively, the ratios of winning ``jackpot A49'' and ``jackpot B49'' when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery are 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, a time-saving state B with a relatively low probability (5% rate) and a high degree of advantage is set, and a relatively high probability (95% rate) ), a time-saving state A with a low advantageous degree is set. In addition, this is a story limited to the normal state, and if you win the "jackpot A49" or "jackpot B49" in the time-saving state (the jackpot is started), the number of times of the time-saving limit has not been reached. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state C.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1267 (b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot C49 ” are defined in association with each other. Since the ``big win C49'' is associated with the whole range of possible values of the first win type counter C2, the ``big win C49'' is always decided when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern. This "jackpot C49" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state C. The number of rounds is the same as that of other jackpots, but since the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C with the highest degree of advantage, it is the most advantageous jackpot type among all the jackpot types.
In addition to these "big win A49" to "big win C49", "big win D49" and "big win E49" are also provided in the thirty-eighth control example. "Big win D49" is a big win type that is won when a small win is won, a small win B49 is determined as a small win type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed during the small win B49 game, and the big win ends. The subsequent game state is basically a 4-round jackpot set to the time-saving state B. In addition, when "jackpot D49" is won in the time saving state, the time saving state C is set on the condition that the time saving limit number of times is not reached in the same manner as other jackpot types. In addition, "jackpot E49" is a jackpot type that is won when a small win is won, a small win C49 is determined as a small win type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed during the small win game of the small win B49, The game state after the end of the big win is a 4-round big win in which the time-saving state C is set.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1268 (a), the details of time reduction grant table 202eH in this 46th example of control are explained. This time saving grant table 202eH is similar to the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1046(a)) in the 38th control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions. Drawing 1268 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of this time reduction grant table 202eH.
As shown in FIG. 1268 (a), the time saving grant table 202eH in the 46th control example is associated with the value of each counter referred to when determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied for each jackpot type. are stipulated. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 1268 (a), in this 46th control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, as in the 38th control example described above, the special figure 2 counter 203t, A small hit counter 203s, a special figure 2 counter 203t, and a prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are provided. The special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time saving state is set is met. The winning counter 203s is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of small winning games executed after the time saving state is set is met. The counter 203t is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not an end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols executed after the time saving state is set is established, and is reserved for regulation. The ball number counter 203ka is used to determine (determine) whether or not an end condition (fourth end condition) corresponding to the number of held balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the execution of the last variable display of the time saving state is established. is a counter.

As shown in FIG. 1268 (a), in this 46th control example, four types of "jackpot A49" to "jackpot D49" are provided as the jackpot types, and the time reduction grant table 202eH has for each jackpot type Then, the values of the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the east head 2 counter 203t, and the values of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka (that is, the first to fourth end conditions) are defined in association with each other.
As shown in FIG. 1268 (a), for "jackpot A49" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "3" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when "jackpot A49" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third termination condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 1, and as the fourth termination condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 3. That is, the time saving state B is set. In the case of continuously hitting the right hand in this time saving state B, when the lottery result of the first second special symbol is lost and the lottery result other than B is obtained, the fourth end condition is almost satisfied and the time saving is achieved. State is terminated. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first second special symbol is out B, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t are subtracted at the fluctuation start timing, so that the special figure 2 The value of the counter 203t becomes 0 and the time saving state is terminated. In other words, the time saving state B is ended without increasing the number of held balls by one. Therefore, after shifting to the time saving state B, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol can be changed according to whether or not the first lottery result of the second special symbol is the loss B. It is possible to realize a game property that strongly expects that it will not happen.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1268 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "jackpot A49" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure The value "100" of the 2 counter 203t and the value "65535" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when "jackpot A49" is won in the time-saving state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition, As the third termination condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 100 times, and as the fourth termination condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 65535. That is, the time saving state C is set. In the time-saving state C, a jackpot or a small win that is substantially determined is won with a probability of about 1/3, so there is almost no possibility that the time-saving state will continue until the final change of the time-saving state, and the second end condition, Alternatively, the time saving state is ended based on the jackpot winning.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1268(a), for "jackpot B49" and "jackpot D49" as jackpot types, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10 ”, the value “1” of the small hit counter 203s, the value “1” of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value “1” of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka. Therefore, when "jackpot B49" or "jackpot D49" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbol is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of executions of the small win game is set as the second end condition. 1 time is set, as the third end condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set once, and as the fourth end condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set as one. . That is, the time saving state A is set. When the lottery result of the first special symbol in the time saving state A is other than the loss B, by continuing to hit right in the time saving state A, the fourth end condition is almost satisfied and the time saving state is ended. be. In other words, after shifting to the time saving state A, the fourth end condition is established by acquiring one second special symbol reserved ball during the execution of the first second special symbol variation display (time saving final variation). Therefore, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol twice. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first second special symbol is out B, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t are subtracted at the fluctuation start timing, so that the special figure 2 The value of the counter 203t becomes 0 and the time saving state is terminated. In other words, the time saving state A is terminated without increasing the number of held balls. Therefore, after shifting to the time saving state A, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol can be changed according to whether the first lottery result of the second special symbol is the loss B or not. It is possible to realize a game property that strongly expects that it will not happen.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1268 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "jackpot B49" and "jackpot D49" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100" and the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "65535" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time saving state C is set in the same manner as the "jackpot A49".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1268 (a), for "jackpot C49" as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "100", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1 ", the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "65535" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time-saving state C is set in the same manner as when "jackpot A49" or "jackpot B49" is won in the time-saving state.
Thus, in the 46th control example, as in the 38th control example, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, one of the time saving states A to C is set according to the jackpot type, When a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous time-saving state C regardless of the type of the jackpot. As a result, when a big win is won directly or via a small win in the normal state, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the big win. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state, the game can be played while giving a sense of security that the most advantageous time saving state C has been established. In addition, as described above, even if the jackpot is won in the time saving state C, if the time saving limit number of times is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state.
In the forty-sixth control example, as in the thirty-eighth control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win, the game state when the big win symbols are stopped is changed to the game state when the big win is won ( On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win and the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3, the big win is won, The game state at the time of passing through the specific region 650e3 is determined as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state at the time when the execution of the jackpot game is set). And, as described above, in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, as long as the normal game method (the game method that continues to hit the right continuously) is performed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the first time is almost During the execution of , the fourth termination condition is established and the time saving state is terminated. In other words, since the time saving state is terminated before the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol for the first time, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, A game state at the time of winning a jackpot can be treated as a normal state. That is, in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, if the lottery result of the first second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the lottery result of the first second special symbol will be out, and it will shift to the normal state. The degree of advantage can be the same in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed from 1 is a big win or a small win. In other words, even if it becomes a big hit or a small hit in the first lottery of the second special symbol, it does not become a big hit in the time saving state (the transition to the time saving state C is not confirmed), so the first time to be executed in the time saving state The lottery for the second special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern for the second transition executed after shifting to the normal state can make the player have the same expectation. Therefore, even if the first lottery for the second special symbol is lost, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling excessive disappointment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1268(b), details of the small hit type selection table 202fH in the 46th control example will be described. This small hit type selection table 202fH, similar to the small hit type selection table 202fk (see FIG. 1046 (b)) in the 38th control example described above, selects the small hit type when a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. It is a data table referred to for determination. Figure 1268 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202fH. As shown in FIG. 1268 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 48", "small hit A49" is associated with the small hit type, and the small hit type The value of the counter C5 corresponds to the range of "49 to 94", "small hit B49" is defined as the small hit type, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "95 to 99". On the other hand, "small hit C49" is defined in correspondence as a small hit type. Here, "small hit A49", "small hit B49", and "small hit C49" can easily enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 simply by continuing to hit to the right during execution of the small hit game. It is a small hit type that can be played, and when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit A49" and "small hit C49", while winning the big hit C49, "small hit B49" , when a game ball enters the specific area 650e3, a jackpot D49 is won.
As described above, the jackpot C49 is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot D49 ends when the jackpot is won in the normal state. The later game state is set to the time saving state B, while the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C when winning in the time saving state is set. In addition, the number of rounds for each jackpot is 4 rounds. Therefore, since the big win C49 is more advantageous than the big win B49, the small win A49 and the small win C49 are more advantageous than the small win B49 as small wins to be won in the normal state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state (MAX bonus mode), even if you win any small hit, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C, so at first glance it seems that the degree of advantage is common. It seems to be. However, if the small hit C49 is won, the value of the small hit counter 203s is subtracted at the start of the small hit game, and the time saving state is ended (in other small hit types, V winning occurs and the big hit game starts. time-saving state is terminated after setting the run). In other words, in the time saving state C, the small win C49 is won, the V prize is generated, and the big win is set to be executed. counter value of counter 203kb) is reset. As a result, by winning the small win C49 in the MAX bonus mode, the MAX bonus mode continues beyond the MAX round (pseudo 16 rounds). You can expect something. Therefore, the interest in the MAX bonus mode can be further improved.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, it is associated with "small hit A49", "small hit B49", and "small hit C49". Since the random numbers (counter values) are 49, 46, and 5, respectively, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, "small win A49", "small win B49", and "small win The percentages at which the hit C49' is determined are 49% (49/100), 46% (46/100), and 5% (5/100), respectively.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1268(c), details of the failure type selection table 202Ha in the forty-sixth control example will be described. This lost type selection table 202Ha is a data table that is referred to for determining the lost type when the special symbols are lost in the lottery. FIG. 1268(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the exclusion type selection table 202Ha. As shown in FIG. 1268(c), as the complete loss type of the first special symbol, "outside A" is set as the outside type with respect to the total possible range of the outside type counter C7 (range of "0 to 99"). are defined in association with each other. This "off A" is an outlier type in which the number of times of time saving (special figure 2 counter 203t and time saving counter 203h) is subtracted at the time of fluctuation stop.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1268 (c), as the complete loss type of the second special symbol, the value of the loss type counter C7 is in the range of "0 to 89", and the loss type is defined as "off A". , and the range of "90 to 99" is defined in association with "outlier B" as the outlier type. Since this "off B" is an outlier type in which the number of time reductions (special figure 2 counter 203t and time reduction counter 203h) is subtracted at the start of fluctuation, the number of time reductions is set to 1 (special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 ) In time saving state A or time saving state B, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost B, the time saving state is terminated at the same time as the fluctuation starts, and the second special symbol reserved ball is accumulated. you won't get the chance. Therefore, in particular, in the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the first lottery of the second special symbol is lost B or the other lottery result, so the degree of advantage of the player changes greatly. It is possible to play a game while paying attention to the type of .
Next, with reference to FIG. 1269, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1269 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the forty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 1269, the RAM 223 in the forty-sixth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirty-eighth control example (see FIG. The difference is that the completed flag 223Hc is added. Other configurations are the same as those of the thirty-eighth control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The remaining number of breakthrough counter 223Ha is elected more than 4 times, which is the basic number of jackpots in the MAX bonus mode, due to the time saving limit number (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) being reset in the middle of the MAX bonus mode. A counter for counting the number of jackpots. The initial value of this remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is set to 0, and when the time reduction limit number (counter value of the time reduction limit counter 203 kb) is reset (that is, when winning a small hit C49 in the MAX bonus mode) , a counter value corresponding to the number of jackpots won more than four times is set (see S3637G in FIG. 1277). Also, while the MAX bonus mode continues for more than 4 jackpots, if you win the small win C49 again, on the condition of V winning, the MAX bonus mode will continue until you win the jackpot 4 more times. To continue, the value is overwritten to 4 (see S3638G in FIG. 1277). When setting the ending effect of the big win, it is determined whether to report the continuation or the end by the continuous judge effect according to the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha.
The breakthrough effect flag 223Hb is a flag indicating whether or not the MAX bonus mode continues beyond 4 times, which is the basic number of jackpots in the MAX bonus mode (that is, the number of times of the time saving limit). . If this breakthrough production lag 223Hb is on, it indicates that the MAX bonus mode has continued beyond 4 jackpots, and if it is off, in a situation where the MAX bonus mode has continued beyond 4 jackpots. means no. This breakthrough effect flag 223Hb is set to ON when execution of the MAX round breakthrough effect (see FIG. 1263(b)) is set (see S5909G in FIG. 1278).

After the first winning flag 223Hc shifts to the time saving state A or the time saving state B (that is, the time saving state ended by executing the lottery of the second special symbol once), the second entrance 640 It is a flag indicating whether or not the first start winning has already been detected. If this first winning flag 223Hc is on, it means that the first start winning of the second special symbol has already been detected, and if it is off, the first starting winning of the second special symbol has not been detected. It means that there is The initial value of the first winning flag 223Hc is set to OFF, and is set to ON when the first start winning of the second special symbol is detected in the time saving state A or the time saving state B (S5835G in FIG. 1275 reference).
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the forty-sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the forty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1270 to 1273. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1270, the details of the special symbol determination process (S201G) in the forty-sixth control example will be described. This special symbol determination process (S201G) is a process executed instead of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1049) in the above-described 38th control example. It is a process for executing the lottery of symbols.
Of the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 1270) in this 46th control example, in each of the processes of S301 to S305 and S321A to S323A, S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 1049) in the 38th control example and The same processing as each processing of S321A to S323A is executed. Also, in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1270) in the 46th control example, in the process of S321A, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S321A: No), the lottery result of the special symbol is completely out. Therefore, the process for the time of failure is executed to determine the failure type and perform control according to the failure type (S301G), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1271, the out-time process (S301G), which is one process of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 1270) in the forty-sixth control example, will be described. This outage process (S301G) is, as described above, a process for determining the outage type and performing control according to the outage type. FIG. 1271 is a flow chart showing the contents of this out-time processing (S301G).

In this loss time process (S301G), first, the lottery result of the special symbol is set to be completely lost (S331G), and then based on the value of the acquired loss type counter C7, the loss type selection table 202Ha (Fig. 1268 (c )), and sets the specified loss type as a lost symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device (S332G). Next, it is determined whether the outage type is outage B (S333G), and if it is determined that the outage type is outage B (S333G: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S334G). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (S334G: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t are each subtracted by 1 (S335G), and the fluctuation start timing A subtracted flag for indicating that the number of times of time saving has been subtracted is set to ON (S336G). When the process of S336G is completed, then set the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of each counter after updating (S337G), the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t either is 0 It is determined whether or not (S338G).
In the process of S338G, if it is determined that either the value of the time saving counter 203h or the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 0 (S338G: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S339G), Time saving counter 203h, special figure 2 counter 203t, small hit counter 203s and prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are all set to 0 (S340G), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S341G), and this process ends. do.
On the other hand, in the processing of S333G, if it is determined that the type is not out B (S333G: No), in the processing of S334G, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) If it is determined (S334G: No), and in the process of S338G, if it is determined that neither the value of the time saving counter 203h nor the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 0 (S338G: No), this process ends as it is do.
By executing this off time processing (see FIG. 1271), it is possible to vary the update timing of the number of times of time saving according to the off type. That is, when the deviation type is deviation A, the number of times of reduction in working hours is updated at the end of fluctuation, while when it is deviation B, the number of reductions in working hours can be updated at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in particular, when the final variation of the time saving state is completely off, to realize a novel game property that can greatly change the number of retained balls of the second special symbol that can be accumulated during the final variation. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1272, details of the time saving update process (S202G) in the forty-sixth control example will be described. This time saving update process (S202G) is a process that is executed instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1051) in the 38th control example described above, and similarly to the time saving update process (see FIG. 1051), the time saving end condition is set. While updating various counter values for determining, it is a process for ending the time saving state when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied.
Of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1272) in this 46th control example, in each process of S601 to S605, S607, S631A and S633A to S639A, respectively, of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1051) in the 38th control example described above The same processes as those of S601 to S605, S607, S631A and S633A to S639A are executed. In addition, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1272) in the forty-sixth control example, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the subtracted flag is on (S601G), and if it is determined that the subtracted flag is on (S601G: Yes), the time saving number has already been subtracted at the start of the fluctuation This means that it is not necessary to subtract the number of times of time reduction this time (at the time of stopping the fluctuation), so after setting the subtracted flag to OFF (S602G), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S601G, if it is determined that the subtracted flag is off (S601G: No), it means that the number of time savings is not subtracted at the start of the fluctuation, so the number of time savings is subtracted. Therefore, the process proceeds to S602.
Further, in the time saving update process (see FIG. 1272) in the 46th control example, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 in the process of S604 (S604: No), the small hit in the 38th control example Instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 1052), the small hit time saving update process is executed (S603G), and the process proceeds to S633A. In addition, details of the small hit time saving update process (S603G) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1273, the small hitting time saving update process (S603G) which is one process of the time saving update process (FIG. 1272) in the present 46th control example will be described. This small hit time saving update process (S603G) is a process executed instead of the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1052) in the 38th control example described above, and is similar to the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1052) Secondly, it is a process for updating various counter values for judging the time saving end condition based on the winning of the small prize and ending the time saving state when it is judged that the time saving end condition is established. FIG. 1273 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning time saving update process (S603G).

Of the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1273) in the 46th control example, in each process of S701 to S704, S706, and S711A to S713A, the small hit time saving update process in the 38th control example described above (Fig. 1052 reference), the same processes as the processes of S701 to S704, S706, and S711A to S713A are executed. In addition, in the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1273) in the present 46th control example, in the process of S711A, when it is determined that it is the MAX bonus mode (S711A: Yes), then the small hit of this time is a small hit It is determined whether it is C49 (S701G), and when it is determined that it is a small hit C49 (S701G: Yes), the process proceeds to S702. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a small hit C49 (S701G: No), the process proceeds to S712A.
Thereby, when the small hit C49 is won in the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C), the time saving frequency can be updated when the small hit fluctuation is stopped. That is, since the time-saving state can be ended, the game state at the time when the small winning game is started, the V prize is generated, and the execution of the big winning game is set can be treated as the normal state. As a result, the remaining number of times up to the short time limit number (counter value of the short time limit counter 203 kb) can be reset, and the MAX bonus mode can be continued until the 4 big wins including the big win based on the V prize this time are completed. can be done. On the other hand, in the case of a small win other than the small win C49, the time saving state can be ended after the V prize is generated and the execution of the big win game is set, so that the number of times of the time saving limit can be reached at the end of the big win. The remaining number of times (the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) can be subtracted.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the forty-sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1274 to 1279. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1274, the details of the winning information command process (S3201G), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 1059) in the 46th control example (38th control example), will be described. FIG. 1274 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process (S3201G).
In the processes of S5801A, S5802A and S5807A to S5810A in the winning information command process (see FIG. 1274) in the forty-sixth control example, S5801A, S5801A, and S5801A of the winning information command process in the thirty-eighth control example (see FIG. The same processes as those of S5802A and S5807A to S5810A are executed. Also, in the winning information command process (see FIG. 1274) in the 46th control example, in the process of S5802A, if it is determined that it is the time saving mode or the chance mode (S5802A: Yes), it is acquired based on the start winning Attack icon selection processing for selecting an attack icon is executed with reference to the winning information (S5801G), and this processing ends. Details of this attack icon selection process (S5801G) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1275 is a flow chart showing the attack icon selection process described above. In this attack icon selection process (S5801G), first, the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1047(b)) is read out (S5831G), and from the read attack icon selection table 222ka, the winning information notified by the winning information command is displayed. and the counter value of the first effect counter 223f1 (S5832G). Then, it is determined whether the first winning flag 223Hc is ON (S5833G), and if it is determined that the first winning flag 223Hc is ON (S5833G: Yes), a notification effect for notifying the determined icon type is performed. set (S5834G), and the process proceeds to S5838G. On the other hand, in the process of S5833G, if it is determined that the first prize winning flag 223Hc is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5833G: No), the first prize winning flag 223Hc is set to ON (S5835G), It is determined whether the winning information corresponds to B (S5836G), and if it is determined that the winning information corresponds to the lost B (S5836G: Yes), the process proceeds to S5834G.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information does not correspond to the outlier B (S5836G: Yes), then after the determined icon type is notified, the notification effect is set to generate the effect of adding the number of times (see FIG. 1266). (S5837G), the information in the information storage area is updated according to the determined icon type (S5838G), and this processing is terminated.
By executing this attack icon selection process (see FIG. 1275), when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the lottery result other than the lost B is executed in the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the number of times addition production The player can be notified that an opportunity to additionally acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol is given by .
Next, with reference to FIG. 1276, the details of the jackpot related process (S3401G) in the forty-sixth control example will be described. This jackpot-related process (S3401G) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 1061) in the thirty-eighth control example described above. This is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command when a jackpot-related command is received from. FIG. 1276 is a flowchart showing this jackpot-related processing (S3401G).

Of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1276) in the forty-sixth control example, in each of the processing of S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, S3614 and 3625A, the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1061) in the above-described thirty-eighth control example. The same processes as S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, S3614 and 3625A are executed. In addition, in the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 1276) in the forty-sixth control example, in the processing of S3603, when it is determined that an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3603: Yes), the opening period of this jackpot An opening command process for determining the effect mode of the opening effect to be executed during the opening is executed (S3601G), and the process proceeds to S3614. Details of the opening command process (S3601G) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 1276) in the forty-sixth control example, when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the processing of S3610 (S3610: Yes), the ending command processing in the thirty-eighth control example (FIG. 1062 reference), the ending command process is executed (S3602G), and the process proceeds to S3614. The details of this ending command process (S3602G) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1277, details of the opening command processing (S3601G) described above will be described. FIG. 1277 is a flow chart showing this opening command processing (S3601G). In the opening command process (S3601G), first, an opening effect is determined according to the jackpot type, the value of the remaining winning number counter 223kb, and the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha (S3631G). That is, in the process of S3631G, if both the value of the remaining hit number counter 223kb and the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha are 0, the opening effect indicating the start of the MAX bonus is determined when the jackpot type is the jackpot C49. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot type other than the jackpot C49, the opening effect for the 4-round jackpot is determined. In addition, if either the value of the remaining number of hits counter 223kb or the value of the number of remaining breakthroughs counter 223Ha is 1 or more, it means that the jackpot is in the MAX bonus mode. Since it means that the performance to be shown is being executed, the opening performance of the performance mode in which the pseudo interval performance continues from the time saving state C before winning the jackpot is determined.
When the processing of S3631G is completed, then, an opening command for display corresponding to the effect mode determined in the processing of S3631G is set (S3632G), and it is determined whether it is the first jackpot in the MAX bonus mode (S3633G). In the processing of S3633G, when it is determined that the first jackpot in the MAX bonus mode (S3633G: Yes), 4 is set to the remaining winning number counter 223kb (S3634G), and this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3633G, if it is determined that it is not the first jackpot in the MAX bonus mode (S3633G: No), then this jackpot is a jackpot triggered by the small hit C49 (that is, up to the time saving limit number of times (The counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb) is reset) (S3635G), and if it is determined that this big hit is not a big hit triggered by the small hit C49 (S3635G : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the big hit this time is a big hit triggered by the small hit C49 (that is, the remaining number of times up to the time saving limit number (the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) is reset) (S3635G: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining hit number counter 223kb is greater than 0 (S3636G), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining hit number counter 223kb is greater than 0 (S3636G : Yes), the value obtained by subtracting the counter value of the remaining number of times counter 223 kb from 4 (that is, the remaining number of times up to the time saving limit number (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) was reset, so the basic of the MAX bonus mode The number of times the jackpot is won exceeding 4 times, which is the number of jackpot wins, is set in the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha (S3637G), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3636G, if it is determined that the value of the remaining hit number counter 223 kb is 0 (S3636G: No), in a situation where the MAX bonus mode has already exceeded 4 jackpots and continues, the time saving limit Since it means that the remaining number of times up to the number (counter value of the short time limit counter 203kb) has been reset (the MAX bonus mode continues until the jackpot game is executed 4 times), the counter value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is overwritten with 4 (S3638G), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1278, details of the ending command processing (S3602G) described above will be described. This ending command process (S3602G) is a process executed instead of the ending command process (see FIG. 1062) in the thirty-eighth control example described above, and sets the ending effect in the same manner as the ending command process (see FIG. 1062). It is a process for FIG. 1278 is a flow chart showing this ending command process (S3602G).
Of the ending command processing (see FIG. 1278) in the forty-sixth control example, the processing of S5901A to S5905A is the same as the processing of S5901A to S5905A of the ending command processing (see FIG. 1062) in the above-described thirty-eighth control example. process is executed. Also, in the ending command process (see FIG. 1278) in the forty-sixth control example, in the process of S5901A, when it is determined that the counter value of the remaining hit number counter 223 kb is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5901A: No), determine whether the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is greater than 0 (S5901G), and determine that the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0). If it is determined (S5901G: No), it means that the big win this time is not the big win in the MAX bonus mode, so the process proceeds to S5902A.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5901G, if it is determined that the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is greater than 0 (S5901G: Yes), the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is subtracted by 1 (S5902G), and after the subtraction is 0 (S5903G). In the processing of S5903G, if it is determined that the counter value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha after subtraction is not 0 (S5903G: No), the time-saving limit number of times has not been reached in this jackpot, and at least until the next jackpot Since it means that the MAX bonus mode will continue, an ending command for display indicating an ending effect (see FIG. 1264(b)) accompanied by a continuous judgment effect in which continuation is notified is set (S5904G), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S5903G, if it is determined that the counter value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha after subtraction is 0 (S5903G: Yes), MAX bonus mode by reaching the time-saving limit number of times in this jackpot Since it means that the end timing has come, MAX bonus end processing is executed (S5905G), and this processing ends. Details of the MAX bonus end processing (S5905G) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the ending command process (see FIG. 1278) in the forty-sixth control example, in the process of S5904A, when it is determined that the counter value of the remaining hit number counter 223 kb after subtraction is 0 (S5904A: Yes), the remaining If it is determined whether or not the counter value of the breakthrough number counter 223Ha is greater than 0 (S5906G), and if it is determined that the counter value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is not greater than 0 (that is, is 0) (S5906G: No), the above-described MAX bonus end processing is executed (S5905G), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5906G, if it is determined that the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is greater than 0 (S5906G: Yes), the value of the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha is subtracted by 1 (S5907G), and the MAX round A display ending command indicating an ending effect (see FIG. 1263(b)) accompanied by a breakthrough effect is set (S5908G), then the breakthrough effect flag 223Hb is set to ON (S5909G), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1279, details of the above-described MAX bonus end processing (S5905G) will be described. FIG. 1279 is a flow chart showing this MAX bonus end processing (S5905G). As shown in FIG. 1279, in the MAX bonus end processing (S5905G), first, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S5931G), and the attack icon corresponding to the oldest winning information is referred to the attack icon selection table 222ka. is determined (S5932G), and then the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S5933G). When the processing of S5933G is completed, then, an attack icon corresponding to winning information newer than the winning information determined last time is determined by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (S5934G), and icon information is displayed according to the determined attack icon. The data in the storage area 223ka is updated (S5935G).
When the processing of S5935G ends, it is determined whether or not attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S5936G), and if it is determined that attack icons corresponding to all winning information have not been determined ( S5936G: No), by returning the process to S5934G, each process of S5934G to S5936G is repeated until the types of attack icons corresponding to all winning information are determined and reflected in the data of the icon information storage area 223ka. Run. On the other hand, in the processing of S5936G, if it is determined that the attack icon corresponding to all the winning information has been determined (S5936G: Yes), it is determined whether the breakthrough effect flag 223Hb is on (S5937G), and the breakthrough effect flag is determined. 223Hb is not on (that is, off) (S5937G: No), an attack icon corresponding to the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is notified after the MAX bonus is notified. The mode ending effect is determined (S5938G), and the process proceeds to S5941G. On the other hand, in the processing of S5937G, if it is determined that the breakthrough effect flag 223Hb is ON (S5937G: Yes), the breakthrough effect flag 223Hb is set to OFF (S5939G), and after the end of the continuous judge effect is notified. (S5940G), and then set a display ending command indicating the ending effect of the determined effect mode (S5941G). End the process.
By executing this MAX bonus end processing (see FIG. 1279), the expectations of the four second special symbols held balls that are held during the MAX bonus mode and digested in the normal state B are reduced to the MAX bonus. It can be notified in advance by the ending effect of the mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth control example, after being set to the time saving state, all the second special symbol holding balls acquired during the time saving state are digested and transferred to the normal state. It is configured to provide a plurality of game states in which the number of lotteries of 2 special symbols is different. That is, the first game state with a relatively low degree of advantage (time saving state A), the second game state with a relatively high degree of advantage (time saving state C), and the third game state with a degree of advantage between them (time saving state and B), and once it shifts to a second game state (time saving state C) in which a time saving end condition that almost certainly continues until the next big win is set, the time saving continues until the time saving limit number of times is reached. It is configured to form an extremely advantageous state (MAX bonus mode) in which the state C and the big win are repeated (the winning of the big win corresponding to the time-saving limit is almost determined). In addition, in this 46th control example, a first control means capable of executing initial value setting control for setting a predetermined initial value (3) for the counter value of a specific counter (time saving limit counter 203kb), and a specific a second control means capable of executing update control for updating the counter value of the counter according to a predetermined update rule (an update rule of subtracting 1 each time a jackpot game is set to be executed during the time saving state); The execution condition of the specific privilege game (jackpot C49) that can be configured and the second game state (time saving state C) can be set in the first game state (time saving state A) has been established (either small win A49 or C49 In the case of), while the initial value setting control can be executed, when the execution condition of the specific privilege game is satisfied in the second game state (time saving state C), the first situation in which the initial value setting control is executed (When the trigger for the execution of the big win C49 is the small win C49) or the second situation in which the update control is executed (when the trigger for the execution of the big win C49 is the small win A49) is established. and As a result, when a predetermined specific condition is established in the time saving state C, the repetition of the time saving state C and the big win can be repeated over the number of times exceeding the number of times corresponding to the time saving limit number of times. can. More specifically, in the time saving state C, basically after the timing of setting the execution of the jackpot (after setting the jackpot in the lottery of special symbols and setting the execution of the jackpot game, or becoming a small hit The game state at the time of setting the execution of the big winning game is set to the time reducing state by ending the time saving state after detecting the V prize during the small winning game and setting the execution of the big winning game, and the time saving state is set at the end of the big winning game. Timing for setting the execution of a big win only when a specific type of small win (small win C49) is won while the remaining number of times (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb) is subtracted by 1. It is configured to end the time saving state before (at the start of the small winning game). That is, when a specific type of small win (small win C49) is won, the time saving state is ended before the V winning occurs, so the game state at the timing of setting the execution of the big win game It is set to a normal state, and when the jackpot ends, the remaining number of times up to the time saving limit number (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) is reset to 3 which is the initial value. As a result, when a specific type of small win (small win C49) is won during the repetition of the time saving state C and the second special symbol big win, the jackpot winning for the number of times of the time saving limit is further guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to substantially realize a novel behavior as if a big win corresponding to the number of time-saving limit times is added on the occasion of winning a specific type of small win (small win C49). Therefore, even while the time-saving state C and the big win are being repeated, a game can be played in anticipation of winning a specific type of small win (small win C49), so the time-saving state C and the big win can be played. It is possible to make the player feel the excitement of not knowing how long it will last. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the time saving state C and the big win are repeated.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition (the first winning of the type of jackpot that shifts to the time saving state C after the jackpot ends), a specific period (jackpot game It has a specific state setting means for setting a specific state (MAX bonus mode) in which specific control advantageous to the player (control in which the jackpot game and the time saving state C are repeated) is set until the game ends four times. , The game from the transition to the specific state (MAX bonus mode) to the end of the specific period (the jackpot of the number of times of the time reduction limit ends) (4 rounds of 4 jackpots, and 3 times between each jackpot) As an effect in the MAX bonus mode, which is the duration of the time-saving state C), an effect (pseudo MAX jackpot effect) that makes the player think as if a 16-round jackpot is being executed is executed. . As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has won prize balls for 16 rounds by winning one jackpot even though the player has actually won the jackpot four times in four rounds. It is possible to improve the interest of the person in the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example, it was determined that the specific control (the control in which the jackpot game and the time saving state C are repeated) continues beyond the specific period (4 jackpot games) (small hit C49 is elected and it is determined that the time saving limit counter 203kb is reset to the initial value), at least a predetermined timing different from the determined timing (end timing of the fourth jackpot game), specific control is performed and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (maximum round breakthrough effect) capable of suggesting to the player that it should be continued over a specific period. In other words, a specific type of small win (small win C49) was won and the time saving limit number of times (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb) was reset (including the jackpot based on the specific type of small win winning, 4 more times When the jackpot is added), the effect of notifying the reset of the number of times of shortening of working hours (counter value of a shortening of working hours counter 203 kb) (that the jackpot has been added) is executed at a predetermined opportunity. More specifically, at the end timing of the fourth jackpot (that is, the ending period after the end of the pseudo 16 round game in the pseudo MAX jackpot effect), the jackpot continues (16 rounds, which are pseudo MAX rounds) It is configured to execute a MAX breakthrough effect indicating that it will break through). Then, once the MAX breakthrough effect is executed, the time-saving limit number of times is determined by a continuous judge effect indicating whether or not the MAX bonus mode continues for each jackpot (that is, each pseudo 4-round game in the pseudo MAX jackpot effect). It is configured to notify whether or not it has reached In other words, at the timing when the time saving limit number (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) is reset, the reset is not notified, and the time saving limit number (time saving The counter value of the limit counter 203 kb) has been reset (the MAX bonus mode continues beyond the pseudo 16 rounds). In addition, instead of clearly notifying how long the MAX bonus mode will continue at one opportunity (the end timing of the pseudo 16-round game), the presence or absence of continuation is given in units of the pseudo-4-round game (that is, in units of one jackpot game). It is configured to be notified by By configuring in this way, for each pseudo 4 round game unit (that is, 1 jackpot game unit), pay attention to whether to continue to the next pseudo round (that is, whether the time reduction limit number of times remains) Since the game can be played, the game becomes monotonous during the period from the execution of the MAX round breakthrough performance to the notification of the end of the MAX bonus mode (reaching the time reduction limit number of times) by the continuous judge performance. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an extremely novel and highly interesting presentation mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Furthermore, in the 46th control example, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, although the number of time saving times is common, all the starting winnings detected during the time saving state after shifting to the time saving state It adopts a novel control that changes the number of times of substantial lottery of the second special symbol until the lottery of the second special symbol based on is completed. Specifically, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of lotteries of special symbols (the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is established based on the specified number of first end conditions And, a second end condition established based on the number of executions of the small winning game becoming a specified number of times, and a third end condition established based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbols becoming a specified number of times. In addition to , a fourth end condition is provided when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a specified number during the execution of the time saving final variation. The time saving state A and the time saving state B share the first to third end conditions and differ only in the fourth end condition, thereby substantially enabling the second special symbol lottery to be executed twice. A state A and a time-saving state B in which the lottery for the second special symbol can be substantially executed four times are formed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 46th control example, by varying the timing of subtracting the number of times of working hours (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) in the time saving state according to the conditions, even in the same working hours state , The easiness of accumulating the balls of the second special pattern is varied according to the conditions, and even in the same time-saving state, the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols is changed according to the conditions. More specifically, in the time-saving state, a first timing between the execution of the special symbol lottery and the end of the variable display for showing the lottery result, and a second timing different from the first timing. 2 timing, the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at one of the timings, and the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at the first timing In this case, it is configured to make it more difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls during the execution of the special symbol variable display than when the second timing is subtracted. More specifically, in the 46th control example, as the type of complete loss when the lottery result of the special symbol is completely lost, two types of loss A and loss B are provided, and in the time saving state When it is completely lost in the lottery of the special symbols and the loss A is determined as the type of loss, in the same way as when it is completely lost in the 38th control example described above, time is reduced at the fluctuation stop timing (first timing). While the number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted, if the out B is determined as the out type, the time saving number of times (special The counter value of the counter 203t in FIG. 2) is decremented. Thereby, when the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 (that is, the time saving final fluctuation) and A is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted until the end of the fluctuation display Therefore, just by continuing to play the right-handed game during the execution of the time-saving final variation, the fourth end condition (end condition established based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becoming a specified number) It is possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol until is established. On the other hand, if the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 state (that is, time saving final fluctuation) and B is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted at the start of the fluctuation Since the time-saving state is ended by doing so, the state has already fallen to the normal state during execution of the variable display. In other words, since it becomes extremely difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls in the time saving final variation, it is also difficult to increase the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Therefore, in this 46th control example, the subtraction timing of the special figure 2 counter 203t in the time saving final fluctuation is set to the second timing (variation start timing) than the first timing (variation stop timing) In the case, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol tends to decrease even in the same time-saving state, so even in the same time-saving state It is possible to realize a novel game property by changing the number of executions).
In addition, in the 46th control example, as a type of deviation, the number of times of saving time is subtracted at the time of stopping the variation A, and the deviation B is subtracted at the time of starting the variation. Although it is configured to vary the easiness of accumulating retained balls, it is not limited to this. For example, as a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot, a jackpot type in which time-saving state A and time-saving state B are given, where the number of time-savings is subtracted when the fluctuation stops, and time-saving state A and time-saving state B that are subtracted when the fluctuation starts are given. It may be configured to provide a jackpot type. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to vary the easiness of accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol even in the same time-saving state according to the jackpot type.

In this 46th control example, as a type of loss, the number of times of time saving is subtracted at the time of stopping the variation A, and the loss B is subtracted at the time of starting the variation. Although it was configured to vary the ease of accumulation, instead of this, an extremely short variation time (eg, 0.1 seconds) is selected at a predetermined rate (eg, 10% rate) in the time-saving final variation. may be That is, in the final variation, a variation time is set in which it is practically impossible to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls, and a variation time is set in which the second special symbol reserved balls can be easily accumulated. It is good also as a structure which provides the case where it is carried out. When configured in this way, it is not necessary to perform control processing for selecting the outlier type, so the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the above-described 46th control example. Further, instead of determining the variation time of the final variation of the time saving state by lottery, it may be configured so that the variation time of the final variation of the time saving is determined in advance according to the jackpot type. In other words, as a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state A and time-saving state B, which are set to a relatively long variation time (for example, 20 seconds) for the final variation, are given. It is also possible to provide a jackpot type in which a time saving state A or a time saving state B set to an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is provided. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to vary the easiness of accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol even in the same time-saving state according to the jackpot type.
In this 46th control example, as a type of loss, the number of times of time saving is subtracted at the time of stopping the variation A, and the loss B is subtracted at the time of starting the variation. However, the timing of subtracting the number of time reductions is not limited to this. For example, after the start of fluctuation, the number of times of shortening time may be subtracted when a predetermined period (for example, a period of a length in which the winning game of normal symbols can be performed once or more and less than two times) has elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further subdivide and set the easiness of accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol, so that the degree of freedom in design can be enhanced.
In this 46th control example, in the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C), when the second special symbol lottery becomes a small hit (the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied), according to the small hit type, the small hit Control to reset the time saving limit counter 203kb to the initial value by ending the time saving state at the start (see S2408A in FIG. 1058), and after detecting V winning in the small hit and setting the execution of the big hit, end the time saving state By doing so, the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (see S2409A in FIG. 1058), and either of the above is executed. The target for which both the resetting control and the updating control can be performed is not limited to the time saving limit counter 203kb, and may be applied to other counters used for game control. For example, in the time saving state C, the number of times of saving time (the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is set to 15, and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is basically inherited when the jackpot is won (updated by taking over from the counter value of course) ), and the counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 100, which is the initial value for the time saving state C, only in a part of the jackpot winning (for example, when winning a specific type of small win) may be configured to be reset. When configured in this way, even if a jackpot is won in the time saving state C, the number of times of saving time (the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is basically not increased, and the number of times of lottery is small (within 5 times). It is possible to realize a game property in which the MAX bonus mode is terminated before reaching the time-saving limit number of times unless winning continues. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving state C, it is possible to make the player aim to win the lottery with a small number of lotteries, and to make the game tense, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .
In the forty-sixth control example, when it is determined that the MAX bonus mode continues beyond four jackpots, regardless of the timing at which the continuation is determined, during the ending period of the fourth jackpot, the MAX bonus Although it is configured to notify that the mode continues beyond the pseudo 16 rounds (4 jackpots), the timing of notifying the continuation of the MAX bonus mode is not limited to this. At some or all of the time when the MAX bonus mode continues for more than 4 jackpots, the determined timing (during the variable display effect corresponding to the small hit C49, during the small hit game of the small hit C49, or at the small hit C49 During a jackpot game executed when a V prize is generated, an effect may be executed to notify that the MAX bonus mode will continue beyond four times. By configuring in this way, the player can expect that the continuation is always suggested in the MAX bonus mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, for example, it is possible to pretend that the state has shifted to the normal state B once, and at a predetermined timing (for example, during a variable display effect based on one of the held balls after the end of the fourth jackpot, or when the jackpot is won within four times A performance (resurrection performance) that allows the player to recognize that the MAX bonus mode was actually continued during a fixed number of seconds (for example, 5 seconds) after shifting to the time-saving state C during the fluctuation of the jackpot. may be executed to resume the continuation of the pseudo-MAX jackpot effect. With this configuration, the player who thinks that the state has shifted to the normal state B can be given great joy and surprise, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Embodiments will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1282 to 1336. FIG. 1282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 1283 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.
In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1282, the front side of the paper surface is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (for example, see FIG. 1283) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 1282, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by combining wooden frames in a substantially rectangular shape, and a and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1282). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.
A game board A13 (see FIG. 1283) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (game balls) to flow down in front of the game board A13. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 1285) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board A13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board A13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1282). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.
The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board A13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加
The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1282), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 1285). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 1283) is changed, or the content of super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.
The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1282), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 1283) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.
A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board A13.
Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board A13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .
As shown in FIG. 1283, the game board A13 has a base plate A60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) and pinwheels (not shown) for guiding balls, as well as rails 61. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1282) is attached to the back side (or front side).
The base plate A60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board A13 by tapping screws. etc. is fixed. Note that the base plate A60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side.
The central front portion of the game board A13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1282). Mainly referring to FIG. 1283, the configuration of the game board A13 will be described below.

In front of the game board A13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board A13, and the front and back of the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1282) surround the front and back of the game board A13. A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board A13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).
The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 1285) to the upper part of the game board A13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part of FIG. 1283) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board A13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 1283) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 1283). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1285), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .
Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.
In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).
During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate that can be slid back and forth. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the opening/closing plate is retracted behind the front surface of the base plate A60, allowing the game ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state. is configured such that the opening/closing plate closes the space between the game area and the second prize winning port 640, thereby making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize winning port 640 (flowing to the left).
It should be noted that the state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a may be caused by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate which has a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area side. good. In this case, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning port 640 along the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate is used for the game. By closing the space between the area and the second winning hole 640 , it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 .
In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Also, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window of the base plate A60) that can be seen through the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame A86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches. Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1285). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.
The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.
In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variation and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.
The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board A13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board A13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.
The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first pattern display devices 37A and 37B and is displayed on the second pattern reservation lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .
The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .

Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.
Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, or the lower side. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol reservation lamp may not be lit up.
Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board A13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 1285), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.
On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 1285), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. It should be noted that the arrangement of the second winning openings 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first prize winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, or it may be on the left side of the left-right center of the game area.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.
An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加
As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.
Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a , so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many chances of winning a big lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.
On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640 while setting the state.
It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, aiming at the first winning hole 64 with "right-handed hitting" or "left-handed hitting" at the second It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 in a "right-handed" manner, and a ball shot in a "left-handed" manner does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding the playability of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 1283) is arranged on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).
The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.
Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.
An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board A13. 35 (see FIG. 1282).

An out port 71 is provided on the game board A13. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).
The game board A13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.
As shown in FIG. 1284, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.
The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.
In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.
The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 1285). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .
The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 1285). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1285, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 1285 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.
The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.
In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.
The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return destination addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205. .
The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .
The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .
The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .
The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors AMT1, AMT2, AMT3, AMT4, and the like.
Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .
Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

Various images are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in such a manner that the rear image and the image such as the third pattern arranged in front of the rear image and visually recognized are layered as described above. is visually recognized by the player. When the third pattern display device 81 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, each layer corresponds to a plurality of layers in which liquid crystals are arranged, and by switching the state of the liquid crystals in each layer, it is possible to determine which layer to display. is determined.
Another mode is also assumed for the mode of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, it is composed of a rotating drum, and may be notified to the player by a pattern that is visually recognized at the position where the rotating drum is stopped. It may be configured such that a situation in which it can be visually recognized inside the center frame 86 can be configured, and a plurality of members thereof can be configured to allow the player to visually recognize a specific symbol or the like.
The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 1284). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power failure, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to main controller 110 when RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 1284) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .
Next, the structure of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200 will be described. FIG. 1286 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13 and action unit A200, and FIG. 1287 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13 and action unit A200. 1286 and 1287, the illustration of the liquid crystal display (variable display unit 80) arranged in the opening A211a of the rear case A210 is omitted, and the rear side can be seen through the opening A211a. 1286 and 1287, reference will be made to FIG. 1283 as appropriate.
The operation unit A200 includes a box-shaped rear case A210 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall A211 and an outer wall A212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall A211. A rectangular opening A211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210, so that the rear case A210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening A211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided in a front view).
The rear case A210 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) to the front side end of the outer wall A212, and faces the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 1283). It has a support plate portion A213 supported by.

The game board A13 and the operation unit A200 are integrally fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the base plate A60 of the game board A13 while the supporting plate part A213 is supported by the game board A13. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200 as a whole.
A pair of displacement restricting devices A214 are arranged on the rear side of the rear case A210. The displacement regulating device A214 is configured to be able to change its state between a protruded state and a retracted state by manual operation from the back side of the rear case A210. 2 operation unit A500) is restricted from starting to move from the effect waiting state.
By adopting the displacement regulating device A214, even if the center opening of the base plate A60 is blocked by the light guide plate unit A700 as in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped and transported. be able to.
In detail, conventionally, a means of suppressing the displacement of the movable role by stuffing a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) in the range where the movable role is displaced, and removing the cushioning material after arriving at the game hall. This sometimes prevents displacement of the movable accessories during shipment or transportation. However, if the opening in the center of the base plate A60 is closed as in this embodiment, there is no through-hole for removing the cushioning material, so the cushioning material must be removed without disassembling the game board A13 and the rear case A210. There is a possibility that the burden on the game hall will be heavy.

As a countermeasure against this, the present embodiment employs the displacement restricting device A214. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device A214 can be switched between the projecting state in which the movement of the movable accessory is regulated and the recessed state in which the regulation is released without releasing the fixation of the game board A13 and the back case A210. can.
The pair of displacement restricting devices A214 are arranged as members for restricting the movement of different movable accessories. That is, if the number of movable accessories increases or decreases, it can be dealt with by increasing or decreasing the number of displacement control devices A214.
The base plate A60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 can be easily viewed by the player from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate A60, the structure arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects. If there is a part that the player does not want to see, it may be dealt with by attaching a seal member with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance).
The operation unit A200 is arranged on the back side of the game board A13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the action unit A200 includes a rear case A210, and a first action unit A400 that is arranged on the inner right side and the upper inner side of the rear case A210 when viewed from the front, and is arranged closer to the front side of the rear case A210. and a second operation unit A500 arranged at the inner left part of the back case A210 in the front view and the upper part inside the front view and between the first operation unit A400 and the bottom wall part A211 of the back case A210. , a third operation unit A600 disposed at the inner lower part of the back case A210 in front view, a light guide plate unit A700 fastened and fixed to the front end surface of the outer wall A212 of the back case A210 on the front side of the first operation unit A400, Prepare.

Specifically, the third operation unit A600 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall A211 of the rear case A210 at a position below the opening A211a, and the second operation unit A500 is fastened and fixed at a position to the left and above the opening A211a. be. The first operation unit A400 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall A211 of the rear case A210 at the right side of the opening A211a, and fastened and fixed to the front side surface of the second operation unit A500 at the upper position of the opening A211a. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit A200 will be described.
1288 to 1293 are front views of the operation unit A200 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit A200. In FIG. 1288, the first operation unit A400, the second operation unit A500, and the third operation unit A600 in the effect standby state are illustrated, and in FIG. An operational unit A500 and a third operational unit A600 are shown.
In addition, FIG. 1290 shows the second operation unit A500 in the extended state, the first operation unit A400 and the third operation unit A600 in the waiting state for rendering, and FIG. 1291 shows the first operation unit A400 in the extended state. and a second action unit A500, and a third action unit A600 in an effect standby state. Unit A500 is shown.
In addition, in FIG. 1293, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 after rotating without causing a change in the outer shape from the effect standby state, and the third operation unit A500 after rising while maintaining the outer shape in the effect standby state An operational unit A600 is shown.

1288 to 1293, the shape surrounded by the edge of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b of the light guide plate unit A700, the edge of the decorative member A808, and the edge of the center frame A86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The shape surrounded by the imaginary lines is the actual size of the third pattern display device 81 that can be visually recognized when viewed from the front. Since they are blinded by the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b and the decorative member A808 of the light plate unit A700, the visibility of the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 in the retracted state can be reduced.
As shown in FIGS. 1289 to 1291, the displacement trajectory of the first action unit A400 and the displacement trajectory of the second action unit A500 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Since the displacement trajectories of the second motion unit A500 are out of alignment (do not overlap when viewed from above), the first motion unit A400 and the second motion unit A500 do not collide with each other during motion. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 1291, both the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 can be in the extended state.
As illustrated in FIGS. 1289 to 1292, the displacement trajectory of the first motion unit A400 or the second motion unit A500 and the displacement trajectory of the third motion unit A600 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A500 is in the overhanging state, if the state of the third operation unit A600 changes from the presentation standby state, there is a possibility of collision.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change from the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A500 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit A600 is in the effect standby state. Also, the state change from the effect standby state of the third operation unit A600 is controlled to be executable under the condition that the first operation unit A400 is in the effect standby state and the second operation unit A500 is in the effect standby state. By doing so, it is possible to avoid collision between the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A500 and the third operation unit A600. As a result, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the first motion unit A400, the second motion unit A500, and the third motion unit A600 can be improved (overlapping displacement trajectories in a front view can be allowed).

The motion modes of the first motion unit A400 and the second motion unit A500 are configured to be executed in a mode in which the vertical and horizontal lengths of the rotated rotary motion units A400b and A500b change during the rotating motion. will be described later.
The operation mode of the third operation unit A600 is configured such that the lifting operation of the opening/closing operation unit A600b and the opening/closing operation of the moving member A650 can be executed at different timings. That is, the opening/closing operation unit A600b is arranged at the upper end position, and the opening/closing operation of the moving member A650 is performed.
As described above, in this embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of collision, the operation timings of the operation units A400, A500, and A600 may be controlled to be shifted, but the possibility of collision is eliminated from the outset. If possible, it is naturally possible to drive them at the same time, and FIG. 1293 corresponds to the case where each of the action units A400, A500, and A600 are driven simultaneously from the effect standby state and moved to positions where they do not collide with each other.
That is, each operation unit A400, A500, A600 moves from the effect waiting state to the state shown in FIG. Since it is configured to be realized by driving the driving devices for driving A400, A500, and A600 respectively, it is possible to realize motion presentation with a sense of unity by the plurality of motion units A400, A500, and A600.

In the state shown in FIG. 1293, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 are in a posture just before the horizontal and vertical lengths of the rotary operation units A400b and A500b start to change during the rotary operation. That is, if the tilting motion occurs further than this, the driving force is consumed by changing the vertical and horizontal lengths of the rotary motion units A400b and A500b. going to rise. Therefore, it is possible to easily stop the motion units A400 and A500 in the posture shown in FIG. 1293, which is the posture in which the motion resistance starts to change.
As the tilting motion progresses further, the amount of change in the vertical and horizontal lengths of the rotary motion units A400b and A500b increases more and more, and thus the motion resistance increases more and more. This resistance can cause a change in motion resistance similar to elastic force due to spring elasticity. can be made easier.
As for the third operation unit A600, as will be described later, the driving device used for the lifting operation and the driving device for opening and closing the moving member A650 are separate, so only the driving device used for the lifting operation is driven. However, by not driving the moving member A650, it is possible to easily perform control to stop the third operation unit A600 in the state shown in FIG.
In this way, it is possible to execute control for simultaneously driving the first operation unit A400, the second operation unit A500, and the third operation unit A600, and realize the operation with a sense of unity while the operation units A400, A500, A600 can be avoided from colliding.

The range in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 arranged behind it can be seen changes corresponding to the arrangement of each operation unit A400, A500, A600. That is, when all of the operation units A400, A500, A600 are in the effect standby state, the range (area) where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be seen is the maximum state (see FIG. 1288), and the extended state and the The hidden range (area or position) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be different corresponding to the different operation units A400, A500, A600.
The hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 also varies depending on the degree of extension of each of the operation units A400, A500, A600 from the effect standby state. Further, for example, even when the same motion unit (for example, the first motion unit A400) operates, the amount of motion between the state shown in FIG. 1289 and the state shown in FIG. are different (larger on the protruding position side), the hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is different.
Further, for example, even when the same operation unit (for example, the third operation unit A600) operates, the state shown in FIG. 1292 and the state shown in FIG. The hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is different because the left and right arrangement of A650 is different.
Further, for example, even when a plurality of the same operation units (for example, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500) operate, the state shown in FIG. 1291 and the state shown in FIG. Depending on whether or not the action units A400 and A500 intersect, the number of areas ( In FIG. 1291, four (upper, lower, left, and right) are different, and in FIG. 1293, one) is different.

In this way, by providing a plurality of ranges for hiding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the respective operation units A400, A500, A600, the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the respective operation units A400, A500, A600 It is possible to increase the variation of the production to be visually recognized by combining
That is, the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to develop the display effect in the range not hidden by each of the operation units A400, A500 and A600, but the range hidden by each of the operation units A400, A500 and A600 is controlled. changes in a plurality of types, it is possible to increase the variation of the display presentation in the range not hidden by each of the operation units A400, A500, A600, and improve the presentation effect of the display presentation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1293, when a continuously visible display area that spreads over a large range is held, the player can relax by playing an animation on the full screen and making the player visually recognize it. 1289, 1290, or 1291, etc., the display in each divided range is differentiated (for example, advantageous deployment and unfavorable deployment). ), if one of these displays is selected and the subsequent development of the performance is determined, attention to the display in each divided range can be improved.
Next, the first operation unit A400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1294 to 1307. FIG. FIG. 1294 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 1295 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400.

The first operation unit A400 is supported by a support unit A400a held by a rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286), and supported by the support unit A400a so as to be rotatable around a rotating shaft AJ1 arranged on the lower right side in front view. and a rotary motion unit A400b.
In the first operation unit A400, the drive motor AMT1 is arranged on the upper left side, and the rotating shaft AJ1 is arranged on the lower right side. As a result, the structure around the rotary shaft AJ1 can be simplified, and the rotary shaft AJ1 can be placed closer to the right corner than when the drive motor AMT1 is arranged near the rotary shaft AJ1.
Furthermore, compared to the case of arranging the drive motor AMT1 on the front side or the rear side of the rotary operation unit A400b, as in the case of arranging the drive motor AMT1 near the rotary shaft AJ1, the first operation unit The front-to-rear width of the A400 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for stacking a plurality of movable accessories in the front-rear direction of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286).
FIG. 1296 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 1297 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. In Figures 1296 and 1297, the support unit A400a is disassembled and the rotary motion unit A400b is shown in a non-disassembled state.

The support unit A400a has a fixed support unit A410 fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286), and a drive motor AMT1 whose arrangement is fixed to the fixed support unit A410. and a drive transmission unit A420 configured to be capable of transmitting to the rotation operation unit A400b.
The fixed support unit A410 is arranged to face the vertically elongated member A411 fastened and fixed to the right portion of the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286) in the front view, and the upper end side portion of the vertically elongated member A411 in the front-rear direction. A horizontally elongated member A413, a reinforcing member A415 formed by bending a sheet metal member disposed between the horizontally elongated member A413 and the vertically elongated member A411 forward, and the bent portion of the reinforcing member A415 is formed by the horizontally elongated member A413. and an upper cover member A417 fastened and fixed to the horizontally elongated member A413 in a sandwiched arrangement.
The vertically elongated member A411 includes a cylindrical support portion A411a through which the rotating shaft AJ1 of the rotary operation unit A400b is inserted, and a non-supporting portion into which the projecting end of the displacement restricting device A214 (see FIG. 1287) disposed on the lower right side is inserted. By detecting the arrangement of the performance hole A411b, the repair hole A411c formed through the hole A411c through which a fastening screw can be attached and detached for maintenance, and the rotation operation unit A400b, the first operation unit A400 is in the presentation standby state or tension. and a detection sensor A411d for detecting the output state.
The non-rendering hole A411b is formed in a portion hidden by the right decorative member A808 in front view (see FIG. 1289). Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the rotary motion unit A400b, it is possible to easily avoid the displacement restricting device A214 (see FIG. 1287) being visually recognized by the player through the non-effect hole A411b.

Note that such a blinding effect is similarly produced for the upper displacement restricting device A214. That is, the upper displacement regulating device A214 is for regulating the displacement of the second motion unit A500, but this is also hidden by the upper decorative member A808, so that the displacement regulating device A214 is visible to the player. can be made easier to avoid.
A photocoupler type sensor is normally used as the detection sensor A411d, but it is not limited to this. For example, a magnetic sensor or a contact sensor may be used.
The horizontally elongated member A413 includes a plate-like main body A413a formed of a resin material in a horizontally long plate shape, a guide elongated hole A414 formed through the plate-like main body A413a, and a left end side of the plate-like main body A413a bulging forward. A motor support hole A413b is formed through the bulging portion so as to be able to support the drive motor MT1. and a plate-shaped extension portion A413d in which a plurality of projecting portions A413c are formed.
The reinforcing member A415 is a member formed by bending a metal plate, and is arranged so as to be adhered to the rear side of the plate-like main body A413a, and is positioned between the vertically long member A411 and the horizontally long member A413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 1294). a plate-like main body A415a sandwiched between the plate-like main body A415a, a folded plate A415c formed by bending the upper end of the plate-like main body A415a toward the front side and having a plurality of through holes A415b through which a plurality of projecting portions A413c can be inserted; A pair of holding bent portions A415d formed by bending from the bent plate A415c to form a through hole through which the metal rod AMB1 is inserted, and an elongated hole A415e formed in a shape surrounding the guide elongated hole A414 from the outside. And prepare.

The upper cover member A417 is a member made of a resin material, and is screwed into the female screw of the projecting portion A413c that is inserted into the through hole A415b in a positional relationship that sandwiches the reinforcing member A415 between the upper cover member A413 and the laterally elongated member A413. A plate-like main body A417a is fastened and fixed to a horizontal member A413 by a fastening screw, a biasing spring A417b whose one end is supported by the plate-like main body A417a, and a biasing spring A417b whose other end is supported. and a damper member A417c that is biased to the right end of the movable range extending in the left-right direction by the biasing force of A417b.
The drive transmission unit A420 is a sheet metal member that supports the drive motor AMT1 on the left end side. a transmission mechanism A423 composed of a plurality of rotating members, a covering cover A425 fastened and fixed to a support member A421 so as to cover the rotating members of the transmission mechanism A423 from the front side, the transmission mechanism A423 and a rotary operation unit A400b and a connection mechanism A427 that connects the
The transmission mechanism A423 includes an annular belt A423a having teeth formed on the inner peripheral side, and teeth formed on the outer peripheral side in a shape that meshes with the teeth of the belt A423a. A pair of left and right pulleys A423b and A423c rotatably supported by the columnar portion A421a of A421, a drive gear A423d fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT1 so as not to move relative to each other, and a left pulley A423c are formed on the rear side of the left pulley A423c. and a transmission gear A423f rotatably supported by the columnar portion A421a of the support member A421 so as to mesh with the gear portion A423e and the drive gear A423d.
The covering cover A425 is not only fastened and fixed to the female screw formed on the body plate portion of the support member A421, but also to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar portion A421a that supports the pulleys A423b and A423c and the transmission gear A423f. are also fastened. Thereby, the rigidity of the columnar portion A421a can be improved, and the rotation of the pulleys A423b and A423c and the transmission gear A423f can be stabilized.

The connection mechanism A427 includes a connection member A427a to which the upper end side portion of the rotary operation unit A400b is connected and whose operation direction is the horizontal direction by receiving the metal rod AMB1 in the recess A427b on the front side, and the recess of the connection member A427a. A belt A423a is provided between a prevention member A427c that prevents the metal rod AMB1 from falling out from between the connection member A427a by being fastened and fixed to the connection member A427a so as to block the A427b from the front side, and the prevention member A427c. and a belt fixing member A427d fastened and fixed to the prevention member A427c in a sandwiching arrangement.
A pair of recesses A427b are provided with cylindrical collars A427f through which the metal rod AMB1 is inserted. It is supported by the A427a. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the coupling member A427a from deviating from the metal rod AMB1, and to reduce the movement resistance.
An engaging protrusion A427h corresponding to the tooth shape formed on the inner peripheral side of the belt A23a is formed on the upper surface portion of the belt fixing member A427d facing the belt A423a. The belt A423a is arranged so that the engaging protrusion A427h and the teeth of the belt A423a are engaged with each other, and the belt fixing member A427d is arranged so as to face the prevention member A427c on the outer peripheral side of the belt A423a (upper side of the upper belt A423a). and the prevention member A427c are fastened and fixed.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the belt A423a from coming off the engagement protrusion A427h. Moreover, unlike the case where the belt A423a is fixed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the belt A423a from slipping on the connecting mechanism A427 while improving the durability of the belt A423a.

With such a structure, in the coupling mechanism A427, when the drive motor AMT1 is driven to rotate and the left pulley A423c is rotated by engagement transmission, the portion of the belt A423a extending in the left and right direction is moved in the left and right direction. Along with this, it is guided by the metal rod AMB1 and moved in the horizontal direction.
The connecting member A427a includes a vertically extending guide hole A427e through which the columnar projecting portion A448 of the rotary operation unit A400b is inserted. The columnar projecting portion A448 of the rotary motion unit A400b is inserted into the long guide hole A427e and the long guide hole A414 of the fixed support unit A410, and rotates as the coupling mechanism A427 is moved in the left-right direction. The columnar protrusion A448 of the unit A400b is moved vertically and horizontally.
A driving force is transmitted to the rotary motion unit A400b via the coupling mechanism A427 that moves in the left-right direction in this way, and the rotary motion unit A400b is displaced. Details of the rotary operation unit A400b will be described below.
FIG. 1298 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit A400b, and FIG. 1299 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary motion unit A400b. As illustrated in FIGS. 1298 and 1299, the rotary operation unit A400b includes a base plate member A430 to which the rotating shaft AJ1 is fitted on the lower end side, and a rotating shaft AJ1 on a plane perpendicular to the rotating shaft AJ1. a moving member A440 connected to the base plate member A430 so as to be slidable in a linear direction passing through the base plate member A430 and a moving member A440 inserted through the base plate member A430 and the moving member A440 and perpendicular to the sliding movement of the moving member A440 A direction switching member A450 that can move in any direction, and the movement of the direction switching member A450 changes the arrangement or posture, thereby making it appear to the player that the length of the rotation unit 400b in the short direction changes. The direction switching member A450 is fitted or fastened to the base plate member A430 so as to be arranged in the space formed between the decorative member A460 and the base plate member A430, and the direction switching member A450 is covered from the front side. and a covering member A470 formed in a shape.

The base plate member A430 includes a long plate-like plate-like main body A431 into which the rotating shaft AJ1 is fitted, and a pair of upper and lower guides drilled in the plate-like main body A431 on the same straight line passing through the rotating shaft AJ1. A long hole A432, a plurality of auxiliary long holes A433 drilled at positions between the pair of long guide holes A432 so as to extend in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the long guide holes A432 extend, and an upper long guide hole A432. A pair of support long holes A434 formed as long holes parallel to the guide long holes A432 at the lateral end of the plate-like main body A431 near the lower end of the plate-like main body A431 a pair of guide extensions A436 projecting from the front of the lower end of the plate-like main body A431 in a shape extending parallel to the straight line in which the guide long hole A432 is arranged; and the plate-like main body A431. A plate-shaped detection piece A437 projecting downward from the lower end in a plate-like shape.
The malfunction prevention cylindrical portion A435 is a through hole formed with a size that allows the protruding tip of the right displacement regulating device A214 (see FIG. 1287) to be inserted thereinto. This malfunction prevention cylinder part A435 is arranged in front of the non-effect hole A411b (see FIG. 1289) in the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400.
When the protruding tip of the displacement restricting device A214 is projected forward, the protruding tip passes through the non-rendering hole A411b and is inserted into the malfunction prevention cylindrical portion A435, thereby preventing the rotational motion of the rotary motion unit A400b. Regulated.
The plate-shaped detection pieces A437 are formed at front and rear positions that can be arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensor A411d (see FIG. 1296). The plate-shaped detection piece A437 is formed on the side (rear side) where the rotary shaft AJ1 is supported. As a result, even if the rotary shaft AJ1 is bent (tilted) due to deformation of the rotary shaft AJ1, the displacement of the plate-shaped detection piece A437 can be minimized. It is possible to easily avoid that the shaped detection piece A437 is arranged at a position out of the front-rear position where the detection piece A437 is accommodated in the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d.

Since the position of the plate-shaped detection piece A437 is detected by the detection sensor A411d (see FIG. 1296), the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b can be grasped, so that the plurality of operation units A400 to A600 can be driven by individual drive sources. Even if they are driven, it is possible to avoid a situation where they collide with each other.
The moving member A440 is configured to be able to perform an effect of brightly illuminating the decorative plate A441 on the front side with the light emitted from the light emitting means of the light emitting substrate disposed inside, and the light emitting substrate is moved between the decorative plate A441 and the moving member A440. A plate-like main body A442 arranged to sandwich, a pair of insertion protrusions A443 protruding from the rear surface of the plate-like main body A442, and a vertical direction at a position corresponding to the auxiliary elongated hole A433 of the base plate member A430. A plurality of function long holes A444 drilled in a shape that combines left and right inclined directions, an extension portion A445 extending parallel to a straight line on which a pair of insertion protrusions A443 are arranged, and a plate-like main body A422 and a columnar protrusion A448 that protrudes rearward from the upper right corner of the drive transmission unit A420 and is inserted into the guide elongated hole A427e (see FIG. 1296) of the drive transmission unit A420.
The decorative plate A441 includes a translucent area A441a extending in the longitudinal direction at the central portion in the lateral direction, and plated areas A441b on both lateral sides of the translucent area A441a.
As a result, even if the placement of the substrate is restricted to the central portion in the transverse direction due to the formation of the functional elongated hole A444, the light-emitting effect is achieved in the translucent region A441a near the central portion in the transverse direction. In the other plating area A441b, the reflection from the plating is used to produce an effect, thereby avoiding a decrease in the effect of the effect.

The insertion protrusion A443 is inserted through the long guide hole A432 of the base plate member A430 and is configured to be prevented from coming off from the long guide hole A432 by a screw and a collar member AC1 that are screwed into the tip.
The functional long hole A444 is composed of four long holes, namely, a pair of upper and lower long holes and another pair of upper and lower long holes whose shape is reversed by a straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443, The shape of each elongated hole is common except for the relationship of reversal.
Of the plurality of functional long holes A444, a pair of upper and lower long holes are formed at positions where one of the long holes is translated along a straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443. That is, the corresponding portions of the pair of upper and lower elongated holes maintain the relationship of extending on the same straight line or being arranged in parallel.
The extension portion A445 is formed with a width slightly shorter than the interval between the pair of guide extension portions A436 of the base plate member A430, and functions as a guide during movement of the moving member A440. In addition, the extending portion A445 is formed in a U-shaped cross-section in the extending direction with the front side open. also works. That is, by holding the wiring A449 on the extended portion A445 from the open side of the U-shape, contact between the wiring A449 and other operating members can be avoided.

The wiring A449 is composed of a flat cable, and is composed of a wiring that is flexible in the direction corresponding to the rotation around the rotary shaft AJ1 and a wiring that is flexible in the extending direction of the extending portion A445.
In this embodiment, since the drive motor AMT1 is arranged at a position away from the rotary shaft AJ1 (see FIG. 1295), it is easy to secure a space around the rotary shaft AJ1, and the wiring A449 can be used for this space. It can be used as a space for bending. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the wiring A449, and it is possible to improve the durability of the wiring A449.
The direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 will be collectively described. The direction switching member A450 is composed of a pair of left and right members. and a pair of upper and lower through holes A453 drilled in the left and right outer portions of the.
The columnar portion A452 is sequentially inserted through the functional long hole A444 of the moving member A440 and the auxiliary long hole A433 of the base plate member A430. can be displaced in a direction orthogonal to That is, depending on the arrangement of the moving member A440, the direction switching member A450 can be displaced in a direction orthogonal to the straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443 (displaced in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving member A440). obtain).

The decorative member A460 includes a pair of left and right parallel movement members A461 and a pair of left and right rotational movement members A465. The parallel movement member A461 includes a plate-like main body A462, columnar portions A463 protruding from the lower corners on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like main body A462 toward the back side, and the central side portions on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like main body A462 to the back side. and a long columnar portion A464 protruding to the side.
The rotational movement member A465 includes a plate-like main body A466, a columnar portion A467 protruding from the back surface of the upper end portion of the plate-like main body A466, a through hole A468 drilled below the columnar portion A467, Prepare.
A female screw is formed at the tip of the columnar portion A463. The decorative member A460 and the direction switching member A450 are fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw that is inserted into the through hole A453 on the lower side of the direction switching member A450 into the female screw.
The long columnar portion A464 has a female screw formed at its tip, but is not used for fastening and fixing, but is used for the purpose of preventing the member from falling off. That is, the rotary movement member A465 through which the long columnar portion A464 is inserted is configured to be rotatable with respect to the parallel movement member A461.

The long columnar portion A464 is first inserted through the through hole A453 on the upper side of the direction switching member A450, and then inserted through the through hole A468 of the rotational movement member A465. By fixing a screw with a large screw head to the tip of the long columnar portion A464, it is possible to prevent the rotationally moving member A465 from falling off from the long columnar portion A464.
The displacement of the columnar portion A467 of the rotationally moving member A465 is reduced by being supported by the long support hole A434 of the base plate member A430. With this configuration, the displacement of the opposite end (lower end) of the columnar portion A467 of the rotational movement member A465 can be made larger than the displacement of the direction switching member A450 that displaces the through hole A468.
The covering member A470 includes a translucent area A471 extending in the longitudinal direction at the central portion in the lateral direction, and plated areas A472 on both lateral sides of the translucent area A471.
As a result, the direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 are arranged, so that a high performance effect can be maintained even at both sides in the short direction where the light emitted from the moving member A440 side is likely to be blocked. That is, the light emission effect is performed in the translucent area A471 near the center in the short direction, and the effect is performed by reflection from the plating in the other plating area A472, thereby avoiding deterioration of the effect.

The covering member A470 has a pair of protrusions A473 protruding toward the back side at the lower end. The projecting portion A473 is arranged at a position corresponding to the front side end portion of the guide extending portion A436 of the base plate member A430.
By arranging them in this way, in the assembled state, the covering member A470 and the base plate member A430 can form an opening through which the extending portion A445 of the moving member A440 is inserted. Thereby, the moving direction of the moving member A440 can be stabilized in the extending direction of the extending portion A445.
Figures 1300(a), 1300(b), 1301(a) and 1301(b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit A400b. FIGS. 1300(a), 1300(b), 1301(a), and 1301(b) show how the moving member A440 of the rotary operation unit A400b moves relative to the base plate member A430 in time series. be done.
That is, from the rotation operation unit A400b (see FIG. 1300(a)) in the effect waiting state (see FIG. 1288) of the first operation unit A400, to the rotation operation unit A400b (see FIG. 1301(b) in the extended state (see FIG. 1289) (see reference). 1300 and 1300 are different from the actual vertical direction, and are shown in a posture in which the direction of sliding movement of the moving member A440 matches the vertical direction of the paper surface.

The functional long hole A444 has a first parallel portion A444a extending parallel to a straight line passing through the pair of insertion projections A443, and a first parallel portion A444a formed so that one end thereof is connected to the first parallel portion A444a. It has an inclined portion A444b linearly extending in an inclined direction, and a second parallel portion A444c formed so as to connect to the other end of the inclined portion A444b and extending parallel to the extending direction of the first parallel portion A444a.
Here, FIG. 1300(a) illustrates a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is arranged on the end portion side of the first parallel portion A444a, and FIG. A state in which the portion A452 is disposed at the intersection of the first parallel portion A444a and the inclined portion A444b is illustrated, and in FIG. 1301(a), the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 FIG. 1301(b) shows a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is arranged on the end portion side of the second parallel portion A444c.
The length of the first parallel portion A444a is formed sufficiently long. As a result, even if the moving member A440 starts to move relative to the base plate member A430 from the state shown in FIG. 1300(a), for a while (until the state shown in FIG. The member A450 is not moved in the lateral direction of the moving member A440, and the rotational motion unit A400b can be rotated while maintaining the appearance of the short width in the lateral direction.
The inclined portion A444b extends outward in the lateral direction of the moving member A440 from the position where the first parallel portion A444a is formed. Therefore, when the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430 from the state where the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is arranged in the first parallel portion A444a, and the columnar portion A452 enters the inclined portion A444b, the direction The switching member A450 moves outward in the lateral direction of the moving member A440.

A pair of columnar portions A452 of the direction switching member A450 are inserted into a pair of auxiliary elongated holes A433, and the pair are guided in parallel. Therefore, the relative movement of the direction switching member A450 with respect to the base plate member A430 is parallel movement in the lateral direction of the base plate member A430.
The speed of the movement is proportional to the speed of relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 because the inclined portion A444b is formed in a straight line. Therefore, the moving member A440, the direction switching member A450, and the decorative member A460 can be made to facilitate execution of an interlocking action effect.
The second parallel portion A444c is not as long as the first parallel portion A444a and is formed with the minimum necessary length. The purpose of forming the second parallel portion A444c is to improve the rendering effect of the rotary motion unit A400b.
That is, when the first operation unit A400 is driven to the extended state and the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 1296) is stopped, the coupling mechanism A427 is slightly pushed back by the biasing force applied from the biasing spring A417b to the damper member A417c. , even when the moving member A440 moves in the opposite direction (return direction) relative to the base plate member A430, the direction switching member A450 in the lateral direction of the moving member A440 can be kept unchanged.

As a result, even if a pushback operation occurs due to the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b, which can occur when the control of stopping the driving of the drive motor AMT1 is employed in the extended state of the first operation unit A400, It is possible to easily maintain the appearance of the first operation unit A400 in the overhanging state (the length of the rotation operation unit A400b in the lateral direction).
In the state shown in FIG. 1300(a), the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is the first length AD1, and the straight line passing through the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and a straight line passing through the insertion projection A443 is defined as a first angle Aθ1.
In the state shown in FIG. 1300(b), the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is the second length AD2, and the straight line passing through the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and a straight line passing through the insertion projection A443 is a second angle Aθ2.
The second length AD2 is configured to be longer than the first length AD1 (first length AD1<second length AD2). The second angle Aθ2 is configured to be smaller than the first angle Aθ1 (first angle Aθ1>second angle Aθ2).

In the state shown in FIG. 1301(a), the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is set to the third length AD3, and the straight line passing through the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and a straight line passing through the insertion projection A443 is a third angle Aθ3.
The third length AD3 is configured to be longer than the second length AD2 (first length AD1<second length AD2<third length AD3). The third angle A.theta.3 is configured to be smaller than the second angle A.theta.2 (first angle A.theta.1>second angle A.theta.2>third angle A.theta.3).
In the state shown in FIG. 1301(b), the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 is the fourth length AD4, and the straight line passing through the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 and a straight line passing through the insertion projection A443 is a fourth angle Aθ4.
The fourth length AD4 is configured to be longer than the third length AD3 (first length AD1<second length AD2<third length AD3<fourth length AD4). The fourth angle A.theta.4 is configured to be smaller than the third angle A.theta.3 (first angle A.theta.1>second angle A.theta.2>third angle A.theta.3>fourth angle A.theta.4).

Therefore, until the first action unit A400 changes from the presentation standby state to the extended state, the rotary action unit A400b changes so that the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projection A448 gradually increases. Accordingly, the angle between the straight line passing through the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 and the straight line passing through the pair of insertion protrusions A443 gradually decreases.
Figures 1302, 1303 and 1304 are front views of the first operation unit A400. Figures 1302, 1303, and 1304 show in chronological order how the first operation unit A400 is driven from the presentation standby state to the extended state.
FIG. 1302 shows the presentation standby state of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. A state that is the same as the effect standby state except for the attitude change is illustrated, and in FIG. 1304, the extended state of the first operation unit A400 is illustrated.
In the state shown in FIG. 1302, the plate-shaped detection piece A437 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d. Thereby, it is possible to make the corresponding control device grasp that the first operation unit A400 is in the effect standby state.

The guide long hole A414 has an arc portion A414a along an arc centered on the rotary shaft AJ1 formed on the right side of the columnar projecting portion A448 shown in FIG. A linear portion A414b formed linearly on the left side and smoothly connected to the arc portion A414a (extending in the tangential direction of the arc portion A414a in the connecting portion) is provided.
That is, in a state in which the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged in the arc portion A414a (see FIGS. 1302 and 1303), even if the rotary motion unit A400b rotates, the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 The distance between them is maintained at the first length AD1 (see FIG. 1300(a)), and no relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs, so the appearance of the rotary motion unit A400b is maintained.
In the process of rotating from the state shown in FIG. 1303 to the state shown in FIG. 1304, the appearance of the rotary motion unit A400b is changed so that the rotary movement member A465 protrudes in the lateral direction of the rotary motion unit A400b.
Between the state shown in FIG. 1303 and the state shown in FIG. 1304, the linear portion A414b along which the columnar projecting portion A448 is guided is arranged to intersect a circle centered on the rotation axis AJ1 at one point. Therefore, the arrangement of the columnar projecting portion A448 corresponds to the distance between the rotating shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 on a one-to-one basis.

Since the amount of projection of the rotational movement member A465 is configured to correspond to the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 (see FIGS. 1300 and 1301), the rotational movement member A465 begins to project. The position of the columnar projecting portion A448 and the amount of projection of the rotational movement member A465 corresponding to the position of the columnar projecting portion A448 can be specified from the structural aspect.
Therefore, in a state where the amount of change (angle) in the posture of the rotary motion unit A400b is insufficient, which can be a problem when the posture change of the rotary motion unit A400b and the projection of the rotary movement member A465 are performed by separate drive sources. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the rotational movement member A465 overhangs and collides with the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286).
When the driving force of the driving motor AMT1 (see FIG. 1296) is transmitted and the belt A423a is operated, the connecting mechanism A427 is guided by the metal rod AMB1 and slid in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, by controlling the drive amount of the drive motor AMT1, the rotary operation unit A400b is operated to reciprocate between the state shown in FIG. 1302 and the state shown in FIG. 1304, or the rotary operation unit A400b can be operated to reciprocate between the state shown in FIG. 1302 and the state shown in FIG.
On the extended side (left side), the coupling mechanism A427 contacts the damper member A417c and is decelerated by the elastic force of the biasing spring A417b. As a result, even when the belt A423a is operated at high speed in the direction in which the first operation unit A400 is in the extended state, the connecting mechanism A427 bounces on the side (left side) of the extended state, and the belt A423a It is possible to easily avoid applying an excessive load to the belt A423a and the durability of the connecting mechanism A427.

When the rotary motion unit A400b starts from the performance waiting state of the first motion unit A400 shown in FIG. Head to AT1.
In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 1302, the angle between the tangential direction AT1 and the direction in which the metal rod AMB1 extends (horizontal direction) is small. to execute the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit A400b.
In the state shown in FIG. 1303, the tangential direction AT1 is parallel to the straight portion A414b. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the resistance in the rotation direction when rotating the rotary motion unit A400b counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 1303 .
From the state shown in FIG. 1303 to the state shown in FIG. growing. Therefore, the ratio of the weight of the force for rotating the rotary motion unit A400b increases, and a surplus is generated in the driving force of the drive motor AMT1. This surplus driving force can be used for relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430.

In this way, while adopting a configuration in which the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is used both for the rotational movement of the rotary movement unit A400b and for the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, these multiple movements can be performed. By staggering the timing at which the driving force is required, the maximum value of the driving force required at one point can be lowered, and the size of the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced.
As shown in FIG. 1304, the moving member A440 is closer to the base plate member than the angle formed by the straight line connecting the rotating shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 as the driving force transmission location and the extending direction of the metal rod AMB1. The angle formed by the direction of movement AM1, which is the direction of relative movement with respect to A430, and the direction in which the metal rod AMB1 extends is configured to be smaller.
In this embodiment, the angle formed by the moving direction AM1 and the extending direction of the metal rod AMB1 is an acute angle, and the component directed in the moving direction AM1 of the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 transmitted in the extending direction of the metal rod AMB1 is Since the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, the driving force is transmitted in the direction to rotate the rotary motion unit A400b, and the motion resistance of the rotary motion unit A400b is reduced. can be avoided. Note that, in the present embodiment, the moving direction AM1 coincides with the longitudinal direction of the rotary motion unit A400b.
When the load from the driving motor AMT1 is transmitted to the columnar projecting portion A448 in the left-right direction, the load is a downward load that relatively moves the moving member A440 in the moving direction AM1, and a load that rotates the rotating operation unit A400b around the rotating shaft AJ1. It is decomposed into an upward load in the direction of rotating (raising) Since the load from the drive motor AMT1 is in the left-right direction (right-horizontal direction), the load can be smoothly disassembled in the vertical direction.

At this time, since the rotary shaft AJ1 is not arranged in the direction of the load resolved into the moving direction AM1, the load also acts to rotate the rotary operation unit A400b around the rotary shaft AJ1.
That is, in the present embodiment, the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged at a position deviated from a straight line passing through the rotary shaft AJ1 and parallel to the movement direction AM1. load also occurs in the rotation direction of the rotary motion unit A400b, so that it is easy to avoid the occurrence of a faulty rotary motion such as when the load directed from the columnar projecting part A448 to the rotary shaft AJ1 becomes excessive. can be done.
Figures 1305, 1306 and 1307 are rear views of the first operation unit A400. In FIGS. 1305, 1306 and 1307, the state in which the first operation unit A400 is driven from the presentation standby state to the extended state is illustrated in chronological order, and illustration of the vertically elongated member A411 is omitted.
FIG. 1305 shows the presentation standby state of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. A state that is the same as the effect standby state except for the attitude change is illustrated, and in FIG. 1307, the extended state of the first operation unit A400 is illustrated.

1305 corresponds to the rear view of the rotary operation unit A400b in the state shown in FIG. 1302, FIG. 1306 corresponds to the rear view of the rotary operation unit A400b in the state shown in FIG. 1303, and FIG. corresponds to the rear view of the rotary operation unit A400b in the state shown in FIG.
Mainly referring to FIG. 1306, the operation of the rotary operation unit A400b starting from the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400 will be described. Note that FIGS. 1300 and 1301 will be referred to as needed.
From the state shown in FIG. 1306, the rotary operation unit A400b is rotated clockwise in rear view, and the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 reaches the second length AD2 (see FIG. 1300(b)). Until then, the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, but the direction switching member A450 does not move in the lateral direction of the moving member A440. Therefore, the external appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b changes so as to extend in the longitudinal direction, and does not change in the lateral direction.
The rotary operation unit A400b is further rotated clockwise in rear view, and the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 changes from the second length AD2 to the third length AD3 (see FIG. 1301(a)). ), the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, and the direction switching member A450 moves in the lateral direction of the moving member A440.

Therefore, the appearance of the rotary motion unit A400b changes to extend in the longitudinal direction and to increase in width in the lateral direction. In this way, there are two changes in the appearance of the rotary motion unit A400b during the rotary motion of the rotary motion unit A400b: a state in which only the longitudinal direction changes, and a state in which both the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction change. configured to occur in stages.
The rotary motion unit A400b is further rotated clockwise in rear view, and the distance between the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar protrusion A448 changes from the third length AD3 to the fourth length AD4 (see FIG. 1301(b)). ), the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, but the direction switching member A450 does not move in the lateral direction of the moving member A440. Therefore, the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b changes so as to extend in the longitudinal direction, and does not change in the lateral direction.
As a result, the pushback due to the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b (see FIG. 1302) that can occur when adopting the control of stopping the driving of the drive motor AMT1 in the extended state of the first operation unit A400 (see FIG. 1307). Even when the movement occurs, it is possible to easily maintain the appearance of the first movement unit A400 in the overhanging state (the length of the rotation movement unit A400b in the lateral direction).
Thus, in the tilting motion of the rotating motion unit A400b, the number of members that move relative to the base plate member A430 differs in each section. By controlling to switch the control load of the drive motor AMT1 corresponding to the number of members that relatively move (for example, the control load is increased in the range where the number of members increases, and the control load is controlled in the range where the number of members decreases). By reducing the load), it is possible to suppress the influence of changes in motion resistance, and it is possible to easily prevent local changes in the motion speed of the rotary motion unit A400b.

A change in the rotation angle of the rotary operation unit A400b when the columnar projecting portion A448 moves from the state shown in FIG. 1306 with the leftward velocity component constant will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 1306, the straight line connecting the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 intersects perpendicularly with the straight portion A414b of the guide slot A414.
When the columnar projection A448 moves from the state shown in FIG. 1307, the straight line connecting the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 is the oblique side, and the straight line connecting the rotary shaft AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 shown in FIG. It is identified as an acute angle of a right-angled triangle having a base and a height AX1 of a straight line along the straight line portion A414b.
Here, assuming that the first length AD1 is a unit length, the relational expression of a right-angled triangle is the formula 1 [tanAφ1=AX1] from the trigonometric function, so the formula 2 [Aφ1=arctanAX1] is established as the inverse function. do.
From Equation 2, when the height AX1 increases at a constant speed as the columnar projecting portion A448 moves with a constant leftward speed component, the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 gradually decreases. Therefore, in this embodiment, when driving the drive motor AMT1 at a constant speed and moving the connecting member A427a (see FIG. 1302) of the connecting mechanism A427 in the left-right direction at a constant speed, the state shown in FIG. The rotation operation unit A400b can be rotated in an operation mode in which the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 is maximized at the time of starting toward the state shown, and the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 gradually decreases.

That is, it is possible to implement a simple control of driving the drive motor AMT1 at a constant speed while gradually decreasing the rotational speed of the rotary motion unit A400b.
As a result, when the first operation unit A400 moves from the presentation standby state to the extended state, the rotation speed of the rotary operation unit A400b is increased as the extended state is approached, while rotating at high speed at the start. Decrease. For this reason, the drive motor AMT1 is designed to give the player a surprise when the rotary motion unit A400b appears, while maintaining the arrangement and posture of the rotary motion unit A400b in the overhanging state so as to make it easier for the player to see the rotation motion unit A400b. can be realized by controlling to drive at a constant speed.
On the other hand, when the first operation unit A400 operates from the overhanging state to the presentation standby state, while rotating at a slow speed at the time of starting, the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit A400b is increased as the presentation standby state is approached. Let Therefore, it is possible to quickly retract the rotary motion unit A400b by increasing the rotation speed of the rotary motion unit A400b in the vicinity of the standby state for the effect while leaving the afterglow of the start of the rotary motion unit A400b to the retreat side. , can be realized by controlling the driving motor AMT1 at a constant speed.
As a result, as the operation of the rotary motion unit A400b, the displacement in the rotation direction and the displacement in the linear motion direction are simultaneously generated, and the operation state in which the displacement in the rotation direction is conspicuous (the rotation speed is high) and the displacement in the rotation direction are conspicuous. It is possible to configure an operation state in which there is no motion (rotational speed is low) and displacement in the linear motion direction is conspicuous.

That is, when the first action unit A400 is caused to rotate clockwise from the effect waiting state (see FIG. 1305), the moving member A440 is moved relative to the base plate member A430 until the state shown in FIG. 1306. 1306, and the rotation speed of the first operation unit A400 when driving the drive motor AMT1 at a constant speed gradually decreases.
As a result, an operating state in which displacement in the rotational direction is conspicuous, bordering on a state in which the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged at a position where the tip of the straight line of the second length AD2 coincides with the center line of the guide slot A414; It is possible to make the transition between the operating state in which the displacement in the linear direction is conspicuous while the displacement in the rotational direction is inconspicuous, and the transition in the operating state to be produced smoothly without discomfort.
As shown in FIGS. 1305 to 1307, in the rotation operation of the rotary operation unit A400b from the effect standby state, from the start of rotation from FIG. 1305 to the state shown in FIG. , there is no relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, and only rotational movement occurs.
From the state shown in FIG. 1306 to the state shown in FIG. 1307, relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs with the rotating motion of the rotating motion unit A400b. Aspects of relative movement occur in the order shown in diagrams 1300 and 1301 .

In diagram 1306, the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 illustrated in diagrams 1300 and 1301 are correspondingly illustrated. The posture of the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 illustrated in FIG. It corresponds to the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b in each state of length AD2, third length AD3, and fourth length AD4.
That is, when the rotary operation unit A400b rotates from the state shown in FIG. 1306 to the posture of the second length AD2, only the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs (FIG. 1300(a) and FIG. 1300(b)).
Furthermore, when the rotary motion unit A400b rotates from the attitude of the second length AD2 to the attitude of the third length AD3, in addition to the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, the relative movement of the direction switching member A450 also occurs (see FIGS. 1300(b) and 1301(a)).
Furthermore, when the rotary operation unit A400b rotates from the posture of the third length AD3 to the posture of the fourth length AD4, only relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs (FIGS. 1301(a) and See FIG. 1301(b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, relative motions of a plurality of other members also occur in accordance with the rotational motion of the rotary motion unit A400b. configured to be offset from each other. As a result, it is possible to avoid a sudden increase in the driving force required for the operation of the rotary operation unit A400b.
A correspondence relationship between changes in the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 illustrated in FIG. 1306 and the change in posture will be described. Although the angle between the first length AD1 and the second length AD2 and the angle between the second length AD2 and the third length shown on the right are almost the same (approximately 18 degrees), The difference between the first length AD1 and the second length AD2 and the difference between the second length AD2 and the third length AD3 are three times or more in the latter than in the former.
Therefore, when the rotary motion unit A400b rotates from the attitude of the first length AD1 shown on the right side to the attitude of the second length AD2, the movement length of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 per unit angle is , the movement length of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 per unit angle is three times or more longer when the rotary operation unit A400b rotates from the posture of the second length AD2 to the posture of the third length AD3. Become.
Furthermore, when the rotary motion unit A400b rotates from the posture of the second length AD2 to the posture of the third length AD3, the rotary motion unit A400b The moving length of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 per unit angle becomes longer when the A rotates from the posture of the third length AD3 to the posture of the fourth length AD4.

As a result, the operation mode of the rotary operation unit A400b can be changed stepwise from a state in which the rotary operation is the main mode to a state in which the relative movement (linear operation) of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 is the main mode. can.
Here, in the final stage of the rotational movement toward the extended state of the first movement unit A400 (for example, the state from the posture of the third length AD3 to the posture of the fourth length AD4 in FIG. 1306), the rotary shaft AJ1 1300 and 1301).
That is, since the angle between the columnar projecting portion A448 and the movement direction AM1 is reduced so as to partially offset the rotation angle of the rotary operation unit A400b, the movement direction AM1 (Fig. 1304) can be suppressed. As a result, for example, even if the rotary operation unit A400b is slightly pushed back by the biasing force of the biasing spring A417b via the damper member A417c (see FIG. 1304), the resulting angular change in the moving direction AM1 can be suppressed.
As a result, in the extended state of the first operation unit A400, not only is the width of the rotation operation unit A400b in the lateral direction less likely to change (see FIG. 1301), but also the angle change in the movement direction AM1 is suppressed. Therefore, the first operation unit A400 can be easily stabilized in the extended state.

Further, according to the rotary motion unit A400b, since it is configured to be longer in the longitudinal direction toward the overhanging state, the air resistance applied to the rotary motion unit A400b in the rotational direction increases toward the end of tilting. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a braking action due to air resistance.
Furthermore, according to the rotary operation unit A400b, the direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 project in the lateral direction as it moves toward the projecting state, so that the area in the front-rear direction view becomes larger. Therefore, the air resistance against tilting in the front-rear direction can be increased, so that tilting in the front-rear direction of the rotary operation unit A400b can be easily prevented.
Next, the second operation unit A500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1308 to 1315. FIG. FIG. 1308 is a front perspective view of the second operation unit A500, and FIG. 1309 is a rear perspective view of the second operation unit A500.
The second operation unit A500 is supported by a support unit A500a held by the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286), and is rotatably supported by the support unit A500a around a rotary shaft AJ2 arranged on the lower left side in front view. and a rotary motion unit A500b.

In the second operation unit A500, the drive motor AMT2 is arranged on the upper right side, and the rotating shaft AJ2 is arranged on the lower left side. As a result, the structure around the rotary shaft AJ2 can be simplified, and the rotary shaft AJ2 can be placed closer to the left corner than when the drive motor AMT2 is arranged near the rotary shaft AJ2.
Furthermore, compared to the case of arranging the drive motor AMT2 on the front side or the rear side of the rotary operation unit A500b, as in the case of arranging the drive motor AMT2 near the rotary shaft AJ2, the second operation unit The front-to-rear width of the A500 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for stacking a plurality of movable accessories in the front-rear direction of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286).
Further, by setting the axial direction of the drive motor AMT2 in the vertical direction, the front-rear width is suppressed to approximately the diameter of the main body of the drive motor AMT2. As a result, the front-to-rear width of the second motion unit A500 can be shortened.
Further, since the direction of the axis of the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 1295) and the direction of the axis of the drive motor AMT2 are perpendicular to each other, the vibration generated when one of the drive motors AMT1 is driven (vibration on the plane perpendicular to the axis) ), it is possible to easily avoid the other drive motor AMT2 from being operated (malfunctioning).

FIG. 1310 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operation unit A500, and FIG. 1311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operation unit A500. In Figures 1310 and 1311, the support unit A500a is disassembled, and the rotary motion unit A500b is shown in a non-disassembled state.
The support unit A500a has a fixed support unit A510 fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286), and a drive motor AMT2 whose arrangement is fixed to the fixed support unit A510. and a drive transmission unit A520 configured to be able to transmit to the rotation operation unit A500b.
The fixed support unit A510 consists of a vertical member A511 fastened and fixed to the right portion of the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286) in front view, and a horizontal member A513 fastened and fixed to the upper end side portion of the vertical long member A511. , a reinforcing member A515 formed by bending a sheet metal member arranged on the back side of the laterally elongated member A513, and a lower end portion of the rotary operation unit A500b arranged on the lower side of the longitudinally elongated member A511 so as to cover from the front side. and a covering member A517 configured as follows.
The horizontally elongated member A513 includes a plate-like main body A513a made of a resin material in a horizontally long plate shape, a guide elongated hole A514 formed through the plate-like main body A513a, and a bifurcated shape extending forward on the right end side of the plate-like main body A513a. A support portion A513b formed so as to be capable of supporting a driving gear A523d of a drive transmission unit A520 with a projecting portion protruding from the outside, an urging spring A513c one end of which is supported by the plate-like main body A513a, and the urging spring A513c. and a damper member A513d having the other end supported and biased to the left end of the movable range extending in the left-right direction by the biasing force of the biasing spring A513c.

The shape of the long guide hole A514 is bilaterally symmetrical with the shape of the long guide hole A414 (see FIG. 1305) described above for the first operation unit A400. As a result, the relationship of the rotational motion of the rotational motion unit A500b (the relationship between the rotation angle and the width of movement in the longitudinal direction) is the same as the rotational motion described for the rotary motion unit A400b (FIGS. 1302 to 1307) except that it is bilaterally symmetrical. ), the description of the rotation operation of the second operation unit A500 is omitted.
The guide long hole A514 corresponds to a portion through which the projecting tip of the upper displacement restricting device A214 (see FIG. 1287) is inserted. When the displacement restricting device A214 on the upper side is in a projecting state, its projecting tip interferes with the columnar projecting portion A546 (see FIG. 1309), and is configured to restrict the movement of the columnar projecting portion A546.
The reinforcing member A515 is a member formed by bending a metal plate. It has a pair of holding bent portions A515b formed with through-holes through which the rods AMB2 are inserted, and a long hole A515c formed so as to surround the guide long hole A514 from the outside.
The covering member A517 is a member formed of a resin material, and has a main body A517a formed in a shape in which the left and right side ends and the lower side end of the plate-like portion are extended to the back side, and the main body A517a. By detecting the arrangement of the cylindrical support portion A517b formed in the portion A517a and through which the rotary shaft AJ2 of the rotary motion unit A500b is inserted, and the rotary motion unit A500b, the second motion unit A500 can be in the effect standby state or the extended state. and a detection sensor A 517c for detecting a presence.

A photocoupler type sensor is normally used as the detection sensor A517d, but it is not limited to this. For example, a magnetic sensor or a contact sensor may be used.
The drive transmission unit A520 is composed of a support member A521 fastened and fixed to the right end of the horizontal member A513 to support the drive motor AMT2, and a plurality of rotating members rotatably supported on the upper surface side of the support member A521. A transmission mechanism A523, a left end holding member A525 that holds a rotating member at the left end of the transmission mechanism A523 and is fastened and fixed to the horizontally elongated member A513, and a coupling mechanism A527 that couples the transmission mechanism A523 and the rotary operation unit A500b. .
The transmission mechanism A523 includes an annular belt A523a having teeth formed on the inner peripheral side, and teeth formed on the outer peripheral side in a shape that meshes with the teeth of the belt A523a. A pair of left and right pulleys A523b and A523c rotatably supported by the horizontal member A513 via A521 and the left end holding member A525, a drive gear A523d fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT2 so as not to move relative to each other, and a right pulley A523b. A transmission gear portion A523e, which is a gear-shaped portion formed at the lower end portion of a tubular portion extending from the lower surface in a tubular shape centering on the rotation axis and meshing with the drive gear A523d.
The rotation axes of the pulleys 523b, 523c and the drive gear A523d are arranged parallel to each other. As a result, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven and the drive gear A523d is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear portion A523e to rotate the right pulley A523b, thereby extending the belt A523a in the horizontal direction. The belt A523a is driven in such a manner that the position of the belt A523a is moved in the horizontal direction.

The left end holding member A525 is formed of a resin material and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body A513a to rotatably support the left pulley A523c. and a lower member A525b fastened to the upper member A525a in alignment.
The connecting mechanism A527 includes a connecting member A527a to which the upper end side portion of the rotary operation unit A500b is connected and whose operation direction is the horizontal direction by receiving the metal rod AMB2 in the concave portion A527b on the front side, and the concave portion of the connecting member A527a. and a prevention member A527c that prevents the metal rod AMB2 from coming off from between the connection member A527a by being fastened and fixed to the connection member A527a so as to block the A527b from the front side.
The connecting member A527a has a flat plate-shaped contact portion A527d at the upper end that contacts the rear surface of the belt 523a, and the prevention member A527c has a sawtooth-shaped contact portion at a position corresponding to the contact portion A527d. Equipped with A527e.
The contact portion A527d is arranged to face the planar portion (outer peripheral side) of the belt A523a, and the sawtooth contact portion A527e is arranged to face the sawtooth portion (inner peripheral side) of the belt A523a. By sandwiching the belt A523a between the portion A527d and the serrated contact portion A527e, it is possible to prevent the flat contact portion A527d and the serrated contact portion A527e from slipping on the belt A523a.

The connecting member A527a is formed with columnar fastening portions for fastening and fixing with the prevention member A527c, one of which rotatably supports the pulley A527g, and the metal rod AMB2 is inserted into the groove on the outer circumference of the pulley A527g. The coupling mechanism A527 is designed so that As a result, it is possible to reduce the operating resistance generated between the coupling mechanism A527 and the metal rod AMB2, so that the driving force required for the drive motor AMT2 to operate the second operating unit A500 can be reduced. , the size of the drive motor AMT2 can be reduced.
With such a structure, the coupling mechanism A527 is driven and rotated by the drive motor AMT2, and the right pulley A523b is rotated by engagement transmission, so that the portion extending in the left and right direction of the belt A523a moves in the left and right direction. Then, it is guided by the metal rod AMB2 and moved in the left-right direction.
The connecting member A527a has a vertically extending guide hole A527f through which the columnar projecting portion A546 of the rotary operation unit A500b is inserted. The columnar projecting portion A546 of the rotary motion unit A500b is inserted into the guide long hole A527f and the guide long hole A514 of the fixed support unit A510, thereby rotating along with the lateral movement of the coupling mechanism A527. The columnar protrusion A546 of the unit A500b is moved vertically and horizontally.
A driving force is transmitted to the rotary motion unit A500b via the coupling mechanism A527 that moves in the left-right direction in this way, and the rotary motion unit A500b is displaced. Details of the rotary operation unit A500b will be described below.

FIG. 1312 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit A500b, and FIG. 1313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary motion unit A500b. As illustrated in FIGS. 1312 and 1313, the rotary operation unit A500b includes a base member A530 rotatably supported on the rotary shaft AJ2 at the lower end side, and a rotary shaft on a plane orthogonal to the rotary shaft AJ2. A moving member A540 connected to the base member A530 so as to be slidable in a linear direction passing through AJ2; and a direction switching member A550 that can be moved to the direction switching member A550. The moving member A540 and the direction switching member A550 are arranged in the space formed between the changing member A560 and the base member A530 arranged and fixed on the front side of the changing member A560 via the fixed support member A565. and a covering member A570 fixed to the base member A530.
The base member A530 includes a long plate-like plate-like main body A531, a pair of upper and lower guide long holes A532 drilled as long holes parallel to the longitudinal direction of the plate-like main body A531, and the pair of guide long holes. A plate-like main body A531 is formed so as to form a space between a plurality of function long holes A533 drilled in a shape that combines the vertical direction and the laterally inclined direction at a position between A532 and the plate-like main body A531. Space constituent member A534 fastened and fixed to both ends in the short direction of the lower end of the space constituent member A534, support hole A535 drilled in the space constituent member A534 in the front and back direction and supported by the rotating shaft AJ2, and space constituent member A534 are fastened A pair of protruding insertion portions A536 formed to protrude in the lateral direction of the plate-like main body A531 above the fixed position and function as insertion portions for fastening screws.
The functional long hole A533 is composed of four long holes, namely, a pair of upper and lower long holes and another pair of upper and lower long holes having an inverted shape with respect to the pair of long holes. The shape of the holes is common except for the relationship of reversal.
Of the plurality of functional long holes A533, a pair of upper and lower long holes are formed at positions where one of the long holes is translated along the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole A532. That is, the corresponding positions of the pair of upper and lower elongated holes are maintained on the same straight line or arranged in parallel.

Of the functional long holes A533, the pair of upper and lower long holes and the other pair of upper and lower long holes are displaced along the direction in which the guide long holes A532 extend. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to use the empty space compared to the case where the arrangement is not shifted, and the length of the plate-like body A531 in the width direction is reduced while the length of the plate-like body A531 in the width direction is suppressed. It is possible to easily ensure the length of the functional long hole A533.
The space forming member A534 has a plate-shaped detection piece A534a that protrudes in a plate-like shape in a direction away from the support hole A535 starting from the lower end on the front side. The plate-shaped detection pieces A534a are formed at front and rear positions that can be arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensor A517c (see FIG. 1311).
The plate-shaped detection piece A534a is formed on the side (front side) where the rotary shaft AJ2 is supported. As a result, even if the rotary shaft AJ2 is bent (tilted) due to deformation of the rotary shaft AJ2, the displacement of the plate-shaped detection piece A534a can be minimized. It is possible to easily avoid that the shaped detection piece A534a is arranged at a position out of the front-rear position where the detection piece A534a is accommodated in the detection groove of the detection sensor A517c.
Since the position of the plate-shaped detection piece A534a is detected by the detection sensor A517c, the attitude of the rotary operation unit A500b can be grasped. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which they collide with each other.

The moving member A540 includes a plate-like main body A541 made of a resin material, a light-emitting substrate A542 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body A541 and provided with a plurality of light-emitting means such as LEDs on the front side, and a light-emitting substrate A542. A decorative member A543 configured to cover the upper side of the substrate A542 and configured to have a portion capable of transmitting light from the light emitting means of the light emitting substrate A542 and fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body A541, and a guiding length of the base member A530. A pair of insertion protrusions A544 protruded to the extent that they are inserted into the holes A532, and holes extending in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the guide long holes A532 extend at positions corresponding to the functional long holes A533 of the base member A530. a plurality of auxiliary elongated holes A545, a columnar projecting portion A546 projecting from the upper left corner of the plate-like main body A541 toward the back side and inserted into the guide elongated hole A527f (see FIG. 1311) of the drive transmission unit A520; Prepare.
By configuring the moving member A540 in this way, it is possible to perform an effect of brightly illuminating the decorative member A543 with light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate A542. In addition, the light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the light-emitting substrate A542 are not limited to LEDs whose optical axes are arranged in the forward direction (in a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the substrate). It has LEDs arranged laterally (in a direction parallel to the front surface of the substrate). As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect using light, which will be described later in detail.
The lower end of the moving member A540 is arranged in the space formed between the plate-like main body A531 of the base member A530 and the space forming member A534 in the waiting state for rendering of the second action unit A500 (see FIG. 1308). That is, in a front view, the moving member A540 is configured so as to overlap with the rotating shaft AJ2 inserted through the support hole A535, so that the freedom of arrangement of the moving member A540 can be improved.
The decorative member A543 includes a translucent area A543a extending in the longitudinal direction at the central portion in the lateral direction, and plated areas A543b on both sides in the lateral direction of the translucent area A543a.

As a result, even if the placement of the board is restricted to the central portion in the transverse direction due to the formation of the functional elongated holes A533 and the auxiliary elongated holes A545, the front-facing light emission effect can be achieved at the central portion in the transverse direction. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the effect of the presentation by performing the presentation in the near translucent area A543a and performing presentation by reflection from the plating in the other plating area A543b.
In addition, the ends of the decoration member A543 in the short direction do not extend to the back side and do not cover the side surfaces of the light emitting substrate A542. As a result, the light emitted in the lateral direction of the light emitting substrate A542 is not attenuated by the decorative member A543, and the object can be sufficiently illuminated in the light emitting effect.
The insertion protrusion A544 is inserted through the long guide hole A532 of the base member A530 and is configured to be prevented from coming off from the long guide hole A532 by a screw and a collar member AC1 that are screwed into the tip. By configuring in this way, the moving member A540 is configured to be relatively movable with respect to the base member A530 along the guide long hole A532.
The direction switching member A550 is composed of a set of members corresponding to each other on the left and right sides. a pair of rear columnar portions A553 arranged in the longitudinal direction projecting toward the back side on the same straight line as the projecting direction of the front columnar portion A552; The plate-like body A551 has a plate shape at the left and right outer and upper outer peripheral ends of the plate-like body A551 so as to maintain a space where the moving member A540 can be arranged between the through-hole A554 drilled in the longitudinal direction and the plate-like body A551 It has a movable decorative member A555 fastened and fixed to the main body A551, and a through hole A556 drilled in the longitudinal direction (direction parallel to the through hole A554) from the lower end of the movable decorative member A555.

In this embodiment, the plate-like main body A551 and the moving decorative member A555 are made of a colored transparent light-transmitting resin material in consideration of presentation. In particular, since the resin color is yellow, it is possible to improve the color continuity with the plated area A543b (gold plated) of the moving member A540, thereby improving the lighting effect during operation. can be done.
If the plate-shaped main body A551 and the movable decorative member A555 can be composed of completely identical members having the same shape, there is a possibility that the members can be shared, which is preferable in some cases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped main body A551 and the moving decorative member A555 are composed of two corresponding members, and although they are not configured in exactly the same shape, the difference in shape is functional. Designed from requirements.
For example, the difference in shape at the upper end is that a notch is formed on the side of the moving member A540 on which the columnar projecting portion A546 exists to avoid interference with the columnar projecting portion A546, resulting in a different shape. ing.
Further, for example, the difference in arrangement of the front columnar portion A552 and the rear columnar portion A553 is that the functional elongated holes A533 and the auxiliary elongated holes A545 are arranged at asymmetrical positions, resulting in different shapes.

By assigning such functional requirements to the configuration of the back side, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front side of the moving decorative member A555 that is visually recognized by the player. The symmetrical shape can improve the presentation effect of the rotary operation unit A500b.
The front columnar portion A552 is inserted through the auxiliary elongated hole A545 of the moving member A540, and the rear columnar portion A553 is inserted through the functional elongated hole A533 of the base member A530. Thereby, the direction switching member A550 can be displaced in the direction in which the auxiliary long hole A545 extends according to the arrangement of the moving member A540 with respect to the base member A530.
The rear columnar portion A553 is inserted through the functional long hole A533 of the base member A530 and is configured to be prevented from coming off from the functional long hole A533 by a screw and a collar member AC1 that are screwed into the tip.
On the other hand, the moving member A540 is connected to the base member A530 by the insertion protrusion A544, and the direction switching member A550 is connected by the back columnar portion A553. , the collar member AC1 is arranged between the moving member A540 and does not prevent falling off due to the screwing.

As a result, even if the light-emitting substrate A542 is formed close to the auxiliary long hole A545, the color member AC1 and the light-emitting substrate A542 do not rub against each other. The degree of freedom in designing the shape of the substrate A542 can be improved.
Also, the screw head can be prevented from interfering with the movable decorative member A555, and the front-rear distance between the movable decorative member A555 and the movable member A540 can be shortened. As a result, the front-rear thickness of the direction switching member A550 can be shortened.
The change member A560 is composed of a pair of left and right members, and a guide support member A561 supported displaceably (rotational displacement and displacement in the direction in which the through hole A554 extends) supported by the through hole A554 of the direction switching member A550. , a wing-like member A562 whose guide support member A561 is fastened and fixed on the back side, an intermediate displacement member A563 rotatably supported by the wing-like member A562, and the intermediate displacement member A563 is sandwiched between the wing-like member A562. A fixed member A564 that is fastened and fixed to the wing-shaped member A562 in arrangement, a fixed support member A565 that is fastened and fixed to the overhang insertion portion A536 of the base member A530 and rotatably supports the intermediate displacement member A563, and the fixed support member A565. and a fixed member A566 that is fastened and fixed to the fixed support member A565 so as to sandwich the intermediate displacement member A563 therebetween.
The wing-shaped member A562 is a columnar portion that rotatably supports the intermediate displacement member A563, and is a supporting fastening portion to which the fixing member A564 is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into a female thread formed at the tip. A562a and a fastened portion A562b to which the guide support member A561 is fastened and fixed.

The intermediate displacement member A563 is a member formed in a plate shape, and is rotatably supported by the first through hole A563a through which the support fastening portion A562a is inserted, and the fixed support member A565 through which the fixed support member A565 is inserted. It has a second through hole A563b, and an insertion projection A563c that is inserted through the through hole A556 of the direction switching member A550 and supported displaceably (rotationally displaceable and displaceable in the direction in which the through hole A556 extends).
The fixed support member A565 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape in which a pair of straight leg portions are formed from the outer peripheral portion of the arc-shaped portion. A columnar fixing portion A565a fastened and fixed to the portion A536, and a columnar portion protruding toward the rear side at the left and right upper end portions of the arc portion and rotatably supporting the second through hole A563b of the intermediate displacement member A563. and a support portion A565b.
A female screw is formed at the tip of the columnar support portion A565b, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A566a of the fixing member A566 is screwed into the female screw, thereby fixing the intermediate displacement member A563 to the fixed support member A565. The fixing member A566 can be fastened and fixed to the fixing support member A565 in a manner that prevents it from falling off.
In this embodiment, as the insertion portion of the fastening screw of the fixing member A566, the insertion hole A566a is not the only insertion hole A566a. A hole A 566b is also provided.

Therefore, the screwing position of the fastening screw can be changed according to circumstances. For example, fastening screws may be inserted and screwed into all of the insertion holes A566a and A566b. In this case, since the strength of the columnar support portion A565b can be improved by the strength of the fastening screw, it is possible to easily prevent the columnar support portion A565b from being damaged and the intermediate displacement member A563 falling off.
Further, for example, a fastening screw may be inserted and screwed into either the insertion hole A566a or the insertion hole A566b. In this case, the required number of fastening screws can be reduced, so the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.
The covering member A570 has a translucent area A571 extending in the longitudinal direction at the central portion in the transverse direction, a plated area A572 in which plating is applied on both sides of the translucent area A571 in the transverse direction, and the plated areas A572. A pair of claw-shaped portions A573 extending from the outer end in the lateral direction to the back side on the back side of the and formed by bending from the extended end, and a plurality of fastened members fastened and fixed to the fixed support member A565 and a columnar portion A574.
Even when the shape of the light emitting substrate A542 is restricted to a shape that does not interfere with the auxiliary long holes A545 due to the translucent area A571 and the plating area A572, the effect of the light emitting effect can be maintained at a high level. That is, the light emission effect is performed in the translucent area A571 near the center in the width direction, and the effect is performed by reflection from the plating in the other plating area A572, thereby avoiding deterioration of the effect.

The claw-shaped portions A573 are configured to guideably support both lateral sides of the decorative member A543 of the moving member A540. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the moving member A540 in the front-rear direction, so that the moving member A540 falls forward or backward with respect to the base member A530 particularly in the overhanging state (see FIG. 1290). can be easily prevented.
The columnar portions to be fastened A574 are arranged at positions corresponding to the central side portions of the pair of leg portions of the fixed support member A565 and the central portion of the arc-shaped portion, and the fastening screws inserted through the fixed support member A565 are screwed at each position. By inserting it, it is fastened and fixed to the fixed support member A565.
Figures 1314(a), 1314(b), 1315(a) and 1315(b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit A500b. FIGS. 1314(a), 1314(b), 1315(a), and 1315(b) show how the moving member A540 of the rotary operation unit A500b moves relative to the base member A530 in time series. be. 1314(a), 1314(b), 1315(a) and 1315(b), illustration of the collar member AC1 is omitted.
In FIGS. 1314(a), 1314(b), 1315(a) and 1315(b), the rotation operation unit A500b (FIG. 1314(a)) in the presentation standby state (see FIG. 1288) of the second operation unit A500 ) to the rotating operation unit A500b (see FIG. 1315(b)) in the extended state (see FIG. 1290).

The guide long holes A532 are a pair of long holes extending in parallel, but are not formed on a straight line. The upper elongated guide hole A532 is formed in the central portion of the base member A530 in the transverse direction, while the elongated lower guide hole A532 is arranged at a position slightly displaced from the central portion in the transverse direction so as to avoid the rotating shaft AJ2. is set.
In this way, even when the long guide holes A532 are slightly displaced, the moving member A540 is supported by the pair of long guide holes A532, so that the moving member A540 can be smoothly moved in the direction in which the long guide holes A532 extend. can be made Further, by shifting the arrangement of the long guide holes A532 in this way, the rotary shaft AJ2 can be arranged at the center position in the width direction of the base member A530.
The functional long hole A533 has a first parallel portion A533a that extends parallel to the direction in which the guide long hole A532 extends, and one end that is connected to the first parallel portion A533a and is inclined with respect to the first parallel portion A533a. and a second parallel portion A533c formed so as to connect to the other end of the inclined portion A533b and extending parallel to the direction in which the first parallel portion A533a extends.
Here, FIG. 1314(a) shows a state in which the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged on the end side of the first parallel portion A533a, and FIG. 1314(b) shows the direction switching member A550. A state in which the rear columnar portion A553 is arranged at the intersection position between the first parallel portion A533a and the inclined portion A533b is illustrated, and in FIG. 1315(b) shows a state where the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged on the end portion side of the second parallel portion A533c. be.

The length of the first parallel portion A533a is formed sufficiently long. As a result, even if the moving member A540 starts to move relative to the base member A530 from the state shown in FIG. 1314(a), for a while (until the state shown in FIG. A550 is configured to be difficult to move in the lateral direction of moving member A540.
In the operation of the second operation unit A500, the relative movement of the moving member A540 with respect to the base member A530 is performed at the same time as the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit A500b about the rotation axis AJ2, as shown in FIG. 1314(a). 1314B to the state shown in FIG. 1314(b), the rotary operation unit A500b can be rotated while maintaining the short appearance of the width in the lateral direction.
The inclined portion A533b extends outward in the lateral direction of the base member A530 from the position where the first parallel portion A533a is formed. Therefore, when the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 from the state in which the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged in the first parallel portion A533a, and the rear columnar portion A553 enters the inclined portion A533b, The direction switching member A550 moves outward in the lateral direction of the moving member A540.
A pair of rear columnar portions A553 of the direction switching member A550 are inserted into a pair of auxiliary elongated holes A545 (see FIG. 1313), and the pair are guided in parallel. Therefore, the relative movement of the direction switching member A550 with respect to the moving member A540 is parallel movement of the moving member A540 in the lateral direction.

The speed of the movement is proportional to the speed of relative movement of the moving member A540 with respect to the base member A530 due to the linear formation of the inclined portion A533b. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of an action effect in which the moving member A540 and the direction switching member A550 are interlocked.
The second parallel portion A533c is not as long as the first parallel portion A533a and is formed with the minimum required length. The purpose of forming the second parallel portion A533c is to improve the rendering effect of the rotary motion unit A500b.
That is, when the second operation unit A500 is driven to the extended state and the drive motor AMT2 (see FIG. 1310) is stopped, the coupling mechanism A527 is slightly pushed back by the biasing force applied from the biasing spring A513c to the damper member A513d. , Even if the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 in the opposite direction (return direction), the presence of the second parallel portion A533c allows the direction switching member A550 to move in the lateral direction of the moving member A540. You can keep the position unchanged.
As a result, a pushback operation due to the biasing force of the biasing spring A513c (see FIG. 1310), which can occur when the control of stopping the driving of the drive motor AMT2 in the extended state of the second operation unit A500, occurs. Even so, it is possible to easily maintain the appearance of the second operation unit A500 in the overhanging state (the length of the rotation operation unit A500b in the lateral direction).

Here, the difference between the rotary motion unit A500b of the second motion unit A500 and the rotary motion unit A400b of the first motion unit A400 will be described. First, as described above, in the rotary operation unit A500b, the guide slots A532 are not arranged on a straight line.
In the rotary operation unit A500b of the second operation unit A500, the functional elongated holes A533 are not aligned in the widthwise direction of the base member A530, but are shifted in the lengthwise direction. As a result, part of the functional long holes A533 formed on the opposite side in the short side direction can enter into the gaps between the functional long holes A533 arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the base member A530. The length in the lateral direction can be shortened.
The arrangement of the rear columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is configured to be vertically displaced according to the vertical displacement dimension of the arrangement of the function long holes A533. This makes it possible to match the operation timings of the left and right direction switching members A550 in opposite directions (transverse direction of the moving member A540).
In the rotary motion unit A400b, the functional long hole A444 is formed in the moving member A440, but in the rotary motion unit A500b, the functional long hole A533 is formed in the base member A530.

Therefore, in the first operation unit A400, the functional long hole A444 also moves relative to the base plate member A430 as the rotary operation unit A400b rotates and the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430. However, in the second operation unit A500 (see FIGS. 1300 and 1301), even if the rotary operation unit A500b rotates and the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530, the function long hole A533 is arranged in the base member A530. There is no relative movement with respect to the member A530.
Conversely, in the first operation unit A400, the auxiliary elongated hole A433 (see FIG. 1298) is formed in the base plate member A430, whereas in the second operation unit A500, the auxiliary elongated hole A545 is formed in the moving member A540 ( 1313), the correspondence relationship is reversed.
From this relationship, the function slot A533 formed in the rotary motion unit A500b of the second motion unit A500 is vertically opposite to the function slot A444 formed in the rotation motion unit A400b of the first motion unit A400. ing.
In this way, the functional long holes A444 and A533 and the auxiliary long holes A433 and A545 are reversed in their arrangement. In the rotary motion unit A500b as well, it is possible to realize an operation mode similar to that of the rotary motion unit A400b, in which the length in the lateral direction of the rotary motion unit A500b increases in the process of extending in the longitudinal direction.

In the second operation unit A500, the arrangement of the direction switching member A550 in the longitudinal direction of the rotary operation unit A500b corresponds to the arrangement of the auxiliary elongated holes A545 of the moving member A540. Therefore, as the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 in the longitudinal direction of the rotary motion unit A500b, the direction switching member A550 moves the rotary motion unit A500b by the same amount of movement as that of the moving member A540. It moves in the longitudinal direction and at the same time moves in the lateral direction of the moving member A540.
That is, the movement of the direction switching member A550 is a relative movement of the moving member A540 in the lateral direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the guide long hole A532 extends) relative to the moving member A540, and relative to the base member A530. The relative movement is along the forming direction of the functional long hole A533.
The changing member A560 is supported by the columnar support portion A565b of the fixed support member A565 whose second through hole A563b is fixed to the base member A530, while the insertion protrusion A563c is supported by the through hole A556 of the displaceable direction switching member A550. A guide support member A561 is supported in a displaceable through hole A554. As a result, the moving member A540 rotates relative to the changing member A560 in accordance with the amount of displacement in the lateral direction of the moving member A540 with the base member A530 as a fulcrum. Displacement can occur.
It should be noted that the rotation operation unit A500b changes so that the distance between the rotary shaft AJ2 and the columnar projecting portion A546 gradually increases until the second operation unit A500 changes from the presentation standby state to the extended state. , along with this, the angle between the straight line passing through the rotary shaft AJ2 and the columnar protrusion A546 and the straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the rotary motion unit A500b (moving direction of the moving member A540) gradually decreases. What is done is the same as described above in the description of the first operation unit A400 with reference to FIGS. 1300 and 1301, so the description is omitted here.

Next, the third operation unit A600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1316 to 1323. FIG. FIG. 1316 is a front perspective view of the third operation unit A600, and FIG. 1317 is a rear perspective view of the third operation unit A600.
The third operation unit A600 includes a support unit A600a held by the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286), and an opening/closing operation unit A600b supported by the support unit A600a so as to be vertically operable.
FIG. 1318 is an exploded front perspective view of the third operation unit A600, and FIG. 1319 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third operation unit A600. 1318 and 1319, the support unit A600a is disassembled, and the opening/closing operation unit A600b is illustrated in a non-disassembled state.
The support unit A600a has a fixed support unit A610 fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286), and a drive motor AMT3 whose arrangement is fixed to the fixed support unit A610. and a drive transmission unit A620 configured to be capable of transmitting to the opening/closing operation unit A600b.

The fixed support unit A610 consists of a horizontally elongated member A611 fastened and fixed to the lower part of the bottom wall portion A211 of the back case A210 (see FIG. 1286) when viewed from the front, and a decorative member A613 fastened and fixed to the upper right side portion of the horizontally elongated member A611. , the right side member A615 fastened and fixed to the horizontally long member A611 below the decorative member A613, and the left side member fastened and fixed with a space allowing the drive transmission unit A620 to move between the left side of the horizontally long member A611. A617;
The horizontally elongated member A611 includes a plate-like main body A611a, a set of support forming portions A611b formed by bending the upper and lower ends of the plate-like main body A611a toward the front side, and being vertically inserted through and fixed to the support forming portions A611b. and a lifting support rod A611c formed from a metallic cylindrical member.
The lifting support rod A611c is inserted through the rear side of the opening/closing operation unit A600b and supported by the support forming portion A611b, thereby guiding the opening/closing operation unit A600b in the direction of elevation and opening/closing the plate-shaped main body A611a. It functions to maintain the longitudinal arrangement of the unit A600b.
The decorative member A613 includes a box-shaped main body A613a with an open back side, and an overhanging part A613b formed to overhang leftward from the left end of the front side surface of the main body A613a. The protruding portion A613b functions to suppress forward tilting of the opening/closing operation unit A600b in the waiting state for the effect of the third operation unit A600, the details of which will be described later.

The right member A615 is a member that supports the light guide plate unit A700 (see FIG. 1286) jointly with the left member A617 and to which the light guide plate unit A700 is fastened and fixed. That is, the opening/closing operation unit A600b is arranged behind the light guide plate unit A700 in the effect waiting state of the third operation unit A600, and is displaced upward toward the center side of the light guide plate unit A700 by changing the state to the overhanging state. configured to be
The left member A617 includes a plate-like main body A617a, a columnar supporting portion A617b protruding from the back side of the plate-like main body A617a, and a fan-like shape drilled along an arc around the supporting portion A617b. It is wound around a metal rod arranged in the plate-like main body A617a so as to be coaxial with the through hole A617c and the support part A617b, and is arranged in a position where one end is fixed and the other end faces the fan-shaped through hole A617c. A torsion spring A617d for urging, a box-shaped portion A617e formed in a box-like shape with an open back side on the lower side of the plate-shaped main body A617a, and a columnar shape protruding from the back side of the box-shaped portion A617e. A support portion A617f, an insertion hole A617g formed in the box-shaped portion A617e and having a size that allows the drive gear AMG3 of the drive motor AMT3 to pass through, and an arc-shaped cross section from the lower edge of the insertion hole A617g to the rear side. A covering portion A617h that is extended and partially covers the insertion hole A617g at the extended end portion, a detection sensor A617i that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the box-shaped portion A617e in a posture that directs the detection gap toward the support portion A617f side, Prepare.
The covering portion A617h functions as a stopper that prevents the drive gear AMG3 from coming off the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT3 and falling off to the rear side. This can prevent the drive gear AMG3 from falling off from the drive motor AMT3.
The detection sensor A617i is a device for detecting the arrangement of the drive transmission unit A620, thereby making it possible to grasp whether the third operation unit A600 is in an effect standby state or in an extended state.

The drive transmission unit A620 includes a rotary motion member A621 supported by a support portion A617b so as to be rotatable between the laterally elongated member A611 and the left side member A617 and connected to the opening/closing motion unit A600b. and a transmission member A625 rotatably supported by the support portion A617f so as to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive motor AMT3.
The rotary motion member A621 includes a plate-like main body A621a, an insertion hole A621b drilled at an end of the plate-like main body A621a so that the support portion A617b of the left member A617 can be inserted, and a straight line in the longitudinal direction passing through the insertion hole A621b. A transmission elongated hole A621c drilled as an elongated hole to pass through, a spring receiving projection A621d projecting from the upper end near the insertion hole A621b toward the front side and receiving the other end of the torsion spring A617d, and an insertion hole of the plate-like main body A621a An insertion protrusion A621e is provided in a columnar shape and protrudes toward the front side at the end opposite to the end where A621b is arranged, and the insertion protrusion A621e is inserted through the opening/closing operation unit A600b.
The rotating member A621 is rotatably supported by the left member A617 by inserting the support portion A617b into the insertion hole A621b. A retaining screw that is screwed into the tip of the support portion A617b can be attached and detached through the through hole A611d of the horizontal member A611. That is, in this embodiment, an assembling procedure can be adopted in which the left member A617 is fastened and fixed to the laterally elongated member A611, and then the screw is screwed into the tip of the support portion A617b.
The transmission member A625 includes a main body gear portion A625a that meshes with the drive gear AMG3, a projecting portion A625b that protrudes in a flange shape from the entire circumference of the rear side of the main body gear portion A625a, and an outer peripheral side of the projecting portion A625b. An insertion protrusion A625c that protrudes in a columnar shape from the end to the rear side, and an extension part A625d that is bent from the outer peripheral end of the overhang A625b and extends in the direction away from the rotation shaft. Prepare.

The insertion protrusion A625c is inserted through the transmission elongated hole A621c of the rotational motion member A621 via the collar member AC1. As a result, the rotation of the transmission member A625 and the rotation of the rotary motion member A621 can be interlocked.
The extension part A625d is arranged at a position capable of crossing the detection gap of the detection sensor A617i. That is, depending on whether or not the extended portion A625d is arranged in the detection gap of the detection sensor A617i, the posture of the transmission member A625 can be grasped by the corresponding control device.
FIG. 1320 is an exploded front perspective view of the opening/closing operation unit A600b, and FIG. 1321 is an exploded rear perspective view of the opening/closing operation unit A600b. The opening/closing operation unit A600b includes a plate-like member A630 made of a resin material, and a space forming member A640 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like member A630 so as to form a space between the plate-like member A630 and the plate-like member A630. , a pair of moving members A650 movably supported in the space between the plate-like member A630 and the space forming member A640, a driving motor AMT4 fastened and fixed to the plate-like member A630, and the driving force of the driving motor AMT4. to the moving member A650; a rear cover member A670 fastened and fixed to the plate-like member A630 so as to sandwich the drive transmission unit A660 between the plate-like member A630; and a guide unit A680 fastened and fixed to the rear cover member A670 so as to sandwich the lifting support rod A611c between the rear cover member A670 and the guide unit A680.
The plate-like member A630 includes a plate-like main body A631, a projecting support portion A632 projecting cylindrically from the back side of the plate-like main body A631, and an arc-shaped hole centering on the projecting support portion A632. A pair of arc-shaped holes A633 formed in the outer edge of the plate-like main body A631 to form a space between a pair of arc-shaped holes A633, a projecting support A634 projecting parallel to the projecting support A632, and the rear cover member A670. and a frame-shaped portion A635 protruding toward the back side in a frame shape along the portion.

The space forming member A640 includes a main body member A641 forming a framework, a translucent translucent member A642 fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member A641, and an interior hollowed out so as to surround the translucent member A642. A non-transparent plated member A643 fastened and fixed to the main body member A641 in a state where plating is applied to the front side, and a light emitting member A642 formed so as to irradiate the entire area of the translucent member A642 and fastened and fixed to the main body member A641. It comprises a substrate A644 and a detection sensor A645 arranged on the rear side of the main body member A641 for detecting the placement of the moving member A650.
The body member A641 includes a pair of guide grooves A641a elongated in the left-right direction on the back side, and stoppers A641b protrudingly formed near the ends of the guide grooves A641a. The guide groove portion A641a is a pair of grooves arranged vertically in parallel, and is a linear long groove extending from the upper left to the lower right, and is configured to be able to guide the movement of the moving member A650. The stopper portion A641b is a protrusion for preventing the moving member A650 from falling off from the space forming member A640, and is configured to be engageable with the moving member A650 arranged at the terminal position of the movement range.
A flat cable A644a extending from the light emitting substrate A644 enables power supply to the moving member A650. In this embodiment, the flat cable A644a is arranged to extend along the longitudinal direction of the guide groove portion A641a. This makes it easier to avoid applying an excessive load to the flat cable A644a during movement of the moving member A650, and improves the durability of the flat cable A644a.
The moving member A650 consists of a main body member A651 which is composed of a pair of members having the same shape arranged rotationally symmetrically and which forms a framework, and a decorative member A655 which is formed in a different shape and is fastened and fixed to the corresponding main body member A651. Prepare.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to achieve simplification of the transmission mechanism and use of a resin mold by sharing the shape of the portion where the driving force is transmitted. By arranging the decorative member A655 in , it is possible to prevent the simplified shape from influencing the rendering surface.
The main body member A651 is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the guide groove portion A641a, and is extended from the front side to the front side when moving laterally outward, resulting in an L-shape in top view. and a pair of roller members A653 formed to be rotatable and sized to be arranged inside the guide groove portion A641a.
The long main body A652 has a stopper portion A652a that is arranged to face and can abut against the stopper portion A641b when moving laterally outward, and a detected portion A652b that protrudes in a plate-like shape in the lateral direction from the substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. , and a rectangular recessed portion A652c extending in the lateral direction and recessed from the back side.
The detected portion A652b is arranged in a shape that can cross the detection groove of the detection sensor A645. By arranging the detected portion A652b in the detection groove of the detection sensor A645, it is possible to cause the corresponding control device to grasp that the moving member A650 is arranged at the end of movement.

In this embodiment, since the detection sensor A645 is arranged only under the lower main body member A651, it is sufficient that the detected part A652b is arranged in the lower main body member A651. Although the body member A651 does not require the detected part A652b, the body member A651 on the upper side is also formed with the detected part A652b in order to use a common resin mold.
The roller member A653 functions to reduce the movement resistance of the moving member A650 to the guide groove portion A641a. That is, compared with the case where the moving member A650 slides on the guide groove portion A641a, the rolling of the roller member A653 can reduce the frictional force, so that the moving member A650 can be moved smoothly. can.
The decorative member A655 is a member fastened and fixed to the front side portion of the end portion of the body member A651 opposite to the end portion on which the stopper portion A652a is disposed, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. a light-transmitting member A656, a frame-shaped member A657 formed in a frame surrounding the light-transmitting member A656, and a light-emitting substrate including a light-emitting means such as an LED for irradiating the light-transmitting member A656 and the frame-shaped member A657. A658;
By fastening the decorative member A655 and the main body member A651, it is possible to form a U-shape in which one side in the left and right direction is open when viewed from above. A flat cable A644a is arranged inside the U-shape, and one end of the flat cable A644a is connected to the light emitting board A658. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the flat cable A644a from protruding outside the main body member A651 and the decorative member A655 and being visually recognized by the player.

The decorative member A655 is disposed so as to cover the front side of the translucent member A642 in the closed state (see FIG. 1288) of the moving members A650 that are arranged close to each other, and in the open state (see B5) of the moving members A650 that are apart from each other. , is disposed so as to recede from the front side of the light-transmitting member A642 so that the light-transmitting member A642 and the decorative member A655 can be visually recognized at the same time.
In other words, the arrangement of the moving member A650 is divided into a state in which only the decorative member A655 is visible and the light emitting effect is performed, and a state in which the transparent member A642 is arranged between the decorative members A655 and the light emitting effect is performed by making them visible at the same time. can be switched accordingly.
The drive transmission unit A660 includes a drive gear A661 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT4 so as not to rotate relative to it, a rotating plate member A662 rotatably supported by a projecting support portion A632 of a plate-like member A630, and a plate-like member A662. A transmission gear A663 that is rotatably supported by the projecting support portion A634 of the member A630 and that interlocks the drive gear A661 and the rotating plate member A662 is provided.
The rotary plate member A662 includes a through hole A662a that allows the protruding support portion A632 to pass therethrough, a pair of fan-shaped plate portions A662b that are fan-shaped around the through hole A662a, and one fan-shaped plate portion. An arc-shaped gear portion A662c in which gear teeth meshing with a transmission gear A663 are formed in the arc-shaped portion of A662b and a position that is rotationally symmetrical about the through hole A662a (in this embodiment, a position shifted by 180 degrees ), a pair of projecting portions A662d projecting in a columnar shape from the front side of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b.

Since the rotating plate member A662 is not a circular disk-shaped member but is formed in a shape that is cut out from a part of a circle, the area where rubbing occurs between the rotating plate member A662 and the plate-like main body A631 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance generated when rotating the rotary plate member A662, so that the driving force required for the drive motor AMT4 can be reduced.
The projecting portion A662d passes through an arcuate hole A633 of the plate member A630 and is inserted into the recessed portion A652c of the moving member A650. That is, the moving member A650 moves along with the change in the arrangement of the projecting part A662d and the change in the arrangement of the recessed part A652c.
The rear cover member A670 includes a plate-like main body A671 having the same outer shape as the frame-like portion A635 of the plate-like member A630 and fastened and fixed to the plate-like member A630, and a plate-like stretch from the right end of the plate-like main body A671. a pair of projecting support portions A673 projecting from the back side of the plate-like main body A671 and supporting the rotating shaft of the rotating member of the guide unit A680; and a plurality of arc-shaped through holes A674 drilled in the plate-shaped main body A671.
The protruding portion A672 is a portion arranged behind the protruding portion A613b (see FIG. 1318) in the effect standby state, and if the opening/closing operation unit A600b is tilted forward, it returns from the protruding state to the effect standby state. In some cases, it functions as a portion that restores the attitude of the opening/closing unit A600b (tilts backward) by receiving a backward load from the projecting portion A613b.

The guide unit A680 includes a box-shaped main body A681 formed in a box-like shape with an open front side, and a pair of upper and lower rollers arranged inside the box-shaped main body A681 and configured to be rotatable by a rotating shaft extending in the horizontal direction. A member A682, a pulley-shaped member A683 in which a pair of upper and lower pulley-shaped members are disposed in a box-shaped main body A681 and configured to be rotatable by a rotating shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a left-right elongated shape. and a long through-hole A684.
Since the roller member A682 is configured to protrude from the through hole A681a of the box-shaped main body A681 to the rear side, the rear surface of the box-shaped main body A681 is arranged to face the plate-shaped main body A611a of the fixed support unit A610 (see FIG. 1318). In this case, the contact relationship with the plate-like main body A611a can be the rolling of the roller member A682 instead of the rubbing of the box-like main body A681. This makes it easier to reduce the resistance received from the fixed support unit A610 when the opening/closing operation unit A600b moves up and down.
A lifting support rod A611c (see FIG. 1318) is arranged between the pulley-shaped members A683 and is passed through the concave portion A681b of the box-shaped main body A681. As a result, the guide unit A680 is guided by the lifting support rod A611c and moves up and down in the vertical direction, so that the movement direction of the opening/closing operation unit A600b can be stabilized.
The elongated through-hole A684 is an elongated hole through which the insertion protrusion A621e (see FIG. 1318) of the rotating member A621 is inserted. That is, the drive force of the drive motor AMT3 (see FIG. 1318) is transmitted to the opening/closing operation unit A600b via the elongated through hole A684.

1322 and 1323 are rear views of the opening/closing operation unit A600b of the third operation unit A600. In FIG. 1322, the opening/closing operation unit A600b in the standby state of the third operation unit A600 is illustrated, and in FIG. 1323, the opening/closing operation unit A600b in the extended state of the third operation unit A600 is illustrated.
In FIGS. 1322 and 1323, the illustration of the rear cover member A670 and the guide unit A680 is omitted for easy understanding, and the arrangement of the circular arc-shaped through-holes A674 of the rear cover member A670 is shown by imaginary lines. The arrangement of the protruding portion A662d of the rotating plate member A662 is illustrated by imaginary lines.
As shown in FIGS. 1322 and 1323, the operating mode of the opening/closing operation unit A600b is that the arrangement of the projecting portion A662d changes along an arc centering on the projecting support portion A632 as the rotating plate member A662 rotates. As a result, the pair of moving members A650 move parallel in opposite directions along the formation directions (parallel directions) of the corresponding guide groove portions A641a (see FIG. 1321) on the upper and lower sides of the projecting support portion A632. That's what it means.
Here, as described above, the body member A651 of the moving member A650 is composed of a pair of members of the same shape that are arranged rotationally symmetrically, and the arrangement of the protruding portion A662d also depends on the rotation of the body member A651. Since the positions are symmetrical about the protruding support portion A632, which is the symmetrical rotation axis, the moving member A650 is affected by the protruding portion A662d in common to the pair of members.

That is, for example, if the rotating plate member A662 rotates at a high speed, the pair of moving members A650 move parallel at a common speed at a high speed, and even if the rotating plate member A662 suddenly reverses (changes the direction of rotation), , the pair of moving members A650 can be reversed at the same time.
The positional relationship between the fan-shaped plate portion A662b of the rotating plate member A662 and the arcuate through-hole A674 of the rear cover member A670 will be described. The overlapping area of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b and the arc-shaped through hole A674 in the front-rear direction changes in the process of rotation of the rotary plate member A662. Air resistance occurs due to the air sandwiched between the fan-shaped plate portion A662b and the back cover member A670, but the air resistance is reduced at the location where the back cover member A670 is formed with the arc-shaped through hole A674. It will be.
In FIG. 1323, the angular width of the arrangement range (see FIG. 1322) of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b of the rotating plate member A662 in the waiting state for rendering of the third operation unit A600 is shown in the first area AE21, and the rotation from the state shown in FIG. The angle width of the arrangement range of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b after the plate member A662 is rotated clockwise in the rear view is illustrated in the second area AE22, and the rotation from the state arranged in the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is shown in the second area AE22. The angular width of the arrangement range of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b after the plate member A662 is rotated clockwise in the rear view is illustrated in the third area AE23, and the fan-shaped plate of the rotary plate member A662 in the extended state of the third operation unit A600. The angular width of the arrangement range of the portion A662b is illustrated by the fourth area AE24.
As shown in FIG. 1322, in this embodiment, one fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged to face at least one arc-shaped through hole A674 regardless of the attitude of the rotary plate member A662. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 1322 (the state in which the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the first region AE21) is the state in which the overlapping area between the fan-shaped plate portion A662b and the arc-shaped through hole A674 is the smallest, that is, the fan-shaped plate portion A662b It is illustrated as the state in which the air resistance applied to is maximized.

In the state of being arranged in the first area AE21, the edge of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b on the clockwise side in the rear view is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the circular arc-shaped through hole A674. Therefore, when the rotating plate member A662 starts to rotate clockwise in the rear view, in addition to the arcuate through holes A674 (the arcuate through holes A674 arranged on the left and right) that originally overlapped with the fan-shaped plate portion A662b, other circular It also begins to overlap with the arc-shaped through holes A674 (arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged above and below), and this state continues until the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the second area AE22.
Since the overlapping area between the arc-shaped through-hole A674 and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b increases as the rotation angle of the rotary plate member A662 increases, air resistance can be gradually reduced from the start of rotation of the rotary plate member A662. It is possible to further reduce the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 as the rotation progresses. As a result, the rotation of the rotating plate member A662 and the movement of the moving member A650 can be performed smoothly.
In the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the second region AE22, the edge portion of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the rear is aligned with the arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged on the left and right sides in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear. positioned to overlap the side edges. That is, when the rotary plate member A662 rotates clockwise in rear view, the edge of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b on the counterclockwise side in rear view enters the arc-shaped through hole A674 in rear view.
Therefore, when the rotary plate member A662 continues to rotate clockwise in the rear view, the overlapping area between the arc-shaped through-hole A674 and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b arranged on the left and right gradually decreases. The overlapping area between the through-hole A674 (arc-shaped through-hole A674 arranged vertically) and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b gradually increases. Since these change by the same angle, in the end, the overlapping area of the circular arc-shaped through hole A674 and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is maintained constant.

This state continues until the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the third area AE23. That is, from the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the second area AE22 to the state where it is arranged in the third area AE23, the air resistance applied to the rotary plate member A662 can be maintained constant.
From the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the third area AE23 to the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the fourth area AE24, the fan-shaped plate portion A662b overlaps with the arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged on the left and right. Since the area gradually decreases, the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 increases as the rotation of the rotating plate member A662 progresses. It can be carried out.
In the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the fourth region AE24, the counterclockwise edge portions of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b are arranged on the left and right sides of the circular arc-shaped through holes A674, which are arranged on the left and right edges of the circular arc-shaped through holes A674. It is considered to be a position that overlaps with the furniture.
Therefore, even when rotating the rotary plate member A662 in the counterclockwise direction in rear view from the state shown in FIG. can produce a change in air resistance similar to

Therefore, regardless of whether the rotary plate member A662 rotates clockwise in the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 1322 or counterclockwise in the rear view from the state shown in FIG. In both directions, it is possible to produce changes in air resistance as described above.
Further, the moving members A650 that are operated by driving force transmission via the rotating plate member A662 are configured in a pair vertically. It is the same regardless of direction.
That is, when the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise in the rear view from the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the rotating plate member A662 rotates counterclockwise in rear view from the state shown in FIG. occurs to the left.
That is, the load applied to the rotating plate member A662 is only reversed in direction, and does not change due to the difference in the direction of rotation. Therefore, regardless of whether the rotary plate member A662 rotates clockwise in the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 1322 or counterclockwise in the rear view from the state shown in FIG. In both directions, the generated motion resistance can be made the same, and the motion speed can be made common.

Next, the light guide plate unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1324 to 1329. FIG. 1324 is an exploded front perspective view of the light guide plate unit A700, and FIG. 1325 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light guide plate unit A700.
As shown in FIGS. 1324 and 1325, the light guide plate unit A700 is a covered light guide plate unit which is held by the back case A210 (see FIG. 1286) and formed in a size that covers most of the front opening of the back case A210. A700a and an auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b fastened and fixed to the left side of the covering light guide plate unit A700a.
The covering light guide plate unit A700a has a plate-shaped light guide plate A701 and a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs for irradiating light toward the light guide plate A701. A702, an upper light emitting substrate A703 having a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs for emitting light toward the light guide plate A701 and disposed above the light guide plate A701, the light guide plate A701, the left light emitting substrate A702, and the upper light emitting substrate A703. A pair of front and rear frame-shaped members A710 are provided to fix the light emitting substrate A703 so as to prevent positional deviation.
The light guide plate A701 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape from a light-transmissive resin material, and has a cutout A701a in the lower right portion. On the back surface of the light guide plate A701, grooves are formed along the contours of illustrations including specific characters, logos, etc., and light is incident on the light guide plate A701 from the left light emitting substrate A702 and the upper light emitting substrate A703. Then, the light is refracted by the groove, and the player can see the line-shaped light along the outline of the specific character or the like.

The left light emitting substrate A702 and the upper light emitting substrate A703 are arranged so that the optical axes of the plurality of LEDs are incident on the end face of the light guide plate A701 at right angles. By configuring the light guide plate A701 in two directions, the above-mentioned line-shaped light can be obtained at least when only the light from the left light emitting substrate A702 is incident and when only the light from the upper light emitting substrate A703 is incident. can be generated.
The frame-shaped member A710 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a notch A701a of the light guide plate A701 from a rectangular frame, and is fastened and fixed to the front end of the outer wall A212 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 1286). Left and right fixed parts A711, a pair of lower fixed parts A712 fastened and fixed to the right side member A615 and the left side member A617 of the third motion unit A600 (see FIG. 1286), and the support member A421 of the first motion unit A400 (see FIG. 1294). ) in the front-rear direction.
The abutment support portion A713 is arranged between the vertically arranged belts A423a (see FIG. 1296). Since the connecting mechanism A427 is arranged on the upper belt A423a, by arranging the contact support part A713 at a position closer to the lower belt A423a, the movement of the connecting mechanism A427 is not hindered, and the frame-shaped The rigidity of the support member A421 can be used to support the contact support portion A713 of the member A710.
FIG. 1326 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, and FIG. 1327 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b. The auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b includes a plate-shaped light-emitting substrate A720 on which LEDs are arranged on the front and back surfaces, and a plate-shaped light-emitting substrate A720 made of a light-transmitting resin material that can receive light emitted from the LEDs of the light-emitting substrate A720. A front side plate member A730 is disposed on the front side of the light emitting substrate A720 so as to form a plate-like member made of a light-transmitting resin material and emits light so as to be able to receive light emitted from the LED of the light emitting substrate A720. a rear plate member A740 disposed on the back side of the substrate A720, a front cover member A750 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and disposed so as to sandwich the front plate member A730 between the light-emitting substrate A720; Prepare.

The light emitting substrate A720 includes a plate-like main body A721 elongated vertically, a plurality of bulging plate portions A722 formed so as to bulge rightward from the plate-like main body A721 in an arc shape, and the bulging plate portions A722. A plurality of recessed portions A723 recessed in the left side of the plate-like main body A721 at positions corresponding to and a plurality of highly directional light emitting means such as LEDs arranged vertically on the front side of the plate-like main body A721 A plurality of front light emitting portions A724 whose optical axis is directed leftward, and positions on the back side of the plate-like body A721 corresponding to the front light emitting portions A724 (positions moved in parallel on the arrow F-B) are vertically aligned. A plurality of rear light-emitting portions A725, which are light-emitting means such as LEDs with low directivity arranged side by side and whose optical axes are directed leftward, are provided.
Since the bulging plate portions A722 are formed at a plurality of positions in the vertical direction, it is possible to ensure a large supporting area (area in surface contact with each other) between the front side plate member A730 or the rear side plate member A740 and the light emitting substrate A720. . This makes it possible to stabilize the posture of the light emitting substrate A720 in the assembled state.
Light from the front light emitting portion A724 is received by the front side plate member A730. Since the optical axes of the light from the plurality of front light emitting portions A724 are directed leftward and parallel to each other, the front side plate member A730 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.
Light from the rear light emitting portion A725 is received by the rear side plate member A740. The optical axes of the light from the plurality of rear light emitting portions A725 are directed leftward and parallel to each other, so that the rear plate member A740 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

As described above, the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725 are arranged at corresponding positions in the front-rear direction. It is possible to correspond to the illuminated range of the rear side plate member A740.
As a result, when both the front light-emitting portion A724 and the rear light-emitting portion A725 are caused to emit light, the lights of the front light-emitting portion A724 and the rear light-emitting portion A725 of the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 are combined. The illuminated range can be visually recognized brighter.
On the other hand, even when one side of the front light-emitting portion A724 or the rear light-emitting portion A725 is illuminated, the bright portions of the front side plate member A730 or the rear side plate member A740 are not misaligned. can be made difficult.
Since the range brightly illuminated by the front light emitting part A724 or the rear light emitting part A725 is the same, for example, even if the state in which only the front light emitting part A724 is lit is changed to the state in which only the rear light emitting part A725 is lit, , it is possible to avoid a change in the two-dimensional light and dark pattern of light received by the player (pattern indicating which positions are brighter and which positions are darker when viewed from the front). As a result, it is possible to reduce the fatigue time of the player.

The front side plate member A730 consists of a plate-like main body A731 whose front side surface is formed as a smooth surface, and the rear side surface of the plate-like main body A731 formed along the outline of the shape of an illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. A line-shaped groove A732 formed on the plate-shaped main body A731 and a female screw formed on the front end of the plate-shaped main body A731 protruding in a columnar shape are screwed into the screw to be fastened and fixed to the frame-shaped member A710 (see FIG. 1324). a plurality of fastening portions A733, insertion through-holes A734 drilled circularly for fastening and fixing with the front cover member A750, and vertically elongated long holes for alignment with the front cover member A750 and an alignment slot A735 drilled in the .
When light from the front light emitting portion A724 is received by the front side plate member A730, the light is refracted by the linear groove portion A732, so that the outline of the shape illustrated above is visually recognized as a bright line.
The rear plate member A740 includes a plate-like main body A741 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and having the same shape as the front plate member A730 when viewed from the front, and a plate having the same shape as the plate-like main body A741 when viewed from the front. A light-impermeable (or low-transmittance) white sheet A742 disposed on the back side of the plate-like body A741 and a sheet A742 having the same shape as the plate-like body A741 when viewed from the front and disposed on the front side of the plate-like body A741. A light-transmitting thin resin plate A743 provided, and first through holes A741a and A742a formed at the same position so as to penetrate the plate-like main body A741, the sheet A742 and the thin resin plate A743 in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner. A743a, and second through holes A741b, A742b, and A743b formed at the same positions so as to penetrate the plate-like main body A741, the sheet A742, and the thin resin plate A743 in the front-rear direction in the lower part.
The plate-like main body A741 has a smooth surface on the front side surface, and countless textures on the back side surface. As a result, of the light received by the plate-like main body A741, when the light that escapes to the back side is reflected by the sheet A742, the light is diffused by countless grains and surface-emitted. This makes it possible to efficiently brighten the rear side portion of the plate-like main body A741.

The thin resin plate A743 is drawn with an illustration that is the source of the outline of the linear groove portion A732, and in this embodiment, is painted in a color corresponding to the illustration. Therefore, when the light from the back light-emitting portion A725 is received by the rear plate member A740, the illustration drawn on the thin resin plate A743 is brightly visible as surface light emission due to the texture on the back side of the plate-like main body A741.
The front cover member A750 includes a plate-like main body A751 having a number of hemispherical projections formed on the back side, and a plate-like plate extending from the upper edge and the right edge of the plate-like main body A751 to the back side. A fastening portion A753 composed of a projecting portion used for alignment of the light emitting substrate A720 and a female screw portion used for fastening at the left end portion of the plate-like main body A751, and a plate-like main body A plurality of cylindrical fastening portions A754 projecting from the right end portion of A751 to the back side in a columnar shape, a projecting portion A755 having a smaller diameter and a shorter projecting length than the cylindrical fastening portion A754, and a front side and a light-transmissive decorative seal A756 that is decorated and attached to the front side of the plate-like main body A751.
In assembly, the protruding portion A755 is inserted into the alignment elongated hole A735 of the front side plate member A730, and the cylindrical fastening portion A754 is inserted into the insertion through hole of the front side plate member A730, so that the front side plate member A730 is attached to the front cover. It can be aligned with member A750.
Further, the light emitting substrate A720 is aligned with the fastening portion A753 so as to overlap the front side plate member A730, and the rear side plate member A740 is arranged so as to overlap the light emitting substrate A720. At this time, the cylindrical fastening portion A754 is inserted through the first through holes A741a, A742a, and A743a of the rear plate member A740, and the lower right fastening portion A733 of the front plate member A730 is inserted into the second through holes A741b and A741b of the rear plate member A740. By inserting through A742b and A743b, the rear side plate member A740 can be aligned with the front side plate member A730.

When the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is fastened to the covering light guide plate unit A700a (see FIG. 1324) with the front plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear plate member A740 aligned with the front cover member A750, the front plate A pressing force (fastening force) is applied to the fastening portion A733 of the member A730 and the cylindrical fastening portion A754 of the front cover member A750.
In this embodiment, the fastening portion A733 and the columnar fastening portion A754 are arranged outside the light emitting substrate A720, so even if the pressing force (fastening force) is unintentionally excessive during assembly, Also, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the light emitting substrate A720 is cracked or damaged.
The front side plate member A730, the rear side plate member A740 and the front cover member A750 are aligned and the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 are aligned with respect to the light emitting substrate A720 by the cylindrical fastening portion A754 arranged on the upper right of the front cover member A750. Pressing (pressing) can be performed at one point. As a result, the man-hours for assembly can be reduced.
1328 is a rear view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, FIG. 1329(a) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b along line MCDXVIa-MCDXVIa in FIG. 1328, and FIG. is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b along line MCDXVIb-MCDXVIb of FIG. FIG. 1329(a) shows a cross section passing through the center of the cylindrical fastening portion A754.

When assembling the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, after the front side plate member A730 is aligned and assembled to the front cover member A750, female threads of the fastening portion A753 are formed when the light emitting substrate A720 is assembled to the front cover member A750. The height (front-rear direction position) of the end surface of the fastening portion and the rear side surface of the front side plate member A730 with which the bulging plate portion A722 abuts is matched, and the posture of the light emitting substrate A720 is stabilized. It's like
Furthermore, when the rear plate member A740 is assembled from the rear of the light emitting substrate A720, the front side surface of the rear plate member A740 comes into contact with the bulging plate portion A722 over a wide area, thereby stabilizing the posture of the rear plate member A740 and localizing it. It is intended to reduce the overall load.
As shown in FIGS. 1328 and 1329(a), the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 are formed so as to have the same overlapping shape with the light emitting substrate A720. The pressing force of the tightening screw is transmitted to the light emitting substrate A720 in a balanced manner through the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740. Since it is possible to prevent the pressing force from functioning as a force that shears the light emitting substrate A720, cracking or chipping of the light emitting substrate A720 can be avoided.
The front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 press the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 against the front and back surfaces of the light emission substrate A720 by applying pressure to the edge of the light emission substrate A720 from the front side plate member A730 and rear side plate member A740.

As a result, by accurately aligning the front and rear plate members A730 and A740 with respect to the plate-like body A721 of the light emitting substrate A720, the front and rear plate members A730 with respect to the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear side with respect to the rear light emitting portion A725 can be positioned. Since the front and rear positions of the side plate member A740 can be easily aligned, the light receiving positions of the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 can be easily aligned.
The columnar fastening portion A754 is disposed at a position (intermediate position) that does not overlap the optical axes of the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725. As a result, the cylindrical fastening part A754 does not block the optical axis of the light from the front light emitting part A724 that is received by the front side plate member A730, so that the performance effect of the light emission performance using the front side plate member A730 is improved. can be done.
FIG. 1329(b) is illustrated as a cross section passing through the center of the third rear light emitter A725 from the bottom. As shown in FIGS. 1328 and 1329(b), the fastening portion A733 is arranged at a position overlapping the optical axis of the rear light emitting portion A725.
Even when the fastening portion A733 is arranged in this way, the fastening portion A733 does not penetrate the front side plate member A730 and does not block the light from the front light emitting portion A724. In addition, since the directivity of the light received by the rear plate member A740 is slightly lowered in order to cause the rear plate member A740 to emit surface light (because LEDs with low directivity are likely to be selected), the fastening portion is positioned on the optical axis. Even if A733 is arranged, the light is not completely blocked, so that the effect on the lighting effect can be reduced. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the fastening portion A733 of the front side plate member A730 without lowering the effect of the lighting effect using the rear side plate member A740.

In fastening and fixing the rear plate member A740 to the front cover member A750, the front side surface of the plate-like main body A741 is fastened and fixed so that the left edge of the thin resin plate A743 is sandwiched between the rear side surface of the plate-like main body A721. This prevents the thin resin plate A743 from rising from the plate-like main body A741.
In this case, the load applied to the thin resin plate A743 is not a load that occurs at a point like a fastening screw, but a line ( surface), the pressing force per unit area applied to the thin resin plate A743 can be reduced. This makes it easier to avoid cracking or chipping of the thin resin plate A743.
As shown in FIGS. 1329(a) and 1329(b), the traveling path AL1 of the irradiation light from the front light emitting portion A724 selected from LEDs with high directivity is received by the front side plate member A730, and then forward. The light is totally reflected by the front and rear surfaces of the side plate member A730 and extends in the horizontal direction until it reaches the linear groove A732.
Therefore, when the front side plate member A730 is visually recognized from the front side, when light is emitted from the front light emitting portion A724, light directed toward the front side from the linear groove portion A732 reaches the player's eyes. It is possible to visually recognize the outline of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc., as the original shape of the groove portion A732, as if it were shining.

Since the light from the rear light emitting portion A725 has a lower directivity than the light from the front light emitting portion A724, the light from the rear light emitting portion A725 is not totally reflected inside the rear side plate member A740. , to uniformly illuminate the rear plate member A740.
As shown in FIG. 1329, the end portion of the front plate member A730 on the side of the front light emitting portion A724 and the end portion of the rear plate member A740 on the side of the rear light emitting portion A725 correspond to the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725 of the light emitting substrate A720. It is arranged closer to the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725 than the end portion on the irradiation direction side (right side).
As a result, the plate-shaped main body A721 of the light emitting substrate A720 can be used as a shield plate, so that the light emitted from the front light emitting portion A724 (rear light emitting portion A725) is received by the front plate member A730 (rear plate member A740). You can avoid leaking before it is done. This makes it easier to avoid, for example, a situation in which the light emitted from the front light emitting part A724 is received by the rear side plate member A740, or the situation in which the light emitted from the rear light emitting part A725 is received by the front side plate member A730. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid that the lighting performance becomes defective.
When receiving light from the front side, the plate-like main body A751 diffuses the light from the front side by countless hemispherical protruding portions A751a formed on the back side to emit surface light. As a result, the effect of light production can be improved, and the visibility of the back side of the front cover member A750 can be lowered, so that it can be used as a blindfold for the light emitting substrate A720.

The front light emitting portion A724 of the light emitting substrate A720 is disposed on the back side of the plate-like main body A751. Since the light is incident on A730 and is totally reflected in the front side plate member A730, the plate-like main body A751 is configured so that it is difficult to be illuminated by the light emitted from the front light emitting portion A724. There are some things that are difficult.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, received light can be diffused by a myriad of hemispherical projections A751a formed on the back side of the plate-like main body A751. It can be seen in bright conditions.
Furthermore, a decorative sticker A756 having a shape that covers the entire front side surface of the plate-like main body A751 is attached to the front side of the plate-like main body A751, thereby forming countless projecting portions on the back side of the plate-like main body A751 by light. The shape of A751a can reduce the conspicuous effect and improve the visibility of the decoration on the front side of the brightly lit decorative seal A756.
FIGS. 1330(a) to 1330(f) are schematic front views of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, which schematically show visual recognition modes of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b. For convenience of explanation, the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is shown in a rectangular outer shape, and the triangular illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 are shown inside thereof. The triangular illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 correspond to examples of outlines of illustrations including specific characters, logos, etc. formed by the thin resin plate A743 and the linear grooves A732 (see FIG. 1327).

In FIGS. 1330(a) to 1330(f), the difference in lighting or extinguishing of the front light emitting part A724 (see FIG. 1326) and the difference in lighting or extinguishing of the rear light emitting part A725 (see FIG. 1327), the auxiliary light guide plate An example of the difference in appearance of the unit A700b is illustrated.
FIG. 1330(a) illustrates a case where the front light emitter A724 (see FIG. 1326) is turned off and the rear light emitter A725 (see FIG. 1327) is turned off. In this case, illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 are visible.
FIG. 1330(b) illustrates a case where the front light emitter A724 (see FIG. 1326) is turned off and the rear light emitter A725 (see FIG. 1327) is turned on. In this case, the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 are visible under illumination.
FIG. 1330(c) illustrates a case where the front light emitting portion A724 (see FIG. 1326) is turned on and the rear light emitting portion A725 (see FIG. 1327) is turned off. In this case, the contours of the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed in the linear groove A732 (see FIG. 1327) are illuminated and visually recognized as linear light. In this case, the shapes of the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 are blocked by the line-shaped light, resulting in reduced visibility.

FIG. 1330(d) illustrates a case where the front light emitting portion A724 (see FIG. 1326) is lit and the rear light emitting portion A725 (see FIG. 1327) is lit. In this case, the brightness of the front side portion of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b can be improved more than the state illustrated in FIG. 1330(c).
In FIG. 1330(e), the front light emitting portion A724 (see FIG. 1326) above the upper and lower half positions of the plate-like main body A721 is turned off, and the front light emitting portion A724 below the upper and lower half positions of the plate-like main body A721 is turned off. 1327) above the top and bottom halves of the plate-like main body A721 are lit, and the back light-emitting portions A725 (see FIG. 1327) below the top and bottom halves of the plate-like main body A721 are turned on. ) is turned off.
In this case, in the upper half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the illustration AIL1 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 is visible in the illuminated state. In the lower half, the outline of the shape of illustration AIL2 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed in linear groove A732 (see FIG. 1327) is illuminated and visually recognized as linear light.
In FIG. 1330(f), the front light emitting portion A724 (see FIG. 1326) above the upper and lower half positions of the plate-like main body A721 is lit, and the front light emitting portion A724 below the upper and lower half positions of the plate-like main body A721 is turned on. A case is illustrated in which the light is turned off and the rear light emitting portion A725 (see FIG. 1327) is turned off.

In this case, in the upper half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the outline of the shape of the illustration AIL1 including the specific character, logo, etc. formed in the linear groove A732 (see FIG. 1327) is illuminated, and the linear light In the lower half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, an illustration AIL2 including specific characters, logos, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 is visible.
As shown in FIGS. 1330(a) to 1330(f), in this embodiment, the front side of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b can be viewed from the front side by lighting, turning off the front light emitting portion A724 (see FIG. 1326), and the rear side. It can be changed according to variations of the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting portion A725 (see FIG. 1327).
1331 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, and FIG. 1332 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13. As shown in FIGS. 1331 and 1332, the game board A13 has a center frame A86 fastened and fixed to the window portion A60a of the base plate A60 from the front side so that game balls can flow down the left and right sides of the center frame A86. It is configured.
The game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a projecting portion for branching the flow of game balls. A guide member A802 arranged on the right front side of the center frame A86, formed in a shape constituting two guide channels provided side by side as channels for guiding the flow of the game ball from the material, and its guide. Below the member A802, the downstream side is formed in a shape constituting two guiding channels arranged side by side as channels for guiding the downflow of the game ball from the light-transmitting resin material fixed to the base plate A60. A guide member A803 and an auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 arranged on the back side of a light transmissive decorative member A808 arranged inside a center frame A86 and configured to irradiate the decorative member A808 with light. .

The downstream branching member A801 is arranged in front of the region inside the window portion A60a when the center frame A86 is arranged on the base plate A60. In this case, light traveling from the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to the downstream branching member A801 does not pass through the base plate A60, but passes through the center frame A86, which is thinner than the base plate A60, to reach the downstream branching member A801. , the attenuation of light reaching the downstream branching member A801 can be suppressed.
The guide member A802 includes a plate-like main body A802a formed in a shape that covers the upper right region A60b of the window portion A60a of the base plate A60 from the front side, and a pair of plate-like members extending from the plate-like main body A802a to the front side. Equipped with an extension plate A802b and a plurality of deceleration protrusions A802c projecting from the plate-like main body A802a or the extension plate A802b for decelerating the game ball, and fastened to the base plate A60 at upper and lower positions of the upper right area A60b. Fixed.
On the back side of the guide member A802, an auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged with an overhang plate portion A86a of a center frame A86, which is housed in the upper right region A60b and is thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate A60, in between. . In this case, light traveling from the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to the guide member A802 does not pass through the base plate A60, but reaches the guide member A802 through the projecting plate portion A86a of the center frame A86, which is thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate A60. Therefore, attenuation of light reaching the guide member A802 can be suppressed.
The deceleration projection A802c is projected from both of the pair of extension plates A802b facing each other in the left flow path, thereby swinging the falling game ball to the left and right. The right flow path protrudes from the right extended plate A802b and forward from the plate-like main body A802a, so that the flowing down game ball can be swung in the left-right and back-and-forth directions.

In this way, the game ball flowing down the two flow paths formed by the guide member A802 is both decelerated by the deceleration protrusion A802c, but the manner of flow depends on which flow path it flows down. different. As a result, the player can immediately grasp in which channel the game ball is flowing by looking at the flowing state of the game ball.
Further, with this configuration, there is no need to form a deceleration projection on the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 1283), so the outer edge member 73 can be configured as a common component. As a result, the cost of the product can be reduced.
In this embodiment, since the guide member A802 constitutes two flow paths having a width wider than that of one flow path, a strength problem is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extension plate A802b forming the flow path is arranged in the center of the plate-like main body A802a and also serves as a reinforcing material for the guide member A802. As a result, even if the guide member A802 is configured as a thin member, it is possible to easily avoid insufficient strength.
The downstream guide member A803 includes a plate-like main body A803a and an extension plate A803b extending from the rear surface of the plate-like main body A803a, and the front-rear relationship between them is opposite to that of the guide member A802.

Unlike the two channels formed by the guide member A802, the two guide channels formed by the downstream guide member A803 have different channel shapes on the left and right. That is, the left flow path is a flow path that slopes downward to the left, while the right flow path is formed as a path that meanders left and right. As a result, depending on which flow path the game ball flows down, the manner in which the game ball flows can be greatly changed.
FIG. 1333 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, and FIG. 1334 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810. The auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 includes a set of plate-shaped front light-emitting substrates A820 on which LEDs are arranged on the front surface, a set of plate-shaped rear light-emitting substrates A830 on which LEDs are arranged on the back surface, and a light-transmissive A front side plate member A840 formed in a plate shape from a resin material and disposed on the front side of the front light emitting substrate A820 so as to be able to receive light emitted from the LED of the front light emitting substrate A820; A rear plate member A850 formed from a material into a plate shape and arranged on the back side of the rear light emitting substrate A830 so as to be able to receive light emitted from the LEDs of the rear light emitting substrate A830; and a base member A860 formed of a resin material and disposed so as to sandwich the rear plate member A850 between itself and the rear emission substrate A830.
The front emission substrate A820 includes an upper substrate A821 arranged on the upper side and a right substrate A825 arranged on the right side. The upper substrate A821 includes a plate-like main body A822, a plurality of edge light-emitting units A823 which are light-emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower right corner on the front side of the plate-like main body A822 and whose optical axis is directed to the right, A plurality of surface light emitting portions A824, which are light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the left side of the edge light emitting portion A823 and whose optical axes face the front side, are provided.
Light from the edge light-emitting portion A823 is received by the front side plate member A840. The optical axes of the light from the plurality of edge light emitting portions A823 are directed rightward and parallel to the front plane of the front side plate member A840, so that the front side plate member A840 can be illuminated over a wide range.

Furthermore, the edge light-emitting part A823 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED is not directed directly to the right, but is directed radially so that the distance between the optical axes widens toward the right. . As a result, the light from the edge light-emitting portion A823 can be guided over a wide range of the front side plate member A840.
The light from the surface light emitting portion A824 is received by the decorative member A808 (see FIG. 1331) arranged on the front side. Since the optical axes of the light from the plurality of surface light emitting portions A824 face the front side and are parallel to each other, the decorative member A808 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide area.
The right substrate A825 includes a plate-like main body A826, a plurality of edge light-emitting units A827 which are light-emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the upper left corner on the front side of the plate-like main body A826 and whose optical axes are directed upward, A plurality of surface light-emitting portions A828, which are light-emitting means such as LEDs and the like arranged below the edge light-emitting portion A827 and whose optical axes face the front side, are provided.
Light from the edge light emitting portion A827 is received by the front side plate member A840. The optical axes of the light from the plurality of edge light-emitting portions A827 face upward and are parallel to the front plane of the front side plate member A840, so that the front side plate member A840 can be illuminated in a wide range.

Furthermore, the edge light emitting part A827 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED is not directed upward, but is directed radially such that the distance between the optical axes widens upward. . As a result, light from the edge light-emitting portion A827 can be guided to a wide range of the front side plate member A840.
Light from the edge light emitting portion A823 of the upper substrate A821 is received from the left end of the front plate member A840, while light from the edge light emitting portion A827 is received from the lower end of the front plate member A840. Even if the front plate member A840 has a constricted shape with a constricted portion A844 on the central side in a front view, light can easily reach the entire front plate member A840.
The light from the surface light emitting portion A828 is received by the decorative member A808 (see FIG. 1331) arranged on the front side. Since the optical axes of the light from the plurality of surface light emitting portions A828 face the front side and are parallel to each other, the decorative member A808 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.
The rear emission substrate A830 includes an upper substrate A831 arranged on the upper side and a right substrate A835 arranged on the right side. The upper substrate A831 includes a plate-like main body A832, a plurality of edge light-emitting units A833, which are light-emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower right corner on the back side of the plate-like main body A832 and whose optical axis is directed to the right, Prepare.

Light from the edge light emitting portion A833 is received by the rear plate member A850. The optical axes of the light from the plurality of edge light emitting portions A833 are directed rightward and parallel to the front plane of the rear plate member A850, so that the rear plate member A850 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.
Furthermore, the edge light-emitting portion A833 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED is not directed directly to the right, but is directed radially so that the distance between the optical axes widens toward the right. . As a result, the light from the edge light-emitting portion A833 can be guided over a wide range of the rear plate member A850.
The right substrate A835 includes a plate-like main body A836, a plurality of edge light-emitting units A837 which are light-emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the upper left corner on the front side of the plate-like main body A836 and whose optical axes are directed upward, Prepare.
Light from the edge light emitting portion A837 is received by the rear plate member A850. The optical axes of the light from the plurality of edge light emitting portions A837 face upward and are parallel to the front plane of the rear plate member A850, so that the rear plate member A850 can be illuminated uniformly over a wide range.

Furthermore, the edge light-emitting portion A837 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axes of the LEDs are not directed directly upward, but are directed radially so that the intervals between the optical axes widen upward. . As a result, the light from the edge light-emitting portion A837 can be guided over a wide range of the rear plate member A850.
Light from the edge light emitting portion A833 of the upper substrate A831 is received from the left end of the rear plate member A850, while light from the edge light emitting portion A837 is received from the lower end of the rear plate member A850. Even if the rear side plate member A850 has a constricted shape at the center side in a front view, light can easily reach the entire area of the rear side plate member A850.
The edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting board A820 and the edge light emitting parts A833 and A837 of the rear light emitting board A830 are arranged at corresponding positions in the front-rear direction (positions moved in parallel along the arrow F-B). Therefore, the range of the front plate member A840 illuminated by the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 can be matched with the range of the rear plate member A850 illuminated by the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837.
As a result, when both the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 and the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 are caused to emit light, their lights are combined to form the front side plate member A840. And the range illuminated by the edge light-emitting portions A823 and A827 or the edge light-emitting portions A833 and A837 in the rear plate member A850 can be visually recognized brighter.

On the other hand, even when one side of the edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting board A820 or the edge light emitting parts A833 and A837 of the rear light emitting board A830 is made to emit light, the bright part of the front plate member A840 or the rear plate member A850 is Since there is no positional deviation, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity in the presentation.
Since the areas illuminated brightly by the edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting board A820 or the edge light emitting parts A833 and A837 of the rear light emitting board A830 are the same, for example, only the edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting board A820 are illuminated. Even if only the edge light-emitting portions A833 and A837 of the rear light-emitting board A830 are made to emit light from the light-emitting state, the flat pattern of light and darkness received by the player (which position is brighter when viewed from the front, It is possible to avoid changing the pattern of which positions are darkened. As a result, it is possible to reduce the fatigue time of the player.
The front side plate member A840 consists of a plate-like main body A841 whose front side surface is formed as a smooth surface, and the rear side surface of the plate-like main body A841 formed along the outline of the shape of an illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. an insertion through hole A843 drilled circularly for fastening and fixing with the base member A860; a constricted portion A844 formed so that the midsection of the plate-like main body A841 is constricted; Prepare.
When the light from the edge light-emitting portions A823 and A827 of the front light-emitting substrate A820 is received by the front side plate member A840, the light is refracted by the linear groove portion A842, so that the outline of the shape illustrated above is visually recognized as a line. be done.

The shape of the plate-like main body A841 having the constricted portion A844 is a shape resulting from matching the shape of the original illustration of the linear groove portion A842. That is, since the shape of the line-like light is visible in the entire area of the plate-like main body A841, it is possible to prevent the plate-like main body A841 from creating unnecessary parts in the performance.
The rear plate member A850 includes a plate-like main body A851 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and having the same shape as the front plate member A840 when viewed from the front, and a plate having the same shape as the plate-like main body A851 when viewed from the front. A light-transmissive thin resin plate A855 disposed on the front side of the shaped body A851, and a first through hole formed at the same position so as to penetrate the plate-shaped body A851 and the thin resin plate A855 in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner. Holes A851a and A855a and second through holes A851b and A855b formed at the same positions so as to penetrate the plate-like main body A851 and the thin resin plate A855 in the front-rear direction in the lower part are provided.
The plate-like main body A851 includes a constricted portion A852 formed in a shape similar to the constricted portion A844 at a position corresponding to the constricted portion A844 of the front side plate member A840. Numerous grains are formed. As a result, of the light received by the plate-like main body A851, when the light that escapes to the back side is reflected by the white base member A860, the light is diffused by countless grains and surface-emitted. This makes it possible to efficiently brighten the rear side portion of the plate-like main body A851.
The plate-shaped main body A851 has a constricted portion A852, and light received from one side of the constricted portion A852 easily travels within a range limited by the width of the constricted portion A852 after passing through the constricted portion A852. In the case where both sides of the constricted portion A852 are wider than the width of the constricted portion A852, as in the plate-shaped main body A851 of the present embodiment, light received from one side of the constricted portion A852 is reflected by the plate-shaped main body A851. It is difficult to spread all over the world.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the light from the edge light emitting portion A833 is received by the plate-like main body A851 above the constricted portion A852, and the light from the edge light emitting portion A837 is received by the plate-like main body A851 below the constricted portion A852. light is received over the entire area of the plate-like main body A851 compared to the case where light is received only from above or below the constricted portion A852 while adopting the constricted portion A852. make it possible to This makes it possible to efficiently brighten the entire area of the plate-like main body A851.
The thin resin plate A855 is drawn with an illustration that is the source of the outline of the linear groove portion A842, and in this embodiment, is painted in a color corresponding to the illustration. Therefore, when light from the edge light-emitting portions A833 and A837 of the rear light-emitting substrate A830 is received by the rear plate member A850, the illustration drawn on the thin resin plate A855 is surface-emitting due to the texture on the rear side of the plate-like main body A851. is bright and visible.
The base member A860 is a member made of a white resin material, and is a plate-like main body A861 formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and the rear side plate member A850 supported by the plate-like main body A861 are aligned. , a fastening portion A863 to which the rear side plate member A850 is fastened and fixed, a substrate fastening portion A864 to which the rear light emitting substrate A830 is aligned and fastened and fixed, and a plate-like main body A861 on the front side. A base portion A865 formed in a shape, and a columnar fastening portion A866 having a female screw formed at the tip and projecting from the front surface of the plate-like main body A861 at a height that matches the front side surface of the base portion A865, A sandwiched fastening portion projecting from the front of the plate-like main body A861 in a columnar shape and having a female screw formed at the tip thereof, which is longer than the projecting length of the cylindrical fastening portion A866 by the thickness of the front light emitting substrate A820 in the projecting direction. A867;
The auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is assembled by fastening and fixing the rear plate member A850, the rear light emitting substrate A830, the front light emitting substrate A820, and the front plate member A840 to the base member A860 in this order.

First, fastening and fixing of the rear side plate member A850 to the base member A860 will be described. The rear side plate member A850 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 by fastening screws inserted through the plate-like main body A851 in a state in which the first through-holes A851a and the second through-holes A851b are inserted into the corresponding positioning protrusions A862. It is performed by being screwed into the portion A863.
At this time, the fastening screw is inserted through the plate-like main body A851, but not through the thin resin plate A855. Therefore, by inserting the first through-hole A855a and the second through-hole A855b into the corresponding alignment protrusion A862 while the plate-like main body A851 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860, the base member A860 and the plate-like main body A851 are inserted. It is possible to easily align the thin resin plate A855 with respect to.
Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the thin resin plate A855 is cracked due to the pressing force at the time of fastening. It is also possible to replace the thin resin plate A855 while maintaining the fastening of the plate-like main body A851.
Next, fastening and fixing of the rear emission substrate A830 to the base member A860 will be described. The fastening and fixing of the rear emission substrate A830 to the base member A860 is performed by fastening and fixing the rear emission substrate A830 to the substrate fastening portion A864.

The board fastening portions A864 are inserted through the through holes A853 of the rear plate member A850, respectively, and thus function as alignment of the rear plate member A850 with respect to the base member A860.
In fastening and fixing the rear emission substrate A830 to the base member A860, the rear side surface of the plate-like main body A832 of the upper substrate A831 is fastened so that the left edge of the thin resin plate A855 is sandwiched between the front side surface of the plate-like main body A851. The back side of the plate-like main body A836 of the right substrate A835 is fastened and fixed so that the lower right edge of the thin resin plate A855 is sandwiched between the front side of the plate-like main body A851, thereby forming a thin resin plate. A855 is prevented from rising from the plate-like main body A851.
In this case, the load applied to the thin resin plate A855 is not a point load like a fastening screw, but a line (surface) load along the left edge. The pressing force per hit can be reduced. This makes it easier to avoid cracking or chipping of the thin resin plate A855.
As described above, in fastening and fixing the rear emission substrate A830, the rear side surface of the plate-like main body A832 is configured to abut on the front side surface of the rear plate member A850, so that edge emission of the rear emission substrate A830 The optical axes of the portions A833 and A837 and the rear plate member A850 can be easily aligned in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the front side surface of the rear plate member A850 faces). As a result, the light reception to the rear side plate member A850 can be improved.

Next, fastening and fixing of the front emission substrate A820 to the base member A860 will be described. The front light emitting board A820 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 by fastening the front light emitting board A820 to the columnar fastening portion A866 while the lower left portion of the rear side surface of the front light emitting board A820 is in contact with the base portion A865. It is done by being fixed.
The front light-emitting substrate A820 and the rear light-emitting substrate A830 are arranged parallel to each other, and a space is provided between them, so that the front light-emitting substrate A820, the rear light-emitting substrate A830, and the rear plate member A850 are arranged. is configured so that no pressing force is generated between
Next, fastening and fixing of the front side plate member A840 to the base member A860 will be described. Fastening and fixing of the front side plate member A840 to the base member A860 is performed by fastening and fixing the front side plate member A840 to the sandwiched fastening portion A867.
Since the sandwiched fastening portion A867 is arranged outside and in the vicinity of the sandwiched fastening portion A820, the pressing force generated when fastening and fixing to the sandwiched fastening portion A867 is applied to the sandwiched fastening portion A820 as a point load. can be avoided. As a result, cracking or chipping of the front light emitting substrate A820 can be prevented.

The front side plate member A840 is formed with a through hole A845 for securing the arrangement position of the LED such as the edge light emitting part A823 arranged on the front light emitting board A820. is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 so as to press the plate-like main bodies A822 and A826 of the front light emitting substrate A820 with the surface. As a result, the plate-like main bodies A822 and A826 of the front emission substrate A820 can be used to increase the support area of the front side plate member A840.
In fastening and fixing the front side plate member A840 to the base member A860, the rear side surface of the plate-like main body A841 of the front side plate member A840 is configured to be in surface contact with the front side surface of the front light emitting board A820. It is possible to easily align the optical axis of the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of A820 with the front side plate member A840 in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the front side surface of the front side plate member A840 faces). As a result, the light reception to the rear side plate member A850 can be improved.
As described above, the front light emitting board A820, the rear light emitting board A830, the front plate member A840 and the rear plate member A850 are respectively aligned and fastened to respective components formed on the base member A860. This facilitates alignment of the front light emitting substrate A820, the rear light emitting substrate A830, the front plate member A840, and the rear plate member A850 in the direction parallel to the front side surface of the base member A860.
Further, even in the case where the substrates are composed of a set of the front light emitting substrate A820 and the rear light emitting substrate A830 arranged in front and back, the front side plate member A840 or the rear side plate member A850 corresponding to the member for receiving light, By fastening and fixing so as to abut on each other in the front-rear direction, alignment of the front light-emitting substrate A820, the rear light-emitting substrate A830, the front side plate member A840, and the rear side plate member A850 in the direction crossing the front side surface of the base member A860 can be easily performed. be able to.

1335 is a front view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, and FIG. 1336 is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 along line MCDXXIII-MCDXXIII in FIG. In FIG. 1335, the outer shape of the decorative member A808 and the outer shape of the upper right region A60b (see FIG. 1331) are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the portion of the outer shape of the front light emitting substrate A820 that overlaps the front side plate member A840 is illustrated by hidden lines. At 1336, a cross section through the center of a cylindrical fastening portion A866 (see FIG. 1333) located on the central side of the base member A860 is illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1335, the front light-emitting substrate A820 is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of the decorative member A808 when viewed from the front. The member A840 is arranged so as to protrude from the decorative member A808 in a front view.
As a result, the front-to-rear thickness of the entire auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 can be suppressed while the front light emitting substrate A820 is hidden by the decorative member A808. That is, when the light emitting substrate is placed on the back side of the front plate member A840 of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to perform the light emitting effect of the front plate member A840, the light emitting substrate is separated by an appropriate distance to cause the front plate member A840 to emit light. Since it is necessary to arrange the , the front and rear width of the unit is increased, and the space for arranging the action accessory behind it is reduced.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front light emitting substrate A820 is not placed behind the front plate member A840, but shifted in the left-right or front-rear direction with respect to the front plate member A840. Since the front-to-rear width of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 can be shortened, a sufficient space for arranging the action accessory can be secured behind the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810.

In this embodiment, by adopting the guide member A802 (see FIG. 1331), a game area is also formed in front of the upper right area A60b of the window portion A60a. The right end of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 enters the upper right area A60b. That is, it is arranged inside the plate thickness of the base plate A60 in the front-rear direction.
As a result, compared to the case where the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged behind the base plate A60, the front and back thickness of the game board A13 (see FIG. 1331) can be reduced. Furthermore, since the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged behind the base plate A60, the light entering the game area is less likely to be attenuated compared to the light reaching the game area after passing through the plate thickness of the base plate A60. Therefore, the game area in front of the upper right area A60b can be illuminated brightly.
The front side plate member A840 is formed in a shape overlapping the edge of the front light emitting substrate A820. That is, when the front side plate member A840 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 from the front side of the front side light emitting board A820, the pressing force applied from the front side plate member A840 to the front side light emitting board A820 is applied along the edge of the front side light emitting board A820. Therefore, the load per unit area can be reduced.
As a result, the front light emitting substrate A820 and the front side plate member A840 can be brought into surface contact while avoiding an excessive load applied between the front light emitting substrate A820 and the front side plate member A840. It is possible to easily align the optical axes of the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 and the front side plate member A840.

As shown in FIG. 1336, the traveling path AL2 of the irradiation light from the edge light emitting units A823 and A827 selected from highly directional LEDs is the front and rear surfaces of the front plate member A840 after being received by the front plate member A840. It extends in the horizontal direction until it reaches the linear groove A842 in a manner of total reflection, and when it reaches the linear groove A842, it is refracted and turned to the front side.
Therefore, when the front side plate member A840 is visually recognized from the front side, when light is emitted from the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827, the light directed toward the front side from the linear groove portion A842 reaches the player's eyes. As the original shape of the linear groove portion A842, the contour of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. can be visually recognized as if it were shining.
It should be noted that the LEDs forming the edge light emitting units A833 and A837 (see FIG. 1334) employ LEDs having a lower directivity than the LEDs forming the edge light emitting units A823 and A827. As a result, the entire area of the rear plate member A850 can be uniformly illuminated.
That is, the light from the edge light-emitting portions A833 and A837 (see FIG. 1334) is not totally reflected inside the rear plate member A850, and the light from the rear plate member A850 is uniformly illuminated. Function.

Returning to FIG. 1283, description will be made. As shown in FIG. 1283, a downstream guide member A803 is arranged on the lower right side of the center frame A86 in front view. The downstream guide member A803 constitutes a flow path through which the game ball guided by the guide member A802 is guided regardless of whether it passes through the through gate 67 or not.
FIG. 1337 is an exploded front perspective view of the downstream guide member A803, and FIG. 1338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the downstream guide member A803. 1337 and 1338, only a portion of the base plate A60 to which the downstream guide member A803 is fixed is illustrated, and illustration of other portions of the base plate A60 is omitted.
The downstream guide member A803 includes a front member A803z having a plate-like main body A803a and an extension plate A803b extending from the rear surface of the plate-like main body A803a, and a front member disposed on the rear side of the front member A803z. A rear member A804 formed of a light-transmissive resin material that is fastened and fixed to the base plate A60 while being fastened and fixed to the front member A803z so as to form a path through which the game ball can flow down between the A803z; , and a decorative plate member A805 attached to the front surface of the plate-like main body A803a of the front member A803z, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 1283), the game ball guided by the guide member A802 is positioned between the plate-like main body A803a and the rear side member A803z. It is configured to be able to flow down the region between the side member A804.
The extension plate A803b includes a left extension plate A803c formed from a vertically extending plate portion extending from the left edge portion of the plate-like main body A803a and an inclined plate portion extending in the lower left direction, and the left extension plate A803c. A middle left extension plate A803d which is formed of a corresponding shape and arranged to face the left extension plate A803c and forms a left flow path ATL1 in the region between the middle left extension plate A803d and a middle position of the middle left extension plate A803d A middle right extension plate A803e formed to extend downward while bending to the left and right and having a portion that branches and extends to the right; and a right extension plate A803f that forms the right flow path ATL2 in a region between the right extension plate A803e.

The game ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1 moves down the left extension plate A803c and the middle left extension plate A803d while flowing down in the lower left direction, which is the direction in which the left extension plate A803c and the middle left extension plate A803d extend. and passes through the ball detection sensor ASE1 held by the sensor support portion A804a of the rear member A804 in the assembled state, and passes through the opening A804b of the rear member A804 to the rear of the base plate A60. discharged towards. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the left flow path ATL1 is not guided to the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 1283).
The direction in which the left flow path ATL1 extends (lower left direction) is the direction away from the right flow path ATL2. It is possible to easily avoid mistaking the game ball flowing through the flow path ATL2.
Various aspects can be conceived as the control when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor ASE1. controlled so that
Note that the number of prize balls is an example, and is not limited to one, and may be two or more. On the other hand, by setting the number of prize balls to 1 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress ball loss when a game ball hit to the right flows through the left flow path ATL1.

Also, when the number of prize balls is two or more, even if the number of shot balls is subtracted, the number of prize balls paid out to the player increases the number of balls held by the player. As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of regret when a ball flows into the left flow path ATL1.
The game ball that has flowed into the right flow path ATL2 flows down along the inclined surface A803e1 extending in the lower right direction on the upstream side of the middle right extended plate A803e. In this case, the direction in which the ball flows is the direction away from the left side flow path ATL1 provided adjacent to the right side flow path ATL2. It is possible to easily avoid mistaking a game ball flowing through the path ATL1 and a game ball flowing through the right channel ATL2.
Since the ball rolling on the inclined surface A803e1 flows rightward near the upper edge of the plate-like main body A803a, compared to the ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1, which causes the ball to flow down in a manner similar to free fall, the ball flows downstream. It is possible to improve the visibility of the sphere when viewing the guide member A803 from above in a directional view. In other words, it is possible to extend the period in which the ball is visually recognized when viewed from above the downstream guide member A803.
A game ball flowing down the right flow path ATL2 rolls on the extension plate A803f1 extending leftward from the inside of the right extension plate A803f, and is curved in an arc shape so as to receive the rolling ball. It flows down along the curved surface A803e2 of the middle right extension plate A803e.

A ball rolling on the extension plate A803f1 flows downward toward the left flow path ATL1. Since the balls flowing down along the left flow path ATL1 are configured to flow down in a direction away from the left flow path ATL1, mistaking the game balls flowing through the left flow path ATL1 for the game balls flowing through the right flow path ATL2 is avoided. can be made easier.
In addition, while the spheres flowing down the left flow path ATL1 flow down while tilting to the left along the direction of gravity, the spheres flowing down the right flow path ATL2 meander left and right. When both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are visible, the game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 and the game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2 can be mistaken for each other. can be easily avoided.
Also, the game balls flowing through the left flow path ATL1 and the game balls flowing through the right flow path ATL2 can have different lengths of stay in the internal flow path of the downstream guide member A803. For example, when spheres flow into the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 at the same time, the spheres flowing down the left flow path ATL1 are quickly flowed downward, while the spheres flowing down the right flow path ATL2 meander in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period in which the spheres flowing down the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are positioned at the same height (the height positions of the spheres can be made different). As a result, it is possible to easily avoid mistaking a game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 and a game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2.
A game ball that has passed through the right flow path ATL2 flows downward on the front side of the base plate A60 and is guided toward the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 1283). Therefore, of the balls that flow down the downstream guide member A803, only the balls that flow down the right channel ATL2 are configured to enter the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a.

As described above, since the right flow path ATL2 is formed as a flow path that meanders left and right, the vertical velocity of the ball can be reduced compared to the case where the ball freely falls. As a result, the vertical speed of the ball when it reaches the second winning hole 640 or the specific winning hole 65a can be reduced, so that the opening and closing plate of the electric accessory 640a and the variable winning device 65 can be opened by collision with the ball. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the opening/closing plate is damaged.
The decorative plate member A805 is formed of a resin material, and includes a transparent sheet A805a that transmits light to the same extent regardless of the viewing direction, and a viewing mode changing sheet configured to change the light transmittance depending on the viewing direction. A806;
The visual mode changing sheet A806 is formed in a size that includes the left flow path ATL1 in front view, and the transparent sheet A805a is formed in a size that includes the right flow path ATL2 in front view, and the visual mode changing sheet A806 and A decorative plate member A805 composed of a transparent sheet A805a is formed in a shape that occupies a slightly smaller area than the outer edge of the plate-like main body A803a.
FIG. 1339 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the viewing mode change sheet A806. The viewing mode changing sheet A806 can also be called a viewing angle control sheet, and has a structure in which a transparent resin film A806c is attached to the front and back of a louver film in which transparent silicone rubber A806a and black silicone rubber A806b are alternately arranged. Therefore, it is possible to design the angular range (viewing angle) of transmitted light by changing the arrangement interval and orientation of the black silicone rubber A806b during manufacturing.

The viewing mode changing sheet A806 is a sheet attached to the front side of the plate-like main body A803a as shown in FIG. Its thickness is required to be very thin. Also in this embodiment, the transparent resin film A806c is a film made of polycarbonate and has a thickness of about 0.2 mm, and the pitch of the black silicone rubber A806b is about 0.1 mm. used.
FIGS. 1340(a) and 1340(b) are schematic diagrams showing changes in how the downstream guide member A803 is viewed due to different directional views. FIG. 1340(a) illustrates how it looks when viewed in the direction of arrow AEL1 in FIG. 1339, and FIG. 1340(b) illustrates how it looks when viewed in the direction of arrow AEL2 in FIG. In FIG. 1340, the outer shape may change depending on the direction of view, but for the sake of convenience, the same shape is shown ignoring the outer shape change. In addition, in FIG. 1340, the inner surfaces of the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 that are visible through the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 are illustrated by solid lines.
In this embodiment, the arrangement interval and orientation of the black silicone rubber A806b (see FIG. 1339) are such that the viewing angle at which the rear side of the viewing mode changing sheet A806 can be seen through the viewing mode changing sheet A806 is about 30 degrees. is designing.
That is, as shown in FIG. 1340(a), when the viewing mode changing sheet A806 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL1 (see FIG. 1339) (when viewed from directly in front of the downstream guide member A803), The left side flow path ATL1 arranged on the far side can be visually recognized through the visible state change sheet A806.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1340(b), when the viewing mode changing sheet A806 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL2 (see FIG. 1339) at an angle larger than the viewing angle (from directly in front of the downstream guide member A803 In a laterally displaced position, for example, when obliquely viewed from directly in front of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1283), the visual mode change sheet A806 cannot be transmitted through, and the visual mode change sheet A806 Since the front side is visually recognized (if the surface is decorated with figures, illustrations, etc., the decoration is visually recognized), it is difficult to visually recognize the ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1. be able to.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is more likely to see the downstream guide member A803 in the direction of arrow AEL1 than in the case of viewing the downstream guide member A803 in the direction of arrow AEL2. It is easy to visually recognize a game ball flowing down the flow path ATL1.
By utilizing the function of the viewing mode change sheet A806 as described above, it is possible to direct the player to view only the ball on the side that is more profitable for the player, out of the balls passing through the downstream side guide member A803. . This will be explained in detail.
A player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 basically operates the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 1283) and movable accessories (for example, operation units A400 to A600) that operate on the front side thereof. Since the game is played while visually recognizing the effect developed by , it is rare to stare at a specific range of the game area. 1339).

For example, even during the time saving or probability variation during the right-handed game to shoot the ball towards the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 1283), the player can use the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 1283) 1283), so if you look sideways at the downstream guide member A803 and confirm that the game ball is certainly flowing down, remove your line of sight from the downstream guide member A803, It is normal to pay attention to the display area of the pattern display device 81 .
In the downstream guide member A803 that is visible only for such a short time, in this embodiment, the game ball that has flowed into the left flow path ATL1 does not flow toward the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 1283). It will be ejected from the game area. Such a configuration is adopted in order to keep the prize ball performance per unit time of the pachinko machine 10 within the standard (for game time adjustment and prize ball adjustment). The spheres flowing into the left flow path ATL1 are not very desirable spheres.
By being shown such an unfavorable falling ball, the player's interest is lowered, and the player's motivation to play the pachinko machine 10 again tends to be reduced, which is not preferable.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, due to the viewing mode change sheet A806, when the player looks sideways at the downstream side guide member A803 (for example, when viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL2), the game flows through the left flow path ATL1. The ball is not visually recognized, and only the game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2 is visually recognized.

That is, when the downstream side guide member A803 is viewed sideways, only the balls flowing down the right side flow path ATL2 are visible, so that the flow path in which the game balls flow down the downstream side guide member A803 is the left side flow path ATL1. Since it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the game balls flowing down the right side flow path ATL2 while preparing a plurality of them with the right side flow path ATL2, all of the shot balls can be seen in the second winning opening 640 for the player. or the specific prize winning port 65a side (guided without waste), and the interest of the player can be improved, so that the player's desire to play again can be improved. can be done.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who is playing a game while visually recognizing the display effect developed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can use the visual mode change sheet A806 to move the left flow path ATL1. (balls not guided to the second winning port 640 or the specific winning port 65a side) flowing down the right channel ATL2. 640 or the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a side) can be made visible.
On the other hand, some players desire to visually recognize disadvantageous balls flowing down the left flow path ATL1. In this case, by moving the head from the front of the third pattern display device 81 and looking in the direction from the front of the downstream guide member A803 (the direction of the arrow AEL1 in FIG. 1339), the flow in the left flow path ATL1 Since the ball can be visually recognized, it is possible to avoid the accumulation of dissatisfaction of the player who desires to visually recognize the disadvantageous ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1. It is possible to prevent the desire for replay from being reduced.
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotary motion unit 400b of the first motion unit A400 is configured to extend in the longitudinal direction (the direction connecting the rotary shaft AJ1 and the tip of rotation) as the tilting motion proceeds. The first motion unit A2400 of the eleventh embodiment is configured to extend and contract in the longitudinal direction along with the tilting motion of the rotation motion unit 400b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1341 is a rear view of the first operation unit A2400 in the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 1341, the first action unit A2400 is shown in the rendering standby state. In addition, in the first operation unit A2400 in the eleventh embodiment, the rotation operation unit 400b is the same as in the tenth embodiment, while the support unit A2400a is different from the support unit A400a in the tenth embodiment. A2414 is different. Note that FIGS. 1300 and 1301 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 1341 .
The support unit A2400a includes a guide elongated hole A2414 in which the columnar projecting portion A448 of the rotary motion unit A400b is guided, instead of the guide elongated hole A414 described above in the tenth embodiment.
The guide elongated hole A2414 has a first arcuate portion A2414a extending leftward from the right end in an arcuate shape, and a second arcuate portion A2414a having a shorter radius than the first arcuate portion A2414a on the left side of the first arcuate portion A2414a. A second arc portion A2414b, a third arc portion A2414c formed in an arc shape with a longer radius than the first arc portion A2414a on the left side of the second arc portion A2414b, a left end portion of the first arc portion A2414a and the second arc portion A2414c. A first straight line portion A2414d formed in a straight hole shape connecting the right end portion of the arc portion A2414b, and a straight hole shape connecting the left end portion of the second arc portion A2414b and the right end portion of the third arc portion A2414c. and a second straight portion A2414e.
The first arc portion A2414a is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft AJ1 having a second radius AR2 whose radius is a second length AD2 (see FIG. 1300(b)), and the second arc portion A2414b is , and the first straight portion A2414d is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft AJ1 having a first radius AR1 whose radius is a first length AD1 (see FIG. 1300(a)). It is formed.

Therefore, when the drive motor AMT1 is driven from the effect standby state of the first operation unit A2400 and the rotation operation unit A400b starts tilting operation, the rotation operation unit A400b is held while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves along the first circular arc portion A2414a. The length in the longitudinal direction does not change, and only the rotational motion continues.
Furthermore, while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves along the first linear portion A2414d, the rotational motion unit A400b continues to rotate while changing its length in the longitudinal direction, thereby increasing drive resistance.
Furthermore, while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves along the second circular arc portion A2414b, the longitudinal length of the rotary motion unit A400b does not change and the rotary motion continues, so the drive resistance is reduced accordingly.
As described above, according to the guide long hole A2414, the columnar projecting portion A448 is configured to increase the driving resistance when entering the first linear portion A2414d. It is possible to easily perform motion control such as abruptly stopping the rotary motion unit A400b in the posture when entering the straight portion A2414d.

When the columnar projecting portion A448 moves in the order of the first circular arc portion A2414a, the first linear portion A2414d, and the second circular arc portion A2414b, only the longitudinal length of the rotary operation unit A400b changes ( 1300(a) and 1300(b)), there is no change in the widthwise length of the rotary operation unit A400b.
The second straight portion A2414e is formed in an inclined straight line extending on a straight line AVL2 passing through the center of the rotary shaft AJ1. Therefore, when the columnar projecting portion A448 moves along the second linear portion A2414e, the rotating motion of the rotating motion unit A400b is stopped and only displacement extending in the longitudinal direction occurs.
When the length between the columnar projecting portion A448 and the rotary shaft AJ1 becomes longer than the second length AD2 while the columnar projecting portion A448 is moving toward the left side of the second straight portion A2414e, the rotation operation occurs. In addition to the displacement extending in the longitudinal direction of the unit A400b, there is displacement in the lateral direction of the rotary motion unit A400b (displacement of the direction switching member A450 and the decoration member A460 to the left and right outside, see FIG. 1301).
Therefore, while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves along the second linear portion A2414e, the resistance applied to the drive motor AMT1 is changed from the state in which the resistance is applied due to the displacement extending in the longitudinal direction of the rotary operation unit A400b. Then, the state is shifted to a state in which resistance is applied due to the displacement that spreads in the lateral direction of the rotary operation unit A400b.

As a result, the displacement resistance of the rotary motion unit A400b can be increased, so that the speed of displacement generated in the rotary motion unit A400b can be changed when the driving force from the drive motor AMT1 is kept constant. That is, compared to the state in which the length between the columnar projecting portion A448 and the rotating shaft AJ1 is shorter than the second length AD2, the length between the columnar projecting portion A448 and the rotating shaft AJ1 is Since the speed of displacement in a state longer than the second length AD2 can be slowed down, it is possible to impress the player with the displacement of the rotary motion unit A400b in the lateral direction.
The third arc portion A2414c is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft AJ1 having a fourth radius AR4 whose radius is a fourth length AD4 (see FIG. 1301(b)). It is arranged downward toward the tip side.
As a result, after the columnar projecting portion A448 enters the third arcuate portion A2414c from the second straight portion A2414e, the rotary motion unit A400b is displaced to the maximum in both the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction (Fig. 1301(b) ))), it is possible to increase the impact of the rotational motion of the rotary motion unit A400b.
The position of the left end of the third circular arc portion A2414c is the same position as the left end of the guide long hole A414 in the tenth embodiment. When the drive motor AMT1 is driven in a direction opposite to the direction in which the rotary motion unit A400b is tilted from the state in which the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged at the left end portion of the third arc portion A2414c, the columnar projecting portion A448 is guided to the right side through the guide long hole A2414, the rotary motion unit A400b is rotated in the rising direction, like the first motion unit A400 in the tenth embodiment.

The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1342 to 1344. FIG. In the tenth embodiment, the rotation motion unit 400b of the first motion unit A400 moves from an upright state to a tilting motion, but in the first motion unit A3400 of the twelfth embodiment, , is configured to operate so as to fall down along with the tilting motion from the state extending in the horizontal direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1342 to 1344 are schematic rear views of the first operation unit A3400 in the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 1342, the first effect standby state of the first action unit A3400 is schematically illustrated, in FIG. 1343 the overhanging state of the first action unit A3400 is schematically illustrated, and in FIG. 1344 the first action A second effect standby state of unit A3400 is schematically illustrated. Also, in FIGS. 1342 to 1344, in order to facilitate understanding of the arrangement relationship, the outer shape position of the rear case A 210 (see FIG. 1288) (partially omitted in the lower part) and the third pattern The outline position of the display device 81 (see FIG. 1283) is illustrated by imaginary lines.
The first operating unit A3400 includes a support member A3400a fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 inside the rear case A210, and a rotary shaft A3400a fixedly arranged on the support member A3400a. and an operation unit A3400b.
The support member A3400a has a guide slot A3414 for guiding the displacement of the rotary motion unit A3400b. The guide elongated hole A3414 includes an arc portion A3414a formed in an arc shape centering on the rotary shaft AJ3, and a linearly extending from the lower end portion of the arc portion A3414a. and a recessed portion A3414c recessed downward from the lower end of the straight portion A3414b.

For the purpose of avoiding overlapping of the support member A3400a and the rotary operation unit A3400b, which makes the drawing difficult to see, the outline of the support member A3400a is shown in imaginary lines, and the inside of the outline is shown except for the guide slot A3414. Illustration is omitted.
The rotary operation unit A3400b includes a proximal side member A3430 rotatably supported by the rotary shaft AJ3, and a rotating shaft rod AJ1 disposed on the rotation distal end side of the proximal side member A3430. and a distal end side member A3440 configured to be displaceable in the radial direction of a circle centered at .
The tip side member A3440 includes a moving main body A3441 and a guided protrusion A3442 that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the side of the moving main body A3441 near the rotary shaft AJ3 and is inserted through the guide long hole A3414.
In the twelfth embodiment, the driving force is transmitted as the guide elongated hole A427e of the connecting member A427a guided by the belt A423a in the tenth embodiment moves in the left-right direction. 1297), the rotary operation unit A400b is displaced by applying a driving force in the horizontal direction.

That is, in the first operation unit A3400 in the twelfth embodiment, the postures of the belt A423a, the connecting member A427a, and the guide elongated hole A427e (not shown) are changed by 90 degrees to move them vertically. As these move in the vertical direction, a driving force is applied in the vertical direction to the guided projection A3442 inserted through the long guiding hole A427e, thereby displacing the rotary operation unit A3400b.
A rotation operation of the first operation unit A3400 from the first effect standby state will be described. When a driving force is generated to move the guided protrusion A3442 downward from the first effect standby state (see FIG. 1342), the rotary motion unit A3400b starts rotating around the rotary shaft AJ3.
Here, while the guided protrusion A3442 is being guided by the circular arc portion A3414a of the guide slot A3414, relative movement of the distal side member A3440 with respect to the proximal side member A3430 (displacement in the longitudinal direction of the rotary operation unit A3400b) is does not occur (see Figure 1343).
When a driving force is further generated to move the guided protrusion A3442 downward from the state illustrated in FIG. advances, the guided projection A3442 approaches the rotary shaft AJ3.

Therefore, the rotary motion unit A3400b rotates around the rotary shaft AJ3, and the distal end member A3440 starts to move relative to the proximal member A3430, increasing drive resistance.
When the tilting of the rotary motion unit A3400b proceeds to the end, as shown in FIG. Compared to the case where the tip end side member A3440 is moved relatively to the base end side member A3430, the distance between the guided protrusion A3442 and the rotary shaft AJ3 is increased.
That is, when the rotary motion unit A3400b tilts from the first effect waiting state, the tip side member A3440 of the rotary motion unit A3400b moves from a state in which it does not move relative to the proximal side member A3430 to the proximal side member A3430. After that, the state of relatively moving toward the proximal side member A3430 shifts to the state of relatively moving away from the proximal side member A3430. In this way, it is possible to increase variations in relative movement of the distal side member A3440 with respect to the proximal side member A3430 when the rotary motion unit A3400b tilts.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1344, the movement of the guided projection A3442 in the direction of rotation about the rotating shaft AJ3 is prevented by the concave portion A3414c. Therefore, even when the tilting motion of the rotary motion unit A3400b is executed at high speed, the return motion in the rotational direction (rotational motion in the opposite direction due to the reaction) occurs, so that the guided projection A3442 is not in contact with the concave portion A3414c. It can be prevented by being stopped by

By generating an upward driving force from the state illustrated in FIG. 1344, the rotary motion unit A3400b can be rotated (raising motion) in a manner in which the guided protrusion A3442 is guided in the opposite direction. .
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the direction of the tilting motion of the rotary motion unit A3400b is set in such a direction that it rotates under its own weight, so the driving force required at the start of the tilting motion can be reduced. .
In addition, it is possible to cause a change in appearance such that the rotation operation unit A3400b shrinks in the longitudinal direction during the tilting operation. As a result, during the tilting motion, it is possible to perform an effect of transforming the rotation motion unit A3400b to the side of making it compact, and by reducing the centrifugal force generated during the effect, Stop can be stabilized.
In addition, since the long guide hole A3414 for regulating the displacement of the tip side member A3440 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating shaft AJ3, the supporting member A3400a for forming the long guide hole A3414 can be miniaturized. In addition, it is not necessary to dispose the configuration of the first operation unit A3400 up to the area on the rotation tip side of the rotation operation unit A3400b in the rear case A210 (the area on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 in FIG. 1342). Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the operation units in the rear case A210.

The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area is changed by the fixed downstream guide member A803 has been described. The portion that causes the movement is displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1345(a) and 1345(b) are sectional views of the ball guide unit A4900 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 1345(a) illustrates a state in which the electric accessory 640a is closed, and FIG. 1345(b) illustrates a state in which the electric accessory 640a is opened.
In FIG. 1345, a cross-sectional view of a plane passing through the middle portion of the electric accessory 640a and perpendicular to the left-right direction is shown. As for the object 640a, only the opening/closing plate is illustrated, and the illustration of other drive mechanisms is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1345, the sphere guide unit A4900 is a unit that forms a flow-down path for spheres between the glass unit 16 and the base plate A60. A fixed flow path forming member A4910, a light guide displacement member A4920 configured to be able to move up and down along the front surface of the flow path formation member and formed of a light transmissive resin material, and the light guide displacement member A4920. A covering member A4930, which is disposed so as to sandwich the passage forming member A4910 from the opposite side, is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is fastened and fixed to the base plate A60, and a solenoid for driving the light guide displacement member A4920. A4940;

The flow path forming member A4910 includes a rear side plate portion A4911 formed along the surface of the base plate A60, and a front side plate arranged parallel to the front side of the rear side plate portion A4911 with an interval slightly longer than the diameter of a sphere. A portion A4912, and a thick main body portion A4913 connecting the lower end portions of the rear side plate portion A4911 and the front side plate portion A4912.
The rear side plate portion A4911 is formed with a through hole A4911a through which the electric accessory 640a passes, and the electric accessory 640a is arranged close to the front side plate portion A4912 through the through hole A4911a (Fig. 1345 (a) ) and an open state (see FIG. 1345(b)) in which it is retracted rearward.
The light guide displacement member A4920 includes a guided plate portion A4921 arranged to face the front side surface of the front side plate portion A4912 of the flow path forming member A4910 and guided in displacement by the front side surface, and a guide plate portion A4921 which is guided in displacement from the lower end of the guided plate portion A4921 to the rear side. and an extension portion A4922 that extends to.
The guided plate portion A4921 includes a plurality of linear groove portions A4921a that are cut in a groove shape from the back side of the upper portion. The linear groove portion A4921a functions to refract light incident from the end portion of the guided plate portion A4921 and emit the light toward the front side (the linear groove portion A732 (see FIG. 1329) described above in the tenth embodiment). have similar functionality).

The covering member A4930 is arranged to face the front side surface of the guided plate portion A4921, and is configured to guide the displacement of the guided plate portion A4921 together with the front side plate portion A4912 of the flow path forming member A4910. an extension portion A4932 extending rearward from the lower end portion of the front guide plate portion A4931 and having a rear end portion fastened and fixed to the base plate A60; and a light-emitting substrate A4933 having a light-emitting means A4933a such as an LED that emits light upward.
The light emitting means A4933a is arranged and designed so that the optical axis is along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guide displacement member A4920, and light is emitted from the lower end portion of the guided plate portion A4921 to the guided plate. It is configured such that the light is guided upward inside the portion A4921. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A4933a is configured to reach the linear groove A4921a.
In this embodiment, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A4933a, the light refracted by the linear grooves A4921a travels to the front side, so that the linear grooves A4921a emit bright light, and the linear grooves A4921a are illuminated. Visibility through is reduced.
Therefore, when visually recognizing from a direction overlapping with the linear groove portion A4921a, the visibility of the ball flowing down behind it is lowered. Rather than visually recognizing the line-shaped groove A4921a in the front-rear direction, it is better to visually recognize the ball rolling on the electric accessory 640a in the direction ADL1 that looks down on the line-shaped groove A4921a obliquely downward. becomes easier.

On the other hand, in FIG. 1345(a), without changing the position of the eye from the position in the direction ADL1 in which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is viewed from obliquely above, the lower side of the electric accessory 640a When trying to visually recognize the rolling ball (corresponding to the ball at the position illustrated in FIG. 1345(b)) from diagonally above, when viewing in the direction ADL2, the line-shaped groove A4921a is on the line of sight. It will get in, and the visibility of the ball will deteriorate.
Therefore, a player who wants to see the ball with good visibility needs to change the eye position every time the electric accessory 640a is opened and closed. Although the game load can be reduced, the game load increases due to frequent changes in the position of the eyes.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the driving timing of the solenoid A4940 are controlled to be synchronized. That is, in accordance with the opening of the electric accessory 640a, the solenoid A4940 is driven, and the light guide displacement member A4920 is displaced downward, thereby moving the ball rolling below the electric accessory 640a. This eliminates the state in which the line-shaped groove A4921a blocks the line of sight.
As a result, the player can visually recognize the ball even if the direction of the line of sight is changed between the direction ADL1 and the direction ADL2 without changing the position of the eyes, or even if the rolling position of the ball changes according to the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a. Since the performance is not impaired, the game burden on the player can be reduced.

When the ball guide unit A4900 is viewed in the front-rear direction in the state shown in FIG. It is not blocked by the groove A4921a. Therefore, when there is a ball flowing down right under the electric accessory 640a immediately after the electric accessory 640a is switched from the open state to the closed state (for example, when there is an over-winning ball), the ball By having the player visually recognize the ball in the directional view, the ball can be visually recognized without any problem.
Compared to the state shown in FIG. 1345(a), the distance between the light emitting means A4933a and the guided plate portion A4921 is shorter in the state shown in FIG. 1345(b). Therefore, when the light from the light emitting means A4933a is irradiated toward the guided plate portion A4921, light leakage is less in the state shown in FIG. 1345(b) than in the state shown in FIG. 1345(a). 1345(b) can illuminate the linear groove A4921a more brightly than the state shown in FIG. 1345(a) even if the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means A4933a is the same.
On the other hand, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 1345(b), the state shown in FIG. The range of the covering member A4930 illuminated by the light refracted by A4921a can be brought closer to the player side (upper side).
The front side surface of the front guide plate portion A4931 of the covering member A4930 is decorated with figures, illustrations, etc., and the area illuminated by this decoration can be brought closer to the player side (upper side). , the performance effect of the front side guide plate portion A4931 can be improved.

Although the case where the light guide displacement member A4920 is irradiated with light from below has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, light may be applied to the light guide displacement member A4920 from the left and right sides, from the upper side, from the back side, or from the front side.
The fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the columnar projecting portion A448 of the first operation unit A400 is projected from the back side of the moving member A440 and cannot move relative to the plate-like main body A442 has been described. In the first operation unit A5400 of the fourteenth embodiment, a columnar protruding member A5448 is arranged so as to be relatively movable with respect to the moving member A5440. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1346(a) and 1346(b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit A5400b in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 1346(a) shows the state of the rotary operation unit A5400b in the state corresponding to the production standby state (see FIG. 1288), and FIG. The state of the rotary operation unit A5400b is illustrated.
The configuration of the rotary operation unit A5400b will be described below, focusing on the differences from the rotary operation unit A400b described in the tenth embodiment. In the rotary operation unit A5400b of the present embodiment, a columnar projecting member A5448 is disposed so as to be relatively movable with respect to the moving member A5440 as a member corresponding to the columnar projecting portion A448 in the tenth embodiment.

That is, the columnar projecting member A5448 protrudes as the projecting tip portion (back side end) is inserted rearward into the guide slot A5442a drilled in the plate-like main body A5442 of the moving member A5440, The projecting base end portion (front side portion) is formed to have a shape larger than the guide long hole A5442a, and as a result, the columnar projecting member A5448 is attached to the guide long hole A5442a with respect to the plate-like main body A5442. It is configured to be relatively movable along.
The columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged at the right end of the guide slot A5442a (FIG. 1346(b)) by a biasing member (not shown) such as a spring that generates a biasing force in one direction. end).
The guide long hole A5442a is formed as a curved long hole extending along an arc centered on the rotary shaft AJ1 in the effect standby state. As a result, even if the arrangement of the columnar projecting member A5448 changes inside the elongated guide hole A5442a, the change causes the columnar projecting member A5448 to come off the arc portion A414a (see FIG. 1305) of the elongated guide hole A414. can be avoided.
As a result, when the rotary motion unit A5400b tilts from the effect standby state, it is possible to easily avoid an increase in motion resistance generated between the columnar projecting member A5448 and the arc portion A414a.

In the rotary operation unit A5400b, the base plate member A5430 has an extended guide portion A5438 extending from one side in the short direction (left side in FIG. 1346(a)) of the tip in the longitudinal direction (upper end in FIG. 1346(a)). Prepare.
The extended guide portion A5438 is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the columnar projecting member A5448 regardless of where the columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged in the guide long hole A5442a. The columnar projecting member A5448 can be moved along the guide slot A5442a by the load.
That is, as shown in FIG. 1346(b), the columnar protruding member A5448 is arranged at one end of the guide long hole A5442a (the left end of FIG. When moving toward the rotating shaft AJ1 with respect to the member A5430, the columnar projecting member A5448 abuts on the upper side surface of the extended guide portion A5438 during the movement to receive the load and the other end of the guide elongated hole A5442a. (Fig. 1346(a) right edge of paper surface). Finally, the columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged on a straight line passing through the rotating shaft AJ1 as the moving direction of the moving member A5440.
A description will be given of how the configuration described above can improve driving force transmission to the rotary motion unit A5400b when the first motion unit A5400 is tilted from the effect standby state.

Here, in the driving force transmission from the overhanging state, as described in the tenth embodiment, of the load applied to the columnar projecting portion A448, the relative movement direction (rotational direction) of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 The component parallel to the linear direction passing through the axial rod AJ1 does not pass through the rotary axial rod AJ1 and generates a force in the rotational direction centered on the rotary axial rod AJ1. can be considered good.
In the tenth embodiment, in order to produce this effect, the arrangement of the columnar projecting portion A448 is intentionally shifted from the center of the moving member A440 in the lateral direction. On the other hand, when the rotary motion unit A400b is erected while the columnar protrusion A448 is displaced, and the standing state is maintained by being supported by the columnar protrusion A448, the longitudinal direction of the rotary motion unit A400b is the vertical direction. There is a problem that it is difficult to maintain balance in a posture facing forward and tends to be in a slightly inclined posture (see Fig. 1305).
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the columnar projecting member A5448 is configured to be movable relative to the moving member A5440, so that when the rotary motion unit A5400b is erected (see FIG. 1346(a)). , the longitudinal direction of the rotary motion unit A400b is oriented in the vertical direction, which makes it easier to maintain balance.
In this embodiment, depending on the design of the length of the guide slot A5442a, the posture of the rotary motion unit A5400b in the standing state can be arbitrarily designed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the posture in the performance standby state while maintaining the effect of improving the driving force transmission from the overhanging state.

The fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the visual appearance change sheet A806 changes the appearance of the ball flow down path (game area) when the direction view changes the angle in the left and right direction has been described, but the flow path of the fifteenth embodiment The front side structural member A6900 is configured to change the appearance of the ball flow downward path (game area) when the direction view changes the angle in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1347 is a cross-sectional view of the flow channel front component A6900 in the fifteenth embodiment. In FIG. 1347, the flow path front component member A6900 is cross-sectionally viewed on a plane formed by the vertical side and the front-rear side at the location through which the sphere can pass. Note that the front and rear side surfaces of the base plate A60 arranged to face the flow path front component member A6900 are illustrated by imaginary lines.
The flow path front component member A6900 is attached (or fastened and fixed) to a blindfold member A6910 formed of a non-permeable resin material and arranged opposite to the front side of the base plate A60, and to the front side of the blindfold member A6910. A plate-like member made of a light-transmitting resin material, comprising: a decorative plate A6920 decorated on the front side; .
The blindfold member A6910 includes a pair of plate-like bodies A6911 (one side of which is shown in FIG. 1347) extending in the vertical direction and a pair of plate-like bodies A6911 extending in the left-right direction between the pair of plate-like bodies A6911. and a plurality of louver portions A6913 forming rectangular long holes A6912 extending in the left-right direction together with the plate-like main body A6911.

The lengths in the left-right direction of the rectangular long hole A6912 and the louver portion A6913 are longer than the diameter of the ball, and are formed with a length corresponding to the left-right width of the game area at the arrangement location. Also, the vertical interval of the louver portion A6913 is designed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere.
Various aspects are exemplified as the method for manufacturing the blindfold member A6910. For example, a plurality of louver portions A6913 may be fixed to the plate-like main body A6911, or a plate having a thickness corresponding to the front-rear length of the plate-like main body A6911 may be bored by drilling or the like to form rectangular elongated holes A6912. A configuration in which a plurality of louver portions A6913 are formed as the rest of the formed .
The louver portion A6913 is formed slightly wider in the front-rear direction, and decorative illustrations are applied to the upper and lower sides thereof. When the front component member A6900 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL61, the line of sight is blocked by the louver portion A6913. In this case, the player is made to visually recognize the illustration applied to the upper surface of the louver portion A6913, thereby avoiding a decrease in the performance effect.
On the other hand, when the flow path front component member A6900 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL62 (viewed along the front-rear direction), the upper and lower side surfaces of the louver portion A6913 do not overlap with the line of sight, and are hidden by the upper and lower thickness of the louver portion A6913. The sphere AB61 can be visually recognized through a portion other than the oblong hole A6912.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1347, the louver portion A6913 has a shape in which the vertical thickness is shorter than the front-rear width. , the visibility of the sphere AB61 flowing down behind the flow path front component A6900 can be improved compared to the case where the flow path front component A6900 is viewed in the direction of the arrow AEL61.
Next, the substrate box W100 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1348 to 1358. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 1348 to 1352, a schematic configuration of the substrate box W100 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
1348 is a rear view of the pachinko machine W10 in the sixteenth embodiment, FIG. 1349 is a front perspective view of the board box W100, FIG. 1350 is a back perspective view of the board box W100, and FIG. 1352(a) is a rear view of the board box W100, and FIG. 1352(b) is a side view of the board box W100 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDXXXIXb in FIG. 1352(a). A state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 is illustrated. FIG. 1353(a) is a partial front perspective view of the substrate box W100, FIG. 1353(b) is a partial rear perspective view of the substrate box W100, and FIGS. A state in which the protective cover W500 and the sealing seal WSL are removed from the cover W200 and the box base W300 is illustrated.
Note that arrows FB, LR, and UD in FIGS. 1348 to 1352 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction of the board box B100. It should be noted that the same applies to each of the following figures, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko machine W10 of the sixteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment except for the substrate box W100. Therefore, other explanations are omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 1348 to 1352, the board box W100 includes a box cover W200, a box base W300 whose opening is covered by the box cover W200, and the box cover W200 and the box base W300 unopenably connected (caulking structure). a sealing unit W400 connected by the sealing unit W400, and a protective cover W500 and a sealing seal WSL disposed at the end opposite to the sealing unit W400 of the box cover W200 and box base W300 connected by the sealing unit W400. , a main control board (not shown) is accommodated. The board box W100 may house a sub-control board, a board associated with light emitting effects or sound emitting effects, various switches, connectors, a game board, accessories, or a drive motor for driving accessories.
A rotating shaft W410 is formed in the sealing unit W400. The rotation axis W410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the substrate box W100 on the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1282), and rotates the substrate box W100 (box cover W200) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). ) and perpendicular to the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the substrate box W100 (box cover W200).
Further, the rotating shaft W410 is arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the substrate box W100 (box cover W200) when viewed from the rear (arrow F direction). The rotation axis W410 may be arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the substrate box W100 (box cover W200), and the rotation axis W410 may be arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction) of the substrate box W100 (box cover W200). direction side), lower side (arrow D direction side), front side (arrow F direction side), or rear side (arrow B direction side).

The box cover W200 has a rear wall portion W201 formed in a plate-like shape that is substantially horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a plate-like plate that extends from four sides of the rear wall portion W201 toward the box base W300 (direction of the arrow F). Wall portions (upper wall portion, lower wall portion, left wall portion W202 and right wall portion connecting the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion) formed in the upper wall portion and the cover projecting leftward from the left wall portion W202 It mainly includes a side engaged portion W210. The box cover W200 is formed in a box shape with the box base W300 side opened by each wall. The box cover W200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and molded using a resin molding die.
A protective cover W500 is attached to the cover-side engaged portion W210 together with a base-side engaged portion W310, which will be described later. The cover-side engaged portion W210 includes a base portion W211 that projects from the left wall portion W202 toward the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (in the direction of the arrow L), and a side wall that is formed at the projecting tip portion of the base portion W211. A portion W212, a plane portion W220 protruding from the side wall W212 to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400, an upper projecting portion W213a and a lower projecting portion W213b, and a box base W300 extending from the back surface of the base portion W211 and the planar portion W220. and a cover portion W214 protruding toward the opposite side (arrow B direction side).
The base portion W211 is a portion for connecting the left wall portion W202 and the side wall portion W212, and is formed in a plate shape. The side wall portion W212 is a portion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the sealing unit W400 (the arrow R direction side), and is formed in a plate shape.
The side wall portion W212 is provided with an upper projecting portion W213a, a lower projecting portion W213b, and a plane portion W220. The upper projecting portion W213a is arranged at a position higher than the plane portion W220 (in the direction of the arrow U), and the lower projecting portion W213b is located on the opposite side of the planar portion W220 to the upper projecting portion W213a. (Arrow D direction side).

The rear surface of the lower protruding portion W213b is arranged closer to the box base W300 (in the direction of the arrow F) than the rear surface of the side wall portion W212 and the rising portion W540 of the protective cover W500, which will be described later.
The planar portion W220 is a portion to which the sealing seal WSL is attached, and is formed in a plate shape. The flat portion W220 includes a protrusion W221 and a pair of standing portions W222 projecting toward the opposite side (arrow B direction) of the box base W300, and both ends of the flat portion W220 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). A pair of both end wall portions W223 disposed in the same direction, recessed portions W224a and W224b provided in the back surface of the flat portion W220, and the flat portion W220 are drilled through in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). and a notch portion W226 (see FIG. 1357) formed at the end of the plane portion W220 opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side).
The protrusion W221 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the sealing unit W400. The protrusion W221 is formed with an inclined portion W221a that inclines toward the side opposite to the box base W300 (arrow B direction) from the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 toward the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side).
The upright portion W222 and both end wall portions W223 prevent a wire illegally inserted from the gap formed between the side wall portion W212 and the protective cover W500 from releasing the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL. It is a site for suppressing.

The pair of standing portions W222 are formed to extend in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) at a predetermined distance from the side wall portion W212. Both ends of the pair of upright portions W222 in the vertical direction are joined to the pair of end wall portions W223, and no gap is formed between the pair of upright portions W222 and the pair of end wall portions W223.
The pair of both end wall portions W223 are formed in a plate shape, and are arranged at both end portions of the flat portion W220 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) with the plate thickness directions of the pair of both end wall portions W223 facing each other. be. The ends of the pair of end wall portions W223 on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side) and the ends on the side opposite to the box base W300 (arrow B direction side) are positioned closer to the box base than the front and rear surfaces of the plane portion W220. They are formed to protrude to the side of W300 and the side opposite to the box base W300. In addition, the ends of the pair of both end wall portions W223 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the direction of the arrow L) are located on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 from the ends of the plane portions W220 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400. formed to protrude from the The front surfaces of the pair of end wall portions W223 are arranged on substantially the same plane as the projecting surface of the standing portion W222.
The concave portions W224a and W224b are portions for forming a space between the sticking surface of the sealing seal WSL and the plane portion W220. By forming the concave portions W224a and W224b separately, the area where the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL are adhered can be increased.
In addition, the recessed portions W224a and W224b may be formed to be connected to each other. As a result, the formability of the box cover W200 can be easily ensured, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, the concave portions W224a and W224b may be formed so as to penetrate the plane portion W220 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). This makes it easier to ensure the formability of the box cover W200.

The dimension of the recess W224a in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the dimension in the left-right direction of a connecting piece W531a of the protective cover W500, which will be described later. The dimension of W224a is approximately three times the vertical dimension of the connecting piece W531a. The vertical dimension of the recess W224b is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the vertical dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500, and the horizontal dimension of the recess W224b is approximately 3 times the horizontal dimension of the connecting piece W531b. formed to double the size.
The pair of fastening holes W225 are holes into which screws (not shown) for fastening the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are inserted. The box cover W200 and the box base W300 are fastened by fastening the screws inserted through the pair of fastening holes W225 to the box base W300.
The notch portion W226 is a portion for forming a space on the side of the sealing seal WSL (in the direction of the arrow R) along with the notch portion W325 of the box base W300, which will be described later. The notch portion W226 is formed continuously from the upper end to the lower end of the planar portion W220. The notch W226 extends from the side wall W212 (arrow R direction) toward the opposite side (arrow L direction) of the sealing unit W400 toward the opposite side (arrow B direction) of the notch W325. Formed at an angle.
The cover portion W214 is provided upright from the base portion W211 and the flat portion W220 toward the side opposite to the box base W300 (in the direction of the arrow B) and formed into a plate-like wall portion (upper wall portion, lower wall portion, and A right wall portion connecting the ends on the right side of the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion), and a back wall portion W214a connecting the upright tip portions of the upper wall portion, the lower wall portion and the right wall portion. Prepare. The cover portion W214 and the flat portion W220 form a box-like shape with an open side (arrow L direction side) opposite to the sealing unit W400.

The upper wall portion and the lower wall portion are formed to extend in the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR), and are disposed between the projection W221 and the pair of standing portions W222 in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD). be done. The rear wall portion W214a is formed in a plate shape. The end of the rear wall portion W214a on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) is disposed closer to the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side) than the protrusion W221, and is viewed from the rear (arrow F direction). , the protrusion W221 is made visible. As a result, the engagement between the projection W221 and the engagement hole W533 of the protective cover W500, which will be described later, can be visually confirmed, and the engagement state between the box cover W200 and the protective cover W500 can be confirmed.
Note that the rear wall W214a may be formed so as to protrude to a position where the end of the rear wall W214a on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the arrow L direction side) overlaps the projection W221 when viewed from the rear. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the projection W221 and the engagement hole W533.
The box base W300 includes a front wall portion W301 formed in a plate shape that is substantially horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a plate shape that is erected from four sides of the front wall portion W301 toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction side). walls (upper wall, lower wall, left wall W302 and right wall connecting the upper wall and lower wall) and the opposite side of the sealing unit W400 from the left wall W302 ( It mainly includes a base-side engaged portion W310 projecting in the direction of the arrow L). The box base W300 is formed in the shape of a box whose rear side is opened by each wall. The box base W300 is made of a light-transmissive resin material and molded using a resin molding die.
A protective cover W500 is attached to the base-side engaged portion W310 together with the cover-side engaged portion W210. The base-side engaged portion W310 mainly includes an upper protruding portion W311 that protrudes from the left wall portion W302 in the direction opposite to the sealing unit W400 (in the direction of the arrow L), a cover portion W312, and a flat portion W320.

The upper projecting portion W311 is arranged at a position corresponding to the upper projecting portion W213a of the cover-side engaged portion W210 in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). In addition, the front surface of the upper projecting portion W311 is arranged on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the front wall portion W301.
The cover W312 extends from the three sides of the front wall W312a formed in a plate shape and the front wall W312a excluding the side on the side of the sealing unit W400 (direction of arrow R) toward the box cover W200 (direction of arrow B). Walls (upper wall, lower wall, and ends of the upper wall and lower wall on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) that are erected and formed in a plate shape are connected to each other. Left wall W312b). The upper wall portion, the lower wall portion and the left wall portion W312b are formed in a plate shape, and the erected tip portions of the upper wall portion, the lower wall portion and the left wall portion W312b are joined to the plane portion W320.
A pair of protrusions W312c protrude toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction) on the rear surface of the front wall portion W312a at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The pair of protrusions W312c are protrusions for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side). The pair of protrusions W312c has an inclined portion W312d that inclines toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction) from the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction) toward the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction). is formed.
In the left wall portion W312b, a pair of insertion holes W312e are formed through the plate thickness direction (arrow LR direction) at positions corresponding to the pair of projections W312c in side view (arrow R direction view). . The inner shape of the pair of insertion holes W312e is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the pair of protrusions W312c, and the pair of protrusions W312c can be visually recognized in a side view.

The flat portion W320 is a portion to which the sealing seal WSL is attached, and is formed in a plate shape. The plane portion W320 has a pair of both end wall portions W321 disposed at both ends of the plane portion W320 in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) and a wall portion W321 extending in the thickness direction of the plane portion W320 (direction of arrows FB). a pair of fastening holes W322 penetrating through the flat portion W320, a pair of suppressing portions W323 protruding from the flat portion W320 toward the side opposite to the box cover W200 (arrow F direction side), and a box from the flat portion W320. It mainly includes a protruding portion W324 that protrudes toward the cover W200 side (arrow B direction side).
The pair of both end wall portions W321 are formed in a plate shape, and are disposed on the plane portion W320 with the plate thickness direction of the pair of both end wall portions W321 along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The ends of the pair of end wall portions W321 on the side opposite to the box cover W200 (the arrow F direction side) are formed to protrude from the front surface of the plane portion W320. In addition, the ends of the pair of end wall portions W321 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (in the direction of the arrow L) protrude from the ends of the plane portion W320 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400.
The pair of fastening holes W322 are holes into which screws (not shown) are inserted through a pair of fastening holes W225 drilled in the box cover W200. be done. As a result, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are fastened.
The pair of suppressing portions W323 are portions for suppressing contact between the protective cover W500 and the sealing seal WSL. The projection length of the pair of suppressing portions W323 is formed longer than the thickness dimension of the sealing seal WSL. In the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the pair of suppressing portions W323 are arranged at positions corresponding to the pair of insertion holes W312e.

The projecting portion W324 is disposed at the end of the flat portion W320 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (in the direction of the arrow L), and a notch W325 is formed at the projecting tip of the projecting portion W324. (See Figure 1357). The projection length of the projection W324 toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction) is the same as the projection length of the pair of both end wall portions W223 with respect to the front surface of the plane portion W220. Thereby, it is possible to suppress formation of a gap between the pair of both end wall portions W321 and the pair of both end wall portions W223 in a state where the projecting portion W324 and the flat portion W220 are in contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wire from being illegally inserted inside the box cover W200 and the box base W300.
The notch portion W325 is a portion for forming a space on the side of the sealing seal WSL (in the direction of the arrow R) along with the notch portion W226 of the box cover W200. The cutout portion W325 is formed continuously from the upper end to the lower end of the flat portion W320 (projection portion W324), and is arranged to face the cutout portion W226 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). In addition, the notch portion W325 is on the side opposite to the notch portion W226 (arrow F direction side) as it goes from the left wall portion W302 side (arrow R direction side) to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side). It is formed with an inclination toward
The protective cover W500 is for shielding the sealing seal WSL attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300. A front wall portion W520 formed in a substantially vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front facing the front side (arrow F direction side) from the portion W510 at a predetermined distance, and a back surface excluding the right side (arrow R direction side). A wall portion (upper wall portion, lower wall portion W501 and left wall portion W502) connecting three sides of the wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, and a plate-shaped wall portion connected to the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520. and an upright portion W540 formed in a plate shape and erected downward (arrow D direction side) from the lower wall portion W501.
The protective cover W500 is formed in a box shape with the right side (arrow R direction side) opened by each wall. The protective cover W500 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and molded using a resin molding die.

The lengths of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) are longer than the lengths of the plane portions W220 and W320. The distance between the rear wall W510 and the front wall W520 facing each other is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance from the rear of both end walls W223 of the box cover W200 to the front of both end walls W321 of the box base W300. be. In addition, the distance between the opposed upper wall portion and the lower wall portion W501 of the protective cover W500 is formed to be greater than the distance between the opposite surfaces of the pair of end wall portions W223 (end wall portions W321). be.
As a result, the cover-side engaged portion W210 and the base-side engaged portion W310 can be arranged inside the protective cover W500, and the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300. Displacement of the protective cover W500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is restricted.
The rear wall portion W510 is intermittently formed along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and is not formed at one location in the present embodiment. The rear wall portion W510 is a side that is not formed in the vertical direction, and is erected from an edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the front wall portion W520 side (arrow F direction side). and a connecting portion W512 connecting the tips of the rib portions W511.
The rear surface of the rear wall portion W510 is arranged slightly closer to the front side (arrow F direction side) than the rear surface of the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. As a result, the rear surface of the rear wall portion W510 is disposed on the rear surface side (arrow B direction side) relative to the rear surface of the side wall portion W212, and the rear wall portion W510 protrudes further toward the rear surface than the side wall portion W212. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step between W510 and sidewall W212. As a result, it is possible to suppress unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 using such a step.

The rib portion W511 and the connecting portion W512 are portions for supporting the engaging portion W530a. The rib portion W511 is erected from the edge portion of the back wall portion W510 extending in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR), so that the wire illegally inserted through the gap between the back wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530b can be prevented. It is possible to suppress releasing the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.
The standing length of the rib portion W511 is formed shorter than the protruding length of the both end wall portions W223 toward the back side (arrow B direction side) with respect to the plane portion W220 of the box cover W200. As a result, when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the rib W511 can be prevented from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL and damaging the sealing seal WSL.
The connecting portion W512 is arranged by connecting the rib portions W511 on the left side (arrow L direction side), and the length of the connecting portion W512 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is equal to the length of the rear wall portion W510. Formed shorter than length.
The front wall portion W520 is intermittently formed along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and is not formed at two locations in the present embodiment. In addition, the position where the non-formed portion is formed on the rear wall portion W510 in the vertical direction is different from the position where the non-formed portion is formed on the front wall portion W520. The front wall portion W520 is a non-formed side in the vertical direction, and is erected from an edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the rear wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side). and a connecting portion W522 connecting the tips of the rib portions W521.

The front surface of the front wall portion W520 is arranged on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the upper overhanging portion W311 of the box base W300 or slightly behind (in the direction of the arrow B). As a result, the front surface of the front wall portion W520 is positioned closer to the front side (the direction of the arrow F) than the front surface of the upper projecting portion W311, and the front wall portion W520 projects further toward the front than the upper projecting portion W311. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of a step between the front wall portion W520 and the upper projecting portion W311. As a result, it is possible to suppress unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 using such a step.
The rib portion W521 and the connecting portion W522 are portions for supporting the engaging portion W530b. The rib portion W521 is erected from the end edge portion of the front wall portion W520 extending in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR), so that the wire illegally inserted through the gap between the front wall portion W520 and the engaging portion W530a can be prevented. It is possible to suppress the release of the adhesion between the flat portion W320 and the sealing seal WSL.
The standing length of the rib portion W521 is formed shorter than the protruding length toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the both end wall portions W321 with respect to the plane portion W320 of the box base W300. As a result, when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, it is possible to prevent the rib W521 from contacting the sealing seal WSL and damaging the sealing seal WSL.
The connecting portion W522 is arranged by connecting the rib portions W521 on the left side (arrow L direction side), and the length of the connecting portion W522 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is equal to that of the front wall portion W520. Formed shorter than length.

The engaging portions W530a and W530b are portions for engaging the protective cover W500 with the box cover W200 and the box base W300. In this embodiment, one engaging portion W530a is provided on the back wall portion W510 side of the protective cover W500, and the front wall portion W520 side is provided with a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). A pair (two) of engaging portions W530b are provided.
The engaging portion W530a is disposed between the pair of engaging portions W530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the engaging positions of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 and the protective cover W500 can be dispersed in the vertical direction, making it difficult to remove the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 illegally.
A plurality of (three pieces in this embodiment) connecting pieces W531 formed at the ends on the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) of the engaging portions W530a and W530b, and the connecting pieces W531 in the engaging portions W530a and W530b. mainly includes an inclined portion W532 formed at the opposite end (arrow R direction side) and an engaging hole W533 formed between the inclined portion W532 and the connecting piece W531.
The engaging portions W530a and W530b are connected to the rear wall portion W510 (rib portion W511) or the front wall portion W520 (rib portion W521) via a connecting piece W531. As a result, the engaging portions W530a and W530b are disposed between the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, rather than the rear wall portion W510 or the front wall portion W520. As a result, as compared with the case where the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) and the rear wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520) are arranged substantially on the same plane, the protective cover W500 is arranged in the box cover W200 and the box base. In the state of being attached (engaged) to W300, the distance between the opposing engagement portion W530a (engagement portion W530b) and the sealing seal WSL can be reduced.

Right (arrow R direction) end portions of the engaging portions W530a and W530b are formed to protrude to the right side from the right end portions of the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510. Although the inclined portion W532 and the engaging hole W533 formed in the engaging portion W530a are different in shape from the inclined portion W532 and the engaging hole W533 formed in the engaging portion W530b, they are denoted by the same reference numerals in the present embodiment. and explain.
Of the connecting pieces W531, the connecting piece W531 that protrudes leftward from the end on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portions W530a and W530b is called the connecting piece W531a and the engaging portions W530a and W530b. A pair of connecting pieces W531 protruding in the vertical direction from both ends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the left side are defined as connecting pieces W531b. The connecting piece W531a is supported by the connecting portions W512 and W522 of the rear wall portion W510 or the front wall portion W520, and the pair of connecting pieces W531b are joined to the rib portions W511 and W521 of the rear wall portion W510 or the front wall portion W520. .
The connecting pieces W531a and W531b are formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape when viewed from the rear. The thickness dimension of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) is formed to be substantially the same as that of the engaging portions W530a and W530b. , and W530b, respectively. That is, no step is formed between the connecting pieces W531a, W531b and the engaging portions W530a, W530b. As a result, stress concentration occurs between the connecting pieces W531a and W531b and the engaging portions W530a and W530b compared to the case where a step is formed between the connecting pieces W531a and W531b and the engaging portions W530a and W530b. can be suppressed, and the strength of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b can be ensured.
A pair of surfaces (hereinafter defined as "side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b") connecting the surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b facing the sealing seal WSL and the surfaces opposite to the surfaces facing the sealing seal WSL are: The connecting pieces W531a and W531b are formed orthogonally to the surface facing the sealing seal WSL and the surface opposite to the surface facing the sealing seal WSL. The front and rear surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are surfaces formed parallel to the sealing seal WSL when the protective cover W500 is attached (engaged) to the box cover W200 and the box base W300. A pair of side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are surfaces formed perpendicular to the sealing seal WSL.

Here, the distance between the connecting piece W531b and the tip of the engaging portion W530b is formed larger than the distance between the connecting piece W531b and the tip of the engaging portion W530a. Further, as described above, the thickness dimension of the engaging portion W530b in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) is formed smaller than the thickness dimension of the engaging portion W530a. As a result, the engaging portion W530b is formed to be elastically deformed more easily than the engaging portion W530a.
The inclined portion W532 is a portion for facilitating elastic deformation of the engaging portions W530a and W530b. direction side).
The engagement hole W533 is a portion for surrounding the projection W221 of the box cover W200 or the projection W312c of the box base W300. The contact between the inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole W533 and the surfaces of the protrusions W221 and W312c on the right side (direction of the arrow R) restricts the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the left side (direction of the arrow L). be done.
The erected portion W540 has the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 in the opposite posture (the posture in which the rear wall portion W510 is opposed to the front side of the front wall portion W520), and the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base. It is a part for suppressing attachment to W300.

The standing portion W540 protrudes from the lower wall portion W501 toward the side opposite to the upper wall portion (the arrow D direction side), and the protrusion length of the standing portion W540 is arranged upward (the arrow U direction side). It is formed to be larger than the distance between both end wall portions W223, W321 and the upper projecting portion W213a.
In addition, the standing portion W540 is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the lower projecting portion W213b. As a result, when the protective cover W500 is displaced rightward (in the direction of the arrow R), it is possible to suppress contact between the upright portion W540 and the lower projecting portion W213b. It is attached to the cover W200 and the box base W300.
On the other hand, with the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 facing each other (the rear wall portion W510 facing the front side of the front wall portion W520), the protective cover W500 is moved to the right side (direction of the arrow R). When the protective cover W500 is displaced toward the right side, the upright portion W540 and the upper overhanging portion W311 abut against each other, and the rightward displacement of the protective cover W500 is restricted. As a result, the protective cover W500 is displaced rightward, and the engaging portion W530a and the left wall portion W312b of the box base W300 come into contact with each other, or the engaging portion W530b and the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200 come into contact with each other. Contact can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the engaging portions W530a and W530b. Note that the standing portion W540 may not be formed.
The sealing seal WSL is for preventing opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and is formed in a sheet shape. The sealing sticker WSL is bent in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the top, and is attached to the flat portion W220, the flat portion W320, and the projecting portion W324. The sealing sticker WSL mainly includes an adhesive sheet to which adhesive is applied on the back side and a display sheet on which identification information is printed on the front side. It is formed.

The dimension of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is slightly smaller than the distance between the pair of opposite end walls W223 and W321. By affixing the sealing seal WSL over the plane portion W220, the plane portion W320 and the projecting portion W324, the cutout portions W226 and W325 are shielded by the sealing seal WSL except for the pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321. . Therefore, the cutouts W226 and W325 can be made difficult to be visually recognized, and it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to easily cut the sealing seal WSL using the cutouts W226 and W325.
The back surface of the adhesive sheet is a portion to be adhered to the flat portion W220 of the box cover W200 and the flat portion W320 of the box base W300. A strong adhesive force is formed with W320. As a result, when the sealing seal WSL is to be peeled off from the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320, the adhesion between the adhesive sheet and the display sheet is released, the display sheet is separated from the adhesive sheet, and the adhesive sheet and the flat portion W220 and the flat surface are separated. Adhesion with portion W320 is maintained. As a result, opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily suppressed.
On the surface of the display sheet, as identification information, a plurality of numbers, the name (model name) of the pachinko machine W10, the manufacturer's name, board information, etc. are written (not shown). The identification information is written on the position attached to the plane portion W220. As a result, the identification information can be visually recognized by opening the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1282). As a result, the operation of rotating the substrate box W100 with respect to the inner frame 12 in order to visually recognize the identification information can be eliminated as compared with the case where the identification information is written at the position attached to the flat portion W320.
Further, the surface of the display sheet is coated with a pattern of special ink that becomes visible when irradiated with light of a specific wavelength such as ultraviolet rays.

The outer peripheral edge of the sealing seal WSL is formed in a serrated shape. As a result, when the sealing seal WSL is peeled off from the plane portions W220 and W320, stress can be easily concentrated on the saw-toothed concave portion, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily split. As a result, at least part of the sealing seal WSL can be easily maintained in a state of being attached to the flat portions W220 and W320, and opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily suppressed.
In addition, the sealing seal WSL may be provided with an IC chip. By receiving the ID information stored in the IC chip with a scanner, it is possible to check whether the substrate box W100 has been illegally replaced. In addition, it can be made more difficult for a person who attempts fraud to illegally obtain the sealing sticker WSL or to forge the sealing sticker WSL.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1354 and 1355, attachment of the protective cover W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described. 1354(a) and 1354(b) are partial front views of the substrate box W100, and FIGS. 1354(c) and 1354(d) are partial rear views of the substrate box W100. FIG. 1355(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W100 taken along line MCDXLIIa-MCDXLIIa in FIG. 1354(b), and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view.
1354(a) and 1354(c) show the state before the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and FIGS. 1354(b) and 1354(d) show the box A state after the protective cover W500 is attached to the cover W200 and the box base W300 is illustrated. 1354(a) and 1354(b), the protrusion W312c is illustrated by broken lines, and the recesses W224a and W224b are illustrated by broken lines in FIGS. 1354(c) and 1354(d). Also, since the manner of engagement between the pair of engaging portions W530b and the pair of protrusions Ws328 is the same for one (upper) and the other (lower), a cross-sectional view of one will be illustrated and explained, and the other will be described. Description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 1354(a) and 1354(c), the positions of the engagement holes W533 of the engagement portions W530a and W530b are aligned with the protrusion W221 of the box cover W200 and the box base in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). From the position of the projection W312c of W300 (see FIG. 1353), the protective cover W500 is displaced rightward (in the direction of arrow R).
By displacing the protective cover W500 rightward (in the direction of the arrow R), the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portion W530a and the inclined portion W221a of the projection W221 come into contact with each other, and the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portion W530b and The inclined portion W312d of the projection W312c abuts (see FIG. 1353). The protective cover W500 is displaced rightward (in the direction of the arrow R) from a state in which the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portions W530a and W530b and the inclined portion W221a of the projection W221 and the inclined portion W312d of the projection W312c are in contact with each other. As a result, the engaging portions W530a and W530b are elastically deformed toward the back side (the arrow B direction side).
The engaging portions W530a and W530b are elastically deformed toward the rear side (arrow B direction side), thereby making it easier to rotate the protective cover W500 toward the rear side. As a result, compared to the case where the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the back side (front side) and the engaging portion W530b is elastically deformed toward the front side (back side), the engaging portions W530a, The amount of elastic deformation of W530b can be reduced. As a result, damage to the engaging portions W530a and W530b can be easily suppressed.
1354 ( b), as shown in FIGS. 1354(d) and 1355, a projection W221 is disposed inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530a (the engagement portion W530a and the projection W221 are engaged), and a pair of A pair of protrusions W312c are disposed inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b (the pair of engagement portions W530b and the pair of protrusions W312c are engaged). As a result, the elastic deformation of the engaging portions W530a and W530b is released.

Hereinafter, a state in which the projection W312c is arranged inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530a and the projection W221 is arranged inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b is defined as a restricted state. Since the manner of engagement between the pair of engaging portions W530b and the pair of projections W312c is the same on one side (upper side) and the other side (lower side), only a cross section on one side is shown. A cross-sectional view of the other side is omitted in the description.
The distance between the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 facing each other is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance from the rear surface of both end wall portions W223 of the box cover W200 to the front surface of both end wall portions W321 of the box base W300. In the regulated state, displacement of the protective cover W500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is regulated. This prevents the engagement between the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) and the protrusion W221 (protrusion W312c) from being released.
In the restricted state, the surface of the projection W221 opposite to the inclined portion W221a (the arrow R direction side) contacts the inner surface of the engagement hole W533 of the engaging portion W530a, and the inclined portion W312d of the projection W312c is in contact with the inner surface of the engaging portion W530a. The contact between the surface on the opposite side (the direction of the arrow R) and the inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b restricts the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the left side (the direction of the arrow L). be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 from being exposed.
Further, in the regulated state, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are arranged at positions overlapping the concave portions W224a and W224b in a rear view. Specifically, the connecting piece W531a is arranged at a position substantially in the center of the concave portion W224a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the connecting piece W531b is arranged in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the concave portion. It is disposed at a position substantially in the center of W224b.

In the regulated state, the right (arrow R direction) end of the rear wall W510 and the right end of the front wall W520 are the side wall W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall of the box base W300. It abuts on the portion W302. In addition, the right end of the engaging portion W530a abuts against the side wall portion W212. These restrict the rightward displacement of the protective cover W500. At least one of the right end of the rear wall W510, the right end of the engaging portion W530a, and the right end of the front wall W520 is the side wall W212 of the box cover W200. Alternatively, it may be brought into contact with the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300.
Here, due to factors such as the processing accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the protective cover W500, a gap is formed between the right end of the rear wall W510 and the side wall W212 of the box cover W200. A wire may be illegally inserted inside the protective cover W500 by using the gap. As a result, there is a risk that the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing sticker WSL will be illegally released.
On the other hand, by arranging the pair of standing portions W222 on the flat portion W220, even if a wire is illegally inserted inside the protective cover W500, the illegally inserted wire is can be brought into contact with the erected portion W222. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized release of the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing sticker WSL.
In addition, since the front surfaces of the pair of both end wall portions W223 are disposed on substantially the same plane as the protruding surfaces of the standing portion W222, the front surfaces of the pair of both end wall portions W223 (the protruding surfaces of the standing portion W222) and the back surfaces of the pair of end wall portions W223 When the inner surface of the wall portion W510 is in contact with the inner surface of the wall portion W510, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the projecting surface of the standing portion W222 (the front surfaces of the pair of end wall portions W223) and the inner surface of the rear wall portion W510. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the wire from being illegally inserted using such a gap and the bonding between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL being released.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1356 to 1358, removal of protective cover W500 from box cover W200 and box base W300 will be described. FIG. 1356(a) is a partial front view of the board box W100, and FIG. 1356(b) is a partial rear view of the board box W100. FIG. 1357 is a partial cross-sectional view of substrate box W100 taken along line MCDXLIV-MCDXLIV in FIG. 1356(b). FIG. 1358(a) is a partial front view of the board box W100, and FIG. 1358(b) is a partial rear view of the board box W100.
1356(a) and 1356(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut off from the protective cover W500. 1358(a) and 1358(b) show a state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and two engaging portions W530a and W530b cut from the protective cover W500 are shown. It is illustrated by a dash-dotted line.
1357 shows one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b of the engaging portion W530a, and cutting one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b will be described. Since the aspect is the same as that of one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b, description of cutting the other of the pair of connecting pieces W531b and the connecting piece W531a is omitted. The cutting of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portion W530b is the same as that of the engaging portion W530a, so the explanation of the cutting of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portion W530b is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1356, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut by a cutting tool (not shown), thereby engaging the protective cover W500 (the rear wall W510 and the front wall W520). Joining portions W530a and W530b are separated. Examples of cutting tools include nippers, scissors, cutter knives, knives, and the like.

For example, when the cutting tool is composed of nippers or scissors and the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are sandwiched between a pair of blades to cut the connecting pieces W531a and W531b, a pair of side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are provided with a pair of cutting tools. The connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut by abutting the blades and displacing the pair of blades toward the opposite sides of the pair of side surfaces.
Further, for example, when the cutting tool is a utility knife or a knife and a single blade is used to cut the connecting pieces W531a and W531b, the blade is brought into contact with one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b. , the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut by displacing the blades toward the other of the pair of side surfaces.
As described above, in the rear view, the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500 is arranged at a position overlapping the concave portion W224b (see FIG. 1354). That is, as shown in FIG. 1357, the recess W224b faces the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530b through the sealing seal WSL and is recessed toward the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (arrow F direction side). be. As a result, a space can be formed between the sealing seal WSL and the recessed portion W224b, and the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) can be inserted between the rear wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a to cut the connecting piece W531b. In this case, the tip of the cutting tool can be received in the recess W224b. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.
That is, when the connecting piece W531b is cut, a trace (damage) can be formed on the sealing seal WSL. This makes it possible to confirm the state of the sealing seal WSL (whether the sealing seal WSL is new or reused) based on the presence or absence of traces of the sealing seal WSL. In addition, the formation of traces on the sealing seal WSL can prevent the sealing seal WSL from being reused.

In addition, the connecting piece W531b is arranged at a position substantially in the center of the recessed portion W224b in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). In addition, the connecting piece W531b is arranged at a position overlapping the concave portion W224b in a rear view (see FIG. 1354). Therefore, in a state in which the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) for cutting the connecting piece W531b is arranged on the side surface of the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool can be easily received in the recess W224b. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the cutting operation of the connecting piece W531b, and the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL can be easily recognized by the worker (clerk).
In addition, since the engaging portion W530a (connecting piece W531b) is connected to the rib portion W511, the distance between the connecting piece W531b and the sealing seal WSL (flat portion W220) is greater than the interval between the rear wall portion W510 and the sealing seal WSL (flat portion W220). The opposing interval with the plane portion W220) is formed to be small. As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be brought closer to the sealing seal WSL, and can be easily received in the recess W224b. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.
As described above, the connecting piece W531a of the protective cover W500 is arranged at a position overlapping the recess W224a in the rear view (see FIG. 1354). As a result, similar to cutting the connecting piece W531b, when the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) is inserted between the rear wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a in order to cut the connecting piece W531a, cutting is performed. The sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the tool.
The connecting piece W531a projects leftward (in the direction of the arrow L) from the engaging portions W530a and W530b, and the connecting piece W531b projects vertically from the engaging portions W530a and W530b. As a result, it becomes necessary to change the orientation of the cutting tool (not shown) when cutting the connecting piece W531a and when cutting the connecting piece W531b. As a result, a fraudulent person can extend the time required for cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b, thereby suppressing fraud.

As shown in FIG. 1358, by disconnecting the engaging portions W530a and W530b from the protective cover W500, the restricted state is released, and the protective cover W500 can be displaced leftward (in the direction of the arrow L). be.
In this way, when the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut, the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool (not shown). After the protective cover W500 is removed (the parts W530a and W530b are separated), even if the protective cover W500 in which the engaging parts W530a and W530b are joined with an adhesive is attached, traces of the sealing seal WSL (damage ) makes it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the connecting piece W531b has been cut, that is, that there is a risk that a main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
It should be noted that an illegal person possesses the protective cover W500 in which the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are not cut, and instead of the protective cover W500 in which the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut. Even when the protective cover W500 is attached, the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL makes it easy for the worker (clerk) to recognize that there is a risk of unauthorized operation.
In addition, after an unauthorized person illegally removes the sealing seal WSL from the flat surface portion W220 (flat surface portion W320) and tampers with the main control board (not shown), the peeled sealing seal WSL is removed from the flat surface portion W220 ( Even if it is difficult for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the sealing sticker WSL has been removed by attaching it to the flat portion W320) again, there is a risk that an unauthorized person may tamper with the main control board. can be easily recognized by the worker (clerk) by the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL.

Here, compared to the protective cover W500, it is difficult for a person who attempts fraudulently to obtain the sealing sticker WSL fraudulently or to forge the sealing sticker WSL. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the protective cover W500 is illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged (easily marked), thereby ), it is particularly effective to make the worker (clerk) easily aware of the risk of unauthorized operation.
In addition, the substrate box W100 is arranged (pivotally supported) on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1282), and the concave portions W224a and W224b are provided on the box cover W200 constituting the back side of the substrate box W100. Since it is formed, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the back side of the inner frame 12 is visible, traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL are visible. As a result, for example, the concave portions W224a and W224b are recessed in the box base W300 (flat portion W320) forming the front side (direction of the arrow F) of the substrate box W100, and the substrate box W100 can be rotated with respect to the inner frame 12. This makes it easier for workers (clerks) to easily recognize the traces (damage) of the sealing seal WSL, compared to the case where the damage of the sealing seal WSL is visually recognizable.
If there is no trace (damage) on the sealing seal WSL, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the sealing seal WSL has not been tampered with. On the other hand, when the sealing seal WSL had traces (damage), the protective cover W500 was removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and after the sealing seal WSL was peeled off, the sealing seal WSL was attached again. can be determined to be highly probable. Alternatively, since the protective cover W500 was removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and a trace (damage) was formed on the sealing seal WSL at that time, it can be determined that there is a high possibility of an illegal attempt.
Next, opening the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described. With the protective cover W500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are released from the sealing seal WSL, or the box cover W200 (flat portion W220) and the box base are removed. The sealing seal WSL is cut at the boundary of W300 (projection W324). As a result, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are opened.

Here, cutout portions W226 and W325 are formed in the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320, and the cutout portions W226 and W325 are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), thereby forming a box cover. In a state where W200 and box base W300 are combined, a substantially V-shaped space is formed on the sticking surface side (arrow R direction side) of the sealing seal WSL in cross-sectional view. As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be easily arranged in the space formed by the cutouts W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut (see FIG. 1357). In addition, by combining the box cover W200 and the box base W300, it is possible to easily form a space on the side where the sealing seal WSL is adhered. can be reduced.
In addition, as the notch W226 goes from the side wall W212 side (arrow R direction) toward the tip side (arrow L direction) of the flat portion W220, the notch W325 is inclined to the side opposite to the notch W325 (arrow B direction). As the notch W325 goes from the left wall W302 side (arrow R direction) to the tip side (arrow L direction) of the plane portion W320, the notch W226 is opposite to the notch W226 (arrow F direction). As a result, a non-adhered region is formed between the flat portion W220 and the protrusion W324 and the sealing seal WSL at the boundary between the plane portion W220 and the protrusion W324 (Fig. 1357 reference). As a result, the engagement between the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily released by cutting the sealing seal WSL.
Next, the substrate box W2100 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1359(a) and 1359(b). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1359(a) is a partial rear view of the board box W2100 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 1359(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box W2100 along line MCDXLVIb-MCDXLVIb in FIG. 1359(a). Note that in FIG. 1359(a), both end wall portions W223 and both end protrusions W2223a of the box cover W2200 are shown by dashed lines, and in FIG. 1359(b), the engaging portions W2530a and W2530b are cut off from the protective cover W2500. is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 1359(a) and 1359(b), in the protective cover W2500 of the board box W2100 in the seventeenth embodiment, the connecting piece W2531b is connected to the rear wall W2510 and the front wall W2520.
The connecting piece W2531b has a hanging portion W2531c extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) from the end edge portion of the rear wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the hanging portion W2531c. It has a parallel portion W2531d extending vertically from the tip, and is formed in a substantially L shape in a cross-sectional view. In addition, the distance between the rear wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520 is formed to be large compared to the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in the sixteenth embodiment.
The pair of both end walls W223 of the box cover W2200 includes both end protrusions W2223a that protrude from the both end walls W223 toward the rear wall W510 (the direction of the arrow B), and the pair of both end walls of the box base W2300. W321 includes end protrusions W2321a that protrude from both end walls W321 toward the front wall W520 (arrow F direction).
The protruding length of the end protruding portions W2223a is formed substantially equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing end wall portions W223 and the rear wall portion W510. In addition, the length of both end protrusions W2223a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed to be approximately 1/3 of both end wall portions W223, and the length of both end protrusions W2223a on the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side) is One end is provided in contact with the side wall W212.

The protruding length of the end protruding portions W2321a is formed to be approximately equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing end wall portions W321 and the front wall portion W520. In addition, the length of both end protrusions W2321a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed to be approximately 1/3 of the length of both end wall portions W321, and the length of both end protrusions W2321a on the cover portion W312 side (arrow R direction side) is One end is disposed in contact with the left wall W312b (see FIG. 1353).
As a result, in the regulated state, the two end protrusions W2223a (both end protrusions W2321a) and the rear wall W510 (front wall W520) abut against each other, thereby displacing the protective cover W2500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). is regulated. As a result, the release of the engagement between the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) and the protrusion W221 (protrusion W312c) is suppressed (see FIG. 1355).
The protective cover W2500 is removed from the box cover W2200 and the box base W2300 by cutting the hanging portions W2531c of the connecting pieces W531a and W2531b with a cutting tool (not shown), and removing the engaging portions W2530a and W2530b from the protective cover W2500. It is done by being separated.
In the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), protective cover W2500 is displaced to the opposite side (direction of arrow L) of side wall W212 (left wall W312b) from both end protrusions W2223a (both end protrusions W2321a). In this state, the both end protrusions W2223a (both end protrusions W2321a) and the back wall W510 (front wall W520) are not in contact with each other, and the restriction on displacement of the protective cover W2500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is released. be done.

Here, by forming the hanging portion W2531c on the connecting piece W2531b, the hanging portion W2531c is formed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) compared to the case where the hanging portion W2531c is not formed on the connecting piece W2531b. It is possible to reduce the distance between the opposed cut portion and the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) or the cut portion of the connecting piece W2531b can be easily brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.
Further, the cut portion formed in the hanging portion W2531c can face the sealing seal WSL, and when the protective cover W2500 is removed from the box cover W2200 and the box base W2300, the cut portion formed in the hanging portion W2531c cuts the sealing seal WSL. can be easily damaged. As a result, the worker (clerk) can easily recognize that there is a possibility that a main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1359(c), the protective cover W3500 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1359(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover W3500 in the eighteenth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIb-MCDXLVIb in FIG. 1359(a).

As shown in FIG. 1359(c), in the protective cover W3500 of the eighteenth embodiment, the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a (engaging portion W3530b) are formed substantially on the same plane. , the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a (engaging portion W3530b) are connected via a connecting piece W3531b.
The connecting piece W3531b extends from the end edges of the engaging portions W3530a and W3530b, the rear wall portion W3510 and the front wall portion W3520 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) toward the opposite side of the rear wall portion W3510 and the front wall portion W3520. and a parallel portion W3531d that connects the ends of the pair of hanging portions W3531c, and is formed in a substantially U-shape in cross-section.
To remove the protective cover W3500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 1359(b)), the parallel portion W3531d of the connecting piece W3531b is cut by a cutting tool (not shown), and the protective cover W3500 is removed from the engaging portion. This is done by separating W3530a and W3530b.
By forming the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a (engaging portion W3530b) on substantially the same plane, the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a ( It is possible to suppress the formation of a step with the engaging portion W3530b). This makes it difficult for a finger to be caught on the protective cover W3500, and makes it easier to suppress unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

By forming the pair of hanging portions W3531c, the facing distance between the connecting piece W3531b and the sealing seal WSL is formed to be smaller than the facing distance between the rear wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the sealing seal WSL ( See FIG. 1359(b)). As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be brought closer to the sealing seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged. As a result, the worker (clerk) can easily recognize that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1360, the board box W4100 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1360(a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W4100 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 1360(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W4100 taken along line MCDXLVIIb-MCDXLVIIb of FIG. 1360(a). FIG. 1360(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of substrate box W4100 taken along line MCDXLVIIc-MCDXLVIIc of FIG. 1360(a), and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view.
As shown in FIG. 1360, the protective cover W4500 of the board box W4100 in the nineteenth embodiment has a protrusion W4534. The protrusion W4534 is formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape at the protruding ends of the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b so as to protrude from the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b toward the opposite sides of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520.

By forming the projections W4534 on the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b, the flat portion W4220 (flat portion W4320) is formed on the front side (rear side) by the projection amount of the projections W4534. As a result, when the protective cover W4500 is attached to the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300, the contact between the projection W4534 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and damage to the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed.
Further, since the projection W4534 is arranged at the projecting tip of the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b, the projection W4534 is arranged closer to the side wall portion W212 (cover portion W312 side) than the sealing seal WSL in the regulated state.
In order to illegally remove the protective cover W4500 from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300, the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b are elastically deformed without cutting the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b. ) and the projection W221 of the plane portion W4220 (the projection W312c of the plane portion W4320) are disengaged.
In this embodiment, since the protrusions W4534 are formed so as to protrude from the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b toward the opposite side of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, the protective cover W4500 is separated from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300. When removing, the protrusion W4534 and the sealing seal WSL can be easily brought into contact with each other. In addition, since the projection W4534 is formed in the shape of a square pyramid, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the contact between the projection W4534 and the sealing seal WSL.

In addition, since the protrusion W4534 is arranged on the side wall portion W212 side (cover portion W312 side) from the sealing seal WSL, the sealing seal WSL is adhered when the protective cover W4500 is removed from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300. A projection W4534 can be brought into contact with the side surface connecting the surface and the surface facing the sticking surface.
As a result, the protrusion W4534 contacts the surface of the sealing seal WSL, and while the protrusion W4534 slides on the surface of the sealing seal WSL (while the protrusion W4534 does not damage the sealing seal WSL), the protective cover from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300 Compared to the case where W4500 is removed, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.
A pair of protrusions W4534 are formed at both ends of the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). When the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions W4534, the damage of the sealing seal WSL can be easily visually recognized from the gap between the engaging portion W4530a (engaging portion W4530b) and the rear wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520).
As a result, the worker (clerk) can easily recognize that there is a possibility that a main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.

Further, by using the projection W4534, it is possible to easily open the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300 (cut the sealing seal WSL). More specifically, the sealing seal WSL is cut by separating the engaging portion W4530a (engaging portion W4530b) from the protective cover W4500 and arranging the projection W4534 in the space formed by the cutouts W226 and W325. It can be done easily.
This eliminates the need to carry a cutting tool (not shown). In addition, since the engaging portion W4530a (engaging portion W4530b) is formed smaller than the protective cover W4500, it is possible to suppress interference with the pair of end wall portions W223 and the pair of end wall portions W321. Cutting work can be easily performed. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be suitably cut.
Next, the substrate box W5100 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1361(a) to 1361(c). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. 1361(a) to 1361(c), the engagement hole W533 is indicated by a dashed line. In addition, FIG. 1354(c) will be referred to appropriately in the description of FIGS. 1361(a) to 1361(c).
FIGS. 1361(a) to 1361(c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box W5100 in the twentieth embodiment, corresponding to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in FIG. 1354(b). FIG. 1361(a) shows a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed to attach the protective cover W5500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, and FIG. The engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the base W5300, and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engaging hole W533 is released. A state in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced leftward (in the direction of the arrow L) from the state in (b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 1361(a) to 1361(c), the box base W5300 of the board box W5100 in the twentieth embodiment includes a recess W5326, and the protective cover W5500 includes a protrusion W5534.
By forming the projection W5534 on the engaging portion W5530b, the flat portion W5320 is formed on the back side by the projection amount of the projection W5534. As a result, when the protective cover W5500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, contact between the projection W5534 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and damage to the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed.
The recess W5326 is a part for forming a space between the sticking surface of the sealing sticker WSL and the plane portion W5220, and is recessed in front of the plane portion W5320. The recessed portion W5326 is formed at a position overlapping the projection W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the restricted state, and the inner surface of the recessed portion W5326 on the right side (arrow R direction side) is located to the right of the projection W5534. placed on the side.
The length of the concave portion W5326 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) is formed to be larger than the dimension in the left-right direction of the projection W312c of the box base W5300, and the engagement hole W533 is located to the left of the projection W312c (direction of arrow L). side), the inner surface of the recess W5326 on the left side is arranged on the left side of the protrusion W5534.

The protrusion W5534 is a protrusion for breaking the sealing seal WSL when the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300. (B direction side).
That is, since the protrusion W5534 protrudes toward the inside of the protective cover W5500 formed in a box shape, an operator (clerk) does not come into contact with the protrusion W5534 during the manufacturing work or transportation work of the substrate box W5100 or the protective cover W5500. and reduce injury.
A pair of protrusions W5534 are formed on both end sides of the engaging portion W5530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, damage to the sealing seal WSL can be easily visually recognized from the gap between the engaging portion W5530b and the front wall portion W520 (see FIG. 1354(c)).
Next, with reference to FIG. 1361(b), a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is improperly elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction side) will be described. As shown in FIG. 1361(b), in order to release the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533, the engagement portion W5530b is illegally made larger than the projecting dimension of the protrusion W312c on the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction side). ), the tips of the pair of protrusions W5534 are disposed in the space formed by the recess W5326, and the pair of protrusions W5534 damage the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the worker (clerk) can easily recognize that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.

FIG. 1361(c) shows a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is improperly elastically deformed from the state in FIG. side (direction of arrow L), and the engagement hole W533 is located on the left side of the projection W312c (the engagement between the engagement hole W533 and the projection W312c is released). be.
As described above, the length of the recess W5326 in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) is formed to be greater than the dimension of the projection W312c, so the engagement hole W533 is located on the left side (the direction of the arrow L) of the projection W312c. ), the tips of the pair of projections W5534 can be arranged in the space formed by the recess W5326 even when the protective cover W5500 is displaced to the left side. As a result, the area where the sealing seal WSL is damaged can be enlarged, and the operator (clerk) can easily recognize the damage of the sealing seal WSL.
In this way, when the engagement portion W5530b is elastically deformed to release the engagement between the engagement hole W533 and the protrusion W312c without cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engagement portion W5530b, the sealing seal WSL Traces (damage) can be easily imparted to the surface.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1361(d), the substrate box W6100 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, in FIG. 1361(d), the engagement hole W533 is illustrated by a broken line.

FIG. 1361(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W6100 in the twenty-first embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in FIG. 1354(b). In FIG. 1361(d), the engagement portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300, and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533 is released. The states are illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1361(d), the box base W6300 of the substrate box W6100 in the twenty-first embodiment has a recess W6326. The concave portion W6326 is formed to have a smaller concave dimension in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) than the concave portion W5326 in the twentieth embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, the recessed shape of the recess W6326 is formed substantially the same as the outer shape of the protrusion W5534 of the protective cover W5500. Further, the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the regulated state.
As a result, when the engagement portion W5530b is improperly elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction), the tip of the protrusion W5534 is disposed in the space formed by the recess W6326, and the protrusion W5534 By contacting the inner side of the concave portion W6326, the displacement of the protective cover W5500 toward the left side (arrow L direction side) is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover W5500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300.
In addition, when the engaging portion W5530b is improperly elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction), the tips of the pair of projections W5534 are disposed in the space formed by the recess W6326, and the pair of The seal WSL is damaged by the projection W5534. As a result, the worker (clerk) can easily recognize that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1362, the board box W7100 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1362(a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W7100 in the twenty-second embodiment, and FIG. 1362(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W7100 along line MCDXLIXb-MCDXLIXb in FIG. 1362(a). In addition, in FIG. 1362(a), a pair of fastening holes W7225 are illustrated by broken lines.
As shown in FIG. 1362, a pair of fastening holes W7225 and a pair of fastening holes W7322 are formed in the plane portion W7220 and the plane portion W7320 of the board box W7100 in the twenty-second embodiment in the vertical direction (arrow direction) with the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500. UD direction). That is, the pair of fastening holes W7322 are bored through the sealing seal WSL so as to face the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530b toward the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (arrow F direction side).
The fastening hole W7322 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the diameter of the fastening hole W7322 is formed to be larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction).

With these, a space can be formed between the screws for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 and the sealing seal WSL, and a cutting tool can be placed between the rear wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a to cut the connecting piece W531b. When a tip (not shown) is inserted, the tip of the cutting tool can be receivable in fastening hole W7322. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool, and the worker (clerk) is made aware that there is a risk that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person. It can be done easily.
A trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL is formed at a position corresponding to the screw for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 using the fastening hole W7322 (so that the tip of the cutting tool can be received in the fastening hole W7322). Therefore, even if the sealing seal WSL blocks the screw for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300, the position of the screw can be grasped based on the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL. Thereby, the workability of the work for releasing the tightening of the screw can be improved.
Also, the function of inserting the screws for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 and the function of forming a space for arranging the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) are combined into a pair. The hole W7225 can also be used. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of the concave portion W224b (see FIG. 1353) in the plane portion W7220, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1363(a), the protective cover W8500 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1363(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W8100 in the twenty-third embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section at the LXXXIIa portion in FIG. 1357(a).
As shown in FIG. 1363(a), the connecting piece W8531b of the protective cover W8500 in the twenty-third embodiment is formed in a parallelogram when viewed in cross section. In this embodiment, a pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b are formed to be inclined with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat portion W220).
Specifically, it is formed to be inclined rightward (arrow R direction) as it goes from the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction side) toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow F direction side). It should be noted that it may be formed so as to be inclined leftward (in the direction of the arrow L) as it goes from the opposite side of the sealing seal WSL toward the sealing seal WSL.
As a result, when cutting the connecting piece W8531b using a cutting tool (not shown), from the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction side) toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow F direction side) The tip of the cutting tool can be easily rotated toward the right side (direction of arrow R). As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be received in the recess W224b, and the sealing WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool. Therefore, it is possible to make the worker (clerk) easily aware that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1363(b) and 1363(c), the protective cover W9500 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1363(b) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W9100 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 1363(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W9100 taken along line MCDLc-MCDLc in FIG. 1363(b).
As shown in FIGS. 1363(b) and 1363(c), the connecting piece W9531b of the protective cover W9500 in the twenty-fourth embodiment extends in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB) in a cross-sectional view and is formed into a substantially vertically elongated rectangle. and the end portion of the first portion W9531b1 on the side of the engaging portion W530a and the rib portion W511 (connecting portion W512), and extends along the extending direction of the rib portion W511 (connecting portion W512). , and a second portion W9531b2 that is formed in a laterally elongated substantially rectangular shape in a cross-sectional view.
The first portion W9531b1 is arranged substantially in the center in the extending direction of the second portion W9531b2. The surfaces of the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9531b2 formed on the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL are arranged on substantially the same plane, and the facing distance between the first part W9531b1 and the sealing seal WSL is greater than the facing distance. The facing distance between the second part W9531b2 and the sealing seal WSL is reduced.

As a result, when cutting the first portion W9531b1 with a cutting tool (not shown), the tip of the cutting tool can be easily received in the space formed by the recess W224b, and the sealing seal WSL can easily be damaged by the tip of the cutting tool. can. Therefore, it is possible to make the worker (clerk) easily aware that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
In addition, the first portion W9531b1 is formed smaller than the second portion W9531b2 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). This makes it easier to cut the first portion W9531b1 than the second portion W9531b2.
In cross-sectional view, the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9531b2 have substantially the same cross-sectional area. As a result, when the protective cover W9500 is molded with a resin mold, the difference in cross-sectional area between the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9531b2 can be suppressed, and the moldability of the protective cover W9500 (connecting piece W9531b) can be ensured.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1364, the board box Wa100 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 1364(a) and 1364(c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box Wa100 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b). FIG. 1364(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wa100 taken along line MCDLIb--MCDLIb in FIG. 1364(a). FIG. 1364(c) illustrates a state in which the protective cover Wa500 is displaced leftward (in the direction of arrow L) from the state in FIG. 1364(a). Also, in the description of FIG. 1364, FIG. 1354 will be referred to as appropriate.
As shown in FIGS. 1364(a) and 1364(b), the protective cover Wa500 of the board box Wa100 in the twenty-fifth embodiment has a cut portion Wa550 protruding from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502 of the protective cover Wa500. Prepare. The cutting portion Wa550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL.
By protruding the cut portion Wa550 from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502, the strength of (the left wall portion W502 of) the protective cover Wa500 can be improved. This makes it difficult to damage the protective cover Wa500.
The amount of protrusion of the cut portion Wa550 is formed to be smaller than the distance between the opposing left wall portion W502 and the sealing seal WSL in the regulated state. This can prevent the cutting portion Wa550 from cutting the sealing seal WSL in the regulated state.

The cutting portion Wa550 is arranged to face notch portions W226 and W325 formed in the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320 in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction). The dimension of the cut portion Wa550 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows UD) is slightly smaller than the distance between the pair of end wall portions W223 and W321, and is slightly smaller than the distance between the two ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction. is also formed large.
Further, the cutting portion Wa550 is arranged at a position deviated from the approximate center of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) toward the rear wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side). As a result, for example, the protective cover Wa500 can be connected to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 with the front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 in opposite postures (posture in which the rear wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520). , it is possible to prevent the cut portion Wa550 from being disposed facing the notch portions W226 and W325. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the function of the cutting part Wa550.
The cutting portion Wa550 is formed to have a smaller dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) from the inner side surface of the protective cover Wa500 toward the projecting tip side (arrow R direction side) of the cutting portion Wa550. In addition, the protruding tip side (arrow R direction side) of the cut portion Wa550 is formed in a sawtooth shape in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. be done. As a result, the cutting portion Wa550 is displaced toward the spaces formed in the notch portions W226 and W325, thereby making it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.
As shown in FIG. 1364(a), the rear wall portion Wa510 and the front wall portion Wa520 of the protective cover Wa500 are wider in the horizontal direction than the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 of the protective cover W500 in the sixteenth embodiment. The dimension in (direction of arrows LR) is formed to be small. As a result, in the regulated state, the right (arrow R direction) end of the rear wall Wa510 and the right end of the front wall Wa520, the side wall W212 of the box cover W200, and the left of the box base W300 A gap is formed with the wall W302 (see FIGS. 1354(b) and 1354(d)). Such a gap is formed to be larger than the distance between the sealing seal WSL and the concave portion formed on the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL in the sawtooth shape formed in the cut portion Wa550.

On the other hand, the end on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion W530a abuts against the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. As a result, the rightward displacement of the protective cover Wa500 is restricted, and the restricted state is maintained. The right side (arrow R direction) end of the engaging portion W530b is brought into contact with the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300 (see FIG. 1355), so that the protective cover Wa500 is pushed to the right side. Displacement may be regulated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1364(c), the cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the cutting portion Wa550 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1364(c), by cutting off the engaging portions W530a and W530b (see FIG. 1356), the protective cover Wa500 moves toward the sealing unit W400 (arrow R direction, see FIG. 1349). Displacement is possible. By displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the sealing unit W400 side, the cutting portion Wa550 can be received in the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL is cut by the cutting portion Wa550.
Here, the pair of end wall portions W223 and W321 abut against the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, thereby suppressing the displacement of the protective cover Wa500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). can. Therefore, the cutting portion Wa550 can maintain a state of facing the notch portions W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by the cutting portion Wa550.
In this embodiment, in order to remove the protective cover Wa500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut, and the protective cover Wa500 is moved to the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction, see FIG. 1349). There is no need to separately perform the work for enabling the displacement to the direction, and the work can be efficiently performed as a series of tasks.

As described above, in the regulated state, the right (arrow R direction) end of the rear wall Wa510, the right end of the front wall Wa520, the side wall W212 of the box cover W200, and the box base W300 The gap formed between the left wall portion W302 of the cutting portion Wa550 is larger than the distance between the sealing seal WSL and the concave portion formed on the opposite side of the sealing seal WSL in the sawtooth shape formed in the cutting portion Wa550. Since it is formed large, the entire sawtooth shape formed in the cut portion Wa550 can be received in the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325. As a result, the sealing seal WSL is cut between both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the sealing seal WSL is separated into the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side.
In addition, by displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the right side (arrow R direction side), the right side (arrow R direction side) of the rear wall portion Wa510 and the right side of the front wall portion Wa520 are displaced. The end portion contacts the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300 (see FIG. 1355). This restricts the rightward displacement of the protective cover Wa500.
The rightward displacement of the protective cover Wa500 may be restricted by the cut portion Wa550 coming into contact with the cutouts W226 and W325. In this case, the seal WSL can be attached to the notch portions W226 and W325 by the cutting portion Wa550. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the seal WSL from the cutouts W226 and W325. As a result, when the sealing seal WSL is peeled off from the cutouts W226 and W325, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged, and the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL can be easily recognized by the worker (clerk).
In this embodiment, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the side wall portion W212 (the direction of the arrow R). As a result, for example, even if the worker (clerk) does not have a cutting tool, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily opened.

Since the cutting portion Wa550 is disposed facing the cutout portions W226 and W325 formed in the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), the cutout portion is closed by the sealing seal WSL. Even when W226 and W325 are shielded, the cut portion Wa550 can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325.
Since the cut portion Wa550 protrudes from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502, it is possible to prevent the cut portion Wa550 from being exposed from the box-shaped protective cover Wa500. As a result, workers (clerks) can be prevented from being injured by coming into contact with the cutting portion Wa550 during the work of cutting the sealing seal WSL, the work of manufacturing or transporting the substrate box Wa100 and the protective cover Wa500, and the like.
Also, since the cut portion Wa550 protrudes from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502, the cut portion Wa550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wa500. In other words, the protective cover Wa500 is formed larger than the cut portion Wa550. Therefore, the worker (clerk) can cut the sealing seal WSL using the cutting portion Wa550 by gripping the protective cover Wa500, and can easily perform the cutting work.
The protective cover Wa500 (cutting portion Wa550) is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin molding die. low sex. On the other hand, since a space is formed by the cutouts W226 and W325 on the sticking surface side of the sealing seal WSL, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut even when the cutability of the cutting portion Wa550 is low.

Next, the board box Wb100 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1365 and 1366. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1365(a) is a front view of the protective cover Wb500 of the board box Wb100 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 1365(b) is a side view of the protective cover Wb500 viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIIb in FIG. 1365(a). FIG. 1365(c) is a rear view of the protective cover Wb500 viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLIIc in FIG. 1365(b). FIG. 1366(a) is a rear view of the board box Wb100, FIG. 1366(b) is a side view of the board box Wb100 viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIIIb in FIG. 1366(a), and FIG. FIG. 1366(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wb100 taken along line MCDLIIIc-MCDLIIIc in FIG. 1366(b).
1365 and 1366 illustrate a state in which the engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b are disconnected from the protective cover Wb500. Also, in FIG. 1365, the engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and in FIG. 1366(b), the cutting portion Wb550 and the guide portion Wb560 are illustrated by broken lines. Spaces formed in protective cover Wb500 by cutting engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b from protective cover Wb500 are defined as spaces WS1 and WS2, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 1365, the protective cover Wb500 of the board box Wb100 in the twenty-sixth embodiment includes an engaging portion Wb530a and a cutting portion Wb550 connected to the rear wall portion W510, and an engaging portion Wb530a and cut portion Wb550 connected to the front wall portion W520. Wb530b and a guide portion Wb560 are provided.

The engaging portion Wb530a includes a relief portion Wb534a. The relief portion Wb534a is a portion for suppressing contact between the engaging portion Wb530a and the cutting portion Wb550, and is located downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the upper surface of the engaging portion Wb530a at a position overlapping the cutting portion Wb550 when viewed from the rear. side).
The bottom surface of the escape portion Wb534a (the surface formed on the lower side) is formed below (in the direction of the arrow D) a blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550, which will be described later. The side surfaces of the portion Wb534a are formed on both left and right end sides of the support portion Wb551 and the blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550, which will be described later. This suppresses contact between the engaging portion Wb530a and the cutting portion Wb550.
Before the engagement portion Wb530a is cut, the relief portion Wb534a is formed to surround the cut portion Wb550. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator (clerk) from coming into contact with the cutting part Wa550 and being injured.
The cutting portion Wb550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL, and protrudes toward the engaging portion Wb530a (arrow D direction) from the rib portion W511 disposed on the upper side (arrow U direction side). and a blade portion Wb552 that protrudes from the projecting distal end portion of the supporting portion Wb551 toward the distal end side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion Wb530a.

The support portion Wb551 is a portion for supporting the blade portion Wb552 with a predetermined gap provided between the rib portion W511 and the blade portion Wb552. The blade portion Wb552 includes a cylindrical base portion supported by the support portion Wb551 and a conical tip portion at the protruding tip portion of the base portion. By forming the tip into a conical shape, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.
The cutting portion Wb550 protrudes toward the engaging portion Wb530a side (arrow U direction side) from the rib portion W511 disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side), and the relief portion Wb534a protrudes from the engaging portion Wb530a. may be recessed upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the lower surface of the .
The engaging portion Wb530b is connected to a pair of rib portion W521 and connecting portion W522 provided on the upper side (arrow U direction side), and includes an escape portion Wb534b. The relief portion Wb534b is a portion for suppressing contact between the engagement portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560. side).
The bottom surface of the relief portion Wb534b (the surface formed on the upper side) is formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the projecting tip portion of the guide portion Wb560, and the relief portion Wb534b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). are formed on both left and right sides of the side surfaces of the guide portion Wb560 in the left and right direction. This suppresses contact between the engaging portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560.

Further, by forming the escape portion Wb534b, when the engaging portion Wb530b is separated from the protective cover Wb500, the engaging hole W533 is disengaged from the projection W312c (see FIG. 1354). Contact between the engaging portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560 can be easily suppressed when the portion Wb530b is displaced, and the engaging portion Wb530b can be easily removed from the box base Wb300.
The guide portion Wb560 is a portion for maintaining the posture of the protective cover Wb500 when the sealing seal WSL is cut by the cutting portion Wb550. It protrudes upward from the rib portion W521 arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side). The guide portion Wb560 is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the tip portion of the blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction).
The guide portion Wb560 extends downward from the rib portion W521 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the pair of rib portions W521 arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side). The engaging portion Wb530b protrudes, and the relief portion Wb534b is recessed downward from the upper surface of the engaging portion Wb530b connected to the pair of rib portions W521 and connecting portion W522 provided on the lower side. Also good.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1366, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wb500 (cutting portion Wb550) will be described. In this embodiment, the projection length of the projection Wb324 of the box base Wb300 is formed to be smaller than the projection length of the projection W324 in the sixteenth embodiment, and the plane portion W220 and the surface of the plane portion W320 facing each other are formed. are formed with a small interval between the opposite surfaces. A pair of end wall portions W223 and W321 (see FIG. 1353) are not formed on the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320.

FIG. 1366 shows that the protective cover Wb500, in which the spaces WS1 and WS2 are formed by cutting the engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b, is rotated counterclockwise as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIIIb, so that the spaces WS1 and WS2 are formed with a flat portion W220 and a flat portion. W320 is arranged, and the state where blade part Wb552 is arranged in the space formed by notch parts W226 and W325 is illustrated.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the protective cover Wb500 includes the cutting portion Wb550. Therefore, even if the worker (clerk) does not have a cutting tool, the work of opening the box cover Wb200 and the box base Wb300 can be performed. can be easily done.
The cut portion Wb550 is made visible by being arranged in the space WS1. As a result, the cutting portion Wb550 can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.
Further, the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320 are arranged in the space WS2, so that the guide portion Wb560 and the projecting portion W324 can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, the protection cover Wb500 can be prevented from rotating about the vertical direction (the direction of arrows UD), and the cutting portion Wb550 can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325.

Since the cut portion Wb550 protrudes from the rib portion W511 of the protective cover Wb500, the cut portion Wb550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wb500. In other words, the protective cover Wb500 is formed larger than the cut portion Wb550. Therefore, the worker (clerk) can cut the sealing seal WSL using the cutting portion Wb550 by gripping the protective cover Wb500, and can easily perform the cutting work.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1367, the board box Wc100 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1367(a) is a side view of the protective cover Wc500 of the board box Wc100 in the twenty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 1367(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wc100 taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b). is. FIG. 1367(b) illustrates a state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using the protective cover Wc500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wb300.
As shown in FIG. 1367(a), the protective cover Wc500 of the board box Wc100 in the twenty-seventh embodiment has a cutting portion Wc550. The cutting portion Wc550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL, and is cut from the rear wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side) to the front wall portion W520 at the end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the standing portion Wc540. It is formed so as to protrude toward the side (arrow F direction side).

The upright length of the upright portion Wc540 of the protective cover Wc500 on the side opposite to the lower wall portion W501 (arrow D direction side) with respect to the lower wall portion W501 is equal to the length of the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The distance between the rear surface of the plane portion W220 and the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325 is substantially the same.
Next, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wc500 (cutting portion Wc550) will be described with reference to FIG. 1367(b). Note that in FIG. 1367(b), the protective cover Wc500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 has changed its attitude. Specifically, the cut portion Wc550 (upright portion Wc540) is oriented from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side).
Since the protective cover Wc500 has the cutting portion Wc550, even if the worker (clerk) does not have a cutting tool, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily opened.
As described above, the upright length of the upright portion Wc540 on the side opposite to the lower wall portion W501 (arrow D direction side) with respect to the lower wall portion W501 is equal to the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Since the distance between the back surface of the plane portion W220 and the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325 is substantially the same, the lower wall portion W501 is brought into contact with the plane portion W220 via the sealing seal WSL. This allows the cut portion Wc550 to face the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325. In other words, the position of the cut portion Wc550 and the position of the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.

Accordingly, even when the notches W226 and W325 are blocked by the sealing seal WSL, the cut portion Wc550 can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325. By sliding the protective cover Wc500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) while maintaining the contact between the lower wall portion W501 and the flat portion W220, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.
Since cut portion Wc550 protrudes from standing portion Wc540 of protective cover Wc500, cut portion Wc550 is formed smaller than protective cover Wc500. In other words, protective cover Wc500 is formed larger than cut portion Wc550. Therefore, the worker (clerk) can cut the sealing seal WSL using the cutting portion Wc550 by gripping the protective cover Wc500, and can easily perform the cutting work.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1368, the board box Wd100 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
1368(a) is a front view of the protective cover Wd500 of the board box Wd100 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and FIG. 1368(b) is a side view of the protective cover Wd500 viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLVb in FIG. 1368(a). FIG. 1368(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wd100 taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b). FIG. 1368(b) shows a state in which the cut engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the standing portion Wd540, and FIG. 1368(c) shows the protective cover removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wb300. A state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using Wd500 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 1368(a) and 1368(b), the protective cover Wd500 of the board box Wd100 in the twenty-eighth embodiment includes a guide portion Wd560. The standing portion Wd540 is arranged at a position substantially in the center of the lower wall portion W501 in the plate thickness direction (arrow LR direction) of the left wall portion W502.
The dimension of the standing portion Wd540 in the plate thickness direction (arrow LR direction) of the left wall portion W502 is the same as that of the engagement hole W533 of the engaging portion Wd530a in the plate thickness direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower wall portion W501. It is formed to have approximately the same size or a little smaller size. In addition, the dimension of the erected portion Wd540 in the facing direction (arrow FB direction) between the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 is the dimension between the inner surfaces of the engagement hole W533 in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502. is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than As a result, as shown in FIG. 1368(b), the erected portion Wd540 can be fitted (engaged) with the engaging hole W533, and the engaging portion Wd530a cut from the protective cover Wd500 is attached (held) to the protective cover Wd500. can do.
The dimension of the standing portion Wd540 in the plate thickness direction (arrow LR direction) of the left wall portion W502 is the same as that of the engaging portion Wd530a in the plate thickness direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower wall portion W501. , and the dimension of the upright portion Wd540 in the opposing direction (arrow FB direction) between the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 is the same as the engagement hole W533 in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502. may be formed slightly larger than the dimensions of the inner surfaces of the . By engaging the standing portion Wd540 with the engaging hole W533 while elastically deforming the standing portion Wd540, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion Wd530a from coming off the protective cover Wd500. In addition, in a state where the engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the protective cover Wd500, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the engaging portion Wd530a with respect to the protective cover Wd500. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut using the engaging portion Wd530a.
The front wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 of the erected portion Wd540 are in the opposite posture (the posture in which the rear wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520), and the protective cover W500 is connected to the box cover Wb200 and the box base Wb300. and the function of attaching (holding) the engaging portion Wd530a. The manufacturing cost of the protective cover Wd500 can be reduced. Moreover, the mounting portion (holding portion) of the engaging portion Wd530a can be simplified. In addition, the portion provided on the outer surface of the protective cover Wd500 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in disposing the protective cover Wd500 can be improved.

The connecting portion W512 is not formed on the rear wall portion W510 (see FIG. 1353), and the connecting piece W531a of the engaging portion Wd530a is connected to the left wall portion W502. Further, since the connecting portion W512 is not formed, the dimension of the engaging portion Wd530a in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502 is larger than that of the engaging portion W530a in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1354). It is formed. In the present embodiment, the distance between the inner surface of the engagement hole W533 and the connecting piece W531a on the side of the connecting piece W531a (direction of the arrow L) is the distance between the standing portion Wd540 on the side of the front wall portion W520 (direction of the arrow F). The distance between the front surface and the front surface of the front wall portion W520 formed on the opposite side of the rear wall portion W510 is formed larger than the distance between them.
Accordingly, in a state where the engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the protective cover Wd500, the cut surface of the connecting piece W531a can be disposed on the opposite side of the rear wall portion W510 from the front wall portion W520.
When the sealing seal WSL is cut using the protective cover Wd500 (engaging portion Wd530a), the guide portion Wd560 engages with the space formed by the notch portion W226 of the plane portion W220 and the notch portion W325 of the plane portion W320. This is a portion for facilitating disposition of the connecting piece W531a of the portion Wd530a. The guide portion Wd560 is formed in a plate shape, and is arranged in a posture in which the plate thickness direction of the guide portion Wd560 is aligned with the plate thickness direction (arrow LR direction) of the left wall portion W502.
The distance between the guide surface Wd561 formed on the lower wall portion W501 side (arrow D direction side) of the guide portion Wd560 and the outer surface of the lower wall portion W501 is the distance between the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). 1368(c)).

Next, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wd500 (engagement portion Wd530a) will be described with reference to FIG. 1368(c). Note that in FIG. 1368(c), the protective cover Wd500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wb300 has changed its posture. Specifically, the front wall portion W520 faces the projecting portion W324 of the box base W300 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).
As described above, the distance between the guide surface Wd561 formed on the lower wall portion W501 side (arrow D direction side) of the guide portion Wd560 and the outer surface of the lower wall portion W501 is ) of the box cover W200 and the space formed by the cutouts W226 and W325. is brought into contact with the front surface of the flat portion W320, the cut connecting piece W531a of the engaging portion Wd530a can be made to face the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325. In other words, the position of the connecting piece W531a and the position of the space formed by the cutouts W226 and W325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.
As a result, even when the cutouts W226 and W325 are blocked by the sealing seal WSL, the connecting piece W531a can be easily arranged in the space formed by the cutouts W226 and W325. By sliding the protective cover Wd500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) while maintaining the contact between the guide surface Wd561 and the front surface of the flat portion W320, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.
Since the protective cover Wd500 is formed larger than the engaging portion Wd530a, the operator (clerk) can cut the sealing seal WSL using the engaging portion Wd530a (connection piece W531a) by gripping the protective cover Wd500. , the cutting work can be easily performed.

Next, the substrate box We100 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1369(a) and 1369(b). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1369(a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover We500 of the board box We100 in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 1369(b) is a partial cross section of the board box We100 taken along line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b). It is a diagram. Note that FIG. 1369(b) illustrates a state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using the cut engaging portion Wd530a.
As shown in FIG. 1369(a), the protective cover We500 of the board box We100 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment has no connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 1353), and has a pair of engaging portions We530a and a connecting portion W512 that are connected to each other. connecting piece We531a.
The distance between the engaging portion We530a and the connecting portion W512, that is, the length of extension of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is formed shorter than the recess depth of the space formed by the notches We226 and We325.

The cutouts We226 and We325 are respectively recessed toward the side opposite to the facing surface of the flat portion e220 and the projecting portion We324, and the space formed by the cutouts We226 and We325 has It is formed in a substantially U shape. The distance between the cutouts We226 and We325 facing each other is substantially equal to or slightly larger than the width dimension of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). This makes it possible to receive the pair of connecting pieces We531a cut into the space formed by the notches We226 and We325.
In addition, the notch dimensions of the notch parts We226 and We325 toward the side wall part W212 side (arrow R direction side) are slightly larger than the extension dimension of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). formed large.
The distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a facing each other is approximately the distance between the front surface of the flat portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). They are formed identically (see FIG. 1369(b)).
Next, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the engagement portion We530a will be described with reference to FIG. 1369(b). In addition, in FIG. 1369(b), the posture of the engaging portion We530a separated from the protective cover We500 is changed. More specifically, the pair of connecting pieces We531a of the engaging portion We530a are positioned to face the protruding portion We324 of the box base We300 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).

As described above, the distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a facing each other is the distance between the front surface of the flat portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Since the distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a is substantially the same as the distance between the two connecting pieces We531a, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is cut off by bringing the opposing surface of one of the pair of connecting pieces We531a into contact with the front surface of the flat portion We320 via the sealing seal WSL. It can face the space formed by the cutouts We226 and We325. In other words, the position of the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the position of the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.
As a result, even when the cutouts We226 and We325 are blocked by the sealing seal WSL, the opposing surface of one of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be brought into contact with the front surface of the flat portion We320. Thus, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be received (arranged) in the space formed by the notches We226 and We325. While maintaining contact between one facing surface of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the front surface of the flat portion We320, the engagement portion We530a is slid vertically (in the direction of the arrow UD) to form the sealing seal WSL. Can be easily cut.
In addition, the notch dimensions of the notch parts We226 and We325 toward the side wall part W212 side (arrow R direction side) are slightly larger than the extension dimension of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). By being formed large, it is possible to prevent the cut-side ends of the pair of cut connecting pieces We531a from coming into contact with the bottom surfaces of the cutouts We226 and We325 on the side wall W212 side. Damage can be suppressed.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since the sealing seal WSL can be cut using the engaging portion We530a that is formed smaller than the protective cover We500, the pair of both end walls of the engaging portion We530a and the flat portions W220 and W320 can be cut. It is possible to suppress interference with the portions W223 and W321 (see FIG. 1353) and easily cut the sealing seal WSL.

Further, when the pair of connecting pieces We531a are connected to the protective cover We500 (the state before the pair of connecting pieces We531a are cut), the pair of connecting pieces We531a does not have a cut portion. It is possible to prevent a person (clerk) from contacting the cut portion of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and being injured.
Next, the protective cover Wf500 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1369(c) and 1369(d). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1369(c) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wf500 in the thirtieth embodiment, and FIG. 1369(d) is a partial sectional view of the protective cover Wf500 taken along line MCDLVId-MCDLVId in FIG. 1369(c).
As shown in FIGS. 1369(c) and 1369(d), the engaging portion Wf530a of the protective cover Wf500 in the thirtieth embodiment includes a cutting portion Wf550.

In the engaging portion Wf530a, as compared with the engaging portion W530a in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1354), the connecting piece W531b is displaced by a predetermined distance toward the side opposite to the connecting portion W512 (in the direction of the arrow R). A cutting portion Wf550 is formed at the end of the engaging portion Wf530a on the connecting portion W512 side (arrow L direction side). A pair of cut portions Wf550 are formed to face the pair of rib portions W511.
The cutting portion Wf550 is formed so that the dimension in the plate thickness direction decreases from the center side of the engaging portion Wf530a toward both end sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). That is, the tip of the cutting portion Wf550 is formed sharp. This makes it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.
On the other hand, the cut portion Wf550 is disposed closer to the connecting portion W512 than the pair of connecting pieces W531b (in the direction of the arrow L, opposite to the engaging hole W533). It does not affect the engagement with the projection W221 (see Fig. 1355). In other words, the formation of the cut portion Wf550 can prevent the elasticity of the engaging portion Wf530a from being reduced.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging force for attaching the protective cover Wf500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 1354) from being reduced due to the formation of the cut portion Wf550.

Further, the cutting portion Wf550 is arranged to face the rib portion W511 and the connecting portion W512. As a result, before the engaging portion Wf530a is separated from the protective cover Wf500, it is possible to prevent the worker (clerk) from contacting the cutting portion Wf550 and being injured.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1370(a) and 1370(b), the protective cover Wg500 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1370(a) is a partial rear view of protective cover Wg500 in the thirty-first embodiment, and FIG. 1370(b) is a partial sectional view of protective cover Wg500 taken along line MCDLVIIb-MCDLVIIb in FIG. 1370(a).
As shown in FIGS. 1370(a) and 1370(b), the protective cover Wg500 in the thirty-first embodiment has no connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 1353), and the engaging portion Wg530a and the connecting portion W512 are connected. A pair of connecting pieces Wg531a are provided.

The pair of connecting pieces Wg531a is formed such that the cross-sectional area of the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a becomes smaller in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. . In other words, the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a is formed in a shape in which a pair of truncated pyramids are connected from the side of the connecting portion W512 and the side of the engaging portion Wg530a toward the opposing portion between the connecting portion W512 and the engaging portion Wg530a. .
This makes it easier to cut the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a when separating the engaging portion Wg530a from the protective cover Wg500. 1370(b) between the connecting portion W512 and the engaging portion Wg530a is formed to be constant, The cut portions of the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a are sharply formed. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.
Next, the substrate box Wh100 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1370(c). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1370(c) is a partial rear view of the board box Wh100 in the thirty-second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1370(c), the protective cover Wh500 of the board box Wh100 in the thirty-second embodiment includes a restricting portion Wh570.
The restricting portion Wh570 is a portion for restricting the engaging portion W530a from being elastically deformed illegally. The restricting portion Wh570 is arranged on the tip side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion W530a relative to the pair of connecting pieces W531b, and is located on the opposite side of the engaging portion W530a to the front wall portion W520 (see FIG. 1353) ( arrow B direction side).
As a result, even if the engaging portion W530a is illegally elastically deformed in order to disengage the projection W221 of the flat portion W220 and the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion W530a, the engaging portion W530a and the engaging portion W530a can be regulated. The contact with the portion Wh570 can restrict the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530a. As a result, unauthorized removal of the protective cover Wh500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 1353) can be easily suppressed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1371, the board box Wi100 in the thirty-third embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

1371(a) is a side view of the protective cover Wi500 of the board box Wi100 in the thirty-third embodiment, FIG. 1371(b) is a side view of the board box Wi100, and FIG. 1371(c) is FIG. FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wi100 taken along line MCDLVIIIc-MCDLVIIIc in (b). Note that FIG. 1371 illustrates a state in which the engaging portion W530a is separated from the protective cover Wi500.
As shown in FIG. 1371(a), the protective cover Wi500 of the board box Wi100 in the thirty-third embodiment has a rear wall W510 instead of the front wall W520 of the protective cover W500 in the sixteenth embodiment. . More specifically, a pair of rear wall portions W510 are provided at both ends of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The pair of rear wall portions W510 are arranged in a symmetrical posture in a side view shown in FIG. 1371(a). Also, the pair of rear wall portions W510 includes the engagement portion We530 and the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the twenty-ninth embodiment (see FIGS. 1369(c) and 1369(d)).
Next, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wi500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1371(b) and 1371(c). In addition, in FIGS. 1371(b) and 1371(c), the posture of the protective cover Wi500 is changed. More specifically, the pair of connecting pieces We531a of the protective cover Wi500 are positioned to face the projecting portion We324 of the box base We300 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). In this embodiment, a state in which the pair of connecting pieces We531a are cut off on the side of the engaging portion We530a rather than on the side of the connecting portion W512 is illustrated.
The distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a facing each other is approximately the distance between the front surface of the flat portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Since they are formed identically, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is brought into contact with the front surface of the flat portion We320 via the sealing seal WSL so that the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is brought into contact with the notch portions We226 and We325. It can be made to face the space formed by In other words, the position of the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the position of the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.

Accordingly, even when the notches We226 and We325 are blocked by the sealing seal WSL, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notches We226 and We325. While maintaining contact between one facing surface of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the front surface of the flat portion We320, the engagement portion We530a is slid vertically (in the direction of the arrow UD) to form the sealing seal WSL. Can be easily cut.
In the present embodiment, by cutting the sealing seal WSL using a pair of connecting pieces We531a formed on the protective cover Wi500, using a pair of connecting pieces We531a formed on the engaging portion We530a in the twenty-ninth embodiment, Compared to the case of cutting the sealing seal WSL, the worker (clerk) can easily hold the protective cover Wi500 and can easily perform the cutting work.
Next, the board box Wj100 in the thirty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1372 to 1374. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1372(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wj100 in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 1372(b) is a partial side view of the board box Wj100 as viewed in the direction of the arrow MCDLIXb in FIG. 1372(a). FIG. 1372(c) is a rear view of the protective cover Wj500. Figures 1373(a) and 1373(c) are rear views of the board box Wj100 in the MCDLXa section of Figure 1372(a), and Figure 1373(b) is a board view along the MCDLXb-MCDLXb line of Figure 1373(a). FIG. 1373(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wj100 taken along line MCDLXd--MCDLXd in FIG. 1373(c). FIG. 1374(a) is a rear view of the board box Wj100 in the MCDLXa portion of FIG. 1372(a), and FIG. 1374(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wj100 along the line MCDLXIb-MCDLXIb in FIG. 1374(a). is.

1372(a) and 1372(b) illustrate a state in which the protective cover Wj500 is removed from the box cover Wj200 and the box base W300. Further, in FIGS. 1373(a), 1373(c) and 1374(a), illustration of the rear wall portion Wj214a is partially omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 1372(a) and 1372(b), the box cover Wj200 of the board box Wj100 in the thirty-fourth embodiment has elastic deformation restricting means instead of the protrusion W221 in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1353). Wj230 is provided.
The rear wall portion Wj214a of the cover portion Wj214 is formed so as to protrude toward the projecting tip side (arrow L direction side) from the rear wall portion W214a in the sixteenth embodiment, and overlaps the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 in a rear view. is placed in On the front surface of the rear wall portion Wj214a, in a second regulated state described later, a regulating wall portion Wj214b protrudes toward the second regulating portion Wj250 (arrow F direction) at a position facing the second regulating portion Wj250. It is formed. The restricting wall portion Wj214b is a portion for restricting elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500.
A notch Wj227 is formed in the planar portion Wj220 at a position corresponding to the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, and a second restricting portion Wj250 of the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, which will be described later, is disposed in the space formed by the notch Wj227. be.

The dimension of the plane portion Wj220 and the plane portion Wj320 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows UD) is formed smaller than the dimension of the plane portion W220 and the plane portion W320 (see FIG. 1353) in the sixteenth embodiment, and the protective cover Wj500 is smaller. With the flat portion Wj220 and the flat portion Wj320 arranged inside, the protective cover Wj500 is vertically displaceable with respect to the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300.
The elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 is for suppressing unauthorized elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 in the restricted state, and includes a first restricting portion Wj240 and a second restricting portion Wj250. Note that FIGS. 1373 and 1374 are appropriately referred to in the description of the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230.
The first restricting portion Wj240 is a portion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 toward the left side (arrow L direction side) in the restricted state, and is located from the rear surface of the plane portion Wj220 toward the rear wall portion Wj214a ( arrow B direction side). The first restricting portion Wj240 is formed with an inclined portion Wj241 inclined toward the rear wall portion Wj214a from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side).
The second restricting portion Wj250 is a part for restricting displacement of the protective cover Wj500 downward (direction of arrow D) in the restricting state, and the displacement of the protection cover Wj500 downward (direction of arrow D) is restricted in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). It is disposed facing the portion Wj240. The second restricting portion Wj250 includes a plate-like supporting portion Wj251 protruding from the side wall of the planar portion Wj220 formed by the notch Wj227 toward the first restricting portion Wj240 (direction of the arrow D), and the supporting portion Wj251. and an engaging portion Wj252 that protrudes from the projecting tip portion of the engaging portion Wj252 toward the regulating wall portion Wj214b side (arrow B direction side).

The support portion Wj251 is disposed in a posture in which the plate thickness direction of the support portion Wj251 is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the plate thickness of the support portion Wj251 is smaller than the plate thickness of the plane portion Wj220. It is formed. Accordingly, when an external force in the front-rear direction is applied to the second restricting portion Wj250, the support portion Wj251 can be elastically deformed with respect to the plane portion Wj220.
The engaging portion Wj252 faces toward the regulating wall portion Wj214b (arrow B direction) as it goes from the first regulating portion Wj240 side (arrow D direction side) toward the opposite side (arrow U direction side) to the first regulating portion Wj240. formed with a slant. The upper surface of the engaging portion Wj252 formed on the opposite side (arrow U direction side) to the first restricting portion Wj240 is formed perpendicular to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
As shown in FIG. 1372(c), the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 is smaller in size in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) than the engaging portion W530a in the sixteenth embodiment. As a result, even when the protective cover Wj500 is vertically displaced from the state in which the flat portions Wj220 and Wj320 are disposed inside the protective cover Wj500, the contact between the engaging portion Wj530a and the cover portion Wj214 is minimized. contact can be suppressed.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1373 and 1374, attachment of protective cover Wj500 to box cover Wj200 and box base Wj300 will be described. First, the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 is opposed to the position where the restricting wall portion Wj214b of the cover portion Wj214 is not formed in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows UD), and the protective cover Wj500 is connected to the box cover Wj200 and the box base. It is displaced toward the Wj300 side (arrow R direction side).

The contact between the tip of the engaging portion Wj530a and the inclined portion Wj241 of the first restricting portion Wj240 causes the engaging portion Wj530a to be elastically deformed toward the projecting tip of the first restricting portion Wj240 (arrow B direction). be done.
As shown in FIGS. 1373(a) and 1373(b), the contact between the rear wall portion Wj510 and the side wall portion W212 directs the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 to the right (arrow R direction). The displacement of all protective covers Wj500 is regulated (hereinafter referred to as "first regulated state").
In the first restricting state, the first restricting portion Wj240 is arranged inside the engaging hole W533 of the protective cover Wj500, and the elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wj530a is released. Further, in the first restricted state, the inner wall of the engagement hole W533 and the surface formed on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the first restriction portion Wj240 come into contact with each other, so that the left side of the protective cover Wj500 Displacement toward (direction of arrow L) is regulated.
Next, as shown in FIGS. 1373(c) and 1373(d), by displacing the protective cover Wj500 upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the first restricted state, the upper end portion of the engaging portion Wj530a is and the engaging portion Wj252 of the second restricting portion Wj250 are in contact with each other, and the second restricting portion Wj250 is elastically deformed toward the opposite side (arrow F direction side) of the rear wall portion Wj214a of the cover portion Wj214.

Here, since the plate thickness of the support portion Wj251 is formed to be smaller than the plate thickness of the flat portion Wj220, the support portion Wj251 is elastically deformed by the upper end portion of the engaging portion Wj530a, and the upper side of the protective cover Wj500 (in the direction of the arrow U). side) is allowed.
Next, as shown in FIGS. 1374(a) and 1374(b), the inner wall of the engagement hole W533 and the surface formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first restricting portion Wj240 come into contact with each other. , the upward displacement of the protective cover Wj500 (in the direction of the arrow U) is restricted (hereinafter referred to as the “second restricted state”).
In the second restricted state, the contact between the inner wall of the engaging hole W533 and the surface formed on the upper side (the arrow U direction side) of the engaging portion Wj252 causes the lower side (the arrow D direction side) of the protective cover Wj500. ) is regulated. As a result, the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 from the second restricted state to the first restricted state is restricted.
Further, in the second restricted state, at least a part of the engaging portion Wj530a is arranged at a position overlapping the restricting wall portion Wj214b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Therefore, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wj530a toward the back side (arrow B direction side) is restricted by coming into contact with the restricting wall portion Wj214b. In other words, in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wj500 from the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300, the first restricting portion Wj240 and the second restricting portion Wj250 are disengaged from the engaging portion Wj530a (engaging hole W533). is regulated by the regulating wall portion Wj214b.

As described above, in a rear view, the rear wall Wj214a is arranged at a position overlapping the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, so that the second restricting portion Wj250 can be shielded. As a result, the second restricting portion Wj250 is elastically deformed illegally, making it difficult to disengage the first restricting portion Wj240 and the second restricting portion Wj250 from the engaging portion Wj530a (engaging hole W533).
These prevent the protective cover Wj500 from being illegally removed from the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300.
Next, the board box Wk100 in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1375 and 1376. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1375(a) is a partial front view of the board box Wk100 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 1375(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wk100 taken along line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb of FIG. 1375(a). FIG. 1375(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wk100 along line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc in FIG. 1375(a). FIGS. 1376(a) and 1376(c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box Wk100 taken along line MCDLXIIb-MCDLXIIb in FIG. 1375(a), and FIGS. a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wk100 taken along line MCDLXIIc-MCDLXIIc.

Note that FIG. 1375 illustrates a state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300. Further, in the present embodiment, in the protective cover W500, the engaging portion W530b arranged on the upper side (direction of arrow U) is replaced by the engaging portion W530b1, and the engaging portion arranged on the lower side (direction of arrow D). The portion W530b will be described with reference numerals different from those of the engaging portion W530b2 (see FIG. 1353).
As shown in FIG. 1375, the box base Wk300 of the board box Wk100 in the thirty-fifth embodiment replaces the projection W312c arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the pair of projections W312c in the sixteenth embodiment. (see FIG. 1354), it has a projection Wk312c. Also, the cover portion Wk312 of the box base Wk300 includes a locking portion Wk312f.
The protrusion Wk312c has an inclined portion Wk312d that inclines toward the rear side (arrow B direction) from the left side (arrow L direction side) toward the right side (arrow L direction side). The projection Wk312c is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the projection W312c in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Specifically, the boundary between the inclined portion Wk312d and the front wall portion W312a is formed on the left side of the boundary between the inclined portion W312d and the front wall portion W312a of the projection W312c, and the projection Wk312c formed on the right side of the boundary between the inclined portion W312d and the front wall portion W312a The side surface is formed on the left side of the side surface of the protrusion W312c formed on the right side. Further, the dimension of the projection Wk312 in the left-right direction is approximately half the dimension of the projection W312 in the left-right direction.
As a result, when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the contact between the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c can be made earlier than the contact between the engaging portion W530b1 and the protrusion W312c (see FIG. 1376). . Further, the engagement between the engaging portion W530b2 and the projection Wk312c is earlier than the engagement between the engaging portion W530b1 and the projection W312c (the projection W312c is arranged inside the engagement hole W533 of the engaging portion W530b1). can do In addition, in a state where the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged, the protective cover W500 can be displaced in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction).

The locking portion Wk312f is a portion for restricting the displacement of the engaging portion W530b toward the rear side (direction of arrow B), and protrudes leftward (direction of arrow L) from the left wall portion W302. be. The locking portion Wk312f includes an inclined portion Wk312g that inclines toward the rear side (arrow B direction) from the left side (arrow L direction side) toward the right side (arrow L direction side).
The distance between the engaging portion Wk312f and the protrusion Wk312c in the left-right direction is set larger than the distance between the engaging portion W530b and the inner surface of the engaging hole W533. Also, the inclined portion Wk312g is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the protective cover W500 is displaced rightward (in the direction of the arrow R) from the state in which the engaging portion W530b is engaged with the projection Wk312c, so that the tip portion of the engaging portion W530b moves toward the inclined portion Wk312g. can be abutted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1376, attachment of protective cover W500 to box cover W200 and box base Wk300 will be described. FIGS. 1376(a) and 1376(b) illustrate a state in which the protective cover W500 is being attached to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, and the engaging portion W530b1 is elastically deformed. c) and FIG. 1376(d) illustrate the board box Wk100 in the restricted state.
In the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD), the positions of the engagement holes W533 of the engagement portions W530a, W530b1, and W530b2 are aligned with the positions of the protrusion W221 of the box cover W200 and the protrusions W312c and Wk312c of the box base Wk300 ( 1353 and 1354), by displacing the protective cover W500 rightward (in the direction of the arrow R), the tip of the engaging portion W530b2 comes into contact with the inclined portion Wk312d of the projection Wk312c. The engaging portion W530b2 is elastically deformed toward the rear side (in the direction of the arrow B), thereby allowing the rightward displacement of the protective cover W500.

1376 ( As shown in b), the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged.
As described above, the protrusion Wk312c is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the protrusion W312c in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), so that the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged. In this state, as shown in FIG. 1376(a), the tip of the engaging portion W530b1 abuts the inclined portion W312d of the projection W312c, and the engaging portion W530b1 is directed toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). It is in an elastically deformed state.
In addition, since the dimension of the projection Wk312 in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) is formed to be approximately half the dimension of the projection W312 in the left-right direction, the engagement portion W530b2 and the projection Wk312c are engaged. , the protective cover W500 is allowed to be displaced rightward (in the direction of the arrow R).
Next, by displacing the protective cover W500 rightward (in the direction of arrow R) from the state in which the engaging portion W530b2 and the projection Wk312c are engaged, as shown in FIG. The portion W530b1 is engaged with the protrusion W312c, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b1 toward the rear side (the arrow B direction side) is released, and the board box Wk100 is placed in the regulated state.

As described above, the inclined portion Wk312g is formed at a position overlapping the projection Wk312 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, as shown in FIG. 1376(d), the tip of the engaging portion W530b2 contacts the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f, and the engaging portion W530b2 is elastically deformed toward the front side (direction of arrow F). be done. As a result, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the back side (arrow B direction side) is restricted.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the back side (the direction of the arrow B) is restricted, so that the engaging portion W530b2 is elastically deformed improperly toward the back side. , unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300.
Further, by displacing the protective cover W500 toward the right side (direction of arrow R), elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the rear side (direction of arrow B) is regulated. The operation of attaching W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300 (displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the right side) and the operation of restricting the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the back side can be made the same, It is possible to facilitate the movement of the board box Wk100 to the regulated state.
By engaging the engaging portion W530b1 with the protrusion W312c, the displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the left side (arrow L direction side) is regulated, and the front surface of the engaging portion W530b2 is restricted. It is possible to suppress the release of the elastic deformation toward the side (arrow F direction side).

In addition, the front end portion of the engaging portion W530b2 abuts against the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f, so that the protective cover W500 can be displaced toward the front side (in the direction of the arrow F). It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between W510 and the standing portion W222. This makes it easier to prevent a wire illegally inserted through a gap formed between the rear wall portion W510 and the standing portion W222 from releasing the adhesion between the flat portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.
Next, the board box Wl100 in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1377 and 1378. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1377(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wl100 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 1377(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wl100 taken along line MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb of FIG. 1377(a). FIG. 1377(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wl100 taken along line MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc of FIG. 1377(a), FIG. 1377(d) is a rear view of the protective cover Wl500, and FIG. 1377(d) is a cross-sectional view of the protective cover W1500 taken along line XCVIe--XCVIe of FIG. 1377(d). FIG. 1378(a) is a rear view of the board box Wl100 at the MCDLXVa portion of FIG. 1377(a), and FIG. 1378(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wl100 taken along line MCDLXIVb-MCDLXIVb of FIG. 1377(a). , and FIG. 1378(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wl100 taken along line MCDLXIVc-MCDLXIVc of FIG. 1377(a).
FIGS. 1377(a) to 1377(c) show a state in which the protective cover Wl500 is removed from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300. In addition, in FIG. 1378(a), the tip portion W1436 is illustrated by a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 1377(a) to 1377(c), the box cover Wl200 of the board box Wl100 in the thirty-sixth embodiment has elastic deformation restricting means instead of the protrusion W221 in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1353). W1230 is provided.
The elastic deformation restricting means Wl230 is for suppressing unauthorized removal of the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300, and protrudes from the flat portion W220 toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). a first restricting portion Wl240 and a second restricting portion Wl250.
The first restricting portion Wl240 and the second restricting portion Wl250 are separated in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) by the vertical dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 of the protective cover Wl500, which will be described later. Accordingly, the connecting portion Wl535 can be arranged between the first restricting portion Wl240 and the second restricting portion Wl250.
The first restricting portion Wl240 is formed with an inclined portion Wl241 that is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) from the left side (arrow L direction side) toward the right side (arrow R direction side). A locking surface Wl242, which is a surface formed on the side opposite to the inclined portion Wl241 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), is formed along the front-back direction (direction of arrows FB).

The second restricting portion Wl250 includes a first inclined portion Wl251 that inclines toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) as it goes from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side), and the first inclined portion Wl251. A second inclined portion Wl252 is formed that inclines toward the front side (in the direction of the arrow F) toward the right side from the right end portion of the portion Wl251. The second inclined portion Wl252 is arranged at a position overlapping the engaging surface Wl242 of the first restricting portion Wl240 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
As shown in FIGS. 1377(d) and 1377(e), the engaging portion Wl530a of the protective cover Wl500 includes a connecting portion Wl535 and a tip portion Wl536 disposed at the tip of the connecting portion Wl535.
The connecting portion Wl535 protrudes rightward (arrow R direction) from substantially the center of the engaging portion Wl530a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). The projection dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed larger than the horizontal dimension of the first restricting portion Wl240 and smaller than the horizontal dimension of the second restricting portion Wl250.
An inclined portion Wl535a formed on the lower surface of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed so as to incline toward the rear side (arrow B direction) as it goes from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side). be. That is, the connection portion Wl535 is formed so that the connection portion with the engaging portion Wl530a is smaller than the connection portion with the tip portion Wl536. This makes it easier to deform the connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) with respect to the engaging portion Wl530a.

The tip portion W1536 is formed to extend in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). In this embodiment, the tip portion Wl536 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion Wl535 is an upper tip portion Wl536a, and the tip portion Wl536 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the connecting portion Wl535 is a lower tip portion. W1536b and each code|symbol are attached|subjected and demonstrated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1378, board box Wl100 in the restricted state will be described. As described above, the projection dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed to be larger than the dimension of the first restricting portion Wl240 in the left-right direction. is disposed in a space formed in the
On the other hand, the projecting dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed smaller than the dimension of the second restricting portion Wl250 in the left-right direction, so that the second inclined portion Wl252 of the second restricting portion Wl250 and the lower tip portion Wl536b abut on each other. . As a result, the connecting portion Wl535 (front end portion Wl536) is rotated (twisted) about the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR) as a rotation axis, and the lower end portion Wl536b is directed toward the rear side (direction of arrow B). , and the upper tip portion W1536a is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side).
As described above, the inclined portion Wl535a is inclined toward the rear side (arrow B direction) as it goes from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side). The connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) can be easily rotated with respect to the joining portion Wl530a.

By displacing the upper tip portion Wl536a toward the front side (direction of arrow F), the amount of engagement between the upper tip portion Wl536a and the first restricting portion Wl240 can be increased (the upper tip portion Wl536a and the first restricting portion Wl240 can be displaced in the left-right direction). 1 restriction portion Wl240 can be increased). This makes it difficult to illegally remove the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300.
Further, when displacing the lower tip portion Wl536b toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) in order to illegally release the engagement between the lower tip portion Wl536b and the second restricting portion Wl250, the horizontal direction (arrow L −R direction) as a rotation axis, and the upper tip portion Wl536a is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side), so that the upper tip portion Wl536a engages with the first restricting portion Wl240. You can increase the amount. This makes it difficult to illegally remove the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1379, the board box Wm100 in the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1379(a) is a partial front view of the board box Wm100 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 1379(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wm100 along line MCDLXVIb-MCDLXVIb of FIG. 1379(a). The sealing seal WSL in the present embodiment is identical to the sealing seal WSL in the 16th embodiment except for a smaller dimension in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). explain. FIG. 1379(a) shows a state in which the protective cover Wm500 is removed from the box cover Wm200 and the box base Wm300.

As shown in FIG. 1379, the box base Wm300 of the board box Wl100 in the thirty-seventh embodiment comprises a pair of elastic deformation restricting means Wm330. A notch Wm327 is formed in the plane portion Wm320 at a position corresponding to the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330, and the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 is disposed in the space formed by the notch Wm327. Further, the flat portion Wm220 of the box cover Wm200 has a restricting projection Wm228, and the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 has a projection Wm534.
The elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 is for suppressing unauthorized elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 in the restricted state, and includes a connecting portion Wm331 projecting from the notch Wm327 and a connecting portion Wm331 protruding from the notch Wm327. An extension Wm332 extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) from the projecting tip of Wm331, and a contact projecting from both ends of the extension Wm332 toward the front side (direction of arrow F). A contact portion Wm333 and a restriction portion Wm334 are provided.
The connecting portion Wm331 has a plate shape and protrudes from the side wall of the planar portion Wm320 formed by the notch Wm327 toward the sealing seal WSL. An inclined portion Wm331a formed on the front surface of the connecting portion Wm331 is inclined toward the front side (arrow F direction) as it goes from the upper side (the arrow U direction side) toward the lower side (the arrow D direction side). That is, the connection portion Wm331 is formed so that the connection portion with the side wall of the plane portion Wj220 is smaller than the connection portion with the extended portion Wm332. As a result, the extending portion Wm332 (the contact portion Wm333 and the restricting portion Wm334) can be easily deformed with respect to the side wall of the plane portion Wj220.
The contact portion Wm333 is a portion to which a projection Wm534 of the protective cover Wm500, which will be described later, abuts. side) projecting toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The restricting portion Wm334 extends from the end (arrow R direction) opposite to the contact portion Wm333 in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the extending portion Wm332 toward the front side (arrow F direction). It protrudes and is formed at a position on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 in the regulated state.
The restricting protrusion Wm228 of the flat portion Wm220 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 toward the rear side (arrow B direction side), and extends from the flat portion Wm220 toward the flat portion Wm320 of the box base Wm300. (Arrow F direction side). The restricting projection Wm228 is arranged at a position overlapping approximately the center of the extending portion Wm332 in the lateral direction (arrow LR direction) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Note that the restricting protrusion Wm228 may be arranged at a position overlapping the connecting portion Wm331 or the restricting portion Wm334 in the front-rear direction.
The protrusion Wm534 of the protective cover Wm500 is a protrusion for deforming (rotating) the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330, and protrudes from the back side of the engaging portion Wm530b toward the back side (arrow B direction side). The projection Wm534 is arranged at a distance substantially equal to the extension dimension of the extension portion Wm332 of the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 from the tip of the engaging portion Wm530b. As a result, in the regulated state, the tip of the engaging portion Wm530b and the protrusion Wm534 can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the contact portion Wm333 and the regulating portion Wm334.
As shown in FIG. 1379(b), in the restricted state, the protrusion Wm534 of the engaging portion Wm530b and the contact portion Wm333 of the elastic deformation restricting means Wm330 are in contact with each other. As a result, the connecting portion Wm331 (extending portion Wm332) is rotated (twisted) about the rotation axis in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the contact portion Wm333 is directed toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). , and the restricting portion Wm334 is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

As described above, the inclined portion Wm331a is inclined toward the front side (arrow F direction) from the upper side (arrow U direction side) toward the lower side (arrow D direction side). The connecting portion Wm331 (extending portion Wm332) can be easily rotated with respect to the side wall of the .
By displacing the restricting portion Wm334 toward the front side (direction of arrow F), the distance between the restricting portion Wm334 and the tip of the engaging portion Wm530b can be reduced. This makes it difficult for the engaging portion Wm530b to be elastically deformed improperly. In addition, in the restricted state, the restricting portion Wm334 may be brought into contact with the rear surface of the engaging portion Wm530b.
As described above, the restricting protrusion Wm228 is disposed at a position that overlaps substantially the center of the extended portion Wm332 in the lateral direction (arrows LR direction) in the front-rear direction (arrows FB direction). and the extended portion Wm332, the extended portion Wm332 (the contact portion Wm333 and the restricting portion Wm334) can be restricted from being displaced toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). This makes it difficult for the engaging portion Wm530b to be elastically deformed improperly.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1380, the board box Wn100 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1380(a) is a partial front view of the board box Wn100 in the thirty-eighth embodiment, and FIG. 1380(b) is a side view of the protective cover Wn500 as viewed in the direction of arrow MCDLXVIIb in FIG. 1380(a). 1380(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wn100 taken along line MCDLXVIIc-MCDLXVIIc in FIG. 1380(a). FIG. 1380(a) shows a state in which the protective cover Wn500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300, and the projection Wn534 and the pair of walls Wn538 of the protective cover Wn500 are shown by dashed lines.
As shown in FIG. 1380, the box base Wm300 of the board box Wn100 in the thirty-eighth embodiment has a pair of claws Wm340, and the engaging portion Wn530b of the protective cover Wn500 has a projection Wn534 and a pair of walls Wn538.
Notches are formed in the front wall portion Wn312a of the box base Wm300 at positions corresponding to the pair of claw portions Wm340, and the pair of claw portions Wm340 are arranged in the space formed by the notches. The pair of claws Wm340 are formed to protrude leftward (in the direction of arrow L) from the back surface of the front wall portion Wn312a, and are arranged on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the front wall portion Wn312a. .
The pair of claw portions Wm340 are portions for engaging the protective cover Wn500 with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300. It is arranged at a position overlapping Wn 530b. An engagement hole Wm341 is formed in the pair of claws Wm340 at a position on the projecting tip side (arrow L direction side) of the claws Wm340.

The engagement hole Wm341 is formed slightly larger than the projection Wn534 of the protective cover Wn500, which will be described later, and the projection Wn534 is arranged inside the engagement hole Wm341 (the projection Wn534 is engaged with the engagement hole Wm341). Thus, the protective cover Wn500 is engaged with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.
The engaging portion Wn530b is provided with a pair of connecting pieces W531b at both ends in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) of the engaging portion Wn530b at a predetermined distance in the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR). . This suppresses elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wn530b.
Further, the engaging portion Wn530b is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) compared to the engaging portion W530b in the sixteenth embodiment, and in the present embodiment, is arranged on substantially the same plane as the front wall portion W520. be done.
The protrusion Wn534 protrudes from the engaging portion Wn530b toward the rear wall portion W510 (arrow B direction side). The protrusion Wn534 is arranged at a position overlapping the engagement hole Wm341 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the restricted state. Thereby, the protective cover Wn500 can be engaged with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.

The pair of wall portions Wn538 prevents a wire illegally inserted through the gap formed between the front wall portion W520 and the engaging portion Wn530b from releasing the engagement between the engaging hole Wm341 and the protrusion Wn534. It is a part for A pair of wall portions Wn538 are formed at the ends of the engaging portion Wn530b on the side facing the front wall portion W520. Thereby, the protrusion Wn534 is disposed between the pair of wall portions Wn538 facing each other. The pair of wall portions Wn538 protrude from the engaging portion Wn530b toward the rear wall portion W510 (arrow B direction side).
As shown in FIG. 1380(c), in the regulated state, the protrusion Wn534 is provided inside the engagement hole Wm341, and the inner wall of the engagement hole Wm341 and the protrusion Wn534 come into contact with each other, so that the left side of the protective cover Wn500 is opened. Displacement to the direction side (arrow L direction side) is regulated.
In addition, the engaging portion Wn530b is arranged on substantially the same plane as the front wall portion W520, and the pair of claw portions Wm340 are arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion Wn312a. In the regulated state, a pair of claw portions Wm340 are arranged closer to the rear wall portion W510 (arrow B direction side) than the engaging portion Wn530b. Therefore, the protective cover Wn500 shields the pair of claws Wm340. This can prevent the pair of claws Wm340 from being illicitly elastically deformed, and can prevent the protective cover Wn500 from being illicitly removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1381, the board box Wo100 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1381(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wo100 in the thirty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 1381(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wo100 along line MCDLXVIIIb-MCDLXVIIIb in FIG. 1381(a). In addition, in FIG. 1381(a), illustration of the retainer pin Wo580 is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1381, the protective cover Wo500 of the board box Wo100 in the thirty-ninth embodiment includes retaining pins Wo580, and the flat portion Wq220 includes the concave portion Wo229.
Since the protective cover Wo500 is provided with the retaining pin Wo580, the flat portion Wo220 is formed on the front side by the projection amount of the retaining pin Wo580 toward the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the engaging portion Wo530a. be. As a result, contact between the retaining pin Wo580 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and damage to the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed.
The rear wall portion Wo214a of the cover portion Wo214 is formed to protrude toward the projecting tip side (arrow L direction side) from the rear wall portion W214a in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1354). On the rear wall portion Wo214a, a projection Wo214b projects toward the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction) at a position overlapping with the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wo530a in rear view in the restricted state. The protrusion Wo214b is a part for engaging the box cover Wo200 and the protective cover Wo500 (engaging portion Wo530a) (for restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wo500 to the side opposite to the side wall portion W212).

A concave portion Wo229 is formed in the flat portion Wo220 at a position overlapping the retaining pin Wo580 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The concave portion Wo229 is recessed from the back surface of the flat portion Wo220 toward the flat portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) of the box base W300. Thereby, a space is formed between the recess Wo229 and the sealing seal WSL.
The concave portion Wo229 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the inner diameter of the concave portion Wo229 is formed substantially equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the head portion Wo581 described later. As a result, when the engaging portion Wo530a is displaced (elastically deformed), part of the retaining pin Wo580 can be received inside the concave portion Wo229.
The engaging portion Wo530a of the protective cover Wo500 has an insertion hole Wo538 between the connecting piece W531a and the engaging hole W533. The insertion hole Wo<b>538 is a hole for inserting a pin portion Wo<b>582 of a retaining pin Wo<b>580 , which will be described later, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear.
The retaining pin Wo580 is made of a resin material and has a plate-shaped head Wo581 and a pair of plate-shaped pin portions Wo582 erected from the head Wo581 in the plate thickness direction.

The head Wo581 is formed in a circular shape in rear view, and the outer diameter of the head Wo581 is formed larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole Wo538.
The standing length of the pair of pin portions Wo582 is formed to be smaller than the dimension between the sealing seal WSL and the rear surface of the engaging portion Wo530a on the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL. The pair of pin portions Wo582 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the plate thickness direction. Also, the pair of pin portions Wo582 are formed to have a plate thickness that allows bending deformation, and the pair of pin portions Wo582 are made deformable in the direction of approaching each other.
A locking portion Wo583 that protrudes toward the side opposite to the facing surface side is formed at the standing tip portion of the pin portion Wo582. An inclined portion o584 is formed on the opposite side of the engaging portion Wo583 to the opposite surface side of the engaging portion Wo583. The outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 in is formed to have a size that allows insertion of the insertion hole Wo538.
The outer shape of the engaging portion Wo583 on the side of the head Wo581 (the side opposite to the upright distal end side) is formed to have a size that cannot be inserted through the insertion hole Wo538. Further, the outer shape of the engaging portion Wo583 on the head Wo581 side is formed to be large enough to be inserted through the insertion hole Wo538 when the pair of pin portions Wo582 are flexurally deformed in the direction of approaching each other. In addition, the outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 on the upright distal end side is formed to have a size that allows the insertion hole Wo538 to be inserted therethrough.

As a result, the retainer pin Wo580 is flexurally deformed in a direction in which the pair of pin portions Wo582 approach each other, so that the locking portion Wo583 is inserted through the insertion hole Wo538. On the other hand, by releasing the bending deformation of the pair of pin portions Wo582, the locking portion Wo583 is brought into contact with the engaging portion Wo530a, and moves in the opposite direction (arrow B direction) to the insertion direction (arrow F direction). displacement is regulated.
Since the inclined portion o584 is inclined toward the facing surface of the locking portion Wo583 as it goes toward the upright distal end side, the inclined portion o584 and the inner periphery of the insertion hole Wo538 contact each other, thereby causing the pair of pin portions Wo582 are flexurally deformed in the direction of approaching each other.
Since the outer diameter of the head Wo581 is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole Wo538, the head Wo581 abuts on the engaging portion Wo530a, and displacement of the retaining pin Wo580 in the insertion direction (arrow F direction) is prevented. Regulated. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the sealing seal WSL due to contact between the standing distal end portions of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL.
On the other hand, if the engaging portion Wo530a is illegally elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction) in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wo500 from the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300, the pair of pin portions The standing tip of Wo 582 abuts against the sealing seal WSL. As a result, elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wo530a toward the front side (arrow F direction side) is restricted, and removal of the protective cover Wo500 from the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300 is suppressed.

Also, the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the contact between the standing tip end portions of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL. This makes it easier for the operator (clerk) to recognize that there is a risk that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
In addition, in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the flat portion Wo220 at the position overlapping the retaining pin Wo580 (the pair of pin portions Wo582) has a side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (arrow F direction side). A recess may be recessed. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the contact between the standing tip end portions of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL.
Next, attachment of the protective cover Wo500 to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300 will be described. When the protective cover Wo500 is attached to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300, the retaining pin Wo580 is disengaged from the protective cover Wo500, and the protective cover Wo500 is attached to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300. The retainer pin Wo580 is engaged with the cover Wo500.
This suppresses breakage of the sealing seal WSL by the retaining pin Wo580 (locking portion Wo583) compared to the case where the protective cover Wo500 engaged with the retaining pin Wo580 is attached to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1382, the protective cover Wp500 in the fortieth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1382 is a rear view of the protective cover Wp500 in the 40th embodiment. In this embodiment, illustration of the box cover and box base to which the protective cover Wp500 is attached is omitted, and the concept of removing the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and box base will be described. In addition, FIG. 1381 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 1382 .
As shown in FIG. 1382, the protective cover Wp500 in the forty-second embodiment includes a second engagement portion Wp590. A pair of protective covers Wp500 are formed symmetrically (vertical symmetry in FIG. 1382) with respect to a plane parallel to the upper wall portion (lower wall portion W501) at substantially the center of the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion W501 of the protective cover Wp500. In addition, the engaging portion W530b is not formed on the front wall portion Wp520 of the protective cover Wp500 (see FIG. 1353).
The engaging portion Wp530a is provided with a pair of connecting pieces W531b at both ends in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) of the engaging portion Wp530a at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). . The connecting piece W531b arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the pair of connecting pieces W531b is connected to the rear wall portion Wp510, and is connected to the right side (arrow R direction) of the pair of connecting pieces W531b. side) is connected to the second engaging portion Wp590.

The second engaging portion Wp590 is a portion with which the retaining pin Wo580 is engaged. The second engaging portion Wp590 includes an insertion hole Wo538, a connecting piece W531a, and a pair of connecting pieces W531b. The connecting piece W531a is connected to the left end (arrow L direction side) of the second engaging portion Wp590 and the rear wall portion Wp510, and the connecting piece W531b is connected to the second engaging portion Wp590 in the vertical direction (arrow L direction). UD direction), the upper end (lower end) of the engaging portion Wp530a, and the upper wall portion (lower wall portion W501).
Each of the box cover and the box base has projections to be engaged with the engagement hole W533 at positions corresponding to the engagement hole W533 of one of the pair of engagement portions Wp530a in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD). Prepare. These protrusions are arranged symmetrically with respect to a plane parallel to the rear wall portion Wp510 (the front wall portion Wp520) at substantially the center of the rear wall portion Wp510 and the front wall portion Wp520.
As a result, when the projection formed on the box cover and the engagement hole W533 of one (the other) of the pair of engagement portions Wp530a are engaged with each other, the projection formed on the box base and the pair of engagement portions The other (one) engagement hole W533 of Wp530a is not engaged.
In a state where the projection formed on the box cover is engaged with one (the other) engagement hole W533 of the pair of engagement portions Wp530a, the second engagement portion connected to the one (other) engagement portion Wp530a is engaged. The retaining pin Wo580 is inserted through the insertion hole Wo538 of the joining portion Wp590, and the second engaging portion Wp590 and the retaining pin Wo580 are engaged.

In order to illegally remove the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and the box base, when one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a is illegally elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction side), the pair of pin portions The standing tip of Wo 582 abuts against the sealing seal WSL. As a result, elastic deformation of one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a toward the front side (direction of arrow F) is restricted, and removal of the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and the box base is suppressed.
Also, the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the contact between the standing tip end portions of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL. This makes it easier for the operator (clerk) to recognize that there is a risk that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
The protective cover Wp500 is removed from the box cover and box base by cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b connected to one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 with a cutting tool (not shown). , one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 are separated from the protective cover Wp500.
Here, the protective cover Wp500 from which one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 are separated is rotated (reversed) by 180 degrees around the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR) as a rotation axis. , a projection formed on the box base and the other (one) engagement hole W533 of the pair of engagement portions Wp530a.

As a result, the protective cover Wp500 can be used (reused) twice to prevent the box cover and the box base from being opened. As a result, the maintenance cost of the pachinko machine W10 can be reduced compared to the case where the protective cover Wp500 is discarded each time the box cover and box base are opened.
Also, depending on whether one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 are separated from the protective cover Wp500, whether the protective cover Wp500 is reused and attached to the box cover and the box base, It can be distinguished whether the new protective cover Wp500 is attached to the box cover and the box base. Therefore, by checking with the maintenance record of the pachinko machine W10, for example, the maintenance record describes that the protective cover Wp500 is reused, whereas the new protective cover Wp500 is attached to the box cover and box base. In this case, the worker (clerk) can easily recognize that there is a possibility that a main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1383, the board box Wq100 in the forty-first embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1383(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wq100 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 1383(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wq100 along line MCDLXXb-MCDLXXb in FIG. 1383(a).

As shown in FIG. 1383, the protective cover Wq500 of the board box Wq100 in the forty-first embodiment includes a second engaging portion Wq590 and a pair of projections Wq534. Since the protective cover Wq500 includes the second engaging portion Wq590, the dimension of the back wall Wq510 in the vertical direction (the direction of arrows UD) is formed shorter than the dimension of the back wall W510 in the sixteenth embodiment. be.
Further, by forming the pair of projections Wq534 on the engaging portion Wq530a, the flat portion Wq220 is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) by the projection amount of the pair of projections Wq534. As a result, when the protective cover Wq500 is attached to the box cover Wq200 and the box base W300, contact between the pair of protrusions Wq534 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and damage to the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed.
A recess Wq229 is formed in the plane portion Wq220 at a position overlapping the pair of projections Wq534 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The recessed portion Wq229 is recessed from the rear surface of the flat portion Wq220 toward the flat portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) of the box base W300. Thereby, a space is formed between the recess Wq229 and the sealing seal WSL.
The rear wall portion Wq214a of the cover portion Wq214 is formed to protrude toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) from the rear wall portion W214a in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1354). On the rear wall portion Wq214a, a protrusion Wq214b projects toward the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction) at a position overlapping with the engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 1354) of the engagement portion Wq530a when viewed from the rear in the regulated state. be. Projection Wq214b is a portion for engaging box cover Wq200 and protective cover Wq500 (engagement portion Wq530a) (for restricting displacement of protective cover Wq500 to the side opposite side wall portion W212). Further, the side wall on the lower side (arrow D direction side) is not formed in the cover portion Wq214.

The second engaging portion Wq590 is disposed at the end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the engaging portion Wq530a, and the pair of protrusions Wq534 are located on the opposite side of the engaging portion Wq530a from the second engaging portion Wq590. (Arrow U direction side). Also, the pair of projections Wq534 are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).
An insertion hole Wo538 is formed in the second engaging portion Wq590 (see FIG. 1381). With the pin portion Wo582 of the retaining pin Wo580 inserted through the insertion hole Wo538, the retaining pin Wo580 is engaged with the second engaging portion Wq590.
Next, removal of the protective cover Wq500 from the box cover Wq200 and the box base W300 will be described. In a state where the engaging portion Wq530a is separated from the protective cover Wq500, when the engaging portion Wq530a is removed from the box cover Wq200, the cover portion Wq214 does not have a side wall on the lower side (arrow D direction side). By displacing the engaging portion Wq530a downward, the engaging portion Wq530a can be easily removed from the box cover Wq200.
Here, in order to disengage the engagement between the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wq530a and the protrusion Wq214b of the rear wall portion Wq214a, the engagement portion Wq530a is displaced toward the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction). There is a need.

On the other hand, the retaining pin Wo580 is engaged with the second engaging portion Wq590, and the projecting tip portion of the pin portion Wo582 is arranged closer to the plane portion W320 (arrow F direction side) than the second engaging portion Wq590. Therefore, the projecting tip portion of the pin portion Wo582 is likely to come into contact with the rear wall portion Wq510.
Therefore, in order to suppress contact between the projecting tip portion of the pin portion Wo582 and the rear wall portion Wq510, the retainer pin Wo580 is positioned on the opposite side ( arrow B direction side). As a result, the pair of protrusions Wq534 are rotated toward the flat portion W320 (the arrow F direction side), and the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions Wq534.
Also, the pair of protrusions Wq534 are easily received in the space formed between the sealing seal WSL and the recess Wq229, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the pair of protrusions Wq534. Also, in the sealing seal WSL, the area damaged by the pair of protrusions Wq534 can be enlarged.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the engaging portion Wq530a is removed from the box cover Wq200, the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged, thereby reducing the risk of unauthorized operation of the main control board (not shown) by the operator ( store clerk) can be easily recognized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1384(a), the board box Wr100 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1384(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wr100 in the forty-second embodiment, corresponding to line MCDXLIIb-MCDXLIIb in FIG. 1354(b). In the description of FIG. 1384(a), FIG. 1355(a) will be referred to as appropriate.
As shown in FIG. 1384(a), the box cover Wr200 of the board box Wr100 in the 42nd embodiment has a projection Wr214b instead of the projection W221 in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 1353).
The projection W221 is not formed on the plane portion Wr220, and the side wall portion W212 is opposite to the side wall portion W212 from the engagement hole W533 (in the direction of the arrow L) in a position overlapping the engagement portion W530a when viewed from the rear. A notch is formed up to . As a result, even when the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the flat portion Wr220 (the direction of the arrow F), the engaging portion W530a abuts the flat portion Wr220, thereby restricting the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530a. can be suppressed.

The rear wall portion Wr214a of the cover portion Wr214 is formed to protrude toward the projecting tip side (arrow L direction side) from the rear wall portion W214a in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1354). On the rear wall portion Wr214a, a projection Wr214b protrudes toward the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction) at a position overlapping the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530a when viewed from the rear. The protrusion Wr214b is a part for engaging the box cover Wr200 and the protective cover Wr500 (engagement portion W530a) (for restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wr500 to the side opposite to the side wall portion W212).
The protrusion Wr214b protrudes from the rear wall portion Wr214a toward the flat portion W320 (the arrow F direction) so that the engaging portion W530a is protruded from the front wall portion W520 to engage the box cover Wr200 and the protective cover Wr500. side (flat portion Wr220 side).
On the other hand, the pair of engaging portions W530b are elastically deformed toward the rear wall portion W510 side (flat portion W320 side, arrow B direction side) in order to engage the box base W300 and the protective cover Wr500 (Fig. 1355(a)). Therefore, in order to illegally disengage the protective cover W500 from the box cover Wr200 and the box base W300, the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed (displaced) and the pair of engaging portions W530b are elastically deformed (direction of arrow F). The direction of deformation (displacement) (direction of arrow B) can be the opposite direction.
As a result, the engaging portions W530a (the pair of engaging portions W530b) are elastically deformed (displaced) in order to release the engagement between the engaging portions W530a (the pair of engaging portions W530b) and the projections Wr214b (the pair of projections W312c). ), the pair of engaging portions W530b (engaging portions W530a) are engaged with the pair of protrusions W312c (protrusions Wr214b) due to elastic deformation (displacement) of the engaging portions W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b). can be displaced in the direction of maintaining As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover Wr500 from being illegally removed from the box cover Wr200 and the box base W300.

Further, the projection Wr214b protrudes from the rear wall portion Wr214a toward the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction), thereby blocking the engagement between the projection Wr214b and the engaging hole W533 by the rear wall portion Wr214a. As a result, the engagement between the projection Wr214b and the engagement hole W533 can be prevented from being illegally released.
Next, the substrate box Ws100 in the forty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1384(b). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1384(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Ws100 in the forty-third embodiment, and corresponds to line MCDXLIIa-MCDXLIIa in FIG. 1354(b). In the description of FIG. 1384(b), FIG. 1355(b) will be referred to as appropriate.
As shown in FIG. 1384(b), the box base Ws300 of the board box Ws100 in the forty-third embodiment has a pair of protrusions Ws328 instead of the pair of protrusions W312c in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1354). The manner of engagement between the pair of engaging portions W530b and the pair of protrusions Ws328 is the same for one (upper) and the other (lower) (see FIG. 1354), so a cross-sectional view of one is shown. , and the description on the other is omitted.

A projection W312c is not formed on the front wall portion W312a of the box base Ws300, and a flat portion Ws320 is formed extending to a position overlapping the engagement holes W533 of the pair of engagement portions W530b in a front view. A pair of projections Ws328 protrude toward the flat portion W220 (arrow B direction) at positions overlapping the engagement holes W533 of the pair of engaging portions W530b in a front view on the extending distal end portion of the flat portion Ws320. be done. The pair of protrusions Ws328 are portions for engaging the box base Ws300 and the protective cover W500 (pair of engaging portions W530b) (for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the side opposite to the left wall portion W302). is.
A pair of protrusions Ws328 protrude from the flat portion Ws320 toward the side opposite to the front wall portion W312a (the direction of the arrow F) to form a pair of engagement for engaging the box base Ws300 and the protective cover W500. The portion W530b can be elastically deformed toward the front wall portion W312a (the side opposite to the plane portion W220).
On the other hand, the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the opposite side of the front wall portion W520 (opposite side of the flat portion W220, arrow B direction) in order to engage the box cover W200 and the protective cover W500. (See FIG. 1355(b)). Therefore, in order to illegally disengage the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300, the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed (displaced) and the pair of engaging portions W530b is elastically deformed (in the direction of arrow B). The direction of deformation (displacement) (direction of arrow F) can be the opposite direction.
As a result, the engaging portions W530a (the pair of engaging portions W530b) are elastically deformed (displaced) in order to release the engagement between the engaging portions W530a (the pair of engaging portions W530b) and the projections W221 (the pair of projections Ws328). ), the pair of engaging portions W530b (engaging portions W530a) are engaged with the pair of protrusions Ws328 (protrusions W221) due to elastic deformation (displacement) of the engaging portions W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b). can be displaced in the direction of maintaining As a result, unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1385, the board box Wt100 in the forty-fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1385(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wt100 in the forty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 1385(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wt100 along line MCDLXXIIb-MCDLXXIIb in FIG. 1385(a). Note that FIG. 1385 illustrates a state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the board box Wt100.
As shown in FIG. 1385, the box cover Wt200 (flat portion Wt220) of the board box Wt100 in the forty-fourth embodiment has a protrusion Wt224b instead of the recess W224b in the sixteenth embodiment (see FIG. 1354).
The protrusion Wt224b protrudes from the back surface of the planar portion Wt220 toward the opposite side (arrow B direction side) of the planar portion W320, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a cross-sectional view. The strength of the planar portion Wt220 can be ensured by the protrusion Wt224b.

A pair of notches Wt224b1 are formed in the protrusion Wt224b. A space formed between opposing surfaces of the protrusion Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 is defined as a cutting space WS3. In the regulated state, the cutting space WS3 is arranged at a position overlapping the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a in a rear view.
The distance between the facing surfaces of the protrusion Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 is substantially equal to or slightly larger than the extending dimension of the connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 1354) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). be. Thereby, when cutting the connecting piece W531b, the tip of a cutting tool (not shown) can be received in the cutting space WS3.
The protrusion Wt224b extends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and is formed by connecting a pair of both end wall portions W223. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be attached to the protrusion Wt224b between both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) except for the cutting space WS3. Therefore, compared to the case where both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction are not attached to the protrusion Wt224b, the sealing seal WSL can be prevented from being wrinkled, and a space can be formed between the back surface of the flat portion Wt220 and the sealing seal WSL. You can prevent it from happening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL from being easily peeled off from the back surface of the flat portion Wt220.
Moreover, the strength of the pair of both end wall portions W223 can be ensured by connecting the protrusion Wt224b and the pair of both end wall portions W223.

If the protrusion Wt224b extends toward the pair of both end wall portions W223 from both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), it will not be connected to the pair of both end wall portions W223. It is good to be said.
In the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows UD), the distance between the projecting tip of the protrusion Wt224b and the projecting tip of the pair of both end wall portions W223 1353) and the front surface of the rear wall W510 (the surface facing the front wall W520). As a result, when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover Wt200 and the box base W300, the sealing seal WSL attached to the protrusion Wt224b and the engaging portion W530a can be prevented from coming into contact with each other and damaging the sealing seal WSL.
In the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the distance between the projecting tip of the projection Wt224b and the projecting tip of the pair of both end wall portions W223 is the front of the engaging portion W530a (front wall W520 ) and the front surface of the rear wall W510 (the surface facing the front wall W520) may be substantially the same.
In the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), the dimension of the projection Wt224b is formed to be substantially the same as the dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a.

Next, affixing of the seal WSL to the protrusion Wt224b will be described. The sealing seal WSL is adhered along the projecting shape of the projecting portion Wt224b, and is adhered to a pair of side surfaces connecting the projecting end surface of the projecting portion Wt224b and the planar portion Wt220 and the projecting end surface.
On the other hand, the sealing sticker WSL is not attached to the facing surface of the protrusion Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 and the flat portion Wt220 in the cutting space WS3. Therefore, the sealing seal WSL is attached to the protrusion Wt224b in a manner surrounding the cutting space WS3.
As a result, when cutting the connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 1354), the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) can be easily arranged in the cutting space WS3. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.
In addition, since the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b is formed to be substantially the same as the dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the cutting tool ( (not shown) can be provided. As a result, the trace (damage) formed on the sealing seal WSL can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1386, the board box Wu100 in the forty-fifth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1386 is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wu100 in the forty-fifth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along line MCDXLVIIIa-MCDXLVIIIa in FIG. 1354(b).
As shown in FIG. 1386, the protective cover Wu500 of the board box Wu100 in the forty-fifth embodiment includes projections Wu534. The protrusion Wu534 is formed on the protrusion Wu534 in the twentieth embodiment so that the side surface Wu534c of the protrusion Wu534 formed on the protruding tip side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion Wu530b is convex toward the protruding tip side. It is formed curved. A side surface Wu534d of the protrusion Wu534 formed on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) to the protruding tip of the engaging portion Wu530b is formed by linearly connecting the protruding tip of the engaging portion Wu530b and the protrusion Wu534.
As a result, when the engaging portion Wu530b is elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction side) in order to attach the protective cover Wu500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the side surface Wu534c of the protrusion Wu534 is formed as a sealing seal. Opposed to WSL. Therefore, even if the side surface Wu534c of the protrusion Wu534 and the sealing seal WSL are brought into contact with each other due to factors such as the processing accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the box base W5300 and the protective cover Wu500, the protective cover Wu500 is placed on the cover portion W312. It is possible to easily suppress damage to the sealing seal WSL when displacing it toward the side (arrow R direction side).

In other words, even if the protective cover Wu500 has the protrusion Wu534, damage to the sealing seal WSL is likely to be suppressed when the protective cover Wu500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300.
On the other hand, in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wu500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the protective cover Wu500 is turned to the opposite side (arrow L direction side) to the cover portion W312 while elastically deforming the engaging portion Wu530b. When displacing, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the connecting portion of the side surfaces Wu534c and Wu534d (protruding tip portion of the protrusion Wu534).
As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the protective cover Wu500 has the projection Wu534 and the sealing seal WSL is likely to be damaged when the protective cover Wu500 is illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the box cover When attaching the protective cover Wu500 to W200 and the box base W5300, it is possible to easily suppress damage to the sealing seal WSL.
The side surface Wu534d may be curved in a concave shape toward the side surface Wu534c (arrow R direction side). As a result, the connecting portion of the side Wu534c and the side Wu534d can be formed sharply, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1387, the board box Wv100 in the forty-sixth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1387(a) is a partial rear view of the board box Wv100 in the forty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 1387(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wv100 along line MCDLXXIVb-MCDLXXIVb in FIG. 1387(a). Note that in FIG. 1387(a), the contours of the recess Wv229 and the sealing seal WSL are illustrated by dashed lines. In addition, FIG. 1383 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1387, the box cover Wv200 of the board box Wv100 in the forty-sixth embodiment includes a recess Wv229 in addition to the box cover Wq200 in the forty-first embodiment.
The recess Wv229 is recessed at a position overlapping the retaining pin Wo580 in a rear view in the regulated state. The recess Wv229 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the inner diameter of the recess Wv229 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the head Wo581. The sealing sticker WSL is attached to the flat portion Wv220 on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the side wall portion W212 from the recess Wv229. In other words, the sealing sticker WSL is not attached to the recess Wv229.

Also, the projection amount of the pair of projections Wv534 formed on the protective cover Wv500 (engagement portion Wv530a) is shorter than that of the pair of projections Wq534 in the forty-first embodiment. Specifically, in a state where the retaining pin Wo580 is arranged (engaged) with the protective cover Wv500, the protruding tip of the pair of projections Wv534 is more box than the protruding tip of the locking portion Wo583 of the retaining pin Wo580. It is formed on the opposite side (arrow B direction side) to the base W300.
Among the pair of protrusions Wv534, the protrusion Wv534 arranged on the left wall portion W502 side (arrow L direction side) is arranged at a position overlapping the sealing seal WSL in the rear view. As a result, when the pair of projections Wv534 are displaced (rotated) toward the box base W300 (arrow F direction), the projections Wv534 provided on the left wall portion W502 side and the sealing seal WSL are brought into contact with each other. can be done.
By forming the pair of projections Wv534 on the engaging portion Wv530a, the plane portion Wv220 is formed on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side) by the projection amount of the pair of projections Wv534. As a result, when the protective cover Wv500 is attached to the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300, contact between the pair of protrusions Wv534 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and damage to the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed.
On the other hand, in the regulated state, the retaining pin Wo580 is arranged (engaged) with the protective cover Wv500, so that the protruding tip of the locking portion Wo583 of the retaining pin Wo580 is aligned with the protruding tip of the pair of projections Wv534. , is arranged on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the protruding distal end portion of the locking portion Wo583 is received in the space formed by the concave portion Wv229.

As a result, when the protective cover Wv500 is attached to the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300, the engaging portion Wv530a in which the retaining pin Wo580 is disengaged (disengaged) is elastically deformed, and the engaging portion Wv530a is disengaged. The engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 1384(a)) can be engaged with the projection Wq214b of the box cover Wv200.
In the regulated state, when the retaining pin Wo580 is arranged (engaged) in the protective cover Wv500, the locking portion Wo583 abuts the bottom surface of the recess Wv229, thereby restricting the elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wv530a. This suppresses disengagement between the engaging portion Wv530a and the box cover Wv200.
In order to release the engagement between the engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 1354) of the engagement portion Wv530a and the projection Wq214b of the rear wall portion Wq214a, the protective cover Wv500 is removed while the engagement portion Wv530a is illegally elastically deformed. toward the side opposite to the side wall W212 (in the direction of the arrow L), the engaging portion Wo583 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the recess Wv229, thereby displacing the side wall W212 of the protective cover Wv500. Displacement toward the side is restricted. As a result, removal of the protective cover Wv500 from the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300 can be suppressed.
Next, removal of the protective cover Wv500 from the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300 will be described. When the engaging portion Wv530a is removed from the box cover Wv200 in a state where the engaging portion Wv530a is separated from the protective cover Wv500, the engagement between the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion Wv530a and the projection Wq214b of the rear wall portion Wq214a is released. In addition, in order to suppress contact between the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 and the inner peripheral surface of the recess Wv229, the retainer pin Wo580 is separated from the plane portion W320 with the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) as the rotation axis. It is rotated toward the opposite side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the pair of projections Wv534 are rotated toward the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction). By displacing the engaging portion Wv530a from this state toward the side opposite to the side wall portion W212 (the direction of the arrow L), the pair of protrusions Wv534 and the sealing seal WSL are brought into contact, and the sealing seal WSL is damaged. .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the engaging portion Wv530a is removed from the box cover Wv200, the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged, thereby reducing the risk of unauthorized operation of the main control board (not shown) by the operator ( store clerk) can be easily recognized.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1388(a), the protective cover Ww500 in the forty-seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1388(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Ww100 in the forty-seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section at the LXXXIIa portion in FIG. 1357(a).
As shown in FIG. 1388(a), the connecting piece Ww531b of the protective cover Ww500 in the forty-seventh embodiment is formed by two-color molding using different resin materials. In other words, the connecting piece Ww531b is formed from a plurality of (in this embodiment, two types) portions having different rigidity.

The connecting piece Ww531b is composed of a second connecting piece Ww531b2 formed of a resin material having rigidity different from that of the first connecting piece Ww531b1 and the first connecting piece Ww531b1. They are arranged side by side in the projecting direction (arrow LR direction) of the engaging portion W530a (see FIG. 1357).
This makes it easier to rotate the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) when cutting the connecting piece Ww531b. Specifically, for example, the first connecting piece Ww531b1 is molded using a resin material having higher hardness than the second connecting piece Ww531b2, the cutting tool is composed of nippers or scissors, and the connecting piece Ww531b is formed between the pair of blades. , the second connecting piece Ww531b2 is likely to be cut with respect to the first connecting piece Ww531b1.
Therefore, the second connecting piece Ww531b2 can be easily cut with respect to the first connecting piece Ww531b1, and the blade of the cutting tool can be easily rotated. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool. As a result, the worker (clerk) can easily recognize that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1388(b), the protective cover Wx500 in the forty-eighth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1388(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the board box Wx100 in the forty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section at the LXXXIIa portion in FIG. 1357(a).
As shown in FIG. 1388(b), the connecting piece Wx531b of the protective cover Wx500 in the forty-eighth embodiment extends from the first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the front wall W520 toward the rear wall W510 (arrow FB direction, FIG. 1357) is formed with a second connecting piece Wx531b2 formed smaller than the first connecting piece Wx531b1.
The first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the second connecting piece Wx531b2 are arranged side by side in the projecting direction (arrow LR direction) of the engaging portion W530a (see FIG. 1357), and when viewed in cross section, the connecting piece Wx531b is substantially L-shaped. formed into a shape.
As a result, when the cutting tool is composed of nippers or scissors and the connecting piece Wx531b is sandwiched between a pair of blades to cut the connecting piece Wx531b, the second connecting piece Wx531b2 is easily cut off from the first connecting piece Wx531b1. This makes it easier to rotate the blade of the cutting tool. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool. As a result, it is possible to make the operator (clerk) more likely to recognize that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by an illicit person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1388(c), the protective cover Wy500 in the forty-ninth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1388(c) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wy500 of the board box Wy100 in the forty-ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 1369(b) will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG. 1388(c).
As shown in FIG. 1388(c), the protective cover Wy500 of the board box Wy100 in the forty-ninth embodiment has a cutting portion Wy550. Also, the connecting piece We531a is arranged at a predetermined distance from the cut portion Wy550.
The cutting portion Wy550 is formed so that the width dimension in the direction (arrow UD direction) connecting the pair of connecting pieces W531b decreases from the engaging portion Wy530a toward the connecting portion W512 side (arrow L direction side). In other words, the cut portion Wy550 is formed to have an acute angle when viewed from the rear. This makes it easier to cut the sealing seal WSL.

In addition, in a state where the engaging portion Wy530a is connected to the protective cover Wy500, the cutting portion Wy550 is disposed surrounded by the rear wall portion W510 and the connecting portion W512. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator (clerk) from contacting the cutting part Wy550 and being injured.
The distance between the connecting piece W531a and the cut portion Wy550 facing each other is the distance between the front surface of the flat portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the notches We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). are formed in substantially the same manner as (see FIG. 1369(b)).
As a result, the engaging portion Wy530a is separated from the protective cover Wy500, and the side surface of the connecting piece We531a on the side of the cutting portion Wy550 (the direction of the arrow D) is brought into contact with the front surface of the flat portion We320, thereby cutting the cutting portion Wy550. It can be received (arranged) in the space formed by the parts We226 and We325. As a result, it is possible to reduce the trouble of searching for the cutouts We226 and We325, and to easily perform the work of cutting the sealing seal WSL.
1389 to 1402, the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 in the fiftieth embodiment will be described below. 1389 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth embodiment, FIG. 1390 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1389, the front side of the paper surface is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (for example, see FIG. 1390) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.
As shown in FIG. 1389, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and a and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1389). A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.
A game board 13 (see FIG. 1390) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 1392) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.
On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1389), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an axis for opening and closing the front door. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported on the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加
An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1389). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 1390) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.
Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1389). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when the prize balls are being dispensed and when an error occurs.
In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 1390) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.
Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.
A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always urged rightward, and by sliding it leftward against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 1390, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see Figure 1389).
The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.
The structure of the base plate 60 is not limited to the resin material. For example, it may be formed so that the player cannot see the various structures which are made of wood by sticking thin plate materials and which are arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 .
The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1389). Mainly referring to FIG. 1390, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1389). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).
Note that the above-mentioned game area is interpreted in a narrow sense, and in a broader sense, the game area may be expressed as a falling area of the game ball until the profit given to the player by the game ball that has flowed down is determined. In this sense, the game area is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board 13 . For example, a path arranged upstream of a sensor SE, which will be described later, is also included in the game area.
The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 1392) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 1390) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 1390) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .
The lottery based on prizes will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, winning a prize in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 (some profit for the player (for example, payout of prize balls, execution of lottery, transition to a more advantageous state) A lottery for a special pattern (first pattern) is held when there is a ball that can be expected to give a profit, etc.). ) 765), a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbols performed for the balls entering the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbols are a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbols are a big hit. In that case, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbols are in a low probability state, for example, a special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/320. For example, with a probability of 1/60, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed when a game ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected by a sensor SE, which will be described later, will be referred to as a "special symbol 1 lottery." A lottery for a special symbol that is performed when a game ball that has entered the slot is detected by a sensor (not shown) on the downstream side is referred to as "lottery for special symbol 2".
When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or until 10 balls (the specified number of balls) ) until winning) The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. It should be noted that the fact that prize balls are paid out when the balls enter the specific winning hole 65a and the number of payouts will be described later.
Six types of special symbol jackpot types are provided: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c". Although details will be described later, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a after the end of the special game are configured to be different.
When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is a maximum of 4 for each type of the winning port. It is reserved until the second time, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2 (number of pending balls) remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In this embodiment, when both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the lottery may be preferentially executed in the order of acquisition of the special symbols (order of entering the ball), or the lottery may be executed alternately with the special symbols 1 and 2. Alternatively, the lottery may be executed simultaneously for the special symbols 1 and 2.
In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol wins. When a normal pattern wins, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize winning port 640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 640. become. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol becomes easier.
Further, when the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83, and a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second or 1 second) has passed. After that, normal symbols indicating the result of the lottery are stopped and displayed. When the balls pass through the normal winning openings 66, 67, 765 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed in the first pattern display. It is displayed by the device 37 and is also indicated by the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished in the second pattern display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal winning openings 66, 67, 765 remains, the lottery for the next normal pattern is carried out and the lottery is accepted. Variable display is started.
In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the big win, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift to a high probability state of the special symbols (during the probability change of the special symbols) from after the end of the big win to the next big win. When (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a, jackpot b, which will be described later), and after the jackpot game, when the special pattern lottery is completed 100 times, the time saving state of normal symbols (for example, which will be described later) Jackpot C and jackpot c) are prepared.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the case where the probability variation state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit is explained. For example, after the special game state ends, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, and the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. After that, the normal state may be set.
In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols to which the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols described above is provided is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.
In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols that are in the time-saving state of the normal symbols described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times.
Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to transition to. The high-probability state of special symbols in the present embodiment (during the probability change of special symbols) includes a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbols) does not change, but the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. . On the other hand, the ``low probability state of special symbols'' refers to the time when the special symbols are not changing, and the probability of the big win is normal, that is, the state of the probability of big wins being lower than during the changing of the special symbols.

In addition, "ordinary symbol time saving state (time saving medium)" refers to a game state in which the ball tends to enter the second winning hole 640 although the winning probability of the normal symbol does not change. In addition, the "normal state" is a game state in which neither the probability of the special symbol is variable nor the time reduction of the normal symbol (both the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) are not changed, and the second winning port 640 It is not easy for the ball to win a prize).
During the probability change of the special symbols or during the time saving of the normal symbols, the time for opening the electric accessary 640a associated with the second prize winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal state. When the electric accessory 640a is in an excited state (excited state, a state in which a moving plate member 641 described later is placed at the front side position and enters the first ball throwing path KR1), the electric accessory 640a is de-excited. , and compared to the retracted state (non-excited state, state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is disposed at the rear side position and retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1) becomes easy to win. Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加That is, the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated.
In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time, The number of openings of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol may be increased compared to the normal state.
In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, At least one of the number of times the accessory 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed. 2 symbols) may be configured to be increased compared to the normal state.
First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 1390). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1392), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.
When the ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of winning hole. In the present embodiment, the sensor SE arranged downstream of the first prize winning port 64 and the ball entering the second prize winning port 640 are each suspended up to four times. The number of times of suspension is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when either the sensor SE arranged downstream of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpot determined here, 15R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 4R normal jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .
Here, the “15R variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and then a jackpot with a high probability, and the “8R variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 8 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after .
In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). Yes, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.
In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of

"Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time saving state (during time saving) of the "low probability state" means that the jackpot probability is normal, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a changes while the jackpot probability remains unchanged (or the second symbol It refers to a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640 by increasing the winning probability of (normal symbols). On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor short time (state in which neither the probability of big win nor the ease of winning to the second winning port 640 is increased).
During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.
In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area.

In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") for displaying variable patterns, and a second pattern triggered by the passage of balls through normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67. and a second symbol holding lamp 84 that indicates the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of times the game balls pass through the normal winning openings 66 and 67 by the lighting state. is provided.
A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 1392), for example, the upper, middle and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like
In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1392) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

In this embodiment, the third symbols are composed of 10 types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 1392) described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned (same main symbols A variable display that finally stops when all are aligned) is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win occurs (the transition to the special game state starts). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (a variable display that finally stops when they are not aligned) is performed.
For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if it is a probability variable jackpot, the main pattern with one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers added Matching variable display is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.
Next, a description will be given of the display (right-hand navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to hit the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 .
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball is easily guided by the electric accessory 640a when the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state, so that the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Hitting the ball to the right side of the board 13 (right hitting) makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 . In addition, although the details will be described later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbols 2) performed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 results in a big hit, the player moves to the first winning hole 64. Compared to the case where a special pattern lottery (lottery of special pattern 1) is performed based on the entry of a ball, a big win (jackpots a, b, c) that can acquire the maximum number of prize balls is likely to occur. .

Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols given after the end of the big hit, or in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the variable probability state of the special symbol or the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the player to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640 unless the player hits to the right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the variable state of and the short-time state of normal symbols.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols, a specific image (right-handed navigation) is displayed, so that the player can enjoy the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming a company can be obtained without fail.
In the right-handed navigator, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Aim right!" By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely acquire the benefits of the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time-saving state of the normal symbols.
Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In this warning image, it is determined that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball to the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (to hit the ball to the right). This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player hits. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in the normal state (neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time saving state of the normal symbols).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so that it is difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 (even if the ball is hit to the right, the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640). hard to hit). Therefore, if the ball is hit to the right in the normal state, the chances of winning the lottery for the special symbols are reduced compared to the case of hitting the ball aiming at the first winning hole 64 by hitting to the left. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big win, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the player is prevented (suppressed) from losing money by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting.
When it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the message "warning" and "play left-handed!" characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be reminded that he/she should not hit with the right hand (should hit with the left hand). Further, by confirming whether or not there is a right-handed hitting warning screen, the hall clerk can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of hitting right-handed in the normal state.
In the present embodiment, as a method of determining whether or not a right-handed hit is performed, a ball enters a normal prize-winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 1390) into which a ball can flow when a right-handed hit is performed. Judge whether or not you did.
In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 1390) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. is not limited to For example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a (not limited to a right-handed game, for example, a variable winning device 65 to open the specific winning hole 65a and forcibly enter the game ball) is performed, and a right-handed warning image may be displayed. . As a result, the hall clerk can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud by simply confirming the presence or absence of the right-hand hitting warning image.

Further, for example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a, a signal indicating that fraud is being carried out is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud has been committed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraud has occurred.
Also, for example, by narrowing the right channel of the variable display device unit 80, a range through which the game ball must pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged in that range. You can do it. In this case, it can be determined that the game ball is hit to the right based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.
Alternatively, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting the displacement of a movable member (for example, a windmill) arranged on the left side of the uppermost position of the variable display unit 80 (corresponding to the center position in the left and right direction in FIG. 1390) may be arranged. good. In this case, when the game ball is being hit, it can be determined that the game ball is being hit to the right based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.
Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that the variable winning device 65 is abnormal will be described. Here, the abnormality of the variable winning device 65 is exemplified by detecting a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a even though the game is not in the special game state (jackpot state).

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable prize winning device 65, a large character "warning" is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. At the bottom of the screen, the text "Please call the gate error attendant" is displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can quickly request repairs or the like from the pachinko hall clerk or the like.
The second symbol display device 83 predetermines the symbol "O" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765. A variable display is performed by alternately turning on time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.
In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed as a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (released) for a period of time.
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the probability change of the special pattern and during the time saving of the normal pattern, so that the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) can be performed more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the probability change of the special pattern or during the time saving of the normal pattern, the winning probability is increased, or the opening time or number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is increased. is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.
Ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in the regions on both sides of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, some of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. is configured to In addition, the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged so as to be able to detect game balls flowing down the internal channel of the path forming device 700 .
When the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.
The number of times the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and the second symbol display device 37A, 37B. The symbol holding lamp 84 is also illuminated. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment. A part of the 3-pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 .
In addition, the maximum number of held balls for the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times ) may be set. In addition, the number of ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 provided on the base plate 60 is not limited to two, and may be one, or a plurality of others (for example, three or more). can be
Also, the mounting positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80. It may be above or below the device unit 80 . Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.
Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the sensor SE as the first winning hole switch provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 1392), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 1392), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.
In addition, when a ball wins, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 respectively have a sensor SE as a first winning hole switch or a second winning hole switch (to prevent the falling balls from passing continuously). It is also one of the prize winning openings (prizing ball openings) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls based on the turning on of each switch.
In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five. Also, the number of prize balls and the size relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.
An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be slidable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state (retracted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbols triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal winning openings (thru gates) 66, 67, 765, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. , the electric accessory 640a is in an excited state (entered state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.

In addition, as described above, during the probability variation of the special design and during the time saving of the normal design, the probability of hitting the normal design is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal design is also short, so the normal design In the variable display of , the pattern of "○" may be displayed more easily. That is, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened may be longer than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols.
During the probability variation of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols, it is possible to create a state in which the balls are more likely to enter the second winning port 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.
Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning the jackpot (jackets A, a, b, c) that gives the maximum profit (the number of prize balls in the special game state) as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is the second winning port. When the ball enters 640 , the value is set higher than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 . On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.
Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize winning port 640 is often in a non-excited state (retracted state), and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. A ball is shot toward the first prize winning port 64 so as to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and by winning the first prize winning port 64, an opportunity for a big winning lottery is provided. It is advantageous for the player to get more and aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, by passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in an excited state. Since it is likely to be (entering state) and is in a state where it is easy to win the second prize winning opening 640, the ball is directed toward the side where the electric accessory 640a is arranged so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80. (so-called "right-handed"), let it pass through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a, and aim to win a big prize by winning the second winning opening 640. is more advantageous for the player.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.
A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first prize winning port 64, and a laterally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof.
In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed as a result of winning a prize in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, a big win is made. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls (a specified number) have been won).

The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.
Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate in the front-rear direction. there is The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to retract the opening/closing plate to the rear to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternately repeat the state of
Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. , the left and right sides or the upper side of the variable display device unit 80 .
An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1389).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .
The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.
As shown in FIG. 1391, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.
The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.
In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.
The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 1392). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .
The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 1392) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1392, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 1392 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.
The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.
In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.
The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.
The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .
The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .
The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .
The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.
Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .
Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 1391). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).
The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 1391) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .
The overall configuration of the route configuration device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1393 to 1395. FIG. FIG. 1393 is an exploded front perspective view of the channel configuring device 700, FIG. 1394 is a partially enlarged front view of the channel configuring device 700, and FIGS. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of channel configuration device 700 at line MCDLXXXIIa.

In FIG. 1394, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication holes 751, and the outer shapes of the recovery holes 752 are illustrated by dashed lines. In addition, FIG. 1395(a) shows a retracted state in which the electric accessory 640a is retracted from the first ball-throwing route KR1, which will be described later, and FIG. Entering entry state is illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1393, the path construction device 700 is arranged below the center frame 86 of the game board 13, and includes a front side formation portion 710 arranged on the front side with respect to the base plate 60, and a base plate 60 and a rear side forming portion 720 arranged on the rear side with respect to the .
The front side forming portion 710 is mainly formed of a prize winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and bending members 740 disposed on the front side on both left and right sides of the prize winning member 730. be.
The back-side forming portion 720 includes an interposition member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 arranged on the back side of the interposition member 750, and the interposition member 750 having a solenoid 640s. and a fixedly arranged electric accessory 640a.

The prize-winning member 730 includes a cover plate portion 711 which is disposed on the front surface of the base plate 60 and which is formed thin in a shape to cover the through hole 60a and which is attached to the base plate 60, and a left-right central position of the cover plate portion 711. , an upper ball passage hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction, a lower ball passage hole 714 arranged below the upper ball passage hole 713 and drilled in the front-rear direction, and the covering plate portion 711 in the left-right direction. A first prize winning port 64 positioned in the upper central part, a second prize winning port 640 positioned below the first prize winning port 64 (below the lower ball passage hole 714), and positioned on both sides in the left and right direction in the front and back direction. a lower insertion hole 732 located below the through hole 731 and penetrating in the front-rear direction; a first ball-throwing portion 734 having a ball-passing hole 734a, a through-hole 735 extending in the upper-right direction from the right end of the lower edge of the first ball-throwing portion 734, and a through-hole 735 extending in the front-rear direction; A second ball-throwing portion 736 having a ball-passing hole 736a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the lower insertion hole 732, and a first ball-throwing portion 734 formed symmetrically with respect to the upper ball-passing hole 713. A third ball-throwing portion 737 is formed mainly.
The through-hole 731 is a member into which an upper projecting portion 741 of a bending member 740, which will be described later, is inserted. .
The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750 . In addition, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shape in front view with a curved lower surface side.
A sensor SE for detecting passage of a ball is arranged on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732 . The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a through hole formed in its side surface with a diameter slightly larger than that of a sphere. can detect the passage of The sensor SE is arranged such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the circular arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732 . As a result, the opening direction of the through-hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the rear side, so that the sphere passing through the through-hole of the sensor SE can be prevented from remaining inside the through-hole.

The first ball feeding portion 734 has a ball passing hole 734a disposed at a position communicating with the upstream end of the first inclined groove 755 of the interposed member 750, and a U-shaped ball passing hole 734a in a front view. A protruding edge portion 734b protruding toward the front side, and a downstream portion of the protruding edge portion 734b protruding toward the ball path, and the tip of the protruding portion has a shape inclined toward the rear side. and a downstream ball throwing part 734c capable of throwing the ball that has flowed down from the back side.
The through hole 735 is formed in a shape that allows the moving plate member 641 to be inserted in the front-rear direction. That is, the outer shape of the right guide portion 643 and the left guide portion 645 of the moving plate member 641 and the connection portion connecting them when viewed from the front is slightly larger.
As a result, the front end of the moving plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735 when the moving plate member 641 is retracted, and the rear end of the moving plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735 when the moving plate member 641 is in the advanced state. By doing so, the arrangement of the moving plate member 641 can be stabilized.
The second ball feeding portion 736 has a ball passing hole 736a arranged at a position communicating with the upstream end of the second inclined groove 757 of the interposition member 750, and a U-shaped ball passing hole 736a in a front view. A protruding edge portion 736b protruding toward the front side, and a downstream side portion of the protruding edge portion 736b protruding toward the ball path, and the tip of the protruding portion has a shape inclined toward the back side. and a downstream ball-throwing part 736c capable of throwing the ball that has flowed down from the back side.

The third ball-throwing portion 737 is formed symmetrically to the first ball-throwing portion 734, but is not configured to guide the game ball by the electric accessory 640a. It has a shape that allows the ball to enter from the left direction, and the frequency of ball entry can be reduced. The third ball throwing portion 737 has the same function as the general prize winning opening 63 (see FIG. 1390). That is, 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game. Since it is rare for a ball to enter the third ball throwing section 737, the maximum number of prize balls (15) is set in order to maximize the player's profit when a ball enters.
The bending member 740 is a member that is arranged on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is positioned approximately in the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 1390) when viewed from the front. are arranged symmetrically, and the external shape thereof is formed to be approximately bilaterally symmetrical.
In addition, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap large enough for a ball to pass through is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 1390) forming the game area when viewed from the front. As a result, the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 is prevented from remaining in the game area by being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 .
The bending member 740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the rear surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. and an opening 744 formed between the opposed lower protrusions 743 .

The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an open bottom when viewed from the rear, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 . As a result, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 , the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731 for arrangement. Therefore, when arranging the bending member 740 to the winning member 730, the upper projecting portion 741 can be inserted for positioning, so the assembling process can be simplified.
The lower protruding portion 743 is formed below the upper protruding portion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in a rear view with an open upper side. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed to face each other in the vertical direction.
The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter referred to as “second ball throwing path KR2”) for throwing a ball that is thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. ), and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.
The projection distance of the lower projecting portion 743 toward the rear side is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the prize winning member 730 in a state in which the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the prize winning member 730 . Therefore, the distance dimension between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 facing each other is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball is thrown vertically between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. (referred to as "first throwing path KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 protruding from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743 . The guide portion 742 protrudes in a substantially U shape with an open back side when viewed from the side.
The guide portion 742 is a projecting wall that throws a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the prize winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball throwing path KR1) in the vertical direction, and then throws the ball to the lower insertion hole 732 of the prize winning member 730. , and the height in the vertical direction of the lower inner edge is formed slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the rear surface.
The guide portion 742 is formed along the center line in the horizontal direction of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side in a front view. As a result, the sphere is guided (folded back to the back side) in contact with the guide portion 742, so that the sphere can be easily displaced in the left-right direction.
The openings 744 are predetermined gaps formed between the upper projecting portion 741 and the lower projecting portion 743 facing each other, and are formed on both left and right sides in a rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape that is open on the rear side in a side view.

The height of the upper end of the rear side end of the opening 744 is set to be substantially the same in the vertical direction as that of the distal end side of the guide portion 742 at the same front-rear position, and the height of the lower end of the rear side end is , and the lower surface of the right guide portion 643 of the moving plate member 641. The opening 744 is formed by opening in the left-right direction side surface of the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the fourth ball throwing path KR4.
The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.
The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward to both the left and right sides from a center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a seesaw member 762 arranged in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper side of the seesaw member 762. a ball-throwing opening 763 formed in the bottom, a regulating wall portion 764 for regulating the rotation of the seesaw member 762, and a normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and .
The pair of inclined surfaces 761 are inclined surfaces extending in left-right opposite directions, and are formed so that the angles of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane are bilaterally symmetrical. In this embodiment, a region with a slightly steeper angle of inclination is provided on the upstream side, and a region with a gentler angle of inclination on the downstream side is formed with an angle of inclination of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane.

The ball feed port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760 , and is formed at a position facing the first prize winning port 64 of the prize winning member 730 . Accordingly, when the distributing member 760 is disposed on an interposed member 750 described later, a space can be formed between the ball feed port 763 and the interposed member 750 facing each other.
The space is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a space through which the sphere can pass), and through a through hole 60b drilled in the base plate 60, the first winning opening of the winning member 730. 64 internal space is connected. As a result, the ball to be won in the first winning hole 64 can be thrown into the space between the ball-throwing hole 763 and the interposition member 750, and the ball can be thrown inside the space.
The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inside of the annular ring of the seesaw member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposing member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.
The projection 762a is a projection for distributing the ball alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball is thrown from the space between the ball-throwing opening 763 and the interposed member 750 facing each other. The ball is thrown in the direction opposite to the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a of the part is located, in the left-right direction. The projections 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes through displaces the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned (rotating the seesaw member 762). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by contact between the tip surface of the projection 762a and the restriction wall portion 764. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the projection 762a that is not in contact with the regulation wall portion 764 is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the downwardly displaced protrusion 762a comes into contact with the restricting wall portion 764 to restrict its displacement.
Inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throwing path KR3”) along which the balls distributed to the left and right by seesaw member 762 are rolled and thrown. It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls sorted to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.
The inclined surface 761 is inclined toward the insertion member 750 at the end on the lower side so that the thickness of the side surface on the back side increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof can be thrown to the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged in front of the sorting member 760 .
A normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is disposed between the intervening member 750 and the sorting member 760, and is fixed inside by connecting and fixing the intervening member 750 and the sorting member 760 together.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged so that the inner surface of the ball passage hole of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the surface on the side along the inclined surface 761 are aligned with the upper surface of the inclined surface 761. placement is designed.
As a result, when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the resistance given to the ball can be minimized, and the right inclined surface where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is disposed 761 and the ball flowing down the left slanted surface 761 on which the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 is not arranged can be made uniform.
The function of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is common to the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 described above. That is, the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 has a function as a detection opening through which a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed when the ball passes through.
Further, when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is is held up to four times in cooperation with , and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the second symbol reservation lamp 84 .

In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times ) may be set.
The second symbol display device 83 predetermines the symbol "O" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765. A variable display is performed by alternately turning on time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.
When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the A variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.
The interposed member 750 is a member interposed between the bending member 740 and the distribution member 760, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 65, a communication hole 751 penetrating in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, a recovery hole 752 opened below the communication hole 751, and an elongated member extending in the front-rear direction between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752. A support recess 753 penetratingly formed in a shape, a first inclined groove 755 having a linear shape that slopes down toward the left side in a front view with the left-right center position as the downstream end, and a left-right center below the first inclined groove 755. It mainly includes a linear second slanted groove 757 that slopes down toward the left side in front view with the position being the downstream end, and a second recovery hole 758 arranged below the second slanted groove 757 . It is formed.

The communication holes 751 are formed on the front side of the right and left end portions of the distribution member 760 and formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 . Therefore, the spaces at the right and left end portions of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication holes 751 . Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 passes through the communication hole 751 and is thrown to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter referred to as "fourth ball throwing route KR4"). ) can be formed.
The recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the recovery hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and the ball passing through the sensor SE is thrown to the opening of the recovery hole 752 . The recovery hole 752 is connected to a ball circulation device installed in the store, and the balls recovered in the recovery hole 752 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out again from the ball shooting unit 112a as game balls. .
The support recess 753 is a recessed groove formed to secure a sufficient space for the right guide portion 643 of the moving plate member 641 to move in the front-rear direction. The bottom surface of the support recess 753, which vertically faces the bottom surface of the right guide portion 643, is formed in a horizontal plane shape in the left-right direction. Further, the upper surface of the support recess 753, which faces the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 in the vertical direction, is formed in a planar shape with the same inclination angle as the inclined surface 643a.
That is, the support recess 753 is recessed from left to right, and is formed in a wedge shape with a wide left side and a narrow right side. (slightly larger wedge shape).

As a result, when the moving plate member 641 is used to slide in the front-rear direction, the right guide portion 643 is guided inside the support recess 753, so that the movement can be smoothly executed. When the guiding portion 643 is moved into the first ball-throwing path KR1 to receive the falling ball, the right guiding portion 643 can be supported by the lower bottom surface of the support recess 753 . That is, the support recess 753 has the effect of smoothing the movement of the moving plate member 641 and the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the moving plate member 641 .
The first inclined groove 755 is disposed at a position where the upstream end communicates with the ball passage hole 734a, and throws the ball reaching the downstream end to the front side through the upper ball passage hole 713 of the front side forming portion 710. Consists of possible shapes.
The second inclined groove 757 is arranged at a position where the upstream end communicates with the ball passage hole 736a, and passes the ball reaching the downstream end to the front side through the lower ball passage hole 714 of the front side forming portion 710. Consists of a shape that can be thrown.
In this embodiment, the first slanted groove 755 and the second slanted groove 757 are formed in a linear groove shape, and are formed so that the straight lines along which the respective grooves are parallel to each other.

The second recovery hole 758 is an opening through which a ball entering the second winning hole 640 is thrown, and is arranged upstream of the second winning hole switch (not shown). The second collection hole 758 is connected to a ball circulation device installed in the store, and the balls collected in the second collection hole 758 are circulated by the circulation device and released from the ball shooting unit 112a again as game balls. be launched.
The upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 are arranged on a straight line along the vertical direction, and the second winning hole 640 is arranged below the lower ball passing hole 714 on the same straight line ( See Figure 1394).
Therefore, the ball sent to the front side through the upper ball passing hole 713 passes through the front side of the lower ball passing hole 714 and enters the second winning hole 640 . Also, the ball thrown to the front side through the lower ball passage hole 714 merges with the flowing path of the ball thrown to the front side from the upper ball passage hole 713 and enters the second winning hole 640 .
At the confluence position of the sphere flow paths, the flow direction of the balls flowing down from the upper ball passage hole 713 is the vertical direction. Even if the balls guided from the ball passing holes 714 reach the merging position at the same time, the balls flowing down from the upper ball passing holes 713 can be passed downward with momentum, so that the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily avoided.

In addition, the wall portions 714a extending from the right and left edges of the lower ball passage hole 714 to the front side can easily prevent the balls from deviating leftward and rightward from the joining position. The wall portion 714a also acts to prevent the ball from entering the second winning hole 640 from the left and right outer sides.
A wall portion 713a extending from the left and right edges and the upper edge of the upper ball passage hole 713 to the front side prevents the ball immediately after being thrown from the upper ball passage hole 713 to the front side from the front side of the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the side from colliding. The wall portion 713a also acts to prevent the ball that has flowed down the front side of the base plate 60 from flowing down toward the second prize winning port 640 side.
The electric accessory 640a includes a solenoid 640s fixedly arranged on the interposition member 750, and a moving plate member 641 that is interlockably connected to the solenoid 640s and slides in the front-rear direction by driving the solenoid 640s.
The moving plate member 641 includes a vertically extending transmission plate portion 642 which is a plate-shaped portion to which the driving force of the solenoid 640s is transmitted, and a front side end portion of the transmission plate portion 642 which is disposed on the front side. and a right guide portion 643 extending to the right of the left guide portion 645 .

The right guide portion 643 has an upper surface, which serves as a rolling surface for balls, formed as an inclined surface 643a that slopes down toward the right side, and is arranged between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 in a front view.
The left guide portion 645 has an upper surface on which the ball rolls, which is formed as an inclined surface 645a that slopes down toward the left side, and is arranged so as to connect the bending member 740 and the first ball-throwing portion 734 in a front view. be. The upper surface of the downstream end portion of the inclined surface 645a is arranged so as to be flush with the upper surface of the lower end portion of the projecting edge portion 734b of the first ball-throwing portion 734 .
The protruding edge portion 734b of the first ball feeding portion 734 does not have a dish shape that is open upward, but the open side is directed to the right side and has a shape with a lid on the upper side. Balls that bounce off the left guide portion 645 and balls that flow down along a path that reaches the first ball feeding portion 734 from above do not jump into the ball passing hole 734a while smoothly receiving the ball. can be made difficult to occur. It should be noted that the protruding lid portion 734b may be shaped like a dish to allow the ball to enter from above.
It should be noted that even a ball that lands on the left guiding portion 645 is unlikely to enter the first ball feeding portion 734 until the bounce stops. Therefore, it is preferable to employ a configuration that reduces the rebound at the left guide portion 645 .

For example, by densely arranging nails that can collide with the ball above the left guide part 645, or by arranging a plurality of deceleration convex parts protruding on the front side of the cover plate part 711, the ball can flow down. You may make it drop the momentum of beforehand. Alternatively, a sheet member having a high cushioning property may be attached to the inclined surface 645a to suppress the bouncing of the ball.
When the solenoid 640s is in a non-excited state, the moving plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1395(a)). 1395(b)), the ball enters the first throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1395(b)).
A game ball is thrown as follows by the path construction device 700 configured as described above. A ball entering from the first winning hole 64 is thrown to a distribution member 760, and is thrown by a seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 to a third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction. A ball thrown through the third ball path KR3 reaches the fourth ball path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side when it reaches the end of the third ball path KR3. The ball is thrown. A ball thrown through the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 is thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740 . A ball thrown along the first ball-throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower projecting portion 743 of the bending member 740 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2. A ball thrown through the second ball-throwing path KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, is thrown to the recovery hole 752 of the interposition member 750, and passes through the sensor SE.
A ball thrown from the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 to the first ball-throwing path KR1 flows down toward the front side of the base plate 60, and the ball appears to be approaching the player from the player's line of sight. appear. As a result, the difference in the flowing manner from other game balls flowing downward in the game area is clarified, so that the presence of the ball thrown from the fourth ball-throwing path KR4 to the first ball-throwing path KR1 can be enhanced. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1396 and 1397, the setting of the flow-down mode of the sphere will be described. FIGS. 1396(a), 1396(b), 1397(a) and 1397(b) are partial front views of the channel configuration device 700 at area MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1394. FIGS.
In Figures 1396(a), 1396(b), 1397(a) and 1397(b), three balls P1 to P3 enter the first winning hole 64 in succession without any interval. , are illustrated in time series at intervals of 0.5 seconds.
That is, FIG. 1396(b) shows the state 0.5 seconds after the state of FIG. 1396(a), and FIG. 1397(a) shows the state 0.5 seconds after the state of FIG. 1396(b). 1397(b) is shown as a state 0.5 seconds after the state of FIG. 1397(a). As an example, FIG. 1396(a) shows a state in which the tip of the projection 762a in the central portion faces leftward.
As shown in FIG. 1396(a), when the ball P1 is guided by the projection 762a at the central portion, the guided ball P1 collides with one of the projections 762a at both ends and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the downwardly displaced protrusion 762a comes into contact with the restricting wall portion 764 to restrict its displacement (see FIG. 1396(b)).

In this state, the ball P1 that pushes down the seesaw member 762 is flowing down toward the right side, and at the same time the next ball P2 is guided by the central projection 762a. At this time, the ball P1, which pushed down the seesaw member 762 earlier, passes through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 at the same time when the ball P2 reaches the central protrusion 762a (see FIG. 1396(b)).
The ball P2 is caused to flow leftward by the seesaw member 762, and at the same time the next ball P3 is guided to the central projection 762a. At this time, when the ball P3 reaches the central protrusion 762a, the ball P1 is arranged below the right guide part 643 (see FIG. 1397(a)). After that, the sphere P3 is flowed rightward by the seesaw member 762 (see FIG. 1397(b)).
Thus, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is defined in relation to the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a. In other words, the next ball P3 reaches the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 after the ball P1 has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and before it is arranged below the right guide portion 643. designed not to.
Here, when the passage of the ball is detected through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed based on a preset operation pattern. The operation of the electric accessory 640a is not interrupted in the middle of the operation pattern. Even if the passing of the ball is detected in the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 while the operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the operation pattern is continued, the execution of the operation of the electric accessory 640a due to the detection is This is suspended until the operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the operation pattern currently being executed is completed.

Therefore, even if the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so as to affect the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 based on the ball flow time, the operation of the electric accessory 640a cannot be executed. If a state of suspension occurs, there is a possibility that the impact on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 will be unexpected.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, on the premise that the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set in the time width until the ball reaches the right guide part 643, the next ball P3 is a normal winning hole (through gate) 765 It is possible to avoid the situation in which the operation of the electric role object 640a is continued due to the detection of the preceding ball P1 in the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 until the time when the electric role object 640a is detected in advance. The movement of object 640a ends).
Therefore, when the passage of the ball is detected at the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765, the electric accessory 640a is immediately executed based on the preset operation pattern without suspending the execution of the operation of the electric accessory 640a. can be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball passing through the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 will be affected unexpectedly.
1398(a), 1398(b), 1399(a) and 1399(b) are partial front views of channel configuration device 700 at area MCDLXXXIIIa of FIG. 1394. FIGS. FIGS. 1398(a) and 1398(b) and FIGS. 1399(a) and 1399(b) show different examples of how the sphere flows down the right inclined surface 761 in chronological order.

That is, FIG. 1398(a) shows a state in which the ball is passing through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765, and FIG. 1395(a)), and the ball is guided to the recovery hole 752.
In addition, FIG. 1399(a) shows a state in which the ball is passing through a normal winning hole (through gate) 765 (the same state as in FIG. 1398(a)), and FIG. Immediately before, the moving plate member 641 enters the first ball-throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1395(b)), and the ball is guided to the second ball-throwing section 736 side.
In FIG. 1399(b), dots are drawn on the moving plate member 641 to indicate that the moving plate member 641 is sliding toward the front side and does not allow the ball to pass through the front side. is schematically shown.
Here, when the moving plate member 641 is in a non-excited state in which the solenoid 640s is in a non-excited state, the movable plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1395(a)). 1395(b)), the state in which the ball reaches the upper surface of the moving plate member 641 in a front view is in the state of entering the first throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1395(b)). passes the front side of the moving plate member 641 and flows downward, while in the excited state, the sphere reaching the upper surface of the moving plate member 641 in a front view moves toward the inclined surface 643a or the inclined surface 645a of the moving plate member 641. rolls and flows down in the left and right direction.

For example, it flows down along the arrow shown in FIG. 1399(b). More specifically, in the excited state of the moving plate member 641, the ball that reaches the first ball-throwing path KR1 rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 643a, passes through the opening 744, and then falls and is received by the second ball-throwing portion 736. be done.
In the excited state of the moving plate member 641, a ball that is about to flow down between the right bending member 740 and the first ball feeding portion 734 rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 645a and is guided to the ball passing hole 734a. , the ball enters the second winning hole 640 .
FIG. 1400 is a partial front view of game board 13 in area MCDLXXXVII of FIG. 1390. FIG. In FIG. 1400, the solenoid 640s is energized and the moving plate member 641 is shown entering.
As described above, the normal prize winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765 have the same function, so the ball entering the path construction device 700 passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. The electric accessory 640a is also activated when the ball passes through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 67 when the above-described right-handed game is played.

In this case, the number of game balls fired in a right-handed game reaching the ceiling surface of the right bending member 740 is larger than the number of balls guided to the first winning hole 64 (because it is about 10 times ), in the entering state of the moving plate member 641, the ball is more likely to reach the left guide portion 645 than the right guide portion 643 of the electric accessory 640a.
If the solenoid 640s is maintained in an energized state until the ball reaches the left guide portion 645 and reaches the first ball throwing portion 734, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 and the first ball. Even if the solenoid 640 s is switched to the non-excited state before reaching the ball feeding portion 734 , the ball just flows downward and the ball is not guided to the recovery hole 752 . That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball that reaches the left guide portion 645 wins the special symbol 1 lottery.
A ball that reaches the left guide portion 645 in the approach state is received by the first ball-throwing portion 734 within about 1.0 second regardless of the landing position. On the other hand, when the moving plate member 641 changes to the retracted state in a very short time such as 0.5 seconds, even if the ball lands near the left end of the left guide portion 645 in the approach state, the first There is a possibility that the ball entering the ball-throwing section 734 will be blocked.
Therefore, the ball flowing down without entering the first prize winning port 64 is operated as a result of the lottery by detection of the ball in the normal prize winning port (through gate) 66, 67, 765, and the left guide portion is put into the entering state. Whether or not the ball is accepted by the first ball throwing section 734 when it reaches 645 in a timely manner depends on the operating mode of the electric accessory 640a.

In particular, in the operation pattern in the normal state (the fourth operation pattern described later), the period in which the moving plate member 641 is in the entering state is shorter than 0.5 seconds, so the ball is received by the first ball-throwing portion 734. The odds are extremely low.
If the moving plate member 641 is in the entering state at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and reaches the first throwing path KR1, the ball is guided by the right guiding part 643 and finally reaches the second winning hole 640. Since the ball will enter the ball, it will not pass through the sensor SE (see FIG. 1395(b)), and the situation of winning the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be prevented. On the other hand, if the moving plate member 641 is in the retracted state when the ball reaches the first ball-throwing route KR1, the ball will be guided to the second ball-throwing route KR2 and pass through the sensor SE. will do.
As described above, according to the electric accessory 640a of the present embodiment, the ball flows down along a route that can reach the right guide portion 643 (the route after entering the first winning port 64), or the left guide portion 645 Possibility of winning the special symbol 1 lottery (possibility of winning the special symbol 2 lottery) by the ball can be varied depending on whether the ball flows down along a route that can reach the .
As described above, the balls reach the right guiding portion 643 with a space therebetween. A plurality of balls flowing down the mouth (through gate) 67 side can reach at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable that the left guide portion 645 be formed stronger than the right guide portion 643 .

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the left guide portion 645 is arranged on the transmission plate portion 642 (see FIG. 1393). That is, by disposing the left guide portion 645 on the transmission plate portion 642 on the side closer to the solenoid 640s (on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path), the attitude change of the left guide portion 645 is suppressed. As a result, even if the left guide portion 645 is weighted by a plurality of balls riding on it, it is possible to prevent the left guide portion 645 from excessively changing its posture and increasing the operating resistance of the moving plate member 641. be able to.
It should be noted that means for forming the left guide portion 645 firmly is not limited to those described above. For example, the left guide portion 645 may be thicker than the right guide portion 643 , or a rib may be formed to connect the lower portion of the left guide portion 645 and the transmission plate portion 642 .
The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 1392) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1401(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 1401(b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special design. FIG. 1401(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in normal symbols.
As shown in FIG. 1401(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.
The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 1401 (b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , and is defined in association with the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.
Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 1401(b)).
When the jackpot A is achieved, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 15 rounds is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the first operation pattern described later. The state continues until the next jackpot is won.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 49" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 1401(b)).
In the case of the jackpot B, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 8 rounds is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern described later. The state continues until the next jackpot is won.
The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot C (see 202b3 in FIG. 1401(b)).
In the case of a jackpot C, the game state after four rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is executed is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern described later. This state continues until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times.

In the jackpot based on the special pattern 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), the jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while the jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. , Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.
On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 1401(b)).
In the case of the jackpot a, as in the case of the jackpot A, the game state after executing 15 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is changed to the second mode described later. The state set to the operating pattern 1 continues until the next big win is won.
The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 49" in association with the jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 1401(b)).

In the case of the jackpot b, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 15 rounds is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the first operation pattern described later. The state continues until the next jackpot is won.
The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot c (see 202b6 in FIG. 1401(b)).
In the case of a jackpot c, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 15 rounds is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the third operation pattern described later. This state continues until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times.
As described above, when the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640) results in a big win, 15 rounds of the big win game can be executed regardless of the big win type, while the big win game ends. The distribution of the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a afterward is set to be different from the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a big win. In particular, the difference is remarkable in the jackpot c, which will be described in detail later.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 1401(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 1401(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 1401(c)).
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, and the second winning random number table 202c , and it is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.
Figures 1402(a) to 1402(d) are diagrams showing an example of the detection of passage of a ball through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 and the time-measurement change of the state of the electric accessory 640a. In addition, FIG. 1402(a) shows the timing change in the first operation pattern, FIG. 1402(b) shows the timing change in the second operation pattern, and FIG. 1402(c) shows the third operation pattern. Timed changes in the actuation pattern are illustrated, and in FIG. 1402(d), timed changes in the fourth actuation pattern are illustrated.
It should be noted that the fourth operation pattern is an operation pattern that is adopted during normal operation or after the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of big hits C and c (see FIG. 1401(b)).

In FIGS. 1402(a) to 1402(d), the second symbol is displayed with variation due to the detection of the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (about 0.1 seconds later in this embodiment). ), and when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, each operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is determined based on the time when the passage of the ball is detected through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Among them, the meaning of the state of the electric accessory 640a in the time length of the reference time Td1 (approximately 0.5 seconds in this embodiment) after the passage of the ball is detected through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 will be described in detail. .
The length of the reference time Td1 is set as the time corresponding to the time from when the ball passes through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 to when it passes through the right guiding portion 643 .
As shown in FIG. 1402(a), in the first operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected through the normal prize-winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, after the end of the variable display of the second symbol (normal An entry state in which the moving plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a has entered the first ball throwing route KR1 over the reference time Td1 after 0.1 seconds have passed since the passage of the ball through the winning opening (through gate) 765. (In the figure, it is also shown as "Advance". The same applies in subsequent figures.).
In the first operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing route KR1 until about 3.0 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 after the reference time Td1. This state is maintained (approximately 3.0 seconds pass before the end of normal pattern fluctuation).

As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 due to the execution of the right-handed shot, the ball reaching the left guide portion 645 is guided to the first ball throwing portion 734. It is possible to maintain the state in which the moving plate member 641 has entered the first ball throwing path KR1. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 .
In addition, the moving plate member 641 can enter the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball detected passing through the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide portion 643. can be easily guided to the second ball-throwing portion 736 by rolling on the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 and flowing to the right side.
As a result, among the balls that entered the first winning port 64, the ball that was thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and won the lottery for the special symbol 1, so that the second winning is achieved. A situation in which a ball is put into the mouth 640 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is obtained can be made more likely to occur.
As shown in FIG. 1402(b), in the second operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, the electric accessory 640a is detected immediately before the reference time Td1 elapses. The moving plate member 641 enters the first ball-throwing route KR1, and immediately after the reference time Td1 elapses, the moving plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a retreats from the first ball-throwing route KR1 (in the figure, Also shown as “retired.” The same applies in subsequent figures).

In the second operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing route KR1 until about 1.0 second after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 after the reference time Td1 is exceeded. This state is maintained.
As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 due to the execution of right-handed hitting, even if the ball reaches the left guide portion 645, the ball is sent to the first ball throwing portion 734. Since it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 for a sufficient length to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in a right-handed game. can't.
On the other hand, the moving plate member 641 can enter the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball detected passing through the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide portion 643, so that the ball can be moved. By rolling on the upper surface of the right guiding portion 643 and flowing to the right side, it is possible to facilitate the guidance to the second ball throwing portion 736 . Since the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the entering state for 0.5 seconds after the ball reaches the right guide portion 643, the ball can be stably thrown toward the second ball throwing portion 736 side.
As a result, among the balls that entered the first prize winning port 64, the ball that was thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and won the lottery of the special symbol 1, so that the second prize is won. It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the mouth 640 and win the lottery of the special symbol 2. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 1402(c), in the third operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected through the normal prize-winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, after the end of the variable display of the second symbol (normal 0.1 seconds after the passage of the ball through the winning opening (through gate) 765), the moving plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the state of entering the first ball throwing path KR1, and the reference time Td1. Immediately before the passage of the reference time Td1, the moving plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to a state in which it is withdrawn from the first ball throwing path KR1 (in the figure, it is also indicated as “retreat”; the same applies in subsequent figures), and the reference time Td1 elapses. Immediately after that, the moving plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to enter the first ball throwing path KR1.
In the third operation pattern, after the passage of the reference time Td1, the motor-driven accessory 640a continues on the first throwing path KR1 until approximately 3.0 seconds have passed since the passage of the ball was detected through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. is maintained (about 3.0 seconds pass until the normal symbol fluctuation ends).
As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 due to the execution of the right-handed shot, the ball reaching the left guide portion 645 is guided to the first ball throwing portion 734. It is possible to maintain the state in which the moving plate member 641 has entered the first ball throwing path KR1. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 .
On the other hand, since the moving plate member 641 can be brought into a state of retreating from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball detected passing through the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 passes through the right guiding portion 643, the ball can be moved. By causing the ball to roll on the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 and flow to the right side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation where the ball is guided to the second ball throwing portion 736 .

As a result, among the balls that entered the first winning port 64, the ball that was thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and won the lottery for the special symbol 1, so that the second winning is achieved. It is possible to make the situation in which the ball enters the mouth 640 and wins the lottery of the special symbol 2 more difficult to occur.
It should be noted that, when the ball thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762 is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, and the variation of the normal pattern (second pattern) is continuing, the ball is the second. It is possible that the electric accessory 640a enters the entering state when reaching the 1-throwing route KR1. In this case, the ball thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762 enters the second prize winning opening 640, and the special symbol 2 lottery can be won.
As shown in FIG. 1402(d), in the fourth operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, the moving plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a moves to the first position. After the retracted state from the first ball throwing route KR1 is maintained and the moving plate member 641 changes to the entering state, the moving plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state again immediately before the reference time Td1 elapses. In the fourth operation pattern, the control is completed at the reference time Td1 (approximately 0.5 second elapses until the fluctuation of the normal symbol ends).
As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 due to the execution of right-handed hitting, even if the ball reaches the left guide portion 645, the ball is sent to the first ball throwing portion 734. Since it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 for a sufficient length to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in the right-handed game. can't.

On the other hand, since the moving plate member 641 can be brought into a state of retreating from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball detected passing through the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 passes through the right guiding portion 643, the ball can be moved. By causing the ball to roll on the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 and flow to the right side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation where the ball is guided to the second ball throwing portion 736 .
As a result, among the balls that entered the first winning port 64, the ball that was thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and won the lottery for the special symbol 1, so that the second winning is achieved. It is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the mouth 640 to win the lottery of the special symbol 2.例文帳に追加That is, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64, the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be repeatedly won.
According to the operation patterns described in detail above, in the game state aiming at winning a big win by winning the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, it is possible to create the winning patterns of the special symbol lottery in different modes.
For example, in the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is possible to aim to win the special symbol 2 lottery in the right-handed game, so the above-mentioned "right-handed navigation" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is preferred.

Furthermore, in the first operation pattern, the period during which the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the state of entering the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 1395(b)) is long, and the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 When the passage of the ball is detected and the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the moving plate member 641 is in the state of entering the first ball-throwing path KR1. A lottery for the special symbol 2 can be won with a part of the ball thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that the player receives when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 during the right-handed game.
On the other hand, in the third operation pattern, the period in which the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the entering state (see FIG. 1395(b)) is long, but after the passage of the ball is detected through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, When the reference time Td1 elapses, the moving plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1. , the ball passes through the front side of the moving plate member 641 and is guided to the sensor SE.
That is, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, it is possible to reduce the possibility of winning the lottery of the special symbol 2 with the ball thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762. - 特許庁As a result, the disadvantage that the player receives when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 during the right-handed game can be made higher than in the case of the first operation pattern.
For example, in the second operation pattern and the fourth operation pattern, it is difficult to aim to win the special symbol 2 lottery in the right-handed game because the operation time of the electric accessory 640a is too short. It is preferable to recommend a left-handed game without displaying the above-described "right-handed navigation" on the symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

In this case, in the second operation pattern, the moving plate member 641 has entered the first ball throwing route KR1 after the passage of the ball through the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 is detected and the reference time Td1 has elapsed. Since it is in the state (see FIG. 1395(b)), even if the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a part of the ball thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762 wins the special symbol 2 lottery. can do.
As a result, the lottery of the special symbols that the player can acquire when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 during the left-handed game can be generated alternately between the special symbols 1 and 2.例文帳に追加It should be noted that when the moving plate member 641 is in the entering state after the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is detected, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be won because of the normal winning. Since it is a case where the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change at the same time as the ball passes through the opening (through gate) 765, the normal symbol (second symbol) is detected when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. 2 symbols) continues, the effect of facilitating the acquisition of the special symbol 2 lottery cannot be achieved.
On the other hand, in the second operation pattern (or the fourth operation pattern), the period from the detection of the ball at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 to the end of the operation control of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, compared to the first and third operation patterns in which the same time width is set to 3 seconds, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) will be suspended. . Therefore, the effect that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily obtained can be achieved with a high probability.
On the other hand, in the fourth operation pattern, the entry state of the moving plate member 641 (see FIG. 1395(b)) is as short as in the second operation pattern, and the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is short. Since the moving plate member 641 is in a retracted state when the reference time Td1 has elapsed after the detection, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the special pattern 2 lottery is drawn with the ball thrown to the right side by the seesaw member 762. can be less likely to be obtained. As a result, most of the special symbol lotteries that the player can acquire when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 during the left-handed game can be occupied by the special symbol 1 lottery.

As described in detail above, according to each operation pattern, in the game state aiming at winning a big win by winning the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, it is possible to create the acquisition pattern of the special symbol lottery in different aspects. .
Returning to FIG. 1401(b), the difference in profit that the player can obtain between the special symbol 1 jackpot and the special symbol 2 jackpot will be described.
First, special symbol 2 has a higher probability of winning the maximum round (15 rounds in this embodiment). Among the jackpots of the special pattern 1, the jackpot of the maximum round is 20%, whereas the jackpot of the special pattern 2 is 100% and becomes the maximum round. Therefore, at least in terms of the number of winning balls, the profit obtained by the player from the special pattern 2 jackpot is larger than the profit obtained by the player from the special pattern 1 jackpot.
In addition, in the case of a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, if the jackpot of the special pattern 2 is 100%, it becomes a right-handed game, and the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be repeatedly obtained, but the jackpot of the special pattern 1 is obtained. In 30% (jackpot B) of them, the left-handed game is recommended instead of the right-handed game, and the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 occur alternately.

In this case, in the left-handed game, the time efficiency for acquiring the special pattern lottery is lower than in the right-handed game, and the special pattern 1 lottery is executed in 1/2, so the maximum round jackpot is achieved. There are many hurdles to acquire.
In addition, in the case of a low probability state after the end of the jackpot game, if the special pattern 2 jackpot (jackpot c) is a right-handed game, the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be repeatedly obtained, but the special pattern 1 jackpot. In (jackpot C), the left-handed game is recommended instead of the right-handed game, and the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 occur alternately.
In this case, in the left-handed game, the time efficiency for acquiring the special pattern lottery is lower than in the right-handed game, and the special pattern 1 lottery is executed in 1/2, so the maximum round jackpot is achieved. There are many hurdles to acquire.
Furthermore, although the condition that the lottery of special symbols is performed 100 times is the same, it is easy to win the lottery of special symbol 2 100 times if it is a big hit c. Since 100 lotteries are completed after 50 lotteries and 50 lotteries for the special pattern 2, only 50 lotteries for the special pattern 2 can actually be obtained.

In summary, the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 2 is compared with the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 1. First, it is easy to obtain the big win of the maximum round. It has the advantage that it is easy to make the game state to obtain repeatedly, and thirdly, it is easy to maintain the time efficiency for obtaining the lottery of the special symbols by the right-handed game in a high state.
In the above fiftieth embodiment, when the lottery with the special pattern 2 is preferentially executed, the variation time related to the lottery is selected with probability from options of about 3 seconds to 5 minutes. is not limited to For example, when the lottery is executed simultaneously with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, a game state may be configured in which the fluctuation time related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 is intentionally set long.
That is, for example, in the 100 lotteries of special symbols after the end of the big win B or after the end of the big win C, the variation time of the lottery of the special symbol 2 may be always set to 10 minutes. In this case, on the premise that the ball entering the first winning hole 64 passes the sensor SE and the second winning hole 640 alternately, the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full. When the ball is entered into the first prize winning port 64 after the ball passes through the second prize winning port 640, the lottery of the special pattern 2 cannot be acquired and the lottery of the special pattern 1 is repeatedly executed. Become.
Also, the player can play the game so as not to let the ball enter the first winning hole 64 when the reserved number of the special symbols 2 is full, but in this case, the time efficiency of the game is deteriorated. It is possible to reduce the number of occurrences of the jackpot within the same time. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the management of the gaming machine parlor from becoming in the red.

In the game state described above, the balls thrown to the right side from the seesaw member 762 provide the benefit of winning the special symbol 2 lottery and the benefit of receiving prize balls until the reserved number of the special symbol 2 is full. Since it is given to the player, it gives the player the benefit of winning the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the benefit of receiving the payout of the prize ball, which the player can obtain rather than the ball flowed to the left from the seesaw member 762. is large.
On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, the ball thrown from the seesaw member 762 to the right side only gives the player the benefit of receiving the payout of the prize balls, so the special symbol 1. The profit obtained by the player is smaller than the ball thrown leftward from the seesaw member 762 by the amount added to the profit for winning the lottery.
That is, the size of the profit given to the player between the balls thrown to the right and the balls thrown to the left from the seesaw member 762 can be switched depending on whether or not the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full.
In the game state described above, the operation of the moving plate member 641 based on the detection of the ball at the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 may be selected by lottery from a plurality of operation patterns.

For example, 5% of the operation may be performed in the second operation pattern, and the remaining 95% may be operated in the fourth operation pattern. In this case, if the moving plate member 641 operates in the second operation pattern, there is an advantage that the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be obtained, so that the attention to the moving plate member 641 can be improved.
On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be won by operating in the fourth operation pattern, while the moving plate member 641 operates in the second operation pattern. Since there is a disadvantage that both the special symbols 1 and 2 cannot be obtained by lottery, the attention to the moving plate member 641 can be improved in this case as well. That is, it is possible to improve the attention to the moving plate member 641 regardless of whether the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full or not.
In addition, when the lottery is executed simultaneously with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, a game state may be configured in which the fluctuation time related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 is intentionally set long. For example, by always setting the fluctuation time of the lottery of the special pattern 1 to 10 minutes, the result of the lottery of the special pattern 1 is obtained in the game state in which both the lottery of the special pattern 1 and the lottery of the special pattern 2 can occur. A lottery for the special symbol 2 can be executed a plurality of times before. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of unintentionally generating a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and giving a disadvantage to the player.
According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A ball flowing down a right inclined surface 761 on which a normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged, and a ball flowing down a left inclined surface 761 on which a normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is not arranged, Uniformity of the flow rate can be achieved.
In addition, the position where the ball entering the first winning port 64 is branched into the flow path on the second winning port 640 side (for example, the first ball throwing route KR1), or the position where the ball falls on the second winning port 640 side (for example, , the upper ball passage hole 713, and the lower ball passage hole 714), the flowing direction of the ball has a longitudinal direction component. As a result, it is possible to highlight a portion closely related to the ball flowing down to the second prize winning port 640 .
Also, the path to the second prize winning port 640 merges on the front side of the lower ball passage hole 714 , but this merging position is sufficiently distant from the moving plate member 641 . As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the moving plate member 641 is subjected to a load from the balls that collide at the confluence position. By shifting the lateral positions of the upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 and expanding the lateral width of the second winning hole 640 to two or more balls, the front side of the lower ball passing hole 714 You may make it avoid the confluence|merging of the flow path in.
In addition, it is possible to manage so that the next ball will not be detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 from the time the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols. It is possible to form a case As a result, the electric accessory 640a, whose operation is controlled when the ball is detected, can act on the ball that has passed through the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 with good timing.

In addition, the moving plate member 641 is arranged so as to be able to act on both the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the balls that have passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67. . Thereby, the usability of the moving plate member 641 can be improved.
That is, even in a game state in which a left-handed game aiming at entering a ball into the first winning hole 64 is recommended, a right-handed game aiming at entering a ball into a normal winning hole (through gate) 67 is recommended. It can be used effectively even in the game state where the game is played. It should be noted that this effect is not limited to the left-right symmetrical board surface, but is an effect that can also be exhibited in, for example, an asymmetrical board surface (for example, a configuration in which the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 is omitted).
Regarding the number of balls riding on the moving plate member 641, while a plurality of balls can ride on the left guiding portion 645 at the same time, the number of balls riding on the right guiding portion 643 is limited to one. Accordingly, the durability of the moving plate member 641 can be improved by configuring the right guide portion 643 stronger than the left guide portion 645 .
In addition, by preparing a plurality of operation patterns of the electric accessary 640a, it is possible to create a winning pattern of a special symbol lottery in a different mode. For example, when the ball is repeatedly entered into the first winning hole 64, a pattern in which the lottery for the special symbol 1 is repeatedly obtained, and a pattern in which the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are alternately obtained. You can switch.

In addition, when a right-handed game is recommended as a winning pattern for a special symbol lottery, a pattern that makes it easy to repeatedly win a lottery for a special symbol 1 when the ball accidentally enters the first winning hole 64, and a seesaw member. As for the ball swept to the right side at 762, it is possible to switch between a pattern in which the acquisition of the special symbol 1 lottery is avoided with a high probability.
The fifty-first embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 1403 to 1412. FIG. In the fiftieth embodiment, the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 when the ball flows down one of the paths sorted by the route construction device 700. However, the sorting unit of the fifty-first embodiment At 980, it is configured such that the balls pass through detection devices SE4 and SE5 as normal winning openings (through gates) in a plurality of paths to which the balls are distributed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1403 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 in the fifty-first embodiment. In FIG. 1403, illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1403, the base plate 60 is formed with a through hole 2060a through the thickness direction of the base plate 60 below the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 1390) is attached.

The through-hole 2060a is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 described later when viewed from the front, and the drive unit 960 and the specific prize winning port unit 950 provided in the front unit 940 are inserted inside the through-hole 2060a.
On the base plate 60, a prize winning unit 930 is arranged from the game area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite side (rear side) to the game area, which are fastened and fixed by tapping screws or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.
The winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back side of the front unit 940, a drive unit 960 arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and It mainly includes a displacement member 966 configured to be vertically movable by the driving force of the drive unit 960 . Note that the displacement member 966 will be described later.
Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown to the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning hole unit 950 and is connected to the feather member 945 arranged on the front unit 940 via the displacement member 966 . Accordingly, the blade member 945 can be rotationally displaced as the displacement member 966 is operated by the driving force of the drive unit 960 . A detailed description of the operation of the feather member 945 will be given later.
1404-1406, a detailed description of front unit 940 will now be provided. 1404(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 1404(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. 1405 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 1406 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit 940. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 1404(a) and 1404(b), the outer shape of the feather member 945 is illustrated with hidden lines.
As shown in FIGS. 1404 to 1406, the front unit 940 includes a rear base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the rear base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair of) feather members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.
The back base 941 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness and having an upside-down substantially T-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The inside of hole 2060a is visible.

The rear base 941 includes a first out port 71 formed by a notch at the lower end, a specific prize winning port 65a positioned above the first out port 71 and penetrating therethrough in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and a specific prize winning port 65a. It mainly comprises a second winning hole 640 penetrating above the winning hole 65a, and a first winning hole 64 formed by a notch in the edge (upper edge) opposite to the first out hole 71.
The rear base 941 has a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer edge. The through-hole 941a is formed of a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side to the rear side, and a second through-hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced from the rear side to the front side.
The first through-hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw is inserted to fasten and fix the back base 941 (winning unit 930) to the base plate 60. The inner diameter of the first through-hole 941a1 is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the tapping screw. be done.
Also, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side to the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the rear base 941 is formed in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to a positioning hole formed around the through hole 2060a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the positioning hole. As a result, the rear base 941 (the prize winning unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60. FIG.
The second through-hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the rear base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the rear base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the rear side of the rear base 941 . In this case, the operation of removing the front base 943 from the rear base 941 requires that the prize winning unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13 .
Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side to the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding to the rear side of the rear base 941 . As a result, when the specific winning hole unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, the head of the screw can be prevented from coming into contact with the specific winning hole unit 950. FIG.
The rear base 941 is formed such that the outer shape of the lower end in the direction of gravity is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 1390) of the game board 13 . The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge of the notch bottom (the edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, any one of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the specific winning port 65a and the general winning port 63 (see FIG. 1390) A game ball that has not yet flowed in can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area) through the first out port 71.例文帳に追加

The first prize winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out a semicircular end portion on the side opposite to the first out opening 71 . In addition, the first winning hole 64 is formed so that the size of its inner edge is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball flowing into the first receiving portion 941g, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (Fig. 1404(b), the front side of the paper surface)) through the first winning port 64.
At the edge of the first winning port 64, a first receiving portion 941g protruding toward the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 1404(a)) and formed in a cup shape, and the side opposite to the game area (FIG. 1404 ( b) A first ball feeding portion 942g that protrudes in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).
The first receiving portion 941g is formed to have a size capable of receiving one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the gravity direction upper side of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning port 64) can be caused to flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941g.
The bottom surface of the first receiving portion 941g is inclined downward toward the rear surface side. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941g can be thrown to the rear side (the side of the first ball-throwing portion 942g) through the first winning port 64 .

Further, the first receiving portion 941g is provided with guide portions 941g1 that extend downward from the upper end portions of both ends in the lateral direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 1404) of the base plate 60 while being inclined outward in the left-right direction. The guide part 941 g 1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941 . As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving portion 941g due to collision of the game ball flowing down the flow region with the first receiving portion 941g.
Further, if the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640 and the specific winning port 65 are integrally formed on the rear base 941, there is a possibility that the arrangement of the game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area will be insufficient. Therefore, it becomes difficult to change the flowing direction of the game ball. Therefore, even though there is a risk that the interest of the player will be spoiled, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed. .
Furthermore, when a game ball flowing down toward the second winning opening 640 collides with the front side of the rear base 941, the guide portion 941g1 can guide the game ball to the outside in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the probability that the game ball enters the second winning hole 640 from becoming excessively high.
The first ball feeding portion 942g is formed in a U shape that is open on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance dimension between opposing inner edges thereof is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first ball-feeding portion 942g has a bottom surface that slopes downward toward the back side, and a protruding tip end that contacts the edge of an inlet 982d of a ball-feeding unit 970, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing portion 942g from the inside of the first receiving portion 941g through the first winning port 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball feeding portion 942g has a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view at the upper end portion of the projecting tip. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a recessed portion on which a second protrusion 982d1 of the ball feeding unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have approximately the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first ball-throwing portion 942g and the ball-throwing unit 970 will be given later.
The second prize winning opening 640 is penetratingly formed in a substantially D shape with an upwardly curved shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball thrown between opposing feather members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown from the second winning hole 640 to the rear side.
A front side wall portion 941b protruding to the front side and a second ball feeding portion 942c protruding to the rear side are formed at the edge of the second winning hole 640 .
The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60 . The front side wall portion 941b is sized so that its projecting tip end surface abuts a ball-feeding guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball feeding portion 942c is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge portion of the second prize winning opening 640 so as to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the rear. The dimension of the second ball feeding portion 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1404(b)) is set larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls rolling on the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.
The pair of second ball feeding portions 942c are arranged so that the distance dimension between them facing each other in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1404(b)) is the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. (Fig. 1404(b) left-right direction) is set to be substantially the same length dimension, and the rolling part 943a is provided inside.
The second ball feeding portion 942c is arranged inside the displacement member 966 in the assembled state, and arranged to face the displacement member 966 in the vertical and horizontal directions. The lateral width between the outer surfaces of the second ball feeding portion 942c is slightly shorter than the lateral width between the inner surfaces of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG. As a result, the lateral displacement of the displacement member 966 can be restricted by the second ball feeding portion 942c.
The rear base 941 is recessed in two places in a circular shape from the game area side of the rear base 941 toward the opposite side to the game area on the upper side (first prize winning opening 64 side) in the vicinity of the second winning opening 640. A first shaft hole 941d, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating the rear base 941, and the outside of the two first openings 941e in the facing direction. and a first guide wall 942b located at and protruding on the back side.

The first shaft hole 941d can support a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a blade member 945, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.
The first opening 941e has an arcuate shape centered on the center of the first shaft hole 941d. Further, the first opening 941e allows the projection 945b of the feather member 945 to pass through, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the projection 945b in the radial direction of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. Thereby, when the feather member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the projection 945b from contacting the inner surface of the first opening 941e.
The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the vertical displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966, which will be described later, is displaced. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) of the displacement member 966 .
In addition, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and are extended in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. As a result, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated by bringing the projecting portion 966a of the displacement member 966 into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed in a long rectangular opening in the direction in which the pair of feather members 945 face each other (horizontal direction in FIG. 1404(b)). are placed.
The rear base 941 includes a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the specific winning port 65a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a first guide wall 942b side (upper side in FIG. 1404(b)) from the outer frame of the specific winning port 65a. ), and a second guide wall 942d protruding toward the end.
The bulging portion 942h bulges out toward the rear side of the rear base 941 and is connected to the outer frame of the specific winning hole 65a and the second ball feeding portion 942c. As a result, when the displacing member 966, which will be described later, is disposed on the back side of the back base 941, the contact area between the displacing member 966 and the back surface of the back base 941 can be reduced. ) resistance can be reduced.
The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) of the displacement member 966 can be restricted.

Therefore, the displacement member 966 has the above-described second ball-feeding portion 942c arranged on the inside to restrict displacement in the lateral direction, and also has the second guide wall 942d arranged on the outside to restrict displacement in the lateral direction. be. Thereby, the lateral displacement of the displacement member 966 can be restricted for a long period of time.
The rear base 941 is provided with a second outlet 941f formed by notching downward in a semicircular shape at the upper edge of both the left and right ends of the specific prize winning opening 65a. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60, and has a shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is formed.
A third ball-feeding portion 942e, which is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear, is formed at the edge of the second outlet 941f. As a result, the game ball thrown to the rear side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing portion 942e.
The third ball-throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape when viewed from the rear protrudes toward the rear side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f is formed. can be rolled to the rear side.

The rear base 941 includes a third through hole 941i extending linearly upward from the upper end of the first opening 941e, and a first through hole 941i extending outward from the upper end of the third through hole 941i to the left and right. A fourth through hole 941j penetrating in an arcuate shape around the axis of the shaft hole 941d, and a ball feed hole 941k formed between a pair of third through holes 941i and having a size that allows a game ball to pass through. , and a rolling plate portion 941l extending toward the rear side with the lower edge portion of the ball feeding hole 941k as the base end.
The third through-hole 941i is a through-hole for passing the extended portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e to the rear side when the feather member 945 is assembled. The fourth through-hole 941j is a through-hole for allowing displacement of the extension portion 945d when the feather member 945 is operated, and the displacement trajectory of the extension portion 945d in a front view (axial view of the shaft member 945a). is drilled in a shape that includes the entire Since the plate-shaped portion 945e passes through the rear base 941 and is arranged on the rear side, it is not necessary to consider the displacement trajectory of the plate-shaped portion 945e.
The ball-throwing hole 941k is an opening for throwing a ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e in the open state of the feather member 945 to the front side. Since the lower part of the ball feeding hole 941k is open on the front side of the ball feeding hole 941k (see FIGS. 1405 and 1406), the possibility of the ball entering the ball feeding hole 941k from the front side can be reduced.
That is, while the front region of the ball feeding hole 941k is formed as a confluence position of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e and the ball rolling on the upper surface of the feather-shaped main body 945, the ball is passed through the ball feeding hole 941k. The flow can be exclusively directed to the front side.

The rolling plate portion 941l is formed as an inclined plate that is inclined upward toward the back side, and is configured so that the ball riding on the extension tip side flows down to the base end side (front side). The ball that rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 941 and reaches the base end passes through the ball feed hole 941k and reaches the front side of the rear base 941 (the space between the rear base 941 and the front base 943). , and then flow down.
The front base 943 is formed in a substantially upside-down T shape that is smaller than the rear base when viewed from the front. Also, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the rear base 941 can be visually recognized by the player.
The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a protruding at positions corresponding to the second prize winning opening 640 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above. be done.
The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the rear, and the second prize winning opening 640 of the rear base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. A pair of feather members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (open side of the U-shape).

Furthermore, the projecting distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, and suppress the game ball from flowing into the second winning port 640 from the outside between the pair of feather members 945, which will be described later. can.
The second receiving portion 943c includes a ball-feeding guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof, and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the rear base.
A pair of sending ball guide portions 943 d are formed below the pair of feather members 945 . Also, the pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the rear base 941, respectively, and when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, the end surfaces thereof come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the space between the pair of feather members 945 facing each other can be thrown between the facing ball guide portions 943d.
The rolling portion 943a is formed on the lower side between the pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d facing each other, and the upper end face 943a1 is inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is arranged at the inner lower end of the second prize winning port 640 in a state where the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof is located on the rear surface. It protrudes to the rear side of the base 941 .

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of ball-throwing guide portions 943d opposed to each other can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1, thereby You can throw the ball to the side.
In addition, the front base 943 has an annular projection 943b projecting annularly at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941 on the opening side (upper side) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 on its inner edge, and the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a feather member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945 a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941 d of the rear base 941 . Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.
The third receiving portion 944a is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game balls flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can be transferred to the rear surface through the second out port 941f. You can throw the ball sideways.
A pair of feather members 945 are arranged with the second prize winning opening 640 formed in the rear base 941 interposed therebetween when viewed from the front. The feather member 945 is made of a colored translucent material, and is visible to the player through the front base 943 .

The wing member 945 includes a wing-like main body 945m formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front and having a thickness smaller than the width between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other, and the rear side of the wing-like main body 945m. a projection 945b protruding from the wing-shaped main body 945m, an insertion hole 945c formed through the wing-shaped main body 945m in the thickness direction (from the rear base 941 side to the front base 943 side), and an insertion hole 945c at the end of the wing-shaped main body 945m. A connecting portion 945d extending from the end on the opposite side to the side to be connected to the back side, and a plate extending from the tip side of the extending portion 945d in the longitudinal direction of the feather-shaped main body 945m (vertical direction in FIG. 1404(a)). and a plate-like portion 945e extending in a shape.
The extension part 945d and the plate-like part 945e pass through the through-holes 941i and 941j in the assembled state (see FIG. 1404(a)), and are parts configured to be operable inside the distribution unit 980. will be described later.
The insertion hole 945c is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the feather member 945 is rotatable. It can be arranged between opposing sides. As a result, the blade member 945 can be displaced between a closed state (see FIG. 1404(a)) in which the tip side of rotation approaches, and an open state in which the tip side of rotation is displaced to open outward on both left and right sides.
The projection 945b is a transmission portion that is inserted into a sliding groove 966a2 of a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and transmits the driving force of the drive unit 960. As shown in FIG. The projection 945b is dimensioned such that its tip protrudes through the first opening 941e of the rear base 941 to the rear side of the rear base 941 and can be inserted into the slide groove 966a2.

The displacement member 966 is formed in a U-shape with its upper side open when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding portion 966a that protrudes laterally outward from the upper end portion and a bulging portion that protrudes from the lower end portion toward the rear side. 966b, and a second opening 966c is penetratingly formed at a substantially central position in a front view.
The second opening 966c has an inner edge larger than the second winning opening 640 in front view, and the second winning opening 640 is arranged inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning hole 640 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966 .
The protruding portions 966a include contact portions 966a1 positioned on both lateral sides of the displacement member 966 and extending in the longitudinal direction, and sliding grooves 966a2 formed through the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction. , provided.
The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the projection 945b of the blade member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated elongated hole in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG. Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 966a2 is set larger than the width dimension of the projection 945b in the radial direction of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the feather member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 facing each other in the width direction, and restricting the operation of the feather member 945.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back base 941 side), and a laterally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is an opening into which the transmission member of the drive unit 960 is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member.
Feather member 945 is closed in response to displacement member 966 being placed in the lower position via the transmission member of drive unit 960 . On the other hand, the feather member 945 is opened in response to the displacing member 966 being arranged at the upper position via the transmission member of the drive unit 960 .
Next, the sorting unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1407 and 1408. FIG. FIG. 1407(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 980, FIG. 1407(b) is a back view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 1408(a) is the line MCDXCVa-MCDXCVa in FIG. 1408(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line MCDXCVb--MCDXCVb in FIG. 1408(a).
The sorting unit 980 includes a back base 985, a front base 981 arranged on the player side of the back base 985, and a sorting section rotatably arranged between the front base 981 and the back base. 983 and . Note that the sorting portion 983 is a member corresponding to the seesaw member 762 in the fiftieth embodiment.

The rear base 985 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and includes a plate-shaped base portion 985a and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), recesses 985h recessed above the plurality of openings, and accommodating portions 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recesses 985h.
The base portion 985a is formed to have a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is formed with a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d circularly penetrating through the outer edge thereof. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw for inserting a passage unit 990, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the rear base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.
The recessed portion 985h is recessed from the front base 981 side toward the rear side at a substantially central position of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (horizontal direction). Further, the recessed portion 985h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a part of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, inside, and has a bearing portion 985j projecting annularly from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the short direction, and the inner edge dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the lower inner surfaces are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side (rear side) of the front base 981 .

The opening 985e is formed closer to the opening 985b than the left-right central position, and the opening 985f is formed closer to the opening 985c than the left-right central position. Below, since the openings 985e and 985f have the same configuration, the opening 985f capable of receiving the ball that has flowed down the second passage TR2 will be described in detail, and the opening 985f that can receive the ball that has flowed down the first passage TR1 will be described in detail. Description of the opening 985e is omitted.
The opening 985f is a space inflow passage 985f1 that opens toward the front base 981, a space discharge passage 985f3 that opens on the side opposite to the front base 981, and the inflow passage 985f1 and the discharge passage 985f3 extending in the direction of gravity. and a recessed portion 985f4 that is recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball in the intermediate passage 985f2 (FIG. 1407(b)). and FIG. 1408(a)).
The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and is formed in a size through which a game ball can pass. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2 can be caused to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.
The intermediate passage 985f2 is formed to extend in the direction of gravity, and the upper side thereof communicates with the inflow passage 985f1, and is formed in a size through which game balls can pass. Thereby, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985f1 can be caused to flow into the intermediate passage 985f2.

The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be installed by inserting it from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).
The detection device SE3 is a device for detecting passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE3 in its thickness direction. The detection hole SE1a is formed in one longitudinal direction of the detection device SE3, and the detection substrate SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged in the other longitudinal direction where the detection hole SE1a is not formed.
Further, the detection device SE3 is arranged such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passage 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. be. Thereby, when the game ball flows down from the upper side of the intermediate passage 985f2, it can be passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. Thereby, a game ball passing through the second passage TR2 can be detected.
In addition, since the detecting device SE3 is formed such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily used when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passage 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portion 985f4 is formed so as to be continuous with the spaces of the inflow passage 985f1 and the discharge passage 985f3. That is, the intermediate passage 985f2 is formed using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of the intermediate passage 985f2 in the gravitational direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rear base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.
The discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the lower side of the intermediate passage 985f2 and is formed in a size through which game balls can pass. Also, the discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the insertion hole of the passage unit 990 when the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985f3 and can be passed through the space to be sent to the passage unit 990.
The opening 985g is formed at the lower end of the rear base 985 at the left-right central position. Further, the opening 985g is formed such that the lower inner surface is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can roll to the side opposite to the front base 981 .
The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and is formed in a size through which a game ball can pass. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular rings. Further, the accommodation portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b that is formed in the cylindrical body. In addition, the projection dimension of the accommodation portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. In addition, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed of a pair of semi-annular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semi-annular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.
The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and can generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a by being disposed in the housing portion 986b. As a result, a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, is repelled, and the distributing portion 983 can be easily displaced.
The rear base 985 has an opening 985k, which is a notch for arranging the detection devices SE4 and SE5 in a first passage TR1 or a second passage TR2, which will be described later, and has substantially the same external shape as the detection devices SE4 and SE5 when viewed from the rear. Formed in shape. As a result, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 can be installed by inserting them from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981). Note that the structures of the detection devices SE4 and SE5 are the same as those described above as the structure of the detection device SE3, so description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the inner space of the detection hole SE1a and the first passage TR1 or the first passage TR1 are arranged. It is arranged at a position that substantially coincides with the space of the two passages TR2.

Thereby, when the game ball flows down from the upper side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, it can be passed through the detection holes SE1a of the detection devices SE4 and SE5. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 can be detected.
In addition, since the detecting devices SE4 and SE5 are formed such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily used when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and the detection hole SE1a.
The detection devices SE4 and SE5 are configured as devices for performing a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) when it is detected that a ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a.
The opening 985k is formed so as to be continuous with the space of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 in the gravitational direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rear base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The front base 981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. In addition, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge bulging from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side of the rear base 985). , and an exit portion 982 .
The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 981f and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side (the lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 in the direction of gravity.
The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) that fastens the assembled ball feeding unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 1403), and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .
The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in a pair in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982 (to be described later) sandwiched therebetween. In addition, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the width direction of the base plate 981a.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the front side along the edge thereof.
Also, the through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning opening 640 of the winning opening unit 930 described above. It is formed at a position overlapping the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.
The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a dimension that the upright end face contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 1406) of the winning hole unit 930 when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. be done. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a lower inner rolling surface 981c1 positioned lower than the end surface 943a1 (see FIG. 1406) of the rolling portion 943a and inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side. formed by
The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows game balls to pass through the inside thereof, and the game balls flowing in from the inflow port 982d pass through the inside thereof. and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an inlet 982d formed by cutting the upper end portion and a wall shape extending toward the rear base 985 at a substantially laterally central position when viewed from the front. and concave portions 982e to 982j formed as curved surfaces capable of throwing game balls to the back side at a plurality of locations under the direction of gravity.
The bulging portion 982 includes a ball-feeding opening 982k that is bored in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the standing wall 982a, and insertion openings 982l that are vertically elongated and rectangular-shaped and are bored in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides of the ball-feeding opening 982k. and a rotation-permitting opening 982m that extends outward from the upper end of the insertion opening 982l.
The inflow port 982d is cut out in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. In addition, when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the inner edge portion of the inlet 982d coincides with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930. formed at overlapping positions.
In addition, the inlet 982d has a second projection 982d1 that protrudes on the side opposite to the rear base 985 on the upper edge. The second projection 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 (see FIG. 1406) of the prize winning port unit 930 described above. In this case, the second projection 982d1 abuts against the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1.

Also, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 1407(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the lower end surface of the inlet 982d is the distance from the inner edge of the first recessed cutout 942g1 to the lower inner edge of the first ball feeding portion 942g. It is set larger than the distance dimension up to dimension L15 (see FIG. 1404(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball-throwing portion 942g through the first winning port 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first ball-throwing portion 942g It can be difficult to get caught in between.
The standing wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. The standing wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d and is formed with a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the standing direction on the upper side.
The standing wall 982a has a horizontal distance from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. A second passage TR2 is formed.
The first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are formed on the downstream side of a sorting section 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the sorting section 983 is thrown to one of them. The sorting unit 983 is set to alternately throw game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of game balls flowing into the first winning hole 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

A bearing portion 982c is formed on the upper side of the erected wall 982a so as to protrude from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985 in an annular shape. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.
Further, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the rear base 985. Therefore, when combining the front base 981 and the rear base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. The shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 by inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.
The abutment portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distributing portion 983 is regulated by the action portion 983a of the distributing portion 983 coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1.
The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulging portion 982 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. A first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch path BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first path TR1, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.
The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch path BK2 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the second path TR2, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.
The ball guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 is guided to a ball discharge passage (not shown). That is, the ball guided to the first branch path BK1 or the second branch path BK2 is discharged without giving any profit to the player, like the ball that has flowed into the first outlet 71.
It should be noted that various changes are possible with respect to the benefits given to the player by the balls guided to the first branch path BK1 or the second branch path BK2. For example, it may be designed as a profit that a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, or it may be designed as a profit that is obtained by detecting balls in a detection device for performing a normal pattern lottery or a jackpot lottery. Also good.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulging portion 982 in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended downward by the recesses 982h and 982j.
The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 allows the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985. As shown in FIG.
The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second passage TR2 allows the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d to flow into the opening 985f of the rear base 985. As shown in FIG.
A ball feed opening 982k is formed between recesses 982h and 982j. A third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the ball feeding opening 982k. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the size reduction of the sorting unit 980 can be achieved.

A rolling surface 982g formed on the lower side of the third branch passage BK3 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side. As a result, the third branch path BK3 becomes a path through which the game balls flowing down the back side of the front base 981 can pass to the front side of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. .
In this embodiment, the third branch path BK3 is formed to be able to receive a game ball that flows down the first path TR1 or the second path TR2, and the received game ball is the ball-throwing opening 982k and the ball-throwing hole 941k ( 1404(a)), and is configured to allow the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.
The inclined portion 982b of the bulging portion 982 is formed on the lower side of the bulging portion 982 and extends obliquely downward toward the rear base 985 side. Also, the inclined portion 982b is formed across the lateral width direction of the bulging portion 982 in a state in which the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path TR1, the second path TR2, the first branch path BK1 and the second branch path BK2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, and the game ball flowing down is moved to the opening 985b to 985f side. (back side) to make it easier to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

On the other hand, by bringing the game ball flowing down the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the rolling surface 982g, the game ball flowing down is guided to the ball-throwing opening 982k side (front side) to facilitate the flow into the ball-throwing opening 982k. be able to.
The rolling surface 982g does not have a bilaterally symmetrical shape when viewed from the front, but has a bilaterally asymmetrical shape because the left side is formed lower than the right side. As a result, when the balls arrive at the third branch passage BK3 from the left and right at the same time, it is possible to easily avoid the balls lining up horizontally in the third branch passage BK3. can be made to have This makes it easier to avoid ball clogging in the third branch passage BK3, thereby avoiding a situation in which the feather member 945 becomes inoperable in relation to the ball clogging.
The insertion opening 982l is an opening for inserting the extended portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e of the feather member 945 to the rear side of the bulging portion 982 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are assembled to the base member 60. be.
That is, when the prize winning port unit 930 is assembled, the extended portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e (see FIG. 1404(b)) that are inserted into the third through hole 941i of the back base 941 and protrude toward the back side are attached to the ball throwing unit 970. The plate-like portion 945e is arranged on the rear side of the bulging portion 982 in a state in which the extending portion 945d penetrates the insertion opening 982l.

The rotation-permitting opening 982m is an opening that penetrates in a range necessary to avoid restriction of the displacement of the extended portion 945d penetrating the bulging portion 982. As shown in FIG. By forming the rotation-permitting opening 982m with a minimum size (width smaller than the diameter of the game ball), it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown to the front side through the rotation-permitting opening 982m. Next, referring to FIG. 1409, the displacement of the plate-like portion 945e accompanying the opening/closing operation of the feather member 945 will be described.
FIGS. 1409(a) and 1409(b) are sectional views of the sorting unit 980 taken along line MCDXCVb--MCDXCVb in FIG. 1408(a). FIG. 1409(a) illustrates the feather member 945 (plate-like portion 945e) in the closed state, and FIG. 1409(b) illustrates the feather member 945 (plate-like portion 945e) in the open state.
As shown in FIG. 1409(a), in the closed state of the feather member 945, the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are retracted from the openings 985e and 985e. Swept to 985f. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided toward the third branch passage BK3.
As shown in FIG. 1409(b), in the open state of the feather member 945, the plate-like portion 945e enters the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and flows down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. The ball is made to flow toward the third branch passage BK3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided to the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the feather member 945 is configured to switch between the open state and the closed state, thereby switching the side to which the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is guided. In other words, the wing member 945 not only acts to switch the guiding direction of the sphere flowing down the area between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 where the wing-like body 945m (see FIG. 1405) is arranged. , act to switch the guiding direction of the ball flowing down the inner region of the sorting unit 980 where the plate-like portion 945e is arranged.
A case where the feather member 945 opens and closes immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 will be described. The upstream branch position BK0 is set as a position immediately before the position where the falling sphere receives the action of the feather member 945 . Immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 in the open state of the blade member 945, when the blade member 945 opens and closes toward the closed state, the ball is pushed toward the third branch passage BK3 by the plate-like portion 945e.
On the other hand, immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 in the closed state of the feather member 945, when the feather member 945 opens and closes toward the open state, the ball is guided to the openings 985e and 985f or is guided to the first branch. It is guided to the passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2.
In this way, since the movement direction side of the feather member 945 is not blocked and a space is formed to the extent that the ball can be guided in the movement direction side, the ball is caught between the feather member 945 and the bulging portion 982. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which ball clogging occurs.

When the balls are guided to the openings 985e and 985f, the balls are detected by the detection device SE3, so that the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be acquired, and the profit of the payout of prize balls can be obtained. If the player is guided to the path BK1 or the second branch path BK2, neither the lottery for the special symbol 1 nor the payout of prize balls can be obtained.
Therefore, when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 when the feather member 945 is in the closed state, the feather member 945 opens and closes immediately after that, which may disadvantage the player. Therefore, attention to the upstream branch position BK0 and the feather member 945 can be improved.
As shown in FIG. 1409(b), since the wing member 945 and the wing-shaped portion 945e are configured in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, the ball flowing down through the first passage TR1 and the ball flowing down through the second passage TR2 It is possible to make it so that there is no difference in the ease of picking up by the member 945 . It should be noted that the ball clogging when the balls are simultaneously guided from the left and right sides is prevented by making the shape of the rolling surface 982g as the rolling surface of the third branch passage BK3 left-right asymmetrical as described above.
Returning to FIGS. 1407 and 1408, description will be made. The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the sorting portion 983 penetrates through an acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b projecting from approximately the center position of the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and a connection portion between the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape about the axis of the through hole 983c; and are formed mainly.

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution section 983, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be assembled while the distribution section 983 is rotatable. 985.
The intermediate plate 983b extends outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state in which the displacement of the distributing portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b extends from the tip thereof. The spaced distance L17 (see FIG. 1408(b)) to the inside is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
Further, the intermediate plate 983b rotates the distributing portion 983 about the through hole 983c, thereby restricting the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a regulated state.
The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. In addition, the action portion 983a has a connection position with the contact portion 983d set below the connection position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution section 983 through the inflow port 982d is put in a state where the load is applied to the action section 983a. As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than that of the concave portion 985h of the rear base 985 described above. set small.
Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d from being caught in the concave portion 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.
In addition, the wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b and at the radially outer end portion from the through hole 983c. The accommodation portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated inside from the rear base 985 side.
The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and arranged in a state of repulsion with the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985 . As a result, the distributing portion 983 receives a magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985, rotates about the through hole 983c, and rotates the extending direction of the acting portion 983a to one side or the other side. can be tilted to

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are disposed in a repulsive state and the housing portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 can be prevented from escaping from That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distributing portion 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c to the distributing portion 983 can be simplified.
The magnetic forces of the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are set to magnetic attraction forces smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and stagnating inside the distribution unit 980 .
Next, the operation pattern of the blade member 945 driven by the drive unit 960 will be described. First, referring to FIG. 1409, the relationship between the time required for the ball entering the first winning hole 64 to flow down will be described.
After the ball entering the first winning hole 64 reaches the ball-throwing passage TR0, the sorting part 983 is tilted to flow down to one of the left and right sides. Since this tilting operation overlaps with the operation of the seesaw member 762 in FIGS. 1396(a) and 1396(b), the description is omitted. For the purpose of ensuring, the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are designed to have a large magnetic force. That is, in this embodiment, it is designed so that the tilting operation of the distribution unit 983 (the operation from the state shown in FIG. 1396(a) to the state shown in FIG. 1396(b)) takes at least 0.8 seconds.

After the tilting operation of the sorting unit 963, the path is designed so that it takes 0.4 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detection device SE4 when the ball flows from the ball-throwing path TR0 to the first path TR1. Further, after the tilting operation of the sorting section 963, when the ball flows from the ball-throwing passage TR0 to the second passage TR2, the passage is designed so that it takes 0.2 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detecting device SE5. . That is, the vertical distance between the detection sensor SE4 and the detection sensor SE5 is set as a distance that requires 0.2 seconds at the ball's flow-down speed.
A pair of left and right upstream branch positions BK0 are set as positions immediately before the falling ball receives the action of the feather member 945 . It is designed so that it takes 0.6 seconds for the ball to reach the upstream branch position BK0 after it flows from the throwing path TR0 to the first path TR1 side or the second path TR2 side.
That is, it takes 0.2 seconds from when the ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Further, it takes 0.4 seconds from when the ball is detected by the detection device SE5 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0.
If the feather member 945 is in the closed state at the timing when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0, the ball passes through the openings 985b, 985c or the openings 985e, 985f. When the member 945 is open, the ball is guided toward the third branch passage BK3 and passes through the ball feeding opening 982k (see FIG. 1407(a)).

According to the flow path configuration as described above, the operation pattern of the blade member 945 driven by the drive unit 960 is completed in a time shorter than 0.6 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5. Even if a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 without leaving an interval, if the balls are detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the normal pattern fluctuation will start immediately. can do.
For example, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 with no space between them, when the previous ball flows toward the first path TR1 and is detected by the detection device SE4, the next ball is the second ball. There is a gap of 0.8 seconds before the liquid flows to the path TR2, and even if the detection device SE5 is located above the detection device SE4 by 0.2 seconds, a gap of 0.6 seconds is ensured. That is, it takes 0.6 seconds from the detection of the preceding ball by the detection device SE4 to the detection of the next ball by the detection device SE5.
For example, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 with no space between them, and the previous ball flows toward the second path TR2 and is detected by the detection device SE5, the next ball is the first ball. There is a gap of 0.8 seconds before the liquid flows to the path TR1, and since the detection device SE4 is located below the detection device SE5 by 0.2 seconds, a gap of 1.0 seconds is ensured. That is, it takes 1.0 second from the detection of the preceding ball by the detection device SE5 to the detection of the next ball by the detection device SE4.
In this way, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 with no space between them, the balls are detected by the detecting devices SE4 and SE5 regardless of whether the preceding ball flies left or right. interval is 0.6 seconds or more.

Based on this premise, the 11th operation pattern to the 14th operation pattern described in the present embodiment are completed in 0.5 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 (normal pattern fluctuation It takes 0.5 seconds to complete the display). As soon as the ball is detected, it is possible to start changing the normal design. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a time delay from the detection of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 to the execution of the operation of the feather member 945.
FIGS. 1410(a) to 1410(d) are diagrams showing an example of the detection of passage of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the change of the state of the feather member 945 over time. In addition, FIG. 1410(a) shows the timing change in the 11th operation pattern, FIG. 1410(b) shows the timing change in the 12th operation pattern, and FIG. 1410(c) shows the 13th operation pattern. Timed changes in the actuation pattern are illustrated, and in FIG. 1410(d), timed changes in the fourteenth actuation pattern are illustrated.
In FIGS. 1410(a) to 1410(d), as a result of the fluctuation display (0.1 second) of the second symbol due to the detection of the passage of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the symbol "○" is the second symbol. A change in the state of the feather member 945 with time when displayed on the two-symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 1390) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1410(a), in the eleventh operation pattern, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 detect the passage of the ball, and after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (after 0.1 second), the feather member 945 is in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures), and the open state is maintained for 0.4 seconds.

As a result, when the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time the ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. In this case, the feather member 945 is maintained in the open state even after 0.4 seconds from detection by the detection device SE5 to arrival at the upstream branch position BK0.
Thereby, regardless of whether the ball entering the first winning hole 64 flows down through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, the ball can be guided to the side of the third branch passage BK3. It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 . That is, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is more than the lottery for the special symbol 1 in the lottery obtained based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64.例文帳に追加
As shown in FIG. 1410(b), in the twelfth operation pattern, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 detect the passage of the ball, and after the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (after 0.1 second), the feather member 945 is in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures), and the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. The subsequent 0.2 second is in a closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures).
As a result, when the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time the ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. , the feather member 945 is maintained in the open state, but the feather member 945 is closed 0.4 seconds after being detected by the detection device SE5 and reaching the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, when the ball entering the first prize winning port 64 flows down the first passage TR1, the ball can be guided to the third branch passage BK3 side and made to enter the second prize winning port 640. However, when the ball flows down the second path TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch path BK3 side and cannot be made to enter the second winning hole 640. , the sphere is detected by the detector SE3 (see FIG. 1408(a)).
That is, in the lottery obtained based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 alternately occur. The case where the ball flows down in the first passage TR1 corresponds to the lottery of the special pattern 2. - 特許庁
As shown in FIG. 1410(c), in the thirteenth operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (after 0.1 second), 0.2 Seconds later, the wing member 945 is opened (also indicated as "open" in the drawings; the same applies to subsequent drawings), and the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. After that, it is set to a closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figure. The same applies to subsequent figures).
As a result, when the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time the ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. , the feather member 945 is closed, but the feather member 945 is maintained in the open state after 0.4 seconds from detection by the detection device SE5 to arrival at the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, when a ball entering the first winning hole 64 flows down the first path TR1, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch path BK3 side and enters the second winning hole 640. Therefore, the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 (see FIG. 1408(a)), but when the ball flows down the second passage TR2, the ball is guided to the third branch passage BK3. It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640 .
That is, in the lottery obtained based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 alternately occur. The case where the ball flows down the second passage TR1 corresponds to the lottery of the special pattern 2. - 特許庁
As shown in FIG. 1410(d), in the 14th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (after 0.1 seconds), 0.4 Immediately before the second elapses, the feather member 945 is in an open state (also indicated as “open” in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures), and immediately after that, is in a closed state (also indicated as “closed” in the figure. (similar in the figure).
As a result, when the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time the ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. In this case, the feather member 945 is maintained in the closed state even after 0.4 seconds from detection by the detection device SE5 to arrival at the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, regardless of whether the ball entering the first winning hole 64 flows down the first path TR1 or the second path TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the side of the third branch path BK3. , the second winning hole 640 cannot be easily entered. That is, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is more frequent than the lottery for the special symbol 2 in the lottery obtained based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64.例文帳に追加
As shown in FIGS. 1410(a) to 1410(d), by varying the operation pattern of the feather member 945, the lottery obtained when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 is the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to switch whether it becomes a special symbol 2 lottery.
That is, when the feather member 945 operates in the eleventh operation pattern, the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be obtained continuously. Further, when the feather member 945 operates in the 14th operation pattern, the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be obtained continuously.
When the feather member 945 operates in the twelfth operation pattern or the thirteenth operation pattern, the lottery special symbols obtained by the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the ball flowing down the second passage TR2 are different. , the lottery for the special pattern 1 and the lottery for the special pattern 2 are obtained alternately.

Here, if the profit obtained by the player from the special pattern 1 lottery is different from the profit that the player can obtain from the special pattern 2 lottery, whether the big prize is from the special pattern 1 lottery, The degree of player's attention as to whether the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery is large.
Conventionally, in a game machine in which balls are distributed to the left and right by the distribution unit 983, the ball distributed to the left and right sides (usually the left side) by the distribution unit 983 can win the lottery of the special symbol 1, and the left and right sides (usually the right side) can be won. ), a special pattern 2 lottery can be won.
Therefore, if it is possible to confirm whether the ball is thrown to the left or right by the sorting part 983, it is possible to grasp whether the lottery to be executed from now on is the lottery of the special pattern 1 or the lottery of the special pattern 2 even if the eye is removed from the ball after that. was made. In this case, the attention to the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the distribution section 983 is reduced, and the problem arises that the game area cannot be effectively used as the performance area.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the twelfth operation pattern, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be won by the balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and in the thirteenth operation pattern, the special symbols can be won by the balls flowing down the second passage TR2. You can win 2 draws. Therefore, it is not possible to grasp whether the ball can acquire the lottery of the special pattern 1 or the lottery of the special pattern 2 only by confirming whether the ball is thrown to the left or right by the sorting part 983.例文帳に追加

That is, on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, it is confirmed whether or not the ball is picked up by the plate-shaped portion 945e of the feather member 945, and the ball flows through the ball feeding hole 941k (see FIG. 1406) to the front side to reach the second It can be constructed so that it is not possible to grasp whether the ball can acquire the lottery of the special pattern 1 or the lottery of the special pattern 2 unless it is confirmed whether the ball enters the winning hole 640.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, and it is possible to effectively utilize the game area as an effect area.
In each operation pattern, the relationship between the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the feather member 945 has been mainly described, but the feather-shaped main body 945m of the feather member 945 is closer to the rear base 941 (see FIG. 1403). Since it is arranged on the front side, if the ball flowing down the front side of the back base 941 reaches the feather member 945 just in time when the feather member 945 is in the open state, the ball will be the second Being guided to the winning opening 640 can naturally occur.
Figure 1411 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along the MCDXCVIII-MCDXCVIII line in Figure 1404(a), and Figures 1412(a) and 1412(b) are the winning opening unit 930 along the MCDXCIXa-MCDXCIXa line in Figure 1411 and FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of a ball throwing unit 970;
In FIG. 1412(a), the closed state of the wing members 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 1412(b), the open state of the wing members 945 is illustrated. 1411 and 1412, reference will be made to FIG. 1410 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1411, the rolling plate portion 941l and the ball feeding hole 941k are arranged on the front side of the ball feeding opening 982k of the sorting unit 980, so that the internal flow path of the sorting unit 980 reaches the third branch passage BK3. The guided ball flows down toward the front side.
Since this ball appears to be approaching the player's side from the player's line of sight, it can be seen that the ball that flows downward in the game area or the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 or the third receiving part 944a. By flowing down, it is visually recognized in a flow-down manner that is clearly different from the ball that seems to recede from the player.
As a result, by making the player pay attention to the ball that seems to be approaching him or her, the player can see that the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 is released from the internal flow path of the sorting unit 980. When a situation arises in which the coin escapes and flows to the second prize winning opening 640 side, the occurrence of the situation can be easily noticed.
Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the ball enters the second winning hole 640 without the player noticing and the lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed without the player noticing.

Also, the ball flowing down on the front side of the sorting unit 980 (the front side of the rear base 941) can act to block the player's line of sight. Therefore, since the visibility of the ball flowing down the internal path of the distribution unit 980 can be easily reduced, the game ball that is guided to the third branch passage BK3 and appears to approach one's side can be made even more prominent.
Since the ball feeding hole 941k is arranged on the back side of the front base 943, if the front base 943 is made of an opaque resin material, the ball guided to the front side through the ball feeding hole 941k and the ball feeding hole 941k can be used. visibility can be reduced.
In this case, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 can be easily confirmed, but it is difficult to grasp that the ball flows down the ball feeding hole 941k to the front side. It is possible to easily cause a situation in which the entered ball enters the second winning hole 640 without the player noticing, and the lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed.
As shown in FIG. 1411, on the downstream side (rear side) of the second prize winning opening 640, a detection device SE6 capable of detecting passage of a ball is arranged. The detection device SE6 is a device for detecting passage of a game ball having the same configuration as the detection device SE3, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE6 in its thickness direction.

The lottery obtained by passing the ball through the detection device SE3 is the lottery for the special pattern 1, whereas the lottery obtained by the ball passing through the detection device SE6 is the lottery for the special pattern 2. - 特許庁
Which operation pattern of the eleventh to fourteenth operation patterns (see FIG. 1410) in which the feather member 945 operates is set in advance based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 1401). be done.
In this embodiment, when the jackpot types are jackpots A, a, and b, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather members 945 is set to the eleventh operation pattern. When the jackpot types are jackpots B and C, the operation pattern of the blade member 945 after that is set to the twelfth operation pattern. When the jackpot type is the jackpot c, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the thirteenth operation pattern. In periods other than the duration of the eleventh to thirteenth operation patterns, the operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the fourteenth operation pattern.
Thus, for the same event that the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the balls are distributed to the left and right sides, whether the ball can win the lottery of the special pattern 1 or the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be obtained. It can be changed depending on which operation pattern it operates. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow path of the ball that has entered the first winning hole 64, and to attract the player's line of sight.

In addition to that shown in FIG. 1410, as the operation pattern of the feather member 945, the feather member 945 is activated from the timing when the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 (see FIG. 1390). There is also a long open operation pattern that opens for a long time (approximately 2 seconds).
When the feather member 945 is operated in a long-open operation pattern, the ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 1403) can be easily picked up by the feather-shaped main body 945m (see FIG. 1405). . In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the ball entering the first winning hole 64 to be guided toward the third branch passage BK3 (see FIG. 1409(b)).
In this way, it is easy to configure a state in which the ball picked up by the feather-shaped main body 945m repeatedly enters the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加In addition to this, the ball once entering the first winning port 64 is guided to the third branch path BK3 side by the plate-like portion 945e (see FIG. 1409(b)), and finally enters the second winning port 640. Easy to configure as a sphere. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game mode in which the lottery with the special pattern 1 is avoided and the lottery with the special pattern 2 is repeatedly obtained.
As shown in FIG. 1412(b), in the open state of the wing member 945, the sphere P21 on the front side of the rear base 941 is on the wing-shaped main body 945m, and the plate-like portion 945e on the rear side of the rear base 941. The ball P22 can be guided at different front and rear positions (cut positions) at the same time.

Therefore, even if the feather member 945 changes to the closed state in this state, it is possible to avoid the collision between the spheres P21 and P22. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from interfering with the opening/closing operation of the feather member 945 and preventing the opening/closing operation from being completed.
Furthermore, since the ball P22 of the plate-like portion 945e can be placed on the plate-like portion 945e more than the number of the balls P21 placed on the feather-like main body 945m at the same time (one ball on one side in this embodiment), the feather member 945 can be guided simultaneously in the open state. number of balls can be increased.
For example, in a game mode in which a whole ball is shot toward the wing member 945, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, only one ball can be placed on the wing-shaped main body 945m of the wing member 945 on one side at the same time, and a plurality of balls can be launched at the same time. It is difficult to carry.
On the other hand, in the game mode in which some of the balls are shot toward the feather member 945 and the rest of the balls are shot toward the first winning hole 64, regardless of whether or not the balls are on the feather-shaped main body 945m. Since the ball can be placed on the plate-like portion 945e without any problem, it is easy for the ball to be placed on the feather member 945 on one side at the same time.

That is, in either the game mode in which the whole ball is shot toward the feather member 945 or the game mode in which some balls are shot toward the first winning port 64 in addition to the feather member 945, the balls are placed on the feather member 945 at the same time. can be varied.
The ball P22 reaching the feather member 945 via the first prize winning port 64 and the ball P21 reaching the feather member 945 without passing through the first prize winning port 64 have different flowing directions before reaching. Therefore, since the spheres flow down at different speeds after arrival, the appearance of the spheres that arrive at the same time is different.
That is, the sphere P22 flows vertically downward through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and reaches the plate-like portion 945e of the feather member 945, while the sphere P21 reaches the guide portion 941g1 (see FIG. 1404(a)). .
Therefore, the velocity of the sphere P21 flowing down to the left and right inner sides after reaching the feather member 945 is faster than that of the sphere P22 by the amount of the velocity component in the left-right direction. Therefore, even if the sphere P21 and the sphere P22 reach the feather member 945 at the same time, the time when the sphere P21 and the sphere P22 overlap when viewed from the front can be shortened. can be improved.

Depending on the timing at which the ball P22 rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 941l, passes through the ball feed hole 941k, and flows to the front side of the rear base 941, it may collide with the ball P21 (the paths join).
Here, the vertical position of the upper surface of the blade member 945 on the rotation base end side is arranged below the vertical position of the lower edge of the ball feed hole 941k. As a result, the vertical position at which the ball rolling on the rolling plate portion 941l jumps into the front side of the rear base 941, and the vertical position at which the ball rolling on the feather-shaped main body 945m jumps into the space between the pair of feather members 945. can be shifted vertically.
Therefore, when balls collide with each other, the vertical positions of those balls can be shifted, so that a plurality of balls can be made to flow down in order by allowing them to flow down by their own weight. This makes it possible to suppress ball clogging.
It should be noted that, in the operation pattern of the long opening of the feather member 945, as can be seen from the fact that the duration of the opening exceeds 0.6 seconds, for example, a plurality of balls enter the first winning opening 64 without leaving an interval. In the case of a ball, there is a waiting time to start the fluctuation of the normal design (the fluctuation of the normal design can be suspended).

Therefore, unlike the case where the timing at which the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the opening/closing timing of the feather member 945 are set in correspondence with the time required for the ball to flow down, as described with reference to FIG. It becomes difficult to correspond to the opening and closing of the feather member 945.
Therefore, it is not possible to guide all the balls to the second prize winning port 640 side, and some of the balls entering the first prize winning port 64 have feather members 945 in the closed state (see FIG. 1409(a)). There is a possibility that the upstream branch position BK0 is reached at the appropriate timing.
On the other hand, in the long open operation pattern, by setting the time (operation waiting time, post-operation waiting time) during which the blade member 945 is maintained in the closed state to a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the blade member 945 is closed (see FIG. 1409(a)), the probability of reaching the upstream branch position BK0 can be reduced as much as possible.
The ball P22 rolling on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e reaches the ball P22 with an interval of at least 1.8 seconds due to the operation of the sorting portion 983 . In other words, it is configured so that a plurality of balls cannot ride on it at the same time.

On the other hand, the interval at which the ball P21 reaches the feather-shaped main body 945m is not limited at all, and a plurality of balls can reach the pinnate body 945m at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable to form the wing-shaped main body 945m stronger than the plate-shaped portion 945e.
In this regard, in the present embodiment, the wing-like main body 945m is formed to be thicker than the plate-like portion 945e, so that it is sturdily formed. In addition, since the feather-shaped main body 945m is directly supported by the shaft member 945a, it is possible to suppress the posture change and bending in the front-rear direction due to the weight of the ball.
According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.
By projecting a plate-like portion 945e toward the back side from the wing-shaped main body 945m of the blade member 945 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60, the inside of the sorting unit 980 arranged inside the base plate 60 can be opened. It can be made possible to act on the falling game ball.

That is, the feather member 945 can switch between a state in which the game ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 is easily guided to the second prize winning port 640 side and a state in which the game ball is prevented from flowing down to the second prize winning port 640 side. In addition, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball entering the first winning port 64 is easily guided to the second winning port 640 side and a state in which the ball is prevented from flowing down to the second winning port 640 side.
Further, a rear base 941 functioning as a partition plate is provided between the ball rolling on the upper surface of the feather-shaped main body 945m and the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e. , collisions can be avoided at arbitrary positions between the spheres.
As a result, the ball rolling on the feather-shaped main body 945m collides with the ball rolling on the plate-shaped portion 945e, causing the ball to spill from the feather member 945 (the side guided to the second winning opening 640). spills on the opposite side) can be avoided.
In addition, at the position (for example, the third branch passage BK3) where the ball entering the first winning port 64 is branched into the channel on the second winning port 640 side, the flow direction of the ball has a forward-backward direction component. As a result, it is possible to highlight a portion closely related to the ball flowing down to the second prize winning port 640 .

In addition, it is possible to form a case where it is possible to manage so as not to be detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 from the time the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols. As a result, the wing member 945, whose operation is controlled by the detection of the ball, can be caused to act on the ball that has passed through the detection devices SE4 and SE5 with good timing.
Since there is an interval of at least 0.8 seconds between the timing at which the ball is thrown to the first path TR1 and the timing for the ball to be thrown to the second path TR2, the balls enter the third branch path BK3 from the left and right at the same time. In addition, by forming the rolling surface 982g asymmetrically, it is possible to more easily avoid ball clogging in the third branch passage BK3. As a result, even if the confluence position of the ball flow path is close to the blade member 945, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the blade member 945 due to ball clogging.
Also, the speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the feather member 945 on the front side of the base plate 60 and the speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the feather member 945 inside the base plate 60 are different. As a result, it is possible to avoid a state in which the spheres are overlapped in the front and rear sides continuously, and it is possible to easily grasp the number of spheres rolling on the upper surface of the feather member 945 .
As for the number of balls that ride on the feather member 945, while a plurality of balls can ride on the feather-shaped main body 945m at the same time, the number of balls that ride on the plate-like portion 945e is limited to one. Accordingly, the durability of the feather member 945 can be improved by configuring the feather-shaped main body 945m stronger than the plate-like portion 945e.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of operation patterns of the electric accessary 640a, it is possible to create a winning pattern of a special symbol lottery in a different mode. For example, when the ball is repeatedly entered into the first winning hole 64, a pattern in which the lottery for the special symbol 1 is repeatedly obtained, a pattern in which the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are alternately obtained, and a special pattern. A pattern in which the lottery of pattern 2 is repeatedly acquired can be switched.
Also, in the pattern in which the lottery for the special pattern 1 and the lottery for the special pattern 2 are alternately obtained, a pattern can be formed in which which game ball on the left or right side corresponds to the lottery for the special pattern 2 is reversed. As a result, it is not enough to check whether the ball has flowed left or right in the sorting section 983 as information.
In addition, when a right-handed game is recommended as a winning pattern for the special symbol lottery, when the ball accidentally enters the first winning hole 64, a pattern that makes it easy to win the lottery for the special symbol 1 and a high probability. It is possible to switch between a pattern in which the acquisition of the lottery for the special symbol 1 is avoided.
Next, referring to FIG. 1413, the fifty-second embodiment will be described. In the fiftieth embodiment, when the ball flows down one of the paths distributed by the path construction device 700, the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. However, the path construction device of the fifty-second embodiment. In 3700, a normal prize winning opening (through gate) 3765 is provided that can detect the passage of the ball when the ball flows down the other path. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1413 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the 52nd embodiment. In the path constructing device 3700, among the paths distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 760, a normal prize winning opening (through gate) 3765 is arranged in the left path.
The normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is arranged such that the horizontal distance from the seesaw member 762 is the same as the horizontal distance between the seesaw member 762 and the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 .
A lottery with a normal pattern can be won not only when the game ball entering the first winning hole 64 flows to the right side but also when it flows to the left side, so that the operation frequency of the electric accessory 640a can be increased.
In the fiftieth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of times of passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765 is suspended up to four times. In this case, there is an advantage that the electric accessory 640a can be easily operated continuously without interruption of the hold, and the right-handed game can be smoothly executed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of passages through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, and 3765 is suspended up to one time. The operation pattern selected by the normal symbol lottery when the number of reserved balls is 0 and the operation pattern selected by the normal symbol lottery when the number of reserved balls is 1 are configured to be different. ing. Since the state where the number of retained balls is full (one ball) is more likely to occur than the case where the number of retained balls is four, differences in operation patterns occur frequently.
In the present embodiment, as an example, in the variable probability state, when the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is 0, the second operation pattern is likely to be selected, and when the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is 1, the first operation is performed. The pattern is configured so that it can be easily selected.
On this premise, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 continuously (see FIGS. 1396 and 1397), the electric accessory 640a enters the state at the timing when the third ball P3 reaches the moving plate member 641. can be easier to maintain.
That is, the ball P1 is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, and the ball P2 is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 before the reference time Td1 elapses from the detection. The operation pattern selected by the lottery of normal symbols by the detection of the ball P2 is likely to be the first operation pattern.

Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state before the ball P3 reaches the moving plate member 641, both the balls P1 and P2 are moved from the state shown in FIG. It can be guided to the two-ball throwing section 736 .
In FIG. 1396(a), the case where the ball P1 flows to the right has been described, but the tilt of the seesaw member 762 is reversed, and even if the ball P1 flows to the left, the normal pattern is detected by the detection of the ball P2. The operation pattern selected by lottery is likely to be the first operation pattern. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state before the ball P2 reaches the moving plate member 641, so the ball P2 can be guided to the second ball-throwing portion 736.
In addition, in this embodiment, as an example, the case where the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is one has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, similarly to the explanation in the fiftieth embodiment, the number of reserved balls of normal symbols may be set to four.
Next, referring to FIG. 1414, the fifty-third embodiment will be described. In the fiftieth embodiment, the moving plate member 641 includes a right guide portion 643 that guides game balls that have entered the first winning port 64, and a left guide portion that guides game balls that have not entered the first winning port 64. A case has been described in which the guide portions 643 and 645 are separated by the portion 645, but in the path construction device 4700 of the fifty-third embodiment, the game ball that did not enter the first winning hole 64 It is configured to be able to guide up to the 643 side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1414 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1414, the moving plate member 4641 that slides in the front-rear direction by switching the state of the electric accessory 4640a between the retracted state and the entered state moves the right guide portion 643 and the inclination of the right guide portion 643. and an upstream guide portion 4645 extending in the upper left direction from the left end portion of the right guide portion 643 along the slope of the surface 643a.
The upstream guide portion 4645 has an inclined surface 4645a on which the ball rolls, which is inclined downward to the right. It is formed.
In this embodiment, the right and left inner wall portions of the bending member 740 are formed with openings having a size that allows passage of a ball rolling on the upper surface of the moving plate member 4641 . That is, an opening similar to the opening 744 (see FIG. 1395(a)) is formed through the left and right inner wall portions of the bending member 740 (the left wall portion of the right guide portion 643).
As a result, as an inflow path to the first ball throwing path KR1, in addition to the path of the ball passing through the first winning hole 64, a path leading to the right side guide part 643 by rolling the upstream side guide part 4645 is prepared. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 1414, when the ball rolls from the upstream side guide portion 4645 through the right side guide portion 643, the ball may be received in the recovery hole 752 depending on the operation timing of the moving plate member 4641. In some cases, it is received in the two-ball throwing section 736 .
That is, when the electric accessory 4640a is switched to the retracted state while the ball is arranged on the first ball throwing route KR1, the ball flows down toward the recovery hole 752. On the other hand, if the electric accessory 4640a still maintains the entering state while the ball is placed on KR1, the ball passes right through the right guide section 643 and flows down toward the second ball throwing section 736. do. That is, the ball rolling rightward on the upper surface of the strong male plate member 4641 can flow down toward the recovery hole 752 or the second ball feeding portion 736 .
The moving plate member 4641 is downwardly inclined downward to the right. There is a possibility that it will pass leftward through the moving plate member 4641 due to momentum.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protruding edge portion 734b of the first ball-throwing portion 734 is arranged to protrude above the left end portion of the moving plate member 4641. As shown in FIG. That is, the ball that is about to pass the left end of the moving plate member 4641 collides with the protruding edge 734b, so that the ball can rebound and roll rightward on the upper surface of the moving plate member 4641. It is possible to make it easier to form a state where

Furthermore, the greater the repulsive force of the bounce of the ball to the right, the shorter the time required for the ball to reach the right end of the moving plate member 4641 . That is, the projecting edge 734b not only prevents the ball from falling from the left end of the moving plate member 4641, but also prevents the ball from falling from the moving plate member 4641 while the moving plate member 4641 is maintained in the advanced state. can be easily reached to the right end of the .
The left end of the moving plate member 4641 is arranged above the ball passage hole 734a. Therefore, when the electric accessory 4640a is in the entering state, the ball travels leftward on the upper surface of the moving plate member 4641, and when the moving plate member 4641 changes to the retracted state immediately before reaching the left end, the ball moves in a parabola. , and the ball can enter the ball passage hole 734a of the first ball-throwing portion 734, although the probability is low.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1415 to 1464, the pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") B10 of the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described. 1415 is a front view of the pachinko machine B10 in the fifty-fourth embodiment, FIG. 1416 is a front view of the game board B13 of the pachinko machine B10, and FIG. 1417 is a rear view of the pachinko machine B10.
In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine B10 in the state shown in FIG. 1415, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine B10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 1416) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine B10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1415, a pachinko machine B10 has an outer frame B11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame B11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame B11. and an inner frame B12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame B12 in the outer frame B11, metal hinges B18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1415). A frame B12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.
A game board B13 (see FIG. 1416) having a large number of nails BKG1, winning openings B63 and B64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame B12. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (game balls) to flow down the front surface of the game board B13. The inner frame B12 includes a ball shooting unit B112a (see FIG. 1418) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board B13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit B112a to the front area of the game board B13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.
The illustration of the nail BKG1 shows the outer shape of the nail BKG1 as viewed in the length direction unless otherwise specified. That is, the nail BKG1 is generally formed with a bulging front end (similar to a pin). The shape of the diameter is not shown. Therefore, in FIG. 1416, even if the gap between the nails BKG1 is less than the diameter of the sphere, if the gap between the small diameter portions (not shown) of the nail BKG1 is longer than the diameter of the sphere. , the ball can pass through.
The front side of the inner frame B12 is provided with a front frame B14 covering the front upper side thereof and a lower tray unit B15 covering the lower side thereof. In order to support the front frame B14 and the lower tray unit B15, metal hinges B19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see Fig. 1415). B14 and lower tray unit B15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame B12 and the locking of the front frame B14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole B21 of the cylinder lock B20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame B14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion B14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit B16 having two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame B14, and the front side of the game board B13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine B10 through the glass unit B16.
On the front frame B14, an upper tray B17 for storing balls protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray B17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1415), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray B17 to the ball shooting unit B112a (see FIG. 1418). A frame button B22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate B17. This frame button B22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device B81 (see FIG. 1416) is changed, or the content of super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.
Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame B14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions B29 to B33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion B14c. In the pachinko machine B10, these illumination parts B29 to B33 function as production lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the illumination parts B29 to B33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or reach production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp B34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame B14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1415).
In addition, a small window B35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame B14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electrical decoration part B32, and a pasting space BK1 (Fig. 1416) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine B10. In addition, in the pachinko machine B10, a plated member B36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations B29 to B33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation section B40 is arranged below the window section B14c. The ball rental operation unit B40 is provided with a frequency display unit B41, a ball rental button B42, and a return button B43. When the ball lending operation section B40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine B10, the ball is released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display portion B41 is an area where balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the balance as balance information in numbers. The ball lending button B42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and as long as there is a balance on the card or the like, lending balls are supplied to the top tray B17. be done. The return button B43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray B17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, ie, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit B40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
In the lower tray unit B15 positioned below the upper tray B17, a lower tray B50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray B17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray B50, an operation handle B51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board B13.
Inside the operation handle B51, there are a touch sensor B51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit B112a, a shooting stop switch B51b for stopping the shooting of the ball while the operation is being pressed, and a rotation of the operation handle B51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle B51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor B51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board B13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle B51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor B51a and the firing stop switch B51b are turned off.
A ball extracting lever B52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray B50 to be operated when the balls stored in the lower tray B50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever B52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray B50 is opened and the The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever B52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray B50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray B50. As described above, the operation handle B51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray B50, and the ashtray B53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray B50.

As shown in FIG. 1416, the game board B13 includes a base plate B60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails BKG1 for guiding the balls, a windmill BWF, rails B61 and B62, a general winning opening B63, 1st winning port B64, 2nd winning port B640, 3rd winning port B64b, variable winning device B65, upper variable winning device B700, normal winning ports (through gates) B66, B67, variable display device unit B80, etc. and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame B12 (see FIG. 1415).
The base plate B60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate B60 from the front side thereof. Winning unit B400 in which general winning opening B63, first winning opening B64 and second winning opening B640 are arranged, variable winning device B65 in which third winning opening B64b is arranged, upper variable winning device B700, variable display device unit B80 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate B60 by router processing, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board B13.
In addition, the structure of the base plate B60 is not limited to the resin material. For example, it may be formed so that the player cannot see the various structures which are made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials and which are arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate B60.
The front central portion of the game board B13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame B12 through the window portion B14c (see FIG. 1415) of the front frame B14. Mainly referring to FIG. 1416, the configuration of the game board B13 will be described below.

In front of the game board B13, an outer rail B62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail B62 is placed inside the outer rail B62. An arc-shaped inner rail B61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board B13 is surrounded by the inner rail B61 and the outer rail B62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board B13 and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1415). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board B13 and is defined by two rails B61 and B62 and a resin outer edge member B73 that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. are arranged and a shot is area where the ball flows down).
Note that the above-mentioned game area is interpreted in a narrow sense, and in a broader sense, the game area may be expressed as a falling area of the game ball until the profit given to the player by the game ball that has flowed down is determined. In this sense, the game area is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board B13. For example, the upstream path of a detection sensor B462, which will be described later, may also be included in the game area.
The two rails B61 and B62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit B112a (see FIG. 1418) to the upper part of the game board B13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail B61 (upper left part in FIG. 1416) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board B13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber B69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail B62 (upper right in FIG. 1416) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying part of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail B61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail B62, an arc member B70 made of resin is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate B60.
A game area B301 on the front side of the game board B13 is largely divided into a left side game area B302, a right side game area B303 and a lower side game area B304 with respect to a center frame B86 arranged at the inner central position.

The left side game area B302 is a game area where left-handed game balls that are shot with reduced shooting strength flow down, and the right side game area B303 increases the shooting strength of game balls compared to left-handed shots. This is the game area where the right-handed game ball to be launched flows down. In addition, the lower game area B304 is a game area where game balls that have passed through the left game area B302 or the right game area B303 flow down.
The lottery based on prizes will be described in detail below. In the pachinko machine B10 in this embodiment, the first winning port B64, the second winning port B640, or the third winning port B64b is awarded (some benefits to the player (for example, payout of prize balls, execution of lottery, further advantageous A lottery for a special pattern (first pattern) is held when there is a ball that can be expected to give a benefit of transitioning to a normal state). A lottery for normal symbols (second symbols) is carried out.
In the special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed for the ball entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b, a judgment is made as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (whether it is lost). At the same time, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined.
In the special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed for the ball entering the second winning hole B640, the special symbol is a big hit, a loss, or a small hit, and the special symbol is determined. When it is determined to be a big hit, the determination of the big hit type is also performed, and when it is determined to be a small hit of a special symbol, the determination of the small hit type is also performed.

That is, in the special symbol lottery for the ball entering the second winning hole B640, whether or not the special symbol lottery for the ball entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b is a big hit. In addition to the determination of whether it is a big hit, it is determined whether it is a small hit or a loss.
In the present embodiment, a small win is prepared as a win that is different in nature from the big win, although it is not a loss. That is, a big hit generates an opportunity (game turning point) to shift the game state to a high probability state or a time saving state, but a small hit does not generate an opportunity to shift the game state.
In addition, even if you win a small hit in a high probability state, the high probability state will not end when the small hit ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached), and a small hit in the normal state or short time state. Even if it wins, it does not shift to a high probability state with the end of the small hit as a trigger. However, the small win is regarded as meeting the conditions for operating the variable winning device B65, like the big win.
In addition, in the pachinko machine B10, in the low probability state of the special design, it is determined that the special design is a jackpot with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special design (also referred to as the variable state of the special design), 32 minutes. It is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1. In addition, the probability of a big hit is an example, and as long as the probability in the low probability state of special symbols does not become less than 1/10 of the probability in the high probability state of special symbols, various numerical values can be set.

For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed when the game ball enters the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b is called "special symbol 1 lottery", and the game goes to the second winning hole B640. A lottery for a special symbol that is performed when a ball enters the ball is called a "lottery for a special symbol 2".
In addition, in the pachinko machine B10, in the special symbol low probability state, the special symbol 2 lottery is determined to be a small hit with a special symbol 2 with a probability of 318/320, and in the special symbol high probability state, 309/320. In the lottery of the special pattern 2, it is judged as a small hit of the special pattern with a probability of . In addition, the probability of a small hit is an example, and can be set with various numerical values.
When a special symbol wins (wins), a small win game is performed and the variable winning device B65 opens and closes. A player can obtain a certain amount of prize balls by entering a game ball into a specific prize winning opening B65a arranged inside the variable prize winning device B65 during a small winning game. In the small winning game of this embodiment, the operation of closing the variable winning device B65 1.8 seconds after it is opened is executed.
In addition, as the operation pattern of the variable winning device B65 in the small hit of the special symbol, a single pattern may be used, or a plurality of types of patterns may be provided. For example, depending on the small hit type, the number of times of opening and closing operations of the specific winning opening B65a, and the operation pattern set by the opening and closing time may be configured to be different. Specifically, it may be an operation pattern that opens for 1.8 seconds, an operation pattern in which opening for 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times at intervals of several seconds (opening for 1.8 seconds in total), or other operations. A pattern is fine.

When a special symbol jackpot (win) occurs, the pachinko machine B10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening B65a normally closed or the second specific winning opening B700a of the upper variable winning device B700 is opened for a predetermined time. (For example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls (specified number) have won) The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole B65a or the second specific winning hole B700a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. Incidentally, the payout of prize balls accompanying the entry into the specific prize winning port B65a or the second specific prize winning port B700a and the number of payouts will be described later.
Six types of special symbol jackpot types are provided: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c". Although details will be described later, depending on the type of jackpot, the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a after the end of the special game are configured to differ.
When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first winning hole B64, the third winning hole B64b, or the second winning hole B640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B, the number of times the ball enters wins a prize. Each type of special pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) corresponding to the lottery performed based on the entering ball into the mouth is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B. , and is also shown in the third pattern display device B81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1) for the first winning opening B64 or the third winning opening B64b, or the second winning opening B640 is left (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2), a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.
In this embodiment, even if both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are the corresponding special symbols (special symbols 1 or special pattern 2), the lottery for the corresponding next special pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. In other words, even if the variation of the non-corresponding special symbol (for example, the special symbol 2 for the special symbol 1) is not completed, if the variation display of the corresponding previous special symbol is completed, the corresponding next special symbol is displayed. A lottery will be held.

In this embodiment, even if both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are the corresponding special symbols of the previous special symbol. When the variable display ends, the lottery for the corresponding next special symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. A lottery may be preferentially executed in the order of acquisition (order of entry), or a lottery may be executed alternately between the special symbols 1 and the special symbols 2.
Also, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special pattern 2 may be preferentially executed over the reserved balls of the special pattern 1, and in this case, the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 is 0. Execution of the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 can be avoided while the state of more than is maintained.
In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol wins. When the normal pattern is hit, the electric accessory B640a attached to the second winning opening B640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds, 2.0 seconds or 3.9 seconds) to the second winning opening B640. The ball is ready to enter. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the ball enters the second winning hole B640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is facilitated.
Further, when the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device B83, and a predetermined time (for example, 0.05 seconds or 1 second) has passed. After that, normal symbols indicating the result of the lottery are stopped and displayed. When the balls pass through the normal winning openings B66 and B67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device B83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is the first symbol display device B37A. , B37B as well as the second symbol reserve lamp B84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device B83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal winning openings B66 and B67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. is started.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, the pachinko machine B10 is in a special variable state of special symbols (during the variable probability of special symbols with high frequency) during the period from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. ) (for example, jackpot A, jackpot a, which will be described later), and when the pachinko machine B10 is configured to shift to a special symbol high probability state (during special symbol probability variation) ( For example, a jackpot B, a jackpot b, and a jackpot c, which will be described later, and a time-saving state of normal patterns until the lottery of special patterns is completed 100 times after the jackpot game (for example, a jackpot C, a jackpot c, which will be described later). , are available.
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the case where the probability variation state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit is explained. For example, after the special game state ends, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, and the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. After that, the normal state may be set.
It should be noted that the number of lotteries for the special symbols to which the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols described above is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.
In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols that are in the time-saving state of the normal symbols described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times. Further, the number of lotteries for the special symbols to be in the time saving state and the number of lotteries for the special symbols to which the variable probability state of the special symbols is given may be set to be different.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to transition to.
"Special variable state of special symbols (during variable probability of special symbols with high frequency small hits)" in this embodiment is a state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called ), and is a state accompanied by a small win at high frequency, in other words, while playing a game in a state where it is easy to shift to the special game state, before shifting to the special game state, by the small win game It is a game state in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained. The winning probability of normal symbols (second symbols) is increased, and a game state is formed in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole B640. The electric accessory B640a is operated in a third operation pattern which will be described later.
"Special symbol high probability state (special symbol probability change)" in the present embodiment is a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words If you do, it is a game state that easily shifts to a special game state. The winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and a game state is formed in which the ball is likely to enter the third winning hole B64b. The electric accessory B640a is operated in a second operation pattern which will be described later.
On the other hand, the ``low probability state of special symbols'' refers to the time when the special symbols are not changing, and the probability of the big win is normal, that is, the state of the probability of big wins being lower than during the changing of the special symbols.

In addition, "ordinary pattern time saving state (time saving medium)" is one aspect of the special pattern low probability state, the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased, and the third winning opening by the action of the winning unit B400 described later It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to enter B64b. The electric accessory B640a is operated in a second operation pattern which will be described later.
In addition, the "normal state" is one aspect of the low probability state (not the high probability state) of the special design, and the state of the game that is not in the time saving of the normal design (the jackpot probability is also the normal design (second design) The probability of winning has not changed, and it is not easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b). The electric accessory B640a is operated in a first operation pattern which will be described later.
During the special probability change of special symbols, during the probability change of special symbols, and during the time saving of normal symbols, the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a attached to the second winning opening B640 is changed, basically compared to the normal state. , the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b is set so that the state in which the game ball is easily guided is maintained for a long time.
In the present embodiment, when the electric accessory B640a is in a non-excited state (a non-excited state, that is, a state in which the moving plate member B641, which will be described later, is positioned at the front side and is entering the first ball throwing path BKR1). is in a state in which the electric accessory B640a is excited (an excited state, that is, a state in which the moving plate member B641, which will be described later, is arranged at the rear side position and is retracted from the first ball throwing path BKR1). , the game ball is likely to be guided to the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b side. Therefore, during the special probability variation of the special symbol, during the probability variation of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b, and the special symbol lottery is performed. become fragile.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory B640a associated with the second winning opening B640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time, The number of openings of the electric accessory B640a in the case of winning the normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state.
In addition, the time during which the electric accessory B640a attached to the second winning hole B640 is opened without changing the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and At least one of the number of opening times of the electric accessory B640a may be changed.
In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory B640a associated with the second winning opening B640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory B640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol (No. 2 symbols) may be configured to be increased compared to the normal state.
A first pattern display device B37A, B37B equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 1416). The first symbol display devices B37A and B37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main controller B110 (see FIG. 1418), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine B10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B are used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b or the second winning hole B640. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b, the first symbol display device B37A operates, while the ball enters the second winning hole B640. In this case, the first symbol display device B37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first pattern display devices B37A and B37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine B10 is in special probability variation, probability variation, time saving, or normal, or whether it is in fluctuation. It is indicated by the state, or whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to a special probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to a probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to a normal jackpot, a pattern corresponding to a small hit, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state. The number of balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine B10 with a small number of LEDs. can.
While the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed in the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B, the ball enters the first winning opening B64, the third winning opening B64b, or the second winning opening B640. In the case of a ball, the number of times of entry is for each type of winning opening (that is, for each type of special symbol), and the number of times of entering the first winning opening B64 or third winning opening B64b corresponding to special symbol 1 and the number of times of entering the special (The number of balls entered into the second winning hole B640 corresponding to the symbol 2 is separate), and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B, and the third symbol display. Also shown in device B81.
In this embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b and the second winning hole B640 are each suspended up to four times. The maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).
Incidentally, in the pachinko machine B10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in any of the first prize winning port B64, the third prize winning port B64b, or the second prize winning port B640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine B10 determines whether or not there is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpot determined here, 15R special probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, and 4R jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices B37A and B37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit. .

Here, "15R special probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a special probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols with high frequency and small hit) after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. The “8R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 8 rounds.
In addition, the "4R jackpot" shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), or the maximum It is a jackpot where the number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of four rounds.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes B63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Also, a variable display device unit B80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area.
In the variable display device unit B80, the first symbol display device B37A, B37B with variable display on the first symbol display device B37A, B37B triggered by the winning of any one of the first winning port B64, the third winning port B64b, and the second winning port B640. A 3rd pattern display device B81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the 3rd pattern while synchronizing it, and the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67. A second pattern display device B83 composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern as a trigger, and a second pattern indicating the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball passes through the normal winning openings B66 and B67 by the lighting state. A reserve lamp B84 is provided.

A center frame B86 is arranged in the variable display device unit B80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device B81. The third pattern display device B81 can be viewed through an opening formed in the center of the center frame B86.
The third pattern display device B81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 9-inch size. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81. It's like
In the third symbol display device B81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller B110 (see FIG. 1418) is performed by the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices B37A and B37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to form the third symbol display device B81.
In this embodiment, the third symbols are composed of 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine B10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main controller B110 (see FIG. 1418) to be described later is a big win, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned (same main symbols A variable display that finally stops when all are aligned) is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win occurs (the transition to the special game state starts).

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (a variable display that finally stops when they are not aligned) is performed. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a small win, a variable display is performed in which the specific small win symbols finally stop.
For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if it is a special probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot, one of all numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers is added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbols is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, a variable display is performed in which the symbol with the characters "preparing prize balls" is stopped at the center of the display area of the display device.
The second symbol display device B83 alternately alternates between a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67. The variable display is performed by turning on the In the pachinko machine B10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device B83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device B83 stops and displays the "x" symbol after the second symbol is variably displayed.
In the pachinko machine B10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device B83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory B640a associated with the second winning hole B640 is displayed as a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (released) for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the probability change of the special pattern and during the time saving of the normal pattern, so that the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) can be performed more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, it is possible to give the player more chances of picking up the game ball by the electric accessory B640a arranged upstream of the second winning port B640 and the third winning port B64b. can. Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols, it is possible to make a state in which the ball is likely to enter the third winning hole B64b or the second winning hole B640.
In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the third winning opening B64b or the third winning opening B64b or the third winning opening B64b or the When the state is such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole B640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory B640a for one normal symbol hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.
Ordinary winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 are assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit B80. (The arrangement of the nail BKG1 on the upstream side is configured to collect the balls to the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67).
Incidentally, the relationship between the ball launched into the game area B301 and the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 is not limited to this. For example, of the balls launched into the game area B301, some of the falling balls may pass through normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first pattern display devices B37A and B37B, and the second pattern is reserved. The lamp B84 is also illuminated. Four second design reserve lamps B84 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device B81.
In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device B83 as in the present embodiment. A part of the 3-symbol display device B81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp B84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device B81. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp B84.
Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) B66, B67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). May be set. Also, the number of normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 provided on the base plate B60 is not limited to two, and may be one, or a plurality of others (for example, three or more). can be
Also, the mounting positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit B80. It may be above or below the device unit B80.

Below the variable display device unit B80, a first winning hole B64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole B64, the passage of the ball is detected by the first winning hole switch (detection sensor B442, which will be described later) provided on the back side of the game board B13, and the first winning hole switch is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first winning slot switch, the special symbol 1 is drawn by the main controller B110 (see FIG. 1418), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed by the first symbol display device B37A.
On the other hand, below the first winning hole B64 in a front view, a second winning hole B640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole B640, the second winning hole switch (detection sensor B462, which will be described later) provided on the back side of the game board B13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the second winning hole switch. A lottery for the special symbol 2 is made in B110 (see FIG. 1418), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown in the first symbol display device B37B.
The second winning port B640 is configured so that only the balls that pass through the winning unit B400 win, and winning that does not go through the winning unit B400 is prevented. Details will be described later.
In addition, a third prize winning port B64b in which a ball can win is arranged below the second prize winning port B640 in a front view. When the ball enters the third winning hole B64b, the third winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board B13 is turned on, and the main controller B110 ( 1418), a lottery for the special symbol 1 is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device B37A.

Note that the third winning port B64b is configured so that only balls that pass through the winning unit B400 win, and winning that does not go through the winning unit B400 is prevented, the details of which will be described later.
Also, the first winning port B64, the third winning port B64b and the second winning port B640 turn on the first winning port switch, the third winning port switch or the second winning port switch respectively when the ball wins. It is also one of the prize-winning openings (prize-ball openings) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls based on the above.
In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port B64 or the third prize winning port B64b and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port B640 are configured in the same way, but the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port B64 or the third prize winning port B64b and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port B640 are changed. A different number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first prize winning port B64 or the third prize winning port B64b is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port B640. may be configured as five. Also, the number of prize balls and the size relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.
An electric accessary B640a is attached to the second prize winning port B640 (and the third prize winning port B64b). This electric accessory B640a is normally in a state in which the electric accessory B640a is in a non-excited state (advance closed state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole B640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device B83, the motorized Accessory B640a is in an excited state (backward open state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning hole B640.

During the special probability variation of the special symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port B640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first prize winning port B64 does not have the electric accessory B640a provided in the second prize winning port B640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.
Here, when the ball enters the first winning hole B64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole B640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. However, the probability that the maximum profit (the number of prize balls in the special game state) is obtained as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot (jackpot A, a) is When the ball wins, the value is set higher than when the ball enters the first winning hole B64.
Therefore, during normal operation, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole B640 due to the electric role object B640a arranged upstream of the second winning hole B640 and the third winning hole B64b. A player who shoots a ball with a shooting intensity that makes it easy for the ball to reach the first prize winning port B64, and aims to win a big prize by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning the first prize winning port B64 is more likely to be a player. be advantageous for
On the other hand, during the special probability change of the special pattern, during the probability change of the special pattern, or during the time saving of the normal pattern, by passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) B66, B67, the second winning opening B640 and the third winning opening When the electric accessory B640a arranged on the upstream side of B64b is controlled in operation, the ball is easily picked up by the electric accessory B640a, and it is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening B640 or the third winning opening B64b. A ball is shot with a launching intensity that makes it easy for the ball to reach the electric role object B640a, and is passed through normal prize openings (through gates) B66 and B67 to operate the electric role object B640a, and the second prize opening B640 or the third prize. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by winning the prize in the mouth B64b.

In this way, the pachinko machine B10 of the present embodiment, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine B10 (whether it is a special variable probability state, whether it is during a variable probability state, whether it is during a short time, whether it is during normal operation, etc.), To make a player change the method of shooting a ball between shooting with a shooting intensity that makes it easy for the ball to reach the first winning hole B64 and shooting with a shooting intensity that makes it easy for the ball to reach the electric accessory B640a. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, the electric accessary product B640a is driven in the same operation pattern as the normal state of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a ball to enter the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b during the jackpot game.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the left side game area B302 and the ball that has flowed down the right side flow area B303 have both reached the first winning hole B64 or the electric accessory B640a. It is not limited. For example, it may be configured such that only the balls that flow down the left flow region B302 reach the first winning port B64, and only the balls that flow down the right flow region B303 reach the electric accessory B640a.
In this case, during normal operation, the ball is shot toward the first winning hole B64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit B80 (so-called "left hitting"), and the ball is shot to the first winning hole B64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining a large number of jackpot lottery machines by winning a prize.

On the other hand, during the special probability variation of the special symbol, during the probability variation of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the normal symbol, by passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) B66, B67, the electric role accompanying the second winning opening B640 When the object B640a is under operation control, the ball is likely to be picked up by the electric accessory B640a, and the second prize winning opening B640 is likely to win. A ball is shot so that the ball passes through the right side of the unit B80 (so-called "right hitting"), and is passed through a normal winning opening (through gate) B67 to operate the electric accessory B640a, and the second winning opening B640. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by winning a prize.
As a result, the player can change the method of shooting the ball between "left-handed" and "right-handed" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine B10. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.
Also, in this case, in a situation where "right-handed" should be performed, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation) on the third symbol display device B81, the player can see the (special) probability variable state of the special symbol or the normal symbol. You may comprise so that the benefit by becoming a working-time-saving state may be obtained reliably.
In right-hand navigation, the third symbol display device B81 displays the characters "Aim right!", and three right arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board B13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely acquire the benefits of the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols.

In addition, if the player is executing the "right-handed stroke" despite the situation where the "left-handed stroke" should be made, the player is informed that the recommended game mode is different from the currently-executed game mode. It is preferable to be able to notify For example, a warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device B81.
In this warning image, it is determined that the player is hitting right even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board B13 (right hitting). This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device B81 when More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in the normal state (neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time saving state of the normal symbols).
For example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory B640a is controlled so as to make it difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole B640 in the normal state (even if the ball is hit rightward, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole B640). Suppose. In this case, if the ball is hit right in the normal state, the chances of winning the lottery for the special symbols are reduced compared to hitting the ball aiming at the first winning hole B64 by hitting left. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big win, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed players, the player is prevented (suppressed) from losing money.
When it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the screen of the third symbol display device B81 displays the words "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be reminded that he/she should not hit with the right hand (should hit with the left hand). Further, by confirming whether or not there is a right-handed hitting warning screen, the hall clerk can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of hitting right-handed in the normal state.

As a method of judging whether or not the ball is hit to the right, it is whether or not the ball has entered the normal winning hole (through gate) B67 (see Fig. 1416) into which the ball can enter when the ball is hit to the right. should be judged by
In addition, it is easy to configure so as to display a right-handed warning image when it is detected that the ball has entered the normal winning hole (through gate) B67 (see FIG. 1416) in the normal state, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, in a state other than during a jackpot game or a small win game, when it is detected that a ball has entered a specific winning hole B65a (entering a ball), fraudulent games (not limited to right-handed games, for example, variable winning A game mode in which a specific winning hole B65a is opened by applying a load to the device B65 and a game ball is forcibly entered) is determined, and a right-handed warning image is displayed. good. As a result, the hall clerk can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud by simply confirming the presence or absence of the right-hand hitting warning image.
Further, for example, when it is detected that a ball has entered the specific winning hole B65a in a state other than during a big win game or a small win game, a signal indicating that the hall computer has been tampered with. may be configured to output As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine B10 in which fraud is being committed.
Also, for example, by narrowing the right channel of the variable display device unit B80, a range through which the game ball must pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged in that range. You can do it. In this case, it can be determined that the game ball is hit to the right based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

Alternatively, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting the displacement of a movable member (for example, a windmill) arranged on the left side of the uppermost position of the variable display unit B80 (corresponding to the left-right center position in FIG. 1416) may be arranged. good. In this case, when the game ball is being hit, it can be determined that the game ball is being hit to the right based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.
In this embodiment, a variable prize winning device B65 is provided below the first prize winning port B64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) B65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof.
In the pachinko machine B10, when a special symbol lottery performed due to winning a prize in the second winning port B640 results in a small win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, a small winning stop symbol is provided. The first symbol display device B37A or the first symbol display device B37B is lit. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the small win is displayed on the third symbol display device B81 to notify the occurrence of the small win. After that, a small winning game in which the ball is likely to win is executed. As this small winning game, the specific winning opening B65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 1.8 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls (a specified number) have been won).
In addition, in the pachinko machine B10, when a special symbol lottery resulting from winning the first winning port B64, the third winning port B64b, or the second winning port B640 results in a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable time ) has passed, the first symbol display device B37A or the first symbol display device B37B is lit so as to become a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device B81 to notify the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls (a specified number) have been won). be released.

The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.
Specifically, the variable winning device B65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate covering the specific winning opening B65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate. The specific winning hole B65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate forward to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening B65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternately repeat the state of The opening/closing mode of the second specific winning opening B700a will be described later.
The variable prize winning device B65 not only enters the ball passing through the inside of the prize winning unit B400, but also the ball that does not enter the prize winning unit B400 and flows down the left and right outside of the prize winning unit B400 while being guided by the nail BKG1. The lateral length is designed to obtain That is, the width of the specific winning opening B65a is designed to be longer than the width of the winning unit B400.
Whether or not it is easy to be guided into the prize winning unit B400 depends on the state of the nail BKG1 arranged upstream of the prize winning unit B400. It can be prevented from becoming too much or too disadvantageous (benefit can be balanced).

That is, for example, when the ball is likely to be guided inside the winning unit B400 with a high probability, the ball is passed through the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b through which the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit B400. During the period of shortening the time to receive the lottery or during the probability change, the lottery of special symbols can be frequently received, which is advantageous for the player.
On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the variable winning device B65 in the jackpot game or the small winning game, the ball that has entered the winning unit B400 reaches the second winning port B640 or the second winning device B65. The number of balls that are picked up by the 3 winning opening B64b and reach the specific winning opening B65a is reduced. In addition, if the number of balls that deviate from the winning unit B400 and flow down on the left and right sides of the winning unit B400 is small, it is disadvantageous to a game in which winning balls are frequently paid out by entering the specific winning hole B65a. be.
Also, for example, when the probability of the ball being guided inside the winning unit B400 is low, the ball is passed through the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b through which the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit B400. During the shortening of the time for receiving the lottery or during the probability change, the interval for receiving the lottery of the special symbols tends to become long, which is disadvantageous for the player in terms of game efficiency.
On the other hand, when a ball is entered into the variable winning device B65 in a jackpot game or a small winning game, the number of balls entering the winning unit B400 is small, so the ball is picked up in the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b. The number of balls themselves that are broken and cannot reach the specific winning hole B65a is reduced. In addition, since the number of balls that deviate from the winning unit B400 and flow down to the left and right of the winning unit B400 increases, when the specific winning opening B65a is opened, a large number of balls are allowed to enter the specific winning opening B65a. , the player can expect to receive a large amount of prize balls, which is advantageous for the player.

In this way, even if the ball is easily guided into the prize winning unit B400 or difficult to be guided into the winning unit B400 depending on the state of the nail BKG1, the state of the nail BKG1 wins the lottery with the special symbol and the jackpot. If it works to the player's advantage during the target period, it can work to the player's disadvantage during the jackpot game, while the state of the nail BKG1 is beneficial to the player during the period of winning the lottery of the special symbols and aiming for the jackpot. If it works at a disadvantage, it can be made to work to the player's advantage during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous or too disadvantageous depending on the state of the nail BKG1 (the advantage can be balanced).
Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first symbol display devices B37A and B37B, the specific winning opening B65a Alternatively, the second specific winning opening B700a is opened for a predetermined time, and the ball enters the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a during the opening of the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a. A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state.
In addition, the number of the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of three or more (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the lower side, and may be, for example, the left and right sides or the upper side of the variable display device unit B80.
At the lower right corner of the game board B13, an affixing space BK1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided. Visible through B35 (see Figure 1415).

The game board B13 is provided with a first outlet B71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings B63, B64, B64b, B65a, B640, B700a go through the first out B71, left out B71L or right out B71R. It is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).
The first out port B71 is arranged below the first prize winning port B64. The left out port B71L is arranged on the left side of the specific prize winning port B65a, and the right out port B71R is arranged on the right side of the specific prize winning port B65a.
In this embodiment, since the specific winning opening B65a is arranged near the lower edge of the game area, the gap between the inner rail B61 and the specific winning opening B65a is narrow. Therefore, if a plurality of balls rolling on the lower edge of the game area on the left and right outside of the specific winning hole B65a are all directed to the first out hole B71, the balls are placed between the inner rail B61 and the specific winning hole B65a. There is a possibility that clogging will occur, which will cause the game to be interrupted.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a left out hole B71L and a right out hole B71R are provided, so that balls rolling on the lower edge of the game area on the left and right outside of the specific winning hole B65a are the first out holes. Before going to B71, the ball can be discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the left out port B71L or the right out port B71R. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which balls are clogged between the inner rail B61 and the specific winning hole B65a, thereby avoiding interruption of the game.

A large number of nails BKG1 are planted on the game board B13 in order to appropriately distribute and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill BWF are arranged.
As shown in FIG. 1417, the back side of the pachinko machine B10 is mainly provided with control board units B90 and B91 and a back pack unit B94. The control board unit B90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller B110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device B113), and a display control board (display control device B114). The control board unit B91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device B111), a launch control board (launch control device B112), a power supply board (power supply B115), and a card unit connection board B116.
The back pack unit B94 is formed by unitizing a back pack B92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit B93. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.
The main control device B110, the sound lamp control device B113, the display control device B114, the payout control device B111, the firing control device B112, the power supply device B115, and the card unit connection board B116 are housed in board boxes B100 to B104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes B100 to B104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box B100 (main controller B110) and the board box B102 (dispensing control device B111 and firing control device B112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes B100, B102, or if the substrate boxes B100, B102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board boxes B100 and B102 have been opened.
The dispensing unit B93 includes a tank B130 located at the top of the back pack unit B94 and opening upward, a tank rail B131 connected to the lower side of the tank B130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail B131. and a payout device B133 which is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail B132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor B216 (see FIG. 1418). ing. The tank B130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device B133. A vibrator B134 for applying vibration to the tank rail B131 is attached to the tank rail B131.
The payout control device B111 is provided with a state return switch B120, the firing control device B112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob B121, and the power supply device B115 is provided with a RAM erase switch B122. The state recovery switch B120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor B216 (see FIG. 1418) occurs. The operation knob B121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erasing switch B122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine B10 to its initial state.
Next, referring to FIG. 1418, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine B10 will be described. FIG. 1418 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine B10.

The main controller B110 is equipped with an MPUB201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPUB 201 includes a ROMB 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPUB 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROMB 202. A RAMB 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller B110, the main processing of the pachinko machine B10, such as setting of the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first pattern display devices B37A, B37B and the third pattern display device B81, and the lottery of the display results in the second pattern display device, are performed by the MPUB201. to run.
In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller B110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller B111 and the sound lamp controller B113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller B110 to the sub-controllers.
The RAMB 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, the contents of the internal registers of the MPUB 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPUB 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM B 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply B 115 even after the pachinko machine B 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM B 203 is backed up. .
When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure, hereinafter the same) are stored in the RAMB 203 . On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine B10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAMB203. Writing to the RAMB 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAMB 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPUB 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal BSG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit B 252 when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port B205 is connected to the MPUB 201 of the main controller B110 via a bus line B204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port B205 includes a payout control device B111, a sound lamp control device B113, a first symbol display device B37A, B37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening B65a. A solenoid B209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.
The input/output port B205 also includes various switches B208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit B253 provided in the power supply B115. , and the MPUB 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches B 208 and the RAM erase signal BSG 2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit B 253 .
The payout control device B111 drives the payout motor B216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPUB 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROMB 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPUB 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAMB 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.
The RAMB213 of the payout control device B111, like the RAMB203 of the main control device B110, has a stack area where the contents of the internal register of the MPUB211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPUB211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM B 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply B 115 even after the pachinko machine B 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM B 213 is backed up. As with the MPUB 201 of the main controller B 110, the NMI terminal of the MPUB 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal BSG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit B 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to MPUB 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port B215 is connected to the MPUB211 of the payout control device B111 via a bus line B214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port B215 is connected to the main controller B110, the dispensing motor B216, the launch control device B112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device B111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device B111, but not connected to the main control device B110.
The shooting control device B112 controls the ball shooting unit B112a so that, when the main controller B110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle B51. . The ball shooting unit B112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor B51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle B51, and the shooting stop switch B51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle B51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle B51.
The audio lamp control device B113 outputs audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) B226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from the lamp display device (electrical parts B29 to B33, display lamp B34, etc.) B227, and fluctuates production (fluctuation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device B81 performed by the display control device B114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPUB 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROMB 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPUB 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAMB 223 that is used as a work memory and the like.
An input/output port B225 is connected to the MPUB221 of the audio lamp control device B113 via a bus line B224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port B225 is connected to the main control device B110, the display control device B114, the audio output device B226, the lamp display device B227, the other device B228, the frame button B22, and the like.

Sound lamp control device B113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device B110, determines the display mode of the third symbol display device B81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device B 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device B113 monitors the input from the frame button B22, and when the frame button B22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device B81 or super reach. The display control device B 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device B114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device B81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device B81. The display control device B114 displays various images on the third symbol display device B81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device B113.
Also, the sound lamp control device B113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device B81 from the display control device B114. In the audio lamp control device B113, based on the display command received from the display control device B114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device B81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device B226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device B227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The display control device B114 is connected to the audio lamp control device B113 and the third pattern display device B81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device B113, the third pattern display device B81 performs a variable effect such as the third pattern. It controls the display. Further, the display control device B114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device B81 to the sound lamp control device B113. The audio lamp control device B113 outputs audio from the audio output device B226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third pattern display device B81 and the audio output from the audio output device B226. be able to.
The power supply device B115 includes a power supply unit B251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine B10, a power failure monitoring circuit B252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM with a RAM deletion switch B122 (see FIG. 1417). and an erase switch circuit B253. The power supply unit B251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices B110 to B114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit B251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches B208, solenoids such as the solenoid B209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving the motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers B110 to B114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit B252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal BSG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPUB201 of the main controller B110 and the MPUB211 of the payout controller B111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit B252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit B251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal BSG1 is output to the main controller B110 and the payout controller B111. By the output of the power failure signal BSG1, the main controller B110 and the payout controller B111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit B251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller B110 and the payout controller B111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).
The RAM erase switch circuit B253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal BSG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller B110 when the RAM erase switch B122 (see FIG. 1417) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine B10 is turned on, the main controller B110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal BSG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device B111. It is transmitted to the device B111.
Next, the overall configuration of the winning unit B400 will be described. FIG. 1419 is a front perspective view of the winning unit B400, and FIG. 1420 is a rear perspective view of the winning unit B400. As shown in FIGS. 1419 and 1420, the winning unit B400 is screwed into the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416) when fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate B60 so as to block the opening of the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416). A plate member B410 in which a plurality of insertion holes B411 through which fastening screws are inserted is provided.
That is, the portion on the front side of the plate member B410 is the portion arranged between the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416) and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1415), and the portion on the back side of the plate member B410. The portion is a portion arranged on the back side of the front side surface of the base plate B60 facing the glass unit B16.

The plate member B410 of the winning unit B400 is provided with a ball receiving portion B412 formed in a shape capable of receiving a ball from above and throwing the ball backward at the left-right central position of the upper end portion. The thrown ball enters the first winning hole B64 (see FIG. 1416) of the game board B13.
Of the balls guided inside the winning unit B400, some of the balls are configured to win the second winning opening B640 or the third winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416). After the ball is thrown backward once inside the winning unit B400, the flowing direction is reversed, and after it is placed on the front side of the plate member B410 again, the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b I will win a prize, but the details of the ball's flow will be described later.
Figures 1421 and 1423 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit B400, and Figures 1422 and 1424 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit B400. 1421 and 1422 show the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory B640a, and FIGS. 1423 and 1424 show the excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory B640a. The details of the arrangement of the electric accessory B640a in the non-excited state and the excited state will be described later.
As shown in FIGS. 1421 to 1424, the winning unit B400 includes a plate member B410 fastened and fixed to a base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416), and a plate member B410 disposed on the front side of the plate member B410. A front design member B420 that is fastened and fixed, a middle stage member B430 that is disposed on the back side of the plate member B410 and is fastened and fixed to the plate member B410, and a middle stage member B430 that is disposed above the middle stage member B430 and is fastened and fixed to the middle stage member B430. and a slide member B450 that is supported by the middle member B430 between the middle member B430 and the upper member B440 so as to be slidable back and forth and that constitutes the electric accessory B640a.

The plate member B410 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a central opening B413 that is bored in a substantially rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction and has a horizontal width that allows a ball to pass through at the center of the left and right, and the central opening B413. A ball passage opening B414 drilled on the upper right side of the upper end to a size that allows the ball to pass after riding on the front tip of the slide member B450, and a ball passage opening B414 continuously below the ball passage opening B414 A slide opening B415 formed to be enlarged laterally outside the left and right width of the ball passage opening B414 and through which the slide member B450 can be inserted; A support opening B416, which is formed in a substantially rectangular shape corresponding to the outer shape of the portion B437a and through which the protruding portion B437a is inserted and supported, is continuously formed below the support opening B416 and is formed with a lateral width through which a ball can pass. and a sphere discharge opening B417.
Since the ball passing opening B414, the sliding opening B415, the supporting opening B416, and the ball discharging opening B417 are configured symmetrically, the same reference numerals are given to the configuration on the left side, and a description thereof will be omitted.
The central opening B413 is an opening through which the ball guided by the central flow path B431 of the intermediate member B430 and flowing down to the front side passes through to the front side. In addition, in the excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory B640a, the ball passes to the back side and functions as an opening guided by the second winning opening switch (detection sensor B462 described later), details of which will be described later. do.
The ball passage opening B414 is an opening through which a ball riding on the slide member B450 in the non-excited state (see FIG. 1419) can pass through on the front side of the plate member B410. That is, the ball received on the slide member B450 passes through the ball passage opening B414 and is guided to the rear side of the plate member B410.

The slide opening B415 is an opening that supports the front end portion B451 of the slide member B450 in a sliding manner when the slide member B450 moves back and forth. The plate member B410 includes slide support portions B418 extending rearward from the left and right ends of the slide opening B415 while maintaining the shape of the inner side surface of the slide opening B415. As a result, the slide member B450 can be supported at a position rearward of the slide opening B415. Displacement of B450 can be stabilized.
A projecting portion B437a of the intermediate member B430 protrudes to the front side through the support opening B416. An opening B435a of a detection sensor B435 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided on the projecting portion B437a of the middle member B430 on the front side of the plate member B410. That is, among the balls received by the slide member B450 in the non-excited state, the balls that did not pass through the ball passage opening B414 before the slide member B450 was brought into the excited state are arranged in front of the support opening B416 immediately below. It passes through the provided opening B435a.
The ball discharge opening B417 is an opening for throwing the ball to the rear side by allowing passage of the ball that has passed through the opening B435a arranged on the front side of the support opening B416.
The front design member B420 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is capable of receiving the lower edge of the ball receiving portion B412 at the front plate portion B421 constituting the design surface, and the upper end portion of the front plate portion B421 at the center position in the left-right direction. a pair of partition plates B423 extending downward from the lower end of the joint portion B422; A support portion B424 formed so as to protrude outward to the left and right at a height position capable of supporting the protruding portion B437a of the member B430, and a front plate portion B421 as a curved wall below the support portion B424 and forming a flow-down path of the ball. A curved wall portion B425 formed to protrude rearward from the joint portion B422, a pair of left and right eaves B426 formed to protrude from the upper edge of the joint portion B422 toward the left and right outside and formed so that the flowing direction of the ball can be changed, and A pair of left and right ball guide protrusions B427 are provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear side surface of the front plate portion B421 on the left and right outside and below the eaves portion B426.

Since the front design member B420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, even if the front plate portion B421 is covered from the front side, the structure on the back side and the falling ball can be visually recognized through the front plate portion B421. can do. That is, the player can visually recognize the state of the electric accessory B640a (the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470) and the flow of the ball on the back side of the front plate portion B421.
Since the joint portion B422 is formed in a shape capable of receiving the ball receiving portion B412 so that the seam with the lower edge of the ball receiving portion B412 of the plate member B410 is inconspicuous, the ball receiving portion B412 and the front plate portion B421 are formed. can be seen integrally when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1419).
Therefore, in addition to designing separate designs for the ball receiving portion B412 and the front plate portion B421, the ball receiving portion B412 and the front plate portion B421 may be combined to form a complete design.
The joint portion B422 also has a function of restricting the flowing direction of the ball on the front side of the plate member B410. That is, the ball received on the slide member B450 in the non-excited state is prevented from directly flowing into the left-right central position due to the momentum of flowing down left-right inside by colliding with the joint B422. That is, the downflow path of the ball received on the slide member B450 is restricted by the state of the slide member B450 and the joint portion B422.

Therefore, the ball received by the slide member B450 in the non-excited state is guided rearward on the slide member B450, or arranged in front of the support opening B416 by switching the slide member B450 to the excited state. It will be guided to the opening B435a.
The partition plate B423 has a function of restricting the flowing direction of the ball on the front side of the plate member B410. In other words, the provision of the partition plate B423 prevents the balls that have passed through the central opening B413 to the front side from being discharged to the left and right outside, and restricts the flow path of the balls so that they flow exclusively downward. is doing.
The curved wall portion B425 is formed so that the ball flows outward in the left and right direction. This makes it easy to distinguish between the ball guided by the curved wall portion B425 and flowing backward through the ball discharge opening B417 and the ball flowing backward through the central opening B413 in a front view.
In addition, unlike the case where the flow path of the ball is formed so as not to flow to the left and right outside, a specific member is arranged by leaving a horizontal gap between the front and rear positions of the central opening B413 and the front and rear positions of the ball discharge opening B417. Space can be secured. In addition, in this embodiment, a space (receiving recess B465) for arranging a member (first member B481) for transmitting driving force to the electric accessory B640a is formed, the details of which will be described later.

The upper surface of the eaves B426 is formed as a smooth surface having the same inclination as the upper surface of the joint B422, and functions as a portion that switches the flowing direction of the ball riding on the left and right upper surfaces of the joint B422 to the left and right outward direction. However, the details will be described later.
The sphere guide ridge B427 is formed along the flow path of the sphere that flows down toward the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 among the spheres on the slide member B450, and functions as a portion that comes into contact with the sphere that flows down. .
As a result, even if the rear side surface of the front plate portion B421 wears down due to rubbing against the ball after long-term use, the front end portion of the ball guide protrusion B427 can be worn away, so the ball and the front plate can be worn away. The contact area with the rear side surface of the portion B421 can be kept small.
In addition, since the front design member B420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the degree of transmittance decreases due to scratches regardless of whether the scratch occurs on the front side or the back side. In other words, the larger the scratched area, the more difficult it is to see through the front design member B420 the member arranged behind the front design member B420. In this embodiment, in order to ensure the visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member B420, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transmission of the front design member B420.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the location where scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide ridge B427, so the scratches on the front design member B420 can be minimized and the visibility of the falling ball can be improved. can be secured.
The intermediate stage member B430 is a member that supports the slide member B450, and is disposed below the slide member B450 in the non-excited state and the central flow path B431 formed at a position sandwiched between the slide members B450 from the left and right directions. and a pair of left and right detection sensors B435.
The central flow path B431 has a bottom portion B431a that is formed with a lateral width slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere and that slopes down toward the front side, and the left and right sides of the bottom portion B431a are erected upward so as to prevent passage of the sphere. a left wall portion B432 and a right wall portion B433, and a rear wall portion B434 standing upward behind the bottom wall portion 431a so as to prevent the ball from passing therethrough.
The left wall portion B432 and the rear wall portion B434 are configured to secure a front-to-rear width gap B432a that is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, and the right wall portion B433 is configured to secure a gap B432a between the rear wall portion B434 and the rear wall portion B434. It is configured to ensure a gap B433a having a front-to-rear width slightly longer than the front-to-rear width.

The gap B433a is arranged at a position shifted to the front side from the gap B432a. In the present embodiment, the gaps B432a and B433a are arranged such that the front end of the gap B432a and the rear end of the gap B433a are approximately aligned in the front-rear direction.
The left wall portion B432 has an alignment portion B432b formed in such a shape that the upper half portion is notched from the rear end portion. The right wall portion B433 has an alignment portion B433b formed in such a shape that the upper half portion is notched from the rear end portion. The alignment portions B432b and B433b are used for alignment when assembling the upper member B440 to the middle member B430, but the details will be described later.
The left wall portion B432 has a smooth surface on the right side surface facing the central flow path B431 in the rear side portion, while the left side surface not facing the central flow path B431 has a shorter width than the front side portion. A notch B432c is formed.
The right wall portion B433 has a smooth surface on the left side facing the central flow path B431 at the rear side, while the right side not facing the central flow path B431 has a width shorter than that of the front side. A notch portion B433c is formed.

The notch portions B432c and B433c are formed with the same front-to-rear width, and function to avoid interference with the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450 during sliding movement, the details of which will be described later.
The rear wall portion B434 is formed as a curved wall portion that connects the rear end portions of the gaps B432a and B433a. As a result, the direction of the ball passing through the gap B432a and contacting the rear wall portion B434 can be smoothly changed to the front side.
The detection sensor B435 is configured as a detection sensor that does not accompany the lottery of symbols even if the passage of the ball is detected. That is, when the ball passes through the detection sensor B435, neither the special symbol lottery nor the normal symbol lottery is executed, and prize balls are paid out. In this embodiment, control is performed so that five prize balls are paid out in response to the detection of the winning of one ball by the detection sensor B435.
The upper stage member B440 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes an upper flow path forming portion B441 that forms a flow path that slopes downward to the rear for the ball received in the ball receiving portion B412 to flow down; A detection sensor B442 for detecting a ball that has flowed down the passage forming part B441, an upper lid member B443 that is fastened and fixed as an upper lid of the upper flow path forming part B441 and that fixes the detection sensor B442 to the upper flow path forming part B441, and at least the middle stage A ceiling forming portion B444 that forms the ceiling portion of the central flow path B431 of the member B430, and a left side wall portion B445 and a right side wall portion B446 that guide the flow of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member B450.

Since the upper member B440 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the spherical flow path (the central flow path B431 and the flow path guided by the slide member B450) can be visually recognized through the upper member B440. That is, the player can visually recognize the ball rolling on the slide member B450 and flowing down the central flow path B431.
The detection sensor B442 detects a ball entering the first winning hole B64 (see FIG. 1416). That is, when the ball passes the detection sensor B442, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is executed, and the award ball is paid out.
The upper lid member B443 is arranged such that the path through which the ball flows to the left is rearward of the rear end portion of the left side wall portion B445. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball flowing down the upper flow path forming portion B441 is arranged above the flow path guided by the left wall portion 445. FIG. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball guided by the left wall portion 445 from being lowered by the ball flowing down the upper flow path forming portion B441.
The left side wall portion B445 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right central side at the rear end portion. The front-rear position of the front end portion on the left-right center side of the curved portion matches the front-rear position of the left end portion of the rear wall portion B434 of the intermediate member B430.

The right side wall portion B446 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right central side at the rear end portion. The front-rear position of the front end portion on the left-right center side of the curved portion matches the front-rear position of the right end portion of the rear wall portion B434 of the intermediate member B430.
That is, both the left side wall portion B445 and the right side wall portion B446 are formed so as to be continuous with the rear wall portion B434 that forms the rear end portions of the gaps B432a and B433a of the intermediate member B430 so as to guide the ball to the gaps B432a and B433a. It is configured. That is, the rear end portion of the right side wall portion B446 is arranged at a position shifted toward the front side than the rear end portion of the left side wall portion B445.
The slide member B450 is made of an impermeable resin material, and includes a pair of left and right tip portions B451, and a left guide plate portion B452 and a right guide plate portion B453 extending rearward from the left and right inner portions of the tip portions B451. , and a center fixing portion B454 that connects and fixes the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 at the rear ends thereof.
By forming the slide member B450 from a non-permeable resin material, the ball flowing down the lower side of the slide member B450 (for example, the ball flowing down the left-right path B463 of the lower member B460) is hidden (visible) by the slide member B450. can be shielded). As a result, even when the middle member B430 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the ball rolling on the slide member B450 and the ball flowing down the lower side of the slide member B450 (for example, the left and right sides of the lower member B460) The ball flowing down the path B463) can be avoided from appearing to overlap in the direction of the player's line of sight (the line of sight looking down obliquely downward from the front side of the winning unit B400).

The pair of tip portions B451 are formed in a symmetrical shape with the central flow path B431 interposed therebetween, and are arranged at symmetrical positions with the central flow path B431 interposed therebetween, and a pair of left and right ends are directed to the left and right inner sides at the same angle with respect to the horizontal. and a pair of left and right plates are formed in a plate shape so as to be inclined downward at the same angle toward the rear side.
The left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 extend rearward while following the inclination of the tip portion B451, and the extension length of the left guide plate portion B452 is longer than that of the right guide plate portion B453. long. Therefore, the vertical position of the rear end portion of the left guide plate portion B452 is lower than that of the right guide plate portion B453.
The left guide plate portion B452 has an inclined surface portion B452a formed in the vicinity of the right edge portion of the rear substantially half portion so that the upper surface of the plate is inclined downward to the right. In addition, the right guide plate portion B453 includes an inclined surface portion B453a formed near the left edge portion of the rear half portion so that the upper surface of the plate is inclined downward to the left.
The inclined surface portions B452a and B453a are formed with a front-to-rear width sufficient to face the gaps B432a and B433a in the left-right direction regardless of whether the slide member B450 is in a non-excited state or an excited state.

That is, at the timing when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member B450 passes through the gaps B432a and B433a, regardless of whether the slide member B450 is in the non-excited state or the excited state, the ball is moved along the inclination of the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a. Since the water can flow in the direction of the left and right sides, the water can flow inward.
Since the extension length of the right guide plate portion B453 is shortened, it is possible to secure a space behind the right guide plate portion B453. In the present embodiment, the solenoid BSOL41 for driving the electric accessory B640a is arranged in the empty space, so that the winning unit B400 is configured so that the solenoid BSOL41 fits well (in a substantially square shape when viewed from above). be able to.
In addition, the formation width (horizontal width) of the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be constructed so as to project to the upper side of the bottom surface portion B431a of the central flow path B431 and partially overlap when viewed from above. In this case, the ball can flow down smoothly.
Figures 1425 and 1427 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit B400, and Figures 1426 and 1428 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit B400. Figures 1425 to 1428 show the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, and the members below the middle member B430 are also shown disassembled. 1425 and 1426 show the winning unit B400 viewed obliquely from above, and FIGS. 1427 and 1428 show the winning unit B400 viewed obliquely from below.

The winning unit B400 includes a lower member B460 arranged below the middle member B430 and fastened and fixed to the middle member B430. A tilting member B470 that constitutes the accessory B640a and a transmission member B480 that transmits the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 to the sliding member B450 and the tilting member B470 are provided.
First, with reference to FIGS. 1425 to 1428, additional description will be given of the configurations of the plate member B410, the front design member B420, the middle member B430, the upper member B440, and the slide member B450 of the winning unit B400.
The front design member B420 is provided with ball guide protrusions B428 formed as a pair of protrusions for guiding the downflow of the ball at positions slightly displaced left and right from the left and right intermediate positions of the pair of partition plates B423.
The protruding tip (rear end) of the ball guide ridge B428 is shaped so as to slope downward toward the front, so that when a ball arriving from the rear is guided, a downward load is applied to the ball. It can be made easier to give, and it can be made easier to avoid the ball bouncing backward.

The sphere guide ridge B428 is formed along the flow-down path of the sphere that has passed through the central opening B413 of the plate member B410 on the front side, and functions as a portion that comes into contact with the sphere that flows down. The ball guide ridges B428 are formed from a pair of ridges that are displaced to the left and right outside of the center of the flowing ball. This makes it easier for the ball to come into contact with the left and right inner corners of the ball guide ridge B428, so that the ball guide ridge B428 can be worn from the corners. As a result, damage to the left-right central portion of the ball guide protrusion B428 can be suppressed.
As a result, even if the rear side surface of the front plate portion B421 wears away due to rubbing against the ball after long-term use, the tip portion of the ball guide ridge B428 can be worn away, so the ball and the front plate can be worn away. The contact area with the rear side surface of the portion B421 can be kept small.
In addition, since the front design member B420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the degree of transmittance decreases due to scratches regardless of whether the scratch occurs on the front side or the back side. In other words, the larger the scratched area, the more difficult it is to see through the front design member B420 the member disposed on the rear side of the front design member B420. In this embodiment, in order to ensure the visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member B420, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transmission of the front design member B420.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the location where scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide ridge B428, so the scratches on the front design member B420 can be minimized and the visibility of the falling ball can be improved. can be secured.

The middle member B430 includes a support extending portion B436 that extends laterally outward from the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 and presses and supports the detection sensor B435 from above, and a plate-shaped member on which the detection sensor B435 is placed. A base plate B437 to which the extended portion B436 is fastened and fixed at the left and right ends thereof.
On the opposite surface side (lower surface side) of the bottom surface portion B431a arranged between the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433, a locking plate portion B431b protrudes vertically downward from a position near the rear end side in a plate shape. is set. The locking plate portion B431b functions as a portion that defines the end of movement of the slide member B450, the details of which will be described later.
The support extension portion B436 has an upper surface formed as a smooth surface along the front-rear direction, an opening B436a having a rectangular shape that is open above an opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 and through which a ball can pass, and an upper surface. and a ridge portion B436b formed so as to protrude upward in a manner extending in the left-right direction.
The ridge portion B436b is disposed at a position where the front side surface smoothly communicates with the edge portion of the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 when the middle member B430 is assembled (see FIG. 1423). As a result, when the slide member B450 is in an excited state (see FIG. 1423), the ball flowing downward on the front side of the tip portion B451 enters the gap between the tip portion B451 and the detection sensor B435, preventing unintended flow down. can be avoided. That is, the ridge portion B436b can guide the downward movement of the ball, making it possible to smooth the downward movement of the ball.

In addition, when the slide member B450 is in the non-excited state (see FIG. 1421), the ridge portion B436b is arranged directly below the joint between the tip portion B451 and the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453. Therefore, when a ball rides on the tip portion B451, even if the weight of the ball causes the tip portion B451 and the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 to bend and deform in the direction of falling forward, Since the joint between the tip portion B451 and the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 can be supported from below by the projecting portion B436b, the bending deformation can be suppressed.
Openings are formed in the base plate B437 by vertically drilling the base plate B437 here and there. That is, the projecting portion B437a formed to project forward for disposing the detection sensor B435 is provided with an opening larger than the opening of the detection sensor B435 so as not to block the opening of the detection sensor B435. At the end, an opening B437b for passing the plunger BSOL41a of the solenoid BSOL41 is formed at the lower side of the solenoid BSOL41 that is fitted and supported, and at the central rear end, the second member B485 of the transmission member B480 is formed. An opening B437c having a front-to-rear width sufficient to allow the displacement is formed.
The base plate B437 has a receiving recess B437d extending in the front-rear direction as a portion for receiving the first member B481 of the transmission member B480 that transmits the driving force to the tilting member B470, and a ball guided by the lower member B460. An inclined surface portion B437e that constitutes the ceiling of the path and inclines downward toward the rear, and an inclination that inclines downward toward the rear at the front end portions of a pair of extended walls extending downward from the left and right end portions of the inclined surface portion B437e. and a stopper B437f.
With the tilt stopper B437f, the posture of the tilting member B470 in the non-excited state can be set slightly more tilted than the posture of standing straight up, and the path of the ball can be blocked. can be kept small. As a result, the time required for the opening and closing operation of the tilting member B470 can be shortened, and the occurrence of ball jamming can be suppressed, the details of which will be described later.

The ceiling forming portion B444 of the upper member B440 is arranged to face the bottom surface portion B431a of the middle member B430 in the vertical direction and is inclined upward toward the front, and the portions arranged on both left and right sides of the inclined surface portion B444a. A pair of extending portions B444b extending downward from the rear end portion with an L-shaped cross section are provided.
The inclined surface portion B444a constitutes the ceiling portion of the central flow passage B431. growing. That is, since the flow passage area increases toward the downstream side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the flow down mode in which the liquid flows forward in the central flow passage B431.
The extending portion B444b is designed to be aligned by engaging the left and right inner ends of the rear end portion with the alignment portions B432b and B433b of the middle member B430 when the upper member B440 is assembled to the middle member B430. there is
By assembling in this way, the front-rear position of the rear side surface of the extended portion B444b matches the front-rear position of the rear ends of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 (the front ends of the gaps B432a and B433a). That is, the extended portion B444b is provided with a gap B444c between the left side wall portion B445 or the right side wall portion B446 arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be continuously connected to the gaps B432a and B433a.

In other words, the gaps B432a and B433a constitute the lower part of the opening through which the ball passes, and the upper part of the opening whose lower part is constituted by the gaps B432a and B433a is constituted by the gap B444c. As a result, the upper portions of the gaps B432a and B433a are opened, and when the ball bounces, the ball jumps over the gaps B432a and B433a and flows down. can be prevented.
The slide member B450 includes a pair of ridges B455 extending in the front-rear direction and projecting downward from the lower surfaces of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453. The protrusion B455 is designed to have a lateral width narrower than the lateral width of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453, and the projecting end portion (lower end portion) extends in the moving direction (front-rear direction) of the slide member B450. It has a shape that conforms to
When the slide member B450 moves back and forth, the protrusion B455 is supported by the extended support portion B436 of the intermediate member B430. In this case, the contact area between the slide member B450 and the extended support portion B436 can be suppressed. Therefore, the movement resistance of the slide member B450 can be suppressed, and the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 can suppress forward tilting displacement (deformation) due to the weight of the ball on the upper surface.
The ridge portion B455 is formed along the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453, and functions as a rib to increase the rigidity of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 that are long in the front-rear direction. can be enhanced.

The ridge portion B455 is disposed rearward of the tip portion B451. In other words, the ridge portion B455 is not formed on the lower surface of the tip portion B451, and the rigidity of the tip portion B451 is not increased.
Thereby, the easiness of elastic deformation of the slide member B450 can be changed for each part. That is, the front end portion B451 is configured to allow a certain amount of elastic deformation, so that, for example, when the slide member B450 moves forward, the ball is caught between the front end portion of the slide member B450 and the front design member B420. Even if the ball gets stuck, the load caused by the elastic deformation and elastic recovery of the tip portion B451 can quickly eliminate the biting of the ball.
When the tip portion B451 is elastically deformed, the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 are also elastically deformed. Also, there is a possibility that the cross-sectional area of the flow-down path of the ball flowing down the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 is narrowed.
In this case, the flow resistance of the ball that has already passed through the ball passage opening B414 and rolls on the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 increases, and the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 increases. can be a factor in the longer-than-usual time it takes for the sphere to pass over the top surface of the

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 are formed with the ridge portion B455, and the ridge portion B455 functions as a rib so that the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 Elastic deformation of even the right guide plate portion B453 can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to maintain the size of the cross-sectional area of the flow-down path of the ball flowing down the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453. It is possible to make it easier to manage the time the ball passes.
Therefore, both the effect of the tip portion B451 being elastically deformable and the effect of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 being difficult to be elastically deformed can be achieved at the same time.
Next, the configuration of the winning unit B400 other than the plate member B410, the front design member B420, the middle member B430, the upper member B440 and the slide member B450 will be described.
The lower member B460 forms a plurality of ball rolling paths. That is, the lower member B460 includes a central path B461 for rolling the ball picked up by the tilting member B470, and a left and right path B463 for rolling the ball that has passed the detection sensor B435. The passing of the ball that rolls on the central path B461 is detected by the detection sensor B462 arranged behind it.

The detection sensor B462 detects passage of a ball entering the second winning hole B640 (see FIG. 1416). That is, when the ball passes the detection sensor B462, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed, and the award ball is paid out.
In addition, the lower member B460 receives a bearing portion B464 that forms a lower half of a receiving portion that pivotally supports the tiltable member B470, and a first member B481 of a transmission member B480 that transmits driving force to the tiltable member B470. a receiving recess B465 extending in the front-rear direction as a portion for the transmission, and a bearing portion B466 constituting the lower half of the receiving portion that tiltably supports the second member B485 of the transmission member B480 that transmits the driving force to the slide member B450. , provided.
The bearing portion B464 is configured as a concave portion whose upper side is open, and the intermediate stage member B430 is fastened and fixed to the lower stage member B460 in a state where the supported protrusion B473 of the tilting member B470 is arranged, whereby the bearing portion B464 and the intermediate stage A tilting member B470 is tiltably supported by the member B430.
The receiving recess B465 is sufficiently long in the front-rear direction to receive the first member B481 that is long in the front-rear direction, and has a depth sufficient to allow the vertical displacement of the first member B481. It is formed at a position between B461 and the left/right path B463. By preventing the first member B481 from dropping out of the receiving recess B465, deformation of the first member B481 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

The bearing portion B466 is configured as a concave portion with an open top, and the intermediate member B430 is fastened and fixed to the lower member B460 in a state where the second member B485 of the transmission member B480 is arranged, so that the bearing portion B466 and the intermediate member The second member B485 is tiltably supported by B430.
When the tilting member B470 is in a non-excited state, it rises as shown in FIG. It is considered to be a posture that allows the ball to enter.
The tilting member B470 includes a plate-like portion B471 that gently curves inwardly (upward) toward the tip, and a pair of columnar portions B472 that protrude in the left-right direction from the lower end of the plate-like portion B471. A supported projection B473 projecting from the left and right ends of the cylindrical portion B472 in a cylindrical shape that is coaxial with the cylindrical portion B472 and has a smaller diameter than the cylindrical portion B472, and the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical portion B472 on the right side in a side view A transmitted portion B474 extending in a C shape and in contact with the first member B481 of the transmission member B480 to receive load transmission.
The plate-like portion B471 is formed to have a lateral width approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere, and is configured to prevent multiple spheres from landing at the same time.

The cylindrical portion B472 is a portion that is rotatably supported by the lower member B460 in the same manner as the supported protrusion B473. By configuring the cylindrical portion B472, it is possible to secure an area that bears the sliding load during rotation and the load in the gravity direction caused by the load from the ball, so that the supported protrusion B473 is the only supported protrusion. Mechanical wear can be suppressed compared to the case.
The transmission member B480 has a first member B481 configured so that the plunger BSOL 41a is inserted in the lateral direction at the rear end thereof so as to be restricted from falling off in the vertical direction, and a second member interlocking with the first member B481. B485;
The movement of the plunger BSOL41a in the front, rear, left, and right directions except for the vertical direction is restricted by the opening B437b of the base plate B437, and the first member B481 into which the plunger BSOL41a is inserted in the left and right direction is moved in the left and right direction by the receiving recess B465. Since the movement of the first member B481 and the plunger BSOL41a is restricted, it is possible to easily prevent disconnection of the first member B481 and the plunger BSOL41a from falling off in the left-right direction.
By switching the excitation state of the solenoid BSOL41 and displacing the plunger BSOL41a in the vertical direction, the first member B481 is displaced in the vertical direction, and the second member B485 is displaced in the direction of tilting back and forth. will be described later.

Figure 1429(a) is a front view of the winning unit B400, Figure 1429(b) is a side view of the winning unit B400 viewed in the direction of arrow MDXVIb in Figure 1429(a), and Figure 1429(c) 1429(a) is a top view of the prize winning unit B400 viewed in the direction of arrow MDXVIc in FIG. 1429(a). FIG.
Figures 1429(a) to 1429(c) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a. Also, in FIGS. 1429(b) and 1429(c), the position of the front and rear sides of the base plate B60 to which the winning unit B400 is assembled is illustrated by imaginary lines. In this embodiment, the ball flowing down the front side of the front side surface of the base plate B60 reaches the winning unit B400.
As shown in FIG. 1429(c), in the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 is arranged outside the eaves B426 in the left and right direction, and the tip portion B451 of FIG. 1429(b) , downwardly sloping rearward.
Therefore, the ball flowing down the front side of the base plate B60 deviates from the ball receiving portion B412 and rides on the tip B451 via the eaves B426, or directly on the tip B451 without passing through the eaves B426. The ball (dive ball) that hits is pulled backward along the slope of the tip portion B451. Then, when the ball reaches a position where it can pass through the ball passage opening B414 (see FIG. 1425), the upper surface of the slide member B450 along the slope of the tip portion B451 moves along the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate. It flows to the part B453 side.

Figures 1430(a) and 1430(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 along line MDXVIIa-MDXVIIa in Figure 1429(c). FIG. 1430(a) shows the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a (slide member B450 and tilting member B470), and FIG. 1430(b) shows the excited state of the electric accessory B640a. Also, in FIGS. 1430(a) and 1430(b), a part of nails BKG1 implanted in the base plate B60 is illustrated.
The switching of the state of the slide member B450 is a sliding movement in the front-rear direction, and is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish between the non-excited state and the excited state when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether the game ball flowing down toward the slide member B450 rolls on the upper surface of the slide member B450 or flows downward on the front side of the tip portion B451.
The switching of the state of the tilting member B470 is a tilting operation, and is configured to facilitate discrimination between the non-excited state and the excited state. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the ball can enter the second winning hole B640 (see FIG. 1416).
With reference to FIGS. 1430(a) and 1430(b), the manner in which the balls that reach the winning unit B400 flow down will be described. In the cross section shown in FIGS. 1430(a) and 1430(b), the prize winning unit B400 is formed in a symmetrical shape, so the description will be limited to the left and right sides, and the description of the other side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1430(a), a ball that deviates from the ball receiving portion B412 and flows down along a path BDR1 that flows via eaves B426, for example. In this case, since the eaves B426 block the ball, the ball does not flow down at the shortest distance to the ball passage opening B414, and the staying time on the tip B451 is extended. In addition, since the eaves B426 are inclined, the ball flows down with a velocity component to the left and right, so that the ball that has landed on the slide member B450 and bounced is likely to rebound to the left and right.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper surface of the slide member B450 is downwardly inclined toward the left and right inner sides, the rebound direction of the ball can be moved to the left and right inner sides. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball that has flowed down along the route BDR1 spills to the left and right outer sides of the distal end portion B451 of the slide member B450.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a nail BKG1 is planted at a position facing the ball flowing toward the right and left outside of the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450. Therefore, even if the ball flows toward the right and left outer sides of the tip portion B451, the ball with greater momentum can easily return to the side of the slide member B450 by colliding with the nail BKG1. When the ball flows toward the left and right outside of the tip portion B451, if the momentum of the ball is insufficient, it will not bounce back even if it collides with the nail BKG1, and the nail BKG1 and the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 will not bounce back. The ball will flow down between them.
Even if it flows down along a route different from the route BDR1, it usually reaches the same point BDR1a as the route BDR1 reaches the slide member B450 due to the arrangement of the nail BKG1, and is guided by the slide member B450.

The ball that flows down over the nail BKG1 that is implanted in a row at a position opposite to the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the slide member B450 and reaches the point BDR1a is such that the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 is on the side of the nail BKG1. Since it is formed so as to protrude outward, it is suppressed that the slide member B450 falls off between the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 and the nail BKG1.
In some cases, the ball bounced off by the nail BKG1 flies toward the left and right inner portions of the tip portion B451 (position in front of the ball passage opening B414). The B426 arrangement is designed. That is, in the present embodiment, even in an irregular flow state caused by the ball being bounced by the nail BKG1, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the front position of the ball passage opening B414 without passing through the point BDR1a is suppressed. ing. In the present embodiment, the frequency of balls that are bounced by the nail BKG1 and reach the front position of the ball passage opening B414 without passing through the point BDR1a is about 1 out of 10 balls that are bounced by the nail BKG1. It is designed to be adjusted to
As shown in FIG. 1430(b), when the electric accessory B640a (the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470) is in an excited state and the ball flows down the path BDR1, the ball does not land on the slide member B450 and the eaves It flows while maintaining the lateral velocity component generated by the inclination of B426.
Since there is no margin for overhanging the tip B451 of the sliding member B450 to the left and right outside, the effect of narrowing the gap with the nail BKG1 cannot be expected, and the ball deviates to the left and right outside of the opening B436a and flows down. do. In addition, due to the design of the eaves B426 described above, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the position in front of the ball passage opening B414 in an irregular flowing manner due to the ball being bounced off by the nail BKG1 is suppressed. is prevented from passing through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.

That is, when the ball flows down as exemplified by the path BDR1, if the slide member B450 is in a non-excited state, the ball is likely to be guided left and right on the upper surface of the tip portion B451, and if the slide member B450 is in an excited state, It is difficult for the ball to directly enter the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, and it is likely to flow down the left and right outer sides of the front design member B420.
Next, a description will be given of how the ball flows down after riding on the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 in the non-excited state. When the ball on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 flows left and right inward along the inclination of the tip B451 and the slide member B450 is maintained in a non-excited state until it passes through the ball passage opening B414. , the ball flows to the rear side of the tip B451 without any problem, and the possibility of entering the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b (see FIG. 1416) increases.
As another case, the case where the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state while the ball is on the tip portion B451 will be described.
The ball arrangement BB1 in FIG. 1430(a) is illustrated as riding on the left and right outer ends of the slide member B450. When the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB1, the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member B410, so the ball cannot move backward together with the movement of the slide member B450. No, the ball flows down the left and right outer sides of the front design member B420.

The ball arrangement BB2 in FIG. 1430(b) is illustrated as a state in which the center of the ball is arranged above the left and right outer edges of the opening B436a of the middle member B430. When the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB2, the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member B410. Can not.
On the other hand, whether it flows down the left and right outer sides of the front design member B420 or flows down toward the opening B436a changes depending on the force of the ball at that time and the deviation of the center position of the ball. The ball that has flowed down to the opening B436a side passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, and prize balls are paid out to the player.
Therefore, when the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state when the ball is in the ball arrangement BB2, the direction of the ball is uncertain, and the profit that the player can obtain changes depending on the direction of the ball. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide member B450 when the ball is in the placement BB2.
Sphere placement BB3 in FIG. 1430(b) is illustrated as a state in which a sphere is placed in front of sphere passing opening B414. When the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement BB3, the ball is received from the slide member B450 as the slide member B450 moves because the rear of the ball is opened at the ball passage opening B414. It moves backward due to the load (moves backward while being pushed by the slide member B450).

That is, even if the slide member B450 is switched to an excited state when a ball is placed in the ball arrangement BB3, the ball (only one ball) can flow down behind the ball passage opening B414. In this case, since the upper surface of the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 is inclined downward toward the rear, it is possible to easily prevent the balls from falling forward while the slide member B450 is moving.
According to the present embodiment, the ball arrangement BB3 is formed bilaterally symmetrically. Therefore, when the sliding member B450 is switched to the excited state in a state in which balls are placed on both the left and right ball arrangements BB3, the balls Both of them move rearward with the movement of the slide member and flow down rearward of the ball passage opening B414.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, even in the same state change where the slide member B450 is switched from the state in which the ball is placed on the tip portion B451 to the excited state, it depends on the arrangement of the ball on the tip portion B451. , the flow-down route of the ball after the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state is configured to change. Therefore, in a state where the ball is placed on the tip portion B451, it is possible to improve attention to the movement mode of the ball and the slide member B450.
When the slide member B450 is switched to the energized state, the ball positions BB1 to BB3 become more likely to be obtained by the player as they move toward the downstream side (toward the ball position BB3). Therefore, even after the ball lands on the slide member B450, the player's potential profit continues to increase, so that the player's attention to the downfall of the ball can be improved.

Also, the number of balls on the slide member B450 is not limited to one. For example, there is a possibility that the balls are arranged in the ball arrangement BB1 and the ball arrangement BB3 at the same time. In this case, the slide member B450 continues until the ball at the ball placement BB3 passes backward through the ball passage opening B414 and the ball at the ball placement BB1 reaches the ball placement BB3 side (for about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). Since the player's potential profit is higher if the ball is kept in the non-excited state, it is possible to improve the ability of the player to pay attention to the movement of the ball and the slide member B450.
FIG. 1431 is a sectional view of the winning unit B400 taken along the MDXVIII-MDXVIII line in FIG. 1429(c), FIG. 1432 is a sectional view of the winning unit B400 taken along the MDXIX-MDXIX line in FIG. 1429(c), and FIG. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXX-MDXX in FIG. 1429(c). Figures 1431 to 1433 show the non-excited state (advance closed state) of the electric accessory B640a.
In the non-excited state (advance closed state) of the electric accessory B640a, as shown in FIGS. 1431 to 1433, the slide member B450 is arranged at the advanced position and the tilting member B470 is arranged at the closed position.
First, with reference to FIGS. 1431 and 1433, the configuration of the flow path for balls rolling on the upper surface of the slide member B450 will be described. When the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position, the front-to-rear width between the front design member B420 and the slide member B450 becomes less than the diameter of the sphere, thereby preventing the sphere from flowing into the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435. As a result, the ball on the tip B451 is introduced behind the ball passage opening B414.

The ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 rolls on the slide member B450 along the area surrounded by the middle member B430 and the upper member B440. The upper member B440 includes a ceiling surface B447 arranged to face the upper surface of the slide member B450.
Unlike the inclination of the upper surface of the slide member B450, the ceiling surface B447 is formed as a plane extending along the front-rear direction (the displacement direction of the slide member B450 in this embodiment). Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the flow path formed between the top and bottom surfaces of the ceiling surface B447 and the slide member B450 increases toward the rear side (downstream side). It is possible to avoid an increase in flow resistance.
Further, as a result, even if the ball rolling backward on the slide member B450 bounces upward, or if the ball bounces backward due to the load of being pushed backward, the ball will not reach the ceiling surface. It is possible to make it easier to avoid the situation of collision with B447.
As shown in FIG. 1433, the vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a of the ceiling forming portion B444 is lower than the vertical position of the ceiling surface B447. Therefore, even if the ball bounces close to the ceiling surface B447, the height of the ball can be lowered to the inclined surface portion B444a before the ball joins the central flow path B431 through the gap B444c.

That is, it is possible to reduce the momentum of the ball and then join the central flow path B431. As a result, even if balls are introduced into the central flow path B431 from the left and right at arbitrary timing and may collide, the balls that are newly guided to the central flow path B431 have already been arranged in the central flow path B431. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a large load that causes the ball to flow backward is applied to the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the backward flow of the spheres in the central flow path B431 and smoothen the flow of the spheres.
Since the height position of the ceiling surface B447 is the same on the left and right sides, this action applies not only to the ball guided by the right guide plate portion B453 but also to the ball guided by the left guide plate portion B452. occurs in
The ceiling surface B447 includes a curved guide portion B447a formed as a curved surface at the rear end portion and smoothly connected to the left side wall portion B445 and the right side wall portion B446. When the ball bounces on the upper surface of the slide member B450 and collides with the curved guide portion B447a, the flowing direction of the ball can be directed downward along the shape of the curved guide portion B447a. can be done.
As a result, the ball can be smoothly displaced downward from the vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a, so that the ball can smoothly merge into the central flow path B431.

As shown in FIGS. 1431 and 1433, the movement width of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member B450 in the front-rear direction is several centimeters (approximately 3 to 5 centimeters). The occupied length (left-right width) is suppressed to about 1 to 2 cm on one side (see Fig. 1430).
That is, the slide member B450 is configured so that the range in which the slide member B450 is disposed on the front side of the base plate B60 (the area occupied by the front view) can be made smaller than the path length for guiding the ball. be done. As a result, the space of the game area occupied by the slide member B450 can be reduced while ensuring a sufficient length for guiding the ball with the slide member B450, so that other electric accessories, prize openings, etc. can be arranged. A space to play can be secured in the game area.
As shown in FIG. 1433, the inclined surface portion B444a of the upper member B440 and the right guide plate portion B453 (and the left guide plate portion B452, see FIG. 1431) of the slide member B450 have the same inclination angle in the front-rear direction. there is As a result, the right opening portion BRT (the opening portion defined by the right gap B444c, the inclined surface portion B444a, and the right guide plate portion B453) through which the ball passes from the right guide plate portion B453 to the central flow path B431, and the left guide plate portion The same area as the left opening BLT (the opening defined by the left gap B444c, the inclined surface portion B444a, and the left guide plate portion B452) through which the ball passes from B452 to the central flow path B431 is ensured.
That is, since the left and right openings BLT and BRT are different in front and rear positions, the vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a is lower in the rear left opening BLT, so that the area (vertical width) of the openings BLT and BRT becomes smaller. Although there is a possibility, in the present embodiment, the vertical position of the right guide plate portion B453 (and the left guide plate portion B452, see FIG. 1431) of the slide member B450 is adjusted to correspond to the lower vertical position of the inclined surface portion B444a. Since it is similarly lowered, the same vertical width can be ensured for the left and right openings BLT and BRT.

This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the flow resistance when the ball joins the central flow path B431 changes depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453 or the left guide plate portion B452. can be made easier.
On the other hand, depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453 or the left guide plate portion B452, the front and rear length of the ball rolling on the slide member B450 differs (the left guide plate portion B452 is longer than the right guide plate portion B453 by about 11 mm (by the diameter of the ball), so the time required for the ball to pass through the ball passage opening B414 and join the central flow passage B431 is different, The details of the time required for the ball to flow down will be described later.
In FIGS. 1431 to 1433, the left and right openings BLT and BRT are illustrated by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position. Also, although it is illustrated slightly smaller to avoid overlapping with other solid lines, it is not intended to be limited to a small shape, and is smoothly guided from the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 to the central flow path B431. It is formed in a size and arrangement sufficient to be
Next, with reference to FIG. 1432, the central flow path B431 will be described. The ball guided by the slide member B450 is introduced into the central flow path B431 along the inclination of the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a through the openings BLT and BRT whose positions are different in the front and rear on the left and right sides.

The introduced ball flows down toward the front side along the central flow path B431, and when the tilting member B470 is in the closed position, it collides with the ball guide ridge B428 and then flows down to win a prize. It drops out of the unit B400 and flows down toward the third winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416).
Here, since the balls received in the ball receiving portion B412 flow down to the upper flow passage forming portion B441 in order, the number of balls does not suddenly increase, and the inclination of the upper lid member B443 does not affect the upper flow passage forming portion. It is parallel to B441. On the other hand, a plurality of balls are arranged in the central flow path B431 at the same time, for example, the balls are guided to the central flow path B431 from the left and right at the same time. there is a possibility.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface portion B444a constituting the ceiling portion of the central flow passage B431 is inclined upward toward the front, so that the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow passage B431 increases forward. It gets bigger as you go. That is, since the flow passage area increases toward the downstream side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the flow down mode in which the liquid flows forward in the central flow passage B431. That is, even in a flow path configuration in which the spheres join at a midpoint, a large flow path area is ensured, so an increase in flow resistance of the spheres can be avoided.
Figure 1434 is a sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXVIII-MDXVIII of Figure 1429(c), Figure 1435 is a sectional view of winning unit B400 taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX of Figure 1429(c), and Figure 1436. 1429(c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXX-MDXX in FIG. 1429(c). Figures 1434 to 1436 show the energized state (backward open state) of the electric accessory B640a.

In FIGS. 1434 to 1436, the left and right openings BLT and BRT are shown by imaginary lines as the arrangement of openings when the slide member B450 is arranged in the forward position, similar to the illustration in FIGS. 1431 to 1433. be done.
In the excited state (retracted open state) of the electric accessory B640a, as shown in FIGS. 1434 to 1436, the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position and the tilting member B470 is arranged at the open position.
As shown in FIGS. 1434 and 1436, when the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position, the distal end portion B451 of the slide member B450 is arranged behind the front side surface of the plate member B410. This can prevent a new ball from landing on the slide member B450.
That is, a new ball is introduced toward the second winning opening B640 or the third winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416) arranged downstream of the central flow path B431 arranged downstream of the slide member B450. do not have. Therefore, if the ball on the slide member B450 is kept in an excited state beyond the time required for it to flow through the front side of the tilting member B470, all the balls guided to the winning unit B400 will be picked up by the tilting member B470. can break In addition, since the balls guided by the slide member B450 are not added, it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b from becoming excessive. The details of ball entry control will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1434 and 1436, a narrow protrusion B455 is formed on the lower surface of the slide member B450. It is As a result, the slide member B450 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction, and the contact area between the slide member B450 and the extended support portion B436 is reduced, thereby reducing the frictional resistance. be able to.
When the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state and the ball is on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 when the slide member B450 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position, the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 Since the upper surface is inclined downward toward the rear, ball slippage is suppressed, and the slide member B450 and the slide member B450 move integrally (by the same displacement amount as the slide member B450) to the rear. In addition, the ball is accelerated rearward by the load applied via the slide member B450.
On the other hand, when the slide member B450 is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state and is displaced from the retracted position to the advanced position, when the ball is on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, the upper surface of the slide member B450 , the vertical height of the slide member B450 at the front and rear positions where the ball is arranged is lowered, and the vertical distance between the slide member B450 and the ball is widened.
In other words, the ball floats on the slide member B450 and then lands on the slide member B450 again, preventing the ball from moving forward integrally with the slide member B450.

In addition, when the ball is spun in the forward rotation direction at the start of displacement of the slide member B450 (before the vertical gap between the ball and the slide member B450 opens), the flow speed of the ball on the slide member B450 is increased. can be made
When the slide member B450 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the ball already on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 remains on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453. , and the branch of the flow path is determined further downstream.
On the other hand, when the slide member B450 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the ball placed in front of the ball passage opening B414 may fall toward the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, as shown in FIG. is as described above. That is, at the position in front of the ball passage opening B414, it is possible to determine the branch of the flow path of the ball, whether it passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 and is discharged outside the game area, or flows on another flow path. have a nature.
In the present embodiment, the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 is positioned closer to the front than the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453. As a result, attention to the detection sensor B435 can be improved, the flow path branches to the opening B435a side of the detection sensor B435, and the ball passing through the opening B435a can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 1435, even when the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position, the inclined surface portion B452a is arranged at the left opening BLT. That is, the inclined surface portion B452a is formed with a front-to-rear width sufficient to be arranged in the left opening portion BLT regardless of the arrangement of the slide member B450. The same applies to the inclined surface portion B453a.
When the ball introduced into the central flow path B431 passes through the central flow path B431 and the tilting member B470 is still arranged in the open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470 and passes through the detection sensor B462.
That is, the position in front of the tilting member B470 is the position where the branch of the ball's flow path is determined, whether the ball passes through the detection sensor B462 and is discharged outside the game area, or flows on another flow path. .
In this embodiment, the tilting member B470 is configured to be positioned closer to the front than the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453. As a result, attention to the tilting member B470 can be improved, the flowing path branches to the detection sensor B462 side, and the ball flowing down to the detection sensor B462 side can be easily visually recognized.

In this way, the winning unit B400 is configured such that the position where the branch of the ball's flow path is determined is arranged on the front side. Furthermore, the sphere does not pass through the plurality of positions where the branching of the flow-down path of the ball is determined (the position in front of the ball passage opening B414 and the position in front of the tilting member B470) without leaving a gap. By arranging the ball to pass through at intervals, it is possible to create room for the player who pays attention to the ball to move his/her line of sight.
In addition, by narrowing the distance in front view between a plurality of positions (the position in front of the ball passage opening B414 and the position in front of the tilting member B470) where the branch of the ball flow path is determined (see FIG. 1430) , the player who pays attention to the ball can make room to move his line of sight.
As shown in FIG. 1435, the supported protrusion B473 as the rotating shaft of the tilting member B470 is arranged at a position recessed rearward from the front end of the central flow path B431. In addition, the tilting member B470 in the closed position tilts slightly forward corresponding to the tilting of the tilting stopper B437f of the middle member B430 (see FIG. 1432).
As a result, when the falling ball is placed in front of the tilting member B470 in the closed position, even if the tilting member B470 is energized and displaced toward the open position, the front surface of the tilting member B470 is already forward. Since it is slanted toward the ball, it is easy to apply a downward load to the ball, and the ball can be ejected downward at an early stage. That is, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball is caught between the tilting member B470 and the front design member B420 and the tilting member B470 is inhibited from being displaced to the open position for a prolonged period of time.

In addition, since the rotation angle of the tilting member B470 during the opening/closing operation can be reduced, the time required for the opening/closing operation can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the timing of opening and closing, and it is possible to easily prevent excessive entry of the ball.
In this embodiment, the lateral width of the plate-like portion B471 of the tilting member B470 is formed to have a length approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere (see FIG. 1430), and it is possible to pick up a plurality of spheres while displacing from the open position to the closed position. Since it is configured so that it cannot be done, it is possible to easily prevent excessive ball entry.
The inclined surface portion B437e that constitutes the ceiling portion of the flow path through which the ball picked up by the tilting member B470 flows down is formed as an inclined surface parallel to the central path B461 in the rear side portion, and the front side portion as the side closer to the tilting member B470. , the angle of upward inclination toward the front is increased.
As a result, even if the ball picked up by the tilting member B470 bounces due to collision with the tilting member B470, the ball can be smoothly introduced into the path between the central path B461 and the inclined surface portion B437e. . Therefore, due to the weight of the ball on the tilting member B470 and the high inflow resistance of the ball to the path between the central path B461 and the inclined surface portion B437e, the tilting member B470 is closed by being prevented from displacing the ball. It is possible to avoid the situation where the displacement toward the position is delayed.

As shown in FIG. 1436, when the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state, the vertical position of the slide member B450 at the same front and rear position rises, so that the lower edge of the right opening BRT rises and the area through which the ball can pass is increased. becomes smaller. The same applies to the left opening BLT.
At this time, the ball that reaches the rear end of the left side wall portion B445 or the right side wall portion B446 jumps up under the influence of the vertical position of the slide member B450 rising at that position. This can increase the kinetic energy of the sphere.
On the other hand, the vertical distance between the inclined surface portion B444a and the slide member B450 is narrower than the state in which the slide member B450 is arranged in the forward position, so that the flow resistance of the ball increases, and the momentum of the ball is reduced by the inclined surface portion B444a. The effect of As a result, the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball can be sufficiently reduced before the ball can be guided to the central flow path B431.
Figures 1437(a) and 1437(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXXIVa-MDXXIVa in Figure 1429(c). FIG. 1437(a) shows the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a (slide member B450 and tilting member B470), and FIG. 1437(b) shows the excited state of the electric accessory B640a. Note that FIGS. 1437(a) and 1437(b) show a cross section passing through the middle position in the front-rear direction of the gap B444c.

In this embodiment, since the left opening BLT and the right opening BRT are displaced in the front-rear direction, the left and right openings are arranged on a straight line extending in the left-right direction. Balls passing through collide with each other in the left and right direction, and the loads generated by the balls are directed outward in the left and right direction, resulting in balance, and the problem that the downflow of the balls is delayed can be avoided.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball on the left guide plate portion B452 passes through the right opening portion BRT arranged on the front side of the left opening portion BLT through which the ball is introduced into the central flow path B431. is introduced into the central flow path B431, there is a possibility that the ball trying to pass through the right opening BRT will collide with the ball flowing down the central flow path B431 (Fig. 1437 (a )reference). In this case, even if the shape of the flow path is designed to prevent this from happening, there is a possibility that the loads that the spheres exert on each other will be balanced and the flow of the spheres will stop.
In contrast, in this embodiment, when the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state and displaced to the retracted position, the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central flow path B431 is not affected, but the right guide plate portion By raising the vertical position of the ball on B453, it is possible to create a gap, albeit momentarily, between the ball placed in the central flow path B431 and the ball on the right guide plate portion B453. can. During this time, the spheres arranged in the central flow path B431 flow along the inclination of the central flow path B431, so that the balance of the loads given to each other by the spheres can be lost.
Further, when the slide member B450 is switched to the non-excited state and displaced to the forward position, the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central flow path B431 is not affected, but the vertical position of the right guide plate portion B453 is lowered. As a result, it is possible to create a gap (float) between the ball above the right guide plate portion B453 and the right guide plate portion B453, albeit for a moment. When the ball above the right guide plate portion B453 is displaced downward so as to fill this gap, it is considered that the ball is pushed by the load from the ball arranged in the central flow path B431 and displaced to the left and right outside. So the spheres can unbalance the loads they give to each other.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the loads applied by the spheres are balanced at the confluence position with the central flow path B431, the loads are balanced by switching the state of the slide member B450. It is configured so that it is possible to change the arrangement of one of the spheres in place, thereby breaking the balance of the load. Thereby, it is possible to maintain a smooth flow of balls from the slide member B450 via the central flow path B431.
In addition, since the above-described effect of imbalance of the load occurs at the timing when the state of the slide member B450 is switched, the operation pattern of the slide member B450 may be designed in anticipation of this effect. That is, the higher the frequency of switching the state of the slide member B450, the easier it is to lose the load balance between the falling balls, so that the balls can flow down smoothly.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1438 to 1442, variations of the flow-down path of the ball that has reached the position where the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 is arranged will be described.
Figures 1438(a) to 1438(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. Figures 1438(a) to 1438(d) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, and show the flow of the ball after riding on the tip B451 in chronological order. 1438(a) to 1438(d), the plate member B410, the front design member B420, and the upper member B440 are omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. are shown in imaginary lines.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the landing of the ball on the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450, as shown in FIG. This is likely to occur in FIG. 1430(a)). The ball that lands on the tip B451 then passes through the ball passage opening B414 as shown in FIG. do.
After that, as shown in FIG. 1438(c), it flows into the central flow path B431 via the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450, and flows down to the front side along the inclination of the central flow path B431. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1438(d), the ball that has passed through the central opening B413 on the front end side of the central flow path B431 flows downward.
As shown in FIGS. 1438(a) to 1438(d), when the electric accessory B640a is maintained in a non-excited state over the period in which the ball passes through the winning unit B400, the ball that lands on the tip B451 It falls on the front side of the central opening B413 and flows down toward the third winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416).
Figures 1439(a) to 1439(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. FIGS. 1439(a) and 1439(b) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, and FIGS. 1439(c) and 1439(d) show the excited state of the electric accessory B640a. In 1439(a) to 1439(d), the flow of the ball after riding on the tip B451 is illustrated in chronological order. 1439(a) to 1439(d), the plate member B410, the front design member B420, and the upper member B440 are omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. are shown in imaginary lines.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the landing of the ball on the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450, as shown in FIG. This is likely to occur in FIG. 1430(a)). The ball that has landed on the tip B451 then flows left and right inward toward the front side of the ball passage opening B414, and passes through the ball arrangement BB2 (see FIG. 1430(a)) as shown in FIG. 1439(b).
When the flowing ball is arranged in the ball arrangement BB2, when the electric accessory B640a is switched to the excited state as shown in FIG. , the ball flows down the front side of the ball passage opening B414 and passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.
As shown in FIGS. 1439(a) to 1439(d), after the ball rides on the tip B451, when the electric accessory B640a is switched to the excited state within a short time, the tip B451 is on. The ball can drop in front of the ball passage opening B414 and pass through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.
However, when the electric accessory B640a is switched to the excited state within a very short time so that the inertia does not act on the left and right inner sides, the ball riding on the tip B451 comes off the opening B435a and the detection sensor B435. It can flow down left and right.

Figures 1440(a) to 1440(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. FIGS. 1440(a) and 1440(b) show the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, and FIGS. 1440(c) and 1440(d) show the excited state of the electric accessory B640a. In 1440(a) to 1440(d), the flow of the sphere after riding on the tip B451 is illustrated in chronological order. 1440(a) to 1440(d), the plate member B410, the front design member B420, and the upper member B440 are omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. are shown in imaginary lines.
As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the landing of the ball on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is caused by the left and right outer sides of the tip B451 (ball arrangement BB1, This is likely to occur in FIG. 1430(a)). The ball that lands on the tip B451 then passes through the ball passage opening B414 as shown in FIG. do.
After that, as shown in FIG. 1440(c), it flows into the central flow passage B431 via the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450, and flows downward along the inclination of the central flow passage B431 toward the front side. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1440(d), the ball that has passed through the central opening B413 on the front end side of the central flow path B431 flows downward, is picked up by the tilting member B470, and flows backward.
As shown in FIGS. 1440(a) to 1440(d), when the electric accessory B640a is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state while the ball passes through the prize winning unit B400 and is maintained in the excited state, the tip A ball that lands on the part B451 falls down the front side of the central opening B413, is picked up by the tilting member B470, and enters the second winning hole B640 (opening opened and closed by the tilting member B470, see FIG. 1416).

Figures 1441(a) to 1441(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. Figures 1441(a), 1441(b) and 1441(d) illustrate the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, and Figure 1441(c) illustrates the excited state of the electric accessory B640a. In 1441(a) to 1441(d), the flow of the ball after riding on the tip B451 is illustrated in chronological order. 1441(a) to 1441(d), the plate member B410, the front design member B420, and the upper member B440 are omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. are shown in imaginary lines.
As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the landing of the ball on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 is caused by the left and right outer sides of the tip B451 (ball arrangement BB1, This is likely to occur in FIG. 1430(a)). The ball that lands on the tip B451 then passes through the ball passage opening B414 as shown in FIG. do.
After that, as shown in FIG. 1441(c), it flows into the central flow passage B431 via the inclined surface portions B452a and B453a of the slide member B450, and flows downward along the inclination of the central flow passage B431 toward the front side. At this point, the electric accessory B640a is in an excited state, as shown in FIG. 1441(c), as shown in FIG. 1440(c).
Thereafter, before the ball passes through the central opening B413 on the front end side of the central flow path B431, the electric accessory B640a is switched to the non-excited state as shown in FIG. 1441(d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1441(d), the ball that has passed through the central opening B413 on the front end side of the central flow path B431 flows downward.

As shown in FIGS. 1441(a) to 1441(d), when the electric accessory B640a is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state while the ball passes through the winning unit B400, and then switched to the non-excited state again. , the ball that lands on the tip portion B451 drops in front of the central opening B413 and flows down toward the third prize winning port B64b (see FIG. 1416).
Thus, in this embodiment, when the electric accessory B640a is switched to the excited state after the ball has passed through the ball passage opening B414, it is unknown whether the ball will be picked up by the tilting member B470. be.
That is, depending on how the state of the tilting member B470 changes after the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the ball either falls down the front side of the tilting member B470 and flows down toward the third winning hole B64b, or tilts. It changes whether it is picked up by the member B470 and flows down toward the second prize winning opening B640, and it is unknown in which direction the ball flows down until it reaches the tilting member B470. As a result, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 and flowing down toward the front side position of the tilting member B470.
When the ball rides on the tip B451, it serves as a branching point for determining whether or not the ball will flow into the ball passage opening B414, thereby improving attention, and when the ball passes through the central opening B413, the ball tilts. Attention can be improved as a branching point of whether or not it is picked up by the member B470. As a result, attention to the ball flowing down inside the winning unit B400 can be improved at a plurality of positions.

Figures 1442(a) and 1442(b) are front perspective views of the winning unit B400. In FIGS. 1442(a) and 1442(b), the excited state of the electric accessory B640a is illustrated, and the flow of the ball flowing down the front side of the tip B451 is illustrated by arrows. 1442(a) and 1442(b), the plate member B410, the front design member B420, and the upper member B440 are omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. are shown in imaginary lines.
As shown in FIG. 1442(a), when the slide member B450 is arranged in the forward position, the path passes through the left and right positions (ball arrangement BB1, see FIG. 1430(a)) that lands on the left and right outer sides of the distal end portion B451. When the ball flows down, the ball flows to the left and right outside of the opening B436a. That is, the ball does not pass through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.
As shown in FIG. 1442(b), when a ball having a velocity component in the left and right direction flows downward toward the front position of the slide member B450, the ball enters the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435. There is a possibility of doing so.
On the other hand, since the distal end portion B451 of the slide member B450 is recessed rearward (see FIG. 1434), the falling ball is prevented from riding on the distal end portion B451. This preventive action is also enhanced by reducing the opening area surrounded by the ball passage opening B414 and the tip portion B451.

That is, since the tip portion B451 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear, when the slide member B450 is arranged in the forward position (see FIG. 1431), the slide member forms an opening together with the ball passage opening B414. A slide member that can form an opening together with the ball passage opening B414 when the slide member B450 is arranged in a retracted position (see FIG. 1434) relative to the vertical position of the portion B450 (corresponding to the rear edge of the tip portion B451). The vertical position of the portion B450 (corresponding to the front edge portion of the tip portion B451) is higher.
Therefore, when the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position, the lower side of the opening surrounded by the ball passage opening B414 and the tip portion B451 (corresponding to the side formed by the tip portion B451) is raised. Aperture area is reduced. As a result, when a ball having a left-right inward velocity component jumps toward the front position of the slide member B450, the ball can be easily prevented from entering the tip portion B451 side. .
In this way, the ball flowing down the front side position of the slide member B450 in the excited state of the electric accessory B640a generally deviates to the left and right outside of the winning unit B400, and some of the balls enter the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435.
On the other hand, the ball flowing down the front side of the slide member B450 when the electric accessory B640a is excited is prevented from riding on the slide member B450. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a new ball is introduced toward the arranged second winning hole B640 (see FIG. 1416) or the third winning hole B64b.

As shown in FIGS. 1438 to 1442, the winning unit B400 can branch the flow of the ball riding on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 at a plurality of positions. First, when the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state immediately after the ball rides on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 in the non-excited state (first branch position), the ball moves to the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435. It can flow down toward (see FIG. 1439(c)).
On the other hand, the ball that has not flowed down to the opening B435a flows along the slope from the tip B451. If the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state while the ball is riding on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, the ball still rides on the slide member B450. Also, when the slide member B450 is switched to the excited state while riding on the bottom surface portion B431a (see FIG. 1440(c)), the ball remains on the bottom surface portion B431a.
The ball flowing down the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 toward the rear is always left and right due to the lateral inclination formed over the entire front and rear width of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453. While being pulled inward, it flows down toward the rear. As a result, the ball can be moved downstream toward the central flow path B431 before the ball reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453. Therefore, rather than changing direction to the central flow path B431 side only after the ball reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, the ball flows smoothly into the central flow path B431 side. can do.
The ball that has flowed into the central flow path B431 rolls forward along the inclination of the central flow path B431. When the ball drops from the front end of the central flow path B431 (second branch position), the ball drops downward if the tilting member B470 of the electric accessory B640a is placed in the closed position in a non-excited state. (See FIG. 1438(d)) If the tilting member B470 of the electric accessory B640a is placed in the open position in an excited state, the ball will be picked up by the tilting member B470 and flow backward (See FIG. 1440(d). ).

In this embodiment, by setting the flowing direction of the game ball rolling on the slide member B450 to include the front-rear direction, the game ball is moved with a path length equal to or greater than the dimensions of the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470 in a front view. can be rolled.
As a condition for developing the pachinko machine B10, for example, the width dimension of the electric accessory B640a in the front view cannot be extended indefinitely, and a length limit is set (for example, 55 mm). , The lateral width of the electric accessory B640a in a front view satisfies the development conditions of the pachinko machine B10, and the actual ball rolling length via the electric accessory B640a can be further extended. As a result, in the configuration in which the ball flows over the electric accessory B640a and is guided to the winning opening on the downstream side, it is possible to lengthen the time required for the ball to flow down while narrowing the arrangement space of the electric accessory B640a in a front view. can.
Furthermore, as the electric accessory B640a, the parts (the tip part B451 and the tilting member B470) that come into contact with the flowing game ball are provided at distant positions. As a result, the length of the central flow path B431 therebetween can exceed the shape of the electric accessory B640a and the length of the game ball flowing down can be increased.
Figures 1443(a) and 1443(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in Figure 1429(b). FIG. 1443(a) shows a state (non-excited state) in which the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position, and FIG. 1443(b) shows the slide member B450 at the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. The state immediately after being switched to the arranged state (excited state) is illustrated. Also, FIGS. 1443(a) and 1443(b) show the balls arranged in the slide member B450 or the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slides.

As shown in FIGS. 1443(a) and 1443(b), when the slide member B450 slides, the ball on the left guide plate portion B452 is displaced backward along with the slide member B450 by the amount of slide movement. . Furthermore, since the left guide plate portion B452 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see FIG. 1431), a rearward load is applied to the ball, and the ball is accelerated.
On the other hand, the ball riding on the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slides rolls on the fixed floor surface without being displaced particularly rearward. Therefore, even if the ball flows down the same path, the ball on the left guide plate portion B452 when the slide member B450 slides and the ball on the left guide plate portion B452 when the slide member B450 slides. The time required for the ball to flow down differs from the ball that was not on the ball but was on the central flow path B431, and the details of the difference in time required will be described later.
In addition, in FIGS. 1443(a) and 1443(b), when two balls are arranged in the flow-down region formed by the slide member B450 and the central flow channel B431, the slide member B450 and the central flow channel B431 Although a state in which one ball is arranged is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball may be arranged only on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, or the ball may be arranged only on the central flow path B431. Also, the number of balls to be arranged is not limited to two, and may be one or more than three.
Figures 1444(a) and 1444(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit B400 taken along line MDXXXa-MDXXXa in Figure 1429(b). FIG. 1444(a) shows a state (non-excited state) in which the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position, and FIG. 1444(b) shows the slide member B450 at the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. The state immediately after being switched to the arranged state (excited state) is illustrated. Also, FIGS. 1444(a) and 1444(b) show the balls arranged in the slide member B450 or the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slides.

As shown in FIGS. 1444(a) and 1444(b), the ball on the right guide plate portion B453 when the slide member B450 slides is similar to the ball on the left guide plate portion B452. Together with the slide member B450, it is displaced rearward by the displacement amount of the slide movement. Furthermore, since the right guide plate portion B453 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see FIG. 1433), a rearward load is applied to the ball, and the ball is accelerated.
On the other hand, the ball riding on the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 slides rolls on the fixed floor surface without being displaced particularly rearward. Therefore, even if the ball flows down the same path, the ball on the right guide plate portion B453 when the slide member B450 slides and the ball on the right guide plate portion B453 when the slide member B450 slides. The time required for the ball to flow down differs from the ball that was not on the ball but was on the central flow path B431, and the details of the difference in time required will be described later.
The time required for the ball to flow down on the slide member B450 and pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 will be described. In this embodiment, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 rolls on the right guide plate portion B453 and flows down, the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414 unless the slide member B450 slides while the ball is flowing down. The sphere passes through the front end of the central channel B431 in about 2.0 seconds.
On the other hand, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 rolls on the left guide plate portion B452 and flows down, if the slide member B450 does not slide while the ball is flowing down, the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 It passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 in about 2.4 seconds.

The slide member B450 constitutes half of the path from passing through the ball passage opening B414 to passing through the front end of the central flow path B431. That is, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 flows down on the right guide plate portion B453, the slide member B450 slides before about 1.0 seconds have passed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening B414. , the ball receives a load from the slide member B450, and when the slide member B450 slides about 1.0 seconds after the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the ball No load is received from the slide member B450.
Also, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening B414 flows down on the left guide plate portion B452, the slide member B450 slides before about 1.2 seconds have passed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening B414. In this case, while the ball receives a load from the slide member B450, when the slide member B450 slides about 1.2 seconds after the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the ball No load is received from the slide member B450.
In this embodiment, even if the ball enters the pair of left and right ball passage openings B414 at the same timing, the ball may receive a backward load from the slide member B450 depending on the timing of the sliding operation of the slide member B450. and the case where the ball does not receive a backward load from the slide member B450 can occur at the same time.
That is, after about 1.0 seconds have passed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening B414 and before about 1.2 seconds have passed, if the slide member B450 slides, the left guide plate The ball flowing down on the portion B452 receives a backward load, and the ball flowing down on the right guide plate portion B453 does not receive a backward load.

When the slide member B450 slides backward while the ball is on the slide member B450, the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 to pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 is about 0.5. seconds are shortened.
The breakdown of this 0.5 seconds is approximately 0.3 seconds shortened by the amount of displacement (about 12 mm) in the longitudinal direction of the slide member B450, and 0.2 seconds shortened by the acceleration due to the load applied to the ball from the slide member B450. seconds are shortened.
The ball rolling backward on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 passes through the gap B432a or the gap B433a (see FIG. 1438(b)) and flows into the central flow path B431. Since the gap B432a and the gap B433a are displaced in the front-rear direction, when the ball passes through the gap B432a and the ball passes through the gap B433a at the same time, they do not cause a head-on collision in the left-right direction. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball passing through the gap B432a or the gap B433a is pushed back due to collision with the ball and flows backward.
Since the ball flowing down the front side position of the slide member B450 is prevented from reaching the slide member B450 in the excited state of the electric accessory B640a (see FIG. 1442), the electric accessory B640a is switched to the excited state. What takes the longest time to reach the tilting member B470 is the ball that was on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 at the time of switching the electric accessory B640a to the excited state, and after that ball, the tilting member B470. the ball will never reach the

Figures 1445(a) to 1445(c) are diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in the state of the electric accessory B640a. In addition, FIG. 1445(a) shows the timing change in the first operation pattern, FIG. 1445(b) shows the timing change in the second operation pattern, and FIG. 1445(c) shows the third operation pattern. A timed change in actuation pattern is illustrated.
FIGS. 1445(a) to 1445(c) will explain the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a whose operation is controlled when the passage of the ball is detected through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1416, in this embodiment, the nail arrangement is designed so that the ball flowing down toward the electric accessory B640a passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 without omission. Compared to the firing interval (0.6 second interval), the operation time of the electric accessory B640a triggered by the passing of the ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 (single lottery of normal symbols) (The operation time in the standard operation pattern, equivalent to the interval of the normal pattern lottery) is longer, so the number of reserved balls in the normal pattern is less likely to be interrupted during the pinball game, and the number of reserved balls in the normal pattern is always It tends to be kept above 0. Therefore, the operation of the electric accessory B640a is repeatedly executed in the reference operation pattern without intervals.
As shown in FIG. 1445(a), in the first operation pattern, the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-excited state (advance position) for the standby time Bt1a (0.1 second in this embodiment), and then the operation time A pattern in which the slide member B450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) for Bt1b (3.9 seconds in this embodiment) is set as a reference operation pattern BRP1, and this pattern is repeated.

In detail, as a breakdown of 0.1 seconds constituting the non-excited state, the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner for 0.05 seconds, and after that, the slide member B450 is maintained at the forward position for 0.05 seconds. It is
When the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip B451 of the slide member B450, but for 0.1 seconds, the ball moves from the ball position BB1 to the ball position BB3 (see FIG. 1430(a)). ) (about 0.2 seconds).
Therefore, when the electric accessory B640a is operated and controlled in the first operation pattern, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball passage opening B414, and the ball is prevented from being introduced into the central flow path B431. , the ball can be prevented from entering the second winning hole B640 or the third winning hole B64b (see FIG. 1416).
As shown in FIG. 1445(b), in the second operation pattern, the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-excited state (advance position) for the standby time Bt2a (1.8 seconds in this embodiment), and then the operation time The slide member B450 is maintained in the energized state (backward position) for Bt2b (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and thereafter, the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-excited state (advanced position) for the waiting time Bt2a, and then the operation is performed. A pattern in which the slide member B450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) at time Bt2b is set as a reference operation pattern BRP2, and this pattern is repeated.

In detail, as a breakdown of 1.8 seconds constituting the non-excited state, the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner for 0.05 seconds, and the slide member B450 is maintained at the forward position for 1.75 seconds after that. It is
When the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip B451 of the slide member B450. It passes through the opening B414, rolls on the slide member B450, and is guided toward the central flow path B431.
A correspondence relationship between the position and timing at which the ball reaches and the time elapsed until the ball passes the front end of the central flow path B431 will be described. Since it takes about 0.2 seconds to reach BB3 from ball placement BB1, the ball begins to pass through ball passage opening B414 0.2 seconds after slide member B450 is placed in the advanced position.
When the ball is guided to the left guide plate portion B452, the ball passage opening B414 is reached after the first left ball entering period BTIL1 (0.2 to 0.6 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position. 2.4 seconds later, after the first left discharge period BTOL1 (2.6 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment), the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431. In this case, since the ball reaches the central flow path B431 before the slide member B450 operates, the load from the slide member B450 does not change the flow velocity of the ball.

Further, when the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion B452, after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position and the second left ball entry period BTIL2 (0.6 seconds to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment), the ball The ball that has passed through the passage opening B414 receives a backward load from the slide member B450, thereby shortening the passage period by 0.5 seconds. After the discharge period BTOL2 (2.5 to 3.7 seconds in the present embodiment), it passes through the front end of the central flow path B431.
On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453, the ball passes after the first right ball entry period BTIR1 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position. The ball that has passed through the opening B414 passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 after the first right discharge period BTOR1 (2.2 to 2.8 seconds in this embodiment), which is 2.0 seconds later. In this case, since the ball reaches the central flow path B431 before the slide member B450 operates, the load from the slide member B450 does not change the flow velocity of the ball.
Further, when the ball is guided to the right guide plate portion B453, the ball is guided after the second right ball entry period BTIR2 (0.8 seconds to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position. The ball that has passed through the passage opening B414 receives a backward load from the slide member B450, so that the passage period is shortened, and the second right ejection period BTOR2 ( After 2.3 to 3.3 seconds in this embodiment, it passes through the front end of the central flow path B431.
Therefore, when the electric accessory B640a is controlled in the second operation pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the electric accessory B640a is activated at the timing when the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431. Since it is in a non-excited state (a state in which the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position and the tilting member B470 is arranged at the closed position), the ball is not picked up by the tilting member B470. 1416), but is guided to the third winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416).

In this way, in this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the ball (relative to the ball entering the ball late), the load is applied to the ball when the slide member B450 is operated, and the time required for the ball to pass is shortened. As a result, the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 to pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-excited state (when flowing down through the left guide plate portion B452 (about 2.4 seconds in the present embodiment)), the ball moves through the central flow path B431 within the period of the operation pattern of the slide member B450. can be passed from the front end of the
Therefore, the ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 in the state where the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position at the first time (nth time) is passed through the state where the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position, and the second time At the (n+1)th time, the slide member B450 can be passed from the front end of the central flow path B431 in the state where the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position.
That is, the passage of the ball through the ball passage opening B414 and the passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow passage B431 are completed in one set of the n-th state and the n+1-th state in which the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position. can be made
As shown in FIG. 1445(c), in the third operation pattern, the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-excited state (advance position) for the standby time Bt3a (2.0 seconds in this embodiment), and then the operation time A pattern in which the slide member B450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) during Bt3b (2.0 seconds in this embodiment) is set as a reference operation pattern BRP3, and this pattern is repeated.

In detail, as a breakdown of 2.0 seconds constituting the non-excited state, the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner for 0.05 seconds, and after that, the slide member B450 is maintained at the forward position for 1.95 seconds. It is
When the slide member B450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip B451 of the slide member B450. It passes through the opening B414, rolls on the slide member B450, and is guided toward the central flow path B431.
A correspondence relationship between the position and timing at which the ball reaches and the time elapsed until the ball passes the front end of the central flow path B431 will be described. Since it takes about 0.2 seconds to reach BB3 from ball placement BB1, the ball begins to pass through ball passage opening B414 0.2 seconds after slide member B450 is placed in the advanced position.
When the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion B452, the ball passage opening B414 is reached after the third left ball entering period BTIL3 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position. 2.4 seconds later, after the third left discharge period BTOL3 (2.6 to 3.2 seconds in this embodiment), the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431.

Further, when the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion B452, after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position and the fourth left ball entry period BTIL4 (0.8 seconds to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment), the ball The ball that has passed through the passage opening B414 receives a backward load from the slide member B450, shortening the passage period, and reaches the fourth left ejection period BTOL4 ( After 2.7 to 3.9 seconds in this embodiment, it passes through the front end of the central flow path B431.
On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453, the ball passes after the third right ball entry period BTIR3 (0.2 to 1.0 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position. The ball passing through the opening B414 passes through the front end of the central flow path B431 after the third right ejection period BTOR3 (2.2 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment), which is 2.0 seconds later.
Further, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion B453, after the slide member B450 is placed at the forward position and the fourth right ball entry period BTIR4 (1.0 seconds to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment), the ball The ball that has passed through the passage opening B414 receives a backward load from the slide member B450, shortening the passage period, and reaches the fourth right ejection period BTOR4 ( After 2.5 to 3.5 seconds in this embodiment, it passes through the front end of the central flow path B431.
Therefore, when the electric accessory B640a is operated and controlled in the third operation pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening B414, the electric accessory B640a is activated at the timing when the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path B431. Since it is in an excited state (a state in which the slide member B450 is arranged in the retracted position and the tilting member B470 is arranged in the open position), the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470, and the ball enters the second winning hole B640 (Fig. 1416) and is not guided to the third winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416).

In this way, in this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the ball (relative to the ball entering the ball late), the load is applied to the ball when the slide member B450 is operated, and the time required for the ball to pass is shortened. As a result, the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 to pass through the front end of the central flow path B431 when the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-excited state (when flowing down through the left guide plate portion B452 Even in an operation pattern in which the period during which the slide member B450 is maintained at the retracted position is shorter than the time required for the slide member B450 to be maintained at the retracted position (approximately 2.4 seconds in this embodiment), while the slide member B450 is maintained at the retracted position A ball can be passed from the front end of the central channel B431.
Therefore, in the reference operation pattern, when the electric accessory B640a is in the non-excited state, the ball that rides on the slide member B450 arranged in the forward position and flows down toward the central flow path B431 is moved to the open position in the excited state of the electric accessory B640a. It can be picked up by the disposed tilting member B470. That is, passage of the ball through the ball passage opening B414 and passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow path B431 can be completed with the reference operation pattern BRP3.
As described above, the ball guided by the electric accessory B640a passes through different ball entrances corresponding to the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a. First, when the electric accessory B640a is controlled in the first operation pattern, the ball does not pass through the ball passage opening B414, but passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435 or deviates from the opening B435a and falls.
Therefore, there is no support for the special pattern lottery, and since the special pattern lottery is solely due to the ball entering the first winning port B64, the special pattern lottery should be frequently generated without intervals. is difficult. When the ball flowing down the front side of the slide member B450 passes through the opening B435a, the payout of the prize ball occurs, which only provides support for increasing the number of game balls held by the player.

Next, when the operation of the electric accessory B640a is controlled in the second operation pattern, the electric accessory B640a is de-excited at the timing when the ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 passes through the front end of the central flow path B431. , Since the tilting member B470 is arranged at the closed position, the ball flows downward toward the front side of the tilting member B470 toward the third prize winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416).
Therefore, the lottery of the special symbol 1 can be generated frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the third winning hole B64b, a prize ball is paid out, thereby providing support for increasing the number of game balls held by the player.
Next, when the operation of the electric accessory B640a is controlled in the third operation pattern, the electric accessory B640a is excited at the timing when the ball passing through the ball passage opening B414 passes through the front end of the central flow path B431, Since the tilting member B470 is arranged in the open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470 and flows down toward the second winning opening B640 (see FIG. 1416), that is, toward the detection sensor B462 (see E5).
Therefore, the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be generated frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the second winning hole B640, a prize ball is paid out, thereby providing support for increasing the number of game balls held by the player.

Since the third operation pattern can be set from the first operation pattern in this way, even in a design in which the electric accessory B640a is always driven to open and close, the ball may enter the second winning hole B640. , and the case where the ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole B640.
That is, when the drive control of the electric role object B640a is executed in the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, the ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole B640, and the electric role object B640a When the drive control is executed in the third operation pattern, the ball frequently enters the second winning hole B640.
FIG. 1446 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the pending type, the game state, the type of special symbol, and the variation time. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, only the special pattern 2 is illustrated, and the illustration of the special pattern 1 is omitted.
In the special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is set in the same manner in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and when the outlier pattern is determined based on the holding of the special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds or 20 seconds. , and when the jackpot design is determined based on the reservation of the special design 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lottery state of the special symbol 2 is set to either the above-described low probability state or high probability state, and the game progresses so that the variation time is different based on the set game state. do.
As shown in FIG. 1446, in the low probability state (normal state or time saving state in this embodiment), when the off design is determined based on the suspension of the special design 2 or when the small winning design is determined, the fluctuation time is determined in 10 minutes. On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the jackpot design is determined based on the reservation of the special design 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.
The reason why the variable time is set to a long time of 10 minutes is to reduce the profit that the player can obtain when the ball enters the second winning hole B640 in the low probability state. As a result, even if a ball flowing down inside the winning unit B400 accidentally enters the second winning hole B640, the variation of the special symbol 2 is not prolonged unless the game state is shifted to a high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain the profit from the lottery of the special symbol 2.例文帳に追加
In this embodiment, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is allowed up to 4, when the jackpot pattern is determined by the reserved ball of the special symbol 2, the big hit based on the determination is made after 10 to 30 minutes. A situation may occur (variation of special symbols stops).

Therefore, a player who is playing at the timing when the big winning pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 2 and a player who is playing at the timing when the big winning is generated based on the reserved special pattern 2. A different situation or a situation in which no player is playing at the timing of the occurrence of the big win may occur.
In such a case, if a player who is currently playing a game or a player who is playing a game at another pachinko machine nearby suddenly shifts to the special game state at the timing of the occurrence of a big win, the special game suddenly starts. There is a possibility that the player will be surprised at the start and suspect that the game is out of order.
On the other hand, when a big hit is determined, the conditions for shifting to the special game state can be determined. In this embodiment, after the big hit is determined (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped), the ball is passed through the through gates B66 and B67 according to the instructions displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81. It can be shifted to a special game state.
That is, the player is less likely to suspect a malfunction by controlling the system so that the transition to the special game state does not occur until the ball passes through the through gates B66 and B67. It should be noted that the place through which the ball is passed in order to shift to the special game state is not limited to the through gates B66 and B67. You can control it like this.

Also, in the high probability state (probability variable state or special probability variable state in this embodiment), when the off design is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 5 seconds or 20 seconds.
In addition, in the high probability state, when the small winning design is determined based on the holding of the special design 2, the variation time is determined to be 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the high-probability state, when the jackpot design is determined based on the holding of the special design 2, the variation time is determined to be 20 seconds.
In the high-probability state, the fluctuation time is set short when the small winning pattern is determined based on the suspension of the special pattern 2, so the state where the ball frequently enters the second winning hole B640 (this implementation In the form, when the drive control of the electric accessory B640a is executed in the third operation pattern), the player can frequently execute the small winning game and open the specific winning opening B65a, so that the specific winning A prize ball based on the ball entering the mouth B65a can be obtained frequently.
In addition, the setting of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, various variations may be added as the variable time of each symbol, or the length of the variable time may be changed according to the reserved number of special symbols. When the length of the fluctuation time changes according to the number of reserved special symbols, in general, when the number of reserved numbers is small, compared to when the number of reserved numbers is large (when the tank is almost full), It is set so that the fluctuation time is long.

This embodiment solves the problem that the player is unexpectedly profited by shooting the ball at inappropriate timing so as to win the lottery of the special pattern 2, as seen in the conventional model. be able to.
That is, even in the conventional model, the state where the frequency of entering the first ball entrance related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 is high as in this embodiment, and the state of entering the second ball entrance related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 There was an example of a configuration that allows switching between a state in which the frequency of ball entry is high.
However, when the number of installed electric accessories B640a is limited to one, the electric accessories B640a are installed so as to accompany either the first entrance or the second entrance, and the other entrance. It is assumed that the electric accessary B640a is not installed in , and that the ball can be entered at all times.
In this case, when the efficiency of the other ball entrance is higher than that of the other ball entrance located in the center of the game board B13 (equivalent to the first winning entrance B64, see FIG. 1416), In cases such as when the player's profit is extremely high when a player wins a jackpot by entering a ball into the ball entrance, the game provided by the pachinko machine B10 should allow the ball to enter one of the ball entrances. Even if the timing is announced, there is a possibility that the player will shoot the ball toward the other ball entrance.

Even if a countermeasure is taken to reduce the efficiency of digestion of the fluctuation based on the ball entering the other ball entrance by making the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 in the low probability state super long, the number of reserved special symbols 2 First, when the variation based on the suspension of the special symbol 1 is started, the game is advanced in which the ball is entered into the other ball entrance in advance, the special symbol 2 is changed, and the ball is entered into the one entrance. If the variation time of the special symbol 2 can be digested while playing the game provided by the pachinko machine B10, the deterrent power can be said to be low.
As a game provided by the pachinko machine B10, even if the timing is such that the ball should enter one of the ball entrances, if the ball enters the other ball entrance and results in a big win, the state shifts to a special game state, and pachinko is performed. If the game provided by the machine B10 gives the player a profit not intended, there is a problem in the fairness of the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory B640a (slide member B450 and tilting member B470) driven by a single solenoid BSOL41 operates the first entrance (third winning entrance) related to the special symbol 1 lottery. (equivalent to B64b)) (state in which the electric accessory B640a is driven and controlled in the second operation pattern), the second ball entrance related to the special symbol 2 lottery (second 2 winning opening B640) can be lowered, while the state of supporting to increase the frequency of entering the second ball opening related to the lottery of special symbol 2 (Electric Accessory B640a In the state where the drive is controlled by the third operation pattern), the frequency of entering the ball into the first ball entrance related to the special symbol 1 lottery can be reduced.
Furthermore, the frequency of entering the ball into the first ball entrance (equivalent to the third winning hole B64b) related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 is also the second ball entrance related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 (corresponding to the second winning hole B640). ) is also lowered (state in which the electric accessory B640a is driven and controlled in the first operation pattern).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a profit not intended for the game provided by the pachinko machine B10, thereby improving the fairness of the game.
Figures 1447 to 1449 are cross-sectional views of the slide member B450, tilting member B470 and transmission member B480 taken along line MDXXXIV-MDXXXIV in Figure 1437(a). 1447 to 1449 show the switching operation from the non-excited state to the excited state of the electric accessory B640a in chronological order. A state in which the slide portion 450 is maintained at the forward position while the first member B481 rises is illustrated, and FIG. 1449 illustrates an excited state of the electric accessory B640a. 1447 to 1449, the outer shape of the plate member B410 is shown in imaginary lines as a reference for placement.
As shown in FIGS. 1447 to 1449, in the switching operation of the electric accessory B640a from the non-excited state to the excited state, there is a lag between the operation timing of the slide member B450 and the operation timing of the tilting member B470.
That is, only the tilting member B470 operates from the start of operation to the intermediate position (see FIGS. 1447 and 1448), and the tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 operate from the intermediate position (see FIGS. 1448 and 1449). At this time, the operation end timings of the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470 are substantially the same (see FIG. 1449).

Details are provided below. Since the first member B481 operates integrally with the plunger BSOL41a (see FIG. 1425) of the solenoid BSOL41, it moves up and down in synchronization with the drive timing of the solenoid BSOL41.
On the other hand, in the configuration in which the driving force is transmitted from the first member B481 to the second member B485 via a pair of transmission plate portions B482 formed at the rear end portion of the first member B481, the electric function B640a In the excited state, the upper plate portion B482a is in contact with the eccentric protrusion B486 of the second member B485, while a gap is secured between the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486.
The second member B485 is supported so as to be rotatable around the rotating shaft portion B485a, and is locked to the locking plate portion B431b via the slide member B450 (see FIG. 1432), thereby allowing the non-excited state ( (see FIG. 1447) is configured to be the end position of the displacement in the forward rolling direction.
In the process in which the first member B481 rises from the non-excited state, the posture of the second member B485 and the arrangement of the slide member B450 are maintained until the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486 come into contact with each other, and the tilting member B470 only tilts. That is, the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilting member B470.

In the process in which the first member B481 rises, after the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486 come into contact with each other, the second member B485 rotates the rotating shaft portion B485a in such a manner that the eccentric protrusion B486 is lifted by the lower plate portion B482b. rotates in the direction of backward rotation.
In this way, when switching the electric accessory B640a from the excited state to the non-excited state while using the driving force of the same solenoid BSOL41 (see FIG. 1425), the timing at which the tilting member B470 requires the driving force, The timing at which the driving force is required for the slide member B450 is shifted.
In particular, after the driving force transmission to the slide member B450 is started (see FIG. 1448), the transmitted portion B474 of the tilting member B470 is retracted from above the first member B481. The operation is left to its own weight, and the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 is used to move the slide member B450.
Further, as described above, in the switching operation from the non-excited state to the excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the tilting operation of the tilting member B470 is started in advance, so that the tilting member The tilting motion of the B470 can be initiated.

Therefore, even if a ball is placed on the slide member B450, it is possible to prevent the tilting member B470 from being delayed due to the weight of the ball. By arranging it at the position, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the start timing of the period in which the ball is guided toward the second winning hole B640 deviates from the control.
Further, when the tilting member B470 starts to be displaced, the ball is placed on the front side, and even if the ball is sandwiched between the tilting member B470 and the front design member B420 (see FIG. 1432), the slide member B450 Since the driving force is transmitted to the tilting member B470 without the driving force being allocated to the B470, it is possible to generate sufficient force to dislodge the ball downward. Therefore, the state in which the ball is caught between the tilting member B470 and the front design member B420 can be quickly resolved.
On the other hand, when the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 (see FIG. 1426) is transmitted to the slide member B450 (see FIGS. 1448 and 1449), the driving force allocated to the tilting member B470 is extremely small, and the driving force is transferred to the slide member B450. Therefore, when a ball is placed on the slide member B450, the rearward load applied to the ball via the slide member B450 can be ensured.
In this embodiment, the path of the ball flowing down toward the tilting member B470 is surrounded by the plate member B410 and the front design member B420 so that the ball does not deviate from the tilting member B470 (see FIG. 1435). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1448, even before the tilting member B470 is fully opened, the tilting member B470 is displaced (pushed down) to the open position by applying the weight of the ball to the tilting member B470. Therefore, the ball can be easily picked up by the tilting member B470.

Also in the switching operation from the excited state to the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a (the operation returning from FIG. 1449 to FIG. 1447), there is a deviation between the operation timing of the slide member B450 and the operation timing of the tilting member B470.
That is, from the start of the operation (see FIG. 1449) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 1448), the transmitted portion B474 of the tilting member B470 is pushed down by the first member B481 of the transmission member B480, and the lower plate portion B482b of the first member B481. The tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 are operated together by pushing down the locking projecting portion B487 of the second member B485. On the other hand, since the slide member B450 has already reached the forward position at the intermediate position (see FIG. 1448), only the tilting member B470 is operated from the intermediate position.
Thereby, in the switching operation of the electric accessory B640a from the excited state to the non-excited state, the slide member B450 can be arranged at the forward position before the operation of the tilting member B470 is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to ride on the tip portion B451 (the period in which the ball is picked up by the tip portion B451 can be extended as much as possible), and it is possible to make it easier for the ball to be picked up by the tilting member B470 (tilting The period of time until member B470 reaches the closed position can be lengthened).
Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion B455 is not formed on the lower side of the tip B451 of the slide member B450, so that the tip B451 is allowed to elastically deform in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the switching operation from the excited state (see FIG. 1449) to the non-excited state (see FIG. 1447), the ball is caught between the slide member B450 and the front design member B420 (see FIG. 1434), and the slide member B450 is displaced. Even if a situation occurs in which the movement of the tilting member B450 can be suppressed, the forward displacement of the sliding member B450 can be continued by elastically deforming the tip portion B451. can be avoided, and the rising operation of the tilting member B470 can be reliably completed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the tilting member B470 requires driving force when switching the electric accessory B640a from the non-excited state to the excited state while using the driving force of the same solenoid BSOL41 (see FIG. 1425). and the timing at which the driving force is required for the slide member B450 are shifted.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory B640a is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the operation of the tilting member B470 is started first, and then the operation of the slide member B450 is started. , the tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 are set so that the operation end timings are substantially the same.
Load transmission from the slide member B450 side will be described. As shown in FIG. 1447, the lower end of the second member B485 (the portion below the rotating shaft portion B485a) is formed with a locking projecting portion B487 protruding along the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion B485a.
The locking projecting portion B487 is arranged so as to abut on the lower plate portion B482b of the first member B481 in the front-rear direction. The frictional force generated in this contact portion can suppress the unintended rise (floating) of the first member B481 in the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, thereby facilitating the maintenance of the tilting member B470 at the closed position. can be done.

Furthermore, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the slide member B450 is moved backward, and a load (backward load) is applied to the slide member B450 in a direction to rotate and displace the second member B485 in the backward rotation direction. Even if the lower plate portion B482b is arranged in the movement direction of the locking projecting portion B487, the rotational displacement of the second member B485 is stopped, and the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 is also prevented. be stopped.
In this case, the direction of movement of the locking projecting portion B487 (the direction along the circle centered on the rotating shaft portion B485a) and the direction of movement (vertical direction) of the first member B481 intersect (perpendicularly). , the first member B481 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted through the locking projecting portion B487. As a result, in the non-excited state, the slide member B450 can be easily prevented from being displaced backward unexpectedly.
As a result, for example, a thin metal wire (piano wire, wire, etc.) is illegally entered into the game area from the outside of the pachinko machine B10 (see FIG. 1415), and a load is applied to the slide member B450 through the thin metal wire, This can be used as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts that change the arrangement of the electric accessory B640a.
In particular, countermeasures can be taken for the slide member B450, which protrudes from the front side of the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416) in the non-excited state and is likely to be easily subjected to load by a person who commits fraudulent acts. , it is possible to suppress the continuation of fraudulent acts.

1450 is a cross-sectional view of the plate member B410, the base plate B437, the slide member B450, the tilting member B470 and the transmission member B480 taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX of FIG. 1429(c). In FIG. 1450, illustration of an unnecessary configuration of the winning unit B400 is omitted for facilitating understanding of the structure. A state in which the operation of the tilting member B470 is temporarily stopped due to the ball being caught between the tilting member B437e is illustrated.
As described above, the motions of the tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 are interlocked through the transmission member B480. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1450, when a ball is caught between the tilting member B470 and the tilting surface portion B437e (ball biting occurs), the forward movement of the slide member B450 is suppressed. Balls flowing down the front side of the ball passage opening B414 (see FIG. 1430) of B410 are configured to be less likely to be picked up by the slide member B450.
Therefore, when a ball is caught between the tilting member B470 and the inclined surface portion B437e (a ball is jammed), it is easy to avoid a situation in which an unexpectedly large amount of balls stay inside the winning unit B400. can do.
As a result, when a ball is caught between the tilting member B470 and the tilting surface portion B437e, the ball is picked up by the slide member B450 one after another, and the ball flows down toward the tilting member B470 side one after another. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball sandwiched between the B470 and the inclined surface portion B437e is overlapped with the following ball one after another, causing malfunction of the tilting member B470.

Returning to FIG. 1416, description will be made. In this embodiment, the upper variable prize winning device B700 is arranged at the substantially central position of the left-right width of the game area so as to constitute the upper part of the center frame B86. A part of the balls hit along the rails B61 and B62 reaches the upper variable winning device B700 while colliding with the nail.
Figures 1451(a) and 1451(b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device B700 in range MDXXXVIIIa of Figure 1416 . FIG. 1451(a) shows the closed state of the upper variable winning device B700, and FIG. 1451(b) shows the open state of the upper variable winning device B700.
The upper variable winning device B700 is fastened and fixed to the base plate B60 so as to close the opening drilled in the base plate B60 in the front-rear direction, and constitutes a path for the ball to flow down with the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1415). A base plate member B710, a movable upper cover member B730 that is slidable in the front-rear direction through an inverted V-shaped opening B711 drilled in the upper part of the base plate member B710 in the front-rear direction, and the movable upper cover member B730. A detection sensor formed with a second specific winning opening B700a configured so that a game ball that has passed through the front side of the can pass (winning), and a rectangular opening drilled in the front-back direction on the lower side of the base plate member B710 A moving floor member B740 that can slide in the front-rear direction through B712, and an opening B751 through which the ball can pass are arranged on the front side of the base plate member B710, and the ball flows down the front side of the base plate member B710. and a plurality of detection sensors B750 configured to detect passage.
In addition, the game ball that has passed through the front side of the moving floor member B740 is an intermediate rail member that is formed in a curved shape with a strip-shaped metal plate like the inner rail B61 and the outer rail B62 and is planted on the front side of the base plate B60. Received by B781.

A ball extraction opening B782 is formed in the base plate B60 at the rear position of the lowermost end of the intermediate rail member B781. The ball received by the intermediate rail member B781 passes through the ball removal opening B782 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).
The upper variable winning device B700 is arranged so as to form a game area with the glass unit B16 arranged on the front side. Since the glass unit B16 is transparent, the player can visually recognize the second specific winning opening B700a and the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 when viewed from the front.
In addition, on the back side of the glass unit B16, a resin plate member having a size that overlaps the second specific prize winning opening B700a and the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 in a front view is arranged, and the resin plate member and the base plate member B710 are arranged. You may comprise so that a ball may flow down between. In this case, the visibility of the game ball can be varied depending on whether a permeable member or an impermeable member is adopted as the resin plate member. For example, when an impermeable member is employed, the upper variable prize winning device B700 can be configured such that passage of the ball to the specific prize winning port 700a or the opening B751 is difficult to see.
The base plate member B710 includes an inverted V-shaped opening B711 having a narrow width in which the left and right ends are close to the left and right central ends of the center frame B86 on the upper side, and an inverted V-shaped opening B711 on the lower side. A rectangular opening B712 drilled in a long rectangular shape, and a plate-shaped part extending to the front side below the inverted V-shaped opening B711 and inclined downward toward the second specific winning opening B700a side A pair of left and right inclined rolling plate portions B713, and a plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side at a position below the inclined plate portion 713 and on the left and right outside of the detection sensor B750 toward the detection sensor B750 side A pair of left and right inclined outer wall plate portions B714 that are inclined downward, and a pair of extending to the front side with a space that can receive the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening B700a below the second specific winning opening B700a. A pair of left and right storage plate portions B715, which are plate-shaped portions and whose lower ends are arranged close to the rectangular opening B712, and a U-shape with a left and right width that can receive inside the ball that has passed through the opening B751 below the detection sensor B750. A pair of left and right receiving portions B716 extending to the front side in shape, and a pair of left and right discharges for discharging the ball received in the receiving portion B716 to the back side by drilling in the front and back direction in the shape inside the receiving portion B716. and an opening B717.

The inclined rolling plate portion B713, the inclined outer wall plate portion B714, the storage plate portion B715, and the receiving portion B716 are extended to a sufficient position to prevent the balls from falling between them and the glass unit B16. That is, when viewed from the front, the ball flows down along the shape without penetrating the inclined rolling plate portion B713, the inclined outer wall plate portion B714, the storage plate portion B715, and the receiving portion B716.
The inclined outer wall plate portion B714 forms a gap between the inclined rolling plate portion B713 on the upper side of the detection sensor B750 and into which a ball can enter. As a result, the ball that deviates to the left and right outside above the detection sensor B750 can be guided toward the detection sensor B750 along the slope.
The storage plate portion B715 is arranged at a position that is the same distance left and right from the center axis of the second specific winning hole B700a. That is, the central axis of the second specific winning hole B700a is arranged on a plane parallel to the left and right side surfaces of the storage plate portion B715 and located at an intermediate position between the pair of storage plate portions B715. This makes it easier for the ball entering the second specific winning hole B700a to flow into the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715.
The movable upper lid member B730 has a plate portion B731 that is bent in an inverted V shape in a front view that slopes down toward the left and right outside, and the plate portion B731 is on the front side of the base plate B60 when the upper variable winning device B700 is closed. The ball on the overhanging and moving upper lid member B730 is swept to the left and right outside along the inclination of the plate portion B731.

When the upper variable winning device B700 is switched to the open state, the plate portion B731 is retracted behind the front end surface of the base plate B60, and the ball riding on the plate portion B731 falls toward the inclined rolling plate portion B713. do.
At this time, in the closed state of the upper variable winning device B700, the ball flowing down along the inclination of the plate portion B731 has a speed directed to the left and right outer sides, so that the left and right outer portions of the inclined rolling plate portion B713 Easy to land. After that, it flows along the inclination toward the left and right inner sides of the inclined rolling plate portion B713, and passes through the second specific winning opening B700a.
That is, the flow direction of the ball flowing on the upper surface of the plate portion B731 is easier to detour than the direction toward the second specific winning opening B700a at the shortest distance, and the time until the ball passes through the second specific winning opening B700a can be prolonged.
Since the movable upper lid member B730 is inclined to both the left and right sides, the above effect of prolonging the time until the ball passes through the second specific prize winning opening B700a can be produced in multiple paths, so that the ball can flow down. By slowing down, it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the flow of the ball.

In other words, it is easy to keep the ball flowing down smoothly while prolonging the time it takes for the ball to pass through. That is, it is possible to promote the launch of the ball.
Furthermore, by prolonging the time until the balls pass through, even when a plurality of balls are arranged near the upper side of the second specific winning hole B700a, they always pass through the second specific winning hole B700a. Therefore, the player can avoid losing sight of the ball that has passed through the front side of the moving upper cover member B730 by keeping the second specific winning hole B700a in the field of view.
In addition, the vertical interval between the plate portion B731 and the inclined rolling plate portion B713 is configured to be the longest on the left-right center side and shorten toward the left-right outer side. Further, the vertical distance between the left and right outer ends is less than the diameter of the sphere.
Therefore, for example, when the ball is on the left and right outer ends of the inclined rolling plate portion B713, the plate portion B731 of the movable upper lid member B730 slides to the front side by switching the upper variable winning device B700 to the closed state. When it moves, a load is generated from the plate portion B731 in the direction of pushing the ball inward and to the left.

As a result, the ball passing through the front side of the plate portion B731 can be prevented from staying at the left and right outer end portions of the inclined rolling plate portion B713, and the period until the ball reaches the second specific winning hole B700a Excessive length can be avoided.
The movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are synchronously operated in the front-rear opposite directions by the driving force of a solenoid B763, which will be described later. In FIGS. 1451(a) and 1451(b), the outer shapes of the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are such that when the gap between the glass unit B16 and the glass unit B16 is sufficiently short as to prevent the ball from passing through, is shown with a solid line, and if the gap between the glass unit B16 and the glass unit B16 is long enough for a ball to pass through, it is shown with an imaginary line.
That is, in the closed state of the upper variable winning device B700, the moving floor member B740 is retracted to the rear side, and the ball can be discharged below the storage plate portion B715 (see FIG. 1451 (a)), and the upper variable winning device B700 1451(b), the moving floor member B740 projects forward, and the ball cannot be discharged downward from the storage plate portion B715 (see FIG. 1451(b)).
When the ball flowing down the front side of the movable upper lid member B730 in the open state of the upper variable winning device B700 is detected to pass through the second specific winning opening B700a, the winning ball is paid out, while the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 , functions as a specific area for changing the game state with the entry of a ball as a trigger. That is, on the condition that the ball has passed through the opening B751 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to be in a high probability state, which will be described later in detail.

FIGS. 1452(a) to 1452(c) are enlarged front views of upper variable winning device B700 in area MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1416. FIGS. Figures 1452(a) to 1452(c) show an example of the manner in which a ball enters the upper variable winning device B700 in chronological order.
In FIGS. 1452(a) to 1452(c), the outlines of the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are illustrated with solid lines and imaginary lines. The meaning is the same as that shown in FIG. 1451(b).
As shown in FIG. 1452(a), in the open state of the upper variable winning device B700, the ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member B730 rolls on the inclined rolling plate portion B713 and passes through the second specific winning opening B700a. Or, for example, a ball that falls from directly above the second specific winning opening B700a directly flows into the second specific winning opening B700a without going through the inclined rolling plate portion B713.
Balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening B700a are stored in order in a region formed by a storage plate portion B715 and a moving floor member B740 as shown in FIG. 1452(b). Then, when the ball is filled to the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion B715 (with the fourth ball BP1 passing through the second specific winning hole B700a placed near the upper end of the storage plate portion B715), The ball BP2, which has passed through the second special winning hole B700a following the ball BP1, cannot enter the gap between the storage plate portions B715, and flows left and right to pass through the opening portion B751 (Fig. 1452 (c )reference).

That is, when the storage plate portion B715 is filled with spheres up to the vicinity of the upper end portion, the spheres that reach the vicinity of the upper end portion of the storage plate portion B715 after it are not the balls arranged inside the storage plate portion B715, but are opened. Pass through part B751.
According to the example shown in FIG. 1452, if more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions B715 (4 in this embodiment) pass through the second specific winning opening B700a. For example, the ball passes through the opening B751.
FIGS. 1453(a) to 1453(c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device B700 in range MDXXXVIIIa of FIG. 1416. FIGS. Figures 1453(a) to 1453(c) show an example of the manner in which a ball enters the upper variable winning device B700 in chronological order.
In FIGS. 1453(a) to 1453(c), the outlines of the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are illustrated with solid lines and imaginary lines. The meaning is the same as that shown in FIG. 1451(b).

As shown in FIG. 1453(a), in the open state of the upper variable winning device B700, the state in which the balls are stored in the area formed by the storage plate portion B715 and the moving floor member B740 is maintained, and the moving upper lid member The ball passing through the front side of B730 rolls on the inclined rolling plate portion B713 and passes through the second specific winning opening B700a, or for example, the ball that falls from directly above the second specific winning opening B700a is inclined. It directly flows into the second specific winning opening B700a without going through the rolling plate portion B713.
The state shown in FIG. 1453(a) is similar to the state shown in FIG. BP1 is flowing down.
In this state, when the upper variable winning device B700 is switched to the closed state, the moving floor member B740 retreats backward, and the balls stored in the area between the storage plate portions B715 are discharged in order from the bottom (Fig. 1453(b)).
Figures 1453(b) and 1453(c) show a state in which only one ball is ejected. If it is a short time, a part of the ball will be ejected, and if it is a long time, the whole ball will be ejected.

Since the balls are ejected from the area between the storage plate portions B715, the fourth ball BP1 that has passed through the second specific winning port B700a is one ball ( 1453(c), the ball BP2, which has passed through the second specific winning hole B700a following the ball BP1, also enters the area between the storage plates 715. As a result, the ball BP2 is arranged near the upper end of the storage plate portion B715.
From the state shown in FIG. 1453(c), the ball that has passed through the second specific winning hole B700a after following the ball BP2 cannot enter the gap between the storage plates B715, and flows left and right to open. Pass through part B751.
That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 1453, more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions B715 (4 in this embodiment) enter the second specific winning hole B700a. Even if the ball does pass, it does not necessarily pass through the opening B751.
Whether or not the ball passes through the opening B751 is determined until the chasing ball BP2 passes through the second specific winning opening B700a and reaches near the upper end of the storage plate B715. It depends on whether the state in which the sphere BP1 is arranged (see FIG. 1452(c)) is maintained.

Balls are ejected from the storage plate portion B715 at the timing when the movable upper cover member B730 is closed (see FIG. 1453(b)), and the number of ejected balls is related to the length of the opening/closing operation. The more frequently the opening/closing operation of the member B730 occurs and the longer the time period during which the movable upper lid member B730 is closed, the more the ball BP1 is placed near the upper end of the storage plate portion B715 (Fig. 1452(c)). )) is difficult to maintain, making it difficult for the sphere to pass through the opening B751. Details of the operation control of the movable upper lid member B730 will be described later.
Figures 1454(a) to 1454(c) are cross-sectional views of the moving top cover member B730 and the moving floor member B740 taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in Figure 1451(a). In FIGS. 1454(a) to 1454(c), the front and rear end surfaces of the base plate B60 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the state in which the upper variable winning device B700 is switched from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in chronological order. be. In FIGS. 1454(a) to 1454(c), the drive transmission device B760 is shown not as a cross-sectional view but as a side view viewed from the right for easy understanding.
The drive transmission device B760 includes a first member B761 pivotally supported by a rotating shaft BJ1 fixedly arranged at a position closer to the rear side of the base plate B60, and a rotating shaft fixedly arranged at a position closer to the front side of the base plate B60. A second member B762 pivotally supported by BJ2, a solenoid B763 configured such that the plunger B763a can be vertically slidable by an electromagnetic force, and a plunger B763a of the solenoid B763 is fitted to slide the plunger B763a. and a transmission member B764 that slides vertically in synchronization with.
In the closed state of the upper variable winning device B700 (see FIG. 1454(a)), the first member B761 is in a forward tilted posture and is supported by the lower support portion (not shown) on the side of the base member 60, and the movable upper cover member B730 is in the forward position. , the second member B762 is supported in a backward posture by a lower support portion (not shown) on the side of the base member 60, and the movable floor member B740 is arranged in the retracted position.

In the open state of the upper variable prize winning device B700 (see FIG. 1454(c)), the first member B761 is in the backward posture, the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged in the backward position, and the second member B762 is in the forward posture. , the moving floor member B740 is arranged at the forward position.
The first member B761 has a projecting portion B761a with a circular cross-section projecting rightward from the right side surface, and the transmission member B764 is located on the projecting portion B761a side (this embodiment) so as to be positioned below the projecting portion B761a. In the form, a rearwardly extending portion B764a that extends to the rear side), and a bending extension that extends to the projecting portion B761a side in parallel with the rearwardly extending portion B764a above the rearwardly extending portion B764a and is bent at the tip end. and a setting portion B764b.
The second member B762 has a projecting portion B762a with a circular cross-section projecting rightward from the right side surface, and the transmission member B764 is positioned above the projecting portion B762a on the side of the projecting portion B762a (in the present embodiment). In the form, a rearwardly extending portion B764c that extends to the rear side), and a bent portion that extends toward the protruding portion B762a side parallel to the rearwardly extending portion B764c below the rearwardly extending portion B764c and is bent at the tip end and an extending portion B764d.
The solenoid B763 is configured to pull up the plunger B763a when an electromagnetic force is generated (excited state). is lowered to

Interlocking between the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1454(a), when the solenoid B763 is in a non-excited state, the plunger B763a is arranged at the lower end position, so that the transmission member B764 of the drive transmission device B760 is arranged at the lower end position. .
When the solenoid B763 is energized, the transmission member B764 is slid upward. The member B762 begins to rotate forward (see FIG. 1454(b)).
During this time, the rearwardly extending portion B764a is similarly slid upward, but only the gap between the rearwardly extending portion B764a and the projecting portion B761a is filled, and the projecting portion B761a receives the load from the rearwardly extending portion B764a. Not given. That is, the first member B761 still maintains the forward tilted posture.
When the transmission member B764 further slides upward from the state of FIG. It changes to a lying posture (see FIG. 1454(c)).

In the present embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member B764 until the first member B761 reaches the backward tilted posture from the forward tilted posture and the second member B762 reaches the forward tilted posture from the backward tilted posture The amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member B764 is the same as that of the transmission member B764.
Therefore, the second member B762 assumes the forward tilted posture before the first member B761 assumes the backward tilted posture. In the present embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension portion B764d is set to a length that does not exceed the front end portion of the projecting portion B762a in the forward tilted posture of the second member B762. This prevents an upward load from being applied to the second member B762 from the bent and extended portion B764d after the second member B762 is in the forward tilted posture.
Furthermore, the rear surface of the portion extending downward on the rear end side of the bent and extended portion B764d abuts on the projecting portion B762a to restrict the oblique forward and downward displacement, thereby preventing the second member B762 from rotating in the backward rotation direction. prevents movement.
In this case, the load applied to the transmission member B764 from the projecting portion B762a is mainly a load in the front-rear direction. can be made easier, and the arrangement of the transmission member B764 can be made easier to maintain.

As shown in FIGS. 1454(a) to 1454(c), the switching operation of the upper variable winning device B700 from the closed state to the open state is not performed by the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 simultaneously. , there is a time difference in operation timing.
That is, the moving floor member B740 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the moving upper cover member B730 starts moving toward the retracted position. As a result, even if the ball passes through the front side of the movable upper lid member B730 immediately after the movable upper lid member B730 is displaced to the retracted position, the movable floor member B740 can already be arranged at the advanced position at that time. can.
As a result, the movable floor member B740 is not placed in the forward position until the ball that has passed through the front side of the movable upper lid member B730 passes through, and the ball passes through the front side of the movable floor member B740, resulting in a gap between the storage plate portions B715. It is possible to avoid the situation where the ball is not stored.
In addition to this, in this embodiment, due to the shape of the movable upper lid member B730, the period until the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate portion B731 passes through the second specific winning hole B700a is designed to be long. Also from this, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball is not stored between the storage plate portions B715.

Figures 1455(a) to 1455(c) are cross-sectional views of the moving top lid member B730 and the moving floor member B740 taken along line MDXLIa-MDXLIa in Figure 1451(a). In Figures 1455(a) to 1455(c), the front and rear end surfaces of the base plate B60 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the manner in which the upper variable winning device B700 is switched from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order. be. In FIGS. 1455(a) to 1455(c), the drive transmission device B760 is shown not as a sectional view but as a side view viewed from the right for easy understanding.
Interlocking between the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1455(a), when the solenoid B763 is energized and the plunger B763a is positioned at the upper end position, the transmission member B764 of the drive transmission device B760 is positioned at the upper end position.
When the solenoid B763 is de-energized, the plunger B763a is moved downward by the biasing force and gravity of the coil spring provided in the solenoid B763, and the transmission member B764 is slid downward. First, the first member B761 begins to rotate forward in such a manner that the protruding portion B761a is pushed down on the lower surface of the bent and extended portion B764b (see FIG. 1455(b)).
During this time, the rearwardly extending portion B764c is similarly slid downward, but only the gap between the rearwardly extending portion B764c and the projecting portion B762a is filled, and the projecting portion B762a receives the load from the rearwardly extending portion B764c. Not given. That is, the second member B762 still maintains the forward tilted posture.

When the transmission member B764 further slides downward from the state of FIG. It changes to a lying posture (see FIG. 1455(c)).
In the present embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member B764 until the first member B761 reaches the forward tilted posture from the backward tilted posture and the second member B762 reaches the backward tilted posture from the forward tilted posture The amount of vertical displacement required for the transmission member B764 is the same as that of the transmission member B764.
Therefore, the first member B761 assumes the forward tilted posture before the second member B762 assumes the backward tilted posture. In the present embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension portion B764b is set to a length that does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion B761a in the forward tilted posture of the first member B761. This prevents a downward load from being applied to the first member B761 from the bent and extended portion B764b after the is in the forward tilted posture.
Furthermore, the rear surface of the upwardly extending portion on the rear end side of the bent and extended portion B764b abuts against the projecting portion B761a, thereby restricting the oblique forward and upward displacement, thereby preventing the first member B761 from rotating in the backward rotation direction. prevents movement.

In this case, since the load applied to the transmission member B764 from the projecting portion B761a is mainly a load in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member B764 from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the projecting portion B761a. can be made easier, and the arrangement of the transmission member B764 can be made easier to maintain.
As shown in FIGS. 1455(a) to 1455(c), the switching operation from the open state to the closed state of the upper variable prize winning device B700 is not performed simultaneously by the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740. , there is a time difference in operation timing.
That is, the movable upper lid member B730 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the moving floor member B740 starts moving toward the retracted position. As a result, the ball that triggers the closing of the moving upper lid member B730 (for example, the ball that passes through the second specific winning port B700a in the specified number) until the ball reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion B715 You can extend the time.
That is, the movable floor member B740 is moved to the retracted position, and the time until the ball starts to be discharged from the storage plate portion B715 can be extended. It is possible to increase the possibility of passing through part B751.

In particular, the ball that triggers the closing of the movable upper lid member B730 passes through the front side of the plate portion B731, so it is not affected by the inclination of the plate portion B731 and flows down while maintaining a left-right inward velocity. There are many. Therefore, the period until reaching the second specific winning hole B700a can be shortened. can raise the expectations of
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the short distance from the second specific winning opening B700a to the detection sensor B750, since the vicinity of the upper end portion of the storage plate portion B715 is arranged directly below the second specific winning opening B700a, As long as the ball passes through the second specific winning hole B700a, it can be made to think that the ball may pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750, and the player's sense of expectation can be raised.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1456, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening B700a opened in the first round in the jackpot game of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of FIG. 1456, FIGS. 1416, 1418, and 1451 to 1455 are referred to as appropriate.
FIG. 1456(a) is a diagram showing the timing change of the second specific winning opening B700a in the first special operation pattern, and FIG. 1456(b) shows the second specific winning opening B700a in the second special operation pattern. FIG. 1456(c) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the second specific winning opening B700a in the third special operation pattern.

When the MPUB 201 (see FIG. 1418) determines the jackpot, it starts controlling the jackpot game of the determined type after the end of the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect). Operation control of the moving upper lid member B730 and the moving floor member B740 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.
In FIGS. 1456(a) to 1456(c), "upper open/closed" means a state in which the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the retracted position and the movable floor member B740 is arranged at the advanced position. , Up-closed-down-opened means that the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the advanced position and the movable floor member B740 is arranged at the retreated position. In this embodiment, as described above, the displacement timing of the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 is shifted. It is illustrated simply.
First, the case where the operation of the first special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPUB 201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 operate based on the first special operation pattern. When the jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPUB 201 moves the upper cover member until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time BOP1 (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. The solenoid B763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the B730 at the forward position, and after the opening time BOP1 has passed, the round game R of the first round is started.
That is, the solenoid B763 is driven to open the second specific winning opening B700a by starting to measure the first operating time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the movable upper lid member B730 from the forward position to the backward position. By controlling, the moving upper lid member B730 is made to operate for a long time.

Then, in the first round round game R, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time BT1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls Winning) is satisfied, the solenoid B763 is drive-controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member B730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening B700a, and the round game R of the first round ends.
In the first special operation pattern, the state in which the moving floor member B740 is arranged in the forward position is always continued in the round game R of the first round, so as described above with reference to FIG. in the process of passing through the second specific winning port B700a, the number of balls larger than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions B715 (4 in this embodiment) is placed on the storage plate portion B715 side It can flow down towards Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the ball to pass through the opening B751.
When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid B763 so as to hold the moving upper cover member B730 at the forward position until the first interval time BInt1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, After the first inter-round interval time BInt1 elapses, the round game R of the second round is started.
The inter-round first interval time BInt1 is set as a sufficient time for the ball that passed the front side of the movable upper lid member B730 just before the movable upper lid member B730 is displaced to the forward position to pass the front side of the movable floor member B740. In this embodiment, it is about 2 seconds.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the specific winning opening B65a is opened. Then, in the round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time BT1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, a specific winning opening B65a is closed, and the round game R of the second round ends.
Thereafter, similarly, the round game R from the 3rd round to the maximum 15th round is repeated with the inter-round first interval time BInt1 interposed between each round game R, and the specific winning hole B65a is opened and closed.
When the final round game R ends, the timer means keeps the specific winning opening B65a closed until the inter-round first interval time BInt1 and the ending time ED (for example, 11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the passage of.
Next, the case where the operation of the second special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPUB 201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 operate based on the second special operation pattern. When the jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPUB 201 moves the upper cover member until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time BOP1 (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. The solenoid B763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the B730 at the forward position, and after the opening time BOP1 has passed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the solenoid B763 is driven to open the second specific winning opening B700a by starting to measure the first operating time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the movable upper lid member B730 from the forward position to the backward position. By controlling, the moving upper lid member B730 is made to operate for a long time.
Then, in the first round round game R, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time BT1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls Winning) is satisfied, the solenoid B763 is drive-controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member B730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening B700a, and the round game R of the first round ends.
In the second special operation pattern, in the first round round game R, the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the retreat position and the movable floor member B740 is arranged at the advanced position, and the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the advanced position. The state in which the movable floor member B740 is arranged and the movable floor member B740 is arranged in the retracted position is switched about every one second.
In other words, the ball can be guided to the side of the second specific winning hole B700a and can be stored in the position between the storage plate parts B715, and the guidance of the ball to the side of the second specific winning hole B700a is restricted. At the same time, the state in which the ball stored in the position between the storage plate portions B715 is discharged is switched about every second.

In this embodiment, each ball is discharged from the position between the storage plate portions B715 in about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, while the moving floor member B740 is in the retracted position for about one second, a maximum of five balls can flow down the front side of the moving floor member B740 from the positions between the storage plate portions B715. Considering the ball shooting interval (in this embodiment, 0.6 second interval) allowed for the pachinko machine B10, the movable upper lid member B730 is positioned at the retracted position for about 1 second. The number of spheres passing in front of is about three at most.
Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 1453, in the process of allowing the specified number of balls to pass through the second specific prize winning opening B700a, a state is formed in which the balls stored in the gap between the storage plate portions B715 can be discharged. be done. On top of that, the number of balls that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plate portions B715 is greater than the number of balls that can be guided to the side of the gap between the storage plate portions B715 per unit time (about 1 second). , a state in which more balls than the maximum number of balls (four in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate portions B715 are stored in the gap between the storage plate portions B715. Have difficulty. Therefore, it is difficult to cause the ball to pass through the opening B751.
On the other hand, since the opening B751 is apparently not closed, there is a possibility that a ball may rarely enter the opening B751 due to the irregular flow of the ball or the inclination at the time of installation of the pachinko machine B10. Since the player can be made to think that there may be a prize, the attention of the player to the upper variable prize winning device B700 can be improved.
In addition, since the control after the round game R of the first round is completed is the same as the case of operating in the first special operation pattern, the explanation is omitted.

Next, the case where the operation of the third special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPUB 201 drives and controls the solenoid B763 so that the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 operate based on the third special operation pattern. When the jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPUB 201 moves the upper cover member until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time BOP1 (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. The solenoid B763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the B730 at the forward position, and after the opening time BOP1 has passed, the round game R of the first round is started.
That is, the solenoid B763 is driven to open the second specific winning opening B700a by starting to measure the first operating time BT1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the movable upper cover member B730 from the forward position to the backward position. By controlling, the moving upper lid member B730 is made to operate for a long time.
Then, in the first round round game R, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time BT1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls Winning) is satisfied, the solenoid B763 is drive-controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member B730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening B700a, and the round game R of the first round ends.
In the third special operation pattern, in the first round round game R, the movable upper lid member B730 is kept at the retracted position and the movable floor member B740 is maintained at the advanced position for about 1 second, and the movable upper lid member B730 is kept at the forward position. , and maintaining the moving floor member B740 at the retracted position for about 0.2 seconds.

In other words, the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening B700a side and the state in which the ball can be stored at the position between the storage plate portions B715 is maintained for about 1 second, and the second specific winning opening B700a side A state in which the guidance of the ball is restricted and the ball stored in the position between the storage plate portions B715 is discharged for about 0.2 seconds is alternately repeated. According to this time setting, the state in which the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the retracted position can be formed up to about 25 times in the first round of the round game.
In this embodiment, each ball is discharged from the position between the storage plate portions B715 in about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, while the moving floor member B740 is placed at the retracted position for about 0.2 seconds, a maximum of one ball can flow down the front side of the moving floor member B740 from the position between the storage plate portions B715. Considering the ball shooting interval (in this embodiment, 0.6 second intervals) allowed for the pachinko machine B10, the movable upper lid member B730 is placed at the retracted position for 1 second. The number of balls passing through the front side is about three at most.
Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 1453, in the process of allowing the specified number of balls to pass through the second specific prize winning opening B700a, a state is formed in which the balls stored in the gap between the storage plate portions B715 can be discharged. be done.
On top of that, the number of balls that can be guided to the gap side between the storage plate portions B715 per unit time (about 1 second) is greater than the number of balls that can be guided to the gap side between the storage plate portions B715 per second unit time (about 0.2 seconds). Since the number of balls that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plate portions B715 is smaller than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gaps between the storage plate portions B715 (4 balls in this embodiment) It is easier to configure the state of accumulating in the gap between , than in the case described above in the second special actuation pattern. Therefore, it is easier to cause the ball to pass through the opening B751 than in the second special actuation pattern described above.

On the other hand, the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plate portions B715 are ejected at a rate of one each time the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are displaced (approximately every 1.2 seconds). , Depending on the frequency and the time interval at which the ball passes through the front side of the moving upper lid member B730, the first round round game R may end without the ball passing through the opening B751.
According to the third special operation pattern in this embodiment, by increasing the frequency with which the ball passes through the front side of the movable upper cover member B730, the possibility of the ball passing through the opening B751 can be increased. The ball shooting mode in the game in the eye round game R is continuously hit (without stopping the ball shooting, the ball is shot at the ball shooting interval (in this embodiment, 0.6 second interval) allowed for the pachinko machine B10). It is easy to make it a mode that fires continuously).
As a result, the player can intentionally stop the shooting of the ball and shoot the ball one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds or more as a technical intervention to obtain profits such as single shots. Mode) can be easily prevented, so that profits obtained by the players can be made uniform regardless of the level of experience of the players.
In addition, since the control after the round game R of the first round is completed is the same as the case of operating in the first special operation pattern, the explanation is omitted.

Referring to FIG. 1457, the contents of ROMB 202 (see FIG. 1418) will be described. FIG. 1457(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROMB 202 in main controller B110. As shown in FIG. 1457(a), the ROMB 202 of the main controller B 110 contains a first winning random number table B 202a, a first winning type selection table B 202b, and a second winning random number table B 202c as part of the fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table B202d are stored at least.
The first winning random number table B202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table B202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.
The fluctuation pattern selection table B202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter for determining the display form of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display form. The details of the first winning type selection table B202b and the second winning random number table B202c will be described later.
Figure 1457 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first per random number table B202a, FIG. FIG. 1457(d) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C3 and the determination value in the special symbol 2 random number table B202a2. be.

In the first winning random number table B202a, as shown in FIG. 1457(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained by entering the game ball into the first winning opening B64 or the third winning opening B64b is Whether the value of the special symbol 1 random number table B202a1 for determining whether it is a big hit or not, and the value of the first winning random number counter C3 acquired by entering the game ball into the second winning hole B640 is a big hit. It is a table in which a special symbol 2 random number table B202a2 for determining whether or not is set.
Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table B202a1, as shown in FIG. It is a table in which random values (determined values) to be determined are set. In the lottery for the special symbol 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C3 is "0". Further, when it is determined that the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C3 is a value of "1 to 319", it is determined that the winning is out.
On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table B202a2, as shown in FIG. It is a set table. In the lottery for the special symbol 2, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C3 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small winning. Otherwise, if it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out.
Thus, the first hit random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine B10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0-319. In the first winning random number counter C3, when the special symbol 1 is drawn based on the ball entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b, the number of random numbers that become the big win of the special symbol 1 is one. Among the total number of 320, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 1, so the probability that the special symbol 1 will be a big win is "1/320".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery for the special symbol 2 based on the ball entering the second winning hole B640, the number of random numbers for the big hit of the special symbol 2 is 1, and among the total number of random numbers of 320, the random number for the big hit. Since the total number of numbers is 1, the probability of winning the special symbol 2 is "1/320". In addition, since the total number of random numbers for the small win is 318, the probability of the special symbol 2 for the small win is "318/320".
The above description of the special symbol 1 random number table B202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table B202a2 corresponds to the low probability state in this embodiment. In the high-probability state, if the obtained value of the first random number counter C3 is "1 to 9" in addition to "0", it is determined to be a big win. Therefore, the probability of winning the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 in the high probability state is "1/32".
FIG. 1458(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the first hit type selection table B202b and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the 2-hit random number table B202c and the hit in the normal symbol.
The first hit type selection table B202b (see FIG. 1458 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , and is defined in association with the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine B10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table B202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 19” is defined in association with the jackpot A (see B202b1 in FIG. 1458(a)).
When the jackpot A is achieved, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing 15 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the third operation pattern. will continue until the next big win is won.
In this case, the game state corresponds to not only during probability variation but also during special probability variation (during probability variation of special symbols accompanied by small hits at high frequency). Therefore, before winning the next big win, the player can win the ball into the specific winning hole B65a opened by the small win, and receive a lot of payout balls.
In addition, when the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 15 rounds is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second. The state in which the operation pattern 2 is set continues until the lottery for special symbols is completed 100 times.

The situation in which the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round is the first round after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without satisfying the launch of the ball to the upper variable winning device B700. It is assumed that the game has ended.
There is a possibility that such a situation may occur due to ball clogging in the ball shooting unit B112a or ball clogging in the game area. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a special pattern jackpot is determined, control is performed so that the jackpot game is not started until the balls pass through the through gates B66 and B67. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a jackpot game is started immediately.
It should be noted that the display on the third symbol display device B81 after the special symbol jackpot is determined should be devised so as not to confuse the player as to whether the through gates B66 and B67 are aimed or the upper variable winning device B700 is aimed. is preferred. For example, immediately after the big win is determined, arrows pointing to the positions of the through gates B66, B67 and the upper variable prize winning device B700 are displayed to make the player aim, and after the big win game is started, the through gates B66, B67 are displayed. The display of the arrow directed to the position may be deleted, and only the display of the arrow directed to the position of the upper variable winning device B700 may be left. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the flow of the game in which the ball is passed through the through gates B66 and B67 and then entered into the upper variable prize winning device B700.
In addition, if the upper variable winning device B700 is closed, the ball fired toward the upper variable winning device B700 is flowed left and right along the slope of the movable upper lid member B730, flows through the game area B301, and passes through the gate. You will pass through B66 and B67.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 49" in association with the jackpot B (see B202b2 in FIG. 1458(a)).
In the case of a big hit B, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 8 rounds is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second operation pattern. will continue until the next big win is won.
In this case, the game state corresponds to the probability variation. Therefore, since the player basically cannot receive a lot of prize balls before winning the next big win, the player progresses the game so as to win the next big win in a short period of time. .
In addition, when the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 8 rounds is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second. The state in which the operation pattern 2 is set continues until the lottery for special symbols is completed 100 times.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot C (see B202b3 in FIG. 1458(a)).
In the case of a jackpot C, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is the second special operation pattern, and it is difficult for the ball to pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. The game state after executing 4 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to the low probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory B 640a is set to the second operation pattern is 100 times of lottery of special symbols. Continue until finished.
In this case, the game state corresponds to time saving. Therefore, the player basically cannot receive a lot of prize balls before winning the next big win, so the player progresses the game so that the next big win can be won in a short time. .
In addition, since the operation pattern of the electric role product B640a is the same as the game state after the big win B, whether the game state currently being executed is a high probability state or a low probability state depends on the operation mode of the electric role product B640a. cannot be determined from Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which the player is expected to predict whether the current game state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state without notification. On the other hand, it may be possible to notify whether the game state currently being executed is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In the jackpot based on the special pattern 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning 4. Since it will be a jackpot of the round, basically, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, so the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.
On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole B640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". a is associated and defined (see B202b4 in FIG. 1458(a)).
In the case of a jackpot a, as in the case of the jackpot A, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball can easily pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. pass. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing 15 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the third operation pattern. The state set to (corresponding to special probability variation) continues until the next big hit is obtained.
The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "30 to 49" in association with the jackpot b (see B202b5 in FIG. 1458(a)).

In addition, when the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 15 rounds is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second. The state in which the operation pattern 2 is set continues until the lottery for special symbols is completed 100 times.
In the case of a big hit b, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device B700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 8 rounds is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second operation pattern. The state set to (corresponding to the probability variation) continues until the next big hit is won.
The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot c (see B202b6 in FIG. 1458(a)).
In addition, when the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 8 rounds is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second. The state in which the operation pattern 2 is set continues until the lottery for special symbols is completed 100 times.

In the case of a jackpot c, the operation pattern of the upper variable prize winning device B700 in the first round is set to the third special operation pattern, and depending on the player's shooting manner of the ball, the ball passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. A case where the ball passes through and a case where the ball does not pass through the opening B751 are formed.
When the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 4 rounds is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second operation pattern. The state set to (corresponding to the probability variation) continues until the next big hit is won.
On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the opening B751 in the first round, the game state after executing the jackpot game (special game) of 4 rounds is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the second. The state (corresponding to time saving) set to the operation pattern of No. 2 continues until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times.
In either case, since the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is the same as the second operation pattern, whether the game state currently being executed is a high-probability state or a low-probability state depends on the operation mode of the electric accessory B640a. cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which the player is expected to predict whether the current game state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state without notification.

On the other hand, it may be possible to notify whether the game state currently being executed is a high probability state or a low probability state. In fact, whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game is a high-probability state or a low-probability state depends on whether or not the ball passes through the opening B751 in the first round. In the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment, which is possible, the player often knows whether the game state currently being executed is a high-probability state or a low-probability state.
Therefore, if the player does not know whether the game state currently being executed is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, when designing the variable effect of the third symbol, the opening in the first round It is preferable to provide a device to make the portion B751 difficult to see or a device to make the eye look away from the opening B751.
For example, as a device to make the opening B751 difficult to see, the light amount of the irradiation means that irradiates light to the upper variable prize winning device B700 is reduced particularly near the opening B751, or made extremely bright near the opening B751. By doing so, the visibility of the opening B751 itself may be lowered. It is also possible to reduce the
In the jackpot based on the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole B640), the probability of winning 15 rounds is 30%, while the probability of winning 4 rounds is 50%. , Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls.

On the other hand, the possibility of obtaining a jackpot of 15 rounds is set higher than the special symbol 1 lottery. Therefore, compared with the situation of receiving the lottery of the special symbol 1, the situation of receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 can increase the expectation that the big win of 15 rounds may be obtained.
The second hit random number table B202c (see FIG. 1458(b)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see B202c1 in FIG. 1458(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 239" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see B202c2 in FIG. 1458(b)).
In the pachinko machine B10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) B66 and B67 and the second winning random number table B202c are referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit.
And, even in the high probability state of the normal design and the low probability state of the normal design, the normal design is hit frequently. Therefore, it is possible to configure a state in which the electric accessory B640a is frequently operated.

Next, the ending effect in this embodiment will be described. First, the upper plate B17 of the pachinko machine B10 and the operation button group arranged near the upper plate B17 will be described.
FIG. 1459 is a top view of the front frame B14 and outer frame B11. On the front frame B14, an upper tray B17 for storing balls protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray B17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1415), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray B17 to the ball shooting unit B112a (see FIG. 1418).
A frame button B22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate B17. This frame button B22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device B81 (see FIG. 1416) is changed, or the content of super ready-to-win effect is changed. However, in the present embodiment, it is used to execute a specific effect by being operated during the jackpot game (during the jackpot effect), and the details will be described later.
A second ball rental operation portion B40b having the same function as the ball rental operation portion B40 described above is arranged on the upper surface of the upper plate B17. The second ball rental operation portion B40b is provided with a second count display portion B41b, a second ball rental button B42b, and a second return button B43b.

When the second ball lending operation part B40b is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine B10, Ball lending takes place.
Specifically, the second frequency display portion B41b is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the balance as balance information in numbers. The second ball lending button B42b is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium). supplied to The second return button B43b is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.
A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray B17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the second ball-renting operation section B40b. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball operating portion B40b so as to share the component configuration. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
A ball removal operation part B44 is arranged on the upper surface of the upper plate B17 to the left of the second ball rental operation part B40b. By pushing the ball removal operation part B44, the ball can be made to flow down from the upper tray B17 toward the lower tray B50 (see FIG. 1415), so the player can shoot the balls stored in the upper tray B17. However, the game can be ended at any timing.

A direction operation section B45 is arranged on the upper surface of the upper plate B17 to the right of the frame button B22. The direction operation unit B45 has four independently operable operation units arranged at positions corresponding to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from above. When adjustment is performed, the emission intensity of the display device such as the third pattern display device B81 and the light emission means such as LED is adjusted, and the type of performance (for example, variable performance) related to the game can be switched in multiple modes. It is operated by a player or the like when performing the switching at any time.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1460, the display contents of the third symbol display device B81 will be described. FIG. 1460 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device B81, and FIG. 1460(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the variable effect. and FIG. 1460(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.
The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.
In addition, in the pachinko machine B10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller B110 (see FIG. 1418) is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "big win A" or "big win a" (see FIG. 1458), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the odd number "7" added are aligned. In addition, if it is "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" (see FIG. 1458), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols added with odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" excluding "7" are aligned. If it is "jackpot C" or "jackpot c" (see FIG. 1458), a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added.
On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbols is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, there is a possibility that a continuous notice effect is performed to suggest (notice) that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a jackpot. When the variable display is performed, a predetermined combination of main symbols (for example, on the activated line LB1, the combination of the main symbols is "3", "4", "1" in order from the left symbol row BZ1), a so-called "chance "eye" is always displayed.
As shown in FIG. 1460(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper 1/3 of the area is a sub-display area BDs for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.
The main display area BDm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas BDm1 to BDm3, and three pattern rows BZ1, BZ2, and BZ3 are displayed in the three display areas BDm1 to BDm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows BZ1 to BZ3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows BZ1 to BZ3, and each of the symbol rows BZ1 to BZ3 is cyclically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row BZ1, the main symbol numbers are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row BZ2 and the right symbol row BZ3, the main symbol numbers are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area BDm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows BZ1 to BZ3. The middle part of the main display area BDm is set as the activated line LB1, and in each game, the third symbols are stopped on the activated line LB1 in the order of the left symbol row BZ1→right symbol row BZ3→middle symbol row BZ2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line LB1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.
On the other hand, the sub-display area BDs is provided horizontally above the main display area BDm, and is evenly divided into three small areas BDs1 to BDs3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area BDs1 is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole B64, the third winning hole B64b, or the second winning hole B640. The small areas BDs2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.
On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 1460(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area BDm. In the secondary display area BDs, a moving image (not shown) is displayed in the right small area BDs3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area BDs2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.
When the ball enters the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device B81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is maximum. It is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated in the small area BDs1 of the sub-display area BDs. In the small area BDs1, one reserved ball number pattern (in this embodiment, a "straw hat" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball number. is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls pattern is not displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

Similarly, when the ball enters the second winning hole B640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device B81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area BDs1 of the sub-display area BDs. In the small area BDs1, one reserved ball pattern ("star-shaped" pattern in this embodiment) is displayed for each reserved ball number. is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls pattern is not displayed in the small area BDs1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.
In this embodiment, the number of held balls when entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b is displayed side by side in the upper half of the small area BDs1 (see FIG. 1460(b)). , and the number of held balls when entering the second winning hole B640 are displayed side by side in the lower half of the small area BDs1.
In this embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole B64 or the third winning hole B64b and the second winning hole B640 are each suspended up to four times. The maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area BDs1, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number on a part of the third pattern display device B81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device B81. Further, the variable display device unit B80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 1461, the big winning effect performed in the third symbol display device B81 will be described. Fig. 1461(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, Fig. 1461(b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending effect, Fig. 1461(c) ), FIGS. 1461(d) and 1461(e) are diagrams illustrating display screens of the ending display effect displayed in the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect.

In the main controller B110, when a ball enters the first winning port B64, the second winning port B640, or the third winning port B64b (start winning), a special symbol lottery is performed using that as a trigger. In the one-symbol display device 37, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 1461(a), a variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device B110 to the sound lamp control device B113, and as a result, the third pattern display device B81 displays the first pattern display device. In accordance with the variable display of 37, the variable display of the third pattern is performed.
When the variable display of the third pattern is performed in the third pattern display device B81, first, the high-speed variable display of the third pattern is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds). After the elapse of, the display is switched to medium-speed variation display of the third symbol, and further switched to low-speed variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win, a stop display is performed in which main patterns (third patterns) of the same number are aligned, the variable performance is finished, and then the big win performance is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, a stop display is performed in which the main symbols (third symbol) of the same number are not aligned, the variable effect is completed, and if there is a pending start winning, A lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and the next variable performance is started.
As shown in FIG. 1461(a), the jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed.
The fanfare effect notifies the player that the pachinko machine B10 will shift to a special game state from now on, and that the specific prize winning port B65a or the second specific prize winning port B700a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect informs the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on, prompts the player to shoot the ball toward the specific prize winning port B65a or the second specific prize winning port B700a, This is an effect for notifying that a large number of prize balls will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1461(b), in the ending production, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and the game value given to the player after the end of the jackpot (the special symbol jackpot probability, the next jackpot An ending display performance is executed to notify the player whether or not a lump sum of prize balls can be expected to be paid out until the player obtains .
In addition, depending on the situation, the ending effect may include a company name display effect to notify the manufacturer of the pachinko machine B10, or the return of cards with a balance (recording media, coins, etc.) when the game ends or when you leave your seat. A card-forgetting prevention display rendering suggesting an operation for is executed, the details of which will be described later.
When the big hit effect is performed in the third symbol display device B81, as shown in FIG. A fanfare command is sent to device B113. As a result, in the third symbol display device B81, the fanfare effect is started following the variable effect.
Next, a round number command indicating the first round is transmitted from the main controller B110 to the sound lamp controller B113 at the timing when the fanfare effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device B81, following the fanfare effect, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine B10 transitions to the special game state, the state is maintained until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is repeated the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type (up to 15 rounds, See FIG. 1458(a)) Continued.

After the first round is started and the second specific winning opening B700a is opened, when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won) has passed, the second specific winning opening B700a is closed and the first round ends. Immediately after the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 1456) is interposed, the start timing of the second round comes, and a round number command indicating the second round is transmitted from the main controller B110 to the sound ramp controller B113. As a result, in the third symbol display device B81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round.
After the second round is started and the specific winning opening B65a is opened, the specific winning opening B65a is closed after a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won). Together, the second round ends. Immediately after the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 1456), the start timing of the third round comes, and a round number command indicating the third round is transmitted from the main controller B110 to the audio ramp controller B113. As a result, in the third symbol display device B81, following the round effect corresponding to the second round, the round effect corresponding to the third round is started.
When the third round is started, opening/closing control of the specific winning hole B65a is performed as in the case of the second round. After that, every time a new round is started, a round number command indicating a new round number is transmitted from the main controller B110 to the sound lamp controller B113, and opening and closing control of the specific winning opening B65a is performed. done. Thereby, each round production from the first round to the final round (up to 15 rounds) is executed in order.
Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main controller B110 to the sound lamp controller B113 at the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning hole B65a in the final round is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device B81 starts the ending effect. As described above, in the ending effect, the player is notified of the end of the special game state, and in the ending display effect, the game value given to the player after the end of the big win (the special symbol jackpot probability, the next big win The player is informed of whether or not a lump sum of prize balls can be expected to be paid out by the time the player obtains .

In the ending display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 1461(c), a prize ball display indicating the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third symbol display device B81. B801 is displayed, and an identification display B802 indicating the contents of "Chance 100 times" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third symbol display device B81. Moreover, a reliability display B803 indicating the content of "Don't give up yet" is displayed above the identification display B802, and a time display B811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display B802.
The time display B811 has a role of notifying the end of the ending effect (including only the ending display effect), and the right end portion moves toward the end position B812 at an appropriate timing, the details of which will be described later.
This screen is displayed when a special symbol lottery is made and the lottery result is "jackpot C" (see FIG. 1458), or when the lottery result is "jackpot c" and during a jackpot game, the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 ( 1451), and the identification display B802 indicates that the electric accessory B640a is in the second operation pattern until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times after the big win. It means that the state in which the operation is controlled is continued, and the probability of a special symbol jackpot is low (1/320 in this embodiment).
By constructing the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display B802, the player can recognize that there is a small possibility of winning the next big win by the reliability display B803. can be done.

That is, by visually recognizing the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device B81, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the next big win, so that the player can continue the game enthusiastically.
Also, in the ending display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 1461(d), a prize indicating the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81. A sphere display B801 is displayed, and an identification display B802 indicating the content of "probability change rush" is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device B81. Moreover, a reliability display B803 indicating the content of "high expectations" is displayed above the identification display B802, and a time display B811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display B802.
This screen is displayed when a special symbol lottery is made and the lottery result is "big win B" or "big win b" (see FIG. 1458). Until the next big win, the electric accessory B640a continues to be controlled in the second operation pattern, and the probability of the big win of the special symbol is high (1/32 in this embodiment). means
In addition, the identification display B802, the reliability display B803, and the time display B811 on this screen indicate that the lottery result is "jackpot c" and the ball passed through the opening B751 (see FIG. 1451) of the detection sensor B750 during the jackpot game. In this case, the prize ball display B801 is changed to "600" shown in FIG. 1461(c), unlike the numerical value shown in FIG. 1461(d).

By constructing the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display B802, the player can recognize that the next big win can be expected from the reliability display B803.
That is, by visually recognizing the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device B81, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the next big win, so that the player can continue the game enthusiastically.
Note that the contents of the identification display B802 and the reliability display B803 are not limited to these, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the identification display B802 may display "next big win confirmed", and the reliability display B803 may display "preparing for further prize balls".
Also, in the ending display effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 1461(e), a prize indicating the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81. A sphere display B801 is displayed, and an identification display B802 indicating the content of "Rush Rush" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third symbol display device B81. Moreover, a reliability display B803 indicating the content of "very high expectations" is displayed above the identification display B802, and a time display B811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display B802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol lottery is made and the lottery result is "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" (see FIG. 1458). Until the next big win, the electric accessory B640a continues to be controlled in the third operation pattern, and the probability of the big win of the special symbol is high (1/32 in this embodiment). means
By constructing the display in this manner, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display B802, the reliability display B803 enables the player to expect the next big win and to obtain a greater profit. A player can recognize something.
That is, by visually recognizing the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device B81, in addition to the player's expectation of the next big win, more profit (for example, at the stage before winning the next big win, Since the player can expect an increase in the number of prize balls by winning a prize using a small hit, the game can be continued enthusiastically.
In this way, the identification display B802 is configured to change the display corresponding to the game state after the end of the big win game, and the player can obtain the ending display effect after the end of the big win game by visually recognizing the ending display effect. Profit forecasts can be made.

Note that the contents of the identification display B802 and the reliability display B803 are not limited to these, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of "rush rush", "super probability variable rush" may be used, "small hit rush rush" may be used, or a specific name such as "super advantageous mode" may be attached and displayed.
Next, the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect will be described. In the ending effect in the example shown in FIG. 1461(b), a company name display command is transmitted from the main controller B110 to the sound lamp control device B113 at the timing when the ending display effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device B81, following the ending display effect, the company name display effect is started.
Next, a card forgetting prevention display command is transmitted from the main control device B110 to the sound lamp control device B113 at the timing when the company name display effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device B81, following the company name display effect, the card forgetting prevention display effect is started.
The ending effect ends when the card forgetting prevention display effect ends. After the end of the ending production, if there is a pending starting prize, the next special pattern lottery is performed and the next variable production is started. On the other hand, if there is no pending start winning (if the number of pending balls is 0), the variable standby screen is displayed on the third symbol display device B81.

FIG. 1462(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the company name display effect displayed in the ending effect, and FIG. 1462(b) is an example of the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. It is a diagram. Figures 1462(a) and 1462(b) show the case where the ending display effect is followed by the company name display effect, and the company name display effect is followed by the card forgetting prevention display effect (see Figure 1461(b)). explain.
In the example shown in FIGS. 1462(a) and 1462(b), the execution time of the ending effect is equally divided into the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect, and the execution time of the ending effect is 15. Set to seconds. In this case, the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are allotted 5 seconds each.
As shown in FIG. 1462(a), in the company name display effect, the name of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine B10 (Company A) is displayed as a specific display B810 near the center of the screen of the third symbol display device B81.
Also, as shown in FIG. 1462(b), when switching to the card forgetting prevention display effect, the card is returned from the slot of the card unit as a specific display B810 near the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81. A still image (or moving image) showing the situation is displayed, and a comment "Be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed below the image.

In the ending effects in the examples shown in FIGS. 1462(a) and 1462(b), after the ending display effect executed for 5 seconds, the company name display effect is executed for 5 seconds, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, there is a 10 second interval from the end of the ending display effect to the start of the next variable effect. This embodiment is devised so that the free time can be used effectively.
As shown in FIGS. 1462(a) and 1462(b), in common during execution of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, time A time display B811 is displayed in which the right tip portion moves to the right as time passes, and a frame button display B813 schematically showing a frame button B22 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the third pattern display device B81. Scales are arranged vertically on the right side of the button display B813, and the current light emission intensity (LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine B10 (for example, the illumination parts B29 to B33 and the display lamp B34 (see FIG. 1415)), etc. A scale that displays the setting value of the light emission intensity of the means and the brightness of the screen of the third pattern display device B81 so that the player can grasp it (the second setting value from the top of the five levels is displayed) A display B814 is displayed, and below the frame button display B813 and the scale display B814, a warning comment display B815 with the content "Please be careful of the light for a long time" is displayed.
In this embodiment, during the ending effect, when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the pressing operation of the frame button B22 is controlled to be effective. That is, during the ending effect, the operation of the frame button B22 is disabled when the frame button display B813 is not displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device B81.
On the screen of the third pattern display device B81, the frame button display B813 and the scale display B814 are hidden during the card forgetting prevention display effect (at the time of remaining 4 seconds), but the specific display B810, the time display B811 and The warning comment display B815 continues to be displayed until the card-forgetting prevention display effect ends.

Here, even if the game ball enters the first winning port B64, the second winning port B640, or the third winning port B64b, the special symbols are suspended because the variation of the special symbols is stopped during execution of the ending effect. The number of balls does not decrease. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbols is full, even if the ball enters the first winning port B64, the second winning port B640 or the third winning port B64b, the player cannot receive the lottery of the special symbols. . On the other hand, after the end of the ending effect, the special symbol starts to change, so the number of reserved balls of the special symbol decreases from the full tank, and the player enters the special symbol by entering the ball into the starting port. Possibility of being able to receive lottery of patterns increases.
Also, during the jackpot game including during the ending effect, the operation pattern of the electric accessary B640a is the normal operation pattern. In this embodiment, since it becomes the first operation pattern (see FIG. 1445(a)), it is difficult for the game ball to be picked up by the slide member B450. On the other hand, when the ending effect is completed, the electric accessory B640a is driven in an operation pattern corresponding to the jackpot type, so the game ball is easily picked up by the slide member B450, so the game ball wins the second prize. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the opening B640 or the third winning opening B64b (see FIG. 1416).
Under these circumstances, after the end of the round game, it is easy for the player to think that it would be less costly to start shooting the balls after the end of the ending effect. It was difficult to understand why. That is, since the game result is indicated by the ending display effect, it is easy for the player to think that the variable effect will start immediately, and it is thought that the ball will be shot as soon as the screen changes from the ending display effect, but in fact the company name display. There are cases where the ending effect remains for the effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, and when this is noticed, the ball has already been shot, and the player wastes several shots by shooting during the ending effect. You may feel unsatisfied with it.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movement mode of the time display B811 is set so that the right end of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812 at the same time as the ending effect ends. That is, the right end of the time display B811 moves to the right with the passage of time, and the variable effect is started after the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812. Since it is possible to easily grasp the end time, it is possible to easily avoid the situation in which the ball is shot during the ending effect.

Although the manner of movement of the time display B811 is not limited in any way, in the present embodiment, the display manner of the time display B811 and the end position B812 is the length between the left end of the time display B811 and the end position B812. It is designed with the length of 10 seconds as a guideline. If it takes 10 seconds or more until the end of the ending effect when the ending effect starts, the right end of the time display B811 remains stopped or extremely late until about 10 seconds until the end of the ending effect. It is set to move at a high speed, and at the timing when the ending effect is about 10 seconds, the right end of the time display B811 is set to start moving rightward at a constant speed as time passes.
On the other hand, if it takes less than 10 seconds to finish the ending effect when the ending effect starts, the right end of the time display B811 immediately starts moving. In this case, the moving speed of the time display B811 is set as the speed at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 simultaneously with the end of the ending effect (that is, if the ending effect is five seconds , is set at twice the speed when moving to the terminal position B812 in 10 seconds).
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1462(a) and 1462(b), the character "GO" is always displayed above the end position B812 to suggest the start of launching the game ball. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 or several seconds before the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 (for example, until the fired ball reaches the through gates B66 and B67 The characters "GO" may be displayed an average number of seconds before). In this case, the characters "GO" may be displayed in a non-display state, or the characters "GO" may be displayed in a translucent state so as to be materialized.
In this case, if the shooting of the ball is started with the characters "GO" displayed as a mark, it is possible to easily avoid the ball passing through the through gates B66 and B67 before the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the player does not need to follow the moving time display B811 with his/her eyes. As a result, the game burden on the player can be reduced.

In addition, the display mode of the character of "GO" is not limited at all. For example, it may be replaced with a comment such as "ball launch start" or "start launch when bar reaches". Also, the character size of "GO" need not always be the same. For example, the letters "GO" may gradually increase in size as the right end of the time display B811 moves. In this case, the maximum size of the characters "GO" is displayed translucent, and the timing at which the gradually increasing size of the characters "GO" coincides with the maximum size displayed in translucency is determined. , the right end of the time display B811 may be controlled to coincide with the timing of reaching the end position B812.
In the state shown in FIG. 1462, when the player does not operate the frame button B22, the time display B811 reaches the end position B812 during the continuation of the card forgetting prevention display effect shown in FIG. 1462(b). Later, the screen of the third symbol display device B81 is switched to the screen as shown in FIG. 1460(b), and the variable effect is started.
As shown in FIG. 1462, when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device B81, it generally indicates that the frame button B22 can be operated. Switching of the screen of the third symbol display device B81 when the player operates the frame button B22 in the state shown in FIG. 1462 will be described.
FIG. 1463(a) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect, and FIG. 1463(b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen immediately after the end of the ending effect.

In FIG. 1463(a), in the state shown in FIG. 1462(b) (the state where the frame button display B813 is displayed), the third symbol that is switched when the player operates the frame button B22 (see FIG. 1459) The screen of the display device B81 is illustrated.
Even when the frame button B22 is operated to switch the screen of the third pattern display device B81 to the state shown in FIG. moves to the right with the passage of time, and after the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, the screen of the third symbol display device B81 is switched to the screen as shown in FIG. is started.
As shown in FIG. 1463(a), when the player operates the frame button B22, a still image (or moving image) showing how the card is returned from the insertion port of the card unit as the specific display B810 and "Card Please be careful not to forget to take" is moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the third pattern display device B81, and the display mode is reduced. As a result, the identifiability of the specific display B810 can be reduced, and the player's attention can be easily directed to portions other than the specific display B810.
Near the center of the screen, a direction operation section display B816 schematically showing the direction operation section B45 is displayed. On the left side of the direction operation section display B816, scales are arranged vertically, indicating the current set value of the emission intensity. A vertical scale display B817 is displayed so that the player can grasp it (indicating that it is the second set value from the top of the five levels), and below the direction operation section display B816, the scale is displayed to the left and right. A horizontal scale display B818 is displayed, which is lined up and displays the current set value of the volume so that the player can grasp it (displays that it is the third set value from the top (right) of the five levels). .

Further, below the caution comment display B815, a second caution comment display B819 with the content of "Beware of long-term sound" is displayed. The caution comment display B815 and the second caution comment display B819 are displayed corresponding to the types of targets for which the player can check the set values.
As shown in FIG. 1463(a), when the direction operation section display B816 is displayed on the display screen, the set value of the vertical scale display B817 can be changed by operating the up and down buttons of the direction operation section B45. can do. That is, the direction in which the scales are arranged corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the setting value of the scales, so that the player can easily understand the operation method.
As shown in FIG. 1463(a), when the direction operation section display B816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the horizontal scale display B818 is changed by operating the left and right direction buttons of the direction operation section B45. can do. That is, the direction in which the scales are arranged corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the setting value of the scales, so that the player can easily understand the operation method.
In addition, when the direction operation section display B816 is not displayed on the display screen, the operation of the direction operation section B45 is disabled. As a result, the player can recognize whether the current operation of the direction operation part B45 is valid or invalid only by confirming the presence or absence of the direction operation part display B816.

A light bulb is displayed near the end of the vertical scale display B817. 1415)), etc., and the brightness of the screen of the third pattern display device B81) can be easily understood by the player. In addition, musical notes are displayed near the ends of the horizontal scale display B818, so that the player can easily understand that the horizontal scale display B818 can set the volume level.
In the state shown in FIG. 1463(b), unlike the state shown in FIG. 1460(b), which is similar to the state in which the variable effect of the special symbol is started, the direction operation section display B816, the vertical scale display B817 and the horizontal scale display are displayed. B818 is arranged in the small area BDs3 in a reduced state.
Therefore, even after the ending effect ends and the variable effect is executed, the direction operation section display B816 continues to be displayed for a while, and it is possible to change the light emission intensity setting, change the volume setting, etc. can do.
In this embodiment, the direction operation section display B816 is continuously displayed during the high-speed variation display of the first variation effect that starts after the end of the ending effect, and is hidden after the high-speed variation display of the variation effect is completed. be done.

As a result, at least at the timing when the symbol is stopped and the variable effect ends, the direction operation section display B816 is hidden, and the operation of the direction operation section B45 is invalidated. Since there is no need to operate it, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the user concentrates on operating the direction operation section B45 and misses the stop display of the symbol.
Also, during high-speed fluctuations, the number of held balls becomes empty, so the player starts shooting balls in order to receive a special symbol lottery, but the direction operation section B45 can be operated with one hand. So you can avoid harming the launch of the sphere. While the player is shooting the ball several times (through the shooting state), the direction operation section display B816 is hidden.
The direction operation section display B816 is hidden from the second variable effect started after the end of the ending effect. That is, the screen of the third symbol display device B81 is brought into a state as shown in FIG. 1460(b), and the variable effect is executed.
FIG. 1464 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the ending effects and the jackpot types in the special symbols. As shown in FIG. 1464, in this embodiment, the ending display effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type (indicated by ◯ in FIG. 1464).

In addition, since the company name display effect is executed when the game state entered after the end of the big win game becomes the most advantageous state for the player, the It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game state.
In this embodiment, the company name display effect is executed in the ending effect of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a", which is a jackpot type that enters a special probability variable state after the jackpot game ends (indicated by ○ in FIG. 1464), and other The company name display effect is not executed in the ending effect of the jackpot type jackpot game (indicated by x in FIG. 1464).
In addition, the condition for executing the company name display effect corresponds to the game state entered after the end of the big win game, and does not correspond to the number of payouts in the big win game. That is, even if the number of payouts in the jackpot game is, for example, 0, the company name display effect is executed.
In this embodiment, since the number of payouts in the jackpot game of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is the maximum number among all jackpot types, when the company name display effect is executed, , the player can feel that the jackpot game with the maximum number of paid-out prize balls has been executed.

In addition, since the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed when the number of payouts in the jackpot game is equal to or more than the number of eight rounds (predetermined number or more), the player who visually recognizes the card forgetting prevention display effect You can feel the joy of winning many prize balls.
In the present embodiment, the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed in the ending effects of the jackpot types of the 15th round "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" and the jackpot types of the 8th round "jackpot B" or "jackpot b". (indicated by ◯ in FIG. 1464), the card forgetting prevention display effect is not executed in the ending effect of other jackpot types of jackpot games (indicated by x in FIG. 1464).
Thus, in the present embodiment, the content of the ending effect differs depending on the jackpot type. Since the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are each 5 seconds, the execution time of the ending effect differs according to the difference in combination.
For example, the ending effect in a jackpot game whose jackpot type is "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is executed over 15 seconds, and the ending effect in a jackpot game whose jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" is 10 seconds. It is executed over 5 seconds, and the ending effect in the jackpot game with the jackpot type of "jackpot C" or "jackpot c" is executed over 5 seconds.

Under these circumstances, the player may be at a loss as to when the ball will be fired because it is difficult to determine the end point of the ending effect. It is possible to grasp the time.
That is, even if the duration of the ending effect is different, the time display B811 changes to the end position B812 by changing the movement speed of the right end of the time display B811 (or by changing the movement start point of the time display B811). It is the same that the ending effect ends when reaching , and by visually recognizing the time display B811, the player can be prevented from getting confused about the ball launch timing. As a result, the game burden on the player can be reduced.
In addition, it is the execution time of the ending production that is defined corresponding to the jackpot type and remains unchanged, and the content during the ending production is variable. For example, even if the execution time of the ending effect is 15 seconds, if a certain condition is satisfied (or randomly), the ending display effect is set to 10 seconds, and the remaining 5 seconds are used for the company name display effect and card forgetting prevention display effect. may be executed. In particular, when the first big win is made, the player's interest can be improved by setting the ending display effect to be longer. Conversely, regardless of the type of jackpot (game state after the end of the jackpot), the effect mode during the ending effect may be common or similar to the extent that the difference is difficult to distinguish. When configured in this way, the ending effect in the fifty-fourth embodiment is a different form of effect that includes a common effect mode that does not depend on the jackpot type in the fifty-eighth control example described later, and execution of the ending effect. The lapse of time is another form of a trigger for making a notification corresponding to the game state set in the fifty-eighth control example, which will be described later.
Next, the fifty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1465 and 1466. FIG. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the winning unit B400 has a bottom part B431a that supports the ball flowing down the central flow path B431. , the shape of the part that supports the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

1465 and 1466 are cross-sectional views of the winning unit B2400 in the fifty-fifth embodiment taken along line MDXIX-MDXIX in FIG. 1429(c). In FIG. 1465, the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory B640a is illustrated, and in FIG. 1466, the excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory B640a is illustrated.
The electric accessory B640a includes a tilting member B470 that is the same as that of the fifty-fourth embodiment, and a slide member B2450 that is partially different in shape from the slide member B450 of the fifty-fourth embodiment. The slide member B2450 is only partially different in shape, and the operation mode is the same as that of the slide member B450 of the fifty-fourth embodiment.
The difference between the slide member B2450 and the slide member B450 in the fifty-fourth embodiment will be described. The slide member B2450 includes a lower projecting portion B2456 projecting downward from the front end of the central fixed portion B454, and a front projecting portion B2457 projecting forward from the front end of the central fixed portion B454.
In the prize winning unit B400 of the fifty-fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it was possible to assemble by covering the slide member B450 from above, in the winning unit B2400 of the fifty-fifth embodiment, the front projecting portion B2457 has a shape that protrudes forward from the rear end portion of the rear wall portion B434. Therefore, the assembly method cannot be used as it is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface portion B431a, the locking plate portion B431b, and the rear wall portion B434 are arranged with a lateral width centered on the cross section shown in FIG. A notch B2431d is continuously formed in the . That is, the notch B2431d cuts from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the rear wall portion B434 and is formed as an open portion continuing from that position to the middle position of the bottom surface portion B431a and to the middle position of the locking plate portion B431b.
Since the lateral width of the notch B2431d is formed to be slightly longer than the lateral width of the front projecting portion B2457, in the arrangement shown in FIG. The arrangement of the notch B2431d of the member B2430 can be overlapped.
Therefore, the front projecting portion B2457 of the slide member B2450 can pass through the intermediate member B2430 in the vertical direction through the notch B2431d, so that the intermediate member B2430 can be assembled by covering the slide member B2450 from above. there is
The lower protruding portion B2456 is a portion that protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the rear surface of the locking plate portion B431b on the outside of the notch B2431d and defines the front end of movement of the slide member B2450.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the front end of the slide member B450 is defined at the position where the front end of the central fixing portion B454 hits the rear surface of the locking plate portion B431b (see FIG. 1432). , the front end of the slide member B2450 is defined at the position where the front surface of the lower projecting portion B2456 projecting directly downward from the front end portion of the central fixing portion B454 abuts the rear surface of the locking plate portion B431b. The front movement end position of the slide member B2450 in the embodiment and the front movement end position of the slide member B450 in the fifty-fourth embodiment are the same position.
The front projecting portion B2457 includes a pair of ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b projecting upward. The ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b are arranged so as to line up in the front-rear direction at the left and right positions where they can enter the notch B2431d, and the ball interference projecting portion B2458a on the front side is closer to the rear ball interference projecting portion B2458b than the ball interference projecting portion B2458b on the rear side. is formed so that the upper end position is lower.
The front-back direction inclination angle of the straight line passing through the upper end position of the ball interference projection portion B2458b and the upper end position of the ball interference projection portion B2458a is set to be the same as the front-back direction inclination angle of the upper surface of the bottom surface portion B431a of the middle member B2430. formed in
The protruding length of the ball interference protruding portions B2458a and B2458b is such that when the slide member B2450 is arranged in the forward position, it protrudes upward by 1 to 2 mm from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion B431a ( See Figure 1465). As a result, when the slide member B2450 is arranged at the retracted position, the upper end positions of the ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b are positioned inside the notch B2431d (upper and lower sides of the middle member B2430) so as not to protrude from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion B431a. inside the wall thickness dimension in the direction).

As a result, when the slide member B2450 is arranged at the forward position, the ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b can be brought into contact with the balls flowing down the central flow path B2431, while the slide member B2450 When arranged at the retracted position, it can be configured so that the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 does not come into contact with the ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b.
1465 and 1466, in the winning unit B2400 of the fifty-fifth embodiment, in addition to the action produced by the winning unit B400 described in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the flow velocity of the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 is reduced. It can be changed depending on the case.
For example, when the slide member B2450 is in an excited state (retracted position), the ball interference protruding portions B2458a and B2458b retreat to the outside of the central flow path B2431, so that the ball flowing down the central flow path B2431 There is no deceleration due to the contact with the interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b.
In addition, as described above in the fifty-fourth embodiment, when the slide member B2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the ball on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 (see FIG. 1421) is , and is pushed backward by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, thereby accelerating in the flowing direction (direction of arrow B).

Therefore, when the slide member B2450 is changed to the excited state (retracted position), in the entire area of the sphere flow path configured by the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431 , the flow speed of the ball tends to increase.
Further, for example, when the slide member B2450 is in the non-excited state (advance position), the ball interference protrusions B2458a and B2458b protrude from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion B431a toward the central flow passage B2431. The ball flowing down B2431 abuts on the ball interference projections B2458a and B2458b and is decelerated. As a result, the effect of decelerating the flow of the ball in the central flow path B2431 is more likely to occur than when the slide member B2450 is in the excited state (retreat position), and the flow of the ball can be stabilized (rectification can be made).
In addition, as described above in the fifty-fourth embodiment, when the slide member B2450 changes to the non-excited state (advance position), the ball rides on the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 (see FIG. 1421). Even if the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 is displaced in the direction that creates a gap between the ball and the ball (the direction in which the ball is not pushed in, the direction of arrow F), the change in the flow velocity of the ball is Suppressed (not accelerated).
Therefore, when the slide member B2450 changes to the non-excited state (advance position), the entire area of the sphere flow-down path composed of the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431 , the flow speed of the balls tends to be slow.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the slide member B2450 is changed to the excited state (retracted position), the effect of increasing the flow-down speed of the ball is the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453, and the central flow On the other hand, when the slide member B2450 changes to the non-excited state (advance position), the action of slowing down the ball flow speed is caused by the left guide plate It occurs in the entire flow-down path of the sphere formed by the portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central flow path B2431.
Therefore, when the slide member B2450 changes to the non-excited state (forward position) and when the slide member B2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453 and the central It is possible to increase the difference in the period required for the sphere to pass through the flow-down route formed by the flow path B2431 (difference in length).
Next, referring to FIG. 1467, the fifty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the winning unit B400 has a case where the internal flow path is formed as a flow path extending back and forth. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1467(a) is a schematic diagram showing the winning unit B3400 in the fifty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 1467(b) is a schematic diagram showing the winning unit B3400b as another example of the winning unit B3400. be. In FIG. 1467, the small-diameter portion of the nail BKG1 to be driven into the base plate B60 is illustrated by a solid line, and the swollen portion of the tip on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The winning unit B3400 is arranged, for example, on the downstream side of the through gate B67 in the right game area B303 (see FIG. 1416), and is configured as a unit that guides the flow of the balls arranged in the game area B301.
The prize winning unit B3400 includes a flow path forming portion B3410 formed from a plate-like member disposed between the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416) of the game board B13 and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1415), and a game area. It is slid in the front-rear direction so that the state changes between a protruding state (equivalent to the forward position state) arranged inward and a retracted state (equivalent to the backward position state) retreating to the outside of the game area. and a slide member B3420.
In the slide member B3420, a first slide member B3421 near the sphere inlet B3411 of the flow passage forming part B3410 and a second slide member B3422 near the sphere outlet B3412 are separately arranged, and these are integrated on the back side. , so that they are integrally slidably displaced.
That is, the second slide member B3422 enters the protruded state in synchronization with the protruded state of the first slide member B3421, and the second slide member B3422 enters the retracted state in synchronization with the retracted state of the first slide member B3421. The slide member B3420 is integrally constructed so that

A description will be given of variations in the manner in which the ball that hits the winning unit B3400 flows down. When the ball entered through the ball entrance B3411 reaches the position where it interferes with the first slide member B3421, the first slide member B3421 is in the retracted state or the first slide member B3421 is in the protruded state. is also switched to the retracted state in an extremely short time (shorter than the time required for the ball to be guided to the right side (for example, 0.2 seconds)), the ball flows from the midway discharge part B3413 to the flow path configuration It is discharged outside (outside the left side) of the portion B3410. In this embodiment, the ball that has passed through the midway discharge portion B3413 is configured to deviate from the second prize winning port B640 or the third prize winning port B64b and flow down.
On the other hand, when the ball entering through the ball entrance B3411 reaches the position where it interferes with the first slide member B3421, the first slide member B3421 is long enough to guide the ball (for example, 0.2 seconds ), the sphere is guided inside the flow passage forming portion B3410.
Depending on whether the second slide member B3422 is in a protruding state or a retracted state at the timing when the ball guided inside the flow path forming part B3410 reaches the ball outlet B3412, the flow path of the ball thereafter changes. do.
That is, if the second slide member B3422 is in a protruding state, the ball passes right above the second winning hole B640 while rolling on the upper surface of the second sliding member B3422, and goes to the third winning hole B64b side. flow down In this embodiment, a detection sensor BSE1 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged upstream of the third prize winning opening B64b, and this detection sensor BSE1 is the detection sensor B442 in the fifty-fourth embodiment (see FIG. 1421). works the same as

That is, when the detection sensor BSE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening BSE1a, the first winning hole switch is turned on, and the main controller B110 (Fig. 1418 reference) is configured to draw a lottery for the special symbol 1.
On the other hand, if the second slide member B3422 is in the retracted state, the ball flows down to the second winning hole B640 side. In this embodiment, a detection sensor BSE2 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged upstream of the second winning hole B640. works the same as
That is, when the detection sensor BSE2 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening BSE2a, the second winning hole switch is turned on, and the main controller B110 (Fig. 1418 reference) is configured so that a lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed.
The second winning opening B640 is arranged directly below the second sliding member B3422, and the arrangement is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening B640. , and the distance between the detection sensor BSE2 on the opposite side (right side) and the flow path forming part B3410 is designed to be longer than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the second slide member B3422 is in a retracted state, and some of the balls that have flowed down to the side of the second prize winning port B640 are configured to deviate from the second prize winning port B640 and flow down.

Although not shown, a variable winning device B65 that opens and closes in a small winning game is provided below the winning unit B3400, so that the ball that flows below the winning unit B3400 (second winning A ball that does not enter either the opening B640 or the third winning opening B64b and is deviated (for example, a ball flowing to the side of the discharge part B3413 on the way) can be entered into the specific winning opening B65a opened in the small winning game. can.
As shown in FIG. 1467(b), the formation of the midway discharge portion B3413 may be omitted, and the general prize winning opening B63 may be arranged directly below the first slide member B3421. At this time, when the ball entering through the ball entrance B3411 reaches the position where it interferes with the first slide member B3421, the first slide member B3421 is in the retracted state, or the first slide member B3421 is in the protruded state. Even if there is, if the ball is switched to the retracted state in a very short time (shorter than the time required for the ball to be guided to the right side (for example, 0.2 seconds)), the ball will enter the general winning hole B63. enter the ball.
In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1467(b), a detection sensor BSE3 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the general winning hole B63, and this detection sensor BSE3 is the detection sensor B435 in the fifty-fourth embodiment. (See Fig. 1425). That is, when the detection sensor BSE3 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening BSE3a, neither the special symbol lottery nor the normal symbol lottery is executed, and prize balls are paid out.
As shown in FIG. 1467(b), the winning openings may be arranged close to each other so as not to spill the balls discharged to the left from the ball outlet B3412. In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 1467(b), the third winning opening B64b is arranged close to the ball outlet B3412, so that when the second slide member B3422 protrudes, the flow path forming part B3410 is positioned outward (to the left). ) is surely entered into the third winning hole B64b.

As a result, compared to the embodiment shown in FIG. It is possible to avoid the situation where the ball guided to the outside (left side) of the flow path forming portion B3410 in the protruding state cannot obtain the prize ball.
Next, referring to FIG. 1468, the fifty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the electric accessory B640a in the winning unit B400 is composed of a plurality of members arranged apart, and the interval between the timing when the upstream member hits the ball and the timing when the downstream member hits the ball is lengthened. Although the case has been described, in the winning unit B4400 of the fifty-seventh embodiment, the electric accessory B4420 is composed of a single member. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIGS. 1468(a) and 1468(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the winning unit B4400 in the fifty-seventh embodiment. In FIG. 1468(a), the electric accessory B4420 is in the forward position where it is arranged to protrude in the area (game area) between the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416) and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1415). FIG. 1468(b) shows a state in which the electric accessary product B4420 is retracted from the game area and placed in a backward position.
In FIGS. 1468(a) and 1468(b), of the portion of the electric accessory B4420, the outer shape of the portion located inside the winning unit B4400 at a position that blocks the passage of the ball is illustrated with a solid line. is painted with a dot pattern, and the outline of the portion arranged at a position that does not block (permits) the passage of the sphere is illustrated with imaginary lines.

In FIG. 1468, the small-diameter portion of the nail BKG1 that is driven into the base plate B60 is illustrated by solid lines, and the bulging portion of the front end portion is illustrated by imaginary lines.
The prize winning unit B4400 is formed of a plate-like member disposed between the base plate B60 (see FIG. 1416) of the game board B13 and the glass unit B16 (see FIG. 1415), and has a channel configuration that constitutes a ball flow-down path. A part B4410 and an electric accessory B4420 that is arranged inside the flow path forming part B4410 and changes the flow path of the ball.
The electric accessory B4420 has a rolling plate portion B4421 that has an upper surface on which the ball rolls and is guided so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, and a downstream end of the rolling plate portion B4421. and an obstructing rod portion B4425 formed with a strength capable of obstructing the .
In this embodiment, when the ball that enters the flow path configuration portion B4410 through the ball inlet B4411 that is openly formed at the upstream end of the flow path configuration portion B4410 reaches the position where the electric accessory B4420 is arranged, the electric Depending on whether the accessory B4420 is arranged at the forward position or the backward position, the ball flows differently.

First, when the ball that entered the flow path forming part B4410 reaches the position where the electric accessory B4420 is arranged, when the electric accessory B4420 is arranged in the forward position (see FIG. 1468 (a)), the ball rolls It rolls on the upper surface of the moving plate portion B4421 and flows to the left side (the side of the specific winning opening B65a) in the flow path forming portion B4410.
At this time, the obstruction bar B4425 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the front surface of the base plate B60 by 1.5 times or more the diameter of the sphere. For example, by entering an opening formed in a plate-like member disposed between the flow path forming part B4410 and the glass unit B16 and covering the flow path forming part B4410 from the front side, it flows down inside the flow path forming part B4410. It is placed in a position that does not interfere with the flow of the ball.
On the other hand, when the ball that entered the flow path forming part B4410 reaches the position where the electric accessory B4420 is arranged, and the electric accessory B4420 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 1468 (b)), the ball rolls It flows down the front side of the moving plate portion B4421 and flows downward (to the side of the second winning opening B640) in the flow passage forming portion B4410.
At this time, the obstructing rod portion B4425 is arranged at a front-rear position capable of colliding with the ball flowing down the flow passage forming portion B4410 and obstructing (preventing) passage of the ball. As a result, when the electric accessory B4420 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 1468(b)), the plate-like portion (for example, the rolling plate portion B4421) of the flow path forming portion B4410 is arranged below the Even if the ball bounced on the plate-shaped portion B4412) flies toward the obstruction rod portion B4425, the guide portion B4413 that guides the ball to the specific winning opening B65a side beyond (passes) the obstruction rod portion B4425 flow can be prevented.

That is, the ball that flew toward the obstructing rod portion B4425 loses momentum to the left by the obstructing rod portion B4425, falls directly below and enters the second winning hole B640, or bounces back to the right. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the plate-like portion B4412 and enters the second winning hole B640.
Thus, in this embodiment, depending on whether the electric accessory B4420 is arranged at the forward position or at the retracted position, the ball entering the ball entrance B4411 passes downward through the electric accessory B4420. It can be divided into either the direction of rolling on the plate-shaped portion B4412 and flowing down, or the direction of passing the electric accessory B4420 to the left and rolling on the guide portion B4413 and flowing down.
One of the purposes of forming the path and the winning openings B65a and B640 like the winning unit B4400 is to guide the majority of the balls entering the ball entrance B4411 to the specific winning opening B65a side (guiding state), and It is conceivable to control the operation of the electric accessory B4420 so as to switch between a state (non-guiding state) in which the majority of the balls that enter the entrance B4411 are not guided to the side of the specific winning opening B65a (non-guiding state).
This control can be achieved by switching the operation pattern (length of opening and closing) of the electric accessory B4420. Also, the ball is likely to be guided to the specific winning hole B65a side.

For example, the time that the rolling plate portion B4421 is arranged at the forward position is shorter than the time required for the ball that reaches several seconds after the rolling plate portion B4421 is arranged at the forward position to pass through the rolling plate portion B4421. Even if it is set, when the ball arrives at the same time as the electric accessory B4420 is placed at the forward position (when there is almost no difference between the arrival timing of the ball and the timing at which the electric accessory B4420 is placed at the forward position) Or, when the ball arrives in a state with greater momentum than usual (for example, a state in which rotation in the direction of acceleration occurs), the ball is guided while the rolling plate portion B4421 is arranged at the forward position A situation may arise in which the train passes through to the B4413 side.
As a countermeasure, firstly, the lateral length of the rolling plate portion B4421, which is normally designed to have a lateral length of 55 mm or less, may be designed to have a longer lateral length (for example, 77 mm or 100 mm). . In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the time during which the rolling plate portion B4421 is arranged at the forward position as the non-guiding state of the electric accessory B4420.
Further, by designing the rolling plate portion B4421 to have a long lateral width, it is possible to increase the number of balls that ride on the rolling plate portion B4421 in a state where the electric accessory B4420 is arranged at the forward position.
When the rolling plate portion B4421 is formed with a normal left-right length (55 mm or less), the number of balls that ride on the rolling plate portion B4421 at the same time is at most 2 to 3, but a longer length (for example , 100 mm), a state in which four or more balls ride on the rolling plate portion B4421 at the same time can be generated.

When the electric accessory B4420 is displaced to the retracted position while four or more balls are on the rolling plate portion B4421 at the same time, the four or more balls are guided to the second winning opening B640 side at a time. The reserved number of special symbols 2 can be set to 4 (full) in time.
Also, as described in the fifty-fourth embodiment, unlike the case where the balls are guided one by one to the electric accessory 640, a plurality of balls on the upper surface of the electric accessory B4420 are guided by the electric accessory B4420. Immediately after being displaced to the retracted position, it simultaneously falls to the second winning opening B640 side, so it is required that the electric accessory B4420 be maintained in the retracted position in order to cause the plurality of balls to flow down to the second winning opening B640 side. can be shortened. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the operation pattern of the electric accessory B4420.
As the next countermeasure, secondly, the flow of the ball moving from the downstream end of the rolling plate portion B4421 to the guide portion B4413 just before the rolling plate portion B4421 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position is blocked by the obstructing rod portion B4425. It can be configured so that it can be cut off by
That is, the arrangement position of the obstructing rod portion B4425 is a position that protrudes toward the guide portion B4413 side from the downstream end portion of the rolling plate portion B4421 (in this embodiment, it is perpendicular to the upper surface of the rolling plate portion B4421 and obliquely By protruding in the upper left direction, the ball is protruded toward the guide portion B4413 side), so that the downstream end portion of the rolling plate portion B4421 in the guided state of the electric accessory B4420 (see FIG. 1468 (a)) Even if it is about to pass, if the electric accessory B4420 is put in the non-guiding state (see FIG. 1468(b)) immediately after that, the flow of the passing ball can be blocked by the obstructing rod B4425. .

As a result, even if the lateral length of the rolling plate portion B4421 is short, immediately before the electric accessory B4420 switches from the state in which the electric accessory B4420 is arranged in the forward position to the state in which it is arranged in the retracted position, to the guide portion B4413 It is possible to make it difficult for the moving ball to be guided to the side of the specific winning opening B65a.
In other words, the ball trying to pass through the rolling plate portion B4421 to the left side can be pulled back toward the second winning hole B640 by the obstructing rod portion B4425. As a result, the lateral length of the rolling plate portion B4421 can be maximized to increase the number of balls that ride on the electric accessory B4420 when the electric accessory B4420 is arranged in the forward position. By arranging B4420 in the retracted position, it is possible to increase the number of balls to be dropped to the second winning hole B640 side.
In addition, as a result, more balls than the number of balls assumed from the left and right length of the rolling plate portion B4421 are placed on the second winning opening B640 side immediately after the electric accessory B4420 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position. can flow down.
That is, in addition to the ball riding on the rolling plate portion B4421, the second prize is the ball pulled back (backflowed) by the obstructing rod portion B4425 after passing the downstream end of the rolling plate portion B4421. Since it can be made to flow down to the 640 side, the winning frequency of the second winning port B640 can be improved.

On the other hand, the passage forming portion B4410 has a ceiling portion B4414 formed in such a manner as to cover the passage from above so that the ball does not flow into the electric accessory B4420 except for the ball inlet B4411. That is, since the introduction of balls into the electric accessory B4420 is limited to the ball entrance B4411, the number of balls staying on the electric accessory B4420 exceeds expectations (for example, the number of balls is more than two stages It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the water accumulates in a pile.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether or not the ball passes over the rolling plate portion B4421. That is, when the period in which the electric accessory B4420 is maintained at the forward position exceeds the time required for the ball to pass over the rolling plate portion B4421, the ball first flows to the specific winning hole B65a side.
In this respect, as described in the fifty-fourth embodiment, as long as the tip B451 is passed, the ball will not pass over the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion B453. This is different from the case where switching of flow-down routes is not affected.
The state of the electric accessory B4420 shown in FIG. 1468(a) corresponds to the non-excited state of the electric accessory B640a (slide member B450 and tilting member B470) in the fifty-fourth embodiment described above, and FIG. The state of the electric accessory B4420 illustrated in b) corresponds to the excited state of the electric accessory B640a (slide member B450 and tilting member B470) in the fifty-fourth embodiment described above. In this case, the rolling plate portion B4421 corresponds to the slide member B450, and the obstructing rod portion B4425 corresponds to the tilting member B470.

Next, referring to FIG. 1469, the fifty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the upper variable winning device B700 described the case where the ball passing through the second specific winning opening B700a flows down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715. The upper variable winning device B5700 is provided with a switching device B5770 for switching the flow of the ball that has passed through the second specific winning hole B700a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1469(a) and 1469(b) are front views of the upper variable winning device B5700 in the fifty-eighth embodiment in range MDXXXVIIIa of Figure 1416 . In FIG. 1469(a), the closed state of the upper variable winning device B5700 is illustrated, and in FIG. 1469(b), the open state of the upper variable winning device B5700 is illustrated.
As shown in FIGS. 1469(a) and 1469(b), the upper variable winning device B5700 in the fifty-eighth embodiment is a foundation formed by partially diverting the configuration of the base plate member B710 in the fifty-fourth embodiment. A plate member B5710 is provided.
The base plate member B5710 lowers the arrangement of the structure on the lower side from the inclined outer wall plate portion B714, thereby providing a pair of left and right intermediate A plate portion B5718 and a pair of left and right discharge openings B5719 for discharging the ball received in the intermediate plate portion B5718 to the back side, which are drilled in the front-rear direction in a shape along which a part of the intermediate plate portion B5718 and the edge portion are aligned. Prepare.

The intermediate plate portion B5718 is a plate-like portion that extends toward the front side toward the space created between the inclined rolling plate portion B713 and the inclined outer wall plate portion B714, and is a plate-like portion that receives the ball from the left and right outer ends. A prevention wall portion B5718a for preventing spillage, and an inclined plate portion B5718b connected to the lower end portion of the prevention wall portion B5718a and extending in a direction of rising and inclining toward the left-right direction position side of the second specific winning opening B700a is connected to the extended end of the inclined plate portion B5718b and is formed in an arc shape with a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball receiving rotating member B5771 centering on the rotating shaft BJ51 of the ball receiving rotating member B5771 of the switching device B5770. and an arc plate portion B5718c.
The switching device B5770 consists of a ball receiving rotating member B5771 configured to be rotatable about the rotating shaft BJ51, and a pair of left and right flow restrictors disposed at positions opposed to the ball receiving rotating member B5771 from the left and right. and a member B5778.
The flow restricting member B5778 is formed in an arc shape with a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball receiving rotating member B5771 centering on the rotation axis BJ51, and protrudes toward the front side from the member front surface of the base plate member B5710. A forward position that restricts passage of the ball ejected from B5771, and a retracted position that retracts to the rear side of the member front surface of the base plate member B5710 and allows passage of the ball ejected from the ball receiving rotating member B5771. Configured to be displaceable.
The ball receiving rotating member B5771 is a disc-shaped member that is arranged directly below the center of the left and right of the second specific winning opening B700a and is rotatable around a rotation axis BJ51 that extends in the front-rear direction. Four ball receiving recesses B5772 recessed from the outer peripheral side are formed at intervals of 90 degrees so as to be able to receive balls that have passed through B700a.

A drive device (not shown) different from the solenoid B763 (see FIG. 1454) is used for the drive device for driving the ball receiving rotating member B5771 and the drive device for driving the flow restricting member B5778. In this case, the driving device for driving the ball receiving rotating member B5771 may also be used as the driving device for driving the flow restricting member B5778.
In this embodiment, in the first round of the game, the solenoid B763 is driven in the first special operation pattern (see FIG. 1456(a)), and the ball receiving rotating member B5771 rotates clockwise at a rotational speed of 90 degrees/second. It is always rotated in the direction of rotation.
The flow control member B5778 is set so that the operation mode in the first round round game can be changed according to the jackpot type. For example, the jackpots A, B, a, and b (see FIG. 1458) are always fixed at the forward position, the jackpot C is always fixed at the backward position, and the jackpot c alternates between the forward and backward positions every second. Driven to switch.
A description will be given of how a ball that has passed through the second specific winning hole B700a flows down. In this embodiment, the ball that has passed through the second specific winning hole B700a is surely received in one of the ball receiving recesses B5772 of the ball receiving rotating member B5771.

By rotating the ball receiving rotating member B5771 while the ball is received in the ball receiving recess B5772, the ball received in the ball receiving recess B5772 is also displaced as the arrangement of the ball receiving recess B5772 changes.
During the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member B5771, the lower edge of the ball receiving recess B5772 (the lower edge of the pair of edges at the radially outer end of the ball receiving recess B5772 about the rotation axis BJ51) .The side forming the flow-down surface of the sphere) is flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion B5718b, and when the flow-down restricting member B5778 is arranged at the retracted position, the sphere that is flush with the inclined plate portion B5718b A ball is discharged from the receiving recess B5772, and the ball is discharged from the upper variable winning device B5700 through the discharge opening B5719. The balls discharged in this manner are not stored in the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715.
On the other hand, when the lower edge of the ball receiving recess B5772 is flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion B5718b during the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member B5771, when the flow restricting member B5778 is arranged at the forward position, The discharge of the ball is restricted by the flow restriction member B5778, and the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is continued without the ball being discharged from the ball receiving concave portion B5772. After that, when the ball receiving recess B5772 is positioned between the pair of left and right arc plate portions B5718c, the ball passes through the gap between the pair of arc plate portions B5718c and moves toward the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715. can flow down and be stored.
That is, in this embodiment, corresponding to the operation mode of the switching device B5770, the ball passing through the second specific winning opening B700a flows down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715, and the second specific A case can be constructed in which the ball that has passed through the winning opening B700a is ejected without reaching the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715.

Therefore, by driving the moving upper lid member B730 and the moving floor member B740 in the first special operation pattern, the ball guided to the gap between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is stored without being discharged during the round game. Even in this mode, especially in the case of the jackpot c, when the arrangement of the flow regulation member B5778 is switched during the round game, depending on the timing of entering the second specific winning hole B700a, a pair of stored Since the number of balls guided to the plate portion B715 may be sufficiently large (in this embodiment, five or more) or less than that, the player's upper variable winning device B700 It can improve attention.
In addition, it is not sufficient for one ball to pass from the switching device B5770 to the pair of storage plate portions B715 side, but the number exceeding the number that fills the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715 (this embodiment 5 or more) balls can pass through the opening B751 for the first time. can be done.
According to this embodiment, when the ball passes through the second specific winning hole B700a and is displaced by the ball receiving rotating member B5771, the ball is faster than before it passes through the second specific winning hole B700a. flow rate is slowed down. Thereby, it is possible to delay the time until the ball passing through the second specific winning hole B700a reaches the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball passing through the front side of the movable upper lid member B730 immediately after the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the retracted position from immediately reaching the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715.
Next, the fifty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1470 to 1472. FIG. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the time display B811 explained the case where the end of the ending effect of the jackpot game can be grasped. The display of the third symbol display device B81 is designed so that the timing can be grasped. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 1470(a) and 1470(b) are diagrams exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the fifty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 1470(a) shows the display screen after the specific display B810 has been moved from the center by operating the frame button B22 (see FIG. 1459). The display screen after being switched by operating the frame button B22 in the state shown is illustrated.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1470(b), when the frame button B22 is operated during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the direction operation section display B816, the vertical scale display B817, and the horizontal scale display 818 display the sphere. The display is switched to a shooting position suggestion display B6820 that suggests a position where the player may benefit from shooting and aiming, and a shooting time display B6811 is displayed superimposed on the time display B811.
The shooting position suggestion display B6820 includes a game area display B6821 that (schematically) displays illustrations, photographs, etc. of (at least a part of) the game area, and a part of the game area display B6821 that is indicated by an arrow or the like, and the ball is displayed. and a target suggestion display B6822 that is displayed so that the player knows that it should be fired and aimed.
In this embodiment, the launch position suggestion display B6820 is a game area display B6821 in which the entire game board B13 (see FIG. 1416) is displayed, and a target suggestion display B6822 is indicated by through gates B66 and B67 (see FIG. 1416). and a comment saying "Aim here" is displayed.

Note that the firing position suggestion display B6820 is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of displaying the entire game board B13 as the game area display B6821, a part of the game board B13 may be displayed. For example, as a portion including the through gates B66 and B67, only the portion above the windmill BWF (see FIG. 1416) may be displayed, or the area around the through gates B66 and B67 (or the through gates B66 and B67) may be displayed. ) may be displayed.
When displaying a part of the game board B13, the game area display B6821 may be displayed as a still image or as a moving image. For example, in the shooting position suggesting display B6820, the game area display B6821 is configured as a schematic display of the surroundings of the ball to be launched from now on, and the ball is launched and flows down to reach the through gates B66 and B67. The game area display B6821 is moved along the path (displayed as a moving image), and when the ball reaches the through gates B66 and B67, the game area display B6821 is fixed at the display around the through gates B66 and B67 (displayed as a still image). do).
Also, for example, as the target suggestion display B6822, instead of displaying an arrow to indicate the position to be aimed at by shooting the ball, the position may be displayed so as to be illuminated, or other parts other than the position may be displayed. It may be displayed so as to be relatively conspicuous by displaying it dark.
Also, the position indicated by the target suggestion display B6822 may be fixed from the beginning, or may be fixed after being moved. For example, the light may be moved along the path along which the sphere is emitted, and when the light reaches the through gates B66 and B67, the light may be fixed at the position where it reaches the through gates B66 and B67.

By displaying the shooting position suggestion display B6820 in this manner, the player can easily grasp where the ball should be shot after the ending effect is finished. As a result, it is possible to smoothly progress the game after the end of the ending effect.
As with the time display B811, the firing time display B6811 is displayed such that the right tip portion moves rightward with the passage of time, and the moving speed is the same as the moving speed of the time display B811. In addition, the right end of the firing time display B6811 is located closer to the end position B812 than the right end of the time display B811, and before the right end of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812, The right tip of the firing time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812.
In this embodiment, the length of time that elapses from the timing when the right tip of the firing time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812 to the timing when the right tip of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 is It is designed to be slightly longer than the average length that elapses from the point of entry until reaching the thru gates B66, B67 (the position indicated by the target indication B6822).
Therefore, the ending effect of the jackpot game currently being executed is completed by the time the ball shot at the timing when the right tip of the shooting time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812 passes through the through gates B66 and B67.

In this way, by shooting the ball using the shooting time display B6811 as a guide, it is possible to avoid the shot ball from passing through the through gates B66 and B67 during the jackpot game (before the end of the ending effect). As a result, it is possible to maximize the profit that the player can obtain in the lottery for the second symbol that is executed when the balls are detected in the through gates B66 and B67.
That is, the lottery for the second symbol, which is generally executed when a ball is detected in the through gates B66 and B67 during a jackpot game, is usually performed with medium probability, so the profit that the player can obtain is minimal. becomes. After the end of the jackpot game, the probability of lottery of the second pattern can be increased according to the type of jackpot. It is possible to maximize the profits obtained by the player in the lottery (profits that change depending on the difference in the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a).
Further, by shooting the ball using the shooting time display B6811 as a guide, compared to the case where the ball is shot after the right tip of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, the time from the end of the big win game to the big win is reduced. It is possible to shorten the length of time until the ball passes through the through gates B66 and B67 for the first time after the end of the game.
In this way, by shooting the ball using the shooting time display B6811 as a guide, the ball shot just before the end of the jackpot game may pass through the through gates B66 and B67 during the jackpot game (before the end of the ending effect). To make the progress of a game smooth by shortening the period until the balls pass through gates B66 and B67 after the end of the jackpot game while maximizing the profit obtained by the player by minimizing the can be done.

FIG. 1471 is a diagram exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. FIG. 1471 shows the display screen when the right tip of the firing time display B6811 reaches the end position B812 from the state shown in FIG. 1470(b).
As shown in FIG. 1471, when the right tip of the firing time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812, the display mode of the target suggestion display B6822 is switched. In this embodiment, the shape of the frame surrounding the comment is changed in the target suggestive display B6822, and the portion of "aim" is enlarged.
That is, the timing at which the "aiming" portion of the target suggestion display B6822 is enlarged coincides with the timing at which the right tip of the launch suggestion display 6811 reaches the end position B812. Therefore, even if the player does not visually recognize the shooting time display B6811, if the shooting position suggestion display B6820 is made to be visible, the player can shoot the ball at an appropriate shooting timing from the change timing of the target suggestion display B6822. can be encouraged to
As a result, the player can grasp not only the position to shoot the ball and aim, but also the timing of shooting the ball by visually recognizing the shooting position suggestion display B6820. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the game burden of the player who selects necessary upper parts from the display of the third symbol display device B81.

FIGS. 1472(a) and 1472(b) are diagrams exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. FIG. 1472(a) shows a display screen that is switched from the state shown in FIG. 1470(a) when passage of the ball through the through gates B66 and B67 is detected before the end of the ending effect.
Also, in FIG. 1472(b), if time has passed since the display in FIG. is shown. That is, the arrangement of the right tip of the time display B811 in FIG. 1472(b) is the same as the arrangement of the right tip of the time display B811 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1472(a), when the player shoots the ball without operating the frame button B22 (see FIG. 1459) from the state displayed in FIG. When the passage of the ball through the through gates B66 and B67 is detected, the direction operation section display B816, the vertical scale display B817 and the horizontal scale display 818 are game stop suggestion displays for prompting the player to stop shooting the ball. Switched to B6831.
In this embodiment, as the game stop suggestion display B6831, an illustration simulating a barrier installed at a railroad crossing, a still image of a state in which the barrier is down is displayed, and a message "Stop" is displayed. Comments are displayed. As a result, the player can be urged to stop shooting balls, so the number of balls to be shot before the end of the ending effect can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 1472(b), when time has elapsed since the game stop suggestion display B6831 was displayed, the game stop suggestion display B6831 is changed to a game preparation suggestion display B6841 for prompting the player to prepare for shooting a ball. can be switched to
In this embodiment, as the game preparation suggestion display B6841, an illustration simulating a barrier installed at a railroad crossing, a still image of a state in which the barrier is raised is displayed, and the word "beginning" is displayed. Comments are displayed. As a result, the player can be made aware of the end of the period for stopping the shooting of the ball, and the player can be urged to prepare for shooting the ball.
In this embodiment, when the player does not operate the frame button B22, the shooting time display B6811 (see FIG. 1470(b)) is not displayed, but the timing of switching from the game stop suggestion display B6831 to the game preparation suggestion display B6841 is , coincides with the timing when the right tip of the firing time display B6811 reaches the end position B812.
Therefore, the same benefit as that obtained by operating the frame button B22 in the state shown in FIG. , can be obtained when the ball is detected at the through gates B66 and B67 before the end of the ending effect.

As a result, for example, when the frame button B22 is not operated due to failure of the frame button B22, etc., it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the profits obtained by the player. That is, since the shooting position suggestion display B6820 (see FIG. 1470(a)) is not displayed when the frame button B22 is not operated, the player can grasp the appropriate shooting timing of the ball. However, even if the player starts shooting the ball before the end of the ending effect, the game stop suggestion display B6831 or the game preparation suggestion display B6841 is displayed, so that the player can shoot the ball. It can stop firing or have the player ready to fire the ball at the appropriate time.
The mode of the game stop suggestion display B6831 and the game preparation suggestion display B6841 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, an illustration of the handle B51 (see FIG. 1415) of the pachinko machine B10 with an X mark may be displayed instead of the illustration of the gate. For example, it may be configured as a moving image instead of a still image. For example, the third symbol display device B81 may be configured to display the entire display screen instead of a part of the display screen.
Note that the contents of the caution comment display B815 and the second caution comment display B819 are not limited to the contents illustrated in FIG. 1472, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the content may correspond to shooting a ball. That is, an illustration simulating the handle B51 (see FIG. 1415) is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow is written on the handle B51 to suggest that the ball should be stopped. A surrounding arrow may also be written to indicate the timing at which the ball is to be launched. Also, a comment corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol (such as "full tank" or "one available") may be displayed.
Next, the sixtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1473 and 1474. FIG. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, when the frame button B22 is operated during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, a direction operation section display B816, a vertical scale display B817 and a horizontal scale display B818 are displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81. , the case where it is possible to adjust the intensity of the light intensity and the volume level has been described. Designed to display comments about volume settings. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIGS. 1473(a), 1473(b), and 1474 are diagrams exemplifying the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 60th embodiment. Figures 1473(a) and 1474 show display screens in different jackpot games with the same timing as the ending effect (the timing at which the right tip of the time display B811 is the same). The display screen after a lapse of time from the state shown in a) is illustrated.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1473(a), when the frame button B22 (see FIG. 1459) is operated according to the frame button display B813 (see FIG. 1462(b)) in the ending effect, the third symbol display device B81 A direction operation section display B816, a vertical scale display B817, and a horizontal scale display B818 are displayed on the display screen, and a situation suggestion display B7821 is displayed above them.
The situation suggestive display B7821 is designed to display various comments, but in FIG. value).
That is, in this embodiment, the settings of the light intensity and sound volume are initialized (returned to the maximum value) by the sound lamp control device B113 (see FIG. 1418) after a specified time has passed since the setting change was executed. It is set, and in the ending effect of the first jackpot game after the initialization is executed, a comment of "cancel" is displayed in the situation suggestion display B7821.

As a result, for example, the left switch and lower switch (switches operated to weaken the volume and light intensity) of the direction operation unit B45 (see FIG. 1459) function, but the right switch and upper switch (sound volume and light intensity) function. If the switch that is operated to change to the stronger side) is out of order, once the light intensity and volume are lowered to the minimum, even if the player changes, the light intensity and volume cannot be increased at all. can be avoided.
By visually confirming that the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the situation suggestive display B7821, the player can understand that the changes in the light intensity and volume settings have been initialized (returned to the maximum value). If the player who changed the light intensity and volume settings immediately before is the same as the player who is currently playing, the light intensity and volume settings will be returned to the state immediately before initialization (returned to the maximum value). It seems that you want to return.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the ending effect of the first jackpot game after the initialization is executed, the setting of the light amount in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) is displayed on the vertical scale. B817 is left as a past light amount display B7817 (corresponding to the portion shown in light shade), and the volume setting in the state immediately before initialization (returned to the maximum value) is displayed in the horizontal scale display B818 as a past volume display B7818. It is left as (corresponding to the part illustrated with thin coating).
Therefore, the player operates the direction operation section B45 with the past light amount display B7817 as a mark to change the setting of the light amount, and also operates the direction operation section B45 with the past volume display B7818 as a mark to change the volume setting. This makes it possible to easily restore the settings of the amount of light and the volume to the state immediately before initialization (returned to the maximum value).

As described above, the past light amount display B7817 and the past volume display B7818 are displayed in the ending effect of the first jackpot game after the light amount and volume are initialized by the sound lamp control device B113 (see FIG. 1418). On the other hand, it is set so that the display disappears if the timing is missed, increasing the trouble of changing the light intensity and volume settings (increasing the difficulty).
As a result, it is possible to induce the player to operate the direction operation section B45 at the timing when the past light amount display B7817 and the past volume display B7818 are displayed. It can improve attention.
As shown in FIG. 1473(b), when the player operates the direction operation section B45 to return the light amount and volume settings to the state immediately before initialization (return to the maximum value), a situation suggestive display is displayed. The comment "cancel" in B7821 is switched to the comment "completion of recovery".
By visually recognizing that the comment "recovery completed" is displayed on the situation suggestion display B7821, the player can restore the light intensity and volume settings to the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value). can be grasped. As a result, the settings have been changed, so the light amount and sound volume are not initialized (returned to the maximum value) by the sound lamp control device B113 (see FIG. 1418) until the specified time has passed.

In the display shown in FIG. 1474, the comment "automatic continuation" is displayed in the situation suggestion display B7821, and the settings of the sound volume and the amount of light are maintained as set by the player. Therefore, the player does not need to change the settings of the sound volume and the amount of light, and can concentrate on the movement of the time display B811 to determine the ball launch timing.
In this way, by changing the content of the situation suggestive display B7821 in the ending effect and depending on the content, the player can be prompted to operate the direction operation section B45 for changing the setting of the amount of light and volume. , the player's attention to the ending effect can be improved.
Next, the sixty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1475 to 1477. FIG. In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the frame button display B813 is always displayed and the frame button B22 can be operated while the card forgetting prevention display effect is being executed. , is displayed as a substance for a further limited period during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, and operation of the frame button B22 becomes possible. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIGS. 1475(a), 1475(b), and 1476 are diagrams exemplifying display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the 61st embodiment in chronological order. In FIGS. 1475(a), 1475(b), and 1476, the display of the frame button display B8813 is shown by imaginary lines when displayed translucently, and by solid lines when displayed as an entity. be done.

When the card forgetting prevention display effect is started in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A translucent frame button display B8813 is displayed so as to be scattered near the edge of the display screen. The frame button display B8813 moves toward the center of the display screen as time elapses.
When the translucent frame button display B8813 reaches the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 and unites, the frame button display B8813 materializes as shown in FIG. 1475(b). It is controlled so that the input of the frame button B22 is valid when the frame button display B8813 is materialized, and when the valid input of the frame button B22 is detected, the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 is displayed as the operation valid. A display B8813a (in this embodiment, a comment of "God") is displayed, and then the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 shifts to the state illustrated in FIG. 1463(a) described in the fifty-fourth embodiment. do.
When the player wants to execute the operation of the frame button B22 and shift the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 to the state illustrated in FIG. Therefore, the player follows the moving frame button display B8813 with his/her eyes.
Since the specific display B810 is displayed on the movement path of the frame button display B8813, it is possible to induce the specific display B810 to come into the field of vision of the player who follows the frame button display B8813 with his eyes. Also, by overlapping the position where the frame button display B8813 materializes with the position where the specific display B810 is displayed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific display B810 displayed behind the frame button display B8813. .

In the first place, since the specific display B810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 during the period from the start of the card forgetting prevention display effect to the realization of the frame button display B8813, the card forgetting prevention is prevented. It is possible to make the specific display B810 easily visible to the player as compared with the case where the frame button B22 can be operated immediately after the start of the display effect and the specific display B810 is immediately moved to the corner of the display screen.
When the frame button B22 is not operated while the frame button display B8813 is materialized, as shown in FIG. Frame button display B8813 moves.
In the state shown in FIG. 1476, the input of the frame button B22 is controlled to be invalid, and even if the frame button B22 is input-operated, the operation invalid display B8813b (this embodiment 1463(a), the display screen does not shift to the state shown in FIG. maintained.
As described above, in the present embodiment, by limiting the operation timing of the frame button B22 during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the following favorable effects can be produced.

That is, when the display mode of the frame button display B8813 changes from a translucent display to an actual display to indicate the timing at which the frame button B22 can be operated, the specific display is continued until the display mode of the frame button display B8813 changes. Since B810 is arranged in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 and is configured to be easily visible to the player, attention to the specific display B810 can be improved.
Furthermore, during the card forgetting prevention display effect, the frame button display B8813 is switched from the actual display to the translucent display. It is possible to avoid too short a period from the timing of transitioning to the end of the card forgetting prevention display effect period.
As a result, even though the player effectively operated the frame button B22, the amount of light could not be changed before the card forgetting prevention display effect was completed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is not possible to change the setting of the audio and the volume to the desired setting.
Therefore, a situation arises in which a player who experiences that he was unable to change the settings of the amount of light and the volume to his liking even after operating the frame button B22 underestimates the value of the operation of the frame button B22. can avoid doing. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's desire to operate the frame button B22 (not only the operation during the ending effect but also the operation during the game) is reduced.

Note that the frame button display B8813 may be attached with a musical note mark or a light bulb mark to indicate an object that can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22. In this case, when the player wants to adjust the volume, if the mark of a musical note is attached, the attention to the frame button display B8813 can be improved, and if the mark of a light bulb is attached, the player's attention can be improved. If so, attention can be diverted from the frame button display B8813.
FIG. 1477 is a diagram showing an example of time-measurement change of frame button display B8813, time-measurement change of effectiveness of operation of frame button B22, and operation of frame button B22 in card forgetting prevention display effect. In FIG. 1477, as an example, the period of the card forgetting prevention display effect is equally divided into three periods, and the first period BT81 (see FIG. 1475(a)) in which the translucent frame button display B8813 is scattered, and the frame button display are displayed. A second period BT82 (see FIG. 1475(b)) in which B8813 coalesces and materializes, and a third period BT83 (see FIG. 1476) in which the frame button display B8813 becomes semi-transparent again and is scattered, are assigned respectively. is shown.
Unlike the fifty-fourth embodiment in which the frame button B22 can be operated at any time during the card forgetting prevention display effect, in this embodiment, the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled only during the second period BT82. If the frame button B22 is operated in the second period BT82, the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 is shifted to the state illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, it is controlled such that no matter how many times the frame button B22 is operated in the first period BT81 and the third period BT83, it is impossible to change the setting of the amount of light and the volume.
FIG. 1477 shows the case where the periods BT81, BT82, BT83 are the same, but the lengths of the periods BT81, BT82, BT83 can be changed in various manners according to the purpose. An example of an effect that can be expected by changing the length of the first period 81 or changing the length of the third period BT83 will be described below.

For example, by setting the first period BT81 to be shorter, the shift to the second period BT82 in which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid is hastened. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the maximum length of the period that can be spent to change the setting of the light amount and the sound volume.
The setting of shortening the first period BT81 may be effective, for example, in the ending effect in a jackpot game of the first hit (the first jackpot of Renso). A specific song may be played during a time-saving state, a variable probability state, or a jackpot game, and there are players who are not interested in the sound in the normal state but want to hear the specific song.
Even if such a player is playing a game with the volume lowered in the normal state, in the case of shifting from the normal state to the jackpot game state, the time saving state or the variable probability state, the volume is increased to the extent that a specific song can be heard. want to raise
Therefore, in particular, in the ending effect in the first hit jackpot game, by extending the maximum length of the period that can be spent changing the setting of the light amount and volume, the normal state passes through the jackpot game state, and then to the time saving state and the variable probability state. It becomes easy to change the volume setting at an appropriate timing of transition, and the satisfaction of the player who wants to listen to the specific song can be improved.

Further, for example, by setting the first period BT81 longer, the transition to the second period BT82 in which the operation of the frame button B22 becomes effective is delayed, while the specific display B810 is displayed on the third symbol display device B81. The period displayed in the center of the screen can be maintained for a long time.
The setting of lengthening the first period BT81 may be effective, for example, in the ending effect in a jackpot game during a series of games. In many cases, it is sufficient to change the volume and light intensity settings at the first hit, and it is unlikely that you will want to change the volume or light intensity settings during the long run, so the second period BT82 Even if the maximum length of time that can be spent to change the settings of the volume and the amount of light is shortened due to the delay in the transition, the player suffers little disadvantage.
On the other hand, the longer the game continues, the higher the degree of excitement of the player, and the greater the excitement, the higher the possibility that the player will forget to return the card or the like inserted in the card unit when the game ends. On the other hand, when the first period BT81 is set long, the period in which the specific display B810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 during the card forgetting prevention display effect can be maintained long. It is possible to induce the person to pay attention to returning the card or the like.
Further, for example, by setting the second period BT82 shorter, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the frame button B22 and move to the state shown in FIG. 1463(a). In this case, in addition to being able to guide the player's line of sight to the specific display B810 with the moving frame button display B8813 (see FIG. 1475(a)), it is possible to fail the operation when a plurality of frame button displays B8813 are united. It is possible to direct it, and the possibility of shifting the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 to the state shown in FIG. 1476 can be increased.

As a result, the specific display B810 can be maintained in the center of the display screen during the card forgetting prevention display effect, and in addition, by moving the frame button display B8813, the player's line of sight is guided to the specific display B810. You can expect results. Therefore, compared to the case where there is no frame button display B8813, the player can be left with a stronger impression of the specific display B810.
Further, for example, by setting the second period BT82 longer, it is possible to maintain a longer period during which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid, so that an opportunity to operate the frame button B22 can be ensured.
Further, for example, by setting the third period BT83 shorter, it is possible to relatively lengthen T82, and it is possible to maintain a long period during which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid. Operation opportunities can be secured.
Further, for example, by setting the third period BT83 to be longer, the card-forgetting prevention display presentation after shifting to the state illustrated in FIG. 1463(a) by operating the frame button B22 in the second period BT82 Since a long remaining period can be ensured, it is possible to easily avoid incomplete changes in the settings of the amount of light and the volume.

The lengths of the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 may be changed for reasons other than those described above. For example, during a jackpot game, when there is a jackpot in a reserved ball for which the first symbol lottery has already been completed, the first period BT81 is extremely shortened, and the second period BT82 is controlled to be lengthened accordingly. You can do it.
In this case, the player can see that the card forgetting prevention display effect is started from the state of FIG. 1475(b) without going through the state of FIG. 1475(a). can give. By making the player understand that he or she will be able to grasp that the ball on hold has a big hit due to this sense of incongruity, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the card forgetting prevention display performance, so that the card forgetting prevention display is made possible. It is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to the production. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware of the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the player actually forgets the card or the like.
Next, the center frame C86 in the 62nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1478 to 1493. FIG.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the center frame 86 is composed of one component has been described, but the center frame C86 in the 62nd embodiment is composed of two members, an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1478 is a front view of the game board C13 in the 62nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1478, the center frame C86 is configured in a shape that can be fitted into the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1430) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. It has an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b.
The upper frame C86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1478) and left and right (left side and right side in FIG. 1478) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1430) of the base plate 60. 1478 along the inner edge of the window portion 60a of 60. As shown in FIG. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.
The upper frame C86a is a part of the center frame 86 in each of the embodiments described above (a portion disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1478) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, that is, the lower side The portion where the frame C86b is arranged) is omitted, and the other portions excluding the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above-described embodiments.
Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. Figure 1479 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 1480 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. 1479 and 1480, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the illustration of the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 1479 and 1480, the lower frame C86b has a receiving port COPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt1 communicating with the receiving port COPin, and a first passage CRt1. A second passage CRt2 through which balls guided through CRt1 flow down, and a third passage through which balls guided through the second passage CRt2 (balls that reciprocate along the longitudinal direction of the second passage CRt2) flow down. CRt3, a fourth passage CRt4 and a fifth passage CRt5 where the balls guided through the third passage CRt3 are sorted by the distribution member C170 and flow down, and a fourth passage CRt5 where the balls guided through the fourth passage CRt4 flow down. 6 path CRt6 and an outlet COPout formed as an opening for the ball guided through the fifth path CRt5 to flow out to the game area are formed (see FIGS. 1487 and 1488).
An upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 1478) is formed in the upper frame C86a. The upper frame passage CRt0 guides a ball entered (entered) from the area on the left side (the left side in FIG. 1478) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61). The receiving port COPin of the lower frame C86b communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0.
That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage CRt0 from the game area is flowed (entered) from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b via the receiving port COPin.
The lower frame C86b is provided with a distribution member C170 that operates according to the weight of the balls (see FIGS. 1487 and 1488), and when the balls in a row are guided through the third passage CRt3, , the preceding ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt4, while the following ball is distributed to the fifth passage CRt5. If the interval between consecutive balls is larger than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4.

Here, the outflow port COPout, which is the exit of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1478). . Therefore, the ball sorted to the fifth passage CRt5 is likely to enter the first winning port 64 (there is a high probability of winning the first winning port 64).
On the other hand, on the sixth passage CRt6, a first winning prize is formed as a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the front side (direction of arrow F) in order to make the ball guided through the sixth passage CRt6 flow out to the game area. Not only is the central outflow surface C181 formed (arranged) at a position above the opening 64 in the vertical direction, but it is also positioned vertically above the first winning opening 64 in the width direction of the game board 13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1478). The side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. Further, the sixth passage CRt6 is undulated, with a lateral outflow surface C182 formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulation.
Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out to the game area from the side outflow surface C182 than the probability of flowing out to the game area from the central outflow surface C181 in the sixth passage CRt6. , it is difficult to win the first prize winning port 64 (the probability of winning the first prize winning port 64 is lower than the ball distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 described above).
As described above, in the lower frame C86b of the present embodiment, when balls in a row flow into the third passage CRt3, the preceding balls are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4), while the rear The passing ball is sorted to a passage (fifth passage CRt5) in which the ball is likely to enter the first prize winning port 64 (in this embodiment, the ball almost certainly wins the first prize winning port 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the balls will win the first prize winning opening 64 (certainly win the prize), the players are expected to form a state in which the balls are connected to each other, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

1481 to 1493 in addition to FIGS. 1479 to 1480, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described.
FIG. 1481 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 1482 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. FIG. 1483 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, FIG. 1484 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 1485 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. 1486(a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXIIIa in FIG. 1484, and FIG. 1486(b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXIIIb in FIG.
1487 and 1488 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in FIG. 1483, and FIG. 1489 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b along line MDLXXVI-MDLXXVI in FIG. FIG. 1490(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b in the MDLXXVIIa section of FIG. 1487, and FIG. 1490(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b along the MDLXXVIIb-MDLXXVIIb line in FIG. 1483. be. Note that FIG. 1487 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 1488 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position.
As shown in FIGS. 1479 to 1490, the lower frame C86b includes a front member C110, a plate member C120 arranged on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member C110, and a front member C110. A back surface member C130 disposed opposite to the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) at a predetermined interval, a first intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface of the back surface member C130 (surface on the arrow F direction side), A second intermediate member C150 arranged to face the front surface of the back member C130 (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) with a predetermined interval, and a first intermediate member C150 interposed between the back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. A second interposed member C180 interposed between the facing member C160 and the distribution member C170, the front member C110 and the first and second intermediate members C140 and C150, and the back surface member C130. A decorative member C190 and a bypass member C200 are provided.

Each member of the lower frame C86b is fastened and fixed to each other by tapping screws, and the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 are rotatably supported by the rear member C130 to form one (single unit). ) (see FIG. 1479).
In the lower frame C86b, the members other than the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 are made of a light-transmissive resin material (that is, transparent so that the members on the back side and the sphere can be seen through). C170 and decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, and the player can visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution member C170 and the displacement of the decorative member C190 accompanying the operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
In this case, it is sufficient that at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 of the lower frame C86b are made of a light-transmitting resin material. At least one or both of the continuous state of the balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C170, or both. While being visually recognized, if it is possible to visually recognize that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170, such a ball is likely to flow from the outflow port COPout to the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, This is because almost all balls enter the ball, and it is sufficient that the player does not need to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5.
Note that the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 are made of a light-transmissive (or colored) resin material, and may be coated on the front surface or attached with a sticker.

On the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 are made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 It may be painted or attached with a seal. That is, the balls passing through the third passage CRt3 and the distribution member C170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.
The front member C110 includes a plate-like front portion C111 forming the front surface, a plate-like bottom portion C112 erected from the rear surface of the front portion C111, and one side in the longitudinal direction of the front portion C111 and the bottom portion C112 ( and a connecting portion C113 disposed on the arrow L direction side).
A plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the front portion C111 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the front portion C111. The lower frame C86b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60 .
In the front part C111, an outflow port COPout is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1478). The outflow port COPout is, as described above, an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the second interposed member C180 faces the upper surface of the bottom surface portion C112, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the opposed bottom surface portion C112 and the second interposed member C180 (recessed portion C183). be. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the through-hole formed through the second interposition member C180 is part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.
The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111. touched. As a result, entry of foreign matter such as a wire is suppressed.
A receiving port COPin is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) in the connecting portion C113. Receiving port COPin is an opening that receives a ball from upper frame passage CRt0 of upper frame C86a, as described above. When the center frame C86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the rear surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion C111 and the front surface of the connecting portion C113, and the two are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. This establishes communication between the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 and the receiving port COPin.
The dish member C120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C121 and a lower bottom surface portion C122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C123 and a lower side wall portion C124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C121 extends in the left-right direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from the top, and is inclined downward in a direction away from the receiving port COPin (arrow R direction). formed by The upper bottom surface portion C121 is positioned vertically below (in the direction of the arrow D) the receiving port COPin, and a vertical step is formed between the upper frame passage CRt0 and the upper frame passage CRt0. That is, the dish member C120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.
A concave groove C121a having a U-shaped cross section is formed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion C121 in the width direction (direction of arrows LR) (see FIG. 1490). The concave groove C121a extends linearly along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The width of the groove C121 (dimension in the direction of arrows LR) is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the depth of the groove C121a (dimension in the direction of arrow UD) is the bottom surface of the groove C121a. is set to a depth where the ball does not touch the
Thereby, the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 can be supported at two points (a pair of ridge line portions where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the groove C121a intersect). Therefore, the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased compared to when the groove C121a is not formed (that is, when the ball is supported at only one point). Therefore, the impact of the ball dropped from the upper frame passage CRt0 can be buffered (received) and the resistance when the ball rolls can be increased.
As described above, the ball is dropped from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121, and the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 is supported at two points. When a ball flows (falls) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), the preceding ball is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), It makes it easier for the ball to catch up with the preceding ball. Therefore, the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball can be reduced.

The upper side wall portion C123 separates the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). The width of the passage is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can only be guided in series.
In the upper side wall portion C123, a notch portion C123a is formed at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). A ball can flow down from the passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2).
The lower bottom surface portion C122 extends along the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow 1490(b)).
The lower side wall portion C124 includes the ends of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2) on one end side and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided), and the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2). ), respectively. The width of the passage is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can only be guided in series.

The lower bottom surface portion C122 is arranged in parallel with the upper bottom surface portion C121 when viewed from above, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow B) of the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the one end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the end on the arrow B direction side) are adjacent to each other.
The lower side wall portion C124 is not formed at the position corresponding to the cutout portion C123a in the upper side wall portion C123, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) through the cutout portion C123a A ball can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).
In the lower side wall portion C124, a notch portion C124a is formed at a position corresponding to the bottom portion (the lowest position in the vertical direction) of the arcuately curved lower bottom surface portion C122. Via the portion C124a, the ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).
As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is curved in an arc shape, and the upward slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122) extends from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). Since the ball is dropped, the dropped ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then the notch portion C124a. to the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) into the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) with a predetermined distance therebetween, the lower bottom surface portion C122 ( The reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt2) can be used to make the leading ball overtake the trailing ball and reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (linking the balls together). .
An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion C122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (that is, the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a part for causing the sphere guided through the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and is a portion for causing the ball to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface sloping downwards towards.
Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly discharged (flowed down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), the balls (balls in a row) in which the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced are changed to the rowed state. can be made to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the
The width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) in a top view is the same as the notch portion C124a. 1483).

In addition, when the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the notch portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls (traverses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is positioned at the farthest distance from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C124). position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to a range that overlaps with the center of the sphere in a top view (the trajectory of the lower top portion of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C122. rolling line crosses outflow surface C122a).
On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C122, the ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) will flow into the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). CRt2) does not reciprocate even once, or before it reciprocates a sufficient number of times, there is a risk that it will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. . That is, there is a risk that the preceding ball and the following ball will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) while keeping the gap between them without reducing the gap between them.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is inclined downward in the direction (arrow L direction) away from the notch portion C124a (see FIG. 1490). As a result, due to the action of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122, the ball is pressed against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the notch portion C124a, and the ball is pushed into the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second It can be rolled (reciprocated) in two passages CRt2).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the outflow surface C122a is easily overcome (easily crossed), and the ball is sufficiently reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the leading balls catch up the trailing balls and that the distance between the leading and trailing balls is reduced (the spheres are linked).

In addition, the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the cross-sectional shape on a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C122) An arc shape that is convex downward (in the direction of arrow D, see FIG. 1490(b)) is such that the radii of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction are It is made smaller than the arc-shaped radius in the region between (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the area including the outflow surface C122a is increased.
As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or to the vicinity thereof), the reciprocating motion of the ball is facilitated and the trailing ball is easily caught up with the preceding ball. , the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is low (the ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof, and the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a stage), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.
Note that the plate member C120 is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 Since it is arranged inside, the space in the front-rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the entire length of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the second passage CRt2) can be secured, and the balls can be easily connected.
The back surface member C130 includes a plate-shaped body portion C131, and a lower stopper portion C132, an upper stopper portion C133, and a pivot seat portion C134 erected from the front of the body portion C131.

The body portion C131 is formed with an opening C131a that is an opening for communicating passages (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and the rear side of the body portion C131. Below the opening C131a, a recess C131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C131. The concave portion C131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt5 between facing the bypass member C200.
The lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to contact the lower surface of the distribution member C170 when the distribution member C170 is displaced downward, and defines the second position of the distribution member C170 (see FIG. 1488). . On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is displaced upward, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the distribution member C170, and defines the first position (predetermined position) of the distribution member C170. (see Figure 1487).
The shaft support seat portion C134 is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. The shaft C192 is fixed to the decorative member C190, and the distribution member C170 is non-rotatably connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back surface of the main body portion C131, so that the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 It is integrally rotatably supported by the main body portion C131 (the shaft support seat portion C134). Further, the shaft C192 is pivotally supported by the pivotal support seat portion C134 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-like body portion C141, and a bottom portion C142, a top surface portion C143, and a passage portion C144 that are erected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the body portion C141. It is disposed on the left side of the member C130 when viewed from the front.

In the state where the first intermediate member C140 is arranged on the back member C130, the standing tips (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the passage portion C144 are in contact with the front surface of the back member C130. As a result, the space defined by the back member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (main body portion C141, bottom surface portion C142, and top surface portion C143) forms a third passage CRt3, and the back member C130 and the first intermediate member A space defined by C140 (passage portion C144) and the distribution member C170 at the second position forms a fourth passage CRt4 (see FIG. 1488).
In addition, the bottom portion C142 is inclined downward from the side of the plate member C120 toward the side of the distribution member C170. Further, the passage portion C144 includes a facing portion C144a formed at a position facing the distribution member C170 at the second position, and a bottom portion C144b forming a rolling surface of a ball. It is inclined downward from the side of the distribution member C170 at position 2 toward the side of the facing portion C144a, and is inclined downward from the side of the back member C130 toward the side of the front member C110. Therefore, the ball can be received in the fourth passage CRt4 from the distributing member C170 displaced to the second position, and the ball can flow out (roll) to the sixth passage CRt6.
Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the disk member C120 rolls the ball along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the ball rolls from the disk member C120 to the bottom surface portion C142 in the left-right direction ( The ball flows down (to the right in this embodiment) along the direction of the arrow LR), and the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) moves the ball that has flowed down from the plate member C120 in the left-right direction (direction of the arrow LR). ) (to the right in this embodiment).
In this case, the distance between the leading ball CB1 and the trailing ball CB2 (see FIG. 1491) is determined by the reciprocating motion of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). It flows down from the side bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) along the left-right direction, and flows down the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) along the left-right direction (rolling ), the interval between the two balls CB1 and CB2 can be confirmed from the front view, and can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The second intermediate member C150 includes a plate-like body portion C151 and a bottom portion C152 erected from the back surface of the body portion C151 (surface on the arrow B direction side), and is arranged on the right side of the back surface member C130 in front view. is set. In the state where the second intermediate member C150 is arranged on the back member C130, the upright end (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C152 abuts on the front surface of the back member C130.
A concave portion C151a is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body portion C151. The bottom surface portion C152 has a detour member C200 (trough portion C203) disposed opposite to the lower surface thereof, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the depression C151a and the bottom surface portion C152 and the detour member C200 (trough portion C203). be done. Therefore, for example, compared with the case where the detour member C200 is formed in a cylindrical shape and used as a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.
The first interposed member C160 is a member that forms a ball rolling surface in a portion of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the rear member C130 and the second intermediate member C150 facing each other. That is, a space defined by the back member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the first interposed member C160 forms part of the fifth passage CRt5.
The cross-sectional shape of the first interposed member C160 on a plane including the extending direction (arrow LR direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is directed downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). It is formed by curving in a convex circular arc shape (see FIG. 1488). Therefore, the balls distributed to the first interposing member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) by the distributing member C170 can flow out to the opening C131a after reciprocating on the first interposing member C160.

As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 directly flow out to the opening C131a, it is possible to lengthen the time required for the balls to flow out to the opening C131a. In other words, the player who expects the formation of a state with a high probability of winning a ball into the first winning hole 64 can easily be made aware of the formation of such a state and can secure the time to enjoy such a state. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the first interposed member C160 flows out to a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (that is, the lowest position in the vertical direction within the rolling surface of the first interposed member C160). A surface C160a is recessed. The outflow surface C160a is a portion for causing the sphere guided by the first interposition member C160 to flow out to the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface inclined downward toward the opening C131a.
The distribution member C170 includes a body portion C171 in which a fitting hole C171a is formed on one side, and a receiving portion C172 formed on the other side opposite to the side of the body portion C171 on which the fitting hole C171a is formed. , and a rolling portion C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body portion C171, and are rotatable about a shaft C192 (shaft support seat portion C134) fitted in the fitting hole C171a.
The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole having a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192 having a cross-sectional shape matching the cross-sectional shape is fitted into the fitting hole C171a, thereby non-rotatably fixing the shaft C192 to the main body portion C171. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 so as not to rotate, so that the main body portion C171 (distribution member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192. be.

In this case, the center of gravity of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 is positioned on one side (opposite side of the distribution member C170 across the axis C192, right side in FIG. 1487) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distribution member C170 is raised on the side of the receiving portion C172 (rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in a front view), and the rotation is restricted by the upper stopper portion C133 (first position (predetermined position)) (see FIG. 1487).
On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity as a whole to shift to the other side (axis C192) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). It is eccentric on the side where the dividing member C170 is arranged (left side in FIG. 1487). Therefore, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C170 is lowered on the receiving portion C172 side (rotated counterclockwise about the axis C192 in a front view), and rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C132. (positioned at the second position) (see FIG. 1488).
At least part of the main body C191 of the decorative member C190 is visible to the player, and the decorative member C190 (main body) is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position of the distribution member C170. The part C191) is also rotated, and the position (form) visually recognized by the player is changed. Therefore, based on the position (form) of the decorative member C190, the player can be made to recognize the state of the distribution member C170 (that is, the ball distribution direction). In addition, the decorative member C190 can serve both as a weight for displacing the distribution member C170 and as a part for recognizing the distribution direction of the balls, thereby reducing the product cost accordingly.
In addition, after the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, when the ball is discharged (outflowed) from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140, the distribution member C170 moves to the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 is returned to the first position (predetermined position) by the action of its own weight (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis C192).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C170 to the first position is performed by the weight of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the biasing spring biases the distribution member C170 toward the first position.
In addition, as compared with the case of using a biasing spring, the displacement (return operation) of the distributing member C170 to the first position can be made slower, so that the trailing ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling portion C173. can. That is, after the distributing member C170 starts displacing (rotating) from the second position toward the first position, the trailing ball CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow onto the rolling part C173. can increase the time it takes to Furthermore, it is possible to give the possibility that the third ball that follows the trailing ball CB2 also reaches the rolling part C173 (see FIGS. 1491 to 1493).
The receiving portion C172 includes a facing portion C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 at the first position, and a receiving portion C172a that supports the received ball at the first position and rolls the ball toward the passage portion C144 at the second position. and a bottom surface portion C172b forming a rolling surface for movement.
In the receiving portion C172, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C172a is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom portion C172b is the facing portion. It is formed to be inclined upward from C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 1487).

Here, in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C172a is inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the rotation of the facing portion C172a If the moving portion C173 side is inclined in a direction away from the third passage CRt3 more than the bottom portion C172b side, there is a risk that the ball that collides with the facing portion C172a will bounce upward and flow back into the third passage CRt3. There is
On the other hand, the facing portion C172a is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position. The opposing portion C172a receives the ball received from the bottom portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) of the ball, thereby suppressing the ball from flowing back to the third passage CRt3.
Further, in a state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed to be inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140. If this is the case, the ball received in the receiving portion C172 will flow out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 at an early stage, and the weight of the ball cannot be used, so that the distribution member C170 reaches the second position. There is a risk that it will not be allowed.
On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed so as to incline upward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position. At least until the distribution member C170 rotates from the first position by a predetermined amount, the ball can be held on the bottom surface portion C172b. Thereby, it is possible to delay the time until the ball received in the receiving portion C172 flows out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140. As a result, the weight of the ball can be effectively utilized to ensure that the distribution member C170 reaches the second position.

For the reason described above (prevention of backflow to the third passage CRt3), the facing portion C172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C173 side is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom portion C172b side.
The receiving portion C172 is formed so that the bottom portion C172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position ( See Figure 1488). As a result, the ball received in the receiving portion C172 can reliably flow out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140.
In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom part C172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the distribution member C170, and the distribution member C170 is moved to the second position (that is, the following ball is moved to the rolling part C173 (second 5 passage CRt5) can be easily maintained.
The rolling portion C173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the ball rolling on the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second interposition member C160 (fifth passage CRt5). In the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the second interposition member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) It is positioned (constructed) between the upstream end.

The upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (the end on the arrow L direction side) is formed so as to protrude from the facing portion C172a of the receiving portion C172. That is, the upstream end (the end in the arrow L direction) of the rolling portion C173 protrudes from the facing portion C172a toward the upstream side (the first intermediate member C140 (third passage CRt3) side, the arrow L direction). A plate-like portion is formed. By inserting this plate-like portion between the spheres CB1 and CB2, the two spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be separated.
In the state where the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, rolling relative to the height position at the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140 The height position of the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the portion C173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically downward (in the arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and the distribution member C170 arranged at the second position moves toward the first position by a predetermined amount (a predetermined rotation angle ), the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are arranged at the same height position.
Here, when a ball rolling on the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball displaces the distribution member C170 downward from the first position. The distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position by being (rotated) and having the lower surface of the distribution member C170 come into contact with the lower stopper portion C132.
In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C170 may bounce upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132. The height position of the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the height position of the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) of C140. Then, there is a possibility that the ball cannot flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the rolling portion C173.

In particular, when a ball collides with the distribution member C170 (the end face on the upstream side of the rolling part C173) that has been bounced upward, and the impact of the collision of the ball causes the distribution member C170 to be further bounced upward (the ball When the distribution member C170 is further pushed upwards by ( accepted).
On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, as described above, the distance between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) Since a step is formed therebetween, even if the distribution member C170 is bounced upward due to the impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is higher than the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 by the step between them. Positioning vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to allow the distribution member C170 to be flipped upward by the amount of the step between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is moved to the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3). can be easily made to flow (roll) into the rolling portion C173.
Further, in the distribution member C170, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface in the direction of the arrow L) extends from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 ( It is inclined downward toward the bottom surface portion C142). That is, the upstream end surface of the rolling contact portion C173 is closer to the first intermediate member C140 at the receiving portion C172 (opposing portion C172a) side edge than the rolling surface side edge portion of the rolling contact portion C173. It is formed into a shape to be approximated.
As a result, when the ball collides with the distribution member C170 (the end face on the upstream side of the rolling part C173) that has been flipped upward, the ball collides with the distribution member C170 (the end face on the upstream side of the rolling part C173). ) can be a force in the direction of pushing down the distribution member C170. As a result, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the preceding ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is moved to the bottom portion C142 (the third passage CRt3 ) to the rolling portion C173 (rolling).

The receiving portion C172 and the rolling portion C173 are arranged on the same side (the side on which the distribution member C170 rotates in the same direction due to the weight of the ball) with respect to the C192. Therefore, even if the ball is ejected from the receiving portion C172 after the distribution member C170 is placed at the second position due to the weight of the ball received in the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling portion C173 is Utilizing this, the distribution member C170 can be maintained at the second position. That is, when there is a ball to be guided to the fifth passage CRt5, the weight of the ball can be used to maintain the posture of the distribution member C170 in a posture for guiding the ball to the fifth passage CRt5. .
Therefore, it is not necessary to maintain the distribution member C170 at the second position by using the weight of the ball received in the receiving portion C172 (the ball rolling on the bottom portion C172b), and the extended length of the bottom portion C172b can be shortened, and the distribution member C170 can be miniaturized accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the distribution member C170.
Here, the distribution member C170 has a direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) toward the receiving portion C172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the ball, the direction of the arrow R), and to the passage portion C144 (the direction in which the received ball rolls, the direction of the arrow L) is the opposite direction. That is, in the receiving portion C172, the downward (rolling) direction of the ball is reversed (changed direction).
As a result, compared to the case where the direction in which the ball is received by the receiving portion C172 and the direction in which the ball rolls from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 are the same, the balls are distributed for the time required for reversal. It is possible to secure the time to stay in the member C170 (receiving portion C172), and it is possible to easily maintain the distribution member C170 at the second position by using the weight of the ball staying in the receiving portion C172. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled on the rolling portion C173.

In addition, since the reversal of the ball can be used to secure the residence time, the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened accordingly, and the size of the distribution member C170 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the distribution member C170.
The second interposed member C180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the facing front member C111 and the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, the space defined by the front member C110, the first intermediate member C140, the second intermediate member C150, and the second interposed member C180 forms the sixth passage CRt6.
As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 has a front side (arrow A concave surface (the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the F direction). Further, an undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6, and the lateral outflow surface C182 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while the central outflow surface C181 is arranged at the top of the undulation.
Note that the upper edge of the front portion C111 of the front member C110 (the edge in the direction of the arrow U) is the upper surface of the second interposed member C180 (rolling It protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the moving surface). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 flows out (flows down) to the game area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is provided in the bottom surface of the second interposition member C180, and as described above, a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110. .
The decorative member C190 includes a plate-shaped body portion C191 and a shaft C192 fixed to the body portion C191, and as described above, is connected (integrated) to the distribution member C170 via the shaft C192. ) is done. On the front of the main body C191, a pattern such as a character is displayed by printing or attaching a sticker, and based on the movement (displacement) of the character, the movement of the distribution member C170 can be visually recognized by the player. .
Axis C192 is arranged in a posture orthogonal to base plate 60 (see FIG. 1478). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the lower frame C86b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
The detouring member C200 includes a plate-like body portion C201, a wall portion C202 erected from the front surface of the body portion C201 (surface in the direction of arrow F), and a portion of the wall surface portion C202 further extending toward the front side. A gutter portion C203 is provided and formed, and is disposed on the back side of the back member C130 at a position facing the opening C131a.

In the state where the bypass member C200 is arranged on the back member C130, the upright tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall surface portion C202 abuts the back surface of the back member C130 (main body portion C131), and the gutter portion C203 The upright tip (arrow F direction side) contacts the back surface of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge of the gutter portion C203 contacts the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152). touched.
As a result, the space partitioned by the back member C130 (body portion C131) and the detour member C200 (body portion C201 and wall surface portion C202), the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152) and the detour member C200 (trough portion C203) A part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned by C203) (see FIG. 1489).
Note that the gutter portion C203 is inclined downward from the back surface member C130 side toward the second intermediate member C150 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the bypass member C200 from the opening C131a of the back member C130 rolls on the gutter portion C203, and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 and the second interposed member C180 (recessed portion C183) can flow into a fifth passage CRt5 formed in .
Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C170 will be described. FIGS. 1491 to 1493 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C170, and correspond to the cross section taken along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in FIG.

1491(a) and 1491(b) show a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, and correspond to FIG. 1487. FIG. FIGS. 1492(b) and 1493 show a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, and correspond to FIG. 1488. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1491(a), when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the receiving portion C172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (ball CB1 can flow in).
That is, in the receiving portion C172, the facing portion C172a is arranged at a position that intersects with the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface), and is vertically below the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). The bottom portion C172b is arranged at a position (direction of arrow D).
In addition, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the bottom surface of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface and The distance between the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) on the opposite side (the surface in the direction of arrow D) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere can pass). .

On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the rolling portion C173 is positioned at a position where the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 cannot be received (the ball CB1 cannot flow in). placed in
That is, the bottom surface portion C172b of the rolling portion C173 is arranged at a position (a position one step higher) vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) an extension line extending from the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). The vertical interval (height of the step) between the rolling portion C173 and the extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from overcoming the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 at the first position.
In addition, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end (the arrow L direction side end) is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension that the sphere cannot pass through). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from overcoming the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 at the first position. However, the interval may be larger than the diameter of the sphere.
When the ball CB1 (preceding ball) and the ball CB2 (following ball separated by a predetermined distance from the preceding ball) roll on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, FIG. ), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, the ball CB1 abuts (receives) on the facing portion C172a, and is held in the receiving portion C172.

Also, when the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the sphere CB2 catches up with the sphere CB1, and the sphere CB2 comes into contact with the sphere CB1. As described above, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, the distance between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere ( Since the ball CB2 is set to have a dimension that the ball cannot pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball CB2 from passing over the ball CB1 and flowing into the rolling portion C173. That is, the ball CB2 can be made to wait behind (upstream) the ball CB1.
As shown in FIG. 1491(b), when the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball CB1 causes the distribution member C170 to move from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 1492(a). is displaced (rotated) by Also, when the ball CB2 is catching up with the ball CB1, the weight of the ball CB2 also acts on the distribution member C170.
Here, the receiving portion C172 has a region on the side of the facing portion C172a connected to the bottom portion C172b and a region on the side of the bottom portion C172b connected to the facing portion C172a. is curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C192 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion holds the sphere It is possible.
In addition, the distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C172b (the end portion in the direction of the arrow L)) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is When the dividing member C170 is arranged at the first position, the dimension is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimension that the sphere cannot pass through), and the dividing member C170 is displaced from the first position to the second position ( rotated) to gradually expand.

That is, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position (a position between FIGS. 1492(a) and 1492(b)) between the first position and the second position, the above-described The distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C172b (the end in the direction of the arrow L)) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is the diameter of the sphere. When the distribution member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position, the above-described interval is further expanded to the second position. The maximum spacing is formed at two positions.
Therefore, while the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) while receiving the ball CB1 in the receiving portion C172 between the first position and the predetermined intermediate position. As a result, the state where the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, and the state where the sphere CB2 is positioned at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained.
In this case, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) (the end portion on the arrow R direction side) and the upstream of the bottom surface of the rolling portion C173 (the surface opposite to the rolling surface, the surface on the arrow D direction side) The distance between the end (the end on the arrow L direction side) is gradually reduced by displacing (rotating) the distributing member C170 from the first position toward the second position, and the distributing member C170 Before reaching the predetermined intermediate position, it is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension that the sphere cannot pass through). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sphere CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172.
Further, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position, the trajectory of the sphere CB1 held in the receiving portion C172 (the connecting portion between the facing portion C172a and the bottom portion C172b) The locus of the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface of the rolling part C173 (the surface opposite to the rolling surface, the surface in the direction of arrow D) from the outer edge (the outer edge on the side opposite to the axis C192) is configured to pass through the side closer to the axis C192.

Therefore, it is possible to maintain the state where the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 and the state where the sphere CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142, and the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173. ) can push back (push back) the ball CB2. That is, the upstream end of the rolling part C173 can be inserted between the balls CB1 and CB2 to separate the two balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sphere CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172. Also, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling portion C173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.
When the distribution member C170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. flows down to the rolling portion C173 (received by the rolling portion C173).
As shown in FIGS. 1492(b) and 1493, when the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (fourth passage CRt4), CB2 rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows into the first interposed member C160 (fifth passage CRt5).
After the balls CB1 and CB2 have flowed into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the distribution member C170 is returned (displaced) from the second position toward the first position by its own weight. Note that even after the distribution member C170 is placed at the second position or after the distribution member C170 starts to move (rotate) from the second position to the first position, the third ball reaches the rolling portion C173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C173 and is flowed (guided) into the fifth passage CRt5.

As described above, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface facing the arrow L direction) extends from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 (the bottom surface portion C142). ), even after the distributing member C170 starts displacing (rotating) from the second position to the first position, the inclined surface on the upstream side of the rolling part C173 ( end face) can be used to facilitate the flow of the third ball into the rolling portion C173.
Note that the distribution member C170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one ball. Therefore, when the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the spheres CB1 and CB2 are received in order by the receiving portion C172, and after going through the sorting operation described above, they are placed in the fourth passage CRt4. distributed to.
As described above, according to the lower frame C86b of the 62nd embodiment, when the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are connected with an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the interval between the two spheres are in close contact with each other is 0), distributes (guides) the ball CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4, and distributes (guides) the ball CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distributing member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, when the spheres CB1 and CB2 are connected to each other with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both spheres (the spheres CB1 and CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), so that the entertainment is improved. be able to.
Next, the center frame C2086 in the 63rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1494 to 1509. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figure 1494 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b in the 63rd embodiment, and Figure 1495 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. 1494 and 1495, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the illustration of the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 is omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 1494 and 1495, the lower frame C2086b has a receiving port COP2000in formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt2001 communicating with the receiving port COP2000in, and the first passage CRt2001. A ball guided through CRt2001 (a ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction of the first passage CRt2001) flows down a second passage CRt2002, and a ball guided through the second passage CRt2002 is distributed by a distribution member C2170. 3rd passage CRt2003 and 4th passage CRt2004 flowed down, balls guided through the 3rd passage CRt2003, and balls falling from the 4th passage CRt2004 (balls that did not reach the end of the 4th passage CRt2004) a sixth passage CRt2006 where the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (a ball reaching the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flows down, and a ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows down An outflow port COP2000out formed as an opening for flowing out to the game area is formed (see FIGS. 1502 and 1503).
Note that the center frame in the 63rd embodiment is composed of an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. Except that the shape of the upper frame passage (not shown) of the upper frame in the 63rd embodiment is different from that of the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the 62nd embodiment, the rest of the configuration is the same as in the 62nd embodiment. Since it has the same configuration as the upper frame C86a, its description is omitted.
The upper frame passage is a ball entered (entered) from the area on the left side (left side in FIG. 1478) of the game area (area between the center frame (upper frame) and the rail 61 (see FIG. 1478)). , and the downstream end of the upper frame passage communicates with the receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b. That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage from the game area flows (entered) from the upper frame passage into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b via the receiving port COP2000in.

The lower frame C2086b is provided with a distribution member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the ball (see FIGS. 1502 and 1503), and when the continuous balls are guided through the second passage CRt2002, , the preceding ball is distributed to the third passage CRt2003, while the following ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004. If the interval between consecutive balls is larger than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the third passage CRt2003.
Here, the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt4 flows down to the fifth passage CRt5. It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the prize winning opening 64 (see FIG. 1478). Therefore, the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 easily enters the first winning port 64 (there is a high probability of winning the first winning port 64).
On the other hand, the sixth passage CRt2006 has a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the front side (direction of arrow F) in order to make the ball guided to the sixth passage CRt2006 flow out to the game area. Not only is the central outflow surface C181 formed (arranged) at a position above the opening 64 in the vertical direction, but it is also positioned vertically above the first winning opening 64 in the width direction of the game board 13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1478). The side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. Further, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed with undulations, a lateral outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulations.
Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out to the game area from the side outflow surface C182 than the probability of flowing out to the game area from the central outflow surface C181 in the sixth passage CRt2006. , it is difficult to enter the first winning hole 64 (the probability of entering the first winning hole 64 is lower than that of balls guided through the fifth passage CRt2005).

In this way, the lower frame C2086b in this embodiment, as in the 62nd embodiment, allows the preceding ball to pass through the normal passage (the 3 path CRt 2003), while the trailing ball is likely to enter the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, a path that almost certainly wins the ball in the first winning port 64 (fifth path CRt 2005) ) to the fourth passage CRt2004. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the balls will win the first prize winning opening 64 (certainly win the prize), the players are expected to form a state in which the balls are connected to each other, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 is formed so as to be able to fall into the sixth passage on the way, and only the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling falls to the fifth passage CRt2005. It is possible to flow down (inflow). Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball will win the first prize opening 64 (certainly win the prize), after the following balls in the continuous state are distributed to the fourth passage CRt 2004, such a The player can expect that the ball will reach the end of the 4-passage CRt 2004 without falling, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1496 to 1509 in addition to FIGS. 1494 to 1495, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described.
FIG. 1496 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 1497 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. FIG. 1498 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, FIG. 1499 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 1500 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. FIG. 1501(a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1499, and FIG. 1501(b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b viewed in the direction of arrow MDLXXXVIIIb in FIG.

1502 and 1503 are cross-sectional views of lower frame C2086b taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX of FIG. 1504 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of lower frame C2086b taken along line MDXCI-MDXCI of FIG. 1500, and FIG. 1505 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of lower frame C2086b taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII of FIG. FIG. 1502 shows a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 1503 shows a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position.
As shown in FIGS. 1494 to 1505, the lower frame C2086b includes a front member C2110, a dish member C2120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member C2110, and a front member C2110. A back surface member C2130 arranged to face the back surface (surface in the arrow B direction) at a predetermined interval, a first intermediate member C2140 disposed in front of the back surface member C2130 (surface in the arrow F direction), 2 Intermediate member C2150, first interposed member C2160, magnetic part C2400 and receiving member C2500, distribution member C2170 interposed between opposing rear member C2130 and first intermediate member C2140, front member C2110 and rear member It includes a second interposed member C2180 interposed between the opposing C2130s, and a detour member C2200 and a magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130.
In the lower frame C2086b, each member is fastened and fixed by tapping screws, and the distribution member C2170 is rotatably supported by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140. ) (see FIG. 1494).
In the lower frame C2086b, the members other than the distribution member C2170 are made of a light-transmissive resin material (that is, transparent to allow the members on the back side and the sphere to be seen through), and the distribution member C2170 is colored. Constructed from a resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the balls passing through the first path CRt2001 to the sixth path CRt2006, and the player can visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that at least the first intermediate member C2140 of the lower frame C2086b is made of a light-transmitting resin material. The player is made to visually recognize the continuous state of the balls in the second passage CRt2002 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, If it is possible to visually recognize that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170, the ball will flow from the outflow port COPout to the first winning port 64 with a high probability (in this embodiment, it will flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 This is because almost all balls enter the ball, and it is sufficient that the player does not have to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005.
Note that the distribution member C2170 is made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material, and the front surface thereof may be painted or a seal may be attached.
On the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or may be painted or attached with a seal. That is, the balls passing through the third passage CRt2003 and the distribution member C2170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.
The front member C2110 includes a plate-like front portion C111 that forms the front surface, and a plate-like bottom portion C112 that stands up from the rear surface of the front portion C111.

A plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the front portion C111 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the front portion C111. The lower frame C2086b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60 .
In the front part C111, an outflow port COPout is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1478). The outflow port COPout is, as described above, an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out to the game area.
The bottom surface portion C112 has an upper surface on which the bottom surface of the second interposed member C2180 is arranged to face. A cylindrical portion communicating with the outlet COPout is formed in the bottom portion C112, and this cylindrical portion is a part of the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, since the overlapping portion (joint) between the front member C2110 and the second interposed member C180 is not formed on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, when the player looks into the inside of the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outflow port COPout, The appearance can be improved, and foreign matter such as wires can be prevented from entering through the overlapped portion (seam).
The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the upright tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C112 faces the front surface of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first interposed member C2160. abutted. As a result, entry of foreign matter such as wires is suppressed.

The dish member C2120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C2121 and a lower bottom surface portion C2122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and a side wall portion C2124 that forms the side wall of the passage.
The upper bottom surface portion C2121 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows LR) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and is inclined downward in a direction (direction of arrow) away from the receiving port COP2000in. formed by
The lower bottom surface portion C2122 extends along the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow 1490(b)).
The side wall portion C2124 has a passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (the first passage CRt2001) and ends of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001) in the longitudinal direction (direction in which the ball is guided) on one end side and the other end side. and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). The width of the passage is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can only be guided in series.

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 intersects the upper bottom surface portion C2121 at approximately 90 degrees when viewed from above, and is the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 and one end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122. side (the end in the direction of arrow F) are adjacent to each other.
In the side wall portion C2124, a notch portion C124a is formed at a position corresponding to the bottom portion (the lowest position in the vertical direction) of the arcuately curved lower bottom surface portion C2122. The ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002).
As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is curved in an arc shape, and the ball flows downward from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 on the upward slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122). After reciprocating the dropped ball between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), the ball is moved from the notch portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C2142 (first passage CRt2001). 2 passage CRt2002).
As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) while being separated by a predetermined distance, Reciprocating motion can be used to force leading balls to overtake trailing balls and reduce the spacing between the leading and trailing balls (chaining of balls).

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 is recessed with an outflow surface C122a at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (that is, the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a part for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002), and is a portion for causing the ball to flow out to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is formed as a concave surface sloping downwards towards.
Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly discharged (flowed down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001), the balls (balls in a continuous state) in which the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced are changed to the continuous state. can be made to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining the
The width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) in a top view is the same as the notch portion C124a. 1498).
Also, in a top view, when the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (facing side) of the notch portion C124a, the ball rolls (traverses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001) is positioned at the farthest distance from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C2124). position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that overlaps with the center of the sphere when viewed from the top (the trajectory of the lower top portion of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C2122. rolling line crosses outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) will flow into the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) without reciprocating once, or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, there is a risk of flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. . In other words, there is a risk that the preceding ball and the following ball do not decrease in space, and that the two balls flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining the space between them.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is inclined downward in the direction (arrow L direction) away from the notch portion C124a (see FIG. 1502). As a result, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) can roll (reciprocate).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the outflow surface C122a is easily overcome (easily crossed), and the ball is sufficiently reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the leading balls catch up the trailing balls and that the distance between the leading and trailing balls is reduced (the spheres are linked).
The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the cross-sectional shape on a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122) 1490(b) and 1501(b)), the radii of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction are It is made smaller than the arc-shaped radius in the region between the side and the other end side (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape is increased in the area including the outflow surface C122a.

As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or to the vicinity thereof), the ball can be easily reciprocated and the following ball can easily catch up with the preceding ball. , the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is low (the ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof, and the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a stage), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.
The back surface member C2130 includes a plate-shaped main body portion C2131 and a pivot seat portion C2134 erected from the front of the main body portion C2131.
The body portion C2131 has an opening C2131a, which is an opening for communicating passages (fifth passage CRt2005) formed on the front side and the back side of the body portion C2131, and a distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). An opening C2131c, which is an opening for avoiding interference, is formed. Below the opening C2131a, a recess C2131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C2131. The concave portion C2131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt2005 between facing the detour member C2200.
The shaft support seat portion C2134 is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170. The shaft C2174 is pivotally supported by the pivotal support seat C2134 and the pivotal support seat C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-like body portion C2141, a bottom portion C2142 erected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the body portion C2141, a top surface portion C2143, a passage portion C2144, and a lower stopper portion C2145. and is disposed on the left side of the back member C2130 in front view.
The body portion C2141 is formed with an opening C2141a that is an opening for communicating passages (the third passage CRt2003 and the sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front side and the rear side of the body portion C2141. A pivot seat C2141b is erected from the rear surface of the main body C2141. The shaft support seat portion C2141b is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170.
In the state where the first intermediate member C2140 is arranged on the back member C2130, the upright ends (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 are brought into contact with the front surface of the back member C2130. As a result, the space defined by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (the main body portion C2141, the bottom portion C2142, and the top portion C2143) forms a second passage CRt2002, and the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member A space defined by C2140 (bottom portion C2142 and passage portion C2144) and distribution member C2170 at the second position forms a third passage CRt2003 (see FIG. 1503).
The bottom portion C2142 is inclined downward from the side of the tray member C2120 toward the side of the sorting member C2170. Further, the passage portion C2144 is located between the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) at the second position and the opening C2141a facing each other. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side. Therefore, when the passage portion C2144 receives the ball from the distribution member C2170 displaced to the second position, the ball can flow out (roll) to the sixth passage CRt2006 through the opening C2141a.

In addition, the bottom portion C2142 is formed so as to be able to abut on the upper surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) when the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) is displaced upward. A first position is defined (see diagram 1502). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to contact the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) when the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) is displaced downward. defines a second position of (see diagram 1503).
Note that when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (raised) upward. That is, the bottom surface portion C2173 in the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position is positioned above (the arrow U side).
The second intermediate member C2150 includes a plate-like body portion C2151, a bottom portion C2152 and wall portions C2153 and C2154 that are erected from the back surface of the body portion C2151 (surface on the arrow B direction side). It is disposed on the right side of the rear member C2130 in front view while maintaining a predetermined distance from the member C2140.
In the present embodiment, the facing interval (interval in the direction of arrows LR) between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 is the lengthwise dimension (in the direction of arrows LR) of the receiving member C2500. It is set to a value that is larger than the sum of at least two times the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) (both between the first intermediate member C2140 and between the second intermediate member C2150), a space through which the sphere can pass is secured. can do. Therefore, the types (variations) of the direction in which the ball flows down can be increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the state where the second intermediate member C2150 is arranged on the back member C2130, the bottom surface portion C2152 is arranged at a position where it can communicate with the opening C2131a of the back member C2130 and is inclined downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when receiving the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball that has fallen from the end of the magnetic portion C2400), the bottom portion C2152 can flow (roll) the ball into the opening C2131a. That is, part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom surface portion C2152.
In the state where the second intermediate member C2150 is arranged on the back member C2130, the standing ends (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2152 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 abut against the front surface of the back member C2130. In addition, the body portion C2151 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 protrude upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by a predetermined amount along the edges of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom surface portion C2152.
The wall surface portion C2153 positioned farther from the magnetic portion C2400 intersects with the extension line of the moving direction of the ball guided in the fourth passage CRt2004 (the direction along the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 (the edge that attracts the ball)). form a surface to As a result, the ball ejected from the fourth passage CRt2004 (dropped from the magnetic portion C2400) is directly received by the wall surface portion C2153, or bounced (jumped up) by the bottom surface portion C2152 and then received by the wall surface portion C2153, It can be dropped onto the bottom part C2152. In addition, in the embodiment, the wall surface portion C2153 is formed to a position higher than the lower edge (the edge where the ball is attracted) at the end (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the magnetic portion C2400.
On the other hand, the projection dimension of the bottom surface portion C2152 from the upper surface is the projection dimension of the wall surface portion C2154 located closer to the magnetic portion C2400, and the projection dimension of the main body portion C2151 is the wall surface portion located farther from the magnetic portion C2400. It is made smaller (lower) than the projection dimension of C2153. As a result, the ball can fall from the bottom surface portion 2152 (fifth passage CRt2005) to the first interposed member C2160 or the second interposed member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, it is preferable that the projection dimension of the wall surface portion C2154 and the main body portion C2151 be smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

The receiving member C2500 includes a first bottom surface portion C2501 and a second bottom surface portion C2502 that form an upper surface (rolling surface). is disposed below (the arrow U direction side). Therefore, a ball falling from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be received by the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 and flowed down (rolled) to the first interposition member C2160.
The first bottom surface portion C2501 is inclined downward from the connection portion with the second bottom surface portion C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 (direction of arrow L). is inclined downward toward the second intermediate member C2150 (in the direction of arrow R) from the connection portion with the . Also, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are inclined downward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back member C2130 side) (see FIG. 1505).
As described above, on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows LR), spaces corresponding to at least one sphere are formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150.
Therefore, the ball dropped from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) rolls in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, and the first interposition member C2160 can flow down to In this case, the direction in which the ball falls from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be varied depending on the part (first bottom surface portion C2501 or second bottom surface portion C2502) that received the ball.

In addition, after rolling the ball dropped from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, the first bottom surface It can flow down from the downstream end of the portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 to the first interposition member C2160. This makes it easier for the ball to roll along the longitudinal direction of the first interposing member C2160.
At least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back member C2130 side). It may be non-inclined (that is, horizontal) from the front side of C2500 toward the back side (back member C2130 side).
In addition, the receiving member C2500 has a form in which a space through which the ball can pass is secured only on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (that is, one of the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150). A space in which the ball can flow down (pass) is formed only between the two, and the ball cannot flow down (pass) between the other). In this case, the longitudinal dimension of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 can be secured, and the rolling time of the ball can be lengthened accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
The first interposed member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface on which the ball that has flowed down from the receiving member C2500 flows down to the second interposed member C2180. It is interposed between the opposing sides.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposition member C2160 has a concave surface (central outflow A surface C2161 and a lateral outflow surface C2162) are formed. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (that is, the first winning port 64) of the second interposed member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is the central outflow surface. It is formed (arranged) at two locations with different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1478) from C2161. Further, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160 is undulated, the side outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and the central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulation.
The side outflow surface C2162 is positioned outward (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) in the width direction of the game board 13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1478) with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second interposed member C2180. are formed (arranged) differently. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 is directed downward toward the outside of the side outflow surface C182 of the second interposed member C2180 (that is, toward the side outflow surface C182). It can flow down to the upper surface (rolling surface). Therefore, such a ball can be easily rolled along the longitudinal direction of the second interposed member C2180. As a result, an opportunity for the ball to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 of the second interposed member C2180 (that is, to enter (win) the first prize winning port 64) can be created, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
The distribution member C2170 includes a body portion C2171 on which a shaft C2174 is supported, a receiving portion C2172 formed on one side of the body portion C2171, a rolling portion C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the body portion C2171, A brass weight C2175 disposed (attached) to the body portion C2171 at a position on the opposite side of the receiving portion C2172 across the axis C2174, centering on the axis C2174 (shaft support seats C2134, C2141b). rotatable.
The center of gravity of the sorting member C2170 is on the other side (the side on which the weight C2175 is arranged, that is, the side opposite to the receiving portion C21720 across the axis C2174, the right side in FIG. 1502) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distribution member C2170 is raised on the side of the receiving portion C2172 (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 in a front view), and the rotation is restricted by the bottom portion C2142 (at the first position). arranged state) (see FIG. 1502).

On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the center of gravity as a whole is positioned on one side (the receiving portion C2172) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174) due to the weight of the ball. 1503 (left side of FIG. 1503) opposite to the weight C2175 with respect to the axis C2174. Therefore, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C2172, the distribution member C2170 is lowered on the receiving portion C2172 side (rotated counterclockwise about the axis C2174 in front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C2145. 1503 (see FIG. 1503).
In addition, after the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, when the ball is discharged (outflowed) from the receiving portion C2172 to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140, the distribution member C2170 moves to the distribution member C2170 (the eccentricity of the position of the center of gravity from the axis C2174), it is returned to the first position.
In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position is performed by the self weight (weight) of the distribution member C2170. The structure can be simplified compared to the case where the member C2170 is biased toward the first position.
In addition, compared to the case of using a biasing spring, the displacement (return operation) of the distributing member C2170 to the first position can be made slower, so that the trailing ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling portion C2173. can. That is, after the distribution member C2170 starts displacing (rotating) from the second position toward the first position, the following ball CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow onto the rolling part C2173. can increase the time it takes to Furthermore, it is possible to give the possibility that the third ball that follows the trailing ball CB2 also reaches the rolling part C2173 (see FIGS. 1506 to 1508).

The receiving portion C2172 includes a facing portion C2172a formed at a position facing the second passage CRt2002 at the first position, and a ball received at the first position and rolling the ball toward the passage portion C2144 at the second position. and a bottom portion C2172b forming a rolling surface for movement.
In the receiving portion C2172, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom portion C2172b is the facing portion. It is formed to be inclined upward from C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 1502).
Here, in a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (rotation of the facing portion C2172a). If the moving portion C2173 side is inclined in a direction away from the second passage CRt2002 more than the bottom portion C2172b side, there is a risk that the ball that collides with the opposing portion C2172a will bounce upward and flow back into the second passage CRt2002. There is
On the other hand, the facing portion C2172a is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position. The ball received from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) is received by the facing portion C2172a, thereby suppressing the ball from flowing back to the third passage CRt2003.

Further, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed to be inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 (passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140. If this occurs, the ball received in the receiving portion C2172 will flow out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 at an early stage, and the weight of the ball cannot be used, so that the distribution member C2170 reaches the second position. There is a risk that it will not be allowed.
On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed so as to incline upward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position. At least until the distribution member C2170 rotates from the first position by a predetermined amount, the ball can be held on the bottom surface portion C2172b. Thereby, it is possible to delay the time until the ball received in the receiving portion C2172 flows out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140. As a result, the weight of the ball can be effectively utilized to ensure that the distribution member C2170 reaches the second position.
In this case, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface portion C2172b is a region on the base end side (the right side in FIG. 1502, the arrow R direction side) connected to the facing portion C2172a in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position. is set to a larger angle than the angle of upward inclination in the region on the tip end side opposite to the facing portion C2172a (left side in FIG. 1502, arrow L direction side). Also, in other words, in the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the bottom surface portion C2172b has a downward inclination angle in a region on the opposite side to the facing portion C2172a (left side in FIG. 1502). The angle is set to be larger than the angle of downward inclination in the region on the proximal side (right side in FIG. 1502) connected to the portion C2172a.
Therefore, in the initial stage when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the rising slope in the region on the base end side (the right side in FIG. 1502) of the bottom surface portion C2172b is used to (Bottom part C2172b) while ensuring that the ball is held, in the latter stage, using the downward slope in the region on the tip side (left side of FIG. 1502) of the bottom part C2172b, the passage part C2144 (third passage CRt2003) It is possible to smoothly perform the volley of the ball.

For the reason described above (prevention of backflow to the second passage CRt2002), the facing portion C2172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom portion C2172b side.
The receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C2172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position ( (see Figure 1503). As a result, the ball received in the receiving portion C2172 can reliably flow out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.
In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom part C2172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the distribution member C2170, and the distribution member C2170 is moved to the second position (that is, the following ball is moved to the rolling part C2173 (second 4 passage CRt4) can be easily maintained.
The rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region opposite to the receiving portion C2172 (bottom portion 2172b) across the axis C2174. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position by the weight of the ball received in the receiving portion C2172, the area is raised upward (in the direction of arrow U) along with the rotation. A rolling part C2173 is formed in a region including at least That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling portion C2173 is lifted upward, shortening the distance to the magnetic portion C2400. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, if the rolling part C2173 is formed only on the opposite side in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) across the axis C2174, the bottom part When the ball falls from 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the momentum of the drop may cause the distribution member C2170 to rotate toward the first position. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling portion C2173 is lowered, and the distance between it and the magnetic portion C2400 is increased. There is a risk that it will not be (adsorbed).
On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 is formed over a range (region) overlapping the axis C2174 in the vertical direction when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 1503). That is, the region on the upstream side (second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling portion C2173 is located on one horizontal side (arrow L direction side) of the axis C2174, and the weight of the ball rolling on the upstream side is It can act as a force in the direction of maintaining the distribution member C2170 at the second position.
Therefore, when the ball falls from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the momentum of the drop are used to maintain the state of the second position. A force is applied to the distribution member C2170, and while the distribution member C2170 is about to be displaced (rotated) in the direction of maintaining the state at the second position due to the action of inertia, the ball is moved downstream of the rolling part C2173. It can be rolled to the side area. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.
The extension length of the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 (the length in the direction in which the ball is guided) is set to be larger than the extension length of the rolling portion C2173. Therefore, while the ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173, at the same time another ball rolls on the bottom portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172. That is, while the ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173, the weight of another ball can be applied to the distribution member C2170 on the bottom portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172.

As a result, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position toward the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). to be suppressed). As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.
In particular, since the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (a direction perpendicular to the axis C2174), as the ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the point of action of the force (the The distance between the position where the weight acts) and the fulcrum (rotation center) can be increased (increased). That is, as the ball rolls on the bottom portion C2172b, the distribution member C2170 can be easily maintained at the second position (although the distribution member C2170 arranged at the second position is displaced (rotated) to the first position). required force can be increased).
As a result, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position toward the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). to be suppressed). As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily jumped (attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.
Here, the distribution member C2170 has a direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) toward the receiving portion C2172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the ball, the direction of the arrow R), and is opposite to the direction in which the ball rolls (the direction in which the received ball rolls, the direction of arrow L). That is, in the receiving portion C2172, the downward (rolling) direction of the ball is reversed (changed direction).

As a result, compared to the case where the direction in which the ball is received by the receiving portion C2172 and the direction in which the ball rolls in the receiving portion C2172 are the same, the ball is distributed to the distribution member C2170 (receiving It is possible to secure the time to stay in the part C2172), and it is possible to easily maintain the distribution member C2170 at the second position by using the weight of the ball staying in the receiving part C2172. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled on the rolling portion C2173.
The rolling portion C2173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). In the state where the dividing member C2170 is arranged at the second position, between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). It is positioned (installed).
As described above, the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position, so that the height position of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part C2173 changes in the vertical direction. It is displaced (lifted/lowered) in the (arrow UD) direction. Thereby, the rolling portion C2173 can be arranged at a position lower than the magnetic portion C2400.
As a result, the distributing member C2170 is arranged at the second position, and the rolling part C2173 is displaced (raised) upward to bring it closer to the magnetic part C2400, thereby attracting the ball against the action of gravity. On the other hand, the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and the rolling part C2173 is displaced (raised) downward to separate it from the magnetic part C2400. It is possible to reliably form a mode that does not cause adsorption.

The connecting portion between the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side) and the facing portion C2172a of the receiving portion C2172 is on the upstream side (first intermediate member C2140 (second passage CRt2002) side, arrow L direction). It is formed in an acute-angled protruding shape that protrudes toward. By inserting this protrusion-shaped portion between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2, both spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be separated.
In the state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, rolling relative to the height position at the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140 The height position of the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the portion C2173 (rolling surface) is located vertically downward (in the arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173, and the distribution member C170 arranged at the second position moves toward the first position by a predetermined amount (a predetermined rotation angle ), the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 are arranged at the same height position.
Here, when a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving portion C2172, the distribution member C2170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. The distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position by being (rotated) and having the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 come into contact with the lower stopper portion C2145.
In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C2170 may bounce upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145. The height position of the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 (rolling surface) is vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the height position of the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 (rolling surface) of C2140. As a result, there is a possibility that the ball cannot flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173.

In particular, when the ball collides with the distribution member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling part C2173) that has been bounced upward, and the impact of the collision of the ball causes the distribution member C2170 to be further bounced upward (the ball When the distribution member C2170 is further pushed upward by the accepted).
On the other hand, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, as described above, the distance between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C2170 is bounced upward due to the impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 is higher than the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 by the step between them. Positioning vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to allow the distribution member C2170 to be flipped upward by the amount of the step between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is moved to the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). can be easily made to flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173.
As in the case of the 62nd embodiment, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C2140, the surface in the direction of the arrow L) is moved from the rolling portion C2173 to the first It may be inclined downward toward the intermediate member C2140 (bottom portion C2142). That is, the edge portion on the side of the receiving portion C2172 (the facing portion C2172a) is closer to the first intermediate member C2140 than the edge portion on the side of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C2173. It is good also as a cross-sectional shape which approaches.
As a result, when the ball collides with the distribution member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) that has been bounced upward, the ball collides with the distribution member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173). ) can be a force in the direction of pushing down the distribution member C2170. As a result, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is moved to the bottom portion C2142 (the second passage CRt2002). ) to the rolling portion C2173 (rolling).

The magnetic part C2400 is an elongated plate-like body made of metal, and is capable of attracting a ball using the magnetic force acting from the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. A plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C2400.
In a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball rolling on the rolling surface) jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400. That is, it is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 (the ridge formed by the intersection of the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) and the lower surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D)) (see FIG. 1509). The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 due to the momentum of the ball due to its jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C2400.
In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the speed of the ball when it jumps from the rolling portion C2173 of the distribution member C2170 to the magnetic portion C2400, the position of the ball, the state of rotation of the ball, etc.), from the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 It is possible to form an unstable state with the possibility of the ball falling (the possibility that the ball cannot reach the end). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In particular, since the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the distribution member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game. That is, the balls distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 pass through the second passage CRt2002 in a state in which the distance between them and the preceding ball CB1 is smaller than a predetermined amount (that is, they are connected to the preceding ball CB1). There is only a falling (rolling) ball (following ball CB2), and the possibility of such a trailing ball B2 occurring is relatively low. Displacing the ball (following ball B2) that reached the distribution member C2170 through such a low possibility in an unstable state with a possibility of falling (possibility of not being able to reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Thus, the player can expect to pass safely and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The thickness dimension of the magnetic portion C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (6% of the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment). Therefore, in the sphere whose outer surface point CP1 is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400, the outer surface point CP2 located below the position CP1 is brought into contact with the front surface of the main body portion C2131. In this case, the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front of the main body C2131 than the outer surface point CP2, so the self weight of the sphere (gravity acting on the center of gravity) moves from the outer surface point CP2 to the main body with the outer surface point CP1 as a fulcrum. 2131 (ie, a force that rotates the sphere clockwise around the outer surface point CP1 in FIG. 1509) (see FIG. 1509).
As a result, when a sphere is attracted to the magnetic portion C2400, the sphere can be supported at two points, the outer surface point CP1 and the outer surface point CP2. You can stabilize the movement of the ball along. In addition, the movement speed of the ball can be moderated (lowered) by utilizing the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front surface of the main body portion 2131 . Therefore, this also makes it possible to stabilize the movement of the ball, and increases the time required for the ball to pass through the fourth passage CRt2004. can be improved.
In this way, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic portion C2400 are arranged with the body portion c2131 of the back member C2130 interposed therebetween, and the ball is moved (slid) along the magnetic portion C2400, thereby adjusting the attractive force. It is possible to form a ball passage path with a simple structure while facilitating the adjustment of frictional force.
The second interposed member C2180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the front member C2110 and the first intermediate member C2140 and the first interposed member C2160. . That is, the space defined by the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, and the first interposed member C2160 and the second interposed member C2180 forms the sixth passage CRt2006.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180 has a front side (arrow A concave surface (the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the F direction). Further, an undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006, and the lateral outflow surface C182 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while the central outflow surface C181 is arranged at the top of the undulation.
Note that the upper edge of the front surface portion C111 of the front member C2110 (the edge portion in the direction of arrow U) is the upper surface of the second interposed member C2180 (rolling It protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the moving surface). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180 flows out (flows down) to the game area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.
A recess C183 is provided in the bottom surface of the second interposition member C2180, and as described above, a portion of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110. .
The detouring member C2200 includes a plate-like body portion C2201, a wall portion C2202 erected from the front surface of the body portion C2201 (surface in the direction of arrow F), and a portion of the wall surface portion C2202 further extending toward the front side. A gutter portion C2203 is provided and formed, and is disposed on the back side of the back member C2130 at a position facing the opening C2131a.

When the detour member C2200 is arranged on the back surface member C2130, the upright tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall surface portion C2202 is in contact with the back surface of the back surface member C2130 (main body portion C2131), and the gutter portion C2203 The upright tip (arrow F direction side) abuts the back surface of the second interposing member C2180, and the edge of the gutter portion C2203 abuts the bottom surface of the first interposing member C2160.
As a result, the space partitioned by the back surface member C2130 (main body portion C2131) and the detour member C2200 (main body portion C2201 and wall surface portion C2202), and the first interposed member C2160 and the detour member C2200 (trough portion C2203) A portion of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the partitioned space (see FIGS. 1504 and 1505).
Note that the gutter portion C2203 is inclined downward from the back surface member C2130 side toward the second interposition member C2180 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the bypass member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the back member C2130 rolls on the gutter portion C2203, and the space between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second interposed member C2180 (recessed portion C183) can flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 formed in .
Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170 will be described. FIGS. 1506 to 1508 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDLXXXIX-MDLXXXIX in FIG. Figure 1509 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line MDXCVI-MDXCVI in Figure 1508(b).

1506(a) and 1506(b) show a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and correspond to FIG. 1502. FIG. FIGS. 1508(a) and 1508(b) show a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, and correspond to FIG. 1503. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1506(a), when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the receiving part C2172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom part C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (ball CB1 can flow).
That is, in the receiving portion C2172, the facing portion C2172a is disposed at a position that intersects with the extension line extending from the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface), and is vertically below the extension line extending from the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface). The bottom portion C2172b is arranged at a position (direction of arrow D).
In addition, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (the direction of the arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173 The distance between the side end (connection portion between the rolling part C2173 and the facing part C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere can pass).

On the other hand, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is at a position where it cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in). placed in
That is, the bottom surface portion C2172b of the rolling portion C2173 is arranged at a position (a position one step higher) vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) an extension line extending from the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface). The vertical interval (height of the step) between the rolling portion C2173 and the extended line of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface) is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from overcoming the step and flowing into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 at the first position.
In addition, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the arrow L direction side end) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (dimension through which the sphere can pass). This allows the ball to climb over the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 at the first position.
In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is at the first position, the rolling part C2173 is opposite to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) across the axis C2174 in the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR). side and inclined downward in a direction (arrow R direction) away from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

Therefore, even if the ball overcomes the step and flows into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 at the first position, the ball causes the distribution member C2170 to rotate toward the second position (that is, The rolling portion C2173 can be prevented from being lifted upward), and the ball can be dropped toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) along the downward slope of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has climbed over the step from jumping (being attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (reaching the fifth passage CRt2005).
However, the magnetic portion C2400 may be arranged at a position where the ball that has climbed over the step can jump (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400. That is, the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, and when the sphere CB2 catches up with the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 climbs over the sphere CB1, the sphere CB2 is positioned so that it can jump (adsorb) to the magnetic section C2400. C2400 may be arranged. Since the ball CB2 is originally a ball that should be distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004, the ball is prevented from falling toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006), which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from becoming
When the ball CB1 (the leading ball) and the ball CB2 (the trailing ball with a predetermined gap between the leading ball) rolls on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, FIG. ), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the ball CB1 abuts (receives) on the facing portion C2172a, and is held in the receiving portion C2172.
Also, when the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the sphere CB2 catches up with the sphere CB1, and the sphere CB2 comes into contact with the sphere CB1. This allows the sphere CB2 to stand by behind (upstream) the sphere CB1.

As shown in FIG. 1506(b), when the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172, the weight of the ball CB1 causes the distribution member C2170 to move from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 1507(a). is displaced (rotated) by Also, when the sphere CB2 is catching up with the sphere CB1, the weight of the sphere CB2 also acts on the distribution member C2170.
Here, the receiving portion C2172 has a region on the side of the facing portion C2172a connected to the bottom portion C2172b and a region on the side of the bottom portion C2172b connected to the facing portion C2172a. is curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C2174 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion holds the sphere It is possible.
In addition, the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end portion on the downstream side (arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142) When the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the interval between the It is gradually enlarged by being displaced (rotated) toward two positions.
That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position (a position between FIGS. 1507(a) and 1507(b)) between the first position and the second position, the above-described Between the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end portion on the downstream side (arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142) is expanded to a size approximately the same as the diameter of the sphere (a size through which the sphere can pass), and the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position, the above-described interval is further enlarged to form the largest spacing at the second position.

Therefore, while the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) while receiving the ball CB1 in the receiving portion C2172 between the first position and the predetermined intermediate position. As a result, the state where the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, and the state where the sphere CB2 is positioned at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained.
In this case, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) (the end in the direction of the arrow R) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end in the direction of the arrow L, connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a) The interval between the spheres is gradually reduced by displacing (rotating) the distribution member C2170 from the first position toward the second position, and before the distribution member C2170 reaches the predetermined intermediate position, the ball It is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter (a dimension that the sphere cannot pass through). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sphere CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172.
Further, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position, the trajectory of the sphere CB1 held in the receiving portion C2172 (the connecting portion between the facing portion C2172a and the bottom portion C2172b) The trajectory of the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the facing part C2172a) passes through the side closer to the axis C2174 than the outer edge (outer edge on the side opposite to the axis C2174). configured to
Therefore, it is possible to maintain the state where the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 and the state where the sphere CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142, and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side). The ball CB2 can be pushed back (pushed back) by the portion connected to the facing portion C2172a. That is, the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 can be inserted between the balls CB1 and CB2 to separate the two balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sphere CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172. Also, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling portion C2173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. While being rolled on C2172b, the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C2173 (received by the rolling portion C2173).
As shown in FIGS. 1508(a) and 1508(b), when the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003). At the same time, the ball CB2 rolling on the rolling portion C2173 jumps (is attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.
After the balls CB1 and CB2 have flowed into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the distribution member C2170 is returned (displaced) from the second position toward the first position by its own weight.
Note that even after the distribution member C2170 is placed at the second position or after the distribution member C2170 starts to move (rotate) from the second position to the first position, the third ball reaches the rolling portion C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C2173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173. In this case, the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) depends on whether the ball CB1 is on the receiving portion C2172 (bottom portion C2172b) and the rolling speed (momentum) of the third ball. It is determined whether it is dropped to the magnetic portion C2400 or jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flowed into the fourth passage CRt2004. That is, two states can be formed.

Note that the distribution member C2170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one ball. Therefore, when the distance between the spheres CB1 and CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the spheres CB1 and CB2 are received in order by the receiving portion C2172, and after going through the sorting operation described above, they are placed in the third passage CRt2003. distributed to.
As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b of the 63rd embodiment, when the spheres CB1 and CB2 are connected to each other with an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount, the spheres CB1 are distributed (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. ), and the ball CB2 can be lifted upward by the distribution member C2170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1 and distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt2004. When the two balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) are connected to each other with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be sorted (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. In this way, the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), so that the entertainment is improved. be able to.
Next, the center frame C3086 in the 64th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1510 to 1513. FIG.
In the 62nd embodiment, the distribution member C170 is rotated, but the distribution member C3170 in the 63rd embodiment is slidably displaced. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 1510 and 1512 are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame C3086b in the 64th embodiment, and Figures 1511 and 1513 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. 1510 and 1511 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 1512 and 1513 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged at the second position. . Also, FIGS. 1510 and 1512 correspond to cross-sections along line MDLXXIV-MDLXXIV in FIG.
Here, the lower frame C3086b in the 64th embodiment differs from the lower frame C86b in the 62nd embodiment in the structure for displacing the distribution member C3170 and the structure for interlocking the decorative member C3190 with the distribution member C3170. Except for one point, other configurations are identical.
As shown in FIGS. 1510 to 1513, two linear guide grooves C3131c are provided in the main body C131 of the back member C3130 so as to extend vertically in parallel with each other. These two guide grooves C3131c are arranged in a posture inclined in a direction closer to the first intermediate member C140 toward the lower side (arrow D direction side).
That is, the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) position of the distribution member C3170 at the second position is closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the distribution member C3170 at the first position. be located.

In the distribution member C3170, a total of four shafts C3171a, which are a pair of upper and lower shafts, protrude from the rear surface of the main body portion C3171. The shaft C3171a is a guided portion that is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3131c. is slid (directly moved) between
A set of shafts C3171a is arranged in each of the left and right guide grooves C3131c. Therefore, the distribution member C3170 does not cause a change in posture due to rotation (that is, while maintaining the inclination angles of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173 constant), and the position between the first position and the second position is reduced. It is possible to slide between them.
A collar CW having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide groove C3131c is provided at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and the collar CW prevents the shaft C3171a from coming out of the guide groove C3131c. It is considered to be a way out.
The distribution member C3170 is defined (arranged) at the first position (see FIG. 1510 and FIG. 1511), the lower stopper portion C132 comes into contact with the lower surface of the distribution member C3170, and the downward displacement is restricted, so that it is defined (arranged) at the second position (see FIGS. 1512 and 1513). ).

The decorative member C3190 is formed integrally with the main body portion C191 and includes an arm portion C3193 extending radially outward around the axis C192. It extends along the radial direction of the center. A shaft C3171a is slidably inserted through the guide groove C3193a.
The center of gravity of the decorative member C3190 is eccentric to one side (opposite side of the distribution member C3170 across the axis C192, left side in FIG. 1511) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in the no-load state, the decorative member C3190 is in a posture in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, see FIG. 1511), and the distribution member C3170 is The shaft C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193 to be placed at the first position (see FIGS. 1510 and 1511).
On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the distribution member C3170 and the decorative member C3190 as a whole to shift with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). side (the side on which the distribution member C3170 is arranged with respect to the axis C192, the right side in FIG. 1513). That is, in a state in which the ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C3170 is lowered along the guide groove C3131c by the weight of the ball and placed at the second position. The arm C3193 of the decorative member C3190 is pushed downward by the axis C3171a, and the decorative member C3190 is rotated clockwise about the axis C192 in rear view (see FIG. 1513).
At the second position, when the ball is discharged from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in a rear view using the eccentricity of its center of gravity position, The posture is such that the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward. Along with this, the axis C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, so that the distribution member C3170 is arranged (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 1510 and 1511).

The operation of distributing the balls CB1 and CB2 by sliding the distributing member C3170 between the first position and the second position is the same as in the 62nd embodiment described above. omitted.
As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b of the sixty-fourth embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are connected with an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the interval between the two spheres are in close contact with each other is 0), distributes (guides) the ball CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4, and distributes (guides) the ball CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distributing member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, when the spheres CB1 and CB2 are connected to each other with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both spheres (the spheres CB1 and CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), so that the entertainment is improved. be able to.
Here, as in the case of the 62nd embodiment, in the structure in which the distribution member C170 rotates about the axis C192, the displacement amount of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the fourth passage CRt3). In order to allow displacement between the axis C192 and the position facing the passage CRt4), it is necessary to increase the length (distance) between the axis C192 and the receiving portion C172. ), the size of the distribution member C170 is increased.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distribution member C3170 is vertically slidably displaced, so that the displacement amount of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (that is, the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the position facing the fourth passage CRt4). ), and there is no need to provide a portion that connects the center of rotation (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172. That is, the dimension in the width direction of the distribution member C3170 can be the length dimension of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173 (the dimension in the direction of arrows LR).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1514, the dish member C4120 in the 65th embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1514(a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 in the 65th embodiment, and FIG. 1514(b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line MDCIb-MDCIb of FIG. 1514(a). 1514(c) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line MDCIc-MDCIc in FIG. 1514(a).
The dish member C4120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C4121 and a lower bottom surface portion C4122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C4123 and a lower side wall portion C4124 that form the side walls of the passage.
The upper bottom surface portion C4121 extends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) as a substantially linear passage (first passage CRt4001) when viewed from above, and extends in a direction (arrow (R direction).

The upper side wall portion C4123 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The width of the passage is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can only be guided in series. However, the width of the passage may be a dimension that allows guiding of a plurality of spheres in parallel (a dimension that is larger than twice the sphere).
In the upper side wall portion C4123, a notch portion C4123a is formed at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The ball can flow down from the passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).
The lower bottom surface portion C4122 extends along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from above, and has a substantially linear shape on one end side and the other end side of the extending direction. Between the pair of linear portions C4122a, an arc portion C4122b is formed that curves in an arc shape in which the side of the outflow surface C122a is concave when viewed from above. The circular arc portion C4122b has a shape that protrudes most upstream (arrow L direction) in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at substantially the center in the front-rear direction.
In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is such that the pair of straight portions C4122a moves toward the arc portion C4122b. It is formed as a flat surface that slopes downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D), and is formed substantially horizontally at the arc portion C4122b. That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction.

The lower side wall portion C4124 includes ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002) at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) and the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the second passage CRt4002 ), respectively. The width of the passage is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can only be guided in series.
The straight portion C4122a of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is arranged substantially perpendicular to the upper bottom surface portion C4121 in top view, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 and the lower bottom surface. The one end side in the longitudinal direction of the portion C4122 (the end portion on the arrow B direction side, the rising inclined side of the straight portion C4122a) is arranged at a position adjacent to it.
The lower side wall portion C4124 is not formed at the position corresponding to the cutout portion C4123a in the upper side wall portion C4123, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) through the cutout portion C4123a. A ball can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).
In the lower side wall portion C4124 on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc in top view, the arrow R direction side), there is a substantially center in the front-rear direction of the arc portion C4122b (the position that protrudes most in the arrow L direction of the curved shape) ) is formed with a notch portion C124a, and the ball flows down from the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 1487) via this notch portion C124a. It is possible.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed of a pair of straight portion C4122a and arc portion C4122b. Since the ball flows down from (the first passage CRt4001), the falling ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). Above, the ball can flow down from the notch portion C124a to the bottom portion C142 (the third passage CRt3, see FIG. 1487).
As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) into the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) with a predetermined distance therebetween, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 ( The reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt4002) can be used to force the leading ball to overtake the trailing ball and reduce the distance between the leading and trailing balls (chaining the balls). .
In the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (that is, the approximate center in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the arc portion C4122b (the most overhanging in the arrow L direction of the curved shape) The outflow surface C122a is a portion for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). and is formed as a concave surface inclined downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 1487).
Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly discharged (flowed down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), the balls (balls in a continuous state) in which the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced are changed to the continuous state. 1487).

The width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball that reciprocates on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) in a top view is equal to the notch portion C124a. It is formed in a larger shape on the side closer to the .
In addition, when the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side, arrow L direction side) of the notch portion C124a in a top view, the ball rolls on the outflow surface C122a. to (cross). That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) is positioned at the farthest distance from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C4124). position), the outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that overlaps with the center of the sphere when viewed from the top (the trajectory of the lower top portion of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112. rolling line crosses outflow surface C122a).
On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) will flow into the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) is not reciprocated even once, or before it is reciprocated a sufficient number of times, there is a risk that it will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. . That is, there is a risk that the preceding ball and the following ball will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (the third passage CRt3) while keeping the gap between them without reducing the gap between them.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the cutout portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc in top view, the arrow R direction side). is formed. Therefore, a centrifugal force acts on the ball rolling on the arc portion C4122b toward the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the notch portion C124a. The ball can be rolled (reciprocated) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while pressing the ball against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the side (opposite side).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 1487) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the outflow surface C122a is easily overcome (easily crossed), and the ball is sufficiently reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the leading balls catch up the trailing balls and that the distance between the leading and trailing balls is reduced (the spheres are linked).
Next, the lower frame C5086b in the 66th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1515(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1515(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C5086b in the sixty-sixth embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII in FIG. Note that FIG. 1515(a) shows only the cross section of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C5400 of the lower frame C5086b.
The magnetic part C5400 is an elongated body made of metal, and a projecting part protrudes vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the end on the side opposite to the back surface member C2130 (in the direction of arrow F). Therefore, the magnetic portion C5400 is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. In addition, the protruding portion of the magnetic portion C5400 is arranged at a position where the end portion on the side of the back surface member C2130 is separated from the front surface of the back surface member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic portion C5400 are formed linearly in the width direction (arrow FB direction).

The magnetic portion C5400 is capable of attracting a sphere using the magnetic force acting from the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. A plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400.
In a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball rolling on the rolling surface) jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 (see FIG. 1508). That is, it is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400. The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C5400 moves along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400 to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 due to the momentum of the ball due to jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C5400. be done. As a result, the ball flowing down along the magnetic portion C5400 can be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 1503).
As described above, the protruding portion of the magnetic portion C5400 is disposed at a position where the end portion on the side of the back surface member C2130 is separated from the front surface of the back surface member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere. Contact between the falling ball and the back member C2130 is suppressed. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the application of frictional force to the balls, the falling velocity of the balls can be increased. In addition, since the sphere is not supported on the front surface of the back member C2130, it is possible to create a mode in which the sphere sways when it flows down, and there is a possibility that the sphere will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (possibility that the sphere cannot reach the fifth passage CRt2005). can be raised. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the behavior of the ball and enhance the interest in the game.
Next, the lower frame C6086b in the 67th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1515(b). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1515(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the sixty-seventh embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDXCII-MDXCII in FIG. Note that FIG. 1515(b) shows only the cross section of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C6400 of the lower frame C6086b.
In the magnetic portion C6400 of the sixty-seventh embodiment, unlike the magnetic portion C5400 of the sixty-sixth embodiment, the bottom surface of the projection of the magnetic portion C6400 is an inclined surface facing the back surface member C2130 (that is, closer to the back surface member C2130 in the upward direction in the vertical direction). Other configurations are the same as those of the magnetic portion C5400 in the 66th embodiment, except that the magnetic portion C5400 of the 66th embodiment is formed.
The ball attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 is brought into contact with the rear surface member C2130 due to the effect of the inclination of the bottom surface and the magnetic force directly acting from the magnet portion C2300. Therefore, a frictional force can be applied to the ball, and the falling speed of the ball flowing down along the magnetic portion C6400 can be slowed down. As a result, the movement time of the ball can be lengthened, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, the ball can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 and the back surface member C2130, and the ball can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C6400.

Next, the center frame D86 in the 68th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1516 to 1528. FIG.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the center frame 86 is composed of one component has been described, but the center frame D86 in the 68th embodiment is composed of two members, an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1516 is a front view of the game board D13 in the 68th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1516, the center frame D86 is configured in a shape that can be fitted into the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1430) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with tapping screws or the like. It has an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b.
The upper frame D86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1516) and left and right (left side and right side in FIG. 1516) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1430) of the base plate 60. 1516) along the inner edge of the window portion 60a of 60. As shown in FIG. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame D86a and the lower frame D86b.

Note that the upper frame D86a is a part of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (a portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1516) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, that is, the lower side The portion where the frame D86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other portions excluding the omitted portion are configured the same as the center frame 86 in each of the above-described embodiments.
Next, the lower frame D86b will be described. FIG. 1517 is a front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 1518 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. 1517 and 1518, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the illustration of the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame D86b to the base plate 60 is omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 1517 and 1518, the lower frame D86b has a receiving port DOPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage DRt1 communicating with the receiving port DOPin, and a first passage DRt1. A second passage DRt2 in which a ball guided down DRt1 flows down, and a ball guided in the second passage DRt2 (a ball that reciprocates along the longitudinal direction (arrow FB direction) of the second passage DRt2). and a ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (a ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 (direction of arrows LR)) A fourth passage DRt4, a fifth passage DRt5, and a sixth passage DRt6 that are distributed according to the position where the ball flows down from, a seventh passage DRt7 through which the ball guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows down, An eighth passage DRt8 through which the ball guided through the sixth passage DRt6 flows down, and an outflow port DOPout formed as an opening for the ball guided through the eighth passage DRt8 to flow out to the game area are formed ( 1525 to 1527).
The sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 form a single passage, with the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 communicating (connected) to the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6. That is, the passage has an upstream part (first half) formed by the sixth passage DRt6 and a downstream part (last half) formed by the eighth passage DRt8.

An upper frame passage DRt0 (see FIG. 1516) is formed in the upper frame D86a. The upper frame passage DRt0 guides a ball entered (entered) from the area on the left side (the left side in FIG. 1516) of the game area (the area between the center frame D86 (upper frame D86a) and the rail 61). The receiving port DOPin of the lower frame D86b communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0.
That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) from the game area into the upper frame passage DRt0 is introduced (entered) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the first passage DRt1 of the lower frame D86b via the receiving opening DOPin.
The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined by side walls (the side wall portion D142 of the intermediate member D140 and the side wall portion D132 of the rear member D130) facing each other at a predetermined interval. (The side wall portion D132 of the back member D130) is partially divided (the side wall is not formed), and a flow-down port DOPfl through which the ball can flow down is opened at a position adjacent to the divided region when viewed from above. be.
A ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (a ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR) of the third passage DRt3) passes through the outlet DOPfl to the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage. The ball can flow down (enter) either the DRt5 or the sixth passage DRt6.

The flow-down port DOPfl projects in a direction (arrow B direction) orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, and is formed as a substantially rectangular space (opening) extending along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. be. In addition, the flow-down port DOPfl is defined by the main body portion D131 and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130.
The upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4, the sixth passage DRt6, and the fifth passage DRt5 are arranged in order in the downstream port DOPfl along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. That is, the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 is positioned at the longitudinal center of the flow port DOPfl, and the upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 are located in the sixth passage DRt6. They are located on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) and the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) of the flow port DOPfl with the upstream end of the passage DRt6 interposed therebetween.
Therefore, the ball that reciprocates along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 and flows down to the area including the center of the flow-down port DOPfl in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR) flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (enters the ball). A ball flowing down to a region including one longitudinal direction side (arrow L direction side) or the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) of the flow-down port DOPfl flows into (enters) the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. be. That is, to which of the fourth path DRt4 to the sixth path DRt6 the ball guided through the third path DRt3 is distributed is determined according to the position (region) where it flows down from the third path DRt3.
Here, the ball guided through the sixth passage DRt6 flows down (inflows) into the eighth passage DRt8, and the outflow port DOPout, which is the exit of the eighth passage DRt8 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 1516). Therefore, the ball distributed to the sixth path DRt6 easily enters the first winning hole 64 (there is a high probability of winning the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, the ball guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows down (inflows) into the seventh passage DRt7, and the ball guided through the seventh passage DRt7 is played in the seventh passage DRt7. A central outflow surface D151 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize winning opening 64 as a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side) so as to flow out to the area. In addition, two lateral outflow surfaces D152 are formed (arranged) at different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1516) from the vertical direction above the first winning hole 64 . Further, the seventh passage DRt7 is formed with undulations, a lateral outflow surface D152 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and a central outflow surface D151 is formed at the top of the undulations.
Therefore, the ball sorted to the fourth path DRt4 or the fifth path DRt5 has a higher probability of flowing out to the game area from the side outflow surface D162 than the probability of flowing out to the game area from the central outflow surface D161 in the seventh path DRt7. As a result, it is difficult to enter the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is lower than the ball distributed to the sixth path DRt6 described above).
In this way, the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment makes it easier for the ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction of the third path DRt3 to enter the first winning hole 64 by allocating it to the sixth path DRt6. (In this embodiment, it is possible to almost certainly win the ball into the first winning hole 64). Therefore, when the ball reciprocates along the longitudinal direction of the third path DRt3, it is distributed to the sixth path DRt6 in order to increase the probability that the ball will enter the first winning hole 64 (certainly win a prize). It is possible to make the player expect that the game will be played, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
Here, in the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment, a pair of displacement members D180 can be opened and closed (displaceable between the closed position and the open position) at the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6. are placed. The pair of displacement members D180 are rotatably supported on the base end side, and are disposed in a posture in which the tip side opposite to the base end side faces upward (in the direction of the arrow U), and the base end side serves as a rotation axis. , are displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position by displacing (rotating) the distal end sides in a direction toward or away from each other.

A pair of displacement members D180 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) of the flow-down port DOPfl. A ball that has flowed (entered) into the passage DRt6 but has not flowed (entered) into the space between the pair of displacement members D180 is flowed (entered) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.
The distance between the distal ends of the pair of displacement members D180 is set so that the distance between them at the open position is larger than the distance at the closed position, and when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position, they are moved to the closed position. , the area in which the ball can flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 is enlarged, and the area in which the ball can enter (enter) the fourth and fifth passages DRt4 and DRt5 is reduced. That is, the ratio of the interval (dimension) in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) of the flow-down port DOPfl to the interval (dimension) of the pair of displacement members D180 on the tip side is greater at the open position than at the closed position. be enlarged. Therefore, when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the open position, a ball is more likely to flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 than when they are in the closed position.
In this case, as will be described later, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced from the closed position to the open position by utilizing the weight (mass) of the ball when the ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6. (rotated). Specifically, a rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and a pair of displacement members D180 are arranged at the open position (displacement position) while the ball is rolling on the rolling member D170. ), and the pair of displacement members D180 are placed (displaced) in the closed position while the ball is not present on the rolling member D170.
As described above, in the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position (sixth passage DRt6 This makes it easier for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6, thereby allowing the ball following the ball entering the sixth passage DRt6 (for example, the ball reciprocating in the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, the following ball). The ball can be easily entered into the sixth passage DRt6.

Therefore, when the first ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the following second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 due to the displacement (rotation) of the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position. If an easy state can be formed and the following second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the following second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 (the second ball (due to the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the open position using the weight of ), the following third ball (the third ball following the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. A state can be formed and these aspects can be repeated thereafter. Therefore, the player can expect the occurrence of a chain of balls entering the sixth path DRt6 due to the ball entering the sixth path DRt6. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In this embodiment, when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position, the minimum value of the facing distance is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (for example, 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). times), and when displaced (rotated) to the open position, the facing distance on the tip side is set to about three times the diameter of the sphere.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1519 to 1528 in addition to FIGS. 1517 to 1518, the detailed configuration of the lower frame D86b will be described.
FIG. 1519 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 1520 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. 1521 is a top view of the lower frame D86b, FIG. 1522 is a front view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 1523 is a rear view of the lower frame D86b.

1524(a) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXIa in FIG. 1522, and FIG. 1524(b) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXIb in FIG.
FIGS. 1525(a), 1526(a), and 1527(a) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D86b, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. Figures 1525(b), 1526(b) and 1527(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D86b.
1525(a) and 1525(b), the state in which the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position is shown in FIGS. FIG. 1527(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is arranged at the second position and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position.
1526(a) and 1526(b), the rolling member D170 is displaced from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) ( is rotated), and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position toward the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).

Also, in FIGS. 1526(a) and 1527(a), illustration of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 is omitted, and in FIGS. 1525(b), 1526(b) and 1527(b), A state in which the bypass member D200 is removed is illustrated.
1528(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line MDCXVa-MDCXVa of FIG. 1521, and FIG. 1528(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line MDCXVb-MDCXVb of FIG. 1528(c) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG. 1525. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 1517 to 1528, the lower frame D86b includes a front member D110, a plate member D120 arranged on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member D110, and a front member D110. The back surface member D130 is arranged opposite to the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) with a predetermined gap therebetween, and the front surface member D110 and the back surface member D130 are interposed between the front surface member D110 and the back surface member D130. Intermediate member D140 arranged to face (the surface on the arrow F direction side) at a predetermined interval, a first interposed member D150 interposed between facing front member D110 and intermediate member D140, intermediate member D140, and A second interposed member D160 interposed between the opposing back members D130, a rolling member D170 and a displacement member D180 interposed between the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130, and the back side of the back member D130. and a transmission member D190 and a detour member D200 disposed in the rear member D130 are displaceably disposed (rotatably pivotally supported), and a displaceable member D180 is fixed to one side (arrow F direction side) and the other and a shaft support member D210 whose side (arrow B side) can come into contact with the transmission member D190.
The rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 are displaceable (rotatable) between the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130, and the transmission member D190 is displaceable (rotatable) on the back side of the back member D130. is placed in

The members of the lower frame D86b are fastened and fixed to each other by tapping screws, and the rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 are displaceably arranged (rotatably) on the rear member D130. By being axially supported, it is configured as one (single) unit (see FIG. 1517).
In the lower frame D86b, the members other than the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (that is, transparent so that the members on the back side and the sphere can be seen through). A transmission member D190 is made of a colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the first passage DRt1 to the eighth passage DRt8, and the opening/closing operation (opening/closing state) of the displacement member D180 can be visually confirmed by the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can.
In this case, it is sufficient for the lower frame D86b to have a member positioned on the front side (arrow F direction side) of at least one of the displacement member D180 and the rolling member D170 made of a light-transmissive resin material. Alternatively, only a region located on the front side of at least one of the displacement member D180 and the rolling member D170 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. If the displacement member D180 can be visually recognized, the player can grasp whether or not the ball is likely to flow down (enter the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 based on its open/closed state. If the rolling member D170 can be visually recognized, the player can grasp the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 based on the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (posture that changes depending on the presence or absence of the rolling ball), and the player can enjoy the game. for it can be raised.
Therefore, it is preferable to configure the rolling member D170 from a colored resin material. This is because the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (posture that changes depending on the presence or absence of the rolling ball) can be easily made visible to the player.

The rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 are made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and the front surface thereof is painted or a seal is attached. Also good.
On the other hand, in the lower frame D86b, the member located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or is painted). The displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side by being attached or attached with a seal.
The front member D110 includes a plate-like front portion D111 forming the front surface, a plate-like bottom portion D112 erected from the rear surface of the front portion D111, and one longitudinal side of the front portion D111 and the bottom portion D112 ( and a connecting portion D113 disposed on the arrow L direction side).
A plurality of insertion holes D111a are formed in the thickness direction of the front portion D111 along the outer edge of the front portion D111 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) and the lateral side (arrow L direction side). The lower frame D86b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole D111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60 .

In the front part D111, an outflow port DOPout is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1516). The outflow port DOPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flows out to the game area, as described above.
The bottom surface portion D112 has the bottom surface of the first interposed member D150 opposed to the upper surface thereof, and a part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the most downstream ) is formed. Therefore, for example, compared with the case where the through-hole formed through the first interposition member D150 is part of the eighth passage DRt8, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.
The bottom surface portion D112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion D111. side). This prevents foreign matter such as wires from entering from the bottom surface side of the lower frame D86b.
In addition, in the bottom surface portion D112, the erection dimension of the portion that defines the eighth passage DRt8 from the front surface portion D111 is larger than the erection dimension of the other portions of the bottom surface portion D112. The portion that defines the passage DRt8 is in contact with the front surface of the body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140 at its erected tip.

A plate member D120 is disposed on the upper surface side (the side in the direction of arrow U) of the connecting portion D113, and is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw.
The dish member D120 includes a receiving opening DOPin, an upper bottom surface portion D121 and a lower bottom surface portion D122 forming the bottom surface of the passage for guiding the ball received from the receiving opening DOPin, and an upper side wall portion D123 and D123 forming the side wall of the passage. and a lower side wall portion D124.
The receiving port DOPin is an opening that receives a ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 of the upper frame D86a as described above (see FIG. 1516). When the center frame D86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the rear surface of the upper frame D86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion D111 and the front surface of the connection portion D113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. This establishes communication between the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 and the receiving port DOPin.
The upper bottom surface portion D121 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and is inclined downward in a direction away from the receiving port DOPin (arrow B direction). formed by The upper bottom surface portion D121 is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D) from the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0, and a vertical step is formed between the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0. . That is, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121.

A concave groove D121a having a U-shaped cross section is provided in the center of the upper bottom surface portion D121 in the width direction (direction of arrows LR) (see FIG. 1490). The concave groove D121a extends linearly along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The groove width (dimension in the direction of arrows LR) of the groove D121a is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the groove depth (dimension in the direction of arrows UD) of the groove D121a is the bottom surface of the groove D121a. is set to a depth that the ball does not touch.
Thereby, the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 can be supported at two points (a pair of ridge line portions where the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the groove D121a intersect). Therefore, the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased compared to when the groove D121a is not formed (that is, when the ball is supported at only one point). Therefore, the impact of the ball dropped from the upper frame passage DRt0 can be buffered (received) and the resistance when the ball rolls can be increased.
As described above, the ball is dropped from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121, and the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 is supported at two locations. When a ball flows (falls) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first passage DRt1), the preceding ball is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first passage DRt1), It makes it easier for the ball to catch up with the preceding ball. Therefore, the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball can be reduced.
The upper side wall portion D123 is a wall portion that separates the downstream (arrow B direction side) end portion of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) from the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1). , and is formed as a plate-like body erected in the vertical direction (arrow FB direction). The width of the passage is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can only be guided in series.

In the upper side wall portion D123, a cutout portion D123a is formed at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1). A ball can flow down from the passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2).
The lower bottom surface portion D122 extends along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 1527).
The lower bottom surface portion D122 is located vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D) from the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the portion where the notch portion D123a is formed), and the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121. A vertical step is formed between That is, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper bottom surface portion D121 to the lower bottom surface portion D122.
The lower side wall portion D124 includes ends of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided, the arrow FB direction), and the lower bottom surface portion. The passage width of D122 (second passage DRt2) is partitioned. The width of the passage is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least less than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably less than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that multiple spheres can only be guided in series.

The lower bottom surface portion D122 is arranged in parallel with the upper bottom surface portion D121 when viewed from above, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow B) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the one end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 are arranged side by side. (the end on the arrow B direction side) are adjacent to each other.
At a position corresponding to the cutout portion D123a in the upper side wall portion D123, the lower side wall portion D124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) through the cutout portion D123a A ball can flow down (fall) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2).
A notch portion D124a is formed in the lower side wall portion D124 at a position corresponding to the bottom portion (the lowest position in the vertical direction) of the arcuately curved lower bottom surface portion D122. Via the portion D124a, the ball can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) to the first interposition member D150 (the third passage DRt3).
As described above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the upper bottom surface portion D121 (the first passage DRt1 ), the dropped ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), and then the notch A ball can flow down from the portion D124a to the first interposing member D150 (the third passage DRt3).

As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) into the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) while being separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the lower bottom surface portion D122 ( The reciprocating motion in the second path DRt2) can be used to make the leading ball overtake the trailing ball and reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (bringing the balls together). .
An outflow surface D122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion D122 at a position corresponding to the cutout portion D124a (that is, at the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface D122a is a portion for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) to flow out to the first interposing member D150 (third passage DRt3), and is the first interposing member D150. It is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward (the third passage DRt3).
Therefore, after reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased smoothly flows out (flows down) to the first interposition member D150 (third passage DRt3) using the outflow surface D122a. can be made That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second path DRt2), the ball (balls in a continuous state) in which the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball is reduced is changed to the continuous state. can be made to flow out (flow down) to the first interposition member D150 (the third passage DRt3) while maintaining the
Note that the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface D122a (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball that reciprocates on the lower bottom surface D122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) when viewed from above is equal to the notch D124a. 1521).

In addition, in a state in which the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion D124 located on the opposite side (facing side) of the notch portion D124a in top view, the ball rolls (traverses) on the outflow surface D122a. That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) is positioned at the farthest distance from the cutout portion D124a (the lateral top of the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion D124). position), the outflow surface D122a is formed to a range that overlaps with the center of the sphere in a top view (the trajectory of the lower top of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface D122. rolling line crosses outflow surface D122a).
In the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion D122 has a cross-sectional shape on a plane orthogonal to the extension direction (arrow FB direction) and parallel to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is horizontal (arrow F −B direction). However, as in the case of the embodiment described above (see FIG. 1490), the lower bottom surface portion D122 may be inclined downward in the direction (arrow L direction) away from the notch portion D124a.
The formation position of the outflow surface D122a is one end side (upper side in the present embodiment) from the center in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, arrow FB direction). 1527).
In this case, the height position of the lower bottom surface portion D122 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is one longitudinal end (the end in the arrow B direction) and the other end (the end in the arrow F direction). and the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction)). The curvature between one longitudinal end (arrow B direction) and the outflow surface D122a is the other longitudinal end (arrow D direction). F direction side) and the outflow surface D122a. That is, the radius between one longitudinal end (arrow B direction) and the outflow surface D122a is made smaller than the radius between the other longitudinal end (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a.

As a result, in the region between the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrow F) and the outflow surface D122a, the preceding ball can easily catch up with the trailing ball, and the collision when catching up can be moderated (i.e. , by suppressing the widening of the distance between the two balls due to the impact when the trailing ball collides with the leading ball), it is possible to easily form a state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, both balls can be easily flowed out (flowed down) to the first interposition member D150 (the third passage DRt3) in a continuous state.
Note that the plate member D120 is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 Since it is arranged inside, the space in the front-rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the entire length of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the second passage DRt2) can be secured, and the spheres can be easily connected.
The back surface member D130 is formed in a plate-like shape by being arranged in a posture parallel to the body portion D131 and located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the body portion D131 and the body portion D131 formed in a plate shape. It includes a side wall portion D132, a connection portion D133 that connects the body portion D131 and the side wall portion D132, and a partition wall D134 erected from the rear surface of the body portion D131.
A shaft support portion D131a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a shaft support hole D131b that supports the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and a body portion D192 of the transmission member D190 are inserted through the body portion D131. An insertion hole D131c, openings D131d and D131e through which the ball can pass, and a protrusion D131f capable of coming into contact with the ball are formed.

The shaft support portion D131a is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface facing the arrow F direction) of the main body D131, and the shaft support portion D141a is formed on the rear surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the shaft support portion D131a. In the rolling member D170, ends of shafts D171 protrude from one side surface and the other side surface in the width direction (front-rear direction, arrow FB direction). The shaft D171 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and both ends of the shaft D171 are supported by the shaft support portion D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, respectively. . Thereby, the rolling member D170 is rotatably arranged between the facing members D130 and D140.
The shaft support hole D131b is formed as a hole penetrating the body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). It is formed. The shaft D211 of the shaft supporting member D210 is inserted in order along the longitudinal direction (direction of arrow FB) through the shaft supporting hole D131b of the main body D131 and the shaft hole of the displacement member D180, and is one side of the displacement member D180. One end of the shaft D211 projecting from the side surface of (the intermediate member D140 side) is supported by the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140. As a result, the displacement member D180 is rotatably arranged between the rear member D130 and the intermediate member D140.
The insertion hole D131c is formed through the body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction), and is formed as an opening (hole) having a size that allows the body portion D192 of the transmission member D190 to rotate. In the transmission member D190, ends of shafts D191 protrude from one end face and the other end face in the axial direction (front-rear direction, arrow FB direction) of the body portion D192. It is pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion D141c of D140 and the pivotal support portion D201 of the bypass member D200. As a result, the transmission member D190 is rotatably disposed between the intermediate member D140 and the bypass member D200 and on the back side of the back member D130.
The openings D131d and D131e are formed through the main body D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) as openings (holes) having a size that allows passage of the ball. That is, it is formed as an opening for communicating the passages (the fifth passage DRt5 and the eighth passage DRt8) formed on the front side and the rear side of the main body D131. The openings D131d and D131e are set to a size that only one ball can pass through (two balls cannot pass through at the same time).

Here, the sixth passage DRt6 is formed on the front side (between the intermediate member D140) of the back member D130 (body portion D131), and the eighth passage DRt8 is formed on the upstream side (first half portion) of the back member D130 ( Main body portion D131) is formed on the back side (between the detour member D200), and the downstream side (the latter half portion) is formed on the front side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131) (inside the intermediate member D140, the front member D110 and the first interposed member D150).
Therefore, the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131d, and the upstream side (first half portion) and downstream side (second half portion) of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131e. be. That is, the ball that has flowed down (guided) down the sixth passage DRt6 passes through the opening D131d, is moved from the front side to the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131), and flows into the eighth passage DRt8. . Further, the ball that has flowed down (guided) down the upstream side (first half portion) of the eighth passage DRt8 passes through the opening D131e, and is moved from the back side to the front side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131). It flows into the downstream side (second half) of the 8th passage DRt8.
The protrusion D131f protrudes from the front surface (the surface facing the arrow F) of the main body D131 and extends linearly along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). are formed as projections), and a plurality of locations (this 1528(c)). The projecting dimension and cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion D131f are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).
The distance between the lower end of the protrusion D131f (the end in the direction of the arrow D) and the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 arranged at the second position is smaller than the radius of the sphere when viewed from the front. position (see Figure 1527). Therefore, even when the rolling member D170 is arranged at the second position, the ball and the protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other.

Further, the upper end of the protrusion D131f (the end in the direction of the arrow U) has a spherical distance from the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 arranged at the initial position (first position) when viewed from the front. 1525). Therefore, even if the ball bounces upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 (body portion D172) arranged at the second position, the ball can contact the protrusion D131f. be.
The arrangement intervals (intervals in the directions of the arrows LR) of the plurality of projections D131f are set to approximately the same interval as the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment. In addition, the plurality of projections D131f are arranged in the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body portion of the rolling member D170) with respect to the plurality of projections D141g projecting from the back surface of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141). D172) are arranged at different positions. That is, the projections D131f of the back surface member D130 and the projections D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a zigzag manner along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170). (See FIG. 1528(c)). Thereby, rolling of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 can be delayed.
That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and the action of the projections D131f and D141g applies resistance to the ball, thereby reducing the speed of the ball. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position). It is easier to maintain (longer) the state where it is more open and the ball is easier to enter).
A protruding tip of the protrusion D131f is curved to have an arcuate cross-section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D131f may be substantially rectangular. Further, the protrusion D131f may have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and at least one curved shape extending in an arc shape may be used. It may be a shape included in the part.

When the protrusion D131f has a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the rolling surface of the ball (the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 It is preferable that the upper surface (in the direction of arrow U) be inclined in a direction in which it is positioned upstream (in the direction of arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because when a ball bounced up from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D131f, a force component in a direction pushing the ball back to the opposite side (upstream side) of the rolling direction is applied to the ball, thereby making it easier to delay the ball. be.
The side wall portion D132 is disposed at a height position where the upper side (arrow U direction side) edge portion is higher than the upper surface of the second interposed member D160 (arrow U direction), and the side wall portion D140 of the intermediate member D140. The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined together with the portion D142.
The partition wall D134 partitions the eighth passage DRt8 together with the body portion D131 and the detour member D200. In other words, the detour member D200 is arranged to face the main body portion D131, and the area between them and partitioned by the partition wall D134 is the eighth passage DRt8. The area partitioned by the partition wall D134 is formed in a horizontally long, substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear (viewed in the direction of arrow F). An opening D131e is provided on the arrow R direction side), and is inclined downward from one longitudinal end side to the other longitudinal end side.
The intermediate member D140 is formed in a plate shape by being arranged in a plate-like main body portion D141 and positioned on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main body portion D141 and parallel to the main body portion D141. A side wall portion D142, a connection portion D143 that connects the body portion D141 and the side wall portion D142, a bottom portion D144 that stands up from the front of the body portion D141, and a partition wall that stands up from the back of the body portion D141 (second 4 passage partition walls D145L, a fifth passage partition wall D145R, a sixth passage partition wall D146, and an eighth passage partition wall D147).

The body portion D141 includes a shaft support portion D141a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a shaft support portion D141b that supports the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and a shaft support portion that supports the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190. D141c, openings D141d, D141e and D141f through which the ball can pass, and a protrusion D141g capable of coming into contact with the ball are formed.
The shaft support portions D141a, D141b, and D141c are formed as bearings on the back surface of the main body portion D141 (surface on the arrow B direction side), and as described above, the shaft support portions D131a of the back surface member D130, the shaft support holes D131b, and the detour member D200. They are formed at positions facing the pivot D201.
That is, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170 is connected to the shaft support portion D131a of the back surface member D130 and the shaft support portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, and the shaft support member D210 is connected to the shaft support hole D131b of the back surface member D130 and the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140. A shaft D191 of a transmission member D190 is supported by a shaft support portion D141c of an intermediate member D140 and a shaft support portion D201 of a bypass member D200. All of the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, the shaft D211 of the shaft supporting member D210, and the transmission member D190 are arranged in a posture in which their axial directions are along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
The openings D141d, D141e, and D141f are formed through the main body D141 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) as openings (holes) having a size that allows passage of the ball.

The openings D141d and D141e are respectively formed as exits of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 (openings through which the balls flow out to the seventh passage DRt7), and the upper surface of the first interposition member D150 (rolling surface of the balls). is also formed upwards. That is, the ball guided through the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 flows out (flows down) to the seventh passage DRt7 via the openings D141d and D141e.
The opening D141f connects the downstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the back side of the intermediate member D140 (body portion D141) and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the front side of the intermediate member D140 (body portion D141). It is formed as a communication port (opening) for communication. That is, the opening D141d is formed as part of a passage (eighth passage DRt8) penetrating the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.
The protrusion D141g protrudes from the back surface of the main body D141 (surface on the arrow B direction side) and extends linearly along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). are formed as projections), and a plurality of locations (this Six locations in the embodiment) (see FIG. 1528(c)). The projecting dimension and cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion D141g are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).
The arrangement intervals (intervals in the directions of the arrows LR) of the plurality of protrusions D141g are set to approximately the same interval as the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment. In addition, the plurality of projections D141g are arranged in the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body portion of the rolling member D170) with respect to the plurality of projections D131f projecting from the front surface of the back surface member D130 (main body portion D131). D172) are arranged at different positions. That is, the projections D131f of the back member D130 and the projections D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a zigzag manner along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). (See FIG. 1528(c)). Thereby, rolling of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 can be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and the action of the protrusions D131f and D141g applies resistance to the ball, thereby reducing the speed of the ball. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position) can be extended. It is easier to maintain (longer) the state where it is more open and the ball is easier to enter).
In this embodiment, the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrow FB) between the front surface of the main body portion D131 of the back member D130 and the rear surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140 is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. The facing distance (distance in the direction of the arrow FB) between the virtual plane (flat plane) connecting the tips of the plurality of protrusions D131f and the virtual plane (plane) connecting the tips of the plurality of protrusions D141g is , are set to dimensions that are substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the diameter of the sphere. However, the facing interval between both virtual surfaces may be set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere.
A protruding tip of the protrusion D141g is curved to have an arcuate cross-section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D141g may be substantially rectangular. Further, the protrusion D141g may have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and at least one curved shape extending in an arc shape may be used. It may be a shape included in the part.
When the protrusion D141g has a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the rolling surface of the ball (the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 It is preferable that the upper surface (in the direction of arrow U) be inclined in a direction in which it is positioned upstream (in the direction of arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because when a ball bounced up from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D141g, a force component in a direction pushing the ball back in the opposite direction (upstream side) to the rolling direction is applied to the ball, so that the ball can be easily delayed. be.

The side wall portion D142 is disposed at a height position in which the edge portion on the upper side (the direction of the arrow U) is higher (the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the second interposed member D160. The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined together with the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130.
The connecting portion D143 extends along the entire longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) edge portion of the side wall portion D142 and the upper side (arrow U direction side) edge portion of the main body portion D141. The second interposed member D160 is arranged on the upper surface side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion D143.
The connecting portion D143 faces the fourth passage partitioning wall D145L and the fifth passage partitioning wall D145R of the intermediate member D140 with a predetermined gap in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), and the fourth passage DRt4 is formed between them. and a fifth passage DRt5 are respectively formed. That is, the connecting portion D143 forms the upper surface (upper inner surface) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5.
The bottom surface portion D144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in a region excluding the opening D141f. is brought into contact with the upright end of the (arrow B direction side). That is, the bottom portion D144 is formed by being divided in a region where the opening D141f is opened and a region in the vicinity thereof.

In the region where the bottom surface portion D144 is divided (the region including the opening D141f), as described above, the upright tip of the portion of the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110 that defines the eighth passage DRt8 is below the opening D141f. The side (arrow D direction side) and the left and right side sides (arrow L direction side and arrow R direction side) are brought into contact with the front surface of the main body portion D141.
The fourth passage partition wall D145L is a portion that partitions the fourth passage DRt4 together with the main body portion D141, the main body portion D131 of the back member D130, and the connecting portion D133. ) and a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball rolling on the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the rolling end point of the ball.
That is, the fourth passage partition wall D145L has a rolling portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling portion is the downflow port DOPfl when viewed from above. (a position where a ball entered (flowed down) in the flow-down port DOPfl can be received (received)), and is inclined downward toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction), The other end in the longitudinal direction extends to a position overlapping the lower edge of the opening D141d, and the extended end (the other end in the longitudinal direction) is connected to a vertical wall portion along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
In addition, the fourth passage partition wall D145L is inclined downward even if a portion (region overlapping the opening D141d) of the other longitudinal direction end side (the arrow L direction side) faces the opening D141d. The ball that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction of the moving surface) can roll toward the opening D141d.

Therefore, a ball entering the fourth passage DRt4 from the flow-down port DOPfl is received (received) at one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) of the fourth passage partition wall D145L, and travels on the fourth passage partition wall D145L. It rolls toward the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side). After reaching the other end in the longitudinal direction, the ball abuts (receives) the vertical wall portion connected to the other end in the longitudinal direction, and after being restricted from rolling, passes through the opening D141d to the seventh passage DRt7 (the second 1 interposed member D150).
The fifth passage partition wall D145R is a portion that partitions the fifth passage DRt5 together with the body portion D141, the body portion D131 of the back member D130, and the connection portion D133, and the upper surface is a portion (rolling portion ) and a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball rolling on the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the rolling end point of the ball.
The fifth passage partition wall D145R is formed symmetrically about the displacement member D180 with respect to the fourth passage partition wall D145L when viewed from the front. Since the configuration and operation are substantially the same as those of the D145L, the description is omitted.
The sixth passage partition wall D146 is a portion that partitions the sixth passage DRt6 together with the main body portion D141, the fourth passage partition wall D145L, the main body portion D131 of the back member D130, and the rolling member D170, and the upper surface is a ball rolling surface. and a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball rolling on the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the rolling end point of the ball.

That is, the sixth passage partition wall D146 is arranged side by side on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 (arrow L direction side, on the extension line of the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170), and the rolling A rolling part formed so as to be able to receive a ball that rolls on the member D170, and an end of the rolling surface (opposite side of the rolling member D170) connected to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) a vertical wall formed.
The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 is inclined downward toward the opening D141f so that the ball received from the rolling member D170 can roll toward the opening D141f. .
Therefore, the ball entering the sixth passage DRt6 from the flow-down port DOPfl and rolling on the rolling member D170 is received by the rolling portion (rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146. After being abutted (received) by the vertical wall portion connected to the end portion and restricted from rolling, it flows out (flows down) to the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D141f.
The eighth passage partition wall D147 is a portion that partitions a portion of the eighth passage DRt8 (a portion formed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140), and has a cylindrical shape with a substantially rectangular cross section (frame shape). The opening D141f and the opening D131e of the back member D130 are communicated with each other. That is, the ball flowing out from the opening D131e of the back member D130 flows into the passage (space) defined by the eighth passage dividing wall D147, flows down (rolls) in the passage (space), and then exits from the opening D141f. It flows out and flows into the rest of the eighth passage DRt8 (the portion formed between the front member D110 and the first interposed member D150).

The first interposed member D150 is a member that forms a ball rolling surface in the seventh passage DRt7, and is interposed between the facing member D110 and the intermediate member D140. That is, the space defined by the front member D110, the intermediate member D140, and the first interposed member D150 forms the seventh passage DRt7. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 is curved in an arcuate shape that is convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) in a front view, and is formed in the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d) or the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d). A ball that has flowed down from the 5th passage DRt5 (opening D141e) is allowed to reciprocate along the curve.
As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 has a front side (arrow A concave surface (a central outflow surface D151 and a side outflow surface D152) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the direction F). Further, an undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the seventh passage DRt7, and the lateral outflow surface D152 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while the central outflow surface D151 is arranged at the top of the undulation.
Note that the upper edge of the front portion D111 of the front member D110 (the edge in the direction of arrow U) is the upper surface of the first interposed member D150 (the edge in the direction of the arrow U), except for the regions where the central outflow surface D151 and the side outflow surface D152 are formed. It protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the moving surface). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 flows (flows down) into the game area only from the central outflow surface D151 or the side outflow surface D152.
A recess D153 is provided in the bottom surface of the first interposed member D150, and as described above, a part of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the recess D153 and the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110. .

The second interposed member D160 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the ball in the third passage DRt3, and is interposed between the facing member D130 and the intermediate member D140. That is, the space defined by the back member D130, the intermediate member D140, and the second interposed member D160 forms the third passage DRt3. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member D160 is curved in an arcuate shape that is convex downward (in the direction of the arrow D) when viewed from the front. It is reciprocable along the curve.
In the present embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member D160 is located at a position corresponding to the center (the space facing the pair of displacement members D180) in the longitudinal direction of the flow-down port DOPfl (the direction of the arrows LR). is the lowest, and the height position increases toward one longitudinal end side or the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side or arrow R direction side) of the second interposition member D160 (third passage DRt3). be.
That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposition member D160 extends from the position corresponding to the space between the pair of displacement members D180 toward one longitudinal end side or the other longitudinal end side (the arrow L direction side or the arrow R direction side). It is formed with an upward slope toward the Therefore, the ball can reciprocate along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the third passage DRt3.
On the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member D160, a roller is formed so as to face the rear side (arrow B direction side) in order to cause the ball to flow out from the second interposed member D160 (the third passage DRt3) to the flow port DOPfl. Concave surfaces (central outflow surface D161 and side outflow surface D162) are formed (recessed) that are inclined downward.

The central outflow surface D161 is arranged (formed) at a position corresponding to the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) center (opposing space of the pair of displacement members D180) of the downflow port DOPfl. On the other hand, in a state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, the side outflow surface D162 is closer to the second interposition member D160 (the third passage DRt3) in the longitudinal direction than the facing space of the displacement member D180. side (arrow L direction side or arrow R direction side), and when the displacement member D180 is arranged in the open position, it corresponds to the facing space of the displacement member D180 (more to the center side of the facing space than the tip of the displacement member D180). is arranged (formed) at a position where
Therefore, when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, a ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the flow-down port DOPfl can enter between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other (that is, the sixth passage DRt6). , the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the flow-down port DOPfl can enter the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.
On the other hand, when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, both the sphere flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl and the sphere flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl are displaced as a pair. A ball can be entered between opposing members D180 (that is, the sixth passage DRt6).
In the present embodiment, the dimension of the flow-down port DOPfl in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR) is such that the ball flows down (enters) the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position. sphere) are set to possible dimensions.

That is, between the tip of the displacement member D180 arranged at the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130, a gap (interval) larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed in the longitudinal direction of the flow-down port DOPfl (arrow LR direction). Thereby, even if the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, it is possible to allow the ball to flow down (enter) not only the sixth passage DRt6 but also the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
However, when the displacement member D180 is arranged in the open position, the ball flows down (enters) at least one of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5. sphere) may be set to impossible dimensions.
That is, the gap (interval) between the tip of the displacement member D180 arranged at the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension that the sphere cannot pass through) when viewed from above. It is good as Accordingly, when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, the ball can flow down (enter) only the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
In the central outflow surface D161, when viewed from above, the extended length of the concave surface (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 (arrow FB direction)) is the side outflow. It is made longer than the extended length of the surface D162 (concave surface). In addition, the width of the concave surface of the central outflow surface D161 (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 (direction of arrows LR)) when viewed from above is equal to the side outflow surface D162. made larger than the width of the (concave).

Therefore, even if the number of central outflow surfaces D161 formed (one place) is smaller than the number of side outflow surfaces D162 formed (two places), the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 It is possible to secure the probability that the ball will flow down (enter the ball) from the outlet DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6).
The extension length and width of the concave surface may be set to be the same for the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162. Further, contrary to the present embodiment, the extension length of the central outflow surface D161 (concave surface) may be smaller than the extension length of the side outflow surface D162 (concave surface). In these cases, when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, it is difficult for the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 to flow down (enter) the flow-down port DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6). Specifically, the advantage of disposing the displacement member D180 at the open position can be made significant.
Formation of at least one or both of the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surfaces D162 (recessing in the upper surface of the second interposed member D160) may be omitted. The ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 makes the positions where it flows down to the outlet DOPfl uniform along the longitudinal direction of the outlet DOPfl (the direction of the arrows LR), the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5 or the sixth passage It is possible to increase the randomness of which passage the ball will flow down (enter) in the passage DRt6.
The rolling member D170 includes a shaft D171, a long plate-like body portion D172 having the shaft D171 disposed at one end in the longitudinal direction, and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the body portion D172 (where the shaft D171 is disposed). and a weight portion D174 disposed on the opposite side of the transmission portion D173 (main body portion D172) across the shaft D171. D140 and is rotatably disposed about an axis D171.

As described above, the shaft D171 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D171, the main body D172 is displaced (lifted/lowered) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
The body portion D172 is a portion whose upper surface forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side on which the shaft D171 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) of the intermediate member D140. Along with being arranged side by side with the rolling part (the part where the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, the other longitudinal direction side (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D171 is arranged, the arrow R direction side) is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member D180 in top view (a position capable of receiving (receiving) a ball entered (flowed down) between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other).
The body portion D172 is positioned at one end in the longitudinal direction (the side on which the shaft D171 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) in any state (orientation) from the initial position (first position) to the second position. The upper surface of the intermediate member D140 is at substantially the same height as or slightly above (in the direction of the arrow U) the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion where the upper surface serves as the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140. position.
The shaft D171 is embedded inside the body portion D172, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D172 is formed to a position beyond the shaft D171. That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 rolls (inflows) to the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 after passing the upper side of the shaft D171 (the arrow U direction side). be done.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface on the transmission portion D173 side with the position above the axis D171 (the arrow U direction side) as a boundary, and the weight portion D174 side is centered on the axis D171. It is formed as a curved surface. That is, the upper surface of the body portion D172 is cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D171. The transmission portion D173 side has a linear shape, and the weight portion D174 side has an arc shape concentric with the axis D171 (Fig. 1525). reference).
Since the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface on the transmission portion D173 side of the shaft D171, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling in that region from jumping upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the body portion D172 from being displaced upward due to the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball bounces upward.
The upper surface of the body portion D172 does not have to be a straight line in cross section. It may be formed as a continuous cross-sectional shape, for example, a sinusoidal wave (sinusoidal curve) shape.
Before reaching the axis D171, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is moved to the rolling portion (the upper surface of which is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140. A configuration is also conceivable in which the water is rolled (inflowed) to the part where the water flows. However, in such a configuration, the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced downward (in the direction of the arrow D) by the action of the weight of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the body portion D172 (rolling member D170 In (the state before the main body D172) is returned to the initial position (first position), the ball is thrown from the upper surface of the main body D172, so the influence of the inertial force accompanying the ball is released (the weight of the ball is ), the rolling member D170 flutters. If the rolling member D170 flutters, the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 becomes unstable, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 rolls beyond the position above the axis D171 (in the direction of the arrow U), so that it rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172. It is possible to suppress the effect of the weight of the ball, and the ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the main body D172 in a state where the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is returned to the initial position (first position). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rolling member D170 from fluttering even under the influence of the inertial force (the influence of momentarily stopping the weight of the ball) due to the ball being pushed. As a result, the opening/closing state of the displacement member D180 can be stabilized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, as described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is centered on the axis D171 on the side of the weight portion D174 with respect to the position above the axis D171 (in the direction of the arrow U). It is formed as a curved surface. Therefore, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172 passes above the axis D171 (in the direction of arrow U), the weight of the ball on the upper surface of the main body part D172 does not act. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is located above the shaft D171, and is positioned closer to the transmission portion D173 than the position above the shaft D171 (in the direction of the arrow U). A region closer to the weight portion D174 than the position does not function as a rolling surface.
The transmission portion D173 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the transmission member D190. extended. The extended distal end side (arrow R direction side) of the transmitting portion D173 is arranged above (arrow U direction side) the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190 (arranged at a position where they overlap when viewed from above).
Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission portion D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D), the transmission portion D173 This causes the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 to be displaced (pushed down) downward, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191 (see FIGS. 1525 to 1527).

The weight portion D174 is a portion for eccentrically moving the center of gravity of the rolling member D170, and extends from one longitudinal end of the body portion D172 toward the opposite side (arrow L direction) to the extending direction of the body portion D172. A weight made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) is embedded inside.
In a no-load state (a state in which the ball does not roll on the main body D172) in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D170 (main body D172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located on the axis. It is located (eccentrically) closer to the weight D174 than D171. As a result, the rolling member D170 can maintain the posture arranged at the initial position (first position) in the no-load state by using the weight of the weight portion D174 (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D171). In addition, after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position by its own weight.
That is, when the rolling member D170 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the body portion D172), the body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of the arrow U) (as viewed from the front). , is rotated counterclockwise about the axis D171), is placed at the initial position (first position), and is maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.
On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole to move toward the body portion D172 (the weight portion D174 with the axis D171 interposed therebetween). and opposite side). As a result, the body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) (rotated clockwise about the axis D171 as viewed from the front) to the second position. placed.

In addition, the first position (initial position) of the rolling member D170 is such that the end surface of the body portion D172 on one longitudinal direction end side (arrow L direction side) is aligned with the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 (longitudinal position of the rolling portion). end face opposite to the wall). That is, the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 is brought into contact with the sixth passage partition wall D146, whereby the body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced upward (counterclockwise in a front view about the axis D171). rotation) is regulated and placed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 1525).
On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D170 is defined by contacting the upper surface of the weight portion D174 with the sixth passage partition wall D146 (lower surface of the rolling portion) of the intermediate member D140. That is, the weight portion D174 of the rolling member D170 contacts the sixth passage partition wall D146, thereby displacing the body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 downward (clockwise about the axis D171 in front view). rotation) is restricted and placed in the second position (see FIG. 1527).
When the rolling member D170 is arranged at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the one end in the longitudinal direction, and is arranged at the second position. Even in this state, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D170 (body portion D172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D141f (eighth passage DRt8).
In this way, the rolling member D170 uses the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 to roll the ball. The angle of the downward inclination with respect to the horizontal plane of the upper surface of the main body D172 is the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is rolling (the state where the ball receives the weight of the ball). less than the angle of downward slope in the unloaded state (unloaded with the weight of the ball).

As a result, it is possible to prevent momentum from being imparted to the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172. Therefore, it is possible to increase (lengthen) the time required for the ball to pass through the upper surface of the main body D172. As a result, the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (body portion D172) is lengthened, and the state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged in the open position (at least the interval between the pair of displacement members D180 is closed). It is possible to easily maintain (longen) the state in which the facing distance is wider than that in the state of being arranged in the position.
In the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 is arranged on the weight portion D174 side with the axis D171 as the center in a state where the weight of one ball is applied to the center of the main body portion D172 in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR). The weight and the weight of the body portion D172 are formed so as to balance (the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is positioned on a vertical line passing through the axis D171).
Therefore, when only one ball rolls on the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the ball is positioned closer to the transmission portion D173 than the center of the main body portion D172 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR). opposite side), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is positioned (eccentrically) on the main body D172 side of the shaft D171, and the eccentricity of the center of gravity position causes the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 to move downward. It is displaced (lowered) in the direction of arrow D (rotated clockwise around axis D171 in front view).
On the other hand, when the ball is positioned closer to the axis D171 (opposite to the transmission portion D173) than the center of the main body D172 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is aligned with the axis D171. The main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity position (centered on the axis D171 in front view). counterclockwise as ).

When two or more balls roll on the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 (when the weight of two or more balls acts on the body portion D172), the rolling positions of the balls (body portion D172 in the longitudinal direction), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 is positioned (eccentrically) closer to the body D172 than the axis D171, and the eccentricity of the center of gravity causes the body D172 and the transmission portion D173 to move. It is displaced (lowered) downward (direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around axis D171 in front view).
In this way, by providing a balanced position in the middle of the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR) (the center in the longitudinal direction in this embodiment) of the rolling surface (body portion D172) of the rolling member D170, the balanced position is After the ball has passed through, the rolling member D170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. As a result, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position.
When the weight of one ball acts, the position where the weight on the side of the weight D174 and the weight on the side of the main body D172 are balanced about the axis D171 is the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 (arrows LR It may be on the axis D171 side of the center (direction), or it may be on the transmission portion D173 side of the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the body portion D172.
The displacement member D180 is a member for guiding the ball that has flowed down (entered) from the third passage DRt3 to the flow-down port DOPfl toward the sixth passage DRt6. and displaced (rotated) between closed and open positions.

The shaft support member D210 includes a shaft D211 fixed to the base end side of the displacement member D180, a protruding portion D212 protruding in a direction orthogonal to the axial direction of the shaft D211 (outward in the radial direction), and a protruding portion D212. A connecting pin D213 protrudes from D212 in a posture parallel to the axis D211 (a posture along the arrow FB direction) and is connected to the transmission member D190.
As described above, the shaft D211 of the shaft supporting member D210 is supported by the shaft supporting portion D141b of the intermediate member D140 (body portion D141) and the shaft supporting hole D131b of the rear member D130 (body portion D131). The projecting portion D212 is arranged on the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131), and the connecting pin D213 protrudes toward the back side (arrow B direction side) in a posture parallel to the axis D211.
A shaft D211 of the pivot member D210 is fixed to the displacement member D180. In addition, the connecting pin D213 is positioned at different positions in a direction (radial direction) orthogonal to the axial direction with respect to the axis D211 (arranged at a position eccentric with respect to the axis D211). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced due to the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190, the displacement of the connecting pin D213 is converted into the rotation of the shaft D211, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) together with the shaft D211. .
The connecting pin D213 is arranged outside the axis D211 (on the side opposite to the space where the pair of displacement members D180 face each other). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and the connecting pin D213 is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). By being pressed (pushed up), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the closed position.

The closed position and the open position of the displacement member D180 are defined by contacting the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R with the proximal outer surface of the displacement member D180. That is, the outer surface of the displacement member D180 on the base end side is brought into contact with the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R, thereby moving the pair of displacement members D180 toward each other (opposing direction). The displacement in the direction of decreasing the distance) or the direction of separating them from each other (the direction of increasing the opposed distance) is regulated, and they are arranged in the closed position or the open position (see FIGS. 1525 to 1527).
Further, the displacement member D180 and the pivot member D210 are integrated (unitized) by fixing the shaft D211 of the pivot member D210 to the base end side of the displacement member D180.
A part in which the displacement member D180 and the pivot member D210 are integrated (hereinafter referred to as a "displacement member D180 unit") has a center of gravity of the displacement member D180 unit as a whole, at least in the closed position. It is positioned (eccentrically) closer to the other displacement member D180 than D211. That is, when viewed in the direction of the axis D211 (arrows FB), the center of gravity is located (eccentrically) on the side of the other displacement member D180 unit with respect to the virtual line passing through the axis D211.
As a result, the displacement member D180 unit utilizes the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D211 (that is, the eccentricity of the center of gravity position acts as a force to rotate the pair of displacement members D180 in a direction to bring them closer to each other), thereby closing. It is possible to maintain the posture arranged in position.

The transmission member D190 is a member for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 (shaft support member D210). ) and the end surface on the other side (arrow B direction side), and a transmission receiving member extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on one side in the axial direction of the body D192. A body portion D194 and a weight portion D195 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion D192 on the other side in the axial direction.
The shaft D191 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrows FB), and as described above, one end of the shaft D191 is inserted into the insertion hole D131c of the back member D130 so that the body portion D192 is inserted into the insertion hole D131c of the back member D130. The other end of the shaft D191 is supported by the shaft support portion D201 of the detour member D200.
The transmitted portion D193 is a portion to which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted from the rolling member D170 (transmitting portion D173). are placed.
As described above, the extended distal end side (arrow L direction side) of the transmitted portion D193 is arranged below (arrow D direction side) the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170 (arranged at a position where they overlap when viewed from above). When the transmission portion D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed down) by the transmission portion D173. D190 is displaced (rotated) about axis D191 (see Figures 1525 to 1527).

Here, between the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, a predetermined gap is formed in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) to receive the weight of the ball. When the rolling member D170 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D), the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is moved to the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 after filling the above-described predetermined gap. Abutment is possible. That is, the rolling member D170 cannot push down the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 unless it is displaced (lowered) enough to fill the above-described gap.
Thereby, when the displacement of the rolling member D170 is relatively small, the displacement of the rolling member D170 can be prevented from being transmitted to the displacement member D180. Therefore, for example, it is difficult to successfully displace (lower) the rolling member D170 by hitting the game machine or to displace (lower) the rolling member D170 with a foreign object such as a wire.
The body portion D194 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 to the connecting pin D213 of the pivot member D210, and is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the body portion D131 in the back member D130. be done.
Grooves D194L and D194R are formed in the body portion D194, and the connecting pins D213 of the shaft support member D210 are slidably inserted through the grooves D194L and D194R. Therefore, when the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted and the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 is displaced downward or upward by the inner wall surfaces of the insertion grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190. (pushed down or pushed up). As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is displaced (rotated), and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position or the closed position.

The width of the groove D194R (the dimension perpendicular to the direction in which the connecting pin D213 is relatively slidably displaced) when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow FB direction) is approximately the diameter of the connecting pin D213. It is set to have the same or slightly larger dimensions, and extends linearly along the direction intersecting the arc centered on the axis D191. Therefore, while the transmission member D190 is being displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 inserted through the groove D194R is displaced (pushed down or pushed up) downward or upward by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R. ).
The groove D194L extends in an arc-shaped curved shape having a center on the axis D191 side when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow FB direction), and has a lower extending end (an end on the arrow D direction side). , the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, the width dimension of the groove at the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is positioned is the connecting pin The diameter of D213 is set to be approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of D213, and the upper extended end portion (the end portion in the direction of arrow U) has the rolling member D170 arranged at the second position and the displacement member D180 arranged at the open position. In this state, the width dimension of the groove increases toward the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located.
Specifically, of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194L, the inner wall surface on the far side from the axis D191 has a shape along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a predetermined circular shape centered on the axis D191). The inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191 extends from the lower extending end (the end in the direction of arrow D) to the extending end on the upper side (the end in the direction of arrow U). end), the distance from the axis D191 is increased toward the arc.
Since the connecting pin D213 of the shaft supporting member D210 is eccentric with respect to the axis D211, the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 is , and decreases as the displacement member D180 is displaced toward the open position. That is, the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190 is reduced as the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of the arrow D).

Therefore, the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from the state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (that is, the state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed up) to the highest position (in the direction of arrow U), see FIG. 1525). ), the connecting pin D213 is not affected (not contacted) by both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194R.
On the other hand, the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from the state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged in the open position (that is, the state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) to the bottom (direction of arrow D), see FIG. 1527). ), the connecting pin D213 receives an action (abuts) from the inner wall surface closer to the axis D191 among the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194L, and gradually upward ( arrow U)).
In this way, when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, the connection pin D213 is not affected by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194L even if the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated). , is not displaced downward (not pushed down) and reaches the upper extended end of the groove D194L (the end on the arrow U direction side) (see FIG. 1526), and then at the upper extended end It is displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface.
Thereby, the operation modes (displacement modes) of the pair of displacement members D180 can be made different from each other. That is, it is possible to form a state in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, there is a gap between the connecting pin D213 and the upper extending end of the groove D194L (the end in the direction of arrow U, the inner wall surface). A predetermined interval is formed (see FIG. 1525).
When the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the transmission member D190 starts displacing (rotating), the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is , is displaced (pushed down) by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, thereby displacing (rotating) the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position. be started.
On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted through the groove D194L is not displaced downward until it reaches the upper extending end of the groove D194L (the extending end on the arrow U direction side, the inner wall surface). (not depressed), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the closed position.
When the transmission member D190 is further displaced (rotated) as the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R moves to the position of the groove D194R. It continues to be displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction, thereby displacing (rotating) the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position to the open position. Continued.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted through the groove D194L reaches the upper extending end of the groove D194L (the end on the arrow U direction side, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 1526), the upper extending end of the groove D194L It is displaced (pushed down) downward by the provided end (inner wall surface), whereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) starts to be displaced from the closed position.
Thereafter, all of the connecting pins D213 are displaced (pushed down) downward, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and when the rolling member D170 reaches the second position, the pair of displacement members D170 Member D180 is placed in the open position.
Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to make the timings at which the pair of displacement members D180 start to displace (rotate) from the closed position to the open position at different timings (one of them is delayed from the other). As a result, for the player who expects the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the open position (that is, the inflow of the ball into the sixth passage DRt6 (entering the ball)), it is possible to create a change in the open state, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. be able to.
The weight portion D195 is a portion for eccentrically moving the center of gravity of the transmission member D190. A weight made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) is embedded in the hole.

Due to the weight of the weight D195, the center of gravity of the transmission member D190 as a whole is located (eccentrically) closer to the weight D195 than the axis D191. As a result, the transmission member D190 is placed at the initial position (the position where the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, see FIG. 1525) using the weight of the weight D195 (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D191). It is possible to maintain the posture, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position by its own weight (that is, to return the displacement member D180 to the closed position).
That is, in the transmitting member D190, the body portion D194 is upward (in the direction of the arrow U) when the transmitted portion D193 is not displaced (in the direction of the arrow D) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) by the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170. (rotated counterclockwise about axis D191 in rear view), placed in the initial position (places displacement member D180 in the closed position), and maintained in the initial position. This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the transmission member D190 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.
The detour member D200 is formed in a plate shape having a larger outer shape in a rear view than the partitioned area of the partition wall D134 of the back member D130, and is disposed on the standing tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the partition wall D134. Thus, the eighth passage DRt8 is partitioned together with the partition wall D134. In addition, the detour member D200 is formed with a pivot portion D201 in a region that is outward in a rear view from the partitioned region by the partition wall D134.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1525 to 1527 and FIG. 1528(c), the opening/closing operation of the displacement member D180 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1525, in a state where the ball is not flowing (entering) from the flow-down port DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position). ). Therefore, the transmission member D190 is not acted upon by the rolling member D170, and the displacement member D180 is arranged in the closed position.
In this state, when a ball (not shown) flows (enters) from the flow-down port DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), the ball moves into the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other. After passing (flowing down) between the rolling member D170 and being dropped on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the other longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the axis D171, the arrow R direction side) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the main body D172 is rolled with its upper surface facing one end in the longitudinal direction (axis D171 side, arrow L direction side).
As shown in FIG. 1526, when a ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball causes the rolling member D170 to move toward the second position. After being displaced (rotated), the rolling member D170 is further displaced (rotated) to reach the second position as shown in FIG. Intervals are maximized.
A ball (not shown) that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 moves from one longitudinal end of the body portion D172 (axis D171 side, arrow L side) to the intermediate member D140. It rolls (flows into) the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface serves as a rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, and rolls (flows into) the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D131d.

After that, when the ball no longer exists on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 is returned to the initial position (first position) by its own weight. D190 is returned to the initial position by its own weight, so that displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 1525).
Thus, in the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is rotatably supported about the axis D171, and flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). ) is rolled on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 toward the shaft D171 side (the arrow L direction side).
As described above, the rolling member D170 has the other longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side on which the shaft D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) overlapping the displacement member D180 in top view (a pair of displacement members It is arranged at a position where it can receive (receive) a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing D180.
Therefore, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can drop onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170.

Here, for example, in a structure in which the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is set in the direction away from the axis D171, the ball is placed on the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172). In the initial stage of rolling, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is close, so the ball rolls a predetermined distance and the distance from the axis D171 (the point of force and the fulcrum The weight of the weight portion D174 cannot oppose the weight of the ball until the distance between the ball D170 and the weight of the ball causes the rolling member D170 to be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position). can't
In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172, in the initial stage, the distance between the position (force point) where the weight of the ball acts and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is Since the influence of the weight portion D174 can be reduced by securing the weight portion D174, the rolling member D170 can be easily displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball.
That is, immediately after the ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) and displaced. The member D180 can be quickly displaced toward the open position (and placed at the open position).
In particular, the ball that has flowed into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can be dropped directly onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170. The rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) can be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by utilizing not only the action of , but also the momentum (kinetic energy) of the falling ball. In this respect as well, the displacement of the displacement member D180 toward the open position (and placement at the open position) can be performed quickly.

Therefore, the player who sees the ball flowing down (entering the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can immediately start the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the open position. It is possible to perform a performance with a good tempo.
Further, when a plurality of balls roll on the third path DRt3, the first ball entering the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) and the first ball following the first ball When the distance between the trailing second ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, the trailing ball) is relatively small, the trailing second ball is moved to the sixth passage DRt6 ( (Between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can be made easier to flow (enter).
Since the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 is the direction toward the axis D171, as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, By gradually shortening the distance between the position (force point) where the weight of the ball acts and the axis D171 (fulcrum), the influence of the weight D174 can be increased. Therefore, the rolling member D170 can be gradually returned from the second position toward the initial position (first position).
That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member D180 arranged at the open position can be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position. As a result, for example, when another ball is reciprocated on the third path DRt3, the inflow (entrance) of the other ball into the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is Amusement in the game can be enhanced by making the player pay attention to whether or not the displacement member D180 is in an advantageous state in which it is opened (at least a state in which the amount of opening is larger than in the state in which it is arranged in the closed position).

Further, when a ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is dropped onto the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 rolls the dropped ball. It can be received on the side where the amount of displacement in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the moving member D170 is large (the side away from the axis D171).
Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) as energy for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170, that is, lifting the weight D174 upward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball falling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 from jumping upward. As a result, the weight of the ball is stably applied to the rolling member D170, stabilizing the state of the displacement member D180 (for example, suppressing the temporary displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 toward the closed position). )can.
In addition, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is transferred to another member (fixed non-displacement member, such as the back member D130 or the like) other than the rolling member D170. If the ball is dropped onto a part of the intermediate member D140), another member is likely to be damaged. ), damage to the rolling member D170 and the rear member D130 and the intermediate member D140 that pivotally support the rolling member D170 due to the collision of the ball can be suppressed. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased by allowing the falling of the ball (the upper limit of the falling height of the ball to be relaxed).
Protrusions D131f and D141g (acting means) are protruded from the body portion D131 of the back member D130 and the body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140 that form the side wall (inner side surface) of the sixth passage DRt6. It is formed to act on a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D172.

That is, the projections D131f and D141g project from the body portions D131 and D141 opposed to each other with a predetermined interval into the sixth passage DRt6 and extend straight along the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD). , and a plurality of them are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170).
Therefore, when the ball passes through the sixth passage DRt6, it not only rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, but also rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170. Even in the case of moving while floating from the rolling surface), the velocity of the ball can be reduced by bringing the protrusions D131f and D141g into contact with the ball to provide resistance.
As a result, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least It is easier to maintain (longer) the state where it is more open than the closed position and the ball is easy to enter.
In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed on both sides of the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170), and D172) are arranged in a staggered manner, so that the ball can alternately abut against the protrusions D131f and D141g when passing through the sixth passage DRt6.

As a result, it is possible not only to apply resistance to the ball, but also to add a lateral (perpendicular to the rolling direction) velocity component to the velocity component of the ball (the path of the ball is not straight, but zigzags). can). Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 can be lengthened. Therefore, also from this point, it is easy to maintain (long )can.
On the other hand, since the protrusions D131f and D141g extend along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), it is difficult to apply resistance to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when a ball bounces upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 (body portion D172), the ball can be quickly dropped downward (rolling surface). can. Therefore, even when the body D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced upward by the action of the weight D174 as the ball bounces upward, the weight of the ball is quickly transferred to the body D172 of the rolling member D170. , and the body portion D172 can be quickly returned to its original state.
As a result, while the ball passes through the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball is applied to the main body portion D172, and the displacement member D180 is at least opened more than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter. can be easily maintained.
The upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 is formed as a flat surface. That is, the upper surface of the main body portion D172 is formed as a smooth surface that smoothly continues along the rolling direction of the ball, and no steps are formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 from jumping upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the body portion D172 from being displaced upward due to the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball bounces upward.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member D180 is formed to be displaceable (rotatable), and the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 increases the ease with which a ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6. In the changing structure, the displacement member D180 is displaced to the side (open position) where the ball is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6 when the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6. When one ball is entered into DRt6, a ball that follows that ball (for example, a ball that reciprocates in the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, a following ball) is likely to be entered into the sixth passage DRt6. can.
That is, when the first ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced by the entry of the first ball into the sixth passage DRt6, and the following second ball is displaced. (the second ball following the first ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and if the second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the second ball The displacement member D180 is displaced by the ball entering the sixth passage DRt6, and the following third ball (the third ball succeeding the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. These aspects can be repeated for the third sphere and beyond.
Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the sixth path DRt6 will occur due to the inflow (entering ball) of one ball into the sixth path DRt6. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In this case, the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the side where the ball is likely to enter (open position) is performed using the weight of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, the actuator for driving the displacement member D180 and the sensor for controlling the actuator can be eliminated, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface of the ball of the sixth passage DRt6 is formed by the rolling member D170, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) by the weight of the rolling ball. , you can have time to use the weight of the ball. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the ball is easily flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1529, the sixty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the 68th embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be forcibly opened from the outside, but in the 69th embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be restricted from being forcibly opened from the outside. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
1529(a) and 1529(b) are cross-sectional views of the lower frame D2086b in the sixty-ninth embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1529(a), the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position. A state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the second position and the displaceable member D180 is disposed in the open position is illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1529, transmission member D2190 includes engaging portion D2196. The transmission member D2190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the 68th embodiment only in that it further includes an engaging portion D2196, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

The engagement portion D2196 allows the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position, and the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial value (first position). This is a portion for restricting the displacement (rotation) of the displacing member D180 in the closed position toward the open position, and stands upright from the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the transmitted portion D193. , the outer surface (the surface opposite to the shaft D191) of the rolling member D170 facing the extended distal end (the end in the direction of the arrow R) of the transmission portion D173.
The outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface on the side opposite to the axis D191) serves as the displacement of the extension tip of the transmission portion D173 (the end on the arrow R direction side) when the rolling member D170 is rotated about the axis D171. It is formed in a shape that does not intersect the trajectory (a shape in contact with the displacement trajectory, or a shape that has a gap with the displacement trajectory). Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position is allowed (see FIG. 1529(b)).
Therefore, when a ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 and rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball is used to roll the rolling member D170. can be displaced to the second position. As a result, the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D2190 can be displaced (pushed down) by the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, and the displacement member D180 can be displaced (rotated) to the open position.
Further, the outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface on the side opposite to the shaft D191) has a transmission member D2190 is formed in a shape capable of restricting counterclockwise rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 1529(a), that is, the direction in which the displacement member D180 arranged at the open position is displaced toward the open position) when viewed from the front.

Specifically, the transmission member D2190 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 1529(a)), and the outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the shaft D191) rotates to the transmission position of the rolling member D170. When the extended distal end of the portion D173 (the end in the direction of the arrow R) is pressed against the extended distal end of the transmission portion D173, the extended distal end of the transmission portion D173 is pressed in the direction toward the axis D171 (the extended distal end of the transmission portion D173 Axis D171 is positioned on the extension of the force acting from engaging portion D2196).
Therefore, a force component for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170 is not formed, and the rolling member D170 is maintained at the initial position (first position) (not rotatable), so that the transmission member D2190 counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation in FIG. 1529(a)) in front view is regulated (see FIG. 1529(a)). That is, displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) (that is, when the weight of the ball is not applied), the displacement member D180 is moved from the closed position to the closed position. Displacement (rotation) toward the open position can be restricted. That is, for example, by inserting a foreign object such as a wire, the displacement member D180 in the closed position is forcibly displaced toward the open position. ) can be suppressed.
In this case, in this embodiment, by using the rolling member D170 (engaging the engaging portion D2196 of the transmitting member D2190 with the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170), the displacement member D180 is shifted from the closed position to the open position. Displacement (rotation) toward is restricted. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a component for restricting the forced displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 can be used. The structure for suppressing fraudulent displacement can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1530, the seventieth embodiment will be described. In the sixty-eighth embodiment, the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 is the direction toward the axis D171. It is defined as the direction of going away (separated). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIGS. 1530(a) and 1530(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D3086b in the seventieth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1530(a), the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position. A state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the second position and the displaceable member D180 is disposed in the open position is illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1530, the rolling member D3170 includes a shaft D3171, a long plate-like body portion D3172 disposed on the other longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) of the shaft D3171, and the body portion D3172. A weight portion D3174 disposed on the other longitudinal end side of D3172 (the side on which the shaft D3171 is disposed) and a transmission portion D3173 disposed on the opposite side of the body portion D3172 with the weight portion D3174 interposed therebetween. It is provided between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140 so as to be rotatable around the axis D3171.
The parts D3171 to D3174 of the rolling member D3170 have substantially the same functions as the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the 68th embodiment, and differ only in arrangement. Further, the transmission member D3190 differs from the transmission member D3190 in the 68th embodiment only in the orientation (extending direction) of the transmitted portion D3193, and the other configurations are the same.

The shaft D3171 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown) formed in the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140. Therefore, by displacing (rotating) the rolling member D3170 about the axis D3171, the main body D3172 is displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
The main body portion D3172 has an upper surface that forms a rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D3171 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) Along with being arranged side by side with the rolling part (the part where the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the member D140, the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side where the shaft D3171 is arranged, the arrow R direction side) is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member D180 in top view (a position capable of receiving (receiving) a ball entered (flowed down) between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other).
When the body portion D3172 is arranged at the second position (orientation), the upper surface of the one longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D3171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is the upper surface of the intermediate member D140. It is arranged at a height position that is substantially the same as or slightly above (in the direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the rolling portion (the upper surface serving as the rolling surface) of the 6-passage partition wall D146.
The upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D3172 is formed as a flat surface. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rolling ball from jumping upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the body portion D3172 from being displaced upward due to the action of the weight portion D3174 as the ball bounces upward.

The upper surface of the main body D3172 does not have to be a flat surface (a cross section cut along a plane orthogonal to the axis D3171 is a straight line), and it is sufficient if there is no step, and the surface is smooth along the rolling direction of the ball. It may be formed as a smooth surface (a cross-sectional shape in which curves are smoothly connected or a curve and a straight line are smoothly connected, for example, a sine wave (sinusoidal curve) shape).
The weight portion D3174 is a portion for eccentrically moving the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170, and extends from the other end of the main body D3172 in the longitudinal direction (the side where the shaft D3171 is arranged) in the direction opposite to the extending direction of the main body D3172. A weight made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) is embedded inside while extending toward the side (direction of arrow R).
The transmission portion D3173 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 to the transmission member D3190. side (arrow R direction side). The extended distal end side (arrow R direction side) of the transmitting portion D3173 is arranged below (arrow D direction side) the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 (arranged at a position where they overlap when viewed from above).
Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission portion D3173 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U), the transmission portion D3173 The transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 is displaced (pushed up) by the movement of the transmission member D3190, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D3190 around the axis D3191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a projection projects (stands) from the transmitting portion D3173 toward the transmitted portion D3193. However, a projection may protrude (stand) from the transmitted portion D3193 toward the transmitting portion D3173. That is, it is sufficient that the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 can be transmitted to the transmission member D3190 via the transmission portion D3173 and the transmitted portion D3193.
In a no-load state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D3170 (main body portion D3172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body portion D3172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole is at the axis It is positioned (eccentrically) closer to the weight portion D3174 (and transmission portion D3173) than D3171. As a result, the rolling member D3170 uses the weight of the weight D3174 (and the transmission portion D3173) (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D3171) to be placed at the initial position (first position) in the unloaded state. After being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position by its own weight (see FIG. 1530(a)).
That is, when the rolling member D3170 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball does not act on the main body D3172), the main body D3172 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of the arrow U) (as viewed from the front, the axis D3171 ), placed in the initial position (first position) and maintained in the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D3170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.
On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole to shift to the side of the body portion D3172 (the weight portion D3174 across the axis D3171). and opposite side). As a result, the body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) (rotated counterclockwise about the axis D3171 as viewed from the front), and arranged at the second position. .

At the first position (initial position) of the rolling member D3170, the lower surface (surface in the arrow D direction) of one longitudinal end side (the arrow L direction side) of the main body D3172 is a stopper protruding from the intermediate member D140. It is defined by being in contact with the part. That is, the body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170 abuts against the stopper portion, thereby restricting downward displacement of the body portion D3172 (counterclockwise rotation about the axis D3171 in a front view). Position 1 (initial position) (see FIG. 1530(a)).
On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D3170 is defined by the lower surface of the weight portion D3174 (the surface on the arrow D direction side) coming into contact with the stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, the weight portion D3174 of the rolling member D3170 abuts against the stopper portion, thereby restricting upward displacement of the body portion D3172 (counterclockwise rotation about the axis D3171 in a front view). 2 position (see FIG. 1530(b)).
When the rolling member D3170 is arranged at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the one end in the longitudinal direction, and is arranged at the second position. Even in this state, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D3170 (body portion D3172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131d (eighth passage DRt8).
In this way, the rolling member D3170 uses the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 to roll the ball. In this embodiment, the angle of the downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body D3172 with respect to the horizontal plane is the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is rolling (a state in which the ball receives the weight of the ball). It is made greater than the angle of downward slope in the rolling state (unloaded state without the weight of the ball).

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 is dropped to a position near the axis D3171 on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172, and is dropped onto the main body D3172. The upper surface is rolled in the direction of separating from the axis D3171 (the direction of going away).
As a result, in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the distance between the position (force point) where the weight of the ball acts and the axis D3171 (fulcrum) is shortened. , the weight of the weight portion D3174 is dominant, and as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D3172, the distance from the axis D191 (the distance between the force point and the fulcrum) is gradually increased (lengthened). The weight of the part D174 can be countered. As a result, the rolling member D3170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position.
That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position, and the opening amount (the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can be gradually increased. . As a result, for example, when the second ball reciprocates in the third path DRt3, it is expected that the second ball flows into the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). It can be gradually increased, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, the first ball that entered the sixth path DRt6 and the second ball that follows the first ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth path DRt6, the subsequent ball) Even when the interval between the two is relatively large, the following second ball can be easily made to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other).

On the other hand, the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D3170 is the direction away from the axis D171, so that at least the ball can reach the terminal end (one longitudinal end) of the main body D3172. end in the direction of the arrow L), the rolling member D3170 is placed at the second position.
That is, in the state immediately before the ball rolls (inflows) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172 to the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, the distance from the axis D191 (the point of force and fulcrum) was maximized and the weight of the ball was applied to the main body D3172 at its maximum, the ball rolled from the upper surface of the main body D3172 to the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 ( Inflow), the effect of the weight of the ball disappears momentarily, leaving only the effect of the weight D3174.
Therefore, the rolling member D3170 can be returned from the second position to the initial position (first position) at the maximum speed, and the displacement member D180 arranged at the open position can be immediately arranged at the closed position. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance with a good tempo. Also, whether the second ball can flow into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) (enter the ball) while the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the open position. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
In addition, in the rolling member D3170 of the present embodiment, when the ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is one ball, the ball is located at one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body D3172 (arrow L-direction side end), the rolling member D3170 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) toward the second position, and the ball moves in the longitudinal direction of the main body D3172. When one end (the end in the direction of arrow L) is reached (at least before the ball rolls (flows into) the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140), the rolling member D3170 moves to the second position. configured to be placed in

Next, with reference to FIG. 1531, the seventy-first embodiment will be described. In the sixty-eighth embodiment, only the rolling member D170 is provided in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outflow port DOPout (the path formed by the sixth path DRt6 and the eighth path DRt8). A rolling member D170 and a second rolling member D4220 are arranged in the path (the path formed by the sixth path DRt6 and the eighth path DRt8) from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout in the embodiment. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1531(a) and 1531(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D4086b in the 71st embodiment, in which the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 are cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D4221. The states are illustrated.
1531(a), the second rolling member D4220 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position. A state in which the moving member D4220 is arranged at the second position and a state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position is illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1531, the rear member D4130 has a partition wall D4134 erected from its rear surface.

The partition wall D4134 partitions the eighth passage DRt8 together with the body portion D131, the detour member D200 and the second rolling member D4220. That is, the detour member D200 is arranged to face the main body portion D131, and the region defined by the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 between them is the eighth passage DRt8.
The second rolling member D4220 includes a shaft D4221, a long plate-like body portion D4222 in which the shaft D4221 is disposed on one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side), and one longitudinal end side of the body portion D4222. A weight portion D4224 arranged on the side on which the shaft D4221 is arranged, and a transmission portion D4223 arranged on the opposite side of the body portion D4222 with the weight portion D4224 interposed therebetween. It is arranged rotatably about the axis D4221 between the member D200.
The parts D4221 to D4224 of the second rolling member D4220 are substantially the same in function as the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the 68th embodiment, and differ only in arrangement. In addition, the partition wall D4134 of the back member D4130 is different from the partition wall D134 in the 68th embodiment in that a part of the wall portion forming the rolling surface of the ball is omitted (main body portion D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 are replaced with ), and other configurations are the same.
The shaft D4221 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown) formed in the back member D4130 and the detour member D200. Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D4221, the main body D4222 is displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).

The main body portion D4222 is a portion whose upper surface forms a rolling surface of the ball in the eighth passage DRt8, and one longitudinal end side (the side where the shaft D4221 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) is connected to the opening D131e. is arranged in parallel with the rolling part (the part where the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls, and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D4221 is arranged, the arrow R direction side) is disposed on the downstream side of the opening D131d (a position capable of receiving (receiving) the ball flowing down from the opening D131d).
The body portion D4222 is positioned at one end in the longitudinal direction (the side on which the shaft D4221 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) in any state (orientation) from the initial position (first position) to the second position. The upper surface is at approximately the same height as the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion where the upper surface serves as the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the ball to the opening D131e, or slightly above (in the direction of the arrow U). position.
The shaft D4221 is embedded inside the body portion D4222, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the body portion D4222 is formed to a position beyond the shaft D4221. That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D4222 rolls (inflows) to the rolling portion of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the ball to the opening D131e after passing the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the axis D4221. ) is done.
The weight portion D4224 is a portion for eccentrically moving the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body D4222 (the side on which the shaft D4221 is arranged) to the extending direction of the main body D4222. It extends toward the opposite side (arrow L direction side), and a weight made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) is buried inside.

The transmission portion D4223 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the transmission member D190. It extends toward D190 (weight portion D195). The extension tip side (arrow U direction side) of the transmission portion D4223 is arranged below (arrow D direction side) the weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 (arranged at a position where they overlap when viewed from above).
Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D4221 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission portion D4223 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U), the transmission Weight portion D195 of transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed up) by portion D4223, thereby displacing (rotating) transmission member D190 about axis D191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.
In a no-load state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the second rolling member D4220 (body portion D4222) (a state where the ball is not rolling on the body portion D4222), the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole The position is positioned (eccentrically) closer to the weight portion D4224 (and the transmission portion D4223) than the axis D4221. As a result, the second rolling member D4220 uses the weight of the weight portion D4224 (and the transmission portion D4223) (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D4221) to move the initial position (first position) in the no-load state. 1531 (a), and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position (first position) by its own weight (see FIG. 1531 (a) ).
That is, when the second rolling member D4220 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball does not act on the body portion D4222), the body portion D4222 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (in a front view, counterclockwise around axis D4221), placed in the initial position (first position), and maintained in the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the second rolling member D4220 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.

On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the body portion D4222 of the second rolling member D4220, the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole moves to the side of the body portion D4222 (with the axis D4221 interposed therebetween) due to the weight of the ball. is located (eccentrically) on the side opposite to the weight D4224. As a result, the body portion D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) (rotated clockwise about the axis D4221 in front view), and is arranged at the second position. be.
In addition, the first position (initial position) of the second rolling member D4220 is such that the end surface (the surface on the arrow L direction side) on one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) of the main body portion D4222 is the second rolling member D4220. The second position of is defined by the lower surface (surface in the arrow D direction) of the other longitudinal end side (the arrow R direction side) of the main body portion D4222 coming into contact with the partition wall D4134.
In the state where the second rolling member D4220 is arranged at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D4222 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the one end in the longitudinal direction. , the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D4222 is inclined downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the one end in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the ball on the second rolling member D4220 (body portion D4222) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131e.
Thus, according to the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 is arranged in the sixth passage DRt6, and the second rolling member D4220 is arranged in the eighth passage DRt8 downstream of the sixth passage DRt6. be done. Therefore, compared to the 68th embodiment, even if the length of the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outflow port DOPout) is the same, the second rolling member D4220 is arranged. As a result, a section can be secured (longer) where the weight of the ball can be used. As a result, the state in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the open position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than in the closed position and the ball is more likely to enter) can be easily maintained (longer).

Here, the longitudinal dimension (the length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of one member (rolling member D170 (body portion D172)) is extended to secure (lengthen) the section in which the weight of the ball can be used. In this configuration, it is difficult to dispose the rolling member D170 with an extended longitudinal dimension in the limited space (width direction (direction of arrows LR)) of the lower frame D86b. If the arrangement position of the pair of displacement members D180 is biased toward one width direction side (arrow L direction side) of the lower frame D86b, the longitudinal dimension (upper surface (rolling Although it is possible to extend the length of the moving surface), there is a limit to the length that can be extended. In addition, the third path DRt3 cannot be shaped so that the ball can reciprocate, which reduces the interest of the game.
On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of members (in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged to secure (long) a section in which the weight of the ball can be used. Because of this configuration, the limited space of the lower frame D4086b can be effectively used, and a section in which the weight of the ball can be used can be sufficiently secured (long). Also, the third path DRt3 can be formed in a shape in which the ball can reciprocate, thereby improving the amusement of the game.
That is, since the second rolling member D4220 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the rolling member D170, and these are stacked in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the lower frame D4086b By effectively utilizing the thickness in the front-rear direction, which becomes a dead space, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 can secure (lengthen) a section in which the weight of the ball can be used.
In this way, while securing (longening) the section in which the weight of the ball can be used, the pair of displacement members D180 can be arranged at the center of the lower frame D4086b in the width direction (arrows LR), so that the third path The DRt3 can be made into a shape in which the ball can reciprocate (a shape inclined downward toward the center in the width direction), thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is arranged in the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outflow port DOPout), displacement occurs while one ball passes through the path. Although the predetermined displacement of the member D180 (displacement from the closed position to the open position due to the weight of the ball and returning to the closed position after the ball has passed) is formed only once, a plurality of members (rolling If the member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged in a path (passage), the above-described predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 is performed multiple times (this In an embodiment, it can be formed twice). By repeating the opening and closing of the displacement member D180, the player who expects the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6 is informed of the displacement state of the displacement member D180 and the other balls on the third passage DRt3. It is possible to draw attention to the relationship between and improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is disposed in the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outflow port DOPout), the path is provided with a plurality (two or more) of balls. , the displacement member D180 can only be displaced in one manner (that is, displaced from the closed position to the open position by the weight of the ball and returned to the closed position after the ball has passed), but there are multiple (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in a path (path), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 that can be formed while a plurality of balls pass through the path is Can be done in multiple ways. That is, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be diversified by the combination of the timing (the timing at which the ball rolls) at which the weight of the ball acts on one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected presentation.
The transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is positioned above (in the direction of the arrow U) the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190, and when the weight of the ball acts on the body portion D172, the transmitted portion D193 moves. Displace downward (push down). The transmission portion D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 is positioned below the weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 (the arrow D direction side), and when the weight of the ball acts on the body portion D4222, the weight portion D195 Displace upward (push up).
That is, when the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are operated by the action of the weight of the ball to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190, the displacement (rotation) direction of the transmission member D190 is the same direction, The motions of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are not opposed. Similarly, when one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 returns to its initial position (displaced (rotated) by the weight of the weights D174 and D4224 without the weight of the ball acting), the rolling member Regardless of the state of the motion of D170 or the other of the second rolling member D4220, one motion is not opposed to the other motion (both motions are allowed).

In this way, the displacement (rotation) when the weight of the ball of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is applied can be individually and independently transmitted to the transmission member D190, and the rolling member D170 and Displacement (rotation) when the action of the weight of the ball of the second rolling member D4220 is canceled can be performed independently.
Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through a path (passage, that is, a section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), the rolling member D170 or the second Displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 solely due to the operation of one or the other of the rolling member D4220 is also caused by the operation of both the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220. The transmission member D190 can also be displaced (rotated), and a combination of these can diversify the manner in which the displacement member D180 is displaced.
For example, while the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, if the weight of the ball is applied to either the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, the movement of the one will cause the displacement. Member D180 can be displaced toward the open position part way through the displacement toward the closed position.
Further, for example, the weight of a ball acts on one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the motion of the one causes the displacement member D180 to be displaced (rotated) toward the open position. When the weight of the ball acts on the other of the moving member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the weight of the ball acts more on the other (the force displacing the displacement member D180 is stronger), the other moves. Thus, the displacement member D180 can be displaced to the open position at a faster displacement speed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a member (transmitting means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 and the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180. There is no need to separately provide a member (transmission means) for transmission, and the transmission member D190 can be shared as such a member (transmission means). Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified. As a result, improved operational reliability and reduced product cost can be achieved.
Next, referring to FIG. 1532, the seventy-second embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1532 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame D5086b in the seventy-second embodiment, illustrating the detour member D200 removed. Note that FIG. 1532(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position.
As shown in FIG. 1532, grooves D5194L and D194R are formed in the body portion D5194, and the connecting pins D213 of the pivot member D210 are slidably inserted through these grooves D5194L and D194R.

The transmission member D5190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the 68th embodiment only in the shape of the groove D194L, and the other configurations are the same.
The groove D5194L extends in an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the axis D191 side when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow FB direction), and the width dimension of the groove is larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213. set. The width dimension of the groove is constant along the extending direction of the groove D5194L.
Specifically, the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D5194L has a shape ( A circular shape centered on the axis D191 is divided at a predetermined central angle).
Therefore, the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (not abutted) by both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D5194L, and the extending end on the lower side or the upper side of the groove D5194L (arrow D direction side or (the end on the arrow U direction side) (displaced upward or downward by the inner wall surface of the extended end on the lower side or upper side (pushed down or pushed down).

Thus, according to the present embodiment, not only when the displacement members D180 are displaced from the closed position to the open position, but also when displaced from the open position to the closed position, the operation mode (displacement mode) of the pair of displacement members D180 ) can be different from each other (a state can be formed in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated)).
Specifically, in a state where the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, there is a predetermined distance between the connecting pin D213 and the lower extending end of the groove D5194L (the end on the arrow D direction side, the inner wall surface). A gap is formed (see Figure 1527).
When the displacement (rotation) of the rolling contact member D170 from the second position to the initial position (first position) is started, and the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D5190 to the initial position is started accordingly, the groove D194R is formed. The connecting pin D213 inserted through is displaced (pushed up) upward by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, thereby causing the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) to move upward. Displacement (rotation) from the open position is initiated.
On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L is not displaced upward until it reaches the lower extended end of the groove D5194L (the extended end in the direction of the arrow D, the inner wall surface). (not pushed up), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the open position.

When the transmission member D5190 is further displaced (rotated) with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member from the second position, the connecting pin D213 inserted through the groove D194R moves along the extending direction of the groove D194R. It continues to be displaced (pushed up) by the inner wall surface, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position to the closed position.
On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L reaches the lower extended end of the groove D5194L (the end on the arrow D direction side, the inner wall surface), the lower extended end (inner wall surface) is reached. wall), thereby starting the displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position.
Thereafter, all of the connecting pins D213 are displaced (pushed up) upward, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and when the transmission member D190 reaches the initial position, the pair of displacement members D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 1525).
Thus, in the present embodiment, the pair of displacement members D180 start displacing (rotating) from the closed position toward the closed position at the same timing as they start displacing (rotating) from the closed position toward the open position. The timing can also be different (one delayed relative to the other). As a result, for the player who expects the displaceable member D180 to be in an open state (i.e., a state in which the ball is likely to flow into the sixth passage DRt6), it is possible to change the manner in which the displaceable member D180 is displaced to the closed position. It can be made to hold and enhance the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1533 to 1536, the lower frame D6086b in the 73rd embodiment will be described.
In the sixty-eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which all balls that flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 are guided to the eighth passage DRt8 (outflow port DOPout). is connected to the ninth passage DRt9 in the middle thereof, and the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 is either the eighth passage DRt8 (outflow port DOPout) or the ninth passage DRt9 (outflow port DOP6out). guided to one side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1533 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D6086b in the 73rd embodiment, and FIG. 1534 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D6086b. FIG. 1535 is a front view of the lower frame D6086b, and FIGS. 1536(a) and 1536(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame D6086b.
1536(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. 1521, and FIG. 1536(b) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1533 to 1536, the lower frame D6086b in the seventy-third embodiment includes a ninth passage DRt9 connected in the middle of the sixth passage DRt6, and a game area where balls guided to the ninth passage DRt9 are placed. and an outflow port DOP6out formed as an opening for outflow to.
That is, the ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, flows into (enters) the eighth passage DRt8, flows down the eighth passage DRt8, and then exits from the outlet. A ball that flows out from the DOPout to the game area, flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, and flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt8 on the way of the sixth passage DRt6 passes through the ninth passage DRt9. After flowing down, it flows out to the game area from the outlet DOP6out.
Here, the outflow port DOPout, which is the exit of the eighth passage DRt8 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1516). . Therefore, the ball flowing down from the sixth path DRt6 to the eighth path DRt8 easily enters the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is high).
On the other hand, the outflow port DOP6out, which is the exit of the ninth path DRt9 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is arranged at a position different in the horizontal direction to one side with respect to the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1516). (formed (arranged) at a position where the first winning opening 64 does not overlap vertically downward). Therefore, it is difficult for the ball that has flowed down from the sixth path DRt6 to the ninth path DRt9 to enter the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is higher than that of the ball that has flowed down to the eighth path DRt8). low).

As described above, in the lower frame D6086b in this embodiment, when a ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 is distributed to the sixth passage DRt6, the ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 is , it does not flow down to the ninth path DRt9 on the way and reaches the end of the sixth path DRt6, thereby making it easier to win the first winning hole 64 You can win a prize). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth path DRt6, in order to increase the probability that the ball will enter the first winning hole 64 (to ensure that the ball wins), it does not flow down to the ninth path DRt9 on the way and does not flow down to the sixth path DRt9. The player can expect to reach the end of the path DRt6, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Further, when the ball flows down to the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the time for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170 is maximized, and the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced to the open position. It is possible to easily maintain the (rotated) state (the ball is easily entered into the sixth passage DRt6). On the other hand, when the ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 flows down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, the weight of the ball cannot be applied to the rolling members D170, and the pair of displacement members D180 It is displaced (rotated) to the closed position (it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, the state in which the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position is maintained, and the ball is distributed from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6. In order to make it easier, the player can expect to reach the end of the sixth path DRt6 without flowing down to the ninth path DRt9 on the way.
The front member D6110 includes an opening DOP6out formed in the front portion D111 and a plate-like bottom portion D6112 standing from the back of the front portion D111. and an opening D6148 formed in the main body D141.
The bottom surface portion D6112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion D111. The upright tip (arrow B direction side) and the upright tip (arrow F direction side) of the bottom portion D6144 are in contact over the entire area. This prevents foreign matter such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D6086b.

Parts of the bottom surfaces D6112 and D6144 (the parts of the intermediate member D6140 located below the opening D6148) form the rolling surface of the ninth passage DRt9. The portion forming such a rolling surface is formed with a predetermined gap (a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere) from the bottom surface of the first interposing member D150.
In addition, the portions of the bottom portions D6112 and D6144 that form the above-described rolling surfaces are inclined downward toward substantially the center in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR), and the height position in the vertical direction is Outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are recessed in the lowest portion (the portion that is substantially central in the longitudinal direction).
The outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are portions for causing the balls guided by the bottom surface portions D6112 and D6144 (portions forming the rolling surfaces) to flow out to the outflow port DOP6out, and are concave surfaces inclined downward toward the outflow port DOP6out. integrally formed as That is, the opening DOP6out is formed at a position corresponding to the outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a (a position where the ball can flow out).
The opening D6148 of the intermediate member D6140 serves as an opening (hole) for receiving the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 (sixth passage DRt6) into the ninth passage DRt9, and the body portion D141 extends in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). formed through the That is, the opening 6148 is formed in one side wall of the pair of side walls that partition the sixth passage DRt6, and the upstream end of the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 via the opening 6148. be.

The dimension of the opening D6148 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 is set to a size through which a plurality of balls (three balls in this embodiment) can pass simultaneously. In addition, the lower edge of the opening D6148 is lower (arrow U direction side) than the upper surface of the rolling member D170 arranged at the second position (lowest position) due to the weight of the ball. 1536(a)), and the upper edge of the opening D6148 is placed in the initial position (first position, the position returned to the uppermost position) where the weight of the ball (weight) is not applied. It is formed at a position spaced apart from the upper surface of the moving member D170 by a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball can pass through the opening D6148 regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170.
A side edge (hereinafter referred to as an “upstream side edge”) located on the upstream side (the arrow R direction side, the right side in FIG. 1536(a)) of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6 is, in front view, the rolling member D170. It is disposed downstream (arrow L direction side, FIG. 1536(a) left side) of the edge portion on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, FIG. 1536(a) right side) of the sixth passage DRt6.
In the present embodiment, the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 is disposed at a position (downstream position) that does not vertically overlap the facing space in the base of the pair of displacement members D180. That is, of the pair of displacement members D180, the base portion of the displacement member D180 positioned downstream (arrow L direction side, left side in FIG. 1536(a)) in the sixth passage DRt6 (facing the displacement member D180 positioned on the upstream side) facing surface) by a predetermined distance (substantially equivalent to the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment) in the sixth passage DRt6.
This prevents the ball that has flowed (entered) between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other and fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 from immediately flowing into (entered) the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148. Then, a form in which a ball rolls on the rolling member D170 can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to apply the weight (weight) of the ball to the rolling member D170, displace (rotate) the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position, and determine whether the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6. can be brought to the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the body portion D141 is provided with a protrusion D141g protruding at a position on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 (arrow R direction side, right side in FIG. 1536(b)) with respect to the upstream side edge of the opening D6148. be. Therefore, when the ball that has flowed (entered) between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other and dropped into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls along the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170, the action of the protrusion D141g (Abutment) delays the rolling of the ball (reduces the speed), making it easier for the player to grasp the ball rolling on the rolling member D170. The player can expect that the ball will reach the end of the sixth path DRt6 by moving it to the side opposite to the opening D6148 (body part D131 side). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
A side edge (hereinafter referred to as a “downstream side edge”) located on the downstream side (arrow L direction side, left side in FIG. 1536(a)) of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6 is, in front view, the rolling member D170. It is arranged upstream (arrow R direction side, FIG. 1536(a) right side) of the edge (axis D171) on the downstream side (arrow L direction side, FIG. 1536(a) left side) of the sixth passage DRt6.
In this embodiment, the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 is disposed at a position (upstream position) that does not overlap the opening D131d in a front view. That is, a predetermined distance (substantially equivalent to the diameter of a sphere in this embodiment) in the sixth passage DRt6 from the side edge of the opening D131d on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in FIG. 1536(a)) in the sixth passage DRt6. Located upstream.
As a result, even though the ball has reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing into the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148. Therefore, if the ball passes the downstream side edge of the opening D6148, the player can feel a sense of security that the ball will surely enter (enter) the eighth passage DRt8. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the direction of the ball and enhance the interest in the game.

However, the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 may be disposed at a position overlapping the opening D131d in front view (a position overlapping with the downstream side edge of the opening D131d or a position on the downstream side). In this case, even after the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, it can be left undetermined whether the ball will enter (enter) the eighth passage DRt8 or the ninth passage DRt9. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the direction of the ball and enhance the interest in the game.
Further, as described above, the protrusions D131f and D141g are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and the protrusion D131f protrudes from the main body D131 on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 relative to the upstream side edge of the opening D6148. . Therefore, when the ball that has fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170, the ball is moved (rolling direction can be changed). That is, the sphere affected by the protrusion D131f is located upstream (arrow R direction side, right side in FIGS. 1536(a) and 1536(b)) in the sixth passage DRt6 from the upstream side edge of the opening 6148. The player is asked whether the ball collides (contacts) with the main body D141 and is bounced back to the side away from the opening D6148, or whether the ball flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148. It is possible to make the player pay attention and increase the interest of the game.
Further, a plurality of projections D131f of the main body D131 are arranged at positions overlapping in front view between the upstream side edge and the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 (see FIG. 1536(a)). As a result, the protrusion D131f acts on (contacts) the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and the rolling direction of the ball can be changed (component of the rolling direction toward the opening D6148 side). As a result, the contact with the protrusion D131f creates the possibility that the ball will flow into the ninth path DRt9 via the opening D6148, thereby increasing the interest of the game.
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a posture inclined by about 1 to 2 degrees with respect to the vertical direction (a so-called “laying” posture, that is, the top surface of the pachinko machine 10 is on the back side ( It is installed in a posture positioned in the direction of the arrow B). In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening D6148 is located on the front side (the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the arrow F direction side) of the walls defining the sixth passage DRt6 (main body portion D141). Apertures are formed.

Therefore, when the ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170, it can be easily passed through the main body D131 side due to the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10, and as a result, the ball protrudes D131f. can be made easier to act. On the other hand, the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is inclined upward from the main body D131 side toward the opening D6148 side by the amount of "laying down" of the pachinko machine 10, so it receives the action of the protrusion D131f. The ball that has been moved toward the opening D6148 by pressing can be moved toward the main body portion D131 by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface).
As a result, when the protrusion D131f acts (contacts) the ball relatively strongly, the ball flows (enters) the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148, while the protrusion D131f acts on the ball. When D131f is relatively weakly applied (abutted), the ball headed toward the opening D6148 side can be returned to the main body portion D131 side by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface). Therefore, depending on the mode of action of the protrusion D131f on the ball (the speed of the ball when it contacts, the angle of approach of the ball, etc.), the rolling mode of the ball can be changed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. .
In addition, by using the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, each member of the lower frame D6086b can be configured in a mutually orthogonal relationship. That is, the main body portion D131 and the main body portion D141 are arranged in parallel, and the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is perpendicular to the main body portions D131 and D141 (that is, the axis D171 is arranged to be perpendicular to the main body portions D131 and D141). D141 can be pivotally supported in a posture perpendicular to D141). Therefore, it is not necessary to tilt only some of these members with respect to other members, or to support the shaft D171 in the tilted posture, which simplifies the structure. Therefore, it is possible to improve the moldability and assembleability of each part. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost.
Next, referring to FIG. 1537, the seventy-fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 1537(a) to 1537(c) are partial enlarged rear views of the lower frame D7086b in the seventy-fourth embodiment, in which the rolling member D170 is between the initial position (first position) and the second position. Displaced (rotated) and transitional states are illustrated as the displaceable member D180 is displaced (rotated) between the closed and open positions.
1537(a) to 1537(c) illustrate a state in which the bypass member D200 is removed. In addition, FIG. 1532(a) shows a state in which the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 1525), and FIG. This corresponds to the state where the rolling member D170 is arranged at the second position and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position (see FIG. 1527). In FIG. 1537(b), the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)), and the displacement member D180 is This corresponds to a state in the middle of displacement (see FIG. 1526) when displacing (rotating) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).
As shown in FIGS. 1537(a) to 1537(c), the transmission member D7190 in the seventy-fourth embodiment is disposed on the outer edge of the main body D194, and the transmission member D7190 extends from the outer edge of the main body D194 perpendicularly to the axial direction of the axis D191. It has a display portion D7197 extending in the direction of. Specifically, the display portion D7197 extends upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the longitudinal end portion of the main body portion D194, which is the end portion opposite to the axis D191.
Here, the upper edge of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 (the edge portion on the arrow U direction side) and the upper edge of the side wall portion D142 of the intermediate member D140 (the edge portion on the arrow U direction side) are arranged in the vertical direction (the arrow The position (height position) in the UD direction) is substantially the same.

As shown in FIG. 1537(a), when the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 1525), the displacement of the transmission member D7190 ( rotation), the longitudinal end portion of the main body portion D194 (the end portion opposite to the axis D191) is arranged at the uppermost position (arrow U direction side). As a result, the extension tip side (part) of the display part D7197 protrudes (arranges) above the upper edge (the edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall part D132 of the back member D130, and the protruding part is It is made visible to the player.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1537(c), when the rolling member D170 is arranged at the second position and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position (see FIG. 1527), the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D7190 is Accordingly, the longitudinal end of the main body D194 (the end opposite to the axis D191) is arranged at the lowest position (arrow D direction side). As a result, the entire display portion D7197 is immersed (arranged) below the upper edge of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 (the edge portion on the side of the arrow U) (the entire display portion D7197 is located on the back surface of the side wall portion D132). side). Therefore, the player cannot directly view the display portion D7197. The display portion D7197 can be seen through the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130.
In this way, the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension) by which the extended distal end side (part of) of the display portion D7197 protrudes from the upper edge (the edge portion on the arrow U direction side) of the back surface member D130 (side wall portion D132) is shown in FIG. As shown in (a), it is maximized when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position (see FIG. 1525). As shown in FIG. 1537(b), the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170, and as the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position toward the open position, the above-described protrusion amount (visible to the player) The size of the portion) is gradually reduced, and is minimized (non-protruded and invisible to the player) in the state where the displacement member D180 is placed open (see FIG. 1527).
Therefore, the player can visually confirm whether or not the extension tip side (part) of the display portion D7197 protrudes above the upper edge (the edge portion on the arrow U direction side) of the back surface member D130 (side wall portion D132). By doing so, it is possible to grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether it is in the open position or the closed position). Furthermore, by visually recognizing the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension), the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (at which position between the open position and the closed position) can be grasped.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1538 to 1540, the lower frame D8086b in the 75th embodiment will be described.
In the seventy-third embodiment, the case where the projection amount (projection dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D170 is constant regardless of the displacement (rotational) position of the rolling member D170 has been described. The protrusion D131f of the seventy-fifth embodiment changes (increases or decreases) the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension) toward the rolling member D8170 according to the displacement (rotational) position of the rolling member D170. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Here, the lower frame D8086b in the seventy-fifth embodiment has other configurations (for example, , shape and number of arrangement) are the same as those of D6086b of the 73rd embodiment. Therefore, the description of the configuration other than the second protrusion D131fa and the rolling member D6087 is omitted.
FIGS. 1538(a) and 1538(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D8086b in the seventy-fifth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXIIa-MDCXIIa in FIG. In FIG. 1538(a), the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 1525). A state in which the rolling member D8170 is arranged in the second position and the displacement member D180 is arranged in the open position (see FIG. 1527) is illustrated.

FIG. 1539(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b taken along line MDCXXVIa-MDCXXVIa of FIG. 1538(a), and FIG. 1539(b) is a lower side taken along line MDCXXVIb-MDCXXVIb of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of frame D8086b. FIG. 1540 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXVc-MDCXVc in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 1538 to 1540, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f disposed on the back member D8130 have predetermined (two in this embodiment) protrusions D131f. A second protrusion D131fa is provided to protrude toward the member D8170. In the present embodiment, the (predetermined) projection D131f from which the second projection D131fa projects is the downstream side (arrow L-direction side) are two protrusions D131f.
In the body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170, a concave portion is provided in the side surface (edge portion) on the side facing the back member D8130 in the direction in which the protrusion D131f projects (the direction in which the protrusion D131f is received) when viewed from above. is formed (see FIG. 1540). The recesses are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (substantially equal intervals in this embodiment) along the longitudinal direction of the body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170. That is, the recesses are formed (recessed) at positions facing the protrusions D131f.
Note that, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recess when viewed from above is curved in an arc shape. However, it may have a rectangular shape. That is, the shape is not limited as long as the size does not interfere with the second protrusion D131fa when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated).

The second protrusion D131fa projects from the front surface of the protrusion D131f (the surface facing the arrow F direction) toward the concave portion of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172). When viewed from above (see FIG. 1540), the tip side (part) is received in the concave portion of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) described above (located in the internal space of the concave portion). That is, in top view, part of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) is formed by the second protrusion D131fa.
The projecting tip of the second projecting portion D131fa is curved to have an arcuate cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the second protrusion D131fa may be substantially rectangular. Moreover, the protrusion direction of the second protrusion D131fa is the same as the protrusion direction of the protrusion D131f. However, the projecting direction of the second protrusion D131fa may be set to a direction (inclining direction) different from the projecting direction of the protrusion D131f.
The height position (arrow UD direction position) of the second protrusion D131fa is the upper surface (arrow U direction side) of the second protrusion D131fa when the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the initial position (first position). surface) of the rolling member D8170 is substantially the same as or slightly lower than the upper surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 1539(a)), and the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the second position. In this state, the upper surface of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface on the arrow U direction side) is positioned higher than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170 (FIG. 1539(b)). reference) is set as follows.
That is, in the state where the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the initial position (first position), the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, FIGS. 1538(a) and 1538(b) ) right side) is located at a position (arrow D direction side) lower than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body D172, and passes through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172). It is possible to prevent the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa from contacting (acting on) the ball.

On the other hand, in a state in which the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount from the initial position (first position) toward the second position, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa (facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6) 1538(a) and 1538(b) is arranged at a position (arrow U direction side) higher than the upper surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the main body portion D172. The side surface of the second protrusion D131fa can be brought into contact with (act on) the ball passing through the passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172).
In the state where the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the second position, the side surface of the second projection D131fa arranged at a position (arrow U direction side) higher than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body D172 area is the maximum. Therefore, in this case, even if the ball rolls (moves in the sixth passage DRt6) while bouncing on the rolling surface, the side surface of the second projection D131fa is brought into contact with (acts on) the ball. It can be done easily.
The second protrusion D131fa is formed on the side opposite to the opening D6148 with the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) interposed therebetween. That is, the second projection D131fa projects toward the opening D6148. When the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 receives the action from the second protrusion D131fa (when it comes into contact with the second protrusion D131fa), the reaction of the action (contact) The ball is rolled to the opening D6148 (the ninth passage DRt9) and easily flows (enters) into the opening D6148 (the ninth passage DRt9). That is, it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6.
In a no-load state (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D172) in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D8170 (main body D172), as described above, the rolling member D8170 as a whole The center of gravity is located (eccentrically) on the side of the weight D8174 relative to the axis D171, and the rolling member D8170 is maintained (or returned) to the initial position (first position). On the other hand, the ball rolls on the body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170, and the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole including the ball is on the side of the body portion D172 (opposite side of the weight portion D8174 across the axis D171). In the positioned (eccentric) state, the body portion D172 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (arranged at the second position).

In this case, in the present embodiment, in a state in which one ball is positioned at position DP (see FIG. 1538) of main body D172 (a state in which the weight of one ball acts on position DP), a roll including that ball The weight of weight D8174 is set so that the center of gravity of moving member D8170 as a whole is located on axis D171.
That is, assuming a static state in which the ball does not roll, one ball is positioned upstream (on the side opposite to the axis D171) of the position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of one ball is is acting on the position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the second position, and one ball is positioned on the position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of the ball acts on the position DP). ) state, the rolling member D8170 is balanced about the axis D171 (that is, no force is generated to displace (rotate) the rolling member D8170), and is located downstream of the position DP of the body portion D172 (axis D171 side). ) (the weight of the ball acts on the position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the first position.
According to the rolling member D8170 configured in this way, one ball from the third passage DRt3 is placed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) at the initial position (first position). When dropped, the body D172 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the weight of the ball (and the momentum of the drop), and the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the second position.
When such a ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 toward the downstream side (position DP), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball gradually approaches the axis D171. D172 is gradually displaced (rotated) upward (in the direction of arrow U), and rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position toward the first position.

When the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 reaches the position DP, the rolling member D8170 moves in the direction toward the first position due to the influence of the inertial force accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 up to that point. When the displacement (rotation) continues and the ball exceeds the position DP, the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole including the ball is eccentric toward the weight D8174 side, so that the rolling member D8170 moves toward the first position. The displacement (rotation) in the direction is accelerated.
In the present embodiment, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes the position DP, before reaching the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (arrow R direction side), the rolling member D8170 is It is placed in the second position. That is, when only one ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa does not act on (contact) the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172.
However, due to factors such as the position and direction of the ball flowing down from the third passage DRt3, and collision with the displaceable member D180 during the flow, the speed (rolling speed) of the ball toward the downstream side is average. , the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 reaches the second protrusion D131fa on the upstream side (or downstream side) before the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the second position. Then, the ball may be acted upon by the second protrusion D131fa. That is, even when only one ball rolls, it is possible to create a case where the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be imparted to the ball, and the effect of the above-described elements can be focused on the player, and the interest in the game can be increased. can be enhanced.
In the present embodiment, the distance between the second projection D131fa positioned upstream (arrow R direction side) and the position DP is set to approximately twice the diameter of the sphere. However, this distance can be set arbitrarily. When only one ball rolls, shortening the above-mentioned distance makes it easier to apply the action of the second protrusion D131fa to the ball. It is possible to make it difficult to impart the action of the protrusion D131fa to the sphere.

Here, in the present embodiment, in a state where two balls are positioned on the main body portion D172 (a state in which the weight of the two balls acts), regardless of the respective positions of the two balls (for example, Even if both of the two balls are positioned downstream of the position DP (between the axis D171 and the position DP), the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 including those balls as a whole is positioned closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171. The weight of the weight D8174 is set so as to be eccentric to the side.
Therefore, for example, only one ball rolls on the main body D172, and the rolling position of the ball exceeds the position DP, so that the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the initial position (first position). Even in a state (that is, a state in which the ball is expected to reach the terminal end of the sixth passage DRt6 without the second projection D131fa acting on (abutting) the ball), the other ball is not in contact with the third passage DRt3. When the ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 from the (or at least displaced (rotated) toward the second position), and the state in which the second projection D131fa can act (contact) the ball (the state in which the ball easily flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9) ) can be formed.
As described above, in the present embodiment, if only one ball (the ball that rolls on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172)) flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the second impact is applied to the ball. The portion D131fa is made difficult to act (abut), and the ball can easily reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 (can be made to enter the first winning port 64). When the second ball further flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 in the state of 1 ball can be made difficult to reach.
That is, the ball that has reached the end of the sixth path DRt6 enters the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 1516) via the eighth path DRt8, so that the player can expect the ball to land on the rolling member D8170. In the non-existent state, an inflow (entrance) of a ball from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6 is expected. On the other hand, after the first ball has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6, the following ball ( It is expected that the second ball) will not flow further into the sixth passage DRt6. In this way, instead of always expecting an inflow (ball entry) into the sixth passage DRt6, the expected situation is changed according to the number of balls entering the sixth passage DRt6, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

Particularly, in this embodiment, as described above, as the first ball approaches the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position toward the first position, and the displacement member D180 is moved to the open position. gradually displaced (rotated) from to the closed position. When the first ball passes position DP, rolling member D8170 is placed in the first position and displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position.
That is, as the first ball approaches the second protrusion D131fa, the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and the second ball flows from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 ( Entering the ball) can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first ball will reach the end of the sixth path DRt6.
Next, the center frame E86 in the 76th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1541 to 1553. FIG.
FIG. 1541 is a front view of the game board E13 in the 76th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1541, the center frame E86 is configured in a shape that can be fitted into the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1430) of the base plate 60, and is a member fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. It has an upper frame E86a and a lower frame E86b.

The upper frame E86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1541) and left and right (left side and right side in FIG. 1541) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1430) of the base plate 60. 1541) along the inner edge of the window portion 60a of 60. As shown in FIG. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame E86a and the lower frame E86b.
The upper frame E86a is a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the embodiments described above (a portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1541) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, that is, the lower side The portion where the frame E86b is disposed) is omitted, and the portions other than the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above-described embodiments.
Next, the lower frame E86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 1542 to 1543. FIG. FIG. 1542 is a front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and FIG. 1543 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. 1542 and 1543, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the illustration of the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame E86b to the base plate 60 is omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 1544 to 1562 as well.
As shown in FIGS. 1542 and 1543, the lower frame E86b has a pair of receiving openings EOPin formed as openings capable of receiving balls, and a pair of first passages ERt1 communicating with the pair of receiving openings EOPin. a pair of second passages ERt2 through which balls guided through the pair of first passages ERt1 flow down; and a pair of third passages ERt3 through which balls guided through the pair of second passages ERt2 flow down; A fourth passage ERt4, a fifth passage ERt5, and a sixth passage ERt6, in which the balls guided to the pair of third passages ERt3 are distributed by projections E151 formed in distribution passages E150 to be described later and flow down; A seventh passage ERt7 through which the balls guided through the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 are guided to the fourth passage ERt4, and an opening for the balls guided through the fourth passage ERt4 to flow out to the game area. An outlet EOPout is formed.

The pair of reception opening EOPin, the first passage ERt1, the second passage ERt2, and the third passage ERt3 are line (plane) symmetrical (laterally symmetrical in FIG. 1541) with respect to the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. ), respectively.
A pair of upper frame passages ERt0 are provided in the upper frame E86a (see FIG. 1541). The upper frame passage ERt0 is a passage that guides balls flowing down the game area, and the downstream end of the upper frame passage ERt0 communicates with the receiving port EOPin of the lower frame E86b.
That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) from the game area into the upper frame passage ERt0 is introduced (entered) from the upper frame passage ERt0 into the first passage ERt1 of the lower frame E86b via the receiving port EOPin.
The lower frame E86b is provided with a distribution passage E150 operated by a drive motor E191, and the balls come into contact with projections E151 formed in the distribution passage E150 to change the flowing direction. ), and distributed to any one of the third path ERt3 to the fourth path ERt4, the fifth path ERt5, or the sixth path ERt6.

Here, the outflow port EOPout, which is the exit of the fourth passage ERt4 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1541). . Therefore, the ball sorted to the fourth path ERt4 is likely to enter the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is high).
In addition, the ball distributed to the seventh passage ERt7 is guided to the fourth passage ERt4, so that it is easy to enter the first winning port 64.例文帳に追加
Further, in the sixth passage ERt6, a concave surface is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) in order to guide the ball guided through the sixth passage ERt6 to the seventh passage ERt7. A first outflow surface E141a is formed (arranged) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the 7 passage ERt7. Therefore, the ball guided to the first outflow surface E141a of the sixth passage ERt6 easily enters the first winning port 64.
On the other hand, the fifth passage ERt5 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the sixth passage ERt6 (arrow F direction side), and the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the boundary between the fifth passage ERt5 and the seventh passage ERt7. A pair of erected wall portions E135c are respectively arranged in the . Therefore, the balls distributed to the fifth passage ERt5 are more likely to be guided to the sixth passage ERt6 than to the seventh passage ERt7.

In the sixth passage ERt6, there are two points that are different in the width direction of the game board E13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1541) with respect to the first outflow surface E141a. A second outflow surface E141b is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the outlet.
The sixth passage ERt6 is undulated, the second outflow surface E141b is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and the first outflow surface E141a is formed at the top of the undulation. Therefore, the ball distributed to the sixth passage ERt6 is more likely to flow out to the game area from the second outflow surface E141b than to be thrown from the first outflow surface E141a to the seventh passage ERt7.
That is, the ball distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 has a high probability of flowing out to the game area, and as a result, it is difficult to enter the first winning port 64 (the above-mentioned third passage The probability of winning the first winning port 64 is lower than the ball distributed from ERt3 to the fourth passage ERt4).
As described above, the lower frame E86b in the present embodiment is configured such that when a ball is distributed to any one of the fourth passage ERt4 to the sixth passage ERt6 by coming into contact with the protrusion E151 formed in the distribution passage E150, , the ball distributed from the third path ERt3 to the fourth path ERt4 can easily enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 1541) Win) On the other hand, the balls distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 move through the seventh passage ERt7 (and the fourth passage ERt4 formed downstream of the seventh passage ERt7). It becomes difficult to win a prize to the first prize winning port 64. Therefore, in order to increase the probability of winning the ball in the first winning hole 64 (certainly win the prize), the player is made to expect that the ball guided through the third passage ERt3 will be distributed to the fourth passage ERt4. can increase the interest of

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1544 to 1549 in addition to FIGS. 1542 to 1543, the detailed configuration of the lower frame E86b will be described.
FIG. 1544 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and FIG. 1545 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. FIG. 1546 is a top view of the lower frame E86b, FIG. 1547 is a front view of the lower frame E86b, and FIG. 1548 is a rear view of the lower frame E86b. Figure 1549(a) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXXXVIa in Figure 1547, and Figure 1549(b) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXXXVIb in Figure 1547. FIG. 1549(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along line MDCXXXVIc-MDCXXXVIc in FIG. 1547. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 1542 to 1549, the lower frame E86b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows LR), and a front member E110. A base member E130 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the front member E110 and the base member E130 facing each other, and a distribution passage arranged in the base member E130 E150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow path adjusting blocks E170, a cover member E180 disposed on the lower surface side (arrow D direction side) of the base member E130 at a predetermined interval, and inside the cover member E180 and a drive means E190 provided.
The drive means E190 is arranged so as to be able to reciprocate on the cover member E180. In addition, the distribution passage E150 is engaged with the driving means E190, so that the distribution passage E150 is reciprocally arranged on the base member E130.

The central passage E160, the flow channel adjusting block E170, and the cover member E180 are each fastened and fixed to the base member E130 by tapping screws, and the guide member E120 and the base member E130 are each fastened and fixed to the front member E110 by tapping screws.
The interposed member E140 is sandwiched between the front member E110 and the base member E130. With these, the lower frame E86b is configured as one (single) unit (see FIG. 1542).
In the lower frame E86b, the members other than the distribution passage E150 and the driving means E190 are made of a light-transmissive resin material (that is, transparent to allow the members on the back side and the sphere to be seen through). E150 and driving means E190 are made of colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball moving from the first passage ERt1 to the seventh passage ERt7, and the reciprocating motion of the sorting passage E150 can be visually recognized by the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
The distribution passage E150 and the driving means E190 are made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and the front surface thereof may be painted or a seal may be attached.

On the other hand, in the lower frame E86b, the member located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the driving means E190 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or is painted or attached with a seal). By doing so, the driving means E190 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side.
The front member E110 includes a plate-like front plate E111 forming a front surface, and a plate-like bottom portion E112 erected from the rear surface of the front plate E111.
The front plate E111 consists of a pair of vertical portions extending in the vertical direction at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and an inclined portion connecting the vertical portions and inclined downward in the vertical direction from both ends in the longitudinal direction toward the center. It is formed.
A plurality of insertion holes E111a are formed in the thickness direction of the front plate E111 along the outer edge of the front plate E111. The lower frame E86b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole E111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60 .

The front plate E111 is formed with a receiving port EOPin (perforated in the plate thickness direction). The receiving port EOPin is an opening for receiving a ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage ERt0 as described above (see FIG. 1541).
In the front plate E111, an outlet EOPout is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1541). The outflow port EOPout has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is slightly larger than the outer shape of a sphere. The outflow port EOPout is, as described above, an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fourth passage ERt4 flows out to the game area.
As described above, the front plate E111 is provided with the projecting portion E111b on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first outflow surface E141a. A notch E111c having substantially the same shape as the second outflow surface E141b in a front view is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the second outflow surface E141b. By passing through the notch E111c, the ball guided through the sixth passage ERt6 flows out (flows down) to the game area.
A pair of restricting portions E111d are provided on the rear surface of the front plate E111 so as to protrude outward in the longitudinal direction of the inclined portion. The interposed member E140 is sandwiched between the front member E110 and the base member E130, and the restricting portion E111d abuts on the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140, whereby the intervening member E140 moves to the base member. Desorption upward (in the direction of arrow U) from E130 can be suppressed. This eliminates the need to fasten and fix the interposed member E140 to the front member E110 or the base member E130 with a tapping screw, thereby reducing the product cost.

The bottom portion E112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front plate E111, thereby suppressing entry of foreign matter such as wires.
The guide member E120 is for forming the first passage ERt1 together with the front member E110, and includes a pair of side surfaces E121 and a back surface portion E122 connecting the pair of side surfaces E121.
The pair of side portions E121 are formed in a plate-like body that is vertically elongated and substantially rectangular in side view. The pair of side surface portions E121 are arranged in the left-right direction in a state in which the surface on one end in the short direction (surface on the arrow F direction side) is in contact with the rear surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front plate E111 (front member E110). They are opposed to each other with an interval larger than the diameter of the sphere in the direction of the arrows LR.
The back surface portion E122 connects the other ends in the short direction and the upper ends of the pair of side portions E121, and is curved in an arc shape that protrudes from one end in the short direction to the other end of the side portions E121. be.

A first passage ERt1 is formed by a space defined by the guiding member E120 and the front plate E111 (the front member E110) so that the ball can move (fall down or fall). In addition, the lower side of the first passage ERt1 (in the direction of arrow D) is opened. As a result, the flowing direction of the balls that have passed through the receiving port EOPin and flowed into the first passage ERt1 can be changed (changed) downward and guided to the second passage ERt2.
The base member E130 is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the top, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and a plate-shaped plate-like member erected from the outer edges of the curved portions E131. A wall plate E132, a pair of first slope portions E133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of first slope portions E133, and the pair A second slant portion E135 formed between the facing mounting portions E134 of the base member E130, a pair of plate-like projecting portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E130, and a pair of curved portions E131 are connected to each other. and a plate-like back plate E137. The detailed configuration of the base member E130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1550 to 1553 in addition to FIGS. 1542 to 1549. FIG.
The curved portion E131 extends along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U- 1549(c)).
An outflow surface E131a is recessed in the curved portion E131 at the lowest position in the vertical direction. The outflow surface E131a is a portion for causing the ball guided in the curved portion E131 to flow out to the sorting passage E150, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the sorting passage E150.

A notch E132a is formed in the wall plate E132 on the side of the distribution passage E150 (the side facing the pair of wall plates E132). By passing through the notch E132a, the ball can flow down from the curved portion E131 to the distribution passage E150. Moreover, the notch E132a is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere (about five times the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment). A ball can flow down to distribution passage E150 from arbitrary positions in the direction of order, so that the size of notch E132a is large.
A space defined by the curved portion E131 and the wall plate E132 forms a second passage ERt2. The curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) is disposed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1), and there is a vertical step between the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1) and the first passage ERt1. It is formed. That is, the ball freely falls from the first passage ERt1 to the second passage ERt2.
Further, the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1) is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the curved portion E131. Therefore, the ball can be thrown from the first passage ERt1 to the front end of the second passage ERt2.
As a result, the ball flowing down to the end of the front side of the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) reciprocates in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) along the arc-shaped curved shape of the curved portion E131. can. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) while having a velocity component in the front-rear direction.

The first slope portion E133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally long and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 at a predetermined distance. are placed. Further, the first slope portion E133 is formed so as to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. An insertion hole E133a, a restriction portion E133b, and a groove portion E133c are formed in the first slope portion E133.
The insertion hole E133a is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) substantially in the center of the first sloped portion E133, and formed so that the engaged portion E153 of the distribution passage E150 described later can be inserted (FIG. 1544, FIG. 1551(b)).
The restricting portion E133b is erected from the front edge of the insertion hole E133a on the bottom surface of the first slope portion E133, and the bottom surface thereof is formed parallel to the slope surface of the first slope portion E133 (FIG. 1551(b)). , see FIG. 1552(b)).
The grooves E133c are grooves formed along the inclined direction substantially in the center of the first sloped portion E133 in the front-rear direction, and a pair of grooves E133c are formed on both sides of the insertion hole E133a in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR). A guided portion E152 of a distribution passage E150, which will be described later, is slidably disposed in the groove portion E133c in the tilt direction (see FIGS. 1544, 1551(a), and 1553(a)). A guide wall for suppressing breakage of the groove E133c is erected around the groove E133c.

A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the distribution passage E150 and a cover E202 are arranged on the first slope part E133.
The cylindrical body E201 is for facilitating the displacement of the distribution passage E150 on the first slope portion E133, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a shaft hole formed around its axis. A rotating shaft is inserted through the shaft hole, and the rotating shaft is disposed on the first slope portion E133 along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the cylindrical body E201 is rotatably arranged on the first slope portion E133. As the cylindrical body E201 rotates about its axis, the distribution passage E150 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body E201 can be easily displaced.
The cover E202 is for holding the cylindrical body E201 on the first sloped portion E133, and is formed in a plate shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the first sloped portion E133. The cover E202 has a hole larger than the insertion hole E133a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E133a of the first slanted surface E133, and grooves having substantially the same outline as the grooves E133c are formed at positions corresponding to the pair of grooves E133c. be done. Also, a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 is drilled at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201.
The cover E202 is disposed on the upper surface of the first sloped portion E133 with its upper surface parallel to the sloped surface of the first sloped portion E133.

A rotary shaft longer than the hole drilled in the cover E202 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201 is inserted into the cylindrical body E201, and the cylindrical body E201 and the rotary shaft are disposed on the first slope portion E133, and the tapping screw is used to attach the rotary shaft to the cylindrical body E201. By fastening and fixing the first slope portion E133 and the cover E202, the cover E202 can hold the rotating shaft and the cylindrical body E201 through which the rotating shaft is inserted on the first slope portion E133.
The cylindrical body E201 is arranged such that a part of its side surface (peripheral surface) protrudes from the upper surface of the cover E202 through a hole formed in the cover E202. Abutment becomes possible.
The mounting portion E134 is formed substantially horizontally vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the end portion of the first slope portion E133 on the downward slope side. Further, the front end of the mounting portion E134 is arranged closer to the back plate E137 (arrow B direction side) than the front end of the first slope portion E133.
A curved portion E134a is provided by connecting the attachment portion E134, the first sloped portion E133, and the second sloped portion E135, and the curved portion E134a is curved in an arc shape that protrudes toward the rear plate E137. be done.

The second slope portion E135 is a portion for forming (part of) the fifth passage ERt5, and descends from the rear plate E137 toward the front member E110 vertically below the mounting portion E134 (in the direction of the arrow D). Formed at an angle. The second slope portion E135 is formed with an insertion hole E135a, a central passage E135b, a pair of vertical wall portions E135c, a partition portion E135d, and a throw wall E135e.
A fifth passage ERt5 is formed in a space defined by the second slope portion E135, the attachment portion E134, the curved portion E134a, and the back plate E137.
The insertion hole E135a is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) at substantially the center of the second slope portion E135 so as to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere. A recess for inserting a lower end of a cylindrical wall E163 of a central passage E160, which will be described later, is recessed along the outer edge of the insertion hole E135a.
The central passage E135b is a portion for forming the seventh passage ERt7, and is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction, and the curved shape is formed to be larger than the outer shape of a sphere. As a result, when a ball is thrown to the central passage E135b, it is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown (outflow) from the central passage E135b to the inclined surface of the second slope portion E135.

The central passage E135b connects the edge on the front side (the direction of the arrow F) of the second slope portion E135 and the insertion hole E135a, and slopes downward from the edge on the front side of the second slope portion E135 toward the insertion hole E135a. formed by As a result, the ball guided to the central passage E135b can be thrown toward the insertion hole E135a. That is, the seventh passage ERt7 is formed by the arcuate curved space of the central passage E135b.
The central passage E135b is arranged at a position overlapping the first outflow surface E141a in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the ball thrown from the first outflow surface E141a can be guided to the central passage E135b.
The pair of vertical wall portions E135c is a portion for separating the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the central passage E135b. ) are projected vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) on the rear plate E137 side (in the direction of arrow B) at both ends. The length of the pair of vertical wall portions E135c in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is shorter than the length of the central passage E135b, and is arranged on the insertion hole E135a side (arrow B direction side) of the central passage E135b. be.
As a result, the ball that flows down the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5) is positioned on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the pair of vertical wall portions E135c so that the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the ball is guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). On the other hand, the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) comes into contact with the pair of vertical wall portions E135c, thereby crossing the boundary between (fifth passage ERt5) and central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). Crossing is suppressed, and the ball flows down the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and is guided to the sixth passage ERt6. In this way, by making it difficult for the ball to be thrown to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The partition E135d projects vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U), and is formed by connecting the outer edge of the insertion hole E135a and the back plate E137. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball flowing down from one distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) from being guided to the other distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) side of the second slope portion E135.
The ball sending wall E135e is formed upright from the lower surface of the second slope portion E135 (see FIG. 1551(a)). The ball feed wall E135e is composed of an arc portion along the edge of the insertion hole E135a on the back side (direction of arrow B), and straight portions extending from both ends of the arc to the front side (direction of arrow F). It is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the bottom. As a result, a ball can be thrown in the space surrounded by the ball-throwing wall E135e, and the ball that has passed through the insertion hole E135a can be thrown to the rear-side passage E181b of the cover member E180, which will be described later.
The protruding portion E136 is formed so as to slope downward from the curved portion E131 side toward the second slope portion E135 side, and a guide portion E136a is formed in the protruding portion E136.
The guide part E136a is a part for facilitating the assembly of the interposition member E140 to the base member E130, and extends vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the end on the opposite side (left-right direction inner side) of the projecting part E136. projected toward. A lower passage E143 of an interposing member E140, which will be described later, is provided between the pair of guide portions E136a.

The back plate E137 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally elongated and substantially rectangular when viewed from the front. The back plate E137 is disposed in contact with the rear-side ends of the pair of first sloped portions E133, the pair of mounting portions E134, and the second sloped portion E135, and the upper end of the back plate E137 is located in the distribution passage E150 ( It is positioned above (in the direction of arrow U) the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3) and the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5). As a result, the back plate E137 guides the ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) or the second slope portion E135 (the fifth passage ERt5) to the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the back plate E137. can be suppressed.
The intervening member E140 includes a rolling portion E141 extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and a vertical direction downward from the lower surface of the rolling portion E141 (arrow A plate-shaped contact portion E142 protruding toward D direction), and a lower passage E143 erected from the rear surface of the contact portion E142.
The rolling part E141 has a cross-sectional shape on a plane including the extending direction (arrow LR direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) that is inclined downward toward the center of the extending direction. be.
The upper surface of the rolling portion E141 is inclined downward from the front member E110 side (arrow F direction side) toward the base member E130 side (arrow B direction side). In addition, as described above, the upper surface of the rolling part E141 has a first outflow surface E141a that is inclined downward toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and a first outflow surface E141a that is inclined downward toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and A second outflow surface E141b is formed to be inclined downward.

Further, the rolling portion E141 is formed with undulations, and the top thereof is arranged in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). A second outflow surface E141b is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while a first outflow surface E141a is arranged at the top of the undulation. Therefore, the first outflow surface E141a is arranged in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).
The first outflow surface E141a is arranged vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). 7 passage ERt7) can be guided.
Notch portions E141c are formed at both ends of the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows LR). Further, the interposing member E140 is disposed in contact with the upper surface of the projecting portion E136. Thereby, the interposition member E140 is fixed to the base member E130 (front member E110). As a result, a space defined by the interposition member E140 (upper surface of the rolling part E141), the base member E130, and the front member E110 (back surface of the front plate E111) forms a sixth passage ERt6.
A passage port E142a is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) in the abutting portion E142 at a position that is the rear surface of the outflow port EOPout. The passage opening E142a is substantially rectangular in front view and formed slightly larger than the outer shape of a sphere.

The lower passage E143 protrudes from the outer edge of the passage port E142a toward the cover member E180 (in the direction of the arrow B), and the space defined by the lower passage E143 forms (part of) the fourth passage ERt4. It is formed.
The lower passage E143 is inclined downward from the side of the cover member E180 toward the side of the front member E110 (in the direction of the arrow F), and the side and bottom surfaces of the lower passage E143 protrude toward the side of the cover member E180 from the upper surface. be done. That is, the upper surface of the lower passage E143 on the side of the cover member E180 is open.
In addition, a recessed groove E143a having a U-shaped cross section is provided at the center in the width direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower surface of the lower passage E143 (see FIG. 1550(a)). The recessed groove E143a extends substantially linearly along the projecting direction of the lower surface of the lower passage E143.
The width of the groove E143a (the dimension in the direction of the arrows LR) is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the depth of the groove E143a (the dimension perpendicular to the lower surface of the lower passage E143) is The depth is set so that the ball does not contact the bottom surface of the groove E143a.

Thereby, the ball on the lower surface of the lower passage E143 can be supported at two points (a pair of ridge line portions where the lower surface of the lower passage E143 and the groove E143a intersect). Therefore, the ball can be guided in a stable state as compared with the case where the concave groove E143a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported only at one place). More specifically, the sphere is sandwiched between the recessed grooves E143a, so that it can flow down the center in the width direction while being restrained from being displaced in the width direction.
As a result, when the center position of the outflow port EOPOut and the passage port E142a is shifted due to dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance, and the front member E110 (front plate E111) is partially disposed in front of the passage port E142a (common Even in a state where the outer edge of the entrance E142a is partly blocked by the front member E110 (front plate E111), the ball flowing down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) passes through the outflow port EOPout and is played. flowed into the area.
As described above, the lower passage E143 is provided between the pair of guide portions E136a of the projecting portion E136. As a result, when the lower frame E86b is assembled, the lower passage E143 (interposed member E140) can be easily arranged on the base member E130 by bringing the lower passage E143 into contact with the pair of guide portions E136a. can do
The distribution passage E150 is for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is arranged above the first slope portion E133 (the cover E202) (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, similarly to the first inclined portion E133, the distribution passage E150 is arranged to be inclined downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The distribution passage E150 includes a plurality of projecting portions E151 projecting from the upper surface, a pair of guided portions E152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passage E150, and a pair of guided portions E152. and a to-be-engaged portion E153. The detailed configuration of the distribution passage E150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1550 to 1553 in addition to FIGS. 1542 to 1549. FIG.

The protrusion E151 is a part for changing the movement (flowing down) direction of the ball, and the ball can move (flow down, roll) between the protrusions E151 regularly on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150. are provided with a sufficient interval. The projection E151 has a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage E150. The substantially hexagonal shape has two sides arranged parallel to the direction of inclination of the distribution passage E150 that are longer than the other four sides. It is formed long in the direction along the direction of inclination. In addition, the four sides other than the two sides that are long are formed to have the same length. In addition, the side surface of the protrusion E151 is inclined with respect to the distribution passage E150 (in this embodiment, it is inclined at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the distribution passage E150). It is formed in a manner in which a portion of the dot side is cut off. In other words, the cross-sectional area on a plane parallel to the sorting passage E150 is formed smaller as the distance from the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 increases.
The protrusions E151 have long sides parallel to each other in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, the distance between the opposing sides on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150 is approximately a quarter of the diameter of the sphere. 1). In addition, a set of projections E151 arranged in a row in the front-rear direction and a set of projections E151 arranged on the lower side in the inclination direction are arranged in the front-rear direction of the projections E151. They are displaced in the front-rear direction by half the installation distance. That is, in the front-rear direction, a set of protrusions E151 arranged on the downward side in the inclination direction is arranged between the pair of protrusions E151 facing each other. As a result, the ball flowing down between the long sides of the pair of protrusions E151 in the front-rear direction can be brought into contact with the protrusions E151 arranged on the downward side in the tilt direction.
Also, the distance between the short sides of the projection E151 is the same as the distance between the long sides of the projection E151. As a result, one protrusion E151 is arranged in the sorting passage E150 in a manner separated by the same distance from the protrusions E151 arranged around it. A space defined by the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 and the inclined side surface E151a of the protrusion E151 forms a third passage ERt3.
It should be noted that the projection height of the projection E151 in this embodiment is approximately half the radius of the sphere. Also, the distance between the protrusions E151 facing each other at the projecting tip end is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) is in contact with the inclined side surfaces E151a of the adjacent projections E151, and the distribution passage E150 (the third passage) ERt3) can move (flow down, roll). That is, the projecting portion E151 can suppress the ball from remaining in the sorting passage E150 (the third passage ERt3).

The ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) is changed (changed) in the flowing direction by coming into contact with the protrusion E151, and moves toward the interposition member E140 (direction of arrow F). side) or the rear plate E137 side (arrow B direction side). In this way, the protrusion E151 can change (change) the flowing direction of the ball that has flowed down along the tilt direction.
In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) between the long sides of the adjacent projections E151 in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction), the ball moves along the inclined direction of the distribution passage E150. It can move (flow down, roll) from the E131 side to the central passage E160.
Also, the ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 contacts the protrusion E151, thereby reducing the flow speed. Thereby, compared with the case where the distribution passage E150 is not provided with the projection part E151, the falling time of the ball which flows down the distribution passage E150 can be lengthened.
In addition, since the protrusion E151 is formed so as to protrude from the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, it can be easily recognized visually by the player. This makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the sorting passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) is changed. That is, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) has a relatively low moving speed, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) However, the contact with the protrusion E151 can further increase the time required for the ball to move (flow down, roll). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball is changed (changed), thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion E151 can change (change) the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 and extend (change) the flowing time, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be done. In addition, by changing (changing) the flow direction and extending (changing) the flow time by one part (projection E151), it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost.
In addition, since the distribution passage E150 is arranged to be inclined, even when the ball's flow speed decreases, the ball's own weight increases the flow speed, so that the ball can flow down the third passage ERt3.
The protrusion E151 disposed in contact with the front and rear edges of the distribution passage E150 is formed only partially in a substantially hexagonal shape. It is formed in a specific manner. As a result, more third passages ERt3 can be formed in the sorting passage E150, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
A pair of guided portions E152 are arranged in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) with the engaged portion E153 sandwiched in substantially the center of the sorting passage E150 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) (see FIG. 1551). (a), see FIG. 1553(a)). The length of the guided portion E152 in the front-rear direction is equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion E133c of the base member E130. By inserting the guided portion E152 into the groove portion E133c, displacement of the distribution passage E150 in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member E130 is restricted.

As described above, since the guide wall is erected around the groove E133c, the groove E133c can be prevented from being damaged when the guided portion E152 comes into contact with the guide wall of the groove E133c.
The engaged portion E153 has an engaging recess E153a whose back surface is recessed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and a restricting piece E153b that protrudes forward from the lower end of the engaged portion E153. is formed (see FIG. 1551(b)).
The engagement recess E153a is formed extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The regulating piece E153b is parallel to the slanted surface of the first slanted portion E133 (distribution passage E150), and is disposed below the regulating portion E133b of the first slanted portion E133 (in the direction of the arrow D). Thereby, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced in the tilt direction, it is possible to suppress the contact between the restricting piece E153b and the restricting portion E133b. On the other hand, the restriction piece E153b and the restriction portion E133b abut against each other, thereby suppressing upward displacement (in the direction of arrow U) of the distribution passage E150.
The distribution passage E150 is arranged in parallel with the inclined surface of the first inclined surface portion E133 while being in contact with the side surface of the cylindrical body E201 projecting from the upper surface of the cover E202. The distribution passage E150 can be easily displaced by the cylindrical body E201 rotating about its axis.

In addition, at least a part of the distribution passage E150 is arranged below the curved portion E131, that is, the distribution passage E150 is arranged at a position where the distribution passage E150 does not come off from the lower side of the curved portion E131 to the mounting portion E134 side, The distance between the distribution passage E150 and the curved portion E131 is arranged to be smaller than the radius of the sphere (see FIGS. 1551(a) and 1553(a)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball sent to the distribution passage E150 from flowing out of the longitudinal direction ends of the base member E130 from below the curved portion E131. In addition, it is possible to prevent the ball from being sandwiched between the curved portion E131 and the distribution passage E150.
The distribution passage E150 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate-like body elongated in the direction of inclination when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the inclined surface. As a result, the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) disposed on the one end side (downward inclination side) in the longitudinal direction of the distribution passage E150 is in the short direction. The ball can be easily thrown to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side).
In addition, the length of the distribution passage E150 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), which is the short direction, is at least twice the diameter of the sphere, and in this embodiment, it is approximately 4.5 times the diameter of the sphere. It is formed in five times the size. As a result, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) movement (falling or falling) regions of the ball can be formed on the descending side of the distribution passage E150 in the inclination direction. As a result, among the passages (the fourth passage ERt4, the fifth passage ERt5 and the sixth passage ERt6) in which a plurality of balls flowing down the distribution passage E150 are formed, the first winning port 64 has a high probability of winning the ball. It is possible to make the players expect to be sorted to the 4 passages ERt4, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
Further, even if a fraudulent operation is performed on the lower frame E86b, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraud to occur. To explain in detail, even if a ball flows down to the fourth passage ERt4 through either the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6, which has a lower probability of winning the ball into the first winning port 64 than the fourth passage ERt4. , the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6.

A notch portion E150a is formed in a part of the front side of the distribution passage E150 on the inclined direction descending side. By passing through the notch E150a, the ball that has flowed down (dropped) down the distribution passage E150 can easily come into contact with the flow path adjusting block E170.
The central passage E160 includes a construction passage E161 extending along the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and an opening formed substantially in the center of the construction passage E161 in the left-right direction (thickness a cylindrical wall E163 erected along the upper hole E162 from the lower surface of the construction passage E161; installation portions E164 disposed at both ends of the construction passage E161 in the left-right direction; Prepare.
The width dimension of the construction passage E161 (direction perpendicular to the extension direction and vertical direction of the construction passage E161, arrow FB direction) is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere.
The cross-sectional shape of the construction passage E161 on a plane including the extending direction (arrow LR direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). It is formed curved in an arc shape. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the construction passage E161 can be guided to the upper hole E162 formed in the center of the construction passage E161 in the left-right direction (the lowermost part of the construction passage E161 in the vertical direction).

The construction passage E161 is formed with a rear wall E161a erected vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the edge on the rear end side (in the direction of the arrow B). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down into the installation passage E161 from falling from its back side.
The construction passage E161 is formed so that the cross-sectional shape on a plane orthogonal to the extending direction thereof is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down into the construction passage E161 from flowing down (dropping) from the front side thereof.
The upper hole E162 has a circular shape when viewed from above, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the insertion hole E135a formed in the second slope portion E135, that is, larger than the outer shape of the sphere. A projection E162a projecting upward is formed around the upper hole E162. This makes it difficult for the ball flowing down the construction passage E161 to be guided to the upper hole E162.
The cylindrical wall E163 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as that of the upper hole E162, and the lower end of the cylindrical wall E163 is inserted into the recess formed on the outer periphery of the insertion hole E135a of the second slope E135. It is arranged in the section E135. Thereby, it is possible to suppress formation of a gap between the lower end of the cylindrical wall E163 and the upper surface of the second slope portion E135. Also, the central passage E160 can be positioned with respect to the second slope portion E135.

A notch portion E163a is formed in the cylindrical wall E163 at a position corresponding to the central passage E135b in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and the notch portion E163a is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.
A fourth passage ERt4 (part of) is formed by the arcuately curved space of the installation passage E161 and the space surrounded by the cylindrical wall E163.
The installation portion E164 has a substantially vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and when the central passage E160 is fixed (arranged) to the base member E130 (attachment portion E134), the upper surface of the installation portion E164 is arranged on the first slope portion E133. It is formed flush with the upper surface of the cover E202 provided. Thereby, even if the distribution passage E150 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the contact between the distribution passage E150 and the central passage E160 (installation portion E164).
The flow path adjusting block E170 is for changing (changing) the direction of flow of the spheres, and is formed in a substantially triangular pyramid shape. The flow path adjusting block E170 is formed with a front wall E171 parallel to the front surface of the base member E130, an outer wall E172 facing the curved portion E134a, and an inner wall E173 facing the central passage E135b. A pair of flow path adjusting blocks E170 are arranged on both sides in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) of the central passage E135b.

The flow path adjustment block E170 is formed in a triangular shape in which the width increases toward the descending side of the second slope portion E135 in the inclination direction (arrow F direction) when viewed from above, and the front wall E171 and the front surface of the base member E130 are formed. is formed flush with the second slope portion E135. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) from coming into contact with the flow path adjusting block E170.
The outer wall E172 is curved convexly toward the curved portion E134a, and the inner wall E173 is curved concavely from the central passage E135b toward the center of the flow path adjusting block E170. Between the outer wall E172 and the curved portion E134a, and between the inner wall E173 and the central passage E135b, are arranged to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Each sphere can flow down between E135b.
The cover member E180 includes a front cover member E181 arranged below the base member E130 (in the direction of arrow D), and a rear cover member E181 arranged on the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of the front cover member E181. and a member E182.
The cover member E180 and driving means E190, which will be described later, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1542 to 1549 and FIG. 1551 as appropriate.

The front cover member E181 includes a main body E181a formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a front cover member E181 side (arrow F direction side) to the back side cover member E182 side at substantially the center of the main body E181a in the longitudinal direction. A rear side passage E181b recessed toward (arrow B direction side), a motor mounting surface E181c disposed on one longitudinal direction side (arrow L direction side) of the main body E181a, and above the motor mounting surface E181c. and a first top plate E181d arranged on the side (arrow U direction side), and vertically downward (arrow D direction) from the first top plate E181d on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) of the motor mounting surface E181c. A first lower plate E181e is arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval, and a predetermined interval is provided in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) of the first lower plate E181e. A second upper surface plate E181f and a second lower surface plate E181g which are erected in parallel with each other and a plurality of slides (five in this embodiment) provided on the upper surfaces of the first lower surface plate E181e and the second lower surface plate E181g A protrusion E181h and a shaft supporting portion E181i disposed between the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are formed.
The motor mounting surface E181c, the first upper plate E181d, the first lower plate E181e, the second upper plate E181f, and the second lower plate E181g stand from the rear surface of the main body E181a.
The rear side passage E181b is formed with a ball-feeding plate E181b1 erected from its lower surface and a pair of support plates E181b2 erected on both sides in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the ball-feeding plate E181b1. .
The ball feeding plate E181b1 in the longitudinal direction is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the insertion hole E135a of the second slope portion E135. A throwing inclined portion E181b3 that is inclined upward is formed. As a result, the ball guided in the cylindrical wall E163 of the central passage E160 comes into contact with the ball-feeding inclined portion E181b3, and is guided from the vertical downward direction (direction of arrow D) toward the front member E110 (direction of arrow F). Changed (changed).

A pair of support plates E181b2 are portions for guiding the ball flowing down on the ball-feeding plate E181b1, and are formed vertically below the straight portion of the ball-feeding wall E135e.
The upper surface of the rear side passage E181b is formed with an opening, through which the ball throwing wall E135e of the second slope portion E135 is inserted into the rear side passage E181b. A space defined by the support plate E181b2 forms (part of) the fourth passage ERt4.
The motor mounting surface E181c is a portion on which a mounting member E192 of a driving means E190, which will be described later, is arranged (fixed). The shape is formed in a substantially U shape in top view with an opening on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B).
The first top plate E181d and the second top plate E181f are arranged in parallel. Therefore, the first bottom plate E181e and the second bottom plate E181g are also arranged in parallel. A space defined by the first top plate E181d and the first bottom plate E181e and a space defined by the second top plate E181f and the second bottom plate E181g are formed by a first transmission member E194 of the driving means E190 described later, a second It is a space for arranging each of the two transmission members E195.

On the upper surfaces of the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g, a plurality of protrusions E181e1 are formed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) (in the present embodiment, the first lower plate E181e has two protrusions, the second lower plate E181g has two protrusions). are formed at four locations). The contact between the projection E181e1 and the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 creates a gap between the first lower surface plate E181e and the first transmission member E194 and between the second lower surface plate E181g and the second transmission member E195. 1550(b)).
The slide protrusion E181h serves to guide the displacement of the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195, and is provided on the first upper surface plate E181d, the first lower surface plate E181e, the second upper surface plate E181f and the second lower surface plate E181g. are arranged in parallel to each other.
The shaft supporting portion E181i is formed as a bearing on the rear surface of the main body portion E181a (surface on the arrow B direction side), and a shaft supporting portion E182d is formed on the front surface of the rear side cover member E182 at a position facing the shaft supporting portion E181i. . A pinion gear E196 of a driving means E190, which will be described later, has an end of a shaft E197 protruding from its side surface (the surface in the front-rear direction, the surface in the direction of arrow FB). The shaft E197 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and both ends of the shaft E197 are connected to the shaft supporting portion E181i of the front side cover member E181 and the shaft supporting portion E182d of the rear side cover member E182, respectively. pivoted. As a result, the pinion gear E196 is rotatably arranged between the facing front side cover member E181 and the rear side cover member E182.
The rear side cover member E182 includes a main body portion E182a formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a first upper portion erected from the front of the main body portion E182a on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion E182a (arrow L direction side). A face plate E182b, a second top plate E182c erected from the front of the main body E182a on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) of the main body E182a, and a position facing the pivotal support E181i of the front cover member E181 and a pivotal support portion E182d arranged on the front surface of the main body portion E182a.

A first notch E182b1 and a second notch E182c1 which are open on the front side (arrow F direction side) are formed in the first upper plate E182b and the second upper plate E182c, respectively. An engagement base E194b of a first transmission member E194 and an engagement base E194b of a second transmission member E195, which will be described later, are inserted through the first notch E182b1 and the second notch E182c1, respectively.
The shaft supporting portion E182d is for supporting the shaft E197 of the driving means E190, and is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the main body portion E182a. is formed at a position facing the shaft supporting portion E181i.
That is, the shaft E197 of the driving means E190 is supported by the shaft supporting portion E181i of the front side cover member E181 and the shaft supporting portion E182d of the rear side cover member E182, and the axial direction thereof is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is considered to be a posture that
The driving means E190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, a mounting member E192 that is arranged above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of arrow U), and a driving force transmission member E193 that is fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191. , a first transmission member E194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E195 engaged with the first transmission member E194, and between the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 It has an interposed pinion gear E196 and a shaft E197 through which the axis of the pinion gear E196 is inserted.

The drive motor E191 is for displacing the sorting passage E150 in the direction of inclination thereof, and is disposed with its axis directed upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U). This makes it possible to reduce the installation space in the front-rear direction, as compared with the case where the shaft is directed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
The mounting member E192 is for fixing (arranging) the drive motor E191 to the front side cover member E181. A peripheral wall portion E192b is formed along the outer edge of the portion E192a so as to stand vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U).
An insertion hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor E191 is formed substantially in the center of the base portion E192a in the plate thickness direction. It is fixed (arranged) to the member E192. The upper end of the shaft of the drive motor E191 is arranged vertically above the upper end of the peripheral wall portion E192b.
The driving force transmission member E193 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the first transmission member E194, and is formed in a cylindrical shape smaller than the inner diameter of the central cutout E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c. The shaft of the drive motor E191 is fixed to the shaft center. The driving force transmission member E193 is formed with an eccentric shaft E193a disposed at a position different from the axial center, and a flange portion E193b projecting from a side wall of the driving force transmission member E193.

The eccentric shaft E193a is a portion that engages with the first transmission member E194, and is formed in a columnar shape smaller in diameter than the driving force transmission member E193. is disposed inscribed in the outer edge of the Therefore, the axis of the eccentric shaft E193a is arranged at a position different from the axis of the driving force transmission member E193, that is, arranged eccentrically with respect to the axis of the drive motor E191. Therefore, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape about the axis of the driving force transmission member E193 (the shaft of the drive motor E191) when viewed from above.
The flange portion E193b is a portion for restricting the upward displacement of the driving force transmission member E193 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U). ). The outer shape of the flange portion E193b is formed in a circular shape larger than the inner shape of the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c, so that the flange portion E193b can come into contact with the motor mounting surface E181c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving force transmission member E193 inserted into the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c from coming off upward (in the direction of the arrow U) of the motor mounting surface E181c.
The first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the distribution passage E150.
The first transmission member E194 includes a body portion E194a formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, an engagement base E194b projecting from the upper surface of the body portion E194a, and a front member E110 side from the engagement base E194b. An engaging portion E194c protruding toward (arrow F direction side), a first rack portion E194d protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) of the main body portion E194a, and the lower surface of the main body portion E194a A transmission recess E194e recessed in is formed.

The body portion E194a is disposed above the driving force transmission member E193 (in the direction of arrow U). The size of the main body E194a in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed larger than the outer shape of the driving force transmission member E193, and is between the front end and the rear end of the main body E194a, that is, when viewed from above, the main body A driving force transmission member E193 is disposed at a position overlapping E194a.
The engaging portion E194c has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between opposing inner walls of the engaging recess E153a in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). Thereby, the engaging portion E194c can be inserted into the engaging recess E153a. The driving force of the driving motor E191 can be transmitted to the distribution passage E150 by the contact between the engaging portion E194c and the lateral inner wall of the engaging recess E153a.
Further, since the engaging recess E153a extends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the engaging portion E194c can be displaced in the engaging recess E153a in the vertical direction. That is, the driving force of the drive motor E191 in the vertical direction can be non-transmitted to the distribution passage E150.
Thus, the engaging portion E194c transmits the lateral displacement of the first transmission member E194 to the distribution passage E150, but does not transmit the lateral displacement of the first transmission member E194 to the distribution passage E150. By doing so, the distribution passage E150 can be displaced along the inclined surface of the first inclined surface portion E133 of the base member E130.

A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196 is engraved on the lower surface of the first rack portion E194d, and the pinion gear E196 is rotated by the lateral displacement of the first transmission member E194.
The transmission recess E194e extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and is formed from the front end to the rear end. Further, the width of the groove of the transmission recess E194e (the distance between the inner walls facing each other in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR)) is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer shape of the eccentric shaft E193a. By inserting the eccentric shaft E193a into the transmission recess E194e, the driving force of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194 via the driving force transmission member E193.
More specifically, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is circularly displaced about the axis of the driving force transmission member E193 (the shaft of the drive motor E191) when viewed from above. When the lateral inner wall of the transmission recess E194e contacts the eccentric shaft E193a, the lateral displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a due to the drive of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and the first transmission member E194 moves laterally. direction.
On the other hand, the transmission recess E194e is formed from the front end to the rear end of the main body E194a. is considered non-abutting. Therefore, the longitudinal displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a due to the driving of the drive motor E191 is not transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and the longitudinal displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be suppressed.

Further, since the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, the lateral displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be set to a predetermined amount. Displacement can be suppressed. Further, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 in the left-right direction can be regarded as a reciprocating motion.
The second transmission member E195 includes a main body portion E195a that is substantially rectangular in the rear view, a second rack portion E195b that protrudes from a side surface of the main body portion E195a (in the direction of the arrow L), and the longitudinal direction of the main body portion E195a. A guide groove E195c disposed substantially in the center of the direction, an engagement base E194b projecting from the upper surface of the other side (arrow R direction side) of the main body E195a, and a front member E110 side from the upper end of the engagement base E194b ( An engaging portion E194c projecting in the direction of the arrow F) is formed.
A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196 is engraved on the upper surface of the second rack portion E195b, and the rotation of the pinion gear E196 displaces the second transmission member E195 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). .
The guide groove E195c extends in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction, arrow LR direction), is formed in the front side cover member E181, and fastens and fixes the front side cover member E181 and the rear side cover member E182. A fastening portion for is inserted. By inserting the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 into the guide groove E195c, it is possible to guide the lateral displacement of the second transmission member E195. In addition, since a tapping screw is screwed into the fastening portion of the front cover member E181, the rigidity of the tapping screw is used to suppress damage due to contact between the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 and the guide groove E195c. can.

The pinion gear E196 is arranged with its axial direction extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A shaft E197 is inserted through an axially drilled through-hole, and the shaft E197 is supported by shaft supporting portions E181i and E182d provided in the front side cover member E181 and the rear side cover member E182, thereby forming a pinion gear. E196 is rotatably disposed on cover member E180.
Next, referring to FIGS. 1550 to 1553, the displacement (reciprocating) motion of the sorting passage E150 by the driving means E190 will be described. Figures 1550(a) and 1552(a) are front views of the lower frame E86b with the illustration of the front member E110 omitted, and Figures 1550(b) and 1552(b) are the rear side cover FIG. 1550(c) and FIG. 1552(c) are top views of the lower frame E86b. FIG. 1550(c) and FIG.
FIG. 1551(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1550(c), and FIG. 1551(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b along line MDCXXXVIIIb-MDCXXXVIIIb in FIG. 1551(a). 1551(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b. FIG. 1553(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. 1552(c), and FIG. 1553(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b along line MDCXLb-MDCXLb in FIG. 1553(a). 1553(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b.
1550 and 1551 show a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 1552 and 1553 show a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the second position. .

As shown in FIGS. 1550 and 1551, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member E130. Located on the central passage E160 side. That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are arranged at positions close to each other, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged at positions close to each other.
In the state arranged at the first position, the distribution passage E150 is arranged above the mounting portion E164 of the central passage E160. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the sorting passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) can be easily thrown to the installation passage E161 (the fourth passage ERt4).
In addition, the notch portion E150a of the distribution passage E150 is arranged at a position close to the outer wall E172 of the flow passage adjusting block E170 when viewed from above. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) can be easily brought into contact with the outer wall E172. As a result, the throwing direction of the ball can be changed (varied), and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
As shown in FIGS. 1552 and 1553, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member E130 ( It is positioned on the curved portion E131 side in the direction of arrows LR). That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are arranged at positions separated from each other compared to the state arranged at the first position, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged at positions separated from each other. is set.

When the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, the end portion of the distribution passage E150 on the lower side in the inclination direction in a top view is arranged substantially in the center of the installation portion E164 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the ball that has passed (flowed down and rolled) through the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) can roll on the upper surface of the mounting portion E164. As a result, the time from the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be lengthened, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be enhanced.
The distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are engaged by inserting the engaging portion E194c into the engaging recess E153a of the engaged portion E153. As described above, the engagement recess E153a is formed to extend in the vertical direction (the arrow U-D direction) in rear view, so that the engagement portion E194c extends in the vertical direction (the arrow U- D direction). As a result, even when the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 is displaced in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR), the distribution passage E150 can be displaced in the left-right direction as well as in the vertical direction. Thereby, the sorting passage E150 can be displaced along its inclination direction (the inclination direction of the first slope portion E133). That is, in a direction parallel to the movement (falling, rolling) direction of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150 (from the end of the distribution passage E150 on the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side It is possible to displace (reciprocate) the distribution passage E150 and the protrusion E151 formed on the upper surface thereof in the direction toward the end. As a result, it is possible to easily change (modify) the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball. In addition, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball can be changed (changed) in various ways.
Further, as described above, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is in contact with the inclined side surfaces E151a of the protrusion E151, and the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is in contact with each other. 3 path ERt3) so that it can move (flow down and roll) in the sorting path E150 (third path ERt3) so that the ball can move (flow down and roll) in the sorting path E150 (third path ERt3) can be suppressed. Therefore, in order to suppress the ball from remaining in the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3), the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) may be displaced along a complicated trajectory, Displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the driving means E190 can be simplified.
Displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position is caused by the drive of the drive motor E191 so that the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 moves from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved portion E131 side ( This is done by displacing in the direction of the arrow L).

As described above, since the eccentric shaft E193a is inserted into the transmission recess E194e of the first transmission member E194, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side in the same manner as the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.
Further, the pinion gear E196 meshing with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E194d is rotated clockwise in rear view by the displacement of the first transmission member E194 from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side.
As a result, the second rack portion E195b that meshes with the pinion gear E196, that is, the second transmission member E195 is displaced from the central passage E160 toward the curved portion E131, and the distribution passage engages with the second transmission member E195. E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position.
Thus, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 is transmitted to the second transmission member E195 via the pinion gear E196. As a result, the number of drive motors E191 to be provided can be suppressed, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the second transmission member E195 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first transmission member E194, that is, the synchronization of the displacement of the first transmission member E194 and the displacement of the second transmission member E195 can be eliminated, thereby reducing the product cost. can be achieved.

Further, since the pinion gear E196 is interposed, the displacements of the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 can be in opposite directions (opposite phases). That is, on the base member E130 (first slope portion E133), vibrations in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) generated when the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) can be canceled out. As a result, the damping member can be eliminated, and the product cost can be reduced.
Displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position is performed by driving the drive motor E191 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. The displacement from the first position to the second position is the same except for the direction of displacement of the distribution passage E150 and the first transmission member E194, the direction of displacement of the second transmission member E195, and the direction of rotation of the pinion gear E196. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.
Here, by maintaining the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the same direction, the distribution passage E150 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) between the first position and the second position. Specifically, among the circular displacements of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the central passage E160 toward the curved portion E131 displaces the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position. Further, in the circular displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 displaces the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position.
In this way, by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a in a circular shape when viewed from above, the distribution passage E150 is reciprocated between the first position and the second position while maintaining the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the same direction. be able to. As a result, switching of the drive direction of the drive motor E191 can be suppressed. As a result, a sensor for controlling the drive motor E191 can be eliminated, and the product cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, it is possible to suppress the lateral displacement of the first transmission member E194 exceeding a predetermined amount. For example, in a configuration in which the drive motor E191 is engaged with the first transmission member E194 without the drive force transmission member E193 interposed therebetween, the first transmission member E194 may be displaced due to malfunction of the drive motor E191, sensor control failure, or the like. There is a risk of displacement exceeding a fixed amount.
In contrast, in the present embodiment, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from the top, so that the first transmission member E194 is horizontally displaced within a predetermined range. For example, contact with the central passage E160) can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration due to the switching of the driving direction of the driving motor E191 (driving stop or re-driving), and the reciprocating motion of the sorting passage E150 can be made smooth.
Returning to FIGS. 1542 to 1549, the ball flowing down the lower frame E86b will be described.
By passing through the receiving port EOPin formed in the front plate E111, the ball is guided to the first passage ERt1, and then drops down the first passage ERt1 by its own weight to reach the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2).

The ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) reciprocates in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) due to its shape, and swings by passing through the notch E132a of the wall plate E132. You are guided to the branch passage E150 (the third passage ERt3). As a result, the ball guided to the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) can pass through the notch E132a while having a velocity component in the front-rear direction.
Moreover, since the notch E132a is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball can be guided from any position of the notch E132a to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3).
As a result, the balls flowing down from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can be made irregular, thereby increasing the interest of the game.
As described above, the ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) changes (changes) in the flowing direction by coming into contact with the protrusion E151. Here, the flowing direction of the ball is changed (changed) to the back side (arrow B direction side), and it abuts on the back plate E137 of the base member E130 and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back plate E137. There is a possibility that the ball may be restrained from flowing down by abutting on the side surface E151a of the projection E151, that is, by being sandwiched between the rear plate E137 and the projection E151.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor E191 causes the distribution passage E150 to reciprocate along the inclination direction of the distribution passage E150 (first slope portion E133). It is possible to suppress the pinching of the ball. In addition, by displacing (reciprocating) the distribution passage E150, the contact between the ball and the protrusion E151 can be made irregular, and the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passage E150 moves (falling, rolling). (Rolling) direction can be diversified. Thereby, it is possible to suppress monotonous changes (changes) in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the sorting passage E150. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
The ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) comes into contact with the protrusion E151, and the speed of the ball flowing down decreases, so that the ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) flows down. You can extend (change) the time. In addition, by changing (changing) the flow direction, any one of the installation passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4), the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) guided to the aisles.
When the ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is sent to the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) of the central passage E160, it is sent to the upper hole E162 formed substantially in the center of the construction passage E161 in the left-right direction. be guided towards. The ball flowing down the installation passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) flows down the upper hole E162 without being changed (changed) in its guiding direction by the projecting portion E162a projecting around the upper hole E162. It passes through the cylindrical wall E163 (fourth passage ERt4) and flows downward (in the direction of arrow D) in the vertical direction.
The ball that has flowed down (dropped) inside the cylindrical wall E163 passes through the insertion hole E135a of the second slope portion E135, is guided to the rear side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the front side cover member E181, and is guided to the ball feeding plate E181b1. By coming into contact with the throwing inclined portion E181b3, the guiding direction is changed (changed) from vertically downward (direction of arrow D) toward the front member E110 (direction of arrow F), and flows down the upper surface of the throwing plate E181b1 (Fig. 1549(c)).

The ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the ball feeding plate E181b1 flows down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) of the interposed member E140, passes through the passage opening E142a of the contact portion E142, and exits through the outlet EOPout of the front member E110. to the game area.
When the ball flowing down the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) is changed (changed) in its flowing direction by the projecting portion E162a protruding around the upper hole E162, the ball flows toward the front side of the construction passage E161 (arrow F direction side) to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).
When the ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is thrown to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the interposition member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).
The ball flowing down the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) comes into contact with the flow path adjusting block E170 provided on the second slope E135. Thus, the flow direction is changed (changed). A ball that abuts against the inner wall E173 of the flow path adjusting block E170 may be guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Of the balls flowing down the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage) By abutting against a pair of vertical wall portions E135c arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the boundary with the passage ERt7), the ball is suppressed from being guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). be done.
The ball guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) flows down toward the insertion hole E135a (arrow B direction) of the second slope portion E135 due to its inclination direction, passes through the insertion hole E135a, and enters the front cover. It is guided to the rear side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the member E181.
Here, among the balls guided to the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the balls thrown to the rear plate E137 side (arrow B direction side) from the central passage E160 come into contact with the cylindrical wall E163. Thus, passage through the insertion hole E135a is suppressed.
Also, by contacting the partition E135d formed on the second slope E135, the ball is thrown from one side to the other in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the distribution passage E150 or from the other side to the other. can be suppressed. As a result, the ball guided to the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5) comes into contact with the side surface (the surface formed in the left-right direction) of the mounting portion E134, and the flowing direction is changed (changed). , the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

Also, by abutting on the partition E135d, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down the back side (arrow B direction side) of the cylindrical wall E163. This prevents the player from losing sight of the ball flowing down the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5).
A ball thrown from the front end (the end in the direction of arrow F) of the sorting passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) or from the second slope portion E135 (the fifth passage ERt5) passes through the intervening member E140 (the sixth passage ERt6 ) roll toward the center in the extending direction thereof. Here, the cross-sectional shape of the rolling portion E141 on a plane including the extending direction (arrow LR direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is inclined downward toward the center of the extending direction. Therefore, the ball flowing down to the interposing member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) reciprocates in the extending direction (horizontal direction) along the shape of the rolling part E141, and from the first outflow surface E141a It is guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), or flows out (flows down) from the second outflow surface E141b to the game area.
The flow path adjusting block E170 is arranged at a position overlapping the second outflow surface E141b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in front view. Thereby, the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be suppressed from flowing out (flowing down) from the second outflow surface E141b to the game area as it is. Therefore, the rolling part E141 can be rolled, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
As described above, by forming the projecting portion E151 in the sorting passage E150 (the third passage ERt3), it is possible to change (change) the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball. In other words, randomness can be imparted to the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball. That is, the protrusion E151 can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the distribution passage E150 (completely crossing the distribution passage E150 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR)).

Similarly, by providing the driving means E190, it is possible to change (change) the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball, and the ball passes through the distribution passage E150 (longitudinal direction of the distribution passage E150 (arrow LR direction) The driving means E190 can be made to function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the transition from ) to ).
Moved (flowed down, rolled) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) and passed through the end on the central passage E160 side (crossed over in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the distribution passage E150) The ball is guided to either the installation passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5). That is, the player can expect that the ball that has flowed down (passed through the end in the downstream direction) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) will be distributed to the installation passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4), It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
Here, the ball that has passed through the end of the sorting passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the direction of the arrow F) enters the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), that is, the ball enters the first winning port 64. The ball is thrown (guided) to a passage with a low probability of doing so. In other words, a ball that has not completely crossed the sorting passage E150 in the longitudinal direction has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64.例文帳に追加
As a result, the ball passes through the central passage E160 side (flowing direction side) end of the distribution passage E150 (crosses in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the distribution passage E150), and enters the first winning port 64. The player can expect that the ball will be thrown (guided) to the construction passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4) with a high probability of winning. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, by contacting the projection E151, the flow speed of the ball flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can be slowed down, and the player can see that the ball is guided to the installation passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4). It is possible to lengthen the time for which the player is expected to play, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, the projecting portion E162a allows the ball guided to the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) to be thrown to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).
On the other hand, the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) formed in the second slanted portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) allows the second slanted portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the interposing member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) The ball guided to can be thrown to the rear side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) where it is easy to enter the first prize winning port 64 (the probability of entering the first prize winning port 64 is high). As a result, the player can expect that the ball will be guided to the back side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) until the ball flows out (flows down) to the game area, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1554 to 1555, the lower frame E2086b in the 77th embodiment will be described.

In the seventy-sixth embodiment, the projection E151 protrudes from the upper surface of the distribution passage E150. . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1554 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E2086b in the seventy-seventh embodiment, corresponding to the cross-section taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in FIG. In addition, FIG. 1554(a) shows a state in which the distribution passage E2150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact with each other, and FIG. indicates a contracted state. Fig. 1555(a) is a front perspective view of the distribution passage E2150, Fig. 1555(b) is a front view of the distribution passage E2150 viewed in the direction of the arrow MDCXLIIb in Fig. 1555(a), and Fig. 1555(c) ) is a bottom view of the sorting passage E2150 viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXLIIc in FIG. 1555(b), and FIG. 1555(d) is a side view of the sorting passage E2150 viewed in the direction of arrow MDCXLIId in FIG. be.
As shown in FIGS. 1554 and 1555, the lower frame E2086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and a front member E110. A base member E2130 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the facing front member E110 and the base member E2130, and a distribution passage arranged in the base member E2130 E2150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow path adjusting blocks E170, and a plurality (two in this embodiment) of elastic springs E2190 (see FIG. 1542).
The base member E2130 includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), a plate-like wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, and a pair of curved portions. A pair of flat portions E2133 formed between opposing E131, a pair of attachment portions E134 formed above the pair of flat portions E2133 (in the direction of arrow U) on the side of the central passage E160, and the pair of attachment portions E134. It is formed by connecting a second sloped portion E135 formed between the opposing sides, a pair of plate-shaped projecting portions E136 (see FIG. 1544) erected from the front of the base member E2130, and a pair of curved portions E131. and a plate-like back plate E137.

The planar portion E2133 is formed of a plate-like body that is horizontally long and substantially rectangular when viewed from the top, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support projections E2133a are formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) support portions E2133b are formed on the passage E160 side.
The support protrusion E2133a is formed in a cylindrical shape. The support portion E2133b is a plate-like body that is substantially rectangular in side view, and protrudes from the upper surface of the flat portion E2133. A hole, that is, an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the support shaft E20j is drilled in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The plurality of support projections E2133a and the plurality of support portions E2133b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
The distribution passage E2150 slopes downward from the curved portion E131 toward the mounting portion E134, and is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the slope. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) support projections E2150a are formed on the lower surface of the distribution passage E2150 at both ends in the longitudinal direction. 2) of support portions E2150b are formed respectively.
The support protrusions E2150a are arranged at positions corresponding to the support protrusions E2133a in top view. The support portions E2150b are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction in top view with respect to the support portions E2133b. Specifically, the support portions E2150b are arranged between the pair of support portions E2133b facing each other.

The support portion E2150b is provided with an insertion hole substantially the same as the insertion hole provided in the support portion E2133b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
A rolling surface E2151 on which balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow down is formed on the upper surface of the distribution passage E2150, and has a cross-sectional shape on a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the distribution passage E2150. is curved in an arc shape that is concave downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D). A third passage ERt203 is formed by this arcuately curved space.
The end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the interposing member E140 (direction of arrow F, see FIG. 1542) is vertically lower than the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the rear plate E137 (direction of arrow B) (arrow D direction). Therefore, the ball flowing down the rolling surface E2151 passes through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the rear plate E137 and contacts the rear plate E137. The ball is likely to be thrown to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) by passing through (see FIG. 1542).
The elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, as described above, and has an inner diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameters of the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a. By inserting the support projections E2133a and E2150a inside the elastic spring E2190, the support projections E2133a and E2150a can support the elastic spring E2190.

By inserting the support shaft E20j through the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b while the elastic spring E2190 is supported by the support projections E2133a and E2150a, the distribution passage E2150 can be engaged with the plane portion E2133.
The support shaft E20j is for rotatably engaging the distribution passage E2150 with the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction) as a rotation axis with respect to the flat portion E2133. It is formed as a rod-shaped cylindrical body having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than that of the insertion hole, and is inserted through the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b in a posture along the front-rear direction.
As a result, the pair of distribution passages E2150 are displaced (reciprocated) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) by the elastic springs E2190 while the central passage E160 side is rotatably engaged. be. That is, the pair of distribution passages E2150 are engaged with the base member E2130 (flat portion E2133) so as to be displaceable (rotating, reciprocating). Both ends of the pair of distribution passages E2150 in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows LR) are arranged in contact with the lower surface of the curved portion E131.
In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a contracted state, and the contact state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passage E2150 is maintained by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190. That is, in the present embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed vertically downward (arrow D direction side) of the sorting passage E2150, and displaces the sorting passage E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side). formed in a manner.

In this state, the lowest position in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) of the rolling surface E2151 is vertically above (direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 of the central passage E160. are placed. As a result, contact between the ball that has flowed down on the rolling surface E2151 and the installation portion E164 can be suppressed, and the ball that has flowed down on the rolling surface E2151 can be transferred to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope portion E135 (fifth It can be guided to the passage ERt5).
Next, the balls flowing down the sorting passage E2150 will be described. By reciprocating the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the ball guided to the distribution passage E2150 while having a velocity component in the front-rear direction has a rolling surface. While reciprocating in E2151 (third passage ERt203) in the front-rear direction, it flows down toward the central passage E160 in the direction of inclination.
By reciprocating in the front-rear direction, the ball that has passed through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the rear plate E137 (arrow B direction side) comes into contact with the rear plate E137, and is again moved to the rolling surface E2151 (the third passage). ERt 203).
On the other hand, due to the reciprocating motion in the front-rear direction, the ball that has passed through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the intervening member E140 (direction of arrow F) is guided to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) ( See Figure 1542).

It does not pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the intervening member E140 (direction of arrow F), that is, it is not guided to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), and the inclined direction downward side of the rolling surface E2151. is guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).
In this way, the rolling surface E2151 is curved in an arcuate shape in which the cross-sectional shape on a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the distribution passage E2150 is convex downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D). can change (change) the flow direction of the ball, and the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second slope E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) You can guide the sphere (see diagram 1542). In other words, the player can expect that the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E2151 (third path ERt203) will be distributed to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4), thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, when the ball sent from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) contacts (drops) the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), the weight of the ball causes the distribution passage E2150 to move toward the support shaft. The bending portion E131 side rotates downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D) with E20j as the center of rotation. That is, the inclination of the sorting passage E2150 becomes smaller. As a result, the falling speed of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) can be slowed down, and the time for which the player expects the ball to be guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be lengthened. , can enhance the interest of the game.
In addition, as described above, the curved portion E131 has a cross-sectional shape on a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) that is vertically downward (arrow D direction). 1549(c)), the sphere guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) is arranged at one end and the other end in the extending direction. After reciprocating with the side, the ball can flow down to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203). Therefore, when two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (the second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E2151 (the third passage ERt203) with a predetermined distance therebetween, the curved portion E131 (the second passage ERt2) The reciprocating motion in can be used to force the leading ball to overtake the trailing ball and reduce the distance between the leading and trailing balls (bringing the balls together). As a result, while the preceding ball is flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (the third passage ERt203), the following ball is guided to the rolling surface E2151 (the third passage ERt203). The inclination of the sorting passage E2150 can be further reduced by the weight of the moving ball. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the ball to be guided to the construction path E161 (fourth path ERt4) for a longer period of time, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 1556, the lower frame E3086b in the 78th embodiment will be described.
In the seventy-seventh embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E2150 is curved in an arc shape, but the upper surface of the sorting passage E3150 in the seventy-eighth embodiment is flat. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1556 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E3086b in the seventy-eighth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line MDCXXXVIIIa-MDCXXXVIIIa in FIG. 1550(c). FIG. 1556(a) shows a state in which the distribution passage E3150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact, and FIG. 1556(b) shows a state in which the elastic spring E2190 is compressed with respect to FIG. 1554(a). .
As shown in FIG. 1556, the lower frame E3086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and a rear side of the front member E110 ( A base member E3130 disposed on the arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the front member E110 and the base member E3130 facing each other, a distribution passage E3150 disposed in the base member E3130, the center It has a passageway E160, a pair of flow path adjusting blocks E170, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) elastic springs E2190, and a ball joint E3200 (see FIG. 1542).

The base member E3130 is formed in the same manner as the base member E2130 in the seventy-seventh embodiment, except that the socket E3220 of the ball joint E3200 is arranged on the plane portion E3133 instead of the support portion E2133b.
A socket E3220 of a ball joint E3200 is disposed substantially in the center of the flat portion E3133 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) on the side of the central passage E160 from the support projection E2133a of the flat portion E3133.
Here, the ball joint E3200 will be described. Ball joint E3200 is formed from ball member E3210 and socket E3220.
The ball member E3210 is formed with a spherical portion E3211 and a fixing portion E3212 coupled to the spherical portion E3211. The socket E3220 is recessed with a receiving opening E3221 formed in the upper surface thereof to have an outer diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the spherical portion E3211. By inserting the ball E3211 into the socket E3221, the ball member E3210 is displaceably engaged with the socket E3220.

The distribution passage E3150 slopes downward from the curved portion E131 toward the mounting portion E134, and is formed of a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the slope. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) support projections E2150a are formed on the lower surface of the distribution passage E3150 at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a ball member E3210 is formed closer to the central passage E160 than the plurality of support projections E2150a. be done.
The support projection E2150a and the ball member E3210 are arranged at positions corresponding to the support projection E2133a and the socket E3220 formed on the plane portion E3133 in top view.
A rolling surface E3151 on which balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow down is formed on the upper surface of the distribution passage E3150 formed in a plate-like body. A third passage ERt303 is formed by the rolling surface E3151.
A ball member E3210 (ball portion E3211) is arranged on the lower surface of the distribution passage E3150 in the socket E3220 (receptacle E3221) arranged on the upper surface of the plane portion E3133 while the elastic spring E2190 is supported by the support projections E2133a and E2150a. ), the distribution passage E3150 can be engaged with the plane portion E3133.

As a result, the pair of distribution passages E3150 are displaced (reciprocated) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) by the elastic springs E2190 while the central passage E160 side is rotatably engaged. be. That is, the pair of distribution passages E3150 are arranged displaceably (rotationally, reciprocatingly) on the base member E3130 (flat portion E3133). Both ends of the pair of distribution passages E3150 in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows LR) are arranged in contact with the lower surface of the curved portion E131.
In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a contracted state, and the contact state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passage E3150 is maintained by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190. That is, in the present embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed vertically downward (arrow D direction side) of the sorting passage E2150, and displaces the sorting passage E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side). formed in a manner.
Also, in this state, the end portion of the rolling surface E3151 on the downward side of the inclination direction (arrow D direction side), that is, the lowest position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the rolling surface E3151 is , above the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 of the central passage E160 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow U). As a result, contact between the ball that has flowed down on the rolling surface E3151 and the mounting portion E164 can be suppressed, and the ball that has flowed down on the rolling surface E3151 can be transferred to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope portion E135 (fifth It can be guided to the passage ERt5).
Next, the balls flowing down the distribution passage E3150 will be described. By reciprocating the curved portion E131 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the ball guided to the distribution passage E3150 while having a velocity component in the front-rear direction is placed on the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303 ) can be displaced in the front-rear direction, and flows down toward the central passage E160 along the inclination direction.

Here, depending on the contact (dropping) position of the ball on the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) in the front-rear direction, the distribution passage E3150 is positioned on the side of the interposition member E140 (direction of arrow F) or on the side of the rear plate E137. (arrow B direction side) (see FIG. 1542).
More specifically, since the distribution passage E3150 is engaged with the base member E3130 (flat portion E3133) via the ball joint E3200, the interposed member E140 (see FIG. 1542) of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) ) side, the distribution passage E3150 is tilted downward from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, and in addition, due to the weight of the ball itself, from the back plate E137 side to the interposition member E140 side. slope downwards towards On the other hand, when the ball abuts (drops) to the back plate E137 side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution passage E3150 is inclined downward from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, Due to the self weight of the ball, it is inclined downward from the side of the interposition member E140 toward the side of the back plate E137. That is, in the front-rear direction, the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303) is inclined downward toward the side where the ball abuts (drops).
As a result, the flowing direction of the balls flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) can be changed (changed), and the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or intermediate passage E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be changed. The ball can be guided to any passage of the installation member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) (see FIG. 1542). That is, the player can expect that the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303) will be sorted to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4), thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, when the ball sent from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) contacts (drops) on the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution passage E3150 is opened by the weight of the ball. The bending portion E131 side rotates downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D) with E3200 as the center of rotation. That is, the inclination of the sorting passage E3150 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) is reduced. As a result, the falling speed of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) can be slowed down, and the time for which the player expects the ball to be guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be lengthened. , can enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, as described above, the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) has a cross-sectional shape on a plane that includes the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Since it is formed in a curved arc that is convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 1549(c)), the ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) is moved in the extending direction. After reciprocating between one end side and the other end side of , the ball can flow down to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). Therefore, when two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (the second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303) with a predetermined distance therebetween, the curved portion E131 (the second passage ERt2) The reciprocating motion in can be used to force the leading ball to overtake the trailing ball and reduce the distance between the leading and trailing balls (bringing the balls together). As a result, while the preceding ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303), the following ball is guided to the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303). The inclination of the distribution passage E3150 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) can be further reduced by the weight of the moving ball. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the ball to be guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) for a longer period of time, thereby making the game more interesting.
Also, by causing the ball to flow down to the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303), it may be possible to change (change) the inclination direction of the distribution passage E3150 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
For example, in a state in which the preceding ball is flowing down the interposed member E140 (see FIG. 1542) side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the following ball When the ERt303) abuts (drops) on the rear plate E137 side, the downward inclination direction of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-rear direction may be changed (changed) from the interposed member E140 side to the rear plate E137 side. In this way, while the ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303), the inclination direction of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-rear direction is changed (changed), so that the destination of the ball can be changed, thereby improving the game. You can increase your interest.
In the present embodiment, the case where the same elastic springs E2190 are respectively arranged on a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support projections E2133a has been described, but different elastic springs, that is, elastic springs having different elastic moduli A spring may be arranged respectively.

For example, by making the elastic modulus of the elastic spring arranged on the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction side) smaller than the elastic modulus of the elastic spring arranged on the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction side), , the distribution passage E3150 can be easily inclined downward toward the interposed member E140 (see FIG. 1542). As a result, the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303) moves on the rolling surface E3151 (the third passage ERt303) while being in contact (nipped) between the rolling surface E3151 and the back plate E137. It is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down (dropping) between the central passage E160 and the rear plate E137 and being guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1557 to 1558, the lower frame E4086b in the 79th embodiment will be described.
In the seventy-sixth embodiment, a pair of distribution passages E150 are provided, but in the seventy-ninth embodiment, a pair of second distribution passages E4150 are provided in addition to the pair of distribution passages E150. be done. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1557(a) and 1558(a) are front views of the lower frame E4086b in the 79th embodiment, and Figures 1557(b) and 1558(b) are rear views of the lower frame E4086b. . 1557 and 1558 are schematically illustrated, and the illustration of the front member E110 and the guide member E120 is omitted in FIGS. 1557(a) and 1558(a). Also, in FIGS. 1557(b) and 1558(b), only the sorting passage E150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the drive means E4190 are displayed for easy understanding. FIG. 1557 shows a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 1558 shows a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 1557 to 1558, the lower frame E4086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and front member E110. A base member E4130 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the front member E110 and the base member E4130 facing each other, and a distribution passage arranged in the base member E4130 E150, a second distribution passage E4150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow passage adjustment blocks E170, a cover member E4180 arranged at a predetermined interval on the lower surface side (arrow D direction side) of the base member E4130, and a drive means E4190 disposed inside the cover member E4180 (see FIG. 1542).
The base member E4130 is formed in a substantially horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1542) formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and erected from the outer edges of the curved portions E131. a plate-like wall plate E132, a pair of first slope portions E4133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, and a pair of third slope portions E4133 formed between the pair of first slope portions E4133 facing each other A sloped portion E4139, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of third sloped portions E4139, a second sloped portion E135 formed between the paired mounting portions E134, and a base member E4130. A pair of plate-like overhanging portions E136 (see FIG. 1544) erected from the front of and a plate-like rear plate E4137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131.
Since the third sloped portion E4139 is formed, the first sloped portion E4133 is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) relative to the first sloped portion E133 in the seventy-sixth embodiment, and is arranged in the longitudinal direction (arrows LR direction) is formed shorter.
The third sloped portion E4139 is disposed between the first sloped portion E4133 and the attachment portion E134 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and formed parallel to the first sloped portion E4133.

The back plate E4137 is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the back plate E137 in the seventy-sixth embodiment, similarly to the first slope portion E4133.
The second distribution passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the direction of inclination than the distribution passage E150, and the rest is the same, so a description thereof will be omitted. A third passage ERt3 is formed in the second distribution passage E4150 by forming the protrusion E151 in the second distribution passage E4150. The second distribution passage E4150 is disposed between the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) and the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). That is, the second distribution passage E4150 is vertically below the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) (in the direction of arrow D), and vertically above the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) (in the direction of arrow U direction).
The driving means E4190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, a mounting member E192 that is arranged above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of arrow U), and a driving force transmission member E193 that is fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191. , a first transmission member E4194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193; a second transmission member E4195 and a third transmission member E4198 engaged with the first transmission member E4194; and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) pinion gears E196.
Although the plurality of pinion gears E196 in the present embodiment are all the same, in order to facilitate understanding, the pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 is replaced with the pinion gear E196a. The pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the third transmission member E4198 is denoted by the pinion gear E196b, and the pinion gear E196 interposed between the second transmission member E4195 and the fourth transmission member E4199 is denoted by the pinion gear E196c. to distinguish.

The first transmission member E4194 is formed by extending the engagement base E4194b vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the first transmission member E194 in the seventy-sixth embodiment. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with E196b is engraved.
The second transmission member E4195 is formed by extending the engagement base E4194b vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) in contrast to the second transmission member E195 in the seventy-sixth embodiment. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is engraved on one side (arrow L direction) of the direction (arrow LR direction).
The third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the second distribution passage E4150.
The third transmission member E4198 includes a body portion E4198a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the body portion E4198a, and an engaging base E194b extending from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction side). A protruding engaging portion E194c (see FIG. 1544) is formed. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196b is engraved on the lower surface of the main body E4198a, and the rotation of the pinion gear E196b displaces the third transmission member E4198 in the left-right direction.

The fourth transmission member E4199 includes a body portion E4199a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the body portion E4199a, and an engaging base E194b extending from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction side). A protruding engaging portion E194c (see FIG. 1544) is formed. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is engraved on the lower surface of the main body E4199a, and the rotation of the pinion gear E196c displaces the fourth transmission member E4199 in the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 1557, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E4194, and the second transmission member E4195 are arranged at the center passage E160 in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. located on the side. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are arranged at positions close to each other, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged at positions close to each other.
On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198, and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the wall plate E132 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are arranged at positions separated from each other, and therefore the pair of second distribution passages E4150 are also arranged at positions separated from each other.
In addition, in the state where the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the end portion of the second sorting passage E4150 on the lower side in the inclination direction is closer to the wall plate E132 than the end portion of the sorting passage E150 on the lower side in the inclination direction. In other words, when viewed from the top, the entire second distribution passage E4150 is arranged at a position overlapping the distribution passage E150. Therefore, the second distribution passage E4150 is arranged at a position where no ball passage is formed.

As a result, the ball that has flowed down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) does not move (flow down or roll) in the second distribution passage E4150, and is thrown (falls) to the installation passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4). be done. That is, the ball can be made to flow down (drop) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the installation passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4). As a result, the ball that has flowed down (dropped) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) contacts the construction passage E161 and bounces back, thereby flowing down from the construction passage E161 to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) ( drop).
On the other hand, by causing the ball to flow down (drop) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the ball can be dropped directly into the upper hole E162 without flowing down the construction passage E161. You may be able to throw the ball. As a result, compared to the case where the ball rolls on the installation passage E161 and flows down toward the upper hole E162, the ball falls ( (see FIG. 1546).
Thus, in this embodiment, by causing the ball to flow down (drop) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the construction passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4), comparison with the 76th embodiment Then, the ball distributed to the construction passage E161 (the central passage E160, the fourth passage ERt4) can be made difficult to enter the first prize winning port 64 (see FIG. 1541) (the probability of winning the first prize winning port 64 can be reduced). .
On the other hand, the ball is sent to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the installation passage E161 from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3), that is, without contacting the protrusion E162a, so that the ball passes through the upper hole E162. You can easily pass through. As a result, the player expects that the ball that has flowed down the distribution path E150 (the third path ERt3) will not flow down the installation path E161, but will directly pass through the upper hole E162, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can.

As shown in FIG. 1558, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are separated from the wall plate E132 in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. located on the side. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are disposed at positions separated from each other compared to the state in which the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the first position. They are arranged at positions spaced apart from each other.
On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the side of the central passage E160 in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are arranged at positions closer to each other than in the state where the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position. The E4150s are also positioned close to each other.
In addition, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, the end of the second distribution passage E4150 on the lower side in the inclination direction is closer to the upper hole E162 than the end of the distribution passage E150 on the upper side in the inclination direction. Located in That is, when viewed from above, part of the second distribution passage E4150 is arranged at a visible position. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the sorting passage E150 can be guided to the second sorting passage E4150. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the second distribution passage E4150 can be easily sent directly to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the installation passage E161.
Here, since the second distribution passage E4150 is arranged vertically below the distribution passage E150 (in the direction of the arrow D), the ball flows down (falls) from the second distribution passage E4150 to the construction passage E161. In this case, compared with the case where the ball flows down (drops) from the sorting passage E150 to the construction passage E161, the bounce amount of the ball due to contact with the construction passage E161 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow down (fall) from the construction passage E161 to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

As described above, by being guided from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E4150, the ball distributed to the construction passage E161 (the central passage E160, the fourth passage ERt4) ) can be easily won (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 can be increased). Therefore, the player expects that the ball is guided to the second distribution passage E4150 (the ball is thrown from the distribution passage E150 in a state where the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position), and the game is completed. You can increase your interest.
Further, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, the third passage ERt3 is formed in the second distribution passage E4150. You can extend (change) the flow time of the sphere to be played.
Also, by causing the ball to flow down (drop) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E4150, it can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the protrusion E151 formed in the second distribution passage E4150. Therefore, in addition to flowing (dropping) from the curved portion E131 to the distribution passage E150, by causing the ball to flow (drop) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E4150, the upper surface of the protrusion E151 moves (flows down). , rolling), and the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball can be diversified. More specifically, by moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the protrusion E151 formed in a planar shape, it is possible to suppress the ball from moving (flowing down, rolling) in the third passage ERt3. It is possible to easily form both a mode in which the passage ERt3 is moved (flowing down, rolling) and a mode in which the third passage ERt3 is not moved (flowing down, rolling).
Next, the reciprocating motion of the distribution passage E150 and the second distribution passage E4150 by the driving means E4190 will be described.

The first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 and the distribution passage E150, and the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 and the second distribution passage E4150 have an engaging portion E194c and an engaged portion E153. are engaged by being inserted into the engaging recess E153a (see FIG. 1551).
The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position and the accompanying displacement of the second distribution passage E4150 from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side are driven by the drive motor E191, and the driving force is This is performed by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the wall plate E132 side (arrow L direction side).
When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.
Further, due to the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 from the side of the central passage E160 to the side of the wall plate E132, the pinion gear E196a that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the lower surface of the first rack portion E4194d rotates clockwise in the rear view. A pinion gear E196b meshing with a rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the first rack portion E4194d is rotated counterclockwise in a rear view.

As a result, the second transmission member E4195 (second rack portion E195b) that meshes with the pinion gear E196a is displaced from the central passage E160 toward the wall plate E132, and the distribution passage E150 is engaged with the second transmission member E4195. is displaced from a first position to a second position. Further, the third transmission member E4198 (body portion E4198a) meshing with the pinion gear E196b is displaced from the wall plate E132 side toward the central passage E160, and the second distribution passage E4150 engaged with the third transmission member E4198 is , from the side of the wall plate E132 to the side of the central passage E160.
Further, the pinion gear E196c meshing with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the main body portion E4195a of the second transmission member E4195 due to the displacement of the second transmission member E4195 from the side of the central passage E160 to the side of the wall plate E132 shifts from the rear view clock. rotated around.
As a result, the body portion E4199a of the fourth transmission member E4199 meshing with the pinion gear E196c is displaced from the wall plate E132 side toward the central passage E160, and the second distribution passage E4150 engaged with the fourth transmission member E4199 is displaced. , from the side of the wall plate E132 to the side of the central passage E160.
Displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position, and accompanying displacement of the second distribution passage E4150 from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, are from the first position of the distribution passage E150. The displacement to the second position and the accompanying displacement of the second distribution passage E4150 from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side are performed by driving the drive motor E191.

Here, the distribution passage E150, the second distribution passage E4150, the displacement direction of the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199, and the rotation direction of the pinion gears E196a, E196b, and E196c are the first positions of the distribution passage E150. to the second position, and the accompanying displacement of the second distribution passage E4150 from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, so description thereof will be omitted.
Thus, in the present embodiment, one drive motor E191 can reciprocate the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150. can be reduced.
Further, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 can cause the second transmission member E4195 to the fourth transmission member E4199 to be displaced, that is, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199 can be interlocked. Thereby, the displacement of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150 can be interlocked. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for sensors for controlling the reciprocating motion of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, thereby reducing product costs.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1559 to 1562, the lower frame E5086b in the 80th embodiment will be described.

In the seventy-sixth embodiment, a case where a pair of distribution passages E150 are provided has been described. A branch passage E5150 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1559(a) and 1561(a) are front views of the lower frame E5086b in the 80th embodiment, and Figures 1559(b) and 1561(b) are rear views of the lower frame E5086b. . Figures 1560 and 1562 are top views of the lower frame E5086b. 1559 to 1562 are schematically illustrated, in FIGS. 1559(a) and 1561(a), illustration of the front member E110 and the guide member E120 is omitted, and FIGS. 1560(a) and 1562(a) ), the illustration of the guide member E120 is omitted. In order to facilitate understanding, only the distribution passage E150, the third distribution passage E5150 and the drive means E5190 are shown in FIGS. 1559(b) and 1561(b). Also, in FIGS. 1560(b) and 1562(b), only the third distribution passage E5150 and the driving means E5190 are illustrated, and only the outer shape of the third distribution passage E5150 is illustrated. 1559 and 1560 show a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 1561 and 1562 show a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the second position. .
As shown in FIGS. 1559 to 1562, the lower frame E5086b includes a front member E110 and guide members E120 (see FIG. 1542) disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR). , a base member E5130 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposed member E140 interposed between the front member E110 and the base member E5130, and arranged on the base member E5130. A distribution passage E150, a third distribution passage E5150, a central passage E160, and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 are arranged at predetermined intervals on the lower surface side (arrow D direction side) of the base member E5130. It comprises a cover member E5180 and a driving means E5190 arranged inside the cover member E5180.
The base member E5130 is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the top, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and a plate-shaped plate-like member erected from the outer edges of the curved portions E131. A wall plate E132, a pair of first sloped portions E5133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of third mounting portions E5139 formed between the pair of first sloped portions E5133 facing each other, A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of third mounting portions E5139, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134, and a base member E5130. a pair of plate-like overhanging portions E136 (see FIG. 1544), and a plate-like rear plate E5137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131.

Since the third mounting portion E5139 is formed, the first sloped portion E5133 is arranged vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) relative to the first sloped portion E133 in the 76th embodiment, and is arranged in the longitudinal direction (arrows LR direction) is formed shorter.
The third attachment portion E5139 engages the third distribution passage E5150 so as to be displaceable, and is arranged between the first slope portion E5133 and the attachment portion E134 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). and its upper surface is formed horizontally.
A third guide portion E5139a through which a guided portion E5152 of a third distribution passage E5150 described later is slidably inserted is formed on the upper surface of the third mounting portion E5139 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side). .
The third guide portion E5139a includes a plate-like body that is vertically elongated and substantially rectangular when viewed from above, and a pair of plates projecting from both ends of the plate-like body in the extending direction (arrow FB direction) toward the third mounting portion E5139. , and formed in a U-shape when viewed from the side. The guided portion E5152 is slidably inserted into the space surrounded by the third guide portion E5139a and the third mounting portion E5139.

The back plate E5137 is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the back plate E137 in the seventy-sixth embodiment, similarly to the first slope portion E5133.
The third distribution passage E5150 is for the balls to flow down on its upper surface, and is formed of a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and substantially rectangular when viewed from the top. It has a guided portion E5152 formed on the arrow R direction side) and an engaged portion E5153 formed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side).
Since the protrusion E151 is formed in the third distribution passage E5150, the third passage ERt3 is formed in the third distribution passage E5150. Also, the arrangement of the protrusion E151 on the upper surface of the third distribution passage E5150 is the same as the arrangement of the distribution passage E150.
The portion to be guided E5152 is formed of a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and substantially rectangular when viewed from above, and as described above, the portion to be guided E5152 is inserted into the space surrounded by the third guide portion E5139a and the third mounting portion E5139. As a result, the third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaged portion E5153 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the third distribution passage E5150, and extends downward from the end surface of the third distribution passage E5150 on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side). (Arrow D direction). A rack gear E194d1 is engraved on the side surface of the engaged portion E5153 on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) at the lower end thereof.
The dimension in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) of the third distribution passage E5150 is formed larger than the space between the pair of distribution passages E150 disposed at the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down (dropped) from the distribution passage E150 from coming into contact with the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153 provided at both ends of the third distribution passage E5150 in the longitudinal direction. As a result, damage to the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153 can be suppressed.
The guided portion E5152 is inserted through the third guide portion E5139a, and in a state in which the rack gear E194d1 engraved on the engaged portion E5153 and the second pinion gear E5196, which will be described later, mesh with each other, the third distribution passage E5150 is connected to the third attachment. It is disposed on the portion E5139 (base member E5130).
The driving means E5190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, a mounting member E192 that is arranged above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of arrow U), and a driving force transmission member E193 that is fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191. , a first transmission member E5194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E5195 engaged with the first transmission member E4194, a pinion gear E196, and a second pinion gear E5196.

The first transmission member E5194 is formed by extending the engagement base E5194b vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the first transmission member E194 in the seventy-sixth embodiment. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the second pinion gear E5196 is engraved on the F-direction surface).
The second transmission member E4195 is formed by extending the engaging base E5194b vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the second transmission member E195 in the seventy-sixth embodiment.
The second pinion gear E5196 is disposed with its axial direction along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and is different from the pinion gear E196 in that the dimension (thickness) in the axial direction is larger, Other configurations are the same. The axial dimension (thickness) of the second pinion gear E5196 is the vertical dimension of the first rack portion E5194d of the first transmission member E5194 and the lower end of the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150. and the vertical dimension of the rack gear E194d1. As a result, the second pinion gear E5196 is formed so as to mesh with the first rack portion E5194d and the engaged portion E5153 at different positions in the vertical direction.
As shown in FIGS. 1559 and 1560, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. Located on the central passage E160 side. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged at positions close to each other, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged at positions close to each other.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between the central passage E160 and the back plate E5137 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) (hereinafter referred to as "third position"). As a result, by being guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), it flows down (drops) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) between the central passage E160 and the back plate E5137. It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the fifth passage ERt5. As a result, the player can expect that the ball guided to the third distribution path E5150 (third path ERt3) will be distributed to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4), thereby increasing the interest in the game. Further, since the third passage ERt3 is formed in the third distribution passage E5150, compared to the seventy-sixth embodiment, it is possible to extend (change) the falling time of the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3.
In addition, the distance between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137 facing each other in the front-rear direction is formed to be smaller than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from being sandwiched between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137, and the ball can flow down on the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3).
As shown in FIGS. 1561 and 1562, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. It is positioned on the curved portion E131 side. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged at positions separated from each other compared to the state arranged at the first position, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also separated from each other. are placed.
The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at a position where at least a part of it overlaps the central passage E160 in top view, that is, above the central passage E160 (in the direction of the arrow U) (hereinafter referred to as "fourth position"). . Accordingly, by guiding the ball from the distribution passage E150 to the third distribution passage E5150, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4). The ball guided to the third distribution passage E5150 crosses the front end or the rear end of the third distribution passage E5150 and is thrown to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

In addition, the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at a position where the distance between facing the rear plate E5137 in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the ball that flows down from the distribution passage E150 (the third passage ERt3) between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137 does not come into contact with the third distribution passage E5150, and the second slope portion It can be guided to E135 (fifth passage ERt5).
Thus, in this embodiment, compared with the seventy-sixth embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position and the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged at the third position, the vibration A ball thrown from the branch passage E150 can be easily guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4). On the other hand, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position and the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged at the fourth position, the ball thrown from the distribution passage E150 is placed in the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4). ) can be difficult to guide. That is, depending on the arrangement position of the third distribution passage E5150 (distribution passage E150), the degree of difficulty of throwing the ball to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be changed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, since the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between the pair of distribution passages E150 facing each other, the ball that has flowed down the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) ERt7) may be guided. That is, the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3 is added to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), and the central passage E135b (Seventh passage ERt7) can also be thrown, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Next, the reciprocating motion of the distribution passage E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 by the drive means E5190 will be described.

The distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are engaged with each other by inserting the engaging portion E194c into the engaging recess E153a of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 1551). .
The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position and the accompanying displacement of the third distribution passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position are driven by the drive motor E191, and the driving force transmission member The eccentric shaft E193a of E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved portion E131 side (arrow L direction side).
When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.
Further, the pinion gear E196 meshing with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E5194d rotates clockwise when the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side.

As a result, the second rack portion E195b of the second transmission member E5195, which meshes with the pinion gear E196, is displaced from the central passage E160 toward the curved portion E131, and the distribution passage E150 engaged with the second transmission member E5195 is displaced. , is displaced from the first position to the second position.
In addition, due to the displacement of the first transmission member E5194 from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the second pinion gear meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the first rack portion E5194d. E5196 is rotated counterclockwise in top view.
As a result, the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150 that meshes with the second pinion gear E5196 is displaced from the rear plate E5137 side (arrow B direction side) to the interposition member E140 side (arrow F direction side). , thereby displacing the third distribution passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position.
Displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position, and accompanying displacement of the third distribution passage E5150 from the fourth position to the third position, are the displacements of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position. The displacement to the position and the accompanying displacement of the third distribution passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position are performed by driving the drive motor E191.

In addition, except for the displacement direction of the distribution passage E150, the third distribution passage E5150, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195, and the rotation direction of the pinion gear E196 and the second pinion gear E5196, the first position of the distribution passage E150 to the second position, and the accompanying displacement of the third distribution passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position.
As described above, in the present embodiment, one drive motor E191 can reciprocate the pair of distribution passages E150 and the third distribution passage E5150. Therefore, the number of drive motors E191 to be provided can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. can be achieved.
Further, the displacement of the first transmission member E5194 can displace the second transmission member E5195 and the third distribution passage E5150. Displacement can be linked. Thereby, displacement of a pair of distribution passage E150 and the 3rd distribution passage E5150 can be interlocked. As a result, a sensor for controlling the reciprocating motion of the pair of distribution paths E150 and the third distribution path E5150 can be eliminated, and the product cost can be reduced.
In addition, the engaged portion E5153 and the first rack portion E5194d are engaged with the second pinion gear E5196 at different positions in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, the engaged portion E5153 and the first rack portion E5194d are engaged vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). The engaging portion E5153 is meshed, and the first rack portion E5194d is meshed vertically downward (arrow D direction)). As a result, the displacement directions of the first transmission member E5194 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be orthogonal, that is, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base member E5130, The third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced in the lateral direction (arrow FB direction) of the base member E5130. As a result, the number of pinion gears to be provided can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1563(a), the lower frame E6086b in the 81st embodiment will be described.
In the seventy-sixth embodiment, the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first slope E133 of the base member E130. The arrangement angle of the distribution passage E6150 with respect to the 1 slope portion E6133 is changed (changed). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1563(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame E6086b in the eighty-first embodiment. It should be noted that FIG. 1563(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. 1552(c). In addition, since the lower frame E6086b is formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1541) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1541) of the game board E13, only one side (arrow L direction side) is formed. is illustrated.
The lower frame E6086b of the eighty-first embodiment has the same structure as the lower frame E86b of the seventy-sixth embodiment, except that the base member E130 and the distribution passage E150 are different. Only passage E6150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1563(a), the base member E6130 is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and a pair of curved portions E131. A plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the , a pair of first sloped portions E6133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, and a pair of first sloped portions E6133 formed between the facing of the pair of first sloped portions E6133 a pair of mounting portions E134, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-like projecting portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E6130, a pair of and a plate-shaped back plate E6137 formed by connecting the curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1544).
The first slope portion E6133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and substantially rectangular when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 at a predetermined distance. are placed. Further, the first slope portion E6133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. An insertion hole E133a, a regulation portion E133b (see FIGS. 1551(b) and 1552(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a projecting portion E6133d are formed in the first slope portion E6133.
The protruding portion E6133d is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the first slope portion E6133 on the curved portion E131 side of the base member E6130 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR).
A plurality (four in the present embodiment) of cylindrical bodies E6201 for displacing the distribution passage E6150 and a cover E6202 are arranged on the first slope E6133.

The cylindrical body E6201 is formed in the same shape as the cylindrical body E201 in the seventy-sixth embodiment, except that the external shape is formed larger. As a result, the arrangement position of the distribution passage E6150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the arrangement position of the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment.
The cover E6202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201 at a position corresponding to the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201.
A pair of cylindrical bodies E6201 arranged on the side of the central passage E160 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) are arranged on the first slope portion E6133. A pair of cylindrical bodies E6201 arranged on the curved portion E131 side are arranged on the projecting portion E6133d. As a result, the inclination angle of the distribution passage E6150 can be made different, more specifically, larger, than the inclination angle of the first slope portion E6133. As a result, the displacement (reciprocating motion) of the distribution passage E6150 can be made non-parallel to the first slope portion E6133.
Since the rear plate E6137 has the distribution passage E6150 disposed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment, the rear plate E137 in the 76th embodiment , extending upward (in the direction of arrow U).

The distribution passage E6150 includes a plurality of projecting portions E151 projecting from the upper surface, a pair of guided portions E6152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passage E6150, and a pair of guided portions E6152. and a to-be-engaged portion E6153.
As described above, the arrangement position of the distribution passage E6150 is arranged above (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the arrangement position of the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment. The guided portion E6152 and the engaged portion E6153 extend downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the portion E152 and the engaged portion E153. By forming the engaged portion E6153 to extend downward, the engaging recess E6153a is also formed to extend downward like the engaged portion E6153.
As a result, the portion to be guided E6152 is prevented from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first slope portion E7133, and displacement of the distribution passage E6150 in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member E6130 is restricted. Further, it is possible to suppress contact between the engaging recess E153a and the engaging portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.
Next, the lower frames E7086b and E8086b in the 82nd and 83rd embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 1563(b) and 1563(c).

In the seventy-sixth embodiment, the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first slope E133 of the base member E130. In the embodiment, the arrangement angles of the sorting passages E7150 and E8150 change (change) as the sorting passages E7150 and E8150 are displaced. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1563(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame E7086b in the 82nd embodiment, and FIG. 1563(c) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame E8086b in the 83rd embodiment. 1563(b) and 1563(c) correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. In addition, since the lower frames E7086b and E8086b are formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1541) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1541) of the game board E13, one side (arrow L direction side) ) only.
The lower frames E7086b and E8086b in the 82nd and 83rd embodiments are formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 76th embodiment except that the base member E130 and the distribution passage E150 are different. , base members E7130, E8130 and distribution passages E7150, E8150 only.
As shown in FIG. 1563(b), the base member E7130 in the eighty-second embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR). , a plate-like wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first sloped portions E7133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, and the pair of first sloped portions E7133. A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the facing portions, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-like projecting portions erected from the front of the base member E7130. E136, and a plate-like back plate E7137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1544).

The first slope portion E7133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally long and substantially rectangular when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 at a predetermined distance. are placed. Also, the first sloped portion E7133 is formed so as to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the mounting portion E134. An insertion hole E133a, a regulation portion E133b (see FIGS. 1551(b) and 1552(b)), and a groove portion E133c are formed in the first slope portion E7133.
On the first slope E7133, there are a plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E7201a and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E7201b for displacing the distribution passage E150, and a cover E7202. are placed.
The cylindrical body E7201a is arranged at the same position in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows LR), and is arranged on the central passage E160 side of the first sloped portion E7133. The cylindrical body E7201a has the same shape as the cylindrical body E201 in the seventy-sixth embodiment, except that it has a larger outer shape. As a result, the arrangement position of the distribution passage E6150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the arrangement position of the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment.
The cylindrical body E7201b is arranged at the same position in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR), and is arranged on the curved portion E131 side of the first slope portion E7133. The outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201b is formed larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a. As a result, the arrangement position of the distribution passage E7150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the arrangement position of the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment. In addition, the inclination angle of the distribution passage E7150 can be made different from the inclination angle of the first slope portion E7133, more specifically, can be increased. As a result, the displacement (reciprocating motion) of the distribution passage E7150 can be made non-parallel to the first slope portion E7133.

The cover E7202 has holes slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical bodies E7201a and E7201b at positions corresponding to the outer shapes of the cylindrical bodies E7201a and E7201b.
Since the rear plate E7137 has the distribution passage E7150 disposed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment, the rear plate E137 in the 76th embodiment , extending upward (in the direction of arrow U).
The distribution passage E7150 includes a plurality of projecting portions E151 projecting from the upper surface, a pair of guided portions E7152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passage E7150, and a pair of guided portions E7152. and an inclined portion E7154 formed on the lower surface of the distribution passage E7150 on the curved portion E131 side.
As described above, since the arrangement position of the distribution passage E7150 is arranged above (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the arrangement position of the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment, the guided portion in the 76th embodiment The portion to be guided E7152 and the portion to be engaged E7153 are formed to extend downward (in the direction of the arrow D) with respect to the portion E152 and the portion to be engaged E153. By forming the engaged portion E7153 to extend downward, the engaging recess E7153a is also formed to extend downward in the same manner as the engaged portion E7153.

As a result, the portion to be guided E7152 is prevented from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first slope portion E7133, and displacement of the distribution passage E7150 in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member E7130 is restricted. Further, it is possible to suppress contact between the engaging recess E7153a and the engaging portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.
The sloped portion E7154 is formed to slope downward from the side of the curved portion E131 toward the side of the central passage E160, and the cylindrical body 7201b contacts the sloped portion E7154. Therefore, the sorting passage E7150 is increased in inclination angle from the first position toward the second position. That is, the moving (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E7150 can be changed (changed). As a result, it is possible to diversify the changes (changes) in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball, and to prevent the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball from becoming monotonous. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
As shown in FIG. 1563(c), the base member E8130 in the eighty-third embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR). , a plate-like wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first sloped portions E8133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, and the pair of first sloped portions E8133. A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the facing portions, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-like projecting portions erected from the front of the base member E8130. E136, and a plate-like back plate E8137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1544).
The first slope portion E8133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally long and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 at a predetermined distance. are placed. Further, the first slope portion E8133 is formed so as to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. An insertion hole E133a, a regulation portion E133b (see FIGS. 1551(b) and 1552(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a curved guide portion E8133d are formed in the first slope portion E8133.

A plurality (two in this embodiment) of cylindrical bodies 7201a for displacing the distribution passage E8150 and a cover E8202 are arranged on the first slope E8133.
The cover E8202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a at a position corresponding to the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a.
The curved guide portion E8133d is a portion for changing (changing) the inclination angle of the distribution passage E8150. is curved in an arcuate shape that is concave downward (in the direction of arrow D).
The end of the distribution passage E8150 on the side of the curved portion E131 abuts against the arc-shaped curved surface of the curved guide portion E8133d, and supports (holds) the distribution passage E8150 together with the cylindrical body E7201a. By displacing the distribution passage E8150 from the first position toward the second position, the end on the curved portion E131 side is displaced upward (arrow U direction side) along the curved surface of the curved guide portion E8133d. . Thereby, the inclination angle of the sorting passage E8150 can be increased. That is, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E8150 can be changed (changed). As a result, it is possible to diversify the change (change) in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball, and suppress the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball from becoming monotonous. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Since the rear plate E8137 has the distribution passage E8150 disposed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment, the rear plate E137 in the 76th embodiment , extending upward (in the direction of arrow U).
The distribution passage E8150 includes a plurality of projecting portions E151 projecting from the upper surface, a pair of guided portions E8152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passage E8150, and a pair of guided portions E8152. and a to-be-engaged portion E8153.
As described above, since the arrangement position of the distribution passage E8150 is arranged above (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the arrangement position of the distribution passage E150 in the 76th embodiment, the guided portion in the 76th embodiment The portion to be guided E8152 and the portion to be engaged E8153 are formed to extend downward (in the direction of the arrow D) with respect to the portion E152 and the portion to be engaged E153. By forming the engaged portion E8153 to extend downward, the engaging recess E8153a is also formed to extend downward in the same manner as the engaged portion E8153.
As a result, the portion to be guided E8152 is prevented from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first slope portion E8133, and displacement of the distribution passage E8150 in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member E8130 is restricted. In addition, it is possible to suppress contact between the engaging recess E8153a and the engaging portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.

Next, referring to FIG. 1564, the lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the eighty-fourth and eighty-fifth embodiments will be described.
In the 76th embodiment, the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base member E130. In the form and the eighty-fifth embodiment, the distribution passage E150 is displaced (reciprocated) non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base members E9130 and E10130. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1564(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame E9086b in the 84th embodiment, and FIG. 1564(b) is a partial top view of the lower frame E10086b in the 85th embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 1564, the illustration of the sorting passage E150 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding. In addition, since the lower frames E9086b and E10086b are formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1541) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1541) of the game board E13, one side (arrow L direction side) ) only.
The lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the eighty-fourth embodiment and the eighty-fifth embodiment have the same structure as the lower frame E86b in the seventy-sixth embodiment, except for the base member E9130. Only E10130 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1564(a), the base member E9130 in the eighty-fourth embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR). , a plate-like wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first sloped portions E9133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, and the pair of first sloped portions E9133. A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the facing portions, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-like projecting portions erected from the front of the base member E9130. E136, and a plate-like rear plate E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1544).
The first slope portion E9133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally long and approximately rectangular when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 at a predetermined distance. are placed. Further, the first slope portion E9133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the mounting portion E134. An insertion hole E9133a, a regulation portion E133b (see FIGS. 1551(b) and 1552(b)), and a groove portion E9133c are formed in the first slope portion E9133.
A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the distribution passage E150 and a cover E9202 are arranged on the first slope E9133.
The cylindrical body E9201 is disposed along (parallel to) the groove E9133c, and the cover E9202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201, corresponding to the insertion hole E9133a. A hole having an outer shape substantially equal to or slightly larger than the insertion hole E9133a is drilled at a position where the insertion hole E9133a is located.

A pair of grooves E9133c are formed on both sides in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) with the insertion hole E9133a interposed therebetween.
The insertion hole E9133a and the pair of grooves E9133c extend non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base member E9130. Specifically, it extends obliquely forward (in the direction of arrow F) from the curved portion E131 toward the central passage E160. Accordingly, the distribution passage E150 (see FIG. 1546) is displaced along (parallel to) the extending direction of the groove E9133c.
That is, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side and is displaced rearward (arrow B direction side). . As a result, the protrusion E151 (see FIG. 1546) of the distribution passage E150 can be easily brought into contact with the front side (arrow F direction side) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150. can be easily changed (changed) to the rear side (arrow B direction side). As a result, it becomes difficult to throw the ball to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).
On the other hand, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 and is also displaced forward (arrow F direction side). As a result, the protrusion E151 of the distribution passage E150 can be easily brought into contact with the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150, and the ball moves (flows down, rolls). (Rolling) direction can be easily changed (changed) to the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the ball can be easily thrown to the interposing member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

Since the engaging portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engaging recess E153a (see FIG. 1551(a)), the first transmission member E194 moves in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The distribution passage E150 is non-parallel to the displacement (reciprocating motion), that is, even when displaced (reciprocating motion) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the engagement between the engaging recess E153a and the engaging portion E194c can be maintained.
In this way, the direction in which the ball easily moves (falls down, rolls) changes ( Since the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed), various changes (changes) can be made.
As shown in FIG. 1564(b), the base member E10130 in the eighty-fifth embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows LR). , a plate-like wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first sloped portions E10133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, and the pair of first sloped portions E10133. A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the facing portions, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-like projecting portions erected from the front of the base member E10130. E136, and a plate-like rear plate E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 1544).
The first slope portion E10133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally long and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is positioned vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 at a predetermined distance. are placed. Also, the first sloped portion E10133 is formed so as to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. An insertion hole E10133a, a regulation portion E133b (see FIGS. 1551(b) and 1552(b)), and a groove portion E10133c are formed in the first slope portion E10133.

A plurality (four in this embodiment) of cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the sorting passage E150 and a cover E10202 are arranged on the first inclined plane E10133.
The cover E10202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201, and a hole substantially the same or slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion hole E10133a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E10133a. be done.
The insertion hole E10133a is formed to have a larger width (opening) in the front-rear direction than the insertion hole E133a in the seventy-sixth embodiment. As a result, even when the distribution passage E150 (see FIG. 1546) is displaced (reciprocated) in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) and displaced (reciprocated) in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction), It is possible to suppress contact between the insertion hole E10133a and the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 1551(a)).
The groove portion E10133c is formed in a shape in which curves are combined when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first slope portion E10133. A pair of grooves E10133c are formed on both sides in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) across the insertion hole E10133a. Thereby, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) and in the front-rear direction ( arrow FB direction). As a result, in the process of displacing the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced forward (arrow F direction side) and backward (arrow F direction). It is possible to create a mode in which the ball is displaced in the direction B)), and the number of changes (changes) in the direction in which the ball is likely to move (flow down, roll) can be increased.

Since the engaging portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engaging recess E153a (see FIG. 1551(a)), the first transmission member E194 moves in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The distribution passage E150 is non-parallel to the displacement (reciprocating motion), that is, even when displaced (reciprocating motion) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the engagement between the engaging recess E153a and the engaging portion E194c can be maintained.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1565(a) and 1554, the sorting passage E11150 in the eighty-sixth embodiment will be described.
In the 77th embodiment, the case where the distribution passage E2150 is rotated with the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as the rotation axis with respect to the plane portion E2133 was described, but in the 86th embodiment, the plane portion E2133 The distribution passage E11150 is rotated with the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) as the rotation axis. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1565(a) is a front perspective view of the sorting passage E11150 in the eighty-sixth embodiment. The distribution passage E11150 is formed in the same manner as the distribution passage E2150 except that the number and the positions of the support portions E2150b of the distribution passage E2150 in the seventy-seventh embodiment are different. Descriptions other than E11150b are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1565(a), the support portion E11150b of the distribution passage E11150 is formed so as to protrude from the lower surface of the distribution passage E11150 on the central passage E160 side toward the central passage E160. The support portion E11150b is arranged substantially in the center of the sorting passage E11150 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
In the support portion E11150b, an insertion hole substantially equivalent to the insertion hole formed in the support portion E2150b, that is, an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the support shaft E20j is formed in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the support portion E11150b. be.
As a result, in the lower frame E11086b of the eighty-sixth embodiment, the distribution passage E11150 can be rotated with respect to the plane portion E2133 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) as a rotation axis. Specifically, the curved portion E131 side of the distribution passage E11150 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) using the axis of the insertion hole formed in the support portion E11150b as a rotation axis. As a result, a velocity component in the front-rear direction can be imparted to the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface E2151 of the distribution passage E11150, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be diversified. As a result, it is possible to prevent monotonous changes in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball, thereby improving the interest of the game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1565(b) to 1565(e), distribution passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 in the eighty-seventh to 90th embodiments will be described. The 87th to 90th embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 1542 as appropriate.

In the seventy-sixth embodiment, the protrusion E151 is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage E150. , E14150 and E15150 have various shapes. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Fig. 1565(b) is a view of the sorting passage E12150 in the eighty-seventh embodiment when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E12150, and Fig. 1565(c) is a diagram of the sorting passage E13150 in the eighty-eighth embodiment. 1565(d) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the distribution passage E12150 in the eighty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 1565(e) is a view in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage E13150 in the 90th embodiment FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of passage E13150; 1565(d) and 1565(e) correspond to the cross section taken along line MDCXLa-MDCXLa in FIG. Also, since the projections E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 are regularly arranged on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, only some of them are illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1565(b), the protrusion E12151 of the sorting passage E12150 in the eighty-seventh embodiment is formed so as to protrude from the upper surface of the sorting passage E12150 in a spherical shape. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E12150 can be moved (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the protrusion E12151, and the ball is displaced ( Backflow, rolling) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball is changed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.
In addition, the distance between the projections E12151 facing each other is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the ball can be prevented from staying in the sorting passage E12150, and moves along the inclination direction of the sorting passage E12150 from the end of the sorting passage E12150 on the curved portion E131 side toward the end on the central passage E160 side. Can move (flow down, roll) (parallel). As a result, in order to prevent the ball from remaining in the distribution passage E12150, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution passage E12150 in a complicated trajectory, or to displace the distribution passage E12150 at a large displacement amount or displacement speed. It can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 1565(c), the protrusion E13151 of the sorting passage E13150 in the eighty-eighth embodiment protrudes from the upper surface of the sorting passage E13150, and is substantially rhombic (quadrangular) when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E13150. formed into a shape. Further, the protrusion E13151 is formed in such a manner that a part of the quadrangular pyramid on the vertex side is cut off, like the protrusion E151 in the seventy-sixth embodiment. In other words, the cross-sectional area on a plane parallel to the sorting passage E13150 is formed smaller as the distance from the upper surface of the sorting passage E13150 increases.
This makes it possible to omit the linear portion formed along (parallel to) the inclined direction with respect to the protrusion E151 in the 76th embodiment, so that the movement of the ball in the inclined direction on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150 (falling down, rolling) movement) can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to increase the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls in the direction perpendicular to the direction of inclination on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150. As a result, the movement of the ball (falling down, It is possible to increase the number of changes (changes) in the direction of rolling (rolling), thereby improving the interest of the game.
As shown in FIG. 1565(d), the protrusion E14151 of the distribution passage E14150 in the eighty-ninth embodiment is formed to protrude conically from the upper surface of the distribution passage E14150. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E14150 can be moved (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the projection E14151, and the ball can move over the projection E14151. Movement (flowing down, rolling) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball is changed, and to prevent the change in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball by the protrusion E14151 from becoming monotonous. It can be suppressed and the amusement of the game can be improved.
As shown in FIG. 1565(e), the protrusion E15151 of the distribution passage E15150 in the 90th embodiment has its side surface recessed toward the center of the protrusion E15151. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E15150 can easily climb over the protrusion E15151, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball can be diversified. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, the lower frame E16086b in the 91st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1566(a).
In the seventy-ninth embodiment, the projection E151 is formed on the upper surface of the second distribution passage E4150 to change (change) the flowing (rolling) direction of the ball. A ball is flowed (rolled) toward a specific location. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1566(a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E16086b in the 91st embodiment. Note that FIG. 1566(a) illustrates a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the second position.
The lower frame E16086b of the 91st embodiment has the same configuration as the lower frame E4086b of the 79th embodiment except for the second distribution passage E4150. explain.

As shown in FIG. 1566(a), the second distribution passage E16150 is arranged parallel to the distribution passage E150 in a front view. It is disposed with a downward inclination toward E134 (see FIG. 1558(a)). The second distribution passage E16150 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the second distribution passage E16150. It is formed to have substantially the same length in the front-rear direction on the passage E160 side. As a result, in a state where the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the second position, a ball passing through the end of the sorting passage E150 on the side of the central passage E160 can be thrown (guided) to the second sorting passage E16150. In other words, the ball flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (arrow F direction side) or the notch E150a of the distribution passage E150 is thrown (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. can be suppressed.
A guide portion E16154 is erected on the outer edge of the second distribution passage E16150, and a guide notch portion E16154a is formed in the guide portion E16154 by cutting it toward the central passage E160. The guide notch E16154a is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed at a position corresponding to the central passage E160 (construction passage E161) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the ball passing through the guide notch E16154a of the second distribution passage E16150 (crossing the second distribution passage E16150 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) moves to the central passage E160 (construction passage E161, The ball can be thrown (guided and dropped) to the fourth passage ERt4).
In addition, the guide portion E16154 can suppress the ball thrown (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150 from being thrown (guided and dropped) from other than the guide notch portion E16154a, and more reliably the central passage E160 (construction passage) E161, the ball can be thrown (guided and dropped) to the fourth passage ERt4). As a result, the second distribution path E16150 makes it easier for the ball to enter the first winning port 64 (higher probability of winning the first winning port 64) than the distribution path E150.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, that is, in a state where the ball can be thrown (guided) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E16150, the distribution passage E150 The ball passing through the end on the side of the central passage E160 can easily enter the first prize winning port 64 (the probability of winning the first prize winning port 64 is increased), and the amusement of the game can be enhanced (see Fig. 1541). .

On the other hand, the ball flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (arrow F direction side) or the notch E150a of the distribution passage E150 is thrown (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. can be suppressed. As a result, the player can expect the ball to pass through the end of the sorting passage E150 on the side of the central passage E160.
In addition, in the state where the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the first position, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down from the end of the sorting passage E150 from being thrown (guided) to the second sorting passage E16150. As a result, the player can expect that the ball will pass through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the central passage E160 when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position. As a result, the playability can be diversified, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Next, referring to FIG. 1566(b), the lower frame E17086b in the 92nd embodiment will be described.
In the above 80th embodiment, the projection E151 is formed on the upper surface of the third distribution passage E5150 to change (change) the flowing (rolling) direction of the ball, but in the 92nd embodiment, A ball is flowed (rolled) toward a specific position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1566(b) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E17086b in the 92nd embodiment. Note that FIG. 1566(b) illustrates a state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the first position.
The lower frame E17086b of the 92nd embodiment has the same structure as the lower frame E5086b of the 80th embodiment except for the third distribution passage E5150. explain.
As shown in FIG. 1566(b), the third distribution passage E17150 extends along the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also extends in the extending direction ( The cross-sectional shape on a plane including the direction of arrows LR) and the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D). In addition, the third distribution passage E17150 is inclined downward from the rear plate E5137 side (arrow B direction side) toward the interposition member E140 side (arrow F direction side).
A guide portion E17154 is erected on the outer edge of the third distribution passage E17150, and a guide notch portion E17154a is formed in the guide portion E17154 by notching toward the interposition member E140 (arrow F direction). The guide notch E17154a is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed at a position corresponding to the upper hole E162 of the central passage E160 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the ball passing through the guide notch E17154a (crossing the second distribution passage E16150 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR)) is moved to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4) or the central passage E135b. Can throw (guide, drop) to (seventh passage ERt7).

In addition, the guide portion E17154 can suppress the ball thrown (guided) to the third distribution passage E17150 from being thrown (guided and dropped) from other than the guide notch portion E17154a, thereby more reliably The ball can be thrown (guided and dropped) to the passage ERt4) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). As a result, the third distribution path E17150 makes it easier for the ball to enter the first winning port 64 (higher probability of winning the first winning port 64) than the distribution path E150.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the ball passes through the central passage E160 side end of the distribution passage E150 and is thrown (guided) to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the third distribution passage E17150. The ball can easily enter the first winning port 64 (increase the probability of winning the first winning port 64), and the interest in the game can be enhanced (see FIG. 1541).
In addition, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the ball can be thrown (guided) from the third distribution passage E17150 to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4), and the distribution passage E150 is at the first position. In the arranged state, the ball can be thrown (guided) from the third distribution passage E17150 to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). That is, the ball can easily enter the first winning port 64 (increase the probability of winning the first winning port 64) regardless of whether the distribution path E150 is arranged at the first position or the second position.
On the other hand, a ball that passed through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the central passage E160 but was not thrown (guided) to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) and the third distribution passage E17150, that is, the second slope A ball thrown (guided) to the portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) is made difficult to enter the first winning hole 64 (lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64). As a result, in addition to the ball passing through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the central passage E160, the ball is thrown (guided) to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the third distribution passage E17150. can be expected. As a result, the playability can be diversified, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, the center frame F86 in the 93rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1567 to 1584. FIG.
FIG. 1567 is a front view of the game board F13 in the 93rd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1567, the center frame F86 is configured in a shape that can be fitted into the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1288) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. It has an upper frame F86a and a lower frame F86b.
The upper frame F86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 1567) and left and right (left side and right side in FIG. 1567) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1288) of the base plate 60. 1567) along the inner edge of the window portion 60a of 60. As shown in FIG. The third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1425) is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame F86a and the lower frame F86b.
Note that the upper frame F86a is a part of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1567) inner edge of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, that is, the lower side The portion where the frame F86b is disposed) is omitted, and the portions other than the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above-described embodiments (see FIG. 1425).

Next, the lower frame F86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 1568 to 1569 in addition to FIG. FIG. 1568 is a front perspective view of the lower frame F86b, and FIG. 1569 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame F86b. 1568 to 1569, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the illustration of the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame F86b to the base plate 60 is omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 1568 to 1584 as well.
As shown in FIGS. 1567 to 1569, the lower frame F86b has a first passage FRt1 formed so that the ball can move (flow down, roll), and the ball guided through the first passage FRt1 moves ( The second passage FRt2 and the pair of third passages FRt3 that flow down and roll), and the second passage FRt2 and the third passage that the ball guided on one end side of the second passage FRt2 or the pair of third passages FRt3 moves (flows down and rolls). 4 passages FRt4, the other end side of a pair of third passages FRt3 or a fifth passage FRt5 in which a ball guided through the fourth passages FRt4 moves (flows down or rolls), and a ball guided through the fifth passages FRt5 6th passage FRt6 where the ball flows down, 7th passage FRt7 where the ball guided through the first winning port 64 moves (flows down and rolls), and the ball guided through the 5th passage FRt5 passes through the sixth passage FRt6 an inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1570) formed as an opening for guiding (inflow, ball throwing) to, and an outlet FOPout1 formed as an opening for the ball guided through the sixth passage FRt6 to flow out to the game area. , and an outlet FOPout2 formed as an opening through which the ball guided through the seventh path FRt7 flows out to the game area.
The pair of third passages FRt3 are arranged in line (plane) symmetry (horizontal symmetry in FIG. 1567) with respect to the center of the game board F13 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567).
An upper frame passage FRt0 is provided in the upper frame F86a (see FIG. 1567). The upper frame passage FRt0 is a passage that guides balls flowing down the game area, and the upstream end of the first passage FRt1 communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt0.

That is, a ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage FRt0 from the game area flows (entered) from the upper frame passage FRt0 into the first passage FRt1 of the lower frame F86b via the upstream end of the first passage FRt1. be done. A ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage FRt0 from the game area may flow (entered) from the upper frame passage FRt0 into the first passage FRt1 or the fifth passage FRt5 of the lower frame F86b.
Here, the outflow port FOPout1, which is the exit of the sixth passage FRt6 (the opening through which the balls flow out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize winning port 64 . Therefore, the ball passing through the inflow port FOPf1 (see FIG. 1570) of the fifth path FRt5 and distributed (guided) from the fifth path FRt5 to the sixth path FRt6 easily enters the first winning port 64 ( The probability of winning in the first winning port 64 is high).
In the fifth passage FRt5, there are two different positions in the width direction of the game board F13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567) with respect to the first prize winning port 64. ) is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that is inclined downward. Therefore, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the outflow surface F112b of the fifth passage FRt5 has a high probability of flowing out to the game area, and as a result, it is difficult to enter the first winning port 64 (the above-described inflow port FOPf1 The probability of winning the first winning port 64 is lower than that of the balls that pass through and are distributed from the fifth passage FRt5 to the sixth passage FRt6).
Further, an undulation F112a is formed in the fifth passage FRt5, and an outflow surface F112b is formed at the bottom of the undulation F112a. Also, the top of the undulation F112a is inclined downward toward the inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1570). Therefore, in the fifth passage FRt5, the ball distributed to a position different from the apex of the undulation F112a and moved (falling down, rolling) along the extension direction of the fifth passage FRt5 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567) is It is easier to flow out to the game area from the outflow surface F112b than to be guided (thrown or flow down) to the sixth path FRt6 (difficult to enter the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, the ball distributed from above the top of the undulation F112a to the top of the undulation F112a is likely to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the sixth passage FRt6 along the downward slope toward the inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1570). (The probability of winning the first prize winning port 64 is high).
The first passage FRt1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 1567) in order to guide the ball guided through the first passage FRt1 to the second passage FRt2 and the third passage FRt3. A first outflow surface F114a and a second outflow surface F114b are formed (arranged) as concave surfaces. The second outflow surface F114b is formed (arranged) at two positions different from the first outflow surface F114a in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567) of the game board F13.
In addition, undulations are formed in the first passage FRt1, the second outflow surface F114b is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and the first outflow surface F114a is formed at the top of the undulations. Therefore, the ball distributed to the first passage FRt1 is more likely to flow out from the second outflow surface F114b to the third passage FRt3 than to be thrown from the first outflow surface F114a to the second passage FRt2.
A second passage through hole F171b (see FIG. 1574) is formed (arranged) in the second passage FRt2 to guide the ball guided through the second passage FRt2 to the fourth passage FRt4. The second passage through hole F171b is arranged at a position overlapping the first distribution hole F161a of the fourth passage FRt4 in top view. As a result, the balls distributed to the second passage FRt2 easily pass through the first distribution hole F161a of the fourth passage FRt4.

The fourth passage FRt4 has a first sorting hole F161a and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) second sorting holes F161b for guiding the balls guided through the fourth passage FRt4 to the fifth passage FRt5. are formed (arranged) respectively.
The first distribution hole F161a is formed (arranged) above the top of the undulation F112a of the fifth path FRt5, and the plurality of second distribution holes F161b are arranged in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567) of the game board F13 in the fifth direction. They are arranged respectively between the top and bottom (outflow surface F112b) of the undulations F112a of the passage FRt5.
Therefore, the ball that has passed through the first sorting hole F161a moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope of the undulations F112a toward the inlet FOPf1 (see FIG. 1570) in the fifth passage FRt5. It is possible to easily guide (throw the ball, flow down) to the passage FRt6 (in this embodiment, it is possible to almost certainly make the ball easily enter the first winning hole 64). Therefore, the ball distributed to the second passage FRt2 is easily guided (thrown and flowed down) to the sixth passage FRt6.
On the other hand, the balls that have passed through the plurality of second distribution holes F161b are distributed from the top of the undulations F112a to the bottom (outflow surface F112b) along the extending direction of the fifth passage FRt5 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567) in the fifth passage FRt5. It moves (flows down, rolls) toward and is likely to flow out to the game area from the outflow surface F112b (in this embodiment, it is difficult to make the ball enter the first winning port 64).

The third passage FRt3 has a third passage outflow surface F131a and a third passage through hole F131d for sorting (guiding) the balls guided through the third passage FRt3 to the fourth passage FRt4 or the fifth passage FRt5. formed (arranged).
The third passage outflow surface F131a is formed on the fourth passage FRt4 side in the extension direction of the third passage FRt3, and the third passage through hole F131d is on the opposite side of the fourth passage FRt4 (third passage outflow surface F131a). formed in Further, the third passage through-hole F131d is formed at different positions in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567) of the game board F13 with respect to the top and bottom of the undulation F112a of the fifth passage FRt5. Therefore, the ball passing through the third passage through-hole F131d and distributed to the fifth passage FRt5 moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction of the fifth passage FRt5 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567).
In addition, undulations are formed in the third passage FRt3, and the apex of the undulations is located on the fourth passage FRt4 side of the lowest position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 1567) of the second outflow surface F114b of the first passage FRt1. placed in Therefore, the ball sorted (guided) to the third passage FRt3 is distributed (guided) from the third passage outflow surface F131a to the fourth passage FRt4, and is distributed (guided) from the third passage through hole F131d to the fifth passage FRt5. It is easy to be assigned (guided) to.
A movable passage F193 that is displaced (rotated) by the weight of the ball is disposed in the seventh passage FRt7 (see FIG. 1581). The effect means F120 operates in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the movable path F193, so that the player can visually recognize that the ball has been guided to the seventh path FRt7 (the ball has entered the first winning hole 64). It can be done easily.

The lower frame F86b is provided with a displacement member F130 that is displaced (rotated) by the weight of the ball and a fixed path F140 that interlocks with the movement of the displacement member F130. Note that the pair of blocking portions F143a of the fixed passage F140 are arranged inside the edge of the inlet FOPf1 in front view (see FIG. 1578), and the ball that moves (flows down or rolls) in the fifth passage FRt5 is It is difficult to pass through the inflow port FOPf1 (difficult to be distributed to the sixth passage FRt6). In other words, the pair of blocking portions F143a are disposed at positions that easily prevent the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the fifth passage FRt5 from passing through the inlet FOPf1.
The displacement member F130 operates when the ball guided to the third passage FRt3 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the third passage through hole F131d. The fixed passage F140 is displaced in conjunction with the operation of the displacement member F130, and after the operation, the pair of blocking portions F143a are displaced outward from the edge of the inlet FOPf1 in a front view (see FIG. 1579). .
In the present embodiment, the cut-off portion F143a of the fixed passage F140 is placed inside the edge of the inlet FOPf1. are also displaced outwardly, it is defined that the definite passage F140 opens the inlet FOPf1.
Therefore, in a state where the fixed passage F140 opens the inflow port FOPf1 by moving (flowing down, rolling) the balls distributed to the third passage FRt3 toward the third passage through hole F131d (see FIG. 1579), The pair of blocking portions F143a are displaced in a direction in which the distance between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other is increased. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the fifth passage FRt5 is easily guided (thrown, flowed down) to the sixth passage FRt6 through the inlet FOPf1 (easy to enter the first prize winning port 64). .

In the state in which the fixed passage F140 blocks the inflow port FOPf1 (see FIG. 1578), the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) from the third passage outflow surface F131a of the third passage FRt3 to the fourth passage FRt4 is the fourth The probability of passing through the first distribution hole F161a of the passage FRt4 is that the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) from the third passage through hole F131d of the third passage FRt3 to the fifth passage FRt5 passes through the inlet FOPf1 of the fifth passage FRt5. It is set higher than the probability of passing. Therefore, the ball distributed to the third passage FRt3 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the third passage outflow surface F131a rather than the third passage through hole F131d, passes through the inflow port FOPf1, and passes through the sixth passage. It is easy to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to FRt 6 (easy to win in the first winning hole 64).
In this way, the lower frame F86b in this embodiment distributes (guides) the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extending direction of the first passage FRt1 to the second passage FRt2. , the first winning port 64 can be easily won (in the present embodiment, the ball can be almost certainly easily won in the first winning port 64).
Further, in a state where the fixed passage F140 blocks the inflow port FOPf1 (see FIG. 1578), the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) along the extending direction of the first passage FRt1 is distributed to the third passage FRt3. (Guided) and then distributed (guided) from the third passage outflow surface F131a to the fourth passage FRt4, compared to the case of being distributed (guided) from the third passage through-hole F131d to the fifth passage FRt5. can also easily win a prize in the first prize opening 64.例文帳に追加
Further, in a state in which the ball is distributed (guided) from the third passage through hole F131d to the fifth passage FRt5 and is moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extending direction of the fifth passage FRt5, the fifth passage through hole F131d The ball that follows the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) in the passage FRt5 moves (flows down, rolls) the third passage FRt3 toward the third passage through hole F131d (the displacement member F130 is operated, and the determined passage F140 opens the inflow port FOPf1), thereby guiding the ball moving through the fifth passage FRt5 (preceding the ball moving through the third passage FRt3 toward the third passage through hole F131d) to the sixth passage FRt6. (Throwing the ball, flowing down) can be made easier (the winning of the first prize opening 64 can be made easier).

Therefore, even if the ball does not pass through the first sorting hole F161a of the fourth path FRt4 (the ball has a low probability of entering the first winning hole 64), the displacement member F130 is displaced (rotated) (the determined path F140 By opening the inflow port FOPf1), the ball can be easily guided (thrown and flowed down) to the sixth passage FRt6 (probability of winning the first prize winning port 64 is increased). This makes the player aware of the presence or absence of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction of the fifth path FRt5. , can enhance the interest of the game.
1570 to 1577 in addition to FIGS. 1568 to 1569, the detailed configuration of the lower frame F86b will be described.
FIG. 1570 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame F86b, and FIG. 1571 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame F86b. Fig. 1572(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the determination passage F140, Fig. 1572(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the driving means F180, and Fig. 1573(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the determination passage F140. FIG. 1573(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the driving means F180. 1574 is a top view of the lower frame F86b, FIG. 1575 is a front view of the lower frame F86b, and FIG. 1576 is a rear view of the lower frame F86b. Figure 1577(a) is a side view of the lower frame F86b viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIVa in Figure 1575, and Figure 1577(b) is a side view of the lower frame F86b viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIVb in Figure 1575. FIG. 1577(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame F86b taken along line MDCLXIVc-MDCLXIVc in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 1568 to 1577, the lower frame F86b includes a passage member F110, an effect means F120 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front plate F111 of the passage member F110, and an effect means F120. A pair of displacement members F130 displaceably (rotatably) engaged (supported) by the means F120 and arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the standing wall portion F113 of the passage member F110, and the back surface of the effect means F120. A fixed passage F140 arranged on the side, a rear member F150 arranged on the rear side of the fixed passage F140, and fixed to the rear member F150 and arranged on the front side of the standing wall portion F113 of the passage member F110. a distribution passage F160, a second passage member F170 fixed to the distribution passage F160 and arranged on the front side of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110, and a rear member F150 arranged on the back side and a driving means F180.

An outflow port FOPout1 and a lower hole F121a are formed in the passage member F110 and the effect means F120, respectively, and the passage portion F141b of the fixed passage F140 is inserted through the outflow port FOPout1 and the lower hole F121a. A first cutout portion F113b and an upper hole F121b are formed in the passage member F110 and the effect means F120, respectively, and a fixed portion F162 of the distribution passageway F160 is inserted through the first cutout portion F113b and the upper hole F121b.
The displacement member F130 is displaceably (rotatably) engaged (supported) by the effect means F120. The connecting member F145 of the fixed passage F140 is non-rotatably engaged (fixed) with the displacing member F130, and the displacing (rotating) of the displacing member F130 displaces (rotates) the connecting member F145. As a result, the opening/closing member F143 (blocking portion F143a) of the fixed passage F140 opens the inlet FOPf1.
In addition, the driving means F180 is engaged with the movable member F122 of the effect means F120, and the driving means F180 drives the movable member F122 to reciprocate in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
A rear member F150 is fastened and fixed to the passage member F110 by tapping screws. The effect means F120, the fixed path F140, the distribution path F160, and the drive means F180 are fastened and fixed to the back member F150 by tapping screws, and the second path member F170 is fastened and fixed to the distribution path F160 by tapping screws. With these, the lower frame F86b is configured as one (single) unit (see FIGS. 1568 and 1569).

A seventh passage F190 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the passage member F110 and the front side (arrow F direction side) of the effect means F120.
In the lower frame F86b, the passage member F110, the rear member F150, the distribution passage F160, and the second passage member F170 are made of a light-transmissive resin material (that is, transparent to allow the rear member and the sphere to be seen through), The effect means F120, the displacement member F130, the fixed path F140 and the driving means F180 are made of colored resin material. Also, the seventh passage F190 is made of a light-transmissive resin material.
The upper end of the wall portion F132 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the displacement member F130 is formed lower than the upper end of the ball that moves (flows down or rolls) the displacement member F130. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball moving from the first path FRt1 to the seventh path FRt7, and the movement of the displacement member F130, the effect means F120, and the fixed path F140 can be visually recognized, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be enhanced.
The rendering means F120, the displacement member F130, and the fixed path F140 are made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and the front surface thereof may be painted or attached with a seal. good.

On the other hand, in the lower frame F86b, the effect means F120 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the driving means F180 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or is painted). The driving means F180 is made invisible to the player. The driving means F180 may be configured such that the driving means F180 can be visually recognized by the player by forming the effect means F120 from a light-transmissive resin material.
The passage member F110 is for forming the first passage FRt1 and the fifth passage FRt5. and an upright wall portion F113 extending vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the end on the back side (direction of arrow B) of the lower passage F112; and a pair of fastening portions F115 projecting vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the ends of the lower and upper passages F112 and F114 on both left and right sides.
A first passage FRt1 is formed by a space defined by the back member F150, the vertical wall portion F113, and the upper passage F114, and a fifth passage FRt5 is formed by a space defined by the front plate F111, the lower passage F112, and the vertical wall portion F113. It is formed.
The front plate F111 is a part for suppressing the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112 from flowing out to the game area, and extends in the left and right direction (arrow LR direction). and inclined portions that are inclined upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U) outward from both left and right sides of the central portion. The upper end of the inclined portion of the front plate F111 is formed vertically above the upper surface of the lower passage F112. As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112 can contact the rear surface of the inclined portion of the front plate F111, and moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112. Outflow of the ball to the play area is suppressed.

A plurality of insertion holes F111a are formed in the thickness direction of the front plate F111 along the outer edge of the front plate F111. The lower frame F86b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole F111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60 .
In the center of the front plate F111, an outlet FOPout1 is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 1567). The outflow port FOPout1 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is slightly larger than the outer shape of a sphere. As described above, the outflow port FOPout1 is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the sixth passage FRt6 flows out (flows down) to the game area.
The front plate F111 has an overhang F111b vertically upwardly projecting from the outflow port FOPout1 (in the direction of the arrow U). In addition, a notch portion F111c whose shape in front view is substantially the same as the shape of the outflow surface F112b of the lower passage F112 is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the outflow surface F112b. The projecting portion F111b suppresses the outflow of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F112 to the game area, and the ball is distributed to the fifth passage FRt5 by passing through the cutout portion F111c. is flowed (flowed down) to the game area.
The lower passage F112 is a part for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the vertical wall portion F113 (arrow B direction). Further, the lower passage F112 is formed so as to be inclined downward from both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward the center. As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the lower passage F112 can be swung (moved, rolled) in the left-right direction while being brought into contact with the vertical wall portion F113.

In the lower passage F112, an undulation F112a is formed at a position on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the inlet FOPf1, and the bottom of the undulation F112a, in other words, extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). A pair of outflow surfaces F112b are formed (arranged) as concave surfaces at the boundary between the surface formed to slope downward as the flow progresses and the undulations F112a. The undulations F112a are inclined downward in the left-right direction from the top of the undulations F112a and inclined downward toward the rear side (arrow B direction side, inlet FOPf1 side). On the other hand, the outflow surface F112b is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side).
Therefore, a ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the undulation F112a from above the top of the undulation F112a (in the direction of arrow U) moves toward the back side of the top of the undulation F112a (the direction of the arrow B, the inlet FOPf1 side). (falls down, rolls), passes through the inlet FOPf1 (flows into the inlet FOPf1), and is easily guided (thrown, flows down) to the sixth passage FRt6. On the other hand, a ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to a position different from the top of the undulation F112a moves (flows down or rolls) toward the outflow surface F112b and tends to flow out from the outflow surface F112b into the game area.
The vertical wall portion F113 is a portion for connecting the lower passage F112 and the upper passage F114. The upright wall portion F113 is formed with a bulging portion F113a at a position on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the undulation F112a of the lower passage F112. drilled in the plate thickness direction).
The bulging portion F113a is formed to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, when the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F112 while contacting the vertical wall portion F113 passes through the undulations F112a, the undulations F112a A velocity component toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) can be imparted to the passing ball. As a result, the ball passing through the undulation F112a can be made difficult to be guided (thrown and flowed down) to the sixth passage FRt6 (made difficult to flow into the inlet FOPf1).

The size of the inlet FOPf1 in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) is larger than the outer shape of the sphere, more specifically, approximately three times the outer shape of the sphere. A pair of opening/closing members F143 (blocking portions F143a) of the fixed passage F140 are provided in a region surrounded by the edges of the inlet FOPf1 in a front view, except for the substantially center in the left-right direction. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F112 is less likely to be guided (thrown, flow down) to the sixth passage FRt6.
The space between the pair of opening/closing members F143 facing each other is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and the ball that has passed through the space between the pair of opening/closing members F143 facing each other (flowed into the space between the opening/closing members F143 facing each other) passes through the sixth passage FRt6. It is guided to (throwing the ball, flowing down).
A first notch portion F113b that is notched upward is formed on the inner peripheral surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the inlet FOPf1, and the inner peripheral surface on the upper side of the first notch portion F113b is formed. is formed with a second notch F113c that is notched upward. In addition, a pair of insertion holes F113d are formed in the plate thickness direction (drilled in the plate thickness direction) in the vertical wall portions F113 on both left and right end sides of the inlet FOPf1.
The first notch F113b is a notch through which the fixing portion F162 of the distribution passage F160 is inserted, and the second notch F113c is a notch through which the fixing portion F172 of the second passage member F170 is inserted. . The pair of insertion holes F113d are holes through which the shaft F133 of the displacement member F130 is inserted.

The upper end of the vertical wall portion F113 is formed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the upper passage F114. As a result, the ball that moves (flows down and rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F114 can be brought into contact with the rear surface of the vertical wall portion F113, and the ball that moves (flows down and rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F114 is lowered. It is possible to suppress outflow (flow down) to the side passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5).
Further, the standing wall portion F113 has a third notch portion F113e and a fourth notch portion F113f whose shape in front view is substantially the same as the shape of the first outflow surface F114a and the second outflow surface F114b of the upper passage F114. They are formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first outflow surface F114a and the second outflow surface F114b.
By passing through the third notch F113e, the ball guided through the first passage FRt1 is guided (thrown or flowed out) to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) and passes through the fourth notch F113f. As a result, the ball guided through the first passage FRt1 is guided (thrown and flowed out) to the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3).
The upper passage F114 is a portion for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is formed so as to slope downward from both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward the center.

An undulation is formed substantially in the center of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and the top of the undulation is inclined downward toward the left-right direction. In addition, a first outflow surface F114a is formed (arranged) as a concave surface inclined downward toward the second passage member F170 side (front side, arrow F direction side) at the apex of the undulation, and the bottom of the undulation, In other words, a pair of concave surfaces formed downwardly inclined toward the displacement member F130 (front side, arrow F direction side) is formed at the boundary between the surface formed downwardly inclined in the left-right direction and the undulating surface. A second outflow surface F114b is formed (arranged).
Therefore, the ball distributed (guided) to the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) passes from the first outflow surface F114a through the third cutout portion F113e to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2). The ball is more likely to be guided (thrown or flowed down) from the second outflow surface F114b to the displacement member F130 (the third passage FRt3) through the fourth notch F113f than to be guided to the second outflow surface F114b.
Further, the upper passage F114 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back member F150 (arrow B direction side). As a result, the ball swinging (flowing down, rolling) along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) passes through the first outflow surface F114a or the second outflow surface F114b. This makes it possible to lengthen the time required for the ball to be guided (thrown or flowed down) to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) or the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3). As a result, the time for which the player expects to be sorted (guided) to the second path member F170 (second path FRt2) can be lengthened, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
A plurality of (two in this embodiment) insertion holes F115a are formed in the plate thickness direction in the fastening portion F115. A back member F150 is fixed (arranged) to the member F110.

The effect means F120 is for making it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball has been guided to the seventh passage FRt7 (won to the first prize winning port 64), and includes a fixed member F121 and its fixed member F121. below (arrow D direction) and on the back side (arrow B direction side), and fixed member F121 and movable member F122 on the back side (arrow B direction side). and a colored member F123.
The fixing member F121 is formed of a main body portion extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) and protruding portions protruding downward (direction of arrow D) from both left-right direction end sides of the main body portion. be. The movable member F122 is formed of a main body portion extending in the left-right direction, and projecting portions projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from both left-right direction end sides of the main body portion. An opening is formed in a space surrounded by the main body and the protrusion of the fixed member F121 and the main body and the protrusion of the movable member F122.
Although the details will be described later, the movable member F122 is arranged so as to be able to reciprocate in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the size of the opening formed by the fixed member F121 and the movable member F122 can be changed. The movable member F122 is arranged on the rear side (the arrow B direction side) of the fixed member F121, thereby suppressing contact between the fixed member F121 and the movable member F122.
The fixing member F121 has a lower hole F121a arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), an upper hole F121b arranged above the lower hole F121a (direction of arrow U), A pair of insertion holes F121c arranged on both left and right sides of the upper hole F121b are formed as openings (drilled in the plate thickness direction). A pair of restricting pieces F121d (see FIG. 1578) are formed on the rear surface of the fixing member F121 at positions on the left-right direction central side of the pair of insertion holes F121c.

The lower hole F121a and the upper hole F121b are formed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the inlet FOPf1 of the passage member F110 and the first notch F113b, respectively. An opening/closing member F143 of the fixed passage F140 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the fixing member F121 through the lower hole F121a. Also, the fourth passage portion F161 of the distribution passage F160 is arranged on the front side of the standing wall portion F113 of the passage member F110 via the upper hole F121b.
The pair of insertion holes F121c are holes for inserting the shaft F133 of the displacement member F130, and are drilled below the second outflow surface F114b of the passage member F110 (in the direction of the arrow D). Bushes (not shown) are provided at the front side (arrow F direction side) and rear side (arrow B direction side) ends of the insertion hole F121c. The shaft F133 is rotatably engaged (supported) with the fixed member F121 through these bushes.
A pair of regulating pieces F121d is a part for regulating the displacement (rotation) of the fixed path F140 (connecting member F145), and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the weight supporting portion F145c of the connecting member F145 (see FIG. 1578). .
The movable member F122 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and more specifically, the size of the movable member F122 in the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR) is formed to be approximately 20 times larger than the outer shape of the sphere. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the movement (displacement) of the movable member F122 compared to a ball.

The movable member F122 is engaged with the driving means F180, and the driving means F180 drives the movable member F122 to reciprocate in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The driving means F180 is driven when the ball is guided to the seventh passage FRt7. Therefore, by reciprocating the movable member F122 in the vertical direction, the player can easily see that the ball has been guided to the seventh path FRt7 (the ball has entered the first winning hole 64).
The coloring member F123 is for making the driving means F180 invisible to the player, and is formed of a colored plate-like body. The lower end of the coloring member F123 is formed below the upper end of the main body of the movable member F122 when positioned at the lowest position (in the direction of arrow D).
Also, the colored member F123 is colored in a color different from that of the movable member F122. As a result, the reciprocating motion of the movable member F122 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows UD) can be easily made visible to the player, and the ball distributed (guided) to the lower frame F86b is guided to the seventh passage FRt7. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball has entered the first prize winning port 64.例文帳に追加
The displacement member F130 operates (displaces and rotates) the opening/closing member F143 of the fixed passage F140, and includes a passage portion F131 and a wall portion F132 disposed at the front end of the passage portion F131. . A third passage FRt3 is formed by a space defined by the passage portion F131, the wall portion F132, and the standing wall portion F113 of the passage member F110. A shaft F133 is disposed (fixed) on the displacement member F130 so as to extend in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The passage portion F131 distributes the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) from the second outflow surface F114b of the upper passage F114 into a passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) or a lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110. It is a portion for distributing (guiding) to one another, and is formed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).
The passage portion F131 is formed with an undulation that is inclined downward as it goes in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and the distribution passage F160 side (left-right direction center side) from the top of the undulation is the third passage outflow surface described above. It is formed as F131a. A rolling surface F131b is formed on the distribution passage F160 side (opposite side to the third passage outflow surface F131a, left and right direction both sides) from the top of the undulation, and the third passage outflow surface F131a and the rolling surface F131b are formed. A boundary is formed as the crest of the relief. Further, the passage portion F131 is formed with a recess F131c recessed downward (in the direction of the arrow D) at the tip of the rolling surface F131b.
In the direction in which the passage portion F131 extends (the direction of the arrows LR), a swing is provided at a position facing the third passage outflow surface F131a (a position that is closer to the center in the left-right direction than the end of the third passage outflow surface F131a). The rear side (arrow B direction side) of the branch passage F160 is arranged. As a result, the ball distributed (guided) from the third passage outflow surface F131a can be guided (thrown or flowed down) to a position (off-center position) different from the center of the distribution passage F160.
The width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the passage portion F131 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the rolling surface F131b gradually increases from the apex of the undulation toward the recessed portion F131c. formed large.

The third passage outflow surface F131a and the rolling surface F131b are each formed to be inclined downward toward the side opposite to the top of the undulation in the extension direction (horizontal direction) of the passage portion F131. Further, the rolling surface F131b is formed to be inclined downward toward the wall portion F132 (arrow F direction side). As a result, the rolling surface F131b can be moved (flowed down, rolled) while the balls distributed (guided) to the rolling surface F131b are brought into contact with the wall portion F132.
The recess F131c is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the above-described third passage through hole F131d is formed (pierced) in the bottom surface F131c1 of the recess F131c. In other words, the bottom surface F131c1 is formed continuously along the periphery of the third passage through hole F131d. The third passage through hole F131d is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the center of the third passage through hole F131d is arranged on the central axis of the recess F131c.
The inner diameter of the recess F131c is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, and the distance between the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c and the inner peripheral surface of the third passage through hole F131d is greater than the radius of the sphere. is also formed small. As a result, the center of gravity of the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the recess F131c can be positioned closer to the center than the inner peripheral surface of the third passage through-hole F131d, and the ball is guided to the recess F131c using its weight. It is possible to displace the (thrown, flow down) ball toward the third passage through-hole F131d.
Also, the recess depth of the recess F131c is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the player can visually recognize the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the concave portion F131c. Further, the bottom surface F131c1 of the concave portion F131c is formed as a flat surface. In other words, the height of the bottom surface F131c1 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is continuously set to be the same along the circumference of the third passage through-hole F131d.

As described above, since the rolling surface F131b is inclined downward toward the wall portion F132 (the direction of the arrow F), the balls that move (flow down or roll) on the rolling surface F131b The ball can be guided (thrown and flowed down) to the concave portion F131c while being brought into contact with the . In other words, the ball can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward an eccentric position (a position different from the central axis) with respect to the central axis of the recess F131c (the third passage through hole F131d).
As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the recess F131c using the centrifugal force acting on the ball moves (flows down, rolls down) along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c (around the third passage through hole F131d). movement). Further, the speed of the ball can be reduced by moving (flowing down or rolling) the ball in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c (around the third passage through hole F131d). As a result, it is possible to delay the ball from flowing into the third passage through-hole F131d and being guided (thrown or flowed down) from the concave portion F131c (time required for the ball to flow into the third passage through-hole F131d can be bulked up).
In addition, in the passage portion F131, connecting portions that protrude downward (arrow D direction side) are formed at positions slightly on both left and right direction (arrow LR direction) sides of the apex of the undulation. A fitting hole F131e formed as a hole having a D-shaped cross section is recessed from the rear surface of the connecting portion toward the front side (arrow F direction side). The fitting hole F131e is a hole for non-rotatably fitting (fixing) the shaft F133.
The wall portion F132 moves (flows down, rolls) on the third passage outflow surface F131a or the rolling surface F131b of the passage portion F131, and moves (flows down, falls) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110. It is a part for suppressing to do.

The wall portion F132 is made of a colored resin material, and the undulations of the passage portion F131 can be made invisible to the player. This allows the player to determine whether the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the passage portion F131 (third path FRt3) is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the third passage outflow surface F131a or the rolling surface F131b. It can be made difficult, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
On the other hand, the distance between the upper end of the wall portion F132 and the upper surface of the passage portion F131 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the player can visually recognize the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the passage portion F131 (the third passage FRt3).
The shaft F133 is made of a metal material and shaped like a rod, and is rotatable to the fixing member F121 via a bush (not shown) in a posture in which the extending direction of the shaft F133 is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). is engaged.
The front end side and the rear end side of the shaft F133 are formed to have outer shapes that match the cross-sectional shape of the fitting hole F131e and the cross-sectional shape of the insertion hole F145a1 formed in the connecting main body portion F145a of the fixed passage F140. The front end side of the shaft F133 is fitted (fixed) in the fitting hole F131e so that the shaft F133 is non-rotatably arranged (supported) in the passage portion F131, and the rear end side of the shaft F133 is fitted in the insertion hole F145a1. As a result, the shaft F133 is non-rotatably arranged (rotatably supported) in the connecting body portion F145a. The displacement member F130 and the fixed path F140 are integrated (formed as one unit) through the axis F133.

The fixed passage F140 is for guiding (throwing, flowing down) the ball that has passed through the inflow port FOPf1 of the passage member F110 (flowed into the inflow port FOPf1) to the first winning port 64, and the sixth passage member F141 and the , a shaft F142 disposed on the sixth passage member F141, an opening/closing member F143 rotatably engaged with the shaft F142, and engaging with the opening/closing member F143 in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR). , a connecting member F145 connecting the sliding member F144 and the shaft F133 of the displacement member F130, and a weight F146 disposed on the connecting member F145.
The sixth passage member F141 includes a mounting portion F141a, a passage portion F141b and a pair of ball receiving portions F141c projecting from the front of the mounting portion F141a, a bearing portion F141d projecting from the back of the mounting portion F141a, A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) fastening portions F141e are provided at both ends of the bearing portion F141d in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR).
The mounting portion F141a is formed of a plate-like body that is approximately rectangular in width when viewed from the front. When the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the sixth passage member F141 comes into contact with the attachment portion F141a, the ball is restricted from being displaced toward the rear side (arrow B direction side).
The passage portion F141b includes a bottom portion F141b1 extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) and a pair of walls projecting upward (direction of arrow U) from both left and right ends of the bottom portion F141b1. and a portion F141b2, and is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. The distance between the facing surfaces of the pair of wall portions F141b2 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and the space defined by the bottom surface portion F141b1 and the pair of wall portions F141b2 forms a sixth passage FRt6.

The passage portion F141b is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the outflow port FOPout1 of the passage member F110. ) is flowed out to the game area (guided to the first winning port 64).
A pair of projections F141b3 are provided on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion F141b1 so as to be spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR). The protrusion F141b3 extends linearly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the upper surface of the protrusion F141b3 is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction). be. In addition, the distance between the facing surfaces of the pair of protrusions F141b3 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the length of the protrusion F141b3 at the front end (dimension in the direction of arrow UD) is equal to the bottom surface portion F141b1. is set to a depth where the sphere does not touch the top surface of
As a result, the ball on the bottom surface portion F141b1 can be positioned at two points (a pair of ridge line portions on the upper end portion of the protrusion F141b3 on the opposite surface side). Therefore, compared to the case where the pair of projections F141b3 are not formed, it is possible to easily keep the moving (flowing down, rolling) position of the ball in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) of the passage portion F141b constant. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the outflow port FOPout1 of the passage member F110 can be easily led to the first winning port 64 (guided).
The ball receiving portion F141c is a portion for guiding (throwing or flowing down) the ball that has passed through the inlet FOPf1 to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6). The ball receiving portion F141c is formed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) and inclined downward from both left-right direction ends toward the center.

The lower surface of the ball receiving portion F141c is disposed in contact with the upper end of the wall portion F141b2 of the passage portion F141b. As a result, the function of forming the sixth passage FRt6 in the wall portion F141b2 and the function of supporting (reinforcing) the ball receiving portion F141c can be combined, and damage to the ball receiving portion F141c can be easily suppressed.
The bearing portion F141d is a portion for supporting the shaft F142, and a concave portion is provided downward (in the direction of arrow D) on the upper surface of the bearing portion F141d. The shaft F142 is supported by the bearing portion F141d by disposing (engaging) the lower end side of the shaft F142 in the concave portion.
The fastening portion F141e is a portion into which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the fixed passage F140 and the back member F150 is screwed. A predetermined space can be formed between the mounting portion F141a and the back member F150 by providing the fastening portion F141e to protrude from the rear surface of the mounting portion F141a. A shaft F142 and a pair of slide members F144 are arranged using the space.
The axis F142 is a rotation axis for displacing (rotating) the opening/closing member F143. The shaft F142 is made of a metal material and has a cylindrical shape.

The opening/closing member F143 is for making it difficult for the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 to flow into the inlet FOPf1. The opening/closing member F143 is composed of a left opening/closing member F143L arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) and a right opening/closing member F143R arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side). The member F143L and the right opening/closing member F143R are arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the pair of ball receiving portions F141c.
The left opening/closing member F143L includes a blocking portion F143a, a connecting portion F143b projecting downward (arrow D direction side) from the rear end of the blocking portion F143a, and a rear side (arrow B direction side) from the lower end of the connecting portion F143b. and a projecting portion F143c projecting from.
The right opening/closing member F143R differs from the left opening/closing member F143L in that the connection portion F143b is omitted, and the projecting portion F143c projects from the upper end of the blocking portion F143a toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). It is formed in line (plane) symmetry (horizontal symmetry in FIG. 1567) with respect to the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1567). Therefore, the parts of the right opening/closing member F143R that are formed symmetrically with the left opening/closing member F143L are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.
The blocking portion F143a is formed of a plate-like body, and the upper end side of the blocking portion F143a is bent toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). A connecting portion F143b is arranged at the rear end of the bent portion of the blocking portion F143a. The blocking part F143a is arranged at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the inlet FOPf1 formed in the passage member F110 when viewed from the front. In other words, the blocking portion F143a is arranged inside the edge of the inlet FOPf1. Therefore, the blocking portion F143a is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5).

The distance between the opposing blocking portions F143a of the pair (the left opening/closing member F143L and the right opening/closing member F143R) is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. This makes it difficult for the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) to flow into the space between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other and into the inflow port FOPf1 (difficult to be guided to the sixth passage FRt6). can).
Also, the cut-off portion F143a is curved in an arc around the axis F142. In other words, the blocking portion F143a is formed in a curved shape that protrudes toward the front side (direction of arrow F) from both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward the central side in the left-right direction.
As a result, the ball in contact with the blocking portion F143a moves (flows down, rolls) along the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110, It can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) can be easily guided (thrown or rolled) to the outflow surface F112b (it can be difficult to be guided to the sixth passage FRt6).
The connecting portion F143b is a portion for suppressing contact between the projecting portion F143c of the left opening/closing member F143L and the projecting portion F143c of the right opening/closing member F143R. By forming the coupling portion F143b on the left opening/closing member F143L, the protrusion F143c formed on the left opening/closing member F143L is arranged below (in the direction of arrow D) the protrusion F143c formed on the right opening/closing member F143R. .

The projecting portion F143c is a portion that is pivotally supported by the shaft F142 and engaged with the slide member F144. A shaft supporting hole F143d is formed on the connecting portion F143b side (front side, arrow F direction side) of the projecting portion F143c. An engagement hole F143e is provided.
The shaft support hole F143d is formed to have an outer diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft F142. By inserting the shaft F142 into the shaft support hole F143d, the left opening/closing member F143L is rotatably engaged ( pivot).
The first engaging portion F144c of the left slide member F144L is inserted (engaged) in the engaging hole F143e. The engaging hole F143e is formed in an elongated hole shape elongated in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from above. More specifically, in a state where the first engaging portion F144c of the left slide member F144L is inserted (engaged) in the engaging hole F143e, a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the engaging hole F143e and the first engaging portion F144c A gap is formed that is larger than the amount of displacement of the protrusion F143c in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) due to the rotation (displacement) of the left opening/closing member F143L.
As a result, when the left slide member F144L is displaced in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), the inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole F143e in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows FB) and the first engagement portion F144c are displaced. It is possible to prevent the rotation (displacement) of the left opening/closing member F143L from being restricted due to contact.

The slide member F144 is for operating (displacement, rotation) the opening/closing member F143. The slide member F144 is composed of a left slide member F144L engaged with the left opening/closing member F143L and a right sliding member F144R engaged with the right opening/closing member F143R.
The left slide member F144L includes a slide main body portion F144a, an extension portion F144b extending from a lower end portion of the slide main body portion F144a on the center side in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward the center side in the left-right direction, A first engaging portion F144c that protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the extension portion F144b, and a second engaging portion F144d that protrudes toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) from the slide body portion F144a. , provided.
In the right slide member F144R, the extension part F144b extends from the upper end part of the center side of the slide main body part F144a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and the first engagement part F144c is downward. It is formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1567) with respect to the center of the game board F13 in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 1567), except for the point that it protrudes in the direction of arrow D). Accordingly, portions of the right slide member F144R that are formed symmetrically with the left slide member F144L are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.
The slide main body portion F144a is formed of a plate-like body, and both end portions in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the slide main body portion F144a are bent toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). Insertion holes F144a1 are formed in the plate thickness direction (direction of arrows LR) at the portions bent to the rear side.

The slide rod F158 of the rear member F150 is inserted (engaged) in the insertion hole F144a1 (see FIG. 1578), whereby the slide member F144 is moved along the extension direction of the slide rod F158 (direction of arrows LR). Displaceably arranged (engaged).
The extension portion F144b formed on the left slide member F144L and the extension portion F144b formed on the right slide member F144R are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the first engaging portion F144c of the right sliding member F144R and the projecting portion F143c of the right opening/closing member F143R are positioned above (arrow U direction). As a result, the first engaging portion F144c and the protruding portion F143c can be arranged at overlapping positions in the vertical direction (the direction of arrows UD), and the degree of freedom in designing the fixed passage F140 (the opening/closing member F143 and the sliding member F144) can be increased. can be improved.
The first engaging portion F144c is a portion that is inserted (engaged) into the engaging hole F143e of the opening/closing member F143, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The left slide member F144L is displaced in the extending direction of the slide rod F158 (the direction of the arrows LR) and pushes the inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole F143e, thereby rotating the opening/closing member F143 about the axis F142.
The second engaging portion F144d is a portion that is inserted (engaged) with the slide engaging portion F145b of the connecting member F145, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. Due to the engagement between the second engaging portion F144d and the sliding engaging portion F145b, the sliding member F144 is displaced in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member F145.

The connecting member F145 is for operating (displacing) the slide member F144. and a weight support portion F145c that protrudes from the body portion F145a toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).
The connecting body portion F145a is formed in a cylindrical shape. An insertion hole F145a1 formed as a hole having a D-shaped cross section is formed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the connection body F145a. The shaft F133 of the displacement member F130 is non-rotatably disposed (fixed) in the insertion hole F145a1, so that the coupling member F145 can be displaced (rotated) in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130.
The slide engagement portion F145b is formed in a columnar shape, and an insertion hole F145b1 through which the second engagement portion F144d of the slide member F144 is inserted (engaged) is formed in the slide engagement portion F145b.
The insertion hole F145b1 is formed in an elongated hole shape elongated in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. Specifically, in a state where the second engaging portion F144d of the slide member F144 is inserted (engaged) in the insertion hole F145b1, the connecting member F145 is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole F145b1 and the second engaging portion F144d. A gap larger than the amount of displacement in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the slide engaging portion F145b due to the displacement (rotation) is formed.

As a result, when the left slide member F144L is displaced in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows LR), the inner circumferential surface of the insertion hole F145b1 in the up-down direction and the second engagement portion F144d of the slide member F144 come into contact with each other and are connected. Restriction of the displacement (rotation) of the member F145 can be suppressed.
The weight support portion F145c is formed in a cylindrical shape recessed from the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F145c is formed on the outer side of the weight F146. It is formed slightly larger than the diameter. By disposing (engaging) the weight F146 on the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F145c, the weight F146 is disposed (supported) on the connecting member F145.
The weight F146 is for adjusting the position of the center of gravity of the connecting member F145, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. By arranging the weight F146 on both sides in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows LR) from the insertion hole F145a1, the center of gravity of the entire connection member F145 and the weight F146 is located on both sides in the left-right direction from the insertion hole F145a1. To position.
The back surface member F150 is for forming the back surface of the lower frame F86b. A pair of first fixing portions F152 projecting toward the direction of arrow F), and a pair of second fixing portions F153 projecting toward the front side above the pair of first fixing portions F152 (direction of arrow U). A pair of fastening portions F154 projecting toward the front side at the center side in the left-right direction of the pair of second fixing portions F153, and a pair projecting toward the front side at the center side in the left-right direction of the pair of fastening portions F154 a first support portion F155, a second support portion F156 protruding toward the front side on the center side in the left-right direction of the pair of first support portions F155, and a rear wall portion F151 from the rear side to the rear side (arrow B direction side ), and a protrusion F157 that protrudes toward. A pair of slide rods F158 are arranged (engaged) with the rear member F150.

The rear wall portion F151 is formed of a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular plate-like body, and has a pair of first relief holes F151a and a lower side (arrow D direction side) than the pair of first relief holes F151a. A pair of second escape holes F151b are formed in the plate thickness direction (drilled in the plate thickness direction). A notch portion F151c is cut upward (in the direction of arrow U) at the lower end of the rear wall portion F151.
The first escape hole F151a is formed larger than the outer shape of the weight support portion F145c of the connecting member F145, and the weight support portion F145c is arranged inside the first escape hole F151a. As a result, the thickness dimension of the lower frame F86b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) can be reduced.
The second escape hole F151b has a semicircular curved portion F151b1 that protrudes toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) and a vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) at the center of the curved portion F151b1 in the left-right direction. direction) and a straight portion F151b2 extending in the direction The curved portion F151b1 is formed to be slightly larger than the external shape of the connecting member F184 of the driving means F180, and is inserted through the second escape hole F151b (curved portion F151b1) to extend the connecting member toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear member F150. F184 is provided.
The straight portion F151b2 is a relief hole for reciprocating the connecting member F184 of the driving means F180 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The upper end of the straight portion F151b2 is formed integrally with the upper end of the curved portion F151b1, and the lower end of the straight portion F151b2 is formed below (in the direction of arrow D) the lower end of the curved portion F151b1. As a result, when the connecting member F184 is displaced downward, the rear wall portion F151 is located on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the connecting member F184 (the curved portion F151b1 is not formed). In this way, by making the curved portion F151b1 formed (perforated) small in the rear wall portion F151, it is possible to easily suppress the entry of foreign matter such as a wire.

The cutout portion F151c is a portion through which a wiring (not shown) electrically connecting the drive motor F181 of the drive means F180 and the switch F192 of the seventh passage F190 is inserted. The switch F192 arranged on the (arrow F direction side) and the drive motor F181 of the driving means F180 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back member F150 are electrically connected.
The first fixing portion F152 is a portion for fastening and fixing the rear member F150 to the base plate 60, and is formed in a quadrangular prism shape. An insertion hole is formed in the first fixing portion F152, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the base plate 60, whereby the rear member F150 is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60. By fixing (arranging) the first fixing portion F152 to the base plate 60 in addition to the front plate F111 of the passage member F110, the posture of the lower frame F86b with respect to the base plate 60 can be stabilized.
In addition, since the first fixing portion F152 is arranged at the lower end of the rear wall portion F151, the distance between the first fixing portion F152 and the front plate F111 can be set large in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). , the posture of the lower frame F86b with respect to the base plate 60 can be further stabilized.
The second fixing portion F153 and the fastening portion F154 are portions for fastening and fixing the rear member F150 to the passage member F110. .

The tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole F115a of the retaining portion F115 is fastened and fixed to the second fixing portion F153, thereby fixing (arranging) the back member F150 to the passage member F110. In addition, the fastening portion F154 is provided with an insertion hole along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and a tapping screw is inserted through the insertion hole to fix the rear member F150 to the passage member F110 ( installed).
The first support portion F155 and the second support portion F156 are portions for supporting the slide rod F158. Through-holes are formed in the first support portion F155 and the second support portion F156 along the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR), respectively. A slide rod F158 is arranged (supported) in the .
Further, in the second support portion F156, an insertion hole F156a is formed along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the second support portion F156. A locking portion F156b is formed to protrude from the front end of the portion F156.
The inner diameter of the insertion hole F156a is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft F142, and the shaft F142 is inserted through the insertion hole F156a. The shaft F142 is supported (engaged) by the bearing portion F141d of the fixed passage F140 and the second support portion F156 (insertion hole F156a), so that the shaft F142 is arranged in the lower frame F86b. The locking portion F156b is a portion that restricts the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F143 of the fixed passage F140.

The projecting portion F157 is a part to which a tapping screw inserted through the guide member F185 of the driving means F180 is fastened and fixed, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The projection portion F157 protrudes from the rear surface of the rear wall portion F151, so that the tightening margin of the tapping screw can be increased.
The slide rod F158 is for displacing the slide member F144 of the fixed path F140 along the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the slide rod F158, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metallic material. In the outer peripheral surface of the slide rod F158, a notch is formed in the radial direction at a position slightly central to the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) from the first support portion F155, and a metal ring is formed in the notch. A shaped C-ring (not shown) is fitted. Thereby, the slide rod F158 is irremovably supported by the first support portion F155 and the second support portion F156.
The slide rod F158 is supported (arranged) by the first support portion F155 and the second support portion F156 in a posture in which the extension direction (axial direction) of the slide rod F158 is along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). be. The slide member F144 is disposed (engaged) with the slide rod F158 by inserting (engaging) the slide rod F158 into the insertion hole F144a1 of the slide member F144.
The distribution passage F160 is a so-called crew for guiding (throwing or flowing down) the ball to different positions in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) according to the plurality of distribution holes formed in the distribution passage F160. It is a device. The distribution passage F160 includes a fourth passage portion F161 and a fixing portion F162 formed by protruding from the rear end of the fourth passage portion F161 toward the rear side (arrow B direction side).

The fourth passage portion F161 has a circular shape when viewed from above, and is recessed from above (in the direction of arrow U) to below (in the direction of arrow D). It is formed in a curved shape that becomes convex toward (arrow D direction). Further, the fourth passage portion F161 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the fixing portion F162 toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side).
As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fourth passage portion F161 is moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the center of the fourth passage portion F161, and at the center of the fourth passage portion F161, It can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side).
A first distributing hole F161a and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) second distributing holes F161b are formed in the plate thickness direction in the recessed bottom surface of the fourth passage portion F161. The first sorting hole F161a and the plurality of second sorting holes F161b are drilled at a position overlapping the lower passage F112 of the passage member F110 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The ball passing through the second distribution hole F161b can be distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5).
The first distribution hole F161a is drilled at a position above (in the direction of arrow U) the top of the undulation F112a of the lower passage F112. The plurality of second distribution holes F161b are located at different positions from the first distribution holes F161a in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR), and are drilled on the front side (directions of arrows F) of the first distribution holes F161a. .

The ball distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) through the first distribution hole F161a is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the top of the undulation F112a, and is then guided (fed) to the vertical wall portion F113. It flows into the inflow port FOPf1 and is easily guided (thrown or flowed down) to the fixed passage F140 (sixth passage FRt6) (it is easy to enter the first prize winning port 64).
The first distribution hole F161a is formed closer to the inflow port FOPf1 (arrow B direction side) of the fourth passage portion F161 than the second distribution hole F161b. As a result, the distance that the ball that has passed through the first sorting hole F161a moves (flows down, rolls) on the top of the undulation F112a can be reduced, and the ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fixed path F140 (sixth path FRt6). It can be done easily.
On the other hand, the ball distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) through the second distribution hole F161b is different from the top of the undulation F112a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Since it is guided to the position (throwing, flowing down), it moves (flowing down, rolling) along the downward slope in the left-right direction from the top of the undulation F112a, and passes through the notch F111c of the front plate F111 to play the game. It is easy to flow out (flow down) to the area (difficult to enter the first winning port 64).
The second distribution hole F161b is formed closer to the game area of the fourth passage portion F161 than the first distribution hole F161a (the direction of the arrow F, the side opposite to the inlet FOPf1). As a result, the distance between the ball passing through the second distribution hole F161b and the inlet FOPf1 can be increased, making it difficult to guide the ball to the inlet FOPf1 (making it easier to guide the ball to the outflow surface F112b of the lower passage F112). .

Therefore, the player can expect that the balls distributed to the distribution path F160 will pass through the first distribution holes F161a rather than the second distribution holes F161b, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.
The fixed portion F162 is for fastening and fixing the distribution passage F160 to the rear member F150. A concave portion is formed in the upper surface of the fixing portion F162 so as to be recessed downward (in the direction of the arrow D), and the fixing portion F172 of the second passage member F170 is inserted (internally fitted) into the concave portion.
The second passage member F170 is for distributing (guiding) the balls guided on the first outflow surface F114a of the upper passage F114 to the distribution passage F160. and a fixing portion F172 protruding toward the back side (arrow B direction side).
The passage portion F171 is a portion where the ball moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the passage portion F171, and is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) from the standing wall portion F113 of the passage member F110. is set. Further, the passage portion F171 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first outflow surface F114a (the third notch portion F113e).

In addition, the passage portion F171 extends toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) and is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side. An upright portion F171a is erected upward (in the direction of arrow U) on the outer edge of the passage portion F171 excluding the contact portion with the upright wall portion F113. Two passages FRt2 are formed.
A second passage through hole F171b slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere is formed at the tip of the passage portion F171. The second passage through hole F171b is formed above the first sorting hole F161a of the sorting passage F160 (in the direction of the arrow U) (at a position where the second passage through hole F171b and the first sorting hole F161a overlap when viewed from above). It is formed). By passing through the second passage through hole F171b, the ball distributed (guided) to the passage portion F171 (second passage FRt2) is guided to the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160.
A pair of protrusions F171c are provided on the upper surface of the passage portion F171 so as to be spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR). The protrusion F171c extends linearly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the upper surface of the protrusion F171c is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction). be. In addition, the distance between the facing surfaces of the pair of projections F171c is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the projection length (dimension in the direction of arrows UD) at the front end of the projections F171c is equal to that of the passage portion F171. is set to a depth where the sphere does not touch the top surface of
As a result, the ball on the passage portion F171 can be positioned at two points (a pair of ridge line portions on the upper end portion of the protrusion F171c on the opposing surface side). Therefore, compared to the case where the pair of protrusions F171c are not formed, it is possible to easily keep the moving (flowing down, rolling) position of the ball in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) of the passage portion F171 constant. This makes it easier to guide the ball that has passed through the second passage through hole F171b to the first sorting hole F161a of the sorting passage F160.

The fixing portion F172 is formed of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped, and the outer shape of the fixing portion F172 is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the inner shape of the recess formed in the fixing portion F162 of the distribution passage F160. The fixing portion F172 is arranged (fixed, internally fitted) in the recess formed in the fixing portion F162, so that the second passage through hole is formed above the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160 (in the direction of arrow U). F171b can be easily arranged (accurately arranged).
Here, for example, when fixing (arranging) the second passage member F170 to the back member F150, the error (assembly tolerance) when fixing the distribution passage F160 and the second passage member F170 to the back member F150 and the back member Due to factors such as the processing accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the F150, the distribution passage F160, and the second passage member F170, the second passage through-hole F171b is above the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160 (in the direction of the arrow U). ) (in top view, the center of the second passage through hole F171b and the center of the first distribution hole F161a do not match). In this case, there is a risk that the balls that have passed through the second passage through hole F171b will not pass through the first distribution hole F161a and will be distributed (guided) to the second distribution hole F161b.
On the other hand, by fixing (arranging) the second passage member F170 to the distribution passage F160, the second passage through hole of the second passage member F170 is arranged above the first distribution hole F161a (in the direction of the arrow U). The ball F171b can be easily arranged (accurately arranged), and the ball guided to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) passes through the first distribution hole F161a and enters the fixed passage F140 (sixth passage FRt6). It is easy to guide (throw, flow down) to (easy to enter the first winning hole 64).
The driving means F180 is for operating the movable member F122 of the effect means F120, and includes a driving motor F181 for generating a driving force, a supporting member F182 for supporting (fixing) the driving motor F181, and the supporting member F182. in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), a connection member F184 engaged with the end of the transmission shaft F183, and at both left-right direction end sides of the connection member F184 and a guide member F185 that engages (supports) the connecting member F184. The driving of the driving means F180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1582 and 1584 as appropriate.

The driving motor F181 is for giving a driving force to operate (reciprocate in the vertical direction) the movable member F122 of the production means F120. placed in the state This makes it possible to reduce the installation space in the front-rear direction, as compared with the case where the shaft is directed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A gear (not shown) is arranged (fixed) on the shaft of the drive motor F181.
The support member F182 is for supporting (fixing) the driving motor F181, and is formed in a box shape. The support member F182 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the rear surface member F150 by tapping screws. An insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the drive motor F181 is formed in the lower surface of the support member F182, and the shaft of the drive motor F181 is inserted through the insertion hole and arranged inside the support member F182. .
The transmission shaft F183 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor F181 to the connecting member F184, and is disposed on both sides of the shaft portion F183a in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) of the shaft portion F183a. It includes a transmission portion F183b and an eccentric shaft F183c projecting from the end surface of the transmission portion F183b on both left and right direction sides.
The shaft portion F183a extends in a bar shape along the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR), and the shaft portion F183a is arranged to pass through the support member F182. A gear (not shown) is disposed (fixed) on the shaft portion F183a at a position inside the support member F182, and is disposed between the gear disposed on the shaft portion F183a and the shaft of the drive motor F181. By meshing with a gear (not shown), the driving force of the drive motor F181 is transmitted to the transmission shaft F183.

The transmission portion F183b is formed in a columnar shape, and the axis of the transmission portion F183b is arranged in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction). The shaft portion F183a is fixed (arranged) to the axial center of the transmission portion F183b, and the eccentric shaft F183c is arranged at a position different from the axial center of the transmission portion F183b. That is, the eccentric shaft F183c is arranged eccentrically with respect to the axis of the transmission portion F183b. As a result, the transmission portion F183b rotates about the shaft portion F183a as a rotation axis, so that the eccentric shaft F183c is circularly displaced about the axis of the transmission portion F183b (shaft portion F183a) in a side view.
The connecting member F184 is for moving (reciprocating in the vertical direction) the movable member F122 of the production means F120. It includes a pair of guided portions F184b that protrude from the end faces, and an attachment portion F184c that is arranged in front of the main body portion F184a.
A slide groove F184a1 is formed in the main body F184a along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The slide groove F184a1 is formed so that the eccentric shaft F183c of the transmission shaft F183 can be disposed, and the length of the slide groove F184a1 in the front-rear direction is equal to or slightly larger than the amount of displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c in the front-rear direction. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor F181 is transmitted to the connecting member F184 via the transmission shaft F183.
Specifically, when the driving motor F181 is driven, the eccentric shaft F183c is circularly displaced around the axis of the transmission portion F183b (shaft portion F183a) in a side view. When the eccentric shaft F183c pushes the inner wall of the slide groove F184a1 along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the vertical displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c is transmitted to the connecting member F184, and the connecting member F184 moves in the vertical direction. is displaced to

On the other hand, the length of the slide groove F184a1 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is equal to or slightly larger than the amount of displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c in the front-rear direction. It is not in contact with the inner wall formed in the . Therefore, the longitudinal displacement of the eccentric shaft F183c is not transmitted to the connecting member F184, and the longitudinal displacement of the connecting member F184 can be suppressed.
In addition, since the eccentric shaft F183c is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from the side, the displacement of the connecting member F184 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) can be set to a predetermined amount. displacement in the vertical direction can be suppressed. Further, by displacing the eccentric shaft F183c in a certain direction, the displacement of the connecting member F184 in the vertical direction can be reciprocated. This eliminates the need for control for switching the drive direction of the drive motor F181.
The pair of guided portions F184b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Rotation of the coupling member F184 with respect to the guide member F185 is suppressed by engaging (inserting) the pair of guided portions F184b with the pair of guide grooves F185a.
The mounting portion F184c is formed in a plate-like shape with the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as the plate thickness direction. A plurality of through holes are formed in the mounting portion F184c in the plate thickness direction, and tapping screws inserted through the through holes are fastened to the movable member F122 of the effect means F120, whereby the movable member F122 is attached to the connecting member F184. It is fixed (arranged).

The guide member F185 guides the displacement (reciprocating motion) of the connecting member F184 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) (regulates the displacement of the connecting member F184 in the front-rear direction). A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the guide member F185 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the tapping screws inserted through the insertion holes are fastened to the protruding portions F157 of the rear member F150, whereby the rear member A guide member F185 is fixed (arranged) to F150.
A pair of guide grooves F185a are formed in the guide member F185 at positions corresponding to the pair of guided portions F184b of the connecting member F184. The guide groove F185a extends along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the vertical extension length of the guide groove F185a is slightly larger than the vertical displacement amount of the guided portion F184b. be. By inserting (arranging) the portion to be guided F184b in the guide groove F185a, the connecting member F184 (the portion to be guided F184b) can be displaced along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the guide groove F185a. , the displacement of the connecting member F184 (guided portion F184b) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is regulated.
The seventh passage F190 is for flowing out (flowing down) the ball that has won the first prize winning port 64 to the game area, and the back passage member F191 and the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back passage member F191. and a movable passage F193 disposed above the switch F192 (in the direction of arrow U).
The rear passage member F191 is a member for restricting the displacement of the ball that has entered the first prize winning opening 64 to the rear side (the direction of the arrow B), and is formed of a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and substantially rectangular when viewed from the front. be. The rear passage member F191 is disposed at a distance slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere from the rear surface of the base plate 60, and the space surrounded by the base plate 60, the rear passage member F191, and the movable passage F193 forms the seventh passage FRt7. It is formed.

The rear passage member F191 has a plurality of (four in this embodiment) engaging projections F191a arranged on the peripheral edge of the rear passage member F191, and a switch receiver arranged at the lower end of the rear passage member F191. and a part F191b. A notch portion F191c is formed at the lower end side of the rear passage member F191.
An insertion hole is formed in the engaging projection F191a, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the base plate 60 to fix (arrange) it to the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. In addition, the projection length of the engaging projection F191a is formed to be longer than the outer shape of the sphere. A space in which a ball can be guided (thrown or flowed down) can be formed between it and the passage member F191.
The switch receiving portion F191b is formed so as to protrude from the lower end of the rear passage member F191 toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and the switch F192 is supported (arranged) on the upper surface of the switch receiving portion F191b. The notch portion F191c is cut out in a shape along the outer shape of the movable passage F193, thereby suppressing contact between the rear passage member F191 and the movable passage F193.
The switch F192 is for outputting a signal for driving the driving motor F181 of the driving means F180, and the switch F192 and the driving motor F181 are electrically connected by wiring (not shown). The switch F192 is turned on, and a signal is output to the drive motor F181 based on this ON operation.

The movable passage F193 is for turning on the switch F192, and includes a supported portion F193a, a shaft F193b projecting from the supported portion F193a toward the front side, and a horizontal direction (arrow L- and a passage portion F193c formed at the end on the center side (R direction).
The movable path F193 is rotatably supported by the base plate 60 by inserting the shaft F193b through an insertion hole formed in the base plate 60 . Further, the center of gravity of the movable passage F193 is located on the passage portion F193c side of the axis F193b, and the passage portion F193c contacts the switch F192, thereby restricting the displacement (rotation) of the movable passage F193. Note that the switch F192 is turned off when the ball is not arranged in the movable passage F193 (passage portion F193c).
The passage portion F193c is a portion for causing the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the movable passage F193 (seventh passage FRt7) to flow out (flow down) into the game area. A wall portion F193c1 projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the end of the side (direction of arrow B), a pressing portion F193c2 projecting downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the lower surface of the passage portion F193c, and an outflow surface F193c3 arranged at the lowest position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the passage portion F193c.
The passage portion F193c is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear passage member F191 (direction of arrow B) and curved to protrude downward (direction of arrow D). As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the passage portion F193c can be swung (moved, rolled) along the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) while being brought into contact with the wall portion F193c1. It is possible to delay the outflow (flow down) of the ball into the game area.

In addition, the end portion of the passage portion F193c on the side opposite to the supported portion F193a is positioned below the first winning port 64 (in the direction of the arrow D). As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) from the first winning port 64 to the passage portion F193c can be easily swung (moved or rolled) along the passage portion F193c.
The pressing portion F193c2 is a portion for turning on the switch F192, and is disposed in contact with the switch F192. When the ball is not arranged in the movable passage F193 (passage portion F193c), the switch F192 is in an off state, and the switch F192 restricts the displacement (rotation) of the movable passage F193. Balls are distributed to the movable passage F193 (passage portion F193c) and the weight of the movable passage F193 increases, thereby displacing (rotating) the movable passage F193 about the axis F193b and turning on the switch F192.
The outflow surface F193c3 is formed (arranged) as a concave surface inclined downward toward the base plate 60 side (arrow F direction side). In addition, the outflow surface F193c3 is formed on the back surface of the outflow port FOPout2 of the base plate 60, whereby the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the passage portion F193c flows into the outflow port FOPout2 and flows out (flows down) to the game area. ) is done.
Note that the base plate 60 of the present embodiment is identical to the base plate 60 of each of the above-described embodiments except that the outflow port FOPout2 is formed, and thus the same reference numerals are used for description.

Next, referring to FIGS. 1578 to 1579, the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F143 of the fixed path F140 with respect to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 will be described. Figures 1578(a) and 1579(a) are partially enlarged front views of the lower frame F86b, and Figures 1578(b) and 1579(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame F86b.
1578 shows the lower frame F86b before the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 (hereinafter referred to as "closed state"), and FIG. ) are respectively shown. In addition, in FIGS. 1578(a) and 1579(a), illustration of the projecting portion F111b of the passage member F110 is omitted, and in FIGS. 1578(b) and 1579(b), illustration of the rear member F150 is omitted. be done.
FIG. 1579 shows the lower frame F86b after the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side), but is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side). The state in which the displaced member F130 is displaced (rotated) and the state in which the pair of displaceable members F130 are displaced (rotated) are also defined as the open state of the lower frame F86b.
As shown in FIG. 1578, in the closed state, the side faces of the blocking portions F143a of the pair of opening/closing members F143 on the opposite side face the locking portions F156b of the rear member F150, thereby restricting the displacement of the opening/closing members F143.

As described above, the blocking portion F143a is arranged at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the inlet FOPf1 formed in the passage member F110 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 hardly flows into the inflow port FOPf1, and enters the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140. It is difficult to be guided (throwing the ball, flowing down).
The distance between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. In other words, the pair of blocking portions F143a are not provided on the center side in the left-right direction of the inlet FOPf1, but are provided on both sides in the left-right direction in the area surrounded by the inlet FOPf1.
As a result, even in the closed state, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 flows into the space between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other and into the inlet FOPf1. , can be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140.
Further, the space between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the top of the undulations F112a of the lower passage F112. As a result, the ball distributed to the top of the undulation F112a of the lower passage F112 moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the undulation F112a, and a pair of It easily flows into the gap between the blocking portions F143a and is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140.

In the closed state, the center of gravity of the displacement member F130, the connecting member F145, and the weight F146 is located on the center side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the axis F133. As a result, the contacting state between the opposing surfaces of the pair of blocking portions F143a and the locking portion F156b of the back member F150 is maintained, and the lower frame F86b is maintained in the closed state.
1572 and 1573 will be referred to in detail below. The center of gravity of the displacement member F130, the connecting member F145, and the weight F146 is located on the center side in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) relative to the axis F133. A force acts to rotate the sides (both ends in the left-right direction, see FIG. 1574) upward (in the direction of arrow U).
Since the shaft F133 and the connecting member F145 are non-rotatably engaged (fixed), the slide engaging portion F145b of the connecting member F145 is subjected to a rotating force toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The slide member F144 (second engaging portion F144d) engaged with the slide engaging portion F145b is displaced toward both ends in the left-right direction.
Since the opening/closing member F143 (engagement hole F143e) is engaged with the slide member F144 (first engagement portion F144c), the slide member F144 is displaced toward both ends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). When the force acts on the opening/closing member F143, a force acts on the opening/closing member F143 so that the engagement hole F143e rotates toward both ends in the left-right direction about the shaft F142 as a rotation axis.

The blocking portion F143a and the engagement hole F143e are arranged in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) with the axis F142 interposed therebetween. Therefore, a force that rotates toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) acts on the blocking portion F143a. The contact state with the portion F156b is maintained, and the lower frame F86b is maintained in the closed state.
Next, the operation of the lower frame F86b from the closed state to the open state will be described. The ball guided through the second outflow surface F114b (first passage FRt1) of the upper passage F114 is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (see FIG. 1568), and the ball moves in the left-right direction (arrow L −R direction) The center of gravity of the displacement member F130 including the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the rolling surface F131b by moving (flows down, rolls) toward both ends, the connecting member F145, and the weight F146 as a whole are located on both sides of the axis F133 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).
As a result, the displacement member F130 rotates downward (in the direction of arrow D) on the side of the concave portion F131c (both sides in the left-right direction, see FIG. 1574) about the axis F133 as a rotation axis, and the connecting main body portion F145a of the connecting member F145 rotates upward. (Arrow U direction). The upwardly rotated connecting main body F145a abuts on the restricting piece F121d of the effect means F120, thereby restricting the movement of the displacement member F130 and the fixed path F140, and disposing (maintaining) the lower frame F86b in an open state.
It should be noted that the lower frame F86b is moved to the open state by applying a force to each member of the displacement member F130 and the fixed passage F140 in a direction opposite to the above-described maintenance of the closed state of the lower frame F86b. Detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1579, in the open state of the lower frame F86b, the blocking portion F143a is arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110. In other words, the blocking portion F143a is displaced to a position where it is invisible to the player through the inlet FOPf1 formed in the passage member F110 when viewed from the front. Therefore, compared to the closed state of the lower frame F86b, the distance between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other becomes larger, and the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 moves (falls down, rolls). It is possible to make it easier for the ball to flow into the space between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other and into the inflow port FOPf1.
In the open state of the lower frame F86b, the displacement member F130 is maintained in a displaced (rotated) state. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the open state of the lower frame F86b.
In this way, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) of the passage member F110 is guided (fed, flowing down) to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3). By doing so (see FIG. 1568), the weight of the ball is used to displace (rotate) the displacement member F130 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 can be easily made to flow into the space between the pair of blocking portions F143a facing each other and into the inflow port FOPf1. (sixth passage FRt6) (throwing the ball, flowing down) (making it easier to win the first prize opening 64).
Therefore, when the ball moves (flows down and rolls) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), it moves (flows down and rolls) on the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3). Amusement can be enhanced by making the player aware of the presence or absence of the ball to be played.

It should be noted that the movement of the lower frame F86b from the released state to the closed state is such that the ball flows out from the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (the third passage FRt3) (the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling surface F131b). It is done by The action of the force (gravitational force) from the open state of the lower frame F86b to the closed state is the same as that for maintaining the closed state, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.
In this way, the weight of the ball can be used to move the lower frame F86b from the closed state to the open state, or from the open state to the closed state. can.
Here, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game, the ball (hereinafter referred to as "preceding ball") moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) of the passage member F110 is the displacement member F130. By being distributed to the rolling surface F131b of the (third passage FRt3) (see FIG. 1568), the ball that succeeds the preceding ball (hereinafter referred to as the “subsequent ball”) becomes the second passage member F170 (second passage member F170). Passage FRt2) or sorting passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) may be more likely to be sorted (to be more likely to be won into the first winning port 64).
In this case, the preceding ball distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is likely to flow out from the outflow surface F112b to the game area (difficult to enter the first winning port 64). , it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the end.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the following ball is distributed (guided) to the rolling surface F131b (the third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F130, so that the preceding ball is moved between the pair of blocking portions F143a. And it can be easily made to flow into the inflow port FOPf1 (it can be made easy to make it win the first winning port 64). As a result, the player can keep an eye on the preceding ball distributed to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) until the end.
In addition, as the subsequent ball moves (flows down, rolls) on the rolling surface F131b, it is distributed to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) before the preceding ball as well as the preceding ball. The (guided) ball (hereafter referred to as the “preceding ball”) can be easily made to enter the first winning port 64 .
Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of (two or more) balls are distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), the following balls are distributed to the rolling surface F131b, thereby Since all of the plurality of balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on F112 (fifth path FRt5) can be easily made to enter the first prize winning opening 64, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, by distributing (guiding) the preceding ball to the rolling surface F131b (the third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F130, the preceding ball can be easily made to enter the first winning hole 64, and the preceding ball can In the state of being distributed (guided) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), the preceding ball can enter the first prize winning port 64. In this way, the role of making it easy for the ball in the second row to enter the first winning port 64 and the role of winning the first winning port 64 can be combined, and the value of the ball can be increased.

Returning to FIGS. 1568 to 1577, the ball flowing down the lower frame F86b will be described. Of the balls flowing down the game area, the balls guided through the upper frame passage FRt0 (see FIG. 1567) provided in the upper frame F86a are guided to the upstream end of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) of the passage member F110. It is inflow (entered ball).
A ball that has flowed (entered) into the upstream end of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) travels along the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1). It moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and flows from the first outflow surface F114a or the second outflow surface F114b to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) or the displacement member F130. (Third passage FRt3) (throwing, outflow).
The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) moves (flows down, rolls) along the projecting direction (arrow F direction) of the passage portion F171, and enters the passage portion F171. The ball passes through the drilled second passage through hole F171b and is guided (thrown or flowed out) to the sorting passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4).
The ball guided (thrown, flowed out) to the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) moves along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the displacement member F130 onto the third passage outflow surface F131a or the rolling surface F131b. to move (flow down, roll). The ball that has moved (falls down, rolls) on the third passage outflow surface F131a is guided (thrown, outflow) to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4), and moves (flows down, rolls) on the rolling surface F131b. The resulting ball passes through the third passage through hole F131d and is guided (thrown or flowed out) to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110.

Here, the apex of the undulations formed in the passage portion F131 of the displacement member F130 (boundary between the third passage outflow surface F131a and the rolling surface F131b) is the second outflow surface F114b of the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1). is formed at a position on the side of the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) from the lowest position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) from the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) to the passage portion F131 (third passage FRt3) is transferred to the third passage outflow surface F131a (dividing passage F160, fourth passage FRt4 ) to the rolling surface F131b (lower passage F112, fifth passage FRt5).
The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the rolling surface F131b, whereby the lower frame F86b is arranged in an open state, and the passage member F110 The ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is easily guided (thrown, flowing down) to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140 (first winning port 64 It is easy to win a prize).
As described above, the axis F133 of the displacement member F130 is arranged below the second outflow surface F114b of the passage member F110 (in the direction of the arrow D), so that it is guided (thrown or flowed down) from the second outflow surface F114b. The ball can be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the passage portion F131 above the axis F133 (in the direction of the arrow U). As a result, the impact when the ball is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the passage portion F131 can be applied to the passage portion F131 and received by the shaft F133, and damage to the passage portion F131 can be easily suppressed.
In addition, the displacement member F130 and the fixed path F140 can be gradually displaced (rotated) as the ball rolls (throws, flows down) on the rolling surface F131b. As a result, the impact when the connecting main body portion F145a of the connecting member F145 and the restricting piece F121d of the effect means F120 abut can be reduced, and damage to the connecting main body portion F145a or the restricting piece F121d can be easily suppressed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1580, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball guided (thrown, flowing down) to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) will be described. Fig. 1580 is a partial top view of the displacement member F130, Fig. 1580(a) shows the closed state of the lower frame F86b, and Figs. A displacement member F130 is illustrated (see FIGS. 1578 and 1579).
As shown in FIG. 1580(a), the upper passage F114 (first passage FRt1) of the passage member F110 (see FIG. 1574) is guided to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) (ball throwing, flowing down). The ball CB1 thus formed moves (flows down, rolls) toward the concave portion F131c along the downward slope formed on the rolling surface F131b.
As shown in FIG. 1580(b), since the rolling surface F131b is inclined downward toward the wall portion F132 (arrow F direction), the ball CB1 contacts the wall portion F132 and moves toward the recessed portion F131c. is moved (flowing down, rolling) toward In this way, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the ball CB1 while contacting the wall F132, the movement speed of the ball can be reduced using the frictional force generated between the ball CB1 and the wall F132. As a result, the period in which the lower frame F86b is in the open state can be lengthened.
As shown in FIG. 1580(c), the sphere CB1 moves (flows down, rolls) while contacting the wall F132, so that the sphere CB1 moves toward the wall F132 (arrow F direction) in the recess F131c. be guided. That is, the ball CB1 is guided toward a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F131c (the center of the third passage through-hole F131d).

As shown in FIG. 1580(d), the sphere CB1 is guided to a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F131c (the center of the third passage through-hole F131d), so that the sphere CB1 moves along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c. It is easy to be circulated along. As a result, it is possible to delay the sphere CB1 from flowing into the third passage through-hole F131d and outflowing (flowing down) from the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3). As a result, the period during which the weight of the ball CB1 acts on the displacement member F130 can be lengthened, and the period during which the lower frame F86b is in the open state can be lengthened.
In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the sphere CB1 along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c, the movement speed of the sphere can be reduced by utilizing the frictional force generated between it and the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c. It is possible to delay the flow of the ball CB1 into the third passage through-hole F131d.
Here, the inner peripheral surface and the bottom surface F131c1 of the recessed portion F131c are formed to be flat surfaces. ) are formed identically. Therefore, there is no height difference between the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c and the bottom surface F131c1, and the ball CB1 can be easily rotated along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F131c.
In addition, since the inner peripheral surface and the bottom surface F131c1 of the recessed portion F131c are formed continuously, in other words, the intermittent portion is not formed in the inner peripheral surface and the bottom surface F131c1 of the recessed portion F131c, the sphere CB1 is formed on the inner periphery of the recessed portion F131c. It can be easily made to circulate along the surface.

Returning to FIG. 1568 to FIG. 1577, description will be made. As described above, in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the passage portion F131, the back side (arrow B direction side) of the sorting passage F160 is arranged at a position facing the third passage outflow surface F131a. be.
As a result, the fourth passage is formed by circularly curving the ball distributed (guided) from the third passage outflow surface F131a (third passage FRt3) to the fourth passage portion F161 (fourth passage FRt4). It can be moved (flowed down, rolled) along the recessed side surface of the part F161, passed through the first distribution hole F161a or the second distribution hole F161b, and guided to the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) (throwing ball , outflow) can be delayed. As a result, the time for which the player expects the ball to pass through the first sorting hole F161a can be lengthened, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
The second passage through-hole F171b of the second passage member F170 is formed above the first sorting hole F161a of the sorting passage F160 (in the direction of the arrow U) (in top view, the second passage through-hole F171b and the first sorting hole F161a) (see FIG. 1574), the balls distributed (guided) from the second passage member F170 (second passage FRt2) to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) are , easily pass through the first distribution hole F161a of the distribution passage F160.
On the other hand, the fourth passage portion F161 of the distribution passage F160 is formed to be inclined downward from the fixed portion F162 toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side), and the second distribution hole F161b is the second Since the first distribution hole F161a is drilled on the front side, the ball distributed (guided) from the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) to the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) is transferred to the second distribution hole. Easy to pass through F161b.

A ball that has passed through the first sorting hole F161a of the sorting passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) is guided (thrown or discharged) to the top of the undulation F112a formed in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5). . The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the top of the undulation F112a moves (flows down, rolls) toward the inlet FOPf1 due to the downward inclination toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the undulation F112a, The ball easily flows into the gap between the pair of blocking portions F143a of the opening/closing member F143 and is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140 (easily won into the first winning port 64).
On the other hand, a ball that has passed through the second distribution hole F161b of the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) or passed through the third passage through hole F131d of the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3) is transferred to the lower passage F112 ( The ball is guided (thrown, outflow) to a position different from the top of the undulations F112a formed in the fifth passage FRt5).
Since the outflow surface F112b of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is formed at the bottom of the undulation F112a, the balls distributed to positions different from the top of the undulation F112a ) along the extending direction (arrow LR direction), and easily flows out (flows down) from the outflow surface F112b to the game area.
In addition, since the bulging portion F113a is formed in the vertical wall portion F113 so as to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction side), the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) is formed in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). ) The ball that moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center side moves (flows down, rolls) along the bulging portion F113a, so that the speed toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) components are given. Therefore, the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) does not easily flow into the inlet FOPf1 formed in the vertical wall portion F113, and the outflow surface It is likely to flow out (flow down) from F112b to the game area.

Here, in the closed state of the lower frame F86b, the pair of blocking portions F143a are arranged inside the edges of the inlet FOPf1. On the other hand, in the open state of the lower frame F86b, the blocking portion F143a is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall portion F113 of the passage member F110, and the gap between the pair of blocking portions F143a is higher than in the closed state. distance is increased. As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) moves (flows down, rolls) in the open state rather than in the closed state. ), and is easily guided (thrown, flowed down) to the sixth passage member F141 (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140 (easily won into the first winning port 64).
Therefore, the player can expect that the lower frame F86b will be in an open state while the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5), thereby improving the game. You can increase your interest.
The ball that has flowed into the inflow port FOPf1 (between the pair of blocking portions F143a) is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the sixth passage member F141 (sixth passage FRt6) of the fixed passage F140, and is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the passage portion of the sixth passage member F141. It moves (falls down, rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along a pair of projections F141b3 formed on F141b. Then, it passes through the outflow port FOPout1 of the passage member F110 and enters the first prize winning port 64 (guiding, throwing, outflow).
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1581 to 1584, the operation (vertical reciprocation) of the movable member F122 of the effect means F120 will be described. Figures 1581 and 1583 are front views of the lower frame F86b. Figures 1582(a) and 1584(a) are rear views of the lower frame F86b, and Figure 1582(b) is a side view of the lower frame F86b viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXIXb in Figure 1582(a). 1584(b) is a side view of the lower frame F86b viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXIb in FIG. 1584(a).

1581 and 1582 show a state in which the movable member F122 is arranged at the lowest position (in the direction of arrow D), and FIGS. is shown.
1581 and 1583, the illustration of the base plate 60 and the rear passage member F191 of the seventh passage F190 is omitted, and in FIGS. is illustrated.
As shown in FIGS. 1581 and 1582, when the movable member F122 is arranged at the lowest position (in the direction of the arrow D), it is surrounded by the main body and projection of the fixed member F121 and the main body and projection of the movable member F122. An opening is formed in the enclosed space, and the coloring member F123 is exposed through the opening (the coloring member F123 is made visible to the player). Also, the eccentric shaft F183c and the connecting member F184 arranged on the transmission shaft F183 of the driving means F180 are located at the lowest position (in the direction of the arrow D).
Next, the upward movement (displacement) of the movable member F122 (in the direction of arrow U) will be described. A ball sorted (guided) from the first winning port 64 to the seventh passage F190 (seventh passage FRt7) is guided (thrown, outflow) to the passage portion F193c of the movable passage F193, whereby the ball and the movable passage Due to the weight of F193, the passage portion F193c of the movable passage F193 is displaced (rotated) downward (in the direction of arrow D) about the shaft F193b as the rotation axis.

As a result, the switch F192 is turned on and the drive motor F181 is driven. By driving the drive motor F181, the transmission shaft F183 rotates and the eccentric shaft F183c is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Due to the engagement between the eccentric shaft F183c and the slide groove F184a1 of the connecting member F184, the connecting member F184 is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U), whereby the movable member F122 fixed (arranged) to the connecting member F184 is displaced. It moves (displaces) upward.
By the operation (displacement) of the movable member F122, the player can visually confirm that the ball has entered (guided, thrown, or flowed out of) the first prize winning port 64, and the player can watch the first prize winning port 64. can be unnecessary. The ball guided (thrown or flowed out) to the movable path F193 passes through the outflow port FOPout2 of the base plate 60 from the outflow surface F193c3 of the path portion F193c and is flowed out (flowed down) to the game area.
As shown in FIGS. 1583 and 1584, when the movable member F122 is arranged in the uppermost position (in the direction of arrow D), compared to the state in which the movable member F122 is arranged in the lowermost direction (in the direction of arrow D), the fixed The opening surrounded by the body and projection of the member F121 and the body and projection of the movable member F122 is small, and the exposed area of the coloring member F123 exposed from the opening is reduced. In this way, the movement (displacement) of the movable member F122 causes the exposed area of the colored member F123 to change (decrease or increase). It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the player has won a prize (guiding, throwing, or outflow) to 64.例文帳に追加
In addition, when the movable member F122 is arranged at the uppermost position (in the direction of arrow U), the lower end of the main body of the movable member F122 is arranged lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the lower end of the colored member F123. Exposure of the colored member F123 from below F122 is suppressed. As a result, the exposed area of the colored member F123 can be continuously reduced (the exposure of the colored member F123 from below the movable member F122 can be suppressed) as the movable member F122 is displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the movable member F122 has moved (displaced).

Next, referring to FIG. 1585, the lower frame F2086b in the 94th embodiment will be described. In the 93rd embodiment, the case where the opening/closing member F143 and the sliding member F144 of the fixed path F140 are irreversibly engaged has been described. is releasably engaged with. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1585(a) and 1585(c) are partial enlarged front views of the lower frame F2086b in the 94th embodiment, and Figures 1585(b) and 1585(d) are partial enlarged views of the lower frame F2086b. It is a top view. 1585(a) and 1585(b) show the closed state of the lower frame F2086b, and FIGS. 1585(c) and 1585(d) are arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side). An open state of the lower frame F2086b when the displaceable member F130 is displaced (rotated) is illustrated. 1585, the displacement member F130 of the lower frame F2086b, the axis F142 of the fixed path F2140, the opening/closing member F2143, the slide member F2144 and the connecting member F145, and the pair of slide rods F158 of the rear member F150 are schematically shown. is illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1585, in the blocking portion F143a of the opening/closing member F2143 in the 94th embodiment, there are regulated portions protruding from the back surface to the back surface side (arrow B direction side) at both left and right direction (arrow LR direction) sides. F2143f is formed. Further, the slide main body portion F144a of the slide member F2144 is formed with a restricting portion F2144e projecting toward the front side (arrow F direction side) at a position on the back side of the restricted portion F2143f.
In addition, notches F2143e1 are formed at both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) in the engagement hole F2143e formed in the projecting portion F2143c of the opening/closing member F2143. By these means, it is possible to suppress displacing (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143 by illegally operating the opening/closing member F2143.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 1585(a) and 1585(b), when the opening/closing member F2143 is rotated around the shaft F142 by an external force, a notch F2143e1 is formed in the engagement hole F2143e. , the projecting portion F2143c (engagement hole F2143e) of the opening/closing member F2143 and the first engaging portion F144c of the slide member F2144 are disengaged.
As a result, the slide member F2144 is not displaced along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the slide rod F158 of the back member F150 and stays in the closed position with respect to the rotation of the opening/closing member F2143. As a result, the regulated portion F2143f and the regulating portion F2144e come into contact with each other, and the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143 is suppressed.
As shown in FIGS. 1585(c) and 1585(d), in conjunction with the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130, the slide member F2144 moves in the direction in which the slide rod F158 of the rear member F150 extends (the direction of the arrows LR). , the restricting portion F2144e of the slide member F2144 is displaced to a position different from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the restricted portion F2143f of the opening/closing member F2143. As a result, the opening/closing member F2143 can be displaced (rotated), and the opening/closing member F2143 is displaced (rotated) in conjunction with the displacement of the slide member F2144.
A biasing spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown) is engaged with the opening/closing member F2143. A biasing force is applied that displaces toward. As a result, when the ball flows out (falls down) from the displacement member F130 (third passage FRt3), the lower frame F2086b (opening/closing member F2143) is moved from the open state to the closed state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1586, the lower frame F3086b in the 95th embodiment will be described. In the lower frame F3086b in the 95th embodiment, displacement of the slide member F3144 is restricted when the weight support portion F3145c of the fixed passage F3140 is damaged and dropped. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1586(a) and 1586(b) are partial enlarged rear views of the lower frame F3086b in the 95th embodiment. Figure 1586(a) illustrates the closed state of the lower frame F3086b. (b) shows the open state of the lower frame F3086b.
Note that FIG. 1586(b) shows the open state of the lower frame F3086b when the displacement member F130 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is displaced (rotated), and the left side (arrow L direction side) side), the weight support portion F3145c of the determination passage F3140 disposed on the side) is broken and dropped from the connecting main body portion F145a.
Also, in FIG. 1586, only the fixed member F3121 of the production means F3120, the displacement member F130, the determination passage F3140, the slide rod F158 of the rear member F150 and the distribution passage F160 are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 1586, the fixed path F3140 in the 95th embodiment is such that the upper surface of the slide body F3144a of the slide member F3144 is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the slide rod F158 of the back member F150. is formed with a restricting portion F3144e projecting from the upper end of the slide body portion F3144a.
The restricting portions F3144e are formed at both ends of the slide member F3144 in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows LR). At the upper ends of the restricting portions F3144e, there is formed a lead-in portion F3144f that slopes upward toward both ends in the left-right direction. .
Further, a regulation portion F3121e is formed on the back surface of the fixing member F3121 of the effect means F3120. The restricting portion F3121e faces the restricting portion F3144e of the slide member F3144 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). A dimension slightly larger than the outer shape of the weight support portion F3145c).
The weight support portion F3145c of the fixed passage F3140 is formed in a square prism shape and is arranged between the restriction portion F3144e of the slide member F3144 and the restriction portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). .

In the lower frame F3086b of the present embodiment, the connection member F3145 may be damaged by impact when the weight support portion F3145c abuts against the regulation piece F121d of the production means F3120 or illegal cutting of the weight support portion F3145c from the connection main body portion F145a. When the weight support portion F3145c is dropped from the slide member F3144, the weight support portion F3145c falls between the regulation portion F3144e of the slide member F3144 and the regulation portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121. The dropped weight support portion F3145c is supported by the upper surface of the slide main body portion F3144a of the slide member F3144 and the slide rod F158 of the rear member F150.
When the weight support portion F3145c falls off from the connecting member F3145, the center of gravity of the entire displacement member F130 and the fixed passage F3140 formed as one unit is positioned on both sides in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) from the axis F133. . As a result, the slide member F3144 is displaced toward the center in the left-right direction, and the lower frame F3086b operates (displaces) toward the open state.
Here, in the lower frame F3086b of the present embodiment, the dropped weight support portion F3145c falls between the regulation portion F3144e of the slide member F3144 and the regulation portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121, thereby allowing the weight support portion F3145c to slide. Displacement of the member F3144 toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower frame F3086b from being opened due to the dropping of the weight support portion F3145c.
Further, the sliding member F3144 is displaced toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and the distance between the restricting portion F3144e of the sliding member F3144 and the restricting portion F3121e of the fixed member F3121 becomes the outer shape of the weight support portion F3145c. (the open state of the lower frame F3086b), the weight support portion F3145c abuts on the lead-in portion F3144f, causing the slide member F3144 to move in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward both ends. can be displaced. As a result, the lower frame F3086b can be closed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the lower frame F3086b from being kept open due to the weight support portion F3145c coming off.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1587 to 1588, the lower frame F4086b in the 96th embodiment will be described. In the lower frame F4086b of the 96th embodiment, displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F4130 suppresses the ball from passing through the second sorting hole F161b of the sorting passage F160. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1587(a) and 1588(a) are top views of the lower frame F4086b in the 96th embodiment, and Figures 1587(b) and 1588(b) are partially enlarged front views of the lower frame F4086b. is. 1587 shows the closed state of the lower frame F4086b, and FIG. 1588 shows the open state of the lower frame F4086b. In addition, in FIGS. 1587 and 1588, part of the suppressing portion F4134 of the displacement member F4130 is illustrated by broken lines.
As shown in FIGS. 1587 to 1588, the displacement member F4130 of the 96th embodiment is formed with a suppressing portion F4134 in addition to the displacement member F130 of the 93rd embodiment. The suppressing portion F4134 is formed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR). The end portion of the suppressing portion F4134 on the center side in the left-right direction is formed to extend downward (in the direction of the arrow D) of the second sorting hole F161b of the sorting passage F160. A projecting portion F4134a projecting upward (in the direction of the arrow U) is provided at the end portion of the suppressing portion F4134 on the central side in the left-right direction.
The protrusion F4134a is formed in a columnar shape, and the outer diameter of the protrusion F4134a is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the second distribution hole F161b of the distribution passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4).

The projecting portion F4134a is disposed below the axis F133 (in the direction of the arrow D), and the displacement member F4130 is displaced (rotated) about the axis F133 as a rotation axis. -R direction) is rotated (displaced) toward the center.
As shown in FIG. 1587, in the closed state of the lower frame F4086b, the projecting portion F4134a is positioned at both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) from the inner peripheral surface of the second distribution hole F161b of the distribution passage F160. placed on the side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has passed through the second sorting hole F161b of the sorting passage F160 (fourth passage FRt4) from coming into contact with the projecting portion F4134a.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1588, in the open state of the lower frame F4086b, the displacing member F4130 is displaced (rotated) about the axis F133 as the rotation axis, so that the projecting portion F4134a moves toward the second distribution passage F160. It is disposed so as to pass through the hole F161b.
Therefore, in the open state of the lower frame F4086b, the ball guided to the fourth passage portion F161 (fourth passage FRt4) is prevented from passing through the second distribution hole F161b and is guided to the first distribution hole F161a. (throwing, outflow) (making it easier to enter the first winning port 64).

In the lower frame F4086b of the present embodiment, in the open state, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) in the lower passage F112 (fifth passage FRt5) of the passage member F110 FRt6) can be easily distributed (easily won into the first winning port 64), and the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) in the fourth passage portion F161 (fourth passage FRt4) of the distribution passage F160 can be moved to the passage portion F141b ( The distribution to the sixth passage FRt6) can be facilitated.
In other words, when the ball distributed to the passage portion F131 (the third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F4130 moves (flows down or rolls) toward either the third passage outflow surface F131a or the third passage through hole F131d. Even so, it can be easily sorted to the passage portion F141b (sixth passage FRt6) (easy to enter the first prize winning port 64), and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Next, referring to Figures 1589 to 1601, the lower frame F5086b in the 97th embodiment will be described. In the 93rd embodiment, the case where the opening/closing member F143 is displaced (rotated) by distributing (guiding) the ball to the passage portion F131 of the displacement member F130 has been described, but the lower frame F5086b in the 97th embodiment Now, when the ball is held by the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150, the opening/closing member F5158 is displaced (rotated). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1589 is a front view of the game board F5013 in the 97th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1589, the center frame F5086 is configured to fit into the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1288) of the base plate 60, and is a member fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. It has an upper frame F5086a and a lower frame F5086b.

The upper frame F5086a is arranged along the upper (upper in FIG. 1589) and left and right (left and right in FIG. 1589) inner edges of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1288) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame F5086b 1589) along the inner edge of the window portion 60a of 60. As shown in FIG. The third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1425) is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame F5086a and the lower frame F5086b.
The upper frame F5086a is a part of the center frame 86 in each of the above-described embodiments (a portion disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1589) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, that is, the lower side The portion where the frame F5086b is disposed) is omitted, and the other portions excluding the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above-described embodiments.
1590 to 1591 in addition to FIG. 1589, the lower frame F5086b will be described. FIG. 1590 is a front perspective view of the lower frame F5086b, and FIG. 1591 is a back perspective view of the lower frame F5086b.
As shown in FIGS. 1590 to 1591, the lower frame F5086b has a first passage FRt51 formed so that the ball can move (flow down, roll), and the ball guided through the first passage FRt51 moves ( A second passage FRt52 and a pair of third passages FRt53 where the ball flows (flows down and rolls), and a fourth passage FRt54 where the ball guided through the second passage FRt52 or the pair of third passages FRt53 moves (flows down and rolls). , a flow formed as a fifth passage FRt55 through which the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 flows down, and an opening through which the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 is guided (flowed in and thrown) to the fifth passage FRt55. There are formed an inlet FOPf51 and an outlet FOPout1 formed as an opening for the balls flowing down the fifth passage FRt55 to flow out to the game area.

The pair of third paths FRt53 are arranged line (plane) symmetrical (horizontal symmetry in FIG. 1589) with respect to the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1589) of the game board F5013.
An upper frame passage FRt50 is provided in the upper frame F5086a (see FIG. 1589). The upper frame passage FRt50 is a passage that guides balls flowing down the game area, and the upstream end of the first passage FRt51 communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt50.
That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage FRt50 from the game area flows (entered) from the upper frame passage FRt50 into the first passage FRt51 of the lower frame F5086b via the upstream end of the first passage FRt51. be done. A ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage FRt50 from the game area may flow (entered) from the upper frame passage FRt50 into the first passage FRt51 or the fourth passage FRt54 of the lower frame F5086b.
Here, the outlet FOPout1, which is the outlet of the fifth path FRt55 (the opening through which the balls flow out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize winning opening 64 . Therefore, the balls that pass through the inflow port FOPf51 of the fourth passage FRt54 and are distributed (guided) from the fourth passage FRt54 to the fifth passage FRt55 easily enter the first prize winning port 64 (the first prize winning port 64 high probability of winning).

In addition, in the fourth passage FRt54, there are two places with different positions in the width direction of the game board F5013 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1589) with respect to the first winning port 64, front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) ) is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the outflow surface F5112b. Therefore, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the outflow surface F5112b of the fourth passage FRt54 has a high probability of flowing out to the game area, and as a result, it is difficult to enter the first winning port 64 (the above-described inflow port FOPf51 The probability of winning the first winning port 64 is lower than that of the balls that pass through and are distributed from the fourth passage FRt54 to the fifth passage FRt55).
Further, an undulation F5112a is formed in the fourth passage FRt54, an outflow surface F5112b is formed at the bottom of the undulation F5112a, and the top of the undulation F5112a is inclined downward toward the fifth passage FRt55 (inflow port FOPf51). Therefore, in the fourth passage FRt54, the ball distributed to a position different from the top of the undulation F5112a and moved (flowing down, rolling) along the extending direction of the fourth passage FRt54 is guided to the fifth passage FRt55. It is easier to flow out to the game area from the outflow surface F5112b than to be (thrown, flow down) (difficult to enter the first winning port 64).
On the other hand, the ball sorted to the top of the undulation F5112a is likely to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage FRt55 along the downward slope of the undulation F5112a (probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is high).
The first passage FRt51 is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side) in order to guide the ball guided through the first passage FRt51 to the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53. A first outflow surface F5114a and a second outflow surface F5114b are formed (arranged) as concave surfaces. The second outflow surface F5114b is formed (arranged) at two positions different from the first outflow surface F5114a in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1589) of the game board F5013.

In addition, undulations are formed in the first passage FRt51, the second outflow surface F5114b is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and the first outflow surface F5114a is formed at the top of the undulations. Therefore, the ball distributed to the first passage FRt51 is more likely to flow out from the second outflow surface F5114b to the third passage FRt53 than to be thrown from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage FRt52.
In the second path FRt52 and the third path FRt53, in order to guide the ball guided through the second path FRt52 or the third path FRt53 to the fourth path FRt54 It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the center side toward both end sides.
At the downstream end of the second passage FRt52, a displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 that operates (displaces) by the weight of the guided ball is disposed. is arranged differently from the top of the undulations F5112a. Therefore, the ball guided to the second passage FRt52 is easily guided (thrown or flowed down) to the outflow surface F5112b of the fourth passage FRt54 (difficult to enter the first winning port 64).
In addition, the downstream end of the third path FRt53 is arranged at different positions in the width direction of the game board F5013 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1589) with respect to the top of the undulation F5112a of the fourth path FRt54. It is easy to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the outflow surface F5112b of the FRt54 (difficult to enter the first winning hole 64).

The opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150 that operates (displaces) by the weight of the ball is arranged on the lower frame F5086b. The opening/closing member F5158 is arranged inside the inner peripheral surface of the inlet FOPf51 when viewed from the front, and the ball that moves (flows down or rolls) in the fourth passage FRt54 passes through the inlet FOPf51 to the fifth passage. It is difficult to be assigned (guided) to FRt55.
The displacement means F5150 operates (displaces) when the ball guided through the second passage FRt52 is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the displacement member F5155. The opening/closing member F5158 is displaced in conjunction with the operation of the displacing member F5155, and is displaced outward from the inner peripheral surface of the inlet FOPf51 in front view (see FIG. 1601).
Therefore, the ball distributed to the second passage FRt52 is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the displacement member F5155, and the displacement member F5155 operates (displaces). In other words, the opening/closing member F5158 opens the inlet FOPf1. In this state, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) in the fourth passage FRt54 passes through the inflow port FOPf51 and is easily guided (thrown, flows down) to the fifth passage FRt55 (the ball easily enters the first prize winning port 64). Become).
Further, the right opening/closing member F5158R of the pair of opening/closing members F5158 is not interlocked with the right displacement member F5155R of the pair of displacement members F5155, and operates ( 1601), and the right opening/closing member F5158R continues to open the inlet FOPf51 (see FIG. 1601).

In this way, the lower frame F5086b in this embodiment is distributed (guided) to a position different from the top of the undulation F5112a of the fourth passage FRt54, and the ball moves along the extension direction of the fourth passage FRt54 ( In the state where the ball moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction of the fourth passage FRt54, the ball succeeding the ball is guided (thrown, flows down) to the second passage FRt52. , by the movement (displacement) of the displacement member F5155, the ball that moves along the extending direction of the fourth passage FRt54 (preceding the ball guided to the displacement member F5155) is guided to the fifth passage FRt55 (throwing ball , flow down) (making it easier to win a prize in the first prize opening 64).
In addition, by the operation (displacement) of the right displacement member F5155R of the pair of displacement members F5155, it is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage FRt55 until at least one ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage FRt55. ) (easy to win in the first winning port 64) can be maintained.
Therefore, even if the ball distributed to a position different from the top of the undulations F5112a of the fourth passage FRt54 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is low), the displacement member F5155 operates so that the fifth passage FRt55 (The probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is increased). As a result, the player can expect that the displacement member F5155, especially the right displacement member F5155R will operate while the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) in the fourth path FRt54. can increase
1592 to 1599 in addition to FIGS. 1590 to 1591, the detailed configuration of the lower frame F5086b will be described.

FIG. 1592 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame F5086b, and FIG. 1593 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame F5086b. Figure 1594 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement means F5150, and Figure 1595 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement means F5150. FIG. 1596 is a top view of the lower frame F5086b, FIG. 1597 is a front view of the lower frame F5086b, and FIG. 1598 is a rear view of the lower frame F5086b. Figure 1599(a) is a side view of the lower frame F5086b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXXVIa in Figure 1597, and Figure 1599(b) is a side view of the lower frame F5086b as viewed in the direction of arrow MDCLXXXVIb in Figure 1597. FIG. 1599(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame F5086b taken along line MDCLXXXVIc-MDCLXXXVIc in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 1590 to 1599, the lower frame F5086b includes a passage member F5110 and a second passage member F5120 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the standing wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110. , the back member F5130 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the passage member F5110, the fifth passage member F5140 disposed between the back member F5130 and the passage member F5110, and the back member F5130 Displacement means F5150 arranged on the back side, and maintenance means F5160 arranged below the displacement means F5150 (arrow D direction side) are provided.
An outflow port FOPout1 is formed in the passage member F5110, and the fifth passage portion F5141 of the fifth passage member F5140 is inserted through the outflow port FOPout1. A first insertion hole F5113b and a second relief hole F5131b are formed in the passage member F5110 and the back member F5130, respectively, and the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 is inserted through the first insertion hole F5113b and the second relief hole F5131b. .
In addition, a third escape hole F5131c and a fourth escape hole F5131d are formed in the back member F5130, and a pair of opening/closing members F5158 of the displacement means F5150 are inserted through the third escape hole F5131c and the fourth escape hole F5131d, and the fourth escape hole F5131d is inserted. A passage member F5162 of a maintenance means F5160 is inserted through the hole F5131d.

After the operation (displacement), the right displacement member F5155R of the pair of displacement members F5155 stays in the position after the operation (displacement) by being engaged with the maintaining means F5160. As the ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) by the maintaining means F5160, the engagement between the right displacement member F5155R and the maintaining means F5160 is released, and the right displacement member F5155R returns to the position before operation (displacement).
A rear member F5130 and a second passage member F5120 are respectively fastened and fixed to the passage member F5110 by tapping screws. The fifth passage member F5140, displacement means F5150 and maintenance means F5160 are fastened and fixed to the rear member F5130 by tapping screws. With these, the lower frame F5086b is configured as one (single) unit (see FIGS. 1590 and 1591).
In the lower frame F5086b, the passage member F5110, the second passage member F5120, and the displacement means F5150 excluding the maintenance means F5160 and the displacement member F5155 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (that is, transparent so that the members and the sphere on the back side can be seen through). The fifth passage member F5140 and the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 are made of a colored resin material. Further, the distributing member F5154 of the displacing means F5150 is partially painted (display portion F5154d). Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball moving from the first passage FRt51 to the fifth passage FRt55, and the player can visually recognize the operation of the display portion F5154d of the displacement member F5155 and the distribution member F5154, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be enhanced.
The fifth passage member F5140 and the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 are made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and the front surface thereof is painted or a seal is attached. can be

On the other hand, in the lower frame F5086b, the fifth passage member F5140 located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the maintaining means F5160 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or is painted). (Attachment of a sticker) makes the maintenance means F5160 invisible to the player from the front side. The maintaining means F5160 may be configured such that the maintaining means F5160 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side by forming the fifth passage member F5140 from a light-transmitting resin material.
The passage member F5110 is for forming the first passage FRt51 and the fourth passage FRt54. and an upright wall portion F5113 extending vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the end on the back side (direction of arrow B) of the lower passage F5112; and a pair of fastening portions F5115 projecting vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the ends of the lower and upper passages F5112 and F5114 on both left and right sides.
A first passage FRt51 is formed by a space defined by the back member F5130, the vertical wall portion F5113, and the upper passage F5114, and a fourth passage FRt54 is formed by a space defined by the front plate F5111, the lower passage F5112, and the vertical wall portion F5113. It is formed.
The front plate F5111 is a part for suppressing the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the lower passage F5112 from flowing out to the game area, and extends in the left and right direction (arrow LR direction). and inclined portions that are inclined upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U) outward from both left and right sides of the central portion. The upper end of the inclined portion of the front plate F5111 is formed vertically above the upper surface of the lower passage F5112. As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the lower passage F5112 can contact the rear surface of the inclined portion of the front plate F5111, and moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the lower passage F5112. Outflow of the ball to the game area is suppressed.

The front plate F5111 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes F111a along the outer edge of the front plate F5111 in the plate thickness direction. The lower frame F5086b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in an assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole F111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60 .
In the center of the front plate F5111, an outlet FOPout1 is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 1589). The outflow port FOPout1 is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage FRt55 flows out (flows down) to the game area.
The front plate F5111 has an overhang F5111b vertically upwardly projecting from the outflow port FOPout1 (in the direction of the arrow U). In addition, a notch F5111c whose shape in front view is substantially the same as the shape of the outflow surface F5112b of the lower passage F5112 is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the outflow surface F5112b. By passing through the notch F5111c, the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 flows out (flows down) to the game area.
The lower passage F5112 differs from the lower passage F112 in the 93rd embodiment in terms of the shape of the undulations F5112a and the pair of outflow surfaces F5112b in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) and the front-rear direction of the lower passage F5112 (arrow F -B direction) are the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

The undulations F5112a are formed to have a larger width dimension in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) than the undulations F112a in the 93rd embodiment. In addition, compared to the outflow surface F112b in the 93rd embodiment, the outflow surface F5112b has a larger concave dimension in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side). It is formed. Therefore, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the front side of the lower passage F5112 (first passage FRt51) flows out from the outflow surface F5112b to the game area rather than passing through (crosses) the outflow surface F5112b in the left-right direction. easy.
The vertical wall portion F5113 is a portion for connecting the lower passage F5112 and the upper passage F5114. A bulging portion F5113a is formed on the center side of the vertical wall portion F5113 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and an inlet FOP f51 is formed in the bulging portion F5113a (perforated in the plate thickness direction). be.
The vertical wall portion F5113 has a pair of first insertion holes F5113b provided at both ends in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) of the inlet FOPf51, and an upper side (arrow U) of the first insertion holes F5113b. A pair of second through-holes F5113c arranged in the direction side) and a third through-hole F5113d arranged above the inlet FOPf51 are formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction).
The size of the inlet FOPf51 in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, more specifically, approximately five times the outer shape of the sphere. As described above, the inflow port FOPf51 is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fourth passage FRt54 flows out to the fifth passage FRt55. In addition, the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150 is disposed in the area surrounded by the inner peripheral surface of the inlet FOPf51 in the front view, except for the approximate center in the left-right direction. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F5112 can be made difficult to guide (throw, flow down) to the fifth passage FRt55.

The bulging portion F5113a is formed to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) while contacting the vertical wall portion F5113 passes through the undulation F5112a. At this time, a velocity component to the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) can be given to the ball passing through the undulation F5112a. As a result, the ball passing through the undulation F5112a can be made difficult to be guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage FRt55 (made difficult to pass through the inlet FOPf1).
The first insertion hole F5113b is a portion through which the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 is inserted, and is disposed so as to be inclined upward toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the opening for displacing the displacement member F5155 (suppressing contact between the displacement member F5155 and the first insertion hole F5113b) can be made small, and the entry of foreign matter such as a wire can be easily suppressed.
A notch portion F5113b1 that is notched upward (arrow U direction) is formed in the first insertion hole F5113b. By displacing the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 to the notch F5113b1, the displacement member F5155 can be displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the second bearing member F5152 of the displacement means F5150. The engagement between the displacement member F5155 and the second bearing member F5152 can be released.
A tapping screw is inserted through the second insertion hole F5113c, and the tapping screw inserted through the second insertion hole F5113c is fastened to the second passage member F5120, thereby fixing the second passage member F5120 to the vertical wall portion F5113. (arranged).

The third insertion hole F5113d is a portion through which the distributing member F5154 of the displacement means F5150 is inserted, whereby the distributing member F5154 of the displacement means F5150 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F5113. be done.
The upper end of the standing wall portion F5113 is formed vertically above the upper surface of the upper passage F5114. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F5114 can contact the rear surface of the standing wall portion F5113, and can be prevented from flowing out (flowing down) to the fourth passage FRt54.
In addition, at the upper end of the vertical wall portion F5113, there are notches whose shape in front view is substantially the same as the shape of the first outflow surface F5114a and the second outflow surface F5114b of the upper passage F5114. They are formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the surface F5114b. By passing through these notches, the ball guided through the first passage FRt51 flows out (flows down) to the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53.
The upper passage F5114 differs from the upper passage F114 in the 93rd embodiment in the shape of the first outflow surface F5114a and the pair of second outflow surfaces F5114b and the dimension of the upper passage F5114 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Other than that, they are formed identically, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The first outflow surface F5114a is formed to have a larger width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) than the first outflow surface F114a in the 93rd embodiment. Therefore, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) is easily guided to the first outflow surface F5114a, and the first outflow surface It is easy to be guided (thrown or flowed down) from F5114a to the second passage FRt52.
On the other hand, compared to the second outflow surface F114b in the 93rd embodiment, the second outflow surface F5114b has a width in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) Large size is formed. Therefore, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the front side of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) moves from the second outflow surface F114b to the second outflow surface F114b rather than passing (crossing) the second outflow surface F114b in the left-right direction. It easily flows out to the passage member F5120 (second passage FRt52).
The fastening portion F5115 is the same as the fastening portion F115 in the 93rd embodiment except that the shape of the fastening portion F5115 is different and that there is only one insertion hole F115a drilled in the plate thickness direction of the fastening portion F5115. , the description thereof will be omitted.
The second passage member F5120 is for forming the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53. A curved portion F5122 disposed in the second passage wall portion F5123 protruding from the front end of the second passage portion F5121 and the front side (arrow F direction side) of the second passage portion F5121 A pair of third passage portions F5124 (see FIG. 1596), a third passage wall portion F5125 disposed on the outer edge of the third passage portion F5124, and a pair of third passage wall portions F5125 disposed between the third passage wall portions F5125 and a central wall portion F5126.

A second passage FRt52 is formed by a space defined by the second passage portion F5121, the second passage wall portion F5123, and the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110, and the third passage portion F5124 (see FIG. 1596) and the third passage wall A third passage FRt53 is formed by a space partitioned by the portion F5125 and the standing wall portion F5113 (bulging portion F5113a) of the passage member F5110.
The second passage portion F5121 is a portion for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is formed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The second passage portion F5121 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the center side toward both end sides in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the second passage portion F5121 can be moved (flowed down or rolled) in the left-right direction.
In addition, the second passage portion F5121 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the upright wall portion F5113 side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the second passage portion F5121 is guided (thrown, outflow) to the third passage portion F5124, or the second passage portion F5121 does not come into contact with the curved portion F5122. It is possible to suppress movement (flowing down, falling) from.
A notch portion F5121a is formed at the center of the second passage portion F5121 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The notch F5121a is a notch for arranging the distributing member F5154 of the displacement means F5150 inserted through the third insertion hole F5113d of the vertical wall F5113 of the passage member F5110 on the upper surface of the second passage F5121.

The curved portion F5122 is a portion for changing the direction of displacement of the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121, and extends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) when viewed from the top. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave toward the bottom. By contacting the curved portion F5122, the direction of displacement of the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121 changes from the tip end side (left and right direction both ends) of the second passage portion F5121 to the front side. side (arrow F direction side).
The second passage wall portion F5123 is a portion for suppressing movement (flowing down or falling) of the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121 to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110. It is formed so as to stand upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front end of the second passage portion F5121.
The standing height of the second passage wall portion F5123 is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the ball, so that the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121 can be visually recognized by the player. be done. The standing height of the second passage wall portion F5123 may be formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the sphere. Even in this case, since the second passage wall portion F5123 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) on the upper surface of the second passage portion F5121 can be visually recognized by the player. .
The third passage portion F5124 is a portion for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface. Formed with a downward slope. As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the third passage portion F5124 can be guided (throwed or flowed down) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

The third passage wall portion F5125 is a portion for suppressing movement (flowing down, falling) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the third passage portion F5124 to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110. It is formed so as to stand upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front end of the third passage portion F5124 and the end on the center side in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows LR).
In addition, the third passage wall portion F5125 is not formed at both ends of the third passage portion F5124 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). A ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the portion F5124 is guided (thrown, flowing down) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.
A connecting portion F5125a that connects to the second passage wall portion F5123 is formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the third passage wall portion F5125. By connecting the connecting portion F5125a to the second passage wall portion F5123, it is possible to easily suppress damage to the third passage wall portion F5125 due to, for example, contact of a ball with the third passage wall portion F5125.
The connecting portion F5125a is disposed at a position separated upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the upper surface of the third passage portion F5124 by a distance larger than the outer shape of the sphere. The ball that moves (flows down, rolls) passes between the connecting portion F5125a and the third passage portion F5124 and is guided (thrown, flows down) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

The central wall portion F5126 prevents the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) from the first outflow surface F5114a of the upper passage F5114 to the second passage portion F5121 to move (flow down, drop) to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110. It is a portion for suppressing, and is formed so as to stand upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front end of the second passage portion F5121 between the pair of third passage wall portions F5125.
The back surface member F5130 is for forming the back surface of the lower frame F5086b. and a part F5132.
The rear wall portion F5131 is composed of a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular plate-like body, and has a first relief hole F5131a formed in the center side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and a first relief hole. A pair of second escape holes F5131b formed below F5131a (direction of arrow D) and on both left and right sides of first escape hole F5131a, and a pair of second escape holes F5131b formed on the right side (direction of arrow R). A third escape hole F5131c formed below the second escape hole F5131b, and a fourth escape hole F5131d formed below the second escape hole F5131b formed on the left side (arrow L direction side). , and are formed with openings in the plate thickness direction (drilled in the plate thickness direction).
The first escape hole F5131a is a portion for inserting the distributing member F5154 and the second engaging portion F5157c of the displacement means F5150, and is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape.

The second relief hole F5131b is a portion for inserting the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150, and is formed in a laterally elongated substantially rectangular shape. The second escape holes F5131b are disposed so as to be inclined upward toward both ends in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR). As a result, the opening for displacing the displacement member F5155 (preventing contact between the displacement member F5155 and the second escape hole F5131b) can be made small, and the entry of foreign matter such as a wire can be easily suppressed.
The third relief hole F5131c and the fourth relief hole F5131d are portions for inserting the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150, and are formed in a laterally elongated substantially rectangular shape. Further, a maintaining means F5160 is inserted through the fourth escape hole F5131d.
The third escape hole F5131c and the fourth escape hole F5131d are disposed so as to be inclined upward toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the opening for displacing the opening/closing member F5158 (suppressing contact between the opening/closing member F5158 and the third escape hole F5131c or the fourth escape hole F5131d) can be made small, and the entry of foreign matter such as a wire can be suppressed. It can be done easily.
The fixing portion F5132 is a portion for fastening and fixing the rear member F5130 to the base plate 60 . By fixing (arranging) the fixing portion F5132 to the base plate 60 in addition to the front plate F5111 of the passage member F5110, the posture of the lower frame F5086b with respect to the base plate 60 can be stabilized.

Further, the back member F5130 is fixed (arranged) to the passage member F5110 by fastening and fixing the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole F115a formed in the fastening portion F5115 of the passage member F5110 to the fixing portion F5132.
A front end of the fixing portion F5132 is disposed in contact with the base plate 60 . In addition, the lower end of the fixing portion F5132 is arranged below (in the direction of arrow D) the displacement member F5155 and the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150. With these, it is possible to easily suppress the entry of foreign matter such as a wire, and it is possible to easily suppress unauthorized operation of the displacement member F5155 and the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150.
The fifth passage member F5140 is for forming the fifth passage FRt55. and a pair of guide portions F5142 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of F5141.
The fifth passage portion F5141 includes a bottom portion F5141a extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and a pair of portions projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from both left and right ends of the bottom portion F5141a. and a wall portion F5141b, which is formed in a substantially U shape in a front view. A pair of protrusions F5141c are provided on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion F5141a at positions spaced apart from the center in the width direction (the direction of the arrows LR) by a predetermined distance. A space defined by the bottom surface portion F5141a and the pair of wall portions F5141b forms a fifth passage FRt55.

The fifth passage portion F5141 is formed in the same manner as the passage portion F141b of the fixed passage F140 in the 93rd embodiment except for the extension length in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). omitted.
In a state where the fifth passage member F5140 is fixed to the back member F5130, the fifth passage portion F5141 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the outflow port FOPout1 of the passage member F5110, and passes through the outflow port FOPout1. As a result, the ball that moves (falls down) in the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) can be made to flow out to the game area.
The guiding portion F5142 is a portion for guiding (throwing the ball, flowing down) the ball that has passed through the inlet FOP f51 to the passage member F5162 of the maintaining means F5160. sloped downwards.
The displacement means F5150 guides the ball moving (falling down) in the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110 according to the operation (displacement) of the displacement means F5150 to the fifth passage member F5140 (fifth passage FRt55). A first bearing member F5151, and a pair of a pair of bearing members F5151 and a pair of the first bearing member F5151 and a pair of the first bearing member F5151 provided at both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) at a predetermined distance from each other. a second bearing member F5152; a slide rod F5153 fixed (arranged) to the first bearing member F5151 and the second bearing member F5152; a distribution member F5154 rotatably engaged with the first bearing member F5151; 2 A displacement member F5155 rotatably engaged with the bearing member F5152, a weight F5156 disposed on the displacement member F5155, a slide member F5157 engaged with the slide rod F5153 and the displacement member F5155, and the slide member An opening/closing member F5158 engaged with F5157 and a holding member F5159 rotatably holding the opening/closing member F5158 are provided.

In this embodiment, the displacement member F5155, the slide member F5157, and the opening/closing member F5158 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) are replaced by the left displacement member F5155L and the left slide member F5155L. F5157L and left opening/closing member F5158L, displacement member F5155, slide member F5157 and opening/closing member F5158 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) are replaced with right displacement member F5155R, right slide member F5157R and right opening/closing member F5158R; A code is attached to each to distinguish them.
The first bearing member F5151 is for holding the slide rod F5153 together with the second bearing member F5152. A regulating portion F5151a formed to protrude and a shaft portion F5151b formed to protrude upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface of the first bearing member F5151 are formed.
In addition, the first bearing member F5151 is provided with a plurality of (two in this embodiment) insertion holes, and the tapping screws inserted through the insertion holes are fastened to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130. Then, the first bearing member F5151 is fixed (arranged) to the rear wall portion F5131.
The restricting portion F5151a is a plate-like body, and is arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first bearing member F5151. The restricting portion F5151a is formed so as to be inclined downward toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). Further, an insertion hole for inserting the slide rod F5153 is formed in the restricting portion F5151a.

The shaft portion F5151b is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the distribution member F5154 is rotatably engaged with the shaft portion F5151b. As a result, the distribution member F5154 is engaged so as to be rotatable (displaceable) about the shaft portion F5151b as a rotation axis.
The second bearing member F5152 is fixed (arranged) to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130. The second bearing member F5152 is arranged at a position separated by a predetermined distance (smaller than the axial dimension of the slide rod F5153) in a direction perpendicular to the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151.
The second bearing member F5152 is formed with a restricting portion F5152a formed so as to protrude from the back surface of the second bearing member F5152 to the back side (arrow B direction side). The restricting portion F5152a is a plate-like body, and is arranged parallel to the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151. Further, an insertion hole for inserting the slide rod F5153 is formed in the restricting portion F5152a.
Displacement of the slide member F5157 is restricted by contact of the slide member F5157 with the restriction portion F5152a or the restriction portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151.

In addition, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) insertion holes are formed in the second bearing member F5152, and the tapping screws inserted through the insertion holes are fastened to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130. Then, the second bearing member F5152 is fixed (arranged) to the rear wall portion F5131.
The second bearing member F5152 is provided with a protrusion (not shown) that protrudes in a direction that inclines upward toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). is arranged.
The ball bearing F5152b is composed of an inner ring, a plurality of balls arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the inner ring, and an outer ring rotatably arranged on the inner ring via the plurality of balls. The rotation of the balls reduces the friction between the inner and outer rings compared to the case where the outer peripheral surface of the inner ring and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring are in contact with each other, and the outer ring can easily rotate with respect to the inner ring. The ball bearing F5152b is supported (arranged) by the protrusion (not shown) of the second bearing member F5152 by fitting the inner ring to the protrusion.
The slide rod F5153 is for displacing the slide member F5157 along the extending direction of the slide rod F5153, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. On the outer peripheral surface of the slide rod F5153, a position that is slightly central in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) from the restriction portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 and a position that is slightly left-right direction from the restriction portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152 Incisions are formed in the radial direction at positions on both end sides.

With the slide rod F5153 inserted into the insertion holes drilled in the shaft portion F5151b of the first bearing member F5151 and the regulation portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152, a metal ring-shaped C ring is attached to the notch formed in the slide rod F5153. (not shown) are respectively fitted, the slide rod F5153 is unremovably supported by the first bearing member F5151 and the second bearing member F5152.
Further, the slide rod F5153 is positioned so that the extension direction (axial direction) of the slide rod F5153 is perpendicular to the regulating portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 (the regulating portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152). It is supported by the first bearing member F5151 and the second bearing member F5152. Therefore, the slide rod F5153 is arranged in a posture inclined upward toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).
The distributing member F5154 is for changing the moving (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls distributed (guided) to the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120. , an intermediate portion F5154b erected from the front end of the engaged portion F5154a, a distribution portion F5154c projecting from the upper end of the intermediate portion F5154b toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and the intermediate portion F5154b. and a display portion F5154d arranged in front of the.
The engaged portion F5154a is formed of a plate-like body, and an insertion hole is formed in the end portion of the engaged portion F5154a on the rear side (arrow B direction side). By inserting the shaft portion F5151b of the first bearing member F5151 into the insertion hole, the distribution member F5154 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion F5151b of the first bearing member F5151.

Further, a shaft portion F5154a1 projects upward (in the direction of arrow U) substantially at the center of the engaged portion F5154a in the extending direction (in the direction of arrow FB). The shaft portion F5154a1 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the second engaging portion F5157c of the slide member F5157 is engaged with the shaft portion F5154a1.
The intermediate portion F5154b is formed of a plate-like body and passes through the third insertion hole F5113d of the passage member F5110 and the notch portion F5121a of the second passage member F5120 to connect the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110 and the second passage member F5120. is disposed between the central wall portion F5126 of the The upper end of the intermediate portion F5154b is disposed above the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120 (in the direction of arrow U), so that the sorting portion F5154c is arranged above the second passage portion F5121 (in the direction of arrow U). ).
Further, the intermediate portion F5154b is curved along the notch portion F5121a of the second passage member F5120. Thereby, when the distribution member F5154 rotates (displaces), it is possible to suppress contact between the intermediate portion F5154b and the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120.
The sorting portion F5154c is formed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). An undulation is formed on the upper surface of the distribution portion F5154c, and the apex of the undulation is arranged substantially in the center of the distribution portion F5154c in the left-right direction. The undulations are formed with a downward slope toward both ends in the left and right direction, and the balls sorted to the sorting portion F5154c move along the downward slope from the center in the left and right direction toward both ends in the left and right direction (flowing down, falling )do.

The display portion F5154d is a portion that indicates the position of the sorting portion F5154c, and is arranged below the sorting portion F5154c (in the direction of the arrow D). The display portion F5154d is colored, so that the position of the display portion F5154d (sorting portion F5154c) can be easily recognized by the player.
The displacement member F5155 guides (throws or flows down) the ball distributed (guided) from the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120 to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110. 2. A shaft support portion F5155a that is supported (engaged) with a ball bearing F5152b of a bearing member F5152, an arm portion F5155b that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft support portion F5155a toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and a shaft support portion F5155a. A weight support portion F5155c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the body F5155c to the back side (arrow B direction side), a body portion F5155d disposed at the tip of the arm portion F5155b, and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the body portion F5155d and a regulating wall F5155f arranged on the central side of the holding portion F5155e in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR).
The shaft supporting portion F5155a is formed in a cylindrical shape recessed along the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b, and the inner peripheral surface of the shaft supporting portion F5155a is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the ball bearing F5152b. The displacement member F5155 is rotatably supported by the ball bearing F5152b by enclosing the ball bearing F5152b in the inner peripheral surface of the shaft support portion F5155a.
The arm portion F5155b is a plate-like body, and is arranged to pass through the second escape hole F5131b of the back member F5130 and the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110. The extension length of the arm portion F5155b is formed longer than the distance between the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130 and the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110. As a result, in a state in which the shaft support portion F5155a is supported by the ball bearing F5152b, the tip of the arm portion F5155b is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110.

Also, when an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1424), the arm F5155b can be easily bent (the tip of the arm F5155b can be easily displaced with respect to the pivot F5155a).
The outer shape of the arm portion F5155b is formed smaller than the second escape hole F5131b of the back member F5130 and the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110. As a result, when an external force is applied to the arm F5155b, the arm F5155b moves in the left-right direction (the direction of arrows LR) or the up-down direction ( FB direction).
Further, when the shaft support portion F5155a is supported by the ball bearing F5152b, the distance between the upper surface of the arm portion F5155b and the edge of the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) is It is formed smaller than the axial dimension of the ball bearing F5152b. Accordingly, when the arm portion F5155b is displaced in the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b, it is possible to prevent the shaft support between the shaft support portion F5155a and the ball bearing F5152b from being released.
By guiding the arm portion F5155b to the notch portion F5113b1 formed in the first insertion hole F5113b of the passage member F5110, the amount of displacement of the arm portion F5155b in the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b can be increased, and the shaft support portion F5155a can be increased. and the ball bearing F5152b can be released.

The weight support portion F5155c is formed in a cylindrical shape recessed along the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b, and the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F5155c is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the weight F5156. The weight F5156 is disposed (supported) in the weight support portion F5155c by enclosing the weight F5156 in the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F5155c.
In addition, a projecting portion F5155c1 projecting along the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b is provided on the upper surface of the weight support portion F5155c. The displacement member F5155 and the slide member F5157 are engaged.
The body portion F5155d is colored to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the displacement member F5155 is operating (rotating, displacing). A cylindrical recess F5155d1 is formed in the main body F5155d downward (in the direction of the arrow D), and a circular through hole F5155d2 is formed in the bottom surface of the recess F5155d1. The recess F5155d1 and the through hole F5155d2 are arranged on the same axis.
The inner diameter of the recess F5155d1 is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, and the distance between the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1 and the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F5155d2 is smaller than the radius of the sphere. be done. As a result, the center of gravity of the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the recess F5155d1 can be positioned inside the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F5155d2, and the ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the recess F5155d1 using its own weight. ) can be displaced toward the through hole F5155d2.

Also, the recess depth of the recess F5155d1 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This allows the player to visually recognize that the ball has been guided (thrown or flowed down) to the concave portion F5155d1.
The holding portion F5155e is composed of a pair of straight portions F5155e1 arranged at a distance smaller than the diameter of the ball in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows FB), and a pair of straight portions F5155e1 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). ) It has a curved portion F5155e2 that connects the ends on both end sides, and is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from above.
The holding portion F5155e is between the curved portion F5122 of the second passage member F5120 and the second passage wall portion F5123 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and the front side of the second passage portion F5121 (arrow F direction side) and the lower side (arrow D direction side). As a result, the ball guided (thrown) to the curved portion F5122 and moved (flowed down or dropped) toward the front side from between the curved portion F5122 and the second passage wall portion F5123 is guided (thrown, flow down).
The holding portion F5155e is disposed so as to be inclined upward toward the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, by contacting the straight portion F5155e1 disposed on the front side, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the holding portion F5155e can be restricted from being displaced toward the front side. As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the holding portion F5155e can be easily suppressed from moving (flowing down or falling) from the holding portion F5155e to the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

In addition, the holding portion F5155e is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the holding portion F5155e can be maintained in contact with the curved portion F5155e2, and the ball can be held by the pair of straight portion F5155e1 and curved portion F5155e2.
The holding portion F5155e is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion F5155d, and is arranged in a posture toward the inner peripheral surface on the back side of the main body portion F5155d. In other words, the pair of linear portions F5155e1 are disposed in a posture in which the approximate center is directed to a position (eccentric position) different from the central axis of the main body portion F5155d. As a result, the ball distributed (guided) from the holding portion F5155e can be guided (thrown or flowed down) to a position (off-center position) different from the center axis of the recess F5155d1 (through hole F5155d2) of the main body F5155d, and the ball can pass through. It is possible to delay the flow into the hole F5155d2.
The regulation wall F5155f is a plate-like body, and is formed in a curved shape that protrudes toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) when viewed from above. The ends of the restriction wall F5155f on both sides in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) are connected to the ends of the straight part F5155e1 provided on the back side of the holding part F5155e, and the center of the restriction wall F5155f in the left-right direction. The end is disposed above the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1 of the main body F5155d (in the direction of arrow U).
As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) from the holding portion F5155e to the recess F5155d1 of the main body F5155d along the regulating wall F5155f is moved toward the inner peripheral surface side of the recess F5155d1, in other words, the center of the recess F5155d1 (through hole F5155d2). The ball can be guided (thrown, flowed down) to a position different from the axis. As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the recess F5155d1 can be displaced along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1 (difficult to displace toward the central axis of the recess F5155d1), and guided to the recess F5155d1. It is possible to lengthen the time required for the (thrown ball, flowing down) ball to pass through the through hole F5155d2.

The weight F5156 is for adjusting the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member F5155, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. By disposing the weight F5156 on the center side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) from the rotation axis of the ball bearing F5152b, the center of gravity of the displacement member F5155 and the weight F5156 as a whole is on the rear side ( arrow B).
The slide member F5157 is for connecting the displacement member F5155 and the opening/closing member F5158. The left slide member F5157L includes a slide main body portion F5157a, a first engaging portion F5157b disposed below the slide main body portion F5157a (direction of arrow D), and an upper side of the slide main body portion F5157a (direction of arrow U). and a second engaging portion F5157c disposed on the side).
The right slide member F5157R is formed in the same manner as the left slide member F5157L, except that the second engaging portion F5157c is omitted and the engaged portion F5157d is provided. Therefore, with respect to the right slide member F5157R, only the engaged portion F5157d will be described, and detailed description of other portions will be omitted.
The slide main body F5157a is formed of a plate-like body, and both ends of the slide main body F5157a in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) are bent toward the rear side. A first insertion hole F5157a1 is formed in the plate thickness direction at the portion bent to the rear side. A slide rod F5153 is inserted (engaged) in the first insertion hole F5157a1, whereby the slide member F5157 is engaged displaceably along the extending direction of the slide rod F5153.

The lower end of the slide main body F5157a is formed by bending toward the rear side, and a second insertion hole F5157a2 is formed in the plate thickness direction at the portion bent toward the rear side. The protrusion F5155c1 of the displacement member F5155 is inserted (engaged) in the second insertion hole F5157a2, thereby engaging the slide member F5157 and the displacement member F5155.
The first engaging portion F5157b is a plate-like body and extends downward (arrow D direction side) from the front end of the slide body portion F5157a. The lower end of the first engaging portion F5157b is bent toward the front side (direction of arrow F), and an insertion hole F5157b1 is formed in the bent portion.
The protrusion F5158c of the opening/closing member F5158 is inserted (engaged) in the insertion hole F5157b1, thereby engaging the slide member F5157 and the opening/closing member F5158. The insertion hole F5157b1 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the projecting portion F5158c of the opening/closing member F5158 is inserted (engaged) so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction.
The second engaging portion F5157c is a plate-like body and extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the front end of the slide body portion F5157a. Further, the upper end of the second engaging portion F5157c is bent toward the front side (direction of arrow F), and an insertion hole F5157c1 is formed in the bent portion. The shaft portion F5154a1 of the distribution member F5154 is inserted (engaged) in the insertion hole F5157c1, thereby engaging the slide member F5157 and the distribution member F5154.

The engaged portion F5157d is formed of a plate-like body. An insertion hole is formed in the engaged portion F5157d, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the first engaging portion F5157b, thereby fixing the engaged portion F5157d to the first engaging portion F5157b ( installed).
The right side (arrow R direction side) of the engaged portion F5157d is bent toward the rear side (arrow B direction side), and a magnetic body (not shown) made of a magnetic material is formed at the bent portion. ) are provided. The magnetic body is magnetically attached to the magnetic body F5164 of the maintaining means F5160, thereby engaging (fixing) the right slide member F5157R with the magnetic body F5164.
The opening/closing member F5158 is for making it difficult for the ball moving (flowing down or falling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 to pass through the inlet FOP f51. A connecting portion F5158b extending from the lower end of the portion F5158a toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and a projecting portion F5158c projecting downward (arrow D direction) from the lower surface of the connecting portion F5158b.
The blocking portion F5158a is curved along the bulging portion F5113a of the passage member F5110. In other words, the cut-off portion F5158a is formed so as to protrude toward the front side (arrow F direction) from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the center.

As a result, by contacting the blocking portion F5158a, the ball that moves (flows down and rolls) along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 It swings (moves, rolls) in the left-right direction and moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (direction of arrow F) along the curved shape of the blocking portion F5158a. As a result, the outflow surface F5112b can easily guide (throw, flow down) the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), and can make it difficult to guide it to the fifth passage FRt55 (flow It is possible to make it difficult to pass through the entrance FOP f51).
The connecting portion F5158b is a portion to be engaged (rotated) with the holding member F5159, and an insertion hole F5158b1 is formed in the connecting portion F5158b on the back side (arrow B direction side). The shaft support portion F5159c of the holding member F5159 is inserted (engaged, supported) in the insertion hole F5158b1, whereby the opening/closing member F5158 is rotatably engaged (supported) with the shaft support portion F5159c.
The protruding portion F5158c is formed in a columnar shape and arranged in the connecting portion F5158b on the front side (arrow F direction side). The protrusion F5158c is inserted into the insertion hole F5157b1 of the slide member F5157, thereby engaging the opening/closing member F5158 and the slide member F5157.
Here, since the insertion hole F5157b1 of the slide member F5157 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the slide member F5157 is displaced in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) to open and close. Even when the member F5158 (protruding portion F5158c) rotates (displaces in the front-rear direction) as the rotation shaft of the support portion F5159c of the holding member F5159, the contact between the engaging portion F5158c1 and the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole F5157b1 is suppressed. can.

In addition, the opening/closing member F5158 is attached to the slide member F5157 and the holding member F5159 by the protrusion F5158c provided on the front side (arrow F direction side) and the insertion hole F5158b1 provided on the back side (arrow B direction side). Engaged (supported). As a result, the opening/closing member F5158 can be engaged (supported) at two points spaced apart in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the posture of the opening/closing member F5158 can be stabilized.
The holding member F5159 is for rotatably engaging (rotatingly supporting) the opening/closing member F5158, and includes a fixing portion F5159a and a protruding portion F5159b protruding from the fixing portion F5159a to the front side (arrow F direction side). , and a shaft support portion F5159c projecting upward (arrow U direction side) from the projecting portion F5159b.
The fixed portion F5159a is formed of a plate-like body. An insertion hole is formed in the fixing portion F5159a, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the back member F5130, thereby fixing (arranging) the holding member F5159 to the back member F5130. The protruding portion F5159b is formed of a plate-like body, and protrudes from the front surface of the fixing portion F5159a toward the front side (arrow F direction side).
The shaft supporting portion F5159c is a portion for rotatably supporting the opening/closing member F5158, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The shaft support portion F5159c is disposed on the projecting portion F5159b in such a posture that the axial direction of the shaft support portion F5159c is parallel to the axial direction of the ball bearing F5152b.

In addition, the shaft supporting portion F5159c is arranged on the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the protruding portion F5159b. This makes it possible to shorten the extension dimension of the connection portion F5158b of the opening/closing member F5158 in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow FB). Stabilization can be achieved.
The maintaining means F5160 is for maintaining the state of the displacement means F5150 after the right slide member F5157R is displaced, and includes a shaft arrangement member F5161 and a passage member rotatably supported by the shaft arrangement member F5161. F5162, an engaging member F5163, and a magnetic body F5164 arranged in the engaging member F5163.
The shaft arrangement member F5161 is formed of a plate-like body, and includes a first wall portion F5161a arranged parallel to the rear wall portion F5131 of the rear member F5130, and a left side of the first wall portion F5161a (arrow L and a second wall portion F5161b extending from the end portion of the direction side) toward the front side (arrow F direction side).
Further, an insertion hole is formed in the shaft arrangement member F5161, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the rear member F5130, thereby fixing (arranging) the maintenance means F5160 to the rear member F5130. . A part of the insertion hole formed in the shaft arrangement member F5161 is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole formed in the fixing portion F5159a of the holding member F5159. As a result, the tapping screw for fixing (arranging) the holding member F5159 to the back member F5130 can also be used for fixing (arranging) the shaft arrangement member F5161, and the product cost can be reduced.

The first wall portion F5161a is provided with a first shaft portion F5161c that protrudes toward the rear side (arrow B direction side), and the second wall portion F5161b is provided with a first shaft portion F5161c that protrudes toward the left side (arrow L direction side). A second shaft portion F5161d protruding is provided. The first shaft portion F5161c and the second shaft portion F5161d are portions for supporting the engagement member F5163 and the passage member F5162.
The passage member F5162 is for displacing (rotating) the engaging member F5163. It is provided with a support portion F5162b and a transmission portion F5162c projecting rightward (in the direction of arrow R) from the rear end of the supported portion F5162b.
The passage portion F5162a is formed of a plate-like body, and a wall portion protruding upward (arrow U direction) is formed at an end portion other than the front side (arrow F direction side). The passage portion F5162a is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the fifth passage portion F5141 of the fifth passage member F5140, and the space defined by the passage portion F5162a and the fifth passage portion F5141 defines the fifth passage FRt55. It is formed. The ball distributed to the passage portion F5162a passes through the end on the front side (arrow F direction side) where the wall portion is not formed, and is guided to the fifth passage portion F5141 of the fifth passage member F5140 (throwing ball, flow down).
The supported portion F5162b is formed of a rod-like body extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). An insertion hole is formed in the supported portion F5162b, and the passage member F5162 is rotatably supported by the shaft arrangement member F5161 by inserting the second shaft portion F5161d into the insertion hole.

The transmission portion F5162c is formed in a cylindrical shape. By engaging the transmitting portion F5162c with the transmitted portion F5163b of the engaging member F5163, the engaging member F5163 can be displaced (rotated) with the rotation (displacement) of the passage member F5162.
The engaging member F5163 is for restricting the displacement of the right sliding member F5157R of the displacing means F5150. and a holding portion F5163c disposed at the other end in the extending direction of the supported portion F5163a.
The supported portion F5163a is formed of a rod-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). An insertion hole is formed in the shaft-supported portion F5163a, and the engagement member F5163 is rotatably supported by the shaft arrangement member F5161 by inserting the first shaft portion F5161c into the insertion hole.
The transmitted portion F5163b is disposed at the end portion of the shaft supported portion F5163a on the passage member F5162 side (arrow L direction side). The transmitted portion F5163b is composed of a connecting portion F5163b1, a pair of protrusions F5163b2 that protrude in parallel from the ends of the connecting portion F5163b1 in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD), and projecting tips of the pair of protrusions F5163b2. and an engaging portion F5163b3 protruding from the opposing surfaces of the pair of protruding portions F5163b2.

Protruding tips of the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 are curved. In addition, the distance between the facing ends of the protruding ends of the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the transmission portion F5162c of the passage member F5162. Since the transmitting portion F5162c is disposed between the pair of engaging portions F5163b3, the transmitted portion F5163b and the transmitting portion F5162c are engaged in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
Since the pair of projecting portions F5163b2 (engaging portion F5163b3) are arranged in parallel, the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 and the transmission portion F5162c are disengaged in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). (The transmission portion F5162c can be displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the pair of projecting portions F5163b2). As a result, the engagement member F5163 can be rotated around the first shaft portion F5161c as a rotation shaft in response to the rotation of the passage member F5162 around the second shaft portion F5161d as a rotation shaft.
Further, since the projecting ends of the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 are curved and the transmitting portion F5162c is formed in a columnar shape, the contact area between the pair of engaging portions F5163b3 and the transmitting portion F5162c can be reduced. The frictional force generated between the engaging portion F5163b3 and the transmission portion F5162c can be reduced. As a result, malfunction of the passage member F5162 or the engaging member F5163 and breakage of the transmitted portion F5163b or the transmitting portion F5162c can be suppressed.
The holding portion F5163c is a portion for holding (fixing) the magnetic body F5164. The holding portion F5163c is formed so as to protrude upward (arrow U direction) from an end portion of the supported portion F5163a opposite to the transmitted portion F5163b (arrow R direction side).

The magnetic body F5164 is for restricting the displacement of the right slide member F5157R, and is formed in a plate-like body made of a magnetic material such as iron, cobalt, nickel or alloys thereof. An insertion hole is formed in the magnetic body F5164, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the holding part F5163c, whereby the magnetic body F5164 is held (fixed) in the holding part F5163c.
When the right slide member F5157R is displaced toward the magnetic body F5164 (arrow R direction), the magnetic body F5164 and the magnetic body (not shown) arranged in the engaged portion F5157d of the right slide member F5157R are displaced. magnetize. As a result, it is possible to restrict the return (displacement) of the right slide member F5157R to the state before displacement.
Here, the center of gravity of the passage member F5162, the engaging member F5163, and the magnetic body F5164 of the maintaining means F5160 is located on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the second shaft portion F5161d of the shaft arrangement member F5161. . As a result, the transmission portion F5162c of the passage member F5162 rotates (displaces) downward (direction of arrow D) about the second shaft portion F5161d, and the passage portion F5162a rotates upward (direction of arrow U). Rotate (displace) toward The rotation (displacement) of the passage member F5162 is restricted by the passage portion F5162a coming into contact with the fifth passage member F5140.
Next, the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F5158 with respect to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F5155 of the displacement means F5150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1600 to 1602. FIG. The displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F5158 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 1594 to 1595 as appropriate.

FIG. 1600 shows the lower frame F5086b before displacement (rotation) of the displacement members F5155 (left displacement member F5155L and right displacement member F5155R), and FIG. 1601 shows the lower frame F5086b after displacement (rotation) of the left displacement member F5155L. 1602 shows the lower frame F5086b after displacement (rotation) of the right displacement member F5155R, and FIGS. FIG. 1600(b), FIG. 1601(b), and FIG. 1602(b) are rear views of the lower frame F5086b.
1600 to 1602, illustration of the central wall portion F5126 of the second passage member F5120 is omitted, and a state in which a portion of the third passage wall portion F5125 is broken is illustrated. In the lower frame F5086b, the state before the displacement member F5155 is displaced (rotated) is called the closed state, and the state after the displacement member F5155 is displaced (rotated) is called the open state.
As shown in FIG. 1600, in the closed state of the lower frame F5086b, the slide main body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 (the left slide member F5157L and the right slide member F5157R) contacts the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151. Displacement of the slide member F5157 is restricted, and the blocking portion F5158a of the opening/closing member F5158 is arranged at a position that can be visually recognized by the player through the inlet FOPf1 formed in the passage member F5110 when viewed from the front. In other words, the restricting portion F5151a is arranged inside the edge of the inlet FOPf51.
The distance between the facing surfaces of the pair of blocking portions F5158a is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. In other words, the pair of blocking portions F5158a are not provided on the center side in the left-right direction of the inlet FOPf51, but are provided on both sides in the left-right direction in the area surrounded by the inlet FOPf51.

As a result, even in the closed state, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 flows into the space between the pair of blocking portions F5158a facing each other and into the inlet FOPf51. , the ball can be guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140.
Further, the space between the pair of blocking portions F5158a facing each other is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the top portion of the undulations F5112a of the lower passage F5112. As a result, the ball distributed to the top of the undulation F5112a moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the undulation F5112a, and the pair of blocking portions F5158a face each other. The ball easily flows into the space and is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140.
In the closed state, the center of gravity of the displacement member F5155, the weight F5156, the slide member F5157, and the opening/closing member F5158 is located on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the ball bearing F5152b. The ball bearing F5152b is arranged so as to be inclined in a downwardly inclined direction toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and the rear side of the ball bearing F5152b is directed downward (direction of arrow D). Displace.
As a result, a downward displacement force acts on the slide main body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 (in the direction of the arrow D). As a result, the contact state between the slide body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 and the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 is maintained, and the lower frame F5086b is maintained in the closed state.

Next, the operation of the lower frame F5086b from the closed state to the open state will be described. The ball guided through the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120 is guided (thrown, flowed down) to and held by the holding portion F5155e of the displacement member F5155, whereby the displacement member F5155, the weight F5156, the slide member F5157, and the opening and closing The center of gravity of the entire member F5158 plus the ball held by the holding portion F5155e is located on the front side (arrow F direction side).
As a result, a force that displaces the body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155 downward (direction of arrow D) acts on the body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155, and the slide body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157 acts on the body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155 upward (direction of arrow U). A force displacing toward
The slide main body F5157a is displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and comes into contact with the restricting portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152, thereby restricting the displacement of the slide member F5157 and opening the lower frame F5086b. is placed (maintained) in
Here, the movement of the lower frame F5086b to the open state is such that the ball sorted (guided) from the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 moves toward the holding portion F5155e of the displacement means F5150. It is performed by guiding (throwing the ball, flowing down) to the ball and displacing (rotating) the displacement member F5155 together with the ball.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the arm portion F5155b is formed to be easily bent (the tip of the arm portion F5155b is easily displaced with respect to the pivotal support portion F5155a), and the ball is moved (flowed down or dropped) from the holding portion F5155e. Easily formed.
Here, in the lower frame F86b in the 93rd embodiment, the balls are distributed (guided) to the passage portion F131 (the third passage FRt3) of the displacement member F130, thereby moving from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, when an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1424), the displaceable member F130 is displaced, so that the first winning port 64 is easily won (open state).
On the other hand, in the lower frame F5086b in this embodiment, it is moved from the closed state to the open state by being held by the holding portion F5155e of the displacing means F5150, and an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1424). In this case, the ball is easily moved (flowed down or dropped) from the holding portion F5155e. Thus, when an impact or the like is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the first winning port 64 can be placed in a state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win a prize, so that impact or the like can be easily suppressed to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
As shown in FIGS. 1601 and 1602, in the open state of the lower frame F5086b, the blocking portion F5158a is arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the standing wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110. In other words, the blocking portion F5158a is arranged at a position that is invisible to the player through the inlet FOPf51 formed in the passage member F5110 when viewed from the front. Therefore, compared to the closed state of the lower frame F5086b, the distance between the pair of blocking portions F5158a facing each other becomes larger, and the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 moves (falls down, rolls). It is possible to make it easier for the ball to flow into the space between the pair of blocking portions F5158a facing each other and into the inflow port FOPf51.

In the open state of the lower frame F5086b, the displacement member F5155 is maintained in a displaced (rotated) state. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the open state of the lower frame F5086b.
In this way, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 is guided (thrown, (see FIG. 1590), the displacement member F5155 is displaced (rotated) from the closed state to the open state using the weight of the ball. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 can be easily made to flow into the space between the pair of blocking portions F5158a facing each other and into the inflow port FOPf51. The ball can be easily guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the member F5140 (the ball can easily enter the first winning hole 64).
Therefore, when the ball moves (flows down, rolls) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), the ball moves (flows down, rolls) in the second passage F5121 (second passage FRt52). It is possible to make the player aware of the presence or absence of it, thereby increasing interest.
The movement of the lower frame F5086b from the released state to the closed state is performed by the ball flowing out from the displacement member F5155 (the weight of the ball does not act on the displacement member F5155). Since the action of the force (gravitational force) from the open state to the closed state of the lower frame F5086b is the same as that for maintaining the open state, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the weight of the ball can be used to move the lower frame F5086b from the closed state to the open state, or from the open state to the closed state. can.
Here, in the closed state, the top of the undulation of the distribution portion F5154c of the distribution member F5154 is located to the right of the lowest height position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the first outflow surface F5114a of the passage member F5110. It is disposed at a position on the right side (arrow R direction side).
As a result, the ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) from the first outflow surface F5114a of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120. is guided by the sorting portion F5154c and moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the left displacement member F5155L.
The ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) is distributed to the left displacement member F5155L, and the left displacement member F5155L rotates around the ball bearing F5152b as the rotation axis, thereby causing the left slide. The member F5157L is displaced leftward (in the direction of the arrow L).

Further, since the second engaging portion F5157c of the left slide member F5157L and the engaged portion F5154a of the distributing member F5154 are engaged with each other, the distributing portion F5154c moves to the left side (arrow L direction side). As a result, the apex of the undulations of the distribution portion F5154c is positioned to the left (arrow L direction) of the lowest position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the first outflow surface F5114a. are placed.
In the open state, the state in which the distribution member F5154, the left displacement member F5155L, the left slide member F5157L, and the left opening/closing member F5158L operate (rotate or displace) is referred to as a "first open state."
Therefore, in the first open state, it is guided from the first outflow surface F5114a of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 (ball throwing, The ball that has flowed down is guided to the sorting portion F5154c and moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the right displacement member F5155R.
Here, in a state in which the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, the second ball (a ball following the first ball, which is the first ball flowing from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage FRt52 When the ball flowing down from the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53 flows down toward the left displacement member F5155L and collides with the left displacement member F5155L, the first ball drops from the left displacement member F5155L. (flowing down). When the first ball drops (flows down) from the left displacement member F5155L, the blocking portion F5158a returns to the closed state, making it difficult for the ball to flow into the inlet FOPf51.

In particular, in a state where the third ball is present on the fourth passage FRt54, the weight of the first ball acts on the left displacement member F5155L, and the blocking portion F5158a is opened to open the third ball to the inlet FOPf51. If the player expects the first ball to flow in, the dropout of the first ball (return to the blocking state of the blocking part F5158a) interrupts the expectation and reduces the interest in the game.
On the other hand, in a state where the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, the second ball is guided by the distribution part F5154c toward the right displacement member F5155R (flowing down, rolling). can be made That is, it is possible to restrict (suppress) the second ball from moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the left displacement member F5155R.
As a result, in a state in which the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, the left displacement member F5155L is affected by the second ball (the second ball is either the second passage FRt52 or the third ball). It is possible to prevent the first ball from falling off (flowing down) from the left displacement member F5155L due to the collision of another second ball against the left displacement member F5155L from the passage FRt53 toward the left displacement member F5155L. . That is, it is possible to prevent the state of the blocking portion F5158a from changing (from the open state to the closed state) due to the collision of the second ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the ease with which the ball flows into the inlet FOPf51 during the course of the game, thereby making the game more interesting.
In this case, when the weight of the first ball is applied to the left displacement member F5155L, the second ball may be held at a predetermined position (for example, on the first passage FRt51) (stopped from moving). .

On the other hand, the distribution part F5154c guides the second ball to the right displacement member F5155R instead of holding it at a predetermined position in a state where the weight of the first ball is applied to the left displacement member F5155L ( movement to the right side displacement member F5155R rather than the left side displacement member F5155L), the ball (for example, the third ball on the fourth passage FRt54) flowing into the inlet FOPf51 continues to change with ease. It can be done easily.
That is, when the weight of the first ball is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, the state is interrupted (the second ball collides with the left displacement member F5155L, and the first ball hits the left displacement member F5155L). while suppressing that the second ball is received by the right displacement member F5155R, and the weight of the received second ball is applied to the right displacement member F5155R. The member F5155R also makes it possible to create a state in which the sphere (third sphere) can easily flow into the inlet FOPf51. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
In addition, since the second passage wall portion F5123 and the third passage wall portion F5125 are erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53, the left displacement member F5155L is provided with the first , the ball flowing down from the second passage FRt52 or the third passage FRt53 is less likely to collide (contact) with the side surface of the left displacement member F5155L. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first ball from falling off (flowing down) from the left displacement member F5155L, and to prevent a change in the ease with which the ball flows into the inlet FOPf51. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, when another ball (second ball) comes into contact with the first ball whose weight is acting on the left displacement member F5155L, even if the first ball falls off the left displacement member F5155L, In some cases, instead of the first ball, another ball (second ball) can apply weight to the left displacement member F5155L. Further, when another ball (second ball) abuts (receives) the upper surface of the left displacement member F5155L (the portion where the ball on which the weight acts is held or rolled, the holding portion 5155e or the recess F5155d1) In some cases, another ball (second ball) can apply weight to the left displacement member F5155L in addition to or in place of the first ball on which the weight is applied. Therefore, it would be effective if another ball (second ball) could at least be less likely to collide (contact) with the side surface of the left displacement member F5155L. That is, the second passage wall portion F5123 and the third passage wall portion F5125 are effective with respect to the left displacement member F5155L that rotates about the ball bearing F5152b as the rotation axis.

In this case, the left displacement member F5155L is rotated around the ball bearing F5152b, so that the flowing portion of the second passage FRt52 (the portion where the ball flows down to the left displacement member F5155L, the second passage wall portion F5123 is not formed. ) and the flowing portion of the third passage FRt53 (the portion where the ball flows down to the left displacement member F5155L, the portion where the third passage wall portion F5125 is not formed). This makes it difficult for another ball (second ball) that has flowed down from the flow-down portion to collide (contact) the side surface of the left displacement member F5155.
The passage lengths of the second passage FRt52 and the third passage FRt53 can be arbitrarily set, and are preferably set to shorter lengths than in the present embodiment. In addition, in a state in which the size of the distributing portion F5154c (dimensions in the directions of arrows L and R) is made larger than in the present embodiment, and the weight of the first ball acts on the left displacement member F5155L, the second outflow surface A ball flowing down from F5114b (one of the pair of second outflow surfaces F5114b located on the left displacement member F5155L side) may also be configured to be guided to the right displacement member F5155R. Also, the formation of the second outflow surface F5114b may be omitted. In either case, in a state where the weight of the first ball acts on the left displacement member F5155L, it is possible to easily suppress the left displacement member F5155L from being affected by the second ball.
The ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) is distributed to the right displacement member F5155R, and the right displacement member F5155R, the right slide member F5157R, and the right opening/closing member F5158R operate (rotate, By displacing the lower frame F5086b, the lower frame F5086b is opened. Hereinafter, the state in which the right displacement member F5155R, the right slide member F5157R, and the right opening/closing member F5158R operate (rotate or displace) among the open states will be referred to as a "second open state."
In the second open state of the lower frame F5086b, a magnetic body (not shown) arranged on the engaged portion F5157d of the right slide member F5157R is magnetically attached to the magnetic body F5164 of the maintaining means F5160. As a result, the right slide member F5157R (right opening/closing member F5158R) operates (rotates and displaces) (from the second open state to the closed state) even in a state where the ball flows out (flows down) from the main body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155. operation) can be suppressed. Therefore, the lower frame F5086b is maintained in the second open state (the state in which the distance between the pair of blocking portions F5158a facing each other is increased).

As a result, the ball flows out (flows down) from the right displacement member F5155R, and moves (flows down, rolls) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) even in a state where the weight of the ball does not act on the right displacement member F5155R. It is possible to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to flow between the pair of blocking portions F5158a and into the inflow port FOPf51.
In this way, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) from the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 is transferred to the right displacement member. By moving (flowing down, rolling) toward F5155R, the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) moves (flowing down) compared to the case of moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the left displacement member F5155L. , rolling) can be easily expected to flow into the space between the pair of cut-off portions F5158a and into the inflow port FOPf51, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
Also, the ball (preceding ball) guided (thrown, flowed down) from the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110 to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120 is By moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the left displacement member F5155L, the ball succeeding the preceding ball (subsequent ball) can be moved (flowing down, rolling) toward the right displacement member F5155R. can. In other words, the following ball is guided (thrown) from the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) to the second passage F5121 (second passage FRt52) within a predetermined time after the preceding ball is distributed to the left displacement member F5155L. , flowing down) can be expected, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, in the second open state of the lower frame F5086b, the right displacement member F5155R is maintained in the displaced state, so that the player can easily understand that the lower frame F5086b is in the second open state.

Next, the operation (displacement) from the second open state to the closed state will be described. The ball flowing into the space between the pair of blocking portions F5158a and the inlet FOPf51 is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the passage portion F5162a of the maintaining means F5160, thereby causing the passage member F5162, the engaging member F5163, and the magnetic body F5164 to move the ball. is located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the second shaft portion F5161d of the shaft arrangement member F5161. As a result, the passage member F5162 rotates downward (upward) with the passage portion F5162a (transmission portion F5162c) around the second shaft portion F5161d as a rotational axis.
Due to the downward rotation of the passage portion F5162a, the holding portion F5163c of the engaging member F5163 rotates downward (in the direction of the arrow D) about the first shaft portion F5161c, and the right slide member F5157R and the holding portion F5163c rotate downward. The engagement (magnetization) with the maintaining means F5160 is released. As a result, the lower frame F5086b is arranged in a closed state.
In this way, when the lower frame F5086b is moved to the second open state (the state where it is easy to enter the first prize winning port 64), at least one ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the passage portion F5162a of the maintaining means F5160. The lower frame F5086b can be maintained in the second open state until the first winning opening 64 is won.
As a result, in the second open state, it is possible to ensure the inflow of the ball between the pair of blocking portions F5158a and into the inflow port FOPf51. In other words, it is possible to prevent the lower frame F5086b from being moved from the second open state to the closed state while the ball is not flowing between the pair of blocking portions F5158a and the inlet FOPf51. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and increase the interest in the game.

Next, the ball flowing down the lower frame F5086b will be explained. Of the balls flowing down the game area, the balls guided through the upper frame passage FRt50 (see FIG. 1589) arranged in the upper frame F5086a are guided to the upstream end of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) of the passage member F5110. It is inflow (entered ball).
The ball that has flowed (entered) into the upstream end of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) moves along the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51). It moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and flows from the first outflow surface F5114a or the second outflow surface F5114b to the second passage portion F5121 of the second passage member F5120 (second passage FRt52) or the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53).
The ball guided (thrown, flowed out) from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) moves toward the left displacement member F5155L (arrow L direction side), and contact with the curved portion F5122 to change the moving direction to the front side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the ball is guided (thrown or flowed out) to the left displacement member F5155L disposed on the front side of the second passage portion F5121.
Here, since the curved portion F5122 is formed in a curved shape that is concave toward both end sides in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) when viewed from above, it is guided to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) ( The direction of movement of the ball can be changed to the front side (arrow F direction side) while maintaining the movement speed of the thrown ball or outflow ball. As a result, the ball can be guided (thrown or outflow) to the left displacement member F5155L more quickly than when the curved portion F5122 is not formed.

In addition, since the left displacement member F5155L is pivotally supported by the ball bearing F5152b, compared to the case where the ball bearing F5152b is not provided, the left displacement after the ball is guided (thrown or flown out) to the left displacement member F5155L. The time until the member F5155L rotates (displaces) can be shortened, and the time until the first open state is reached can be shortened.
As a result, the ball that follows the ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the left displacement member F5155L continues to move (flow down, roll out) through the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) toward the left displacement member F5155L. movement) (guided from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage portion F5121 before the distributing portion F5154c is displaced), the succeeding ball is guided to the preceding ball (the ball guided to the left displacement member F5155L). ), and the preceding ball can be prevented from falling (outflowing) from the left displacement member F5155L.
The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the left displacement member F5155L rotates (displaces) together with the left displacement member F5155L around the ball bearing F5152b as a rotation axis, and is displaced toward the inlet FOPf51 side (horizontal center side). .
Here, since the ball bearing F5152b is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), the left displacement member F5155L is inclined downward toward the center from both ends in the left-right direction. (Arrow D direction side). In other words, the left displacement member F5155L is displaced along the inclination direction of the inclined portion of the lower passage F5112 of the passage member F5110.

As a result, even when the left displacement member F5155L is displaced between the lower passage F5112 and the second passage member F5120, the left displacement member F5155L and the lower passage F5112 or the second passage member F5120 are brought into contact with each other. can be made smaller. That is, the distance between the lower passage F5112 and the second passage member F5120 can be reduced, and the size of the lower frame F5086b can be reduced.
In addition, the distance (step) between the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) and the left displacement member F5155L can be reduced in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) can be easily guided (thrown, outflow) to the left displacement member F5155L.
In addition, the distance between the left displacement member F5155L and the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) can be reduced in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the impact force generated when the ball distributed from the left displacement member F5155L contacts the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) can be reduced, and damage to the lower passage F5112 can be suppressed.
The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the left displacement member F5155L is held by the holding portion F5155e. As a result, when the left displacement member F5155L rotates (displaces), it is possible to prevent the ball from falling (flowing out) from the left displacement member F5155L.

Here, referring to FIG. 1603 in addition to FIGS. 1600 to 1602, the displacement of the left displacement member F5155L and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball guided (thrown down, down) to the left displacement member F5155L will be described. . Figure 1603 is a partial top view of the left displacement member F5155L, Figure 1580(a) shows the closed state of the lower frame F5086b, Figures 1603(b) to 1603(d) show the first The left displacement member F5155L is shown in the open state.
As shown in FIG. 1603(a), the ball CB51 guided (thrown and flowed down) from the second passage F5121 (second passage FRt52) (see FIG. 1596) to the left displacement member F5155L is displaced to the left by the holding portion F5155e. It is held by the member F5155L (displacement from the holding portion F5155e is suppressed).
As shown in FIG. 1603(b), the slide main body portion F5157a of the left slide member F5157L comes into contact with the restricting portion F5152a of the second bearing member F5152, thereby restricting the displacement of the left slide member F5157L (left displacement member F5155L). The lower frame F5086b is arranged in the first open state.
In the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, the ball CB51 is maintained in a state of being held by the holding portion F5155e. In this way, when the lower frame F5086b moves from the closed state to the first open state, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the sphere CB51 is stopped (the sphere CB51 is maintained in a state held by the holding portion F5155e). ), it is possible to suppress the sphere CB51 from flowing into the through hole F5155d2. As a result, the period in which the lower frame F5086b is in the first open state can be lengthened.

It should be noted that the sphere CB51 held by the holding portion F5155e is displaced from the main body portion F5155e by inertial force acting by restricting the displacement of the left displacement member F5155L (the lower frame F5086b is arranged in the first open state). It moves (flows down, rolls) toward F5155d. In this way, the sphere CB51 can resume its movement (flowing down, rolling) by utilizing the inertial force acting on the sphere CB51 (holding by the holding portion F5155e is released), thereby releasing the holding by the holding portion F5155e. A driving device can be dispensed with.
In addition, in the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, compared to the closed state, the holding portion F5155e has a smaller downward inclination angle toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). This makes it easier to ensure the movement (downward, rolling) of the ball CB51 (easy to release the holding by the holding portion F5155e).
As shown in FIG. 1603(c), the sphere CB51 moves (flows down, rolls) while contacting the regulating wall F5155f, so that the sphere CB51 moves toward the regulating wall F5155f side (arrow B direction side) in the concave portion F5155d1. be guided. That is, the ball CB51 is guided to a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F5155d1 (the center of the through hole F5155d2).
As shown in FIG. 1603(d), the sphere CB51 is guided to a position eccentric from the axis of the recess F5155d1 (the center of the through hole F5155d2), so that the sphere CB51 orbits along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1. easy to be This can delay the sphere CB51 from flowing into the through hole F5155d2 and outflowing (flowing down) from the left displacement member F5155L. As a result, the period during which the weight of the ball CB51 acts on the left displacement member F5155L can be lengthened, and the period during which the lower frame F5086b is in the open state can be lengthened.

In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the sphere CB51 along the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1, the frictional force generated between the sphere and the inner peripheral surface of the recess F5155d1 can be used to reduce the moving speed of the ball. It is possible to delay the flow of the ball CB51 into the through hole F5155d2.
Here, the inner peripheral surface and the bottom surface F5155d3 of the recessed portion F5155d1 are formed to be flat surfaces. ) are formed identically. Therefore, there is no height difference between the inner peripheral surface and the bottom surface F5155d3 of the recessed portion F5155d1, and the ball CB51 can be easily rotated along the inner peripheral surface of the recessed portion F5155d1.
In addition, since the inner peripheral surface and the bottom surface F5155d3 of the recessed portion F5155d1 are formed continuously, in other words, the intermittent portion is not formed in the inner peripheral surface and the bottom surface F5155d3 of the recessed portion F5155d1, so that the sphere CB51 It can be easily made to circulate along the surface.
Returning from FIG. 1600 to FIG. 1602, the ball flowing down the lower frame F5086b will be described. In the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, the through hole F5155d2 (see FIG. 1596) of the left displacement member F5155L is located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110. It is arranged upward (in the direction of arrow U). As described above, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) swings ( That is, it swings (moves and rolls) on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54).

As a result, the ball distributed from the main body F5155d (through hole F5155d2) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) becomes a ball that swings (moves and rolls) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54). Contact can be suppressed.
In addition, in the first open state of the lower frame F5086b, the body portion F5155d of the left displacement member F5155L is arranged above (in the direction of arrow U) the outflow surface F5112b of the passage member F5110. As a result, the balls distributed from the main body portion F5155d can be easily flowed out (flowed down) to the game area.
Next, the second open state of the lower frame F5086b will be described. When the lower frame F5086b is operated (displaced) to the first open state, the top of the distributing portion F5154c of the distributing member F5154 is the lowest height position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the first outflow surface F5114a. It is arranged at a position on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the position. As a result, the ball guided (thrown, outflow) from the first outflow surface F5114a to the second passage portion F5121 (the second passage FRt52) moves along the inclination direction of the distribution portion F5154c toward the right displacement member F5155R (arrow R direction). side) (flowing down, rolling). As a result, the ball is guided (thrown, outflow) to the right displacement member F5155R.
Regarding the movement (rotation, displacement) of the right displacement member F5155R from when the ball is distributed to the right displacement member F5155R until it is guided (thrown, outflow) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), the operation (rotation, displacement) of the game board F5013 Since it is line (plane) symmetrical (horizontal symmetrical in FIG. 1589) with the left displacement member F5155L with respect to the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1589), detailed description thereof will be omitted. As a result, the lower frame F5086b operates (displaces) to the second open state.

Here, as the right displacement member F5155R operates (rotates and displaces), the right slide member F5157R displaces toward the holding portion F5163c of the maintaining means F5160. As a result, the magnetic body (not shown) arranged on the engaged portion F5157d of the right slide member F5157R is magnetically attached to the magnetic body F5164 of the retaining means F5160. As a result, the lower frame F5086b is maintained in the second open state even in a state where the ball flows out (flows down) from the right displacement member F5155R.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1596, the motion (displacement) of the ball guided (thrown, outflow) from the second outflow surface F5114b formed in the upper passage F5114 (first passage FRt51) will be described. A ball guided (thrown or flowed out) from the second outflow surface F5114b is first distributed (guided) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) of the second passage member F5120.
Since the second outflow surface F5114b is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side), the balls distributed (guided) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52) are It moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side, and is then distributed (guided) to the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53).
Here, the ball sorted (guided) from the second outflow surface F5114b is once guided (thrown, outflow) to the second passage portion F5121 (second passage FRt52), so that the second passage portion F5121 (second 2 passages FRt52) can be brought into contact with balls moving (flowing down, rolling) toward both ends in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR).

This makes it possible to guide (throw or outflow) the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) to the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53). In other words, the ball secondly distributed (guided) from the first outflow surface F5114a cannot be guided (thrown, outflow) to the displacement member F5155, and the lower frame F5086b is opened (first open state or second open state). open state).
As a result, the player can expect that the ball distributed (guided) from the first outflow surface F5114a and the ball distributed (guided) from the second outflow surface F5114b will not come into contact. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.
The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53) moves (flows down, rolls) from the center toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) from the ends of the 3 passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53) on both left and right direction sides to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110.
Here, an operation (displacement) range of the displacement member F5155 is formed below (in the direction of the arrow D) the ends of the third passage portion F5124 (the third passage FRt53) in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR). be done. As a result, the ball distributed (guided) from the third passage portion F5124 (third passage FRt53) can come into contact with the arm portion F5155b of the displacement member F5155 during operation (displacement).

As described above, the arm portion F5155b is formed to be easily bent (the tip of the arm portion F5155b is easily displaced with respect to the shaft support portion F5155a). The ball held by F5155e can be easily dropped (flowed out). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower frame F5086b from moving from the closed state to the open state.
Therefore, the player can expect that the ball distributed (guided) from the third passage portion F5124 (the third passage FRt53) will not come into contact with the displacement member F5155, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be done.
Returning to FIG. 1590 to FIG. 1599, description will be made. The ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) of the passage member F5110 is extended along the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54). It swings (falls down, rolls), flows into the pair of blocking portions F5158a of the opening/closing member F5158 and the inlet FOPf51, and is guided to the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140, or , flows out (flows down) from the outflow surface F5112b of the lower passage F5112 to the game area.
Here, the pair of cut-off portions F5158a are arranged at positions that can be visually recognized by the player through the inlet FOPf51 when viewed from the front. In other words, the pair of blocking portions F5158a are arranged inside the edges of the inlet FOPf51. Therefore, the balls sorted (guided) to the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) hardly flow into the inlet FOPf51 and easily flow out (flow down) from the outflow surface F5112b to the game area.

In addition, since the standing wall portion F5113 is formed with a bulging portion F5113a protruding toward the front side (arrow F direction side), the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) is formed in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). ) The ball that moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center side is imparted with a velocity component toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) by coming into contact with the bulging portion F5113a. Therefore, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) moves toward the inlet FOPf51 formed in the vertical wall portion F5113. It is difficult to flow into, and it is easy to flow out (flow down) from the outflow surface F5112b to the game area.
Here, in the closed state of the lower frame F5086b, the pair of blocking portions F5158a are arranged inside the edges of the inlet FOPf51. On the other hand, in the open state of the lower frame F5086b, the blocking portion F5158a is arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall portion F5113 of the passage member F5110, and the gap between the pair of blocking portions F5158a is higher than in the closed state. distance is increased. As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54) moves (flows down, rolls) in the open state rather than in the closed state. ), and is easily guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140 (easily won into the first winning port 64).
Therefore, the player can expect that the lower frame F5086b will be in an open state while moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F5112 (fourth passage FRt54), thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be enhanced.
The ball that has flowed into the inflow port FOPf51 (between the pair of blocking portions F5158a facing each other) is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the passage portion F5162a of the maintaining means F5160. As described above, when the ball is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the passage portion F5162a, the engaging member F5163 rotates about the first shaft portion F5161c, and the holding portion F5163c is directed downward (arrow D direction side). to rotate. As a result, when the lower frame F5086b is placed in the second open state (see FIG. 1602), the engagement (magnetization) between the right sliding member F5157R and the maintaining means F5160 is released, and the lower frame F5086b is opened. Placed in a closed state.

The ball guided (thrown and flowed down) to the passage portion F5162a of the maintaining means F5160 is then guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage portion F5141 (fifth passage FRt55) of the fifth passage member F5140, where Along the pair of projections F5141c formed in the portion F5141, it moves (flows down and rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction side), passes through the outlet FOPout1 of the passage member F5110, and passes through the first winning port 64. To win a prize (guidance, throwing ball, outflow).
Next, referring to Figures 1604 to 1616, the lower frame F6086b in the 98th embodiment will be described. In the 93rd embodiment, the inlet FOPf1 and the outlet surface F112b are formed in the same passage (fifth passage FRt5). The entrance FOP f62 is formed in each different path. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1604 is a front view of the game board F6013 in the 98th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1604, the center frame F6086 is configured in a shape that can be fitted into the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1288) of the base plate 60, and is a member fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. It has an upper frame F6086a and a lower frame F6086b.
The upper frame F6086a is disposed along the upper (upper side in FIG. 1604) and left and right (left and right side in FIG. 1604) inner edges of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 1288) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame F6086b 1604 along the inner edge of the window 60a. The third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 1425) is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame F6086a and the lower frame F6086b.

The upper frame F6086a is a portion of the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments (a portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 1604) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 1288). That is, the portion where the lower frame F6086b is disposed) is omitted, and the portions other than the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in each of the above embodiments.
Next, the lower frame F6086b will be described with reference to FIGS. 1605 to 1606 in addition to FIG. 1604. FIG. FIG. 1605 is a front perspective view of the lower frame F6086b, and FIG. 1606 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame F6086b.
As shown in FIGS. 1605 and 1606, the lower frame F6086b has a pair of first passages FRt61 formed so that the balls can move (flow down and roll), and a pair of first passages FRt61 that guide the balls. A second passage FRt62 where is moved (flows down and rolls), and a pair of third passages FRt63 and a pair of fourth passages FRt64 through which the ball guided in the second passage FRt62 moves (flows down and rolls). , a fifth passage FRt65 through which a ball guided through a pair of third passages FRt63 moves (flows down and rolls), a sixth passage FRt66 through which a ball guided through the fifth passage FRt65 flows down, and a fifth passage FRt66. An inflow port FOPf61 and an inflow port FOPf62 formed as openings through which the ball guided through the passageway FRt65 and the second passageway FRt62 is guided (inflowed and thrown) to the sixth passageway FRt66 and the fourth passageway FRt64, the sixth passageway FRt66 and An outflow port FOPout1 and an outflow port FOPout62, which are formed as openings for the balls flowing down the fourth passage FRt64 to flow out to the game area, are formed.
The pair of first passages FRt61, the pair of third passages FRt63, and the pair of fourth passages FRt64 are line (plane) symmetrical (laterally symmetrical in FIG. 1604) with respect to the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. ), respectively.

An upper frame passage FRt60 is provided in the upper frame F6086a (see FIG. 1604). The upper frame passage FRt60 is a passage that guides balls flowing down the game area, and the upstream end of the first passage FRt61 communicates with the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt60.
That is, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passage FRt60 from the game area flows (entered) from the upper frame passage FRt60 into the first passage FRt61 of the lower frame F6086b via the upstream end of the first passage FRt61. be done.
Although not shown, the upper frame passages FRt60 are arranged in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 1604) with respect to the center of the game board F6013 in the width direction (right-left direction in FIG. 1604). Therefore, the ball that has flowed (entered) from the game area into the upper frame passage FRt60 is transferred from the upper frame passage FRt60 arranged on the right side of the game board F6013 (the right side in FIG. 1604) to the right side of the game board F6013. is flowed (entered) into the first passage FRt61 arranged in the .
Here, the outlet FOPout1, which is the outlet of the sixth passage FRt66 (the opening through which the balls flow out to the game area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize winning opening 64 . Therefore, the balls that pass through the inflow port FOPf61 of the fifth path FRt65 and are distributed from the fifth path FRt65 to the sixth path FRt66 easily enter the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is high).

In addition, the second passage FRt62 is formed as a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) at a position vertically above the first winning port 64 ( placed). Therefore, a ball guided (thrown or flowed down) along the outflow surface F6112b of the second passage FRt62 easily enters the first winning port 64 (high probability of winning the first winning port 64).
On the other hand, the outflow port FOPout62, which is the exit of the fourth passage FRt64 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is positioned differently in the width direction of the game board F6013 (horizontal direction in FIG. 1604) with respect to the first winning port 64. are formed (arranged) at two locations. Therefore, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the fourth path FRt64 has a high probability of flowing out to the game area, and as a result, it is difficult to enter the first winning port 64 (passing through the above-described inlet FOPf1 and entering the first winning port 64). The probability of winning the first winning port 64 is lower than the balls distributed from the 5th passage FRt65 to the 6th passage FRt66).
An undulation F6112a is formed in the second passage FRt62, and the bottom of the undulation F6112a is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) of the inlet FOPf62. In addition, the second passage FRt62 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side (direction of arrow B, side opposite to the game area), and the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the bottom of the undulation is The probability of being sorted to the fourth passage FRt64 is high.
Also, the outflow surface F6112b is formed at the top of the undulations F6112a. Therefore, the ball sorted to the second passage FRt62 is more likely to flow out from the bottom of the undulation F6112a to the fourth passage FRt64 than to be thrown from the outflow surface F6112b to the first winning port 64.

As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the bottom of the undulation is difficult to enter the first winning port 64 (passing through the above-mentioned inflow port FOPf61 and being distributed from the fifth passage FRt65 to the sixth passage FRt66 The probability of winning the first winning port 64 is lower than the balls or the balls distributed from the outflow surface F6112b of the second passage FRt62).
A contact portion F6154 is formed (arranged) in the third passage FRt63 for guiding (throwing or flowing down) the ball distributed to the third passage FRt63 to the fifth passage FRt65. The third passage FRt63 is formed in a curved shape that is concave downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D), and the contact portion F6154 is arranged at the end of the third passage FRt63 opposite to the first passage FRt61. is set.
When the velocity (kinetic energy) of the ball distributed from the first path FRt61 to the third path FRt63 is greater than a predetermined amount, the ball moves the curved surface of the third path FRt63 upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U). It moves (flows down, rolls) and comes into contact with the contact portion F6154. As a result, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball is changed, and the ball is distributed to the fifth passage FRt65.
In addition, on the curved bottom surface of the third passage FRt63, an outflow surface F6114a is formed (arranged) as a concave surface inclined downward toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F). ) is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, it cannot contact the contact portion F6154 and is distributed from the outflow surface F6114a to the second passage FRt62.

An inflow port FOPf61 and a pair of insertion holes F6121b are formed (arranged) in the fifth passage FRt65. The ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the 6th passage FRt66 or the second passage FRt62.
In addition, the pair of insertion holes F6121b are formed (arranged) at two locations with different positions in the width direction of the game board F6013 (horizontal direction in FIG. ) is done. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the pair of insertion holes F6121b is difficult to be guided to the top (outflow surface F6112b) of the undulations F6112a of the second passage FRt62, and is easily guided from the bottom of the undulations F6112a to the fourth passage FRt64 (first winning opening The odds of winning 64 are low).
On the lower frame F6086b, the contact portion F6173b formed on the displacement member F6173 of the distributing means F6170 that operates by the weight of the ball is arranged at a position vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the contact portion F6154. (see FIG. 1616), and when the contact portion F6173b is arranged in the third passage FRt63, the curved surface of the third passage FRt63 moves vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) (flowing down, Even if the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball rolling) is less than a predetermined amount, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball is changed by contacting the contact portion F6173b, and the ball moves to the fourth passage FRt64. distributed to.
Therefore, even if the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) along the extending direction of the third passage FRt63 is less than or equal to a predetermined amount, the distribution means F6170 (displacement member F6173) By operating, the ball can be easily guided to the fifth passage FRt 65 (throwing the ball, flowing down) (probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is increased). As a result, the player can expect that the sorting means F6170 (displacement member F6173) will operate while the ball is moving (flowing down, rolling) in the third path FRt63, which enhances the interest of the game. can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1607 to 1614 in addition to FIGS. 1605 to 1606, the detailed configuration of the lower frame F6086b will be described.
FIG. 1607 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame F6086b, and FIG. 1608 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame F6086b. FIG. 1609 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting means F6170, and FIG. 1610 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting means F6170. FIG. 1611 is a top view of the lower frame F6086b, FIG. 1612 is a front view of the lower frame F6086b, and FIG. 1613 is a rear view of the lower frame F6086b. FIG. 1614(a) is a side view of the lower frame F6086b viewed in the direction of arrow MDCCIa in FIG. 1612, and FIG. 1614(b) is a side view of the lower frame F6086b viewed in the direction of arrow MDCCIb in FIG. FIG. 1614(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame F6086b taken along line MDCCIc-MDCCIc in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 1605 to 1614, the lower frame F6086b includes a passage member F6110 and a fifth passage member F6120 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upright wall portion F6113 of the passage member F6110. , a sixth passage member F6130 disposed below the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110 (arrow D direction side), and a sixth passage member F6130 disposed on the back side (arrow D direction side) of the sixth passage member F6130 An intermediate passage member F6140, a rear member F6150 arranged on the rear side of the intermediate passage member F6140, and a pair of first passages arranged on both sides of the rear member F6150 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). It comprises a member F6160 and a sorting means F6170 arranged on the back side of the back member F6150.
The passage member F6110 is formed with an outflow port FOPout1 and an outflow port FOPout62. is inserted. An inlet FOPf61 and an inlet FOPf62 are formed in the passage member F6110, and the inlet FOPf61 and the inlet FOPf62 are arranged at positions corresponding to the first recess F6141 and the second recess F6142 of the intermediate passage member F6140, respectively. be done.

A through hole F6143 is formed in the intermediate passage member F6140 and the rear member F6150, and the displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170 is inserted through the through hole F6143. Further, an insertion hole F6151b is formed in the rear member F6150, and a displacement member F6173 of the distribution means F6170 is inserted through the insertion hole F6151b.
A fifth passage member F6120 and a rear member F6150 are fastened and fixed to the passage member F6110 by tapping screws. The sixth passage member F6130 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate passage member F6140 by tapping screws, and the intermediate passage member F6140, the first passage member F6160 and the distribution means F6170 are respectively fastened and fixed to the rear member F6150 by tapping screws. With these, the lower frame F6086b is configured as one (single) unit (see FIGS. 1605 and 1606).
In the lower frame F6086b, the passage member F6110, the fifth passage member F6120, the sixth passage member F6130, the rear member F6150, the first passage member F6160, and the displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170 are light transmissive (that is, the rear side The intermediate passage member F6140 and the displacement member F6173 of the distributing means F6170 are made of a colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball moving from the first passage FRt61 to the sixth passage FRt66, and the movement of the displacing member F6173 of the distribution means F6170 can be visually confirmed by the player, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can.
The intermediate passage member F6140 and the displacement member F6173 of the distribution means F6170 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and the front surface thereof is painted or a seal is attached. can be

On the other hand, in the lower frame F6086b, the intermediate passage member F6140 located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the connecting member F6175 of the distribution means F6170 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or By painting or attaching a sticker, the connecting member F6175 of the sorting means F6170 can be made invisible to the player from the front side. The intermediate passage member F6140 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material so that the connection member F6175 of the sorting means F6170 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side.
The passage member F6110 is for forming the second passage FRt62 and the third passage FRt63. , a standing wall portion F6113 extending vertically upward (arrow U direction) from substantially the center in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the lower passage F6112; The upper passage F6114 extends to the side (arrow B direction side), and the lower passage F6112 protrudes vertically downward (arrow D direction) from the ends of the left and right direction (arrow LR direction) both ends. and a pair of fasteners F6115.
A space defined by the front plate F6111, the lower passage F6112, the vertical wall portion F6113, and the rear member F6150 forms a second passage FRt62, and a space divided by the upper passage F6114 and the rear member F6150 forms a third passage FRt63. be done.
A plurality of insertion holes F111a are formed in the front plate F6111 in the plate thickness direction, and an outlet FOPout1 and an outlet FOPout62 are formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction). The outflow port FOPout1 in this embodiment is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the sixth passage FRt66 flows out (flows down) to the game area, and the outflow port FOPout62 is guided through the fourth passage FRt64. It is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball flows out (flows down) to the game area.

In the front plate F6111, a notch F6111b whose shape in front view is substantially the same as the shape of the outflow surface F6112b of the lower passage F6112 is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the outflow surface F6112b. The ball guided through the second passage FRt62 is thrown to the first winning hole 64 by passing through the notch F6111b.
The lower passage F6112 is a portion for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on the upper surface thereof, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). Further, the lower passage F6112 is formed so as to be inclined downward from both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward the center. As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the lower passage F6112 can be swung (moved, rolled) in the left-right direction while being brought into contact with the back surface member F6150 or the vertical wall portion F6113.
In addition, an undulation F6112a is formed substantially in the center in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F6112, and the top of the undulation F6112a is lowered toward the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) An outflow surface F6112b is formed (arranged) as an inclined concave surface.
In addition, the bottom portion of the undulation F6112a, in other words, the boundary between the undulation F6112a and the portion that is inclined downward from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the center, is the inlet of the upright wall portion F6113. It is formed (arranged) in front of the FOP f 62 (direction of arrow F). Therefore, the ball distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) passes through the inlet FOPf62 of the vertical wall portion F6113 from the bottom of the undulation F6112a rather than being guided from the outflow surface F6112b to the first winning port 64. is easily guided to the fourth passage FRt64 (easily flowed out to the game area).

The vertical wall portion F6113 is a portion for connecting the lower passage F6112 and the upper passage F6114. Both ends of the upper passage F6114 in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) are flush with the lower passage F6112. It is formed. In other words, the horizontal extension length of the vertical wall portion F6113 is formed to be smaller than the horizontal extension length of the lower passage F6112.
An inlet FOPf61 and a pair of inlets FOPf62 are formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) in the vertical wall portion F6113. The dimension of the inlet FOPf61 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) is slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere. The dimension of the inlet FOPf62 in the left-right direction is approximately twice the outer shape of the sphere. As described above, the inflow port FOPf61 and the inflow port FOPf62 are openings serving as exits when the ball guided through the fifth passage FRt65 flows out to the sixth passage FRt66.
The vertical wall portion F6113 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes toward the front side (direction of arrow F). direction) passes through the undulation F6112a of the lower passage F6112, a velocity component to the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side) is given to the ball. . As a result, the ball passing through the undulation F6112a can be easily guided to the outflow surface F6112b (the first prize winning opening 64), and can be difficult to be guided to the fourth passage FRt64.
The upper end of the vertical wall portion F6113 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. This allows the ball guided to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to flow out (fall down) from the front of the upper passage F6114 to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62).

The upper passage F6114 is a portion for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is formed in a curved shape that is concave downward (direction of arrow D). In addition, both ends of the upper passage F6114 in the left and right direction (arrow LR direction) are formed flush with the upper surface of the lower passage F6112, thereby moving (flowing down, turning) the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62). (moving) can be easily sorted (easily guided) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63).
Further, the upper passage F6114 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear member F6150 (arrow B direction side). As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) flows out (flows down, rolls) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62). drop) can be difficult.
A contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) on the central side (in the direction of arrows LR) of the upper passage F6114. When the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 from both left and right ends toward the center is greater than a predetermined amount, the ball can contact the contact portion F6154.
On the other hand, when the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) in the upper passage F6114 from both left and right ends toward the center is smaller than a predetermined amount, the ball does not contact the contact portion F6154. , and moves (flows down, rolls) toward both ends in the left-right direction along the curved shape of the upper passage F6114. In other words, the ball swings (moves, rolls) along the direction in which the upper passage F6114 extends (direction of arrows LR).

In addition, at the lowest position (curved recess) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the upper passage F6114, there is a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side). An outflow surface F6114a is formed (arranged). Therefore, among the balls distributed to the upper passage F6114, the balls that do not come into contact with the contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150 are guided (thrown or flowed down) from the outflow surface F6114a to the lower passage F6112.
A notch F6114b is formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the upper passage F6114. The inner peripheral surface of the notch F6114b is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the contact portion F6173b formed in the displacement member F6173 of the distribution means F6170. Displaceable from the bottom side of the passage F6114 to the top side.
In the upper passage F6114, the upper passage F6114 on the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) central side of the outflow surface F6114a is referred to as a first inclined portion F6114c, and the upper passage F6114 on both left and right end sides thereof is referred to as a second inclined portion F6114d. Each will be described with reference numerals.
An insertion hole F115a is formed in the fastening portion F6115 in the plate thickness direction, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole F115a is fastened to the back member F6150, thereby fixing (arranging) the back member F6150 to the passage member F6110. ) is done.

The fastening portion F6115 is arranged in contact with the rear surface of the base plate 60 . Further, the lower passage F6112 is formed continuously from one end to the other end in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) of the front plate F6111. These prevent foreign matter such as wires from entering. The fastening portion F6115 may be arranged at a predetermined distance from the back surface of the base plate 60, and the fastening portion F6115 and the back surface of the base plate 60 may be non-contact.
The fifth passage member F6120 is for forming the fifth passage FRt65. connecting portions F6123 protruding toward the back member F6150 side (arrow B direction side) from both ends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). A colored member F6124 is arranged in front of the wall portion F6122. A space defined by the fifth passage portion F6121, the wall portion F6122, and the standing wall portion F6113 of the passage member F6110 forms a fifth passage FRt65.
The fifth passage portion F6121 is a portion for the ball to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is formed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The fifth passage portion F6121 is formed with an outflow surface F6121a and a pair of insertion holes F6121b arranged on both sides of the outflow surface F6121a in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR).
The fifth passage portion F6121 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 from coming into contact with the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage portion F6121). In addition, the fifth passage portion F6121 is arranged below (in the direction of arrow D) the contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150. As a result, the ball in contact with the contact portion F6154 can be guided (thrown or flowed down) to the fifth passage portion F6121.

The central side of the fifth passage portion F6121 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) is formed to protrude toward the front side (direction of arrow F), and a pair of insertion holes F6121b are formed in the protruding portion. The size of the portion between the end (upright wall portion F6113) of the fifth passage portion F6121 on the back side (arrow B direction side) and the insertion hole F6121b is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and the sphere moves in this portion. (flowing down, rolling) is formed.
The fifth passage portion F6121 is formed so as to slope downward from both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward the central side, and slope downward toward the vertical wall portion F6113 (direction of arrow B). formed by
The outflow surface F6121a is formed as a concave surface that is substantially in the center of the fifth passage portion F6121 in the left-right direction and is formed in a position that is the front side (arrow F direction side) of the inflow port FOPf61 of the vertical wall portion F6113. Therefore, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage portion F6121 is easily guided (thrown, outflow) to the outflow surface F6121a, and is guided (thrown) to the first concave portion F6141 (inflow port FOP f61) of the intermediate passage member F6140. , outflow).
The insertion hole F6121b is a part for causing the balls distributed to the fifth passage portion F6121 to flow out (flow down, drop) to the lower passage F6112. As a result, the balls distributed to the fifth passage portion F6121 can be unguided to the first concave portion F6141 (inflow port FOP f61) of the intermediate passage member F6140, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

The insertion hole F6121b may not be formed in the fifth passage portion F6121. As a result, the ball guided (thrown or flowed out) to the fifth passage member F6120 can be reliably guided (throwed or flowed down) to the first concave portion F6141 (first winning port 64) of the intermediate passage member F6140.
The wall portion F6122 is a portion for suppressing the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the fifth passage portion F6121 from flowing out (flowing down) to the lower passage F6112. The height is formed smaller than the outline of the sphere. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the fifth passage portion F6121.
On the wall portion F6122, a protrusion F6122a is formed at a position above the outflow surface F6121a (in the direction of the arrow U) (between the pair of insertion holes F6121b facing each other) so as to protrude toward the inlet FOP f61 side (in the direction of the arrow B). be done. By coming into contact with the protrusion F6122a, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the fifth passage portion F6121 can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the back side (arrow B direction side), It can be made difficult to be guided to the insertion hole F6121b.
The connecting portion F6123 is a portion for fixing (arranging) the fifth passage member F6120 to the back member F6150. The dimension between the lower end of the connecting portion F6123 and the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 from coming into contact with the connecting portion F6123.

The colored member F6124 is made of a colored resin material. As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) in the fifth passage portion F6121 passes through the inflow port FOPf61 from the outflow surface F6121a and is guided (thrown, outflow) to the sixth passage FRt66, or the insertion hole F6121b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the ball passes through (falls down) to the lower passage F6112, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.
The sixth passage member F6130 is for causing the balls sorted (guided) from the intermediate passage member F6140 to flow out to the game area, and the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the sixth passage member F6130 Approximately the center and a pair of fourth passage portions F6132 formed on both lateral sides of the sixth passage portion F6131.
The sixth passage portion F6131 is a portion for flowing out the balls distributed from the first recess F6141 of the intermediate passage member F6140 to the game area, and the bottom portion F6131a extending in the left and right direction (arrow LR direction) and a pair of wall portions F6131b projecting upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from both left and right ends of the bottom portion F6131a, and are formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. The distance between the facing surfaces of the pair of walls F6131b is slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and the space defined by the bottom surface F6131a, the pair of walls F6131b, and the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110 forms a sixth passage FRt66. (part of) is formed.
The sixth passage portion F6131 is arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the outflow port FOPout1 of the passage member F6110. As a result, the balls sorted (guided) to the sixth passage portion F6131 pass through the outflow port FOPout1 and flow out to the game area.

A pair of protrusions F6131c are provided on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion F6131a so as to be spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR). The protrusion F6131c extends linearly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the upper surface of the protrusion F6131c is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction). be. In addition, the distance between the facing surfaces of the pair of protrusions F6131c is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the length of the protrusion F6131c at the front end (dimension in the direction of arrow UD) is equal to that of the bottom surface F6131a. is set to a depth where the sphere does not touch the bottom surface of
As a result, the ball on the bottom surface portion F6131a can be positioned at two points (a pair of ridge line portions on the upper end portion of the protrusion F6131c on the opposite surface side). Therefore, compared to the case where the pair of projections F6131c are not formed, it is possible to easily keep the moving (flowing down, rolling) position of the ball constant in the width direction (arrow LR direction) of the sixth passage portion F6131. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the outflow port FOPout1 of the passage member F6110 can be easily led to the first winning port 64 (guided).
The fourth passage portion F6132 is a portion for causing the balls distributed from the displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170 to flow out to the game area, and the bottom portion F6132a extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and a side wall portion F6132b protruding upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the central end of the bottom portion F6132a in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and from the end of the bottom portion F6132a on the back side. A rear wall F6132c protruding upward, a curved portion F6132d connecting the side wall F6132b and the rear wall F6132c, and a regulation wall F6132e protruding upward from the upper surface of the rear wall F6132c. . A space defined by the bottom portion F6132a, the side wall portion F6132b, the rear wall F6132c, the curved portion F6132d, and the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110 forms (a part of) the fourth passage FRt64.
The fourth passage portion F6132 is arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the outflow port FOPout62 of the passage member F6110. As a result, the balls sorted (guided) to the fourth passage portion F6132 pass through the outflow port FOPout62 and flow out to the game area.

A concave portion F6132a1 is formed on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion F6132a so as to be concave downward (arrow D direction side) along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The concave portion F6132a1 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side). can be drained to
Further, the recessed portion F6132a1 is formed substantially in the center of the bottom portion F6132a in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the movement (flowing down, rolling) position of the ball distributed (guided) to the fourth passage portion F6132 can be substantially the center of the fourth passage portion F6132 in the left-right direction.
Here, due to factors such as an error (assembly tolerance) when fixing the sixth passage member F6130 to the intermediate passage member F6140 and an error (assembly tolerance) when fixing the passage member F6110 to the base plate 60, the fourth The relative positions of the passage portion F6132 and the outflow port FOPout62 are different from the designed positions, and the ball moving (flowing down or rolling) in the fourth passage portion F6132 hits the front plate F6111 of the passage member F6110. There is a risk of contact. In this case, the balls tend to stay in the fourth passage portion F6132, making it difficult for the balls to be distributed (guided) from the displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170 to the fourth passage portion F6132. Therefore, there is a possibility that the ball will stay in the displacement passage member F6174.
On the other hand, a concave portion F6132a1 is formed on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion F6132a, and the ball moves (flows down, rolls) in the approximate center of the fourth passage portion F6132 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). Contact with the front plate F6111 of the passage member F6110 can be suppressed, and the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the fourth passage portion F6132 can be easily discharged into the game area. As a result, the ball can be easily distributed (guided) from the displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170 to the fourth passage portion F6132, and the retention of the ball in the displacement passage member F6174 can be suppressed.

An insertion hole is formed in the rear wall F6132c, and a tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the intermediate passage member F6140, thereby fixing (arranging) the sixth passage member F6130 to the intermediate passage member F6140. .
The curved portion F6132d is formed in a curved shape that is concave toward the center side (back side) in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). By contacting the curved portion F6132d, the ball can be guided to the front side (arrow F direction side) without reducing the speed of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) toward the center in the left-right direction. This makes it difficult for the ball to stay in the fourth passage portion F6132, and makes it difficult for the ball to stay in the displacement passage member F6174.
The regulation wall F6132e is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and has a linear portion extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) and a front side (arrow (F direction side). A ball distributed (guided) from the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110 is brought into contact with the bent portion of the regulation wall F6132e so that the ball is directed to both left and right direction sides (displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170). It is possible to restrict the displacement of the ball through the inlet FOPf62, and increase the time required for the ball passing through the inlet FOPf62 to be distributed (guided) to the displacement passage member F6174.
As a result, while the balls distributed (guided) to the displacement passage member F6174 are moving (flowing down, rolling) in the displacement passage member F6174, in other words, from the displacement passage member F6174 to the fourth passage portion F6132 Before being distributed (guided), the ball following the ball distributed to the displacement passage member F6174 can be easily guided (flowed) into the lower frame F6086b.

The intermediate passage member F6140 distributes (guided) balls distributed (guided) from the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 and the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110 to the sixth passage portion F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130. It is for guiding (throwing the ball, flowing down) to the displacement passage member F6174 of the dividing means F6170.
The intermediate passage member F6140 has a first recess F6141 formed substantially in the center of the intermediate passage member F6140 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and a pair of second recesses F6141 formed on both sides in the left-right direction of the first recess F6141. A concave portion F6142 and a pair of through holes F6143 formed below the second concave portion F6142 (arrow D direction side) are provided.
A space defined by the first recess F6141 and the vertical wall F6113 of the passage member F6110 forms (a part of) a sixth passage FRt66, and a space defined by the second recess F6142 and the vertical wall F6113 forms a fourth passage. FRt64 (part of) is formed.
The first concave portion F6141 is formed so as to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere toward the back side (arrow B direction side). In addition, the first recess F6141 extends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). , on the rear side of the sixth passage portion F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130. As a result, the balls distributed from the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (the inflow port FOPf61 of the passage member F6110) are guided to the sixth passage portion F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130 by utilizing the weight of the ball. (throwing the ball, flowing down) can be done.

The second concave portion F6142 is formed so as to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere toward the back side (arrow B direction side). A rolling surface F6142a, which is formed as a surface on which the ball abuts in the second concave portion F6142, is inclined downward toward both end sides in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the ball sorted from the lower passage F6112 (inflow port FOPf62) of the passage member F6110 can be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the displacement passage member F6174 of the sorting means F6170 by utilizing the weight of the ball.
The through hole F6143 is a portion for inserting the displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170. By inserting through the through hole F6143, the displacement passage member F6174 of the distribution means F6170 can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the intermediate passage member F6140.
The back member F6150 is for supporting the fifth passage member F6120, the intermediate passage member F6140, the first passage member F6160, and the distribution means F6170. −R direction) A pair of side plates F6152 arranged at both ends, a lower plate F6153 arranged at the lower end of the rear plate F6151, a contact portion F6154 protruding from the front of the rear plate F6151, and the rear plate F6151 and a protruding plate F6155 protruding from the rear surface of the.
The rear plate F6151 is composed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). A recessed portion F6151a recessed toward the rear side (arrow B direction) is formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the rear plate F6151 on the center side in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the recess F6151a is not formed, in other words, the recess F6151a is formed so that the upper side is open, and the lower end of the connecting member F6175 of the distribution means F6170 passes through the open portion to reach the front side of the recess F6151a (arrow F direction side).

Further, the rear plate F6151 has an insertion hole F6151b at a position below the contact portion F6154 (arrow D direction side) and on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the notch F6114b of the passage member F6110. Perforated in the thickness direction. The insertion holes F6151b are formed to extend toward both ends in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR), and the contact portions F6173b of the distributing means F6170 are inserted through the insertion holes F6151b.
The side plate F6152 is composed of a plate-like body extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the lower end of the side plate F6152 is connected to the lower plate F6153. A pair of projections F6152a are formed on the surface of the side plate F6152 opposite to the facing surface.
The protrusions F6152a are formed in a columnar shape and arranged at a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The first passage member F6160 is fixed (arranged) to the rear member F6150 by fitting the projection F6152a into the fixing hole F6164a of the first passage member F6160.
The lower plate F6153 is composed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The lower plate F6153 is connected to the pair of side plates F6152, and no gap is formed between the lower plate F6153 and the pair of side plates F6152.

The front surface of the lower plate F6153 and the front surface of the pair of side plates F6152 are flush with each other, and the front surfaces of the lower plate F6153 and the pair of side plates F6152 are in contact with the rear surface of the base plate 60 . These prevent foreign matter such as wires from entering the inside of the back member F6150.
The pair of side plates F6152 and the lower plate F6153 may be arranged in a non-connected (non-contact) manner, and a gap may be formed between the lower plate F6153 and the pair of side plates F6152. Further, the front surface of the lower plate F6153 and the front surfaces of the pair of side plates F6152 are not flush with each other, and the front surface of the lower plate F6153 or the front surface of the pair of side plates F6152 are not in contact with the rear surface of the base plate 60. good.
The contact portion F6154 is a portion for distributing the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 to the fifth passage member F6120. The contact portion F6154 is arranged at a predetermined distance from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. The predetermined distance is set larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 can be brought into contact with the contact portion F6154. In addition, it is possible to suppress the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 from getting over the contact portion F6154.
The contact portion F6154 is composed of a plate-like body. The contact portion F6154 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward both end sides in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and is arranged substantially parallel to the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. The lower surface of the contact portion F6154 in the inclination direction, in other words, the surface facing the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, has the upper surface in the inclination direction (the ball that moves on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114). A curved surface F6154a that is concave toward the direction of approaching is formed.

The ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 and contacts the curved surface F6154a of the contact portion F6154 is oriented so that the movement (flows down, rolls) direction of the ball is the front side (arrow F direction side). , whereby the ball is distributed (guided) from the upper passage F6114 to the fifth passage member F6120.
The protruding plate F6155 is a part for regulating the displacement of the weight support member F6176 of the distribution means F6170, and is composed of a plate-like body. The upward displacement of the weight support member F6176 (in the direction of the arrow U) is regulated by the weight support member F6176 contacting the lower surface of the projecting plate F6155.
The first passage member F6160 is for guiding (throwing or flowing down) the ball distributed (guided) from the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1604) to the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110. The first passage member F6160 includes a groove portion F6161 communicating with the downstream end of the upper frame passage FRt60, a recess portion F6162 communicating with the downstream end of the groove portion F6161, a guide portion F6163 projecting from the lower surface of the recess portion F6162, and a fixed portion. and a part F6164. A space defined by the groove F6161 and the recess F6162 forms a first passage FRt61.
The groove portion F6161 is formed in a groove shape, and the groove shape of the groove portion F6161 is formed (recessed) approximately the same as the external shape of a sphere. Further, the groove F6161 is inclined downward from the upstream end (the end communicating with the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1604)) to the downstream end (the end communicating with the recess F6162). be done. As a result, the weight of the ball can be used to move (flow down or roll) the ball distributed from the upper frame passage FRt60 toward the concave portion F6162.

The groove depth (dimension in the direction of arrows UD) of the groove portion F6161 is formed substantially equal to the radius of the sphere. As a result, the ball distributed (guided) from the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1604) can be moved (flowed down, rolled) along the groove F6161, and the portion (groove) other than the downstream end of the groove F6161 It is possible to prevent the ball from being guided (thrown or flowed down) from the portion between the upstream end and the downstream end of F6161 to the concave portion F6162.
The groove portion F6161 is formed of a straight portion extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and a curved portion curved from the downstream end of the straight portion. The curved portion of the groove portion F6161 is formed so as to be connected to the concave side surface of the concave portion F6162.
The recess F6162 is formed in a cylindrical shape that is open upward (in the direction of arrow U), and the bottom surface of the recess F6162 is formed in a mortar shape that is concave downward (in the direction of arrow D). A pair of insertion holes F6162a are formed in the bottom surface of the recess F6162 at a distance larger than the outer shape of the sphere from the side surface of the recess.
As described above, the curved portion of the groove portion F6161 and the concave side surface of the concave portion F6162 are connected to each other, so that the balls sorted (guided) from the groove portion F6161 are distributed along the inner peripheral surface of the concave portion F6162. It can be moved (flowing down, rolling). This makes it difficult to pass through the pair of insertion holes F6162a. As a result, the distance between the first ball passing through the pair of insertion holes F6162a and the second ball that follows the first ball can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less.

The insertion hole F6162a is a part for distributing (guiding) the ball from the concave portion F6162 to the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110, and is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. A pair of insertion holes F6162a are formed at a predetermined interval in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) from the center axis of the recess F6162.
The hole formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is distinguished from the insertion hole F6162a1, and the hole formed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) is given a different reference sign from the insertion hole F6162a2. The insertion hole F6162a1 is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F6113 of the passage member F6110, and the insertion hole F6162a2 is formed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the vertical wall portion F6113. be done.
As a result, for example, a ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the left side (direction of arrow L) passes through the front (direction of arrow F) of the vertical wall portion F6113 and moves to the right. The upper surface of the lower passage F6112 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the first passage member F6160 arranged on the other side (arrow R direction side). On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the left side does not pass through the front of the vertical wall portion F6113, and the ball passes from the left side of the lower passage F6112 to the left side. It is guided (throwing, outflow) to the upper passage F6114 formed in .
The guide portion F6163 is a portion for guiding (throwing or outflowing) the ball that has passed through the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 of the recess F6162 to the lower passage F6112 of the passage member F6110. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side. By interposing the guide portion F6163 between the recess F6162 and the lower passage F6112, the impact of the ball when guided (thrown, outflow) to the lower passage F6112 can be reduced, preventing damage to the lower passage F6112. can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of rebound when contacting the lower passage F6112, and it is possible to suppress the outflow (flowing down, falling) of the ball from the lower passage F6112 to the game area beyond the front plate F6111 of the passage member F6110. .

In the guide portion F6163, a pair of guide recesses F6163a are formed at positions below the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 (direction of arrow D) toward the lower passage F6112 (both ends in the left-right direction). be. The guide concave portion F6163a is curved in a shape substantially equivalent to the outer shape of the ball, so that the ball guided (thrown or discharged) by the guide portion F6163 is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). is regulated.
As a result, the ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 is guided (thrown or flowed out) to the upper passage F6114, and the ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 passes in front of the upright wall F6113 (in the direction of arrow F). can be suppressed.
The fixing portion F6164 is a portion for fixing (arranging) the first passage member F6160 to the rear member F6150 (the side plate F6152), and a pair of fixing holes F6164a are drilled in the plate thickness direction in the fixing portion F6164. be. The fixing hole F6164a is formed so that the protrusion F6152a of the side plate F6152 can be inserted therethrough, and is formed in an elongated shape extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). This makes it possible to change the arrangement position of the first passage member F6160 with respect to the passage member F6110 (lower passage F6112) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
As a result, the ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 formed in one of the first passage members F6160 is guided (thrown or flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 disposed on the side of one of the first passage members F6160. , the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 formed in one of the first passage members F6160 passes through the front of the standing wall portion F6113 (in the direction of the arrow F) and flows toward the other first passage member F6160 into the lower passage F6112. (flowing down, rolling) (passing in front of the vertical wall F6113 (direction of arrow F)).

The distribution means F6170 is operated by the weight of the ball to change the moving direction of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110. A first shaft F6172 supported by a support member F6171, a pair of displacement members F6173 pivotally supported by the first shaft F6172, a pair of displacement passage members F6174 engaged with the displacement members F6173, and their displacement passages. A pair of connecting members F6175 connecting the member F6174 and the displacement member F6173, a pair of weight supporting members F6176 arranged on the connecting members F6175, a pair of weights F6177 arranged on the weight supporting members F6176, and a pair of second shafts F6178 that pivotally support the connecting member F6175.
The displacement member F6173, the displacement passage member F6174, the connecting member F6175, the weight support member F6176, the weight F6177, and the second shaft F6178 are line (plane) symmetrical (Fig. 1604 symmetrical).
Further, the displacement member F6173 and the displacement passage member F6174 are integrated (formed as one unit) by interposing the connecting member F6175. In this embodiment, the weight support member F6176 is fixed (arranged) to the connecting member F6175, and the weight F6177 is arranged (supported) on the weight support member F6176, whereby the displacement member F6173 and the displacement passage member F6174, connecting member F6175, weight support member F6176 and weight F6177 are integrated (formed as one unit).
The supporting member F6171 is composed of a plate-like body, and a pair of bent portions F6171a that are bent toward the front side (arrow F direction) are provided on both sides of the supporting member F6171 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). It is formed. An insertion hole is formed in the bending portion F6171a in the plate thickness direction, and the first shaft F6172 is inserted through the insertion hole, whereby the first shaft F6172 is supported by the support member F6171.

A notch F6171b is formed in the lower end of the support member F6171 so as to face upward (in the direction of arrow U). The displacement of the displacement member F6173 (displacement passage member F6174) is restricted by the weight support portion F6176b contacting the notch F6171b.
By arranging the first shaft F6172, the pair of displacement members F6173, and the pair of connecting members F6175 in the space defined by the support member F6171 and the pair of bent portions F6171a, entry of foreign matter such as wires is suppressed.
The first shaft F6172 is for displaceably engaging (supporting) the pair of displacement members F6173, and is formed in a columnar shape from a metal material. In the first shaft F6172, cuts are formed at positions corresponding to both ends of the pair of bent portions F6171a of the support member F6171 in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR). ) are mated. Thereby, the first shaft F6172 is irremovably supported by the support member F6171.
The displacement member F6173 is for changing the direction of movement of the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110. A contact portion F6173b projecting from the portion F6173a toward the front side (arrow F direction side), a supported portion F6173c and an engaging portion F6173d projecting from the body portion F6173a toward the back side (arrow B direction side), Prepare.

The displacement member F6173 is colored. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the displacement member F6173 has been displaced. Here, the pair of displacement members F6173 are colored in different colors. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the state in which one or the other of the pair of displacement members F6173 is displaced. Note that the pair of displacement members F6173 may be colored in the same color.
The body portion F6173a is formed of a plate-like body and arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back plate F6151 of the back member F6150. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 from coming into contact with the main body portion F6173a.
Although the main body portion F6173a has a different outer shape between one and the other of the pair of displacement members F6173, the outer shape of the main body portion F6173a is not related to the function of the displacement member F6173, so the same reference numerals are used for description.
The contact portion F6173b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and is arranged substantially parallel to the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110. The outer shape of the contact portion F6173b is formed slightly smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the notch F6114b of the upper passage F6114, and the contact portion F6173b is arranged inside the notch F6114b.

The contact portion F6173b is formed of a plate-like body, and is substantially parallel to and substantially flush with the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. The surface of the contact portion F6173b on the lower side in the inclination direction, in other words, the surface facing the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, has A curved surface F6173b1 that is concave toward the direction in which the sphere approaches) is formed in a curved shape.
Although details will be described later, the contact portion F6173b is disposed at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110, and contacts the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. When the ball is displaced to a contactable position, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball is changed to the front side (arrow F direction side) by coming into contact with the curved surface F6173b1. Thereby, the balls are distributed (guided) from the upper passage F6114 to the fifth passage member F6120.
In addition, the curved surface F6173b1 may be formed so as to be inclined upward in the inclination direction (the direction in which the ball moving on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 approaches) toward the front side (direction of the arrow F).
The supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d are each formed of a plate-like body, and the supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d are each formed with an insertion hole drilled in the plate thickness direction. By inserting the first shaft F6172 through these insertion holes, the displacement member F6173 is supported by the first shaft F6172 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR).

In addition, the supported portion F6173c is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the contact portion F6173b. As a result, the moment generated in the supported portion F6173c when the ball contacts the contact portion F6173b can be reduced, and damage to the supported portion F6173c can be suppressed.
In addition, by supporting the displacement member F6173 at two locations, the supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d, with respect to the first axis F6172, compared to the case where the first axis F6172 is supported at one location, the contact Damage to the supported portion F6173c or the engaging portion F6173d due to the impact when the ball contacts the portion F6173b can be easily suppressed.
The supported portion F6173c and the engaging portion F6173d are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, it is possible to easily suppress the change in the posture of the displacement member F6173 when the ball contacts the contact portion F6173b.
The engaging portion F6173d is formed with a bent portion F6173d1 in which the rear side (arrow B direction) end portion of the engaging portion F6173d is bent toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). An insertion hole F6173d2 is formed in the bent portion F6173d1 in the plate thickness direction. The insertion hole F6173d2 is formed so that the engaged portion F6175b1 of the connecting member F6175 can be inserted therethrough, and is formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the displacement member F6173 and the displacement passage member F6174 are engaged with each other, and the engaged portion F6175b1 is engaged with the insertion hole F6173d2 so as to be vertically displaceable.

The displacement passage member F6174 distributes (guides) the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 to the fourth passage portion F6132 of the sixth passage member F6130. a portion F6174a, an outer wall portion F6174b erected from both edges in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) of the passage portion F6174a, and an edge portion on the front side (direction of arrow F) of the passage portion F6174a. A front wall portion F6174c erected, an inner wall portion F6174d erected from the edge of the passage portion F6174a on the center side in the left-right direction, and an edge portion on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the passage portion F6174a. and a connecting portion F6174e.
The passage portion F6174a is composed of a plate-like body extending in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows FB) and inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). The passage portion F6174a is formed with a protrusion F6174a1 projecting from the upper surface of the passage portion F6174a.
The protrusion F6174a1 is composed of a straight portion extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and a bent portion bending from the front end of the straight portion toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). , the upper surface of the straight portion is inclined downward toward the front side (direction of arrow F), and the upper surface of the bent portion is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction.
The straight portion of the protrusion F6174a1 is arranged at a distance smaller than the radius of the sphere from the outer wall portion F6174b and the inner wall portion F6174d. Further, the bent portion of the protrusion F6174a1 is arranged at a distance smaller than the radius of the sphere from the front ends of the front wall portion F6174c and the inner wall portion F6174d. As a result, the ball distributed to the displacement passage member F6174 can roll on the upper surface of the protrusion F6174a1, and is guided to the fourth passage portion F6132 of the sixth passage member F6130 using its own weight (throwing the ball, flowing down). be done.

The protrusion height of the outer wall portion F6174b and the front wall portion F6174c is formed larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls distributed to the displacement passage member F6174 from falling over the outer wall portion F6174b and the front wall portion F6174c and falling between the base plate 60 and the rear plate F6151 of the rear member F6150. Also, the height of the projection of the front wall portion F6174c is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball distributed to the displacement passage member F6174.
The outer wall portion F6174b and the inner wall portion F6174d are formed with projections F6174b1 and F6174d1, respectively, which protrude toward the projection F6174a1 side of the passage portion F6174a (center side of the passage portion F6174a in the left-right direction). The protrusions F6174b1 and F6174d1 are formed in a tapered shape in which the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) decreases toward the tip of the protrusion. Further, the protrusion F6174b1 is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion F6174d1.
When the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the projection F6174a1 contacts the projections F6174b1, F6174d1, the movement (flowing down, rolling) speed of the ball toward the front side (arrow F direction) can be reduced. . As a result, the time required for the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the displacement passage member F6174 to pass through the displacement passage member F6174 can be increased.
Further, by contacting the projection F6174b1, the upper surface of the projection F6174a1 can be displaced toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) by the moving (flowing down, rolling) ball. This makes it easier for the ball that contacts the projection F6174b1 to contact the projection F6174d1.

The connecting portion F6174e is a portion into which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the displacement passage member F6174 and the connecting member F6175 is screwed. By fixing the displacement passage member F6174 to the connecting member F6175 and engaging the connecting member F6175 and the displacement member F6173, the displacement member F6173 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement passage member F6174.
The connecting member F6175 is for interlocking the displacement member F6173 with the displacement of the displacement passage member F6174. A projecting first connecting portion F6175b and a second connecting portion F6175c projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the supported portion F6175a in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward both ends are provided.
The pivotally supported portion F6175a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is arranged in a posture in which the central axis of the pivotally supported portion F6175a is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The shaft-supported portion F6175a is provided with an insertion hole along the central axis of the shaft-supported portion F6175a. pivoted.
The first connecting portion F6175b is disposed between the first shaft F6172 and the bent portion F6173d1 of the displacement member F6173 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). An engaged portion F6175b1 protruding toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) is formed at the upper end of the first connecting portion F6175b, and the engaged portion F6175b1 is inserted through the insertion hole F6173d2 of the displacement member F6173. Thus, the displacement member F6173 and the displacement passage member F6174 are engaged.

Here, the first connecting portion F6175b in the present embodiment is rotationally displaced about the second axis F6178, while the displacement member F6173 is displaced laterally (in the direction of the arrows LR) about the first axis F6172. displacement is possible. Therefore, the first connecting portion F6175b (engaged portion F6175b1) displaces the displacement member F6173 in the horizontal direction while displacing it in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) relative to the displacement member F6173.
As described above, the insertion hole F6173d2 of the displacement member F6173 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Then, the upper and lower ends of the insertion hole F6173d2 and the engaged portion F6175b1 are formed so as not to come into contact with each other.
As a result, when the distributing means F6170 operates, the engaged portion F6175b1 and the side surface (inner peripheral surface extending in the vertical direction) of the insertion hole F6173d2 come into contact with each other, so that the displacement member F6173 moves in the left-right direction (arrows LR direction). On the other hand, since the upper and lower ends of the insertion hole F6173d2 and the engaged portion F6175b1 cannot contact each other, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member F6173 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).
In addition, the bent portion F6173d1 of the displacement member F6173 is bent from the end of the engaging portion F6173d on the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the center side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and the front of the bent portion F6173d1 A first connecting portion F6175b is arranged on the side (arrow F direction side). Therefore, of the gap formed between the bent portion F6173d1 and the first connecting portion F6175b, both left and right ends are shielded by the engaging portion F6173d.

Here, when the gap formed between the bent portion F6173d1 and the first connecting portion F6175b is exposed, the first connecting portion F6175b or the displacement member F6173 is displaced by inserting a foreign object such as a wire into the gap. There is a risk of being suppressed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion F6173d shields at least both sides of the gap formed between the first connecting portion F6175b and the bending portion F6173d1 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent a foreign object such as a wire from being caught.
The second connecting portion F6175c is a portion for connecting the pivotally supported portion F6175a and the displacement passage member F6174, and is disposed on the pivotally supported portion F6175a on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connecting portion F6175b. be. A notch is formed in the upper surface of the second connecting portion F6175c toward the lower side (direction of arrow D), thereby suppressing contact between the second connecting portion F6175c and the weight support member F6176.
The weight support member F6176 is for supporting the weight F6177, and includes an extension portion F6176a and a weight support portion F6176b formed at the tip of the extension portion F6176a.
The extension part F6176a is composed of a plate-like body extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and one end (base end) of the extension part F6176a is attached to the first connection part F6175b of the connection member F6175 by a tapping screw or the like. It is fastened and fixed. The extending direction of the extending portion F6176a is opposite to the extending direction of the second connecting portion F6175c of the connecting member F6175. The extended portion F6176a extends from the first connecting portion F6175b of the connecting member F6175 toward the center in the left-right direction.

One end (base end) of the extension part F6176a is disposed on one side of the game board F6013 with respect to the center of the game board F6013 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1604), and the other end (tip) of the extension part F6176a. is disposed on the other side of the game board F6013 with respect to the center in the width direction of the game board F6013. In other words, the other end (front end) of the extension portion F6176a is disposed on the opposite side of the center of the game board F6013 in the width direction from the one end (base end) of the extension portion F6176a.
For example, one end (base end) of the extension part F6176a fastened and fixed to the first connection part F6175b of the connection member F6175 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is positioned in the width direction of the game board F6013 (Fig. 1604 left-right direction), and the other end (tip) of the extended portion F6176a is arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the center in the width direction of the game board F6013. be done.
Here, the weight support member F6176 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is fixed (arranged) in front of the connecting member F6175 and arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side). The weight support member F6176 is fixed (arranged) on the rear surface of the connecting member F6175. As a result, even when the pair of connecting members F6175 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), it is possible to prevent the pair of weight supporting members F6176 from coming into contact with each other.
The weight support portion F6176b is formed in a cylindrical shape recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F6176b is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the weight F6177. The weight F6177 is disposed (supported) on the weight support portion F6176b by enclosing the weight F6177 in the inner peripheral surface of the weight support portion F6176b.

Further, since the weight support portion F6176b is recessed toward the front side (direction of the arrow F), the weight F6177 can be inserted even when the distribution means F6170 is arranged (assembled) on the back member F6150. can escape
The weight F6177 is for adjusting the position of the center of gravity, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material. The displacement member F6173, the displacement passage member F6174, the connecting member F6175, the weight support member F6176, and the weight F6177 formed as one unit by disposing the weight F6177 on the weight support portion F6176b (hereinafter referred to as "distribution means The center of gravity of the F6170 is located on the center side in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) relative to the second axis F6178.
The second shaft F6178 is for axially supporting (rotatably engaging) the connecting member F6175, and is formed in a columnar shape from a metal material. The second shaft F6178 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is inserted through an insertion hole formed in the shaft-supported portion F6175a of the connecting member F6175. As a result, the connecting member F6175 is rotatable around the second axis F6178.
By engaging the connecting member F6175 and the displacing member F6173, the displacing member F6173 interlocks with the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member F6175 and moves along the extending direction of the first axis F6172 (arrow LR direction). is formed displaceable.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1615 and 1616, the operation of the sorting means F6170 will be described. Figures 1615(a) and 1616(a) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame F6086b taken along the MDCCIIa-MDCCIIa line in Figure 1614(c), and Figures 1615(b) and 1616(b) are the lower It is a partially enlarged rear view of the side frame F6086b.
In addition, in FIGS. 1615(b) and 1616(b), illustration of the back plate F6151 of the back member F6150 is omitted. 1615 shows the lower frame F6086b before the movable part of the sorting means F6170 operates, and FIG. 1616 shows the lower frame F6086b after the movable part of the sorting means F6170 operates. A state before the movable portion of the distribution means F6170 operates is defined as a pre-operation state, and a state after the movable portion of the distribution means F6170 operates is defined as a post-operation state.
As shown in FIG. 1615, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the inner wall portion F6174d of the displacement passage member F6174 abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F6143 of the intermediate passage member F6140, thereby causing the displacement passage member F6174 to operate. (Displacement) is restricted, and the contact portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 is disposed at a position flush with the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110.
This can prevent the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 from coming into contact with the curved surface F6173b1 of the contact portion F6173b. Also, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 can move (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the contact portion F6173b, and can contact the contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150. .

When the contact portion F6173b is flush with the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, the contact portion F6173b is regarded as part of the upper passage F6114. By forming the contact portion F6173b as a part of the upper passage F6114 in this way, for example, a fitting member that can be fitted into the notch F6114b is formed in order to allow the ball to move (flow down, roll). can be omitted and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.
Here, in the state before operation of the lower frame F6086b, the contact portion F6173b is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back member F6150, and the contact portion F6173b extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A displaced configuration is contemplated. In this case, the size of the distribution means F6170 in the front-rear direction is increased, and there is a concern that the lower frame F6086b is increased in size.
On the other hand, the contact portion F6173b in the present embodiment is formed flush with the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, so that the size of the distributing means F6170 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) can be reduced. In addition, the space on the central side of the upper passage F6114 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) can be effectively used, and the lower frame F6086b can be made smaller.
Further, in the pre-operation state, the center of gravity of the movable portion of the distribution means F6170 is located on the center side in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) with respect to the second axis F6178. As a result, gravity acts in a direction in which the displacement passage member F6174 rotates (displaces) upward (in the direction of the arrow U), and the inner wall portion F6174d of the displacement passage member F6174 and the through hole F6143 of the intermediate passage member F6140. Contact with the inner peripheral surface is maintained. As a result, the lower frame F6086b is maintained in the pre-operation state.

Next, the operation of the lower frame F6086b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state will be described. As the ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) by the displacement passage member F6174, the center of gravity of the movable part of the distribution means F6170 to which the ball is added moves to both left and right (arrow LR directions) sides of the second axis F6178. To position.
As a result, gravity acts on the movable portion of the distribution means F6170 in a direction in which the displacement passage member F6174 rotates (displaces) downward (in the direction of the arrow D), and the weight support portion F6176b of the weight support member F6176 rotates (displaces) upward (in the direction of arrow U).
As a result, the displacement member F6173 is displaced along the first axis F6172 toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and the contact portion F6173b is displaced from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 by a predetermined distance. It is displaced to a position separated by an interval, and arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114. The predetermined interval is set to be slightly smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the ball from being caught between the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 and the contact portion F6173b.
Further, the weight support portion F6176b abuts on the protruding plate F6155 of the back member F6150 and the support member F6171, thereby regulating the operation (displacement) of the movable portion of the distribution means F6170, and the lower frame F6086b is in the post-operation state. is placed (maintained) in

As described above, the weight support member F6176 of the distribution means F6170 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is fixed (arranged) in front of the connecting member F6175, whereas the right side The weight supporting member F6176 of the distributing means F6170 arranged on the (arrow R direction side) is fixed (arranged) to the back surface of the connecting member F6175. Therefore, the weight support portion F6176b of the weight support member F6176 disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) is disposed at a position that is not in contact with the projecting plate F6155 of the back member F6150.
As a result, the weight support member F6176 disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the movable portion of the distribution means F6170 comes into contact with the projecting plate F6155 and moves to the right side (arrow R direction side). The disposed weight support member F6176 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the notch F6171b of the support member F6171. Therefore, there is a possibility that the displacement amount of the movable portion of the distribution means F6170 differs between the left side and the right side.
On the other hand, by forming the notch F6171b in the support member F6171, the distance between the protruding plate F6155 and the notch F6171b and the pair of weight support portions F6176b in the pre-operation state can be the same. As a result, the movement (displacement) amount can be the same between the left side and the right side of the movable portion of the distribution means F6170.
Further, during the operation of the movable portion of the distribution means F6170, the engaged portion F6175b1 of the connecting member F6175 crosses above the second shaft F6178 (direction of arrow U) and moves in the left-right direction (direction of arrow LR) to the center side. , toward both ends in the left-right direction. As a result, in a state in which the engaged portion F6175b1 is located on the center side in the left-right direction with respect to the second axis F6178, the engaged portion F6175b1 is displaced upward, and the engaged portion F6175b1 is displaced from the second axis F6178. , the engaged portion F6175b1 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D).

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the insertion hole F6173d2 formed in a long hole shape, and to form the engagement portion F6173d (bent portion F6173d1) small. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the sorting means F6170 and to reduce the product cost.
Here, since the contact portion F6173b is flush with the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 in the state before the operation of the lower frame F6086b, the amount of displacement of the contact portion F6173b from the state before the operation to the state after the operation can be reduced. , the time required for the operation from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state can be shortened.
For example, in a configuration in which the contact portion F6173b is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the amount of displacement of the contact portion F6173b is set larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the amount of displacement of the contact portion F6173b can be reduced, and the time required for the operation from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state can be shortened.
Further, for example, in a configuration in which the contact portion F6173b is arranged at a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, the displacement amount of the contact portion F6173b is set larger than the radius of the sphere. . Further, in such a configuration, there is a possibility that a ball may be caught between the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 and the contact portion F6173b due to the movement of the lower frame F6086b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state.

As shown in FIG. 1616, in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the displacement member F6173 is displaced toward both ends in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR), and the abutting portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 becomes a passage. It is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with a ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the member F6110.
The contact portion F6173b is disposed below the contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150 (in the direction of the arrow D). As a result, the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 is such that it cannot contact the contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150 (kinetic energy). are also distributed from the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) by contacting the curved surface F6173b1 of the contact portion F6173b.
In the open state of the lower frame F6086b, the displacement member F6173 is maintained in the displaced state. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the open state of the lower frame F6086b.
In this way, by bringing the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 of the passage member F6110 into contact with the curved surface F6173b1 of the contact portion F6173b, the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) can be easily guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) (easily entered into the first winning port 64). As a result, the lower frame F6086b is in the post-action state, in other words, the player can be made aware of the presence or absence of the ball moving through the displacement passage member F6174, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Further, the contact portion F6173b is arranged on the center side in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) of the outflow surface F6114a, in other words, at the position where the ball rises on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114. As a result, the speed of the ball rising on the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 is gradually reduced, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball and the contact between the ball and the contact portion F6173b can be easily visually recognized by the player. .
It should be noted that the movement of the lower frame F6086b from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state is performed when the ball flows out from the displacement passage member F6174 (the weight of the ball does not act on the displacement passage member F6174). . The action of the force (gravitational force) from the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b to the pre-operation state is the same as the maintenance of the pre-operation state, so the description thereof will be omitted.
In this way, the weight of the ball can be used to move the lower frame F6086b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, or from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.
Returning from FIG. 1605 to FIG. 1614, the sphere flowing down the lower frame F6086b will be described. Of the balls that flow down the game area, the balls guided through the upper frame passage FRt60 (see FIG. 1604) provided in the upper frame F6086a reach the upstream end of the groove portion F6161 (first passage FRt61) of the first passage member F6160. It is flowed into (entered ball).

A ball that has flowed (entered) into the upstream end of the groove portion F6161 of the first passage member F6160 is guided (fed or outflowed) to the recess F6162, and is passed through the insertion hole F6162a1 or the insertion hole F6162a2 drilled in the bottom surface of the recess F6162. The ball is guided (thrown, outflow) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110.
The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is guided (thrown or flown out) to the lower passage F6112 along the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62). moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center in the left-right direction.
In addition, the ball distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on one side (for example, the right side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is located in front of the vertical wall F6113. (in the direction of arrow F) and guided (thrown, outflow) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) of the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62).
Here, by moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) and coming into contact with the vertical wall portion F6113, a frictional force acts on the ball, and the speed of the ball (kinetic energy) decreases.

As a result, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the ball is guided (thrown, outflow) to the other side (left side) upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63), and passes through the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63). The rising sphere cannot contact the contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150. Therefore, after reciprocating between the first inclined portion F6114c and the second inclined portion F6114d of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63), the ball flows from the outflow surface F6114a formed in the upper passage F6114 on the other side to the lower passage. It is guided (thrown and flowed down) to F6112 (second passage FRt62).
In addition, the ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) passes through the outflow surface F6114a formed as a concave surface, and the velocity of the ball (kinetic energy ) is reduced.
Thereby, contact between the ball moving (rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (the third passage FRt63) and the contact portion F6154 can be easily suppressed. In this way, the function of guiding (throwing, flowing down) the ball distributed (guided) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) and moving the upper passage F6114 The function of reducing the speed (kinetic energy) of the (rolling) ball can be combined with the outflow surface F6114a, and the product cost can be reduced.
The ball guided (thrown, flowed down) from the outflow surface F6114a to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is guided (throwed, flowed down) from the outflow surface F6112b to the first winning hole 64, or is guided (throwed, flowed down) from the outflow surface F6112a. The ball flows from the bottom into the inlet FOPf62 of the vertical wall F6113 and is guided (thrown or flowed down) to the second recess F6142 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) of the intermediate passage member F6140.

Next, the case where the ball is guided (thrown, flowed down) to the second recess F6142 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) provided on the other side (left side) will be described.
A ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the second recess F6142 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) provided on the other side (left side) is displaced by the distributing means F6170 provided on the other side. The ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64). As a result, the lower frame F6086b is moved from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state. Specifically, the other-side displacement member F6173 is operated to the post-operation state in which the displacement member F6173 is displaced.
The ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the displacement passage member F6174 (a part of the fourth passage FRt64) arranged on the other side (left side) is then guided to the sixth passage member arranged on the other side. The ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fourth passage portion F6132 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) of F6130. As a result, the lower frame F6086b is moved from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state. The ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fourth passage portion F6132 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) arranged on the other side passes through the outlet FOPout62 of the passage member F6110 and flows out to the game area. .
In addition, the state after the operation of the lower frame F6086b, more specifically, the displacement passage member F6174 (a part of the fourth passage FRt64) of the distributing means F6170 arranged on the other side (left side) of the lower frame F6086b is moved ( In the state where the ball (hereinafter referred to as "the second The second ball flowing into the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on one side (right side) is guided to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side ( Throwing ball, outflow).

Here, referring to FIG. 1617, in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) is raised (moved toward the central side in the left-right direction). ) will explain the movement of the ball (falling down, rolling). FIG. 1617 is a partial top view of the lower frame F6086b. Note that in FIG. 1617, illustration of the distribution means F6170 excluding the contact portion F6173b formed on the displacement member F6173 is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1617(a), in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the contact portion F6173b can contact the sphere CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63). position.
Specifically, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the ball CB61 rising up the first inclined portion F6114c hits the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the position where it reaches the uppermost side (arrow U direction side). A contact portion F6173b is provided.
Next, as shown in FIG. 1617(b), the ball CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c (moving toward the center in the left-right direction) contacts the curved surface F6173b1 of the contact portion F6173b, thereby While ascending the 1 inclined portion F6114c, it moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along the curved surface F6173b1. In other words, the sphere CB61 is imparted with a velocity component toward the front side.

Here, at the position where the ball CB61 has reached the uppermost side (the direction of the arrow U), the speed of the ball is 0 (or the speed is reduced) and the force of the ball is weak. Therefore, when the contact portion F6173b is arranged at the position where the ball CB61 reaches the uppermost side, there is a possibility that the ball CB61 may not be guided toward the front side (arrow F direction side) even if it contacts the contact portion F6173b. There is
In contrast, in the present embodiment, the contact portion F6173b is arranged below (in the direction of the arrow D) the position where the ball CB61 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c reaches the uppermost side (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, the momentum of the ball CB61 is strong (speed is ensured). As a result, the momentum of the ball CB61 can be used to facilitate guiding the ball CB61 in contact with the contact portion F6173b toward the front side (arrow F direction side).
1617(c), the sphere CB61 moves from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) is distributed to the fifth passage portion F6121 and abuts against the wall portion F6122, thereby restricting the movement (flowing down, rolling) toward the front side (arrow F direction side).
Here, in the operation of the lower frame F6086b from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state, the contact portion F6173b is displaced from both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) toward the center in the left-right direction. Also, the ball CB61 moving up the first inclined portion F6114c (moving toward the contact portion F6173b) moves toward the left-right direction center side and upward (arrow U direction side). Therefore, in the displacement direction of the contact portion F6173b when the lower frame F6086b moves from the post-action state to the pre-action state, there is a moving direction component of the sphere CB61 that moves the first inclined portion F6114c toward the contact portion F6173b. included.

As a result, the contact between the sphere CB61 and the contact portion F6173b displaces the contact portion F6173b in the moving direction of the sphere CB61 (direction toward the center in the left-right direction) (the contact in the state before the lower frame F6086b operates). (retracted toward the position where the contact portion F6173b is arranged) to absorb the impact. As a result, damage to the contact portion F6173b can be suppressed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 1617(d), the sphere CB61 moves (flows down, rolls) along the downward slope of the fifth passage portion F6121 toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), It flows into the inlet FOPf61 from the outflow surface F6121a. Alternatively, the ball flows into the insertion hole F6121b and is guided (thrown, outflow) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 (see FIG. 1605).
Returning to FIG. 1605 to FIG. 1614, description will be made. In this way, the lower frame F6086b is moved to the post-operation state (the first ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the displacement passage member F6174), so that the second ball and the trailing of the second ball It is possible to distribute (guide) the balls to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65). As described above, the balls distributed (guided) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) easily enter the first prize winning opening 64. Therefore, in the state after the operation of the lower frame F6086b, The player can expect that the second ball and the ball succeeding the second ball will be distributed (guided) to the lower frame F6086b, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member F6173 due to the contact of the ball and the direction of displacement of the displacement member F6173 from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state (center side in the left-right direction) can be made to coincide at least partially. . As a result, when the ball contacts the displacement member F6173, the displacement member F6173 is displaced toward the pre-operation state, whereby the impact force applied to the displacement member F6173 can be reduced, and damage to the displacement member F6173 can be suppressed.

In the state after operation of the lower frame F6086b, the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) passes through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on one side (right side). The ball guided (thrown, outflow) to the ball is brought into contact with the contact portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 while the speed (kinetic energy) of the ball is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact force applied to the contact portion F6173b when the ball comes into contact with it, and to suppress the breakage of the displacement member F6173.
Next, movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the other side (left side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) dynamic). The ball distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the other side does not pass through the front (in the direction of the arrow F) of the vertical wall portion F6113, and passes through the upper passage F6114 on the other side. (Third passage FRt63) (throwing the ball, outflow).
In this case, the amount of movement of the balls moving (flowing down and rolling) in the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is smaller than that of the balls distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1. Also, it is not in contact with the upright wall portion F6113. As a result, the frictional force acting on the ball is small, and the decrease in speed (kinetic energy) of the ball is suppressed.
As a result, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the ball guided (thrown or flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on one side (left side) is placed in the contact portion F6154 of the back member F6150. It becomes possible to abut on the curved surface F6154a formed in .

Here, referring to FIG. 1618, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side (left side) is raised (moved toward the central side in the left-right direction). ) will explain the movement of the ball (falling down, rolling). FIG. 1618 is a partial top view of the lower frame F6086b. In addition, in FIG. 1618, illustration of the sorting means F6170 is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1618(a), the ball CB62 distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 has a speed higher than the ball distributed (guided) from the insertion hole F6162a1. (Kinetic energy) is large, and it abuts on the curved surface F6173b1 formed on the abutment portion F6173b.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 1618(b), the sphere CB62 ascending the first inclined portion F6114c (moving toward the center in the left-right direction) ascends the first inclined portion F6114c and moves toward the curved surface F6173b1. It moves (flows down, rolls) toward the front side (direction of arrow F). In other words, the sphere CB62 is imparted with a velocity component toward the front side.
Next, as shown in FIG. 1618(c), the ball CB62 is distributed from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65), and contacts the wall portion F6122. , the movement (flowing down, rolling) toward the front side (arrow F direction side) is restricted.

The curved surface F6173b1 is formed so that the tip of the curved surface F6173b1 on the front side (arrow F direction) protrudes toward both left and right direction (arrow LR direction), so that the contact portion F6173b is curved. Compared to the case of contacting the surface F6173b1 (see FIG. 1617), it contacts the wall portions F6122 on both sides in the left-right direction.
Since the fifth passage portion F6121 is inclined downward toward the rear side (arrow B direction), the ball CB62 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). movement), it moves (flows down, rolls) toward the back side (wall portion F6113).
As a result, as shown in FIG. 1618(d), the balls CB62 are more likely to flow from the outflow surface F6121a into the inlet FOPf61 than the balls distributed (guided) from the through hole F6162a1 into the through hole F6121b. easy to flow into
Returning to FIG. 1605 to FIG. 1614, description will be made. In the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the other side (left side) is distributed (guided) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62). ) Regarding the movement (falling down, rolling) of the ball, the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is distributed from the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the one side (right side) described above. Since it is the same as the (guidance) case, its explanation is omitted.

The ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (right side) and the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on the other side (left side) The ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 differs in speed (kinetic energy) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) on the other side. Specifically, the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 on the other side has a greater velocity (kinetic energy) than the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 on the one side.
As a result, in the post-operation state of the lower frame F6086b, the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (right side) and the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a1 on the other side (left side) The ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (the first passage FRt61) causes the displacement member F6173 to hit the contact portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173, causing the displacement member F6173 to move in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) to the central side. The amount of displacement toward can be varied.
Further, in this embodiment, the ball can contact the contact portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 during the operation from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state. Accordingly, the distribution position of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) to the fifth passage portion F6121 can be varied depending on the degree of displacement of the displacement member F6173 (displacement passage member F6174). In other words, the contact position with respect to the wall portion F6122 can be varied.
As a result, the balls distributed (guided) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) flow from the outflow surface F6121a of the fifth passage member F6120 into the inlet FOPf61 or into the insertion hole F6121b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to judge whether the ball flows in and is guided (thrown or outflow) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110, thereby improving interest.

The ball that has flowed into the inflow port FOPf61 is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the first concave portion F6141 of the intermediate passage member F6140 and the sixth passage portion F6131 of the sixth passage member F6130, and flows out from the outflow port FOPout1 of the passage member F6110. After that, it is won to the first winning port 64 .
Regarding the movement (falling, rolling) of the ball guided (throwing, flowing down) from the insertion hole F6121b of the fifth passage member F6120 to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62), the above-described upper passage F6114 (third passage Since it is the same as the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball guided (thrown down, down) from the outflow surface F6114a of the FRt63) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62), the explanation thereof is omitted.
It should be noted that a plurality of (two or more) balls (for example, the first ball and the ball that precedes the first ball) are continuously guided to the displacement passage member F6174 (part of the fourth passage FRt64) (throwing ball, flowing down ), in other words, as the weight of the ball acting on the displacement passage member F6174 increases, the displacement member F6173 moves in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) due to contact between the contact portion F6173b of the displacement member F6173 and the ball. ) It is possible to reduce the amount of displacement toward the center.
As a result, for example, when the amount of displacement of the displacement member F6173 toward the center in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) due to contact with the ball is small, the ball can be moved in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at both ends. It can be easily sorted (easily guided) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65). As a result, it is easier to flow into the inlet FOPf61 from the outflow surface F6121a than to flow into the insertion hole F6121b.

Therefore, a plurality of balls are continuously guided (thrown, flowed down) to the displacement passage member F6174 (a part of the fourth passage FRt64), in other words, move through the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110. The player can expect to be guided (thrown and flow down) to the displacement passage member F6174 (a part of the fourth passage FRt64) in a state in which the (flowing down and rolling) balls are connected, thereby improving interest. be able to.
Also, the insertion hole F6162a1 and the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the ball distributed from the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (right side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 is transferred to the front of the vertical wall portion F6113. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether or not to pass through the side (arrow F direction side).
In other words, the ball distributed from the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) on one side (right side) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 is transferred to the upper passage F6114 on one side. (third passage FRt63), or pass through the front side (arrow F direction side) of the standing wall portion F6113 and pass through the other side (left side) upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63 ), making it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether the ball is guided (thrown or flowed down). As a result, it is possible to make the player gaze at the balls distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62), thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1619 to 1621, the lower frame F7086b in the 99th embodiment will be described. In the lower frame F7086b in the 99th embodiment, in order to maintain the post-operation state longer than in the 98th embodiment, second displacement passages F7180 ( A seventh passage FRt77) is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 1619(a) and 1620(a) are sectional views of the lower frame F7086b in the 99th embodiment, and Figures 1619(b) and 1620(b) are rear views of the lower frame F7086b. . Figure 1621 schematically illustrates the distribution of balls to the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180. Fig. 1621(b), Fig. 1621(d) and Fig. 1621(f) are schematic top views of the lower frame F7086b. It is a schematic front view of the lower frame F7086b as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXLf in (e).
FIGS. 1619(a) and 1620(a) correspond to cross sections cut along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction at the center of the second displacement passage F7180 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). FIG. 1619 shows the distribution means F7170 and the second displacement passage F7180 before operation, and FIG. The state after the operation of F7180 is illustrated respectively. In addition, in FIGS. 1619(b) and 1620(b), illustration of the back plate F6151 of the back member F6150 is omitted.
1621(a), 1621(c), and 1621(e) show part of the fourth passage portion F6132 of the sixth passage member F6130 and the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 in the lower frame F7086b. , Only a part of the displacement passage member F7174 of the distribution means F7170 and the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180 are illustrated, and FIGS. A fourth passage portion F6132 of the sixth passage member F6130 in the lower frame F7086b, a part of the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140, a displacement passage member F7174 of the distributing means F7170 except for the front wall portion F6174c, and the second displacement passage Only a portion of the second displacement passage portion F7181a of F7180 is shown.
In addition, FIG. 1621 shows a state in which two balls separated by a predetermined distance are distributed to the second recess F6142 (fourth passage FRt64) of the intermediate passage member F6140, and FIGS. 1621(a) and 1621(b) 1621(c) and 1621(d) show the state in which these two balls move (flow down, roll) on the rolling surface F6142a of the second recess F6142. 1621(e) and 1621(f) show the state in which the preceding ball (hereinafter referred to as "preceding ball CB71") is distributed to the displacement passage member F7174 of the distributing means F7170. A state in which the subsequent ball (hereinafter referred to as "subsequent ball CB72") is distributed to the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 1619 to 1620, the distributing means F7170 in the 99th embodiment includes, in addition to the distributing means F6170 in the 98th embodiment, the lateral direction (arrow LR direction) both ends of the displacement passage member F7174. A pair of second displacement passages F7180 are arranged at positions where
The second displacement passage F7180 operates (displaces) the displacement member F6173 by displacement (rotation) of the second displacement passage F7180. It has a shaft F7182 to support and a weight F7183 arranged in the second displacement passage member F7181.
The second displacement passage member F7181 includes a second displacement passage portion F7181a that serves as a ball passage, a support portion F7181b that has one end fixed (arranged) to the second displacement passage portion F7181a, and the other end of the support portion F7181b. and a weight supporting portion F7181d fixed (arranged) to the supported portion F7181c.
The second displacement passage portion F7181a is a portion for moving (flowing down, rolling) the balls distributed (guided) from the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140. and a wall portion F7181a2 erected from an edge portion of the moving surface F7181a1. A space defined by the rolling surface F7181a1 and the wall portion F7181a2 forms a seventh passage FRt77.

The rolling surface F7181a1 is composed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body when viewed from above, with both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) bent to the front side (direction of arrow F). Further, the extension length of the rolling surface F7181a1 (seventh passage FRt77) is formed to be approximately three times the extension length of the displacement passage member F7174 (see FIG. 1609).
The wall portion F7181a2 is a portion for regulating the displacement of the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) in the second displacement passage portion F7181a, and the end portion (second displacement (upstream end of the passage portion F7181a) and the front end (downstream end of the second displacement passage portion F7181a) of the portion bent to the front side (arrow F direction side).
Since the wall portion F7181a2 is not formed at the upstream end of the rolling surface F7181a1, the ball is guided (thrown or flowed down) from the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 to the second displacement passage portion F7181a and rolls. Since the wall portion F7181a2 is not formed at the downstream end of the surface F7181a1, the ball flows out from the second displacement passage portion F7181a to the game area.
The base plate 60 is provided with an insertion hole (not shown) in front of the downstream end of the rolling surface F7181a1 (in the direction of the arrow F). spilled into the area.

The protrusion height of the wall portion F7181a2 is formed to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball distributed to the second displacement passage portion F7181a from falling over the wall portion F7181a2 and falling between the base plate 60 and the rear member F6150.
The support portion F7181b is a portion for connecting the second displacement passage portion F7181a and the supported portion F7181c, and is formed of a rod-like body. The shaft-supported portion F7181c is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the shaft F7182 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the shaft-supported portion F7181c. As a result, the second displacement passage member F7181 is rotatably formed with the shaft F7182 (supported portion F7181c) as the rotation axis.
The weight support portion F7181d is a portion for supporting the weight F7183. One end (base end) of the weight support portion F7181d is fixed (arranged) to the supported portion F7181c, and the other end (tip end) of the weight support portion F7181d has a concave portion for fixing (arrangement) of the weight F7183. It is recessed toward the side (arrow F direction side).
The shaft F7182 is for rotatably engaging (rotatingly supporting) the second displacement passage member F7181, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metallic material. The shaft F7182 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and supported by the rear plate F6151 and the lower plate F6153 of the rear member F6150. As a result, the second displacement passage member F7181 is rotatable around the axis F7182.

The weight F7183 is for adjusting the position of the center of gravity of the second displacement passage F7180, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metallic material. By arranging the weight F7183 on the weight support portion F7181d, the center of gravity of the second displacement passage F7180 is located on the center side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) with respect to the axis F7182.
The displacement passage member F7174 of the distribution means F7170 is formed in the same manner as the displacement passage member F6174 in the 98th embodiment except for the projecting height of the outer wall portion F7174b. is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, when the ball is guided (thrown or flowed down) by the displacement passage member F7174, the uppermost portion of the ball (arrow U direction) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is the outer wall portion F7174b. It is on the lower side (arrow D direction side) from the protruding tip of .
In addition, the protrusion height of the outer wall portion F7174b is formed to have a dimension that is lower (arrow D direction side) than the upper surface of the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180 in the post-operation state. As a result, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) on the rolling surface F6142a of the intermediate passage member F6140 can be distributed to the second displacement passage portion F7181a.
Next, the operation of the second displacement passage F7180 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1619, in the pre-operation state of the lower frame F7086b, the weight support portion F7181d of the second displacement passage F7180 and the weight support member F6176 of the distribution means F7170 are in contact with each other, or a predetermined distance (for example, 1 mm) apart. Further, the upper end of the wall portion F7181a2 of the second displacement passage F7180 abuts on the protrusion F7152b projecting from the side plate F7152 of the rear member F7150, thereby restricting the movement (displacement) of the second displacement passage F7180.

In addition, in the pre-operation state, the center of gravity of the pair of second displacement passages F7180 is located on the center side in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) relative to the axis F7182. As a result, gravity acts on the second displacement passage F7180 in a direction in which the second displacement passage F7181a rotates (displaces) upward (in the direction of the arrow U), and the wall portion F7181a2 of the second displacement passage F7180 increases. and the projection F7152b projecting from the side plate F7152 of the back member F7150 are kept in contact with each other. As a result, the lower frame F7086b is maintained in the pre-operation state.
Next, the operation of the lower frame F7086b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state will be described. The center of gravity of the entire second displacement passage F7180 including the ball is guided in the second displacement passage F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180 so that the center of gravity of the entire second displacement passage F7180 is in the horizontal direction (arrow L- R direction) located at both ends.
As a result, gravity acts on the second displacement passage F7180 in a direction in which the second displacement passage portion F7181a rotates (displaces) downward (direction of arrow D), and the weight support portion F7181d rotates upward ( It rotates (displaces) in the direction of the arrow U). As a result, the weight support member F6176 of the distribution means F7170 rotates (displaces) upward, and the displacement member F6173 moves toward both ends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) along the first axis F6172. Displaced (lower frame F7086b moved to post-activation state).
Here, distribution of balls to the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 1621(a) and 1621(b), in a state (pre-operation state) in which the leading ball CB71 and the trailing ball CB72 move (flow down and roll) on the rolling surface F6142a, the displacement passage member At least a portion of the outer wall portion F7174b of the F7174 is arranged at a position above (in the direction of the arrow U) the upper surface of the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180. As a result, the preceding ball CB71 can be brought into contact with the outer wall portion F7174b, and can be prevented from being guided from the rolling surface F6142a to the second displacement passage portion F7181a (not being guided to the displacement passage member F7174). .

Next, as shown in FIGS. 1621(c) and 1621(d), the preceding ball CB71 is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the displacement passage member F7174, and the displacement passage member F7174 is moved by the weight of the preceding ball CB71. rotates (displaces) downward (direction of arrow D), and the lower frame F7086b is moved to the post-operation state (see FIG. 1620).
Here, the preceding ball CB71 abuts on the protrusion F6174b1 of the displacement passage member F7174, so that the movement (flowing down, rolling) speed of the preceding ball CB71 toward the front side (arrow F direction side) can be reduced. , can be moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the center side in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 1621(e) and 1621(f), the following ball CB72 can be easily distributed to the second displacement path F7180.
Specifically, the preceding ball CB71 moves (flows down, rolls) toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), that is, toward the following ball CB72. The distance between CB71 and the trailing sphere CB72 can be reduced. In addition, by reducing the movement (flowing down, rolling) speed of the leading ball CB71 toward the front side (arrow F direction), the leading ball CB71 and the trailing ball CB72 can be suppressed from being separated from each other.
As a result, the succeeding ball CB72 can be brought into contact (fall) with the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the preceding ball CB71 as compared with the case where the projection F6174b1 is not formed. As a result, the amount of downward displacement (dropping, flowing down) of the following ball CB72 (in the direction of arrow D) can be reduced, and the following ball CB72 is guided to the upper surface of the second displacement passage portion F7181a of the second displacement passage F7180. (throwing the ball, flowing down) can be made easier.

Returning to FIG. 1619 to FIG. 1620, description will be made. Since the extension length of the rolling contact surface F7181a1 (seventh passage FRt77) is formed longer than the extension length of the displacement passage member F7174 (see FIG. 1609), the ball is positioned in the second displacement passage F7180. The time required to move (flow down, roll) the portion F7181a (seventh passage FRt77) can be made longer than the time required to move (flow down, roll) the displacement passage member F7174. As a result, the ball is distributed to the second displacement passage portion F7181a (seventh passage FRt77), thereby increasing the time required for the post-operation state compared to the case where the ball is distributed to the displacement passage member F7174.
Therefore, in a state in which the two balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110 are separated by an interval smaller than a predetermined interval, the second recess F6142 ( The player can expect to be sorted to the fourth passage FRt64), and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Next, referring to FIG. 1622, the lower frame F8086b in the 100th embodiment will be described. In the lower frame F8086b of the 100th embodiment, the ease with which a ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 can enter the first winning port 64 differs between the pre-operation state and the post-operation state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Fig. 1622 is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame F8086b in the 100th embodiment, Fig. 1622(a) shows the lower frame F8086b in a pre-operation state, Fig. 1622(b) shows the left side (arrow The lower frame F8086b in the post-operation state in which the contact portion F6173b of the distributing means F6170 disposed on the L direction side) is displaced is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 1622, the insertion hole F8121b of the fifth passage member F8120 in the 100th embodiment is positioned on both sides in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) compared to the insertion hole F6121b in the 98th embodiment. is perforated.
Specifically, in the post-operation state, the moving direction of the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by contacting the contact portion F6173b of the distribution means F6170 Drilled on the extension line. As a result, in the post-operation state, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by being brought into contact with the contact portion F6173b is moved (flowed down) toward the insertion hole F8121b. , rolling) can be made easier.
Further, the fifth passage member F8120 is provided with a standing portion F8121b1 along the edge of the insertion hole F8121b. The erected height of the erected portion F8121b1 is formed to a height that allows a ball having a speed equal to or higher than a predetermined value to climb over.
In addition, the front end of the curved surface F8154a formed on the contact portion F8154 of the back member F8150 is closer to the center in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) than the front end of the curved surface F6154a in the 98th embodiment. formed at a position where As a result, in the pre-operation state, the ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by coming into contact with the contact portion F8154 is moved toward between the pair of insertion holes F8121b. (flowing down, rolling) can be made easier. In other words, it can be made difficult to move (flow down, roll) toward the pair of insertion holes F8121b.

In the lower frame F8086b of the present embodiment, in the post-operation state, for example, the lower side of the passage member F6110 passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side). The ball sorted to the passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) does not pass through the front of the standing wall portion F6113, and is guided (thrown, flowed out) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) formed on the left side. , the ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) in a state in which reduction in speed (kinetic energy) is suppressed.
As described above, the insertion hole F8121b is formed on the extension line of the moving direction of the ball contacting the contact portion F6173b of the distribution means F6170, so that it is guided to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65). The (thrown, flowed down) ball is easily moved (flowed down, rolled) toward the insertion hole F8121b and is less likely to come into contact with the wall portion F8122 of the fifth passage member F8120.
As a result, in the post-operation state, the fifth passage member F6160 passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on one side (the left side in the above example) and is brought into contact with the contact portion F6173b. A ball guided (thrown or flowed down) to the passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) easily overcomes the standing portion F8121b1 and passes through the insertion hole F8121b (difficult to enter the first prize winning opening 64).
On the other hand, in the post-operation state, it passes through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) and is distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F6110. The dropped ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) while its velocity (kinetic energy) is reduced.

Therefore, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by being brought into contact with the contact portion F6173b cannot easily climb over the standing portion F8121b1 (it cannot pass through the insertion hole F8121b). It is difficult), and it is easy to guide (throw, flow down) from the outflow surface F6121a to the first concave portion F6141 (sixth passage FRt66) of the intermediate passage member F6140 (easy to win the first prize opening 64).
In addition, in the pre-operation state, the contact portion F8154 of the back member F8150 is disposed above the contact portion F6173b (in the direction of the arrow U), so that the ball contacting the contact portion F8154 The ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) with reduced velocity (kinetic energy).
Further, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by contacting the contact portion F8154 moves (flows down, rolls), is likely to come into contact with the wall portion F6122 of the fifth passage member F8120, and is less likely to be guided to the insertion hole F8121b.
Therefore, the ball guided (thrown, flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65) by contacting the contact portion F8154 hardly climbs over the erected portion F8121b1 (it does not pass through the insertion hole F8121b). It is difficult), and it is easy to guide (throw, flow down) from the outflow surface F6121a to the first concave portion F6141 (sixth passage FRt66) of the intermediate passage member F6140 (easy to win the first prize opening 64).

As described above, in the pre-operation state, the ball passing through the insertion holes F6162a2 of the pair of first passage members F6160 is compared with the ball passing through the insertion holes F6162a1 to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65). It is easy to be guided (thrown or flow down) to the ball, and it is easy to enter the first prize hole 64 .
On the other hand, in a post-operation state, for example, in a post-operation state in which the contact portion F6173b of the distributing means F6170 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) is displaced, the first After passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61), the ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65), passes through the insertion hole F8121b, and enters the passage member. It is easy to be guided (thrown, flowed down) to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of F6110 (difficult to enter the first winning hole 64).
In this way, by changing the ease with which the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) enters the first winning port 64 between the pre-operation state and the post-operation state. , In the pre-action state, the player expects that the ball will pass through the insertion hole F6162a2, and in the post-action state, the contact portion F6173b of the distribution means F6170 is displaced (left side in the above example). The player can expect that the ball will not pass through the insertion hole F6162a2, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
The ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a1 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side). The ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) from the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) to the fifth passage member F8120 (fifth passage FRt65). In this case, it is difficult for the ball to climb over the standing portion F8121b1 (difficult to pass through the insertion hole F8121b), and the ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) from the outflow surface F6121a to the first recess F6141 (sixth passage FRt66) of the intermediate passage member F6140. It is easy (easy to enter the first winning port 64).

Therefore, in the post-operation state, the ball sorted (guided) to the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) is shifted to the left side (arrow L It is easier to enter the first winning port 64 than balls distributed (guided) to the first passage member F6160 arranged on the direction side). As a result, the player can be made to intend to distribute (guide) the ball to the first path member F6160 (first path FRt61) disposed on the right side, triggered by the post-action state, thereby improving the game. You can increase your interest.
Next, the lower frame F9086b in the 101st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1623 and 1624. FIG. In the lower frame F9086b in the 101st embodiment, the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) enters the first winning port 64 in the pre-operation state and the post-operation state. Ease is different. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
Figures 1623(a) and 1624(a) are partial enlarged top views of the lower frame F9086b in the 101st embodiment, and Figures 1623(b) and 1624(b) are partial enlarged views of the lower frame F9086b. It is a front view.
FIG. 1623 shows the lower frame F9086b in the pre-operation state, and FIG. A lower frame F9086b is shown respectively. Also, in FIGS. 1623(b) and 1624(b), the connecting hole F9144 formed in the intermediate passage member F9140 is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 1623 and 1624, the intermediate passage member F9140 in the 101st embodiment is provided with a connecting hole F9144 penetrating the upper surface of the intermediate passage member F9140 and the first concave portion F6141. Further, an insertion hole F9116 is formed in the plate thickness direction in the passage member F9110 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting hole F9144.
In addition, while the back member F9150 on the right side (arrow R direction side) is provided with the contact portion F6154, the back member F9150 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is not provided with the contact portion F6154. is set.
Next, the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) will be described. The ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) is distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) of the passage member F9110, does not pass through the front of the vertical wall portion F6113, It is guided (thrown, outflow) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63). Therefore, the balls distributed to the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) move upward (arrow U direction) through the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) while the decrease in velocity (kinetic energy) is suppressed. Move (flow down, roll) toward
As shown in FIG. 1623, in the pre-operation state, the upper passage F6114 (first passage) passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side). 3 passage FRt63) toward the upper side (arrow U direction) reaches the insertion hole F9116 of the passage member F9110, through the connecting hole F9144 of the intermediate passage member F9140 It is guided (thrown and flowed down) to 1 recess F6141 (sixth passage FRt66).

Therefore, the ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) can easily enter the first prize winning port 64 (in this embodiment, , the ball can almost certainly enter the first winning port 64 easily.
On the other hand, in the pre-operation state, the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side). The ball that moves (flows down, rolls) upward (in the direction of arrow U) abuts against the abutting portion F6154 of the back member F9150 and is guided (thrown, flow down).
A pair of insertion holes F6121b are formed in the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120. Therefore, compared with the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side), the first passage arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) A ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the member F6160 is unlikely to enter the first winning port 64.
Next, as shown in FIG. 1624, in the post-operation state, the upper passage F6114 passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side). (Third passage FRt63) moving (flowing down, rolling) upward (arrow U direction) contacts the contact portion F6173b of the distributing means F6170 to contact the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage member F6120). The ball is guided (thrown and flowed down) to the passage FRt65). In other words, the contact portion F6173b prevents the ball from being guided (thrown or flowed down) to the insertion hole F9116 of the passage member F9110. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the first winning port 64 compared to the pre-operation state.

In the post-operation state, the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) passes through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side). The ball moving (flowing down, rolling) upward (in the direction of arrow U) comes into contact with the contact portion F6173b of the sorting means F6170 and is guided (thrown) to the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65). , flowing down). Therefore, the easiness of winning to the first winning hole 64 is substantially the same in the pre-operation state and the post-operation state.
In this way, the ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) almost certainly wins the first prize in the pre-operation state. While it is possible to win a prize in the opening 64, in the post-action state, it is difficult to win in the first prize opening 64 compared to the pre-action state.
Therefore, in the pre-operation state, the ball passing through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 disposed on the left side (arrow L direction side) moves upward in the upper passage F6114 (flows downward, rolls downward). It is possible to make the player expect to play the game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
Next, referring to FIG. 1625, the lower frame F10086b in the 102nd embodiment will be described. In the lower frame F10086b in the 102nd embodiment, the contact portion F6154 of the lower frame F6086b in the 98th embodiment is not provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1625(a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame F10086b in the 102nd embodiment, and FIG. 1625(b) is a partially enlarged front view of the lower frame F10086b.
Note that FIG. 1625 illustrates the lower frame F10086b in a post-operation state. In addition, in FIG. 1625(a), illustration of the distribution means excluding the contact portion F10173b of the displacement member F10173 is omitted, and in FIG. 1625(b), illustration of the fifth passage member F6120 is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1625, the contact portion F10173b in the 102nd embodiment has a second bending in the upward direction (arrow J direction in FIG. The surface F10173b2 is formed curved. The second curved surface F10173b2 is recessed toward the descending direction (direction of arrow K in FIG. 1625(b), hereinafter referred to as the “descending direction”) in the inclination of the upper passage F6114.
Next, the movement (falling down, rolling) of the ball distributed (guided) to the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) of the passage member F6110 will be described. In the state before operation of the lower frame F10086b, the ball that moves (flows down and rolls) in the upward direction (direction of arrow J) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) moves between the upper passage F6114 and the contact portion F10173b. It passes through the flush guide surface F10173b3 and is guided upward from the contact portion F10173b.

The ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the upward direction (direction of arrow J) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) gradually decreases in speed, stops temporarily, and then descends (direction of arrow K). move toward (run down, roll). The ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the downward direction (direction of arrow K) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) again passes through the guide surface F10173b3 of the contact portion F10173b and exits from the contact portion F10173b. is also guided downward.
On the other hand, after the ball passes through the guide surface F10173b3 of the contact portion F10173b and is guided upward (direction of arrow J) from the contact portion F10173b, the guide surface F10173b3 of the contact portion F10173b moves downward (direction of arrow J). K direction side), when the lower frame F10086b is moved to the post-operation state before it moves (flows down, rolls), the contact portion F10173b faces the position where it can contact the ball. Therefore, the ball that moves (flows down, rolls) in the downward direction (arrow K direction) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) contacts the second curved surface F10173b2.
By coming into contact with the second curved surface F10173b2, the ball is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side) along the curved surface of the second curved surface F10173b2, and the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage member F6120) FRt65) is distributed to the fifth passage portion F6121.
Here, the second curved surface F10173b2 is not formed on the contact portion F10173b, for example, the upward direction side (arrow J direction) of the upper passage F6114 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). In this case, the ball contacts the flat surface of the contact portion F10173b, and there is a risk that the movement (falling down, rolling) of the ball is restricted.

In this case, the lower frame F10086b is moved to the pre-operating state, so that the ball moves (flows down and rolls) in the downward direction (arrow K direction) in the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63). However, there is a risk that the balls will not be distributed (become non-guided) to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).
Therefore, after the ball passes through the guide surface F10173b3 of the contact portion F10173b and is guided upward (direction of arrow J) from the contact portion F10173b, the guide surface F10173b3 of the contact portion F10173b moves downward (direction of arrow J). K direction side), even if the lower frame F10086b is moved to the post-operation state before the ball moves (flows down, rolls) toward the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65 ) is not distributed to the fifth passage portion F6121 (becomes unguided), and there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the second curved surface F10173b2 is formed in the contact portion F10173b, the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) moves downward (arrow K direction) (downward). , rolling) balls can be distributed to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.
Next, the lower frame F11086b in the 103rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1626 and 1627. FIG. In the 98th embodiment, the case where the displacement member F6173 is operated (displaced) by using the weight of the ball for the displacement passage member F6174 has been described. The displacement member F6173 can also be operated (displaced) by the driving force of the actuator (solenoid F11002). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1626 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame F11086b in the 103rd embodiment, and FIG. 1627 is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame F11086b. The lower frame F11086b in the 103rd embodiment further includes a sensor F11001 and a solenoid F11002 in contrast to the lower frame F6086b in the 98th embodiment.
In FIG. 1627, the first area F11003a and the second area F11003b are schematically illustrated as hatched areas. The first region F1103a is a region (position) in which a ball can flow into the insertion hole F6162a2, and is defined as an annular range concentric with the insertion hole F6162a2. The second region F1103b is a region (position) in which a ball can flow into the insertion hole F6162a1, and is defined as an annular range concentric with the insertion hole F6162a1. In this embodiment, the first area F1103a and the second area F1103b have the same size.
As shown in FIGS. 1626 and 1627, the sensor F1101 has an insertion hole F6162a2 (that is, a hole formed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the pair of insertion holes F6162a formed in the concave portion F6162). A sensor for detecting a passing ball (proximity switch for detecting a ball passing through the inner periphery of the through-hole) is provided at the downstream end of the guide recess F6163a that continues to the insertion hole F6162a2.
The sensor F1101 is arranged in each of the insertion holes F6162a2 in the pair of first passage members F6160 (left side (arrow L direction side) and right side (arrow R direction side) in front view). Further, the sensor F1101 is arranged in a manner that does not affect the direction in which the ball is guided by the guide recess F6163a. For example, the ball that has passed through the insertion hole F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 on the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) is not on the front side of the vertical wall portion F6113, but on the left side in front view from the lower passage F6112 ( It is guided (thrown, outflow) to the upper passage F6114 in the direction of the arrow L).

The solenoids F11002 are actuators for independently displacing the pair of displacement members F6173, and are arranged on the back surface of the back plate F6151 in a pair facing each other (a posture in which the plungers F11002b are connected to the displacement members F6173). It is installed (fixed, attached).
The solenoid F11002 includes a case F11002a in which a coil, a fixed iron core and a return spring are accommodated, and a plunger F11002b that can be retracted (linearly displaced) with respect to the case F11002a. It is disposed in a posture parallel to the first axis F6172.
Note that the solenoid F11002 is configured as a pull (attraction) solenoid. That is, when the power is not supplied, the plunger F11002b is projected by the elastic force of the return spring, the displacement member F6173 is arranged at the initial position (the position where the ball cannot contact the contact portion F6173b), and when the power is supplied, the plan By pulling (sucking) the jar F11002b, the displacement member F6173 is displaced (slid) along the first axis F6172, and the displacement member F6173 is moved to the projecting position (projecting from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114, the contact portion F6173b is placed at a position where the ball can contact).
The elastic force of the return spring is set to a magnitude that allows the displacement member F6173 to be moved (displaced) even by the weight of the ball when the weight of the ball acts on the displacement passage member F6174. However, even if the weight of the ball acts on the displacement passage member F6174, the displacement member F6173 may not be operated (displaced) by the weight of the ball. Alternatively, the displacement passage member F6174 and the mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement passage member F6174 (displacement caused by the weight of the ball) to the displacement member F6173 may be omitted (that is, the displacement member F6173 may be operated only by driving the solenoid F11002). A configuration in which F6173 is displaced may be used).

In this embodiment, the solenoid F11002 is energized for a predetermined period of time when the sensor F11001 detects passage of the ball as a trigger (condition). Specifically, when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor F110001, the solenoid F11002 is energized immediately after the detection, and the energization continues for 5 seconds.
Note that the time from when the sensor F110001 detects the passage of the ball to when the energization of the solenoid F11002 is started is arbitrary. Electricity may be started. That is, the timing of starting energization may be delayed from the detection of passage of the ball. The player can expect the effect of the displacement member F6173 (abutting portion F6173b) on the succeeding ball (the manner in which the succeeding ball easily flows into the inflow port FOPf61), thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. In this case, a plurality of types of delay time may be prepared and set at random from the plurality of types.
Also, the duration of energization of the solenoid F11002 is arbitrary, and may be shorter or longer than the above-exemplified duration (5 seconds).
The energization of the solenoid F11002 may be performed intermittently. For example, a mode is illustrated in which energization for a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and de-energization for a second time (e.g., 1 second) are repeated for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds). be. In this case, either the first time period or the second time period may be longer, or they may be the same length. The first time and/or the second time may be of different lengths each time.

A set of energization (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and de-energization (e.g., 1 second) for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) is repeated multiple times (e.g., 15 times). may be executed.
Further, when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor F11001 and the ball is won as a result of a lottery with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/199), the solenoid F11002 may be energized.
The condition for energizing the solenoid F11002 may be a combination of the above aspects.
Balls that have flowed into the lower passage F6112 through the insertion hole F6162a2 are more likely to flow into the inlet FOPf61 than balls that have flowed into the lower passage F6112 through the insertion hole F6162a1, as in the 98th embodiment. Therefore, from which of the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 the ball flowing into the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) flows into the lower passage F6112, that is, the position where the ball flows down (first region F11003a or second region F11003b) can be made to gaze (awareness) of the player. As a result, the player can expect the liquid to flow down from the first area F1103a (insertion hole F6162a2), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, with the sensor F11001 detecting passage of the ball as a trigger (condition), the solenoid F11002 is energized for a predetermined period of time. A displacement of F6173 is performed. Therefore, even if the liquid flows downward from the second area F1103b (the insertion hole F6162a1), the player can expect the liquid to flow into the inlet FOPf61. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In this case, the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) is formed so that the sphere can move between the first region F11003a and the second region F11003b. The player can watch the movement of the ball in the recess F6162 to see if the ball is flowing down. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, the path of the ball from the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 to the displacement member F6173 includes a first path in which the ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (first region F11003a) moves to the displacement member F6173, an insertion hole F6162a1 (second region A second path along which the ball flowing down from F11003b) moves to the displacement member F6173 is provided, and the ball is formed to be movable between the first path and the second path.
As a result, a path through which the ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (the first area F11003a) can reach the displacement member F6173 and a path through which the ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a1 (the second area F11003b) can reach the displacement member F6173. types can be secured within a certain space. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of movement of the ball and enhance the amusement of the game.

Note that the first path is, for example, a ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (first region F11003a) in the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) on the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view. The area on the rear plate F6151 side in the lower passage F6112 on the left side (arrow L direction side) and the upper passage F6114 on the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) are sequentially arranged on the front view left side (arrow L direction side). direction side) to the displacement member F6173.
On the other hand, the second path is, for example, a ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a1 (second region F11003b) in the first passage member F6160 (recess F6162) on the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view. A region on the front plate F6111 side of the lower passage F6112 on the side (arrow L direction side), a lower passage F6112 (a region between the front plate F6111 and the upright wall portion F6113) in the center in front view, and a right in front view. A region on the front plate F6111 side in the lower passage F6112 on the right side (arrow R direction side), a region on the rear plate F6151 side in the lower passage F6112 on the right side in front view (arrow R direction side), and a right side in front view It is a path that moves in order from the upper passage F6114 on the right side (arrow R direction side) to the displacement member F6173 on the right side (arrow R direction side) in front view.
In addition, when the ball flows down from the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2, the state of entry into the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 (advance angle, entry speed, etc.) and the contact state with the inner peripheral surfaces of the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 at the time of entry Due to factors such as contact angle, contact strength, etc., the direction of flow, the speed of flow, and the direction of rotation of the sphere are changed. Therefore, it is effective that the ball is formed to be movable between the first path and the second path, and as a result, the ball assumed to have flowed down from the insertion hole F6162a2 (the insertion hole F6162a1) is transferred to the first path. Various forms can be formed, such as moving to the second route on the way (to the first route in the middle of the second route). As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
Here, the lower passage F6112 and the upper passage F6114 may be formed with one or a plurality of protrusions (abutment means) that protrude from the rolling surface of the ball so that the ball can abut thereon. . In this case, the sphere moving on the first path or (and) the second path is brought into contact with the projection (abutment means) to change the movement direction of the sphere, thereby It is easy to form the movement of the sphere between the two paths. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Incidentally, the projecting position of the projection (abutting means) is arbitrary. The protrusion (abutment means) may be arranged, for example, on the lower passage F6112 on the left side (arrow L direction side) in a front view, on the boundary between the first path and the second path, and on the insertion hole F6162a2. The path for the ball flowing down from the path toward the upper passage F6114 and the path for the ball flowing down from the insertion hole F6162a1 toward the lower passage F6112 (region between the front plate F6111 and the upright wall portion F6113) in the center of the front view are separated, An example is a form in which a plurality of spheres are arranged in a row along a virtual line parallel to the front plate F6111 and the rear plate F6151 at predetermined intervals (intervals through which spheres can pass).
1628 to 1637, the pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") H10 in the 104th embodiment will be described.
Figure 1628 is a front view of the pachinko machine H10 in the 104th embodiment, Figure 1629 is a rear view of the pachinko machine H10, and Figure 1630 is an open (unfolded) inner frame H12 with respect to the outer frame H11. FIG. 1631 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine H10 showing the state, and FIG. 1631 shows a state (deployed) in which the back pack unit H94 is opened from the inner frame H12 with the inner frame H12 opened from the outer frame H11. FIG. 1632 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine H10 showing a state in which the inner frame H12 is closed with respect to the outer frame H11 and the front frame H14 is opened (unfolded). 1633 is a front view of the pachinko machine H10 with the front frame H14 removed, FIG. 1634 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board H13 and the inner frame H12, and FIG. 1635 is an exploded perspective front view of the front frame H14. 1636 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front frame H14. In FIG. 1633, the rear side opening H172 for throwing the ball from the shooting position ball-throwing unit H170 to the ball-throwing unit H112a is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.
Further, in the following description, the front side of the paper surface is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is defined as the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine H10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine H10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 1628) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine H10, respectively.

Also, unless otherwise specified, the player playing the pachinko machine H10 is positioned in front of the pachinko machine H10 (in the direction of arrow F) and looks at the back of the pachinko machine H10 (in the direction of arrow B). The description will be made assuming that the game is played in a facing state (facing the front side of the pachinko machine H10).
As shown in FIGS. 1628 to 1636, the pachinko machine H10 has an outer frame H11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame H11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame H11. Mainly includes an inner frame H12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to H11, and a front frame H14 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame H12 and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame H12. .
Metal hinges H18 are attached to the outer frame H11 at two locations (in the direction of arrows UD) on the left side (in the direction of arrow L) in a front view (see FIG. 1628) in order to support the inner frame H12. The side on which the hinge H18 is provided is used as an opening/closing axis, and the inner frame H12 is supported together with the front frame H14 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side (arrow F direction side).
The pachinko machine H10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame H11 to the island facility. In addition, the outer frame H11 is not an essential configuration in the pachinko machine H10, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame H11 or the outer frame H11, and the inner frame H12 support structure (hinge H18, etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame H11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

The outer frame H11 includes an upper plate H11a arranged on the upper side (direction of arrow U), a lower plate H11b arranged on the lower side (direction of arrow D), and an upper plate H11a and a lower plate H11b. A left and right plate H11c and a right plate H11d, which vertically connect the left and right ends (in the direction of the arrows LR), are combined to form a frame shape.
The outer frame H11 is not limited to being made of wood, and may be made of a metal material such as aluminum or a resin material such as plastic. It may be formed by combining the formed members (the upper plate H11a, the lower plate H11b, the left plate H11c, and the right plate H11d).
In this embodiment, the hinge H18 is attached to the left side of the outer frame H11 (in the direction of the arrow L) in a front view, and the right side of the inner frame H12 in a front view (in the direction of the arrow R) of the outer frame H11 is the front side. (Arrow F direction side), but a hinge H18 is attached to the right side of the outer frame H11 when viewed from the front, and the left side of the inner frame H12 when viewed from the front can be opened and closed toward the front side of the outer frame H11. Also, the hinges H18 are attached to the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the outer frame H11 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in front view, and the inner frame H12 is attached to the front view upper side (arrow U direction side) with respect to the outer frame H11. direction side) can be opened and closed toward the front side.
The inner frame H12 consists of a frame forming unit H12a formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame H11, and a back pack rotatably supported on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the frame forming unit H12a. The back pack unit H94 has a left side (arrow L direction side) in a front view, which is the rotation proximal side (opening/closing base end side), and a right side (arrow R direction side) which rotates. The distal end side (opening/closing distal end side) is rotatable backward (see FIG. 1631).

In addition, the inner frame H12 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the front side (arrow F direction side) opened by the frame forming unit H12a and the back pack unit H94. A game board H13 (see FIGS. 1633 and 1634) is provided. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (game balls) to flow down in front of the game board H13.
The frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 includes a left end support portion H12a1 for supporting the left end of the game board H13 at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface on the left side (direction of the arrow L), and a support portion H12a1 on the right side (direction of the arrow R). ) are provided with board support devices H12a2 for supporting the right end of the game board H13. The game board H13 is pushed into the back side (arrow B direction side) of the inner frame H12 while the left end of the base plate H60 is inserted into the left end support H12a1, and then the board support device H12a2 is operated to operate the board support device. H12a2 is fixed inside the inner frame H12 by engaging with the front surface of the base plate H60 (supporting the front surface of the base plate H60).
In addition, the frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12 includes a ball shooting unit H112a (see FIG. 1633) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board H13, and a ball to the front frame H14 (upper and lower plate unit H15). It is formed mainly with a disc passage forming member H160 (see FIG. 1633) for throwing the ball.
Further, to the frame forming unit H12a of the inner frame H12, metal hinges H19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view to support the front frame H14, and the hinges H19 are provided. The front frame H14 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side (arrow F direction side) with the front side serving as an opening/closing axis (see FIG. 1632). The locking of the inner frame H12 and the locking of the front frame H14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole H21 of the cylinder lock H20 provided in the frame forming unit H12a and performing a predetermined operation.

The ball shooting unit H112a is formed so as to be able to receive balls that are thrown one by one at a predetermined timing from the upper tray H17 via the shooting position ball throwing unit H170, and to the game board H13 (inner rail H61 and outer rail H62). A launching rail H112a1 extending in the throwing direction of a ball, a rotating body H112a2 rotatably supported and formed so as to be able to rotate and contact the ball thrown on the launching rail H112a1, and the rotating body H112a2. A drive motor (not shown) for rotation is mainly provided.
To shoot (throw) a ball from the ball shooting unit H112a to the upper side (the direction of the arrow U) of the game board H13, after the ball is thrown onto the shooting rail H112a1, the rotating body H112a2 is rotated to move the ball onto the shooting rail H112a1. This is done by causing the rotating body H112a2 to collide with the ball thrown to .
In this embodiment, a ball is shot (thrown) from the ball shooting unit H112a by the rotating body H112a2, but the structure for shooting the ball is not limited to the rotating member (the rotating body H112a2). For example, it has a slide body that can be slidably displaced in the shooting direction of the ball, and a solenoid that slides the slide body. When the solenoid is energized, the slide body is displaced and collides with the ball, thereby launching the ball (throwing the ball). It may be configured to do so.
Also, the ball shooting unit H112a is not limited to being disposed on the inner frame H12, but is provided on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate H60 (to the game board H13) as a rendering device of the pachinko machine H10. It is also possible to arrange For example, a ball is thrown from an opening in the center frame H86 or the base plate H60 onto the launch rail H112a1 disposed on the back side of the base plate H60, and the ball is launched by the rotating body H112a2 to produce the third symbol. The sphere may pass through the front side of the display device H81.

As shown in FIG. 1633, the dish passage forming member H160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion H161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion H162. The main-body-side upper tray passage portion H161 and the main-body-side lower tray passage portion H162 communicate with through-holes that penetrate the inner frame H12 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the rear side (arrow B direction side) ends. As possible, the passage is opened toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and the end of the front side (direction of arrow F) is opened downward (direction of arrow D). A curved passage whose direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) is formed. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispenser H133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame H12, enters the dish passage forming member H160 from the rear end of the dish passage forming member H160, and enters the dish passage forming member H160 from the front end. Ejected.
As shown in FIG. 1633, a shutter H163 is provided on the lower side of the dish passage forming member H160 to restrict the outflow of balls from the main body side upper dish passage portion H161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion H162. there is The shutter H163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to block the outflow of the ball and a permissible position that allows the outflow of the ball. When H14 is closed, it is located at the allowable position, and when the front frame H14 is opened with respect to the inner frame H12 (the state shown in FIG. 1632), it is located at the blocking position. As a result, when the front frame H14 is opened while balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion H161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion H162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. .
The front frame H14 is arranged on a body frame H14d formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape from a metal plate, on the body frame H14d, and on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the body frame H14d. a left decorative unit H14b and a right decorative unit H14c extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) from both left and right sides (in the direction of arrows LR) of the upper decorative unit H14a; An upper and lower tray unit H15 covering the front on the lower side of the frame H14d, a passage forming unit H140 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the upper and lower tray unit H15 via the main body frame H14d, and the passage forming unit H140. A firing position ball feeding unit H170 disposed on the rear side of the is mainly provided, and is rotatably attached to the inner frame H12.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 1635 and 1636, front door mounting brackets H57 and H58 are provided on the pivot base end side of the front frame H14. The cylindrical portion (the front door mounting bracket H58 is a metal plate having a shaft hole) is engaged with the inner frame H12, so that the front frame H14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame H12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket H57 extends from the front end of the inner frame H12 to the front side (arrow F direction side) at a position below the hinge H19 on the upper side of the inner frame H12, and extends from the tip to the back side (arrow F direction side). (B direction side) is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion H12e having a fitting recess H12e1 (see FIG. 1634) in which the front door mounting bracket H57 can be fitted. In addition, the front door mounting bracket H58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the hinge H19 on the lower side of the inner frame H12. It is axially supported by being fitted onto a support pin H19a having a shape in which the diameter of the cylinder is smaller.
The front frame H14 is formed with a window portion H14e in an area surrounded by the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, the right decorative unit H14c, and the upper and lower tray unit H15. A glass unit H16 having two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the frame H14 (body frame H14d) (see FIG. 1628). The pachinko machine H10 has a glass unit H16 (window portion H14e) so that the front side of the game board H13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine H10.
As shown in FIGS. 1628 and 1632, the glass unit H16 is a pair of front and rear transparent glasses H16a and H16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion H14e and having light transmittance (transparency), and these transparent glasses H16a and H16b integrated. and a fixed frame (not shown). The fixed frame is made of a resin material and formed into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses H16a and H16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses H16a and H16b are adhered to the fixed frame, whereby the glass unit H16 is integrated with double glazing. It is
Although the glass unit H16 is made of transparent glass H16a and H16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of a resin material and is transparent and colorless. If the game area can be visually recognized through H16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Also, the two transparent glasses H16a and H16b may be arranged with a predetermined gap between the two transparent glasses H16a and H16b. When a predetermined gap is provided between the opposing transparent glasses H16a and H16b, displaceable displacement means is provided between the opposing transparent glasses H16a and H16b so that the game board H13 can move. Also, it may be possible to perform an effect by the displacement means on the front side (arrow F direction side). In this case, the displacement means is, for example, a device that blows away a plurality of displacement members made of paper, nylon, or the like through holes formed in the fixed frame, or a device displaceably disposed on the fixed frame. The displaceable member is displaced between the two transparent glasses H16a and H16b by the sound lamp controller H113 (see FIG. 1637). Further, a light emitting means is arranged on a fixing plate for fixing two transparent glasses H16a and H16b, and light emitted from the light emitting means is directed to the front side transparent glass H16a or the rear side (arrow B direction side) transparent glass H16a. It is also possible to illuminate one of the transparent glasses H16b so that the player can visually recognize the light illuminating one of the transparent glasses H16a and H16b.
In the front frame H14 (the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right decorative unit H14c), around the window portion H14e, there are a plurality of illumination portions H29 to H33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs as shown in FIG. is provided. These illumination parts H29 to H33 light up or flash in response to changes in game conditions such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, in the illumination part H30 on the upper side of the window part H14e (in the direction of the arrow U), there are built-in light-emitting means that light up in the event of a predetermined error such as insufficient balls to be paid out and light-up means that light up during prize ball payout. It is
In addition, portions of the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right decorative unit H14c other than the regions where the electric decorations H29 to H33 are arranged are made opaque to the light emitted from the electric decorations H29 to H33. It is formed from an impermeable resin material. As a result, the light emission (lighting or blinking) of the illumination parts H29 to H33 is easily focused on by the player.
It should be noted that the portions other than the area where the electric decoration parts H29 to H33 are arranged are not limited to being formed in a non-transmissive manner, but are formed from a transparent resin material so that the electric decoration parts H29 to H33 emit light (lighting, lighting, etc.). When there is blinking, light may be emitted (transmitted) from the entire front frame H14. In addition, a chromium-plated ABS resin plated member may be provided around the electric decoration parts H29 to H33 so as to create a gorgeous appearance.

On the left side (arrow L direction side) and right side (arrow R direction side) of the upper decorative unit H14a (on the upper right side and upper left side of the window portion H14e), there are speaker sets that output sound effects according to the game state. A speaker cover H27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) is provided to cover the solid (audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637)), and the sound of the speaker is transmitted through the speaker cover H27 to the front side of the pachinko machine H10 ( It is configured to be able to emit sound in the direction of arrow F).
Below the window portion H14e (in the direction of arrow B), as shown in FIG. An upper and lower plate unit H15 is arranged side by side.
The upper plate H17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate H17. In addition, the upper tray H17 has the function of temporarily storing the balls dispensed from the dispensing device H133 (see FIG. 1629) and guiding them to the ball launching unit H112a (see FIG. 1633) while aligning them in a row. The bottom surface is inclined downward to the right side (in the direction of the arrow R) in front view, and the inclination allows the ball thrown into the upper tray H17 to be guided to the firing position ball-throwing unit H170. The balls thrown from the upper tray H17 to the shooting position ball-throwing unit H170 are guided one by one to the ball shooting unit H112a by the operation of the shooting position ball-throwing unit H170.
The lower plate H50 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and has a function of storing surplus balls in the upper plate H17. A ball guide opening H53 is formed in the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the lower plate H50 and opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) to guide the ball to the lower plate H50.

A ball extracting lever H52 is provided at the lower portion (direction of arrow D) on the front side (direction of arrow F) of the lower plate H50 to be operated when the balls stored in the lower plate H50 are ejected downward. there is The ball extracting lever H52 is always urged to the right (direction of arrow R). The bottom opening is opened, and the ball naturally falls and is discharged from the bottom opening. The operation of the ball extracting lever H52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray H50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray H50.
It should be noted that the operation of the ball extracting lever H52 is not limited to discharging the ball to the senryo box, and the ball may be discharged to a recovery port communicating with the island facility. In addition, it is not necessary to separate the upper tray H17 and the lower tray H50 to provide a plurality of portions for storing the balls, and the lower tray H50 may be abolished and only the upper tray H17 may be configured to have only one storage portion. good.
An operation unit H180 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the upper tray H17 (ball storage area). The operation unit H180 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device H81 or the like.
A button member H181 is arranged on the top side of the operation unit H180. The button member H181 can be pressed downward about an axis extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect to be played or changing the content of the super ready-to-win effect.

The operation unit H180 may be provided at a different location such as the vicinity of the lower tray H50 other than the upper tray H17, or may be provided at a plurality of locations. Alternatively, a configuration in which information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be used.
On the right side of the operation unit H180, a ball rental operation section H40 (see FIG. 1635), a function adjustment operation section H190, and a ball discharge lever H54 are arranged on the upper surface side of the upper and lower tray unit H15. The ball rental operation unit H40 is provided with a frequency display unit H41, a ball rental button H42, and a return button H43. When the ball lending operation section H40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine H10, the ball is released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display portion H41 is an area where balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as balance information.
The ball lending button H42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and as long as the card or the like has a balance, the lending balls are supplied to the upper tray H17. be done. The return button H43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray H17 from a ball lending device without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation section H40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
The function adjustment operation unit H190 includes an enter button H191, and an up button H192, a down button H193, a left button H194, and a right button H195, which are arranged at positions outside the four directions of a cross centered on the enter button H191. .

The function adjustment operation section H190 controls the volume of the speaker (audio output device H226) provided in the upper decorative unit H14a, the brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device H81, the upper decorative unit H14a, the left decorative unit H14b, and the right side. This is an operation part for changing the brightness of the illumination parts H29 to H33 arranged in the decoration unit H14c. The player can change the volume and brightness to suit his (player's) taste by operating the OK button H191, the up button H192, the down button H193, the left button H194, and the right button H195. .
Also, when changing the volume or brightness, the degree of adjustment of the volume or brightness is displayed in a part of the third pattern display device H81 as a numerical value, volume, or the like. As a result, when the player starts playing another pachinko machine H10, the volume and brightness can be easily adjusted.
It should be noted that the change by the function adjustment operation section H190 is not limited to the volume and brightness, and it may be possible to change the effect displayed on the third pattern display device H81. In addition, the degree of adjustment of the volume and brightness is not limited to being displayed on the third pattern display device H81, for example, even if it is not displayed on the third pattern display device H81 The adjustment may be performed by sound or display, or the degree of adjustment may be displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device H81.
The ball discharge lever H54 is a lever operated by the player when throwing the ball stored in the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50. Disposed in a biased state. When the ball ejection lever H54 is operated (pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow D)), the passage from the upper tray H17 to the ball throwing unit H170 is opened from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50 (for fouling). It is configured to be switchable to a state of communicating with the ball passage H145). As a result, the balls stored in the upper tray H17 can be discharged to the lower tray H50.

On the right side of the lower tray H50 (in the direction of the arrow R), an operating handle H51 is provided which is operated by the player during play. Inside the operating handle H51, there are a touch sensor H51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit H112a, a shooting stop switch H51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle H51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle H51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor H51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board H13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle H51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor H51a and the firing stop switch H51b are turned off.
The passage forming unit H140 is molded from a resin material, and includes a front door side upper plate passage portion H141 leading to the upper plate H17, a front door side lower plate passage portion H142 leading to the lower plate H50, and a foul ball passage portion H145. ,have.
A put-out ball receptacle H143 projecting rearward (in the direction of the arrow B) and opening upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit H140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame H14). A partition wall H144 partitions the payout ball receiving port H143 to the left and right to form a passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion H141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion H142 (Fig. 1635). reference).
The passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion H141 is communicated with the body side upper tray passage portion H161 (see FIG. 1633) of the inner frame H12, and the passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion H142 is communicated. communicates with the body-side lower plate passage portion H162 (see FIG. 1633) of the inner frame H12. As a result, the ball thrown from the payout device H133 is thrown to the upper tray H17 or the lower tray H50.

The foul ball passage portion H145 (see FIG. 1635) is a portion that forms a passage for ejecting balls that have not reached the play area among the balls shot from the ball shooting unit H112a into the lower tray H50 as foul balls.
As shown in FIG. 1636, the foul ball passage portion H145 is provided with a foul ball receptacle portion H146 whose upper side (arrow U direction side) is open. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion H146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion H145 (see FIG. 1635) and is then discharged to the lower tray H50. The foul ball passage portion H145 may be connected to the upper plate H17 instead of the lower plate H50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate H17.
The foul ball passage portion H145 merges with a ball extraction passage (not shown) through which unfired balls that flow down from the upper tray H17 to the lower tray H50 when the player operates the ball discharge lever H54 are guided. is formed to
The shooting position ball throwing unit H170 is a unit for throwing the balls stored in the upper tray H17 one by one to the ball shooting unit H112a. The shooting position ball throwing unit H170 has a front side opening H171 connected to the opening of the ball throwing path of the upper tray H17, a back side opening H172 through which the ball that has flowed in from the front side opening H171 can be discharged from the back side, and these front side openings. It mainly comprises a switching means (not shown) disposed displaceably on a passage passing from H171 to the rear side opening H172, and a solenoid (not shown) for driving the switching means.

The switching means of the firing position ball-throwing unit H170 has a position where the ball can flow from the upper tray H17 into the front opening H171 and a position where the ball cannot flow from the upper tray H17 into the front opening H171. When the ball is displaced from the upper tray H17 to a position where it is impossible to let the ball flow into the front side opening H171, the ball on the passage of the firing position ball throwing unit H170 is displaced to the back side opening H172. can flow into the ball launching unit H112a (shooting rail H112a1). As a result, each ball can be ejected from the rear side opening H172 as the position of the switching means is switched (one reciprocating displacement).
The rear opening H172 is positioned above (in the direction of arrow U) the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the launching rail H112a1 of the ball launching unit H112a (see FIG. 1633). Therefore, balls are thrown one by one from the shooting position ball-throwing unit H170 to the shooting rail H112a1 of the ball-shooting unit H112a.
Also, as shown in FIG. 1633, the rear side opening H172 is formed between both ends of the launch rail H112a1 in the throwing direction of the ball of the launch rail H112a1. Therefore, the ball thrown onto the launch rail H112a1 from the rear side opening H172 can roll on the launch rail H112a1 in both left and right directions (directions of arrows LR), but the launch rail H112a1 rolls on one side (rotator side away from H112a2) is tilted upward (in the direction of arrow U), so the ball (the ball before being launched by the rotor H112a2) thrown from the rear opening H172 onto the launch rail H112a1 rotates. Rolling away from the body H112a2 is suppressed.
As shown in FIG. 1633, the game board H13 has a base plate H60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills (not shown), and rail members. H61, H62, general winning opening H63, first winning opening H64, second winning opening H640, variable winning device H65, through gate H67, variable display device unit H80, etc. Mounted on the back side.

The base plate H60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the various structures arranged on the back side (arrow B direction) of the base plate H60 from the front side (arrow F direction side) can be visually recognized by the player. can be formed. The general winning port H63, the first winning port H64, the second winning port H640, and the variable display device unit H80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate H60 by router processing, and tapping screws are installed from the front side of the game board H13. etc. is fixed.
Note that the base plate H60 is not limited to being made of a light-transmitting resin material, but may be made of a wooden material in which thin plate materials are pasted together, or made of an impermeable resin material. It may be formed. In these cases, it is preferable to attach a decorated seal or the like to the entire front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate H60 to ensure the decorativeness of the base plate H60.
The central front portion of the game board H13 can be seen from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the inner frame H12 through part of the window portion H14e (see FIG. 1628) of the front frame H14. Mainly referring to FIG. 1633, the configuration of the game board H13 will be described below.
In front of the game board H13, an outer rail H62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail H62 is placed inside the outer rail H62. An arc-shaped inner rail H61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board H13 is surrounded by the inner rail H61 and the outer rail H62, and the game board H13 and the glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1628) surround the front and back (in the direction of the arrow FB). A game area is formed in front of H13 where a game is played by the behavior of the ball. The game area is the front surface of the game board H13 and is defined by two rail members H61 and H62 and a resin outer edge member H73 connecting the rails (a prize winning opening, etc. is the area where the ball that is thrown flows down). It should be noted that the two rail members H61 and H62 do not have to be metal plates, and may be formed in a belt shape from a resin material.

The two rail members H61 and H62 are provided for guiding the ball shot from the ball shooting unit H112a to the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the game board H13. A return ball prevention member H68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail H61 (upper left part in FIG. 1633).
The return ball prevention member H68 is formed of a plate member made of resin extending from the inner rail H61 side to the outer rail H62 side. direction can be rotated. The return-ball prevention member H68 has a weight on one end side, and the other end side is biased by the weight in a direction to approach the outer rail H62.
As a result, the other end side of the return ball prevention member H68 can be rotated in the direction away from the outer rail H62 by the momentum of the ball guided upward (the direction of the arrow U) of the game board H13, and the return ball When the ball is guided to a position exceeding the prevention member H68 (upper side of the game board H13), the other end side of the return ball prevention member H68 can be rotated in a direction approaching the outer rail H62, and once the game board H13 This prevents the ball guided to the upper part of the ball from returning into the ball guide passage again.
Note that the return ball prevention member H68 does not need to be made of a resin material, and may be made of a metal material. In addition to the weight, the other end side of the return ball prevention member H68 may be biased toward the outer rail H62 by a magnetic force such as a magnet or a biasing force such as a torsion spring.

A return rubber H69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail H62 (upper right in FIG. 1633) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
First pattern display devices H37A and H37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 1633). The first symbol display devices H37A and H37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main controller H110 (see FIG. 1637), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine H10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning hole H64 or the second prize winning hole H640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole H64, the first symbol display device H37A operates. The pattern display device H37B is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine H10 is in the process of changing the probability, shortening the working hours, or in the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate by the lighting state whether the pachinko machine H10 is in the process of fluctuation. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine H10 with a small number of LEDs. can.
Incidentally, in the pachinko machine H10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first prize-winning hole H64 and the second prize-winning hole H640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine H10 determines whether or not the game is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices H37A and H37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.
The number of rounds for the jackpot is not limited to 15R and 4R, and may be changed to another number of rounds depending on the model of the pachinko machine H10. good. Further, the predetermined number of fluctuations in the time saving state is not limited to 100 fluctuations, and may be set to 1 fluctuation or 1000 fluctuations, for example.
In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole H640. "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (time-saving medium) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine H10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state where the probability is not variable or the time is short (the jackpot probability and the second symbol winning probability are not increased).
During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory H640a attached to the second winning opening H640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory H640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second winning hole H640 more than when the electric accessory H640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole H640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory H640a associated with the second winning opening H640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory H640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory H640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory H640a attached to the second winning hole H640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory H640a associated with the second winning opening H640 and the number of times the electric accessory H640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes H63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit H80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit H80 is triggered by the winning of the first winning port H64 and the second winning port H640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B, the third symbol is displayed. It consists of a third pattern display device H81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate H67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame H86 is arranged in the variable display device unit H80 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device H81.
In addition, the center frame H86 is a member for preventing the balls flowing down the game area from flowing down to the third symbol display device H81 through the central opening of the base plate H60, and is located on the front side of the base plate H60 ( It is formed to protrude in the arrow F direction). A part of the center frame H86 is provided with a warp path (not shown) for receiving the balls flowing down the game area, passing them around the third symbol display device H81, and discharging them from the first winning hole H64 side. formed in the part. In this embodiment, the warp passage is configured so that the ball passes through the front side of the base plate H60, but it is also possible to form the warp passage so that the ball passes through the back side of the base plate H60. be.
The third pattern display device H81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device H114 (see FIG. 1637), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. The third pattern display device H81 may be configured with a size other than 9 inches, or may be configured by arranging two or more liquid crystal displays side by side.

Each pattern row of the third pattern display device H81 is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns). 3 patterns are variably displayed. In the third symbol display device H81 of this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller H110 (see FIG. 1637) is performed by the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B. Decorative display is performed according to the display of the pattern display devices H37A and H37B. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to form the third symbol display device H81.
The second pattern display device alternately lights up a "○" pattern and an "X" pattern as display patterns (second pattern (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate H67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine H10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the through gate H67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol. The second pattern display device may display a pattern using a part of the third pattern display device H81. may be displayed, and in this embodiment, it is displayed using a part of the third symbol display device H81.
In the pachinko machine H10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory H640a attached to the second winning hole H640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the electric accessary H640a of the second winning hole H640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole H640 during the variable probability and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, increase the probability of winning, increase the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory H640a for one time, etc. To the second winning opening H640 during the probability change or time reduction When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory H640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.
The through gate H67 is assembled to the game board H13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit H80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board H13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate H67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.
The number of times the ball passes through the through gate H67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices H37A and H37B, and at the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown). is also displayed. In this embodiment, the second symbol reservation lamp is configured to be displayed using a part of the third symbol display device H81, but is lit on a display device other than the third symbol display device H81. It may be displayed. For example, four LEDs that light up as the ball passes through the through gate H67 may be arranged below the third pattern display device H81 to light up and display.
Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate H67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates H67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate H67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit H80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit H80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B, the second symbol reservation lamp may not be used for lighting display.

Below the variable display device unit H80, there is arranged a first winning hole H64 through which balls can win. When the ball enters the first winning hole H64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board H13 is turned on, and the main controller H110 is caused by turning on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 1637), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37A.
On the other hand, below the first winning hole H64 in a front view, a second winning hole H640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole H640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board H13 is turned on, and the main controller H110 is caused by turning on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 1637), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37B.
Also, the first winning hole H64 and the second winning hole H640 are also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize hole H64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize hole H640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize hole H64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize hole H640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize hole H64 The number of prize balls paid out when H640 wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening H640 may be set to five.
An electric accessory H640a is attached to the second winning hole H640. This electric accessory H640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory H640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole H640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate H67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory H640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole H640.

In addition, in the present embodiment, feather members (electric accessory H640a) that open and close are arranged on both the left and right sides (directions of arrows LR) of the second winning hole H640, and when the electric accessory H640a is in an open state, A ball can enter the second prize winning port H640 from both the left and right sides of the second prize winning port H640. It may be configured so that the ball can win a prize immediately. In this case, a feather member (electric accessory H640a) that opens and closes only on the other side of the second winning hole H640 is provided.
Also, the electric accessory H640a is not limited to a rotating feather member, and may be any one that slides and displaces as long as it moves between a position to open and a position to close the second prize winning opening H640. For example, the electric accessory H640a may be slidably displaced in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) or slidably displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction side).
As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory H640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory H640a is released is longer than during the normal time during the variable probability and during the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole H640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.
In the pachinko machine H10 of this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board H13 is bilaterally symmetrical, the ball is shot so as to pass through the right side (the direction of the arrow R) of the variable display unit H80 (so-called " Aiming at the first prize hole H64, or shooting a ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit H80 (in the direction of the arrow L) (so-called "left hitting") will result in a second prize. You can also aim at the mouth H640. Therefore, the pachinko machine H10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot the ball according to the game state of the pachinko machine H10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

It should be noted that the probability of winning a jackpot remains the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the jackpot probability in the low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state are the same). In this case, the probability of winning the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second prize opening H640 than when the ball wins the first prize prize opening H64. In addition, the first prize winning opening H64 is provided in the "left hitting" side flow path, and the second winning opening H640 is provided in the "right hitting" side flow path. (The structure of the game board H13 is left-right asymmetrical).
According to this configuration, the electric accessary associated with the second winning opening H640 is often closed during normal operation, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening H640. A ball is shot toward the opening H64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit H80 (in the direction of the arrow L) ("left shot"), and by winning the first winning opening H64, there is an opportunity to win a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by getting a lot of.
On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate H67, the electric accessory H640a attached to the second winning hole H640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is a state where it is easy to win the second winning hole H640. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole H640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display unit H80 (in the direction of the arrow R) ("right shot"), and is passed through the through gate H67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by opening the accessory and winning the second prize hole H640.
Therefore, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine H10 (whether the game is variable, time-saving, or normal), the player is instructed how to shoot the ball "left-handed" or "right-handed." , and the interest of the player can be maintained.

A variable prize winning device H65 (see FIG. 1633) is arranged below the first prize winning port H64, and a specific prize winning port H65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine H10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first prize winning port H64 or the second prize winning port H640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device H37A or the first symbol display device H37B is turned on so that the big win is generated, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device H81. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole H65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).
The specific winning opening H65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening H65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole H65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.
Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening H65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B, the specific winning opening H65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening H65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening H65a while the specific winning opening H65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes H65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening H64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit H80.
An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board H13. Visible through H16.

The game board H13 is provided with an out port H71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes H63, H64, H65a and H640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out hole H71. The out port H71 is arranged below the specific winning port H65a (arrow D direction side).
In addition, the game board H13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills (not shown). ing. Furthermore, a part of the center frame H86 arranged in the central opening of the base plate H60 in a manner surrounding the third pattern display device H81 extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) to the game area on the rear side (in the direction of the arrow B). side) is extended, and a plurality of protruding portions protruding toward the front side (arrow F direction side) are provided in the extended region. Balls flowing down the game area of the game board H13 collide with many nails, protrusions of the center frame H86, windmills, and the like, so that the falling directions of the balls are dispersed as appropriate.
In the present embodiment, the direction in which a part of the center frame H86 extends is set upward (in the direction of arrow U). It may be extended, and not only the projecting portion but also the through gate H67 and the prize winning ports H63, H64, H65a and H640 may be arranged in the extended portion. Further, the center frame H86 may have a configuration that does not include an extended portion or a projecting portion.
The windmill is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). In addition, the wind turbine includes a disk member which is formed in a circle centered on the rotation axis when viewed from the front and is disposed at a position separated by a distance of one sphere from the front of the base plate H60, and a part of the disk member extending from the base plate. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) ball abutment protruded toward the plate H60 (direction of arrow B) and distributed at a predetermined angle (120 degrees in this embodiment) along the direction of rotation of the wind turbine. The ball flowing down the game board H13 rotates due to the impact of contact with the ball contact part, and is formed so as to be able to guide the contacting ball in a plurality of (two or more) directions. .

Also, the windmill is entirely made of a light-transmitting resin material. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the flowing direction of the ball that is in contact with the ball contacting portion, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the rotation direction of the windmill.
The game board H13 does not necessarily have a windmill on the base plate H60, and may be configured without a windmill. In addition, a windmill is arranged in the middle of the warp passage (not shown) of the center frame H86 and the passage (not shown) through which the ball enters each of the winning openings H63, H64, H65a and H640. It can also be configured to change the path of the sphere. Further, the windmill may be partially made of an impermeable resin material, or entirely made of an impermeable metal material such as aluminum. Any shape, color, or material may be used as long as the sphere can be guided in a plurality of directions upon contact. For example, the windmill may be configured to distribute the balls alternately in different directions one by one.
As shown in FIG. 1629, the back side of the pachinko machine H10 is mainly provided with control board units H90 and H91 and a back pack unit H94. The control board unit H90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller H110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller H113), and a display control board (display controller H114). The control board unit H91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device H111), a firing control board (fire control device H112), a power supply board (power supply H115), and a card unit connection board H116.
The back pack unit H94 is formed by unitizing a back pack H92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit H93. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main controller H110, sound lamp controller H113, display controller H114, payout controller H111, launch controller H112, power supply H115, and card unit connection board H116 are housed in board boxes H100 to H104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes H100 to H104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.
In addition, the board box H100 (main controller H110) and the board box H102 (dispensing controller H111 and firing controller H112) connect the box base and box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes H100, H102, or if the substrate boxes H100, H102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes H100 and H102 have been opened.
The dispensing unit H93 includes a tank H130 which is located at the top of the back pack unit H94 and opens upward, a tank rail H131 which is connected to the lower side of the tank H130 and gently slopes toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail H131. and a payout device H133 which is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail H132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor H216 (see FIG. 1637). ing. The tank H130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device H133. A vibrator H134 for applying vibration to the tank rail H131 is attached to the tank rail H131, and the vibration of the vibrator H134 suppresses clogging of balls in the tank rail H131. Note that the vibrator H134 can be attached not only to the tank rail H131, but also to other rail portions (paths). For example, it is arranged in the ball feeding passage (dish passage forming member H160) for throwing the ball to the upper plate H17 and the lower plate H50, and the ball feeding passage (shooting position ball throwing unit H170) for throwing the ball from the upper plate H17 to the ball launching device H117a. may be set.
The payout control device H111 is provided with a state return switch H120, the firing control device H112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob H121, and the power source device H115 is provided with a RAM erase switch H122. The state recovery switch H120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor H216 (see FIG. 1637). The operation knob H121 is operated to adjust the volume of sound emitted from the speaker (audio output device H226) on the store side. The RAM erasing switch H122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine H10 to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1637, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine H10 will be described. FIG. 1637 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine H10.
The main controller H110 is equipped with an MPU (microprocessor) H201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPUH 201 has a ROM (semiconductor memory) H 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPUH 201, and temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROMH 202. A RAM (random access memory) H203, which is a memory for executing the operation, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main controller H110, MPUH201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine H10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display setting of the first symbol display devices H37A, H37B and the third symbol display device H81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.
In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller H110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller H111 and the sound lamp controller H113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller H110 to the sub-controllers.
The RAMH 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, the contents of the internal registers of the MPUH 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPUH 201, and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM H203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply H115 even after the pachinko machine H10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM H203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAMH 203 . On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine H10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAMH203. Writing to the RAMH 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAMH 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPUH 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal HSG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit H252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
An input/output port H205 is connected to the MPUH201 of the main controller H110 via a bus line H204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port H205, the payout control device H111, the sound lamp control device H113, the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning hole H65a are the axes. A solenoid H209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as the MPUH201. to send.
It should be noted that the solenoid H209 is not only a large opening solenoid or a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, but also a drive source (driving motor) for accessory devices provided on the game board H13, and a drive for the ball shooting unit H112a. A configuration including a motor (not shown) and a drive motor (not shown) for driving the payout device H133 for throwing the ball to the upper tray H17 may be employed.
The input/output port H205 includes a switch group (not shown) and a sensor (through gate H67) for detecting passage through the through gate H67, and a winning detection for detecting that a ball has entered each of the winning holes H63, H64, H65a, and H640. A sensor (not shown), a vibration detection sensor (not shown) that detects that vibration is input to the pachinko machine H10, and sensors such as a magnetic force detection sensor that detects that a magnet or the like is brought close to the game area of the game board H13. Various switches H208 consisting of groups, etc., and a RAM erasing switch circuit H253 provided in the power supply H115, which will be described later, are connected. Various processes are executed based on HSG2.

The various switches H208 are the frame buttons H22 (the operation button member H181 of the operation unit H180, the decision button H191, the up button H192, the down button H193, the left button H194, the right button H195) may be included.
The payout control device H111 drives the payout motor H216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPUH 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROMH 212 storing a control program executed by the MPUH 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAMH 213 used as a work memory and the like.
The RAMH213 of the payout control device H111, like the RAMH203 of the main control device H110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPUH211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPUH211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM H213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply H115 even after the pachinko machine H10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM H213 is backed up. As with the MPUH 201 of the main controller H110, the NMI terminal of the MPUH 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal HSG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit H252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPUH 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
An input/output port H215 is connected to the MPUH211 of the payout control device H111 via a bus line H214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port H215 is connected to the main controller H110, the payout motor H216, the launch controller H112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device H111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device H111, but is not connected to the main control device H110.

The shooting control device H112 controls the ball shooting unit H112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle H51 when the main controller H110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. .
The rotation body H112a2 of the ball launching unit H112a is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor H51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle H51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch H51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). A driving force is transmitted from the drive motor according to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle H51, and the rotating body H112a2 is rotated at a speed corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle H51. As a result, a ball is shot from the ball shooting unit H112a between the inner rail H61 and the outer rail H62 with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle H51.
The audio lamp control device H113 outputs audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) H226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from the lamp display device (such as the illumination parts H29 to H33) H227, and performs variable production (variable display) and notice. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device H81 performed by the display control device H114 such as production. The MPUH 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROMH 222 storing control programs executed by the MPUH 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAMH 223 used as a work memory and the like.
An input/output port H225 is connected to the MPUH221 of the audio lamp controller H113 via a bus line H224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port H225 is connected to the main controller H110, the display controller H114, the audio output device H226, the lamp display device H227, the other devices H228, the button member H181, and the like.

The other device H228 includes not only the drive source for the accessory device provided on the game board H13, but also the drive motor (not shown) for the ball launching unit H112a and the electric accessory H640a for the second winning hole H640. It is good also as a structure containing.
The sound lamp control device H113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device H81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device H110, and sends the determined display mode to the command. The display controller H114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.).
In addition, the sound lamp control device H113 monitors the input from the button member H181, and when the button member H181 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device H81 or super reach. The display control device H114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is sent to the display control device H114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device H81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device H81. The display control device H114 displays various images on the third pattern display device H81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device H113.
Further, the sound lamp control device H113 monitors inputs from the function adjustment operating section H190 (Enter button H191, Up button H192, Down button H193, Left button H194, Right button H195), and the player selects the function adjustment operating section H190. is operated, the volume of the speaker (audio output device H226) is changed, the brightness of the third pattern display device H81 is changed, and the brightness of the illumination parts H29 to H33 is changed. , the display control device H114 is instructed. When the volume or brightness is changed, the degree of adjustment of the volume or brightness is temporarily displayed in front of the main display displayed on the third pattern display device H81 as a numerical value, volume, or the like.

In FIG. 1637, the operation button member H181 of the operation unit H180 and the enter button H191, up button H192, down button H193, left button H194, and right button H195 of the function adjustment operation unit H190 are collectively illustrated as a frame button H22. there is
Further, the sound lamp control device H113 receives a command (display command) representing the display contents of the third pattern display device H81 from the display control device H114. Based on the display command received from the display control device H114, the sound lamp control device H113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device H226 in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device H81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device H227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The display control device H114 is connected to the audio lamp control device H113 and the third pattern display device H81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device H113, the third pattern display device H81 performs a variable performance of the third pattern. It controls the display. Further, the display control device H114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device H81 to the sound lamp control device H113. The audio lamp control device H113 outputs audio from the audio output device H226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third pattern display device H81 with the audio output from the audio output device H226. be able to.
Various switches H208 connected to the input/output port H205 of the main controller H110 are configured to be connected to the input/output port H225 of the sound lamp controller H113, and the MPUH221 is output from the various switches H208. Various processing may be performed based on the signal. Further, various switches may be connected to the input/output port H225 of the sound lamp controller H113 separately from the various switches H208 connected to the input/output port H205 of the main controller H110. In this case, it is preferable that a group of sensors such as position detection sensors of accessory devices mainly arranged on the game board H13 are configured as various switches.

The power supply device H115 includes a power supply unit H251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine H10, a power failure monitoring circuit H252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch H122 (see FIG. 1637). and an erase switch circuit H253. The power supply unit H251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices H110 to H114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit H251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the switches H208, solenoids such as the solenoid H209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers H110 to H114 and the like as necessary voltages.
The power failure monitoring circuit H252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal HSG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPUH201 of the main controller H110 and the MPUH211 of the payout controller H111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit H252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit H251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal HSG1 is output to the main controller H110 and the payout controller H111. By the output of the power failure signal HSG1, the main controller H110 and the payout controller H111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit H251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of 24 volts for stable DC becomes less than 22 volts. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller H110 and the payout controller H111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).
The RAM erase switch circuit H253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal HSG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller H110 when the RAM erase switch H122 (see FIG. 1637) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine H10 is turned on, the main controller H110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal HSG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device H111. It is transmitted to the device H111.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1638 to 1698, the pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") K10 in the 105th embodiment will be described. FIG. 1638 is a front view of the pachinko machine K10 in the 105th embodiment, and FIG. 1639 is a front view of the game board K13 of the pachinko machine K10.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine K10 in the state shown in FIG. 1638, the front side of the paper surface is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine K10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 1639) respectively indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine K10.
In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. As for the symbols, like the pachinko machine H10 in the 104th embodiment is the pachinko machine K10 in this embodiment, similar symbols are set for those having common functions.
That is, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine K10 includes at least a front frame K14 (corresponding to the front frame H14 of the 104th embodiment), a base plate K60 (corresponding to the base plate H60 of the 104th embodiment), and an inner rail. K61 (corresponding to the inner rail H61 of the 104th embodiment), an outer rail K62 (corresponding to the outer rail H62 of the 104th embodiment), and a general winning opening K63 (corresponding to the general winning opening H63 of the 104th embodiment) , the first winning opening K64 (corresponding to the first winning opening H64 of the 104th embodiment), the second winning opening K640 (corresponding to the second winning opening H640 of the 104th embodiment), and the electric accessory K640a (104th Equivalent to the electric accessory H640a of the embodiment), the first variable winning device K65 (corresponding to the variable winning device H65 of the 104th embodiment), and the first specific winning port K65a (to the specific winning port H65a of the 104th embodiment) ), a through gate K67 (corresponding to the through gate H67 of the 104th embodiment), a return ball prevention member K68 (corresponding to the return ball prevention member H68 of the 104th embodiment), and a return rubber K69 (104th embodiment) and an out port K71 (corresponding to the out port H71 of the 104th embodiment).
Further, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine K10 includes at least an outer edge member K73 (corresponding to the outer edge member H73 of the 104th embodiment) and a variable display device unit K80 (corresponding to the variable display device unit H80 of the 104th embodiment). , a third pattern display device K81 (corresponding to the third pattern display device H81 of the 104th embodiment), and a center frame K86 (corresponding to the center frame H86 of the 104th embodiment).

As shown in FIG. 1639, the game board K13 has a base plate K60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding the balls, a windmill KWF, rails K61 and K62, general A winning opening K63, a first winning opening K64, a second winning opening K640, a first variable winning device K65, a second variable winning device K650, a through gate K67, a variable display device unit K80, etc. It is attached to the back side (or front side) of the inner frame H12 (see FIG. 1638).
The base plate K60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening K63, the first winning opening K64, the second winning opening K640, and the variable display device unit K80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate K60 by router processing. etc. is fixed. Note that the base plate K60 may be made of a light-transmissive resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate K60 from the front side.
The central front portion of the game board K13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame H12 through the glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1638) arranged on the front frame K14. Mainly referring to FIG. 1639, the configuration of the game board K13 will be described below.
In front of the game board K13, an outer rail K62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail K62 is placed inside the outer rail K62. An arc-shaped inner rail K61 formed by is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board K13 is surrounded by the inner rail K61 and the outer rail K62. A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board K13 and is defined by two rails K61 and K62 and a resin outer edge member K73 connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails K61 and K62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit H112a (see FIG. 1637) to the upper part of the game board K13. A return ball prevention member K68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail K61 (upper left part in FIG. 1639) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board K13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber K69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail K62 (upper right in FIG. 1639) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
A first pattern display device H37A, H37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 1639). Since the functions of the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B have been explained in the 104th embodiment, the explanation is omitted here.
Incidentally, in the pachinko machine K10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first prize winning port K64 and the second prize winning port K640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine K10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R time-shortening normal jackpot, a 4R time-shortening normal jackpot, and a 15R time-shortening normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices H37A and H37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit. .
In this pachinko machine K10, not only is the winning probability of the second symbol increased during the time saving, but also the time during which the electric accessory K640a attached to the second prize winning opening K640 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric role product K640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port K640 more than when the electric role product K640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the time saving, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole K640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory K640a is caused by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate that can be slid back and forth. When the electric accessory K640a is in the open state, the opening/closing plate protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate K60, so that the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and the rolling game ball rolls to the second position. A ball can be entered into the winning opening K640, and when the electric accessory K640a is in a closed state, the opening/closing plate is retracted behind the front surface of the base plate K60, and the game ball cannot be bridged to the second winning opening K640. This makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole K640.
As an example in which the state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory K640a is caused by the opening and closing operation of an opening/closing plate that can be slid back and forth, the second prize winning opening K640 is arranged below the electric accessory K640a. The opening/closing plate may be retracted backward when the accessory K640a is in the open state, and the opening/closing plate may protrude forward when the electric accessory K640a is in the closed state. That is, when the electric accessory K640a is in the open state, the opening/closing plate is retracted behind the front surface of the base plate K60, the game ball can enter the second winning hole K640, and the electric accessory K640a is in the closed state. At the time of , the opening/closing plate blocks the space between the game area and the second winning hole K640 so that the ball is difficult to enter the second winning hole K640 (flowed to the left). Also good.
Further, the state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory K640a may be caused by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate which has a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area side. good. In this case, when the electric accessory K640a is in the open state, the game ball picked up on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate is easily guided to the second winning hole K640, and when the electric accessory K640a is in the closed state, the opening/closing plate is open to the game. By closing the space between the area and the second winning hole K640, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole K640.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes K63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Also, a variable display device unit K80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate K60) that can be viewed through the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit K80, the winning of the first winning port K64 and the second winning port K640 (start winning) is used as a trigger, and the third symbol is displayed while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B. It is composed of a third pattern display device K81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate K67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame K86 is arranged on the base plate K60 so as to surround the third pattern display device K81 in a front view.

The third pattern display device K81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display with a size of about 9 inches to 19 inches. Three symbol rows, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device K81. It's like In the third symbol display device K81 of this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller H110 (see FIG. 1637) is performed by the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B. Decorative display is performed according to the display of the pattern display devices H37A and H37B. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to constitute the third symbol display device K81.
The second symbol display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate K67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine K10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate K67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.
In the pachinko machine K10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric role product K640a associated with the second winning hole K640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short period of time during the time saving, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal period. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessory K640a of the second winning hole K640. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second winning hole K640.

In addition, during the time saving, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory K640a for one hit, etc. In the case of the state, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The release time and the number of release times of the object K640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.
The through gate K67 is assembled to the game board K13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit K80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board K13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate K67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.
The number of times the ball passes through the through gate K67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices H37A and H37B, and at the second symbol reservation lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device K81.
In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device K81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device K81.

Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate K67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates K67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.
Also, the mounting position of the through gate K67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit K80. Further, when the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.
Below the variable display device unit K80, a first winning hole K64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole K64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board K13 is turned on, and the main controller H110 is caused by turning on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 1637), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37A.
On the other hand, on the lower left side of the through gate K67 when viewed from the front, a second prize winning opening K640 through which a ball can win is provided. When a ball enters the second winning hole K640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board K13 is turned on, and the main controller H110 is caused by turning on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 1637), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device H37B. The arrangement of the second prize winning opening K640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the first prize winning opening K64 in a front view, or may be on the left side of the left-right center of the game area (for example, on the lower left side of the first prize winning opening K64 in a front view).

In addition, the first winning hole K64 and the second winning hole K640 are also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning opening K64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning opening K640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port K64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port K640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port K64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when K640 wins may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole K640 may be set to 5. In this case, the size relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.
An electric accessory K640a is attached to the second prize winning opening K640. This electric accessory K640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory K640a is in a closed state (retracted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole K640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate K67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory K640a is in the open state (stretched). state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning hole K640.
As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory K640a is in the open state (overhanging state) increases. Furthermore, during the time saving, the time during which the electric accessory K640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole K640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.
Here, the probability of a big win is the same (approximately 1/319) between when the ball enters the first winning hole K64 and when the ball enters the second winning hole K640. However, the probability of winning the 15R time-saving normal jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port K640 than when the ball enters the first winning port K64. is also set high. On the other hand, the first winning hole K64 does not have the electric accessory K640a like the second winning hole K640, and the ball is always ready to win.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory K640a associated with the second winning opening K640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win the second winning opening K640. A ball is shot so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit K80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening K64, there are many chances for a big win lottery, and a big win. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.
On the other hand, during the time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate K67, the electric accessory K640a attached to the second winning opening K640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening K640. 2. Shoot the ball toward the winning opening K640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), pass through the through gate K67, and open the electric accessory K640a. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R time-saving normal jackpot by winning the second prize-winning hole K640.
It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine K10 in this embodiment, when the configuration of the game board K13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole K64 with a "right shot" or a second game with a "left shot". You can also aim at the winning entrance K640. In this case, the player can be relieved of the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine K10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that it is not possible to aim at the first prize-winning hole K64 by "right-handed", and a ball fired by "left-handed" is prevented from passing through the through gate K67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine K10 of the present embodiment instructs the player to shoot the ball "left-handed" according to the game state of the pachinko machine K10 (whether it is in the time saving mode or in the normal mode). You can request to change to "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding the playability of changing the way the ball is hit.

A second variable prize winning device K650 (see FIG. 1639) is arranged on the right side of the first prize winning port K64, and a second specific prize winning port K650a is provided downstream thereof. In the pachinko machine K10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first prize winning port K64 or the second prize winning port K640 results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device H37A or the first symbol display device H37B is turned on so that the first symbol display device H37A or the first symbol display device H37B is lit, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device K81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the second specific winning opening K650a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).
The second specific prize winning opening K650a is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and after the closure, the second specific prize winning opening K650a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the second specific prize winning opening K650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.
When the lottery jackpot is a normal jackpot with short working hours, a game ball can be won to the second prize winning port K640 by playing a right-handed game during the short working hours after the jackpot game is finished. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions to be given is 3 times, and when the game ball wins in the second winning hole K640, a small hit occurs with a probability of about 1/2, and the first symbol display devices H37A and H37B. , the LED corresponding to the small hit lights up. As a result of this small win, the first specific winning hole K65a arranged on the upstream side of the second specific winning hole K650a is opened for a predetermined time. A game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) triggered by winning into K65a and passing through a specific region K65c on the downstream side of the specific winning hole K65a.
As described above, in the pachinko machine K10, when a game ball enters the second winning hole K640 in a right-handed game, the game state can be changed to the special game state with a probability of about 1/2. is significantly higher than the jackpot probability (approximately 1/319) in the left-handed game, so the player's interest in the right-handed game state can be improved.

In addition, the number of the specific winning openings K65a and K650a is not limited, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also to the right of the first winning opening K64. For example, it may be the lower right side of the first winning opening K64, the lower left side of the first winning opening K64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit K80, or the upper side.
The game board K13 is provided with an out port K71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings K63, K64, K65a, K640, K650a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening K71.
The game board K13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.
The other device H228 (see FIG. 1637) in this embodiment includes the drive solenoid KSOL41, drive motors KMT41a, KMT41b, KMT51, KMT61, KMT71, KMT81, KMT82, and the like.

Also in this embodiment, the other device H228 (see FIG. 1637) includes not only the drive source of the accessory device described above, but also the drive motor (not shown) of the ball launching unit H112a and the second prize winning opening K640. It is also possible to adopt a configuration including a drive source for the electric accessory K640a (drive solenoid K247, drive solenoid K253, etc.).
The various switches H208 (see FIG. 1637) in this embodiment include detection sensors K413, K418, K556a, K556b, K556c, K565, K711e, K716, K858, and the like.
Next, the structure of the game board K13 and the operation unit K300 will be described. FIG. 1640 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board K13 and the action unit A200. Note that FIG. 1639 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 1640 .
The operation unit K300 is arranged on the back side of the game board K13, and various light-emitting means and various operation units are arranged therein, the details of which will be described later. With the support plate portion K313 of the operation unit K300 supported by the game board K13, the game board K13 and the operation unit K300 are integrated by screwing the fastening screw into the base plate K60 of the game board K13. It is fixed to improve the rigidity of the game board K13 and the operation unit K300 as a whole.

The base plate K60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate K60 can be easily viewed by the player from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate K60, the structure disposed on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects. If there is a part that the player does not want to see, it may be dealt with by attaching a seal member with low light transmittance (or non-light transmittance).
FIG. 1641 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board K13. FIG. 1641 shows a state in which the cosmetic cover K220 is disassembled from the winning unit K200. Further, as in FIG. 1639, illustration of nails for ball guide is omitted, and in addition, illustration of the windmill KWF (see FIG. 1639) is also omitted.
FIG. 1642 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit K200, and FIG. 1643 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit K200. As shown in FIGS. 1642 and 1643, the prize winning unit K200 includes a base member K201 fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate K60, and a base member K201 disposed on the front side of the base member K201 and a ball flow-down path along with the base member K201. a first electric accessory K240 having an electric accessory K640a that advances and retracts from the back side of the base member K201; and the back side of the base member K201 below the first electric accessory K240. and a second electric accessory K250 as a second variable prize winning device K650 having a movable plate K251 which is arranged in the back side of the base member K201 and moves forward and backward.
The base member K201 includes a plate-like main body K202 in which a light diffusion shape is formed inside the ridge-shaped ridge formed on the back side, a guide opening K203 formed in the plate-like main body K202, a plurality of deceleration projections K204 protruding toward the front side of the guide opening K203 so as to decelerate the balls flowing down the front side of the guide opening K203; A projection K206 projecting toward the front side along the lower edge of the guide opening K205, a plurality of deceleration recesses K207 recessed in the plate-like main body K202 above the guide opening K205, and more than the guide opening K203. A long protrusion K208 formed in the shape of a long protrusion in the left-right direction at a position on the lower side and above the guide opening K205, and an extension extending to the back side along the upper edge of the guide opening K205. Light is applied to a set portion K209, a plurality of ball guide portions K210 formed below the guide opening K205 so as to be able to guide the ball toward the back side, and a portion of the plate-like main body K202 where the light diffusion shape is formed. and an illumination board K211 which has a plurality of light emitting parts K212 such as LEDs that can be used, and which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the plate-like main body K202.

The decorative cover K220 includes a plate-like main body K221 that partitions the front and rear of the ball flow path together with the plate-like main body K202 of the base member K201, and an extension that extends from the plate-like body K221 to the rear side to form the ball flow-down path. Formation part K222, branch formation part K223 protruding from the plate-like main body K221 on the back side inside the area bordered by the extension formation part K222 and branching the flow path, and the area bordered by the extension formation part K222 An inclined surface K224 is formed on the inner side of the plate-like main body K221 and protrudes from the plate-like main body K221 to the rear surface side and has an inclined surface formed on the rear surface for guiding the ball toward the guide opening K203 of the base member K201, and a deceleration concave portion K207 of the base member K201. A plurality of deceleration projections K225 protruding from the plate-like main body K221 on the back side corresponding to the front position of , and an LED etc. that can irradiate light to a place below the area bordered by the extension forming part K222 and has a plurality of light-emitting portions K228, and is substantially flush with the extension tip of the extension forming portion K222, thereby providing a sufficient distance from the plate-like main body K221 and fastening and fixing to the decorative cover K220. a substrate K227.
The first electric accessory K240 is an electric accessory K640a that can guide a ball toward the second winning opening K640 in an overhanging state (open state) disposed forward through the second winning opening K640 and the guide opening K203. A support box member K246 that supports the electric accessory K640a from below and a drive solenoid K247 that drives the electric accessory K640a is disposed inside, and the electric accessory K640a is arranged so that the electric accessory K640a can be displaced in the front-rear direction. and an upper cover member K248 that guides the upper surface of and forms the ceiling of the path to the second prize winning opening K640.
The electric accessory K640a is formed of a colored (red in this embodiment) opaque resin material, has a first forming surface K241 that slopes down toward the left, and is connected to the downstream end of the first forming surface K241. A second forming surface K242 that is provided and inclined downward toward the rear, and a left front portion of the second forming surface K242 that is opposite to the first forming surface K241 in the left-right direction (left side) descends rightward and rearward with the left front portion as the apex. and an inclined third forming surface K243.
The second electric accessory K250 has a movable plate K251 that can move back and forth through the guide opening K205, and a drive solenoid K253 that drives the movable plate K251. A box member K252 is provided.

The movable plate K251 is made of a colored (red in this embodiment) opaque resin material, and when the drive solenoid K253 is in a non-excited state, the movable plate K251 protrudes forward (closed state). In the retracted state (open state) in which the ball is prevented from entering and retreats backward while the drive solenoid K253 is energized, the ball is allowed to enter the second specific winning hole K650a.
In the overhanging state of the movable plate K251, when the weight of the ball acts in the direction of tilting the movable plate K251, the protrusion K206 contacts the lower surface of the movable plate K251, thereby preventing the tilting.
Furthermore, since the extension K209 is provided above the rear end of the movable plate K251, the extension K209 contacts the upper surface of the movable plate K251, thereby preventing the movable plate K251 from tilting. In this manner, the tilting of the movable plate K251 can be prevented by abutting at a plurality of locations.
1644 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board K13 in the MDCCXXXI section of FIG. 1639, and FIG. 1645 is a cross-sectional view of the game board K13 along the MDCCXXXII-MDCCXXXII line in FIG. In FIG. 1644, the inner shape of the decorative cover K220 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As illustrated in FIG. 1644, the branch forming part K223 is arranged so as to be able to guide the ball reaching the upper surface toward the right end of the electric accessory K640a. In addition, the portion of the slope forming portion K224 that protrudes to the right slopes downward to the right in a front view in correspondence with the third forming surface K243 of the first electric accessory K240.
As a result, in the overhanging state of the electric accessory K640a of the first electric accessory K240, when the ball collides with the upper surface of the electric accessory K640a and the electric accessory K640a is displaced such that it bounces up and down. Since the collision between the 3rd forming surface K243 and the inclined forming part K224 can be a surface collision, the load received by the 3rd forming surface K243 can be dispersed compared to the case where the load at the time of collision occurs at a point. This makes it easier to avoid damage to the electric accessory K640a.
FIG. 1644 shows a large design K221a and a small design K221b applied to the front side of the plate-like main body K221 of the decorative cover K220. Here, in this embodiment, the same red color as that of the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 is selected as the border color of the large design K221a. The small design K221b is formed as a colored (white in this embodiment) and opaque decoration at the position where it overlaps with K227 in the front and back. Correspondingly, the large design K221a is shaded in red, and the small design K221b is shown without shading.
The small design K221b is designed as an arrow tip shape (bracket shape with a vertex on the lower left side) indicating the direction along the flow path of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the electric accessory K640a. It functions to suggest the downflow route of the ball to the player.

In this way, by matching the color of the large design K221a as a decoration of the decorative cover K220 with the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251, the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 can be used as part of the decoration for the player. It is possible to make it visible.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1644, the direction of inclination of the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 (the direction of inclination downward toward the left) is aligned with the inclination of the large design K221a. The combination of the electric accessories K640a, the movable plate K251, and the large design K221a can be visually recognized as "one decorative pattern". In this case, it is possible to change the visually recognized "single decorative pattern" by utilizing the difference in appearance due to the difference in arrangement of the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251.
As shown in FIG. 1644, the plate-like main body K221 is colorless and transparent in front of the ball guide path (path along the upper surface) by the electric accessory K640a or the movable plate K251, and visibility is good. Therefore, the visibility of the ball guided by the electric accessory K640a or the movable plate K251 can be improved.
Further, the upper and lower positions of the guide path (path along the upper surface) of the ball by the electric accessory K640a or the movable plate K251 are colored (red in this embodiment) and transparent as the large design K221a of the plate-like main body K221. Visibility is lower than that of colorless and transparent. As a result, the player's line of sight can be guided to the ball guide route (route along the upper surface) by the electric accessory K640a or the movable plate K251 with good visibility, so that the ball can be guided by the electric accessory K640a or the movable plate K251. When guided, the ball can be easily identified.

In FIG. 1645, the arrangement of the electric accessory K640a (retracted state) and the movable plate K251 (overhanging state) in the non-excited state of the first electric accessory K240 and the second electric accessory K250 is illustrated by a solid line. The arrangement of the electric accessory K640a (extended state) and the movable plate K251 (retracted state) in the excited state of the accessory K240 and the second electric accessory K250 is illustrated by imaginary lines.
The electric accessory K640a has an upper surface that functions as a spherical flowing surface in an excited state (extended state). That is, the ball guided to the second prize winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1642) through the guide opening K203 rolls on the upper surface of the overhanging electric accessory K640a shown in phantom lines in FIG.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1645, LEDs are arranged below the electric role object K640a and above the movable plate K251 and irradiate light that can be seen by the player who views the electric role object K640a with a direction view KDR21 looking down obliquely downward. It is possible to avoid the situation where the light from the illustrated light emitting part K212 is hidden by the ball rolling on the electric accessory K640a and does not reach the player's eyes.
That is, the light from the light emitting unit K212 illustrated in FIG. 1645 reaches the player's eyes through the lower side of the electric accessory K640a. A change in the visual recognition mode of the light from K212 is prevented.

Further, the light from the light emitting unit K212 acts to brightly illuminate the electric accessory K640a itself, so that the electric accessory K640a can be brightened. Before the light from the light emitting unit K212 reaches the electric role object K640a, it is not blocked by the ball rolling on the electric role object K640a, so whether or not there is a ball on the electric role object K640a Regardless, it is possible to prevent the brightness (appearance) of the electric accessory K640a from changing. Thus, the electric accessory K640a can be brightened regardless of whether or not there is a ball on the electric accessory K640a, and the visibility of the ball rolling on the electric accessory K640a can be improved. .
In this case, it is possible to increase the brightness of the electric accessory K640a in a portion having a smaller thickness such as the forming portion of the first forming surface K241. The forming portion of the first forming surface K241 can be made brighter than the forming portion of the third forming surface K243.
As a result, the player's line of sight can be guided to the upstream side rather than the downstream side of the flow path of the ball rolling on the electric accessory K640a, and attention can be paid to the branching of the ball at the branch forming portion K223.
As a result, the presence of a ball that flows leftward on the upper surface of the branch forming part K223 and can be guided to the upper surface of the electric accessory K640a, and the presence of the ball that flows to the right on the upper surface of the branch forming part K223 and is not guided by the electric accessory K640a. Since the number of balls guided to the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1642) is smaller than the number of balls to be shot, the number of balls to be guided to the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1642) is smaller than the number of balls to be shot. It is possible to easily prevent a situation in which a player stops playing a game by believing that there is a game machine failure such as a ball leaking or a ball not being properly shot.

As shown in FIG. 1645, the movable plate K251 of the second electric accessory K250 has left and right edges protruding downward in the shape of a ridge extending in the front-rear direction, and the tip of the protrusion extends from the base member K201. By being supported by the portion K206, the movable plate K251 is prevented from changing its posture in the forward tilting direction in the overhanging state.
Further, an extension part K209 is formed on the upper side of the movable plate K251, and when the movable plate K251 changes its posture in the forward tilting direction, the posture change is regulated. That is, in the present embodiment, the shape portion for suppressing the posture change of the movable plate K251 is formed on the base member K201, and is not formed on the decorative cover K220.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the region where the decorative cover K220 is formed with the uneven shape while suppressing the change in the posture of the movable plate K251. The visibility of the flow-down route can be improved when visually recognizing the flow-down route.
The extended portion K209 has a curved lower surface so as to totally reflect light from the front or obliquely forward and upward directions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear side of the movable plate K251 extending rearward from the plate-like main body K202 on which the base end of the extending portion K209 is arranged, and to prevent the player from visually recognizing the rear side of the movable plate K251. As for the plate K251, attention can be paid exclusively to the portion that protrudes forward from the plate-like main body K202.

In this embodiment, the shape of the extended portion K209 is designed such that the structure below the extended portion K209 is not visible, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a mirror tape or a light-shielding tape may be attached to the surface of the extended portion K209 to prevent the transmission of light.
Further, the deceleration recess K207 is formed so that the upper surface of the movable plate K251 in the overhanging state can be viewed through the upper edge K207a of the deceleration recess K207 when the vicinity of the movable plate K251 is viewed in the front-rear direction KDR22. be done. That is, the upper edge K207a functions like a mirror, and the color of the movable plate K251 (red in this embodiment) allows the upper edge K207a to be visually recognized.
On the other hand, when the movable plate K251 is in the retracted state, the tip of the movable plate K251 retracts behind the upper edge K207a, so the upper edge K207a functions like a mirror, and the upper surface of the protrusion K206 The upper edge K207a can be visually recognized with a nearby color (colorless and transparent in this embodiment, which is the same as the upper edge K207a).
That is, the visible state (color) of the upper edge K207a is determined whether the movable plate K251 is in an extended state (visible in red) or in a retracted state (visible in colorless and transparent). ) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of change in the visibility of the vicinity of the movable plate K251 when the state of the movable plate K251 changes.

The upper edge portion K207a is formed in a line shape substantially parallel to the upper surface of the movable plate K251 at the center and right deceleration recessed portions K207. The upper edge K207a extending parallel to the flowing direction of the plate K207a is visually recognized in the same red color as the movable plate K251. As a result, the player can grasp the flowing direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate K251 from the upper edge K207a located at a position different from that of the movable plate K251.
Further, the upper edge portion K207a of the left deceleration recessed portion K207 moves leftward toward the flow path (the flow path on the left side of the movable plate K251) in which the ball guided leftward on the upper surface of the movable plate K251 is guided. Since it is formed in a downwardly inclined line shape, the upper edge K207a extending along the flowing direction of the ball flowing down past the left end of the movable plate K251 is visually recognized in the same red color as the movable plate K251. As a result, the player can grasp the flowing direction of the ball after passing leftward over the upper surface of the movable plate K251 from the upper edge K207a located at a position different from that of the movable plate K251.
The upper edge K207a will be further described with reference to FIGS. 1644 and 1645. FIG. The deceleration recess K207 in which the upper edge K207a is formed is formed so that the vertical width is longer than the diameter of the ball so that the ball can enter.
Therefore, when the player is visually recognizing the vicinity of the movable plate K251 with the directional view KDR22, even if the ball rolls on the upper surface of the movable plate K251, the upper edge K207a is not hidden by the ball. do not have. Therefore, above and below the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate K251, two red line-shaped decorations are formed by the movable plate K251 and the upper edge portion K207a inclined to the lower left like the movable plate K251. It can be visually recognized by the player.

Here, when the upper edge K207a acts as a mirror with respect to the directional view KDR22 and the movable plate K251 is visually recognized, the path of light passes through the deceleration concave portion K207. Even so, if the ball does not enter the deceleration concave portion K207, there is no effect on the visibility of the upper edge portion K207a.
Further, even when the ball enters the deceleration recess K207, the deceleration recess K207 is not filled with the ball because the deceleration recess K207 is not filled with the ball because the deceleration recess K207 has a flat surface on the side of the recess. Therefore, light traveling without being blocked by the ball is reflected by the upper edge K207a and reaches the eyes of the player.
Therefore, even if the ball flows down on the movable plate K251, it is possible to reduce the change in the visibility of the upper edge K207a. In other words, the state in which the upper edge K207a is visually recognized in red can be produced in common regardless of whether there is a ball on the movable plate K251 or not.
As shown in FIG. 1644, in this embodiment, the upper edge K207a and the movable plate K251 are arranged along the inside of the edging of the large design K221a of the decorative cover K220. The border color of the shape design K221a and the color of the movable plate K251 are made common.

Therefore, when the movable plate K251 is in the extended state, the upper edge K207a acts to partially thicken the edging of the large design K221a, and when the movable plate K251 is in the retracted state, the upper edge Since K207a is visually recognized transparently, the edging of the large design K221a is visually recognized as uniform.
The case where the shape visually recognized as the border of the large design K221a is partially thick corresponds to the overhanging state of the movable plate K251, and the case where the thickness of the shape visually recognized as the border of the large design K221a is uniform is movable. Since it corresponds to the retracted state of the plate K251, the player can grasp the state of the movable plate K251 by visually recognizing the thickness of the edging of the large design K221a.
A deceleration projection K225 of the decorative cover K220 is positioned in front of the downflow path of the ball rolling on the movable plate K251. Unlike the deceleration recess K207, the deceleration projection K225 has a vertical width smaller than the diameter of the sphere (smaller than the radius of the sphere). As a result, when the ball rolls on the movable plate K251, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball is hidden (hardly seen) by the deceleration protrusion K225 and the player cannot grasp the position of the ball.
Figures 1646, 1647, 1648 and 1649 are perspective views of the winning unit K200 in a direction view KDR21 looking down obliquely. In FIGS. 1646, 1647, 1648 and 1649, in order to explain the difference in the visual appearance of the large design K221a and the small design K221b of the decorative cover K220 due to the difference in arrangement of the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251, As for the decorative cover K220, the outer shape of the plate-like main body K221 is illustrated in imaginary lines, and the positions of the large design 221a and the small design K221b are illustrated. The arrangement of the portion K224 and the deceleration projection K225 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

Also, in FIGS. 1646, 1647, 1648 and 1649, the edging of the red large design K221a, the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 are shaded in common. It should be noted that the details of the flow-down path of the ball guided to the winning unit K200 are not shown, so FIG. 1644 will be referred to for the details of the flow-down path.
In FIG. 1646, in the first electric accessory K240, the electric accessory K640a is in a retracted state (de-energized state), and in the second electric accessory K250, the movable plate K251 is in an overhanging state (de-energized state). This state mainly corresponds to the normal state.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1646, the balls flowing down the winning unit K200 are neither guided to the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1642) nor guided to the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1642). (see FIG. 1644).
In this state, the large design K221a is visually recognized as if the movable plate K251 is entering the upper and lower central part of the inside of the edging, giving the player the impression that the shape of the large design K221a itself has been cut. can be attached.

Therefore, the case in which the shape of the large design K221a itself is viewed as if it were cut corresponds to the state in which the ball is not guided to the second winning opening K640 and the second specific winning opening K650a. can predict how the ball that hits the winning unit K200 will flow down from the visual recognition mode of the large design K221a. Therefore, compared to the case where it is necessary to visually recognize the ball itself in order to grasp (predict) the flow down of the winning ball K200, the degree of fatigue of the player can be reduced.
In FIG. 1647, in the first electric accessory K240, the electric accessory K640a is in an overhanging state (excited state), and in the second electric accessory K250, the movable plate K251 is in an overhanging state (non-excited state). This state corresponds to a state that occurs frequently mainly in the time saving state and the variable probability state.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1647, balls flowing down the winning unit K200 can be guided to the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1642), but are not guided to the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1642). 1644) state.
In this state, the small design K221b is visually recognized as a one-point decoration with the red background color of the electric accessory K640a that is visually recognized as if it is inside the border of the large design K221a. In this case, the white small design K221b can be made more conspicuous than when the background is colorless as shown in FIG.

Therefore, the case where the small design K221b is visually recognized as a one-point decoration with the red background color of the electric accessory K640a corresponds to the state where the ball can be guided to the second winning hole K640. can predict whether or not the ball entering the winning unit K200 can enter the second winning hole K640 from the visual recognition aspect of the small design K221b. Therefore, compared to the case where it is necessary to visually recognize the ball itself in order to grasp (predict) the flow down of the winning ball K200, the degree of fatigue of the player can be reduced.
Here, if the small design K221b applied to the decorative cover K220 is an easy-to-distinguish decoration, the decoration may hinder the flow of the ball itself and may make it difficult to see the flow of the ball itself. Therefore, if the decoration is light, it may be difficult to see as decoration and the production effect may be small. There is also a way to use a light guide panel that makes the shape emerge by light irradiation, but there are problems such as being expensive and the layout being limited due to design conditions such as requiring a certain thickness. do not have.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, instead of completing the decoration on the front surface of the decorative cover K220, the appearance of the small design K221b is influenced by the electric accessory K640a. It is compatible with the brightness and the visibility of the ball.
That is, by making the small design K221b itself an inconspicuous decoration, when the electric accessory K640a is in the retracted state, the small design K221b is made inconspicuous, so that the ball itself flowing down the back side of the decorative cover K220. On the other hand, when the electric accessory K640a is in the overhanging state, the small design K221b itself is made conspicuous, and the production effect as a decoration expected for the ball entering the second winning hole K640 is produced. can be improved.

When the small design K221b is conspicuous against the background of the electric accessory K640a, there is concern that the appearance of the small design K221b may change if a ball enters between the small design K221b and the electric accessory K640a.
The front-rear width of the flow path formed by the plate-like main body K202 of the base member K201 and the plate-like main body K221 of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is sufficiently longer than the diameter of the sphere (approximately 19 mm); Considering that the pachinko machine K10 is generally tilted rearward by several degrees (approximately 1 degree), the ball rolling on the upper surface of the electric accessory K640a is arranged on the rear side of the base member K201. Since there is a high possibility that the ball will flow down while contacting the plate-shaped main body K202, the ball, which is a premise for entering between the small design K221b and the electric accessory K640a, moves toward the decorative cover K220 (flows down toward the front side). You can reduce the chances of things happening.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter between the small design K221b and the electric accessory K640a, so that the appearance of the small design K221b changes when the ball is rolling on the electric accessory K640a. can be easily prevented.
In FIG. 1648, the electric accessory K640a is in the retracted state (non-excited state) in the first electric accessory K240, and the movable plate K251 is in the retracted state (excited state) in the second electric accessory K250. This state mainly corresponds to the state during the round game in the special game state.

In the state illustrated in FIG. 1648, the balls flowing down the winning unit K200 are not guided to the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1642), but are guided to the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1644). It is in a state to obtain.
The tip of the retracted movable plate K251 is fully retracted to the rear side of the guide opening K205 (see FIG. 1645), and is invisible in the direction DR21. In addition, due to the effect of total reflection of the extended portion K209 (see FIG. 1645) covering the upper side of the movable plate K251 in the retracted state, the movable plate K251 cannot be visually recognized through the extended portion K209. In the state illustrated in FIG. 1648, the movable plate K251 can be completely hidden.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1648, the electric accessory K640a does not constitute the background color of the small design K221b, and the movable plate K251 is not visible inside the border of the large design K221a. In contrast, the shape of the large design K221a itself can be visually recognized impressively.
Therefore, the state in which the shape of the large design K221a itself is not cut off corresponds to the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning hole K650a, so the player can visually recognize the large design K221a. From the aspect, it is possible to predict how the ball that enters the winning unit K200 will flow down. Therefore, compared to the case where it is necessary to visually recognize the ball itself in order to grasp (predict) the downfall of the ball that has landed in the winning unit K200, the player's degree of fatigue can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the switching of the state depending on whether or not the movable plate K251 is visually recognized inside the edging of the large design K221a in the direction view DR21, while in the direction view DR22, As described above with reference to FIG. 1644, it is possible to grasp the change of state depending on whether or not the thickness of the edging of the large design K221a is partially changed by visually recognizing the upper edge K207a in red.
As described above, in the present embodiment, although the movable plate K251 is commonly used as the subject that changes the appearance, a plurality of objects whose appearance changes are provided. Even if it changes to inside, it is possible to achieve the purpose of predicting how the ball that enters the winning unit K200 will flow down from the visual recognition mode of the large design K221a.
In FIG. 1649, the electric accessory K640a in the first electric accessory K240 is in an overhanging state (excited state), and the movable plate K251 in the second electric accessory K250 is in a retracted state (excited state). This state corresponds to a state in which the electric accessory K640a is driven by winning the second symbol lottery mainly during the round game in the special game state.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1649, the balls flowing down the winning unit K200 can be guided to the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1642) or guided to the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1644). It is in a state to obtain.

In this state, the small design K221b is visually recognized as a one-point decoration with the red background color of the electric accessory K640a that is visually recognized as if it is inside the border of the large design K221a. In this case, the white small design K221b can be made more conspicuous than when the background is colorless as shown in FIG.
Therefore, the case where the small design K221b is visually recognized as a one-point decoration with the red background color of the electric accessory K640a corresponds to the state where the ball can be guided to the second winning hole K640. can predict whether or not the ball entering the winning unit K200 can enter the second winning hole K640 from the visual recognition aspect of the small design K221b. Therefore, compared to the case where it is necessary to visually recognize the ball itself in order to grasp (predict) the downfall of the ball that has landed in the winning unit K200, the player's degree of fatigue can be reduced.
On the other hand, in the special game state, the excitation time of the electric accessory K640a is extremely shortened, so that it is difficult for the ball to actually enter the second winning hole K640. Therefore, by using the electric accessory K640a, it is possible to execute an effect that only changes the appearance of the small design K221b (it is difficult to generate a winning ball by entering the second winning hole K640).
1650 is a rear perspective view of the game board K13, and FIG. 1651 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board K13. As shown in FIG. 1650, the base plate K60 has an opening K60w formed therein so that the center frame K86 can be fitted therein. In addition, the base plate K60 has sufficient thickness in terms of strength in the formation range of the game area whose outer edge is defined by the inner rail K61 and the outer rail K62 (see FIG. 1639). On the outside of the body, there are formed recesses K60a to K60d whose thickness is reduced so as to be recessed from the back side.

The opening K60w is formed so as to have the same shape even if the position of the base plate K60 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) is different for the purpose of supporting the center frame K86 across the front-rear width. Thereby, the center frame K86 can be stably supported.
The first concave formation portion K60a on the upper left side is arranged behind a shielding member K74 made of resin that is arranged on the upper left side of the outer rail K62 (see FIG. 1639). Blindfolded.
The second concave formation portion K60b on the upper right side is arranged behind the outer edge member K73 (see FIG. 1639) and in a range above the outer edge member K73.
The third forming recess K60c on the lower left side is arranged on the lower left side of the outer rail K62 (see FIG. 1639) and is arranged behind a resin shielding member K75 in which the first pattern display devices H37A and H37B are built, The shielding member K75 blinds the third forming recess K60c.

As shown in FIG. 1651, the game board K13 includes a left and right long gutter front member K91 fastened and fixed to the back side of the lower side of the base plate K60, and a gutter front member K91 on the back side. A rear gutter member K92 that is fastened and fixed together with the front gutter member K91 to form a gutter that allows the ball to flow down, and an LED that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the gutter rear member K92 and irradiates light to the front side. An electrical board K93 to be arranged, a prevention member K94 fastened and fixed to a gutter rear member K92 for sandwiching the electrical board K93 so as to prevent removal of the electrical board K93, and prevention thereof. An auxiliary member K95 that forms a trough for letting the ball flow down together with the member K94, and a rear trough member K92 that has the function of closing unnecessary openings caused by the manufacturing conditions and serves as a support for bundling the electrical wiring with a binding band. and a functional closure member K96.
The light from the illumination board K93 is irradiated toward the general prize winning opening K63 arranged on the lower left side of the game area. That is, by turning on the LEDs arranged on the illumination board K93, the general prize winning opening K63 can be visually recognized brightly. It can be changed by lighting or extinguishing the LED.
The lower right fourth forming recess K60d is arranged below the lower edge of the outer rail K62 so as to include a region behind the lower end side forming portion K73a (see FIG. 1641) of the outer edge member K73. At least a portion of the fourth concave formation portion K60d is hidden by the lower end formation portion K73a.
The left side portions of the gutter front member K91 and the gutter rear member K92 are arranged behind the fourth formation recess K60d so that the ball can flow down in the area behind the fourth formation recess K60d.

FIG. 1652 is an exploded front perspective view of operation unit K300. Note that FIG. 1640 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIG. 1652 . The operation unit K300 includes an upper decorative member K330 that is elongated in the left and right direction and arranged above the display area of the third pattern display device K81 when viewed from the front, and an upper decorative member K330 that is elongated vertically and is the third pattern in the front view. A left side decorative member K350 arranged on the left side of the display area of the display device K81, a front layer side movable device K400 to which the upper side decorative member K330 and the left side decorative member K350 are fastened and fixed on the front side, and the front layer side movable device. It comprises a rear layer side movable device K800 disposed on the rear side of K400, and a rear case K310 in which the front layer side movable device K400 and the rear layer side movable device K800 are accommodated and fastened and fixed.
The rear case K310 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open from a bottom wall portion K311 and an outer wall portion K312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion K311. A rectangular opening K311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion K311 of the rear case K310, so that the rear case K310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening K311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (that is, capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device K81 when viewed from the front).
The back case K310 extends from the front end of the outer wall K312 as a plane plate along the back of the game board K13 (for example, arranged in parallel), and faces the game board K13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 1639). It has a support plate portion K313 supported by.
The game board K13 and the operation unit K300 are integrally fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the base plate K60 of the game board K13 while the supporting plate part K313 is supported by the game board K13. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the game board K13 and the operation unit K300 as a whole.

The front-layer-side movable device K400 is configured to be elongated in the left and right direction, and configured to move up and down at the first movable device K401, which can move up and down from the upper end position as the initial position, and at the center position of the left and right under the first movable device K401. a second mobile device K701 that is
The upper decorative member K330 has a light-emitting substrate disposed therein, and performs light-emitting effects by irradiating light emitted from the light-emitting substrate to the front side of the light-transmitting decorative portion. It is formed in a size that allows the device K401 to be hidden.
The left decorative member K350 has a light-emitting substrate disposed therein, and performs light-emitting effects by irradiating light emitted from the light-emitting substrate forward to the light-transmitting decorative portion. It is formed in a size that allows the driving force transmission mechanism on the left side to be hidden.
Since the rear layer side movable device K800 is disposed on the back side (rear side) of the rear layer side case K310 from the front layer side movable device K400 because the front layer side movable device K400 is arranged on the front side, It is arranged at a position closer to the variable display device unit K80 than the front layer side movable device K400.

The rear-layer-side movable device K800 operates to expose or hide the display area of the third pattern display device K81 by sliding plate-like members arranged in layers in the front and rear directions in the left-right direction. A third mobile device K801 is provided.
The rear side movable device K800 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion K311 of the rear side case K310, and the front layer side movable device K400 is fastened to the bottom of the rear side case K310 via a fastening portion that passes outside the rear layer side movable device K800. It is fastened and fixed to the wall portion K311 and is fastened and fixed to the non-movable portion of the rear layer side movable device K800. First, an overview of the operation control of the operation unit K300 will be described with an example.
1653 to 1659 are front views of the motion unit K300 showing an example of motion control of the motion unit K300. FIG. 1653 illustrates the case where the first mobile device K401, the second mobile device K701, and the third mobile device K801 are in the presentation standby state. That is, in FIG. 1653, the first movable device K401 is hidden by the upper decorative member K330, and the third movable device K801 is hidden by the front layer side movable device K400. The device K801 cannot be viewed from the front.
In FIG. 1654, the second movable device K701 is placed in a lowered arrangement state that is lower than the effect standby state, so that the first movable device K401 falls so as to enter an empty space, and the first movable device K401 is in the falling position state, and the third movable device K801 is in the effect waiting state.

If the position of the first movable device K401 and the position of the second movable device K701 are not shifted back and forth (they overlap when viewed from above), and the second movable device K701 remains in the waiting state for rendering, the first movable device K701 after falling Since it collides with the movable device K401, drive control is performed so that the first movable device K401 falls after the second movable device K701 is placed in a lowered state in advance.
The first movable device K401 is configured such that at least the member on the rearmost side (the main body K541 of the elongated device K540) is non-transmissive, so the portion that overlaps with the first movable device K401 is displayed in the third pattern. The display by device K81 is hidden. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 1654, the player cannot completely see the display in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 from the front view.
FIG. 1655 illustrates a case where the first mobile device K401 and the second mobile device K701 are in the standby state for presentation, and the third mobile device K801 is in the closed state blocking the front side of the third symbol display device K81. .
Plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 of the third movable device K801, which are rectangular in front view, are formed to be light transmissive, and the degree of light transmission is partially different. As a result, as shown in FIG. 1655, when the entire display area of the third symbol display device K81 is blocked by the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831, the display of the third symbol display device K81 is easily visible. , the display of the third pattern display device K81 is hidden by the plate-like portions K811, K821, K831, and the decorations on the surface of the plate-like portions K811, K821, K831 are easily visible.

In FIG. 1656, after the moving device K560 is slid to the left while the first movable device K401 maintains the vertical position in the falling position state, the second movable device K701 that has been in the lowered arrangement state is in the effect standby state. , and the third movable device K801 is closed.
The moving device K560 is slid left and right to move to a position where it does not interfere with the second movable device K701 (see FIG. 1656), and then the second movable device K701 is moved, whereby the moving device K560 and the second movable device K701 are moved. , and the second movable device K701 is brought closer to the central side of the operation unit K300 in a front view, thereby making it easier for the player to visually recognize the first movable device K401 and the second movable device K701.
As illustrated in FIG. 1656, the displacement trajectory of the first movable device K401 and the displacement trajectory of the third movable device K801 partially overlap in front view, but the displacement trajectory of the first movable device K401 and the displacement trajectory of the third movable device K401 overlap. Since the displacement trajectory of the device K801 is out of alignment (does not overlap when viewed from above), the first movable device K401 and the third movable device K801 do not collide (interfere) with each other during operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1656, in the state where the first movable device K401 is changed from the effect waiting state to the drop position state, the third movable device K801 can be changed from the effect waiting state to the closed state.
In this way, the first mobile device K401, the second mobile device K701, and the third mobile device K801 can each be controlled to be driven from the standby state for presentation, and each mobile device can be operated while realizing a sense of unity. Collisions of K401, K701, and K801 can be avoided.

In the state shown in FIG. 1656, the decoration drawn on the left side of the third movable device K801, the decoration drawn on the moving device K560 of the first movable device K401, the decoration drawn on the second movable device K701, and the decorative cover K220 of the winning unit K200. (The illustration of the decoration drawn on the third movable device K801 is omitted in this figure. Details will be described later).
FIG. 1657 illustrates a case where the first mobile device K401 and the third mobile device K801 are placed in an effect standby state, and the second mobile device K701 is placed in an elevated arrangement state. Most of the second movable device K701 overlaps the lower part of the center frame K86 in the production standby state and visibility is poor (see Fig. 1639), but in the raised arrangement state, more than half of the second movable device K701 overlaps the lower part of the center frame K86. is arranged on the upper side, the visibility of the second movable device K701 is improved.
FIG. 1658 illustrates a case where the second mobile device K701 and the third mobile device K801 are in the waiting state for rendering, and only the right side of the first mobile device K401 is in a one-sided drop state in which it falls halfway. 1658, the moving device K560 of the first moving device K401 is displaced to the right end of the range of motion.
In the first movable device K401, when the change between the effect waiting state and the one-side falling state occurs, the position of the moving device K560 is maintained at the center side in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to avoid losing the left-right balance of the first movable device K401 during vertical displacement.

In the one-side falling state illustrated in FIG. 1659, the posture of the moving device K560 is tilted in a downward right direction, so the design of the front side of the moving device K560 is tilted and the appearance is poor. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the design on the front side of the moving device K560 is controlled to continue to rotate until the effect standby state changes to the one-sided falling state and further changes to the effect standby state. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the design on the front side of the moving device K560 is tilted and the appearance deteriorates.
In the present embodiment, the design on the front side of the moving device K560 rotates clockwise when the moving device K560 moves to the right in the front view (forward rotation direction to the right) when viewed from the front. When moving to the left, it is assumed to be counterclockwise when viewed from the front (leftward forward rolling direction). As a result, the player can grasp the movement of the moving device K560 in the left-right direction and the rotating motion in relation to each other, and a unified motion presentation can be achieved.
As shown in FIGS. 1653 to 1659, the visible range of the display of the third symbol display device K81 arranged behind it changes corresponding to the state of each movable device K401, K701, K801. That is, when all of the movable devices K401, K701, and K801 are in the effect standby state, the range (area and position) in which the display of the third symbol display device K81 is easily visible is the maximum (see FIG. 1653), and the effect The hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is configured to be different corresponding to the movable devices K401, K701, and K801 whose states are changed from the standby state.
The hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 also varies depending on the degree of change in the state of each movable device K401, K701, K801 from the effect standby state. Further, for example, even if the same movable device (for example, the first movable device K401) operates, the state shown in FIG. 1654 and the state shown in FIG. Since the area and position of the first movable device K401 that overlaps the display area of 1 are different, the hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is different.

That is, in the third pattern display device K81, the display effect in the range not hidden by each of the movable devices K401, K701, K801 (including the range in which the display can be visually recognized by seeing through the movable devices K401, K701, K801) is visually recognized. However, the range hidden by each of the movable devices K401, K701, and K801 (excluding the range where the display can be visually recognized by looking through the movable devices K401, K701, and K801) changes in multiple types. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect in the range not hidden by each of the movable devices K401, K701, K801, and to improve the effect of the display effect.
Next, the first movable device K401 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1660 to 1681. FIG. FIG. 1660 is a front exploded perspective view of the front layer side movable device K400, and FIG. 1661 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front layer side movable device K400.
The first movable device K401, which constitutes the portion of the front-layer-side movable device K400 excluding the second movable device K701, is composed of a left-right pair of substantially symmetrical members, and is a pair of supports fastened and fixed to the rear case K310. A member K410, a pair of rotating members K430 rotatably supported on the lower side of the supporting member K410, a pair of driving motors KMT41a and KMT41b for generating driving force to rotate the rotating members K430, and the rotating member K430. and a lifting device K500 configured to be able to move up and down corresponding to the state of rotation of the.
Further, the first movable device K401 has a pair of left and right front cover members K440 that are fastened and fixed to the support member K410 so as to cover the front opening of the support member K410, and the right front cover member K440 that is fastened from the front side. A switching device K460 that switches the operation mode of the fixed lifting device K500, and changes between an allowable state that allows the lifting device K500 to descend and a prevention state that prevents the lifting device K500 from descending in accordance with the state of rotation of the rotary member K430. a pair of left and right state change devices K470.

Further, the first movable device K401 includes a decorative member K402 which is fastened and fixed from the front side to the lower part of the left front cover member K440 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin, and an LED or the like for irradiating the decorative member K402 with light. A decorative board K403 on which the light-emitting means is arranged, a decorative member K404 which is fastened and fixed from the front side to the lower part of the right front cover member K440 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin, and a light to the decorative member K404. Illumination board K405 on which a light-emitting means such as an LED for irradiating is arranged, support member K410 and front cover member K440 in the assembled state of front layer side movable device K400 (see FIG. 1652), and second movable device K701 and an upper cover member K406 that closes the gap from above.
Details of the front cover member K440 will be described. The front cover member K440 includes a plate-like main body K441 formed in a substantially L shape, and a guide elongated hole K442 formed in the plate-like main body K441 as an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction to guide the elevation of the lifting device K500. An absorbing member K443, which is a resin member disposed near the lower end of the guide long hole K442 and capable of absorbing the impact when the lifting device K500 descends, and a connecting member K445 arranged in front of the elongated guide hole K442 and connected to the fastening portion K533 of the lifting device K500 passing through the elongated guide hole K444 on the front side.
FIG. 1662 is an exploded front perspective view of the first mobile device K401, and FIG. 1663 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first mobile device K401. In FIGS. 1662 and 1663, the supporting member K410, rotating member K430, and state changing device K470 of the first movable device K401 are illustrated, and illustration of the front cover member K440 and switching device K460 is omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 1662 and 1663, the support member K410 includes a main body K411 formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and a rotating member protruding cylindrically from the front side of the lower side of the main body K411. A support portion K412 for rotatably supporting the K430, a detection sensor K413 disposed outside the support portion K412 in the left-right direction to detect the attitude of the rotating member K430, A supporting portion K414 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and supports the lower rotating member K471 of the state changing device K470 so as to be rotatable, and a guide elongated hole K415 that is formed as an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction so as to be able to guide the lifting device K500. , a rack K416 in which gear teeth are formed along the guide long hole K415, and a guide projecting portion arranged vertically on the back side of the main body K411 and guiding the up-and-down movement of the interlocking member K473 of the state change device K470. K417, a detection sensor K418 disposed on the front side of the upper end of the main body K411 and capable of detecting whether or not the lifting device K500 is placed in the waiting state for the effect, and the upper end suspended from the main body K411. and a coil spring K419 whose lower end is hooked on the hook-like portion K515 of the lifting device K500.

Further, the support member K410 includes a vertically extending metal rod K421 that guides the lifting operation of the lifting device K500, a support receiving portion K422 into which the lower end of the metal rod K421 is inserted, and the lifting device K500 attached to the metal rod K421. A fixed member K423, which is fastened and fixed to the lifting device K500 at a position where the metal rod K421 is sandwiched between the lifting device K500 and the upper end of the metal rod K421, extends upward and forward from the main body K411 of the supporting member K410. and an auxiliary member K424 as a retainer for preventing it from coming off in the direction.
In this embodiment, the plate-shaped main body K441 of the front cover member K440 is configured to perform the same function as the auxiliary member K424 with respect to the left metal rod K421. are arranged.
The rotary member K430 is arranged along the entire circumference of the rear side in order to transmit the rotation of the drive gear KG42 fixed to the drive shafts of the drive motors KMT41a and KMT41b via the intermediate gear KG43 supported by the main body K411 of the support member K410. A disk-shaped body portion K431 having gear teeth K432 formed therethrough, a rotation center hole K433 formed in a circular shape at the center of the body portion K431 and through which the support portion K412 of the support member K410 is inserted, and a body portion. A transmission cylindrical portion K434 that is rotatably connected to the outer peripheral side edge of K431 with a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating member K430 and supports the lifting device K500, and a support member at the concentric circular protrusion of the rotation center hole K433. A notch K435 formed with a width that can be detected by the detection sensor K413 of the K410, and a guide groove K436 formed by a set of protrusions protruding on the back side near the outer peripheral side of the main body K431. Prepare.
The state changing device K470 includes a lower rotating member K471 that is rotatably supported by the supporting portion K414 of the supporting member K410, and protrudes from the left and right inner ends of the lower rotating member K471 toward the rotating member K430. A switching protrusion K472 received in a guide groove K436, an interlocking member K473 connected to each other so as to be relatively operable via shafts provided at the left and right outer ends of the lower rotating member K471, and upper and lower sides of the interlocking member K473. A plurality of guide lengths for vertically moving the interlocking member K473 by inserting the guide projecting portion K417 of the support member K410 into the plate-like portion constituting the end portion. A hole K474, a switching protrusion K475 protruding toward the front side near the upper end of the interlocking member K473, and a main body K411 of the support member K410 are rotatably supported to rotate corresponding to the arrangement of the switching protrusion K475. and an upper rotary member K476 whose orientation and attitude change.

The lifting device K500 is lifted when the transmission tube K434 of the rotation member K430 changes its vertical position while being supported by the transmission tube K434 of the rotation member K430. Configured.
FIG. 1664 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting device K500, and FIG. 1665 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting device K500. The lifting device K500 includes a pair of left and right lower members K510 that can be directly pushed up by the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430, and left and right lower members K510 that are rotatably supported on the back sides of the upper ends of the lower members K510. It has a pair of transmission gears K520 and a rack K532 that meshes with the transmission gear K520 so that the amount of vertical movement of the lower member K510 is increased or decreased by the transmission gear K520 and is transmitted. A pair of left and right upper members K530 that move up and down by means of a pair of upper members K530, a long device K540 whose left and right ends are supported by the upper member K530, and a moving device configured to be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the long device K540. K560;
The lower member K510 includes a main body K511 formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and a flat plane formed at the lower end of the main body K511 perpendicular to the moving direction (vertical direction) of the lower member K510. K512, a support fastening portion K513 having a female thread formed therein protruding cylindrically from the back side of the main body portion K511 and capable of supporting the transmission gear K520, and a metal rod K421 (see FIG. 1662). and a hooked portion K515 which is formed in a hook shape on the front side of the upper end portion of the main body portion K511 and on which the lower end portion of the coil spring K419 (see FIG. 1662) is hooked.
The screw fastened to the support fastening portion K513 functions as a retainer for the transmission gear K520, and its head is arranged inside the long guide hole K415 of the support member K410. As a result, the overhang of the head of the screw fastened to the support fastening portion K513 can be absorbed, and the rear side surface of the transmission gear K520 can be supported by the front side surface of the main body portion K411 of the support member K410. Furthermore, since the direction of movement of the screw fastened to the support fastening portion K513 is restricted by the long guide hole K415, the lower member K510 can be stably moved in the vertical direction.

Via the hooked portion K515, the lower member K510 is urged upward by a coil spring K419 (see FIG. 1662). As a result, the upward movement of the lifting device K500 can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring K419.
The transmission gear K520 has a first gear K522 formed on the back side of an intermediate disc K521, and a second gear K523 coaxial with the first gear K522 formed on the front side of the intermediate disc K521. The intermediate disk K521 is formed as a circular plate portion having a diameter larger than that of the first gear K522 and larger than that of the second gear K523. This prevents the mating member meshing with the second gear K523 from being displaced in the longitudinal direction and meshing with the opposite second gear K523 or the first gear K522.
The first gear K522 meshes with the rack K416 (see FIG. 1662) of the support member K410, and the second gear K523 meshes with the rack K532 of the upper member K530. The number of teeth of the first gear K522 is eight, and the number of teeth of the second gear K523 is twelve.
Therefore, when the lower member K510 moves up and down, the upper member K530 moves relative to the lower member K510 by a movement amount that is 1.5 times the amount of up-and-down movement of the lower member K510. , the details of the vertical movement will be described later.

The upper member K530 includes a main body K531 that is elongated in the vertical direction, a rack K532 that extends vertically outward from the rear side of the main body K531, and a pair of upper and lower members on the front side of the main body K531. A fastening portion K533, which is a protruding cylindrical portion and has a female screw formed therein, and a cylindrical protruding portion K533 protruding from the back side of the main body portion K531, which rotatably supports the elongated device K540. A shaft portion K534, an auxiliary protrusion K535 cylindrically projecting in a direction parallel to the rotation shaft portion K534, a guided portion K536 guided by a metal rod K421 (see FIG. 1662), and an upper rotating member K476. (see FIG. 1662), and a curved receiving portion K537 formed as a curved surface that is supported downward.
A connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1660) is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion K533. That is, the connecting member K445 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the fastening portion K533 that penetrates the guide elongated hole K442 (see FIG. 1660) of the front cover member K440 to the front side. As a result, the movement of the fastening portion K533 is restricted to the guide elongated hole K442, so that the vertical movement of the upper member K530 can be stabilized.
The upper member K530 is guided by the guided portion K536, and the lower member K510 is guided by the metal rod K421 (see FIG. 1662) by the guided portion K514. can be prevented.
FIG. 1666 is an exploded front perspective view of elongate device K540, and FIG. 1667 is an exploded rear perspective view of elongate device K540. In FIGS. 1666 and 1667, upper member K530 and moving device K560 are illustrated to facilitate understanding of the positional relationship.

The elongated device K540 includes a main body K541 formed in the shape of an elongated left and right plate, a support shaft K542 cylindrically protruding from the left and right center of the main body K541 toward the rear side, and the support shaft K542. A central gear K543 rotatably supported by K542, a plurality of guide protrusions K544 cylindrically protruding in a direction parallel to the support shaft K542, and a main body K541 guided by the guide protrusions K544. and a pair of slide racks K545 configured to be slidable in the longitudinal direction.
A left-right long concave portion K541a is formed in the front side portion of the main body portion K541, and the end position is formed inside the left-right outer end portions. The recessed portion K541a functions as a portion that receives the lower end portion of the moving device K560 on the back side in the assembled state of the elongated device K540 (see FIG. 1664).
The slide rack K545 is a pair of left and right plate-like members whose vertical width on the left and right inner side is shorter than the vertical width on the left and right outer sides in the state shown in FIG. A receiving portion K546 for receiving the rotating shaft portion K534 of the upper member K530, and an arcuate portion K547 formed in an arc centering on the receiving portion K546 for receiving the auxiliary projection K535, and the state shown in FIG. A plurality of elongated guide holes K548 bored in the left-right direction to receive the guide protrusions K544, and a rack K549 meshed with the central gear K543.
The sliding movement direction of the slide rack K545 is set to the direction in which the elongated guide hole K548 extends (the lateral direction in the state occupied in FIG. 1667, the longitudinal direction of the main body K541). Therefore, when the vertical positions of the left and right upper members K530 match (closest position) as a reference, as the vertical positional deviation dimension between the upper members K530 increases, the length direction of the main body K541 increases. The details will be described later.

Further, the elongated device K540 includes a decorative member K551 fastened and fixed to the main body K541 from the front side, and an illumination board on which an LED arranged inside the decorative member K551 and emitting light to the front side is arranged. K552, a motor support member K553 fastened and fixed to the left end of the decorative member K551, and a transmission gear group KG52 capable of transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KMT51 supported by the motor support member K553. a screw shaft K554 configured to change the position of the moving device K560 in the axial direction, a support receiving portion K555 in which both ends of the screw shaft K554 are rotatably received on the back side of the decorative member K551, and an electric decoration. Photocoupler-type detection sensors K556a to K556c are provided on the rear side of the substrate K552 at positions penetrating the rear side plate portion of the decorative member K551 with the detection groove facing the rear side.
The axial direction of the screw shaft K554 coincides with the longitudinal direction of the main body K541, and the movement of the screw shaft K554 of the moving device K560 in the axial direction is limited to the range in which the recess K541a is formed.
The detection sensors K556a to K556c are configured to detect the placement of the moving device K560. That is, when the moving device K560 is arranged in the left-right center position of the first movable device K401 in the effect waiting state, it is detected by the center detection sensor K556b, and the moving device K560 moves along the axial direction of the screw shaft 554. When it is positioned at the right end position of the movement range, it is detected by the right detection sensor K556a, and when it is positioned at the left end position of the movement range, it is detected by the left detection sensor K556c. be done.
FIG. 1668 is an exploded front perspective view of movement device K560, and FIG. 1669 is an exploded rear perspective view of movement device K560. The moving device K560 includes a main body K561, a front receiving part K571 fastened and fixed to the upper end of the main body K561, a rear receiving part K572 fastened and fixed to the front receiving part K571 from the rear side, and a front receiving part K571. a nut KNT61 held between the portion K571 and the rear side receiving portion K572 and configured to prevent rotation about its own opening direction (direction of arrows LR in FIG. 1668) as a rotation axis.

On the inner peripheral side of the long opening KNT61a, the nut KNT61 has a ridge formed to correspond to a spirally cut groove on the outer periphery of the screw shaft K554 (see FIG. 1666). formed.
As a result, when the screw shaft K554 is rotationally driven while the screw shaft K554 is inserted through the elongated opening KNT61a, the nut KNT61 is moved in the axial direction of the screw shaft K554 corresponding to the rotational drive amount. be. That is, it is configured such that the axial arrangement of the threaded shaft K554 of the moving device K560 changes in accordance with the driving of the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1666) (the structure of the ball screw is diverted).
The front-side receiving portion K571 includes a plate-like portion to be detected K571a that protrudes from below the position where the nut KNT61 is disposed toward the front side. The output from the detection sensors K556a to K556c can be made different depending on whether or not the plate portion K571a to be detected is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensors K556a to K556c (see FIG. 1667) of the elongated device K540. . Based on the difference in the outputs of the detection sensors K556a to K556c, the sound lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1637) determines whether the moving device K560 is positioned at the left-right central position of the first moving device K401 in the standby state for rendering, or the moving range It can be determined whether it is arranged at the end position in the left-right direction of the .
Further, the moving device K560 includes a motor receiver K575 fastened and fixed to the lower end of the main body K561, a drive motor KMT61 held by the motor receiver K575, and a drive shaft of the drive motor KMT61 fixed to the main body. a drive gear KMG62 disposed between K561 and the motor receiving portion K575; a transmission gear KMG63 rotatably supported by the support shaft portion K562 of the main body portion K561 at a position meshing with the drive gear KMG62; A terminating gear KMG64 meshed with the transmission gear KMG63, and a rotary decorative member K578 having a center insertion portion K579 inserted through a circular opening K563 of the main body K561 and fastened to the terminating gear KMG64.

Further, the moving device K560 corresponds to the decorative substrate K564, which is disposed on the front side of the main body K561 and has a circular opening K564a formed at a position corresponding to the circular opening K563, and the circular opening K564a of the decorative substrate K564. A circular opening K567a is formed at a position where the light-receiving member K567 is formed, and a light-receiving member K567 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and having a cut that can refract (can diffusely reflect) the irradiation light from the illumination board K564 is provided.
The electrical board K564 and the light receiving member K567 are stacked on the main body K561 in the order of the electrical board K564 and the light receiving member K567, and the center axes of the circular openings K564a and K567a are aligned with the center axis of the circular opening K563. , and fastened and fixed to the main body K561.
A photocoupler-type detection sensor K565 is arranged on the rear side of the illumination board K564. The detection groove of the detection sensor K565 is located on the back side of the opening K561a formed in the main body K561, and is capable of receiving the annular rib of the transmission gear KMG63.
Cutouts KMG63a are formed in the annular rib of the transmission gear KMG63 at regular intervals (180 degree intervals), and the cutouts KMG63a may or may not be positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565. , the output from the detection sensor K565 can be different. Based on the difference in output from the detection sensor K565, the sound lamp controller H113 (see FIG. 1637) can determine the phase of the transmission gear KMG63 and the phase of the rotary decorative member K578.

In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the terminal gear KMG64 is half the number of teeth of the transmission gear MG63. When the transmission gear MG63 rotates halfway from the phase where the notch KMG63a is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565, the notch KMG63a is again positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565.
That is, when the notch KMG63a is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565, the phases of the terminal gear KMG64 and the rotational decorative member K578 are the same regardless of which notch KMG63a the notch KMG63a is. be.
Figures 1670(a) and 1670(b) are partially enlarged front views of the front layer side movable device K400. Figures 1670(a) and 1670(b) mainly show the switching device K460, and for the sake of convenience, the decorative part on the front side is partially broken to show the internal structure. ing. FIG. 1670(a) shows a state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is de-energized, and FIG. 1670(b) shows a state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized.
As shown in FIGS. 1670(a) and 1670(b), the switching device K460 includes a board member K461 fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body K441 of the right front cover member K440, and supporting holes in the board member K461. A stopper member K462 supported so as to be rotatable about a portion K462b, a drive solenoid KSOL41 fastened and fixed to a substrate member K461, and a substrate member K461 supported so as to be rotatable about a support hole K463b. and a transmission member K463 configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive solenoid KSOL41 to the stopper member K462.

The stopper member K462 includes an arm portion K462a having a support hole portion K462b at its end, an elongated guidance hole K462c extending in the longitudinal direction of the arm portion K462a, and a longitudinal direction of the arm portion K462a. and a projection receiving portion K462d projecting from the end opposite to the end where the support hole K462b is formed in the direction toward the back side.
The transmission member K463 includes an arm portion K463a in which a support hole portion K463b is formed, an auxiliary arm portion K463c extending from the support hole portion K463b in a direction different from that of the arm portion K463a, and an extension tip portion of the auxiliary arm portion K463c. A transmission base end projection K463d that projects rearward and is connected to the transmission member K463 in a manner that the transmission member K463 is rotated by linear displacement of the linear movement portion KSOL41a of the drive solenoid KSOL41 projects rearward from the distal end portion of the arm portion K463a. and a transmission tip protrusion K463e that is provided and received in the guide elongated hole K462c of the stopper member K462.
The action of the switching device K460 will be described. The board member K461 is disposed forward of the connecting member K445 so as not to enter the movement trajectory of the connecting member K445. It extends to the rear side of the member K461, and depending on the state, enters the movement locus of the connecting member K445.
As shown in FIG. 1670(a), when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is not energized, the projecting receiving portion K462d is arranged in front of the long guide hole K442 and enters the movement locus of the connecting member K445.

That is, the downward displacement of the connecting member K445 in the state shown in FIG. Although it will be hung on the receiving portion K462d, since the projecting receiving portion K462d is arranged vertically downward (in the direction of the load via the connecting member K445) starting from the support hole K462b, Rotational movement of the stopper member K462 due to the load of the lifting device K500 or the like can be easily avoided.
As a result, when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is in a non-excited state, the movement of the connecting member K445 can be stopped halfway along the length of the long guide hole K442. Further, even in the case of performing operation control in which the connecting member K445 is frequently stopped halfway, there is no need to energize the drive solenoid KSOL41 to stop the connecting member K445 halfway. Therefore, it is possible to extend the life of the drive solenoid KSOL41.
As shown in FIG. 1670(b), when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized from the state shown in FIG. As the stopper member K462 rotates in conjunction with the movement, the projection receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 retreats from the movement locus of the connecting member K445.
As a result, when the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized, the connecting member K445 is not stopped by the projecting receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462, and the connecting member K445 is allowed to move to the end of the guide elongated hole K442. .

As a result, the movable amount of the upper member K530 (see FIG. 1664) having the fastening portion K533 to which the connecting member K445 is fastened and fixed can be adjusted to the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is de-energized (see FIG. 1670(a)), It can be switched between the excitation state of the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1670(b)).
Figures 1671 to 1676 are partial enlarged front views of the first mobile device K401. FIGS. 1671 to 1676 show how the right side of the lifting device K500 ascends and descends based on the first operation mode in which the rotary member K430 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front in chronological order.
1671 to 1676, in order to facilitate understanding of the movable portion, the lower right end and upper right portion of the main body portion K411 of the support member K410, the front side portion of the main body portion K511 of the lower member K510, and the transmission gear The intermediate disc K521 and second gear K523 of K520, and the front side portion of the body portion K531 of the upper member K530 are shown partially broken away.
In FIG. 1671, the first movable device K401 in the waiting state for rendering is illustrated. That is, the rotary member K430 is in a phase in which the cutout portion K435 (see FIG. 1663) is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor K413, and the upper member K530 is supported by the upper rotary member K476 in which the curved receiving portion K537 is in the entering state. As a result, the vertical movement of the upper member K530 is prevented, the rotation of the transmission gear K520 is also prevented, and the vertical movement of the lower member K510 on which the transmission gear K520 is supported is also prevented.

That is, as shown in FIG. 1671, even when the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotary member K430 is retracted from below the lower member K510, the vertical movement of the upper member K530 is caused by the upper rotary member K476. By being prevented, the vertical movement of the lower member K510 is prevented.
In FIG. 1672, the drive gear KG42 is driven in the direction in which the rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. During the rotation of the rotary member K430, the transmission tubular portion K434 is arranged to face the curved surface of the projecting portion K444. The protruding portion K444 is arranged closer to the center of rotation of the rotating member K430 than the transmitting tubular portion K434, and the protruding tip (rear tip) of the protruding portion K444 faces the front side surface of the rotating member K430. By arranging them, it is possible to prevent posture deviation such that the transmitting tubular portion K434 is displaced in the radial direction of the rotary member K430 (posture deviation in which the rotary member K430 is inclined with respect to the rotary shaft).
As a result, even if the rotating member K430 receives a load in a direction that tilts the main body K431 with respect to the rotation axis at an eccentric position, it is possible to suppress a change in the posture of the rotating member K430. Rotational resistance of the member K430 can be reduced.
In FIG. 1672, the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is still maintained in the large diameter groove K436a of the guide groove K436. While the switching protrusion K472 is maintained in the large diameter groove K436a, the state of the state changing device K470 is maintained as illustrated in FIG. 1671, and the vertical position of the lifting device K500 is also maintained.

Also, in FIG. 1671, the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1670(b)) is shown in a non-excited state (see FIG. 1670(a)). A state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized so as to retreat from the movement locus of the member K445 (see FIG. 1670(b)) is illustrated.
In FIG. 1673, the drive gear KG42 is driven in the direction in which the rotary member K430 rotates counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. A state immediately before the guide groove K436 is switched from the large-diameter groove K436a to the small-diameter groove K436b and the lifting device K500 starts falling is illustrated.
When the switching protrusion K472 comes to be received in the small diameter groove K436b, the lower rotating member K471 rotates around the support K414 of the supporting member K410, and the rotating motion of the lower rotating member K471 rotates the interlocking member K473 and the switching protrusion. As the portion K475 is vertically moved, the upper rotating member K476 is rotationally moved about the support hole K476a from the entering state to the retreating state.
The upper rotary member K476 has a rotary distal end portion K476b that is arranged to face the curved receiving portion K537 and is formed as an arc-shaped surface around the center of rotation in the support hole K476a. In addition, the curved receiving portion K537 is formed in a curved surface shape capable of coming into surface contact with the rotating distal end portion K476b of the upper rotating member K476 in the advanced state (see FIG. 1671).

As a result, the resistance generated when rotating the upper rotating member K476 from the state in which the curved receiving portion K537 is in contact with the rotating distal end portion K476b of the upper rotating member K476 in the advanced state to the retracted state is limited to the frictional resistance. It is possible to prevent the resistance from becoming excessive.
Further, the weight of the lifting device K500 applied to the upper rotating member K476 in the advanced state via the curved receiving portion K537 is in the direction opposite to the direction in which the upper rotating member K476 moves to the retracted state (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 1673). is applied to the upper rotating member K476 as a load of .
Therefore, the upper rotating member K476 is retracted by the weight of the lifting device K500 applied to the upper rotating member K476 via the curved receiving portion K537 while reducing the motion resistance between the curved receiving portion K537 and the upper rotating member K476. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a change to a state.
In addition, due to the shape of the upper rotating member K476 described above, when the left-right balance is lost such as when the first movable device K401 is dropped on one side, a load having not only its own weight but also a left-right component rotates upward from the curved receiving portion K537. When applied to member K476, the load may be directed toward the center of rotation of upper rotating member K476. Thereby, the posture of the upper rotating member K476 can be stabilized, and the support of the lifting device K500 can be stabilized.

FIG. 1674 shows a drop position state (see FIG. 1654) after the lifting device K500 has dropped from the state shown in FIG. 1673 . Note that the rotating member K430 rotates not only on the right side of the lifting device K500 but also on the left side, and the upper rotating member K476 rotates before reaching the falling position. The rotation direction in the first operation mode is the reverse direction (clockwise direction in front view) of the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in front view) of the rotating member K430 on the right side in the first operation mode.
The movement of the lifting device K500 by dropping is configured so that the upper member K530 is stopped by the absorbing member K443 (see FIG. 1661) of the front cover member K440, and the lower member K510 is configured to transmit the rotation member K430. It is not configured to occur until it collides with the cylindrical portion K434.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impact load from being transmitted to the transmission tubular portion K434 when the lifting device K500 is dropped. That is, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of damage caused by the impact of the fall of the lifting device K500 being transmitted to the transmission tubular portion K434 and the lower member K510.
Details of the vertical movement of the lower member K510, transmission gear K520, and upper member K530 of the lifting device K500 will be described. First, the lower member K510 and the upper member K530 are each guided by a common metal rod K421 so as to be vertically slidable.

When the lower member K510 descends from the state shown in FIG. 1673, the transmission gear K520 is rotated by the engagement of the support member K410 with the rack K416, and the rotation causes the rack K532 of the upper member K530 to move vertically with respect to the transmission gear K520. Relative movement in the direction.
That is, when the lower member K510 moves in the vertical direction, the upper member K530 moves the transmission gear K520 in the vertical direction due to the movement of the lower member K510. The member K530 moves relative to the lower member K510 by the amount of movement of the rack K532.
In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the second gear K523 that meshes with the rack K532 of the upper member K530 is the number of teeth of the first gear K522 that meshes with the rack K416 of the support member K410 and rotates as the lower member K510 moves. Since the number of teeth is designed to be 1.5 times, the upper member K530 moves by a movement amount obtained by adding 1.5 times the movement amount of the lower member K510 to the movement amount of the lower member K510. be done.
Therefore, the upper member K530 is vertically moved by a movement amount KVD2 that is 2.5 times the movement amount KVD1 of the lower member K510 (KVD1:KVD2=2:5). This prevents the vertical movement distance of the upper member K530 from being limited to the vertical movement distance of the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotary member K430 rotated by the drive motors KMT41a and KMT41b (see FIG. 1662). be able to.

That is, the upper member K530 can be designed to have a long vertical movement distance while keeping the diameter of the rotating member K430 small, so that the design flexibility of the arrangement of the upper member K530 and the rotating member K430 can be improved.
A projecting portion K444 is provided on the left side of the lower member K510, and the left end portion of the lower member K510 is guided vertically by the right flat portion of the projecting portion K444. As a result, the projecting portion K444 can prevent the lower member K510 from being displaced to the left.
In FIG. 1675, the rotating member K430 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. A state in which the switching protrusion K472 is received in the small-diameter groove K436b of the rotating member K430 is illustrated.
Due to the rotation of the rotating member K430, the transmission tubular portion K434 is rotated while rubbing against the lower surface of the lower member K510. Motion resistance generated between K434 and lower member K510 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the upward biasing force applied from the coil spring K419 to the lower member K510 reduces the load applied downward from the lower member K510 toward the tubular transmission portion K434. Motion resistance generated between K434 and lower member K510 can be reduced.
In FIG. 1676, the rotating member K430 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 1675, and the switching projection K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is received in the large diameter groove K436a of the rotating member K430. is illustrated.
In FIG. 1676, the upper rotating member K476 has changed from the retracted state illustrated in FIG. 1675 to the advanced state. At this time, the bending receiving portion K537 of the upper member K530 is arranged above the rotating distal end portion K476b of the upper rotating member K476, and a gap is generated between the bending receiving portion K537 and the rotating distal end portion K476b. Thereby, the motion resistance of the upper rotating member K476 can be reduced.
Here, in order to change the upper rotating member K476 from the retracted state to the retracted state, it is necessary to displace the interlocking member K473 upward against its own weight. A larger force is required than to force it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the upper rotating member K476 in the retracted state is changed to the entering state, the movement of the upper rotating member K476 is controlled by creating a gap between the curved receiving portion K537 and the rotating distal end portion K476b. It reduces resistance and avoids excessive force required to change state.
When the rotating member K430 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 1676, it returns to the state shown in FIG. In this way, when the rotating member K430 continues to rotate counterclockwise, the vertical movement of the lifting device K500 is cyclical. That is, the first operation mode of the rotating member K430 is an operation mode in which the vertical movement of the lifting device K500 can be circulated.
Figures 1677 and 1678 are partially enlarged front views of the first mobile device K401. 1677 and 1678 show, in chronological order, part of the second operation mode in which the right side portion of the lifting device K500 descends based on the clockwise rotation of the rotary member K430 from the state shown in FIG. illustrated.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the rotary member K430 is rotationally driven counterclockwise after changing from the production standby state (see FIG. 1671) to the production standby state (see FIG. 1671). be.

1677 and 1678, in order to facilitate understanding of the movable portion, the lower right end and upper right portion of the main body portion K411 of the support member K410, the front side portion of the main body portion K511 of the lower member K510, and the transmission gear The intermediate disc K521 and second gear K523 of K520, and the front side portion of the body portion K531 of the upper member K530 are shown partially broken away.
1677 and 1678 show a state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1670(a)) is de-energized so that the projection receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 enters the movement locus of the connecting member K445. be.
In FIG. 1677, the drive gear KG42 is driven in the direction in which the rotary member K430 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 1671 when viewed from the front. Since the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is received in the small-diameter groove K436b of the rotating member K430, the upper rotating member K476 is changed to the retracted state, but the transmission cylindrical portion K434 of the rotating member K430 Since the lower member K510 is supported, the lifting device K500 does not fall.
That is, the lower member K510 maintains a state of being pressed against the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 by its own weight, and as the rotating member K430 rotates, the plane portion K512 and the transmission tubular portion K434 contact each other. Move up and down to maintain contact.

FIG. 1678 shows a state in which the rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 1677, and the connecting member K445 is received by the projection receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 to stop the descent. .
As a result, the upper member K530 to which the connecting member K445 is fastened is stopped from descending, and the lower member K510 is also stopped from descending. When rotated around, the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 is separated from the planar portion K512 of the lower member K510.
When returning from the state shown in FIG. 1678 to the effect waiting state, the rotating member K430 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 1678), and the transmission tubular portion K434 pushes up the lower member K510. .
In this case, the rotation of the rotating member K430 is started from the state illustrated in FIG. 1678, or from the state in which the rotating member K430 is slightly rotated clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. Regardless, the load applied from the lifting device K500 to the transmission tube K434 results from the state illustrated in FIG.

In the state shown in FIG. 1678, the tubular transmission portion K434 is arranged directly to the right of the support portion K412 as the rotation shaft of the rotating member K430, and the direction of movement of the tubular transmission portion K434 (movement trajectory of the tubular transmission portion K434) direction of the tangential line drawn in the vertical direction) is oriented in the vertical direction, an upward load can be efficiently applied to the lower member K510. As a result, the return operation from the state shown in FIG. 1678 to the effect waiting state can be performed quickly.
When the rotary member K430 is further rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. A load directed downward can be transmitted. That is, since it is not possible to generate a load in the direction to raise the lower member K510, the operation of the lifting device K500 does not circulate in the drive control that continues to rotate the rotary member K430 clockwise when viewed from the front.
Figures 1679 and 1680 are partially enlarged rear views of the first mobile device K401. In FIG. 1679, the first mobile device K401 is shown in the production standby state (see FIG. 1653), and in FIG. 1680, the first mobile device K401 is shown in the one-sided falling state (see FIG. 1658).
In the rendering standby state of the first movable device K401 illustrated in FIG. 1679, the left and right upper members K530 are supported by the upper rotating member K476 (see FIG. 1672). On the other hand, in the one-side fallen state of the first movable device K401 illustrated in FIG. 1680, the left upper member K530 is supported by the upper rotary member K476, while the right upper member K530 is fastened and fixed to the connecting member K445. is supported by the projecting receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 (see FIG. 1678), the elongated device K540 is tilted.

In the state shown in FIG. 1680, the distance between the left and right rotating shafts K534 is longer than the state shown in FIG. is displaced to
The pair of slide racks K545 are meshed with a common central gear K543, and are displaced in opposite directions along the longitudinal direction of the elongate device K540. The displacement amount is common to each other.
That is, the movement amount KSDa of the right side slide rack K545 from the effect waiting state and the movement amount KSDb of the left side slide rack K545 from the effect waiting state are the same (KSDa=KSDb).
1679 to the state shown in FIG. 1680, the positional deviation of the central gear K543 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. positional deviation in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

Here, when the first movable device K401 is changed from the effect standby state to the drop position state, the left and right rotating members K430 (see FIG. 1663) are rotationally driven in the first operation mode, and the left and right upper rotating members K476 ( 1673) are simultaneously changed from the entering state in the effect waiting state to the retreating state, the left and right upper members K530 (see FIG. 1674) are preferably dropped at the same time. Furthermore, during the lifting operation, the left and right rotating members K430 are rotated at the same rotation angle, so that the lifting device K500 can be lifted in a state in which there is no left-right height deviation.
However, it is difficult to make the movement resistance of the left and right rotating members K430 (see FIG. 1663) exactly the same, and they are driven by the corresponding drive motors KMT41a and KMT41b (see FIG. 1663). Depending on the quality of the KMT 41b, even if the same voltage is supplied, a slight discrepancy in rotational speed may occur. Therefore, when the lifting device K500 moves up and down, there is a possibility that the height position of the lifting device K500 on the left and right sides is shifted.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the change in the vertical position of the transmission tubular portion K434 due to the rotation of the rotating member K430 is increased by 2.5 times when transmitted from the lower member K510 to the upper member K530 (see FIG. 1671). See Figure 1676). Therefore, even if the phase shift of the rotary member K430 is small, the shift is multiplied by 2.5 and appears as a height position shift on the left and right sides of the elongated device K540 supported by the upper member K530.
As described above, in the present embodiment, a shift in height position on the left and right sides of the lifting device K500 may occur. If the vertical position of the lifting device K500 shifts, the elongated device K540 tilts about a straight line in the front-rear direction during vertical movement of the lifting device K500, which tends to make the appearance worse.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left and right slide racks K545 are configured so that the movement amounts KSDa and KSDb are the same. , the positional deviation of the lateral center position of the elongated device K540 in the lateral direction can be suppressed.
As a result, it is possible to suppress lateral displacement of the moving device K560, which is arranged at the center of the elongated device K540 in the production standby state, during vertical movement of the lifting device K500.
The slide rack K545 has a common base end structure on the rotating shaft K534 side, while the arrangement of the rack K549 meshing with the central gear K543 is different between the upper and lower parts.
In this embodiment, control is performed so that the one-sided fall state illustrated in FIG. Few (no).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the slide rack K545 is formed so as to easily optimize the meshing state between the central gear K543 and the rack K549 in the one-side falling state. That is, the rack K549 on the side that covers the central gear K543 (the side on which the rotating shaft portion K534 is located on the upper side) is arranged above the central gear K543 when one side is dropped.
Furthermore, by arranging the rotating shaft portion K534 at the lower end of the rack K549, the amount of protrusion of the rack K549 on the side that covers the central gear K543 toward the central gear K543 is increased. As a result, the weight of the rack K549 on the side that covers the central gear K543 facilitates optimization of the meshing state between the rack K549 and the central gear K543.
As shown in FIG. 1680, the one-sided falling state of the first movable device K401 is a state that is changed from the effect standby state by tilting the rotation shaft K534 of the left upper member K530 to the proximal side. A driving motor KMT51 is arranged on the base end side of the tilting operation.
That is, by arranging the driving motor KMT51 as a heavy object on the base end side, the center of gravity can be brought to the base end side, and the tilting motion of moving up and down when changing from the standby state to the one-sided falling state can be performed. The weight on the tip side (right side) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load (see FIG. 1678) that the projecting receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 receives from the connecting member K445 in the one-sided falling state.

An example of drive control of the moving device K560 will be described with reference to FIG. Figures 1681(a), 1681(b), 1681(c) and 1681(d) are partial front views of the first mobile device K401.
In Figures 1681(a), 1681(b), 1681(c) and 1681(d), the elongated device K540 is arranged in the vertical position of the first movable device K401 in its falling position (see Figure 1654). 1681(a) is the same as that shown in FIG. ) is the same as that of FIG.
First, when the drive control illustrated in FIG. 1681 is executed, the elongated device K540 of the first movable device K401 moves from the vertical position in the standby state for presentation (see FIG. 1653) to the falling position state (see FIG. 1654). It is moved downward (dropped) to a vertical position. Even after reaching the drop position state from the start of this movement, the rotary decorative member K578 of the moving device K560 continues to rotate when the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1668) is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise when viewed from the front). is continuously rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.
As shown in FIG. 1681(a), during the continuous rotation of the moving device K560 in the left-right center position KC41, the detection sensor K565 (see FIG. 1668) of the notch KMG63a (see FIG. 1668) of the transmission gear KMG63 1669), the sound lamp controller H113 (see FIG. 1637) detects the actual rotational speed KVR1 of the rotary decorative member K578.

If the rotation speed KVR1 is within a predetermined design value, the control by the sound ramp control device H113 (see FIG. 1637) controls the middle timing of the detection interval of the detection sensor K565 (see FIG. 1681(b)). Then, the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1666) is rotationally driven in the forward direction (the direction of moving the moving device K560 to the right, the clockwise direction when viewed in the direction of arrow L), and the moving device K560 is moved at the speed KVS1.
After the start of driving the drive motor KMT51 from FIG. The lamp controller H113 (see FIG. 1637) is controlled to stop driving the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1668) and the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1666).
That is, the position of the rotary decorative member K578 stops in an appropriate position (posture in which the vertical and horizontal directions match) when the notch KMG63a is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565, and the position of the moving device K560. It is possible to match the timing with which the movement in the horizontal direction is stopped.
At the same time that the drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1668) is driven to rotate in the reverse direction from the state of being placed at the right halfway position KR42 shown in FIG. 1681(d), the moving device K560 is moved to the left halfway position KL43 illustrated in FIG. 1681(d).

At this time, the rotation speed KVR2 of the drive motor KMT61 is set slower than the rotation speed KVR1, and the rotation speed of the drive motor KMT51 is set to be the same, so that the horizontal movement speed of the moving device K560 is maintained at the speed KVS1. .
After the driving motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1668) is rotationally driven from FIG. 1681(c), first, the notch KMG63a of the transmission gear KMG63 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor K565. Device H113 (see FIG. 1637) is controlled to stop driving drive motor KMT61 (see FIG. 1668) and drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1666).
Here, from Figure 1681(b) to Figure 1681(c), the rotary decorative member K578 is half rotated, and from Figure 1681(c) to Figure 1681(d), the rotary decorative member K578 is rotated once. . Therefore, if the speed relationship is the same, the right halfway position KR42 shown in FIG. 1681(c) and the left halfway position KL43 shown in FIG. position.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the rotation speed KVR2 is set slower than the rotation speed KVR1 (KVR1>KVR2), the distance between the left-right center position KC41 and the right-side intermediate position KR42 is longer than the distance between the left-right center position KC41 and the right-side intermediate position KR42. The distance from KC41 to the left halfway position KL43 is longer. In this way, the stop position of the moving device K560 can be set asymmetrically.

In this embodiment, the state in which the moving device K560 is placed at the left halfway position KL43 corresponds to the arrangement in which the detected portion K571a begins to come out of the detection groove of the center detection sensor K556b (the output of the center detection sensor K556b is ).
In this case, the part to be detected K571a (see FIG. 1668) extends symmetrically in the left-right direction from the center of the moving device K560. Whether or not it exits the groove depends on the amount of movement of the moving device K560 from the left-right center position KC41 regardless of whether it is left or right.
1681(a), 1681(b) and 1681(c), the detected portion K571a (see FIG. 1668) is still in the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667). 1681(d), the part to be detected K571a comes out of the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b for the first time (the part to be detected K571a is designed to have a lateral length that satisfies this condition). be done).
The state illustrated in FIG. 1681(d) corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 1656 as described above. and that the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1666) was driven in the reverse direction when the part to be detected K571a came out of the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b. By driving the second movable device K701 (see FIG. 1656) based on this, it is possible to avoid contact between the moving device K560 and the second movable device K701 during operation.

In this embodiment, the rotation speeds KVR1, KVR2 and KVS1 are detected by the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667) immediately after the series of operations illustrated in time series in FIG. It is designed with a speed of relationship that is feasible to be placed outside the .
As described in detail above, in the first movable device K401, the displacement of the transmission tubular portion K434 accompanying the rotation of the rotary member K430 is increased, and the lifting device K500 is displaced. As a result, even when the rotation angle of the rotary member K430 is small, a large displacement amount of the lifting device K500 can be ensured.
Further, the first movable device K401 is configured so that the lifting device K500 can be displaced in two types of displacement modes depending on the rotation direction of the rotating member K430 from the standby state for presentation. At this time, the switching device K460 for changing the displacement amount of the lifting device K500 is synchronously controlled, so that not only the displacement speed of the lifting device K500 but also the displacement range can be changed. Variation can be increased.
In addition, in the first movable device K401, even if there is a deviation in the vertical slide amount of the left and right sides of the lifting device K500, the movement amounts KSDa and KSDb of the slide rack K545 are the same. It is configured to suppress lateral displacement of K560. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the horizontal position of the moving device K560 when the lifting device K500 is displaced in the vertical direction, thereby improving the performance effect.

In addition, in the first movable device K401, the lateral slide movement speed and stop timing of the moving device K560 are determined based on detection of the rotation speed and stop timing of the rotary decorative member K578. As a result, it is possible to unify the motions of the motion members driven by different drive sources, and to give a sense of unity to the presentation.
Since the structure used for the ball screw is diverted to the lateral sliding movement of the moving device K560, the moving speed and stop position of the moving device K560 can be accurately controlled. This makes it possible to improve the reproducibility of the presentation.
Further, in the first movable device K401, the operation is controlled so that the direction of sliding movement of the moving device K560 and the direction of rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K578 correspond to each other. As a result, a sense of unity can be imparted to the motions of the plurality of movable members, and the presentation effect can be improved.
Returning to FIGS. 1660 and 1661, description will be made. As shown in FIGS. 1660 and 1661, the front layer side movable device K400 has a second movable device K701 so as to connect a pair of support members K410 at the left-right central position below the first movable device K401. are placed. Details of the second mobile device K701 are described below.

FIG. 1682 is an exploded front perspective view of the second mobile device K701, and FIG. 1683 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second mobile device K701. The second movable device K701 includes a base member K710, which is a member constituting a skeleton and is connected and fixed to a pair of support members K410 (see FIG. 1660), and supported so as to be vertically slidable relative to the base member K710. a driving motor KMT71 disposed on the base member K710 and generating driving force for driving the vertical sliding member K720; and a transmission device K730 transmitting the driving force of the driving motor KMT71 to the vertical sliding member K720. and a followable member K740 disposed on the front side of the vertical slide member K720 and capable of following the vertical slide member K720, supported by both the followable member K740 and the vertical slide member K720, A pair of interlocking members K750 that interlock with the movements of the followable member K740 and the vertical slide member K720, a main decorative member K760 that is fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member K720 from the front side so as to sandwich the followable member K740 and the interlocking member K750, Prepare.
The base member K710 includes a main body K711 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of cylindrical support portions K712 protruding parallel to each other on the front side of the main body K711, and the main body K711 extending vertically. A metal rod K713 arranged and fixed on the left side when viewed from the front, a long hole K714 extending in the vertical direction parallel to the extending direction of the metal rod K713, and the rear side of the long hole K714 and the space between the long hole K714 on the back side of the base member K710. A support area K715 formed in a substantially L-shape at the rear of the range extending leftward from the upper end, and a detection sensor K716 which is disposed on the base member K710 and capable of detecting that the transmission device K730 is in the waiting state for performance. and a relay board K718 fixed to the rear side of the base member K710 by a fixing member K717.
A horizontally long cover member K711a is fastened and fixed to the main body K711 from the front side at the lower end. The cover member K711a is a member that presses the metal rod K713 against the main body K711 from the front side. and a front side prevention piece K711c for preventing falling off.
Further, the main body K711 is formed with an overhang K711d projecting to the front side at the right side of the middle portion of the long hole K714, and a detection sensor K711e having a detection groove disposed on the front side is formed inside the overhang K711d. are placed. A projecting portion K711f that projects toward the front side is formed on the left side of the metal rod K713. By switching the output of the detection sensor K711e, it is possible to determine whether or not the vertical slide member K720 is in the downward arrangement state of the second movable device K701, the details of which will be described later.

Among the support portions K712, the first support portion 712a rotatably supports a transmission gear KMG73 meshed with a drive gear KMG72 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor KMT71. Note that the other support portions 712b to 712d will be described later.
One end of the coil spring KSP74 is supported at the upper left end of the support region K715, and the coil spring KSP74 is rotatably supported by a support portion K715a cylindrically protruding inside the intersecting position of the support regions K715. It is bent along the outer arc of the set collar KRG75.
The other end of the coil spring KSP74 is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion K723 of the vertical slide member K720 penetrating the long hole K714, and hooked on the guided member KLG76 that can slide vertically together with the fastening portion K723. That is, the coil spring KSP74 is configured to urge the vertical slide member 720 upward via the guided member KLG76.
The detection sensor K716 can detect that the second movable device K701 is in the waiting state for the effect based on the fact that the arc-shaped part K732 of the two-layer gear K731 on the driving side of the transmission device K730 enters the detection groove in the waiting state for the effect. Configured.

The relay substrate K718 is formed so as to partially block the rear open portion of the support area K715. That is, the relay board K718 closes the rear open portion of the support area K715, thereby making it easier to prevent the coil spring KSP74 from falling off rearward.
The vertical slide member K720 has a plate-like main body K721 and a rectangular cylindrical inserted part K722 that penetrates vertically so that the metal rod K713 can be inserted through the lower left part of the main body K721. a pair of upper and lower fastening portions K723 to which the guided member KLG76 is fastened and fixed by being inserted through the long hole K714 of the base member K710; , a plurality of cylindrical support portions K725 protruding toward the back side of the body portion K721 for supporting the transmission end member K737 of the transmission device K730, and a plurality of support portions K725 used for position detection and extending rearward from the upper right portion of the body portion K721. It is provided with an extended piece to be detected K726 and a spring support portion K727 having a claw portion capable of suspending the upper end of the small coil spring KSP77.
As the inserted portion K722 is guided by the metal rod K713, the vertical slide member K720 is guided in the vertical direction, which is the extending direction of the metal rod K713. Similarly, the vertical slide member K720 is guided in the vertical direction by guiding the fastening portion K723 to the elongated hole K714 of the base member K710. Therefore, the moving direction of the vertical slide member K720 is limited to the vertical direction.
The transmission device K730 includes a drive-side two-layer gear K731, which is rotatably supported by a second support portion K712b of the support portion K712 and whose front layer gear portion K731a is meshed with the transmission gear KMG73, and a third support portion of the support portion K712. A transmission-side two-layer gear K733 rotatably supported by K712c and engaged with the rear-layer transmission portion K731b of the drive-side two-layer gear K731, and a transmission-side two-layer gear K733 rotatably supported by the fourth support portion K712d of the support portion K712. The front layer gear portion K733a and the base end side gear portion K735a of the gear K733 are meshed to form an arm member K735 that rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the transmission side two-layer gear K733, and the rotation tip portion of the arm member K735. a transmission terminating member K737 having a lower tip K737c coupled to K735b.

The rear-layer transmission portion K731b of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 does not have gear teeth formed on the entire circumference, but has an outer shape formed in an arc around the rotation axis without forming gear teeth on a part of it. The outermost diameter portion of the arc-shaped portion K732 extends rearward in a direction parallel to the rotation axis. is configured to be able to enter into the detection groove of
The rear-layer transmission portion K733b of the transmission-side two-layer gear K733 does not have gear teeth formed on the entire circumference, but has an arc shape (concave shape) that protrudes toward the rotating shaft without gear teeth formed on a part of it. The circular arc-shaped portion K734 is formed in a plane, and the circular arc-shaped portion K734 and the circular arc-shaped portion K732 of the drive-side double-layer gear K731 are configured to be able to come into contact with each other, the details of which will be described later.
The transmission terminating member K737 is formed in a plate shape, and is rotatably supported by a first support portion K725a formed at the upper end portion of the vertical slide member K720 in the support portion K725. , a guide hole K737b formed in an arc centered on the base end side support hole K737a through which the second support portion K725b of the support portion K725 is inserted, and a rotation tip portion K735b of the arm member K735. and a lower tip K737c operably coupled thereto.
The followable member K740 includes a body portion K741 formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of elongated holes drilled in the body portion K741 in the vertical direction. ) and the long hole K724 of the vertical slide member K720 are formed to have the same horizontal length as that of the long hole K724, and are inclined downward toward the center of the main body K741. A plurality of oblique elongated holes K743 (in this embodiment, one pair each on the left and right sides) formed in an inverted V shape, a left side receiving portion K744 extending rearward from the lower left end side of the main body portion K741, and the main body. A right receiving portion K745 extending rearward from the lower right end side of the portion K741, and a spring supporting portion K746 having a claw suspended from the lower end of the small coil spring KSP77 are provided.

The followable member K740 is configured to follow the motion of the vertical slide member K720 by the urging force of the small coil spring KSP77, but does not always follow the motion. The receiving portion K744 is blocked by the projecting portion K711f, and the right receiving portion K745 is blocked by the projecting portion K711d, so that the movement of the vertical slide member K720 can be configured in such a manner that the followable member K740 is left behind. , details will be described later.
The interlocking member K750 includes a pair of left and right main body portions K751 formed in a plate shape, and a pair of upper and lower cylindrical fastening protrusions K752 protruding from the back side of the main body portion K751.
The fastening projecting portion K752 is inserted from the front side through the oblique elongated hole K743 of the followable member K740 and the elongated hole K724 of the vertical slide member K720 in this order, and is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip. The head prevents it from falling off.
The main decorative member K760 includes a main body K761 in which an electric board K761a is arranged, and a front side surface of which light from the electric board K761a is irradiated is formed of a light-transmitting plate-like member. and a plurality of fastening portions K762 projecting from the rear surface of the portion K761.

The fastening portion K762 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion K721 of the vertical slide member K720 while being inserted through the vertical elongated hole K742 of the followable member K740 from the front side. That is, the vertical arrangement of the main decorative member K760 is the same as the vertical arrangement of the vertical slide member K720, and the amount of relative movement in the vertical direction between the vertical slide member K720 and the followable member K740 is determined by the vertical long hole K742 of the followable member K740. is limited to the dimensions of
Figures 1684(a), 1684(b), 1685(a) and 1685(b) are front views of the second mobile device K701. 1684(a), 1684(b), 1685(a), and 1685(b) show in chronological order how the second movable device K701 changes from the effect standby state to the raised arrangement state. Among the components of the second movable device K701, the vertical slide member K720 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the followable member K740, the interlocking member K750, and the main decorative member K760, which are arranged on the front side of the vertical slide member K720. (see FIG. 1682) is omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1684(a), in the waiting state of the second movable device K701, the arc-shaped portion K734 of the transmission-side two-layer gear K733 is positioned against the arc-shaped portion K732 of the drive-side two-layer gear K731. are in contact with each other.
In this state, the arcuate portion K732 protrudes from the maximum diameter position (both ends in the circumferential direction) of the arcuate portion K734 to a position closer to the rotation axis of the transmission side two-layer gear K733. Rotation of the layer gear K733 can be restricted. As a result, the arm member K735 and the transmission terminating member K737, which are disposed on the downstream side in the driving force transmission direction of the transmission side double-layer gear K733, can be stabilized in a stopped state.

In the presentation standby state of the second movable device K701 illustrated in FIG. 1684(a), the arc-shaped portion K732 of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 is in the detection groove of the detection sensor K716. In this embodiment, the length of the arc-shaped portion K732 formed in the arc direction is longer than the thickness of the detection sensor K716 forming the detection groove. Therefore, even if the detection sensor K716 detects a state in which the arc-shaped portion K732 is in the state, the phase of the drive-side double-layer gear K731 cannot be accurately determined.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the arc-shaped portion K732 is in the detection sensor K716, the transmission-side double-layer gear K733 does not rotate (the state shown in FIG. 1684(a) is maintained). (the position where the gear teeth are formed is designed so that the engagement rotation does not start), so that the arm member K735 and the transmission terminal end located downstream of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 in the driving force transmission direction Whether or not the member K737 is arranged in the effect waiting state can be determined by detecting the state in which the arcuate portion K732 is in the detection sensor K716.
In this manner, while allowing an allowable width for the arrangement of the arc-shaped portion K732 in the state detected by the detection sensor K716, as long as the arc-shaped portion K732 is detected by the detection sensor K716, the arm member K735 and transmission Since the sound lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1637) can be caused to determine that the terminal member K737 is maintained in the arrangement of the second movable device K701 in the effect standby state, the effect standby state is formed in the second movable device K701. It is possible to give a certain width to the phase of the drive-side two-layer gear K731.
In other words, even if the drive-side two-layer gear K731 rotates in the forward and reverse directions to some extent (an angle of less than 45 degrees in this embodiment) from the state shown in FIG. The side two-layer gear K733 does not rotate and is configured to remain as it is.

Corresponding to this premise, the arc-shaped portion K732 is formed so that the angle around the rotation axis of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 is 90 degrees, so that the detection sensor K716 detects the arc of the arc-shaped portion K732. Even if it is rotated in the forward and reverse directions by an angle of less than 45 degrees from the state in which it is arranged in the direction center position, the state in which the arcuate portion K732 is in the detection groove of the detection sensor K716 is maintained.
Therefore, the arm member K735 and the transmission terminating member K737 of the second movable device K701 can be provided with an allowable width of about 90 degrees in the phase of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 for arranging them in the standby state for the effect. Therefore, it is generally difficult to instantaneously stop the arm member K735 and the transmission terminal member K737 from driving at such an excessive speed that it is difficult to accurately determine the stop phase of the drive-side double-layer gear K731. can be easily realized.
In other words, the drive-side two-layer gear K731 should be stopped within a permissible width of about 90 degrees, and the arm member K735 and the transmission gear K735 and the transmission arm member K735 are engaged in the drive-side two-layer gear K731 within the permissible width from the time when the drive-side two-layer gear K731 starts to rotate. Since the terminating member K737 is maintained in the effect standby state of the second movable device K701, the arm member K735 and the transmission terminating member K737 are placed in the effect standby state of the second movable device K701 before the driving side two-layer gear K731 stops. Can be stopped at placement in state.
In FIG. 1684(b), as the drive-side double-layer gear K731 rotates counterclockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 1684(a), the transmission-side double-layer gear K733 is starting to rotate.

The state illustrated in FIG. 1684(b) corresponds to the moment when the arcuate portion K732 of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 comes out of the detection groove of the detection sensor K716. From the state shown in FIG. 1684(b), the driving force is transmitted from the drive-side double-layer gear K731 to the transmission-side double-layer gear K733 due to the engagement rotation of the gear teeth. By appropriately controlling the rotation angle of the drive gear KMG72 from the time when the arcuate portion K732 emerges from the transmission side two-layer gear K733, the arm member K735 and the transmission terminating member disposed downstream in the driving force transmission direction from the transmission side two-layer gear K733. The placement of K737 can be controlled.
That is, the arm member K735 of the second movable device K701 can rotate from the effect waiting state to the raised arrangement state in which the arm member K735 rotates upward by 90 degrees. The rotation angle of the KMG72 is calculated in advance from the gear ratio relationship, and by rotating the drive gear KMG72 at that rotation angle, the arm member K735 and the transmission terminal member K737 can be arranged in the raised position. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device for detecting that the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 are arranged in the raised arrangement state.
FIG. 1685(a) shows a substantially intermediate state when the second movable device K701 moves from the effect standby state to the raised arrangement state. In this state, the right receiving portion K745 ( 1683) contacts the lower surface of the projecting portion K711d (see FIG. 1682) of the base member K710, preventing the followable member K740 from rising any further. The effect of preventing the followable member K740 from rising any further will be described later.
In FIG. 1685(b), the raised position state of the second mobile device K701 is illustrated. In the raised arrangement state of the second movable device K701, the center (circular center) of the fourth support portion K712d of the base member K710, the center (circular center) of the rotation tip K735b of the arm member K735, and the transmission terminating member K737 The center (circular center) of the base end side support hole K737a is arranged on a straight line KVL78 extending substantially in the vertical direction.

This suppresses displacement in the gravitational direction (downward) of the vertical slide member K720 and the followable member K740, the interlocking member K750, and the main decorative member K760 arranged on the vertical slide member K720 when the second movable device K701 is positioned upward. can do.
In other words, the gravitational direction (downward) load transmitted to the transmission terminating member K737 via the first support portion K725a of the vertical slide member K720 is applied to the center of the fourth support portion K712d of the base member K710 (the center of the circular shape). ) and the center (the center of the circle) of the rotating tip K735b of the arm member K735, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the transmission terminating member K737 and the arm member K735 rotate due to this load.
As a result, the second movable device K701 can be maintained in the raised arrangement state without requiring a load for stopping the rotation of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 and the transmission-side two-layer gear K733. 1682) can be de-energized while maintaining the state of the .
Figures 1686(a) and 1686(b) are front views of the second mobile device K701. 1686(a) and 1686(b) show how the second movable device K701 starts operating from the effect waiting state (see FIG. 1684(a)) and then changes to the lowered arrangement state in chronological order. In the configuration of the second movable device K701, the vertical slide member K720 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Illustration of K760 (see FIG. 1682) is omitted.

In FIG. 1686(a), as the drive-side double-layer gear K731 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. A state in which rotation has started is illustrated.
The state illustrated in FIG. 1686(a) corresponds to the moment when the circular arc-shaped portion K732 of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 comes out of the detection groove of the detection sensor K716. From the state shown in FIG. 1686(a), the driving force is transmitted from the drive-side double-layer gear K731 to the transmission-side double-layer gear K733 due to the meshing rotation of the gear teeth. By appropriately controlling the rotation angle of the drive gear KMG72 from the time when the arcuate portion K732 emerges from the transmission side two-layer gear K733, the arm member K735 and the transmission terminating member disposed downstream in the driving force transmission direction from the transmission side two-layer gear K733. The placement of K737 can be controlled.
That is, the arm member K735 of the second movable device K701 can rotate from the effect waiting state to the lowered arrangement state in which the arm member K735 rotates downward by 90 degrees. The rotation angle of the gear KMG72 is calculated in advance from the gear ratio relationship, and by rotating the drive gear KMG72 at that rotation angle, the arm member K735 and the transmission terminating member K737 can be placed in the lowered position. . Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device for detecting that the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K737 have been placed in the lowered position.
In the present embodiment, the fact that the second movable device K701 has changed to the lowered arrangement state is determined by the detection piece K726 of the vertical slide member K720 entering the detection groove of the detection sensor K711e of the base member K710. configured to The detection by the detection sensor K711e is used in motion control associated with interlocking with other movable devices, the details of which will be described later.

In FIG. 1686(b), the lowered arrangement state of the second movable device K701 is illustrated. In the lowered state of the second movable device K701, the center of the fourth support portion K712d of the base member K710 (the center of the circular shape), the center of the rotation tip K735b of the arm member K735 (the center of the circular shape), and the transmission terminating member K737. The center (circular center) of the base end side support hole K737a is arranged on a straight line KVL78 extending substantially in the vertical direction.
As a result, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member K720 and the followable member K740, the interlocking member K750, and the main decorative member K760 arranged on the vertical slide member K720 can be suppressed when the second movable device K701 is arranged in the raised position. .
In other words, the upward biasing force of the coil spring KSP74 transmitted to the transmission terminal member K737 via the first support portion K725a of the vertical slide member K720 is applied to the center of the rotation tip portion K735b of the arm member K735 (the center of the circular shape). ) toward the center of the fourth support portion K712d of the base member K710 (the center of the circular shape). can be done.
As a result, the second movable device K701 can be maintained in the lowered state without requiring a load to stop the rotation of the drive-side two-layer gear K731 and the transmission-side two-layer gear K733. 1682) can be de-energized while maintaining in the lowered position, the service life of the drive motor KMT71 can be lengthened.

In this case, after being changed to the lowered state by the driving force of the drive motor KMT71, the lowered state can be maintained regardless of the magnitude of the biasing force of the coil spring KSP74, so the biasing force of the coil spring KSP74 is designed. By setting the biasing force of the coil spring KSP74 sufficiently large, sufficient assistance can be obtained, and the driving force required to start driving from the lowered position can be reduced. can.
Figures 1687(a), 1687(b) and 1687(c) are schematic front views of the vertical slide member K720, the followable member K740 and the interlocking member K750. 1687(a) to 1687(c), when the second movable device K701 changes from the effect waiting state to the raised arrangement state, the vertical slide member K720, the followable member K740, and the interlocking member K750 change in arrangement. Schematically illustrated in series.
As shown in FIG. 1687(a), in the waiting state of the second movable device K701, the followable member K740 is attracted to the vertical slide member K720 by the biasing force of the small coil spring KSP77. The followable member K740 also moves integrally with the vertical motion of the slide member K720.
Since the arrangement of the interlocking member K750 is determined by the arrangement relationship between the vertical slide member K720 and the followable member K740, the followable member K740 moves integrally with the vertical movement of the vertical slide member K720. , the interlocking member K750 also operates integrally with the vertical slide member K720. Details of the operating principle of the interlocking member K750 will be described later.

FIG. 1687(b) illustrates a state in which the right receiving portion K745 of the followable member K740 is in contact with the lower surface of the projecting portion K711d of the base member K710 (see FIG. 1685(a)). The arrangement in FIG. 1687(b) is the upper end position of the movement range of the followable member K740. Sexuality collapses, and relative movement will occur.
In FIG. 1687(c), the raised arrangement state of the second mobile device K701 is illustrated (see FIG. 1685(b)). As shown in FIG. 1687(c), in the elevated arrangement state, the vertical slide member K720 moves relative to the followable member K740 compared to the effect standby state. As a result, the small coil spring KSP77 is stretched, and the lateral position where the long hole K724 of the vertical slide member K720 and the oblique long hole K743 of the followable member K740 overlap is changed.
Since the fastening projecting portion K752 of the interlocking member K750 is arranged at the position where the long hole K724 of the vertical slide member K720 and the oblique long hole K743 of the followable member K740 overlap, the vertical slide member K720 is arranged with respect to the followable member K740. move relative to each other, the lateral position of the interlocking member K750 changes. That is, the left and right positions are changed from the inner left and right positions to the outer left and right positions.
In this way, the interlocking member K750 is configured to move in the horizontal direction in conjunction with the upward motion of the second movable device K701. It is possible to improve attention during the upward movement.

When the vertical slide member K720 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 1687(c), the followable member K740 is arranged by the biasing force of the small coil spring KSP77 until the state shown in FIG. 1687(b) is reached. is maintained, and after reaching the state illustrated in FIG. Become. That is, the downward movement of the vertical slide member K720 occurs in the order of Figures 1687(c), 1687(b), and 1687(a).
As described in detail above, in the second movable device K701, even if the arm member K735 rotates within a certain angular range in the middle of the movement range of the arm member K735, the position of the main decorative member K760 is configured to be stable. This makes it easy to move the main decorative member K760 to the intermediate position at high speed and stop it.
In addition, in the second movable device K701, the arm member K735 can be stabilized at the end position by setting the direction of the load toward the rotation axis of the arm member K735 at the end position of the movement range of the arm member K735. can.
Returning to FIG. 1652, description will be made. As illustrated in FIG. 1652, the rear layer side movable device K800 is disposed in the rear case K310 on the rear side of the front layer side movable device K400. Below, the detail of the back layer side movable apparatus K800 is demonstrated. In order to explain the structure first, the illustration of the decoration formed on the third movable device K801 is omitted, and the details of the decoration will be described later.

FIG. 1688 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear layer side movable device K800, and FIG. 1689 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear layer side movable device K800. The rear layer side movable device K800 consists of a third movable device K801 configured to be able to open and close the front side of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIGS. 1654 and 1655), and the third movable device K801 from the rear side. A support member K850 for supporting, an upper front cover member K861 which is disposed on the upper support member K851 of the support member K850 so as to sandwich the third movable device K801 from the front side and is fastened and fixed to the upper support member K851, and the upper support. and an upper rear cover member K864 fastened and fixed to the member K851 from the rear side.
Further, the rear layer side movable device K800 includes a pair of left and right drive motors KMT81 and KMT82, and a gear member rotatably supported by an upper support member K851 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82. A pair of left and right transmission devices K870 arranged between the upper support member K851 and the upper rear cover member K864, and a pair of left and right base end sides that slide in the left and right direction as the transmission devices K870 operate. and a slide member K880.
The support member K850 includes the above-described upper support member K851, a plurality of cylindrical support portions K852 projecting so as to rotatably support the gear group of the transmission device K870, and a base end side slide member K880. A plurality of elongated holes K853 extending in the left-right direction for support, and a pair of left and right upper extending gear teeth K854 and a lower extending gear tooth K854 in which gear teeth are carved so as to extend in the left-right direction on the front side. A gear tooth K855, an end-side support K856 that supports the left and right ends of the metal rods KMB83 and KMB84 of the third movable device K801, and an upper support member K851 sandwiches approximately the middle position of the metal rods KMB83 and KMB84. A plurality of intermediate support members K857 fastened and fixed to the upper support member K851, and a base end side slide member K880 disposed on the back side of the upper support member K851 are arranged at the position of the third movable device K801 in the waiting state for rendering. A pair of left and right detection sensors K858 for detecting that the third movable device K801 is in a pair of detection sensors K858; and a member K859.
Two elongated holes K853 are formed on the right side and one elongated hole K853 is formed on the left side, but they have a common function of supporting the proximal side slide member K880. That is, since the shape of the right base end side slide member K880 differs in the vertical positions of the plurality of columnar projections K882 that are inserted into the long holes K853, two corresponding parallel long holes K853 are formed. , the shape of the left base end side slide member K880 is such that the vertical positions of the plurality of cylindrical projections K882 inserted through the long holes K853 are the same. Both parts K882 are supported.

The upper front cover member K861 has a plurality of columnar portions K862 projecting from the back side. The columnar portions K862 are formed in pairs on the left and right, and each is formed on a straight line extending in the left-right direction.
The upper rear cover member K864 has a guide slot K865 extending in the left-right direction to guide the left-side proximal slide member K880 to move in the left-right direction. In the left base end slide member K880, a retaining screw is fixed to a retainer projection K888 that penetrates from the guide long hole K865 to the rear side, and the screw head of this retainer screw is inserted into the guide long hole K865. is retained by interfering with the
The transmission device K870 includes a drive gear K871 fixed to the rotation shafts of the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82, intermediate gears K872 and K873 to which the rotation of the drive gear K871 is transmitted, and a circumferential gear portion meshing with the intermediate gear K873. and an extended rotating member K874 having K875.
The extending rotating member K874 includes the above-described circumferential gear portion K875 and an extending portion K876 extending radially outward from the center of rotation on the rear side of the circumferential gear portion K875. The extending portion K876 is formed with a columnar protrusion K876a that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the rear side at the extending distal end portion thereof.

In the transmission device K870, when the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 are rotationally driven, the driving force is transmitted from the drive gear K871 to the extended rotary member K874 via the intermediate gears K872 and K873, and the extended portion K876 is rotated. As a result, the cylindrical projection K876a is displaced, and the base-side slide member K880 is displaced in the left-right direction due to the displacement.
The base-side slide member K880 includes a plate-like main body K881, a plurality of cylindrical protrusions K882 guided by the long holes K853 of the support member K850, and a cylindrical protrusion K882 on the center side in the left-right direction. A rotation support portion K883 that is arranged and protrudes forward from the cylindrical projection K882 and rotatably supports the pinion K825 of the third movable device K801, and a shape that extends vertically in the main body portion K881 and is drilled in the front-rear direction. and a detected portion K885 extending downward from the laterally outer end portion and formed so as to be able to enter into the detection groove of the detection sensor K858 of the support member K850.
On the left base end side slide member K880, a screw member is fastened and fixed from the tip to prevent it from slipping off after it is protruded in a columnar shape toward the rear side and inserted into the guide elongated hole K865 of the upper rear cover member K864. Equipped with a retaining protrusion K888.
FIG. 1690 is an exploded front perspective view of the third mobile device K801, and FIG. 1691 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third mobile device K801. 1688 and 1689 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 1690 and 1691 as appropriate.

The third movable device K801 includes a rear opening/closing member K810 guided by a horizontally elongated metal rod KMB83 fixed to an end-side support portion K856 of a support member K850, and a metal rod KMB83. A middle side opening/closing member K820 guided so as to be slidable in the left/right direction by a horizontally elongated metal rod KMB84 fixed to an end side support portion K856 of a support member K850 on the front side thereof, and the middle side opening/closing member K820. A front side opening/closing member K830 supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction on a columnar portion K862 (see FIG. 1689) of an upper front cover member K861 on the front side of K820.
The rear opening/closing member K810 is arranged at a position sandwiching the metal rod KMB83 between a pair of vertically elongated left and right plate-like portions K811 and the upper ends of the plate-like portions K811, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like portions K811. A bearing structure member K813 having a bearing structure formed on the front side and a rack portion K814 having gear teeth engraved on the upper surface of the bearing structure member K813 are meshed with each other to be rotatable on the support portion K826 of the middle opening/closing member K820. Between the supported pinion K815 and the lower support member K859 (see FIG. 1688) of the support member K850 which is fastened and fixed to the lower support member K859, a groove portion extending in the left-right direction for guiding the lower end portion of the plate-like portion K811 is formed. and a groove forming member K818 to form.
The middle opening/closing member K820 is arranged at a position sandwiching the metal rod KMB84 between a pair of vertically long left and right plate-like portions K821 and the upper ends of the plate-like portions K821, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like portions K821. A bearing structure member K823 that forms a bearing structure with the upper end of the plate-like portion K821, and a rack portion K824 that has gear teeth carved on the upper surface of the protruding portion that protrudes from the back side of the plate-like portion K821. and a pinion K825 which is meshed with and rotatably supported by the rotation support portion K883 of the proximal slide member K880.
Further, the middle opening/closing member K820 is cylindrically protruding from the back side of the plate-like portion K821 and rotatably supports the pinion K815 of the rear opening/closing member K810. a support portion K826 for preventing the K815 from coming off; a projecting portion K827 projecting forward from the left and right outer ends of the upper end of the plate-like portion K821 and capable of coming into contact with the front opening/closing member K830 in the left-right direction; A second groove forming member K828 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the groove forming member K818 of the rear opening/closing member K810 and which forms a groove portion extending in the left-right direction for guiding the lower end portion of the plate-like portion K821 between the groove forming member K818 and the groove forming member K818. , provided.

The front opening/closing member K830 has a pair of vertically elongated left and right plate-like portions K831, and a portion extending in the left-right direction on the upper end side of the plate-like portion K831 is perforated in the front-rear direction in a shape elongated in the left-right direction. A long hole K833 that is supported by being inserted into the cylindrical portion K862 (see FIG. 1689) of the upper front cover member K861, and a projecting portion K827 of the middle opening/closing member K820 that is received below the long hole K833. The plate-like portion K831 is formed between the recessed portion K835 that is recessed in the plate-like portion K831 and the second groove-forming member K828 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the second groove-forming member K828 of the inner opening/closing member K820. and a third groove forming member K838 forming a groove extending in the left-right direction for guiding the lower end of the.
The driving force transmission generated in the third movable device K801 from the above configuration is as follows. That is, the amount of lateral movement of the proximal side slide member K880 is transmitted to the plate-like portion K821 of the middle side opening/closing member K820 via the pinion K825, and the amount of movement of the plate-like portion K821 is transmitted to the rear side via the pinion K815. It is transmitted to the plate-like portion K811 of the opening/closing member K810. Movement of the plate-like portion K821 and the plate-like portion K811 is caused by meshing.
Further, the amount of movement of the plate-like portion K821 of the middle side opening/closing member K820 is transmitted to the plate-like portion K831 of the front side opening/closing member K830 by pushing the left and right inner surfaces of the concave portion K835. Movement of the plate-like portion K831 is caused by pushing from the middle opening/closing member K820.
Therefore, the plate-like portion K811 is always interlocked with the movement of the plate-like portion K821. The plate-like portion K831 remains stationary to the extent that it does not move.

Figures 1692(a), 1692(b) and 1692(c) are front views of the upper rear cover member K864, the extended rotating member K874, the base end slide member K880 and the pinion K825. In Figures 1692(a), 1692(b) and 1692(c), examples of the operation of the extended rotating member K874 from the waiting state of the third movable device K801 for presentation are shown in chronological order.
First, as shown in FIG. 1692(a), in the waiting state for rendering of the third movable device K801, the center of the cylindrical projection K876a is on a straight line extending in the horizontal direction passing through the center of rotation of the extended rotating member K874. At the arranged position, the extended rotary member K874 is brought into contact with the upper constituent portion K866 of the upper rear cover member K864 in the rotational direction, and further rotation is prevented.
That is, when the cylindrical projection K876a rotates outward from the center of rotation of the extended rotary member K874, the center of the cylindrical projection K876a extends in the horizontal direction passing through the center of rotation of the extended rotary member K874. It is configured so that it is stopped at a position arranged on a straight line and no further rotation occurs.
When the cylindrical projection K876a rotates inward from the left and right from the state shown in FIG. 1692(a), the left and right positions of the cylindrical projection K876a change. 1692 (b) to move to the interlocking switching state illustrated in FIG. 1692(b). do.

As shown in FIG. 1692(b), in the interlocking switching state of the third movable device K801, the displacement direction of the cylindrical projection K876a of the extended rotating member K874 is along the left-right direction, so that the base end slide member K880 The lateral force transmitted to is maximized.
Further rotation of the extended rotating member K874 from the state illustrated in FIG. 1692(b) changes the left and right positions of the cylindrical protrusion K876a. The base-side slide member K880 having the is interlocked, slides in the left-right direction guided by the long hole K853 (see FIG. 1689) of the support member K850, and shifts to the closed state illustrated in FIG. 1692(c) .
As shown in FIG. 1692(c), in the closed state of the third movable device K801, the center of the cylindrical projection K876a is arranged above the straight line extending in the horizontal direction passing through the center of rotation of the extended rotating member K874. At this position, the extended rotating member K874 is brought into contact with the inclined forming portion K867 of the upper rear cover member K864 in the rotating direction, and further rotation is prevented.
That is, when the cylindrical protrusion K876a rotates leftward and rightwardly inward from the rotation center of the extended rotary member K874, the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a extends in the horizontal direction passing through the rotation center of the extended rotary member K874. It is configured so that it is stopped at a position arranged above the straight line and no further rotation occurs.

As a result, after the third movable device K801 shifts to the closed state, the rotating shaft of the extending rotating member K874 receives the load that is generated laterally outward on the extending rotating member K874 via the proximal side slide member K880. You can reduce the percentage.
That is, in the closed state of the third movable device K801, when the center of the cylindrical projection K876a of the extended rotary member K874 is arranged on a straight line extending in the left-right direction passing through the rotation center of the extended rotary member K874, the base end side Since all of the load generated in the laterally outward direction on the extended rotary member K874 via the slide member K880 is applied to the rotary shaft of the extended rotary member K874, the durability of the extended rotary member K874 may decrease. have a nature.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the third movable device K801 is closed, the center of the cylindrical projection K876a of the extended rotary member K874 is above the straight line extending in the horizontal direction passing through the rotation center of the extended rotary member K874. Therefore, the load generated on the extended rotary member K874 through the base end side slide member K880 in the left-right direction outward has a component received by the rotation shaft of the extended rotary member K874 and a component received by the inclined forming portion K867. Since it is disassembled into two parts, concentration of load can be avoided, and the durability of the extended rotary member K874 can be improved.
The upper component part K866 on the left side in front view and the inclined formation part K867 on the right side in front view are formed so as to protrude from the upper support member K851 (see FIG. 1689) to the rear side. The upper constituent portion K866 on the right side in front view is formed as an upper edge portion of the upper rear cover member K864.

Further, when the third movable device K801 is in the closed state, the straight line connecting the center of the cylindrical projection K876a and the rotation center of the extended rotating member K874 makes an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the straight line extending in the horizontal direction.
Therefore, when the length between the center of the cylindrical protrusion K876a and the rotation center of the extended rotary member K874 is set to 25 mm, the extended rotary member K874 overrotates by 5°, causing the base end side slide member K880 to move in the lateral direction. The amount of displacement returning to the outside is 0.1 mm (25-25 cos (5°)), which is not a distance that can be recognized by the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which the performance effect deteriorates due to the shape portion K811 (see FIG. 1690) returning to the outside in the left-right direction.
Further, if the backlash between the pinion K825 supported by the rotation support portion K883 of the base-side slide member K880 and the upper extended gear tooth K854 and the rack portion K824 is designed to be about 0.1 mm, The lateral displacement of the base-side slide member K880 due to the 5° overrotation of the extended rotary member K874 is contained within the above-mentioned backlash, and the plate-like portion K821 of the middle side opening/closing member K820 having the rack portion K824 and its It is possible to prevent the plate-like portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 interlocking with the plate-like portion K821 from being displaced outward in the left-right direction. Interlocking between the plate-like portion K821 and the plate-like portion K811 will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1693 is a partially enlarged front view of the rear layer side mobile device K800. In FIG. 1693, the illustration of the upper front cover member K861 and the front side opening/closing member K830 is omitted in order to make the internal structure easier to understand, and the plate-like portion K821 of the middle side opening/closing member K820 is shown partially broken. The outer shape of the middle side opening/closing member K820 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The pinion K815 has a large-diameter gear K815a that meshes with the lower extended gear tooth K855 of the support member K850 on the upper side, and a small-diameter gear K815b that meshes with the rack portion K814 of the rear opening/closing member K810 on the lower side. is illustrated.

A method of transmitting driving force will be described with reference to FIG. 1693 . First, the driving force of the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 is transmitted to rotate the extended rotary member K874 of the transmission device K870, thereby causing the base-side slide member K880 to slide in the left-right direction (see FIG. 1692). A pinion K825 centered on the moved rotation support K883 is rotated by meshing with the upper extended gear tooth K854 (when the rotation support K883 moves to the left in FIG. 1693, it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front). be done).
As the pinion K825 rotates, the rack portion K824 meshed on the lower side moves leftward, so the plate-like portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820 moves leftward. At this time, since the number of teeth of the pinion K825 meshing with the upper extended gear tooth K854 is the same as the number of teeth of the pinion K825 meshing with the rack portion K824, the amount of movement of the rotation support portion K883 in the horizontal direction is doubled. The plate-like portion K821 of the side opening/closing member K820 can be moved.
Therefore, the amount of movement of the base-side slide member K880 required to move the plate-like portion K821 by a desired distance can be shortened, so the space required for arranging the base-side slide member K880 can be reduced. .
When the middle side opening/closing member K820 is moved in the left-right direction, the large diameter gear K815a of the pinion K815 supported by the support K826 is rotated by meshing with the lower extension gear K855 (in FIG. 1693, the support K826 is When moving to the left, it is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front).

The rotation of the pinion K815 causes the rack portion K814, which is meshed with the small-diameter gear K815b on the lower side, to move leftward, so that the plate-like portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 moves leftward.
At this time, since the number of teeth of the large-diameter gear K815a is 23, and the number of teeth of the small-diameter gear K815b is 11, the amount of movement is 34/23 times the amount of horizontal movement of the support portion K826. , the plate-like portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 can be moved.
With this configuration, it is possible to transmit the driving force via the proximal side slide member K880 to the middle side opening/closing member K820 instead of the rear side opening/closing member K810 having the largest movement amount.
Here, even if the driving force is transmitted to the rear opening/closing member K810, which moves the largest amount, through the proximal side slide member K880, the opening/closing operation of the third movable device K801 can be executed. Since it is necessary to set the amount of movement of the base-side slide member K880 long in accordance with the amount of movement of the rear opening/closing member K810, the length of the extension rotary member K874 (see FIG. 1692) is required to be excessive. This is a factor that makes it impossible to adopt a transmission mechanism using the rotating member K874.

In this case, even if the rotation speed is the same, the lateral speed changes according to the attitude of the extension rotation member K874 (see FIG. 1692). You will not be able to
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which driving force is transmitted to the middle side opening/closing member K820 via the base end slide member K880, a pinion K815 that slides in the left-right direction is adopted. The amount of movement of the rear opening/closing member K810 is maximized by increasing the amount of movement of the plate-like portion K811 of the rear opening/closing member K810 relative to the amount of movement of the plate-like portion K821 of the middle opening/closing member K820.
As a result, the amount of movement of the base-side slide member K880 can be suppressed while the amount of movement of the plate-like portion K811 is kept large, so that the length of the extended rotating member K874 (see FIG. 1692) does not become excessive. can be prevented, and the extended rotating member K874 can have a unique effect.
Figures 1694, 1695 and 1696 are front views of the rear layer side movable device K800. Figures 1694, 1695 and 1696 show how the state of the third movable device K801 changes from the presentation standby state to the closed state in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 1694, the effect waiting state of the third movable device K801 is illustrated (see FIG. 1654), in FIG. 1695, the interlocking switching state of the third movable device K801 is illustrated, and in FIG. is illustrated (see FIG. 1655). In FIGS. 1694 to 1696, in order to facilitate understanding of interlocking, the arrangement of the projecting portion K827 of the middle opening/closing member K820 and the arrangement of the recessed portion K835 of the front opening/closing member K830 are illustrated by imaginary lines. .
1694 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 1692(a), the state shown in FIG. 1695 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 1692(b), The state illustrated in FIG. 1696 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 1692(c).
As shown in FIG. 1694, when the third movable device K801 is in the presentation standby state, the projecting portion K827 of the middle opening/closing member K820 contacts the left and right outer edges of the recessed portion K835, and the left and right sides of the front opening/closing member K830. Inward movement is restricted.
In the process of moving the plate-shaped portions K821 and K811 to the left and right inner sides (see FIG. 1693), from the effect waiting state illustrated in FIG. 1694 to the interlocked switching state illustrated in FIG. It moves inside the K835 and does not come into contact with the left and right inner edges.

Therefore, no load is transmitted between the middle side opening/closing member K820 and the front side opening/closing member K830 via the projecting portion K827. Therefore, from the state illustrated in FIG. 1694 to the state illustrated in FIG. 1695, the arrangement of the plate-like portion K831 of the front opening/closing member K830 is maintained.
In addition, since no load is transmitted between the middle opening/closing member K820 and the front opening/closing member K830 via the protruding portion K827, the middle opening/closing member K820 and the rear opening/closing member K820 and the rear opening/closing member K820 and the rear opening/closing member K820 and the rear opening/closing member K820 and the rear opening/closing member K820 and the rear opening/closing member K820 from the waiting state shown in FIG. The driving force required to operate the K810 can be reduced.
1694 and the state shown in FIG. 1695 because there is no load transmission between the middle side opening/closing member K820 and the front side opening/closing member K830 via the projecting portion K827. When driving the shaped portions K821 and K811 in a reciprocating manner (intermediate reciprocating drive), the resistance received by the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 (see FIG. 1688) can be reduced, and fatigue accumulated in the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 can be reduced. can be reduced.
In the process in which the plate-shaped portions K821 and K811 move left and right inward (see FIG. 1693), the projecting portion K827 and the recessed portion K835 move from the interlocking switching state shown in FIG. 1695 to the closed state shown in FIG. As the plate-like portions K821 and K811 are moved, the plate-like portion K831 of the front opening/closing member K830 is also moved left and right inward.

In the interlocking switching state illustrated in FIG. 1695, the plate-like portion K831 starts moving, so a driving force exceeding the static friction of the plate-like portion K831 is required. 1692 ( b) see).
As a result, sufficient driving force greater than the static friction of the plate-like portion K831 can be transmitted to the plate-like portion K831, so that the movement speed of the plate-like portions K821 and K811 at the start of interlocking with the plate-like portion K831 is reduced. The amount can be suppressed, and the interlocking between the plate-like portions K821, K811 and the plate-like portion K831 can be smoothly generated.
When the projecting portion K827 moves outward in the left-right direction from the closed state shown in FIG. No driving force is transmitted from the projecting portion K827 to the plate-like portion K831 of the front opening/closing member K830, and the plate-like portion K831 is maintained in the arrangement illustrated in FIG.
Therefore, when starting to move the plate-like portions K821 and K811 outward in the left-right direction from the closed state shown in FIG. It is possible to reduce the driving force of the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 (see FIG. 1688). The same thing can be said when starting to move the plate-like parts K821 and K811 inward in the left-right direction from the effect waiting state illustrated in FIG.

Further, as a result, even if the amount of return movement to the left-right direction outside due to the above-described overrotation of the extended rotary member K874 (see FIG. 1692(c)) cannot be accommodated by the backlash of the gear, the projecting portion K827 Since the movement of the plate-like portion K831 to the outside in the left-right direction can be avoided, the arrangement of the plate-like portion K831 can be maintained.
After changing from the state shown in FIG. 1694 to the state shown in FIG. 1695, it is also possible to drive the extended rotating member K874 to change the direction of rotation, and to drive and control the state to return to FIG. 1694.
In this case, the drive force may be continuously transmitted to the extended rotary member K874 until the state shown in FIG. may be controlled to stop the generation of the driving force immediately.
Even in the latter case, the extension rotary member K874 continues to rotate due to its own weight up to the posture shown in FIG. 1692(b), the extended rotating member K874 can be easily stopped.

1692(b), the extended rotating member K874 is driven in the reverse direction (pulse-like driving force is generated). It is possible to execute an action rendering that goes back and forth between the state and the state illustrated in FIG. 1695 .
As described above, in the third movable device K801, the interlocking type can be changed while the three plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 are interlocked. That is, only the plate-like portions K811 and K821 are interlocked at the start of the operation, and the plate-like portion K831 is also interlocked during the operation. This makes it possible to complicate the motion and improve the presentation effect.
Further, in the third movable device K801, after the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 have been moved to the end of movement, the extended rotating member K874 overrotates, and the load due to the reaction from the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 is increased. It avoids giving everything to the axis of rotation. As a result, the service life of the extended rotating member K874 can be increased.
Furthermore, by suppressing the dimension of the over-rotation of the extended rotary member K874 to the extent that the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 do not move, the effect of the return motion of the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 is reduced ( problems such as gaps occurring between the plate-like portions K811) can be avoided.

Returning to FIG. 1638, description will be made. In the pachinko machine K10 of this embodiment, the display lamps K900 are arranged so as to surround the upper, lower, left and right sides of the glass unit H16 arranged inside the front frame K14.
The display lamps K900 are a horizontally long top lamp K910 formed on the upper side of the glass unit H16, a right side lamp K920 formed vertically on the right side of the glass unit H16, and a vertically long shape formed on the left side of the glass unit H16. and a left side lamp K930.
The display lamp K900 emits light in a function display mode corresponding to the internal state of the pachinko machine K10 when an error occurs in the pachinko machine K10 or when a prize ball is being paid out, or the glass unit Sound lamp control device H113 ( (see FIG. 1637). An example of when the pachinko machine K10 is controlled in the effect display mode will be described below.
Figures 1697(a) to 1697(f) and Figures 1698(a) to 1698(e) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K10. Figures 1697(a) to 1697(f) and Figures 1698(a) to 1698(e) show an example of the effect control executed by the pachinko machine K10 in chronological order.

In FIG. 1697(a), the third symbol display device K81 displays a state in which the third symbols corresponding to the big win are aligned to the left and right (not stopped), indicating a state in which a big win is suggested. In this state, the display lamp K900 emits white light, and the game board K13 emits white light as a whole by being illuminated by LEDs or the like from behind (white light emission is illustrated by the first hatching).
From here, after the performance operation in the operation unit K300 and the third symbol display device K81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot game is started. Details of the effect operation will be described below.
In FIG. 1697(b), the output from the detection sensor K711e (see FIG. 1686(b)) is changed, and the second movable device K710 arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device K81 is in the lowered arrangement state. The state in which the first movable device K401 has changed to the drop position state is illustrated after the audio lamp display device H113 (see FIG. 1637) has determined.
The rotary decorative member K578 of the first movable device K401 has already been rotated in the clockwise direction in front view before the moving device K560 is dropped, and continues to rotate after the first movable device K401 changes to the drop position state. Operation continues.

On the back side of the game area, light emission from the operation unit K300 is suppressed, and the game board 13 appears to be darkened. In the display lamp K900, the light emission mode is controlled so that the player can see rainbow light (rainbow light emission is illustrated by the second hatching). As a result, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight not to the game area but to the inside of the third symbol display device K81 while maintaining the splendor of the pachinko machine K10 as a whole.
In FIG. 1697(c), the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1667) is driven in the positive direction while the movement of the moving device K560 continues to move the moving device K560 to the right, causing the right detection sensor to move. When the output of K556a (see FIG. 1667) changes, the driving direction of the drive motor KMT51 is reversed, the moving device K560 moves leftward, and the output of the left detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1667) changes. Then, the driving direction of the driving motor KMT51 is reversed to the positive direction, the moving device K560 is moved rightward, and when the output of the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667) is changed, the driving of the driving motor KMT51 is stopped. A state of being stopped is illustrated.
At this time, the rotating direction of the rotary decorative member K578 of the moving device K560 is set to the direction of rotating forward to the right when the moving device K560 is moving rightward, and the moving device K560 moves leftward. The direction of rotation is to roll forward toward the left in the state where it is held. As a result, the left-right sliding movement of the moving device K560 and the rotating direction of the rotary decorative member K578 can be matched, and an action presentation with a sense of unity can be executed.
In the electric decoration board K564 (see FIG. 1668) of the moving device K560, the emission colors of the LEDs are designed so that the rotary decoration member K578 emits rainbow colors. It should be noted that not only the illumination board K564, but also the design for making the light from the LEDs visible in rainbow colors is such that the emission colors of the LEDs are determined in advance and the player selects the LEDs that emit light in rainbow colors. Alternatively, each LED may be configured to emit light in a plurality of colors, and the colors may be switched in an order that makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the rainbow colors.

In the third pattern display device K81, a circular rainbow-colored spiral slightly larger than the outer shape of the moving device K560 is displayed at a position corresponding to the position of the moving device K560 on the front layer. That is, the display of the spiral is also moved along with the horizontal movement of the moving device K560. Furthermore, a rainbow-colored cloud is displayed in the entire display area on the rear layer.
On the back side of the game area, light emission from the operation unit K300 is suppressed, and the game board 13 appears to be darkened. In the display lamp K900, the lighting mode is controlled so that the player can see the rainbow-colored light. As a result, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight not to the game area but to the inside of the third symbol display device K81 while maintaining the splendor of the pachinko machine K10 as a whole.
In FIG. 1697(d), the state after the first movable device K401 is changed to the effect waiting state in a state where it is grasped that the moving device K560 is arranged at the center position in the horizontal direction by the output of the center detection sensor K556b. is illustrated.
Until the first movable device K401 is changed to the presentation standby state, the rotating decorative member K578 continues to rotate clockwise in a front view. That is, in the first movable device K401, the long device K540 and the moving device K560 are raised while the rotary decorative member K578 is being rotated.

The first movable device K401 is changed to the effect standby state, and the moving device K560 is hidden by the upper decorative member K330. Light is emitted simultaneously from the internal light emitting board, the light emitting board inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1653), and the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1683) of the second movable device K701. Furthermore, in the third pattern display device K81, the front layer displays the appearance of the male character accumulating strength.
In FIG. 1697(e), the light emission other than the third pattern display device K81 is shown to be extinguished toward the left and right inner sides. That is, the right side lamp K920 and the left side lamp K930 are turned off first, and then the left and right side lamps K910 and left side lamps K930 (see FIG. 1653) are turned off. 1653) and the light emitting part K212 (see FIG. 1642) of the winning unit K200 are extinguished, and finally the left and right inner sides of the top lamp K910 and the left and right light emitting boards inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1653) The illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1683) of the inner side and the second movable device K701 is turned off, and a state is formed in which the pachinko machine K10 is visually recognized darkly except for the third symbol display device K81.
As a result, the player's line of sight can be gradually guided to the central side of the game area, that is, to the central side of the third pattern display device K81, and the expectation for the performance to be executed thereafter can be increased. can. Then, at the timing when the player's line of sight has been guided, the action of releasing the accumulated power of the male character displayed on the third pattern display device K81 is displayed. It is changed from the production standby state to the falling position state.
FIG. 1697(f) shows how the rotation of the rotary decorative member K578 is maintained while the first movable device K401 is changed to the drop position state. At the same time that the first movable device K401 is changed to the drop position state, the pachinko machine K10 is visually recognized brightly as a whole.

That is, the light emitting part K212 (see FIG. 1642) of the winning unit K200, the light emitting board inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1653), the light emitting board inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1653), and the second movable device K701. light is emitted all at once from the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1683). The form of this light may be white light, iridescent light, or an emission form that changes from white light to iridescent light.
Furthermore, in the first movable device K401, in addition to the rotary decorative member K578 being visually recognized in rainbow colors due to the light from the illumination board K564 (see FIG. 1668), the illumination board K552 (see FIG. 1666) emits white light. The decorative member K551 is also visually recognized brightly as a whole by being irradiated with light.
FIG. 1698(a) shows a state in which the moving device K560 of the first movable device K401 rotates the rotary decorative member K578, moves to the right halfway position KR42 (see FIG. 1681(c)), and then stops.
In this state, in the game area and its inner range, only the rotating decorative member K578 is brightly illuminated by the light from the decorative board 564 (see FIG. 1668), and the other decorative boards (the light emitting section K212 of the winning unit K200). 1642), the light-emitting substrate inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1653), the light-emitting substrate inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1653), and the illumination substrate K761a (see FIG. 1683) of the second movable device K701. etc.) are extinguished.

In the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the front layer displays light in a shape that concentrates around the rotating decorative member K578, and the rear layer displays a black background, thereby displaying the rotating decorative member K578. An attention-grabbing production is executed.
FIG. 1698(b) shows a state in which the moving device K560 of the first movable device K401 rotates the rotary decorative member K578, moves to the left halfway position KL43 (see FIG. 1681(d)), and then stops.
In the course of this operation, the third movable device K801 changes from the effect standby state to the closed state in accordance with the change of the display from the black background to the white background in the display area of the third symbol display device K81. As a result, the field of view inside the game area is brightened.
In FIG. 1698(c), when the detection target plate portion K571a (see FIG. 1668) of the first movable device K401 comes out of the detection groove of the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667), the change in the output of the central detection sensor K556b makes a sound A state in which the second movable device K701 is changed from the lowered arrangement state to the effect waiting state when determined by the lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1637) is illustrated.

In this state, the third pattern display device K81 emphasizes the decorations (illustrated as "S" decorations in FIG. 1698(b)) applied to the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 of the third movable device K801. When the display is executed and the display is viewed by the player through the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831, the display is viewed in a different manner from when only the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 are viewed.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1698(c), the player can be made to visually recognize a series of effect displays consisting of a string of characters "SFME" (assumed to be the initials of ScienceFictionMyEnergy). In this embodiment, as an example, a series of displays using a list of Roman characters has been described, but the display is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a list of kana characters or kanji, or a list of illustrations or shapes.
Also, in the process of changing from FIG. 1698(b) to FIG. 1698(c), the light emitting part K212 of the winning unit K200 (see FIG. 1642), the light emitting substrate inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1653), the left decorative member White light is emitted simultaneously from the light-emitting substrate inside K350 (see FIG. 1653) and the illumination substrate K761a (see FIG. 1683) of the second movable device K701. Furthermore, in the first movable device K401, in addition to the rotary decorative member K578 being brightly visible due to the light from the electrical board K564 (see FIG. 1668), white light is emitted from the electrical board K552 (see FIG. 1666). The decorative member K551 is also visually recognized brightly as a whole by being irradiated.
Furthermore, after the change to FIG. 1698(c) (after the second movable device K701 is changed to the effect waiting state and the respective movable devices are stopped), it corresponds to the above decorations applied to the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831. It is displayed in rainbow colors in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. In addition, the light-emitting portion K212 (see FIG. 1642) of the winning unit K200, the light-emitting substrate inside the upper decorative member K330 (see FIG. 1653), the light-emitting substrate inside the left decorative member K350 (see FIG. 1653), and the second movable The light from the decorative board K761a of the device K701 (see FIG. 1683) and the decorative board K564 of the first movable device K401 (see FIG. 1668) causes the pachinko machine K10 to emit light in a rainbow color as a whole.

In this way, by uniformly changing the light emission mode before and after each movable device stops, the player can understand the period during which each movable device is moving and the duration of each movable device. Since it is possible to easily distinguish from after the movement is stopped, it is possible to reduce the game burden on the player.
In FIG. 1698(d), the moving device K560 reaches the left-right central position while the rotary decorative member K578 is rotated while the pachinko machine K10 is kept emitting light to form a rainbow color as a whole. illustrated. The rotation of the rotary decorative member K578 continues even after the moving device K560 reaches the left-right center.
In FIG. 1698(e), the third movable device K801 is changed from the closed state to the presentation standby state as the first mobile device K401 starts to change to the presentation standby state (moves upward). As the state of the third movable device K801 is changed, the display of the third pattern display device K81 shifts from the display emphasizing the decorations applied to the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 to the left and right of the third pattern. You can switch to the aligned display.
That is, the display emphasizing the decoration applied to the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 on the front layer of the third pattern display device K81 is moved so as to follow the movement of the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831. , and after the third pattern is aligned horizontally on the rear layer, it is displayed in a stopped state. That is, as shown in FIG. 1698(e), the stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device K81, and after the occurrence of the big win is indicated, the big win game is started.

The output of the detection sensor K418 (see FIG. 1662) of the first movable device K401 is changed between the display of the third symbol and the stop display, and the lifting device K500 is arranged at the height in the standby state for the effect. It is determined by the audio lamp control device H113 (see FIG. 1637) that the second movable device K701 is controlled to change to the presentation standby state.
In addition, in one example of the effect control, the content to be visually recognized by each mobile device (first mobile device K401, second mobile device K701 and third mobile device K801) and the content to be visually recognized in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 is described as being different, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 so that the player can visually recognize each movable device in the same visual recognition manner as when each movable device is arranged in front of the display area of the third symbol display device K81 The configuration may be such that the shape and pattern of the movable device can be displayed (moving image display, still image display).
If viewed from the front, each movable device is arranged in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and each movable device (first movable device K401, second When the shapes and patterns of the movable device K701 and the third movable device K801) are displayed, the visual appearance can be similar. In this case, even if one of the mobile devices breaks down and does not work, it is possible to minimize the deterioration of the presentation effect by supplementing with the display corresponding to each broken mobile device.
The display mode in which the display corresponding to each movable device (the first movable device K401, the second movable device K701, and the third movable device K801) is displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 is that each movable device fails. It is not limited to what is executed only when For example, there are cases where each movable device is operated in response to the effect to be executed, and where each movable device is not operated and a display corresponding to each movable device is performed on the third symbol display device K81. may occur.

In this case, when each movable device (the first movable device K401, the second movable device K701, and the third movable device K801) is not operated, the illumination of each movable device (the illumination board K564 of the first movable device K401 ( 1668), turning off the light emission of the decorative board K761a (see FIG. 1683)) of the second movable device K701, or hiding it behind the member that serves as a blindfold, so that the player's line of sight is directed to the third direction. It is possible to facilitate guidance to the display corresponding to each movable device performed by the pattern display device K81.
In addition, as a case where the display corresponding to each movable device (first movable device K401, second movable device K701 and third movable device K801) is performed on the third pattern display device K81, when each movable device itself is displayed is not limited to For example, in the first movable device K401, the position corresponding to the rotary decorative member K578 is highlighted, and the position corresponding to the outer side of the rotary decorative member K578 in a front view is displayed, thereby displaying the rotary decorative member K578. You may make it correspond to a movement.
In this case, for example, if the elongated device K540 (see FIG. 1681) is made of a light-transmissive resin material and the display of the third pattern display device K81 is configured to be visible through the elongated device K540, it would be as if: The rotating decorative member K578 can be visually recognized as if it were floating in the display area of the third pattern display device K81.
In this case, if the first movable device K401 fails due to a malfunction, the shape and pattern of the rotary decorative member K578 can be displayed at the position corresponding to the rotary decorative member K578 that has been outlined. In this way, it is possible to display a viewing mode similar to the viewing mode based on the operation of the first movable device K401, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, although there is no problem with the first movable device K401 or the third movable device K801 that are arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 by movement, For the second movable device K701, which is only partially arranged on the side, only the display mode in the arrangement overlapping with the third pattern display device K81 may be set, or the lower edge of the frame of the third pattern display device K81 may be set. Alternatively, the display area may be widened by lowering to a position overlapping the second movable device K701 in the effect waiting state (or the raised arrangement state) in a front view.
In this case, the shape and pattern of the second movable device K701 are displayed at the same position (lower range of the display region) as the possible position of the second movable device K701 in the display region of the third pattern display device K81. By doing so, even if the second movable device K701 is not operated, it can be visually recognized as if the second movable device K701 is operating.
In this case, if the second movable device K701 fails and becomes inoperable, the second movable device K701 is maintained in the lowered state and the illumination board K761a (see FIG. 1683) is turned off. By placing the second movable device K701, the production effect achieved by the operation of the second movable device K701 is supplemented by the display of the third pattern display device K81, and the second movable device K701 is made inconspicuous so that it can be removed. repair work can be omitted.
The 106th embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 1699-1704. In the 105th embodiment, the inside of the recessed portions K60a to K60d formed on the back side of the base plate K60 functions as a space. A light irradiation device K2100 is arranged inside the second forming recess K60b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1699 is a rear view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100 in the 106th embodiment, and FIG. 1700 is a rear perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100. As shown in FIGS. 1699 and 1700, the light irradiating device K2100 has a first formation recess K60a and a second formation recess K60b so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate K2060 on the back side of the area forming the game area. is placed in
As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement position of the operation unit K300 (see FIG. 1640) arranged on the back side of the base plate K2060 from being restricted by the light irradiation device K2100. In other words, regardless of the presence or absence of the light irradiation device K2100, the operation unit K300 can be arranged closer to the base plate K2060.
In addition, since the light irradiation device K2100 is disposed outside the rear region of the game area formed on the front side of the base plate K2060, the visibility behind the game region is reduced by the light irradiation device K2100, It is possible to prevent the line of sight from being blocked. That is, regardless of the presence or absence of the light irradiation device K2100, the player can easily see through the base plate K2060 and visually recognize the action unit K300 (see FIG. 1640) on the back side.
The base plate K2060 includes an outer inclined portion K2060e that constitutes the edge of the recessed portions K60a to K60d on the side of the game area and is located behind the outer shape of the area that forms the game area, and an inner position of the annularly formed game area. , a slanted opening K2060w formed along the entire circumference with a slanted surface whose inner shape expands toward the rear side.

In this embodiment, the shape of the outer inclined portion K2060e on the rear end side of the base plate K2060 is one size smaller than the shape on the front end side (front side) of the concave portions K60a to K60d. The cross-sectional shape of the base plate K2060 is formed so that the angle of inclination with respect to the rear side surface of the base plate K2060 is approximately 45 degrees.
In addition, the inclined opening K2060 has a shape on the rear end side of the base plate K2060 that is slightly larger than the shape on the front end side of the base plate K2060. is formed so that the angle of inclination with respect to the front side surface of is about 45 degrees.
FIG. 1701 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100, and FIG. 1702 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100.
The light irradiating device K2100 includes an electrical board K2110 on which a plurality of light emitting means K2111 such as LEDs are arranged, and a member to which the electrical board K2110 is fixed by fastening. and an intermediate member K2120 fastened and fixed to the plate K2060.

In the light irradiation device K2100, a set of members having a common configuration and a common function are arranged in a left and right pair. Description of the set of K2110 and intermediate member K2120 is omitted.
The front view external shape of the illumination board K2110 is designed to fit in the second formation recess K60b of the base plate K2060, and a plurality of light emitting means K2111 are spaced along an arc shape corresponding to the outer edge of the game area. are spaced apart.
The front view external shape of the intermediate member K2120 is designed to fit in the second forming recess K60b of the base plate K2060, similar to the decorative board K2110. A linear inclined surface K2121 is formed so as to include a region in front of the light emitting means K2111.
The slanted surface K2121 is slanted in a direction in which the diameter of the circular arc increases toward the rear side, and is designed to have an angle of inclination of approximately 45 degrees.

In the present embodiment, the recessed end surfaces of the forming recesses K60a to K60d of the base plate K2060, the outer sloped portion K2060e, the sloped opening K2060w, and the sloped surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120 are textured to form countless unevenness. be.
FIG. 1703 is a partial cross-sectional view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100 taken along line MDCCXC-MDCCXC of FIG. 1699. FIG. FIG. 1703 illustrates a cross-sectional shape taken along a plane that passes through the center of one light emitting means K2111 and perpendicularly intersects the circular arc of the outer shape inclined portion K2060e.
FIG. 1703 also illustrates traveling directions KLD21 to KLD23 traveling through different positions in three stages, which cause differences in the visual recognition modes of light emitted forward from one light emitting means K2111.
As shown in FIG. 1703, of the light emitted forward from one light emitting means K2111, the light passing through the inclined surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120 travels in the travel direction KLD21. It is possible to visually recognize a bright position slightly outside the outer shape inclined portion K2060e corresponding to the rear of the outer edge of the region.

The inclined surface K2121 and the recessed end surface of the second formation recess K60b are textured as described above, and the light is diffused. The light can be visually recognized as linear light that matches the shape of the inclined surface K2121. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize slightly outside the outer edge of the game area brightly.
As shown in FIG. 1703, of the light emitted forward from one light emitting means K2111, the light that is reflected by the inclined surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120 and then refracted by the external inclined portion K2060e travels. Since the game progresses in the direction KLD22, the player can brightly see the position corresponding to the external inclined portion K2060e located behind the outer edge of the game area on the front surface of the base plate K2060.
As described above, the sloping portion K2060e is textured and the light is diffused. The light can be visually recognized as a shape of light. Thereby, the vicinity of the outer edge of the game area can be visually recognized brightly.
As illustrated in FIG. 1703, of the light emitted forward from one light emitting means K2111, after being reflected by the inclined surface K2121 of the intermediate member K2120, the light is transmitted through the external inclined portion K2060e, and passes through the inclined opening. Since the light reflected by K2060w travels in the direction of travel KLD23, the player should place the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1641) at a position corresponding to the edge of the inclined opening K2060w on the front surface of the base plate K2060. position) can be seen brightly.

The slanted opening K2060w is textured as described above, and the light is diffused. The light can be visually recognized as a shape of light. As a result, the outer edge portion of the center frame K86 that defines the game area in the central portion of the game area can be visually recognized brightly.
As shown in FIG. 1703, according to this embodiment, while the electrical board K2110 is arranged outside the game area, the light from the light emitting means K2111 of the electrical board K2110 is emitted slightly outside the outer edge of the game area. , the player can see through the vicinity of the outer edge of the game area and the outer edge of the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1641), so that the base plate K2060 can be seen brightly in a wide range.
By constructing the light-emitting means K2111 so as to make the base plate K2060 brightly visible over a wide range in this way, the installation space for the light-emitting means K2111 can be reduced, so that the size of the electrical board K2110 can be reduced.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1703, the light irradiation device K2100 is positioned within the plate thickness of the base plate K2060 (the rear end surface of the light irradiation device K2100 is flush with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060). By doing so, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the operation unit K300 (see FIG. 1640) arranged on the back side of the base plate K2060. That is, even if the operation unit K300 is arranged in such a manner that it is in close contact with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060, the light irradiation device K2100 can be arranged, and the base plate K2060 can be visually recognized brightly. .

As shown in FIG. 1703, when the light from the light emitting means K2111 travels in the vertical and horizontal directions before passing through the game area, the travel of the light occurs behind the front end surface of the base plate K2060. That is, since the light does not pass through the game area in the range in which the light advances in the vertical and horizontal directions, the light is not blocked by the balls positioned in the game area in the range in which the light advances in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light in the traveling directions KLD21 to KLD23 from changing depending on the arrangement of the balls in the game area. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is blocked by the ball during a pinball game and the brightness of the base plate K2060 is lowered.
Note that the arrangement position of the light irradiation device K2100 is not limited to the first concave formation portion K60a or the second concave formation portion K60b, and may be arranged in the third concave formation portion K60c. In this case, the light from the light emitting means K2111 can enter the downflow path of the ball that has entered the general winning opening K63 (see FIG. 1641). blocked.
The blocking effect of this ball affects how the light traveling toward the center of the game area is seen. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means K2111 and proceeding to the inclined opening K2060w does not reach the inclined opening K2060w when the ball enters the general winning opening K63 and is blocked by the ball.

As a result, the entry of the ball into the general winning opening K63 corresponds to the viewing mode of the slanted opening K2060w, so the player should visually recognize the slanting opening K2060w without visually recognizing the general winning opening K63. , it is possible to ascertain whether or not the ball has entered the general prize-winning hole K63.
In this case, since the inclined opening K2060w is at a position corresponding to the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639) bordering the front opening of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1639), the light is reflected by the inclined opening K2060w. By making the light visible, it is possible to enjoy and visually recognize the display performance in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 while grasping whether or not the ball has entered the general winning hole K63.
In reality, the traveling direction of the light from the light emitting means K2111 can be refracted due to the fact that it is refracted and reflected by the base plate K2060. In order to facilitate understanding, it is described schematically in the up, down, left, and right directions.
FIG. 1704 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine K10. FIG. 1704 shows a visual recognition mode when the base board K2060 and the light irradiation device K2100 are arranged in the pachinko machine K10.

As shown in FIG. 1704, the center frame K86 is irradiated with light from the light irradiation device K2100 arranged on the back side of the base plate K2060 through the inclined opening K2060w. This makes it possible to brightly illuminate the center frame K86.
At this time, the center frame K86 is highlighted by irradiating light from the light irradiation device K2100 in a state where the LEDs arranged on the illumination board and the light emitting board arranged in the operation unit K300 are turned off. , and attention can be drawn to the third pattern display device H81 arranged inside.
Further, since the center frame K86 is arranged on the front side of the upper decorative member K330, light is emitted from the light irradiation means K2100 while the LEDs of the light emitting substrates arranged inside the upper decorative member K330 are turned on. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the upper decorative member K330 that emits light is divided by the light visually recognized along the center frame K86 in a front view.
The hundred seventh embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 1705-1707. In the 105th embodiment, the inside of the recessed portions K60a to K60d formed on the back side of the base plate K60 functions as a space. A light irradiation device K3100 is arranged inside the second forming recess K60b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1705 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K3100 in the 107th embodiment, and FIG. 1706 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K3100.
The light irradiation device K3100 includes an electric board K3110 on which a plurality of light emitting means K3111 such as LEDs are arranged, and a member to which the electric board K3110 is fastened and fixed. and an intermediate member K3120 fastened and fixed to the plate K2060.
In the light irradiation device K3100, a set of members having a common configuration and a common function are arranged in a left and right pair. Description of the set of K3110 and intermediate member K3120 is omitted.
The front view external shape of the illumination board K3110 is designed to fit in the second formation recess K60b of the base plate K2060, and a plurality of light emitting means K3111 are spaced along an arc shape corresponding to the outer edge of the game area. are spaced apart.

The intermediate member K3120 is designed so that the outer shape of the intermediate member K3120 when viewed from the front can be accommodated in the second concave portion K60b of the base plate K2060 like the decorative board K3110. A plurality of openings K3121 formed in a U-shape with the open side facing the center of the shape, and the inner component of the U-shape of the openings K3121 toward the back side toward the U-shaped concave end and a plurality of inclined surfaces K3122 that are formed to be inclined.
The inclined surface K3122 is inclined in a direction in which the interval between the wall of the opening K3121 facing the arc of the intermediate member K3120 on the play area side becomes narrower toward the back side, and the angle of inclination is It is designed to be approximately 45 degrees.
In this embodiment, the recessed end surfaces of the forming recesses K60a to K60d of the base plate K2060, the outer sloped portion K2060e, and the sloped opening K2060w are textured to form countless unevenness.
FIG. 1707 is a partial cross-sectional view of the base plate K2060 and the light irradiation device K3100 along the line corresponding to the MDCCXC-MDCCXC line of FIG. 1699. FIG. FIG. 1707 illustrates a cross-sectional shape taken along a plane that passes through the center of one light emitting means K3111 and perpendicularly intersects the arc of the outer shape inclined portion K2060e.

As shown in FIG. 1707, the light irradiation device K3100 is arranged in the first formation recess K60a and the second formation recess K60b so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate K2060 on the back side of the area forming the game area. It is
FIG. 1707 also illustrates traveling directions KLD31 to KLD33 traveling through different positions in three stages, which cause differences in the visual recognition modes of light emitted forward from one light emitting means K3111.
As shown in FIG. 1707, of the light emitted forward from one light emitting means K3111, the light passing through the inclined surface K3122 of the intermediate member K3120 travels in the travel direction KLD31. It is possible to visually recognize a bright position slightly outside the outer shape inclined portion K2060e corresponding to the rear of the outer edge of the region.
The recessed end surface of the second forming recess K60b is textured as described above, and the light is diffused. suppressed by As a result, the light corresponding to the arrangement of the light emitting means K3111 can be visually recognized as scattered light enlarged to the size of the opening K3121. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize slightly outside the outer edge of the game area brightly.

As illustrated in FIG. 1707, of the light emitted forward from one light emitting means K3111, the light that is reflected by the inclined surface K3122 of the intermediate member K3120 and then refracted by the external inclined portion K2060e travels. Since the game progresses in the direction KLD32, the player can brightly see the position corresponding to the external inclined portion K2060e located behind the outer edge of the game area on the front surface of the base plate K2060.
As described above, the slanted outer portion K2060e is textured, and the light is diffused. The light can be visually recognized as a shape of light. Thereby, the vicinity of the outer edge of the game area can be visually recognized brightly.
As illustrated in FIG. 1707, of the light emitted forward from one light emitting means K3111, after being reflected by the inclined surface K3122 of the intermediate member K3120, it is transmitted through the external inclined portion K2060e, and passes through the inclined opening. Since the light reflected by K2060w travels in the direction of travel KLD33, the player should place the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1641) at a position corresponding to the edge of the inclined opening K2060w on the front surface of the base plate K2060. position) can be seen brightly.
The slanted opening K2060w is textured as described above, and the light is diffused. The light can be visually recognized as a shape of light. As a result, the outer edge portion of the center frame K86 that defines the game area in the central portion of the game area can be visually recognized brightly.

As shown in FIG. 1707, according to this embodiment, while the electrical board K3110 is arranged outside the game area, the light from the light emitting means K3111 of the electrical board K3110 is emitted slightly outside the outer edge of the game area. , the player can see through the vicinity of the outer edge of the game area and the outer edge of the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1641), so that the base plate K2060 can be seen brightly in a wide range.
By constructing the light emitting means K3111 so as to make the base plate K2060 brightly visible over a wide range in this way, the installation space for the light emitting means K3111 can be reduced, and the size of the electrical board K3110 can be reduced.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1707, the light irradiation device K3100 is positioned within the plate thickness of the base plate K2060 (the rear end surface of the light irradiation device K3100 is flush with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060). By doing so, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the operation unit K300 (see FIG. 1640) arranged on the back side of the base plate K2060. That is, even if the operation unit K300 is arranged in such a manner that it is in close contact with the rear end surface of the plate-like portion of the base plate K2060, the light irradiation device K3100 can be arranged, and the base plate K2060 can be visually recognized brightly. .
As shown in FIG. 1707, when the light from the light emitting means K3111 travels in the vertical and horizontal directions before passing through the game area, the travel of the light occurs behind the front end surface of the base plate K2060. That is, since the light does not pass through the game area in the range in which the light advances in the vertical and horizontal directions, the light is not blocked by the balls positioned in the game area in the range in which the light advances in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light in the traveling directions KLD31 to KLD33 from changing depending on the arrangement of the balls in the game area. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is blocked by the ball during a pinball game and the brightness of the base plate K2060 is lowered.
Note that the arrangement position of the light irradiation device K3100 is not limited to the first concave formation portion K60a or the second concave formation portion K60b, and may be arranged in the third concave formation portion K60c. In this case, the light from the light emitting means K3111 can enter the downflow path of the ball that has entered the general winning opening K63 (see FIG. 1641). blocked.
The blocking effect of this ball affects how the light traveling toward the center of the game area looks. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means K3111 and traveling to the inclined opening K2060w does not reach the inclined opening K2060w when the ball enters the general prize winning opening K63 and is blocked by the ball.
As a result, the entry of the ball into the general winning opening K63 corresponds to the viewing mode of the slanted opening K2060w, so the player should visually recognize the slanting opening K2060w without visually recognizing the general winning opening K63. , it is possible to ascertain whether or not the ball has entered the general prize-winning hole K63.

In this case, since the inclined opening K2060w is located at a position corresponding to the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639) bordering the front opening of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1639), the light is reflected by the inclined opening K2060w. By making the light visible, it is possible to enjoy and visually recognize the display effect in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 while grasping whether or not the ball has entered the general winning hole K63.
In reality, the traveling direction of the light from the light emitting means K2111 can be refracted due to the fact that it is refracted and reflected by the base plate K2060. In order to facilitate understanding, it is described schematically in the up, down, left, and right directions.
The 108th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1708-1735. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surface of the rotating decorative member K578 of the moving device K560 is decorated has been described. K4580 is provided in mobile device K4560. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
FIG. 1708 is a front view of the operation unit K4300 in the 108th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1708, in the operation unit K4300, a display device K4580 is provided substantially in the center of the moving device K4560.

The display device K4580 is composed of a small liquid crystal display whose display surface faces the front side, and the inner edge is formed in a substantially circular shape so as to surround the display area of the display device K4580. A rotary decorative member K4578 is provided.
The rotary decorative member K4578 has a substantially rectangular outer shape in a front view, and an opening is formed inside thereof. Frames the display area of device K4580.
A driving motor KMT4061 is arranged on the back side of the moving device K4560, and the driving force of the driving motor KMT is transmitted via a transmission mechanism (not shown), so that the rotary decorative member K4578 can rotate in forward and reverse directions. configured to
The rotary decorative member K4578 has a viewing window portion K4578a opened in the front-rear direction. The viewing window portion K4578a is a substantially fan surrounded by two straight lines radially extending from the rotation center of the rotary decorative member K4578 and two curved lines formed as arcs coaxial with the rotation center of the rotary decorative member K4578. formed into shape.

The viewing window portion K4578a is formed inside the frame portion K4581 surrounding the display area of the display device K4580 (that is, the portion forming the outer edge of the display area of the display device K4580) in front view. Therefore, the display in the display area of the display device K4580 can be viewed through the viewing window portion K4578a.
Figures 1709(a), 1709(b), 1709(c) and 1709(d) are front views of mobile device K4560. FIGS. 1709(a), 1709(b), 1709(c), and 1709(d) show examples of changes in the visual recognition mode of the mobile device K4560 in chronological order.
In FIG. 1709(a), the operation patterns of the rotating decorative member K4578 of the moving device K4560 in the first production control example and the second production control example are illustrated in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 1709(a), in the first production control example, the rotating decorative member K4578 is placed in a state where the viewing window K4578a is arranged above the rotation axis (first from the top is shown). state), the viewing window K4578 is changed to a state in which it is arranged on the right side of the rotation axis by rotating it clockwise by about 90 degrees (the state shown second from the top), and continues to rotate counterclockwise. By rotating about 90 degrees, the viewing window K4578 returns to the state where it is arranged above the rotation axis (corresponding to the first illustrated state from the top), thereby ending the first effect control example. be.
Next, in the second production control example, the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in which the viewing window portion K4578a is arranged above the rotation shaft (the first state shown from the top). By rotating it by degrees, the viewing window K4578 is changed to a state in which it is placed on the left side of the rotation axis (the third state shown from the top), and is then rotated clockwise by about 90 degrees to make it visible. By returning to the state where the window K4578 is arranged above the rotation shaft (corresponding to the state shown in the fourth figure from the top), the second effect control example ends.

In FIG. 1709(a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect control example and the second effect control example were connected and explained, but the operation control of the rotary decorative member K4578 is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to configure a state in which the rotation is repeatedly performed in the first example of effect control or the example of second effect control, or so that the second example of effect control leads to the first example of effect control. A state in which rotation is performed may be configured, or a state in which the first example of effect control and the second example of effect control are alternately and continuously executed may be configured.
FIG. 1709(b) shows the first visual recognition mode of the moving device K4560 in the first production control example and the second production control example. As shown in FIG. 1709(b), in the first visual recognition mode of the first effect control example and the second effect control example, the visual recognition window K4578a is visually recognized in a state arranged on the right side of the rotation axis. Through the window portion K4578, a circular first visual recognition object K4580x displayed from the display device K4580 can be visually recognized.
Furthermore, after the end of the second effect control example, "O GET" is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 on the inner peripheral side of the rotary decorative member K4578. As a result, the player can recognize that some game value (gaming profit) has been obtained through the display area of the display device K4580.
FIG. 1709(c) illustrates the second visual recognition mode of the moving device K4560 in the first production control example and the second production control example. As illustrated in FIG. 1709(c), in the second visual recognition mode of the first effect control example and the second effect control example, the visual recognition window K4578a is visually recognized in a state arranged to the left of the rotation axis. Through the window portion K4578, the circular and triangular second visual object K4580y displayed from the display device K4580 can be visually recognized.

Furthermore, after the end of the second effect control example, the display area of the display device K4580 on the inner peripheral side of the rotary decorative member K4578 displays "O △ GET". As a result, the player can recognize that some game value (gaming profit) has been obtained through the display area of the display device K4580. In addition, the difference in display between "〇 GET" and "〇 △ GET" can remind the player of the difference in game value to be obtained.
FIG. 1709(d) shows the third visual recognition mode of the moving device K4560 in the first production control example and the second production control example. As illustrated in FIG. 1709(d), in the third visual recognition mode of the first production control example and the second production control example, the visual recognition window K4578a is visually recognized in a state arranged on the right side of the rotation axis. Through the window portion K4578, the circular first visual object K4580x displayed from the display device K4580 can be visually recognized, and is displayed through the visual confirmation window portion K4578 in a state where the visual confirmation window portion K4578a is arranged to the left of the rotation axis. A circular and triangular second visual object K4580y displayed from the device K4580 is made visible.
Furthermore, after the end of the second effect control example, the display area of the display device K4580 on the inner peripheral side of the rotary decorative member K4578 displays "〇GET, 〇△GET". As a result, the player can recognize that some game value (gaming profit) has been obtained through the display area of the display device K4580. In addition, the difference in display between "〇 GET" and "〇 △ GET" can remind the player of the difference in game value to be obtained.
A first effect application example in which the movement of the moving device K4560 is controlled by the first effect control example and the second effect control example described above will be described. In this first effect application example, in the jackpot game state, the moving device K4560 is moved to a position visible to the player (see FIG. 1708), and in the first effect control example and the second effect control example, Operation controlled.

In the first effect application example, at the end of each round game in the jackpot game state, the movement of the moving device K4560 is controlled according to the first effect control example and the second effect control example, and the right-hand shot game ball is fired. A first visual target object K4580x is displayed corresponding to the number of game balls entering the second specific winning hole K650a (see FIG. 1639) where game balls that flow relatively to the right tend to enter, and the second It corresponds to the number of game balls that enter the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1639) where game balls that flow down a path relatively to the left are more likely to enter than the game balls that enter the specific winning hole K650a. , the second visual target K4580y is displayed.
Therefore, it is normal for each round game to end when a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls enter the second specific winning hole K650a in each round game. , the first visible object K4580x will be visually recognized as 10 circular shapes, and the display of "〇 GET" (see FIG. 1709 (b)) will also display "〇 x10 GET" or the like is displayed. This allows the player to predict the number of prize balls to be paid out.
On the other hand, depending on the game mode, there are cases where 10 or more game balls are entered, and the round game is terminated due to the passage of time regardless of whether the number of game balls entered is 1 or 2. be. In this case, the first visual object K4580x is displayed in a number corresponding to the number of game balls entered.
In addition, since the opening time of the electric accessory K640a (see FIG. 1639) in each round game is shortened to the extent that the game ball does not enter the game ball, entering the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1639) is basic. However, it is rare that the second visual target K4580y is visually recognized.

On the other hand, even if it is rare, when a game ball enters the second winning hole K640, it is possible to win not only the prize ball but also the lottery of the special symbols even during the round game. . In this embodiment, the first visible object K4580x is displayed as a display corresponding only to the payout of prize balls, and in addition to the payout of prize balls, another benefit (for example, a lottery for special symbols) can be given to the player. By displaying the second visible object K4580y as a display, the profit that can be given to the player is distinguished and notified. As a result, it is possible to reduce the game burden on the player and improve the ability to pay attention to the visually recognized objects K4580x and K4580y.
In addition, in the above-described first effect application example, regardless of the presence or absence of the visible objects K4580x and K4580y to be visually recognized, at the end of each round game, the first effect control example and the second effect control example are applied to the moving device K4560. Although the case where the operation of is controlled has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, an operation may be performed so that the visual objects K4580x and K4580y are visually recognized, and no operation may be performed when the visual objects K4580x and K4580y are not visually recognized (when they are not displayed). That is, for example, when the first visible object K4580x is displayed and the second visible object K4580y is not displayed, only the operation according to the first effect control example is executed, and the second effect control example is executed. You may make it so that the operation|movement by is not performed.
In this case, the length of time during which the rotary decorative member K4578 is operated at the end of each round game can be shortened, so the operating period of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be easily accommodated within the inter-round interval. Further, if the player grasps that the operation according to the second effect control example is not executed, the player can grasp that the second visual recognition object K4580y is not displayed, and that the ball has not entered the second winning hole K640. can also be grasped, the game burden on the player can be reduced compared to the case where it is necessary to visually confirm the second visual object K4580y.

Further, for example, when the first visible object K4580x is not displayed and the second visible object K4580y is displayed, the operation according to the first effect control example is not executed, and the second effect control is performed. It is also possible to cause only the operation according to the example to be executed.
In this case, the length of time during which the rotary decorative member K4578 is operated at the end of each round game can be shortened, so the operating period of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be easily accommodated within the inter-round interval. Further, if the player grasps that the operation according to the first effect control example is not executed, the player notices that there is an abnormal situation in which the ball is not entered into the second specific winning hole K650a even though the round game is in progress. Therefore, it is urged to confirm whether the ball is being shot (whether the ball is supplied, whether the ball is clogged, etc.) and whether the second variable winning device K650 is operating normally. be able to.
Further, for example, when the first visible object K4580x is not displayed and the second visible object K4580y is not displayed, the operation according to the first effect control example is also the operation according to the second effect control example. You may make it finish a round game, without also performing.
In this case, the length of time for which the rotary decorative member K4578 is operated at the end of each round game can be shortened (can be eliminated), so that the operating period of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be easily accommodated within the inter-round interval. Further, if the player grasps that the operation according to the first effect control example is not executed, the player notices that there is an abnormal situation in which the ball is not entered into the second specific winning hole K650a even though the round game is in progress. Therefore, it is urged to confirm whether the ball is being shot (whether the ball is supplied, whether the ball is clogged, etc.) and whether the second variable winning device K650 is operating normally. be able to.

In addition, the case where the first visible object K4580x is not displayed and the second visible object K4580y is not displayed means that the player is aiming at the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a. A situation where the ball is not launched (a situation where the player has stopped playing, a situation where the player dares to shoot the ball with a left-handed shot, etc.) is assumed, so even in such a situation, rotation decoration Even if the member K4578 is rotated, it is not possible to attract the player's attention, so the rotation may not be executed.
Although the position where the first visual object K4580x and the second visual object K4580y are visually recognized is the position to the right or left of the rotation axis of the rotary decorative member K4578, it is not necessarily limited to this. not a thing For example, the first visual object K4580x and the second visual object K4580y are visually recognized at the upstream position rotated upward about the rotational axis of the rotary decorative member K4578 from the position on the right or left side of the rotational axis. Alternatively, the first visual target object K4580x and the second visual target object K4580y also rotate as the visual recognition window portion K4578a moves with the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 from the state visually recognized at the upstream position. It may be configured to move.
It should be noted that the "ΔGET" part of the second visible object K4580y is a notification that implicitly suggests that the lottery for the special symbol can be obtained. Therefore, for example, if a ball enters the second winning hole K640 in a state where a special symbol lottery cannot be obtained by entering a ball (for example, a state in which the number of reserved balls is full), a special symbol lottery cannot be obtained. , it is also possible to display "O GET" instead of "O △ GET".
FIG. 1710 is a partial rear view of the first mobile device K4401 of the front layer side mobile device K4400. In FIG. 1710, the outline of the elongated device K540 (see FIG. 1679) in the waiting state for rendering is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In FIG. 1710, the left upper member K530 is not changed from the arrangement in the waiting state for the effect, and the right upper member K530 is lowered to the lowest end of the movement range, which is illustrated by the solid line. That is, only the right upper member K530 is positioned in the drop position state (see FIGS. 1654 and 1674).
1710 is a state in which the downward displacement of the upper member K530 is restricted by the upper rotating member K476 in the entering state (see FIG. 1671). The state illustrated by the solid line is a state in which the right upper rotary member K476 is retracted and only the right upper member K530 is displaced downward (see FIG. 1674).
The vertical position of the right upper member K530 can have a plurality of variations depending on the arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotating member K430 (see FIGS. 1674, 1762, 1763, and 1765). Therefore, a plurality of variations of the inclination angle of the posture of the elongated device K540 can occur. In this embodiment, the rotation shaft K534 of the upper member K530 on the left side is used as a fulcrum, and the right side of the elongated device K540 can be displaced to the leading end of the rotational movement. The tilt angle of is not limited, and any tilt angle is allowed (less than about 45 degrees from side-to-side orientation).
A rotary decorative member K4578 is rotatably supported by the elongated device K540. The rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 is determined whether the elongated device K540 is at the position in the standby state for rendering (position where downward displacement is restricted by the upper rotary member K476 in the entering state on both the left and right sides), or the right upper rotary member. It is configured to be executable regardless of whether K476 is retracted and the orientation of elongate device K540 is in a tilted position.

As shown by the solid line in FIG. 1710, the upper rotating member K476 from the state in which the posture of the long device K540 is tilted to the state in which the posture of the long device K540 is aligned in the left-right direction as the position in the standby state for rendering. is linked to the operation of the elongate device K540.
The upper member K530 that supports the elongated device K540 can receive a load in the upward direction from the transmission tubular portion K434 of the rotary member K430 via the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1675). The arrangement of the transmission tubular portion K434 corresponds to the state of the surface side of the rotating member K430 (see FIG. 1663).
The upper rotating member K476 rotates (posture change) about the support portion K414 due to the load received by the lower rotating member K471 through the guide groove K436 of the rotating member K430, thereby moving into the advanced state (see FIG. 1672). It changes with the save state (see FIG. 1673). The state (phase) of the guide groove K436 corresponds to the state of the back side of the rotating member K430 (see FIG. 1663).
Therefore, the upper member K530 and the upper rotating member K476 can be interlocked via the rotating member K430. That is, the upper member K530 on the right side illustrated in FIG. 1710 is moved in the upward direction, and based on the upper member K530 passing through the vertical height position corresponding to the upper rotating member K476 (see FIG. 1675), the upper rotating member K530 is rotated. The member K476 is changed from the retracted state to the advanced state (see FIG. 1676).

As a result, the return motion of the elongated device K540 is prevented, and the elongated device K540 is maintained in a laterally aligned posture. In this manner, the elongated device K540 is maintained at the position in the effect standby state.
The upper rotating member K476 is maintained in the entering state not by the driving force, but by maintaining the posture of the lower rotating member K471 due to the shape characteristics of the guide groove K436 of the rotating member K430. That is, the switching protrusion K472 of the lower rotating member K471 is maintained in the large diameter groove K436a.
Therefore, even when the driving force of the drive motors KMT41a and KMT41b (see FIG. 1663) for driving the rotating member K430 is released, the upper rotating member K476 can be maintained in the advanced state.
As a result, power consumption for maintaining the elongated device K540 at the position in the waiting state for presentation can be reduced. Further, even when the power supply of the pachinko machine K4010 is interrupted (sudden power outage or outside business hours of the store), the state of the upper rotating member K476 can be maintained in the entering state. As a result, the arrangement of the elongated device K540 can be stabilized at the position of the waiting state for presentation, and the maintenance work to be performed with the power cut off can be facilitated.

The tilt angle of the posture of the elongate device K540 with respect to the horizontal line is maximized in the state shown in FIG. 1710 (right second tilt posture). This inclination is not limited to the inclination where the right is downward, but by reversing the vertical positions of the left and right upper members K530, it is possible to construct a posture in which the inclination is reversed left and right (second left tilt posture). .
Here, when the slide rack K545 is not used and either the left or right end (the left side in FIG. 1710) of the long device K540 only rotates about the rotary shaft K534 (for example, the slide rack When the K545 and the main body K541 (see FIG. 1666) are integrally molded, the movement range of the moving device K4560 is increased as the orientation of the elongated device K540 is tilted due to the rotational movement of the elongated device K540 about the rotation shaft K534. There is a possibility that the moving device K4560 and the support member K410 will interfere with each other at the left and right ends (the ends on the side of the rotation shaft K534 described above).
In this case, the movement width of the moving device K4560 differs between when the posture of the long device K540 is not tilted and when the posture of the long device K540 is tilted, which may reduce the performance effect. There is
In addition, the terminal position of the movement of the moving device K4560 to the rotation distal end side (right side in FIG. 1710) of the long device K540 becomes closer to the rotation shaft portion K534 (left side in FIG. 1710) as the inclination of the long device K540 increases. ) may also narrow the movement range of the movement device K4560.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1710, when the elongated device K540 is tilted, the slide rack is moved by the movement amount KSDM with respect to the guide projecting portion K544, as shown in FIG. K545 is slid to the right and left. As a result, the lateral arrangement of the accessory movement width KSDF of the moving device K4560 is also adjusted (displaced in the direction away from the rotating shaft portion K534).
As a result, it is possible to avoid interference between the moving device K4560 and the supporting member K410 when the elongated device K540 is tilted. A sufficient movement width can be ensured without protruding from the area on the front side of the display area (see FIG. 1654).
In addition, since the movement end position of the moving device K4560 toward the rotation tip side (the right side in FIG. 1710) of the long device K540 is extended to the rotation tip side, the movement range of the moving device K4560 can be sufficiently secured. can. As a result, regardless of the degree of inclination of the elongated device K540, it is possible to construct an effect that uses a large left-right width of the effect area.
FIG. 1711 is a partial rear view of the first mobile device K4401 of the front layer side mobile device K4400. In FIG. 1711, the outline of elongate device K540 (see FIG. 1680) in a one-sided drop condition is illustrated in phantom lines.

In FIG. 1711, the solid line shows a state in which the right upper member K530 remains unchanged from its one-sided drop state and the left upper member K530 descends to the lowest end of its movement range. That is, only the left upper member K530 is positioned in the drop position state (see FIGS. 1654 and 1674).
In FIG. 1711, the tilt angle of the orientation of elongate device K540 with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the state illustrated in FIG. 1710 (left first tilted orientation). This inclination is not limited to the inclination where the left is downward, but by reversing the vertical positions of the left and right upper members K530, it is possible to construct a posture in which the inclination is left and right reversed (right first inclined posture). .
In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, the right first tilted posture is nothing but the posture in the one-side drop state illustrated by the imaginary line. That is, in the present embodiment, the vertical position of the elongated device K540 in the left first tilted posture differs from that of the elongated device K540 in the right first tilted posture.
In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, the switching device K460 is arranged only on one of the left and right sides (the right side in this embodiment) (see FIG. 1660). Although the arrangement of the elongated device K540 in the tilted posture and the arrangement of the elongated device K540 in the left first tilted posture are configured to be different in vertical arrangement, this is not necessarily the case.

For example, if the switching device K460 is arranged on both the left and right sides and the upper member K530 can be stopped halfway on either the left or right side, the arrangement of the elongate device K540 in the right first tilted posture and the left first tilted posture It is possible to make the vertical position the same as the arrangement of the elongated device K540 in . If the switching device K460 is arranged only on the left side, the vertical relationship between the arrangement of the elongated device K540 in the right first tilted posture and the arrangement of the elongated device K540 in the left first tilted posture is the same as in this embodiment. It is possible to construct a production device that is opposite to the vertical relationship.
In addition, when rapid displacement is not required, such as when falling, regardless of the presence or absence of the switching device K460, the arrangement of the upper member K530 is set to the lower arrangement (the right side (arrow (R side) arrangement of the upper member K530) is enabled by rotation control of the rotary member K430 (see FIG. 1678).
Therefore, depending on the setting of the control of the pair of left and right rotating members K430, the elongated device K540 can be set to the first right tilted posture or the first left tilted posture without changing the vertical arrangement of the elongated device K540. It is also possible to change the vertical arrangement of the K540 to take the first right tilted posture or the first left tilted posture (see FIG. 1711).
Here, without using the slide rack K545, either the left or right end of the long device K540 (the right side (arrow R side) shown in FIG. 1711) only rotates around the rotation shaft K534. (for example, when the slide rack K545 and the main body K541 (see FIG. 1666) are integrally molded), the orientation of the elongated device K540 is tilted due to the rotational movement of the elongated device K540 about the rotary shaft K534. Accordingly, there is a possibility that the moving device K4560 and the support member K410 will interfere with each other at the left and right ends of the movement range of the moving device K4560 (the ends on the rotating shaft K534 side described above).

In this case, the movement width of the moving device K4560 differs between when the posture of the long device K540 is not tilted and when the posture of the long device K540 is tilted, which may reduce the performance effect. There is
In addition, the movement end position of the moving device K4560 to the rotation distal end side of the long device K540 (the left side (arrow L side) shown in FIG. 1711) becomes closer to the horizontal position of the long device K540. Also, the movement device K4560 may interfere with the support member K410, which may narrow the movement range of the movement device K4560.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the slide rack K545 is slidably displaced from the one-sided drop state (see FIG. 1680) until the elongated device K540 changes to the state shown in FIG. . That is, first, the slide rack K545 is slid left and right inwardly by movement amounts KSDa and KSDb (see FIG. 1680) with respect to the guide projecting portion K544 before the elongated device K540 assumes a horizontal posture. 1711, the slide rack K545 is left and right outwardly by the amount of movement KSDa, KSDb (see FIG. 1680) with respect to the guide projecting portion K544. is slid to.
As a result, the horizontal arrangement of the accessory movement width KSDF of the moving device K4560 is also adjusted. That is, as the attitude of the elongated device K540 approaches the horizontal attitude, the accessory movement width KSDF moves closer to the rotation axis K534 (on the right side (arrow R side) illustrated in FIG. 1711) as the rotation axis. configured to be

As a result, when the elongated device K540 is tilted, the moving device K4560 and the support member K410 can be separated from each other and their interference can be avoided. It is possible to ensure a sufficient movement width without protruding from the area between (the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1654)).
In addition, when the attitude of the elongated device K540 approaches the horizontal, the left-right arrangement of the accessory movement width KSDF is moved toward the rotation shaft K534, so that the rotation tip side of the elongated device K540 (the left side illustrated in FIG. 1711 ( It is possible to prevent the arrow L side)) from entering the support member K410 on the rotation tip side. As a result, regardless of whether or not the elongated device K540 is tilted, the horizontal width of the region between the pair of support members K410 (the front side of the display region of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1654)) is largely used. The rendition can be configurable.
In this embodiment, the disposition of the moving device K4560 is controlled by the rotationally driven screw shaft K554 and nut KNT61 (see FIGS. 1666 and 1668), as in the above embodiments. Since the screw shaft K554 and the nut KNT61 constitute a ball screw structure, even if the posture of the elongated device K540 is tilted, it is displaced downward by its own weight (in the direction in which the screw shaft K554 extends, that is, the longitudinal direction of the elongated device K540). direction) is prevented.
That is, when the screw shaft K554 (see FIG. 1666) is rotated by driving the drive motor KMT51, the moving device K4560 is displaced in the direction in which the screw shaft K554 extends (the longitudinal direction of the elongated device K540). is not rotated, the arrangement of the moving device K4560 is prevented from being displaced in the direction in which the screw shaft K554 extends (the longitudinal direction of the long device K540).

Figures 1712(a) to 1712(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010, and Figure 1713 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine K4010. FIG. 1712(a) shows an example of a viewing mode when the elongated device K540 is in the right first inclined posture (see FIG. 1659), and FIG. 1712(b) shows the elongated device K540 in the right second 1712(c) shows an example of a visual recognition mode when the elongated device K540 is in the left second tilted posture (see FIG. 1710). . Note that FIG. 1639 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 1712 .
The state illustrated in FIG. 1712(a) is illustrated as an intermediate state of the first operation pattern of the first movable device K4401. That is, in the first operation pattern of the first movable device K4401, first, from the effect waiting state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1679), the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise, and the elongated device K540 is controlled to assume the right first tilted posture (see FIG. 1680), and the moving device K4560 is slid to the right end of its movable range while the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 continues (see FIG. 1712(a). ).
Furthermore, after that, the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed (counterclockwise), and the moving device K4560 is slid to the left-right center and returned (see FIG. 1680). The first operation pattern is completed by being controlled to raise the right upper member K530 so as to return to the standby state (see FIG. 1679).
In FIG. 1712(a), a plurality of arrow-shaped first rear displays K81a parallel to the tilt of the elongated device K540 in the right first tilted posture are displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the display device K4580. (The first front display K4580a may be a display meaning "Aim for V"). As a result, the player can be notified to shoot a game ball toward the first specific winning opening K65a of the first variable winning device K65 and aim to pass through the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1639).

In addition, the display mode of the display device K4580 and the display mode of the third pattern display device K81 may be interlocked. For example, in a state where the first front display K4580a is displayed on the display device K4580, the first front display K4580a on the display device K4580 disappears and the third symbol display is performed based on the game ball entering the specific region K65c. The display of "V" may be moved to the device K81 (for example, the first front display K4580a may be configured to move from the display device K4580 to the third design display device K81 so that the third design may be displayed). Rendering settings may be made on the display device K81 and the display device K4580 so that the player can visually recognize them).
During execution of the above notification, the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated clockwise. As a result, it becomes possible for the player who has visually recognized the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578 to intuitively grasp the direction in which the game ball flows.
That is, in the situation where the game ball is hit to the right to shoot toward the first variable winning device K65 (see FIG. 1639), the upper side of the rotary decorative member K4578 is moved to the right along the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639). The passing game ball flows down the right side of the rotary decorative member K4578, which can be intuitively grasped by the player in correspondence with the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578, so that the player can visually see the game ball. You can make it easier to follow.
As shown in FIG. 1712(a), by moving the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to the right, the range in which the game ball struck to the right flows down (from the display area of the third symbol display device K81) Since the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 can be brought closer to each other, the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580, as well as the falling game ball, can be easily placed in the player's field of vision at the same time. can.

As a result, the player who visually recognizes the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 can visually confirm that the game ball is being shot without any problem. The playing burden on the player can be reduced as compared with the case where the area and the falling range of the game ball are separated from each other and cannot be visually recognized at the same time.
The mode of continuation and stoppage of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the clockwise rotation may be continued until the counterclockwise rotation is reversed, or the clockwise rotation may occur intermittently.
When the clockwise rotating motion occurs intermittently, the interval between the start of the rotating motion may, for example, be such that the rotating motion is restarted after a certain period of time has passed, or the rotating motion may be restarted, or may correspond to the flow-down mode of the game ball. It is also possible to set the start timing of the rotation operation.
When the start timing of the rotation operation is set in correspondence with the flow-down mode of the game ball, for example, the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639). By doing so, it is possible to match the timing at which the game ball flows down in the vicinity of the rotary decorative member K4578 and the timing at which the rotary decorative member K4578 starts to rotate. Thereby, even if the game ball itself is not visually recognized, by visually recognizing the operation of the rotary decorative member K4578, the downstream position of the game ball can be predicted.

The probability that a right-handed game ball passes through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639) depends on conditions such as the arrangement of nails on the upstream side of the through-gate K67, but all right-handed game balls When passing through, when the game ball flows down the right side of the rotary decorative member K4578, the rotary decorative member K4578 can be rotated without fail.
Also, even if not all of the game balls hit to the right pass through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639) (some of them may leave the through gate K67), the game balls pass through the through gate K67. Triggered by a specific point in time, the rotary decoration member K4578 is intermittently rotated (for example, rotated at intervals of 0.6 seconds) at intervals of ball discharge from the pachinko machine K4010 to pass through the through gate K67. Regardless of whether or not the rotary decoration member K4578 is rotated intermittently in accordance with the timing when the game ball flows down near the through gate K67.
Therefore, regardless of the probability that the game ball hit to the right passes through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639), the timing at which the game ball flows down in the vicinity of the through gate K67 and the timing at which the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated are approximately set. Since they can be matched, the player can predict the downstream position of the game ball by visually recognizing the movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 without visually recognizing the game ball itself.
When the start timing of the rotation operation is set in correspondence with the flow-down mode of the game ball, for example, when the game ball enters the first specific winning hole K65a or the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1639), the rotation The decorative member K4578 may be rotated. In this case, even if the player does not pay attention to the first specific winning opening K65a or the specific area K65c, by visually recognizing the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578, the game ball is placed in the first specific winning opening K65a or the specific area. It is possible to grasp that the ball has entered the K65c.

As a result, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the first specific winning hole K65a or the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1639) without looking away from the display area of the third symbol display device K81. It is possible to reduce the possibility of missing various information displayed on the third symbol display device K81 during the period when the game ball is required to be shot toward the first specific winning hole K65a or the specific area K65c.
In addition, the manner of various notifications displayed on the third pattern display device K81 is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification related to the number of reservations (especially whether or not the reservation is full), an over-winning (occurrence of excess prize ball payout due to a winning of a predetermined number or more), or a notification related to game mode selection. Alternatively, it may be a notification related to the game state after the end of the big win game, or a notification related to the number of rounds or the number of prizes won (or the number of payouts) during the big win game.
The timing at which the moving device K4560 slides leftward from the state shown in FIG. 1712(a) is not limited at all. For example, it may correspond to the timing when the opening period of the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639) ends, or may correspond to the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1639). , may be controlled to slide at a specific timing regardless of the manner of entering the ball.
In particular, when the opening period of the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639) is made to correspond to the timing when the opening period of the moving device K4560 ends, the player who visually recognizes the operation mode of the moving device K4560 will hit right when the moving device K4560 moves. , the moving device K4560 can be made to function as means for notifying that there is a possibility that the number of waste balls can be reduced.

Also, in this case, the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated counterclockwise at the timing when the game ball is not struck to the right. Therefore, the opening period of the first specific winning opening K65a (see FIG. 1639) is given to the player who understands the situation in which the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise and the situation in which the player continues to hit to the right in association with each other. A rotary decoration member K4578 can be used to notify the player not to shoot the game ball rightward until after the end of the game ball.
The state illustrated in FIG. 1712(b) is a state in which the tilt angle of the elongated device K540 with respect to the horizontal is larger than the state illustrated in FIG. 1712(a), and is the second operation pattern of the first movable device K4401. is illustrated as an intermediate state. That is, in the second operation pattern of the first movable device K4401, the long device K540 is first moved from the effect standby state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1679) to a state in which the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated clockwise. is controlled to assume the right second tilted posture (see FIG. 1710), and the moving device K4560 is slid to the right end of the movable range while the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 continues (see FIG. 1712(b). ).
Furthermore, thereafter, the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed (counterclockwise), and the moving device K4560 is slid to the left-right center and returned (see FIG. 1710), after which the first movable device K4401 is rendered. The second operation pattern is completed by being controlled to raise the right upper member K530 so as to return to the standby state (see FIG. 1679).
In FIG. 1712(b), a plurality of arrow-shaped second rear displays K81b parallel to the tilt of the elongated device K540 in the right second tilted posture are displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the display device K4580. , a second front display K4580b representing the Roman letter "R" is displayed.

By increasing the inclination angle of the elongated device K540 with respect to the horizontal as compared to the state shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, it can be guided in an obliquely downward left direction). As a result, the player can be notified to shoot a game ball toward the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639) located diagonally to the lower left of the first specific winning opening K65a.
In this case, since "R" of the second front display K4580b drawn on the display device K4580 can be associated with the round game, the second front display K4580b can be "R1", "R5", etc. in association with the number of rounds. By switching the display to , the degree of progress of the game can be notified by the display of the display device K4580.
Also, from the positional relationship between the second specific winning opening K650a and the second winning opening K640, in the state illustrated in FIG. can also be notified to fire.
In this case, since the "R" of the second front display K4580b drawn on the display device K4580 can be associated with the rush (variable probability game, etc.), it can be associated with the number of remaining lotteries in the variable probability state or the time saving state, and "R100" or By switching the second front display K4580b to "R2" or the like, the progress of the game can be notified by the display of the display device K4580.

During execution of the above notification, the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated clockwise. As a result, it becomes possible for the player who has visually recognized the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578 to intuitively grasp the direction in which the game ball flows.
That is, in the situation where the game ball is shot to the right toward the second winning opening K640 or the first specific winning opening K65a (see FIG. 1639), the upper side of the rotary decorative member K4578 is placed on the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639). The game ball passing rightward along the line flows down the right side of the rotary decorative member K4578. can be made easy for the player to follow.
As shown in FIG. 1712(b), by moving the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to the right side, the range in which the game ball hit to the right flows down (from the display area of the third symbol display device K81) Since the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 can be brought closer to each other, the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580, as well as the falling game ball, can be easily placed in the player's field of vision at the same time. can.
As a result, the player who visually recognizes the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 can visually confirm that the game ball is being shot without any problem. The playing burden on the player can be reduced as compared with the case where the area and the falling range of the game ball are separated from each other and cannot be visually recognized at the same time.

The mode of continuation and stoppage of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the clockwise rotation may be continued until the counterclockwise rotation is reversed, or the clockwise rotation may occur intermittently.
When the clockwise rotating motion occurs intermittently, the interval between the start of the rotating motion may, for example, be such that the rotating motion is restarted after a certain period of time has passed, or the rotating motion may be restarted, or may correspond to the flow-down mode of the game ball. It is also possible to set the start timing of the rotation operation.
When the start timing of the rotation operation is set in correspondence with the flow-down mode of the game ball, for example, the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639). By doing so, it is possible to match the timing at which the game ball flows down in the vicinity of the rotary decorative member K4578 and the timing at which the rotary decorative member K4578 starts to rotate. Thereby, even if the game ball itself is not visually recognized, by visually recognizing the operation of the rotary decorative member K4578, the downstream position of the game ball can be predicted.
The probability that a right-handed game ball passes through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639) depends on conditions such as the arrangement of nails on the upstream side of the through-gate K67, but all right-handed game balls When passing through, when the game ball flows down the right side of the rotary decorative member K4578, the rotary decorative member K4578 can be rotated without fail.

Also, even if not all of the game balls hit to the right pass through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639) (some of them may leave the through gate K67), the game balls pass through the through gate K67. Triggered by a specific point in time, the through gate K67 is played by intermittently rotating the rotary decorative member K4578 (for example, rotating at intervals of 0.6 seconds) at intervals of ball shooting from the pachinko machine K4010. The rotary decoration member K4578 can be rotated intermittently in accordance with the timing when the game ball flows down near the through gate K67 regardless of whether or not the ball has passed through.
Therefore, regardless of the probability that the game ball hit to the right passes through the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639), the timing at which the game ball flows down in the vicinity of the through gate K67 and the timing at which the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated are approximately set. Since they can be matched, the player can predict the downstream position of the game ball by visually recognizing the movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 without visually recognizing the game ball itself.
In addition, when the start timing of the rotation operation is set in correspondence with the flowing state of the game ball, for example, the game ball enters the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639). Based on this, the rotary decorative member K4578 may be rotated. In this case, even if the player does not pay attention to the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a, the game ball can be placed in the second winning opening K640 or the second winning opening K640 by visually recognizing the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578. 2 It is possible to grasp that the ball has entered the special winning hole K650a.
As a result, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the second winning hole K640 or the second specific winning hole K650a (see FIG. 1639) without looking away from the display area of the third symbol display device K81. Therefore, the possibility of missing various information displayed on the third symbol display device K81 during the period required to shoot the game ball toward the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a is reduced. be able to.

In addition, the manner of various notifications displayed on the third pattern display device K81 is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification related to the number of reservations (especially whether or not the reservation is full), an over-winning (occurrence of excess prize ball payout due to a winning of a predetermined number or more), or a notification related to game mode selection. Alternatively, it may be a notification related to the game state after the end of the big win game, or a notification related to the number of rounds or the number of prizes won (or the number of payouts) during the big win game.
The timing at which the moving device K4560 slides leftward from the state shown in FIG. 1712(b) is not limited at all. For example, the second winning opening K640a (see FIG. 1639) may be matched with the timing when the period during which the game ball is likely to enter (period during time reduction or probability change) ends, or second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639) 1639 reference) is opened (the period during the round in the jackpot game or the period during the jackpot game) may correspond to the timing when it ends, or it may slide at a specific timing regardless of the entering ball mode. can be controlled.
In particular, when matching the timing when the period (period during time reduction or probability change) in which the game ball is likely to enter the second winning opening K640a (see FIG. 1639) ends, or the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639) reference) is made to correspond to the timing of the end of the opening period (the period during the round in the jackpot game or the period during the jackpot game), the movement device K4560 is displayed to the player who visually recognizes the operation mode of the movement device K4560. The moving device K4560 can be made to function as a means for notifying that there is a possibility that the number of wasted balls can be reduced by finishing hitting to the right when moving.
Also, in this case, the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated counterclockwise at the timing when the game ball is not struck to the right. Therefore, the situation in which the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise and the situation in which the game ball passes through the upper position of the rotary decorative member K4578 and flows on the right side of the rotary decorative member K4578 (the situation in which the player continues hitting to the right) are grasped in association with each other. For the player who is playing, a notification is provided to prevent the right-handed shooting of the game ball until after the opening period of the second winning opening K640a or the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639) is over. member K4578.

Although the case where the first rear display K81a and the second rear display K81b corresponding to the inclination of the elongated device K540 are displayed on the third pattern display device K81 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display in the third symbol display device K81 may be configured so that the display area itself of the third symbol display device K81 can be seen by the player as if it were tilted. That is, the display by the third pattern display device K81 is tilted as a whole. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect as if the posture of the elongated device K540 is tilted and the posture of the third pattern display device K81 is also tilted.
In the above description of FIGS. 1712(a) and 1712(b), the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern are independent operation patterns, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, from the state illustrated in FIG. 1712(a), the elongated device K540 is not lifted, but further dropped by energizing the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 (see FIG. 1670(b)). 1712(b), and then the right side of the elongated device K540 is lifted to return to the presentation standby state (see FIG. 1679).
This operation pattern is, for example, a set of game flows in a right-handed game, after the game ball enters the first specific winning hole K65a and passes through the specific area K65c (see FIG. 1639), the second When the period during which the game ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639) or the period during which the game ball is likely to enter the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1639) is started. , is particularly effective.
As a set of the flow of this game, for example, a special game is started based on the game ball entering the specific area K65c, and the game flow that the second specific winning opening K650a is opened, and the special game The flow of the game that the second winning opening K640 is opened after the end of the period (the game that becomes a time-saving state after the end of the special game) is assumed.

In this case, in the flow of a set of games in the above-described right-handed game, the point of interest as the winning point of the game ball changes (that is, from the vicinity of the first specific winning hole K65a and the specific area K65c to the second specific winning hole K650a and 1712(a) to the state shown in FIG. 1712(b) at the timing of this change. It is possible to notify in real time that the part has changed. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player fails to respond to changes in the spot of interest and misses the prize winning of the game ball.
The state illustrated in FIG. 1712(c) is a state in which the inclination of the elongated device K540 is symmetrical to the state illustrated in FIG. It is illustrated as an intermediate state. That is, in the third operation pattern of the first movable device K4401, first, from the effect waiting state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1679), the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates counterclockwise, and the long device K540 is controlled to take the left second tilted posture (see FIG. 1712(c)), and the movement device K4560 is slid to the left end of the movable range while the rotary decorative member K4578 continues to rotate (see FIG. 1712). (c)).
Furthermore, after that, the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed (clockwise), and the moving device K4560 is slid to the left-right center and returned, after which the first movable device K4401 is in the waiting state for rendering (see FIG. 1679). ), the third operation pattern is completed by controlling the left upper member K530 to rise.
In FIG. 1712(c), one large arrow-shaped third back surface display K81c pointing to the left in the horizontal direction is displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the Chinese character "left" is displayed on the display device K4580. A third front display K4580c is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified to shoot the game ball with a left-hand shot.

During execution of this notification, the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated counterclockwise. As a result, it becomes possible for the player who has visually recognized the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578 to intuitively grasp the direction in which the game ball flows.
That is, in a situation where the game ball is hit to the left so as to shoot toward the general winning hole K63 or the first winning hole K64 (see FIG. 1639) arranged on the left side of the game area, the upper side of the rotary decorative member K4578 is placed in the center frame. To allow the player to intuitively understand that the game ball that has flowed leftward along K86 (see FIG. 1639) flows down the left side of the rotary decorative member K4578 in correspondence with the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578. Therefore, the player can easily follow the game ball with his or her eyes.
As shown in FIG. 1712(c), by moving the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 to the left, the range in which the left-handed game ball flows down (from the display area of the third symbol display device K81) Since the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 can be brought closer to each other, the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580, and the falling game ball can be easily placed in the player's field of vision at the same time. can.
As a result, the player who visually recognizes the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display device K4580 can visually confirm that the game ball is being shot without any problem. The playing burden on the player can be reduced as compared with the case where the area and the game ball flowing range are separated from each other and cannot be visually recognized at the same time.

The mode of continuing and stopping the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the counterclockwise rotation may be continued until the clockwise rotation is reversed, or the counterclockwise rotation may occur intermittently.
When the counterclockwise rotating motion occurs intermittently, the interval between the start of the rotating motion may be set so that the rotating motion is restarted after a certain period of time, for example. The start timing of the rotation operation may be set correspondingly.
An example in which the start timing of the rotating motion is set in correspondence with the flow-down mode of the game ball will be described. For example, a detection device capable of detecting a game ball passing between the inner rail K61 and the outer rail K62 is provided, and a game ball entering the game area is moved to the moving device K4560 in the state illustrated in FIG. 1712(c). Predetermine the rough necessary flow down period until passing the left of .
In this case, after the passing of the game ball is detected by the above-described detection device, by starting the rotating operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 at a timing delayed by the above-described necessary flow-down period, the game ball is moved to the moving device K4560. The timing of passing left can be matched with the timing of the rotary decorative member K4578 starting to rotate. Thereby, even if the game ball itself is not visually recognized, the movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be visually recognized to predict the flow-down position of the game ball.

In addition, in the case where the start timing of the rotation operation is set corresponding to the flow-down mode of the game ball, for example, based on the game ball entering the first winning hole K64 or the general winning hole K63 (see FIG. 1639). , the rotary decorative member K4578 may be rotated. In this case, even if the player does not gaze at the first winning opening K64 or the general winning opening K63, the game ball can be seen in the first winning opening K64 or the general winning opening by visually recognizing the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578. It is possible to grasp that the ball has entered K63.
As a result, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the first winning hole K64 or the general winning hole K63 (see FIG. 1639) without looking away from the display area of the third symbol display device K81. It is possible to reduce the possibility of missing various information displayed on the third symbol display device K81 during the period when the game balls are required to be shot toward the first winning opening K64 or the general winning opening K63.
In addition, the manner of various notifications displayed on the third pattern display device K81 is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification related to the number of reservations (especially whether or not the reservation is full), an over-winning (occurrence of excess prize ball payout due to a winning of a predetermined number or more), or a notification related to game mode selection. Alternatively, it may be a notification related to the game state after the end of the big win game, or a notification related to the number of rounds or the number of prizes won (or the number of payouts) during the big win game.
The timing at which the moving device K4560 slides to the right from the state illustrated in FIG. 1712(c) is not limited at all. For example, it may correspond to the timing when several balls (one or more) enter the first winning hole K64 (Fig. 1639), or the first winning hole K64 is reserved. It may correspond to the timing when several game balls are accumulated, or may correspond to the timing when several game balls pass through the out port 71 (see FIG. 1639) (in this case, the through gate K67 is used to pass the game balls). It may be assumed that the passage is not detected, or may be unnecessary), or the slide movement may be controlled at a specific timing regardless of the manner of entering the ball.

Although a case has been described in which the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated when the moving device K4560 is slid and the direction of rotation corresponds to the direction of sliding movement, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Since the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 and the sliding movement of the moving device K4560 are performed by independent driving devices, the correspondence between the operation modes depends on the control program.
For example, in the third operation pattern shown in FIG. 1712(c), the rotation direction of the rotary decorative member K4578 when the moving device K4560 slides rightward as an operation on the way back to the effect standby state is set to the counterclockwise direction. You can keep it (or keep it). As a result, the player can be encouraged to continue the left-handed game by the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 while executing the action of returning the moving device K4560 to the arrangement in the waiting state for effect (see FIG. 1679).
Further, for example, in the third operation pattern shown in FIG. 1712(c), the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 in the case where the moving device K4560 slides to the right as an operation on the way back to the effect waiting state is stopped. Also good. As a result, the moving device K4560 is returned to the arrangement in the waiting state for the effect (see FIG. 1679), and the relationship between the state of the rotary decorative member K4578 and the flowing direction of the game ball is cut off. can be done.
Further, for example, control to stop the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be executed when a big win occurs in the special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole K64 or the second winning hole K640. You can If a big hit occurs in the lottery of special symbols, the reserve of the special symbols does not decrease until the announcement of the big win, so after the reserve is full, how many game balls are placed in the first winning hole K64 or the second winning hole K640? A lottery for a special pattern cannot be obtained even if the ball is made to enter, and a situation can arise in which waste balls are likely to occur.

Therefore, it is often advantageous for the player to immediately stop shooting the balls and wait for the big win to be announced. That is, the state in which the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is stopped and the state in which the game ball does not flow down to either the left or right side of the rotary decorative member K4578 are associated with each other and notified, thereby stopping the shooting of the game balls to the player. can be directed to
Furthermore, in a situation where the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is once stopped, when a game ball enters the first winning hole K64 or the second winning hole K640, the rotary decorative member K4578 is made to restart the rotation operation. You can do it. As a result, when the firing is continued regardless of the player's intention (for example, the rotation position of the operation handle H51 (see FIGS. 1628 and 1638) is not returned and the firing stop switch H51b (see FIG. 1628) is pressed. Even if the pressing of the firing stop switch H51b is not sufficient when performing an operation to stop the firing of the ball, the firing can be continued by making the player visually recognize the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578. It is possible to make the player aware of the presence. A player who notices this can stop the shooting of balls by improving the operation (for example, pressing the firing stop switch H51b strongly), thereby reducing the number of shots of useless balls.
As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance and wait for the timing of the notification of the big win without causing the game ball to flow down to either the left or right side of the rotary decorative member K4578. Therefore, if the player can confirm that the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 has stopped, the game player can understand that by stopping the shooting of game balls, the number of wasted balls can be reduced and that a big win can be obtained. be able to. Therefore, the player's attention to the rotating decorative member K4578 can be improved.
Note that the display modes illustrated in FIGS. 1712(a) to 1712(c) are merely examples, and are not limited in any way. For example, the arrow on the second back display K81b shown in FIG. 1712(b) is horizontally reversed and adopted for display on the third pattern display device K81 in the state shown in FIG. 1712(c). 1712(c), the arrow of the third rear surface display K81c shown in FIG. It may be adopted for the display of the device K81.

Also, in FIGS. 1712(a) to 1712(c), the third symbol display device K81 explained the case where the arrow is displayed in a downwardly inclined posture, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrow may be displayed in an upward-sloping posture.
By adopting this display (for example, display of a shape in which the second rear display K81b is inverted upside down) in the left second tilted posture shown in FIG. can be visually recognized as an arrow directed to the upper right lamp K940 disposed in the upper right corner.
The upper right lamp K940, for example, is normally turned off, but when an event that benefits the player occurs, such as when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, or when balls are paid out, etc. control to light up or blink based on the For this reason, the light-emitting portion is of great interest to the player, but in a normal game mode in which attention is concentrated on the display area of the third pattern display device K81, it is positioned outside the field of view (upper right of the front frame K14) so as to be difficult to fit in the field of view. corner), there is a possibility that the player will not notice that the upper right lamp K940 has been turned on or blinked unless there is an opportunity.
1712(c). By adopting the inclined posture, the player's line of sight can be guided toward the upper right lamp K940 provided on the front frame K14 by the display on the third symbol display device K81.

As a result, the player's line of sight can be guided to the upper right lamp K940 disposed on the front frame K14 outside the display area of the third symbol display device K81, so that the third symbol display device K81. As compared with the case where the player keeps looking at the display area of , it is possible to reduce eye fatigue of the player.
In this case, the player's field of vision is expanded from a narrow range that partially fits the display area and the game area of the third symbol display device K81 to a range that includes the front frame K14. eye position can be retracted. As a result, it is possible to reduce eye fatigue of the player.
In addition, it is not necessary to place the display for guiding the line of sight to the upper right lamp K940 in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. For example, among the LEDs arranged inside the upper decorative member K330, light streaks (bands) are formed by lighting the LEDs in order from the LED on the side away from the upper right lamp K940 to the LED on the side closer to the upper right lamp K940. However, the line of sight may be guided to the upper right lamp K940 side.
A similar light emission method may be performed by an LED that emits light from the rear to the front of the game area, or an indicator lamp K900 that is arranged outside the glass unit H16. As a result, it is possible to guide the line of sight to the upper right lamp K940 over a wide range.

Although the case where the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates when the elongated device K540 is moved has been described from the viewpoint of the presentation effect, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elongated device K540 may be moved while the rotary decorative member K4578 is not rotating. In this case, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the rotary decorative member K4578 is damaged when the elongated device K540 is dropped.
Further, the moving device K4560 may be configured to slide while the rotary decorative member K4578 is stopped. In this case, variations can be provided in the sliding movement of the moving device K4560, so the performance effect of the moving device K4560 can be improved.
Also, the settings for controlling the rotational drive of the rotary decorative member K4578 are not limited to those described above. For example, regardless of the display on the display device K4580 or the movement direction of the moving device K4560, control may be performed so that the rotation in a certain direction is continued from power-on, or the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is equally spaced. may be controlled to be reversed.
Further, it may be configured so that the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated corresponding to the falling of the game ball. In this case, by configuring the rotating decorative member K4578 to rotate when the game ball flows down a specific range, the player can see the rotating decorative member K4578 while the game ball flows down the specific range. Since it is possible to grasp what has been done, it is possible to reduce the game burden.

In addition, when the game ball flows down a specific range, a sensor may be provided to detect the passage of the game ball. may be configured to cause rotation of In the latter case, the rotational force of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be generated by transmitting the weight of the game ball. A configuration in which the lock is released and the rotary decorative member K4578 is allowed to rotate may also be used.
In particular, since the outer shape of the square-shaped rotary decorative member K4578 is formed with a portion far from and a portion close to the rotation shaft, it becomes a catch and can facilitate transmission of the load in the rotation direction.
In addition, based on the detection of the passage of game balls in the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639), the display area of the display device K4580 emits light, or the sound output device H226 such as a speaker (see FIG. 1637) ) may be controlled to output a winning voice.
When the display area of the display device K4580 emits light, the setting of the light emission mode is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, regardless of which of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) the passage of the game ball is detected, the entire range of the display area of the display device K4580 may be caused to emit light. It may be set to correspond to the position.

In the former case, the player who notices the light emission in the display area of the display device K4580 can grasp which of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) the game ball has passed through only from the light emission mode. Therefore, it is possible to shift the player's attention to the position of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a. As a result, the player's line of sight can be guided from the display area of the display device K4580 to the game area side.
In the latter case, for example, when the passage of the game ball is detected in the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639) arranged on the relatively right side, the right side of the display area of the display device K4580 is illuminated, Left side of the display area of the display device K4580 when the passage of the game ball is detected in the second specific winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639) arranged on the left side of the first specific winning opening K65a You may make it light-emit part. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player who sees the light emission mode (light emission range) of the display device K4580 to predict where the game ball has passed.
In addition, the game balls passing through the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) may be treated uniformly, or the game balls may be treated separately, and the presence or absence of light emission and sound output may be determined according to the distinction. You may make it switch presence/absence.
For example, a game ball that passes through the first specific winning hole K65a or the second specific winning hole K650a (see FIG. 1639) is a game ball that fits in the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the round game in the special game state, It may be configured so that it can be distinguished by a game ball that passes beyond it (a game ball with an over-winning prize). It should be noted that the winning of a specified number (10) in the round game of the jackpot game is to end the opening of the variable means (attacker) movably controlled as the round game without terminating it based on the passage of time. Therefore, it becomes a different form of the end condition in the 61st control example described later, and the process of specifying the over-winning game ball is the execution condition for executing the additional effect after the end condition in the 61st control example described later is satisfied. This is another form of processing for determining whether or not is established.

In this case, when the game balls pass within the stipulated number, the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated and the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) is not output for winning, while the stipulated number is When the game ball has passed beyond, the display area of the display device K4580 may be illuminated, and the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) may be controlled to output winning audio. Incidentally, the various effects executed when it is detected that the game ball has won an over prize are different forms of the additional effects in the 61st control example described later.
In the case of this control mode, when the player confirms the light emission of the display area of the display device K4580 or the output of winning voice from the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number Passing through the first specific prize winning port K65a or the second specific prize winning port K650a (see FIG. 1639) can simultaneously be understood that the payout of prize balls can be obtained, so that the interest in the game can be improved. be able to.
Alternatively, when the game balls pass within the specified number, the display area of the display device K4580 is made to emit light, and the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) outputs the winning sound, while the game exceeding the specified number When the ball passes, control may be performed so that the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated and the sound for winning a prize is not output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637).
In the case of this control mode, even if the player confirms the light emission of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of winning voice from the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the passage of is occurring in the first specific winning opening K65a or the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639). Therefore, even if the prize balls paid out in the special game state vary due to the occurrence of over-winning balls, the variation can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player's dissatisfaction is accumulated. can be easily avoided.

For example, game balls passing through the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1639) are selected by winning the second winning port K640. It may be possible to distinguish between the game balls that have passed and the game balls that have passed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is full (overflow game balls).
In this case, when the game ball passes when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is full, the display area of the display device K4580 is not illuminated, and the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) for winning a prize is displayed. While not outputting the sound of, when the game ball passes when there is a vacancy in the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the display area of the display device K4580 is made to emit light, and the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) wins. You may control so that the voice for the purpose may be output.
In the case of this control mode, by making the player confirm the light emission of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of winning voice from the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1639) is displayed. ), it is possible for the player to grasp that the lottery for the special symbol 2 has been obtained by passing the game ball.
Alternatively, when the game ball passes when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is full, the display area of the display device K4580 is made to emit light, and the voice for winning is output from the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637). While outputting, when the game ball passes when there is a vacancy in the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the display area of the display device K4580 is not emitted, and the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) for winning It may be controlled so as not to output sound.

In the case of this control mode, by making the player confirm the light emission of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of winning voice from the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), the second winning port K640 (see FIG. 1639) is displayed. ), the player can be made aware that the lottery for the special symbol 2 is not obtained even though the game ball has passed.
In this case, the player is asked whether to continue shooting the balls (if the shooting of the balls continues, as soon as there is a vacancy in the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2, the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1639) Since there is a possibility of winning the special symbol 2 lottery by causing a ball to enter, the speed of the game increases, but the number of out balls tends to increase), until there is a vacancy in the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 It is useful for selecting a game mode, whether to temporarily suspend ball shooting (if ball shooting is stopped, out balls will not be generated, but the interval between ball entries is likely to be longer, and the speed of the game is likely to decrease). Information can be provided, and the game burden on the player can be reduced.
The light emission of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of the winning audio from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) do not necessarily have to be generated as a set. For example, when the display area of the display device K4580 emits light, but the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) does not output winning audio, or when the display area of the display device K4580 does not emit light and audio is output. A case may be set such that only a winning voice is output from the device H226 (see FIG. 1637).
Only when the display area of the display device K4580 emits light and the voice for winning is output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) by passing through the winning ports K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1639). It is not something that can be done. For example, passing through the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a may cause the corresponding LEDs to emit light.

That is, for example, when a game ball enters the second winning hole K640 or the second specific winning hole K650a (see FIG. 1639), light is emitted from the light emitting unit K212 (see FIG. 1642) that emits light from behind. You can let it be. As a result, it is possible to associate the brightly-visible spot with the ball-entering spot, so that the player can easily predict the profit to be obtained by entering the game ball from the brightly-visible spot.
Also, when the display of the display device K4580 and the winning unit K200 to be brightened are brought closer (see FIG. 1712(b)), the display on the display device K4580 and the design (“E” symbol) on the front side of the winning unit K200. can be visually recognized in a series. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize in a manner different from the manner in which it is visually recognized only by the display device K4580 and the manner in which it is visually recognized only by the winning unit K200, so that the variation of effects can be increased.
As described above, the timing of the light emission of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of the winning audio from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) are the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1639). It is not limited to the case where the game ball passes through, but various aspects are exemplified.
For example, opening/closing plates arranged on the upstream side of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1639) (for example, opening/closing plate K65b for opening/closing the winning opening K65a, electric accessory K640a for opening/closing the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1639) 1639), or the second electric accessory K250 (see FIG. 1644) that opens and closes the second specific winning opening K650a) is an open state in which game balls can flow down to the corresponding winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a. In this case, light is emitted in the display area of the display device K4580, and while a specific sound is output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), the game balls flow down to the corresponding winning openings K65a, K640, K650a. It may be controlled so that no light is emitted in the display area of the display device K4580 and a specific sound is not output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) when the closed state is set.

In this case, the player is made to confirm the lighting mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637). It is possible to make it easy to discriminate the period during which the game ball is stopped and the period during which the launch of the game ball is stopped.
That is, when light is emitted in the display area of the display device K4580 and a specific sound is output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), the player shoots the game ball while the display area of the display device K4580 is displayed. , and no specific sound is output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), by stopping the shooting of the game balls, the shot balls will pass through the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639). ), it is possible to reduce the possibility of the ball being ejected from the game area without entering any of the above, and it is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls in the game.
Alternatively, opening/closing plates arranged upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (for example, opening/closing plate K65b for opening/closing the winning opening K65a, electric accessory K640a for opening/closing the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1639), When any of the second electric accessories K250 (see FIG. 1644) that opens and closes the 2 specific winning openings K650a is in an open state in which game balls can flow down to the corresponding winning openings K65a, K640, K650a , a closed state in which no light is emitted in the display area of the display device K4580, and a specific sound is not output from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1637), while making it difficult for game balls to flow down to the corresponding winning openings K65a, K640, K650a. In this case, the display area of the display device K4580 may emit light and a specific sound may be output from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637).
Even in this case, the presence or absence of light emission or the presence or absence of sound output can be associated with the entry of a ball into any of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639). , the light emitting mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) are confirmed, so that the period during which the game ball is shot to the right and the launch of the game ball are confirmed. can be easily distinguished from the period during which the is stopped.

Opening/closing plates arranged upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (for example, opening/closing plate K65b for opening/closing the winning opening K65a, electric accessory K640a for opening/closing the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1639), Any of the second electric accessories K250 (see FIG. 1644) that opens and closes the 2 specific prize winning openings K650a is currently in an open state or a closed state, the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580, and the sound Various control modes are exemplified without being limited to the control of switching the output mode of a specific sound from the output device H226 (see FIG. 1637). Note that the switching of the audio output mode may be a change while the sound continues to be generated, or a change between a state in which the sound is generated and a state in which the sound is silenced (mute).
For example, from a point before the state of the opening/closing plate is switched, control is performed to switch the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637). You can
In this case, for example, several seconds before the opening/closing plate arranged on the upstream side of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) is switched from the closed state to the open state, the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 , the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) may be switched.
In this case, by using the switching time as a guideline for starting the shooting of the game ball, the winning opening K65a is likely to occur when the ball is shot after the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1639) are in an open state. , K640, K650a are in an open state, the winning timing of the first game ball is delayed by the movement time (time lag) until the shot ball reaches the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a. can do.

In particular, the timing at which the light emitting mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) are switched are more important than the timing at which the opening/closing plate is switched from the closed state to the open state. , the time point before the ball reaches the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) by the movement time (time lag). In addition, the opening/closing plate arranged upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a can be switched to the open state, so that the game can proceed smoothly.
In addition, for example, several seconds before the opening/closing plate arranged on the upstream side of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1639) is switched from the open state to the closed state, the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the sound The output mode of a specific sound from the output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) may be switched.
In this case, by using the switching time as a guideline for stopping the shooting of the game balls, it is possible to prevent the shooting of the balls from stopping after the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) are closed. In spite of the fact that all of the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a are in a closed state, the ball that has already been launched flows down the right side of the third symbol display device K81, and any of the winning openings K65a , K640 and K650a, and the ball is discharged from the out hole K71 (see FIG. 1639).
In particular, the timing at which the light emission mode in the display area of the display device K4580 and the output mode of a specific sound from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) are switched are more important than the timing at which the opening/closing plate is switched from the open state to the closed state. , the point in time before the ball reaches the prize-winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) by the time lag. Since the shot balls can reach when the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a are in the open state, it is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls.

It should be noted that the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639) may not be specified, and notification may be made when one of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a is opened. Notification corresponding to K65a, K640, and K650a may be performed. For example, the LEDs corresponding to the opened winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a may be illuminated.
That is, for example, when the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639) is opened, light is emitted from the light emitting unit K212 (see FIG. 1642) that emits light from behind. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to associate a brightly-visible spot with a game ball-enterable spot, so that the player can easily predict the profit to be obtained by entering the ball from the brightly-visible spot.
Referring to FIG. 1714, the lighting mode in the display area of the display device K4580 starts at a point before switching the states of the opening/closing plates arranged upstream of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639). Also, a third effect control example controlled to switch the output mode of a specific sound from the sound output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) will be described. In the following, for the sake of convenience, the presentation will be described from a point in time before the state of the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening K65a is switched. It is also possible to apply it to the specific winning opening K650a.
Figures 1714(a) and 1714(b) are partial front views of the pachinko machine K4010. In Figures 1714 (a) and 1714 (b), when the third effect control example is executed, the opening and closing plate K65b (see Figure 1639) of the first specific winning opening K65a is changed to the open state several seconds before , changes in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 are illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 1714(a), the front view K4010F of the pachinko machine K4010 whose size has been reduced is displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device K81, and in FIG. After the elongated device K540 is changed to the right second tilted posture (see FIG. 1710) in the front layer, the right detection sensor K556a (see FIG. 1667) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the right end of the movement range. is shown.
In this case, the ring shape of the rotary decorative member K4578 of the moving device K4560 is likened to a lens frame of a so-called magnifying glass, and the display device K4580 displays the 3rd symbol in the front view K4010F of the pachinko machine K4010 displayed on the 3rd pattern display device K81. 1 An enlarged front view K65F near the variable winning device K65 (see FIG. 1639) is displayed.
The display of the display device K4580 is controlled so as to change in accordance with the positional relationship with the pachinko machine K4010 displayed on the third symbol display device K81. An enlarged front view K65F near the device K65 (see FIG. 1639) is displayed.
In this way, the display of the display device K4580 is changed from the whole of the pachinko machine K4010 displayed on the third pattern display device K81 to a part thereof, so that the display is displayed on the third pattern display device K81. The front view K4010F displayed on the display device K4580 and the enlarged front view K65F displayed on the display device K4580 can be easily visually recognized in series, and the display on the display device K4580 means a part of the pachinko machine K4010 for the player. can make it easier to understand.

This makes it possible to understand what the display on the display device K4580 means, or even if it can be understood that the display on the display device K4580 means the pachinko machine K4010, which part of the pachinko machine K4010 the display means. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the display on the display device K4580 becomes meaningless because the player cannot understand whether or not the game is being played.
Furthermore, the front and back position where the enlarged front view K65F is displayed is forward (player side) rather than the front and back position where the front view K4010F is displayed on the third pattern display device K81, so that the pachinko machine K4010 When the display is changed from the whole to the part, the player can be given the illusion that the display is approaching the player. As a result, it is possible to construct a realistic display effect.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1714(b), an arrow pointing toward the display device K4580 and the word "Aim" are displayed in the upper right range of the long device K540 in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. Then, the voice output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) outputs a voice saying "Aim here and hit the ball."
As a result, before the opening/closing plate K65b (see FIG. 1639) of the first specific winning hole K65a is changed to the open state, the game can be played in which direction the game ball should be shot and at what timing it should be shot. Since it becomes easier for the player to grasp the information, the burden of playing the game on the player can be reduced. Henceforth, it continues and demonstrates the 3rd production|presentation control example.

In the third effect control example, based on the display of FIG. (Based on the detection of the first ball entering), the display of the display device K4580 is switched to the pattern of the rightward arrow (see FIG. 1713) as described above, and the display of the front view K4010F on the third pattern display device K81 is changed. Be erased. Instead, in the third symbol display device K81, every time a ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a is detected, a numerical display such as "+15" that reminds us of the payout of prize balls (otherwise, "Point GET" , coin display, etc.) is displayed.
In the third effect control example, an arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) is displayed on the display device K4580 each time a ball is detected to enter the first specific winning hole K65a, and the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise. However, the display mode and the rotational motion mode are not constant and are controlled so as to be variable.
That is, in the third effect control example, compared to the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous entry of the game ball and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578, The size of the arrow shape displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 are controlled to be the same or higher based on subsequent entry of the game ball.
As a result, the larger the number of balls entered into the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639), the larger the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotational speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. is likely to become large. Furthermore, as the number of balls entered into the first specific winning hole K65a increases, the number of numerical displays such as "+15" displayed on the third symbol display device K81, which reminds of the payout of prize balls, increases. , the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display (number) of the numerical display can be visually recognized in series.

Therefore, the player can determine the number of balls entered into the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639), the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) displayed on the display device K4580, and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. can be associated with each other and grasped. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be easily predicted from the size of the arrow shape displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotary decoration member K4578. Attention to the member K4578 can be improved.
In addition, in the third effect control example, the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous entry of the game ball and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 The size of the arrow shape displayed on the display device K4580 and the amount of change in rotational speed (speed increase amount) of the rotary decorative member K4578 based on the ball entry may be the same each time, or may be different.
For example, as the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578, five speeds from the first step (slow speed) to the fifth step (high speed) can be set. , when the size of the arrow shape based on the previous entry of the game ball and the rotation speed of the rotary decoration member K4578 are the first stage, the size of the arrow shape and the rotation decoration based on the subsequent entry of the game ball Not only the pattern in which the rotation speed of the member K4578 changes in the second stage, but also the pattern in which the rotation speed changes in the third to fifth stages may be implemented.
In this case, for example, before the size of the displayed arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) has completely changed, if the next ball hits the ball (two balls hit consecutively in a short time), the size of the arrow shape And the rotational speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 increased by one step, and the next ball entered before the size of the arrow shape displayed based on the next ball completely changed (3 balls entered in a row in a short time). The size of the arrow shape and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be increased by two steps when the ball is rounded. In this case, it is possible for the player to grasp that the ball is hit with high frequency from the size of the arrow shape and the manner of change in the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578.

In addition, in the above-described third effect control example, the display of the display device K4580 is switched based on the ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639), and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball that is not entered into the first specific winning hole K65a and is not entered into the second specific winning hole K650a by flowing leftward on the upper surface of the movable plate K251 of the second electric accessory K250, The display on the display device K4580 may be switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated when the ball hits the ball guiding portion K210 (see FIG. 1644) on the left side.
The ball guiding portion K210 on the right side (see FIG. 1644) has the same function as the out hole K71 (see FIG. 1639), while the ball guiding portion K210 on the left side (see FIG. 1644) serves as a general winning hole K63 (see FIG. 1639). It has the same function as, and the prize balls are paid out based on the incoming balls. That is, similarly to the ball entering the left ball guide portion K210 (see FIG. 1644), when the ball enters the general winning hole K63, the display on the display device K4580 is switched, and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated. .
In this case, the display on the display device K4580 and the rotating operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 make the player aware of the presence of the ball that has flowed downstream without entering the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639). Therefore, the player is urged to review the operation of the operation handle H51 (see FIG. 1638), such as whether the ball is being shot when the opening/closing plate K65b is in the closed state, and whether the ball shooting intensity is appropriate. be able to.
In other words, under the condition that all the shot balls enter the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639), the display of the display device K4580 is not switched and the state shown in FIG. 1714(b) is maintained. However, while the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate, in a situation where a part of the shot ball does not enter the first specific prize winning opening K65a, the display of the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is switched. is also rotated.

As a result, the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 can be used as a barometer for informing the player whether the ball is properly entered into the first specific winning hole K65a. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the decorative member K4578.
In addition, in the above-described third effect control example, the display of the display device K4580 is switched based on the ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639), and the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the ball enters the left ball guide portion K210 (see FIG. 1644), the display of the display device K4580 is not switched and the rotary decorative member K4578 does not rotate, and the ball enters the general winning opening K63 (see FIG. 1639). The display on the display device K4580 may be switched based on the sphere, and the rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated.
In this case, the display on the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 guide the player to the right side of the first specific prize winning opening K65a (see FIG. 1639), that is, the upper side of the rotary decorative member K4578. Since it is possible to make the player aware of the presence of the ball that is guided to the left side of the rotary decorative member K4578 without being caught, it is possible to check whether the shooting strength of the ball is weakened or not. The player can be prompted to review.
That is, when the game ball continues to flow down to the right at the upstream position of the rotary decorative member K4578, the switching of the display of the display device K4580 and the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 are not executed. When even one game ball flows down the position on the upstream side of the rotary decorative member K4578 to the left, the switching of the display of the display device K4580 and the rotary operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be executed.

Therefore, when switching the display of the display device K4580 or rotating the rotary decorative member K4578 is executed, the shooting intensity is weakened to such an extent that the game ball flows leftward at the position on the upstream side of the rotary decorative member K4578. Since this serves as evidence, the player who sees the display on the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be urged to reconsider the operation strength of the operation handle H51 (see FIG. 1638).
As a result, the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 can be used as a barometer for informing the player whether the ball is properly entered into the first specific prize winning opening K65a (see FIG. 1639). It is possible to improve the player's attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578.
In addition, in the above-described third effect control example, the display of the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 are explained based on the entry of the game ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the display of the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 may occur regardless of the entry of the game ball.
In this case, the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be configured to be increased based on the operation (push, repeat, long press, etc.) of the operation button member H181 (see FIG. 1638). For example, if the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be set to five speeds from the first step (slow speed) to the fifth step (high speed), the operation button H181 is operated to which step the speed is increased. (upper limit of increase) and the expected value of profit that the player can obtain (the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot won), the jackpot expectation of the special lottery, etc.) By doing so, the willingness to operate the operation button member H181 can be improved.

It should be noted that the setting of the upper limit of the increase described above is set in the form of an arrow (Fig. 1713) and the upper limit of the rotational speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. As a result, attention to the display device K4580 and the rotary decorative member K4578 can be improved.
In the third effect control example described above, the size of the arrow shape (see FIG. 1713) displayed on the display device K4580 based on the ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639), the rotating decorative member K4578 Although the case where the rotational speed of can be changed (increased) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed so that the magnitude or rotational speed described above can be decreased, or control can be performed such that both increase and decrease are possible.
Also, the color displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 and the color of light emitted from the LED of the electrode substrate K564 (see FIG. 1668) that emits light from the rotary decorative member K4578 may be changed. That is, the color changes in stages (e.g., initially blue light emission, blue then green light, green then purple light, purple then red light, red then rainbow light, etc.). Color emission and changing order) may be provided, and control may be performed so that the color displayed on the display device K4580 is changed based on the ball entering the first special prize winning opening K65a (see FIG. 1639). .
In this case, the player prefers colors that can be easily recognized in an instant, rather than information that may be difficult to recognize in an instant, such as the content displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. Since the information can be obtained based on the manner in which the ball enters the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1639), it is possible to reduce the game burden on the player.

When the ball enters, the lighting of the display area of the display device K4580 and the output of the winning audio from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) are switched. Although the mouths K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1639) have been described as examples, they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first prize winning port K64, the general prize winning port K63, the through gate K67, the out port K71, etc. (see FIG. 1639) without opening/closing plates may be used.
In this case, the lighting of the display area of the display device K4580 and the manner of switching the output of the prize-winning audio from the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) determine the frequency of balls entering the corresponding prize-winning opening (passing frequency). Players can be made to understand. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with useful information for determining whether or not to continue playing the game.
Further, the position where the light is irradiated based on the incoming ball is not necessarily limited to the display area of the display device K4580, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a position (position within the game area) on the upstream side of the corresponding winning hole, or a position (for example, the first specific winning hole) where the ball guided to the corresponding winning hole can be stored (temporarily retained) A position upstream of K65a and downstream of the opening/closing plate K65b, a position upstream of the second winning opening K640 and above the electric accessory K640a, and a position upstream of the second specific winning opening K650a. It may be positioned downstream of the movable plate K251 (see FIGS. 1639 and 1644). In this case, by brightly illuminating the position where a ball that has not yet entered the corresponding winning hole can be arranged, the field of vision for the game ball can be brightened and the visibility of the game ball can be improved.
In this case, the light emission control performed by the display device K4580 described above is a device that irradiates light to a position on the upstream side of the corresponding winning opening or a position where the balls guided to the corresponding winning opening can be stored. However, if it is configured to be executable, the position where the light emission control is executed can be switched between the display device K4580 and another position according to the situation, thereby allowing the player to switch the position to which the player's attention is directed.

As described above, when a ball enters the winning openings K65a, K640, and K650a (see FIG. 1639), the display area of the display device K4580 emits light, and the audio output device H226 (see FIG. 1637) outputs winning audio. , it is possible for the player to grasp that the ball has been entered.
On the other hand, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation by notifying that there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a (see FIG. 1639). Below, an example of the notification mode for notifying that the game ball can enter the ball from now on will be described.
1715 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board K13 in the range corresponding to the MDCCXXXI section in FIG. 1639. FIG. In FIG. 1715, the winning unit K200 is shown, the internal shape of the cosmetic cover K220 is shown by imaginary lines, and the light emitting parts K212 and K228 of the decorative boards K211 and K227 are shown by hidden lines (FIGS. 1642 and 1642). 1643).
The light emitting units K212 and K228 are formed from LEDs, and their optical axes are oriented toward the front side. That is, the amount of light emitted to the plate-like main body K221 of the decorative cover K220 decreases as the distance from the center increases in a substantially circular range centered on the arrangement of the light emitting units K212 and K228 shown in FIG. It is visually recognized in such a visual recognition mode.

The range in which the light is visible (the diameter of the circle) depends on the LED employed. . If the diameter of the circle is large enough to overlap with the adjacent light-emitting portions K212 and K228, it will be easy to see with faint and weak light. becomes strong light, but is likely to be visually recognized as an independent light. When adopting LEDs, it is preferable to consider the balance of these factors and select them from the viewpoint of presentation effects.
In this embodiment, as in the above embodiments, the large design K221a and the small design K221b (see FIG. 1642) are applied to the decorative cover K220. There is a possibility that the visibility of the game ball flowing down the back side of the cover K220 is lowered.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, the direction of the game ball is determined by the light emitted from the back side of the ball downflow path toward the decorative cover K220 (front side). It is configured so that the player can grasp whether it is flowing down.
First, the types of ball flowing-down modes will be described. A game ball that flows down the right side of the game area and enters the winning unit K200 from the side of the first variable winning device K65 (see FIG. 1639) first flows down in the first flowing mode KFL51.

The game ball that has flowed down in the first flow mode KFL51 reaches the branch forming portion K223 and branches in the left-right direction. When the game ball flows to the left at the branch formation part K223, and the electric accessory K640a is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 1647), the game ball flows down in the second flow mode KFL52. The game ball that has flowed down in the second flow mode KFL52 passes through the guide opening K203 and enters the second winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1639).
When the game ball flows to the left at the branch forming part K223, and the electric accessory K640a is changed to the closed state before the game ball has completely passed (see FIG. 1646), the game ball flows down in the third flow mode KFL53. do. The game ball that has flowed down in the third flow mode KFL53 reaches the front side of the deceleration recess K207.
When the game ball flows to the right side at the branch formation portion K223, when it deviates from the discharge extension portion K222a which is a part of the extension formation portion K222 and is connected to the ball guide portion K210, the game ball flows down the fourth It flows down in mode KFL54. The game ball that has flowed down in the fourth flow mode KFL54 can flow to reach the movable plate K251 from the upstream end and join the third flow mode KFL53.
When the game ball flows to the right side at the branch formation portion K223, and is introduced into the discharge extension portion K222a which is a part of the extension formation portion K222 and is connected to the ball guide portion K210, the game ball is the fifth It flows down in the flow mode KFL55. The game ball that has flowed down in the fifth flow mode KFL55 passes through the ball guide portion K210 on the right side and is discharged from the game area.

When the game ball is flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53 or the fourth flow mode KFL54, and the movable plate K251 is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 1646), the ball flows down in the sixth flow mode KFL56. The game ball that has flowed down in the sixth flow mode KFL56 is discharged to the game area from the left side of the winning unit K200.
When the game ball is flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53 or the fourth flow mode KFL54, when the movable plate K251 is opened (see FIGS. 1648 and 1649), the ball flows down in the seventh flow mode KFL57. do. The game ball that has flowed down in the seventh flow mode KFL57 enters the second specific winning hole K650a.
As described above, there are a plurality of variations in the manner in which the game ball that has landed in the winning unit K200 flows. Parts K212a to K212w) are arranged.
The light from the light emitting part K212 is partially blocked by the sphere when the sphere is positioned in front of it (in the light irradiation direction). projected.

In this embodiment, the concave and convex structure that abuts and affects the sphere is gathered on the front side of the plate-like main body K202 of the base member K201, and the rear surface of the plate-like main body K221 is configured so that most of it is a smooth surface. is doing.
As a result, the portion where the light projected onto the plate-like main body K221 is refracted by the concave-convex shape can be narrowed, and the light projected onto the plate-shaped main body K221 can be visually recognized in the widest possible range. Furthermore, by suppressing variations in the thickness of the plate-shaped main body K221, the brightness of the decorative cover K220 can be made substantially uniform.
In addition, an inclined surface portion K229 (see FIG. 1643) formed in a shape inclined downward toward the rear is formed at a position where the game ball flowing down in the fourth flowing mode KFL54 is guided to the movable plate K251.
The inclined surface portion K229 makes it easy to adjust the flow down state on the downstream side by correcting the front-rear arrangement of the falling ball toward the rear side. That is, by bringing the ball closer to the deceleration concave portion K207 from the beginning when the ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable plate K251, a sufficient deceleration effect can be produced.

In addition, when the movable plate K251 is in the open state (see FIGS. 1648 and 1649), the ball is pushed backward from the beginning of the flow down in the seventh flow mode KFL57. can be avoided, and passage through the second specific winning opening K650a can be caused quickly.
When light from the light emitting portion K212 irradiates the inclined surface portion K229, the direction of the light from the light emitting portion K212 can be changed upward by reflecting the light from the surface of the inclined surface portion K229, which will be described later in detail.
The light emitting units K212 include upstream light emitting units K212a and K212b capable of emitting yellow light, downstream light emitting units K212c and K212d capable of emitting red light, and dispersed light emitting units K212g and K212w capable of emitting white light. And prepare.
The first upstream light-emitting part K212a is arranged at a position where at least part of the irradiation light can be applied to the sphere flowing down in the first flow mode KFL51. Therefore, when the ball flows down in the first flow mode KFL51 while light is emitted from the first upstream side light-emitting portion K212a, the light is blocked by the ball, and the yellow component of the light reaching the decorative cover K220 is weakened. As a result, the appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed.

That is, the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200 by visually confirming that the appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) has changed so that the strength of the yellow component of the light changes. can grasp.
The second upstream light emitting part K212b is arranged at a position where at least part of the irradiation light can be applied to the sphere flowing down in the second flow mode KFL52. Therefore, when the ball flows down in the second flow mode KFL52 while light is being emitted from the second upstream side light-emitting portion K212b, the light is blocked by the ball, and the yellow component of the light reaching the decorative cover K220 is weakened. As a result, the appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed.
In other words, even after the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200, the appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed so that the strength of the yellow component of the light changes continuously. , it can be predicted that the game ball is flowing in the second flowing mode KFL52.
The first downstream light-emitting part K212c is arranged at a position where at least part of the irradiation light can be applied to the sphere flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53. Therefore, when the ball flows down in the third flow mode KFL53 while light is being emitted from the first downstream side light emitting portion K212c, the light is blocked by the ball, and the red component of the light reaching the decorative cover K220 is weakened. As a result, the appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed.

That is, when the player changes the visual recognition mode of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) so that the strength of the red component of the light changes after recognizing that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200, It can be predicted that the game ball is flowing down to the side of the movable plate K251.
The second downstream light-emitting part K212d is arranged at a position where at least part of the irradiation light can be applied to the sphere flowing down in the fourth flow mode KFL54. Therefore, when the ball flows down in the fourth flow mode KFL54 while light is being emitted from the second downstream side light-emitting portion K212d, the light is blocked by the ball, and the red component of the light reaching the decorative cover K220 is weakened. As a result, the appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed.
That is, when the player changes the visual recognition mode of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) so that the strength of the red component of the light changes after recognizing that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200, It can be predicted that the game ball is flowing down to the side of the movable plate K251.
Here, even if it is visually recognized that the visual appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) has changed so that the strength of the red component of the light changes after it is grasped that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200. , it is difficult to distinguish whether the game ball is flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53 or the game ball is flowing in the fourth flow mode KFL54.

On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down in the third flow mode KFL53 reaches the middle of the left-right length of the movable plate K251, while the ball that has flowed down in the fourth flow mode KFL54 reaches the upstream end of the movable plate K251. Therefore, if the time from when the ball reaches the movable plate K251 to when the movable plate K251 is released is the same, the number of balls that flow down in the fourth flow mode KFL54 is greater than that in the third flow mode KFL53. It is easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning hole K650a.
Therefore, it is better to be able to distinguish whether the game ball is flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53 or the game ball is flowing down in the fourth flow mode KFL54. When the movement mode of the movable plate K251 is also grasped, it becomes possible to accurately grasp whether or not the ball can enter the second specific winning hole K650a.
From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the appearance of the light emitted from the first downstream light-emitting unit K212c and the appearance of the light emitted from the second downstream light-emitting unit K212d are made different to achieve a decorative cover. Is the change in the visual recognition mode of K220 (see FIG. 1642) due to the blocking of the light from the first downstream light emitting unit K212c or the blocking of the light from the second downstream light emitting unit K212d? or is configured to be distinguishable.
That is, the light emitted from the first downstream side light-emitting portion K212c reaches the decorative cover K220 in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the light from the second downstream side light emitting portion K212d is reflected by the inclined surface portion K229, extends upward, and reaches the decorative cover K220. It is visually recognized as a band extending upward from the bottom end.

Therefore, even though it is the same that the visual appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed so that the intensity of the red component of the light changes, the shape visually recognized by the light whose visual appearance is changed is different. If the ball is substantially circular, the player can grasp that the ball is flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53. The player can grasp that the KFL54 is flowing down.
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) can be viewed when the ball is flowing down in the third flow mode KFL53 and when the ball is flowing down in the fourth flow mode KFL54. It can be different depending on if there is
The first distributed light emitting unit K212g is arranged at a position where at least part of the irradiation light can be applied to the sphere flowing down in the fifth flow mode KFL55 or the sixth flow mode KFL56. Therefore, when the ball flows down in the fifth flow mode KFL55 or the sixth flow mode KFL56 while the light is emitted from the first distributed light emitting unit K212g, the light is blocked by the ball, and the light reaching the decorative cover K220 is blocked. By weakening the white component, the appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed.
That is, when the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200 and then changes the intensity of the white component of the light so that the appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) changes, It can be predicted that game balls are being discharged from the winning unit K200.

In addition, the distributed light emitting unit K212g is arranged at a position capable of irradiating light onto the sphere flowing down in the fifth flow mode KFL55, and at a position capable of irradiating light onto the sphere flowing down in the sixth flow mode KFL56. There is an LED that These are different in that the ball flowing down in the fifth flow mode KFL55 is discharged from the game area through the ball guide K210, while the ball flowing down in the sixth flow mode KFL56 is returned to the game area. It is common to be discharged from
That is, when the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the winning unit K200 and then changes the intensity of the white component of the light so that the appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) changes, It can be predicted that the game ball entering the winning unit K200 will be ejected from the decorative cover K200 without entering either the second winning hole K640 or the second specific winning hole K650a.
The second distributed light emitting unit K212w is arranged at a position where the emitted light is not blocked by the sphere flowing down the winning unit K200 (does not overlap with the sphere when viewed from the front). Therefore, the light emitted from the second distributed light emitting unit K212w reaches the decorative cover K220 without being affected by the game balls flowing down inside the winning unit K200. As a result, the brightness of the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) when viewed from the front can be ensured regardless of whether or not the balls flow down inside the winning unit K200.
That is, by ensuring the minimum brightness of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642), the above-described change in the appearance of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) that occurs when the ball flows down inside the decorative cover K220. It is possible to make it easier to recognize (changes accompanied by intensity of color).

The light emission control of the second distributed light emitting unit K212w may be controlled in a fixed pattern regardless of the ball entering the ball, or may be controlled so that the intensity of the light emission changes depending on the ball entering the ball. Also good.
For example, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the guide opening K203 and passed through the second prize winning opening K640 (see FIG. 1639), the light emission intensity of the second distributed light emitting unit K212w increases for about 0.2 seconds. By controlling the light emission in this manner, the player can grasp that the game ball has entered the first winning hole K640 from the change in the visual appearance of the white light through the cosmetic cover K220 (see FIG. 1642). .
The same thing may be done by light emission control of the light emission unit K228. That is, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second specific prize winning opening K650a, the light emission control is performed so that the light emission intensity of the light emission unit K228 is increased for about 0.2 seconds, so that the cosmetic cover K220 (Fig. 1642 ), the player can know that the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole K650a from the change in the visible state of the white light.
According to the configuration of the prize winning unit K200 described above, even if the ball itself flowing down behind the decorative cover K220 is not visually recognized, the change in the visual recognition state of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) causes the ball to enter the prize winning unit K200. You can figure out what you did.

After the sphere enters the prize winning unit K200, light from behind forms a shadow of the sphere on the decorative cover K220, and the shadow is an area with lower transparency than other areas such as the large design K221a and the small design K221b. By overlapping with , the visibility of the decorative cover K220 is changed, and the production effect is improved.
Furthermore, while the shadow of the ball is flowing down the position overlapping the large design K221a and the small design K221b, the possibility of the ball entering the second winning opening K640 (see Fig. 1639) or the second specific winning opening K650a remains. On the other hand, when the shadow of the ball leaves the large design K221a and the small design K221b (the ball flows down in the fifth flow mode KFL55 and the sixth flow mode KFL56), the second winning opening K640 and the second specific winning opening K650a There is no possibility of entering the ball.
Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the shadow of the sphere flows near the large design K221a and the small design K221b. can be improved.
In addition, it is possible to grasp where the ball is flowing down. In other words, when the state in which the visibility of the decorative cover K220 (see FIG. 1642) is changed so that the strength of the yellow component of the light changes, the ball will enter the second winning hole K640 (see FIG. 1639). When the visual appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 is changed to a state in which the intensity of the red component of the light changes, the ball is directed to the second special prize winning opening K650a, and the white component of the light changes. When the appearance of the cosmetic cover K220 changes to a state where the strength changes, the ball is discharged from the winning unit K200 without entering the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a. It is possible to make the player grasp that there is.

Although the case where the inclined surface portion K229 is formed at a position where the ball can collide has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shaped portion similar to the inclined surface portion K229 may be configured at a position away from the falling range of the sphere and not colliding with the sphere. In this case, the inclined surface portion K229 is less likely to be damaged by collision with the sphere, so the light refraction effect of the inclined surface portion K229 can be produced over a long period of time.
In addition, although the inclined surface of the inclined surface portion K229 is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear, the invention is not limited to this in terms of the purpose of causing light refraction, and the inclined surface is inclined in the horizontal direction toward the rear. Alternatively, it may be an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear.
For example, in the front side of the range where the deceleration projection K204 (see FIG. 1644) is located, if an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear is formed on the back surface of the decorative cover K220, the range where the deceleration projection K204 is located is irradiated to the front side. By refracting the emitted light downward, the player can visually recognize the strip of light extending vertically along the decorative cover K220. That is, in contrast to the light that is refracted by the inclined surface portion K229 and travels upward, a band of light can be visually recognized by causing the light to travel downward after being refracted.
In the above-described embodiment, the case where the light emitting units K212 and K228 are basically kept emitting light has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when lighting the light emitting units K212 and K228 in the round game of the jackpot game, the lighting may be continued in the inter-round interval, or the lighting may be stopped in the inter-round interval.

In the former case, the player can play comfortably without being aware of the interval between rounds. In the latter case, by making the player aware of the inter-round interval, it is possible to make it easy to understand the end of the big win game and to predict how long the big win game will end. This makes it possible for the player to easily avoid a situation in which a large amount of wasted balls are generated by continuing to shoot balls until the end performance of the big winning game.
Also, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the light emitting units K212 and K228 are basically kept emitting light has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lighting mode may be changed at the time of winning in the second winning hole K640 or the second specific winning hole K650a, and the viewing mode of the winning unit K200 may be changed.
In this case, in the case of winning to the second winning port K640, the lighting mode is changed even in the case of winning when the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the winning of the second winning port K640 is full. Alternatively, the lighting mode may not be changed in winning a prize when the reserved number of special symbols is full.
In the former case, since the change in the lighting mode corresponds to the payout of prize balls, it is possible to make the player aware that the payout of prize balls will occur. In the latter case, the change of the lighting mode can be associated with the occurrence of the special symbol lottery, so the player can be made to recognize that the special symbol lottery will occur.

In the winning to the second specific winning opening K650a, the light emission mode may be changed when the number of winning to the second specific winning opening K650a exceeds the prescribed number in the round game. The lighting mode may not be changed when the number of winning prizes exceeds the number.
In the former case, if the change in the lighting mode in the case of winning more than the specified number is set to the same mode as the winning up to the specified number, the change in the lighting mode and the payout of prize balls can be made to correspond. The player can be made aware of the payout of prize balls, but it may be done in a manner different from winning up to a specified number.
When changing the lighting mode in the case of winning more than the specified number of prizes in a different mode from winning up to the specified number of prizes, the player is made aware of the occurrence of excessive winning to the second specific winning opening K650a. can be made easier. It should be noted that the change in the case of winning more than the specified number may be reflected in the display on the third symbol display device K81.
In the latter case, since it is possible to make the player unaware of the excess winning, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the excess winning is likely or difficult to occur. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation that prompts a special shooting mode such as changing the shooting interval of game balls.

In the winning unit K200 described above, the visibility of the small design K221b can be improved when viewed from an oblique direction rather than when viewed from the front. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when viewed from an oblique direction, it may be configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize the game balls flowing down inside the winning unit K200.
That is, for example, since the small designs K221b are formed to protrude toward the back side, it is easy to see the back side through the gaps between the small designs K221b when viewed from the front, but when viewed obliquely, the overhanging portions of the small designs K221b overlap. The gap may be narrowed (or eliminated) so that it is difficult to see the far side.
In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the internal state of the winning unit K200 even when viewed obliquely. can be encouraged to play. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which the design obtained by combining the small design K221b and the large design K221a, which are designed to maximize the designability when viewed from the front, is clearly visible. In the case where the player's line of sight can be guided in this way, even if either the large design K221a or the small design K221b is formed behind the game ball flow range, the small design K221b and the large design K221a You can make the design look beautiful by combining with.
Figures 1716(a) to 1716(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1716(a) to 1716(c), the horizontal drop motion pattern of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, and the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding state is schematically illustrated. 1670(b), the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is energized (see FIG. 1670(b)).

In the horizontal drop motion pattern, as shown in FIG. 1716(a), first, the left rotary member K430 rotates clockwise from the waiting state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIGS. 1653 and 1671), and the right The rotating member K430 is synchronously rotated counterclockwise, and the left and right rotating members K430 are set to the first release posture (see FIG. 1674).
As shown in FIG. 1716(b), the stopper member K462 of the switching device K460 is arranged at the retreat position where it retreats from the movement locus of the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1670(b)), and the first movable device K4401. is not supported by the switching device K460. Therefore, the support on both the left and right sides of the lifting device K4500 is released, and a falling motion occurs, so that the first movable device K4401 shifts from the effect waiting state to the falling position state (see FIG. 1654), as shown in FIG. 1716(b). ).
In this case, there is a possibility that the impact that occurs in the lifting device K4500 will increase. On the other hand, in this operation pattern, the movement device K4560 is previously positioned at the intermediate position of the movement range (see FIG. 1716(b)), so that the impact transmitted to the movement device K4560 can be reduced. That is, by arranging the moving device K4560 at an intermediate position of the elongated device 540 that is supported by both the left and right ends, the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560 is reduced by utilizing the impact absorption effect due to the bending of the elongated device K540. can be reduced.
As illustrated in FIG. 1716(c), from the state illustrated in FIG. 1716(b), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronism. and is returned to the production standby state. As a result, the elongated device K540 can be lifted while maintaining a horizontal orientation of the elongated device K540.

It should be noted that even in the display area of the display device K4580, where the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the clockwise direction during the operation of the horizontal drop motion pattern, the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates in the same direction and at the same speed. is controlled to be displayed in a rotating manner. As a result, even if one of the left and right rotating members K430 malfunctions and the long device K540 loses its horizontal posture, it is possible to minimize deterioration in the appearance of the moving device K4560.
That is, compared to the case where the moving device K4560 is visually recognized as being tilted, the tilt of the moving device K4560 can be made inconspicuous, so the presentation effect of the moving device K4560 can be improved.
Figures 1717(a) to 1717(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1717(a) to 1717(c), the horizontal lowering motion pattern of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, and the state of the pair of rotating members K430 in the corresponding state is schematically illustrated. 1670(b), the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is energized (see FIG. 1670(b)).
In the horizontal descent motion pattern, as shown in FIG. 1717(a), first, the left rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise from the waiting state of the first movable device K4401 (see FIGS. 1653 and 1671), and then rotates to the right. 1717(b)).

In the second release posture of the rotating member K430, since the upper rotating member K476 is in a retracted state (see FIG. 1677), the left rotating member K430 is further rotated counterclockwise and the right rotating member K430 is further rotated clockwise. 1678, the lifting device K4500 can be lowered. Since the rotation of the right and left rotating members K430 is synchronized, the elongated device K540 can be lowered to the representative midway stop position while maintaining the posture of the elongated device K540 horizontal (see FIG. 1717(c)). .
From the state illustrated in FIG. 1717(c), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronism, returning to the presentation standby state. As a result, the elongated device K540 can be lifted while maintaining a horizontal orientation of the elongated device K540.
It should be noted that during the operation of the horizontal descending motion pattern, the rotary decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the clockwise direction. is controlled to be displayed in a rotating manner. As a result, even if one of the left and right rotating members K430 malfunctions and the long device K540 loses its horizontal orientation, the appearance of the moving device K4560 can be minimized.
That is, compared to the case where the moving device K4560 is visually recognized as being tilted, the tilt of the moving device K4560 can be made inconspicuous, so the presentation effect of the moving device K4560 can be improved.

Note that FIGS. 1717(a) to 1717(c) describe the case where the stopper member K462 of the switching device K460 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 1670(b)) retracted from the movement locus of the connecting member K445. However, until the rotation member K430 reaches the posture shown in FIG. It does not affect the attitude of the K4500. Therefore, it is possible to operate the elongated device K540 in the horizontal descending motion pattern while the switching device K460 is de-energized (see FIG. 1670(a)).
On the other hand, the lowering operation is not limited to stopping the elongated device K540 at the representative midway stop position illustrated in FIG. However, in this case, if the switching device K460 is de-energized (see FIG. 1670(a)), the stopper member K462 hinders the movement of the connecting member K445, and the posture of the long device K540 is changed. level will be lost.
As described above, in the horizontal lowering operation pattern, the lowering reaching position of the elongated device K540 can be varied by providing variations in the rotational reversal position (see FIG. 1717(c)) of the rotary member K430. By energizing the drive solenoid KSOL41 of K460 (see FIG. 1670(b)), it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the lowering reach position of the long device K540 (reaching a lower position in a horizontal posture). can).
Note that the long device K540 is lifted (see FIG. 1676) until the rotary member K430 reaches the second release posture (see FIG. 1717(b)) from the state shown in FIG. 1717(a). , through the arrangement of the elongated device K540, there is a possibility that the player will grasp that the rotating member K430 is rotating.

In this case, if the state of the rotating member K430 is grasped, there is a possibility of predicting whether the motion will occur in the horizontal falling motion pattern or in the horizontal falling motion pattern. There is a possibility that the production effect of is reduced. In this embodiment, the plate-shaped main body K441 of the front cover member K440 blocks the view of the rotating member K430 (see FIGS. 1653 and 1660) so that the state of the rotating member K430 cannot be visually recognized from the front. , the state of the rotating member K430 may be predicted by visually observing the operation of the elongated device K540 interlocked with the rotation of the rotating member K430.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the horizontal descending motion pattern illustrated in FIG. 1717(b), the rotation direction is reversed in the first reversed posture (see FIG. 1676) before reaching the state shown in FIG. 1717(b), A first midway reversal operation pattern returning to the state illustrated in FIG. 1717(a) is also executable.
Here, since the first reversed posture (see FIG. 1676) is a posture in which the rotary member K430 reaches the upper end position of the movement range of the elongated device K540, the rotary member K430 remains in the same position even after reaching the first reversed posture. The arrangement and moving direction of the elongated device K540 do not change between the horizontal descending motion pattern in which the rotating member K430 continues to rotate in the direction and the first midway reversing motion pattern in which the rotating member K430 reverses the rotating direction after reaching the first reversing posture.
Therefore, for a player who can visually recognize the elongated device K540 but cannot visually recognize the rotating member K430, what posture is the rotating member K430 currently in? It can be made difficult to grasp in which direction it has rotated from the

Drive control is performed to temporarily stop the rotation of the rotating member K430 when the rotating member K430 reaches the first reversed posture regardless of whether the motion is in the horizontal descending motion pattern or in the first halfway reversing motion pattern. You can In this case, the stationary state of the elongated device K540, which inevitably occurs when the rotating member K430 is reversed, can be generated even when the rotating member K430 is not reversed in the first reversed posture. Predicting posture can be made more difficult.
In addition to reversing the rotation direction of the rotating member K430 in the first reversing posture, the rotating direction of the rotating member K430 can be reversed in the second release posture (see FIG. 1717(b)), as shown in FIG. 1717(a). A second halfway reversal operation pattern returning to the illustrated state may also be enabled.
1717(a) (see FIG. 1671) and the long device K540 in the state shown in FIG. 1717(b). The vertical position of K540 (see FIG. 1677) is the same.
During the game, the player does not always pay attention to the elongated device K540, and the player's attention is focused on the game balls flowing down the game area, the payout position of the prize balls, and the third symbol display device K81. Moves to display contents, etc. 1717(a) and 1717(b), the number of up-and-down movements of the elongated device K540 is 1717(a) or FIG. 1717(b). , can be difficult to grasp.

In this way, by making it possible to perform the motions in the first midway reversing motion pattern and the second midway reversing motion pattern, even if the height of the elongated device K540 is the same, it is the same as in FIG. ) or the state shown in FIG. 1717(b). In addition, from the state where the arrangement height of the long device K540 is the same, both the motion in the horizontal drop motion pattern and the motion in the horizontal fall motion pattern are configured to be executable, so the effect of the first movable device K4401. You can improve the effect.
As described above, when the elongated device K540 is arranged at the height position of the standby state for the effect, the attitude (phase) of the rotating member K430 may vary depending on the attitude (phase) of the rotating member K430. It may be configured so that the corresponding notification can be executed. This notification may be a notification within the system that is not notified to the player side, a notification accompanying light irradiation that is recognized by the player side, or a sound output device H226 such as a speaker (see FIG. 1637). It may be an output notification.
Figures 1718(a) to 1718(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1718(a) to 1718(c), the eleventh motion pattern and part of the twelfth motion pattern (downward direction period) of the first movable device K4401 are illustrated in chronological order. The state of the pair of rotating members K430 in this state is schematically illustrated, and the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is de-energized (see FIG. 1670(a)).
In the eleventh operation pattern and the twelfth operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 1712(a), first, the first movable device K4401 is in the standby state for rendering (see FIG. 1653), and the right rotary member K430 is rotated counterclockwise. It is rotated around to assume the first release posture (see FIG. 1674).

As a result, the support on the right side of the lifting device K4500 is released, and after the right side is lowered (dropped), it is supported by the stopper member K462, so that as illustrated in FIG. The device K4401 is changed from the effect standby state to the one-sided falling state (see FIG. 1658). During this time, the rotary decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating clockwise, and the moving device K4560 is slid to the right along the elongated device K540 while maintaining this rotating motion.
When the right detection sensor K556a (see FIG. 1667) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the right end of the movement range, the left rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise to assume the first release posture (see FIG. 1674). (Refer to FIG. 1674).
As a result, the left side of the lifting device K4500 is unsupported, and the left side is lowered (dropped), so that the elongated device K540 is in the left first inclined posture (FIG. 1711) as shown in FIG. 1718(b). See).
In this case, the displacement (fall distance) on the left side of the lifting device K4500 is longer than the displacement on the right side of the lifting device K4500. On the other hand, in this operation pattern, since the moving device K4560 is positioned in advance at the right end of the moving range, the impact transmitted to the moving device K4560 can be reduced.

As the left side of the lifting device K4560 is lowered (dropped), the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed, and the rotating movement in the counterclockwise direction is started. While maintaining this rotating motion, the moving device K4560 is slid leftward along the elongated device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the left detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1667) that it has reached the left end of the movement range, and is stopped upon reaching the left end of the movement range (FIG. 1718 ( c) see).
Figures 1719(a) to 1719(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1719(a) to 1719(c), a part of the eleventh operation pattern (upward direction period) of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, and the pair of rotations in the corresponding states The state of the member K430 is schematically shown, and the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is de-energized (see FIG. 1670(a)) is shown enlarged.
In the eleventh operation pattern, after the state illustrated in FIG. 1718(c), the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed and clockwise rotation is started. While maintaining this rotating motion, the moving device K4560 is slid rightward along the elongated device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until reaching the middle of the movement range is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667), and the sliding movement is stopped based on reaching the center of the movement range (see FIG. 1667). See Figure 1719(a)). Even after the sliding movement is stopped, the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 is continued.
After that, the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronism to take the intermediate support posture (see FIG. 1678). In this process, on the left side of the lifting device K4560, the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1674) is pushed up via the transmission tube K434, thereby lifting the left side of the elongated device K540.

On the other hand, the right side of the lifting device K4560 is in a state of being supported by the stopper member K462. transmission does not occur. Therefore, between the state shown in FIG. 1719(a) and the state shown in FIG. 1719(b), the vertical position of the right side of the lifting device K4560 is maintained.
That is, the pair of left and right rotating members K430 rotate in synchronism. The left rotating member K430 generates a load that pushes up the left side of the lifting device K4560, but the right rotating member K430 does not push up the lifting device K4560. no load.
After that, the synchronous rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is continued, and the first movable device K4401 returns to the waiting state for rendering (see FIG. 1719(c)), completing the eleventh operation pattern. From the state illustrated in FIG. 1719(b), the lower members K510 (see FIG. 1674) are pushed up on both the left and right sides via the transmission tubular portions K434, and the elongated device K540 is lifted.
Here, since the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, the transmission tubular portion K434 is horizontally symmetrical, but the vertical position is the same. Therefore, since the upper and lower positions of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1674) are the same on the left and right sides, the elongated device K540 can be lifted while maintaining the posture of the elongated device K540 horizontally.

As described above, according to the eleventh operation pattern, the pair of left and right rotating members K430 do not start rotating at different timings, but start rotating at the same time. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the rise timing is shifted.
Figures 1720(a) to 1720(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1720(a) to 1720(c), a part of the twelfth operation pattern (upward direction period) of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, and a pair of rotations in corresponding states is shown. The state of the member K430 is schematically illustrated, and the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited (see FIG. 1670(b)) is illustrated in an enlarged manner.
In the twelfth operation pattern, after the state illustrated in FIG. 1718(c), the driving solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is energized (see FIG. 1670(b)), and the rotation direction of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed. 1720(a)). In this state, the orientation of the elongated device K540 is substantially horizontal.
Prior to the movement of the moving device K4560 to the right from the state illustrated in FIG. 1653) to the lowered arrangement state (see FIG. 1654). This makes it possible to avoid a collision between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701. The fact that the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) has changed to the lowered arrangement state can be determined by switching the output of the detection sensor K711e (see FIG. 1686).

When the output of the detection sensor K711e is switched and it is determined that the second movable device K4701 has changed to the lowered arrangement state, the moving device K4560 moves to the elongate device K540 while the clockwise rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is maintained. is slid to the right along the The moving device K4560 is slid until reaching the middle of the movement range is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667), and the sliding movement is stopped based on reaching the center of the movement range (see FIG. 1667). See FIG. 1720(b)). Even after the sliding movement is stopped, the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 is continued.
After that, as shown in FIG. 1720(c), from the state shown in FIG. 1720(b), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise. Rotating motion is performed, the state is returned to the effect waiting state, and the 12th motion pattern is completed.
In this way, the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, so that the transmission tubular portion K434 is arranged symmetrically, but the vertical position is the same. Therefore, since the vertical position of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1674) is the same on the left and right sides, the elongated device K540 can be lifted while maintaining the posture of the elongated device K540 horizontally.
Thus, according to the twelfth operation pattern, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is energized to make the operation pattern different from the eleventh operation pattern, while the operation pattern required when the long device K540 is raised is increased. The rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 can be the same as the eleventh operation pattern. That is, by partially sharing the operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.

When energizing the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460, the weight of the elongated device K540 acts as a resistance, and there is a possibility that the drive force required for the drive solenoid KSOL41 becomes excessive. As in the embodiment, a drive solenoid KSOL41 is arranged on the left-right opposite side of the drive motor KMT51 (see FIG. 1666) that generates drive force for sliding movement of the moving device K4560.
As a result, the center of gravity of the elongated device K540 is pushed to the left by the weight of the drive motor KMT51, and the drive solenoid KSOL41 is operated on the opposite side (right side). can be reduced, and the drive force required for the drive solenoid KSOL41 can be reduced.
Figures 1721(a) to 1721(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1721(a) to 1721(c), a part of the thirteenth operation pattern (downward direction period) of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order. The state of the member K430 is schematically illustrated, and the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited (see FIG. 1670(b)) is illustrated in an enlarged manner.
In the thirteenth operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 1721(a), first, the right rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise from the effect waiting state (see FIG. 1653) of the first movable device K4401. 1 release posture (see FIG. 1674).

As a result, the support on the right side of the lifting device K4500 is released, and the right side is lowered (dropped). At this time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized, and the stopper member K462 is retracted from below the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1670(b)). As shown in a), the first movable device K4401 is changed from the effect standby state to the right second inclined posture (see FIG. 1710) of the long device K540. During this time, the rotary decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating clockwise, and the moving device K4560 is slid to the right along the elongated device K540 while maintaining this rotating motion.
When the right detection sensor K556a (see FIG. 1667) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the right end of the movement range, the left rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise to assume the first release posture (see FIG. 1674). (Refer to FIG. 1674).
As a result, the support of the left side of the lifting device K4500 is released, and the left side is lowered (dropped), so that the attitude of the elongated device K540 is substantially horizontally horizontal as shown in FIG. 1721(b). .
In the change from FIG. 1721(a) to FIG. 1721(b), the displacement (dropping distance) on the left side of the lifting device K4500 is longer than the displacement on the right side, and the shock generated on the left side of the lifting device K4500 can be increased. have a nature. On the other hand, in this operation pattern, the movement device K4560 is positioned in advance at the right end of the movement range, so the impact transmitted to the movement device K4560 can be reduced.

As the left side of the lifting device K4560 is lowered (dropped), the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed, and the rotating movement in the counterclockwise direction is started. While maintaining this rotating motion, the moving device K4560 is slid leftward along the elongated device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the left detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1667) that it has reached the left end of the movement range, and is stopped upon reaching the left end of the movement range (FIG. 1721 ( c) see).
Prior to the movement of the moving device K4560 to the left from the state illustrated in FIG. 1653) to the lowered arrangement state (see FIG. 1654). This makes it possible to avoid a collision between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701. The fact that the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each embodiment described above) has changed to the lowered arrangement state can be determined by switching the output of the detection sensor K711e (see FIG. 1686).
When the output of the detection sensor K711e is switched and it is determined that the second movable device K4701 has changed to the lowered arrangement state, the moving device K4560 is moved to the elongated device while the counterclockwise rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 is maintained. It is slid to the left along K540.
The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the left detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1667) that it has reached the left end of the movement range. See FIG. 1721(c)).

It should be noted that the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be controlled to continue even after the sliding movement is stopped, or the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be controlled to be stopped based on the stoppage of the sliding movement. can be
After the state illustrated in FIG. 1721 (c), similarly to the twelfth operation pattern described above, it returns to the production standby state through the states illustrated in FIGS. 1720 (b) and 1720 (c), A thirteenth operation pattern is completed.
That is, in the thirteenth operation pattern, the direction of rotation of the decorative rotary member K4578 is reversed from the state shown in FIG. The moving device K4560 is slid rightward along the elongated device K540 while maintaining the rotating motion. The moving device K4560 is slid until reaching the middle of the movement range is detected by the center detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667), and the sliding movement is stopped based on reaching the center of the movement range (see FIG. 1667). See FIG. 1720(b)). Even after the sliding movement is stopped, the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 is continued.
After that, as shown in FIG. 1720(c), from the state shown in FIG. 1720(b), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise. The elongated device K540 is rotated and returned to the effect waiting state, and the thirteenth operation pattern is completed.

In this way, the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, so that the transmission tubular portion K434 is arranged symmetrically, but the vertical position is the same. Therefore, since the vertical position of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1674) is the same on the left and right sides, the elongated device K540 can be lifted while maintaining the posture of the elongated device K540 horizontally.
Thus, according to the thirteenth operation pattern, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is energized to make the operation pattern different from the eleventh operation pattern, while the operation pattern required when the long device K540 is raised is increased. The rotational motion pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 can be the same as the eleventh motion pattern (and the twelfth motion pattern). That is, by partially sharing the operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.
Figures 1722(a) to 1722(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1722(a) to 1722(c), a part of the 21st operation pattern (downward direction period) of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order. The state of the member K430 is schematically shown, and the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is de-energized (see FIG. 1670(a)) is shown enlarged.
In the 21st operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 1722(a), first, the left rotary member K430 is rotated clockwise from the waiting state for rendering of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1653). The release posture (see FIG. 1674, which corresponds to the left-right symmetrical posture in FIG. 1674 because the rotating member K430 is left-right reversed).

As a result, the left side of the lifting device K4500 is unsupported, and the left side is lowered (dropped). As a result, the first movable device K4401 changes from the effect waiting state to the left second inclined posture (see FIG. 1712(c)) of the long device K540. During this time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and the moving device K4560 is slid leftward along the elongated device K540 while maintaining this rotating motion. .
When the left detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1667) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the left end of the movement range, the right rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise to assume the first release posture (see FIG. 1667). 1674).
As a result, the support on the right side of the lifting device K4500 is released, and the right side is lowered (dropped). At this time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is de-energized, and the stopper member K462 is arranged below the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1670(b)), so that the connecting member K445 is supported by the stopper member K462. , as shown in FIG. 1722(b), the elongated device K540 is changed to the left first tilted posture (see FIG. 1711).
In the change from FIG. 1722(a) to FIG. 1722(b), the amount of displacement (fall distance) on the right side of the lifting device K4500 is longer than the displacement on the left side of the lifting device K4500. have a nature. On the other hand, in this operation pattern, the movement device K4560 is positioned in advance at the left end of the movement range, so the impact transmitted to the movement device K4560 can be reduced.

As the right side of the lifting device K4560 is lowered (dropped), the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed, and clockwise rotation is started. While maintaining this rotating motion, the moving device K4560 is slid rightward along the elongated device K540. The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667) that it has reached the intermediate position of the movement range, and is stopped when it reaches the intermediate position of the movement range (see FIG. 1667). 1722(c)).
It should be noted that the rotary decorative member K4578 may be controlled to continue rotating even after the slide movement is stopped, or the rotary decorative member K4578 may be controlled to stop rotating based on the stop of the slide movement. can be
In addition, when the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 1653), from the state shown in FIG. 1722(b) to FIG. ), the collision between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701 does not occur, so the second movable device K4701 is in the effect waiting state as shown in FIG. maintained in
After the state illustrated in FIG. 1722(c), similarly to the above-described eleventh operation pattern, it returns to the effect standby state through the states illustrated in FIGS. 1719(b) and 1719(c), A twenty-first operation pattern is completed.

That is, in the twenty-first operation pattern, the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K4578 rotates clockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. The member K430 is synchronously rotated counterclockwise, the elongated device K540 is returned to the effect waiting state, and the 21st operation pattern is completed.
Thus, according to the 21st operation pattern, while making the operation pattern different from the 11th to 13th operation patterns, the rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 required when the elongated device K540 is raised is determined. can be the same as the 11th to 13th operation patterns. That is, by partially sharing the operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.
In the twenty-first operation pattern, after the state illustrated in FIG. An operation pattern in which the elongated device K540 moves upward after the right side of the elongated device K540 drops from the left first inclined posture shown in 1722(b) and the posture becomes horizontal. may be set as the twenty-second operation pattern.
That is, even in the 22nd operation pattern, while the operation pattern is different from the 11th to 13th and 21st operation patterns, the rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 required when the elongated device K540 is raised is It can be the same as the 11th to 13th and 21st operation patterns. That is, by partially sharing the operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.

In the case of the 22nd operation pattern, the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1670(b)) abuts on the projecting receiving portion K462d of the stopper member K462 in the vertical direction, and the stopper member K462 rotates in a weighted state. However, in this embodiment, the lower end of the connecting member K445 is formed with a curved surface as in the above-described embodiments. The contact area with K462d can be reduced. As a result, the frictional resistance can be reduced, and the driving force required for rotating the stopper member K462 can be reduced.
Figures 1723(a) to 1723(c) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. 1723(a) to 1723(c), a part of the 23rd operation pattern (downward direction period) of the first movable device K4401 is illustrated in chronological order, and a pair of rotations in corresponding states is shown. The state of the member K430 is schematically illustrated, and the state in which the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is excited (see FIG. 1670(b)) is illustrated in an enlarged manner.
In the twenty-third operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 1723(a), first, the left rotating member K430 is rotated clockwise from the waiting state for rendering of the first movable device K4401 (see FIG. 1653), and the first The release posture (see FIG. 1674, which corresponds to the left-right symmetrical posture in FIG. 1674 because the rotating member K430 is left-right reversed).
As a result, the left side of the lifting device K4500 is unsupported, and the left side is lowered (dropped). As a result, the first movable device K4401 changes from the effect waiting state to the left second inclined posture (see FIG. 1712(c)) of the long device K540. During this time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is controlled to continue rotating in the counterclockwise direction, and the moving device K4560 is slid leftward along the elongated device K540 while maintaining this rotating motion. .

When the left detection sensor K556c (see FIG. 1667) detects that the moving device K4560 has reached the left end of the movement range, the right rotating member K430 is rotated counterclockwise to assume the first release posture (see FIG. 1667). 1674).
As a result, the right side of the lifting device K4500 is unsupported, and the right side is lowered (dropped). At this time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized, and the stopper member K462 is retracted from below the connecting member K445 (see FIG. 1670(b)). As shown in b), the posture of the elongated device K540 is changed to a substantially horizontal posture.
In the change from FIG. 1723(a) to FIG. 1723(b), the amount of displacement (dropping distance) on the right side of the lifting device K4500 is longer than that on the left side of the lifting device K4500. have a nature. On the other hand, in this operation pattern, the movement device K4560 is positioned in advance at the left end of the movement range, so the impact transmitted to the movement device K4560 can be reduced.
As the right side of the lifting device K4500 is lowered (dropped), the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is reversed, and clockwise rotation is started. While maintaining this rotating motion, the moving device K4560 is slid rightward along the elongated device K540.

Prior to the movement of the moving device K4560 to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1653) to the lowered arrangement state (see FIG. 1654). This makes it possible to avoid a collision between the moving device K4560 and the second movable device K4701. The fact that the second movable device K4701 (corresponding to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) has changed to the lowered arrangement state can be determined by switching the output of the detection sensor K711e (see FIG. 1686).
When the output of the detection sensor K711e is switched and it is determined that the second movable device K4701 has changed to the lowered arrangement state, the moving device K4560 is moved to the elongate device K540 while the clockwise rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is maintained. is slid to the right along the
Although FIG. 1723(b) illustrates a case where the second movable device K4701 is changed to the lowered arrangement state at the time when the right side of the elevator device K4500 is lowered (dropped), this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, after the right side of the lifting device K4500 is lowered (dropped), the second movable device K4701 may be controlled to change to the lowered arrangement state.
In this case, when the right side of the lifting device K4500 descends (drops), the second movable device K4701 is positioned to interfere with the movement of the moving device K4560. , or whether the lifting device K4500 will move up without moving. As a result, attention to the second movable device K4701 and the moving device K4560 can be improved.

The moving device K4560 is slid until it is detected by the central detection sensor K556b (see FIG. 1667) that it has reached the intermediate position of the movement range, and is stopped upon reaching the intermediate position of the movement range (see FIG. 1667). 1723(c)).
It should be noted that the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be controlled to continue even after the sliding movement is stopped, or the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be controlled to be stopped based on the stoppage of the sliding movement. can be
After the state illustrated in FIG. 1723(c), it is the same as the twelfth operation pattern described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 1720(c), from the state shown in FIG. 1723(c), the left rotating member K430 rotates clockwise and the right rotating member K430 rotates counterclockwise in synchronism. It rotates, is returned to the presentation standby state, and the 23rd operation pattern is completed.
In this way, the rotation of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 is synchronized, so that the transmission tubular portion K434 is arranged symmetrically, but the vertical position is the same. Therefore, since the vertical position of the lower member K510 (see FIG. 1674) is the same on the left and right sides, the elongated device K540 can be lifted while maintaining the posture of the elongated device K540 horizontally.

As described above, according to the 23rd operation pattern, the driving solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is energized to make the operation pattern different from the 21st and 22nd operation patterns, while the operation pattern required when the elongated device K540 is raised is increased. The rotation operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 can be the same as the 11th to 13th, 21st and 22nd operation patterns. That is, by partially sharing the operation pattern of the pair of left and right rotating members K430 between different operation patterns, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program.
In the above-described embodiment, the moving device K4560 including the rotary decorative member K4578 is arranged inside the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639) when viewed from the front. do not have.
For example, it may be arranged outside the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639) when viewed from the front. In this case, by fixing the center of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578, it is possible to limit the range in which the game ball flowing down the outside of the center frame K86 overlaps with the game ball when viewed in the front-rear direction. By overlapping in the front-rear direction, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses sight of the game ball.
Further, for example, when the moving device K4560 is arranged between the upper right lamp K940 and the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639) in front view, the moving device K4560 displays the third symbol display device K81 and emits light from the upper right lamp K940. It plays a role of connecting with the mode, and can make it easy to visually recognize the display of the upper right lamp K940, the display of the third pattern display device K81, and the display of the display device K4580 in series.

These are not limited to between the upper right lamp K940, and the same can be said when the moving device K4560 is arranged between other display lamps K900. For example, when the moving device K4560 is arranged between the left side lamp K930 and the third pattern display device K81, the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated clockwise so that the light rises upward at the left side lamp K930. The light emission timing of the LEDs arranged inside the left side lamp K930 is controlled so that the third pattern display device K81 is visually recognized, and the moving image display is performed so that the light is lowered downward in the left range of the third pattern display device K81. , the player can be made to visually recognize as if the light visually recognized by the left side lamp K930 and the third pattern display device K81 is rotating the rotary decorative member K4578. In this manner, the light from the left side lamp K930, the operation of the rotary decorative member K4578, and the display by the third pattern display device K81 can be visually recognized in series.
Further, for example, when the moving device K4560 is arranged on the front side of the left decoration device K350, the light from the light emitting substrate inside the left decoration device K350 can ensure the brightness of the outer shape of the moving device K4560. . As a result, the rendering effect of the moving device K4560 can be improved.
When the moving device K4560 is arranged outside the center frame K86 (see FIG. 1639) in a front view, it may be arranged behind the base plate K13 (see FIG. 1713). It may be arranged on the front side of K13.
When the moving device K4560 is arranged on the front side of the base plate K13, it may be arranged on the back side of the glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1713), or may be arranged on the front side of the glass unit H16. . The closer it is to the player, the easier it is for the player to recognize it, and the better the performance.

When the moving device K4560 is arranged on the front side of the glass unit H16 (see FIG. 1713), the moving device K4560 may be configured to be rotatably fixed to the glass unit H16. (see FIG. 1713). As a result, the light from the third pattern display device K81 causes not only the movable parts constituting the operation unit K300 (see FIG. 1640) arranged on the back side of the glass unit H16, but also the moving parts arranged on the front side of the glass unit H16. The moving parts (transporter K4560) can also be illuminated.
Figures 1724(a), 1724(b) and 1725 are front views of the second mobile device K4701. 1724(a), 1724(b), and 1725, the second movable device K4701 (equivalent to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is in the lowered position (see FIG. 1686(b)). A breaking-up movement pattern in which the vertical slide member K4720 is moved upward by rotating the arm member K735 clockwise when viewed from the front is shown in chronological order. The followable member K740, the interlocking member K750, and the main decorative member K760 (see FIG. 1682), which are arranged on the front side of the vertical slide member K4720, are omitted.
In FIGS. 1724(a), 1724(b), and 1725, the transmission end member K4737, the arm member K735, and the drive-side two-layer gear K731, which overlap in front view, are partially cut off for easy understanding. , and phantom lines so that the configuration on the far side can be visually recognized.
The second movable device K4701 in this embodiment uses many of the configurations from the second movable device K701 described above. Some configuration changes have been made to allow for rotational movement in the circular direction.

For example, the arrangement of the metal rod K713 is moved leftward so as not to interfere with the arm member K735 rotating clockwise from the lowered arrangement state. Along with this, the lateral width of the vertical slide member K4720 is also enlarged.
In addition, the end of the guide hole K4737b is extended so that even if the transmission end member K4737 rotates in the clockwise direction in a front view from the lowered position, the vertical slide member K4720 (the vertical slide member K720 in each of the embodiments described above) does not move. 1683).
In each of the above embodiments, the right side surface of the stopper portion K711g extending frontward from the main body portion K711 of the base member K710 on the right side of the metal rod K713 abuts the arm member K735 in the rotational direction (abuts in the lateral direction). Thus, the rotation of the arm member K735 and the transmission end member K4737 is stopped (damped) in the lowered state (see FIG. 1686(b)). This action cannot be expected because it does not abut on the member K735.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in each of the above embodiments, in the lowered arrangement state, the center of the fourth support portion K712d of the base member K710 (the center of the circular shape) and the center of the rotation tip portion K735b of the arm member K735 (the center of the circular shape) and the center (the center of the circular shape) of the proximal side support hole K737a of the transmission terminating member K4737 are arranged at positions overlapping the straight line KVL78 extending substantially in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the arm member K735 rotates (swings) in either the left or right direction from the lowered state about the fourth support portion K712d, the height position of the base end side support hole K737a rises along with the rotation. However, in the direction of pushing back the upward displacement (the direction of lowering the height position of the base end side support hole K737a), the vertical slide member K4720, the followable member K740 arranged on the vertical slide member K4720, and the interlocking member Since the own weight of K750 and the main decorative member K760 (see FIG. 1682) is applied, the posture of the arm member K735 can be stabilized in the lowered posture (see FIG. 1724(a)).
That is, in the operation control for rotating the arm member K735 in the clockwise direction in front view from the effect standby state (see FIG. 1684(a)) to change to the lowered arrangement state, the amount of rotation for rotating the arm member K735 by 90 degrees. Even if control failure occurs and the rotation angle of the arm member K735 varies from 88 degrees to 92 degrees under control to rotate the drive gear KMG72, the variation will be (equivalent to the vertical slide member K720 in ), the followable member K740, the interlocking member K750, and the main decorative member K760 (see FIG. 1682) are corrected by their own weights, thereby changing the posture of the arm member K735 to the posture in the lowered arrangement state (see FIG. 1724 (a)) can be stabilized.
In FIG. 1724(b), the angle of inclination of the arm member K735 with respect to the vertical direction is the same as the state illustrated in FIG. That is, the height positions of the base end side support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) are the same as in the state shown in FIG. 1686(a).
In diagram 1725, the motion end state of the breakthrough climb motion pattern is illustrated. That is, the operation end state of the breakthrough rising operation pattern is set as the state of the rotation angle immediately before the gear teeth of the rear layer transmission portion K731b and the gear teeth of the rear layer transmission portion K733b of the transmission side double-layer gear K733 are disengaged. be done.

In the state illustrated in FIG. 1725, the arm member K735 has not reached the position in the raised position (see FIG. 1685). That is, the base end side support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above-described embodiments) in the operation end state of the breakthrough upward motion pattern in which the arm member K735 rotates clockwise from the downward arrangement state. The height position is the base end side support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) in the operation end state of the stair rising operation pattern in which the arm member K735 rotates counterclockwise from the downward arrangement state. ) is lower than the height position (see FIG. 1685(b)).
With such a configuration, according to the second movable device K4701, by reciprocating (vibrating) the arm member K735 in the horizontal direction around the lowered state, the base end side support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 are moved. (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above embodiments) can be vertically reciprocated (vibrated). Further, the two operation modes starting from the lowered arrangement state are the same in that the driving motor KMG71 (see FIG. 1683) continues to be driven at a constant speed, but the rotation direction of the arm member K735 is changed (driving It can be generated by making the driving direction of the motor KMG71 different).
First, in the case of the step-up operation pattern in which the arm member K735 is rotated counterclockwise from the lowered arrangement state, the base end side support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (the vertical slide member K4720 in each of the above embodiments) from the lowered arrangement state. (corresponding to the member K720) is raised (see FIG. 1686 (a)), the rising operation is temporarily stopped in the arrangement in the production standby state (see FIG. 1684 (a)), and then to the height position in the raised arrangement state It is moved upward (see FIGS. 1684(b), 1772(a), 1772(b)).
Secondly, in the case of a breaking-up movement pattern in which the arm member K735 is rotated clockwise from the lowered arrangement state, the base end side support hole K737a and the vertical slide member K4720 (the vertical slide member in each of the above embodiments) from the lowered arrangement state. (equivalent to K720) is the same as the stair-climbing motion pattern (see FIGS. 1686(a) and 1724(b)), but the rising motion is not paused, and all at once until the motion end state. It is moved up (see Figure 1725).

According to the second movable device K4701, particularly in the vicinity of the lowered arrangement state, the vertical slide member K4720 arranged on the front side of the arm member K735 blocks the field of view to the arm member K735. It is configured such that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the rotation is clockwise or counterclockwise.
Therefore, when the second movable device K4701 is moved upward from the downward arrangement state, the second movable device K4701 moves up to a certain height (see FIGS. 1686(a) and 1724(b)), and the second movable device K4701 follows the stair climbing motion pattern. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the movement is being performed with a breakthrough rising movement pattern.
In this case, depending on whether the second mobile device K4701 operates in the stair climbing motion pattern or the breakthrough rising motion pattern, the subsequent production development changes, or the special figure fluctuation jackpot expectation level changes. By providing such a setting, it is possible to improve the attention to the second mobile device K4701.
Here, switching between an operation pattern that causes an intermediate stop and an operation pattern that does not cause an intermediate stop can be switched between a state in which the vertical slide member K4720 can be contacted in the vertical direction and a state in which the vertical slide member K4720 retreats from the movement trajectory. It can also be realized by providing a movable stopper member. In this case, there is no need to form the arcuate portions K732 and K734.

On the other hand, in the case of the configuration in which the vertical slide member K4720 is stopped by contact with the stopper member, the higher the operating speed, the greater the load generated, so the possibility of damage to the vertical slide member K4720 or the stopper member increases. If a brake is generated before contact or the movement speed is slowed down to avoid damage, the effect of the presentation is reduced because the difference between the movement pattern that stops halfway and the movement pattern that does not stop halfway is difficult to understand. there is a possibility.
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the state in which the vertical slide member K4720 (corresponding to the vertical slide member K720 in each of the above-described embodiments) stops midway in the stair climbing motion pattern is the circular arc portion K734. K732 is in a state of being rubbed (see FIG. 1684(a)), and no matter how high the operating speed is, an impact to the extent that it is damaged does not occur, rather, the load in the rotational direction is the direction of transmission of the driving force. Since it is configured so that it is difficult to transmit to the downstream side (the transmission side double layer gear K733, the arm member K735, the transmission terminal member K4737, etc. downstream of the driving side double layer gear K731), the intermediate position (Fig. 1686 (a ) and FIG. 1724(b)), high-speed operation is possible.
As a result, in the stair-climbing motion pattern, it is possible to produce a performance in which a high-speed ascending motion suddenly stops, while the stair-climbing motion pattern can be confused with the stair-climbing motion pattern based on the fact that the rising speed can be increased in the stair-climbing motion pattern. It is also possible to increase the rising speed of the breakthrough rising motion pattern. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the operating speed of the upward movement, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the second movable device K4701.
FIG. 1726 is a schematic front view showing the plate-like portion K4811 of the rear opening/closing member K4810 of the rear-side movable device K4800, the plate-like portion K4821 of the middle-side opening/closing member K4820, and the plate-like portion K4831 of the front opening/closing member K4830. is. The rear opening/closing member K4810, the middle opening/closing member K4820, and the front opening/closing member K4830 are substantially the same as the rear opening/closing member K810, the middle opening/closing member K820, and the front opening/closing member K830 of the rear movable device K800 described above. On the other hand, there are differences in the decorations applied to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, which will be explained again.

On the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, seals having the same outer shape as the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are attached when viewed from the front, so that substantially the entirety is visually recognized in the color of the seal when viewed from the front. be done.
The decorations applied to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are based on the shapes printed on the stickers. The outline KOL481 in the shape of the Roman letter "S" is applied to the plate-like portions K4821 and K4831 on the left side, as in the above embodiments (see FIG. 1698(b)).
Further, in the present embodiment, the plate-like portions K4811 and K4821 on the right side have an inner contour KOL482a in the shape of a Roman letter "G" and an outer contour KOL482b in the shape of a Roman letter "G" surrounding the inner contour KOL482a. The right plate-like portion K4821 is provided with an outline KOL483 in the shape of a Roman letter "O", and the right plate-like portion K4831 is provided with an outline KOL484 in the shape of a graphic "crown".
In this embodiment, the shape portion is printed in red on a colorless and transparent seal. Since the areas outside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483 and KOL484 and inside the inside contour KOL482a are printed in red, the areas outside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483 and KOL484 and inside the inside contour KOL482a are visible in red. , inside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 and outside the inner contour KOL482a are colorless and transparent.

During the actual game, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 in the closed state (see FIG. 1726) are not visually recognized by themselves, and a third symbol behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 is displayed. The display device K81 can also be seen through (see FIGS. 1698(b) and 1698(c)). Therefore, the visual recognition mode of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can change according to the display of the third pattern display device K81.
Figure 1727(a) is a front view of the display area of the third symbol display device K81, and Figure 1727(b) is the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device K81 illustrated in Figure 1727(a). 1728(a) is a front view of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and FIG. It is a front view of plate-like parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 illustrated in a).
In FIG. 1727(a), in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the same red light (same deep red color) as the stickers attached to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is emitted. is displayed (first aspect).
In this case, as shown in FIG. 1727(b), inside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 of the plate-like parts K4811, K4821, K4831 arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. and the outside of the inner contour KOL482a is visually recognized in red like the display in the display area. , KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 become difficult to distinguish.

Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player's attention to go to the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484, and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 give the impression that they are simply painted over in red. .
In FIG. 1728(a), in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, light including colors other than red (for example, white light ) is displayed so as to emit light on the entire surface (second aspect).
In this case, as shown in FIG. 1728(b), inside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 of the plate-like parts K4811, K4821, K4831 arranged on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. And the outside of the inner contour KOL482a is visible in the color of light (including colors other than red) irradiated in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, while the outer and inner sides of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 Inside the outline KOL482a, among the colors of the light emitted in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, colors other than red are absorbed by the seal and are visually recognized as red.
Therefore, the color of the light (including colors other than red) inside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 and outside the inner contour KOL482a and the red color outside the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 and inside the inner contour KOL482a , the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 can be easily distinguished.

Therefore, it becomes easier to draw the player's attention to the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484, and the visual appearance of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 gives the impression that some suggestions are being made to the player. give.
In this way, while adopting the aspect in which the display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is the same color display (see FIGS. 1727(a) and 1728(a)), it is different from the first aspect in which the colors are different. In the second mode, the impression of the viewing mode through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 should be different from the relationship between the displayed light and the colors printed on the stickers of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. can be done.
In the above-described embodiment, the case where colored seals are attached to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 made of a colorless and transparent resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a non-transmissive printed seal may be attached, or the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be formed from a colored resin material (transparent resin material or non-transmissive resin material may be used). can be
In this case, the configuration of the shape by the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484 may be made by two-color molding, may be made by pasting a reel member matching the shape, or may be By forming concave portions and convex portions, it is also possible to change the light transmittance and adjust the viewing mode.

The color applied to the resin material, such as the color of the curing agent, often improves the material strength and stickiness of the material compared to colorless and transparent resin materials. Therefore, when forming the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 from a colored resin material, sufficient material strength can be exhibited while the degree of freedom in shape design is improved.
Also, the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 formed on the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 have been described as shapes formed on the sticker to be stuck, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 may be visually recognized by the shapes of plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.
That is, for example, ribs may be formed so as to protrude rearward from the back sides of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 in a shape along the outlines KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484.
Since the thickness dimension of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is increased at the locations where the rib portions are formed, the transmittance is lowered and the portions are visually recognized as dark. That is, by forming darkly visible lines along the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484, it is possible to easily recognize the boundaries between the contours KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484. You can improve performance.

Furthermore, the rib portion can improve the material strength of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831, and can facilitate the prevention of bending deformation and folding deformation of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831.
By forming the ribs along the outlines KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 in the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in this manner, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be formed with improved effects. Durability can also be improved.
According to the above-described configuration, while the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are closed, by switching the display mode of the display area of the third symbol display device K81, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displayed. It is possible to instantly switch the impression of the viewing mode through.
For example, while the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in the closed state, the display mode of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is changed from one-sided red display (see FIG. 1727(a)) to one-sided multicolor ( For example, by switching the display (see FIG. 1728(a)) to the display (see FIG. 1728(a)), the viewing mode through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be changed from the mode illustrated in FIG. 1727(b) to FIG. It is possible to instantly switch to the mode illustrated in (b).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 constitute the same closed state, the outlines KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, and KOL483 of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are , KOL484 are easily discriminated, and the inside of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 and the outside of the inner contour KOL482a are easy to draw attention to (the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is easy to draw attention to); , KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 are difficult to discriminate and visually recognized in the same color on one side, so that it is easy to draw attention to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the front side.
That is, attention is paid to the display by the third pattern display device K81 arranged behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, which is peculiar to the case where the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are formed of a transparent material. In addition to the function (see FIG. 1728(b)) of letting A function (see FIG. 1727(b)) of making it difficult to draw attention to the display area of the third pattern display device K81 on the rear side can also be produced.
An example of setting the display mode in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1728(a) and 1728(b). In the above description, a case was described in which the display area of the third pattern display device K81 was controlled to show the same aspect (color) of light. The display area of the third pattern display device K81 may be divided into a plurality of ranges, and each range may be configured to be displayable in different display modes.
For example, when the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are closed, the first door effect display KER481 can be executed in a range that includes the outline KOL481 in a front view, and a range that includes the outer contour KOL482b in a front view. , the second door effect display KER482 is executable, the third door effect display KER483 is executable in the range including the outline KOL483 in the front view, and the fourth door effect display KER484 is executable in the range including the outline KOL484 in the front view. Set it to be executable.

When each door effect display KER481, KER482, KER483, KER484 is displayed including a color other than red, the display range is larger than each corresponding contour KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484, but each contour KOL481, KOL482b, Colors other than red are absorbed by the seal outside KOL483 and KOL484, so that display of colors other than red is visible only inside each of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483 and KOL484.
For example, in the first door effect display KER481, a display in which seven rainbow colors are arranged in stripes at equal intervals may be performed. In this case, only the inside of the contour KOL481 can be visually recognized in rainbow colors, and the outside of the contour KOL481 can be visually recognized in red, so that the player can visually recognize the Roman letter "S" in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that some kind of profit can be obtained (for example, that a special symbol lottery resulted in a big win).
For example, in the second door effect display KER482, the vertically extending yellow strip moves leftward at regular intervals, and in the third door effect display KER483, the horizontally extending yellow strip moves upward. , may be displayed at regular intervals.
In this case, the yellow portion moves to the left only on the outside of the inner contour KOL482a and the inside of the outer contour KOL482b, and the yellow portion moves upward only on the inside of the contour KOL483. Since the outside of the contour KOL482b and the outside of the contour KOL483 can be visually recognized in red, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the romaji "GO" in a manner in which the yellow part moves, and the movement direction of the yellow part is The line of sight can be guided to the upper left direction.

As a result, even if the player's line of sight is biased to the right half of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the player's line of sight can be guided to the left side, so that the contour KOL 481 is brought into the field of vision. By doing so, it is possible to make the user notice the display of the rainbow-colored roman letter "S".
For example, the fourth door effect display KER484 may be controlled to alternately display and disappear (blink) in gold on one side. In this case, only the inside of the outline KOL 484 is visible in gold during display to give the impression of the "crown", while when the display is turned off, the "crown" is visually recognized as if there is no "crown". can be done.
In this case, the impression can be varied by varying the ratio of the display time and the display off time. That is, when the display time is longer than the display off time, the "crown" is visually recognized darker and more substantial. On the other hand, when the display time is shorter than the display off time, the "crown" is visually recognized faintly (visible transparently), giving the impression of an afterimage.
In this way, while the outer edge shape of each of the door effect displays KER481, KER482, KER483, and KER484 is a simple rectangular shape, each outline is formed in accordance with the display mode of each of the door effect displays KER481, KER482, KER483, and KER484. The shape of KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 can be visually recognized by the player.

Therefore, the display mode of the third pattern display device K81 can be a simpler pattern than when the shapes of the outlines KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 arranged in front are displayed. While shortening the time, the player can visually recognize patterns corresponding to the shapes of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484.
Light emission inside each of the outlines KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 uses light emission in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and therefore can be visually recognized as surface light emission. Therefore, compared to the movement device K4560 (corresponding to the movement device K560 in each of the above-described embodiments, see FIG. 1668) or the like that emits light from a point light source, the inner sides of the contours KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 are brighter and It can be made to shine more uniformly, and visibility can be improved.
In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the door effect displays KER481, KER482, KER483, and KER484 correspond only to the outlines KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 that open and close. It is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, a second door-shaped movable accessory that can be opened and closed in the same manner as the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be arranged on the front layer side (or the rear layer side) of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. . A sticker is also attached to the plate-shaped portion of the second door-shaped movable accessory, and in the closed state of the second door-shaped movable accessory, at a position overlapping each door effect display KER481, KER482, KER483, and KER484 in a front view, The seals are provided with contours different from each contour KOL481, KOL482b, KOL483, KOL484.

In this case, even if the display modes of the door effect displays KER481, KER482, KER483, and KER484 are the same, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in the closed state (see FIG. 1655) and the second door-shaped movable accessory is displayed. is in the production standby state (see FIG. 1653), and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in the production standby state (see FIG. 1653) and the second door-shaped movable accessory is in the closed state (see FIG. 1655). It is possible to change the visual recognition mode on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 between the case of and the case of .
The plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, like the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 in each of the above-described embodiments, stop in the closed state (see FIGS. 1692(c) and 1696), 1692(b) and FIG. 1695). That is, even if the stopping timing of the driving force is slightly shifted, it is possible to easily stop the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the closed state or the interlocking switching state.
Because the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 are driven by independent left and right drive motors KMT81, KMT82 (see FIG. 1689), respectively, like the plate-like portions K811, K821, K831 in each of the above-described embodiments. , left and right can be driven with their operation timings matched, or left and right can be operated independently.
That is, the effect standby state (see FIG. 1694), the linked switching state (see FIG. 1695), and the closed state (see FIG. 1696) described as the states of the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 in each of the above-described embodiments are It is not limited to simultaneous operation, and can be configured as a state in which either the left or the right can be taken.

Here, when the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are stopped by coming into contact with the mating door, there is a possibility that the stop position cannot be determined when only one side is operated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, stopping the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the closed state or the interlocking switching state Therefore, even when only one of the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 is operated, it can be accurately stopped in the closed state or the interlocking switching state. can.
The operation speeds of the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 will be described. 1692 and 1693), the drive motors KMT81 and KMT82 (see 1689) is driven at a constant driving speed, the moving speed of the base end slide member K880 can be maximized in the interlocked switching state (see FIG. 1692(b)).
FIG. 1729 is a schematic front view showing the plate-like portion K4811 of the rear opening/closing member K4810 of the rear-side movable device K4800, the plate-like portion K4821 of the middle-side opening/closing member K4820, and the plate-like portion K4831 of the front opening/closing member K4830. is. FIG. 1729 shows a visual recognition mode in the linked switching state (see FIGS. 1692(b) and 1695).
The rear-layer-side movable device K4800 operates so that the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 do not roughly overlap and the contents of the outlines KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 can be clearly understood (see FIG. 1726); The plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 partially overlap each other, so that the outlines KOL481, KOL482a, KOL482b, KOL483, and KOL484 (for example, the outlines KOL482a and KOL482b) become difficult to see (see FIG. 1729). be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the visual recognition mode by the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, thereby improving the attention and the effect of presentation.

As illustrated in FIG. 1729, at least a portion of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are overlapped in the front and rear, so that the width of the entire lateral width is reduced. The position where the inner side (colorless and transparent) of the outer contour KOL482b and the outer side (red color) of the contour KOL482 formed on the plate-like portion K4821 overlap, and the inner and outer sides of the inner contour KOL482a formed on the plate-shaped portion K4811. At the position where the outside (red) of the contour KOL482b and the inside (colorless and transparent) of the contour KOL482 formed on the plate-like portion K4821 overlap, the inside of the inside contour KOL482a formed on the plate-like portion K4811 and the outside of the outside contour KOL482b are Since the contours KOL482a and KOL482b are visually recognized in color (red), the areas of the portions that are easily discriminated (visible as colorless and transparent) are reduced.
Therefore, compared to the state illustrated in FIG. 1726, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the decorations formed as the contours KOL482a and KOL482b. Compared to the case where the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 slide left and right without changing the degree of overlapping in the front-rear direction, in this embodiment, the contours KOL482a and KOL482b are displayed in the third pattern display device. Since the overlap starts before K81 retreats to the outside, the areas visually recognized as the contours KOL482a and KOL482b (visually colorless and transparent) decrease earlier in the present embodiment, and the contours It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish KOL482.
1726 and 1729 can be made more conspicuous. You can make it bigger.
In the state illustrated in FIG. 1729, within the display area of the third pattern display device K81 illustrated by thick imaginary lines, the above-described first mode is displayed in the range behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. By executing the display of , the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visually recognized as frame-constituting parts (parts of frames) having a long left-right width arranged on the left and right sides of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. , and the area where the display of the third pattern display device K81 is visually recognized can be narrowed to the interval between the plate-like portions K4811 (reduced display mode).

That is, since it is possible to make it appear as if the size of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 has changed, only the display performance suitable for the size of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 itself is given to the player. Instead, it is possible to show a display effect suitable for the apparently changed (reduced) size of the display area by the same third pattern display device K81.
On the other hand, within the display area of the third pattern display device K81, in the range located behind the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831, the color of the sticker of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 is darker than the color of the sticker. The shape is visually recognized (display of the third mode) (red is not absorbed by the sticker, so the player can visually recognize the shape by shading through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831), and the space between the plate-shaped portions K4811 is displayed. Even when placed, the shape may be visually recognized by shading of red.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1729, the fourth back surface display K81d extending in the horizontal direction in the upper range of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 has the same density as the stickers of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. , and inside the fourth rear display K81d, an arrow-shaped fifth rear display K81e pointing to the right is displayed in a darker red than the red of the stickers of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.
In this case, it does not give the impression that the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is partitioned by the inner end of the plate-shaped portion K4811, and the third pattern display device can be seen through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. The fourth rear display K81d and the fifth rear display K81e in the display area of K81 can be seen through.

According to this aspect, even if the fifth rear display K81e overlaps the inner edge of the plate-like portion K4811, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Even when displaying as a dynamic display that slides in the right direction, the player does not feel uncomfortable.
Thus, it is possible to execute a display effect suitable for the size of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 itself while the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device K81. Yes (non-reduced display mode).
As described above, in the present embodiment, in a state in which the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device K81, the player is asked to Not only the display effect suitable for the size of the display area of the three-pattern display device K81 itself, but also the display effect suitable for the apparently changed (reduced) size of the display area can be shown. It is realized by switching the display mode of the third pattern display device K81.
In the reduced display mode and the non-reduced display mode described above, designation of the display range behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is not limited to the projection range of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.

For example, in the reduced display mode, the left and right inner ends of the range in which the display of the first mode described above is executed are shifted to the left and right outer sides of the left and right inner tip side (sides facing each other) edges of the plate-shaped portion K4811. You can do it. In this case, even if the operations (stop positions) of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 become unstable, the display in the first mode may be exposed without being covered by the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. can be easily avoided.
Further, in the reduced display mode, by displaying a strip extending in the vertical direction on the left and right inner tip sides of the plate-shaped portion K4811, the display range of the third pattern display device K81 in the interval between the left and right plate-shaped portions K4811 and the plate It is possible to make it easier to distinguish the display range behind the K4811, K4821, and K4831, but the position of this band-like display is not limited to the projection range of the left and right inner ends of the plate K4811.
For example, the left and right plate-like portions K4811 may be shifted to the opposite sides (left and right inner sides). In this case, even if the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 become unstable in operation (stop position), the strip-shaped display is covered with the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, making it difficult to see the strip-shaped display. situation can be easily avoided.
Figures 1730(a), 1730(b) and 1730(c) are top views of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821 and K4831 of the third pattern display device K81 and the rear layer side movable device K4800. 1730(a), 1730(b) and 1730(c) schematically show the positional relationship between the third pattern display device K81 and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831.

As shown in FIG. 1730(a), in the present embodiment, the third pattern display device K81 has a size that covers the display area and is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device K81. A transparent film K4891 adhered to the left and right frames of the third pattern display device K81, a pair of gripping portions K4892 disposed on both upper and lower sides of the transparent film K4891 for gripping the transparent film K4891, and the gripping portions K4892 moving forward and backward. A first driving device K4893 that slides in the direction and a second driving device K4894 that slides the first driving device K4893 in the left-right direction are disposed in the third symbol display device K81.
When the gripping portion K4892 is placed at the initial position (see FIG. 1730(a)), the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is parallel to the display surface K81s of the third pattern display device K81, and is visible through the transparent film K4891. The displayed display does not change much from the case where the transparent film K4891 is not provided.
As shown in FIG. 1730(b), when the pair of upper and lower gripping portions K4892 are arranged at the front position, the transparent film K4891 forms two sides of a triangle with the gripping portions K4892 as vertices in top view. A plane KS49 on which the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is formed is non-parallel to the display surface K81s of the third pattern display device K81. In this case, the display viewed through the transparent film K4891 may differ from the display without the transparent film K4891.
In FIG. 1730(c), a pair of upper and lower grips K4892 are arranged at the front position, and plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side of the back layer side movable device K4800 are arranged in the waiting state for the effect, while the left side The plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 of are arranged in a closed state.

As illustrated in FIG. 1730(c), the pair of upper and lower gripping portions K4892 is arranged at the front position, so that the edges of the transparent film K4891 on the side of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the front view and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and The front-to-rear spacing between the edges of the shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the side of the transparent film K4891 is narrowed.
Furthermore, a plane KS49 on which the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is formed when the pair of upper and lower gripping portions K4892 are arranged at the front position, and a direction KL50 in which the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 arranged in the closed state are arranged. are substantially parallel to each other.
The transparent film K4891 refracts the light incident from the side of the third pattern display device K81 so that the light travels in a direction perpendicular to the plane KS49 and is visually recognized by the player. As a result, the display from the third pattern display device K81, which is visually recognized on the front surface of the transparent film K4891, and the decorations, which are visually recognized through the front surfaces of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, can be easily visually recognized in series. be able to.
Note that the display on the side of the third pattern display device K81, which is visually recognized through the transparent film K4891, may be viewed in a direction perpendicular to the plane KS49 by the player. (extending to the left in FIG. 1730(c)). In this case, it is possible to prevent the gap between the transparent film K4891 and the plate-like portion K4811 from being visually recognized even when the player views it in a direction perpendicular to the plane KS49. When the player is viewing from the front, the area on the left side of the gripping portion K4892 overlaps the plate-like portion K4811, so that the color of the plate-like portion K4811 (red in this embodiment) is almost the same. By visually recognizing at , the visual recognition mode can be separated at the left-right center position where the grip part K4892 is arranged.

Note that the front and rear positions of the gripping portion K4892 can be changed by driving the first driving device K4893. Therefore, the inclination angle of the plane KS49 on which the front surface of the transparent film K4891 is formed can be arbitrarily set. That is, by adjusting the front-to-rear spacing between the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and the transparent film K4891, the visibility (whether it is visually recognized as a series or not as a series) can be adjusted, or the plate-shaped portions can be adjusted. The angle of the plane KS49 with respect to the direction in which the portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are arranged can be intentionally inclined.
The lateral position of the gripping portion K4892 can be changed by driving the second driving device K4894. Therefore, by aligning the left and right positions where the end portions of the plate-like portion K4811 are arranged and the left and right positions of the gripping portion K4892, the plate-like portion of the transparent film K4891 in front view can be displayed regardless of the left and right positions of the plate-like portion K4811. It is possible to narrow the front-to-rear distance between the edges on the K4811, K4821, K4831 side and the edges on the transparent film K4891 side of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831.
In this embodiment, when the transparent film K4891 is extended with the left and right ends of the third pattern display device K81 as apexes, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are arranged in a positional relationship along the direction KL50. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the front-to-rear spacing between the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and the third pattern display device K81 is shorter than the arrangement shown in FIG. A state in which the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 are parallel to each other can be configured by configuring the portion on the left and right inner sides of the plane KS49 so as to extend as vertices.
Further, for example, when the front-to-rear spacing between the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and the third pattern display device K81 is longer than the arrangement shown in FIG. By locating the position away from the outer frame of the three-symbol display device K81, the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 are parallel to each other.

In this embodiment, the direction of deformation of the transparent film K4891 is designed based on the fact that the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 move in the horizontal direction. If changed, it is natural that the deformation direction of the transparent film K4891 can also be changed. For example, if the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 slide in the front-rear direction, it is conceivable to arrange the holding portions K4892 on the left and right sides of the third pattern display device K81 to cause deformation of the transparent film K4891.
Moreover, although the case where one gripping portion K4892 is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of gripping portions K4892 may be arranged on one of the upper and lower sides. In this case, the deformation mode of the transparent film K4891 can be switched by switching the gripping portion K4892 to be displaced for each case, and the deformation mode of the transparent film K4891 can be changed by simultaneously displacing a plurality of gripping portions K4892. can.
In this embodiment, a case has been described in which there is a gap between the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 corresponding to the thickness of the plate-like portion K4811, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the end of the plate-like portion K4811 on the slide tip side (grip portion K4892 side) is inclined (sharpened) so as not to interfere with the extended transparent film K4891 (see FIG. 1730(b)). Then, the plane KS49 and the direction KL50 may be flush with each other when viewed from above. In this case, the transparent film K4891 and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be easily visually recognized as a series.
1731(a), 1731(b), 1731(c), 1731(d), 1731(e), 1731(f), 1731(g), 1731(h) and 1731 (i) is a partially enlarged front view of the pachinko machine K4010 in part MDCCCXVIII of FIG. 1712(a).

FIG. 1731(a) shows a case where the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in an effect standby state (see FIG. 1694). In FIG. 1731(b), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821 and K4831 on the left side are set in the effect waiting state (see FIG. 1694) and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821 and K4831 on the right side are in the closed state (see FIG. 1696). is shown.
In FIG. 1731(c), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 on the right side are in the waiting state for rendering (see FIG. 1694), and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 on the left side are in the closed state (see FIG. 1696). is shown. FIG. 1731(d) illustrates a case where the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are closed (see FIG. 1696).
In FIG. 1731(e), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side are in an interlocking switching state (see FIG. 1695), and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are in an effect waiting state (see FIG. 1694). is shown.
In FIG. 1731(f), the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are in an interlocking switching state (see FIG. 1695), and the plate-shaped portions on the right side K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in an effect waiting state (see FIG. 1694). is shown. FIG. 1731(g) shows a case where the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in the linked switching state (see FIG. 1695).

In FIG. 1731(h), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are in the linked switching state (see FIG. 1695), and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side are in the closed state (see FIG. 1696). is shown.
In FIG. 1731(i), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side are in the linked switching state (see FIG. 1695), and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are in the closed state (see FIG. 1696). is shown.
In this manner, the arrangement of the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 changes due to the difference in the state corresponding to the state of voltage application to the rear layer side movable device K4800 (see FIG. 1726). As a result, the visual recognition mode in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 is changed.
In this embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, by switching the states illustrated in FIGS. 1731(a) to 1731(i), the manner of showing the display area of the third symbol display device K81 can be switched. can.

For example, in the range covered by the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831, when the display of the third pattern display device K81 is set in the above-described first mode, the area covered by the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 is the same. Since the dynamic display cannot be visually recognized because it is viewed in dark red, the dynamic display can be visually recognized in the states illustrated in FIGS. 1731(b) to 1731(i). display range (for example, the display range that is visible surrounded by a frame, such as the third pattern display device K81 and the display device K4580) is narrower than the display range illustrated in FIG. 1731 (a) .
Also, for example, by changing from the state illustrated in FIG. 1731(a) to the state illustrated in FIG. 1731(b), the right range is hidden, and then the When the state is changed again, the player's attention to the right range can be improved.
Further, for example, by changing the state illustrated in FIG. 1731(e) and the state illustrated in FIG. It is possible for the player to visually recognize that the range is reciprocatingly displaced to the left and right. In this case, by setting the drawing so that the display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81 appears to slide left and right in conjunction with the displacement of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, the actual Even if the third pattern display device K81 is not slid to the right and left, it is possible to realize the presentation as if the third pattern display device K81 is slid to the left and right.
1731(b) and FIG. 1731(c) alternately, or the state shown in FIG. A similar effect can be realized even when the state shown in 1731(i) is changed so as to occur alternately.

Figures 1732(a), 1732(b) and 1732(c) are partially enlarged front views of the pachinko machine K4010 in the MDCCCXVIII section of Figure 1712(a). Figures 1732(a), 1732(b) and 1732(c) show examples of changes in the pachinko machine K4010 in chronological order. Illustration of the patterns and colors of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is omitted.
In FIG. 1732(a), the first movable device K4401 is operated in the symmetrical motion pattern of the eleventh motion pattern described above (see FIGS. 1718 and 1719), and the plate-like portion K4811, K4821 and K4831 are chronologically illustrated as the first combined motion pattern in which both the left and right sides are maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 1726). Such an operation pattern can be realized by arranging the switching device K460 (see FIG. 1718) on the left side and appropriately controlling the switching device K460 following the eleventh operation pattern.
The moving device K4560 receives, via the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831, light emitted from the third pattern display device K81 arranged behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831.
The plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visible in red due to the sealing member, and the light from the third pattern display device K81 passing through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is reddish. , the moving device K4560 is also visually recognized in a reddish color around the periphery.

In FIG. 1732(b), the second composite action pattern is illustrated in chronological order. In the second composite motion pattern, halfway (corresponding to the first and second figures from the top), the first movable device K4401 is operated in the above-described first composite motion pattern (see FIGS. 1718 and 1720). be.
On the other hand, among the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 of the rear movable device K4800 in which both the left and right sides are closed, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are changed to the effect waiting state (see FIG. 1694). (corresponding to the third figure from the top), immediately after that, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 on the left side is energized, causing the left side of the elongated device K540 to drop and the elongated device K540 to take a horizontal posture. (Corresponding to the fourth figure from the top).
In the twelfth operation pattern described above, the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1720(a)) was energized after the movement device K4560 reached the left end of the movement range. The drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized at a timing earlier than the arrival of the right end.
That is, at the timing when the moving device K4560 is moving between the left end and the center of the moving range (corresponding to the third drawing from the top), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are driven. At the same time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1720(a)) is excited.

In this case, while the left plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are closed, the moving device K4560 is slid downward and downward along the longitudinal direction of the elongated device K540. As K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to the effect standby state, the moving device K4560 is first displaced downward, and the inclination of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 thereafter becomes horizontal.
As a result, the side (left side) on which the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 operate can be aligned with the side on which the movement direction of the moving device K4560 changes (changes from the lower right direction to the downward direction). , the player can be caused to execute an action presentation in which the moving device K4560 and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 are visually recognized integrally.
The moving device K4560 receives the light emitted from the third pattern display device K81 arranged behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 halfway through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831.
The plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visible in red due to the sealing member, and the light from the third pattern display device K81 passing through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is reddish. , the moving device K4560 is also visually recognized in a reddish color around the periphery.

On the other hand, after the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 have changed to the effect standby state, the moving device K4560 allows the light emitted from the third symbol display device K81 to pass through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. receive.
Therefore, the reddish discoloration caused by the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is eliminated, and the outer periphery of the moving device K4560 is illuminated by the light from the third pattern display device K81, and the aspect affected by the color of the light. will be visible in
As a result, even if the display by the third symbol display device K81 is not switched, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are switched from the blocked state to the waiting state for the effect, thereby changing the appearance of the moving device K4560. can be executed.
In FIG. 1732(c), the third composite action pattern is illustrated in chronological order. In the third composite action pattern, halfway (corresponding to the first and second figures from the top), the first mobile device K4401 operates in the same manner as the second composite action pattern illustrated in FIG. 1732(b). This is similar to FIG. 1732(a) along with the eleventh operation pattern described above.

On the other hand, among the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 of the rear-layer-side movable device K4800 in which both the left and right sides are closed, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side are changed to the effect standby state (see FIG. 1694) halfway through. (corresponding to the third figure from the top), immediately after that, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 on the left side is energized (see FIG. 1720(a)), and the left side of the elongate device K540 is dropped, The scale device K540 assumes a horizontal posture (corresponding to the fourth drawing from the top).
In the twelfth operation pattern described above, the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1720(a)) was energized after the movement device K4560 reached the left end of the movement range. The drive solenoid KSOL41 is energized at a timing earlier than the arrival of the right end.
That is, at the timing when the moving device K4560 is moving between the center and the right end of the moving range (corresponding to the third drawing from the top), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left side are driven. At the same time, the drive solenoid KSOL41 (see FIG. 1720(a)) is excited.
In this case, while the right plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are closed, the moving device K4560 is slid downward and downward along the longitudinal direction of the elongated device K540. As K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to the effect standby state, the moving device K4560 is first displaced downward, and the inclination of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 thereafter becomes horizontal.

As a result, the side (right side) on which the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 operate can be aligned with the side on which the movement direction of the moving device K4560 changes (changes from the lower right direction to the downward direction). , the player can be caused to execute an action presentation in which the moving device K4560 and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 are visually recognized integrally.
The moving device K4560 receives the light emitted from the third pattern display device K81 arranged behind the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 halfway through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831.
The plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visible in red due to the sealing member, and the light from the third pattern display device K81 passing through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is reddish. , the moving device K4560 is also visually recognized in a reddish color around the periphery.
On the other hand, after the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 have changed to the effect standby state, the moving device K4560 allows the light emitted from the third symbol display device K81 to pass through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. receive.

Therefore, the reddish discoloration caused by the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is eliminated, and the outer periphery of the moving device K4560 is illuminated by the light from the third pattern display device K81, and the aspect affected by the color of the light. will be visible in
As a result, even if the display by the third symbol display device K81 is not switched (even if the same light-emitting state is maintained), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are switched from the closed state to the effect waiting state. An effect that changes the appearance of the mobile device K4560 can be executed.
By making it possible to perform motion effects of the moving device K4560 and the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the above-described first to third combined motion patterns, the moving device moves in front of the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the closed state. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the displacement in which the K4560 flows diagonally to the right. By changing the movement of the moving device K4560 and the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 to be bilaterally symmetrical, the moving device K4560 can be displaced diagonally to the left.
Furthermore, compared to the case where the displacement of the moving device K4560 in the oblique rightward direction continues to the right end (see FIG. 1732(a)), the case where the displacement direction of the moving device K4560 changes midway (see FIG. 1732 (b) and FIG. 1732(c)) is more profitable for the player (for example, the possibility of winning a big hit is high, or the number of prize balls paid out is large). The player can be induced to follow the moving device K4560, which is displaced in a diagonally right direction, while hoping that the direction of displacement will change.

As a result, the line of sight is aligned with the moving device K4560, and not only that, but also the ability to pay attention to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 behind the visual field (the visual field centered on the moving device K4560) is improved. can be done.
Although FIGS. 1732(a) to 1732(c) describe the case where the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 located behind the moving device K4560 can be displaced, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be made in which the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 arranged at positions out of the rear of the moving device K4560 are displaced.
For example, when the moving device K4560 is displaced from the position of the second sheet from the top in FIG. 1732(b) to the position of the third sheet from the top in FIG. is maintained in the closed state, and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side are changed to the effect waiting state.
In this case, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the left switching device K460 is kept de-energized (see FIG. 1718(c)). Furthermore, in this operation pattern, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the right side are changed to the closed state before the moving device K4560 reaches the left-right center position (corresponding to the third position in FIG. 1732(a)). Therefore, after the moving device K4560 reaches the left-right center position, it is slid downward and downward in the same manner as in the first combined motion pattern.

As a result, even if the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced, it is possible to construct a situation in which the moving direction of the moving device K4560 does not change, so that the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in the field of view. It is possible to make it easier to avoid the game of not paying attention to the moving device K4560 while entering the game.
Further, for example, when the moving device K4560 is displaced from the position of the second sheet from the top in FIG. 1732(c) to the position of the third sheet from the top in FIG. , K4831 are maintained in the closed state, and the left plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to the effect waiting state.
In this case, the drive solenoid KSOL41 of the switching device K460 is kept de-energized (see FIG. 1718(c)). Therefore, in this motion pattern, after the moving device K4560 reaches the left-right center position, it is slid to the lower right direction as in the first composite motion pattern.
As a result, even if the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced, it is possible to construct a situation in which the moving direction of the moving device K4560 does not change, so that the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are in the field of view. It is possible to make it easier to avoid the game of not paying attention to the moving device K4560 while entering the game.

In addition, in FIGS. 1732(b) and 1732(c), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 that change from the closed state to the effect standby state are on the left and right sides, and the second composite action pattern and the third composite action pattern are shown. Although the operation pattern has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as different composite action patterns, in the second and third composite action patterns, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be configured to be operable in a composite action pattern in which both the right and left plate-like portions change from the closed state to the effect waiting state. .
With this composite action pattern, the arrangement of the moving device K4560 at the timing when the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 change from the closed state to the effect waiting state is not limited. For example, it may be arranged in the center of the left and right (see the third sheet in FIG. 1732(a)), or it may be arranged in any position within the slide movement range.
In the case of this composite operation pattern, as long as the states of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 change, the direction of displacement of the moving device K4560 changes midway regardless of the arrangement of the moving device K4560. , and a situation in which the power of attention to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is higher than the power of attention to the moving device K4560.
Since the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 have a larger area in a front view, the stress of putting them into the field of view is reduced, so compared to the case where it is necessary to follow the moving device K4560 with the eyes, the player can It is possible to reduce the game burden of.

Note that each of the above-described composite motion patterns is not limited to an independent control mode, and it is of course possible to combine parts of each composite motion pattern to form another composite motion pattern.
It should be noted that light may be emitted from the third pattern display device K81 toward the front side when executing each of the above-described composite action patterns. In this case, light may be emitted from the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81, or light may be emitted corresponding to the states of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. good.
For example, in the range covered by the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 in the closed state, light is not emitted (or inconspicuous red light is emitted), and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are produced. Bright light (for example, white light) may be emitted from a portion that is displaced to the standby state and whose front side is no longer covered.
That is, for example, in the state of the third sheet in FIG. 1732(b), the left half area of the third pattern display device K81 is irradiated with light toward the front, or the third sheet in FIG. 1732(c) In the state of (2), the right half area of the third pattern display device K81 may be irradiated with light toward the front.

Here, the movement device K4560 is illuminated by the light emitted from the third symbol display device K81, thereby changing the visual recognition mode (for example, color) of the movement device K4560. In particular, the vicinity of the outer shape of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be visually recognized by the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device K81, so that the presentation effect of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be improved.
Although the inside of the rotary decorative member K4578 is not affected by the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device K81, for example, considering the appearance of the display device K4580, the third pattern display device The mode of light emitted from the K81 side may be designed.
For example, when red light is emitted from the side of the third pattern display device K81, by emitting red light from the display device K4580 as well, it is as if the light was emitted from the side of the third pattern display device K81. can be seen as if it were transmitted through the inside of the rotating decorative member K4578.
Further, for example, when white light is emitted from the third pattern display device K81 side, black (or silver) light is emitted from the display device K4580, and the illumination of the rotating decorative member K4578 is changed to white. , the black (or silver) sphere that stands out in the white background (light from the third pattern display device K81 side and light from the rotary decorative member K4578) moves obliquely downward. It is possible to execute an effect that gives the player the impression of being there.

That is, based on the viewing mode of the display device K4580, by designing the color of the light emitted from the third pattern display device K81 so that the movement device K4560 stands out more, the attention to the movement device K4560 is further improved. It is possible to improve the presentation effect of the moving device K4560.
In addition, in each of the composite motion patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 1732(b) and 1732(c), after the moving device K4560 falls based on the change of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 to the effect waiting state, The plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are changed to the closed state (for example, refer to the second state in FIG. 1732(b)) before the moving device K4560 returns to the arrangement in the effect waiting state. You can do it.
In this case, due to the arrangement of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831, the light from the third pattern display device K81 passes through the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and reaches the moving device K4560, or the third pattern display device There is a difference in whether the light from the K81 side reaches the moving device K4560 without passing through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, and even if the moving device K4560 is placed at the same position, the visual appearance changes. be done. As a result, the rendering effect of the moving device K4560 can be improved.
1732(b) and 1732(c), the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 return to the closed state after changing to the effect waiting state. A variation (long or short) may be provided in the period until the state is returned to.

In this case, regardless of the length of the period, the moving device K4560 may be displaced in the falling direction based on the change of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 to the effect waiting state, or the closed state. is shorter than the reference (for example, a short period such as 0.2 seconds or 1 second), the long device K540 is maintained, and the moving device K4560 may continue to move obliquely downward without falling.
As a result, compared to the case where the motions of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and the fall of the moving device K4560 correspond one-to-one, it is possible to predict how the moving device K4560 will be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention to the moving device K4560.
In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which a wide range of light that illuminates the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is emitted from the third pattern display device K81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a linear belt-like pattern parallel to the inclination of the elongated device K540, which is darker than the red of the seal members affixed to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, is placed above or below the elongated device K540. They may be displayed at positions that are slightly apart and do not overlap.
As a result, even after the left side of the elongated device K540 is dropped, the band-shaped pattern remains (visible through the plate-shaped portions K4811, K4821, and K4831), thereby allowing the player to follow the original movement path of the moving device K4560. can be continuously visible. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily avoid losing sight of the time series of the presentation (for example, how the mobile device K4560 moved to reach the falling position state), thereby reducing the game burden on the player. can be made

Furthermore, when the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 are displaced, the display mode may be controlled so that the band-shaped pattern is also displaced in the horizontal direction in accordance with the displacement of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831. .
In this case, when the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are displaced so as to change to the closed state before the moving device K4560 falls, the belt-like pattern of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 and the moving device K4560 When the positional relationship begins to overlap when viewed from the front, the moving device K4560 and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are controlled to operate so that the belt-shaped pattern and the moving device K4560 interfere (collide). can be
For example, the moving device K4560 may be accelerated by being pushed by the advancing side end portions of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 advancing leftward and rightward toward the closed state.
Alternatively, the moving speed of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is reduced in the state where the moving device K4560 and the strip-shaped pattern start to overlap in a front view compared to when the moving device K4560 and the strip-shaped pattern are separated. You can let it be. In this case, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be visually recognized as if the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 receive the load from the moving device K4560, and the movement resistance of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is increased.

Note that FIGS. 1732(a) to 1732(c) describe the case where the tilt of the long device K540 is maintained in the posture when the left end portion is supported by the switching device K460, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the inclination of the elongated device K540 may be slightly shifted so that the moving direction of the moving device K4560 includes not only the linear direction but also the direction crossing the linear direction.
For example, the left rotating member K430 is controlled to alternately switch between an intermediate support posture (see FIG. 1678) and a posture in which the rotating member K430 is rotated about 15 degrees clockwise from the intermediate support posture. you can go In this case, since the left end of the elongated device K540 is vertically reciprocatingly displaced, the inclination angle of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed during the sliding movement of the moving device K4560.
Further, for example, the right rotating member K430 alternates between the first release posture (see FIG. 1719(a)) and the intermediate support posture (see FIG. 1719(b)) from the first release posture. You may perform the operation control which switches to . In this case, since the right end of the elongated device K540 is vertically reciprocated, the tilt angle of the moving direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed during the sliding movement of the moving device K4560.
In this case, when the right rotating member K430 is in the intermediate supporting posture, the postures of the left and right rotating members K430 are matched, so that the elongated device K540 is in the horizontal posture. That is, the moving direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed between a downward tilting direction with respect to the horizontal direction and a horizontal direction.

Further, for example, the left and right rotating members K430 may be operated together to act on the elongated device K540 from both sides. In this case, it is possible to increase the variation in the moving direction of the moving device K4560. By synchronizing the operation timings of the left and right rotating members K430, the timing of acting on the elongated device K540 may be shifted, or while one rotating member K430 is operating, the other rotating member K430 may be operated. .
Further, the rotation of the rotating member K430 may be executed while the elongated device K540 is placed at the drop position (see the fourth sheet in FIG. 1732(b)). For example, from the state shown in the fourth sheet of FIG. 1732(b), the rotating members K430 on both left and right sides are set to the intermediate support posture (see FIG. 1719(b)), and then again to the first release posture (see FIG. 1719(a)). ))).
In this case, the second movable device K4701 is not positioned in the lowered arrangement state (see FIG. 1721(c)) but is positioned in the production standby state (see FIG. 1721(b)). In this case, the moving device K4560 moves away from above the second mobile device K4701. Therefore, the moving device K4560 is moved to the lower right corner while preventing the movement of the moving device K4560 from being hindered by the second mobile device K4701. area can be reached.
In other words, the path for moving the moving device K4560 to the lower right area is the above-described path that does not move the moving device K4560 in the upward direction after the elongated device K540 is placed in the drop position state. can constitute different movement paths.

In the above description, the case where the moving direction of the moving device K4560 changes based on the rotation operation of the rotating member K430 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, bar-shaped obstacles protrude from the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 (see FIG. 1708) arranged to face the elongated device K540 toward the area side (front side) where the elongated device K540 moves. The movement direction of the moving device K4560 may be changed by causing the obstacle to interfere with the moving device K4560 during sliding movement.
That is, for example, when the first obstructing portion is arranged at a position where the rotating decorative member K4578 of the moving device K4560 shown in the second sheet of FIG. If it slides further to the lower right from the state shown in the second sheet of FIG. 1732(b), the first obstruction and the moving device K4560 will interfere, so avoid the first obstruction. The elongated device K540 is displaced upward. Then, when the first obstacle is crossed to the right, the attitude of the elongated device K540 is returned to the state shown in the second sheet of FIG. 1732(b) by its own weight.
Alternatively, if it is desired to stabilize the attitude change of the elongated device K540, such as when the return by its own weight makes the movement unstable, a second obstruction that produces the same action as the above-described first obstruction is added. , the moving device K4560 may be placed at a position where it abuts from the upper right side of the moving device K4560. As a result, the second obstacle can be caused to interfere with the moving device K4560, and the orientation of the long device K540 can be reliably returned to the state (original orientation) of the second sheet shown in FIG. 1732(b). , the sliding movement direction of the movement device K4560 can be reversed.
It should be noted that the above-described first obstruction portion and second obstruction portion are not limited to those projecting from the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 (see FIG. 1708). For example, it may be provided so as to protrude toward the moving device K4560 from a plate-like portion arranged in a layer on the front side of the moving device K4560. In this case, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 due to collision with the moving device K4560, so that the durability of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 can be improved. , the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 can be smoothly operated.

In this case, the shape in front view projecting from the plate-like portion arranged in the layer on the front side of the moving device K4560 intersects the direction in which the moving device K4560 moves (direction inclined with respect to the left-right direction). It may be elongated in the direction of crossing (perpendicular direction or substantially vertically extending direction). In this case, due to the collision between the moving device K4560 and the obstacle, the sliding direction of the moving device K4560 can be changed to a direction having a component in the front-rear direction, and a three-dimensional effect can be executed.
Also, similar obstacles may be formed from the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 toward the moving device K4560. In this case, the arrangement of the obstacle protruding forward in the front view and the arrangement of the obstacle protruding in the rear direction in the front view may overlap or may be deviated. good. If they overlap, it is possible to easily correct the shift in the front-back position of the moving device K4560, and if there is a shift, it is possible to promote the front-back displacement of the moving device K4560.
Figures 1733(a) and 1733(b) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. In FIG. 1733(a), the second movable device K4701 (equivalent to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) in the effect standby state (see FIG. 1653) is illustrated with a solid line, and the second movable device K4701 is arranged in an elevated position. The outline KG4701 of the outline in the state (see FIG. 1657) is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, a range is drawn so as to surround a part of the periphery of the second movable device K4701 in the waiting state for the effect. A shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, concentrated line-like, or radial) first lower effect display KER471 is shown.
In addition, in FIG. 1733(b), the second movable device K4701 in the raised arrangement state (see FIG. 1657) is illustrated by a solid line, and the surroundings of the second movable device K4701 in the raised arrangement state in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. A shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, concentrated line-like, or radial-like) second lower effect display KER472 is illustrated so as to surround a portion of the .

A fourth effect control example using the first lower effect display KER471 and the second effect display KRER472 will be described. In the fourth effect control example, the first lower effect display KER471 and the second effect display KRER472 are displayed corresponding to execution of driving of the second movable device K4701.
The timing of displaying the first lower effect display KER471 and the second effect display KRER472 and the timing of executing the drive of the second movable device K4701 may be at the same time, but there may be a difference. For example, when the display timings of the first lower effect display KER471 and the second effect display KRER472 are earlier, the first lower effect display KER471 and the second effect display KRER472 are displayed so that the player can see them. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second movable device K4701 may be operated.
Further, in the fourth effect control example, the displays of the first lower effect display KER471 and the second effect display KRER472 are switched in conjunction with the operation of the second movable device K4701. That is, when the second movable device K4701 is in the effect waiting state, the first lower effect display KER471 is displayed (see FIG. 1733(a)). At the same time, the second lower effect display KER472 is displayed (see FIG. 1733(b)).
As a result, when the second movable device K4701 is operated, the target to be visually recognized by the player can be made to appear larger than the actual size of the second movable device K4701. This makes it possible to increase the power of the action presentation.

When the intermediate display of the shape corresponding to the outer shape of the second movable device K4701 in operation can be displayed at a position between the first lower effect display KER471 and the second lower effect display KER472, the effect standby state From the first lower side effect display KER471, the object to be displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 in accordance with the movement of the second movable device K4701 toward the raised arrangement state is changed from the first lower side effect display KER471 to the intermediate display and the second lower side effect display. By changing in the order of KER472, the display in the vicinity of the second movable device K4701 can be visually recognized as if it is moving together with the second movable device K4701.
Similarly, the object to be displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 is changed from the second lower effect display KER472 to the middle By sequentially changing the display and the first lower effect display KER471, the display in the vicinity of the second movable device K4701 can be visually recognized as if it is moving together with the second movable device K4701.
In the display area of the third symbol display device K81, the layer in which the first lower effect display KER471 is displayed and the layer in which the second lower effect display KER472 is displayed may be the same, or may be different in the front and back. You can do it. For example, when the second lower effect display KER472 is displayed in a layer in front of the layer in which the first lower effect display KER471 is displayed, the first lower effect display KER471 is displayed. Even if the second lower effect display KER472 is displayed, the first lower effect display KER471 is visually recognized as being hidden behind the second lower effect display KER472 (see FIG. 1733(b)), so the displays overlap. This does not cause a situation in which the appearance deteriorates. This makes it possible to simplify the control of switching between the second lower effect display KER472 and the first lower effect display KER471.
In addition, in the fourth effect control example, a case has been described in which the first lower effect display KER471 and the second lower effect display KER472 are switched in accordance with the operation timing of the second movable device K4701. It is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified.

For example, in a state where the second movable device K4701 is maintained in an effect waiting state, it may be possible to configure a situation in which the display of the second lower effect display KER472 is started. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the second movable device K4701 may start to move toward the raised arrangement state, and draw attention to the second movable device K4701. can be improved.
In this case, the transparency of the display of the second lower effect display KER472 is varied. By setting the height to be high, attention to the second lower effect display KER472 can also be improved.
Also, for example, after the second movable device K4701 changes from the raised arrangement state to the effect waiting state, it may be possible to construct a situation in which the second lower effect display KER472 is maintained without disappearing. In this case, the horizontal drop motion pattern of the first movable device K4401, which cannot be executed due to interference between members when the second movable device K4701 is positioned in the raised arrangement state (see FIGS. 1654 and 1716). can be performed while maintaining the second lower effect display KER472 as if the second movable device K4701 remains in the raised arrangement state.
As a result, an action mode that cannot be realized due to interference of action trajectories between action accessories can be simulated by using the display of the third pattern display device K81, so that the impact of the production can be enhanced. can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth effect control example, the contours of the first lower effect display KER471 and the second lower effect display KER472 are formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the second movable device K4701, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the range including the second movable device K4701 may be formed as a display of an outline extending in a belt shape along the inner circumference of the frame of the third pattern display device K81.
In this case, even if the display moves from the second movable device K4701 toward the left and right sides so as to extend along the frame of the third pattern display device K81, and is formed in a frame shape (annular shape) after merging. good. In addition, in a state where the display is formed in a frame shape (annular shape), the additional display may overlap the frame-shaped (annular shape) display in accordance with the change (operation, light emission, etc.) of the second movable device K4701. It may be formed, controlled to change the width of the frame-shaped (annular) display, or controlled to change the color or brightness of the frame-shaped (annular) display.
In this case, since the influence of the change of the second movable device K4701 can be generated on the entire circumference of the display area of the third symbol display device K81, the player does not visually recognize the second movable device K4701 and the second movable device K4701 It is possible to make it easier to avoid a situation in which the change in the mobile device K4701 is not noticed.
Figures 1734(a) to 1734(c), Figures 1735(a) and 1735(b) are schematic front views of the pachinko machine K4010. In FIG. 1734(a), the second movable device K4701 in the lowered arrangement state (see FIG. 1654) is illustrated by a solid line, the first movable device K4401 is positioned in the effect standby state, and the third symbol display device K81 is displayed. In the region, a shadow shape (or, for example, an aura shape, a flame shape, a concentrated line shape, a radial shape) is displayed so as to surround a part of the first lower effect display KER471 and the mobile device K4560 in the effect standby state. A first upper effect display KER451 is illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 1734(a), a bar indicating the time limit and a button member H181 are schematically displayed in the center of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the button member H181 (see FIG. 1638) is operated. is executed.
A fifth effect control example using the first lower effect display KER471 and the first upper effect display KER451 will be described. In the fifth effect control example, the first lower effect display KER471 and the first upper effect display KER451 are displayed at positions suggesting movable members whose actions may be executed later. That is, the first upper effect display KER451 is displayed as a display suggesting the possibility of operation of the first movable device K4401, and the first lower effect display KER471 is displayed as a display suggesting the possibility of operation of the second movable device K4701. Is displayed.
The action of the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 is executed in response to the player's operation of the button member H181 (see FIG. 1638). Therefore, the player can be urged to operate the button member H181 while hoping that the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 will operate. Attention can be focused on a position to which the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 can move (for example, a position inside the display area of the third symbol display device K81).
Various control modes are exemplified when the player does not operate the button member H181 (see FIG. 1638). For example, the action of the first mobile device K4401 or the second mobile device K4701 may be executed after the end of the operation waiting period, or if the player indicates in advance that he or she will not perform the operation (automatic , the operation of the first movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 may be executed in the middle of the operation waiting period, or the operation of the button member H181 may not be executed. In some cases, the operation of the first mobile device K4401 or the second mobile device K4701 may not be executed.

In FIG. 1734(b), the notification mode after the first operation in the fifth production control example is illustrated. 1734(a), the first movable device K4401 is displaced to a position above the representative halfway stop position (see FIG. 1717(c)), The upper effect display KER451 is turned off, the second movable device K4701 is changed to the raised arrangement state, and the second lower effect display KER472 is displayed.
As a result, the "M" pattern formed on the second movable device K4701 draws the player's attention. For example, "M" can be defined as the first letter of "MAX", and the possibility of obtaining a large profit from reading "MAX-Energy" together with "E" of the winning unit K200 is suggested to the player. can.
On the other hand, FIG. 1734(c) shows the notification mode after the second operation in the fifth production control example. In the second post-operation notification mode, after the state shown in FIG. The device K4401 is changed to the representative midway stop position (see FIG. 1717(c)), and a shadow-like (or, for example, an aura-like, flame-like A second upper effect display KER452 of a shape, a concentrated line shape, and a radial shape is displayed.
As a result, the display of "P" displayed on the display device K4580 of the mobile device K4560 draws the player's attention. ``P'' can be interpreted as the first letter of ``Petit,'' for example, suggesting to the player the possibility of obtaining a small profit from reading ``Petit-Energy'' together with the winning unit K200's ``E.'' can.

Depending on whether the effect according to the fifth effect control example proceeds to the post-first operation notification mode or the post-second operation notification mode, control is performed so as to provide a difference in the profit that the player can obtain. The player's attention to the position to which the movable device K4401 or the second movable device K4701 can move (for example, the inner position of the display area of the third pattern display device K81) can be further improved, and the button member H181 (Refer to FIG. 1638).
In FIG. 1735(a), the notification mode after the third operation in the fifth production control example is illustrated. In the third post-operation notification mode, after going through the state shown in FIG. The second movable device K4701 (equivalent to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is maintained in a lowered arrangement state (see FIG. 1654), and the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 (plates in each of the above embodiments) are changed. K811, K821, K831) are changed to the closed state.
In this case, "SPME" is visually recognized on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device K81, and "SPecial-MAX-Energy" can be read.
In the fifth effect control example, the second movable device K4701 is maintained in the lowered arrangement state only in the post-third operation notification mode. Correspondingly, for example, the shadow-like (or, for example, aura-like, flame-like, concentrated line-like, or radial-like) display displayed in the first lower effect display KER471 (see FIG. 1733(a)). While the direction of change is normally upward (the direction of rising), the direction of display change may be downward in situations where the third post-operation notification mode is scheduled (for example, once every two times is downward), the player who visually recognizes the first lower effect display KER471 is given the effect of the notification mode after the third operation from before the operation of the button member H181 (see FIG. 1638). It can create a sense of anticipation that an action is likely to be performed.

In FIG. 1735(b), the notification mode after the fourth operation in the fifth production control example is illustrated. In the fourth post-operation notification mode, after the state shown in FIG. )), the second movable device K4701 (equivalent to the second movable device K701 in each of the above embodiments) is changed to the operation end state of the breakthrough rising operation pattern (see FIG. 1725), and the plate The shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 (corresponding to the plate-shaped portions K811, K821, K831 in the above embodiments) are changed to the interlocking switching state (see FIG. 1695), and the third pattern display device K81 seems to have broken the glass plate. is displayed.
By performing such a display, the player is notified that the lottery has been lost, and the display surface of the third pattern display device K81 is as if it were impacted by the movement of the movable parts around the third pattern display device K81. By visually recognizing K81s (see FIG. 1730) as if it were broken, the player can be surprised and the player's concentration can be enhanced.
Depending on whether the effect according to the fifth effect control example proceeds to the post-first operation notification mode, to the post-second operation notification mode, to the post-third operation notification mode, or to the post-fourth operation notification mode. By controlling to provide a difference in the profit that the player can obtain, it is possible to further improve the player's attention to the inner position of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the button member H181 (Fig. 1638) can be increased.
It should be noted that the display mode that associates the action of the movable accessory around the third symbol display device K81 with the display in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 is not limited to the one described above. For example, a rubber-like member is displayed on the third pattern display device K81, and the movable accessory protrudes in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81, and the rubber-like member is bent by the movable accessory ( You may display a moving image so that it may be compressed. As a result, the movable accessory and the display can be visually recognized in series.

Further, for example, a rotating roulette is displayed on the third pattern display device K81, and a moving image is displayed so that the roulette is stopped as the movable accessory protrudes in front of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. can be As a result, it is possible to express a situation as if a load is applied to the roulette in the display area from the movable accessory, and the player can visually recognize the movable accessory and the display in series.
Further, for example, when the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are moved from the arrangement in the closed state to the arrangement in the waiting state for effect, the inner end portion of the plate-like portion K4811 in the display area of the third symbol display device K81 A moving image may be displayed in which a human hand is placed against the left and right inner sides of the plate-like portion K4811 and moved in the same direction at the same speed as the plate-like portion K4811. As a result, it is possible to express a situation as if a load is applied to the movable accessory (plate-shaped part K4811) from the display in the display area, and allow the player to visually recognize the movable accessory and the display in series. be able to.
It should be noted that it is not limited to the third pattern display device K81 that is arranged on the back side of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and emits light to the side of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831. For example, an electric board may be arranged and LED light may be irradiated to the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. Also, the electrical decoration board may be fixed immovably, or may be configured to be movable (for example, movable by being placed on a movable accessory). Also, like a patrol lamp or a warning light, it may be configured such that light is emitted from a lamp-shaped light emitting means toward the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831.
Moreover, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are not limited to being arranged within the center frame K86. For example, it may be placed on the front side (of the opening) of the base plate K60 of the game board K13 (see FIG. 1715) and configured to open and close the opening, or it may be opened and closed on the back side of the base plate K60. , the background of the game area may be configured to be changeable. In either case, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by changing the visibility mode of the opened/closed area.

The 109th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1736 to 1743. FIG. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the game area where the game ball flows is formed outside the center frame 86 has been described. can flow down. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.
1736 and 1737 are front views of the pachinko machine K5010 in the 109th embodiment. FIG. 1736 shows a state in which the elongated device K5540 (corresponding to the elongated device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is in the right first tilted posture (see FIG. 1659), and FIG. The state in which it is in the second tilted posture (see FIG. 1710) is illustrated.
The elongated device K5540 is formed by removing the decorative board K552 (see FIG. 1667) that was inside the elongated device K540, and forming each component from a light-transmitting resin material. is slidably arranged.
In this case, when the elongated device K5540 appears inside the center frame K5086 in the front view (see FIGS. 1736 and 1737), the rear third pattern display device K81 can be seen through the arrangement position of the moving device K4560. However, at the position where the elongated device K5540 is arranged, the elongated device K5540 is transparent, so that the display by the third pattern display device K81 is visible.

As a result, the player can visually recognize the moving device K4560 as if it is floating, and can visually recognize the notification mode (light or display) from the third pattern display device K81 in all directions of the moving device K4560. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the visual recognition mode by the moving device K4560 and the third pattern display device K81.
The center frame K5086 has a left channel K5086L formed so that game balls can flow down on the left side of the arrangement position of the moving device K4560 in the waiting state for the effect (center position in the left and right, see FIG. 1679), and the moving device K4560 in the waiting state for the effect. and a right flow path K5086R formed so that game balls can flow down on the right side of the arrangement position.
The left flow channel K5086L has a flow channel structure in which at least the rear side surface is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. A second flow path K5086b that guides the game ball to the left from the branch position of the downstream end of the path K5086a, a left detection sensor K5086c capable of detecting the downflow of the game ball in the second flow path K5086b, and the first flow path. A third channel K5086d guides the game ball to the right from the branch position of the downstream end of K5086a, and a right side detection sensor K5086e capable of detecting the downflow of the game ball in the third channel K5086d.
Of the game balls that have flowed down the left channel K5086L, the game balls that have flowed down the second channel K5086b are located on the left side of the center position in the left-right direction of the game area on the base plate K5060 (corresponding to the base plate K60 in each of the above embodiments, 1639), and is discharged from the game area through the general prize winning opening K63 or the out opening K71 (see FIG. 1639).

Of the game balls that have flowed down the left flow path K5086L, the game balls that have flowed down the third flow path K5086d are located above the first prize winning opening K64 (see FIG. 1639) located at the center position in the left-right direction of the game area. (corresponding to the base plate K60 in each of the above embodiments, see FIG. 1639). The discharge hole of the third flow path K5086d is formed oblong to the extent that the discharge position of the game ball can be varied on the left and right. Either the ball enters K64, or it deviates from the left and right sides of the first winning hole K64 and flows down, and is discharged from the game area through the out hole K71 (see FIG. 1639).
The right flow channel K5086R has a flow channel structure in which at least the rear side surface is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. and a detection sensor K5086k capable of detecting the flow of a game ball, and a game ball that has flowed leftward from the branch position at the downstream end of the receiving flow path K5086j can be guided to the third flow path K5086d of the left flow path K5086L. The game ball flowing to the right from the branch position of the downstream end of the connecting flow path K5086l connected to the third flow path K5086d and the receiving flow path K5086j is placed in the upstream side of the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1639) in the game area and a right discharge flow path K5086m that discharges to.
Of the game balls that have flowed down the right channel K5086R, the game balls that have flowed down the connecting channel K5086l are, like the game balls that have flowed down the third channel K5086d of the left channel K5086L, into the first winning port K64. The ball enters the ball, or deviates from the left and right sides of the first winning hole K64 and flows down, and is discharged from the game area through the out hole K71 (see FIG. 1639).
Of the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path K5086R, the game balls that have flowed down the right discharge flow path K5086m are positioned on the right side of the third symbol display device K81 in the same manner as the above-described game balls that are shot with the right hand. There is a possibility that the ball will flow down and enter the first specific winning opening K65a, the second specific winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a (see FIG. 1639). Also, if the ball does not enter any of the first specific winning opening K65a, the second specific winning opening K640, or the second specific winning opening K650a, it is discharged from the game area through the out opening K71 (see FIG. 1639). can be

The left channel K5086L and the right channel K5086R may enter the first winning hole K64 depending on the internal distribution as long as the game ball enters the third symbol display device K81. As another ball shooting method for the same purpose as "left hitting" in which a game ball flows down on the left side, the player can be urged to use a ball shooting method in which the ball enters the left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R.
In this embodiment, an on-off valve K5086V is provided at the upstream end of the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R to slide in the front-rear direction at regular intervals to open and close the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R. That is, when the on-off valve K5086V is open, the game ball can enter the left flow path K5086L or the right flow path K5086R. It is configured so that it cannot be entered into the K5086R.
The pattern of opening and closing operation of the on-off valve K5086V may be a constant operation from power-on, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a repeated operation pattern in which the closed state is maintained for 10 seconds, then the open state is maintained for 0.5 seconds, and the closed state is maintained again.
Also, the time interval of the closed state need not be the same, and the closed state immediately after the on-off valve K5086V is opened after being closed for 10 seconds is maintained for 20 seconds, and the closed state immediately after the on-off valve K5086V is opened is A repeated operation pattern may be used in which the on-off valve K5086V is maintained for 30 seconds, and then closed for 10 seconds immediately after the on-off valve K5086V is opened.

In addition, the time interval for maintaining the open state may be 0.5 seconds each time, the case of 0.5 seconds and the case of 1.0 seconds may alternately occur, or the time interval may be fixed. The time interval for maintaining the open state may be changed according to the pattern.
In addition, the configuration of the upstream side of the left channel K5086L and the right channel K5086R is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, in the game area on the upstream side of the left channel K5086L and the right channel K5086R, the number of game balls guided to the left channel K5086L and the right channel K5086R by a plurality of nails (not shown) does not become excessive. may be adjusted as follows.
As a player, it is easier for the ball to enter the first winning hole K64 if the ball is shot "left-handed" (whether the ball enters the first winning hole K64 at a higher rate than the number of shot balls). It is possible to change the ball shooting method while confirming whether it is easier to hit the ball into the first winning hole K64 by shooting the ball aiming at the path K5086R. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game mode of the player and allow the player to select a preferred ball shooting method.
Here, in the gaming state where "left-handed" is recommended, the player aims to win a big hit by entering the ball into the first winning hole K64. In many cases, there is no disadvantage caused by entering the K5086R.

On the other hand, in a game state where "right-handed" is recommended (during time saving, variable probability, etc.), the ball is entered into the second winning hole K640, and a more advantageous distribution is obtained in the lottery to continue the advantageous state. While it is possible to (make it run), if the ball enters the first winning hole K64 in this state, there is a possibility of winning a big hit with a disadvantageous distribution, and depending on the situation, there is a risk that the advantageous state will be interrupted. There is That is, in a game state (during time reduction, during variable probability, etc.) in which "right-handed hitting" is recommended, there is a possibility that the player may be disadvantaged by allowing the game ball to enter the left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R. .
Therefore, it is possible to maintain the maximum firing intensity of the ball in the game state (during time reduction, during variable probability, etc.) that encourages the player to hit the right side, so that the ball can enter the left flow path K5086L and the right flow path K5086R. It can be made to prevent entering the ball.
As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball firing strength changes depending on the player in the game state (during time reduction, during variable probability, etc.) that recommends "right-handed hitting", and it is assumed that the ball flows down in the game area. It is possible to make it easier to realize a game in a flowing down mode.
For example, although the arrangement of the pegs (not shown) on the upstream side of the through gate K67 is designed so that the ball is easily guided to the through gate K67 when the ball is shot with the strongest shooting intensity, It is possible to easily avoid dissatisfaction of the player due to the fact that the ball is not guided to the through gate K67 because the ball continues to be shot with a shooting intensity of about 80%.

In this embodiment, the rotating decorative member K4578 is configured to be rotatable based on the game ball flowing down the left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R. If the falling position of the game ball with respect to K4578 is different, the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 is configured to be different.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1736, when the long device K5540 is in the right first tilted posture (see FIG. 1659) and the moving device K4560 is arranged at the right end of the movable range, the left side detection sensor The rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by K5086c, and the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates counterclockwise based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the right detection sensor K5086e. It rotates around, and the rotating decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor K5086k.
That is, when the game ball flowing down the left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R is sufficiently separated from the rotary decorative member K4578 (when it is visually recognized outside the outer shape of the rotary decorative member K4578), the game ball No rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 occurs due to the falling of the water. On the other hand, when flowing down a position close to the rotary decorative member K4578 (when viewed inside the outer shape of the rotary decorative member K4578), the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the flowing down of the game ball, and its The direction of the rotating operation is the rotating direction corresponding to the direction in which the game ball flows down with respect to the rotating shaft of the rotary decorative member K4578.
As a result, the player can visually recognize the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578 without looking at the entire left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R. It is possible to grasp the presence or absence of the game ball flowing down and the position of the game ball flowing down.

For example, as shown in FIG. 1737, when the elongated device K5540 is in the right second inclined posture (see FIG. 1710) and the moving device K4560 is arranged at the right end of the movable range, the left side detection sensor The rotation of the decorative rotary member K4578 does not occur based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by K5086c, and the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the right detection sensor K5086e. , and the detection sensor K5086k detects the passage of the game ball, the rotating decorative member K4578 does not rotate.
That is, when the game ball flowing down the left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R is sufficiently separated from the rotary decorative member K4578 (when it is visually recognized outside the outer shape of the rotary decorative member K4578), the game ball There is no rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 due to the flow of water. On the other hand, when flowing down a position close to the rotary decorative member K4578 (when viewed inside the outer shape of the rotary decorative member K4578), the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the flowing down of the game ball, and its The direction of rotation is the direction of rotation corresponding to the direction in which the game ball flows down with respect to the axis of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578.
As a result, the player can visually recognize the operation mode of the rotary decorative member K4578 without looking at the entire (wide range) of the left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R. It is possible to grasp the presence or absence of the game ball flowing down and the position of the game ball flowing down.
For example, when a "right-handed" game is executed in the state illustrated in FIG. 1737, the rotating movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 occurs only when the game ball enters the left channel K5086L. , the possibility that the shooting strength of the game ball is reduced can be suggested to the player who visually recognizes the rotating motion of the rotary decorative member K4578.

As described above, even if the game ball flowing down the same position is detected by the detection sensor K5086k, if the rotary decorative member K4578 does not rotate based on the detection by the detection sensor K5086k (see FIG. 1737), A case where the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated based on the detection by the detection sensor K5086k (see FIG. 1736) can be constructed.
In other words, when the position of the game ball with respect to the rotary decorative member K4578 is different, the relationship between the downflow of the game ball and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 is changed. Alternatively, when the flowing direction (inclination) of the game ball with respect to the longitudinal direction of the elongated device K5540 arranged behind the flowing game ball is different, the relationship between the flowing down of the game ball and the manner of rotating operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is It can also be changed.
As a result, instead of casually visually recognizing the rotating decorative member K4578, it is possible to visually recognize the rotating decorative member K4578 or visually recognize the left flow channel K5086L or the right flow channel K5086R while being conscious of the arrangement of the rotating decorative member K4578. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be moved to a plurality of locations instead of focusing on one location.
Various aspects are exemplified for the aspect of the rotational operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensors K5086e and K5086k. For example, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensors K5086e and K5086k, the rotary decorative member K4578 may be rotated at a constant speed, or if it has already been rotated, an additional detection sensor When the passage of the game ball at K5086e and K5086k is detected, the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 is increased or decreased (acceleration if the rotation is in the same direction, deceleration if the rotation is in the opposite direction). You can do it.

That is, in the state illustrated in FIG. 1736, when the detection sensor K5086k detects the passing of the game ball, and the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates in the clockwise direction, the detection sensor K5086k detects the game ball. When passage is detected, the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 is increased and rotated clockwise.
On the other hand, in the state illustrated in FIG. 1736, when the detection sensor K5086k detects the passage of the game ball, and the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates in the clockwise direction, the game ball is detected by the right detection sensor K5086e. is detected, the direction of rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is opposite to that of the rotary decorative member K4578.
1738 is a rear view of the game board K5013, and FIG. 1739 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board K5013 along line MDCCCXXVI-MDCCCXXVI of FIG. In FIG. 1738, in order to make it easier to grasp the shape of the base plate K5060, constituent members such as the winning unit K200 (see FIG. 1641) and discharge path constituent members such as the gutter front side member K91 (see FIG. 1651), etc. is omitted. Also, in FIG. 1739, illustration of the center frame K5086 is omitted.
In the base plate K5060, the shape of the base plate K60 described in each of the above embodiments is used, and the shapes of the outer inclined portion K2060e and the inclined opening K2060w of the base plate K2060 described in each of the above embodiments are used.

As illustrated in FIGS. 1738 and 1739, in the game board K5013, a plate-like light guide member K5150 is fixed to the rear side surface of the base plate K5060, and the light guide member K5150 receives light from the end. In this case, the light is refracted to the front side at the inner position of the light guide member K5150 so that the shape of the light can be visually recognized by the player.
A light irradiation device K5100 is arranged inside the forming recesses K60a and K60b of the base plate K5060. That is, the light irradiation device K5100 is arranged in the first forming recess K60a and the second forming recess K60b so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate K5060 on the back side of the area forming the game area.
Similar to the light irradiation device K2100 (see FIGS. 1701 and 1702), the light irradiation device K5100 is composed of a decorative substrate K2110 on which a plurality of light emitting means K2111 composed of LEDs or the like are arranged, and the decorative substrate K2110. an intermediate member K2120, which is a member to be fastened and fixed, is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to the base plate K5060; A plurality of second light emitting means K5112 made up of LEDs or the like capable of irradiating light in a direction along the rear surface of is provided.
The front view external shape of the decorative board K2110 is designed to fit in the forming recesses K60a and K60b of the base plate K5060. are spaced apart. The light emitting means K2111 is arranged on the front side of the decorative board K2110, and the second light emitting means K5112 is arranged on the front and rear opposite sides of the light emitting means K2111 across the decorative board K2110 (positions corresponding to each other in the front-rear direction). be done.

For the sake of convenience, the case where the second light emitting means K5112 and the light emitting means K2111 are arranged at positions overlapping each other in the front-rear direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The arrangement of the second light emitting means K5112 can be changed depending on the mode of light production realized by the light guide member K5150.
The light guide member K5150 is sized to cover the central opening of the base plate K5060 on which the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) is arranged, and is notched in places to refract light. A light refracting section K5151 is provided.
The light emitted from the second light emitting means K5112 is configured to be received by the light guide member K5150 from the end, and is guided inside the light guide member K5150 while being totally reflected. As the light to be guided is refracted by the light refracting portion K5151, the traveling direction of the light is changed to the front side of the light guide member K5150, and the light reaches the player's eyes.
That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the light refracting portion K5151 is emitting light while the second light emitting means K5112 is lit. Therefore, by forming the light refracting portion K5151 in a wide range while keeping the position of the second light emitting means K5112 within the formed recesses K60a and K60b in a front view, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light of a large shape. .

In addition, while the second light emitting means K5112 are arranged in a line along the outer shape inclined portion K2060e, depending on the design of the shape of the light refracting portion K5151, it is possible to make the player visually recognize light of a complicated shape.
In this embodiment, since the light irradiation device K5100 is arranged outside the rear region of the game area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060, the visibility behind the game region is reduced by the light irradiation device K5100. It is possible to prevent the line of sight from being blocked. That is, regardless of the presence or absence of the light irradiation device K5100, the player can easily see through the base plate K5060 and visually recognize the structure on the back side of the base plate K5060 (for example, the operation unit K4300 (see FIG. 1708)). .
In addition, when the light irradiation device K5100 is disposed inside the game area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060 in a front view, a blinding member is provided to prevent the player from directly viewing the decorative board K2110. (For example, a case member that surrounds the illumination board K2110, or a plate-shaped member that has been textured to make it less visible) requires extra space, which can limit the space that can be used for production. had a nature.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the light irradiation device K5100 is disposed outside the rear area of the game area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060, the line of sight of the player is the light irradiation device. It is unlikely that the K5100 itself will be targeted, and there is no need to dare to provide a new blindfold member. As a result, it is possible to secure a space that can be used for production.

Here, the light irradiating section substituted for the light irradiating device K5100 is arranged inside the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed from the front, and the light guide member K5150 is also arranged inside the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front. Thus, in order to prevent the effect of blocking the line of sight by the light irradiation device K5100 from occurring at a position overlapping the game area, the arrangement of the light refracting part K5151 is restricted to the inside of the center frame K5086. If the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1736) is larger than the center frame K5086, the arrangement and shape of the light refracting part K5151 will not reach the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81, resulting in a dramatic effect. may decline.
On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the light irradiation device K5100 is arranged outside the rear area of the game area formed on the front side of the base plate K5060, the size of the light guide member K5150 is centered. There is no limit to the size of the frame K5086. Therefore, even if the display area of the third pattern display device K81 (see FIG. 1736) is larger than the size of the center frame K5086, the arrangement and shape of the light refracting part K5151 can be spread over the entire display area of the third pattern display device K81. Since it is possible to make the image appear, the production effect can be improved.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the light guide member K5150 extends to the outside of the center frame K5086. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the light from. A number of aspects are illustrated and described below.
First, the set of the second light emitting means K5112 is separated. That is, as shown in FIG. 1738, the plurality of second light emitting means K5112 are arranged in a first range KG51, a second range KG52, a third range KG53, and a fourth range KG54 in the light irradiation device K5100 on the right side, and a range KG54 on the left side. is divided into a fifth range KG55, a sixth range KG56 and a seventh range KG57 in the light irradiation device K5100.

The light from each of the ranges KG51 to KG54 travels in the lower left direction, and the light from each of the ranges KG55 to KG57 travels in the lower right direction in a straight line direction along the light guide member K5150. The cutouts K5155a to K5155d are formed to block the progress of crossing light.
The first notch K5155a is formed along the traveling direction (linear direction) of the light on the left side of the traveling range of the light irradiated from the second range KG52, and the formation range is the illuminated from the sixth range KG56. The length and position correspond to the traveling range of light.
That is, the first cutout portion K5155a prevents the light emitted from the second range KG52 from leaking to the upper left side of the first cutout portion K5155a, and prevents the light emitted from the sixth range KG56 from leaking to the first cutout portion K5155a. It is prevented from passing to the lower right side of the notch K5155a.
The second notch K5155b is formed along the traveling direction (linear direction) of the light on the right side of the traveling range of the light irradiated from the fourth range KG54. From the end to just before reaching the travel range of the light emitted from the seventh range KG57.

That is, the second cutout portion K5155b prevents the light emitted from the third range KG53 from leaking to the upper left side of the second cutout portion K5155b, and the light emitted from the fourth range KG54 is prevented from leaking to the second cutout portion K5155b. Leakage to the lower right side of the notch K5155b is prevented, while the light emitted from the seventh range KG57 is allowed to travel without being blocked.
The third notch K5155c is formed along the traveling direction (linear direction) of the light on the right side of the travel range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57, and the formation range is the second notch K5155b. , the length and position corresponding to the traveling range of the light irradiated from the third range KG53.
That is, the third notch K5155c prevents the light emitted from the seventh range KG57 from leaking to the upper right side of the third notch K5155c, and prevents the light emitted from the third range KG53 from leaking to the third cutout. It is prevented from passing to the lower left side of the notch K5155c.
The fourth notch K5155d is formed along the traveling direction (linear direction) of the light on the left side of the traveling range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57. From the end to just before reaching the travel range of the light emitted from the fourth range KG54.

That is, the fourth notch K5155d prevents the light emitted from the sixth range KG56 from leaking to the upper right side of the fourth notch K5155d, and prevents the light emitted from the seventh range KG57 from leaking to the fourth cut. Leakage to the lower left side of the notch K5155d is prevented, while the light emitted from the fourth range KG54 is allowed to travel without being blocked.
The light refracting portion K5151 of the light guide member K5150 includes a plurality of refracting shape portions K5151a to K5151f formed in different shapes at different positions corresponding to the arrangement of the second light emitting means K5112.
The first refraction shape portion K5151a is formed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the first range KG51, and is recessed in the shape of an arrow pointing diagonally downward to the left. In addition, the first refraction shape portion K5151a is formed in the inner and right range of the center frame K5086 when viewed in the front-rear direction.
The second refraction shape portion K5151b is formed in the traveling range of the light irradiated from the second range KG52, and is recessed in a radial shape extending in the lower left direction from the vicinity of the end on the side of the second range KG52. In addition, the second refraction shape portion K5151b sandwiches a crossing portion K5151b1 formed over both the inner and outer sides of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed in the front-rear direction, and the traveling range of light emitted from the seventh range KG57. and an extension K5151b2 formed on the extension line of the crossing portion K5151b1 on the opposite side of the crossing portion K5151b1.

In this way, the second refraction shape portion K5151b is not recessed in the travel range of the light irradiated from the seventh range KG57. It can be made easy to prevent K5151b from appearing to shine.
The third refraction shape portion K5151c is formed in the traveling range of the light emitted from the third range KG53, and is recessed in the shape of an arrow pointing diagonally downward to the right. Further, the third bent shape portion K5151c is formed in the outer and right range of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed in the front-rear direction.
The fourth refraction shape portion K5151d is formed in the traveling range of the light emitted from the fourth range KG54, and is recessed in a triangular shape having an apex obliquely downward to the right. Further, the fourth bent shape portion K5151d is formed in a range inside and above the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed in the front-rear direction.
The fifth refraction shape portion K5151e is formed in the traveling range of the light emitted from the fifth range KG55, and is recessed in the shape of an arrow pointing diagonally downward to the right. In addition, the fifth folded portion K5151e is formed in the inner and left range of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed in the front-rear direction.

The sixth refraction shape portion K5151f is formed in the traveling range of the light emitted from the sixth range KG56, and is recessed in the shape of an arrow pointing diagonally downward to the left. Further, the sixth bent shape portion K5151f is formed in the outer and left range of the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed in the front-rear direction.
The seventh refraction shape portion K5151g is formed in the traveling range of the light emitted from the seventh range KG57, and is recessed in a triangular shape having an apex on the diagonally lower left side. Further, the seventh bending shape portion K5151g is formed in a range inside and above the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed in the front-rear direction.
Due to the formation mode of the light guide member K5150 described above, it is possible for the player to visually recognize different shapes of light corresponding to the difference in the irradiation mode of the light from the light irradiation device K5100. An example of a visual recognition mode of the shape of light will be described below.
FIG. 1740 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. FIG. 1740 shows a state in which the elongated device K5540 (corresponding to the elongated device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is in the right first tilted posture (see FIG. 1659), and also shows the first light effect mode. be done. In FIG. 1740, illustration of the left channel K5086L and the right channel K5086R is omitted for easy understanding.

In the first light effect mode illustrated in FIG. 1740, an arrow-shaped sixth rear display K81f pointing to the upper right is displayed on the left side of the display area of the third pattern display device K81. Further, the light emitted from the first range KG51 and the second range KG53 of the second light emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1738) causes the first refraction shape portion K5151a of the light guide member K5150 (see FIG. 1738) and the second It is visually recognized as shining in the shape of the 3 refraction shape portion K5151c.
Further, the rotary decorative member K4578 of the moving device K4560 is rotated clockwise, and the fourth front display K4580d in the shape of an arrow pointing diagonally downward to the right is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580.
In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 1740, each arrow shape causes a third bending shape portion K5151c, a fourth front indicia K4580d, and a first bending shape portion K5151a starting from the lower end of the sixth rear indicia K81f. In turn, the action of guiding the line of sight in the clockwise direction can be produced. As a result, the player can be urged to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area along the line-of-sight guidance direction.
Thus, according to the present embodiment, not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the moving device K4560 and the first bending shape portion K5151a of the light guide member K5150 arranged in front of the display area, the display By making the third bent shape portion K5151c formed outside the area emit light at the same time, it is possible for the player to visually recognize it as a series of decorations.

In particular, the third bent shape portion K5151c allows the player to visually recognize the arrow shape that overlaps the game area. Compared to the case where the arrow is displayed by the device K81, the player can accurately grasp the position where the game ball should be shot and aimed.
FIG. 1741 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. FIG. 1741 shows a state in which the elongated device K5540 (corresponding to the elongated device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is retracted upward (standby state for presentation), and also shows the second light presentation mode.
In the second light effect mode illustrated in FIG. 1741, the third rear display K81c is displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. Furthermore, the light emitted from the fifth range KG55 and the sixth range KG56 of the second light emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1738) causes the fifth refraction shape portion K5151e of the light guide member K5150 (see FIG. 1738) and the third The shape of the 6-refracting shape portion K5151f is visually recognized as shining.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 1741, each arrow shape stops the ball from being shot to the right side of the game area, and increases the player's ball shooting intensity so that the ball will flow down the left side of the third symbol display device K81. It can produce an inducing effect. As a result, the player can be urged to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game area.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the fifth bending shape portion K5151e of the light guide member K5150 arranged in front of the display area, By also causing the sixth bent shape portion K5151f formed in 1 to emit light at the same time, the player can be visually recognized as a series of decorations.
In particular, the sixth bent shape portion K5151f allows the player to visually recognize the arrow shape that overlaps the game area, so that the display area can fit inside the center frame K5086 (see FIG. 1736) when viewed from the front. Compared to the case where the arrow is displayed by the device K81, the player can accurately grasp the position where the game ball should be shot and aimed.
FIG. 1742 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. FIG. 1742 shows a state in which the elongated device K5540 (corresponding to the elongated device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is in the right second inclined posture (see FIG. 1737), and also shows the third light effect mode. be done. In FIG. 1742, illustration of the left channel K5086L and the right channel K5086R is omitted for easy understanding.
In the third light effect mode illustrated in FIG. 1742, a fifth front display K4580e consisting of an exclamation mark is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580. Further, when the light is irradiated from the second range KG52 of the second light emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1738), it is visually recognized as shining in the shape of the second refraction shape portion K5151b of the light guide member K5150 (see FIG. 1738). . Further, the lighting of the upper right lamp K940 is controlled.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 1742, the second bent shape portion K5151b is visually recognized as extending upward and to the right through the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front. The line of sight formed by the second refraction shape portion K5151b can guide the line of sight in the upper right direction, and the lighting of the upper right lamp K940 can be noticed.
Thus, according to this embodiment, not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the moving device K4560 arranged in front of the display area, and the light guide member formed over the inside and outside of the display area By making the second bent shape portion K5151b of K5150 emit light at the same time, it is possible to make the player visually recognize it as a series of decorations, and guide the player's line of sight to the outside of the game area.
In particular, the second refraction shape portion K5151b allows the player to visually recognize light along the linear shape even at a position overlapping the game area, so that the display area fits inside the center frame K5086 when viewed from the front. Compared to the case where the display on the third pattern display device K81 is visually recognized by the player, the line of sight of the player is directed to the outside of the glass unit H16 because the line formed by the second bent shape portion K5151b is not blocked in the game area. It is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to the provided upper right lamp K940.
Various modes are exemplified for the relationship between the display execution timing on the display device K4580 and the light irradiation timing from the second range KG52. For example, it may be done at the same time or with a time difference.

For example, by executing the light irradiation from the second range KG52 after executing the fifth front display K4580e on the display device K4580, the player's line of sight is temporarily focused on the display area of the display device K4580, and then the second refraction is performed. It can be produced so as to be reflected on the shape portion K5151b. As a result, after the display by the display device K4580 and the shape of the light in the second refraction shape portion K5151b are generated, a series of viewing modes including the upper right lamp K940 are formed. can be effectively guided to the upper right lamp K940.
FIG. 1743 is a front view of the pachinko machine K5010. FIG. 1743 shows a state in which the elongated device K5540 (corresponding to the elongated device K540 in each of the above embodiments) is retracted upward (standby state for presentation), and also shows the fourth light presentation mode.
In the fourth light effect mode illustrated in FIG. 1743, a seventh rear display K81g consisting of a comment "if it shines, it's an oven" is displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device K81. Further, light emitted from the fourth range KG54 and the seventh range KG57 of the second light emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1738) causes the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d of the light guide member K5150 (see FIG. 1738) and the fourth The shape of the 7 refraction shape portion K5151g is visually recognized as shining.
Lighting of the LEDs in the fourth range KG54 and the seventh range KG57 of the second light emitting means K5112 (see FIG. 1738) is controlled when the on-off valve K5086V (see FIG. 1736) is opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1743, if the player can visually recognize the light in the shapes of the fourth bent shape portion K5151d and the seventh bent shape portion K5151g, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the state change of the on-off valve K5086V. Also, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the game ball is made to enter the left channel K5086L or the right channel K5086R (see FIG. 1736). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game mode in which the ball is shot while paying attention to how the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g shine.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, not only the display area of the third pattern display device K81, but also the fourth bending shape portion K5151d arranged in front of the display area and formed outside the display area and By controlling the light emission of the seventh bent shape portion K5151g, it is possible for the player to see these as a series of decorations.
In particular, since the fourth bent shape portion K5151d and the seventh bent shape portion K5151g are fixed to the back side of the base plate K5060 (see FIG. 1739), the left channel K5086L and the right side of the third pattern display device K81 The distance to the channel K5086R (see FIG. 1736) is short (close both in the front-rear direction and in the direction crossing the front-rear direction).
Therefore, while making the player pay attention to the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g, when the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g are illuminated, the fourth refraction shape portion K5151d and the seventh refraction shape portion K5151g are illuminated. Since it is possible to prompt the player to shoot the ball toward the 7 bending shape portion K5151g, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity compared to the case where the spot of interest is different from the spot targeted by the shot ball.
The 110th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1744-1745. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the large design K221a and the small design K221b are applied to the decorative cover K220 arranged on the front side of the second winning opening K640 and the second specific winning opening K650a has been described, but the 110th embodiment. In the form, the front side of the path from the through gate K67 to the first specific winning opening K65a is decorated. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 1744 is a front view of the game board K5013 in the 110th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1744, on the game board K5013, a second prize winning unit K5270 is arranged downstream of the through gate K67 to form a passage to the first specific prize winning port K65a.
The second winning unit K5270 is configured to be able to distribute the game balls that have flowed downstream from the through gate K67 to the first specific winning opening K65a or the further downstream winning unit K200.
The second winning unit K5270 includes a flow path forming member K5271 that forms a flow path for game balls and is fixed to the base plate K60, and a flow path forming member K5270 that is fixed to the front side of the flow path forming member K5271 and the flow path forming member K5270. and a decorative cover K5280 that constitutes the front side of the.
The flow path forming member K5271 and the decorative cover K5280 are made of a light-transmissive resin material, and are irradiated with light from the decorative substrate K405 (see FIG. 1660) arranged on the back side, thereby forming the flow path forming member K5271 and the decorative cover K5280. A light effect is executed in which the cosmetic cover K5280 is brightened.

Figure 1745(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the game board K5013 in the MDCCCXXXIIa portion of Figure 1744, and Figure 1745(b) is a partially enlarged front view of Figure 1745(a). In FIG. 1745(b), non-change regions K5282c and K5284c of respective forming portions K5282 and K5284 are illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 1745(a), on the front side of the game ball flow path formed by the flow path forming member K5271, a symbol (in this embodiment, "A", "B", etc.) is attached to the decorative cover K5280. By applying a pattern that makes the symbol of ) visually recognizable, we are trying to improve the performance associated with the flow of the game ball. Details will be described below.
The flow path forming member K5271 includes a first inclined portion K5272 that is arranged and formed across the left and right so as to land the game ball that has flowed downstream of the through gate K67 (see FIG. 1744) and that is inclined downward to the right; A vertical constituent portion K5273 extending in the vertical direction so as to flow down the game ball that has reached the downstream end of the first inclined portion K5272, and the game ball that has reached the downstream end of the vertical constituent portion K5273 is landed. and a second sloped portion K5274 that slopes downward to the left so that the water flows down to the left after the second sloped portion K5274.
That is, on the downstream side of the through gate K67, a detour flow path is formed by the flow path component K5271 to allow the game ball to detour to the right and flow down. As a result, the period in which the game ball is visually recognized through the decorative cover K5280 is lengthened, and the range in which the game ball is visually recognized is widened.

The decorative cover K5280 has a seal formed of a light-transmitting resin material attached to the front side surface. , a first forming portion K5282 formed inside the first contour portion K5281, a second contour portion K5283 forming the symbol "B", and a second contour portion K5283 formed inside the second contour portion K5283. It comprises a forming portion K5284, a third contour portion K5285 forming a symbol “!!”, and a third forming portion K5286 formed inside the third contour portion K5285. !!”, “B!!” or “AB!!” can be visually recognized.
Although it is possible to provide a part of the channel structure on the decorative cover K5280 side, in this embodiment, the decorative cover K5280 is configured as a simple plate member. As a result, when there is a desire to change the decoration (for example, change "AB" to "CD"; if "AB" is a number, change it to another number, etc.), the decorative cover K5280 can be Since it can be dealt with by replacing it with the decorative cover K5280 on which another decoration is formed, the labor involved in changing the decoration can be reduced.
It should be noted that the selection of symbols to be visually recognized in a series may be left to the player. , a specific symbol may be configured to be easily visible in a series. In this case, by illuminating part of "A" and "B" instead of all of them, a symbol different from "A" and "B" can be visually recognized. At the same time, the "!!" may be illuminated and visually recognized as a series of decorations.
In the present embodiment, the first contour portion K5281, the second contour portion K5283, and the third contour portion K5285 are black and formed with low transparency, while the first formation portion K5282, the second formation portion K5284, and the third contour portion K5284 are black. The formation portion K5286 is colored yellow and is formed so as to transmit light more easily than the first contour portion K5281, the second contour portion K5283, and the third contour portion K5285.

The width of the first contour K5281 and the width of the second contour K5283 are shorter than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, when the ball flows down the back side of the decorative cover K5280 and the ball is positioned behind the first contour K5281 or the second contour K5283, the first contour K5281 or the second contour K5283 in a front view. It is possible to avoid a situation in which all the balls enter the inside of the ball and the visibility of the ball is extremely poor.
By configuring in this way, for example, when the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 are arranged adjacent to each other, there is even a slight gap between the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283. As long as there is a gap, even if the ball is positioned at the first downstream position KPD51 behind it, the ball will all fit inside the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 when viewed from the front, and the visibility of the ball will be good. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of extremely bad situations.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the widths of the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 are shorter than the radius of the sphere. As a result, for example, when the second contour portion K5283 is arranged without leaving a gap between it and the first contour portion K5281, even if the sphere is positioned at the second flow-down position KPD52 behind it, in front view It is possible to avoid a situation in which the sphere is entirely inside the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 and the visibility of the sphere is extremely poor.
The pattern formed by the third contour portion K5285 and the third forming portion K5286 is arranged at a position deviated from the flow channel formed by the flow channel forming member K5271. Therefore, since the sphere through the decorative cover K5280 cannot be hidden by the third outline portion K5285 and the third forming portion K5286, the degree of freedom in design is high. In fact, in the present embodiment, the third outline portion K5285 is configured so that the dimension in the left-right direction is longer than the diameter of the sphere, thereby improving decorativeness.

From the above configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 1745(a), the ball is configured to flow down behind the first contoured portion K5281, the first forming portion K5282, the second contoured portion K5283, and the second forming portion K5284. Therefore, compared to the case of viewing through a colorless and transparent plate, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the ball is passing through the flow path on the back side, and it is printed on the seal of the decorative cover K5280 The decorative pattern can be emphasized to make the decorative cover K5280 stand out.
In addition, when a sphere actually passes through the back side of the decorative cover K5280, the degree of transparency of the sphere visually recognized through the decorative cover K5280 repeats between cases in which it is easy to pass through and cases in which it is difficult to pass through. It is possible to cause a change in the appearance of the sphere, which can improve performance.
Furthermore, since the shadow of the ball is reflected on the decorative cover K5280, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the player loses sight of the ball flowing down the back side of the decorative cover K5280. By visually superimposing the shadow of the ball on the outline portions K5281 and K5283 and the formation portions K5282 and K5284, the player can be made to visually recognize a pattern different from the situation in which the ball is not flowing down.
The flow path configured by the flow path forming member K5271 is a substantially U-shaped flow path that bypasses, and at each position where the ball flows down in the left-right direction and the up-down direction, the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 and the sphere are intersected. That is, even when one game ball flows down, it is possible to cause a plurality of changes between a case where it is easy to penetrate and a case where it is difficult to penetrate. As compared with the case where the direction change occurs repeatedly, the performance can be improved more easily.

When white light is emitted from the electrical board K405 (see FIG. 1660) arranged on the back side, the flow path forming member K5271 and the decorative cover K5280 are brightened. On the other hand, when the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path forming member K5271, the shadow of the sphere is reflected on the decorative cover K5280, and thus the appearance of the pattern formed on the decorative cover K5280. changes.
First, when the ball is not flowing down, the color difference between the first contour portion K5281 and the second contour portion K5283 and the first forming portion K5282 and the second forming portion K5284 is large. clearly visible. The symbol "AB" stands for "AdvanceBase (advantageous state)", and by brightly recognizing the symbol "AB", the player is given an advantage over the normal state. It is possible to notify that it is in a good state.
On the other hand, when the sphere is flowing down, the color difference between the shadow of the sphere and the first contour K5281 and the second contour K5283 is small. It is difficult to distinguish from K5283, and the first formation portion K5282 and the second formation portion K5284 are visually recognized as if a spherical shadow has been formed. By visually recognizing this worm-eaten, the player can grasp that the ball is flowing down.
In the first formation portion K5282 and the second formation portion K5284, the changing regions K5282b and K5284b, which can be visually recognized as if a spherical shadow has been formed by the ball flowing down behind, do not overlap with the flow-down path of the ball. As a result, the ball does not flow backward in the first place, and the non-change areas K5282c and K5284c in which the worm-eaten spherical shape cannot occur are provided.

The non-changed regions K5282c and K5284c are regions forming a part of the symbol "AB" described above, and are also regions forming the symbol "HK" as shown in FIG. 1745(b). . The symbol "HK" stands for "HoleKeep", and by making the symbol "HK" visible brightly, the player can It is possible to notify that the first specific winning hole K65a (see FIG. 1744) is open and the ball can be entered.
As described above, no shadows of spheres are generated in the non-changing regions K5282c and K5284c, so the non-changing regions K5282c and K5284c are visually recognized in a perfect state (no moth-eaten state) regardless of the distance between the plurality of falling spheres. can be made easier.
Here, while the ball is flowing down the second inclined portion K5274, the first forming portion K5282 and the second forming portion K5284 already appear to be worm-eaten with spherical shadows. , the ball may flow down the first inclined portion K5272. That is, when balls flowed down behind the decorative cover K5280, whether the number of balls was one or a plurality of balls, the first formation portion K5282 and the second formation portion K5284 were worm-eaten with spherical shadows. In some cases, it is difficult to determine how many balls are flowing down.
In contrast, in the present embodiment, a non-transmissive forming portion K5282a is formed at the lower end portion of the first forming portion K5282. The non-transmissive forming portion K5282a is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, non-transmissive (low transmissive) and white. When the adjacent first formation portion K5282 (yellow in this embodiment) has a color relationship in which it is difficult to distinguish the color, and the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1660) arranged on the back side is turned off. Also, when illuminated by white light from the electrical decoration board K405 (see FIG. 1660) arranged on the back side, the non-transmissive forming portion K5282a is difficult for the player to recognize.

On the other hand, when illuminated with white light from the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1660) arranged on the back side, when a game ball is arranged behind the non-transmissive forming part K5282a, the shadow of the ball is non-existent. It is projected around the transmissive formation portion K5282a. In this case, since the shadow of the sphere is black in contrast to the color of the non-transmissive formation portion K5282a (white in this embodiment), the colors can be easily distinguished, and the non-transmissive formation portion K5282a can be easily recognized by the player. That is, the player can accurately count the number of game balls that have flowed behind the decorative cover K5280 by counting the number of times the non-transparent forming portion K5282a is recognized.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the contour portions K5281 and K5283 are formed with the same width, and the formation portions K5282 and K5284 are formed with the same width, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The contour portions K5281 and K5283 may be formed with different widths, the forming portions K5282 and K5284 may be formed with different widths, and the width may be designed to be different for each portion.
Moreover, although the case where the contour portions K5281 and K5283 are wider than the forming portions K5282 and K5284 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the patterns may be formed such that the forming portions K5282 and K5284 are wider than the contour portions K5281 and K5283. In this case, each of the contour portions K5281 and K5283 may have a gap with the adjacent portion regardless of whether it is inside or outside, and filling the gap eliminates the configuration between the contour portions K5281 and K5283. It can be configured as follows.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the symbol "AB" is formed on the decorative cover K5280 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a wide shape such as a "wave pattern", "ripple", "star shape", or "lightning shape" may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the flow path formed on the back side of the decorative cover K5280 is formed on the front side of the front side surface of the base plate K60 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pattern may be formed on the front side of the flow path formed behind the front side surface of the base plate K60.
That is, for example, a pattern may be formed on the gutter front member K91 (see FIG. 1651) that constitutes the gutter through which the balls flow down. In this case, the sphere can pass through the back side of the pattern, and the sphere can pass through the front side of the pattern.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the difference in transmittance between the contour portions K5281 and K5283 and the forming portions K5282 and K5284 is realized by the color difference (black is more effective as a filter for blocking light than yellow). color light can be blocked), but is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the contour portions K5281 and K5283 are thicker than the forming portions K5282 and K5284, so that the contour portions K5281 and K5283 emit more light than the forming portions K5282 and K5284. may be configured so as to be difficult to pass through. In this case, even if the contour portions K5281 and K5283 and the formation portions K5282 and K5284 are of the same color, the thicker the plate, the more easily the light is absorbed, so that a difference in transmittance can be produced.

In this case, the contoured portions K5281 and K5283 are formed to protrude from the forming portions K5282 and K5284 in the front-rear direction. If the sphere is formed on the side of the area where the sphere flows down, it can affect the direction of the sphere's flow. Since there is no scraping due to collision, it is possible to maintain the difference in permeability between the outline portions K5281, K5283 and the forming portions K5282, K5284 over a long period of time.
In addition, the plate thickness of the regions (colorless and transparent regions) on the opposite sides of the forming portions K5282 and K5284 across the contour portions K5281 and K5283 may be the same as those of the forming portions K5282 and K5284, or It may be formed thinner than K5282 and K5284. Thinner than the forming portions K5282 and K5284 can make it easier to improve attention to the regions inside the contour portions K5281 and K5283.
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which white light is emitted from the electrical board K405 (see FIG. 1660) arranged on the back side of the decorative cover K5280 to brighten the decorative cover K5280. will be explained.
For example, to encourage a right-handed game, white light is emitted from the electric decoration board K405 (see FIG. 1660) during a jackpot game or during time saving, while in a normal state that does not promote a right-handed game, the electric decoration board K405 may be turned off, and the symbol "AB" may be darkened to make it difficult to see.

In this case, compared to the case where light is constantly emitted from the illumination board K405 (see FIG. 1660), the player sees the symbol "AB" on the decorative cover K5280 and misunderstands that it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a right-handed game is erroneously played.
Further, for example, LEDs for illuminating the changing regions K5282b and K5284b and LEDs for illuminating the non-changing regions K5282c and K5284c may be prepared separately. In this case, in addition to a situation in which the entire symbol "AB" is illuminated, a situation in which only the changing areas K5282b and K5284b are illuminated, and a situation in which only the non-changing areas K5282c and K5284c are illuminated, depending on the lighting pattern of the LEDs. can be configured.
In this case, for example, only the changing areas K5282b and K5284b are opened during the period when the first specific winning opening K65a (or the second winning opening K640, the second specific winning opening K650a, see FIG. 1744) on the downstream side is open. Alternatively, the illuminating LEDs may be turned off and the LEDs illuminating only the non-change areas K5282c and K5284c may be turned on. As a result, the player can easily recognize the "HK" formed by the non-changing areas K5282c and K5284c, and the first specific winning opening K65a (or the second specific winning opening K640, the second specific winning opening K650a, see FIG. 1744). ), the user can easily grasp that it is time to shoot the ball.
Also, for example, the color of the light is not limited to white, and colored light may be emitted, the color of the light emitted may be different for each symbol, or the colors may change in order ( For example, the emitted light may be controlled so that the seven colors of the rainbow change in order (red, orange, yellow, green, blue orchid, purple).

In addition, for example, the lighting mode (timing) of the light may be such that a plurality of LEDs are lit at the same time so that the entire symbol "AB" on the decorative cover K5280 is illuminated at the same time, or the order in which the symbol is read is taken into consideration. Then, the lighting timings of the plurality of LEDs may be shifted so that they become brighter from left to right.
Various technical ideas have been described above based on the above embodiments, but the technical ideas described above are not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the various technical ideas described above. It is easy to infer that it is possible. Further, the above-described various embodiments (especially the 108th embodiment to the 110th embodiment) are applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the above-described various control examples (especially the 29th control example to the 44th control example). Of course, it is also possible to apply various structures described above.
In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment. The same applies to the modifications (another embodiment) shown below. It is good also as a modification of. Embodiments to which modifications shown below are applied are arbitrary, and any modification (combination or replacement of modifications) may be applied to any embodiment.
In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation operation unit A400b is configured in an operation mode combining tilting and expansion has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movement of the base plate member A430 and the movement of the moving member A440 may be used to move a door-shaped door member that slides in the left-right direction.
In this case, the columnar portion protruding forward from the rotation tip of the base plate member A430 is formed in the first door member arranged on the front side of the base plate member A430, and is formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape. The columnar portion projecting forward from the rotating tip of the moving member A440 is vertically formed on the second door member arranged on the front side of the moving member A440. By being supported by the elongated hole-shaped second support portion, the first door member and the second door member can be slid in the left-right direction in conjunction with the tilting motion of the rotary motion unit A400b.
The first door member is arranged on the outer side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 than the second door member. The moving member A440 is vertically guided by the first support, and the rotating tip of the moving member A440 is vertically guided by the second support.
In this case, the lateral positions and moving speeds of the first door member and the second door member correspond to the lateral positions and moving speeds of the rotation tip portions of the base plate member A430 and the moving member A440. Therefore, for the first door member that moves based on the left-right direction component of the rotational displacement about the rotation shaft AJ1, in addition to the left-right direction component of the rotation displacement about the rotation shaft AJ1, the moving member A440 Since the amount of movement increases by the extension in the longitudinal direction, the moving speed of the second door member can be made higher than the moving speed of the first door member.

As the base plate member A430 shifts from the presentation standby state to the overhanging state, the lateral component of the rotational displacement about the rotary shaft AJ1 gradually decreases. The horizontal movement speed of the first door member is also gradually decreased (when the driving speed of the drive motor MT1 is constant, the horizontal movement speed of the first door member gradually decreases).
On the other hand, the horizontal component of the rotational displacement of the moving member A440 about the rotation shaft AJ1 basically gradually decreases toward the overhanging state, but the moving member A440 moves in the longitudinal direction toward the end of tilting. The amount that extends to the Therefore, the moving speed of the second door member in the left-right direction from the position where the second door member retreats to the left-right outer side becomes large on the tilt end side where the moving member A440 extends (the driving speed of the drive motor MT1 is constant). In this case, the moving speed of the second door member in the horizontal direction increases toward the drive motor MT1).
Therefore, particularly on the tilt end side of the rotary motion unit A400b, the moving speed of the first door member and the moving speed of the second door member at the same time can be made significantly different, and the effect of the presentation using the door member can be enhanced. can be improved.
In the present embodiment, since the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 are configured as a left and right pair, each operation unit A400, A500 is configured to move the door member, respectively, thereby displaying the third pattern. A production device may be configured that can execute the production of closing the door on the front side of the device 81 (making a state in which there is no gap in front view between the edges of the left and right door members on the leading end side in the moving direction).

Further, it may be constructed such that most (or the whole) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be hidden by a door member that is moved in the horizontal direction by the first operation unit A400. In this case, the second operation unit A500 may be configured so that most (or the entirety) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be hidden by the door member moved in the horizontal direction.
In this embodiment, since the first operation unit A400 is arranged on the front side of the second operation unit A500, for example, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is opened by the door member moved by the first operation unit A400. It is also possible to make the arrangement of the second action unit A500 invisible to the player (hidden) in a state where the entire is hidden. Thereby, even if the door member moved by the first operation unit A400 moves so as to retreat from the front side of the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern is displayed by the door member moved by the second operation unit A500. Since the device 81 is hidden, it is possible to construct a state in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is still hidden. As a result, the player's attention to the door member can be improved.
In the tenth embodiment, the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b from the effect standby state is caused by the shape of the functional long hole A444. Although the direction switching member A450 is displaced in the direction crossing the longitudinal direction of , it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the function long hole A444 is changed by omitting the first parallel portion A444a and moving the formation position of the inclined portion A444b by the length of the first parallel portion A444a toward the rotation tip side of the moving member A440. Additionally, the second parallel portion A444c may also be extended so as to be connected to the end portion of the inclined portion A444b. According to such a shape, the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b from the effect standby state starts from a state in which the displacement of the moving member A440 and the displacement of the direction switching member A450 occur simultaneously, and then the moving member A440 A displacement can be caused to transition to a state in which only a displacement of .
In addition, a reverse inclined portion is formed by a long hole that is inclined from the end of the inclined portion A444b on the side of the rotating shaft AJ1 toward the center of the moving member A440 in the short direction as it approaches the rotating shaft AJ1. You can do it. According to such a shape, the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b from the performance standby state is the displacement in the direction in which the moving member A440 extends in the longitudinal direction and the displacement in the direction in which the direction switching member A450 spreads in the lateral direction. It is started from a state in which the moving member A440 extends in the longitudinal direction, and the direction switching member A450 shifts to a state in which the displacement in the lateral direction (toward the center) occurs simultaneously. displacement can be generated.

In the tenth embodiment, a pair of functional long holes A444 are symmetrically formed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pair may be configured asymmetrically. In this case, the direction switching member A450 on the left side can start displacing at different timings and displacement amounts from the timings at which the direction switching member A450 on the right side starts to displace and the amount of displacement can be different. (It is possible to generate different displacements on the left and right in consideration of the amount of displacement and the timing of displacement so as not to hit an obstacle).
In the tenth embodiment, the moving member A440 moves linearly with respect to the base plate member A430 when the rotary motion unit A400b rotates, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotary motion unit A400b rotates, another rotating member provided in the rotary motion unit A400b may rotate. In this case, it is possible to cause a change in the visual recognition mode that is different from the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b.
In the tenth embodiment, the case where the external shape of the rotary operation unit A400b does not change at the start of tilting has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by designing the shape of the guide slot A414 so that the outer shape of the rotary motion unit A400b changes from the start of tilting, the motion resistance of the rotary motion unit A400b at the start of tilting can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b in the posture at the start.
In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which both the tilting direction motion and the rising direction motion of the rotary motion unit A400b are caused to operate by driving force, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to execute a movement mode that does not depend on the driving force, such as canceling the generation of the driving force from an intermediate position and executing the tilting by its own weight. In this case, the operation mode of the rotary operation unit A400b can be made different between when it is operated by the driving force and when it is operated without depending on the driving force, thereby increasing the variation of the operation. Furthermore, since the duration of driving can be shortened, the service life of the driving motor AMT1 can be extended.

In the tenth embodiment, the moving member A440 is arranged so as to partially overlap with the front side of the base plate member A430, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the base plate member A430 is provided with a metal rod extending toward the rotating distal end, and the moving member A440 is disposed on the rotating distal end side of the metal rod so as to be slidably guided in the extending direction of the metal rod. The base plate member A430 and the moving member A440 may be arranged so as not to overlap each other when viewed from the front. In this case, since the front side of the base plate member A430 is not hidden by the moving member A440, the front side portion of the base plate member A430 can be used for presentation.
In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer shape of the rotary motion unit A400b changes according to the posture of the rotary motion unit A400b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another driving device may be prepared for switching presence/absence of change in the outer shape. By switching the shape of the guide long hole A414 or the shape of the function long hole A444 by this driving device, a plurality of types of external shapes of the rotary motion unit A400b corresponding to the posture of the rotary motion unit A400b are prepared. be able to.
Further, by driving and displacing the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 by another driving device, the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 can be simultaneously moved when the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b does not change. It may be configured to be displaceable. For example, the rotary operation unit A400b can reach the end of tilting without changing its outer shape, and at the end of tilting, another driving device can drive and displace the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 at the same time. , it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the rotary operation unit A400b.
In the tenth embodiment, the operating speed of the drive motor AMT1 is constant and the angular velocity of the rotary motion of the rotary motion unit A400b gradually decreases. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, by gradually increasing the drive speed of the drive motor AMT1 in consideration of the amount of decrease in the angular velocity, the rotational movement of the rotational movement unit A400b can be executed even in a control mode in which the angular velocity of the rotational movement of the rotational movement unit A400b is constant. You can do it.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where the operating resistance of the rotor plate member A662 changes due to the change in the air resistance applied to the rotor plate member A662 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the frictional resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 (for example, contact resistance by a plate member that contacts from the direction perpendicular to the moving direction) may be changed, or the viscous resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 (for example, damper resistance by a member or the like) may be changed.
In the tenth embodiment, light irradiation from the light emitting substrate A720 sandwiched between the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the irradiation surface side of the light emitting substrate may be arranged so as to face the end surfaces of the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740.
In this case, the front plate member A730 (or the rear plate member A740) is irradiated with light from the light emitting substrate A720 (irradiation in the direction along which the plate extends), while the rear plate member A740 (or the front plate member A740) To the member A730), another light-emitting substrate (a light-emitting substrate having a posture different from that of the light-emitting substrate A720 by 90 degrees) is arranged to face the light incident end surface of the rear side plate member A740 (or the front side plate member A730). It may be configured so that light irradiation from the substrate) is performed. As a result, even when the thickness of the front side plate member A730 or the rear side plate member A740 is large, which is considered to be difficult to deal with depending on the light emitting substrate A720, it is possible to make it easier for light to enter an appropriate position.
In the tenth embodiment, the projecting portion A751a of the front cover member A750 and the light emitting substrate A720 are arranged with a space therebetween, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion A751a may be designed in such a dimensional relationship that it can apply a pressing force to the light emitting substrate A720. In this case, since the pressing force applied to the light emitting substrate A720 can be divided by the number of the projecting portions A751a, the arrangement of the light emitting substrate A720 can be stabilized.

The projecting portion A751a of the front cover member A750 has been described as having the same shape for the purpose of diffusing light, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position on the right side of the front light-emitting portion A724 (on the irradiation direction side) relative to the curvature of the projecting portion A751a on the left side of the front light-emitting portion A724 (on the opposite side of the irradiation direction, on the outer side of the front plate member A730) The curvature of the protruding portion A751a may be increased at the inner side of the front side plate member A730. In this case, since the diffusion angle of the projecting portion A751a on the side closer to the front side plate member A730 can be reduced, the diffused light illuminates the front side plate member A730 widely, and the visibility of the linear light by the linear groove portion A732 is reduced. You can avoid dropping it.
In the tenth embodiment, the light-emitting substrate A720 is provided with the light-emitting portions A724 and A725 for irradiating the front plate member A730 and the rear plate member A740, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light-emitting portion may be provided that emits light from the light-emitting substrate A720 to the front cover member A750. In this case, since the light emitting parts A724 and A725 are arranged near the end of the light emitting board A720, the light emitted from the light emitting parts A724 and A725 does not interfere with the light emitted from the front cover member A750. It is possible to facilitate the provision of the part and avoid the interference of light.
In the tenth embodiment, the case where the linear grooves A732 of the front side plate member A730 are formed in accordance with the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, the linear groove portion A732 may be formed in a figure or an illustration shape different from the illustration formed on the thin resin plate A743. In this case, the linear groove A732 emits light (the shape of the linear groove A732 emits light) and the linear groove A732 does not emit light (the illustration formed on the thin resin plate A743 can be seen). can make a big difference in appearance.
The linear grooves A732 may be formed not only on the front plate member A730 but also on the thin resin plate A743 (or the front plate members A730 may be arranged in front of and behind the light emitting substrate A720). In this case, if LEDs with high directivity are also adopted for the rear light emitting portion A725, it is possible to realize a light effect in which linear light is visually recognized even on the thin resin plate A743.

Further, an illustration including a specific character or logo may be formed not only on the thin resin plate A743 but also on the front side plate member A730 (or the rear side plate member A740 may be arranged in front of and behind the light emitting substrate A720). ), and the front-to-rear arrangement of the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 may be reversed.
In each of these cases, the directivity of the front light emitting portion A724 or the rear light emitting portion A725 may be selected according to the purpose (if the directivity is high, total reflection is likely to occur, and if the directivity is low, total reflection occurs. (Since it is difficult to light, it is easy to illuminate a wide range of the side surface of the plate member). In addition, the shape of the illustration including a specific character or logo may be the same or different between the member arranged on the front side and the member arranged on the rear side of the light emitting substrate A720. .
In the tenth embodiment, the front side plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear side plate member A740 are positioned by the portions protruding from the front cover member A750. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the front cover member A750, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear plate member A740 may be positioned by the portions protruding forward and backward from the front side plate member A730. In this case, since the projecting length of the portion projecting from the front side plate member A730 can be shortened, the possibility of accidentally damaging the projecting portion by dropping the front side plate member A730 during assembly is reduced. be able to.
Further, the front side plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720 and the front cover member A750 may be positioned by the portions projecting from the rear side plate member A740. Since the rear side plate member A740 is different from the member in which the line-shaped groove is formed, the position of the projecting portion is not restricted by the line-shaped groove. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the projecting portion.

Further, only the positioning of the light emitting substrate A720, the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 may be performed, and the positioning with respect to the front cover member A750 may not be performed. In this case, the front cover member A750 can be removed while the light emitting substrate A720, the front side plate member A730, and the rear side plate member A740 are aligned. This makes it possible to easily replace the front cover member A750 as a decorative part (replacement when soiled, replacement due to specification change, etc.).
Various modes are exemplified for the formation position of the portion projected for positioning. For example, if positioning with the front cover member A750 is assumed, it is better to form it at the rear position of the front cover member A750. On the other hand, if positioning with the front cover member A750 is not assumed, it may be formed at a position different from the rear position of the front cover member A750, as is the case with the fastening portion A733.
In the tenth embodiment, the case where the visibility of the ball flowing down the rear flow path of the downstream guide member A803 changes due to the difference in the inclination angle of the line of sight direction in the horizontal direction due to the visibility mode changing sheet A806. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. When the visibility is changed by the difference in the angle of inclination of the line of sight in the horizontal direction, there is an effect of reducing the possibility that a player playing next to the player will peek at the falling ball. For example, in the case of configuring the visual recognition mode changing sheet A806 so that the visibility of the ball flowing down the rear flow path of the downstream guide member A803 changes due to the difference in the inclination angle of the direction of the line of sight in the vertical direction, the game This has the effect of reducing the possibility of being peeped at by others standing behind the person.
In the tenth embodiment, the case where the viewing mode changing sheet A806 is attached to the front side of the plate-like main body A803a of the front member A803z has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the viewing mode changing sheet A806 may be attached to the left and right outer surfaces of the extension plate A803b. In this case, when the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are viewed from the horizontal direction, the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are easily visually recognized, and the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 It is possible to create a directional view that makes it difficult to visually recognize the right flow path ATL2.

In the tenth embodiment, the visibility change sheet A806 reduces the visibility of the ball when the player, whose head is placed on the front side of the third pattern display device 81, looks sideways at the downstream guide member A803. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sheet that produces the same function as the viewing mode change sheet A806 is pasted on the entire display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and a player who has placed his head on the front side of the downstream side guide member A803 sees the third pattern while looking sideways. The display on the display device 81 may be configured to be difficult to see (light is shielded by the viewing mode change sheet A806). In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by not visually recognizing the display of the third symbol display device 81 in a situation where the player is paying attention to the ball flowing down behind the downstream side guide member A803. Since the light emitted from the third pattern display device 81 can be configured so as not to reach the player, the player can avoid the situation where the eyes are exposed to dazzling light and can rest the eyes. can.
In the tenth embodiment, the visibility mode changing sheet A806 is used to make it difficult to visually recognize the left flow path ATL1, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the right flow path ATL2, or the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2, may constitute the case where it is difficult to visually recognize, and the selection is arbitrary. The right side flow path ATL2 is a flow path that guides the ball to the second prize winning opening 640, and the shape of the left side flow path ATL1 is modified so that the ball flowing down the left side flow path ATL1 is guided to the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring, depending on the design of the visual recognition mode change sheet A806, only the ball guided to the second winning opening 640 can be easily visually recognized, or only the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be easily visually recognized. It is possible to produce such a performance.
For example, on the premise that the viewing mode changing sheet A806 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the left flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2, the viewing mode changing sheet A806 covering the front side of the left flow path ATL1 is viewed from the front and obliquely to the left. The visibility change sheet A806 covering the front side of the right flow path ATL2 is designed to have high permeability when viewed from the right diagonal direction, but low permeability when viewed from the right diagonal direction. If the design is such that the permeability is high when viewed from the direction, but the permeability is low when viewed obliquely from the left, the permeability of the left channel ATL1 and the right channel ATL2 is increased when viewed from the front. However, when viewed obliquely from the left, the permeability of the left channel ATL1 is high, while the permeability of the right channel ATL2 is decreased, and when viewed obliquely from the right, the permeability of the left channel ATL1 is low. On the other hand, the permeability of the right channel ATL2 can be increased.
Further, in this case, the permeability of the left channel ATL1 and the right channel ATL2 may be lowered when viewed from the front. In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are visible at the same time. It is possible to make the player play a game of looking into the side guide member A803 from above.

The surface of the viewing mode change sheet A806 may be decorated with a shape of an illustration including a specific character, logo, or the like.
In the tenth embodiment described above, the case where the visibility of the falling ball is changed by the visibility mode changing sheet A806 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light-impermeable louver plate portion is arranged between a pair of front and rear light-transmitting plates, and the louver swings or bends to block or transmit the player's line of sight. and may be switched.
In addition, openings are formed in a pair of front and rear non-transmissive plate members. Due to the shift in the front view of the position of , while it is possible to visually recognize the back side when looking through the inside of the front and back openings, the line of sight is blocked by the plate member when looking in the direction away from either of the front and back openings. By doing so, it may be configured such that the far side cannot be visually recognized.
In the tenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball is detected by the detection sensor SE1, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there is no need to pay out prize balls. As an application where no prize balls are paid out, for example, use in a gaming machine that allows selection of the type of jackpot game (number of rounds, etc.) based on detection of balls by the detection sensor SE1 is assumed. In such a game machine, since it is conceivable that the attention to the detection sensor SE1 is extremely lowered except at the timing of selecting the type of jackpot game, the detection sensor SE1 is hidden by arranging the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 in front of it. It makes sense.

In addition, as another application when there is no payout of prize balls, for example, the detection sensor SE1 is arranged downstream of the specific winning hole 65a, and the passage of the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game is detected. It is expected to be used in a gaming machine that is used as a "V prize opening (specific area)" that is controlled so that the game state shifts to a predetermined advantageous state after the end of the big win. In such a game machine, since the ball is not guided to the detection sensor SE1 except during the jackpot game, it is conceivable that the attention to the detection sensor SE1 is extremely lowered except during the jackpot game. It is meaningful to dispose the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 to hide the detection sensor SE1.
It should be noted that if the player moves his or her head to the front position of the visible state change sheet A806 during the big win, it becomes possible to see through the visible state change sheet A806 and visually recognize the detection sensor SE1 on the back side thereof. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the detection sensor SE1 is difficult to see during the jackpot game.
Further, for example, when there is a prize ball to be paid out, a number ("+1", "+3", etc.) corresponding to the number of balls to be paid out may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the detection of the ball. good. In this case, even if the player cannot visually recognize the ball flowing behind the downstream side guide member A803, the player can understand that the prize ball has been paid out from the display of the third symbol display device 81. , it is possible to improve the interest of the player.
In the tenth embodiment, in the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, the front side plate member A840 is provided with the linear groove portion A842 to enable a light effect that makes the outline of the light visible, while the rear side plate member A850 has Although the case where the line-shaped groove portion A842 is not formed and uniform surface emission is performed for light production has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the linear grooves A842 may be formed not only in the front plate member A840 but also in the rear plate member A850. In this case, if LEDs with high directivity are also used for the edge light-emitting portions A833 and A837, it is possible to realize a light effect in which line-shaped light is visually recognized even on the rear side plate member A850.
Also, an illustration including a specific character or logo may be formed not only on the rear plate member A850 but also on the front plate member A840. can be
In each of these cases, the directivity of the edge light-emitting portions A823, A827, A833, and A837 may be selected according to the purpose (higher directivity facilitates total reflection, lower directivity lowers total reflection). Since it is hard to occur, it is easy to illuminate a wide range of the side surface of the plate member). Further, the shape of the illustration including a specific character or logo formed on the front side plate member A840 and the rear side plate member A850 may be the same or may be different.
In the tenth embodiment, the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725 are configured such that the optical axes of the plurality of LEDs are parallel to each other, and the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 and the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837 A case has been described in which the optical axes of a plurality of LEDs are configured in a radial relationship with each other (set in such a manner that the distance between adjacent optical axes increases toward the leading end in the traveling direction), but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the relationship of these optical axes may be reversed.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the linear portion of the guide long hole A2414 extends in the inclined direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction in which the linear portion extends may be configured to extend in the horizontal direction. In this case, the difference in operating resistance between the outward path and the return path can be reduced.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the case of separately preparing the solenoid A4940 for driving the light guide displacement member A4920 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may also be used as a driving device for the electric accessory 640a. In this case, it is possible to easily match the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the operation timing of the light guide displacement member A4920.
Also, instead of the light guide displacement member A4920, a movable accessory (for example, the first motion unit A400) that mainly projects to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 is inserted through the inner region of the center frame A86 as a base. The movable accessory may be used to block the line of sight to the flow path of the spheres by configuring it so that it can protrude to the front side of the plate A60 and to be movable to a position where the line of sight to the flow path of the spheres is blocked. . In this case, the solenoid A4940 can be dispensed with because the separate driving device for the movable accessory can be used also as the driving device for blocking the line of sight to the flow path of the sphere.
In the thirteenth embodiment, if an illustration including a specific character or logo is formed on the front guide plate portion A4931 of the covering member A4930, the illustration can make the linear groove portion A4921a difficult to see. This can improve the appearance of the ball guide unit A4900 when the light emitting means A4933a is not lit. Further, by forming the linear groove portion A4921a in a shape corresponding to the illustration formed on the front side guide plate portion A4931, it is possible to improve the presentation effect.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the visual recognition mode changing sheet A806 may be attached to the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guide displacement member A4920. In this case, even if the player's line of sight does not change, the displacement of the light guiding displacement member A4920 changes the relative positional relationship between the player's line of sight and the viewing mode change sheet A806. is not changed, the visibility of the sphere flowing down behind the light guide displacement member A4920 can be changed.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the incidence of light on the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guide displacement member A4920, the number and arrangement of the light emitting means, the selection of the light emitting means to be lit, and the design of the structure will be described in the tenth embodiment. All or all of the structures of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b and the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 may be used.
In the fourteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the columnar projecting member A5448 is pushed by the extended guide portion A5438 to be displaced relative to the moving member A5440, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the gear and rack that engage and rotate based on the tilt angle of the rotary motion unit A5400b and the columnar projecting member A5448, the columnar projecting member A5448 can be configured to interlock with the tilting angle of the rotary motion unit A5400b. The member A5448 may be displaced, or a driving device for driving the columnar projecting member A5448 may be arranged in the rotary operation unit A5400b, and the columnar projecting member A5448 may be driven and displaced by drive control of the driving device. .
In the 16th to 49th embodiments, one engaging portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a are connected (arranged), and a pair of (two) engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b are connected to the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520. is connected (arranged), but it is not necessarily limited to this. , Wy530a or the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b may be omitted.

In the sixteenth to forty-ninth embodiments, the concave portions W224a and W224b are front surfaces of the flat portions W320, W4320, We320, Wj320, Wm320 and Ws320 on the side of the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b and Wu530b. , and connecting pieces W531a, W531b of the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b may be arranged at positions overlapping the recesses W224a, W224b when viewed from the front.
In the 16th to 49th embodiments, protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, W1500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 at the rear wall W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 facing the front wall W520, W2520, W3520, Wp5200, Wq A standing portion W222 may be erected on the side surface. By arranging the upright portion W222 on the tip side (the side opposite to the left wall portion W502) of the rear wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, and Wq510, the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, When removing W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, W50yw500, W50yw500 , the standing portion W222 can easily damage the sealing seal WSL.
In the 16th to 49th embodiments, the sealing seal WSL may be cut using the standing portions W540, Wc540, Wd540, and the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, The sealing seal WSL may be cut using the inclined portions W532 (projecting tip portions) of Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b.これにより、傾斜部Ｗ５３２に係合部Ｗ５３０ａ，Ｗ２５３０ａ，Ｗ３５３０ａ，Ｗｂ５３０ａ，Ｗｅ５３０ａ，Ｗｆ５３０ａ，Ｗｇ５３０ａ，Ｗｊ５３０ａ，Ｗｌ５３０ａ，Ｗｏ５３０ａ，Ｗｐ５３０ａ，Ｗｑ５３０ａ，Ｗｖ５３０ａ，Ｗｙ５３０ａ，Ｗ５３０ｂ，Ｗ２５３０ｂ，Ｗ３５３０ｂ，Ｗｂ５３０ｂ，Ｗｍ５３０ｂ，Ｗｎ５３０ｂ， The function of facilitating elastic deformation of the Wu 530b and the function of cutting the sealing seal WSL can be combined, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.
In the sixteenth to forty-ninth embodiments, the erected portions W540, Wc540, and Wd540 are non-molded, and the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500 are reversed, and box covers W200, W4200, W4200 , W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, W1200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200, the cover side engaged portion W210 and the box base W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wkj300 , Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, and Wu300. As a result, a fraudulent person may mistakenly Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 are reversed, and box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, qo200 , Wr200, Wt200, and Wv200, and the base-side engaged portions W310 of the box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, and Wu300. , engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, W530b, W2530b, Wb530b, Wb530b, Wb530b, W3530b , Wu 530b and the sealing seal WSL can be brought into contact with each other, giving an opportunity to damage the sealing seal WSL.

In the 16th to 49th embodiments, when one engaging portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a is provided , but not necessarily limited to this, two or more (plural) engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a may be arranged. When a plurality of engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a are provided, engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, W3530a, W3530a , Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a may be engaged by the protrusion Wr214b of the cover Wr214 in the forty-second embodiment. That is, the directions of elastic deformation can be opposite in the plurality of engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a. Therefore, for example, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, W530a, By elastically deforming (displacing) Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a and Wy530a, engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, W530a, Wo 530a, Wp 530a, Wq 530a, Wv 530a, and Wy 530a can be displaced in a direction in which engagement with projection Wr 214b is maintained. As a result, box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, W1200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 and box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, W300, Wb300, We , Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 to protective cover W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, W500, W500, W500, W500, Wi500, Wi50 , Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500 can be prevented from being illegally removed.
In the 16th to 49th embodiments, a pair (two) of engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b are provided, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, one engagement portion W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b may be provided, or three or more may be provided. When three or more engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b are arranged, at least one of the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b is the forty-third embodiment. It is good also as a structure engaged by projection Ws328 of plane part Ws320 in. That is, the directions of elastic deformation can be made opposite in the plurality of engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b. Therefore, for example, the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b engaged with the projection W312c are elastically deformed (displaced) in order to release the engagement with the projection W312c in the sixteenth embodiment. As a result, the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b engaged with the protrusion Ws328 in the forty-third embodiment can be displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the protrusion Ws328 is maintained. . As a result, box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, W1200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 and box bases W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, W300, Wb300, We , Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 to protective cover W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, W500, W500, W500, W500, Wi500, Wi50 , Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, and Wy500 can be prevented from being illegally removed.
In the 16th to 49th embodiments, the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, One engaging portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb on the rear wall portion W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 side of Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 We 530a, Wf 530a, Wg 530a, Wj 530a, Wl 530a, Wo 530a, Wp 530a, Wq 530a, Wv 530a, and Wy 530a are arranged, and a pair (two) of engaging portions W 530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b are provided, and different numbers of engagements are provided between the rear wall W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 and the front wall W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520. Although the description has been given of the case where the section is arranged, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rear wall section W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 side and the front wall section W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 side are engaged. The same number of joints may be provided. For example, two engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wy530a are arranged on the rear wall portion W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 side. Two engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b may be provided on the side of the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, and Wq520.
In the above 16th to 49th embodiments, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a have been described.部Ｗ５３０ｂ，Ｗ２５３０ｂ，Ｗ３５３０ｂ，Ｗｂ５３０ｂ，Ｗｍ５３０ｂ，Ｗｎ５３０ｂ，Ｗｕ５３０ｂの一方に重なる位置に係合部Ｗ５３０ａ，Ｗ２５３０ａ，Ｗ３５３０ａ，Ｗｂ５３０ａ，Ｗｅ５３０ａ，Ｗｆ５３０ａ，Ｗｇ５３０ａ，Ｗｊ５３０ａ，Ｗｌ５３０ａ，Ｗｏ５３０ａ，Ｗｐ５３０ａ，Ｗｑ５３０ａ，Ｗｖ５３０ａ，Ｗｙ５３０ａ may be arranged. That is, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, W1530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a may be arranged to be biased to one side in the vertical direction.

In the 16th to 49th embodiments, the inclined surface formed by the notch portions W226, We226, W325, and We325 may be formed in a straight line, and may It may be formed in a curved shape that is concave toward the surface.
In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the protrusion W4534 is formed to protrude from the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b toward the opposite sides of the rear wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in a quadrangular pyramid shape has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited thereto, and may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape, a conical shape, a polygonal prism shape such as a quadrangular prism or a triangular prism shape, or a columnar shape. When it is formed in a polygonal columnar shape or a cylindrical shape, the broken surface of the sealing seal WSL can be torn off, and when the broken (damaged) sealing seal WSL is reused, the trace of the breaking (damage) will be visible to the operator. It can be easily recognized.
In the 19th to 21st, 41st and 46th embodiments, protective covers W4500, W5500, Wq500 and Wv500 are attached to box covers W200, W4200, Wq200 and Wv200 and box bases W300, W5300 and W6300. The seal WSL may be damaged by the projections W4534, W5534, Wq534, Wv534 during installation.
In the twentieth embodiment and the twenty-first embodiment, part of the pair of end wall portions W223 and W321 may be left unformed. For example, in a pair of both end wall portions W223, W321, if a portion on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (in the direction of the arrow L) is not formed, a protective cover W5500 for the box cover W200 and the box bases W5300, W6300 before the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W5530b and the protrusion W312c are engaged in the attachment of the box cover W5530b, or when the protective cover W5500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box bases W5300 and W6300, the engagement hole W533 and In the state after the engagement with the protrusion W312c is released, the protective cover W5500 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the projection W5534 can be brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be damaged.

In the twentieth and twenty-first embodiments, the sealing seal WSL may be cut using the protrusion W5534 of the engaging portion W5530b cut from the protective cover W5500. This eliminates the need to carry a cutting tool (not shown), and facilitates the work of opening the box cover W200 and the box base W300.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the restricted state. may be formed so as to extend in the direction opposite to the projection W312c (in the direction of the arrow L). For example, half of the range in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced so that the recess W6326 releases the engagement between the projection W312c and the engaging hole W533, the projection W312c side (arrow R direction side) (displacement for unauthorized removal). (the first half of the range where the protective cover W5500 is formed), thereby suppressing the formation of traces (damage) on the sealing seal WSL and the removal of the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300. can be compatible.
That is, when the engaging portion 5530b is elastically deformed without cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engaging hole W533 is released, the protrusion W5534 is received in the recess W6326. By displacing the engaging portion 5530b toward the side opposite to the protrusion W312c (the direction of the arrow L), a trace (damage) can be formed on the sealing seal WSL. On the other hand, the protrusion W5534 contacts the inner wall of the recess W6326 opposite to the protrusion W312c, thereby restricting the displacement of the engaging portion 5530b toward the side opposite to the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction). , the removal of the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300 can be suppressed.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the restricted state. may be formed to extend toward the projection W312c (arrow R direction) on the side opposite to the projection W312c (arrow L direction). For example, the recess W6326 disengages the protrusion W312c from the engaging hole W533, and the protective cover W5500 is displaced in half on the side opposite to the protrusion W312c (in the direction of the arrow L) (unauthorized removal). It may be formed to extend to the latter half of the range to be displaced for the purpose.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the restricted state. may be formed at a position opposite to the projection W312c (arrow L direction side). It may be formed in the middle of the range in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced to release the engagement between the projection W312c and the engagement hole W533.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the surface of the connecting piece W8531b facing the sealing seal WSL or the surface opposite to the side facing the sealing seal WSL may be formed non-parallel to the sealing seal WSL.
In the twenty-third embodiment, at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b may be formed into a curved surface that protrudes toward the side opposite to the opposing side. As a result, the cutting tool can be easily rotated along the curved surface formed on at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.
In the twenty-third embodiment, at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b may be formed into a curved surface that is concave toward the opposing side.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b are inclined with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat portion W220). One of the side surfaces may be inclined with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat portion W220), and the other of the pair of side surfaces may be formed perpendicular to the sealing seal WSL (flat portion W220).
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9531b2 of the connecting piece W9531b may be formed in a substantially elliptical shape when viewed in cross section. As a result, the cutting tool can be easily rotated along the curved surface, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case where a stepped portion is formed at the boundary between the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9531b2 of the connecting piece W9531b (the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9531b2 are directly connected) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a connecting portion that smoothly connects may be interposed between the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9531b2. That is, the interposed portion has a cross-sectional shape that gradually changes from the cross-sectional shape of the first portion W9531b1 to the cross-sectional shape of the second portion W9531b2 as it goes from the first portion W9531b1 to the second portion W9531b2. Formed as a part. As a result, it is possible to suppress the concentration of stress in the connecting portion between the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9531b2, thereby ensuring the strength of the connecting piece WV9531b. In addition, the interposed portion facilitates displacing the cutting tool from the second portion W9531b2 toward the first portion W9531b1.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when the engaging portion W530a is improperly elastically deformed, the sealing seal WSL may be damaged by the first portion W9531b1.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the cutting portion Wa550 is disposed at a position biased toward the front wall portion W520 (arrow F direction) from approximately the center of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). When the protective cover Wa500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the wall portion W520 and the rear wall portion W510 are in the opposite posture (the rear wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520). The portion Wa550 may be arranged at a position facing the cutout portions W226 and W325. As a result, even when the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut and the protective cover Wa500 is displaced toward the sealing unit W400 (the direction of the arrow R), it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL from being cut. On the other hand, the protective cover Wa500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and the protective cover Wa500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 with the front wall W520 and the rear wall W510 facing each other. The Wa550 can be arranged at a position facing the notch portions W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL can be cut using the cutting portion Wa550. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to use the cutting unit Wa550.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case where the cutting portion Wa550 is formed in a serrated shape has been described, but the cutting portion Wa550 is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed in a straight line shape, and the protruding tip portion of the cutting portion Wa550 is It may be formed from a shape in which sine waves from 0 degrees to 180 degrees are connected. When the cut portion Wa550 is formed linearly, it may be formed parallel to the sealing seal WSL, or at least a portion thereof may be inclined. By forming the cut portion Wa550 parallel to the sealing seal WSL, when the sealing seal WSL is cut, the fracture surface of the sealing seal WSL can be formed in a torn manner. This makes it difficult for an unauthorized person to join the broken surfaces of the sealing seal WSL without gaps and reuse the sealing seal WSL.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the entire sawtooth shape formed in the cut portion Wa550 is received in the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL is formed on the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side. Although the case of being separated has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the sealing seals WSL on the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side may be partially connected (at least partially cut off). . In other words, the cut portion Wa550 may form a perforation (a shape in which a cut portion and a connecting portion are formed with a predetermined interval in the vertical direction) in the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut (separated into the plane portion W220 side and the plane portion W320 side). On the other hand, when the connecting portion formed in the sealing seal WSL is cut (broken), the broken surface can be formed into a torn shape, and when the cut (broken) sealing seal WSL is reused, the trace of the cutting is left. It can be made easy for workers to recognize. Further, by displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the side wall portion W212 (the direction of the arrow R), it is possible to easily form perforations in the sealing seal WSL.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the blade Wb552 has a conical tip, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tip portion of the blade portion Wb552 may be formed in a columnar shape, and the cross-sectional shape of the tip portion of the blade portion Wb552 may be constant in the projecting direction (arrow LR direction). In other words, the tip of the blade Wb552 does not have to be sharp. As a result, when the sealing seal WSL is cut using the blade portion Wb552, the fracture surface of the sealing seal WSL can be formed in a torn manner. This makes it difficult for an unauthorized person to join the broken surfaces of the sealing seal WSL without gaps and reuse the sealing seal WSL. Further, the tip portion of the blade Wb552 may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid or a quadrangular pyramid, or may be formed in a polygonal prism shape such as a triangular prism or a square prism.

In the twenty-sixth to twenty-ninth, thirty-third, and forty-ninth embodiments, the sealing seals on the plane portions W220 and We220 of the box covers W200, Wb200, and We200 or the plane portions W320 and We320 of the box bases W300 and We300 Concavities and convexities may be formed on the surface to which the WSL is attached (the surface along which the guide portions Wb560 and Wd560, the lower wall portion W501, or the connecting piece We531a is placed). As a result, the guide portions Wb560, Wd560, the lower wall portion W501, or the connecting piece We531a are moved along the plane portions W220, We220 of the box covers W200, Wb200, We200 or the plane portions W320, We320 of the box bases W300, We300 to form a pair of both end walls. When the portion W223 is displaced from one end to the other, the position of the fracture surface formed in the sealing seal WSL between one end and the other end of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is shifted in the front-rear direction. (direction of arrow FB). As a result, it becomes difficult for a person who commits fraud to join the broken surfaces of the sealing seal WSL without gaps and reuse the sealing seal WSL.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in addition to fitting (engagement) between the standing portion Wd540 and the engagement hole W533, the protection cover Wd500 may include an engaging portion for engaging the engaging portion Wd530a. For example, an engaging portion is formed on the rear wall portion W510 of the protective cover Wd500, and the end portion of the engaging portion Wd530a opposite to the connecting piece W531a (inclined portion W532 side) is formed on the rear wall portion W510. It may be engaged with the part. As a result, the engaging portion Wd530a can be engaged at two different locations on the protective cover Wd500, and the engaging portion Wd530a can be firmly attached to the protective cover Wd500. Also, the attitude of the engaging portion Wd530a can be easily maintained. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by using the engaging portion Wd530a.
In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 (the first restricting portion Wj240 and the second restricting portion Wj250) are formed on the plane portion Wj220. The means Wj230 is formed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the flat portion Wj320, and the combination of the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 allows the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 to engage the engaging portion Wj530a in the restricted state. It may be disposed at a position inside the joint hole W533. By combining the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300, the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230 and the engaging portion Wj530a are engaged. Since the box cover Wj200 includes the cover portion Wj214 and the elastic deformation restricting means Wj230, the resin mold for the box cover Wj200 is complicated. The resin mold for the cover Wj200 can be simplified. As a result, manufacturing costs can be reduced.
In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the distal end of the engaging portion W530b2 may be out of contact with the inclined portion Wk312g of the engaging portion Wk312f (the engaging portion W530b2 may not be elastically deformed). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress elastic deformation of one and the other of the pair of engaging portions W530b in different directions. As a result, the amount of elastic deformation of one (the other) of the pair of engaging portions W530b can be reduced, and one (the other) of the pair of engaging portions W530b can be less likely to be damaged.

In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the case where the engaging portion Wk312f of the cover portion Wk312 is formed on the box base Wk300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. F direction side), and by combining the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the locking portion Wk312f is disposed at a position where it abuts against the tip portion of the engaging portion W530b2 in the restricted state. Also good. By combining the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the tip of the engaging portion W530b2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion Wk312g of the engaging portion Wk312f. Since the box base Wk300 includes the cover portion Wk312, the resin mold for the box base Wk300 is complicated. Can be simplified. As a result, manufacturing costs can be reduced.
In the thirty-fifth embodiment, the protective cover W500 may have two or more engagement portions W530b1 or W530b2, and the box base Wk300 may have two or more protrusions W312c or Wk312c. For example, when a pair of engaging portions W530b2 are formed on both end sides of the protective cover W500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and an engaging portion W530b1 is formed between the pair of engaging portions W530b2, the engagement The elastic deformation of the portion W530b1 toward the box cover W200 (arrow B direction) can be easily suppressed at both ends of the engaging portion W530b1, and the engaging portion W530b1 is improperly elastically deformed and protected from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300. Unauthorized removal of the cover W500 can be made difficult. Further, for example, when a pair of engaging portions W530b1 are formed on both end sides of the protective cover W500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and an engaging portion W530b2 is formed between the pair of engaging portions W530b1, In a rear view, the engaging portion W530b2 can be arranged at a position overlapping the engaging portion W530a. As a result, the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed illegally, making it difficult to illegally remove the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300.
In the thirty-sixth embodiment, a notch may be formed in the connecting portion Wl535. This makes it easier to rotate (twist) the connecting portion Wl535.
In the thirty-seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the restricting projection Wm228 is arranged at a position overlapping substantially the center of the extended portion Wm332 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). It may be arranged below the restricting portion Wm334. This makes it difficult for the engaging portion Wm530b to be elastically deformed improperly.

In the forty-third embodiment, the case where the pair of protrusions Ws328 are provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and only one (the other) of the pair of protrusions Ws328 is formed, A projection W312c in the sixteenth embodiment may be formed at a position corresponding to . In other words, the protrusion Ws328 may be formed on one side (the other side) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the protrusion W312c may be formed on the other side (one side). As a result, one and the other of the pair of engaging portions W530b of the protective cover W500 can be elastically deformed in opposite directions. Therefore, by elastically deforming (displacing) one (the other) engaging portion W530b in order to release the engagement between the one (the other) engaging portion W530b and the protrusion Ws328 (the protrusion W312c), the other (one) can be displaced in a direction in which the engagement between the engaging portion W530b and the projection W312c (the projection Ws328) is maintained. As a result, unauthorized removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300 can be suppressed.
In the forty-fourth embodiment, a pair of notches Wt224b1 formed in the protrusions Wt224b may be provided with connecting portions that connect the protrusions Wt224b. Thereby, the strength of the protrusion Wt224b can be ensured.
In the forty-fourth embodiment, the protrusion Wt224b is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a cross-sectional view. It may be formed in a convex curved shape. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily attached to the protrusion Wt224b (the sealing seal WSL can be made difficult to peel off from the protrusion Wt224b).
In the forty-fourth embodiment, the case where the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) is substantially the same as the dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The size of the protrusion Wt224b is not limited, and may be formed smaller or larger than the size of the connecting piece W531b.

If the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) is smaller than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b, the seal WSL attached to the protrusion Wt224b is blocked by the connecting piece W531b, preventing fraud. It can be invisible to the performer. This makes it easier for a fraudulent person to damage the sealing seal WSL with a cutting tool.
When the dimension of the projection Wt224b in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) is formed to be larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool is opposed to the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W531b so that the connecting piece W531b The cutting tool can be brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL without performing an operation to cut the sealing seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be damaged.
In the forty-sixth embodiment, the recess Wv229 may be formed to extend toward the opposite side (arrow D direction side) to the pair of projections Wv534. As a result, when the engaging portion Wv530a separated from the protective cover Wv500 is removed from the box cover Wv200, the projection Wv534 faces the flat portion W320 (arrow F direction) with the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) as the rotation axis. , and the engagement portion Wv530a can be displaced in the direction in which the recess Wv229 extends (arrow D direction) while maintaining the state in which the projection Wv534 is in contact with the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the trace (damage) formed on the sealing seal WSL can be increased.
In the forty-eighth embodiment, the first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the second connecting piece Wx531b2 may be formed by two-color molding using different resin materials. For example, when the first connecting piece Wx531b1 is molded using a resin material having higher rigidity than the second connecting piece Wx531b2, the shape of the first connecting piece Wx531b1 (the rear surface from the front wall portion W520 is greater than the second connecting piece Wx531b2). In addition to being formed with a large dimension in the direction toward the wall portion W510, the second connecting piece Wx531b2 can be easily cut from the first connecting piece Wx531b1 because it is molded using a highly rigid resin material. The blade of the tool can be made easier to rotate. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

In the forty-eighth embodiment, the connection piece Wx531b is formed in a substantially L shape in cross section, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It may be disposed in a posture in which the side to be received faces the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the cutting resistance of the connecting piece Wx531b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) can be changed during cutting, and the cutting tool (not shown) can be easily rotated.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is guided to the second winning hole 640 by the movable electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, a nail for increasing the randomness of the ball flowing down is arranged in the downflow path of the ball that entered the first winning hole 64, and the ball collides with the nail and has a probability that the ball moves to the second winning hole 640 side. You may be guided.
In each of the above embodiments, the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 is determined by lottery of normal symbols, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be controlled to operate in a fixed pattern from the time the power is turned on. In this case, attention to the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 can be improved.
Further, when the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 performs a constant operation, the through gate 765 and the detection devices SE4 and SE5 may still be arranged. For example, when the passage of the ball is detected, the third symbol display device 81, the sound device, the LED, or the like may be controlled to notify the player of the passage of the ball. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that it is time for the ball to flow near the electric accessory 640 a or the feather member 945 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the lottery for the normal symbol can be held, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the normal symbol lottery is not suspended and the passage of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening 66 or the like during the normal symbol fluctuation, the normal symbol lottery may not be performed.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the seesaw member 762 or the sorting section 983 is arranged at the branch position of the flow-down path of the ball has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail may be arranged at the branch position, or a projecting portion formed of a resin material may be arranged at the branch position. By colliding these with the sphere, the downflow path of the sphere can be branched. In this case, it is possible to cause not only the case where the spheres alternately flow down, but also the case (timing) where the spheres continuously flow down to one side.
In each of the above embodiments, the operation time of the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 is set to a short time of about 0.5 seconds to 3 seconds, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, with a probability of about 10% of the normal pattern lottery in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state for a time longer than 3 seconds (for example, 5 seconds), or the feather member 945 It may be set to operate in a long open actuation pattern such that it is maintained in the open state.
When operated in the long open operation pattern, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 can be easily guided to the second winning hole 640 side by the electric accessory 640 a or the feather member 945 . Therefore, among the balls shot during operation in the long open operation pattern (a limited number of balls considering the shooting interval of 100 balls per minute is the upper limit), the balls that entered the first winning hole 64 However, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player is not guided to the second prize winning port 640 side.

When the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 is operating in the long open operation pattern, it is easier to win the special symbol 2 lottery by shooting the ball at the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945. It is advantageous for the player. Therefore, before the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 starts to operate in the long open operation pattern, the third symbol display device 81, the sound device, the LED, or other means allows the player to It may be controlled so as to notify in advance that the ball is to be shot at 945.
The notification is changed depending on the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945, but in the fiftieth embodiment, it is easier for the ball to reach the electric accessory 640 if the notification suggests hitting to the right. so desirable.
On the other hand, in the fifty-first embodiment, there is no difference in the ease of reaching the feather member 945 whether the ball is shot left-handed or right-handed. It is preferable to report as suggested. It should be noted that it is also possible to inform the player who performs the right-handed game from the normal state with the content of continuing the shooting.
In the fiftieth embodiment, when the sensor SE detects the passage, the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be obtained. Although the case where the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be acquired has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when passage is detected by the sensor SE on the left side and when a ball is detected by the switch on the downstream side of the second prize winning port 640, the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be obtained, and the passage is detected by the sensor SE on the right side. It may be possible to acquire the lottery of the special pattern 2 when it is done.

In this case, when the ball is thrown to the right by the seesaw member 762, the player's profit is increased if the ball passes through the first ball throwing path KR1 in the retracted state of the electric accessory 640a. be able to.
In the fiftieth embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation operation (left-right tilting operation) of the seesaw member 762 is completed in a time shorter than 0.5 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time taken for the seesaw member 762 to rotate may be set to 1.0 second or more by increasing the motion resistance by reducing the clearance of the rotating shaft portion. In this case, even if the ball enters the first winning hole 64 in a continuous ball, after the change display due to the detection of the ball in the normal winning hole (through gate) 765 is completed, the next ball will enter the seesaw member. It is possible to construct a game feature in which the player is moved to the left by 762 .
In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 742 is arranged at the left-right center position of the flow path formed inside the upper projection portion 741 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide portions 742 may be arranged side by side. In this case, the protruding distal end surfaces are inclined toward the base side as they come closer to the surfaces facing each other. It is possible to effectively suppress the lateral displacement of the folded sphere.
In the fiftieth embodiment described above, the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 765 and the bending member 740 are connected by a path made of resin, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail may be used to guide the sphere. In this case, the falling velocity of the balls can be varied.

In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the first inclined grooves 755 and the second inclined grooves 757 are formed as parallel linear grooves has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first slanted groove 755 and the second slanted groove 757 may be non-parallel. Also, it may be formed in a curved path. In the case of a curve, the guide surface on the lower side of the ball may be curved like a metal rail, or it may be curved so as to meander back and forth.
In the fiftieth embodiment, the left guide portion 645 is arranged on the front side of the covering plate portion 711 when the moving plate member 641 is in the advanced state, and the ball can roll on the upper surface thereof. In this case, a ridge extending in a direction intersecting the rolling path of the ball may protrude from the front side of the covering plate portion 711 . As a result, the balls rolling on the upper surface of the left guide portion 645 are allowed to collide with the ridges, thereby decelerating the balls.
In the fiftieth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball thrown to the right side by the right guide section 643 is received by the second ball throwing section 736 without omission, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the right guide portion 643 may be formed to extend to the upper position of the second ball throwing portion 736, and the general winning opening 63 may be arranged to the right of the second ball throwing portion 736.
In this case, if the moving plate member 641 changes to the retracted state at the timing when the ball is arranged vertically above the second ball-throwing portion 736, the ball is received by the second ball-throwing portion 736, but the second ball-throwing portion When the moving plate member 641 is still maintained in the entering state at the timing when the ball is arranged vertically above the ball 736, the ball passes through the second ball throwing part 736 to the right and is received in the general winning opening 63. .

That is, when the ball is thrown to the right side by the right guiding part 643, it cannot be determined whether the ball is guided to the second ball throwing part 736 or to the general prize winning opening 63, so the attention to the ball is improved. can be made
In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the jackpot type is controlled by one has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of operation patterns are set in advance corresponding to the jackpot type, and which operation pattern is selected with probability when the ball passing through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is detected. The operation of the electric accessory 640a may be executed in the same operation pattern.
In the fiftieth embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the high-probability state is set to either the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the high probability state may be the fourth operation pattern. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state.
In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the ball entering the first prize winning port 64 flows downstream via the seesaw member 762 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the seesaw member 762 and the left channel may be omitted. That is, the flow path may be configured to consist of only the first prize winning port 64 and the right path.

In this case, it is difficult to eliminate the case where the ball is entered by consecutive balls, but for example, it is a rotating body that rotates at a constant speed on a rotating shaft in the front-rear direction on the flowing path from the center frame 86 to the first winning hole 64. A rotating body having a recessed portion capable of accommodating a ball is disposed at a predetermined position on the outer circumference of the circle. By constructing the ball to be received in the first winning hole 64 only when it reaches the first winning hole 64, consecutive balls can be prevented from entering the first winning hole 64. - 特許庁
That is, since the ball can be prevented from entering the first winning hole 64 at any timing by the rotating body, the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be defined by the rotation speed of the rotating body.
In the fiftieth embodiment described above, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 rides on the right guide portion 643 and flows down in the opposite direction to the left guide portion 645. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the right guide portion 643 is inclined downward toward the left guide portion 645, and the ball entered in the first winning hole 64 flows from the right guide portion 643 to the left guide portion 645, and the first ball is thrown. It may be configured to be guided to the portion 734 .
In this case, when the moving plate member 641 is maintained in the entering state for a sufficiently long time, the ball arranged on the first ball-throwing path KR1 can be guided to the first ball-throwing section 734, and the special symbol 2 lottery can be performed. can be obtained.

On the other hand, when the moving plate member 641 enters the state for a short time, the ball falls between the first ball-throwing part 734 and the bending member 740. Receipts may be arranged to provide a predetermined benefit.
The profit when the ball enters the receiving slot may be the payout of prize balls, the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 lottery, the normal pattern lottery, or the fall lottery (from a high probability state). A lottery that changes the game state to a low probability state) may be used, or other benefits may be used. In any case, attention to the ball rolling on the upper surface of the moving plate member 641 can be improved.
A plate may be extended from the right end of the right guide portion 643 so as to be inclined upward to the right, so that the right side of the bending member 740 can receive the dropped ball. In this case, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the moving plate member 641 from the right side of the bending member 740 reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, the ball is placed on the first ball throwing path KR1. By moving the moving plate member 641 to the retracted state at , the ball falls on the first ball throwing path KR1 and is detected by the sensor SE, making it possible to obtain the lottery for the special symbol 1.
In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 is arranged on the left side of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the placement of the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 arranged on the left side may be omitted. In this case, winning the normal symbol lottery for left-handed hitting is limited to the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, and winning the normal symbol lottery for right-handed hitting is normal winning openings (through gates) 67 and 765. be done.

That is, by shooting a ball with a left-hand shot, the operation of the electric accessory 640a can be limited to the operation of the normal symbol lottery at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, so the first operation pattern or the first When the electric accessory 640a operates in the operation pattern 2, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation where it is not guided by the right guide portion 643 and is detected by the sensor SE.
On the other hand, it is easier to win the lottery of the normal symbols if the ball is shot with the right hand, so that the game efficiency can be easily improved. That is, the player either executes the game so as to easily avoid the situation where the ball is detected by the sensor SE although the game efficiency is lowered, or the game efficiency is increased but the ball may be detected by the sensor SE. You can choose to run a game that raises a little or you like.
In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the moving plate member 641 protrudes to the outside of the bending member 740 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the left guide portion 645 may be omitted. In this case, the second ball throwing section 736 may function as the second prize winning opening 640 .
In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the ball is guided to the right guide portion 643 from the path formed by the distribution member 760 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be guided by the right guide portion 643 from the front side of the base plate 60 . In this case, a plate portion extends leftward from the left end of the right guide portion 643 with the same inclination, and the left side surface of the bending member 740 is inclined so that a ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate portion can enter the inside of the bending member 740 . An opening should be formed in the

In the fiftieth embodiment, the case where the paths of the balls that roll on the upper surface of the moving plate member 641 and roll in different directions on the left and right merge on the downstream side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a detection device for detecting the passage of the ball is arranged at the lower end side of the first inclined groove 755, and the detection of the ball by the detection device may enable the lottery of the special symbol 2 to be obtained. A detection device for detecting the passage of the ball may be arranged behind the 2-throwing part 736, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 may be obtained by detecting the ball in the detection device.
That is, by omitting the formation of the second inclined groove 757, the position for detecting the ball rolling on the upper surface of the left guide portion 645 and the position for detecting the ball rolling on the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 are changed. You may make it provide separately.
In the fifty-first embodiment, the case where the paths of the balls rolling on the upper surface of the feather member 945 at different front and rear positions merge on the downstream side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a ball passage hole is formed behind the third branch passage BK3, a detection device is disposed downstream thereof, and the passage of the ball is detected by the detection device. A lottery for the symbol 2 may be acquired.
That is, by omitting the formation of the ball-feeding hole 941k and the ball-feeding opening 982k, a position for detecting a ball rolling on the upper surface of the feather-shaped main body 945m and a position for detecting a ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e are provided. and may be provided separately.

In the fifty-first embodiment, the case where the plate-like portion 945e is connected and fixed to the wing-like main body 945m on the rotating tip side of the wing member 945 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extended portion 945d may be formed on the rotation base end side of the feather member 945, or may be formed at an intermediate position in the rotation radial direction. In particular, when formed on the rotation proximal end side of the extension portion 945d, the formation width of the fourth through-hole 941j and the rotation-permitting opening 982m can be reduced, and the rear base 941 and the bulging caused by the hole formation can be reduced. A decrease in the strength of the portion 982 can be minimized.
When a ball rides on the plate-like portion 945e, there is a possibility that the plate-like portion 945e is flexurally deformed starting from the extension portion 945d. In this case, the elastic force generated when the plate-like portion 945e elastically recovers from the bending deformation is generated in the direction of inserting the ball into the third branch passage BK3. As a result, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e can be stably guided toward the third branch passage BK3.
In the above fifty-first embodiment, the case where the extended portions 945d and the plate-like portions 945e are formed on both of the pair of feather members 945 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one feather member 945 may be provided with the extended portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e.
In the fifty-first embodiment, the case where the rolling surface of the feather-like main body 945m and the rolling surface of the plate-like portion 945e are formed on the same inclined surface when the feather member 945 is open has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the plate-like portion 945e may be shallower (smaller angle with the horizontal) than the inclination angle of the feather-shaped main body 945m.

In this case, the speed of the ball rolling on the feather-shaped main body 945m can be made faster than the speed of the ball rolling on the plate-like portion 945e. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the spheres arranged in front and behind are kept overlapping each other in a front view.
In addition, compared to the case where one ball is placed on the feather-shaped main body 945m, when one ball is placed on the plate-like portion 945e, the operational resistance applied from the ball to the feather member 945 is greater. and the speed of operation of the wing members 945 can be reduced.
Further, when the blade member 945 is configured to appear and disappear by sliding movement in the front-rear direction, similarly, the inclination angle of the blade-like main body 945m and the inclination angle of the plate-like portion 945e may be different. In this case, even if the ball rides on the plate-like portion 945e and the wing-like main body 945m at the same time, depending on the operating length of the wing member 945, the sphere rolls on either the plate-like portion 945e or the wing-like main body 945m. reaches the rolling plate portion 941l, while the ball rolling on the other of the plate-like portion 945e or the feather-shaped main body 945m falls before reaching the rolling plate portion 941l.
In the fifty-first embodiment, the extension portion 945d extends from the vicinity of the upper surface of the wing-like main body 945m in the open state of the wing member 945, so that the upper surface of the wing-like main body 945m and the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e are positioned in the front-to-rear direction. Although the case where the images appear to overlap has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e and the upper surface of the feather-shaped main body 945m may be formed so as to be vertically displaced. In this case, even if the ball is placed on the plate-like portion 945e and the ball is placed on the pinnate main body 945m, the front ball completely hides the rear ball because of the deviation in the vertical position. can be easily avoided.

In the fifty-first embodiment, the plate-like portions 945e are formed in symmetrical positions, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the feather-shaped main body 945m has a bilaterally symmetrical shape, the right plate-like portion 945e may be arranged above the left plate-like portion 945e (arranged asymmetrically). . In this case, the appearance of the wing-shaped main body 945m, which is easy to see from the front, should be left-right symmetrical, while the flow-down path of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 945e disposed on the rear side should be made left-right asymmetrical. can be done. As a result, when the ball reaches the line of symmetry, the load in the left-right direction is balanced, and it is possible to easily avoid the situation in which ball clogging occurs.
In the fifty-first embodiment, the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are used to design the operating resistance of the distribution unit 983 to define the shortest side of the falling interval of the balls. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, on the flow-down path from the center frame 86 to the first prize-winning port 64, there is a recessed portion that is a rotating body that rotates at a constant speed on a rotating shaft in the front-rear direction and that can accommodate a ball at a predetermined position on the outer circumference circle. You may arrange|position the rotating body provided. In this case, the ball is received in the first prize winning port 64 only when the ball accommodated in the recessed portion reaches above the first prize winning port 64 due to the rotation of the rotating body. It is possible to prevent a continuous ball from entering the mouth 64 .
That is, since the ball can be prevented from entering the first winning hole 64 at any timing by the rotating body, the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be defined by the rotation speed of the rotating body.
In the fifty-third embodiment, the inclined surface 4645a of the upstream guide portion 4645 and the inclined surface 643a of the right guide portion 643 have the same inclination, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 4645a may be larger than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, it is possible to increase the acceleration to the right of the ball rolling on the inclined surface 4645a. Also, it is possible to construct a state in which the ball flows toward the second ball-throwing portion 736 with momentum. That is, by increasing the acceleration in the right direction, it is possible to easily avoid the situation in which the ball flows down into the recovery hole 752 . In this sense, the ball that rolls down the inclined surface 4645 a can enter the second ball-throwing portion 736 more easily than the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 .
Further, for example, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 4645a may be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, it is possible to lengthen the time that the ball stays on the inclined surface 643a. It becomes easy for the situation to flow down into the water.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, by controlling the operation of the prize winning unit B400 in a plurality of modes, the ball passing through the inside of the prize winning unit B400 is guided substantially to the second prize winning port B640 and substantially to the third prize winning port B64b. Using the fact that it is possible to switch between the state of being guided to and the state of being guided to, the game state after the big win game is set so that the small win game occurs frequently (occurs almost every time the special symbol changes), and the small win A special probability variable state in which a large amount of prize balls can be paid out before shifting to a big winning game by winning a ball in a specific winning hole B65a opened in the game, and a probability variable state in which small winning games do not occur frequently. Although the case where the state can be configured has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is not set such that small winning games occur frequently (the specific winning opening B65a is not necessarily required), and using the winning unit B400, the winning opening for receiving the special symbol 1 lottery ( It is possible to switch between a state in which it is easy to guide the ball to the side of the third winning opening B64b, and a state in which it is easy to guide the ball to the side of the winning opening for receiving the special symbol 2 lottery (equivalent to the second winning opening B640). It may be said that
In this case, in the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game, while the common game mode of shooting the ball toward the prize winning unit B400 is used as the game, the jackpot expected when the jackpot is won is sorted by the jackpot type. It is possible to configure a pachinko machine that can change the

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the winning unit B400 operates in the first operation pattern in which it is difficult to guide the ball to neither the second winning opening B640 nor the third winning opening B64b, or the first operation pattern in which it is easy to guide the ball to the third winning opening B64b. 2 operation pattern or the third operation pattern that easily guides the ball to the second winning hole B640, the case where the electric accessory B640a is configured to be operable has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric accessory B640a may be operable in an operation pattern that easily guides the ball to both the second winning opening B640 and the third winning opening B64b.
As means for realizing this, for example, the operation time Bt3b of the reference operation pattern BRP3 in the third operation pattern is set to 1.0 seconds, and the slide member B450 is maintained in the non-excited state for the remaining 1.0 seconds. Then, the ball picked up by the tip portion B451 during the waiting time Bt3a can be guided to the second winning opening B640 or the third winning opening B64b.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, in the winning unit B400, when the solenoid BSOL41 is driven with a ball on the tip B451 of the slide member B450 arranged at the forward position, the ball on the tip B451 Although a case has been described in which the ball passage opening B414 is formed so as to be pushed into the upper surface of the tip portion B451, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the slide member B450 is in the retracted position, the dimension between the upper surface of the tip B451 and the upper edge of the ball passage opening B414 may be designed to be less than the diameter of the ball.
That is, the upper surface of the tip portion B451 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front. is shorter when the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position than when the slide member B450 is arranged at the advanced position.

Utilizing this, the ball can pass through the ball passage opening B414 when the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position, while the tip portion when the slide member B450 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position As for the ball on B451, it is designed in such a way that the ball is caught in the upper edge of the ball passage opening B414, so that when the slide member B450 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position, it rides on the tip part B451. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the ball passing opening B414. As a result, the probability of the ball entering the ball passage opening B414 can be reduced.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, in the winning unit B400, the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 are formed to have a height that blocks the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction, and the left guide plate portion B452 or the right guide plate portion The introduction of the sphere from B453 to the central flow path B431 side is limited to passing through the left opening BLT or the right opening BRT arranged behind the left wall B432 or the right wall B433. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical height of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 may be designed low so that the ball can pass above the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433.
Further, for example, by utilizing the fact that the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member B450 differs between when the slide member B450 is arranged at the forward position and when the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position, the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion When the slide member B450 is arranged in the forward position (when the vertical position of the upper surface is low), the height of B433 is set to block the ball from passing above the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433. (For example, the vertical position of the upper end of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 is designed to be higher than the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member B450), while the slide member B450 is in the retracted position. (when the upper surface has a high vertical dimension), it is possible to allow the ball to pass through the upper side of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 (the ball can pass through, for example, the slide member B450 The vertical position of the upper end of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 may be designed to be lower than the vertical position of the upper surface of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433).
In this case, as a variation of the flow path of the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the slide member B450 and flows down toward the central flow path B431, the left opening BLT or the In addition to the flow-down path passing through the right opening BRT, a flow-down path passing above the left wall portion B432 or the right wall portion B433 can be configured in a state where the slide member B450 is arranged at the retracted position.

Also, the relationship between the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member B450 and the vertical positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion B432 and the right wall portion B433 may be made different on the left and right. For example, in a state in which the sphere is allowed to pass above the left wall portion B432, the passage of the sphere above the right wall portion B433 is restricted, or the sphere passes above the right wall portion B433. It may be configured to restrict the passage of the sphere above the right wall portion 432 in a state in which it is permitted to do so.
In this case, the flow-down path of the ball guided by the slide member B450 can be largely changed depending on whether the ball flows down the left side or the right side.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, as a structure for picking up a ball, the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450 and the plate-like portion B471 of the tilting member B470 are provided, and the tip portion B451 is left and right outside and above the plate-like portion B471 in a front view. Although the case where it arrange|positions was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the bifurcated structure of the slide member B450 may be eliminated, and the portion corresponding to the tip portion B451 may be arranged directly above the plate-like portion B471.
In this case, a fixed restricting plate that restricts passage of the ball is provided between the tip portion B451 and the plate-like portion B471 in the region between the base plate B60 and the glass unit B16. It is possible to avoid a winning mode in which a ball that has not been picked up is picked up by the plate-like part B471.

As a result, the horizontal dimension of the winning unit B400 can be reduced. In addition, by using one tip portion B451, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of confluence of balls in the path in the winning unit B400, so that the degree of freedom in designing the winning unit B400 can be improved (design can be simplified). can be done).
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the ceiling surface B447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member B450 is formed to extend in the horizontal direction, and the inclined surface portion B444a of the ceiling forming portion B444 arranged on the upper side of the central flow path B431 Although the case in which the slope is inclined upward toward the front side has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the ceiling surface B447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member B450 may be configured as a surface that slopes down toward the rear. In this case, it is possible to avoid fluttering of the falling ball due to excessive increase in the ball flowing area (the area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the slide member B450. .
For example, the ceiling surface B447 arranged on the upper side of the slide member B450 may be configured as a surface that slopes upward toward the rear. In this case, it is possible to ensure a large ball flow area (area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the ball flow path that flows down the upper surface of the slide member B450. Even if the balls on the upper surface of the slide member B450 are pushed backward and the density of the balls at the rear side position of the slide member B450 increases, the possibility of ball clogging occurring on the upper side of the slide member B450 is eliminated. can be lowered.

For example, the ceiling forming part B444 arranged on the upper side of the central flow path B431 may be configured so as to slope downward toward the front side, or may be configured to extend in the horizontal direction. In this case, it is possible to avoid fluttering of the falling balls due to an excessively large flow-down area of the balls (an area through which the balls can pass) on the downstream side of the central flow path B431.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the lateral width of the ball passage opening B414 through which the ball picked up by the slide member B450 passes and the central opening B413 through which the ball picked up by the tilting member B470 passes is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. Although the case where it is considered to be long has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right widths of the ball passage opening B414 and the central opening B413 are designed to be slightly longer than multiple times (for example, twice) the diameter of the ball, and together, the left guide plate portion B452 of the slide member B450 Also, the right guide plate portion B453, the central flow path B431, and the tilting member B470 may be designed to have the same horizontal width. In this case, the number of balls that can be picked up by the slide member B450 or the tilting member B470 at one time can be increased, so the winning efficiency can be improved.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the lateral width of the ball passage opening B414 and the lateral width of the central opening B413 are the same, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the lateral width of the ball passage opening B414 may be designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the lateral width of the central opening B413 may be designed to be slightly longer than a multiple of the diameter of the sphere. Better yet, the lateral width of the central flow path B431 and the lateral width of the tilting member B470 may be designed in the same way as the lateral width of the central opening B413.
In this case, the spheres can flow side by side in the area downstream from the central flow path B431. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the balls merge and the flow resistance increases.

Also, for example, the lateral width of the ball passage opening B414 is designed to be slightly longer than multiple times the diameter of the sphere, and the lateral width of the central opening B413 is designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. In addition, the lateral widths of the tip portion B451 of the slide member B450, the left guide plate portion B452, and the right guide plate portion B453 may be designed based on the same concept as the lateral width of the ball passage opening B414.
In this case, under the condition that the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470 are interlocked, the first ball entry efficiency (the efficiency at which the ball is picked up by the slide member B450) on the most upstream side (entrance side) of the internal path of the winning unit B400. is improved, the second ball entry efficiency (the efficiency at which the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470) on the most downstream side (exit side) of the internal path of the winning unit B400 can be reduced more than the first ball entry efficiency. .
This makes it appear to the player that the apparent ball entry efficiency (first ball entry efficiency) entering the entrance of the winning unit B400 is high, and the probability that the ball is actually picked up by the tilting member B470 (second ball entry efficiency) can be configured to be reduced. As a result, the player's impression of the efficiency of entering the winning unit B400 can be improved, and the player can be encouraged to continue playing the game.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 of the slide member B450 and the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion B453 are the same has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion B453 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452, or the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion B452 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion B453. Also good.

In particular, in the latter case, the difference in ball flow time due to the difference in front-rear length of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 can be compensated for by the ball flow speed. When balls are received at the same time, it is possible to make it easier to match the timing of the balls reaching the central flow path B431.
In the former case, on the contrary, the difference in the lengths of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 in the front-to-rear direction causes the ball to flow down faster than the other. When the portion B451 receives the balls at the same time, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to reach the central flow path B431 at different timings.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the slide member B450 rolls the ball not only in the tip portion B451 that receives the ball from the game area but also in the rear flow path has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the ball that comes into contact with the ball only at the tip B451 and flows downstream of the tip B451 is the upper surface of the fixed plate portion (the portion that is not displaced) that covers the left guide plate portion B452, the right guide plate portion B453, etc. from above. may be rolled. In this case, the range in which the ball is accelerated or decelerated by displacement of the slide member B450 can be narrowed.
Further, in this case, the configuration and operation mode of the distal end portion B451 may be changed, and an operation mode of tilting forward (an operation mode exemplified by the tilting member B470) may be employed. That is, in the non-excited state, the open position described with respect to the tilting member B470 may be provided, and in the excited state, the closed position described with respect to the tilting member B470 may be provided.

In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, in the winning unit B400, the ball picked up by the tip portion B451 rolls on the fixed bottom portion B431a on the path until it reaches the tilting member B470. It is not something that can be done. For example, the bottom portion B431a may be configured to operate in conjunction with the operation of the slide member B450. In this case, even if the ball clogging occurs in the internal channel of the winning unit B400, since the entire internal channel operates, the balls can be loosened and the ball clogging can be resolved. Note that the bottom surface portion B431a may operate in the opposite direction of the slide member B450, or may be configured integrally with the slide member B450 to operate in the same direction.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the fixed bottom surface portion B431a is formed as an inclined surface that allows the ball to roll linearly has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface portion B431a may be curved so that the ball flows downward in a curved direction, so that the change in the ball's flow speed becomes noticeable. It may be constructed so that the ball bounces so that the flowing state varies, or the time until the ball passes is lengthened by repeatedly bending the flow path so that the ball meanders and flows down. good.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the ball passage opening B414 in the prize winning unit B400 is a mere opening, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a detection sensor for detecting the passage of the ball may be arranged in the ball passage opening B414 so that the ball entering the ball passage opening B414 can be detected. In this case, when the ball entering the ball passage opening B414 is detected, the third symbol display device B81 or the like informs the player that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening B414. can be noticed, and attention of the winning unit B400 can be improved.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, in the winning unit B400, the ball picked up by the tip portion B451 is always guided to the tilting member B470 side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge opening is formed in the internal flow path, and a part of the ball is discharged through the discharge opening, so that only a part of the ball picked up by the tip B451 is guided to the tilting member B470. It may be configured so as not to exist. In this case, the slide member B450 may be configured to function also as a member for opening and closing the discharge opening.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 of the slide member B450 are formed in a plate shape with the same inclination in the front-rear direction has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. . For example, the inclination may change in the middle, or the upper surface may be formed in a stepped shape. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the balls on the slide member B450, it is possible to change the magnitude of the load received by the balls when the slide member B450 is displaced rearward (for example, if the slide member B450 is formed in a stepped shape, the load received by the ball can be changed). The ball is placed near the step and receives the load from the side of the step, or the ball is placed away from the step and the load is received by sliding on the top of the step).
For example, compared to the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the upstream side (front side), the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the downstream side (rear side) with respect to the horizontal plane When the inclination angle is formed small, the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the upstream side can be made larger than the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the downstream side. As a result, the distance between the plurality of spheres arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side on the slide member B450 can be narrowed (reduced or made closer) by the displacement of the slide member B450.
Further, for example, compared to the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the upstream side (front side), the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 on the downstream side (rear side) are When the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane is formed to be large, the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the upstream side can be made smaller than the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member B450 on the downstream side. can. As a result, the distance between the plurality of spheres arranged on the upstream side and the downstream side on the slide member B450 can be widened (enlarged, sparse) by the displacement of the slide member B450.
Further, for example, the magnitude of the inclination of the left guide plate portion B452 and the right guide plate portion B453 with respect to the horizontal plane may be changed a plurality of times along the flow-down route. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the spheres, it is possible to cause both a case where the distance between the spheres is reduced due to the displacement of the slide member B450 and a case where the distance between the spheres is widened.

Further, for example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 and the inclination angle of the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 452 may be different. That is, the upper surface of the left guide plate portion B452 may be formed in a plate shape with the same inclination with respect to the horizontal plane in the front-rear direction, while the upper surface of the right guide plate portion B453 may be formed so that the inclination with respect to the horizontal surface changes in the middle. good. In this case, the state of the load received by the ball due to the displacement of the slide member B450 can be varied depending on whether the ball is arranged on the left guide plate portion B452 or the ball is arranged on the right guide plate portion B452. .
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470 are interlocked by interposing the transmission member B480 therebetween. and the other operation is also affected, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, at a position (a position between) where the front side of the front end portion of the rotation arranged to face the slide member B450, which is the second member B485 of the transmission member B480, and the central fixed portion B454 of the slide member B450 face each other. It is constructed so as to interpose a coil spring that can expand and contract in the front-rear direction. Normally, the slide member B450 is pressed against the second member B485 side by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the second member B485 and the slide member B450 are configured to interlock, while the front end of the slide member B450 and the front design When a ball is caught between the member B420 (ball biting), the forward displacement of the slide member B450 is obstructed by shrinking the coil spring so as to be covered. The second member B485 can be tilted forward even if the slide member B450 is not arranged at the forward position.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the first member B481 from being hindered by the second member B485. can be easily avoided.

In this way, even in the case where a plurality of driving force transmission paths are provided using the transmission member B480, by interposing a member such as a coil spring (cushioning material or the like may be used) in one transmission path, It is possible to avoid a problem that occurs in one transmission path from being propagated to another transmission path.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the locking projecting portion B487 is pushed down by the lower plate portion B482b when the electric accessory B640a is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done.
For example, the formation of the locking projecting portion B487 may be omitted. In the excited state of the electric accessory B640a, the lower plate portion B482b is in contact with the eccentric protrusion B486 of the second member B485, while a gap is secured between the upper plate portion B482a and the eccentric protrusion B486. .
The load in the rotation direction due to the weight of the second member B485 is lower than the static friction between the slide member B450 and the intermediate member B430 that contact the second member B485 at the outer end in the radial direction of rotation. B485 is prevented from being displaced in the forward rolling direction by its own weight. That is, even if the contact between the lower plate portion B482b and the eccentric protrusion B486 is released, the posture of the second member B485 is maintained.

Therefore, when the electric accessory B640a is switched from the excited state to the non-excited state, the slide member B450 is maintained at the retracted position until the eccentric protrusion B486 is pushed down by the upper plate portion B482a, and only the tilting member B470 is raised. Operate. That is, the driving force of the solenoid BSOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilting member B470. In this case, the operation start timing of the slide member B450 and the operation start timing of the tilting member B470 are shifted.
That is, only the tilting member B470 operates from the start of the operation to the intermediate position, and the tilting member B470 and the sliding member B450 operate from the intermediate position. In the process of descending the first member B481, after the upper plate portion B482a and the eccentric protrusion B486 come into contact with each other, the second member B485 rotates the rotating shaft portion B485a in such a manner that the eccentric protrusion B486 is pushed down by the upper plate portion B482a. rotates in the forward direction around the The operation end timings of the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470 are substantially the same.
In this case, even if a ball is caught between the slide member B450 and the front design member B420 during the switching operation from the excited state to the non-excited state, and the displacement of the slide member B450 may be suppressed, the slide member B450 Since the rising motion of the tilting member B470 is started prior to the displacement of , it is possible to prevent the rising motion of the tilting member B470 from being suppressed.
As a result, the displacement of the slide member B450 is suppressed, and the rising motion of the tilting member B470 is delayed, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball is picked up by the tilting member B470 at an unexpected timing.

The load in the rotation direction due to the weight of the second member B485 is lower than the static friction between the slide member B450 and the intermediate member B430 that contact the second member B485 at the outer end in the radial direction of rotation. Although the case where the two-member B485 is prevented from being displaced in the forward rotation direction by its own weight has been described as an example, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second member B485 may be designed so that the center of gravity of the second member B485 is closer to the tilting tip side, so that the second member B485 can be displaced in the forward rotation direction by its own weight.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the slide member B450 and the tilting member B470 are interlocked by the driving force of the single solenoid BSOL41 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a driving device for driving the slide member B450 and a driving device for driving the tilting member B470 may be configured separately so that they can operate in a non-interlocked manner.
In this case, for example, the tilting member B470 is opened after about 3 seconds have elapsed since the slide member B450 was placed at the retracted position (a time sufficient for the ball that has flowed into the winning unit B400 to pass through) has elapsed. A further actuation pattern may be added such that the tilting member B470 is displaced to the closed position when the sliding member B450 is positioned in the advanced position. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being picked up by the tilting member B470.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which even if a ball is pinched when the tilting member B470 is closed, it is difficult to pick up the ball with the tip portion B451, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the solenoid BSOL41 may be driven so that the tilting member B470 does not close at the timing when the ball can reach the tilting member B470. In this case, the tilting member B470 can be closed smoothly.

Further, at the timing when the ball can reach the tilting member B470, the tilting member B470 may be set to drive the solenoid BSOL41 so that only the opening operation occurs. In this case, since the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of opening the tilting member B470, it is possible to assist the opening of the tilting member B470, and slide from the tilting member B470 via the first member B481 and the second member B485. By transmitting the load to the member B450, the movement of the slide member B450 toward the retracted position can be performed smoothly.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the operation patterns BRP1 to BRP3 set from the standby times Bt1a to Bt3a and the operation times Bt1b to Bt3b are repeatedly executed, thereby switching the flow path of the ball flowing down the winning unit B400. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the operation time may be set as the reference operation pattern, and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern may be set instead of the standby time.
For example, when the operation time is set to 3.9 seconds as the reference operation pattern and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to 0.1 seconds, the 0.1 seconds are maintained in the non-excitation state. Since it takes time, it is possible to realize an operation mode similar to that of operating in the first operation pattern.
Further, for example, when the operation time is set to 0.2 seconds as the reference operation pattern and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to 1.8 seconds, the 1.8 seconds are maintained in the non-excitation state. As a result, it is possible to realize an operation mode similar to that of operating in the second operation pattern.

Further, for example, if the operation time is set to 2.0 seconds as the reference operation pattern and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to 2.0 seconds, the 2.0 seconds are maintained in the non-excited state. As a result, it is possible to realize an operation mode similar to that of the third operation pattern.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the nail BKG1 is arranged between the winning unit B400 and the third winning opening B64b, and depending on the state of the nail BKG1, the ball that has flowed downward from the internal flow path of the winning unit B400 Although the case where the probability of entering the winning hole B64b is changed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the switching device B5770 described in the fifty-eighth embodiment is disposed between the winning unit B400 and the third winning port B64b, and depending on the ball entry timing with respect to the operation of the switching device B5770, the third winning port B64b It may be determined whether or not the ball is entered into the ball. In this case, the ball can be entered into the third winning hole B64b regardless of the state of the nail BKG1.
Also, for example, between the winning unit B400 and the third winning opening B64b, a distribution device (for example, seesaw mechanism ) may be provided. In this case, regardless of the state of the nail BKG1, one out of every two (or N) nails can be entered into the third winning hole B64b by the sorting device, so the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the ball flowing down the upper side of the through gates B66 and B67 is guided to the through gates B66 and B67 by the nail BKG1, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a structure made of a resin material may be used instead of or in combination with the nail BKG1 to guide the through gates B66 and B67. In this case, since the structure made of the resin material is less prone to change in state than the nail BKG1, it is possible to stabilize the guidance of the ball to the through gates B66 and B67.
Further, for example, by reducing the number of nail BKG1 or changing the position of the nail BKG1, the balls flowing down above the through gates B66 and B67 do not all pass through the through gates B66 and B67. The spheres in the section may be constructed so as to deviate from the through gates B66 and B67 and flow down.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, it is possible to win the lottery for the special symbol 2 by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member B470, and the ball that was not picked up by the tilting member B470 enters the third winning opening B64b. Although the case where the lottery for the special symbol 1 can be obtained by doing so has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the allocation of the special symbols that can win the lottery is reversed (the lottery of the special symbol 1 can be acquired by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member B470, and the ball that was not picked up by the tilting member B470 The lottery for the special symbol 2 can be obtained by entering the third winning hole B64b). In this case, if the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a after the end of the big win is the second operation pattern in the case of the big wins A and a, and the third operation pattern in the case of the big wins B, C, b, and c, The same playability as that described in the fifty-fourth embodiment can be maintained. Furthermore, unlike the case described in the fifty-fourth embodiment, a small winning game is likely to occur in a state where the ball easily enters the third winning hole B64b, and the ball is configured to easily enter the specific winning hole B65a. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the ball spilled from the third winning hole B64b is picked up by the specific winning hole B65a.

Further, for example, it is possible to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery by entering the third winning hole B64b under the condition that the special symbol 2 lottery can be obtained by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member B470. It is good as In this case, the specific prize winning opening B65a may be arranged at a size and position that does not protrude outward in the left and right direction from the left and right outer ends of the prize winning unit B400.
When the electric accessory B640a is driven in the second operation pattern, most of the balls that are picked up by the tip portion B451 and flow down inside the winning unit B400 are discharged from the winning unit B400 to the third winning opening B64b side. flow down On the other hand, when the electric accessory B640a is driven in the third operation pattern, most of the balls that are picked up by the tip portion B451 and flow down inside the winning unit B400 are picked up by the tilting member B470, It does not flow out to the 3 winning opening B64b side. The specific winning port B65a is arranged to receive the balls that have fallen from the third winning port B64b among the balls discharged from the winning unit B400 and flowed down to the third winning port B64b side, thereby providing new game characteristics. can be configured.
That is, regardless of whether the electric accessory B640a is driven in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be obtained. Therefore, opening and closing of the specific winning opening B65a may occur frequently as a small winning game.
Here, when the electric accessory B640a is driven in the second operation pattern, most of the balls that are picked up by the tip portion B451 and flow down inside the winning unit B400 flow down to the third winning opening B64b side. , and some of them spill from the third winning hole B64b and enter the specific winning hole B65a, so that the player can receive a large amount of prize balls paid out.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory B640a is driven in the third operation pattern, most of the balls do not face the specific winning opening B65a (they are picked up by the tilting member B470), so the ball enters the specific winning opening B65a. is unlikely to occur, and the player cannot receive a large amount of prize balls paid out.
In this way, regardless of whether the electric accessory B640a is driven in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the player can obtain the special symbol 2 lottery. Although the opening and closing of the specific winning opening B65a occurs frequently, the probability that the ball is guided to the specific winning opening B65a changes due to the difference in the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a, so when the specific winning opening B65a opens (small winning game It is possible to configure a game property in which a large number of prize balls are obtained by entering the ball into the specific winning hole B65a at the time of occurrence) and a case in which it is not.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, as a profit that the player can obtain from the ball that has flowed into the winning unit B400, when the ball passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, no lottery with a special symbol is performed, and only the prize ball is paid out. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the third winning hole B64b, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed and the prize ball is also paid out, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, when the ball passes through the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed, and the prize ball is paid out. Instead, it may be set so that only prize balls are paid out.
In this case, in the first operation pattern, the ball rarely passes through the opening B435a, and in addition to the number of balls entering the first winning hole B64, the number of balls passing through the opening B435a increases the lottery frequency of the special symbol 1. do.

In the second operation pattern, the ball is picked up by the tip portion B451 and passes through the front side of the tilting member B470 in the excited state of the electric accessory B640a, so that it is easy to win the third prize opening B64b, so it flows into the prize winning unit B400. The lottery frequency of the special symbols is not increased depending on the ball, and the payout of prize balls increases. In the prize-winning unit B400, even when the opening B435a is open so that the ball can pass through, the ball passes through the opening B435a at a rate of one in ten. hardly flows into the opening B435a side. Therefore, in the second operation pattern, the increase in the lottery frequency of the special symbol 1 hardly occurs.
In the third operation pattern, the ball picked up by the tip portion B451 during the standby time Bt3a is likely to be picked up by the tilting member B470 during the operation time Bt3b, so the special symbol 2 lottery frequency increases. Further, during the operation time Bt3b, the ball can pass through the front side of the tip portion B451 and pass through the opening B435a, so the lottery frequency of the special symbol 1 also increases.
In addition, the opening B435a of the detection sensor B435a is used as an out port (an opening for discharging balls from the game area without paying out prize balls, without pattern lottery) as a sensor for simply counting the passage of balls. can be In this case, the opening B435a can be used to measure the frequency with which the ball passes through the opening B435a.
Also, the function of the second winning opening B640 and the function of the third winning opening B64b may be reversed. In this case, the operation pattern in the case of the special variable probability state is set as the second operation pattern, and the operation pattern in the case of the variable probability state is set to the third operation pattern, and the ball enters the third winning hole B64b. It is possible to construct a pachinko machine in which a small win is generated by a lottery, and a ball deviating from the third prize winning hole B64b can enter a specific winning hole B65a.

As a result, in the state of the nail BKG1 arranged right above the third prize winning port B64b, if the ball easily enters the third prize winning port B64b, a small hit is likely to occur, but few balls deviate from the third prize winning port B64b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of winnings in the specific winning opening B65a from becoming excessive. Although small hits are unlikely to occur, many balls deviate from the third winning hole B64b, so once the specific winning hole B65a is opened, a large number of balls can enter the specific winning hole B65a. That is, it is possible to configure a pachinko machine that balances whether it is easy to enter the third winning hole B64b (advantage/disadvantage) and whether it is easy to enter the specific winning hole B65a (advantageous disadvantage).
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the upper variable winning device B700 described a case in which up to four balls can be stored between the storage plate portions B715, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage plate portion B715 may be formed in a shape in which only one ball can be arranged therebetween. In this case, the ball retained between the storage plate portions B715 is on the moving floor member B740, and the ball colliding with the ball can flow into the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. In this case, whether or not the ball is likely to pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 can be easily grasped by checking the presence or absence of the ball between the storage plate portions B715. The game burden on the player can be reduced as compared with the case where it is necessary to count the number of balls in between.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the upper variable prize winning device B700 has a plurality of detection sensors B750 arranged on both the left and right sides of the storage plate portion B715, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one detection sensor B750 may be provided. In addition, in the case of arranging one sensor, either one arranged on the left or right of the storage plate portion B715 may be left and one may be excluded, or the detection sensor B750 may be displaced to the front or rear of the storage plate portion B715. may be arranged.
When the detection sensor B750 is arranged on the front side of the storage plate portion B715, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the ball passing through the opening portion B751. On the other hand, when the detection sensor B750 is arranged on the back side of the storage plate portion B715, it is possible to add an effect that the ball passing through the opening B751 is hidden by the ball stored in the storage plate portion B715. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the portion B751.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, in the upper variable winning device B700, the relationship between the specified number in the round game and the number of balls that can be stored between the storage plate portions B715 is 10 versus 4. The relationship between the numbers is arbitrarily determined and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case of 10 pieces to 10 pieces, when there is a winning of a number of balls exceeding the specified number (11 or more winning, over winning) for the upper variable winning device B700, the opening B751 is opened. It is possible to configure a pachinko machine through which In this case, the joy of increasing the number of prize balls obtained in the round game compared to the case where the number of hit balls stays at the specified number, and the joy of the game state transitioning to an advantageous state after the end of the big win game. can be given to the player at the same time.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are interlocked has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a driving device for driving the movable floor member B740 may be provided separately from the driving device for driving the movable upper cover member B730.
In this case, various operation patterns can be configured in addition to the operation patterns described in the fifty-fourth embodiment. For example, when the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the retracted position, the movable floor member B740 can also be arranged at the retracted position. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball passing through the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 from being stored in the position between the storage plate portions B715, thereby reducing the possibility of the ball entering the opening B751. .
Further, for example, when the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the retracted position, the movable floor member B740 may be independently moved back and forth (repeatedly). In this case, if the period during which the moving floor member B740 is maintained at the retracted position is longer than 0.2 seconds, the ball can be ejected from the position between the storage plate portions B715, while the moving floor member B740 is maintained at the retracted position for a period of less than 0.2 seconds, the ball can be retained at the position between the storage plate portions B715.

Further, for example, when the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the forward position, the movable floor member B740 can be arranged at the forward position. In this case, even if the movable upper lid member B730 is in a driving mode in which the opening and closing are repeated during the round game, the state in which the balls are stored at the position between the storage plate portions B715 can be maintained. Further, a time lag of several seconds is generated from when the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the advanced position until the movable floor member B740 is displaced from the advanced position to the retracted position, so that the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the advanced position. When a large number of balls enter together just before the ball is hit, the balls reach the opening B751 side and move the ball from the position between the storage plate portions B715 until the timing when they can pass through the opening B751. can be prevented from being discharged.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the upper variable winning device B700 is opened and closed in the jackpot game has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper variable winning device B700 may be configured to be opened and closed in the small winning game, and the detection sensor B750 may be configured as a detection sensor for enabling the execution of the big winning game by the ball passing through the opening B751. good.
Here, when the total opening time of the upper variable winning device B700 in the small winning game is up to 1.8 seconds, if the moving upper lid member B730 is placed at the retreat position, it will move to the advance position every time 0.12 seconds have passed. In a state in which the movable upper lid member B730 is repeatedly displaced back and forth according to the arrangement rule, the movable upper lid member B730 can be arranged in the retracted position up to 15 times (0.12×15=1.8).
When the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the advanced position, and when the movable floor member B740 is driven so that the balls arranged between the storage plate portions B715 are not discharged, the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the retracted position. The ball that has flowed down the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 can be stored in the position between the storage plate portions B715, and the ball can easily enter the opening B751. When the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are interlocked, the state in which the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the forward position corresponds to a driving mode in which less than 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, when the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the advanced position, when the movable floor member B740 is driven so that the ball arranged between the storage plate portions B715 can be discharged, the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the retracted position. The balls that have flowed down the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 are discharged one after another from the positions between the storage plate portions B715, making it difficult to enter the balls into the opening portion B751. When the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are interlocked, it corresponds to a driving mode in which the state in which the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the forward position is 0.2 seconds or more.
In the small winning game, the moving upper lid member B730 and the moving floor member B740 are opened and closed in a predetermined drive pattern. When the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are interlocked, a number of balls are placed in the upper variable winning device during the period in which the state in which the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged in the forward position is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds. It is preferable to enter the ball at B700, but it is difficult to tell the difference between, for example, 0.1 seconds and 0.3 seconds.
Therefore, as the driving pattern of the small winning game, the timing that the moving upper cover member B730 is arranged at the forward position is moved forward by the period until the ball is reached rather than the period in which the state is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds. Then, it is also possible to execute a notification prompting the ball to be shot toward the upper variable prize winning device B700. If the ball is shot in accordance with this notification, the ball can be stored at the position between the storage plate portions B715 and can be easily made to enter the opening B751. In this way, by notifying the appropriate timing of shooting the ball, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of ball loss caused by shooting the ball at a timing other than the notification.
As the drive pattern of the small winning game, a period in which the state in which the moving upper lid member B730 is arranged at the forward position is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds is prepared twice, and the movable upper lid member B730 is arranged at the forward position during the period. If a period is arranged in which the state in which the moving upper cover member B730 is in the advanced position is repeated for 0.2 seconds or longer, the first period in which the state in which the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged in the forward position is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds. When the ball does not enter the opening B751, before the second period in which the state in which the moving upper cover member B730 is arranged in the forward position is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds, the upper variable winning device A notification prompting the player to shoot the ball toward B700 may be executed.

In this case, for example, even if the ball cannot be fired due to clogging of the ball launcher, the period in which the state in which the movable upper cover member B730 is placed in the forward position is repeated for 0.2 seconds or longer is longer. If set (eg, at 15 seconds), it may increase the likelihood that the ball launcher jam can be repaired during that time.
It should be noted that the timing advanced by the period until the shot ball arrives can be changed depending on the arrangement of the upper variable winning device B700. When it is placed near the upper end of the game area as in the fifty-fourth embodiment, it is set to 1 to 2 seconds, but when it is placed at the lower right end of the game area, etc., it is longer and is on the upstream side. Depending on the length of the ball path (the path formed by the nail BKG1 or the path formed by the resin member), the width is about 5 to 10 seconds.
Further, the case where the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are interlocked has been exemplified, but in the case where the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are configured to be driven independently, the movable floor member B740 retreats. The above-described notification may be made targeting a period of repeated operation in a drive mode in which the period of being placed at the position is less than 0.2 seconds.
In this case, since the operation mode of the movable floor member B740 and the operation mode of the movable upper cover member B730 do not correspond, the length of the period during which the movable upper cover member B730 is arranged at the forward position is considered, and the operation of the movable floor member B740 is determined. It is difficult to associate with Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the above notification.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the ball is easily entered into the opening B751 while the ball is stored between the pair of storage plate portions B715 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state changing means is provided that changes its state between a guided state in which the ball is guided to the opening B751 and a non-guided state in which the ball is not guided. It may be configured to be performed by the kinetic energy of the ball ejected from B715. In this case, it is possible to configure a game machine that allows the ball to enter the opening B751 easily after being ejected from between the pair of storage plate portions B715.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the entry of the ball into the pair of storage plate portions B715 is obstructed by the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, opening/closing means for switching whether or not a ball can enter the area between the pair of storage plate portions B715 may be provided. In this case, even before the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is filled with balls, it is possible to configure a state in which the balls cannot enter between the pair of storage plate portions B715 by the opening/closing means, and the balls are It is possible to cause the situation to pass through the opening B751.
In this case, various modes can be exemplified as the size of the opening and closing means, but by making the size in front view smaller than the size of the sphere, the opening and closing means can be made inconspicuous, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ball flows into the opening B751.
In addition, by making the size of the opening/closing means larger than the size of the ball when viewed from the front, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the state of the opening/closing means, and it is possible to determine whether or not the ball flows into the opening B751. can be made easier.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the ball that has passed through the second specific winning hole B700a is guided to the area between the pair of storage plate portions B715 with a high probability, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail BKG1 may be arranged between the storage plate portion B715 and the second specific winning hole B700a so as to be in contact with the ball.
As a result, before the area between the pair of storage plate parts B715 is filled up, irregular winning is easily induced in which the ball colliding with the nail BKG1 passes through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750. can be done. In particular, when a plurality of balls pass through the second specific prize-winning port B700a in a row, or when the flow is disturbed due to contact between the balls, irregular prize-winning is likely to be induced.
On the other hand, the nail BKG1 is arranged at a position so as to be out of contact with the balls stored in the pair of storage plate portions B715. As a result, the balls stored in the pair of storage plate portions B715 can be discharged smoothly.
It should be noted that it is not necessarily the nail that is disposed so as to be in contact with the ball. For example, a protruding portion protruding forward from the base plate member B710 may be formed so that the protruding portion collides with the ball. In this case, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the projecting portion can be improved as compared with the nail BKG1. For example, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be guided to the opening B751 by forming it in the shape of a ridge that is elongated in the left-right direction and slopes down as it approaches the opening B751.

Further, for example, a movable member is arranged on the front side of the base plate member B710, and the ball that collides with the movable member is given momentum by the movable member so that the ball can be guided to the opening B751. You can do it. The motion of the movable member may be a rotating motion, a linear sliding motion, or a combination thereof.
Further, for example, the second specific winning opening B700a reciprocates in the left-right direction, or the detection sensor B750 and the storage plate part B715 reciprocate in the left-right direction, depending on the timing, the second specific winning opening B700a There may be a case where the passing ball flows not to the pair of storage plate portions B715 but to the opening B751 side of the detection sensor B750.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the balls are stored directly below the second specific winning hole B700a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball passage extending obliquely downward is formed on the downstream side of the second specific winning port B700a, and an opening B751 of a detection sensor B750 is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage, and a ball is stored at a position in the middle of the ball passage. When the ball storage part is full, the trailing ball rolls on the uppermost ball of the ball storage part. Then, the ball may flow downstream through the ball passage, and the ball may pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750.
In addition, the opening direction of the second specific winning opening B700a may be slanted, and the member that opens and closes the second specific winning opening B700a may not be slidably displaced, but may be rotationally displaced (for example, A tulip-type opening/closing member composed of a pair of opening/closing members) may also be used.

The direction of the ball passage extending obliquely downward downstream of the second specific winning hole B700a is not limited at all. For example, it may be obliquely downward when viewed from the front (oblique downward toward left and right) or oblique downward toward left and right (oblique downward toward front and back).
In particular, in the case of an oblique direction that goes downward toward the rear side, the opening B751 can be arranged on the front side of the ball storage portion. As a result, the ball passing through the opening B751 can be made more conspicuous than the balls stored in the ball storage, so that the player can easily see the passage of the ball through the opening B751.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the number of balls required to be arranged between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is constant since the balls are arranged at the upper ends of the pair of storage plate portions B715. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical position of the upper surface of the movable floor member B740 changes in the vertical direction according to the passage of time, and a plurality of plate members as the movable floor member B740 on which the ball at the lower end of the storage plate portion B715 is placed are arranged in the vertical direction. By changing the vertical position of the ball arranged at the lowest end among the plurality of balls arranged between the pair of storage plate portions B715, such as by operating to be opened sequentially from the top, Since the balls are arranged at the upper ends of the pair of storage plate portions B715, the number of balls required to be arranged between the pair of storage plate portions B715 may be changed.
Further, the storage plate portion B715 may be configured to be displaceable so that the left-right interval between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is changed. In this case, if the left-right interval is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, even if the tank is full with 4, if the left-right interval is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the sphere, it is 8. Since the tank is filled with pieces, the degree of difficulty of passing the ball through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 can be changed.

In addition, even if it is configured to be filled with four pieces, compared to the case where the left and right interval of the pair of storage plate portions B715 is a slightly longer interval than the diameter of the sphere, the pair of storage plate portions If the horizontal interval of B715 is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the sphere, the vertical length of the storage plate portion B715 can be halved, so the height dimension for storing the sphere can be reduced. can be shortened. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the storage plate portion B715 can be improved.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere placed between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is always visible, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the visibility of the ball at the position between the storage plate portions B715 can be reduced (for example, it is configured to be hidden with a movable member, or configured to be difficult to see by adjusting the light). You can do it. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ball will fill up at the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715.
Although the case where the number of balls stored between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is four has been described, the number of balls is not necessarily limited to this. It may be 0, 1, 3, or 5 or more. For example, by setting the number to 8 (a number close to the specified number), it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility of the ball passing through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 in the third special operation pattern.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the ball stored between the pair of storage plate portions B715 and flowing down by arranging the moving floor member B740 at the retracted position is discharged from the game area through the ball extraction opening B782. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball flowing down by arranging the moving floor member B740 at the retracted position may be discharged to a cloon having a plurality of holes.

By making one of the plurality of holes a specific hole having the same function as the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750, this crew can not confirm that the ball passes through the opening B751 during the round game. Even if the moving floor member B740 is arranged at the retracted position and the ball is thrown from the position between the pair of storage plate parts B715, the player can obtain a profit by the ball entering the specific hole of the cloon. Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the ball thrown from the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, a case was described in which not the ball stored between the pair of storage plate portions B715 but the ball following the stored ball could pass through the opening B751, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, the intermediate portion of the storage plate portion B715 is configured to be openable and closable, and the detection sensor B750 is also arranged downstream of the opening/closing portion. It may be configured such that one of the balls stored between the pair of storage plate portions B715 can flow and pass through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the driving device for the movable upper cover member B730 and the driving device for the movable floor member B740 are both solenoids B763, and the operation of the movable upper cover member B730 and the operation of the movable floor member B740 are interlocked. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device separate from the solenoid B763 may be provided for driving the moving floor member B740, and may be operated independently of each other. In this case, in addition to the operation mode described in the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where both the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are arranged at the forward position, or the case where both the movable upper lid member B730 and the movable floor member B740 are It becomes possible to configure the case where it is arranged in the retracted position.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the movable upper lid member B730 is formed in a plate shape that slopes down on both left and right sides, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable upper lid member B730 may be formed in a flat plate shape that is inclined in one direction. Even in this case, the order of operations in which the movable floor member B740 is displaced to the advanced position slightly earlier than the movable upper lid member B730 starts to be displaced toward the retracted position functions favorably, and the movable upper lid member B730 is moved to the retracted position. To avoid a situation in which a ball flowing on the front side of the movable upper cover member B730 at the same time as being displaced to the retracted position passes through the front side of the movable floor member B740 before the movable floor member B740 is arranged at the forward position. be able to.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the operation sequence is such that the movable floor member B740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable top cover member B730 starts to be displaced toward the retracted position, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 may be displaced at the same time, or the operation order may be reversed.
Also, the case where the movable upper lid member B730 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable floor member B740 starts to be displaced toward the retracted position has been described, but the order is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable upper cover member B730 and the movable floor member B740 may be displaced at the same time, or the operation order may be reversed.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, a case was described in which the front surface of the base plate member B710 arranged on the back side of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member B730 arranged at the forward position was a smooth surface. It is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of long ridges projecting from the front surface of the base plate member B710 to the front side in a direction (for example, vertical direction) intersecting the flowing direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member B730. The deceleration projections may be arranged along the downward flow direction of the ball. Instead of this, or in addition to this, the upper surface of the movable upper cover member B730 may be formed in a stepped shape so as to reduce the falling velocity of the balls.
As a result, it is possible to reduce the falling speed of the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the movable upper cover member B730. Since the number of balls passing through the front side of the can be increased, when the movable upper cover member B730 is in the closed state (positioned at the forward position), the balls will escape from between the pair of storage plate portions B715. Even with such a configuration, the ball can be easily stored between the pair of storage plate portions B715, and the possibility of the ball passing through the opening B751 of the detection sensor B750 can be increased.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the pair of storage plate portions B715, moving floor member B740, and detection sensor B750 are arranged on the downstream side of the movable upper lid member B730. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the configuration of the movable upper cover member B730 may be omitted, and the ball may always flow down toward the pair of storage plate portions B715, the movable floor member B740, and the detection sensor B750.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, in the jackpot game, the movable upper lid member B730 is operated in the first round to allow the ball to enter the second specific prize winning port B700a, and in the second and subsequent round games, the specific prize winning port B65a is opened. Although the case where the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole B65a has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. It is possible to arbitrarily set which round game is controlled so that a ball can be entered into which of the specific winning openings B65a and B700a.
For example, the movable upper lid member B730 may be operated in round games from the second round onwards so that a ball can be entered into the second specific winning hole B700a. In this case, it can be configured so that the ball entering the specific winning hole B65a occurs only in the small winning game (the moving upper lid member B730 is operated in the whole round game so that the ball can enter the second specific winning hole B700a. ), it is possible to prevent the setting of the number of prize balls to be paid out for the balls entering the specific winning hole B65a from affecting the number of prize balls in the jackpot game.
Therefore, for example, by setting the number of payout balls for entering the specific winning opening B65a to be larger than the number of paying out prize balls for entering the second specific winning opening B700a, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game While suppressing, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the number of prize balls in the small winning game is increased.

Further, for example, by setting the number of payout balls for entering the specific winning opening B65a to be smaller than the number of paying out prize balls for entering the second specific winning opening B700a, prize balls in the small winning game can be obtained. It is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the number of prize balls is reduced (for example, the number of prize balls is reduced to the extent that the number of prize balls equal to the number of shot balls is maintained) while the number of prize balls in the jackpot game is increased.
In addition, when the movable upper cover member B730 is operated in a plurality of round games and is controlled so that the ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening B700a, the game state after the jackpot game is whether the game ball passes through the opening B751. Regarding the phenomenon that changes depending on whether or not, if the game ball passes through the opening B751 in at least one round game that is controlled to be able to enter the second specific winning hole B700a, the game ball enters the opening B751 is deemed to have passed.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the special symbol 1 lottery is not determined to be a small hit has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the special symbol 1 may be determined to be a small hit, while the special symbol 2 may not be determined to be a small hit.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a during normal operation is the first operation pattern has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a during normal operation may be configured to be the third operation pattern.

In this case, the ball can enter the second winning hole B640 from normal (low probability state of special symbols), but the fluctuation time of special symbol 2 in the low probability state of special symbols is long except for the big hit. Since it is set for a period (10 minutes in this embodiment), it is rare to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery, and basically the special symbol 1 by entering the first winning hole B 64. It is possible to construct a game property aiming at a big hit by lottery.
In this case, for example, the game state after executing the jackpot game B is set to a high probability state until the next jackpot is won, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory B 640a is set to the second operation pattern. If the state is set to continue until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the electric accessory B640a will be operated in the third operation pattern after the 101st special symbol lottery, which is the jackpot A. It is the same as the game state after executing the jackpot game. In other words, it is possible to configure the case of transitioning to a special probability variable state with a specified number of special symbol lotteries (100 times in the fifty-fourth embodiment) after the end of the jackpot game.
Also in the case of the jackpot C, the state in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. After the lottery, the electric accessary product B640a is controlled to operate in the third operation pattern, but since it is a low probability state of the special symbol, it simply shifts to the normal state.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the sorting of the jackpot types differs between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be set so that the allocation of the jackpot type is the same. In this case, since there is no difference in which special symbol wins the big win, the lottery related to the big win of the special symbol 1 and the lottery related to the big win of the special symbol 2 can be regarded as the same. In this case, for example, the case where the lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed with a long time variation (for example, variation of 10 minutes) is excluded, and the variation time is set to be the same as the variation time selected by the lottery for the special symbol 1. Thus, it is possible to construct a gaming machine as if the number of reserved balls of special symbols is 8 (total of 4 reserved balls of special symbol 1 and 4 reserved balls of special symbol 2).

Also, for example, among the jackpots in the special symbol 1, the ratio of the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot game is in a high probability state and the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot game is in a low probability state (the above 1:1 in the 54th embodiment), and among the jackpots of the special symbol 2, the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is in a high probability state and the game state in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is in a low probability state. (1:1 in the fifty-fourth embodiment).
In this case, the special pattern 2 jackpot has a higher ratio of the jackpot types in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is in a high probability state compared to the special pattern 1 jackpot. It is possible to configure a game machine capable of transitioning to a state in which the big hits of the symbols 2 are likely to occur continuously.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the direction operation section display B816 can be displayed simultaneously with the display of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, the direction operation unit display B816 may be displayed to provide an adjustment period in which the volume and light amount can be adjusted. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812 means the end timing of the adjustment period and also the start timing of the variable effect after the end of the jackpot game. By visually recognizing , the actions from adjusting the volume and light amount during the adjustment period to shooting the ball after the start timing of the variable effect can be performed smoothly at appropriate timing.
While the period of the ending effect is defined by the jackpot type, the internal structure of the ending effect can be changed even if the jackpot type is the same. If the adjustment period is provided, the period for executing the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting display effect will be narrowed compared to the case where the adjustment period is not provided, but one of the effects will continue. By shortening the time or performing a plurality of effects at the same time, the ending effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Whether or not to provide an adjustment period can be arbitrarily set. is likely to increase (maximum volume), an adjustment period may be provided in the ending effect. As a result, the game burden on the player can be reduced.
Regardless of whether or not the adjustment period is provided, the length of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect can be changed. For example, in the middle of a series of big wins, the amount of information does not increase even if you watch it many times in a short period of time. If so, the ending display effect can be lengthened accordingly. The ending display effect is the number of prize balls actually obtained (only the jackpot game currently being executed or the accumulation during consecutive games) and the game state after the jackpot game ends. Since information with a high value is displayed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the information by lengthening the display period.
For example, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a low-probability state, there is a high possibility that the consecutive games will be interrupted, so that the player will finish the game and leave the seat after that. Therefore, by lengthening the length of the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player forgets to bring back the card.
For example, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to a special variable state, it is the timing when the player's expectation for the ball to be released is the highest, so by making the company name display effect visible at this timing, It is possible to improve the impression of the pachinko machine being played and the manufacturing company. In addition, since the player's sense of anticipation increases as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, the company name display effect is set to be longer as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, thereby improving the impression of the player. be able to.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the volume and light amount can be adjusted in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the adjustment of the volume and light quantity is executed in the ending effect, and the determination result influences the determination of the variable effect after the end of the ending effect.
For example, as a variable effect, if there is a specific effect (one-shot notification effect, etc.) that tends to increase the light amount and volume compared to the normal main pattern stop notification, the light amount will be changed during the previous ending effect. If the specific effect is executed in spite of the execution of the lowering adjustment, it may cause further fatigue to the player who is already considered to have fatigued his eyes from the light. may interrupt. Therefore, when the adjustment to lower the amount of light is executed during the immediately preceding ending performance, the game can be continued while waiting for the recovery of the player's fatigue by performing control so that the specific performance is not executed.
Also, during the jackpot game, if the player performs an operation to change the music that is played in the game state after the jackpot game is over, the player should feel that he or she wants to hear that song, so the current execution is performed. In the ending effect of the jackpot game, a period for displaying the direction operation section display B816 may be secured.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the right end of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812 at the end timing of the ending effect has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when the fluctuation display of normal symbols is continuing at the end timing of the ending production, and there is a time difference between the end timing of the ending production and the start timing of the next fluctuation of the normal symbols, the time difference is equal to the time The timing at which the right end of the display B811 reaches the end position B812 may be shifted (delayed) with respect to the end timing of the ending effect. As a result, the electric accessory B 640a operates in the operating pattern (operating pattern in the normal state, first operating pattern) during the jackpot game in spite of shooting the ball after the ending effect. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball enters the prize winning unit B400 that is in the state of being in the state.

That is, the winning unit in the state in which the electric accessory B 640a is operated in the operation pattern (second operation pattern or third operation pattern) after the ball fired after the ending effect is shifted after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to enter the ball into B400.
Also in this case, when the ending effect is completed, if there is a reserved ball of the special symbol, the variation of the special symbol is started after the ending effect is completed. On the other hand, since it is desired to keep the display of the time display B811, for example, the display of the ending effect is continued in the main display area BDm, and the variation of the special symbol is displayed in the small area BDs3 of the sub display area BDs. The display of the small area BDs3 may be expanded and moved to the main display area BDm3 as soon as the next variation of the pattern is started.
Since the special symbol is to be moved on the screen, it is preferable to move it before the low speed fluctuation (such as reach) occurs. Therefore, in the above-described display mode (movement of special symbols), the time difference from the end timing of the ending effect to the start timing of the next variation of the normal symbols is the time it takes to shift to the low speed variation of the special symbols. It may be performed only when a specific condition of being shorter than is met.
However, since the determination of the variable effect is made at the start of the variable effect, it is after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is unclear during the ending effect whether or not the display mode as described above can be performed. In this case, by moving the end position B812 to the right or by displaying a number such as "+2 seconds", it may be notified that the ball launch timing has fallen backward. In this case, when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, the player is expected to start shooting the ball. A player who sees can stop shooting the ball. Thereby, ball loss can be minimized.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the specific display B810, the frame button display B813, and the like are displayed on a part of the display screen of the third pattern display device B81, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen (full-screen display), or may be displayed on different parts of the display screen.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the time display B811 is displayed from the beginning in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displayed from the middle of the ending effect, or may be displayed by operating the frame button B22. Also, the time display B811 may be displayed or disappear every time the frame button B22 is operated.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the time display B811 is displayed as a bar has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an arbitrary number may be displayed on the display screen, and the number may be counted down to a target value (eg, 0 (zero)), or may be counted up to a target value (eg, 600). . In this case, the player can easily determine the timing when the display reaches the target value (corresponding to the timing when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812).
Moreover, this display is not limited to the display on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81. For example, a second display device separate from the third pattern display device B81 and a 7-segment display device are prepared, and the second display device and the 7-segment display device count down or count up. can be

Note that the time display B811 may be represented by both a bar and a countdown (countup). For example, in addition to displaying the time display B811 as a bar, a number (for example, 3) is displayed on the display screen several seconds (for example, 3 seconds) before the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812, and the number is displayed. A countdown display may be executed. In this case, the player can easily determine the timing when the display becomes 0 (zero) (corresponding to the timing when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812).
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the display screen has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the frame button display B813 is not displayed, it may be possible to configure a state in which the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled when the frame button display B813 is displayed on the display screen has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light-emitting means may be arranged inside the frame button B22, and controlled so that the light-emitting means emits light at the timing at which the frame button B22 is operable. In this case, the player can easily grasp the position of the operation target (the frame button B22).
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, in the ending effect, the company name display effect is executed when the game state entered after the jackpot game ends is the most advantageous state for the player, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed in the jackpot game. A case has been described where the number of payouts is equal to or greater than the number of eight rounds (predetermined number or greater), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the conditions for executing the company name display effect and the conditions for executing the card forgetting prevention display effect may be exchanged.

In addition, at least one of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be set so that it is always executed every time a jackpot game is played regardless of the jackpot type, or a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, Renso) It may be set to be executed at an odd-numbered jackpot, a jackpot of a multiple of 3, etc.).
The contents of the ending effect are not limited to the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a character string such as "Pachinko is a game. Be careful not to get addicted" is displayed to calm the player, or a video is displayed to explain the clerk call button for unfamiliar players. , an operation explaining the button operation for returning the movable accessory to the standby position may be displayed. During execution of any of these displays, it is possible to display the frame button display B813 to prompt the user to operate the frame button B22, or to display the time display B811 to inform the timing of transition to the next effect. can.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the most advantageous state for the player is the special variable probability state has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the state after the jackpot game ends is different depending on whether it is a probability variable state or a time saving state (normal state) (when it does not shift to a special probability variable state), the most advantageous state for the player is the probability variable state.
In addition, when the state after the end of the jackpot game is only the time-saving state and there is a difference in the number of lotteries in which the time-saving state continues, the state in which the number of lotteries in which the time-saving state continues is the largest is the most advantageous for the player. state.

In addition, the state after the end of the jackpot game is only the variable probability state, and one jackpot type continues the variable probability state until the next jackpot, while the other jackpot type shifts to the special variable probability state after a predetermined number of lotteries. In some cases (such as when the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a in the normal state is the third operation pattern), the other jackpot type is more advantageous than the prize balls obtained during the small hit game in the special variable probability state. , the most exciting state for the player is the state after the end of the jackpot of the other jackpot type.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the ending display effect is always executed in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type in which the ending display effect is not executed may be configured. In particular, when the number of prize balls paid out is extremely small compared to other jackpot types (for example, sudden variable probability jackpot, sudden normal jackpot, etc.), it is better to omit the ending display effect to pay out prize balls. It is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the extremely low number and to start the variation of the pattern early after the end of the jackpot game.
Also, in particular, an effect for making the game play without conspicuous the boundary between the special probability variable state and the big win game (for example, an effect in which the number of prize balls in the small win game and the number of prize balls in the big win game are summed and displayed ), the ending display effect is omitted during the continuous game, and the ending display effect is executed at the end of the continuous game, so that the player can combine the special variable state and the jackpot game. It can be seen as one advantage.
Also, the content described above is not limited to the ending display effect. For example, the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be displayed in the ending display of the first jackpot that enters the series of villas, but may not be displayed during the series of games regardless of the type of jackpot.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the prize ball display B801 and the identification display B802 are displayed on the screen at the same timing has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, after the prize ball display B801 is displayed on the screen, the identification display B802 may be displayed after the display is switched. In this case, the player can be made to understand separately the profit obtained in the jackpot game and the profit obtained after shifting from the jackpot game, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the duration of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect is set to be the same (5 seconds), but this is not necessarily the case. The length of each effect can be arbitrarily set for each jackpot type. For example, the execution period of the card-forgetting prevention display effect may be longer than other effects (for example, 10 seconds), or the card-forgetting prevention display effect may be repeatedly executed. .
In the case of repeated execution, it may be repeated continuously, or it may be repeated with another effect interposed. For example, the ending display effect (second time) may be displayed after the end of the card forgetting prevention display effect. At this time, the prize ball display B801 is displayed in the first ending display effect, but the identification display B802 and the reliability display B803 are not displayed, and the identification display B802 and the reliability display B803 are displayed in the second ending display effect. The display of prize balls may not be displayed.
As a result, the timing of notifying the profit (the number of prize balls) that the player has obtained in the jackpot game can be separated from the timing of notifying the state of the game after the jackpot game is over, so that the player bears the burden of the game. can be reduced. In addition, by displaying the contents of the player's high interest (identification display B802 in the above example) at the end of the ending effect, the player's attention to the ending effect can be maintained in a high state.

In addition, at a predetermined timing of the ending production, when the contents of high interest of the player (in the above example, the identification display B802 can be displayed, the operation of the frame button B22 is executed before the timing of switching to that display. That is, by performing the frame button display B813, the player's attention to the third pattern display device B81 is enhanced, and the operation of the frame button B22 makes the player feel that he/she is participating in the game. By displaying the identification display B802 immediately after the operation of the frame button B22, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the player misses the identification display B802.
The length of the ending effect is not limited to several seconds, and the length can be arbitrarily set (for example, according to the type of jackpot). That is, an ending effect that takes several minutes may be prepared in addition to the ending effect that ends in several seconds.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the duration of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are each set to the same length (5 seconds), and the ending effect depends on the combination of effects to be executed. Although the case where the execution period of is changed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the execution period of the ending effect is fixed and the company name display effect is set to be short, the card forgetting prevention display effect may be lengthened instead.
In this case, the player who can grasp that the company name display effect has been completed in a short period can know that the card forgetting prevention display effect will be extended at that time, so that the player has time to change the setting of the sound volume and the amount of light. It is possible to grasp that it will be longer, and it is possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the frame button B22.

In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the company name display performance is executed after the ending display performance and the card forgetting prevention display performance is executed after the company name display performance has been explained, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display order of the ending display effect, the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect can be arbitrarily set, and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be executed before the company name display effect.
Further, any two effects of the ending display effect, the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect may be executed simultaneously (executed in parallel). In this case, it is preferable to separate the display positions in the third pattern display device B81 in order to avoid overlapping of displays. According to this, compared to the case where the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are executed in order (executed in series), the time required for the ending effect is equivalent to the effect that is executed simultaneously. can be shortened.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed when the company name display effect is executed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be prepared in which an ending display effect and a company name display effect are executed and the card forgetting prevention display effect is omitted.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the frame button display B813 and the direction operation section display B816 are displayed after the ending display effect and the settings can be changed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, after the frame button display B813 and the direction operation section display B816 are displayed and the setting can be changed, the ending display effect may be executed.

In this case, the period during which the frame button display B813 and the direction operation section display B816 are displayed may be started after the ending effect is started (after the round game of the final round is finished), or the jackpot is displayed. It may be started during digestion of the round game at the end of the game. In either case, the transition from the ending display effect to the variable effect can be made smooth.
The timing at which the direction operation section display B816 is displayed and the direction operation section B45 becomes operable is not limited to after the frame button B22 is operated. For example, the frame button display B813 may not be displayed, and the direction operation unit display B816 may be displayed to enable operation of the direction operation unit B45 without operating the frame button B22.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the direction operation section display B816 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and even while adjusting the volume and light intensity, the specific display B810 can be seen while being moved to the edge of the display screen. Although the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is continued has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the card forgetting prevention display effect disappears when the sound volume or the light intensity is adjusted, based on the determination that the player who is about to leave the seat will not adjust the sound volume or the light intensity again.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, it has been explained that if the frame button B22 is operated while the frame button display B813 is being displayed, the adjustment screen is displayed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, while the frame button B22 is pressed, the adjustment screen may be displayed, and when the frame button B22 is released, the screen before the operation may be displayed. As a result, the player can be made aware that two-handed operation is optimal for changing the setting of sound volume and amount of light, and the player can release the handle B51, thereby suppressing ball shooting during the ending effect. can do.

Before the player operates the frame button B22, it is also possible to display the message ``You can change the settings of the light intensity and volume while pressing the frame button.'' This allows the player to grasp at once that both hands operation is required. By having both hands operated in the ending effect, it is possible to suppress the shooting of the ball at the timing when the profit rate is low for the player even if the ball is shot. In other words, the notification may be made in such a manner that a plurality of operating means are operated simultaneously at a timing at which there is a possibility that the player will be more profitable if the shooting of the game ball is suppressed.
Further, for example, each time the frame button B22 is operated, a state (display mode) in which the volume setting can be changed and a state (display mode) in which the light amount setting can be changed may be switched.
Further, for example, during the ending effect, while the frame button B22 is being pressed, the screen is shifted to the adjustment screen, and when the frame button B22 is released, the screen before the operation is displayed. After shifting to the presentation display screen, control may be performed so that the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light can be executed even if the frame button B22 is not pressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being forced to operate with both hands until after the end of the ending effect, so that the player can change the setting of the sound volume and the amount of light while operating the handle B51.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the frame button B22 is operated according to the frame button display B813 during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect has been described, but the specific display B810 is moved to the edge side of the screen. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the player operates the frame button B22 according to the frame button display B813 during execution of the company name display effect, the manufacturing company name (A company) as the specific display B810 is displayed on the upper left of the screen of the third symbol display device B81. It may be moved to a corner (end side), and subsequently, a card forgetting prevention display may be displayed in the specific display B810. A direction operation section display B816 may be displayed in the center of the screen of the third pattern display device B81 during the execution of the company name display effect to inform the player that the setting of the sound volume and the amount of light can be changed. good.

In addition, even if the specific display B810 is displayed on the edge side of the display screen, if the setting change of the volume or the amount of light is not executed within the specified time (for example, within 2 seconds), the specific display B810 will not be displayed. It may be set to return to the center of the screen (arrangement before movement).
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the setting of the volume and the amount of light can be changed in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if there are variations (first mode, second mode) in the pattern of the special symbol variation effect during the special probability change that transitions from the ending effect, during the probability change or during the time saving, select any of them. It may also be possible to change one of the settings. Here, the combination of the first mode and the second mode can be set arbitrarily. Examples include a combination with a mode, a combination of a display mode requesting repeated pressing of the frame button B22 and a display mode requesting a long press operation of the frame button B22, and the like.
Also, for example, if it is possible to change the setting of the song (theme song, etc.) played during the big win effect or the variable effect, the setting of the song may be changed in the ending effect. Instead of an ending effect, it may be during a fanfare effect, during a round game, during an interval between rounds, or during a period straddling them.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, it has been explained that during the ending effect, the end timing of the ending effect is notified by the time display B811 and the end position B812, and the display effect changes according to the operation of the frame button B22. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, the notification of the end timing or occurrence timing of the effect, and the change in the displayed effect accompanying the operation of the frame button B22 may be performed during the fluctuation of the symbols or during the ready-to-win, or during the jackpot game except for the ending effect. may be performed during the production of

For example, when it is performed during the fluctuation of the symbols or during the ready-to-win, the end timing of the effect to be notified may be the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, or the timing when the pseudo-continuous variation as the effect is started. . In the former case, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is reduced by one, it becomes possible to obtain a lottery of new special symbols. In the latter case, if the variation of the special symbols itself lasts for several minutes, the player can keep his/her concentration by breaking it into short intervals in the middle.
When the frame button B22 is operated along with the frame button display B813 at the end of the ready-to-win stage, the display screen is shifted to the display screen for the big win if the win is a big win, and is shifted to the display screen for the loss if the win is lost. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the player looking at the frame button display B813 to understand the result of the variation of the special symbol.
For example, it may be performed during the performance during the jackpot game except for the ending performance. The operation of the frame button display B813 and the frame button B22 during the round is, for example, a promotional effect (for example, a fanfare effect in which a 4th round jackpot is announced in the performance, but in reality it is a 15th round jackpot, etc.). It can be used for the effect of informing the player that it is a big win in which the player can obtain a profit higher than the profit expected to be obtained by the player by the notification in the fanfare effect.
In particular, as in the fifty-fourth embodiment, when the game state after the jackpot game ends changes depending on whether or not the ball passes through the opening B751 in the round game, the frame button display B813 is displayed during the round game. By prompting the player to operate the frame button B22, the player's attention is diverted from the opening B751, and the player fails to confirm whether or not the ball has passed through the opening B751. be able to.

When the pachinko machine B10 is provided with a movable accessory projecting to the front side of the display screen, there is an operation of the frame button B22 according to the frame button display B813 during the round, and the movable accessory is displayed on the display screen when the promotion effect is executed. When it is controlled to protrude to the front side, it is easy for the player to understand that the promotion performance has been successful by the movement of the movable accessory. Even if there is an operation of the frame button B22 according to the frame button display B813 during the round, when the promotion effect is not executed (when the notification in the fanfare effect and the actual notification are the same), the movable accessory is displayed on the display screen. It is easy for the player to understand that the promotion performance has failed by controlling so as not to protrude to the front side.
In addition, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change in the displayed effect accompanying the operation of the frame button B22 are the game explanation display effect (demonstration screen) that is executed when the lottery of the first symbol is not performed for a predetermined time. You can also set it to run inside. In this case, it is possible to let the player know that the game explanation display effect has been completed.
In addition, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change in the displayed effect accompanying the operation of the frame button B22 may be performed within a predetermined time in the effect related to the game in which the ball passes through a predetermined detection opening within a predetermined time. may be executed when the ball has not yet passed through the detection opening of . In this case, the notification can make the player aware that the ball has not passed through the detection opening.
Further, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change of the displayed effect accompanying the operation of the frame button B22 may be executed during the fanfare effect in the jackpot game or at intervals between rounds. In this case, the specific winning opening B65a or the second specific winning opening B700a is opened at the end timing of the effect, so the player can easily grasp the timing suitable for shooting the ball.

Further, for example, the notification of the end timing of the effect and the change of the displayed effect accompanying the operation of the frame button B22 may be performed during a period including a plurality of round games and intervals between rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to compose an effect that is longer than the time set as a single round game or the interval between rounds, and to notify the end timing of the long effect and display accompanying the operation of the frame button B22. By making it possible to change the effect to be played, the player can concentrate on the game without getting bored.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed when a predetermined time has passed after the number of held balls of the first symbol becomes 0. In this case, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the card forgetting prevention display effect even before winning the big win.
Further, for example, it may be executed at the time when the fluctuation of the first symbol starts for a long time (for example, 60 seconds or longer). In this case, it is possible to inform the player who intends to purchase drinks or the like in the idle time that the first pattern will start changing for a long time, and to prevent the player from forgetting the card when leaving the seat. It can be called attention.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the period in which the direction operation display B816 is displayed and the light amount and volume can be adjusted is until the end of the ending effect, or during the first change after the end of the ending effect. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set during high-speed variation display of the third symbol during variation of the first symbol, or during medium-speed variation display of the third symbol. In this case, from the timing when the direction operation section display B816 is displayed and the period in which the light amount and volume can be adjusted ends, the timing changes from the high-speed fluctuation display to the medium-speed fluctuation display, and from the medium-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. The player can grasp the timing of shifting to the variable display (during the ready-to-win display, etc.).

In addition, it is possible to configure a period during which the direction operation section display B816 is displayed and the light amount and sound volume can be adjusted throughout the fluctuation of the special symbol (including during the low speed fluctuation display). In this case, the direction operation section display B816 may be displayed in the small area BDs3, or the display may be switched between the small area BDs3 and the main display area BDm.
In this case, during the variable display of the special symbols, a notification is made to suggest that a period in which the adjustment is possible is prepared, and then the notification of that period is executed, and the frame button display B813 etc. are made, The notification may be performed step by step, such that the direction operation section display B816 can be displayed and the sound volume and the amount of light can be adjusted. In this case, even during the variable display of the special symbols, the player's interest can be shifted step by step, so that the player may not notice that the adjustable period is prepared. can be easily avoided.
In addition to this, it may be controlled so that the adjustment of the volume light amount is effective even after the next fluctuation, and when the special pattern that fluctuates when the volume light amount is adjusted becomes a big hit, the volume You may control so that a big-hit game can be performed in the state which maintained the adjustment of light quantity.
Also, for example, it is not limited until the first fluctuation, but may be configured so that the period in which the light amount and volume can be adjusted continues until the plural fluctuations are completed. It may be configured such that the period in which the light amount and sound volume are adjustable continues until a predetermined mode (for example, a long-time variation, a variation for winning a big win, etc.) is achieved.

Also, in the latter half of the variable effect that results in a big win or in the fanfare effect, a period may be prepared in which the direction operation section display B816 is displayed and the amount of light and volume can be adjusted. In this case, the volume can be set during the big win, and the player can grasp the start timing of the big win game from the timing of the end of the period.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the end position B812 is fixed and the time display B811 moves with the passage of time. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the moving speed of the time display B811 may be set to a constant speed, or the moving speed of the time display B811 may be configured to be variable in the middle. Further, for example, the right end of the time display B811 may move in the opposite direction (to the left).
Also, for example, the terminal position B812 may be configured to be movable. That is, by moving the end position B812 while the time display B811 is moving, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the time until the time display B811 reaches the end position B812.
The terminal position B812 may be moved immediately after the time display B811 reaches the end position B811, or before the time display B811 reaches the end position B812. You may comprise so that it may move in.

Further, the movement direction of the end position B812 as the movement destination of the time display B811 is not limited to the horizontal direction. For example, it may move vertically or may move in a vortex. This makes it difficult to predict the time until the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, by operating the frame button B22 in the ending effect, the direction operation section 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the specific display B810 is moved to the corner of the display screen. It is not limited to this. For example, the specific display B810 may be arranged at the corner of the display screen before the frame button B22 is operated. Further, for example, by operating the frame button B22, the movable accessory may extend to the vicinity of the center of the display screen, and the display position of the specific display B810 may be changed to a position not hidden by the movable accessory.
Further, for example, by operating the frame button B22 in the ending effect, the specific display B810 may be set to disappear. It may be configured to be displayed, or a combination of these may be used.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the display mode of the horizontal scale display B818 on the display screen changes when the volume is changed in the ending effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to or instead of this, a predetermined line may be output when the volume is changed.

For example, in the case of outputting the line "Be careful not to forget to take out the card", the player can be alerted to forgetting the card every time the player changes the volume.
Also, the contents of the lines, the volume, or the voice (voice tone) may be changed according to the changed volume. In particular, when the content of the lines (e.g. "Please be careful not to forget to take the card" or "Please be sure to take the card home") or the tone of voice (e.g. the voice of a different character), the player may You can easily set the volume to your liking. Incidentally, in a continuous game state in which the jackpot game is continuously executed in a short period of time, it is preferable to execute the warning such as "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" every time, but to execute it at a predetermined interval. . In this case, it can be said that the attention-calling display executed in the ending effect is a display mode that is not displayed when the same condition is satisfied in a short period of time.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the comment displayed in the caution comment display B815 or the second caution comment display B819 in the ending effect is the same as the object for which the player can change the setting has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, a comment may be displayed that does not match what the player can change.
In this case, if there is a jackpot among the pending starting prizes, an expectation display ( By displaying a comment to make the player expect that a big win may be obtained, the player can expect to win the next big win during the ending performance, so that the player pays attention to the ending performance. The strength can be improved, and the player's motivation to operate the frame button B22 can be increased.

When an expectation is displayed in the caution comment display B815 or the second caution comment display B819, and it is already expected to win a big win, it is normal to refrain from shooting the ball until the big win game is started in order to avoid hitting the ball in vain. is. Therefore, even if the time display B811 is caused to reach the end position B812 at the end of the ending effect, there is a high possibility that the attention of the player cannot be increased.
Therefore, the time display B811 may be configured to reach the terminal position B812 at the timing when the fluctuation performance of lottery for a big win ends, instead of reaching the terminal position B812 at the end of the ending performance. In this case, the player's attention to the time display B811 and the end position B812 can be improved.
In this case, the time display B811 and the end position B812 may be started in the ending effect and continue to be displayed until the variation effect of the lottery for the big win ends, or they may not be displayed in the ending effect. may be displayed after transition to the subsequent variable effect.
In the former case, since the player notices that he or she has already won the big win from the stage of watching the ending effect, the player should understand that there is no need to shoot the ball immediately after the end of the big win game. can be done. Therefore, the player can suppress the launch of the ball.

In the latter case, the time display B811 and the end position B812 may be displayed without waiting for the variation performance of the lottery that becomes the big win when the ending performance is shifted to the variable performance, or the variable performance of the lottery that becomes the big win is started. It may be displayed later or simultaneously with the start of the variable effect. In either case, the player can know that the variable effect will be a big hit before the end of the variable effect, so for example, the variable effect will take a long time (for example, one change requires 10 minutes). ), the player can suppress the launch of the ball, and can easily avoid the situation of leaving the gaming machine without noticing that there is a jackpot in the pending start-up winning. can.
When there is a jackpot among the pending starting prizes, the expectation display is not displayed in the ending performance, but the time display B811 and the end position B812 are displayed during the variable performance, and the lottery for the jackpot is displayed. It may be configured to reach the end position B812 at the timing when the variable effect ends.
In addition, when there is a jackpot among the reserved start prizes, the display mode may be changed according to the number of start prizes that will be the jackpot. For example, when the number of starting prizes to be a big hit is 2, the expected display of "big hit x 2!?" Multiple jackpot wins!?” may be displayed as multiple jackpot wins, but it may be made unclear how many start-up prizes will be the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.
At this time, when the time display B811 is configured to reach the end position B812 at the timing when the variation performance of the lottery to become a big win ends, the variation performance of the lottery to become a big win ends first after the end of the ending performance. By setting the timing to do so, the player's feelings can be smoothly shifted to the jackpot game.

Also, the display position of the comment that does not match the object that the player can change is set in the small area BDs3, and when the frame button display B813 disappears by operating the frame button B22 while the frame button display B813 is being displayed, The comment may be configured to be visible, or the display of the comment may be set to the entire display screen (full screen display). In this case, the player's desire to operate the frame button B22 can be enhanced.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is shifted to the next variable effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a single picture (still image) may be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device B81 between the card forgetting prevention display effect and the next variable display screen. In this case, if the pattern variation starts at the start of display of the single picture, the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812 matches the start of display of the single picture. It is better to set
Further, the symbol variation may be started after a while from the shift to the variation display screen after the end of the big winning game. In this case, the timing at which the right end portion of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812 should be set to the timing after shifting to the variable display screen after the end of the big win game.
In the above fifty-fourth embodiment, the timing at which the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 is configured as the timing suitable for the player to start shooting the ball. It is not something that can be done. For example, the time display B811 is displayed during a period in which the player can obtain a predetermined profit by shooting the ball, and the player can shoot the ball when the right end of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812. may be configured as a suitable timing for ending the In this case, it is possible to prompt the player to shoot the ball while the time display B811 is moving to the right, and to prompt the player to stop shooting the ball at an appropriate timing. can be done.

Also, in this case, if the prescribed conditions are met at the timing before the right end of the time display B811 reaches the end position B812, a message such as "ready" appears on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81. A character string may be displayed, or the display on the display screen may be switched to inform the player that the specified condition has been met. In this case, the display of the time display B811 may be maintained even after the prescribed condition is met, or the display of the time display B811 may be turned off when the prescribed condition is met. good.
For example, if the game machine is controlled to display a character string on the display screen under the condition that the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 (special symbol 2 or both) becomes 4 (full), By confirming the character string, the player can grasp that the lottery for the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2 or both) cannot be obtained even if the ball is shot any more. As a result, the player can be urged to stop shooting the ball at an appropriate timing without performing control such as abruptly changing the moving speed of the time display B811.
In the fifty-fourth embodiment, the caution comment display B815 is displayed before the frame button B22 is pressed, and the second caution comment display B819 is displayed after the frame button B22 is pressed. is not limited to
For example, even after pressing the frame button B22, only the caution comment display B815 is displayed, the direction operation section 816 and the vertical scale display B817 are displayed, but the horizontal scale display B818 may not be displayed. In this case, since the content of the caution comment 815 displayed before pressing the frame button B22 matches the object (light amount) whose setting can be changed by operating the frame button B22, the frame button B22 is operated. It is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with

For example, if the caution comment display B815 disappears and only the second caution comment display B819 is displayed before the frame button B22 is pressed, the second caution comment display B819 is displayed even after the frame button B22 is pressed. The caution comment display B815 is not displayed, and the direction operation section 816 and horizontal scale display B818 are displayed, but the vertical scale display B817 may be controlled so as not to be displayed. In this case, the content of the second caution comment 819 displayed before pressing the frame button B22 matches the target (volume) whose setting can be changed by operating the frame button B22. It is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the operation of .
As a result, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button B22 after confirming in advance whether or not the setting of the object (volume or amount of light) that the player wants to change can be changed. , the operation load of the frame button B22 can be reduced.
Also, the case where the frame button display B813 and the operation target when the frame button B22 is operated has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the triangular mark of the frame button display B813 is a musical note, the volume can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22. That is, by changing the display mode of the frame button display B813 itself, it is possible to notify the target that can be adjusted by operating the frame button B22.
If there are a plurality of operation means corresponding to the frame button B22 and each has a different shape, the frame button display B813 can be configured to correspond to the different shapes. It is possible to inform the player whether or not the operation should be performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the adjustable target changes depending on the operation means operated.

In the fifty-fifth embodiment, the slide member B2450 is integrally formed with the front projecting portion B2457, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the front protruding portion B2457 and the slide member B2450 are formed separately, and the front protruding portion B2457 is displaced in the vertical direction due to load transmission accompanying the sliding movement of the slide member B2450 in the longitudinal direction. Alternatively, the ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b may be configured to be switched between projecting from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion B431a and not projecting from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion B431a.
In this case, compared to the case where the ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b are displaced in the front-rear direction, the load applied to the ball from the ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b in the flow-down direction of the ball in the central flow path B2431 can be reduced, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball is erroneously accelerated when the ball interference projecting portions B2458a and B2458b are displaced forward.
In the fifty-seventh embodiment, the case where the rolling plate portion B4421 and the obstructing rod portion B4425 are integrally formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the interfering rod portion B4425 to be assembled to the rolling plate portion B4421, there are cases where the interfering rod portion B4425 is used without being assembled, and cases where the interfering rod portion B4425 is assembled with the rolling plate portion B4421. Therefore, the rolling plate portion B4421 can be used in common, and cost reduction can be achieved by using the rolling plate portion B4421 as a common component.
Further, for example, the rolling plate portion B4421 and the obstruction rod portion B4425 may be formed separately, and the obstruction rod portion B4425 may be configured to interlock when the rolling plate portion B4421 operates. Thereby, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rolling plate portion B4421 and the obstructing rod portion B4425 can be improved. In this case, the driving device for driving the rolling plate portion B4421 may also be used as the driving device for driving the obstructing rod portion B4425, or another driving device may be prepared.

In the fifty-seventh embodiment, the downstream end of the rolling plate portion B4421 is arranged on the right side of the right end of the guide portion B4413, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the downstream end of the rolling plate portion B4421 may be extended leftward and formed to cover the upper surface of the guide portion B4413. In this case, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion B4421 and flows down can be smoothly placed on the guide portion B4413. That is, the weight of the ball lowers the height position of the rolling plate portion B4421 (sinking), the upper surface of the rolling plate portion B4421 is arranged at a lower position than the upper surface of the guide portion B4413, and the rolling plate portion B4421 is downstream of the upper surface of the guide portion B4413. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the flow resistance increases when the ball that has reached the side moves to the guide portion B4413 side. The same applies to the upstream end of the rolling plate portion B4421 and both ends of the opening/closing member of the variable winning device B65.
In the fifty-seventh embodiment, the case where the electric accessory B4420 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be rotationally displaced. The rotation axis of the rotational displacement is, for example, the direction along the opening in the opening where the rolling plate portion B4421 appears and disappears (horizontally long opening formed on the back side of the flow path forming portion B4410) in the fifty-seventh embodiment. may be arranged so as to extend to
A horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate is formed so as to hang down from the rotating shaft. The state in which the opening/closing plate hangs down corresponds to the non-guiding state, and in this state, an obstructing portion capable of obstructing passage of the ball is formed at the downstream end of the opening/closing plate so as to correspond to the obstructing rod B4425. When the opening/closing plate is rotated 90 degrees in the direction in which the opening/closing plate rises from the non-guiding state (backward rolling direction), the opening/closing plate is brought into a state where it can guide the ball toward the guide portion B4413, and this state corresponds to the guided state. In this state, the interfering portion is retracted to the rear side of the flow path forming portion B4410.
By configuring in this way, even if the ball flows toward the plate-like portion B4412 side of the rotating shaft in the non-guided state, depending on the arrangement of the ball when the opening/closing plate is displaced in the backward rotation direction, the ball can be rescued above the rotation axis.

Further, the rotation axis of the rotational displacement may be arranged so as to extend in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the opening where the rolling plate portion B4421 appears and disappears in the fifty-seventh embodiment. A state in which the opening/closing plate extends from the rotating shaft in the same direction as the guiding state in the fifty-seventh embodiment is configured as the guiding state. The ball inlet B4411 and the ceiling portion B4414 are arranged upward so that the opening/closing plate can be rotated and displaced from the guided state to a state of rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise about the rotation axis (corresponding to the non-guided state). has been raised to That is, according to this configuration, the state in which the opening/closing plate is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the guiding state is configured as the non-guiding state. The rod portion B4425 is composed of the same portion.
With this configuration, when the opening/closing plate is rotated from the guiding state to the non-guiding state, all the balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate in the guided state are guided toward the guide portion B4413. be able to. As a result, when the electric accessory B4420 is slid from the guided state to the non-guided state in the fifty-seventh embodiment, most of the balls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion B4421 in the guided state are the plate-like portion B4412. Compared to flowing down to the side, the ball can be easily guided to the guide portion B4413 side.
In the fifty-eighth embodiment, the case where the ball receiving rotating member B5771 that rotates and displaces between the second specific winning hole B700a and the opening B751 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed of a rotating part configured to swing left and right, and may be operable to distribute the flow-down path of the ball to either the left or the right.
Further, for example, an opening/closing plate that slides and displaces may be arranged. In this case, the opening/closing plate may be used to open/close the channel or opening B751 to the area between the pair of storage plate portions B715.

Alternatively, the opening/closing plate may be configured to be arranged on the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plate portions B715 or on the opening B751, thereby switching the flow-down path of the ball. That is, a state in which the channel to the region between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is opened while the opening portion B751 is closed, and a state in which the channel to the region between the pair of storage plate portions B715 is closed. On the other hand, the state in which the opening B751 is open may be switched by an opening/closing plate.
In the fifty-eighth embodiment described above, the ball receiving recess B5772 receives one ball at a time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to accept a predetermined number exceeding one (for example, two each). In this case, when the ball receiving rotating member B5771 rotates at a constant speed, a plurality of (predetermined number) of balls can enter the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715 at once.
In the fifty-eighth embodiment, the case where the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is always rotated clockwise has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, assuming that the rotating motion is always the same, the motion timing of rotating in the counterclockwise direction may be inserted at predetermined intervals. In this case, for example, even if ball engagement occurs between the ball receiving recess B5772 and the flow restricting member B5778, the ball engagement can be eliminated by reversing the direction of rotation.
Also, in the case of a predetermined jackpot type, the ball receiving rotating member B5771 may be stopped for the first 10 seconds of the round game, and after 10 seconds have elapsed, the ball receiving rotating member B5771 may be rotated. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down toward the pair of storage plate portions B715 (opening B751) in the first 10 seconds, the ball is guided toward the movable upper cover member B730 in the state of the nail BKG1. Since the number of balls entering the second specific winning hole B700a during the first 10 seconds can be reduced in a state in which more balls deviate, the possibility of balls passing through the opening B751 can be increased.

Further, the rotation direction of the ball receiving rotating member B5771, the rotation speed (including whether it is constant or variable), the presence or absence of reversal of the rotation direction, etc. may be set for each jackpot type. In this case, attention to the ball receiving rotating member B5771 can be improved.
In the fifty-eighth embodiment, the distance between the second specific winning opening B700a and the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is such that the ball does not fall sideways when the ball flows from the second specific winning opening B700a to the ball receiving recess B5772. Although a narrow case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the distance between the second specific winning opening B700a and the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is longer than the diameter of the ball and the ball receiving recess B5772 is filled with the ball, the ball passes through the second specific winning opening B700a. The ball may be configured to spill sideways and flow to the inclined plate portion B5718b.
In this case, even if the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is stopped, the entry of the ball into the second specific winning opening B700a is not delayed, so control can be performed to stop the ball receiving rotating member B5771 at a predetermined timing. .
When the ball receiving rotating member B5771 is stopped during the round game, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing into the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715 until the ball receiving rotating member B5771 starts to operate next time. The timing at which the ball is introduced to the position between the pair of storage plate portions B715 and the timing at which the ball passes through the opening B751 can be delayed.

In the fifty-ninth embodiment, the predetermined length of time that elapses from the timing when the right tip of the firing time display B6811 reaches the terminal position B812 to the timing when the right tip of the time display B811 reaches the terminal position B812 is , is designed to be slightly longer than the average length that elapses from the time the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates B66, B67 (the position indicated by the target indication B6822); It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the average length of time that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates B66 and B67 is taken into account, and the probability of the ball entering the through gates B66 and B67 is taken into consideration. may be designed for a predetermined length of time.
In the fifty-ninth embodiment, the target suggestion display B6822 on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 is a display prompting the user to aim at the through gates B66 and B67, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game, a game in a time-saving state, a variable probability state, or a special variable probability state is played by hitting to the right, instead of the target suggestion display B6822, a display of “right hitting” is displayed on the display screen. Also good. Further, at the timing when the target suggestive display B6822 is enlarged, the display of "Right shot" may be enlarged as a whole. Alternatively, the display of "Right shot" may be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device B81 throughout the ending effect, or the display of "Right shot" may be displayed in the middle of the ending effect. It may be configured to be displayed anywhere on the display screen of the 3-symbol display device B81.
For example, when the target suggestive display B6822 is displayed in a fanfare effect, the target suggestive display B6822 may be designed to suggest aiming at the second specific prize winning opening B700a or the opening B751 of the upper variable prize winning device B700. In this case, if the target suggestive display B6822 is set to be maintained on the display screen during the first round of the round game until the passage of the ball through the opening B751 is detected, the player can display the target suggestive display. Since B6822 disappears, it is possible to grasp that the sphere has passed through the opening B751, so it is possible to improve attention to the target suggestion display B6822.
In addition to the method of prompting the user to aim at the through gates B66 and B67 on the display screen like the target suggestive display B6822, for example, a light emitting means for causing the vicinity of the through gates B66 and B67 on the game board B13 to emit light is provided. , the light emitting means may emit light in accordance with the timing at which the target suggestion display B6822 is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp the position to aim the ball by relying on the light.

Further, although the target suggestive display B6822 has been described as being displayed in the ending effect, it is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from an ending effect to a variable effect, the display of the target suggestive display B6822 may be maintained continuously for a predetermined period even in the variable effect. In addition, the display period of the target suggestion display B6822 may be set with a predetermined time width, and the number of balls entering the target ball entrance (predetermined number, for example, the number of held balls of the first symbol It may be continued until the allowable number (4 in this embodiment) is detected.
In the fifty-ninth embodiment, the case where the game stop suggestion display B6831 is used to prompt the user to stop shooting the ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game stop suggestion display B6831 may be used to prompt the user to stop operating the frame button B22. As a result, the player who operates the frame button B22 without knowing that the frame button B22 is being operated at an inappropriate timing can be made aware that the frame button B22 is being operated at an inappropriate timing. Since it can be done, a game burden can be reduced.
In addition, the game stop suggestion display B6831 is composed of a notation (for example, a comment "Please return to left-handed") that prompts to stop the execution of "right-handed" and does not stop "left-handed". can be
In addition, instead of the game stop suggestion display B6831, the illumination parts B29 to B33, the display lamp B34, etc. may emit intense light, or may emit light in an abnormal color (for example, dark red). A comment such as "Please stop shooting the ball" or "Please return to left-handed hitting" may be output by adjusting the volume.

In the fifty-ninth embodiment described above, the game stop suggestion display B6831 is displayed when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gates B66 and B67 before the end of the ending effect, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. That is, it may be displayed when a ball is detected to enter a predetermined ball entrance even though the ball is not scheduled to enter the predetermined ball entrance.
The predetermined ball entrance is not limited to the through gates B66 and B67, and various ball entrances (general winning opening B63, first winning opening B64, second winning opening B640, through gate B67, specific winning opening B65a, second specific winning opening B700a, opening B751, etc.) are exemplified.
For example, as the period during which the ball is not scheduled to enter, in addition to the execution of the ending effect, a right-handed machine (a gaming machine that performs a game with a right-handed game during a predetermined period such as a time-saving state), other than a predetermined period is exemplified. That is, by setting the game stop suggesting display B6831 to be displayed when a ball is detected at the ball entrance located on the right side of the game area during a period other than the predetermined period, inappropriate It is possible to prevent the player from hitting right at the right timing.
Further, for example, the period during which the ball is not scheduled to enter is exemplified by the fanfare production in the jackpot game and the inter-round first interval time BInt1. That is, during the fanfare production or during the first interval time BInt1 between rounds, when a ball is detected at the entrance, the game stop suggestion display B6831 is displayed. It is possible to suppress the shooting of the ball at the timing when the flow-down path to the 2-specific prize winning opening B700a is not opened (closed), and it is possible to minimize the occurrence of useless balls.

In the fifty-ninth embodiment, the game stop suggestion display B6831 prompts the user to immediately stop shooting the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display may be changed in accordance with the number of pending balls in the lottery that accompanies the ball entering a predetermined starting hole (for example, the second winning hole B640).
That is, for example, when the ball is controlled so that it can be expected to enter a predetermined starting hole by launching the ball, and there is a margin until the number of retained balls becomes full (4) (for example, the number of retained balls is 2 (in the case of 1), the game stop suggestion display B6831 may be a comment that the player can understand as a margin (for example, "2 more"), or the game stop suggestion display B6831 is not displayed and game preparation is suggested. When the display B6841 is displayed and the number of reserved balls becomes full, the game stop suggestion display B6831 as described in the fifty-ninth embodiment and the comment such as "preparation complete" will be displayed. It may be configured to suggest that it is unnecessary.
In the fifty-ninth embodiment, the case where the game stop suggestion display B6831 is displayed when ball shooting is detected to prompt the player to stop shooting the ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the game stop suggesting display B6831 or in accordance with the game stop suggesting display B6831, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed (notified). As a result, the player's sense of regret can be reduced compared to the case where the player only feels regret that the ball was hit in vain. In addition, depending on the situation, it is possible to encourage the player to shoot the ball as he likes in the ending effect.
In this case, the information that is beneficial to the player includes, for example, information as to whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the low probability state of the first symbol or the high probability state of the first symbol, and information after the end of the jackpot game. Information on whether the game state is a normal state, a time-saving state, a probability variable state or a special probability variable state, and whether the operation pattern of the electric accessory B640a changes after the predetermined number of lotteries has passed after the end of the jackpot game or not. Information on whether or not there is a jackpot among the currently reserved balls in the lottery of the first symbol, and the gaming machine can change the setting of the jackpot probability of the first symbol (for example, , The jackpot probability in the low-probability state can be set at 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state can be set at 1/32. (Setting 1) or setting at 1/26 (setting 2) can be changed), information that suggests the setting of the current jackpot probability is exemplified.

In the above-described 60th embodiment, a case has been described in which the setting change is canceled (initialized) after a specified period of time has passed since the setting change of the light amount or sound volume was executed. Various aspects are exemplified as conditions for canceling the setting change. For example, a transition to a game explanation display (a so-called demo screen) executed on the display screen before the start of the game may be set as a condition for canceling the setting change, or control may be performed so that the time can be determined. The condition for canceling the setting change may be the arrival of a specified time, or the condition for canceling the setting change is that the number of big wins on the same day or a plurality of days reaches the specified number of big wins.
Further, the frame button B22 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the frame button display B813 is displayed in the game explanation display before the start of the game, the timing when the frame button display B813 is not displayed during the game, etc.). This may be the condition for canceling the setting change, or detection of the passage of the ball through a predetermined prize winning opening or through gates B66 and B67 during the ending effect may be the condition for canceling the setting change. The setting change may be canceled by obtaining a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type, or when the amount of balls stored in the upper tray B17 exceeds the allowable amount, the ball removal notification is executed. The condition for canceling the setting change may be that the setting change is canceled.
In addition, it is a notification set to be performed when it is determined that the ball is flowing down the right game area B303, such as when the passage of the ball is detected in the through gate B67 at the timing when the right-handed game should not be played. , a notification to prompt the player to play the game with a left hand (for example, a notification outputting a sound such as "Please return to left hand", a leftward arrow and " The condition for canceling the setting change may be the execution of the notification that displays the comment "Please return to left-handed shooting." It should be noted that, when it is determined that the player is flowing down the right game area B303 at the timing when the right-handed game should not be played, the control for repeatedly outputting the voice such as "Please return to the left-handed game" (loop playback) will be described later. This is another form of control for setting a specific notification mode in the 63rd control example, and the shooting of the game ball to the right game area B303 is completed during the output of a voice such as "Please return to left-handed hitting". Later, the control to end the output of the voice such as "Please return to left-handed", which is executed after the end of the voice "Please return to left-handed" that is being output at the end of the output, is , is another form of control that is at least different from the control for setting a specific notification mode in the 63rd control example described later.
In the above-described 60th embodiment, a case has been described in which both the sound volume and the amount of light can be changed in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which only the volume can be changed, a state in which only the amount of light can be changed, and a state in which both the volume and the amount of light can be changed may be switchable. This switching may be performed by operating the frame button B22, or may be performed by the sound lamp control device B113 in accordance with the effect to be executed.

In the above-described 60th embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can grasp the volume and light intensity settings immediately before the volume and light intensity setting changes are canceled by the past light intensity display B7817 and the past volume display B7818. It is not limited to this. For example, the numerical value representing the difference between the current state and the previous set value may be notified by display such as "+1" or "-2" or by voice. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the operation necessary to restore the settings before the cancellation.
In the above-described 60th embodiment, a case has been described in which the setting of the sound volume and the amount of light is suggested before the setting is canceled, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the player is changing the setting of the volume or the amount of light, the settings before the setting change may be suggested. In this case, even if the player intentionally changes the setting, if the player does not like the change, the original setting can be easily restored. Therefore, it is possible to lower the hurdles for changing the volume and light intensity settings.
In the 61st embodiment, the display mode in which the interspersed frame button displays B8813 are united and materialized and the operation of the frame button B22 becomes effective has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, not as a display prompting the operation of the frame button B22 (regardless of whether or not the display is related to the operation), but as a rendering that indicates the elapsed time of the ending rendering, the semi-transparent frame button display B8813 is specified. It may be constructed so as to materialize with timing.
Further, for example, a semi-transparent single frame button display B8813 may be moved or stopped, and may be displayed so as to be switched between a semi-transparent state and a materialized state at a predetermined timing. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the frame button display B8813 will be materialized, so that the attention to the frame button display B8813 can be improved.

In the 61st embodiment, the timing at which the frame button display B8813 is materialized has been described as the operation timing for the frame button B22, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mark or a comment ("PUSH" or the like) that suggests the operation timing of the frame button B22 may be displayed in the oblong frame in which the time display B811 moves. In this case, the time display B811 can be used both for suggesting the end timing of the ending effect and for suggesting the operation timing of the frame button B22.
In the 61st embodiment, a case has been described in which the scattered frame button displays B8813 move away from each other after being united, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the frame button display B8813 is united and materialized, the frame button display B8813 may be controlled to disappear after the period during which the operation of the frame button B22 is valid.
In the above-described 61st embodiment, a case has been described where whether the frame button display B8813 is translucent or materialized corresponds to whether the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled or disabled, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, while the frame button display B8813 is materialized, a state in which the operation of the frame button B22 is disabled and a state in which the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled may be configured.
For example, the frame button display B8813 is displayed on the display screen immediately after the card forgetting prevention display effect is started while setting the timing of switching between enabling and disabling the operation of the frame button B22 in the same manner as in the 61st embodiment. may be configured to be materialized and displayed in the center of .

In the 61st embodiment, the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 are set as separators between the period during which the operation of the frame button B22 is disabled and the period during which the operation of the frame button B22 is enabled. However, this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, each of the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 is set such that the operation of the frame button B22 is valid, and the difference between the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 is set as the difference in the mode of presentation to be shifted by the operation of the frame button B22. can be
That is, when the frame button B22 is operated in the first period BT81, the screen shifts to an adjustment display screen in which the volume setting can be changed but the light amount setting cannot be changed. When operated, the screen shifts to an adjustment display screen in which both the volume setting and the light amount setting can be changed, and when the frame button B22 is operated in the third period BT83, the volume setting cannot be changed. Alternatively, the display may be shifted to an adjustment display screen that enables the setting change of the amount of light. Apart from this, the difference between the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 may be set as the difference in the effect display (animation to be displayed) to be shifted by the operation of the frame button B22.
In the 61st embodiment, the case where the periods BT81, BT82, and BT83 are set to have the same length has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The length of each period BT81, BT82, BT83 can be arbitrarily set, and the set contents can correspond to various conditions.
For example, the setting of the length of each period BT81, BT82, BT83 may be changed for each jackpot type. The BT82 may be set to be shortened by two periods.

In addition, especially in the case of jackpot types (maximum round jackpots and particularly intense (long) jackpots) where the sound volume and the amount of light are large, the second period BT82 is set to be longer so that the setting can be easily changed. You can In this case, if the first period BT81 is set short, it is possible to secure a long period for changing the settings of the sound volume and the amount of light in the ending effect, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.
In the above-described 61st embodiment, a case has been described in which it is possible to change the setting of the light amount and volume by operating the frame button B22 according to the display mode of the frame button display B8813, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by operating the frame button B22, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed.
In this case, the information that is beneficial to the player is, for example, whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the low probability state of the first symbol or the high probability state of the first symbol, in the same manner as described above. Information, information on whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game is a normal state, a time saving state, a variable probability state or a special variable state, and operation of the electric accessory B640a after a predetermined number of lotteries has passed after the end of the jackpot game. Information as to whether the pattern will change or not, information as to whether or not there is a jackpot ball among the currently reserved balls in the lottery of the first pattern, and the probability that the gaming machine will win the first pattern. (For example, you can change the jackpot probability of the low probability state to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and change the jackpot probability of the high probability state , 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2) can be changed), information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting is exemplified. .
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the balls roll in series on the bottom surfaces C142, C2142 of the first intermediate members C140, C2140, and the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portions Alternatively, the case where only one ball flows into the rolling parts C173, C2173, C3173) at the same time has been described, but two or more balls can roll in parallel on the bottom parts C142, C2142 of the first intermediate members C140, C2140, A configuration in which two or more balls flow into the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portions C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portions C173, C2173, C3173) at the same time may be employed.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the ball that flows down the area on the left side (the left side in FIG. 1478) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61). is flowed (entered) into the lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b, but instead of or in addition to this, the area on the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 1478) of the game area A configuration may also be adopted in which the ball that flows down flows into (enters) the lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, the case where one upper frame passage CRt0 communicates with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in has been described. They may be configured to communicate with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are returned to the first position by their own weight has been described. , may be applied as an assisting force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position. Alternatively, it may be applied as an assisting force when the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 are displaced to the second position. A coil spring, a torsion spring, a plate spring, etc. are exemplified as the biasing means.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the distribution members C170 and C2170 are directly supported by the shafts C192 and C2174, but the distribution members C170 and C2170 may be displaceable by a link mechanism. . In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the passage (fourth passage CRt2004) through which the balls that roll on the rolling portion C2173 of the distribution member C2170 pass is formed by the magnetic portion C2400. As with the other passages, the fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage through which the ball rolls along the rolling surface and passes (flows down).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line has been described, but it may be formed in a curved shape. Also, the shape may be a combination of a straight line and a curved line.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed to have a uniform arc shape (same curvature) when viewed from above, but this is not necessarily the case. Arc shapes having different radii may be combined and formed. For example, the curvature of the arc on one end side and the other end side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the arc portion C4122b is the curvature of the arc in the region between the one end side and the other end side (the region including the outflow surface C122a). It may be made larger than the curvature, that is, the curvature of the arc in the region including the outflow surface C122a may be made small. In this case, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof), the ball is made to reciprocate easily and the ball following the preceding ball While making it easier to catch up, the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is low (the ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is the arc portion C4122b is formed substantially horizontally, that is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction. It may be curved in an arcuate shape that protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D). Alternatively, it may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane similar to the pair of linear portions C4122a, or may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane different from the pair of linear portions C4122a. As a result, in the initial stage (the stage where the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof), it is easy to reciprocate the ball and the ball following the preceding ball While making it easier to catch up, the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is low (the ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (straight line portion C4122a and arc portion C4122b) is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction (arrow L direction) away from the notch portion C124a. good too. As a result, the ball is pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (facing side) of the notch portion C124a, and the ball rolls (reciprocates) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). can be made
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a so as to protrude vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends in the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C2122, and C4122, and facilitate the outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). .
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic portion C5400 is formed linearly in the width direction (arrow FB direction), but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400 may be curved in an arc shape. If the arc shape has a radius that is substantially the same as the radius of the sphere and is convex upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U), the contact area between the sphere and the magnetic portion C5400 can be increased, and the sphere Dropping before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the arc shape is convex downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D), it is possible to form a mode in which the sphere swings when flowing down, and there is a possibility that the sphere will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (fifth passage The possibility that CRt2005 cannot be reached) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the behavior of the ball and enhance the amusement of the game.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back surface member C2130 (that is, a surface that approaches the back surface member C2130 in the upward direction in the vertical direction). Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed as an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the back member C2130 (that is, a surface that separates from the back member C2130 toward the upper side in the vertical direction). As a result, the sphere attracted to the magnetic portion C6400 and the back member C2130 can be arranged at a position separated from each other, and the contact between the sphere flowing down along the magnetic portion C6400 and the back member C2130 can be suppressed. .

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the inclined surface (that is, It may be formed as a surface that approaches the side of the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 toward the bottom in the vertical direction). As a result, the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 and the back member C2130 can sandwich the ball flowing down along the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400, and the ball falls before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400. can be suppressed.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, in addition to the magnets C2300 arranged on the rear surface of the rear member C2130, the magnets C2300 may be additionally arranged vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D). When the added magnet C2300 is arranged vertically above the center of the sphere attracted to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 (in the direction of arrow U), the added magnet C2300 reduces the magnetic force acting on the sphere. Since the direction is the upper side in the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, when the added magnet C2300 is arranged vertically below the center of the sphere attracted to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 (in the direction of arrow D), the added magnet C2300 acts on the sphere. Since the magnetic force is oriented downward in the vertical direction, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130 may be formed so as to extend downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D). As a result, in addition to the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400, the effect of the magnetic force directly acting from the magnet C2300 can attract the ball, preventing the ball from falling before it moves to the downstream end of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. can be suppressed.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the magnetic forces of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 may have different strengths. For example, when the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 arranged on the upstream side is stronger than the magnetic force of the other magnets C2300, the balls that roll on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 are In other words, it can be easily guided to the fourth passage CRt2004. Also, for example, when the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 is weaker than the magnetic force of the other magnets C2300, the ball passing through the one magnet C2300 can be dropped from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. (possibility of not being able to reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. This makes it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the arrangement direction of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400 may be changed. For example, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side is inclined downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D) with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side. When arranged in a convex shape, the spheres flowing down along the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400 can be easily directed toward the magnet C2300 arranged on the downstream side, and the spheres fall from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400. can be suppressed. On the other hand, with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side is inclined upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow U). When arranged in a concave shape, the possibility that the spheres fall from the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 at the boundary between the upstream side and the downstream side of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that they cannot reach the fifth passage CRt2005) is reduced. can be high Also, the arrangement shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed linearly or may be formed in an arc shape. Also, instead of the magnet C2300, the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above shape (convex shape or concave shape, linear shape or circular arc shape).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the adjacent magnets C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400 may be spaced apart. In this case, it is possible to create a section in which the magnetic force is not applied to the sphere in the extending direction of the magnetic sections C2400, C5400, and C6400, and in this section, the sphere may fall from the magnetic sections C2400, C5400, and C6400 (fifth passage The possibility that CRt2005 cannot be reached) can be increased.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. The present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member D180 may be displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 are arranged at the initial position (first position), the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, and the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 are arranged at the second position. In the closed state, the displacement member D180 may be arranged in the closed position. In this case, when the ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the side where it is difficult for the ball to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, the first ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, and the second ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 until the first ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making it more difficult than when the first ball is dropped (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6.
When the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 The structure in which the displacement (rotation) from the initial position (first position) to the second position is transmitted to the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 is described above (the 68th to 75th embodiments). in the case of ) and in the opposite direction. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 are displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 move in the opposite direction to the above-described case. The positional relationship between the transmitting portions D173 and D3173 and the transmitted portions D193 and D3193 should be set so that the rotating portions D193 and D3193 are rotated.

Specifically, the transmitted portion D193 is extended in the direction away from the rolling member D170 (right side in FIG. 1525(a), arrow R direction), and the transmitting portion D173 is extended to above the transmitted portion D193. When the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting portion D173 pushes the transmitted portion D193 downward (in the direction of the arrow D) (that is, the 68th position). A configuration in which the transmission member D190 is rotated in a direction opposite to that in the embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 1525(a)) may be employed.
Further, the transmitted portion D3193 is extended toward the rolling member D170 (the left side in FIG. 1530(a), in the direction of the arrow L), and the transmitting portion D3173 is extended below the transmitted portion D3193. is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting portion D3173 pushes the transmitted portion D3193 upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, in the case of the 70th embodiment, A configuration in which the transmission member D3190 is rotated counterclockwise (clockwise in FIG. 1530(a)) may be employed.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 (rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or second rolling member D4220). displacement is transmitted to a pair of displacement members D180 by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190), two transmission members are provided, and one of the pair of displacement members D180 is transferred to the first The transmission member displaces the other by the second transmission member (the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170 or the second rolling member D4220 is displaced by the first transmission member and the second transmission member to displace the pair of displacement members D180). may be transmitted to one and the other).
In this case, for example, the displacement of the rolling member D170 may be transmitted by a first transmission member, and the displacement of the second rolling member D4220 may be transmitted by a second transmission member. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be diversified, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, in the sixth passage DRt6, the facing distance ( The interval in the direction of arrow FB) is constant along the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). A case has been described in which the facing distance (the distance in the direction of the arrows FB) between the tips and the imaginary plane (flat surface) is constant along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows UD). At least one of the intervals may be changed along the vertical direction.
For example, the facing distance may be narrowed upward (in the direction of arrow U, the direction away from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body portions D172, D3172)). . As a result, the balls bounced up from the upper surfaces (rolling surfaces) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (body parts D172, D3172) can be quickly lowered, and the weight of the balls can be easily applied. This technical idea is the same for the facing distance in the eighth passage DRt8.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the projections D131f and D141g project from the front surface of the main body portion D131 of the back members D130, D4130 and D8130 and from the rear surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate members D140 and D6140. As described above, the configuration may be such that recesses are formed in the front surface of the main body portion D131 of the back members D130, D4130 and D8130 and the rear surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate members D140 and D6140. The passage (rolling) of the ball can also be delayed by the recess.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions D131f and D141g were exemplified as delay means for delaying passage of the sphere, but other means may be adopted. As another means, for example, balls passing through (rolling on) the upper surfaces (rolling surfaces) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the main body portions D172, D3172, D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 can come into contact. Means (for example, a windmill, a metal elastic spring (leaf spring or coil spring), a resin elastic piece, a rubber sheet, etc.) that is disposed at a suitable position and is displaced or deformed by its contact is exemplified. That is, means for delaying passage of the ball using energy (kinetic energy or viscous resistance) generated by contact with the ball is exemplified.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, cases where the upper surfaces (rolling surfaces) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the main body portions D172, D3172, D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 are flat surfaces are described. However, the upper surface (rolling surface) may be provided with irregularities or steps. This provides resistance to the sphere, delaying its passage (rolling).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the sixth passage DRt6 (the pair of displacement members D180) Although a case has been described in which the ball is made easier to flow (enter) into the opposing space, the configuration may be reversed. That is, the initial position of the displacement member D180 is the open position, and when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position. Then, it may be made difficult for the ball to flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). In this case, the game state may be such that the inflow (ball entry) of the ball into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 is more advantageous than the inflow (ball entry) of the ball into the sixth passage DRt6.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 that transmit the displacement of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180 are provided. , the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190 and D7190 may be omitted. That is, the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 and the displacement member D180 (displacement member D180 unit) are directly connected, and the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is displaced. may be directly transmitted to the displacement member D180.
For example, the rolling members D170, D3170, 8170 or the second rolling member D4220 are provided with the grooves D194L, D194R of the transmission member D190 (body portion D194), and the grooves D194L, D194R are provided with the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210. Connect (pass through). As a result, the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, and D5190 are omitted, so the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, in the initial position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position), there is a A gap is formed in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) between the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 and the transmission portion D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and the weight portion of the transmission member D190. A case has been described in which no gap is formed in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) between D195 and the transmission portion D4223 of the second rolling member D4220, but these may be reversed.
That is, in the initial position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position), the vertical direction (arrow U- D direction) is not formed, between the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 and the transmission portion D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 and the transmission portion of the second rolling member D4220. A gap may be formed in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) between D4223.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the pair of displacement members D180 are rotatable has been described. good. Even with the slide-displacement configuration, it is possible to change the ease with which the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, thereby improving the interest of the game. Examples of the slide displacement mode include a mode of displacement along a straight line, a mode of displacement along a curved line, and a mode of displacement along a shape combining a straight line and a curved line.
This displacement mode is the same for the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and at least one of them (or all) may be slidably displaceable.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 can return to their initial positions by their own weight. Although the case has been described, an urging means for applying an urging force in the direction of returning to the initial position may be provided. If the return to the initial position can be performed quickly, the displaceable member D180 can be quickly arranged to the closed position, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Examples of the urging means include coil springs, leaf springs, torsion springs, and rubber-like elastic bodies.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where a pair of displacement members D180 are arranged has been described, but the number of displacement members D180 may be one, or three or more. Also good. That is, it suffices if the ease with which a ball flows (ball enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, it is possible to change the easiness of the ball flowing into the sixth passage DRt6 by changing the facing distance between the pair of displacement members D180. As described above, the configuration may be such that the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other is not changed. For example, one of the displacement members D180 and the other of the displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) in the same direction. D) may be displaced). That is, it suffices if the ease with which a ball flows (ball enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, one of the pair of displacement members D180 always interlocks with the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190, and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 is the transmission member D190, Although the case where the displacements of D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 are not interlocked for a predetermined period has been described, both of the pair of displacement members D180 are always interlocked with the displacements of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190. Alternatively, both of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured not to be interlocked with the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the protrusions D131f and D141g are continuously formed along the extending direction (vertical direction) has been described. It may be formed discontinuously (formed intermittently) along the vertical direction). It is possible to easily provide resistance to the upward bouncing of the ball. In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g may be arranged in a zigzag pattern along the extension direction (vertical direction). It is possible to more easily provide resistance to the upward bouncing of the ball.
Although not described in the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the main bodies of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). A restricting means may be provided for restricting movement of the balls that have fallen onto the upper surfaces of the portions D172 and D3172 in the direction opposite to the rolling direction (direction of arrow R) in the main portions D172 and D3172. The restricting means may be provided on any of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back members D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate members D140, D6140. Further, as the restricting means, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back members D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate members D140, D6140 are provided upright, and have a shape formed so as to be able to come into contact with the sphere. Sites are exemplified.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the balls that flowed (balled) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) Although the case where the ball is dropped onto the upper surface of D3172 has been described, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is the back member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member. A structure may be adopted in which the ball is dropped onto the upper surface of the portion (receiving portion) formed in D140, D6140, and the ball flows (rolls) from the receiving portion into the body portions D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. Since the bodies D172 and D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170 and D8170 can receive the ball when the impact of the drop has subsided (reduced), the displacement member D180 flutters ( vibration) can be suppressed.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged in parallel (arranged side by side) when viewed from above (as viewed in the direction of arrow D). , are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB)). In this case, the dimensions in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower frames D86b to D8086b can be suppressed. However, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) (that is, in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD)). (arranged at different positions) may also be used. In this case, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) preferably overlap when viewed from above (as viewed in the direction of arrow D). Accordingly, the dimensions of the lower frames D86b to D8086b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) can be reduced.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are arranged in parallel (arranged side by side) when viewed from above (as viewed in the direction of arrow D) has been described. The rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 may be arranged in series (arranged linearly along the longitudinal direction) when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the display portion D7197 is disposed on the main body portion D194 has been described, but the display portion D7197 is not necessarily limited to this, and the display portion D7197 is disposed on the weight portion D195. Also good. That is, the display portion D7197 may be arranged on the outer edge of the weight portion D195 and may extend from the outer edge of the weight portion D195 in a direction orthogonal to the axial direction of the axis D191.
In this case, the arrangement of the display part D9197 is reversed from that described above (the display part D7197 is made invisible to the player when the displacement member D180 is arranged in the closed position, and the displacement member D180 is opened). The amount of protrusion of the display portion D7197 can be maximized in a state of being placed in position. In addition, the weight of the display portion D7197 can be used to reduce (or omit) the amount of the metal weight embedded in the weight portion D195. can be planned.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the second protrusions D131fa are formed only on some (two in this embodiment) of the plurality of (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f , the number of second protrusions D131fa is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of second protrusions D131fa formed is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. The second protrusion D131fa may be formed on all of the plurality of protrusions D131f. Further, the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusion D131f that overlaps the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 when viewed from the front, and the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusion D131f that does not overlap the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 when viewed from the front. A portion D131fa may be formed.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the rolling member D8170 is arranged at the first position, the dimension by which the upper surface of the second projection D131fa protrudes from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is , the second protrusions D131fa located on the upstream side (the side farther from the axis D171) have larger dimensions, but this is not necessarily the case. Also good. Alternatively, the size of the second protrusion D131fa located downstream (closer to the axis D171) may be larger.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the position corresponding to between the curved portion E134a and the flow path adjusting block E170 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140 is , the upper surface of the rolling part E141 may be inclined downward toward the rear side (the direction of the arrow B). As a result, the possibility of throwing the ball reciprocating on the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be generated. Since the ball thrown to the fifth passage ERt5 may be guided to the seventh passage ERt7, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, the case where the rear wall E161a is formed in the construction passage E161 of the central passage E160 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. A front wall may be formed that stands vertically upward (in the direction of arrow F) from the edge of the front end side (in the direction of arrow F) of the passage E161. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball guided to the installation passage E161 from passing through the edge of the front end side of the installation passage E161 and flowing down (dropping) to the second slope portion E135. Therefore, the ball guided to the construction passage E161 can easily pass through the upper hole E162, that is, it can easily flow down the fourth passage ERt4 and enter the first winning port 64 (the probability of winning the first winning port 64 is increased). high) can be done.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, the case where the projecting portion E111b is provided on the front plate E111 has been described. . As a result, there is a possibility that the ball rolling on the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140 will be thrown to the first winning hole 64. As shown in FIG. That is, the probability that the ball rolling on the rolling part E141 will enter the first winning hole 64 can be increased.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the drive motor E191 drives the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passage E5150. , E17150 are displaced (reciprocated), and the elastic spring E2190 displaces (rotates) the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 in the 62nd to 103rd embodiments. Distribution passages E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second distribution passages E4150, E16150 and third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be displaced. As a result, the sorting passages E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passages E4150, E16150 and the third sorting passages E5150, E17150 move left and right (arrows In addition to being able to displace (reciprocate) in the LR direction), it can also be displaced (reciprocated) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, it moves (flows down) on the sorting passages E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passages E4150, E16150 and the third sorting passages E5150, E17150. , rolling) can be easily changed (changed) in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling). In addition, in the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, it is possible to prevent the balls from being sandwiched between the back plate E137 and the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second distribution passages E4150 are provided between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other. , E16150 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR), but this is not necessarily the case. E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, and a pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 may be arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where one pinion gear E196 is disposed between the first rack portion E194d of the first transmission member E194 and the second rack portion E195b of the second transmission member E195 is described. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a plurality of pinion gears may be arranged. In this case, by making the number of teeth of each pinion gear different, that is, acting as a speed reducer, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 engaged with the first transmission member E194. and second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) and distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and second The displacement speed of the sorting passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) can be made different. In addition, by disposing an even number of pinion gears, distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and second distribution passages E4150, E16150 that are engaged with the first transmission member E194. (third passage ERt3) and distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 engaged with second transmission member E195, and second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) can be the same displacement direction.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the grooves E133c, E9133c, and E10133c formed on both sides of the insertion holes E133a, E9133a, and E10133a in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR) have the same shape. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed in non-identical shapes. As a result, the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 are reciprocated in the left and right direction (arrow L-R direction), and in the top view, the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) It can be displaced in a manner of rotating as a rotating shaft. Specifically, with the engaged portion E153 (engagement concave portion E153a) as a rotation axis, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 are arranged on the curved portion E131 side and the central passage E160 side. It can be displaced in different directions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are divided into distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, and the second distribution passage E4150. , E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150. E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150, and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be formed in recesses formed in the upper surface thereof. Further, the recess may have a discontinuous outer edge, and the space formed between the projecting projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be the recess.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions E151 and E15151 are arranged in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150. In the eighty-seventh embodiment, the projection E12151 is formed in a spherical shape, and in the eighty-eighth embodiment, the projection E13151 is substantially rhombic (square) when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage E13150. In the eighty-ninth embodiment, the protrusion E14151 is formed in a circular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage E14150. It may be formed in a substantially polygonal shape such as a substantially heptagonal shape, or in a polygonal pyramid shape. Moreover, it may be formed in a cylindrical shape. Moreover, it may be formed in a shape that combines a straight line and a curved line. In addition, the inclination of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 with respect to the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 Although the case where the angles are formed to be the same has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the inclination angles of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be different from each other. For example, the inclination of the side surface formed on the upper surface of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 in the inclination direction downward direction By making the angle substantially orthogonal, it is possible to suppress the ball from being displaced (reverse flow, rolling) to the upward side in the inclination direction. Also, for example, the side surface formed on the upper surface of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 on the inclined direction downward side By making the inclination angle of is smaller than the inclination angle of the side surface formed on the ascending side in the inclination direction, the ball can be easily displaced (reversed or rolled) to the ascending side in the inclination direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, falling) of the ball is changed (changed), thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (the third passage ERt3) Although the case where a plurality of projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged in the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It should be arranged.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (the third passage ERt3) Although the case where the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged on the upper surface of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150 is not necessarily limited to this, , E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 (the third passage ERt3) may be provided with projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, respectively.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the protrusions on the upper surfaces of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 Although the arrangement intervals of E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 have been described as being constant, this is not necessarily the case. Each may be different. For example, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 are arranged in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) center side By increasing the arrangement intervals of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, the ball is more likely to hit the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 than when the ball is thrown to both ends in the front-rear direction. The number of contact times can be reduced. As a result, on the central side in the front-rear direction of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150, the ball moves along the inclination direction. easier to flow down. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to change (change) the flowing direction of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the central side of the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 in the front-rear direction is transferred to the construction passage E161 ( It is possible to facilitate guidance to the fourth passage ERt4). In addition, the distance (arrangement interval) between the projections E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be larger than approximately 1/4 of the diameter of the sphere, or may be smaller than approximately 1/4 of the diameter of the sphere. good. By increasing the distance between the opposing sides (arrangement interval), the upper surfaces of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 are moved. The ball can be brought into contact with the protrusions E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 in a state in which the falling speed of the ball (flowing down and rolling) is increased, and the movement (flowing down and rolling) direction of the ball can be changed. can be easily made visible to the player.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 are continuous. Although the case of being displaced continuously has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. E15150, the second distribution paths E4150, E16150, and the third distribution paths E5150, E17150 may be intermittently displaced. As a result, inertial force can be applied to the balls flowing down the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150, It is possible to change (change) the impact force when contacting the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, and to change (change) the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball in various ways.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passages E4150, E16150 and the third sorting passages E5150, E17150 are driven. Although the case of being driven by the motor E191 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be driven by a solenoid or elastic spring.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the driving force transmission member E193 is fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191, and the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, and E12150 are rotated by rotating the drive motor E191 in one direction. , E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150, and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 are reciprocated, but the driving direction of the drive motor E191 is not limited to this. , the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be reciprocated.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the ball can flow down to the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150. Although the case where the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are provided has been described, the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 prevent the ball from flowing down. Also good. As a result, the trailing ball can contact the leading ball whose flow is suppressed, and the trailing ball can change (change) the direction of flow. That is, the preceding ball whose flow is suppressed can exert the same effect as the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 on the following ball, and the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150 , E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150, the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed). In addition, the flow direction of the ball can be irregularly changed (changed). By contacting the preceding ball whose flowing down has been suppressed and the falling ball following it, the preceding ball can resume flowing down.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are divided into the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution The projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are formed at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surfaces of the passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150, and the projection height is approximately half the radius of the sphere. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. Sides of projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 against the upper surfaces of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second distribution passage E4150 and third distribution passage E5150 may be inclined more than 45 degrees or may be inclined less than 45 degrees. Also, the projection height of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed higher than approximately half the radius of the sphere, or lower than approximately half the radius of the sphere. may be formed. Inclination of side surfaces of projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 with respect to upper surfaces of sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second sorting passage E4150 and third sorting passage E5150 By increasing the angle or increasing the height of the protrusion, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 are moved ( The moving (flowing down, rolling) time of the sphere can be lengthened. On the other hand, the side surfaces of projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 against the upper surfaces of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second distribution passage E4150 and third distribution passage E5150 By reducing the inclination angle of or by lowering the height of the projection, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 The movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the moving (flowing down, rolling) ball can be lengthened. In addition, the balls get over the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, and the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150. can be easily moved (flowing down, rolling), and the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball can be diversified.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the regulation piece E153b is formed in the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage E4150 has been described. , the restriction piece E153b may not be formed. As a result, the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution paths E4150, E16150 can be displaced in the direction perpendicular to the inclined surface. More specifically, the weight of the ball flowing down (falling) acts on the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage E4150, and the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage E4150 are composed of first transmission members E194, E4194, E5194, second transmission members E195, E4195, E5195, third transmission members E4198 and fourth It can rotate around an engaging portion E194c that engages with the transmission member E4199. As a result, the inclination angles of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passages E4150, E16150 can be changed (varied), and the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150 , E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) can extend (change) the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the ball.
In the 62nd embodiment to the 103rd embodiment, the case where the notch E150a is formed in the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this However, the notch E150a may not be formed. Thereby, the number of protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 formed on the upper surface of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 can be increased. In addition, it is possible to easily throw the ball from the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), that is, to easily win the first prize opening 64 (first The probability of winning in the winning opening 64 is high.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 are the same. Although the case where it is formed in the mode has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. , E16150 may differ in the number of protrusions E151 or the spacing between them. As a result, the flow time and direction of the balls flowing down are made different between one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 each have the width of the game board E13. Although the case of being displaced in line (plane) symmetry (left and right symmetry in FIG. 1541) with respect to the center in the direction (left and right direction in FIG. 1541) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150 , E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 may be displaced asymmetrically. As a result, the flow time of the ball flowing down in one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) and the direction of flow can be changed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. As a result, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150 (the third passage ERt3) can be diversified.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 are displaced by the elastic spring E2190 has been described. In addition to E11150, the curved portion E131 and the wall plate E132 may be displaced by an elastic spring E2190. As a result, it is possible to change (change) the displacement speed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2). The movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in E3150, E11150 (third passage ERt3) can be varied.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 abut has been described. There is no need for contact between the lower surface of the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. In this case, by setting the distance between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the spheres form the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150. can be suppressed from flowing out from between
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the elastic spring E2190 is disposed between the plane portion E2133 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. An elastic spring E2190 may be provided between the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150. In this case, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in an extended state, and the contact state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 is maintained by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190. Alternatively, the distance between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 is kept smaller than the diameter of the sphere.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the elastic spring E2190 displaces the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. can be
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the flat portion E2133 and the distribution passages E2150 and E3150 are engaged by the support shaft E20j, the elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, and the elastic spring E2190 causes the distribution passage E2150 to rotate. , E3150 are displaced (rotated) upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the elastic spring E2190 may be configured as a torsion spring. In this case, the torsion spring may be engaged with the support shaft E20j, thereby suppressing the provision of the support projections E2133a and E2150a for engaging the elastic spring E2190. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the distribution passages E2150 and E3150 are rotated with the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as the rotation axis, and in the 86th embodiment, the distribution passage E11150 is rotated in the vertical direction. (Arrow UD direction) has been described as a rotation axis, but it is not necessarily limited to this. You may rotate as a rotation axis. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 can be easily moved in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction), and the change in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball can be easily performed. Can be diversified. As a result, it is possible to prevent monotonous changes in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the ball, thereby improving the interest of the game.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the support projections E2133a of the plane portion E2133 are formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction, and the support portion E2133b is formed closer to the central passage E160 than the support projections E2133a has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the support portions E2133b may be formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and the support projections E2133a may be formed closer to the central passage E160 than the support portions E2133b. Further, the support projections E2133a may be formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction and on the central side in the longitudinal direction of the support projections E2133a, and the support portions E2133b may be formed between the support projections E2133a in the longitudinal direction.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the protrusion E151 is arranged in the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (the third passage ERt3) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the protrusion E151 may not be provided. That is, the upper surfaces of the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (the third passage ERt3) may be formed flat. As a result, the player can easily predict the displacement of the ball flowing down (falling) from the sorting passage E150. In addition, even if the protrusion E151 is arranged in a part of the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (the third passage ERt3), and the projection E151 is not arranged in the remaining other portion good.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the second distribution passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the direction of inclination than the distribution passage E150 and is otherwise the same as the distribution passage E150 has been described. The length of the second distribution passage E4150 in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) may be longer than the length of the distribution passage E150 in the front-rear direction. As a result, the ball that has moved (flowed down or rolled) to the second distribution passage E4150 can be easily guided (thrown) to the interposed member E140.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the sorting passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the end portions of the second sorting passages E4150 and E16150 on the lower side in the inclination direction Although the description has been given of the case where the wall plate E132 is positioned closer to the wall plate E132 than the end on the descending direction, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be positioned closer to the upper hole E162 (central passage E160) than the end portion of the passage E150 on the lower side in the inclination direction. As a result, the balls that have flowed down (dropped) down the distribution passage E150 can be easily thrown to the second distribution passages E4150 and E16150, and the balls distributed to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be sent to the first winning port 64 ( (See FIG. 1541) to make it easier to win (increase the probability of winning to the first winning port 64).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are arranged at the fourth position, at least part of the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are viewed from above, and the central passage E160 , but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are all in the short direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from above, the center It may be arranged at a position overlapping the path E160. This makes it difficult to guide the ball thrown from the sorting passage E150 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are arranged at the fourth position, at least a portion of the third distribution passage E5150 overlaps the central passage E160 in top view. Although the case where it is arranged in the position has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are positioned closer to the interposition member than the central passage E160. It may be disposed on the E140 side (arrow F direction side). As a result, similarly to the case where the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged at the third position, the ball guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) is guided to the installation passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4). It is possible to make the player expect to be sorted out and to enhance the interest of the game.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, the sloped portion E7154 is formed in a straight line, and in the 83rd embodiment, the curved guide portion E8133d is curved in an arc shape. The slope portion E7154 may be curved in an arc shape, and the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed in a straight line. Also, the sloped portion E7154 or the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed in a shape combining a straight line and an arc.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the lower frame E9086b is formed in line (plane) symmetry (horizontal symmetry in FIG. 1541) with respect to the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1541) of the game board E13. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the lower frame E9086b may be formed asymmetrically. For example, the groove E9133c formed in one of the longitudinal directions (directions of arrows LR) of the base member E9130 is inclined toward the intervening member E140 (direction of arrow F) from the curved portion E131 toward the central passage E160. The groove E9133c formed on the other side of the base member E9130 in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) extends from the side of the central passage E160 to the side of the curved portion E131 toward the side of the intervening member E140 (direction of arrow F). ) may be inclined. For example, when viewed from the top, the grooves E9133c may be formed identically on one side and the other in the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows LR) of the base member E9130, and the mode of displacement of the distribution passage E150 may be identical.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the groove E10133c is formed in a shape in which curves are combined when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first slope E10133. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. It may be formed from a single curved line, or may be formed into a shape in which a straight line and a curved line are combined.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, guide portions E16154 and E17154 are erected on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150 except for the guide notches E16154a and E17154a. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed at least on a part of the outer edge. As a result, compared to the case where the guide portions E16154 and E17154 are not formed on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150, it is easier to win the first prize winning port 64 (to the first prize winning port 64 The probability of winning a prize can be increased), and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a protrusion may be formed on the rear surface of the wall portion F132 of the displacement member F130 or the upper surface of the rolling surface F131b. As a result, it is possible to delay the distribution (guiding) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface F131b (third passage FRt3) to the concave portion F131c.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the weight of the ball is used to move the lower frames F86b, F2086b, F3086b, and F4086b from the closed state to the open state, or from the open state to the closed state. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the lower frames F86b, F2086b, F3086b, and F4086b (blocking portions F143a of the fixed passages F140, F2140, and F3140) may be displaced (rotated) by the driving device. For example, a detection means is arranged in the displacement member F130, and the detection means detects that a ball is guided to the rolling surface F131b of the displacement member F130 or that the displacement member F130 is displaced (rotated), A driving device may be driven.
In addition, a camera, a weight sensor, a displacement sensor, a torque sensor, etc. are mentioned as a detection means. Further, for example, the solenoid pushes the slide main body portion F144a of the slide member F144 toward the center in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), or the drive motor rotates the opening/closing member F143, whereby the blocking portion F143a is opened. It is displaced (rotated).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 provided on one side displaces the blocking portions F143a of the fixed passages F140, F2140, and F3140 provided on the other side. Alternatively, the pair of blocking portions F143a may be displaced. For example, due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side), the blocking portions of the fixed passages F140, F2140, F3140 arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) The F143a may be displaced, or the pair of blocking portions F143a may be displaced.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the eccentric shaft F183c of the transmission shaft F183 is arranged eccentrically with respect to the axis of the transmission portion F183b (shaft portion F183a), and is circular about the axis of the transmission portion F183b. , the movable member F122 of the effect means F120 is moved (reciprocated in the vertical direction). member and pinion member), the movable member F122 may be operated.

In the above-mentioned 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a pair of cutoff portions F143a are provided for the fixed passages F140, F2140, and F3140. It may be arranged. For example, displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 provided on one side causes the blocking portion F143a to be displaced toward one side, and displacement (rotation) of the displacement member F130 provided on the other side causes the blocking portion By displacing F143a toward the other side, it is possible to increase the mode of displacement of the blocking portion F143a.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a ball that has flowed (entered) into the upper frame passages FRt0 and FRt50 may be thrown to the upper passages F114 and F5114 or the lower passages F112 and F5112. As a result, the balls are easily distributed to the lower passages F112 and F5112, and the player can further expect that the lower frames F86b, F2086b, F3086b, F4086b and F5086b will be operated in the open state.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the upper frame passages FRt0 and FRt50 are arranged in line (plane) symmetry with respect to the centers in the width direction of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013 and F5013. , may be arranged on the right side of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013, line (plane) symmetrical with respect to the center in the width direction of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013 respectively It may be arranged. Therefore, the balls that have flowed (entered) into the upper frame passages FRt0 and FRt50 from the game area are passed through the upper frame passages FRt0 and FRt50 arranged on the right side of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013 and F5013. It may flow (enter) into the first passages FRt1 and FRt51 arranged on the right side of F13, F2013, F3013, F4013 and F5013, and the left side of the game boards F13, F2013, F3013, F4013 and F5013. Or from one of the upper frame passages FRt0, FRt50 arranged on the right side to one of the first passages FRt1, FRt51 arranged on the left side or right side of the game board F13, F2013, F3013, F4013, F5013 It may be flowed into (entered ball).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, when the opening/closing member F2143 is illegally operated (displaced (rotated) in the opening direction), the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143 is suppressed. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the opening/closing member F2143 is illegally operated (displaced (rotated) in the opening direction), the displacement (sliding or rotating) is interlocked with the displacement (rotation) of the opening/closing member F2143, and the displacement member When the opening/closing member F2143 is displaced (rotated) by displacing the F130 by the weight of the ball, a predetermined member is provided upstream of the inlet FOPf1 so as not to be displaced without interlocking with the opening/closing member F2143. When the opening/closing member F2143 is illegally operated (displaced (rotated) in the opening direction), a predetermined member is displaced (slid or rotated), and the predetermined member makes it difficult for the ball to flow into the inlet FOPf1. You can

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the case where the weight of the ball is used to move the lower frame F5086b from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the opening/closing member F5158 of the displacement means F5150 may be displaced (rotated) by a driving device. For example, a detection means is disposed in the displacement member F5155, and the detection means detects that the ball is guided to the main body portion F5155d of the displacement member F5155 or that the displacement member F5155 is displaced (rotated), thereby driving the displacement member F5155. You can drive the device.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the engaged portion F5157d of the right slide member F5157R and the magnetic body F5164 of the maintaining means F5160 are magnetically attracted to each other, whereby the right slide member F5157R (right opening/closing member F5158R) operates. Although the case where (rotation, displacement) is restricted has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement of the slide member F5157 is restricted by projecting a solenoid between the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151 and the slide main body portion F5157a of the slide member F5157, and the magnetism of the slide main body portion F5157a. A body is provided, and the magnetic body is magnetized by an electromagnet provided in the restricting portion F5151a of the first bearing member F5151, so that the operation (rotation, displacement) of the right slide member F5157R (right opening/closing member F5158R) is performed. may be regulated.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments described above, the inertial force acting on the sphere CB51 is used to restart the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the sphere CB51 (holding by the holding portion F5155e is released). Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnetic body is disposed at a position below (above) the holding portion F5155e in the open state of the lower frame F5086b, and the repulsive force acting between the magnetic body and the sphere CB51 moves the sphere CB51 ( flowing down, rolling) may be restarted. Further, even if a driving device (for example, a solenoid or a driving motor) is provided on the lower frame F5086b and the ball CB51 is displaced by driving the driving device, the movement (falling down, rolling) of the ball CB51 is restarted. good.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the left displacement member F5155L and the right displacement member F5155R of the displacement member F5155 are configured to be able to receive balls at the same time (a ball can flow in from the second passage FRt52). Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, in a state in which the left displacement member F5155L and the right displacement member F5155R are configured to interlock, and one of the left displacement member F5155L or the right displacement member F5155R is arranged at a position (initial position) capable of receiving a ball. , and the other may be arranged at a position where the ball cannot be received (at the end of the displaceable range when the weight of the ball acts). That is, when one of the left displacement member F5155L and the right displacement member F5155R receives the ball, the weight of the ball displaces one of them toward the end of the displaceable range and moves the ball to a receiving position (initial position), and when the other placed in the position where the ball can be received (initial position) receives the ball, the other is displaced toward the end of the displaceable range due to the weight of the ball. and one is displaced toward a position (initial position) that can receive the sphere.
In this case, the opening/closing member F5158 (the left opening/closing member F5158L or the right opening/closing member F5158R) corresponding to the displacement member F5155 (one of the left displacement member F5155L or the right displacement member F5155R) arranged at a position (initial position) capable of receiving the ball One) is arranged at a position that makes it difficult for the ball to flow into the inlet FOP f51, and opens and closes corresponding to the displacement member F5155 (the other of the left displacement member F5155L and the right displacement member F5155R) arranged at the end of the displaceable range. The member F5158 (the other of the left opening/closing member F5158L and the right opening/closing member F5158R) is arranged at a position that facilitates the flow of the ball into the inlet FOPf51. However, the arrangement may be reversed.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the insertion holes F6162a1 and F6162a2 of the first passage member F6160 (first passage FRt61) are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). However, they are not necessarily limited to this, and they may be arranged side by side in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), for example, the insertion holes F6162a1 may be arranged side by side on both sides in the left-right direction from the insertion holes F6162a2. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball is flowing into the insertion hole F6162a1 or into the insertion hole F6162a2.
In this case, the lower passage F6112 (second passage FRt62) is inclined downward toward the front side (rear side). As a result, the ball flowing into the insertion hole F6162a1 on one side has a larger amount of displacement toward the front side (back side) than the ball flowing into the insertion hole F6162a2 on the one side. (Arrow F direction side), guided (fed) to the other upper passage F6114, and flowed into the insertion hole F6162a2, without passing through the front side (arrow F direction side) of the vertical wall portion F6113. It is guided (thrown) to the upper passage F6114 on one side.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the contact portion F6173b is arranged at a position where the ball can reciprocate between the first inclined portion F6114c and the second inclined portion F6114d of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63). may be set. As a result, the ball can reach the position where it can contact the contact portion F6173b a plurality of times, making it easier for the ball to flow into the inlet FOPf61.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, after the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b are operated, the first inclined portion F6114c is raised (moved toward the center in the left-right direction). ) The case where the sphere CB61 abuts against the curved surface F6173b1 of the abutting portion F6173b so that the sphere CB61 is distributed from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65) will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first inclined portion F6114c of the upper passage F6114 (third passage FRt63) is inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side), or an electromagnet is disposed on the rear plate F6151 of the rear member F6150, or By disposing a blower for blowing air toward the front side on the back plate F6151, the ball CB61 moves from the first inclined portion F6114c to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65). It may be distributed.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, a protrusion may be formed on the upper surface of the passage portion F6174a of the displacement passage member F6174 or the rolling surface F7181a1 of the second displacement passage F7180. As a result, it is possible to delay the outflow (flow down, discharge) of the ball from the passage portion F6174a or the rolling surface F7181a1.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the weight of the ball is used to move the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, F11086b from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, or from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state. Although the case of moving toward the state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. F6173 and F10173 may be displaced). For example, a detection means is disposed in the displacement passage member F6174 or the second displacement passage F7180, and the ball is guided to the passage portion F6174a of the displacement passage member F6174 or the rolling surface F7181a1 of the second displacement passage F7180, or the displacement passage The driving device may be driven when the detecting means detects that the member F6174 or the second displacement passage F7180 has been displaced (rotated).

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b are used as the maintaining means for maintaining the state of the distribution means F6170 in the post-operation state (regulating displacement). may be formed in As a result, when the ball flows out (flows down or is discharged) from the displacement passage member F6174, in other words, even in a state where the weight of the ball does not act on the displacement passage member F6174, the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b , F11086b can be maintained in the state after operation, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. For example, a magnetic body is provided on the bottom surface of the displacement passage member F6174, and an electromagnet is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the through hole F6143. Regulated.
In the case where such maintaining means are formed in the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b, displacement of the distributing means F6170 by the maintaining means is triggered by at least one ball flowing into the inlet FOP f61. Release means for releasing the regulation of the lower frame F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b may be formed. This ensures the flow of the ball into the inlet FOPf61. That is, until at least one ball is flowed into the inlet FOPf61, the player is given a sense of security, and the interest can be heightened.
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the displacement directions of the contact portions F6173b and F10173b in the operation of the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b from the post-operation state to the pre-operation state are: Although a case has been described in which the movement direction component of the ball CB61 that moves the first inclined portion F6114c toward the contact portions F6173b and F10173b is included, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The movement direction component of the ball CB61 that moves the first inclined portion F6114c toward the contact portions F6173b and F10173b may be included in the displacement direction of the contact portions F6173b and F10173b in the operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact portions F6173b and F10173b from being displaced to the disposition positions in the pre-operation state due to contact between the ball CB61 and the contact portions F6173b and F10173b. It is possible to reliably distribute to the fifth passage portion F6121 of the fifth passage member F6120 (fifth passage FRt65).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the lower frames F6086b, F7086b, F8086b, F9086b, F10086b, and F11086b move from the pre-operation state to the post-operation state, the displacement members F6173 and F10173 move along the first axis F6172. Although a case has been described in which the displacement members F6173 and F10173 are displaced toward both ends in the left-right direction (directions of arrows LR), the displacement members F6173 and F10173 are not necessarily limited to this. It may be rotated as an axis. This eliminates the need for a space for displacing the displacement members F6173 and F10173 in the left-right direction, thereby improving the degree of freedom in design.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor F11001 (or when the passage of the ball is detected and a predetermined condition is satisfied), the displacement member F6173 is driven by the driving force of the solenoid F11002. is displaced to change the ease with which the ball flows into the inlet FOPf61, but such a form may be applied to other embodiments.
For example, a predetermined position (for example, upstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (game area on the game board F13 (area where balls flow down)), or downstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (game area of the lower frame F86b ( A sensor F11001 is arranged in the area where the ball flows down), and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor F11001 (or when the passage of the ball is detected and a predetermined condition is satisfied), the driving force of the solenoid F11002 , the opening/closing member F143 may be displaced (opened or closed) to change the ease with which the ball flows into the inlet FOPf1 (make it easier or harder).
Further, for example, a predetermined position (for example, upstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (game area on the game board F13 (area where the ball flows down)), or downstream of the upper frame passage FRt0 (game of the lower frame F86b) A sensor F11001 is arranged in an area (an area in which the ball flows down), and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor F11001 (or when the passage of the ball is detected and a predetermined condition is satisfied), the solenoid F11002 is turned on. The driving force displaces (opens or closes) the suppressing portion F4134 (displacement member F4130) to change the ease with which balls flow into the second distribution hole F161b (the first distribution hole F161a, that is, the inlet FOPf1) ( You may make it easy to flow in or make it difficult to flow in).
In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the sensor F11001 is arranged in the insertion hole F6162a2, but the arrangement position can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be arranged in the insertion hole F6162a1.

In the 62nd to 103rd embodiments, the weight of the ball is used to displace a predetermined member, and the displacement of the predetermined member facilitates entry of another ball into the first inlet. , and as a result, another ball is likely to enter the second inlet, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the weight of the sphere may be used to displace a given member, such displacement of the given member making the other sphere "hard to enter" the first inlet, thereby causing the other sphere to may easily enter the second inflow port.
For example, when the first winning port 64 is arranged vertically below the outflow surface F112b of the fifth passage FRt5, and the weight of the ball acts on the displacement member F130, the opening/closing member F143 (blocking portion F143a) becomes the inflow port FOPf1. is displaced in the direction of closing (making it difficult for the sphere to flow in) is exemplified. According to such a configuration, the ball that does not flow into the inlet FOPf1 but flows out from the outflow surface F112b has a higher probability of entering the first winning port 64 than the ball that flows into the inlet FOPf1. That is, the weight of the ball is used to displace the displacement member F130, and the displacement of the displacement member F130 (closing of the inlet FOPf1 by the opening/closing member F143) makes it difficult for other balls to enter the inlet FOPf1. As a result, such another ball is made easier to enter the first winning hole 64 using the outflow surface F112b.
Further, for example, when the first winning port 64 is arranged vertically below the outflow surface F5112b of the fourth passage FRt54 and the weight of the ball acts on the displacement member F5130, the opening/closing member F5158 closes the inflow port FOPf51. A configuration that is displaced in a direction (which makes it difficult for the sphere to flow in) is exemplified. According to such a configuration, the ball that does not flow into the inlet FOPf51 but flows out from the outflow surface F5112b has a higher probability of entering the first winning port 64 than the ball that flows into the inlet FOPf51. That is, the weight of the ball is used to displace the displacement member F5130, and the displacement of the displacement member F5130 (closing of the inlet FOPf51 by the opening/closing member F5158) makes it difficult for other balls to enter the inlet FOPf51. As a result, such another ball is made easier to enter the first winning hole 64 using the outflow surface F5112b.
Further, for example, when the first winning port 64 is arranged vertically below the outlet FOPout 62 and the weight of the ball acts on the displacement passage member F6174, the displacement member F6173 cannot act (contact) the ball. direction (in a state where the weight of the ball does not act on the displacement passage member F6174, the displacement member F6173 is placed at a position where it can act (abut) on the ball (the displacement member F6173 protrudes from the upper surface of the upper passage F6114 ) form is exemplified.According to this form, the probability that the ball that does not flow into the inflow port FOPf61 but flows out from the outflow port FOPout62 enters the first winning port 64 is higher than the ball that has flowed into the inflow port FOPf61. That is, the weight of the ball is used to displace the displacement passage member F6174, and the displacement of the displacement passage member F6174 (avoiding the movement direction of another ball that abuts on the displacement member F6173 from being changed) ) makes it difficult for other balls to enter the inflow port FOPf61.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the appearance of the winning unit K200 changes according to the state of the first electric accessory K240 and the second electric accessory K250 of the winning unit K200 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the appearance of the winning unit K200 may be changed by changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit K228 of the winning unit K200 or the intensity of the light.
At this time, the color of the light emitted from the light emitting part K228 of the winning unit K200 and the intensity of the light are changed so as to correspond to the state of the first electric accessory K240 and the second electric accessory K250 of the winning unit K200. Alternatively, the color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit K228 and the intensity of the light may be changed regardless of the state of the first electric accessory K240 or the second electric accessory K250. You can
For example, the light is enhanced when the electric accessory K640a of the first electric accessory K240 is in the open state, or the light is enhanced when the movable plate K251 of the second electric accessory K250 is in the open state. You can also make it weaker.
In addition, the color and intensity of the light emitted from the light emitting unit K228 of the winning unit K200 are controlled to change when the ball enters the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a. Also good. In this case, the difference in appearance of the winning unit K200 makes it possible to recognize the winning of the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the diffusion shape is formed on the back side of the plate-like main body K202 of the winning unit K200 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the back side surface or the front and back surfaces of the plate-like main body K202 may be formed smoothly. In this case, since the transparency of the plate-like main body K202 can be improved, the ball flowing down in the winning unit K200, the electric accessory K640a of the first electric accessory K240, and the movable plate of the second electric accessory K250 Visibility of K251 etc. can be improved.
In each of the above embodiments, the light from the light emitting unit K228 is explained as not being blocked by the ball rolling on the electric accessory K640a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting part K228 may be arranged behind the path of the ball rolling on the electric accessory K640a or behind the path of the ball rolling on the movable plate K251. In this case, the light from the light emitting part K228 may be blocked by a ball rolling on the electric accessory K640a or a ball rolling on the movable plate K251.
As a result, when the lighting of the light emitting unit K228 is controlled, the light can be visually recognized as if it were blinking, and the appearance of the light from the light emitting unit K228 can be changed. At this time, the blinking light of the ball rolling on the electric accessory K640a can suggest that the ball will enter the second prize-winning slot K640, while the blinking light of the ball rolling on the movable plate K251 can be suggested. Therefore, it can be suggested that the ball can pass leftward on the movable plate K251 without entering the second specific winning hole K650a.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 are colored and opaque has been described, but they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 may be made of a colored transparent resin material. In this case, it is possible to easily change the visual mode of the winning unit K200 by the light passing through the electric accessary K640a or the movable plate K251 while maintaining the effect of being visually superimposed on the decorative cover K220. At least one of the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 may be made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Even in this case, it is possible to easily change the viewing mode of the winning unit K200 by the light passing through the electric accessory K640a or the movable plate K251.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light reflected from the movable plate K251 can be visually recognized through the upper edge K207a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light reflected from the electric accessory K640a is reflected at a position different from that of the electric accessory K640a so that the player can recognize the state of the electric accessory K640a. may be provided separately.
The reflecting section may be arranged inside the winning unit K200, or may be arranged outside the winning unit K200. In this case, the state of the electric accessory K640a can be grasped by visually recognizing a position different from the winning unit K200. Also, the functional portion of the upper edge K207a may be arranged outside the winning unit K200 instead of inside the winning unit K200.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the electric accessary K640a and the movable plate K251 slide in the front-rear direction and the surface shown to the player side does not change has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to rotate in the front-rear direction about a rotation shaft along the left-right direction. In this case, since the surface (front surface) shown to the player in the closed state and the surface shown to the player in the open state (rear surface in the closed state, top surface in the open state) are different, the front and back surfaces are made different. By changing the color (eg, changing the color), the background color of the decorative cover K220 (small design K221b, etc.) can be changed depending on whether it is open or closed.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the electric accessory K640a and the movable plate K251 are formed in red has been described. Alternatively, any color other than red, such as blue or yellow, can be used. Moreover, the color of the small design K221b is not limited to white, and any color such as gold or yellow can be adopted. Regardless of which color is adopted, it is possible to configure the case where it becomes the background color of the small design K221b and the case where it does not, and the appearance of the small design K221b can be changed. At this time, it is possible to improve the presentation effect by selecting colors that are relatively easy to distinguish.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the vertical displacement of the lifting device K500 is increased with respect to the displacement of the rotary member K430, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the displacement amount of the lifting device K500 may match the displacement amount of the rotating member K430. In this case, the operation of the lifting device K500 can be made more stable.
In each of the above-described embodiments, it has been described that the switching device K460 restricts the lowering of the right component of the lifting device K500, thereby allowing the lifting device K500 to fall on one side in an inclined posture with the right side downward. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lifting device K500 may shift from the tilted posture in which the right side is downward to the second tilted posture in which the left side is downward by displacing the left component to the drop position state. In this case, it may be controlled to change from the effect waiting state to the second tilted posture, or may be controlled to change to the second tilted posture via the one-sided falling state. The former can make the state change by the lifting device K500 more conspicuous, while the latter can make it easier to stabilize the attitude of the lifting device K500 after the state change.
In the above-described embodiments, the rotational speed of the rotary decorative member K578 is kept constant regardless of the direction, and the horizontal sliding speed of the moving device K560 is controlled to vary. do not have. For example, at least one of the rotating speed of the rotary decorative member K578 and the sliding speed of the moving device K560 in the horizontal direction may be controlled so as to change in accordance with the direction.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation control is performed when the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K578 is within a predetermined design value, but the operation control of the rotary decorative member K578 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K578 does not fall within a predetermined design value, an error signal is not issued so that the performance accessory is not executed. The rotation speed of the drive motor KMT51 may be newly calculated, and the moving device K560 may be slid in the left-right direction at the newly calculated rotation speed. As a result, the stop position after rotation of the rotary decorative member K578 can be easily associated with the stop position after movement of the moving device K560, and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K578 is within a predetermined design value. As in the case, interlocking can be appropriately performed.

Instead of recalculating the speed, control may be performed so that the timing of stopping the rotary decorative member K578 can be shifted from the timing of stopping the sliding movement of the moving device K560.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the lifting operation of the lifting device K500 and the operation of the state changing device K470 occur based on the operation of the common rotating member K430 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lifting operation of the lifting device K500 and the operation of the state changing device K470 may be controlled so that they are driven by different drive devices.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the arm member K735 rotates in the second movable device K701 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable rack that slides in the vertical direction may be constructed, and the amount of elevation of this movable rack may be transmitted to the main decorative member K760. In this case, the horizontal width can be suppressed by the movable rack.
In each of the above-described embodiments, in the second movable device K701, the arc-shaped portions K732 and K734 are in surface contact to suppress the rotation of the arm member K735, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable stopper member that can be arranged at a position to stop the arm member K735 at an intermediate position may be provided. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the stopper member, it is possible to configure a case where the arm member K735 is easily stopped in the middle and a case where the arm member K735 is not stopped halfway.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the third movable device K801, the rotation of the extending rotating member K874 is started from a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the extending rotating member K874 is along the left-right direction. It is not something that can be done. For example, the extended rotary member K874 may be oriented in a posture in which the longitudinal direction faces upward. In this case, the rotation angle until the longitudinal direction of the extended rotary member K874 faces downward can be increased.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the third movable device K801 is configured so that the plate-like portions K811, K821, and K831 do not return by suppressing excessive rotation of the extended rotating member K874. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the width of the long hole K884 in the lateral direction is sufficiently secured to secure a gap between it and the cylindrical protrusion K876a, or the meat portion of the cylindrical protrusion K876a on the rotation shaft side is shaved so that the long hole K884 Interference between the cylindrical projection K876a and the long hole K884 may be avoided by securing a clearance or providing an arc-shaped portion along the movement locus of the cylindrical projection K876a at the tip of the long hole K884.
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the extended rotating member K874 stops in contact with the surface at the end of rotation in the third movable device K801, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that it stops when the cylindrical projection K876a is housed in the recess at the end of rotation.
In each of the above-described embodiments, an example of the inclination angles of the external inclined portion K2060e of the base plate K2060, the inclined opening portion K2060w, the inclined surface K2121 of the light irradiation device K2100, the inclined surface K3122 of the light irradiation device K3100, and the like is described. However, the shape is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the light is refracted or reflected so that the light reaches an object to be illuminated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light emitting means K2111 and K3111 are arranged along the curved line has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, they may be arranged on a straight line extending in a predetermined direction such as left and right or up and down.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the light from the light emitting means K2111 and K3111 travels to the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed so that the light travels toward the inside of the game area. In this case, since the game area can be illuminated by light from a range that is hidden in front view (a range outside the game area), the game area can be made brighter.
In each of the embodiments described above, light is reflected or refracted at the inclined opening K2060w before passing through the opening of the base plate K2060 and travels to the front side, but the light is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after passing through the opening of the base plate K2060, the light may be reflected or refracted at the edge of the slanted opening K2060w so as to propagate to the front side. Also, an object capable of reflecting or refracting light is placed in the opening of the base plate K2060, and the object changes the traveling direction of light in the opening of the base plate K2060 so that the light travels to the front side. can be In this case, light can be delivered to the player from locations other than the opening edge of the base plate K2060.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the driving force transmission mechanism has been described for each of the first movable devices K401 and K4401, the second movable devices K701 and K4701, and the rear layer side movable devices K800 and K4800, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, it is possible to divert the transmission mechanism of one device to the transmission mechanism of another device. In this case, it is of course possible to change the left-right direction to the up-down direction, and it is also possible to use only one of the left-right pair, or vice versa.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first visual target K4580x and the second visual target K4580y have different shapes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be visually recognized as objects having the same shape.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the outer shape of the rotary decorative member K4578 is a quadrangle, but the outer shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be hexagonal or octagonal. In this case, by using a polygon whose center can be specified, it is possible to make the viewing mode beautiful when rotated. Further, the shape may not be a polygon as long as the shape can be specified as the center, and the shape may be a curved line.
Also, the visible object is not limited to the displayed object. For example, an object accommodated inside the moving device K4560 or supplied to the moving device K4560 from the outside (for example, a path via the elongated device K540) can be visually recognized through the viewing window K4578a (rotating decoration (rear position of member K4578) at an appropriate timing.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the visual recognition window K4578a is formed in the rotary decorative member K4578 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display area of the display device K4580 inside the inner circumference of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be configured to display a visual recognition portion where the first visual object K4580x and the second visual object K4580y can be visually recognized. .

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the viewing window portion K4578a is formed as an opening has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate thickness of the range formed as the viewing window portion K4578a may be made thinner than the plate thickness of other portions to increase the transparency so that the rear side can be viewed.
In each of the above-described embodiments, in the first effect control example and the second effect control example in which the viewing window portion K4578a is rotationally moved, the case where the rotation angle in one direction is 90 degrees has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, an angle larger than 90 degrees (for example, 120 degrees) or an angle smaller than 90 degrees may be used. In this case, the rotation angle may be changed according to the speed of the falling ball.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first visual target K4580x is arranged on the right side of the rotation axis of the rotary decorative member K4578 and the second visual target K4580y is arranged on the left side of the rotary shaft of the rotary decorative member K4578 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be left-right reversed, or they may be arranged above and below the rotating shaft. In any case, the different visual objects K4580x and K4580y can be visually recognized at different positions that are diametrically opposite to each other with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary decorative member K4578. .
In each of the above-described embodiments, the third effect control example in which an arrow shape pointing to the right is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 and the first effect use example were described separately, but these are executed simultaneously. may be executed separately or independently. In the case of simultaneous execution, during the round game, the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated each time an entering ball is detected, and an arrow shape is lit displayed near the center of the display device K4580, and when the round game ends. You may make it perform the control in the 1st production use example. This makes it possible to complicate the visibility of the inner side of the rotating decorative member K4578.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first visual target K4580x or the second visual target K4580y is displayed via the display device K4580 and the case where the arrow shape is displayed are described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of displaying the first visual target K4580x or the second visual target K4580y, an arrow shape may be displayed, or instead of displaying the arrow shape, the first visual target K4580x or the second visual target An object K4580y may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the viewing mode.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first visual target object K4580x or the second visual target object K4580y is displayed via the display device K4580, and the case where the arrow shape is displayed have been described. It is not limited to this. For example, if the inside of the moving device K4560 is formed in a cavity, and the rotary decorative member K4578 (or the permeable plate that closes the inner peripheral side of the rotary decorative member K4578) is formed inside the cavity, the transparency An object having a shape similar to that of the first visual target K4580x and the second visual target K4580y may be arranged at a position visible through the plate. In this case, the presentation effect can be improved by the change in the visual recognition mode due to the collision of the objects.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the elongated device K540 is tilted about the rotation axis in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the posture can be tilted around the rotation axis in the horizontal direction or the rotation axis in the vertical direction. In this case, it is possible to change the appearance (viewing angle) of the front sides of the moving devices K560 and K4560, thereby improving the performance effect.
Further, for example, in the case where the posture is tilted about the rotation axis in the vertical direction, even if it is possible to configure the posture such that the plane KS49 formed by the transparent film K4891 and the longitudinal direction of the long device K540 are parallel to each other. good.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the upper rotary member K476 supports the curved receiving portion K537 of the upper member K530 from below so that the elongated device K540 is maintained in the standby state for presentation, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, apart from the upper rotating member K476, a member may be configured to support the upper member K530 so as to sandwich it from above. By applying a biasing force toward the upper rotating member K476 to this member, it is possible to generate a resistance force against the upward displacement of the upper member K530. As a result, it is possible to prevent the positional change of the elongate device K540 during transportation.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the entire upper rotating member K476 is made of a resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation tip K476b that contacts the upper member K530 may be made of a resin material, and the vicinity of the support hole K476a that does not contact the upper member K530 may be made of a metal material. As a result, durability can be improved by the metal material, and wear of the upper member K530 that abuts on the rotating tip K476b can be minimized.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the rotary decorative member K4578 has been described as having an opening formed in the center, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary decorative member K4578 may be made of a light-transmissive resin material in such a shape as to close the inner opening, and may be configured to cover the display area of the display device K4580 from the front side. In this case, since the change in visibility due to the reflection of light caused by the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be applied to the entire display area of the display device K4580, the effect can be improved.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where an arrow shape is displayed on the display device K4580 in response to winning of a game ball has been described, but the content displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 is limited to the above-described mode. not a thing For example, a flow of spherical bodies may be displayed in the display area of the display device K4580.

This spherical body may be displayed so as to flow down directly below the center of the display area of the display device K4580, or may be displayed so as to flow down in a position shifted to the left or right with respect to the center of the display area. By making the position shifted to the left and right to flow down, it is possible to inform the player of the visual mode suggesting the direction. In addition, the flow down of the spherical bodies includes the case where the spherical bodies roll on the rolling surface.
In this case, the speed of the spherical body flowing down either the left or the right may differ from the speed of the spherical body flowing down the other right or left immediately after that. For example, the speed of the spherical body flowing down on the left may be displayed so as to be slower than that of the spherical body flowing down on the right.
The flowing direction of the spheres displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 may be directly downward or may be a direction having left and right components. For example, when a spherical body flowing down the right side is displayed to flow downward to the right, and a spherical body flowing down the left side is displayed to flow downward to the left, a spherical body flowing down the right side of the display area is displayed. It is possible to increase the difference in the visual recognition mode of the display area from the case of flowing down the left side of the.
Further, as a setting for controlling the rotational drive of the rotary decorative member K4578, control may be performed so that the position where the spherical body displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 flows down corresponds to the rotational direction of the rotary decorative member K4578. .

For example, when the spherical body flows down to the right of the left-right center of the display area of the display device K4580, the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the left-hand side of the left-right center of the display area of the display device K4580 is the spherical body. The rotating decorative member K4578 may be rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the relationship between the flowing direction of the spherical body and the rotating direction of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be set to the reverse of the above.
In this case, even if the display area of the display device K4580 is not visually recognized, it is possible to predict where in the display area of the display device K4580 the spherical body is flowing down from the rotating direction of the rotary decorative member K4578. Therefore, it is not necessary to forcibly increase the display area of the display device K4580, so that the display device K4580 can be mounted at low cost, and the third pattern display device K81 arranged on the back side of the display device K4580 can be visually recognized. A large area can be secured.
In this case, the flow speed of the spheres may correspond to the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. For example, the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be slow when the spherical bodies flow down slowly, and the rotary speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be high when the spherical bodies flow down at high speed. . As a result, the player can visually recognize an operation mode with a sense of unity between the display area of the display device K4580 and the rotary decorative member K4578.
Also, the display mode of the display area of the display device K4580 may be made different between when the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotating and when it is stopped. For example, as described above, when the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated, the flowing spherical body is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580, while when the rotary decorative member K4578 is stopped, the display device A logo, character, or decorative shape having a different shape from the sphere flowing down to the display area of the K4580 may be displayed as a still image. Alternatively, it may be configured to display moving images instead of still images.

In this case, the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 do not involve a viewing mode in which the spherical bodies flow down to the display area of the display device K4580, and a mode in which the spherical bodies flow down to the display area of the display device K4580. Since it is possible to create a visual recognition mode, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the display device K4580 and the rotary decorative member K4578.
In addition, the position, speed, and direction of flow of the spherical body displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 are made to correspond to the position of the game area through which the game ball actually passed, the actual flow speed, and the actual flow direction. You can do it.
For example, during a right-handed game, the long device K540 is controlled to assume the right second inclined posture, and a first specific winning opening K65a and a second winning opening are arranged on the path along which the right-handed game ball flows down. Based on detection that the game ball has passed through K640 and the second specific winning hole K650a, control may be performed so that a spherical body is displayed in the display area of the display device K4580.
In this case, by displaying the spherical bodies corresponding to the actual arrangement of the winning openings and the actual flowing direction of the game balls that entered the winning openings, the game balls actually flowed down to the player. It can be made easier to grasp the position.

That is, when a game ball is detected in the first specific winning hole K65a, each time it is detected, it flows vertically downward in the right range of the display area of the display device K4580, and then flows diagonally downward to the right. At the path, a sphere is displayed and at the same time the rotating decorative member K4578 is driven to rotate clockwise.
Also, when the game ball is detected in the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a, each time it is detected, it flows vertically downward in the left range of the display area of the display device K4580, and then A spherical body is displayed on the route that flows diagonally downward to the left, and at the same time, the rotating decorative member K4578 is driven to rotate counterclockwise.
As a result, the player can see where the game ball flows by visually recognizing the display mode of the display device K4580 and the rotation direction of the rotary decorative member K4578 without paying attention to the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a. Since it is possible to grasp which winning opening K65a, K640, K650a the player has passed through, the game burden on the player can be reduced.
From the arrangement height of the winning openings K65a, K640, K650a, the flow speed of the game ball is considered based on the mechanical energy, and it is found that the falling speed of the game ball when passing through the winning openings K65a, K640 having the same height is The absolute values are considered to be approximately the same. The absolute value of the flow velocity of the game ball when passing through the second specific prize winning opening K650a, which is located at a low height, is the same as that of the game ball when passing through the winning openings K65a and K640, because the potential energy is converted into kinetic energy. It is considered to be larger than the absolute value of the flow velocity.

Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the first specific winning opening K65a or the second winning opening K640, the absolute value of the flowing speed of the spherical body displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member Compared to the absolute value of the rotation speed of K4578, the absolute value of the flow speed of the spherical body displayed in the display area of the display device K4580 when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the second specific winning hole K650a. and the absolute value of the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 is controlled to increase (high speed).
As a result, when the game ball passes through the second winning hole K640 and when the game ball passes through the second specific winning hole K650a, the display position of the spherical body in the display area of the display device K4580 and the rotation decorative member K4578 Even if the direction of rotation is the same, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed through the second winning opening K640 or the second specific winning opening K650a by allowing the player to grasp the flowing speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not the player has passed through.
Therefore, even if the player does not pay attention to the prize winning openings K65a, K640, K650a, the player can visually recognize the display mode of the display device K4580 and the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578, thereby determining where the game ball flows. As a result, it is possible to grasp which winning opening K65a, K640, K650a the player has passed through, thereby reducing the burden on the player.
In each of the above-described embodiments, as a third effect control example, an arrow shape is displayed on the display device K4580 each time a ball is detected to enter the first specific winning hole K65a, and the rotary decorative member K4578 rotates clockwise. Although a case has been described in which the display mode and the rotational motion mode are not constant and are controlled to be variable, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

That is, in the third effect control example, compared to the speed of the spherical body displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous entry of the game ball and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578, the subsequent entry of the game ball Based on the sphere, the speed of the sphere displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 are controlled to be the same or higher.
As a result, as the number of balls entered into the first specific prize-winning hole K65a increases, the falling speed of the spherical body displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 tend to increase. can. Furthermore, as the number of balls entered into the first specific winning hole K65a increases, the number of numerical displays such as "+15" displayed on the third symbol display device K81, which reminds of the payout of prize balls, increases. , the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 and the display (number) of the numerical display can be visually recognized in series.
Therefore, the player can ascertain the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole K65a in association with the falling speed of the spheres displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be easily predicted from the flowing speed of the spherical body displayed on the display device K4580 and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578. Attention to the member K4578 can be improved.
In addition, in the third effect control example, the flow speed of the spherical body displayed on the display device K4580 based on the previous entry of the game ball and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 are compared with the entry of the subsequent game ball. Based on this, the amount of change (increase in speed) in the flowing speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 displayed on the display device K4580 may be the same each time, or may be different.

For example, when five speeds from the first stage (slow speed) to the fifth stage (high speed) can be set as the flowing speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578, the above game ball If the falling speed of the spherical body and the rotational speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 based on the entry of the game ball are the first stage, the flowing speed of the spherical body and the rotational speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 based on the subsequent entry of the game ball are Not only the pattern that changes to the second stage, but also the pattern that changes to the third to fifth stages may be configured to be executable.
In this case, for example, when the next ball enters the ball before the displayed spherical body has completely flowed down the display device K4580 (two balls have entered continuously in a short time), the flowing speed and rotation of the spherical body The rotational speed of the decorative member K4578 increased by one step, and the next ball hit before the spherical body displayed based on the next ball flowed down the display device K4580 (three balls in a row in a short time When the ball enters the ball, the falling speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be increased by two stages. In this case, it is possible for the player to grasp that a high frequency of ball entry has occurred from the changes in the flowing speed of the spherical body and the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578.
In the above-described third effect control example, the display of the display device K4580 is switched based on the ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a, and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated. It is not limited to this. For example, a ball that is not entered into the first specific winning hole K65a and is not entered into the second specific winning hole K650a by flowing leftward on the upper surface of the movable plate K251 of the second electric accessory K250, The display on the display device K4580 may be switched and the rotary decorative member K4578 may be rotated when the ball hits the ball guiding portion K210 on the left side.
The ball guiding portion K210 on the right side has the same function as the out hole K71, while the ball guiding portion K210 on the left side has the same function as the general winning hole K63. . That is, similarly to the ball entering the left ball guide portion K210, also when the ball enters the general winning hole K63, the display on the display device K4580 is switched and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated.

In this case, the display on the display device K4580 and the rotating operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 can make the player aware of the existence of the ball that has flowed downstream without entering the first specific winning hole K65a. The player can be urged to review the operation of the operating handle H51, such as whether the ball is being shot when the opening/closing plate K65b is in the closed state, and whether the ball shooting intensity is appropriate.
In other words, under the condition that all the shot balls enter the first specific winning hole K65a, the display of the display device K4580 is not switched and the rotary decorative member K4578 does not rotate, while the first specific winning is performed. Under the condition that part of the shot ball does not enter the mouth K65a, the display of the display device K4580 is switched, and the rotating decorative member K4578 is also rotated.
As a result, the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 can be used as a barometer for informing the player whether the ball is properly entered into the first specific winning hole K65a. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the decorative member K4578.
In the above-described third effect control example, the display of the display device K4580 is switched based on the ball entering the first specific winning hole K65a, and the rotating decorative member K4578 is rotated. It is not limited to this. For example, when the ball enters the left ball guide portion K210, the display of the display device K4580 is not switched and the rotary decorative member K4578 does not rotate. is switched to rotate the rotary decorative member K4578.

In this case, due to the display on the display device K4580 and the rotating operation of the rotary decorative member K4578, the player is not guided to the right side of the first specific winning opening K65a, that is, the upper side of the rotary decorative member K4578, and is rotated. Since the presence of the ball guided to the left side of the decorative member K4578 and flowing can be noticed, the player can be urged to reconsider the operation of the operation handle H51, such as whether or not the shooting strength of the ball is weakened.
That is, when the game ball continues to flow down to the right at the upstream position of the rotary decorative member K4578, the switching of the display of the display device K4580 and the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 are not executed. When even one game ball flows down the position on the upstream side of the rotary decorative member K4578 to the left, the switching of the display of the display device K4580 and the rotary operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be executed.
Therefore, when switching the display of the display device K4580 or rotating the rotary decorative member K4578 is executed, the shooting intensity is weakened to such an extent that the game ball flows leftward at the upstream position of the rotary decorative member K4578. Since this serves as evidence, it is possible to urge the player who sees the display on the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 to reconsider the operation strength of the operation handle H51.
As a result, the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 can be used as a barometer for informing the player whether the ball is properly entered into the first specific winning hole K65a. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the decorative member K4578.

In addition, in the above-described third effect control example, the display of the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 are explained based on the entry of the game ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the display of the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 may occur regardless of the entry of the game ball.
In this case, the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 may be configured to be increased based on the operation (push, repeat, long press, etc.) of the operation button member H181. For example, if the rotation speed of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be set to five speeds from the first step (slow speed) to the fifth step (high speed), the operation button H181 is operated to which step the speed is increased. (upper limit of increase) and the expected value of profit that the player can obtain (the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot won), the jackpot expectation of the special lottery, etc.) By doing so, the willingness to operate the operation button member H181 can be improved.
It should be noted that the setting of the upper limit of the increase described above is based on the display of the display device K4580 and the rotational movement of the rotary decorative member K4578 based on the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole K65a. It may be applied to the upper limit of rotation speed increase of K4578. Thereby, attention to the display device K4580 and the rotating decorative member K4578 can be improved.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the spherical body is displayed near the center of the display device K4580 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spherical body may be viewed through the viewing window K4578a of the rotary decorative member K4578. In this case, for example, the spherical body may be configured to rotate along with the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578. As a result, the movement mode of the spherical body can be composed of a large arc.

Further, for example, the movement mode of the spherical body is maintained such that it flows down in an oblique left-right direction after flowing down in an up-down direction, but the viewing window part K4578a is arranged in the passage path of the ball flowing down in an oblique left-right direction. The rotating decorative member K4578 may be stopped after being rotated. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the spherical body as a display and the rotating decorative member K4578 as if they are operating integrally.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the visibility of the small design K221b is improved due to the difference from the background color in the open state of the electric accessory K640a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the visibility of the small design K221b in the closed state of the electric accessory K640a may be improved. For example, there is a downstream side light-emitting portion K212c as an LED that emits light that can be visually recognized by the player who visually recognizes it in the directional view KDR21. Similar to the open state of the object K640a, the background color of the small design K221b can be set to red (color of light), thereby improving the visibility of the small design K221b.
In the open state of the electric accessory K640a, light from the downstream side light-emitting part K212c is transmitted through the electric accessory K640a and reaches the player's eyes. For example, the electric accessory K640a may block the light from the downstream side light emitting section K212c.
In this case, every time the state of the electric accessory K640a is switched, switching between the case where the background color by the electric accessory K640a is visually recognized and the case where the background color by the light from the downstream side light emitting unit K212c is visually recognized is switched. , and effects using changes in viewing mode due to differences in background colors. As a result, it is possible to generate a change (variation) in the visual recognition mode corresponding to the switching mode of the state of the electric accessory K640a.

Although the case where the visibility of the small design K221b is improved by the light from the downstream side light emitting section K212c has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the color of the light from the downstream side light emitting unit K212c is white, the difference between the color of the small design K221b and the background color (light color) is reduced, thereby reducing the distinguishability of the small design K221b. can be made
In addition, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit K212 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the winning unit K200 may be lit (turned off) at all times regardless of whether it is opened or closed, or it may be controlled to change the mode (color change, light intensity change) upon detection of an incoming ball. In association with the display effect of the third pattern display device K81, the control may be such that the mode is changed (color change, light intensity change).
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the appearance of the light changes depending on how the light is blocked by the ball that has landed in the winning unit K200, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of detection sensors may be provided in the flow path, and control may be performed so that the light irradiation mode is changed based on the passage of the sphere through the detection sensors. In this case, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light even in a portion other than the flow-down path of the sphere.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the movable plate K251 and the electric accessory K640a are formed from a colored resin material, so that the stickiness and durability peculiar to the colored resin can be utilized. Although a case has been described in which damage due to collision from a ball can be suppressed by improving durability while improving strength, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be made of a colorless and transparent resin material. In this case, even if the ball overlaps with the movable plate K251 or the electric accessory K640a, the ball will not disappear, so the visibility of the falling ball can be improved.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the small design K221b is arranged in front of the position where the ball flows down while tilting downward in the horizontal direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, like the guide opening K203, it may be arranged in front of the position where the ball flows down while tilting downward in the front-rear direction. In this case, the change in the vertical position of the sphere is slower than when it falls in the vertical direction, and the horizontal position of the sphere does not change. It is possible to change the appearance of the pattern by the small design K221b for a long time.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the inclined forming portion K867 of the rear-layer-side movable device K800 is configured as a fixed piece has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be movable several degrees in the rotational direction of the extended rotary member K874 and to be able to change the phase when the extended rotary member K874 is stopped. In this case, there is a state in which the extended rotating member K874 is prevented from returning (a state in which the inclined portion K867 is arranged above the rotating shaft of the extending rotating member K874), and a state in which the extending rotating member K874 is prevented from returning. It is possible to switch between a state in which the inclination forming portion K867 is arranged below the rotating shaft of the extended rotating member K874.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are configured to be able to protrude from the left and right by the same distance, and when closed, the opposing sides of the left and right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are arranged near the left-right center position. Although a case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the boundary positions of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 on the left and right sides may be arranged to shift left or right from the central portion.
In this case, if the boundary position is to the left of the left-right central portion, the second movable device K4701 is arranged below the range opened and closed by the right plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, and the boundary position is the left-right central portion. , the second movable device K4701 is arranged below the range opened and closed by the left plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831 and the second movable device K4701 can be improved.

In each of the embodiments described above, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are configured to be able to transmit light from the rear surface, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an electrical board is arranged on the back side of the plate-shaped parts K4811, K4821, and K4831, and the viewing mode (color or pattern) may be configured to be changeable. In this case, the opening and closing can facilitate the act of forming the blindfold of the third pattern display device K81.
In each of the embodiments described above, ribs are formed on the back side of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 to vary the permeability, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the back sides of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be curved to make the thickness uneven. In this case, the shape of the back side (for example, the shape of the lens) allows the light to be refracted differently for each part, thereby improving the performance effect.
Also, in the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, a case has been described in which ribs are formed along the outline KOL481 (the ribs are formed in the inner portion), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, ribs may be formed along the contours of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, K4831. In this case, ribs may be formed not only along the entire outline, but also along two parallel sides. Movement resistance of the shaped portions K4811, K4821, K4831 can be reduced.
In each of the embodiments described above, the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are made of a light-transmitting resin material, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, an openable/closable member having a plurality of louvers in a rectangular frame may be arranged. In this case, if the louver is formed from an impermeable material, depending on the state of the louver, the pattern on the plate surface of the louver can be visually recognized, and the third pattern arranged on the back side from between the plates of the louver. It is possible to switch between a state in which the display of the display device K81 is visually recognized.

Also, if the louver is made of a transparent material, depending on the state of the louver, the pattern on the plate surface of the louver can be illuminated with the light from the third pattern display device K81, or from the space between the plates of the louver to the back side. It is possible to switch between the state in which the display of the third symbol display device K81 arranged in the .
In each of the above-described embodiments, the plate-like members K4811, K4821, and K4831 that slide leftward and rightward are described as a case where a plurality of plate-like members are interlocked in series, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of plate-like members that slide left and right may be one. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility of failure as compared with the interlocking configuration.
Also, the sliding direction of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction, the oblique direction, or a direction having a front-back direction component. That is, it may be in a straight line direction or in a curved direction centering on a predetermined axis.
In each of the above embodiments, when the moving device K4560 is obliquely slid, the right end of the long device K540 is dropped and moved based on the displacement of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 from the closed state. Although the case where the moving direction of the device K4560 changes has been described, in this case, the moving speed of the moving device K4560 may be the same before and after the change of the moving direction, or may be changed. For example, when the moving speed of the moving device K4560 is made slower before the moving direction is changed, the period until the moving device K4560 moves to the left end is lengthened while the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are desired to be displaced. Therefore, attention to the moving device K4560 can be improved.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the pair of right and left plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 move in symmetrical directions, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be vertical. In this case, it may be symmetrical in the vertical direction, or it may be constructed such that it can be retracted by moving both upward (or downward) while the arrangement position remains the same. Also, the movement direction may have a component in the front-rear direction.
The size of the moving device K4560 in each of the above embodiments is not limited at all. It can be arbitrarily set from a size of about 10 mm in diameter to a size exceeding the center frame K86.
Moreover, the display by the display device K4580 is not limited at all. It may be displayed in the same color on one side, or may be formed in a form (mirror shape, etc.) that is visually recognized so as to reflect light to the player side. In this case, the player can visually recognize his or her facial expression through the display area of the display device K4580, and the performance effect can be improved.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving device K4560 slides alone has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of moving devices K4560 may be arranged side by side in the front and rear, and the plurality of moving devices K4560 may slide in order on the front sides of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831. In this case, it is possible to increase the variations of the displacement modes of the plurality of moving devices K4560 accompanying the displacement of the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831, and it is possible to increase the variation of the viewing modes of the moving devices K4560.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third pattern display device K81 is arranged inside the center frame K86 when viewed from the front has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least part of the display area of the third pattern display device K81 may be positioned outside the center frame K86. In this case, the falling game ball can be illuminated with the light from the third symbol display device K81 to improve the performance effect.
In each of the above-described embodiments, as a manner of visually recognizing a series, for example, a manner of visually recognizing symbols having a specific meaning such as "SFME" in order has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, there is no need to use four characters, and arbitrary character strings such as "SF", "SME", and "FE" may be focused on and visually recognized as a series. Moreover, the symbol "F" formed on the upper decorative member K330 can also be used for the arbitrary character string. By illuminating the part to be noticed and not illuminating the other part, it is possible to easily draw attention to an arbitrary character string and prevent the player from misreading it.
Also, two or more directional symbols (for example, arrows) may be connected and visually recognized among the symbols. Further, it is also possible to visually recognize the interlocking movement of moving in the direction of approaching or moving away from each other as the connection between the movable accessories, not the connection between the symbols. In this case, one of them may be stopped.
For example, the second back display K81b has been described as a display parallel to the tilt of the elongated device K540. It may be displayed as an arrow pointing to the right, and the display may be switched to the tilting direction in conjunction with the operation of the elongate device K540. As a result, it is possible to present the second rear display K81b before the operation of the elongated device K540.

In addition, for example, the manner in which objects of the same type are visually recognized in series may include a visual manner in which objects of the same type are collectively visually recognized and a visual manner in which related visual manners are visually recognized so as to divide them into separate regions. For example, when the elongated device K540 is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device K81 and the displays in the regions sandwiching the elongated device K540 are related to each other, they are visually recognized in a series of visual modes.
In addition, the mutually related displays are, for example, a set of displays visually recognized in a series of visual modes (for example, a group of symbols, adults, each other, etc.), or displays having a facing relationship (for example, men and women, A pair of friends and foes, winning and losing, etc.) is assumed.
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case in which patterns are formed on the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pattern may be formed on the front side of the elongated device K540. In this case, the pattern formed on the front side of the elongated device K540 and the patterns formed on the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 may be configured to be visually recognizable in a series of visual patterns.
In addition, the visible range of the elongated device K540 may change depending on the arrangement and posture of the elongated device K540 itself, as well as the range hidden by the moving device K4560. It may be configured such that a series of visual recognition modes to be visually recognized can be switched according to the arrangement of the mobile device K4560.

Further, due to the arrangement of the elongated device K540, even when the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visually recognized only above or below the elongated device K540, the plate-shaped portions are also visible on both the upper side and the lower side of the elongated device K540. Although it is possible that the portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are visible, at least one of the patterns formed on the front side of the elongated device K540 and the pattern formed on the plate-like portions K4811, K4821, and K4831 are different. It may be configured to be visible in a series of visual recognition modes.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the effect displays KER471 and KER472 are formed in a shadow shape that is range-displayed so as to surround a part of the circumference of the second movable device K4701 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the visual recognition mode of the second movable device K4701 when viewed from the front may be displayed as a moving image. In this case, even if the second movable device K4701 stops working due to a failure of the second movable device K4701, the operation mode of the second movable device K4701 can be visually recognized by the display of the third symbol display device K81. Moreover, unlike the case of operating the second movable device K4701, there is an advantage that no drive sound or vibration occurs.
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the operation units arranged in the operation unit K4300 and the pattern formed in the winning unit K200 can be visually recognized in a series of visual aspects, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, on the front side of the left decoration device K350, a pattern that can be visually recognized in a series of patterns formed on the operation units arranged in the operation unit K4300 may be formed. The pattern formed on the arranged operation unit, the pattern formed on the winning unit K200, and the pattern formed on the second winning unit K5270 may be configured to be visible in a series of visual recognition modes. This makes it possible to expand the area that can be viewed in a series of viewing modes.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the plate-like portions K4811, 4821, and 4831 are formed to have a length covering the upper and lower display areas of the third pattern display device K81, and are interlocked with the operations of the plate-like portions K4811, 4821, and 4831 to extend the length. Although the case where device K540 operates has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right plate-like portions K4811, 4821, 4831 are formed so as to be able to cover the area above or below the elongated device K540 in a particular tilted posture (i.e., under the elongated device K540 in a tilted posture). The triangle formed on the side may be constructed from a shape that forms the whole in the closed state).

In this case, on the side where the left and right plate-shaped portions K4811, 4821, and 4831 are not disposed across the elongated device K540, by performing moving image display in the display area of the third pattern display device K81, the moving device K4560 Moving image display corresponding to slide movement can be executed.
In this case, the left and right plate-like portions K4811, 4821, and 4831 are placed on the opposite side of the elongated device K540 so that the display of the third pattern display device K81 can be visually recognized. , 4821, and 4831 in the direction crossing the longitudinal direction of the elongate device K540 may be shortened. As a result, moving image display corresponding to the sliding movement of the moving device K4560 can be performed even in the area on the opposite side of the elongated device K540 with the left and right plate-like portions K4811, 4821, and 4831 interposed therebetween.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotary decorative member K4578 is rotated corresponding to the detected position of the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating operation of the rotary decorative member K4578 is assumed to be the first effect control example described in the first effect application example for the clockwise operation, and the counterclockwise operation described in the first effect application example. It is good also as an example of 2 production|presentation control. As a result, even if game balls flow down frequently, the rotation of the rotary decorative member K4578 can be generated in small steps. In addition, display control is performed so that the first visual target object K4580 is visually recognized through the visual recognition window K4578a at the reversal position of the operation in the first production control example and the second production control example.
Although the light refracting portion K5151 that refracts the light incident on the light guide member K5150 to the front side has been described in each of the above embodiments, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light refracting portion may be formed on the back surface of the base plate K5060, and light incident on the base plate K5060 may be refracted to the front side using the refracting portion. In this case, the position at which the refracted light is visually recognized can be located on the front side of the light guide member K5150, so that the player can easily recognize the refracted light.

In addition, since the light refracting portion is provided on the base plate K5060 itself, light refraction occurs even in a range where the light guide member K5150 cannot be provided by fastening and fixing the gutter front side member K91 to the back side of the base plate K5060. It can produce dramatic effects.
It should be noted that the arrangement of the light refracting portions may be designed not only for the purpose of visually recognizing light in a series of visual recognition modes, but also for the purpose of drawing attention to a specific position. For example, the light refracting part K5151 is arranged so that the light visually recognized through the light refracting part K5151 illuminates the vicinity of the winning openings such as the first winning opening K64 and the first specific winning opening K65a, the through gate K67, the winning unit K200, etc. may be placed.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the decorative cover K5280 is configured so that the symbols in Romaji can be visually recognized, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a numerical symbol may be configured to be visible. In this case, if a number such as "80%" is associated with the game performance (for example, specification display), the game performance can be notified through the glass unit H16 before the player plays the game.
On top of that, when the game ball flows down the back of the decorative cover K5280, a shadow is generated, and the appearance of the numerical symbols changes (for example, the left corner of the upper and lower center is seen darkly, and the appearance is "30% ), it is possible to make a numerical notification that can be grasped only after starting the game.

For example, "80%" that was seen at the beginning is the probability variable ratio of the jackpot of the first special symbol where the lottery is started at the first winning hole K64 where the ball can be entered when playing a left-handed game that does not flow down the decorative cover K5280 side. , and "30%" that can be seen when the ball flows down the back side of the decorative cover K5280 in a right-handed game is a second special symbol where the lottery starts at the second winning opening K640 that can be entered in a right-handed game. If the ratio of the highest round jackpot among the jackpots is indicated, it is possible to make effective use of changes in visually recognized numbers to provide meaningful information to the player.
As with the third contoured portion K5285 and the third formation portion K5286, the "%" is formed at a position that does not overlap the ball's flow-down path when viewed from the front. can be visually recognized in the visual recognition mode.
In addition, in the above-mentioned "80%", in the area surrounded by the outline, "value for setting 6" is formed in small white characters, and the game ball is placed on the back of the decorative cover K5280. White light may be applied to the white characters to make them difficult to recognize while they do not flow down, and the white characters may be recognized by the shadow of the game balls when the game balls flow down the back of the decorative cover K5280. good. The content of the notification is that "Setting 6 and other settings can be selected, but the rate is 80% when setting 6, and other settings are not mentioned." In this case, the contents notified from the beginning are common at "80% in the case of setting 6", but before the ball is shot with the right hand, the part of "in the case of setting 6" is made difficult to see. , the gaming machine can be attractively decorated regardless of whether it is after or before the setting is determined.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the decorative cover K5280 is arranged in front of the curved path formed by the flow path forming member K5271, and the pattern is formed at the position overlapping the flowing sphere, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the decorative cover K5280 may be arranged on the front side of the range in which the game ball can freely fall without forming a flow-down path. In this case, it is possible to shorten the period in which the falling spheres and the pattern of the decorative cover K5280 overlap, so that the visibility of the pattern can be easily maintained.

In addition, although the flow path formed by the flow path forming member K5271 is configured as a curved path in which a plurality of straight paths inclined in the left-right direction are combined, the flow path is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the route may include a curved portion, or the flow-down route may be composed only of curved lines.
Moreover, the flow-down route may have a portion extending in the front-rear direction (inclined toward the front-rear direction). In this case, the displacement of the falling game ball in a front view can be slowed down, so that the period in which the game ball overlaps the pattern of the decorative cover K5280 can be lengthened.
In each of the embodiments described above, the non-transmissive forming portion K5282a is formed in a rectangular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in the shape of an arrow, or may be formed in any other symbol. As a result, the player can be notified of the meaning of the symbols, and the burden of playing the game on the player can be reduced.
Also, although the non-transmissive forming portion K5282a has been described as one that does not transmit light, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, although the transparency is lower than that of the forming portion K5282, it may be made to transmit light instead of being non-transmissive. As a result, it is possible to perform a light effect using the non-transmissive forming portion K5282a.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the decorative cover K5280 is fixed on the front side of the flow path forming member K5271 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the decorative cover K5280 is configured to rotate clockwise about the vicinity of the lower left end of the first outline portion K5281, so that the pattern is arranged in front of the spherical flow path and the pattern is positioned in the spherical flow path. A state in which the vehicle is retracted from the front of the road may be configured. Thereby, the visibility of the ball flowing down by the flow path forming member K5271 can be switched.
In this case, the entire pattern may be rotated, or a portion of the pattern may be rotated. For example, only the changing regions K5282b and K5284b below the non-changing regions K5282c and K5284c are rotated, and the positions of the non-changing regions K5282c and K5284c and the changing regions K5282b and K5284b above the non-changing regions K5282c and K5284c are maintained. Also good. In this case, the position of the pattern in the non-change areas K5282c and K5284c can be made unchanged regardless of the rotation operation, and the notification by the non-change areas K5282c and K5284c can be always performed.
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the cosmetic cover K5280 is arranged in front of the spherical flow path without branching has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be branched at the downstream end of the second inclined portion K5274. In this case, the impermeable forming part K5282a may be arranged in front of all the branched flow paths, or the impermeable forming part K5282a may be arranged in front of one branched flow path and the other branched flow path. The non-transmissive formation portion K5282a may not be arranged on the front side of the . In the latter case, the player can easily recognize which branch flow path the ball has flowed down by visually recognizing that the shadow of the ball overlaps with the non-transmissive forming portion K5282a.
In each of the above embodiments, the first outline portion K5281 is used as a representative example, and various specifications are made to maintain the visibility of the game ball passing behind, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, similar identification may be made for the large design K221a and the small design K221b. In this case, when the ball flows down the winning unit K200, it is possible to produce the same effect as described for the first outline portion K5281.

Various technical ideas described in this specification may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.
In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:
Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.
<47th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1746 to 1798. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above in that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and voice lamp control is performed. The difference is that the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the device 113 are partially modified. Also, part of the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110, part of the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and part of the control contents executed by the display control device 114 are It is different in that it has been changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times of the special symbol lottery) satisfies the predetermined condition (reaching 500 times), the privilege (second In addition, in a part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (lost), the time-saving pattern is won and the second time-saving state is set. . That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, there are two types of game states (second time-saving state) that make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the normal state even if the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot. It was configured to be configurable on the occasion of
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example is configured not to win the time-saving symbol in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol executed during the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol) It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above in that the ceiling privilege (second time saving state) is set based on the number of symbol lotteries reaching 900 times.
In addition, in the present 47th control example, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) , Variable state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), second time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns, state with electric sapo) can be set. When the second time saving state is set, the probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol is the same as the normal state, but it is normal so that it is easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is released in the normal pattern winning game executed when the variation time of the normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) for showing the result of the pattern lottery is shortened and the winning is won in the normal pattern lottery. The period during which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 relatively easily) is made longer.
The first time-saving state and the variable probability state are set after the end of the jackpot game executed when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, and the second time-saving state is the jackpot win in the special pattern low-probability state. It is configured to be set when the special symbol lottery is executed 900 times continuously, and once the variable state is set, until the next big hit is won (actually, 10,000 special symbol lotteries). is executed) The probability variable state continues, and if the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are set, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times (until the end condition is met) Each time-saving It is configured so that the state continues. And when the end conditions of a 1st time saving state and a 2nd time saving state are satisfied, it comprises so that a normal state may be set.

In other words, winning a jackpot with a high probability in the special symbol lottery, and the probability variable state that makes it easy to execute the special symbol lottery is the most advantageous game state for the player, and then the first time saving state and the second time saving state are the same. It is constructed so that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
Here, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot (jackets A, B) in which the variable probability state is set and the short-time jackpot (jackpot C) in which the time-saving state is set according to the type of jackpot obtained. , and is configured to be set, and the stop display mode of the identification information (third pattern) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery that won the jackpot (the type of the third pattern that is aligned with the pattern ), the jackpot type won this time can be suggested to the player. Specifically, when odd-numbered symbols are displayed as the third symbol type and are stopped, it is notified that the probability variable jackpot has been won, and when even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed, the time-saving jackpot or the probability variable jackpot. It is configured to notify that the winner has won any of the above.
By configuring in this way, at the timing when the jackpot pattern (the third pattern with matching patterns) is stopped and displayed (timing before the jackpot game is executed), the game state set after the jackpot game ends. It is possible for the player to predict, and the player is interested not only in the stop display of the third symbol in a display mode indicating that the big win has been won, but also in the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed. can be given, and the production effect can be enhanced.
Here, when the normal state is set, that is, when the most disadvantageous game state for the player is set as the game state, the jackpot is won regardless of the jackpot type. Many prize balls can be obtained during the game, and a game state (probability variable state or first time reduction state) more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, Regardless of the third symbol type, the game is performed with the aim of stopping the stop display mode of the third symbol with matching symbols. When the most advantageous game state continues until the next big win game is executed, the degree of advantage after the big win game ends largely differs depending on the set big win type.

Specifically, when the time-saving jackpot is won in a state in which the variable probability state is set, after the jackpot game ends, the game state (variable probability state) that was set before the jackpot game is executed A time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and when winning a variable probability jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the degree of advantage is the same as the game state (variable probability state) set before the execution of the jackpot game. A probability change state is set.
In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which the winning of the jackpot itself can result in a game result disadvantageous to the player depending on the type of the set jackpot, the game state continues to be advantageous to the player until the next jackpot is won. Even in this case, if a production mode that mainly suggests whether or not to win a jackpot is set in the variable production for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a probability variable In the case of winning the time-saving jackpot during the state, the production to expect the jackpot winning (the production to suggest that the three third symbols are aligned) is executed, and the second game is displayed in a stop display mode to indicate the jackpot winning. After the three symbols are stopped and displayed, a display mode for congratulating the player is displayed, which causes the player's motivation to play to decrease.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example, the effect mode of the variable effect executed when the same big win type jackpot (time saving jackpot) is won is set to the current game situation (set It is configured so that it can be switched and set based on the game state). Specifically, when the normal state is set, as the production mode of the variable production, even if the time-saving jackpot is won, the production mode that makes you expect to win the jackpot (three third patterns are aligned) ) is set, and when the probability variable state is set, as a production mode of the variable production, if you win the time-saving jackpot, you can expect the winning to be missed (three third patterns are It is configured to set a production that suggests that it does not match).
In this way, even when the same type of jackpot is won, the special pattern lottery can be configured to set a performance mode in which the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is different according to the set game state. To make it easy for a player to grasp whether or not the type of the jackpot won this time is advantageous to the player in the current game situation when the jackpot win is won, and when the player wins the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the performance for congratulating the player.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present 47th control example is configured to be able to set the second time saving state as a ceiling privilege when the special symbol lottery is executed 900 times in the normal state, and the second time saving During the state, the second special symbol lottery is made easier to execute than in the normal state. The second special symbol lottery is constructed so that a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (a lottery that makes it easy to win a big win with a large number of rounds when a big win is won) is executed.
Then, when the remaining number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is less than a predetermined number of times (10 times), the possibility of a time-saving jackpot among the variable effects (reach effects) in the reach mode. A ready-to-win performance in which a performance mode (a performance to suggest that the three third patterns are not aligned) that expects a winning failure as a ready-to-win performance by a certain even number pattern is set is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game result will be more advantageous to the player if the jackpot is not won.
Further, conventionally, a plurality of decorative patterns (third patterns) can be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and the third patterns can be changed. There is known a pachinko machine 10 capable of notifying the player of the result of the special symbol lottery in the display mode (stop display mode) of the third symbol that is statically displayed after being displayed (dynamic display). In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, a variable time of a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) is determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and until the variable time elapses (variation display period), multiple By variably displaying the third pattern in various performance modes, a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery is executed before the stop display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. It is common to
Here, as an effect mode of the variable effect that is generally executed, as a stop display mode of the identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery is executed by the combination of the three third symbols that are stopped and displayed. It is configured so that a stop display mode indicating the result is displayed, and when the third symbols of the same type (third symbols with the same numbers) are displayed side by side (a specific stop display mode is displayed) In the pachinko machine 10, which indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (hit winning) advantageous to the player, one of the three third symbols displayed in a variable manner is the third symbol. In a state (so-called ready-to-win state) in which two third symbols excluding the symbols are stop-displayed in a specific stop display mode, the remaining one third pattern is stop-displayed at a position in which the specific stop display mode is achieved. It is configured to be able to execute an effect mode (ready effect) to incite whether or not.

In particular, in recent years, it is possible to randomly determine one effect mode from a plurality of types of effect modes as the effect mode of the variable effect. A pachinko machine 10 that suppresses the player from getting bored with the game has become mainstream.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, since the effect mode of the variable effect is determined at random, the same effect mode may be determined when the ready-to-win effect is continuously executed. . In addition, since the effect mode of the variable effect is determined at random, the variable effect is executed in all the effect modes that can be executed, and the player may get bored with the game early. rice field.
On the other hand, in the forty-seventh control example, when the effect modes of the continuously executed variable effects (the first variable effect and the second variable effect) all satisfy the specific conditions, the variation of the specific effect mode The production is configured to be executable. Specifically, when the variable performance satisfying the conditions for executing the ready-to-win performance is continuously executed, a specific performance mode can be set as the performance mode of the second variable performance. By configuring in this way, even when a situation occurs in which variable performances in which the same performance mode is set can be continuously executed, variable performances with different performance modes can be executed, so that performance effects can be obtained. can increase
Furthermore, by configuring the specific performance mode to be settable only when a specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the variable performance in all the performance modes that can be executed, so that all kinds of variable performance are executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player willing to play the game easily.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, even when the normal state is set, when the specific condition is established, the second special symbol lottery is performed more than when the specific condition is not established. It is configured so that it can be easily executed. Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute a normal pattern long winning game that can open the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time in part when winning in the normal symbol lottery executed in the normal state. Also, as described above, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the normal state reaches 900 times, the normal pattern long winning game capable of opening the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. It is configured so that the second time saving state can be set.
That is, in the 47th control example, even if the jackpot is not won in the normal state, the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed by either of the two types of opportunities being established. Configure. By constructing in this way, even if the game in which the first special symbol lottery mainly executed during the normal state does not win the jackpot continues for a long time, the lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. It is possible to provide an opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery in which is executed, and to increase the player's willingness to play.
Here, in the 47th control example, as the opportunity for setting the second time saving state as the ceiling privilege, the opportunity (Hamari opportunity) that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed 900 times without winning the jackpot is defined in advance. It is configured so that the second time saving state is set only when the addictive opportunity is established. Therefore, since the player can easily grasp the timing of execution of the effect (ceiling bonus effect) for notifying that the addictive opportunity has been established, the game situation in which the addictive opportunity is difficult to establish, for example, the normal state There is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 in a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the period is small may decrease the willingness to play the game positively.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 47th control example, the effect (ceiling privilege grant effect) for notifying that the second time saving state is set, and that the normal figure long winning game is executed It is configured so that the same production mode (electric chew high certainty suggestion production) is set for the production for notification (variable production for normal figure long hit). By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the same mode of effects as the ceiling privilege granting performance at various timings during the normal state, it is possible to predict at what timing the ceiling privilege will be granted to the player. can be made difficult to

In addition, the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) is granted when the special pattern variation in which the Hamari opportunity is established is stopped, whereas the normal long per game is displayed as a normal per long per variation. Since it is executed in the case (different timing from the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed), the effect (ceiling privilege grant effect) to notify that the second time saving state is set, and the normal figure long hit Even if the same performance mode (electric chew high probability suggestion performance) is set in the performance (variable performance for normal figure long hit) for notifying that the game is executed, the electric chew high probability suggestion performance is executed. Depending on the timing, there is a risk that the player will be able to grasp which opportunity has been established.
On the other hand, in the 47th control example, it is configured to be able to execute the electric chew high probability suggesting effect in accordance with the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed during the period when the normal pattern long winning variation is being executed. there is By configuring in this way, even if the ceiling privilege is given, even if the general pattern long winning game is executed, the electric chew high certainty suggestion production is executed in correspondence with the fluctuation period of the special pattern fluctuation , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which opportunity has been established.
Furthermore, the period from the execution of the electric chew high probability suggesting performance to the actual release of the electric accessory 640a, specifically, the second time reduction state is set and the normal figure winning game is executed. The second special symbol lottery during the period until and after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed during the normal long per fluctuation, the normal per long per fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the normal per long per game is executed. It is configured to be able to execute an effect (electric chew high-probability mode effect) for notifying the player that it is a period in which it is likely to be executed.
That is, even if any opportunity is established, through the same production process (after the electric chew high probability suggestive production is executed, the flow of executing the electric chew high probability mode production), the normal figure long per game It is configured so that it can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which opportunity has been established based on the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, even if the electric chew high definite suggestion production is executed during the period when the normal figure long per variation is executed, after the electric chu high definite suggestion production ends (special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed) ), it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity for the period until the normal pattern long per game is actually executed.

Furthermore, in this 47th control example, at the timing when the second time saving state given as a ceiling privilege ends (the stop display timing of the special pattern fluctuation when the end condition of the second time saving state is satisfied), the normal figure long per variation is being executed, the period during which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed continues, that is, after the second time-saving state is finished and the normal state is set, the normal pattern long winning game is executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify that a state is created in which a game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 .
In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of creating a state in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed by a plurality of opportunities, when the establishment timing of each opportunity overlaps or is established within a short period of time. , The state in which it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery set by establishment of each opportunity is shown as if the state in which it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery set by establishment of one opportunity continues. Since the production (high-probability mode continuous production) is configured to be executable, how much is the state in which it is easy for the player to execute the second special symbol lottery set based on the establishment of one opportunity? It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether to continue.
In addition, in this 47th control example, the execution right of the special symbol lottery is configured to be memorizable. Specifically, for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), It is configured to be able to store up to 4 execution rights (special figure reservation).
Then, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, the winning information included in the stored special figure reservation (the game ball entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 The value of each counter acquired based on the fact) is configured to be identifiable (read ahead) before the special symbol lottery based on the special symbol reservation is executed. Furthermore, by executing the look-ahead performance as a performance based on the look-ahead result, the special symbol variation targeted for the performance result is executed during the performance period in which the performance for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured so that it can be made longer than the period and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, by executing the look-ahead production across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, when executing the fluctuation production for notifying only the result of each special symbol lottery in accordance with the timing when each special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Compared to , it is possible to reduce the number of times the performance result informing that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost is displayed as the performance result, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. It is configured so that

Here, the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is configured so that the execution condition is not satisfied unless a predetermined number of special figure reservations are held, so if three or more special figure reservations are not acquired , there is a problem that the look-ahead effect is not executed and the effect becomes monotonous.
On the other hand, in the 47th control example, during the special symbol variation being executed in a state where the execution condition of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is not satisfied, for example, in a state where the special symbol reservation is not acquired, two In the state of acquiring a special symbol reservation, if the look-ahead result for the later-acquired special figure reservation among the two acquired special figure reservations is the look-ahead result corresponding to the jackpot winning, the special symbol being executed By displaying the same stop display mode as the stop display mode of the variation as the stop display mode of the special symbol variation to be executed next, the game indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed next is a jackpot winning. It is structured so that it can be suggested to people.
That is, when a prefetch result advantageous to the player (a prefetch result corresponding to winning a jackpot) is specified in the prefetch results in a state where the conditions for execution of the prefetch effect are not satisfied, the stop display mode of the same mode is continuously displayed. By displaying the special symbol lottery, the execution of the special symbol lottery advantageous to the player can be notified before the execution of the special symbol lottery without executing the look-ahead performance. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the special symbol variation even in a state where the conditions for execution of the look-ahead effect are not satisfied.
In addition, in the forty-seventh control example, when the same stop display mode is continuously stop-displayed, a notification effect is executed to notify the player that the same stop display mode is continuously stop-displayed. configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the same stop display mode has been successively stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, in the forty-seventh control example, in the case of performing display control in which the same stop display mode is continuously displayed in a stop display, the stop display mode that is stopped and displayed first is the look-ahead for the newly acquired special figure hold. It is configured such that the stop display mode is determined before the process is executed. By configuring in this way, when the condition for informing the player of the look-ahead result is established, there is no need to rewrite the already determined display content (the stop display mode of the special symbol variation being executed), and the same It is possible to simplify the processing for continuously displaying the stop display modes.
In the forty-seventh control example, it is possible to notify the player in advance that a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player will be executed when the same stop display mode is successively stopped and displayed. However, without being limited to this, it is necessary in advance that a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player will be executed when the stop display modes in which at least a part of the stop display modes are the same are continuously stopped and displayed. It may be configured so as to notify the player.
In addition, the same stop display mode is continuously stop-displayed even in a part of the case where the look-ahead result of the special figure reservation is a look-ahead result that is disadvantageous to the player (a look-ahead result corresponding to the lost winning). Alternatively, the same stop display mode may be continuously displayed without being based on the result of prefetching by configuring the stop display mode of each special symbol variation to be randomly determinable. . Even in this case, it is preferable that a notification effect capable of informing the player that the same stop display mode has been successively stopped and displayed can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the same stop display mode is continuously stop-displayed even when the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed later is advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the frequency with which the same stop display mode is displayed continuously.
Furthermore, without being limited to this, in the processing for determining the stop display mode of each special symbol variation, the same stop display mode as the stop display mode stopped and displayed last time is less likely to be determined than other stop display modes. The processing may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the frequency of the same stop display mode being displayed continuously can be suppressed, so the expectation of winning the jackpot when the same stop display mode is continuously displayed is unnecessary. can be suppressed.

In the forty-seventh control example, as part of the variation effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, an operation effect for allowing the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22) is configured to be executable. Specifically, an operation guidance mode is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22, and based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, a A notification effect (one-shot notification effect) for notifying whether or not the special symbol variation is a big hit variation is configured to be executable.
That is, during the special symbol variation period, the player operates the frame button 22 so that the target special symbol lottery result can be grasped before the special symbols are stopped and displayed. By constructing in this way, a player who wants to quickly grasp the result of the special symbol lottery can be motivated to operate the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. can be done.
Here, conventionally, a player operates an operation means (frame button 22) to execute a notification performance capable of informing whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is a big win. In such a conventional type pachinko machine 10, the presence or absence of winning a big win can be detected quickly, but since the performance result of the notification performance only indicates the presence or absence of winning a big win, it is possible that the big win has not been won. There is a problem that the player loses interest in the game until the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed when the corresponding performance is executed. In addition, even when the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, it is possible to grasp that the winning of the jackpot has occurred at that time, so the effect of the effect executed in the remaining period until the special symbol fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed. There was a problem that the effect could not be enhanced.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the operation performance, the first effect indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated and the jackpot A second performance for informing the presence or absence of winning is executable, and the performance mode of the first performance and the performance mode of the second performance are combined to give various benefits to the player. It is configured to be able to notify the presence or absence.

Specifically, even if the second performance does not notify the winning of the jackpot, the result of the first performance becomes the result of the first performance, so that the winning of the big win is reported, or the winning of the big win is reported by the second performance. After the game is played, the effect result of the first effect becomes the first effect result, thereby informing the player that he or she has won a big win advantageous to the player.
By constructing in this way, in the one-shot notification effect in which the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation effect to notify the presence or absence of the winning of the big win, even if the winning of the big win is not immediately notified. , it is possible to leave the possibility of winning a big prize, and to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance executed in the remaining performance period. In addition, in the one-shot notification effect, even if the jackpot winning is immediately notified, the effect for notifying whether or not a further benefit (advantageous jackpot) will be given during the remaining effect period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect of the rendering executed in the remaining rendering period.
In addition, according to the effect result of the second effect in the one-shot notification effect, even if the effect result of the first effect is the same effect result, the content of the privilege notified by the effect result of the first effect is different. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the forty-seventh control example, the content of the privilege notified by the first effect can be varied depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. By constructing in this way, when the operation effect is executed, the player can not only select whether or not to operate the frame button 22, but also enjoy the pleasure of deciding at what timing the frame button 22 is to be operated. can provide.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the 47th control example>
First, referring to FIG. 1746, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. 1746 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example is a variable winning device 65 that is controlled to be opened during the jackpot game with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 4) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. are different in that they have different configurations, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1746, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example is configured substantially symmetrically, and game balls flow down toward the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80. When a left-handed game is executed, and when a right-handed game is executed in which a game ball flows down toward the right side area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are executed. A game ball can be made to reach the mouth 640 and the variable winning device 65 . In addition, through gates 67 are respectively placed at the midstream position of the left side area and the midstream position of the right side area so that the normal symbol lottery can be executed in both the left-handed game and the right-handed game. are arranged.
That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example, the player selects an arbitrary game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to play regardless of the set game state and the presence or absence of the jackpot game. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game at a disadvantage due to playing the game with an incorrect game method.
Also, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a narrower opening width than the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 4) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. In the above-described first control example, a plurality of game ball flow-down paths are formed inside the variable prize winning device 65, and the rate of passing the game ball to the specific area is varied depending on the path along which the game ball actually flowed down, and the game ball passes through the specific area. Since it was configured to be able to give a privilege (high probability state of special symbols) based on passing, the variable winning device 65 itself was formed wide, whereas the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example Since the prize balls are only given based on the game balls entering the variable prize winning device 65 when the jackpot game is executed, it was fired by the left-handed game and the right-handed game. It is formed with an opening width (approximately 50 mm) that allows any game ball to enter.

<Regarding the content of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1747 to 1762, the contents of characteristic effects among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. In the forty-seventh control example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, a part of the production mode of the variable production for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is different, and the second time saving state The difference is that the production for showing that is set and the production for showing the result of the normal symbol lottery are partly shared.
First, with reference to FIGS. 1747 to 1751, the display screen executed during the ready-to-win effect, which is part of the variable effect, will be described. Figure 1747 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win display screen in the ready-to-win effect executed during the normal state, and Figure 1747 (b) is displayed when the ready-to-win effect develops and becomes SP ready-to-win. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed.
As shown in FIG. 1747, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example is the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example (Fig. 6), the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 to display upper, middle and lower three pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) (see FIG. 114(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is They are composed of 10 types of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "1" to "9" are added. These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Among various display areas and display elements formed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the same reference numerals as those in the above-described first control example are given and detailed description thereof will be given. is omitted.
In the display screen shown in FIG. 1747(a), the variably displayed third symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed on the activated line L2. A diagram showing an example of a ready-to-win effect in which the third symbol (identification information imitating a shark) with the number "4" attached to the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed as part of the combination of is. At this point, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed moving leftward while moving at high speed (in the figure, the speed is indicated by two leftward arrows).

After that, as shown in FIG. 1747(b), when the ready-to-win effect develops and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, a character 801 resembling a rabbit appears on the lower left side of the main display area Dm and appears on the effective line L2. As an effect mode for expecting that the third symbol with "4" in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the movement of passing the third symbol with "4" on the effective line L2 is stopped. While the character 801 is performing an action to make the character 801 move, the SP ready-to-win effect is executed in the effect mode in which "stop" is displayed as the line 801a.
This SP reach effect is configured to be easier to execute when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot than when the special symbol lottery is lost. By being executed, it is possible to see the variation performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while grasping that the special symbol variation of this time is likely to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot. can. Then, by grasping the action of the character 801 executed during the SP ready-to-win production, the display mode in which the same third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L2 (the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning). It is possible to make the player easily understand that the display mode to be displayed) is advantageous to the player.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1748 to 1750, the effect contents of the SP ready-to-win effect executed during the variable probability state will be described. Figure 1838 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the reach effect of even symbols occurs in the variable probability state, and Figures 1838 (b) and 1839 (a) are , It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the reach effect of even symbols that occurred during the probability change state developed into the SP reach effect, and FIG. FIG. 1840(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the third symbol is temporarily stopped as a ready-to-win effect of even-numbered symbols, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a display mode indicating detachment;
As described above, in the forty-seventh control example, when the variable probability state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol continue until the special symbol lottery is executed 10000 times. It is configured, and it is configured so that the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot election. Then, when the probability variable jackpot is won during the probability variable state, the probability variable state is set again after the jackpot game ends, so that the game state advantageous to the player can be continued across the jackpot game. there is

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the player has little interest in whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state is a jackpot winning, and the winning jackpot type (variable probability jackpot, normal jackpot). ) will have a strong interest in the player. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect with even-numbered symbols that may have won the normal jackpot is executed, that is, the ready-to-win effect that has the possibility of winning the jackpot with the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is set is executed. If so, as shown in FIG. 1748(a), the character "Fa!!" is displayed as a line 810a indicating that the ready-to-win effect of even-numbered symbols has been executed.
Then, the reach effect of the even-numbered pattern does not develop into the SP reach effect, and the display mode indicating the deviation (symbols other than the third pattern with the reach target "4" on the effective line L2 are stopped and displayed. When the ready-to-reach out display mode) is stopped and displayed, the ready-to-reach production ends as it is.
On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect of the even-numbered symbols shown in FIG. 1748(a) develops and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the character 801 appears and the medium symbol row Z2 is not stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot. perform the expected out-of-action action. For example, in the symbol column Z2 that is being displayed at a low speed, if the target "4" symbol does not pass through the effective line L3, which reaches before the effective line L2, it is shown in FIG. As shown, the character 801 executes a losing action to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 in hopes that the "4" symbol will be stop-displayed on the activated line L3 (the out-of-reach display mode will be displayed). Then, the line 801a of "stop" is displayed.
1748(b) is executed, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 continues, the "4" symbol passes through the effective line L3, and moves toward the effective line L2 at a low speed. If it fluctuates, as shown in FIG. 1749(a), it is hoped that the fluctuating display will continue until the "4" symbol passes through the effective line L2. A character 801 executing a missing action and a line 801a of "Don't stop" are displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 1748(b) and 1749(a), the display mode of the lost action display executed during the SP ready-to-win production is the active line L2 in which the even-numbered symbols are in the ready-to-reach state, and the middle symbol row. By making it different according to the fluctuation situation of Z2 (variation position of ``4'' symbol which is the target of reach), the present reach performance (reach performance of even-numbered symbols) indicates a jackpot winning to the player. It can be understood in an easy-to-understand manner that the game is more advantageous when the performance result (out of reach) indicating the loss is obtained rather than the result (symbol matching).
1749(a), the "4" symbol stops on the activated line L2. Although the player misunderstands that the action desired to be displayed is being executed, as in the 47th control example, the next position where the middle symbol row Z2 can be stopped and displayed is the ready-to-win state. When the effective line L2 is reached, the misunderstanding by the player can be suppressed by switching the display mode of the missing action (do not stop action).
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 1748(b) and 1749(a), the display position of the character 801 is also switched when the content of the missing action is switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the content indicated by the missing action (stop, do not stop) has been switched.
Then, when the ready-to-win display mode is displayed as the production result of the SP ready-to-win production, the display mode to congratulate that the production result of the ready-to-win production of the even-numbered pattern is the production result indicating the losing (see FIG. 1749). is displayed, and the variable effect ends.

On the other hand, in the SP reach effect, when the "4" symbol is temporarily stopped on the effective line L2, the character 801 stops (temporarily stops) on the effective line L2 as shown in FIG. 1749(b). A restart action of attacking the three "4" symbols present and "Zurero" are displayed as the dialogue 801a. It should be noted that the state shown in FIG. 1749 (b) is during special symbol fluctuation, and in the small display area Dm2, there is a display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the second special symbol fluctuation is being fluctuated. is displayed.
That is, in FIG. 1749(b), the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed before the timing that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result. , shows a state in which a temporary stop effect for temporarily displaying a temporary stop is being executed. Therefore, in order to prevent misunderstanding by the player, the "4" symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is not displayed completely stopped, but is slightly oscillating (in the figure, both ends of the symbol icon are oscillated). displayed).
After the effect shown in FIG. 1749(b) is executed, when the second special symbol lottery of this time is a normal jackpot, the third symbol does not shift even though the restart action is executed. A performance result in which "4" symbols are aligned and stopped on the effective line L2 is displayed, and the player is informed that the special symbol lottery of this time is a big win. In addition, in this 47th control example, in a part of the case where the probability variable jackpot is won, the effect result in which three even symbols are displayed together is set as the effect result of the variable effect, and the jackpot game effect is executed after that. Inside, it is constructed so as to be able to execute a promotion performance for informing the player that the current big win was a probability variable big win. Therefore, even in the event of a big win with even symbols, a big win game can be played while leaving the possibility of a probability variable big win.
On the other hand, as a result of the restart action shown in FIG. 1749(b), when the stop display position of the third symbol is shifted, as shown in FIG. To inform a player that the result of this special symbol lottery is a loss. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1750, by the restart action, the "4" symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 is restarted in the direction of fluctuation, and the "4" symbol is moved up to the activated line L1. It shows the display screen when the display is stopped at . In this way, by restarting the third symbols of the symbol rows (symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3) other than the symbol row Z2, which have been variably displayed during the ready-to-win state, the player is given an unexpected feeling. You can provide some performance.

Further, since the variable display direction of the third pattern restarted by the restart action is configured to be the same as the variable display direction of the normal third pattern, the display used when restarting the third pattern. As the data, the display data used when executing the normal variable display can be used, and the amount of display data corresponding to various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be reduced.
In addition, without being limited to this, the third symbol may be variably displayed in a direction different from the normal variably displayed direction, or the third symbol that is stopped and displayed may be variably displayed. Instead, the number ("4") attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed may be switched to a different number (for example, "6"), or the third symbol itself may be changed. You may switch to a 3rd design. In this way, by restarting the third pattern in a manner different from the normal variable display, it is possible to provide the player with an effect dedicated to the restart, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.
In addition, in the 47th control example, the effect of restarting only one symbol row is executed. In this case, by restarting a plurality of symbol rows, odd-numbered symbols indicating probability variable jackpot winning may be stopped and displayed on the active line in a display mode indicating jackpot winning. . That is, after once displaying the big win display mode by the even numbered patterns in the ready-to-win effect of the even numbered patterns, the third pattern may be restarted so that the odd numbered symbol big win display mode is stopped and displayed.
By configuring in this way, the effect corresponding to the game result (normal jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed during the variable probability state, and the player whose motivation to play is reduced. Since an effect corresponding to an advantageous game result (probability variable jackpot) can be executed, the player's willingness to play can be easily increased.

Next, in the normal state, the production contents of the ready-to-win production just before the ceiling privilege (second time saving state) is given will be described. FIG. 1751 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the near-ceiling SP reach effect. In this 47th control example, the jackpot game advantageous to the player is easier to execute when the jackpot win is won in the second special symbol lottery than when the jackpot win is won in the first special symbol lottery. ing. Then, when the special pattern lottery to be lost during the low probability state of the special pattern is continuously executed 900 times, the ceiling privilege is given, and when the second time saving state is set as the ceiling privilege. is set so as to set a second time-saving state (ceiling time-saving) in which a second special pattern lottery can be easily executed even if a big win is not won in the special pattern lottery executed in a normal state.
That is, when the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of special symbol fluctuations) executed during the normal state, which is a low probability state of special symbols, approaches 900 times (for example, when reaching 890 times), the ceiling privilege is It is constructed so that the method in the case of not winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed before the award is more advantageous to the player than the case of winning the jackpot. In this way, even in the normal state, if a game is being executed that is more advantageous to the player not winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than winning the jackpot, as shown in FIG. As the presentation mode of the presentation, the display mode of the losing action which wishes that the third symbol is not stop-displayed is displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1752 to 1754, the effect contents of the angle change effect, which is part of the variable effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-seventh control example, will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, when the special symbol variation is the reach variation two times in a row, as the second reach variation, an effect mode that is not set in the first reach variation is performed. Configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early due to the continuous execution of the same mode of ready-to-win effect when the ready-to-win change occurs twice in succession.
FIG. 1752(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the angle change effect is executed as the effect mode of the variable effect. When this angle effect is executed, the character 801 is displayed while the third symbol is being variably displayed in the main display area Dm, and is displayed in the normal area (FIG. 1752(a)) of the main display area Dm. The action of alternately looking at the right out-of-frame area and the left out-of-frame area of the area where the player is located is displayed. Since the display screen shown in FIG. 1752(a) is a display screen displayed during a period in which the special symbol (third symbol) is displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the first special symbol variation is executed in the display area Dm1. A display mode (indicated by three arrows in the figure) indicating that it is set is displayed.

Then, when the variable effect being executed is the ready-to-win variation (variable effect in which the ready-to-win state is established), the display displayed in the main display area Dm after the effect for the character 801 to focus on the left frame area is executed. An area switching display is executed in which the area is switched from the normal area to the left-outside-frame area, and the treasure chest 810 in the left-outside-frame area is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 1752(b)).
FIG. 1752(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an angle change effect corresponding to reach variation is executed. As shown in FIG. 1752(b), the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example is configured to display the left frame area (left angle) on the display screen when the third symbol is in the reach state. Therefore, in the display area Dm1, a display mode (7 arrow 7) indicating that the current reach state is displayed.
Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, a display mode indicating the reach state is displayed in the display area Dm1 in accordance with the timing when the display screen shifts to the left angle in the angle change effect. However, it is not limited to this, and the third pattern that is variably displayed at the center of the main display area Dm on the normal angle display screen (see FIG. 1752(a)) is a display mode that indicates the ready-to-win state. It may also be configured to move to the left angle after the stop display. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the ready-to-win state has been established and that the left angle has been shifted.
In addition, at the time of shifting to the left angle, the player is notified of the same production situation as the ready-to-win state, that is, the production situation in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal variable production (for example, the ready-to-win state is established) Output the voice (reach) that is output when the It may be configured to display a display mode indicating that the three symbols are fluctuating at high speed). By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand that the production situation is the same as the ready-to-win state, and the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state (odd number corresponding to the probability variable jackpot) The variable presentation progresses in a state in which the player does not grasp the symbols and other normal symbols.

Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the type of the third symbol in the case of winning the big win while expecting the big win. In this case, when the angle change presentation corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed, it is preferable to preliminarily stipulate that the ratio of winning the variable probability jackpot is higher than the ratio of winning the normal jackpot. By constructing in this way, when the effect result indicating the jackpot win is displayed in the angle change effect executed in a state in which the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state cannot be grasped, the possibility of the probability variable jackpot is reduced. Since it can be enhanced, the effect of the angle change presentation can be enhanced.
Further, when executing the angle change effect so as not to display the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state, a mode different from the display mode of the third symbol is used to suggest the jackpot type to the player. For example, a jackpot is won by using the display mode of the treasure box 810 displayed in FIG. It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot in the case can be suggested. By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the probability variable jackpot expectation degree in the case of winning the jackpot while leaving the possibility that the direction change result of the angle change direction is the direction result indicating the failure. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.
Furthermore, when the angle change performance is executable in a state in which the probability variable state is set, the probability variable jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot is grasped by grasping the performance content of the suggestive performance executed during the angle change performance. By predicting the degree of expectation for winning, it is possible to play a game hoping that the effect result of the angle change effect this time is a failure, or to play a game hoping for a big win.
On the other hand, if the variable effect being executed is other than the ready-to-win variation (variable effect that establishes the ready-to-win state) (when the chance eye is stopped and displayed), after the effect for the character 801 to focus on the right frame area is executed. , the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is switched from the normal area to the right-outside-frame area, and the bag 811 in the right-outside-frame area is displayed in the main display area Dm (FIG. 1752(c) reference).

Here, the display contents of the right angle display screen in which the bag 811 in the right frame area is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 1752(c)) will be described. FIG. 1752(c) is a diagram showing an example of the right angle display screen. In the right angle display screen shown in FIG. 1752(c), while the normal angle display screen (see FIG. 1752(a)) is displayed, the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the chance eye (eg, 342). It is a display screen displayed when
When this right-angle display screen is displayed, a bag 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and above the bag 811 are displayed the words "mysterious bag found".
Here, the display contents of the left angle display screen in which the treasure box 810 in the left frame area is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 1752(b)) will be described. FIG. 1752(b) is a diagram showing an example of the left angle display screen. The left angle display screen shown in FIG. 1752(b) is a display screen displayed when the reach state occurs after the normal angle display screen (see FIG. 1752(a)) is displayed. A treasure box 810 is displayed beyond the viewpoint. Above the treasure box 810, the words "treasure box found" are displayed. When this left angle display screen is displayed, an effect is executed to open the treasure box 810 corresponding to the timing when the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. The player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery (the effect result of the angle change effect) using the contents 810a.
FIG. 1753(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed on the left angle display screen, and shows an example in which the result of the special symbol lottery is lost. ing. As shown in FIG. 1753(a), when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the small display area Dm1 displays "787" indicating that the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost. Three symbols are stopped and displayed, and as the display mode of the contents 810a of the treasure box 810, the display mode "Sorry!!" is displayed to indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Then, the character 801 displays an action display in which the character 801 is depressed when the lottery result is lost.

When the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the left angle display screen is a big win, the display mode of the contents 810a of the treasure box 810 is the display mode "V" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. is displayed, the character 801 is displayed in an action display (for example, jumping up with joy) to celebrate that the lottery result is a big win, and the small display area Dm1 displays a display mode "777" indicating that the big win has been won. , the third symbol is stopped and displayed.
Next, when the variation performance (angle change performance) that shifts to the left angle is out of reach, and the special symbol variation to be executed next is reach variation, that is, reach variation twice in a row as the variation pattern type. is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 1753(b) is displayed.
Here, the display contents of FIG. 1753(b) will be described. FIG. 1753(b) shows that the display mode "787" of the third symbol indicating that the effect result of the variable effect (angle change effect) that shifts to the left angle is out (the result of the special symbol lottery is out of reach). It is a display screen stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1, and is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when the special symbol variation to be executed next is the ready-to-win variation. As shown in FIG. 1753(b), an effect in which the rope 820 hangs down from above the main display area Dm is executed, and after displaying the comment "rope found", the action of the character 801 looking beyond the rope 820. display is displayed. After that, an effect in which the character 801 climbs the rope 820 is executed, and the area outside the upper frame of the left angle display screen is displayed in the main display area Dm.
That is, as shown in FIG. 1753, when the effect mode (left angle transition) corresponding to the reach variation is set as the angle change effect, the mode of the display screen showing the result of the effect is changed to the special effect to be executed next. It is configured to be determined based on the result of the pattern lottery.

By configuring in this way, even if the player is aware that the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the angle change effect being executed is a disadvantageous result (loss) for the player, the special symbol to be executed next In order to predict the result of the pattern lottery in advance, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance contents of the variation performance executed corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed until the end.
In addition, in this 47th control example, when the special symbol variation executed next to the special symbol variation in which the angle change effect (reach variation effect) that shifts to the left angle is executed is the reach variation, the angle change effect Although it is configured to set a production mode (upward angle shift) in which the production content of 1 is shown to progress across two fluctuations, it is not limited to this, for example, an angle change that shifts to the left angle When the special symbol variation to be executed next to the special symbol variation in which the performance (ready-to-reach variation performance) is executed is the big win variation indicating the winning of the big win, the performance content of the angle change performance progresses across the two variations. It may be configured to set an effect mode (transition to upper angle) to make it look like this.
Furthermore, in this 47th control example, an angle change effect can be set as the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the result of one special symbol lottery, and is executed next to the special symbol lottery corresponding to the angle change effect. By determining in advance the result of the special symbol lottery (whether result, presence or absence of reach fluctuation), the display mode for showing the effect result of the angle change effect is configured to be different, but not limited to this , As a performance mode of the variation performance for showing the result of the lottery of 1 special symbol, the angle change performance of shifting from the left angle to the upper angle can be executed within the variation period of the 1 special symbol variation. good. Also, it may be configured to execute the angle change effect across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations based on the look-ahead result corresponding to the special figure reservation that has already been acquired.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1754(a), the display contents of the display screen (upper angle display screen) when the area outside the upper frame of the left angle display screen is displayed in the main display area Dm will be described. FIG. 1754(a) is a diagram showing an example of the upper angle display screen. When the character 801 climbs the rope 820 on the left angle display screen shown in FIG. 1753(b), the upper angle display screen is displayed. The machine 822 displays a display mode indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot (in the figure, the characters "great chance").

As described above, the upper angle display screen is displayed when the special symbol variation executed next to the special symbol variation (reach variation) in which the angle change effect to shift to the left angle is executed is the reach variation, that is, When the reach variation is executed continuously, the display screen becomes easier to be displayed. By configuring in this way, when the reach fluctuation is continuously executed, the same production mode is set as the production mode corresponding to the reach fluctuation, and the production effect is suppressed from being lowered. can be done.
In addition, conventionally, in a game situation where the effect of the variable production can be reduced (a game situation in which the reach fluctuation continues), it is possible to set a production mode (upper angle display) that is easier to set than in other game situations. By doing so, it is possible to make the player who wants to enjoy various variable performances expect that the reach variation will continue.
In the forty-seventh control example, when the reach variation is continuously executed, a special variation effect (variation effect in which the display area is switched from the left angle to the upper angle) is configured to be executable. It is only necessary to suppress the setting of the same performance mode in a short period of time. If it is determined that there is a special figure hold or a special figure hold with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the angle change effect is continued until the special pattern lottery corresponding to the special figure hold is executed, and the The special symbol result corresponding to the special figure reservation may be displayed as the additional effect result of the angle change effect.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1754(b), another example of the content of the effect that is executed while the normal angle is being displayed in the angle change effect will be described. FIG. 1754(a) is a diagram showing an example when the normal angle display screen is displayed in the angle change effect. The display screen shown in FIG. 1754(b) is an angle change effect (special display screen) in which the normal angle display screen (see FIG. 1752(a)) is displayed, and then the screen shifts to the upper angle without shifting to the left angle. This is the display screen displayed when the effect) is executed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, this special effect is a effect that is executed only in the angle change effect corresponding to the jackpot winning, so when the normal angle display screen is directly shifted to the upper angle, the upper angle display The word "jackpot" is displayed on the airplane 822 (see FIG. 1754(a)) displayed on the screen. In this way, the display screen that can be displayed when reach fluctuations are continuous (upper angle display screen) can be displayed even when reach fluctuations are not continuous and another display condition (jackpot winning) is established. , it is possible to easily provide various effects to the player.
In addition, in the case where the above-described special effect is configured to be executable, in a part of the case where the effect mode of shifting to the left angle or the right angle is set as the angle change effect, the rope 820 is displayed on the normal angle display screen. It is preferable to configure so as to execute the displayed stimulating effect. In this case, simply displaying the rope 820 on the normal-angle display screen can give the player a sense of anticipation for the execution of the special effect. In addition, when the fanning performance of displaying the rope 820 on the display screen of the normal angle is executed, the performance result of the angle change performance being executed shows a jackpot winning more than when the fanning performance is not executed. It is good to configure so that the result can be easily obtained. By constructing in this manner, even when the rope 820 is displayed on the display screen of the normal angle and then shifted to the left angle or the right angle, the player is expected to win the jackpot. It is possible to make it easy to continue playing the game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1755 to 1758, the contents of the effects executed when the electric accessory 640 is released for a long time will be described. In this 47th control example, when the normal symbol lottery executed in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is won, the electric accessory 640 is long open. A figure long winning game is executed. Also, when the ceiling privilege is given (when the second time saving state is set), the electric sapo state is given with the low probability state of the normal pattern set, so that the normal pattern lottery It is configured to make it easier to select the normal pattern B when winning the winning.
Then, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 47th control example, the effect (ceiling privilege grant effect) for notifying that the second time saving state is set, and for notifying that the normal figure long winning game is executed It is configured so that the same production mode (electric chew high certainty suggestion production) is set with the production (normal figure long per variation production). By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the same mode of effects as the ceiling privilege granting performance at various timings during the normal state, it is possible to predict at what timing the ceiling privilege will be granted to the player. can be made difficult to

FIG. 1755(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when normal pattern long per variation is executed in the normal state. The diagram shown in FIG. 1755(a) shows a state in which the first special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executed in the normal state, and the small display area Dm1 is in the first special symbol variation. The third pattern is variably displayed in a display mode (indicated by an arrow) indicating that there is a certain pattern, and in the small display area Dm3, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a display mode (indicated by an arrow) indicating that the normal pattern is fluctuating. is displayed. In addition, in the main display area Dm, a variable effect is executed to show the result of the special symbol lottery that is being executed, and above it, the characters "Electric chew high probability mode entered!?" It suggests to the player that the electric accessory 640 (electric chew) will be released for a long time.
Then, from the state shown in FIG. 1755 (a), when the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed before the normal symbol variation (per normal pattern long variation) is stopped and displayed, the display shown in FIG. 1755 (b) A screen appears. FIG. 1755(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the special symbol variation is stop-displayed during normal pattern long per variation in the normal state.
As shown in FIG. 1755(b), when the special symbol variation is stop-displayed in the display mode indicating the loss, the third symbol is stopped in the display mode "342" indicating the loss in the small display area Dm1, Also in the main display area Dm, the effect result of the variable effect is displayed in a display mode indicating that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a loss. At this point in time, as shown in the small display area Dm3, the normal long-term hit variation is in progress. a)) is switched to "Electric chew high-probability mode!!" An image is displayed in the display area Dm103.
After that, when the normal pattern long hit variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 1756(a) is displayed. FIG. 1756(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed in a normal state when normal long-term hit variation is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 1756 (a), when the normal long pattern hit variation is stopped and displayed, in the small display area Dm3, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode "○○" corresponding to the normal pattern long hit, Under the main display area Dm, the text "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed, and an image schematically showing the electric accessory 640 in the open state is displayed in the display area Dm103.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example, when the normal pattern long hit variation is executed in the normal state, an effect that can suggest that the normal pattern long hit is fluctuating (the normal pattern long hit variation effect ) is executed, and the performance mode of the normal pattern long per variation performance is configured to be varied according to the variation situation of the special symbol variation being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily make the player think that the electric accessory 640 has been long-released due to some kind of opportunity being established based on the special symbol variation.
On the other hand, when the ceiling privilege is given, the display screen shown in FIG. 1756(b) is displayed. FIG. 1756(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the ceiling privilege is awarded. As shown in FIG. 1756 (b), the ceiling privilege is given when the addictive opportunity is established (when the 900th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), so the 900th special symbol variation is off. 1755(b) described above is displayed.
In other words, the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) is granted when the special pattern variation in which the Hamari opportunity is established is stopped and displayed, whereas the normal pattern long per game is displayed when the normal pattern long per variation is stopped. Since it is executed in the case (different timing from the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed), the effect (ceiling privilege grant effect) to notify that the second time saving state is set, and the normal figure long hit Even if the same performance mode (electric chew high probability suggestion performance) is set in the performance (variable performance for normal figure long hit) for notifying that the game is executed, the electric chew high probability suggestion performance is executed. Depending on the timing, there is a risk that the player will be able to grasp which opportunity has been established.
On the other hand, in the 47th control example, it is configured to be able to execute the electric chew high probability suggesting effect in accordance with the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed during the period when the normal pattern long winning variation is being executed. there is By configuring in this way, even if the ceiling privilege is given, even if the general pattern long winning game is executed, the electric chew high certainty suggestion production is executed in correspondence with the fluctuation period of the special pattern fluctuation , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which opportunity has been established.

Furthermore, the period from the execution of the electric chew high probability suggesting performance to the actual release of the electric accessory 640a, specifically, the second time reduction state is set and the normal figure winning game is executed. The second special symbol lottery during the period until and after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed during the normal long per fluctuation, the normal per long per fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the normal per long per game is executed. It is configured to be able to execute an effect (electric chew high-probability mode effect) for notifying the player that it is a period in which it is likely to be executed.
That is, even if any opportunity is established, through the same production process (after the electric chew high probability suggestive production is executed, the flow of executing the electric chew high probability mode production), the normal figure long per game It is configured so that it can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which opportunity has been established based on the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Furthermore, even if the electric chew high definite suggestion production is executed during the period when the normal figure long per variation is executed, after the electric chu high definite suggestion production ends (special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed) ), it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity for the period until the normal pattern long per game is actually executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1757 (a), at the timing when the normal figure long winning game executed in the normal state (the state in which the ceiling privilege is not granted) is completed, the effect content in the case where the ceiling privilege is granted explain about In this 47th control example, since the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel in the same way as the above-described control examples, the special symbols are generated multiple times during the normal pattern long per fluctuation. A lottery may be run and ceiling benefits may be awarded. Figure 1757 (a) is displayed when the general pattern long winning game executed during the normal state ends in the state where the ceiling privilege is given (the second time saving state is set). It is the figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 1757(a), the display of "Electric Chew High Probability Mode!" ” is displayed. Then, below the main display area Dm, the text "It's still easy to open the electric chew" is displayed.
In this way, the period in which the normal pattern long per variation is performed in the normal state, the period in which the normal pattern long per game is performed based on the per normal pattern long variation, and the period during which the ceiling privilege is granted In the case of being connected, by constructing so that the performance related to the electric chew high probability mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is continuously executed, at what timing the ceiling privilege was given. can be made difficult for the player to grasp.

Next, with reference to FIG.1757(b) and FIG.1758, the content of the production|presentation at the time of the 2nd time saving state provided as a ceiling privilege is complete|finished is demonstrated. Figure 1757 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the end of the ceiling time saving (second time saving state) given as a ceiling privilege, FIG. 1758 shows the ceiling time saving (second time saving state ) is a diagram showing an example of the front screen displayed when the variation per normal pattern long is executed at the end timing of.
Since the ceiling time saving (second time saving state) is configured to end when the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the ceiling time saving (second time saving state) is set 100 When the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Next, the characters "Expectation" are displayed.
On the other hand, if the normal figure long per fluctuation is executed at the end timing of the ceiling time saving (2nd time saving state), the normal figure immediately after the ceiling time saving (2nd time saving state) ends and transitions to the normal state Since the long winning game is executed, instead of the characters "End", the characters "Crying once" are displayed, and the characters "Last chance! I will open the electric chew one more time" are displayed below. Is displayed.
That is, in this 47th control example, at the timing when the second time saving state given as a ceiling privilege ends (the stop display timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the end condition of the second time saving state is satisfied), the normal figure long per variation is being executed, the period during which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed continues, that is, after the second time-saving state is finished and the normal state is set, the normal pattern long winning game is executed. By doing so, it is possible to notify that a state in which a game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 is created.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of creating a state in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed by a plurality of opportunities, when the establishment timing of each opportunity overlaps or is established within a short period of time. , The state in which it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery set by establishment of each opportunity is shown as if the state in which it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery set by establishment of one opportunity continues. Since the production (high-probability mode continuous production) is configured to be executable, how much is the state in which it is easy for the player to execute the second special symbol lottery set based on the establishment of one opportunity? It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether to continue.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1759, the contents of the effect of continuously displaying the same stop display mode will be described. In this 47th control example, the prefetching result in the state where the execution condition of the prefetching continuous effect is not satisfied (the state where three or more special figure reservations are not acquired) is advantageous to the player. When the corresponding look-ahead result) is specified, by continuously displaying the same stop display mode, a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed without executing the look-ahead continuous effect. That can be notified before the special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the special symbol variation even in a state where the conditions for execution of the look-ahead effect are not satisfied.
Here, conventionally, in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of the special symbol execution right (special figure reservation) has been acquired, the production (prefetch production) based on the look-ahead result is performed multiple times (for example, three times) ), there is a game machine configured to be executable across the special symbol variation period. Specifically, the read-ahead effect in which the effect result for indicating the winning of the big win is displayed in correspondence with the stop display timing of the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol lottery for winning the big win is set before the special symbol lottery for winning the big win. It is configured to be executable using the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol lottery that is executed at the beginning. By configuring in this way, the variation for notifying the player of the result of the special symbol lottery (losing lottery) executed before the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery targeted for the look-ahead effect) for winning the jackpot. Since there is no need to execute the performance, it is possible to reduce the number of times of execution of the variable performance for showing that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, thereby preventing the player's desire to play from declining. It could be suppressed.
In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, the normal fluctuation performance ( Since it is possible to lengthen the production period of the fluctuation production (pre-reading production using multiple special symbol fluctuation periods) with a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the fluctuation production using one special symbol fluctuation period), it is possible to read ahead. It was said that the production effect of the production could be enhanced.

More specifically, in the process of determining the effect mode of the variation effect that is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is started, after determining that the variation is a deviation variation, within the acquired special figure reservation It is determined whether there is a special reservation that satisfies the execution conditions of the prefetching effect, and when it is determined that there is a special reservation that satisfies the execution conditions of the prefetching effect, from the fluctuation period of the fluctuation, It is configured to determine the performance mode of the look-ahead performance to be executed so as to straddle the variation period of the special symbol variation based on the special symbol reservation that satisfies the execution condition of the look-ahead performance.
In this case, if there is no acquired special figure reservation at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is started, or if there are few acquired special figure reservations, the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is not established (difficult to do). , there was a problem that the look-ahead effect could not be provided to the player.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, the look-ahead effect is executed even by the special symbol hold acquired during the period during which the special symbol variation indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost is executed. It is constructed so that the conditions can be established, and when the execution condition of the prefetching production is established by the special pattern reservation acquired during the period when the special pattern fluctuation is being executed, the fluctuation production corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation being executed. A look-ahead effect can be executed using the effect mode.
Specifically, the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed after the next is set so that the effect result of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed (the stop display mode of the third symbol) is continuously stopped and displayed. configured as possible.

By constructing in this way, the read-ahead performance is executed without changing the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed and the continuously executed variable performance is associated with it. be able to.
In addition, when the special symbol variation is started, the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is not satisfied, and even if the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is satisfied while the special symbol variation is being executed, the execution Since it is possible to execute the look-ahead performance in which the variation performance corresponding to the medium special pattern variation is related, the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance can be increased.
As shown in FIG. 1759(a), when the effect result of the variable effect is displayed in the same stop display mode, the characters "Same as last time, maybe a chance" are displayed below the main display area Dm, In the next variation, as shown in 1907(b), as a variation effect with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, a variation effect in which a character 815 imitating an angel rains an icon 815a imitating a star is executed. "maybe" is displayed.
That is, in the forty-seventh control example, as shown in FIG. A notification effect that can be notified to the player is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the same stop display mode has been successively stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the 47th control example, when the effect result (stop display mode) of the continuously executed variable effect becomes the same effect result (same stop display mode), the player is notified to that effect. Although the configuration is such that the continuous display mode for performing is displayed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the continuous display mode may be configured not to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the effect result (stop display mode) of the continuously executed variable effects has become the same effect result (same stop display mode). can.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, when the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied while the variable effect is being executed, the same effect as the effect result (stop display mode) of the variable effect being executed is obtained. By configuring the result so that it can be set as the effect result of the variable performance to be executed next, it is configured to execute the read-ahead performance that is associated with the variable performance that is continuously executed. In this case, it is preferable to be able to set the effect mode of the variable effect so that the effect results of the variable effect continuously executed in a state where the look-ahead effect is not executed are not the same.
That is, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is out, and the variation pattern (information indicating the variation time and stop type) included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is the same, the special It is set as a stop display mode for showing the effect result of the variable effect so that the same stop display mode is not set continuously as the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating that the result of the symbol lottery is lost. It is preferable to configure so as to be able to store the information obtained, and to set the performance mode (stop display mode) of the variable performance so that the same stop display mode is not continuously set based on the stored information.
With this configuration, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the same stop display mode is not displayed as the effect result of the continuously executed variable effect. It is possible to make it easy to grasp whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed based on the effect result. In addition, since the same stop display mode can be continuously displayed only when the look-ahead effect is executed, the continuous display mode is used to inform the player that the same stop display mode has been displayed continuously. is not displayed, only the player who feels a sense of incongruity different from usual can be made to understand that the look-ahead effect is being executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1760 to 1762, the effect contents of the one-shot announcement effect will be described. In the forty-seventh control example, as part of the variation effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, an operation effect for allowing the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22) is configured to be executable. Specifically, an operation guidance mode is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22, and based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, a A notification effect (one-shot notification effect) for notifying whether or not the special symbol variation is a big hit variation is configured to be executable.
That is, during the special symbol variation period, the player operates the frame button 22 so that the target special symbol lottery result can be grasped before the special symbols are stopped and displayed. By constructing in this way, a player who wants to quickly grasp the result of the special symbol lottery can be motivated to operate the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. can be done.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example, based on the fact that the player has operated the frame button 22 during the operation performance, the first effect indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated and the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot are notified. and a second performance for making it executable, and by combining the performance mode of the first performance and the performance mode of the second performance, it is possible to inform the player whether or not various benefits are given. Configure.
FIG. 1760(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the one-shot notification effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 1760(a), when the one-shot announcement effect is executed, flower icons ha1 and ha2 are displayed on the left and right sides of the main display area Dm, and a button Ba1 imitating the frame button 22 is displayed below. , and butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 resting on the button Ba1 are displayed. Then, the text "If the button is pushed and the flower lights up, you will win a big win!" is displayed above the main display area Dm.

After that, when the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 1760(b), the effect result of the one-shot notification effect is announced. FIG. 1760(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displaying the effect result of the one-shot notification effect indicating the winning of the jackpot. Flower icons ha1 and ha2 emit light when the frame button 22 is pressed. do. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the button Ba1 is erased, and an effect is executed in which the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 fly within the main display area Dm.
Then, the display screen shown in FIG. 1760(b), that is, after the big win is notified (reported) using the flower icons ha1 and ha2, the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 1761(a). , flower icons ha1 and ha2 are executed, it is notified that the winning of the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (additional privilege notification), and characters of ``get super butterfly lucky probability variation'' are displayed.
On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated in the one-shot notification effect and the flower icons ha1 and ha2 do not emit light, the display screen shown in FIG. As a result, the button Ba1 is erased, and a display screen with butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 flying within the main display area Dm is displayed.
Here, in the forty-seventh control example, depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the one-shot notification effect and the effect type, the flower icons ha1 and ha2 are displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed during the one-shot notification effect corresponding to the winning of the jackpot. In this case, after displaying the display screen (outgoing screen) shown in FIG. 1761(b), the display screen shown in 1910(a), i. The two butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 jumping out based on this are configured to stop on one of the flower icons ha2, thereby making it possible to perform an effect of causing the flower icon ha2 to emit light.

By constructing in this way, in the one-shot notification effect in which the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation effect to notify the presence or absence of the winning of the big win, even if the winning of the big win is not immediately notified. , it is possible to leave the possibility of winning a big prize, and to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance executed in the remaining performance period.
Furthermore, when the display screen shown in FIG. 1760(b), that is, when the effect that the flower icons ha1 and ha2 emit light at the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 1761(a), that is, It is configured to be able to execute an effect other than the effect of informing the player that the type of the big win this time is advantageous to the player. Specifically, it is configured to be able to perform an effect capable of informing that there is a special figure reservation (jackpot reservation) for winning a jackpot in the special figure reservation that has already been acquired.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 1762(b), an effect is executed in which the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 flying in the main display area Dm are captured in the basket ka, and "Get the butterflies. "Chance" is displayed. When the display screen shown in FIG. 1762(b) is displayed, the jackpot game period executed after the jackpot fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed, or the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game ends A basket ka is continuously displayed over a period of time, and an effect is executed to notify the player of different benefits (probability variable jackpot, jackpot win) depending on the timing when butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 pop out from the basket ka.
Also, in the one-shot announcement effect, even if the jackpot winning is immediately notified, the effect for notifying whether or not a further benefit (advantageous jackpot) will be given during the remaining effect period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect of the rendering executed in the remaining rendering period.

In addition, according to the effect result of the second effect in the one-shot notification effect, even if the effect result of the first effect is the same effect result, the content of the privilege notified by the effect result of the first effect is different. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the forty-seventh control example, the content of the privilege notified by the first effect can be varied depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. By constructing in this way, when the operation effect is executed, the player can not only select whether or not to operate the frame button 22, but also have the pleasure of deciding at what timing to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加can provide.
In the forty-seventh control example, when the player presses the frame button 22 while the button Ba1 with the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 stopped is displayed, the pressing operation to the frame button 22 is accepted. In order to notify that, the button Ba1 is hidden and the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 fly off. may be configured to continue to display the button Ba1 even after receiving the
In this case, for example, based on the first pressing operation to the frame button 22, only the butterfly icon Bb1 resting on the button Ba1 is rendered to fly away, and the button Ba1 resting on the butterfly icon Bb2 is displayed. Then, based on the second pressing operation, the button Ba1 may be hidden and an effect may be executed in which the butterfly icon Bb1 flies away. In other words, the number of butterfly icons Bb on the button Ba1 may correspond to the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of butterfly icons Bb that are stopped when the button Ba1 is displayed.

Furthermore, in this case, the effect result of the operation effect is changed (the selection ratio of the effect result to be selected is changed) depending on the number of butterfly icons Bb that fly off based on one operation of the frame button 22. However, it is possible that more butterfly icons Bb take off based on one operation is more advantageous to the player than the case where fewer butterfly icons Bb take off (for example, an effect result indicating that a jackpot is won). should be configured so that is easily displayed.
By configuring in this way, when the number of butterfly icons Bb that are stopped at the time when the button Ba1 is displayed is large, an operation effect with a large number of button presses is executed, or a effect result that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to force the player to depress the frame button 22 while predicting whether an operation performance with a high possibility of being displayed is being executed.
Further, based on the first pressing operation of the frame button 22, the button Ba1 is continuously displayed without any of the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 taking off, and an effect of emitting light from the flower icons ha1 and ha2 is executed. can be configured to
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the forty-seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1763 to 1772. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and a sound lamp The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113, part of the configuration of the RAM 223, and part of the configuration of the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are changed. Other electrical configurations are the same, and descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1763(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1763(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1763(a), the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example is the ROM 202 (see FIG. 295(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above. A first winning random number table 202ja instead of the random number table 202la, a variation pattern selection table 202jb instead of the variation pattern selection table 202db, a second winning random number table 202jc instead of the second winning random number table 202lc, and a jackpot type selection table. It is different in that a jackpot type selection table 202jd is provided instead of 202ld and a second hit type selection table 202je is newly provided.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1764(a), the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ja will be specifically described. FIG. 1764(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ja. As shown in FIG. 1764 (a), the first per random number table 202ja is associated with the probability state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the special symbol), and the first per random number acquired The range in which the value of the counter C1 is determined to be a big hit is defined to be different, and for the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "0 to 2". In contrast, the big hit determination value is defined, and for the high probability state of the special symbol, the big hit determination value is defined for the range of the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 of "0 to 19".
In other words, the range that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 can take is 900 from "0 to 899", and the range that is judged to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is three from "0 to 2". Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/300 (3/900) in the low probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the range determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of special symbols is 20 of "0 to 19", so in the high probability state of special symbols, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/45 ( 20/900).
In this way, by varying the probability of winning the jackpot when the special symbol lottery is executed according to the probability state of the special symbols, the game state in which the player is likely to win the jackpot (the high probability state of the special symbols is The game can be motivated to play with the aim of transitioning to the set game state). In the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example, the same data table (first winning random number table 202ja) is used both when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed by referring to it, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of which special symbol lottery is executed. A different data table may be referred to in the 2 special symbol lottery to determine whether a big hit is won, and it is more difficult to perform in the normal state than in the 1st special symbol lottery, which is easier to perform in the normal state. The contents of the first winning random number table 202ja may be defined so that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to win the jackpot in the low-probability state of the special symbols.

By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery using the second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) acquired during the time saving state that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery is performed during the normal state. When executed, for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state while the special figure 2 hold is acquired, the jackpot is won more than the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. Since the easy second special symbol lottery can be executed, even for the player who has finished the time-saving state even though the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, has been set. It is possible to provide a privilege (execution of the second special symbol lottery that makes it easier to win a big hit than the first special symbol lottery). In addition, in order to end the time saving state with more special figure 2 reservations acquired, the player is motivated to play a game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservations until just before the time saving state ends. can be done.
Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202jb will be described with reference to FIG. 1766(a). FIG. 1766(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202jb. This variation pattern selection table 202jb, like the variation pattern selection table 202db (see FIG. 99) described above, is a data table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, and is set in the game state. A plurality of data tables corresponding to game states are defined so that different data tables are referenced depending on the game state.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1766 (a), in the normal table 202jb1 used in the state of setting the normal state as the gaming state, and in the state of setting the probability variable state or the first time saving state A table 202jb2 for probability variation/first time saving to be used and a second time saving table 202jb3 to be used in a state where the second time saving state is set are defined. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.
Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202jb will be described with reference to FIGS. 1766(b) and 1767. FIG. FIG. 1766(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202jb1. This normal table 202jb1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the variation time is longer when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win than when it is a loss. The variation pattern is defined to be easily selected, and the type of special symbol for which the lottery was executed, the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of special symbol variations after the end of the previous jackpot game), and the executed Different variation patterns are defined according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

First, the normal table 202jb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1766(b). FIG. 1766(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202jb1. In this normal table 202jb1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, the type of special design (symbol type) is the first special design (special design 1), the number of fluctuations is "1 to 890, 1001 ~", and the success/failure determination result (lottery result) is a big hit. When the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 14", normal (reach) with a variation time of 20 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 20 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "15 to 18", the variation pattern is normal (reach) with a variation time of 22 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + addition time of 2 seconds). When the value of the type selection counter CS1 is "19", normal (reach) with a variation time of 25 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + addition time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.
That is, in the forty-seventh control example, for the same type of variation pattern (normal reach), different lengths of variation time can be determined depending on the presence or absence of addition time. By configuring in this way, even when the same type of variation pattern is set, it is possible to vary the effect mode to be performed according to the length of the variation time to be performed.
Specifically, when the lottery result is winning and a winning variation pattern with an addition time of 0 seconds is received, as a result of the ready-to-win performance, the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot smoothly stops on the effective line. When an action is set and a hit variation pattern with an addition time of 2 seconds is received, as a result of the ready-to-win performance, a stop action is set after the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot once passes through the effective line and returns, When a hit variation pattern with an additional time of 5 seconds is received, as a result of the ready-to-win performance, the third pattern indicating the winning of the jackpot passes through the effective line, then circulates at high speed and stops on the effective line. A stop action is set to
By configuring in this way, the main production mode (normal) of the variable production is determined by the type of the variation pattern, and the length of the period during which the partial production of the variable production (stop action) is executed, and the production mode can be determined by the length of the addition time, it is possible to easily execute a variation performance rich in variations.

In addition, the type of special design (design type) is the first special design (special design 1), the number of fluctuations is "1 to 890, 1001 ~", and the winning judgment result (lottery result) is a big hit, When the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 149", super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "150 to 159", the variation pattern is super (reach) with a variation time of 32 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + additional time of 2 seconds). When the value of the type selection counter CS1 is "160 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 35 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + addition time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.
Then, the type of special design (design type) is the first special design (special design 1), the number of fluctuations is "1 to 890, 1001 ~", and the result of winning judgment (lottery result) is a big hit, and it is acquired When the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 189", SP (reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds (basic time of 60 seconds + additional time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 60 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "190 to 197", the SP (reach) with a variation time of 62 seconds (basic time of 60 seconds + addition time of 2 seconds) as the variation pattern is the acquired variation When the value of the type selection counter CS1 is "198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 65 seconds (basic time of 60 seconds + additional time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.
Next, the type of special design (design type) is the first special design (special design 1), the number of fluctuations is "1 to 890, 1001 ~", and the result of the judgment (lottery result) is out, When the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 174", the deviation of the variation time of 5 seconds (basic time of 5 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. When this deviation is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 5 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In addition, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "175 to 179", the deviation of the variation time of 7 seconds (5 seconds of basic time + 2 seconds of addition time) as the variation pattern is the acquired variation type selection counter If the value of CS1 is "180 to 194", the variation pattern is 20 seconds or 30 seconds (basic time 20 seconds or 30 seconds + additional time 0 seconds) out of reach is defined, and the acquired variation type selection counter If the value of CS1 is "195 to 197", the variation pattern is 22 seconds or 32 seconds (basic time 20 seconds or 30 seconds + additional time 2 seconds) out of reach is defined, and the acquired variation type selection When the value of the counter CS1 is "198", the fluctuation pattern is defined to be out of reach with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 35 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds or 30 seconds + addition time of 5 seconds).
On the other hand, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is "891 to 900", the success/failure determination result (lottery result) is a jackpot A, and the acquired variation type When the value of the selection counter CS1 is "0 to 6", normal (reach) with a variation time of 20 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 20 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "7 to 14", the variation pattern is normal (reach) with a variation time of 22 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + addition time of 2 seconds). When the value of the type selection counter CS1 is "15 to 19", normal (reach) with a variation time of 25 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + addition time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

In addition, the type of special design (design type) is the first special design (special design 1), the number of fluctuations is "891 to 900", the success/failure determination result (lottery result) is a jackpot A, and the acquired variation type When the value of the selection counter CS1 is "20 to 99", super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 124", the variation pattern is super (reach) with a variation time of 32 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + additional time of 2 seconds). When the value of the type selection counter CS1 is "125 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 35 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + additional time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. Then, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 65 seconds (basic time of 60 seconds + addition time of 5 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern. .
Then, the type of special design (design type) is the first special design (special design 1), the number of fluctuations is "891 to 900", and the success/failure determination result (lottery result) is big hits B and C, and acquired When the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 6", normal (reach) with a variation time of 20 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + additional time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 20 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "7 to 14", the variation pattern is normal (reach) with a variation time of 22 seconds (base time of 20 seconds + addition time of 2 seconds). When the value of the type selection counter CS1 is "15 to 19", normal (reach) with a variation time of 25 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + additional time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.
In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 119", super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. . When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "120 to 144", the variation pattern is super (reach) with a variation time of 32 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + additional time of 2 seconds). When the value of the type selection counter CS1 is "145 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 35 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + additional time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. Then, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 189", SP (reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds (basic time of 60 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern. 190 to 198”, SP (reach) with a variation time of 65 seconds (basic time of 60 seconds + addition time of 5 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern.
On the other hand, if the number of fluctuations is "891 to 900", the result of the decision (lottery result) is out, and the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 169", the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation time. A deviation of 5 seconds (5 seconds of basic time + 0 seconds of additional time) is defined. When this deviation is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 5 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Also, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 179", the deviation of the variation time of 7 seconds (basic time of 5 seconds + addition time of 2 seconds) as the variation pattern is the acquired variation type selection counter If the value of CS1 is "180 to 194", the variation pattern is defined as a variation time of 20 seconds or 30 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds or 30 seconds + additional time of 0 seconds) reach out, and the acquired variation type selection counter When the value of CS1 is "195, 196", the variation pattern is 22 seconds or 32 seconds (basic time 20 seconds or 30 seconds + additional time 2 seconds) out of reach is defined, and the acquired variation type selection When the value of the counter CS1 is "197, 198", the fluctuation pattern is defined to be out of reach with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 35 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds or 30 seconds + addition time of 5 seconds).

Then, when the type of special design (design type) is the second special design (special design 2), the number of fluctuations is "1 ~", that is, regardless of the number of fluctuations, the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) hits. When the value of the obtained variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 4", normal (reach) with a variation time of 20 seconds (basic time of 20 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. ing. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 20 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "5 to 198", super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern. . On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result (lottery result) is out, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 149", the variation time is 5 seconds (basic time 5 seconds + addition In the case of "150 to 198", the variation pattern is defined as a reach failure with a variation time of 30 seconds (basic time of 30 seconds + addition time of 0 seconds).
In addition, in the present 47th control example, as described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the number of variations (the number of special symbol variations after the previous jackpot game ends). ), the variation pattern in which a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is set can be determined according to the result of the success/failure determination. For the special symbol variation, it may be configured such that only a variation pattern with a fixed variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is determined regardless of the result of the determination.
By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation is easily executed in the normal state, that is, the normal symbol lottery executed in the normal state wins the long opening hit, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. And when a plurality of game balls enter, it is possible to execute a special figure 2 variation (second special symbol variation) of a fixed time (10 seconds), so the variation corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the normal state A single effect mode can be set as the effect mode of the effect.
Therefore, the game flow in which the electric accessary 640 wins the long open win during the normal state and the second special symbol lottery is executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this case, it is preferable that the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation when the second time saving state is set as the ceiling privilege is the same as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. By configuring in this way, the player can determine whether the second special symbol variation executed this time was performed during the normal state or during the second time saving state, depending on the variation time of the second special symbol variation. It is possible to suppress that it is grasped by Therefore, by unifying the production mode of the production executed when winning per long opening in the normal symbol lottery and the production executed based on the setting of the second time saving state, the player can On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to solve the problem described in this control example that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the ceiling privilege has been granted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1767(a), the contents defined in the variable probability/first time saving table 202jb2 will be described. FIG. 1767(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the variable probability/first time saving table 202jb2.
The second winning random number table 202jc is a data table referred to when determining the lottery result of normal symbols. Here, the contents of the second winning random number table 202jc will be described with reference to FIG. 1764(b). FIG. 1764(b) shows the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202jc. As shown in FIG. 1764(b), the second winning random number table 202jc is different from the second winning random number table 202lc (see FIG. 296(b)) in the tenth control example described above for each probability state of normal symbols. The difference is that the range of the second winning random number counter C4 determined to be different.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1764 (b), when the probability state of the normal symbol is "low probability state", the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 279" for the range If the lottery result "hit" is defined as "280 to 299" and the lottery result "loss" is defined as "high probability state", the value of the second random number counter C4 will be " A lottery result of "win" is defined for the range of "0 to 289", and a lottery result of "miss" is defined for the value of "290 to 299".

That is, in the 47th control example, regardless of the probability state of normal symbols, when the normal symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to win with a high probability. By configuring in this way, according to the result of the normal design lottery (according to the execution or non-execution of the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal design lottery), the probability of the currently set normal pattern It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state is the "low-probability state" or the "high-probability state".
The jackpot type selection table 202jd is, like the jackpot type selection table 202ld (see FIG. 297(a)) described above, a data table that is referenced when selecting the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. is.
Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202jd will be described with reference to FIG. 1765(a). FIG. 1765(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202jd. As shown in FIG. 1765(a), the jackpot type selection table 202jd determines the jackpot type by referring to different data tables according to the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) that have been won. As such, the special figure 1 jackpot table 202jd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the special figure 2 jackpot table 202jd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery It has tables 202jd2 and .
Next, with reference to FIG. 1765(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202jd1 will be described. FIG. 1765(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202jd1. As shown in FIG. 1765 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot table 202jd1 has three types of jackpot types (jackpot A50, jackpot B50, jackpot C50) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. stipulated.

Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 39”, “jackpot A50”, and “40 to 59”, “jackpot B50”, “60 "Jackpot C50" is defined for the range of ~99".
The jackpot type "jackpot A50" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A50" (0 to 39). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot A50" is 40% (40/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot B50" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B50" is 20 (40 to 59). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot B50" is 20% (20/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot C50" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the time-saving jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C50" is 40 (60 to 99). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot C50" is 40% (40/100).
That is, in the 47th control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A50, jackpot B50) is executed (determined) at a rate of 60%, and the time-saving jackpot (jackpot) is executed at a rate of 40% ( It is configured so that the jackpot C50) is executed (determined). Furthermore, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the 10-round game (jackpot A50, jackpot C50) is executed (determined) at a rate of 80%, and the 2-round game (jackpot B50) is executed at a rate of 20%. It is configured to be (determined).

In addition, in this 47th control example, when the probability variable jackpot is determined, the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the probability variable counter 203i are set to "10000", but as described above, When the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/50, so the variable probability state is substantially continued until the next jackpot win.
Therefore, among the three types of jackpot types (jackpot A50, jackpot B50, jackpot C50) determined when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is jackpot A50 (10 rounds of variable jackpot). ), and then the jackpot B50 (two-round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot C50 (10-round short-time jackpot) are the jackpot types that are most disadvantageous to the player. In addition, when the degree of play for the player is viewed from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game, the number of round games (number of rounds) executed in one jackpot game is Since the larger the number, the more advantageous the jackpot is to the player, the jackpot A50 and the jackpot C50 are the jackpot types that are advantageous to the player, and the jackpot B50 is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1765(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202jd2 will be described. FIG. 1765(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202jd2. As shown in FIG. 1765 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot table 202jd2 has three jackpot types (jackpot A50, jackpot B50, jackpot C50) in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. , The table 202jd1 for the special figure 1 jackpot described above is defined with a different selection ratio.
Specifically, "jackpot A50" for the range of "0 to 52" for the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, "jackpot B50" for the range of "53 to 59", "60 "Jackpot C50" is defined for the range of ~99".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot A50" is 53 (0 to 53). When the jackpot is won in the 2 special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining the "jackpot A50" is 53% (53/100).
In addition, among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B50" is 7 (53 to 59). , When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining the "jackpot B50" is 7% (7/100).
Finally, among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C50" (60 to 99). Therefore, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "big win C50" is 40% (40/100).
That is, in the 47th control example, the jackpot type A50, which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, is determined in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery rather than in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the rate of (execution) is high. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery can be a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, so the game state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed. A game state in which a second special symbol lottery is mainly executed (a time saving state, a variable probability state) is advantageous to a player in that a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. state. In addition, the time-saving state is set to a low probability state of special symbols, and the variable state is set to a high probability state of special symbols, so the probability of winning a jackpot in one special symbol lottery is higher than the time-saving state. is higher in the variable state. Therefore, between the time-saving state and the variable probability state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the variable probability state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in which the big win is likely to be won becomes a game state more advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this 47th control example, as shown in FIGS. 1765 (b) and (c), even if the first special symbol lottery is executed, even if the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability is changed when the jackpot is won. Although the ratio of determining the jackpot (the ratio of determining the time-saving jackpot) is configured to be the same, it is not limited to this, for example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the second It may be constructed so that the probability variable jackpot is more likely to be determined when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery than when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, or the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery. It may be configured so that the probability variable big win is more likely to be determined in the case of winning than in the case of winning the big win in the second special symbol lottery.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the ratio of setting the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game according to the special symbol type that has been won, so that the special symbol lottery is executed for the special symbol type. The game is aimed at shifting to a game state in which the type of special symbol lottery to be mainly executed is different in order to make the player more interested and to execute the special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to make a person willingly play a game.
Further, in the present 47th control example, as shown in FIGS. 1765(b) and (c), when the jackpot type (jackpot A50, jackpot B50) for which the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is determined, Regardless of the determined jackpot type, the same value (10000) is configured to be set in the time saving number counter 203h and the probability variable counter 203i, but not limited to this, the jackpot type corresponding to the probability variable jackpot However, according to the determined jackpot type, different values may be set to the time reduction counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203i.
By configuring in this way, even if the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the end condition (probability variable end condition) for ending the set probability variable state can be changed according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the length of the period during which the variable probability state continues.

Further, in this 47th control example, as shown in FIGS. 1765(b) and (c), when the jackpot type (jackpot C50) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends is determined, the same value (100) is configured to be set in the time-saving number counter 203h, but without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of jackpot types corresponding to the time-saving jackpot are provided, and even if it is a jackpot type corresponding to the time-saving jackpot , According to the determined jackpot type, it may be configured to set a different value to the time-saving counter 203h.
By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the set time saving state can be changed according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the length of the period during which the time saving state continues.
In addition, in this 47th control example, since it is configured to be able to execute the time saving symbol lottery in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, with respect to the length of the period in which the time saving state continues In addition to making the player more interested in executing more the second special symbol lottery, which makes it easier for the player to determine the kind of the big win (jackpot A54) more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery, when winning the big win, the time-saving symbol lottery is won. It is also possible to increase interest in increasing the number of times. In other words, even for players who did not win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving pattern lottery result is time saving pattern winning. Since it is possible to make the user expect that the number of times of occurrence is larger, it is possible to make the user more interested in the length of the period during which the time saving state (first time saving state) continues.
The second hit type selection table 202je is a data table that is referred to when setting a normal pattern hit type that is set when a winning determination is made in a lottery of normal symbols (second symbols). The pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example is configured to be able to set a different normal pattern winning type when winning in the normal pattern lottery, and different contents of the normal pattern winning type are set according to the set normal pattern winning type. A winning game is configured to be executable.

Here, the contents of the second winning type selection table 202je will be described with reference to FIG. 1764(c). FIG. 1764(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning type selection table 202je. As shown in FIG. 1764 (c), the second hit type selection table 202je includes the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of winning per normal pattern, the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the value of the second hit type counter C5 obtained. There are different types of normal figures per figure.
Specifically, the probability state of the normal design at the time of winning the normal design is the low probability state, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "0". That is, when the normal state is set, the value of the acquired second per type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 98", and the type per normal pattern "per normal pattern A" is "99" For the value of , per normal map type "per normal map B" is defined.
Here, when the game per normal pattern based on per normal pattern A is executed in the normal state, as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, "short opening (opening operation of 0.1 seconds once)" is performed. set. In addition, when the game per normal pattern based on the per normal pattern B is executed, "long opening (opening operation for 1 second three times)" is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. In other words, when winning in the normal symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the normal pattern winning game of long opening is executed at a rate of 1%.
When the short-open general pattern per game is executed, almost no game balls enter the second ball entrance 640 through the electric accessory 640a in the open state, and the long open general pattern per game is performed. When executed, a plurality of game balls can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 . And, during the normal symbol fluctuation indicating winning per normal pattern B per normal pattern B is set, the production (electric chew high probability mode production) shown in FIG. 1755 (a) is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 will soon be set.

Returning to FIG. 1764(c), the description is continued. The probability state of the normal design at the time of winning the normal design is a low probability state, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "1 or more". That is, when the second time saving state is set, the value of the acquired second per type counter C5 is "0", and the type per normal pattern "per normal pattern A" is "1 to 99”, the type per normal map “per normal map B” is defined. Then, when the normal pattern per game based on the normal pattern per A is executed, "short opening" is performed as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, and when the normal pattern per game based on the normal pattern per B is executed , "long opening" is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.
By configuring in this way, even during the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the normal pattern per game of "long open" as the normal pattern per game. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the second time saving state.
Next, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is always "1 or more", and the value of the acquired second per type counter C5 is in the entire range of "0 to 99" On the other hand, "B" is defined as the type of per normal map. Then, when the normal pattern winning game based on the "normal pattern per B" is executed, "long opening" is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.
In other words, during the high probability state of the normal pattern, when winning in the normal pattern per lottery, it is configured so that the long open normal pattern per game is always executed. As described above, in the present 47th control example, not only the high probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, first time saving state), but also the low probability state of normal symbols, the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 Even in a larger game state (second time saving state), it is possible to create a game state that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by a normal game.

By configuring in this way, the second time-saving state having the same performance as the first time-saving state without changing the probability state of the special pattern and the probability state of the normal pattern from the normal state as the ceiling privilege. can be given.
In addition, as described above, the normal pattern lottery in the second time-saving state is slightly more difficult to win than the normal pattern lottery in the first time-saving state. The rate at which the game is played is also set to be slightly lower, but the difference is such that it is difficult for a player who continues to play the game to discern the difference. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the currently set game state is the first time saving state or the second time saving state depending on the game contents based on the normal symbol lottery.
Therefore, the effect (for example, display of the number of remaining time reductions) that is executed across the first time reduction state and the second time reduction state can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1763(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1763(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1763(b), the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example has a special figure lottery counter 203ja and a ceiling standby flag 203jb in comparison with the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. , and a ceiling time reduction counter 203jc and a ceiling given flag 203jd are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the description thereof is omitted.

The special figure lottery counter 203ja is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of special symbols (the number of times of addiction), and the number of executions of the ceiling privilege special pattern lottery is the grant of the ceiling privilege. The counter value is referenced when determining whether the conditions are met.
Specifically, when it is determined that the special symbol low probability state is set in the ceiling determination process (see S8002H in FIG. 1775) executed in the special symbol determination process (see S201H in FIG. 1774) ( S8103H of FIG. 1775: Yes), that is, when the special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation) is started during the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the counter is incremented by 1 (S8104H of FIG. 1775). Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not the condition for giving the ceiling privilege (ceiling condition) is established (S8105H in FIG. 1775). In addition, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is the jackpot winning, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203ja is cleared to 0.
In addition, in this 47th control example, since it is configured to select the variation pattern based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja, the variation pattern is selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S252 in FIG. 1773). When selecting, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is referred to.
In the forty-seventh control example, as in the tenth control example described above, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the special symbol low probability state when determining whether or not the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. (Hamari number of times) is configured to refer to, and when the number of special symbol lotteries (Hamari number of times) executed during the special symbol low probability state reaches 900 times, ceiling benefits are granted Configure. As described above, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja is not synchronized with the number of special symbol lotteries that have been executed, but is configured so that the value of the counter is added in synchronization with the number of times of addiction.

In addition, in this 47th control example, the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the low probability state of the special symbol is added as the number of times of addiction. For example, a special design lottery for a specific special design type (first special design) out of a plurality of special design types (first special design, second special design) is executed. It may be configured to add the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja (add the number of times of hooking) only when the special symbol lottery is set, or the special symbol lottery Based on the fact that one special symbol lottery is executed when the special symbol lottery is executed when the special symbol lottery is executed when another game state (for example, the first time saving state) is set. It may be configured so that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja to be added (the number of times of Hamari) increases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining executions of the special symbol lottery (remaining hooking number) required until the ceiling privilege is awarded.
Furthermore, in the forty-seventh control example, only the condition for adding the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja is defined, and when the jackpot is won (when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is cleared), the special figure lottery counter 203ja is configured to be cleared to 0. Therefore, even if the number of hooks reaches 900 times and the second time-saving state (100 times of time-saving) is set as the ceiling privilege, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja is not cleared to 0. Therefore, between jackpot winnings, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established only once.
The value of the special symbol lottery counter 203ja is also added by the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of electric sapo state of normal symbols) imparted by the ceiling privilege. Then, even after the second time saving state is finished and the normal state is set, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la continues to be added until the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the forty-seventh control example, in the state where the normal state is set, by referring to the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la, the game state (ceiling privilege is It is possible to determine whether it is a normal state before the ceiling that is not granted) or a game state in which the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege cannot be established (normal state after the ceiling that is set after the ceiling privilege is granted). , By referring to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la when selecting the variation pattern, it is possible to vary the variation pattern selected between the normal state before the ceiling and the normal state after the ceiling.
In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the 47th control example, in the same way as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 10th control example described above, the second time-saving state given as a ceiling privilege is set. It may be configured such that the ceiling privilege can be given again to the player who did not. In this case, by clearing the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja to 0 at the timing when the ceiling privilege is granted, when the second time saving state of the time saving number of times 100 times is set, the second time saving state is The value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja becomes 100 at the time of completion. Therefore, when the game aiming at the ceiling privilege of the second time is performed, the number of times of the special symbol lottery to be executed in the left-handed game state can be easily made smaller than that of the game aiming at the ceiling privilege of the first time.

In the forty-seventh control example, the number of addictions to which the ceiling privilege is given is stipulated to be 900, but the number of addictions to which the ceiling privilege is given is not limited to this, and can be set randomly. Alternatively, based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, it may be configured to be able to shorten the number of times of addiction to which the ceiling privilege is given. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied.
The ceiling standby flag 203jb is a flag for indicating that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established in a state where the normal state is set, and when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established (the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja reaches 900). Then, in the time-saving setting process (see S205H in FIG. 1778) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the ceiling standby flag 203jb is determined (S8401H in FIG. 1778), and is set to ON. If it is determined (S8401H of FIG. 1778: Yes), the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established, and the ceiling privilege (second time saving state (time saving 100 times)) is granted (S8402H of FIG. 1778), then the ceiling standby flag 203jb is set off.
The ceiling time saving counter 203jc is a counter used to determine whether the end condition of the second time saving state (time saving 100 times) granted as a ceiling privilege is satisfied, and the condition for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied. "100" is set as a value for indicating the termination condition when the two-hour-saving state is set (see S8402H in FIG. 1778). Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc is greater than 0, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (see S8351H in FIG. 1777), and the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc after subtraction is By determining whether it is 0, it is determined whether the end condition of the second time saving state is satisfied (see S8352H in FIG. 1777). Here, when it is determined that the end condition of the second time saving state is satisfied (S8352H in FIG. 1777: Yes), processing for ending the second time saving state and setting the normal state is executed. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the second time saving state is set is a big hit and the big winning game is executed, similar to the time saving counter 203h described above The value is cleared to 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state from being set across the jackpot game and providing the player with an excessively advantageous game.
In addition, in this 47th control example, different counters (time saving counter 203h, Although it is configured to determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied using the ceiling time reduction counter 203jc), it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied using the same counter. good.

Ceiling granted flag 203jd is a flag for indicating that the ceiling privilege has been granted, and when the second time saving state set by the ceiling privilege ends, specifically, the ceiling time saving counter 203jc It is set to ON when the value is decremented to 0 (see S8355H in FIG. 1777). Then, in the ceiling determination process (see S8002H in FIG. 1775) for determining whether to give the ceiling privilege, the setting status is determined, and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S8102H in S1923: Yes), The processing for determining whether to give the ceiling privilege is skipped. In addition, it is set to OFF when a jackpot is won (see S203H in FIG. 1773).
That is, in the forty-seventh control example, the ceiling privilege is provided only once during the jackpot game. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the ceiling privilege from being excessively given to the player who continues to lose in the special symbol lottery and continues to win. Although detailed illustration is omitted, S1715H is executed when it is determined that the RAM erase switch has been operated (S1704H in FIG. 1780: Yes) in the start-up process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 1780). Also in the process of , the ceiling given flag 203jd is set to OFF. With this configuration, even when the ceiling provided flag 203jd is set to ON, by operating (turning ON) the RAM erasing switch, a game aiming at obtaining the ceiling privilege can be played again. You can have someone do it.
Next, referring to FIG. 1768, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1768(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-seventh control example, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of FIG.
First, referring to FIG. 1768(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1768(a), the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-seventh control example provides the reach mode selection table 222ja and addition The difference is that a time mode selection table 222jb and a one-shot notification mode selection table 222jc are added, and the rest is the same.

The ready-to-win state selection table 222ja defines the effect state (action content of the character 801) to be executed during the ready-to-win effect in association with the set game state, the lottery result, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. It is a data table that is In the forty-seventh control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 1748 to 1750, it is desired that the third symbol be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win as the effect mode of the character 801 executed during the ready-to-win effect. A first action (normal action) and a second action (loose action) in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss can be executed, and the set game state and , Depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, different production modes (normal action, off action) are configured to be selected.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1769, the contents defined in the reach mode selection table 222ja will be described in detail. FIG. 1769 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the reach mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 1769, in the reach mode selection table 222ja, if it is in the normal state, even if the lottery result is the same, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja, that is, different reach depending on the number of times Modes (performance modes) are stipulated, and different reach modes (performance modes) are stipulated according to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won during the variable probability state.
Specifically, when the game state is normal (normal state) and the lottery result is a jackpot A, that is, a probability variable jackpot, regardless of the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja, the acquired effect counter 223f For the entire range of the value "0 to 99", the normal action "mode A" is defined, and if the jackpot B, that is, the normal jackpot (time-saving jackpot), the special lottery number counter For the value of 223ja in the range of "0 to 849", "Mode A", which is a normal action, is defined for the entire range of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f of "0 to 99". Then, the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223ja is in the range of "850 to 900", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19", and the "mode A", which is a normal action, is , and the range of "20 to 99", "mode B", which is a deviating action, is defined.
Also, when the game state is normal (normal state) and the lottery result is out, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja is in the range of "0 to 849", the obtained effect counter 223f A normal action "mode A" is defined for the entire range of values "0 to 99". Then, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223ja is in the range of "850 to 900", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the normal action "mode A" is , and the range of "50 to 99", "mode B", which is a deviating action, is defined.

In other words, if a variable probability big win (big win A) is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the lottery result will be advantageous to the player regardless of the number of times of hooking. On the other hand, when a normal jackpot (jackpot B) is won, while the number of times of addiction is small (the value of the special drawing number counter 223ja is up to 849), it is normal to celebrate the jackpot winning. When the performance mode in which the character 801 moves by action is set, and the number of times of addiction increases (when the value of the special lottery number counter 223ja becomes 850 or more), it is more likely that the ceiling privilege will be given than winning the normal jackpot. Since a game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, it becomes easier to set the effect mode in which the character 801 moves in the missing action.
In addition, regarding the performance mode of the character 801 when the lottery result is lost and winning, the normal action is set during the period in which the normal action is set as the action during the ready-to-win performance regardless of the jackpot winning. When the number of times increases (when the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja becomes 850 or more), it is configured so that the deviated action is more likely to be selected than the normal action.
By constructing in this way, the action motion of the character 801 can be set without discomfort regardless of whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a loss.
On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state wins the variable probability big hit (jackpot A), the lottery result is advantageous to the player who is set to the variable probability state again, so the character 801 is always a normal action. is set. On the other hand, when the normal jackpot (jackpot B) is won, the jackpot win is won, but the jackpot win is disadvantageous to the player. . Also, if the lottery result is out, the value of the special lottery number counter 223ja for the range of "0 to 849", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f "0 to 99" for the entire range Therefore, "Mode A", which is a normal action, is defined. Then, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223ja is in the range of "850 to 900", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the normal action "mode A" is , and the range of "50 to 99", "mode B", which is a deviating action, is defined.

And, when the normal state is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state, the lottery result is either the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the loss, regardless of the value of the special drawing number counter 223ja , the normal action "mode A" is defined for the entire range of the obtained effect counter 223f value "0 to 99".
In the forty-seventh control example, as shown in FIGS. 1747(b) to 1751, by changing the action mode of the character 801a displayed during the variable effect, the ready-to-win effect being executed is canceled. It is configured so that the player can easily grasp whether it is better to have a performance result indicating a or a big win, but other display modes are variable. It may be configured such that the player can grasp the effect result (loss or big win) that is advantageous to the player as the effect result of the ready-to-win effect being executed.
In this case, for example, when the display screen shown in FIG. Icon) display mode (for example, eye display mode) can be changed, and a normal display mode (normal eye display mode) that is normally displayed and a special display mode that shows a burning eye In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to display, the game situation (game state) in which the ready-to-win effect is executed is more advantageous to the player when the game is lost than when the jackpot is won. state) and when the ready-to-win performance under execution is the ready-to-win performance showing the failure, the special display mode is configured to be set more easily than the normal display mode as the display mode of the main pattern, and the jackpot is won. When the game situation (game state) is more advantageous to the player than when the case is lost, and when the ready-to-win effect being executed is a ready-to-win effect indicating a big win, the display mode of the main symbol is used. It is preferable to make the special display mode easier to set than the normal display mode.
By configuring in this way, regardless of the game state or the result of the ready-to-win effect, it is advantageous for the player to display the special display mode as the display mode of the main symbol, so that it is easy for the player to understand. performance can be provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1747(a), when the reach state of the third symbol (even number symbol) including the possibility of winning the normal jackpot is established in the variable probability state, the player presses the frame button 22. By doing so, when the display mode of the main symbol that is being displayed in a variable display becomes a special display mode, the display mode indicating the out of reach (result indicating the outage) is displayed than when the special display mode does not occur. In addition, even when a display mode indicating a big win (symbols are aligned) is displayed, the possibility of winning a variable probability big win should be increased.

By configuring in this way, when the main symbol sz that is variably displayed in the special display mode is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a disadvantageous result for the player (a display mode showing an even-numbered symbol jackpot in the probability variable state). Even if there is, it is possible to easily maintain the possibility of obtaining an advantageous result for the player, so that it is possible to easily make the player interested in whether or not the special display mode is displayed.
In addition, the action mode of the character 801a executed in the forty-seventh control example and the display mode of the main symbol sz during variable display are configured to be variable, and by combining each mode, the current game situation, The player may be able to predict the effect result that is advantageous to the player. In the case of the special display mode, there is a game situation in which the performance result indicating the failure is more advantageous to the player than the performance result indicating the jackpot winning as the performance result of the ready-to-win effect, and in this state, the effect result of the ready-to-win effect is obtained. When the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed as , after that, the performance (promoting performance) in which the main pattern sz is changed to the display mode indicating the winning of the probability variable jackpot is easily executed.
That is, in a state in which "mode B" is displayed as the action mode of the character 801a, when the display mode of the main symbol sz is the special display mode, which effect result is displayed as the effect result of the variable effect. Even in such a case, it is preferable to configure the game so that the game situation becomes more advantageous to the player. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind from when the ready-to-win effect is executed until the effect result of the ready-to-win effect is displayed.
Furthermore, in the forty-seventh control example, regardless of the number (even or odd) attached to the main symbol sz, the action mode of the character 801a is determined so that the effect result of the ready-to-win effect can be suggested. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the rate at which an effect result that is advantageous to the player is obtained differs depending on the type of the number attached to the main symbol sz.

In this case, for example, a pachinko machine configured to be executed only when a ready-to-win effect of even-numbered symbols is executed in a state in which a variable probability state is set, and a desired effect to be missed satisfies the conditions. 10, when the ready-to-win effect is executed with the main pattern sz marked with "4" among the even-numbered patterns, and when the ready-to-win effect is executed with the main pattern sz marked with "6". The performance result of the performance is constituted so as to have different ratios of failure, and the main pattern sz with ``4'' is configured to be more likely to be out than the main pattern sz with ``6''. good to do Then, while the ready-to-win effect is being executed with the main symbol sz to which "6" is attached, if the desired effect (for example, the action of mode B) is performed, "4" is added. While the ready-to-win performance is being executed with the main symbol sz that has been drawn, the performance result of the ready-to-win performance is more likely to be lost than when the performance (for example, the action of mode B) desired to be missed is executed. Good to configure.
The addition time mode selection table 222jb is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode when a variation pattern command including an addition time is received. The pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example defines the variation pattern type corresponding to the basic time (basic variation time) when selecting the variation pattern with the main controller 110, and for the basic time 1766(b)).
On the side of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to the basic presentation mode (normal, super, SP, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern type, the addition time mode corresponding to the addition time can be determined as the variation presentation. there is By configuring in this way, since the addition time mode using the addition time can be added to the variable performance executed in the basic performance mode, the effect of enhancing the performance effect of the variable performance can be obtained. There is
Here, the contents of the addition time mode selection table 222jb will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 1770 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the addition time mode selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 1770, the addition time mode selection table 222jb contains the variation pattern type (basic effect mode) included in the received variation pattern command, the addition time, and the number of variations (the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja ) and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f, six types of effect modes (effect A to effect F) are defined.

In the forty-seventh control example, as addition time aspects using the addition time, a freeze effect of delaying the timing of starting the variation of the third symbol, a variable time addition effect of extending the time during which the third symbol variation is fluctuating at high speed, It is configured to be able to execute a premium effect that indicates winning a jackpot, and when a variation pattern command with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (indicating winning a jackpot) is received, a long-time freeze effect and a premium effect are executed. When a variation pattern command with a low expectation of winning a jackpot (indicating failure) is received, the variation time addition effect is easily executed.
In other words, the higher the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, the more easily the player can notice the performance mode as the addition time mode. By constructing in this way, the player who has noticed that the variable performance to which the addition time mode is given is executed can be made to play while expecting a big win.
Specifically explaining the contents of the addition time mode selection table 222jb, when the variation pattern type is "normal (basic time 20 seconds)" and the addition time is 2 seconds, regardless of the value of the special figure lottery counter 223ja First, the effect mode "effect A" is defined for the range of "0 to 89" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and the effect mode "effect B" is defined for the range "90 to 99". It is Also, if the additional time is 5 seconds, regardless of the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223ja, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 19", and the effect mode "effect C" is specified. , and an effect mode "effect D" is defined for the range of "20 to 99".
On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is "super (basic time 30 seconds)" and the addition time is 2 seconds, regardless of the value of the special drawing lottery counter 223ja, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 49 , and the effect mode 'effect B' is defined for the range '50-99'. Also, if the additional time is 5 seconds, regardless of the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223ja, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 89", and the effect mode "effect C" is defined. , and an effect mode "effect D" is defined for the range of "90 to 99".

Finally, when the variation pattern type is "super (basic time 60 seconds)" and the addition time is 5 seconds, regardless of the value of the special drawing lottery counter 223ja, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to An effect mode "effect C" is defined for the range of "49", and an effect mode "effect D" is defined for the range "50 to 99". In addition, when the addition time is 6 seconds, when the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223ja is "1", that is, when determining the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game. In, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is defined for the entire range of "0 to 99", the effect mode "effect E" is defined, and the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja is "2 ~", The effect mode "effect F" is defined for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 79", and the effect mode "effect E" is defined for the range "80 to 99". there is
Here, description will be given of the effect contents corresponding to each effect mode. The effect mode "effect A" is a effect mode in which the high speed fluctuation period is extended by 2 seconds corresponding to the addition time without executing the freeze effect. In other words, it becomes an effect mode in which it is difficult for the player to notice that the effect corresponding to the additional time has been executed. In the forty-seventh control example, since the shortest time of the addition time is stipulated to be 2 seconds, "effect A" is the location where the addition time is used (high-speed fluctuation period) and the length of the addition time (2 seconds). In both cases, the effect mode of the addition effect is the most difficult to be noticed by the player.
Next, the effect mode "effect B" is a effect mode in which the freeze effect is executed for 2 seconds. In this case, the addition time is 2 seconds, the freeze performance period is 2 seconds, and the entire period of the addition time is used for the freeze performance period, so the remaining time of the addition time is 0 seconds and the high-speed fluctuation period is not extended.
The effect mode "effect C" uses an additional time of 5 seconds to execute a freeze effect for 2 seconds, and the high-speed fluctuation period is extended by 3 seconds. The effect mode is to execute the effect for 5 seconds, the "effect E" is the effect mode to execute the freeze effect for 6 seconds using the additional time of 6 seconds, and the "effect F" is the effect mode to execute the freeze effect using the additional time of 6 seconds. Execution is performed for 5 seconds, and the mode of effect is to extend the high-speed fluctuation period by 1 second.

That is, in the forty-seventh control example, the additional time is used to set the freeze effect period to "2 seconds", "5 seconds", or "6 seconds". It is configured to extend the remaining time in which the high-speed fluctuation period is extended by extending the high-speed fluctuation period.
The one-shot notification mode selection table 222jc is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode when the one-shot notification effect is executed as the variable effect. In the forty-seventh control example, this one-shot announcement mode selection table 222jc is used to enable execution of different types of one-shot announcement effects.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1771, detailed contents of the instant notification mode selection table 222jc will be described. FIG. 1771 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the instant notification mode selection table 222jc. As shown in FIG. 1771, the one-shot announcement mode selection table 222jc defines different effects modes based on the result of the special symbol lottery, whether or not there is a hit hold, and the value of the acquired effects counter 223f.
Specifically, when the lottery result is "winning" and the winning pending is "yes", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the flower notification mode is selected as the one-shot notification mode. is "notice 3 seconds after the start", as a butterfly notification mode, at the button press timing "0 s to 3 s", the next hit notice (next change hit notice) at "3 s to 5 s", "no operation" No notification is specified, and for the range of "50 to 99", the flower notification mode is "notice when button is pressed" as the one-shot notification mode, and the button pressing timing "0s to 5s" is next as the butterfly notification mode. The notice of the change hit and the notice of the hit this time are defined as "no operation".

In addition, when the lottery result is "win" and the winning suspension is "no", the flower notification mode is set to "start 3 seconds later notification”, as a butterfly notification mode, the current hit notification is specified at the button press timing “0 s to 3 s”, the hit type is announced at “3 s to 5 s”, and there is no notification at “no operation”, and “50 to 99”. ”, as the one-shot notification mode, the flower notification mode is “notify when the button is pressed”, and as the butterfly notification mode, the next change is announced at the button press timing “0 s to 5 s”, and “no operation” is this time Notification is provided.
Then, if the lottery result is "miss" and the hit hold is "yes", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the flower notification mode is set to "non "notice", as a butterfly notification mode, no notification at the button press timing "0s to 5s", "no operation" is defined as the next hit notification, and for the range of "50 to 99", as a one-shot notification mode , the flower notification mode is "non-announcement", and the butterfly notification mode is defined to be the next-hit announcement at the button pressing timing "0 s to 5 s" and no notification at "no operation". Finally, when the lottery result is "loss" and the winning hold is "no", the flower notification mode is selected as the one-shot notification mode for the entire range of the acquired effect counter 223f value of "0 to 99". In the "non-notification", as a butterfly notification mode, no notification is provided at button pressing timings "0s to 5s" and no notification is provided at "no operation".
Returning to FIG. 1768(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1768(b), the RAM223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example is, for the RAM223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, a special figure lottery counter 223ja, a ceiling time saving medium counter 223jb, effect mode storage area 223jc, prefetch effect execution flag 223jd, variable time counter 223je, SW effective period timer 223jf, post-startup lottery counter 223jg.
The special figure lottery number counter 223ja, like the special figure lottery number counter 223lc of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, is the execution number of special symbol lotteries for establishing the condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the number of times of addiction). When a command for indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja measured by the main controller 110 is received (S4306H in FIG. 1784: Yes), the received command indicates A value is set (see S4307H in FIG. 1784). Then, it is referred to when special symbol fluctuation is stopped (see S4606H in FIG. 1788). It is also referred to when executing the process of selecting the reach mode (see S5302H in FIG. 1794) and the process of selecting the addition time mode corresponding to the addition time (see S5112H in FIG. 1792).

The ceiling time reduction counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the value related to the content of the ceiling privilege (the number of times of time reduction) previously notified to the player, and the value is set when the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling is set. set. Then, the value is subtracted each time the special symbol variation is executed, and when it is determined that the value after the subtraction is 1, the status of the normal symbol variation is determined, and whether or not to extend the high-probability mode performance is determined. .
The effect mode storage area 223jc is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect mode determined by various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 . Based on the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc, it is possible to read out the currently set effect mode and the previously set effect mode.
The read-ahead effect execution flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the read-ahead effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the read-ahead effect is being executed. Specifically, in the winning command process (see S4202H in FIG. 1786), when the prefetch effect other than the pending symbol change effect is set (S4506H in FIG. 1786: No), it is set to ON (S4508H in FIG. 1786) , the setting status is discriminated each time a new winning command is received (S4502H in FIG. 1786). Then, while the look-ahead effect execution flag 223jd is set to ON, a new look-ahead effect is not set.
In addition, the setting status is determined in the fluctuation effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) (S5101H in FIG. 1792), and if it is set to ON, and if it is the final change to be the target of the look-ahead effect ( S5103H in FIG. 1792: Yes), it is set to OFF.

The fluctuation time counter 223je and the SW effective period timer 223jf have the same contents as the configurations with the same names used in the above-described control examples, and the description thereof will be omitted.
The after-startup lottery counter 223jg is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and is executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. A value of 100 is set in the raising process (see FIG. 1781) (see S4001H in FIG. 1781). Then, in the production mode setting process (see S4903H in FIG. 1791), the counter value is decremented by 1 (S5003H), and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0 (S5004H: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 The number of remaining special pattern fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is given is displayed on the display surface of .
In the forty-seventh control example, as shown in FIG. The number of remaining special symbol variations is not displayed until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a period in which the player is allowed to execute the game without knowing the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is granted, so that the ceiling privilege is suddenly granted. We can provide you with exciting games.
In addition, immediately after the amusement hall opens, the state in which the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations is not displayed continues. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the number of times of hooking on the previous day is in a state of being reset. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed only for the pachinko machine 10 with a large number of hits at the end of business on the previous day, and to improve the operation of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1772, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 47th control example will be described. FIG. 1772 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1772, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example in that the work RAM 233 is provided with a stop symbol storage area 233ja. different, otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The stop symbol storage area 233ja is a storage area for storing the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. In the stop symbol storage area 233ja, when it is determined that the display stop symbol storage command is received in the command determination process executed by the display control device 114 (see S6302H in FIG. 1797), the stop symbol being set is stored. is stored (S6403H in FIG. 1797). Then, in the stop type command process (see S6401H in FIG. 1798), the stored information is read (see S6601H in FIG. 1798), and the stop pattern based on the read information is set (see S6603H in FIG. 1798). . By configuring in this way, the display mode of the stop symbol set by the display control device 114, that is, the information not managed by the sound lamp control device 113 can be used as the effect mode of the variable effect.
In the forty-seventh control example, the stop pattern (stop display mode) of the third pattern is configured to be controlled by the display control device 114. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the device 113 may be configured to be able to determine up to the stop symbol (stop display mode) of the third symbol. With such a configuration, there is no need to use a configuration for storing the created information regarding the stop display mode for the display control device 114 .
<About control processing contents of main controller 110 in the 47th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1773 to 1798, the content of the control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the tenth control example described above. The pachinko machine 10 of the forty-seventh control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example described above in that a process for setting a limit on the number of times the ceiling privilege is given is added, and it is used for various lotteries. The difference is that part of the processing content is changed and that part of the processing based on the normal symbol lottery is changed.

Specifically, instead of the special symbol variation processing (see S30104 of FIG. 302), the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 1773) is replaced with the normal symbol variation processing (see S30106 of FIG. 308), and the normal symbol variation processing is performed. (S301H in FIG. 1779) is different in that the start-up process (see FIG. 309) is replaced with the start-up process (see FIG. 1780). Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1773, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104H) will be described. FIG. 1773 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104H). As shown in FIG. 1773, the special symbol variation processing (S104H) replaces the special symbol determination processing (S30251) with respect to the above-described special symbol variation processing (see S30104 in FIG. 302) and special symbol determination processing (S201H). The difference is that the update process (S204H) is performed instead of the update process (S253), and the time saving setting process (S205H) is performed instead of the time saving setting process (S30254). Moreover, it is different in that the processing contents to be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation indicating the jackpot winning has passed are different. Other than that, they are identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1773, the differences will be described in detail. Special symbol variation processing (S104H) is executed, and when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the processing of S217 (S217: Yes), various elements (flag, counter ), the jackpot start flag is set to ON (S218), the values of the time reduction counter 203h, the ceiling time reduction counter 203jc, and the probability variation counter 203i are reset (S202H), and the ceiling granted flag 203kd is set to OFF. (S203H), set a special figure determination command (S220), and terminate this process.
In this way, by setting the ceiling granted flag 203kd to OFF based on the jackpot winning, when the jackpot is won in a state where the ceiling privilege (second time saving state) is given, the ceiling again after the jackpot game ends Measurement of the counter for giving a privilege (2nd time saving state) can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1774, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S201H) will be described. FIG. 1774 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S201H). This special symbol determination process (S201H) is configured not to execute the time reduction symbol lottery (time reduction lottery) with respect to the special symbol determination process (see S30251 in FIG. 303) of the tenth control example described above. The difference is that the ceiling determination process (S8002H) is executed instead of the determination process (S38051), and the other processing contents are the same.
When the special symbol determination process (S201H) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S8001), and the lottery result (jackpot) determination result) is determined based on the first winning random number table 202ja. is obtained (S8001H), and it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a jackpot winning (S8003). When it is determined that the jackpot is won (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to the jackpot (S8004), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the first The jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the design display device 37 is set (S8005), and this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the process of S8003 (S8003: No), then the ceiling determination process is executed (S8002H), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1775, the contents of the ceiling determination process (S8002H) will be described. FIG. 1775 is a flow chart showing the details of the ceiling determination process (S8002H). In this ceiling determination process (S8002H), it is determined whether the special symbol lottery to be executed this time is a special symbol lottery that can update the granting condition (the number of hooks) for granting the ceiling privilege, and based on the determination result Processing for updating the granting condition (number of times of addiction), processing for determining whether the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied by the updated number of times of addiction, and processing to indicate that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied and a process for holding the information until the conditions for setting the ceiling privilege are satisfied.

When the ceiling determination process (S8002H) is executed, first, the current game state is read out from the game state storage area 203g (S8101H), and it is determined whether or not the ceiling given flag 203kd is set to ON (S8102H). If it is determined that the granted flag 203kd is set to ON (S8102H: Yes), the ceiling privilege has already been granted. This processing ends without updating the .
That is, in the forty-seventh control example, when the ceiling privilege is given, the ceiling given flag 203kd is set to ON, and while the ceiling given flag 203kd is set to ON, the ceiling determination process (S8002H) It is configured so that the processing of is not executed. Then, when a jackpot game is executed, the ceiling given flag 203kd is set to OFF. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the ceiling privilege from being given a plurality of times between jackpot games, and to prevent the privilege from being given excessively to players who have not won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. can be done.
Although detailed description is omitted, the setting state of the ceiling given flag 203kd can be set to the initial state (off) by operating the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. By configuring in this way, the normal state in which the ceiling privilege is not provided can be shifted to the normal state in which the ceiling privilege can be provided without going through the jackpot winning.
In the process of S8102H, if it is determined that the ceiling given flag 203kd is not set to ON (S8102H: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special symbol low probability state (S8103H ). When it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S8103H: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja (S8104H), and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja after addition has reached 900. (S8105H).

In the process of S8105H, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja has not reached 900 (S8105H: No), set the state command including information indicating the current value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja ( S8106H), this processing ends. The state command set by the process of S8106H is output to the audio lamp controller 113 in the same manner as the other state commands set in the second control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a state command indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja is received, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja is updated. As a result, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja, that is, the number of hooks can be determined also on the sound lamp control device 113 side.
On the other hand, in the process of S8105H, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203ja is 900, that is, if it is determined that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied (S8105H: Yes), the ceiling standby flag 203jb is turned on (S8107H), a state command including information indicating that the ceiling is waiting is set (S8108H), and this processing ends.
As described above, in the 47th control example, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of addictions) executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches the specified value (900 times), the ceiling A special symbol lottery that satisfies the update condition of the number of times of addiction is executed instead of updating (adding) the number of times of addiction corresponding to all the special symbol lotteries that are executed so as to establish the conditions for granting the privilege. In the case, it is configured to update (add) the number of times of addiction (value of special figure lottery counter 203ja).
By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game can be made different from the number of times of addiction. Even if it is specified, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the number of times of addiction reaches a specific number. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing (the number of special symbol lottery times) the ceiling privilege will be given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1776, the contents of the update process (S204H) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104H in FIG. 1773) will be described. FIG. 1776 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S204H). This update process (S204H) is a process that is executed when the variation time of the special symbol variation has passed (when the variation is stopped) in the same way as the above-described update process (see S221 in FIG. 44), and the probability variation state continues. A process for updating the remaining period of the period set by doing and the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.
When the update process (S204H) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203i is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current is a special symbol high probability state (S8301), and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 0 If it is determined to be greater than (S8301: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is decremented by 1 (updated) (S8302). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S8303), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, if the current is a normal symbol high probability state (S8303: Yes), time saving Subtract 1 from the value of the counter 203h (S8304), determine whether the value of the probability variable counter 203i after updating or the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S8305), and if determined to be 0 (S8305: Yes), set the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203g (S8306), set the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the state command indicating the current game state (S8307), then, It is determined whether the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc is greater than 0 (S8301H), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S8301H: Yes), the ceiling time saving update process is executed (S8302H) and this process ends. . Moreover, when it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S8301H (S8301H: No), the process ends without executing the process of S8302H.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1777, the processing contents of ceiling time saving update processing (S8302H) are explained. FIG. 1777 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling time saving update process (S8302H). In this ceiling time saving update process (S8302H), the update process for the second time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) is executed.
When the ceiling time saving update process (S8302H) is executed, first, the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc is subtracted by 1 (S8251H), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc after subtraction is 0 (S8252H), If it is determined that it is not 0 (1 or more) (S8252H: Yes), a state command indicating the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 203jc is set (S8253H), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8252H, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc is 0 (S8252H: Yes), the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S8354H), and the ceiling granted flag 203kd is turned on (S8355H), set the state command to indicate that the ceiling time saving (second time saving state) has ended and the normal state has been set (S8356H), and end this process.
Next, the contents of the time saving setting process (S205H) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1778 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling time saving update process (S8302H). In this ceiling time saving update process (S8302H), when the granting condition of the second time saving state which is the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the process for setting the second time saving state is executed.
When the ceiling time saving update process (S8302H) is executed, it is first determined whether the ceiling standby flag 203jb is set to ON (S8401H), and the ceiling standby flag 203jb is not set to ON, that is, the ceiling privilege is given If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (S8401H: No), this process is terminated. In the processing of S8401H, if it is determined that the ceiling standby flag 203jb is set to ON (S8401H: Yes), 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and 100 is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc (S8402H) , The ceiling standby flag 203jb is set to off (S8403H), the second time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S8404H), the value of the time saving counter 203h, the value of the ceiling time saving counter 203jc, the time saving state type (second Time saving state) is set (S8405H), and the process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1779, the contents of the normal symbol variation process (S301H) will be described. FIG. 1779 is a flow chart showing the details of the normal symbol variation process (S301H). This normal symbol variation process (S301H) is different from the above-described normal symbol variation process (see S30106 in FIG. 308), according to the set game state, the process of setting the type at the time of winning and the variation time The difference is that the opening and closing control contents of the electric accessory 640a to be executed as a game per normal figure are different from the process of determining, and the rest is the same.

In this 47th control example, as a state (electric sapo state) in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, a state in which a high-probability state of normal symbols is set (first time-saving state, probability variable state ), and the state (second time saving state) in which the electric sapo state in the low probability state of the normal pattern is set can be set.
Specifically, the electric sapo state (probability variable state, first time short state) set based on the jackpot winning, and the electric sapo state set based on the jackpot winning of the ceiling privilege (high probability state of the normal pattern) ) and are configurable.
Specifically, the electric sapo state in the high probability state of the normal pattern has a slightly higher probability of hitting the normal pattern than the electric sapo state in the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is set slightly shorter. However, in a state in which game balls are continuously shot, the frequency of game balls entering the second ball inlet 640 is the same.
By configuring in this way, even when the low-probability state of the normal symbol is set, the control (electric support control) that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is executed. can be done. In addition, in each control example including the ninth control example and the tenth control example described above, the time saving state given as a ceiling privilege, and the time saving pattern lottery (time saving lottery) will be given when the time saving pattern winning (time saving winning) is won. As a time saving state, that is, a time saving state that is set without winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, a technique for setting a high probability state of normal symbols has been described. Of course, it is possible to divert the electric sapo state in the stochastic state.

By configuring in this way, even though the special symbol lottery has not won a jackpot, there is no need to perform the process of changing the probability state of the normal symbols from the low probability state to the high probability state. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 in which the process of increasing the probability state (shifting from the low probability state to the high probability state) is executed only based on the winning of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the monitoring process for the act of illegally increasing the probability state of various symbols.
Next, referring to FIG. 1780, the start-up processing of main controller 110 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1780 is a flow chart showing the details of the start-up process of main controller 110 in the forty-seventh control example. As shown in Figure 1780, in the startup process of the main controller 110 in the 47th control example, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has started up normally (S1707H: Yes), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is shown. A process of transmitting a state command containing information to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710H), and a process of transmitting a state command containing information stored in the game state storage area 203g to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1711H). and are different from the start-up process in each control example described above. Otherwise, they are identical.
With this configuration, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted, the information indicating the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 when the power supply is restored. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to properly set an effect to be executed based on the game situation of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1781 to 1796, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, a part of the processing contents of the start-up processing and the main processing is changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 1783) instead of command determination processing (see S4103H in FIG. 1783), changing display setting processing (see S4104H in FIG. 1790) instead of changing display setting processing (see FIG. (see S4101H in FIG. 1795) is provided instead of (see S4101H in FIG. 1795), and furthermore, the effect update process (see S4102H in FIG. 1796) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1781, the start-up processing of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1781 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-up process. As shown in FIG. 1781, the start-up process in the forty-seventh control example differs from the start-up process in the tenth control example in that a process of setting the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is added. is doing.
When the start-up process is executed, first, the same processes from S4001 to S4011 as the above-described start-up process are executed, and then the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is set to 100 (S4001H), and this process is started. finish.
The value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg set to a value of 100 in the process of S4001 is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed, and the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg reaches 0. In addition, the player is notified of the number of special symbol lotteries (a value obtained by subtracting the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la from 900) required to give the ceiling privilege. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is given immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the pachinko machine 10 having a large number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is given from being lowered.
In the forty-seventh control example, in order to prevent the number of remaining special symbol lotteries from being notified to the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the power is turned on, the remaining special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times). Although it is configured so that the number of symbol lotteries is not notified, it is not limited to this. The number of remaining special symbol lotteries may be notified when it reaches, or the number of remaining special symbol lotteries may be notified when the result of the executed special symbol lottery is a specific loss. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the number of remaining special symbol lotteries is reported, so that the pachinko machine 10 to which the number of remaining special symbol lotteries is not reported is played. It can increase motivation.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of acquiring timing information such as the current time and the elapsed time after the power is turned on, the number of remaining special symbol lotteries can be notified based on the elapsed time after the power is turned on. Well, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at 9:00 am in order to open the amusement center at 10:00 am, the timing information indicating that 3 hours have passed since the power was turned on is acquired. Alternatively, when the time information indicating 0:00 pm is acquired, it is preferable to configure so that the number of remaining special symbol lotteries can be notified. In this way, the number of remaining special symbol lotteries can be notified according to the elapsed time, so that the game can be played by a player who intends to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 notified of the number of remaining special symbol lotteries. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being left for a long time in a state in which the number of remaining special symbol lotteries is not notified and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 being lowered.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1782, the processing contents of the main processing in the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1782 is a flow chart showing the details of the main process in the forty-seventh control example. In this main process, frame button input monitoring/effect setting process (see S4101H in FIG. 1795), effect update process (see S4102H in FIG. 1796), and command determination process (see S4102H in FIG. 1783 in S4103H) and a variable display setting process (see S4104H in FIG. 1790), but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1783, the contents of the command determination process (S4103H) executed in the main process (see FIG. 1782) in the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1783 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S4103H).
When the command determination process (S4103H) is executed, for the command determination process (see S34182 in FIG. 310) in the tenth control example described above, the contents of the process to be executed when the state command is received and the winning command are received. The processing content to be executed when the pattern confirmation command is received, the processing content to be executed when the pattern confirmation command is received, and the general pattern related command (among the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the processing related to the normal symbol lottery A control process is executed in which the content of the process to be executed when a command for indicating the result is received is different.

Specifically, when the command determination process (S4103H) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a status command has been received (S4201). Execute (S4201H) and terminate this process. The state command reception process (S4201H) executed in S4201H is, when a command (state command) relating to the game state is received, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information included in the state command. 1784, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.
If it is determined in the processing of S4201 that the status command has not been received (S4201H: No), the same processing of S4203 to S4211 as the command determination processing in the tenth control example (see S34182 in FIG. 310) is executed. , If it is determined that a winning command has been received in the process of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4202H), and this process ends. This winning command process (S4202H) is based on the information contained in the winning command, that is, the values of various counters related to the special symbol lottery, or the information related to the preliminary determination results for the values of the various counters. A process for determining an effect mode of the look-ahead effect to be executed on the face is executed. Details of the winning command process (S4202H) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not the design determination command has been received (S4213), and if it is determined that the design determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), sets the stop display of the third symbol (S4214), executes stop time effect setting processing (S4203H), and ends this processing. This stop time effect setting process (S4203H) is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, for example, based on the special symbol being stopped and displayed. Then, a process for setting an effect mode indicating the end of the period effect for which the end condition is satisfied is executed. The detailed contents of the stop effect setting process (S4203H) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (S4213: No), S4217 and S4218, which are the same as the command determination process in the tenth control example (see S34182 in FIG. 310) If it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received in the process of S4217 (S4217: No), then it is determined whether the general figure related command has been received (S4204H), and the general figure related When it is determined that the command has been received (S4204H: Yes), the normal map related process is executed (S4205H), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4204H, if it is determined that the normal figure related command has not been received (S4204H: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this process ends.

General figure related command to determine the presence or absence of reception in S4204H is a command related to the normal symbol lottery executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, specifically, the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal symbol variation A command, a normal pattern per game start command for indicating the start of a normal pattern per game (normal per pattern game), and a normal pattern per end command for indicating the end of the normal per pattern game Show commands including at least there is
In this way, related command groups are set for various commands set by the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. , when determining the command group to be set in the received command, for example, information corresponding to the command group is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the beginning or end) of the address that contains information indicating the contents of each command. It should be configured to set. With this configuration, when various commands are received, first, the process corresponding to the command group is determined, the corresponding command group is specified based on the determination result, and the process corresponding to the specified command group is determined. can be executed as a subroutine.
Next, referring to FIG. 1784, the contents of the status command reception process (S4201H) executed in the command determination process (see S4103H in FIG. 1783) will be described. FIG. 1784 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process (S4201H). In this state command receiving process (S4201H), the game state based on the information included in the state command received from the main control unit 110 is different from the state command receiving process (see S34251 in FIG. 311) in the tenth control example described above. is changed to the time saving state (S4303H: Yes) to change the processing content to be executed, and to change the processing when receiving a state command including information indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203ja It is different in that Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.
When the state command reception process (S4201H) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (S4301H). If it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4301H: No), the process proceeds to S4306H. On the other hand, in the process of S4301H, when it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4301H: Yes), the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g is shifted to the command received from the main controller 110 this time. The corresponding game state is set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S4302H).

The sub-state setting area 223g has a storage area capable of separately storing current information indicating the currently set game state and past information indicating the previously set game state. In the processing of S4301H, the game state currently stored as information and the game state indicated by the information included in the state command received this time are compared to determine whether they are the same. Then, if they are not the same, it is determined that there is a change in the game state, and in the processing of S4302H, the information stored as the current information is shifted to the past information, and the game state included in the state command received this time is changed. The information shown is stored as current information.
With this configuration, in the 47th control example, not only the currently set game state but also the past game state can be read out. Different effects can be executed based on which game state the game state is shifted to. Therefore, various effects can be executed according to the transition state of the game state, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.
When the processing of S4302H is finished, next, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S4303H), and it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state. In the case (S4303H: Yes), the time saving state production setting process is executed (SS4305H), and the process proceeds to S4306H. A detailed description of the time saving state effect setting process (S4305H) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S4303H, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S4303H: No), a display for indicating the back type corresponding to the game state after the change A back image change command is set (S4304H), and the process proceeds to S4306H.
The display back image change command set in the processing of S4304H is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see S4102 in FIG. 1782) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 1782) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display back image change command, the corresponding back image is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . Therefore, the currently set game state can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner only by viewing the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . In this way, by configuring the display image corresponding to the basic game state to be displayed, even if the game state has changed, when the display control is executed so as to display the same rear image, , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game state has changed.

Next, the processing contents of S4306H will be described. In the process of S4306H, the state command received this time, information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ja, ie, information indicating the number of times of Hamari is included (S4306H), if it is determined that it is included (S4306H: Yes), set the value corresponding to the received value to the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja (S4307H), then determine whether the value of the lottery counter 223jg after launch is greater than 0 ( S4308H), if it is determined that the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is greater than 0 (S4308: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the display conditions for displaying the number of times of addiction are not satisfied, End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S4308H, if it is determined that the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4308: No), the display condition for displaying the number of hooks is established. Since it is the case, the display command for indicating the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja is set (S4309H), and this process ends.
Also, in the process of S4306H, if it is determined that the information indicating the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja is not included (S4306H: No), this process is terminated as it is.
As described above, in the forty-seventh control example, in the start-up process (see FIG. 1781) of the sound ramp control device 113 that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the after-startup lottery counter 223jg is set to 100, and until the value of the lottery counter 223jg is subtracted to 0 after its startup, the display command for indicating the value of the special lottery number counter 223ja is configured not to be set. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given in the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the power is turned on.
In addition, the display command for showing the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja set in the processing of S4309H in FIG. That is, a display command corresponding to the number of fluctuations (number of times of addiction), or a display mode indicating the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted based on the value of the special drawing number counter 223ja (i.e., the ceiling privilege is granted The concept includes any of the display commands corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the change is made).

Next, with reference to Drawing 1785, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S4305H) performed by state command receiving processing (refer to S4201H of Drawing 1784) are explained. FIG. 1785 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving state effect setting process (S4305H). This time saving state effect setting process (S4305H) is a process executed when a state command for indicating that a time saving state (a state with support in a special symbol low probability state) is set is received, and is a time saving state. A process for determining an effect mode and a back image according to the type of the character is executed.
Specifically, when the time saving state effect setting process (S4305H) is executed, first, from the past information stored in the subordinate state setting area 223g, information on the game state before change is read (S4401H), is normal (S4402H), and if it is determined that it is not normal (S4402H: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4402H, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S4402H: Yes), then the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is the first time saving (first time saving state). (S4403H), if it is determined that it is in the first time saving state (S4403H: Yes), set the number of time saving times included in the received command to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S4404H), and back type corresponding to the time saving state is set (S4405H), and the process ends.
Also, in the process of S4403H, if it is determined that it is not the first time saving (S4403H: No), then it is determined whether the time saving type is the second time saving (second time saving state) (S4406H), and the second If it is determined that it is time saving (S4406H: Yes), the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223jb (S4407H), and the back type corresponding to the high probability mode is indicated. A display background image change command is set (S4408H), and this process ends. In the processing of S4406H, if it is determined that it is not the second time saving, the processing ends as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1786, the details of the winning command process (S4202H) executed in the command determination process (see S4103H in FIG. 1783) will be described. FIG. 1786 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (S4202H). In this winning command process (S4202H), a process for determining the effect mode of various effects (prefetching effects) based on the winning information included in the received winning command is executed.

When the winning command process (S4202H) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4501H), and it is determined whether the look-ahead effect executing flag 223jd is set to ON. Then (S4502H), if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the current look-ahead effect is not being performed (S4502: No), then the variation pattern included in the received winning command is extracted. (S4503H), and executes a look-ahead effect setting process (S4404H).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect is included in the effect mode determined in the processing of S4504H (S4505H), and if it is determined that the prefetch effect is set (S4505H: Yes), the current prefetch effect is a reserved symbol. (S4506H), and if it is determined that it is a pending symbol change effect (S4506H: Yes), a display command for changing the display mode of the pending symbol is set (S4507H), other processing is executed (S4509H), and this processing ends.
In addition, in the processing of S4506H, when it is determined that it is not the reserved symbol change effect (S4506H: No), the prefetching effect executing flag 223jd is set to ON (S4508H), S4509H is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4505H, if it is determined that there is no prefetch effect setting, that is, if it is determined that the prefetch effect is not set as the processing result of the prefetch effect setting process (S4504H) (S4505H: No), S4506H , the process proceeds to S4509H without executing the process of S4508H.
In the processing of S4502H, if it is determined that the prefetch effect execution flag 223jd is set to ON, that is, the prefetch effect is currently being executed (S4502H: Yes), the prefetch non-execution is stored in the corresponding winning prize information storage area 223b. is set (S4510H), and the process proceeds to S4509H described above.

Next, the contents of the prefetch effect setting process (S4504H) executed in the winning command process (S4202H in FIG. 1786) will be described with reference to the process of FIG. FIG. 1787 is a flow chart showing the contents of the look-ahead effect setting process (S4504H). In this look-ahead effect setting process (S4504H), a process of determining whether to execute a look-ahead effect based on the variation pattern included in the winning command and a process of determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect are executed.
Specifically, first, based on the extracted variation pattern, the presence or absence of execution of the prefetching effect is determined (S4551H), and it is determined whether the prefetching effect is determined by the processing of S4551 (S4552H), and the prefetching effect is not determined. If (S4552H: No) is determined (no execution of prefetch effect), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4552H, if it is determined that the prefetch effect is executed (S4552: Yes), then it is determined whether the type of the prefetch effect to be executed is the continuous notice effect (S4553), and the continuous notice effect is determined. If it is determined (S4553H: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c corresponding to the target winning information is acquired (S4554H), and whether it is special figure reservation 1 or special figure reservation 2 is determined (S4555H). That is, in the process of S4555H, the winning command received this time is the first special figure reservation (the special figure reservation corresponding to the winning information that can be executed next special symbol lottery), or the second special figure reservation (next next It is determined whether the special symbol lottery is a special symbol reservation corresponding to the winning information in which the special symbol lottery can be executed.
In the processing of S4555H, if it is determined that it is not special figure suspension 1 or 2, that is, special figure suspension 3 (third special figure suspension) or special figure suspension 4 (fourth special figure suspension) (S4555H: No), the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect to be started from the next change is determined (S4556H), the determined effect mode of the continuous notice effect is stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc (S4557H), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4555H, if it is determined that it is special figure reservation 1, 2 (S4555H: Yes), the variable effect being executed (variable effect being executed at the time of receiving the winning command) is more than reach effect (S4558H), if it is determined that it is more than reach (S4558H: Yes), without determining the effect mode of continuous notice effect (continuous Without executing the advance notice effect), the process proceeds to S4561H.
Also, in the process of S4558H, if it is determined that it is not reach or more (it is a deviation variation that does not become a reach state) (S4558H: No), the stop display mode of the special figure variation being executed is continuously displayed continuously. Determine the effect mode of the notice effect (S4559H), set the display command for storing the stop display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure fluctuation being executed (S4560H), execute the process of S4557H, End this process.
In the processing of S4553H, if it is determined that it is not continuous announcement effect (S4553H: No), or if it is determined that it is reach or more in the process of S4558H (S4558H: Yes), then the current continuous announcement effect It is determined whether the type of is a hold change production (S4562H), and if it is determined that it is a hold change production (S4561H: Yes), the production mode of the hold change production is determined based on the special drawing lottery result (S4562H ), the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S4561H, when it is determined that there is no pending change effect (S4561H: No), other processing is executed (S4563H), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1788, the processing contents of the stop effect setting processing (S4203H) will be described. FIG. 1788 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the stop effect setting processing (S4203H). In this stopping effect setting process (S4203H), a process for determining the effect mode of various effects to be executed based on the stop display of the special symbol variation is executed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223jb is 1 (S4601H), and if it is determined to be 1 (S4601H: Yes), that is, this special symbol variation If it is determined that it is the final variation of the third time saving state given as, the value of the counter 223jb during the ceiling time saving is set to 0 (S4602H), and 20 seconds normal design variation is being executed (S4603H).
In the processing of S4603H, the determination processing of whether the normal pattern variation is executed based on the normal pattern variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the normal pattern included in the received normal pattern variation pattern command Determination using the processing result of the processing for determining information on the variation pattern type is performed.
Then, in the process of S4603H, if it is determined that the change is in progress for 20 seconds (S4603H: Yes), a display command indicating the continuation of the electric chew high probability mode is set (S4605H), and other processes are executed ( S4609H), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4603H, if it is determined that there is no 20-second fluctuation (S4603H), a display command indicating the end of the electric chew high probability mode is set (S4604H), the process of S4609H is executed, and this process is executed. exit.
Also, in the process of S4601H, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223jb is not 1 (S4601H: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223ja is 900 (S4606H ), when it is determined that the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223ja is 900 (S4606H: Yes), that is, this special symbol variation is the 900th special symbol variation executed during the special symbol low probability state. If it is determined that there is, set a display command indicating that the third time-saving state is set as a ceiling privilege after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (S4607H), indicating that the high-probability mode is entered (S4607H), and the processing of S4609H is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4606H, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 223ja is not 900 (S4606H: No), then the normal pattern is fluctuating for 20 seconds (the normal pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time of 20 seconds Is the variation pattern command received?) is determined (S4608H), and if it is determined that it is being varied for 20 seconds (S4608H: Yes), the processing of S4607H described above is executed, and in the processing of S4608H, 20 seconds variation If it is determined that it is not inside (S4608H: No), the process of S4609H is executed and this process ends.
As described above, in the 47th control example, even when the third time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed as a ceiling privilege is set, a variation pattern of 20 seconds is set in the normal symbol lottery. (Long normal pattern fluctuation corresponding to per normal pattern long open is set), it is configured to execute the production using the same production mode (electric chew high probability mode).
By configuring in this way, when the normal pattern winning game in which the electric role product 640a is long opened is executed, the electric role product 640a can be opened at any opportunity (ceiling privilege, normal pattern long opening hit in the normal state) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the long opening is possible.
In addition, as described above, in this 47th control example, even if it is elected per normal pattern long open, it is not the corresponding normal pattern fluctuation fluctuation period, but the special design fluctuation that is being executed in parallel is stopped. It is configured to execute an effect indicating entry into the electric chew high probability mode at the timing. By configuring in this way, even when the ceiling privilege is given and when the normal pattern long open winning game is executed, the electric accessory 640a is long by the effect executed in accordance with the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation. It can be notified that it is open. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which trigger (ceiling privilege, normal pattern long opening in the normal state) will open the electric accessory 640a for long.

In addition, in this 47th control example, when the normal figure long variation (20 seconds variation) is executed at the stop timing of the tobetsu pattern variation when the third time saving state ends, the electric chew high probability mode is extended Since it is configured to be displayed, immediately after the display mode indicating the end of the electric chew high probability mode (end of the third time saving state) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the electric It is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the accessory 640a being released for a long time.
In addition, in this 47th control example, in the state where the normal state is set, the state in which the special symbol variation is executed than the case where the normal symbol lottery is executed in the state where the special symbol variation is not executed. In the case of executing the normal symbol lottery, the result of the normal symbol lottery (whether or not the normal symbol long open winning win) is configured to make it easier for the player to grasp. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to continue the special symbol lottery during the normal state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1789, the processing contents of the normal map related processing (S4205H) will be described. FIG. 1789 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the general-purpose map related processing (S4205H). In this general pattern related process (S4205H), as a general pattern related command, an effect for suggesting an electric chew high probability mode is set based on the reception of a general pattern variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of normal pattern variation. A process and a process for setting an effect related to a normal symbol winning game are executed.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 1789, when the general figure related process (S4205H) is executed, first, it determines whether the general figure fluctuation pattern command is received (S4701H), and the general figure fluctuation pattern command is received If it is determined that (S4701H: Yes), set the display normal figure fluctuation start command (S4702H), determine whether the received fluctuation pattern is 20 seconds fluctuation (S4703H), 20 seconds fluctuation (normal figure (S4703H: Yes), a display command indicating that the electric chew high probability mode is to be set is set (S4704H), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4703H, if it is determined that there is no 20 second variation (not per normal pattern long open variation) (S4703H: No), set the variation effect corresponding to normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) There is nothing, and this processing ends.

In the processing of S4701H, if it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received (S4701H: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern per start command is received (S4705H), and the normal pattern per start command is received If it is determined (S4705H: Yes), set the start command per normal figure for display (S4706H), determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the second time saving state (S4707H), the normal state , Or, if it is determined that it is in the second time saving state (S4707H: Yes), then whether the type per normal pattern is per normal pattern B (per normal pattern per per normal pattern long open game is executed) (S4708H).
In the processing of S4708H, if it is determined that it is a normal pattern hit B (S4708H), set a display command for indicating the electric churong open (normal pattern long open per) (S4709H), and end this process . On the other hand, in the process of S4707H, if it is determined that the present is not the normal state or the second time saving state (variable probability state, the first time saving state) (S4707H: No), or in the process of S4708H, per normal figure If it is determined that it is not B (it is A per normal pattern) (S4708H: No), the process of S4709H is skipped and this process ends.
In the processing of S4705H, if it is determined that the start command per normal pattern is not received (S4705H: No), then it is determined whether the end command per normal pattern is received (S4710H), per normal pattern end command is received (S4710H: Yes), during the final special pattern fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, that is, during the special pattern fluctuation that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (S4711H), before reaching the ceiling When it is determined that it is in the final special figure fluctuation (S4711H: Yes), the command for display indicating that the electric chew high probability mode continues is set (S4712H), and this processing ends. Also, in the processing of S4711H, if it is determined that the last special figure fluctuation before reaching the ceiling is not in progress (S4711H: No), a display command indicating the end of the electric chew high probability mode is set (S4713H), and this processing is executed. finish. Moreover, in the process of S4710H, when it determines with not having received the completion|finish command per general pattern, this process is complete|finished as it is.
As described above, in the present 47th control example, during the normal state, or when the normal pattern long open per game is executed during the second time saving state, the same effect mode is configured to be set. is doing. By configuring in this way, when the normal pattern lottery executed in the normal state is elected per normal pattern long open, and when the special pattern variation that sets the second time saving state is executed In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the same content production (electric chew high probability mode), the execution of the game per normal long open is given to the player according to the content of the production during the open normal long open game. It is possible to suppress being grasped.

Furthermore, in this 47th control example, the end timing of the normal pattern long open per game executed based on winning per normal pattern long open in the normal state is during the special symbol fluctuation in which the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied In some cases, it is configured to execute an effect in which the electric chew high-probability mode continues. By configuring in this way, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied immediately after the electric chew high probability mode is ended, and the electric chew high probability mode is set again, so that the player does not understand the performance. can be suppressed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1790, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4104H) will be described. FIG. 1790 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4104H). In this variable display setting process (S4104H), in contrast to the variable display setting process (see S34113 in FIG. 313) in the tenth control example described above, the effect mode setting process (see 313 (see S4991 of 313)), the effect mode setting process (S4903H) is executed, and the rest is the same.
In the fluctuation display setting process (S4104H), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4901H). And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4901H: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S4905H Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is on (S4901H: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902H), then for notifying the display control device 114 Execution mode setting processing for generating a display variation pattern command based on the acquired variation pattern type (S4903H), and shifts the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b (S4904H) , S4905H. Details of the rendering mode setting process (S4903H) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S4905H, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4905H). And, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4905H: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S4909H Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is on (S4905H: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906H), and then the effect mode setting process is executed (S4907H ), the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908H), and the process proceeds to S4909H. The content of the effect mode setting process (S4907H) is the same as the process content of the above-described S4903H, and the description thereof will be omitted by explaining the process of the effect mode setting process (S4903H), which will be described later with reference to FIG. .

In the processing of S4909H, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4909H). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4909H: No), the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 Since it is in a state where it has not been done, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909H: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or special figure that is set to on 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is set to OFF (S4910H), then the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911H), and then this processing is performed finish.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1791, the contents of the rendering mode setting process (S4903H) executed in the variable display setting process (see S4104H in FIG. 1790) will be described. FIG. 1791 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering mode setting process (S4903H). In this production mode setting process (S4903H), similar to the production mode setting process (see S4991 in FIG. 314) in the tenth control example described above, various A process for updating the value of the counter and a process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed this time are executed.
As shown in FIG. 1791, when the effect mode setting process (S4903H) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is greater than 0 (S5001H). (S5001H: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of the lottery counter 223jg after launch (S5002H), add 1 to the value of the special figure lottery counter 223ja, and check whether the value of the lottery counter 223jg after launch is 0 Determine (S5004H). On the other hand, in the process of S5001H, if it is determined that the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is not greater than 0 (S5001H: No), the process of S5002H is skipped, the process of S5003H is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S5004H. Transition.
In the processing of S5004H, it is determined whether or not the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is 0 (S5004H). Since the information about the period can be provided to the player, a display command for indicating the remaining number until the value of the special drawing number counter 223ja reaches 900, that is, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established. Set a display command for indicating the number of special symbol lotteries required until (S5005H), then determine whether the value of the special symbol lottery counter 223ja is 900 (S5006H), and if it is 900 If so (S5006H: Yes), a display command for suggesting entry into the high probability mode is set (S5007H), and the process proceeds to S5008H.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5004H that the value of the post-startup lottery counter 223jg is not 0, information regarding the remaining period until the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied is not provided to the player. The process of S5005H is skipped and the process proceeds to S5006H. Also, in the processing of S5006H, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 223ja is not 900, that is, the special symbol variation of this time is the special symbol variation that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (the final special figure before reaching the ceiling fluctuation) (S5006H: No), the process of S5007H is skipped and the process proceeds to S5008H.
In the process of S5008H, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223jb is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is the electric support state (first time saving state, second time saving state, variable probability state) (S5008H), When it is determined that the value of the medium counter 223jb is greater than 0 (S5008H: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 223jb is subtracted by 1 (S5009H), and the value of the time saving medium counter 223jb after the subtraction is displayed. A command is set (S5010H), and the process proceeds to S5011H. Also, in the process of S5008H, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223jb is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if it is determined that the current state is normal (S5008H: No), S5009H, And the process of S5010H is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5011H.
In the process of S5011H, the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223jb is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current is the second time saving state (ceiling privilege in progress) (S5011H), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S5011H: Yes) subtracts 1 from the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223jb (S5012H), sets a display command for indicating the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223jb after the subtraction (S5013H), and performs variable effect setting processing. is executed (S5014H), and the process ends. Also, in the process of S5011H, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223jb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5011H: No), the process of S5012H and the process of S5013H are skipped and the process of S5014H is performed. Execute the process and terminate this process.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1792, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014H) executed in the effect mode setting process (S4903H of FIG. 1791) will be described. FIG. 1792 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014H). In this variable effect setting process (S5014H), various processes for determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed this time are executed.

Specifically, when the variable effect setting process (S5014H) is executed, first, it is determined whether the prefetch effect executing flag 223jd is set to ON (S5101H), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S5101H: Yes), determine the effect mode corresponding to the set look-ahead effect (S5102H), determine whether the current change effect is the final change (target change) of the look-ahead effect (S5103H), the final When it is determined that there is a change (S5103H: Yes), the prefetch effect executing flag 223jd is set to OFF (S5104H), and the process proceeds to S5116H.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103H that it is not the final change (S5103H: No), this process ends. In the process of S5102H, the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc is read (the information stored in the process of S4557H in FIG. 1787 is read), and the effect mode corresponding to the prefetch effect being executed is determined. be. In addition, in the process of S5103H, based on the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc, the target period of the look-ahead effect is specified and determination is executed.
In the process of S5101H, when it is determined that the prefetch effect execution flag 223jd is not ON (S5101H: No), next, the current game state is read out from the sub-state setting area 223g (S5106H), and whether the normal state (S5107H), if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S5107H: No), the set gaming state, and the special figure lottery result, based on the variation pattern selection table 222a variation production is determined (S5105H), and the process proceeds to S5116H.
In the processing of S5107H, if it is determined that the state is normal (S5107H: Yes), the current angle information is read from the presentation mode storage area 223jc (S5108H), and the read angle information indicates the left angle, or It is determined whether the angle information indicates an upper angle (S5109H), and if it is determined that the angle information indicates a left angle or the angle information indicates an upper angle (S5109H: Yes), continuous reach mode determination processing is executed (S5110H), and the process proceeds to S5111H.

Continuous reach mode determination processing (S5110H) executed in the processing of S5110H is for determining the performance mode of the variable performance (angle change performance) accompanied by the change of the angle displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S5109H, if it is determined that it is not the angle information indicating the left angle or the angle information indicating the upper angle (S5109H: No), then the time added to the variation pattern command received this time (the special symbol variation addition time) is determined (S5111H), and if it is determined that there is an addition time (S5111H: Yes), the addition time mode selection table 222jb is referred to determine the effect mode for the addition time ( S5112H), next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time indicated by the extracted fluctuation pattern is 20 seconds or longer (S5113H). On the other hand, in the process of S5115H, when it is determined that there is no additional time (S5115H: No), the process of S5116H for determining the effect mode for the additional time is skipped, and the process of S5113H described above is executed.
In the processing of S5113H, if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern corresponding to a variation time of 20 seconds or more (S5113H: No), the set game state and the special figure lottery result, based on the variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to determine the effect mode of the variable effect (S5105H), and the process proceeds to S5116H.
Also, in the processing of S5113H, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to a variation time of 20 seconds or more (S5113H: Yes), the variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to determine the effect pattern of the variation effect (S5114H ), execute a detailed mode determination process (S5115H), set a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode (S5116H), and set a value corresponding to the determined presentation mode to the variable time counter 223je (S5117H). , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1793, the processing contents of the continuous reach mode determination process (S5110H) executed in the above-described variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) will be described. FIG. 1793 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the continuous reach mode determination processing (S5110H). In this continuous reach mode determination process (S5110H), there is a process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect when the current angle is the left angle or the upper angle due to the execution of the angle change effect. executed.
When the continuous reach mode determination process (S5110H) is executed, first, the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc is read, and it is determined whether the current angle is the left angle (S5201H). If it is determined (S5201H: Yes), it is determined whether the extracted variation pattern has a variation time of 20 seconds or more (S5202H). is determined (S5203H), information indicating the determined angle is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223jc (S5204H), and this processing ends.
Also, in the processing of S5202H, if it is determined that the time is not longer than 20 seconds (S5202H: No), the transition to the normal angle is determined (S5205H), and information indicating the determined angle is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223jc. (S5204H), this processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201H that the current angle is not the left angle (S5201H: No), then it is determined whether the current angle is the upper angle (S5206H), and it is determined that the current angle is the upper angle. In the case (S5206H: Yes), whether the extracted variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the variation, that is, whether the special symbol variation of this time is a variation is determined (S5207H), and it is determined that it is a variation. If so (S5207H: Yes), continuation of the upper angle is determined (S5208H), information indicating the determined angle is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223jc (S5209H), and this processing ends. Also, in the processing of S5207H, if it is determined that this time is not a winning change (S5207H: No), the transition to the normal angle is determined (S5209H), and information indicating the determined angle is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223jc. (S5210H), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1794, the processing contents of the detailed mode determination process (S5115H) executed in the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) will be described. FIG. 1794 is a flowchart showing details of the detailed mode determination process (S5115H). In this detailed mode determination process (S5115H), a process for determining a detailed mode of a variable performance with a performance period of 20 seconds or more according to the type of the variable performance to be executed is executed.
As shown in FIG. 1794, when the detailed mode determination process (S5115H) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation effect is the reach effect (S5301H), and if it is determined to be the reach effect (S5301H : Yes), refers to the ready-to-win mode selection table 222ja, determines the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect to be executed (S5302H), stores information indicating the determined effect mode in the effect mode storage area 223jc (S5303H), S5304H to process. Also, in the process of S5301H, if it is determined that the current variable effect is not the ready-to-win effect (S5301H: No), the process of S5302H and the process of S5303H are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5304H.
In the processing of S5304H, it is determined whether or not the current variable effect is an angle change effect (S5304H), and if it is determined that it is an angle change effect (S5304H: Yes), the current angle information is stored from the effect mode storage area 223jc. Read out (S5305H), determine whether it is normal angle (S5306H), and if it is determined as normal angle (S5306H: Yes), then determine whether the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S5307H), If it is determined that the time is 30 seconds or longer (S5307H), the shift to the left angle is determined (S5308H), and the lottery results are taken into account. The type of icon inside the treasure box is determined (S5309H), information indicating the determined angle is stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc (S5310H), and the process proceeds to S5313H.
Also, in the process of S5307H, if it is determined that the variation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S5307H: No), the shift to the right angle is determined (S5311H), and the content icon of the bag is changed according to the lottery result. The type is determined (S5312H), information indicating the determined angle is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223jc (S5310H), and the process proceeds to S5313H. On the other hand, in the process of S5306H, if it is determined that the current angle is not the normal angle (S5306H: No), the process for newly executing the angle change effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5313H.

In the processing of S5313H, it is determined whether the current variable effect is the one-shot notification effect (S5313H), and if it is determined to be the one-shot notification effect (S5313H: Yes), refer to the one-shot notification mode selection table 222jc. Then, the effect mode of the one-shot notification effect to be executed is determined (S5314H), information indicating the determined effect mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc (S5315H), information indicating the length of the SW valid period, Then, the information indicating the setting timing of the SW effective period is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223jc (S5316H), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S5313H, when it is determined that the current variation effect is not the one-shot notification effect (S5313H: No), this process is terminated.
Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101H) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 1782) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1795 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101H). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101H), a process of setting a SW valid period in which the operation to the frame button 22 can be effectively determined based on the variable effect being executed, and 22 is operated to determine the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed.
Specifically, when the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101H) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the SW valid period timer 223jf is greater than 0 (S5401H). If it is determined that the SW effective period is not set (S5401H: No), then it is determined whether it is time to set the button operation effective period (S5402H). In the process of S5402H, it is determined whether it is time to set the button operation effective period based on the setting information of the SW effective period stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc and the value of the variable time counter 223je.
In the process of S5402H, if it is determined that it is time to set the button operation valid period (S5402H: Yes), the value corresponding to the set button operation valid period is set to the value of the SW valid period timer 223jf (S5403H). , a display command corresponding to the determined mode is set (S5404H), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S5402H that it is not the time to set the button operation valid period, the process of S5403H is skipped, the process of S5404H is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5401H that the value of the SW valid period timer 223jf is greater than 0, that is, the SW valid period is set (S5401H: Yes), then the frame button 22 (S5405H), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S5405H: No), the process of S5404H is executed as it is, and this process ends. In the processing of S5405H, it is configured to determine whether or not the frame button 22 is operated by determining whether or not a depression signal output when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) is received.
In the forty-seventh control example, by determining whether or not a depression signal output when the frame button 22 is operated is received, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player during the SW valid period is determined. Although it is configured to be discriminable, other configurations may be used. For example, a press counter capable of measuring the number of times a press signal output when the frame button 22 is operated is provided. It may be possible to determine whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated based on the value. In this case, it may be determined that the frame button 22 has been operated when it is determined that the value of the depression counter has been incremented by a predetermined number (for example, 2) or more. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player not only press the frame button 22 but also to play a game in which the player presses the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times, thereby increasing the desire of the player to participate in the game.
In the processing of S5405H, if it is determined that there is a button operation (the frame button 22 is pressed) (S5405H: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the SW validity period timer 223jf is greater than 3000 (S5406H). , is larger (S5406H: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the case where the button operation is performed in the first half of the button operation effective period is determined (S5407H), and the value of the SW effective period timer 223jf is cleared to 0. (S5408H), the process of S5404H is executed, and this process ends.
In the process of S5406H, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective period timer 223jf is not greater than 3000 (3000 or less) (S5406H: No), the button operation is performed during the latter half of the button operation effective period. The effect mode corresponding to the case is determined (S5409H), the processes of S5408H and S5404H are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1796, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S4102H) will be described. FIG. 1796 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering update process (S4102H). This effect update process (S4102H) is a control process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 1782) of the sound lamp control device 113 described above, and the elapsed time set during the variable effect A process for updating (subtracting) the values of various counters for measurement is executed.
Specifically, when the effect update process (S4102H) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the variable time counter 223je is greater than 0 (S5501H). ), the value of the variable time counter 223je is subtracted by 1 (S5502H), and then it is determined whether it is time to execute an effect based on the lapse of the variable time (S5503H). In the process of S5503H, determination based on the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc when the effect mode of the variable effect is determined is executed.
In the processing of S5503H, if it is determined that it is time to execute the effect (S5503H: Yes), a display command indicating the effect mode of the effect to be executed is set (S5504H), and then the SW effective period timer 223jf is set. Determine if the value is greater than 0. Also, in the process of S5503H, if it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the effect (S5503H: No), the process of S5504H is skipped and the process proceeds to S5505H.
In the process of S5505H, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid period timer 223jf is greater than 0 (S5505H: Yes), the value of the SW valid period timer 223jf is updated (subtracted by 1) (S5506H), and updated (subtracted). It is determined whether the value of the later SW effective period timer 223jf is 0 (S5507H), and if it is determined that it is not 0 (S5507H: No), a display command for updating the display mode of the remaining time gauge is issued. It sets (S5508H), executes other effects update processing (S5510H), and terminates this processing. In addition, in the processing of S5507H, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective period timer 223jf is 0 (S5507H: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the effect mode of the one-shot notification effect when no button operation is performed. (S5509H), the process of S5510H is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S5501H, if the value of the variable time counter 223je is not greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the variable effect is not currently being executed (S5501H: No), the process of S5510H is executed as it is, End this process.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1797 and 1798, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 233 of the display control device 114 in the forty-seventh control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, among the control processes executed by the display control device 114, part of the processing contents of the command determination process is changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. are the same except that The description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1797, the contents of the command determination process (S6302) executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1797 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S6302). In this command determination process (S6302), compared to the command determination process in the first control example described above, the content of the process executed when the display stop type command is received is changed, and the display stop pattern storage command and a control process in the case of receiving a stop symbol storage command for display are added.
Specifically, when the command determination processing is executed, first, the processing from S6401 to S6406, which is the same as the command determination processing executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, is executed. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that the stop type command for display has been received (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6401H), and the process proceeds to S6401.

Further, in the processing of S6406, if it is determined that the stop type command for display has not been received (S6406: No), command determination executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above The same processing from S6408 to S6421 as the processing is executed, and in the processing of S6420, if it is determined that an error command has not been received (S6420: No), then it is determined whether a display stop symbol storage command has been received. It is determined (S6402H), and if it is determined that it has been received (S6402H: Yes), information for indicating the currently set stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area 233ja (S6403H), and the process proceeds to S6401. . On the other hand, in the processing of S6402H, if it is determined that the display stop pattern storage command has not been received (S6402H: No), the processing of S6422 is executed, and then the processing of S6401 is performed.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the first special figure reservation or the second special figure reservation (S4553H of FIG. 1787: Yes), set a display command for storing the effect result of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed (stop display mode of the third symbol) (see S4560H of FIG. 1787) , In the command determination processing (S6302) executed by the MPU 233 of the display control device 114, when the display command (display stop pattern storage command) set in the processing of S4560H in FIG. 1787 is received (S6402H: Yes ), and the stop symbol storage area 233ja stores (stores) the effect result of the variable effect currently being executed (the stop display mode of the third symbol).
Then, until the special symbol variation targeted for the look-ahead effect is executed, the stop display mode of the third symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area 233ja is continuously stopped and displayed so that the continuous notice effect can be executed. ing. By configuring in this way, even if it is decided to execute a continuous notice effect as a look-ahead effect corresponding to the special reservation in a state where the number of reserved special figures that have already been acquired is small, part of the variable effect being executed is used. It is possible to determine the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced by increasing the execution frequency of the continuous advance notice performance.
In addition, since it is possible to execute the continuous notice performance of different performance modes according to the number of special figure reservations at the time when the execution of the continuous notice performance is determined as the look-ahead performance, the player gets tired of the game early. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1798, the processing contents of the stop type command processing (S6401H) will be described. FIG. 1798 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop type command process (S6401H). This stop type command process (S6401H) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a stop type command has been received in the command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 1797). A process for determining the effect result (stop display mode of the third symbol) of the effect) is executed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1798, when the stop type command process (S6401H) is executed, the information stored in the stop symbol storage area 233ja is read (S6601H), and the stop symbol information (the third symbol (S6602H), and if it is determined that there is no stop pattern information (S6602H: No), a stop type table is determined based on the stop type information (S6601), A stop symbol is set by comparing the stop type table and the stop symbol counter (S6602), the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON (S6603), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S6602H, if it is determined that there is stop design information (S6602H: Yes), the same stop design as the stop design information is set (S6603H), and the information stored in the stop design storage area is stored. Clear (S6604H), set the stop symbol determination flag to OFF (S6603), and terminate this process.
In addition, in this 47th control example, only the stop type of the third symbol (complete loss, reach loss (+1 frame, -1 frame, etc.), win) is determined by the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113. is determined, and the MPU 233 of the display control device 114 determines the specific stop display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the stop type. In this case, the stopped display mode of the third symbol determined by the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may be determined by the process executed in A RAM 223 is provided with storage means for temporarily storing a mode, and when a variable performance to be a target of continuous advance notice performance is newly executed, the third pattern stored in the storage means is used as the performance result of the variable performance. What is necessary is just to constitute so that a stop display mode can be determined.

<48th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1799 to 1817. FIG.
Conventionally, by selecting one piece of music from a plurality of pieces of music to be reproduced during the jackpot game, various pieces of music can be reproduced during the jackpot game, so that the player can start the game early. There is a pachinko machine 10 that suppresses boredom. Further, in order to allow the player to reproduce the desired music, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with music that is reproduced during the jackpot game based on the player's operation of the operation means (the frame button 22, etc.). can be selected.
The conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way can enhance the performance effect during the jackpot game and suppress the player from getting bored with the game. Since neither the content nor the comprehensible game information changes, there is a problem that the player's motivation to select songs gradually decreases.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 48th control example, the promotion condition is set based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the period in which the song to be played back during the jackpot game can be selected. Only when the game is established, a dedicated song capable of notifying the game state to be set after the end of the big win game to be executed this time is selected.

By constructing in this way, not only players who want to reproduce desired music during a jackpot game but also players who want to quickly perceive future game contents can easily perform the operation of selecting music. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to select songs.
Further, in the forty-eighth control example, by executing the first operation (manipulating the selection button 600, which is the first operating means), any song can be selected from among the songs that can always be selected. A dedicated song can be selected by executing a second operation (operation to the frame button 22 as the second operation means) different from the first operation. Then, when the second operation is executed, the dedicated music is not selected unless the promotion condition is satisfied. In other words, even if the second operation is performed, the dedicated music may not be selected.
By configuring in this way, a player who wants to select an arbitrary song from songs that can always be selected executes the first operation, and a player who expects a dedicated song to be selected executes the second operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who wants to select an arbitrary song from the songs that can always be selected cannot select a song.
Furthermore, in this 48th control example, it is the case where the probability variable jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the player is not notified that the probability variable jackpot has been won (the state in which the jackpot winning is notified by the even number symbol). When the second operation is executed during the jackpot game executed in , the promotion condition for selecting the dedicated music is established.

In other words, when the promotion condition is established and the dedicated music is selected, it is configured to notify that the current jackpot game is the probability variable jackpot game. Therefore, during a jackpot game executed in a state in which a jackpot win is normally won and the jackpot win is reported by even-numbered symbols, even if the second operation is executed, the promotion condition is not established, and the dedicated music is selected. There is no Furthermore, as described above, in order to select a dedicated music piece, the second operation different from the first operation is executed. While playing, it is configured so that the music to be reproduced during the jackpot game cannot be changed. Therefore, the player is asked whether to execute the first operation for selecting an arbitrary piece of music from the pieces of music that can always be selected, or to execute the second operation with the aim of selecting a dedicated piece of music. It can provide fun to choose.
In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, when the second operation is executed in a situation where the promotion condition can be established, the ease with which the promotion condition is established is varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed. there is That is, in this 48th control example, as the probability variable jackpot game, 10 rounds of the probability variable jackpot game (jackpot A) and 7 rounds of the probability variable jackpot game (jackpot D) are configured to be executable, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game When the second operation is executed in a situation in which the promotion condition can be satisfied, the promotion condition is more likely to be satisfied for the jackpot A with a larger .
By configuring in this way, when the dedicated music is selected based on the second operation, after notifying that the current jackpot game is a probability variable jackpot, the possibility of a probability variable jackpot game with a large number of rounds is announced. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to quickly perceive that a game advantageous to the player will be executed later to perform the second operation.
Furthermore, in the forty-eighth control example, during the opening period of the jackpot game, that is, in a state where the round game is not being executed, a music selection period in which music can be selected is set. In other words, the player is made to perform an operation (first operation, second operation) to select a song without knowing the number of rounds of the current jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily provide the enjoyment of predicting the number of rounds for the big win this time based on the operation of selecting music.

In this 48th control example, the song selection period is set during the jackpot game period in which the round game is not executed. A jackpot game period in which the player cannot grasp the number of rounds of the game, for example, a round game period that is always executed regardless of which jackpot game is executed (in this control example, the 1st to 7th rounds The music selection period may be set during the game period).
<Regarding the effect content in the 48th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1799 to 1804, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-seventh control example in the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game and the effect content of the variable effect executed in the normal state. , and are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example described above.
First, with reference to FIG. 1799, the contents of the jackpot effect will be described. FIG. 1799(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen (music selection screen) displayed in the jackpot effect executed during the opening period of the jackpot game, and FIG. 1799(b) is a diagram showing an example of the music selection screen. is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a specific piece of music is selected while is being displayed.
In this 47th control example, in order to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game, the player can select the type of music played during the jackpot game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1799(a), in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the characters "Lucky Jackpot!!" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game is about to start.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, as in the forty-seventh control example described above, as the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot and a normal jackpot (time-saving jackpot) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends can be set.
Then, as a result of the variable production, when the third pattern is stopped and displayed with odd patterns (for example, "777"), it is notified that the jackpot won this time is a probability variable jackpot, and the third pattern is an even number. When the symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, "666"), the player cannot determine whether the jackpot won this time is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. Then, when the third pattern is stopped and displayed with even-numbered patterns, the player is notified of the type of the current big win by the big win performance.
In other words, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed as the odd symbol "777", the player can be made aware that the probability variable jackpot has been won before the jackpot game is executed, and the player can feel relieved. To make a player play a big win game with care and to make a player interested in the big win performance while expecting that the big win this time is a variable big win when the third pattern is stopped and displayed as an even number pattern ``666''. It is configured so that
The diagram shown in FIG. 1799 is a diagram showing the display screen during the opening period when the probability variable jackpot is won and the third symbol is displayed stopped at "666" with an even number of symbols. In the display area Dm1, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode ("666") indicating that the jackpot has been won.

Below the small display area Dm1, an icon resembling the selection button 600 is displayed in the display area 0Dm1 as a display area for selecting a song to be reproduced during the jackpot effect, and "Song A" is displayed as the currently selected song gk1. is displayed, "music B" is displayed as the first selection candidate music gk2, and "music C" is displayed as the second selection candidate music gk3. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters "You can select a song!"
In this 48th control example, as shown in FIG. 1799(a), the player can select the type of music played during the jackpot effect (music A to music C) using the opening period of the jackpot game. By operating the up button 600b or the down button 600d of the selection buttons 600 while the song selection screen is displayed, different songs can be selected.
More specifically, when the up button 600b is pressed while the display screen shown in FIG. "Music B" is displayed as the currently selected music gk1, "Music C" as the first selection candidate music gk2, and "Music A" as the second selection candidate music gk3. . When the down button 600d is pressed while the display screen shown in FIG. is shifted upward, and "music C" is displayed as the currently selected music gk1, "music A" as the first selection candidate music gk2, and "music B" as the second selection candidate music gk3.
Then, when the music selection period ends, the music displayed as the selected music gk1 is determined as the music to be reproduced during the jackpot performance, and is reproduced from the start of the round game of the first round. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1799(a), the player can easily grasp the operating means (the upper button 600b and the lower button 600d of the selection buttons 600) to be operated by the player when selecting a song. Therefore, it is displayed in a display mode (displayed in black in the figure) that is more emphasized than the other operation means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow a player who intends to select a song to easily perform a song selection operation.

In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, operation means (the left button 600a and the right button 600c of the selection buttons 600) that are not used for the music selection operation are also displayed in the display area 0Dm1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to visually grasp the target operation means (selection button 600) than when only the upper button 600b and the lower button 600d are displayed in the display area 0Dm1.
In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, while the music selection screen is displayed, an operation means (frame button 22) different from the operation means (selection button 600) displayed in the display area 0Dm1 is operated (hidden (executing the operation) also enables selection of different songs (hidden songs). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) a predetermined number of times while the music selection screen is displayed and the promotion conditions are satisfied, the exclusive music can be selected.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1799(b), a display screen displayed when a hidden music is selected by performing a hidden operation while the music selection screen is displayed will be described. In the forty-eighth control example, when the variable probability jackpot is won and the third symbols are even-numbered symbols (for example, "666") and are stopped and displayed, the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the opening period of the jackpot game. If the promotion condition is satisfied by doing so, the main display area Dm displays the characters "Super Lucky Jackpot!!" Congrats on your promotion." is displayed.
Then, as the selected music gk4, the dedicated music "music X" which is not selected when the select button 600 is operated is displayed. In this case, the dedicated song "music X" is played from the start of the first round of the round game. In addition, as described above, if a hidden operation is performed during the song selection period, it is configured so that a different song is not selected unless the promotion conditions are satisfied. In the case of a jackpot), no matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated during the opening period, the promotion condition is not established, and the music played during the jackpot presentation cannot be changed.

Therefore, the player who executes the big win game is made to select the music during the big win presentation (by operating the selection button 600) or to reproduce the exclusive music (by operating the frame button 22). It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.
Furthermore, in the forty-eighth control example, when the dedicated song "song X" is selected based on the execution of the hidden operation, the song selection period immediately ends and "song X" is selected. In this state, even if the selection button 600 is operated, music cannot be selected. By configuring in this way, when the exclusive music ``song X'' is selected, the ``song X'' is always reproduced during the jackpot presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when "song X" is selected, the operation of the selection button 600 (the operation of the upper button 600b and the lower button 600d) can be effectively determined. Alternatively, by operating the selection button 600 while "music X" is being displayed, "music A" to "music C" may be selected. With this configuration, the player can see that "song X" is displayed on the display screen, so that the player can understand that the jackpot this time is a variable jackpot, and then play the normal song ("song A"). ” to “song C”) during the jackpot presentation, it is possible to make it difficult for surrounding players to notice that the probability variable jackpot is being won. Further, by operating the selection button 600 while "song X" is being displayed, dedicated songs "song Y" and "song Z" different from "song X" may be selected.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1800 and 1801, the effect contents of the background change effect executed in the normal state will be described. In the forty-eighth control example, when the special symbol variation is executed in the normal state, whether or not to execute the background change effect is determined by lottery, and when the execution of the background change effect is determined, the background change effect is executed. It is configured to This background change effect is composed of effect data of 60 seconds, and is configured to be switchable to four types of backgrounds (back images) as time elapses.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1800, the contents of the four types of backgrounds (back images) displayed during the background change effect will be described. FIG. 1800 is a diagram showing a display screen (back image) displayed during the background change rendering. When the background change effect is executed, the "flat ground" shown in Fig. 1800(a) is displayed first, and after 10 seconds, the "forest" shown in Fig. 1800(b) is displayed, and 20 seconds have passed. 1800(c) is displayed, and after 20 seconds, the effect data is configured to display "universe" as shown in FIG. 1800(d).
Then, when the special pattern variation being executed during the background change effect is stopped and displayed, the effect data is rewound until the background of the type displayed at that time is set, and the background change effect is performed again. configured to run. In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery and the end timing of the background change effect are determined according to the fluctuation time, and when the background change effect is executed to the end, the jackpot winning is announced. It is configured as follows.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1801, the special symbol variation executed during the background change effect and the flow of the background change effect will be described in detail. Fig. 1801 is a diagram showing the flow of the special symbol variation executed during the background change effect and the background change effect, and Fig. 1801(a) shows that the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times during the background change effect. 1801(b) is a diagram showing an example of a pattern in which the background change effect ends halfway after the background change effect is executed, and FIG. 1801(b) shows an example of a pattern in which the background change effect is executed to the end.
As shown in FIG. 1801 (a), when the background change effect is executed in accordance with the execution timing of the special symbol change (first time) of 20 seconds, during the special symbol change period, the effect of the background change effect The data advances for 20 seconds, and the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed while the background B (forest) is displayed. Then, when the special pattern variation of 15 seconds (second time) is executed next, the background change effect is started from the background B (forest) start timing (10 seconds after the background change effect started). is started.

In this case, while the second special symbol variation (15 seconds) is being executed, the effect period corresponding to the background B (forest) does not pass, so the third special symbol variation (30 seconds) is also the background B The background effect is started from the start timing of (forest). This third special symbol variation (30 seconds) is longer than the production period (20 seconds) of the background B, so when 20 seconds have passed since the third special symbol variation was started, as a background change effect Background C (heaven) is displayed. Then, when the third background change effect is completed and the fourth special pattern change (20 seconds) is executed, the background effect is started from the start timing of the background C (heaven), and the change is removed. Therefore, the background change effect ends at the timing when the fourth special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.
Although the details will be described later, in the forty-eighth control example, the processing for determining the end timing of the background change effect is configured to be executed when the special symbol variation is started from the background C. For example, If the special symbol variation starting from the background C is a deviation variation and the variation time is within 20 seconds, that is, if it is less than the performance period (20 seconds) of the background C, the special symbol variation is stopped. The background change performance is terminated at the display timing, and when the special pattern variation started from the background C is a deviation variation and the variation time is longer than 20 seconds, a dedicated end for ending the background change performance is performed. It is configured to end the background change effect by executing the effect.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the background change effect from reaching the background D during the deviation fluctuation. Furthermore, since the effect data for 60 seconds can be used as it is to end the background change effect, the processing load for executing the background change effect can be reduced.
Also, if the special symbol variation starting from the background C is a winning variation, regardless of the variation time of the special symbol variation, the background change of the remaining production period (30 seconds) from the start timing of the background C (heaven) It is configured so that it can execute a production and shift to the background D (outer space). If the variation time of the hit variation is longer than the remaining effect period (30 seconds) from the start timing of the background C (heaven), the still image at the time when the effect data of 60 seconds reaches the end is the hit variation. is configured to continue to be displayed until is stopped. Furthermore, the still image displayed at the end of the 60-second effect data includes a display mode (congratulations on winning the jackpot) for congratulating the winning of the jackpot.

Therefore, when the special pattern variation starting from the background C is the winning variation, the background changing performance indicating the winning of the jackpot can be easily executed only by executing the background changing performance based on the remaining performance data. .
On the other hand, when the special symbol variation in which the background change effect is executed is a 60-second jackpot variation, as shown in FIG. Something is reported.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1802 and 1803, the effect contents of the freeze effect executed in the forty-eighth control example will be described. Figure 1802 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the freeze effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed. As shown in FIG. 1802(a), when the freeze effect is executed, even though the third pattern is displayed in a display mode (arrow) indicating that the special pattern is fluctuating in the small display area Dm1, Regardless, a swinging display (indicated by a wavy line in the figure) is executed in which the variable effect is not executed, and the characters "That's fixed" indicating that the freeze effect is being performed are displayed below, and the freeze period is shown in the display area Dm110. Elapsed time ("00:01" indicating that one second has elapsed in the figure) is displayed.
With this configuration, the player can easily understand that the freeze performance is being performed, so that even if a state in which the variable performance is not executed occurs, the pachinko machine 10 is not out of order and can be easily understood. can be made In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, the longer the execution period of the freeze effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. Therefore, while confirming the display contents of the display area Dm110, the user expects that the freeze effect will be executed for a long period of time. be able to.

Also, when a freeze effect with a freeze effect period of 6 seconds is executed, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed as if the is frozen. In this way, by enabling execution of effects in which freeze targets are different in the freeze effects, it is possible to provide effects with more impact to the player.
In the forty-eighth control example, as the effect pattern in the freeze effect, seven types of effect patterns with different degrees of expectation for big wins are configured to be executable. Here, with reference to FIG. 1803, the effect pattern of the freeze effect executed in the forty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1803 is a diagram showing the relationship between the freeze effect mode (effect pattern) and the degree of expectation for winning.
As shown in FIG. 1803, the freeze effect in the forty-eighth control example is the type of stop symbol that is stopped and displayed when the freeze effect is executed, and the freeze time (continuation period of the freeze effect). Production patterns with different degrees are defined.
Specifically, the freeze effect executed in a state where the stop symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed, that is, the freeze effect executed in the variable effect executed immediately after the jackpot game ends (production pattern 1) Regardless of the type of hit expectation "extra-large" and the type of stop pattern, the freeze effect (production pattern 2) with a freeze time of 6 seconds is executed with a hit expectation "extra-large" and a stop pattern pattern including 7 patterns. The 5-second freeze effect (production pattern 3) has a hit expectation of “high”, and the 5-second freeze effect (production pattern 4) executed with a stop pattern pattern containing 4 or more odd-numbered symbols has a hit expectation of “medium.” ”, a 2-second freeze effect (production pattern 5) executed with a stop pattern pattern including 7 patterns is executed with a stop pattern pattern containing 4 or more odd-numbered patterns with a hit expectation of “medium” 2 The second freeze effect (production pattern 6) has a hit expectation of “small”, and the other stop pattern pattern executes a 5 second freeze effect (production pattern 7) with a hit expectation of “small”, In the stop symbol pattern, the 2-second freeze performance (performance pattern 8) is configured to have a winning expectation of "extra-small".

By configuring in this way, the player can be interested not only in the effect period of the freeze effect, but also in the stop pattern pattern in which the freeze effect is executed. By doing so, the player can play the game while expecting that the freeze performance will be executed at the next variation after the stop symbol pattern (stop symbol pattern with 7 symbols) that increases the expectation of the big win is stopped and displayed. interest in the game can be improved.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the forty-eighth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1804 to 1807. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 48th control example has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, and the other configurations are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1804, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202kd1 in the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 48th control example will be described. FIG. 1804 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202kd1.
The special figure 1 jackpot table 202kd1 differs from the above-described special figure 1 jackpot table 202jd1 (see FIG. 1765 (b)) in that the jackpot type is added and the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed. is doing. As shown in FIG. 1804, the special figure 1 jackpot table 202kd1 has four jackpot types (jackpot A50, jackpot B50, jackpot C50, jackpot D51) in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired. stipulated.

Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29" for the range of "jackpot A50", and for the range of "30 to 49", "jackpot B50" is "50 A “jackpot C50” is defined for the range of “~89”, and a “jackpot D51” is defined for the range “90 to 99”.
The jackpot type "jackpot A50" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A50" (0 to 29). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot A50" is 30% (30/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot B50" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B50" (30 to 49). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot B50" is 20% (20/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot C50" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds, and the time-reduction jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C50" is 40 (50 to 89). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot C50" is 40% (40/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot D51" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot D51" is 10 (90 to 99). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot D51" is 10% (10/100).
That is, in the 48th control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A50, jackpot B50, jackpot D51) is executed (determined) at a rate of 60%, and at a rate of 40%. It is configured to execute (determine) a time-saving jackpot (jackpot C50). Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 10-round game (jackpot A50, jackpot C50) is executed (determined) at a rate of 70%, and a 2-round game (jackpot B50) is executed at a rate of 20%. (determined), and the 7-round game (jackpot D51) is executed (determined) at a rate of 10%.
Next, referring to FIG. 1805(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1805(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1805(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-eighth control example is the pachinko machine of the forty-seventh control example described above. The addition time mode selection table 222kc is provided instead of the addition time mode selection table 222jb (see FIG. 1770) for the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the pachinko machine 10, and the music 222ka, a promotion lottery table 222kb, and a background change lottery table 222kd.
The music data type storage area 222ka is a storage area in which identification information corresponding to various music played by the pachinko machine 10 is stored. By reading the identification information stored in the music data type storage area 222ka and outputting the voice command corresponding to the read identification information to the voice output device 226, each stored in the voice output device 226 A sound is output based on the music data corresponding to the received voice command among the music data.

The identification information (music information) read from the music data type storage area 222ka is stored in the music information storage area 223kb of the RAM 223. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily read the identification information corresponding to the currently selected song.
The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is configured to be able to reproduce (output) various songs according to the game situation. state), a state in which a special symbol lottery is being executed with the normal state set, a state in which the variable probability state is set, a state in which the first time saving state is set, and a second time saving state set It is configured so that different music can be output as BGM while the player is in the room.
In addition, it is configured to be able to output (reproduce) different types of music according to the production mode being executed as a variable production, and depending on the type of music to be played, the production result of the variable production being executed is a game. It is configured so that the degree of expectation of a performance result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a performance result indicating winning of a jackpot) is made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot not only by the effect mode of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 but also by the music output. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.
Although detailed description is omitted, the process of determining various songs is the process of determining the display mode to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. For example, the state command is received based on the status command. The process of determining the back image corresponding to the game state included in the command (see FIG. 1784) and the process of determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed (see FIG. 1812) so that it is determined in the same manner as the display mode Configure. In this way, the music displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be determined by determining the music played at the same timing as the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to prevent the display content from being different from the music being played back.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is configured so that the player can select the type of music to be reproduced during the jackpot game. Specifically, by operating the upper button 600b or the lower button 600d of the selection button 600 during the opening period of the jackpot game, the music to be played can be selected, and during the opening period of the jackpot game , an opening screen (see FIG. 1799(a)) for showing that the player can select a song to be played is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily select the music to be reproduced during the jackpot game.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, the operation method is guided to the player while the opening screen (see FIG. 1799(a)) is being displayed. 600 (the upper button 600b and the lower button 600d of 600) can also be discriminated, and the promotion condition is determined based on the operation performed with respect to the second operating means. When the game is established, a song that cannot be selected by the operation of the first operation means is selected as a song to be reproduced during the jackpot game. In other words, an operation for an operation means (first operation means) that guides the player on how to select a song, and an operation means (second operation means) that does not guide the player on how to select a song. It is configured to be able to determine (select) a song to be reproduced during the jackpot game by operating on. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means by various operation methods.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is configured so that music that cannot be selected by operating the first operating means can be selected by operating the second operating means. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate each operating means to reproduce various music pieces during the jackpot game.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, an even-numbered pattern (with an even-numbered number) is used as a variable effect for winning a variable-probability jackpot in which a variable-probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and as a variable effect for indicating the winning of the jackpot. The promotion condition is established during the opening period of the jackpot game only when all the symbols (3rd symbols) are stop-displayed. In other words, when the dedicated music is reproduced based on the operation of the second operation means during the opening period, the jackpot won this time is the variable probability jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with added value by playing back the dedicated music based on the operation of the second operating means.

In addition, in the 48th control example, after the end of the jackpot game, a variable probability jackpot in which a variable probability state is set is won, and as a variable effect for indicating the winning of the jackpot, an even number pattern (a third pattern with an even number ) are stop-displayed together, and the greater the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed, the easier it is to establish the promotion condition by operating the second operating means. By configuring in this way, when the promotion condition is satisfied based on the operation to the second operation means during the opening period of the jackpot game and the exclusive music is reproduced, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed is large.
The music selection operation performed during the opening period of the jackpot game is determined by the music selection process (see S5401J in FIG. 1817) performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the music corresponding to the determined operation content. is read from the song data type storage area 222ka (see S5454J in FIG. 1817). Then, identification information corresponding to the read music is stored in the music information storage area 223kb, and the music selection screen is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the stored identification information.
Then, when the music selected by the music selection operation is determined as the music to be reproduced during the jackpot game (when the opening period ends), the identification information corresponding to the currently selected music is used as the current music information. It is stored in the information storage area 223kb (S5467J in FIG. 1817).
The promotion lottery table 222kb determines whether or not the promotion condition for playing the dedicated music (music X) is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22 (second operation means) executed on the music selection screen. This is a data table that is referenced when This promotion lottery table 222kb is the opening period when even-numbered symbols (third symbols with even-numbered numbers) are stopped and displayed together as a variation effect to indicate that the probability variable jackpot is won and the jackpot win is won. Reference is made based on the operation of the frame button 22 inside (S5458J in FIG. 1817).

Here, with reference to FIG. 1806(a), detailed contents of the promotion lottery table 222kb will be described. FIG. 1806(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the promotion lottery table 222kb. As shown in FIG. 1806(a), the promotion lottery table 222kb contains different winning rates ( percentage of satisfaction of promotion conditions) is stipulated. Then, when the number of presses of the frame button 22 (the value of the frame button pressing counter 223kc) reaches the value specified in the promotion lottery table 222kb, the promotion lottery is executed.
Specifically, the value of the button pressing counter 223kc is "1", the winning rate is "30%" for the jackpot type "jackpot A", and the winning rate is "30%" for the jackpot type "jackpot C". 0%", and a winning rate of "1%" for the jackpot type "jackpot D". The promotion lottery table 222kb is a data table that is referred to during the opening period of the jackpot game that is executed when the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbols, so the even-numbered symbols are never stopped. A winning rate is not defined for the jackpot type “jackpot B”.
Furthermore, in this 48th control example, since it is configured so that the promotion condition can be satisfied only when the probability variable jackpot is won, the winning rate for the jackpot type "jackpot C" corresponding to the time-saving jackpot "0%" is specified. Thus, by prescribing a different winning rate for each set jackpot type, it is possible to reliably prevent promotion conditions from being established during the opening period of the jackpot game corresponding to the time-saving jackpot. .
In addition, for the jackpot types “jackpot A” and “jackpot D” corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, the winning rate that can satisfy the promotion condition is stipulated. On the other hand, when the value of the button depression counter 223kc is "1", that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) once, the promotion condition is more likely to be satisfied. Here, the "jackpot A" differs from the "jackpot D" in that the number of round games (the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game is large. Jackpot D" is a variable jackpot in which 7 rounds of jackpot games are executed.

That is, when the frame button 22 is operated (depressed) once during the song selection period during the opening period of the jackpot game, the promotion condition is most likely to be satisfied when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type. It is configured to be With this configuration, when a dedicated song is immediately determined in response to the operation of the frame button 22 during the song selection period, the number of round games (number of rounds) to be executed after the opening period ends. However, the player can easily predict that the number of rounds (10 rounds) is the most advantageous.
Next, the value of the button pressing counter 223kc is "3", the winning rate is "10%" for the jackpot type "jackpot A", and the jackpot type "jackpot C" and "jackpot D". has a winning rate of 0%. The promotion lottery table 222kb is a data table that is referred to during the opening period of the jackpot game that is executed when the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbols, so the even-numbered symbols are never stopped. The winning rate is not stipulated for the jackpot type "jackpot B", and similarly, the promotion condition can be established only when the probability variable jackpot is won, so it corresponds to the time-saving jackpot. A winning rate of "0%" is defined for the jackpot type "jackpot C".
That is, when the value of the frame button pressing counter 223kc is "3", that is, in the promotion lottery executed by operating (depressing) the frame button 22 three times, the prize is won only when the "jackpot A" is set. Each winning probability is defined to obtain. By configuring in this way, when the dedicated music (music X) is reproduced when the number of times the frame button 22 is operated reaches 3 times, 10 rounds of the probability variable jackpot game is executed at that time. will be determined.
In this way, the jackpot type set by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated until the dedicated music is reproduced (until the promotion condition is satisfied) can be specified. , the enjoyment of grasping the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated can be provided.

Next, the value of the button pressing counter 223kc is "5", the winning rate is "10%" for the jackpot types "jackpot A" and "jackpot D", and the jackpot type "jackpot C" is won. A rate of "0%" is defined. The promotion lottery table 222kb is a data table that is referred to during the opening period of the jackpot game that is executed when the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbols, so the even-numbered symbols are never stopped. The winning rate is not stipulated for the jackpot type "jackpot B", and similarly, the promotion condition can be established only when the probability variable jackpot is won, so it corresponds to the time-saving jackpot. A winning rate of "0%" is defined for the jackpot type "jackpot C".
The value of the button pressing counter 223kc is "10", the winning rate is "80%" for the jackpot type "jackpot A", and the winning rate is "0%" for the jackpot type "jackpot C". However, the winning rate of "50%" is defined for the jackpot type "jackpot D". The promotion lottery table 222kb is a data table that is referred to during the opening period of the jackpot game that is executed when the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbols, so the even-numbered symbols are never stopped. The winning rate is not stipulated for the jackpot type "jackpot B", and similarly, the promotion condition can be established only when the probability variable jackpot is won, so it corresponds to the time-saving jackpot. A winning rate of "0%" is defined for the jackpot type "jackpot C".
As described above, in the 48th control example, the opening period of the jackpot game in which the promotion condition can be established, that is, despite winning the probability variable jackpot, the combination of even symbols (for example, "444") By pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times during the opening period of the jackpot game executed after the jackpot winning is reported, the promotion lottery can be executed a plurality of times, and when the promotion lottery is won, the promotion lottery is executed this time. It is configured to notify that the jackpot of 1 is a probability variable jackpot. By configuring in this way, the timing of winning the promotion lottery (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) can be varied, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.
Furthermore, different winning rates are stipulated for a plurality of jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot D”) that can satisfy promotion conditions, and a jackpot type (“jackpot A”) that is advantageous to players is set. A jackpot game with a large number of rounds is more likely to be executed when a jackpot type ("jackpot D") disadvantageous to the player is set than when a jackpot type ("jackpot D") disadvantageous to the player is set. In this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of specifying the type of privilege to be given later according to the timing of establishment as well as whether or not the promotion condition is established.

In the forty-eighth control example, the promotion lottery is executed when the value of the frame button pressing counter 223kc reaches the execution value (1, 3, 5, 10), but this is not limitative. Instead, a promotion lottery may be executed each time the frame button 22 is pressed. Further, in this 48th control example, the promotion lottery is executed based on the winning rate defined in the promotion lottery table 222kb based only on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the song selection period. Without being limited to this, it is possible to execute a promotion lottery with different winning rates based on combined operation information combining the operation contents of the selection button 600 and the operation contents of the frame button 22 during the music selection period. You can
In this case, for example, the music being selected displayed on the music selection screen (see FIG. 1799(a)) can be switched according to the operation of the selection button 600 during the music selection period, and the specific music ( For example, when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which music A) is selected (a state in which music A is displayed in the selected area gk1), music other than a specific music (for example, music B) is selected. is selected (music B is displayed in the selected area gk1), the winning rate of promotion lottery is preferably higher than when the frame button 22 is operated.
By configuring in this way, the promotion lottery can be executed with different winning rates according to the operation contents of the selection button 600 (first operation means) and the frame button 22 (second operation means) during the music selection period. Therefore, the player who wants to grasp the contents of the big win (set big win type) can be motivated to operate various operation means, and the desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.
The addition time mode selection table 222kc is similar to the addition time mode selection table 222jb (see FIG. 1770) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 47th control example, and the addition time is set when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined. A data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the variable effect that is set when a variable pattern command indicating that the ing.

This addition time mode selection table 222jb determines that the current variation pattern command has addition time in the variation effect setting process (S5014J in FIG. 1813) executed during the variation display setting process (see S4104J in FIG. 1812). If so (S5111H of FIG. 1813: Yes), it is referred to determine the effect mode corresponding to the additional time (see S5103J of FIG. 1813).
Here, with reference to FIG. 1807, detailed contents of the addition time mode selection table 222kc will be described. FIG. 1807 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the addition time mode selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 1807, the addition time mode selection table 222jb contains the determined addition time, the lottery result (this time's special symbol lottery result), and the stop symbol type (previous special symbol lottery result). 3rd symbol stop display mode) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, different effect modes are defined.
Specifically, when the added time is "2 seconds", the lottery result is "win (big win)", and the stop symbol type is "type A", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0". "Freeze 2 seconds" is defined as the effect mode for the entire range of "99", and when the stop symbol type is "Type B", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". "Freeze 2 seconds" is defined as the effect mode for the range of , "Freeze 0 seconds" is defined as the effect mode for the range "50 to 99", and the stop symbol type is "Type C". If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 29", the effect mode is "freeze 2 seconds", and in the range of "30 to 99", the effect mode is "freeze 0 second". are respectively defined, and when the stop symbol type is "type D", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is defined as "freeze 0 seconds" as the effect mode for the entire range of "0 to 99" It is
In addition, when the addition time is "2 seconds", the lottery result is "loss", and the stop symbol type is "type A", the entire range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "0 to 99""Freeze 0 seconds" is defined as the production mode, and when the stop symbol type is "type B", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is produced in the range of "0 to 29""Freeze 2 seconds" is defined as a mode, and "Freeze 0 seconds" is defined as a production mode for the range of "30 to 99". "Freeze 2 seconds" is specified as the effect mode for the value of the effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 19", and "Freeze 0 second" is defined as the effect mode for the range "20 to 99". When the stop symbol type is "type D", "freeze 0 seconds" is defined as the effect mode for the entire range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 99".

Here, the stop symbol type will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in the 48th control example is provided with a stop symbol information storage area 223kd in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, and is configured to be able to temporarily store past stop symbol information. That is, the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be stored as the effect result of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, when determining the type of effect mode determined corresponding to the additional time, the stop symbol information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd is referred to. The stop pattern information referred to when determining the type of performance mode is classified into four types of information and stored, and "type A" indicates the stop display mode (symbol alignment) corresponding to winning the jackpot. Stop symbol information corresponds to "type B", and "type B" corresponds to stop symbol information indicating a stop display mode including a third symbol with the number "7" attached, and "type C" corresponds to an odd number. Stop symbol information indicating a stop display mode in which four or more attached third symbols are stopped and displayed corresponds, and stop symbol information indicating other stop display modes is defined in advance so that it corresponds to "type D". It is
In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the third symbol variation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation stops the previous special symbol variation. It is configured to be executed from the display mode. Therefore, in the state where "type A" is stored as the type information of the stop symbol information, "type A" is stored when the effect result of the variable effect indicating the jackpot winning (stop display mode of the third symbol) is determined. The stopped symbol type is stored in the stopped symbol information storage area 223kd. Then, when determining the performance mode of the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game, the stop symbol type of "type A" is read. That is, the situation in which "type A" is read out as the stopped symbol type is only the situation in which the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol change in the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game is determined.
In the forty-eighth control example, as in the forty-seventh control example described above, when the freeze effect is executed as the variable effect, the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. ' is read out, that is, when the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game is the jackpot variation and the addition time is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the freeze effect is always executed. It is configured so that By constructing in this way, when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot continuously, it is possible to make it easier to execute the freeze performance than in other cases, so that the benefit due to the jackpot winning in succession can be provided. It can be made easy to give to a player.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, since the freeze effect is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is started (timing at which the variable effect is executed), the variable effect is executed. It is configured so that the player can specify whether or not the freeze performance is to be executed immediately after the game is played. Furthermore, in a state where "type A" is read, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is out, the freeze effect is not executed. In other words, when the freeze performance is executed at the timing when the special pattern variation of the first rotation after the end of the big win game is started, the player can grasp that the big win is won at that time.

By configuring in this way, depending on the presence or absence of the freeze effect, the player can grasp the effect result of the variable effect (lottery result of the special symbol lottery) before the end of the variable effect, so that the variable effect is performed. The player can be interested in the timing of execution. In the forty-eighth control example, the freeze effect is executed at the start timing of the variable effect, but without being limited to this, the freeze effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed. It may be configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the freeze effect will be executed. It is possible to make the user see the variable performance with interest, and to enhance the performance effect.
Also, as shown in FIG. 1807, the same time (2 seconds) is determined as the addition time, and even if the result of the special symbol lottery is the same result, the freeze effect is likely to be executed depending on the stop symbol type. When the lottery result is “win”, “type A” is the easiest to execute the freeze effect, followed by “type B”, “type C”, and “type D” in that order. It is configured so that the freeze effect is difficult to execute. On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, “type B” is the most likely to execute the freeze effect, followed by “type C”, which is the easiest to execute the freeze effect, “type A”, and “type D , the freeze effect is not executed.
That is, in the forty-eighth control example, depending on the type of stop display mode (stop design type) of the third design displayed at the start of the fluctuation, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot when the freeze effect is executed differs. It is configured so that By constructing in this way, not only the types of various performances executed as variable performances, but also the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed at the start of variation can make the players interested.
Next, the contents of the addition time mode selection table 222kc defined for the case where "5 seconds" is determined as the addition time will be described. When the addition time is "5 seconds", the lottery result is "win (big win)", and the stop symbol type is "type A", all of the acquired value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223f "Freeze 5 seconds" is defined as the effect mode for the range, and when the stop symbol type is "type B", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is for the range of "0 to 29""Freeze 5 seconds" as the production mode, "Freeze 2 seconds" as the production mode for the range of "30 to 69", and "Freeze 0 seconds" as the production mode for the range of "70 to 99" respectively. is specified, and when the stop symbol type is "type C", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19", and the effect mode is "freeze 5 seconds", "Freeze 2 seconds" is defined as the effect mode for the range of "39", "Freeze 0 second" is defined as the effect mode for the range "40 to 99", and the stop symbol type is "Type D". If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", the effect mode is "freeze 5 seconds", and in the range of "50 to 99", the effect mode is "freeze 0". seconds” are defined respectively.

In addition, when the addition time is "5 seconds", the lottery result is "loss", and the stop symbol type is "type A", the entire range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "0 to 99""Freeze 0 seconds" is defined as the production mode, and when the stop symbol type is "type B", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is produced in the range of "0 to 4""Freeze 5 seconds" as the mode, "Freeze 2 seconds" as the rendering mode for the range of "5 to 29", and "Freeze 0 seconds" as the rendering mode for the range of "30 to 99" are defined respectively. When the stopped symbol type is "type C", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is set to "0 to 9", and "freeze 5 seconds" is set to "10 to 19" as the effect mode. "Freeze 2 seconds" is defined as the production mode for the range of ", and "Freeze 0 seconds" is defined as the production mode for the range "20 to 99", and the stop symbol type is "type D". In some cases, "Freeze 5 seconds" is set as the effect mode for the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 14", and "Freeze 0 second" is used as the effect mode for the range of "15 to 99". ” are defined respectively.
Furthermore, when the additional time is "6 seconds", that is, when the lottery result is "winning", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is set to "freeze" for the entire range of "0 to 99". 6 seconds” is specified.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, when the freeze effect is executed as the effect mode corresponding to the additional time, the longer the execution period of the freeze effect, the more the expectation of winning the jackpot. is configured to be high. By constructing in this way, the player who has noticed the execution of the freeze performance can play the game while expecting the freeze performance to continue for a long time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can be done.
Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the forty-eighth control example, the freeze effect can be executed with the length of the set addition time as the upper limit, and when the freeze effect is not selected, or When a freeze performance with a period shorter than the addition time is selected, the remaining time of the addition time is configured so that each third pattern in the fluctuation performance is absorbed in the high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, regardless of the presence or absence of the addition time and the presence or absence of the freeze effect, the effect mode of the variable effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) executed after the high-speed change period of the third symbol has passed is unified. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing for executing the variable production and the amount of production data.

The background change lottery table 222kd is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the background change effect, and whether or not to execute the background change effect is determined by the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. be done. The background change lottery using the background change lottery table 222kb is executed when the normal state is determined (S5107H in FIG. 1814: Yes) in the variable effect setting process (see S5014 in FIG. 1814). It is executed when the background change effect is not executed in the process (see S5151J in FIG. 1814) (S5181J in FIG. 1815). Then, when execution of the background change effect is determined with reference to the background change lottery, the background changing flag 223kf is set to ON.
Here, the detailed contents of the background change lottery table 222kb will be described with reference to FIG. 1806(b). FIG. 1806(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the background change lottery table 222kb. As shown in FIG. 1806(b), the background change lottery table 222kb defines the lottery result of the background change lottery in correspondence with the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. 223f value is in the range of "0 to 2", the lottery result of "executing" the background change effect is defined, and in the range of "3 to 99", the background change effect is "executed". No" lottery results are stipulated.
In the forty-eighth control example, the normal state is set as the game state, and in a state where the background change effect is not being executed (state in which the background changing flag 223kf is set to OFF), the third symbol is displayed. Since the background change lottery is executed each time when the variable performance is determined, the background change performance is executed at a rate of about 33 special symbol lotteries executed in the normal state. . In this way, the background change effect can be executed, and the background of the variable effect in the normal state can be switched, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1805(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1805(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1805(b), the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is different from the RAM 223 (see FIG. 1768(b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-seventh control example. The difference is that a counter 223ka, a music information storage area 223kb, a frame button pressing counter 223kc, a stop pattern information storage area 223kd, a background information storage area 223ke, and a background changing flag 223kf are added. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The music selection period counter 223ka is a counter for measuring the remaining period of the music selection period, and when the opening period of the jackpot game is set, a value corresponding to the length of the music selection period is set. After that, the set value is decremented by 1 each time the song selection process (see S5401J in FIG. 1817) is executed in units of 1 millisecond, and when the value becomes 0, the song can be selected. is executed. On the other hand, if the value is not 0, the remaining time gauge is displayed in a manner that indicates the remaining time corresponding to the set value.
The song information storage area 223kb is a storage area for temporarily storing song information indicating songs selected during the song selection period (songs being selected). The information stored in the music information storage area 223kb is referred to when executing the process for displaying the selection screen corresponding to the details of the player's selection operation on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 ( S5453J in FIG. 1817). It is also referred to when setting a voice command for output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226 .
The frame button pressing counter 223kc is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and is incremented by 1 when the frame button 22 is pressed during the song selection period (see S5457J in FIG. 1817). . Then, the promotion lottery is executed with reference to the value after addition (S5458J in FIG. 1817), and when execution of the promotion lottery is determined (S5459 in FIG. 1817: Yes), the value is cleared ( (see S5462). The value is also cleared when it is determined that the value of the music selection period counter 223ka has become 0 (S5465J in FIG. 1817: Yes).
The stop symbol information storage area 223 kd is a storage area for temporarily storing information regarding the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . In the stop symbol information storage area 223kd, the stop type (stop symbol information) set in the variable display setting process (see S4104J in FIG. 1812) is stored (see S4901J in FIG. 1812). Then, the stored stop pattern information is read out when determining the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the variation pattern in which the additional time is set (S5102J), and the additional time mode selection table 222kd is referred to. It is referred to when selecting a presentation mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, the information indicating the stop display mode of the third symbol and the information indicating the stop symbol type (type A to type D) to which the stop display mode of the third symbol belongs are the stop symbols. Although it is configured to be stored in the information storage area 223kd, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to store only the information indicating the stop symbol type in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the data amount of information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 48th control example, the stop symbol types are "type A (stop display mode indicating jackpot winning)", "type B (stop display mode including 7 symbols)", "type C (odd number 4 types of stop symbol types including four or more symbols)" and "type D (other)" are classified and stored, and according to the stored stop symbol type, next Although it is configured to be able to determine the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation to be executed, as the stop symbol type, a stop symbol type different from the 48th control example may be provided. E (stop display mode indicating out of reach (+1 frame)), "Type F (stop display mode indicating out of reach (-1 frame))", "Type G (stop indicating out of reach (1 or more frames)) display mode)” or the like may be provided. In this case, stop symbol types (types E to G) corresponding to reach out are provided, and when determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed next, the stop symbol types (types E to G) corresponding to reach out are determined. is stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd and the other stop symbol types (types A to D) are stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd. It is preferable to configure such that the selection ratio is different. By configuring in this way, the variable performance to be executed next when the performance result of the ready-to-win performance executed as the variable performance is out is executed next to the case where the variable performance other than the ready-to-reach performance is executed. To suppress a situation in which a player's willingness to play is remarkably lowered, for example, the continuous execution of a ready-to-win performance in which the performance result is lost, because it can be easily made different from the fluctuation performance. becomes possible.
In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, the information regarding the stop display mode of the third symbol in the previous variable performance stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd is read out, and the performance mode of the next variable performance is read out. Although it is configured to be determinable, it is not limited to this, and the production of the variable performance to be executed next according to the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed in two or more variable performances executed in the past. The mode may be configured to be determinable. For example, as a result of the variable performance, if the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that is completely different from the winning of the jackpot a plurality of times in succession, the following is performed. Even if the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed immediately is a loss, it is preferable to make it easy to execute the variable performance with an increased expectation of winning the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily expect to win a big win, so it is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting bored with the game.
The background information storage area 223ke is a storage area for temporarily storing background information relating to the currently set background type, and stores background information relating to the background type switched based on execution of the background change effect. remembered. Then, the background information stored in the background information storage area 223ke is read, and the background information corresponding to the next variable effect is determined.

In the forty-eighth control example, the background change effect can be executed independently of the special symbol fluctuation effect, and when the background change effect is executed, the effect period is 60 seconds. is configured to run. When the execution of the background transition performance is determined at the start timing of the variation performance, the background transition performance is executed until the performance period of the current variation performance (variation period of the special symbol variation) elapses.
Here, the effect data of the background transition effect defines a effect mode in which a total of four types of background types are switched with the passage of time. It is configured so that a background change effect in which many background types are switched is executed. Then, the background type displayed at the end timing of the variation effect (the stop display timing of the special symbol variation) is stored in the background information storage area 223ke, and at the timing at which the next variation effect is started, the background information storage area 223Ke is stored. The stored background information is read out, and the background change effect is restarted immediately after switching to the background type corresponding to the read out background information.
More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 1801, the effect data of the background change effect includes background A (grassland) for 10 seconds after the start of the effect, and background B (grassland) for 20 seconds thereafter. forest), followed by background C (sky) for the next 20 seconds, and background D (space) for the last 10 seconds. Time, 30 seconds elapsed, 50 seconds elapsed) are configured to be the restart timing of the background change effect. Then, when the background change effect is restarted from the background C, at least a part of the plurality of termination conditions for the background change effect is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, for example, after the background change effect is executed, when a short variation time (for example, variation time 5 seconds) is continuously determined as the variation time of the special symbol variation, the background The background change effect in which A (grassland) is displayed is repeatedly executed, and when the special symbol change for which the background change effect is executed is a jackpot change and the change time is determined to be 60 seconds, once. During the special pattern variation period of , the background change effect of shifting from the background A to the background D is executed. Therefore, the degree of progress of the background change effect can be varied according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, the background type is more easily shifted to the background D by the background change effect when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery than when the big win is not won. there is Specifically, when the background change effect is being executed and a new special symbol change is executed, the set change pattern (variation time) and the restart position of the background change effect If it is determined that it is possible to reach the background D, it is determined whether the result of the target special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, and if it is determined to be a jackpot winning, the jackpot is better. It is configured to make it easier to continue the background change effect than when it is determined that there is no winning.
By configuring in this manner, switching between a plurality of background types suppresses the player from getting bored with the game early, and makes the player expect that the background change effect of switching to a specific background type will be executed. Since the game can be played while the player is playing, the performance effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the forty-eighth control example, since the background change effect is executed using the predetermined effect data of 60 seconds, the change time of the special symbol change of this time is grasped based on the change effect being executed. By doing so, it is possible to predict how many seconds the background change effect being executed will be executed. In other words, when the background change effect and the variable effect are executed, the player is provided with the enjoyment of predicting how far the background type will switch in the background change effect based on the effect mode of the variable effect being executed. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.
The background changing flag 223kf is a flag for indicating that the background changing effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the background changing effect is executed (see S5186J in FIG. 1815). Then, the setting state of the background changing flag 223kf is determined when determining the effect mode of the variable effect (see S5151J of FIG. 1814), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5151J of FIG. 1814: Yes) That is, when a new special symbol variation is started during execution of the background change effect, the background information stored in the background information storage area 223ke is read out and the background change effect corresponding to the current special symbol change is performed. A presentation mode is determined. Then, it is set to OFF when the end of the background change effect is determined (S5158J in FIG. 1814, S5165J in FIG. 1814).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example has frame buttons 22 as operating means that can be operated by the player, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above. A production button 600 is provided. Specifically, the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 has an upper plate 17 for storing balls which protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the player can operate the upper plate 17. A frame button 22 and a selection button 600 (not shown) are provided. The frame button 22 is provided mainly for the purpose of allowing the player to operate the frame button 22 in order to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like. It is operated by the player to determine the game environment (for example, sound volume and light intensity) of the pachinko machine 10, and as shown in the selection button (see FIG. 783) in the twenty-ninth control example described above, the middle button 600a , an up button 600b, a right button 600c, a down button 600d, and a left button 600e.
Similarly to the signal indicating the details of the player's operation on the frame button 22, the signal indicating the details of the player's operation on the selection button 6000 can also be received by the sound lamp control device 113. It is also different from the forty-seventh control example described above in that the mode of presentation can be changed based on.
The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example includes, as operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that is operated during the operation presentation and the selection button 600 that is operated when selecting the game environment. have. In other words, although a plurality of operation means are provided for different uses, they are not limited to this, and the frame button 22 can be operated when selecting a game environment, or the selection button 600 can be operated as an operation effect. It may be configured to
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, as an operation means that can be operated by the player, by detecting that the player has pressed the operation means Although a button configuration that can determine that the is operated is used, a configuration other than the button configuration may be used as long as it is a configuration that can detect the operation by the player. It is also possible to use an operation means having a detection means capable of detecting, or a detection means capable of detecting that the player is performing an action other than pressing (for example, a pulling action, etc.). In addition, instead of the player directly touching the operation means, a non-contact device that can detect the presence of a part of the player's body (such as a hand) in a predetermined space area (detection range of the sensor) A type of operation detection means (sensor, etc.) may be used. In this case, instead of simply detecting a part of the player's body (for example, a hand, etc.), the player's body is detected within a predetermined space area. is preferably moved according to a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, for example, when the player leaves the seat to temporarily suspend the game of the pachinko machine 10, a part of the player's body (for example, the head) is erroneously operated. Even if it enters into the detection range of the means, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation presentation triggered by it.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is provided with the frame button 22 and the selection button 600 as operation means that can be operated by the player, and information (signal) indicating the operation content for any of the operation means is also provided by a voice lamp. It is configured to output to the control device 113, and is configured to be able to execute effects based on various signals input by the sound lamp control device 113, but is not limited to this, information indicating the operation content (signal ) may be separately provided to the main controller 110 .
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1808 to 1817, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, the stop-time effect setting process (Fig. 1788 (See S4203H in Fig. 1808) instead of stop effect setting processing (See S4203J in Fig. 1808), in place of jackpot related processing (See S4218J in Fig. 1810), in variable display setting processing (S4104H in Fig. 1790) Instead, the variation setting process (see S4104J in FIG. 1812) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4101H in FIG. 1795), and the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4101J in FIG. 1816) is executed. is different. Other control processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1808, the processing contents of the stop effect setting processing (S4203J) will be described. FIG. 1808 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the stop effect setting processing (S4203J). This stop effect setting process (S4203J) is a control process executed at the timing when the variable effect is completed (the special symbol is stopped and displayed), and receives a special figure confirmation command output from the main controller 110. This process is executed when This stop time effect setting process (S4203J) differs from the above-described stop time effect setting process (see S4203H in FIG. 1788) in that a process for ending the background change effect is executed. The content is identical. Identical reference numerals are given to parts that do not have the same processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, when the stopping effect setting process (S4203J) is executed, the same processes of S4501H to S4508H as the stopping effect setting process (see S4203H in FIG. 1788) in the above-described 47th control example are executed. Then, in the processing of S4508H, when it is determined that the normal symbol variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is not executed (S4508H: No), or after the processing of S4509H is performed, the background changing flag 223kf is on. (S4501J).

In the processing of S4501J, if it is determined that the background changing flag 223kf is set to ON (S4501J: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed during execution of the background change effect, this time (S4502J) to determine whether or not the end condition of the background change effect is satisfied at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation (S4502J). (see S4203H of )) is executed, and the process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4501J, if it is determined that the background changing flag 223kf is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S4501J: No), that is, it is determined that the background change effect is not currently being executed. If so, the process proceeds to S4509H without executing the process of S4502J, and then ends this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1809, the processing contents of the background change effect end process (S4202J) executed in the stop time effect setting process (see S4203J in FIG. 1808) will be described. FIG. 1809 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the background change rendering end processing (S4202J). In this background change effect end processing (S4202J), the background change effect is continued based on the background type indicated by the background information stored in the background information storage area 223ke and the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed next. A process is performed to determine whether to
Specifically, when the background change rendering end process (S4202J) is executed, first, the background information (background type) stored in the background information storage area 223ke is read (S5571J), and the read background information (background type ) is "background C" (S5572J), and if it is determined to be "background C" (S5572J: Yes), winning information corresponding to the next variation stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S5573J).

Then, based on the winning information read by the process of S5573J, it is determined whether the next variation is a winning variation (S5574J), and if it is determined that the next variation is a winning variation (S5574J: Yes), the next It is determined whether the variation time of the variation is 30 seconds or more (S5575J), and if it is determined that it is less than 30 seconds (S5575J: No), that is, if the next variation is a winning variation of less than 30 seconds, A display command indicating the end of the background change effect (background change effect) is set (S5577J), the background changing flag 223kf is set to OFF (S5578J), and the information stored in the background information storage area 223ke is cleared. (S5579J), this processing ends.
In other words, in a state where "background C" is set as the background type, an effect period of 30 seconds or more is required in order to execute the background change effect to the end (execute the effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot). Therefore, even if the next variation is a winning variation, if the variation time is less than 30 seconds, the process of ending the background change effect is executed at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation this time.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand because the background change effect is in the middle stage and winning is notified. In addition, since the big win can be won even in the variation next to the end of the background change performance, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from remarkably decreasing due to the end of the background change performance.
Returning to FIG. 1809, the description continues. In the processing of S5575J, when it is determined that the variation time of the next variation is 30 seconds or more (S5575J: Yes), the process proceeds to S5580J. Here, if the process proceeds to S5580 via the process of S5575J, since the background information of "background C" is stored in the background information storage area 223ke, S5580 is determined as No, and the process is carried out as it is. End this process. In other words, if the next variation is a winning variation of 30 seconds or more, by continuing the background change effect (background change effect), it is possible to execute the background change effect to the end during the fluctuation period of the next variation. , the player can be notified of the winning of the jackpot by the performance result of the background change performance. In addition, for example, if the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation is 60 seconds, the remaining time (30 seconds) after the background change effect is executed to the end, the special background still image for congratulating the winning of the jackpot continues. It is configured to be displayed as

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort regardless of the remaining period from the end of the background change effect to the stop display of the special symbol variation. In addition, according to the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation in which the background change effect is executed to the end, the remaining period of the special symbol change at the timing when the background change effect is executed to the end is different. Before the display mode indicating the high expectation of big win is displayed in the variable performance, the player is notified that the expectation of big win is high by the background change performance, or the high expectation of big win is notified to the player in the variable performance. After being notified to the player, it is possible to repeatedly notify that the degree of expectation for the big win is high by the background change effect. Therefore, the player can be interested in both the executed variable performance and the background change performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5574J, if it is determined that the next variation is not a hit variation (is a loss variation) (S5574: No), then it is determined whether the variation time of the next variation is 30 seconds or more ( S5576J), if it is determined that the time is 30 seconds or more (S5576J: Yes), that is, if the next fluctuation is an outlier fluctuation of 30 seconds or more, a display command indicating the end of the background change effect (background change effect) is set (S5577J), the background changing flag 223kf is set to OFF (S5578J), the information stored in the background information storage area 223ke is cleared (S5579J), and this processing ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the background change effect from being executed to the end during the execution of the special symbol variation (loss change) in which the lottery result is lost, so that the background change effect is performed to the end. By being executed, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be increased.
Also, in the process of S5576J, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation is less than 30 seconds (S5576J: No), even if the background change production (background change production) is continued, the special symbol fluctuation of the next fluctuation Since the background change effect is not executed to the end during the period, this processing is terminated as it is without satisfying the end condition of the background change effect. By configuring in this way, even if the next variation is an outlier variation in a state in which the background information corresponding to the “background C” is stored in the background information storage area 223ke, the background change effect is changed to the next variation. Since the background change performance continues at the timing when the next variation is started, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win.
In the process of S5572J, if it is determined that the background information (background type) stored in the background information storage area 223ke is not "background C" (S5572J: No), then "background D" is stored. (S5580J), and if it is determined that "background D" is stored (S5580J: Yes), a display indicating the end of the background change effect (background change effect) to end the background change effect command is set (S5577J), the background changing flag 223kf is set to OFF (S5578J), the information stored in the background information storage area 223ke is cleared (S5579J), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1810, the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218J) will be described. FIG. 1810 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot related process (S4218J). In this jackpot-related processing (S4218J), similar to the jackpot-related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 839) executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above, various effects executed during the jackpot game are changed. Processing is performed to determine.
When the jackpot related process (S4218J) is executed, it is first determined whether the opening command is received (S5601J), and if it is determined that the opening command is received (S5601J: Yes), the opening effect process is executed ( S5602J), and shifts to the processing of S5612J. In addition, the opening effect processing (S5602J) includes, as effects executed during the opening period of the jackpot game, a music selection effect for allowing the player to select a song, and a guidance effect for indicating that the jackpot game has started. is determined. Details of the opening effect processing (S5602J) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S5601J, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S5601J: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5603J), and if it is determined that it has been received (S5603J: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S5604J), the round number command for display is set (S5605J), the value of the round number counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S5606J), and the during-round effect processing is executed. (S5607J), and the process proceeds to S5612J.
Note that the during-round effect processing (S5607J) executed in S5607J is the during-round effect processing (see S3609 in FIG. 840) executed in the jackpot-related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 839) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. Similarly, a process for determining the effect mode of various effects to be executed during the jackpot game is executed, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5603J, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5603J: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S5608J), and if it is determined that it has been received (S5608J : Yes), it is determined whether the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S5609J), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5609J: No), the value of the round number counter is cleared (S56010J) , the ending command for display is set (S5611J), and the process proceeds to S5612J. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5609J that the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S5609J: Yes), the process of S5610J is skipped, the process proceeds to the process of S5611J, and then the process of S5612J is executed. and terminate this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1811, the processing contents of the opening effect processing (S5602J) executed in the jackpot related processing (see S4218J in FIG. 1810) will be described. FIG. 1811 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the opening effect processing (S5602J). In this opening effect processing (S5602J), processing for setting an operation valid period for validly determining the operation of the operation means (the selection button 600 and the frame button 22) during the opening period (OP period), and a music selection method. , a process for setting a display mode for guiding the player about music selection status, and a process for setting a guidance display mode for indicating that a jackpot game has been executed.
When the opening effect process (S5602J) is executed, first, "50000" is set to the value of the music selection period counter 223Ka (S5651J). The value set in this song selection period counter 223Ka is configured to be subtracted in the main process executed every 1 millisecond, and the value (50000) set in the process of S5651J is set to 5 seconds. It is a value for measurement. The period during which the value of the music selection period counter 223Ka is 1 or more is the period during which the player's operation (press) on the operation means (frame button 22, selection button 600) is determined to be valid (operation valid period). becomes.
After the processing of S5651J is finished, next, the value of the frame button pressing counter 223kc is cleared to 0 (S5652J), and the display mode for showing the music selection screen corresponding to the music stored in the music information storage area 223kb is changed. Determine (S5653J), determine the display mode for indicating the remaining time of the selection period (operation effective period) (S5654J), determine the opening display mode corresponding to the current jackpot game (S5655J), determined various displays A display opening command corresponding to the mode is set (S5656J), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1812, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4104J) will be described. FIG. 1812 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4104J). This variable display setting process (S4104J) differs from the variable display setting process (see S4104H in FIG. 1790) in the forty-seventh control example described above when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (see FIG. 1790). 1812 S4909H: Yes) is different in that a part of the processing executed is changed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Specifically, when the variable display setting process (S4104J) is executed, first, the same processes of S4901H to S4911H as the variable display setting process (see S4104H in FIG. 1790) in the forty-seventh control example described above are executed, After executing the processing of S4911H, the information corresponding to the set stop type is stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd (S4901J), and this processing ends.
In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is configured to be able to temporarily store information about the stop display mode determined as the variation display mode of the third symbol (at least until the next variation variation effect is determined). is doing. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine the effect mode of the variable effect according to the type of the stop display mode of the previous third symbol.
In the forty-eighth control example, unlike the forty-seventh control example described above, in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the stop display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol type ) can be determined, but without being limited to this, as in the forty-seventh control example described above, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, without determining the stop display mode of the third symbol, stop display The display control device 114 can determine the stop display mode corresponding to the type of information such as "symbol matching", "out of reach", and "completely out of reach", that is, the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed. The display control device 114 receives a display command including the symbol stop information determined by the sound lamp control device 113, thereby stopping the third symbol in detail. The display mode may be configured so that it can be determined on the display control device 114 side.

In this case, since the sound lamp control device 113 cannot grasp the last stop display mode, the information command for indicating the stop display mode of the third symbol determined by the display control device 114 is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. 113 can be received. Further, the symbol stop information determined by the sound lamp control device 113 is stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223kd instead of the actual stop display mode of the third symbol. Based on, it is preferable to configure so that the effect mode of the variable effect of the next change can be determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing for determining the stop display mode of the third symbol executed by the sound lamp control device 113, and the stop display mode of the previous third symbol. It is also possible to simplify the processing for executing the variation performance associated with the next variation.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1813, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014J) will be described. FIG. 1813 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014J). This variable effect setting process (S5014J) is the background change effect determination process when the normal state is set as the game state with respect to the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) in the forty-seventh control example described above. (S5101J) is executed, and when it is determined that the received variation pattern command has information indicating the addition time (S5111H: Yes), the difference is that the contents of the process to be executed are different, and other than that Since the processing contents are the same, the description thereof is omitted.
Specifically, when the variable effect setting process (S5014J) is executed, first, the processes of S5101H to S5107H which are the same as the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) in the 47th control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S5107H, if it is determined that the state is normal (S5107H: Yes), the background change effect determination process is executed (S5101J), and then the variable effect setting process in the above-described 47th control example (Fig. 1792 (see S5014H of )) are executed.
Then, in the process of S5111, when it is determined that there is additional time (S5111H: Yes), the stop design information stored in the stop design information storage area 223kd, that is, the third design display as the effect result of the previous variation effect Information corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is read out (S5012J), the effect mode (with or without freeze effect) is determined by referring to the addition time mode selection table 222kc (S5103J), and then The processing of S5113H to S5117H, which is the same as the variable effect setting processing (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) in the forty-seventh control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S5111H, if it is determined that there is no additional time (S5111H: No), the processes of S5102J and S5103J are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5113.

As described above, when the variation pattern command including the addition time is received, the special symbol lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time, the addition time included in the variation pattern command, and the last stop symbol type And, because it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the freeze effect and the length of the freeze period based on the By grasping the content of the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to predict whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit variation. In addition, it is possible to predict whether or not the current special symbol variation is a jackpot variation based on the duration of the freeze performance, and furthermore, the display mode of freezing and the duration of the freeze performance can be determined. Combined, it becomes possible to predict the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot more accurately. Therefore, the production effect of the freeze production can be enhanced.
Next, the processing contents of the background change effect determination processing (S5101J) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1814 is a flow chart showing the details of the background change effect determination process (S5101J). This background change effect determination process (S5101J) is executed at the timing when a new special symbol variation is started (timing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect), and is made to correspond to the special symbol variation to be executed this time. determines whether or not to execute the background change effect (background change effect), and determines the effect mode (position of effect data for starting the background change effect) in the case of executing the background change effect (background change effect). processing is executed.
When the background change effect determination process (S5101J) is executed, first, it is determined whether the background changing flag 223kf is set to ON (S5151J). ), since the background change effect (background change effect) is currently being executed, the effect mode of the background change effect that is continuously executed based on the execution status of the background change effect and the special symbol change that is executed this time. is determined.
Specifically, first, the background information (information indicating the background type) stored in the background information storage area 223ke is read (S5152J), and it is determined whether the read background information is "background C" (S5153J). , When it is determined that it is "background C" (S5153J: Yes), it is determined whether this special symbol variation is a hit variation (big hit variation) (S5154), and if it is determined to be a hit variation ( S5154J), a display command for starting the background change effect from the start point of background C is set (S5156J), and the destination background type of the background change effect set this time is stored in the background information storage area 223ke (S5168J). , the process ends.

In other words, in the state where the background change effect (background change effect) that moved to "background C" during the previous special symbol variation is executed, and if the current special symbol variation is a jackpot variation, this special In the pattern variation, a display command is set for executing the background change effect from the starting point of the "background C" (the point after 30 seconds have passed in the effect data corresponding to the background change effect). Then, since the special pattern variation this time is a jackpot variation, the variation time is longer than 20 seconds, so the background change effect executed from the starting point of "background C" progresses to the effect area of "background D". Therefore, in the process of S5168J, background information indicating "background D" as the destination background type is stored.
Thus, in the forty-eighth control example, the time required to shift from the starting point of "background C" to "background D" is configured to be likely to be shorter than the shortest variation time in the jackpot variation. Therefore, when a new special symbol variation is started in a state where the background change effect progressing to "background C" continues, when the newly started special symbol variation is a jackpot variation Only by continuously executing the background change performance without discriminating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, the background change performance of shifting to the ``background D'' during the variation of the big win can be surely executed.
In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the time required for the background change effect to shift from "background C" to "background D" as a part of the fluctuation time set corresponding to the big hit fluctuation ( 20 seconds) can be set. In this case, the jackpot variation is stopped and displayed before the background change performance (background change performance performed from the start point of the "background C") executed together with the start of the jackpot variation shifts to the "background D". It is possible to perform the production. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for a player who understands that the degree of expectation for a big win increases by shifting the background change performance to the 'background D', thereby enhancing the performance effect. can be done.
On the other hand, in the process of S5154J, if it is determined that the special symbol variation of this time is not a winning variation (S5154J: No), next, whether the variation time of the special symbol variation (loss variation) of this time is longer than 20 seconds is determined (S5155J). That is, in the processing of S5155J, processing for determining whether or not continuing the background change effect will cause the background change effect to move to “Background D” despite the deviation fluctuation is executed. be done.

In the processing of S5155J, when it is determined that the variation time is 20 seconds or less (S5155J: No), even if the background change effect is continued, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed before transitioning to "background D". Therefore, a display command for starting the background change effect from the starting point of the background C is set (S5156J), and the background type to which the background change effect set this time is transferred is stored in the background information storage area 223ke (S5168J). ), the process ends. In this case, the background change effect executed from the start point of "background C" ends with "background C". It is stored in the storage area 223ke.
In the processing of S5155J, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of this special symbol fluctuation (loss fluctuation) is longer than 20 seconds (S5155J: Yes), that is, the background change production continues in response to this special symbol fluctuation is executed, if the background change effect of shifting from "background C" to "background D" is executed before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, the background change effect will be executed. A display command indicating termination is set (S5157J), the background changing flag 223kf is set to OFF (S5178J), and the information (information indicating the background type) stored in the background information storage area 223ke is cleared (S5179J). ), the processing of the SW valid period timer 5168J is executed, and this processing ends.
In addition, by outputting the display command set by the processing of S5157J to the display control device 114, the background change effect is executed in the same effect mode as when the background change effect continues at the start of the special symbol variation. After that, before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (specifically, after 3 seconds from the start of the special symbol variation), an effect of shifting to the normal background (background A) is executed. Note that the effect mode for ending the background change effect is not limited to this. ” to “background C”, and the timing from “background C” to “background D”), another presentation mode can be set, and when the transition timing is reached, the next It is also possible to set an effect mode (for example, a effect mode in which the character is blown away by the wind) indicating that the transition to the background type cannot be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to efficiently adopt the effect data of the background change effect that is executed based on the passage of time, and to provide the player with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.
If it is determined in the process of S5153J that the background information stored in the background information storage area 223ke is not "background C" (S5153J: No), then the background information is "background A" or "background A". If it is determined that the background is not "background A" or "background B" (S5160J: No), the process of S5168J is executed and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5160J, if it is determined that it is "background A" or "background B" (S5160J: Yes), then it is determined whether this special symbol variation is a hit variation (jackpot variation) Then (S5161J), if it is determined that it is a hit variation (S5161J: Yes), a display command for starting the background change effect from the start point of the corresponding background type is set (S5103J), and the processing of S5168J is performed. Execute and terminate this process.
Also, in the processing of S5161J, if it is determined that there is no hit variation (S5161J: No), it is determined whether the variation time of the special symbol variation this time is longer than 50 seconds (S5162J). In other words, in the process of S5162J, by continuing the background change effect, it shifts to "background D" during the deviation fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation that does not win the jackpot) executed in the state where "background A" is set. To discriminate whether or not a background change effect is executed.
In the processing of S5162J, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is 50 seconds or less (S5162J: No), a display command for starting the background change effect from the start point of the corresponding background type is set (S5163J), The process of S5168J is executed, and this process ends. In addition, in the processing of S5162J, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is longer than 50 seconds (S5162J: Yes), a display command indicating the end of the background change effect is issued to end the background change effect during the deviation fluctuation. is set (S5164J), the background changing flag 223kf is set to off (S5165J), the information stored in the background information storage area 223ke is cleared (S5166J), the process of S5168 is executed, and this process ends. do.
In the forty-eighth control example, when the background change effect that starts from "background A" is executed by executing the process of S5162J, the background change that shifts to "background D" during the deviation fluctuation is performed. Execution of the effect is prevented, but when the background change effect starting from the "background B" is executed, the background change effect shifting to the "background D" during the deviation variation is executed. configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot winning from being confirmed even when the background change effect is shifted to "background D", so based on the effect result of the background change effect, Interest can be given by the stop display mode of special symbol variation (result of variation presentation).

On the other hand, in the process of S5151J, if it is determined that the background changing flag 223kf is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S5151J: No), the background change effect is not currently being executed. Therefore, a background change effect lottery process for determining whether or not to newly execute a background change effect (background change effect) is executed (S5167J), then the process of S5168J is executed, and this process ends. .
Here, the processing contents of the background change effect lottery process (S5167J) executed in the background change effect determination process (see S5101J in FIG. 1814) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1815 is a flow chart showing the details of the background change effect lottery process (S5167J). As shown in FIG. 1815, in this background change effect lottery process (S5167J), a process for determining whether or not to execute a new background change effect (background change effect) is executed.
When the background change effect lottery process (S5167J) is executed, first, the background change lottery table 222kb is referred to and the background change effect execution presence/absence lottery is executed (S5181J). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the background change effect based on the result of the lottery (S5182J), and if it is determined not to be executed (S5182J: No), this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5182J, if it is determined to execute the background change effect (S5182J: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is per variation (S5183J), and if it is determined that it is per variation (S5183J: Yes), set a display command for starting the background change effect from the start point of the corresponding background type (“background A”) (S5185J), set the background changing flag 223kf to on (S5186J ), the process ends.

Also, in the process of S5183J, if it is determined that it is not a hit variation (S5183J: No), then it is determined whether this special symbol variation is longer than 50 seconds (S5184J), and if it is 50 seconds or less If it is determined (S5184J: No), that is, even if the background change effect is executed in accordance with the start of this deviation variation, if it is determined that there is no transition to "background D" during the deviation variation , the processing of S5185J and S5186J described above is executed in order to execute the background change effect, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5184J, if it is determined that the current special symbol variation is longer than 50 seconds (S5184J: Yes), if the background change effect is executed, up to "background D" during this deviation variation Since the transition will cause the background change effect to be executed and the effect of the effect to be reduced, the process ends without executing the processes of S5185J and S5186J for executing the background change effect.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1816, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101J) will be described. FIG. 1816 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101J). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101J) differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4101H in FIG. 1795) in the above-described 47th control example. The difference is that a process (music selection process (S5401J)) based on the operation of various operation means (frame button 22, selection button 600) corresponding to is added, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101J) is executed, first, the music selection processing (S5401J) is executed, and then the frame button input monitoring/effect processing in the above-described 47th control example (see S4101H in FIG. 1795). ) are executed, and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1817, the contents of the music selection process (S5401J) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4101J in FIG. 1816) will be described. FIG. 1817 is a flow chart showing the contents of the song selection process (S5401J). In this music selection process (S5401J), the operation contents of the selection buttons 600 (up button 600b, down button 600d) and the operation contents of the frame button 22 during the music selection period set during the opening period of the jackpot game is determined, and a process of executing music selection based on the determination result and a process of managing the period of the music selection period are executed.
Specifically, when the music selection process (S5401J) is first executed, it is determined whether the value of the music selection period counter 223Ka is 1 or more, that is, whether it is currently in the music selection period (S5451J), If it is determined that the value of the music selection period counter 223ka is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S5451J: No), the current time is not the music selection period, so this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5451J, if it is determined that the value of the music selection period counter 223ka is 1 or more (S5451J: Yes), it means that the music selection period is currently in progress. Execute the process. First, it is determined whether or not the up and down buttons (up button 600b, down button 600d) of the selection buttons 600 used for music selection have been pressed (S5452J). The current song information is read from the storage area 223kb (S5453J), and based on the read song information, the song data type storage area 222ka is referred to to select the song after pressing the button (S5454J), and the currently selected song is displayed. A display command for displaying the selection screen is set (S5455J), and this process is terminated. Thereby, the selection screen corresponding to the operation of the selection button 600 by the player can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .
Here, the processing of S5454J will be described. As described above, the music data type storage area 222ka stores in advance music data types corresponding to a plurality of music pieces (music A, music B, music C, etc.) that can be selected at the time of music selection operation. When the button 600 is operated, the music data type after operating the selection button 600 can be selected in association with the music data type corresponding to the currently selected music information.

For example, when the currently selected song information is "song A" and the up button 600b is operated, the song data type corresponding to "song B" is selected, and the down button 600d is operated. In this case, the music data type corresponding to "music C" is selected. Similarly, when the currently selected song information is "song B" and the up button 600b is operated, the song data type corresponding to "song C" is selected and the down button 600d is operated. In this case, the music data type corresponding to "music A" is selected. When the upper button 600b is operated while the currently selected song information is "song C", the song data type corresponding to "song A" is selected, and the lower button 600d is operated. In this case, the music data type corresponding to "music B" is selected.
In other words, regardless of which song information is selected, different song data types are selected depending on whether the up button 600b or the down button 600d is operated. is doing. Then, during the song selection period, if one of the selection buttons 600 (for example, the upper button 600b) is continuously operated, and if the other operation means (for example, the lower button 600d) is continuously operated, , the same type of music can be selected.
Also, as described above with reference to FIG. 1799(a), while the music selection period is set, the display mode for showing the currently selected music on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 ("music A”) is displayed in the currently selected region gk1, and a display mode (“song B”) for indicating a song to be selected when the up button 600b is operated is displayed in the selection candidate region gk2, and the down button 600d is operated. A display mode (“song C”) for indicating the song to be selected when the selection is made is displayed in the selection candidate area gk3.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand guidance on how to operate music selection during the music selection period. In the forty-eighth control example, the player can select three types of music by operating the selection button 600 during the music selection period. It may be configured to be selectable. In addition, based on the content of the jackpot game being executed (jackpot type), the number of jackpot games that have been executed continuously within a predetermined period (number of consecutive wins), and history information of songs selected in the past, selection It may be configured such that the types of songs that are allowed are made different.

In this case, for example, the number of types of selectable songs may be increased as the number of times of consecutive games increases, or special songs may be provided that can be selected only when a specific number of times of consecutive games is reached. By configuring in this way, when the game result is advantageous to the player (winning the jackpot multiple times), it is possible to select a song different from the usual song, so that the player can add value different from the jackpot game. additional benefits can be provided. In addition, since the music of the selected additional benefit is output during the jackpot game, multiple benefits can be overlapped and provided to the player, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.
On the other hand, the number of types of selectable songs may be reduced as the number of times of consecutive chat increases. It may be configured such that the number of selectable songs gradually decreases as the number of times increases. By configuring in this manner, the player can be forced to reproduce a plurality of types of music, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.
Returning to FIG. 1817, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S5452J that the up/down button has not been pressed (S5452J: No), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5456J). Here, in the forty-eighth control example, during the opening period of the jackpot game, a music selection period is set in which the player can select music, and the type of music to be played back during the jackpot game can be switched. ing. Then, during the opening period of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 1799(a), a guide display mode for guiding the selection of music is displayed. In addition to the first operating means (the upper button 600b and the lower button 600d) whose operation is guided by the guidance display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the operation is guided by the guidance display mode. Even when the second operating means (frame button 22) that is not played is operated, the type of music played back during the jackpot game can be switched.
With this configuration, the player can easily select a song by operating the first operating means, and the song can be switched even when the second operating means is operated. It is possible to provide an unexpected production.

Furthermore, in the forty-eighth control example, different songs can be selected depending on whether the first operation means is operated or the second operation means is operated during the music selection period. Therefore, a skilled player who understands that songs can be switched even when the second operation means is operated, is playing a song that cannot be selected (difficult to select) when the first operation means is operated. It is possible to reproduce the game in a short period of time, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.
In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, in the case where the probability variable jackpot has been won, the state that the probability variable jackpot has been won is not notified in the variable performance indicating the jackpot winning, for example, the probability variable jackpot has been won. Despite this, the effect result of the variable effect indicating the winning of the jackpot is the effect result that makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the time-saving jackpot or the probability variable jackpot has been won (the third pattern is stopped and displayed with an even number of patterns) Only in the case of the production result), the music can be switched based on the operation of the second operating means.
In other words, by switching the music played during the jackpot game based on the operation of the second operation means during the opening period of the jackpot game, the player is informed that the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be notified. By configuring in this way, a privilege that is not granted when switching the music played during the jackpot game based on the operation of the first operating means is performed based on the operation of the second operating means. Since it can be given to the player, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of choosing whether to operate the first operating means or the second operating means during the opening period.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 48th control example, as shown in FIG. 1799(a), during the opening period of the jackpot game, the first operation means (up button 600b) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. , the lower button 600d) is displayed, and the display mode for guiding the operation of the second operating means (frame button 22) is not displayed. Instead, a display mode (second guidance display mode) that guides the operation of the second operation means (frame button 22) may be displayed.

In this case, for example, a partial area of the sub-display area Ds is used to display a guidance display mode such as "If you hit the frame button 22 repeatedly, the song may change!?" Lucky if you switch!" By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably switch songs when the first operating means is operated, and it may not be possible to switch songs when the second operating means is operated. It is possible to allow the player to easily comprehend.
In addition, it is possible for the player to understand that some kind of privilege will be given when the music is switched based on the operation of the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether to operate the first operating means or the second operating means during the opening period.
Returning to FIG. 1817, the description continues. In the process of S5456J, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5456J: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the frame button press counter 223kc (S5457J), and based on the value of the frame button press counter 223kc after addition A promotion lottery is executed by referring to the promotion lottery table 222kb (S5458J). Then, it is determined whether or not promotion music has been decided (whether the promotion lottery has been won) (S5459J), and if it is determined that there is a decision (whether the promotion lottery has been won) (S5459J: Yes), the promotion music has been decided. is set (S5460J), the promoted music is stored as the current music information in the music information storage area (S5461J), the value of the music selection period counter 223ka is cleared to 0, and the frame button pressing counter 223kc The value is cleared to 0 (S5462J), a display command for erasing the selection screen is set (S5463J), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5459J, if it is determined that there is no promotion song (the promotion lottery is not won) (S5459J: No), this process ends without deciding the promotion song. In the process of S5459J, if the promotion lottery is not won, the process of S5462J is skipped, so the value of the frame button pressing counter 223kc is never cleared. Therefore, every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the value of the frame button depression counter 223kc is incremented until the promotion lottery is won during the song selection period.
In the forty-eighth control example, the winning rate defined in the promotion lottery table 222kb (see FIG. 1806(a)) used for the promotion lottery is configured to increase as the value of the frame button pressing counter 223kc increases. there is Therefore, the player who tries to switch the type of music played during the jackpot game by pressing the frame button 22 is motivated to increase the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed until the music selection period elapses. The frame button 22 can be made to be pressed intentionally, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

If it is determined in the processing of S5456J that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5456J: No), then the value of the music selection period counter 223ka is subtracted by 1 (S5464J), and the music selection period after subtraction is determined. It is determined whether the value of the counter 223ka is 0 (S5465J), and if it is determined to be 0 (S5465J: Yes), it is the timing when the music selection period has passed, so processing based on the end of the music selection period is performed. executed.
Specifically, the currently selected song (the song type displayed in the selected area gk1 formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) is determined as the selected song (S5466J), and the current song Store the selected song as information in the song information storage area 223 kb (S5467J), set a display command indicating that the song has been determined (S5468J), set a display command to erase the selection screen (S5469J), End this process. In addition, in the processing of S5465J, if it is determined that the value of the music selection period counter 223ka after subtraction is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S5465J: No), a display for indicating the remaining time of the music selection period is displayed. A command is set (S5470J), and this processing ends.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is promoted based on the player's operation of the operation means (the frame button 22) during the period in which a song to be played back during the jackpot game can be selected. Only when the conditions are satisfied, the dedicated music is selected so as to be able to notify the game state to be set after the jackpot game to be executed this time is finished.
By constructing in this way, not only players who want to reproduce desired music during a jackpot game but also players who want to quickly perceive future game contents can easily perform the operation of selecting music. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to select songs.

Further, in the forty-eighth control example, by executing the first operation (manipulating the selection button 600, which is the first operating means), any song can be selected from among the songs that can always be selected. A dedicated song can be selected by executing a second operation (operation to the frame button 22 as the second operation means) different from the first operation. Then, when the second operation is executed, the dedicated music is not selected unless the promotion condition is satisfied. In other words, even if the second operation is performed, the dedicated music cannot be selected.
By configuring in this way, a player who wants to select an arbitrary song from songs that can always be selected executes the first operation, and a player who expects a dedicated song to be selected executes the second operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who wants to select an arbitrary song from the songs that can always be selected cannot select a song.
In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the forty-eighth control example, only the first operation can be executed as an operation for selecting music, and when the promotion condition is satisfied based on the first operation, the dedicated music is selected as the first operation. For example, with the music selection screen shown in FIG. When the music is circulated, the promotion condition is established, and the icon corresponding to the exclusive music (music X) is inserted between the icon corresponding to the music B (music B) and the icon corresponding to the music C (music C). , and the dedicated music can be selected by operating the selection button 600 .
With this configuration, when the icon corresponding to the dedicated song (song X) is displayed, the player is notified that the promotion condition is satisfied, and then any song (song X) is displayed to the player. A, music B, music C, music X) can be selected. In other words, the operation of selecting an arbitrary song in the forty-eighth control example and the operation of selecting a song capable of informing the content of the game to be executed later can be performed in duplicate by the player. On the other hand, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting music.

In addition, in the forty-eighth control example, when the second operation is executed in a situation where the promotion condition can be established, the ease with which the promotion condition is established is varied according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed. there is That is, in this 48th control example, as the probability variable jackpot game, 10 rounds of the probability variable jackpot game (jackpot A) and 7 rounds of the probability variable jackpot game (jackpot D) are configured to be executable, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game When the second operation is executed in a situation in which the promotion condition can be satisfied, the promotion condition is more likely to be satisfied for the jackpot A with a larger .
By configuring in this way, when the dedicated music is selected based on the second operation, after notifying that the current jackpot game is a probability variable jackpot, the possibility of a probability variable jackpot game with a large number of rounds is announced. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who wants to quickly perceive that a game advantageous to the player will be executed later to perform the second operation.
In the forty-eighth control example, by executing the second operation, a dedicated song can be selected only when the promotion condition is satisfied. Situation, that is, when the confirmation condition is satisfied by executing the second operation during the normal jackpot game (time reduction jackpot game), the current jackpot game is the normal jackpot game (time reduction jackpot game). A second dedicated music piece (music piece Y) for notifying something may be selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to quickly grasp that the current jackpot game is not a game that is advantageous to the player, so that the player may play the game with excessive expectations. It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play due to the game content executed immediately.
Furthermore, in the forty-eighth control example, during the opening period of the jackpot game, that is, in a state where the round game is not being executed, a music selection period in which music can be selected is set. In other words, the player is made to perform an operation (first operation, second operation) to select a song without knowing the number of rounds of the current jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily provide the enjoyment of predicting the number of rounds for the big win this time based on the operation of selecting music.

In this 48th control example, the song selection period is set during the jackpot game period in which the round game is not executed. A jackpot game period in which the player cannot grasp the number of rounds of the game, for example, a round game period that is always executed regardless of which jackpot game is executed (in this control example, the 1st to 7th rounds The music selection period may be set during the game period).
In addition, in the 48th control example, the music played during the jackpot game is configured to be selectable. The technical concept described above may be provided for a configuration that allows selection of a song to be played back during the variable probability state.
As described above, in the forty-eighth control example, similarly to the forty-seventh control example described above, when the freeze effect is executed as the variable effect, the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. When the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game is the big winning variation and the addition time is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the freeze performance is always executed. . By constructing in this way, when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot in succession, it is possible to make it easier to execute the freeze performance than in other cases, so that the privilege by winning the jackpot in succession can be provided. It can be made easy to give to a player.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, since the freeze effect is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is started (the timing at which the variable effect is executed), the variable effect is executed. It is configured so that the player can specify whether or not the freeze performance is to be executed immediately after the game is played. Furthermore, in a state where "type A" is read out, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is out, the freeze effect is not executed. That is, when the freeze performance is executed at the timing when the special pattern variation of the first rotation after the end of the big win game is started, the player can grasp that the big win is won at that time.

By configuring in this way, depending on the presence or absence of the freeze effect, the player can grasp the effect result of the variable effect (lottery result of the special symbol lottery) before the end of the variable effect, so that the variable effect is performed. The player can be interested in the timing of execution. In the forty-eighth control example, the freeze effect is executed at the start timing of the variable effect, but without being limited to this, the freeze effect is executed while the variable effect is being executed. It may be configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the freeze effect will be executed. It is possible to make the user see the variable performance with interest, and to enhance the performance effect.
Also, as shown in FIG. 1807, the same time (2 seconds) is determined as the addition time, and even if the result of the special symbol lottery is the same result, the freeze effect is likely to be executed depending on the stop symbol type. When the lottery result is “win”, “type A” is the easiest to execute the freeze effect, followed by “type B”, “type C”, and “type D” in that order. It is configured so that the freeze effect is difficult to execute. On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, “type B” is the most likely to execute the freeze effect, followed by “type C”, which is the easiest to execute the freeze effect, “type A”, and “type D , the freeze effect is not executed.
That is, in the forty-eighth control example, depending on the type of stop display mode (stop design type) of the third design displayed at the start of the fluctuation, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot when the freeze effect is executed differs. It is configured so that By constructing in this way, not only the types of various performances executed as variable performances, but also the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed at the start of variation can make the players interested.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example, when the freeze effect is executed as the effect mode corresponding to the addition time, the longer the execution period of the freeze effect, the more the expectation of winning the jackpot. is configured to be high. By constructing in this way, the player who has noticed the execution of the freeze performance can play the game while expecting the freeze performance to continue for a long time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can be done.

In addition, in the 48th control example, the length of the set addition time is configured to be able to execute the freeze effect. When the performance is selected, the remaining time of the addition time is configured so that each third symbol in the variable performance is absorbed in the high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, regardless of the presence or absence of the addition time and the presence or absence of the freeze effect, the effect mode of the variable effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) executed after the high-speed change period of the third symbol has passed is unified. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing for executing the variable production and the amount of production data.
Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example is configured to be able to execute the freeze effect at the start timing of the variable effect. In this case, the display mode of the third symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen in the freeze effect is changed to the stop display mode showing the result of the previous special symbol lottery. Instead, it may be configured so that it can be determined as a dedicated freeze-time stop display mode. Even in the case of such a configuration, the technical idea described in the 48th control example may be applied, and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot may be varied according to the type of the temporarily stopped frozen display mode.
In addition, when the freeze effect is to be executed during the variable effect, it is preferable that the freeze effect can be executed during the high speed fluctuation period in which the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed. By constructing in this way, even if the remaining time of the addition time is absorbed during the high-speed fluctuation period, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the player does not have difficulty in identifying the third symbol that is being variably displayed. Since the stop display mode during freezing can be displayed during high-speed fluctuation, even if the stop display mode during freezing is suddenly displayed on the display screen, the player does not feel uncomfortable.
Further, the freeze effect may be executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed by the variable effect. In other words, although the third symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable performance, the freeze performance is executed, and the next variable performance is not started, thereby making the player feel uncomfortable. can be In this case, before the freeze effect is executed, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the period used for the freeze effect from the additional time is already added to the high-speed fluctuation period, so the high-speed fluctuation fluctuation time A player who has accurately grasped this can predict whether or not the freeze effect will be executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in this case, at the end timing of the freeze performance for winning the big win, the third pattern is not variably displayed, but the stop display mode of the third pattern showing the result of the special pattern lottery of this time is displayed, At the end timing of the freeze effect, which is an error, the next variable effect may be started while the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the 48th control example, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the background change effect having the effect data for a predetermined period (60 seconds) is executed, and the special symbol fluctuation. It is configured to start the background change effect at the timing when the is started. The effect data of the background change effect includes information indicating the timing of switching the background type, and the degree of progress of the background change effect is determined at the timing when the special pattern variation executed during the background change effect stops. Then, when the next special symbol variation is started, the background change effect is restarted from the start timing of the background type of the background change effect currently being executed.
By configuring in this way, the background change effect having the effect data of 60 seconds can be executed over a plurality of special symbol variations, so the effect of effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, when the background change performance is executed to the end of the performance data, the performance result indicating the winning of the big win is obtained, and the background change performance can be executed to the end of the performance data during the execution of the special symbol variation. In the case, when the special pattern variation is a big hit variation, the background change performance is executed as it is, and when it is a loss variation, a performance mode for terminating the background change performance is set. ing.
By configuring in this way, the background change effect executed regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery can be given the effect of informing the winner of the special symbol lottery, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. can.

In addition, when the 60-second jackpot variation is executed, the background change effect can be executed. In other words, the background change effect can be executed to the end using the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is predicted whether or not the background change effect will be executed to the end during this special symbol change period while comparing the progress degree of the background change effect and the progress degree of the variable effect. It can provide fun to do.
In addition, in this 48th control example, 60 seconds (+addition time) is configured to be the longest variation time as the variation time of the special symbol variation. For example, a variable time of 90 seconds may be settable. By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not a big win is won by the effect result of the background change effect in a state where a sufficient period remains until the effect result of the variable effect is displayed. , it is possible to easily make the player interested in the background change performance.
Also, as described above, when the background change effect is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations, the background change effect is executed again from the point where the background type is switched. , the length of the period required to execute the background change effect to the end can be varied according to the background type displayed at the start timing of the special symbol variation.
Therefore, even if the variation time of the big win is less than 60 seconds, the background change performance can be executed to the end during the period of the big win variation, so the background change performance is executed to the end. You can increase the frequency.

<Forty-ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1818 to 1840. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 49th control example is different from the above-described 47th control example in that the length of the period in which the variable probability state continues is changed, and the process of determining the aspect of the effect executed during the variable probability state and the contents of processing for determining the mode of various advance notice effects that can suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit as the variable effects of the special symbols.
Here, conventionally, during a game period (during a mode period) in which a specific game situation is set, regardless of whether or not a special symbol lottery is executed, a game in which a specific effect (mode effect) is continuously executed. Machines are known, and by executing the mode presentation, the player can grasp the current game situation in an easy-to-understand manner even when the special symbol lottery is not executed.
However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery is executed while the mode performance is being executed and the variable performance indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is executed, the mode performance and the variable performance are executed. There is a problem in that it is only executed independently, and it is not possible to obtain the player's performance effect.
Therefore, in the forty-ninth control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed while the mode effect is being executed, the effect of the mode effect is used as the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. It is configured so as to be able to determine the production mode using a part of the mode. By constructing in this way, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a game situation in which the mode performance is executed, the composite performance combining the mode performance and the variable performance can be executed, and the performance effect is enhanced. be able to.

However, as described above, the mode effect is executed regardless of whether or not the special symbol lottery is executed. It is necessary to determine the performance mode of the variable performance after determining the performance execution status, and there is a problem that the processing load for managing the various performances being executed increases.
On the other hand, in this 49th control example, a display command indicating that a specific game period (variable probability state) has been set is set in the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 issues a display command. It is configured to be able to execute a mode effect (a effect of making a bird fly) based on the received information. Then, in the case of setting an effect mode using a part of the effect mode of the mode effect (the effect mode of stopping the bird on the perch) as the effect mode of the variable effect, the specific timing at which the effect mode is executed is indicated. A display command (a display command including information on bird stop timing) is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display command indicating the specific timing, and displays the execution status of the mode effect (bird's stop timing). Based on the flight position), it is configured to be able to execute display control for variably displaying to a mode (a mode of stopping on a perch) used as a performance mode of variable performance.
By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to manage the performance mode of the variable performance and the performance mode of the mode performance by one control device, so that the processing load for managing various performances can be reduced. .
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, the display is variably displayed to a mode used as a performance mode of the variable performance (a mode of stopping on a perch) according to the execution status of the mode performance (flying position of the bird). A plurality of variable display patterns can be set as the variable display pattern, and the remaining period until the specific timing when the performance mode using the bird stopped on the perch is executed in the variable performance, and the current bird. A different variable display pattern can be set based on the flight position of the aircraft.

By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the mode effect being executed can be smoothly used as the effect mode of the variable effect regardless of whether or not the special symbol lottery is executed.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, it is determined that the display control device 114 side cannot determine an appropriate variable display pattern, and the target variable effect is a jackpot winning. In the case of the variable presentation showing , it is possible to execute the variable display of stopping the bird on the perch at a special timing later (earlier) than the specific timing. In other words, in the audio ramp control device 113, although another effect mode in the variable effect is set on the premise that the bird will stop on the perch at the specific timing, the bird will stop on the perch at a timing different from the specific timing. It is configured to execute variable display that stops at
By configuring in this way, it is possible to intentionally cause a slight deviation in the execution timing of the plurality of performance modes executed as the variable performance, so that it is possible to provide the player with a performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable. can. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned production with a sense of incongruity is configured to be executed in a variable production showing a jackpot winning that is advantageous to the player, the player feels uncomfortable with the executed variable production. , it is possible to quickly grasp that the jackpot has been won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, it is determined that the display control device 114 side cannot determine an appropriate variable display pattern, and the target variable effect indicates a failure. It is configured not to execute the display control for stopping the bird on the perch in the case of the variable presentation. In other words, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to execute control not to execute the performance for a part of the performance mode determined by the sound lamp control device 113 .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to irregularly reduce the frequency in which the variable performance is executed in the performance mode using a part of the mode performance in the variable performance corresponding to the failure. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the amount of variable display patterns for stopping the bird on the perch, which are stored in advance in association with the flight position of the bird.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, the game period in which the variable probability state is set is roughly divided into three periods (first variable probability period, second variable probability period, third variable probability period), and in each period It is configured so that different productions are executed at different times.
Specifically, the period from immediately after the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times is the first probability variable period, and the period from 11 times to 50 times of the special symbol lottery after the jackpot game is finished is the second probability variable period. Period, the period from 51 times to 70 times of the special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is the third probability variable period, the period from 71 times to 74 times of the special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is the third probability variable period, It is configured to set as
And, during the first variable probability period, it is constructed so that a special symbol variation with a relatively long variation time is executed, and as the probability variable period elapses, a special symbol variation with a short variation time is executed. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot game excessively in a short period of time. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game due to the game period being unnecessarily long during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, when a variable probability jackpot is won, a special pattern lottery is executed 74 times as a period (ST period) during which the high probability state of the special patterns continues after the jackpot game ends. Set the period (ST 74 times) until the end of the jackpot game, and set the period (time reduction 70 times) until the special symbol lottery is executed 70 times as the period (short time period) during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues after the end of the jackpot game. configured as possible.
That is, when winning a variable probability big win, the special symbol lottery can be executed 70 times in the variable probability state, and thereafter, the special symbol lottery can be executed 4 times in the second variable probability state. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery using the right to execute the second special symbol lottery acquired during the probability variable state (special symbol 2 reservation) is performed in the second probability variable state, which is a high probability state of the special symbol. Since it can be executed during, aim to end the probability change state with the upper limit number (4) of special figure 2 pending, and let the player play the game willingly until the probability change state ends. can be done.
In addition, during the period (fourth variable probability period) in which the second variable probability state is set, a dedicated effect different from that during the variable probability state is executed.
The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example is configured to be able to execute a melody zone effect in which various songs are played during the third variable probability period, and the order in which the four kinds of songs are determined by lottery. It is configured to be played with

Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a specific piece of music is selected from among a plurality of pieces of music, and the selected piece of music is played back to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. there is In such a game machine, when a new song is played, song information (song title, singer name, etc.) is displayed on the display screen in order to make the player interested in the content of the song to be played. It is devised to display and make it easier for the player to become interested.
However, there have been cases where the same piece of music is played while the game is continued. In this case, since the player has already grasped the music information related to the reproduced music, various information related to the game is displayed, and the display area of the third symbol display device 81, which is a limited space, is displayed. Displaying music information by using it has the problem that it is difficult to enhance the performance effect and that it interferes with other performances.
Therefore, in the forty-ninth control example, it is possible to store several (two) songs played in the past, and it is possible to determine whether or not the newly played song is the same as the stored song. , and when it is determined that they are the same, the music information is not displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . By configuring in this way, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, which is a limited space, can be effectively used for other effects without unnecessary display of music information.
Furthermore, it is configured so that the newly reproduced music is likely to be a different kind of music from the stored music, and the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is a failure. Rather, it is configured such that newly reproduced music is more likely to be the same type of music as the stored music. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to predict the result of the special symbol lottery according to the type of music to be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the result of the special symbol lottery while memorizing the information of the music played in the past.

In addition, in the pachinko 10 in the forty-ninth control example, it is possible to execute a notice effect for suggesting the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery at a plurality of timings during one variable effect, and set as each notice effect. Whether or not the player wins a jackpot can be predicted by the advance notice performance mode.
Here, conventionally, a plurality of display modes can be set in stages for each of a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variable effect, and the selection ratio of each display mode is determined by a special pattern lottery. A pachinko machine 10 capable of making a player predict whether or not a jackpot will be won based on the number of stages indicated by each display mode displayed as each advance notice effect is provided by configuring to vary according to the result of It is
In such a pachinko machine 10, in order to diversify the combination of display modes displayed as a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variable effect, a process of determining a display mode for each advance notice effect is performed. The configuration to run is known. By configuring in this way, compared to the configuration of executing the processing of determining the effect pattern defining the type of display mode to be displayed for each advance notice effect from among a plurality of effect patterns, the change can be performed only once. It was possible to easily increase the variations of a plurality of advance notice effects executed during the effect.
However, if the display mode of each notice effect can be determined individually based on the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, in the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery that won the jackpot, the display mode of each notice effect , a display mode that is likely to be selected when winning a jackpot is likely to be set, and a display mode that is likely to be selected when winning is likely to be set as a display mode of each notice performance in a variable performance corresponding to a special symbol lottery that is a loss. There is a problem that production patterns are scarce.

In addition, since the display mode of each notice performance is determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, the jackpot winning is notified in a state where a large number of notice performances of the display mode that is easily selected in the case of loss are executed. There is a problem that it is difficult to execute such an unexpected production.
On the other hand, in the forty-ninth control example, after selecting the display mode of each notice effect, the selection result is determined, and when a specific display mode is selected as a predetermined notice effect, a plurality of Among the advance notice effects, the display mode of the advance notice effects other than the predetermined advance notice effects can be set to be different from the selected display mode.
Specifically, when a display mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot (a display mode in which the variation of the jackpot is more likely to be selected than the variation of the loss) is selected as the display mode of the predetermined notice effect, other display modes are selected. The display mode of the advance notice effect is configured to be able to determine a display mode with a low expectation of winning the jackpot (a display mode in which the deviation fluctuation is more likely to be selected than the jackpot fluctuation). By constructing in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility of winning a big win even in a variable performance in which only the advance notice performance with a low expectation of winning a big win is performed.
On the other hand, when a display mode with an extremely high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected as the display mode of each notice effect, a display mode with an extremely high expectation of winning a jackpot can be determined as the display mode of another notice effect. Configure. By configuring in this way, when a display mode with an extremely high expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed in one of a plurality of advance notice effects executed during one variable effect, the other display mode is displayed. It is possible to make it easy to display a display mode in which the expectation of winning a big win is extremely high even for the advance notice performance.

Therefore, when one notice effect is executed in a display mode (special mode) in which the expectation of winning a jackpot is extremely high, it becomes easier to execute other notice effects in a special mode, so that the player can receive a notice of the special mode. It is possible to suppress overlooking the production.
<Regarding the effect content in the forty-ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1818 to 1823, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the forty-ninth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example is, as described above, the effect executed during the variable probability state, and the content of the notice effect which is a part of the variable effect executed in response to the special symbol variation. It is different from the 47th control example. Below, description will be given of the contents of effects that are different from the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example described above.
First, with reference to Figure 1818 to Figure 1820, in the first variable probability period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times) in the game period in which the variable probability state is set The content of the bird flight presentation to be executed will be explained. FIG. 1818(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 during the bird flight production, and FIG. FIG. 1819(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed in the stock display, and FIG. 1819(a) shows an example of the display screen displayed when switching from the bird stock display to the variable production mode. FIG. 1819(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed in the variable effect executed after the end of the bird flight effect, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display contents when execution is not possible;
In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, when the variable probability state is set, as shown in FIG. A mode effect of flying in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the display device 81 is executed. Since the display screen shown in FIG. 1818(a) is in the middle of executing the second special symbol variation, the small display area Dm2 shows that the second special symbol is varying. ) is displayed, but it is actually displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the display timing of the character 1800 is not limited to this. In this case, by displaying the character 1800 during the ending period, the player is notified for the first time that the jackpot game being executed is a variable probability jackpot. can be
Further, the character 1800 may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable probability state was set. In other words, the character 1800 may be displayed with a period during which the special symbol variation during the variable probability state can be completed at least once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the currently set game state is the variable probability state.
In the main display area Dm, a perch 1801 on which the character 1800 is stopped is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide display mode for guiding the player to the content of the bird flight effect. The text "Pay attention to bird movement" is displayed. With this configuration, when the bird flight effect is executed, the player can be made to watch the character 1800 in anticipation that the character 1800 will make a special movement during flight.
Then, when the performance mode using the character 1800 is determined as the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the first probability variable period (while the character 1800 is flying), the character 1800 stops at the perch 1801. A production is executed to In FIG. 1818(b), the character 1800 flies from near point A toward a perch 1801 (the flight path is indicated by solid arrows in the drawing), and then stops at the perch 1801. status is displayed.

In the forty-ninth control example, when the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 determines the effect mode using the character 1800 as the variable effect, the information indicating the effect timing in the variable effect is provided. It is output to the display control device 114 as a display command, and when the display control device 114 receives the display command including the information indicating the effect mode, the display control device 114, based on the effect timing and the display position of the character 1800, , the flight path for the character 1800 to reach the perch 1801 can be determined. At least, as shown in FIG. 1818(b), the character 1800 flies along the trajectory indicated by the solid line in FIG. 1818(b). .
When the character 1800 receives the display command described above while flying near point B, a flight pattern of flying from point B toward perch 1801 is determined, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which the character 1800 flies along the trajectory indicated by the dotted line.
In this way, by preparing in advance a display pattern for causing the character 1800 to fly from a plurality of points (point A, point B) at which the character 1800 can fly to the perch 1801 as a mode effect, the presence or absence of the special symbol lottery can be determined. Regardless, it is possible to make it easy to use the effect mode of the mode effect executed based on the setting of the first probability variable period as the effect mode of the variable effect.
In the diagram shown in FIG. 1818(b), two types of flight routes are shown as the routes along which the character 1800 flies toward the perch 1801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of flight routes may be provided. However, by providing more types of flight paths, the effect mode of the mode effect can be used more smoothly as the effect mode of the variable effect.

Then, the character 1800 stopping on the perch 1801 continues to stop on the perch 1801 until the elapsed period of the variable effect reaches the specific period, and when the specific period is reached, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which the character 1800 flies off from the perch 1801. After that, as shown in FIG. As a guidance display mode for operating (depressing) the frame button 22, characters "button push" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and a downward arrow is attached to the button Ba to prompt the user to depress it. A left flower icon ha1 and a right flower icon ha2 imitating flowers are displayed at the left and right ends of the main display area Dm, and a guide for guiding the effect content of the effect being executed is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As a display mode, characters such as "If the flower shines, it will be a big win!" are displayed.
With this configuration, the player can press the frame button 22 while expecting that the flower icons ha1 and ha2 will light up based on the pressing of the frame button 22 .
Further, as described above, in the forty-ninth control example, the character 1800 has in advance the effect data corresponding to the flight path for reaching the perch 1801 from the point A or the point B, and the voice lamp control device The character 1800 is moved to the perch 1801 based on the display control device 114 receiving a display command indicating that the effect mode using the character 1800 has been determined as the variable effect by the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of 113. However, there are cases where the character 1800 cannot reach point A or point B within a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds) after receiving the display command. be.
That is, the flight effect of the character 1800 displayed in the main display area Dm is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the special symbol variation. Since there is no relation with the flight position, there are cases where the character 1800 cannot reach the point A or the point B within a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) after receiving the display command.

Here, in order to smoothly move the character 1800 to the perch 1801 regardless of where the character 1800 is flying, for example, effect data related to the flight path for the character 1800 to reach the perch 1801 is prepared in advance. It is necessary to have a plurality of (effect data corresponding to each of points A to Z), but in this case, the capacity of the effect data increases, and there is a risk that the capacity of other effect data will be squeezed. was there. In addition, the effect data related to the flight route is not necessarily used for the effect, and the effect data corresponding to the timing at which the display command is received is only used. There was also a problem.
On the other hand, in the forty-ninth control example, as shown in FIG. When the display command is received from the audio ramp control device 113 at the timing when the character 1800 is flying over a point C that cannot be reached, and when the lottery result of the change is a big win, the point C is moved from the point C to the point C. After continuing the flight performance for one second to B (indicated by the solid line in the figure), display control is executed to fly along the flight path (indicated by the dotted line in the figure) that reaches the perch 1801 from the point B.
In other words, in the case of a big hit variation, an effect display is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in which the timing for the character 1800 to reach the perch 1801 is delayed by one second with respect to the display command. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, the sound output from the sound output device 226 (for example, the character 1800 on the perch 1801) is output from the sound output device 226 in correspondence with the effect mode determined by the sound lamp control device 113 (the effect mode using the character 1800). 1800 stop sound effect) and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, a one-second gap (discomfort) can be performed.
Therefore, only the player who has noticed that the strange performance has been executed can quickly perceive that the current variation performance is a variation performance corresponding to the big win variation. Note that, within a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) after receiving the display command, the character 1800 is flying at point A or point C, where the character 1800 cannot reach point B. When a display command is received from the lamp control device 113 and the lottery result of the variation is a failure, the effect of the character 1800 stopping on the perch 1801 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to configure so as not to execute a sense of incongruity presentation when a winning prize is lost.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1821 and 1822, the content of the effect in the melody zone executed during the third variable probability period, which is the period from 51 times to 70 times, is the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the variable probability jackpot game. give an explanation. FIG. 1821(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the melody zone is executed, and FIG. 1821(b) is a display screen displayed when music is switched during the melody zone. FIG. 1822 is a diagram showing an example, and FIG. 1822 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the same piece of music is reproduced in a short period of time in the melody zone.
As shown in FIG. 1821(a), when the melody zone is executed, the display area Dm1J displays the remaining period of the melody zone, and the upper part of the main display area Dm indicates that the current melody zone is in progress. The characters "melody zone" are displayed, and the characters "enter the melody zone" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the display area Dm2J, "music A" indicating the currently played music is displayed as the music history.
After that, when the special symbol lottery progresses and the music is switched from "music A" to "music B", as shown in FIG. , and a display mode introducing "music B" to be reproduced this time is displayed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the contents of the newly reproduced music in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "Let's do our best".
After that, when "song B" is switched to "song A" again, "song A, song B, song A" is displayed as the song history in the display area Dm2J as shown in FIG. The display mode of song introduction is not displayed on the lower left side of Dm. In other words, when a piece of music that is redundantly displayed in the music history of the display area Dm2J is played, the display mode for introducing the piece of music to be played this time is not displayed.

In addition, in the forty-ninth control example, an example is shown in which no other display is made in the display area in which the display mode for introducing the song to be played this time is displayed. may be configured to display a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player only when a condition for not displaying the display mode introducing the is satisfied.
Also, when the same piece of music is played back within a specific period of time, it may be configured such that the rhythm or genre of the piece of music is changed for output after being subjected to voice control processing, or the piece of music that is introduced first may be output. It may be configured to display more detailed music information than the information.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1823 and 1824, the effect contents of various advance notice effects set in the variable effect executed in the forty-ninth control example will be described. Figure 1823 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the notice effect (notice A) executed at the start of the variable effect, and FIG. 1824 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the advance notice effect (special notice A) executed during the change effect, and FIG. 1824 shows the execution timing and type of each notice effect executed during the variable effect It is a diagram.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1825, transition contents of various variable productions (production modes) executed when the variable probability state is set in the forty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1825 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of variable production (production mode) executed during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 1825, in the forty-ninth control example, it is possible to perform variable effects in different effects modes based on the variable probability remaining number and the time saving remaining number.

Specifically, during the period from when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol variation is performed 10 times, the bird stock zone is set, and then until the special symbol variation is performed 40 times, the probability variation effect A zone is set, and then a melody zone is set until 20 special symbol variations are executed, and a pullback zone is set for the last 4 rotations in which the remaining number of time reduction becomes 0 and the second probability variation state is set. It consists of
In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early by setting different performance modes according to the elapsed period (the number of special symbol fluctuations) after the variable probability state is set.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the forty-ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the forty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1826 to 1833. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and voice The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 is different from that of the RAM 223 .
First, referring to FIG. 1826(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the forty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1826(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the forty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1826(a), in the forty-ninth control example, the first winning random number table 202La is added to the variation pattern selection table 202jb instead of the first winning random number table 202ja for the forty-seventh control example described above. The variation pattern selection table 202Lb is replaced with the jackpot type selection table 202jd, and the jackpot type selection table 202Ld is provided. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the description thereof is omitted.

The first winning random number table 202La differs from the above-described first winning random number table 202ja in that the range of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as a jackpot winning is different. FIG. 1827(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202La. As shown in the figure, it is stipulated that a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/300 in a low probability state of special symbols and a probability of 1/50 in a high probability state of special symbols.
The jackpot type selection table 202Ld, like the jackpot type selection table 202jd (see FIG. 1765) described above, is a data table that is referred to when selecting the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1827(b), the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202Ld will be described. FIG. 1827(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202Ld. As shown in FIG. 1827 (b), in the jackpot type selection table 202Ld, three types of jackpot types (jackpot A52, jackpot B52, jackpot C52) are defined in association with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. ing.
Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", "jackpot A52" is set, and when the value is in the range of "35 to 69", "jackpot B52" is set to "70 “Jackpot C52” is defined for the range of “~99”.

The jackpot type “jackpot A52” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "74" is set to the value.
The jackpot type "jackpot B52" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "74" is set to the value.
The jackpot type “jackpot C52” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "74" is set to the value.
That is, in the 49th control example, even if any jackpot type is set, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the probability variable state, and the end condition of the probability variable state is the same end condition. set. Therefore, the jackpot A52 with the largest number of rounds of the jackpot game is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and the jackpot C52 with the smallest number of rounds of the jackpot game is the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player.

The variation pattern selection table 202lb is a data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, and defines different variation patterns according to the set game state and the number of special symbol variations to be executed. It is
Here, the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202Lb will be described with reference to FIG. 1828(a). FIG. 1828(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202Lb. As shown in FIG. 1828(a), it has a normal table 202Lb1, a probability variation table 202Lb2, and a second probability variation table 202Lb3. In addition, the contents defined in each of the normal table 202Lb1, the probability variation table 202Lb2, and the second probability variation table 202Lb3 are as shown in FIGS.
Returning to FIG. 1826(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control MPU 201 will be described. FIG. 1826(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the forty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1826(b), the difference is that a variation execution flag 203La and a variation order storage area 203Lb are added. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
In the forty-ninth control example, the same special symbol lottery processing method as in the fifth control example described above, that is, the special symbol lottery can be executed in the order in which winning information is acquired (completion in order of variation). Since the content of the control processing relating to this fluctuation order digestion is the same as that of the fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation execution flag 203La is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is preferentially set, and the variation execution in the fifth control example described above. It is the same as the flag 203ga.
The fluctuation order storage area 203Lb is an area for storing the winning order of each reserved data (reserved design) stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. . Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203Lb, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in order of winning. It should be noted that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of variation of the special symbol, and is the same as the variation order storage area 203gb in the fifth control example described above.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1830(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1830(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1830(a), the difference is that an advance notice mode selection table 222La, an advance notice mode scenario selection table 222Lb, and a song selection table 222Lc are added to the ROM 222 of the forty-seventh control example described above. .
The advance notice mode selection table 222La is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of each notice effect executed during the variable effect, and as shown in FIG. Different display modes are defined based on the values of the effect counter group 223f1-f4. Although detailed description is omitted, in the forty-ninth control example, the group of effect counters 223f1 to f4 is provided. It is configured to refer to any value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the determination of only the same combination when determining a plurality of presentation modes at the same timing. Each of the effect counters 223f1 to 223f4 is composed of a counter whose value is updated at any time like the effect counter group 223f.

As shown in FIG. 1831, for each notice type, a display mode (performance mode) that is likely to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot and a display mode (performance mode) that is difficult to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot are defined respectively. Therefore, as the selection tendency of each notice type executed in one variation performance, in the variation performance corresponding to the winning of the jackpot, the display mode (performance mode) that is likely to be selected at the time of winning the jackpot is likely to be selected, and it corresponds to the loss. In the variable effect, it becomes easy to select a display mode (effect mode) that is likely to be selected at the time of loss.
By configuring in this way, by grasping the effect mode of the notice effect executed in each notice type (see FIG. 1824) executed over a wide variety of variable effect periods, the result of this special symbol lottery can be made easier for the player to predict.
However, when the notice type of each notice effect is determined by referring to the notice mode selection table 222La, the fluctuation effect that surprises the player, for example, when the notice effect executed in the first half of the change effect is not performed, There is a problem that the notice performance of the notice type that is easily selected is executed, and only the notice performance that is executed in the second half period is reduced in the execution frequency of the big hit variation performance that the notice performance of the notice type that is easy to be selected is executed when the jackpot is won. .
On the other hand, in the forty-ninth control example, when a predetermined setting condition is established, the notice type of each notice effect to be executed in the entire variable effect is determined by referring to the notice mode scenario selection table 222Lb. It consists of Here, the contents of the advance notice mode scenario selection table 222Lb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1832 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the advance notice mode scenario selection table 222Lb.

As shown in FIG. 1832, the notice mode scenario selection table 222Lb defines different scenario types according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the values of the group of effect counters 223f1 to f4 obtained according to the special notice type. ing. For each scenario type, a combination of advance notice types that are difficult to select in the advance notice mode selection table 222La is defined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and to enhance the performance effect.
The music selection table 222Lc is a data table that is referred to when selecting a new music to be reproduced when a new music selection condition is satisfied in the melody zone. Here, with reference to FIG. 1833, the contents of the music selection table 222Lc will be described. FIG. 1833 shows the contents defined in the music selection table 222Lc. As shown in FIG. 1833, the song selection table 222Lc contains newly selected songs corresponding to the currently set song type, the result of the special symbol lottery, and the values of the effect counter group 223f1 to f4. stipulated.
As shown in FIG. 1833, basically, it is configured so that the songs can be easily selected in the order of Song A, Song B, Song C, and Song D. That is, the selected music is defined so that the same type of music is less likely to be displayed in the music history (see FIG. 1821(a)) of the display area Dm2J displayed on the display screen. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery at the time when the music selection condition is satisfied is a big hit, the music history of the display area Dm2J displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 1821 (a)) It is configured so that songs of the same type are easily displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the result of the special symbol lottery according to the music played in the melody zone.
It should be noted that, without being limited to this, it is also possible to provide a song that can be selected only when a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, the player can expect that the music dedicated to winning the jackpot will be reproduced every time the music is switched.

Returning to FIG. 1830(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 1830(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the forty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1830(b), the difference is that the notice information storage area 223La, the music information storage area 223Lb, the melody zone medium flag 223Lc, and the variable probability counter 223Ld are added. It is the same as RAM 223 . Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
The notice information storage area 223La is a storage area for storing notice types of various notice effects determined as the effect modes of the variable effects.
The song information storage area 223Lb is a storage area for storing information about songs selected in the melody zone, and can store information about songs set in the past in addition to information about songs currently being set. It is configured.
The melody zone medium flag 223Lc is a flag for indicating that the melody zone is set as the effect mode, and is set to ON when the melody zone is set. When the melody zone medium flag 223Lc is set to ON, a process for selecting music is executed.

The variable probability counter 223Ld is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol lotteries (variable performance) executed during the variable probability state, and the value is updated each time a new variable performance is executed during the variable probability state. .
<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the forty-ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1834 and 1835, among the control processes of main controller 110 executed in the forty-ninth control example, main controller 110 executed in the above-described forty-seventh control example. The processing content different from the control processing of is explained. In this 49th control example, as described above, the execution order of the special symbol lottery is different from the above-described 47th control example, and the special symbol lottery can be executed in the same execution order as the above-described fifth control example. is doing. That is, in the forty-seventh control example described above, when the execution conditions for the special symbol lottery are established in a state in which both the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are held, the second using the special figure 2 reservation While the special symbol lottery is preferentially executed with the special symbol 2 priority variation method, in this 49th control example, regardless of the special symbol type, the winning information (special symbol reservation) is obtained in order. It is different in that the special symbol lottery is configured to be executable.
In addition, the processing contents shown in FIGS. 1834 and 1835 are the same as the special symbol variation processing (see S10154 in FIG. 191) and the variation execution determination processing (see S10251 in FIG. 192) in the fifth control example described above. , for the sake of convenience of explanation, only the reference numerals are changed, and therefore the explanation thereof is omitted.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1836 to 1840, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-ninth control example will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-ninth control example is the variable display setting processing ( S4104K in FIG. 1836) is different in that the variable effect setting process (S5014K in FIG. 1838) is executed instead of the variable effect setting process (S5014J in FIG. 1813), and the rest is the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4104K) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1836 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4104K). This variable display setting process (S4104K) is different from the above-described variable display setting process (see S4104J in FIG. 1812) in that a process for executing song switching processing (S4901K) is added, and the rest is the same. be.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1837, the content of the music switching process (S4901K) will be described. FIG. 1837 is a flow chart showing the contents of the song switching process (S4901K). In this song switching process (S4901K), song selection processing in the melody zone is executed.
When the song switching process (S4901K) is executed, it is first determined whether the melody zone medium flag 223Lc is set to ON (S4951K), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4951K: Yes), It is determined whether the music switching condition is satisfied (S4952K), and if it is determined that it is satisfied (S4952K: Yes), the information indicating the current music is read out from the music information storage area 223Lb (S4953K), and the music is selected. The table 222Lc is referred to determine the next song (S4954K), the determined song is stored in the song area for storing the current song in the song information storage area 223Lb, and the stored song information is shifted to the history area. (S4955K).
After that, it is determined whether or not the same song as the song decided this time is stored in the history area (S4956K). A display command is set (S4957K), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S4956K that the information is stored (S4956K: Yes), the process of S4957K is skipped to prevent the information of the music from being displayed again, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4951K that the melody zone middle flag 223Lc is not set to ON (S4951K: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4952K that the music switching condition is not satisfied (S4952K: No) If so, this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1838, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014K) will be described. FIG. 1838 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014K). This variable production setting process (S5014K) is different from the above-described variable production setting process (S4104J in FIG. 1812) when it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S5107H: No). They differ in their execution, but are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1839, the processing contents of the effect setting processing during probability variation (S5101K) will be described. FIG. 1839 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process during probability variation (S5101K). In this variable probability production setting process (S5101K), a process for setting the performance modes corresponding to various production modes executed during the variable probability state is executed.
When the effect setting process during probability variation (S5101K) is executed, first, based on the value of counter 223Ld during probability variation, the current effect mode is specified (S5151K), it is determined whether it is a bird stock zone (S5152K), and the bird If it is determined to be in the stock zone (S5152K), the effect mode of the bird stock effect is determined by lottery (S5153K), it is determined whether the bird stock effect is to be executed (S5154K), and if it is determined to be executed (S5154K). : Yes), the bird stop timing is determined according to the determined bird stock effect mode (S5155K), a display command for indicating the bird stop timing is set (S5156K), and based on the received variation pattern. The production mode of the variable production is determined (S5157K), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in the process of S5154K that the bird stock effect is not executed (S5154K: No), the processes of S5155K and S5156K are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5157K.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5152K, if it is determined that it is not a bird stock zone (S5152K: No), then it is determined whether it is a melody zone (S5158K), and if it is determined that it is a melody zone (S5158: Yes), next, it is determined whether the melody zone medium flag 223Lc is set to ON (S5159K), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5159K: Yes), it fluctuates based on the received fluctuation pattern. The effect mode of the effect is determined (S5161K), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S5159K that the melody zone flag 223Lc is not set to ON (S5159K: No), the melody zone flag 223Lc is set to ON (S5160K), and the process of S5161K is executed. , the process ends.
In the processing of S5158K, if it is determined that it is not a melody zone (S5158K: No), then it is determined whether it is a variable probability production zone (S5162K), and if it is determined to be a variable probability production zone (S5162K: Yes ), the advance notice mode setting process is executed (S5163K), and this process is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5162K, if it is determined that it is not a variable probability production zone (S5162K: No), then it is determined whether it is a pullback zone (S5164K), and if it is determined to be a pullback zone (S5164K: Yes), the effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on the received variation pattern (S5165K), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5164K that it is not in the pullback zone (S5164K: No), this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1840, the contents of the advance notice mode setting process (S5163K) will be described. FIG. 1840 is a flowchart showing details of the advance notice mode setting process (S5163K). In this notice mode setting process (S5163K), a process for setting the notice type of each notice effect to be executed with variable effect is executed.
When the advance notice mode setting process (S5163K) is executed, first, the advance notice mode selection table 222La is referred to determine each advance notice mode (S5181K), and each determined advance notice mode is stored in the advance notice information storage area 223La. (S5182K), it is determined whether there is a determination of advance notice level 3 (S5183K).

In the processing of S5183K, if it is determined that there is an advance notice level 3 (S5183K: Yes), the condition for setting the scenario of the advance notice mode is not satisfied (the effect is executed as it is), so this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5183K, if it is determined that the advance notice level 3 has not been decided (S5183K: No), the advance notice scenario determination lottery is executed (S5184K), and it is determined whether or not the advance notice scenario has been decided (S5185K). If it is determined that the announcement scenario has been determined (S5185K: Yes), the announcement mode is re-determined by referring to the announcement mode scenario selection table 222Lb based on the special announcement type stored in the announcement information storage area 223La ( S5186K), each determined advance notice mode is stored in the advance notice information storage area 223La (S5187K), and this process is terminated.
Also, in the process of S5185K, if it is determined that no advance notice scenario has been decided (S5185K: No), this process ends.
<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the forty-ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1841 and 1842, the processing contents of the control processing of the display control device 114 in the forty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1841 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S6302K). In this command determination processing (S6302K), a processing for determining whether or not a display bird stop command has been received (S6401K), and a bird stop command processing when it is determined that a display bird stop command has been received (S6401K: Yes). This differs from the command determination processing of the display control device 114 in each control example described above in that (S6417) is executed.
Next, the details of the bird stop command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1842 is a flowchart showing bird stop command processing (S6417). In this bird stop command processing (S6417), display control processing for determining the display mode of the bird stop display is executed in response to the display bird stop command output from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

As described above, in the forty-ninth control example, the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display command indicating that a specific game period (variable probability state) has been set, and the display control device 114 displays It is configured to be able to execute a mode effect (a effect to make the bird fly) based on the reception of the command. Then, in the case of setting an effect mode using a part of the effect mode of the mode effect (the effect mode of stopping the bird on the perch) as the effect mode of the variable effect, the specific timing at which the effect mode is executed is indicated. A display command (a display command including information on bird stop timing) is output to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display command indicating the specific timing, and displays the execution status of the mode effect (bird's stop timing). Based on the flight position), it is configured to be able to execute display control for variably displaying to a mode (a mode of stopping on a perch) used as a performance mode of variable performance.
By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to manage the performance mode of the variable performance and the performance mode of the mode performance by one control device, so that the processing load for managing various performances can be reduced. .
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, the display is variably displayed to a mode used as a performance mode of the variable performance (a mode of stopping on a perch) according to the execution status of the mode performance (flying position of the bird). A plurality of variable display patterns can be set as the variable display pattern, and the remaining period until the specific timing when the performance mode using the bird stopped on the perch is executed in the variable performance, and the current bird. A different variable display pattern can be set based on the flight position of the aircraft.
By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the mode effect being executed can be smoothly used as the effect mode of the variable effect regardless of whether or not the special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, it is determined that the display control device 114 side cannot determine an appropriate variable display pattern, and the target variable effect is a jackpot winning. In the case of the variable presentation showing , it is possible to execute the variable display of stopping the bird on the perch at a special timing later (earlier) than the specific timing. In other words, in the audio ramp control device 113, although another effect mode in the variable effect is set on the premise that the bird will stop on the perch at the specific timing, the bird will stop on the perch at a timing different from the specific timing. It is configured to execute variable display that stops at
By configuring in this way, it is possible to intentionally cause a slight deviation in the execution timing of the plurality of performance modes executed as the variable performance, so that it is possible to provide the player with a performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable. can. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned production with a sense of incongruity is configured to be executed in a variable production showing a jackpot winning that is advantageous to the player, the player feels uncomfortable with the executed variable production. , it is possible to quickly grasp that the jackpot has been won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example, it is determined that the display control device 114 side cannot determine an appropriate variable display pattern, and the target variable effect indicates a failure. It is configured not to execute the display control for stopping the bird on the perch in the case of the variable presentation. In other words, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to execute control not to execute the performance for a part of the performance mode determined by the sound lamp control device 113 .
By configuring in this way, it is possible to irregularly reduce the frequency of execution of the variable performance in the performance mode using a part of the mode performance in the variable performance corresponding to the failure. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the amount of variable display patterns for stopping the bird on the perch, which are stored in advance in association with the flight position of the bird.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example is configured to be able to execute a melody zone effect in which various songs are played during a specific game period (third probability variable period), and four types of songs are drawn by lottery. configured to be played in the order determined by
Here, conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a specific piece of music is selected from among a plurality of pieces of music, and the selected piece of music is played back to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. there is In such a game machine, when a new song is played, song information (song title, singer name, etc.) is displayed on the display screen in order to make the player interested in the content of the song to be played. It is devised to display and make it easier for the player to become interested.
However, there have been cases where the same piece of music is played while the game is continued. In this case, since the player has already grasped the music information related to the reproduced music, various information related to the game is displayed, and the display area of the third symbol display device 81, which is a limited space, is displayed. Displaying music information by using it has the problem that it is difficult to enhance the performance effect and that it interferes with other performances.
Therefore, in the forty-ninth control example, it is possible to store several (two) songs played in the past, and it is possible to determine whether or not the newly played song is the same as the stored song. , and when it is determined that they are the same, the music information is not displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . By configuring in this way, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, which is a limited space, can be effectively used for other effects without unnecessary display of music information.

Furthermore, it is configured so that the newly reproduced music is likely to be a different kind of music from the stored music, and the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is a failure. Rather, it is configured such that newly reproduced music is more likely to be the same type of music as the stored music. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to predict the result of the special symbol lottery according to the type of music to be reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the result of the special symbol lottery while memorizing the information of the music played in the past.
When the jackpot is won, the same type of music is easily selected, and when the same type of music is reproduced within a predetermined period, the music information is not displayed. Therefore, a display mode (for example, characters of "Chance") may be displayed in the display area where the music information is displayed to indicate that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a notice effect that can be displayed only when a situation is created in which the music information is not displayed when the music is reproduced, so that unnecessary music information is not provided to the player. In addition to being able to suppress the storage, it is possible to provide information advantageous to the player instead of the music information (information suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery).
In addition, in this 49th control example, as the switching condition of the music being reproduced, when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation reaches 5 times, or when ready-to-win production is executed as a fluctuation production, or the next fluctuation is a big hit. Although there is a switching condition that is established when it is a variation, it is not limited to this. , the switching condition may be satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to switch songs without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in the 49th control example, a new music is played at the start of the special symbol variation, but there is no need to match the switching timing (reproduction timing) of the music with the special symbol variation timing. It is good also as specific timing (for example, the timing at which the ready-to-win state is displayed, etc.) in the special symbol fluctuation period.
In addition, when music is switched, control may be executed to gradually reduce the volume of the music being played back. With such a configuration, it is possible to switch songs without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
Furthermore, when the switching condition is satisfied based on the fact that the next variation is a jackpot variation, the dedicated song is only when the progress of the song being played at the timing when the variation is stopped and displayed is in a specific situation. may be configured to be reproducible. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that both the music information and the chance display can be displayed.
As described above, in the pachinko 10 in the forty-ninth control example, it is possible to execute the notice effect for suggesting the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery at a plurality of timings during one variation effect. Whether or not a player wins a jackpot can be predicted by a notice performance mode set as a notice performance.

Then, when the notice effect mode set as each notice effect satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect mode of each notice effect can be reset. Then, when resetting the effect mode of the advance notice effect, one effect pattern can be set from among a plurality of effect patterns that are associated with the effect modes of the respective advance notice effects.
By configuring in this way, the performance mode of each notice performance can be individually determined by lottery, so that the notice performance executed during the variable performance can have variations, and the performance mode of each notice performance can be linked. By setting the attached performance pattern, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the advance notice performance of a mode which is difficult to set when the performance mode of each advance notice performance is determined individually by lottery, and the performance effect can be enhanced. .
In addition, as a result of individually determining the performance mode of each advance notice performance by lottery, when a performance mode with a low frequency of determination (for example, a performance mode corresponding to a premium performance) is determined, the performance mode with a low frequency of determination is selected. Since the effect mode of the advance notice effect is reset while it is left, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the execution frequency of the premium effect by resetting the effect mode of the advance notice effect. .
Furthermore, in the forty-ninth control example, when the result of the lottery has already been notified by an effect different from the notice effect (when it is notified in advance that the jackpot is won), the effect pattern is as follows. It is configured to determine a performance pattern in which a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is set. By constructing in this way, the advance notification of the jackpot winning is not misunderstood based on the performance mode of the notice performance executed in the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation notified in advance of the jackpot winning. It is possible to suppress the fact that it makes you think that

In addition, without being limited to this, when the result of the lottery has already been notified (when it is notified in advance that the jackpot has been won), the production mode of the advance notice production has a low expectation of winning the jackpot. It may be configured such that the effect pattern for which the aspect is set is determined. By constructing in this way, a player who understands that he or she has been notified in advance that he/she has won a jackpot can watch the fluctuation performance without anxiety, but the player has been notified in advance that he or she has won a jackpot. A game with unexpectedness can be provided because a player who does not grasp the fact can be made to grasp that it is a big hit fluctuation while making him think that it is a loss fluctuation.
In addition, in the forty-ninth control example, a performance mode is determined for each of a plurality of advance notice performances to be executed during one variable performance, and the performance mode of the notice performance is reset based on the determined performance mode. However, other conditions may be provided as conditions for resetting the advance notice effect. A storage means capable of storing information related to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery in association with each other may be provided, and the degree of satisfaction of the reset condition may be determined based on the information stored in the storage means.
For example, when the special symbol lottery result sets a performance mode that is likely to be selected when winning a big win as a performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the big win, the ratio of the performance mode to be easily selected at the time of winning the big win exceeds 80%. % to 80%, the reset condition may be established with a probability of 50%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the notice effect using the effect mode that is difficult to be selected as the notice effect at the time of winning the jackpot.
<Fiftieth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1843 to 1852. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example in that the content of the effect executed after the jackpot game ends and the content of the effect executed during the ready-to-win effect as the variable effect. and are different.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1843 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example. As shown in FIG. 1843, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example displays the light-emitting accessory Cr1 on the variable display unit 80 in contrast to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example. The difference is that they are provided. The structure other than that is the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same structure, and the description thereof is omitted.
The light-emitting role Cr1 is configured to be able to change the lighting mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. It is configured to be variable with the mode. For the relationship between the variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the light emission effect using the light emitting character Cr1, and the operation contents of the frame button 22, see FIG. will be described later.
<Regarding the content of the effect in the fiftieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1844 and 1845, the details of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1844, the reserved symbol retry chance to be executed after the end of the jackpot game will be described.
Conventionally, a plurality of special symbol lottery execution rights (special symbol reservations) are configured to be obtainable, and reserved symbols for indicating the number of acquired special symbol reservations are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and There is a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute a pending change performance for changing the display mode of pending symbols in accordance with the result of prior determination of winning prize information included in the acquired special symbol pending.

Specifically, as the display mode of the reserved pattern, at least a first display mode (eg, white), a second display mode (eg, blue), a third display mode (eg, red) can be set, and the object If the pre-discrimination result (prefetch result) for the winning information included in the special figure reservation is the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the jackpot, the third display mode is set rather than the pre-discrimination result corresponding to the out. There is a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the pending change performance so as to make it easier.
In the conventional pachinko machine 10 having such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special symbol lottery before the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the length of the performance period in which the performance for showing the result of one special symbol lottery is executed can be made longer than the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. , can enhance the performance effect.
However, if there is a special figure reservation (jackpot reservation) corresponding to the jackpot winning among the acquired special figure reservations (jackpot reservation), it is possible to switch the game state after winning the special symbol lottery corresponding to the jackpot reservation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 configured so as not to execute the reservation change performance for the special figure reservation obtained after the jackpot reservation, and the variable performance with high expectation for winning the jackpot are executed. There is a pachinko machine 10 configured not to execute the pending change performance in order to make the player pay attention to the variable performance being executed even when a new special figure pending is obtained. .
In this case, execution of the pending change performance can prevent the player from being provided with a performance that is difficult to understand, but the performance effect is reduced by the amount of the lower execution frequency of the pending change performance. There was a problem of hoarding.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example is configured to be able to execute a new hold change effect after the end of the jackpot game for the special figure hold that has already been acquired at the time of the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the pending change performance based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand performance. .
In addition, pending patterns in which the pending change effect was not executed due to the existence of the big hit pending, that is, the execution of the special pattern change acquired after the pending changing effect was executed for the big hit pending, and the special pattern variation corresponding to the big hit pending. Since the reservation change performance can be executed also for the reservation pattern corresponding to the special figure reservation acquired during the period, the player can be made to pay attention by the reservation change performance.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example, in order to be able to execute the pending change effect again after the jackpot game is over, the pending symbol display effect is pseudo-executed when the special figure pending is obtained after the jackpot game is over. configured as possible. Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute the effect of temporarily deleting the reserved design corresponding to the already acquired special figure reservation from the reserved design display area and then displaying the reserved design in the reserved design display area.
In other words, it is configured to be able to execute a pseudo-reserved pattern display performance to make it look as if a special figure reservation that has already been acquired is newly acquired after the jackpot game is finished. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a pending change effect to be executed at the timing when the pending pattern is displayed in the pending pattern display area, so that it is possible to easily increase the variation of the pending change effect. can.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example, the effect mode (display mode of each pending symbol) of the pending change effect executed before the big winning game is executed (until the big winning symbol is stopped and displayed) is temporarily changed. By comparing the performance mode of the pending change performance determined after the end of the jackpot game with the stored performance mode of the pending change performance, the performance mode is executed before the jackpot game. It is configured so as not to execute the suspension change performance that results in a performance disadvantageous to the player than the performance mode of the suspension change performance.
In other words, before the execution of the jackpot game, the processing for determining the performance mode of the pending change performance executed after the jackpot game is completed with respect to the pending symbols displayed in the third display mode (red). When the second display mode (blue) is determined in, it is not the processing result of the process for determining the effect mode of the pending change effect executed after the end of the jackpot game, but was executed before the jackpot game. It is configured to execute the pending change effect using the effect mode of the pending change effect.
By constructing in this way, a display with a low expectation for a big win is given to a player who remembers the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed before the big win game by the holding change performance executed after the end of the big win game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play due to being downgraded to a mode.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example is configured so that the player can identify reserved symbols in a display mode different from that before the jackpot game by the reserve change effect executed after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, the effect result of the pending change effect executed after the end of the big win game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example, in a partial period of the effect period in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, an operation valid period is set in which the operation of the frame button 22 by the player can be effectively determined, and It is configured to be able to execute an operation effect executed based on the operation of the frame button 22. - 特許庁
Then, as operation effects, a first operation effect of executing an action action on the symbols displayed in the ready-to-win state and a second operation effect of varying the light emission mode of the light-emitting accessory Cr1 can be executed. Configure.
Here, conventionally, the player operates the frame button 22 during the variable presentation, thereby making it possible to change the aspect of the decorative accessory (light-emitting accessory having an LED or movable accessory). There are 10 pachinko machines. There is also a pachinko machine 10 configured such that the display mode (the third pattern, characters, etc.) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed.

And, even if any element is variable, it is generally configured to be able to suggest to the player the effect result of the variable effect being executed (the result of the special symbol lottery) according to the variable mode. For example, a first variable mode and a second variable mode can be set as the variable mode of the decorative role, and when the corresponding variable performance is a winning variable performance, the second variable mode can be set. The second variable mode is less likely to be set than the first variable mode, and the first variable mode is configured to be set more easily than the second variable mode when the corresponding variable performance is the missing variable performance. Was.
As a result, by operating the frame button 22 during the variable performance and varying the display mode displayed on the decorative accessories and the display screen, information for allowing the player to predict the performance result of the variable performance is provided. It was possible to provide the frame button 22 to the player willingly.
However, when a variable mode is set that is more likely to be executed in the deviated variable performance than in the winning variable performance, there is a problem that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is lowered at that time, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. there were.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example, as the operation effects, the first operation effect of executing an action action on the symbols displayed in the ready-to-win state and the light emission of the light-emitting accessory Cr1 are performed. A second operation performance for varying the mode is configured to be executable, and the performance mode of the first operation performance and the performance mode of the second operation performance are combined to suggest the result of the special symbol lottery. there is

In other words, three types of basic patterns are provided as a combination of the first operation performance and the second operation performance, and the three types of basic patterns are defined with different degrees of expectation for winning the jackpot, and combinations different from the basic patterns are provided. It is possible to suggest that the expectation of winning a big win is high even when each operation performance is executed in .
By configuring in this way, when the performance mode of the first operation performance or the performance mode of the second operation performance is set, which is executed in the basic pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation for winning the jackpot among the basic patterns. Even so, when the performance mode of the other operation performance becomes a performance mode that does not combine the basic patterns, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for winning the big win.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from declining without confirming that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is low only by the performance mode executed in one operation performance.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1846, the relationship between the effect mode of the operation effect executed in the fiftieth control example and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot will be described. FIG. 1796 is a diagram showing the relationship between the symbol stop action (the presentation mode of the first operation presentation), the light emission pattern (the presentation mode of the second operation presentation), and the degree of winning expectation.

As shown in FIG. 1846, in the fiftieth control example, among the operation effects executed during the reach state, the effect modes of the first operation effect are "normal", "C-1", "C-2", and "C-3" is configured so that four types of presentation mode can be determined, and four types of presentation modes of "normal", "low speed", "high speed", and "fastest" are determined as the presentation mode of the second operation presentation. configured as possible.
When "Normal" is set as the effect mode of the first operation effect, even if the player operates the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win state, no action operation (stopping) is performed on the changing third symbol. action) is not executed. In addition, when "C-1" is set as the effect mode, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the ready-to-win state, the changing third symbol suddenly brakes (stop action). ) is executed. Further, when "C-2" is set as the effect mode, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win state, the eyes of the character attached to the changing third pattern flash. An action motion (stop action) is executed (see FIG. 1845(a)). Finally, when "C-3" is set as the effect mode, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the ready-to-win state, the character attached to the changing third pattern winks. An action operation (stop action) is performed.
Each effect mode of the first operation effect described above is configured so that the selection ratio differs according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is out, "Normal ” is the most likely to be selected, followed by “C-1”, “C-2” and “C-3” which are gradually less likely to be selected. In addition, in the fiftieth control example, only when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win, the effect mode "C-3" can be set as the effect mode of the first operation effect.
That is, when the frame button 22 is operated during the ready-to-win state and the character attached to the changing third pattern winks, the player can grasp that the variable performance corresponds to winning the jackpot. is doing. By constructing in this way, it is possible to allow the player who wants to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible to positively operate the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win state.

Further, when "normal" is set as the effect mode of the second operation effect, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win state, the light-emitting role is displayed at the normal speed "duh...duh". When the light emitting mode of the object Cr1 is variable and "low speed" is set as the effect mode, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the ready-to-win state, the low speed "Dah..." light is played. When the lighting mode of the object Cr1 is variable and "high speed" is set as the performance mode, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the ready-to-win state, the light emitting accessory Cr1 is lit at the high speed "da-da-da." The light emission mode is variable. Finally, when "fastest" is set as the presentation mode, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the ready-to-win state, the lighting mode of the light-emitting accessory Cr1 changes at the maximum speed "burn". 2 operation production is executed.
The presentation mode of the second operation presentation is basically configured to be associated with the presentation mode of the first operation presentation. The combination of operation effect "Normal", "first operation effect "C-1", second operation effect "low speed"", "first operation effect "C-2", second operation effect "high speed"" is basic. It is configured so that it can be easily set as a pattern.
Then, when the operation performance is executed with a combination other than the combination of the basic patterns described above, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when the operation performance is executed with the combination of the basic patterns. there is In this control example, the operation effects executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 of 1 are the first operation effect of changing the display mode and the second operation effect of changing the light emission mode. More than one type of operation effect may be executed based on the operation of one frame button 22 . Further, as an operation presentation, the configuration may be such that the form of the output sound is varied.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fiftieth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1847 and 1848. FIG. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example differs from the above-described forty-seventh control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed, Other configurations are the same. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1847, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example will be described. FIG. 1847 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example. As shown in FIG. 1847, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example stores the production pattern selection table 222la in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 1768(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example. They are different in that they are added, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and the description thereof is omitted.
The effect pattern selection table 222la is a data table referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the operation effect to be executed during the ready-to-win state, and is the effect pattern to be executed when the ready-to-win effect is determined as the variable effect. In the selection process (see S5301ka in FIG. 1852), it is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the operation effect (S5351ka in FIG. 1852).
Here, with reference to FIG. 1848, the contents of the effect pattern selection table 222la will be described in detail. FIG. 1848 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect pattern selection table 222la. As shown in FIG. 1848, in the effect pattern selection table 2221a, a plurality of effect pattern types are defined in correspondence with the target special symbol lottery result and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.
Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a win (big hit), the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 9", "pattern 1" as the effect pattern type, "10 to In the range of "19", "pattern 3" as the effect pattern type, in the range of "20 to 29", "pattern 5" as the effect pattern type, and in the range of "30 to 49", the effect pattern type "Pattern 2" as the effect pattern type in the range of "50 to 69", "Pattern 4" as the effect pattern type in the range of "70 to 89", "Pattern 6" as the effect pattern type in the range of "70 to 89", "90 to "Pattern 7" as the effect pattern type in the range of "95", "Pattern 8" as the effect pattern type in the values of "96, 97", and "Pattern 8" as the effect pattern type in the values of "98, 99". "Pattern 9" is defined as each.

Also, if the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 69", the effect pattern type is "pattern 1", and the value in the range of "70 to 89" is "pattern 1". , "Pattern 3" as the effect pattern type, "Pattern 5" as the effect pattern type in the range of "90, 91", and "Pattern 2" as the effect pattern type in the range of "92 to 96". , "pattern 4" is defined as the effect pattern type for the values of "97, 98", and "pattern 6" is defined as the effect pattern type for the value of "99".
<Regarding control processing in the fiftieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1849 to 1852, the contents of the control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example differs from the above-described pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example in that the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed. is different. Since the content of the other control processing is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.
Specifically explaining the difference from the forty-seventh control example described above, in the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792), when it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (S5107H: No), When the current gaming state is determined to be a probability variation state, the processing for determining whether it is a probability variation state is performed, and the processing for performing the probability variation during production setting processing (see S5101Ka in FIG. 1849) is added. The difference is that the detailed mode determination process (see S5115Ka in FIG. 1851) is executed instead of the detailed mode determination process (see S5115H in FIG. 1794). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
It should be noted that this is a difference from the forty-seventh control example described above. For the process of determining whether the variable probability state is set, the process of reading the information corresponding to the current gaming state stored in the sub-state setting area 223g in the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) (S5106H) It is intended to execute the determination based on the information read out, among the control processing executed by the MPU221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in each control example described above, the current gaming state Since the content is the same as the processing for determination, the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1849, the processing contents of the effect setting processing during probability variation (S5101Ka in FIG. 1849) will be described. FIG. 1849 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting process during probability variation (S5101Ka in FIG. 1849). This probability variation during production setting process (S5101Ka in FIG. 1849) is similar to the probability variation during production setting process (see S5101K in FIG. 1839) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 49th control example, special symbols that are executed during the probability variation state A process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect with respect to the variation is executed. It should be noted that among the various processes executed in the production setting process during probability variation (S5101Ka in FIG. 1849), the same processing content as the above-described production setting processing during probability variation (see S5101K in FIG. 1839) is given the same reference numeral. , the illustration is omitted, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the production setting process during probability variation (S5101Ka) is executed, the current production mode is specified based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 223ja (S5151K), and the initial variation mode setting process is executed (S5151Ka), then, The processing of S5152K to S5165K, which is the same as the production setting processing during probability variation (see S5101K in FIG. 1839) in the forty-ninth control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1850, the processing contents of the initial variation mode setting process (S5151Ka) executed in the effect setting process during probability variation (see S5101Ka in FIG. 1849) will be described. FIG. 1850 is a flow chart showing the details of the initial variation mode setting process (S5151Ka). In the initial variation mode setting process (S5151Ka), a process for determining the effect mode of the pending change effect to be executed after the jackpot game ends is executed.
Specifically, when the initial variation mode setting process (S5151Ka) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is the initial variation after the end of the big hit (S5171Ka), and it is determined that it is not the initial variation. If so (S5171Ka: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the first time variation (S5171Ka: Yes), the effect mode of the pending change effect is determined based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S5172Ka). Regarding the detailed content of the processing for determining the effect mode of the pending change effect, the pending effect setting process (see FIG. 574) executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example described above is The timing of setting the production mode of the change production is changed from the timing of receiving the winning command to the initial fluctuation timing after the end of the jackpot game. The difference is that all the special figure reservations stored in the prize information storage area 223b are changed from the figure reservation, and the rest is the same, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.
Then, in the processing of S5172Ks, it is determined whether or not the pending change is determined (S5173ka), and if it is determined that the pending change is made (S5173Ka: Yes), the obvious pending display (each (S5174a), it is determined whether there is a specific display in the reserved display (S5175a), and if it is determined that there is no specific display (S5175a: No), it is determined this time. The effect mode (suspension change mode) of the pending change effect is compared with the obvious pending display mode (S5176Ka), and the currently determined pending change mode is determined for the pending display in which the display mode is promoted (S5177ka). , the determined pending display mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc (S5178ka), and this process is terminated.
Also, in the process of S5173ka, if it is determined that there is no pending change (S5173ka), or in the process of S5175ka, if it is determined that there is a specific display in the obvious pending display (S5175Ka: Yes), the obvious pending change In order to execute the pending change effect that leaves the mode as it is, the effect mode for re-displaying the display mode corresponding to the obvious pending display stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc is determined (S5179Ka), S5178Ka. , and terminate this process.
As described above, in the fiftieth control example, in the processing for setting the variation effect of the special symbol variation during the probability variation state, at the time of the first variation (after the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol variation At the time), the reserved pattern corresponding to the already acquired special figure reservation is configured to be redisplayed with a production that makes it appear as if the special figure reservation has been newly acquired, and when the reserved pattern is redisplayed , Suspended change effect (suspended pattern retry chance) is also configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand pending change effect corresponding to the newly set game state.

In addition, in the fiftieth control example, the reserved symbol retry chance is executed only when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed when a specific game state (for example, time saving state) other than the variable probability state is set. In addition, when the jackpot game is executed, in the special figure reservation that has already been acquired, the special figure reservation that is not subject to the reservation change effect, for example, the special figure reservation that is acquired while the jackpot variation is being executed In the pachinko machine 10 configured not to execute the suspension change performance, the special figure suspension that was not subject to the suspension change performance can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the display of the pending pattern whose display mode is changed by the pending change performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1851, the processing contents of the detailed mode determination processing (S5115ka) will be described. FIG. 1851 is a flow chart showing the details of the detailed mode determination process (S5115ka). In this detailed mode determination process (S5115ka), effect pattern selection process (S5301ka) is executed when setting the ready-to-win effect for the detailed mode determination process (see S5115H in FIG. 1794) in the forty-seventh control example described above. They are different in that respect. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
Here, the effect pattern selection process (S5301ka) executed in the detailed mode determination process (see S5115Ka in FIG. 1851) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1852 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect pattern selection process (S5301ka). In this effect pattern selection process (S5301ka), the effect mode of the operation effect (first operation effect, second operation effect) executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player during the ready-to-win effect is determined. process is executed.
Specifically, when the production pattern selection process (S5301ka) is executed, first. By referring to the production pattern selection table 222la, the production pattern during the ready-to-win production (production pattern of the operation production) is determined (S5351Ka), and the production mode for notifying that the target special symbol variation is the winning variation is other. It is determined whether it is determined as the effect mode of the variable effect (whether there is a fixed notification) (S5352Ka), and if it is determined that there is no fixed notification (S5352Ka: No), the stop action corresponding to the determined effect pattern (the 1 operation effect effect mode) is set (S5353Ka), a light emission pattern corresponding to the determined effect pattern (second operation effect effect mode) is set (S5354Ka), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5352Ka, if it is determined that there is a confirmation notification (S5352Ka: Yes), the effect mode "C-3" (wink) is set as the stop action (the effect mode of the first operation effect) (S5355Ka). , the light emission pattern (high speed) is set as the operation light emission mode (S5356Ka), and this processing is terminated.
<Fifty-first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1853 to 1867. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is configured to be able to execute determination of time-saving design winning (time-saving design lottery) when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery as in the tenth control example described above. there is In addition, when a period during which a big win is not won in a special pattern lottery executed in a special pattern low probability state continues for a specified period, a second time saving state can be set as a ceiling privilege.
Here, in the tenth control example described above, when the normal state is set as the game state, the time-saving design lottery is configured to be executable, and when the time-saving design lottery is won by the time-saving design lottery, the time-saving design lottery special The second time saving state can be set at the timing when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, the first time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) and the second time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, normal It is configured to be able to execute the time-saving pattern lottery even when the low probability state of the pattern, with electric sapo) is set.
Then, when the time saving pattern is won in the state where the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set, information indicating that the time saving pattern has been won instead of the timing when the special pattern variation in which the time saving pattern is won is stopped and displayed. (Time-saving winning information) is stored (time-saving stock), and after the set first time-saving state or second time-saving state ends (after the time-saving end condition is satisfied), time-saving stocked It is configured to be able to set a time saving state (second time saving state) based on winning information.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state continues.
Furthermore, in the fifty-first control example, a plurality of pieces of time-saving winning information indicating that time-saving symbol winning is possible can be stored. In other words, when the time saving pattern that gives 20 times of working hours during the first time saving state is elected three times, after the first time saving state ends, the second time saving state of 60 times of working hours can be set. there is In other words, it is configured so as to be able to give the player a benefit (time saving number of times) according to the number of times the time saving pattern is won. By configuring in this way, when the first time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player aims at the game aiming at the jackpot winning during the first time-saving state and at the time-saving pattern winning multiple times. A game can be executed, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, as an effect to be executed during the first time saving state, a stock suggesting effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the time saving pattern has been won is executable, and as the effect result of the stock suggesting effect By displaying the effect result indicating the time saving stock, the player can grasp that the time saving pattern has been won before the first time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, the first time saving state ends without being able to grasp the presence or absence of the time saving symbol winning, and the first time saving state is expected to be set for the player who expects the second time saving state to be set. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the normal state is set after the end of the state and the player's desire to play is lowered.
Here, in the fifty-first control example, if a jackpot is won in the state of time saving stock, by erasing the stored time saving winning information, excessive time saving state (second time saving state) is configured to be suppressed. In other words, in the fifty-first control example, it is possible to set the stocked time-saving state during the period until the next big hit is won.

In this case, if the stock suggesting effect is executed during the first time saving state, and if the jackpot is won in a state in which the effect result indicating that the time saving stock is displayed as the effect result, the jackpot game is played while the time saving stock is left. is executed, and the time-saving state based on the time-saving stock is not set after the jackpot game ends, so there is a problem that the player has a distrust of the game.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, when the jackpot is won after the stock suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode (the effect mode for acquiring the stock icon) indicating that the time saving is stocked, the stock icon It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot variation effect using. By configuring in this way, even when the time-saving winning information stocked by winning the jackpot is deleted, the stock icon is used for the jackpot variation effect, so the jackpot game is executed with the stock icon remaining. can be suppressed.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is configured so that the player can predict the number of time-saving symbol wins according to the effect mode of the stock suggestion effect to be executed. By constructing in this way, not only the presence or absence of time-saving design winning but also the number of times of time-saving design winning (the number of time-saving stocks) can be grasped by grasping the performance mode of the stock suggesting performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state (20 times×the number of time saving stocks) to be set after the first time saving state ends.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 51st control example, the number of times of time saving included in the stocked time saving winning information at the end of the first time saving state (the number of time saving times of the second time saving state) It is configured to be set as the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state set after the time saving state, but without being limited to this, it is configured to be able to store the number of times the time saving pattern is won as time saving winning information, and the first After the time saving state ends, the second time saving state (1 set) of 20 times of the time saving times may be configured to be repeatedly set for the number of time saving winning times.

By configuring in this way, for example, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, it is not a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches a specific number, but the result of the special symbol lottery. A pachinko machine 10 having a time-saving end condition established based on the result of the normal symbol lottery and a time-saving end condition established based on the result of the normal symbol lottery, that is, the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times than the special symbol lottery is executed. In a pachinko machine 10 having a time saving end condition that can be satisfied before, even when the second time saving state for one set ends, it is possible to set the second time saving state for the next set.
In other words, when the time saving winning information stocked is added and configured to be able to set 1 second time saving state, the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving winning information acquired by multiple time saving pattern winning is set to the second time saving Since it can be set as the number of remaining time reductions in the state, the number of time reductions in the second time reduction state set after the end of the first time reduction state can be easily set as the number of time reductions that surprises the player. The time-saving winning information acquired by winning the time-saving pattern is added up to make the number of time-savings in the second time-saving state of 1, so if the time-saving end condition is satisfied during the second time-saving state, the time-saving stock was stocked. There was a problem that all the short-time winning information was cleared.
On the other hand, when the number of times of winning the time saving pattern is configured to be memorizable, and after the first time saving state is completed, the second time saving state can be set by repeating the number of times of winning the time saving pattern stocked, It is difficult for the player to easily understand the number of time-saving symbols won during the first time-saving state, but even if the time-saving end condition is satisfied during the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state that is set will only end. , and when the time saving winning information is stocked, it is possible to set the second time saving state again. Therefore, when the 1st time saving state ends and the 2nd time saving state is set in a state where the time saving pattern is won multiple times during the 1st time saving state, the 2nd time saving stocked only by the establishment of the time saving end condition of 1 It is possible to prevent the state from disappearing altogether, and to prevent the player from losing his/her willingness to play.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is configured to be able to store time-saving winning information (time-saving stock possible) between jackpot games. It may be configured so that it can be held across games. Furthermore, the second time-saving state may be set by using only a part of the time-saving times stored as time-saving winning information. When the setting conditions for the second time saving state are satisfied while stocking the time saving winning information that can set the second time saving state, the number of time saving times for the second time saving state is determined by lottery with an upper limit of 200 times. It can be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times of time saving in the set second time saving state. In addition, in the fifty-first control example, the setting condition of the second time saving state is established when the first time saving state ends. may be, for example, the setting condition of the second time saving state may be established when the number of remaining time saving times in the first time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three remaining times), or during the first time saving state When the result of the lottery (special pattern lottery, normal pattern lottery) to be executed becomes a specific lottery result (for example, part of the loss), or the elapsed time of the first time reduction state is a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) Depending on the case, the setting condition of the second time saving state may be established. Furthermore, after the first time saving state is completed and a game state (for example, normal state) different from the first time saving state is set, a predetermined game (for example, special symbol fluctuation 5 times) is executed, and then the second time saving state. It may be configured so that the setting condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the setting condition of the second time saving state is satisfied.

<Regarding the effect content in the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1853 to 1855, the content of characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 51st control example has a low probability of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, that is, the probability state of the special symbol, and The difference is that the time-saving pattern lottery can be executed even while the game state in which the game ball is relatively easy to enter into the second ball entrance 640 is set, and during the first time-saving state. Production to be executed and the content of the production to be executed during the second time saving state, more specifically, production for showing the result of the time saving pattern lottery executed during the first time saving state (time saving stock suggestion production) And, the content of the production at the time of shifting from the first time saving state to the second time saving state is different.
FIG. 1853(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the first time saving state. In the fifty-first control example, a first time-saving state (low-probability state for special patterns, high-probability state for normal patterns) is set after the end of a big-hit game in a part of cases where a big win is won in a special pattern lottery. During this first time-saving state, a high-probability state of normal symbols is set, so that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, making it relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game method for the player. Therefore, during the first time saving state, in the guide display area Dm4 formed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, as a display mode for guiding the player to the right-handed game "Right shot" is displayed.
Then, below the guide display area Dm4, a remaining number display area Dm7 for indicating the number of special symbol lotteries (remaining time reduction number) that can be executed before the first time saving state ends is formed. In the fifty-first control example, since the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state is set to 100 times, immediately after the first time saving state is set, "remaining 100 times" is displayed in the remaining number of times display area Dm7, Each time the special symbol lottery is executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 and displayed. Since the figure shown in FIG. 1853 (a) shows a state in which the 40th special symbol variation is executed after the first time saving state is set, "remaining 60 times" is displayed in the remaining number display area Dm7. is displayed. In addition, a display area Dm2 is formed in a corner of the main display area Dm (a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize) to indicate the change state of the second special symbol. Since the diagram shown in FIG. 1853(a) shows the state in which the second special symbol variation is executed by continuing the right-handed game, the second special symbol is variably displayed in the display area Dm2. A display mode (indicated by three downward arrows in the figure) for indicating that the user is present is displayed.
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is more efficient in executing the special symbol lottery execution right in the case of executing the right-handed game in the first time-saving state than in the case of executing the left-handed game in the normal state. It is structured so that it can be acquired well, and specifically, when a left-handed game is executed in a normal state, game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 with respect to 100 game balls that are shot. is about 5, and when a right-handed game is executed in the first time-saving state, about 50 game balls enter the second ball entrance 640 with respect to 100 game balls fired. The board surface of the game board 13 is configured so as to be. Then, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the first time saving state is likely to be set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the normal state. Configure.

In other words, in the normal state where it is relatively difficult to acquire the execution right of a new special symbol lottery, by setting the variation time of one special symbol variation relatively long, the period in which the special symbol variation is not executed is shortened. In the first short time state in which it is difficult to generate and relatively easy to acquire the right to execute a new special symbol lottery, by setting the variation time of one special symbol variation relatively short, it is executed per unit time. It is constructed so as to increase the number of special symbol variations that can be made to increase the game efficiency.
In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, during the first time-saving state in which the special symbol variations are executed one after another in a short variation time, the fact that the jackpot has been won can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner in a short presentation period. It is configured so that the variable production is executed at .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1853(a), a character 801 resembling a rabbit runs from left to right near the center of the main display area Dm. Along with this, the V-icon 801V corresponding to the jackpot winning and the P-icon 802V corresponding to the time-saving pattern winning appear from outside the right frame of the display screen to the main display area Dm. there is Then, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, an action is executed for the character 801 to get the V icon 801V displayed in the main display area Dm corresponding to the stop timing of the special symbol variation, and the time saving symbol is won. In this case, the action of the character 801 getting the P-icon 802V displayed in the main display area Dm corresponding to the timing of stopping the special symbol variation is executed.
Thus, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a part of the display mode (V icon 801V, P icon 802V) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is continuously displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. is a jackpot winning or a time-saving design winning, a part of the display mode (V icon 801V, P icon 802V) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery already displayed is executed. By configuring so as to allow the character 801 to display the V-icon 801V after determining that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, winning a jackpot), the displayed V-icon 801V can be obtained by the character 801. To shorten a performance period from the execution of a special pattern lottery as a specific lottery result to the end of a variable performance for showing the lottery result and in a short performance period as compared with the case of executing the performance. Even if there is, it is possible to execute a variable performance that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, since part of the display mode (V icon 801V, P icon 802V) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is always displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result is out. To enable a player to play a game while having a feeling of anticipation for winning a big win or winning a time-saving pattern even when pattern lotteries are continued for a long time.例文帳に追加

Further, by configuring to display a V icon 801V and a P icon 802V as a variable performance, a time saving pattern can be won in addition to a big win in a special pattern lottery executed during the first time saving state. can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1853 (a), in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the player in an easy-to-understand manner the effect contents of the variable effect executed during the first time saving state "V "Get a big hit, "P" get to save power" is displayed. By displaying the guidance display mode in this way, while the variable effect shown in FIG. can be understood. Also, the player can easily understand that getting the P-icon 802V is advantageous to the player.
As described above, the effect in which the character 801 gets the P icon 802V is configured to be executed when the time saving symbol is won. It is configured so as not to inform the player that the time-saving symbol has been won when 802V is obtained. In other words, even if the time saving pattern is won during the first time saving state, if the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery before the end of the first time saving state, the time saving benefit given by the time saving pattern winning ( Since the time saving privilege is erased without the setting of the second time saving state), when the time saving symbol winning is notified by executing the performance of getting the P icon 802V, the player There is a possibility that the desire to play will decrease.
Therefore, in the fifty-first control example, when the jackpot is won while the P-icon 802V is obtained, the character 801 is powered up using the P-icon 802V to perform an action that facilitates obtaining the V-icon 801V. By combining the V-icon 801V and the P-icon 802V, it is possible to inform that a jackpot of a specific hit type (for example, a variable probability jackpot) has been won.

By configuring in this way, even if the performance of getting the P icon 802V based on the winning of the time saving pattern is executed, the P icon 802V can be used for another purpose when the time saving benefit based on the winning of the time saving pattern is not provided. It is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of incompatibility. In addition, when a 1st time saving state is complete|finished and a 2nd time saving state (time saving privilege) is provided, of course, the production|presentation using P icon 802V is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1853(b), the contents of the effect executed when the time saving symbol is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state will be described. FIG. 1853(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving symbol is won during the first time saving state. FIG. 1853(b) shows the display screen when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the result of the 50th special symbol lottery in the first time saving state is the time saving symbol winning. , "Remaining 50 times" is displayed as the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state in the remaining number display area Dm7, and in the display area Dm2, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is time reduction symbol winning. As the corresponding display mode, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "340".
Also, in the main display area Dm, the character 801 performs an action to get the P icon 802V, and the letters "P" get are displayed. Below the remaining count display area Dm7, a display area Dm70 is formed as a P acquisition number display area for indicating the number of acquired P icons 802V, and an acquisition icon P1 corresponding to the P icon 802V acquired this time is displayed. It is As described above, in this 51st control example, it is configured to be able to win the time saving pattern multiple times during the first time saving state, until the first time saving state ends (until the jackpot is elected during the first time saving state, Alternatively, until the number of times of remaining time reduction becomes 0), the winning icon is displayed in the display area Dm70 so as to correspond to the number of winning time reduction symbols.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, the number of acquisition icons displayed in the display area Dm70 is increased in correspondence with the number of time-saving symbols won in the first time-saving state. For example, the color and size of one winning icon P1 may be changed according to the number of time-saving pattern winning times, or the mode of the winning icon P1 may be changed according to the time-saving pattern winning. It may be configured so as to be variable according to the number of times.

Furthermore, in the fifty-first control example, the number of acquired icons is increased each time a time-saving design is won (every time the number of time-saving design winnings increases by 1), but the time-saving design is not limited to this. The number of winning icons may be increased each time the number of wins reaches a predetermined number greater than 1 (for example, 2 times or 5 times), or the mode of the winning icon P1 may be varied. good. That is, in a part of the time-saving design winning, it may be configured not to vary the display mode (acquisition icon) that can be variably displayed based on the time-saving design winning. By configuring in this way, when the special symbol indicating that the time-saving symbol has been won is stopped and displayed, it is possible to create an event in which the display mode displayed in the display area Dm70 is not changed. Even a player who can determine the result of the special symbol lottery based on the stop display mode is easily made to think that the display mode displayed in the display area Dm70 does not directly indicate the time-saving symbol winning. be able to. In addition, in the state where at least the acquisition icon P1 is already displayed in the display area Dm70, that is, in the state after the time saving symbol is won during the first time saving state, the result of the special symbol lottery is lost in some cases. Alternatively, a pseudo-variable effect for changing the display mode of the acquisition icon P1 displayed in the display area Dm70 may be executed. By configuring in this way, the result of the special symbol lottery can execute the performance of getting the P icon 802V as a variation performance for the special symbol variation other than the time-saving symbol winning, so based on the stop display mode of the special symbol variation. It is possible to easily make a player who can discriminate the result of the special symbol lottery think that the display mode displayed in the display area Dm70 does not directly indicate winning of the time saving symbol.
In this case, when the time saving pattern is not won even once in the first time saving state, the result of the special pattern lottery displays the acquisition icon P1 in the display area Dm70 as a variation performance for the special pattern fluctuation other than the time saving pattern winning. It is preferable to configure so as not to execute the (variable display) effect. By configuring in this way, the second time saving state is not set even though the first time saving state has ended in a state where the acquisition icon P1 is displayed in the display area Dm70, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. can be suppressed.
Returning to FIG. 1853(b), the description is continued. In the sub-display area Ds, "Get 'P'! ! A guidance display mode of "There might be a good thing" is displayed. By displaying this guide display mode, it is possible to make the player feel that some kind of privilege will be given by getting the P icon 802V. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1853 (b), the time-saving design is actually elected in the special design lottery executed during the first time-saving state, and the time-saving design is executed to get the P icon 802V. It is configured so as not to directly inform the player that he/she has won the prize. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the content of the privilege to be given by getting the P icon 802V.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1854(a), the effect during the special symbol final variation in the first time saving state in which the acquisition icon P1 is obtained will be described. Figure 1854 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first time saving state end variation (special symbol final variation in the first time saving state). As shown in FIG. 1854 (a), in the final variation of the first time saving state, the character "Last" is displayed in the remaining number display area Dm7, and that this special symbol variation is the final variation of the first time saving state is reported to the player.

In addition, the acquisition icon P1 and the acquisition icon P2 are displayed in the display area Dm70, and the acquisition icon P1 and the acquisition icon P2 are used to perform a time saving extension suggesting effect for informing whether or not the time saving state is extended. is executed in the main display area Dm. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1854(a), a plurality of wall icons (first wall kb1 to fourth wall kb4) are displayed near the center of the main display area Dm. , P2 against the wall icons, an effect is executed in which the first wall kb1, the second wall kb2, the third wall kb3, and the fourth wall kb4 are destroyed in this order. Then, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, as a guidance display mode for indicating the content of the effect of the time saving extension suggestion effect, the characters "Destroy the wall using the saved P" are displayed, and in the sub display area Ds "Wall "The more chances you have to break a lot," the words are displayed.
As shown in the figure, the first wall kb1 is marked with the word “End”, and when the effect result of the time-saving extension suggestive effect is displayed, the first wall kb1 remains intact without being destroyed. , it is notified that the second time saving state is not set (the time saving state is not extended) after the end of the first time saving state. In addition, the second wall kb2 is marked with the character "+20", and when the effect result of the second wall kb2 remaining without being destroyed is displayed as the effect result of the time saving extension suggesting effect, the first time saving After the end of the state, it is notified that the second time saving state of 20 time saving times is set (the time saving state is extended by 20 times). Similarly, the characters "+40" are attached to the third wall kb3. After the end of the time saving state, it is notified that the second time saving state of 40 times of the time saving is set (the time saving state is extended by 40 times). Finally, the fourth wall kb4 is marked with a letter "V", and when the effect result of the time-saving extension suggestive effect is displayed, the fourth wall kb remains intact without being destroyed. It will be notified that the special symbol variation of is a jackpot variation.
In the fifty-first control example, the effect of getting the acquisition icon P1 is not executed in a state where the time saving symbol is not won in the first time saving state, so the first wall kb1 is closed in the time saving extension suggestion effect. When a performance result that is not destroyed is displayed, after making the player think that the time saving state will end, a revival performance for informing the player of winning a jackpot or extending the time saving state is executed. ing. By constructing the resurrection performance to be executable in this manner, the player can play the game while expecting that the time saving state will be extended to a length different from the performance result of the time saving extension suggesting performance.
In addition, the effect screen shown in FIG. 1854 (a) is a effect screen when "+40" is displayed as the effect result, and the type of characters attached to each wall icon is It is configured to be determined according to the number of time-saving design wins and the lottery result of the final special design variation. 1st wall kb1 to 4th wall kb4) can be set with a production mode with "V" attached, or the number of time-saving pattern winning times during the first time-saving state is 5 times (total number of time-saving times is 100 times), If the special symbol final variation is a deviation variation, the letters "+40" on the first wall kb1, "+60" on the second wall kb2, "+80" on the third wall kb3, and "+100" on the fourth wall kb4. By attaching it, the player is notified that the time saving state will be extended at the time when the time saving extension suggesting performance is executed, and the expected range of the number of time saving times extended as the time saving extension suggesting performance progresses is gradually narrowed. It may also be possible to set the mode of presentation.

In addition, the effect screen shown in FIG. 1854(a) shows an example in which four destructible wall icons are provided during the time-saving extension suggestion effect, but the number of wall icons is not limited to this, and is three. The number may be less than or equal to 5 or more.
Here, in FIG. 1854 (a), the time saving pattern has been won twice during the first time saving state, and two acquisition icons (acquisition icon P1, acquisition icon P2) have been acquired. It is a time saving extension suggesting effect when the final variation of the pattern is out, and the display content when the effect result indicating that the time saving 40 times (2 times of the time saving pattern winning) is set as the second time saving state is displayed As a rendering mode of the time-saving extension suggestive rendering, an effect is executed in which the first shot acquisition icon P2 destroys the first wall kb1, and the last shot acquisition icon P1 destroys the second wall kb2. be.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, since it is configured to increase the number of displayed winning icons according to the number of time-saving symbol wins, an effect in which one winning icon destroys one wall is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the winning icon P1 according to the number of winning times of the time saving pattern, or an effect of displaying a different number of winning icons than the number of winning times of the time saving pattern is executed. When it is configured to be possible, it is preferable to configure so that an effect of destroying a plurality of walls with one acquisition icon or an effect of destroying one wall with a plurality of acquisition icons can be executed. By configuring in this way, the effect result of the time-saving extension suggesting performance is sent to the player based on the number of acquisition icons displayed in the display area Dm70 and the number of walls displayed in the time-saving extension-suggesting performance. It can be difficult to predict.
When the time saving extension suggestion effect shown in FIG. 1854(a) is finished and the second time saving state is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 1854(b) is displayed. Drawing 1854 (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed when the 2nd time saving state is set up after the 1st time saving state ends. As shown in FIG. 1854(b), in the center of the main display area Dm, the third wall kb3 displayed as the effect result of the time saving extension suggestion effect is displayed, and in the remaining number display area Dm7, the time saving state ( "Remaining 40 times" is displayed as a display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining time reduction count) until the end of the second time reduction state. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "time saving extension !! +40 times" are displayed to indicate that the time saving state has been extended 40 times.

In other words, the first time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) ends, and the second time-saving state of 40 times of time-saving floors (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols, electric When the support state) is set, an effect is executed to make it appear as if the time saving state has been extended (40 times of working time saving). In addition, during the second time saving state, it is configured to execute the same variation production as the production mode of the variation production executed during the first time saving state (see FIG. 1853(a)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to think that the time saving state has been extended, rather than that the game state has changed. In addition, since the number of time reductions in the second time reduction state set after the end of the first time reduction state is determined according to the number of time reduction symbol winning times during the first time reduction state, when the first time reduction state is set, Whether the second time saving state is set or not and the number of times of the second time saving state (the duration of the time saving state) are not determined.
Therefore, for example, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set as the first time saving state, a part of the set time saving number of times (for example, 60 times) is notified to the player as the first time saving, After the end of the first short period of time, when an effect is executed to inform the player of the remaining number of times of short period of time (for example, 40 times) as the short period of extended period of time, i.e., the duration of the short period of time is extended in a determined state. As compared with the case of determining the performance mode of performance, it is possible to make it easier to give variation to the length of the extended short period (the number of times of time reduction to be extended) notified by the extension performance.
In addition, since the number of times of shortening working hours to be extended is not determined at the time when the first time saving state is set, it is possible to motivate the game to increase the number of times of shortening working hours to be extended.

In addition, in this 51st control example, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state determined according to the number of time saving symbols winning in the first time saving state (20 times of time saving x number of times of time saving winning) is the production result of time saving extension suggestion production Since it is configured to notify all using, as shown in FIG. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to notify only a part of the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state as the effect result of the time saving extension suggesting effect.
In this case, for example, an upper limit (for example, 100 times) is set for the number of time reductions that can be notified as a result of the production result of the time reduction extension suggestion production, and the number of times of time reduction symbol winning (20 times of time reduction) during the first time reduction state is 6 times. When the number of times of time saving is set to 120 times as the second time saving state, the effect result for notifying "100 times" is determined as the effect result of the time saving extension suggesting effect, and then executed during the second time saving state. The time saving extension suggestion performance may be configured to notify that the time saving state is extended again.
By constructing in this way, the production mode of the time saving extension suggestion performance corresponding to the case where the time saving pattern is excessively won in the first time saving state, for example, the time saving pattern of 100 times in the first time saving state of 100 times. (Time saving 20 times) is won, and it is not necessary to prepare the effect data (wall image data with "+2000" attached) for the effect mode for indicating that the time saving 2000 times is set as the second time saving state. , the production data amount used for executing the time saving extension suggesting production can be reduced. Also, even after the production result of the time saving extension suggestion production executed during the first time saving state is displayed, by executing the production (re-extension production) that extends the time saving state, until the time saving state ends The player can play the game while expecting that the remaining period of the displayed time saving state (the number of remaining time saving times) will be extended (added).
In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, a game aiming to execute the second special symbol lottery is performed by a right-handed game during the second time-saving state as well as during the first time-saving state. , The second special symbol lottery is configured to determine the winning of time-saving symbols. Then, even when the time saving pattern is won during the second time saving state, the time saving winning information is stored (time saving stock), and when the second time saving state ends, a new number is created based on the time saving winning information stocked. It is configured to reset the two-hour short state. In other words, even when the second time saving state is set, the variable performance is executed in the same way as during the first time saving state, and the time saving extension suggesting performance is executed in the time saving final change. By configuring in this way, when the first time saving state is set and when the second time saving state is set, the variable production can be executed in the same production mode, so the first time saving When the second time saving state is set after the end of the state, it is possible to easily make the user think that the time saving state of 1 is continuing.

Next, a description will be given of the variation performance that is executed when the jackpot variation is executed during the first time saving state. FIG. 1855(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the jackpot variation in the first time saving state. FIG. 1855(a) shows an example of a jackpot variation effect executed in a state where the win icon P1 and the win icon P2 are displayed in the display area Dm70.
As described above, in the fifty-first control example, when the time saving pattern is won during the first time saving state (the time saving winning information is stocked for time saving), the effect of getting the P icon 802V (see FIG. 1853 (b)) is executed. , the number of obtained P-icons 802V are displayed in the display area Dm70 using obtained icons. That is, the number of acquisition icons (acquisition icon P1, etc.) displayed in the display area Dm70 indicates the number of time-saving winning information stocked.
The time saving winning information that is stocked is read when the setting time saving state (first time saving state) ends, and based on the read time saving winning information, a new time saving state (second time saving state) is configured to be set, and the production using the acquisition icon P1 (see FIG. 1854 (a)) is executed in the time saving extension suggestion production executed at the end of the first time saving state. ing. That is, when the effect of getting the P-icon 802V is executed, the player can be made aware that some kind of privilege is likely to be given to the player.
On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery before the end of the first time saving state, the time saving winning information stocked in the time saving game is erased (cleared) when setting the start of the jackpot game. Therefore, the effect of getting the P icon 802V is executed in response to the time saving symbol winning in the first time saving state, and the acquisition icon P1 is used even though the acquisition icon P1 is displayed in the display area Dm70. There is a problem that the time-saving extension suggesting effect cannot be executed, and the presence of the acquisition icon P1 becomes meaningless to the player, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. Moreover, there is a problem that the player loses interest in the effect itself of getting the P-icon 802V, and the effect of the effect is further reduced.

On the other hand, in the fifty-first control example, when the big win variation is executed in the state where the acquisition icon P1 is displayed, that is, the big win game in which the time-saving winning information stocked for the time-saving is cleared is executed. In this case, as a variable effect for indicating the winning of the big win, a variable effect using the winning icon P1 is executed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1855 (a), when the variation pattern indicating the jackpot winning is determined in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the variation production corresponding to the jackpot variation The presence or absence of the acquisition icon P1 is determined when determining the effect mode of , and if it is determined that the acquisition icon P1 is displayed, the character 801 absorbs the acquisition icon P1, and the character 801 is powered up. is configured to determine the effect mode in which an action to get the V-icon 801V is executed.
By configuring in this way, the winning icon P1 displayed corresponding to the winning of the time-saving pattern can be used for the performance for suggesting the winning of the big win, so that the winning icon P1 is displayed in the state of winning the big win. However, even if the time saving winning information stocked is erased, the player thinks that a benefit (jackpot winning) different from the second time saving state has been granted by displaying the acquisition icon P1. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of getting the P-icon 802V.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1855(b), another effect content using the acquisition icon P1 will be described as a variation effect executed during the big win variation. FIG. 1855(b) is a diagram showing an example of variation production executed during the special symbol variation in the first time saving state. In the above-described FIG. 1855 (a), the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. The variation effect using the acquisition icon P1 for the effect of .

On the other hand, in FIG. 1855 (b), the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished. After the performance of getting the icon 801V is executed, the action of combining the acquired icon P1 with the V-icon 801V is executed, and the fact that the current big win is a probability variable big win can be notified during the big win variation.
Specifically, the action of the character 801 getting the V-icon 801V is executed near the center of the main display area Dm, and the player is notified that the jackpot has been won. At that time, the acquisition icon P1 is displayed in the display area Dm70. After that, an action of popping out the acquisition icon P1 toward the V-icon 801V obtained by the character 801 is executed, and the V-icon 801V and the acquisition icon P1 are displayed. is displayed, and the player is notified that the current big win is a variable probability big win. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Congratulations on the odd big hit with the combination of 'V' and 'P'" are displayed, and the variable effect executed this time (the effect of combining the V icon 801V and the acquired icon P1 Aspect) allows the player to grasp the privilege (probability variation notification) in an easy-to-understand manner.
As described above, in the fifty-first control example, the display mode (acquisition icon P1) displayed in response to the fact that the time-saving winning information is stocked by winning the time-saving symbol is changed to the time-saving winning information based on the time-saving winning information. When the state is set, it is used in the production (suggestion of time reduction extension), and when the stocked time reduction winning information is deleted, the event that triggers the deletion of the time reduction winning information (jackpot winning) It is configured to use the acquisition icon P1 for an effect (variable effect) for indicating that a has occurred. By configuring in this way, after winning the time-saving design, even when the time-saving state based on the time-saving design winning is set and when the time-saving state is not set, the acquisition icon P1 displayed corresponding to the time-saving design winning. can be executed.
Furthermore, in the fifty-first control example, the opportunity established when a jackpot is won is defined as the opportunity for erasing the stocked time-saving winning information. In other words, when the conditions for granting the second benefit (jackpot) different from the first benefit (setting of the time saving state) granted based on the time saving pattern winning are satisfied, the stocked time saving winning information is erased. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the acquisition icon P1 is displayed during the first time saving state, either the first privilege or the second privilege is provided to the player.

By configuring in this way, when the effect of getting the P icon 802V during the first time saving state is executed, it is determined that some privilege (setting of time saving state, jackpot) is given, so that the player , it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of getting the P icon 802V.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, as a condition for erasing the stocked time-saving winning information (time-saving stock), a condition that is established when a benefit (jackpot) that is advantageous to the player is given is defined. However, without being limited to this, there are stocked conditions that are satisfied without giving benefits that are advantageous to the player (for example, conditions that are satisfied in part when a special symbol lottery is lost and won). It may be defined as a condition for erasing the time saving winning information (time saving stock).
<Regarding the game state transition in the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1856, the game state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1856 is a diagram schematically showing a game state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1856, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example has, as game states, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a variable state (high probability state of special symbols). , High probability state of normal design), 1st time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), 2nd time saving state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design, Electric support state) and are configured to be configurable.
First, when the normal state is set, a game aiming at execution of the first special symbol lottery is performed by a left-handed game in the same manner as the tenth control example described above. In the first special pattern lottery, a lottery for winning a jackpot is executed with a probability of 1/300, and when the jackpot is won, a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50% (jackpot A54, jackpot B54). ) is set, and a time-saving jackpot (jackpot C54) is set in which the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50%. More specifically, the jackpot A54, which is a 10-round variable jackpot, is about 15% of the time when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot B54, which is a 4-round variable jackpot, is about 35% of the time, and about 50% of the time. A jackpot C54, which is a short-time jackpot (normal jackpot) of 10 rounds, is configured to be set. It should be noted that the jackpot game contents corresponding to various jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is 900 times in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the special symbol low probability state is set (normal state, first time saving state, second time saving state) If the jackpot is not won continuously (when the number of times of addiction reaches 900 times), the third time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) as a ceiling privilege. Configured to be configurable. Therefore, when the normal state is set and the number of times of addiction reaches the specified number of times (900 times), the game state shifts to the third time saving state.
Next, the probability change state will be explained. This probability variable state is a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is set to a high probability (1/50). That is, when the high probability state of special symbols is set, the probability of winning a jackpot by the special symbol lottery is higher than the low probability state of special symbols, which is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the high-probability state of the normal design, the probability of winning in the normal design lottery is set to be higher than in the low-probability state of the normal design. Therefore, the state in which the variable probability state is set as the game state is more advantageous to the player than the case in which the normal state is set.
In the state where this variable probability state is set, it is easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state, so the game that executes the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game is the player. It is a game that is advantageous to Therefore, in FIG. 1856, the transition of the game state will be described by taking as an example the case where the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the variable probability state is executed.
When the second special symbol lottery is executed during the probability variation state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/50, and when the jackpot is won, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50%. A jackpot A54, a jackpot B54) are set, and a time saving jackpot (jackpot C54) is set in which the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50%. More specifically, the jackpot A54, which is a 10-round variable jackpot, is about 45% of the time when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot B54, which is a 4-round variable jackpot, is about 5% at a rate of about 50%. A jackpot C54, which is a short-time jackpot of 10 rounds, is configured to be set. It should be noted that the jackpot game contents corresponding to various jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

As described above, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of the probability variable jackpot is the same at 50%, but the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery It is configured so that the rate of setting the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A54) in the 10-round game is higher in the case of winning. In other words, the second special symbol lottery is a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the big win type set when the big win is won.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, in order to differentiate the degree of advantage between the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, it is easier to execute a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds than in the case of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. It is sufficient if the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player can be made different between when the player wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. 2. When a big win is won in a special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the probability variable big win in which the probability variable state is set after the big win game is finished is higher, or the probability of executing the big win game is set to the first special symbol. The second special symbol lottery may have a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the lottery.
Here, when the jackpot is won during the probability variable state and the jackpot A54 and the jackpot B54 are set, the probability variable state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Since this variable probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed 10000 times, the player can continue to win the variable probability jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state. You will aim and play.
On the other hand, when the jackpot is won during the probability variable state and the jackpot C54 is set, the jackpot is won during the above-described normal state and the jackpot game of 10 rounds is executed in the same manner as when the jackpot C54 is set. After the jackpot game ends, the first time saving state is set.

In addition, in FIG. 1856, the contents of the transition of the game state based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state were explained, but the first special symbol lottery can be executed even in the variable probability state. Therefore, for example, if the variable probability state is set while the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is acquired, or the left-handed game is performed during the variable state, the first ball entrance 64 In the state where the special figure 1 reservation is obtained by entering the game ball, there is a possibility that the first special symbol lottery will be executed.
Here, in the fifty-first control example, in a state where the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved) are acquired, the 2 Special symbol lottery is configured to be executable. In other words, the special symbol lottery can be executed for a plurality of special symbol types, and the special symbol lottery of the special symbol type that is advantageous to the player can be preferentially executed. By configuring in this way, in the state where the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, even if the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the second special symbol lottery can be executed preferentially, and a special disadvantageous to the player It is possible to make it difficult to execute the pattern lottery.
In addition, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the variable state, the judgment of the jackpot election is executed with a high probability (1/50), and when the jackpot is elected, it is different from the case where the jackpot is elected in the normal state. The jackpot types are set at the same ratio. Therefore, when the left-handed game is performed during the variable probability state, it is more difficult to execute the special symbol lottery than when the right-handed game is performed, and even if the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbols are disadvantageous to the player. Since the lottery is executed, the game method is disadvantageous to the player.
Next, a 1st time saving state is demonstrated. This first time-saving state is a game state set after the jackpot game ends, and is a low-probability state for special symbols and a high-probability state for normal symbols. That is, the first time-saving state has the same probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery as the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), but the second special symbol lottery is executed. It becomes a game state that makes it easy to play. Therefore, unlike the normal state, a game is performed in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game. In FIG. 1856, the contents of transition of the game state when the second special symbol lottery which is mainly executed during the first time saving state is executed will be explained.

In the fifty-first control example, by executing the second special symbol lottery during the first time saving state, determination of time saving symbol winning is performed in addition to determination of jackpot winning. Concretely, it is configured to execute the determination of the time-saving design election in part when the big hit is not elected in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state has more types of benefits to be granted based on the lottery result than the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state or during the variable probability state. It becomes a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player.
In addition, since the first time-saving state is a state with a low probability of special symbols, the number of times of addiction for providing the ceiling privilege is updated by executing the special symbol lottery. In addition, in the fifty-first control example, the first time-saving state is set only after the jackpot game ends, and the duration (number of times of time-savings) is configured to be a maximum of 100 times (100 times of time-savings). , The number of times of addiction does not reach the specified number of times (900 times) by the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state.
Here, the contents of the game when winning the time saving symbol will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example described above, the time saving pattern lottery is configured to be executable, and when the time saving pattern is won, the second time saving state (special Low probability state of the pattern, electric support state in the low probability state of the normal pattern) can be set. In this second time-saving state, the probability state of normal patterns is a low probability state, and the probability of winning per normal pattern is low compared to the high probability state of normal patterns, but the fluctuation time of normal pattern fluctuations, and An electric sapo state is set in which the release pattern of the normal pattern winning game is the same as the high probability state of the normal pattern, and the right hitting game is more advantageous to the player than the left hitting game.
That is, when the second time saving state is set, almost the same game control as the first time saving state is executed, and it is determined whether the first time saving state is set or the second time saving state is set. It is difficult for the player to comprehend only by the configuration. And when the time saving pattern is won, unlike the case where the jackpot is won, the set time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) cannot be ended, and the set time saving state ends It is configured to be able to store time-saving winning information for showing that the time-saving design has been won until it is done.

Therefore, when the time-saving design winning determination (time-saving design lottery) is executed during the first time-saving state, the time-saving winning information is stored, and when the first time-saving state ends, it is stored. A second time saving state based on the time saving winning information is set. By configuring in this way, when the time saving pattern is elected during the first time saving state, the first time saving state is compared to the case of newly setting the second time saving state regardless of the number of remaining time saving states in the first time saving state. It can be made easy to continue for a predetermined period. In addition, when the remaining period of the first time-saving state (number of times of remaining time-saving) remains a specific number (e.g., 80 times), the second time-saving state with a number of times of time-saving less than the specific number (e.g., 50 times) is set. It is possible to surely prevent the time-saving pattern winning from becoming a game result disadvantageous to the player.
Furthermore, in the fifty-first control example, when the time-saving design is won multiple times during the first time-saving state, a plurality of time-saving winning information can be stored. Specifically, when the time saving pattern is elected, it is configured to store the setting right (time saving winning information) for setting the second time saving state with the number of time saving times of 20 times, for example, the first time saving If the time-saving pattern is won twice during the state, two time-saving winning information is stored, and after the first time-saving state ends, the second time-saving state of 40 time-saving times (20 time-saving times x 2 winning times) is set. It is configured so that
By configuring in this way, the duration of the second time saving state (the number of time saving times) set after the end of the first time saving state is lengthened as the number of time saving pattern winning times in the first time saving state increases. can be done.
As described above, in the 51st control example, even if the time saving pattern is won during the first time saving state, after the first time saving state ends, the time saving number of times according to the time saving pattern winning number of times Since the 2 hour-shortening state is set, the duration of the 1st hour-shortening state will not be shortened by winning the hour-shortening pattern, and the second hour-shortening state with the same number of times of hour-shortening will not be set regardless of the number of times the hour-shortening pattern is won. Therefore, in order to increase the number of time-saving pattern winning times in the first time-saving state, immediately after the first time-saving state is set, a game aimed at winning a time-saving pattern in addition to winning a jackpot can be motivated to play. .

Then, during the first time saving state, since the probability of special symbols is low, the probability of being determined as a big win in the second special symbol lottery is 1/300. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the jackpot type is determined at the same rate as the variable probability state described above. Also, if the second special symbol lottery is not determined to be a big hit, the determination of the time-saving design winning with a winning probability of 1/20 (time-saving design lottery) is executed, and if the time-saving design is won, the time-saving number of times is 20. Time saving winning information indicating the second time saving state of the time is stored.
When the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times during the first time saving state, the time saving end condition is satisfied, the process for ending the first time saving state is executed, and whether the time saving winning information is stored (time saving stock is determined), and if the time saving is stocked, the second time saving state based on the stocked time saving winning information is set. On the other hand, when the short working hours are not stocked, the normal state is set.
Next, the second time saving state set based on the time saving symbol winning will be described. In this second time-saving state, the probability state of the special pattern and the normal pattern is the same as the normal state (both are low probability states), and the game ball is allowed to enter the second ball entrance 640 more than the normal state. It is a game state in which the electric support state is set to make it easier.
When the second time saving state is set, similarly to the first time saving state, determination of time saving symbol winning is executed by the second special symbol lottery. Even if the time saving pattern is won during the second time saving state, the end condition (time saving end condition) of the set second time saving state is not satisfied, so the time saving winning information is stored until the second time saving state ends. A second time saving state based on the stored time saving winning information is newly set after the two time saving state ends.

In the fifty-first control example, the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times as the first time saving state, and the number of times of time saving is set to 20 times as the second time saving state for one time saving pattern winning. In other words, the number of times of the special symbol lottery that is executed from the time the first time saving state is set to the end is executed during the second time saving state that is set corresponding to one time saving pattern winning. It is configured to be more than the number of special symbol lotteries.
By configuring in this way, the number of time-saving design winning times in the first time-saving state, the number of time-saving design winning times during the second time-saving state set based on the time-saving winning information stored in the first time-saving state, the second It is possible to make it easy to gradually reduce the number of time-saving design wins during the second time-saving state set based on the time-saving winning information stored during the time-saving state. Therefore, after the first time saving state is set, it is possible to prevent the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) from continuing for an excessively long period of time.
In addition, in this 51st control example, there is no upper limit to the number of times of saving time symbols that are stored while the 1 time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) is set, but it is limited to this Instead, it may be configured to provide an upper limit to the number of time-saving symbol winning times that can be stored. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a time saving state (a 1st time saving state, a 2nd time saving state) continues excessively for a long period of time.
In addition, after the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) ends, an upper limit may be set on the number of times that the second time saving state can be newly set based on the stored time saving winning information, For example, the configuration may be such that the upper limit number of times is reached when the second time saving state is continuously set five times. By configuring in this way, by continuing to win the time saving symbol in the second special symbol lottery executed during the second time saving state, the second time saving state is endlessly reset, and the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) can be suppressed from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

Further, in the fifty-first control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state), the winning probability of the time-saving design is always 1/20. However, without being limited to this, the probability of winning the time-saving pattern in the second special pattern lottery may be variable according to the number of execution times of the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state. In this case, for example, as the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state increases, the winning probability of the time saving symbol may be reduced. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state continues for a long time by repeatedly setting the second time saving state, when the time saving state does not continue for a long time, for example, it is set after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to make it more difficult to win the time saving pattern than in the first time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) from continuing for an excessively long period of time.
On the other hand, as the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state increases, the winning probability of the time saving pattern may be increased. In this case, for example, the duration of the first time saving state (the number of times of time saving) set after the end of the jackpot game can be changed according to the type of jackpot, and the first number of times of time saving is the shortest as the first time saving state. When (for example, 10 times) is set, only the second special symbol lottery that wins the time saving pattern with the first probability (for example, 1/20) is executed, and the second time saving longer than the first time saving number of times When the number of times (eg, 100 times) is set, after executing the second special symbol lottery that wins the time saving symbol with the first probability (eg, 1/20) a predetermined number of times (eg, 90 times), the second The second special symbol lottery that wins the time-saving symbol with a second probability (eg, 1/5) higher than 1 probability can be executed a specific number of times (eg, 10 times).
By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the time saving state is changed according to the jackpot type set as the time saving jackpot in which the first time saving state is set (the number of time saving times is changed) ) as well as the ease of winning the time-saving pattern can be varied. Therefore, since it is possible to easily provide a large difference in the degree of advantage to the player for the set jackpot type, it is possible to make the player more interested in the set jackpot type. Furthermore, when the first time saving state of the second number of times of time saving is set, the jackpot is not won during the first time saving state than when the first time saving state of the first number of times of time saving is set. Also, since the second time saving state is relatively easily set after the first time saving state ends, the player in whom the first time saving state of the number of the first time saving times is set can easily play the game with peace of mind. .
Then, the electric support state (first time saving state, second time saving state, third time saving state, variable probability state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed ends, and the normal state (non-electric support state) is set. Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved) acquired at that time. In the fifty-first control example, even in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, it is configured to be able to execute the determination of the time-saving symbol election (time-saving symbol lottery), so the second special symbol lottery in the normal state The period during which the first special symbol lottery is executed is the period during which the special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the period during which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed (pull-back period), and the production mode (pull-back mode) that is different from the other normal states. ) is set.

When the time saving pattern is won (winning probability 1/20) in the second special pattern lottery executed during the pullback mode, the second time saving pattern variation indicating the time saving pattern winning is stopped and displayed. A state (time saving number of times 20 times) is set. By configuring in this way, the player who has ended the power support state, which is easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the normal state, can be made to execute an advantageous game for a predetermined period. Aiming at ending the electric sapo state in a state in which many special figure 2 reservations are acquired, the player can be motivated to play the game until the electric sapo state ends.
In addition, when the number of times of addiction reaches 900 times in the low probability state of the special symbol, the third time saving state of 100 times of time saving times is set. In this third time saving state, as in the above-described second time saving state, a special symbol low probability state and an electric support state in a normal symbol low probability state are set, and a game in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is performed. will be
In the second special symbol lottery executed during the third time saving state, the time saving symbol lottery is not executed. In other words, during the first time-saving state described above, the benefit (setting of the second time-saving state) based on the time-saving winning information indicating the time-saving design winning when the time-saving design is won can be held (stocked) until the first time-saving state ends. And during the second time saving state described above, if the time saving pattern is won, without waiting for the end of the second time saving state (after the special symbol variation that has won the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed) Benefits based on the time saving winning information ( Setting of the second time saving state) can be given (addition of the number of time saving times), and during the third time saving state, it is configured so that the time saving symbol cannot be won.
By configuring in this way, in the electric support state (first time saving state, second time saving state, third time saving state, variable probability state) in which it is relatively easy to execute the second special symbol lottery for the player, It is possible to create a game in which the sapo state is easy to continue and a game in which the electric sapo state is difficult to continue, and to make a player play a game aiming at winning a big prize by executing a special symbol lottery. Needless to say, interest can be given depending on the presence or absence of time-saving design winning.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1857 to 1860, the details of the electrical configuration in the fifty-first control example will be described. The fifty-first control example differs from the forty-seventh control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that part of the configuration of It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the same contents as those of the forty-seventh control example described above will be omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 1857(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1857(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example replaces the first winning random number table 202ja with the ROM 202 (see FIG. 1763(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example. The difference is that a jackpot type selection table 202md is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202jd and a time saving random number table 202mf is newly provided.
The first winning random number table 202ma, like the first winning random number table 202ja described above, is a data table referred to when determining whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. This first winning random number table 202ma, compared with the first winning random number table 202ja (see FIG. 1764(a)), sets the jackpot determination value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) in the high probability state of the special symbol. They are different in that they are different.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1858(a), the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ma will be specifically described. FIG. 1858(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 1858(a), the first per random number table 202ma is associated with the probability state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol), and the first per random number obtained The range in which the value of the counter C1 is determined to be a big hit is defined to be different, and for the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "0 to 2". In contrast, the big hit determination value is defined, and for the high probability state of the special symbol, the big hit determination value is defined for the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 17".

In other words, the range that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 can take is 900 from "0 to 899", and the range that is judged to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is three from "0 to 2". Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/300 (3/900) in the low probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the range determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of special symbols is 18 of "0 to 17", so in the high probability state of special symbols, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/50 ( 18/900).
In this way, by varying the probability of winning the jackpot when the special symbol lottery is executed according to the probability state of the special symbols, the game state in which the player is likely to win the jackpot (the high probability state of the special symbols is The game can be motivated to play with the aim of transitioning to the set game state). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, the same data table (first winning random number table 202ma) is used both when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed by referring to it, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of which special symbol lottery is executed. A different data table may be referred to in the 2 special symbol lottery to determine whether a big hit is won, and it is more difficult to perform in the normal state than in the 1st special symbol lottery, which is easier to perform in the normal state. The contents of the first winning random number table 202ma may be defined so that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to win the jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbols.
By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery using the second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) acquired during the time saving state that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery is performed during the normal state. When executed, for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state while the special figure 2 hold is acquired, the jackpot is won more than the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. Since the easy second special symbol lottery can be executed, even for the player who has finished the time-saving state even though the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, has been set. It is possible to provide a privilege (execution of the second special symbol lottery that makes it easier to win a big hit than the first special symbol lottery). In addition, in order to end the time saving state with more special figure 2 reservations acquired, the player is motivated to play a game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservations until just before the time saving state ends. can be done.
The jackpot type selection table 202md is, like the jackpot type selection table 202jd (see FIG. 1765(a)) described above, a data table that is referenced when selecting the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. is.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202md will be described with reference to FIG. 1859(a). FIG. 1859(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202md. As shown in FIG. 1859(a), the jackpot type selection table 202md determines the jackpot type by referring to different data tables according to the type of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) in which the jackpot is won. As such, the special figure 1 jackpot table 202md1 that is referred to when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and the special figure 2 jackpot table 202md1 that is referred to when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot and a table 202md2.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1859(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202md1 will be described. FIG. 1859(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202md1. As shown in FIG. 1859 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot table 202md1 has three types of jackpot types (jackpot A54, jackpot B54, jackpot C54) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. stipulated.
Specifically, "jackpot A54" for the range of "0 to 14" for the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, "jackpot B54" for the range of "15 to 49", "50 "Jackpot C54" is defined for the range of ~99", respectively.
The jackpot type "jackpot A54" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds, and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 15 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A54" (0 to 14). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot A54" is 15% (15/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot B54" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B54" is 35 (15 to 49). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot B54" is 35% (35/100).
The jackpot type “jackpot C54” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the time-saving jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C54" (50 to 99). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot C54" is 50% (50/100).
That is, in the fifty-first control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A54, jackpot B54) is executed (determined) at a rate of 50%, and the time-saving jackpot ( The jackpot C54) is configured to be executed (determined). Furthermore, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the 10-round game (jackpot A54, jackpot C54) is executed (determined) at a rate of 65%, and the 4-round game (jackpot B54) is executed at a rate of 35%. It is configured to be (determined).
In the fifty-first control example, when the probability variable jackpot is determined, the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the probability variable counter 203i are set to "10000", but as described above, When the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/50, so the variable probability state is substantially continued until the next jackpot win.
Therefore, among the three kinds of jackpot types (jackpot A54, jackpot B54, jackpot C54) determined when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is jackpot A54 (10 rounds of variable jackpot). ), and then, the jackpot B54 (4-round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot C54 (10-round short-time jackpot) are the jackpot types most disadvantageous to the player. In addition, when the degree of play for the player is viewed from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game, the number of round games (number of rounds) executed in one jackpot game is Since the larger the number, the more advantageous the jackpot is to the player, the jackpot A54 and the jackpot C54 are the jackpot types that are advantageous to the player, and the jackpot B54 is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1859(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202md2 will be described. FIG. 1859(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202md2. As shown in FIG. 1859 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot table 202md2 has three types of jackpot types (jackpot A54, jackpot B54, jackpot C54) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. , The table 202md1 for the special figure 1 jackpot described above is defined with a different selection ratio.
Specifically, "jackpot A54" for the range of "0 to 44" for the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, "jackpot B54" for the range of "45 to 49", "50 "Jackpot C54" is defined for the range of ~99", respectively.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 45 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A54" (0 to 44). When the jackpot is won in the 2 special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot A54" is 45% (45/100).
In addition, among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B54" is five (45 to 49). , When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining the "jackpot B54" is 5% (5/100).

Finally, among the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C54" (50 to 99). Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining the "jackpot C54" is 50% (50/100).
That is, in the fifty-first control example, the jackpot A, which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, is determined in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery rather than in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the rate of (execution) is high. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery can be a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, so the game state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed. A game state in which a second special symbol lottery is mainly executed (a time saving state, a variable probability state) is advantageous to a player in that a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. state. In addition, the time-saving state is set to a low probability state of special symbols, and the variable state is set to a high probability state of special symbols, so the probability of winning a jackpot in one special symbol lottery is higher than the time-saving state. is higher in the variable state. Therefore, between the time-saving state and the variable probability state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the variable probability state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in which the big win is likely to be won becomes a game state more advantageous to the player.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, as shown in FIGS. 1859(b) and (c), even when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability varies when the jackpot is won. Although the ratio of determining the jackpot (the ratio of determining the time-saving jackpot) is configured to be the same, it is not limited to this, for example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the second It may be constructed so that the probability variable jackpot is more likely to be determined when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery than when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, or the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery. It may be configured so that the probability variable big win is more likely to be determined in the case of winning than in the case of winning the big win in the second special symbol lottery.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the ratio of setting the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game according to the special symbol type that has been won, so that the special symbol lottery is executed for the special symbol type. The game is aimed at shifting to a game state in which the type of special symbol lottery to be mainly executed is different in order to make the player more interested and to execute the special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to make a person willingly play a game.

Further, in the fifty-first control example, as shown in FIGS. 1859(b) and (c), when the jackpot type (jackpot A54, jackpot B54) for which the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is determined, Regardless of the determined jackpot type, the same value (10000) is configured to be set in the time reduction number counter 203h and the probability variable counter 203i, but not limited to this, the jackpot type corresponding to the probability variable jackpot However, according to the determined jackpot type, different values may be set to the time reduction counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203i.
By configuring in this way, even if the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the end condition (probability variable end condition) for ending the set probability variable state can be changed according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the length of the period during which the variable probability state continues.
Further, in the fifty-first control example, as shown in FIGS. 1859(b) and (c), when the jackpot type (jackpot C54) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends is determined, the same value (100) is configured to be set in the time-saving number counter 203h, but without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of jackpot types corresponding to the time-saving jackpot are provided, and even if it is a jackpot type corresponding to the time-saving jackpot , According to the determined jackpot type, it may be configured to set a different value to the time-saving counter 203h.
By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the set time saving state can be changed according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the length of the period during which the time saving state continues.

In addition, in the fifty-first control example, since it is configured to be able to execute the time-saving design lottery in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, with respect to the length of the period in which the time-saving state continues In addition to making the player more interested in executing more the second special symbol lottery, which makes it easier for the player to determine the kind of the big win (jackpot A54) more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery, when winning the big win, the time-saving symbol lottery is won. It is also possible to increase interest in increasing the number of times. In other words, even for players who did not win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving pattern lottery result is time saving pattern winning. Since it is possible to make the user expect that the number of times of occurrence is larger, it is possible to make the user more interested in the length of the period during which the time saving state (first time saving state) continues.
The random number table 202mf per time saving will be explained. This time-saving random number table 202mf is a data table referred to when determining whether or not a time-saving design is won in the time-saving design lottery executed when the result of the special design lottery is other than the jackpot winning (loss). .
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is configured to be able to determine time-saving symbol winning in a special symbol lottery in the same way as the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, and in the fifth control example described above. For the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol type for determining whether the time-saving pattern winning is executed, a game state for performing the determination of the time-saving pattern winning, a probability of determining that the time-saving pattern winning is determined (time-saving pattern winning probability), are different.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1858(b), the contents defined in the random number table 202mf per time saving will be described. FIG. 1858(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number table 202mf per time saving. As shown in Figure 1858 (b), in the time saving per random number table 202mf, the special symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the set game state is "normal (normal state)", Only in the case of "first time saving (first time saving state)" and "second time saving (second time saving state)", determination of time saving symbol winning is defined to be executed.

Specifically, the special symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the game state that is set is "normal (normal state)", "first time saving (first time saving state)", " The value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the case of "second time saving (second time saving state)" is defined as a value determined as time saving symbol winning in the range of "100 to 144".
Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first random number counter C1, 45 (100 to 144) random numbers (counter values) are associated with "time-saving symbol winning". Therefore, the probability of winning the time saving symbol in the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first time saving state and the second time saving state is 1/20 (45/900). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1858 (a) and (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, the same first hit random number counter is used for the determination of the jackpot election in the special symbol lottery and the determination of the time-saving symbol election. The value of C1, that is, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired at the timing of obtaining the execution opportunity of the executed special symbol lottery is used, and the first winning random number counter determined as a big win. The value of C1 and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 which is determined to be time-saving symbol winning are configured to be different.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a big hit winning and a time-saving design winning from being duplicated as a lottery result of one special symbol lottery. In addition, without being limited to this, the type of the random number counter used to determine the winning of the jackpot and the type of the random number counter used to determine the time-saving design winning (time-saving design lottery) are different, and the special design lottery is executed. It may be constructed so that the determination of winning the jackpot (jackpot lottery) is executed first when the lottery wins, and the determination of the time-saving pattern winning (the time-saving pattern lottery) is executed when the jackpot is not won in the jackpot lottery. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the time-saving symbol lottery only when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (lost). In addition, since different random number counter values are used for the jackpot lottery and the time-saving pattern lottery, the result of the special symbol lottery (the result of the jackpot lottery , the result of the time-saving pattern lottery), the value of the time-saving counter acquired this time can be made difficult for the player to grasp.
In addition, since different random number counter values are used for the jackpot lottery and the time-saving pattern lottery, the range that the value of the random number counter used in the jackpot lottery can take and the value of the random number counter used in the time-saving pattern lottery The range obtained can be different. Therefore, it is possible to easily define the jackpot winning probability and the time-saving symbol winning probability in more detail.

Next, referring to FIG. 1857(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1857(b) is a diagram showing the structure of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1857(b), the RAM203 in the fifty-first control example differs from the RAM203 in the above-described forty-seventh control example (see FIG. 1763(b)) in that a waiting time reduction counter 203ma is added. is doing. The rest is the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The waiting time saving counter 203ma is a counter for measuring the number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern during the time saving state (the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more). The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is configured to be able to win a time-saving symbol in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and when the time-saving symbol is won during the time-saving state, it is set. In order to wait for the setting of the second time-saving state based on the time-saving design winning until the time-saving state is completed, if the time-saving design is won during the time-saving state, the number of time-saving given based on the time-saving design winning Instead of adding to the value of the time saving counter 203h, it is configured to add to the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma.
Unlike the value of the time-saving counter 203h for standby, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not subtracted based on the execution of the special symbol lottery (the special symbol fluctuation is stopped), and the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0. In other words, it is configured to be referred to when the end condition of the set time saving state is satisfied, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0, the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is 1 When it is above, it comprises so that the process which adds (sets) the value of the time saving counter 203ma for standby|waiting to the value of the time saving counter 203h may be performed. By constructing in this way, even when the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, the setting of the second time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning can be waited until the time saving state ends.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is configured to be able to win a time-saving pattern multiple times during the time-saving state, and each time a time-saving pattern is won, the value of the waiting time-saving counter 203ma is won. It is configured to be added for the number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving pattern. In other words, as the number of winning times of time saving symbols in the time saving state of 1 increases, the number of time saving times of the second time saving state set when the time saving state of 1 ends increases. By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state is predetermined, it is possible to easily set an unexpected number of times of time saving, so that the player can enjoy a game with unexpectedness. It can be provided, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, the number of time reductions corresponding to the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma at the time the time reduction state ends is set as the number of time reductions in the newly set second time reduction state. However, without being limited to this, the number of time saving times corresponding to at least a part of the value of the standby time saving counter 203ma at the time the time saving state ends is set to the second time saving state It may be configured to be set as the number of times of shortening working hours. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of time reductions during standby, so that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the length of the period in which the time reduction state (second time reduction state) continues. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1860, the details of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifty-first control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the forty-seventh control example described above. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the same contents as those of the forty-seventh control example described above will be omitted.
FIG. 1860 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1860, the ROM 222 in the fifty-first control example changes the standby time reduction number counter 223ma and the time reduction stocked flag 223mb to the ROM 222 in the forty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 1768 (b)). The difference is that they are added. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
The standby time reduction counter 223ma is based on receiving a variation pattern command indicating the time reduction symbol election as a variation pattern command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state (second time reduction State) is a counter for counting the number of times of time saving corresponding to the second time saving state during waiting when it is determined that the state is waiting. In this control example, by referring to the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma, the sound lamp control device 113 side can grasp the number of times of standby time reduction (stocked time reduction information). ing. By configuring in this way, there is no need to output a command indicating the time saving information stocked from the main control device 110 side (command indicating the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma), so the main control device 110 executes It is possible to reduce the processing load of the control processing performed.

The stocked flag 223mb is waiting for the setting of the second time saving state, that is, a flag for indicating that the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma is greater than 1, and is a time saving state during the time saving state. When the pattern is elected and the setting of the second time saving state is made to stand by (when the time saving state is stocked), it is set to ON. Then, when the time saving state in stock is set, or when the time saving information stocked based on the jackpot winning is cleared, it is set to OFF.
<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in 54th control>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1861 to 1863. FIG. Specifically, in the fifty-first control example, special symbol determination processing (see S201H in FIG. ) in place of the special symbol determination process (see S201L in FIG. 1861), and in place of the time saving setting process (see S205H in FIG. 1778), the time saving setting process (see S205L in FIG. 1863) is provided. Since other control processing contents are the same as those of the forty-seventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1861, the special symbol determination process (S201L) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1861 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S201L). In this special symbol determination process (S201L), in contrast to the special symbol determination process (see S201H in FIG. 1774) in the above-described 47th control example, the type of the data table referred to when determining the result of the special symbol lottery is The difference is that it is configured to execute the process (time saving lottery process) for executing the time saving pattern lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning. The processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1861, when the special symbol determination process (S201L) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S8001), and the first winning random number table 202ma is drawn. A result is acquired (S8001L), and it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big win (S8003). Here, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a big hit (S8004), and the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2) Based on this, the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S8005), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S8003: No), the same ceiling determination processing as the 47th control example described above is executed (S8002H), and then the time reduction lottery processing is executed (S8002L), End this process. The time saving lottery process executed by the process of S8002L includes the time saving lottery process executed in the second control example described above (see S8006 in FIG. 106) and the time saving lottery process executed in the tenth control example described above ( S38006 reference of Figure 303) It is the processing in order to execute the judgment of time saving design election similarly.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, only when it is determined that the result of the special symbol lottery is not a jackpot election, the time saving lottery process can be executed. In the pattern lottery, there is no possibility of winning the big win and the short-time pattern winning in duplicate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player (setting of the jackpot game and the second time saving state).
Next, with reference to Drawing 1862, processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8002L) are explained. FIG. 1862 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving lottery process (S8002L). In this time-saving lottery process (S8002L), the time-saving design lottery (time-saving design referring to the time-saving random number table 202mf) corresponding to the set game state and the type of special design lottery being executed this time (special design type) lottery) is executed, and when the time-saving pattern lottery is won, different processing is executed according to the set game state.
Specifically, when the time-saving lottery process (S8002L) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read to specify the currently set game state (S8101L), and then , Acquires the lottery result based on the random number table 202mf per time saving (S8102L). Here, in the time saving random number table 202mf (see FIG. 1858 (b)), the special symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the current game state is "normal (normal state), first Time saving (1st time saving state), 2nd time saving (2nd time saving state) "(game situation) only The value (range) of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the time saving symbol winning is defined, In other game situations, it is regulated so as not to win the time-saving symbol. Therefore, in the time saving symbol lottery executed in the process of S8102L, the special symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the current game state is "normal (normal state), first time saving (first Time saving state), second time saving (second time saving state)” (game situation), the lottery result of time saving symbol non-winning is always obtained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, the time-saving random number table 202mf is a data table that is referred to in a game situation in which the time-saving design cannot be won, for example, the result of the time-saving design lottery for the first special design lottery is determined. However, the time saving random number table 202mf defines only the data table referred to in the game situation in which the time saving pattern can be won, and is not limited to this. When it is determined that it is a game situation in which it is impossible to win, it may be constructed so as not to execute the time-saving symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, a special pattern lottery is executed, and when the result of the lottery is other than a jackpot winning, the book configured to execute the time-saving pattern lottery regardless of the special pattern type or the current game state. Compared to the configuration of the fifty-first control example, it is possible to make it easier to reduce the processing to be executed for one special symbol lottery.
Next, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S8102L is the time saving pattern winning (S8103L), and if it is determined that the time saving pattern is winning (S8103L: Yes), the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is 20 is added (S8104L), the time-saving design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device is set (S8105L), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8103L that the time-saving design is not elected (S8103L: No), the special design to be displayed on the first design display device is set (S8106L), and this processing is terminated.
In addition, in this 51st control example, since the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state given when the time saving symbol is won is specified to 20 times, 20 is added to the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma in the processing of S8104L However, for example, as in the second control example described above, when the time-saving design is won, a different time-saving type can be determined according to the value of the time-saving design type counter obtained. , and when configured to be able to determine a different number of times of time saving according to the determined time saving type, in the process of S8104L, the value corresponding to the time saving number corresponding to the time saving type set this time is added should be configured to
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, when the time reduction symbol lottery executed in the special symbol lottery is selected, the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is added. is doing. That is, the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is added at the start timing of the special symbol variation. And, although the details will be described later, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma in the time saving setting process (see S205L of FIG. 1863) executed at the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuation It comprises so that the process which sets a 2nd time saving state may be performed. By configuring in this way, when the special symbol variation to be stopped and displayed is the special symbol variation indicating time-saving symbol winning, the control processing executed at the stop display timing of the special symbol variation can be simplified. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 1863, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S205L) will be described. FIG. 1863 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S205L). In this time saving setting process (S205L), the process for setting the second time saving state (second time saving state B) based on the time saving design winning is performed with respect to the time saving setting process (S205H) in the 47th control example described above. It is different in the point of execution, and other processing contents (processing for setting the second time saving state A as a ceiling privilege) are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
When the time saving setting process (S205L) is executed, first, the same S8401H to S8405H processes as the time saving setting process (S205H) in the 47th control example described above are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, that is, whether the current state is other than the time saving state (S8401L). Here, in the fifty-first control example, similar to the special symbol variation processing (see S104H in FIG. 1773) in the forty-seventh control example described above, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated at the stop display timing of the special symbol variation ( After executing the updating process (S204H) to subtract), it is configured to execute the time saving setting process (S205L).
That is, when the special symbol variation processing (see S104H in FIG. 1773) corresponding to the special symbol final variation in the time saving state (special symbol variation in which the time saving state ends based on the stop display) is executed, the time saving setting Since the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated to 0 by the updating process (S204H) before the process (S205L) is executed, the time saving setting process (S205L) corresponding to the special symbol final variation in the time saving state is the time saving counter. It will be executed with the value of 203h being 0.
Therefore, in the processing of S8401L, the value of the time saving counter 203h is determined to be 0 in the state where the normal state is set and the special symbol final variation in the time saving state is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol final variation in the time saving state Otherwise, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 during the variable probability state.

In the process of S8401L, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S8401L: No), since it is not possible to set a new time saving state (second time saving state B), the standby time saving counter 203ma This process ends without referring to the value of . On the other hand, in the process of S8401L, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S8401L: Yes), a new time saving state (second time saving state B) can be set, so next It is determined whether the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is greater than 0, that is, whether the time reduction information indicating the time reduction pattern winning is stocked (S8402L), and the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is greater than 0. If (S8402L: Yes), the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S8403L), the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is cleared to 0 (S8404L), and the game state storage area 203g The information indicating the second time saving state B is stored (S8405L), the value of the time saving counter 203h, the state command indicating the time saving type information (second time saving state B) are set (S8406L), and the process ends.
In addition, in the process of S8402L, if it is determined that the value of the standby time saving counter 203ma is not 0 (S8402L: No), since the stock time saving information does not exist, a new time saving state The processing from S8403L to S8406L for setting is skipped, and this processing ends.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, in the second special symbol lottery executed while the time-saving state is set, determination of time-saving design winning (time-saving design lottery) can be executed. It is configured so that when the time saving pattern is won, the setting of the second time saving state (second time saving state B) based on the time saving pattern winning is on standby until the set time saving state is completed. is doing.
By configuring in this way, regardless of the set gaming state, the timing when the time-saving design is elected (the timing when the special design variation when the time-saving design is elected stops, the timing when the special design variation when the time-saving design is elected starts, etc.) Since the duration of the time-saving state can be maximized for the configuration that newly sets the time-saving state (second time-saving state) based on the time-saving symbol winning, the game in the time-saving state is being executed. To allow a player to play a game aimed at winning a time-saving pattern without worrying about the remaining period of the time-saving state currently set (remaining time-saving number of times).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, the second time-saving state set when the time-saving pattern is won becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state set after the time-saving state ends. It is constructed in such a manner that the game state is slightly disadvantageous to the player (the winning probability of normal symbols is slightly lower) than the time-saving state (first time-saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game.
Therefore, if the game state set at the time of winning the time-saving symbol is a gaming state (for example, normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state set based on the time-saving symbol winning, The second time-saving state is set at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation when the time-saving pattern is won, and the game state set when the time-saving pattern is won is more game than the second time-saving state set based on the time-saving pattern winning. When the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the first time saving state), the second time saving state is set at the timing when the first time saving state ends, not at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation in which the time saving symbol is won. It is configured as follows.
By configuring in this way, when a game state more advantageous to the player than the currently set game state is set based on the time-saving symbol winning, the currently set game state is unnecessary. It is possible to suppress the continuation and to suppress the shortening of the period in which the game state advantageous to the player continues based on the fact that the time saving symbol is won. Therefore, regardless of the set game state, the player can play the game while expecting the winning of time-saving symbols, so that the easy-to-understand game can be provided.
Furthermore, in the fifty-first control example, as described above, according to the game state set at the time of winning the time saving pattern, the time saving state (second time saving state) based on the time saving pattern winning is actually based on the time saving pattern winning. It is configured so that the period until setting can be varied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the time-saving pattern is won and at what timing the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern winning is set. can be provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, as the shortest period from winning the time saving pattern to setting the second time saving state, the time saving pattern lottery is executed at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and the time saving pattern is executed. When the time-saving pattern is won by lottery, the second time-saving state can be set at the timing when the special pattern variation in which the time-saving pattern is won is stopped and displayed. In other words, the time lag corresponding to the length of the variation period during which one special symbol variation is executed can be set as the shortest period. When the time-saving design is won in the time-saving design lottery, the second time-saving state may be set before the special symbol variation in which the time-saving design is won is started. By configuring in this way, the shortest period from winning the time-saving symbol to setting the second time-saving state can be further shortened.
In addition, as the longest period from winning the time saving pattern to setting the second time saving state, the time saving pattern is won at the timing when the first special pattern fluctuation in the first time saving state of 100 times is started, and then the second A second time saving state can be set at the timing when the special pattern final variation in the first time saving state is stopped and displayed without winning a jackpot in 100 special pattern lotteries executed during the one time saving state. That is, the time lag for the length of the variable period that is executed until the first time saving state ends can be set as the longest period, but not limited to this, for example, regardless of whether or not the game state transitions However, when the special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (for example, 50 times) is executed after winning the time saving pattern, the second time saving state may be configured to be set, and the number of times the time saving pattern winning is a specific number of times ( For example, wait for the setting of the second time-saving state until it reaches 5 times), and when the number of times of time-saving design winning reaches a specific number of times (5 times), the time-saving winning information corresponding to 5 times of time-saving design winning You may comprise so that a 2nd time saving state can be set by the corresponding time saving frequency.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the second time saving state based on the time saving symbol winning is set. In addition, the timing at which the second time saving state based on the time saving symbol winning is set is a special timing different from the specific timing (for example, start timing or stop timing) of the special symbol variation (for example, after the special symbol variation is started) When the elapsed time becomes a special elapsed time (for example, 10 seconds) determined by lottery, or at the start timing or stop timing of normal symbol fluctuation, the second time saving state may be set. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second time saving state is set, and the player can understand what triggered the setting of the second time saving state. can be difficult to predict.
<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1864 to 1867, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifty-first control example will be described. In the fifty-first control example, in place of the time-saving state production setting processing (see S4305H in FIG. 1785), the time-saving state production setting processing (S4305L in FIG. 1864) is changed to the fluctuation production setting processing ( 1792 S5014H reference) is replaced with, and it is different in that it performs a variable effect setting process (FIG. 1865 S5014L reference). Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 1864, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S4305L) are explained. FIG. 1864 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving state effect setting process (S4305L). This time saving state effect setting process (S4305L) is executed when it is determined that the state command is received in the command determination process (see S4103H in FIG. 1783) In the state command reception process (see S4201H in FIG. 1784), It is a process that is executed when it is determined that the state command indicating the transition to the time saving state is received (S4303H in FIG. 1784: Yes).
In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, as the type of the time saving state, the first time saving state (first time saving) set after the jackpot game ends based on winning the time saving jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and the ceiling privilege A second time saving state A (second time saving A) that is set when the The rear image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be set differently according to the type of the time saving state that has been set.
Specifically, when the time saving state effect setting process (S4305L) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the subordinate state setting area 223g (S4401H), and whether the game state before the change is the normal state is checked. Determine (S4402H). Then, if it is determined that the game state before the change is not the normal state (S4402H: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4402H, if it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S4402H: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is the first time saving (S4403H), if it is determined that it is the first time saving (S4403H: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command (state command) is set to the value of the time saving counter 223da (S4404H), and the time saving state (second 1-hour-saving state) is set (S4405H), and the process ends.

Also, in the process of S4403H, if it is determined that the time saving type is not the first time saving (S4403H: No), then it is determined whether the time saving type is the second time saving B (second time saving state B) ( S4401L), if it is determined that it is the second time saving B (S4401L: Yes), a display back image change command for indicating the back face type corresponding to the time saving state (second time saving state B) is set (S4405H) , the process ends. In addition, when the state command indicating that the time saving state of the second time saving B is set as the state command is received, the value of the waiting time saving number counter 223ma added instead of the information included in the state command is set during time saving Since the process of adding (setting) to the value of the counter 223da is executed in the effect setting process at the end of the first time saving state (see S5165L in FIG. 1867), the process of S4404H is skipped.
In the process of S4401L, if it is determined that it is not the second time saving B (S4401L: No), the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223jb (S4407H), high probability mode (ceiling A display back image change command for indicating the back surface type corresponding to time saving) is set (S4408H), and this processing is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1865, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014L) will be described. FIG. 1865 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014L). In this variable effect setting process (S5014L), the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) in the above-described 47th control example is executed during the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) The difference is that the production setting process during the time saving state for setting the production mode of the variable production is executed, and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the variable effect setting process (S5014L) is executed, first, the processes from S5101H to S5117H which are the same as the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) in the 47th control example described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S5107H, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S5107H: No), then the current gaming state is the first time saving state or the second time saving state. (S5101L), when it is determined that it is the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S5101L: Yes), the production setting process during the time saving state is executed (S5102L), and then the process of S5105H is performed . In addition, in the processing of S5101L, if it is determined that it is not the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S5101L: No), the process proceeds to S5105H without executing the processing of S5102L. Then, after executing the processing of S5105H, the processing of S5116H is executed in the same manner as the variable effect setting processing (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) in the forty-seventh control example described above, the processing of S5117 is executed, and this processing ends. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1866, the processing contents of the production setting process (S5102L) during the time saving state for setting the production mode of the variable production executed during the first time saving state or the second time saving state will be described. do. FIG. 1866 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5102L) during the time saving state. In this time-saving state production setting process (S5102L), as the variable production executed during the time-saving state, a process for setting a variable production corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation in which the time-saving design is won, or a time-saving showing the time-saving design winning A process is executed for varying the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the winning of the jackpot depending on whether or not the winning information is stocked.
That is, when the time saving pattern is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the setting of the second time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning is set on standby until the set time saving state ends. , a second time-saving state is set based on the time-saving pattern winning by the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state at the timing when the set time-saving state ends, so that a game with unexpectedness is provided to the player. However, until the set time-saving state ends, the player cannot grasp whether the time-saving design has been won in the special design lottery executed during the time-saving state (difficult to grasp) ) was a problem.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example is configured to be able to execute a variable performance that can suggest the result of the time-saving symbol lottery to the player by using the variable performance that is executed during the time-saving state. Therefore, before the time saving state ends, it is possible for the player to predict whether a new time saving state (second time saving state) is set after the time saving state ends, so during the time saving state It is possible to make the player interested in grasping not only the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot winning but also the presence or absence of the winning of the time-saving pattern for the executed variable presentation.
However, even if the time-saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the setting of the second time-saving state based on the time-saving design winning waits until the currently set time-saving state ends ( Because it is stocked), for example, a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery that is executed between the time the time-saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state and the time-saving state ends, and is stocked. When the conditions for clearing the time-saving winning information are met, the stocked time-saving winning information is cleared, and despite the fact that the production that suggests the time-saving design winning is executed, the second based on the time-saving design winning There is a problem that the 2 o'clock short state is not set and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, when the jackpot is won after the performance suggesting the time-saving symbol winning (the performance of getting the P icon 802V) is executed, the P icon 802V that was obtained An effect (see FIG. 1855) of notifying the winning of the jackpot by using the corresponding winning icon P1 can be executed. By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery after the performance suggesting the time-saving design winning (the performance of getting the P icon 802V) is executed, that is, the stocked time-saving winning information is cleared. Even in the case where the game is over, the performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.
As shown in Figure 1866, in the time saving state production setting process (S5102L), first, from the received variation pattern command, read the lottery result of this special symbol lottery (S5151L), whether the lottery result is time saving symbol winning is determined (S5152L). In the process of S5152L, if it is determined that the time saving pattern is elected (S5152L: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving stock flag 223mb is off (S5153L), and if it is determined to be off ( S5153L: Yes), set the time saving stocked flag 223mb to ON (S5154L), determine the effect mode of P icon acquisition to indicate the time saving pattern winning (S5155L), add 20 to the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma (S5156L), and the process ends.
Also, in the process of S5153L, if it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is not off (is on) (S5153L: No), the process of S5154L is skipped, the processes of S5155L and S5156L are executed, and this process exit. In addition, in the fifty-first control example, when the time-saving symbol is won, the effect mode of acquiring the P icon can be determined. may be configured to be able to determine the effect mode of acquiring the P icon in a part of . By configuring in this way, even when the P icon 802V is obtained, it is possible to create an event in which the time saving symbol has not been won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the time-saving symbol winning expectation when getting the P icon 802V to be higher than when the P icon 802V is not obtained, more specifically, the P icon 802V. It is preferable to determine the selection ratio of the performance mode of acquiring the P icon at the time of losing winning so that the time-saving symbol is won with a probability of 90% when the player wins.
In addition, as described above using FIG. 1853 (b), in a short period of time from the setting of the time saving state of 1 to the end (the period until the time saving 100 times ends in the first time saving state), the time saving The effect of getting the P icon 802V can be executed a plurality of times according to the number of symbol wins, and the number of winning icons P1 is increased according to the number of times of the effect of getting the P icon 802V. . Here, for example, in a state where not even one acquisition icon P1 is displayed, an effect of getting the P icon 802V is executed only when the time-saving symbol is won, and at least one acquisition icon P1 is displayed. In a state where the player has already won a time-saving symbol during a short period of time, an effect of getting the P-icon 802V may be executed in part of the lost winnings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the performance of getting the P icon 802V in a state where the time saving symbol is not won, and to increase the number of times of execution of the performance of getting the P icon 802V. Since this becomes possible, the production effect can be enhanced.

In the processing of S5152L, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not the time-saving pattern winning (S5152L), then it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a jackpot winning (S5157L), and it is determined that the jackpot is winning. If so (S5157L: Yes), it is determined whether the time saving stock flag 223mb is set to ON, that is, whether the acquisition icon P1 is displayed (S5158L). In the processing of S5158L, if it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the time saving symbol is not elected and the acquisition icon P1 is not displayed (S5158L: No), The effect mode for getting the V-icon 801V is determined (S5159L), the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S8002H5160L), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5158L, if it is determined that the time-saving stocked flag 223mb is on (S5158L: Yes), next, whether the jackpot election is "jackpot C54" (whether it is a time-saving jackpot) If it is determined (S5161L), and it is determined that it is a "jackpot C54" (S5161L: Yes), the P icon (acquisition icon P1) is used to indicate the jackpot winning (see FIG. 1855(a)). Decide (S5162L), set the time saving stocked flag 223mb to off (S5163L), clear the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma to 0 (S5160L), and finish this process.
In addition, in the processing of S5161L, if it is determined that it is not the "jackpot C54" (S5161L: No), that is, if it is determined that the jackpot won this time is a variable probability jackpot, an effect of combining the V icon and the P icon. The mode (see FIG. 1855(b)) is determined (S5164L), the time saving stocked flag 223mb is set to off (S5165L), the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S5160L), and this process ends. do.
As described above, in the production setting process during the time saving state (S5102L), the production mode (see FIG. 1853 (b)) corresponding to the time saving design winning in the time saving design lottery executed during the time saving state is determined. Then, it is possible to predict that the time-saving pattern has been won for the player, and if the jackpot is won during the time-saving state, and the production mode corresponding to the time-saving pattern is displayed (acquisition icon When P1 is displayed), it is possible to determine the production mode (see FIGS. 1855 (a) and (b)) indicating the jackpot winning using the acquisition icon P1, so it corresponds to the time saving symbol winning. It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the fact that the second time saving state based on the time saving symbol winning is not set in spite of the performance mode being displayed.

Furthermore, as the presentation mode indicating the winning of the jackpot using the winning icon P1, there are two presentation modes indicating the winning of the jackpot (see FIG. 1855(a)) and the presentation mode indicating the winning of the probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 1855(b)). , can be determined, and the timing at which the acquisition icon P1 is used is varied according to the determined performance mode, so at what timing the acquisition icon P1 is used when the variable performance corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is executed. Or you can make it easier to interest the player.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, when the winning icon P1 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the jackpot variation is executed, the winning icon is displayed during the jackpot variation period. Although it is configured to execute a variable performance in a performance mode using P1, it is not limited to this, and is configured to continuously display the acquisition icon P1 even when the big win game is started, and the big win is achieved. The winning icon P1 may be used in the jackpot game effect executed during the game. In this case, for example, by executing an effect using the win icon P1 as a jackpot game effect, it is notified that the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is the number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) advantageous to the player. Or, it is preferable to notify that there is prize winning information (jackpot reservation) corresponding to the jackpot winning in the special figure reservation that has already been acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the types of benefits notified to the player by the effect using the acquisition icon P1, and diversify the execution timing of the effect using the acquisition icon P1. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.
In the process of S5157L, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a jackpot winning (S5157L: No), the first time-shortening end effect setting process is executed (S5165L), and this process ends. In the first time saving end effect setting process (S5165L) executed in the process of S5165L, a process for setting the effect mode in the special symbol variation (special symbol final variation) where the time saving state ends is performed.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1867, the processing contents of the effect setting processing (S5165L) at the end of the first time reduction will be described. FIG. 1867 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the effect setting process (S5165L) at the end of the first time reduction. When the effect setting process at the end of the first time reduction (S5165L) is executed, first, whether the value of the counter 223da during time reduction is 1, that is, whether the special design fluctuation of this time is the special design final fluctuation of the time reduction state (S5181L), and when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is not 1 (S5181L: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5181L, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is 1 (S5181L: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving stock flag 223mb is on (S5182L), and it is on If it is determined that there is (S5182L: Yes), after the current time saving state is completed, the second time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning is set, so the time saving state is extended using the P icon. is determined (S5183). More specifically, according to the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma, the display mode attached to the plurality of walls kb1 to wall kb4 displayed as the time reduction extension suggestion effect is determined, and the number of wall icons to be destroyed is determined. and the number of times the obtained icon is used.
After that, the time saving stock flag 223mb is set to off (S5184L), the value of the time saving counter 223da is set to the value of the waiting time saving number counter 223ma (S5185L), and the value of the waiting time saving number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 ( S5186L), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is not on in the processing of S5182L (S5186L: No), that is, if the time saving state ends without winning the time saving pattern, this special symbol variation (time saving state Since the time saving state ends at the special symbol final variation), the production mode indicating the end of the time saving state is determined (S5187L), and this processing ends.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, unless the time saving symbol is won, the effect of getting the P icon 802V is not executed, and the winning icon is not displayed in the display area Dm70. The performance mode is not a time-saving extension suggestive performance, but a display mode corresponding to information on the game results (number of big hits, number of prize balls) during the period in which the time-saving state continues, and the end of the advantageous game state in which the time-saving state continues. is displayed.
In addition, without being limited to this, if the effect of getting the P icon 802V can be executed in a part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is lost, the time saving state is extended. Even if the condition to be won is not established (when the time saving winning information is not stocked), the acquisition icon may be displayed in the display area Dm70. In this case, after determining that the time saving stock flag 223mb is turned off in the process of S5182L (S5182L: No), the process of determining whether the acquisition icon is displayed is executed, and if the acquisition icon is not displayed While executing the processing of S5187L similar to the fifty-first control example, when it is determined that the acquisition icon is displayed, a time saving extension suggestion effect is executed, and the effect is that the time saving state ends. 1854(a), for example, the display screen shown in FIG. good.

By configuring in this way, even when the time saving winning information is not stocked, the time saving extension suggesting performance can be executed by the special pattern final variation in the time saving state, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. .
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, when the time-saving pattern is won during the time-saving state, the effect of getting the P icon 802V is always executed. In some cases, the effect of getting the P-icon 802V may not be executed. By configuring in this way, even if the acquisition icon is not displayed in the display area Dm70 at the time when the special symbol final variation in the time saving state is executed, the time saving state is extended (newly the second time saving Since the possibility of setting the state can be left, the player can expect the time saving state to continue (extend) until the time saving state ends and the normal state is set.
In the fifty-first control example described above, as described with reference to FIGS. 1853 to 1855, the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) executed during the first time saving state As a result, it is possible to execute a variable performance for causing the character 801 to win a V icon 801V corresponding to a big win in a special symbol lottery and a P icon 802V corresponding to a time-saving symbol lottery.
Then, in order to suggest that the time-saving pattern has been won multiple times during the first time-saving state, a plurality of P-icons 802V are configured to be stockable, and a plurality of winning icons P1 are arranged in correspondence with the stocked P-icons 802V. Display the production using the displayed acquisition icon P1 to a new time-saving state (second time-saving state) based on the stocked time-saving winning information (information acquired when the time-saving pattern is won (time-saving number of times)) On the other hand, a time-saving extension suggestion performance capable of informing the player of the set number of times of time-saving and a big win variation performance showing a big win winning by erasing the stocked time-saving winning information are configured to be executable.

That is, in the fifty-first control example, when the time saving pattern is won, the P icon 802V is acquired, and the production related to the acquired P icon 802V is erased (second By setting the time-saving state, it is erased by setting the time-saving state, and when the erasing condition (jackpot winning) is established, it is always executable when it is erased without setting the second time-saving state. It is configured so that the presence of time-saving winning information can be easily understood by a player.
On the other hand, as the big win variation performance executed in response to the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win, the variation performance including the performance of acquiring the P icon 802V may be executed. Well, for example, as a jackpot type set when winning a jackpot, a jackpot type (time-saving jackpot) in which the first time-saving state (electrical support state) is set, and a jackpot type in which the first time-saving state (electrical support state) is not set ( normal jackpot) and can be set, and in the case of winning the time-saving jackpot, the performance of acquiring both the V-icon 801V corresponding to the jackpot winning and the P-icon 802V corresponding to the time-saving pattern winning is executed. should be configured to
By configuring in this way, even if the time saving pattern is not won during the first time saving state, it is possible to provide the player with the effect of acquiring the P icon 802V, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. . In addition, since the time-saving winning information is cleared by the jackpot winning, even if an effect for obtaining the P icon 802V corresponding to the time-saving pattern winning is executed during the big win fluctuation, the player will be executed with a sense of incongruity. can be suppressed.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, the number of time reductions in the first time reduction state set based on the jackpot winning is unified to 100 times, and the number of time reductions set based on the time reduction symbol winning reaches 100 times. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, a game state advantageous to the player is set, but not limited to this, it is set based on the time-saving symbol winning. A different number of times of time saving may be settable as the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state.

Furthermore, the number of time saving states (first time saving state) after winning a jackpot can be set differently, and the number of time saving states (second time saving state) set after the jackpot game and the jackpot game are completed, When the second time-saving state is set by comparing the contents contained in the retained time-saving winning information (the number of times of the second time-saving state set after the end of the first time-saving state), and the second time-saving state is set from the case of winning the jackpot A game situation in which the game is advantageous to the player, or a game situation in which winning a jackpot is more advantageous to the player than when the second time saving state is set is specified, and the identification result , the display mode of the V-icon 801V or the P-icon 802V may be configured to be variable.
With such a configuration, the player can easily understand whether he should expect to win a big win or not to win a big win by checking the display mode of the V-icon 801V. can be done.
Also, in this case, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the display mode of the V icon 801V and the P icon 802V displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the first time saving state is randomly variably displayed. When the special symbol variation in which the time-saving symbol is won or the special symbol variation in which the jackpot is won is executed, the V icon 801V and the P icon 802V displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The display mode may be variably displayed to a display mode corresponding to the result of this special symbol lottery.
<Regarding the first modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1868 to 1872, a first modification of the fifty-first control example described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, as shown in FIG. An acquisition icon P1) is displayed so that the player can predict that the time-saving symbol has been won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, the number of acquisition icons P1 displayed in the display area Dm70 is increased according to the number of time-saving symbols won during the time-saving state. By making it possible for the player to predict the number of winning times of the time saving pattern according to the number of acquisition icons P1 displayed in the area Dm70, the number of time saving times of the second time saving state set after the time saving state is finished can be predicted. was
However, the time saving winning information (second time saving number of times in the second time saving state) that is stored (stocked) based on the time saving design winning in the special pattern lottery during the time saving state is a jackpot election before the time saving state ends. In this case, the second time saving state may not be set even though the acquisition icon P1 is displayed in the display area Dm70.
Therefore, in the fifty-first control example described above, when the jackpot is won while the acquisition icon P1 is displayed in the display area Dm70, that is, when the clear condition for clearing the stocked time-saving winning information is established. 2, the acquisition icon P1 displayed in the display area Dm70 is erased by making it possible to determine the production mode using the acquisition icon P1 as the production mode of the production for indicating that the clear condition is established. It was constructed so as to provide the player with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.
On the other hand, in the first modification of the fifty-first control example, a time saving state (second time saving state) based on the fact that the time saving pattern was won in the special symbol lottery during the time saving state is set. When it is determined (when the time saving extension condition is satisfied), it is different in that it is configured to be able to notify that the time saving pattern has been elected.

Specifically, if the state has acquired more special figure reservations than the number of remaining time reductions until the current time saving state ends, and there is no jackpot reservation in the special figure reservations that have already been acquired In addition, it is configured to be able to set a time-saving extension suggestion mode for showing the stocked time-saving winning information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second time saving state based on the winning of the time saving pattern is not set after the player is notified of the winning of the time saving pattern.
In addition, in the first modification of the fifty-first control example, unless the time saving extension condition is satisfied, it is configured not to suggest (notify) the player that the time saving pattern has been won, so the time saving pattern in the time saving state It is possible to make it difficult to predict the number of wins. Therefore, when the time saving extension suggestion mode is set and the number of time saving extension times (newly set time saving number of times in the second time saving state) is notified, it is possible to easily provide the player with an unexpected notification result. . In addition, the number of time-saving symbols won during the time-saving state is large (for example, 20 times), and a large number of time-saving times (for example, 400 times) can be set as the newly set second time-saving state. However, until the time-saving extension condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the situation, so even if the clear condition is satisfied, the player's willingness to play is significantly increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.
<Regarding the contents of the effect in the first modified example of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1868 and 1869, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fifty-first control example, as the contents of the characteristic effects, the time saving state ends. The content of the effect executed just before the action is performed will be explained. In addition, among the display elements displayed on the display screen described with reference to FIGS. The same reference numerals are given to the same display elements as the display elements, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Figure 1868 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the start screen of the time saving production suggestion mode production to be executed when the remaining time saving number of times in the first time saving state is less than the number of special figures 2 pending acquired, Figure 1868 (b) shows, as a time saving extension suggestion mode production, a display mode showing the number of time saving times to be extended (the number of time saving times in the second time saving state set after the first time saving state ends) is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example.

In FIG. 1868 (a), as a display mode indicating that the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state is 3 times, "remaining 3 times" is displayed in the display area Dm7, and the execution right of the acquired second special symbol In the display area Dm9 for indicating the number (special figure 2 reservation number), as a display mode indicating that the number of special figure 2 reservations is 4, the first special figure 2 reservation h1, the second special figure 2 reservation h2 , 3rd special figure 2 reservation h3, 4th special figure 2 reservation h4 are all displayed in black. In addition, each special figure 2 reservation displayed in the display area Dm9 indicates that the corresponding number of special figure 2 reservations are acquired when displayed in black, and is displayed in white In the case, it indicates that the corresponding number of special figure 2 reserves has not been obtained. That is, in the state where two special figures 2 suspension are acquired, the first special figure 2 suspension h1 corresponding to the first special figure 2 suspension and the second special figure corresponding to the second special figure 2 suspension FIG. 2 reservation h2 is displayed in black, the third special figure 2 reservation h3 corresponding to the third special figure 2 reservation, and the fourth special figure 2 reservation h4 corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reservation is configured to be displayed in white.
In other words, the state shown in FIG. 1868 (a) shows a state in which the number of special figures 2 pending (4 pieces) that has been acquired is more than the number of remaining time reductions in the first time saving state (3 times) . In this way, when the number of special figures 2 pending (4 pieces) that has been acquired is more than the number of times of the remaining time in the first time saving state (3 times), the main display area Dm suggests time saving extension Characters indicating entry into the mode are displayed, and a display mode is displayed in which a part of the coin 863a is protruding from the bag 863 . Then, as a guidance display mode for guiding the player in advance about the content of the effect to be executed during the time saving extension suggestion mode, in the sub display area Ds, "The time saving will be extended by the number of coins taken out of the bag! !” is displayed.
After that, during the variable production in which the time-saving extension suggestion mode production is executed, the action of the coin 863a jumping out of the bag 863 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An easily visible representation is displayed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1868(b), the number "+40" is attached to the coin 863a, and in the sub-display area Ds, a guidance display mode for guiding the effect result of the present time reduction suggestion mode effect "Time saving 40 times plus !!" is displayed, and in the display area Dm7 where the number of remaining time saving times in the time saving state is displayed, "Remaining 3 times" until the production result of the time saving extension suggestion mode production is displayed On the display, "43 remaining times" obtained by adding "+40", which is the effect result of the time-saving extension suggestion mode effect, is displayed. And the production result of the time saving extension suggesting mode production is continuously displayed until the current time saving state ends.
In addition, the display screen showing the effect result of the time saving extension suggestion mode effect shown in FIG. 1868(b) is displayed during the special symbol variation period when the remaining time saving number of times in the first time saving state is three times. That is, in the fifty-first control example described above, when the time saving state is extended, the previously set time saving state ends, and at the timing when the stocked time saving state is newly set, the extended time saving While the number of times (the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state to be newly set) was notified, in the first modification, before the end of the time saving state set earlier, stock It is configured to be able to notify the number of times of time saving set in the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) is set continuously, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of time saving times set for each time saving state. It can be made to think that it is configured to be able to set the number of time reductions rich in variations.
Furthermore, in the first modification of the fifty-first control example, when the number of remaining time reductions in the current time reduction state reaches a predetermined number, the time reduction extension suggestion mode effect is not executed, but the remaining time reduction in the current time reduction state Since it is configured so that the timing of executing the time reduction extension suggestion mode production is determined based on the number of times and the number of acquired special figures 2 pending, the result of the time reduction extension suggestion mode production is added. Variation can be given also to the number of times of shortening of working hours, and the directing effect can be enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1869(a) and FIG. 1869(b), the contents of the effect when informing the jackpot winning during the time saving extension suggesting mode effect will be described. As described above, in the first modification, when the number of remaining time reductions in the current time reduction state is less than the number of special figures 2 pending that have already been acquired, the execution conditions for the time reduction extension suggestion mode effect are established. Configure. And, by the display mode attached to the coin 863a displayed during the time saving extension suggestion mode production, the number of time saving times to be extended is configured to be able to be notified to the player.
Therefore, when the conditions for execution of the time saving extension suggestion mode effect are satisfied and the time saving pattern is not won (when there is no time saving stock), "+0" is displayed as the display mode attached to the coin 863a, and the time saving extension At the timing when the suggestion mode effect is executed, the player is notified that the condition for extending the time saving state is not satisfied.

In other words, depending on the number of acquired special figures 2 pending (upper limit of 4), the player is notified that the time saving pattern has not been won with the remaining time saving number of times until the current time saving state ends is 3 times. can do. Therefore, it is possible to motivate players to play games until the time-saving state ends while expecting to win time-saving symbols in the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the remaining number of times of time-saving. In this case, when the time-saving design is won during the remaining time-saving number of times, the display mode corresponding to the time-saving design winning is varied by changing the display mode of "+0" attached to the coin 863a during the time-saving design variation period. (for example, "+20") may be displayed.
Also, when determining the result of the time-saving extension suggestion mode effect, not only the number of time-saving patterns that have already been stocked, but also the winning information of the special figure 2 that has already been acquired, and the winning information that wins the time-saving pattern ( If there is a time saving design reservation), it may be configured to determine the production result of the time saving extension suggestion mode production including the look-ahead result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the number of time reductions in the newly set second time reduction state.
Here, when the production result (the display mode of "+0" attached to the coin 863a) indicating that the time saving pattern has not been won is displayed as the production result of the time saving extension suggestion mode production, the remaining number of time saving Since the player is informed in advance that the time-saving state will end if the time-saving symbol is not won within the time period, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered.
Therefore, in this first modification, if there is a jackpot hold in the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the time when the execution conditions for the time saving extension suggestion mode effect are satisfied, the number of time saving pattern winning times that are stocked Regardless, once the production result (display mode of "+0" attached to the coin 863a) indicating that the time saving pattern has not been won is displayed, and then the time saving extension suggestion mode production during the special pattern fluctuation to win the jackpot It is configured to be able to execute a reversal V performance for notifying a big win by varying the performance result of . By configuring in this way, even if the production result indicating that the time saving pattern has not been won is displayed as the production result of the time saving extension suggestion mode production, the player expects until the end of the time saving state. can be played while holding the

Fig. 1869 (a) and Fig. 1869 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen displayed when the reverse V effect is executed as the time saving extension suggestion mode effect, Fig. 1869 (a) Is a display screen (reversal V effect 1869(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the first half of the display screen (reversal V production effect result is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing .
As shown in FIG. 1869(a), when the reverse V effect is executed during the time saving extension suggestion mode effect, a display mode in which "+0" is attached to the coin 863a is displayed, and the secondary display area Ds , As a result of the production of the time saving extension suggesting mode production, the characters "I'm sorry that the time saving will not be extended" are displayed as a guidance display mode to guide that the time saving state will not be extended. In addition, if the time saving pattern winning is not stocked before the time saving state ends, the production result indicating that the time saving state does not extend as the production result of the time saving extension suggestion mode production is displayed. Even if the jackpot is won before the current time saving state ends, the time saving state is not extended based on the time saving stock, so even if the display screen shown in FIG. 1869 (a) is displayed, the player is misidentified. there is nothing to do.
After that, when the big hit fluctuation is started in the state where the effect result of the time saving extension suggestion mode effect is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 1869(b) is displayed. Specifically, the coin 863a displayed in the main display area Dm is reversed, and the display mode of "V" attached to the back side is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is a guidance display for indicating the winning of the jackpot. As a mode, characters of "congratulations on getting reverse V" are displayed. 1869(a) and FIG. 1869(b), the reversal V production shown using FIG. It shows a case where the winning information corresponding to 2 special figure 2 pending h2 is the winning information (jackpot pending) indicating the winning of the jackpot, and in FIG. is displayed in the display area Dm7.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fifty-first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1870, the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fifty-first control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. , and other configurations are the same.

FIG. 1870 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of RAM 223 of MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fifty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1870, the RAM 223 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fifty-first control example is the RAM 223 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1860). It is different in the point which added flag 223na during time saving, flag 223nb during 2nd time saving, and flag 223nc during suggestion mode, and others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The flag 223na during the first time saving is a flag for indicating that the first time saving state is set, and is set to ON when a state command for indicating that the first time saving state is set is received. (see S4404La in FIG. 1871), and is set to OFF when the normal state is set (see S4403La in FIG. 1871).
The setting status of this first time saving medium flag 223na is the execution of the time saving extension suggestion mode production in the time saving state production setting process (see S5102La in FIG. 1872) for setting the production mode of the variable production during the time saving state. It is referred to when determining (see S5151La in FIG. 1872).
The second time saving flag 223nb is a flag for indicating that the second time saving state is set, and is set to ON when a state command for indicating that the second time saving state is set is received. (see S4405La in FIG. 1871), and is set to OFF when the normal state is set (S4403La in FIG. 1871).

Although detailed description is omitted, by providing the second time saving flag 223nb, even if the same mode of production is executed in the first time saving state and the second time saving state, the currently set time saving state It is possible to easily distinguish the time saving type of.
Suggestion mode flag 223nc is a flag for indicating that the time saving extension suggestion mode production is being executed, and in the time saving state production setting process (see S5102La in FIG. 1872), execution of time saving extension suggestion mode production When the conditions are met and execution of the time saving extension suggestion mode effect is determined, it is set to ON (see S5157La). Then, in the production setting process during the time saving state (see S5102La in FIG. 1872), when determining whether it is necessary to determine the production mode corresponding to the time saving extension suggestion mode production as the production mode of the variable production during the time saving state Reference is made (S5152La in FIG. 1872). And t, is set to OFF when the end condition of the time saving extension suggestion mode production is satisfied (see S4403La, S4406La of Figure 1871).
<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the first modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1871 and 1872, the contents of control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fifty-first control example will be described. The contents of the various control processes executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example are the various controls executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example described above. Since it is the same as the content of the processing, the description thereof is omitted.
The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first modified example of the fifty-first control example is different from the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fifty-first control example. , Time saving state production setting processing (see S4305L in FIG. 1864) instead of time saving state production setting processing (see S4305La in FIG. 1871), production setting processing in time saving state (see S5102L in FIG. 1866) instead of production in time saving state The difference is that a setting process (see S5102La in FIG. 1872) is provided. Since the other processing contents are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 1871, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing (S4305La) are explained. FIG. 1871 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving state effect setting process (S4305La). In this time saving state effect setting process (S4305La), the time saving state effect setting process described above (see S4305L in FIG. 1864) is made to correspond to the time saving type included in the received state command Processing for setting various flags The difference is that the
Specifically, when the time saving state effect setting process (S4305La) is executed, first, the information stored in the subsidiary state setting area 223g is read to specify the current game state (S4401La). Then, it is determined whether the specified gaming state is a normal state (S4402La), and if it is determined that it is a normal state, that is, if it is determined that the time saving state has ended (S4402La: Yes), during the first time saving The flag 223na, the flag 223nb during the second time reduction, and the flag 223nc during the suggestion mode are set to OFF (S4403La), and this processing is terminated. In addition, in FIG. 1871, in the process of S4403La, the first time saving flag 223na, the second time saving flag 223nb, and the suggestion mode flag 223nc are set to OFF. Determine the setting status of flag 223na during 1st time saving, flag 223nb during 2nd time saving, and flag 223nc during suggestion mode, identify flags that are set to ON, and execute processing to set OFF for the identified flags be done.
On the other hand, in the process of S4402La, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S8002H4402La: No), the time saving type of the time saving state included in the received state command is the first time saving (first time saving state ) is determined (S4403H), and if it is determined that it is the first time saving (S4403H: Yes), the first time saving medium flag 223na is set to ON (S4404La), and then the above-described 51st control example The processing of S4404H and S4405H, which are the same as the time saving state production setting processing (see S4305L in FIG. 1864), is executed, and this processing ends.
Further, in the process of S4403H, if it is determined that the time saving type is not the first time saving (S4403H: No), then the second time saving flag 223nb is set to ON (S4405La), and the suggestion mode flag 223nc is turned on. It is set to OFF (S4406La), after that, the processing of S4401L, S4407H, and S4408H, which are the same as the time saving state effect setting processing of the fifty-first control example (see S4305L in FIG. 1864), is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1872, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5102a) in a time saving state are explained. FIG. 1872 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5102a) during the time saving state. In the production setting process (S5102a) during the time saving state, various processes for determining the production mode of the time saving extension suggestion mode production executed during the first time saving state are executed.
Specifically, it is determined whether the first time saving flag 223na is ON (S5151La), and if it is determined that it is ON (S5151La: Yes), it is determined whether the suggestion mode flag 223nc is ON. (S5152La). When it is determined that the suggesting mode flag 223nc is ON in the processing of S5152La, that is, when it is determined that the time saving extension suggesting mode is being produced (S5152La: Yes), next, the special symbol variation of this time is the jackpot variation. (S5101H), and if it is determined that it is a big hit change (S5101H: Yes), the production mode indicating the big hit is determined (S5102H), and the suggestion mode flag 223nc is set to OFF (S5166La ), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101H that there is no big hit variation (S5101H: No), this process ends.
Next, when it is determined that the suggestion mode flag 223nc is not ON in the process of S5152La (S5152La: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c2 is read (S5153La), and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S5154La), to determine whether the special figure 2 pending number is greater than the number of remaining time reductions, that is, the number of execution rights of the second special symbol that has already been acquired is greater than the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state. (S5155La), if it is determined to be large (S5155La: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the time reduction extension suggestion mode (time reduction extension suggestion mode production) is determined (S5156La), and the suggestion mode flag 223nc is set to on ( S5157La), the special figure 2 winning information (winning information corresponding to the second special symbol) stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5158La).
Then, in the read special figure 2 winning information, it is determined whether there is a hit hold (S5159La), and if it is determined that the hit hold exists (S5159La: Yes), the remaining time reduction number does not increase A presentation mode indicating that is determined (S5160La), and the process proceeds to S5161La. On the other hand, in the process of S5159La, if it is determined that there is no winning hold (S5159La: No), it is determined whether the value of the reduced standby times counter 223ma is greater than 0 (S5164La), and the reduced standby times counter 223ma is determined. A production mode for increasing the time reduction floor number corresponding to the value of is determined as the remaining time reduction number of times (S5165La), and the process proceeds to S5161La.

That is, when the conditions for execution of the time saving extension suggesting mode production are satisfied and the processing for determining the performance mode of the time saving extension suggesting mode production is executed, if there is a winning hold, the standby time saving number counter 223ma Regardless of the value, it is configured to execute a time saving extension suggesting mode effect indicating that the time saving state does not extend. By configuring in this way, even if the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is large and the winning is won, the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma, that is, the first time reduction state ends. Big hit winning can be notified without notifying (suggesting) the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state set after that. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to think that the time-saving symbol has been won wastefully, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the remaining time reduction number of times in the first time saving state, and when there is no hit reservation in the special figure 2 reservation, the time reduction is extended in a production mode based on the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma. Since the suggestion mode performance is executed, the second time saving state can be surely set after the number of times of time saving (number of times of extension) is reported in the time saving extension suggesting mode presentation.
In the processing of S5161La, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 1 (S5161La), and when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 1, that is, the special symbol variation of this time is the first time saving state If it is determined that it is the final change (S5161La: Yes), the value of the short standby time counter 223ma is set to the value of the short time counter 223da (S5162La), and the value of the short standby time counter 223ma is cleared to 0 ( S5163La), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5161La, when the value of the counter 223da during time saving is not 1, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation of this time is not the final variation of the first time saving state (S5161La: No), S5162La and S5163La This process is terminated by skipping the process of .
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, the first time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set. It is configured to be able to execute the determination of time-saving design winning in the special design lottery (time-saving design lottery), and if the result of the time-saving design lottery is determined to be time-saving design winning, time-saving winning information indicating time-saving design winning It is configured so that it can be held (stocked).

Then, when the first time-saving state ends (when the high-probability state of the normal pattern ends), the second time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, normal It is configured to be able to set the low probability state of the pattern, the state with electric sapo). By configuring in this way, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, it is possible to vary the length that the time saving state continues, so that the player can receive the second The lottery result of the special pattern lottery can be made interesting.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example, as the time saving winning information, the number of time saving times in the second time saving state can be stocked (held), and the time saving pattern is won multiple times during the first time saving state. In this case, it is configured to add the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state as time saving winning information. By configuring in this way, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state set after the end of the first time saving state can be varied according to the number of times of time saving symbols won during the first time saving state, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person in the game.
In addition, the form of the time saving winning information to be stocked (held) may be different from the form in the fifty-first control example. The type of each time saving pattern may be configured to be able to be stocked (held), and after the first time saving state is completed, the second time saving state corresponding to each time saving pattern winning may be set in order. For example, if you win twice in the time saving pattern in which the second time saving state with the number of time saving times of 20 is given during the first time saving state, after the first time saving state ends, the second time saving state with the number of time saving times of 20 times (Second time-saving state A) is set, and after the second time-saving state A ends, the second time-saving state (second time-saving state B) of 20 time-saving times is preferably set.
By configuring in this way, after the first time saving state is completed, since the second time saving state is set using only part of the time saving winning information that is stocked (holding), the first time saving state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how many times the time-saving pattern has been won.

As described above, in the fifty-first control example, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a normal jackpot type is set), after the jackpot game ends, the 1 specific setting (setting of electric sapo state by first time saving state) can be set, and second specific setting is possible when a time saving pattern is won in a time saving pattern lottery executed when a special pattern lottery does not win a jackpot. The setting (setting of the electric support state by the second time saving state) is configured to be configurable. In addition, even if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the special symbol reaches a specific number (900 times), the second specific setting (setting of the electric support state by the third time saving state) can be set. It consists of
In other words, in the fifty-first control example, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery and when the jackpot is not won (when the time-saving symbol is won, or when the ceiling privilege is given), the player is given It is configured to be able to execute control for setting an electric support state in which the degree of advantage is substantially the same. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to play a game different from the conventional type game aiming at winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Furthermore, in the fifty-first control example, when the setting condition of the second specific setting (time saving pattern winning etc.) is established in the state where the first specific setting is set (during the first time saving state), the setting It has a storage means (waiting time reduction counter 203ma) capable of storing information (time reduction winning information) indicating that the condition is satisfied, and when the first specific setting is completed, the information stored in the storage means The second specific setting can be set based on. That is, the period from when the setting condition of the second specific setting is established until the second specific setting is set can be extended when the first specific setting is set. With this configuration, the period during which the first specific setting is set is shortened regardless of when the setting condition for the second specific setting is established in the state where the first specific setting is set. can be suppressed.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, during the period in which the first specific setting is set (during the first time saving state), an effect that allows the player to predict that the setting condition of the second specific setting is satisfied (Effect of getting the P icon 802V) can be executed. By configuring in this way, after the first specific setting (first time saving state) is completed, whether the second specific setting (second time saving state) is set or not is set. Since it is possible to make the player predict during the period in which the player is present, the player can be interested in the performance executed during the first specific setting, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the fifty-first control example, when the setting condition of the second specific setting is met a plurality of times during the first specific setting, it is possible to predict that the setting condition of the second specific setting is met a plurality of times. Effect of displaying a plurality of icons P1) can be executed. When a plurality of setting conditions of the second specific setting are satisfied, after the first specific setting is completed, the setting conditions of the second specific setting that are satisfied a plurality of times can be collectively notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.
Further, in the first modification of the fifty-first control example, when the setting condition of the second specific setting (second time saving state) is satisfied during the first specific setting (during the first time saving state), the second When the setting of the specific setting is confirmed, that is, when it is determined that the setting condition of the second specific setting is not cleared by the remaining special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the first specific It is configured to be able to notify that the second specific setting is set before the setting is completed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify that the second specific setting is set without executing an effect indicating that the first specific setting is finished, so the second specific setting is set. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it appear that the length of the period in which the first specific setting is set (the period in which the first time saving state is set) is extended.
In addition, in the first modification of the fifty-first control example, the extension suggestive effect (time reduction extension suggestive mode effect) is executed only when it is notified that the second specific setting is set. You may comprise so that a shortening extension suggestion mode production|presentation may be performed during the setting period of 1st specific setting, without restricting to . In this case, for example, as the remaining period information (remaining time reduction number of times) until the end of the first specific setting, remaining period information corresponding to a value smaller than the internally set value (time reduction counter 203h value) Displayed on the display screen, and when the value indicated by the remaining period information displayed on the display screen is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 1 time remaining), a time-saving extension suggestion mode effect is executed and displayed on the display screen. It is preferable to configure so that the remaining period information that has not been displayed is newly displayed.

By configuring in this way, during the period in which the first specific setting is set, even when the setting conditions of the second specific setting are not satisfied, it is possible to execute the time reduction extension suggestion mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting from the 1st specific setting to the 2nd specific setting. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to show that the length of the period in which the first specific setting is set (the period in which the first time saving state is set) is extended.
Moreover, in the 1st modification of the 51st example of control mentioned above, it comprises so that the frequency|count of time saving corresponding to a 2nd time saving state may be displayed before a 2nd time saving state is set. In other words, the timing of switching the game state and the timing of displaying the game information regarding the game state after the switching are made different. In other words, when the game state is switched, the timing for switching the game state is different from the timing for switching the display mode corresponding to the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the game state is switched.
<52nd control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1875 to 1892. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example described above, can execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation specification). It consists of It has a game board 13 (see FIG. 258) having the same structure as the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example described above.
Then, the variable state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), the first time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), and the second time saving state (special design of When the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed in the state where any game state is set (low probability state, low probability state of normal symbols, state with electric sapo) is other than jackpot winning , Time-saving design winning determination (time-saving design lottery) can be executed, and similarly to pachinko machine 10 in the 51st control example described above, time-saving winning information based on time-saving design winning is It is configured to be able to be held (stocked) until the time saving state, second time saving state) ends.

In addition, if the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning or other than a time-saving pattern winning, it is configured to be able to execute a judgment of a small winning lottery (small winning lottery), and a probability variable state, a time-saving state ( If a small hit is won during the first time-saving state, second time-saving state), the end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the electric support state (probability variable state, time-saving state) is established, and the non-electric support state is configured to be set.
A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 1878, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. A lottery is configured to be executable, and only when a second variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as a game state, the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed. , and when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery, the second probability variable state is not set after the big win game ends.
That is, in the fifty-second control example, in order to execute the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player, first, the probability variable state (special symbol high probability state) is obtained by winning the probability variable jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. , high-probability state of normal patterns), and the high-probability state of normal patterns is shifted to the low-probability state of normal patterns by winning a small prize in the first special pattern lottery executed during the variable probability state. It is necessary to set the second probability variable state by
With this configuration, it is possible to make the player who is going to play an advantageous game interested in the lottery result other than the big win as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Interest in games can be improved.

Furthermore, in this 52nd control example, when the time saving winning information is stocked at the time when the small hit is won during the variable probability state, immediately after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, the second 3 probability variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design, with electric sapo) will be set. That is, in the special symbol lottery executed during the probability variation state, if the small hit is elected before the time saving symbol is elected, the second probability variation state will be set immediately after the small hit is elected, but the probability variation In a special pattern lottery executed during the state, when a small prize is won after winning a time-saving pattern, the third probability variable state is set after the small prize is won, making it difficult to set the second probability variable state.
By constructing in this way, when the special symbol lottery that results in the lottery result other than the big win win is executed, the order of the time-saving symbol win and the small win win can also make the player interested. .
In addition, in the 52nd control example, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the third variable probability state, when the time saving pattern is won, the remaining time saving number of times without stocking the time saving winning information based on the time saving pattern winning can be added. In other words, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the third variable state, the time saving end condition is established, and after the electric support state is ended, the time saving state (second time saving state) It is configured so that it will not be set.
In other words, when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, if the special symbol lottery with the lottery result being a small hit is executed twice before the high probability state of the special symbol ends, , is configured to shift to the second probability variable state.

<Regarding the effect content in the fifty-second control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 1873 to 1875, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example determines the degree of advantage based on the result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state). It is configured to be able to shift to a different game state, and even in the variable performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the performance contents of the variable performance executed during the probability variable state are given characteristics. there is
First, with reference to FIG. 1873(a), description will be given of the effect contents when the variable probability state is set. FIG. 1873(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the variable probability state is set. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 52nd control example, the period during which the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues is the longest until the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times. It consists of More specifically, the high probability state of the special design is 200 times (200 times of ST), and the high probability state of the normal design is 200 times (200 times of time reduction).
The diagram shown in FIG. 1873 (a) shows a state in which the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are being executed, and the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the variable probability state is "remaining 150 times. ” is displayed in the display area Dm7. In the main display area Dm, characters of "Lucky Mode" are displayed as a display mode for indicating that the current gaming state is the variable probability state. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the game content during the variable probability state (during the lucky mode), the characters "Aim for a big win within the remaining period" and "There is a better mode! !” is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp in an easy-to-understand manner that the duration of the variable probability state is finite. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the variable probability state is not the most advantageous game state.
In addition, in the fifty-second control example, as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the same configuration as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described ninth control example (see FIG. 258) is used. , When the normal pattern high probability state (state with electric sapo) is set, the right-handed game is performed rather than the left-handed game and the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64. Since it is structured so that it is easier to efficiently acquire the right to execute the first special symbol lottery by entering the game ball into the right first ball entrance 1640 accompanied by the electric accessory 1640a, it is usually When the high-probability state of the pattern (state with electric sapo) is set, the guidance display area Dm4 displays "Right-handed" as a display mode for guiding the right-handed game.

As is clear from the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 258, when a right-handed game is played, some of the game balls that flow down the right side area enter the second ball entrance 640. Since the right side area of the game board 13 is configured, when a right-handed game is performed in a state in which a normal symbol high probability state (state with an electric sapo) is set, a second special symbol lottery is also executed. (See FIG. 1873(a)). However, as with the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery executed in a state where the normal symbol high probability state (state with electric sapo) is set takes a long time (for example, 3 minutes) special symbol variation is executed, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed.
In addition, when the small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol variation being executed at the timing when the special symbol indicating the small winning is stopped and displayed is forcibly changed in a manner indicating the failure. It is configured to execute a process to stop display. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to stop and display the result of the second special symbol lottery in which the special symbol variation is executed for a long time.
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example is configured so that the probability of winning a small win when the first special symbol lottery is executed is 1/50, and the small winning game executed when a small win is won is performed. The small winning variable winning device 1065 is controlled to open, and the open/close door 1065b is changed from the closed state to the open state, thereby making it easier for the game ball to enter the small winning winning opening 1065a. ), and 15 prize balls are paid out based on the entry of game balls into the small winning prize opening 1065a.
Therefore, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, even if the big hit is not won, the prize ball can be obtained by winning the small hit with a probability of 1/50, so the right-handed game is performed. It is possible to suppress a large decrease in the number of prize balls already acquired while playing.

In addition, instead of the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, the probability of winning a small hit by the first special symbol lottery is set to a high probability (for example, 1/2), and executed when a small win is won. The degree of decrease in the number of won prize balls during the right-handed game is controlled by the pachinko in the fifty-second control example. Although it is the same as the machine 10, it may be constructed so as to improve the probability of executing a small winning game.
By configuring in this way, the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the right-handed game is stopped and displayed, that is, the second special symbol variation is executed once and then stopped and displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which a small prize is not won even once in a plurality of first special symbol lotteries executed during the fluctuation period up to.
Then, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable state, as shown in FIG. A small winning suggestive effect is executed in a falling effect mode, and in the sub display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the effect content of the small winning suggestive effect, "A treasure box has fallen! What is the content? ” is displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the effect result of the small winning suggestion effect is displayed by the contents of the treasure box 810.例文帳に追加
In this 52nd control example, the effect mode (effect result) of the small hit suggestion effect executed during the variable probability state is the presence or absence of the time saving stock (whether or not the time saving information is held based on the time saving pattern winning), and , can be determined by making it different according to the contents of the time saving winning information stocked.

Specifically, when the time reduction stock is not performed in the state where the small winning suggestive effect is executed, the small winning suggestive effect is executed in the effect mode shown in FIG. 1874(a). Figure 1874 (a) is displayed in a small hit suggestion production of the production mode indicating that the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set based on the small hit winning and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen.
As shown in FIG. 1874 (a), when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the small winning, if there is no time-saving stock, the normal symbol is displayed based on this small winning. As an effect mode indicating that the high probability state is terminated and the second variable probability state is set, a display mode of "Enter super lucky mode!" is displayed as the content 810a of the treasure box 810. In addition, since FIG. 1874(a) shows a state in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the small display area Dm1 in which the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed indicates that a small hit has been won. In the small display area Dm2 where the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode “341” indicating that the The third symbol is stopped and displayed in mode "447". Then, in the sub display area Ds, "Congratulations on the mode promotion!" characters are displayed.
Also, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the small hit winning, if the time saving winning information is already held (if there is a short working time stock), based on this small winning , Probability state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) to 3rd probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design, with electric sapo) A small hit suggestion effect is executed in a manner.
FIG. 1874(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the small hit suggestion effect in the case where the third variable probability state is set based on the small win winning. As shown in FIG. 1874 (b), when the third probability variation state is set, in addition to the remaining ST number of times shown in the display area Dm7 (remaining variation number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol continues), the display area Dm7a displays the number of remaining time reductions (the number of remaining fluctuations in which the state with the electric sapo continues). In other words, during the probability variable state, the remaining ST number and the remaining short time number are the same value, and by displaying only one of the remaining number of times, the remaining period until the game state shifts to the player Since it can be easily grasped, as shown in FIG. 1874(a), only the number of remaining STs is displayed in the display area Dm7.

On the other hand, when the third probability variable state is set, regardless of the number of remaining STs, the remaining number of times of the electric sapo state (remaining time reduction number of times) is set to the value of the number of time reduction symbol winning times x 20 times. Therefore, the number of remaining STs and the number of remaining short working hours are different. And, by setting the third probability variable state, when the remaining short time number is less than the remaining ST number, as shown in FIG. 1874 (b), the remaining short time number is less than the remaining ST number A small hit suggestion production is executed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1874(b), the display mode of "warp" is displayed as the content 810a of the treasure box 810, and the number of remaining short time is displayed below the display area Dm7 where the remaining ST number is displayed. A display area Dm7a is formed to display "40 times remaining until super lucky", and in the sub-display area Ds, a guide for guiding a game method for shifting from the third probability variable state to the second probability variable state. As a display mode, the characters "May be promoted to mode by completing 40 times" are displayed.
In this way, the time-saving winning information is already stocked at the time when the small hit is won during the probability-variable state, and even if the probability-variable state shifts to the third probability-variable state, based on the stocked time-saving winning information If the duration of the state with electric sapo in the low probability state of the normal symbol set by (remaining time short number of times) is less than the remaining ST number of times, the special symbol variation for the remaining time short number of times is executed , The remaining remaining ST period can be played in the second probability variable state.
In addition, in the 52nd control example, when the time-saving design is won in the first special design lottery executed during the third probability variation, the special design variation indicating the time-saving design winning is stopped without holding the time-saving winning information. Based on the display, the number of remaining time reductions is increased.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1875 (a), as a production mode of the small hit suggestion production, the contents 810a of the treasure box 810 include special symbols required until the super lucky mode (second probability variable state) is set. “+18” is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of lotteries (number of remaining time reductions) has increased, and the number of time reductions (remaining 20 times) is displayed (see FIG. 1875(a)).
Then, in the sub display area Ds, a second probability variable state that is the most advantageous game state for the player (a guidance display mode for indicating that it is difficult to set the super lucky mode is displayed. ' is displayed, and the character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm in a depressed action as a result of the current lottery.
Then, when the second probability change state is set, as shown in FIG. 1875 (b), the display mode of the "super lucky mode" for indicating that the current is the second probability change state is displayed in the main display area Dm , and the remaining period (remaining number of STs) until the end of the second variable probability state is displayed in the display area Dm7 (remaining 100 times in the figure). Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "If you win a big win now, the super lucky mode will loop" are displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the player of the degree of advantage of the super lucky mode.
It should be noted that during this second probability variation state, it becomes easier to determine a short time variation time as the variation time of the second special symbol variation for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery, and so that it will be in an electric sapo no state. Therefore, it is the most advantageous game method for the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game and execute the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in the display area Dm4, "Right-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the player to the right-handed game. In addition, as described above, during the second probability variable state, there is no electric sapo state, so the display mode "-" indicating that the first special symbol lottery is not executed is displayed in the small display area Dm1. In the display area Dm2, a display mode "arrow" indicating that the second special symbol is changing is displayed.

<Regarding the game state transition in the fifty-second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1876, the game state transition in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-second control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, the time-reduction symbol lottery can be executed in the first special symbol lottery executed in the variable probability state, the third variable probability state, the first time-reduction state, and the second time-reduction state. there is In addition, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed only in the second variable probability state, and the special symbol lottery is executed in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, the second probability variable state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.
First, when the normal state is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and when the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/300, the variable probability state is set at a rate of 70%, The first time saving state is set at a rate of 30%. Then, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, in addition to the big winning lottery, the time saving symbol lottery (1/20) and the small winning lottery (1/50) are executed, and the time saving symbol is executed during the probability variable state. When winning, time-saving winning information is stocked until the high-probability state of normal symbols in the variable probability state ends. Moreover, when a small hit is won, the high probability state of normal symbols in the variable probability state ends.
When the high probability state of the normal pattern in the probability variable state is completed based on the small winning winning, it is determined whether the time saving winning information is stocked or not, and if the time saving winning information is not stocked, the state is changed to the second probability changing state. Then, the game shifts to an advantageous game in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. On the other hand, when the time-saving winning information is stocked, the state shifts to the third probability variable state. This third definite variable state is a game state in which a high probability state of special symbols and an electric sapo state in a low probability state of normal symbols are set, and a right-handed game similar to the definite variable state is executed.
When the time saving pattern is won during the third probability variable state, the number of remaining time saving times is immediately added without stocking the time saving winning information. Therefore, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the third probability variable state and the electric support state is terminated, the time saving winning information is not stocked, and the second probability variable state can be made easier to transition to.

<Electrical Configuration in the 52nd Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1877 to 1881, the details of the electrical configuration in the fifty-second control example will be described. In contrast to the fifty-first control example described above, the fifty-second control example has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that part of the configuration of It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifty-first control example described above will be omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 1877, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1877 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-second control example. The ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 52nd control example replaces the ROM 202 (see FIG. 1857(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 51st control example with the first winning random number table 202ma. The table 202na is provided with a variation pattern selection table 202nb instead of the variation pattern selection table 202jb, a jackpot type selection table 202nd instead of the jackpot type selection table 202md, and a time reduction random number table 202nf instead of the time reduction random number table 202mf, Furthermore, it is different in that a small hit random number table 202ng is newly provided.
The first winning random number table 202na, like the first winning random number table 202ma, is a data table referred to when determining whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. This first winning random number table 202na is the above-described first winning random number table 202ma (see FIG. 1858(a)), the jackpot judgment value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) in the high probability state of the special symbol. They are different in that they are different.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1879, the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202na will be specifically described. FIG. 1879(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202na. As shown in FIG. 1879(a), the first per random number table 202na is associated with the probability state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the special symbol), and the first per random number obtained The range in which the value of the counter C1 is determined to be a big hit is defined to be different, and for the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "0 to 2". On the other hand, the big hit determination value is defined, and for the high probability state of the special symbol, the big hit determination value is defined for the range of "0 to 5" of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired.

In other words, the range that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 can take is 900 from "0 to 899", and the range that is judged to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is three from "0 to 2". Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/300 (3/900) in the low probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the high probability state of special symbols, the range determined to be a big hit is 6 from "0 to 5", so in the high probability state of special symbols, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/150 ( 6/900).
In this way, by varying the probability of winning the jackpot when the special symbol lottery is executed according to the probability state of the special symbols, the game state in which the player is likely to win the jackpot (the high probability state of the special symbols is The game can be motivated to play with the aim of transitioning to the set game state). In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, the same data table (first winning random number table 202na) is used both when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed by referring to it, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of which special symbol lottery is executed. A different data table may be referred to in the 2 special symbol lottery to determine whether a big hit is won, and it is more difficult to perform in the normal state than in the 1st special symbol lottery, which is easier to perform in the normal state. The contents of the first winning random number table 202na may be defined so that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to win the jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbols.
By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery using the second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) acquired during the time saving state that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery is performed during the normal state. When executed, for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state while the special figure 2 hold is acquired, the jackpot is won more than the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. Since the easy second special symbol lottery can be executed, even for the player who has finished the time-saving state even though the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, has been set. It is possible to provide a privilege (execution of the second special symbol lottery that makes it easier to win a big hit than the first special symbol lottery). In addition, in order to end the time saving state with more special figure 2 reservations acquired, the player is motivated to play a game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservations until just before the time saving state ends. can be done.
The variation pattern selection table 202nb is a data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, similar to the variation pattern table 202kd (see FIG. 265) in the ninth control example described above, and is set. Variation patterns of different variation times are defined according to the current game state, the special symbol type in which the special symbol lottery is executed, the special symbol lottery result, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, this variation pattern selection table 202nd is referred to during normal table 202nd1, probability variable state, third probability variable state, first time saving state, second time saving state referred to during normal state It has a support table 202nd2 and a second probability variation table 202nd2 that is referred to during the second probability variation state, and the data table corresponding to the set game state is read and referred to when selecting a variation pattern. be done.
Here, as for the contents of the variation pattern defined in each data table, as in the ninth control example described above, the result of the special symbol lottery is a win (big win, small win, time saving symbol), so that a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected. In addition, a relatively short variation time (1 second to 90 seconds) is defined for the special symbol type for which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed in each game state, and the special symbol type for which the special symbol lottery is not mainly executed. , a relatively long variation time (300 to 600 seconds) is defined.
With this configuration, even if both special symbol lotteries are executed in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in parallel, Since the period required to end one special symbol lottery can be varied, the special symbol types of the special symbol lottery mainly executed in each game state can be varied.
The jackpot type selection table 202nd is, like the jackpot type selection table 202md (see FIG. 1859(a)) described above, a data table that is referenced when selecting the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. is.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202nd will be described with reference to FIG. 1880(a). Drawing 1880 (a) is a figure showing typically the contents of big hit classification selection table 202nd. As shown in FIG. 1880(a), the jackpot type selection table 202nd determines the jackpot type by referring to different data tables according to the type of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) in which the jackpot is won. As such, the special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the special figure 2 jackpot table that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery It has a table 202nd2.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1880(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1 will be described. FIG. 1880(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1. As shown in FIG. 1880 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot table 202nd1 has four jackpot types (jackpot A55, jackpot B55, jackpot C55, jackpot D55) is defined.
Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", "jackpot A55" is set, and when the value is in the range of "20 to 69", "jackpot B55" is set to "70 A “jackpot C55” is defined for the range of “~79”, and a “jackpot D55” is defined for the range “80 to 99”.
The jackpot type "jackpot A55" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "200" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 20 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A55" (0 to 19). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot A55" is 20% (20/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot B55" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "200" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B55" is 50 (20 to 69). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot B55" is 50% (50/100).
The jackpot type “jackpot C55” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the time-saving jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C55" is 10 (70 to 79). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot C55" is 10% (10/100).
The jackpot type "jackpot D55" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the time-saving jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value.
Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot D55" is 20 (80 to 99). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot D55" is 20% (20/100).
As described above, in the fifty-second control example, when the jackpot type corresponding to the variable probability jackpot is set, the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i are set to "200". That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed 200 times after the variable probability state is set, the end condition of the variable probability state is established. Here, in the fifty-second control example, since it is defined that the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/150, the special 200 times executed during the variable state The probability of not winning a jackpot in the pattern lottery is about 26%.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, even if the variable probability state is set, there is a probability of not winning the jackpot until the high probability state of the special symbol ends, about 26%. To make a player who plays a game in a variable probability state willingly play a game aiming at winning a jackpot.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1880(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2 will be described. FIG. 1880(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2. As shown in Figure 1880 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2 is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained, and two types of jackpot types (jackpot A55, jackpot B55) are defined. ing.
Specifically, "jackpot A55" is defined for the range of "0 to 49" and "jackpot B55" for the range of "50 to 99" for the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. ing.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A55" (0 to 49). When the jackpot is won in the 2 special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining the "jackpot A55" is 50% (50/100).

In addition, among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B55" is 50 (50 to 99). , When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining the "jackpot B55" is 50% (50/100).
Furthermore, as shown in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202nd2, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the jackpot A55 and jackpot B55 are selected, the value of the time saving counter 203h is changed to "0". It is defined that "200" is set to the value of the counter 203i.
That is, when the probability variable jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. As described above, in the fifty-second control example, since the second variable probability state is the most advantageous game state for the player, the second special symbol lottery that can set the second variable probability state after the jackpot game ends The special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot to be selected is made different between when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. , When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot is selected at a rate of 70%, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot is selected at a rate of 100%. is doing. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in that a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game.

The technical idea (V winning technique) for changing the selection ratio of the probability variable jackpot according to the type of the special symbol lottery to be executed is the same as the first control example described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.
That is, in the fifty-first control example, the jackpot A, which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, is determined in the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery rather than in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the rate of (execution) is high. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery can be a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, so the game state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed. A game state in which a second special symbol lottery is mainly executed (a time saving state, a variable probability state) is advantageous to a player in that a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. state. In addition, the time-saving state is set to a low probability state of special symbols, and the variable state is set to a high probability state of special symbols, so the probability of winning a jackpot in one special symbol lottery is higher than the time-saving state. is higher in the variable state. Therefore, between the time-saving state and the variable probability state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the variable probability state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in which the big win is likely to be won becomes a game state more advantageous to the player.
In addition, in the fifty-first control example, as shown in FIGS. 1859(b) and (c), even when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability varies when the jackpot is won. Although the ratio of determining the jackpot (the ratio of determining the time-saving jackpot) is configured to be the same, it is not limited to this, for example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the second It may be constructed so that the probability variable jackpot is more likely to be determined when the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery than when the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, or the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery. It may be configured so that the probability variable big win is more likely to be determined in the case of winning than in the case of winning the big win in the second special symbol lottery.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the ratio of setting the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game according to the special symbol type that has been won, so that the special symbol lottery is executed for the special symbol type. The game is aimed at shifting to a game state in which the type of special symbol lottery to be mainly executed is different in order to make the player more interested and to execute the special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to make a person willingly play a game.

Further, in the fifty-first control example, as shown in FIGS. 1859(b) and (c), when the jackpot type (jackpot A54, jackpot B54) for which the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is determined, Regardless of the determined jackpot type, the same value (10000) is configured to be set in the time reduction number counter 203h and the probability variable counter 203i, but not limited to this, the jackpot type corresponding to the probability variable jackpot However, according to the determined jackpot type, different values may be set to the time reduction counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203i.
By configuring in this way, even if the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the end condition (probability variable end condition) for ending the set probability variable state can be changed according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the length of the period during which the variable probability state continues.
Further, in the fifty-first control example, as shown in FIGS. 1859(b) and (c), when the jackpot type (jackpot C54) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends is determined, the same value (100) is configured to be set in the time-saving number counter 203h, but without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of jackpot types corresponding to the time-saving jackpot are provided, and even if it is a jackpot type corresponding to the time-saving jackpot , According to the determined jackpot type, it may be configured to set a different value to the time-saving counter 203h.
By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the set time saving state can be changed according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the length of the period during which the time saving state continues.

In addition, in the fifty-first control example, since it is configured to be able to execute the time-saving design lottery in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, with respect to the length of the period in which the time-saving state continues In addition to making the player more interested in executing more the second special symbol lottery, which makes it easier for the player to determine the kind of the big win (jackpot A54) more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery, when winning the big win, the time-saving symbol lottery is won. It is also possible to increase interest in increasing the number of times. In other words, even for players who did not win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving pattern lottery result is time saving pattern winning. Since it is possible to make the user expect that the number of times of occurrence is larger, it is possible to make the user more interested in the length of the period during which the time saving state (first time saving state) continues.
The time-saving winning random number table 202nf is a data table referred to when determining whether or not the time-saving design is won in the time-saving design lottery executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the big winning (loss). Here, with reference to Drawing 1879 (b), the contents of random number table 202nf per time saving are explained. Drawing 1879 (b) is a figure showing typically the contents of random number table 202nf per time saving.
As shown in FIG. 1879 (b), the random number table 202nf per time reduction is determined for the random number table 202mf per time reduction (see FIG. 1858 (b)) in the 51st control example described above. The special symbol type and the game state in which the determination of time-saving symbol winning is executed are made different.
That is, in the time saving random number table 202nf, the special symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the set game states are "probability variable state", "first time saving state", and "second time saving". State", "third probability variable state", it is defined that the determination of the time-saving symbol winning is executed.

Specifically, the special symbol type is special figure 1 (first special symbol), and the game state that is set is "variable probability state", "first time saving state", "second time saving state", "second The value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the case of "3 probability variable state" is defined as the value determined as the time-saving symbol winning in the range of "100 to 144".
Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first random number counter C1, 45 (100 to 144) random numbers (counter values) are associated with "time-saving symbol winning". Therefore, the probability of winning the time saving symbol in the first special symbol lottery executed during the "probability change state", "first time saving state", "second time saving state", and "third time saving state" is 1/20 (45/ 900).
The small hit random number table 202ng is a data table referred to when judging the small hit winning in the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (Y8003 in FIG. 1882: No) and other than the time-saving winning (time-saving design winning) (of FIG. 1884) Y8301M: No) small hit winning determination is executed, and the small hit random number table 202ng is referred to (see Y8302M in FIG. 1884).
Here, the contents of the small winning random number table 202ng will be described with reference to FIG. 1879(c). Figure 1879 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number table 202ng. As shown in FIG. 1879(c), the small hit random number table 202ng defines the value of the first hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit in accordance with the special symbol type.

Specifically, the special symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined as a value corresponding to the small winning in the range of "200 to 217". there is On the other hand, the special symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value corresponding to the small hit winning is not defined.
Since the possible values (range) of the first per random number counter C1 are 900 of "0 to 899", the probability of winning a small prize by the first special symbol lottery is 1/50 (18/900). 2 There is no possibility of winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery.
Although the details will be described later, in this 52nd control example, the winning of a small hit is the end condition (support end condition) for ending the electric support state of the normal symbol high probability state and the normal symbol low probability state. It is configured to be Therefore, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the third probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, state with electric sapo) 1 When a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, the support end condition is established, and the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the first time saving state and the second time saving When a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the state, a support end condition is established, and a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set.
In other words, the state in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the third probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols, state with electric sapo) is set If you win a small hit, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the currently set game state is set, and the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state and the second time saving state When winning by winning, a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the currently set game state is set. By constructing in this way, by predicting the set game state, the first special symbol lottery can be executed while changing the desired lottery result, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-second control example, the configuration is such that the small winning lottery is executed for the first special symbol. good.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1879 (a), (b), (c), in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, determination of jackpot winning in special symbol lottery, determination of time-saving symbol winning, and small winning The same value of the first winning random number counter C1, that is, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained at the timing of obtaining the execution opportunity of the executed special symbol lottery is used for the determination of the big hit. The value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be winning, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be time-saving symbol winning, and the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be small winning are configured differently.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a big hit winning, a short working time design winning and a small winning winning from overlapping as a lottery result of one special symbol lottery. In addition, without being limited to this, the type of random number counter used to determine the jackpot winning, the type of the random number counter used to determine the time-saving design winning (time-saving design lottery), and the random number counter used to determine the small winning If at least part of the type is different, and the special pattern lottery is executed, the jackpot winning judgment (jackpot lottery) is executed first, and if the jackpot lottery does not win the jackpot lottery, the time-saving pattern winning (time saving pattern lottery) is executed, and when the time saving pattern lottery does not win the time saving pattern lottery, a small winning lottery may be executed. Even in this case, only when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the big win (loss), it is possible to execute the time-saving symbol lottery or the small lottery. In addition, since different random number counter values are used for the jackpot lottery, the time-saving pattern lottery, and the small lottery, the result of the special symbol lottery is lower than when a plurality of lotteries are executed using one random number counter value. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the value of the time-saving counter acquired this time based on (the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the time-saving pattern lottery, and the result of the small lottery).
In addition, since different random number counter values are used for the big win lottery, the time saving pattern lottery, and the small winning lottery, the range that the value of the random number counter used in the big win lottery can take and the random number used in the time saving pattern lottery It is possible to make the possible range of the counter value different from the possible range of the random number counter value used in the small winning lottery. Therefore, it is possible to easily define the jackpot winning probability, the time-saving symbol winning probability, and the small winning winning probability in more detail.

Furthermore, in this 52nd control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is configured to perform determination in the order of jackpot winning determination, time-saving symbol winning determination, and small winning determination, but it is not limited to this. , After the big hit winning determination, it may be configured to execute the small winning winning determination. Moreover, according to the type (special design type) of the executed special design lottery, the order of various winning determinations may be varied.
Returning to FIG. 1878, the description continues. FIG. 1878 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-second control example. As shown in FIG. 1878, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-second control example is different from the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example (see FIG. The special figure 1 variable time timer 203na, the special figure 2 variation time timer 203nb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203nc, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203nd used when executing the control of the simultaneous variation specification, It is different in that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ne, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203nf, and the time saving winning flag 203ng are added, and the others are the same. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
In addition, the special figure 1 variable time timer 203na added in the 52nd control example, the special figure 2 variable time timer 203nb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203nc, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203nd, and the special figure 1 The fluctuation stop flag 203ne and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203nf are the features of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described ninth control example that is executing the control of the simultaneous fluctuation specifications as in the fifty-first control example. Figure 1 variable time timer 203ka, special figure 2 variable time timer 203kb, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc, special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203 kf, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203na and special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203nb are timers for timing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended according to the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203na and the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203nb.

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030nc is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.
Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203nd is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the variation time of special figure 2, and stops updating (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.
The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ne is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ne is set to ON when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped. And, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ne is on during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, it is set to off. Thereby, it is possible to forcibly stop the first special symbol in accordance with the timing when the big hit variation of the second special symbol stops.
The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203nf is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203nf is set to ON when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol or the small hit fluctuation is stopped. And, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203nf is on during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to off. Thereby, it is possible to forcibly stop the second special symbol in accordance with the timing when the big winning variation or the small winning variation of the first special symbol stops.

The time-saving winning flag 203ng is a flag indicating a state in which a time-saving state (second time-saving state) can be set based on the time-saving design winning in the special symbol lottery. It is set to ON in the case of the 2 o'clock reduction state (the third probability variable state), ie, in the case of the game state in which the number of times of the time reduction can be increased at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Then, it is referred to when the time saving pattern winning fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and if the time saving state (second time saving state) based on the time saving pattern winning is set (the time saving number corresponding to the time saving winning information based on the time saving pattern winning remains If it is added to the number of times of working hours reduction) is set to off.
In this 52nd control example, when the time reduction symbol is elected in the first special symbol lottery executed in the electric support state (variable probability state, third variable state, first time saving state, second time saving state), it is set The first process of holding time-saving winning information (time-saving stock) until the current electric support state ends (time-saving stock), and time-saving winning at the timing when the time-saving pattern winning fluctuation is stopped and displayed without waiting for the end of the set electric support state The second process (processing to add the number of remaining time reductions) that sets the time reduction state (second time reduction state) based on the information is configured to be executable, and the execution of the above-described second processing is performed when the time reduction symbol is elected. It is configured to set the time saving winning flag 203ng to ON when it is determined.
By configuring in this way, at the timing when the time saving pattern winning fluctuation is stopped and displayed, the second time saving state setting processing or the remaining time saving number addition processing is executed based on the setting state of the time saving winning flag 203ng. be able to.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1881, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1881 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-second control example. As shown in FIG. 1881, the RAM 223 in the fifty-second control example differs from the above-described RAM 222 in the fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1860(b)) in that a variable probability counter 223na is added. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and the description thereof will be omitted.

During probability variation counter 223na is a counter for measuring the remaining period (remaining ST number) of the period (ST period) in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol) is set.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifty-second control example>
Next, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example will be described. The control processing of the main controller 110 in the fifty-second control example can execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in parallel for the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example (simultaneous variation Specifications), and it is possible to execute the process to end the time-saving state (normal pattern high probability state, normal pattern low probability state with electric sapo) based on the small winning. The difference is that
In addition, since the basic control contents of the simultaneous variation specification are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Alternatively, the contents of control processing different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example will be described.
First, with reference to FIG. 1882, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination processing (Y307) will be described. FIG. 1882 is a flow chart showing the details of the first special symbol determination process (Y307). This first special symbol determination process (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process (S251 in FIG. 105) of the above-described second control example, and in addition to the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving winning Judgment (special figure 1 time saving lottery process), and determination of small hit winning (small hit lottery process) are executed.

When the first special symbol determination process (Y307) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (Y8001), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202ka. Then (Y8001M), when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), and the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2 ), set the jackpot pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8005), store the value indicating the current game state in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and perform this process. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8003: No), the special figure 1 time-saving lottery process is executed (Y8002M), then the small winning lottery process is executed (Y8003M), and this process is terminated. .
Here, the special figure 1 time saving lottery process (Y8002M) is a process for executing determination of time saving design winning in this special symbol lottery. That is, in the 52nd control example, first, in the first special symbol lottery, the judgment of the jackpot election is executed (Y8003), and when the jackpot is elected, the special symbol lottery is executed without executing the judgment of the time-saving symbol election. It is constituted so as to execute determination of time-saving design winning only when the game ends and the jackpot is not won. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, short-time winning) are not given to the player, a game excessively advantageous to the player is provided. You can prevent it from happening.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1883, the processing contents of the special figure 1 time saving lottery processing (Y8002M) will be described. FIG. 1883 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 hour-saving lottery process (Y8002M).
When the special figure 1 time-saving lottery process (Y8002M) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning determination result) is acquired based on the time-saving random number table 202nf (Y401M), and it is determined whether the time-saving design is elected ( Y402M), when it is determined that the time-saving design has been won (Y402M: Yes), the time-saving design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (Y403M), and the current game is played from the game state storage area 203g. Read the state (Y404M), determine whether the current gaming state is the probability variable state or the first time saving state (Y405M), and if it is determined to be the probability changing state or the first time saving state (Y405M: Yes), 20 is added to the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma (Y406M), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of Y405M, if it is determined that it is not the probability variable state or the first time saving state, that is, if it is determined that it is a game state in which a new time saving state can be set (Y405M: No), time saving winning flag 203ng is turned on (Y407M), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y402M that the short-time winning has not been won (Y402M: No), this process is terminated as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1884, the details of the small winning lottery process (Y8003M) will be described. FIG. 1884 is a flow chart showing the details of the small winning lottery process (Y8003M). In this small winning lottery process (Y8003M), similarly to the small winning lottery process (see Y8108 in FIG. 282) in the ninth control example described above, it is determined whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery is a small winning. executed.
In the small winning lottery process (Y8003M), first, it is determined whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is determined to be time-saving symbol winning, that is, whether the time-saving symbol winning of the first special symbol is set (Y8301M). When it is determined that the time-saving design winning of 1 special symbol is set, (Y8301M: Yes), the conditions for executing the small winning lottery are not satisfied, so this processing is performed without executing the determination of the small winning winning. exit.
On the other hand, in the process of Y8301M, when it is determined that the time-saving design election of the first special symbol is not set, (Y8301M: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small winning random number table 202ng (Y8302M). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a small hit (Y8303M). In the process of Y8303M, when it is determined that the small winning is won (Y8303M: Yes), the special small winning symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device is set (Y8304M), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y8303M, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (when it is determined that it is out) (Y8303M: No), the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set ( Y8305M), this process ends.

In addition, in this 52nd control example, when executing the determination of jackpot winning, the determination of time-saving symbol winning, and the determination of small winning, the same random number counter (first random number counter C1) value is used to make the determination. A plurality of determinations (for jackpot winning) are executed in one special symbol lottery by stipulating that the range of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to each winning value is different. Judgment, time-saving pattern winning judgment, small winning judgment) are configured so that they cannot be won repeatedly, but not limited to this, a different random number counter value is set for each winning judgment. It may be configured so that the rest of the judgments are not executed when the winning is made in the judgment of 1.
In this case, when the execution order of each judgment is executed in the order of big hit winning judgment, time saving pattern winning judgment, and small winning winning judgment, when the time saving design is won, small winning judgment is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state. On the other hand, if the execution order of each judgment is executed in the order of judgment of jackpot winning, judgment of small winning, and judgment of time saving design winning, when small winning is won, judgment of time saving design winning is not executed , It is possible to make it difficult to stock the time saving state.
In addition, if the execution order of each judgment is defined in the order of judgment of jackpot winning, judgment of small winning, and judgment of time-saving symbol winning, the small winning set when winning a small winning As a type, it is preferable to configure any one of a small winning type in which the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established and a small winning type in which the time saving end condition is not established can be set. By constructing in this way, when a small win is won in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied, it is possible to simply execute the special symbol lottery in which the time saving pattern lottery is not executed.
It should be noted that, in the case of configuring to use a different random number counter value for each determination of winning, and if it is configured not to execute the remaining determinations when winning with determination of 1, the set game state Depending on, the execution order of each determination may be switched, or may be switched depending on the type of special symbol lottery to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1885, the content of the game state update process (Y309M) will be described. FIG. 1885 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process (Y309M). In this game state update process (Y309M), in contrast to the game state update process (see Y309 in FIG. 274) in the above-described ninth control example, the process of updating (subtracting) the value of the probability variation counter 203i, and the time saving counter 203h When the value becomes 0, it is different in that the process of adding the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is executed, and other process contents are the same.
When the gaming state update process (Y309M) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If so (Y601: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203h (Y602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined to be 0 (Y604: Yes), then the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is greater than 0 (Y601M), if it is determined to be greater than 0 (Y601M: Yes), the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (Y602M), and the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is cleared to 0, and the process proceeds to Y604M. Also, in the process of Y601M, if it is determined that the value of the standby time saving counter 203ma is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y601M: No), or in the process of Y604, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 If it is determined that there is none (Y604: No), then the process proceeds to Y604M.
In the process of Y604M, it is determined whether the probability variable counter 203i is greater than 0 (Y604M), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (Y604M: Yes), the value of the probability variable counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (Y605M), A remaining probability change number command for increasing the value of the counter 203i is set (Y606M), a state command corresponding to the updated values of various counters is set (Y607M), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y604M, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y604M: No), the processes of Y605M and Y606M are skipped, and the process of Y607M is started. and then terminate this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1886, the processing contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing (Y236M) will be described. FIG. 1886 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing (Y236M). In this first special symbol variation stop process (Y236M), the result of the special symbol lottery to be stopped and displayed this time is other than the jackpot winning, in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (Y236 in FIG. 276) in the ninth control example described above. The difference is that the content of the processing executed in the case of is different, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same processing contents are omitted.

First, when the first special symbol variation stop processing (Y236M) is executed, the same processing from Y701 to Y709 as the first special symbol variation stop processing (Y236 in FIG. 276) in the ninth control example described above is executed. Then, in the process of Y702, if it is determined that the result of the first special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (Y702: No), then it is determined whether the result of the first special symbol lottery this time is a small win. Determined (Y701M), if it is determined to be a small hit (Y701M: Yes), execute a special figure 1 small hit stop process (Y702M), move to the process of Y706, then execute the process of Y707, End this process. The special figure 1 small hit stop process (Y702M) executed in the process of Y702M is a process for stopping and displaying the special symbol variation that has won a small hit, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. .
On the other hand, in the process of Y701M, if it is determined that the small hit is not elected (Y701M: No), it is determined whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is the time-saving design winning (Y703M), and the time-saving design winning If it is determined that (Y703M: Yes), the time saving setting process is executed (Y704M), the process proceeds to Y706, the process of Y707 is executed after that, and this process ends. In addition, the time saving setting process (Y704M) executed as the process of Y704M is a process for setting the time saving state based on the result of this special symbol lottery, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. . Also, in the process of Y703M, if it is determined that the time saving symbol has not been elected, that is, if it is determined that the result of this special symbol lottery is out (Y703M: No), the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The process proceeds to Y706, then executes the process of Y707, and terminates this process.
Next, with reference to Figure 1887, the processing contents of the special figure 1 small hit stop process (Y702M) executed in the first special symbol variation stop process (see Y236M in Figure 1886) will be described. FIG. 1887 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special figure 1 small per stop processing (Y702M). In this special figure 1 small hit stop processing (Y702M), at the timing when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning as the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the processing for stopping and displaying the second special symbol variation being executed ( Forced stop processing), processing for ending the set time saving state (time saving end processing), and stocked time saving winning information (value of waiting time saving counter 203ma) Based on the new time saving state A process for setting (stock time reduction setting process) is executed.
When the special figure 1 small per stop process (Y702M) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag kd is set to ON (Y931M), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop indicating the on of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kd Set the command (Y932M). Then, a small winning scenario for executing a small winning game is set (Y933M), next it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y934M), and when it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (Y934M: No), because the present is not in the time saving state and the time saving winning information is not stocked, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y934M, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y934M: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is cleared to 0 (Y935M), and the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma It is determined whether it is greater than 0 (Y936M), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (Y936M: Yes), the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is newly set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (Y937M), and standby The value of the time saving counter 203ma is cleared to 0 (Y938M), a state command is set to increase the value of the working time saving counter 203h after updating (Y939M), and this processing is terminated.
Also, in the process of Y936M, if it is determined that the value of the standby time saving counter 203ma is not greater than 0 (Y936M: No), since there is no stocked time saving winning information, the time saving state is terminated. This processing ends with the state of
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 52nd control example, the first time-saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, or the time-saving design in the first special symbol lottery executed in the variable probability state It is constituted so as to be able to execute determination of winning (time-saving pattern lottery), and when a small win is won in the first special pattern lottery, the electric support state is terminated (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is cleared). ing.
In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, in addition to the determination of the jackpot winning, the lottery for continuing the electric support state (time reduction extension lottery) and the electric support state are terminated. A lottery (time-saving end lottery) for the purpose is configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, the later game characteristics can be greatly changed depending on which of the time-saving extension lottery and the time-saving end lottery is won first, so that the player does not get tired of the game early. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the fifty-second control example, the value of the time saving counter 203h is cleared to 0 based on the winning of the small prize. That is, it is configured to terminate all the electric sapo states (the electric sapo state of the high probability state of normal symbols and the electric sapo state of the low probability state of normal symbols), but not limited to this, based on the small winning Alternatively, only the high-probability state of the normal symbol may be ended (a part of the electric support state may be ended).
By configuring in this way, the game property aiming at winning a small hit during the variable probability state (the game property aiming at the transition to the second variable probability state by ending the high probability state of the normal symbol during the variable probability state) is changed. However, when a third probability variable state (a high probability state of a special pattern and an electric sapo state of a low probability state of a normal pattern) is set, it is constructed so as not to shift to the second probability variable state by winning a small prize. be able to.
Therefore, since it is possible to reduce the opportunity to shift to the second variable probability state that is most advantageous to the player, the advantage of the privilege given based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the second variable probability state is increased. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege.
<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1889 and 1890, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-second control example will be described. In the fifty-second control example, the production mode setting process (S4903M in FIG. 1889) is provided instead of the production mode setting process (S4903L) for the fifty-first control example described above. 1890 S5101M) is provided. Other processing contents are the same, and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1889, the processing contents of the rendering mode setting processing (S4903L) will be described. FIG. 1889 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering mode setting process (S4903L). In this production mode setting process (S4903M), a process of updating the value of the variable probability counter 223na is added. Specifically, when the effect mode setting process (S4903M) is executed, the same process from S5008H to S5010H as the above-described effect mode setting process (S4903L) is executed, and then the value of the variable probability counter 223na (S5001M), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S5001M: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability changing counter 223na (S5002M), and the value of the probability changing counter 223na after subtraction is shown. (S5003M), other update processing is executed (S5004M), variation effect setting processing is executed (S505M), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S5001M, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223na is not greater than 0 (S5001M; No), the processes of S5004M and S5005M are executed, and this process ends.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1890, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5101M) during probability change performed in fluctuation production setting processing (S5005M) are explained. FIG. 1890 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process during probability variation (S5101M). This effect setting process during probability variation (S5101M) is a control process executed when it is determined that the current game state is the probability variation state in the variable effect setting process (S5005M).
When the probability variation production setting process (S5101M) is executed, first, the probability variation type is specified based on the information stored in the subordinate state setting area 223g (S5151M), and it is determined whether the current probability variation state ( S5152M), if it is determined to be in a variable probability state (S5152M: Yes), it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a small hit (S5153M), and if it is determined to be a small hit (S5153M: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the time saving stocked flag 223mb is set to ON (S5154M), and if it is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the time saving winning information is not stocked (S5154M: No), determine the effect mode for indicating the transition to the second variable probability state (S5155M), and terminate this process.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5154M, if it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is set to ON (S5154M: Yes), the display mode for indicating the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma is set (S5156M), The effect mode for indicating the transition to the third probability variable state corresponding to the value of the short standby number counter 223ma is determined (S5157M), the value of the short standby number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S5158M), and the short time stock flag 223mb is set to OFF (S5159M), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S5152M, if it is determined that it is not in the variable probability state (S5152M: No), then it is determined whether the current is the third variable probability state (S5160M), and it is determined that it is in the third variable probability state In the case (S5160M: Yes), it is determined whether this variation pattern is a small hit (S5161M), and if it is determined that it is a small hit (S5161M: Yes), the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma Read out (S5162M), determine whether the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma is greater than 20 (S5163M), and if it is determined to be greater than 20 (S5163M: Yes), determine the disappointment effect mode (S5165M ), and if it is determined to be 20 or less (S5163M: No), the effect mode of the shortened effect is determined (S5164), and this process is terminated.
In the processing of S5160M, when it is determined that it is not in the third probability variable state (S5160M: No), or when it is determined that it is not a small hit in the processing of S5153M and S5161M, variation production based on the received variation pattern is determined (S5166M), and this process is terminated.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example, it is possible to regulate the setting of the specific setting (the setting of the electric support state based on the time-saving symbol winning) according to the set game state. It consists of Specifically, in the game state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the setting condition of the specific setting can be established in the variable probability state and the third variable probability state, and the setting condition of the specific setting is established in the second variable probability state. It is configured not to. By configuring in this way, the establishment degree of the specific setting can be varied according to the game state to be set.
Furthermore, in the fifty-second control example, the second game state (second variable probability state) is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, and the first game state (variable probability state, third variable probability state) is specified In a situation where the setting condition of the setting is not satisfied, when the transition condition is satisfied (when a small win is won), it is configured to be able to shift to the second game state.

That is, in the fifty-second control example, a game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed when the setting condition of the specific setting is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the player is allowed to play a game in which the setting condition of the specific setting is not satisfied.
In addition, in this 52nd control example, when the variable probability state is set, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues (ST number of times) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (time saving number of times) It is configured to be the same, and is configured so that it cannot move to the second game state (second probability variable state) unless the transition condition is satisfied (unless the small winning is won), but it is not limited to this. , The number of times of time saving can be set to be less than the number of times of ST, so that the transition condition may be established even if the small winning is not won. Moreover, according to the jackpot type of the probability variable jackpot for which the variable probability state is set, the number of times of ST and the number of times of time saving may be set so as to be different.
Furthermore, you may provide the jackpot classification that the number of times of time saving becomes larger than the number of times of ST. Even in this case, as in the fifty-second control example described above, the game in which the small hit is won in the state where the remaining number of times of ST remains, and the second game state (second probability variable state) is set is the game. Next, when the remaining number of times of ST becomes small, a game is played in which the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues is extended without establishing the transition condition. This makes it possible to play a game that is more advantageous than when the transition condition is satisfied.
In addition, in this 52nd control example, it is configured to be able to stock the time saving state (electrical support state) as a specific setting, but without being limited to this, it is configured to be able to stock the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) For example, if you do not win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, a probability variation pattern lottery is executed in some cases, and if you win a probability variation pattern, the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state) can be set, and when a probability variable pattern is won by a special pattern lottery executed in a state where the probability variable state (high probability state of special pattern) is set, the set probability variable state is terminated. Up to the probability variation winning information acquired based on the probability variation symbol winning may be configured to be stockable.

<Regarding the Effect Modification of the 52nd Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1891 and 1892, a modification (effect modification) of the effect content during the variable probability state executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example described above will be described. In the fifty-second control example described above, as shown in FIG. 1873 (a), when the variable probability state is set, the remaining period until the high probability state of the special symbol ends (remaining ST number) in the display area Dm7 so as to display, and execute a small winning suggestion performance for suggesting to the player whether the second variable probability state or the third variable probability state is set when the small winning is won. had configured.
In other words, by configuring so as not to notify the player of the presence or absence of the time-saving symbol winning by the special symbol lottery executed during the variable state, so as to make the player interested in the effect result of the small hit suggestion effect. had configured.
On the other hand, in this modified example of effect, when the variable probability state is set, it is possible to execute an effect capable of informing the player of the number of remaining STs and the number of remaining short time. Furthermore, it is possible to execute an effect that allows the player to visually grasp that the time-saving symbol has been won during the variable probability state. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, so that the player can easily predict the game state to be set later. .
<Regarding the effect content in the effect modification example of the fifty-second control example>
Next, the content of the effect executed in this modified example of effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 1891 and 1892. FIG. Figure 1891 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the probability variation state, Figure 1891 (b) is an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving symbol is elected during the probability variation state FIG. 1892(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the jackpot is won during the variable probability state, and FIG. 1892(b) is a small winning during the variable probability state FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when The display elements that are the same as the display elements displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the variable probability state is set, a display area Dm70a, a display area Dm70b, and a display area Dm70c are formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 1891(a). In the display area Dm70a, "A: 199" is displayed as the number of balloons A corresponding to the remaining period (remaining number of STs) during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues. "B: 199 pieces" is displayed as the number of wind performances B corresponding to the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) in which the probability state continues, and the number of balloons C corresponding to the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is displayed in the display area Dm70c. , "C: 299" is displayed.
In the main display area Dm, "Balloon Mode" is displayed to indicate that the variable probability state is set, and "Break the balloons B and C!!" is displayed as the mission. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the contents of the effect in the balloon mode, "Balloon B should be set to 0 before balloon A! "..." is displayed.
Also, an action presentation is executed in which a character 801 resembling a rabbit throws a spear to burst a plurality of balloons (balloon A to balloon C) floating in the area 801L. The content of the action effect during the balloon mode is configured to be determined based on the result of the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the variable probability state, and the result of the first special symbol lottery that is being executed is determined. If it is out, an effect of breaking one balloon A and one balloon B is executed as an action effect corresponding to the subtraction of the number of remaining STs and the number of remaining time reductions.
By executing such an effect, the number of remaining STs and the number of remaining time reductions can be individually grasped based on the number of remaining balloons A and the number of remaining balloons B in the balloon mode. Then, when the time-saving symbol is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. In other words, the number of balloons B corresponding to the maximum number of times of time reduction obtained by adding the number of times of time reduction (20 times) corresponding to the time reduction winning information stocked based on the time reduction pattern winning to the remaining time reduction number of times in the probability variable state currently set is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the time-saving symbol has been won in an easy-to-understand manner.

In other words, when only the number of time-saving pattern winning increases without winning the jackpot or small win during the variable state, the difference between the remaining number of balloons A and the remaining number of balloons B gradually increases. go. Here, when the remaining number of balloons A becomes 0, that is, when the 200th special pattern lottery is executed after the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state ends, and the stocked short-time winning is won. It is configured such that the second time saving state is set based on the information. Therefore, when the remaining number of balloons A is small and the remaining number of balloons B is large, for example, when the remaining number of balloons A is 10 and the remaining number of balloons B is 110, a big win is achieved. By executing the first special symbol lottery 10 times without winning or winning a small prize, the player can easily grasp that the second time saving state of 100 times of time saving is set.
In this way, by displaying the value corresponding to the number of remaining STs and the value corresponding to the maximum number of times of reduced working hours, the player is informed of the desired period and the undesired period of small hit winning during the variable probability state. It is possible to clearly grasp and provide an easy-to-understand game. It should be noted that during the period when the remaining number of balloons A and the remaining number of balloons B are the same, it is a period in which the player desires to win a small winning because the time-saving symbol winning is not performed. If the small win is won at this point, as shown in FIG. 1892(b), the reward 810L corresponding to the small win is displayed in the display mode of "super lucky mode".
Next, when the jackpot variation is executed during the variable probability state, the effect of destroying all the balloons C is executed regardless of the remaining number of balloons A and B, and when the character 801 destroys all the balloons C. , and as shown in FIG. 1892(a), a reward 810L corresponding to winning a jackpot is displayed in the display mode of "V".
<Fifty-third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1893 to 1903. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, when the time-saving design is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving winning information based on the time-saving design winning is displayed until the set time-saving state ends. It is configured to be holdable (possible to stock short working hours), and after the end of the set short working hours state, a new short working hours state (second short working hours state) can be set based on the stocked short working hours winning information. .

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, the time saving state being set will not end due to the time saving pattern winning, for example. A time-saving pattern is won during a first time-saving state relatively advantageous to the player, and a second time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time-saving state is set, thereby lowering the player's willingness to play. It was possible to suppress
However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example described above, the same Since the second time saving state is set at the number of time saving times, the player cannot be interested in the time saving pattern winning timing during the time saving state, and the player gets bored with the game during the time saving state. There was a problem.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example, when the time-saving pattern is won during the time-saving state, the time-saving winning information is stocked and the time-saving winning is performed in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above. When the special symbol variation is executed in the state of stocking the information, the number of times of shortening working hours indicated by the stocked working hours winning information is subtracted.
By configuring in this way, the set time saving state is more effective than the case of winning the time saving pattern in which the specific time saving number (20 time saving times) is given in a state where the number of remaining time saving times in the set time saving state is large. If you win a time-saving pattern that gives a specific number of time-savings (20 times) when the number of remaining time-savings is small, the time-saving state that is set after the set time-saving state ends (time-saving stock Since the number of times of time saving in the time saving state can be increased, the player can be interested in the time saving pattern winning timing during the time saving state.

Here, a pachinko machine 10 is conventionally known which sets a specific performance mode throughout a period in which a game state (time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) different from the normal state is set and the game state continues. . Then, for example, when the time saving mode for indicating the time saving state is set as the production mode, the variable production dedicated to the time saving mode is executed in response to the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and the time saving state is performed. When the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) reaches a predetermined period (for example, remaining time reduction number of times 3 times), as a time reduction end production for inciting the player that the time reduction state will end, as a fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation There is a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute an effect using variable periods of a plurality of variations (for example, remaining 3 variations in a time-saving state) in which a fixed time (for example, 10-second variation) is set.
In such a pachinko machine 10, the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special symbol can be switched based on the number of times of special symbol variation after the specific game state is set. When the time saving state is set 100 times, for the 1st to 97th special symbol fluctuations after the time saving state is set, a relatively short time (for example, 3 seconds) variation time (variation pattern ) is likely to be selected, and for the 98th to 100th special symbol variations, a fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) variation time (variation pattern) is selected, variation referred to during the time saving state It defined the contents of the pattern selection table.
However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 53rd control example, the number of times of working hours (20 times) included in the stocked working hours winning information is set to the working hours state (second working hours state) based on the working hours winning information Before Since it is configured so that it can be subtracted, even if the same time-saving pattern type is set in the time-saving design winning and the second time-saving state based on the time-saving design winning is set, the number of different time-saving times The 2 o'clock short state is set. In this case, as in the past, based on the number of special symbol lotteries after the second time saving state is set, if the selected variation pattern is configured to be switchable, the final period of the second time saving state (remaining 3 fluctuation period), the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) cannot be determined, and the effect of the production using the production mode is reduced.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example, a variation pattern corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction state is determined, not the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the second time reduction state is set. configured as possible. By configuring in this way, even if the number of times of time saving is subtracted during the time saving stock, the fluctuation of the special symbol variation based on the number of times of remaining time saving at the time when the second time saving state is set. Since the pattern can be determined, it is possible to reliably determine the variable time (variation pattern) of the fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) in the final period of the second short time state (period of remaining 3 variations).

In addition, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 51st control example described above, a plurality of time saving winning information (time saving number of times in the second time saving state) based on time saving symbol winning can be held (stocked), and the second time saving state Determines the variation pattern of the special symbol variation based on the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the second time reduction state is set, even if the number of times of time reduction can be varied when is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine the variable time (variation pattern) of the fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) in the final period of the second time saving state (remaining 3 variation period).
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifty-third control example>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1893 to 1896. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example in that part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and part of the configuration of the RAM 203 are changed. and are otherwise identical. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
FIG. 1893(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-third control example. As shown in FIG. 1893(a), the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example has a variation pattern selection for the ROM 202 (see FIG. 1857(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above. The difference is that a variation pattern selection table 202pb is provided instead of the table 202jb.
Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202pb will be described with reference to FIG. 1894(a). FIG. 1894(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202pb. As shown in Figure 1894 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202pb is a normal table 202pb1 referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the probability variation state, and the first time saving When determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery performed during the second time saving state and the table 202pb2 for the probability variation and the first time saving which are referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery performed during the state It has table 202pb3 for the 2nd time saving to be referred to.

Next, the contents of the normal table 202pb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1894(b). FIG. 1894(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202pb1. As shown in FIG. 1894(b), the normal table 202pb1 defines various fluctuation patterns in association with the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa, the lottery result, and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.
Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is "900", the lottery result is "win", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 29". "Normal" with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range of , and "Super" with a variation time of 30 seconds is specified as a variation pattern for the range of "30 to 99". , “100 to 198”, “SP” with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. On the other hand, the lottery result is "out" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". For the range of "100 to 189", "special deviation" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and for the range of "190 to 196", a variation pattern of "normal" with a variation time of 20 seconds " is defined, and "super" with a change time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the values "197, 198".
In addition, the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa is "899 to 4", the lottery result is "winning", and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates as a fluctuation pattern with respect to the range of "0 to 29""Normal" with a time of 20 seconds is specified, and for the range of "30 to 179", "Super" with a variation time of 30 seconds is specified as a variation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198" Therefore, "SP" with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. On the other hand, the lottery result is "out" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189". For the range of "100 to 189", "special deviation" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and for the range of "190 to 196", a variation pattern of "normal" with a variation time of 20 seconds " is defined, and "super" with a change time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the values "197, 198".
In addition, when the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa is "3 to 1" and the lottery result is "win", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, as a fluctuation pattern "Specific" with a variation time of 10 seconds is stipulated, and even if the lottery result is "missing", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is set to the entire range of "0 to 198", and the variation time as a variation pattern A "specific" of 10 seconds is defined.

Then, when the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa is "0", regardless of the lottery result, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the entire range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 5 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. A “short variation” of
Here, although details will be described later, the normal fluctuation counter 203a is used when various information stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (RAM cleared), or when the jackpot game ends. It is a counter to which a value of 900 is set when a special symbol is drawn, and the value is decremented by 1 when a special symbol lottery is executed in a state of low probability of special symbols. And it is referred when deciding whether to give a ceiling privilege (2nd time saving state A), and when the value of a normal fluctuation|variation counter becomes 0, it comprises so that a ceiling privilege may be provided.
That is, the data table referred to when the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa is 900 initializes (RAM clears) various information stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, Alternatively, it becomes a data table that is referred to only when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation executed in the normal state after the jackpot game is finished. Then, when the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is 900, it is defined that the variation pattern of "special failure" can be selected for the case where the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is 899 to 4, and the jackpot winning The difference is that the selection ratio of the "SP" variation pattern is sometimes defined to be high.
Therefore, in the first special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol lottery in a state where no player is playing after the game hall opens) when the game is started on the pachinko machine 10 in which the normal state is set Therefore, when a variation pattern of "special failure" is set, it can be grasped that RAM clearing has been executed.

By configuring in this way, when calculating the remaining number of special symbol lotteries necessary to establish the granting conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, the previous day's game information (normal fluctuation subtracted by the previous day's game The value of the counter 203pa) can be easily grasped by the player as to whether or not it is acceptable to add them.
In addition, the special symbol variation of the first rotation for the first time in the game (when the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is 900) is the special symbol variation of the other number of rotations (when the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is 899 to 4 ), it is possible to make it easier to determine a variation pattern of "SP" with a longer variation time (60 seconds) when a big win is won. It is possible to make it easier to execute the variable performance for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a long period of time during which he is happy that he has won the jackpot right after the start of the game.
Furthermore, in the fifty-third control example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is not determined, so the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is determined. At the point of time, it is configured to be able to notify the winning of the jackpot only by the length of the fluctuation time. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the big win has been won immediately after the start of the game, even by the elapse of the variation time before the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
In addition, when the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa is "3 to 1", that is, when the remaining special symbol lottery number of times until the granting condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied reaches 3 times, the remaining As the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for three times, a "specific" variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation time of the special symbol variation. Therefore, it is made difficult to notice before the special symbols are stop-displayed that a jackpot is won and a game result in which the ceiling privilege is not awarded despite the ceiling privilege being granted due to the fluctuation of the remaining number. be able to.

Furthermore, as a performance mode of a ceiling reaching suggestion performance for suggesting that the granting condition for granting the ceiling privilege will soon be satisfied, performance data corresponding to a performance mode for a specific performance period (30 seconds) is stored in advance. Only by preparing it, the performance suggesting reaching the ceiling can be executed without a sense of incongruity from the time when the number of remaining special symbol variations reaches three times until the ceiling privilege is given.
Also, when the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is 0, that is, in the normal state that is set after the second time saving state granted by the ceiling privilege is completed, the variation pattern of "short variation" with a variation time of 5 seconds Since it is configured to be determined, it is possible to prevent the setting of a variation pattern with an unnecessarily long variation time for a player who has not won a jackpot for a long period of time.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example, the "specific" variation pattern that can be grasped that the RAM has been cleared is selected only when the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is 900, that is, only one special symbol variation is selected. However, the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa may be selected in the range of 900-880 without being limited to this. By configuring in this way, it is possible to extend the period in which the "specific" variation pattern can be selected, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player who is trying to grasp whether the RAM is cleared or not to play for a long time. .
Also, it may be configured such that the "specific" fluctuation pattern can be selected at the timing when the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa becomes a specific value (for example, a multiple of 100). By configuring in this way, it is periodically determined whether or not the RAM is cleared by specifying how many special symbol variations in the game of the day the special symbol variations in which the "specific" variation pattern is selected are. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the RAM has been cleared, even a player who cannot play immediately after the opening of the game hall can be provided with an opportunity to grasp whether or not the RAM has been cleared.

Furthermore, in the fifty-third control example, the effect of suggesting reaching the ceiling is executed when the number of remaining special symbol lotteries reaches three times until the condition for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied. However, without being limited to this, if the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the granting conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied is 2 times or less, or if the specified number of times is 4 or more, the ceiling It may be configured to execute an arrival suggestion effect.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1895, the contents of the table 202pb2 for probability variation/first time reduction will be described. FIG. 1895 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the variable probability/first time saving table 202pb2. As shown in Figure 1895, the table 202pb2 for probability variation and the first time saving, the special symbol lottery number of times (number of special figure fluctuations) after the target gaming state is set, the lottery result, and the acquired variation type counter Different lengths of variation time (variation pattern) are defined based on the value of CS1.
Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the number of special symbol variations is "1 to 97", the lottery result is "win", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 109". For the range of, "short hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and for the range of "110 to 198", a "medium hit" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. ing. On the other hand, the lottery result is "out" and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189", and the variation pattern is defined as "ultra-short out" with a variation time of 3 seconds. , for the range of "190 to 196", "short deviation" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and for the range of "197, 198", a variation time of 10 seconds is specified as a variation pattern " Out of the middle" is stipulated.
In addition, the special symbol type is common, the number of special symbol fluctuations is "98 to 100", and if the lottery result is "hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" , "specific" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern, and even if the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range Therefore, "specific" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

As described above, in the probability variation/first time reduction table 202pb2, the variation pattern that can be selected is not the value of the normal variation counter 203pa, but is defined in association with the number of special figure variations after the game state is set. . Here, in the fifty-third control example, if the probability variable state or the first time-saving state is set, a predetermined number of times unless some winning (big hit, small hit, time-saving design) is made in the special symbol lottery It is configured so that the minute special symbol variation is always executed. Therefore, unlike the above-described normal state, even if the variation pattern is determined based on the number of special symbol lotteries after the game state is set, the player will not be confused.
In addition, when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "98 ~", that is, when the number of remaining special symbol lotteries reaches 3 times until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the remaining 3 times of special symbol variation As the variation pattern, a "specific" variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation time of the special symbol variation. Therefore, as a performance mode of the time-shortening end suggesting performance for suggesting whether the time-shortening state will end or whether the variable probability state will continue, the special time-shortening end suggesting performance can be executed without a sense of incongruity.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1896, the contents of the second time saving table 202pb3 will be described. FIG. 1896 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the second time saving table 202pb3. As shown in FIG. 1896, the second time saving table 202pb3 includes, based on the standby time saving counter 203ma, the lottery result, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the length of the variation time (variation pattern) is stipulated.
Specifically, the special symbol type is common, the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is "~ 11", the lottery result is "hit", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 ~ For the range of 189”, a “super-short hit” with a variation time of 3 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and for the range of “190 to 198”, a “short hit” with a variation time of 10 seconds is specified as a variation pattern. is stipulated. On the other hand, if the lottery result is "out", the variation pattern is defined as "ultra-short out" with a variation time of 3 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. there is

In addition, the special symbol type is common, the value of the standby time reduction number counter 203ma is "10 to 4", the lottery result is "win", and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 169". For the range, "short hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and for the range of "170 to 196", a "medium hit" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. "Super" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern for the range of "197, 198". On the other hand, if the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is defined as "short out" with a variation time of 5 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "0 to 194", For the range of "195 to 197", "medium out" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and for the value of "198", "special out" with a variation time of 15 seconds is specified as a variation pattern. is stipulated.
Then, the special symbol type is common, the value of the standby time reduction number counter 203ma is "3 to 1", and the lottery result is "win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". "Specific" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern for the entire range, and even if the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is all "0 to 198""Specific" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern for the range.
As described above, in the second time saving table 202pb3, the variation pattern that can be selected is configured to be determined based on the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma, that is, the number of remaining time saving times in the second time saving state. By configuring in this way, when the value of the standby time reduction number counter 203ma is "3 to 1", that is, when the remaining special symbol lottery number of times until the end condition of the second time reduction state is satisfied reaches 3 times is configured such that a "specific" variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined as the variation pattern for the remaining three special symbol variations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the special symbol lottery by the variation time of the special symbol variation. Therefore, the time saving end suggestion effect for suggesting the end of the second time saving state can be executed without a sense of incongruity.
<Regarding transition of game state and selected variation pattern in the fifty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1897 and 1898, the relationship between the flow from the setting of the first time saving state to the normal state and the selected variation pattern will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1897, when the first time saving state of 100 times of working time is set, the effect mode of the first time saving mode is set until the number of times of special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times. Further, for the 1st to 97th special symbol variations during the first time saving state, a predetermined variation pattern is selected with reference to the first time saving variation pattern table (probability variation/first time saving table 202pb2), From the 98th time to the 100th time, that is, for the remaining 3 variations in the first time saving state, a variation pattern fixed to 10 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, the performance period (remaining three variations of the special symbol variation period) during which the extension suggesting performance for suggesting the end of the first time saving state or extension is executed can be always constant.
In addition, as shown in Figure 1898, when the time saving pattern is elected in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, and the second time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning is set after the first time saving state ends Even so, until the first time saving state ends, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the first time saving variation pattern table (probability change/first time saving table 202pb2), so it is extended with an appropriate production period. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect.
Then, after the end of the first time saving state, the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma (remaining time saving number of times) is set to the time saving counter 203h, and the second time saving fluctuation pattern table (second time saving table 202pb3) is set. By referring to it, it is possible to determine a variation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the second time saving state (remaining time saving number of times). Therefore, no matter what value the number of remaining time reductions in the situation where the second time reduction state is set, the production period of the end suggestion production that suggests the end of the second time reduction state (the remaining 3 fluctuations in the second time reduction state The length of the pattern fluctuation period) can be made constant.
<Regarding control processing in the fifty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1899 to 1903, the contents of various control processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above in that a part of the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. , are otherwise identical.

Specifically, as the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the process for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is changed to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S252N in FIG. 1899). And, instead of the time saving lottery process (see S8002L of Figure 1862) instead of the time saving lottery process (see S8002L of Figure 1900), the time saving setting process (see S205L of Figure 1863) instead of the time saving setting process (see S205N of Figure 1901) is changed from update processing for updating the values of various counters to update processing (see S204N in FIG. 1902), and a part of the start-up processing is changed. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1899, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S252N) will be described. FIG. 1899 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S252N). This special symbol variation pattern selection process (S252N) is different from the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S252 in FIG. 107) executed in the second control example and the 47th control example described above. and the processing of specifying the values of various counters referred to when selecting a variation pattern.
Specifically, when the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S252N) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the normal variation counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S8201N), and if it is determined to be greater (S8201N: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of the normal variation counter 203pa (S8202N), and then determine whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, that is, whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set ( S8201). In the process of S8201, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), based on the jackpot type selection table 202md and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 , determines the jackpot type (S8202). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203), and the variation pattern selection table 202pb corresponding to the current game state corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is specified (S8204N).
Then, read the variation pattern selection table 202pb specified in the process of S8204N (S8205N), determine whether the read variation pattern selection table is the second time saving table 202pb3 (S8206N), and in the second time saving table 202pb3 If it is determined that there is no (S8206N: No), select the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the read table (S8205), based on the selected variation pattern, set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main control device 110 Main processing External output processing Voice lamp control Output to device 113 .

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (S8208), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S8209), and the process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .
Also, in the process of S8206N, if it is determined that the read variation pattern selection table is the second time saving table 202pb3 (S8206N: Yes), the value of the variation type counter CS1 based on the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma A corresponding variation pattern is selected (S8207N), and the process proceeds to S8206.
On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the time reduction lottery result (time reduction winning judgment result) is time reduction winning ( S8209), when it is determined that the time reduction is elected (S8209: Yes), the time reduction type is determined by referring to the time reduction type selection table 202df (S8203N), and the process proceeds to S8203. Also, when it is determined that the time reduction election is not performed in the process of S8209 (S8209: No), the process of S8203N is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1900, processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8002N) are explained. Drawing 1900 is a flow chart which showed the contents of processing of time saving lottery processing (S8002N). In this time-saving lottery process (S8002N), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 in contrast to the time-saving lottery process (see S8002L in FIG. 1862) in the fifty-first control example described above (normally, the high-probability state of the symbol, or , The difference is that the value added to the standby time saving counter 203ma is changed from "20" to "50" when the time saving pattern is won in the normal pattern low probability state with electric sapo). are processed in the same way. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1901, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S205N) will be described. FIG. 1901 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S205N). As shown in FIG. 1901, in the time saving setting process (S205N), the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is greater than 0 for the time saving setting process (see S205L in FIG. 1863) of the fifty-first control example described above. , When the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0, that is, when the time-saving state ends in the state of time-saving stock, the processing of setting the number of times of time-saving state (second time-saving state) newly set are different, and otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
When the time saving setting process (S205N) is executed, first, the same S8401H to S8402L processes as the time saving setting process (see S205L in FIG. 1863) of the fifty-first control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S8402L, if it is determined that the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is greater than 0 (S8402L: Yes), then the additional value is determined by lottery based on the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma (S8401N), the determined addition value is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S8402N), and the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is subtracted by the additional value (S8403N).
After that, S8405L and S5406L which are the same as the time saving setting process (see S205L in FIG. 1863) of the fifty-first control example described above. , and terminate this process. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, the number of times of reduced working hours indicated by the reduced working hours winning information stocked at the end of the reduced working hours state (waiting reduced working hours counter 203ma value) is not set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, but a part thereof is set.
By configuring in this way, even immediately after setting a new time saving state based on the time saving winning information stocked, it is possible to create a situation in which the time saving winning information is stocked (held). . In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the time saving winning information stocked, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting how long the time saving state will continue.

Next, the contents of the update process (S204N) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1902 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S204N). In this update process (S204N), for the update process (see S205H in FIG. 1773) executed in the fifty-first control example described above, the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is also 1 each time a special symbol variation is executed. They are different in that they are configured to be subtracted, but otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the update process (S204N) is executed, first, the same processes from S8301 to S8304 as the update process (see S205H in FIG. 1773) executed in the fifty-first control example described above are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the standby time reduction counter 203ma is greater than 0 (S8301N), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S8301N: Yes), the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is subtracted by 1 (S8302N), It is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203i and the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S8303N). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S8301N (S8301N: No), the process of S8302N is skipped and the process proceeds to S8303N.
In the processing of S8303N, if it is determined that the value is not 0 (S8303N: No), the processing from S8306 to S8302H, which is the same as the update processing executed in the fifty-first control example (see S205H in FIG. 1773), is executed. , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8303N, when it is determined that it is 0 (S8303N: Yes), the value of the special figure lottery counter is read (S8304N), and the value obtained by subtracting the value of the read special figure lottery counter from 900 is changed normally. The value of the counter 203pa is set (S8305N), and the process proceeds to S8307.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1903, the contents of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example will be described. FIG. 1903 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-up process. In the start-up process in the fifty-third control example, RAM initialization (S1716H) is performed for the contents of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example. After executing, the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa is set to 900 (S1701N), and when it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal (S1707H: Yes), payout control The difference is that the state command including the information indicating the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa is transmitted (S1702N) after transmitting the payout return command to the device (S1709H). The rest is the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

By configuring in this way, when the initial setting process (RAM clearing process) is executed for the RAM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the granting condition (usually The initial value (900) can be reliably set as the value of the variation counter 203pa). Further, when the RAM clearing process is not executed, the value of the normal fluctuation counter 203pa stored in the RAM 202 can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the start-up process. , and the remaining period until the ceiling privilege managed by the audio lamp control device 113 is given can be suppressed.
<Regarding the 54th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1904 to 1918. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifty-first control example wins the time-saving symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, provides a plurality of time-saving winning information. The difference is that it is configured so that it cannot be held.
That is, in the fifty-first control example described above, when the number of time-saving design winning times by the time-saving design lottery executed during the time-saving state is multiple times, time-saving winning information (time-saving number of times of the second time-saving state) is accumulated. On the other hand, in the 54th control example, when the number of time-saving design winning times by the time-saving design lottery executed during the time-saving state is multiple times, any one time-saving design winning Corresponding time-saving winning information (time-saving number of times in the second time-saving state) is configured to be settable.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the excessive number of time-saving symbols from being won in the time-saving state and the setting of an excessively large number of times of time-saving as the second time-saving state.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-third control example described above, the number of time reductions included in the holding time reduction winning information (the number of standby time reductions) is It is configured to be decremented each time it is executed. Then, when the time saving pattern is won while holding the time saving winning information, the number of standby time saving times included in the holding time saving winning information and the time saving pattern type set for this time saving pattern winning Time saving corresponding to the type It is configured to compare the number of times and , and to leave the short-time winning information of the one with the higher number of times. In other words, if you win multiple time-saving patterns during the time-saving state, only the time-saving winning information that increases the number of time-savings set as the second time-saving state that is set after the current time-saving state ends (stock ).
By constructing in this way, even if only one piece of time saving winning information can be held, the time saving winning information most advantageous to the player can be continuously held among the time saving patterns won during the time saving state. , it is possible to suppress providing the player with an excessively disadvantageous time-saving state.
In addition, in the fifty-fourth control example, when the time-saving design is won, any one of the four types of time-saving design types (time-saving design A to time-saving design D) can be determined. Depending on the determined time saving pattern type, the number of times of saving time (the number of times of saving time that can be given) included in the time saving winning information is configured to be different.
In other words, as in the 51st control example described above, if the number of times of reduced working hours given when the reduced working hours pattern is elected is fixed (20 times), when the reduced working hours design is elected just before the reduced working hours state ends However, since the number of times of standby time reduction at the time the time saving state ends will always be greater than when the time saving pattern is won immediately after the time saving state starts, the player for the time saving pattern lottery immediately after the time saving state starts The problem arises that it is not possible to interest

On the other hand, in this 54th control example, since the number of times of time saving given when the time saving pattern is won is different according to the time saving pattern type to be set, it is possible to give time saving immediately after the time saving state is started If you win a time-saving design that has a large number of time-saving design types (for example, time-saving design D with 300 times of possible time-savings) is set, you can give it just before the end of the time-saving state. It is possible to increase the number of times of standby time reduction at the time when the time reduction state is completed, as compared with the case of winning the time reduction pattern set (for example, time reduction pattern A with 30 times of available time reduction times).
Therefore, immediately after the time saving state is set, the player can be interested in the result of the time saving pattern lottery, so that the player who is playing the game during the time saving state will not get tired of the game. can be suppressed.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example is similar to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-second control example described above, so that the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established based on the result of the special symbol lottery. It consists of Concretely, it is configured so that the time saving state is ended in a part when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate an event that the time saving state ends before the special symbol variation for the time saving number of times set for the time saving state is executed, so the time saving state is set. Immediately after the winning, a time-saving pattern is won, and a game aimed at creating a time-saving stock state can be played.
Furthermore, in the fifty-fourth control example, in addition to the big hit fluctuation production that can notify that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit by using the fluctuation production executed during the time saving state, it is possible to inform that the time saving pattern has been won. It is constituted so as to be able to execute a noticeable time-saving pattern variation performance and a small winning variation performance capable of notifying that a small winning has been won. By configuring in this way, by grasping the contents of the variable production executed during the time saving state, the game situation after the current time saving state ends (new time saving state (second time saving state) is set) (whether or not) can be provided to the player.

<Regarding the effect content in the fifty-fourth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 1904 to 1907, the content of the performance during the time saving state, which is the characteristic performance among the various performances executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example, will be described. Descriptions of the same effects as those executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example and the same display elements displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1904(a), the display screen when the first time saving state (time saving state) is set will be described. Drawing 1904 (a) is a figure showing an example of the production screen displayed immediately after the 1st time saving state is set up. As shown in FIG. 1904(a), when the first time-saving state is set, a character 801 imitating a rabbit is running with a friend character 8010 imitating a turtle, and V appears in the main display area Dm. A time-saving effect for acquiring the icon 8010v and the UP icon 8020v is executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the contents of the time-saving production executed during the first time-saving state, "Get 'V' for a big hit, and get 'UP' to raise the level of your ally. ” is written.
In the diagram shown in FIG. 1904( a ), “LV1” is displayed for the ally character 8010 . Here, the "LV" given to the ally character 8010 will be explained. In the fifty-fourth control example, based on the number of remaining time reductions in the set time reduction state (first time reduction state) and the number of available time reductions included in the time reduction winning information held by the time reduction symbol winning, ally character 8010 The "LV" of the teammate character 8010 can be displayed in four stages from LV1 to LV4. This "LV" is when the time saving state ends at the present time (when the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the small winning, or when the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the specified number of special symbol fluctuations Case) is a display mode for suggesting the contents of the newly set time saving state, and as the "LV" rises, a new time saving state (second time saving state) is created with many time saving times at the end of the time saving state The player is notified that the situation is likely to be set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1904(b), the contents of the presentation displayed when the time-saving design is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving presentation will be described. FIG. 1904(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the friend character LV up effect is executed during the time saving effect.

As shown in FIG. 1904(b), when the production mode for raising the LV of the ally character is determined based on the time-saving symbol winning, the character 801 acquires the UP icon 8020v, and the ally character 8010 The display of attached "LV" is variable. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1904(b), the display mode of LV1 given to the friend character 8010 changes to LV2, and the mode corresponding to the LV (LV2) given as the display mode of the friend character 8010 is reduced. Aura is displayed. In this way, by varying the content of the LV display given to the friend character 8010 and also varying the display mode of the friend character 8010 itself, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the LV has increased.
In the diagram shown in FIG. 1904(b), only the display mode that allows the player to grasp the current LV assigned to the ally character 8010 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to display a display mode indicating the upper limit value (in this example, "4)) of the LV attached to the ally character 8010. By configuring in this way, when the time saving effect is started While comparing the LV attached to the ally character 8010, the current LV, and the upper limit LV, the current game situation (the contents of the time saving state newly set when the time saving state ends at the present time) can be easily predicted.
Further, details will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case where an effect is executed to raise the current "LV" by multiple steps at once, the display mode of the UP icon 8020v displayed in the main display area Dm is changed from the normal display mode. Alternatively, the action for the character 801 to acquire the UP icon 8020v may be a special action different from the normal action. By configuring in this way, before the display mode of the "LV" attached to the allied character 8010 actually changes, the degree of increase of the "LV" given to the allied character 8010 and the It is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the "LV" of.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1905 to 1907(a), the contents of the effect executed when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is other than the big win, the determination of the small win (small win lottery) can be executed, and the small win is won. In this case, "small hit A" (selection rate 70%) and "small hit B" (selection rate 30%) can be set as the small hit type. Then, when the small winning type "small winning A" is set, the time saving end condition is established.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example, by winning the small hit of "small win A" during the time saving state, the process of ending the time saving state regardless of the number of remaining time saving is executed. is doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is playing a game in the time saving state to predict when the time saving state will end, and to reduce the time while maintaining a sense of tension. Since the game can be executed during the state, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.
Here, in the fifty-fourth control example, even if the time-saving end condition is established based on the small hit winning, if the time-saving winning information is stocked at that time, the stocked time-saving winning information A new time saving state (second time saving state) can be set based on. Therefore, whether or not the current small winning is "small winning A" as the production content of the small winning variation production executed when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving production is the small winning. A production mode that suggests (notifies), a production mode that suggests (notifies) whether or not time-saving winning information is stocked in the case of winning "small hit A", and time-saving winning information. , a performance mode that suggests (informs) the result of comparing the number of remaining time reductions in the currently set time reduction state and the number of time reductions in the newly set time reduction state (second time reduction state) can be set. is doing.
First, when the small hit variation effect is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 1905(a) is displayed. Figure 1905 (a) shows an example of the display screen displayed in the variable production (small hit suggestion production) executed when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery during the first time saving state (during the time saving production). It is a diagram.
As shown in FIG. 1905(a), in the small winning indication effect, an enemy character 8030 imitating a monster is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the effect of attacking the character 801 and the character 801 and the ally character 8010 being the enemy character. An effect of running away from 8030 is executed. In the main display area Dm, the text "Avoid the enemy's attack" is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide display mode for showing the effect content of the small hit suggestion effect, "If you are defeated by the enemy The characters "time saving end" are displayed. In other words, the enemy character 8030 displayed in the main display area Dm becomes an effect mode indicating that the small winning is won.

After that, if the enemy's attack cannot be avoided, the display screen shown in FIG. 1905(b) is displayed. FIG. 1905(b) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when an enemy's attack hits, as an effect mode of a small winning suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 1905(b), when the presentation mode (defeat presentation mode) in which the enemy's attack hits is set, the enemy character 8030 executes an attack action using the tail, and the character 801 and the ally character An effect is executed in which 8010 is attacked and falls down. This defeat performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when winning the small winning type (small winning A) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied.
If this defeat effect mode is set, there is a possibility that the time saving state will end based on this small winning election and the normal state will be set (the possibility that the time saving end condition ), as a display mode (display mode of the display area Dm7) for indicating the number of remaining time reductions in the currently set first time reduction state, the player cannot grasp the number of remaining time reductions "?" is displayed.
By configuring in this way, the time saving state ends in a state where the display mode indicating the number of remaining time saving times is displayed (for example, a state where "remaining 40 times" is displayed in the display area Dm7 as the remaining time saving times). It is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by doing so. In addition, this defeat production mode is a production mode that can be selected when winning the "small hit A", but for example, even if the "small hit A" wins and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving winning information is displayed. If it is in a stocked state, a new time saving state (second time saving state) is set again.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1906(a), the contents of the effect when the revival effect indicating the time-saving stock state is executed after the defeat effect mode is executed will be described. FIG. 1906(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed in the revival effect executed after the defeat effect mode shown in FIG. 1905(b). As shown in FIG. 1906(a), when the resurrection effect is executed, the defeated ally character 8010 stands up and the effect of the action to drive away the enemy character 8030 is executed, and the newly set second time saving state is executed. "+85" is displayed as a display mode for showing the number of time reductions. Then, as a display mode for guiding the number of remaining time reductions, "remaining 85 times" indicating the number of time reductions in the newly set second time reduction state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 1906 (a), the number of times of reduced working hours indicated by the stocked time-saving winning information (85 times) is greater than the number of remaining working hours (40 times) at the time of winning a small hit, that is, set first The number of times of reduced working hours in the newly set reduced working hours state (second reduced working hours state) is greater than the number of reduced working hours remaining in the reduced working hours state (first reduced working hours state), and it is advantageous for the player to win a small hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1906(a), it is possible to inform the player that ending the time-saving state is advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1906(b), the LV of the ally character 8010 is the upper limit (4) in the time saving production, that is, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state that can be set based on the time saving pattern winning (the number of times of saving time that can be granted ), the contents of the time-saving production executed in a state where the number of times of time-saving is held a predetermined number of times (100 times) or more will be described. FIG. 1906(b) is a diagram showing the effect content of the small winning suggestion effect executed when the LV of the ally character 8010 is "LV4".
As shown in FIG. 1906(b), when the "LV" of the ally character 8010 is "LV4", it is a situation in which a considerable amount of time-saving winning information is held, and the enemy character 8030 is attacked. A production is executed in which the ally character 8010 parries all the attacks of the enemy character 8030 . By configuring in this way, by raising the "LV" of the ally character 8010 for the player who is playing the game in the time saving state, the game can be played while expecting that "LV4" will be set. can be done.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1907(a), the contents of the small winning suggestive effect executed when "small winning B" is won will be described. FIG. 1907(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the small win suggestive effect executed when "small win B" is won. As shown in FIG. 1907(a), in the small winning suggesting effect executed when "small winning B" is won, the character 801 always avoids the attack of the enemy character 8030, and the time saving currently held is executed. The character "100 or more" is displayed as a privilege display mode corresponding to the content of the winning information (the number of times that can be given).
In this way, even when winning a small win for which a small win type (small win B) for which the time saving end condition is not satisfied is set, the small win suggestion production is configured to execute the small win suggestion production. It is possible to reduce the frequency of ending the time saving state and shifting to the normal state after the performance is executed. Furthermore, by making it possible to notify the player of the number of available time reductions (information based on the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma) as a privilege display mode, it is possible to impart unexpected benefits to the player.

In addition, when the second time saving state is set after the time saving state (first time saving state) ends, the effect of FIG. 1907(b) is executed. This figure 1907 (b) is a diagram showing an effect executed during the second time saving state. This second time saving state is a game state in which a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state, an electric sapo state) is set in the same manner as the fifty-first control example described above, and is a first time saving state. A game for executing the second special symbol lottery is performed by executing a right-handed game in the same manner as (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols).
Here, in the fifty-fourth control example, although it is possible to establish the time-saving end conditions of the first time-saving state based on the small winning, it is possible to establish the time-saving end conditions of the second time-saving state. It consists of Specifically, when the "small hit A" is won in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, but the second time saving state is a game state in which a low-probability state of normal symbols is set, so even if the "small win A" is won, the game state is not changed. Therefore, in the second time-saving state, the time-saving end condition based on the winning of the small prize is not established. In the fifty-fourth control example, since it is configured so that the time saving pattern can be won only during the first time saving state, it is configured so as not to win the time saving pattern during the second time saving state.
In other words, when the second time-saving state is set, the remaining short time is neither added (time-saving pattern winning) nor subtracted (satisfaction of time-saving end conditions based on small win winning). Time-saving state (with electric support) state) will be set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1907(b), an effect in which the character 801 and the ally character 8010 run and only the V-icon 8010v appears is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, as a display mode for indicating the time saving state in which the remaining short time period does not change, a background image imitating a flower is displayed as a background image. Therefore, it is possible to inform the game player who continues to execute the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner about the change in the game based on the switching from the first time saving state to the second time saving state.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifty-fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1908 to 1912. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example has a time-saving random number table 202qf instead of the time-saving random number table 202mf compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example. The difference is that a winning type selection table 202qh and a small winning type selection table 202qi are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The time saving random number table 202qf is a data table referred to when executing determination of time saving winning in the special symbol lottery, and the time saving random number table 202mf of the pachinko machine 10 in the 51st control example described above (Fig. 1858 (b ) is different in that the game state in which the judgment of the time saving symbol winning is executed is different from the reference).
Here, with reference to FIG. 1909(a), the contents defined in the random number table 202qf per time saving will be specifically described. Drawing 1909 (a) is a figure showing typically the contents prescribed in random number table 202qf per time saving. As shown in FIG. 1909 (a), in the time saving random number table 202qf, the special symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the set game state is "first time saving (first time saving It is defined that the determination of the time saving symbol election is executed only when it is in the state).
Specifically, the special symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the set game state is "first time saving (first time saving state)" 1st hit random number obtained when it is A value determined as a time-saving design winning is defined for the range of the value of the counter C1 of "100 to 144".
Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first random number counter C1, 45 (100 to 144) random numbers (counter values) are associated with "time-saving symbol winning". Therefore, the probability of winning the time saving symbol in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state is 1/20 (45/900).

The small hit random number table 202qg is a data table referred to when executing the determination of the small hit winning in the special symbol lottery, and is the first random number counter determined to be the small hit winning according to the special symbol type. A value for C1 is specified.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the small hit random number table 202qg, the special symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is in the range of "200 to 217". It is defined as a value corresponding to small hit winning. On the other hand, the special symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value corresponding to the small hit winning is not defined.
Since the possible values (range) of the first per random number counter C1 are 900 of "0 to 899", the probability of winning a small prize by the second special symbol lottery is 1/50 (18/900). 1 There is no possibility of winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery.
Although the details will be described later, in this 54th control example, when the small hit is won, the small hit type is configured to be set, and when "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, It is configured so that an end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the one hour saving state is established. Therefore, winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery is a state in which a part of the requirements for establishing the time saving end condition is satisfied.

The time-saving per type selection table 202qh is a data table referred to when determining the time-saving design type set when the time-saving design is won. The time saving pattern type is stipulated. In the fifty-fourth control example, the contents of the time saving winning information (the number of times of time saving that can be granted) are defined differently according to the determined time saving pattern type. In other words, when the time-saving design is elected, it is possible to set time-saving states with different degrees of advantage.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1909(b), the contents of the time saving type selection table 202qh will be described. FIG. 1909(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving per type selection table 202qh. As shown in FIG. 1909 (b), in the time saving per type selection table 202qh, corresponding to the value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 obtained four types of time saving design types (time saving design A to time saving design D) are defined. ing. In addition, even if any time-saving pattern type is determined, the time-saving state to be set is configured to be the second state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns, state with electric sapo). there is
Specifically, when the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is in the range of "0 to 19", "time saving pattern A" is used as the time saving pattern type, and for the range of "20 to 69", "Time saving pattern B" as the time saving pattern type, for the range of "70 to 94", "time saving pattern C" as the time saving pattern type, for the range of "95 to 99", as the time saving pattern type "Time saving pattern D" is defined respectively.
When "time saving pattern A" is determined, "30 (times)" is given as the number of times of saving time, and when "time saving pattern B" is decided, "50 (times)" is the number of times of saving time that can be given. However, when "time saving pattern C" is determined, "100 (times)" is given as the number of times of saving time, and when "time saving pattern D" is decided, "300 (times)" is given as the number of times of saving time. )” is stipulated to be included in the short-time winning information.

The small hit type selection table 202qi is a data table that is referred to when determining the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won. Small hit types (small hit A, small hit B) are defined.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1909(c), the contents of the small hit type selection table 202qi will be described. Figure 1909 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202qi. As shown in FIG. 1909(c), the small hit type selection table 202qi defines "small hit A" and "small hit B" as the small hit types.
Specifically, for the range of "0 to 69" for the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5, "small hit A" as the small hit type, for the range of "70 to 99", "Small hit B" is defined as a small hit type.
In this 54th control example, it is configured to give different benefits according to the set small hit type, and when "small hit A" is set, the end condition of the first time saving state (time saving When the privilege to establish the end condition) is set to "small hit B", the privilege of informing the player of the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is given. In this way, different benefits can be given according to the set small win type, so that the player can receive benefits other than the privilege of winning a prize ball by the small win game executed when the small win is won. Since it can be provided redundantly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, referring to FIGS. 1910 to 1912, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-fourth control example will be described. The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-fourth control example is different from the ROM222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, with a small winning mode selection table 222qa and a time saving pattern It is different from the winning mode selection table 222qb in that a is added, and the rest is the same.
A small winning mode selection table 222qa is executed based on receiving a variation pattern command indicating that a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state). It is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the winning suggestion effect.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1911, the contents of the mode selection table 222qa at the time of winning a small win will be described. FIG. 1911 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the mode selection table 222qa when winning a small prize. As shown in FIG. 1911, in the small hit winning mode selection table 222qa, the type of time saving state that is set, the small hit type, the value of the time saving medium counter 223da, the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma, Different production modes are defined based on.
Specifically, when the game state is the first time saving state and the small hit type is "small hit A", the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma is 0 regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 223da. 1905(b)) in which the ally character 8010 is attacked by the enemy character 8030 and the end of the time saving state is notified (see FIG. 1905(b)), and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is 1 or more. , the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma is 1 or more, and the difference (the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma - the value of the time reduction medium counter 223da) is in the negative area, as a production mode, the friend character 8010 is the enemy A character 8030 is attacked, and thereafter, a friendly character 8010 is revived (see FIG. 1906(a)), an effect mode is defined indicating that the number of times of time saving is shortened, the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is 1 or more, and standby is performed. The value of the time saving number counter 223ma is 1 or more, and when the difference (the value of the waiting time saving number counter 223ma - the value of the time saving counter 223da) is in the positive area, the production mode is the production according to the level of the ally character. An effect mode (see FIGS. 1906(a) and 1906(b)) is stipulated in which the notification of extension of the number of time reductions is performed.

In addition, when the game state is the first time saving state and the small hit type is "small hit B", that is, when the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the attack of the enemy character 8030 is avoided, and the standby time saving number of times An effect mode (see FIG. 1907(a)) for informing information about the value of the counter 223ma is defined. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the second time-saving state, that is, in a state where there is no time-saving stock, an effect mode for notifying the small winning is defined regardless of the small winning type.
By stipulating the production mode of the small hit suggestion production in this way, information indicating whether the current time saving state ends or not, and whether a new time saving state is set by the small win winning this time Information and information indicating whether or not the total number of times of time saving is extended by setting a new time saving state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned information can be sequentially notified to the player in a series of flows (a series of effects in which the character 801 avoids the attack of the enemy character 8030) during the small winning suggestion production, the production effect of the small winning suggestion production can increase
In addition, in the fifty-fourth control example, it is possible to set an effect mode in which the enemy character 8030 appears as a small win suggestion effect when a small win is won during the time saving state, but in addition to this, the big win during the time saving state As a part of the big win variation performance executed at the time of winning, it may be possible to set a performance mode in which an enemy character 8030 appears. should be configured to By configuring in this way, the character 801 can perform a performance in which the character 801 confronts the enemy character 8030 as a winning performance executed during the time saving state, so there is an expectation of winning a jackpot when the enemy character 8030 appears You can enjoy the performance that is executed while holding the device, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.
Time saving pattern winning mode selection table 222qb, when determining the production mode of "LV" UP production that can be executed when the time saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (first time saving state) A referenced data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1912, the contents of the mode selection table 222qb at the time of time-saving design winning will be described. FIG. 1912 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving symbol winning mode selection table 222qb. In this time-saving pattern winning mode selection table 222qb, different performance modes are defined in association with the set time-saving design type, the value of the time-saving medium counter 223da, and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.
Here, in the fifty-fourth control example, as part of the time-saving effect executed during the time-saving state, the effect (level Up effect) is configured to be executable, and the more time-saving winning information (number of waiting time-savings) that is stocked (the number of waiting time-savings), the more specifically, the time-saving that is set after the current time-saving state ends A high level is given to the ally character 8010 as the state (second time saving state) can be set to many times of time saving.
By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in the level-up effect executed during the time-saving effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
Specifically, when the time saving pattern type is "time saving pattern A (30 times of possible time saving)" and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is in the range of "99 to 50", the value of the acquired production counter 223f The effect mode "no change" is defined for the entire range of "0 to 99", and when the value of the time saving counter 223da is in the range of "49 to 30", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the effect mode "no change" is defined, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is defined as "LV2" for the range of "50 to 99", and the time reduction medium counter 223da When the value is in the range of “29 to 0”, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 49”, and the effect mode “LV2” is obtained when the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “50 to 49”. 99”, the effect mode “LV3” is defined.

In addition, when the time saving pattern type is "time saving pattern B (50 times of possible time saving)" and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is in the range of "99 to 50", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 69”, the production mode “no change” is defined, the production mode “LV2” is defined for the range “70 to 99”, and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is in the range “49 to 30”. In the case of, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 49”, the effect mode “LV2” is the value of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of “50 to 99”. A mode "LV3" is defined, and when the value of the time saving counter 223da is in the range of "29 to 0", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 99" for the entire range, the production mode "LV3 ” is stipulated.
In addition, if the time saving pattern type is “time saving pattern C (100 times of possible time saving)” and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is in the range of “99 to 50”, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “0 to 39”, the rendering mode “no change”, the rendering mode “LV2” for the range “40 to 79”, and the rendering mode “LV3” for the range “80 to 99”. is defined, and when the value of the time saving counter 223da is in the range of "49 to 30", the production mode "LV3" is defined for the entire range of the value of the acquired production counter 223f "0 to 99". , If the value of the time saving counter 223da is in the range of "29 to 0", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", the production mode "LV3" is the acquired production counter 223f The effect mode "LV4" is defined for the range of the value of "50 to 99".
Then, if the time-saving design type is "time-saving design D (300 possible time-saving times)", the value of the time-saving counter 223da is the entire range of "99 to 0", and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 99”, the effect mode “LV4” is defined.
As described above, when "time saving pattern A" is set as the time saving pattern type, the number of possible time saving times is 30, and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is "99 to 50". If the time saving end condition based on the winning election is not satisfied, the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma (the number of times that can be given) becomes 0 until the current time saving state ends (until the remaining time saving number becomes 0) Therefore, "no change" is set as the effect mode, which does not notify that the time-saving symbol has been won. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, if a situation advantageous to the player (a situation in which it is difficult to set the second time saving state after the time saving state ends) occurs, the time saving Since the game player is not notified of the pattern winning, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second time saving state is not set after the time saving state ends despite the fact that the time saving pattern winning is notified.

In addition, when winning a time-saving pattern type with a large number of times that can be granted, a high-level performance mode is more likely to be selected than when winning a time-saving pattern type with a small number of times that can be granted, and a time-saving medium counter. The smaller the value of 223da (the fewer the number of remaining time reductions), the easier it is to select a high-level production mode. It is possible to inform the player that the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state will increase.
In addition, when the value of the time-saving medium counter 223da is in the range of "99 to 30", only when the time-saving pattern D is set as the time-saving pattern type, the production mode of "LV4" can be selected. In the first half of the state (the period when the number of remaining time reductions is 31 or more), if the display mode of "LV4" is displayed as the level of the ally character, notify that the time reduction pattern D has been set. It will be. Therefore, depending on when and how the level of the ally character rises in the time saving state, it is possible to grasp the stocked time saving winning information, so the effect (level up effect) that makes the player more interested is executed. can do.
In addition, the detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 1916, but in the case of winning the time-saving design, the presentation mode (friend level) selected with reference to the time-saving design winning mode selection table 222qb has already been set. If the player's level is lower than the ally's level, the level-up effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the level of the friend character that has already been notified from dropping in the middle.
Returning to FIG. 1910(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 1910(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 1910(b), this fifty-fourth control example is different from the above-described fifty-first control example in that an ally level counter 223qa is added, but the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and the description thereof is omitted.

The ally level counter 223qa is a counter for storing the level given to the ally character 8010, and is configured so that "1" is set as an initial value. Then, when determining whether the selected level is higher than the current level (counter value) by referring to the time saving symbol winning mode selection table 222qb (see S5154P in FIG. 1916), the selected level If it is determined that the level is higher (S5154P in FIG. 1916: Yes), a value corresponding to the level selected this time is set (see S5156P in FIG. 1916). Then, when the time saving state ends, the initial value is set (cleared) (see S5161P in FIG. 1916).
<Regarding control processing in the fifty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1913 to 1918, the contents of control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example, instead of the time-saving lottery process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see S8002L in FIG. 1862), the time-saving The lottery process (see S8002P in FIG. 1913) is replaced with the update process (see S205H in FIG. 1773), and the update process (see S204P in FIG. 1914) is replaced with the time saving setting process (see S205L in FIG. 1863) instead of the time saving setting process. (See S205P in FIG. 1915), and instead of the time saving state production setting processing (see S5102L in FIG. 1866) performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the time saving state production setting processing (FIG. 1916) S5102P of) is different in that the production setting process (S5165P of FIG. 1918) is provided at the end of the first time saving state instead of the production setting process (S5165L of FIG. 1867) at the end of the first time saving state. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to Drawing 1913, processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8002P) are explained. FIG. 1913 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving lottery process (S8002P). In this time saving lottery process (S8002P), for the time saving lottery process (see S8002L in FIG. 1862) of the fifty-first control example described above, the process of determining the time saving design type at the time of the time saving design winning, and the determined time saving design type The process of determining whether to set the corresponding time saving winning information to the value of the waiting time saving number counter 223ma is different in that it is configured to be executable, and the rest is the same.
As shown in FIG. 1913, when the time saving lottery process (S8002P) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read to identify the currently set game state (S8101L), Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the time saving per random number table 202qf (S8101P). Here, in the time saving random number table 202qf, the special symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the current game state is "first time saving (first time saving state)" (game situation ), the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the time-saving symbol winning is defined, and in the other game situations, the time-saving symbol winning is defined so as not to occur. Therefore, in the time-saving design lottery executed in the process of S8101P, the special design type is the second special design (special figure 2), and the current game state is "first time-saving (first time-saving state)". Except for the case (game situation), the lottery result of the time-saving design non-winning is always obtained.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S8101M is the time saving pattern winning (S8103L), and if it is determined that the time saving pattern is winning (S8103L: Yes), refer to the time saving per type selection table 202qh Determine the time saving pattern type (S8102P), read the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma (S8103P), and determine whether the waiting time saving counter 203ma is greater than the given time saving number corresponding to the time saving pattern type set this time. (S8104P).
In other words, in the process of S8104P, the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is replaced with the time reduction winning information (given time reduction number of times) based on the time reduction symbol election won this time, the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is determined, a process for specifying the time-saving winning information to be retained which is advantageous to the player is executed.
In the process of S8104P, the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is not greater than the time reduction winning information (number of times given) based on the time reduction design winning this time, that is, the time reduction winning information based on this time reduction design winning is held. If it is determined that a time saving state (second time saving state) advantageous to the player is set after the current time saving state ends, the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma corresponds to the time saving pattern won this time. (S8105P) to set the number of times of time saving to be given, set the time saving design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device (S8105L), and finish this process.
In addition, in the processing of S8104P, the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma is greater than the time reduction winning information (number of times given) based on the time reduction symbol winning this time, that is, the value of the current standby time reduction counter 203ma is held. If it is determined that a time saving state (second time saving state) advantageous to the player is set after the current time saving state ends, the first symbol display device is displayed without executing the processing of S8105P. A time-saving design of the special design to be displayed is set (S8105L), and this processing is terminated.

In addition, when it is determined that it is not time saving symbol winning in the process of S8103L (S8103L: No), this process is terminated and the process shifts to small hit lottery process. Here, small hit lottery processing will be briefly described. In the fifty-fourth control example, similarly to the fifty-second control example described above, after executing the determination of the time-saving design winning, the determination of the small hit winning is executable, and the time-saving design lottery process (S8002P) is executed. After that, a small winning lottery process (not shown) is executed.
When this small hit lottery process is executed, first, whether the lottery result of the special pattern is determined to be time-saving design winning, that is, in the above-described time-saving lottery process (see S8002P in FIG. 1913), whether it is determined to be time-saving design winning is discriminated, and when it is discriminated that the time-saving symbol has been won, this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving symbol has not been won, a small winning lottery is executed with reference to the small winning random number table 202qg, and the lottery result is obtained. Then, when it is determined that the small hit is won, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired, the small hit type is selected from the small hit type selection table 202qi, and the special symbol small to be displayed on the first design display device. A winning pattern is set, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a small hit, the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device is set as a missing symbol, and this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1914, the contents of the update process (S204P) will be described. FIG. 1914 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the update processing (S204P). This update process (S204P), for the update process (see S205H in FIG. 1773) executed in the fifty-first control example described above, the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma every time the special symbol variation is executed ( The difference is that they are configured to be updated (subtracted) every time update processing is performed, and otherwise the same processing is configured to be performed. Note that the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

That is, in the fifty-fourth control example, unlike the fifty-first control example described above, during the time saving state (the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more), the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is configured to be subtracted. ing. That is, the number of times of saving time (number of times of giving time saving) included in the time saving winning information held (stocked) based on the fact that the time saving pattern was won in the special pattern lottery during the time saving state is now set as the time saving number of times of the time saving state. It is configured to be subtracted together. By configuring in this way, the number of times of time saving of a new time saving state (second time saving state set based on the stocked time saving winning information) set after the current time saving state ends It can be made different according to the timing. Therefore, since the number of times of time saving set as the second time saving state can be varied, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.
As shown in FIG. 1914, when the update process (S204P) is executed, in addition to the various processes executed in the update process (see S205H in FIG. 1773) executed in the fifty-first control example described above, It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203ma is greater than 0 (S8301P), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S8301P: Yes), the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is subtracted by 1 (S8302P), and than 0 The difference is that when it is determined that the size is not large (S8301P: No), the processing of S8302P is skipped. Other processing contents are the same, and the description thereof is omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1915, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S205P) will be described. FIG. 1915 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S205P). In this time saving setting process (S205P), since the same process as the time saving setting process (S205L in FIG. 1863) in the fifty-first control example described above is executed, the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1916 to 1918. FIG. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example is the effect setting processing during the time saving state (see S5102L in FIG. 1866) for the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above. ) Instead of the production setting process during the time saving state (see S5102P in FIG. 1916), the production setting process at the end of the first time saving state (see S5165L in FIG. 1867) Instead of the production setting process at the end of the first time saving state (FIG. 1918 , S5165P), and other processing contents are the same. Descriptions of the same processing contents are omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 1916, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5102P) in a time saving state are explained. FIG. 1916 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5102P) during the time saving state. This time-reduction state production setting process (S5102P) is performed during the time-reduction state in the same manner as the time-reduction state production setting process (see S5102L in FIG. 1866) for the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above. When a variation pattern command indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is received, processing for determining the performance mode of the variation performance corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed, and the performance mode corresponding to the time-saving pattern winning is executed. and the contents of the processing for determining the performance mode corresponding to the winning of the jackpot are different; The difference is that the processing to be set is added, and the other processing contents are the same.
When the time saving state effect setting process (S5102P) is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery of this time is read out from the received variation pattern command (S5151L), and the lottery result is a time saving symbol winning. (S5152L). In the process of S5152L, if it is determined that the time-saving design winning (S5152L: Yes), next time-saving design winning this time determines whether it is the time-saving design winning that updates the value of the waiting time-saving counter 203ma ( S5151P). In the processing of this S5151P, in the time-saving lottery processing (see S8002P in FIG. 1913) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is determined that the time-saving design has been won, and a command indicating that the processing of S8105P has been executed has been received. is determined.
In the process of S5151P, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is updated (S5151P: Yes), it becomes a notification target of the time reduction symbol election, so refer to the time reduction symbol election mode selection table 222qb , determines the ally level (performance mode) (S5152P), reads the value of the ally level counter 223qa (S5153P), and determines whether the value of the ally level counter 223qa is greater than the ally level determined this time (S5154P). .
In the processing of S5154P, if it is determined that the ally level determined this time is greater than the value of the ally level counter 223qa (S5154P: No), the effect mode corresponding to the ally level determined this time (level-up effect production mode) is determined (S5155P), the value of the ally level counter 223qa is updated to the value corresponding to the ally level determined this time (S5156P), and the value of the waiting time reduction counter 203ma is changed to the variation pattern received this time The value corresponding to the time saving pattern type included in the command is updated (S5157P), and the process proceeds to S5165P.

Also, in the processing of S5154P, if it is determined that the value of the teammate level counter 223qa is greater than the teammate level determined this time, that is, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 has already been displayed by the level-up effect. If the "LV" of the friendly character 8010 displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is determined to be lower than the "LV" of the friendly character 8010 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by the processing of S5152P, , S5155P to S5157P are skipped and the process proceeds to S5165P.
By configuring in this way, it is a level-up production for suggesting to the player the advantageous degree of the stocked time-saving winning information, and when a high-level ally level is displayed, a low-level In the level-up performance in which the performance state is determined so that the advantageous degree of the stocked time-saving winning information is likely to be higher than when the teammate level is displayed, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. It is possible to suppress execution of an effect that lowers the displayed ally level.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to the execution of the effect of lowering the level of the ally, and at the time when the level-up effect is executed, Since it is possible to inform the player that the level will rise, and when the production result of the level up production is displayed, it is possible to inform the specific ally level, so the advantage of the stocked short-time winning information The content of the presentation for suggesting can be notified step by step, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.
In addition, in the fifty-fourth control example, when the conditions for increasing the friend level displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are satisfied, the level-up effect is executed. It is sufficient if the lowering effect is not executed. For example, when the value of the ally level counter 223qa and the ally level determined this time are the same, the level-up effect in which the ally level does not change may be executed. In addition, in a part of the case where the variation pattern command indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost is received, a level-up effect in which the ally level does not change may be executed.

By configuring in this way, the execution frequency of the level-up effect can be increased, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Even in this case, since the effect of lowering the teammate level is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5151P, if it is determined that the time saving pattern winning that the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is not updated, that is, even if this time saving design winning is invalidated, the processing of S5155P to S5157P is performed. Skip and proceed to the processing of S5165P. In other words, in the time saving lottery process (see S8002P in FIG. 1913) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, even though the time saving pattern was won, it was determined not to update the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma. When receiving a variation pattern command corresponding to symbol winning, it is configured not to execute an effect (level-up effect) indicating time-saving symbol winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent unnecessary level-up effects from being executed for the player.
In the process of S5165P, the first time-saving end effect setting process (S5165P) is executed, and then the process ends. note that. The first time saving end effect setting process (S5165P) is a process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the change pattern command determined to be the final change in the time saving state based on the value of the time saving medium counter 223da. 1918, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.
Returning to FIG. 1916, the description continues. In the process of S5152L, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving design winning (S5152L: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a jackpot winning (S5157L), and if it is determined that a jackpot is winning (S5157L: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the ally level counter 223qa is 1 or more (S5158P). (S5159P), set the time reduction stock flag to OFF (S5160P), clear the value of the ally level counter 223qa (S5161P), and reset the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma. It is cleared to 0 (S5160L), and this processing ends.

By configuring in this way, in the time saving state, after the level-up effect indicating the state of stocking the time saving winning information is executed, when the jackpot is won, the ally character whose ally level is rising Since it is possible to execute the jackpot variation production in the production mode using 8010, even if the time saving winning information stocked based on the jackpot winning is deleted, the state of stocking the time saving winning information is maintained. The effect result of the shown level-up effect (a friendly character whose level has increased) can be effectively used for the effect.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5158P, when it is determined that the value of the teammate level counter 223qa is not 1 or more, that is, when the teammate character 8010 to which the level is assigned is not displayed, the variation pattern command indicating the winning of the jackpot is received. If so, the character 801 decides the effect mode in which the character 801 gets the V-icon 8010v (S5169L), executes the processing of S5160, and terminates this processing.
Also, in the process of S5157L, if it is determined that it is not a big hit, then it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S5157L), and if it is determined that it is a small hit ( S5157: Yes), a small winning effect setting process is executed (S5162P), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S5157L: No), the same first time-saving end effect setting process as S5165P is executed (S5163P), and then this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1917, the processing contents of the effect setting process (S5162P) at the time of a small hit executed in the effect setting process (see S5102P in FIG. 1916) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1917 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect setting process (S5162P) at the time of the small hit. In this small hit effect setting process (S5162P), the set small hit type and the value of the standby time short counter 223ma are used to determine the effect mode of the small hit suggestion effect indicating the small win winning. Processing is performed.

First, when the effect setting process (S5162P) at the time of the small hit is executed. Based on the information included in the received variation pattern command, read the small hit type (S5171P), read the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S5172P), read the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma (S5173P). Then, by using the various information read out by the processing of S5171P to S5173P, the small hit winning mode selection table 222qa is referred to and the production mode of the small winning suggestion production is determined (S5174P).
Next, it is determined whether the small hit type is a small hit A (S5175P), and if it is determined to be a small hit A (S5175P: Yes), the time saving stock flag 223mb is set to off (S5176P ), the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is set to the value of the time reduction counter 223da (S5177P), the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S5178P), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5175P, if it is determined that it is not a small hit A (it is a small hit B) (S5175P: No), the effect mode indicating the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma is determined (S5179P), and this processing exit.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1918, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5165P) at the time of the end of the 1st time saving state are explained. FIG. 1918 is a flow chart showing the process content of the effect setting process (S5165P) at the end of the first time saving state. In the production setting process at the end of the first time saving state (S5165P), the value of the time saving medium counter 223da becomes 1, and it is determined that the final fluctuation of the time saving state is the special symbol fluctuation. Processing is executed, the first time saving state end time production setting processing (see S5165L of Figure 1867) of the fifty-first control example described above, processing content for determining the production mode for notifying that the time saving state is extended are different, and the other processing contents are the same. Descriptions of the same processing contents are omitted.
When the production setting process at the end of the first time saving state (S5165P) is executed, first, S5181L same as the production setting process at the end of the first time saving state of the 51st control example described above (see S5165L in FIG. 1867), and S5182L If it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is on in the processing of S5182L (S5182L: Yes), the effect mode indicating that the time saving state is extended is determined (S5181P), and then, The processing of S5185L and S5186L, which are the same as the production setting processing at the end of the first time saving state of the fifty-first control example (see S5165L in FIG. 1867), is executed, and this processing ends. In addition, when it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is not on (is off) in the process of S5182L (S5182L: No), the effect setting process at the end of the first time saving state of the fifty-first control example (Fig. 1867 (see S5165L of )) is executed, and the process ends.

In the process of S5181P, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm7 for showing the remaining number of times of the time saving state of the friend character 8010 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from "last" to the time saving mode. An effect mode is determined in which a number corresponding to the value of the number counter 223ma is variably displayed.
Here, in the fifty-fourth control example, when the time-saving design is won during the time-saving state, the level-up production is performed in a production mode according to the time-saving winning information (the value of the waiting time-saving counter 223ma) that is stocked (is). is configured to be executed, and when a display mode of a high level (for example, LV4) is displayed as a friend level, a newly set time saving state (second It is configured to be able to inform the player that it is a state where a large number of times is likely to be set as the number of times of time saving in the time saving state).
Therefore, in the final change of the time-saving state, an effect that indicates extension of the time-saving state can be provided to the player by using the friend character 8010 to which the friend level is assigned. In addition, in the fifty-fourth control example, since the performance mode of the level-up effect is determined by referring to the time-saving pattern winning mode selection table 222qb, the stocked time-saving winning information is advantageous to the player. That is, even if the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is large, it is possible to create an event in which the ally level does not rise (it rises slightly). Therefore, even if the final variation of the time saving state is executed while the ally level is low, the possibility of extending the time saving state can be left, so the player continues to be interested until the final change of the time saving state is completed. be able to.
In addition, in the 54th control example, when the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern D" that gives the most advantageous benefits to the player by winning the time-saving pattern is set, the ally level is always maximized (LV4). It is configured to execute a different level-up production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player who is playing the game in the time saving state to play the game with peace of mind. In addition, without being limited to this, when the time-saving pattern type "time-saving pattern D" that gives the most advantageous benefits to the player by winning the time-saving pattern is set, the level-up effect is not necessarily executed. can be By configuring in this way, even if the final variation of the time saving state is executed in a state where the ally level has not increased or has increased only a little, a large number of time saving times is notified as the number of time saving times of the extended time saving state. It is possible to make it easier, and to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

As described above, in the 51st control example to the 54th control example described above, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set or when the low probability state of normal symbols and the electric support state is set That is, the electric accessory 640a is a start winning opening accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a is opened by the normal pattern winning game executed based on the winning in the normal symbol lottery. A state in which control (electrical sapo control) is executed (electrical sapo state) to make it easier for the game ball to enter the winning opening where the game ball is easier to enter than the state where the game per normal is not executed ) also explained various control examples capable of executing the time-saving symbol election by the special symbol lottery.
It should be noted that it is of course possible to apply each technical idea based on the time-saving symbol winning used in each control example to other control examples. For example, in the 51st control example and the 52nd control example described above, if the time-saving design is won during the first electric support state, the number based on the time-saving design winning until the set first electric support state ends. The technical idea described in the fifty-fourth control example, in contrast to the fifty-first control example described above, is configured to wait for the setting of the two-electric support state. That is, when the time saving pattern is won during the first power support state, only the remaining period of the second power support state (number of power support times) set based on the time saving pattern winning is set, and during the first power support state Each time the special symbol lottery is executed, the remaining period of the second electric support state may be subtracted in the same manner as the remaining period of the first electric support state.
In addition, when the time-saving design lottery executed during the first electric support state, which is the technical idea described in the 54th control example, is selected, only the time-saving winning information related to the 1 time-saving design winning can be held. may be applied to the fifty-first control example and the fifty-second control example described above.
On the other hand, if the time-saving design is elected during the first electric support state described in the 51st control example or the 52nd control example described above, the time-saving design election is performed until the set first electric support state ends. The technical concept of waiting for the setting of the second power support state based on the above may be used in the fifty-fourth control example described above.

Furthermore, the following technical ideas may be applied to each control example described above. For example, when the time saving symbol is won during the first electric support state, it may be possible to provide a privilege to increase the remaining period of the first electric support state (remaining time saving number of times). Also, if you win a short time symbol during the first electric sapo state, the remaining period of the first electric sapo state (remaining time short number of times) is added, and the second electric sapo state, which is the remaining period, is a special that wins the short time symbol. It may be configured so that the setting can be made based on the stop display of the symbol variation.
In addition, in each of the control examples described above, after winning the time-saving design during the first electric support state, if the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery before the end of the first electric support state, the time-saving design is won. Although it is configured to clear the time-saving winning information about the second electric support state acquired based on the winning, it is possible to hold the time-saving winning information related to the second electric support state acquired based on the time-saving pattern winning even after winning the jackpot. may be configured.
In addition, when the special symbol lottery results in a specific lottery result other than the jackpot lottery, it may be constituted so as to clear the retained time-saving lottery information.
<Fifty-fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1919 to 1936. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, special symbol lottery is performed in the game state (normal state, first time saving state, second time saving state, third time saving state) set to a low probability state of special symbols. When it is executed, the time-saving pattern winning can occur, and when the time-saving pattern is won in the state where the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition of the time-saving state already set. Until is established, information indicating that the time saving pattern winning has occurred (time saving information) is stored (time saving stock), and the set time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state) With the termination as a trigger, a time saving state (second time saving state) corresponding to the stored time saving winning information can be set.

In addition to this, in the fifty-fifth control example, when a special lottery results in a specific lottery result (small hit) that is different from a big hit or a time-saving design winning, the set time-saving state setting (normal design high It is possible to clear part or all of the probability state setting and the setting of the electric sapo state) (to end part or all of the set time saving state). More specifically, the high probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo are terminated (if both the high probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo are set, clear both settings ) to end the small win (small win A58) that triggers, the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the state with the electric sapo (both the low probability state of the normal pattern and the state with the electric sapo are set In the case, clear the setting of the state with electric sapo), regardless of the small hit (small hit B58) that triggers and the type of time saving state that is set, the high probability state of the normal pattern is ended (normal pattern When the high probability state is set, clear only the setting of the high probability state of the normal pattern regardless of whether it is in the state with the electric sapo). Regardless of the type of time-saving state, end the state with electric sapo (when the state with electric sapo is set, the state with electric It is configured to provide a small hit (small hit C58) that serves as a trigger for clearing only).
Here, among game machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided. In such a conventional gaming machine, while a game state in which the degree of advantage is low is expected to shift to a game state in which the degree of advantage is high, in a game state in which the degree of advantage is high, the degree of advantage is high. It has a game property that makes the player expect to continue the game state for a longer period of time, and by varying the game property for each game state, the game is structured to have a sharpness. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a limit to the game states that can be provided (for example, normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, and latent probability state), so it is difficult to add sharpness to the game. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.
On the other hand, in this 55th control example, since it is configured to provide a specific condition (specific small hit winning) that can clear only a part of the setting of the time saving state, only the setting related to the time saving state can It is possible to form four different states, which are combinations of whether or not it is a probability state and whether or not it is a state with an electric support. In other words, considering two ways of whether or not the special pattern is in a high probability state, since it is configured to be able to form 8 different states (2 ways x 4 ways), the degree of advantage can be further diversified. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to give a sharpness to the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, by having a time-saving stock function like the fifty-first control example described above, for example, the first time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols, and , state with an electric sapo), it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of advantage is changed according to the situation when winning the small winning A58 (the lottery result clears all the setting of the time saving state). That is, if the time-saving stock has not occurred before the winning of the small hit A58, the normal symbol low-probability state and the state without electric sapo are shifted, while the time-saving stock has occurred, the normal symbol. Immediately after the low probability state and no electric sapo state are set, the time-saving stock is consumed and the electric sapo state is set. . As a result, even in the same game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage when the time-saving end condition is established varies depending on the situation (whether or not there is a time-saving stock).

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided, and when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in one game state, the game state is shifted to another game state with different degrees of advantage. It is widely known that In addition, among such gaming machines, there are those that are configured to be able to transition to different game states according to the type of transition condition that is established. By varying the degree of advantage according to the transition condition that is established, There is also a game that realizes a game property that makes one expect that a transition condition corresponding to a game state with a higher degree of advantage is satisfied. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a transition condition with a low degree of advantage is established, there is a possibility that the player will feel a great sense of disappointment, and the player's motivation for playing the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was a possibility that it would be lost.
On the other hand, in the fifty-fifth control example, even if the same time-saving end condition is satisfied in the same gaming state, the state of the transition destination according to the situation at the time when the time-saving end condition is satisfied (whether or not there is time-saving stock) are different, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which the degree of advantage is variable even if the same end condition is met in the same game state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, the degree of advantage is higher in the state with the electric sapo set to the low probability state of the normal symbols than in the state with the electric sapo set to the high probability state of the normal symbols. and More specifically, in the high-probability state of the normal pattern that is set mainly after the end of the jackpot, and the state with the electric sapo (first time-saving state), the conditions for ending the state with the electric sapo are the small hit A58 and the small While it is stipulated that one of the winning D58 will be elected, the low probability state of the normal pattern set mainly by the occurrence of the time saving pattern winning, and the state with electric support (second time saving state) In , by winning a small hit B58 or a small hit D58, the end condition of the state with electric support is established. And, in this fifty-fifth control example, as the small per type, the ratio of determining the small per A58 (94%), the ratio of determining the other small per type (total 6%) so as to be significantly higher It consists of In other words, in the first time-saving state (high probability state of the normal pattern, and the state with electric sapo), the setting of the first time-saving state is all cleared by determining the small hit A58 with a high probability when the small hit is elected. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state (normal pattern low probability state and no electric sapo state), on the contrary, when the small hit is elected, the small hit A58 is determined with a high probability, so that the second time-saving state remains. It is configured to be maintained. In other words, it is configured to provide a time saving state (first time saving state) in which the end condition of the time saving state is likely to be satisfied and a time saving state (second time saving state) in which the end condition is difficult to be satisfied. As a result, the low probability state of the normal pattern and the state with the electric sapo form an advantageous state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established than the high probability state of the normal pattern and the state with the electric sapo. Since it is possible to realize a very special and novel game, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, only when the lottery for the special symbol is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time-saving symbol winning can occur. In other words, only after winning the jackpot and moving to the first time-saving state (normal pattern high probability state and electric sapo state), time-saving design winning can not occur, to the second time-saving state It is a configuration that has no possibility of migration. By configuring in this way, in order to shift to the second time saving state, basically, in the first time saving state, after winning the time saving pattern first and saving time winning information is stored (stocking time saving Since it is necessary to shift to the second time-saving state when the time-saving end condition is established, the playability that expects that the time-saving end condition will not be satisfied depending on the presence or absence of the time-saving stock and the time-saving end condition are established. You can switch between the playability that you expect. That is, even in the same first time-saving state, if the time-saving stock is not possessed, the time-saving end condition will be satisfied, so that all the settings of the time-saving state will be cleared, so the degree of advantage will be low. In a situation where the time saving stock is already in possession, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving stock is consumed and the state shifts to the second time saving state with a higher degree of advantage. You can make a big difference in gender. Therefore, it is possible to expand the range of game playability and prevent the game from becoming monotonous, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the fifty-fifth control example, after the first time-saving state (normal pattern high probability state and electric sapo state) is set based on the end of the jackpot, at least the setting of the electric sapo state is cleared. Until then, the same system of performance mode is continuously executed so that it is relatively difficult for the player to grasp whether it is in a high probability state of normal symbols and whether it has a time saving stock. It is configured. In other words, when the time-saving stock occurs or when the first time-saving state transitions to the second time-saving state, the player is not immediately notified of these events, and the same state appears It is configured to set an effect mode that can make the player feel as if the game is continuing. Then, by varying the selection ratio (execution ratio) of some production modes that can be set in the variable display production depending on the situation (whether there is a time saving stock, whether it is a high probability state of normal symbols, etc.) It is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the stock is already possessed and whether or not the state is shifted to the low probability state of the normal pattern having a high degree of advantage from the performance mode of the variable display performance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game during the period from the end of the big win to the end of the state with electric support.
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fifth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 51 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifty-first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
<Regarding the effect content in the fifty-fifth control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 1919 to 1921, the characteristic presentation mode in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1919(a) is a diagram showing an example of a basic presentation mode in a state where at least the state with an electric sapo is set. Here, the state with an electric sapo means that the fluctuation time of the normal design fluctuation is shorter than the normal state (normal pattern low probability state and no electric sapo state), and when the normal design is won , the electric accessory 640a is set to an open pattern in which the opening time is relatively long, and the game ball frequently enters the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, so hitting to the left is performed. This is a state in which it is more advantageous for the player to hit to the right than to hit to the right. On the other hand, in the state without electric sapo, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is relatively long, and when the winning of the normal symbol is won, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to an extremely short time. Even if the player hits to the right, the frequency of lottery of normal symbols becomes low, and it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game of the normal symbols. It is a state in which it is almost impossible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol (a state in which the degree of advantage is higher when hitting left). As shown in FIG. 1919(a), in the state with the electric sapo in the fifty-fifth control example, as in the first time-saving state in the fifty-first control example described above, a character imitating a rabbit is placed near the center of the main display area Dm. The action 801 running from left to right is basically executed. In addition, the performance operation for notifying the winning of the jackpot by executing the action in which the character 801 obtains the V-icon 801V is common.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1919(a), in the fifty-fifth control example, instead of displaying the remaining number of times in the time saving state, the characters "win rate low" are displayed in the small display area Dm7. In addition, the text "If you meet an enemy, you're in a pinch to end your right-hand shot!?" From these display contents, if the rabbit-like character 801 encounters an enemy and is defeated by the enemy, the advantageous power supply state is ended, and even if the right-hand shot is performed, the second special To make a player intuitively understand that the pattern lottery is difficult to execute (it is necessary to advance the game by performing the lottery of the first special pattern by hitting to the left) to shift to a state without an electric sapo. be able to. In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, even if the state changes from the end of the jackpot to the state of no electric support (or winning the jackpot), basically the rabbit shown in FIG. An action in which the imitated character 801 runs from left to right continues to be executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to accurately grasp the current state. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Figure 1919 (b) shows that in the state where the state with support is set at least (the first time saving state or the second time saving state), the small hit of the type that at least ends the state with support (small hit D58, the first time saving It is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode when winning the small winning A58 in the state and the small winning B58 in the second time saving state. As shown in FIG. 1919(b), if a small win of a type that terminates the state with support is won in the state with support, a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm as a variable display effect for notifying the small win. A character 801 resembling a rabbit meets an enemy monster character 821, and then a rendition is executed in which the character 801 imitating a rabbit is attacked by the monster character 821 and blown away ( See FIG. 1919(b)). In addition, characters such as "Right-handed end..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the state with the electric sapo which is advantageous to the player has ended and the state has shifted to the state without the electric sapo in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left.
The effect of encountering the monster character 821 is executed when a small prize is won in a special symbol lottery. When a small win of a type that terminates the state with support is won, as described above, an effect of losing to the encountered monster character 821 is executed, and a small win of a type that at least maintains the state with support (small win C58 , a small win B58 in the first time saving state and a small win A58 in the second time saving state) are won, an effect of winning the monster character 821 is executed. As a result, when the monster character 821 appears, the game can be played while paying attention to whether the rabbit character 801 wins or not, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1920 and 1921, various suggestive effects that are executed during the state where the power supply is present will be described. As described above, in the fifty-fifth control example, while it is set to the electric sapo state, whether or not it is a high probability state of the normal symbol, whether or not the time saving stock is possessed (and whether the special symbol is high) By setting a common presentation mode (a presentation mode in which the rabbit character 801 runs to the right) irrespective of whether it is in a probability state or not, it is possible for the player to accurately grasp the current situation. It is configured to be difficult. However, if it is completely impossible to perceive the state while the support state is set, the game will be monotonous by continuing to hit right until the support state ends or a jackpot is won. As a result, it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, in the fifty-fifth control example, it is possible to suggest the presence or absence of time-saving stock and whether or not the high-probability state of normal symbols can be suggested by various state suggestion effects. As a result, the player can predict the current situation from the execution status of the state-indicating effect, so that a more suitable effect mode can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
FIG. 1920(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the state suggestive effect is set. As shown in FIG. 1920(a), when the variable display effect in which the state suggesting effect is set is executed, first, an effect in which a character 809 imitating an angel appears in the main display area Dm is executed, and a secondary display effect is executed. The characters "Angel found!!" are displayed in the display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can be made to understand that some kind of state-indicating effect will be executed.

FIG. 1920(b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a type of effect (time-saving stock suggesting effect) in which the degree of expectation of possessing the time-saving stock is high is executed as the state-suggesting effect. It is a figure showing. This time-saving stock suggestion production is a situation in which the normal pattern has a high probability, and the state with an electric sapo (first time-saving state) does not possess a time-saving stock (first time-saving stock suggestion lottery situation), and normal A situation in which a high probability state of the pattern and possessing a short-time stock with an electric sapo (second time-saving stock suggestion lottery situation), a low probability state of the normal pattern, and a state with an electric sapo (second 2 time saving state) is set (third time saving stock suggestive lottery situation), the selection rate is configured differently. More specifically, for example, in the first time-saving stock suggestion production lottery situation, the lottery probability of the time-saving stock suggestion production is set to 1/100, and in the second time-saving stock suggestion production lottery situation, the time-saving stock suggestion production lottery situation. The lottery probability is set to 1/20, and the lottery probability of the time saving stock suggesting performance is set to 1/50 in the third time saving stock suggesting performance lottery situation. In other words, while it is most likely to be executed if you have a time saving stock in the first time saving state, it is most likely to be executed if you do not have a time saving stock in the first time saving state It is a performance. For this reason, the more the time-saving stock suggestion production is executed, the higher the possibility that the time-saving stock is already possessed or the transition to the advantageous second time-saving state is performed, so the execution frequency of the time-saving stock suggestion production. By paying attention to , it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to predict the situation. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
As shown in FIG. 1920(b), when the time-saving stock suggesting effect is executed as the state suggesting effect, the angel character 809 irradiates the rabbit character 801 with light in the main display area Dm, An effect is executed in which a substantially spherical barrier is formed around the rabbit character 801 by a light effect. In addition, the display content of the small display area Dm7 is switched to the display of "invincible state remaining 4 times". Further, the characters "BARRIER GET!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, until the lottery for special symbols is executed four times, even if an enemy monster character 821 is encountered, the attack of the monster character 821 is nullified by the given barrier. It is possible to suggest to the player that an invincible state (a state in which there is no possibility of being defeated by the monster character 821) can be formed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the time-saving stock is in possession, this time-saving stock suggestion production may only be executed if the type of small hit that ends the state with support is not included in the hold. It is a performance. In other words, it also has an aspect as an effect suggesting to the player that the state with support will continue until at least the lottery of special symbols for the number of reserved balls is completed. Therefore, for the small display area Dm7, the number of counts for the current number of held balls is set as the number of calculations for the invincible state. In addition, although not shown in the figure, an effect is executed in which the barrier disappears and the invincible state is canceled in the variable display effect based on the last retained ball among the retained balls possessed at the start of the time saving stock suggestion effect. .
Next, referring to FIG. 1921(a), as the state suggestive effect, a type of effect (high continuous suggestive effect) in which the degree of expectation is set to a low probability state of normal symbols and a state with an electric sapo is set. The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when is executed will be described. As described above, in the fifty-fifth control example, the low probability state of normal symbols and the state with electric sapo is more likely to be the state with sapo than the high probability state of normal symbols and the state with electric sapo. Since the probability of winning the small hit of the type to be terminated (small hit A58, D58 in the high probability state of the normal pattern, small hit B58, D58 in the low probability state of the normal pattern) is low, there is an electric sapo state (by hitting right The state in which the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the number of balls in hand too much) can be easily continued for a long time. In other words, the low-probability state of the normal symbols forms a state in which the degree of advantage is higher than the high-probability state of the normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game with one goal of shifting to a low-probability state of normal symbols.
The high continuation suggestion production is a situation (first high continuation suggestion production lottery situation) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern and the state with electric sapo (first time saving state) is set, and the low probability state of the normal design And, the selection rate is configured differently in the situation (second high continuation suggesting effect lottery situation) in which the state with electric support (second time saving state) is set. More specifically, for example, in the first high continuation suggestive effect lottery situation, the lottery probability of the high continuation suggestive effect is set to 1/50, and in the second high continuation suggestive effect lottery situation, the high continuation suggestive effect lottery situation is set. The lottery probability is set to 1/10. As a result, the more the highly continuous suggestive performance is executed, the more likely it is to be in a low probability state of an advantageous normal pattern, so the player is made to predict the situation by paying attention to the execution frequency of the highly continuous suggestive performance. Playability can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 1921(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the high continuation suggestive effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 1921(a), when the high continuation suggestive effect is executed, the angel character 809 provides the rabbit character 801 with medicine enclosed in an Erlenmeyer flask in the main display area Dm. is executed. In addition, the characters "Superhuman drug GET!! Complete physical recovery!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to understand that the physical strength of the rabbit character 801 has recovered, and allow the player to recognize that an advantageous suggestion has been made. That is, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility of being set in a low probability state of normal symbols having a high degree of advantage and in a state with support.
Next, referring to FIG. 1921(b), as the state suggesting effect, a type of effect (high continuation confirmed effect) in which the low probability state of normal symbols advantageous to the player and the presence of an electric sapo is confirmed is executed. A description will be given of the mode of presentation when the This high continuation determination performance is a performance that is executed with a probability of 1/100 only in a situation where the low probability state of normal symbols and the state with an electric sapo are set. As shown in FIG. 1921(b), when the high continuation confirmation effect is executed, in the main display area Dm, the angel character 809 emits light to the small display area Dm7, causing the small display area Dm7 to An effect is executed to change the characters displayed in , to "high win rate". In addition, the characters "Status UP!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the game is set in an advantageous state in which the player can win with a high probability even if he/she encounters the enemy monster character 821 .
In this way, in the fifty-fifth control example, by setting a basically common presentation mode as the presentation mode in the state with the electric sapo, it is difficult to accurately identify the situation, and the state suggestion presentation Since it is possible to suggest the presence or absence of a short-time stock and the presence or absence of a transition to a low-probability state of normal symbols, the game property that allows the player to predict the current situation from the occurrence of the state-suggesting effect is realized. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1919 to 1921, the transition method of each state in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. Here, in the fifty-fifth control example, as described above, in addition to the small hit that triggers the end of the time saving state, while maintaining the presence of the electric sapo, the high probability state of the normal design is changed to the low probability state of the normal design. There is a small hit that triggers a change, and a small hit that triggers the end of the state with an electric sapo while maintaining the high probability state of the normal pattern. In other words, as a state related to the time saving state, there are four combinations of two types of normal patterns, high probability state or low probability state, and two states of whether or not there is an electric sapo. It is configured to be able to form a state. In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, when a variable probability jackpot (jackpots A58, B58) is won, the special symbol is set to a high probability state that substantially continues until the next jackpot, and a normal jackpot (jackpot B58) is set. Since it is set to the low probability state of the special pattern when winning, a total of 8 different states are formed by combining the state of the special pattern (2 types) and the state related to the time saving state (4 types). . Therefore, in order to simplify the explanation, regardless of whether it is a high probability state of normal symbols or a low probability state, the state that is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a state without electric sapo Collectively referred to as "normal mode", the state set to a low probability state of special symbols and a state with electric sapo is collectively referred to as "time saving mode", a high probability state of special symbols and with electric sapo The states set in the state are collectively referred to as "probability variable mode", and the state in which the special symbol high probability state and the electric sapo no state are set are collectively referred to as "latent probability mode". In addition, of the "normal mode", the state in which the normal pattern is set to the low probability state is called "normal mode A", and the state in which the normal pattern is set to the high probability state is called "normal mode B". Among the "time saving mode", the state that is set to the high probability state of the normal pattern is called "time saving mode A", the state that is set to the low probability state of the normal pattern is called "time saving mode B", and the "variable probability mode" Among them, the state that is set to the high probability state of the normal pattern is called "variable mode A", the state that is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol is called "variable mode B", and among the "potential mode" , the state in which the normal symbols are set to the low probability state is called "latency mode A", and the state in which the normal symbols are set to the high probability state is called "latency mode B". A method of shifting to another state will be described below for each mode. It should be noted that the transition method of the state at the time of winning the jackpot is the same as the fifty-first control example described above. State, and high probability state of normal design, and while shifting to the state with electric sapo (probability variable mode A), after the end of the normal jackpot (jackpot C58), low probability state of special design, and normal design 1919 to 1921, since only a relatively simple state transition to a high probability state and a state with electric support (probability variable mode A) is performed, the state transition based on the jackpot winning The explanation is omitted, and only the state transition method triggered by other than winning the jackpot will be explained.

FIG. 1919 is a diagram showing a state transition method in normal modes (normal mode A, normal mode B). As shown in FIG. 1919, the normal mode is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a state without electric sapo, and it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left, low probability of normal symbols. It is composed of two types of states, a normal mode A set to a state and a normal mode B set to a high probability state of normal symbols. As shown in FIG. 1919, the normal mode A is configured in such a state that it cannot shift to another state unless a big win is won. That is, in the normal mode A, even if the lottery for the special pattern is executed because of the low probability state for the normal pattern, the lottery for the time-saving pattern is not performed, and even if a small hit is won, the low probability state for the normal pattern. In addition, since there is no electrical support and there is no setting to be cleared, there is no way to shift to another state other than winning the jackpot. Therefore, in the normal mode A, the player expects only to win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbols by hitting left.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1919, normal mode B may shift to another state only when time-saving symbol winning occurs as a trigger other than jackpot winning. More specifically, in normal mode B, when a time-saving design win occurs in a special design lottery, time-saving mode A (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design, and electric support state). Therefore, the degree of advantage is higher than in the normal mode A by the amount that the time saving symbol winning can occur and shift to the advantageous time saving mode A. - 特許庁In addition, the normal mode B shifts when only the state with electric support is terminated by winning the small win D58 after winning the big win C and shifting to the time saving mode A with the number of times of time saving of 100 times. It is a possible state.
Next, with reference to the upper side of FIG. 1920, the state transition method in the variable probability mode will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1920, the high probability state of special symbols and the state with electric sapo are set. It is composed of two types of states, namely, a variable probability mode A set to a high probability state and a variable probability mode B set to a low probability state of normal symbols. There is a possibility of shifting from the variable probability mode A to another state by winning a small win in addition to winning a big win. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 1920, when a small hit is won in the variable probability mode A, and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit A58, the high probability state of normal symbols and the state with electric support settings are cleared. For this reason, if you have a time-saving stock, the time-saving stock is consumed when the time-saving state ends, and by setting a low-probability state of normal symbols and a state with an electric sapo, the state is a variable mode. changed to B. On the other hand, if you do not have a time-saving stock at the time of winning the small hit A58, only the high-probability state of the special symbol is maintained, and all the time-saving state settings are cleared. Switch to stealth mode A. That is, a disadvantageous game state is created in which the game must be played by hitting left.
In addition, when a small hit is won in the variable probability mode A and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit C58, only the setting of the high probability state of the normal pattern is cleared and the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. Regardless of the presence or absence of time-saving stock, it shifts to probability-variable mode B, which has a high degree of advantage (because the time-saving state setting is difficult to clear with a small hit, it is easier to continue longer than probability-variable mode A). Furthermore, if you win a small hit in the probability mode A and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit D58, only the setting of the electric sapo state is cleared, so if you do not have a time-saving stock, the latent probability mode Move to B. That is, the game shifts to a disadvantageous state in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left. On the other hand, when the small hit B is won in the variable probability mode A, the variable probability mode A is maintained because the setting of the time saving state is not cleared at all. In addition, when the small hit D is won and the time-saving stock is possessed, the setting of the state with the electric sapo is cleared and the state without the electric sapo is set, whereby the time-saving stock is digested (consumed). The state with electric support is given. However, the time-saving state based on the time-saving stock (that is, the time-saving design winning) is set to the electric sapo state without changing the state of the normal design, so the high-probability state of the normal design is maintained. As a result of giving the state with support, the variable probability mode A is maintained. Furthermore, when time-saving design winning occurs in probability variable mode A, time-saving stock is generated and the state is not changed. That is, the variable probability mode A is maintained. In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, only one time-saving stock based on the time-saving symbol winning is configured to be possessable.

Next, a state transition method based on an opportunity other than winning the jackpot in the variable probability mode B will be described. As shown in FIG. 1920, there is a possibility of shifting from variable probability mode B to another state only when a small win is won. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1920, when one of the small hits B58 and D58 is won in the variable probability mode B, the setting of the state with electric support is cleared and set to the state without electric support, Switch to stealth mode A. On the other hand, when the small hits A58 and C58 are won, the variable probability mode B continues without clearing any setting of the time saving state. In addition, since the variable probability mode B is set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the time saving symbol winning will not occur.
In this way, in the variable probability mode A, by winning the small hits A58 and D58 in the absence of time-saving stock, the mode is shifted to the latent probability mode with a low degree of advantage, while in the variable probability mode B, the small hit B58 , D58, the mode is shifted to the probability mode with a low degree of advantage. Here, when the small winning is won, the ratio of determining either the small winning A58 or D58 is 95% in total, while the ratio of determining the small winning B58 or D58 is 5% in total. be. That is, in the variable probability mode A, when a small hit is won in the state of not having a time-saving stock, the game shifts to a disadvantageous latent probability mode in which a left-handed game must be performed at a rate of 95%, while the variable probability mode In B, even if a small hit is won, only a rate of 5% shifts to the disadvantageous latent probability mode, so compared to the variable probability mode A, the variable probability mode B has a significantly higher degree of advantage. Therefore, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the player will shift to the variable probability mode B. That is, it is possible to strongly expect that the time saving symbol winning is first generated to obtain the time saving stock, and then the small hit A58 is won. In addition, if you win a small hit C58, it will move to the advantageous variable mode B regardless of the presence or absence of time-saving stock, but it is an extremely rare small hit type that is determined only by 1% when you win a small hit. Therefore, most of the cases of shifting to the variable probability mode B are cases in which the small hit A58 is won while holding the time saving stock. Therefore, in the variable probability mode A, the player can expect to acquire the time-saving stock before winning the small prize, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, referring to the lower part of FIG. 1920, the state transition method in the latent mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1920, the probability mode is set to a high probability state of special symbols and a state without electric sapo, and it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol by hitting left hand. There are two kinds of states, ie, a latent probability mode A set to a low probability state of symbols and a latent probability mode B set to a high probability state of normal symbols. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1920, there is no possibility of transitioning from the probability mode A to another state other than winning the jackpot. Therefore, a relatively unfavorable state is formed in which it is necessary to play the game with disadvantageous left-handed hitting until the jackpot is won. On the other hand, in the latent probability mode B, there is a possibility of shifting to another state when a short-time pattern winning occurs in addition to the case of winning a jackpot.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1920, when time-saving design winning occurs in latent probability mode B, there is a support state (10000 times) while maintaining the high probability state of special symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols. By being given, it shifts to probability variable mode A. Therefore, the latent probability mode B has a higher advantage than the latent probability mode A by shifting to the variable probability mode A having a higher degree of advantage due to winning of the time saving symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1921, a state transition method in the time saving mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 1921, the low probability state of special symbols and the state with electric sapo are set, and the time saving mode in which the game can be progressed by lottery of the second special symbol by hitting to the right is a high probability of normal symbols. It is composed of two types of states, a time saving mode A set to a state and a time saving mode B set to a low probability state of normal symbols. As shown in FIG. 1921, from time-saving mode A to another state, in addition to the case of winning a jackpot, when winning a small hit, and when the number of times of time-saving (100 times) is consumed, to another state May migrate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1921, when a small hit is won in the time saving mode A, and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit A58, the high probability state of the normal pattern and the setting of the electric sapo state are set. Both are cleared. For this reason, if you have a time-saving stock, the time-saving stock will be consumed when the time-saving state ends, and by setting a low-probability state of normal symbols and a state with an electric sapo, the state will be a time-saving mode. changed to B. On the other hand, if you do not have a time-saving stock at the time of winning the small hit A58, only the high-probability state of the special symbol is maintained, and all the time-saving state settings are cleared. Shift to normal mode A. That is, a disadvantageous game state is created in which the game must be played by hitting left.
In addition, when a small hit is won in the time saving mode A and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit C58, only the setting of the high probability state of the normal pattern is cleared and the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. Regardless of the presence or absence of time-saving stock, it shifts to time-saving mode B, which has a high degree of advantage (it is easier to continue longer than time-saving mode A because the setting of time-saving state is difficult to clear with a small hit). Furthermore, if you win a small hit in time saving mode A and the small hit type is determined to be D58, only the setting of the electric sapo state is cleared, so if you do not have a time saving stock, normal mode B to move to. That is, the game shifts to a disadvantageous state in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left. On the other hand, when the small win B is won in the time saving mode A, the time saving mode A is maintained because the setting of the time saving state is not cleared at all. In addition, when the small hit D is won and the time-saving stock is possessed, the setting of the state with the power supply is cleared and the time-saving stock is consumed (consumed) by being set to the state without the power supply. The state with electric support is given. However, the time-saving state based on the time-saving stock (that is, the time-saving design winning) is set to the electric sapo state without changing the state of the normal design, so the high-probability state of the normal design is maintained. As a result of giving the state with support, the variable probability mode A is maintained. In addition, when the number of times of time saving (100 times) set at the end of the jackpot is consumed, the setting of the time saving state is all cleared, and as a result, the game shifts to the normal mode A. Furthermore, when time-saving design winning occurs in time-saving mode A, time-saving stock is generated and the state is not changed. That is, the time saving mode A is maintained.
Next, a state transition method based on an opportunity other than jackpot winning in time saving mode B will be described. As shown in FIG. 1921, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving mode B to another state when winning the small prize and when the number of times of time saving is consumed except for the jackpot winning. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1921, when one of the small hits B58 and D58 is won in the time saving mode B, the setting of the state with electric support is cleared and set to the state without electric support, Shift to normal mode A. In addition, when the number of times of time saving (100 times) set at the end of the jackpot is consumed, the setting of the time saving state is all cleared, and as a result, the game shifts to the normal mode A. On the other hand, when the small hits A58 and C58 are won, the variable probability mode B continues without clearing any setting of the time saving state. In addition, since the time saving mode B is set to the low probability state of normal symbols, even if the special symbol lottery is executed, the time saving symbol winning will not occur.
In this way, in the time saving mode A, by winning the small hits A58 and D58 in the absence of the time saving stock, the mode shifts to the normal mode with a low degree of advantage, while in the time saving mode B, the small hits B58, By winning D58, it is configured to shift to a normal mode with a low degree of advantage. Here, when the small winning is won, the ratio of determining either the small winning A58 or D58 is 95% in total, while the ratio of determining the small winning B58 or D58 is 5% in total. be. That is, in the time-saving mode A, when a small hit is won in a state where the time-saving stock is not possessed, the game shifts to a disadvantageous normal mode in which a left-handed game must be performed at a rate of 95%, while the time-saving mode B is shifted to. Then, even if a small prize is won, only 5% of the time the game is shifted to the disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the player will switch to the time-saving mode B. That is, it is possible to strongly expect that the time saving symbol winning is first generated to obtain the time saving stock, and then the small hit A58 is won. In addition, if you win the small hit C58, it will shift to the advantageous time saving mode B regardless of the presence or absence of the time saving stock, but it is an extremely rare small hit type that is determined only by 1% when you win the small hit. Therefore, most of the cases of shifting to the time-saving mode B are cases in which the small hit A58 is won with the time-saving stock in hand. Therefore, in the time-saving mode A, the player can expect to obtain the time-saving stock before winning the small prize, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the fifty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1919(a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1919(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1919(a), the ROM 202 in the fifty-fifth control example replaces the first winning random number table 202ma with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1857(a)). A first winning random number table 202ra is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202rd is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202md, and a time saving random number table 202rf is provided instead of the time saving random number table 202mf. The point is that the small hit random number table 202rg is added, and the small hit type selection table 202rh is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fifty-first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, regarding the jackpot type selection table 202md, only the names of the jackpots A54 to C54 in the fifty-first control example are changed to jackpots A58 to C58, and the distribution and operation of each jackpot type are the same as in the fifty-first control example. Therefore, illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1920(a), details of the first winning random number table 202ra in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1920(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202ra in the fifty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1920(a), in the first winning random number table 202ar in the fifty-fifth control example, as the range of random numbers (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit, low Three random numbers (counter value) of "0 to 2" are associated with the probability state, and four random numbers of "0 to 3" are associated with the high probability state of the special symbol. ing. Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 899'' that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit is 3 in a low probability state, and a high probability. Since there are four in the state, the probability of winning a big win in the special pattern lottery in the special pattern low probability state is 1/300 (3/900), and in the special pattern high probability state, the special pattern lottery big win. The probability of winning is 1/225 (4/900). That is, compared to the fifty-first control example described above, the difference between the high probability of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols is reduced. For this reason, even in a state of high probability of special symbols, it is easy to require a relatively large number of times of lottery until winning a jackpot, and even if a variable jackpot is won and a shift is made to the variable mode A, the working time is reduced. If the game is not shifted to the variable probability mode B, which is difficult to end, the possibility of falling to the latent probability mode before winning the jackpot increases. Therefore, when the variable probability mode A or the time saving mode A is set, it is possible to strongly expect that the time saving stock will occur before winning the small prize. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1920(b), the details of the time saving random number table 202rf in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1920(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the random number table 202rf per time saving in the fifty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1920(b), in the time saving random number table 202af in the fifty-fifth control example, a random number (the value of the first random number counter C1) that is determined to be time saving design winning in the high probability state of the normal design is defined in association with 18 random numbers (counter values) from "4 to 21". Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 899" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving symbol winning is 18, so it is normal When the lottery for the special symbol is executed in the high probability state of the symbol, the probability that the winning of the time saving symbol is determined is 1/50 (18/900). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1920(b), the low-probability state of the normal symbol is not associated with the random number determined as the time-saving symbol winning. Therefore, time-saving design election cannot occur in the low-probability state of the normal design.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1920(c), details of the small winning random number table 202rg in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1920(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small winning random number table 202rg in the fifty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1920(c), the small hit random number table 202ag in the fifty-fifth control example is not associated with a random number determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, while the second 18 random numbers "22 to 39" are defined in association with each other as random numbers determined as small hits in the special symbol lottery. Therefore, even if the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a small win cannot be won, but in the lottery for the second special symbol, a small win is won with a probability of 1/50 (18/900).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1921, details of the small hit type selection table 202rh in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1921 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202rh in the fifty-fifth control example. When a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection table 202rh.
As shown in FIG. 1921, in the small hit type selection table 202rh in the fifty-fifth control example, four types of small hits A58 to D58 are defined as the small hit types. More specifically, the value of the first random number counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 93", "small hit A58" is associated, and the value of the first random number counter C2 is "94 to 97” range is defined in association with “small win B58”, and the value “98” of the first winning random number counter C2 is defined in association with “small win C58”, and the first win A "small win D58" is defined in association with the value "99" of the random number counter C2. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers associated with the small perks A58, B58, C58, D58 is 94, 4, respectively. Since there are 1 piece and 1 piece, the ratio of determining the small winning A58 at the time of winning the small winning is 94% (94/100), and the ratio of determining the small winning B58 is 4% (4/100). , the rate at which the small hits C58 and D58 are determined is 1% (1/100).
The small hit A58 is a type of small hit that clears all the setting of the time saving state only in the normal pattern high probability state and the state with support, and when winning in the variable probability mode A, the time saving stock is not held. Under the condition, the game is shifted to the probability mode A, which is a disadvantageous left-handed game. Further, when winning in the time-saving mode A, on condition that the time-saving stock is not held, the game is shifted to the normal mode A, which is a disadvantageous left-handed game. On the other hand, when a small win A58 is won with a time-saving stock, the probability-variable mode A is shifted to an advantageous probability-variable mode B, and the time-saving mode A is shifted to an advantageous time-saving mode B.例文帳に追加In other words, the small hit A58 is a desirable small hit type under the situation of possessing a short time stock in the variable probability mode A and the time saving mode A, while it is an undesirable small hit type in the situation where the short time stock is not possessed. be. In addition, when winning in the state of neither probability variable mode A nor time saving mode A, the state at the time of winning is maintained.
The small hit B58 is a small hit of a type that clears all the setting of the time saving state only in the low probability state of the normal pattern and in the state with support, and when it is elected in the variable mode B, the potential to become a disadvantageous left-handed game. The mode is shifted to definite mode A. Moreover, when winning in the time-saving mode B, the game is shifted to the normal mode A, which is a disadvantageous left-handed game. On the other hand, if winning is made in neither the variable probability mode B nor the time saving mode B, the state at the time of winning is maintained.

The small hit C58 is a small hit type that clears only the setting of the normal symbol high probability state regardless of the state at the time of winning. That is, when a small hit C58 is won in the variable probability mode A, the low probability state of normal symbols is set while maintaining the state with the support, thereby shifting to the variable probability mode B having a high degree of advantage. In addition, when a small hit C58 is won in the time saving mode A, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set while maintaining the support state, thereby shifting to the time saving mode B having a high degree of advantage. It should be noted that in the normal mode B and latent mode B, which are set to a high probability state of normal symbols, the game progresses by making the first special symbol lottery by hitting left, and it is possible to win a small hit. Since there is almost no winning, it is almost impossible to clear the high-probability state of the normal symbol by winning the small hit C.
The small hit D58 is a small hit type that clears only the setting of the state with electric support regardless of the state at the time of winning. That is, if you win a small hit D58 in the variable probability mode A, by setting it to a state without support while maintaining the high probability state of the normal pattern, on the condition that you do not have a time-saving stock, the latent advantage is low. Move to definite mode B. Similarly, when winning a small hit D58 in the variable probability mode B, it shifts to the probability mode A with a low advantage, and when winning a small hit D58 in the time saving mode A, it moves to the normal mode B with a low advantage, When a small hit D58 is won in the time saving mode B, the mode shifts to the normal mode A with a low advantage.
In this way, in the 55th control example, since it is configured to provide a small hit type that clears only a part of the setting of the time saving state and a small hit type that clears all settings, the state is increased more than before It is possible to realize a more complicated game flow. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1925(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1925(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1925(b), the RAM 203 in the fifty-fifth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1857(b)). The difference is that a support flag 203rb is added.

The normal pattern high probability flag 203ra is a flag indicating whether or not the normal pattern is in a high probability state, and if it is on, it indicates that it is in a normal pattern high probability state, and if it is off, it is normally a low probability pattern. state. When the normal pattern lottery is executed, the normal pattern high probability flag 203ra is referred to determine whether or not the normal pattern high probability state, and if the normal pattern high probability state is selected, it is for the high probability state. While the second winning random number table 202jc is referred to and the normal symbol lottery is executed, if the normal symbol low probability state, the second winning random number table 202jc for the low probability state is referred to and the normal symbol lottery. is executed.
The power supply flag 203rb is a flag indicating whether or not the power supply is in the state with power supply. When it is on, it indicates that the power supply is in the presence state. When the lottery for the normal pattern is executed, this electric sapo flag 203rb is referred to determine whether or not the electric sapo is in the state, and if the electric sapo is in the state, the variation time of the normal pattern is set to 2 seconds. On the other hand, if there is no electric sapo, the normal pattern variation time is set to 20 seconds. Also, when the winning of the normal symbol is started, the electric sapo flag 203rb is referred to, and if the electric sapo is present, the opening period and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a are set to 1 second×3 times. , if there is no electric sapo state, the open period and the number of open times of the electric accessory 640a are set to 0.1 seconds×1 time. As a result, in the state with the electric sapo, an advantageous state is formed in which the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, while in the state without the electric sapo, the player hits right. However, it becomes extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if the game is played, and a disadvantageous state is formed in which the game must be played by hitting left-handed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1928(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1928(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1928(b), the ROM 222 in the fifty-fifth control example has a state suggestive state with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifty-first control example (and the forty-seventh control example) (see FIG. 1768(a)). The only difference is that an effect selection table 222ra is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the fifty-first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The state-suggesting effect selection table 222ra is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not to set a variable display mode accompanied by a state-suggesting effect as a variable display mode when a variable pattern command is received in the state with support. is. The details of this state suggesting effect selection table 222ra will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1929 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this state suggesting effect selection table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 1929, in this state suggesting effect selection table 222ra, the type of state suggesting effect and the value range of the effect counter 223f determined to execute the type are defined in association with each other according to the state. It is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1929, in a state with a high probability of normal symbols and with an electric sapo that does not have a time saving stock (that is, either probability mode A or time saving mode A), special Regardless of whether the pattern is in a high-probability state, the time-saving stock suggestion effect (see FIG. 1920(b)) is defined in association with the value "0" of the effect counter 223f, and the value of the effect counter 223f is defined. A high continuation suggestive effect (see FIG. 1921(a)) is defined in association with the range of "1, 2". Since the production counter 223f can take 100 values of "0 to 99", in the variable probability mode A or the time saving mode A, in the situation where the time saving stock is not possessed, the time saving stock suggesting production with a probability of 1/100 is executed, and a high continuation suggestive effect is executed with a probability of 1/50 (2/100).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1929, in the high probability state of the normal design, and among the state with electric sapo that does not possess the time saving stock, in the high probability state of the special design (variable mode A), the production counter 223f While the probability variation suggestive effect (not shown) that increases the expectation that the special symbol is in a high probability state is associated with the value in the range of "3 to 8", the low probability of the special symbol is defined. In the state (time saving mode A), the value of the production counter 223f is defined in association with the range of "3 to 6". That is, in the variable probability mode A, the variable probability suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 6/100, and in the time saving mode A, the variable probability suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/25 (4/100). In other words, the high probability state of the special symbols is configured to be 1.5 times more likely to execute the probability variation suggestive effect than the low probability state of the special symbols.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1929, the high probability state of the normal design, and the state with the electric sapo possessing the time saving stock (that is, either the variable mode A or the time saving mode A), the high probability of the special design Regardless of whether or not the state, the value of the production counter 223f is defined to correspond to the range of "0 to 4", time-saving stock suggestion production (see FIG. 1920 (b)), and the production counter 223f A high continuation suggestive effect (see FIG. 1921(a)) is defined in association with the value range of "5, 6". Therefore, in the probability variable mode A and the time saving mode A, in the situation where the time saving stock is possessed, the time saving stock suggestion production is executed with a probability of 1/20 (5/100), and the probability of 1/50 (2/100) High continuation suggestion production is executed with probability. That is, in a situation where the time-saving stock is possessed, the execution probability of the time-saving stock suggestion production is five times higher than the situation where the time-saving stock is not possessed, so by executing the time-saving stock suggestion production, It can improve expectations for owning short-time stock.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1929, in the high probability state of the normal design, and among the state with electric sapo possessing the time saving stock, in the high probability state of the special design (probability variable mode A), the production counter 223f While the probability variation suggestive effect (not shown) is defined in association with the range of the value "7 to 12", the value of the effect counter 223f in the low probability state of the special symbol (time saving mode A) is defined in association with the range of "7 to 10". That is, in the variable probability mode A, the variable probability suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 6/100, and in the time saving mode A, the variable probability suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/25 (4/100). In other words, the high probability state of the special symbols is configured to be 1.5 times more likely to execute the probability variation suggestive effect than the low probability state of the special symbols.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1929, in the state with electric sapo set to the low probability state of normal symbols (that is, either probability variation mode B or time saving mode B), whether it is a high probability state of special symbols Regardless, the value of the production counter 223f is defined to correspond to the range of "0, 1", the time-saving stock suggestion production (see FIG. 1920 (b)), and the value of the production counter 223f is "2 to 11 ”, a high continuation suggestive effect (see FIG. 1921(a)) is defined in correspondence, and a high continuation fixed effect (see FIG. 1921(b)) is defined for the value “12” of the effect counter 223f. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the probability variable mode B and the time saving mode B, the time saving stock suggestion production is executed with a probability of 1/50 (2/100), and the high continuous suggestion production is executed with a probability of 1/10 (10/100), A high continuation fixed effect is executed with a probability of 1/100. That is, in the probability-changing mode B and the time-saving mode B, the execution probability of the time-saving stock suggestion effect is higher than the probability-changing mode A and the time-saving mode B, which do not possess the time-saving stock, but the probability-changing mode A and the time-saving stock It is configured so that the execution probability of the time-saving stock suggestion performance is lower than that of the time-saving mode B. In addition, in the variable probability mode B and the short time mode B, the execution probability of the high continuation suggestive effect jumps up to five times as compared with the variable probability mode A and the short time mode A. - 特許庁As a result, when the high continuation suggestive performance is executed, the expectation period already shifted to the advantageous variable probability mode B or the time reduction mode B can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can be done. Further, only in the low-probability state of the normal pattern, it is configured that the high continuous fixed performance can be executed, so when the high continuous fixed performance is executed, it is the probability variable mode B or the time saving mode B with a high degree of advantage. Since the player can be made to understand, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 1929, among the state with electric sapo set to the low probability state of normal symbols, in the high probability state of special symbols (probability variable mode B), the value of the production counter 223f is "13 to 18". While the probability variation suggestive effect (not shown) is defined in association with the range, in the low probability state of the special symbol (time saving mode B), the value of the effect counter 223f is "13 to 16" Probability variation suggestive production is defined in association with the range. That is, in the variable probability mode B, the variable probability suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 6/100, and in the time saving mode B, the variable probability suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/25 (4/100). In other words, the high probability state of the special symbols is configured to be 1.5 times more likely to execute the probability variation suggestive effect than the low probability state of the special symbols.
In this way, in the fifty-fifth control example, the execution probability of various state-indicating effects is varied according to the situation while the effect mode is shared during the period from the end of the big win to the end of the state with the electric sapo. It is configured. By configuring in this way, whether or not it is set to a high probability state of normal patterns, whether or not it is set to a high probability state of special patterns, the presence or absence of time-saving stock, etc. Various state suggestion production It is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to predict from the occurrence situation of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the state with the electric sapo continues, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1925(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1925(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 1925(b), the RAM 223 in the fifty-fifth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1860). 223rb is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the fifty-first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The secondary normal pattern high probability flag 223ra is a flag indicating whether or not it is a normal pattern high probability state. If it is, it is set to ON, and if it is a low probability state of normal symbols, it is set to OFF. Further, the secondary power supply flag 223rb is a flag indicating whether or not the power supply is in the state with power supply. If there is no support, it is set to off.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifty-fifth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fifty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1930 to 1934. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1930, details of the time saving lottery process in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. This time saving lottery process (S8012L) is a process that is executed in place of the time saving lottery process (see FIG. 1862) in the fifty-first control example described above, and is similar to the time saving lottery process (see FIG. 1862), of the special symbol lottery. It is a process for executing a time-saving design lottery or the like when the result is other than the jackpot winning. FIG. 1930 is a flowchart showing this time-saving lottery process.
In the processing of S8101L, S8105L, and S8106L among the time saving lottery processing (see FIG. 1930) in the fifty-fifth control example, S8101L, S8105L, and S8106L of the time-saving lottery processing in the fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1862), respectively The same processing as each processing is executed. In addition, in the time-saving lottery process (see FIG. 1930) in the fifty-fifth control example, when the process of S8101L is completed, then it is normally a high probability state of the design (that is, whether the normal pattern high probability flag 203ra is on) ) Determines whether or not (S8111L), and when it is determined that it is a high probability state of normal symbols (that is, the normal pattern high probability flag 203ra is on) (S8111L: Yes), the time saving random number table 202rf (Figure 1926 (b) reference) to acquire the lottery result of the time saving design (S8112L), and determine whether the lottery result is the time saving design winning (S8113L). In the process of S8113L, if it is determined that the lottery result of the time saving pattern this time is the time saving pattern winning (S8113L: Yes), the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is overwritten with 10000 (S8114L), and the process goes to S8105L and migrate. On the other hand, in the process of S8113L, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not the time saving symbol winning (S8113L: No), the process proceeds to S8115L.
On the other hand, in the process of S8111L, when it is determined that it is not a high probability state of normal symbols (it is a low probability state of normal symbols), S8115L for performing a small winning lottery without executing a time saving symbol lottery Each process of S8118L is executed. Specifically, a small winning lottery is executed with reference to the small winning random number table 202rg (see FIG. 1926(c)) (S8115L), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small winning winning (S8116L). In the processing of S8116L, when it is determined that the small hit is won (S8116L: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection table 202rh (see FIG. 1927) (S8117L), and the first symbol display A small hit symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the device 37 is set (S8118L), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S8116L, when it is determined that the result of the small winning lottery by the processing of S8115L is not a small winning lottery (that is, it is completely lost) (S8116L: No), the processing proceeds to S8106L. By executing this time-saving lottery process (see FIG. 1930), the time-saving design lottery can be executed only in the normal high probability state of the design.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1931, details of the updating process (S211L) in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. This update process (S211L) is a process that is executed instead of the update process (see FIG. 1776) in the fifty-first control example (and the forty-seventh control example) described above. This is a process for updating the game state. FIG. 1931 is a flow chart showing this update process (S211L).
In the updating process in the fifty-fifth control example (see FIG. 1931), the processes in S8301 to S8304 are the same as the processes in S8301 to S8304 in the updating process in the fifty-first control example (and the forty-seventh control example). is executed. In addition, in the update process (see FIG. 1931) in the fifty-fifth control example, it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not 0 in the process of S8301, or when the process of S8302 ends, the small hit is won. Based on the small winning time saving update process for determining whether to clear part or all of the setting of the time saving state (S8371H), the process proceeds to S8303. The details of this small winning time saving update process (S8371H) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the update process (see FIG. 1931) in the fifty-fifth control example, when the process of S8304 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h after subtraction has become 0 by the process of S8304 (S8372H ), if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S8372H: Yes), by setting both the general map high accuracy flag 203ra and the electric support flag 203rb to off, clear all the setting of the time saving state (S8373H ), and the process proceeds to S8374H. On the other hand, in the processing of S8372H, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after subtraction is not 0 (S8372H: No), the processing of S8373H is skipped and the processing proceeds to S8374H.
In the processing of S8374H, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed (S8374H), and if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S8374H: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203i and the value of the general pattern high probability flag 203ra Data indicating the game state corresponding to the state and the state of the electric support flag 203rb is set in the game state storage area 203g (S8375H), and the process proceeds to S8376H. On the other hand, in the process of S8374H, if it is determined that the game state has not been changed (S8374H: No), the process of S8375H is skipped and the process proceeds to S8376H. In the process of S8376H, the value of the variable probability counter 203i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, the state of the normal map high probability flag 203ra, and the state of the electric sapo flag 203rb to the sound lamp control device 113. Set the state command for notifying (S8376H), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1932, the details of the above-described small winning time saving update process (S8371H) will be described. Figure 1932 is a flow chart showing this small winning time saving update process (S8371H). When this small hit time saving update process (S8371H) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S8381H), and the value of the time saving counter 203h If is 0 (S8381H: No), since there is no possibility that the setting of the time saving state is cleared by the small hit, this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S8381H, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S8381H: Yes), then the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit A58 It is determined whether or not there is (S8382H), and if it is a small hit A58 (S8382H: Yes), it is determined whether the general map high probability flag 203ra and the electric sapo flag 203rb are both on (S8383H). In the processing of S8383H, if it is determined that both the normal map high accuracy flag 203ra and the electric sapo flag 203rb are on, in the variable probability mode A or the time saving mode A, the setting of the time saving state is cleared. Since it means winning, both the general map high probability flag 203ra and the electric support flag 203rb are set to OFF (S8384H), and the process proceeds to S8391H. On the other hand, in the processing of S8383H, if it is determined that at least one of the general map high accuracy flag 203ra and the electric sapo flag 203rb is off (S8383H: Yes), the setting of the time saving state is cleared by the small hit A58 Since it means that it is not in the target state, the process of S8384H is skipped and the process proceeds to S8391H.
On the other hand, in the process of S8382H, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit A58 (S8382H: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit B58. It is determined (S8385H), and if it is a small hit B58 (S8385H: Yes), it is determined whether the general map high accuracy flag 203ra is off and the electric support flag 203rb is on (S8386H). In the processing of S8386H, when it is determined that the general map high accuracy flag 203ra is off and the electric sapo flag 203rb is on, in the probability variable mode B or the time saving mode B, the type of clearing all the setting of the time saving state Since it means winning a small hit, the electric support flag 203rb is set to OFF (S8387H), and the process proceeds to S8391H. On the other hand, in the processing of S8386H, when it is determined that the general map high accuracy flag 203ra is off and the electric support flag 203rb is not a combination of on (S8386H: No), the setting of the time saving state is cleared by the small hit B58 Since this means that the state is not the target state, the process of S8387H is skipped and the process proceeds to S8391H.
On the other hand, in the process of S8385H, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a small hit B58 (S8385H: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit D58. Determined (S8388H), if it is a small hit D58 (S8388H: Yes), it means that you have won a small win of the type that clears the setting of the electric support state regardless of the state, so the process moves to S8387H Then, the electric support flag 203rb is set to OFF (S8387H), and the process proceeds to S8391H.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8388H, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a small hit D58 (S8388H: No), then whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit C58. (S8389H), if it is a small hit C58 (S8389H: Yes), it means that you have won a small hit of the type that clears the setting of the high probability state of the normal pattern regardless of the state, so normal high The sure flag 203ra is set to OFF (S8390H), and the process proceeds to S8391H.
In the processing of S8391H, it is determined whether or not both the normal map high probability flag 203ra and the electric sapo flag 203rb are set to off (S8391H), and if the normal map high probability flag 203ra and the electric sapo flag 203rb are both off When it is determined (S8391H: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S8392H), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S8391H, if it is determined that at least one of the normal map high accuracy flag 203ra and the electric sapo flag 203rb is ON (S8391H: No), the processing of S8392H is skipped and this processing is performed as it is. exit.
By executing this small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1932), when the small hit is won in the time saving state, the time saving set according to the type of the time saving state at the time of winning and the winning small hit type Some or all of the state settings can be cleared. As a result, eight types of states with different degrees of advantage (normal mode A, normal mode B, probability variable mode A, probability variable mode B, potential mode A, potential mode B, time saving mode A, time saving mode B) are formed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1933, details of the time saving setting process (S212L) in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. This time saving setting process (S212L) is a process executed in place of the time saving setting process (see FIG. 1863) in the fifty-first control example described above, and similarly to the time saving setting process (see FIG. 1863), settings other than the jackpot It is a process for setting the time saving state based on the opportunity. FIG. 1933 is a flow chart showing this time saving setting process (S212L).

Of the time saving setting process (see FIG. 1933) in the fifty-fifth control example, in each process of S8401H to S8403H, S8405H, and 8402L, S8401H to S8403H and S8405H of the time saving setting process (see FIG. 1863) in the fifty-first control example , and 8402L are executed. In addition, in the time saving setting process (see FIG. 1933) in the fifty-fifth control example, when the process of S8403H ends, the data indicating the time saving mode B is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S8411L), and the process proceeds to S8405H. to move to.
In addition, in the time saving setting process (see FIG. 1933) in the fifty-fifth control example, in the process of S8401H, it is determined whether the ceiling standby flag 203jb is turned off (S8401H: No), or when the process of S8405H ends Next, it is determined whether or not the electric support flag 203rb is off (S8412L). In the process of S8412L, if it is determined that the electric support flag 203rb is not off (it is on) (S8412L: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8412L, when it is determined that the electric support flag 203rb is off (S8412: Yes), the process proceeds to S8402L.
Further, in the time saving setting process (see FIG. 1933) in the fifty-fifth control example, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is 0 in the process of S8402L (S8402L: Yes), then the waiting time saving counter The counter value of 203ma is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h, the electric support flag 203rb is set to ON (S8413L), and the counter value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma is cleared to 0 (S8414L). Next, data indicating the game state corresponding to the value of the variable probability counter 203i, the state of the normal figure high probability flag 203ra, and the state of the electric support flag 203rb is set in the game state storage area 203g (S8415L), and the variable probability counter 203i , the value of the time-saving counter 203h, the state of the normal map high accuracy flag 203ra, and the state command indicating the state of the electric support flag 203rb (S8416L), and this process ends.
By executing this time saving setting process (see FIG. 1933), when the setting of the state with electric support is cleared and switched to the state without electric support in the above-described update process (see FIG. 1932), the time saving stock is possessed If so, it is possible to set the state with support 10000 times by consuming the time saving stock. Therefore, in particular, when the small hit A58 is won with the stock in the variable probability mode A or the short time mode A and the setting of the short time state is cleared, the short time stock is consumed. , or time saving mode B can be set. Therefore, when the jackpot ends and the variable probability mode A or the time saving mode A is set, the player expects that the setting of the time saving state is cleared after obtaining the time saving stock, which is very special and Since novel playability can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1934, details of the normal symbol variation process (S311L) in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. This normal symbol variation process (S331L) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1779) in the fifty-first control example (and the forty-seventh control example) described above. ), it is a process for controlling the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like. FIG. 1934 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S331L).
Of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 1934) in the 55th control example, in each of S801 to S807, S817 to S819, S802H to S804H, S807H, S810H, S812H, S814H, and S816H to S818H, the 51st Control example (and 47th control example) S801~S807, S817~S819, S802H~S804H, S807H, S810H, S812H, S814H, and S816H~S818H of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1779) Processing is performed.
In addition, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1934) in the fifty-fifth control example, when the process of S807 ends, it is determined whether the normal pattern high probability flag 203ra is on (S821H), and the normal pattern high probability is determined. If it is determined that the flag 203ra is ON (S821H: Yes), the process proceeds to S802H. On the other hand, in the process of S821H, when it is determined that the general/universal pattern high accuracy flag 203ra is off (S821H: No), the process proceeds to S803H.
Also, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1934) in the fifty-fifth control example, in the process of S804H, when it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S804H: Yes), hit The display mode of the second symbol display device 84 for is set (S822H), and the process proceeds to S823H. In the process of S823H, it is determined whether or not the electric support flag 203rb is ON (S823H), and if it is determined that the electric support flag 203rb is ON (S823H: Yes), the process proceeds to S812H. - On the other hand, in the process of S823H, if it is determined that the electric support flag 203rb is off (S823H: No), the process proceeds to S814H.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1934) in the fifty-fifth control example, when it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit in the process of S819 (S819: Yes), the electric support flag 203rb is turned on. (S824H), and if it is determined that the electric support flag 203rb is ON (S824H: Yes), the process proceeds to S816H. On the other hand, in the process of S824H, if it is determined that the electric support flag 203rb is off (S824H: No), the process proceeds to S817H.
By executing this normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 1934), it is possible to switch the data table to be referred to when executing the normal symbol lottery according to the state of the normal symbol high probability flag 203ra. In addition, depending on the state of the electric support flag 203rb, it is possible to switch the variation time of the normal design and the release pattern of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning the normal design.
<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the fifty-fifth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1935 and 1936. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1935, the details of the variation effect setting process (S5014L) in the fifty-fifth control example will be described. This variable effect setting process (S5014L) is a process executed in place of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1865) in the fifty-first control example described above, and similar to the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1865), the main This is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable display presentation based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110 . FIG. 1935 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S5014L).
S5101H to S5106H and S5108H to S5117H of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 1935) in the fifty-fifth control example correspond to S5101H to S5106H of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 1865) in the fifty-first control example. , and S5108H to S5117H are executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 1935) in the fifty-fifth control example, when the process of S5106H ends, it is determined whether or not there is no power supply (S5121L), and it is determined that there is no power supply. If so (S5121L: Yes), the process proceeds to S5108H. On the other hand, in the process of S5121L, if it is determined that the power supply is in the state (S5121L: No), the power supply during production setting process for setting the production mode during the power supply state is executed (S5122L ), the process ends. The details of the effect setting process (S5122L) during the electric support will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1936 is a flow chart showing the above-described effect setting processing (S5122L) during electric power support. In the power support setting process (S5122L), first, the lottery result of this time is read (S5171L), and it is determined whether or not the read lottery result is the lottery result of the time saving symbol winning (S5172L). In the process of S5172L, if it is determined that the lottery result of the time reduction symbol winning (S5172: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time reduction stocked flag 223mb is off (S5173L), the time reduction stocked flag 223mb is off (S5173L: Yes), the time saving stocked flag 223mb is set to on (S5174L), and the process proceeds to S5175L. On the other hand, in the processing of S5172L, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not the time saving pattern winning (S5172L: No), and in the processing of S5173L, if it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is on ( S5173L: No), the process of S5174L is skipped and the process proceeds to S5175L.
In the process of S5175L, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S5175L), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S5175L: Yes), then the state with electric support (S5176L). In the processing of S5176L, if it is determined that it is a small hit of the type that ends the state with electric support (S5176L: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving stock flag 223mb is on (S5177L), If it is determined that the time-saving stock flag 223mb is off (S5177L: No), the state with electric sapo is terminated, and since the time-saving stock is not possessed, it means that the state moves to the state without electric sapo that is disadvantageous. Therefore, an effect mode (see FIG. 1919(b)) in which the rabbit character 801 is defeated by the enemy monster character 821 is determined as a variable display effect (S5178L), and the process proceeds to S5183L.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5176L, if it is determined that the small hit won this time is not a small hit of the type that ends the state with electric support (S5176L: No), and in the processing of S5177L, the time saving stock flag 223mb If it is determined that it is ON (S5177L: Yes), it means that the state with the electric sapo which is advantageous will continue even after the end of the small win. decides the effect mode in which the player wins (S5179L), and the process proceeds to S5183L.
On the other hand, in the process of S5175L, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S5175L: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit (S5180L). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S5180L: Yes), the effect mode with the effect of obtaining the V icon is determined as the variable display effect (S5181L), and the process proceeds to S5183L.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5180L, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S5180L: No), the state suggestion effect selection table 202ra (see FIG. 1929) is referred to, the current state The state of the sure flag 223ra and the secondary electric support flag 223rb) and the state of the time-saving stocked flag 223mb are specified to specify whether or not the state notice effect is executed and the state notice effect type, and the variable display mode accompanied by the specified state notice effect type. Alternatively, a variable display mode without state announcement effect is determined (S5182L), and the process proceeds to S5183L.
In the process of S5183L, a variable pattern command for display indicating the effect mode determined by one of the processes of S5178L, S5179L, S5181L, and S5182L is set (S5183L), and the value corresponding to the determined effect mode is set as the variable time. It is set in the counter 223je (S5184L), and this processing ends. By executing this effect setting process during electric support (see FIG. 1936), it is possible to realize a game feature of predicting the current state according to the type of state notice effect executed during the power support state.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fifth control example, the first control (normal symbol low probability state) and the special symbol lottery than the first control are controlled to facilitate the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be able to switch between the second control (high probability state of normal symbols) that is easier to execute, and in parallel with these first control and second control, the third control (state without power supply) and It is configured to be able to switch to the fourth control (state with electric sapo) in which the lottery of special symbols is more likely to be executed than the third control. Then, in a specific game state where the second control and the fourth control are set (high probability state of normal symbols, and variable probability mode A and time saving mode A set to a state with electric sapo), the first condition is When it is established, it is possible to switch to the first control while maintaining the fourth control. Further, it is possible to switch to the third control while maintaining the second control when the second condition is satisfied in a specific game state. Furthermore, when the third condition is satisfied in a specific game state, it is possible to switch to the first control and the third control. In other words, in a state in which a plurality of controls are set in which the special symbol lottery is relatively easily executed, part or all of the control can be switched to the control in which the special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed. configured to In other words, in a specific game state, if a special lottery result (small hit) that is different from a big hit or a time-saving design win is obtained, the set time-saving state setting (normal design high probability state setting , and setting of the state with electric support) can be cleared (partially or all of the set time saving state can be terminated). More specifically, the high probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo are terminated (if both the high probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo are set, clear both settings ) to end the small win (small win A58) that triggers, the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the state with the electric sapo (both the low probability state of the normal pattern and the state with the electric sapo are set In the case, clear the setting of the state with electric sapo), regardless of the small hit (small hit B58) that triggers and the type of time saving state that is set, the high probability state of the normal pattern is ended (normal pattern When the high probability state is set, clear only the setting of the high probability state of the normal pattern regardless of whether it is in the state with the electric sapo). Regardless of the type of time-saving state, end the state with electric sapo (when the state with electric sapo is set, the state with electric It is configured to provide a small hit (small hit C58) that serves as a trigger for clearing only). As a result, a state in which only a part of the setting of the time-saving state remains can be formed, so that more states can be formed than in the conventional game machine, so that more complicated state transition can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, in a specific game state (normal symbol high probability state and electric sapo state), a first situation, a second situation different from the first situation, can be established, and the degree of advantage is higher when the specific condition is satisfied in the second situation than when the specific condition that can end the state with the electric support is satisfied in the first situation. Configured. In other words, a state in which it is desirable that the condition for terminating the state with the electric sapo is established and a state in which it is desirable that the condition for terminating the state with the electric sapo is not established can be formed in the same game state. . More specifically, in the fifty-fifth control example, a state with a high probability of normal symbols and an electric The low probability state of the normal pattern and the state with the electric sapo are configured so that the degree of advantage is higher than the state with the sapo, and further, when the time saving pattern winning occurs in the state with the electric sapo, the time saving is performed. It is configured so that the granting of the state with the electric sapo based on the symbol winning can be made to wait until the state with the electric sapo is terminated (stocked for short time). Then, when a time-saving pattern winning occurs, only the state with electric support is provided without changing the state of the normal pattern. In other words, in the high probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo, clear both the setting of the high probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo in the state (first situation) in which the time saving stock is not possessed If you win a small hit (specific conditions are met), you will be set to a low probability state of normal symbols that are disadvantageous to the player, and a state without an electric sapo, while possessing a short-time stock (No. 2 situation), if you win a small hit that clears both the settings of the high probability state of the normal pattern and the state with the electric sapo (specific conditions are established), the low probability state of the normal pattern and the electric sapo As a result of being in a state without a time saving stock, only a state with an electric sapo is given, and as a result, it is configured to shift to a low probability state of a normal pattern with a high degree of advantage and a state with an electric sapo. By configuring in this way, the end condition (specific condition) of the time saving state depends on whether the time saving stock is possessed (second situation) or not (first situation) Since it is possible to greatly differ the degree of advantage when the condition is established, it is desirable to avoid the establishment of the specific condition depending on whether it is the first situation or the second situation even in the same specific game state. It is possible to realize a very novel and special game property that makes you think, or makes you want a specific condition to be established. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the fifty-fifth control example, after the high probability state of normal symbols and the state with electric sapo are set based on the end of the jackpot, at least until the setting of the state with electric sapo is cleared, normal In order to make it relatively difficult for the player to grasp whether the pattern is in a high-probability state or whether he/she has a time-saving stock, the same type of performance mode is continuously executed. In other words, when a time-saving stock occurs or when the normal pattern shifts to a low-probability state, the player is not immediately notified of these events, and the same state continues apparently. It is configured to set an effect mode that can make the player feel as if he or she is playing. Then, by varying the selection ratio (execution ratio) of some production modes that can be set in the variable display production depending on the situation (whether there is a time saving stock, whether it is a high probability state of normal symbols, etc.) It is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the stock is already possessed and whether or not the state is shifted to the low probability state of the normal pattern having a high degree of advantage from the performance mode of the variable display performance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game during the period from the end of the big win to the end of the state with electric support.
In addition, in the fifty-fifth control example, in contrast to the high probability state of normal symbols and the state with electric sapo (specific game state), the low probability state of normal symbols and the state with electric sapo (first game state) ) is configured to have a higher degree of advantage, and the degree of advantage is lower in the high-probability state of normal symbols and the state without electric sapo (second game state). It is not limited to this. For example, with respect to the high probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo (specific game state), the low probability state of the normal design and the state with the electric sapo (first game state) is more advantageous. It may be configured to be low, and may be configured so that the degree of advantage is higher in the high-probability state of normal symbols and in the state without electric sapo (second game state). More specifically, for example, the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the low probability state of the normal pattern is extremely low, and the state with the electric sapo and the state without the electric sapo are the normal symbols. The fluctuation time is slightly longer (for example, 0.01 seconds) to the extent that it is difficult to recognize, and the opening period at the time of winning the normal pattern is slightly longer (for example, 0.01 seconds) to the extent that it is difficult to recognize. You may In other words, a high probability state of the normal design, and a state with an electric sapo (specific game state) or a high probability state of the normal design, and a state without an electric sapo (second game state) will be a right-handed game, In the low probability state of normal symbols and the state with electric sapo (first game state), the most disadvantageous state for the player is the low probability state of normal symbols and the state without electric sapo (third game state). It may be configured to be a hitting game. Then, in the state without the electric sapo, it is easier to set a game state with a high degree of advantage as the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, for example, than in the state with the electric sapo (for example, the distribution of the probability variable jackpot becomes higher). It may be configured as By configuring in this way, in a game state (specific game state) set to a high-probability state of normal symbols and a state with an electric sapo, to a state without electric sapo while maintaining a high-probability state of normal symbols. (That is, winning the small winning D58) can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, the specific condition is established in the first situation (state with a short time stock) in a specific game state (normal pattern high probability state and electric sapo state) (small winning D58 ) and set to no electric sapo state, the time saving stock will be consumed and the state will return to the electric sapo state, so the degree of advantage will be low On the other hand, in the second situation (not possessing a time-saving stock), a specific condition is established (electing a small hit D58) to the state without electric support By being set, the degree of advantage becomes high (high probability state of normal design with high degree of advantage, and transition to no electric sapo state) game characteristics. That is, contrary to the above-described fifty-fifth control example, the conditions for shifting to the state without the electric sapo after acquiring the time saving stock in the high probability state of the normal symbol and the state with the electric sapo are established. The degree of advantage becomes higher when the condition for shifting to the state without electric sapo is satisfied before acquiring the stock. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the fifty-fifth control example, in a specific game state (high probability state of normal symbols and state with electric sapo), the specific condition is satisfied in the first situation (state with time saving stock) (setting of time saving state If you win a small hit A58 that clears all), the degree of advantage becomes relatively high (a low probability state of normal patterns and a state with an electric sapo is set), and in a specific game state, the second situation (time saving It was configured so that the degree of advantage would be relatively low when a specific condition was met (normal pattern low probability state and no electric sapo state were set), The specific condition is not limited to winning a small hit of a type that clears all setting of the time saving state. Instead of this, or in addition, for example, after the specific game state is set, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times) as the establishment of the specific condition, the normal symbol low probability state and no electrical support state may be set. When configured in this manner, by intentionally performing a left-handed stroke in a specific game state in which a right-handed game should be performed and executing the lottery for the first special symbol, a low probability state of normal symbols and a state without an electric sapo can be achieved. Since it can be configured to be set, the player is made to predict whether it is the first situation or the second situation, and at the timing when it is predicted that the second situation has occurred, the first special is played by hitting left. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a lottery of symbols is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Moreover, for example, it is good also as a structure which provides the predetermined ball entrance which clears all the setting of a time-saving state by entering a game ball. Even in the case of such a configuration, the player is made to predict whether the situation is the first or the second situation, and the game is played aiming at the predetermined ball entrance at the timing when the second situation is predicted. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the ball is shot and all the settings of the time saving state are cleared. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Also, for example, as a specific condition, based on the fact that the total number of times of lottery of the second special symbol or the number of times of lottery of the special symbol has become a specific number of times (for example, 50 times), the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the electronic It may be configured such that a state without support is set. When configured in this way, the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times is subtracted by playing a right-handed game. It is possible to realize great playability. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In this 55th control example, in a specific game state (normal pattern high probability state and electric sapo state), the first situation (state of not having time saving stock) to the second situation (time saving stock Although the configuration is such that when the device switches to the held state, the first situation is not returned, but the configuration is not limited to this, and even if the second situation occurs, the first situation can be returned to. may be Specifically, for example, based on a specific lottery result in a special symbol lottery, the second situation may be returned to the first situation. That is, it is good also as a structure which provides the lottery result which extinguishes the acquired time-saving stock. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether the situation is the first situation or the second situation, so that the player can be made to predict the situation more seriously. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the fifty-fifth control example, only the provision of the time saving state based on the time saving symbol winning in a specific game state is configured to be stockable, but the stockable object is not limited to this. For example, a part or all of the setting of the time saving state based on the small hit winning (time saving clear stock) may be configured to be stockable. More specifically, as a specific condition (end condition of the time saving state), the condition that the number of times of lottery of special symbols is a specific number of times (50 times) is set, and the specific condition is established and the low probability state of normal symbols, In addition, when the state without electric sapo is set, the setting of the state with electric sapo based on the short time stock and the clearing of the state with electric sapo based on the short time clear stock are repeated for the number of stocks. You may In other words, if the number of time-saving stocks is less than or equal to the number of time-saving clear stocks, the state after the specific condition is established (and after each stock is digested) is a low-probability normal pattern state with no power supply. On the other hand, if the number of time-saving stocks is greater than the number of time-saving clear stocks, the state after the establishment of a specific condition (and after digestion of each stock) is an advantageous normal pattern low-probability state, In addition, it may be configured to be set to a state with an electric support. By configuring in this way, not only the presence or absence of the time-saving stock, but also the number of time-saving stocks and the number of time-saving clear stocks can be predicted, so that a deeper game can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. can be made In this case, the first situation corresponds to a situation in which the number of time-saving stocks is less than or equal to the number of time-saving clear stocks, and the second situation corresponds to a situation in which the number of time-saving clear stocks is greater than the number of time-saving clear stocks. corresponds to
In the fifty-fifth control example, the first situation (situation with a low degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied) and the second situation (situation with a high degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied) are each reduced to time-saving stock. and the state of possessing a short-time stock, but it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the presence or absence of time-saving stock, it may be configured to switch between the first situation and the second situation according to the number of special symbol lotteries. Specifically, for example, the first situation and the second situation may be switched each time the special symbol lottery is executed ten times. By constructing in this way, the game can be played while paying attention to the number of lotteries of the special symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Second Modification of 51st Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the fifty-first control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1937 to 1942. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, when the time-saving design is elected in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state (special symbol low-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state), time-saving It is configured to be able to hold (stock) time-saving winning information based on symbol winning, and after the first time-saving state is completed, a second time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal symbol) based on the stocked time-saving winning information electric support state in a low probability state) can be set.
And, as shown in FIG. 1853, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state (whether or not the jackpot is won, whether or not the time saving symbol is won) is determined by the variable production performed during the first time saving state. It was structured in such a way that it could be suggested. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above is configured to delete stocked time-saving winning information on the basis of a jackpot winning in a special symbol lottery that is excessively advantageous to the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example configured in this way, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, a privilege (jackpot game and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game), and the benefit given based on the time-saving winning information that is erased based on the jackpot winning (the number of time-saving states in the second time-saving state), which is advantageous to the player There is a problem that it is not possible to grasp whether it is a privilege or not, and it is not possible to obediently rejoice that a jackpot has been won.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifty-first control example, in the variable performance executed during the first time-saving state, the privilege given based on the jackpot winning is based on the jackpot winning. It is configured to be able to execute an effect capable of informing the player whether or not it is more advantageous to the player than the privilege erased by pressing.
<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the second modified example of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1937 to 1939, the content of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifty-first control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifty-first control example in the content of the variable performance performed during the first time-saving state. is different. Below, description will be given of the effect contents different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above.
FIG. 1937(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the jackpot variation in which the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won during the first time saving state, and FIG. 1937(b) is the second It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed during the big-hit fluctuation|variation which won the big-hit advantageous to a player during the 1 hour reduction state.

Since the figure shown in FIG. 1937 (a) is in the 4039th special pattern fluctuation after the first time saving state (100 times of working hours) is set, it is already in the state of winning three time saving patterns In the display area Dm7, "remaining 60 times" is displayed as a display mode indicating the remaining period of the first time saving state (remaining time saving number of times), and in the display area Dm70, the number of time saving symbol winning times is 3 times. Acquisition icons P1 to P3 are displayed correspondingly. In addition, the jackpot F54b (2 rounds of time-saving jackpot (10 times of time-saving times)) is set in a state where the jackpot variation is being executed, and the number of time-saving times (10 times) set based on the jackpot winning is the jackpot winning. The number of time saving times erased based on, that is, the number of remaining time saving times in the first time saving state (60 times) and the retained time saving winning information (time saving times 60 times) are less than the executable time saving times A V-icon 801V is displayed in the display mode "Poison V" for purposes of illustration.
Then, in the sub-display area Ds, "If you touch 'poison V', you will be in a big pinch! ! Dodge well! ! ” is displayed. In addition, the V icon 801V of this "poison V" is a display mode that is displayed at the time of winning a jackpot in which the number of times of saving time is less than the number of times of saving time that can be performed, or a part of the time of loss fluctuation. When the "poison V" V-icon 801V is displayed at the same time, the character 801 runs through without touching the "poison V" V-icon 801V, and when the big win fluctuates, the "poison V" V-icon 801V is displayed. In this case, an action is executed in which the character 801 touches the V icon 801V of "Poison V", and the player is informed that he or she has won a big win that is disadvantageous.
In addition, in the time saving symbol winning variation, the V icon 801V of "poison V" may be configured to be displayable. In this case, the action of the character 801 avoiding the V-icon 801V of "poison V" and getting the P-icon 802V is executed.
Next, the figure shown in FIG. 1937(b) explains the variable effect executed when winning the jackpot in which the number of times of shortening of working hours is greater than the number of times of shortening of working hours. Figure 1937 (b) is in the state of 80 times the number of times of possible time saving, and the number of times of time saving 100 times is given. An example is shown, and the display mode of "V100" for showing that 100 times of time saving is provided is displayed as a display mode of V icon 801V which shows jackpot winning.

In this way, by displaying the V-icon 801V in a display mode that allows the player to grasp that the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving that can be performed is set, the player wins a big win that is advantageous to the player. This can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1938, the effect contents when the absolute get mode is executed as the variable effect in the first time saving state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, the V-icon 801V and the P-icon 802V are always displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the first time-saving state is set. Even when the special symbol variation indicating the short-time symbol winning or the big win winning is executed in the variable time of time, the result of the special symbol lottery is given to the player within the performance period corresponding to the short-time variable time. It was structured so that it could be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.
However, there is a possibility that the player may miss the moment when the character 801 obtains the V-icon 801V or the P-icon 802V in which variation effect the character 801 obtains.
On the other hand, in the second modification, when the character 801 gets either the V-icon 801V or the P-icon 802V, the action of actually getting either the V-icon 801V or the P-icon 802V is executed. It is configured so that it can be notified to the player before the game is played.

Specifically, as shown in 2086(a), the characters "absolute get mode" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed in which the character 801 wearing an aura 801a runs through the sub display area. In Ds, characters of "You can get at least one icon!" are displayed as a guidance display mode for informing the player of the effect result of the current variable effect in advance.
With this configuration, it is easy for the player to execute the effect of getting any icon in this variable effect before the character 801 gets the V-icon 801V or the P-icon 802V. can be grasped.
Further, when the absolute get mode is set, a variable effect is executed in which an effect in which the character 801 tries to get the V-icon 801V and an effect in which the character 801 tries to get the P-icon 802V are sequentially executed. When the action of getting the V-icon 801V is executed in the absolute get mode, the effect of trying to get the P-icon 802V is executed, and then the effect of trying to get the V-icon 801V is executed. Thus, when the action of getting the P-icon 802V is executed in the absolute get mode, the effect of trying to get the P-icon 802V is easily executed after the effect of trying to get the V-icon 801V is executed. It consists of
In other words, when a variable effect is executed to get a plurality of icons in order, the order of the icons to get is switched according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. And it is configured so that it is easier to actually get the icon in the effect that is executed later.

By configuring in this way, the player can be entertained while keeping the player interested until the end of the variable performance in which the absolute get mode is set. In addition, it is possible to make it easy for the player to predict the effect result of the current variable effect depending on the order in which the effect to get the icon is executed.
The diagram shown in FIG. 1938(b) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the absolute get mode is set during the variation of the jackpot, and the previously executed effect of trying to get the P icon 802V. , the P-icon 802V is moved to the left side of the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed to try to get the V-icon 801V. In other words, this shows a situation where the variable performance is progressing and the player can grasp that the current variable performance is a variable performance that is being executed in response to the variation of the big win. is a variable effect to get the V icon 801V, as a guidance display mode of "Get 'V' confirmed! ! Congrats! ! ” is displayed.
Further, in the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 1938, an effect mode other than the effect mode of trying to get a plurality of icons in order can be set as a variable effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1939, it is configured to be able to execute a variable effect in which both of a plurality of icons (V-icon 801V, P-icon 802V) are obtained.
Specifically, in the case of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and in part of the case of winning a time-saving jackpot with a number of times of time-saving that is larger than the number of times of time-saving that can be performed, it is notified in advance that a plurality of icons will be obtained. It is configured so that the "greedy mode" for

When this "greedy mode" is set, as shown in FIG. 1939, "greedy mode" is displayed in the upper central part of the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds displays the effect executed during the greedy mode. As a guidance display mode for guiding the content to the player, the characters "When you get an icon, always get two!!" are displayed. That is, during the greedy mode, an effect is executed in which either the effect result in which no icon can be obtained or the effect result in which any icon is obtained is set.
Specifically, the "greedy mode" is a jackpot in which the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, or the jackpot winning, It is configured to be executable when the number of time reductions in the first time reduction state that is set is greater than the number of possible time reductions, and the ``greedy mode'' that is executed in response to deviation fluctuations is an effect in which you can not get any icons. As a result, the ``greedy mode'' effect is performed, and the ``greedy mode'' performed in response to the winning of the jackpot is performed as a result of the effect of getting both icons.
The diagram shown in FIG. 1939 is a display screen during the "greedy mode" effect executed during the variation of the big win, in which the character 801 is displayed with an action of running at a speed higher than usual, and the icon acquisition expectation is high. It shows that After the display screen shown in FIG. 1930 is displayed, an effect is executed in which the V-icon 801V and the P-icon 802V are obtained simultaneously (substantially simultaneously).
As described above, when the "greedy mode" effect is executed, the special symbol lottery is lost. In other words, if the stocked time-saving winning information is not deleted. Alternatively, since the special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning advantageous to the player, even if the "greedy mode" effect is executed in any effect result, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery Since a game disadvantageous to the player is not executed based on this, the player can enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

As described above, in the second modification of the fifty-first control example, the effect that is executed during the first time-saving state is advantageous to the player when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is constituted so that it is possible to inform the player whether the privilege is a special benefit or a privilege which is disadvantageous before the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, and the same performance can be executed even when the prize is not won. ing. Therefore, when a display mode is displayed indicating that the privilege given in the event of winning the jackpot is a privilege that is disadvantageous to the player, the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot (action to get the V-icon 801V) does not occur. It is possible to execute a novel performance that makes the player expect that.
In addition, in the second modified example, the special symbol variation period for indicating the result of one special symbol lottery is used to perform an effect as to whether or not the character 801 gets the V icon 801V or the P icon 802V. However, without being limited to this, based on the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) for the execution right (special design reservation) of the acquired special design lottery, across the fluctuation period of multiple special design fluctuations , the character 801 may be configured to execute an effect as to whether or not the character 801 gets the V-icon 801V or the P-icon 802V. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the effect period of the effect of whether or not the character 801 gets the V-icon 801V or the P-icon 802V.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 1940, the electrical configuration in the second modification of the fifty-first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifty-first control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above in that a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed. is doing. Specifically, it is different in that the table 202mbd2 for the special figure 2 jackpot is provided instead of the table 202md2 for the special figure 2 jackpot (see FIG. 1859 (c)). Other than that, the electrical configuration is the same. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
The special figure 2 jackpot table 202mbd2 is the same as the special figure 2 jackpot table 202md2 (see FIG. 1859(c)) in the fifty-first control example described above. It is a data table referred to when determining the type. The pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifty-first control example increases the types of jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above. As a type of normal jackpot (time-saving jackpot) in which the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game is finished, there are jackpot types in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the number of times of the first time-saving state are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1940, the detailed contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202mbd2 will be described. FIG. 1940 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202mbd2. As shown in FIG. 1940, the table 202mbd2 for the special figure 2 jackpot, corresponding to the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, six types of jackpot types are defined.
Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 44", the jackpot type "jackpot A54" is in the range of "45 to 49", the jackpot type "jackpot B54” is defined. It should be noted that the jackpot types "jackpot A54" and "jackpot B54" are jackpot types corresponding to the probability variable jackpots in which the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and are granted when set (round The number of games played, conditions for ending the variable probability state, etc.) and the selection ratio are the same as those of the fifty-first control example described above, so description thereof will be omitted.
In addition, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 69", the jackpot type "jackpot C54b" is set, and when the value is in the range of "70 to 79", the jackpot type "jackpot D54b" is set. , the jackpot type “jackpot F54b” is defined for the range “80 to 89”, and the jackpot type “jackpot F54b” is defined for the range “90 to 99”.
"Jack C54b" is a jackpot corresponding to a normal jackpot (time-saving jackpot) in which the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) is not set after the jackpot game ends. As a value set at the end of the jackpot game so that the first time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as a type and the number of time saving times is 50 times after the jackpot game is finished. , "50" to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and "0" to the value of the probability variation counter 203i.

The "jackpot D54b" is a jackpot corresponding to a normal jackpot (short-time jackpot) in which the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is two rounds, and the variable state (high probability state of special symbols) is not set after the jackpot game is finished. As a value set at the end of the jackpot game so that the first time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as a type and the number of time saving times is 150 times after the jackpot game ends. , "150" is defined to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and "0" is defined to the value of the variable probability counter 203i.
The "jackpot E54b" is a jackpot corresponding to a normal jackpot (time-saving jackpot) in which the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is two rounds, and the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols) is not set after the jackpot game ends. As a value set at the end of the jackpot game so that the first time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as a type and the number of time saving times is 100 times after the jackpot game ends. , "100" is defined in the value of the time saving counter 203h, and "0" is defined in the value of the variable probability counter 203i.
"Jackpot F54b" is a jackpot corresponding to a normal jackpot (time-saving jackpot) in which the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols) is not set after the jackpot game ends. As a value set at the end of the jackpot game so that the first time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as a type and the number of time saving times is 10 times after the jackpot game ends. , "10" is defined to the value of the time saving counter 203h, and "0" is defined to the value of the probability variable counter 203i.
As described above, in the second modification of the fifty-first control example, similarly to the fifty-first control example described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A54, jackpot B54) is selected is 50%, and the ratio of normal jackpots (jackpot C54b, jackpot D54b, jackpot E54b, jackpot F54b) is selected to be 50%. Then, the ratio of setting 10 rounds of the jackpot game out of the normal jackpots (the ratio of setting the jackpot C54b) is 40%, and the ratio of setting the jackpot games of 2 rounds (jackets D54b, jackpot E54b, jackpot F54b are set ratio) is stipulated to be 60%.

That is, in the second modification of the fifty-first control example, the jackpot game (two-round game) in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small, and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. As a jackpot type, it is configured to be able to set a jackpot type in which the number of times of time saving to be set is different. By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won during the first time-saving state, it is possible to easily create a jackpot that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player based on the set jackpot type. can.
<Regarding control processing in the second modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1941 and 1942, a description will be given of the processing contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifty-first control example. do. The pachinko machine 10 according to the second modified example differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifty-first control example described above in that part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed. The other control processing is the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to Drawing 1941, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5102Lb) in time saving state are explained. FIG. 1941 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5102Lb) during the time saving state. This time-saving state production setting process (S5102Lb) is a process executed instead of the time-saving state production setting process (see S5102L in FIG. 1866) of the fifty-first control example described above, and is executed during the time-saving state. A process for determining the effect mode of the icon acquisition effect (see FIG. 1853) set based on the result of the special symbol lottery is executed.
Specifically, when the production setting process during the time saving state (S5102Lb) is executed, first, the processing from S5151L to S5154L which is the same as the production setting process during the time saving state described above (see S5102L in FIG. 1866) is executed. Then, if it is determined that the time-saving stocked flag 223mb is not set to off in the processing of S5153L, that is, if it is determined that the time-saving stocked flag 223mb is set to on (S5153L: No), absolute get Mode execution is determined by lottery (S5151Lb), then it is determined whether execution of the absolute get mode is determined (S5152Lb), and if it is determined that execution of the absolute get mode is determined (S5152Lb: Yes), V After the first effect in which the icon 801V is not acquired, the effect mode for executing the second effect in which the P icon 802V is acquired is determined (S5153Lb), and the effect mode corresponding to the absolute get mode (rear image, display of the sub display area Ds, etc.) is determined. Mode, etc.) is determined (S5154Lb), and 20, which is a value corresponding to the number of times of reduced working hours included in the reduced working hours symbol winning information, is added to the value of the reduced waiting times counter 223ma (S5156L), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5152Lb, if it is determined that the execution of the absolute get mode is not determined (S5152Lb: No), the effect mode of acquiring the P icon 802V for indicating the time saving symbol winning is determined (S5155L), The process of S5156L is executed, and this process ends.
Also, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving symbol election in the process of S5152L (S5152L: No), then it is determined whether it is a jackpot election (S5157L), and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot election (S5157L: No ), the same processing of S5165 as in the fifty-first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is won (S5157L: Yes), it is determined whether the time saving stock flag 223mb is on (S5158L), and when it is determined that it is on (S5157L: Yes), time saving stock The completed flag 223mb is set to off (S5163L), and the process proceeds to S5155Lb.
If it is determined that the time saving stock flag 223mb is not on in the process of S5158L (S5158L: No), the jackpot winning mode setting process is executed (S5155Lb), and the value of the standby time saving counter 223ma is cleared to 0 ( S5160L), this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1942, the processing contents of the jackpot winning mode setting process (S5155Lb) executed in the production setting process (S5102Lb) during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 1942 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the jackpot winning mode setting processing (S5155Lb). In this jackpot winning state setting process (S5155Lb), a process for determining the effect mode (the effect mode of getting the V-icon 801V) when the jackpot is won in the time saving state is executed.

Specifically, when the jackpot winning mode setting process (S5155Lb) is executed, first, the jackpot type won this time is read out (S5171Lb), and whether the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot A54, jackpot B54) is determined (S5172Lb), and if it is determined to be a variable probability jackpot (S5172Lb: Yes), the execution of the absolute get mode is determined by lottery (S5173Lb), and it is determined whether the execution of the absolute get mode is determined (S5174Lb ).
In the process of S5174Lb, if it is determined that the absolute get mode is to be executed (S5174Lb: Yes), the effect mode of executing the second effect of acquiring the V icon 801V after the first effect of not acquiring the P icon 802V is determined. (S5175Lb), the effect mode corresponding to the absolute get mode is determined (S5176Lb), and this process is terminated.
Also, in the processing of S5174Lb, when it is determined that the absolute get mode is not executed (S5174Lb: No), the effect mode of obtaining the V icon for indicating the winning of the jackpot is determined (S5177Lb), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5172Lb, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not a probability variable jackpot (S5172Lb: No), then read the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma (S5178Lb), and the value of the time reduction medium counter 223da Read (S5179Lb), calculate the number of possible time reductions based on the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma and the value of the time reduction counter 223da (S5180Lb), and the number of times the executable time reduction is the number of times corresponding to the current jackpot type. (S5181Lb).
In the process of S5181Lb, if it is determined that the number of times of possible time saving is larger (S5181Lb: Yes), the execution of the greedy mode is determined by lottery (S5182Lb), and it is determined whether the execution of the greedy mode is determined (S5183Lb ), if it is determined that the execution of the greedy mode is determined (S5183Lb: Yes), the effect mode for acquiring the V icon 801V and the P icon 802V is determined (S5184Lb), and the effect mode corresponding to the greedy mode is determined. (S5185Lb), this processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S5183Lb, if it is determined that the execution of the greedy mode is not determined (S5183Lb: No), the display mode of the V icon 801V indicating advantageous jackpot winning is determined (S5186Lb) to indicate jackpot winning. (S5188Lb), and terminates this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5181Lb, if it is determined that the number of times of possible time saving is smaller (S5181Lb: No), the display mode of the V icon 801V indicating the disadvantageous jackpot winning is determined (S5187Lb), and the processing of S5188Lb is executed. , the process ends.
<Regarding the third modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1943 to 1948, a third modification of the fifty-first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above is configured to execute the same effects in the first time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game and the second time-saving state set based on the time-saving symbol winning. By doing so, it is possible to execute a game that makes the player expect that the first time saving state will be extended.
Then, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, the probability of winning a time saving pattern in the time saving pattern lottery executed during the first time saving state is configured so that the number of time saving times is set to 100 times as the first time saving state. is set to 1/20, even if the time saving pattern is not won during the first time saving state, the player can enjoy the time saving state (electric support state) to some extent. Was.
In the fifty-first control example configured in this manner, since the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state is set relatively long as 100 times, a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state. As a result, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to receive the benefit of the time-saving symbol winning. That is, in the fifty-first control example described above, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 are determined so that the second time saving state is set as a benefit that is additionally given to the first time saving state.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification of the fifty-first control example is configured to reduce the number of times of time saving set as the first time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game (four times of time saving), and , The probability of winning the time-saving pattern in the time-saving pattern lottery is configured to be high probability (winning probability about 1/2). In other words, the first time-saving state is provided as a role of a chance zone in which the time-saving pattern can be won, and a right-handed game mainly in the second time-saving state set based on the time-saving pattern winning is configured to be executable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the ratio of the second time-saving state set based on the time-saving symbol winning among the game states (electric support state) that are advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the lottery result of the time-saving pattern lottery can make you interested. In addition, the number of times of shortening of working hours (the number of times of shortening of working hours in the second state of shortening of working hours) set by the number of times of winning of the shortening of working hours in the special symbol lottery executed during the first state of shortening of working hours for a limited period can be varied.
<Regarding the contents of the effect in the third modified example of the fifty-first control example>
First, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example, the content of the characteristic effects that are different from the fifty-first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above in that the content of the effect executed during the first time-saving state is different.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1943, the contents of the effect executed during the first time saving state by the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described. Figure 1943 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the first special symbol variation in the first time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, and Figure 1943 (b) shows the first It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed during the final change (time saving final change) of 1 time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 1943 (a), when the first time saving state is set, the characters "LV up zone" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, and the display area Dm7 executes during the LV up zone The character "chance is 4 times" is displayed as a value indicating the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of remaining time reduction in the first time reduction state). Also, in the main display area Dm, a button Ba1 imitating the frame button 22 and a friendly character 8010 imitating a turtle are displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the player is guided to the contents of the game during the LV up zone. As a guidance display mode for this purpose, the characters "Press the button PUSH to increase the level of allies" are displayed.
This LV up zone is a period effect executed during the period in which the first time saving state is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state and the frame button 22 by the player. and an effect that changes the display mode (level) of the teammate character 8010 is executed. Specifically, the display modes of the teammate character 8010 include a first display mode (a display mode with LV1), a second display mode (a display mode with LV2), and a third display mode (a display mode with LV3). display mode) and a fourth display mode (display mode with LV4 attached) can be set, and immediately after the LV up zone is set, the teammate character 8010 is displayed in the first display mode (Fig. 1943(a)).
Then, when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the LV up zone, the display mode is variably set so that the level of the teammate character 8010 is increased step by step. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict that the higher the level of the friend character 8010 displayed in the LV up zone, the more time-saving symbols will be won.
Further, in the third modified example of the fifty-first control example, unless the player operates the frame button 22 during the LV up zone, the display mode of the teammate character 8010 is not changed. By configuring in this way, a display mode (button Ba1) prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed for the player who wants to grasp the presence or absence of the time-saving symbol winning every time the special symbol lottery is executed during the LV up zone. Each time, a game for operating the frame button 22 is executed, and whether or not time-saving patterns are won in individual special pattern lotteries executed during the LV-up zone is not grasped, and at the end of the LV-up zone, time-saving patterns are won collectively. A player who wants to grasp the result can easily play the game desired by the player by executing the game without operating the frame button 22 even if the display mode (button Ba1) prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed. can be executed.

In addition, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the LV up zone, a different presentation mode is set according to the display mode of the friend character 8010 displayed at that time. , and when the display mode of the teammate character 8010 displayed at the time of winning the jackpot is the third display mode (level 3) or the fourth display mode (level 4), the teammate character 8010 is displayed in the chance display mode (more than usual). It is configured to be variably displayed to an enlarged display mode) and to be able to notify the jackpot winning.
Further, when the display mode of the ally character 8010 displayed at the time of winning the jackpot is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), an effect is executed in which the level of the ally character 8010 is raised. It is configured so that the jackpot winning is notified after the winning is done. With this configuration, by intentionally operating the frame button 22 during the LV up zone, a special presentation mode (chance display) is given to the player who is displaying the display mode of the teammate character 8010 in a variable manner. mode) can be made easier to execute.
On the other hand, a player who does not voluntarily operate the frame button 22 during the LV up zone or a player who voluntarily operates the frame button 22 during the LV up zone, and the display mode of the teammate character 8010 is variable. When the big win is won in a state where the special symbol lottery is not performed, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified after the performance corresponding to the time-saving pattern winning (the performance of raising the level of the ally character 8010) is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the time-saving pattern is won or the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery immediately after the performance for showing is executed.
When the last special symbol variation in the LV up zone is executed, as shown in FIG. 1943(b), the display area Dm7 displays "Last" as a display mode indicating that it is the final variation in the LV up zone. A character is displayed, and a friendly character 8010 (in the figure, the third display mode) in a variable display mode in the LV up zone performs an action of blowing out flames, and the special symbol lottery performed in the LV up zone is executed. An icon 8011 indicating the number of times of time saving (the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state) corresponding to the lottery result (time saving symbol winning result) is displayed.

The figure shown in FIG. 1943 (b) is an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving design is won in all of the 4 special design lotteries performed during the LV up zone (time saving number of times 20 times x 4). , and the icon 8011 displays “+80 times”. Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "get 80 times in a short time" are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the effect result of the LV up zone to the player.
After the display screen shown in FIG. 1943 (b) is displayed, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the icon 8011 of "+80 times" approaches the display area Dm7, and the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state "80 times left" is displayed in the display area Dm7 as a display mode for indicating, and an effect screen (see FIG. 1853(a)) during the second time saving state is displayed. In the third modification of the fifty-first control example, it is configured so that the time saving pattern lottery is not executed except during the first time saving state (only during the first time saving state, the number of time saving times in the second time saving state can be stocked 1853(a) described above in that only the V-icon 801V is displayed on the effect screen during the second time saving state, but description thereof will be omitted.
It should be noted that, even in the third modification, it may be configured so that the time saving symbol can be won in the second time saving state in the same way as the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above. In the same way as a), it may be configured to execute an effect of getting the V-icon 801V and the P-icon 802V during the second time-saving state.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1944, the electrical configuration in the third modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the fifty-first control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above in part in the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Other configurations are the same. Specifically, in the configuration of the ROM 202, instead of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202md1 (see FIG. 1859 (b)), the special figure 1 jackpot table 202mcd1, the time saving random number table 202mf (see FIG. 1858 (b) ) is replaced with a time saving per random number table 202mcf.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1944(a), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202mcd1 will be described. FIG. 1944(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202mcd1. As shown in FIG. 1944 (a), the special figure 1 jackpot table 202mcd1 has three types of jackpot types (jackpot A54, jackpot B54, jackpot C54c) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained. stipulated.
Specifically, "jackpot A54" for the range of "0 to 14" for the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, "jackpot B54" for the range of "15 to 49", "50 "Jackpot C54c" is defined for the range of ~99", respectively.
The jackpot type "jackpot A54" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 15 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A54" (0 to 14). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot A54" is 15% (15/100).

The jackpot type "jackpot B54" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B54" is 35 (15 to 49). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot B54" is 35% (35/100).
The jackpot type “jackpot C54c” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the time-reduction jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C54c" is 50 (50 to 99). When a jackpot is won in one special symbol lottery, the ratio of determining "jackpot C54c" is 50% (50/100).

That is, in the third modification of the fifty-first control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the rate at which the variable probability jackpot (jackpot A54, jackpot B54) is selected in contrast to the fifty-first control example described above. , The ratio of selecting the normal jackpot (jackpot C54c) and the game contents (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends) when the variable probability jackpot is selected are the same, and the normal jackpot is Only the game contents are different when they are selected.
More specifically, the only difference is that the value set in the time saving counter 203h is defined to be "4" when the jackpot C54c, which is the normal jackpot, is selected. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state (first time saving state) is set based on the winning of the jackpot, the first time saving state of four times of time saving is always set.
In addition, in the third modification, when the time saving state (first time saving state) is set based on the jackpot winning, the jackpot type is defined so that the first time saving state with four times of time saving is always set. However, without being limited to this, as the jackpot type corresponding to the normal jackpot, a plurality of jackpot types with different values set in the time-saving counter 203h may be defined. In this case, for example, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h can set a disadvantageous jackpot type smaller than "4" (for example, twice) and an advantageous jackpot type larger than "4" (for example, 10 times). Good to configure.
By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the first time saving state can be varied according to the set jackpot type, so the number of times of winning time saving symbols during the first time saving state is different. can be easily provided.

In addition, in the third modification, as in the fifty-first control example described above, only the end condition that is established when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times of time saving as the end condition of the first time saving state is defined. However, without being limited to this, as in the 54th control example described above, the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state is a specific result other than the jackpot winning (for example, small winning) It may be configured to add a termination condition that is established based on something. By configuring in this way, since the period in which the first time saving state continues can be made indefinite, it is possible to make it easier to provide a difference in the number of time saving symbol winning times during the first time saving state.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1944(b), the contents of the random number table 202mcf per time saving will be described. FIG. 1944(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the random number table 202mcf per time saving. As shown in FIG. 1944 (b), the time saving random number table 202mcf is for the time saving random number table 202mf (see FIG. 1858 (b)) of the 51st control example described above, for the second special symbol lottery, The difference is that the game state in which the time-saving pattern lottery is executed is different and the winning probability of winning the time-saving pattern is different. Other configurations are the same, so description thereof is omitted.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1944 (b), in the time saving random number table 202mcf, the special symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol), and the game state is the first time saving (first time saving state ), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired is defined for the range of "100 to 549", the determination value of time-saving symbol winning. And, for other game states, the determination value of time saving symbol winning is not defined.
The number that the first per random number counter C1 can take is 900 (0 to 899), and the range determined as time saving pattern winning is 450 (100 to 549), so it is executed during the first time saving state The probability of winning the time saving symbol in the second special symbol lottery is 1/2 (450/900).

<Regarding control processing in the third modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1945 to 1948, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example will be described. The third modified example of the fifty-first control example differs from the fifty-first control example described above in that the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. ing. Specifically, production setting processing (see S5102L of FIG. 1869) in time saving state production setting processing (see S5102Lc of FIG. 1945) instead of production setting processing (see S5102L of FIG. 1869), frame button input monitoring and production processing (S4101H of FIG. 1795) ) is replaced with frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4101Lc in FIG. 1948)). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to Drawing 1945, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5102Lc) in time saving state are explained. FIG. 1945 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting processing during the time saving state (S5102Lc). This time-saving state production setting process (S5102Lc) is different from the time-saving state production setting process (see S5102L in FIG. 1866) in the fifty-first control example described above, depending on the type of time-saving state that is set. It is different in that it is configured to set the mode.
Specifically, when the production setting process during the time saving state (S5102Lc) is executed, first, the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223g is read, and the type of the current time saving state is the first time saving state. It is determined whether (S5151Lc), and if it is determined that it is in the first time saving state (S5151Lc: Yes), the setting process during the first time saving state is executed (S5152Lc), and this process ends. In addition, the detailed contents of the setting process during the first time saving state will be described later with reference to FIG. 1946 .
On the other hand, in the processing of S5151Lc, if it is determined that it is not the first time saving state (the second time saving state) (S5151Lc: No), the time saving state production setting processing (S5102L in FIG. 1866) in the 51st control example described above ) are executed, and the process ends. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1945, in the process of S5157L, when it is determined that the big hit is not elected (S5157L: No), the effect setting process at the end of the time saving state is executed (S5153Lc), and then this process is terminated. However, the processing of this S5153Lc is the same control processing as the production setting processing at the end of the first time saving state (S5165L) in the production setting processing during the time saving state of the fifty-first control example (see S5102L in FIG. 1866). It is a thing. However, as described above, in the third modification, when the first time saving state is set, the setting process (S5152Lc) during the first time saving state is configured to be executed. For convenience, only the process names have been changed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1946, the processing contents of setting processing (S5152Lc) in the 1st time saving state performed by production setting processing (refer to S5102Lc of Drawing 1945) in time saving state are explained. FIG. 1946 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the setting processing during the first time saving state (S5152Lc). In the setting process (S5152Lc) during the first time saving state, a process for determining the effect mode corresponding to the LV up zone executed during the first time saving state in the third modification is executed.
Specifically, when the setting process during the first time saving state (S5152Lc) is executed, first, information indicating the operation effective period corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is stored in the production mode storage area 223jc (S5161Lc), and then To determine whether this special symbol variation is the final variation (special figure final variation) in the first time saving state (S5173Lc), and if it is determined that it is the special figure final variation (S5173Lc: Yes), the first At the time of time saving state end production setting processing is executed (S5162Lc), and this processing ends. This first time saving state end time production setting process (S5162Lc) is a process for determining the production mode corresponding to the final variation of the special symbol in the first time saving state (special figure final variation), and the detailed content is This will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S5173Lc, if it is determined that this special symbol variation is not the special symbol final variation in the first time saving state (S5173Lc: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is winning the time saving symbol. Determined (S5163Lc), if it is determined that the time-saving pattern has been elected (S5163Lc: Yes), the LV up mode of the ally character 8010 is determined as the performance result of the operation performance (S5164Lc), and the determined LV up mode is produced. Store in the mode storage area 223jc (S5165Lc), add 20 to the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma (S5166Lc), and finish this process.
That is, when the special symbol variation executed during the first time saving state is the time saving symbol winning variation, by operating the frame button 22 within the operation valid period set during the time saving symbol winning variation period, An effect mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc so that an operation effect for increasing the level of the ally character 8010 is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5163Lc, if it is determined that the time-saving design is not elected (S5163Lc: No), then it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is a jackpot election (S5167Lc), and it is determined that it is a jackpot election. If so (S5167Lc: Yes), the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc is read, and it is determined whether the level of the currently displayed teammate character 8010 is LV3 or higher (S5168Lc). If it is determined (S5168Lc: Yes), the chance display mode (enlarged display mode) of the teammate character 8010 is determined as the effect result of the operation effect (S5169Lc), and the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S5172Lc ), the process ends.
Further, in the process of S5168Lc, when it is determined that the level of the ally character 8010 is less than LV3 (S5168Lc: No), the LV up mode of the ally character 8010 is determined as the effect result of the operation effect (S5170Lc), and the determined LV up is determined. The mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc (S5171Lc), the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S5172Lc), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5167Lc, if it is determined that the jackpot is not won, that is, if it is determined that it is a loss fluctuation (S5167Lc: No), without determining the effect mode for indicating the effect result of the operation effect, End this process.
In addition, in the present third modification, in the first time-saving state, when the operation effect is executed, the effect is configured to increase the level of the ally character 8010. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the player does not operate the frame button 22 (when the operation effect is not executed), the effect of increasing the level of the teammate character 8010 is executed based on the lapse of the operation valid period. can be
In addition, in the third modified example, an effect for increasing the level of the ally character 8010 is not executed in the case of the deviation variation. It may be configured to execute an effect that raises the level.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1947, the processing contents of the 1st time saving state end production setting processing (S5162Lc) performed in the setting processing (refer to S5152Lc of Drawing 1946) in the 1st time saving state are explained. FIG. 1947 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting process (S5162Lc) at the end of the first time saving state. This first time saving state end time production setting process (S5162Lc) is intended to execute the process for determining the production mode of the special figure final variation in the first time saving state, the production mode determined by this process Using, the player is informed whether or not the time saving state (electrical support state) is extended (see FIG. 1943(b)).
When the effect setting process at the end of the first time saving state (S5162Lc) is executed, first, whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 1, that is, whether the special symbol fluctuation of this time is the final change in the first time saving state (S5181Lc), and when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during the time saving is not 1 (S5181Lc: No), it is not the final variation in the first time saving state, so this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S5181Lc, the value of the time saving counter 223da is 1, that is, if it is determined that it is the special figure final variation in the first time saving state (S5181Lc: Yes), then this special symbol variation is a jackpot winning (S5182Lc), and if it is determined to be a jackpot winning (S5182Lc: Yes), the effect mode indicating the jackpot winning is determined using the ally character 8010 (S5183Lc), and the standby time reduction number of times The value of the counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S5190Lc), and this processing ends.
Here, when the effect using the effect mode determined in the process of S5183Lc is executed, the friend character 8010 in the display mode corresponding to the current level is displayed in the action mode, similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 1943(b). is executed, and an effect in which the letter “V” is displayed on the icon 8011 is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player of winning the jackpot after making the player think that the time saving state (electrical support state) is extended. In addition, even if the production for raising the level of the ally character 8010 is executed based on the winning of the time saving symbol in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the ally character 8010 corresponding to the level is executed. Since the winning of the big win can be notified in the effect mode using , the player can be made to think that the level of the teammate character 8010 has increased in order to notify the winning of the big win.

Returning to FIG. 1947, the description continues. In the processing of S5182Lc, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot election (S5182Lc: No), then it is determined whether it is a time-saving design election (S5184Lc), and if it is determined that it is a time-saving design election (S5184Lc: Yes ), add 20 corresponding to the time-saving winning information based on one time-saving pattern winning to the value of the waiting time-saving number counter 223ma (S5185Lc), and then determine whether the value of the waiting time-saving number counter 223ma is 0 or more. do. Also, in the processing of S5184Lc, if it is determined that the time-saving design is not elected, that is, the special figure final variation is an off variation (S5184Lc: No), the processing of S5185Lc is skipped and the processing of S5186Lc is performed.
In the process of S5186Lc, the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is 1 or more, that is, after the currently set first time reduction state ends, the setting condition for setting the second time reduction state is established. It is determined whether there is
In the processing of S5186Lc, if it is determined that the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma is 1 or more, that is, if it is determined that the setting condition for setting the second time reduction state is satisfied (S5186Lc: Yes) Next, a production mode indicating that the time saving state (electrical support state) is extended is determined using the friend character 8010 (S5187Lc), and a display mode indicating the number of times of time saving corresponding to the value of the number of times of waiting time saving counter 223ma is determined. Then (S5188Lc), the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is set to the time reduction medium counter 223da (S5189Lc), the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is cleared to 0 (S5190Lc), and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5186Lc, if it is determined that the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is not 1 or more (is 0), that is, the setting condition of the second time reduction state is not satisfied (S5186Lc: No), Since the time saving state (electrical support state) ends due to this special figure final variation, the production mode indicating the end of the time saving state is determined (S5191Lc), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1948, the processing contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101Lc) executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 1948 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101Lc). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101Lc) is different from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4101H in FIG. 1795) in the forty-seventh control example described above, in which the value of the SW effective period timer 223jf is greater than 1. The difference is that the display mode determined when the frame button 22 is pressed in the state, ie, the state in which the operation valid period is set, is different, but the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4101Lc) is executed, first, the same processing from S5401H to S5405H as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4101H in FIG. 1795) of the forty-seventh control example described above is executed. . Then, in the process of S5405H, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S5405H: Yes), the display mode for showing the effect result stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc is determined (S5401Lc), The value of the SW effective period timer 223jf is cleared to 0 (S5402Lc), the display command corresponding to the determined mode is set (S5404H), and this processing ends.
In the process of S5401Lc, in the setting process during the first time saving state (see S5152Lc of FIG. 1946), the mode indicating the effect result of the operation effect determined corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery (LV up mode of teammate character 8010 ) is read from the effect mode storage area 223jc and determined. By configuring in this way, only when the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, it is possible to execute an effect to raise the level of the friend character 8010. ), every time a special symbol lottery is executed, it is possible to predict the presence or absence of a time-saving symbol winning game (a game that operates the frame button 22 during the operation valid period), and at the end of the first time-saving state (LV up zone It is possible to select a game (a game in which the frame button 22 is not operated during the operation valid period) in which the presence or absence of time-saving symbol winning and the number of times of winning are collectively notified at the time of the final change in .
<Regarding the fourth modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1949 to 1952. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fifty-first control example described above, the number of execution rights for the second special symbol lottery that has already been acquired ( When the number of special figures 2 pending) increases, a jackpot is won during the first time-saving state in which it is informed that the time-saving pattern has been won by executing the performance related to the time-saving extension suggesting mode. It was configured to prevent it from being put away.

On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reserved is changed according to the look-ahead result, and the time saving extension suggestion mode production, The difference is that the Other contents are the same as those of the first modified example of the fifty-first control example described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.
<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the fourth modified example of the fifty-first control example>
First, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth modified example of the fifty-first control example, the content of the characteristic effects will be described. This fourth modified example differs from the first modified example of the fifty-first control example described above in that the suspension change effect is executed during the time reduction extension suggestion mode. Hereinafter, the production contents of the pending change production during the time saving extension suggestion mode will be described.
Figure 1949 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the time reduction extension suggestion mode is executed while the pending change effect is being executed, and Figure 1949 (b) is It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation result of the time reduction extension suggestion mode displayed when the object of pending|holding change production|presentation is jackpot election. In addition, among the display screens shown in FIGS. 1949(a) and 1949(b), the display screen displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1868) and The same reference numerals are given to the same display elements, and the description thereof is omitted.
In FIG. 1949 (a), as a display mode indicating that the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state is 3 times, "remaining 3 times" is displayed in the display area Dm7, and the execution right of the acquired second special symbol In the display area Dm9 for indicating the number (special figure 2 reservation number), as a display mode indicating that the number of special figure 2 reservations is 4, the first special figure 2 reservation h1, the second special figure 2 reservation h2 , 3rd special figure 2 reservation h3, 4th special figure 2 reservation h4 are displayed. Specifically, as a look-ahead effect (hold change effect), only the second special figure 2 hold h2 display mode (second hold pattern) is a chance mode (in the figure, blinking white ), and the other pending symbols are displayed in a normal display mode (black in the figure) in which the pending change effect is not executed. In addition, FIG. 1949(a) shows a case where the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) corresponding to the second special figure 2 reservation h2 is a jackpot election. In addition, by entering the time saving extension suggestion mode during the hold change effect, the display mode of the bag 863 is displayed in a chance up mode (star pattern in the figure) different from usual.

In other words, the state shown in FIG. 1949 (a) is a state in which the number of special figures 2 pending (4 pieces) that has been acquired is more than the number of remaining time reductions in the first time saving state (3 times), It shows a state in which there is a special figure 2 reservation that wins a jackpot in the acquired special figure 2 reservation. Then, the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, and when the next special symbol variation is started (when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol 2 reservation h1 shown in FIG. 1949 (a) is executed ), as shown in FIG. 1949(b), the reserved symbol displayed in the display area Dm9 is shifted, and the chance mode is displayed in the first reserved symbol h1. In addition, the reserved design corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 reservation is displayed as the fourth special figure 2 reservation h4.
Then, a coin 863a with the character "+10000" is displayed from the bag 863 as a result of the time saving extension suggesting mode, and the number of remaining time saving times displayed in the display area Dm7 is added to "10002 times". In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "time saving 10000 times plus" are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the effect result of the current time saving extension suggesting mode effect.
After that, the display screen shown in FIG. 1949(b) is displayed, and the special symbol variation (jackpot variation) is executed after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the effect indicating the jackpot winning is executed for the player. be done. That is, in the fourth modification of the fifty-first control example, in the same way as the fifty-first control example described above, when the jackpot is won in a state in which the time-saving winning information is stocked, the stocked time-saving winning information is Since it is configured to be erased, even if any information (number of remaining time reductions) is shown in the display area Dm7 in the state where the jackpot is held, the time reduction state ( Second time saving state) is not set.
Therefore, in the fourth modified example, by variably displaying the information (remaining time reduction count) displayed in the display area Dm7, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the jackpot will be won. By configuring in this way, the information displayed in the display area Dm7 plays the role of indicating the number of remaining time reductions and the role of indicating the preliminary determination result regarding jackpot winning, so that the player is more interested. can let

In addition, in this fourth modification, if there is a special figure 2 hold (jackpot hold) in which the pre-discrimination result is a jackpot election, the number of time savings that is not set as the number of time savings in the second time saving state ( 10000 times) is added, but without being limited to this, the number of remaining time reductions may be added within a range that can be set as the number of time reductions in the second time reduction state, For example, the number of remaining time reductions after addition (the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the display area Dm7) is configured to be able to execute an effect in which the number of times is double digits (for example, 22 times, etc.), and there is a jackpot pending. It is preferable to configure so that the number of remaining time reductions is more likely to be displayed as double digits when there is a jackpot reservation than when there is no jackpot pending.
Specifically, when the number of times of shortening the remaining time is "2 times", by executing the effect that "+20 times" is displayed as the effect result of the extension suggestion mode, the number of times of shortening the remaining time will be "22 times". , and if there is a jackpot suspension, when the number of times the remaining time is shortened is "2 times", "+20 times" is displayed as the production result of the time saving extension suggestion mode, and the jackpot suspension exists. If not, it is configured to display ``+20 times'' as the effect result of the time saving extension suggesting mode at any time when the number of times of remaining time saving is displayed as ``2 times'', ``1 time'', or ``last''. do it.
Moreover, as a production result of the time saving extension suggestion mode, not all of the number of time saving times set as the second time saving state, but only a part thereof may be configured to be notified. By configuring in this way, for example, in a state where 80 times can be set as the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state, that is, in a state where the time saving pattern lottery has been elected four times during the first time saving state, "+22" , ``+33'' and ``+77'' are configured to be able to be displayed as the effect result of the time-saving extension suggestion mode, and the case where the jackpot reservation exists is better than the case where the jackpot reservation does not exist. It may be configured such that double-digit squares are more likely to be selected as an effect result.
<Regarding control processing in the fourth modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1950 to 1952, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described. In the fourth modified example of the fifty-first control example, in contrast to the first modified example of the fifty-first control example described above, the look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ld) is executed, and the effect setting process during the time saving state (Fig. 1872 S5102a reference) is replaced with the point which executes the production setting processing (S5102Ld of Figure 1950) during the time saving state. The processing contents of the other control processes are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1950, the contents of the prefetch effect setting process (S4504Ld) will be described. FIG. 1950 is a flow chart showing the contents of the look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ld). This look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ld) is a process that is executed when a winning command is received from the main controller 110, and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect based on the variation pattern included in the winning command. , a process for determining the effect mode of the look-ahead effect to be executed is executed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1950, when the look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ld) is executed, S4551H to S4557 same as the look-ahead effect setting process (see S4504H in FIG. 1787) in the forty-seventh control example described above. Execute the process. Then, in the process of S4553H, if it is determined that the type of the prefetch effect to be executed this time is not the continuous announcement effect (S4553H: No), or in the process of S4558H, it is determined that the variable effect being executed is not reach or more. If (S4558H: No), it is determined whether the effect type of the prefetch effect to be executed this time is the pending change effect (S4561H), and if it is determined to be the pending change effect (S4561H: Yes), the pending change Effect setting processing is executed (S4551Ld), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4561H, if it is determined that the change effect is not on hold (S4561H: No), other processes are executed (S4563H), and this process ends.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1951, the content of the pending change effect setting process (S4551Ld) executed in the look-ahead effect setting process (see S4504Ld in FIG. 1950) will be described. FIG. 1951 is a flow chart showing the content of the pending change effect setting process (S4551Ld). In this pending change effect setting process (S4551Ld), the display mode of the pending change effect is based on the look-ahead result based on the winning information included in the target winning command, or the number of remaining time reductions and the number of time reductions stocked. A process is performed to determine the
Specifically, when the pending change effect setting process (S4551Ld) is executed, first, the display mode of the pending symbol is determined by lottery based on the winning information set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4571Ld). ). In the processing of this S4571Ld, four types of display modes (as a pending change effect) different from the initial display mode (black display in FIG. display mode), any display mode is determined.

The details of the specific control process for variably displaying the display mode of the pending symbol based on the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 are described in any of the control examples described above. Therefore, the detailed description thereof is omitted.
In the fourth modified example, as the display mode of the pending change effect, it is possible to display three types of staged display modes in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases in order, and one type of dedicated display mode indicating the degree of expectation for the specific jackpot. . Specifically, as the stage display mode, there is a first stage display mode in which the reserved pattern is blinking in black, a second stage display mode in which the reserved symbol is lit in white, and a third stage display mode in which the reserved symbol is blinking in white. The selection ratio is defined so that the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of the first-stage display mode, the second-stage display mode, and the third-stage display mode. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the effect mode of displaying the staged display mode is set as the pending change effect, during one pending change effect, in order to gradually increase the degree of expectation for the jackpot The gradual display mode is configured to be variably displayable a plurality of times (twice or more).
Further, in the fourth modified example, a display mode of a character icon imitating a rabbit can be set as a dedicated display mode. This exclusive display mode is a display mode in which the display mode is not changed during the pending change effect, unlike the above-described staged display mode, and is a display mode which is displayed only when the look-ahead result is a jackpot winning. .
Returning to FIG. 1951, the description continues. When the processing of S4571Ld is finished, next, it is determined whether the special figure suspension to be the target of the suspension change effect of this time is a jackpot suspension (S4572Ld), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot suspension (S4572Ld; Yes), The display mode determined in the process of S4571Ld is set as it is, other processes are executed (S4577Ld), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4572Ld, if it is determined that the jackpot is not pending (S4572Ld: No), read the value of the short waiting time counter 223ma (S4573Ld), and check whether the value of the short waiting time counter 223ma is 80 or more Determined (S4574Ld), if it is determined that the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is 80 or more (S4574Ld: Yes), then determine whether the value of the time reduction medium counter 223da is 4 or more (S4575Ld), If it is determined that the number is not 4 or more (S4575Ld: No), a display mode with a high chance of winning is determined as the display mode of the reserved symbols (S4576Ld), the process of S4577Ld is executed, and this process ends.
In addition, when it is determined that the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma is not 80 or more in the processing of S4574Ld (S4574Ld: No), or when it is determined that the value of the time reduction medium counter 223da is 4 or more in the processing of S4575Ld (S4575Ld: No) is the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma, that is, if the variable condition for varying the display mode of the reserved design based on the number of time reductions in the second time reduction state that is stocked is not established, S4576Ld is skipped, the process of S4577Ld is executed, and this process ends.
As described above, in the fourth modification of the fifty-first control example, based on the prize winning information (prefetching result) included in the prize winning command received from the main controller 110, the effect mode of the pending change effect, which is the prefetch effect, is performed. In addition to determining the number of times of reduced working hours stocked (the number of reduced working hours in the second reduced state) and the number of reduced reduced working hours remaining in the setting (number of reduced reduced working hours remaining in the first state) The pattern display mode is configured to be variable.
Specifically, in a situation where the execution conditions for the time saving extension suggestion mode can be satisfied, if the number of time saving times stocked is greater than a predetermined number (80 times), the same display mode as showing the expectation of winning a jackpot It is configured so that the display mode of the reserved pattern can be easily changed to the display mode of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the time reduction extension suggesting mode effect while the pending change effect is being executed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1952, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5102Ld) in time saving state are explained. FIG. 1952 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5102Ld) during the time saving state. In this time saving state production setting process (S5102Ld), the above-described time saving state production setting process (see S5102a in FIG. 1872) hits when the execution condition of the time saving extension suggestion mode is satisfied. The difference is that the content of the processing executed in each case is different, and the other processing content is the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.
In the production setting process (see S5102a in FIG. 1872) during the time saving state executed in the first modification of the fifty-first control example described above, when the execution condition of the time saving extension suggestion mode is met, the hit suspension (jackpot suspension) is performed. When it has, regardless of the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma, the production of adding the number of remaining time reductions (the production of notifying that the time reduction state is extended) is not executed, thereby reducing the time. When the state in which the number of remaining time reductions is not added continues during the extension suggestion mode, it is possible to make the player predict that the time reduction state is not stocked or the jackpot pending exists. Even if the number of remaining time reductions is not added during the time reduction extension suggestion mode, the player's willingness to play is reduced by leaving the possibility of a game result that is advantageous to the player. I was suppressing it.
On the other hand, in the fourth modified example, it is possible to make the player predict the presence or absence of winning a jackpot by using the effect of adding the number of remaining time reductions executed during the time reduction extension suggesting mode. That is, in the fourth modified example, the player can confirm that the game result is either advantageous to the player (either the situation in which the time saving state is stocked or the situation in which the jackpot reservation exists). It is configured to be able to predict
By configuring in this way, when the time-saving extension suggestion mode effect is executed, the game can be played while the player is relieved.

When the time saving state production setting process (S5102Ld) is executed, first, the processing of S5151La to S5159La same as the time saving state production setting process (see S5102a in FIG. 1872) in the first modification of the fifty-first control example described above is executed, and if it is determined that there is a winning suspension (jackpot suspension) in the processing of S5159La (S5159La: Yes), the effect mode of adding 10000 times as the remaining short time number is determined (S5151Ld), and then, The processing from S5161La to S5163La that is the same as the effect setting processing in the time saving state in the first modification of the fifty-first control example (see S5102a in FIG. 1872) is executed, and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S5159La, if it is determined that there is no winning suspension (jackpot suspension) (S5159La: No), it is determined whether the value of the standby time reduction counter 223ma is greater than 0 (S5164La), and is greater than 0 If it is determined, that is, if the setting conditions for the second time saving state are satisfied (S5164La: Yes), the time saving number of times corresponding to the value of the standby time saving number counter 223ma is increased (added) as the remaining time saving number of times. is determined (S5165La), and the processing from S5161La to S5163La that is the same as the effect setting processing during the time saving state in the first modification of the fifty-first control example (see S5102a in FIG. 1872) is executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S5164La, if it is determined that the value of the standby time reduction number counter 223ma is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5164La: No), it is a case where the setting conditions for the second time reduction state are not satisfied. Therefore, S5161La to S5163La, which are the same as the production setting processing during the time reduction state in the first modification of the fifty-first control example (see S5102a in FIG. 1872), without determining the production mode for increasing (adding) the number of remaining time reductions. , and terminate this process.
<Regarding the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1953 to 1964, a fifth modification of the fifty-first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 51st control example described above is configured to be able to execute the time saving pattern lottery during the time saving state (first time saving state), and when the time saving pattern is won during the first time saving state, to the time saving pattern winning. Based on the time saving winning information (time saving number of times in the second time saving state), it was configured to be able to be held (stocked) until the first time saving state ended.

Furthermore, when the time saving pattern is won multiple times during the first time saving state, the processing of adding and holding (stocking) the time saving winning information (the number of time saving times in the second time saving state) is executed and stocked. When the second time saving state is set based on the time saving winning information, the second time saving state is set for the number of time saving times stocked.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example configured in this way, it is possible to set the second time-saving state with different times of time-savings according to the number of stocked time-saving winning information (the number of time-saving symbol winning times). Therefore, for example, when a large number of time-saving symbols are won by a special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state, it is possible to set the second time-saving state with an unexpected number of times of time-saving, and the player's game. It was something that could improve the interest in
However, even if the time-saving pattern is won multiple times, the plurality of time-saving winning information is set as one second time-saving state. , When the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a specific result (small hit winning) different from the jackpot winning, the condition for ending the time-saving state (small winning end condition) is established. There is a problem that the second time-saving state based on time-saving winning information ends immediately when a small winning end condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification, a plurality of time-saving winning information acquired based on time-saving pattern winning is configured to be individually held (stocked), and the stocked time-saving winning information is used. When setting the time saving state by using only the oldest time saving winning information among a plurality of stocked time saving winning information, the time saving state can be set.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner to be able to end the time saving state based on the small winning end condition, when a plurality of pieces of time saving winning information are stocked, the small winning end condition is set once. It is possible to suppress the erasure of all the plurality of time-saving winning information just by being established.
In addition, since it is possible to set the time saving state (second time saving state) for each time saving winning information without adding up the stocked time saving winning information (the number of time saving times), the stock remaining number (the remaining stocked It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting time-saving winning information.
Furthermore, in the fifth modification, as the end condition of the first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game, the end that is established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Condition (fluctuation frequency end condition) and the end condition (small win end condition) that is established when the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific result (small win win) different from the jackpot win reaches a predetermined number of times , and as a time-saving type of the second time-saving state (low-probability state of special patterns, electric sapo state in low-probability state of normal patterns) set when the time-saving design is elected, based on the number of special design fluctuations A time reduction type (time reduction pattern A) having only an end condition (variation number end condition) that is satisfied by the above, and a time reduction type (time reduction pattern B) having a small winning end condition in addition to the end condition for the number of fluctuations can be set. is doing.
Then, a measuring means (small hit winning number counter 203meb) capable of measuring the number of times the small win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is provided, and the number of times the small win end condition is satisfied (for example, the first time saving 5 times if it is in the state), the value of the small win winning frequency counter 203meb is cleared to 0 and the set time saving state is ended, and the small win end condition is established. When the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is met before, the time saving state is ended without clearing the value of the small win winning number counter 203meb to 0.

By configuring in this way, when the same time-saving state (first time-saving state) is set, the person who ends the time-saving state based on the establishment of the fluctuation number of times end condition is in the establishment of the small hit end condition Based on the game situation that is more advantageous to the player than when the time saving state ends, and the time saving state ends based on the establishment of the small winning end condition, the time saving state ends based on the establishment of the fluctuation number end condition Since it is possible to create a game situation that is more advantageous to the player than in the case of doing so, it is possible to make the player interested in the conditions for ending the time saving state.
<Regarding the effect content in the fifth modified example of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1953 to FIG. 1956, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described.
Figure 1953 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the first time saving state, the display screen in the fifty-first control example described above (see Figure 1953 (a)), the small Poison icon 803V corresponding to winning and P icon 802V indicating time saving pattern winning are divided into SP icon 804V corresponding to time saving pattern A and P icon 802V corresponding to time saving pattern B. It is different from what is displayed.
Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide display mode for guiding the contents of the effect, characters such as "Get 'V' for a big win, end when 5 'poison' are accumulated, and accumulate power by getting 'P'". is displayed.

After that, when a small hit is won during the first time saving state, as shown in FIG. A mode D1 indicating the number of corresponding poison icons 803V possessed is accumulated and displayed. In addition, in the display area Dm71, information is displayed in which the denominator is "5" and the numerator is "the current number of possession" in order to guide that the time saving state ends when five poison icons 803V are accumulated. .
In addition, in the display area Dm70, the acquisition icons P corresponding to the time-saving design winning are displayed in the order in which they were acquired. In FIG. 1953(b), "SP" is displayed as the first acquisition icon P1 because the time-saving design of the time-saving design A is won first. Then, the game in the first time-saving state progresses, and when the fifth small hit is won, as shown in FIG. 5” is displayed, and an effect in which the character 801 falls down is executed. Then, the characters "Time saving finished! Revive using 'Power'" are displayed, and then the display screen of FIG. 1954(b) is displayed.
In the diagram shown in FIG. 1954(b), the resurrection effect using the acquisition icon P1 corresponding to the time saving pattern A acquired first is executed. Although the detailed explanation will be described later, the time saving state (second time saving state) corresponding to the time saving pattern A is only the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) that is established when the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times as the time saving end condition is stipulated, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "Enter SP mode 20 times! Poison does not work". The once consumed poison icons 803V (five aspects D1 to D5) are erased, and the display area Dm71 shifts to the right side of the main display area Dm.
During the SP mode, the display screen shown in FIG. 1955(a) is displayed. FIG. 1955(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the second time saving state (SP mode) of the time saving pattern A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1955(a), an effect is executed in which the character 801 runs with an aura 801a, and an effect is executed in which each icon is obtained.

In the final change of SP mode, the display screen shown in FIG. 1955(b) is displayed. Here, in the fifth modification, the time saving state (second time saving state) of the time saving pattern B is defined as a time saving end condition in addition to the end condition for the number of fluctuations, and the small win end condition that is established in one small win winning. ing. Then, after the time saving state (second time saving state) of the time saving pattern B is set, if the value of the counter (small hit winning number counter 223meb) indicating the number of winning times is 1 or more (poison icon 803V on the display screen is displayed), the time saving state (second time saving state) of the time saving pattern B is terminated without executing the special pattern variation even once.
Therefore, the situation shown in FIG. 1865 (a), as the time saving winning information, the state in which three pieces of time saving winning information corresponding to the time saving pattern B are acquired (the acquisition icon P of P2 to P4 is displayed in the display area Dm70 state) and the value of the small winning number counter 223meb is 1 (the mode D1 is displayed in the display area Dm71) When the time saving state (second time saving state) of the time saving pattern B ends In , an offset effect (see FIG. 1865(b)) that offsets the time-saving winning information and the number of times of winning a small hit is executed.
In the diagram shown in FIG. 1875 (b), the time-saving pattern B is 3 (acquisition icons P2 to P4) and the number of winning small hits is 1 (mode D1), and the offset effect is executed, mode D1. In order to offset the acquisition icon P2, an effect is being executed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide display mode for indicating the effect content of the offset effect, the characters "Use 'P' to remove the poison" are displayed.
Then, as a result of the offset effect, when the acquisition icon P remains, as shown in FIG. 1956, a display screen corresponding to the time saving state (second time saving state) of the time saving pattern B is displayed. In addition, as described above, the time saving state (second time saving state) of the time saving pattern B has a small winning win once and the time saving end condition is satisfied. is displayed.

As described above, in the fifth modified example, a small winning end condition established based on a small winning as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is provided. Then, depending on the type of time saving state to be set, the number of winning times of the small winnings when the condition for finishing the small winning is satisfied is changed, or whether or not the condition for ending the small winning is set is changed.
Then, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the end determination of each time-reduction state controlled in a complicated manner by executing the variable performance executed during the time-reduction state differently according to the type of the set time-reduction state. be able to.
In particular, by executing the offset performance in the final variation of the time saving state, even if the setting and ending of the time saving state are repeatedly executed internally, only the result is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. can be done.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1957 to 1959. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, The difference is that a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, but the other configurations are the same. A detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1957(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1957(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the fifth modified example. As shown in FIG. 1957 (a), the ROM 202 of the fifth modification is the ROM 202 of the 51st control example described above (see FIG. 1857 (a)), the small hit random number table 202 mea, and the time saving per type selection The difference is that table meb is added. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
The small winning random number table 202mea is referred to when determining small winning in the special symbol lottery in the same way as the small winning random number table 202ng (see FIG. 1879 (c)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 52nd control example described above. data table. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example, when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot election and is other than the time-saving winning (time-saving design winning), the small winning is possible. Judgment is performed, and the small hit random number table 202mea is referred to. In addition, since it is the same as the control process in the 52nd control example mentioned above about the process which the small hit random number table 202mea is referred and the presence or absence of small hit election is determined, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.
Here, the contents of the small winning random number table 202mea will be described with reference to FIG. 1957(a). Figure 1957 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number table 202mea. As shown in FIG. 1957(a), the small hit random number table 202mea defines the value (range) of the first hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a small hit according to the special symbol type.
Specifically, the special symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined as a value corresponding to the small winning in the range of "200 to 244". there is On the other hand, the special symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value corresponding to the small hit winning is not defined.

Since the possible values (range) of the first per random number counter C1 are 900 of "0 to 899", the probability of winning a small prize by the second special symbol lottery is 1/20 (45/900). 1 There is no possibility of winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery.
Although the detailed contents will be described later, in the fifth modification, when the number of times the small hit is won reaches a predetermined number, the first time saving state (normally high probability state of the symbol) and the second time saving state To end It is configured so that it can be the end condition (small hit end condition). Specifically, when the number of small hits won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state reaches 5 times, or during the second time saving state in which the time saving pattern B is set as the time saving type When the number of times of winning a small win in the second special symbol lottery executed in 1 is one, a condition for finishing the small win is satisfied and the electric support state is ended.
By configuring in this way, when the electric support state is set, the electric support state can be terminated without executing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined specified number of times (time saving number of times). A player can be made to play while expecting to continue for a longer period of time.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-second control example, the configuration is such that the small winning lottery is executed for the second special symbol. good.

The time-saving per type selection table 202meb is a data table referred to when determining the time-saving design type set when the time-saving design is won. The time saving pattern type is stipulated. In the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example, the end condition of the time saving state (second time saving state) is defined differently according to the determined time saving pattern type. In other words, when the time-saving design is elected, it is possible to set time-saving states with different degrees of advantage.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1958(b), the contents of the time saving type selection table 202meb will be described. FIG. 1958(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving type selection table 202meb. As shown in FIG. 1958(b), the time saving type selection table 202meb has two types of time saving pattern types (time saving pattern A, time saving pattern B) corresponding to the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1. ing. In addition, even if any time-saving pattern type is determined, the time-saving state to be set is configured to be the second time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns, state with electric sapo). ing.
Specifically, when the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is in the range of "0 to 49", "time saving pattern A" is used as the time saving pattern type, and for the range of "50 to 99", "Time saving pattern B" is defined as the time saving pattern type. When "time reduction pattern A" is determined, "20 (times)" is defined as the number of possible time reductions, and "time reduction number of times (variation number end condition)" is defined as the time reduction end condition, and "time reduction design B" If is determined, "20 (times)" as the number of times that can be granted, "time saving number of times elapsed (fluctuation number end condition)" as the time saving end condition, "small winning once (small winning end condition)" is stipulated.
That is, in the fifth modification, if the time saving pattern A is selected as the time saving type based on the time saving pattern winning, the time saving end condition does not hold until the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times (the 2 o'clock state) is determined as the time-saving winning information, and when the time-saving pattern B is selected as the time-saving type based on the time-saving pattern winning, either 20 special symbol lotteries or one small winning. is established, the time saving state (second time saving state) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is determined as the time saving winning information.

By configuring in this way, the time-saving winning information acquired based on the time-saving pattern winning, the time-saving winning information that is advantageous to the player (time-saving winning information corresponding to the time-saving pattern A), and the time-saving winning information that is disadvantageous to the player Winning information (time saving winning information corresponding to time saving pattern B) can be created.
In addition, in the fifth modification, even if any time saving pattern type is determined, 20 special pattern fluctuations (time saving number of times 20 times) are set as the condition for ending the number of fluctuations. However, without being limited to this, the number of times of special symbol variation (time reduction number of times) that satisfies the condition for ending the number of variations may be varied like the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-fourth control example described above.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1957(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth modification will be described. FIG. 1957(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth modified example. As shown in FIG. 1957(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth modified example is the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-first control example (see FIG. 1857(b)). ), the difference is that a time saving winning information storage area 203mea and a small hit winning frequency counter 203meb are added, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
The time saving winning information storage area 203mea temporarily stores (stores) time saving winning information acquired based on the time saving design winning in the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) executed during the first time saving state. This is the data area for The time-saving winning information storage area 203mea is configured to be able to store a plurality of time-saving winning information in the order in which they are acquired, and is configured to be able to individually store up to 100 pieces of time-saving winning information.

In this time saving winning information storage area 203mea, time saving lottery processing (see S8002Le in FIG. 1960) is determined to be time saving design winning (S8103L in FIG. 1960: Yes), and the time saving design type is determined (S8101Le in FIG. 1960) ) later, as time saving winning information, information indicating the time saving design type is stored (S8102Le in FIG. 1960). Then, in the time-saving setting process (see S205Le in FIG. 1961), when the conditions for setting a new time-saving state are satisfied (S8401L in FIG. 1961: Yes), the stored information is read (S8402Le), Among the read information, a process for setting the time saving state based on the information corresponding to the oldest time saving winning information is executed (S8403Le), and the information used to set the time saving state (oldest time saving information corresponding to winning information) is erased (updated).
That is, in the fifty-first control example, a time-saving winning information storage area 203mea is provided instead of the waiting time-saving counter 203ma in the fifty-first control example described above, and the time-saving winning information is not added up, but configured to be stored individually. Then, when setting a new time saving state, it is configured to set the time saving state corresponding to each time saving winning information stored in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the whole picture of the stocked (held) time saving winning information. In addition, when a plurality of time-saving winning information are held (stocked), a new time-saving state (second time-saving state) is repeatedly set, so that a game with unexpectedness is provided to the player. be able to.
A small hit winning frequency counter 203meb is a counter for measuring the number of times a small hit is won in a special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) executed during the first time saving state, and is determined as a small hit win. 1 is added to the value. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not the small hit end condition is satisfied as the time saving end condition (S8407Le in FIG. 1961).

In addition, in the fifth modification, when it is determined that the small winning end condition is established as the time saving end condition, the time saving state is terminated, and the small winning number of times for establishing the small winning end condition corresponds to The value to be won is subtracted (updated) from the value of the small winning number counter 203meb, while when it is determined that the fluctuation number ending condition is established as the time saving ending condition, the small winning number of times It is configured to end the time saving state without subtracting (updating) the value of the counter 203meb.
To explain in detail, in the first time-saving state in which the small winning end condition (small winning number of times 5 times) and the fluctuation number ending condition (time-saving 100 times) are set as the time-saving ending condition, small winning winning When the number reaches 5 times, the time saving state ends regardless of the number of remaining time saving, and the value of the small winning number counter 203meb is set to 0 (5 subtraction), but the fluctuation number ending condition is established. When it does, it is configured to end the time saving state while holding the value of the small hit winning number counter 203meb.
Then, after the end condition of the number of fluctuations is satisfied in the state where the value of the small hit winning number counter 203meb is 1 to 4 and the first time saving state ends, the second time saving state of the time saving pattern type "time saving pattern B" When it is set, before the special symbol variation in the second time saving state is executed, the small winning end condition is established based on the value of the small winning winning number counter 203meb, and the second time saving state ends. It is configured as follows.
That is, the oldest time saving winning information stored in the time saving information storage area 203mea is the time saving pattern B, the first time saving state in which the value of the small hit winning counter 203meb is 1 or more, and the remaining time saving number of times When the number of times becomes less than 20, the electric sapo state can be easily continued for a long time by establishing the condition for ending the small win before the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established. On the other hand, when the value of the small hit winning counter 203meb is 0, it is easier to continue the electric support state for a long time when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied than when the small win end condition is satisfied. It consists of In addition, when the time saving winning information stored in the time saving information storage area 203mea is all the time saving pattern A, regardless of the value of the small hit winning number counter 203meb, it is better to establish the fluctuation number end condition. It is configured to make it easier to continue the electric sapo state for a longer period of time than in the case where the win end condition is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, the type of time-saving end conditions advantageous to the player is switched depending on the number of small winning wins and the type of time-saving winning information stored in the time-saving information storage area 203mea. It is possible to suppress early boredom of the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1959, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1959 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1959, the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example is the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above. 113 MPU221 has RAM223 (see FIG. 1860), and is different in that it is provided with a time saving winning information storage area 223mea and a small hit winning counter 223meb. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
The time saving winning information storage area 223mea is a storage area for temporarily storing the time saving winning information (time saving design type) included in the command received when a command indicating time saving design winning is received from the main control device 110. Then, when a variation pattern command indicating time saving pattern winning is received, the time saving winning information included in the variation pattern command is stored (see S5155Le in FIG. 1962). Then, the stored information is referred to when determining the game state after the time saving state ends when the time saving end condition is satisfied (see S5151Le in FIG. 1962 or S5184Le in FIG. 1963). Although detailed explanation is omitted, the information stored in the time saving winning information storage area 223mea is cleared when the jackpot is won or when the electric support state ends and the normal state is set as the game state. be.
The small win winning counter 223meb is a counter for measuring the number of small win wins in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (electrical support state), and receives a variation pattern command indicating the small win winning. 1962 (S5156Le in FIG. 1962: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 (see S5158Le in FIG. 1962). Then, it is referred to when determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (see S5159Le in FIG. 1962).

Also, after setting a new time-saving state, the value of the small hit winning counter 223meb is referred to, and the value of the small hitting winning counter 223meb is updated corresponding to the referred value (see S5185Le in FIG. 1963).
As described above, in the fifth modification, the time-saving winning information stored in the time-saving winning information storage area 203mea of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value of the small winning number counter 203meb, is configured to be manageable on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and before a new time saving state is set by the control processing actually executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 ( The game state to be set later can be specified at the timing at which the special symbol final variation in the time saving state being set is executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect for informing the player of the newly set game state before the new game state is actually set, so that the game is easy to understand. can be provided.
<Regarding control processing in the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1960 to 1963, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth modified example of the fifty-first control example will be described. In the fifth modification of the fifty-first control example, in contrast to the fifty-first control example described above, in the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, instead of the time-saving lottery process (see S8002L in FIG. 1862) The time saving lottery process (S8002Le in FIG. 1960) is different in that the time saving setting process (S205Le in FIG. 1961) is executed instead of the time saving setting process (see S205L in FIG. 1863). In addition, it is different in that the production setting process (S5102Le in FIG. 1962) during the time saving state for setting the production mode of the variable production executed during the time saving state is executed.

First, with reference to Drawing 1960, processing contents of time saving lottery processing (S8002Le) are explained. FIG. 1960 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving lottery process (S8002Le). This time-saving lottery process (S8002Le) differs from the above-described time-saving lottery process (see S8002L in FIG. 1862) in that the processing contents to be executed when the time-saving pattern is won are different, and the rest is the same. process is executed. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.
When the time saving lottery process (S8002Le) is executed, first, the same S8101L to S8103L processing as the time saving lottery process (see S8002L in FIG. 1862) is executed, and in the process of S8103L, when it is determined that the time saving pattern winning is determined. (S8103L: Yes), refers to the time saving per type selection table 202meb to determine the time saving pattern type (S8101Le), stores the time saving winning information in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea (S8102Le), indicating the time saving winning information A command is set (S8103Le), a time-saving design of a special design to be displayed on the first design display device is set (S8104Le), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S8103L, when it is determined that the time saving symbol winning is not performed (S8103L: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth modification, when the time saving lottery process (S8002Le) ends, then the same small winning lottery process as the above-described 52nd control example is configured to be executed. there is In other words, when the result of the time saving symbol lottery is not the time saving symbol winning, the determination of the small winning lottery (small winning lottery) is continuously executed, and the process corresponding to the lottery result is executed. The details of the processing relating to this small winning lottery are the same as the small winning lottery processing (see Y8003M in FIG. 1884) in the fifty-second control example described above, so description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1961, processing contents of the time saving setting processing (S205Le) will be described. FIG. 1961 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process (S205Le). In this time saving setting process (S205Le), for the time saving setting process of the fifty-first control example described above (see S205L in FIG. 1863), the process related to the granting of the ceiling privilege is deleted, and a new time saving state is set. are different in that the processing contents of are different.

Specifically, when the time saving setting process (S205Le) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S8401L), and if it is determined that it is not 0, that is, in the time saving state If it is determined that there is (S8401L: No), this processing ends. Also, if it is determined to be 0 (S8401L: Yes), then read the information in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea (S8401Le), and determine whether it has waiting time saving winning information (S8402Le) , When it is determined that there is no waiting time saving winning information (S8402Le: No), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the processing of S8402Le, if it is determined that there is time saving winning information while waiting (S8402Le: Yes), the oldest time saving winning information stored in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea Set the corresponding time-saving state (S8403Le), set the value of the time-saving counter 203h to the value corresponding to the time-saving state set this time (S8404Le), and update the information in the time-saving winning information storage area 203mea (oldest time-saving winning Information is cleared) (S8405Le), and next, it is determined whether the value of the small winning number counter 203meb is greater than 1 (1 or more) (S8406Le).
In the processing of S8406Le, when it is determined that the value of the small winning number counter 203meb is not greater than 1 (is 0) (S8406Le: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S8406Le, when it is determined that the value of the small winning number counter 203meb is larger than 1 (1 or more) (S8406Le: Yes), the time saving end condition is established based on the small winning winning information It is determined whether (S8407Le), and if it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied (S8407Le), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit winning number counter 203meb (S8408Le), and the process proceeds to S8401Le.
That is, after setting a new time-saving state based on the information in the time-saving winning information storage area 203mea, based on the value of the small winning number counter 203meb, the time-saving end condition of the newly set time-saving state is established, It is configured so that the time saving state can be terminated immediately. Then, if the time-saving end condition is satisfied, in the processing of S8408Le, the number of small winnings to meet the time-saving end condition (in the fifth modification, one small win is the time-saving end condition, so a small Subtract 1 from the value of the win winning number counter 203meb) from the small win winning number counter 203meb, and again loop the process of setting the time saving state based on the information in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea Configure.

This loop processing is, when the time saving winning information stored in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea is lost, or when the value of the small hit winning number counter 203meb becomes 0, or when the time saving end condition is not satisfied (When the time saving pattern A is set) and ends.
In the processing of S8407Le, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S8407Le: No), the time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S8409Le), the value of the time saving counter 203h, the state command indicating the time saving state type is set (S8410Le), and the process ends.
As described above, in the fifth modification, it is configured to be able to store the small hit winning information that can satisfy the time saving end condition, and the special symbol lottery is performed after the new time saving state is set. It is constructed so that the time saving state can be ended based on the stored small prize winning information until it is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends while the time saving winning information is stocked in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea, a game situation is created in which a new time saving state cannot be set. It becomes possible to
Therefore, even if the effect indicating that the time saving winning information is stocked is executed, the time saving state ( Since the time-saving state is not determined until the second time-saving state is set, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1962, processing contents of production setting processing (S5102Le) in a time saving state performed by MPU221 of sound lamp control device 113 are explained. FIG. 1962 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S5102Le) during the time saving state. In this time saving state effect setting process (S5102Le), a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect (effect of getting various icons) executed during the time saving state is executed.
When the production setting process (S5102Le) during the time saving state is executed, first, the lottery result of this time is read (S5151Le), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation production of this time is the special figure final fluctuation (special design final fluctuation in the time saving state). Then (S5163Le), when it is determined that it is a special figure final variation (S5163Le: Yes), the first time saving state end time production setting process is executed (S5152Le) and this process is ended.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5163Le, if it is determined that it is not a special figure final variation (S5163Le: No), then it is determined whether the variation pattern of this time is a time-saving design winning (S5153Le), and a time-saving design winning If it is determined (S5153Le: Yes), determine the performance mode of P icon acquisition to indicate the time-saving pattern winning (S5154Le), and store the time-saving winning information (time-saving pattern type) in the time-saving winning information storage area 203me. (storage) (S5155Le), and the process ends.
Also, in the process of S5163Le, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving symbol election (S5163Le: No), then it is determined whether it is a small hit (S5156Le), and if it is determined that it is a small hit ( S5156Le: Yes), determines the presentation mode of the poison icon 803V (see FIG. 1953(b)) (S5157Le), adds 1 to the value of the small hit winning number counter 223meb (S5158Le), and adds the small winning winning number counter after addition It determines whether the value of 223meb is 5 (S5159Le), and if it determines that it is 5 (S5159Le: Yes), determines the effect mode (see FIG. 1954 (a)) for indicating the end of the first time saving (S5160Le), determines the production mode of the resurrection production based on the hit (time saving pattern type) stored in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea (S5161Le), sets the time saving stocked flag 223mb off (S5162Le), this End the process.

Also, if it is determined that the small hit winning number counter 223meb is not 5 in the process of S5159Le (S5159Le: No), or if it is determined that it is not a small hit in the process of S5156Le (S5156Le: No), this End the process.
Next, with reference to Drawing 1963, the processing contents of production setting processing (S5152Le) at the time of the end of the 1st time saving state are explained. FIG. 1963 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the effect setting process (S5152Le) at the end of the first time saving state. In this first time saving state end effect setting process (S5152Le), a new time saving state (second A process for determining the effect mode of the effect for suggesting whether or not the time saving state) is set is executed.
When the effect setting process at the end of the first time saving state (S5152Le) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223jb during time saving is 1, that is, whether the current variable effect is the final variable effect of the time saving state. (S5181Le), and if it is determined that it is not the final variation (S5181Le: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the final change (S5181Le: Yes), based on the information (time saving winning information) stored in the time saving winning information storage area 203mea, it is determined whether there is a waiting time saving (S5182Le ), and if it is determined that there is no (S5182Le: No), this processing ends.
Also, in the processing of S5182Le, if it is determined that there is a time saving during standby (S5182Le: Yes), then the value of the small hit winning counter 223meb is greater than 0 (1 or more) It is determined whether ( S5183Le), not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the poison icon 803V has not been obtained (S5183Le: No), the production mode indicating extension of the time saving state is determined (S5188Le), 20 is set to the value of the time-saving counter (S5190Le), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5183Le, if it is determined that the small hit winning number counter 223meb is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S5183Le: Yes), the information of the time saving winning information storage area 203mea and the small winning number counter Based on the value of 223meb, determine whether or not the time saving state is extended (S5184Le), update the value of the small winning number counter 223meb (S5185Le), determine whether there is time saving extension (S5186Le), and determine whether there is time saving extension. If so (S5186Le: Yes), the process of S5188Le is executed, the process of S5190Le is executed, and this process ends.
In addition, in the processing of S5186Le, if it is determined that there is no time saving extension (S5186Le: No), the effect mode indicating the end of the time saving state is determined (S5187Le), and this processing ends.
<Regarding the sixth modification of the fifty-first control example>
Next, a sixth modification of the fifty-first control example described above will be described. In the sixth modification, similarly to the fifth modification described above, there is a time saving winning information storage area 203mea, and the time saving winning information acquired when the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state can be individually stored. It is Then, as time saving winning information, time saving pattern type (time saving pattern A) that can acquire the first time saving winning information of 10 times of time saving and time saving pattern type that can acquire the second time saving winning information of 100 times of time saving (time saving A time-saving pattern type selection table is defined so that at least a pattern B) and a time-saving pattern type (time-saving pattern C) capable of acquiring the third time-saving winning information of 300 time-saving times can be selected.
Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this time saving pattern type selection table, the time saving pattern B corresponding to the number of time saving times of 100 times is most likely to be selected, followed by the time saving pattern C with the number of time saving times of 300 times, and the time saving pattern C with the number of time saving times of 10 times. Each time-saving design type is defined so that the selection ratio decreases in the order of design A.

Furthermore, lottery determination means for determining by lottery any one of a plurality of time-saving winning information stored in a time-saving winning information storage area 203 mea when the end condition of the time-saving state being executed is established. and an erasing means for leaving only the time-saving winning information determined by the lottery determining means and erasing the other time-saving winning information. A new time saving state (second time saving state) can be set based on the time saving winning information determined by the lottery determining means.
In the sixth modified example configured in this way, even if the number of time-saving symbol winning times is multiple times for the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-first control example described above, the second time-saving state for a long period of time Since it is not determined to be set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state until the second time saving state is actually set.
In addition, when the configuration of the sixth modification is used, it is preferable to set the maximum number of times that can be stored for each time saving pattern type differently. number), and the minimum number of time saving patterns A to be stored (for example, one) is preferably defined. By configuring in this way, as the number of time-saving patterns won increases, the occupation ratio of the time-saving pattern B in the whole can be easily increased, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the number of time-saving patterns won increases. can be done.
<Regarding the production content of the sixth modification in the fifty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1964, among the production contents executed in the present sixth modified example, the production contents of the time saving extension production executed during the final fluctuation of the time saving state (first time saving state) will be described. do. FIG. 1964(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving extension effect is started, and FIG. 1964(b) is a display screen displayed as the effect result of the time saving extension effect. It is the figure which showed an example.

As shown in FIG. 1964 (a), when the time saving extension effect is executed, a plurality of P icons (P1 to P4 ) is variably displayed, and the characters "Leave one from the accumulated 'P'" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. That is, an effect is executed in which one P icon is determined from a plurality of acquisition icons P acquired by the effect of getting the P icon 802V during the first time saving state. As shown in FIG. 1964(a), the P icon P1 corresponding to the time saving pattern A has "P10" as a display mode corresponding to the number of time saving, and the P icon P2 corresponding to the time saving pattern C corresponds to the number of time saving. "P100" is attached as the display mode, and "P300" is attached to the P icon P3 corresponding to the time saving pattern B as the display mode corresponding to the number of times of the time saving. Also, the P icon P4 is attached with "PV" corresponding to the fact that the special symbol variation being executed is the big winning variation.
Then, an effect is executed in which the character 801 aims and leaves a specific P icon, and the effect shown in FIG. 1964(b) is displayed. FIG. 1964(b) shows the effect result corresponding to the case where the time saving pattern C is determined by the lottery determination means of the main controller 110, the effect result of getting the P icon P2 is displayed, and the sub display area. In Ds, the characters "get 100 times of time saving" are displayed, and in the display area Dm7, "100 times remaining" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the remaining period (number of times of remaining time saving) of the time saving state (second time saving state). Is displayed.
In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 1964 (a), the number of P icons (P1 to P4) shows a constant (one) effect pattern, but not limited to this, time saving winning information storage area 203mea Depending on the number of time-saving winning information (time-saving pattern type) stored in the display screen, the number and type of P icons (P1 to P4) displayed on the display screen may be determined. Alternatively, each P icon may be configured to vary according to the number of time-saving winning information (time-saving symbol type) stored in the time-saving winning information storage area 203mea.
With this configuration, the player can easily predict which P icon will remain in the state where the P icons (P1 to P4) are variably displayed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. .

<Modification of the fifty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1865, a modification of the fifty-third control example described above will be described. In the 53rd control example described above, one standby time reduction counter (waiting time reduction counter 203ma) is provided, and when the time reduction pattern is elected during the time reduction state, the value of the standby time reduction counter 203ma that has been set and this election Based on the time saving winning information (time saving number of times) corresponding to the time saving pattern, the processing for determining whether to update the value of the waiting time saving counter 203ma was configured to be executed.
On the other hand, in this modified example, a plurality of (100) waiting time reduction counters 203ma are provided. In other words, the number of standby time reduction counters 203ma (first standby time reduction counter to 100th standby time reduction counter) corresponding to the number of executions (100 times) of the special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state (first time reduction state) is provided , It is configured to set a value indicating the number of times of time reduction corresponding to time reduction winning information to a standby time reduction counter set to 0 each time a time reduction symbol is elected.
Then, each time the special symbol variation is executed, the value of each waiting time reduction counter is subtracted, and at the timing when the first time saving state is completed, the largest value among the values of each waiting time reduction counter is the value of the time saving counter 203h. The difference is that it is configured to be set to Other configurations are the same, so description thereof is omitted.
By configuring in this way, the determination process based on the value of the standby time reduction counter is executed only at the timing of setting a new time reduction state, so the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1865, the game flow in this modified example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifty-third control example described above. As shown in Figure 1865, when the time-saving design is elected multiple times during the first time-saving state, the value "50" corresponding to the time-saving design A based on the first time-saving design election (second variation) is the second It is set in the short waiting time counter, and based on the second short time pattern winning (70th variation), the value "50" corresponding to the short waiting time pattern A is set in the first short waiting time counter, and the third short time pattern winning (98 variations) second), the value "10" corresponding to the time saving pattern B is set to the third waiting time saving counter.
Then, at the end timing of the first time saving state (100th variation), the value of each waiting time saving counter is determined, and the value of the second waiting time saving counter "20", which is the largest value, is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. , a second time saving state of 20 times of working time saving is set.
In addition, in this modification, the value of each standby time reduction counter is determined at the end timing of the first time reduction state (100th variation), and the largest value is set to the time reduction counter 203h. However, it may be determined by lottery as in the sixth modified example described above.
In addition, in this modification, the second time saving state (20 times) is set immediately after the first time saving state ends, but it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display mode displays the display mode corresponding to the first time saving state until all the special figure reservations acquired during the first time saving state are digested, and then displays the display mode corresponding to the second time saving state. It is configured as follows. That is, the timing at which the game state shifts and the timing at which the display mode of the effect mode indicating the game state shifts are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Fifty-sixth control example>
In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example described above, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning command is executed based on the receipt of the winning command output from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp control device 113 side. An effect (prefetching effect) corresponding to the preliminary determination result (prefetching result) included in the winning command was configured to be executable before.
Specifically, as a look-ahead effect, a reservation change effect that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the acquired special pattern reservation, and a continuous notice effect that is executed over multiple special pattern fluctuation periods The game is played in a state where the degree of expectation for winning is increased by making the game executable and making the player predict the result of preliminary discrimination before the execution of the special symbol lottery targeted for the look-ahead performance. It was possible to make it easier for people to do it for a long time.
However, in the look-ahead effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example described above, the look-ahead effect is executed in a period (look-ahead period) before the special symbol lottery targeted for the look-ahead effect is executed. Because the player can easily predict the pre-determination result depending on the effect mode, for example, if the look-ahead effect is executed in the effect mode where the expectation for winning is not relatively high There is a possibility that the degree of expectation for winning will be low over a long period of time (a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods) during which the look-ahead effect is executed, and the player's willingness to play may decrease.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example, as a look-ahead effect, a specific character is displayed based on the reception of the prize winning command, and a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation targeted for the look-ahead effect. It is possible to set an effect mode in which the displayed character performs a specific action while the is being executed. Then, the degree of expectation of winning is made different depending on the timing at which the character performs a specific action in the variable presentation.

In other words, the player is notified only that the look-ahead effect has been executed for a specific special figure reservation, and the effect result of the look-ahead effect is configured to be notified during the special symbol fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead effect. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing during the look-ahead period in which the look-ahead effect is executed.
Furthermore, in the fifty-sixth control example, the later the timing at which the character executes the specific action, the higher the expectation of winning. It is configured to be able to execute an effect for notifying the player of a period during which specific actions are not executed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to specify a period (safe period) during which a specific action is not executed during the period in which the character is displayed as the look-ahead effect, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example, in the period in which the character is displayed as the look-ahead effect, as the type of period (safe period) during which the specific action is not executed, the safe period is set when the first condition is satisfied. , and a second safe period in which the safe period ends when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example, the first effect mode in which the first condition is difficult to be established as the effect mode of the variable effect, and the second effect in which the first condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first effect mode. mode and are configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the performance mode of the variable performance executed in the state where the safe period is set is the first performance mode or the second performance mode.
Further, the above-described second condition is established based on the lapse of time. is configured so that Therefore, when the second safe period is set, it is possible to predict the timing at which the specific action is executed by grasping the execution status of the variable performance at that time. Also, since the second condition is established based on the passage of time, the player can easily grasp the period during which the specific action is not executed when the second safe period is set.
Then, when the second safe period is set, an effect mode (remaining period indication mode) for making the player grasp the remaining period until the second condition is satisfied can be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the period during which the specific action is not executed when the second safe period is set.
As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example is configured so that the degree of advantage given to the player varies depending on the timing at which the character executes a specific action, and the character is displayed. In a state in which the specific action is executed at any timing, a period (safe period) during which the specific action is not executed can be set. Then, as the safe period, a first safe period that ends when a first condition that is established based on the production mode of the variable production is satisfied, and a second safe period that ends when a second condition that is established based on the passage of time is satisfied. 2 safe periods can be set.

With this configuration, when the safe period is set, the player can enjoy predicting the remaining period until the safe period ends (the period until the first condition or the second condition is satisfied). can provide.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example, the first effect (bear roulette effect) and the second effect (character appearance effect) are executed as the look-ahead effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations. It is constructed so as to be able to display the effect result of the look-ahead effect using the effect mode of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect.
Also, the second effect can be executed at a different timing than the execution timing of the first effect. Specifically, when the first effect is executed first in the look-ahead effect, the second effect is started after the first effect is started, and the first effect is executed for the second time. In this case, the first effect and the second effect are started at the same time. Then, when the first performance is started for the first time, the player can be notified of the performance contents of the look-ahead performance to be executed this time by using the remaining period until the second performance is started. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.
<Regarding the effect content in the fifty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1966 to 1976, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example, the result of pre-determining the winning information included in the acquired right to execute the special symbol lottery (special figure reservation) for the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example (prefetching The difference is that the contents of the look-ahead effect executed based on the result) are different.

First, with reference to FIGS. 1966 to 1971, the content of the character prefetch effect, which is the prefetch effect executed based on the acquisition of a new special figure reservation, will be described. This character prefetch effect is a prefetch effect that is executed when the prefetch result for the newly acquired special figure hold satisfies the execution conditions. It is a look-ahead effect that continues until a variation effect (a look-ahead object variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation based on the winning information included in the drawing reservation is executed.
FIG. 1966(a) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the execution condition is satisfied by the newly acquired fourth special figure reservation (4th special figure 1 reservation) and the character prefetch effect is executed. It is a diagram showing. In addition, among the various display elements displayed on the display screen, the same contents as the various display elements displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 47th control example are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. do.
As shown in FIG. 1966(a), when the conditions for executing the character prefetch effect are satisfied, a character 8591 resembling a rabbit is displayed in the lower left side of the main display area Dm, and the fourth feature displayed in the display area Dm9. As a display form of FIG. 1 hold (4th special figure 1 hold) hr4, a look-ahead display form imitating the outline of a rabbit, which is different from the normal display form (indicated by a circle in the figure), is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, there are characters indicating that the character prefetching effect has been executed, and as a guidance notification mode for guiding the effect content of the character prefetching effect, "predictive character appears! Chance when the character shouts!" is displayed. In the fifty-sixth control example, the character 8591 is displayed when the character look-ahead effect is executed, and the displayed character 8591 executes a specific action (roar) at any timing during the target change effect. is doing.
Then, the timing at which the character 8591 executes a specific action (roar) can suggest that the effect result of the target variation effect (the special symbol lottery result targeted for the look-ahead effect) is an advantageous result for the player. It is configured such that the later the timing at which the specific action (roar) is executed, the higher the possibility that the effect result of the target variation effect is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the character prefetch effect is executed as the prefetch effect, the player pays attention to the character prefetch effect while expecting that the character 8591 will execute a specific action at a timing as late as possible.

Therefore, in the fifty-sixth control example, the display mode of the character 8591 is changed to a specific action by using a period (prefetching period) from when the character prefetch effect is being executed until the target variation effect is executed. It is configured to be changeable to a display mode (safe display mode) that is never executed. Here, one form of the safe display mode will be described with reference to FIG. 1966(b). FIG. 1966(b) is a diagram showing the display screen when the character 8591 is in the dozing mode, which is one form of the safe display mode.
The display screen shown in FIG. 1966(b) is a display screen during the special symbol variation twice after the special symbol variation on which the display screen shown in FIG. 1966(a) is displayed, and is displayed in the display area Dm9. The look-ahead display mode (reserved pattern that imitates the outline of a rabbit) is displayed in the second special figure reservation (second special figure 1 reservation) hr2. Then, the character 8591 is displayed in a dozing display mode, and in the sub-display area Ds, a guidance notification mode for guiding the rendering status of the current character look-ahead rendering is displayed: "The character has fallen asleep! Do not shout." is displayed.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifty-sixth control example, when the effect period of the variable effect executed during the look-ahead period is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (10 seconds or more) and the ready-to-win effect is not executed, that is, , when a relatively quiet variation effect is executed, the character 8591 can execute a dozing effect. Then, while the character 8591 is dozing off, the specific action (roar) is not executed in the target change.
By configuring in this way, the display mode of the character 8591 can be changed during the look-ahead period only when the look-ahead period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. can be suppressed.

Then, when the target variation effect is executed while the character 8591 is dozing off, the display screen shown in FIG. 1967(a) is displayed. FIG. 1967(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the target change effect of the character prefetch effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 1967(a), when the target variation effect is executed while the character 8591 is asleep, the character 8591 continues to be asleep on the lower left side of the main display area Dm. 8591 is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide display mode for guiding the current performance situation, the characters "I'm still sleeping. The longer I doze, the better the chance!" In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 1967(a) is a display screen displayed in a situation where the target variation effect is being executed, that is, during the special symbol variation period corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed in the look-ahead display mode Since the display screen is displayed in the display area Dm9, the reserved design in the look-ahead display mode is not displayed, and there are two reserved designs displayed after the reserved design in the look-ahead display mode. (1st special figure 1 reserved design hr1, 2nd special figure 1 reserved design hr2) are displayed.
In addition, FIG. 1967(a) shows that all the third symbols are changing at high speed (represented by three leftward arrows in the drawing), that is, the initial stage of the changing effect. Next, from the state shown in FIG. 1967(a), the variable effect progresses, and among the third symbols during high-speed variation, the third symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the third symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 are in the reach state. The display screen displayed when the stop display is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 1967(b).
FIG. 1967(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the ready-to-reach state occurs in the target change effect of the character look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 1967(b), when the reach state occurs, the characters "reach!!" Sound is output. Then, an effect is executed in which the character 8591 wakes up as if reacting to the voice "reach" output from the voice output device 226 . After that, the character 8591 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 8591 is awake, and in the sub-display area Ds, a guide display mode for guiding the current production situation is displayed, "The sound of the reach has awakened the character. ” is displayed.
In the character prefetch effect in the fifty-sixth control example, when a specific sound (for example, reach sound) is output while the character 8591 is asleep, the character 8591 wakes up (wakes up). is doing. In other words, it is possible for the player to predict the timing at which the dozing character 8591 wakes up according to the effect mode of the variable effect being executed.

By configuring in this way, when the character 8591 is displayed in a display mode in which a specific action is not executed (drowsing display mode), it is necessary to always be aware of the timing at which the character 8591 wakes up. is eliminated, it is possible to easily provide the player with a period during which he can enjoy the character look-ahead effect with peace of mind.
In the fifty-sixth control example, the variation start sound output when the special symbol variation (variation performance) is started, the reach sound output during reach, the temporary stop of the third symbol in the pseudo variation performance, or A pseudo effect sound output at the time of restarting and a button pressing sound output when the player presses the frame button 22 are defined as sounds for waking up the dozing character 8591 . That is, the sound for waking up the dozing character 8591 is output at various timings included in the performance period of the variable performance and at the timing when the performance mode of the variable performance is switched.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp at what timing of the variable performance there is a possibility that the dozing character 8591 will wake up, and the whole performance period of the variable performance can be easily grasped. Since the character 8591 can wake up, it is possible to keep the player interested in the variable presentation. In addition, since there is a predetermined interval between the output of the sound 1 that can wake up the dozing character 8591 and the output of the next sound, even though the sound 1 is output, First, if the character 8591 continues to doze off, it can be understood that the period until the next sound is output is the period during which no specific action is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1968, the action of the character 8591 executed during the target change effect in the character look-ahead effect will be described. FIG. 1968(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a character rousing effect in which the character 8591 is inciting whether or not to perform a specific action (roar), and FIG. is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the character 8591 faints as a result of the effect of .

In the fifty-sixth control example, the dozing mode (see FIG. 1967(a)) is used as a display mode for indicating a period (safe period) during which the character 8591 does not perform a specific action (roar) during the character prefetch effect. ), and the faint mode (see FIG. 1968(b)) can be displayed.
Here, in the state where the character 8591 is displayed in the above-described dozing state, the character 8591 is configured to wake up from the dozing state by the effect state (output sound) of the variable effect. In other words, it is possible to set a first safe period (drowsy period) that ends when a termination condition (first condition) that is satisfied based on the execution of a specific effect (for example, output of reach sound) is satisfied. Was. Since the first safe period thus constituted ends based on the performance contents of the variable performance, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the first safe period ends. It was possible to improve the production effect. However, since the timing at which the first safe period ends is limited to a plurality of timings (the timing at which any one of a plurality of specific effects is executed), there is a risk that the contents of the effect will become monotonous. was there.
Therefore, in the fifty-sixth control example, a second safe period different from the above-described first safe period is set as a period (safe period) during which the character 8591 displayed during the character look-ahead effect cannot perform a specific action. The second safe period is configured so that the termination condition is satisfied based on the passage of time. By configuring multiple safe periods with different end conditions to be able to set in this way, it is possible to end the safe period at various timings according to the type of the set safe period. It is possible to easily provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether the action will be executed or at what timing the safe period will end.
Furthermore, in the fifty-sixth control example, since it is configured to be able to execute an effect for arousing whether or not a specific action is to be executed (character stimulating effect), the state in which the character 8591 is awake (the specific action can be executed), it is possible to prevent a sudden execution of a specific action from deteriorating the production effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the variable effect from being prolonged by executing the character-inspiring effect even during a period in which the specific action is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 1968(a), during the target change effect of the character look-ahead effect and in the state where the character 8591 is displayed in a wakeful display mode, it is prompted whether or not a specific action will be executed. A display mode in which the character 8591 is inhaling is displayed as a character rousing effect.・The characters “!!” are displayed.
When the character 8591 actually performs a specific action (roar) after this character-roaring presentation, the roar action (see FIG. 1969(a)) is performed as if breathing in and exhaling. On the other hand, if the effect result of the character stirring effect is not to execute a specific action (roar), the character stirring effect ends while breathing in. In addition, as a result of the character fanning effect, an effect is executed in which the character 8591 faints while inhaling.
When the character 8591 faints, as shown in FIG. A faint icon 8591a shaped like a star is displayed as a remaining faint period display mode for indicating the remaining period. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1968(b), a faint icon 8591a with four orbiting stars is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the remaining faint period is 4 seconds.
The display mode of this faint icon 8591a is configured to be variable based on the elapsed time, and is configured to change to a display mode in which the number of stars decreases by one every time one second elapses. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the remaining period during which the character 8591 is unconscious by grasping the display mode of the unconscious icon 8591a.

A period during which the character 8591 is unconscious is a period (second safe period) during which no specific action is executed. Unlike the above-described first safe period (the period during which the character 8591 is asleep), the second safe period is configured such that the end condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time. Therefore, when the second safe period is set (when the character 8591 faints), at what timing of the variable effect is determined based on the progress of the variable effect being executed and the remaining period of the second safe period. The player can predict whether the character 8591 will wake up from the unconscious state and perform a particular action.
In the display screen shown in FIG. 1968(b), the display mode of the unconscious icon 8591a indicates to the player the remaining period of the second safe period. It may be configured to display a countdown display for suggesting the remaining period until the end of is indicated by decreasing a predetermined value.
In the fifty-sixth control example, the faint icon 8591a is displayed to allow the player to predict the remaining period until the second safe period ends. The display mode of 8591a may allow the player to predict the period from the end of the second safe period to the execution of a specific action.
In this case, by changing the dynamic display speed of the faint icon 8591a and the display color of the faint icon 8591a, the player can predict the period from the end of the second safe period to the execution of a specific action. For example, if the fainting icon 8591a is dynamically displayed at a higher speed than usual, the time from the end of the second safe period to the execution of a specific action The period is configured to be longer than when the faint icon 8591a is dynamically displayed at normal speed, or the display color of the faint icon 8591a is a special color (e.g., red) different from the normal color (e.g., white). ), the period from the end of the second safe period to the execution of a specific action is longer than when the faint icon 8591a is displayed in a normal color. good to do

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the timing at which the specific action will be executed while securing a period during which the specific action will not be executed when the second safe period is set. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.
Next, referring to FIG. 1969(a), the display screen displayed after the second safe period (the period during which the character 8591 is unconscious) will be described. FIG. 1969(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the character 8591 performs a specific action (roar).
After the display screen shown in FIG. 1969(a) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 1968(b) is displayed. It shows a display screen when a new character-inciting effect is executed, and a specific action (roar) is executed as a result of the character-inciting effect. , the third symbol has already been displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won (a display mode in which three "4" symbols are arranged in a vertical line), and a display for notifying the jackpot win is displayed above the main display area Dm. The word "jackpot" is displayed.
When the character 8591 performs a specific action (roar) in this state, the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm (the third pattern displayed in a display mode indicating winning a jackpot) can be changed to another pattern. An effect of switching to the display mode is executed. In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 1969(a) shows a state (temporary stop state) in which the special symbol variation is not stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the third symbol indicates that the jackpot has been won. After that, as shown in FIG. 1969(b), the temporarily stopped jackpot symbols (even-numbered patterns) are promoted to the jackpot patterns (odd-numbered patterns) indicating the probability variable jackpot winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1970(a), the voice of the variable effect executed while the character 8591 is dozing off will be described. FIG. 1970(a) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when the character 8591 is in a dozing state and the ready-to-win state is displayed as the variable effect, but the ready-to-win sound is not output. be.
As shown in FIG. 1970(a), when the reach sound is not output (when the silent reach is performed), as a guidance display mode for guiding that the silent reach has occurred in the sub display area Ds The text "Chance that the character that does not make the reach sound is sleeping" is displayed.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1970(b) and 1971, the effect contents of the special effect (burst sleep) executed during the character look-ahead effect will be described. In the fifty-sixth control example, if the newly acquired special figure suspension is the special figure suspension corresponding to the probability variable jackpot while the character look-ahead effect is being executed, the winning sound (output when the pending symbol is displayed) As shown in FIG. 1970(b), a lullaby is output as the sound played), and a special mode in which the character 8591 is covered with a futon and falls asleep is displayed.
This special mode is continuously displayed until the special symbol variation for winning the probability variable jackpot is executed, and when the special symbol variation for winning the probability variation jackpot is started, as shown in FIG. Then, the character 8591 wakes up from sleep and announces the winning of the jackpot by saying "Good morning, big win".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1972 to 1977, the details of the roulette effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example, the first effect (bear roulette effect) and the second effect (character appearance effect) can be executed as the look-ahead effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations. The production result of the look-ahead effect can be displayed using the effect mode of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect.
Also, the second effect can be executed at a different timing than the execution timing of the first effect. Specifically, when the first effect is executed first in the look-ahead effect, the second effect is started after the first effect is started, and the first effect is executed for the second time. In this case, the first effect and the second effect are started at the same time. Then, when the first performance is started for the first time, the player can be notified of the performance contents of the look-ahead performance to be executed this time by using the remaining period until the second performance is started. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.
FIG. 1972(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the roulette effect is started, and FIG. 1972(b) is a case where characters are displayed in the first roulette effect. is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of . FIG. 1973(a) is a view showing an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the first roulette effect, and FIG. 1973(b) is a display screen showing the effect result of the first roulette effect. It is a figure showing another example of. FIG. 1974(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the first roulette effect, and FIG. 1974(b) shows an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the second roulette effect. It is a diagram. FIG. 1975(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the performance using the character (brave) that appears during the roulette performance, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during an effect using a special character (bear). FIG. 1976 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during an effect using a special character.
Bear roulette effect (roulette effect) is a kind of look-ahead effect, and multiple patterns (bear icons) imitating bears are displayed in the vertical direction to change the target of the look-ahead effect, and a specific pattern (bear icon) is displayed. is stopped and displayed, an effect mode corresponding to the information (character information) attached to the picture (bear icon) that is stopped and displayed is executed. Furthermore, a plurality of character icons are displayed separately from the bear icon, and the effect mode of the next bear roulette effect is changed according to the type of effect executed by the character icon.

As shown in FIG. 1972(a), when the first bear roulette effect is started, a first bear icon 8961a, a second bear icon 8961b, a third bear icon 8961c, and a fourth bear icon 8961d are displayed and fluctuate. Is displayed. This bear icon is displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the third symbol that is variably displayed, but the display position is determined so as not to cover the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state.
Then, when two seconds have passed since the start of the bear roulette effect, the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and the next variation display is started. When the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 1972(b), the variable display of the third symbol (high-speed variable display) and the variable display of the bear roulette effect (high-speed variable display) are executed. In the state, character icons (8965a to 8965c) corresponding to the first roulette effect are displayed. As shown in FIG. 1972(b), the variable display direction of the third symbol (high-speed variable display) and the variable display of the bear roulette effect (high-speed variable display) are orthogonal to each other. This makes it easy to identify which variable display is being executed.
After that, when the first bear roulette effect is stopped and displayed at the timing when the third symbol being executed is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. A specific bear icon (second bear icon 8961b in the figure) is stopped and displayed, and a specific character icon (third character icon 8965c in the figure) among the plurality of character icons (8965a to 8965c) is displayed. The types of the bear icon and character icon to be stopped and displayed in each roulette effect are determined in advance with reference to the roulette scenario selection table 222jf and the roulette mode determination table 222jg.
As shown in FIG. 1973(a), the second bear icon 8961b has "continued" as text information, so that it is notified that the second bear roulette effect will be executed. In this control example, the bear icon stopped and displayed in the bear roulette effect is configured to be blown out of the display area at the timing when the next bear roulette effect is started. In other words, the number of variably displayed bear icons decreases as the number of times the bear roulette effect is executed increases.

With this configuration, if there is a bear icon (fourth bear icon 8961d) to which character information indicating that the jackpot is won is included among the bear icons that are variably displayed, more bears can be displayed. To allow a player to play a game while expecting the roulette performance to be executed.
After the display screen shown in FIG. 1973(a) is displayed, the effect (continuous effect) using the character icon shown in FIG. 1973(b) is executed. When an effect based on the character icon 8965c imitating Kintaro is executed as the character icon, the second bear icon, which is stopped and displayed in the first bear roulette effect, among the plurality of bear icons used in the bear roulette effect, is executed. An effect is being executed in which the bear icon 8961b and the other first bear icon 8961a are thrown away by the character icon.
Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Two types of bears in the second roulette!! Chance" are displayed. After that, when the second roulette effect is executed, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 1974(a), a chance character icon 8965d with a character "strong" is displayed, and a character "chance character appears" is attached to the sub-display area Ds.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1974(b), the content of the effect using the chance character icon 8965d will be described. When the third bear icon 8961c to which the character information "heat" is added is displayed as the effect result of the second bear roulette effect shown in FIG. 1974(a), the chance character icon 8965d is displayed. , the chance character icon 8965d is moved to the left side of the third bear icon 8961c, and the two icons are used to form the characters "hot heat".

By configuring in this way, the result of the special symbol lottery, which is the target change of the look-ahead effect, can be predicted by a composite effect mode combining a plurality of effect types used in the bear roulette effect. If the chance character icon 8965d is displayed and the third bear icon 8961c is not displayed, no complex effect mode is formed. Therefore, at the time when the second bear roulette effect shown in FIG. 1974(a) is executed, the player is notified that the chance character icon 8965d will remain displayed and that the third bear icon 8961c will be displayed. can be expected. If the third bear icon 8961c is not displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 1974(a), the fourth bear icon with the text information "win" indicating that the special symbol lottery will be won. Since 8961d is displayed, regardless of which bear icon is displayed, an effect advantageous to the player can be executed when the chance character icon 8965d is displayed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1975(a), description will be given of the effect content using a character icon 8965a imitating a hero as the character icon. As shown in FIG. 1975(a), a character icon 8965a imitating a hero performs an effect of jumping on the bear icon (second bear icon 8961b) displayed stationary, and the bear icon displayed stationary moves out of the area. An effect is executed to prevent it from popping out. In other words, when the character icon 8965a jumps on the second bear icon 8961b to which the character information "Continue" is attached, which confirms the execution of the next bear roulette performance, the possibility of continuing the next roulette performance is left open. can be done.
Finally, the effect contents of the bear roulette effect when the special character 8965x is displayed will be described with reference to FIGS. 1975(b) and 1976. FIG. This special character 8965x has a display mode that imitates a boss bear, and is attached with characters of "definite" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot as character information. As shown in FIG. 1976, this special character 8965x flips over the variably displayed bear icon for the bear roulette effect, and the special character 8965x itself changes to a pattern (bear icon) that is variably displayed for the bear roulette effect. It is configured to
By configuring in this way, a pattern (character icon) displayed in a manner different from the pattern (bear icon) for bear roulette is displayed as a composite effect mode combining a plurality of effect types used in bear roulette effect. ) can be switched to bear roulette patterns, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1977, the execution timing of the roulette effect will be described. FIG. 1977 is a diagram showing the flow of roulette effect and special figure variation. As shown in FIG. 1977, the timing at which the roulette is started differs from the timing at which the character effect for introducing a character is executed for the first and second times of the roulette effect.
Specifically, in the first roulette effect, the roulette is started two seconds before the character effect is executed, and in the second roulette effect, the roulette starts and the character effect starts. configured to match the timing. By configuring in this way, when the roulette performance is started, guidance notification for guiding the player to the performance content of the roulette performance can be executed using the standby period of 2 seconds. In addition, in the second and subsequent roulette presentations, by matching the start timing of the roulette with the start timing of the character presentation, an impactful presentation can be executed.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifty-sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1978 to 1983. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-seventh control example in that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 are The difference is that a part of and is changed, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 1978, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1978 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example.

As shown in FIG. 1978, the ROM 222 in the fifty-sixth control example has a character mode selection table 222jd, a voice type selection table 222je, and a The difference is that a roulette scenario selection table 222jf and a roulette mode determination table 222jg are added, and the rest is the same. The same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
The character mode selection table 222jd is a data table referred to when determining the mode during the target variation rendering of the character 8591 (see FIG. 1966(a)) displayed in the character look-ahead rendering. Based on the character 8591 mode (awake mode or dozing mode) at the time of start, the performance mode (variation performance pattern) of the target variation performance, and the result of the determination result, the target variation performance Modes of the character 8591 set at various timings (drowsy, faint, awakened, roar) are defined.
Detailed contents of the character mode selection table 222jd will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1980 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the character mode selection table 222jd. As shown in FIG. 1980, the character mode selection table 222jd has eight mode types (modes A to G and a special mode) as the mode types of the character 8591 displayed during the target change effect of the character look-ahead effect. is defined corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the target variable effect and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223fa).
Specifically, when the aspect of the character 8591 at the timing when the target variation effect is started is "normal", that is, when the target variation effect is executed in a state where the character 8591 is awake, a special effect corresponding to the target variation effect The result of the symbol lottery is "big hit", and the mode type "mode A" is applied to the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, and the mode type to the range "20 to 39". "Aspect B" is in the range of "40 to 59", the aspect type "Aspect C" is in the range of "60 to 79", and the aspect type "Aspect D" is in the range of "80 to 99" On the other hand, a mode type "mode E" is defined. In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the target variable effect is "out", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 24". 49”, the aspect type “Aspect B”, the aspect type “Aspect C” for the range “50 to 74”, and the aspect type “Aspect D” for the range “75 to 99”. stipulated.

On the other hand, when the aspect of the character 8591 at the timing when the target variation effect is started is "drowsy", that is, when the target variation effect is executed while the character 8591 is asleep, a special pattern lottery corresponding to the target variation effect is performed. result is a "jackpot", and the aspect type "aspect A" is applied to the value of the obtained effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 24", and the aspect type "aspect" is applied to the range of "25 to 49". D", and the mode type "mode F" is defined for the range of "50 to 99". In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the target variable effect is "out", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79". A mode type "mode B" is defined for the range of "89", and a mode type "mode G" is defined for the range "90 to 99".
Furthermore, when the state of the character 8591 at the timing at which the target variation effect is started is "deep sleep", that is, when the target variation effect is executed in a state where the character 8591 is sleeping in the futon (see FIG. 1970(b)). , the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the target variable production is "big win", and the mode type "special mode" is defined for the entire range of the value of the acquired performance counter 223f "0 to 99". there is Although the details will be described later, in the state where the character 8591 is sleeping in the futon (see FIG. 1970(b)), the character prefetch effect is executed in which the effect result is out. Since it is a mode that is set when information (special figure reservation) is acquired, when the target variation effect is executed in the state of the character 8591 in the state of "sleeping", it corresponds to jackpot winning (variable jackpot winning) Only the mode to do is specified.
Here, detailed contents of each mode type will be described. As shown in FIG. 1980, each mode type defines information defining a mode of a character 8591 displayed at a specific timing during the effect period of the target variation effect. Specifically, "at the start of fluctuation" immediately after the target variable production is started, "during pseudo production" before the reach state is displayed, "during reach" indicating the period during which the reach state is displayed , and four timings of "after stopping" after the variably displayed third symbol is stopped and displayed.
Mode type "mode A" is whether the target change effect is a jackpot effect or a losing effect, and the mode of the character 8591 at the time when the target change effect is started is "normal" or "drowsy". It is a mode type that can be selected in any case, and a mode of "normal" at the start of fluctuation and a mode of "roar" during the pseudo performance are defined. That is, when the mode of the character 8591 displayed at the time when the target variation effect is executed is "normal", the character 8591 continues in the "normal" mode even after the target variation effect is executed. It is displayed, and an effect in which the character 8591 "roars" is executed during the pseudo effect. In addition, when the aspect of the character 8591 displayed at the time when the target variation effect is executed is “drowsy”, the character 8591 is made to look up by the variation start sound output when the target variation effect is started. A character 8591 is displayed in a "normal" mode by executing the wake-up effect. After that, an effect in which the character 8591 "roars" is executed during the pseudo effect.

Thus, in the character prefetch effect executed in the fifty-sixth control example, the period (prefetch period) from when the character prefetch effect is executed until the target variable effect is executed is By configuring so that the mode of the character 8591 is determined according to the performance mode (variation performance pattern), the performance mode of the target variable performance can be made different even in the character prefetch performance with the same performance result. is doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily diversify the effect mode of the variable effect for showing the same effect result, so that it is possible to provide a game in which the player is unlikely to get bored.
Next, the mode type "mode B" is a mode type that can be selected regardless of whether the target variation effect is a jackpot effect or a losing effect, and is "normal" at the start of the change and "normal" during the pseudo effect. ”, the mode of “roar” is defined during reach.
In this "mode B", since the mode of the character 8591 immediately after the target variation effect is executed is the same as the above-described "mode A", the "mode A" is set immediately after the target change effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the game is set or "mode B" is set. Also, the timing at which the character 8591 "roars" is delayed ("reaching") relative to the above-described "mode A". Although detailed description is omitted, the suggestive mode in which the character 8591 suggests roaring (see FIG. 1968(a)) is repeatedly executed during the "pseudo effect" when the "mode B" is set. It is configured as follows.
By displaying the suggestive mode in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that the mode type that has been set may be the "mode A" in the state where the "mode B" is set. In addition, it is possible to make the player think that the mode type of "fainting" the character 8591 is set during the object change effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the various effects that are executed as the variable effects from becoming uniform. Moreover, by constructing to branch to a plurality of effects (dedicated effects) after a common effect mode is set, it is possible to enjoy predicting the effect contents to be executed later based on the effect contents already executed. can be provided to the player.

Next, the mode type "mode C" is when the mode of the character 8591 immediately after the target change effect is executed is "normal", and the target change effect is either a big win effect or a losing effect. Mode types that can be selected. For this "mode C", "drowsy" at the start of the fluctuation, and "normal" during the simulated effect. A "roar" aspect is defined during reach. Details will be described later, but when "mode C" is set, "lullaby" is output as the variable start sound output at the start of the target variable effect, and is displayed in the "normal" mode. An effect is executed in which the character 8591 falls asleep.
By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand that the timing at which the character 8591 roars is not during the simulated performance.
Next, the aspect type "mode D" is selected regardless of whether the target variation effect is a jackpot effect or a losing effect when the mode of the character 8591 immediately after the target change effect is executed is "normal". If the character 8591's mode immediately after execution of the object variation effect is "drowsy", it is a mode that can be selected only when the object variation effect is a jackpot effect.
For this "Mode D", a mode of "Normal" at the start of variation, "Faint" during simulated performance, and "Roar" during Reach is defined. That is, during the period from when the target variation effect is executed until the pseudo effect is completed, a suggestive effect suggesting that the character 8591 roars is executed, and as a result of the suggestive effect, an effect in which the character 8591 faints is executed. be done. When the character 8591 faints, the fainted state continues for 4 seconds, and the reach state is established during the 4 seconds. Therefore, when the character 8591 faints based on the setting of the "mode D", it is possible for the player to predict that the character 8591 will not roar during the simulated effect.

Next, the mode type "mode E" is a mode that can be selected only when the mode of the character 8591 immediately after the target change effect is executed is "normal" and the target change effect is a jackpot effect. . For this "mode E", a mode of "drowsy" at the start of variation, "normal" during simulated performance, "fainted" during reach, and "roar" after stopping is defined. That is, immediately after the target variation effect is started, similarly to the above-described "mode C", the effect is executed in which "lullaby" is output as the variation start sound and the character 8591 falls asleep, and then during the pseudo effect. An effect is executed in which the character 8591 wakes up by the outputted pseudo effect sound (the pseudo stop sound of the third symbol). Then, while the suggestive effect is being repeated, the third symbol is stop-displayed, and then the effect in which the character 8591 roars is executed.
Next, for the mode type "mode F", a mode of "drowsiness" at the start of variation, "normal" during simulated effect, "fainted" during reach, and "roar" after stopping is defined. That is, immediately after the target variation effect is started (the character 8591 is dozing off), the variation start sound “silence” is output, and the character 8591 doze effect continues, and then output during the pseudo effect. An effect is executed in which the character 8591 wakes up by the pseudo effect sound (the pseudo stop sound of the third symbol). Then, the character 8591 faints by outputting an “impact sound” as a reach sound, and after that, after a predetermined period of time (4 seconds) has passed, the character 8591 wakes up and roars.
Next, for the mode type "mode G", a mode of "drowsiness" at the start of fluctuation, "normal" during simulated effect, and "roar" during reach is defined. That is, immediately after the target variation effect is started (the character 8591 is dozing off), the variation start sound “silence” is output, and the character 8591 doze effect continues, and then output during the pseudo effect. An effect is executed in which the character 8591 wakes up by the pseudo effect sound (the pseudo stop sound of the third symbol). After the suggestive effect is executed, the roaring effect is executed during reach.
Finally, for the mode type “special mode”, an effect is executed in which the character 8591 roars at the start of the variation.

The voice type selection table 222je is a data table referred to when determining the type of voice to be output in correspondence with the variable effect executed during the target variable effect of the character look-ahead effect, and is the character mode selection table 222jd. Based on the mode of the character 8591 determined with reference to , audio types set at various audio output timings are defined.
In the fifty-sixth control example, a specific effect (for example, reach, start or stop of pseudo-variation, etc.) is executed as a variable effect while the character 8591 is asleep during the character look-ahead effect. By outputting a sound (for example, a reach sound, a fluctuation start sound, a fluctuation stop sound, etc.) corresponding to the effect of , an effect of waking up the dozing character 8591 is executed.
In a part of the case where the character mode in which the character 8591 continuously falls asleep is determined across the execution timing of the specific effect, when the specific effect is executed, the specific effect corresponds to the specific effect. It is configured not to output audio. That is, at the execution timing of a specific effect that can satisfy the end condition of the first safe period (the period in which the character 8591 is dozing off), the effect (silent effect) in which no sound is output, which is the trigger for the establishment of the end condition, is executed. configured as possible. With this configuration, when the silent effect is executed, the end condition of the first safe period cannot be satisfied at the execution timing of the effect, so that the player can enjoy the effect with peace of mind. can.
Furthermore, in the fifty-sixth control example, when a character prefetch effect is in progress and a specific effect is executed while the character 8591 is awake, it is possible to output a special effect sound instead of the normal effect sound. It is configured so that the character 8591 falls asleep when this special effect sound is output. In other words, when the character 8591 is dozing off, the player can perform the execution timing of the specific effect to see whether or not the character 8591 wakes up. It is composed so that the production that made people interested in can be executed. Therefore, the production effect of the variable production can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1981, the contents of the voice type selection table 222je will be described. FIG. 1981 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the voice type selection table 222je. As shown in FIG. 1981, the voice type selection table 222je defines voice information corresponding to the mode type selected with reference to the character mode selection table 222jd.
The roulette scenario selection table 222jf is a data table used when determining the effect scenario (the number of special symbol variations used in the effect, effect result) of the bear roulette effect, which is the look-ahead effect, and the bear roulette effect is determined as the look-ahead effect. is referenced when
Here, with reference to FIG. 1982, the contents of the production scenarios defined in the roulette scenario selection table 222jf will be described. FIG. 1982 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the roulette scenario selection table 222jf.
As shown in FIG. 1982, a production scenario (scenario 1 to Scenario 8) is defined.

Specifically, when the target holding position of the look-ahead effect is 2 (special symbol variation to be executed next) and the lottery result is a big hit A50 (probability variable big win), the acquired effect counter 223f Scenario 1 is defined for the range of "0 to 49", and Scenario 2 is defined for the range of "50 to 99". In addition, when the target holding position of the look-ahead effect is H2 (special symbol variation to be executed next) and the lottery result is other than the jackpot A50 (probability variable jackpot), the value of the obtained effect counter 223f Scenario 2 is defined for the entire range of "0 to 99".
Furthermore, when the target holding position of the look-ahead effect is 3 (special symbol fluctuation executed next next) and the lottery result is a big hit (common), the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is Scenario 3 is defined for the range "0 to 69", and scenario 4 is defined for the range "70 to 99". In addition, when the target holding position of the look-ahead effect is 1 (the special symbol variation to be executed next), the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79". Scenario 6 is defined for the range 80-99”.
Then, when the target holding position of the look-ahead effect is 2 (special symbol variation to be executed next) and the lottery result is out, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 9". Scenario 7 is defined for the range of , and Scenario 8 is defined for the range of "10 to 99". In addition, when the target holding position of the look-ahead effect is 1 (the special symbol variation to be executed next), the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 4". Scenario 6 is defined for the range of 5 to 99”.
The roulette scenario "scenario 1" is a scenario in which the bear roulette effect is executed twice, and the first effect result is "continued" indicating that the second bear roulette effect is executed, and the second effect result. A production scenario is stipulated in which is "positive" indicating a probability variable jackpot winning. In other words, the effect shown in FIG. 1976 is a bear roulette effect executed based on "scenario 1".

The roulette scenario "scenario 2" is a scenario in which the bear roulette effect is executed twice, and the first effect result is "continued" indicating that the second bear roulette effect is executed, and the second effect result. A production scenario is stipulated in which is a "hit" indicating a jackpot winning.
The roulette scenario "scenario 3" is a scenario in which the bear roulette effect is executed three times. A production scenario is stipulated in which the production result is "heat" with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. That is, the effect shown in FIG. 1975(a) is a bear roulette effect when the first "continuation" is displayed based on the "scenario 3".
The roulette scenario "scenario 4" is a scenario in which the bear roulette effect is executed three times. A production scenario is stipulated in which the production result is "hit" indicating that the jackpot is won.
The roulette scenario "scenario 5" is a scenario in which the bear roulette effect is executed once, and defines a effect scenario in which the result of the first effect is "heat" with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Further, "scenario 6" defines a production scenario in which the first production result is "no" with a low expectation of winning the jackpot. Here, when scenario 6 is set, the first bear icon 8961a with no character information is stopped and displayed as the effect result.

The roulette scenario "scenario 7" is a scenario in which the bear roulette effect is executed twice, and the result of the first effect is "continued" indicating that the bear roulette effect is executed for the second time. A production scenario in which is “heat” is stipulated. The roulette scenario “scenario 8” is a scenario in which the bear roulette effect is executed twice, and the result of the first effect is “continued” indicating that the bear roulette effect is executed for the second time. is stipulated as a production scenario in which is “none”.
The roulette mode determination table 222jg is a data table referred to when determining a rendering mode corresponding to the rendering scenario determined by referring to the roulette scenario selection table 222jf, and is a data table that includes the types of bear roulette and the types of characters that appear. is defined corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f obtained. The types (effect modes) of various effects determined by referring to the roulette mode determination table 222jg are stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc, and the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc at the execution timing of the various effects. is read out, and an effect mode corresponding to the read out information is set.
Here, with reference to FIG. 1983, the contents defined in the roulette mode determination table 222jg will be described. FIG. 1983 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the roulette mode determination table 222jg.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1979, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. A21(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. A1(b), the RAM 223 in the fifty-sixth control example has a character prefetch execution counter 223jh and a The difference is that a flag 223jj, a character mode storage area 223jk, and a roulette effect execution flag 223jl are added. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The character prefetch execution in-progress counter 223jh is a counter for indicating that the character prefetch effect is being executed. A value corresponding to the figure fluctuation count) is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the value when a new variation effect (special figure variation) is started while the value of the character prefetch execution counter 223jh is greater than 1, the target variation effect of the character prefetch effect is executed. In this case, the character prefetch counter 223jh is set to 1 without fail.
With this configuration, by referring to the value of the character prefetch execution counter 223jh, it is determined whether or not the character prefetch effect is being executed, and whether or not the target change effect in the character prefetch effect is being executed. It is possible to determine whether
The flag 223jj during special variation effect is a flag for indicating that a special condition has been established during the character look-ahead effect, and is set to ON when the special condition is established. In the fifty-sixth control example, a new special figure suspension is acquired during the execution of the character prefetch effect (fake effect) in which the performance result is a failure, and the special figure suspension corresponds to the jackpot winning (hit suspension). (when a special condition is established), the effect period of the character prefetch effect can be extended so that the variable effect corresponding to the winning suspension becomes the target variable effect.
Then, when the effect period of the character prefetch effect is extended, a special effect is performed in which the character 8591 displayed in the character prefetch effect is displayed in a special display mode (a deep sleep mode) until the target change effect is executed. configured to run. When this special effect is executed, the flag 223jj during special variation effect is set to ON. The setting status of the flag 223jj under special variable effect is referred to when determining execution of the prefetch effect, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, other prefetch effect is not executed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of other look-ahead performance during the period in which the special variation performance indicating the existence of the winning suspension is being executed.

The character mode storage area 223jk temporarily stores information for indicating the character mode determined as the effect mode of the character prefetch effect and information for indicating the character mode determined during the prefetch period of the character prefetch effect. It is a storage area for This character mode storage area 223jc stores information (character mode information) for indicating the changed character mode when the mode of the character 8591 changes as a character prefetch effect executed during the prefetch period. Then, the stored character mode information is read when determining the effect mode of the object variation effect, and the effect mode of the object change effect is determined according to the read character mode information.
Here, the character look-ahead effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example is displayed in a state where the character 8591 is awake at the start of the effect, and during the look-ahead period until the target change effect starts, It is configured to change the mode of the character 8591 according to the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the look-ahead period. Then, the effect mode of the object change effect is determined based on the mode of the character 8591 displayed at the timing when the object change effect is started.
Specifically, when the character 8591 is asleep at the timing when the target variation effect is started, the effect of executing a specific action after at least the effect of waking up the dozing character 8591 is executed. When the character 8591 is awake at the timing at which the mode is determined and the target variation performance is started, the performance mode for executing a specific action without executing the performance for waking up the character 8591 can be determined. ing.
By configuring in this way, even if the effect result of the target variation effect is the same (the timing of executing the specific action is the same), different effects are produced according to the aspect of the character 8591 at the start timing of the target variation effect. Since the mode can be determined, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of the character prefetch rendering.

In addition, regardless of the effect result of the target variable effect, it is possible to change the state of the character 8591 at the start timing of the target variable effect based on the effect mode of the variable effect executed during the look-ahead period. It is possible to facilitate the execution of a performance whose performance result is difficult to predict.
In the fifty-sixth control example, when the character prefetch effect is executed, the awakened character 8591 is displayed. A character 8591 that has already fallen asleep may be configured to be displayed.
In addition, in the character prefetch effect in the fifty-sixth control example, regardless of the effect result of the target change effect (the result of the prefetched special symbol lottery), it is possible to randomly determine the state of the character at the time when the target change effect is started. However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to set a mode that is easily determined as the mode of the character at the time when the target variation performance is started, based on the performance result of the target variation performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the effect result of the current character look-ahead effect based on the state of the character 8591 at the time when the target change effect is started.
The roulette effect in-execution flag 223jl is a flag for indicating that the bear roulette effect is being executed as the look-ahead effect, and is set to ON when the bear roulette effect is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the bear roulette effect ends. The setting status of the roulette effect in-execution flag 223jl is referred to when determining execution of a new look-ahead effect, and while the roulette effect in-execution flag 223jl is set to ON, other look-ahead effects are not executed. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the provision of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand due to the execution of another look-ahead effect during the period in which the predetermined look-ahead effect is being executed. can.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the fifty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1984 to 1989, the processing contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-seventh control example in that a part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed. are different. Specifically, a control process for setting a prefetch effect to be executed based on a determination result (preliminary determination result) obtained by determining information included in a winning command (winning information command) output from the main controller 110; The difference is that the control processing for executing the read-ahead effect is different. Other control processing contents are the same, and the description of the same contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 1984, the contents of the look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ha) will be described. FIG. 1984 is a flow chart showing the contents of the look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ha). This look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ha) is similar to the look-ahead effect setting process (see S4504H in FIG. 1787) of the forty-seventh control example described above, and is a winning command process executed when a winning command is received from main controller 110. (See S4202H in FIG. 1786), which is the control process executed to determine execution of the look-ahead effect.
As shown in FIG. 1984, the look-ahead effect setting process (S4504Ha) is different from the look-ahead effect setting process (see S4504H in FIG. 1786) in the forty-seventh control example described above. The difference is that a process for executing a look-ahead effect of a different effect mode is added, and otherwise the same process is executed. The same processing is given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.
When the prefetching effect setting process (S4504Ha) is executed, first, the prefetching management process is executed (S4551Ha), and then it is determined whether the prefetching effect can be executed at present (S4552Ha). In the processing of S4552Ha, based on the processing result of the look-ahead management processing (S4551Ha), it is determined whether or not it is possible to determine the execution of a new look-ahead effect, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command obtained this time is executed. Before the game is executed, a process of discriminating that the execution of a new look-ahead performance cannot be determined because the special symbol variation indicating the winning of the jackpot is executed is performed.

In the process of S4552Ha, if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not executable (S4552Ha: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4552Ha, if it is determined that the look-ahead effect can be executed (S4552Ha: Yes), based on the winning command received this time, whether to execute the look-ahead effect and the type of look-ahead effect to be executed are determined. Execute the process for
In addition, in the fifty-sixth control example, similarly to the forty-seventh control example described above, a variation pattern (winning prize information) is extracted from the information included in the received prize winning command, and whether or not to execute the prefetching effect and the type of the prefetching effect are determined. However, without being limited to this, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special figure reservation already acquired and the special symbol corresponding to the winning command (special figure reservation) received this time It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the type based on the variation pattern of the variation.
In this case, for example, the winning command received this time corresponds to the third special figure reservation (third special figure reservation), and the winning information (variation pattern) included in the winning command received this time If the winning information allows the execution of, based on the winning information included in each of the two special reserves that have already been acquired (first special reserve, second special reserve), each special reserve Specify the corresponding variation pattern (variation time), the process of calculating the total variation time by adding the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the second special figure reservation After that, determine whether the length of the total fluctuation time is longer than the look-ahead effect upper limit time, and if it is determined that it is longer than the look-ahead effect upper limit time, the first special figure hold, the second special figure hold If the prefetch effect is delayed when the prefetch effect is executed, the process of determining non-execution of the prefetch effect is executed, and when it is determined that the length of the total fluctuation time is shorter than the upper limit time of the prefetch effect. , the processing for determining the execution of the look-ahead effect may be performed. Furthermore, if it is determined that the length of the total variation time is longer than the look-ahead upper limit time, then the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the second special figure reservation, that is, the special that is the target variation of the look-ahead effect Only the variation time of the special symbol variation executed before the symbol variation may be subjected to the same processing as described above.
In addition, the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed may be determined according to the length of the variation time of the total variation time. When executing the look-ahead effect using a plurality of special symbol variations (look-ahead variation), when the fluctuation time of each special symbol variation that becomes the look-ahead variation satisfies the first condition, the look-ahead effect of the first type is performed. It is preferable to configure so as to execute the second type of look-ahead effect when executing and satisfying a second condition different from the first condition. Specifically, the first condition is established when the fluctuation time of each special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the step information is updated at the timing when each special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. When the production (step-up production) is executed and there is a large difference in the fluctuation time of each special symbol fluctuation (for example, the first fluctuation is 5 seconds and the second fluctuation is 30 seconds), the second condition is established, A look-ahead effect (a look-ahead zone effect) in which the same display mode (background image) is displayed over a variation time (35 seconds) during which two special pattern variations are executed may be executed.

By configuring in this way, since the performance mode of the look-ahead performance can be determined according to the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation in the look-ahead variation period in which the look-ahead performance is executed, it is easy to provide a performance that is easy for the player to understand. can do. Further, when the total fluctuation time of the look-ahead effect is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the look-ahead effect may be executed as a change effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Instead, it is preferable to execute only the pending change effect for changing the display mode of the pending symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, even if the execution period (total fluctuation time) of the look-ahead effect is short, the look-ahead effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.
Returning to FIG. 1984, the description continues. In the process of S4552Ha, if it is determined that the look-ahead effect can be executed (S4552Ha: Yes), next, S4551H to S4563H, which are the same as the look-ahead effect setting process of the 47th control example (see S4504H in FIG. 1787) , and terminate this process. Also, in the process of S4561H, if it is determined that the type of prefetch effect to be executed this time is not the pending change effect (S4561H: No), then the second prefetch effect setting process (S4553Ha) is executed, After that, other processing is executed (S4563H), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1985, the contents of the prefetch management process (S4551Ha) executed in the prefetch effect setting process (see S4504Ha in FIG. 1984) will be described. FIG. 1985 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prefetch management process (S4551Ha). In this look-ahead management processing (S4551Ha), the type of look-ahead effect being executed is determined, and processing corresponding to the type of look-ahead effect being executed is executed.
Specifically, when the lookahead management process (S4551Ha) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lookahead effect execution flag 223jd is set to ON (S4561Ha), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, In other words, if the look-ahead effect is not being executed (S4561Ha: No), this process is terminated.

In the processing of S4561Ha, if it is determined that the execution flag 223jd during prefetching effect is set to ON (S4561Ha: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the character prefetching execution counter 223jh is greater than 0 (S4562Ha), If it is determined that the value of the character prefetch execution counter 223jh is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4562Ha: No), then it is determined whether the roulette effect execution flag 223jl is set to ON ( S4563Ha), if it is determined that the roulette effect execution flag 223jl is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the roulette effect is currently not being executed as a look-ahead effect (S4563Ha), this processing is terminated as it is. .
On the other hand, in the processing of S4562Ha, if it is determined that the value of the character prefetching execution counter 223jh is greater than 0 (S4562Ha: Yes), next, whether the winning information received this time is winning information indicating a probability variable jackpot winning. is determined (S4564), and if it is determined that it is winning information indicating a probability variable jackpot winning (S4564: Yes), the target variation of the character prefetch effect being executed is changed to a special symbol variation corresponding to the winning command received this time , and the processing for switching the effect mode of the character prefetch effect. Then (S4565Ha), the flag 223jj during special effect is set to ON (S4566Ha), the effect mode corresponding to the special effect is stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc (S4567Ha), and the character being displayed (the third symbol display device 81 A display command is set to change the display mode of the character 8591) displayed in the main display area Dm to a special mode (a display mode in which the character 8591 is fast asleep on a futon) (S4568Ha), and a new look-ahead effect is executed. Prohibition is determined (S4569Ha), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4564Ha, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is not the winning information indicating the probability variable jackpot winning (S4564Ha: No), the processing of S4565Ha to S4568Ha is skipped and the processing of S4569Ha is executed. End the process. Further, in the processing of S4563Ha, if it is determined that the roulette effect execution flag 223jl is set to OFF (S4563Ha: Yes), the state in which it is determined that the roulette effect will be executed as the prefetch effect (executed state), the process of S4569Ha is executed, and this process ends.
As described above, in the fifty-sixth control example, during the period in which the character look-ahead effect is being executed (during the period in which the character 8591 is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81), the probability variable jackpot If you get a special drawing reservation (winning information) corresponding to the winning, regardless of the result of the character look-ahead effect being executed, the special pattern change corresponding to the probability variable jackpot winning will be the target change of the character look-ahead effect being executed. It is constructed so as to execute a special performance indicating that the special symbol variation corresponding to the probability variable jackpot winning has become the target variation.

By constructing in this way, when the character look-ahead effect is switched to the special effect in the middle, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the probability variable jackpot will be won. In addition, since this special effect is configured to continue until the special symbol variation for winning the probability variable jackpot is executed, When the special effect is executed, the character 8591 in the special mode continues to be displayed even when the display mode indicating that the special pattern variation, which was the target variation of the character prefetching effect, indicates the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed. , until the jackpot game ends and the probability variable jackpot variation, which is the target variation of the character look-ahead effect of the special effect, is started, the effect of displaying the character 8591 in the special mode is executed.
Therefore, if the character look-ahead effect changes to a special effect in the middle, by winning the jackpot while the special effect continues, it will be possible to win the jackpot twice or more. When the performance is executed, the game can be played while expecting the special symbols to be stop-displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot before the special performance is finished.
It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, the special effect may be executed only during the character look-ahead effect in which the effect result is lost. In this case, before executing the processing of S4564Ha in the lookahead management processing (S4551Ha in FIG. The processing of S4564Ha may be configured to be executed when it is determined in the processing that the effect result indicates a failure. By configuring in this way, the number of times of the big win game executed during the performance period of one character prefetching performance can be fixed to one, so that the player can be provided with an easily understandable performance. In addition, when the character prefetching effect is switched to the special effect on the way, the player is made aware that the previously executed character prefetching effect was the prefetching effect indicating the failure, in addition to winning the probability variable jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect when the special performance is executed.
Furthermore, in the fifty-sixth control example, the determination of switching to the special effect is executed under the same conditions while the character prefetch effect is being executed. According to the value of the counter 223jh and the number of times of the special symbol lottery already executed during the character prefetching performance, the execution ratio of the special performance in the case of acquiring the special symbol reservation corresponding to the probability variable jackpot winning is made different. It is also good, for example, when the value of the character prefetching counter 223jh is small (eg, 1) than when the value is large (eg, 3), it is special when the special figure reservation corresponding to the probability variable jackpot winning is obtained. It is preferable to configure so as to facilitate the execution of the production. By configuring in this way, it is easier to execute the special effect when the elapsed period after the character prefetch effect is executed is longer than when the elapsed time is short. Players can expect to be executed.

In addition, in the fifty-sixth control example, in the state where the character prefetch effect is being executed, if a special figure reservation corresponding to the probability variable jackpot winning is obtained (when a winning command having prize information indicating the probability variable jackpot winning is received) It is configured to extend the effect period of the character prefetch effect only (to switch the special pattern change that is the subject change of the character prefetch effect), but without being limited to this, the special figure acquired during the character prefetch effect is reserved. When the number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect period of the character prefetch effect may be extended. It may be configured so as to extend the effect period of the character prefetch effect when the character prefetch effect is present.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1986, the processing contents of the second look-ahead effect setting processing (S4553Ha) will be described. FIG. 1986 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second look-ahead effect setting process (S4553Ha). This second look-ahead effect setting process (S4553Ha) is a process executed in the above-described look-ahead effect setting process (see S4551Ha in FIG. 1984). If it is an effect, a process for determining the effect mode is executed.
Specifically, when the second prefetch effect setting process (S4553Ha) is executed, first, it is determined whether the type of prefetch effect this time is character prefetch effect (S4571Ha), and it is determined that it is character prefetch effect. If so (S4571Ha: Yes), the value corresponding to the target winning prize information is set to the value of the character prefetch execution counter 223jh (S4572Ha), and the display mode of the pending pattern corresponding to the target winning prize information is set to the character mode. A command for display is set (S4573Ha), the prefetch effect executing flag 223jd is set to ON (S4574Ha), and this process is terminated.
Here, the display command set by the processing of S4573Ha is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as various display commands set by other processing, and based on the reception by the display control device 114 , The display mode corresponding to the character 8591 (the display mode of the fourth special symbol suspension hr4 in FIG. 1966(a)) is displayed as the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. . By configuring in this way, when the character look-ahead effect is executed, it is possible to inform the player of the special figure suspension that becomes the target change in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the fifty-sixth control example, the type of the character 8591 displayed on the display screen as the character prefetch effect is one type, and the display mode of the reserved pattern is also one type imitating the character 8591. However, without being limited to this, the type of the character displayed on the display screen during the character prefetching effect can be determined from a plurality of types, and , the display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the target change of the character look-ahead effect may also be configured to be selectable from a plurality of types so as to correspond to a plurality of character types. In this case, the display mode of the character 8591, It may be configured such that the player can predict the effect result of the character look-ahead effect according to the display mode of the reserved symbol.
Specifically, the first character (rabbit), the second character (turtle), and the third character (brave) can be displayed as the types of characters 8591 to be displayed during the character prefetch effect. The second character is more likely to be determined as the performance mode of the character look-ahead performance corresponding to the winning of the jackpot, and the third character is more likely to be determined than the second character, and basically, The display mode of the reserved pattern is determined in the display mode corresponding to the determined display mode of the character 8591, but when the first character (rabbit) is determined as the type of the character 8591, the first character (rabbit) If the reserved pattern is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a character other than the character, the expectation of winning the jackpot will increase significantly, and if the second character (turtle) is decided, the third character (brave) will be selected. The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is greatly increased only when the reserved pattern is displayed in the corresponding display mode, and when the third character (brave) is determined, when the reserved pattern is displayed in any display mode. should be configured to have the same degree of expectation.
By constructing in this way, the player can easily grasp the reserved pattern that becomes the target change of the character prefetching performance, and the performance result is predicted to the player before the performance result of the character prefetching performance is displayed. It can provide fun to let you.
Returning to FIG. 1986, the description continues. In the processing of S4571Ha, if it is determined that the prefetch effect to be executed this time is not the character prefetch effect (S4571Ha: No), then it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect to be executed this time is the roulette effect (S4575Ha), When the roulette effect is determined (S4575Ha: Yes), the roulette scenario selection table 222jf is referred to determine the roulette effect effect scenario (S4576Ha), and then the effect scenario determined by the process of S4576Ha is used. , the roulette mode determination table 222jg is referred to determine the performance mode (roulette mode) of the roulette performance (S4577Ha), the determined performance mode (roulette mode) is stored in the performance mode storage area 223jc (S4578Ha), and the roulette performance is executed. The middle flag 223jl is set to ON (S4579Ha), the look-ahead effect executing flag 223jd is set to ON (S4580Ha), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1987, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014Ha) will be described. FIG. 1987 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S5014Ha). This variable effect setting process (S5014Ha), similar to the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) in the above-described 47th control example, changes the effect mode of the variable effect executed in correspondence with the execution of the special symbol change. A process for setting, and for setting the above-described fluctuation production setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792), processing for setting the production mode of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation executed during the look-ahead production is described in detail, and other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.
Specifically, when the variable effect setting process (S5014Ha) is executed, first, it is determined whether the prefetch effect executing flag 223jd is set to ON (S5101Ha), and if it is set to ON, that is, If it is determined that any of the look-ahead effects are currently being executed (S5101Ha: Yes), the variable effect setting process for the look-ahead effect is executed (S5102Ha), and then the variable effect setting of the 47th control example described above. The same processing of S5116H and S5117H as the processing (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) is executed, and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S5101Ha, if it is determined that the flag 223jd during execution of the prefetch effect is not ON (is OFF) (S5101Ha: No), S5106H to S5117H same as the variable effect setting process (see S5014H in FIG. 1792) , and terminate this process.
Here, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process for look-ahead effect (S5102Ha) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1988 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process for look-ahead effect (S5102Ha). In the variable effect setting process for the look-ahead effect (S5102Ha), the process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation executed while the character look-ahead effect is being executed and the roulette effect are executed. A process for determining the performance mode of the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the process is executed.

In the fifty-sixth control example, it is stipulated as an execution condition of the look-ahead effect that the special symbol variation indicating the jackpot winning is not executed before the special symbol variation, which is the target variation of the look-ahead effect, is executed. All the special symbol variations executed during the look-ahead effect are outlier variations. Therefore, the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the look-ahead production is a display showing the production contents of the look-ahead production rather than the display form showing the result of the special symbol variation (the result of the special symbol lottery). The mode is configured to set an effect mode that is easier for the player to visually recognize. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode indicating that the look-ahead effect is being executed rather than the display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, so that it is possible to indicate the loss. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being lowered due to frequent display of the display mode.
It should be noted that the display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the look-ahead effect is out may be a display mode that cannot be displayed when the look-ahead effect is not being executed. As a display mode for showing that the result of the executed special symbol lottery is a loss, a display mode during prefetching in which a part of the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot is changed (for example, the third symbol is displayed as "334". display mode) can be set.
By constructing in this way, the display mode indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is lost (not winning the jackpot) can be used as the notification mode for notifying that the look-ahead performance is being performed. Further, in this case, after the display mode during prefetching is displayed as a display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the prefetching effect is lost, the characters "prefetching chance" are displayed on the display screen. good. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the pre-reading effect is currently being performed.
As shown in FIG. 1988, when the prefetching effect variable effect setting process (S5102Ha) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the character prefetching execution counter 223jh is greater than 0 (S5151Ha), and character prefetching is being executed. When it is determined that the value of the counter 223jh is greater than 0 (S5151Ha: Yes), next, is the value of the character prefetch execution counter 223jh 1? (S5152Ha), and if it is determined that it is not 1 (2 or more) (S5152Ha: No), the effect mode corresponding to the special symbol variation (prefetch variation) that is not the target variation of the look-ahead effect A look-ahead effect mode setting process for setting is executed (S5153Ha), and this process ends.

This look-ahead effect mode setting process (S5153Ha) is a process for setting the effect mode corresponding to the look-ahead variation of the character look-ahead effect. Whether or not there is an effect for changing the mode of the character 8591 to be displayed is determined. The detailed content of the variable effect setting process for this look-ahead effect (S5102Ha) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of S5152Ha, if it is determined that the value of the character prefetching execution counter 223jh is 1, that is, if it is determined that the current special pattern variation is the target variation for the character prefetching effect (S5152Ha: Yes), the following Then, it is determined whether the flag 223jj during special variation effect is set to ON (S5154Ha), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5154Ha: No), the character Mode, that is, information for indicating the display mode of the character 8591 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is read (S5155Ha), and the read character mode and the character mode selection table 222jd are referred to. to determine the production mode of the current fluctuation production (object fluctuation) (S5156Ha).
In the process of S5156Ha, the effect result of the character prefetch effect (at what timing the character 8591 roars) is determined, and the display mode (character mode) of the character 8591 displayed at the start of the target change is determined. The change contents of the character mode until the character 8591 roars are determined.
In the fifty-sixth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 1980, even if the effect result of the character prefetch effect is the same, the display mode of the character 8591 ( Character mode) is different, a different effect mode is determined as the variable effect of the target change.

A character 8591 is displayed according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (prefetching variation) executed during the period from the execution of the character prefetching effect to the execution of the target variation of the character prefetching effect (prefetching period). The aspect (character aspect) is configured to be changeable.
In other words, when the character prefetch effect is executed, the effect result is determined based on the variation pattern of the target change (the result of the special symbol lottery), but the effect content during the prefetch period (change content of the character mode) Is configured to be determined according to the production contents of the fluctuation production (prefetch fluctuation production) executed during the look-ahead period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the target fluctuation (the result of the special symbol lottery), and the target of the look-ahead production When determining the effect mode corresponding to the variation, the effect mode is determined according to the current display mode (character mode) of the character 8591 and the effect result of the look-ahead effect.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect mode executed as the look-ahead effect, so it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. In addition, depending on the effect mode (change contents of the character mode) executed during the prefetch period, the effect result of the prefetch effect will be grasped by the player before the target change of the prefetch effect is executed. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player interested until the effect result of the prefetch effect to be executed is displayed.
After the processing of S5156Ha is finished, next, the sound type selection table 222je is referred to determine the sound type of the target variation (S5157Ha), and the sound command for outputting the sound corresponding to the determined sound type is set. (S5158Ha), the value of the character prefetch execution counter 223jh is set to 0 (S5159Ha), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S5157Ha, the type of voice regarding the variation display of the third symbol in the target variation is determined, and the determined type of voice is output. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example has, as a type of sound, a type corresponding to whether or not the display mode (character mode) of the character 8591 displayed during the character prefetch effect is changed. A sound type (normal) that can wake up the sleeping character 8591, a sound type that does not wake up the dozing character 8591 (mute), a sound type that stuns the awake character 8591 (impact sound), The type of sound (lullaby) that causes the character 8591 who is awake to fall asleep can be determined, and the type of sound corresponding to the effect mode of the character prefetch effect to be executed is output as the sound related to the variable display of the third symbol. It is configured as follows.
By configuring in this way, the variable display content of the third pattern and the display mode (character mode) of the character 8591 can be related, so that the variable effect executed as the target change of the character prefetch effect It is possible to make it easy to understand the contents of the production.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 1981, the variation start sound output corresponding to the variation display of the third symbol voice) and reach sound (sound output at the timing of reach state) can be determined according to the presence or absence of change in character mode, but there are other voice types may also be configured so that the type of sound corresponding to whether or not the character mode has changed can be determined. For the pseudo-fluctuation start sound that is output when restarting the third symbol that is being played, the sound type corresponding to the presence or absence of a change in the character mode may be determined.
In addition, the operation sound output based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the fluctuation period of the special pattern fluctuation (prefetch fluctuation) executed during the prefetch period is made to correspond to the presence or absence of the character mode change. It may be configured such that the voice type can be determined. In this case, an operation effect for the player to operate the frame button 22 is executed as a variable effect of the look-ahead change, and the character mode is changed by the player operating the frame button 22 according to the operation effect. . Therefore, when the operation effect is executed as the change effect of the look-ahead change, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 according to the mode (character mode) of the character 8591 being displayed. .

In addition, in the fifty-sixth control example, the state change of the character 8591 during the look-ahead period can be determined regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the target change, but the look-ahead effect is not limited to this. is a performance result indicating that a jackpot is won, and if a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is met when a specific operation is performed on the frame button 22) is satisfied during the look-ahead period, the look-ahead period It may be possible to notify in advance of winning a jackpot by using a change in the character 8591 in the inside.
With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player that there is an operation method capable of establishing a predetermined condition. If the frame button 22 is pressed at the right timing, the effect result may be known first." is preferably displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp in an easy-to-understand manner that there is a method for quickly grasping the effect result of the character prefetch effect.
Further, in the processing of S5151Ha, if it is determined that the value of the character prefetch execution counter 223jh is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5151Ha: No), then the roulette effect execution flag 223jl is set to ON. (S5161Ha), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5161Ha: Yes), the effect information stored in the effect mode storage area 223jc, that is, the second look-ahead effect setting process (Fig. Based on the effect information stored in the process of S4578Ha of 1986 (see S4553Ha of 1986), the effect mode corresponding to the variable effect to be executed this time is determined (S6162Ha), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5161Ha, when it is determined that the roulette effect execution flag 223jl is not set to ON (S5161Ha: No), this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1989, the contents of the look-ahead effect mode setting process (S5153Ha) will be described. FIG. 1989 is a flow chart showing the contents of the look-ahead rendering mode setting process (S5153Ha). In this look-ahead effect mode setting process (S5153Ha), a process for determining an effect mode for changing the mode of the character 8591 corresponding to the variable effect executed during the look-ahead period of the character look-ahead effect is executed.

When the look-ahead effect mode setting process (S5153Ha) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special variation effect flag 223jj is set to ON (S5171Ha), and if it is determined to be ON, that is, If it is determined that the special effect is being executed as the character prefetch effect (S5171Ha: Yes), the effect mode for continuously displaying the special mode "Burning Sleep" is determined as the display mode of the character 8591 (S5172Ha), and this processing is performed. exit.
In addition, in the processing of S5171Ha, if it is determined that the flag 223jj during the special variation effect is not set to ON (S5171Ha: No), since the normal character prefetch effect is being executed, the current variation effect A process for determining the aspect (character aspect) of character 8591 is executed corresponding to .
Specifically, the character mode stored in the character mode storage area 223jc is read out (S5173Ha), and it is determined whether the read character mode is dozing off (S5174Ha). When it is determined (S5174Ha: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern of this special symbol variation is reach variation (S5175Ha), and when it is determined that it is not reach variation (S5175Ha: No), it is executed this time. Since the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the character 8591 is awake during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change, the character prefetch effect is prevented from being delayed. Execution of an effect for making 8591 fall asleep is decided by lottery (S5176Ha), and it is determined whether execution of the doze effect is decided (S5177Ha).
In the processing of S5177Ha, if it is determined that execution of the dozing effect has been determined (S5177Ha: Yes), the effect mode of causing the character 8591 to fall asleep is determined (S5178Ha), and information corresponding to the character mode after execution of the variable effect is sent to the character. Store in mode storage area 223jc (S5179Ha), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5175Ha, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the reach variation (S5175Ha: Yes), the reach effect is executed as the variation effect, so the player is unlikely to get tired of the variation effect. Therefore, this processing is terminated without executing the effect of changing the aspect (character aspect) of the character 8591 .

In addition, in the fifty-sixth control example, as described above, when the ready-to-win effect is executed as the change effect of the look-ahead change, the state of the character 8591 is configured not to change. For example, it may be configured to change the ready-to-win effect to a more exciting mode. By configuring in this way, using the character 8591 displayed as the character prefetch effect, it is possible to execute the variation effect of the special symbol variation which is executed before the target change of the character prefetch effect is executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.
Also, in the processing of S5174Ha, if it is determined that the current character mode is dozing off (S5174Ha: Yes), it is determined whether the current variation pattern is reach variation (S5180Ha), and it is determined that it is reach variation. If so (S5180Ha: Yes), the reach sound to be output when reaching the reach state is determined by lottery (S5181Ha), the voice command corresponding to the determined reach sound is set (S5182Ha), and the above-described S5179Ha is performed. Execute the process and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5180Ha, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the reach variation (S5180Ha: No), there is no timing to wake up the dozing character 8591, so this processing ends.
<Regarding the Effect Modification of the 50th Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1990 to 1992, an effect modification example of the fiftieth control example in the pachinko machine 10 in the fiftieth control example described above will be described. FIG. 1990 shows, as the operation effects executed in the fiftieth control example described above, the first operation effect for executing an action action on the symbols displayed in the ready-to-win state, and the light emission mode of the light-emitting accessory Cr1. A variable second operation effect is configured to be executable, and a modification of the combination effect in which the effect mode of the first operation effect and the effect mode of the second operation effect are combined is shown.
In the fiftieth control example described above, the above-described first operation effect and second operation effect are performed as operation effects for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery being executed based on the operation of the first frame button 22. The player is made to predict the result of the special symbol lottery being executed according to the effect mode of each operation effect.

However, even if each operation effect is executed in any effect mode, if the special symbol variation being executed stops, the effect mode will be cleared. There was a problem that the performance could not be enjoyed.
On the other hand, in this production modification, the production mode (light emission mode) of the light-emitting accessory Cr1 is configured to be able to be used as a look-ahead performance for indicating the lottery result of the next special symbol variation. FIG. 1990(a) is a diagram showing a display screen for an operation effect during reach fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 1990(a), when the operation effect is executed, as in the fiftieth control example described above, according to the operation to the frame button 22, the display mode of the third pattern and the decoration role The light emission mode of the light-emitting character Cr1 of the entity SY is varied.
Points a, b, and c are written on this decorative accessory SY. It is configured to be able to notify that "SP reach performance" and "big hit high probability reach (full rotation reach)" are executed when changing to point a. In the display area Dm, the words "Chance if the character gauge remains even if you lose" are displayed.
Then, when the next variable effect is started after the variable effect shown in FIG. The display screen shown is displayed. FIG. 1990(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the variation effect displayed in the next variation in which the ready-to-win effect in which the operation effect is executed is lost.

As shown in FIG. 1990(b), when the effect mode of the light-emitting accessory Cr1 continues from the previous variable effect, guidance display corresponding to the effect mode of the light-emitting accessory Cr1 maintained on the display screen is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 1990(b), since the light-emitting role Cr1 is in a state where it is variable up to the point b, the display screen displays the characters "SP reach confirmed" and "By pushing the button, it may be fully rotated." is displayed.
By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to change a plurality of performance modes for one operation on the frame button 22, at least a part of the plurality of performance modes can be changed as follows. Since it can be used for production, the production effect can be enhanced.
Also, if the production content suggested by the operation production (the production content notified by the production mode of the light-emitting accessory Cr1) and the production content of the variation production actually executed are different, the next variation It is possible to make the player grasp in advance that the variable production will be executed with the production content suggested by the operation production (the production content notified by the production mode of the light-emitting role Cr1).
Furthermore, since the operation effect for varying the effect mode of the light-emitting role Cr1 can be executed over a plurality of variable effects, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player is allowed to operate the operation means. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1991 and 1992, the content of the pending symbol retry chance effect performed in the fiftieth control example described above will be described in detail. After the display screen shown in FIG. 1844(a) is displayed, when the jackpot game is executed, the pending symbols are hidden as shown in FIG. A mode (3 in the drawing) is displayed in the display area Dm61. In addition, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm61 is variably (increased) displayed corresponding to the special figure reservation (reserved design) obtained during the jackpot game.
Then, when the jackpot game ends, a special symbol lottery using the acquired special symbol reservation is executed, and the display screen shown in FIG. 1991(b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 1991(b), immediately after the variable effect is executed, the value displayed in the display area Dm61 is subtracted from the value displayed in the display area Dm61 for the special symbol lottery used for this special symbol lottery. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1992, the reserved symbols are displayed in accordance with the subtraction display of the display mode displayed in the display area Dm61.
By configuring in this way, even when the reserved symbols are hidden during the big winning game, it is possible to easily grasp the number of reserved special symbols during the big winning game. In addition, it is possible to easily grasp that a new special figure reservation has been obtained during the jackpot game. In this production example, the reserved symbol retry chance is configured to be executed across the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this, and may be executed when the production mode is switched, After the reserved design is temporarily hidden by the ready-to-win effect, it may be configured to be executed when the reserved design is displayed again.
<Regarding another example of effect in each control example>
Next, another example of effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 1993 and 1994. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this another example of performance is configured to be able to set a performance mode based on a look-ahead result for the reserved special figure that has already been acquired, and based on the set performance mode, the content of the next game is predicted to the player. It is configured so that it can be

Specifically, as a look-ahead result for the special figure reservation that has already been acquired, the game situation that has not acquired the special figure reservation corresponding to the jackpot winning, or the game situation that has acquired the special figure reservation corresponding to the probability variable jackpot winning That is, in part when it is determined that it is not a gaming situation where the variable probability state ends (a gaming situation where the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends due to the normal jackpot winning), the "approach mode" is used as the production mode. (see FIG. 1993(a)) can be set.
In other words, when the "approach mode" is set as the production mode, it is easy for the player to understand that the game situation is that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game and the special figure reservation corresponding to the normal jackpot is not acquired. It is configured so that it can be grasped by By configuring in this way, the variable probability state is terminated in the pachinko machine 10 (so-called variable probability loop machine) having a game property in which the game state (variable probability state) in which it is easy to win the big win continues until the next big win is won. A player can be entertained with a variable performance for showing the result of a special symbol lottery without worrying about the.
Furthermore, as a result of the prefetching of the acquired special figure reservation, in part of the game situation in which the special figure reservation corresponding to the jackpot winning is acquired, the "super close mode" (see Fig. 1993 (b)) is used as the production mode. Configured to be configurable. In other words, when the "super close mode" is set, the player can easily grasp that the game situation is that the special figure reservation corresponding to either the normal jackpot winning or the probability variable jackpot winning is obtained. is configured to be possible. By configuring in this way, when the "super close mode" is set, the player does not care whether or not the variable performance indicating the winning of the jackpot is executed, but the variable display is performed as the variable performance. Of the 3 patterns, the type of the 3rd pattern that is first stopped and displayed will be focused on whether it is a type (probability variation pattern) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot winning, so "super close mode" is set. It is possible to make the gazing point of the variable effect to be executed different between when there is and when it is not set.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the performance content of the variable performance only at a specific point (specific timing), thereby reducing the performance effect.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this example of effect is configured so that the player can predict the type of winning jackpot pending according to the timing at which the "super close mode" is set. Specifically, regardless of the acquisition timing of the pending jackpot, when the "super close mode" is set at the timing when the special symbol variation is started, only the fact that the pending jackpot is obtained is notified, When the "close mode" shifts to the "super close mode", it is configured to be able to notify that the probability variable jackpot hold is obtained (see Fig. 1994). The timing at which the new production mode is set is not limited to this, and the new production mode may be set at various timings. For example, the "very close mode" may be set when a first period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the "close mode" was set, or a second period ( For example, the configuration may be such that the "super close mode" is set when 60 seconds have elapsed. In this case, when the first period is set, the period of the "approach mode" is relatively short. mode" was set. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue to pay attention to the performance contents of the variable performance to be executed. Also, when the second period is set, the condition for shifting to the "super close mode" is established only when the effect period of the variable effect in which the "close mode" is set is long. , the player can play the game while expecting that the special symbol variation with a long variation time is executed.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example of production, it is possible to shift to the "super close mode" from either the state in which the "close mode" is set or the normal production state in which the "close mode" is not set. , and is configured so that the "super close mode" is set in the same effect mode regardless of the transition process. In other words, when the "super close mode" is set, the player is prevented from knowing what the performance mode was before the "super close mode" was set. That is, according to the timing from the start of the variable effect to the setting of the "super close mode", the benefits given to the player by setting the "super close mode" are advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the player can predict whether it is a special benefit or a special benefit other than that.
By constructing in this way, the player other than the player who is playing the game can grasp whether the "approach mode" is shifted to the "super close mode" or whether the normal performance state is transferred to the "super close mode". can be made difficult. That is, according to this modification, the first mode (approach mode) and the second mode (super close mode) can be set as the effect modes that can be executed during the variable effect. Different benefits can be given to the player according to the type of presentation mode to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the type of effect mode to be set. Furthermore, in this production modification, when the first mode (approach mode) is set, as the first privilege given to the player, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot privilege (probability variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player ) is provided, and when the second mode (super close mode) is set, the player is notified that the jackpot will be won as the second privilege given to the player. . The second mode can be set from the state in which the first mode is set, so that the player can understand that the probability variable jackpot will be won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in which type of effect mode is set, but also in the process of setting the effect mode. In addition, in this production modification, when the second mode (super close mode) is set, the same production screen is displayed regardless of the setting process, so the production in the second mode A player who only sees the screen cannot determine the kind of jackpot to be won, but grasps whether or not the second mode is set from the state in which the first mode (approach mode) is set. The player can easily predict whether or not the next jackpot to be won is the variable probability jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily watch the variable performance for a long time. In addition, without being limited to this, the configuration may be such that the player can grasp the setting process by the display mode of the display screen displayed when the second mode (super close mode) is set. . With this configuration, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the next jackpot to be won is a probability variable jackpot just by grasping the performance contents (display mode) in the super-close mode, so that the player can easily predict. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation. Also, the types of production modes are not limited to two types, and three or more types may be provided. Furthermore, in this production modification, the contents of the privilege given to the player are made different depending on the type of the production mode. For example, as the production mode, five types of production modes, ie, the first mode to the fifth mode, can be set. It is preferable to configure so that different benefits can be given when the three modes are set in order and when the first mode, second mode, and fourth mode are set in order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested not only in the type of the set production mode, but also in the setting process. Furthermore, the effect in which a plurality of effect modes are set as in this modified example of effect may be configured to be executed using a single special symbol variation, or may be executed using a plurality of special symbol variations. It may be configured to In addition, a production (transition preparation production) that arouses the switching of production modes (a new production mode is set) is configured to be executable, and the production mode after the transition is suggested by the timing at which the transition preparation production is executed. It may be configured as possible. Furthermore, the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation and the performance period in which the performance mode is set can be separately set, and when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, when a special symbol reservation for winning a jackpot is obtained, A new production mode may be set in accordance with the start timing and end timing of the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a plurality of asynchronously executed performances are always executed synchronously, thereby making it possible to easily create a performance result advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the performance contents of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 but also in the execution timing. In addition, since it is possible to change the degree of expectation that a performance result advantageous to the player is created simply by switching the execution timing of the performance, it is possible to increase the performance effect while reducing the volume of the performance data. . In this case, the timing of switching the production mode may be synchronized with the timing other than the start timing and the end timing of the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation, for example, the timing of reaching the ready state in the fluctuation production, and the new reserved pattern. It may be configured to switch the presentation mode in synchronization with the timing when is displayed.
<Fifty-seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1995 to 2005. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example and the forty-eighth control example in that the content of the effect to be executed is different.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-seventh control example described above, the performance result of the variable performance being executed (lottery result of the special symbol lottery) is displayed by causing the player to operate the frame button 22, rather than the special symbol variation being stopped and displayed. A one-shot notification effect (see FIGS. 1760 to 1762) that can be notified before was configured to be executable. In the one-shot notification effect in the forty-seventh control example described above, as shown in FIG. By configuring so that the one-shot notification effect is executed with a time lag according to the flight mode of the butterfly icon after the button 22 is pressed, even when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the player continues. It was a thing that could make the game fun.
However, when the player presses the frame button 22, the two butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 fly off without fail, so there is a risk that the player will get bored with the monotonous effect.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example, an operation effect (button announcement effect ) can be executed a plurality of times, and even if the player presses the frame button 22, the effect pattern can be set so that the butterfly icon resting on the button icon Ba1 does not take off. It consists of In the state where the butterfly icon is stopped on the button icon Ba1, it is notified that an effect (button advance notice effect) in which the player presses the frame button 22 will be executed during the remaining period of the variable effect being executed. Configure.
With this configuration, when the button icon Ba1 is displayed with the butterfly icon stopped during the variable effect, pressing the frame button 22 executes the button announcement effect and also presses the frame button 22. The display mode of the button icon Ba1 after being pressed allows the player to grasp that a new button announcement effect will be executed during the remaining period of the variable effect, so the variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. A player who tries to quickly perceive the content of the performance of the performance can be motivated to press the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

First, with reference to FIG. 1995, the details of the advance notice effect executed during the variation effect in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1995 is a diagram schematically showing the execution timing of each notice effect executed during the variable effect and the notice type. As shown in FIG. 1995, in the fifty-seventh control example, in contrast to the variation effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-ninth control example (see FIG. The difference is that the types are increased. Note that the contents of the types of notice effects other than the button notice effects (notice A to notice C and special notice A) are the same, and the description of the same contents will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 1995, for the reach fluctuation with a fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds, the first period from the start of the fluctuation production until 15 seconds has passed is the "pre-reach period", and the subsequent 15 seconds ( The second period, which is a period of 15 to 30 seconds after the start of the variable production, is the "reach (first half) period", and the subsequent 15 seconds (period of 30 to 45 seconds after the start of the variable production). The third period is the "reach (middle) period", and the fourth period, which is the last 15 seconds (period of 45 to 60 seconds after the start of the variable effect), is the "reach (second half) period". .
Then, at a specific timing of the "pre-reach period" (12 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the first button notice effect (button notice A) At the time point), the second button notice effect (button notice B) will be performed, and at a specific timing of the "reach (second half) period" (58 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the third button notice effect (button notice C) will be performed. , is configured to be executable.
In addition, each of the above-mentioned advance notice effects is not necessarily executed in the variable effect, and when setting the effect mode of the variable effect, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect to be executed this time and the obtained effect Based on the value of the counter 223f, whether or not to execute each of the advance notice effects and the advance notice mode in the case of execution are determined.

"Button notice A" is a notice effect that is executed before the variable effect being executed becomes a reach state, and is a notice mode (notice type) for suggesting the effect content of the variable effect being executed. , the characters displayed on the display screen are set. Specifically, when the button icon Ba1 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the "button notice A", and the player presses the frame button 22, the variable effect being executed is displayed. A notice showing "reach" to suggest that it will be in a reach state ("Bo A-1"), a notice showing "SP reach" to suggest that the variable production being executed will be in an SP reach state Mode ("Bo A-2"), and advance notice mode ("Bo A-3") showing a "great chance" for suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation that the variable performance being executed will result in a performance indicating the winning of a jackpot. , any one of the advance notice modes is displayed.
"Button notice B" is a notice effect that is executed when the variable effect being executed is in the ready-to-win state, and is a cut-in mode (see Figure 1998(a)) is set. Specifically, when the button icon Ba1 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the "button notice B" and the player presses the frame button 22, the expectation of winning the jackpot is increased. A low “blue” cut-in mode (“Bo B-1”), a cut-in mode (“Bo B-2”) showing a higher “red color” than a “blue” color with a low expectation of winning a jackpot, and a high chance of winning a jackpot Of the cut-in mode (“Bo B-3”) indicating “rainbow color” with the highest degree of expectation, one of the advance notice modes is displayed.
"Button notice C" is a button notice effect that is executed after the variable effect being executed is displayed in a display mode showing the result of the effect, and is a button that is executed when the display mode showing the winning of the jackpot is displayed. It is a preview performance. In this "button notice C", when a jackpot is won, the promotion type is set as a notice mode (notice type) for suggesting the type of the winning jackpot to the player. Specifically, when the button icon Ba1 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the "button notice C", and the player presses the frame button 22, the effect result of the variable effect is For the displayed display mode (jackpot pattern), the character mode of "Chance"("BoC -1”), and the character mode of “promotion” (“Bo C-2”) indicating that the player has won a jackpot type (for example, a variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player. be done.
In addition, when the character mode of "promotion" is displayed in the button notice C, after that, the display mode (for example, even number jackpot pattern) displayed as the result of the variable performance is changed to the display corresponding to the probability variable jackpot winning. An effect (promoting effect) to change to a mode (for example, an odd jackpot pattern) is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example is configured to be able to execute the button announcement effect up to three times as the variation effect, and the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed is a failure. It is constructed so that the number of times of the button announcement performance executed in one variation performance is greater in the case of winning the jackpot than in the case of winning.
Then, as the performance period of the variable performance elapses, it becomes easier to display a performance result advantageous to the player when the button announcement performance is executed. Therefore, when the variable performance is executed, the player pays attention to the variable performance while expecting that the button announcement performance will be executed more often.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1996 to 1999, the contents of the button announcement effect executed in the variable effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example, similarly to the forty-seventh control example described above, the button icon Ba1 in which the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 are stopped can be displayed. Depending on the display mode of the button icon Ba1 when is pressed, the player can grasp whether or not another button announcement effect will be executed during the remaining period of the variable effect.
FIG. 1996(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a butterfly button effect is started in which a button icon Ba1 with butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 stopped is displayed during the variable effect. FIG. 1996(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when "button notice A" is executed while the butterfly button effect is being executed.

The butterfly button effect is a effect that is executed immediately after the variable effect is started (before the button advance notice A is executed), and the player is notified that the button advance notice effect will be executed in the current variable effect. The number of butterfly icons stopping on the button icon Ba1 can suggest the number of times of the button advance notice effect to be executed in the variable effect being executed. As shown in FIG. 1996(a), when the butterfly button effect is executed, the characters "BUTTERFLY BUTTON GET" are displayed above the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and on the right side of the main display area Dm. A button icon Ba1 imitating the frame button 22 and a display mode in which two butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 are stopped on the button icon Ba1 are displayed on the lower side. In the example shown in FIG. 1996(a), the state is immediately after the butterfly button effect has been executed and the button advance notice effect has not been executed. The character "lock" is displayed to indicate that it is not. A display area Dm51 is formed above the button icon Ba1, and a display mode of "butterfly x2” is displayed.
In other words, the state shown in FIG. 1996(a) is a state in which the butterfly button effect suggests that there is a high possibility that the button advance notice effect will be executed twice in the current variable effect. After the display screen shown in FIG. 1996(a) is displayed, the variable effect progresses, and the button icon Ba1 in the display mode of "lock" is continuously displayed until "button notice A" is executed. . Then, when "button announcement A" is executed as the button announcement effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 1996(b) is displayed.
Specifically, the display mode of the button icon Ba1 is switched from "lock" to "PUSH", and a time gauge tg1 is displayed to indicate the remaining period of operation of the frame button 22 for the button announcement effect being executed. This time gauge tg1 is a display mode for indicating the remaining period of the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid for the button advance notice effect, and indicates the remaining valid period based on the passage of time. is variably displayed so that the display area of is gradually reduced.
Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "press the button to make the notice appear" are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the button notice effect is currently being performed. With this configuration, even when the state in which the button icon Ba1 is displayed changes to the state in which the button announcement effect is executed due to the execution of the butterfly button effect, the player can press the frame button. 22 can be prevented from being overlooked.

When the player presses the frame button 22 after the display screen shown in FIG. 1996(b) is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 1997(a) is displayed. FIG. 1997(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the player presses the frame button 22 during the execution period of "button notice A".
The figure shown in FIG. 1997(a) shows that even if the player presses the frame button 22 in response to the "button notice A" and the characters "great chance!!" Regardless, the display screen shows a state in which none of the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 resting on the button icon Ba1 has taken off. In the area Ds, the number of butterfly icons has not decreased even though the frame button 22 has been operated in response to the "button notice A" and the notice mode "great chance!!" has been displayed. As the guidance display mode of , characters such as "Butterfly has not taken off! Chance continues!" are displayed.
In FIG. 1997(a), a display screen showing an effect pattern in which the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 do not fly despite pressing the frame button 22 during execution of "button notice A" has been described. Then, based on pressing the frame button 22 during the execution of "button notice A", the effect result of button notice A is displayed, and one butterfly icon flies away from the button icon Ba1, and the display area is displayed. A display screen where the display mode of 51 is variably displayed to "butterfly x 1" is displayed.
In other words, in the normal production pattern, the number of butterfly icons stopped on the button icon Ba1 is variably displayed so as to correspond to the remaining execution count of the button advance notice production to be executed during the variable production period. . Further, as shown in FIG. 1997(a), an effect pattern in which the number of butterfly icons does not decrease even when the frame button 22 is pressed in the button announcement effect is configured to be executable.

With this configuration, a predetermined number (for example, two) of butterfly icons are displayed when the butterfly button effect is executed, so that the button notice effect is executed twice during the variable effect. By executing the operation to the frame button 22 in the button announcement effect for the player who predicts that, the number of times of the button announcement effect to be executed during the variable effect can be predicted more accurately. , the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the remaining period indicated by the time gauge tg1 becomes 0 without pressing the frame button 22 while the "button notice A" is being executed (see FIG. 1996(b)). In this case, the "button notice A" is terminated without displaying the notice mode corresponding to the "button notice A" and without changing the number of butterfly icons. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the second button advance notice effect will be executed after the "button advance notice A" ends.
However, without being limited to this, the butterfly icon does not fly off only when the frame button 22 is pressed during the button notice effect, and when the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button notice effect, the button notice that was not pressed is displayed. It may be configured to execute the effect of making the butterfly icon fly in correspondence with the number of times the effect is executed. With this configuration, the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22 every time the button announcement performance is executed in order to accurately predict the remaining number of button announcement performances to be executed during the variable performance. be able to.
After that, the variation effect of the third symbol being executed in the main display area Dm becomes a ready-to-win state, and the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 are stopped until the execution timing of the "button notice B" is reached, and , the button icon Ba1 with the display mode of "lock" is continuously displayed. Then, when the execution timing of "button notice B" is reached, the display screen of FIG. 1997(b) is displayed.

FIG. 1997(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during execution of "button notice B". As shown in FIG. 1997(b), "button notice B" is a button notice effect executed when the third symbol is in the reach state, so the number "3" is attached to the main display area Dm. The drawn main symbol sz is displayed so as to form a ready-to-win state. In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Press button to cut-in!" .
Then, when the player presses the frame button 22 during the "button notice B", a cut-in mode showing the effect result of the "button notice B" is displayed as shown in FIG. 1998(a). FIG. 1998(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displaying the effect result of "Button Notice B". As shown in FIG. 1998(a), when the frame button 22 is pressed in response to "button notice B", the visibility of the third pattern displayed in the ready-to-reach state in the center of the main display area Dm is reduced. , the cut-in mode Cu1 is displayed. This cut-in mode Cu1 is a display in which the variable display of the third symbol that the player is watching is executed in order to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect result of "button notice B" has been displayed. Displayed to cover at least part of the area.
Note that the cut-in mode Cu1 is a display mode with a short display period of about 0.5 seconds, and all the third symbols may stop being displayed while the cut-in mode Cu1 is being displayed. It is configured so that it does not exist. Further, the display area of the cut-in mode Cu1 is formed so that the visibility of a part of the main symbol sz displayed in the reach state does not change even when the cut-in mode Cu1 is displayed. .
With this configuration, even when the cut-in state Cu1 is displayed, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the ready-to-win state variable effect is continuously being executed. In addition, in the fifty-seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 1998(a), the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol) overlapping the display area where the cut-in mode Cu1 is displayed (middle However, it suffices if the player can recognize that the cut-in mode Cu1 is displayed. For example, the display mode of the cut-in mode Cu1 By increasing the transmittance of , the player may be able to visually recognize the variable display mode of the medium symbol row in the ready-to-reach state while the cut-in mode Cu1 is being displayed. Further, the display area in which the cut-in mode Cu1 is displayed and the display area in which the third pattern (main pattern sz) is variably displayed may be configured so as not to overlap, or the third pattern (main pattern sz ), the cut-in mode Cu1 may be displayed on the rear side of the display.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 1998(a), when the frame button 22 is pressed for "button notice B", the butterfly icon Bb1 pops out from the button icon Ba1, and the number of remaining butterfly icons is one. The display area Dm51 displays "butterfly x 1" as a display mode for indicating the number of remaining butterfly icons. That is, it shows a state in which it is notified that there is only one button announcement effect remaining due to the execution of the "button announcement B".
On the other hand, if the player does not press the frame button 22 during the execution of "button notice B" and the remaining period indicated by the time gauge tg1 becomes 0, the display screen shown in FIG. 1998(b) is displayed. be done. FIG. 1998(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the frame button 22 is not operated during execution of "button notice B".
As shown in FIG. 1998(b), if the frame button 22 is not operated during execution of the "button notice B", the cut-in mode Cu1 is not displayed on the display screen, and the butterfly icon Bb1 is displayed. Only the effect of flying off from the button icon Ba1 is executed, and "butterfly x 1" indicating that the number of butterfly icons has decreased is displayed in the display area Dm51. Then, a display mode of "lock" for indicating that the button announcement effect has ended is displayed on the button icon Ba1.
As described above, in the fifty-seventh control example, the number of executions of the button announcement effect executed during the variable effect is notified in advance by the number of butterfly icons stopped on the button icon Ba1 displayed on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the content of the performance to be executed later.

In addition, by providing an effect pattern in which the number of butterfly icons does not decrease even when the frame button 22 is pressed during the button notice effect, the button notice effect is performed more than the originally predicted number of button notice effects. Since it is possible to let the player know that the number of executions is large, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.
Note that the above-described production example shows only the production in which the butterfly icons fly off one by one. It may be configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is difficult to predict. Further, in this case, the greater the number of butterfly icons that take off in response to one button notice effect, the more likely it is that the result of the button notice effect will be more advantageous to the player. is executed, the effect result of the button announcement effect is preferably displayed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 1999, an example of another one-shot notification effect will be described. FIG. 1999(a) is a diagram showing another example of the one-shot notification effect in the forty-seventh control example described above. In the one-shot announcement effect in the forty-seventh control example described above, as shown in FIG. configured to be displayed. On the other hand, in another example shown in FIG. 1999(a), two butterfly icons Bb1 flying in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are displayed before the button icon Ba1 is displayed. , Bb2 are displayed, and then the button icon Ba1 is displayed.
Then, the butterfly icons Bb1 and Bb2 in flight are configured to perform an effect that prompts whether they will stop at the button icon Ba1 or directly at the flower icons ha1 and ha2, and the display screen will display the message "Butterfly appears! Where?" Will it stop?" is displayed. Further, as the display mode of the button icon Ba1, a plain display mode without the characters "lock" and "push" is displayed.

After that, when the butterfly icon stops at the button icon Ba1, the display mode of the button icon Ba1 is changed to "push", and a one-shot notification effect is executed in which the player presses the frame button 22.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the butterfly icon lands directly on the flower icons ha1 and ha2, the effect result of the one-shot announcement effect is displayed without making the player press the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Further, when the butterfly icon flies out of the display area of the display screen as it is, the flower icons ha1 and ha2 and the button icon Ba1 are directly hidden without executing the one-shot notification effect.
With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the butterfly icon stops at the button icon Ba1. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.
Next, FIG. 1999(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an example of one-shot notification effect configured to be able to display a plurality of types of flower icon types and butterfly icon types. be. As shown in FIG. 1999(b), in this rendering example, a flower B icon ha2 with a display mode different from the normal flower icon ha1 and a butterfly B icon Bb2 with a display mode different from the normal butterfly icon Bb1 are displayed. be done. The butterfly B icon Bb2 is more likely to stop at the flower B icon ha2 than the normal butterfly icon Bb1. ing.
With this configuration, the player can be entertained as to which type of flower icon or butterfly icon is displayed when the one-shot notification effect is executed. In the one-shot notification effects described in each of the above control examples, the number of flower icons displayed on the display screen and the number of butterfly icons are the same. It may be configured to display.

Also, although the notification target to be notified to the player by the one-shot notification effect is the winning of the jackpot, it is not limited to this, and it is sufficient if it is notified that a privilege advantageous to the player is given.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2000 and 2001, the content of the effect for selecting the type of the jackpot game effect (music, image) executed during the jackpot game will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-eighth control example described above, the jackpot game is played based on the operation of the player's operation means (frame button 22) during the period (music selection period) in which the song to be played back during the jackpot game can be selected. It was configured to be able to select the music played during. Furthermore, only when the promotion condition is satisfied, the dedicated music capable of informing the game state to be set after the jackpot game to be executed this time is selected is selected.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-seventh control example is configured so that when selecting a song, a round image corresponding to the song is also displayed on the selection screen. With this configuration, even a player who is not interested in the music output during the jackpot game can operate the operation means (frame button 22) for the purpose of selecting the round image to be displayed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.
Furthermore, while each song and the round video are defined in advance in association with each other, when a song (round video) is selected and a predetermined occurrence condition is satisfied, the selected song and the round video are determined. It is configured so that there may be a case where the combination of By configuring in this way, when an operation of selecting a song (round video) is executed, it is possible to execute a jackpot game effect with an unexpected combination, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. In addition, in the fifty-seventh control example, if the jackpot game to be executed this time is a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (probability variable jackpot, jackpot game with a large number of round games, etc.), it is a jackpot game other than that. It is configured so that the combination of the selected song and the round video is more likely to be out of sync than in other cases.

By constructing in this way, when the unexpected big win game performance is executed, it is possible to inform the player that the big win game advantageous to the player will be executed, so that the performance effect can be further enhanced. . Furthermore, in the fifty-seventh control example, the types of music to be output during the jackpot game are configured to be able to be increased based on the establishment of the update condition.
Specifically, when the update condition is not satisfied, for example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, 3 types of songs (song A to song C) can be selected. , and when the jackpot is won again in an advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving state, probability variable state, etc.) set after the jackpot game ends (so-called consecutive chances), the update condition is satisfied, and the selectable songs are It is configured to increase by one type (for example, music D). Thereafter, each time the update condition is met, the number of selectable music types is set to seven at maximum.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to widen the selection range of songs each time a jackpot game is executed, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to willingly perform the operation of selecting songs.
In this case, when the update condition is satisfied and the number of selectable songs increases, if it is not possible to grasp that a new song has been added, the opportunity to select a new song will be lost and the performance effect will be reduced. There was fear. In contrast, in the fifty-seventh control example, when a new song is added, the new song is displayed on the display screen (selection screen) displayed when the song selection period is set. It consists of

With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that a new song has been added. In addition, the display mode of the display screen (selection screen) displayed when the music selection period is set can be determined according to the details of the player's operation on the operation means during the past music selection period. . Specifically, storage means capable of storing information that the player operated the operation means to select a specific song (executed a song selection operation) during the past song selection period during the consecutive chance period is provided. When determining the display mode of the initial display screen in the new music selection period, the operation history of the music selection operation stored in the storage means is determined.
When it is determined that a song selection operation is being performed, that is, when it is determined that the player has arbitrarily selected a predetermined song, the selected song is displayed in the main area of the song selection screen (in the initial state It is configured so that information corresponding to the newly added song is displayed in the sub-area that is displayed in the selected area) and can be selected next. On the other hand, when it is determined that the music selection operation has not been performed, that is, when it is determined that the player has not arbitrarily selected the predetermined music, new music is added in a predetermined order. , the new song is displayed in the main area of the song selection screen.
By constructing in this manner, newly added music can be easily notified to a player who has selected an arbitrary music while providing a situation in which it is easy to continue to output the music being selected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of selecting an arbitrary song each time a jackpot game is started. In addition, since newly added music is displayed in the main area for the player who does not perform the music selection operation, different music can be output for each jackpot game without performing the music selection operation. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.
In addition, in the fifty-seventh control example, when the conditions (promoting conditions) for selecting music X in the forty-eighth control example described above are met, an opening process is executed to make all seven types of music selectable. It consists of In other words, up to the 7th song, which would normally be selectable only when the update conditions are met multiple times by increasing the number of consecutive wins, can be selected when the promotion conditions are met. Configure.

Here, in the above-described forty-eighth control example, as part of the elements for establishing the promotion condition, the display mode of the third symbol (jackpot symbol type) is defined to be a display mode (jackpot pattern with even number of patterns) that can be displayed even when winning a normal jackpot (time-saving jackpot). In other words, the promotion condition can be established only when game information disadvantageous to the player (jackpot winning with the possibility of a normal jackpot) is reported rather than the actual jackpot winning content (probability variable jackpot).
That is, in the fifty-seventh control example, only when game information that is more disadvantageous to the player than the actual jackpot winning content (probability variable jackpot) (jackpot winning that can also be a normal jackpot) is reported, it is opened in one jackpot game. It is configured to be able to execute processing (processing that enables selection of all types of music). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with added value when a jackpot winning with an even number of symbols is notified, so that the game can be played even when the jackpot with an even number of symbols is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
FIG. 2001(a) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game. Note that this display screen has a display mode showing video information corresponding to each selected song added to the display screen displayed during the opening period in the above-described 48th control example (see FIG. 1799(a)). The display elements are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same display elements, and the description thereof is omitted.
FIG. 2000(a) is a diagram showing the display screen during the opening period in the case where the variable probability jackpot is won and the third symbol is even-numbered symbols "666" and is stopped and displayed. In the region Dm1, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode ("666") indicating that the jackpot has been won.

Below the small display area Dm1, an icon resembling the selection button 600 is displayed in the display area 0Dm1 as a display area for selecting a song to be played during the jackpot effect, and a currently selected song gk1a is displayed in the main area. "Song A" is displayed as the selected round image information gk2, and "sea" is displayed as the currently selected round video information gk2. In other words, when "Song A" is selected, it is informed that a sea-themed image will be displayed as the round image displayed during the jackpot game. Also, during the music selection period, a part (chorus part) of the music displayed in the currently selected music gk1a is configured to be output. By constructing in this way, a part of the selected music can be listened to before determining the music to be output during the jackpot game, so that it is easy for the player to select music that matches his taste. can be done.
It should be noted that the round video displayed in the currently selected round video information gk1b may be reproduced during the music selection period. With such a configuration, even a player who mainly selects the round image can easily select the round image. In this case, part of the display image displayed when the demo is reproduced during the music selection period is used to display the game content of the jackpot game to be executed this time and the type of game state set after the jackpot game ends. may be configured to be displayed including a suggestive mode capable of suggesting .
In other words, a display mode that is not displayed as a round video may be configured to be displayed only during the demonstration reproduction. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the performance effect during the song selection period.
Similarly to the currently selected music piece, the first selection candidate music piece gk2a is "music B", the first selection candidate round video information gk2b is "mountain", the second selection candidate music gk3a is "music C", and the second selection candidate music piece gk3a is "song B". "Sky" is displayed as the candidate round video information gk3b. That is, it indicates that "song A" and "sea", "song B" and "mountain", and "song C" and "sky" are defined in association with each other.

When the upper button of the selection button 600 is operated while the display screen shown in FIG. The display mode is shifted to the currently selected music piece gk1a and the currently selected round video information gk1b. Here, in some cases where a predetermined occurrence condition (probability variable jackpot winning) is satisfied, as shown in FIG. ing. FIG. 2000(b) shows a display screen when the combination of the song being selected and the round video does not match the combination defined in advance.
In FIG. 2000(b), when the upper button of the selection button 600 is operated while the display screen shown in FIG. 2000(a) is displayed, only the music is displayed in a shifted manner. In the sub-display area Ds, there is displayed the text "There is a discrepancy between the song and the video of the round. It might be a chance for promotion."
In addition, in the fifty-seventh control example, the selection operation (operation of the selection button 600) for selecting a song (round video) is performed in a state where the generation condition is satisfied, and the It is configured so that combinations other than combinations are displayed. In other words, the player can be motivated to operate the selection button 600 by arranging so that the player cannot grasp whether or not the generation condition is satisfied unless the selection button 600 is operated. However, without being limited to this, when the occurrence condition is satisfied, the combination of the song and the round video displayed on the selection screen is configured to be displayed in a combination other than the combination defined in advance. For example, in spite of winning the probability variable jackpot, even-numbered jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed, and if the occurrence condition is satisfied, all songs on the song selection screen may be configured to display a display mode showing the same round video for each.
Next, the music selection screen displayed when the update condition is satisfied and a new music can be selected will be described with reference to FIG. 2001(a). FIG. 2001(a) is a diagram showing an example of a song selection screen on which a new song can be selected. The display screen shown in FIG. 2001(a) shows a music selection screen when the player who selected "Music B" and "Mountain" in the previous big winning game starts the next big winning game.

As shown in FIG. 2001(a), the currently selected music piece gk1a displays the previously selected music piece "Song B", and the currently selected round image information gk1b displays the previously selected round image information "Mountain". The song selection screen will be displayed. Then, since the update condition has been satisfied by the continuous chanting, the newly added "song D" is stored in the first selection candidate song gk2a, and the round corresponding to "song D" is stored in the first selection candidate round video information gk2b. The round image information "heaven" indicating the image is displayed. In addition, in order to indicate that a total of four types of music can be selected during the current music selection period, a display area showing the third selection candidate music gk4a and the third selection round video information gk4b is formed. C” and “Empty” are displayed.
As shown in FIG. 2001(a), the various areas displayed on the song selection screen are configured so that even if the number of selectable songs increases, the number is increased so that the number can be grasped. ing. Then, the display area (selected music gk1a, selected round video information gk1b) corresponding to the currently selected music (round video) is the largest, and the next music (round Each display area is formed so that the display area (first and second selection candidate songs, first and second selection candidate round video information) corresponding to the video) is enlarged.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the number of selectable songs within the limited display area. Note that the display screen shown in FIG. 2001(a) shows a state in which four types of music can be selected, and the respective display areas are spaced apart. Alternatively, each display area may be overlapped and displayed. In this case, the display area that can be selected first by operating the selection button 600 is configured to be displayed on the front side (preferentially), and the display area on the back side (non-priority side) is the corresponding song or track. It may be displayed in a display mode in which it is difficult (difficult) to identify the type of video (a display mode in which it is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the display area displayed on the front side). Even in this case, the existence of the display area is displayed so that the player can grasp the number of songs that can be selected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2001(b), the song selection screen when the release process is executed will be described. FIG. 2001(b) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when all selectable songs are released (when promotion conditions are satisfied). The fifty-seventh control example is different from the forty-eighth control example in that the display mode of the display screen displayed when the promotion condition is satisfied on the music selection screen in the forty-eighth control example is different. ing.

Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the song selection screen is displayed and the promotion condition is satisfied, a song selection screen is displayed in which seven songs can be selected. Then, the smallest display area (sixth selection candidate song gk7a, sixth selection candidate round video information gk7b) is displayed in rainbow colors, and the secondary display area Ds displays "Congratulations on opening all songs! Shining in rainbow colors." Is there a song that you are listening to!?” is displayed.
By configuring in this way, the display area is small, and it is possible to increase the desire to select music and round video corresponding to the display area that is difficult to identify. In this case, it is preferable that the display area emitting rainbow colors is shifted based on the operation of the selection button 600 . Thus, when the music selection screen is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp what the music and the round video displayed in the sixth selection candidate music gk7a and the sixth selection candidate round video information gk7b were.
<Regarding control processing content in the fifty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2002 to 2005, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-seventh control example will be described. In the fifty-seventh control example, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described forty-eighth control example are replaced with the opening effect processing (see S5602J in FIG. 1811). (S5602Ja in FIG. 2002) is replaced with the music selection process (S5401J in FIG. 1817), and the music selection process (S5401Ja in FIG. For the content of the control processing executed in , instead of the detailed mode determination process (see S5115H in FIG. 1794), the detailed mode determination process (S5115Ja in FIG. 2004) is changed to the effect update process (see S4102H in FIG. 1796). The difference is that the effect update process (S4102Ja in FIG. 2005) is executed instead. Other processing contents are the same, and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 2002, the processing contents of the opening effect processing (S5602Ja) will be described. FIG. 2002 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the opening effect processing (S5602Ja). This opening effect processing (S5602Ja) is part of the processing content for determining various display modes displayed on the music selection screen, in contrast to the opening effect processing (see S5602J in FIG. 1811) in the forty-eighth control example described above. are different in that they differ from each other. Note that the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the opening effect process (S5602Ja) is executed, first, the same processes of S5651J and S5652J as the opening effect process (see S5602J in FIG. 1811) are executed. After that, the music type to be used for the current music selection is determined from the music pieces (7 pieces in total) stored in the music data type storage area 222ka (S5651Ja). In the process of S5651Ja, a process for determining the music type (the number of songs) to be displayed on the music selection screen is executed based on the number of times the update condition is met and whether the generation condition is met.
In addition, without being limited to the processing of this control example, for example, every time the processing for determining the aspect of the opening effect is executed, the music selection screen is displayed from among the music stored in the music data type storage area 222ka. The type and number of songs to be displayed may be determined by lottery.
When the processing of S5651Ja is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game of this time is a variable probability jackpot and a jackpot with an even number of symbols (S5652Ja), and the jackpot with a variable probability and even number symbols is determined. (S5652Ja: Yes), a special display frame is determined for the music type displayed after the selection operation (displayed in the currently selected music gk1) (S5653Ja), and stored in the music information storage area 223kb. A display mode for showing a music selection screen corresponding to the stored music (history information about the music selected on the previous music selection screen) is determined (S5653J), and an image corresponding to the determined music display mode is displayed. The icon is determined (S5654Ja), the same processing of S5654J to S5656J as the opening effect processing (see S5602J in FIG. 1811) in the forty-eighth control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.
Next, the content of the music processing (S5401Ja) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2003 is a flow chart showing the contents of the music processing (S5401Ja). In this music processing (S5401Ja), in contrast to the music selection processing of the forty-eighth control example (see S5401J in FIG. 1817), processing executed based on the operation of various operation means (select button 600, frame button 22). The difference is that a part of the content and a part of the processing content executed after the song is determined are changed. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the music processing (S5401Ja) is executed, the same processing of S5451J to S5470J as the music selection processing (S5401J in FIG. 1817) is executed. After the processing of S5453J is executed, that is, when it is determined that the selection button 600 has been operated during the music selection period, after pressing the button based on the music information stored in the music information storage area 223kb. Select a song (S5451Ja), then determine whether the current jackpot pattern is a probability variation per even number pattern (S5452Ja), If it is determined that it is a probability variation per even number pattern (S5452Ja: Yes), Based on the selection operation, it is determined by lottery whether to execute the display mode in which only the music information is shifted (S5453Ja), and the process proceeds to S5454Ja. On the other hand, in the process of S5452Ja, when it is determined that there is no even-numbered pattern probability variation hit (S5452Ja: No), the process of S5453Ja is skipped and the process proceeds to S5454Ja.
When the display mode in which only the music type is shifted is determined by the process of S5453Ja, the shift display screen shown in FIG. 2000(b) is displayed. In addition, in the fifty-seventh control example, the display of the deviation display screen is determined by lottery. , S5452Ja, when it is determined that it is a probability variation hit of an even-numbered symbol, the deviation display screen may be displayed without fail.
In the processing of S5454Ja, a display command for displaying a selection screen indicating the currently selected song is set (S5454Ja), and then a voice command for outputting the chorus of the currently selected song is set (S5455Ja). End the process.
In addition, after the processing of S5458J is completed, it is determined whether or not the promoted music is determined (S5456Ja). ), the process ends. Furthermore, after the processing of S5468J is completed, a voice command for reproducing the determined music is set (S5458Ja), a display command for erasing the selection screen is set (S5469J), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2004, the details of the detailed mode determination process (S5115Ja) will be described. FIG. 2004 is a flow chart showing the details of the detailed mode determination process (S5115Ja). This detailed mode determination process (S5115Ja) differs from the above-described detailed mode determination process (S5115H) in that a part of the processing contents executed for the one-shot notification effect is changed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the detailed mode determination process (S5115Ja) is executed, the same processes of S5301H to S5316H as the detailed mode determination process (S5115H) of the forty-seventh control example are executed, and then the number of butterfly icons is determined (S5301Ja). ), determine the type of butterfly icon and the type of flower icon (S5302Ja), and terminate this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2005, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S4102Ja) will be described. FIG. 2005 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering update process (S4102Ja). In this effect update process (S4102Ja), it is determined whether or not to decrease the number of butterfly icons when the SW effective period during the one-shot notification effect has elapsed in the forty-seventh control example described above. The difference is that processing (S5501Ja) for setting a display command indicating the number of butterfly icons is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the description thereof is omitted.
<58th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2006 to 2028. FIG. In the above-described 45th control example, the game state is a normal state set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol normal state, a special symbol low probability state, and a normal symbol high probability state. It is configured to provide three different game states, namely, a time saving state to be set, a high probability state of special symbols, and a variable probability state (variable probability states A to C) set to a high probability state of normal symbols.

In addition to this, in the fifty-eighth control example, it is configured to provide a latent probability state set to a high probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and further, this latent probability state has the highest degree of advantage. Set to play. More specifically, in the fifty-eighth control example, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit is won with a high probability (probability of about 1/2), and a game state other than the latent state ( In the normal state, the time-saving state, and the probability variable state), the frequency of the drawing of the second special symbol is low, while in the probability state, the frequency of the lottery of the second special symbol is increased (only the probability state is the second). By shortening the fluctuation time of the 2 special symbols), the lottery of the 2nd special symbols is frequently executed only in the latent state, and as a result of frequently winning small wins, prize balls based on small wins are intermittently given. It is configured to be able to form a very advantageous game state that can be acquired at any time. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the number of balls in the player's possession increases by paying out the prize balls from the small win even if the player does not win the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .
In addition, in the 58th control example, in the time-saving state and probability variable state in which the control that makes it easier to execute the lottery of special symbols is executed (set to the high probability state of normal symbols), the game of the first game method ( Even if a game of the second game method (right-handed game) is performed, an advantageous game is executed in which the number of balls held is less likely to decrease than when left-handed is performed in a disadvantageous normal state. configured as possible. That is, when the game of the first game method (left-handed game) is performed, it is almost possible to maintain the possession balls (the number of game balls to be shot and the number of prize balls to be paid out are almost equal in design). While the configuration is such that an advantageous game can be executed, the number of prize balls paid out is slightly smaller when the game of the second game method (right-handed game) is performed than when left-handed is performed. It is configured so that a game that is advantageous to some extent can be executed. And, basically, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, when the game of the second game method (right-handed game) is performed, the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied early, while the time saving end condition of the first game method When a game (left-handed game) is played, it is configured to make it difficult to satisfy the time-saving end condition. By configuring in this way, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, in the time saving state that shifts to the disadvantageous normal state, it is more advantageous to hit left, while when the time saving end condition is satisfied As a result of setting the normal state of the normal pattern while maintaining the high probability state of the special pattern, in the variable state that shifts to the most advantageous latent state, it is said that the degree of advantage is higher if you hit the right. It is possible to realize novel playability.
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided, and when a game state with a high degree of advantage is set, a predetermined end condition is set in the game state with a high degree of advantage. is established, a game state with a high degree of advantage is terminated and another game state is set. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are provided a plurality of types of advantageous game states in which the ease with which the end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of special symbol lotteries until the end condition is satisfied is different) is provided. In some cases, the player expects the game to be set to a game state in which it is difficult to satisfy the end condition, thereby improving interest. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the game state is different, if the same end condition is set, the game can be played by a common game method regardless of the game state until the end condition is satisfied. Since the degree of advantage is the highest, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous.
On the other hand, in the 58th control example, a common end condition (time-saving end condition) is set as the end condition for ending the control (time-saving state control of normal symbols) that facilitates the execution of the special symbol lottery. In this case, it is advantageous to play the game with the first game method (left-handed game) and the second game method (right-handed game). The configuration is such that the second situation, in which the degree tends to be high, can be established. That is, a time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is higher in the left-handed game in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied, and a variable state in which the advantage is higher in the right-handed game in which the time-saving end condition is easily satisfied, is provided, and a common time-saving end condition is set for the time-saving state and the variable probability state. By configuring in this way, although the same time-saving control is set, it is possible to realize a novel game property that changes the game method according to the situation, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be improved.

In addition, in the fifty-eighth control example, as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, a time-saving state is set in which the degree of advantage tends to increase if the game is played in the first game method (left-handed game). and a case in which a probability variable state is set in which the degree of advantage tends to increase when playing a game in the second game method (right-handed game), both of which are configured to include at least a specific performance mode. It is configured to execute a specific effect. That is, an effect is executed to make it difficult to distinguish from the effect mode whether the degree of advantage is higher by playing the game with the first game method or the degree of advantage is higher by playing the game with the second game method. configured as possible. Thereby, when the specific performance is executed, the player is made to predict whether it is better to play the game with the first game method or with the second game method. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game method corresponding to the prediction is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described forty-fifth control example in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed, and the control processing to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 45 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the forty-fifth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 2006, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 2006 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 2006, the game board 13 in the fifty-eighth control example is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described forty-fifth control example (see FIG. 1221). The through gate 67 provided in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is moved to the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, and the 45th control example. The right first entrance 2640 provided in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view is deleted, and the electric accessory 64a is attached to the first entrance 64. They are different in that respect.
Due to this first difference, in the fifty-eighth control example, by hitting left in the time saving state and probability variable state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the lottery of the normal symbol. A game ball can be passed through. In addition, when the electric accessory 64a is released as a win in the normal pattern lottery, the game ball fired by hitting to the left easily enters the first ball entrance 64 (the first ball entrance 64 is expanded). On the other hand, when hitting to the right, the game ball cannot pass through the through gate 67 and cannot reach the first ball entrance 64 due to the placement of the nail. Therefore, it becomes impossible to execute the lottery for the first special symbol. That is, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol in the 58th control example, an advantageous state is formed in which the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened by performing a left-handed game. Here, as described above, in the fifty-eighth control example, when hitting right in the game state (time saving state or probability variable state) set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is possible to If you hit the right in the game state that is set to the time-saving state of the normal pattern, you will lose a little more than hitting the left (the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the number of balls fired will be smaller), but normally A novel game state is formed in which a right-handed game can be selected because it is more advantageous than left-handed in the state. Note that when focusing on the amount of prize balls to be paid out, right-hand hitting is more likely than left-hand hitting to enter the small winning prize winning device 650a with a large number of prize balls. , The increasing speed of the prize balls by the prize balls put out during the small winning game is much faster than the increasing speed of the prize balls when the winning game of the normal symbol is executed at the time of hitting to the left. Therefore, it can be said that right-handed hitters have a higher advantage than left-handed hitters in terms of the speed at which the number of prize balls increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2006, the game board 13 in the fifty-eighth control example is the second difference from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described forty-fifth control example (see FIG. 1221). In place of the first variable winning device 65 provided in the bottom right of the board surface in the example, a small winning prize winning device 2650 is provided. This small prize winning device 2650 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter, and wins a small prize with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, This prize winning device is opened so that balls can be entered when a small winning game is executed. The specific winning opening 2650a of this small winning prize device 2650 is opened only for 0.5 seconds during the small winning game, and when detecting the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 2650a during this open period, 15 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the latent state where the variation time of the second special symbol is short, by continuing to hit to the right, the small winning game is frequently executed and the ball enters the specific winning hole 2650a frequently. , forming an extremely advantageous state in which the number of held balls tends to continue to increase until the next big win (the number of awarded balls to be paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls to be shot).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2006, the game board 13 in the fifty-eighth control example differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the above-described forty-fifth control example (see FIG. 1221) as the third difference. The second variable prize winning device 2065 provided on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 in the front view in the 45 control example has been moved directly below the first ball entrance 64 . This second variable winning device 2065 is a winning device (big winning opening) that is opened in each round of the jackpot game. Due to the change in the arrangement of the second variable winning device 2065, it is impossible to let the game ball enter the second variable winning device 2065 in the open state even if the player hits to the right during execution of the jackpot game. (The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the small winning prize device 2650, which is closed during the big win, is the gap between the base member where the small winning prize device 2065 is provided and the second variable winning device 2065 flow down and guided to the out port 66), the player is allowed to select the game method of entering the game ball into the second variable winning device 2065 by the left-handed game during the execution of the jackpot game. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 1641 during the execution of the jackpot game and the reserved balls of the second special symbol from accumulating.
Here, in the fifty-eighth control example, in many cases, as the time saving end condition, the end condition that is established by executing the lottery of the first special symbol 95 times or the lottery of the second special symbol 5 times is set. Therefore, when the second special symbol reserved balls accumulate up to the upper limit number (four) during the big win, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed until just before the time saving end condition. Therefore, after shifting to the time saving state of the normal pattern, even though I thought that I did not want to establish the time saving end condition, I hit the right due to the wrong operation method, etc., and the second special for one There is a possibility that the time-saving state of the normal pattern will end unintentionally just by additionally acquiring the reserved ball of the pattern. Therefore, in the fifty-eighth control example, the game method during execution of the jackpot game is set to be a left-handed game, and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are configured to be as difficult as possible to accumulate. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the time-saving end condition (five times of lottery for the second special symbol), which is likely to be established, is established against the player's will.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2007 to 2010, a characteristic effect mode in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. First, with reference to Drawing 2007 (a), an example of an effect mode performed when shifting to a time saving state and a definite variable state in this 58th example of control is explained. As shown in FIG. 2007(a), in the fifty-eighth control example, when transitioning to the time-saving state or the variable probability state after the end of the big win, a mini character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed at the lower center of the main display area Dm, A mini character 865 imitating a turtle is displayed. A road RR through which the rabbit mini character 801 can travel is displayed on the right side of the mini character 801 imitating a rabbit, and a treasure box image TBR imitating a treasure box is displayed on the other end of the road RR. Also, an arrow image YGR that simulates a rightward arrow is displayed above the road RR. In this arrow image YGR, characters such as "If you hit right, the rabbit will advance!" are displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the rabbit mini character 801 moves toward the treasure box image TBR when hitting to the right.

Also, as shown in FIG. 2007(a), on the left side of the turtle mini-character 865, a road RL through which the mini-turtle character 865 can travel is displayed, and on the other end of the road RL, a treasure box image TBL imitating a treasure box is displayed. is displayed. Also, an arrow image YGL imitating a leftward arrow is displayed above the road RL. In this arrow image YGL, characters such as "If you hit left, the turtle will move forward!" By these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the effect that the turtle mini character 865 moves toward the treasure box image TBL is executed when the player hits left.
In addition, in the horizontally elongated substantially rectangular small display area Dm4 formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm, the characters "Five times left until the rabbit reaches" are displayed, and the horizontally elongated small display area Dm4 formed directly below the small display area Dm4 is displayed. The text "95 times left until turtle reaches" is displayed in the substantially rectangular small display area Dm7. In addition, the text "Enter select mode!" RUSH or end!?” is displayed. According to these display contents, when the rabbit mini character is advanced by hitting the right side, the special symbol lottery is executed five times to reach the treasure box, while the turtle mini character is advanced by hitting the left side. If you do, it takes 95 special symbol lotteries to reach the treasure box, and if you reach the treasure box, the possibility of moving to an advantageous RUSH (latency state) ends. It is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a possibility that the game will be changed to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a game property expecting to be notified of the transition to an advantageous latent state by hitting the right hand that can reach the treasure box relatively easily, or it is relatively difficult to reach the treasure box (reaching) The possibility of winning the jackpot before reaching the treasure box is increased). It is possible to realize novel playability. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. The effect for explaining the game method in the select mode shown in FIG. 2007(a) is executed during the ending period of the jackpot. As a result, at the time of shifting to the select mode (time saving state or probability variable state) set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the state of understanding the game property of the select mode, so efficiency for the player You can play well.
FIG. 2007(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the second special symbol lottery is executed once in the select mode set to the time saving state of normal symbols. As shown in FIG. 2007(b), when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the select mode, the rabbit mini character 801 takes one step to the right on the road RR below the main display area Dm. At the same time, the display of the remaining lottery count until reaching the treasure box in the small display area Dm4 is updated by subtracting one. The example of FIG. 2007(b) illustrates a case in which "four times left to reach the rabbit" is subtracted and displayed.
Further, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the third symbol for showing the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the center of the main display area Dm, and in the small display area Dm8. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. These display contents inform the player that the rabbit mini character 801 has advanced to the right (in the direction of the treasure box TBR) in conjunction with the execution of the second special symbol lottery by striking to the right. can be grasped. Therefore, the player can easily imagine that the treasure box TBR will be reached if the lottery of the second special symbol is executed five times without a big hit.

Although not shown in the drawings, when the first special symbol lottery is executed by hitting left, the variation display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. At the same time, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed also in the small display area Dm1. In conjunction with the execution of the lottery for the first special symbol, an effect is executed in which the turtle mini character 865 takes one step to the left (a distance of approximately 1/95 of the total length of the road RL). The display of the remaining lottery count until reaching the treasure box in the small display area Dm7 is updated by subtracting one. These display contents indicate that the position of the turtle mini character 865 corresponds to the number of lotteries for the first special symbol, and that the game state is changed for a longer period of time than the right-hand shot if left-hand shots are continued. It is possible to make the player easily understand that it becomes difficult to be drawn (the number of lotteries required until the time saving state of normal symbols is ended increases).
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2008, 2009, and 2010(a), description will be given of the mode of presentation when the final variable display in the time-saving state of normal symbols (state with electric sapo) is executed. Henceforth, the case where time-saving end conditions are satisfied by the lottery frequency of the 2nd special design having reached|attained 5 times which are the prescribed times is illustrated, and various production|presentation aspects are demonstrated.
FIG. 2008(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the start of the variable display of the last second special symbol in the time saving state of normal symbols. As shown in FIG. 2008(a), when the number of lotteries for the second special symbol reaches five times, which is the prescribed number of times, the rabbit mini character 801 reaches the treasure box TBR at the same time as the second special symbol starts to fluctuate for the fifth time. A production is executed. In addition, the characters "Achieve the treasure box!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, the number of lotteries of the second special pattern reaches the specified number of times, and the time saving state of the normal pattern is terminated, so that the latent state (rush mode) or the normal state It is possible to make the player recognize that.
FIG. 2008(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a transition to the latent state (rush mode) is notified. As shown in FIG. 2008 (b), when the transition to the advantageous latent state (rush mode) is notified (that is, when the time saving end condition is established in the state where the variable state is set), the treasure box When the rabbit mini-character 801 reaches the TBR and opens the treasure box TBR, an effect is executed in which a V-icon 801v indicating a transition to the rush mode appears from within the treasure box TBR. In addition, in the variable display of the third symbols, as the stop symbols, the stop symbols set as the third symbols in which the middle symbols imitate the letter "V" are stopped and displayed. Further, the characters "RUSH rush!! Hit right!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to an advantageous latent state (rush mode). Although not shown in the figure, when the number of lotteries for the first special symbol reaches the specified number of times (95 times) and the state shifts to the latent state, the turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the treasure box TBL is reached. When the box is opened, an effect is executed in which a V-icon 801v appears from inside.

FIG. 2009(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a transition to the normal state is notified. As shown in FIG. 2009(a), when a transition to a disadvantageous normal state is notified (that is, when the time saving end condition is satisfied in a state where the time saving state is set), the rabbit that has reached the treasure box TBR When the mini character 801 opens the treasure box TBR, an effect is executed in which an end icon 801e appears from inside the treasure box TBR to indicate a shift to the normal mode. In addition, in the variable display of the third symbols, the third symbols of the combination that are out are stopped and displayed. Further, the characters "select mode end... left shot..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the time-saving state of the normal symbols has ended and the game has shifted to the disadvantageous normal state. Although not shown in the figure, when the number of lotteries for the first special symbol reaches the specified number of times (95 times) and the state shifts to the normal state, the turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL and the treasure box TBL is opened. When opened, an effect is executed in which an end icon 801e appears from inside.
FIG. 2009(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode under a special situation in which a jackpot is included in the hold including the variation display being executed at the start of the final variation. As shown in FIG. 2009(b), if the variation display being executed is the big hit variation, or if there is a big hit pending in the hold and the winning of the jackpot is confirmed, the rabbit mini character that has reached the treasure box TBR When the player 801 opens the treasure box TBR, an effect is executed in which a celebration icon 801c indicating a big win appears from inside the treasure box TBR. In addition, in the variable display of the third symbols, the third symbols of the winning combination are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the characters "Bonus confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she has won the jackpot. Here, not only when the variable display being executed is the variable display corresponding to the big win, but also when the big win is included in the reservation, the configuration is such that the winning of the big win is notified in advance in the time-saving final fluctuation. , the purpose is to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money. That is, if the gaming state after the time-saving end condition is satisfied is a latent state, the more winning balls you keep winning without winning the big win, the more prize balls you can win. If a big hit is won immediately by , the advantageous latent state will be terminated without obtaining any prize balls from the small hit. In this case, if the transition to the latent state (rush mode) is notified, the jackpot is immediately won and the latent state is terminated, and at the time when the transition to the latent state is notified A great sense of anticipation will be lost in an extremely short time, and there is a possibility that the player will feel a great sense of disappointment. Conversely, if the game state after the time-saving end condition is established is the normal state, the player is made to feel a great sense of disappointment when the transition to the normal state (end icon 801e) is notified. will be lost. In particular, if a game method is used in which a time-saving end condition is established early in five special symbol lotteries by hitting to the right, there is a possibility that the player will feel a great disappointment. Therefore, in the fifty-eighth control example, if the jackpot is included in the hold at the time when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state is notified regardless of the game state after the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended. Instead of doing so, it is configured to notify the jackpot winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the chances of disappointing the player, so that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized. Although not shown in the figure, when the number of lotteries for the first special symbol reaches the specified number of times (95 times) and a jackpot is included in the reserve, the turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL, When the treasure box TBL is opened, an effect is executed in which a celebration icon 801c appears from inside.
In addition, in the fifty-eighth control example, if a jackpot is included in the hold at the time when the end condition is satisfied, the game state is notified regardless of the game state after the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning to the probability state, it is possible to notify the jackpot winning, and when transitioning to the normal state, it may be configured to notify the transition to the normal state. In the case of such a configuration, the action of winning the jackpot immediately after shifting to a disadvantageous normal state is performed, so that the player can be made to think that he or she is very lucky, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.
Figure 2010 (a) shows an example of the effect mode when reaching the specified number of times (variation number of times when the time saving end condition is satisfied) in another game state under the situation where the probability variable state that continues until the next big hit is set It is a diagram showing. Here, in the fifty-eighth control example, most of the jackpots (100% of the first special symbol jackpot and 90% of the second special symbol jackpot) are the first special symbol lottery 95 times, or the second A jackpot of a type set in a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) in which a time-saving end condition is established by executing a lottery of special symbols five times, and a partial jackpot (jackpot C59). Only in this case, the game state after the end of the big win is set to a probability variable state that continues until the next big win. Also when this jackpot C59 is won, an effect (see FIG. 2007(a)) for informing the shift to the select mode is executed when shifting to the variable probability state, similarly to other jackpots. Then, as shown in FIG. 2010(a), when the fifth lottery of the second special symbol that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in the game state after the end of another big hit, the treasure box TBR is reached. When the rabbit mini character 801 opens the treasure box TBR, an effect is executed in which an ∞ icon 801i appears from the treasure box TBR, which indicates that the variable probability state is set to continue until the next time. In addition, in the variable display of the third symbols, the third symbols of the combination that are out are stopped and displayed. Further, the characters "Fixed to continue until next time!! Hit left!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the time-saving state of normal symbols continues until the next big hit, so that the player can easily understand that the game can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held by hitting to the left. can. Although illustration is omitted, if the game player selects the game method in which the first special symbol is drawn by hitting left, the time saving end condition is established if the game state is after the end of another big hit. Based on the execution of the 95th lottery of the first special pattern, a turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL, and when the treasure box TBL is opened, an ∞ icon 801i appears from inside.

FIG. 2010(b) is a diagram showing an example of a probability variable state suggesting effect executed with a predetermined probability in the select mode (time reduction state or probability variable state) set to the normal symbol time reduction state. Here, in the fifty-eighth control example, a time-saving state (a gaming state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when hitting left than hitting right) is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, and when a variable probability state ( A game state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when hitting with the right hand than with the left hand is set. By adopting a secret configuration such that the degree of advantage tends to increase, the player can predict the shooting direction. However, if the firing direction (whether it is a probability variable state or a time saving state) that tends to increase the advantage is completely hidden, the player has to rely on his intuition to determine the firing direction each time. and it may be difficult to increase interest. Therefore, in the fifty-eighth control example, during the variable display effect, with a predetermined probability, it is a probability variable state (that is, it is easier to increase the advantage of hitting to the right). Production and time-saving suggesting production suggesting that the expectations are high in a time-saving state (that is, the degree of advantage tends to be higher when hitting left) is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the player can select the shooting direction not only based on his/her own intuition, but also considering the execution status of the probability-variable suggestive effect and the time-saving suggestive effect. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
FIG. 2010(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the variable probability suggesting effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 2010(b), when the variable probability suggestion effect is executed, an effect is executed in which the treasure box TBR displayed at the lower right in the main display area Dm is enlarged. This presentation content can make the player think that it would be more advantageous to have the rabbit mini character 801 reach the gigantic treasure box TBR. This definite variable suggestive effect is configured so that the rate of execution is higher in the definite variable state than in the time saving state, so depending on the execution frequency of the definite variable suggestive effect, it is a definite variable state (right hitting is better The degree of advantage increases). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
Although not shown, in the time-saving suggestive effect, the effect of enlarging the treasure box TBL is executed. In addition, in the variable probability suggestion production, apart from the production mode shown in FIG. there is Although the details will be described later, the variable probability suggesting effect of the effect mode in which the treasure box TBR shines in rainbow color is configured as an effect that may be executed only in the variable probability state. In other words, the probability change suggestion effect (probability change suggestion “strong”) in which the treasure box TBR shines in rainbow colors, the probability change state is confirmed by executing it even once, whereas the effect mode in which the treasure box TBR becomes huge Probable variation suggestion production (probability variation suggestion "weak") and time-saving suggestion production in the production mode in which the treasure box TBL becomes huge only increase the expectations of the probability variation state and time-saving state, respectively, There is a possibility that it will appear in the other game state. It is structured as a performance. With these constitutions, the occurrence situation of each suggestion performance and the type of the suggestion performance that occurred are comprehensively considered, and the player is allowed to select the shooting direction while the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the fifty-eighth control example, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed as an effect for making it difficult for the player to recognize (hidden) the advantageous firing direction in the game state set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol. While the turtle mini character 865 moves to the left every time the lottery is drawn, the rabbit mini character 801 moves to the right every time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. The presentation mode is not limited to this. For example, an image simulating an arrow pointing to the left side (left-handed flow path) and an image simulating an arrow pointing to the right side (right-handed flow path) are simply displayed on the left and right sides of the main display area Dm. It's okay. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which characters or the like are used to allow the player to simply select either right-handed or left-handed to play the game.

In the 58th control example, in the time saving state and the probability variable state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player selects which game method, right hitting or left hitting, is performed as a common production mode. Although it has been configured to execute the production (select mode production) of the production mode to let (entrust), it is not limited to this, and while notifying one game method (shooting direction), at the same time, the other game method is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed in an effect mode in which the player can recognize the merit of performing. Specifically, for example, while the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues, the degree of advantage increases (the number of prize balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls fired tends to increase) Left-handed hitting is notified The player can understand that if it is a variable probability state, by hitting the right side, the number of fluctuations (the number of times of lottery of special symbols) is less than the number of times of variation (the number of times of lottery of special symbols) and the probability shifts to the latent state with a high degree of advantage. It is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation of the production|presentation mode. In addition, on the contrary, while the structure is configured to notify the right-handed hitting that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is likely to end early, if it is in the time-saving state, the period until the shift to the normal state is longer than the right-handed hitting by performing the left-handed hit. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed in an effect mode in which the player can grasp that the time tends to be long. By constructing in this way, after the end of the big win, it is possible for a player accustomed to playing a game with a general-purpose gaming machine that clearly notifies the shooting direction (game method) corresponding to the set game state. On the other hand, even if the contents of the performance cannot be understood, it can be made to think that the game ball should be shot in the notified shooting direction, and which game method should be performed in the time-saving state of the normal pattern after the end of the big win. Since it is possible to suppress confusion without understanding, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.
Next, referring to FIG. 2011, a transition method between states in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. Here, in the fifty-eighth control example, the normal state of normal symbols and the low probability state of special symbols are set, the time-saving state of normal symbols and the low probability state of special symbols are set. A time-saving state, a time-saving state of normal symbols, and a probability variable state set to a high probability state of special symbols, and a latent state of a normal state of normal symbols and a high probability state of special symbols. Four types of game states are provided.
In the normal state, the jackpot probability is set to a low probability (probability of about 1/196), and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open (normal pattern fluctuation time is long, normal pattern hit probability is low, and normal pattern The opening period of the electric accessory 2640a when it becomes a hit is shortened) and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely long (600 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol) , it is necessary to play a game aiming at entering the first ball entrance 64, which is relatively difficult to enter, in a left-handed game. A disadvantageous game state is formed in which the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated.
In addition, in the time saving state, the jackpot probability is the same as in the normal state (about 1/196), but the electric accessory 64a is easier to open (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state of the normal symbol, The probability of winning the normal pattern increases, and the opening period of the electric accessory 2640a becomes longer when the normal pattern wins). can be entered, and a game state is formed in which the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed more efficiently than in a normal state. Furthermore, in the time saving state in the fifty-eighth control example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state (30 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol), so right hitting is performed. The game efficiency in this case is higher than in the normal state. Furthermore, in the lottery of the second special symbol, a small winning prize is won with a high probability (probability of about 1/2), and the specific winning opening 2650a of the small winning prize device 2650 is opened. , an opportunity to win a prize ball (15 balls for each ball entered) based on the ball entering the specific winning hole 2650a can be obtained approximately once per minute on average. That is, between left-handed and right-handed, left-handed is slightly more advantageous in terms of game efficiency, but compared to right-handed in a normal state, right-handed is more advantageous (game efficiency). Since the game is dramatically improved, it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select a game method of daring to hit to the right in the time saving state as one of options. This time-saving state is ended when the number of lotteries of the first special pattern reaches 95 or the number of lotteries of the second special pattern reaches 5, and a disadvantageous normal state is set.

In addition, in the probability variable state, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened like the time saving state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state. 104), a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the time-saving state is formed. In this probability variable state, similarly to the time-saving state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 when hitting to the left, and even if hitting to the right, it is more efficient than in the normal state. It is possible to play games. In addition, the probability variation state includes the probability variation state that continues until the next big hit, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol after the probability variation state is set reaches 95 times, or the second special symbol. and a variable probability state that is terminated based on the number of lotteries of (1) reaching 5 times, and after the variable probability state is terminated, the latent probability state is set.
Further, in the latent certainty state, the electric accessory 64a is difficult to be opened like the normal state, but the probability of a big hit is high (approximately 1/104), and the game state is set to the time-saving state of normal symbols. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than (time saving state or probability variable state) (3 seconds is determined as the variation time at a rate of 95% or more), I hit the right rather than the left. A game state is formed in which the degree of advantage is greatly increased. That is, when the player hits to the right in the latent certainty state, the lottery for the second special symbol is frequently executed, and the small winning with a probability of about 1/2 is frequently won in the lottery for the second special symbol. As a result, the small winning game can be easily executed continuously in a short period of time, forming an advantageous game state in which the winning balls based on the balls entering the specific winning opening 2650a of the small winning prize winning device 2650 are frequently paid out. In other words, in order to form an extremely advantageous game state in which the player can continue to receive the payout of prize balls equal to or greater than the number of game balls fired even if the jackpot is not won, when the latent state is set, the player can It is possible to have a great sense of satisfaction and pleasure in playing the game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Since this latent definite state continues until the next big win is won, a lottery result different from the big win continues to be given to the player rather than winning the big win, and a prize based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 2650a. It is possible to realize a novel playability that makes the player expect more to keep winning balls. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Hereinafter, the state transition method in each of the four states of the normal state, the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state will be described.
First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 2011, the method of shifting from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 2011, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when the jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 2011, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, if the jackpot type is jackpot A61 (probability variable jackpot), the gaming state after the jackpot ends It is set to a variable state. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot B61 (normal jackpot), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. Therefore, in the normal state, winning the variable probability jackpot (jackpot A61) is more advantageous than winning the normal jackpot (jackpot B61). It should be noted that, although not shown in the drawings, if the second special symbol lottery wins the probability variable jackpot (jackpot C61, D61) in the normal state, the jackpot is the same as when the probability variable jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. When the gaming state after the end is set to the variable probability state and the normal jackpot (jackpot E61) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, after the jackpot is finished in the same way as when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. The game state of is set to the time saving state. Here, the case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state means the case where the game ball enters the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting right in the normal state, or the second game ball enters in the time saving state. It is a case where the time saving number of times is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state while the reserved ball of the special symbol is reserved.
Next, with reference to the middle left side of FIG. 2011, a method of shifting from the variable probability state to another state will be described. As shown in the middle left side of FIG. 2011, there is a possibility of shifting from the variable probability state to another state when the jackpot is won or when the time-saving number of times has passed without winning the jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the middle left side of FIG. 2011, when the player performs a left-handed game in the variable probability state and wins the normal jackpot (jackpot B61) in the first special symbol lottery, and when the player hits the right When a hitting game is performed and a normal jackpot (jackpot E61) is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the game state after the jackpot is finished is set to a time-saving state. In addition, the number of time reductions has passed without winning the jackpot in the variable probability state (after the jackpots A61 and D61, the lottery of the first special pattern has been completed 95 times, or the lottery of the second special pattern has been completed 5 times). In the case, the game state is set directly to the most advantageous latent state (without going through the jackpot game). On the other hand, when the player plays the left-handed game in the probability variable state and wins the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A61) in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the player plays the right-handed game and wins the lottery of the second special symbol When the normal jackpot (either jackpot C61 or D61) is won, the game state after the jackpot is finished is again set to the probability variable state (the probability variable state is looped). Therefore, in the probability variable state, the gaming state (latent probability state) that is set as a result of the number of times of time saving has passed rather than the gaming state (either probability variable state or time saving state) that is set as a result of winning the jackpot ) has a higher degree of advantage, so it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one expect that the jackpot will not be won. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 2011, a method of shifting from the time saving state to another state will be described. As shown in the middle right side of FIG. 2011, there is a possibility that the time saving state may shift to another state when the jackpot is won or when the number of time saving times has passed without winning the jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the middle right side of FIG. 2011, when the player performs a left-handed game in the time saving state and wins the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A61) in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the player is on the right When a hitting game is performed and a probability variable big win (either big win C61 or D61) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the game state after the big win is set to a probability variable state. Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of time saving has elapsed without winning the jackpot (after the jackpots B61 and E61, the lottery of the first special pattern has been completed 95 times, or the lottery of the second special pattern has been completed 5 times). In the case, the game state is directly set to the most disadvantageous normal state (without going through the jackpot game). On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the player plays the left-handed game and wins the normal jackpot (jackpot B61) in the first special symbol lottery, and when the player plays the right-handed game and the second special symbol lottery When the normal jackpot (jackpot E61) is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the time saving state (the time saving state is looped). Therefore, in the time-saving state, the game state (either probability variable state or time-saving state) that is set as a result of winning the jackpot is the game state (normal state) that is set as a result of the number of time-saving times ), the game can be played in anticipation of winning a jackpot.
In addition, as described above, in the fifty-eighth control example, it is configured to execute a common effect mode in the time saving state and the variable probability state, and whether the player is set in the time saving state or in the variable probability state It is difficult to distinguish between Therefore, let the player predict whether the time saving state is set or the probability variable state is set, and if it is predicted that it is set to the probability variable state, the game method in which the number of times of time saving is likely to pass (time saving number of times While selecting the right-handed game in which the lottery of the second special symbol with a small number of lotteries until the end is executed), when it is predicted that the time-saving state is set, the game method in which the number of times of time-saving does not easily pass ( It is possible to realize a novel game property that allows selection of a left-handed game in which a lottery of the first special symbol is executed with a large number of lotteries until the number of times of time saving ends. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 2011, a method of shifting from the latent state to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 2011, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another state only when a big win is won. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 2011, when the player performs a right-handed game in the latent state and wins the probability variable jackpot (either jackpot C61 or D61) in the lottery of the second special symbol , The game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state. In addition, when the player plays the right-handed game in the latent probability state and wins the normal jackpot (jackpot E61) in the lottery of the second special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. In addition, although omitted for illustration, if you win the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A61) in the first special symbol lottery in the latent state, the jackpot ends in the same way as when you win the probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. When the subsequent game state is set to the probability variable state and the normal jackpot (jackpot B61) is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, the same as when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, after the jackpot is finished. The game state is set to the time saving state. Here, the case where the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the latent probability state means the case where the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left in the latent probability state, or in the probability variable state. This is a case where the number of times of shortening the working hours of the first special symbol is completed in a state in which the holding of the first special symbol is accumulated by playing the left-handed game, and the state is shifted to the latent definite state.
As described above, in the fifty-eighth control example, four game states with different degrees of advantage are alternated, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in the 58th Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 2012, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 of the fifty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 2012 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 2012, the ROM 202 in the fifty-eighth control example has a first winning random number table 202sa instead of the first winning random number table 202Ga in the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described forty-fifth control example (see FIG. 1291). is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202sb is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202Gb, a variation pattern table 202sd is provided instead of the variation pattern table 202Gd, a small hit random number table 202Ge The point is that a small hit random number table 202se is provided instead of and a variation pattern scenario table 202sj is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202Gj. Since other configurations are the same as those of the forty-fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 2014(a), details of the first winning random number table 202sa in the fifty-eighth control example will be described.
FIG. 2014(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202sa in the fifty-eighth control example. This first winning random number table 202sa, like the first winning random number table 202Ga (see FIG. 1233(a)) in the 45th control example, determines whether or not a special symbol jackpot is made when a special symbol lottery is executed. It is a data table referred to for determination. As shown in FIG. 2014(a), the first winning random number table 202sa in the fifty-eighth control example is a random number value (counter value of the first winning type counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol. A range and a range of random numbers (counter values) determined as a jackpot in a high probability state of special symbols are defined respectively.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2014 (a), 335 random numbers (counter value ) is specified. Also, a range of 630 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 629" is defined as the random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big win in the high probability state of the special symbol. In the fifty-eighth control example, since the first winning random number counter C1 can take 65536 values of "0 to 65535", it is determined as a big hit when a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol low probability state. probability is about 1/196 (335/65536), and the probability of being determined as a big hit when the special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is about 1/104 (630/65536) is. In both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol, the first winning random number table 202sa is referenced to determine whether or not the winning is a big win.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2014(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202sb in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. This jackpot type selection table 202sb is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202Gb (see FIG. 1233(b)) in the forty-fifth control example described above, in order to select the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained in a special symbol lottery. is a data table referenced by FIG. 2014(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202sb in the fifty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 2014(b), in the jackpot type selection table 202sb in the fifty-eighth control example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type to be selected correspond to each type of special symbol. It is stipulated with

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2014(b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A61" is set. A "jackpot B61" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99".
Both “jackpot A61” and “jackpot B61” are jackpots with five rounds. On the other hand, after the "jackpot A61" is finished, the game state is set to a variable probability state with a relatively high degree of advantage, and after the "jackpot B61" is finished, the game state is set to a time-saving state with a relatively low degree of advantage. . Therefore, the "jackpot A61" is more advantageous than the "jackpot B61" in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A61" and "jackpot B61" Since the numbers are both 50, the ratio of determining the "jackpot A61" and the percentage of determining the "jackpot B61" when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols are both 50% (50/100). ). That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state and the ratio of shifting to the time saving state are equal, so the game state after the end of the big win is the variable probability state or the time saving state. Predicting which is more difficult can be made. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more seriously whether to hit the right hand while predicting the probability variable state or to hit the left hand while predicting the time-saving state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. can be made
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2014 (b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot C61" is defined in correspondence. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 49", the "jackpot D61" is associated and defined, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 99" On the other hand, "jackpot E61" is defined in association with it.

“Jack C61” to “Jack E61” are all jackpots with five rounds. On the other hand, after the "jackpot C61" and "jackpot D61" are completed, the game state is set to a variable state with a relatively high advantage, and after the "jackpot E61", the game state is set to a relatively low advantage. It is set to short working hours. Therefore, the "big win C61" and the "big win D61" are more advantageous than the "big win E61" in terms of the gaming state after the big win. After the end of "jackpot C61", the probability change state is maintained until the next jackpot is substantially won, whereas after the end of "jackpot D61", the first special symbol lottery is 95 times. It is executed or the lottery of the second special symbol is executed five times, so that the time saving number of times passes and it shifts to the latent state with the highest degree of advantage. Therefore, the "big win D61" that can shift to the latent definite state is more advantageous than the "big win C61" that has no possibility of shifting to the advantageous latent state.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, random numbers associated with "jackpot C61", "jackpot D61", and "jackpot E61" Since the numbers of (counter values) are 10, 40, and 50, respectively, the ratio of determining the "jackpot C61" when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is 10% (10/100 ), the percentage of determining the “jackpot D61” is 40% (40/100), and the percentage of determining the “jackpot E61” is 50% (50/100). That is, in the same way as when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, even when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the ratio of shifting to the variable probability state and the ratio of shifting to the time saving state are equal. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict whether the game state after the end of the big win is the probability variable state or the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more seriously whether to hit the right hand while predicting the probability variable state or to hit the left hand while predicting the time-saving state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. can be made
Next, details of the variation pattern table 202sd in the fifty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 2015(a). This variation pattern table 202sd is similar to the variation pattern table 202Gd (see FIG. 1234(b)) in the above-described 45th control example, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern (variation This is a data table referenced to select time). FIG. 2015(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this variation pattern table 202sd. As shown in FIG. 2015 (a), the variation pattern table 202sd in the fifty-eighth control example is for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (normal state). A normal table 202sd1, a time saving/probability variation table 202sd2 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state or a probability variation state, and a normal symbol in a time saving state or a probability variation state A time-saving final variation table 202sd3 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when the last special symbol lottery before shifting from the time-saving state to the normal state of normal symbols is executed, and a special in the latent state. It comprises at least a latency table 202sd4 for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a symbol lottery is executed. Here, the normal table 202sd1 has the same defined contents as the normal table 202Gd1 (see FIG. 1234(c)) in the above-described 45th control example (when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a relatively short fluctuation When the time (7 seconds to 140 seconds) is selected and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the extremely long fluctuation time (600 seconds) is selected), so here are the details We omit detailed explanations. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the normal table 202sd1 is referred to, so that the game efficiency can be extremely deteriorated when the second special symbol lottery is executed by hitting to the right. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state, and it is possible to make the player surely perform the game method of executing the lottery for the first special symbol by hitting to the left.
Drawing 2015 (b) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of table 202sd2 for time reduction and probability variation mentioned above. As shown in FIG. 2015(b), of the time saving/probability variation table 202sd2, the defined contents corresponding to the first special symbol are the time saving/probability variation A table 202Gd2 in the above-described 45th control example (see FIG. 1235) (When the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, a relatively short variation time (3 seconds to 25 seconds) is selected), so here for the detailed explanation are omitted. In addition, for the second special symbol, regardless of the result of the lottery, it is defined that a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds is always selected. In the time saving state and the probability variable state, by referring to the time saving/probability variable table 202sd2, it is possible not only to efficiently execute the lottery of the first special symbol by left hitting, but also the efficiency is slightly lower than left hitting. However, it is also possible to advance the game by executing the lottery for the second special symbol by hitting to the right. Specifically, when the right-handed stroke is continued, an average of 2.45 small hits is won by the time the lottery of the second special pattern is completed 5 times when the time saving state of the normal pattern is terminated, and 5 The period required from the end of the lottery of the second special pattern to the end of the time-saving state of the normal pattern is about 80 seconds on average when the small winning game period is taken into account. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth control example can shoot a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute, the maximum number of game balls that can be shot in 80 seconds by hitting to the right is about There are 133.3. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game is 45 on average by continuing to hit right during the small winning game (calculation that an average of 3 game balls enter the specific winning hole 2650a). Therefore, the total number of prize balls paid out in an average of 2.45 small wins is 110.25. In other words, in the time-saving state and the probability variable state, when the game method is performed to end the time-saving state of the normal pattern early by hitting to the right, about 23 (133.3 - 110.25) possession balls for the end of the jackpot As a result, compared to left-handed hitting, which can almost maintain the ball, there is a slight loss in terms of the ball. However, when the probability variable state is set, the possibility of shifting to the most advantageous latent certainty state increases, and the period until the transition to the latent certainty state is extremely short compared to left-handed hitting, Even if the small winning game is frequently executed and the big winning does not occur, the game state can be shifted to an advantageous game state in which the number of possessed balls can be increased more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select whether to hit the right side or the left side in the time saving state and the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.

Next, with reference to Drawing 2016 (a), the details of table 202sd3 for the time saving last change mentioned above are explained. FIG. 2016(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time-saving final variation table 202sd3. As shown in FIG. 2016(a), this time-saving final variation table 202sd3 has regulation contents in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds is always selected regardless of the type of special symbol and the result of the lottery. . For this reason, when the last special symbol lottery before switching from the time-saving state of normal symbols to the normal state of normal symbols is executed, the variable display effect of 15 seconds can be executed, so the normal state of normal symbols is set. Sufficient length (15 seconds) production period to notify whether it will shift to a normal state with a low degree of advantage, shift to the most advantageous latent state, or win a jackpot with that change. can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2016(b), the details of the latency confirmation table 202sd4 will be described. FIG. 2016(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this latency table 202sd4. As shown in FIG. 2016 (b), as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "first special symbol", if the success or failure determination result is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the variation type counter CS1 For all possible value ranges (range of "0 to 198"), "long out" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is defined in association, and if the result of the judgment is "jackpot", the fluctuation type counter A "long win" with a variation time of 600 seconds is defined in association with all possible value ranges of CS1 (range of "0 to 198").
On the other hand, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "second special symbol", if the result of the determination is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 189""Shortout" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with the range, and "various normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds for the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "190 to 196" are defined in association with each other, and "various types of super reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined in association with the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "197, 198". In addition, when the success/failure determination result is a "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with "various types of normal reach" with a variation time of 20 seconds. The value of the type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 198", and "various types of super reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other.
Due to these provisions, in the latent state, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, an extremely long fluctuation time is set, while when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the comparison Since the short fluctuation time is set, the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed by hitting to the right, and as a result of the frequent execution of the small winning game, the prize by the small winning game until the next big winning. To form an extremely advantageous game state in which balls can be continuously put out intermittently. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2017(a), details of the small hit random number table 202se in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. Drawing 2017 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of this small hit random number table 202se. As shown in FIG. 2017 (a), in the small hit random number table 202se in the fifty-eighth control example, as a random number determined as a small hit in the special symbol lottery (counter value of the first hit random number counter C1), While no value is associated with the first special symbol, a range of "630 to 65535" is associated and defined with respect to the second special symbol. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol is 32138. Since it is 1 piece, the ratio of determination as a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is about 49% (32187/65536). Taking into account the probability of a big win, a small win or a big win is won at a rate of 50% in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to form an advantageous game state in which a small winning game is frequently executed when hitting to the right in the latent certainty state. On the other hand, as described above, since the random number value determined to be a small hit is not defined for the first special symbol, the lottery for the first special symbol cannot win a small hit.
Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the fifty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 2017(b). FIG. 2017(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the fifty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 2017(b), in the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the fifty-eighth control example, a special symbol lottery is executed for each special symbol lottery number executed after the last big win type and the end of the big win. The type of the variation pattern table referred to in the case of is associated and defined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2017(b), as a variation pattern scenario in the normal state after initialization (that is, before winning the jackpot), regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries, the normal table 202sd1 A variation pattern scenario (scenario 1) is defined. Also, as shown in FIG. 2017 (b), as a variation pattern scenario when the previous jackpot type is either jackpot A61 or D61, the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is less than 95 times, and the second special Table 202sd2 for time saving and probability variation 61 (see FIG. 2015 (b)) is referred to in the range where the number of lotteries of the symbol is less than 5 times, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 95 times (And the lottery of the second special symbol number of times is less than 5 times), or the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 5 times (and the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is less than 95 times), the time saving final variation table 202sd3 (see FIG. 2016 (a) ) is referenced, and the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is 96 or more, or the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 6 or more. A variation pattern scenario (scenario 2) is defined.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2017 (b), as a variation pattern scenario when the previous jackpot type is either jackpot B61 or E61, the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is less than 95 times, and the second special Table 202sd2 for time saving and probability variation 61 (see FIG. 2015 (b)) is referred to in the range where the number of lotteries of the symbol is less than 5 times, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 95 times (And the lottery of the second special symbol number of times is less than 5 times), or the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 5 times (and the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is less than 95 times), the time saving final variation table 202sd3 (see FIG. 2016 (a) ) is referenced, and the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is 96 times or more, or the variation pattern scenario (scenario 3) in which the normal table 202sd1 is referenced in the range where the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 6 times or more is stipulated. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2017 (b), as a variation pattern scenario when the previous jackpot type is the jackpot C61, the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is less than 95 times, and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is In the range of less than 5 times, the table 202sd2 for 61 for time saving and probability variation (see FIG. 2015 (b)) is referred to, and the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is 95 times (and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is less than 5 times. ), or the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 5 times (and the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is less than 95 times). The number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 96 times or more, or the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 6 times or more. Table 202sd2 for time saving / probability variation 61 (see Fig. 2015 (b)) is referred. A variation pattern scenario (scenario 4) is defined.
According to the stipulated contents of this variation pattern scenario table 202sj, until the number of lotteries of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit reaches 95 or the number of times of the lottery of the second special symbol reaches 5, regardless of the jackpot type. Since the variation pattern is selected with reference to the same variation pattern table, it is possible to make it more difficult to guess the game state after the end of the big win. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting whether the game state set as the game state after the end of the big win is the probability variable state or the time saving state more seriously for the player. Interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2013, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 2013 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 2013, the RAM 203 in the fifty-eighth control example has a special figure 1 small per flag 203qc and a special figure 1 lottery counter 203Ga for the configuration of the RAM 203 in the forty-fifth control example described above (see FIG. 1232). , a variable probability setting flag 203Gd, a variable probability passing counter 203Ge, a winning number counter 203Gf, an operation counter 203Gg, a remaining ball timer flag 203Gi, a remaining ball timer 203Gj, a variable probability effective flag 203Gk, a variable probability effective timer 203Gm, The only difference is that the discharge number counter 203Gn is omitted. The deletion of these configurations is mainly due to the specification that gives a variable probability state when V winning is detected in the jackpot game, which was installed in the 45th control example in the 58th control example, and the lottery of the first special symbol. This is a change due to the abolition of the specification that can win a small hit. Since other configurations are the same as those of the forty-fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2018(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 2018(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 2018(a), the ROM 222 in the fifty-eighth control example has a mini-character suggestive structure in contrast to the configuration of the ROM 222 (see FIG. 163(a)) in the forty-fifth control example (and the fourth control example). The difference is that a selection table 222sa is added and a lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is deleted.
The mini-character suggestive selection table 222sa is a mini-character production (a production in which the turtle character 865 or the rabbit character 801 goes on the road) in the game state (time-saving state and probability variable state) set to the time-saving state of normal symbols. 4 is a data table referenced for selecting aspects; Details of the mini-character suggestion selection table 222sa will be described with reference to FIG. 2018(b).
FIG. 2018(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the mini-character suggestion selection table 222sa. As shown in FIG. 2018(b), the mini-character suggestion selection table 222sa defines, for each game state, the effect type of the mini-character suggestion effect and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2018(b), in the case of the variable probability state, the value “0” of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to the “variable probability suggestion (strong)” effect type (treasure box on the right) Suggestive effect of the effect mode in which TBR changes to rainbow color) is defined in association, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “1 to 8”, and the effect type ( A suggestive effect of the effect mode in which the treasure box TBR on the right side is enlarged) is defined in association with the value "9" of the first effect counter 223f1, and the effect type of "suggestion of time saving" (the treasure box TBL on the left side is enlarged) A suggestive effect of the effect mode to be played) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "10 to 99", and an effect type of "no suggestion" is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1. That is, among the 100 random numbers (counter value) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first production counter 223f1, "probability variation suggestion (strong)", "probability variation suggestion (weak)", "time saving suggestion", and Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "no suggestion" is 1, 8, 1, and 90, respectively, 1% when a special symbol lottery is executed in the variable state At a rate of (1/100), the suggestion production of "Probability Suggestion (Strong)" is executed, and at a rate of 8% (8/100), the suggestion production of "Probability Suggestion (Weak)" is executed, 1% (1 /100), the suggestive effect of "time saving suggestion" is executed, and the suggestive effect is not executed at a ratio of 90% (90/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 2018 (b), in the case of the time saving state, the value of the first production counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 4", the production type (right side (suggestive effect of the effect mode in which the treasure box TBR of the left) is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “5 to 9”, and the effect type of “suggestion of time saving” (the left treasure box Suggestive effect of the effect mode in which the TBL becomes huge) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "10 to 99", and the effect type of "no suggestion" is defined in correspondence. ing. On the other hand, the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is not associated with the effect type of "variable probability suggestion (strong)" (suggestive effect of the effect mode in which the treasure box TBR on the right side changes to a rainbow color). That is, among the 100 random numbers (counter value) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first production counter 223f1, "probability variation suggestion (strong)", "probability variation suggestion (weak)", "time saving suggestion", and Since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "no suggestion" is 0, 5, 5, and 90, respectively, 5% when the special symbol lottery is executed in the variable state At a rate of (5/100), the suggestion production of “probable variable suggestion (weak)” is executed, and the suggestion production of “time saving suggestion” is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100), 90% (90/100) It is configured so that the suggested production is not executed at a ratio of
According to these stipulations, while the common production mode (see FIG. 2007) is set for the time saving state and the probability variable state, the suggestion production of "probability variation suggestion (strong)" that cannot be executed in the time saving state is executed. At the time point, the player can be made to recognize that it is in the variable probability state. In addition, when the suggestion effect of "probability change suggestion (weak)", which has a higher probability of being executed in the probability change state than the time saving state, is executed, the player has an expectation that the probability change state is set. can be held and can be made to hit the right more aggressively. In addition, when the suggestive performance of ``suggesting time saving'', in which the rate of execution of the time saving state is higher than that of the variable variable state, is executed, the player is made to recognize that the possibility of setting the time saving state is high. It is possible to make the left-handed hit more aggressive. Thus, in the fifty-eighth control example, basically, a common production mode is set for the time saving state and the variable probability state. Since it is configured so that the player can guess whether it is in the state or the probability variable state, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2019, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 2019 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 2019, the RAM 223 in the fifty-eighth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the forty-fifth control example (and the fourteenth control example) (see FIG. 410). And it is different in that the notification counter 223sb for special figure 2 is added. In addition, it is also different in that the special figure lottery counter 223lc, the counter 223qa during the addition RUSH, the base number counter 223qb, and the addition number counter 223qc are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the forty-fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The special figure 1 notification counter 223sa and the special figure 2 notification counter 223sb are the number of lotteries that the time saving state of the normal symbol can be ended in the game state (probability variable state and time saving state) set to the time saving state of the normal symbol (first It is a counter referred to for determining whether or not the number of lotteries for the special symbol is 95 times or the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 5 times. If the value of these special figure 1 notification counter 223sa and special figure 2 notification counter 223sb is 1 or more, it means that it is the number of lotteries that the time saving state of the normal symbol can not be terminated, and the value of any counter When becomes 0, it means that the lottery number of times that the time saving state of the normal symbol can be ended has reached, and a mini character effect (Fig. 2008 (b), Fig. 2009) for notifying the game state after the time saving state is ended. , see FIG. 2010(a)) is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifty-eighth control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2020 to 2023. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 2020, the special figure 1 game state update process (Y301K), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 1240) in the fifty-eighth control example, will be described. This special figure 1 game state update process (Y301K) is a process executed in place of the special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 1243) in the 45th control example described above, and special figure 1 game state update process ( FIG. 1243 reference), by updating the values of various counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, it is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10. Figure 2020 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 1 game state update processing (Y301K).
Of this special figure 1 game state update process (Y301K), in each process of Y602G to Y605G, each process of Y602G to Y605G of the special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 1243) in the 45th control example described above respectively The same processing is performed. In addition, in the special figure 1 game state update process (Y301K) in the 58th control example, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 after subtraction is 0 in the process of Y605G (Y605G: Yes) , determines whether the variable probability flag 203Gc is on (Y601K). In the process of Y601K, when it is determined that the variable probability flag 203Gc is ON (Y601K: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (Y602K), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y601K, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203Gc is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y601K: No), the state command indicating the normal state is set (Y603K), and this process is terminated. do.
By executing this special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 2020), every time the first special symbol lottery is executed in the game state set to the normal symbol time saving state, special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 The value of can be updated, and when the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 becomes 0, the time saving state is terminated and the probability state with the highest degree of advantage or the normal state with the lowest degree of advantage can be set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2021, the special figure 2 game state update process (Y801K), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 1246) in the fifty-eighth control example, will be described. This special figure 2 game state update process (Y801K) is a process that is executed instead of the special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 1249) in the 45th control example described above, and special figure 2 game state update process ( FIG. 1249 reference), by updating the values of various counters indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, it is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10. Figure 2021 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 game state update processing (Y801K).

Of this special figure 2 game state update process (Y801K), each process of Y851G to Y854G is the same as each process of Y851G to Y854G of the special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 1249) in the 45th control example. Processing is performed. Also, in the process of Y854G, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hour-saving counter 203h2 after subtraction is 0 (Y854G: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203Gc is on (Y851K) If it is determined that the variable probability flag 203Gc is ON (Y851K: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (Y852K), and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of Y851K, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203Gc is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y851K: No), the state command indicating the normal state is set (Y853K), and this process ends. do.
By executing this special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 2021), every time the second special symbol lottery is executed in the game state normally set to the time saving state of the symbol, special figure 2 time saving counter 203h2 The value of can be updated, and when the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h2 becomes 0, the time saving state is terminated and the probability state with the highest degree of advantage or the normal state with the lowest degree of advantage can be set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2022, the contents of the jackpot control process (Y1001K) executed in the main process will be described. FIG. 2022 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (Y1001K). Of this jackpot control processing (Y1001K), Y11601, Y11602, Y11604, Y11605, Y11610 to Y11612 and Y1901G, respectively, Y11601, Y11602, Y11604, Y11605 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 1252) in the 45th control example , Y11610 to Y11612 and Y1901G are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (Y1001K) in the fifty-eighth control example, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of Y11605 (Y11605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning hole is set ( Y1901K), sets a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (Y1902K), and terminates this process. If it is determined in the process of Y11605 that it is not the time to start a new round (Y11605: No), the process proceeds to Y11610.
In the process of Y11612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (Y11612: Yes), the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (Y1903K), and this process is ended. Details of the jackpot ending process (Y1903K) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Y11612, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (Y11612: No), this process is terminated as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2023, the jackpot end process (Y1903K), which is one process of the jackpot control process (FIG. 2022) in the fifty-eighth control example described above, will be described. This jackpot end process (Y1903K) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 2023 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (Y1903K). Of this jackpot end processing (Y1903K), the processing of Y2702G is the same as the processing of Y2702G of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 1254) in the 45th control example.
Also, in the jackpot end processing (Y1903K) in the fifty-eighth control example, first, it is determined whether it is a normal jackpot (Y2701K), and when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (Y2701K: No), the processing of Y2702G is performed. Then, it is determined whether it is a jackpot C61 (Y2702K). In the process of Y2702K, when it is determined that it is a big hit C61 (Y2702K: Yes), by setting 65535 to each of the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 and the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2, substantially Then, set to a probability variable state that continues until the next big hit (Y2703K), and the process proceeds to Y2705K. On the other hand, in the process of Y2702K, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot C61 (Y2702K: No), the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 is set to 95, and the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 is set to 5 (Y2704K ), and the process proceeds to Y2705K.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2701K, when it is determined that it is a normal jackpot (Y2701K: Yes), the process proceeds to Y2704K. In addition, in the process of Y2705, the state command is set based on the values of the variable probability flag 203Gc and various time-saving counters (Y2705K), and the flag 203k during the jackpot is set to OFF (Y2706K). Next, a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the current jackpot is specified from the variation pattern scenario table 202sj (Y2707K), data indicating the specified scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 203Gb (Y2708K), and this process is terminated.
By executing this jackpot end processing (Fig. 2023), at the end of the jackpot other than the jackpot C61, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed 95 times regardless of whether the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot. Alternatively, it is possible to set the time-saving state of normal symbols that continues until the lottery of the second special symbols is executed five times. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol is likely to be terminated (the duration of the time saving state of the normal symbol is likely to be short). The continuation period of the time saving state is likely to be a long period). In other words, when it is predicted that the set game state is a probability variable state, the right-handed game normally ends the time-saving state of the symbol early and shifts to a latent state with a high degree of advantage. When the time saving state is predicted, the time saving state of the normal pattern is continued for a longer time by the left-handed game, and a novel game property is realized in which the player can expect to win a jackpot before shifting to the normal state.例文帳に追加can do. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the fifty-eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2024 to 2028, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. In the fifty-eighth control example, the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4201G), which is one of the command determination processing (see FIG. 59), is changed from the above-described forty-fifth control example (and the first control example). , the special figure 1 production mode setting process (S4901G) which is one process of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is changed, and the special figure which is one process of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) The difference is that the content of the 2 effect mode setting process (S4902G) is changed, and the rest is the same. It should be noted that each control example described above and the technical concept described in each control example are naturally applied to the fifty-eighth control example, and the control examples described above and each control example have been described. Modifications and additions are naturally applied to the fifty-eighth control example.
First, with reference to FIG. 2024, the jackpot-related processing (S4201K) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. This jackpot-related process (S4201K) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 1257) in the above-described 45th control example. It is a process for performing control according to the type of the jackpot-related command received from. FIG. 2024 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot related process (S4201K).

Of the jackpot related processing (S4201K), in the processing of S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714, S4705G and S4706G, S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714 and S4705G of the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 1257) in the 45th control example, respectively and S4706G are executed. In addition, in the jackpot related process (S4201K) in the fifty-eighth control example, in the process of S4701, when it is determined that the opening command is received (S4701: Yes), the process of S4805G is executed, and then the process of S4706G is performed. Execute and terminate this process.
Also, in the process of S4709, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4709: Yes), the process of S4710 is executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S4714, when it is determined that the ending command is received (S4714: Yes), the effect mode indicating entry into the select mode is determined (S4701K), and then the special figure 1 notification counter 223sa is set to 95 , 5 is set to the special figure 2 notification counter 223sb (S4702K), and the process proceeds to S4710G.
By executing this jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 2024), after the jackpot ends, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed 95 times or when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed five times, Whether or not the time saving state of normal symbols is terminated, and when the time saving state of normal symbols is terminated, the game state after termination can also be notified. Therefore, when the notification timing comes, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2025, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4901K) in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4901K) is a process executed in place of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 1258) in the 45th control example described above, and the special figure 1 effect mode setting process ( Figure 1258 reference), it is the processing in order to decide the production feature of the fluctuation display production in order to show the lottery result in the 1st special design. Figure 2025 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S4901K).

Of this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4901K), in each process of S5001G, S5002G, and S5009, S5001G, S5002G, and S5009 of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 1258) in the 45th control example respectively are executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4901K) in the fifty-eighth control example, in the process of S5001G, if it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S5001G: No), then the current state is the potential state. (S5001K), and if it is determined to be in the latent state (S5001K: Yes), the process proceeds to S5002G. On the other hand, in the processing of S5001K, when it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5001K: No), the special figure 1 mini character for setting the mini character effect considering the lottery result of the first special symbol. Effect setting processing is executed (S5002K), and the processing proceeds to S5003K. The details of this special figure 1 mini character effect setting process (S5002K) will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the processing of S5002K ends, it is then determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is being displayed in a variable manner (S5003K), and if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S5003K : No), the process proceeds to S5002G. On the other hand, in the process of S5003K, when it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S5003K: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost (S5004K), When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is lost (S5004K: Yes), the effect mode of loss in the small display area is set (S5005K), and the process proceeds to S5009.
On the other hand, in the process of S5004K, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not lost (S5004K: No), whether the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is the variable display corresponding to the big hit. It is determined whether or not (S5006K), and if it is determined that the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is not the variation display corresponding to the big hit (that is, the variation display corresponding to the loss) (S5006K: No ), a special effect mode in which the variation display effect of the second special symbol is terminated and the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started is determined (S5007K), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, in the processing of S5006K, when it is determined that the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is the variation display corresponding to the big hit (S5006K: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol ends first. (S5008K).
In the process of S5008K, when it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol is not finished first (S5008K: No), the process proceeds to S5007K. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol ends first (S5008K: Yes), the effect mode of the deviation in the small display area is set (S5009K), and the process proceeds to S5009. By executing this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 2025), it is possible to suitably set the variable display effect of the first special symbol according to the game state and the situation of the variable display of the second special symbol. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2026, the special figure 1 mini character effect setting process (S5002K), which is one process of the above-described special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 2025), will be described. FIG. 2026 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 1 mini character effect setting process (S5002K). In this special figure 1 mini character effect setting process (S5002K), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 notification counter 223sa is greater than 0 (S5031K), and the value of the special figure 1 notification counter 223sa is 0. If it is determined that the value is not greater (that is, 0) (S5031K: No), it means that the game state notification by the mini-character effect has already ended, and this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5031K, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 223sa for special figure 1 is a value greater than 0 (S5031K: Yes), the value of the notification counter 223sa for special figure 1 is subtracted by 1 (S5032K ), and then it is determined whether the counter value after the subtraction is 0 (S5033K).
In the processing of S5033K, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (S5033K: Yes), an effect accompanied by a mini character notification effect in a notification mode according to the current game state and the special symbol lottery result of this time. The mode is set (S5034K), and this processing ends. More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win, regardless of the game state, the turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the celebration icon 801c appears from the treasure box TBL. . In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost and the game state is the time-saving state, the turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the end icon 801e appears from the treasure box TBL. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost and the game state is a probability variable state that continues until the next big win, the turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the ∞ icon 801i appears from the treasure box TBL. is executed. Furthermore, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a loss and the game state is a variable probability state ending with the variation, the turtle mini character 865 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the V icon 801v appears from the treasure box TBL. A performance is performed.
On the other hand, in the process of S5033K, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is not 0 (S5033K: No), then the mini character suggestion selection table 222sa is referred to determine the suggested mode (S5035K), and the determined suggested mode is determined. At the same time, a mini-character effect is set in which the turtle mini-character 865 takes one step to the left (S5036K), and this processing ends.
By executing this special figure 1 mini character effect setting process (see FIG. 2026), an appropriate mini character effect can be set according to the number of special symbol lotteries, the game state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2027, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902K) in the fifty-eighth control example will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902K) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 1260) in the 45th control example described above, Special figure 2 effect mode setting process ( Figure 1260 reference), it is the processing in order to set the production mode of the fluctuation display production of the 2nd special design. Figure 2027 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S4902K).
Among the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902K), in each process of S5103G and S5107, each process of S5103G and S5107 of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 1260) in the 45th control example respectively The same processing is performed. Also, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4902K) in the 58th control example, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal state (S5101K), and if it is determined that it is the normal state (S5101K: Yes), the process proceeds to S5103G. On the other hand, in the process of S5101K, if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S5101K: No), then it is determined whether or not the current state is the latent state (S5102K). If so (S5102K: Yes), the process proceeds to S5103G.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5102K, if it is determined that the state is not the latent state (S5102K: No), the special figure 2 mini character effect setting processing for setting the mini character effect considering the lottery result of the second special symbol. is executed (S5103K), and the process proceeds to S5104K. The details of this special figure 2 mini character effect setting process (S5103K) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S5104K, it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S5104K), and when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S5104K: No), the process proceeds to S5103G. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S5104K, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S5104K: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (S5105K), and the second When it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost (S5105K: Yes), the effect mode of losing in the small display area is set (S5106K), and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105K, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not lost (S5105K: No), the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is the variable display corresponding to the big hit. (S5107K), and when it is determined that the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit variation (S5107K: No), the variation display effect of the first special symbol is terminated and the second A special effect mode in which the special symbol jackpot variation is started is determined (S5108K), and the process proceeds to S5107. On the other hand, in the processing of S5107K, when it is determined that the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is the variation display corresponding to the big hit (S5107K: Yes), the variation display of the first special symbol ends first. (S5109K), and if it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol does not end (S5109K: No), the process proceeds to S5108K.
On the other hand, in the process of S5109K, if it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol ends first (S5109K: Yes), the effect mode of the deviation in the small display area is set (S5110K), and the process proceeds to S5107. Transition. By executing this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 2027), it is possible to suitably set the variable display effect of the second special symbol according to the game state and the situation of the variable display of the first special symbol. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2028, the special figure 2 mini character effect setting process (S5103K), which is one process of the above-described special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 2027), will be described. FIG. 2028 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 2 mini character effect setting process (S5103K).
In this special figure 2 mini character effect setting process (S5103K), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 notification counter 223sb is greater than 0 (S5131K), and the value of the special figure 2 notification counter 223sb is 0. If it is determined that the value is not greater (that is, it is 0) (S5131K: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5131K, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 notification counter 223sb is greater than 0 (S5131K: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 notification counter 223sb is subtracted by 1 (S5132K ), and then it is determined whether the counter value after the subtraction is 0 (S5133K).

In the process of S5133K, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (S5133K: Yes), the effect mode with the mini character notification effect of the notification mode according to the current game state and the special figure lottery result of this time. is set (S5134K), and the process ends. More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, regardless of the game state, the rabbit mini character 801 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the celebration icon 801c appears from the treasure box TBL (Fig. 2009 ( b) see) is performed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost and the game state is the time-saving state, the rabbit mini character 801 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the end icon 801e appears from the treasure box TBL (Fig. 2009(a)). ) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost and the game state is a probability variable state that continues until the next big win, the rabbit mini character 801 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the ∞ icon 801i appears from the treasure box TBL. (See FIG. 2010(a)) is executed. Furthermore, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a loss and the game state is a variable probability state ending with the variation, the rabbit mini character 801 reaches the treasure box TBL, and the V icon 801v appears from the treasure box TBL. An effect (see FIG. 2008(b)) is executed.
On the other hand, in the process of S5133K, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is not 0 (S5133K: No), the mini character suggestion selection table 222sa is referred to determine the suggestion mode (S5135K), and the determined suggestion is determined. Along with the mode, a mini-character effect is set in which the rabbit mini-character 801 takes one step (S5136K), and this processing ends. By executing this special figure 2 mini character effect setting process (see FIG. 2028), an appropriate mini character effect can be set according to the number of special symbol lotteries, the game state, and the lottery result of the second special symbol.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth control example, the first control (variable control of the electric accessory 64a in the normal state of the normal symbol) and the first ball entrance 64 from the first control The second control (variable control of the electric accessory 64a in the time saving state of the normal symbol) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball, and the control that includes at least one control can be set. In the set predetermined state (time saving state and variable probability state), it is better to play the game with the second game method than to play the game with the first game method (left-handed). It is configured so that the period until the specific condition (time saving end condition) that triggers switching is satisfied is likely to be longer. With this configuration, a player who wants to continue the second control for a longer period of time can play the game in the first game method, while the player wants to end the second control early. For the player who thinks that this is the case, it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to play the game in the second game method, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as a method of varying the length of the period until the specific condition is established according to the game method, for example, as a specific condition (time saving end condition) that triggers switching from the second control to the first control, A first specific condition (the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is the specified number of times) that is easier to be established by playing the game with the first game method (left-handed) rather than playing the game with the second game method (right-handed). and a second specific condition (the number of lotteries for the second special symbol) that is more likely to be established by playing the game with the second game method than with the first game method. Time-saving end condition that is established when reaches a specified number of times) and are configured to be set respectively, and when the game is continued with the first game method while the second control is set, the first specific condition The number of times (95 times) of discrimination (lottery of special symbols) executed until is established is executed until the second specific condition is established when the game is continued in the second game method. A configuration may be employed in which the number of determinations is greater than the number of determinations (5 times). By configuring in this way, when a game is played in the first game method while the second control is set, it is switched to the first control unless the jackpot is won (the first specific condition is established). It is possible to execute more discrimination until the second control is set), and it is possible to lengthen the period until many discriminations are completed, while the second game method is played while the second control is set. is performed, the control is switched to the first control (the second specific condition is satisfied) with a smaller number of determinations than when playing the game with the first game method. The periods can be made different more reliably.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth control example, the second control is executed (set to a high probability state of normal symbols) in which the discrimination (lottery of special symbols) is performed easily. , Even if the game of the first game method (left-handed game) is performed, even if the game of the second game method (right-handed game) is performed, it is possible to hold more than when left-handed is performed in a disadvantageous normal state. An advantageous game in which the balls are hard to decrease can be executed. That is, when the game of the first game method (left-handed game) is performed, it is almost possible to maintain the possession balls (the number of game balls to be shot and the number of prize balls to be paid out are almost equal in design). While the configuration is such that an advantageous game can be executed, the number of prize balls paid out is slightly smaller when the game of the second game method (right-handed game) is performed than when left-handed is performed. It is configured so that a game that is advantageous to some extent can be executed. And, basically, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, when the game of the second game method (right-handed game) is performed, the time saving end condition is likely to be satisfied early, while the time saving end condition of the first game method When a game (left-handed game) is played, it is configured to make it difficult to satisfy the time-saving end condition. By configuring in this way, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, in the time saving state that shifts to the disadvantageous normal state, it is more advantageous to hit left, while when the time saving end condition is satisfied As a result of setting the normal state of the normal pattern while maintaining the high probability state of the special pattern, in the variable state that shifts to the most advantageous latent state, it is said that the degree of advantage is higher if you hit the right. It is possible to realize novel playability.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided, and when a game state with a high degree of advantage is set, a predetermined end condition is set in the game state with a high degree of advantage. is established, a game state with a high degree of advantage is terminated and another game state is set. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are provided a plurality of types of advantageous game states in which the ease with which the end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of special symbol lotteries until the end condition is satisfied is different) is provided. In some cases, the player expects the game to be set to a game state in which it is difficult to satisfy the end condition, thereby improving interest. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the game state is different, if the same end condition is set, the game can be played by a common game method regardless of the game state until the end condition is satisfied. Since the degree of advantage is the highest, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous.
On the other hand, in the 58th control example, a common end condition (time-saving end condition) is set as the end condition for ending the control (time-saving state control of normal symbols) that facilitates the execution of the special symbol lottery. In this case, it is advantageous to play the game with the first game method (left-handed game) and the second game method (right-handed game). The configuration is such that the second situation, in which the degree tends to be high, can be established. That is, a time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is higher in the left-handed game in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied, and a variable state in which the advantage is higher in the right-handed game in which the time-saving end condition is easily satisfied, is provided, and a common time-saving end condition is set for the time-saving state and the variable probability state. By configuring in this way, although the same time-saving control is set, it is possible to realize a novel game property that changes the game method according to the situation, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be improved.
In addition, in the fifty-eighth control example, the variable ball entry means (second 2 variable winning device 2065) when a variable game (jackpot game) in which the second state is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period is executed, the game state after the execution of the variable game (jackpot game) is completed. (Each time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the mini character 865 of the turtle moves to the left, and the mini character 801 of the rabbit moves to the right every time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed.) It is configured to execute a first effect (select mode effect) including at least the effect mode to advance. More specifically, as a game state after execution of the variable game (jackpot game) is completed, a time-saving state is set in which the degree of advantage tends to increase if the game is played in the first game method (left-handed game). In both cases, the first performance is executed in both the case where the second game method (right-handed game) is set and the probability variable state in which the degree of advantage is likely to increase when playing the game by the second game method (right-handed game) is set. That is, an effect is executed to make it difficult to distinguish from the effect mode whether the degree of advantage is higher by playing the game with the first game method or the degree of advantage is higher by playing the game with the second game method. configured as possible. Thereby, it is predicted whether the player should play the game by the first game method or the second game method when the first effect is executed. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game method corresponding to the prediction is executed by allowing the game to be played. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, the first effect (select mode effect) continues until a specific condition (end condition of the time saving state of normal symbols) is satisfied, and corresponds to the set game state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. It is switched to an effect that suggests the shooting direction to the player. That is, when it is set to the time-saving state, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is terminated, so that the left-handed stroke shifts to the normal state in which the degree of advantage is higher, so that the left-handed stroke is performed. A production suggesting to the person is executed. In addition, if it is set to a probability variable state, the time saving state of the normal pattern is terminated, so that the right hitting is more advantageous. A production suggesting to the person is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.
In addition, in the fifty-eighth control example, when the determination result of the determination means (lottery result of the special symbol) is a specific determination result (small win), the third state in which the game ball can enter, and the third state A fourth state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the three states, and a second variable ball entry means (small hit winning device 650) that can be changed from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period. A second game state (variable control of the electric auditors 64a in the time-saving state of the normal symbol) is set after configuring the 2 variable game (small hit game) to be executable When the second variable game (small hit game) is executed with a specific determination result (small hit) in the probability variable state), the second variable entry means (for small hit) is executed during the execution of the second variable game A game ball launched in a specific direction (on the right side of the board surface) in which the winning device 650 is provided can reach the second variable ball entry means. With this configuration, the degree of advantage of the second game state can be further improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a predetermined game state is set, by continuing to shoot game balls to a predetermined variable ball-entering means, a second game state is reached until a transition to another game state occurs. It is known that a variable game is frequently executed and a game ball is frequently entered into the second variable ball entry means in the second variable game to form a game state with an extremely high degree of advantage. In such a conventional gaming machine, in a game state other than a predetermined game state, the second variable game is difficult to be executed (for example, the execution interval of determination is extremely long) control, the second variable ball entry Set a control that makes it difficult for game balls to reach the means (for example, control that almost all game balls enter a predetermined ball entry means provided upstream of the second variable ball entry means) As a result, it is usually configured so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second variable ball-entering means in a game state other than a predetermined game state. Opportunities to obtain perks were limited.
On the other hand, in the fifty-eighth control example, not only the first game state (latency state) in which the first control (normal state of normal symbols) is set, but also the first ball entrance 64 is easily entered. Even in the second game state in which the second control is set, the game ball can be made to reach the second variable ball entry means, and a novel game property can be realized in which a privilege based on the ball entry can be obtained. That is, even in the second game state, compared to the third game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player, the second variable game is more likely to be executed, and the second variable game is executed during the execution of the second variable game. Since it is possible to obtain a predetermined privilege by making the ball enter the variable ball-entering means, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, in the fifty-eighth control example, by uniformly setting the number of rounds for the jackpot to 5 rounds, it is configured to make it difficult to guess the game state after the end of the jackpot from the number of rounds for the jackpot. It may be configured to provide a plurality of jackpot types with different numbers. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the game state after the end of the big win by making the percentage of the big win selected for each number of rounds common between the variable probability big win and the normal big win. In addition, the number of rounds with a higher percentage set for the probability variable jackpot than the normal jackpot, the number of rounds with a higher percentage set for the normal jackpot than the probability variable jackpot, the number of rounds that can be set only in the probability variable state, By providing the number of rounds or the like that is set only in the time-saving state, it is possible to realize a game property that predicts the game state after the end of the big win from the set number of rounds.
In the fifty-eighth control example, the first game method (the game method in which the predetermined advantageous game state is likely to continue for a long time) is set to the left-handed game, and the second game method (the predetermined advantageous game state is long). The game method that is difficult to continue) was set to the right-handed game, but it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which left-handed hitting is set as the second game method and right-handed hitting is set as the first game method. That is, the number of lotteries for the first special symbol until the time saving state ends may be less than the number of lotteries for the second special symbol. More specifically, for example, as the time saving end condition, a condition may be set that is established when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed 5 times or the lottery for the second special symbol is executed 95 times. By constructing in this way, in the probability variable state, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol in which the possession ball is less likely to decrease by hitting to the left, it becomes easier to shift to the latent probability state, so the possession ball becomes a little easier to decrease. Since there is no need to play a right-handed game, the degree of advantage in shifting to the latent state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Also, for example, on the right side of the board, there is a first flow path provided with a starting port that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and an electric accessory that opens and closes the starting port, and a second flow path provided with a second ball entrance 1641. A game method in which a right shot is aimed at the first flow path is defined as a first game method, and a game method in which a right shot is aimed at the second flow path is defined as a second game method. Alternatively, the game method of aiming at the first flow path and hitting to the right may be the second game method, and the game method of aiming at the second flow path and hitting to the right may be the first game method. It is good also as composition which assumes. By constructing in this way, since the game can be progressed by the right-handed game in all game states with a relatively high degree of advantage other than the normal state, it is possible to realize a more easily understandable game.

In the fifty-eighth control example, from the end of the variable game (jackpot game) until the specific condition (time-saving end condition) is established, that is, the number of games becomes a specific number (the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is 95 Until the second special symbol lottery is five times), a specific production mode that does not depend on the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed (every time the first special symbol lottery is performed) A first production (select mode production) including at least a production mode in which the mini character 865 of the turtle advances to the left and the mini character 801 of the rabbit advances to the right every time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed is executed, Based on the establishment of a specific condition, it was configured to notify the shooting direction in which the degree of advantage increases, but the specific condition (the opportunity to notify corresponding to the set game state) is limited to the time saving end condition. not a thing For example, as a specific condition (opportunity for performing notification corresponding to the set game state), it is determined whether or not to notify the shooting direction in which the degree of advantage increases each time a special symbol lottery is executed, Triggered by the determination that the shooting direction is to be announced, an effect including the notification of the shooting direction corresponding to the set game state may be executed. By configuring in this way, there is a possibility that the set game state can be known with a small number of lotteries if luck is good, and the game can be played without waste. It is possible to realize a playability that makes the player expect to be judged. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Also, for example, when the elapsed period after the end of the jackpot reaches a predetermined specific period (for example, when 5 minutes or 10 minutes have passed), the shooting direction corresponding to the set game state is changed. It is good also as composition which performs production including information. In this case, a game method is performed in which the game ball is shot in the corresponding direction after the shooting direction is notified after waiting until the specified period elapses, or the player responds to the game state expected by the player without waiting for the specified period. Since it is possible to select whether or not to start a game in which a game ball is shot in a direction, it is possible to widen the range of game characteristics. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the fifty-eighth control example, the first effect (jackpot type Although it is configured to execute the select mode effect as an effect configured including a common effect mode regardless of the mode, it is not limited to this. If it is a production mode that makes it more difficult for the player to understand whether it is advantageous to play left or right than usual (under the situation where the game state is clearly indicated) For example, until a specific condition is established, an effect may be executed in which display modes for both right-handed and left-handed shots are set. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to make the player understand that it is sufficient to select a desired shooting direction. Moreover, regardless of the game state that is set, it may be configured to notify left-handed hitting. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state of normal symbols can be continued for a longer time regardless of the game state, so that the advantageous game state can be continued for a longer time. Conversely, regardless of the game state that has been set, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is notified of hitting to the right. By constructing in this way, since the time saving state of normal symbols is terminated early regardless of the game state, the difference in the degree of advantage between the time saving state and the variable probability state can be further increased. Therefore, when the variable probability state is set and the state is shifted to the latent probability state, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction.
In the fifty-eighth control example, when the second variable game (advantageous game that is easier to be executed in a predetermined advantageous game state) is executed in the second game state (probability variable state), the first game state (latent probability state ) can reach the second variable ball entry means, and the execution interval of the second variable game is likely to be shorter in the first game state than in the second game state. Although the degree of advantage of the second game state is configured to be lower than that of the first game state, this is not the only option. For example, while making it possible for a game ball to reach the second variable ball entry means in both the first game state and the second game state, a game ball that reaches the second variable ball entry means in the second game state. , the advantage degree of the second game state may be lower than that of the first game state. Specifically, for example, on the upstream side of the second variable ball-entering means, a predetermined ball-entering means that is more likely to be released in the second game state than in the first game state is provided, and in the second game state, a predetermined ratio is provided. may be made difficult to reach the second variable ball entering means by entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means. This can increase the degree of freedom in design.
In the fifty-eighth control example, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is a probability variable state, the degree of advantage increases by ending the time-saving state of normal symbols (shifts to the most advantageous latent probability state). , In the case of the time-saving state, the degree of advantage is lowered by ending the time-saving state of the normal pattern (shift to the most unfavorable normal state), but it is not limited to this. For example, by ending the time saving state of normal symbols in the time saving state, the advantageous degree may be higher than when the time saving state of normal symbols is ended in the variable probability state. Specifically, for example, in the normal state that is set when the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated in the time saving state, the variation pattern table with a short variation time of the second special symbol (for example, similar to the latency table 202sd4 table of prescribed contents) is referred to and the variation pattern is selected, while in the latent probability state set when the time saving state of the normal symbol is terminated in the probability variable state, the second special symbol A variation pattern may be selected by referring to a variation pattern table with an extremely long variation time (for example, a table with the same defined content as the normal table 202sd1). By configuring in this way, when the number of times of time saving ends in the time saving state and shifts to the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened and the small hit game is frequently executed by hitting to the right. While an advantageous game state is formed, when the number of times of working hours is shortened in the variable probability state and shifts to the latent probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed only in a very long cycle (10 minutes) even if the player hits to the right. Therefore, in order to form a disadvantageous game state in which the game has to be progressed by hitting left, we expect to win a jackpot within the number of times in the variable state, while expecting the number of times in the time reduction state to pass. It is possible to realize a very special and novel game property. Also, it is possible to realize a very special and novel state transition method in which the normal state is the most advantageous game state and the latent state corresponds to the normal state in a general game machine. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In this case, regarding the normal state set when the pachinko 10 is initialized, there is a variation pattern table (for example, a table with the same defined contents as the normal table 202sd1) in which the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely long. It may be configured to refer to and select a variation pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game state from being set to the most advantageous game state immediately after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, which is excessively advantageous to the player.

In the fifty-eighth control example, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is the time-saving state and the variable probability state, it is difficult to guess the game state (shooting direction with a high degree of advantage) for a predetermined period of time. However, the game state in which the select mode is executed is not limited to this, and can be executed in any game state. More specifically, for example, without notifying the gaming state when the number of times of time saving has elapsed, even after the number of times of time saving has elapsed (that is, when the transition to either the latent state or the normal state), a predetermined period During this period, an effect may be executed that makes it difficult to guess the game state, and the player may be made to select whether to hit right or left. In this case, for example, if the player hits left, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed the first number of times, or if the player hits right, the lottery for the second special symbol is performed the second time. It may be configured to notify the game state (shooting direction in which the degree of advantage increases) by executing the number of times, or may be configured to notify the game state (shooting direction in which the degree of advantage increases) after a specific period of time has elapsed. good. By constructing in this way, not only while the time saving state of the normal pattern continues, but also after the time saving state of the normal pattern ends, the game state is estimated and the shooting direction is selected. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game. Also, for example, as the game state after the end of the jackpot, not only the probability variable state and the time saving state, but also the normal state and the latent state can be set. ) may be configured to execute an effect that makes it difficult to guess. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to guess, and it is possible to increase the difference between the disadvantageous game state and the advantageous game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be increased. can be improved.
In the fifty-eighth control example, after the end of the big win, the effect mode executed in the third symbol display device 81 is shared between the variable probability state and the time saving state so that it is difficult to guess the game state after the end of the big win. In addition to this, it may be configured such that the game state after the end of the big win is difficult to guess from the display mode of the first symbol (big win symbol) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 . Specifically, for example, the first symbol display device 37 is moved by the movable member (accessory) from the start of the finalized display period of the jackpot symbol to the start of at least one special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot. ) or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the game state by visually recognizing the combination of the first patterns displayed on the first pattern display device 37, so that the game state can be predicted after the end of the big win. can make it more difficult. Also, the jackpot symbols displayed on the first pattern display device 37 may be shared between at least a portion of the variable probability jackpot and at least a portion of the normal jackpot. Even in such a configuration, it is difficult to guess the game state after the big win from the big win symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37 .
In this 58th control example, the time saving state of normal symbols is the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is the specified number of times (95 times or 65535 times), or the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is the specified number of times (5 times , or 65535 times), but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to provide other time-saving termination conditions. For example, when winning a small hit of a specific type in the lottery of special symbols, it may be configured to end the time saving state of normal symbols regardless of the number of remaining time saving times. By constructing in this way, when it is in the probability variable state, it becomes an advantageous latent probability state by winning a specific type of small prize, and when it is in a time saving state, it wins a specific small prize. As a result, it becomes a disadvantageous normal state, so it is possible to form a very special lottery result in which the degree of advantage is reversed according to the winning game state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the fifty-eighth control example, when the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot is set, the process continues until the lottery for the first special symbol is executed 95 times or until the lottery for the second special symbol is executed 5 times. Although the time-saving state of the normal pattern is always set, it is not limited to this. For example, as the time-saving state, regardless of the type of the special symbol, it may be configured to provide a time-saving state that continues until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 95 times in total. In this case, when the player hits right and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed five times, and when the game state (shooting direction with a high degree of advantage) is announced, the player hits left. In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert|reports also that a time saving state continues. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the time saving state continues.

In the fifty-eighth control example, the structure is such that the time-saving state of normal symbols can be set only after the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol lottery results in a predetermined lottery result (time saving symbol winning), the second time saving state may be set directly. Then, when the time saving pattern winning occurs during the time saving state (first time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot, the winning second time saving state is newly set at the end timing of the first time saving state. may be By configuring in this way, even if the continuation of the time saving state of the normal symbol is notified at the notification timing, in addition to the case where the probability variable state that continues until the next time is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state or Since it is possible to provide a case where time saving symbol winning occurs in the probability variable state and the second time saving state is set, the game state after the notification timing can be made more complicated. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the fifty-eighth control example, the number of prize balls to be paid out is smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out by continuing to hit the right side rather than continuing to hit the left side in the game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol (game to be fired The ratio of the number of paid out prize balls to the number of balls is a small value), but it is not limited to this. For example, conversely, it may be configured such that the number of prize balls to be paid out is greater for right-handed hits than for left-handed hits. By configuring in this way, if you hit right in the game state set to the time-saving state of normal symbols, the degree of advantage increases in terms of holding balls (number of prize balls to be paid out), but the time-saving state of normal symbols is terminated early (by the end of the lottery of 5 special symbols), especially in the time-saving state, the player can choose whether to emphasize the holding ball or to continue the time-saving state for a long time. It is possible to realize the playability that makes it possible. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Also, in this case, the degree of advantage (frequency of execution of the small winning game) in the case of continuing to hit the right in the game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol It may be configured to be higher than the advantage degree. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to further enhance the merit of hitting to the right in the time saving state of normal symbols, when the game state set in the time saving state of normal symbols is set as the game state after the end of the big win In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to choose to hit right.
In the fifty-eighth control example, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is the time-saving state and the variable probability state, it is difficult to guess the game state (shooting direction with a high degree of advantage) for a predetermined period of time. In addition to executing a different effect (select mode effect), it is possible to suggest the set game state to the player by a mini character suggestion effect that is executed with a probability according to the set game state. Although it was configured, it is not necessary to draw a lottery with a certain probability for the mini-character suggestive effect while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set. For example, during a specific period, it may be configured such that mini-character suggestive effects are less likely to occur (or do not occur). Specifically, for example, until the lottery for the first special symbol is executed 50 times or the lottery for the second special symbol is executed twice, the mini-character suggestive effect becomes difficult to occur (or does not occur). On the other hand, after any one of the above conditions is satisfied, the mini character suggestion selection table 222sa (see FIG. 2018(b)) may be referred to and the mini character suggestion effect drawn by lottery. By constructing in this way, the game state is predicted based only on the player's intuition until the lottery for the first special symbol is executed 50 times or the lottery for the second special symbol is executed twice. On the other hand, after that, the game state is predicted in consideration of the occurrence situation of the mini character suggestive effect, so that a deeper game property can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Also, conversely, in the latter half of the time-saving state of normal symbols (for example, the state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed 80 times or more, or the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed 3 times or more), A configuration may be adopted in which the mini-character suggestion effect is less likely to occur (or does not occur). By configuring in this way, in the first half of the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the player can play while having a sense of purpose to generate the mini-character suggestive effect, while in the second half, the game can be played. Since it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player can play the game while expecting that his/her own prediction is correct, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Various modifications of the fifty-eighth control example are naturally applicable to various modifications of the fifty-eighth control example, which will be described later.

<First Modification of 58th Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2029 to 2032, a first modification of the fifty-eighth control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-eighth control example described above is configured to provide four game states of the normal state, the time-saving state, the variable probability state, and the latent probability state, and the latent probability state is the most advantageous game state.
In addition to this, in the first modified example, a latent certainty state A with a relatively high degree of advantage and a latent certainty state B with a relatively low degree of advantage are provided as the latent certainty state. Specifically, in the latent state B, control is performed so that the variation time of the second special symbol tends to be longer than in the latent state A (referring to a variation pattern table that tends to select a long variation time). , the execution frequency of the small winning game is lower than in the latent certainty state A, and as a result, a game state with a lower advantage than the latent certainty state A is formed. In addition, in the first modified example, in addition to the time saving state and the probability variable state, the latent probability state B can be set as the game state after the end of the jackpot.
First, with reference to 2176, a characteristic presentation mode in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 2029(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the potential state B is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot in the first modified example. Here, the probability state B tends to have a longer fluctuation time based on the lottery of the second special symbol than the probability state A, and the fluctuation time based on the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely than the probability variable state or the time saving state. It is in a state where it is easy to become short. In addition, since it is set to the normal state of normal symbols as in the latent certainty state A, the degree of advantage is higher when hitting to the right. This latent state B is also called a weak rush mode because the frequency of small winning games is lower than that of the latent state A (rush mode). When this latent probability state B (weak rush mode) is set as a game state after the end of the jackpot, first, similar to the case where the time saving state or probability variable state is set, the entry into the select mode is notified ( 2007).
As shown in FIG. 2029(a), in the latent state B (weak rush mode), when it is determined that the player hit left during the execution of the effect indicating the select mode, the weak rush mode ( An effect is executed to notify that the game will enter (already entered) the latent certainty state B). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2029(a), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, which cannot be passed without hitting left, after the latent state B is set. Triggered by this, an image resembling a speech balloon displaying the line "Rush into a weak RUSH!!" is displayed for the information on the rabbit mini-character 801 and the turtle mini-character 865. FIG. In addition, characters such as "Rush into weak RUSH!! Hit right!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the weak rush mode (invisibility state B) has been set. It should be noted that the fact that the transition to the weak rush mode is notified at the timing of passing through the through gate 67 is because passing through the through gate 67 after the end of the big win means that the player predicts that the current game state will be a time saving state. This is because there is a high possibility that the player has selected a game method in which the player continues to hit to the left. In other words, even though the normal state of the normal symbols is set and the latent state B in which the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open is set, the player continues to hit to the left, resulting in a loss for the player. It is intended to prevent

Next, referring to FIG. 2029(b), a weak rush mode (latency state) is set as the game state after the end of the big win, and the effect is produced when the player continues to hit the right side without hitting the left side. Aspects will be described. As shown in FIG. 2029(b), the right shot is continued in the latent state B (weak rush mode), and the end condition of the select mode effect is satisfied (the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches 5 times). Then, the rabbit mini character 801 that reaches the treasure box TBR opens the treasure box TBR, and an effect is executed in which a weak icon 801w indicating a weak rush mode appears from the treasure box TBR. In addition, in the variable display of the third symbols, as the stop symbols, the stop symbols set as the third symbols in which the middle symbols imitate the letter "V" are stopped and displayed. Further, the characters "Rush into weak RUSH!! Hit right!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the potential state B (weak rush mode) has been set.
In this way, if you continue to hit to the right after the latent probability state B is set until the end condition of the select mode production is satisfied, the special symbol lottery will be executed 5 times as in the time saving state and the probability variable state. The game state is not reported (hidden) until the performance of opening the treasure box TBR is executed, so that the player can be greatly surprised when the weak rush mode is reported. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the fifty-eighth control example>
Next, details of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2030 to 2032. FIG. Here, although illustration is omitted, the ROM 202 in the first modified example replaces the jackpot type selection table 202sb with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifty-eighth control example (see FIG. 2012). The only differences are that table 202sb is provided, variation pattern table 202sd is provided instead of variation pattern table 202sd, and variation pattern scenario table 202sj is provided instead of variation pattern scenario table 202sj. is doing. Since the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the fifty-eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. First, with reference to Drawing 2030 (a), the details of jackpot classification selection table 202sb in the 1st modification are explained.
Drawing 2030 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of jackpot classification selection table 202sb. As shown in FIG. 2030(a), in the jackpot type selection table 202sb in the first modification, two types of "jackpot A61A" and "jackpot B61A" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, four types of "jackpot C61A" to "jackpot F61A" are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 2030 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A61A" is defined in correspondence, "Big win B61A" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". "Jackpot A61A" and "Jackpot B61A" are jackpots with the same operation as "Jackpot A61" (5-round probability variable jackpot) and "Jackpot B61" (5-round normal jackpot) in the fifty-eighth control example described above, respectively. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted here.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2030 (a), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot C61A" is defined in correspondence. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 14", and the "jackpot D61A" is defined in correspondence, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "15 to 49". On the other hand, "jackpot E61A" is defined in correspondence, and "jackpot F61A" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99".
"Jackpot C61A", "Jackpot E61A", and "Jackpot F61A" are respectively "Jackpot C61" (5-round probability variable jackpot), "Jackpot D61" (5-round probability variable jackpot), and "Jackpot E61" (5-round normal jackpot), so the detailed description is omitted here. The "jackpot D61A" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the potential state B (weak rush mode). For this reason, the "jackpot D61A" is a "jackpot F61A" in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state B, or the probability variable state in which the degree of advantage is lower than the latent state B is higher than the "jackpot C61A" that continues until the next jackpot. On the other hand, after the end of the big hit is set to the variable probability state, and in the variable probability state, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed 95 times, or the lottery of the second special symbol is executed 5 times, so that the most advantageous latent probability. When compared with the "jackpot E61A" that shifts to state B (rush mode), the degree of advantage varies depending on the conditions. That is, when continuing to hit right after the end of the big win, the "big win E61A" in which the lottery of the special symbols is executed five times to shift to the advantageous latent state A has a higher degree of advantage, but the big win. When hitting left after the end, the "jackpot D61A" in which the right hitting corresponding to the latent state A is immediately reported is the latent state A until the lottery of the first special symbol is executed 95 times. The degree of advantage is likely to be higher than "jackpot E61A" that does not shift to.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, correspond to ``jackpot C61A'', ``jackpot D61A'', ``jackpot E61A'', and ``jackpot F61A'' Since the numbers of random numbers (counter values) are 10, 5, 35, and 50, respectively, "jackpot C61A" is determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. The percentage is 10% (10/100), the percentage of determining the “jackpot D61A” is 5% (5/100), and the percentage of determining the “jackpot E61A” is 35% (35/100). There is, and the rate at which “jackpot F61A” is determined is 50% (50/100).

Next, with reference to FIG. 2030(b), details of the variation pattern table 202sd in the first modified example will be described. Similar to the variation pattern table 202sd (see FIG. 2015(a)) in the fifty-eighth control example described above, this variation pattern table 202sd has a variation pattern (variation This is a data table referenced to select time). FIG. 2030(b) is a block diagram showing the structure of this fluctuation pattern table 202sd. As shown in FIG. 2030(b), the variation pattern table 202sd in the first modified example includes a normal table 202sd1, a time saving/probable variation table 202sd2, and a time saving In addition to the final variation table 202sd3 and the concealment table 202sd4, a weak rush table 202sd5 is provided for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the concealment state B (weak rush mode). ing. Details of this light rush table 202sd5 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 2031 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the light rush table 202sd5 described above. As shown in FIG. 2031, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "first special symbol", if the result of the success or failure determination is "off" (small hit or complete loss), all possible variation type counter CS1 "Long out" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is defined in association with the value range (range of "0 to 198"), and if the result of the judgment is "big hit", the fluctuation type counter CS1 is taken A "long win" with a variation time of 600 seconds is defined in association with all the value ranges (range of "0 to 198") to be obtained.
On the other hand, as a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the "second special symbol", if the result of the determination is "off" (small hit or complete loss), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 195". "Long out" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the range, and "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is defined for the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "190 to 198" ” are defined in association with each other. In addition, if the result of the success/failure judgment is a "big hit", "various types of super reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds correspond to all possible ranges of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (range of "0 to 198"). It is stipulated with
Due to these provisions, in the latent state B (weak rush mode), when the first special symbol lottery is executed, an extremely long fluctuation time is set, while the second special symbol lottery is executed. If it is, the variable time is set to be shorter than the probability variable state or the time saving state and longer than the probability state A (rush mode), so if you continue to hit right, the number of game balls to be fired A game state is formed in which the number of prize balls paid out tends to increase, but the increase in possession balls is gentler than in the latent state A (rush mode). Therefore, since the states can be diversified, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2032, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 2032 is a diagram showing defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 2032, the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the first modification includes scenarios corresponding to "jackpot A61A", "jackpot B61A", "jackpot C61A", "jackpot E61A", and "jackpot F61A". , corresponds to "jackpot A61", "jackpot B61", "jackpot C61", "jackpot D61", and "jackpot F61" in the variation pattern scenario table 202sj (see FIG. 200564 (b)) of the fifty-eighth control example described above. A scenario that is the same as the scenario that In addition, as shown in FIG. 2032, as a variation pattern scenario when the previous jackpot type is "jackpot D61", the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is less than 95 times, and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 5. The table 202sd2 (see FIG. 2015 (b)) for 61 for time saving and probability variation is referred to in the range less than times, and the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is 95 times (and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is less than 5 times). Or, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 5 times (and the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is less than 95 times). The number of lotteries for 1 special symbol is 96 times or more (and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 50 times or less), or the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 6 times or more and 50 times or less. The table 202sd5 (see FIG. 2031(b)) is referred to, and a variation pattern scenario (scenario 5) is defined in which the probability table 202sd4 is referred to in a range where the number of lotteries for the second special symbols is 51 or more.
According to the stipulated contents of this variation pattern scenario table 202sj, when the jackpot D61 is won and the weak rush mode (latency state B) is set, the weak rush mode is set until the lottery for the second special symbol is executed 50 times. While forming a state in which the number of balls in possession increases relatively gently, the lottery for the second special symbol is completed 50 times without a big hit, so that the concealment table 202sd4 is referred to thereafter. By doing so, the most advantageous rush mode (potential state A) is formed. Therefore, when the weak rush mode is set, the game can be played with the expectation that the number of lotteries of the second special symbol will exceed 50 times, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fifty-eighth control example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short as the latent state, and the execution interval of the small winning game tends to be short, A latent state B (rush mode) in which the number of held balls increases relatively rapidly, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively long, and the execution interval of the small winning game tends to become long, so that the held balls are relatively loose. It is configured to provide a latent probability state B (weak rush mode) that increases to As a result, it is possible to adjust the increasing speed of the ball held in the latent state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In addition, in the first modification, when the determination of the second special symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the weak rush mode, the mode shifts to a rush mode with a high degree of advantage. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a more powerful game characteristic in the weak rush mode that makes the player expect not to win the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first modification, when the weak rush mode is set after the end of the jackpot, the transition to the rush mode is made only when the lottery of the second special symbol is completed 50 times. It is not limited. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of weak rush modes having different numbers of lotteries before shifting to the rush mode are provided. In addition, in the first modification, the time saving end condition (the first special symbol lottery ends 95 times or the second special symbol lottery ends 5 times) was established in the variable probability state. In this case, the transition to the rush mode is always performed, but a variable probability state may be provided to transition to the weak rush mode. In addition, the latent state of the type that shifts to the weak rush mode when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the rush mode, and the latent state of the type that goes back and forth between the rush mode and the weak rush mode multiple times. A configuration in which states are provided may be employed. Furthermore, in the case of a configuration that allows transition from the weak rush mode to the rush mode, when the number of lotteries of the first special symbol, not the number of lotteries of the second special symbol, reaches a specified number of times, the weak rush mode is switched to the rush mode. It may be configured to switch with. In this case, either continue the light rush mode without hitting the left hand and enjoy the gradual increase in the number of balls held, or shift to the rush mode by hitting the left hand and rapidly increase the number of balls held, knowing that the number of balls held will decrease. Since it is possible to realize a novel game feature that allows the player to choose whether to aim for an increase, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, the potential state 1 in which the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is the specified number of times to shift to the rush mode, and the probability of moving to the rush mode by the number of times of the lottery of the second special symbol to the specified number of times. To realize a more novel game by providing a state 2 and setting a common presentation mode (by making it difficult for a player to grasp whether it is a latent state 1 or a latent state 2). can be done. That is, when the latent certainty state set to the weak rush mode is set, it is predicted which of the latent certainty states 1 and 2 it is, and the first special symbol lottery is executed by hitting left or right. Since it is possible to realize the playability of allowing the player to select whether or not to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the first modified example, only two types of latent states, the rush mode and the weak rush mode, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to these, it may be configured to provide one or a plurality of latency states in which the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is different in both the rush mode and the weak rush mode. In this case, in the latent probability state, it is not necessary to make the degree of advantage higher than in the variable probability state, and part of the latent probability state may be lower in the degree of advantage than in the variable probability state. That is, it may be configured to provide a latent definite state in which the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the definite variable state.
<Second Modification of 58th Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 2033 to 2038. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth control example described above, it is more advantageous to hit the left side than to hit the right side in the time saving state of normal symbols while the time saving state continues (holding The ball is difficult to decrease).
On the other hand, in the second modification, while maintaining the board configuration of the 58th control example, it is more advantageous to hit the right than to hit the left in the time saving state and the variable probability state. configured to That is, even if left-handed hitting is performed in the time-saving state of the normal design, the entrance rate of the game ball to the first ball entrance 64 is substantially the same as that of the normal state of the normal design. In the time-saving state, it is configured to eliminate options other than the game of shooting the game ball to the right side of the board surface where the electric accessory 64a is not provided. By constructing in this way, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in which the electric accessory 64a is more likely to be released than usual, the game ball is difficult to reach the electric accessory 64a. Since it is possible to realize sexuality, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, referring to FIG. 2033, the transition method between states in the second modified example will be described. Here, in the second modified example, as in the fifty-eighth control example described above, four types of game states are provided: the normal state, the time-saving state, the probability variable state, and the latent probability state. Regarding the normal state and the latent state, the behavior is the same as in the fifty-eighth control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. On the other hand, the time saving state and probability variable state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol behave differently from the 58th control example described above. Specifically, the probability of winning a normal symbol is significantly lower than in the 58th control example (approximately 1/649), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than in the 58th control example (10 second), and furthermore, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a in the case of winning the normal symbol is shorter than in the 58th control example (0.1 second x 1 time), so even if the player hits to the left, The ball-entering rate with respect to the first ball-entering hole 64 behaves almost the same as in the normal state. On the other hand, when hitting to the right, the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the 58th control example (12.25 seconds on average). The number of balls and the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game are substantially the same, and the game can be played without reducing the number of balls in the player's possession. Therefore, unlike the fifty-eighth control example described above, the time-saving state and the variable probability state are right-handed games (left-handed game options are lost).
First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 2033, the method of shifting from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 2033, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state to another state only when a big win is won. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 2033, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, if the jackpot type is jackpot A61B (probability variable jackpot), the gaming state after the jackpot ends It is set to a variable state. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot B61B (normal jackpot), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. Therefore, in the normal state, winning the variable probability jackpot (jackpot A61B) is more advantageous than winning the normal jackpot (jackpot B61B). In addition, although omitted for illustration, if you win the probability variable jackpot (jackpot C61B to E61B) in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, the jackpot is the same as when you win the probability variable jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. When the game state after the end is set to the variable probability state and the normal jackpot (jackpot F61B) is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, after the jackpot is finished in the same way as when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern. The game state of is set to the time saving state. Here, the case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state means the case where the game ball enters the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting right in the normal state, or the second game ball enters in the time saving state. It is a case where the time saving number of times is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state while the reserved ball of the special symbol is reserved.
Next, with reference to the middle left side of FIG. 2033, a method of shifting from the variable probability state to another state will be described. As shown in the middle left side of FIG. 2033, there is a possibility of shifting from the variable probability state to another state when the jackpot is won or when the time-saving number of times has passed without winning the jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the middle left side of FIG. 2033, when a jackpot is won in the variable probability state and the jackpot F61B is determined as the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. Further, when a jackpot is won in the variable probability state and the jackpot C61B is determined as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability state. In addition, the number of time reductions has passed without winning the jackpot in the probability variable state (after the jackpots A61B, E61B, the lottery of the first special pattern has been completed 10 times, or the lottery of the second special pattern has been completed 50 times). In the case, the game state is set directly to the most advantageous latent state (without going through the jackpot game). On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the probability variable state and either the jackpot D61B or E61B is determined as the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is again set to the probability variable state (the probability variable state is looped). . Therefore, in the probability variable state, the most advantageous game state (potential probability state) is set with the opportunity of winning the jackpot C61B or the number of times of shortening time has passed, so that these events can be expected to occur. can be done.
Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 2033, a method of shifting from the time saving state to another state will be described. As shown in the middle right side of FIG. 2033 , there is a possibility that the time-saving state will shift to another state not only when a jackpot is won, but also when the number of times of time-saving has passed without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown on the middle right side of FIG. 2033, when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state and either jackpot D61B or E61B is determined as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is changed to a variable state. set. Further, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state and the jackpot C61B is determined as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the potential state. Furthermore, the number of times of time saving has passed without winning the jackpot in the time saving state (after the end of the jackpots B61B and F61B, the lottery of the first special pattern has been completed 10 times, or the lottery of the second special pattern has been completed 50 times). In the case, the game state is directly set to the most disadvantageous normal state (without going through the jackpot game). On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state and the jackpot F61B is determined as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the time saving state (the time saving state is looped). Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, latent probability state) that is set as a trigger for winning the jackpot is set as a trigger for the time saving number of times Since the degree of advantage is higher than that in the game state (normal state) in which the game is played, the player can play the game in anticipation of winning a jackpot.

It should be noted that, in the second modification, similarly to the fifty-eighth control example described above, it is configured to execute a common effect mode in the time saving state and the probability variable state, and whether the player is set to the time saving state or the probability variable It is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish whether it is set to a state or not. Therefore, let the player predict whether the time saving state is set or the probability variable state is set, and if it is predicted that it is set to the probability variable state, expect that the number of times of time saving will pass, When it is predicted that the time saving state is set, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player expect to win a jackpot before the number of times of time saving elapses. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 2033, a method of shifting from the latent state to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 2033, there is a possibility of shifting from the latent state to another state only when a big win is won. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 2033, when the jackpot is won in the latent probability state and the jackpot D61B, E61B is determined as the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the variable probability state. . Further, when a jackpot is won in the latent probability state and the jackpot F61B is determined as the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the latent definite state and the jackpot C61B is determined as the jackpot type, the gaming state after the end of the big win is again set to the latent definite state (the latent definite state is looped).
As described above, in the second modified example, four game states with different degrees of advantage are alternated, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example>
Next, details of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 2034 to 2036. FIG. Here, although illustration is omitted, the ROM 202 in the second modified example replaces the jackpot type selection table 202sb with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifty-eighth control example (see FIG. 2012). The point that the table 202sb is provided, the point that the second winning random number table 202sc is provided instead of the second winning random number table 202Gc, the point that the variation pattern table 202sd is provided instead of the variation pattern table 202sd, and The only difference is that a variation pattern scenario table 202sj is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj. Since the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the fifty-eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. First, with reference to Drawing 2034 (a), the details of jackpot classification selection table 202sb in the 2nd modification are explained.

FIG. 2034(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202sb in the second modified example. As shown in FIG. 2034 (a), in the jackpot type selection table 202sb in the second modification, two types of "jackpot A61B" and "jackpot B61B" are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, four types of "jackpot C61B" to "jackpot F61B" are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbols.
As shown in FIG. 2033 (a), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A61B" is defined in correspondence, "Big win B61B" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". That is, the percentages of winning the "jackpot A61B" and the "jackpot B61B" are both 50%. "Jackpot A61B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state. Here, the variable probability state after the end of the "jackpot A61B" basically continues until the lottery for the second special symbol is completed 50 times (unless a disadvantageous left-hand shot is performed). After the end of the variable probability state (after the end of the lottery for the 50th second special symbol), it shifts to an advantageous latent probability state. In addition, "jackpot B61B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. Here, the time saving state after the "jackpot B61B" ends continues until the lottery of the second special symbol is completed 50 times in the same manner as the variable probability state after the "jackpot A61B". After the end of the variable probability state (after the end of the lottery for the 50th second special symbol), the state shifts to the disadvantageous normal state. Then, in the second modified example, as in the fifty-eighth control example described above, in the game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol, the production of the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish between the variable probability state and the time saving state is executed. It is configured to By configuring in this way, it is better to end the time-saving state of normal patterns with all the 50 second special pattern lotteries being lost (small hits), or those who have become a big hit within 50 times. Since it is possible to ambiguous whether the game is good or not, it is possible to predict the set game state, and depending on the prediction result, it is possible to expect the end of the time-saving state of the normal pattern or to expect the jackpot winning. It is possible to realize novel playability. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2034 (a), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot C61B" is defined in correspondence. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 14", and the "jackpot D61B" is defined in correspondence, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "15 to 49". On the other hand, "jackpot E61B" is defined in correspondence, and "jackpot F61B" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". "Jackpot C61B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, "jackpot D61B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state that substantially continues until the next jackpot. On the other hand, "jackpot E61B" and "jackpot F61B" are jackpot types that behave identically to the above-described "jackpot A61B" (5-round variable jackpot) and "jackpot B61B" (5-round normal jackpot), respectively.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, correspond to ``jackpot C61B'', ``jackpot D61B'', ``jackpot E61B'', and ``jackpot F61B'' Since the numbers of random numbers (counter values) are 10, 5, 35 and 50, respectively, "jackpot C61B" is determined when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. The percentage is 10% (10/100), the percentage of determining the “jackpot D61B” is 5% (5/100), and the percentage of determining the “jackpot E61B” is 35% (35/100). There is, and the rate at which “jackpot F61B” is determined is 50% (50/100).

Next, with reference to FIG. 2034(b), details of the second winning random number table 202sc in the second modification will be described. FIG. 2034(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202sc in the second modified example. As shown in FIG. 2034(b), in this second modification, the random number (the counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "0 While the range of 100 random numbers (counter values) of "99" is associated and defined, as the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to hit the normal design in the high probability state of the normal design , 101 random numbers (counter values) ranging from 0 to 100 are defined in association with each other. Since the second winning random number counter C4 in the second modified example is composed of a loop counter that can take 65536 values of "0 to 65535", the normal design lottery is executed in the low probability state of the normal design. The probability of winning the normal design when it is done is 1/655.4 (100/65536), and the probability of winning the normal design when the lottery of the normal design is executed in the high probability state of the normal design. is 1/648.9 (101/65536). That is, even in a high-probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hits only at an extremely low probability, so even in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, it is disadvantageous to hit the left hand, and the right hand for the player. You can make it hit.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2035(a), details of the variation pattern table 202sd in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 2035(a) is a block diagram showing the structure of the variation pattern table 202sd in the second modified example. As shown in FIG. 2035 (a), the variation pattern table 202sd in the second modification is the configuration of the variation pattern table 202sd in the 58th control example described above (see FIG. 2015 (a)). The only difference is that a time saving/definite variable table 202sd2 is provided instead of the reliable variable table 202sd2. The details of this time saving/probability variation table 202sd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 2035(b).
Drawing 2035 (b) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of table 202sd2 for time reduction and probability variation. As shown in FIG. 2035 (b), among the time saving and probability variation table 202sd2, as the specified contents corresponding to the first special symbol, regardless of the lottery result, the range of all values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( "0 to 198") is defined in association with a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (outside or hit).
In addition, for the second special symbol, when the result of the determination (lottery result) is "off", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 183", the variation time as a variation pattern Long out of 10 seconds is defined in correspondence, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "184 to 198", as a fluctuation pattern, various types of super reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined in correspondence. . On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result (lottery result) is a "big hit", the variation pattern is a variation time for all possible value ranges of the variation type counter CS1 (range of "0 to 198"). Various types of super reach for 40 seconds are associated and defined. Therefore, in the second modification, the average fluctuation time is 12.25 seconds when the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost (completely lost or small hit), and 1 loss fluctuation is started. The average of the period from the start of the new variable display to the start of the new variable display is about 13.23 seconds, considering that the small winning probability is 49% and the period required for the small winning game is 2 seconds. For this reason, the average number of winning small wins per minute is about 2.22 times, and the average number of prize balls won per small win is 45, so the average number of prizes per minute is about 100. The ball will be paid out. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example can shoot a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-eighth control example described above. In the time-saving state and the probability variable state in which the variable probability table 202sd is referred to, the number of game balls to be launched and the number of prize balls to be paid out are substantially the same by continuing to hit to the right. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held even though the game ball is shot to the right side where the electric accessory 64a is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to Drawing 2035 (c), details of reduction in working hours grant table 202sk in the 2nd modification are explained. This time-saving provision table 202sk is a data table referred to for setting end conditions of the time-saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time-saving state (type of jackpot won) when setting the time-saving state. FIG.2035(c) is the figure which showed the prescription|regulation content of this time reduction provision table 202sk. As shown in FIG. 2035 (c), the time saving grant table 202sk in the second modified example is associated with the value of each counter that is referred to when determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied for each jackpot type. stipulated by In addition, as shown in FIG. 2035 (c), in this second modification, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1, the special figure 2 time saving counter 203h2, are provided.
As shown in FIG. 2035 (c), as the jackpot type "jackpot A61B", "jackpot B61B", "jackpot E61B" and "jackpot F61B", the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 "10", And the value "50" of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203h2 is defined in association. Therefore, if one of the "jackpot A61B", "jackpot B61B", "jackpot E61B" and "jackpot F61B" is won, the lottery for the first special symbol will be performed 10 times, or the lottery for the second special symbol will be A time-saving state of normal symbols is set to continue until the lottery is performed 50 times. In addition, as described above, "jackpot A61B" and "jackpot B61B" are probability variable jackpots, so after the time-saving state of normal symbols is terminated, the game shifts to an advantageous latent probability state. On the other hand, since "jackpot B61B" and "jackpot F61B" are normal jackpots, after the time-saving state of normal symbols is terminated, the state shifts to a disadvantageous normal state.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2035 (c), for "jackpot C61B" as the jackpot type, the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 and the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 are both "0" are defined in association with each other. In addition, since "jackpot C61B" is a variable probability jackpot, it is set to the most advantageous latent probability state after the jackpot is finished. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2035 (c), for "jackpot D61B" as the jackpot type, the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203h1 and the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203h2 are both "65535" are defined in association with each other. In addition, since the "jackpot D61B" is a probability variable jackpot, it is set to a probability variable state that substantially continues until the next jackpot after the end of the jackpot.
Thus, in the second modification, for the time saving grant table 202sk, the number of time saving times to be set for each jackpot type (counter value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203h1 and the special figure 2 time saving counter 203h2) is set in advance. Since it is configured to be defined, it is possible to suitably set the number of time reductions according to the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2036, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 2036 is a diagram showing defined contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the second modified example. As shown in FIG. 2036, the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the second modification includes the first special The number of lotteries of the symbol is less than 10 times, and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is within the range of less than 50 times. is less than 10 times, and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 50 times (or the illustration is omitted, but the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is less than 50 times, and the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is 10 times), the time saving final variation table 202sd3 (see FIG. 2016 (a)) is referred to, and the second special symbol lottery number of times is 51 times or more. ) is defined as a variation pattern scenario.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2036, the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the second modification includes, as a variation pattern scenario when the previous jackpot type is either "jackpot B61B" or "jackpot F61B", The number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is less than 10 times, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is within the range of less than 50 times. If the number of lotteries is less than 10 times and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 50 times (or the illustration is omitted, but the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is less than 50 times, the lottery for the first special symbol When the number of times is 10 times), the time saving final variation table 202sd3 (see FIG. 2016 (a)) is referred to, and the normal table 202sd1 is referred to in the range of the second special symbol lottery number of times 51 times or more Variation A pattern scenario is defined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2036, the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the second modified example includes, as a variation pattern scenario when the previous jackpot type is "jackpot C61B", regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries , a variation pattern scenario is defined in which the latency table 202sd4 (see FIG. 2016(b)) is referred to.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2036, in the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the second modification, the number of lotteries of the first special symbol is set as a variation pattern scenario when the previous big win type is "jackpot D61B". Less than 10 times, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is referred to the time saving / probability variation table 202sd2 (see FIG. 2035 (b)) in the range of less than 50 times, the number of times of lottery of the first special symbol is less than 10 times, And when the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is 50 times (or, although not shown, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is less than 50 times and the number of lotteries for the first special symbol is 10 times) In the time saving final variation table 202sd3 (see FIG. 2016 (a)) is referred to, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is within the range of 51 times or more Time saving and probability variation table 202sd2 (see FIG. 2035 (b)) is referred to Variation pattern scenarios are specified. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2036, in the variation pattern scenario table 202sj in the second modification, as a variation pattern scenario after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries, the normal table 202sd1 is defined as a variation pattern scenario referred to.
According to the stipulated contents of this variation pattern scenario table 202sj, the variation pattern scenarios for the big hits A61B, B61B, D61B, E61B, and F61B can be common until the time saving state of the normal symbols ends, so that the time saving state of the normal symbols It is possible to make it more difficult to guess the game state after the end. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 2037 and 2038. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 2037, the normal symbol variation process (S101K) in the second modification will be described. This normal symbol variation process (S101K) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 47) in the fifty-eighth control example (and the first control example) described above, and is normally symbol variation process (S106). Similarly, it is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and various processes related to normal symbol variation (lottery) (normal symbol variation Processing to be executed, processing to set the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol variation to be executed, processing to update the normal symbol variation being executed, processing to stop the normal symbol variation, normal symbol lottery If the result is a hit Processing to determine the game content of the game per normal figure to be executed) is executed processing.
Of the normal symbol variation processing (S101K) in the second modification, in each of the processes of S801 to S814, S817 to S819, and S822, the normal symbol variation processing in the above-described 58th control example (and the first control example) The same processes as the processes of S801 to S814, S817 to S819, and S822 of (see FIG. 47) are executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process (S101K) in the second modification, in the process of S814, when it is determined that the present is a normal symbol time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) (S814: Yes) , the variation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (S801K), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S814, when it is determined that the current state is not the time-saving state of the normal design (high probability state of the normal design) (S814: No), the fluctuation time of the normal design is set to 10.1 seconds (S802K). ), the process ends. That is, in the second modified example, the time-saving state of the normal symbols and the normal state of the normal symbols are configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is substantially the same.
In addition, in the process of S819, if it is determined that the lottery result of this normal symbol is a hit (S819: Yes), regardless of whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory And the number of times is set to 0.1 seconds×1 time (S803K), and the process proceeds to S822. In this way, in the time-saving state of the normal design in the second modification, the fluctuation time of the normal design only changes by 0.1 seconds with respect to the normal state of the normal design, and the normal design hits. It is configured so that the opening patterns for both cases are the same. In addition, since the probability of hitting the normal pattern is substantially the same as the normal state of the normal pattern, the through gate 67 is provided in the time saving state and the probability variable state set to the time saving state of the normal pattern. Even if the game ball is shot to the left side of the board surface where the player is, the electric accessory 64a is hardly released. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the probability-variable state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game progresses by shooting the game ball to the right side of the board surface where the electric accessory 64a is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2038, the jackpot ending process (Y1903K) in the second modification of the fifty-eighth control example will be described. This jackpot end process (Y1903K) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 2023) in the fifty-eighth control example described above. This is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters indicating the state. FIG. 2038 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (Y1903K).

Of this jackpot end processing (Y1903K), each of Y2702G, Y2701K, Y2705K, Y2706K and Y2708K of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 2023) in the 58th control example. The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the jackpot end processing (Y1903K) in the second modification, in the processing of Y2701K, when it is determined that it is a normal jackpot (Y2701K: Yes), or after performing the processing of Y2702G, the time reduction grant table 202sk From read the counter value corresponding to the jackpot type this time (Y2711K), set the read counter value to the special figure 1 hour-short counter 203h1 and the special figure 2 hour-short counter 203h2 (Y2712K), and move the process to Y2705K.
Also, after executing the process of Y2706K, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the current jackpot is identified from the variation pattern scenario table 202sj (Y2713K), and the process proceeds to Y2708K. By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 2038), the gaming state after the jackpot ends can be preferably set.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification in the fifty-eighth control example, even in the time-saving state or probability variable state set to the time-saving state of normal symbols, it is better to hit right than to hit left. Since it is structured so that it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held (the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls are continued to be shot increases), it is easier to enter the ball in the time-saving state of normal patterns than in the normal state of normal patterns. It is not a game method (left-handed game) that aims at entering the first ball entrance 64, but a game method that makes it difficult to enter the first ball entrance 64 (that is, it is difficult to receive benefits from the time-saving state of normal symbols). It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the game play. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
<Fifty-ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2039 to 2059. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth control example described above, the second special symbol from when it is set to the time saving state until all the reserved balls of the second special symbols acquired during the time saving state are digested and transferred to the normal state A plurality of game states with different numbers of lotteries are provided. That is, the first game state (time saving state A) with a relatively low degree of advantage (the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 2 times) and the second state with a relatively high degree of advantage (substantially continue until the next jackpot) 2 game states (time-saving state C) and a third game state (time-saving state B) having a degree of advantage between them (the number of lotteries of the second special symbols is 4 times) are provided, and almost certainly. Once the transition to the second game state (time saving state C) in which the time saving end condition that continues until the next big hit is set, the time saving state C and the big hit are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached (for the time saving limit number of times It is configured to form an extremely advantageous state (MAX bonus mode) in which the jackpot winning is almost certain. Further, in the above-described 46th control example, in the time saving state C, only when a specific type of small hit is won, the time saving state is set before the timing of setting the execution of the jackpot (at the start of the small winning game). configured to terminate. That is, when a specific type of small win is won, the game state at the timing of setting the execution of the big win game is set to the normal state because the time saving state is ended before the V prize is generated, and the big win is made. It is configured to reset the remaining number of times (counter value of the time saving limit counter 203 kb) to the initial value of 3 up to the time saving limit number of times at the end. As a result, when a specific type of small win is won between the repetition of the time saving state C and the second special symbol big win, the jackpot winning for the number of times of the time saving limit is further guaranteed from there, so it is practical. In addition, when a specific type of small win is won, it is configured to realize a novel behavior as if a big win corresponding to the number of time-saving limits was added.

In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifty-ninth control example, by varying the timing of subtracting the number of times of working hours (the counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) in the time saving state according to the conditions, the same time saving state Even so, the easiness of accumulating the second special symbol ball is varied according to the conditions, and even in the same time-saving state, the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols is varied according to the conditions. More specifically, in the time-saving state, a first timing between the execution of the special symbol lottery and the end of the variable display for showing the lottery result, and a second timing different from the first timing. 2 timing, the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at one of the timings, and the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at the first timing In this case, it is configured to make it more difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls during the execution of the special symbol variable display than when the second timing is subtracted. More specifically, in this 59th control example, as the type of complete loss when the lottery result of the special symbol is completely lost, two types of loss A and loss B are provided, and in the time saving state When the special pattern lottery is completely out and the out A is determined as the out type, the time saving number (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at the fluctuation stop timing (first timing). , When out B is determined as the type of out, the time saving number (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is configured to be subtracted at the start timing (second timing) of the fluctuation display indicating the out B there is Thereby, when the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 (that is, the time saving final fluctuation) and A is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted until the end of the fluctuation display Therefore, just by continuing to play the right-handed game during the execution of the time-saving final variation, the fourth end condition (end condition established based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becoming a specified number) It is possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol until is established. On the other hand, if the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 state (that is, time saving final fluctuation) and B is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted at the start of the fluctuation Since the time-saving state is ended by doing so, the state has already fallen to the normal state during execution of the variable display. In other words, since it becomes extremely difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls in the time saving final variation, it is also difficult to increase the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the present 59th control example, the subtraction timing of the special figure 2 counter 203t in the time saving final fluctuation is set to the second timing (variation start timing) than when the first timing (variation stop timing) is set In the case, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol tends to decrease even in the same time-saving state, so even in the same time-saving state It is possible to realize a novel game property by changing the number of executions).
The pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-ninth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-sixth control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp The configuration of the RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 executes The only difference is that some of the control processing has been changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 46 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the forty-sixth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.
First, with reference to FIGS. 2039 to 2043, a characteristic effect in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. Here, as described above, in the fifty-ninth control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, the first timing as the timing of updating the remaining time reduction number (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) At least two types of timing (at the time of stopping fluctuation) and the second timing (at the time of starting fluctuation) are provided, and when the first timing is set in the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the fluctuation display related to the final fluctuation Also, by continuing the time saving state, it is possible to additionally store the second special symbol holding ball, while when the second timing is set, the time saving state is ended at the same time as the start of the final fluctuation. Since it becomes impossible to store the reserved balls of the 2 special symbols, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is variable depending on the update timing of the number of times of short remaining time. Figures 2039 to 2043 show an effect suggesting the timing set in this time saving final variation (in other words, the number of lotteries of the second special symbols that can be executed after the start of the final variation).
First, with reference to FIG. 2039 (a), time saving state A that is set at a high rate (95% rate) after the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state (first hit) A presentation mode in (chance mode) will be described. Like the chance mode in the 46th control example described above, the chance mode in the 59th control example is the first end condition (the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is defined as the time saving end condition. The end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times) is set to 10 times, and the second end condition (end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the small winning game is executed reaches the specified number) is set to 1 time. is set, the third end condition (the end condition established based on the number of times the lottery of the second special symbol has become the specified number of times) is set to once, the fourth end condition (during the execution of the time-saving final variation 2 End condition established based on the number of reserved balls of special symbols becoming a specified number) is configured as a time saving state in which one is set. On the other hand, as described above, in the fifty-ninth control example, if the second timing (fluctuation start timing) is set as the update timing of the number of times of reduction in working hours, the special figure 2 counter 203t becomes 0 at the same time as the start of fluctuation and the reduction in working hours ends. The condition is satisfied, and the time saving state A (chance mode) is ended without being given an opportunity to additionally store the second special symbol reserved balls. In other words, when the update timing of the number of times of time saving is set to the first timing (when the fluctuation is stopped) in the time saving state A, the time saving until the holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired additionally during the time saving final fluctuation Since the state can continue, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol twice, but if the update timing of the number of time saving is set to the second timing (at the start of fluctuation), time saving at the same time as the fluctuation starts. By ending the state, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed only once. Therefore, depending on whether the first timing is set or the second timing is set, the degree of expectation for the big win will be changed by approximately two times.

As shown in FIG. 2039(a), when the game shifts to the time-saving state A after the first hit, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 face each other in the main display area Dm. In addition, the characters "Determine the attack method by hitting to the right!" In addition, a small display area Dm4 in which characters "Right-handed" are displayed is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm. position), a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular continuous attack icon CI with the characters "continuous attack" and a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular single attack icon SI with the characters "single attack" are formed vertically. be done. Further, on the left side of the continuous hit icon CI and the single hit icon SI in the front view, an arrow image YG imitating a rightward arrow moving up and down at high speed is displayed on the left side of the consecutive hit icon CI and the left side of the single hit icon SI. Furthermore, in the secondary display area Ds, the characters "Consecutive attacks → Speed-oriented consecutive attacks!" and the characters "Single attack → Power-oriented single-shot attack!" With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the method of attacking the monster character 821 can be determined by hitting to the right. When the continuous attack method is selected, the number of attacks on the monster character 821 increases. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is possible to apply an attack with a high . In other words, when a series of attacks is performed, the expectation of one big hit is low, but it is a type of attack method that covers by increasing the number of attacks, and when a single attack is performed, one time It is possible to make the player intuitively understand that although the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, there is only one chance to attack. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the production which selects the attack method performed after shifting to this chance mode (time saving state A) is called an attack method selection production.
The attack method is actually selected in the attack method selection effect, as shown in FIG. , is determined in consideration of the results of the lottery based on the starting prize. FIG. 2039(b) is a diagram exemplifying a case where the attack method of "one shot" is selected at the timing when the first start winning of the second special symbol is detected. As shown in FIG. 2039(b), when the “single attack” attack method is selected, the arrow image YG stops on the left side of the single attack icon SI, and the continuous attack icon CI appears grayish (turned off). , and the shot icon SI is set to look like it emits light. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that "one hit" has been selected as the attack method. Although illustration is omitted, after the one-hit icon SI is selected, the monster character 821 is hit by a "last attack" that has a high expectation of a relatively big win (or a small win that is substantially confirmed). A production that tries to defeat is executed. If the monster character 821 can be defeated, it is reported that a big win will be won, and if it is not defeated, it is reported that the time-saving state A (chance mode) is terminated and shifts to a disadvantageous normal state.
In addition, the attack method of continuous attacks is a production that is selected when the first timing (variation stop timing) is set as the update timing of the number of times of saving time, and the attack method of a single attack is the second timing of updating the number of times of saving time. This effect is selected when the timing (variation start timing) is set. Here, in the fifty-ninth control example, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost and when it becomes a small hit, either the first timing or the second timing as the update timing of the number of remaining short time can also be set. Furthermore, the second timing (fluctuation start timing) at which the holding of the second special symbol is difficult to accumulate is configured to be set more easily at the time of winning a small hit than at the time of loss. Conversely, the first timing (fluctuation stop timing) at which the held ball of the second special symbol is likely to accumulate is configured to be set more easily in the case of misalignment than in the case of winning a small hit. Therefore, when the "continuous attack" attack method corresponding to the first timing is selected, the possibility that the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out is high, while the "strike" corresponding to the second timing ” is selected, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small win that substantially determines a big win. In other words, when "continuous hit" is selected, the degree of expectation for the variable display during execution is low, so the game property that makes the second special symbol hold ball that can be additionally acquired during the variable display stronger. On the other hand, when "hit" is selected, the degree of expectation for the variable display during execution is high, so even if the ball is not additionally acquired, the player's motivation for playing can be maintained. It becomes possible playability. Therefore, it is possible to realize different game characteristics according to the selected attack method, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
FIG. 2040(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the attack method of "continuous attack" is selected in the attack method selection effect. As shown in FIG. 2040(a), when the “continuous attack” attack method is selected, the arrow image YG stops on the left side of the continuous attack icon SC, and the single attack icon SI looks grayish (turned off). ), and the continuous attack icon CI is set to look like it emits light. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the "continuous attack" has been selected as the attack method. Further, when the consecutive hit icon CI is selected, two display areas, attack icon display areas AI1 and AI2 for displaying attack icons, are formed in the lower left corner of the main display area Dm. An icon (attack content) corresponding to the result of the first start winning of the second special symbol is displayed in the attack icon display area AI1 indicating the content of the first attack. The example of FIG. 2040(a) illustrates a case where the content of the attack of "kick" with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the monster character 821 can be continuously attacked by the number (two) of the attack icon display areas.

After the continuous attack icon CI is selected, a time gauge ga3 is displayed between the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 as shown in FIG. 2040(b). This time gauge ga3 is displayed in a state in which the remaining time display ga3a occupies the entire time gauge ga3 at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the right end of the remaining time display ga3a moves leftward in front view according to the passage of time. It is configured so that the area of the elapsed time display ga3b increases as it moves and the area narrows, and the right end of the remaining time display ga3a when 10 seconds have passed since the variable display of the second special symbol was started. reaches the left end of the time gauge ga3, the area of the remaining time display ga3a becomes zero, and the entire time gauge ga3 is occupied by the elapsed time display ga3b. During this time, when the start winning of the second special symbol is detected, attack contents (icon) corresponding to the result of prefetching based on the detected starting win are displayed in the attack icon display area AI2. When the time gauge ga3 reaches 0, an effect is started in which the monster character 821 is attacked by the attack methods displayed in the two display areas of the attack icon display areas AI1 and AI2.
Thus, in the time saving state A (chance mode) in the fifty-ninth control example, at the timing when the first (and last) variation display in the time saving state is started, the subtraction of the number of time saving is performed at the first timing. At least based on whether it is executed at the second timing or at the second timing, the effect of selecting the attack method is executed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the update (subtraction) timing of the number of times of reduction in working hours according to the selected attack method. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode that suggests to the player how easy it is to store the second special symbol reserved balls in the time-saving final variation, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2041 and FIG. 2042, the presentation mode in the time saving state B (time saving mode) will be described. Here, the time saving state B (time saving mode) in the 59th control example is different from the time saving mode in the 38th control example and the 46th control example described above, and the second special symbol executed after the time saving state is set The end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of lotteries is set to 2 times, and the second special symbol reserved balls accumulated during the execution of the last variable display of the time saving state A termination condition (fourth termination condition) corresponding to the number is configured to be set to 65535 pieces. That is, in the time saving final variation of the time saving mode, the time saving end condition is set so that the possibility that the time saving state is ended by the fourth end condition is substantially zero. As a result, when the update timing of the number of times of time saving is set to the first timing in the time saving final variation in the time saving mode, the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be easily stored up to the upper limit (four pieces) during the time saving final variation. Therefore, the degree of advantage is high with the two second special symbol lotteries that can be executed within the time saving number of times and the four second special symbol holding balls that can be accumulated in the time saving final variation (substantially It is possible to make the lottery of the second special symbol 6 times in total. On the other hand, if the update timing of the number of times of reduction is set to the second timing in the final change of time, the time reduction state will end at the same time as the start of the final change of time, and the second special symbol will be reserved during the final change of time. Due to the difficulty of accumulating balls, the second special symbol lottery that can be executed within the time saving number of times and the time saving final fluctuation of the reserved balls accumulated during the first fluctuation display within the time saving number are supported. A lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be performed a maximum of 5 times in total with reserved balls (maximum 3) other than the reserved balls. Therefore, even in the time saving mode, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the degree of advantage changes depending on whether the update timing of the number of time saving times in the time saving final variation is the first timing or the second timing.
First, with reference to Drawing 2041 (a), the production mode during execution of the change display of 1 time before the time saving last change in time saving mode is explained. FIG. 2041(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the variation display one time before the time saving final variation. As shown in FIG. 2041(a), in the fifty-ninth control example, the player is instructed to hit the right hand to save the holding ball of the 2 special symbol from the fluctuation one time before the time saving final fluctuation. A production prompting is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2041 (a), when the variation display of the time before the final variation of the time saving is executed, for the central upper part in the main display area Dm, "NEXT consecutive hit chance!" A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR10 is formed with the characters . In addition, between the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821, the right end of the remaining time display ga3a moves leftward in front view to narrow the area, and the area of the elapsed time display ga3b increases. appears.

Also, attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4 are displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm. It should be noted that the display area corresponding to the second special symbol holding ball that has already been acquired is marked with a "?" While the icon is displayed, the display area corresponding to the pending ball of the second special symbol that has not yet been acquired is set to a translucent blinking display. FIG. 2041(a) illustrates the situation in which the second second special symbol held ball was acquired during the variation display one time before the time saving final variation, and the first and second second To indicate that the reserved ball has been acquired for the two attack icon display areas AI1 and AI2 corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol? While the icon is displayed, two of the attack icon display areas AI3 and AI4 corresponding to the third and fourth second special pattern reserved balls indicate that the reserved balls have not been acquired. is set to a translucent blinking display for In addition, the text "Get the attack icon by hitting right!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, while the remaining time indicated by the time gauge ga3 remains, the player hits to the right to accumulate the second special pattern reserved balls and to attack all of the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4. ? You can aim to display an icon.
FIG. 2041(b) shows ? for the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4 in the variation display one time before the final variation in the time saving mode. A description will be given of the number-of-attacks addition effect that is executed after the icon is displayed (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated to the upper limit number). In the 59th control example, when the ball on hold accumulates to the upper limit during the fluctuation display one time before the final fluctuation of the time saving mode, it is set in the time saving final fluctuation from the look-ahead result of the holding ball corresponding to the time saving final fluctuation. It is determined whether the update timing of the number of times of saving time is the first timing (variation stop timing) or the second timing (variation start timing), and the first timing that can additionally store the holding ball in the time saving final fluctuation If it is determined that is set, in addition to the currently acquired reserved ball, the effect (attack It is configured to execute the number of times additional production). FIG. 2041(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of this number-of-attacks addition effect.
As shown in FIG. 2041(b), when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulates to the upper limit number, the character "Ready" is displayed on the time gauge ga3, and the effect of adding the number of attacks is executed, the attack Directly above the icon display area AI4, a new attack icon display area AI5 is displayed in translucent blinking display (that is, a display mode that can suggest to the player that the number of attacks has not been determined). be. In addition, a text saying "Increase the number of attacks by hitting right!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that there is a possibility that the number of times of attacking the monster character 821 in the final variation may be increased by hitting to the right. can.
FIG. 2042(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of attacks is successfully added in the number-of-attacks-adding effect. As shown in FIG. 2042(a), it is detected that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (over winning) during execution of the attack count addition effect, and it is determined that the over winning is the trigger to execute the addition. If so, the attack icon display area AI5, which has been set to a translucent blinking display, is switched to a blank solid line display. In addition, the characters "Successful addition!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By means of these display contents, the player is made to recognize that the chances of attacking the monster character 821 are increased after the time-saving final variation is started, and the possibility of winning a big win is increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the attack number addition production, the update timing of the number of times of the time saving final fluctuation is the first timing (variation stop timing), and when the opportunity to acquire additional holding balls is given by the time saving final fluctuation (i.e., temporal If the look-ahead result of the oldest second special symbol reserved ball is off B, small hit C62, or small hit D62), 1 With a lottery probability of /3, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to set a performance mode that succeeds in adding. It should be noted that if the player does not hit to the right or continues to lose the lottery of 1/3, and the effect mode that succeeds in adding up until 1 second before the stop of the fluctuation is not set, At this point, a performance mode is executed in which the addition is forcibly successful. On the other hand, if the update timing of the number of times of the time saving final fluctuation is the second timing (variation start timing), and the opportunity to acquire additional holding balls is not given by the time saving final fluctuation (that is, the oldest second If the look-ahead result of the reserved ball of the special symbol is any of the big win, the missing A, the small win A62, and the small win B62), even if the winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected, the addition is successful. No performance mode is set. In this case, the effect that the attack icon display area AI5 disappears is executed one second before the fluctuation stops, and the player is notified that the number of attacks (number of times of lottery for the remaining second special symbol) is fixed at 4 times. be notified.
FIG. 2042(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the start of the time saving final variation in the time saving mode. FIG. 2042(b) illustrates an effect mode when the time saving final variation is started under a situation where the number of attacks has been successfully added during the variation display one time before the time saving final variation. As shown in Figure 2042 (b), when the time saving final variation in the time saving mode is started, was displayed in the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4? An effect is executed in which the icon changes to an icon indicating the attack type (icon of the type corresponding to the variable display during execution and the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved ball). In addition, in the display area HR10, the characters "Stock up the attack icon with the right stroke!" moves to the left in the front view, the area of the time gauge ga3 becomes narrower, and the area of the elapsed time display ga3b becomes larger. Further, the text "Bonus if the attack hits! Loop bonus if the target is defeated!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to confirm the type of attack and guess the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot and loop bonus, and additionally obtain an attack icon by hitting right. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In addition, the number of attacks was not added in the variation display before the final variation of the time saving (that is, the final variation of the time saving is either off B, the small hit C62, and the small hit D62) If the display The area HR10 and the time gauge ga3 are not displayed, and the production shifts to the production of attacking the monster character 821 as it is.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2043, time saving state C in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. Here, the time saving state C in the fifty-ninth control example is a game state corresponding to the MAX bonus mode in the forty-sixth control example and the thirty-eighth control example described above, but in the fifty-ninth control example, four big hits is not determined. That is, when a specific small win is won in the time saving state C, the state after the big win is forcibly set to the time saving mode (time saving state B) even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached. In other words, the time saving state C in the 59th control example reaches the time saving limit number of times, or the big hit and the time saving state C are repeated (looped) until a specific small hit (small hit D62) is won. Configured as a state. In the following description, the time saving state C in the fifty-ninth control example is referred to as a loop mode.

FIG. 2043 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when entry into the loop mode (time saving state C) is confirmed in the fifty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 2043 (a), if you win a small hit (either a small hit A62 or C62) corresponding to the loop mode (time saving state C) or a big hit (per one), the main In the display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the monster character 821 is defeated by the adventurer character 811, and an effect in which the third symbols imitating the number "7" are arranged is executed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters such as "Loop bonus fixed!! Minimum guarantee 1200pt!!" are displayed. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that he or she has won the loop bonus and that at least 1200 prize balls can be paid out by the time the loop bonus ends. can. 1200 is the lower limit of the number of prize balls paid out in two big wins. As described above, when moving to the time saving state C (loop bonus mode), the time saving state will continue until the next jackpot, so at least two jackpot winnings will be confirmed, and after the two jackpots are finished Also forms an extremely advantageous game state in which the time-saving state C and the big win may be repeated. Therefore, when the loop bonus is notified, the player can feel great joy and satisfaction.
Next, with reference to Drawing 2043 (b), the production mode in time saving state C (loop bonus mode) is explained. Here, in the time saving state C, similarly to the above-described 46th control example and 38th control example, it is configured to execute an effect (pseudo interval effect) that makes it appear as if the previous big win is continuing. As a result, a special effect operation is realized in which a plurality of jackpots are made to look like one jackpot game with a large number of rounds. Differences from the pseudo interval presentation in the 46th control example and the 38th control example will be described below.
FIG. 2043(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the pseudo interval effect executed in the time saving state C (loop bonus mode) in the fifty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 2043(b), in the fifty-ninth control example, a vertically elongated substantially rectangular display area HR31 is formed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm during execution of the pseudo interval rendering. For HR31, a continuation meter KM is displayed with four scales: 25%, 50%, 75% and 100%. In addition, the text "Keep the continuation meter at 100% by hitting right!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the meter amount of the continuation meter increases by hitting to the right. It should be noted that the meter amount of this continuation meter increases or decreases in conjunction with the number of pending balls of the second special symbol. That is, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, the meter amount is 0%, if it is 1, the meter amount is 25%, if it is 2, the meter amount is 50%, and 3. If it is 1, the meter amount is 75%, and if it is 4, the meter amount is 100%. In the time-saving state C, by urging the player to maintain the upper limit (four pieces) of the second special symbol reserved balls by a continuation meter, a big hit is achieved in the state where the number of reserved balls is small in the time-saving state C.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress that you will be elected to. That is, if the second special pattern reserved balls are not accumulated to the upper limit number at the start of the big win, there is no opportunity to acquire the second special pattern reserved balls until the big win is finished, so the big win is time-saving. If the number of times has been reached, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols that can be executed in the normal state B after the end of the big win is reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous situation. Therefore, in the fifty-ninth control example, in the time saving state C, the continuation meter is displayed to easily maintain the second special symbol holding ball at the upper limit number. As a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern can be easily set to the upper limit number at the start of the big win, so the number of lotteries of the second special pattern in the normal state B is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of
Next, referring to FIG. 2044, a transition method between states in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 2044, in the fifty-ninth control example, mainly five types of states (modes) are provided. That is, it is set to the normal state of normal symbols (low probability state of normal symbols, no variation shortening, no open extension), and the game progresses by making the first special symbol lottery by hitting left (second special It is set to the normal state A (normal mode), which is an impossible (difficult) state to execute the lottery of symbols, and the time-saving state of normal symbols (high probability state of normal symbols, with fluctuation reduction, with open extension). A time-saving state A (chance mode), a time-saving state B (time-saving mode), and a time-saving state C (loop bonus mode), which are states in which the game is progressed by performing a lottery for the second special symbol by hitting, and a normal pattern. A state in which the normal state (normal symbol low probability state, no variation shortening, no open extension) is set, and the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed due to the presence of one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol. A normal state B (retraction mode) is provided at least.

Here, the time-saving states A to C are different in that different time-saving end conditions are set, and the easiness of entering the second ball entrance 640 is common. More specifically, in the time-saving state A, the first end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 10 times, and the second end condition is satisfied by executing the small winning game once. Then, the third end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the second special symbol once, and the fourth end condition is satisfied by accumulating one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation. . Therefore, in the time-saving state A, if the player continues to hit to the right according to the suggestion of the production, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the first entry into the second ball entrance 640, and the time-saving final variation is started. Then, when the first timing (variation stop timing) is set as the update timing of the number of times of time saving in the time saving final change, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 again during the time saving final change. It is configured such that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one and the time saving state is ended. On the other hand, if the second timing (variation start timing) is set as the update timing of the number of times of time saving in the final time saving change, the time saving state ends at the same time as the start of the time saving final change, so only one time saving final change , the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed. In other words, when shifting to the chance mode (time saving state A), an opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol once or twice is given.
In addition, while the time saving state B is common to the time saving state A for the first and second end conditions, the time saving state in that the third end condition is set twice and the fourth end condition is set to 65535 different from A. Therefore, when the player continues to hit to the right in the time saving state B, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the first entry into the second ball entrance 640, and the first variation display is started. The second variation display can be started in a state in which the second special symbol reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit number (four pieces) during the first variation display. When the update timing of the number of times of reduction in time is set to the first timing (variation stop timing) in this second fluctuation display (that is, the final fluctuation of time reduction), while obtaining the opportunity to acquire one additional ball , When it is set to the second timing (variation start timing), it becomes impossible to acquire the second special symbol holding ball during the time saving final variation. Thereby, when it shifts to the time saving state B, it is possible to obtain a total of 5 or 6 opportunities for the advantageous second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, in the time-saving state C, the first end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 100 times, the second end condition is satisfied by executing the small winning game once, and the second end condition is established. The third end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbol 100 times, and the fourth end condition is satisfied by accumulating 65535 or more reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time saving final variation. That is, when neither the big win nor the small win is won, the time-saving state continues until the lottery for the special symbols is executed 100 times. Here, in the fifty-ninth control example, the probability of winning a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols is set to about 1/3, so the big win is also possible over 100 special symbol lotteries. The event of not winning even a jackpot has a very low probability (approximately 2/3 to the 100th power) that does not occur. Therefore, the time-saving state C is positioned as a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot is determined substantially.
First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 2044, a method of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 2044, there is a possibility of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a big win is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 2044, in the normal state A, the lottery for the first special symbol results in a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320, and when the jackpot B62, which is determined at a rate of 95%, is determined, the jackpot ends. The later game state is set to the time saving state A. On the other hand, when a jackpot A62 determined at a rate of 5% is determined when a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B. - 特許庁As described above, the time saving state B is more advantageous than the time saving state A (substantial jackpot probability is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol) Because it is possible to acquire many lottery opportunities for the second special symbol When a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the jackpot type is the jackpot A62. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to the middle left side of FIG. 2044, a method of shifting from the time saving state A (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the left side of the middle of FIG. 2044, from the time-saving state A (chance mode) to another state, when a big hit is won, when a small hit is won, and when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed. may move to More specifically, as shown on the middle left side of FIG. 2044, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the time saving state A, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be done. In addition, as shown in the middle left side of FIG. 2044, in the case of a small hit that is won with a probability of about 1/3 in the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state A, it is determined at a rate of 54% as a small hit type. When either of the small wins A62, C62 is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A62, D62. be done. On the other hand, when winning a small hit, if it becomes one of the small hits B62 and D62 determined at a rate of 46% as the small hit type, the small hits B62 and D62 pass through the specific area 650e3 and enter the jackpot. The game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving state B on the condition that the game is won. As described above, the time saving state C is substantially an advantageous gaming state that continues until the next big hit, while the time saving state B is a game in which the advantageous second special symbol lottery opportunity is given only 6 times at maximum. state. That is, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when a small hit is won in the time saving state A, the time saving state C is set by winning either the small hit A62 or C62. can be expected more strongly. On the other hand, when all the held balls of the second special symbol acquired in the time saving state A are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that makes players strongly expect to win a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3 during one or two second special symbol lottery opportunities. Interest in games can be improved. Strictly speaking, when the first second special symbol holding ball is acquired in the time saving state A, the state is shifted to the normal state, but in FIG. 2044, the second special The period until all the holding balls of the pattern are digested is called the time saving state A.

Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 2044, a method of shifting from the time saving state B (time saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the middle right side of FIG. 2044, when the time-saving state B (time-saving mode) is changed to another state, when a big hit is won, when a small hit is won, and when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed. may move to More specifically, as shown on the middle right side of FIG. 2044, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery in the time saving state B, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C regardless of the big win type. be done. In addition, as shown in the middle right side of FIG. 2044, in the time saving state B, if the second special symbol lottery is a small hit with a probability of about 1/3, it is determined as a small hit type at a rate of 54%. When either of the small wins A62, C62 is achieved, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A62, C62. be done. Further, when all the second special symbol holding balls acquired in the time saving state B are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. On the other hand, when winning a small hit, if it becomes either a small hit B62 or D62 determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, pass through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B62 or D62 On the condition that the jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the time saving state B (the time saving state B is looped). As a result, in the time-saving state B, as in the time-saving state A, it is strongly hoped that the ball of the second special symbol acquired during the time-saving state will win a small hit or a big hit with a probability of about 1/3. When a small win is won, the game has a game property that makes the player strongly desire to be set to a more advantageous time saving state C, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, with reference to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 2044, a method of shifting from the time saving state C (loop bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 2044, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state C (loop bonus mode) to another state when a small hit is won and when the time saving limit number of times is reached. . More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. The state is set to normal state B. Also, if a small win is won in the time saving state C and the type of the won small win is a small win D62, the big win ends on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win B62. The later game state is set to the time saving state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. If it is not d62, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state C (the time saving state is looped). Therefore, once shifting to the time-saving state C, a very advantageous state is formed in which the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached or the small win D62 is won.
Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 2044, a method of shifting from normal state B (retraction mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 2044, from the normal state B (retraction mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and the second special held during the time saving state C There is a possibility of migration when all the holding balls of the pattern are digested. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 2044, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state B, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 2044, in the normal state B, if the second special symbol lottery results in a small win with a probability of about 1/3, the small win type is determined at a rate of 54%. When it becomes either of the small hits A62, C62, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big hit is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit A62, C62. be. On the other hand, when winning a small hit, when it becomes either a small hit B62 or D62 determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, the small hit B62 or D62 passes through the specific area 650e3 and becomes a big hit. The game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving state B on the condition that the game is won. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when the small hit is won in the normal state B, the small hit A62, C62 is elected and the time saving state C is set. You can expect more. On the other hand, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested in the normal state B (all are removed), the state after digestion becomes the normal state A.
Thus, in the fifty-ninth control example, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the normal state B, when winning a small win with a high probability of about 1/3, the small win type is a small win A62. , C62 or small wins B62, D62, the profit obtained by the player is largely different. Therefore, whether winning small winnings A62, C62 and transitioning to time saving state C to form an advantageous state of winning multiple big winnings, or winning small winnings B62, D62 and shifting to time saving state B Since it is possible to make the player play the game while paying more attention to the situation, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the fifty-ninth control example>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fifty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 2045(a). FIG. 2045(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 2045(a), the ROM202 in the fifty-ninth control example replaces the jackpot type selection table 202bH with respect to the configuration of the ROM202 in the above-described forty-sixth control example (see FIG. 1267(a)). Type selection table 202tb is provided, time reduction grant table 202te is provided instead of time reduction grant table 202eH, small hit type selection table 202tf is provided instead of small hit type selection table 202fH , and in that a failure type selection table 202tHa is provided instead of the failure type selection table 202Ha. Other configurations are the same as those of the forty-sixth control example described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, with reference to FIG. 2045(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202tb in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 2045(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this jackpot type selection table 202tb. As shown in FIG. 2045(b), in the jackpot type selection table 202tb in the fifty-ninth control example, two types of jackpot A62 and jackpot B62 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C62 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 2045 (b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot A62" is defined in correspondence, "Big win B62" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A62" has four rounds, and basically, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state B (the time-saving state in which the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is given up to five times). It is a jackpot type. In addition, "jackpot B62" has four rounds, and basically, the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state A (the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery opportunity is given up to twice). It is a jackpot type that is played. Therefore, there is no difference between the ``jackpot A62'' and the ``jackpot B62'' in terms of the number of rounds, but the ``jackpot A62'' is more advantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished. can be awarded twice more than the "jackpot B62", the "jackpot A62" is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than the "jackpot B62".
Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A62" and "jackpot B62" are 5 and 95, respectively, the ratios of winning ``jackpot A62'' and ``jackpot B62'' when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern are 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, a time-saving state B with a relatively low probability (5% rate) and a high degree of advantage is set, and a relatively high probability (95% rate) ), a time-saving state A with a low advantageous degree is set. In addition, this is a story limited to the normal state, and if you win the "jackpot A62" or "jackpot B62" in the time-saving state (the jackpot is started), the number of times of the time-saving limit has not been reached. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state C.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2045 (b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, for the entire range (range of "0 to 99") that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, "jackpot C62 ” are defined in association with each other. Since ``big win C62'' is associated with the whole range of possible values of the first win type counter C2, ``big win C2'' is always decided when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern. This "jackpot C62" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state C. The number of rounds is the same as that of other jackpots, but since the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C with the highest degree of advantage, it is the most advantageous jackpot type among all the jackpot types.

In addition to these "big win A62" to "big win C62", "big win D62" is also provided in the fifty-ninth control example. "Big win D62" is won when a small win is won, a small win B62 or a small win D62 is determined as a small win type, and a specific area 650e3 is passed during the small win B62, D62 small win game. The game state after the end of the jackpot is basically a 4-round jackpot set to the time-saving state B. In addition, when "jackpot D49" is won in the time saving state, the time saving state C is set on the condition that the time saving limit number of times is not reached in the same manner as other jackpot types. In addition, "jackpot E49" is a jackpot type that is won when a small win is won, a small win C49 is determined as a small win type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed during the small win game of the small win B49, The game state after the end of the big win is a 4-round big win in which the time-saving state C is set.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2046(a), the details of the working hours provision table 202te in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. This time saving grant table 202te is similar to the time saving grant table 202eH (see FIG. 1268 (a)) in the 46th control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions. FIG. 2046(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time reduction provision table 202te.
As shown in FIG. 2046 (a), the time saving grant table 202te in the fifty-ninth control example is associated with the value of each counter referred to when determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied for each jackpot type. are stipulated. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 2046 (a), in the fifty-ninth control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, as in the above-described forty-sixth control example, a time-saving counter 203h and a small hit Four counters 203s, a special figure 2 counter 203t, and a prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are provided. The time saving counter 203h is a counter for judging whether or not an end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time saving state is set is established (judgment), and is a small winning counter. 203s is a counter for determining whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of small winning games executed after the time saving state is established (determines), and a special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed after the time-saving state is set, and the prescribed number of pending balls The counter 203ka is a counter for judging whether or not an end condition (fourth end condition) corresponding to the number of held balls of the second special symbol accumulated during execution of the final variable display of the time saving state is established. be.
As shown in FIG. 2046 (a), in the fifty-ninth control example, four types of "jackpot A62" to "jackpot D62" are provided as the jackpot types, and the time reduction grant table 202te has for each jackpot type Then, the values of the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the east head 2 counter 203t, and the values of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka (that is, the first to fourth end conditions) are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 2046(a), for either "jackpot A62" or "jackpot D62" as the jackpot type, when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10 ", the value "1" of the small hit counter 203s, the value "2" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "65535" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. For this reason, when either "jackpot A62" or "jackpot D62" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbol is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of small win games is set as the second end condition. The number of times of execution is set to 1 time, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 2 times as the third end condition, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the final variation of time saving is set to 65535 as the fourth end condition. ing. That is, the time saving state B is set. In this time-saving state B, right-handed hitting is continued continuously, the first lottery of the second special pattern is lost, and the second lottery result of the second special pattern (that is, the time-saving final fluctuation) is lost B. In the case, the time saving state is terminated by subtracting the number of time saving times at the timing of the start of the change in the time saving final fluctuation, so all the second special symbol holding balls acquired within the time saving after the time saving state B started It is possible to execute the lottery for the second special pattern up to six times before it is consumed. On the other hand, if the first second special symbol lottery is lost and the second second special symbol lottery result is lost A, the time saving number will not be updated until the time saving final fluctuation ends, so time saving It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbols up to six times from the start of the state B until all the reserved balls of the second special symbols acquired within the time saving are digested. Therefore, after shifting to the time saving state B, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol can be changed according to whether the second lottery result of the second special symbol is the loss B or not. It is possible to realize a game property that strongly expects that it will not happen.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2046 (a), when the game state at the time of winning either "jackpot A62" or "jackpot D62" is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the small hit The value "1" of the counter 203s, the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "65536" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when either "jackpot A62" or "jackpot D62" is won in the time-saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of small win games is set as the second end condition. The number of times of execution is set to 1, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 100 times as the third end condition, and the number of held balls of the second special symbol in the final variation of time saving is set to 65536 as the fourth end condition. ing. That is, the time saving state C is set. In the time-saving state C, a jackpot or a small win that is substantially determined is won with a probability of about 1/3, so there is almost no possibility that the time-saving state will continue until the final change of the time-saving state, and the second end condition, Alternatively, the time saving state is ended based on the jackpot winning.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2046 (a), for "jackpot B62" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the small hit counter 203s The value "1", the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "1" of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot B62" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third end condition, one lottery number of the second special symbol is set, and as the fourth end condition, the number of the second special symbol reserved balls in the time-saving final variation is set as one. That is, the time saving state A is set. If the lottery result of the second special symbol for the first time (that is, the final variation of the time saving) is lost B, the number of times of reducing the time at the start timing of the variation in the final variation of the time saving. is subtracted to end the time saving state, so the time saving state is ended without obtaining even one reserved ball of the second special symbol during the deviation A fluctuation. That is, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed only once from the start of the time saving state B to the time when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol acquired within the time saving are digested. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first 2nd special pattern is out and it becomes A, the time saving final variation ends or the number of pending balls of the prescribed 2nd special pattern (1 piece) is reached. Since the number of times is not updated, one additional second special symbol reserved ball can be obtained in the final variation, and all the second special symbol reserved balls acquired within the time saving after the time saving state A is started. It is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol a maximum of two times before digesting. Therefore, after shifting to the time saving state A, the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol can be changed according to whether the first lottery result of the second special symbol is the loss B or not. It is possible to realize a game property that strongly expects that it will not happen.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1268 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "jackpot B62" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure The value "100" of the 2 counter 203t and the value "65536" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time saving state C is set in the same manner as the "jackpot A62" and the "jackpot D62".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1268 (a), for "jackpot C62" as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "100" and the value of the small hit counter 203s "1 ", the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "65536" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time-saving state C is set in the same way as when "jackpot A62", "jackpot B62" or "jackpot D62" is won in the time-saving state.
Thus, in the 59th control example, as in the 46th control example, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, one of the time saving states A to C is set according to the jackpot type, When a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous time-saving state C regardless of the type of the jackpot. As a result, when a big win is won directly or via a small win in the normal state, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the big win. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, the most advantageous time-saving state C is set almost (at a rate of 95%), so that the player can play the game while having a sense of security. can. In addition, as described above, even if the jackpot is won in the time saving state C, if the time saving limit number of times is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state. Further, when the small winning D62 is won in the time saving state C, the small winning is ended at the start of the small winning game and the execution of the big winning D62 is set in the normal state, so the game state after the big winning D62 is finished is the time saving. State B62 is set. That is, regardless of whether or not the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, it will fall (downgrade) to a time saving state with a relatively low advantage.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2046(a), details of the small hit type selection table 202tf in the 62nd example will be described. This small hit type selection table 202tf, similar to the small hit type selection table 202fH (see FIG. 1268 (b)) in the forty-sixth control example described above, selects a small hit type when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery. It is a data table referred to for determination. Figure 2046 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this small hit type selection table 202tf. As shown in FIG. 2046 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 43", "small hit A62" is associated with the small hit type, and the small hit type The value of the counter C5 corresponds to the range of "44 to 84", "small hit B62" is defined as the small hit type, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "85 to 94". On the other hand, "small hit C62" is defined as a small hit type in association, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "95 to 99". are defined in association with each other. Here, "small hit A62" to "small hit D62" are all small hits that can easily enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 simply by continuing to hit right during the execution of the small hit game. It is a hit type, and when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit A62" and "small hit C62", while winning the big hit C62, "small hit B62" and "small hit D62" ”, a jackpot D49 is won when a game ball enters the specific area 650e3.
As described above, the jackpot C62 is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot D62 ends when the jackpot is won in the normal state. The later game state is set to the time saving state B, while the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C when winning in the time saving state is set. In addition, the number of rounds for each jackpot is 4 rounds. Therefore, since the big win C62 has a higher degree of advantage than the big win D62, the small win A62 and the small win C62 are more advantageous than the small win B62 and the small win D62 as the small wins to be won in the normal state. becomes higher. In addition, in the time saving state C (loop bonus mode), when the small hits A62 and B62 are won, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the time saving limit number of times has not been reached. When the win C62 is won, the time-saving limit number of times is cleared and the game state after the big win is completed is set to the time-saving state C, and when the small win D62 is won, the time-saving limit number of times is cleared. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. That is, when the small winning C62 and the small winning D62 are won, the value of the small winning counter 203s is subtracted at the start of the small winning game, and the time saving state is terminated (In other small winning types, V winning occurs. After setting the execution of the jackpot game, the time saving state is terminated). In other words, the small hits C62 and D62 are won in the time saving state C, and the big win set to be executed by the occurrence of the V prize is treated as the jackpot won (set to be executed) in the normal state, and the time saving limit number of times. (Counter value of time saving limit counter 203kb) is reset. As a result, when winning the small win C62 in the loop bonus mode, the degree of advantage is higher than other small wins. On the other hand, when the small hit D62 is won in the loop bonus mode, the advantage degree is low because the transition to the time saving state C cannot be performed.

In addition, "small hit A62" and "small hit B62" is a small hit of the type in which the number of times of working hours (time saving counter 203h, special figure 2 counter 203t) is updated (subtracted) at the first timing (variation stop timing) , "small hit C62", and "small hit D62" is the second timing (fluctuation start timing) time saving number of times (time saving counter 203h, special figure 2 counter 203t) is updated (subtracted) is a type of small hit . That is, when the final variation of the time saving state A or the time saving state B results in a small hit A62 or a small hit B62, the second special symbol reserved balls can be accumulated to the maximum in the same manner as the later-described outlier A. On the other hand, when it becomes a small hit C62 or a small hit D62, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol that can be stored decreases, as in the case of a loss B described later. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the time saving state A or the time saving state B can be changed according to the type of the small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when the time saving state ends at the fluctuation start timing in the time saving final fluctuation, by configuring it so that there is a possibility of being out and a small hit, even if the time saving state ends at the fluctuation start timing , the player can be expected to win the small win C62 or the small win D62 in the variation. Therefore, since the player's motivation for the game can be maintained, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Of the 100 random values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, "small hit A62", "small hit B62", "small hit C62", and "small hit D62" Since the random numbers (counter values) associated with are 44, 41, 10, and 5, respectively, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, "small win A62", The ratio of "small hit B62", "small hit C62", and "small hit D62" are determined, respectively, 44% (44/100), 41% (41/100), 10% (10/100), and 5% (5/100). That is, the total ratio of the small hits (small hits A62, C62) corresponding to the big hit C62 is 54%, and the total ratio of the small hits (small hits B62, D62) corresponding to the big hit D62 is 46%. In addition, the ratio of the sum of the small hits (small hits A62, B62) for which the update timing of the time saving number is set to the first timing is 85%, and the small hit (small hit) to which the update timing of the time saving number is set to the second timing The ratio of the sum of hits C62, D62) is 15%.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2047, the details of the failure type selection table 202tHa in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. This lost type selection table 202tHa is a data table referred to for determining the lost type when the special symbols are lost in the lottery. FIG. 2047 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the exclusion type selection table 202tHa. As shown in FIG. 2047, as the complete loss type of the first special symbol, "outside A" is associated as the outside type with respect to the total possible range of the outside type counter C7 (range of "0 to 99"). stipulated. This "off A" is an outlier type in which the number of times of time saving (special figure 2 counter 203t and time saving counter 203h) is subtracted at the time of fluctuation stop.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2047, as the completely missing type of the second special symbol, the value of the missing type counter C7 is defined in the range of "0 to 97", and "missing A" is defined as the missing type. "98, 99" is defined in association with "outside B" as the outage type. Since this "off B" is an outlier type in which the number of time reductions (special figure 2 counter 203t and time reduction counter 203h) is subtracted at the start of fluctuation, the number of time reductions is set to 1 (special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 In the time saving state A (set to 2) and the time saving number of times set to 2 times (the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 2), the lottery result of the special design is out of the time saving final change B In that case, the time saving state is ended at the second timing (variation start timing), and the opportunity to save the second special symbol holding ball during the time saving final variation is not obtained. Therefore, in particular, in the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the degree of advantage of the player greatly changes depending on whether the second special symbol lottery in the time saving final variation is lost B or the other lottery result. It is possible to play a game while paying attention to the types of the outliers.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the outlier type counter C7, the random numbers (counter values) are 98 and 2, respectively, so that the ratio of “missing A” and “missing B” when they are lost in the lottery of the second special symbol is 98% (98/ 100), and 2% (2/100). As described above, when the small hit is elected, the time saving number of times is updated at the second timing (one of the small hits C62 and D62 is determined) is 15%, while the second timing when it is out Since the rate of updating the number of times of reduction in time (outgoing B is determined) is 2%, when the number of times of reduction in time is updated at the second timing in the final variation of time reduction, the expectation that it is a small hit is given to the player. You can hold it tighter. Therefore, even if the opportunity to accumulate the second special pattern reserved balls is reduced compared to the lottery result in which the number of times of time saving is updated at the first timing, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2048, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 2048 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 2048, the RAM 223 in the fifty-ninth control example has a loop number counter 223tHa added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the forty-sixth control example (see FIG. 1269), and the number of remaining hits The difference is that the counter 223kb and the remaining breakthrough number counter 223Ha are deleted.
The loop number counter 223tHa is a counter that indicates the number of winnings of the jackpot after shifting to the loop bonus mode. According to the counter value of the loop number counter 223tHa, the apparent number of rounds of the jackpot is set. That is, in the fifty-ninth control example, an effect is executed to make it look like a big win of 1 from the transition to the loop bonus mode to the end of the loop bonus mode. Therefore, when setting the number of rounds for the jackpot, set the number of rounds by taking into account the number of times the jackpot has already been completed during the loop bonus mode and the actual number of rounds for the jackpot (actual number of rounds + already completed The number of times of the big hits multiplied by 4 is set as the apparent number of rounds). As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the player has won one jackpot, so that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.
<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifty-ninth control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fifty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2049 to 2051. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 2049, the details of the special symbol determination process (S211K) in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. This special symbol determination process (S211K) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 1270) in the forty-sixth control example described above. It is a process for executing the lottery of symbols. FIG. 2049 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol determination process (S211K).

Of the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 2049) in the fifty-ninth control example, in each processing of S301 to S305, each of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination processing in the above-described forty-sixth control example (see FIG. 1270) The same processing as is performed. In addition, in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 2049) in the fifty-ninth control example, in the process of S303, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a big hit (S303: No), various A disconnection process for setting is executed (S311K), and this process ends. The details of this out-time processing (S311K) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 2050 is a flow chart showing the out-time processing (S311K). This outage process (S311K) is a process executed instead of the outage process (see FIG. 1271) in the forty-sixth control example described above. This is a process for performing control according to the type of deviation.
Of the deviation processing (see FIG. 2050) in the fifty-ninth control example, each processing of S331G to S341G is the same as each processing of S331G to S341G of the deviation processing (see FIG. 1271) in the above-described forty-sixth control example. process is executed. In addition, in the out-time processing (see FIG. 2050) in the fifty-ninth control example, first, it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S321K), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S321K: Yes ), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to the small hit (S322K), and the corresponding small hit type is specified from the small hit type selection table 202tf (see FIG. 2046(b)) based on the value of the small hit type counter C5. , the symbol corresponding to the small winning type is set as the small winning symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device (S323K).
When the processing of S323K ends, it is then determined whether the small winning type is B62 or D62 (S324K). In the processing of S324K, when it is determined that the small winning type is neither B62 nor D62 (S324K: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S324K, if it is determined that the small winning type is either B62 or D62 (S324K: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S325K).

In the process of S325K, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S325K: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S325K, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S325K: Yes), by moving the process to S335G, the time saving counter 203h and special figure 2 counter 203t set the update for In other words, the update of the number of times of reduction in working hours at the first timing (variation start timing) is set. On the other hand, in the process of S321K, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S321K: No), the process proceeds to S331G.
By executing this off time processing (see FIG. 2050), when it becomes either off B, small hit B62, and small hit D62, the time saving number of times is updated at the first timing (fluctuation start timing) Since it is possible, in the time saving final fluctuation of time saving state A and time saving state B, the time saving state is terminated at the first timing (variation start timing), so it is difficult to accumulate the second special symbol holding ball during the time saving final fluctuation In the first situation, the time saving state is ended at the second timing (variation stop timing) later than the first timing, so that the second special symbol holding ball is easily accumulated during the time saving final fluctuation. It is possible to realize a novel game property that can establish a situation. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, the details of the small winning time saving update process (S611K) in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. This small hit time saving update process (S611K) is a process executed instead of the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1273) in the above-described 46th control example, similar to the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 1273) Secondly, it is a process for updating various counter values for judging the time saving end condition based on the winning of the small prize and ending the time saving state when it is judged that the time saving end condition is established. Figure 2051 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this small hitting time saving renewal processing (S611K).
Among the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 2051) in the 59th control example, in each process of S701 to S704, S706, S712A and S713A, the small hit time saving update process in the above-described 46th control example (see FIG. 1273 ) are executed in steps S701 to S704, S706, S712A and S713A. In addition, in the small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 2051) in the 59th control example, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the small hit is won (S701: Yes), then whether it is a loop bonus mode (S711K), and when it is determined that it is the loop bonus mode (S711K: Yes), it is determined whether it is a small hit C62 or D62 (S712K).

In the process of S712K, when it is determined that the win is not a small win C62 or D62 (S712K: No), the process proceeds to S712A. That is, control is performed to continue the time saving state until the V winning is detected and the execution of the big winning game is set without ending the time saving state at the start timing of the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of S712K, when it is determined that the win is a small win C62 or D62 (S712K: Yes), the process proceeds to S702. That is, control for ending the time saving state at the start timing of the small winning game (control for making the time saving state end before setting the execution of the big winning game) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S711K, if it is determined that the mode is not the loop bonus mode (S711K: No), the process proceeds to S702. That is, control for ending the time saving state at the start timing of the small winning game (control for making the time saving state end before setting the execution of the big winning game) is executed.
By executing this small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 2051), when a small hit is won in a state other than the loop bonus mode (time saving state C), and in the loop bonus mode, either the small hit C62, D62 When winning, it is possible to control the timing of setting the execution of the big win to the normal state by terminating the time-saving state at the start of the small win, while when winning the small wins A62 and B62 in the loop bonus mode, The time saving state can be continued until the execution of the jackpot game is set. That is, it is better to win a small hit in the loop bonus mode than to win a small hit in a game state other than the loop bonus mode (normal state, time saving state A, and time saving state B). The percentage set can be significantly higher. Specifically, in the loop bonus mode, the transition to the loop bonus mode occurs only when the small hit is A62 or C62. Then, since the loop bonus mode is looped when a small win other than the small win D62 is obtained, the loop percentage of the loop bonus mode can be increased up to 95%. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the fifty-ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2052 to 2059. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 2052, the details of the winning information command process (S3211K), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 1059) in the fifty-ninth control example (thirty-eighth control example), will be described. FIG. 2052 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process (S3211K).
In the winning information command processing (see FIG. 2052) in the fifty-ninth control example, S5801A and S5807A to S5810A of the winning information command processing in the forty-sixth control example (see FIG. 1274), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S5807A to S5810A is executed. In addition, in the winning information command process (see FIG. 2052) in the fifty-ninth control example, after executing the process of S5801A, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the chance mode (time saving state A) (S5811K). If it is determined that the game is in the chance mode (S5811K: Yes), a chance mode process for setting an effect corresponding to the detection of starting winning in the chance mode is executed (S5812K), and the process proceeds to S5810A. and migrate. The details of this chance mode processing (S5812K) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5811K, if it is determined that the current game state is not the chance mode (time saving state A) (S5811K: No), then whether the current game state is the time saving mode (time saving state B) It is determined whether or not (S5813K), and if it is determined that it is the time saving mode (S5813K: Yes), the time saving mode time processing for setting the effect corresponding to when the start winning is detected in the time saving mode is executed. (S5814K), the process proceeds to S5810A. In addition, the details of this time-saving mode processing (S5814K) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5813K, if it is determined that the current game state is not the time saving mode (S5813K: No), it is determined whether the current game state is the loop bonus mode (time saving state C). Then (S5815K), if it is determined that it is the loop bonus mode (S5815K: Yes), the meter amount of the continuation meter KM is updated according to the number of held balls (S5816K), and the process proceeds to S5810A. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 due to the start winning this time, the meter amount of the continuation meter KM is set to 25%, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set to 2 If it becomes, set the meter amount of the continuation meter KM to 50%, and if the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special pattern becomes 3, set the meter amount of the continuation meter KM to 75%, and set the meter amount of the continuation meter KM to 75%. When the number of reserved balls of the pattern becomes 4, the meter amount of the continuation meter KM is set to 100%. On the other hand, when the start winning of the first special symbol is detected, the meter amount of the continuation meter KM is maintained without being changed. On the other hand, in the process of S5815K, if it is determined that the mode is not the loop bonus mode (S5815K: No), the process proceeds to S5807A.
By updating the continuation meter KM by this winning information command processing (see FIG. 2052), the player is forced to actively hit to the right in order to keep the meter amount of the continuation meter KM at 100% in the loop bonus mode. can continue. Therefore, in the loop bonus mode, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to increase the possibility that the second special symbol holding balls will accumulate to the maximum number, so when the jackpot is won, the time reduction limit number of times is reached and the normal state B (pulled back) mode), it is possible to further increase the possibility that the number of held balls is the upper limit number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money due to a decrease in the number of reserved balls at the time of transition to the normal state B.例文帳に追加
Next, with reference to FIG. 2053, the chance mode processing (S5812K), which is one of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 2052), will be described. FIG. 2053 is a flow chart showing the contents of this chance mode processing (S5812K). In the chance mode processing (S5812K), first, the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1047(b)) is read (S5831K), and the read attack icon selection table 222ka is referred to, and a winning information command is issued. The icon type is determined according to the drawn lottery result and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 (S5832K), and then it is determined whether the first winning flag 223Hc is ON (S5833K). In the processing of S5833K, if it is determined that the first winning flag 223Hc is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5833K: No), it means that the first starting winning has been detected after shifting to the chance mode. Therefore, the first winning flag 223Hc is set to ON (S5834K), and the process proceeds to S5835K.

In the processing of S5835K, whether the starting winning prize detected this time is winning information corresponding to either B, small winning C, or D (that is, whether it is a lottery result in which the number of times of shortening time is updated at the fluctuation start timing) It is determined (S5835K), and if it is determined that it is not the winning information corresponding to any of the out B, the small hits C, and D (that is, it is a lottery result in which the number of times of time reduction is updated at the fluctuation stop timing) (S5835K : No), set the notification of continuous hit effect (S5836K), and set the notification effect of notifying the determined icon type (S5838K). Next, the information in the information storage area is updated according to the determined icon type (S5839K), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5835K, if it is determined that it is winning information corresponding to either the outlier B, the small hit C, or D (that is, the lottery result in which the number of times of reduction in working hours is updated at the start of fluctuation) ( S5835K: Yes), notification of one-hit performance is set (S5837K), and this process is terminated. Although omitted from the drawings, these processes are performed for the starting winning of the second special symbol, and no particular effect setting is performed for the starting winning of the first special symbol.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5833K, when it is determined that the first prize winning flag 223Hc is ON (S5833K: Yes), it means that the second special symbol reserved ball is additionally acquired in the time saving final variation. Therefore, the process proceeds to S5838K, and an effect is executed to announce the attack icon corresponding to the second attack in the continuous attack effect.
By executing this chance mode processing (see FIG. 2053), when the first start winning is detected in the chance mode (time saving state A) in which the number of times of time saving is one time, Directed according to whether it is a starting prize corresponding to the lottery result where the number of times of working hours is updated at the stop timing) or a starting prize corresponding to the lottery results where the number of times of working hours is updated at the second timing (variation start timing) Since the aspect can be varied, the presentation aspect can be set more appropriately.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2054, the time-saving mode process (S5814K), which is one process of the above-described winning information command process (see FIG. 2052), will be described. FIG. 2054 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time-saving mode processing (S5814K).

In this time-saving mode processing (S5814K), first, it is determined whether this start-up winning is detected during the first fluctuation display in the time-saving mode (or the first time in the time-saving mode). S5851K), when it is determined that it is the start winning detected during the first variable display (or the first time) (S5851K: Yes), a new ? A notification effect for notifying acquisition of the icon is set (S5852K), and the process proceeds to S5856K. On the other hand, in the process of S5851K, if it is determined that the first variation display is not currently being performed (that is, the time saving final variation is being performed) (S5851K: No), the attack icon selection table 222ka is read. (S5853K), the icon type is determined according to the lottery result notified by the winning information command and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 (S5854K). Next, a notification effect for notifying the determined icon type is set (S5855K), the information in the information storage area is updated according to the determined icon type (S5856K), and this processing ends.
By executing this time-saving mode processing (see FIG. 2054), until the first variable display in the time-saving mode ends, only the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is displayed. It is configured to suggest to the player by the number of icons, and the actual attack method can be notified to the player after the time saving final variation is started. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the player from being distracted by the attack method during the first variable display and forgetting to store the second special pattern reserved balls up to the upper limit number. A suitable presentation mode can be realized.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2055, the jackpot related process (S3411K) in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. This jackpot-related process (S3411K) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 1276) in the forty-sixth control example described above. This is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command when a jackpot-related command is received from. FIG. 2055 is a flow chart showing this jackpot related process (S3411K).
Of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 2055) in the fifty-ninth control example, in each of the processing of S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, S3614 and 3625A, the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1276) in the above-described forty-sixth control example. The same processes as those of S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, S3614 and 3625A are executed. In addition, in the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 2055) in the fifty-ninth control example, in the processing of S3603, when it is determined that the opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S3603: Yes), the jackpot type and the loop number counter 223tHa is determined (S3611K), and an opening command for display corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (S3612K). In the process of S3612K, if the jackpot to transition to the loop bonus mode, the opening effect for the loop bonus is set only in the case of the first jackpot, and the loop number counter 223tHa is set for the second jackpot in the loop bonus mode. Set the pseudo interval production of the number of rounds according to the value of . In addition, if it is a jackpot of the type that shifts to the chance mode or the time saving mode, a normal jackpot effect is set.

When the process of S3612K is completed, it is then determined whether it is the first big win in the loop bonus mode (S3613K). In the process of S3613K, when it is determined that the first big win in the loop bonus mode is determined (S3613K: Yes), the loop number counter 223tHa is set to 1 (S3614K), and the process proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, in the process of S3613K, when it is determined that the first jackpot of the loop bonus mode is not detected (S3613K: No), the process of S3614K is skipped and the process proceeds to S3614.
Also, in the process of S3610, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3610: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3615K), and the process proceeds to S3614. Details of this ending command processing (S3615K) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 2056 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ending command process (S3615K). In this ending command process (S3615K), first, it is determined whether the value of the loop number counter 223tHa is greater than 0 (S5911K), and the value of the loop number counter 223tHa is not greater than 0 (ie, 0). Yes) (S5911K: No), it means that it is not a big win in the loop bonus mode (or the first time in the loop bonus mode), so the ending command for display indicating the ending effect according to the win type is set (S5912K), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5911K, if it is determined that the value of the loop number counter 223tHa is greater than 0 (that is, the loop bonus mode is in progress) (S5911K: Yes), the value of the loop number counter 223tHa is set to 1. (S5913K), and if it is determined that the value of the loop number counter 223tHa is 1 (S5913K: Yes), an ending command for display indicating the ending effect of confirmation of continuation is set (S5914K), End this process.
On the other hand, in the process of S5913K, if it is determined that the value of the loop number counter 223tHa is not 1 (S5913K: No), it is determined whether it is a big hit via the small hit D62 (S5915K), and the small hit D62 via If it is determined that it is not a jackpot (a type of jackpot that falls to the time saving mode) (S5915K: No), it is determined whether the time saving limit has been reached (S5916K). In the process of S5916K, if it is determined that the time-saving limit has been reached (S5916K: Yes), and in the process of S5915K, if it is determined that it is a big hit via the small hit D62 (S5915K: Yes), the loop bonus A loop bonus ending process for setting the yield is executed (S5917K), and this process ends. Details of the loop bonus ending process (S5917K) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5916K, if it is determined that the time saving limit has not been reached (S5916K: No), add 1 to the value of the loop number counter 223tHa (S5918K), then the meter amount of the continuation meter is 0 % (S5919K), and if it is determined that the meter amount of the continuation meter is 0% (S5919K: Yes), the continuation is notified by the reversal production with the continuation judgment production of only the end icon. A display ending command indicating the mode is set (S5920K), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5919K, if it is determined that the meter amount of the continuation meter is not 0% (S5919K: No), an ending command for display indicating an ending effect accompanied by a continuation judgment effect in which continuation is notified is issued. Set (S5921K) and terminate this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2057, loop bonus end processing (S5917K), which is one processing of the aforementioned ending command processing (see FIG. 2056), will be described. FIG. 2057 is a flow chart showing the contents of this loop bonus ending process (S5917K). Of the loop bonus end processing (see FIG. 2057) in the fifty-ninth control example, S5931G to S5936G, S5940G and S5941G of the MAX bonus end processing (see FIG. 1279) in the above-described forty-sixth control example. The same processes as those of S5936G, S5940G and S5941G are executed. Further, when the loop bonus end processing (see FIG. 2057) in the fifty-ninth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot via the small hit D62 is determined (S5931K), and the jackpot via the small hit D62 is determined. If it is determined that it is (S5931K: Yes), after the end of the continuous judgment effect is notified, the ending effect of the effect mode that notifies that the state after the end is set to the time saving mode is determined ( S5932K), and the process proceeds to S5941G.
On the other hand, in the processing of S5931K, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot via the small hit D62 (S5931K: No), the process proceeds to S5931G, and is digested in the normal state B after the jackpot ends. Set the effect to notify the attack icon according to the look-ahead result of each reserved ball of the second special symbol.
Also, in the loop bonus ending process (see FIG. 2057) in the fifty-ninth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5936G that attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S5936G: Yes), the process is executed. Go to S5940G.

By executing this loop bonus end processing (see FIG. 2057), the game state after the end of the loop bonus is the normal state B (retraction mode) or the time saving state B (time saving mode). Since the mode of presentation can be set, the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2058, details of the variation effect setting process (S4311K) in the fifty-ninth control example will be described. This variable effect setting process (S4311K) is a process executed in place of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1063) in the forty-sixth control example (thirty-eighth control example), and the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 1063). ), it is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 2058 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process (S4311K).
Of the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 2058) in the fifty-ninth control example, in each process of S4401, 4403, S4421A and S4423A to S4426A, the fluctuation effect setting process in the above-described forty-sixth control example (thirty-eighth control example) The same processes as the processes of S4401, 4403, S4421A and S4423A to S4426A of (see FIG. 1063) are executed. Also, in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 2058) in the fifty-ninth control example, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol ( S4403: Yes), determine whether the current game state is loop bonus mode (time saving state C) (S4411K), if it is determined to be the loop bonus mode (S4411K: Yes), the process proceeds to S4426A Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S4411K, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the loop bonus mode (S4411K: No), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the chance mode (S4412K), and the chance mode is determined. If so (S4412K: Yes), according to the data in the icon information storage area 223ka, the corresponding one-hit effect or multiple-hit effect is set (S4413K), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4412K, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the chance mode (S4412K: No), it is determined whether it is the time saving mode (S4414K), and if it is determined that it is the time saving mode In (S4414K: Yes), the effect setting process during the time saving mode is executed (S4415K), and this process ends. In addition, the detail of production|presentation setting processing (S4415K) in time saving mode is later mentioned with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S4414K, if it is determined that the time saving mode is not set (S4414K: No), the processing of S4423A to S4425A is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 2059, production setting processing (S4415K) during time saving mode which is one processing of fluctuation production setting processing (refer to Drawing 2058) mentioned above is explained. FIG. 2059 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S4415K) during the time saving mode.
In the production setting process in the time saving mode in the 59th control example (see FIG. 2059), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the final time saving variation (S4431K), and if it is determined that it is not the final time saving variation ( S4431K: No), the effect mode with the attack icon stock effect (see FIG. 2041(a)) is set (S4432K), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4431K, if it is determined that it is the time saving final variation (S4431K: Yes), the data of the winning information storage area 223a is read (S4433K), and the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1047 (b)) (S4434K), and the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S4435K). When the processing of S4435K is completed, an attack icon corresponding to prize winning information newer than the prize winning information determined last time is determined (S4436K), and the data of the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S4437K), It is determined whether attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S4438K). In the processing of S4438K, if it is determined that the attack icons corresponding to all of the winning information have not been determined (S4438K: No), the processing is returned to S4436K, and after that, all of the winning information is determined in the processing of S4438K. The processing of S4436K to S4438K is repeated until it is determined that the corresponding attack icon has been determined.
In the processing of S4438K, if it is determined that attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S4438K: Yes), the display content of the icon display area is updated according to the type of the determined attack icon (S4439K). , sets the presentation mode of attacking with the attack method corresponding to the oldest icon (S4440K), and terminates this process.
By executing the effect setting 62 during this time saving mode (see FIG. 1058), in the first variation in the time saving mode, it is possible to accumulate the second special symbol holding ball to the upper limit number, and the second variation (that is, the final Variation), it is possible to notify the player of the attack type of the stocked attack icon. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifty-ninth control example, the first game state (normal state) and the discrimination information (various When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second game state (time saving final fluctuation is started), the first control (at the fluctuation start timing Control for updating the number of times of time saving), and a predetermined period after the predetermined condition is established than the first control (during the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation of time saving), it becomes easier to acquire discrimination information (It becomes easier to detect the start winning ) second control (control for updating the number of times of reduction in working hours at fluctuation stop timing), and at least one of a plurality of controls can be executed. That is, by varying the timing of subtracting the number of times of working hours (the counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) in the time saving state according to the conditions, even in the same working hours state, it is easy to store the second special symbol reserved balls. The length is varied according to the conditions, and even in the same time-saving state, the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols is made different according to the conditions. More specifically, in the time-saving state, a first timing between the execution of the special symbol lottery and the end of the variable display for showing the lottery result, and a second timing different from the first timing. 2 timing, the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at one of the timings, and the number of times of working hours (counter value of special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at the first timing In this case, it is configured to make it more difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls during the execution of the special symbol variable display than when the second timing is subtracted. More specifically, in this 59th control example, as the type of complete loss when the lottery result of the special symbol is completely lost, two types of loss A and loss B are provided, and in the time saving state When the special pattern lottery is completely out and the out A is determined as the out type, the time saving number (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is subtracted at the fluctuation stop timing (first timing). , When out B is determined as the type of out, the time saving number (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is configured to be subtracted at the start timing (second timing) of the fluctuation display indicating the out B there is Thereby, when the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 (that is, the time saving final fluctuation) and A is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted until the end of the fluctuation display Therefore, just by continuing to play the right-handed game during the execution of the time-saving final variation, the fourth end condition (end condition established based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becoming a specified number) It is possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol until is established. On the other hand, if the remaining time short number of times (counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is 1 state (that is, time saving final fluctuation) and B is determined, the special figure 2 counter 203t is subtracted at the start of the fluctuation Since the time-saving state is ended by doing so, the state has already fallen to the normal state during execution of the variable display. In other words, since it becomes extremely difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls in the time saving final variation, it is also difficult to increase the number of lotteries of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the present 59th control example, the subtraction timing of the special figure 2 counter 203t in the time saving final fluctuation is set to the second timing (variation start timing) than when the first timing (variation stop timing) is set In the case, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol tends to decrease even in the same time-saving state, so even in the same time-saving state It is possible to realize a novel game property by changing the number of executions).
In addition, in the fifty-ninth control example, the discrimination information (various counter values) used for discrimination of the discrimination means (lottery of special symbols) is set to a specific number (4) as an upper limit, and discrimination information that can be stored until it is used for discrimination A storage means (second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is provided, and a predetermined first effect (variation display effect corresponding to time saving final variation) for indicating the determination result of the determination means (lottery result of special symbol) A second effect comprising a specific effect mode (continuous attack effect or single attack effect) that allows the player to grasp at least the number of discrimination information that can be stored in the discrimination information storage means during the execution of (An effect in which an adventurer character 811 and a monster character 821 fight) is executed. That is, in the variable display performance for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol last executed in the time saving state, the number of second special symbol reserved balls that can be additionally stored during the execution of the variable display performance is suggested. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player the number of lotteries of the second special symbols that can be executed after the time saving state is finished by executing the performance to be executed. In other words, it is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage (the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous) after the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode in which the number of reserved balls to be stored (the degree of advantage after the time-saving state ends) can be grasped from the performance mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be further improved.
In addition, in this 59th control example, as the first control (control that makes it easy to increase the holding ball), the discrimination information (holding ball of the second special symbol) is relatively easily acquired in a predetermined period (time saving final fluctuation). Along with executing control to update the number of times of time saving at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the fluctuation, as a second control (control that makes it difficult to increase the number of held balls) in which the discrimination information is relatively difficult to acquire, the number of times of saving time is changed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the final fluctuation of time saving. Although it was configured to execute control to update, it is not limited to this. As the first control, during the time saving final fluctuation, the first period from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 10 seconds) may be adopted as a trigger to update the number of time saving times, or as a second control, time saving You may employ|adopt the control which updates the number of times of reduction of working hours triggered by the passage of the 2nd period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the 1st period from the start of fluctuation during the final fluctuation. Further, for example, the fourth end condition, which is established based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation becoming equal to or greater than the specified number, may be configured to vary between the first control and the second control. . Specifically, for example, when the lottery result corresponding to the first control in the time saving final variation, the fourth end condition is established based on the fact that the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is 3 or more On the other hand, when the lottery result corresponding to the second control is obtained, the fourth end condition is established based on the fact that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has become one or more. It is good also as a structure controlled. In addition, for example, when the number of hits of normal symbols is set to set the fifth end condition established based on the number of times more than the specified number of times, and the lottery result corresponding to the first control is obtained in the time saving final fluctuation, While controlling to establish the fifth end condition based on the number of hits of normal symbols becoming 3 times, when the lottery result corresponding to the second control is obtained, the number of hits of normal symbols is 1. A configuration may be adopted in which control is performed so that the fifth termination condition is established based on the fact that the number of times has come. This can increase the degree of freedom in design.
In the fifty-ninth control example, it is possible to store in the discrimination information storage means (second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) during the execution of the predetermined first effect (variation display effect in time saving final variation). As a specific production mode (a production mode in which the player can recognize whether or not there is room to store the reserved balls) that allows the player to grasp the number of discrimination information (various counter values), the character of the adventurer in the time-saving final fluctuation While suggesting that discrimination information cannot be additionally stored in the case where the effect is executed in which 811 attacks the monster character 821 with a "single attack" attack method, a "continuous attack" attack is performed. In the method, when the effect of attacking the monster character 821 is executed, the configuration suggests that the discrimination information can be additionally stored, but the specific effect mode is limited to this. is not. For example, the number of pieces of identification information that can be stored in the identification information storage means may be visually notified to the player using numbers, meter readings, or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In the fifty-ninth control example, only two timings, the first timing (fluctuation end timing) and the second timing (fluctuation start timing), are provided as the timing for updating the number of times of reduction in working hours, but this is not the only option. is not. In addition to this, for example, an outlier type or a small hit type in which control is executed to update the time saving number at the end timing of the symbol stop period after the end of the fluctuation may be provided, or the time saving number may be set at the end timing of the small hit game It is good also as a structure which provides the small hit classification by which control to update is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the period during which the reserved balls can be accumulated, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the fifty-ninth control example, the variation type is determined at the start of the time saving final variation, and it is configured to determine whether to immediately update the number of time saving times or to update at the end of the variation, but the timing of determination is limited to this. is not. For example, after the start of the time saving final variation, the variation type is determined at the timing when 3 seconds have passed, and the discrimination information (holding ball of the second special symbol) is relatively easily acquired First control (control that makes it easy to increase the holding ball ), the timing of determining the type of variation as the second control (control that makes it difficult to increase the number of held balls), in which the determination information is relatively difficult to acquire, is executed. It may be configured to determine whether to immediately execute control to update the number of times of time saving. In other words, it is good also as composition which distinguishes whether the 1st control is performed in the middle of time saving final fluctuation, or the 2nd control is performed. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to give the player an opportunity to acquire the discrimination information (holding ball of the second special symbol) until the timing of discrimination, the game can be played when the second control is executed. It is possible to suppress excessive disadvantage to the person.
In the fifty-ninth control example, as a small win, only a small win type that substantially determines a big win (a V winning can be easily generated by hitting right during a small win game) is provided. However, a small win type (V impossible small win) that makes it difficult to generate a V prize may be provided. By constructing in this way, even if a small win is won, the big win is not decided, so the game can be played while paying attention to the small win type. Furthermore, in this case, the V unacceptable small hit may be configured so that the possibility that the number of times of reduction in working hours is updated at the first timing (variation stop timing) increases (or is determined). By constructing in this way, an undesirable V small win is obtained in the case of fluctuations other than the time-saving final fluctuation, but in the time-saving final fluctuation, an advantageous lottery result is obtained in which a larger number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be accumulated. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage is reversed depending on whether or not it is time-saving collection variation. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Conversely, non-V small hits may be configured so that the possibility of updating the number of times of reduction in working hours at the second timing (fluctuation start timing) increases (or is determined). In other words, regardless of whether it is a small hit that cannot be V or a small hit that substantially confirms the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the number of times of reduction will be updated at the second timing (variation start timing) at the time of the small hit (or determined). By configuring in this way, when the number of times of saving time is updated at the second timing (the attack method of one blow is selected), the possibility of a small hit increases, so a small hit that substantially confirms the jackpot It is possible to make the player strongly expect to be. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In this 59th control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost in the time saving state, when it becomes either B, small winning C62, D62, the number of times of saving time is updated at the second timing (variation start timing), Other than the above When the lottery result is 1, the number of times of working hours is updated at the first timing (variation stop timing), but it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the lottery result, depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the entry into the time saving state, the update timing of the time saving number in the time saving state is the first timing (variation stop timing) or the second timing (variation start timing ) may be changed. By configuring in this way, before the time saving final variation is started in the time saving state, it is possible to grasp the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that can be accumulated in the time saving final variation, so that the time saving It is possible to set the effect mode showing the degree of advantage in the final variation (the number of retained balls of the second special symbol that can be accumulated) with more leeway (before the final variation is started). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load at the start of the time saving final variation, so that it is possible to set the effect mode in the time saving final variation more preferably.

<Sixtieth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 60th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2060 to 2081. FIG. In this 60th control example, it is possible to execute the role object movement effect in which the movable means (movable role object 900) is moved while the special symbol is fluctuating. Although a detailed description will be given later, the movable accessory 900, which has been housed at the origin position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, moves to an operating position that is visible to the player by executing the movable accessory effect. , It is configured to be able to notify that there is a high possibility that the special symbol variation being executed will be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win.
In addition, in the 60th control example, the movement control for the movable accessory 900 that is executed during the accessory movement presentation is configured to be executable by setting a series of action scenarios. In other words, the movable accessory 900 can be moved according to a predetermined action scenario. By configuring in this way, the processing load during movement control of the movable accessory 900 can be reduced.
Here, when the movable accessory 900 is controlled to perform a series of actions based on the set action scenario, the movable accessory 900 is kept until the movable control based on the set action scenario is completed. There was a problem that new movement control could not be executed for 900.
On the other hand, in the 60th control example, during the period in which the movable accessory 900 is movably controlled based on the setting of a series of action scenarios, the movable control based on the set action scenario is performed midway. It is configured to have a plurality of specific timings that can be terminated. In other words, even if an action scenario is set to operate the movable accessory 900 in an action period of a certain period (for example, 40 seconds), the movable accessory 900 can be operated without completing the action period of 40 seconds. It is configured to be able to execute variable control on the premise that movable control is terminated.

With this configuration, even if a long-time operation scenario is set, a new operation scenario cannot be set until the set operation scenario is completed. can be suppressed.
In addition, if a new movable control is to be executed after the movable control being executed is forcibly terminated, the new movable control is started from a state in which the movable accessory 900 is positioned at various positions. Therefore, before executing new movement control, movement processing must be performed to move the forcibly stopped movable accessory 900 to a specific position (new movement control start position). There is a problem that the processing load of movement control for moving the accessory 900 increases.
On the other hand, in the 60th control example, the movable accessory 900 is configured to move based on a predetermined action scenario that allows the movable accessory 900 to be positioned at a specific position (operating position) multiple times. , when it is determined that a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in a state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at a specific position (operating position), the movable control based on the set action scenario is terminated, and a new movable It is configured so that control can be executed.
By configuring in this way, even if the movable control based on the action scenario that has already been set is terminated in the middle, the position of the movable accessory 900 at the end can be fixed, so that new movable control can be performed. can be made easier to execute.

First, the configuration of the movable accessory 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2060 to 2062. FIG. The movable accessory 900 is configured to be operated by a driving means (driving motor 905) during the variable presentation. In addition, the movable accessory 900 is moved downward in the front view by the driving means (driving motor 905), thereby moving from a position (origin position) that is difficult for the player to see to a position (operating position) that is visible to the player. and can be moved. Thus, by moving the movable accessory 900 to a position (operating position) that can be visually recognized by the player during the variable presentation, the effect of the presentation using the movable accessory 900 can be enhanced.
FIG. 2060(a) is a diagram showing a state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position. The origin position refers to a specific place where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the timing of the start and end of the accessory movable effect. As shown in FIG. 2060(a), when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position, the lower end of the movable accessory 900 is positioned above the upper end of the third symbol display device 81 in front view. In addition, since the movable accessory 900 is arranged on the back side of the variable display unit 80, the movable accessory 900 is difficult to be visually recognized by the player when it is positioned at the origin position.
FIG. 2060(b) is a diagram showing a state where the movable accessory 900 is located at the operating position. Details will be described later, but the operating position is the first movable control (advance scenario action), the second movable control (vibration scenario action), and the third movable control (retreat scenario action) that are executed during the performance of moving the role object. It refers to a specific place where the movable accessory 900 can be positioned during the execution period of each control. As shown in FIG. 2060(b), when the movable accessory 900 is at the operating position, the upper end of the movable accessory 900 is positioned lower than the upper end of the third symbol display device 81 in front view. Also, the movable accessory 900 is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 . That is, when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position, the movable accessory 900 becomes visible to the player.
As shown in FIG. 2061, the movable accessory 900 has a box-shaped display surface composed of a rectangular parallelepiped having an A surface 900a, a B surface 900b, a C surface 900c, and a D surface 900d. The movable accessory 900 has a rectangular parallelepiped right protruding piece 900Rb formed to protrude rightward from the right side 900e, and a rectangular parallelepiped left protruding piece 900Lb formed to protrude leftward from the left side 900f. The right protruding piece 900Rb is provided with a drive motor 905, which is a stepping motor for moving the movable accessory 900 up and down. The left protruding piece 900Lb reflects the light projected from the origin position sensor 920 and the operating position sensor 930, which will be described later, on the left side surface when viewed from the front (see FIG. 2061). It is configured so that it can be detected at

The drive motor 905 is provided with a drive gear 906 that is a pinion gear that engages with the rack 990 . Behind the right end of the movable accessory 900 is a rack having a gear portion in which the driving gear 906 is fitted when the movable accessory 900 moves up and down. is also long.
At the rear of the left end of the movable accessory 900, a post 991 provided with an anti-slip groove is provided longer than the vertical movable stroke. The left protruding piece 900Lb is configured so that the post 991 can be inserted therethrough. In this way, by inserting the post 991 into the left projecting piece 900Lb, the movable accessory 900 can be smoothly moved up and down.
2062(a) to (d) are perpendicular to the front face of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2060) and cut the game board 13 on a plane passing through the left protruding piece 900Lb, and the cross section thereof is shown. FIG. 2060 is a cross-sectional view of the third pattern display device 81 seen from the right side in a front view (see FIG. 2060). A drive base body 800 for fixing the movable accessory 900 to the back side of the game board 13 is provided on the back side of the game board 13 . The drive base body 800 is made of a resin such as polycarbonate, and has a frame shape with an opening that communicates with the opening of the game board 13. The driving base body 800 is fixed to the rear side so as to cover the opening of the game board 13. ing. A column 991 and a rack 990 are fixed to the drive base body 800, and the movable accessory 900 is held so that it can be driven in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. A third pattern display device 81 is attached to the rear side of the driving base body 800 . An origin position sensor 920, which is a reflective sensor having a light emitter and receiver, is provided in the upper part of the drive base body 800 when viewed from the front. A configured actuation position sensor 930 is provided. In the origin position sensor 920, the light projected horizontally from the light projecting portion toward the right side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2060) is reflected by the left protruding piece 900Lb, and the light receiving portion moves to the left protruding piece. By receiving the light reflected by 900Lb, the OFF state is changed to the ON state. That is, while the left protruding piece 900Lb is located at a position that overlaps the origin position sensor 920 in the horizontal direction, the origin position sensor 920 is kept on, and the left protruding piece 900Lb is positioned at the origin position sensor 920. , the origin position sensor 920 remains off during the period in which it is located at a position that does not overlap horizontally with respect to . Since the working position sensor 930 is the same as the origin position sensor 920 except that it is installed in a different place, the description is omitted.
That is, the origin position sensor 920 and the operating position sensor 930 used in the pachinko machine 10 in the 60th control example are used as detection means for detecting the position of the movable accessory 900 . In addition, in the 60th control example, as described above, only the position of the movable accessory 900 is detectable by the detection means. For example, a first sensor that partially overlaps the detection range of the operating position sensor 930 and is capable of detecting the left protruding piece 900Lb that has entered the detection range is provided above the operating position sensor 930. When the operating position sensor 930 detects the projecting piece 900Lb while the first sensor is detecting the projecting piece 900Lb, the movable accessory 900 moves from the origin position toward the operating position (Fig. 2060 (a ) in the front view), and when the operating position sensor 930 detects the projecting piece 900Lb while the first sensor does not detect the projecting piece 900Lb, may be configured so that it can be specified that the movable accessory 900 is moving upward (upward when viewed from the front in FIG. 2060(a)).

With this configuration, not only the position where the movable accessory 900 exists, but also the moving direction of the movable accessory 900 can be specified. Certain movement controls can be configured to be executable only when the object 900 is in the actuated position.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2062(a), when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position, the left protruding piece 900Lb overlaps the origin position sensor 920 in the horizontal direction. In this way, while the left protruding piece 900Lb overlaps the origin position sensor 920 in the horizontal direction, the light projected from the origin position sensor 920 is reflected by the left protruding piece 900Lb, and the origin position sensor 920 is turned on. status is maintained. On the other hand, the operating position sensor 930 remains off because the left protruding piece 900Lb does not overlap in the horizontal direction.
In Figure 2062(b), the operating position sensor 930 switches from the off state to the on state while the movable accessory 900 is descending from the origin position (see Figure 2062(a)) toward the operating position. The position of the left protruding piece 900Lb is shown at the timing. As shown in FIG. 2062(b), when the movable accessory 900 is descending, the operating position sensor 930 switches from off to on at the timing when the lower end of the left protruding piece 900Lb exceeds the operating position sensor. .
FIG. 2062(c) shows the position of the left protruding piece 900Lb when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. As shown in FIG. 2062(c), when the movable accessory 900 is located at the operating position, the left protruding piece 900Lb overlaps the operating position sensor 930 in the horizontal direction, so the operating position sensor is turned on. state. That is, while the left protruding piece 900Lb overlaps the operating position sensor 930 in the horizontal direction, the operating position sensor 930 remains on. Although the details will be described later, in the 60th control example, the drive motor 905 is turned on for a predetermined number of steps from the timing when the operating position sensor 930 switches from off to on while the movable accessory 900 is descending. (Step 17) By rotating, the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. By configuring in this way, even if the size of the detected object detected by the sensor changes, it is possible to move to a specific position by changing the set number of steps.

FIG. 2062(d) shows the position of the left protruding piece 900Lb when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the vibration lower limit position described later. As shown in FIG. 2062(d), when the left protruding piece 900Lb is positioned at the vibration lower limit position, the upper end of the left protruding piece 900Lb is positioned lower than the operating position sensor 930 in front view (Fig. 2062(d)). 2062(d)), and the operating position sensor 930 is turned off.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2063 and 2064, the character object movable effect, which is a characteristic effect mode in the 60th control example, will be described. This character object movable performance is a performance that can be executed in a period in which a variable performance is executed with a performance period of 60 seconds, and is a performance that starts two seconds after the start of the variable performance.
FIG. 2905 is a diagram showing the flow of actions of the movable accessory 900 during the action of moving the accessory. In this 60th control example, the first movable control (advancing scenario operation) based on the advance scenario and the second movable control (advance scenario operation) based on the vibration scenario are performed as the movable control for the movable role product 900 executed when the role object movable effect is executed. Movement control (vibration scenario operation) and third movement control (evacuation scenario operation) based on the evacuation scenario are executed in order, and an operation scenario corresponding to each movement control is set. there is
Details will be described later, but when the first movable control (advance scenario action) is executed, the movable accessory 900 located at the origin position (see FIG. 2060(a)) is moved to the operating position (see FIG. 2060(b)). Reference) is executed to move (advance). In other words, scenario data for moving the movable accessory 900 from the origin position to the actuation position is defined in the advance scenario set when executing the first movable control (advance scenario operation).

Next, when the second movable control (vibration scenario action) is executed, the movable accessory 900 located at the operating position is operated in a performance mode in which it vibrates in the vertical direction, and then is moved to the operating position. Movement control is executed. In other words, the scenario data for moving the movable accessory 900 in an effect mode of vertically vibrating is defined in the vibration scenario set when the second movable control (vibration scenario action) is executed.
In addition, when the third movable control (retreat scenario operation) is executed, the second movable control ends, and the movable accessory 900 located at the operating position is moved (retracted) to the origin position. is executed. That is, scenario data for moving the movable accessory 900 from the operating position to the origin position is defined in the advance scenario set when executing the third movable control (retreat scenario operation).
As described above, in the 60th control example, after moving the movable accessory 900 located at the origin position to the operating position, it is operated in a predetermined effect mode (vibration), and then moved to the origin position. is divided into three stages of advance motion, vibration motion, and retraction motion, and a motion scenario corresponding to each motion segment is set.
By configuring in this way, the pachinko machines 10 having different shapes, for example, the pachinko machines 10 having different distances between the origin position and the operating position can be executed in the same performance mode (vibration). , it is possible to share an operation scenario corresponding to the vibration operation.

As shown in FIG. 2063, when the first movable control (advance scenario action) is executed, the movable accessory 900 is moved from a state where it is stopped at the origin position (see FIG. 2064(A)). When the accessory 900 moves to the operating position (see FIG. 2064(B)) and moves to the operating position, the movable accessory 900 stops at the operating position. That is, by executing the first movable control (advance scenario action), the movable accessory 900 moves from a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (see FIG. 2064(A)) to a visible position (see FIG. 2064(B)). )). Although the details will be described later, the first movable control (advancing scenario operation) is configured to last approximately 2 seconds. That is, the player can visually recognize the characters "chance" displayed on the A surface 900a of the movable accessory 900 during the first movable control (advance scenario action).
In the second movable control (vibration scenario motion), the movable accessory 900 is moved vertically in front view between the vibration upper limit position and the vibration lower limit position (see FIG. 2064(c)). More specifically, in the second movable control (vibration scenario operation), the movable accessory 900 is stopped in the operating position (see FIG. 2064(B)), and is placed in the operating position (see FIG. 2064(B)). rises to the vibration upper limit position, stops at the vibration upper limit position, descends from the vibration upper limit position to the vibration lower limit position (see FIG. 2064(c)), stops at the vibration lower limit position (see FIG. 2064(c)), vibrates Rise from the lower limit position (see Figure 2064 (c)) to the operating position (see Figure 2064 (B)), stop at the operating position (see Figure 2064 (B)), and move from the operating position (see Figure 2064 (B)) to the vibration lower limit 2064(c)), stops at the vibration lower limit position (see FIG. 2064(c)), rises from the vibration lower limit position (see FIG. 2064(c)) to the vibration upper limit position, and stops at the vibration upper limit position. , descends from the vibration upper limit position to the operating position (see FIG. 2064(B)), and stops at the operating position. The second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is configured so that one period is about 4 seconds. Also, the distance from the vibration upper limit position to the operating position (see FIG. 2064(b)) and the distance from the vibration lower limit position (see FIG. 2064(c)) to the operating position (see FIG. 2064(b)) are the origin The distance from the position (see FIG. 2064(a)) to the operating position (see FIG. 2064(b)) is 1/4 or less. That is, when the second movable control (vibration scenario motion) is executed, the movable accessory 900 moves to vibrate slightly up and down for four seconds.
Further, the vibration upper limit position is above the upper limit of the range in which the operating position sensor 930 can detect the left protruding piece 900Lb in front view, and the vibration lower limit position is the position where the operating position sensor 930 detects the left protruding piece 900Lb. It is a place below the lower limit of the detectable range when viewed from the front. That is, when the movable accessory 900 is located at the upper vibration limit position and when the movable accessory 900 is located at the lower vibration limit position (see FIG. 2064(c)), the operating position sensor 930 is in an OFF state.
Further, in the 60th control example, the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is configured to be repeatedly executed ten times. That is, the second motion control (vibration scenario motion) is configured to be executed for about 40 seconds from the timing when the second motion control (vibration scenario motion) is started.

Also, during the execution period of the second movable control (vibration scenario operation), whether or not the end condition of the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is satisfied at timings T1 to T8 when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. It is configured to determine whether More specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during the execution period of the second movable control (vibration scenario action), the vibration scenario end flag 223ut, which will be described later, is set to ON. there is In other words, the process for determining whether the end condition of the second movable control is satisfied is not always executed in the state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position, but is executed at a specific timing. Configure.
Here, in the 60th control example, when the player presses the frame button 22, the end condition of the second movable control is established. In other words, there is no need to determine whether the conditions for ending the second movement control are satisfied each time the shortest measurable time (1 millisecond) elapses in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113. , It is configured to determine whether the end condition of the second movable control is satisfied at a specific timing (see timings T1 to T8 in FIG. 2063) when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of the process for determining whether the termination condition of the second movement control is satisfied.
Furthermore, in the 60th control example, when the movable accessory 900 is located at the operating position, the timing at which the value of the processing counter 223uk is updated is It is the timing to determine By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to measure only the timing for determining whether the end condition of the second movable control is satisfied, so the processing load when executing the movable control can be reduced.
In the third movable control (retreat scenario operation), the movable accessory 900 stops at the operating position, rises from the operating position to the origin position, and stops at the origin position. The time required for the evacuation scenario operation is configured to be approximately 2 seconds, similar to the above-described first movable control (advance scenario operation). That is, the accessory movable effect is executed in about 44 seconds including the first movable control (advance scenario action), the second movable control (vibration scenario action), and the third movable control (retreat scenario action). .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 60th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2065 to 2069, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 60th control example will be described. FIG. 2065 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from the lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs the movable accessory 900. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the output of the movable control data and the variable effect (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.
An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the drive motor 905, the origin position sensor 920, the operating position sensor 930, and the like. there is
The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.
Next, referring to FIG. 2066(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the 60th control example will be described. FIG. 2066(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 60th control example. As shown in FIG. 2066(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 60th control example contains an advance scenario table 222ua, a vibration scenario table 222ub, a retreat scenario table 222uc, and a first return table. A scenario table 222ud, a second recovery scenario table 222ue, and an excitation table 222uf are provided.

Contents defined in the advancement scenario table 222ua will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 2067(a). FIG. 2067(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the advancement scenario table 222ua. The advancement scenario table 222ua is a data table that defines data indicating the details of the operation of the drive motor 905 that is referred to when executing the first movable control (advancement scenario operation).
The sensor data of the advancement scenario table 222ua indicates that the movable accessory 900 is moved until the sensor corresponding to the specified data is turned on. A value of 1 is defined for origin position sensor 920 and a value of 2 is defined for operating position sensor 930 . 0 is defined for scenario data that does not require determination of whether the origin position sensor 920 and the operating position sensor 930 are on. That is, when the value of the sensor data is 0, it is not determined whether the origin position sensor 920 or the operating position sensor 930 is on.
The number-of-steps data of the advancing scenario table 222ua defines a value indicating the number of steps for rotating the drive motor 905 . Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223um is equal to the value specified in the step number data, the value of the processing counter 223uk is incremented by 1, and corresponds to the value of the processing counter 223uk after addition. This scenario data is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue. In the data updated based on the time data and the sensor data, the step number data is defined as a value exceeding the maximum value (72) that can be updated as the value of the step counter 223um.
The speed data of the advance scenario table 222ua defines the speed at which the driving motor 905 is excited. When the speed is 1, the driving motor 905 is excited every 1 ms, and when the speed is 2, the driving motor 905 is excited every 2 ms. is the speed at which the drive motor 905 is excited every 3 ms, and when the speed is 4, the speed is the speed at which the drive motor 905 is excited every 4 ms. In other words, speed 1 is set as the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1/1 of speed 1. It has 4 speeds. Data referred to when the drive motor 905 rotates forward or backward is defined as speed data of zero. In this control example, the speed data is not referred to during the period in which the drive motor 905 is held by excitation or in the standby period without excitation. That is, when holding by energizing the drive motor 905, the drive motor 905 is energized at the shortest period (1 ms) at which the motor output process (Y115L), which will be described later, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 2067(a), the advancement scenario table 222ua defines a holding operation by energizing the drive motor 905 for 10 ms in association with the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk. With respect to the value "2" of the processing counter 223uk, the forward rotation operation at the drive speed in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms is executed until the operating position sensor 930 is turned on. A rotation operation is defined, and the value "3" of the processing counter 223uk corresponds to a forward rotation operation in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms and 17 steps of forward rotation operation are executed. A holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms is defined in association with the value "4" of the processing counter 223uk. According to these stipulations, when the action of the movable accessory 900 is set by referring to the advancing scenario table 222ua, the movable accessory 900 descends until it is detected by the operating position sensor 930, and the movable accessory 900 moves to the operating position. stop at the position of
The contents defined in the evacuation scenario table 222uc will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 2067(b). FIG. 2067(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the evacuation scenario table 222uc. The retraction scenario table 222uc is a data table that defines an action scenario for moving (retracting) the movable accessory 900 located at the operating position to the origin position when the vibration scenario action of the movable accessory 900 ends. .
As shown in FIG. 2067(b), in the evacuation scenario table 222uc, the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk is associated with a holding operation by energizing the drive motor 905 for 10 ms, and When the value of the processing counter 223uk is "2", the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms, and the reverse rotation operation of the drive speed is executed until the origin position sensor 930 is turned on. A rotation operation is defined, and the value "3" of the processing counter 223uk corresponds to a forward rotation operation in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms and 17 steps of forward rotation operation are executed. A holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms is defined in association with the value "4" of the processing counter 223uk.
Contents defined in the first recovery scenario table 222ud will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 2067(c). Although the details will be described later, in the 60th control example, when the movement control of the movable accessory 900 based on the scenario data has not been completed even after a predetermined specific time has passed during the action of the movable accessory. In addition, it is configured to execute the role product return movable control. In the 60th control example, as role object return movement control, the first return movement control for moving (returning) the movable accessory 900 until it is detected by the origin position sensor 920, or moving the movable accessory 900 to the operating position sensor 930 Any of the second return movable control for moving (returning) is executed.

FIG. 2067(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the first return scenario table 222ud referred to in the first return movement control. This first return scenario table 222ud includes the case where it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 540 during the execution period of the second movable control (vibration scenario operation), and the first movable control (advance scenario operation). This is a data table for moving (returning) the movable accessory 900 until the origin position sensor 920 is turned on when it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 2000 during the execution period.
The first return scenario table 222ud defines data for moving the movable accessory 900 until the origin position sensor 920 is turned on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2067(c), a holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 10 ms is associated with the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk. 223uk value "2", the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms, and the reverse rotation operation is performed until the origin position sensor 930 is turned on. is defined, and a holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms is defined in association with the value "3" of the processing counter 223uk.
As a result, if the time required for normally executing the control corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is exceeded due to a failure of the operating position sensor 930 or a step-out of the drive motor 905, etc., the movable accessory 900 can be driven to the origin position sensor 920 . Details of the first return scenario table 222ud will be described later with reference to FIG. 2067(c).
FIG. 2067(d) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the second return scenario table 222ue referred to in the second return movement control. This second return scenario table 222ue determines that the value of the driving timer 223uj is not less than 2000 during the execution period of the third movable control (retreat scenario operation), and the movable accessory 900 is moved by the operating position sensor 930. It is a data table for moving (returning) until it turns on.

As shown in FIG. 2067(a), in the second return scenario table 222ue, the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk is associated with the holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 10 ms. A forward rotation operation at a drive speed in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms with respect to the value "2" of the processing counter 223uk is executed until the operating position sensor 930 is turned on. A holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms is defined in association with the value "3" of the processing counter 223uk.
Contents defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 2068 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub. As shown in FIG. 2068, in the vibration scenario table 222ub, the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk is defined in association with data for waiting 200 ms without exciting the drive motor 905, and the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk is defined. 2” is associated with a holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 10 ms, and the drive motor 905 is driven one step every 4 ms ( 72 steps of the reverse rotation operation of the drive speed to be excited) are defined, and the holding operation is performed by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms with respect to the value "4" of the processing counter 223uk. For the value "5" of the processing counter 223uk, a forward rotation operation is defined in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms, and the forward rotation operation is executed in eight steps. A forward rotation operation at a drive speed in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms with respect to the value "6" of the counter 223uk is performed until the operating position sensor 930 is turned on. An operation is defined, and a forward rotation operation is defined in which 17 steps of forward rotation operation are performed at a drive speed in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms with respect to the value "7" of the processing counter 223uk. , the value "8" of the processing counter 223uk defines a forward rotation operation in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms, and the forward rotation operation is executed 72 steps. A holding operation by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms is specified for the value "9" of , and the drive motor 905 is driven one step every 4 ms for the value "10" of the processing counter 223uk ( A reverse rotation operation is defined in which the reverse rotation operation of the drive speed to be excited (excited) is executed in eight steps, and the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms with respect to the value "11" of the processing counter 223uk. A reverse rotation operation of the drive speed is defined to be executed until the operating position sensor 930 is turned on, and the drive motor 905 is rotated one step every 4 ms with respect to the value "12" of the processing counter 223uk. A reverse rotation operation in which the reverse rotation operation of the drive speed to be driven (excited) is executed in 17 steps is specified, and the drive is performed for 40 ms with respect to the value "13" of the processing counter 223uk. The holding operation by energizing the motor 905 is stipulated, and the value "14" of the processing counter 223uk is stipulated in association with the data for waiting 500 ms without energizing the drive motor 905, and the value "14" of the processing counter 223uk is stipulated. 15", a holding operation is defined by exciting the drive motor 905 for 10 ms, and the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms for the value "16" of the processing counter 223uk. 72 steps of the forward rotation operation at the drive speed are defined, and a holding operation is defined by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms with respect to the value "17" of the processing counter 223uk, For the value "18" of the processing counter 223uk, a reverse rotation operation is defined in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms and the reverse rotation operation is executed eight steps. For the value "19", a reverse rotation operation of the driving speed in which the drive motor 905 is stepped (excited) every 4 ms is performed until the operating position sensor 930 is turned on. A reverse rotation operation is defined in which 17 steps of the reverse rotation operation of the driving speed in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms are executed with respect to the value "20" of the processing counter 223uk. For the value "21" of the processing counter 223uk, a reverse rotation operation is defined in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms, and the reverse rotation operation is executed 72 steps. 22", a holding operation is defined by exciting the drive motor 905 for 40 ms, and the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms for the value "23" of the processing counter 223uk. 8 steps of the forward rotation operation at the drive speed are defined, and the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 4 ms with respect to the value "24" of the processing counter 223uk. A forward rotation operation is defined to be executed until the operating position sensor 930 is turned on, and the drive motor 905 is driven one step (excited) every 4 ms with respect to the value "25" of the processing counter 223uk. ) is defined to execute 17 steps of the forward rotation operation at the drive speed of 40 ms for the value of the processing counter 223uk of "26". A holding operation by energizing the motor 905 is defined, and data for waiting 500 ms without exciting the drive motor 905 is defined in association with the value "27" of the processing counter 223uk. When the movement control of the movable accessory 900 is executed with reference to the vibration scenario table 222ub according to these defined contents, the timing at which the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "7" of the processing counter 223uk is completed and the processing The timing when the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "12" of the processing counter 223uk is completed, the timing when the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "13" of the processing counter 223uk is completed, and the value "14" of the processing counter 223uk. , the timing at which the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "20" of the processing counter 223uk is completed, and the scenario data corresponding to the value "25" of the processing counter 223uk , the timing at which the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "26" of the processing counter 223uk was completed, and the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "27" of the processing counter 223uk was completed. The timing is the timing at which the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position.
In the 60th control example, during the period in which the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is being executed, the timing at which the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "7" of the processing counter 223uk is completed and the value of the processing counter 223uk The timing at which the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "12" is completed, the timing at which the control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "13" of the processing counter 223uk is completed, and the value "14" of the processing counter 223uk correspond to the timing of completion of control based on scenario data, the timing of completion of control based on scenario data corresponding to the value "20" of the processing counter 223uk, and the timing of completion of control based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "25" of the processing counter 223uk. is completed, the timing is completed based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "26" of the processing counter 223uk, and the timing is completed based on the scenario data corresponding to the value "27" of the processing counter 223uk. , to determine whether or not the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is on.
In the 60th control example, it is checked whether the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is turned on at the timing when the value of the processing counter 223uk is updated when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. However, without being limited to this, when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position, the vibration scenario occurs only at a part of the timing when the value of the processing counter 223uk is updated. It may be configured to determine whether the end flag 223ut is on.

In this case, it is preferable to determine whether or not the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is turned on at least at the timing immediately after the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. By configuring in this way, when the end condition of the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is satisfied while the movable accessory 900 is not located at the operating position, the movable accessory 900 is moved to the operating position. The second movable control (vibration scenario operation) can be terminated immediately after being positioned.
In addition, it may be configured to determine whether the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is ON at the timing immediately before the movable accessory 900 positioned at the operating position moves from the operating position to another position. . By configuring in this way, when the end condition of the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is established while the movable accessory 900 is located at the operating position, the movable accessory 900 is not moved. It is possible to make it easier to end the second movable control (vibration scenario operation).
Next, with reference to FIG. 2069, the details of the excitation table 222uf will be described. The excitation table 222uf is a data table that defines excitation control data for designating the part to be excited of the drive motor 905 . The data in the excitation table 222uf is stored in the excitation data storage area 223ug based on the value of the excitation counter 223uo when setting the excitation control data for the drive motor 905 .
FIG. 2069(a) is a diagram showing an outline of the drive motor 905 (stepping motor) that is excited with reference to the excitation table 222uf. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one turn in four steps) will be described as an example. is configured to be able to set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once per step. The drive motor 905 is configured such that when excitation control data is sent from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC, the portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC according to excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 2069(a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part of the drive motor 905 (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) is "1", it will be excited, and if the excitation control data is "0", it will be excited. not energized. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table 222uf (see FIG. 2069(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The audio ramp controller 113 also includes an excitation counter for selecting and setting one excitation control data from among a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table 222uf (see FIG. 2069(b)). 223uo is provided. This excitation counter 223uo can be updated by 1 in the positive direction starting from "1". controlled by Each time the excitation counter 223uo is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, each part is immediately excited based on the excitation control data (that is, the drive motor 905 operates without time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter 223uo can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "1"→"4"→"3"→"2"→"1" starting from "1". When updating in the negative direction, the direction of rotation of the up/down drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter 223uo changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a driving motor that rotates once per step (that is, it takes 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter 223uo is updated within the range of "1" to "360". counter.
Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the drive motor 905 will be described with reference to FIG. 2069(b). FIG. 2069(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the excitation table 222uf defining the excitation control data and the state of the drive motor 905 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table 222uf. As shown in FIG. 2069(b), the excitation table 222uf defines excitation control data for each value of the excitation counter 223uo.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2069(b), as the sequence data corresponding to the drive motor 905, the values of the excitation counter 223uo are "1" to "4" in order of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" for excitation. Control data are defined respectively. Further, when the sequence data "1100" corresponding to the value "1" of the excitation counter 223uo is set, the positions A and B of the driving motor 905 are excited. Also, when the sequence data "0110" corresponding to the value "2" of the excitation counter 223uo is set, the positions B and C of the driving motor 905 are excited, so that the value of the excitation counter 223uo becomes " 0” and rotates 90 degrees clockwise. Further, when the sequence data "0011" corresponding to the value "3" of the excitation counter 223uo is set, the positions C and D of the drive motor 905 are excited, and the value of the excitation counter 223uo becomes "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of . Also, when the sequence data "1001" corresponding to the value "4" of the excitation counter 223uo is set, the positions A and D of the driving motor 905 are excited, so that the value of the excitation counter 223uo becomes " 3” is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 2069, the drive motor 905 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees each time the value of the excitation counter 223uo is updated by 1 in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter 223uo is updated in the negative direction, the drive motor 905 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.
As described above, the control of the driving motor 905 has been described using a simplified operation model. can be rotated by 1 degree each time. That is, when the movable accessory 900 is varied, the value of the excitation counter 223uo is updated by 1 by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter 223uo is set each time the excitation counter 223uo is updated. By doing so, the movable accessory 900 can be varied accurately.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 60th control example, the drive motor 905 is continuously excited at the same position without updating the value of the excitation counter 223uo. In this case, a holding state is established for maintaining the same position without rotating the drive motor 905 . It should be noted that in the operation scenario corresponding to the operation "Hold" specified in the various scenario tables described above, the value corresponding to the value of the excitation counter 223uo at the time when the value of the previous processing counter 223uk is finished It shows that the excitation control is executed for the corresponding time. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the action scenario corresponding to this action "hold" is being executed, the excitation process is not executed for the drive motor 905 (movement control of the movable accessory 900). is not executed), the drive motor 905 is configured to be less likely to rotate due to the magnetic force generated by the excitation.
By configuring in this way, the drive motor 905 is activated by the inertia force of the movable accessory 900 moved by the movable control of the drive motor 905 (control to rotate the drive motor 905 while updating the value of the excitation counter 223uo). It can be made easy to suppress rotating.
Thus, in this embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, the movable accessory 900 can be driven at the rotational speed, rotational direction, and number of rotational steps specified by the command. Therefore, various performance actions using the movable accessory 900 can be realized.
Next, referring back to FIG. 2066(b), the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 2066(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 60th control example. As shown in FIG. 2066(b), the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the 60th control example stores a special symbol holding ball number counter 223ua, a fluctuation start flag 223ub, a stop type selection flag 223uc, and a fluctuation pattern. An area 223ud, a scenario storage area 222ue, a recovery scenario storage area 223uf, an excitation data storage area 223ug, a variable time timer 223uh, an excitation timer 223ui, a drive timer 223uj, a processing counter 223uk, and a recovery counter 223ul. , step counter 223um, repetition counter 223un, excitation counter 223uo, drive standby flag 223up, accessory drive flag 223uq, vibration scenario execution flag 223ur, escape scenario execution flag 223us, and vibration scenario end flag 223ut. , and a return correspondence flag 223uu.

The scenario storage area 222ue is a storage area for storing scenario data corresponding to movement control to be executed during the performance of moving the character. In this scenario storage area 223ue, data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk is appropriately stored from the scenario table corresponding to the movement control to be executed during the character object movement presentation. That is, during the performance of movable role, movement control of the movable role 900 is executed by referring to the information stored in the scenario storage area 223ue. When the character object movement effect is completed, the process of clearing the data in the scenario storage area 223ue is executed (see Y813 in FIG. 2077). As a result, only data necessary for movement control is appropriately stored in the scenario storage area 223ue, so that the memory capacity of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.
The recovery scenario storage area 223uf is a storage area for storing scenario data to be referred to when executing the role product recovery movable control. Specifically, in the return scenario storage area 223uf, data corresponding to the value of a return counter 223ul, which will be described later, is stored from the first return scenario table 222ud or the second scenario table 222ue. The storage area of the return scenario storage area 223uf is cleared when the first movable return control or the second movable return control is completed (see Y911L in FIG. 2078).
The excitation data storage area 223ug is a storage area for storing excitation control data corresponding to the value of the excitation counter 223uo from the excitation table 222uf (see Y1020L in FIG. 2079).
The variable time timer 223uh is a timer for counting the elapsed time from the start of the variable performance executed corresponding to the special symbol variation. The value of this variable time timer 223uh is set to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern command received by the audio ramp control device 113 in the command determination process (see Y116L in FIG. 2081), which will be described later. 1 is subtracted in the update process (see Y112L in FIG. 2073).

The excitation timer 223ui is a timer for controlling the speed at which the drive motor 905 is excited, and is a timer for counting how many cycles the motor is excited. The value of the excitation timer 223ui changes to 1 each time the motor command process (Y114L) described later is executed (every 1 ms) when the movable accessory 900 is controlled to move based on the scenario data whose speed data is not 0. are added (see Y1007L in FIG. 2079). The value of the excitation timer 223ui is set to 0 (see Y1010L in FIG. 2079) when it is determined that it matches the value of the speed data in the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (see Y1008L in FIG. 2079). ).
The drive timer 223uj is a timer for counting the time during which movement control of the movable accessory 900 based on scenario data is being executed. This drive timer 223uj is incremented by 1 when the drive timer monitoring process (Y111L) is executed in the main process (FIG. 2070) that is periodically (every 1 ms) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. . Then, when the movable control based on the scenario data is completed, the value is set to 0.
In this 60th control example, each scenario data read during the first movable control (advance scenario operation), and the contents of the control that is completed in less than 2000 milliseconds if the movable control is performed normally are defined. . In other words, if it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj has reached 2000 (measured 2000 milliseconds) without completing one scenario data (action scenario), there is a problem with the movable control of the movable accessory 900. (For example, step-out or detection failure of the operating position sensor 930) may have occurred. It is configured to execute the first return movable control to move (return) until it is detected.
Similarly, when it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj has reached 540 (measured 540 milliseconds) during the period of executing the second movable control (vibration scenario operation), Since there is a possibility that there is a malfunction in the movable control (for example, step-out or detection failure of the operating position sensor 930), the movable accessory 900 is moved to the origin in order to cause the movable accessory 900 to perform normal movable control again. It is configured to execute the first return movement control to move (return) until detected by the position sensor 920 .

Furthermore, when it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 2000 (is equal to or greater than 2000) during the period during which the third movable control (retreat scenario operation) is being executed, the movable accessory 900 is similarly movable. Since there is a possibility that there is a problem in control (for example, step-out or detection failure of the operating position sensor 930), the movable accessory 900 is moved to the operating position in order to cause the movable accessory 900 to perform normal movement control again. It is configured to execute the second return movement control to move (return) until detected by the sensor 930 .
That is, in the 60th control example, the timing (the value of the drive timer 223uj) for determining that a malfunction has occurred in the movable control differs depending on the type of movable control being executed (first movable control to third movable control). I'm letting By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the same timing for determining that a malfunction has occurred in the movable control is specified for all the movable controls, it is possible to make it easier to execute the return movable control earlier. It is possible to easily restore the movable control to a normal state as soon as possible when a problem occurs in the control.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 2800 (is equal to or greater than 2800) during the period in which the first movable return control or the second movable return control is executed (see FIG. 2072). (See Y312L), and sets an error notification command for displaying an error message on the third pattern display device 81 (Y313L in FIG. 2072).
The processing counter 223uk is a counter that is referred to when scenario data is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue during the period during which the movable character effect is being executed. This processing counter 223uk changes to a value at the start of the first movable control (advance scenario operation), at the start of the second movable control (vibration scenario operation), and at the start of the third movable control (retreat scenario operation). 1 is set. Then, when the movable control based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is completed, 1 is added to the value of the processing counter 223uk.

The return-handling counter 223ul is a counter that is referred to when selecting data to be stored in the return-handling scenario storage area 223uf during the period in which the first movable return control or the second movable return control is executed. The value of the return counter 223ul is set to 1 when execution of the first movable return control or the second movable return control is started (see Y308L in FIG. 2072). The value of the return counter 223ul is incremented by 1 when the movable control based on the scenario data stored in the return scenario storage area 223uf is completed.
The step counter 223um is a counter for counting the number of steps of the driving motor 905 . The value of the step counter 223um is incremented by 1 in the motor command monitoring process (Y114L) to be described later (see Y1012L in FIG. 2079) when the drive motor 905 is driven in forward or reverse rotation. Further, the value of the step counter 223um is set to 0 when it is determined that it matches the value of the number of steps defined in the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue.
The repetition counter 223un is a counter for measuring the number of times the movable control is executed based on the vibration scenario table 222ub. In this 60th control example, as the vibration operation to the movable accessory 900 executed during the second movement control (vibration scenario operation), the movement control specified in the vibration scenario table 222ub is repeated a plurality of times (10 times). ) configured to be executable. The value of the repetition counter 223un is referred to when determining how many times the movement control has been executed as the movement control defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub. The value of the repetition counter 223un is set to "1" as an initial value. It is configured to be incremented by 1 each time processing corresponding to the last scenario data (data corresponding to the value "27" of the processing counter 223uk) of the table 222ub is completed.
That is, the value of the repetition counter 223un is incremented by "1" every time the movable control defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub is repeatedly executed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter 223un after addition is the upper limit value "10", and if it is determined to be the upper limit value "10", the end timing ( It is determined that the movement control specified in the vibration scenario table 222ub is executed the maximum number of times (10 times), and each process for ending the second movement control (the timing for executing the third movement control each process) is executed.
In the 60th control example, by measuring the number of times (the number of times of execution) of the movable control that is repeatedly executed using the repetition counter 223un, it is possible to determine the number of times of the movable control that has been executed during the vibration scenario operation. However, without being limited to this, the number of repetitions of the operation scenario defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub may be measured.
In the 60th control example, the value of the repetition counter 223un is updated (added) when the movement control based on the operation scenario defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub is repeatedly executed. Without being limited to this, the value of the repeated counter 223un may be updated (added) when the movement control based on the motion scenario defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub is completed.
The excitation counter 223uo is a counter that is referred to when selecting data to be stored in the excitation data storage area 223ug from the excitation table 222uf. The value of the excitation counter 223uo is incremented by 1 when the drive motor 905 is rotated in the forward direction, and the value of the excitation counter 223uo is subtracted when the drive motor 905 is rotated in the reverse direction. As a result, it is possible to control the drive motor 905 between forward rotation and reverse rotation without increasing the excitation control data. Further, the value of the excitation counter 223uo is configured to be held until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. By configuring in this way, even when the excitation control for the driving motor 905 is not executed, it is possible to read out the position where the last excitation was performed by the previous excitation control. Therefore, even if the operation "Hold" is executed first when a new excitation control is started, the drive motor 905 can be reliably held by reading the value of the excitation counter 223uo.

The value of the excitation counter 223uo is cleared when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 After executing the movable control corresponding to the predetermined start-up operation for the movable accessory 900 in the start-up process executed by the start-up process), "1" is set in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223. In other words, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the start-up operation for positioning the movable accessory 900 at the storage position is executed with the value of the excitation counter 223uo set to "1". ing. By configuring in this way, even if the excitation control corresponding to the action "hold" is first executed in the movable control for the movable accessory 900 that is executed first after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, , the drive motor 905 can be reliably held.
The content of the excitation control for holding the drive motor 905 is not limited to this, and another configuration may be used. By detecting the current rotation angle of the drive motor 905 and comparing the detected rotation angle with the details of the excitation control to be executed, the value of the excitation counter 223uo may be set. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute control to fix the rotation angle of the drive motor 905 at a specific angle at the time when the start-up operation of the movable accessory 900 executed after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is completed. Also, even if the excitation control corresponding to the operation "hold" is executed first in the movable control for the movable accessory 900 that is executed first after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the drive motor 905 can be held.
The driving standby flag 223up is a flag for waiting the movable control of the movable accessory 900 until the execution timing of the movable accessory effect. This drive standby flag 223up is set to ON in the command determination process (Y116L), when a variable effect accompanied by a movable character effect is executed. In addition, this drive standby flag 223up determines the setting status of the drive standby flag 223up when the execution timing of the accessory movable effect (the timing when two seconds have passed since the start of the variable effect) has come (see FIG. 2073). Y404L), when it is determined that the driving standby flag 223up is set to ON (Y404L in FIG. 2073: Yes), various processes for executing the movable performance of the accessory are executed, and the driving standby flag 223up is turned OFF. set.
The role drive flag 223uq is a flag for indicating that it is a period during which the movable control of the movable role 900 is being executed. This character object drive flag 223uq is set to ON when the character object movable effect is started (see Y408L in FIG. 2073), and when the third movable control (retreat scenario operation) is completed, or an abnormal state described later is determined. is set to off.

That is, the accessory drive flag 223up is a flag that is set to ON when the accessory movable effect is started, and is set to OFF when the accessory movable effect is finished. Therefore, in the 60th control example, it is configured to be able to specify whether or not the character object movement effect is currently being performed by determining the setting state of the character object drive flag 223up. In the 60th control example, at least the above-described scenario tables (advance scenario table 222ua, vibration scenario table 222ub, retreat scenario table 222uc, first return scenario table 222ud and second return correspondence scenario table 222ue) are executed, each scenario table (advance scenario table 222ua, vibration scenario table 222ub, evacuation scenario table 222uc, first return correspondence scenario table 222ud, second return correspondence The character object driving flag 223uq is set to ON when control based on any of the scenario tables 222ue) is being executed, but the character object movement effect is started without being limited to this. When the movement control based on the scenario table (advance scenario table 222ua) set in the case is executed, the character product driving flag 223uq is set to ON, and the scenario table (retreat scenario table) set when ending the character product movement effect When the movable control based on the scenario table 222uc) is completed, the accessory driving flag 223uq, which is set to ON, may be set to OFF.
The vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is a flag for indicating that the second motion control (vibration scenario motion) is being executed, and when the motion control based on the vibration scenario table 222ub corresponding to the vibration scenario motion is executed. is set to on. Then, it is set to OFF when the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) ends.
The retraction scenario execution flag 223us is a flag for indicating that the third movement control (retraction scenario operation) is being executed, and when the movement control based on the evacuation scenario table 222uc corresponding to the evacuation scenario operation is executed. is set to on. Then, it is set to OFF when the third movable control (retreat scenario operation) ends.
The vibration scenario end flag 223ut is a flag for indicating that a termination condition for ending the second motion control (vibration scenario motion) halfway has been met during the period in which the second motion control (vibration scenario motion) is being executed. is set to ON when the end condition is met.

The return corresponding flag 223uu is a flag for indicating that the character product return movable control is being executed, and during the execution period of the character product movable effect (the state in which the character product drive flag 223uq is set to ON) , the period that can be completed if the movable control period corresponding to the scenario action being executed has passed (normal operation period), and is set to ON when the execution conditions for the role object return movable control are satisfied (Fig. 2072 Y307L). Then, when the movable role product 900 is positioned at a normal position by the role product return movable control (when the normal movable control becomes executable), it is set to OFF (see Y910L in FIG. 2078). In this case, the role product movable control is continuously executed after ending the role product return movable control.
In addition, it is set to OFF even when the role product return movable control cannot be terminated normally (see Y314L in FIG. 2072). In this case, the movable accessory 900 cannot be positioned at the normal position even though the processing of the accessory return movement control has been executed. A process for notifying the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the movement control for 900 is executed.
In other words, in the 60th control example, when executing the role object movement effect using the movable role object 900, the movement control is normally executed (movable control is performed in accordance with the action scenario defined in each scenario table). When the first control state (control is executed) and the movement control along the operation scenario specified in each scenario table are not completed within the allowable period, the operation scenario specified in each scenario table A second control state in which movable control for positioning the movable accessory 900 to a specific position is executed by executing movable control (return movable control) different from the second control state, and the movable control for the movable accessory 900 is executed. and a third control state in which the movement control is forcibly terminated because the movement cannot be performed.
<Regarding the control process of the 60th control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 2070 to 2081, among the control processing contents of the pachinko machine 10 in the 60th control example, as the control processing contents related to the role object movement effect using the movable role object 900, sound lamp The contents of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 will be described. Other processing contents, that is, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and various processes executed by the display control device 114 are the same as those used in the control examples described above. It is the same as at least one of them, and the description thereof is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 2070, main processing executed by MPU 221 in audio ramp control device 113 after start-up processing of audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2070 is a flow chart showing this main process.
When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process Y101L was executed (Y101L), and 1 msec or more has passed. If not (Y101L: No), the process proceeds to Y116L without performing the processes Y102L to Y115L. In the processing of Y101L, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed.Y102L to Y115L are mainly processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , Y116L and the variable display setting process of Y117L are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of Y116L in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of Y117L in a short cycle, the command Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.
If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of Y101L (Y101L: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Y103L to Y115L are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Y102L ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Y108L described later (Y103L), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Y104L). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to Y105L without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.
In the process of Y105L, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (Y106L). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 223ua is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (Y107L). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.
Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Incidentally, when the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of Y107L is omitted. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Y107L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (Y108L), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (Y109L). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.
After the process of Y109L, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (Y110L). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of Y108L is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of Y109L is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the process of Y111L, the time from the start of the movement control corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue or the recovery scenario storage area 223uf is counted, and when a predetermined time (a time determined as a so-called timeout) is reached. A driving timer monitoring process is performed to determine whether or not the motor is running (Y111L). Details of this drive timer monitoring process (Y111L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the processing of Y1112L, the time from the start of the variation of the special symbol is counted, and the performance update processing for executing the processing for executing the movable role performance at a predetermined timing is performed (Y112L). Details of this rendering update process (Y112L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of Y113L, a motor scenario process is executed to update the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue or the return scenario storage area 223uf at a predetermined timing from the scenario table for controlling the movement of the movable accessory 900. (Y113L). Details of this motor scenario processing (Y113L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of Y114L, a motor command monitoring process is performed (Y114L) to move the movable accessory 900 based on the driving data set in the motor scenario process (Y113L). Details of this motor command monitoring process (Y114L) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the motor command monitoring process (Y114L) is executed, the motor output process (Y115L) is executed.

In the process of Y115L, a motor output process of outputting to the driving motor 905 a command for executing motor control set in the motor command monitoring process (Y114L) is performed (Y115L). Details of this motor output process (Y115L) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the motor output process (Y115L) is executed, the process proceeds to Y116L.
In the process of Y116L, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (Y116L). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After command determination processing (Y116L), variable display setting processing is executed (Y117L). In the variable display setting process (Y117L), a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 .
When the process of Y117L is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (Y118L). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Y118L (Y118L: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Y120L), and the power-off processing is executed (Y121L). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (Y122L), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Y115L (Y118L: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Y119L), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Y119L: No), the process returns to Y101L, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Y119L: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .
Next, with reference to FIG. 2071, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Y107L) will be described. FIG. 2071 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Y107L). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Y107L) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 2070) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and various settings are performed when the frame button 22 is pressed. It is a process for execution.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Y107L) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the frame button is on (Y201L). (Y201L: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y201L that the frame button is on (Y201L: Yes), it is determined whether or not the return support flag 223uu is on (Y202L). 223uu is ON (Y202L: Yes), this means that the role object return movable control is being executed, and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y202L that the return flag 223uu is not ON (Y202L: No), it is determined whether the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (Y203L), and the vibration scenario is executed. If it is determined that the flag 223ur is not on (Y203L: No), other processing is executed (Y205L). On the other hand, in the process of Y203L, if it is determined that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (Y203L: Yes), the player presses the frame button while the second movable control (vibration scenario action) is being executed. 22 has been pressed, the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is set to ON (Y204L), and this processing ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute processing for ending the second movement control (vibration scenario operation) halfway when the player presses the frame button 22 .
Next, the contents of the drive timer monitoring process (Y111L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2072 is a flowchart showing drive timer monitoring processing (Y111L). This drive timer monitoring process (Y111L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2070) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and when the movable control of the movable accessory 900 is executed, This is a process for incrementing the value of the driving timer 223uj by one and executing various settings based on the value of the driving timer 223uj.
In the driving timer monitoring process (Y111L), first, it is determined whether or not the accessory driving flag 223uq is ON (Y301L), and if it is determined that the accessory driving flag 223uq is not ON (Y301L: No) , means that the movable accessory 900 is not controlled to move, so this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y301L, if it is determined that the accessory drive flag 223uq is ON (Y301L: Yes), it means that the movable accessory 900 is being controlled to move, so the drive timer 223uj (Y302L), it is determined whether or not the return flag 223uu is on (Y303L), and if it is determined that the return flag 223uu is on (Y303L: Yes), the drive It is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223uj is less than 2800 (Y312L). In the process of Y312L, when it is determined that the value of the driving timer 223uj is less than 2800 (Y312L: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y312L, if it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 2800 (Y312L: No), the maximum time required when the accessory return movable control is normally executed (from the vibration lower limit position Since it exceeds 2288 ms for returning to the origin position), an error notification command is set for displaying an error notification image on the third pattern display device 81 (Y313L).
By configuring in this way, both the origin position sensor 920 and the operating position sensor 930 may malfunction, and members for driving the movable accessory 900 (driving motor 905, etc.) may malfunction. Even if a malfunction occurs and the return operation is performed, even if the maximum period in which the movable accessory 900 can be controlled to move has passed, none of the sensors (the origin position sensor 920 and the operating position sensor 930) A state in which the movable accessory 900 could not be detected can be identified as an abnormal state (error state), and the error state can be notified.
When the process of Y313L is completed, the return correspondence flag 223uu is set to OFF (Y314L), and the accessory drive flag 223uq is set to OFF (Y315L). As a result, the drive control for the movable accessory 900 can be forcibly terminated when executing the error notification. When the process of Y315L ends, the scenario execution flag 223ur is set to OFF (Y316L), the save scenario execution flag 223us is set to OFF (Y317L), the value of the drive timer 223uj is set to 0, and this process ends. .
If it is determined in the process of Y303L that the return support flag 223uu is not ON (Y303L: No), it is determined whether or not the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (Y304L). 223ur is on (Y304L: Yes), next it is determined whether the value of the drive timer 223uj is less than 540 (Y306L). If it is determined that the value of the driving timer 223uj is less than 540 (Y306L: Yes), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y304L that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is not ON (Y304L: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the drive timer 223uj is less than 2000 (Y305L). If it is determined in the process of Y305L that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 2000 (Y305L: No), or if it is determined in the process of Y306L that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 540 (Y306L : No), and the return support flag 223uu is set to ON (Y307L). In the 60th control example, when the movable accessory 900 operates normally in the first movable control (advance scenario action) or the third movable control (retreat scenario action), the maximum value of the drive timer 223uj is 1932 (1932 ms). In the second movable control, when the movable accessory 900 operates normally, the maximum value of the driving timer 223uj is 500 (500 ms). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a predetermined process when the movement control based on the operation scenario is not normally executed due to a failure of the sensor or the drive motor 905 or the like.
When the processing of Y307L is completed, the value of the return counter 223ul is set to 1 (Y308L), and it is determined whether or not the evacuation scenario execution flag 223us is ON (Y309L). If it is determined that the save scenario execution flag 223us is on (Y309L: Yes), the data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk in the second recovery scenario table 222ue is stored in the recovery scenario storage area 223uf ( Y310L), the value of the drive timer 223uj is set to 0, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y309L that the evacuation scenario execution flag 223us is not ON (Y309L: No), the scenario data corresponding to the value of the recovery counter 223ul in the first recovery scenario table 222ud is Store it in the recovery scenario storage area 223uf (Y311L), set the value of the drive timer 223uj to 0, and end this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y305L that the value of the driving timer 223uj is less than 2000 (Y305L: Yes), this process is terminated.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2073, the contents of the effect update process (Y112L) will be described. FIG. 2073 is a flowchart showing effect update processing (Y112L). This effect update process (Y112L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2070) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is the fluctuation time. Measurement is performed by updating the value of the timer 223uh, and processing for performing various settings based on the updated value of the variable time timer 223uh is executed.
In the effect update process (Y112L), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time timer 223uh is greater than 0 (Y401L), and if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223uh is not greater than 0 (Y401L: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Y401L, when it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223uh is greater than 0 (Y401L: Yes), the value of the variable time timer 223uh is subtracted by 1 (Y402L), and the drive standby flag 223up is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (Y403L).

In the process of Y403L, if it is determined that the drive standby flag 223up is not ON (Y403L: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y403L, if it is determined that the driving standby flag 223up is ON (Y403L: Yes), it means that the variable production accompanying the movable performance of the role product is being executed, so the drive of the role product is performed. It is determined whether or not it is time to start driving (Y404L), and if it is determined that it is not time to start driving the character product (Y404L: No), this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of Y404L, when it is determined that it is time to start driving the accessory (Y404L: Yes), the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 (Y405L), and the processing counter 223uk is selected from the advancing scenario table 222ua. is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (Y406L). When the process of Y406L is completed, the drive standby flag 223up is set to OFF (Y407L), the accessory drive flag 223uq is set to ON (Y408L), and this process is completed.
Next, the contents of the motor scenario process (Y113L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2074 is a flowchart showing motor scenario processing (Y113L). This motor scenario process (Y113L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2070) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a scenario referred to when executing the movement control of the movable accessory 900. A process for appropriately storing the data in the storage area is executed.
When this motor scenario process (Y113L) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the accessory drive flag 223uq is on (Y501L), and if it is determined that the accessory drive flag 223uq is not on, (Y501L: No) means that it is not the period during which the movable accessory 900 is being controlled to move, so this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y501L, when it is determined that the accessory driving flag 223uq is on (Y501L: Yes), it is determined whether the return correspondence flag 223uu is on (Y502L), and the return correspondence flag 223uu is ON (Y502L: Yes), it means that it is a period in which the first movable return control or the second movable return control is being executed, so the return corresponding scenario process is executed (Y508L ), the process ends.
Details of the recovery scenario process (Y508L) will be described with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y502L that the return support flag 223uu is not ON (Y502L: No), then it is determined whether or not the evacuation scenario execution flag 223us is ON (Y503L).
In the process of Y503L, if it is determined that the evacuation scenario execution flag 223us is ON (Y503L: Yes), it means that the third movement control (evasion scenario operation) is being executed. Scenario processing is executed (Y507L), and this processing ends. Details of the save scenario process (Y507L) will be described with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y503L that the evacuation scenario execution flag 223us is off (Y503L: No), it is determined whether or not the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is on (Y504L). If it is determined that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (Y504L: Yes), it means that the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is being executed, so the vibration scenario processing is executed. (Y506L), this processing ends. Details of the vibration scenario processing (Y506L) will be described with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y504L, if it is determined that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is off (Y504L: No), it means that it is a period in which the first movement control (advance scenario operation) is being executed. Advance scenario processing is executed (Y505L), and this processing ends. Details of advance scenario processing (Y505L) will be described with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2075, the contents of advance scenario processing (Y505L) executed in motor scenario processing (see Y113L in FIG. 2074) will be described. FIG. 2075 is a flow chart showing advance scenario processing (Y505L). In this advance scenario processing, when the first movable control (advance scenario operation) is being executed, the scenario data in the advance scenario table 222ua is appropriately stored in the scenario storage area 223ue.
In advance scenario processing (Y505L), processing for updating the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is executed when the first movable control (advance scenario operation) is being performed. When the advance scenario process (Y505L) is executed, first, the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (Y601L), and the value of the number of steps specified in that data is the value of the step counter 223um. (Y602L).
In the process of Y602L, if it is determined that the value of the number of steps data matches the value of the step counter 223um (Y602L: Yes), it means that the operation corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue has been completed. Therefore, 0 is set to reset the value of the step counter 223um (Y606L), and the process proceeds to Y607L.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y602L that the value of the step number data does not match the value of the step counter 223um (Y602L: No), the value specified in the sensor data in the data extracted in the process of Y601L is 0 (Y603L), and if it is determined that the value defined in the sensor data is 0 (Y603L: Yes), the process proceeds to Y605L.
In the process of Y603L, if it is determined that the value specified in the sensor data is not 0 (Y603L: No), then it is determined whether the sensor corresponding to the value specified in the sensor data is in the ON state. (Y604L), and if it is determined that the sensor corresponding to the value specified in the sensor data is not in the ON state (Y604L: No), the process proceeds to Y605L.
In the process of Y605L, it is determined whether or not the value of the time data in the data extracted from the scenario storage area 223ue in the process of Y601L matches the value of the drive timer 223uj (Y605L). 223uj (Y605L: No), this means that the operation corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue has not been completed. .
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y604L that the sensor corresponding to the value of the sensor data is in the ON state (Y604L: Yes), or in the process of Y605L, the value of the time data is equal to the value of the drive timer 223uj. If it is determined that they match (Y605L: Yes), it means that the operation corresponding to the data set in the scenario storage area 223ue has been completed, so the process proceeds to Y607L.

In the processing of Y607L, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing counter 223uk is 4 (Y607L). If it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk is not 4 (Y607L: No), 1 is added to the value of the processing counter 223uk (Y608L) in order to proceed with the movement control in the advance scenario operation, and the advance scenario Data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk after addition in the table 222ua is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (Y609L). On the other hand, in the process of Y607L, when it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk is 4 (Y607L: Yes), it means that the movement control in the advancing scenario operation is completed. The value is set to 1 (Y610L), the data corresponding to the updated value (1) of the processing counter 223uk from the vibration scenario table 222ub is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (Y611L), and the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is turned on. Set (Y612L).
After the processing of Y609L or Y612L is finished, the value of the driving timer 223uj is set to 0 in order to count the elapsed time of the movement control in the operation corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue in the processing of Y609L or Y611L. (Y613L), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2076, the contents of vibration scenario processing (Y506L) executed in motor scenario processing (see Y113L in FIG. 2074) will be described. FIG. 2076 is a flowchart showing vibration scenario processing (Y506L). This vibration scenario processing (Y506L) is processing for updating the data in the scenario storage area 223ue when the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is being executed.
In this vibration scenario processing (Y506L), first, the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (Y701L), and the value of the number of steps defined in that data matches the value of the step counter 223um. (Y702L), and if it is determined that the value of the step number data matches the step counter 223um (Y702L: Yes), the operation corresponding to the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue , the value of the step counter 223um is set to 0 (Y706L), and the process proceeds to Y707L.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702L, if it is determined that the value of the step number data in the data extracted in the process of Y701L does not match the value of the step counter 223um (Y702L: No), the value specified in the sensor data is 0 (Y703L). In the process of Y703L, if it is determined that the value specified in the sensor data is not 0 (Y703L: No), it is determined whether or not the sensor corresponding to the sensor data is on (Y704L). If it is determined in the process of Y703L that the value of the sensor data is 0 (Y703: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Y704L that the sensor corresponding to the sensor data is not in the ON state (Y704L : No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time data matches the value of the drive motor 905 (Y705). In the process of Y704L, if it is determined that the sensor corresponding to the value of the sensor data is in the ON state (Y704L: Yes), or in the process of Y705, it is determined that the value of the time data and the value of the drive motor 905 match. If so, the process proceeds to Y707L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y705L that the value of the time data does not match the value of the driving timer 223uj, this process ends.
In the process of Y707L, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing counter 223uk matches any of 7, 12, 13, 14, 20, 25, 26 and 27 (Y707L). If it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk matches any one of 7, 12, 13, 14, 20, 25, 26, and 27 (Y707L: Yes), the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) is performed. Since the conditions for termination are satisfied, it is determined whether the vibration scenario termination flag 223ut is on (Y708L).
Thereby, even during the period when the second movement control (vibration scenario operation) is being executed, it is possible to execute the predetermined process at the predetermined timing. In the process of Y708L, when it is determined that the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is ON (Y708L: Yes), the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 27 (Y709L), and the value of the repetition counter 223un is set to 10. (Y710L), the process proceeds to Y711L.
As a result, in the execution period of the second movable control (vibration scenario action), when the second movable control (vibration scenario action) is terminated in the middle, the same operation as when the second movable control (vibration scenario action) is completed You can force a transition to processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y708L that the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is not ON (Y708L: No), or in the process of Y707L, the values of the processing counter 223uk are 7, 12, 13, 14, 20, If it is determined that none of 25, 26, and 27 match, the process proceeds to Y711L.
In the process of Y711L, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing counter 223uk matches 27 (Y711L), and if it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk matches 27 (Y711L: Yes), Since the movable control in the operation corresponding to the data defined in the vibration scenario table 222ub has been completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition counter 223un is 10 (Y714L). In the process of Y714L, when it is determined that the value of the repetition counter 223un is 10 (Y714L: Yes), since the movable control in the vibration scenario operation has been completed a predetermined number of times (10 times), The vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is set to off (Y718L), and the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 (Y719L). When the process of Y719L ends, the data corresponding to the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk in the save scenario table 222uc is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (Y720L), and the save scenario execution flag 223us is set to ON (Y721L). , Y722L.
On the other hand, in the process of Y714L, when it is determined that the value of the repetition counter 223un is not 10 (Y714L: No), 1 is added to the value of the repetition counter 223un (Y715L), and 1 is added to the value of the processing counter 223uk. (Y716L), and in order to execute the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) again, the scenario data corresponding to the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk in the vibration scenario table 222ub is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue ( Y717L). As a result, the second movable control (vibration scenario operation) can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. When the process of Y717L is completed, the process of Y722L is started.
On the other hand, in the process of Y711L, when it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk is not 27 (Y711L: No), 1 is added to the value of the processing counter 223uk (Y712L), and from the vibration scenario table 222ub, The data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk after addition is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (Y713L), and the process proceeds to Y722L.

In the process of Y722L, the value of the driving timer 223uj is set to 0 (Y722L). If it is determined in the process of Y705 that the value of the time data and the value of the drive timer 223uj do not match (Y705L: No), and if the process of Y722L is completed, this process ends.
Next, referring to FIG. 2077, the details of the evacuation scenario process (Y507L) executed in the motor scenario process (see Y113L in FIG. 2074) will be described. FIG. 2077 is a flow chart showing save scenario processing (Y507L). The retraction scenario process (Y507L) is a process for updating the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue when the third movable control (retreat scenario operation) is being executed.
In this save scenario processing (Y507L), first, the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (Y801L), and the value of the number of steps defined in that data matches the value of the step counter 223um. (Y802L), and if it is determined that the value of the step number data matches the step counter 223um (Y802L: Yes), the operation corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is executed. Since it means the completion, 0 is set to reset the value of the step counter 223um (Y806L), and the process proceeds to Y807L.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y802 that the value of the step number data does not match the value of the step counter 223um (Y802L: No), the value specified in the sensor data in the data extracted in the process of Y801L is 0 (Y803L). If it is determined that the value specified in the sensor data is 0 (Y803L: Yes), the process proceeds to Y805L. On the other hand, in the process of Y803L, if it is determined that the value specified in the sensor data is not 0 (Y803L: No), it is determined whether the sensor corresponding to the value specified in the sensor data is in the ON state. (Y804L), and if it is determined that the sensor corresponding to the value specified in the sensor data is not in the ON state (Y804L: No), the process proceeds to Y805L. In the process of Y805L, it is determined whether or not the value of the time data in the data extracted from the scenario storage area 223ue in the process of Y801L matches the value of the drive timer 223uj. If it is determined that the value of the time data does not match the value of the drive timer 223uj (Y805L: No), it means that the operation corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue has not been completed. Therefore, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y804L that the sensor corresponding to the value of the sensor data is in the ON state (Y804L: Yes), or in the process of Y805L, the value of the time data is equal to the value of the drive timer 223uj. If it is determined that they match (Y805L: Yes), the operation corresponding to the data set in the scenario storage area 223ue has been completed, so the process proceeds to Y807L. In the processing of Y807L, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing counter 223uk is 4 (Y807L). If it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk is not 4 (Y807L: No), 1 is added to the value of the processing counter 223uk (Y808L) in order to proceed with the third movement control (retreat scenario operation), The scenario data corresponding to the incremented value of the processing counter 223uk in the saved scenario table 222ua is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (Y809L).
When the process of Y809L ends, the value of the drive timer 223uj is incremented by 1 (Y810L), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y807L, when it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk is 4 (Y807L: Yes), it means that the third movable control (retreat scenario operation) is completed, so the accessory driving flag 223uq is set to OFF (Y812L), the scenario storage area 223ue is cleared (Y813L), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2078, the contents of the recovery scenario process (Y508L) executed in the motor scenario process (see Y113L in FIG. 2074) will be described. FIG. 2078 is a flow chart showing recovery scenario processing (Y508L). In this recovery scenario process (Y508L), when the role object movement effect is being executed and a predetermined specific time elapses, return movement control of the movable accessory 900 or notification of an abnormal state is performed. The process to execute is executed.
When the recovery scenario processing (Y508L) is executed, first, the data stored in the recovery scenario storage area 223uf is extracted (Y901L), and whether the value of the sensor data defined in the data is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (Y902L). In the process of Y902L, when it is determined that the value of the sensor data is 0 (Y902L: Yes), the process proceeds to Y904L. On the other hand, in the process of Y902L, when it is determined that the sensor data value in the data extracted in the process of Y901L is not 0 (Y902L: No), the sensor corresponding to the sensor data value is in the ON state. (Y903L).

In the process of Y903L, if it is determined that the sensor corresponding to the value of the sensor data is not in the ON state (Y903L: No), the process proceeds to Y904L. In the process of Y904L, it is determined whether or not the value of the time data in the data extracted in the process of Y901L matches the value of the driving timer 223uj (Y904L). If it is determined that they do not match (Y904L: No), the movable control is not completed in the operation corresponding to the data defined in the first return scenario table 222ud or the second return scenario table 222ue. End this process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y903L that the sensor corresponding to the value of the sensor data in the data extracted in the process of Y901L is in the ON state (Y903L: Yes), or in the process of Y904L, in the process of Y901L When it is determined that the value of the time data in the extracted data matches the value of the drive timer 223uj (Y904L: Yes), the movement control is performed with the operation corresponding to the data stored in the recovery scenario storage area 223uf. has been completed, next it is determined whether or not the value of the return counter 223ul is 3 (Y905L).
In the process of Y905L, if it is determined that the value of the return counter 223ul is not 3 (Y905L: No), 1 is added to the value of the return counter 223ul (Y906L), and the save scenario execution flag 223us is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (Y907L). When it is determined that the save scenario execution flag 223us is not on (Y907L: No), the data corresponding to the value of the return counter 223ul in the second return scenario table 222ue is stored in the return scenario storage area 223uf. (Y908L), the process proceeds to Y915L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y907L that the save scenario execution flag 223us is ON (Y907L: Yes), the data corresponding to the value of the recovery counter 223ul in the first recovery correspondence scenario table 222ud is transferred to the recovery correspondence table. Store it in the scenario storage area 223uf (Y909L), and proceed to the process of Y915L.
Also, in the process of Y905L, if it is determined that the value of the return corresponding counter 223ul is 3 (Y905L: Yes), the operation corresponding to the data in the first return corresponding scenario table 222ud or the second return corresponding scenario table 222ue Since the movable control is completed in , the return support flag 223uu is set to OFF (Y910L), and the return support scenario storage area 223uf is cleared (Y911L). When the processing of Y911L ends, it is determined whether or not the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is on (Y912L). When it is determined that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is not on (Y912L: No), the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 (Y913L), and the process proceeds to Y915L. As a result, when the movement control in the advancing scenario action or the retreating scenario action is interrupted to perform the movement control by the action corresponding to the data defined in the first return scenario table 222ud or the second return scenario table 222ue, , the suspended motion control can be resumed from the beginning of the scenario action.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y912L that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (Y912L: Yes), the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 24 (Y914L), and the process proceeds to the process of Y915L. As a result, when the vibration scenario operation has been interrupted, the movement control can be resumed from the operation corresponding to the data corresponding to the value 24 of the processing counter 223uk in the vibration scenario table 222ub. In the process of Y915L, the value of the drive timer 223uj is set to 0 (Y915L), and this process is terminated.
Next, the contents of the motor command monitoring process (Y114L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2079 is a flowchart showing motor command monitoring processing (Y114L). The motor command monitoring process (Y114L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2070) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and when controlling the movement of the movable accessory 900, the excitation data storage area 223ug is executed to update the excitation control data.
When the motor command monitoring process (Y114L) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the accessory drive flag 223uq is on (Y1001L), and if it is determined that the accessory drive flag 223uq is not on ( Y1002L: No), which means that it is not the period in which the movement control of the movable accessory 900 is being executed, so this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of Y1001L, when it is determined that the accessory driving flag 223uq is on (Y1001L: Yes), it is determined whether or not the return correspondence flag 223uu is on (Y1002L). In the process of Y1002L, if it is determined that the return flag 223uu is not ON (Y1002L: No), data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (Y1003L), and the process proceeds to Y1005L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1002L that the return support flag 223uu is ON (Y1002L: Yes), the data stored in the return support scenario storage area 223uf is extracted (Y1004L), and the process of Y1005L is performed. Transition. In the process of Y1005L, it is determined whether or not the motion data value in the data extracted in Y1003L or Y1004L is 0 (Y1005L). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1005L that the value of the motion data is not 0 (Y1005L: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the motion data corresponds to holding (Y1006L). If it is determined that the value of the motion data corresponds to holding (Y1006L: Yes), the process proceeds to Y1002L. On the other hand, in the process of Y1006L, when it is determined that the value of the operation data is not a value corresponding to holding (Y1006L: No), 1 is added to the value of the excitation timer 223ui (Y1007L), and the excitation timer after addition 223ui and the value of the speed data in the data extracted in the processing of Y1003L or Y1004L are determined (Y1008L). In the process of Y1008L, when it is determined that the value of the excitation timer 223ui and the value of the speed data do not match (Y1008L: No), the process proceeds to Y1010L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1008L that the value of the speed data and the value of the excitation timer 223ui match (Y1008L: Yes), the value of the excitation timer 223ui is set to 0 (Y1009L), and the process of Y1010L is performed. Transition. In the processing of Y1010L, it is determined whether or not the value of the excitation timer 223ui is 0 (Y1010L). If it is determined that the value of the excitation timer 223ui is not 0 (Y1010L: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1010L that the value of the excitation timer 223ui is 0 (Y1010L: Yes), is the value of the sensor data in the data extracted in the process of Y1003L or Y1004L 0? It is determined whether or not (Y1011L). In the process of Y1011L, when it is determined that the value of the sensor data is 0 (Y1011L: Yes), the process proceeds to Y1013L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1011L that the value of the sensor data is not 0 (Y1011L: No), 1 is added to the value of the step counter 223um (Y1012L), and the process proceeds to Y1013L. In the process of Y1013L, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion data in the data extracted in the process of Y1003L or the process of Y1004L corresponds to the forward direction (Y1013L). In the processing of Y1013L, when it is determined that the value of the operation data indicates the positive direction (Y1013L: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the excitation counter 223uo is 4 (Y1014L). In the process of Y1014L, when it is determined that the value of the excitation counter 223uo is not 4 (Y1014L: No), 1 is added to the value of the excitation counter 223uo (Y1015L), and the process proceeds to the process of Y1020L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y1014L that the value of the excitation counter 223uo is 4 (Y1014L: Yes), the value of the excitation counter 223uo is set to 1 (Y1016L), and the process proceeds to the process of Y1020L. If it is determined in the process of Y1013L that the value of the operation data does not indicate the forward direction (Y1013L: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the excitation counter 223uo is 1 (Y1017L). When it is determined that the value of the excitation counter 223uo is 1 (Y1017L: Yes), the value of the excitation counter 223uo is set to 4 (Y1018L), and the process proceeds to Y1020L.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y1017L that the value of the excitation counter 223uo is not 1 (Y1017L: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the excitation counter 223uo, and the process proceeds to the process of Y1020L. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control to rotate the drive motor 905 in the forward direction and control to rotate the drive motor 905 in the reverse direction without storing a plurality of excitation tables 222uf. In the process of Y1020L, the data corresponding to the value of the excitation counter 223uo in the excitation table 222uf is stored in the excitation data storage area 223ug (Y1020L), and the process ends.
Next, the contents of the motor output process (Y115L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2080 is a flowchart showing motor output processing (Y115L). The motor output process (Y115L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2070) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and stored in the excitation data storage area 223ug in the motor command monitoring process (Y114L). A process for setting the excitation control data to the drive motor 905 is executed. When the motor output process (Y115L) is executed, the excitation control data stored in the excitation data storage area 223ug is set in the drive motor 905, and this process ends.
Next, the contents of the command determination process (Y116L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2081 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (Y116L). This command determination process (Y116L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2070) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (Y116L), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (Y1201L). When the variation pattern command is received (S1201: Yes), the variation start flag 223ub provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Y1208L), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (Y1209L). . When the processing of Y1210L is completed, the variable time corresponding to the received variable pattern command is set in the variable time timer 223uh (Y1210L), and the received variable pattern type determines whether motor drive is set (Y1211L).
When it is determined that the motor drive is set in the received variation pattern (Y1211L: Yes), it means that the variation type accompanied by the performance of moving the character is executed, so the drive standby flag 223up is turned on. Set (Y1212L) and terminate this process.
On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (Y1201L: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (Y1202L). When the stop type command is received (Y1202L: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223uc of the RAM 223 is set to ON (Y1206L), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (Y1207L). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 35) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.
On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (Y1202L: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (Y1203L). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (Y1203L: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol (Y1205L). In addition, in the process of Y1205L, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ua is set. After the process of Y1205L is completed, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 223ua of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol pending ball number counter of the main controller 110 by the process of Y1205L. 203c value. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ua of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ua of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when the process of Y1205L is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ua is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
In the process of Y1203L, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1910: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S1912).
As described above, in the 60th control example, the movement control based on the action scenario set during the period in which the movable accessory 900 is movement-controlled based on the setting of a series of action scenarios is performed. It is configured to have a plurality of specific timings that can be terminated in the middle. In other words, even if an action scenario is set to operate the movable accessory 900 in an action period of a certain period (for example, 40 seconds), the movable accessory 900 can be operated without completing the action period of 40 seconds. It is configured to be able to execute variable control on the premise that movable control is terminated.
With this configuration, even if a long-time operation scenario is set, a new operation scenario cannot be set until the set operation scenario is completed. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the 60th control example, the movable role product 900 is configured to move based on a predetermined action scenario that allows the movable role product 900 to be positioned at a specific position (operating position) multiple times. When it is determined that a predetermined termination condition is satisfied while the object 900 is positioned at a specific position (operating position), the movement control based on the set operation scenario is terminated, and new movement control is executed. It is configured to allow
By configuring in this way, even if the movable control based on the set action scenario is terminated in the middle, the position of the movable accessory 900 at the time of termination can be fixed, so that a new movable control can be performed. can be made easier to execute.
In addition, when the movable accessory 900 is held at a specific position (operating position) for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) during execution of the movable accessory production, the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the specific position. 1 timing, a second timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed after being positioned at a specific position, a third timing immediately before the process of moving the movable accessory 900 from the specific position is executed, and a plurality of timings. is configured to be able to determine whether or not the end condition is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load compared to the case of constantly (for example, every 1 millisecond) determining whether or not the termination condition is established while the movable accessory 900 is positioned at a specific position. In addition, when the termination condition is established after the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the specified position, the movable control based on the action scenario being set can be terminated without moving the movable accessory 900 from the specified position.

Furthermore, in the 60th control example, after moving the movable accessory 900 located at the origin position to the operating position, it is operated in a predetermined effect mode (vibration), and then moved to the origin position. is classified into three stages of advancing movement, vibrating movement, and retreating movement, and a movement scenario corresponding to each movement classification is set.
By configuring in this way, the pachinko machines 10 having different shapes, for example, the pachinko machines 10 having different distances between the origin position and the operating position can be made to perform the same performance mode (vibration) of the movable role performance. , it is possible to share a motion scenario corresponding to the vibrating motion.
In addition, in the 60th control example, when the player presses the frame button 22 during execution of the movable role production, the end condition for ending the movable role production is established. Since it is configured in this way, when the role object movement production is executed in accordance with the player's taste, the role object movement production is executed to the end, and the role object movement production not in line with the player's taste is performed. When it is executed, it is possible to end the character object movable effect on the way. Therefore, since the player can select the contents of the presentation by himself/herself, the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2060, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 60th control example, when the movable role effect is executed, the movable role 900 is displayed so as to cover the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. configured to advance. In other words, the state in which the movable role production is being executed is different from the state in which the movable role production is not being executed. It is configured so that the display mode of the variable effect that can suggest the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the symbol) is difficult to be visually recognized.

Therefore, a player who wants to pay more attention to the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 rather than the performance of moving the character, presses the frame button 22 to satisfy the end condition. It is possible to end the role object movable presentation early.
<61st control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2082 to 2155. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example is configured to be able to execute the variable performance using the movable accessory 900 described in the 60th control example. Here, conventionally, not only the display effect mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, but also the decorative accessory (movable accessory 900) provided near the third pattern display device 81 is moved. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a variable production including a role product production mode.
The pachinko machine 10 configured as described above can provide the player with various effects as a variation performance corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player can play the game. It was possible to suppress early boredom. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, which is configured to be able to set the role object production mode in which the decorative accessory (movable accessory 900) is operated in various operation patterns in order to enhance the effect of the variable production, one variation An operation scenario is defined in advance as a series of operation patterns of the operation contents of the decorative accessory (movable accessory 900) to be executed during the production, and when the production mode of the variable production is determined, during the production of the variable production. A pachinko machine 10 configured to set an action scenario corresponding to the action content of a decorative accessory (movable accessory 900) to be executed is known.
In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the display effect mode and the character effect mode can be determined in advance corresponding to the passage of the variable time. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable presentation in which the display presentation mode and the character performance mode are associated with each other, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, even when the decorative role object (movable role object 900) is operated with various action contents during one variable effect period, the operation scenario corresponding to the action contents to be executed can be set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing for executing the movement control for the decorative accessory (movable accessory 900) executed during the variable performance period.

However, although the above-described pachinko machine 10 was able to enhance the performance effect by executing the variable performance using various variable modes, the decorative accessories ( Since the movable accessory 900) moves in a series of motion patterns, there is a problem that a monotonous fluctuating effect is provided to the player who has been playing for a long time.
Furthermore, in the recent pachinko machine 10, the display effect mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as part of the variable effect can be changed by the player using the operating means (frame button 22, etc.). Some are configured so that they can be changed by executing an operation. Specifically, based on the fact that the player has operated (depressed, etc.) the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) during a part of the variable performance period (operation valid period) during which the variable performance is executed, After the operation effective period has passed, or immediately after the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) is operated (pressing operation), the first display mode (for example, closed treasure box) displayed on the display screen is displayed. display mode) is changed to a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a display mode showing an open treasure chest and the contents of the treasure box).
That is, in order to enhance the effect of the variable effect, the display effect (the effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) and the character effect (the decorative role arranged near the third pattern display device 81 When determining the production mode of the variable production, the operation scenario corresponding to the series of operation patterns of the decorative role in the role production is configured to be executable. In the conventional pachinko machine 10, which aims to simplify the movement control of the decorative accessories by being configured to be able to set to To change the operation contents of a decorative accessory whose movement control is executed based on a set operation scenario, even in the case where the performance mode of the display performance can be changed by the establishment of the operation). Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to enhance the performance effect of the variable performance.
More specifically, when the player operates the operation means to change the display mode while the decorative accessory is moving in a series of motion patterns based on the set motion scenario, There is a problem that the display mode after the change can be displayed only within a range that does not give a sense of incompatibility to the decorative accessory that is moving, and the increase in the production pattern of the variable production is limited. .

Therefore, in the sixty-first control example, the presentation mode of the display presentation can be changed based on the operation contents of the decorative accessory whose movement is controlled. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a display effect corresponding to the operation contents of the decorative accessory whose movement is controlled, so that the effect of the variable effect can be enhanced.
<Regarding the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2082 to 2087. FIG. 2082 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, FIG. 2083 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2085 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the operation means (frame button 22, selection button 600) of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 10 is a diagram specifically showing the configuration of a variable prize winning device 65 included in the controller 10. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2082, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see 2114) in order to support the inner frame 12. The inner frame 11 uses the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an axis for opening and closing. 12 is supported on the front side so that it can be opened and closed.
A game board 13 (see FIG. 2083) having a large number of nails, winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 2096) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 2082). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.
The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加
The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls which protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 2082), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. Also, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a production button (frame button) 22 (see FIG. 2085(a)) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 2085(b)) are provided. The effect button (frame button) 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2083) to be described later is varied.
The selection switches 600 include, as shown in FIG. 2085(b), a determination switch 600a for determining the selection of effects, etc., an up switch 600b for instructing selection in the upward direction, and a right switch for instructing selection in the right direction. 600c, a down switch 600d for instructing selection in the downward direction, and a left switch 600e for instructing selection in the left direction.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 2082).
In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2083) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.
A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.
In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.
A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .
As shown in FIG. 2083, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, first variable winning device 65, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable display It is configured by assembling the device unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 2082). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.
The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 2082) of the front frame 14. FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2083, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 2082). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).
The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 2096) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2083) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2083) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.
First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 2083). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 2096), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the 61st control example, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B determine whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 , the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.
In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (winning a prize), a special symbol lottery is performed. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. The jackpot type determined here will be described later with reference to FIG. 2100(a). Jackpot types are available. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .
Here, the "10R probability variable jackpot", which is part of the jackpot types set in the pachinko machine 10, will be described. “10R variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and then a jackpot with a special pattern of high probability, and “3R variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds. After that, it is a certain variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state of special symbols. In addition, the "3R time-saving jackpot" shifts to a low-probability state with special symbols after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's about.
In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a special game state (jackpot game state) It is a game state that is easy to shift to. The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the 61st control example includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol (to be described later) is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance 640 refers to a game state in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means a game state in which neither the variable probability state nor the time saving state is in effect (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern (normal pattern) winning probability is increased).
In this 61st control example, the game states that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 may be explained using the set probability state of special symbols and the probability state of normal symbols. For example, the game state in which the special design low probability state and the normal design low probability state are set is the normal state, the special design low probability state, and the game state in which the normal design high probability state is set is time saving The state, the high probability state of special symbols, and the game state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set is the variable state, the high probability state of special symbols, and the low probability state of normal symbols. It corresponds to the definite state (second definite variable state).

In the variable probability state or the time saving state, that is, in the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) is increased, but also the second ball entrance 640 is attached. The time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set than during normal operation. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the number of game balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is higher than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It will be easy to enter the ball. Therefore, during the probability variable state or during the time saving state, that is, the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed. can be increased.
In addition, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, that is, in the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a accompanying the second ball entrance 640, Alternatively, in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per normal symbol is increased more than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. good. In addition, during the normal pattern high probability state, the winning probability of the second pattern (normal pattern) is not changed, and the time and one normal pattern during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened in a winning game (ordinary figure winning game) may be changed. In addition, during the high-probability state of the normal pattern, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one game per normal pattern are not set. , Only the winning probability of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.
The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of symbols, and a second symbol (which is triggered by the passage of a ball through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67) A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided which is composed of an LED that variably displays normal). A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 2096), for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 2096). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Each time the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device displays the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a game ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning (normal winning), the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed after the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is changed and displayed on the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.
In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the 61st control example), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.
The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is more during the variable state or the time saving state, that is, during the high probability state of the normal symbol than when the game state is in the normal state (during the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set to be short. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the normal pattern high probability state, so that the special pattern lottery (jackpot lottery) is performed more often than the normal pattern low probability state (normal state). be able to. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the special symbol lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, the probability variable state and the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are the gaming states in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. becomes.
In addition, in the normal pattern high probability state (probable variable state or time saving state), increase the probability of winning per normal pattern lottery in the normal pattern lottery, increase the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a per hit, etc. Even by the method of , if the game ball is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the high probability state (variable probability state or time saving state) of the normal symbol, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol It may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal symbol low probability state (normal state) in the normal symbol high probability state (probable variable state or time saving state), the probability of winning It may be fixed regardless of the game state, or the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a for one win may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the balls flow down the right side of the game board. is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.
The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .
In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the 61st control example. A part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.
Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first winning opening switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 2096), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front, a second ball entrance 640 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 2096), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.
In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of prize winning holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter. In this 61st control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 , but the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the second ball entrance 640. are different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is It may be configured as one.
The second ball entrance 640 is attached with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. ing. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加
As described above, the high-probability state of the normal design (probability variable state, time-saving state) has a higher probability of hitting the second design than the low-probability state of the normal design (normal state), and the variable display of the second design. Since the time required for the operation is also short, the symbols "○" are more likely to be displayed in the variable display of the second symbols, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, in the normal symbol high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state), the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than the normal symbol low probability state (normal state). Therefore, the high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) of the normal design can create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal design. can.

Here, a jackpot lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and a jackpot executed when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery (second special symbol lottery), the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. However, the second special symbol lottery is configured to have a higher ratio of selecting a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player as a jackpot type that is selected when a jackpot is achieved.
In the normal state, the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the electric accessory 640a is attached. A game ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 toward the first ball entrance 64 that is not open (so-called “left hitting”), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery (first special symbol lottery).
On the other hand, during the probability variable state or the time saving state, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since the game state is such that it is easy to enter the game ball into the ball opening 640, the ball is shot toward the second ball opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"). ”), pass through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory, and enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to win a jackpot lottery (second special symbol lottery ) and aim for a big win, it is advantageous for the player.
In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixty-first control example provides the player with a ball It is possible to change the shooting method (game method) between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the game method (the shooting direction of the game ball) can be changed.

Returning to FIG. 2083, the description continues. A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable time ), the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is illuminated with a special symbol in the stop display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the stop display mode (jackpot symbol) indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed in the third mode. It is displayed on the pattern display device 81 to indicate that the jackpot has been won. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which game balls are likely to win. When this jackpot game is started, the specific winning opening 65a, which is closed except during the jackpot game, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).
The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.
Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted downward in the front by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.
Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the lower left side of the entrance 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 2082).
The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . A game ball that flows down the game area and has not won a prize in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entrance 64 . In addition, in the 61st control example, as shown in FIG. 2083, only the first out port 71 is provided as a ball entrance for discharging game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 to outside the advantageous area. However, it is not limited to this, and two or more outlets may be provided.
The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this control example, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2083, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a plurality of decoration accessories. Specifically, when the game board 13 is viewed from the front (viewpoint of FIG. 2083), the right hand object 400y provided in the right area of the third symbol display device 81 and the left side area of the third symbol display device 81 are provided. The left hand object 500y, the upper hand object 600y provided in the upper area of the third symbol display device 81, and the movable hand object 900 provided on the far side of the upper hand object 600y (the far side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2083). and are provided.

The right role 400y, the left role 500y, and the upper role 600y are each embedded with a plurality of light-emitting members (LEDs, etc.), and correspond to the variable performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. light emission is controlled by
In addition, as in the 60th control example described above, the movable accessory 900 is at least one of the storage position (origin position) that does not cover the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. 2083, the movable accessory 900 positioned at the retracted position is indicated by a dashed line. As shown in FIG. 2083, the movable accessory 900 positioned at the retracted position is in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.
In this 61st control example, as a composite effect combining an action effect for moving the movable accessory 900 and a display effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, a movable role effect (a role effect ) is configured to be executable. In this way, by enabling execution of a composite effect in which a plurality of modes of effects are combined, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect. Note that the detailed mechanism of the movable accessory 900 is the same as in the 60th control example described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 2084, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.
The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.
In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.
The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 2096). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 2096). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.
Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2086 and 2087. FIG. 2086 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. FIG. 2086(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 2086(b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 2086(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning hole 65a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 2086(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 2087(b).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2086(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a has an open state in which a game ball can enter and a ball in which a game ball cannot enter by an open/close door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning hole 65a.
With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided toward the second ball entrance 640 side. is configured as Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the variable probability game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while keeping the right-handed state, and immediately after the big win game, the left-handed game method. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.
FIG. 2086(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 2086(b). As shown in FIG. 2086(a), the detection switch 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2087, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge port 65e1 and a special discharge port 65e2, which will be described later.
FIG. 2087(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 2087(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 2087(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . A game ball passing through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability variable switch 65e3 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .
Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a high special symbol. It is set to a probability state (variable probability state). That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as an imparting means for imparting a variable probability state. In addition, the switching member 65h serves as a distribution means for distributing the game state after the big win to a special symbol low probability state (normal state) or a special symbol high probability state (variable probability state).
In this way, the game state set after the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special outlet 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this 61st control example, the operating contents of the switching member 65h are varied according to the set jackpot type, and when the probability variable jackpot type is set as the jackpot type, the probability variable switch 65e3 activates the switching member 65h so that the game ball can be detected, and when the normal jackpot type is set as the jackpot type, the variable probability switch 65e3 is switched to make it difficult to detect the game ball during the jackpot game. It is configured to actuate the member 65h.
Specifically, for example, during a jackpot game in which "10R probability variable jackpot", which is one type of probability variable jackpot, is set, the switching member 65h is switched to 5 times in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the second round. configured to be activated for seconds. In addition, during the jackpot game in which the "3R short-time jackpot", which is one of the normal jackpots, is set, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the second round. is configured as

Therefore, in the jackpot game in which the "10R probability variable jackpot" is set, the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to pass through the probability variable switch 65e3, but the "3R time-saving jackpot" is set. In the jackpot game, it is configured so as not to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variable grant ratio according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to prevent excessive advantage and disadvantage from occurring.
Next, referring to FIG. 2087(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e1 will be described. FIG. 2087(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge port 65e2.
The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of game balls is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, even if the second round jackpot game (round game) is started in a state in which the game ball that won two rounds before has not been discharged (remains), the remaining ball will turn the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress defects that pass through.
In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection switch 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize as a privilege (in this control example, 15 balls for each winning ball). prize balls) can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability state. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the probability variable state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

<Regarding the effect content in the 61st control example>
Here, referring to FIGS. 2088 to 2093, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the variation including the character effect using the movable accessory 900 as the characteristic effect content Describe the content of the performance. In this 61st control example, as described above with reference to FIG. Then, when the role production is executed, after executing the movable control (advance control) for advancing the movable role 900 to the position (operating position) covering the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 for 3 seconds, A movable control (movable accessory first effect) is executed to vibrate the movable accessory 900 in an operation pattern for a predetermined period (about 6 seconds), and then the movable accessory 900 is moved in a manner different from the operation pattern in the first effect. After completing the movable control (second rendering of the movable accessory), the movable control (retraction control) for retracting the movable accessory 900 to the upper position (storage position) of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. is doing.
Furthermore, during the period during which the movable role first effect is being executed out of the effect period during which the role object effect is being executed, the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 (the number of frame button depressions) is measured. When the number of times the frame button is pressed satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 5 times), the condition for ending the first production of the movable accessory is satisfied, and the operation for 6 seconds corresponding to the first production of the movable accessory is established. It is configured so that the second production of the movable accessory can be executed without completing the pattern.
By configuring in this way, the degree of progress of the performance of the role product executed during the variable performance can be varied according to the content of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, so that the operation performance can be quickly terminated. The person presses the frame button 22 willingly during the first performance period of the movable accessory. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, and the player's early boredom with the game can be suppressed.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, the movable accessory 900 passes through the operating position multiple times during the first rendering period of the movable accessory (the state of being positioned at the operating position occurs multiple times). It is configured so that the movable control to vibrate the movable accessory 900 is executed at the same time, and it is configured to be able to determine whether the end condition is satisfied in the state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. . In other words, when the first movable accessory effect ends in the middle based on the establishment of the end condition, the first movable accessory effect is always ended in a state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. It consists of By configuring in this way, as the movement control when shifting from the movable role first effect to the movable role second effect, the movable role object 900 positioned at the operating position is moved to the movable role object second effect. Since it is only necessary to execute the movement control corresponding to the production, it is possible to easily prescribe the action pattern corresponding to the second production of the movable accessory in a series of action scenarios in advance. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control processing for the performance of the movable accessory 900 to move.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, when the operation pattern for 6 seconds is completed without the end condition being satisfied during the first movable role performance, that is, the operation corresponding to the first movable role performance The contents of the action scenario are defined in advance so that the first presentation of the movable accessory 900 is finished in the state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position even when the action scenario of the pattern is executed to the end.
In other words, the movable accessory 900 is executed even when the end condition is established during the first movable accessory presentation and the first movable accessory presentation is ended in the middle, or when the first movable accessory presentation is executed to the end. are positioned at the same position (operating position), the first production of the movable accessory is completed. By configuring in this way, the player is informed whether the current first movable accessory presentation has ended in the middle or has been executed to the end, depending on the position of the movable accessory 900 at the time when the first movable accessory presentation ends. It can be difficult to comprehend. Also, even if the first movable accessory effect is terminated in the middle, the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the same position as when the first movable accessory effect is executed to the end. Since it is possible to execute movable control for the movable role 900 (movable control corresponding to the second production of the movable role), even if the first production of the movable role is terminated in the middle, the player can The operation presentation can be continued without giving a sense of incompatibility.
In addition, in the 61st control example, the measured value of the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the first rendering period of the movable accessory is reset at a predetermined timing, and after the reset, the measurement of the number of times the frame button is pressed is resumed. It is configured as follows. In other words, the end condition is established when the number of times the frame button is pressed within a specific period of the effect period during which the first movable accessory effect is executed satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 5 times). there is
More specifically, the frame button pressing count is reset each time the vibration operation of the movable accessory 900 executed during the first rendering of the movable accessory is completed. In other words, the end condition is established when the frame button 22 is pressed five times during the period (about 2 seconds) during which the movable accessory 900 is vibrated for one round.

By configuring in this way, there is no need for the player to continue to press the frame button 22 during the movable accessory first presentation period, and during the movable accessory first presentation period, the specific period (movable accessory 900 The termination condition can be established by intentionally pressing the frame button 22 during the period in which the vibrating motion of (1) rotates once. In addition, in the 61st control example, an action scenario is defined in advance so that the movable accessory performs the vibration action three times at maximum during the first rendering period of the movable accessory.
Therefore, even if the player intentionally presses the frame button 22 to satisfy the end condition and ends the first rendering of the movable role partway through, the period in which the end condition is met will determine the movable role. The timing at which the object first effect ends can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute operation effects of more diverse patterns, and to enhance the effect of the effects.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example is configured to display various display modes using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 even while the character effect is being executed. By displaying a display mode combined with the character product performance being executed, it is possible to suggest whether the performance result of the variable performance being executed is a performance result advantageous to the player.
Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the variable performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the performance pattern of the variable performance including the role performance using the movable role 900 are used as the variable performance. The start timing (the timing at which the special symbol variation is started) is determined, and various effects corresponding to the determined effect pattern are executed based on the passage of time. In other words, it was common to determine in advance a performance pattern corresponding to a predetermined special symbol variation time (variation performance period), and to execute a variation performance based on the determined performance pattern.

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the end condition is satisfied based on the player operating (pressing) the operating means (frame button 22). Display displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 that is executed overlapping with the character production when part of the character production that is preset in the case can be shortened (omitted) Since the effect is executed according to the already set effect pattern, there is a problem that the execution contents of the character object effect and the execution contents of the display effect are out of sync.
In addition, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when the execution contents of the character effect and the execution contents of the display effect are different, it is necessary to provide a display effect in which the character effect and the execution period overlap. As a presentation mode, it is necessary to set a presentation mode that does not affect the passage of time (for example, a presentation mode in which a still image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period), and there is a problem that the presentation effect is lowered.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the period during which the character effect is executed is overlapped according to the content (execution timing) of the movable control executed for the movable accessory 900 in the character effect. It is configured to be able to determine the execution timing of the control for the display effect that is executed as a result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably execute the display effect corresponding to the movement of the movable accessory 900 in the character effect, so the effect of the variable effect combining the character effect and the display effect. can be further enhanced.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, as described above, when the termination condition is satisfied while the first movable accessory effect is being executed, the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. Since the first production of the movable accessory can be finished in the state where the movable accessory is present, there is no need to wait for the operation scenario corresponding to the first production of the movable accessory to be completed. (movable control corresponding to the second effect of the movable role) can be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. However, there is a problem that the player is made to wait until the movable accessory 900 moves to the operating position when the end condition is met while the movable accessory 900 is away from the operating position. rice field.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the predetermined execution condition (pressing the frame button 22) is satisfied during the period from when the end condition is satisfied until the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. It is configured to be able to execute an additional performance when it is established. By executing this additional effect, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, suggestive information on the effect result of the variable effect being executed, the operation contents of the movable role to be executed later (movable role 2nd It is configured to be able to give the production content)) of the production.
In other words, a privilege that can be given to the player only when the end condition is satisfied during the first movable role performance, in other words, the movable role first performance is performed without satisfying the end condition during the first movable role performance. A privilege that is not given when all action scenarios corresponding to the performance are completed can be given during the first performance period of the movable accessory. With this configuration, even if the end condition is established in the state where the movable accessory 900 is separated from the operating position in the first movable accessory effect, the first movable accessory effect can be performed. Since the game (frame button operation) can be motivated to satisfy the execution condition of the additional performance in the remaining period until the end, the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game.
Furthermore, in the sixty-first control example, the display effect that is executed overlapping with the effect period of the character effect is used to guide the player to the content of the effect of the character effect. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the method of establishing the end condition of the first performance of the movable accessory, the execution/non-execution of the additional performance, and the contents of the second performance of the movable accessory.
First, with reference to FIG. 2088(a), the display screens of the movable role object 900 and the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the role object production is started will be described. FIG. 2088(a) shows the third symbol display device during the movable role preparation period during which movable control (advance control) for advancing the movable role 900 from the storage position to the operating position is executed as role product production. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the vicinity of the display surface of 81. FIG. Here, in the 61st control example, the character object production is started at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable production. 5.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation.

As shown in FIG. 2088(a), the character production is executed as part of the variation production that is executed in response to the special symbol variation, so it is formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, a third pattern (indicated by three arrows in the figure) that is variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol variation is displayed. Then, a state is shown in which the movable accessory 900 that has advanced downward from the storage position (see FIG. 2083), which is the upper position of the third pattern display device 81, is moving toward the operating position. The visible surface of this movable role object 900 is marked with the word “chance”, and when the variable effect including the role object effect is executed, it is more likely than the case where the variable effect without the role object effect is executed. , the player is notified that the effect result of the variable effect is a favorable result (jackpot) for the player and that the degree of expectation is high.
Although a detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example is configured to be able to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation based on the result of the special symbol selection. It is configured such that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be determined when the result is a big win than when the result is a loss. In particular, a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or more is configured so that the expectation of winning a big win is high with respect to a variation pattern with a variation time of less than 60 seconds. Then, the variable performance including the character performance is configured to be executed corresponding to the variation pattern with the variable time of 60 seconds or longer.
By configuring in this way, when the character production is executed when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable production, the production period of the current fluctuation production (fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation) is 60 seconds. The player can grasp the above and can enjoy the performance for a long time while expecting the big win by making the player understand at an early stage that the expectation of winning the big win is high.
Then, as a display mode for indicating that the state in which the character effect is executed is a chance state in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high, the characters "chance occurring" are displayed in the upper position of the main display area Dm. be done. The text "chance is occurring" is configured to be displayed when the movable accessory 900 descends to a position where the player can visually recognize the display area where the text "chance is occurring" is displayed. .

Furthermore, in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, a character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed in a display mode looking at the situation where the movable accessory 900 is moving downward. This character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm even when the variable performance that does not include the character performance is being executed, and five seconds have passed since the start of the current variable performance. Until, that is, in a state in which the movable accessory 900 is not movable, by performing an action to look upward, an effect to incite whether the variable performance executed this time is a variable performance accompanied by a role product performance. is configured to be executable.
Here, if the character effect is not executed after executing the effect to encourage the execution of the character effect, the player looks upward and then comments "Nothing is coming", and the character effect is executed. An action corresponding to the variable effect that is not executed is executed. By constructing in this way, even when the variable performance not including the performance of the role is executed, the player can be encouraged that the performance of the role is likely to be executed, so that the performance effect is enhanced. be able to. Also, before the movable accessory 900 actually advances (moves downward), the character 801 performs an action of looking upward, that is, in the direction in which the movable accessory 900 advances. Since it is possible to make it easier for the player to gaze at the position where the object 900 advances, it is possible to suppress the progress of the variable performance without noticing that the performance of the role product is executed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 2088(a), when the character effect is executed, a left stop position display 911a and a right stop position display 911b are positioned slightly above the center in the vertical direction of the main display area Dm. is displayed. Both the left stop position display 911a and the right stop position display 911b are displayed in a triangular shape from the side end of the main display area Dm toward the center, and the vertex toward the center is horizontal. They are displayed so as to face each other in the direction (in the drawing, horizontal lines connecting the vertices of the respective stop position displays 911a and 911b are indicated by dashed lines). The left stop position display 911 a and the right stop position display 911 b are display modes for indicating the operating position of the movable accessory 900 . By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the movable accessory 900 has been positioned at the operating position.
Time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 2088(a), and when 6 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, the movable accessory 900 waits for about 3 seconds at the operating position, and enters the state shown in FIG. 2088(b). . FIG. 2088(b) shows the display of the third symbol display device 81 during the standby period after the end of the movable control (advancement control) for moving the movable accessory 900 from the storage position to the operating position as the accessory effect. It is the figure which showed an example near the surface.

As shown in FIG. 2088(a), when the movable accessory 900 advances to the operating position, a guidance display mode for guiding the effect contents of the movable accessory first effect to be executed next is displayed in the main display area Dm. be done. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, when the role object production is started, first, the advance control for moving the movable role object 900 from the storage position to the operating position is executed for about 1 second, and then the movable role object is moved. The action scenario of the movable accessory 900 is set such that the waiting period for waiting (holding) the object 900 at the operating position is set to 3 seconds.
Using this waiting period, the player is guided to the movable control contents of the movable accessory 900 to be executed next (movable accessory first effect content). With this configuration, the operation performance proceeds without the player understanding the content of the operation performance. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from being lowered due to the end of the object first presentation.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2088(b), during the standby period in which the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position, the message "Clear the mission before the gauge reaches 0" is displayed above the main display area Dm. In the small display area Dm61 formed below the main display area Dm, the characters "Press the button 5 times" are displayed as a display mode for showing the contents of the mission. In Dm62, a press count display area Dm62a displaying the number of presses of the frame button 22 and a press count display area Dm62b displaying the number of presses of the frame button required to accomplish the mission are displayed. Furthermore, in the small display area Dm63, a time gauge tg1 for indicating the remaining period of the mission period is displayed.
The state shown in FIG. 2088(b) is a state in which the first production for the movable accessory is not being executed (a state in which the player is informed in advance of the content of the first production for the movable accessory). The number of times display area Dm62a shows "0" to indicate that the frame button 22 has not been pressed even once, and the required number of times of pressing display area Dm62b shows the required number of times of pressing corresponding to the mission set this time. "5" is displayed. The entire area of the time gauge tg1 is displayed as a remaining period gauge tg1a (indicated by a hatched area in the figure) showing the remaining period, and a small area Dm63a displays "READY" to indicate that the mission period has not yet started. ” is displayed.

It should be noted that even if the frame button 22 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 2088(b), the value (" 0”) is not changed (displayed by addition).
Although a detailed description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the movable accessory 900 vibrates in the order of downward and upward around the operating position during the first rendering of the movable accessory (1 Circular action) is executed three times, and the action scenario of the movable accessory 900 is set so that the action period of one lap is 2 seconds. The above-described mission is configured such that the remaining period elapses each time the movable accessory 900 makes one round (every two seconds elapse). In other words, the time gauge tg1 is displayed in a display mode in which 2 seconds are measured.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2089(a), the content of the variable performance in the state where the first performance of the movable accessory is being executed will be described. FIG. 2089(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the player presses the frame button 22 while the movable accessory first effect is being executed, and the mission is accomplished. As shown in FIG. 2089(a), when the player presses the frame button 22 five times while the remaining time gauge tg1a indicated by the time gauge tg1 remains, characters indicating mission accomplished are displayed in the display area Dm61. Further, "5" indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed five times during the mission period is displayed in the number-of-presses display area Dm62a. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of times of pressing has been reached for accomplishing the mission.
2089(a), ie, when the mission is accomplished and the conditions for ending the first rendering of the movable accessory are satisfied, the movable accessory 900 completes one rotation, as shown in FIG. 2089(b). As described above, the second effect of the movable accessory is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 2089(b), the effect content of the movable accessory second effect will be described. FIG. 2089(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the end condition for the first movable accessory effect is established and the second movable accessory effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 2089(b), when the movable accessory second effect is executed, fall control, which is a mode different from the movable accessory first effect, is executed. In particular. Drop control is executed to move the movable accessory 900 faster than the operating speed during the first movable accessory presentation to a lower position that cannot be reached by the vibrating motion executed during the first movable accessory presentation. Then, as the movable accessory 900 falls, the second period display area Dm64 formed near the center of the main display area Dm is displayed as a display mode of the display effect corresponding to the second effect of the movable accessory. ” is displayed.
With this configuration, when the movable accessory second effect is executed, the characters "chance" attached to the movable accessory 900 and the character "large" displayed in the second period display area Dm64 are displayed. It is possible to make the player understand that "great chance" combined with the characters of is displayed. Also, above the main display area Dm, there is displayed a comment "great chance occurring" indicating that the current situation is higher than the "chance" and that the expectation of winning the big win is higher.
Although detailed explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, various conditions when the movable accessory second effect is executed (end process of the movable accessory first effect, corresponding special symbol lottery The display mode displayed in the second period display area Dm64 can be changed according to the winning judgment result, etc.). It is designed to have different expectations.
Therefore, when the first movable accessory effect is completed and the second movable accessory effect is executed, the movable accessory 900 is movably controlled in a manner different from the first movable accessory effect. Since it is possible to obtain the information suggesting the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, it is possible to execute the performance that the player pays attention to.

In addition, in this 61st control example, as the production mode of the second production for the movable accessory (contents of variable control of the movable accessory 900), in addition to the falling production (falling control) shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to execute a lift effect (lift control) for lifting the object 900 from the operating position. The effect contents of this rising effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 2092(b) and 2093.
Next, the contents of the effect when the movable accessory 2nd effect ends and the movable accessory 900 moves to the storage position will be described with reference to FIG. 2090(a). Figure 2090(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable accessory 900 moves (retracts) from the state shown in Figure 2089(b) to the storage position. As shown in FIG. 2090(a), when the retraction control is executed for the movable accessory 900, the retraction effect is performed in such an effect mode that the movable accessory 900 moving upward is followed. In the example shown in FIG. 2090(a), an effect (school of fish) in which a plurality of fish swim chasing the movable accessory 900 is executed as the retreat effect.
Also, as shown in FIG. 2090(a), when the movable accessory 900 is positioned above the main display area Dm, that is, in the diagram shown in FIG. 2089(b), the various display modes displayed above the main display area Dm in the diagram shown in FIG. It is configured to be displayed below Dmn.
Specifically, a small display area Dm1 is formed below the main display area Dm in which a comment "great chance is occurring" is displayed and the third pattern is variably displayed. When moving the movable means (movable accessory 900) whose movable range is designed so as to cover the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the movable means (movable accessory 900) makes it difficult to see. The display area of the third symbol display device 81, i.e., the area that the player is always watching, is configured to be able to execute display control for displaying various display modes displayed in the display area in different display areas. can be used to move the movable means (movable accessory 900) with various movable contents.

Further, in the sixty-first control example, a part of the display mode of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed based on the elapsed time after the variable effect is started. , is configured to be displayed based on the contents of movement control of the movable accessory 900, even when the movable means (movable accessory 900) is moved in a plurality of movement patterns, the actually executed movement The display mode of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the 3-symbol display device 81 can be displayed in an appropriate display area according to the control contents.
On the other hand, when the operation effect ends without executing the movable accessory second effect after the movable accessory first effect ends, the state shown in FIG. 2090(b) is reached. FIG. 2090(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable accessory 900 is moving (retracted) to the storage position after the first rendering of the movable accessory ends. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 2090(b), the movable accessory first effect is completed, and the movable means located at the operating position moves to the storage position provided above the third symbol display device 81. It shows the state in the middle of doing (evacuating). Then, the character 801 is displayed with an action of waving to the movable accessory 900, and the characters "expecting reach effect" are displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the operation presentation has ended with only the first presentation of the movable accessory. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the ease with which the movable accessory second effect is executed is varied according to the trigger for ending the movable accessory first effect. there is Specifically, when the end condition is established and the first movable accessory effect is terminated in the middle, the second movable accessory effect is always executed. When the performance is executed to the end, it is determined by lottery whether or not the second performance of the movable accessory is to be executed.
Furthermore, in the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the second movable role, the second movable role is more likely to be won if the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect is a big win than if it is not. It is configured to increase the execution frequency of the production. In other words, when the end condition is satisfied during the first movable role production, the second movable role production is always executed after the first production of the movable role is completed. When it is not possible to grasp the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot due to the execution of the object second presentation, but whether or not to execute the movable accessory second presentation is determined by lottery, that is, in the middle of the movable accessory first presentation. If the end condition is not established in , the fact that the second performance of the movable accessory is executed itself increases the expectation of winning the jackpot.

Therefore, a game in which the player predicts whether or not the player has won a jackpot by executing an additional performance after the end condition is established, and a movable accessory second performance is executed without the end condition being established. It is possible to select whether to execute a game for predicting whether or not a jackpot is won depending on whether or not the player wins.
In the case of determining whether or not to execute the second movable role production by lottery, if the second movable role production is not executed, the special symbol variation corresponding to this variable performance is not won. It is possible to grasp in advance that the possibility is high, and it is possible to suppress the excessive operation of the movable accessory 900 for the variable performance with a high possibility that the jackpot is not won.
As described above, in the 61st control example, the action scenario (vibration scenario 64) corresponding to the movable accessory first effect executed as the accessory effect has ended (when the first end trigger is established). ), or when the action for one cycle is completed in a state where the end condition is established during the first production of the movable accessory (when the second end opportunity is established). is doing. Then, it is configured to be able to change the effect mode of the character object effect after the movable character object first effect ends in accordance with the termination trigger of the movable character object first effect.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the performance mode of the performance of the role product depending on the established end trigger, so that the performance of the role product can be executed in various performance modes.

Furthermore, in the sixty-first control example, the first movable role is generated by the establishment of the second end opportunity rather than the case where the first effect of the movable role is ended by the establishment of the first end opportunity. It is configured such that the second production of the movable accessory is more likely to be executed after the first production of the movable accessory is finished when the production is finished. Also, when the second production of the movable role is executed, the number of special symbol lotteries corresponding to the variable production (variation production including the production of the role) being executed is higher than when the second production of the movable role is not executed. It is configured so that the player can easily grasp the result (effect result of the variable effect) in advance.
By configuring in this way, when the second termination opportunity of the first movable accessory first effect is established for the player who is trying to quickly grasp the effect result of the variable effect being executed (the result of the special symbol lottery). It is possible to provide information (privileges) that makes it possible to grasp the effect result of the variable effect (the result of the special symbol lottery) in advance. In other words, when a specific termination trigger (second termination trigger) is established among multiple termination triggers (first termination trigger, second termination trigger), the specific termination trigger (second termination trigger) It is possible to give a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the case where a different end opportunity (first end opportunity) is established.
Therefore, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player after the first movable accessory effect ends, depending on the type of the termination opportunity established for ending the first movable accessory effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the establishment of the ending opportunity.
Furthermore, in the 61st control example, the above-described second end opportunity is the situation before the action scenario (vibration scenario 64) corresponding to the first rendering of the movable accessory ends, that is, the first end opportunity is established. It is something that can be established before it is done.

In other words, it is possible to establish the second end opportunity, in which the player is likely to receive an advantageous privilege, earlier than the first end opportunity. With this configuration, the first termination opportunity can be established even when the second termination opportunity cannot be established. is established and the player's desire to play is reduced.
In addition, in the 61st control example, the player presses the operation means (frame button 22) during the first production of the movable accessory, so that the second end opportunity is generated before the first end opportunity is established. It is configured so that it can be established. That is, the movable role 900 is positioned at a specific position (the movable role 900 that has completed one cycle of operation is in a It is configured so that the second end opportunity can be established when the second condition is established by setting the position to the position.
With this configuration, the second end opportunity, which is an end opportunity advantageous to the player, can be established based on the player's operation on the operation means, so that the player can It is possible to voluntarily operate the operating means.
In addition, as described above, in the 61st control example, in order to change the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player according to the type of the termination trigger established for terminating the first movable accessory effect, It is configured so that the performance mode of the performance of the role product executed after the first performance of the movable role product is completed is different, and when the second end opportunity is established, the game is played more than when the first end opportunity is established. However, without being limited to this, the privilege is more advantageous to the player when the first termination opportunity is established than when the second termination opportunity is established. may be configured to be given.

In addition, other end opportunity (for example, second end opportunity) is established than the case where the movable accessory first effect is completed based on the establishment of one end opportunity (for example, first end opportunity). may be configured such that a game that is more disadvantageous to the player is executed when the first effect of the movable accessory is completed based on the above. Variation of the special symbol variation when the termination opportunity for ending the movable role first presentation of the character product presentation included in the variation presentation executed corresponding to the symbol variation is the first termination opportunity (elapsed time). It is preferable to extend the time (variation time set at 60 seconds) for a predetermined period (20 seconds). By configuring in this way, when the first end opportunity is established, the timing at which the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed can be delayed more than when the second end opportunity is established. It is possible to provide a player with a disadvantageous game of reducing the number of special symbol lotteries to be executed for winning. Therefore, when the movable accessory first effect is executed, the player is motivated to establish a specific end opportunity (second end opportunity) in order to suppress the execution of a disadvantageous game. can be made to play.
The game content for making the player play a game disadvantageous is not limited to this. During a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), benefits advantageous to the player (distribution of prize balls, notification of game contents in progress (notice of special symbol lottery result and set game state)) It may be configured to impose a game content that is not provided as a penalty.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2091(a), the effect contents of the additional effect executed during the movable accessory first effect period will be described. FIG. 2091(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the additional effect is executed during the period until the movable accessory 900 moves to the operating position in a state where the end condition of the movable accessory first effect is satisfied.
The pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example is configured to cause the player to perform a game act of pressing the frame button 22 in order to satisfy the end condition during the first rendering of the movable accessory. In order to satisfy the end condition, the execution condition of the additional performance can also be satisfied by the game act of having the player press the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 2091(a), the end condition is set by pressing the frame button 22 five times in two seconds, which is one mission period (one cycle operation period of the movable accessory 900). It shows a state in which the player hits the frame button 22 repeatedly and presses the frame button 22 seven times during the mission period during which the mission effect to be established is being executed.
As shown in FIG. 2091(a), the small display area Dm63a displays the characters "GO" indicating that the current mission period is in progress, and the small display area Dm63 indicates the remaining period of the mission period. A time gauge tg1 for is displayed. Specifically, the remaining time gauge tg1a occupies about 1/4 of the entire time gauge tg1, indicating that the remaining time of the mission period is 0.5 seconds.
Further, in the small display area Dm62, "7" is displayed in the number-of-presses display area Dm62a, and "5" is displayed in the required number-of-presses display area Dm62b. Here, the change process of the display mode accompanying an increase in the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the mission period will be described. The number of frame button presses executed during the mission period (the value displayed in the number of presses display area Dm62a) reaches the number of frame button presses required to accomplish the mission (the value displayed in the required number of presses display area Dm62b). Until then, the value displayed in the number-of-presses display area Dm62a is displayed in addition corresponding to the number of times the frame button has been pressed, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 prompts the user to further press the frame button 22. A display mode such as "Do your best" or "Just a little more" is displayed.
Then, when the number of frame button presses executed during the mission period reaches the number of frame button presses required for mission achievement, as shown in FIG. "Mission Accomplished" is displayed as a guidance mode for notifying of. Also, in the small display area Dm62, a display mode is displayed in which the value displayed in the number-of-presses display area Dm62a is equal to the value displayed in the number-of-presses required display area Dm62b.

After that, when the frame button 22 is further pressed to satisfy the conditions for executing the additional effect, the value displayed in the number-of-presses display area Dm62a is larger than the value displayed in the required number-of-presses display area Dm62b. is displayed, various display modes corresponding to the additional effect are displayed in the small display area Dm61, and a display mode for indicating that the additional effect is executed is displayed on the display surface of the main display area Dm. The pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example is configured so that the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied each time the frame button 22 is pressed while the end condition is satisfied during the mission period. In the state shown in (a), the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied twice.
Then, every time the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied, the effect mode of the additional effect is selected and displayed in the small display area Dm61. Incidentally, the effect mode of the additional effect is configured to be determined with reference to an additional effect selection table 222uub, which will be described later, and detailed description thereof will be given later. In the state shown in FIG. 2091(a), as the first additional effect mode corresponding to the first additional effect, an icon 913 imitating a weight of 10 kg is displayed on the tray 912, corresponding to the second additional effect. As a second additional effect mode, an icon 914 imitating a 1 kg weight is displayed on the receiving plate 912 .
This additional performance is a performance capable of suggesting to the player the performance mode of the second performance of the movable accessory to be executed later according to the selected performance mode and also suggesting the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. . Although details will be described later, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance being executed is a big hit, it is configured to make it easier to select a heavy weight than when it is a loss. In addition, a special mode (icon imitating "V") that can be selected only in the case of a big win is configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, by executing the additional effect, it is possible for the player to quickly detect the effect result of the variable effect being executed, so it is possible to quickly detect the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to make the player willingly play the game to establish the execution condition of the additional performance.
Further, as described above, the condition for executing the additional effect is configured to be satisfied only during the period from when the condition for ending the first effect of the movable accessory is satisfied during the period of one mission until the end of the mission period. Therefore, in order to satisfy many additional performance execution conditions, it is necessary to quickly satisfy the end condition of the movable accessory first performance. In other words, it is possible to vary the ease with which the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied depending on the situation in which the end condition for the first movable accessory effect is satisfied.

Then, when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position and completes the one-round motion while the additional effect is being executed, the end condition is satisfied, so the first movable accessory effect ends. , the movable accessory second effect is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 2091(b), description will be given of the effect content in a state where the movable accessory 900 has moved to the operating position while the additional effect is being executed. FIG. 2091(b) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the movable accessory 900 has moved to the operating position while the additional effect is being executed.
As shown in FIG. 2091(b), a display effect is executed in which the effect mode of the additional effect (various weights) moves to a display position where it appears to be placed on the movable accessory 900 located at the operating position. In the small display area Dm61, "Large chance of falling" is displayed as a guide mode for indicating that the falling effect will be executed as the second movable accessory effect. Also, the diagram shown in FIG. 2091(b) shows a state in which the mission period of the first production of the movable accessory has ended (during the holding period set at the end of each mission period of the first production of the movable accessory). Therefore, in the small display area Dm63, a time gauge tg1 indicating that there is no remaining period of the mission period is displayed. Specifically, the elapsed time gauge tg1b is displayed without displaying the remaining time gauge tg1a over the entire range of the time gauge tg1, thereby informing the player that there is no remaining period of the mission period. there is Also, in the small display area Dm63a, characters "FINISH" are displayed as a display mode to indicate that the current mission period is not over.
As described above, in the 61st control example, the action scenario (vibration scenario 64) corresponding to the movable accessory first effect executed as the accessory effect has ended (when the first end trigger is established). ), or when the action for one cycle is completed in a state where the end condition is established during the first production of the movable accessory (when the second end opportunity is established). is doing. Then, according to the termination trigger of the movable accessory first presentation, the performance mode of the accessory presentation after the movable accessory first presentation is completed can be changed, and furthermore, the second termination trigger is provided. When the first condition (the end condition that is satisfied based on the operation of the frame button 22) is satisfied, the additional effect can be executed.
That is, when the first condition for establishing the second end opportunity (the end condition that is established based on the operation of the frame button 22) is established, the first end opportunity is executed without establishing the first condition. It is configured such that a privilege (execution of additional performance), which is not granted when established, can be granted to the player during the execution period of the first performance of the movable accessory.

By configuring in this way, according to the type of end trigger established as the end trigger for ending the movable accessory first production, a privilege (movable accessory In addition to changing whether the second production is executed or not, various information contents provided during the second production of the movable role that has been executed), the benefits given during the first production period of the movable role (additional production Since the presence or absence of execution and the contents of various information provided during the additional performance can also be varied, the player can be more interested in the trigger for ending the first performance of the movable accessory.
Next, another example of the movable accessory second effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, as the movable accessory second presentation, in addition to the above-described falling presentation, a rise presentation for raising the movable accessory from the operating position can be executed. Here, the rising effect of the movable accessory 900 will be described as another example of the second movable accessory effect. FIG. 2092(a) is a diagram showing the effect contents of the additional effect when the rising effect, which is another example of the second movable accessory effect, is executed.
Although a detailed description will be given later, in the 61st control example, execution of the second movable accessory effect is determined when the end condition of the first movable accessory effect is satisfied, and the movable accessory is executed at that timing. It is configured such that the effect mode of the second effect is determined. That is, at the timing when the additional effect is executed, the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect to be executed later has already been determined. More specifically, according to the type of mission effect set when the first movable accessory effect is executed, the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect to be executed after the mission is achieved is determined. Configure.
By configuring in this way, the effect content of the movable accessory second effect to be executed later is notified to the player in advance by using the effect mode of the additional effect to be executed before the movable accessory second effect. can do. In the sixty-first control example, by determining the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect in association with the type of mission effect, the effect mode of the second effect of the additional effect is executed later. Although it is configured to be associated with the mode, it is not limited to this. It may be configured so that it can be determined after it is determined.

In FIG. 2092(a), an icon 915 resembling a balloon (third additional effect mode) is displayed in the small display area Dm61 as the effect mode of the additional effect. This icon 915 is configured to be displayed with a large bulge every time the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied. That is, in the additional effect (additional effect of displaying weights) described above with reference to FIG. By configuring so that the number of weights displayed in the small display area Dm61 and the number of executions of the additional performance match, the player can easily grasp the number of executions of the additional performance. However, in the additional effect shown in FIG. 2092(a), one icon 915 is displayed as an additional effect in the small display area Dm61 by first meeting the conditions for executing the additional effect, and then the additional effect is displayed. The icon 915 is displayed in an enlarged manner (display of an inflating balloon) each time the execution condition of is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the additional effect is executed when only the effect mode of the additional effect is grasped. It should be noted that, when the additional effect is executed in the mode shown in FIG. As the effect mode of the effect, the effect mode in which the icon 915 shrinks or the effect mode in which the icon 915 becomes too large and explodes may be set. By configuring in this way, the more the number of executions of the additional effects increases, the more advantageous the effect mode for the player (the icon 915 indicating the balloon becomes larger, and the rising effect is more likely to be executed as the second movable accessory effect). Since the presentation mode) is not set, it is possible to make the player more interested in the content of the additional presentation.
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 2092(a) and the mission period ends, the state shown in FIG. 2092(b) is reached. FIG. 2092(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the mission period has ended while an icon 915 resembling a balloon is displayed as an additional effect. As shown in FIG. 2092(b), the icon 915 displayed as the effect mode of the additional effect is displayed as if it is connected to the movable accessory 900, and the movable accessory to be executed later is displayed in the small display area Dm61. Characters of "Chance UP" are displayed as a display mode for suggesting that the second effect is the rising effect. Other various display elements are the same as those in FIG.
Then, when the rising effect is executed as the second effect of the movable accessory, as shown in FIG. , the characters "more hot than" are displayed. As a result, by combining the characters "chance" attached to the movable accessory 900 positioned above the second period display area Dm64 and the characters displayed in the second period display area Dm64, It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the situation is extremely hot.

In the lower part of the main display area Dm, a message "Extremely hot" is displayed to notify the player that the expectation for the big win is high at present. In addition, in this 61st control example, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, the "rising effect" is more likely to be executed as the second effect of the movable accessory than when it is lost. Configure. Also, the display mode displayed in the second period display area Dm64 during the rising effect is configured to be determined by referring to a second period display selection table 222uud described later, similarly to the falling effect described above.
In other words, it is possible for the player to predict the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery depending on the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the performance of the character object effect which is executed after the first effect of the movable character object ends.
<Regarding the flow of the character object movable effect (character object effect) in the 61st control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2094 and 2095, the flow of the character object movement effect (character object effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, when the role object movable effect is executed, the advance operation ( advance effect), then execute a predetermined vibration action (movable role first effect) a plurality of times (three times), and then execute a falling action or a rising action (movable role second effect), After that, it is configured to execute a retraction motion (retreat performance) to move to the storage position.
First, with reference to FIG. 2094, an example of the movable accessory effect (accessory effect) executed when the end condition is met during the first movable accessory effect will be described. FIG. 2094 is a diagram showing the flow of the movable accessory effect (accessory effect) when the falling effect is executed as the second movable accessory effect after the end condition is met during the first effect of the movable accessory. is.

As shown in FIG. 2094, when the character object movable effect (character object effect) is executed, first, the advancing effect is executed. During this advancing effect, the movable accessary 900 is controlled to move based on an action scenario defined in an advancing scenario table 222uuga, which will be described later. Specifically, by moving the movable accessory 900 located at the storage position (origin position) (see FIG. 2094(a)) downward for 1 second, it moves to the operating position (see FIG. 2094(e)). After executing the advance operation to position, the movement is controlled so as to maintain the state for one second.
Then, during the advance operation, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode (see FIG. 2088(a)) indicating that the character object movable effect (character object effect) has started, and then , in the state where the movable accessory 900 is held at the operating position for one second based on the action scenario defined in the advancing scenario table 222uuga, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows a vibration effect to be executed later. A display mode (see FIG. 2088(b)) for guiding the game content to the player is displayed.
Here, in the sixty-first control example, instead of switching the display mode to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 based on the elapsed time from the start of the movable role production, the movable role object 900 is displayed. It is configured to switch the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the operating situation. That is, during the advancing effect, the timing at which the action scenario for holding the movable accessory 900 at the operating position for one second among the action scenarios defined in the advancing scenario table 222uuga is executed, that is, the movable accessory 900 is executed. is determined to have reached the operating position, a display mode (see FIG. 2088(b)) for guiding the player to the game content during the vibration effect to be executed later is displayed. Configure.
By configuring in this way, when the action scenario is defined such that if normal, the movable role object 900 is positioned at the operating position one second after the start of the role object movable production (personal object production). Even so, the output signal (output pulse signal) for exciting the drive motor 905 and the rotation speed of the drive motor 905 may not be synchronized (step out), or the drive energy of the drive motor 905 may become movable. Even if the period until the movable accessory 900 actually reaches the operating position exceeds 1 second due to the occurrence of a situation where the transmission to the accessory 900 is not performed well, the movable accessory 900 Since various display modes can be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the operating conditions, it is possible to provide the player with a character object movable effect (character object effect) that does not cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, in the sixty-first control example, when an operation period longer than when the movable accessory 900 operates normally occurs, the display mode that has already been displayed is continued to be displayed. However, without being limited to this, as a display mode that is displayed only when a time lag occurs for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), for example, a delay in the effect occurs to the player, such as "Please wait for a while". It may be configured to display a display mode for indicating that the player is playing, or to display a display mode that shows information about the game that cannot normally be displayed, such as "This time's jackpot probability is 50%". may be configured.
By configuring in this way, a special display mode can be displayed only when a physical delay occurs in the movement control of the movable accessory 900. Therefore, normally, the game period that causes a problem can be shortened. Effectively used effects can be executed.
Returning to FIG. 2094, the description continues. When the advance effect of the character object movable effect (character object effect) is completed, next, the vibration effect based on the action scenario defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb is started. In the 61st control example, as the vibration effect, the movable accessory 900 located at the operating position is once moved downward to the vibration lower limit position (see FIG. 2094(g)), and then moved in the moving direction. to move upward until reaching the vibration upper limit position (see FIG. 2094 (c)), and then move downward toward the operating position (see FIG. 2094 (e)) One cycle of vibration The contents of the vibration scenario table 222uugb are defined so that the operation is executed three times.
Then, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the end condition of the vibration performance (movable accessory first performance) is satisfied each time the vibration operation of one cycle is completed. That is, in the 61st control example, unlike the 60th control example described above, when the movable role object 900 that has moved downward during the vibration production (movable role object first production) is positioned at the operating position, It is configured so that it is possible to determine whether the termination condition is satisfied only, and when the movable accessory 900 that has moved upward is positioned at the operating position, it is configured not to determine whether the termination condition is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, only when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position with specific movement contents during the vibration presentation, it is possible to shift to the next presentation (movable accessory second presentation). Since it is possible for the player to easily comprehend, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the series of flow of the character object movable effect (character object effect). In addition, in the 61st control example, by specifying the progress of the action scenario defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb, the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position by moving in a specific moving direction (downward). However, without being limited to this, a plurality of detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable accessory 900 are provided, and the moving direction of the movable accessory 900 can be physically specified. Alternatively, it may be possible to determine whether the end condition is established when it is determined that the movable accessory 900 has been positioned at the operating position by moving in a specific moving direction.
Further, by using the same configuration as in the 60th control example described above, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which it is possible to determine that the end condition is satisfied within one cycle, or to perform a character movement effect (character The timing at which it can be determined that the end condition is satisfied may be varied according to the type of performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the vibration production (movable role first production) ends, so that it is easy to provide the player with an unexpected production. can do.
Furthermore, in this case, depending on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, the timing at which it can be determined that the end condition is established may be varied, for example, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win. In this case, it is easy to determine that the termination condition is established at the timing when the vibration motion of the odd number period is completed, and when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is out, the vibration motion of the even number period is terminated. It may be configured such that it is easy to determine that the termination condition is satisfied at the timing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily predict the result of the special symbol lottery even by the timing when the vibration performance ends.
2089(a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the end condition is satisfied. After that, it becomes a period in which the display mode shown in FIG. 2091 can be displayed until one cycle of movable control is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2094, in the sixty-first control example, the movable accessory 900 moves downward and upward with a substantially uniform width around the operating position as the vibration mode of the movable accessory 900 in the vibration effect. The period used for one cycle is 2 seconds, and the period used for the vibration operation for half a cycle is 1 second.
In this way, as the vibrating motion of one cycle, the first half cycle and the second half cycle are different only in the moving direction of the movable accessory 900, and the moving distance and the moving speed are the same. On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to predict the period (2 seconds) used for one cycle of vibrating motion before the end of one cycle of vibrating motion. Therefore, by grasping the position of the movable accessory 900, the player can determine the remaining period from the time when the end condition is satisfied by pressing the frame button 22 during the vibration effect until the end of the vibration motion for one cycle. can be made easier to predict.
Note that the vibration mode of the movable accessory 900 that is executed during the vibration effect is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the vibration mode for movement can be set, or it may be configured such that vibration modes having three or more moving directions can be set. Further, the moving speed of the movable accessory 900 may be configured to be variable during the vibration effect. It may be configured to be faster than the moving speed when the object 900 is moved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period to be used for one cycle of vibrating motion before one cycle of vibrating motion ends.
When the end condition is met during the first period of the vibrating action in the vibration performance (movable accessory first performance) and the player continues to press the frame button 22 after that, the remaining period of the vibration performance is used. 2091 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. Then, when the vibrating action for one cycle is completed, it is determined that the end condition is established, and the vibrating performance (movable accessory first performance) ends without executing the vibrating motion for the remaining two cycles. Then, a falling effect is executed as the second effect of the movable accessory.

In this falling effect, a falling effect is executed in which the movable accessory 900 moves (falls) downward at twice the moving speed of the movable accessory 900 during the vibration effect. The falling action of the movable accessory 900 corresponding to this falling effect is executed based on the action scenario defined in the falling scenario table 222uugc. Details of the fall scenario table 222uugc will be described later with reference to FIG. 2109(b).
When the falling effect is executed, the movable accessory 900 is maintained at the falling position for about 3 seconds after the falling operation for about 0.5 seconds. Then, a display mode corresponding to the falling effect is displayed (see FIG. 2089(b)). As for the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the falling effect, it is relatively easy to set a different display mode according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player can easily visually recognize the display mode. Therefore, the sustain period is configured to be 3 seconds.
After that, when the drop effect is completed, a retraction operation is executed (about 2 seconds) to retract the movable accessory 900 positioned at the drop position toward the origin position (see FIG. 2094(a)). This evacuation operation is executed based on the operation scenario defined in the evacuation scenario table 222uc. In addition, in the sixty-first control example, the operation period for returning the movable accessory 900 to the origin position (storage position) is also used as the performance period, and the period during which the movable accessory 900 is performing the retraction operation is used. 2090(a), a retreat effect is executed in which the display mode shown in FIG. 2090(a) is displayed.
By configuring in this way, normally, the operation period in which the movable accessory 900 used for the production is returned to the initial position after the production is completed, that is, the operation period in which the production effect is low can be used as the production. Since it can be used as a part, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance using the movable accessory 900 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 2095, a description will be given of the flow in the case where the end condition is not established during the vibration performance (first movable role performance) executed during the movable role performance (personal product performance). . FIG. 2095 is a diagram showing the flow of the movable accessory effect (accessory effect) when the end condition is not satisfied during the vibration effect (movable accessory first effect). The description of the same parts as those described above with reference to FIG. 2094 will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 2095, when the end condition is not satisfied during the vibration production (movable accessory first production), the vibration action for three cycles specified in the vibration scenario table 222uugb is executed, and then the movable The character second production is executed. The diagram shown in FIG. 2095 shows the flow when the upward effect (UP effect) for raising the movable accessory 900 from the operating position is executed as the effect mode of the movable accessory second effect.
During the rising effect, the movable accessory 900 performs a rising action of moving upward based on the action scenario defined in the rising scenario table 222uugd. In this ascending motion, movable control is executed to move the movable accessory 900 at half the moving speed of the movable accessory 900 during the vibration effect. That is, the movable accessory 900 moves at a speed about 1/4 of the falling motion described above. Here, in the 61st control example, the movement distance of the movable accessory 900 in the falling motion that can be executed as the movable accessory second effect is about 12 cm, and the movable accessory 900 moves in the rising motion. It is configured so that the moving distance is about 3 cm.
In other words, the period required for the movable accessory 900 to move from the operating position to the falling position when the falling action is performed, and the period required for the movable accessory 900 to move from the operating position to the raised position when the rising action is performed. It is configured so that the required period and are the same.

With this configuration, the rendering period of the movable accessory second rendering is the same regardless of which rendering mode (falling rendering, ascending rendering) is set as the rendering mode of the movable accessory second rendering. It is configured to be By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily unify the effect period of the character effect, so that it is possible to easily reduce the processing load for executing the character effect.
Then, when the ascending effect is executed, similarly to the falling effect described above, a maintenance period is set in which the movable accessory 900 is maintained at the ascending position for 3 seconds, during which the third symbol is displayed. A display mode corresponding to the rising effect is displayed on the display surface of the device 81 (see FIG. 2093). After that, the retreat effect is executed, and the character object effect (the character object movable effect) ends.
In the 61st control example, as in the 60th control example described above, the evacuation scenario table 222uc is used to execute the evacuation operation. The evacuation scenario table 222uc defines an action scenario for moving the movable accessory 900 to the origin position. In other words, the movable accessory 900 can be retracted using the same scenario table regardless of the position of the movable accessory 900 when the retraction operation is started.
<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 61st control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 2096, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 2096 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.
In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.
In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 2097, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 2097 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .
In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 2097, the normal pattern used when selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol variation executed in the period from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result. It also has a symbol variation type counter (CS2).
Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 2113), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 2124). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203uua corresponding to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding area). to the fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uub corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided. Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special In the symbol holding ball storage area 203uub, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. Each value of is stored.
Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uua, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uub Of the various values stored in the holding first area, the special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area, and the various values stored Special symbol variation based on is started.
In addition, in this 61st control example, the type of special design uses the configuration of two types (first special design, second special design), but without being limited to this, even if the type of special design is one type good. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, as in the 61st control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), in which case each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uua, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uub) It may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example is in a state where the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uua and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uub store (store) various values, that is, the In the state of having 1 special design reserved memory (special design 1 reservation) and 2nd special design reservation memory (special design 2 reservation), special design 2 reservation is given priority over special design 1 reservation. It is configured to move to the special symbol holding ball execution area. In other words, the special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol (special symbol 2 lottery) is preferentially executed over the special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol (special symbol 1 lottery). However, without being limited to this, the special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol (special symbol 1 lottery) is preferentially executed over the special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol (special symbol 2 lottery). It may be configured (so-called special figure 1 priority variation), or may be configured to execute a special symbol lottery in the order in which various values are stored (so-called winning order variation).
In addition, in the 61st control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a loss, but without being limited to this, for example, some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss , it may be constructed so that the player can win a small prize that can be awarded to the player with a smaller benefit than when the big win is won (privilege different from when the big win is won). With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.
In addition, in the case that a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. Alternatively, for example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. It may be configured such that when a small win is won, the small win game is executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small win, and the game state is not shifted even after the end of the small win game. Further, even if the game state is shifted to the normal state based on the winning of the small prize, it is configured not to shift to a different game state based on the end of the small prize game. can be

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.
Furthermore, the RAM 203 of the 61st control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.
Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2097, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 2113) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 2124).
The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this 61st control example), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uub of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uua. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202uua stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. 202uua, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot when it coincides with the value of the random number set to be a jackpot.
A detailed explanation will be given later, but when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game that makes it easier to win more prize balls than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed is performed. be started. As described above, the condition for starting the jackpot game may be the first condition that is satisfied when the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed, or the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed. After that, the start condition may be established when the game ball is passed through a predetermined start area (through gate 67). By constructing in this way, even when a special pattern (jackpot pattern) indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress the start of a jackpot game due to the lapse of time. Therefore, since the player can interrupt the game in a state where the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, the state where the jackpot is easily won by the special symbol lottery (for example, the probability variable state is continuous through the jackpot game) Even if the state set as a result of the game continues for a long time, the period during which the player can take a break from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game is defined. can be provided with certainty.
In this case, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, when the game is played in a game method (right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player during the variable probability state, the game ball that is shot can flow down. When a predetermined start area (through gate 67) is provided in a specific game area (right area of the variable display unit 80), the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to a special symbol indicating a big win. It is preferable that the start condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the through gate 67 after a predetermined time (eg, 5 seconds) has passed since the third symbol (eg, "777") is stopped and displayed. .

By configuring in this way, the game ball that has been shot in the right-handed game before the third symbol corresponding to the winning of the big win is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 wins the big win. After the corresponding third pattern is stop-displayed, it passes through the through gate 67 and the start condition is satisfied, so that the players are trying to take a break without executing the jackpot game after the big-win pattern is stop-displayed. In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the start of the jackpot game.
In addition, after the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not started due to the passage of time. ), in a pachinko machine 10 configured to start a jackpot game by passing a game ball through the third pattern display device 81, while the third pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It is preferable to perform a guidance display performance for guiding the player to a game in which the game ball passes through a predetermined start area (through gate 67). By constructing in this way, the player can easily grasp that the state in which the big winning game is not executed is not abnormal despite the stop display of the special symbol and the third symbol indicating that the big winning has been won. can be done.
Here, referring to FIG. 2099, the first winning random number table 202uua will be described. FIG. 2099 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202uua. This first winning random number table 202uua is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) for determining a big winning in a special symbol lottery are defined.
Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202uua, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined differently according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 2099, for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, "0 to 4" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values (“5 to 999”) are defined as outlier judgment values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 19" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "20 to 999") is defined as the deviation determination value. That is, since the update range of the first winning random number table 202uua is 1000 of "0 to 999", the probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000). Thus, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In addition, in the 61st control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state. It may be constructed so as to be probabilities, or it may be constructed so that three or more types of jackpot probabilities are set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.
In addition, in this 61st control example, two types of lottery results, "big hit" and "loss", are determined as the lottery results of the special symbols. As a result, it may be possible to determine a "minor win" as one type of "loss". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.
As described above, when the configuration is such that a "small win" can be won as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202uua. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.
The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 2113) executed by the main controller 110 in this 61st control example), and the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 into the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203uua of the RAM 203, and enters the second ball entrance 640 into the second special symbol reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. 203uub.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 61st control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. In this control example, the obtained value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202uub to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first win type selection table 202uub will be described with reference to FIG. 2100(a).
FIG. 2100(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202uub. As described above, the first hit type selection table 202uub is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol or the lottery for the second special symbol. Different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.
Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0", as the jackpot type A "jackpot A" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot A" is one, so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 1% (1/100).

The value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range “0 to 99”) is defined in association with “jackpot B” as the jackpot type with respect to the range of “1”. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot B" is one, so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 1% (1/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "2 to 99". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds, and the jackpot game is usually executed. is a jackpot type in which "0" is set.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 98 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C" is 98% (98/100).

That is, among the three types of jackpot types that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, two jackpot types (jackpot B, jackpot C) have the same number of rounds of jackpot games, but jackpot games. The easiness of passing the game ball to a specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 is different, and the "jackpot B" is more during the jackpot game than the "jackpot C". It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific area. Therefore, the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot C".
Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set and when the jackpot type "jackpot B" is set, the variable winning device 65 is in the open state in the first round of the jackpot game. The switching control of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 2087 (a)) is executed so that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 during the period can pass through the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3), and the jackpot type When "jackpot C" is set, the switching member 65h (Fig. 2087 (a )) is configured to execute switching control.
In other words, in the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B", the ease of passage of the game ball that has entered the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game to the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) is the same. It is configured, and only "jackpot C" is easy to pass through the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) of the game ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game compared to other jackpot types. configured to be low.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, by changing the switching control contents of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 2087 (a)) executed during the jackpot game, the specific area (variable probability switch) during the jackpot game 65e3), but not limited to this, the switching member 65h (see FIG. 2087(a)) executed after the start of the jackpot game. The timing at which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened may be varied according to the type of jackpot without changing the switching control contents. Even when configured in this manner, the switching member 65h (see FIG. 2087 (a)) is positioned at a position (see FIG. 2087 (a)) where it is easy to guide the game ball to the specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) By varying the easiness of the game ball entering the variable winning device 65 in the state of being stuck, the easiness of the game ball passing through the specific area (variability switch 65e3) during the jackpot game is varied. can be done.

As described above, in the 61st control example, when a normal game (right-handed game) is executed during a jackpot game in which "jackpot C" is set, the game ball that has won the variable prize winning device 65 is specified. It is configured not to pass through the area (variable probability switch 65e3), and when the game ball passes through the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) during the jackpot game of "jackpot C", an abnormal state (switching of the switching member 65h It is determined that there is an abnormality in the control, the switching member 65h is damaged, a game ball exists in the variable winning device 65 at a timing that cannot exist in a normal state, etc.) , error notification is executed.
Although detailed explanation is omitted, when this error notification is executed, after the jackpot game being executed is executed to the end, the value of the time reduction counter 203uur is set to "0" after the jackpot game is finished, and the probability variation counter 203uus. is set to "0". That is, when "jackpot C" is set, the case where the game ball is not passed through the specific area is more advantageous to the player after the jackpot game than the case where the game ball is passed through the specific area. game state can be set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to impose a penalty on a player who tries to pass a game ball through a specific area by performing cheating during a jackpot game. In addition, the processing when the game ball passes through the specific area while the "jackpot C" jackpot game is being executed is not limited to the above-described process. It may be configured so that the jackpot game is interrupted and the game cannot be continued at the time when the jackpot game is played, or when the game ball is passed through the specific area in another jackpot type only by executing the error notification. You may comprise so that the value same as may be set to the value of time reduction counter 203uur, and the value of probability variation counter 203uur.
In addition, in this 61st control example, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which a game ball can pass through a specific area during a jackpot game and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area, according to the jackpot type. , when a jackpot game (jackpot A, jackpot B) capable of passing through the specific area is executed, the ease with which the game ball passes through the specific area becomes the same (if the game is played normally, pass almost 100%), but without being limited to this, a right-handed game (normal game) is executed to enter the game ball into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. In some cases, it may be possible to set a jackpot type that differs in the ease with which a game ball passes through a specific area. %) and a jackpot game with a second probability (50%) lower than the first probability.

By configuring in this way, according to the result of the game during the jackpot game, it is possible to change the ratio of setting the game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is over. For the player who is playing the game, it is possible to play a game aiming to pass the game ball through a specific area by overlapping the timing with the game aiming to win a lot of prize balls. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.
Next, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", and "jackpot A" is defined as the jackpot type. there is This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special winning type counter C2, 25 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A", so in the lottery of the second special symbol In the case of a big win, the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 25% (25/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 41". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 17 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 17% (17/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "42 to 51". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.
Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot D" is 10% (10/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "52 to 68". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 17 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot E" is 17% (17/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot F" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "69 to 82". This "jackpot F" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 14 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot F", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot F" is 14% (14/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot G" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "83 to 90". This "jackpot G" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203uus is set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, there are 8 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot G", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot G" is 8% (8/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot H" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "91 to 97". This "jackpot H" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.
Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot H" is 7, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot H" is 7% (7/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot I" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "98". This "jackpot I" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the time reduction counter 203uur is set after the jackpot game ends. "100" is set to the value, and "0" is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203uus after the end of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot I" is one, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot I" is 1% (1/100).
Further, as shown in FIG. 2100(a), "jackpot J" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "99". This "jackpot J" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 9 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "120" is set. In addition, if the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203uus is set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value.
Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot J" is one, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining the "jackpot J" is 1% (1/100).
That is, nine types of jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F, jackpot G, jackpot H, jackpot I, jackpot J) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are: In both cases, variable probability jackpot games are executed, but the number of rounds of the jackpot games is made different, and "jackpot A" in which the most round games are executed is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and "jackpot D". ” is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed, so the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 2% than the first special symbol lottery. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes an advantageous jackpot type.
Returning to FIG. 2097, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 and the fine pattern variation mode (variation effect mode) is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 2124), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202uuc (see FIG. 2101) referred to when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation based on the value (random value) of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the main controller 110 is provided in the ROM 202 of the
Here, with reference to FIG. 2101, the variation pattern selection table 202uuc will be described. As shown in FIG. 2101(a), this variation pattern selection table 202uuc includes a large winning variation pattern table 202uuc1 (see FIG. 2101(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202uuc2 (see FIG. 2101(c)). ) and (probability variation/time reduction) variation pattern table 202uuc3 (see FIG. 2101(d)) are defined at least.
First, with reference to FIG. 2101(b), the variation pattern table 202uuc1 for big hits will be described. FIG. 2101(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202uuc1. The large winning variation pattern table 202uuc1 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. Each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1 in the big hit variation pattern table 202uuc1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202uuc1.
FIG. 2101(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202uuc2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202uuc2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).
Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. The determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as "0 to 98" for a short deviation (7 seconds) and "99 to 198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).
In addition, for the outlier reach, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" Normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range, "150 to 197" out of range Super reach (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost, the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 Based on this, the stop type (complete outage, reach outage) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determined stop type is stored in the outage (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202uuc2 using the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Selected by reference.
FIG. 2101(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202uuc3 for the deviation (probability variation/time reduction). This deviation (probability variation / time reduction) variation pattern table 202uuc3 defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out in the probability variation state and time reduction state of the special symbol. This is a data table with In this outlier (probability variable/shorter time) variation pattern table 202uuc3, the value of the defined variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202uuc2.
As described above, when the gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", reach out (front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach) is determined.
In this way, in the state in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set more than the normal state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out, the rate of outlier reach being selected as the stop type is set low. ing. In addition, it is configured such that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected when "complete failure" is selected as the stop type than when "reach failure" is selected.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the deviation becomes longer during the variable probability state or the time saving state, and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, the game state (time saving state, probability variable state) more advantageous to the player than the normal state, specifically, by setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 In a game state in which it is easy to enter a ball, the number of executions per unit time of the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) can be easily increased, so the game efficiency can be enhanced.
Returning to FIG. 2097, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this 61st control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is periodically updated every time the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 2113), and the game ball is normally started. It is acquired based on detection of passage through the mouth (through gate) 67 and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 uuc of the RAM 203 .
Then, the value of the random number that becomes a winning pattern is defined by the second winning random number table 202uud stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is determined by the second winning random number table 202uud. If it matches the value of the random number that will be a hit defined in , it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202uud is divided into two types, one for low probability of normal symbols and one for high probability of winning normal symbols from the low probability, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.
The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202uud will be described with reference to FIG. 2100(b). FIG. 2100(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202uud. As shown in FIG. 2100(b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined as "0 to 2" for the normal design hit, and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined to be in the range of "0 to 149".

That is, in the 61st control example, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in this control example in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal game, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal game to be executed during the normal state and the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.
In addition, in this 61st control example, it is configured such that the variation time of different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state. A longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the normal pattern low probability state is set than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation according to the game state, winning in the normal symbol lottery and entering the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to easily set a game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.
Furthermore, in the 61st control example, when winning is won in the normal symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, a plurality of balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640. It is configured to be able to execute a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in an operation mode (long opening) that can be performed. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so any game state is possible. Even in the set state, the possibility of execution of the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.
The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 2113). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 2124).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.
Returning to FIG. 2096, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 2098(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 61st control example will be described. FIG. 2098(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example.
As shown in FIG. 2098(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example includes a first winning random number table 202uua, a first winning type selection table 202uub, a variation pattern selection table 202uuc, a 2 has at least a random number table 202uud. In addition, the first winning random number table 202uua, the first winning type selection table 202uub, the variation pattern selection table 202uuc, and the second winning random number table 202uud were described above when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. omitted.
Returning to FIG. 2096, the description continues. The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .
When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 2124) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 2123) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 2122) is immediately executed as power failure processing.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2098(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203 uue, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 uuf, probability variable setting flag 203 uuh, probability variable passage counter 203 uui, prize number counter 203 uuj, operation counter 203 uuk, notification counter 203 uul, remaining ball timer flag 203 uum, remaining ball timer 203 uun , probability variable effective flag 203uuo, probability variable effective timer 203uup, discharge number counter 203uuq, time reduction counter 203uur, probability variable counter 203uus, jackpot middle flag 203uut, jackpot start flag 203uuu, game state storage area 203uuv, and other memory area 203z. .
Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained based on winning the first ball entrance 64 are stored. be.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.
After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua are executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.
When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.
The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second ball entrance 640 are stored. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.
More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting opening (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to the reserved fourth area) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.
After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.
In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is a variable display (first It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the three-symbol display device 81 . The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S604L in FIG. 2118). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S211L in FIG. 2114).
The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S212L in FIG. 2114, FIG. 2118 S605L). That is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is changed.
The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud, the variation reserved by the main controller 110 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223uub of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual holding ball of variable display that is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.
In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640 and are reserved is stored. Since they are different, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.
The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the normal starting port (through gate) 67. ) up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is set to zero. (See S904L in FIG. 2121). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S805L in FIG. 2120).
When the game ball passes through the normal starting port (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf (the number of times M of change display in the normal symbol is reserved) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc (S905L in FIG. 2121). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is 4, a new normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc Nothing is stored (S903L in FIG. 2121: No).
The variable probability setting flag 203uuh is a flag indicating that the setting condition of the variable probability state is established during the jackpot game. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, whether or not the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game is determined according to whether or not the set condition is satisfied during the big win game. ing. In other words, regardless of which jackpot type is set for the winning jackpot, the setting condition can be set during the jackpot game, and the setting conditions can be set during the jackpot game according to the jackpot type. It is configured so that the ease with which the set conditions are satisfied is made different.

Therefore, in this 61st control example, the fact that the set condition is established during the jackpot game is temporarily stored using the variable probability setting flag 203uuh, and the jackpot end processing (Fig. 2127 S1313L reference) determines the setting status of the probability variation setting flag 203uuh (see S1501L of FIG. 2127), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203uuh is set to ON (S1501L of FIG. 2127: Yes), the probability variation In order to set the state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), set "120" to the value of the probability variation counter 203uus (S1502L), set "120" to the value of the time saving counter 203uur ( S1503L).
On the other hand, in the process of S1501L, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203uuh is not set to ON (S1501L: No), since it is a gaming situation in which the setting conditions are not established during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203uur in order to set the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) (S1506L).
Here, the details of the setting conditions that can be established during the jackpot game will be described. Concretely, the setting condition is established when the game ball passes through the specific area (probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 2087 (a)) during the jackpot game. When the game ball passes through this probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation Setting flag 203uuh is set to ON (S1622L of Figure 2129).On the other hand, this probability variation setting flag 203uuh is set to OFF after the probability variation state is set.In addition, this probability variation setting flag 203uuh is when the power is turned off It is backed up and set to the state immediately before the power was turned off at the time of recovery (when the power is turned on), and is set to off in the initialized state.
Incidentally, when the probability variation setting flag 203uuh is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability variation setting flag 203uuh may be formally set to ON and returned. In this case, whether the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203uui, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement center side by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203uuh to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203uui is for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the 61st control example, the first round of the jackpots A, B, D to J). is a counter of It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the variable prize winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203uui and the discharge number counter 203uuq described later. This probability variation passage counter 203uui is updated by adding 1 each time the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1621L in FIG. 2129). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1661L in FIG. 2130). It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203uui is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.
The winning number counter 203uuj is for counting the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of gaming balls that have entered the variable winning device 65). is a counter. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 2087) provided in the variable winning device 65, 1 is added and updated (S1613L in FIG. 2129). . On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203uuj) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203uuq and the probability variable passing counter 203uui) are the same. After determining whether they match (S1657L in FIG. 2130), the initial value is reset to “0” (S1661L in FIG. 2130). Note that the value of the winning number counter 203uuj is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.
The operation counter 203uuk is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, in the variable probability jackpot types (jackpots A, B, D to J) in which the variable probability state is likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 5 seconds based on the start of the second round. In the normal jackpot type (jackpot C) which is set to ON and the variable probability state is hard to be set after the jackpot game ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the second round.
Then, in the operation counter 203uuk, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 2 rounds corresponding to the variable probability jackpot type, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds as start data for 2 rounds is set to correspond to the normal jackpot type. A corresponding counter value is set (S1401L in FIG. 2126). On the other hand, in the process of S1619L of the prize winning process executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110 (see S1315L in FIG. 2129), 1 is subtracted and updated. In addition, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203uuk is 0 (S1624L in FIG. 2129: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1625L), and the variable probability effective flag 203uuo is set to ON. (S1626L). The operation counter 203uuk is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203uuk and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203uul is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this 61st control example, the sound "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In the 61st control example, the end timing of the second round (when the end condition is established by winning 10 game balls to the variable winning device 65 during one round game, or when the round game is started) The notification counter 203uul corresponding to 1 second is set when the end condition is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the operation. This notification counter 203uul is decremented by one and updated by the processing of S1604L of the notification processing of main controller 110 (see S1314L in FIG. 2128). When the notification counter 203uul becomes 0, the notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the processing for outputting the sound described above.
With this configuration, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the second round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. In the second round, the flow path solenoid 65k is activated, and when the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to make the player continue to expect that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, a notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 2087 (a)). A performance is running. However, when the second round is over, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so the player is notified by voice to keep an eye on the third symbol display device 81 during the interval display. A notification effect is executed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display contents after the interval effect is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.
In this 61st control example, the third symbol display device 81 is notified to be shown, thereby diverting the player's attention away from the switching member 65h. The movement of the switching member 65h may be reported so as to be hidden by the player's hand by notifying that the variable winning device 65 is covered with the player's hand. Also, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the decorative lamp 34 may be notified to the player to look at, thereby diverting the player's attention. Furthermore, during the second round, a two-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to alert the player to read it with a mobile phone, thereby diverting the player's attention. In the 61st control example, the maximum time (five seconds from the start of the second round) until the action of the switching member 65h ends is set for the distraction effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that a player discriminates whether a jackpot game in which the variable probability jackpot type is set or a jackpot game in which the normal jackpot type is set is being executed by the notification time.
The remaining ball timer flag 203uum is a flag for indicating that the condition for determining the discharge state of the game balls (remaining balls) remaining in the closed variable prize winning device 65 is met. After the round game is completed and the open/close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed (closed control is executed), it is set to ON (see S1617L in FIG. 2129). By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203uum to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203uum to ON, the remaining ball timer 203uun, which will be described later, is updated by being incremented by one (see S1265L in FIG. 2130).

The remaining ball timer 203uun is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the open/close door 65f1 is closed, and the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged (ball handling time) has elapsed. This is a counter that is referred to when determining whether or not
In the 61st control example, it is configured so that the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged from the variable winning device 65 is 2 seconds. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203uun. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203uun becomes a value corresponding to the upper limit value (3 seconds in this 61st control example), the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. A determination is made as to whether or not there is (S1657L in FIG. 2130). If it is determined that they do not match (S1657L in FIG. 2130: No), an error command is set (S1658L) and notified to the outside.
Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, the game ball is illegally left in the variable prize winning device 65, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of the second round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and the big hit is B. Also, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the variable winning device 65 wins when a predetermined period (3 seconds) longer than the ball handling period (2 seconds) has passed since the round game was completed. By determining whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65, it is possible to determine whether or not the game balls remain in the variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加However, another method may be used to achieve the same purpose. For example, it is possible to constantly monitor whether the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged game balls match. A special flag is set to ON when it is determined that they do not match, and when the continuation period for which the flag is set to ON exceeds a fixed period, the game ball is placed in the variable winning device 65. may be determined as remaining, or it may be determined that game balls remain in the variable winning device 65 when the difference between the winning number and the discharged number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Even if it is configured in this way, it is possible to prevent the probability variable gaming state from being illegally given.

Probability variation effective flag 203uuo is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203uuo is set to ON, based on the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 2087 (a)) the probability variable switch 65e3 indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through the That is, the period in which the variable probability effective flag 203uuo is on indicates that the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during a normal period.
The variable probability effective timer 203uup is a timer for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203uuo described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203uup, it is possible to determine (measure) the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In the 61st control example, it takes 1 second for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203uup is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.
As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the game ball is played with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the ball to pass through or misdetecting the passage of the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.
The discharge number counter 203uuq is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 2087(a)) in one round. This ejection number counter 203uuq is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 65 and the ejection number are determined (S1661L in FIG. 2130).

The time saving counter 203uur is a counter for measuring the number of executable special symbol variations (remaining number of variations) until the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) ends. This time reduction counter 203uur is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag 203uuh is off at the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the variable probability setting flag 203uuh is ON at the end of the jackpot game, 120 is set. That is, in the 61st control example, when the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state of 100 times is set. In addition, when the variable probability state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set for the same period (120 times of special symbol fluctuation) as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues.
The probability variation counter 203uus is a counter for measuring the executable special symbol variation frequency (remaining variation frequency) until the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol ends. This variable probability counter 203uus is set to 120 when the variable probability setting flag is ON at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the 61st control example, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state of 120 times is set.
The jackpot flag 203uut is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203uut is ON, it means that the big winning game is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the big winning game is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203uut is set to ON when a jackpot is won by special symbol lottery and a jackpot game (special game state) is started (see S1303L in FIG. 2125). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (special game state) (see S1505L in FIG. 2127). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 2114), this jackpot in progress flag 203uut is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S201L in FIG. 2114).
The jackpot start flag 203uuu is a flag indicating whether or not to start the jackpot. If the big win start flag 203uuu is on, it means that the conditions for starting the big win are satisfied, and if it is off, it means that the conditions for starting the big win are not satisfied. This jackpot start flag 203uuu is set to ON when the end timing of the variable display indicating jackpot winning is reached, that is, when the special symbol indicating jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (S218L in FIG. 2114). Also, the jackpot start flag 203uuu is set to OFF when the start of the jackpot game is set (see S1303 in FIG. 2125).

The game state storage area 203uuv is a storage area in which information for indicating the set game state is stored. Information specifying that it is one of the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203uur is "0" and the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is "0", information (game state information ) is stored, the value of the time saving counter 203uur is “1 or more”, and the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is “0”, information for indicating that the current game state is a time saving state (game state information) is stored, the value of the time saving counter 203uur is "1 or more", and the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is "1 or more", information for indicating that the current gaming state is a probability variation state ( game state information) is stored.
In addition, in this game state storage area 203uuv, there are information indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, information indicating that a special symbol variation is being performed, and information indicating that a special symbol variation is not being performed. Information indicating is also configured to be storable.
Then, when the information stored in the game state storage area 203uuv is updated, for example, when the game state is switched, a command (state command) for indicating the newly stored information (game state information) is set. and output to the audio lamp control device 113 . By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 side to immediately grasp that the game state has been switched.
Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the 61st control example, in addition to the currently set game state and the information for indicating the current game situation, the game state storage area 203uuv includes information set in the past. Information indicating the game state can also be stored. That is, by reading the information stored in the game state storage area 203uuv, it is possible to specify how the game state has changed. Further, the information for indicating the process of transition of the game state can also be output to the sound lamp control device 113 .

By configuring in this way, when the state command for indicating that the normal state is set is received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, whether the probability variable state is ended and the normal state is set, or the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, it is possible to execute a different mode of presentation.
The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.
Returning to FIG. 2096, the description continues. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.
The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .
The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .
The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (speaker 308, etc.) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable effects (variable display ) and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the advance notice effect. In addition, as in the 60th control example described above, control of the drive motor 905 for operating the movable accessory 900 for production, detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable accessory 900 (origin position sensor 920, operation It is configured to be able to receive the detection result of the position sensor 930). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.
As shown in FIG. 2096, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 225 includes main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22A (effect button (frame button) 22, selection button 600), drive motor 905, an origin position sensor 920 and an operating position sensor 930 are connected.

The drive motor 905 described above is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation A command that can specify the number of steps and the direction of motion (rotation) is output. The motor operation command output from the audio lamp control device 113 is set by referring to the contents defined in the operation scenario table group 222uug stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 .
The mechanism for operating the movable accessory 900 using the stepping motor is the same as in the 60th control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input signals from the frame button 22 and the selection button 600, and when the player operates the frame button 22 and the selection button 600, the third symbol display device 81 displays. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage to be played or to change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .
When the frame button 22 or the selection button 600 is operated by the player, a character object driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character object for production (not shown), or the frame button 22 or the selection button is operated. 600 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content to the audio output device 226, or to light the lamp display device 227 in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 or the selection button 600. It may also be configured to set a lamp output command for causing it to be turned on.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.
The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.
Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 61st control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 2102, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 contains a variable effect pattern selection table 222uua, a mission selection table 222uub, an additional effect selection table 222uuc, a second period display selection table 222uud, and a retreat mode. At least a selection table 222uue, a second control execution selection table 222uuf, and an operation scenario table group 222uug are stored (stored).
The variable effect pattern selection table 222uua defines different variable effect patterns corresponding to the variable pattern received from the main control device 110 and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf. In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment result, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf, a detailed variation pattern can be selected. ing. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2104(a), the contents defined in the variable effect pattern selection table 222uua will be described. FIG. 2104(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the variable effect pattern selection table 222uua. As shown in FIG. 2104(a), the variation effect pattern selection table 222uua includes the current game state, the win/loss determination result (special symbol lottery result) included in the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern, and the acquired Different types of variable effect patterns are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter 223uuf.
Specifically, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the success/failure determination result is "hit", and the variation pattern is "normal reach (30 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf "Various normal effects" are defined in the entire range of "0 to 198". Although detailed contents are omitted, in the "various normal effects", as a variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the ready-to-win state (out of the three varying third symbols, After two third patterns are stop-displayed in a combination indicating winning of the jackpot, and one other third pattern fluctuates), the other one third pattern indicates winning of the jackpot in a short period of time. A variable effect that is stopped and displayed in the display mode is defined, and different effects are defined according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf.
In addition, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/fail judgment result is "hit", and the variation pattern is "super reach (60 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is " ``Various super ready-to-win effects'' are defined in the range of 0 to 119, and ``Various character super effects'' are defined in the range of ``120 to 198''.
Here, in the "various super ready-to-win effects", as a variable effect to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, after entering the ready-to-win state, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal effect. After a high-expectation performance (for example, a performance in which a specific character performs an action rather than simply displaying the third pattern in a variable manner) for notifying the player is executed, the third symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. A variable effect in which the symbols are stopped and displayed is specified, and different effect modes are specified according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf.

In addition, in the "various role super effects", a variable effect including a role product effect using the movable accessory 900 is defined, and different effect modes are defined according to the value of the first effect counter 223uuf obtained. ing. When this "various character super performance" is selected, after 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation, the maximum 20 seconds of character performance is executed, and then the ready-to-win state is reached. A performance is performed.
In addition, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/loss determination result is "hit", and the variation pattern is "special reach (90 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is ""Various special reach effects" are defined in the range of "0 to 189", and "Various role special effects" are defined in the range of "190 to 198".
Here, in the ``various special ready-to-win effects'', as a variable effect to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot after reaching the ready-to-win state is higher than the super ready-to-win effect. After the execution of the highest expectation effect for notifying the player of the above, a variable effect is defined in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf Different presentation modes are defined according to.
Also, when "various role special effects" is selected, the same role effects are executed using the same effect period (up to 20 seconds) as the above-described "various role super effects". A variable effect is stipulated in which a ready-to-win state is entered after the game is played, and the highest-expectation-level effect is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the case where the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is winning (jackpot winning) is more likely than the case of losing. Since it is configured to make it easier to select a variation pattern with a long variation time, the variation performance (for example, special reach performance) executed in response to a long variation time (variation pattern) has a shorter variation time. The degree of expectation for a big hit can be made higher than the variable performance (for example, normal performance) executed corresponding to (variation pattern).
Therefore, even when the special pattern variation with the long variation time selected is performed, the variation performance with high expectation for the big win can be performed, so that the variation performance corresponding to the long variation time is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, when the "super character effect" is selected and when the "special character effect" is selected, the variable effect is started and then the character effect is started. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the variable performance being executed this time is the ``super role performance'' or the ``special role performance'' until the end of .
Specifically, the timing at which the character effect is started is set to be the same and the same operation is performed regardless of whether the "special character effect" is selected or the "special character effect" is selected. It is configured to operate the movable accessory 900 using a scenario. Therefore, while the role production using the movable role 900 is being executed, the variable production being executed this time is the "super role production" corresponding to the variable time of 60 seconds, or the variable time of 90 seconds. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not it is the "accessory special effect" corresponding to , and to suppress the deterioration of the effect of the effect.

In addition, based on the result of the player pressing the frame button 22 during the period during which the character effect is being executed, the length of the effect period of the character effect and the number displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is not the type of the variation performance pattern, but the special symbol variation being executed is the jackpot variation. It is configured to be able to display a display mode that can suggest whether.
In this 61st control example, by unifying the execution timing of the role production and the action scenario to be set, the player can grasp the variable production pattern type according to the operation contents of the movable role object 900 in the role production. Although it is made difficult, the timing at which the character effect is executed may be different in at least a part of the "super character effect" and the "special character effect" without being limited to this. In this case, when the character performance is executed at timing different from usual, the player is made to understand that the variable performance being executed is a "special performance of the character", that is, the variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win. It should be configured as follows. By constructing in this way, the variable performance being executed is a variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win for a player who notices that a variable performance (character special performance) different from usual is executed. can be detected as early as possible, the player can be interested in the timing at which the performance of the character is started.
Returning to FIG. 2104(a), the description continues. When the game state is "normal" (normal state), the winning/failure judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern is "various short off", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 198". "Various short off effects" are stipulated in the entire range. Although the detailed contents are omitted, in the "various short-out effect", the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped in a display mode that indicates the deviation without being in the ready-to-reach state. A variable effect to be displayed is specified, and different effect modes are specified according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf.
Next, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the success/failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern is "reach out (30 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "Various unreachable effects" are defined in the entire range of "0 to 198". Although the detailed contents are omitted, in the "various out-of-reach effects", as a variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the reach state in the same effect mode as the above-described "various normal effects" After that, a variation effect is defined in which the third symbol in variation is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out. In other words, when "various normal effects" are selected as the variable effect pattern and when "various reach out effects" are selected, the variable effect is performed in the same manner until the changing third pattern reaches the reach state. is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, until the effect result of the variable effect is notified (until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed), the variable effect is performed while making the player expect to win the jackpot. can entertain.

When the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/loss judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern is "super reach (60 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to "149" range defines "various super-reach performances", and "150 to 198" ranges define "various accessory super-loss performances". Although detailed contents are omitted, in the "various super reach out effects", the same effect mode as the above-described "various super reach effects" is used as a variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. After reaching the ready-to-win state, a high-expectation performance is executed, and thereafter, a variable performance is stipulated in which the varying third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. In other words, when "various super reach effects" are selected as the variable effect pattern and when "various super reach out effects" are selected, the variable third pattern becomes the reach state and the high expectation effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute the variable performance in the same mode until it is done. By configuring in this way, until the effect result of the variable effect is notified (until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed), the variable effect is performed while making the player expect to win the jackpot. can entertain.
On the other hand, in the "various role super performance", as the variable performance displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the role performance is executed in the same performance mode as the "various role super performance" described above. After that, a ready-to-win state is displayed, a high-expectation performance is executed, and then a variable performance is stipulated in which the variable third pattern is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating the disconnection. In other words, when "various character super performance" is selected as the variable production pattern and when "various role super performance" is selected, the third pattern during fluctuation is in a reach state and a high expectation level production Until is executed, it is configured to be able to execute the variable performance in the same manner. By configuring in this way, until the effect result of the variable effect is notified (until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed), the variable effect is performed while making the player expect to win the jackpot. can entertain.
Next, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/loss judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern is "special reach (90 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "Various special unreachable performances" are defined in the range of "0 to 197", and "various role special unreachable effects" are defined in the value of "198". Although the detailed contents are omitted, in the "various special reach out effects", as a variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in the same effect mode as the above-mentioned "various special reach effects" After reaching the ready-to-win state, the maximum expected performance is executed, and thereafter, a variable performance is stipulated in which the varying third symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. In other words, when "various special reach effects" are selected as the variable effect pattern and when "various special reach out effects" are selected, the variable third pattern becomes the reach state and the highest expectation level effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute the variable performance in the same mode until it is done. By configuring in this way, until the effect result of the variable effect is notified (until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed), the variable effect is performed while making the player expect to win the jackpot. can entertain.
On the other hand, in the "various role special performance", as the variable performance displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the role performance is executed in the same performance mode as the "various role special performance" described above. After that, the ready-to-win state is displayed, the maximum expectation level performance is executed, and thereafter, the variable performance is stipulated in which the third pattern during variation is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating the disconnection. In other words, when "various role special effects" are selected as the variable effect pattern and when "various role special off effects" are selected, the variable third pattern becomes the reach state and the highest degree of expectation effect Until is executed, it is configured to be able to execute the variable performance in the same manner. By configuring in this way, until the effect result of the variable effect is notified (until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed), the variable effect is performed while making the player expect to win the jackpot. can entertain.

Further, as described above, the "various role super effects" and the "various role special effects" are configured so that the role effects can be executed in the same effect mode, so the "various role super effects" ``Various role super performances'' in which the same role performance is performed, and ``Various role special performances out of performance'' in which the same role performance as ``Various role special performances'' is performed are also the same. It becomes possible to execute the performance of the character in the performance mode. By configuring in this way, when the variable performance including the character performance is executed, in addition to the performance pattern of the variable performance being executed, the result of the special symbol lottery is also notified of the performance result of the variable performance. Until (until all the third symbols are stop-displayed), the player can be entertained with the variable presentation while expecting a big win.
Next, if the gaming state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, that is, in a state where it is easier to acquire the right to execute the special symbol lottery than in the normal state, the winning judgment result, the received variation pattern, and the acquired first Various variable effects are defined in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223uuf, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As described above, in the 61st control example, when winning the special symbol lottery, the variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when losing (Fig. 2101), and only when the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern is 60 seconds or longer, the variation effect including the character effect is not selected. Therefore, since the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot can be increased at the time when the performance of the role product is executed, the player can play the game while expecting the performance of the performance of the role product.
Furthermore, even if the variation pattern of the same variation time is received, when the variation pattern corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is received, the performance of the character is better than when the variation pattern corresponding to the loss is received. It is configured to facilitate selection of the included variable performance pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot due to the execution of the performance of the character.

In addition, when receiving a variation pattern of 60 seconds, the variation time including the character performance is more likely to be selected than when a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, which has the highest expectation of a big hit, is received. Configure. By configuring in this way, the variation effect that is executed only for the variation pattern of 90 seconds with the highest expectation of the jackpot (for example, the story of the story progresses using the variation time of 90 seconds, and the story It is possible to suppress the decrease in the execution frequency of the variable performance for informing the player of the result of the special symbol lottery depending on the ending, and to enhance the performance effect of the variable performance.
The mission selection table 222uub is a data table that is referred to when selecting the mission content for establishing the end condition of the first movable accessory presentation, and is used when it is determined that the variable presentation including the accessory presentation has been determined. (S3104L of FIG. 2142: Yes), it is referred to select the mission content (S3107L of FIG. 2142). In this mission selection table 222uub, different mission pattern types are stipulated in correspondence with the corresponding special symbol lottery success/failure determination result and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223uug.
Details of the contents defined in the mission selection table 222uub will now be described with reference to FIG. 2104(b). FIG. 2104(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the mission selection table 222uub.
Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223uug is in the range of "0 to 99", "1A" is assigned as the mission pattern type, and "100 to 119" as the mission pattern type. For the range of "1B" as the mission pattern type, for the range of "120 to 149", "2A" as the mission pattern type, for the range of "150 to 159", the mission "2B" as the pattern type, "3A" as the mission pattern type for the range of "160 to 179", "3B" as the mission pattern type for the range of "180 to 189", For the range of "190 to 198", "4" is defined as the mission pattern type.

On the other hand, when the success/failure determination result is “off” and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223uug is in the range of “0 to 174”, “1A” as the mission pattern type is in the range of “175 to 179”. For the range of "180 to 188", the mission pattern type is "2A", and for the value of "189", "2B" is set, '3A' is specified for the range of .about.198' respectively.
Here, the relationship between the mission pattern type and the set mission content will be described. When "1A" and "1B" are set as the mission pattern type, the mission content is set such that the mission is accomplished when the frame button is pressed five times, as shown in FIG. 2088(b). 4, the small display area Dm61 indicating the mission content displays characters "Press the button 5 times", and the required number of times of pressing display area Dm62b displays "5".
Further, when "2A" and "2B" are set as the mission pattern type, the mission content is set such that the mission is accomplished when the frame button is pressed three times. When "3A" and "3B" are set as the mission contents, the mission contents are set as the mission achievement when the frame button is pressed once. Furthermore, if "4" is set, which can be selected only when the winning judgment result is a hit, the mission content is set to "Wait 3 seconds", which automatically satisfies the end condition as time passes. be.
That is, among the plurality of mission pattern types, "4" is the type that most easily satisfies the end condition of the first rendering of the movable accessory, and then "3A" and "3B" are the types that are the easiest to satisfy the end condition. 1A and 1B are the types in which the termination condition is most difficult to satisfy.

As described above, in the 61st control example, missions with different degrees of difficulty can be determined as an end condition for ending the movable accessory first effect in the middle. By configuring in this way, even if the same operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the execution period of the movable accessory first effect, the end condition is established according to the set mission content. Since it is possible to create a case where it is established and a case where it is not established, it is possible to provide various effects to the player.
Next, the contents of "A" and "B" defined for each mission pattern type will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2104(b), as mission pattern types in which the same mission content is set, a type with an end A and a type with an end B are defined respectively, and the type with the end A is the type with the end B. It is defined to be easier to select than Furthermore, when comparing the content that defines the hit/fail judgment result as “hit” and the content that defines the hit/fail judgment result as “miss”, the ratio of selecting the type with the last B is higher. It is specified to be extremely low in the result of the judgment result of “out of line”.
Here, when the mission pattern type at the end A is set, the falling effect is executed as the second movable role effect by reaching the mission (the end condition of the first movable role object effect is satisfied). If the mission pattern type at the end B is set, the mission is reached (the condition for ending the first movable role production is satisfied), and the second production for the movable role is a rising production. is the type to be executed.
In other words, when the rising effect is executed as the second effect of the movable accessory, the expectation of winning the jackpot is set to be infinitely high. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while anticipating that the rising effect will be executed. Furthermore, in the 61st control example, the mission pattern type with the end A and the mission pattern type with the end B are configured so that the same mission content is set, so the first movable accessory effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping in advance the performance mode of the second performance of the movable accessory that can be executed later in a state where the mission is not reached.

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, it may be possible to configure the mission content corresponding only to the mission pattern type at the end B so that it can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to understand that the expectation of winning the jackpot is extremely high at the time when the mission content is notified, so that the player is motivated to execute the rising effect. The player can choose between a game in which the button 22 is pressed and a game in which the player enjoys the execution of another variable presentation without intentionally accomplishing the mission.
The additional effect selection table 222uuc is used for the additional effect to be executed when the execution condition is satisfied during the period from when the end condition is satisfied during the movable accessory first effect to when the movable accessory 900 moves to the operating position. It is a data table used for determining the effect mode, and is referred to when the condition for executing the additional effect is met (S3214L in FIG. 2143: Yes).
Here, with reference to FIG. 2105, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222uuc will be described. FIG. 2105 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222uuc. As shown in FIG. 2105, in the additional effect selection table 222uuc, the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination, the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur, the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf, , five types of additional performance modes are defined.
Specifically, the success/failure determination result is "win (common)", the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "1A", and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 119". , an additional effect mode "1" is defined. When this additional effect mode "1" is set, an icon imitating a weight of "1 kg" (see icon 914 in Fig. 2091(a)) is displayed as the effect mode of the additional effect. Further, the additional effect mode "2" is defined for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf of "120 to 169". When this additional effect mode "2" is set, an icon imitating a weight of "10 kg" (see icon 913 in Fig. 2091(a)) is displayed as the effect mode of the additional effect. Further, the additional effect mode "3" is defined for the obtained value of the first effect counter 223uuf of "170 to 198". When this additional performance mode "3" is set, an icon imitating a weight of "V" indicating a jackpot win is displayed as the performance mode of the additional performance.

That is, when the mission pattern type is "1A", that is, when the mission is reached and the falling effect is executed as the second effect of the movable accessory, the movable accessory 900 is dropped as the effect mode of the additional effect. is configured to display an effect mode (icon imitating a weight) that can suggest By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the additional effect can be associated with the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect to be executed later.
Next, the success/failure determination result is "win (common)", the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "2A", and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 149". In addition, the additional effect mode "1" is specified, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is "150 to 189", the additional effect mode "2" is specified and the acquired first effect counter 223uuf has a value of "190 to 198", the additional effect mode "3" is defined.
Then, the success/failure determination result is "win (common)", the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "3A", and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 99". In this example, the additional effect mode "1" is defined, and the additional effect mode "2" is defined for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf of "100 to 198".
In other words, for the mission pattern type in which the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect executed after the end condition is established during the first movable accessory effect is the falling effect, that is, the mission pattern type with the end A , an effect mode in which an icon resembling a weight is displayed as an additional effect is set. The selection ratio of the weight icons is varied according to the difficulty of mission achievement. Specifically, for "3A (single button press)", which has the lowest difficulty level for mission achievement, the "V" weight icon is not set, and "1 kg" or "10 kg" It is stipulated that only the weight icon can be selected, and for "1A (pressing the button 5 times)", which has the highest difficulty of mission achievement, the weight icon of "V" is most likely to be set. stipulated.

By configuring in this way, according to the mission contents set during the first production of the movable accessory, there is a production pattern in which it is easy to execute the additional production but there is little benefit when the additional production is executed, and the additional production is executed. It is possible to create a performance pattern that is difficult but has a great benefit when the additional performance is executed.
In this 61st control example, three mission effects can be executed during one movable accessory first effect. However, without being limited to this, the mission selection table 222uub may be referenced to determine new mission contents each time a new mission effect is executed. When configured in this manner, it is possible to execute missions with different mission contents during one movable accessory first effect, so that, for example, even if an unintended mission is executed, the mission cannot be accomplished. Instead, it is possible to play a game in which the player waits for the intended mission to be executed.
Returning to FIG. 2105, the description continues. Next, when the success/failure determination result is "win (common)" and the mission pattern types stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur are "1B", "2B", and "3B", the acquired first effect The additional effect mode "5" is defined for the entire range of the value of the counter 223uuf from "0 to 198". When this additional effect mode "5" is set, an icon resembling a balloon is displayed as the effect mode of the additional effect (see icon 915 in FIG. 2092(a)). That is, when the rising effect (up effect) is executed as the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect, the icon 915 imitating a balloon is displayed as the effect mode of the additional effect regardless of the mission pattern type. is configured to Then, when the second and subsequent additional effects are executed, the icon 915 is configured to be variably displayed so as to gradually increase in size.
Next, when the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "4", that is, when the mission pattern type that is set only when the jackpot is won is set, the mission effect is executed. At this time, the player is informed that the jackpot will be won, and therefore, as the effect mode of the additional effect, the effect mode suggesting the type of the big win is set. Specifically, when the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "4" and the success/failure determination result is "hit (time saving)", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf For the entire range ("0 to 198"), an additional effect mode "3" (an icon imitating the weight of "V") is defined, and if the result of the judgment is "hit (variable probability)" , the value range of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is defined as "0 to 99", the additional effect mode "3" (an icon imitating a "V" weight) is defined, and "100 to 198 ”, an additional effect mode “4” is defined. When this additional performance mode "4" is set, a weight of "super V" capable of suggesting that the variable probability jackpot is won is displayed as an additional performance.

Next, if the success/failure determination result is "out", the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "1A", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 169", , the additional effect mode "1" is defined, and the additional effect mode "2" is defined for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf of "170 to 198". Also, if the result of the success/failure determination is "miss", the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "2A", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 169", The additional effect mode "1" is defined, and the additional effect mode "2" is defined for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf of "170 to 198". Furthermore, if the result of the success/failure determination is "miss", the mission pattern type stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is "3A", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 169", The additional effect mode "1" is defined, and the additional effect mode "2" is defined for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf of "170 to 198".
Finally, when the success/failure determination result is "miss" and the mission pattern types stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur are "1B", "2B", and "3B", the acquired first effect counter 223uuf An additional effect mode “5” is defined for the entire range of values “0 to 198”. When this additional effect mode "5" is set, an icon resembling a balloon is displayed as the effect mode of the additional effect (see icon 915 in FIG. 2092(a)). That is, when the rising effect (up effect) is executed as the effect mode of the second movable accessory effect, the icon 915 imitating a balloon is displayed as the effect mode of the additional effect regardless of the mission pattern type. is configured to Then, when the second and subsequent additional effects are executed, the icon 915 is configured to be variably displayed so as to gradually increase in size.
As described above, in the additional effect selection table 222uuc, as the effect mode of the additional effect in the case where the falling effect is executed as the second effect of the movable accessory, the direction in which the success/failure determination result is “hit” is displayed. However, various data are defined so as to make it easier to select the "10 kg" weight icon than in the case of "missing". Therefore, the more the weight icon of "10 kg" is displayed as the additional effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. That is, when the falling effect is executed as the second movable accessory effect, the greater the total weight of the weight icons displayed on the display screen, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. By configuring in this manner, the player can visually grasp the performance mode of the additional performance, the performance mode of the second performance of the movable accessory, and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot in an easy-to-understand manner.
The second control execution selection table 222uuf is set to correspond to the case where the first movable accessory effect ends without satisfying the end condition during the first movable accessory effect, that is, the first movable accessory effect. This is a data table used for determining whether to execute the second movable accessory effect after the first movable accessory effect is completed when the action scenario specified in the vibration scenario table 222uugb is executed to the end.

In this 61st control example, when the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the movable accessory first presentation, the movable accessory second presentation is always executed, and the movable accessory first presentation is executed. When the game is executed to the end, it is determined by lottery whether or not the second performance of the movable accessory is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the movable accessory second presentation when the movable accessory first presentation is ended in the middle, that is, when the termination condition is met. is doing. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (the frame button 22) in order to satisfy the end condition.
Here, with reference to FIG. 2106, the contents defined in the second control execution selection table 222uuf will be described. FIG. 2106 shows the contents defined in the second control execution selection table 222uuf. As shown in FIG. 2106, in the second control execution selection table 222uuf, the second control (movable accessory second effect ) is stipulated. Specifically, if the result of the success/failure determination is “hit” and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of “0 to 89”, the second control ( However, if the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of “90 to 198”, the second control (movable role second effect) is “executed”. Do not” is stipulated. On the other hand, the second control (movable accessory second effect) is “executed” for the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf in the range of “0 to 29” when the result of the right/fail determination is “off”. , "Do not execute" the second control (movable accessory second effect) is defined for the range of "30 to 198" for the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf.
In other words, the second control execution selection table 222uuf is set so that the second control (movable role second effect) is more likely to be executed when the success/failure determination result is "hit" than when it is "miss". Various data are specified. By configuring in this way, when the movable accessory first effect ends without satisfying the end condition during the movable accessory first effect, only the movable accessory second effect is executed thereafter. You can increase your chances of winning.
Therefore, the player can play a game in which he/she can select whether or not to satisfy the end condition during the first presentation of the movable accessory, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. be able to.

In addition, in the 61st control example, as described above, when the first movable accessory effect is ended without satisfying the end condition during the first movable accessory effect, that is, it corresponds to the first movable accessory effect. When the movement control corresponding to the action scenario (vibration scenario 64) is completed, the second control execution selection table 222uuf can be referenced to determine whether or not the second effect of the movable accessory is to be executed. Based on the establishment of the end condition (the end condition established based on the operation of the frame button 22) during the first movable role production by configuring it so that the event in which the second role production is not executed can be created. The execution frequency of the movable accessory second presentation after the movable accessory first presentation is completed can be made different (reduced) from the case where the movable accessory first presentation is terminated by However, the execution frequency of the second movable accessory effect after the first movable accessory effect is completed differs depending on whether the end condition is established during the first movable accessory effect or not. A configuration other than the configuration used in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example may be used as long as it is possible to make the movement possible. A counting means capable of counting the number of times that all the controls are finished is provided, and when the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), the first presentation of the movable accessory is always finished. The configuration may be such that the second effect of the movable accessory is executed later.
With this configuration, when the movement control corresponding to the action scenario (vibration scenario 64) corresponding to the first production of the movable accessory is completed, that is, the frame button 22 is pressed during the first production of the movable accessory. A situation occurs in which the second effect of the movable accessory is not executed even once for the player who has continued the game for a long time in which the end condition that is established based on the operation of . You can definitely prevent it from happening.
In addition, in the 61st control example, if the termination condition is established based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the first movable accessory presentation, the movable accessory first presentation is always completed after the first movable accessory presentation ends. 2 effects are executed, but this is not the only option. It may be configured such that an event (discomfort event) in which the second performance of the movable role is not executed after the first performance of the role is finished. When the result of the lottery is advantageous (e.g., winning a jackpot), the above-described uncomfortable phenomenon is more likely to occur than when the result of the lottery (e.g., winning a jackpot) is not advantageous to the player (e.g., loss). It should be configured as follows.
With this configuration, when the player who has been playing the game for a long time, that is, when the end condition is established based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the first presentation of the movable accessory, the mobile accessory can be moved with a high probability. The result of the corresponding special symbol lottery can be predicted by providing the player who understands that the second performance of the role object is executed with a sense of incompatibility that the second performance of the movable role object is not executed. is doing.

The second period display selection table 222uud is a display mode (in the second period display area Dm64) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period (second period) during which the second effect of the movable accessory is executed. (display mode to be displayed), and is referred to when the second production of the movable accessory is executed (see S3615L in FIG. 2147).
Here, with reference to FIG. 2107, the contents defined in the second period display selection table 222uud will be described. FIG. 2107 shows the contents defined in the second period display selection table 222uud. As shown in FIG. 2107, the second period display selection table 222uud contains the win/fail judgment result, the winning type (jackpot type), the data type indicating the driving situation stored in the driving situation storage area 223uy, and the acquired data type. A display mode to be displayed in the second period display area Dm64 is defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter 223uuf.
Specifically, the success/failure determination result is “hit”, the hit type is “big hits A, B (probability variable)”, and the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is “08H (data indicating the start of a falling effect”). type)”, the display mode “a little” is defined for the range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf of “0 to 99”, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf The display mode "large" is defined for the range of "100 to 198". In addition, the win/fail judgment result is "hit", the hit type is "jackpot A, B (probability variation)", and the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is "10H (data type indicating the start of rising effect)". , the display mode “great chance” is defined for the range of “0 to 149” for the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is “ 150 to 189", the display mode "extremely hot" is defined, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of "190 to 198", the display mode "Congratulations on the probability change". stipulated.
In addition, the success/failure determination result is "hit", the hit type is "jackpot C (shorter time)", and the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is "08H (data type indicating the start of a fall effect)". , the display mode “a little” is defined for the range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf of “0 to 99”, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is “100 to 198”. ”, the display mode “large” is defined.

Then, the success/failure determination result is "hit", the hit type is "jackpot C (time saving)", and the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is "10H (data type indicating the start of rising effect)". , the display mode “great chance” is defined for the range of the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf from “0 to 99”, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is “100 to 99”. 198”, the display mode “hot” is defined.
On the other hand, when the success/failure determination result is "off" and the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is "08H (data type indicating the start of the falling effect)", the acquired first effect counter 223uuf value is in the range of "0 to 149", the display mode is defined as "a little", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of "150 to 198", and the display mode is "large". ” is stipulated. Further, when the result of the success/failure determination is "off" and the data type stored in the driving situation storage area 223uy is "10H (data type indicating the start of the rising effect)", the acquired first effect counter 223uuf The display mode "great chance" is defined for the range of "0 to 149", and the display mode " Super hot" is stipulated.
The retraction mode selection table 222uue is a data table that is referred to when selecting the retraction mode (retreat mode) that is executed when the movable accessory 900 moves (retracts) to the storage position. When the retraction production is started as the role production using the movable role 900 (S3617L of FIG. 2147: Yes), it is referred (S3618L of FIG. 2147).
Here, with reference to FIG. 2108, the contents defined in the saving mode selection table 222uue will be described. FIG. 2108 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the saving mode selection table 222uue. As shown in FIG. 2108, in the retraction mode selection table 222uue, the display mode of the retraction mode is defined in correspondence with the contents of various effects executed during the current performance of the character product.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “win” and the second period display mode is “slightly” corresponding to “falling effect”, the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is “0 to 149 The display mode "foam" is defined for the range of ", and the display mode "fish school" is defined for the range "150 to 198". Further, when the second period display mode is "large" corresponding to the "fall effect", the display mode "bubbles" is displayed for the range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf from "0 to 99". , and the display mode "school of fish" is defined for the range of "100 to 198".
Furthermore, when the second period display mode is "great chance" corresponding to "rising effect", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of "0 to 99" and the display mode is "foam". However, the display mode "school of fish" is defined for the range of "100 to 198". Further, when the display mode for the second period is "hot" corresponding to "rising effect", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is displayed in the range of "0 to 149" and the display mode is "fish school". However, the display mode "school of gold fish" is defined for the range of "150 to 198". In addition, when the second period display mode is "congratulations on the probability change" corresponding to the "rising effect", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is displayed in the entire range of "0 to 198". school of fish” is stipulated.
On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is "off" and the second period display mode is "slightly" corresponding to "falling effect", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of "0 to 189". The display mode "foam" is defined for the range "190-198", and the display mode "fish school" is defined for the range "190-198". Further, when the second period display mode is "large" corresponding to "falling effect", the display mode "bubbles" is displayed for the range of the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf from "0 to 149". , the display mode "school of fish" is defined for the range of "150 to 198".
Furthermore, when the second period display mode is "great chance" corresponding to "rising effect", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of "0 to 149" and the display mode is "bubble". However, the display mode "school of fish" is defined for the range of "150 to 198". Further, when the second period display mode is "hot" corresponding to "rising effect", the display mode "school of fish" is defined for the entire range of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf.

As described above, in the 61st control example, the movable role object 900 that has moved in various ways during the role object production is retracted to the storage position (origin position). , 2090 (a) and (b), it is configured to be able to execute an effect using the movable accessory 900 during the retraction operation.
By configuring in this way, the movable accessory 900, that is, the storage position (origin position) during the role product production post-processing that is conventionally executed when the accessory using the movable accessory 900 ends. Since it is possible to execute the performance using the movable accessory 900 that is moving toward the direction, the movement control of the movable accessory 900 that is moved from the storage position (origin position) to the presentation position (operating position) can be performed. It is possible to execute a fully utilized character performance.
In addition, in the 61st control example, the same motion scenario can be determined as the retraction scenario 64 corresponding to the retraction motion of the movable accessory 900, regardless of the effect mode of the executed accessory effect. In other words, the movable accessory 900 can be moved to the storage position in the same operation scenario regardless of the position (operating position, falling position, rising position) of the movable accessory 900. It consists of
Returning to FIG. 2102, the description continues. The action scenario table group 222uug has various action scenario tables that are referred to when performing a role product presentation using the movable role product 900. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 2103, the contents of various operation scenario tables included in the operation scenario table group 222uug will be described. FIG. 2103 is a diagram showing various scenario tables included in the operation scenario table group 222uug. In the 61st control example, for various operation scenario tables held in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 2066(a)) of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 60th control example described above, the advancing scenario table 222ua The difference is that a vibration scenario table 222uugb is provided instead of the advance scenario table 222uuga and the vibration scenario table 222ub, and that a fall scenario table 222uugc and a rise scenario table 222uugd are newly provided. .

The other data tables, ie, the evacuation scenario table 222uc, the first return scenario table 222ud, the second return scenario table 222ue, and the excitation table 222uf are the same as those in the 60th control example described above, so description thereof will be omitted.
The advance scenario table 222uuga is used when executing the movement control (advance control) for moving the movable accessory 900 located at the storage position (origin position) to the operating position when the accessory production is started. A data table to be referred to defines operation data (operation scenario) for the drive motor 905 for positioning the movable accessory 900 located at the retracted position to the operating position.
Here, with reference to FIG. 2109(a), the contents of the operation scenarios defined in the advancement scenario table 222uuga will be described in detail. FIG. 2109(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the advancement scenario table 222uuga. In this advancement scenario table 222uuga, four stages of operation scenarios are defined according to the progress of processing. The contents of various elements defined in the advance scenario table 222uuga are the same as those in the advance scenario table 222ua of the 60th control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 2109(a), when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "1", an operation scenario is defined in which the operation "hold" is continued for 10 milliseconds, and the value of the processing counter 223uk is "2". , a motion scenario is defined in which the motion “forward rotation” is continued at speed “4” until the operating position sensor 930 detects the movable accessory 900, and the value of the processing counter 223uk reaches “3”. In contrast, an operation scenario is defined in which the operation "forward rotation" is continued for 17 steps at speed "4", and the operation "hold" is continued for 40 milliseconds when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "4". A continuous operation scenario is defined, and an operation scenario is defined in which the drive motor 905 is kept in the non-excited state for 1000 milliseconds when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "5".

Here, the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to "1" when a new scenario table for driving the drive motor 905 is determined, so that the value of the processing counter 223uk specified in the scenario table First, the movement control for the drive motor 905 is executed based on the data contents defined in the operation scenario in which the is "1". Then, when the operation scenario being executed is completed, the value of the processing counter 223uk is incremented by 1, and the drive motor 905 is movable based on the data content specified in the operation scenario corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk after the addition. Control is then executed.
In this way, the movement control for the drive motor 905 based on the data content defined in each operation scenario corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk defined in each scenario table is performed in the order of the value of the corresponding processing counter 223uk. (ascending order), and data defined in the operation scenario corresponding to the maximum value of the processing counter 223uk defined in the determined scenario table ("5" in the advance scenario table 222uuga) The configuration is such that when the movement control for the drive motor 905 based on the contents is completed, the movement control for the drive motor 905 specified in the determined scenario table is completed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2109(a), in the 61st control example, similar to the 60th control example described above, the scenario table for driving the drive motor 905 (for moving the movable accessory 900) , also defines an operating scenario for the action “hold”. In the operation scenario corresponding to this operation "hold", data corresponding to movable control is defined in which the drive motor 905 is excited and the drive motor 905 is not rotated from its current position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 905 from rotating due to an external force (for example, the inertial force of the movable accessory 900 that has been moved) as compared with the non-excited state of the drive motor 905 .
Furthermore, in the 61st control example, the scenario table (advance scenario table 222uuga, etc.) for driving the drive motor 905 (for moving the movable accessory 900) is set to the period during which the drive motor 905 is kept in a non-excited state ( period corresponding to the operation "-") is also defined. With this configuration, the movable role 900 is specified after the movable role 900 waits at a specific position (for example, the operating position) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) during the execution period of the movable role production. When setting an effect mode to move from a position (for example, an operating position), that is, even when a standby period in which the drive motor 905 is in a non-excited state is included in the effect period of the movable role object effect, the movable role Since the scenario can be managed for the entire period of the object presentation, the movable control of the movable accessory 900 can be simplified.

In addition, in the 61st control example, the movable control using various scenario tables can be executed for the entire period during which the movable role production is executed. During at least a part of the rendering period, a standby period in which the drive motor 905 is in a non-excited state may be provided as a period during which the various scenario tables are not set. A measuring means is provided that can measure the elapsed time after the movable control specified in the advance scenario table 222uuga) is completed, and the elapsed time measured by the measuring means is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). When it is determined that the measurement has been performed, it is preferable to configure the movement control to be executed based on the next scenario table (for example, the vibration scenario table 222ugb).
With this configuration, the standby period in which the drive motor 905 is in the non-excited state can be managed without defining it in the scenario table. When the performance is to be executed, only the length of the predetermined period measured by the measuring means needs to be varied, eliminating the need to prepare in advance a plurality of scenario tables with different lengths of waiting periods, and the movable accessory. It is possible to reduce the volume of various data used for executing the production.
In addition, in this 61st control example, as described above with reference to FIG. is moved upward in front view (upward from the viewpoint in FIG. 2088(a)). Therefore, in order to complete the operation scenario defined by the value "2" of the processing counter 223uk of the advance scenario table 222uuga, movement control is executed for about 1 second if normal. That is, when the movement control based on the advance scenario table 222uuga is executed, the movement control (advance control) is executed for about 1 second to move the movable accessory 900 located at the storage position to the operating position. be done.
Then, in the operation scenario corresponding to the value "5" of the processing counter 223uk of the advancement scenario table 222uuga, the drive motor 905 is operated for 1000 milliseconds (1 second) while the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. The contents of the non-excited state are defined. Then, by executing the action scenario corresponding to the value "5" of the processing counter 223uk of the advancement scenario table 222uuga, the character movable effect (character object effect) shown in FIG. 2088(b) is executed.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the 61st control example, the progress status of the movable control for the movable accessory 900 can be grasped at any time during the performance of the movable role (personal product presentation). Various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are configured to be displayed when it is determined that the game progresses to a specific situation.
In other words, the various modes determined as the performance mode of the variation performance to be executed corresponding to the start of the special symbol variation are based on the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation (from the start of the variation performance). Instead of switching display, it is configured to switch display according to the operation status of the movable accessory 900 .
By configuring in this way, the action (action effect) of the movable accessory 900 and the display mode (display effect) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 are used. When executing the object presentation, the execution timing of the action presentation and the execution timing of the display presentation can be easily synchronized, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Here, conventionally, using a period during which special symbols are variably displayed (a special symbol variation period), a pachinko machine capable of executing a variation performance for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. Machine 10 is known. In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, a plurality of performance modes can be set as the performance modes of the variable performance, and the settings are made according to the results of the corresponding special symbol lottery (for example, big win, loss, etc.). The result of the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player based on the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed by making the types of possible performance modes different or differentiating the selection ratio of each performance mode. It was configured to be able to predict whether it was a random lottery result (for example, a big hit).

In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, it was common to switch the mode of the variable performance based on the determined performance mode in accordance with the passage of time after the start of the variable performance. . However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when a performance mode in which a plurality of modes progress independently is determined as the performance mode of the variable performance, the progress status of the first mode is If the delay is longer than the predetermined progress content (for example, if an input/output error in various commands set to execute the effect causes the effect related to mode 1 to be executed at a timing later than the normal timing) However, since each aspect is executed according to the elapsed time after the start of the variable effect, the progress of each aspect can be monitored in the variable effect of the effect mode in which the multiple aspects are independent. There is a problem that it is difficult to synchronize, and the performance effect is lowered.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 61st control example, when a character object movable effect (character object effect) in which an action effect and a display effect are combined and executed is set as the effect mode of the variable effect. is configured to execute the other effect (display effect) according to the progress of one effect (action effect). By configuring in this way, in the variable performance in which multiple modes of performance are combined and executed, the performance of each mode can be easily executed while synchronizing, so that the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced. .
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, among the plurality of modes of effects that are executed in combination, the progress of the effects is synchronized with the progress of the effects that tend to cause errors in the progress of the effects. It is configured to be able to execute other productions. Specifically, the execution timing of the display effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is determined according to the progress of the action effect of moving the movable accessory 900 by driving the drive motor 905. It is configured as follows.
Here, in the 61st control example, similar to the 60th control example described above, when the movement control for moving the movable accessory 900 is executed, the content of the movement control (operation scenario) is defined in advance. The drive motor 905 is driven by referring to various scenario tables (operation scenario table group 222uug in FIG. 2102). Then, based on the driving contents (excitation position, excitation interval, excitation period, etc.) of the drive motor 905, it is configured to execute movable control for moving the movable accessory 900 in different moving directions and different moving speeds. there is

In this case, even if drive control is executed for the drive motor 905 according to the action scenarios defined in various scenario tables, the drive energy of the drive motor 905 is transmitted to the movable accessory 900. Due to slipping of the transmission member (gear, shaft, etc.), the drive energy of the normally rotating drive motor 905 cannot be transmitted to the movable accessory 900, or a load is applied to the drive motor 905. A signal (input pulse signal) output to excite the drive motor 905 and the rotational operation of the drive motor 905 may not be synchronized (step out).
In other words, the action effect including the action of moving the movable accessory 900 is more likely to cause an error in the time spent for execution than the display effect of displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Become. Therefore, in the 61st control example, it is possible to determine the execution timing of another effect type (display effect) in correspondence with the effect type (movement effect) that tends to cause an error in the execution time. By configuring in this way, a series of flows in the performance (moving role performance) in which a plurality of performance types are combined can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.
Next, the contents of the fall scenario table 222uugc will be described with reference to FIG. 2109(b). FIG. 2109(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fall scenario table 222uugc.
As shown in FIG. 2109(b), when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "1", an operation scenario is defined in which the operation "hold" is continued for 10 milliseconds, and the value of the processing counter 223uk is "2". , an operation scenario is defined in which the operation "forward rotation" is continued for 400 steps at speed "2", and the operation "hold" is performed for 40 steps when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "3". An operation scenario is defined to continue for milliseconds, and when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "4", an operation scenario is defined to keep the drive motor 905 in the non-excited state for 3000 milliseconds.

Next, referring to FIG. 2109(c), the contents of the rising scenario table 222uugd will be described. FIG. 2109(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the rising scenario table 222uugd.
As shown in FIG. 2109(c), when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "1", an operation scenario is defined in which the operation "hold" is continued for 10 milliseconds, and the value of the processing counter 223uk is "2". , an operation scenario is defined in which the operation "reverse rotation" is continued for 200 steps at speed "4", and the operation "hold" is performed for 40 steps when the value of the processing counter 223uk is "3". An operation scenario that continues for milliseconds is defined, and for a value of "4" of the processing counter 223uk, an operation scenario is defined that the non-excited state of the drive motor 905 continues for 3000 milliseconds.
Next, referring to FIG. 2110, the contents of the vibration scenario table 222uugb will be described. FIG. 2110 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb.
As shown in FIG. 2110, the vibration scenario table 222uugb corresponds to the vibration scenario table 222ub described above. The difference is that only the stipulated contents up to "14" are left and the others are excluded, and the others are the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

That is, when the motion based on the vibration scenario table 222uugb is executed, the vibration motion for one cycle shown in FIG. 2094 is executed. Then, the vibrating motion for three cycles is executed by repeated processing.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2112, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example will be described. FIG. 2112 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example. As shown in FIG. 2112, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223uua, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223uuc, a fluctuation start flag 223uud, and a stop type selection flag. 223uue, first effect counter 223uuf, second effect counter 223uug, secondary state storage area 223uuh, time saving medium counter 223uui, variable probability counter 223uuj, V effect execution flag 223uuk, V winning flag 223uul, V notification flag 223uum, effect information storage area 223uun, SW valid time storage area 223uuo, elapsed timer 223uup, remaining chance number counter 223uuq, mission pattern storage area 223uur, press counter 223uus, press information storage area 223uut, switching flag 223uuu, accessory movement related area 223uuy, other memory area 223z is provided at least. Details of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the sixty-first control example will be described below.
The winning information storage area 223uua has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.
The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.
Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 uud after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .
When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub (see S2210L in FIG. 2133). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub is updated, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203uud.
The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 uub is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 uub in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223uub, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 uub of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved balls. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 . As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203uud of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.
The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223uuc stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The fluctuation start flag 223uud is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204L in FIG. 2133), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See S2903L in FIG. 2140). When the fluctuation start flag 223uud is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.
The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S2102L) of the main processing (see FIG. 2132), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223uue is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2207L in FIG. 2133), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2908L in FIG. 2140). When the stop type selection flag 223uue is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.
The first effect counter 223uuf is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 2132) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.
The second effect counter 223uug is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lotteries in the 61st control example, and is configured so that the counter value is updated according to a rule different from that of the above-described first effect counter 223uuf. ing. By configuring in this way, in the case of determining by lottery a plurality of performance modes related to a plurality of good performances in the same control process, the performance mode determined by referring to the value of the first performance counter 223 uuf and the second performance mode Even if the performance mode determined by referring to the value of the performance counter 223uug can be set, the performance modes can be easily set at random without being associated with each other.
The sub-state storage area 223uuh stores a current state area that stores a game state corresponding to information indicated by a state command transmitted from the main controller 110, and stores the game state that was stored in the current state area immediately before. and a previous state area. The currently set game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the game state stored in the current state area.

The counter 223uui during time saving is a counter for measuring the period in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of the jackpot game), A predetermined value (“100” or “120” in this 61st control example) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the counter 223uui during time saving is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter 223uui during time saving becomes "0", normal symbols are displayed. It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the counter 223uui during time saving, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol.
The variable probability state counter 223uuj is a counter for measuring the period during which the variable probability state continues. (S2308L of FIG. 2134: Yes), "120" is set as the counter value (see S2309L of FIG. 2134). Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the probability variation counter 223uuj is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the probability variation counter 223uuj becomes "0", the special symbol It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the variable probability counter 223uuj, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the special symbol.
The V effect execution flag 223uuk is turned on when a jackpot start command is received from the main controller 110 and the jackpot type information included in the jackpot start command is a jackpot A (see S2706L in FIG. 2138), and the V prize is won. It is turned off when a command is received (see S2406L in FIG. 2135). When this V effect execution flag 223uuk is ON, it prompts the game ball to enter a specific area (probability variable switch 65e3) in a specific round (second round in this 61st control example) during the jackpot game. A V effect is executed. It should be noted that the V winning command is a command for notifying that the ball has flowed down the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3).
The V winning flag 223uul is turned on when a V winning command is received from main controller 110 (see S2404L in FIG. 2135), and turned off in the ending process (see S2802L in FIG. 2139). This V winning flag 223uul is a flag for determining by the sound lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65V disposed in the variable winning device 65, and the execution of the V effect. The display mode of the second half period of the ending effect can be switched depending on whether the game ball passes through (V gate) 65V or not.

V notification flag 223uum is turned on when a display command for notifying V winning is set when a V winning command is received from main controller 110 (see S2408L in FIG. 2135), It is turned off when a state command to change the game state to a variable probability state is received (see S2311L in FIG. 2134).
The SW valid time storage area 223uuo is a storage area that stores a period during which the frame button 22 and the selection button 600 are determined to be valid. In the 61st control example, when the effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is stored in the SW effective time storage area 223uuo.
The elapsed timer 223uup is a timer that is set to display a display mode indicating the end of the environment adjustment when a certain period of time (10 seconds in this 61st control example) has elapsed since the adjustment information adjustment screen started to be displayed. . The timer value of the elapsed timer 223uup is set to a timer value corresponding to when the effect button 22 or the selection button 600 is operated, and is updated by "1" each time the effect update process is executed.
The remaining chance number counter 223uuq is a counter for measuring the number of remaining executions of the mission effects executed during the movable accessory first effect period, and is set to "3" when execution of the accessory effect is determined. A value is set (S3109L in FIG. 2142). After that, when the vibration scenario table 222uugb is referred to and the vibration action is repeatedly executed, the value of the remaining chance counter 223uuq is decremented by 1 (see S4006L in FIG. 2152). In this way, even in the case where a plurality of mission effects can be executed during one movable role first effect, by checking the value of the remaining chance number counter 223uuq, one movable role can be executed. The number of mission performances that can be executed during the object first performance can be grasped by the player.

The mission pattern storage area 223uur is a storage area for temporarily storing information (mission pattern type) indicating mission contents selected by referring to the mission selection table 222uub.
The pressing counter 223uus is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the mission period set during the first production of the movable accessory, and is used in the frame button input monitoring/production process (see S2107L in FIG. 2143). ), the value of the counter is incremented by one when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the frame button 22 has been pressed based on the operation of the frame button 22 . Then, it is cleared to 0 when the mission period has passed.
The pressing information storage area 223uut is a storage area for temporarily storing the cumulative value of the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the first production of the movable accessory, and is a pressing counter 223uus measured during each mission period. When the value of is cleared, the information corresponding to the counted number of times of pressing is cumulatively stored.
The switching flag 223uuu is a flag for indicating that the driving mode of the movable accessory 900 has been switched, and is set to ON when the driving mode of the movable accessory 900 is switched. In the sixty-first control example, the operation status (driving status) of the movable accessory 900 is temporarily stored using the driving status storage area 223uy described later, and the operating status (driving status) of the movable accessory 900 is stored. is switched, a process for switching the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

Therefore, when the operation status (driving status) of the movable accessory 900 is switched and information for indicating a new driving status is stored in the driving status storage area 223uy, the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON, In the process for updating the contents of the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (character product effect update process (see S3510L in FIG. 2147)), the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON. (S3601L in FIG. 2147: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the newly stored information indicating the drive status is determined. With this configuration, a display mode corresponding to the driving situation (operation situation) of the movable accessory 900 can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. , a composite effect (a role effect) using the movable role object 900 and the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. Then, in the process for updating the content of the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (character product effect update process (see S3510L in FIG. 2147)), the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON. It is set to off after determining that it is on (see S3602L in FIG. 2147).
The accessory movable related area 223uuy is an area having various timers and flags for temporarily storing information necessary when controlling the movement of the movable accessory 900 . Here, with reference to FIG. 2112(a), the contents of the accessory movement related area 223uuy will be described. FIG. 2112(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the character object movement related area 223uuy in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2112(a), in the accessory movement related area 223uuy, the second action scenario execution flag 223uv, the accessory abnormality flag 223uw, and the next prohibition flag are stored in the RAM 223 in the 60th control example. 223ux and a drive status storage area 223uy are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.
The second action scenario execution flag 223uv is a flag for indicating that the movable control for the movable accessory 900 based on the second action scenario is being executed, and the movable control for the movable accessory 900 based on the second action scenario. is set to ON when is executed, and is set to OFF when the movable control for the movable accessory 900 based on the second action scenario is completed.

The accessory abnormality flag 223uw is a flag for indicating that an abnormality has occurred during the movable control of the movable accessory 900, and is set to ON when an abnormality occurs during the movable control of the movable accessory 900. . Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again, it is set to OFF. Then, it is referred to when determining the effect mode of the variable effect, and when the character object abnormality flag 223uw is set to ON, the character object effect to operate the movable accessory 900 is configured not to be determined. .
With this configuration, in a situation where an error notification command is set due to an abnormality in the movable control of the movable accessory 900, the accessory abnormality flag 223uw is set to ON, so the variable effect setting process (S2905L in FIG. 2141 (see S3016L in FIG. 2142) executed in normal state production mode determination processing (see S3016L of FIG. 2142), it is possible not to determine the variable production in which a new role product production is executed.
The next prohibition flag 223ux is a flag for temporarily prohibiting execution of the performance of the role product using the movable accessory 900. is set to ON when it is determined that the movable control for is not finished. Then, it is referred to when determining the effect mode of the variable effect, and when the next prohibition flag 223ux is set to ON, the process is executed so that the character object effect to operate the movable accessory 900 is not determined, It is then set to off.
By configuring in this way, since the role production is not executed in the next variation of the special symbol variation determined that the movable control of the movable accessory 900 has not ended, during the movable control (for example, It is possible to suppress the execution of new movement control for the movable accessory 900 during retraction operation.

The driving condition storage area 223uy is a storage area for temporarily storing information for specifying the operating condition (driving condition) of the movable accessory 900 according to the progress of movement control for the movable accessory 900 .
Next, with reference to FIG. 2112(b), the configuration of the drive status storage area 223uy will be described. FIG. 2112(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the drive status storage area 223uy. As shown in FIG. 2112(b), the drive status storage area 223uy is configured to be able to store data types of “00H” to “18H” according to the operation status of the movable accessory 900. FIG.
Here, the contents of the data types stored in the drive status storage area 223uy will be described. The data type "00H" is a state in which execution of a role product performance that controls the movement of the movable role object 900 has been determined, and the movable control is not being performed, that is, the drive standby flag 223up is set to ON. The data type "01H" is a data type for indicating the operating status of the advancing operation. The data type "02H" is a data type for indicating the operation status in which the movement control is executed based on the operation scenario corresponding to "02H", and the data type "02H" is the state in which the advance operation is being executed, and the advance scenario table 222uuga is a data type for indicating the operation status in which the movement control is executed based on the operation scenario (maintenance period) corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk in 222uuga being "5".
Data type "03H" is a state in which a vibration motion is being performed, and movement control is performed based on a motion scenario corresponding to a value of "1" to "13" of the processing counter 223uk in the vibration scenario table 222uugb. The data type "04H" is a data type for indicating a state in which the end condition is not satisfied among the operating states of the vibration scenario table 222uugb. This is a data type for indicating an operation state in which the movement control based on the operation scenario corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk of "1" to "13" is being executed and the termination condition is satisfied.

Data type "05H" is a state in which a vibrating motion is being performed, and movement control is being performed based on a motion scenario corresponding to a value of "14" in the processing counter 223uk in the vibration scenario table 222uugb. This is the data type for indicating the operating status.
The data type "06H" is the state in which the vibrating motion is completed, and the motion state in which the movable control based on all the motion scenarios defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb is completed. Data type "07H", which is a data type for indicating an operation state in which an operation has ended, is defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb as a state in which the vibration operation has ended and the end condition has been satisfied. This is a data type for indicating the motion status in which the vibrating motion has ended without executing the movement control based on all the motion scenarios.
Data type "08H" is a state in which a falling action is being executed as the second action (movable accessory second effect), and the value of the processing counter 223uk in the falling scenario table 222uugc is "1" to "3". is a data type for indicating an action situation in which movable control based on an action scenario corresponding to "09H" is executed. This is a data type for indicating an operation state in which movement control is being executed based on an operation scenario in which the value of the processing counter 223uk in the fall scenario table 222uugc corresponds to "4".
The data type "10H" is a state in which the rising action is being executed as the second action (second effect of the movable accessory), and the value of the processing counter 223uk in the rising scenario table 222uugd is "1" to "3". data type "11H" is a data type for indicating an action situation in which movable control based on the action scenario corresponding to This is a data type for indicating an operation state in which movement control is being executed based on an operation scenario in which the value of the processing counter 223uk in the rising scenario table 222uugd corresponds to "4".

The data type "12H" is a data type for indicating the operating situation in which the retreating action is executed after the first production of the movable accessory (vibration production) is completed, among the operating situations in which the retreating action is executed, The data type "13H" is a data type for indicating an action situation in which the withdrawal action is executed after the falling effect is executed as the second movable accessory effect, among the action situations in which the retreat action is executed. , The data type "14H" is a data type for indicating an action situation in which the withdrawal action is executed after the rising effect is executed as the movable accessory second effect, among the action situations in which the retreat action is executed. .
The data type "15H" is a data type for indicating the operation status in which the return action is being executed, and the data type "16H" is for indicating a state in which the movable control of the movable accessory 900 has been completed normally. The data type "17H" is a data type for indicating an abnormal state (the abnormal flag 223uw is set to ON), and the data type "18H". is a data type for indicating other operating conditions, and is formed as an empty area.
As described above, the drive condition storage area 223uy is configured to store various data types according to the operation condition of the movable accessory 900 . Then, when a new data type is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy, the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON, so that the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is movable. It is configured to be able to determine the display mode according to the action status of the role object 900 .
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine the display mode according to the operation status of the movable accessory 900 . In this 61st control example, only the data type indicating the current operation status of the movable accessory 900 can be stored in the drive status storage area 223uy. The operation process may be configured to be storable. For example, information about the presentation mode executed in the past performance of the role product may be stored, and based on the stored information, the current role product may be displayed. You may use it so that the production mode of production may be determined.

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method.
Returning to FIG. 2096, the description continues. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.
The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2084). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2084) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .
<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the 61st control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2113 to 2130. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.
In this 61st control example, as described above, in a state where both the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved) are stored, It is configured to preferentially execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Also, while the jackpot game is being executed, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable prize winning device 65, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured so that Furthermore, as an end condition for ending the probability variable state which is a game state advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in addition to the end condition established when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is configured to provide a termination condition that is satisfied when executed.
2113 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101L). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102L). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .
Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103L). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, 99, 999) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.
Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104L). After that, the start winning process associated with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105L). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.
After executing the start winning process, when the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is completed, the normal symbol lottery is executed (S106L), and the normal symbol start opening (through Through-gate passage processing accompanying the passage of the game ball in the gate 67 is executed (S107L). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 2120 and 2121. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108L), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109L), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2114, special symbol variation processing (S104L), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 2114 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104L). In this special symbol variation process (S104L), based on each acquired counter value, various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination are performed, and the first symbol display device 37 is displayed in the determined variation display mode by predetermined control. Control to enable variable display, set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth patterns in the third pattern display device 81, display showing the judgment result (whether judgment result) Control is executed to stop and display in the mode. The special symbol variation process (S104L) will be described below.
In this special symbol variation process (S104L), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is during the special symbol jackpot (during the jackpot game) (S201L). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203uut is on. As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (during the jackpot game) (S201L: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.
In the processing of S201L, if it is determined that the special symbols are not being hit (during the jackpot game) (S201L: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202L). ), if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202L: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud (number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and value of the special symbol 2 ball number counter 203 uue (number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) are acquired ( S203L). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue is greater than 0 (S204L). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue is not 0 (S204L: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue is subtracted by 1 (S205L) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue is set (S206L). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223. do.
After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206L, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub is shifted (S207L). In the process of S207L, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203uub are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S208L.

On the other hand, in the process of S204L, if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue is 0 (S204L: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud acquired in the process of S203L (N1 ) is greater than 0 (S210L).
In the processing of S210L, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is 0 (S210L: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S210L, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S210L: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud (N1) is subtracted by 1 (S211L), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud changed by the calculation is set (S212L). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 during external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223. do.
After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212L, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207L (S213L), and the processing proceeds to the processing of S208L. and migrate. In the process of S208L executed after the process of S207L or S213L, a special symbol big hit determination process is executed (S208L), then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209L), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208L) and special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209L) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 2115 and 2116. FIG.
Returning to FIG. 2114, the description continues. In the process of S202L, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202L: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214L). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214L: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215L), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S215L, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in correspondence with the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209L) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and then the process of S215L is executed. It is updated (decremented) each time. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S214L (S214L: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S215L is 0, the first symbol display device 37 (S216L). The stop design is set in advance by the special design variation pattern selection process (S209L).

When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209L) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpots A to J is determined.
In the 61st control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 lights the blue LED, when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit, and when the jackpot C is achieved. , the green LED is lit, and when the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. Also for each of the jackpot types of jackpots E to J, each LED is lit and displayed in an identifiable lighting mode (display mode). If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.
After the process of S216L is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first design display device 37 is started, the special design lottery result (see S208L of FIG. 2115) performed by the special design jackpot determination process ( This time's lottery result) determines whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S217L). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S217L: Yes), the jackpot start flag 23uuu is set to ON (S218L), and the values of the time reduction counter 203uur and the probability variation counter 203uus are cleared (set to 0) (S219L). ), the process proceeds to S220L. When the jackpot start flag 203uuu is set to ON by the processing of S218L, when the jackpot control processing (see S1204L in FIG. 2125) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, to S1301L: Yes By branching, an opening command is set (S1303L). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.
Returning to FIG. 2114, the description continues. In the process of S217L, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S217L: No), the processes of S218L and S219L are skipped, the update process is executed (S221L), and then the process proceeds to S220L.

In the update process (S221L), a process of updating various counter values (time reduction counter 203uur, variable probability counter 203uus) corresponding to the currently set game state is executed, and the game state corresponding to the updated various counter values is executed. state command is set. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201L) of the main process (FIG. 2124) executed by the MPU 201, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the process of S220L, a special figure confirmation command is set (S220L), and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2115, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208L), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104L in FIG. 2114), will be described. FIG. 2115 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208L).
In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208L), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S301L). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202uua (see FIG. 2098(a)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301L matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery A result (determination result) is obtained (S302L).
When the process of S302L is finished, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a big win (S303L), and if it is determined to be a big win (S303L: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to a big win. (S304L), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2, set the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (S305L), and finish this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S303L that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S303L: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S306L), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2116, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209L), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see S104L of FIG. 2114), will be described. FIG. 2116 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209L).
In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209L), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208L in FIG. 2115), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S401L).
In the process of S401L, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S401L: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202uub (see FIG. 2098 (a)) and the acquired first The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the hit type counter C2 (S402L). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403L), and the current game state corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203uuv (normal state, probability variable state, time saving (S404L).
Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403L and the variation pattern selection table 202uuc read in the process of S404L (S405L), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405L , to set the special figure variation pattern command (S406L). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and the main processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 2124) External output processing ( It is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in S1201L).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S407L), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (S408L), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409L), and this process is terminated. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407L includes information indicating the type of stop symbol that indicates the result of this special symbol variation, that is, a rough type such as reach out or non-reach out. It is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1201L) of the main process (FIG. 2124) of the main controller 110. FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of S401L, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (S401L: No), the process of S402L is skipped and the process proceeds to S403L.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2117, the contents of the update process (S221L) executed in the special symbol variation process (S104L in FIG. 2114) will be described. FIG. 2117 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S221L). In this update process (S221L), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (at the time of stoppage of fluctuation), the remaining period of the period in which the probability fluctuation state is continuously set is updated, Processing for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.
When the update process (S221L) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol (S501L), and the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is 0 If it is determined to be greater than (S501L: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is subtracted (updated) by 1 (S502L), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203uus after updating is 0 (S503L ), when it is determined to be 0 (S503L: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203uuv (S504L), and the process proceeds to S505L. In addition, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S501L (S501L: No), the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is not currently in the high probability state of the special symbol. The processing of S502L to S504L described above for updating is skipped, and the process proceeds to S505L.

Also, in the process of S503L, the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203uus is greater than 0, and the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (S503L: No) , the process of S504L is skipped and the process proceeds to S505L.
In the process of S505L, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203uur is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, if the current is a high probability state of normal symbols (S505L: Yes), time saving 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203uur (S506L), and it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203uur after the subtraction is 0 (S507L). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203uur is 0 in the process of S507L, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203uuv (S508L), the value of the probability variation counter 203uus, the value of the time saving counter 203uur, the current game state is set (S509L), and the process ends. Also, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203uur is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S505L (S505L: No), or in the processing of S507L it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203uur is not 0 If so (S507L: No), the process proceeds directly to S509L.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2118, the start winning process (S105L), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 2113) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 2118 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105L). In the start winning process (S105L), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (start winning) into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Up to (up to 4 in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640), each acquired counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub. be.
Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub respectively, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol Based on each counter value stored in each of the 2 reserved ball storage areas 203uub, processing (so-called look-ahead processing) is executed to predict the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, and the like. The starting winning process (S105L) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105L), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S601L). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a start winning) (S601L: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is acquired (S602L), and the acquisition It is determined whether the value (N1) obtained is less than 4 (S603L).
In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603L: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is added by 1 (S604L), and the voice lamp control device 113 On the other hand, a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of the first ball entrance 64 (lottery right reserved number of the first special symbol) is set (S605L).
Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 corresponds. Each ball is reserved (stored) in the storage area for the number of reserved balls (S606L), and the process proceeds to S607L.
Also, if it is determined in the process of S601L that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601L: No), or in the process of S603L, the number of currently held balls for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (S603L: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud is skipped, and the process proceeds to S607L.

Next, each process from S607L to S612L is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64) executed in each process from S601L to S606L. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
After each process from S601L to S612L is executed, the prefetch process is executed (S613L), and this process ends.
This look-ahead processing (S613L) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for determining the determined variation pattern, stop type, and the like is executed. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute a process for determining the result of determination of validity, the determined variation pattern, the type of stop, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but this is not the only option. For example, when there is a new start winning prize, the result of determination of whether or not all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub Alternatively, it may be configured to execute processing for determining the determined variation pattern, stop type, and the like.
In addition, in the 61st control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub, that is, the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined. Accordingly, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.

As described above, in the 61st control example, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue is added, information about the added prize Although it is configured to execute the prefetching process (S613L) based on (winning information), it is not limited to this. If it is determined that the number is (4) (S603L: No), that is, if a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, look-ahead processing is performed. (S613L) may be configured to be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2119, the look-ahead process (S613L), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105L in FIG. 2118), will be described. FIG. 2119 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S613L).
In the look-ahead process (S613L), first, from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub, various counter values, a first hit random number counter C1, a first Each value of hit type counter C2 and variation type counter CS1 is read (S701L).
Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of the determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new hold memory is generated (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203uub), and the time when the new hold is stored this time. Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the winning information, the game state (special symbol probability state) is difficult to predict.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S702L). If it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S702L: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S703L), After that, this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S702L is not a big hit (S702L: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the lost winning and the variation pattern is issued. set (S704L), and then terminate this process.
Here, the prize winning command set in the process of S703L or S704L includes the above-described information for indicating the result of winning/failure determination (information that has a different meaning based on the result of winning/failure determination), and common information of S701L. The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1201L) of the main process (FIG. 2124) of the main controller 110. FIG.
On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from the usual color). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

In addition, in this 61st control example, since there is only one probability state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols), it is possible to set information to be set in the winning command (win/fail judgment result) regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the result of judgment in the case of a high probability state of special symbols, and the special symbol It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of a low probability state and set a winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state, in a low probability state. A determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a big win even if there is a big win is defined, and only when the determination value is read out, a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set. .
By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.
Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub is accurately determined. Then, the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.
In addition, in the 61st control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203uua or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203uub, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which prefetching processing is executed and the success/failure determination is predicted in advance in the prefetching processing. Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the prize information (reserved memory) newly stored (stored) in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 uub is set as a prize winning command, and the winning prize received by the audio lamp control device 113 side It may be configured so as to predict the success/failure determination result based on the information included in the command.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2120, normal design variation processing (S106L), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 2120 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106L). The normal symbol variation process (S106L) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc., and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery). (Processing for executing normal design variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal design variation to be performed, processing for updating normal design variation during execution, processing for stopping normal design variation, result of normal design lottery Processing to determine the game content of the normal figure per game executed when is a hit) is executed.
In the normal symbol variation process (S106L), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801L). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S801L: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S801L: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S802L). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, if it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) is currently executable (S802L: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf A value (M) is acquired (S803L), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804L).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is 0 in the processing of S804L (S804L: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203uuf is greater than 0 (S804L: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203uuf is subtracted by 1 (S805L). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied in the process of S804L, it is retained and stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203uuf in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning prize information.
Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc is shifted (S806L). In the process of S806L, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203uuc are shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S807L).
Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203uur is on, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of normal symbols (time saving) (S808L), and the time saving counter 203uur is set to on. If it is determined (S808L: Yes), then it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot game is currently in progress (S809L), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S809L: No), high probability Based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202uud (see FIG. 2100(b)), the win/fail determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S810L), and the process proceeds to S812L.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203uur is off (S808L: No), or if it is determined that the current jackpot game is being played in the process of S809L (S809L: Yes), the second Based on the hit determination value of the 2-hit random number table 202uud (see FIG. 2100(b)), the hit/fail determination result is acquired (S811L), and the process proceeds to S812L.

In the processing of S812L, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S812L), and if it is determined to be a hit (S812L: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S813L), and the process proceeds to S814L. On the other hand, in the processing of S812L, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (loss) (S812L: No), set the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of loss (S818L), and the process proceeds to S819L.
In the process of S814L, it is determined whether the current game state is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203uur (S814L), and during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) When it is determined that there is (S814L: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is in the jackpot game (S815L), and when it is determined that it is not in the jackpot game (S815: No), the high probability state of normal symbols Since it is a case of winning in the normal symbol lottery, the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "1 second x 2 times" as the game content of the normal pattern winning game that opens the electric accessory 640a. (S816L), the process proceeds to S819L.
Also, in the processing of S814L, if it is determined that the current is not in the time saving (S814L: No), or if it is determined that the current jackpot game is in progress in the processing of S815L (S815L: Yes), the normal symbol Since it is a case of winning in the normal symbol lottery during the low probability state, as the game content of the normal pattern winning game that opens the electric accessory 640a, the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a are set to "0.2 seconds × 1 time” (S817L), and the process proceeds to S819L.
In the process of S819L, it is determined by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203uur whether the present is in the time saving (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S819L), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving (S819L: Yes) , the variation time of normal symbols is set to 3 seconds (S820L), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S819L that the time is not shortened (high probability state of normal symbols) (S819L: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (S821L), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 61st control example, the probability state of normal symbols (high probability state, low probability state), it is configured to determine the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the contents of the game per normal pattern. By configuring in this way, if it is hit by the normal design lottery executed during the time saving state (during the high probability state of the normal design), the stop timing of the normal design fluctuation is during the low probability state of the normal design. Even if it is, it is possible to execute a game per normal pattern that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a new normal symbol lottery until immediately before the high probability state of the normal symbol ends.
In addition, in this 61st control example, as described above, depending on the set probability state of the normal design, the variation time of the normal design is varied. Regardless, the variable time may be set to 3 seconds at all times. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set, a short fluctuation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.
In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the game state, or the fluctuation time can be changed according to the number of normal pattern pending balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.
In this way, by varying the degree of entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball into the second ball entrance 640 can be Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

On the other hand, in the process of S802L, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S802L: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed. (S822L), and if it is determined that the variation time has not passed (S822L: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S822L (S822L: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823L). In the process of S823L, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. In other words, setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S813L or S818L described above.
When the stop display is set by the process of S823L, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second pattern in the display mode set by the process of S813L or the process of S818L. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).
Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S824L). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (losing) (S824L: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S824L: Yes), the game content of the normal symbol winning game is the electric accessory 640a determined by the processing of S816L or S817L. (S) 825L), and the process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in the 61st control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 61st control example, based on the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining the suitability of the normal symbol (timing of processing S812L) It is configured to determine the suitability of the normal symbol and determine the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, but is not limited to this, and is set at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Normal design lottery is executed based on the probability state of the normal design, and if you are winning, it is set at the time when the normal design fluctuation is stopped and displayed (at the time when the normal design per game is started) It may be configured to determine the game content of the game per normal pattern based on the probability state of the normal pattern.
In other words, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal design and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special design are configured to be executed independently, and based on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special design, the normal In the case that the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the design is configured to be variable, the variation regarding the special design that is executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal design is executed. Depending on the result of the process (lottery process), the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct, and the low probability of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a. Occurs when a probability state is set.
In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the open pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set ) was a problem.
Therefore, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the opening control of the electric accessory 640a is performed based on the determination result. It may be configured to set a mode (opening pattern). Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In addition, in the 61st control example, based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normal symbol success/failure determination, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol (Open pattern) is configured to be set, but is not limited to this, for example, a high probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbols are correct, and the normal symbol winning game Even if the electric accessory 640a is configured to open long only when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set even at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved by Alternatively, the opening pattern of the electric accessary 640a may be set based on the game state set at the timing of judging the suitability of the normal symbol.
In addition, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal design lottery results, normal design fluctuation fluctuation time, normal design per scenario, etc.) determined in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106L of FIG. 2120) , commands indicating the contents of various information are set, and output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (S1201L) of the main process (FIG. 2124) of the main controller 110. FIG.
Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (S107L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2121 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (S107L). This through gate passage processing (S107L) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 2113), and determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area. In addition, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual propriety determination is executed (normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106L of FIG. 2120) propriety determination (see S812L of FIG. 2120) is executed), it is a process for obtaining in advance the lottery result (whether judgment result).
In the through gate passing process (S107L), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S901L). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S901L: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is acquired (S902L), and then , determines whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is greater than 4 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S903L).

In the processing of S903L, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S903L: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf is not greater than 4 (S903L: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203uuf (S904L ), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203uuc (S905L), and this process is terminated.
Next, referring to FIG. 2122, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 2122 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1001L), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.
The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.
Next, referring to FIG. 2123, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 2123 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 2123), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1101L). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1102L). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103L).
After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2084) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1104L), and if it is turned on (S1104L: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112L. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1104L: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105L), and if not stored (S1105L: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1112L.
If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105L: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106L). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.
In the process of S1112L, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112L). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1113L, S1114L).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1113L, S1114L).
Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1113L, S1114L) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.
On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .
Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1110). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process shifts to the main process which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2124, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 2124 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.
In the main process (see FIG. 2124), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201L). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch read processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 2113) is determined. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 2114) and the start winning process (see FIG. 2118). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1201L in FIG. 2124), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 2125) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.
Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202L). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the 61st control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.
When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203L), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 are executed (S1204L).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S1204L) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1204L) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.
Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1206L). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825L of the normal symbol variation process (see S106L of FIG. 2120), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary is continued until the period set by the processing of S820L and the processing of S821L in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106L of FIG. 2120) ends.
Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1207L). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209L in FIG. 2116), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Start. In this 61st control example, among the LEDs of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red If the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is lit. LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.
Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209L in FIG. 2116) has ended, it is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The variable display being performed is ended, and in the display mode set in S407L of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209L in FIG. 2116), stop symbols are displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. do.
Furthermore, in the 61st control example, when one of the special symbols is stop-displayed in a display mode (jackpot symbol) indicating a big win, the other special symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode (loss symbol) indicating a loss. and the stop display for that purpose is also executed.
Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S12808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S820 and the process of S821L of the normal symbol variation process (see S106L of FIG. 2120), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S1208L), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S823L of the normal symbol variation process (see S106L of FIG. 2120), in the second symbol display device The variation display being executed is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S813L or the process of S818L of the normal symbol variation process (see S106L of FIG. 2120). stop display (lighting display).
After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1209L). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1210L). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1210L: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201L, and the above-described processes after S1201L are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1210L: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1211L, S1212L).
First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1211L). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1211L (S1212L). In addition, in the process of this S1212L, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.
Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201L to S1208L changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.
In addition, in the processing of S1209L, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1209L: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 2122 is executed, so the processing at power-off from S1213L is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1213L), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1214L). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1215L), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1216L), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1209L is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1208, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1211 and S1212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1201L, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial setting processing (S1101L in FIG. 2123) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1201L can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.
Next, the jackpot control process (S1204L) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 2125 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1204L). This jackpot control process (S1204L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2124), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.
In the jackpot control process (S1204L), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1301L). Specifically, the process of S218L or S219L of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 2114) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1301L, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1301L: Yes), the opening command is set (S1302L), the jackpot start flag 203uuu is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203uut is set to ON. (S1303L), and the process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S1301L, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1301L: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1304L). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1304L, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S1304L: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304L, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1304L: Yes), the process of S1305L is executed. In the process of S1305L, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1305L). In the process of S1305, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1305: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S1306L).
Here, with reference to FIG. 2126, the jackpot operation setting process (S1306L) will be described. FIG. 2126 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1306L). In the jackpot operation setting process (S1306L), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the opening scenario (S1401L), and the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is read in S1401L. set based on the data (S1402L). Then, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1401L (S1403L). After that, this process ends. In addition, in the processing of S1402L, the operation of the channel solenoid 65k and the operation of the open/close door 65f1 are set for each round.
In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.
Returning to FIG. 2125, the description continues. In the process of S1305L, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1305L: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k (S1307L). If it is determined that it is time to operate (S1307L: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is turned on (S1308L). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1309L). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306L, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1307L: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1310L). The start timing of the ending effect is that the final round corresponding to the jackpot type determined in S402L of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209L in FIG. 2116) is completed, the open/close door 65f1 is closed, and the ball When the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the brushing time, has passed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1310L: Yes), an ending command is set (S1311L), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.
On the other hand, in the process of S1310L, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1310L: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1312L). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1312L, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (S1312L: Yes), the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (S1313L), and this process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1313L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the processing of S1312L, when it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1312L: No), the notification processing is executed (S1314L). Details of the notification process (S1314L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the notification process (S1314L) ends, next, a winning process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1315L), and the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is normally Abnormality processing is executed to determine whether or not the paper has been discharged (S1316L), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning process (S1315L) and the abnormality process (S1316L) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 2129 and 2130. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1306L) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 2126 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1306L). This jackpot action setting process (S1306L) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.
When this jackpot operation setting process (S1306L) is started, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S1401L), the opening operation of the probability variable solenoid is set (S1402L), and the large opening of the variable winning device 65 The opening operation of 65c is set (S1403L), and this processing ends. Although not shown, in the process of S1401L, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set.
The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1201L) of the main processing (FIG. 2124). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.
Here, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the contents of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (second round) is different depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), the ball is made to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65e3) as the second round game. It is configured so that a round game that operates the switching valve 65y is executed so as to make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific area (V gate 65e3) only for a specific period of the jackpot game that is executed for a long period of time, so that the player loses concentration. A game can be executed during a big winning game without any trouble.

In addition, in the 61st control example, when the second round of the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot A is won, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays the specific area (V gate) to the player. 65e3), as a guidance notification mode for indicating that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to 65e3), a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" is displayed is configured to be executable. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65e3) in the long-running jackpot game. Furthermore, based on the detecting means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65e3), the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 detects that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65e3). It is configured so that the characters "VGET" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for guidance. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.
It should be noted that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of the conditions. For example, "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. It is preferable to change the character color of , change the size of the display area, or change to characters with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65e3).
In addition, in the 61st control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V function for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the ball is specified by varying the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y. Although it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to flow down to the gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down, it is not limited to this. By varying the timing at which the 65a is opened according to the type of the big win, it may be possible to set a period during which the ball tends to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65e3) and a period during which it is difficult to do so. As a result, since the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be shared, even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is grasped, the big winning game this time easily makes the ball pass through the specific area (V gate 65e3). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it is a game. Further, since the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y can be standardized, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V function (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.
By executing this jackpot action setting process (see S1306L in FIG. 2126), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65e3) in the second round. Can be set to pass through. As a result, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type of the probability variable jackpot, just by the player shooting the ball in the second round, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65e3), so the jackpot game ends. It is possible to set a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) later.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1313L) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 2127 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1313L). This jackpot end process (S1313L) is executed in the jackpot control process (S1204L), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.
In this jackpot end processing (S1313L), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203uuh is on (S1501L). In the processing of S1501L, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203uuh is on (S1501L: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V gate (variable probability switch 65e3) during the big hit, so the value of the variable probability counter 203uus is set to 120 (S1502L), the value of the time saving counter 203uur is set to 120 (S1503L), and the process proceeds to S1504L. On the other hand, in the process of S1501L, if the variable probability setting flag 203uuh is off (S1501L: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203uur is set to 100, and the process proceeds to S1504L.
In the processing of S1504L, the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203uur and the value of the probability variation counter 203uus (S1504L). The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201L) of the main process (FIG. 2124) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp controller 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 203uuv according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the flag 203uut during the big hit and the variable probability setting flag 203uuh are set to OFF (S1505L), and the process is terminated.
By executing this jackpot end processing (S1313L), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the V gate (probability variable switch 65e3) during the jackpot game. .

In the notification process (S1314L), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203uul is greater than 0 (S1601L). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203uul is 0 (S1601L: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (S1602L). The end timing of the second round is determined by detecting that 10 winning balls have been won in the second round or by determining that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is time to end the second round (S1602L: Yes), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203uul (S1603L). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1602L, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second round (S1602L: No), this processing ends. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in the processing of S1603L, the notification counter 203uul becomes 0 within 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball-scoring time after the end of the 2 rounds, and the liquid crystal is displayed. Sound is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the second round, but the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the second round. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game.
In this 61st control example, by providing the notification counter 203uul, an effect is performed to draw attention to the liquid crystal over the second round from one second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.
On the other hand, in the process of S1601L, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203uul is greater than 0 (S1601L: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203uul is updated by -1 (S1604L). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203uul after updating is 0 (S1605L). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203uul is 0 (S1605L: Yes), a notification command is set (S1606L). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the audio output of "look at the liquid crystal".
Next, details of the prize winning process (S1315L) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 2129 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1315L). This winning process (S1315L) is executed in the jackpot control process (S1204L), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process (S1315L), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round valid period (S1611L). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1611L: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1611L: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1612L). When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has passed (S1612L: Yes), the winning number counter 203uuj is updated by adding 1 (S1613L). After that, the process of S1614L is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1612L: No), the process of S1614L is executed.
In the processing of S1614L, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203uuj is 10 or more (S1614L). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203uuj is 10 or more (S1614L: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1616L). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203uum is set to ON (S1617L). After that, the process of S1618L is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203uum to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 203n is closed.
On the other hand, in the processing of S1614L, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203uuj is less than 10 (S1614L: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1615L). . If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1615L: Yes), then the process of S1616L is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1615L: No), the process of S1618L is executed.
In the process of S1618L, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203uuk is greater than 0 (S1618L). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203uuk is greater than 0 (S1618L: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203uuk is decremented by -1 and updated (S1619L). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1620L). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1620L: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203uui is updated by adding 1 (S1621L). The variable probability setting flag 203uuh is set to ON (S1622L), the V winning command is set (S1623L), and then the process of S1624L is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1620L, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1620L: No), the process of S1624L is executed. In the processing of S1624L, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203uuk is 0 (S1624L). When it is determined that the operation counter 203uuk is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S1625L). The variable probability valid flag 203uuo is set to ON (S1626L). After that, this process ends. Here, when the probability variable effective flag 203uuo is set to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, when the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variable switch 65e3, the probability variable game can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1618L, when it is determined that the operation counter 203uuk is 0 (S1618L: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203uuo is on (S1627L). If the variable probability valid flag 203uuo is off (S1627L: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variable effective flag 203uuo is ON (S1627L: Yes), the probability variable effective timer 203uup is updated by adding 1 (S1628L). It is determined whether the value of the variable probability valid timer is the upper limit (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1629L). When it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203uup is the upper limit value (S1629L: Yes), the variable probability effective flag 203uuo is set to OFF (S1630L). The variable probability valid timer 203uup is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1630L). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1629L, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203uup is not the upper limit value (S1629L: No), the process of S1620L is executed.
As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203uup is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability variable switch 65e3, so the probability variable gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of ball blowing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.
Next, the abnormality processing (S1316L) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 2130 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1316L). In the abnormality process (S1316L), a process of monitoring whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.
In the abnormality process (S1316L), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S1651L). If it is outside the round valid period (S1651L: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1651L: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1652L). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1652L: Yes), the value of the ball discharge counter 203uuq is updated by adding 1 (S1653L). After that, the process of S1654L is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1652L: No), the process of S1654L is executed.

In the process of S1654L, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203uum is on (S1654L). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203uum is off (S1654L: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203uum is ON (S1654L: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203uun is updated by adding one (S1655L) because it is during the ball sweeping time period. The remaining ball timer 203uun determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in the 61st control example) has passed (S1656). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1656L: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1656L: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variable passage counter 203uui and the discharge number counter 203uuq) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prizes counter 203uuj) match (S1657L).
If it is determined that they match (S1657L: Yes), the process of S1659L is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1657L: No), an error command is set (S1658L). After that, the process of S1659L is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegality such that the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65 and the game ball is passed through the probability variable switch 65e3 even if it is a big hit C.例文帳に追加
In the process of S1659L, the remaining ball timer flag 203uum is set to OFF (S1659L), and the remaining ball timer 203uun is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1660L). After that, the winning number counter 203uuj, the discharge number counter 203uuq, and the variable probability passage counter 203uui are reset to their initial values (S1661L), and then this process is terminated.
<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the 61st control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2131 to 2155, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 2131, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2131 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.
When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001L). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of S2121L (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S2002L). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 2132, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2118L in FIG. 2132), it executes power-off processing in S2121L. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2121L is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.
If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002L: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2121L. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003L).
Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006L. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003L:Yes), it will transfer to S2004L and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003L: No), the process proceeds to S2008L.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003L: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004L. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2121L was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003L: No), and the process proceeds to S2008L.
If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002L: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2121L, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S2004L, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.
In the processing of S2004L, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004L). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .
If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005L: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006L). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005L: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007L), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008L, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008L). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2121L is executed (see S2120L in FIG. 2132). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2121L is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2121L has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008LYes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009L), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010L), and then interrupt permission is enabled. After setting (S2011L), the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .
On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008L is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008L: No), S2009L, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010L, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010L), interrupt permission is set. (S2011L), and shifts to the main process.
The reason why the clearing process of S2009L is skipped is that when the process of S2008L is reached from S2004L through the process of S2006L, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004L, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.
Next, referring to FIG. 2132, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2132 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101L was executed (S2101L). If not (S2101L: No), the process proceeds to S2112L without performing the processes of S2102L to S2111L. In the process of S2101L, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed because S2102L to S2111L are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S2112L and the variable display setting process of S2113L are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2112L in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2113L in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101L (S2101L: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103L to S2115L are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102L ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108L, which will be described later (S2103L), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104L). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . It should be noted that if it is not at the time of power-on, the process proceeds to S2105L without notifying by the power-on notifying process.
In the process of S2105L, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106L). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223uub is performed.
After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107L). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L) monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22A operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect. It is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22A by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22A is set in the display control device 114. FIG. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L) ends, lamp editing processing is executed (S2108L), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109L). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109L, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110L). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2008L is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2009L is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.
After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, drive timer monitoring process is executed (S2111L), and then effect update process is executed (S2112L). After that, effect update processing is executed (S2113L). In this effect update process (S2113L), various counters of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 and various timer values are updated. A process for executing (character object effect, display effect) is executed. Details of the rendering update process (S2113L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
After effect update processing (S2113L), motor scenario processing is executed (S2113L), motor command monitoring processing is executed (S2114L), motor output processing is executed (S2115L), and the process proceeds to S2116L. The motor scenario process (S2113L) is executed in place of the motor scenario process (see Y113L in FIG. 1984) in the 60th control example described above, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the motor command monitoring process (S2114L) is the same process as the motor command monitoring process (see Y114L in FIG. 2079) in the 60th control example described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, in the motor output process (S2115L), the same process as the motor output process (see Y115L in FIG. 2080) in the 60th control example described above is executed, so description thereof will be omitted.
In the process of S2116L, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2116L). Details of this command determination process (S2116L) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2117L. In the process of S2117L, a variable display setting process is executed (S2117L). In this variable display setting process (S2117L), a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third pattern display device 81. . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process (S2117L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Then, when the variable display setting process (S2117L) ends, it is determined whether or not information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2118L). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2118L (S2118L: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2120L), and the power-off processing is executed (S2121L). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2122L), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.
On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S2118L (S2118L: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2119L), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2119L: No), the process returns to S2101L, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2119L: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .
Next, referring to FIG. 2133, the command determination process (S2116L) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2133 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2116L). This command determination process (S2116L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2132) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2116L), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the status command from main controller 110 is read. is received (S2201L). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S2201L: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S2202L), processing according to other commands is executed (S2217L), and the process returns to the main processing. This state command reception process (S2202L) is a process for setting a display mode corresponding to the changed game state in the third display control device 81 when the game state is changed in the main controller 110. FIG. Details of the status command reception process (S2202L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set so as to be transmitted to the device 114 .
On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S2201L: No), then it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from main controller 110 (S2203L). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2203L: Yes), the variation start flag 223uud is set to ON (S2204L), the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2205L), and other (S2217L), and returns to the main process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2203L: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2206L). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2206L: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223uue of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2207L), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2208L). ), execute processing according to other commands (S2217L), and return to the main processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see S2117L in FIG. 2140), which will be described later, is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2206L: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S2209L). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (S2209L: Yes), whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command Determined, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud of the main controller 110 (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1), or the special symbol of the main controller 110 The value of the symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203uue (the number of times N2 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is extracted, and this is converted to the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223uub of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter. 223uuc (S2210L). In addition, in the processing of S2210L, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223uuc is set. After the process of S2210L ends, the process according to other commands is executed (S2217L), and the process returns to the main process.
Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or when a lottery of special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is selected, every time the start winning prize is detected or the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S2210L. The values of the number counter 223uub and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223uuc can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203uue of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223uuc of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203uud of the main controller 110 or Even if the value of the 2 pending ball number counter 203uue deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223uub or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223uuc of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning prize or the special symbol lottery. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 uud or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203 uue of the main controller 110 . In addition, when the process of S2210L is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223uub and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223uuc is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .
In the processing of S2209L, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2209L: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from main controller 110 (S2211L). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2211L: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S2212L), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S2217L), and the process returns to the main process. This winning command processing includes a winning command (winning information command) set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, and a normal symbol lottery lottery right set when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process that is executed when receiving a winning information command or a V winning command that is set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during a jackpot game. Details of the winning command process will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, in the processing of S2211L, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2211L: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2213L). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213L: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2214L), other processes are executed according to the command (S2217L), and the process returns to the main process. In this stop command process, when a stop command is received from the main control device 110, that is, various processes are executed at the special symbol stop timing. Details of the stop command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2213L, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213L: No), it is determined whether a jackpot related command has been received (S2215L). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S2215L: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S2216L), a process according to other commands is executed (S2217L), and the process returns to the main process. This jackpot-related processing is to perform processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the device 110 is executed. Details of the jackpot-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, referring to FIG. 2134, the status command reception processing (S2202L) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2134 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S2202L). This state command reception process (S2202L) is executed in the command determination process (see S2116L in FIG. 2133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, a process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the state command reception processing (S2202L) will be described below.
When the status command reception process (S2202L) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S2301L). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state storage area 223uuh differs from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S2301L, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S2301L: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S2301L: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S2302L).
In the processing of S2302L, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S2302L: Yes), the display command indicating the normal mode is issued. set (S2303L) and proceed to the processing of S2304L.

In the processing of S2302L, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S2302L: No), then the game state after the change It is determined whether it is a time saving state (S2305L), and if it is determined that the gaming state is a time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state) (S2305L: Yes), the time saving medium counter 223uui A value of 100 is set (S2306L), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S2307L), and the process proceeds to S2304L.
In the processing of S2305L, if it is determined that the gaming state does not have a time saving state (S2305L: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is a variable probability state (S2308L), and the gaming state is a variable probability state (The state command received this time is a command indicating a probability changing state) (S2308L: Yes) If it is determined, the value of the probability changing counter 223uuj is set to 120 (S2309L), and whether the V notification flag 223uum is on It is determined whether or not (S2310L). When the V notification flag 223uum is off (S2310L: No), the process proceeds to S2306L described above. When the V notification flag 223uum is ON (S2310L: Yes), the V notification flag 223uum is set to OFF (S2311L), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S2312L), and the process proceeds to S2304L. .
In the process of S2304L, the game state set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223sh is set in the past state area (S2304L), and the information indicated by the received state command is set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223sh. A corresponding game state is set (S2304L), and this processing is terminated.
Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the command set in the processing of S2303L, S2307L and S2312L, the variable effect display corresponding to the game state is executed. Thus, in the sixty-first control example, the sound lamp control device 113 can be used to change various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. A type (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. That is, it outputs to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.
In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.
By configuring in this way, when proper display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating proper information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.
In this 61st control example, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. On the sound lamp control device 113 side, the current game state and the variation pattern command for display based on the received variation pattern may be configured to set

Next, with reference to FIG. 2135, the contents of the winning command process (see S2212L) executed in the command determination process (see S2112L in FIG. 2135) will be described. FIG. 2135 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (S2212L). This winning command process (S2212L) is a winning command (winning information command) set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, or when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process that is executed when receiving a winning information command for a normal figure or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during a jackpot game.
When the winning command process (S2212L) is executed, first, the information of the winning command (winning information command) received this time is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223uua (S2401L). ), a special figure winning information command process is executed (S2402L). The details of the special figure winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When the special figure winning information command processing (S2402L) ends, then the command received this time is the V winning command (set when the ball flows down to the variable probability switch (specific gate) 65e3 in the winning processing (S1315L) command (see S1623L)) (S2403L) If the received command is a V winning command (S2403L: Yes), the V winning flag 223uul is set to ON (S2404L), and the V effect It is determined whether the execution flag 223uuk is on (S2405).If it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223uuk is on (S2405: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223uuk is set to off (S2406L), and the V A display command for notifying the winning is set (S2407), the V notification flag 223uum is set to ON (S2408L), other processes are executed (S2409L), and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S2403L, if the received command is not the V winning command (S2403L: No), the process of S2404L to S2408L is skipped and the process proceeds to S2409L.

Also, in the process of S2405L, when the V effect execution flag 223uuk is not ON (S2405L: No), the processes of S2406L to S2408L are skipped and the process proceeds to S2409L.
In the process of S2409L, other processes are executed (S2409L), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2136, the contents of the special figure winning information command processing (S2402L) executed in the winning command processing (see S2212L in FIG. 2135) will be described. FIG. 2136 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure winning information command process (S2402L).
When the special figure winning information command process (S2402L) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a special figure winning command (S2501L). If the received command is a special figure winning command (S2501L: Yes), the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the secondary state setting area 223uuh (S2502L), and the set game Based on the state and the information included in the received winning command, the display mode of the reserved symbols is determined (S2503L), the display command for indicating the determined display mode is set (S2504L), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the 61st control example, when a special figure winning command output from the main control device 110 is received, the winning command included in the received winning command according to the set gaming state It is configured to be able to decide whether or not to suggest information to the player by using the display mode of the reserved symbols.
Specifically, when the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed and a normal state is set in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of one special symbol variation, the first special When the winning command corresponding to the design is received, the information contained in the received winning command (information about winning the jackpot) is used to change the display mode of the reserved design displayed on the display surface of the third design display device 81. A display effect (suspended change effect) that can be suggested to the player is executed by letting the player enter, and a winning command corresponding to the second special symbol is received even in the state where the normal state, which is the same game state, is set. When it does, it is configured not to execute the pending change effect.
In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed and a time saving state in which a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of one special symbol variation is set, the second special symbol is supported. When the winning command is received, the information included in the received winning command (information about winning the jackpot) is changed to the display mode of the pending symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. When a winning command corresponding to the first special symbol is received even in a state in which a display effect (holding change effect) that can be suggested to the player is executed and a time saving state that is the same game state is set. is configured not to execute the pending change effect.
By configuring in this way, only the reserved symbols corresponding to the type of the special symbol lottery to be mainly executed can be subjected to execution of the reserved change performance, so that the execution frequency of the reserved change performance can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2137, the contents of the stop command process (S2214L) executed in the command determination process (see S2112L of FIG. 2135) will be described. FIG. 2137 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop command process (S2214L). When a stop command is received from the main controller 110, that is, various processes are executed at the timing of stopping the special symbols.
When the stop command process (S2214L) is executed, it is determined whether the accessory abnormality flag 223uw is set to ON (S2601L). If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable control of the movable accessory 900 during the performance of the role product (movable role product performance) executed in the variable performance of , "00H ” is not set (S2604L), and the processing is terminated.
Also, in the process of S2601L, if it is determined that the accessory abnormality flag 223uw is not set to ON (S2601L: No), then it is determined whether the accessory drive flag 223uq is set to ON (S2602L ), when it is determined that it is set to on (S2602L: Yes), that is, when the current variable performance is a variable performance including a role performance, and a stop command is received, that is, the corresponding special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, if it is determined that the performance of the character product has not ended, the next prohibition flag 223ux is set to ON (S2603L), the process proceeds to S2604L, and then this process ends. .
On the other hand, in the processing of S2602L, if it is determined that the character product drive flag 223uq is not set to ON, that is, at the time when the corresponding special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the character product effect has been normally completed. If so, "00H" is set in the drive status storage area 223uy (S2605L), the process of S2604 is executed, and this process ends.

In this 61st control example, when a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is 60 seconds or more is received, the variation performance pattern including the character performance is selectable, and after the variation performance is started, It is configured to execute the character performance for 20 seconds at maximum from the time when 5 seconds have passed. In other words, when the role product performance is normally executed, at the timing when the corresponding special symbol variation ends, the role product performance has already ended, and the role product drive flag 223uq is set to OFF. Become.
However, in various movable controls during performance of the role, various sensors (origin sensor 920, operation When the position of the movable accessory 900 cannot be specified accurately due to the detection failure of the position sensor 930), the restoration operation process is executed, so that the performance period of the role product presentation (movement control period of the movable accessory 900) is shortened. It can be long.
In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example executes the return operation process similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the 60th control example described above, and when the movable accessory 900 is returned to the normal position, By making it possible to continuously execute the performance of the role product, even if a low-level malfunction occurs in the movable accessory 900, the performance of the role product can be executed to the end.
In this way, when the returning operation process is configured to be executable, there is a possibility that the ending timing of the character production is delayed, instead of facilitating execution of the character production to the end. Therefore, in this 61st control example, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not the character production has ended at the time of receiving the stop command for indicating that the special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed (at the end of the variation production period). However, when it is determined that the performance of the character is not finished, a performance pattern not including the performance of the character is set as the performance pattern of the variable performance to be executed next.

By configuring in this way, even if the end timing of the character object production is delayed, it is possible to suppress the start of a new character object production while the movable accessory 900 is not positioned at the origin position. be able to.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2138, the contents of the jackpot related process (S2216L) will be described. FIG. 2138 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S2216L). In the jackpot-related processing (S2216L), processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.
In the jackpot related process (S2216L), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S2701L). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S2701L: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2702L). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2102L) of the main process (see FIG. 2132). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .
Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot C (3R short-time jackpot) (S2703L), and if it is determined to be jackpot C (S2703L: Yes), the ending display mode indicating entering the chance mode is set. (S2704L), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot C (S2703L: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a jackpot A (10R probability variable jackpot) (S2505L), and if it is not a jackpot A (S2705L: No ), that is, in the case of a jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), the process proceeds to S2704L.

Here, the chance mode in the 61st control example is configured as a mode in which the player cannot identify whether the set game state is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Even if the display mode set after the end is not the super chance mode (display mode set only when the variable probability state is set), it is possible to expect that the variable probability state is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
However, during the jackpot game executed when the probability variable jackpot is won, the V effect (the effect for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the specific area (variable probability switch 65e3)) is executed. Since the player can recognize that he or she has won the variable probability jackpot, there is a possibility that the chance mode set after the end of the jackpot game in which the V performance is not executed is not in the variable probability state.
Therefore, in the 61st control example, when the jackpot B, which is a variable probability jackpot, is won, the V effect is not executed during execution of the jackpot game. By constructing in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current chance mode is the probability variable state or the time saving state, and the player's desire to play is suppressed by making him expect that the probability variable state is set. be able to.
On the other hand, in the processing of S2705L, when it is determined that the jackpot A is (S2705L: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223uuk is set to ON (S2706L), and the super chance mode is entered (variable probability state is set). is set (S2707L), and the process ends.

Thus, in the sixty-first control example, different ending display modes are set according to the set jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), and are executed this time at the timing when the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be played is set in advance. By configuring in this way, various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information for indicating the number of won prize balls and control during execution) Control for displaying information for indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed. Since there is no need to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced.
In addition, in the 61st control example, the process of setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation, or the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period when the control processing is small in the jackpot game period. You can
On the other hand, in the processing of S2701L, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2701L: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2708L), and the round number command has been received If so (S2708L: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2710L), and it is determined whether the current number of rounds is 2 rounds (V rounds) (S2710L). When it is determined that it is the second round (V round) (S2710L: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223uuk is on (S2711L). When it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223uuk is ON (S2711L: Yes), a display command for guiding the V prize is set (S2712L), and this process ends. Also, in the processing of S2710L, when the number of rounds this time is not 2 rounds (V round), that is, when it is determined that a round game other than the second round is started (S2710L: No), in the processing of S2711L, V Also when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223uuk is off (S2711L: No), this process is terminated as it is.
If it is determined in the process of S2708L that the round number command has not been received (S2708L: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2713L), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2713L: Yes ), the ending process is executed (S2714L), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2713L that the ending command has not been received (S2713L: No), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 2139, the ending process (S2714L) will be described. FIG. 2139 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S2714L). This ending process (S2714L) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command is received in the above-described jackpot-related process (see F2216L in FIG. 2139), and an ending display mode executed during the ending period. is to execute a process for finally determining the
When the ending process (S2714L) is executed, it is first determined whether the V winning flag 223uul is set to ON (S2801L), and if it is determined to be ON (S2801L: Yes), the V winning The flag 223uul is set to off (S2802L), execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S2805L), and this processing ends. Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223uul is not set to ON in the process of S2801L (S2801L: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223uuk is ON (S2803L), and the V effect execution flag 223uuk is determined. is off (S2803L: No), the process proceeds directly to S2804L.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803L that the V effect execution flag 223uuk is ON (S2803L: Yes), a display switching command is set for switching the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period. (S2804L), and the process proceeds to S2805L.
When the display switching command is set in the process of S2804L, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set in advance corresponding to the setting of the super chance mode is changed to the chance mode. A process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the setting of the mode is executed. In the sixty-first control example, the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, referring to FIG. 2140, the contents of the variable display setting process (S2117L) will be described. FIG. 2140 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S2117L). This variable display setting process (S2117L) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 2132) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .
In the fluctuation display setting process (S2117L), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223uud provided in the RAM 223 is ON (F2901). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223uud is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2901L: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2907L. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223uud is on (S2901L: Yes), then the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S2902L), and the fluctuation start flag 223uud is turned off. (S2903L), and then acquire the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S2205L of the command determination process (see FIG. 2133) (S2904L). Then, a variation effect setting process for generating a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (S2905L), and the display variation pattern command is set ( S2906L), and shifts to the processing of S2907L. Details of the variable effect setting process (S2905L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process of S2907L, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223uue provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2907L). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223uue is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S2907L: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this processing is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223uue is on (S2907L: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223uue that has been set to ON is set to OFF (S2908L), and then command determination processing (FIG. 2133 ) is acquired (S2909L), and the extracted stop type is set as it is (S2910L). After that, a stop type command for display is set (S2911L), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2141, the contents of the variable display setting process (S2905L) will be described. FIG. 2141 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S2905L). This variable display setting process (S2905L) is executed when setting the variable effect of the special symbols in the variable display setting process (see S2117L in FIG. 2140), and corresponds to the set game state. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect is executed.

When the variable display setting process (S2905L) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223uui is greater than 0 (S3001L). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter uui is not greater than 0 (S3001L: No), that is, if the present is not in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the processing of S3002L and S3003L is skipped, and the processing of S3004L is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223uui is greater than 0 (S3001L: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223uui is subtracted by 1 (S3002L), and the value of the time saving counter 223uui after the subtraction is indicated. is set (S3003L), and the process proceeds to S3004L.
In the process of S3004L, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 223uuj is greater than 0 (S3004L). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 223uuj is not greater than 0 (S3004L: No), that is, if it is determined that the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol is not set, S3005L to S3007L Skip the process and move to the process of S3008L.
On the other hand, in the process of S3004L, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223uuj is greater than 0 (S3004L: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 223uuj is subtracted by 1 (S3005L), and then the display mode is super It is determined whether the chance mode is set (S3006L). When the super chance mode is set (S3006L: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the value of the variable probability counter 223uuj after the subtraction. On the other hand, in the process of S3006L, when the super chance mode is not set (S3006L: No), the process of S3007L is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3008L.
In the processing of S3008, the game state stored in the sub-state storage area 223uuh is read (S3008L), and it is determined whether the game state is the time saving state (S3009L). When it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S3009L: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223uui is 1 (S3010L), and when it is determined to be 1 (S3010L: Yes), the effect result decides the effect mode of the time saving end suggesting effect that ends the chance mode (S3011L), and proceeds to the process of S3012L. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223uui is not 1 (S3010L: No), the process of S3011L is skipped and the process proceeds to S3012. In the process of S3012L, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined, and the process proceeds to S3017L.

In the processing of S3009L, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S3009L: No), then it is determined whether it is in the variable probability state (S3011L). When it is determined that it is in a variable probability state (S3013L: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223uui is 1 (S3014L), and when it is determined to be 1 (S3014L: Yes), production The effect mode of the time-saving end suggestion effect that results in promotion to the super chance mode is determined (S3015L), and the process proceeds to S3012L.
Thus, in the 61st control example, when the probability variable state is set based on winning the jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), even if the chance mode is set after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined number of times ( 100 times), when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, it is promoted to the super chance mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the chance mode may be promoted to the super chance mode in the final change, and when the remaining number of times of the chance mode becomes 0, the player can It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.
In the process of S3013L, if it is determined that it is not the probability variable state (S3013L: No), since the normal state is set, the normal state production mode determination process is executed (S3016L), and then the above-described S3017L Execute the process and terminate this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2142, the contents of the normal state effect mode determination process (S3016L) will be described. FIG. 2142 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state effect mode determination process (S3016L).

When the normal state effect mode determination process (S3016L) is executed, first, it is determined whether the accessory abnormality flag 223uw is set to ON (S3101L), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3101L: No), it is determined whether the next prohibition flag 223ux is set to ON (S3102L), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3102L: No), it is possible to normally execute the performance of the character. Since it is the situation, next, based on the acquired variation pattern, the variation performance pattern selection table 222uua is referred to and the variation performance type is determined (S3103L).
Then, it is determined whether the variable performance type determined in the processing of S3103L is the variable performance type including the character performance (S3104L). ), the driving standby flag 223up is set to ON (S3105L), the data type of "00H" is set in the driving status storage area 223uy (S3106L), and the mission selection table 222uub is referenced to select the mission contents (mission pattern type). Determine (S3107L).
Next, information corresponding to the mission content (mission pattern type) determined in the process of S3107L is stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur (S3108L), and the value of the remaining chance number counter 223uuq is set to "3" (S3109L). In addition, an effect mode corresponding to the determined variable effect type is determined (S3110L), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S3111L), and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S3101L, if it is determined that the accessory abnormality flag 223uw is set to ON (S3101L: Yes), that is, in a state where an abnormality occurs in the operation of the movable accessory 900, the acquired variation Based on the pattern, a variable effect type that does not execute the role object effect is determined (S3113L), the above-described processes of S3110L and S3111L are executed, and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a physical load on the movable accessory 900 by executing a new role product performance in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the operation of the movable accessory 900. can be suppressed.
Also, in the process of S3102L, if it is determined that the next prohibition flag 223ux is set to ON (S3102L: Yes), that is, at the timing when the previous special symbol variation (variation effect) ends, the movable accessory 900 If it is determined that the operation is controlled normally but is not located at the retracted position, the next prohibition flag 223ux is set to OFF (S3112L), the processing of S3113L described above is executed, S3110L described above, and The process of S3111L is executed, and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2143, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2143 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 2132) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to enhance the effect. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection button 600 in order to execute an effect according to the operation of the player.
In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L), first, the selection button 600 (volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or light amount adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e)) is pressed. It is determined whether there is any operation (S3201L). If it is determined that there has been an operation (S3201L: Yes), a mode corresponding to the type of the operated selection button is determined (S3202L), and a display command for indicating the display mode corresponding to the determined mode is issued. Set (S3203L), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201L that the selection button 600 has not been operated (S3201L: No), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (depressed) (S3204L), and the process proceeds to the frame button 22. If it is determined that there is no information indicating the operation (pressing) of (S3204L: No), this processing ends.
If it is determined in the process of S3204L that the frame button 22 has been operated (depressed) (S3204L: Yes), then the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is read out (S3205L), It is determined whether the stored data type is "03H" (S3206L), and if it is determined to be "03H" (S3206L: Yes), the first movable role object production in the role object production is currently in progress ( vibrating), the value of the press counter 223uus is incremented by 1 (S3207L), it is determined whether the value after the addition is the mission attainment value (S3208L), and if it is determined to be the mission attainment value ( S3208L: Yes), determine the display mode indicating mission arrival (S3209L), set the vibration scenario end flag 223ut to ON (S3210L), store the data type "04H" in the drive status storage area 223uy (S3211L), The switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S3212L), the above-described processing of S3217L is executed, and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S3208L, if it is determined that the value after the addition is not the mission achievement value (S3208L: No), the process of S3209L to S3212L is skipped, and the display mode showing the information corresponding to the value of the pressing counter 223uus is skipped. (Display mode displayed in the number-of-presses display area Dm62a of the small display area Dm62 of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is determined (S3213L), the process of S3217L described above is executed, and this process ends. .
Then, in the process of S3206L, if it is determined that the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is not "03H" (S3206L), then the stored data type is "04H". (S3214L), and if it is determined to be "04H" (S3214L: Yes), that is, the current state is during the mission period and the end condition is already satisfied (the state in which the mission has been reached) If it is determined that it is, in order to execute an additional effect based on the pressing operation to the frame button 22 this time, the additional effect mode setting process is executed (S3215L), and then the process of S3217L described above is executed. , the process ends. Details of the additional effect mode setting process (S3215L) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3214L, if it is determined that the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is not "04H" (S3214L: No), other modes corresponding to the pressing operation are determined (S3216L), and S3217L. , and terminate this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2143, the processing contents of the additional effect mode setting processing (S3215L) will be described. FIG. 2143 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the additional effect mode setting process (S3215L). This additional effect mode setting process (S3215L) is a process executed in the above-described frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S2107L in FIG. 2142). is established, it is executed to set the effect mode of the additional effect.
When the additional effect mode setting process (S3215L) is executed, first, the value of the pressing counter 223uus is incremented by 1 (S3301L), the display mode indicating the information corresponding to the value of the pressing counter 223uus is determined (S3302L), and the The effect mode of the additional effect is determined by referring to the effect selection table 222uuc (S3303L), and this process is terminated.
For the effect mode of the additional effect determined by this process, a display command is set by the process of S3217L executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S2107L in FIG. 2143).

Next, the processing contents of the drive timer monitoring processing (S2111L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2145 is a flowchart showing the details of the drive timer monitoring process (S2111L). This driving timer monitoring process (S2111L) differs from the driving timer monitoring process (see Y111L in FIG. 2072) in the above-described 60th control example in that the conditions for executing the return operation are changed. When it is determined that the elapsed time (the value of the drive timer 223uj) after the flag 223uu is set to ON is "2800" or more, that is, during the return operation, the movable control of the movable accessory 900 returns to the normal state. If not (when it is determined that the movement control is abnormal), part of the processing content that is executed has been changed. There is a difference.
In the 61st control example, detailed description of the same processing contents as the driving timer monitoring processing (see Y111L in FIG. 2072) in the 60th control example described above will be omitted. When the driving timer monitoring process (S2111L) is executed, first, the same processes from S3401L to S3404L as the driving timer monitoring process (see Y111L in FIG. 2072) in the 60th control example described above are executed. If it is determined that the scenario execution flag 223ut is not set to ON (S3404L: No), then it is determined whether the value of the drive timer 223uj is smaller than 4000 (S3405L). (S3405L: Yes), this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S3405L, if it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj is not less than 4000 (4000 or more) (S3405L: No), the drive timer monitoring process in the 60th control example (see FIG. 2072). Y111L) are executed from S3407L to S3411L, and the process ends.
That is, in the 61st control example, the contents defined in various action scenario tables set in a state where the accessory driving flag 223uq is set to ON are changed from the 60th control example described above. Since the maximum value of the time required for one process is increased, the threshold for determining that normal operation is not performed using the drive timer 223uj is changed to 4000.

If it is determined in the process of S3403L that the return support flag 223uu is set to ON (S3403L: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the driving timer 223uj is smaller than 2800 (S3412L). If it is determined that it is above (S3412L: No), the accessory abnormality flag 223uw is set to ON (S3416L), and the data type "17H" indicating an abnormal state is set in the drive status storage area 223uy ( S3417L), various scenario execution flags are set to OFF (S3418L), the value of the driving timer 223uj is set to 0, and this processing ends.
With this configuration, in a situation where an error notification command is set due to an abnormality in the movable control of the movable accessory 900, the accessory abnormality flag 223uw is set to ON, so the variable effect setting process (S2905L in FIG. 2141 (see S3016L in FIG. 2142) executed in normal state production mode determination processing (see S3016L of FIG. 2142), it is possible not to determine the variable production in which a new role product production is executed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2146, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S2112L) will be described. FIG. 2146 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering update process (S2112L). In this effect update process (S2112L), in contrast to the effect update process (see Y112L in FIG. 2073) of the 60th control example described above, when it is determined that the driving standby flag 223up is not set to ON (S3503L: No) Then, it is determined whether the character product drive flag 223uq is set to ON (S3509L), and when it is determined that the character product drive flag 223uq is set to ON (S3509L: Yes), the character product effect update process ( S3510L) is executed, a display command is set for indicating the display mode corresponding to the determined various effect contents (S3511L), other various counters and various timers are updated (S3512L), and this processing is executed. , and that the reference numerals assigned to the respective processes are changed for convenience of explanation. Since the processing other than the content described above is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2147, the process contents of the role product effect update process (S3510L) will be described. FIG. 2147 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the role product presentation update processing (S3510L). This character object effect update process (S3510L) is a process executed in the effect update process (see S2112L in FIG. 2146) executed in the main process (see FIG. 2132) of the sound lamp control device 113 described above, This is a process that is periodically executed every 1 millisecond. In this character object effect update process (S3510L), the display mode of various display effects during the period when the character object effect is being executed is displayed in accordance with the timing when the new data type is stored in the driving condition storage area 223uy. process is executed.

Specifically, when the performance update process (S3510L) is executed, first, it is determined whether the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S3601L). Since the switching flag 223uuu is a flag that is set to ON when a new data type is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy, the setting status of the switching flag 223uuu is determined in the process of S3601L, It is determined that a new data type is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy. By configuring in this way, the display mode of various display effects corresponding to the character effect is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the timing when the new data type is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy. can do.
If it is determined in the process of S3601L that the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S3601L: Yes), then the switching flag 223uuu is set to OFF (S3602L) and stored in the drive status storage area 223uy. The data type is read (S3603L).
Next, it is determined whether the data type read out in the process of S3603L is "01H" (S3604L), and if it is determined to be "01H" (S3604L: Yes), the character effect is started. A presentation mode including a display mode for indicating that is determined (S3605L), the process of S3623L described later is executed, and this process ends.
If it is determined in the process of S3603L that the read data type is not "01H" (S3604L: No), then it is determined whether the read data type is "02H" (S3606L). ), if it is determined to be "02H" (S3606L: Yes), the production mode including the display mode for indicating the mission content is determined (S3607L), the process of S3623L described later is executed, and this process ends. do.

If it is determined in the process of S3603L that the read data type is not "02H" (S3606L: No), then it is determined whether the read data type is "03H" (S3608L). ), if it is determined to be "03H" (S3608L: Yes), the effect mode including the display mode for indicating the start of the mission is determined (S3609L), the process of S3623L described later is executed, and this process ends. do.
If it is determined in the process of S3603L that the read data type is not "03H" (S3608L: No), then it is determined whether the read data type is "04H" (S3610L), If it is determined to be "04H" (S3610L: Yes), the effect mode including the display mode for indicating mission achievement is determined (S3611L), the process of S3623L described later is executed, and this process ends. In the process of S3610L, if it is determined that the data type read in the process of S3603L is not "04H" (S3610L: No), then the read data type is "05H" to "07H". It is determined whether it is (S3612L), and if it is determined that it is one of "05H" to "07H" (S3612L: Yes), the effect mode including the display mode corresponding to the effect result of the additional effect It decides (S3613L), executes the processing of S3623L, which will be described later, and terminates this processing.
On the other hand, in the process of S3612L, if it is determined that the data type read out in the process of S3603L is none of "05H" to "07H" (S3612L: No), then the read data type is Either "08H" or "10H" is determined (S3614L), and if it is determined to be either "08H" or "10H" (S3614L: Yes), the second period display selection table 222uud , the display mode for the second period is determined (S3615L), the effect mode including the determined display mode is determined (S3616L), the process of S3623L described later is executed, and the process ends.
In the process of S3614L, if it is determined that the data type read in the process of S3603L is not "08H" or "10H" (S3614L: No), then the data type read is "12H" to It is determined whether it is one of "14H" (S3617L), and if it is determined that it is one of "12H" to "14H" (S3617L: Yes), it is saved by referring to the save mode selection table 222uue. The display mode during the period is determined (S3618L), the effect mode including the determined display mode is determined (S3619L), the process of S3623L described later is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S3617L, if it is determined that the read data type is not "12H" to "14H" (S3617L: No), then whether the read data type is "17H" is determined. is determined (S3620L), and if it is determined to be "17H" (S3620L: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol is determined (S3621L), and the processing of S3623L described later is executed, End this process.
Then, in the process of S3620L, if it is determined that the read data type is not "17H" (S3620L: No), an effect including a display mode corresponding to the data type stored in the other drive status storage area 223uy The mode is determined (S3622L), the elapsed time update process is executed (S3623L), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3601L that the switching flag 223uuu is not set to ON (S3601L: No), the elapsed time update process is also executed (S3623L), and this process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2148, the processing contents of the elapsed time update process (S3623L) executed in the role product effect update process (see S3510L in FIG. 2147) will be described. FIG. 2148 is a flow chart showing the contents of the elapsed time update process (S3623L). In this elapsed time update process (S3623L), a process for setting the display mode of the variable effect is executed according to the elapsed time after the variable effect is started.
Specifically, when the elapsed time update process (S3623L) is executed, first, the value of the variable time timer is read (S3651L), and it is determined whether 25 seconds have passed (S3652L), and 25 seconds have passed. If it is determined that it has (S3652L: Yes), the display command for starting the effect mode in which the ready-to-win display mode is displayed among the variable effects of this time is set (S3653L), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S3652L that the variation time has not passed 25 seconds (S3652L: No), the process of S3653L is skipped and this process ends.

As described above, in the 61st control example, when a variable effect including a character effect is executed, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in correspondence with the driving situation of the movable character object 900. It is configured to determine the timing of displaying the display mode to be displayed. By configuring in this way, when a slight time loss occurs when controlling the movement of the movable accessory 900 (for example, due to a step-out, the movable accessory 900 is released at a timing later than the regular time. Since the display mode can be displayed according to the driving situation of the movable accessory 900 even when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at a specific position (for example, the operating position), a variable performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. can be executed.
Furthermore, when a variable effect including a character effect is executed, an allowable period (25 seconds from the start of the change) is provided in the period for displaying the display mode of various display effects according to the driving situation of the movable accessory 900. When the allowable period is exceeded, regardless of the driving status of the movable accessory 900, the display effect is executed. By configuring in this way, the special symbol variation time passes without displaying the performance result of the variation performance executed within the limited period of the special symbol variation time, and the performance that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. It is possible to reliably prevent it from being lost.
Next, the processing contents of the motor scenario processing (S2113L) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2149 is a flow chart showing the contents of the motor scenario process (S2113L). This motor scenario process (S2113L) is a process for executing a movable control process for the driving motor 905, which is a driving source for driving the movable accessory 900, and is the motor scenario in the 60th control example described above. In addition to the processing (see Y113L in FIG. 2074), a process related to the second action scenario (action scenario corresponding to the second effect of the movable accessory) is added, and the advance scenario process (Y505L) is replaced by the advance scenario process ( S3706L), executing vibration scenario processing (S3707L) instead of vibration scenario processing (Y506L), executing evacuation scenario processing (S3709L) instead of evacuation scenario processing (Y507L), For convenience of explanation, the difference is that the reference numerals attached to each process are changed. Since other processing contents are the same, the description thereof is omitted.
When the motor scenario processing (S2113L) is executed, first, the same processing from S3701L to S3703L as the motor scenario processing (see Y113L in FIG. 2074) in the 60th control example described above is executed, and the evacuation scenario is executed in the processing of S3703L. When it is determined that the flag 223us is not set to ON (S3703L: No), it is determined whether the second operation scenario execution flag 223uv is set to ON (S3704L), and the second operation scenario execution flag 223uv is set to ON. (S3704L: Yes), the second operation scenario process is executed (S3708L), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2150, the contents of advance scenario processing (S3706L) executed in motor scenario processing (see S2113L in FIG. 2149) will be described. FIG. 2150 is a flow chart showing advance scenario processing (S3706L). In this advancing scenario process (S3706L), as in the advancing scenario process of the 60th control example (see Y505L in FIG. 2075), movable control is performed to move the movable accessory 900 positioned at the storage position to the operating position. is executed.
This advancing scenario process (S3706L) differs from the advancing scenario process of the 60th control example (see Y505L in FIG. , "03H") in the drive status storage area 223uy, and the processing contents specified in the set operation scenario are different, so that the numerical values used in various discrimination processes are varied. and that the reference numerals assigned to each process are changed for convenience of explanation.
Next, referring to FIG. 2151, the contents of the vibration scenario process (S3707L) will be described. FIG. 2151 is a flow chart showing vibration scenario processing (S3707L). In this vibration scenario processing (S3707L), similar to the vibration scenario processing of the 60th control example (see Y506L in FIG. 2076), the movable accessory 900 executed during the vibration presentation (movable accessory first presentation) Vibration control is performed.
This vibration scenario process (S3707L) differs from the vibration scenario process (see Y506L in FIG. ) is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy, and the numerical values used in various discrimination processes are varied by varying the processing contents specified in the set operation scenario. , the vibration scenario repetition process (S3916L) is executed when repeating the operation scenario (vibration scenario table 222uugb) set during vibration control, and after the vibration scenario table 222uugb is repeatedly executed a specified number of times (three times), the 2 control (movable accessory second effect) to set the action scenario for executing the second action scenario determination process (S3921L), and for convenience of explanation of the specified number of times, each process is attached The only difference is that the reference numerals are changed, but since the other contents are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the vibration scenario process (S3707L) is executed, first, the data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (S3901L), and the value of the number of steps defined in that data is the value of the step counter 223um. (S3902L), and if it is determined that the value of the step count data matches the step counter 223um (S3902L: Yes), the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue Since it means that the movable control in the corresponding operation has been completed, the value of the step counter 223um is set to 0 (S3906L), and the process proceeds to S3907L.
On the other hand, in the processing of S3902L, if it is determined that the value of the step number data in the data extracted in the processing of S3901L does not match the value of the step counter 223um (S3902L: No), the value specified in the sensor data is 0 (S3903L). In the process of S3903L, if it is determined that the value specified in the sensor data is not 0 (S3903L: No), it is determined whether or not the sensor corresponding to the sensor data is on (S3904L).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903L that the value of the sensor data is 0 (S3903: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S3904L that the sensor corresponding to the sensor data is not in the ON state, (S3904L: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time data matches the value of the drive timer 223uj (S3905L). Also, in the process of S3904L, if it is determined that the sensor corresponding to the value of the sensor data is in the ON state (S3904L: Yes), or in the process of S3905L, the value of the time data and the value of the driving timer 223uj match. If so, the process proceeds to S3907L. On the other hand, in the processing of S3905L, if it is determined that the value of the time data does not match the value of the drive timer 223uj (S3905L: No), this processing ends.
In the processing of S3907L, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing counter 223uk matches 14 (S3907L). When it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk matches 14 (S3907L: Yes), the state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at a position (operating position) where the first production of the movable accessory can be terminated. Therefore, it is determined whether the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is on (S3923L).

In the processing of S3923L, if it is determined that the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is set to ON (S3923L: Yes), that is, the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 during one period of the first production of the movable accessory. If the mission is accomplished by doing so (if the end condition is satisfied), the value of the repetition counter 223un is set to 3 (S3924L) in order to end the first rendering of the movable accessory in the middle (S3924L), and the driving The status storage area 223uy is set to "07H" (S3925L), the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S3926L), and the process proceeds to S3908L.
As a result, when the first movable accessory effect (movement control based on the vibration scenario 64) is terminated halfway, it is the same as when the action scenario (vibration scenario 64) corresponding to the first movable accessory effect is executed to the end. It is possible to forcibly shift the variable control contents to the process of Therefore, it is possible to share the processing for ending the movable accessory first presentation in the case of ending the movable accessory first presentation in the middle and in the case of executing it to the end. It is possible to simplify the movable control contents of.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3923L that the vibration scenario end flag 223ut is not ON (S3923L: No), or when it is determined in the process of S3907L that the value of the processing counter 223uk does not match 14. , the process proceeds to S3908L.
In the process of S3908L, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing counter 223uk is equal to 14, that is, whether or not one cycle of the scenario motion has been completed as the rendering motion of the first rendering of the movable accessory (S3908L). If it is determined that the value of 223uk matches 14 (S3908L: Yes), the movement control (movement control for one cycle) is completed in the operation corresponding to the data defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition counter 223un is 3 (S3915L). In the processing of S3915L, if it is determined that the value of the repetition counter 223un is 3 (S3915L: Yes), since the movable control for the period corresponding to the predetermined number of times (3 times) has been completed, The vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is set to off (S3917L).

Next, in order to determine the end trigger of the scenario action (movable control based on the data defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb) corresponding to the first rendering of the movable accessory, the type of data stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is "07H" (S3918L), and when it is determined to be "07H", that is, when the termination condition (mission achievement) established based on the player's operation of the operating means is established, If it is determined that the first production of the movable role has ended (S3918: Yes), then the second operation for determining the production mode of the second production of the movable role to be executed after the first production of the movable role. Scenario determination processing is executed (S3921L), the value of the remaining chance number counter 223uq is cleared to 0 (S3922L), the value of the drive timer 223uj is set to 0 (S3912L), and this processing ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S3918L, if it is determined that the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is not "07H" (S3918L: No), "06H" is set in the drive status storage area 223uy (S3919L). ), the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S3920L), and the process proceeds to the above-described S3921L.
That is, in the process of S3919L, the scenario action (movable control based on the data specified in the vibration scenario table 222uugb) corresponding to the first production of the movable accessory is terminated as a scenario action (specified in the vibration scenario table 222uugb). It is determined that the end trigger has been established by the fact that the movable control based on the data that is present) has been executed to the end, and data indicating that the first production of the movable accessory has ended based on the passage of time is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy. The type "06H" is set.
Further, when it is determined in the process of S3915L that the value of the repetition counter 223un is not 3 (S3915L: No), the vibration scenario repetition process for repeatedly executing the vibration scenario operation is executed (S3916L). , and terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3908L that the value of the processing counter 223uk is not 14 (S3908L: No), 1 is added to the value of the processing counter 223uk (S3909L), and then the post-addition processing counter 223uk is 14 (S3910L). If it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk after addition is 14 (S3910L: Yes), "05H" is set in the drive status storage area 223uy (S3913L), and the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON ( S3914L), data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk after addition is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue from the vibration scenario table 222uugb (S3911L), the processing of S3912L is executed, and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S3910L, if it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk after addition is not 14 (S3910L: No), the processes of S3913L and S3914L are skipped, the process of S3911L is executed, and the process of S3912L is executed. and terminate this process.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2152, the processing contents of the vibration scenario repetition processing (S3915L) executed in the vibration scenario processing (see S3707L of FIG. 2151) will be described. FIG. 2152 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the vibration scenario repetition processing (S3915L). This vibration scenario repetition process (S3915L) is executed during the period during which the movable accessory first effect (vibration effect) is being executed for the movable accessory 900, and the action scenario for one cycle is executed. A process for repeatedly executing movement control based on the action scenario defined in the defined vibration scenario table 222uugb is executed.
Specifically, when the vibration scenario repetition process (S3915L) is executed, first, 1 is added to the value of the repetition counter 223un (S4001L), 1 is set to the value of the processing counter 223uk (S4002L), and the vibration scenario Data corresponding to the current value (1) of the processing counter 223uk from the table 222uugb is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4003L), and the value of the press counter 223uus is added to the value stored in the press information storage area 223uut ( S4004L), the value of the pressing counter 223uus is cleared to 0 (S4005L), the value of the remaining chance number counter 223uuq is subtracted by 1 (S4006L), "03H" is set in the drive status storage area 223uy (S4007L), and the switch flag is set. 223uuu is set to ON (S4008L), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2153, the processing contents of the second motion scenario determination processing (S3921L) executed in the vibration scenario processing (see S3707L of FIG. 2151) will be described. FIG. 2153 is a flow chart showing the details of the second operation scenario determination process (S3921L). This second action scenario determination process (S3921L) is executed after the movable accessory first effect (effect executed based on the first control) is completed. It is a process for determining the contents of movable control (performance mode) for the movable accessory 900 of the performance to be executed.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, as the effect mode of the second movable role effect, the movable role object 900 is moved downward from the operating position where it is positioned when the first movable role effect is completed. A falling effect of moving (dropping) and a rising effect of moving upward (rising) can be executed, and the game result (operation result of the frame button 22) during the movable accessory first effect ) or whether to execute the falling production or the rising production as the movable accessory second production based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol lottery.
Specifically, when the second operation scenario determination process (S3921L) is executed, first, the data type stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is read (S4101L), and the read data type is "06". (S4102L), and if it is determined not to be "06H" (S4102L: No), then it is determined whether the read data type is "07H" (S4103L).
In the process of S4103L, if it is determined that the read data type is "07H" (S4103L: Yes), the state is such that the second effect of the movable accessory can be executed, so the process proceeds to S4106L, Various processes are executed for determining the effect mode of the second effect of the movable accessory. On the other hand, in the process of S4102L, when it is determined that the read data type is "06H" (S4102L: Yes), the second control execution selection table 222uuf is referred to, and the second control (movable accessory number 2 production) is executed (S4104L), and in the process of S4104L, it is determined whether execution of the second control (movable role object second production) is determined (S4105L), and it is determined that the second control is executed. In the case (S4105L: Yes), the process proceeds to S4106L, and various processes for determining the effect mode of the movable accessory second effect are executed.

In the process of S4106L, the information (mission pattern type) stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur is read out (S4106L), and it is determined whether the read information (mission pattern type) is a mission pattern type ending with "B". (S4107L), if it is determined that it is the mission pattern type with the end "B" (S4107L: Yes), the ascending operation (rising effect) is determined as the operation content of the second control (movable role object second effect) ( S4108L), sets the value of the processing counter 223uk to 1 (S4109L), stores data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk from the rising scenario table 222uugd in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4110L), and stores the data in the drive status storage area 223uy. The type "10H" is set (S4111L), the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S4112L), the second operation scenario execution flag 223uv is set to ON (S4113L), and this processing ends.
Also, in the process of S4107L, if it is determined that the read data type is not the end "B" (S4107: No), then the operation content of the second control (movable accessory second effect) is falling The action (fall effect) is determined (S4114L), the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 (S4115L), and data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue from the fall scenario table 222uugc (S4116L). ), the data type "08H" is set in the drive status storage area 223uy (S4117L), the above-described S4112L and S4113L processes are executed, and this process ends.
Also, in the process of S4105L, if it is determined that the second control (movable accessory second effect) is not executed (S4105L: No), then set the value of the processing counter 223uk to 1 (S4118L) and save Data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk from the scenario table is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4119L), the save scenario execution flag 223us is set to ON (S4120L), and the data type "12H" is set in the drive status storage area 223uy. is set (S4121L), the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S4122L), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2154, the processing contents of the second motion scenario processing (S3708L) executed in the motor scenario processing (see S2113L of FIG. 2149) will be described. FIG. 2154 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second operation scenario processing (S3708L). In this second action scenario process (S3708L), the movement control of the movable accessory 900 corresponding to the second effect of the movable accessory and the effect mode corresponding to the retraction control executed after the second effect of the movable accessory ends. A process is performed to determine the

As described above, in the 61st control example, the movable accessory 900 is arranged above the third pattern display device 81 . Then, when the role production is executed, after executing the movable control (advance control) for advancing the movable role 900 to the position (operating position) covering the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 for 3 seconds, A movable control (movable accessory first effect) is executed to vibrate the movable accessory 900 in an operation pattern for a predetermined period (about 6 seconds), and then the movable accessory 900 is moved in a manner different from the operation pattern in the first effect. After completing the movable control (second rendering of the movable accessory), the movable control (retraction control) for retracting the movable accessory 900 to the upper position (storage position) of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. is doing.
Furthermore, during the period during which the movable role first effect is being executed out of the effect period during which the role object effect is being executed, the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 (the number of frame button depressions) is measured. When the number of times the frame button is pressed satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 5 times), the condition for ending the first production of the movable accessory is satisfied, and the operation for 6 seconds corresponding to the first production of the movable accessory is established. It is configured so that the second production of the movable accessory can be executed without completing the pattern.
By configuring in this way, the degree of progress of the performance of the role product executed during the variable performance can be varied according to the content of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, so that the operation performance can be quickly terminated. The person presses the frame button 22 willingly during the first performance period of the movable accessory. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, and the player's early boredom with the game can be suppressed.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, the movable accessory 900 passes through the operating position multiple times during the first rendering period of the movable accessory (the state of being positioned at the operating position occurs multiple times). It is configured so that the movable control to vibrate the movable accessory 900 is executed at the same time, and it is configured to be able to determine whether the end condition is satisfied in the state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. . In other words, when the first movable accessory effect ends in the middle based on the establishment of the end condition, the first movable accessory effect is always ended in a state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. It consists of By configuring in this way, as the movement control when shifting from the movable role first effect to the movable role second effect, the movable role object 900 positioned at the operating position is moved to the movable role object second effect. Since it is only necessary to execute the movement control corresponding to the production, it is possible to easily prescribe the action pattern corresponding to the second production of the movable accessory in a series of action scenarios in advance. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control processing for the performance of the movable accessory 900 to move.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, when the operation pattern for 6 seconds is completed without the end condition being satisfied during the first movable role performance, that is, the operation corresponding to the first movable role performance The contents of the action scenario are defined in advance so that the first presentation of the movable accessory 900 is finished in the state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position even when the action scenario of the pattern is executed to the end.
In other words, the movable accessory 900 is executed even when the end condition is established during the first movable accessory presentation and the first movable accessory presentation is ended in the middle, or when the first movable accessory presentation is executed to the end. are positioned at the same position (operating position), the first production of the movable accessory is completed. By configuring in this way, the player is informed whether the current first movable accessory presentation has ended in the middle or has been executed to the end, depending on the position of the movable accessory 900 at the time when the first movable accessory presentation ends. It can be difficult to comprehend. Also, even if the first movable accessory effect is terminated in the middle, the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the same position as when the first movable accessory effect is executed to the end. Since it is possible to execute movable control for the movable role 900 (movable control corresponding to the second production of the movable role), even if the first production of the movable role is terminated in the middle, the player can The operation presentation can be continued without giving a sense of incompatibility.
In addition, in the 61st control example, the measured value of the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the first rendering period of the movable accessory is reset at a predetermined timing, and after the reset, the measurement of the number of times the frame button is pressed is resumed. It is configured as follows. In other words, the end condition is established when the number of times the frame button is pressed within a specific period of the effect period during which the first movable accessory effect is executed satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 5 times). there is
More specifically, the frame button pressing count is reset each time the vibration operation of the movable accessory 900 executed during the first rendering of the movable accessory is completed. In other words, the end condition is established when the frame button 22 is pressed five times during the period (about 2 seconds) during which the movable accessory 900 is vibrated for one round.

By configuring in this way, there is no need for the player to continue to press the frame button 22 during the movable accessory first presentation period, and during the movable accessory first presentation period, the specific period (movable accessory 900 The termination condition can be established by intentionally pressing the frame button 22 during the period in which the vibrating motion of (1) rotates once. In addition, in the 61st control example, an action scenario is defined in advance so that the movable accessory performs the vibration action three times at maximum during the first rendering period of the movable accessory.
Therefore, even if the player intentionally presses the frame button 22 to satisfy the end condition and ends the first effect of the movable role partway through, the period in which the end condition is satisfied will determine the movable role. The timing at which the object first effect ends can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute operation effects of more various patterns, and to enhance the effect of the effects.
In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example is configured to display various display modes using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 even while the character effect is being executed. By displaying a display mode combined with the performance of the character product being executed, it is possible to suggest whether the performance result of the variable performance being executed is an advantageous performance result for the player.
Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the variable performance displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the performance pattern of the variable performance including the role performance using the movable role 900 are changed into variable performance. It is determined at the start timing (the timing at which the special pattern variation is started), and various effects corresponding to the determined effect pattern are executed based on the passage of time. In other words, it was common to determine in advance an effect pattern corresponding to a predetermined special symbol variation time (variation effect period) and execute a change effect based on the determined effect pattern.

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the end condition is satisfied based on the player operating (pressing) the operating means (frame button 22). Display displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 that is executed overlapping with the character production when part of the character production that is preset in the case can be shortened (omitted) Since the effect is executed according to the already set effect pattern, there is a problem that the execution contents of the character object effect and the execution contents of the display effect are out of sync.
In addition, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when the execution contents of the character effect and the execution contents of the display effect are different, it is necessary to provide a display effect in which the character effect and the execution period overlap. As a presentation mode, it is necessary to set a presentation mode that does not affect the passage of time (for example, a presentation mode in which a still image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period), and there is a problem that the presentation effect is lowered.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the period during which the character effect is executed is overlapped according to the content (execution timing) of the movable control executed for the movable accessory 900 in the character effect. It is configured to be able to determine the execution timing of the control for the display effect that is executed as a result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably execute the display effect corresponding to the movement of the movable accessory 900 in the character effect, so the effect of the variable effect combining the character effect and the display effect. can be further enhanced.
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, as described above, when the termination condition is satisfied while the first movable accessory effect is being executed, the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. Since the first production of the movable accessory can be finished in the state where the movable accessory is present, there is no need to wait for the operation scenario corresponding to the first production of the movable accessory to be completed. (movable control corresponding to the second effect of the movable role) can be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. However, there is a problem that the player is made to wait until the movable accessory 900 moves to the operating position when the end condition is established while the movable accessory 900 is away from the operating position. rice field.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the predetermined execution condition (pressing the frame button 22) is satisfied during the period from when the end condition is satisfied until the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. It is configured to be able to execute an additional performance when it is established. By executing this additional effect, benefits advantageous to the player (for example, suggestive information on the effect result of the variable effect being executed, the operation contents of the movable role to be executed later (movable role 2nd It is configured to be able to give the production content)) of the production.
In other words, a privilege that can be given to the player only when the end condition is satisfied during the first movable role performance, in other words, the movable role first performance is performed without satisfying the end condition during the first movable role performance. A privilege that is not given when all action scenarios corresponding to the performance are completed can be given during the first performance period of the movable accessory. With this configuration, even if the end condition is established in the state where the movable accessory 900 is separated from the operating position in the first movable accessory effect, the first movable accessory effect can be performed. Since the game (frame button operation) can be motivated to satisfy the execution condition of the additional performance in the remaining period until the end, the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game.
Furthermore, in the sixty-first control example, the display effect that is executed overlapping with the effect period of the character effect is used to guide the player to the content of the effect of the character effect. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the method of establishing the termination condition of the first movable accessory performance, the execution/non-execution of the additional performance, and the contents of the second movable accessory performance.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, the movable role first effect (the role object effect executed with reference to the vibration scenario table 222uugb) for operating the movable accessory 900 is executed. In this case, the control (movement control) for positioning the movable accessory 900 to the operating position can be executed multiple times. Then, after the control (movable control) for positioning the movable accessory 900 to the operating position is executed to the end, the movable accessory second effect is executable, and during the execution period of the movable accessory first effect When the end condition (pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times (five times)) is satisfied, the movable accessory 2 is activated without terminating the control (movable control) for positioning the movable accessory 900 to the operating position. It is configured to execute a production.

By configuring in this way, when the movable role production (role product production) is executed, the execution timing of the movable role second production can be varied according to the operation result of the operation means by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the operating means willingly.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, when the motion scenario defined in the vibration scenario table 222uugb referred to when executing the first movable role performance is executed to the end, The movable accessory 900 is positioned at the same position (operating position) at the time when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied during the execution period of one performance.
In other words, the movable accessory 900 is always at the operating position when the second movable accessory effect is started. By configuring in this way, even when the first movable accessory effect is terminated in any manner, the movable accessory second effect can be generated from the state in which the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the same position. can be executed, it is possible to easily unify the presentation mode of the second presentation of the movable accessory.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example, after the end condition is met during the first rendering of the movable accessory, the movable accessory is moved to a position (operating position) where it can be determined whether the end condition is met. The period until 900 is positioned is used to enable execution of an additional effect. In other words, in a state where the end condition is satisfied, the additional effect can be executed when the execution condition is satisfied before the specific condition (that the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position) is satisfied. Configure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the period from when the end condition is met until the second movable accessory effect is executed.

In addition, the second period, which is longer than the first period, is longer than the first period from when the termination condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied. Since the period until the specific condition is established can be lengthened, the specific performance can be easily executed (additional performance can be easily executed). That is, the longer the period from the establishment of the end condition to the execution of the second movable accessory performance, the easier the execution of the specific performance (the easier the execution of the additional performance). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game even if the period from the satisfaction of the end condition to the execution of the second movable accessory effect becomes long.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-first control example, the execution condition for executing the additional effect during the first effect of the movable accessory is established based on the execution of a predetermined operation on the operating means. It is configured to be able to execute an additional performance when a first condition to obtain is established. In other words, the player operates the operating means during the first presentation of the movable accessory so that both the end condition and the execution condition can be established. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more motivated to operate the operating means while the first movable accessory effect is being executed.
<62nd control example>
Next, the 62nd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2156 to 2175. FIG. In the above-described sixty-first control example, a plurality of mission periods are set during the first production of the movable accessory executed during the production of the movable accessory 900, and if the mission is accomplished within the mission period, It is configured so that the end condition can be satisfied and the first presentation of the movable accessory can be ended in the middle. Furthermore, by varying the contents of the set missions, the degree of difficulty of mission achievement can be changed.
More specifically, as the first effect of the movable role, an effect (first action) is executed in which the movable role 900 is operated in a specific mode (vibration mode of 2 seconds per cycle) for three cycles, and the one cycle is performed. is set as the mission period, and by achieving the mission content determined during each mission period (such as a mission to press the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times)), 1 It is configured to stop the rest of the periodic motions in a state where the motion for the cycle is completed and positioned at the actuation position, and to end the first performance (first motion) of the movable accessory.

On the other hand, the 62nd control example is different in that not only the contents of the mission but also the contents of the first action executed during the first production of the movable accessory can be set differently. . More specifically, the length of the mission period (the length of the operation period for one cycle of the movable accessory 900) can be set differently. By configuring in this way, even if the set mission contents are the same, it is possible to vary the difficulty of mission achievement by changing the length of the mission period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game aiming at accomplishing the mission with various difficulty levels that combine the length of the mission period and the content of the mission, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.
In addition, in the 62nd control example, similarly to the 61st control example described above, while setting the mission content for one mission period, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the entire movable accessory first effect period is determined. The overall mission that can be achieved by is also configured to be configurable. With this configuration, even if the individual mission period set during the first rendering of the movable accessory is shortened, the frame button 22 can be continuously pressed during the first rendering of the movable accessory. By pressing it, it becomes possible to complete the entire mission. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue to press the frame button 22 willingly.
<Regarding the effect content in the 62nd control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 2156 and 2157, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 62nd control example, the characteristic effects different from those in the 61st control example described above will be described. do. FIG. 2156(a) is a diagram showing the vicinity of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during mission production.
In the 62nd control example, since the overall mission is set in contrast to the 61st control example described above, the total number of times that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the first rendering period of the movable accessory is displayed. It is configured as follows.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2156(a), a small display area Dm64 is formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, which is the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and during the first rendering period of the movable accessory, , the cumulative number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed is displayed in the cumulative number display area Dm64a. In the state shown in FIG. 2156(a), one cycle of the movable accessory 900 is 1 second, and an action scenario is set in which the movable accessory 900 is operated for six cycles. 1 production is in progress, and 0.3 seconds have passed since the mission production corresponding to the first cycle was started. In the display mode, the characters "6 chances" are displayed to indicate that the mission will be executed 6 times.
As a display mode indicating the contents of the mission being executed, the small display area Dm61 displays "Press the button 5 times", and the required number-of-presses display area Dm62b displays "5". In addition, since the state shown in FIG. 2156(a) shows a state in which the frame button 22 has not been pressed even once since the first production for the movable accessory was executed, " 0” is displayed, and “0” is also displayed in the accumulated count display area Dm64a. Since the current mission period is 1 second, the time gauge tg1 displayed in the small display area Dm63 is displayed in a display mode in which the entire range is 1 second, and 0.3 seconds have already passed. Correspondingly, a remaining time gauge tg1a and an elapsed time gauge tg1b are displayed.
In addition, in a small display area Dm63a formed above the small display area Dm63, characters "GO" are displayed as a display mode to indicate that the current mission period is in progress. Furthermore, the information in the main display area Dm includes the characters "chance occurring" to indicate that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high due to the execution of the character effect, and the effect of the mission effect. As a guidance mode for guiding the content to the player, the words ``clear the missions before the gauge reaches 0'', and as a suggestion mode for suggesting that the overall mission is set, ``the total number of times increases. There may be something good to do." is displayed.
In this 62nd control example, as shown in FIG. 2156(a), only the cumulative number of times of pressing is displayed without informing the player of the contents of the overall mission. With this configuration, the player cannot grasp the number of times the frame button is pressed to achieve the overall mission, so the game is mainly played by pressing the frame button 22 to achieve individual mission effects. can be executed. Therefore, the required number of presses necessary for achieving each of the multiple missions (individual mission and overall mission) executed in parallel is displayed at the same time, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. can be suppressed. In addition, among a plurality of missions that are executed in parallel, for at least some of the missions, the mission achievement conditions (required number of times of pressing) are configured not to be notified, so that the mission can be continued until the end of each mission. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to achieve the goal.

As described above, in the 62nd control example, the movable accessory first effect (first control) is terminated in the middle (the operation of the movable accessory 900 executed during the movable accessory first effect (first As an end condition for ending one action) in the middle, the number of presses of the frame button 22 reaches a specific number during a period (mission period) in which one cycle of movable control is executed for the movable accessory 900. In addition to the termination condition that is satisfied when the mission period is over, the termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (accumulated number) during the entire period spanning a plurality of mission periods reaches a specific accumulated number is also set. ing.
By configuring in this way, when a mission period of a short time (for example, 1 second) is set and a mission that is difficult to satisfy the end condition (for example, the number of times the frame button is pressed 5 times) is set, that is, Even if it becomes difficult to accomplish the mission during one mission period, the player can be motivated to press the frame button 22 in order to accomplish the overall mission.
In the 62nd control example, the contents of the mission set as the overall mission (end condition established based on the cumulative number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed over the entire period of the first rendering of the movable accessory) is set. The number of times the frame button is pressed is greater than the number of times the frame button is pressed that is set as the content of each mission. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the entire mission from being completed first only by pressing the frame button 22 within one mission period. It is possible to prevent the player from depressing the frame button 22 by aiming at the required number of pressing times.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2156(b), the contents of the effect executed when the overall mission (total mission) is achieved will be described. FIG. 2156(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the overall mission (total mission) is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 2156(b), it indicates that the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed (accumulated number of times) has reached 10 in the entire period spanning multiple mission periods in a state in which individual missions have not been completed. As a display mode, "10" is displayed in the cumulative count display area Dm64a, and characters "total mission accomplished" are displayed in the display area Dm61. In addition, above the main display area Dm, the characters "V preparation" are displayed as a benefit given when the total mission is achieved.
In the 62nd control example, when the total mission is achieved, the additional effect is not executed during the remaining period of the movable accessory first effect, but it is more advantageous to the player than when the individual missions are achieved. It is structured so that special benefits can be easily granted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game in which the player selects which mission to accomplish.
In this 62nd control example, the content of each mission is displayed so that the player can grasp it, and the content of the total mission is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to grasp it. Alternatively, the player may be configured to notify that the mission has been accomplished only when the mission is accomplished, without directly informing the player of the content of each mission.
In addition, only an effect in which the display mode changes based on the update of the element (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) required to accomplish each mission is executed, and each mission is executed based on the display mode of the effect. It may be configured to let the player predict whether or not it will be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2157, the contents of the performance of the character super 4 performance will be described. In the 62nd control example, unlike in the 61st control example described above, when the end condition is not satisfied during the first production of the movable accessory, an accessory super 4 that can give a privilege more advantageous to the player is displayed. The production is configured to be executable. Specifically, when the role super 4 effect is executed, the effect period of the movable accessory first effect is set longer than that of the other accessory effects, and the extension of the effect period of the movable accessory first effect is set. During the period, it is configured to be able to give a privilege advantageous to the player.
In other words, if the termination condition is established without waiting for the passage of the performance period of the first performance of the movable accessory, the privilege is not given. With this configuration, it is possible to create a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the other, both when the end condition is established during the first presentation of the movable accessory and when it is not established. , it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to satisfy the termination condition.
FIG. 2157(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the start of the super 4 special effects production, and FIG. 2157(b) is a display displayed during the extended period of the super 4 special effects production. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen.
As shown in FIG. 2157(a), the same display screen as that of the other super character effects is displayed immediately after the super character 4 effect is started. In addition, above the display area Dm61, "Remaining chances are 3+?" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the number of remaining chances within a range that can be executed in other super performances. As a display mode for indicating the number of remaining chances, a display mode may be configured to display the actual remaining number of chances, such as "5 chances remaining" or "3 chances remaining". . By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to discriminate the type of the accessory super effect being executed based on the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

Then, when entering the period (extension period) in which the fifth cycle vibration operation is executed without satisfying the end condition during the role super 4 performance, as shown in FIG. A character 802 appears, and a comment "You're going to win a big hit with a high probability" is displayed as a display mode 802a corresponding to the given privilege.
In addition, in this 62nd control example, as the content of the privilege to be given to the player, only the privilege of notifying the content of the game being executed in advance is shown, but other privileges can be determined. Also, for example, if the end condition is not established during the performance of accessory super 4, the result of the special symbol lottery is switched to the jackpot even if the winning is lost. Also good.
In other words, it is possible to provide a benefit that can switch the game state after the movable role first presentation to a game state advantageous to the player, depending on the condition established by the operation of the operating means during the movable role first presentation period. may be configured.
Moreover, although it is not related to the game content, it may be configured so as to give a privilege of reproducing a video that appears infrequently. In other words, the privilege may be anything as long as it pleases the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the 62nd control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 62nd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2158 to 2168. FIG. In contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the 62nd control example has a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, a part of the configuration of the RAM 223, are different. Specifically, a variable effect pattern selection table 222uva is provided instead of the variable effect pattern selection table 222uua, an action scenario table group 222uve is provided instead of the action scenario table group 222uug, and an overall mission selection table 222uvb is newly added. , a transition effect mode selection table 222uvc and a first period suggestion effect table 222uvd are added. Other elements are the same, and descriptions of the same elements are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 2160, the contents of the variable effect pattern selection table 222uva will be described. FIG. 2160 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the variable effect pattern selection table 222uva. As shown in FIG. 2160, the variation effect pattern selection table 222uva contains information included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, similar to the above-described variation effect pattern selection table 222uua (see FIG. 2104(a)). Various variable performance patterns are defined in correspondence with (result of determination of success, type of variation pattern) and the value of the first performance counter 223uuf.
Specifically, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the success/failure determination result is "hit", and the variation pattern is "normal reach (30 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf "Various winning normal effects" are defined in the entire range of "0 to 198". Although detailed contents are omitted, in the "various winning normal effects", as a variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the reach state (out of the three fluctuating third symbols , two third patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the winning of the jackpot, and another third pattern is fluctuating), after which the other third pattern wins the jackpot in a short period of time. A variable effect that is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown is defined, and different effects are defined according to the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf.
In addition, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/fail judgment result is "hit", and the variation pattern is "super reach (60 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is ""Various super reach effects" are defined in the range of "0 to 119", "Character Super 1" is defined in the range of "120 to 149", and "Characters" are defined in the range of "150 to 179""Super2" is defined, and "Rakumono Super 3" is defined in the range of "180 to 198".

Here, the variable performance pattern "Person Super 1" is a variable performance pattern corresponding to the variable performance including the performance using the movable role 900, and 5 seconds have passed since the special symbol variation was started. After the character performance is executed for 20 seconds at the maximum from the point of time when the game is played, the variable performance of reaching the ready-to-win state is executed. In addition, as the vibration scenario type of the movable role first effect (vibration effect) in the role object effect, it is a variable effect pattern in which an operation scenario (vibration scenario 64) for three cycles with one cycle being two seconds is set.
The variable production pattern "accessory super 2" is a variable production pattern corresponding to a variable production including a role production using the movable accessory 900, and starts when 5 seconds have passed since the special symbol fluctuation was started. After execution of character performance for a maximum of 20 seconds, variable performance of ready-to-win state is executed. In addition, as the vibration scenario type of the movable role first production (vibration production) in the role production, it is a variable production pattern in which one cycle is 1 second and six cycles worth of action scenarios (first vibration scenario 65) are set. .
The variable production pattern "accessory super 3" is a variable production pattern corresponding to a variable production including a role production using the movable accessory 900, and is performed from the point in time when 5 seconds have passed since the special symbol fluctuation was started. After execution of character performance for a maximum of 20 seconds, variable performance of ready-to-win state is executed. In addition, as the vibration scenario type of the movable role first effect (vibration effect) in the role object effect, it is a variable effect pattern in which one cycle is 3 seconds and two cycles worth of action scenarios (vibration scenario 64) are set.
That is, in the 62nd control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the variation pattern command with a variation time of 60 seconds is received from the main controller 110, according to the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf, It is possible to select a variable performance including a role performance and a variable performance not including a role performance. It is configured to be able to select character effects with different lengths and cycles.

By configuring in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery and the variable performance period are the same, the number of mission performances executed during the character performance and the mission period can be varied. Therefore, since the degree of expectation for mission achievement can be varied according to the type of variable presentation to be executed, the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Furthermore, when the movable role first effect (vibration effect corresponding to the first vibration scenario 65) with a short action period of one cycle is executed, the first effect of the movable role (vibration effect corresponding to the first vibration scenario 65) with a long action period of one cycle (first Vibration production corresponding to the 2-vibration scenario 65) is executed, the timing of ending the movable accessory first production in the middle increases.
In other words, in the 62nd control example, during the execution period of the movable role first effect, the movable role 900 is vibrated for one cycle, i. When the object 900 moves downward and upward and is again positioned at the operating position, it is determined whether or not the termination condition is satisfied (mission achievement status). ), the movable accessory first effect is completed.
Then, when the first vibration scenario 65 is set as the vibration scenario type (scenario type corresponding to the first production of the movable role), the vibration operation of the movable role 900 (1 1 second cycle) is executed for six cycles, six timings for ending the movable accessory first effect are provided during the movable accessory first effect. On the other hand, when the second vibration scenario 65 is set as the vibration scenario type (scenario type corresponding to the first production of the movable role), the vibration operation of the movable role 900 ( 1 period of 3 seconds) is executed for two cycles, so that the timing for ending the first movable role object effect is provided twice during the first movable role object effect. Therefore, the timing at which the movable accessory first presentation can be ended (elapsed period after the movable accessory first presentation is started) can be varied depending on the selected variable presentation pattern.

In addition, in the 62nd control example, in addition to individual mission effects, an overall mission for the entire movable accessory first effect period is also set, so the operation period of one cycle is short. Even if an action scenario (for example, the first vibration scenario 65) is set, it is possible to end the movable accessory first effect in the middle by completing the overall mission. In this case, an operation scenario with a short operation period (for example, the first vibration scenario 65) is set, whereas an operation scenario with a long operation period (for example, the second vibration scenario 65) is set. is set, the timing of ending the first production of the movable accessory in the middle increases, so the first production of the movable accessory can be easily ended at an early timing.
Next, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/loss determination result is "hit", and the variation pattern is "special reach (90 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "Various super reach effects" are specified in the range of "0 to 149", "Super 1" is specified in the range of "150 to 169", and "role" is specified in the range of "170 to 189""Product Super 2" is defined, and "Rakumono Super 4" is defined in the range of "190 to 198".
The variable production pattern "accessory super 4" is a variable production pattern corresponding to a variable production including a role production using the movable accessory 900, and starts from the point in time when 5 seconds have passed since the special symbol fluctuation was started. After execution of character performance for 26 seconds at maximum, variable performance of ready-to-win state is executed. In addition, as the vibration scenario type of the movable role object first effect (vibration effect) in the role object effect, it is a variable effect pattern in which an operation scenario (third vibration scenario 65) for six cycles with one cycle being two seconds is set. .
In other words, "Superhero 4" executes the same periodic motion (2 seconds per cycle) as "Superhero 1" described above, and only the number of periodic motions is different. By configuring in this way, even if the motion pattern of the movable accessory 900 whose movement is controlled by the first rendering of the movable accessory is grasped, the motion pattern of the first movable accessory 900 is not executed until the motion for three cycles is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which variable production pattern the production (vibration production) is.

In addition, although detailed explanation will be given later, when the movable accessory first effect is being executed in the variable effect pattern of "accessory super 1", the end condition is satisfied and the movable accessory first effect is executed in the middle. When ending with , it is easier to give a benefit advantageous to the player than when the first performance of the movable role is ended without satisfying the end condition, and the change of ``accessory super 4'' When the first performance of the movable accessory is executed in the performance pattern, the movable accessory is more movable without the completion of the end condition than when the first performance of the movable accessory is terminated in the middle by establishing the end condition. When the first presentation is ended, it is easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player.
Therefore, when the movable accessory 900 operates in the operation pattern of 2 seconds per cycle as the first effect of the movable accessory, the player determines whether or not the end condition is established (whether or not various mission effects are achieved). It is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting people choose. Further, in the 62nd control example, a suggestive effect (first period suggestive effect) capable of suggesting to the player the variable effect pattern of the movable accessory first effect being executed is configured to be executable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to decide whether or not to satisfy the end condition while grasping the content of the first period suggestive effect executed during the first movable accessory first effect, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to make it easy to end the first performance of the movable accessory by a method that easily gives a special privilege.
Next, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/fail judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern is "various short off", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223uuf is "0 to 198”, “various short out effects” are stipulated. In addition, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/loss determination result is "off", and the variation pattern is "reach out (30 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is set to ""0 to 198" are defined as "various out-of-reach effects".
Furthermore, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/loss judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern is "super reach (60 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is " ``Various super reach out effects'' are defined in the range of ``0 to 149'', ``Super super 1'' is stipulated in the range of ``150 to 169'', and ``role "Product super 2" is defined, and "Role product super 3" is defined in the range of "190 to 198".

Next, when the game state is "normal" (normal state), the win/loss judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern is "special reach (90 seconds)", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223uuf is "Various special reach out effects" are defined in the range of "0 to 189", "Super Super 1" is defined in the range of "190 to 194", and "195 to 197" in the range of ""Super2" is specified, and "Super 4" is specified for the value of "198".
Next, if the gaming state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, that is, in a state where it is easier to acquire the right to execute the special symbol lottery than in the normal state, the winning judgment result, the received variation pattern, and the acquired first Various variable effects are defined in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223uuf, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The general mission selection table 222uvb is a data table used when selecting the mission contents of the general mission whose target period is the entire production period of the first movable accessory production. Here, the contents of the overall mission selection table 222uvb will be described with reference to FIG. 2161(a). FIG. 2161(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the overall mission selection table 222uvb.
As shown in FIG. 2161(a), the overall mission selection table 222uvb contains different overall missions corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery, the selected vibration scenario type, and the acquired value of the third effect counter 223uva. A mission pattern (type) is defined. Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (result of winning or failing judgment), if the selected vibration scenario type is "vibration scenario 64" or "second vibration scenario 65", the acquired third effect counter Information corresponding to the overall mission “none” is defined for all values “0 to 198” of H.223uva. In other words, no general mission is set during the first presentation of the movable accessory in which the "vibration scenario 64" and the "second vibration scenario 65" are set as the vibration scenario types.

In this case, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays the value stored in the depression information storage area 223uut, as in the 61st control example described above. The frame button 22 may be configured so as not to display the cumulative number of presses, or may be configured to display the cumulative number of presses as shown in FIG. 2156(a). When configured so as to display the accumulated number of times of pressing, a display that makes the player think that the overall mission is set in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the overall mission is not set. It is preferable to display a mode (for example, when the overall mission is set, the same display mode as the suggestion mode for suggesting that the overall mission is set).
Returning to FIG. 2161(a), the description is continued. Regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment), when the selected vibration scenario type is "first vibration scenario 65", the value of the acquired third effect counter 223uva is in the range of "0 to 19". , the overall mission pattern "overall 1" is defined, the overall mission pattern "overall 2" is defined for the range "20 to 99", and the range "100 to 198" is defined Therefore, an overall mission pattern “total 3” is defined. Further, when the selected vibration scenario type is the "third vibration scenario 65", the overall mission pattern "whole 1" is applied to the range of the value of the acquired third effect counter 223uva of "0 to 49". An overall mission pattern “Overall 3” is specified for the range “50 to 99”, and an overall mission pattern “Overall 4” is specified for the range “100 to 198”. ing.
Here, when the overall mission pattern "Overall 1" is selected, "10 button presses" is set as the condition for achieving the overall mission. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed ten times in total during the period of the movable accessory first presentation, the entire mission is achieved (the end condition of the movable accessory first presentation is satisfied). When the overall mission pattern "Overall 2" is selected, "15 button presses" is set as the condition for achieving the overall mission. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed 15 times in total during the period of the movable accessory first presentation, the entire mission is achieved (the end condition of the movable accessory first presentation is satisfied). When the overall mission pattern "3 overall" is selected, "press button 20 times" is set as the condition for achieving the overall mission. In other words, when the frame button 22 is pressed 20 times in total during the period of the movable accessory first presentation, the entire mission is achieved (the end condition of the movable accessory first presentation is satisfied). When the overall mission pattern "4 overall" is selected, "25 button presses" is set as the condition for achieving the overall mission. In other words, when the frame button 22 is pressed a total of 25 times during the period of the movable accessory first presentation, the overall mission is achieved (the end condition of the movable accessory first presentation is satisfied).
In the first period suggestive effect table 222uvd, during the first period in which the movable role first effect is being executed, the movable role first effect being executed is "vibration scenario 64 (2 seconds x 3 cycles)", " Used when selecting the effect mode (suggestion mode) of the first period suggestive effect for suggesting to the player which of the third vibration scenarios 65 (2 seconds x 6 cycles) is being executed based on Data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2161(b), the contents of the first period suggestive effect table 222uvd will be described. FIG. 2161(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the first period suggestion effect table 222uvd. As shown in FIG. 2161(b), in the first period suggestive effect table 222uvd, the results of the special symbol lottery (results of judging results), the set selected vibration scenario type, and the acquired fifth effect counter 223uvc Three types of suggestive patterns (suggestive pattern "1" to "suggestive pattern "3") are defined in association with values.
Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (whether or not determination result), if the selected vibration scenario type is "first vibration scenario 65" or "second vibration scenario 65", the acquired fifth A suggested effect pattern "1" is defined for all values "0 to 198" of the effect counter 223uvc. When this suggestive effect pattern "1" is set, the first period suggestive effect is not executed. That is, during the first production of the movable role (during the first period) in which the "first vibration scenario 65" and the "second vibration scenario 65" are set as the vibration scenario type, the suggestion production for the first period is executed. None.
In other words, when the first rendering of the movable accessory is executed based on the "first vibration scenario 65", the movable accessory 900 operates in an operation pattern in which one period is one second, and the "second vibration scenario 65" is executed. , the movable accessory 900 operates in an operation pattern in which one period is 3 seconds. It can be easily understood that the vibration scenario types used are not the "vibration scenario 64" and the "third vibration scenario 65". Therefore, the first period suggestion effect is not executed.
It should be noted that the "first vibration scenario" is aimed at players who do not understand the motion pattern of the movable accessory 900, that is, players who only watch the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. 65” and “second vibration scenario 65” may be configured to execute the first period suggestive effect even during the execution of the first movable accessory first effect set. Suggestion patterns "2" or "3", which will be described later, may be specified in locations corresponding to "first vibration scenario 65" and "second vibration scenario 65" in the selected vibration scenario types of the period suggestion effect table 222uvd. .

In addition, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment), when the selected vibration scenario type is "vibration scenario 64", the value of the obtained fifth effect counter 223uvc is in the range of "0 to 149". , a suggestive effect pattern "1" is defined, a suggestive effect pattern "2" is defined for the range "150 to 189", and a suggestive effect pattern "2" is defined for the range "190 to 198", A suggestive effect pattern "3" is defined. In addition, when the selected vibration scenario type is the "third vibration scenario 65", the suggestive effect pattern "1" is defined for the range of the acquired value of the fifth effect counter 223uvc of "0 to 99". A suggestive effect pattern “2” is defined for the range “100 to 169”, and a suggestive effect pattern “3” is defined for the range “170 to 198”.
The transition effect mode selection table 222uvc is a data table used when selecting the effect mode of the transition effect to be executed when the first effect of the movable accessory is continued for a predetermined period without ending in the middle. In the 62nd control example, the rendering period of the movable accessory first rendering is varied according to the set vibration scenario type. When Scenario 65" and "Third Vibration Scenario 65" are set, the rendering period of the first rendering of the movable accessory is configured to be 20 seconds at maximum, and "Fourth Vibration Scenario 65" is set. In this case, the presentation period of the first presentation of the movable accessory is configured to be 26 seconds at maximum.
As described above, during the performance period of the movable accessory first presentation, the player presses the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times to satisfy the end condition, and the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position. It is configured so that the first production of the movable accessory can be terminated. That is, even while the movable accessory 900 is operating (first action) based on the action scenario (vibration scenario) for a predetermined period of time, the movable accessory 900 moves to the specific position while the end condition is satisfied. By being positioned at the (operating position), the first action is terminated without executing the action scenario for the remaining period, and the next action (second action) can be executed.
In addition, when the execution condition is met (when the frame button 22 is pressed) during the period from when the end condition is satisfied during the first production of the movable accessory to when the movable accessory moves to the operating position, Information capable of suggesting the current game situation and the result of the special symbol lottery (fluctuation effect) being executed, that is, an additional effect capable of imparting an advantageous benefit to the player is executed.

With this configuration, a game (effect) that is more advantageous to the player is executed when the condition for ending the movable accessory first effect is established than when the condition is not satisfied. When one effect is executed, the player can be motivated to press the frame button 22 in order to satisfy the end condition. However, when the first performance of the movable accessory is executed, the game becomes monotonous, in which the frame button 22 is pushed with enthusiasm, and the player who has been playing the game for a long time becomes bored with the game. was there.
On the other hand, in the 62nd control example, when the movable accessory first effect is being executed based on a specific vibration scenario (fourth vibration scenario 65), rather than satisfying the end condition, the end It is configured to be able to give (execute) a privilege (progress effect) that is more advantageous to the player when the condition is not established. With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the end condition while the first movable role performance is being executed. Variations can be given to the player's response to the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.
Here, with reference to FIG. 2162, the contents of the progress effect mode selection table 222uvc will be described. FIG. 2162 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the progress effect mode selection table 222uvc. As shown in FIG. 2162, in the progress effect mode selection table 222uvc, there are 4 corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment), the selected vibration scenario type, and the acquired value of the fourth effect counter 223uvc. Types of effect patterns (effect pattern "1" to effect pattern "4") are defined.
Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “hit (time saving)” and the selected vibration scenario type is “third vibration scenario 65”, the value of the acquired fourth effect counter 223uvb is “0 to Production pattern "1" is specified for the range of "19", production pattern "2" is specified for the range "20 to 109", and production pattern "3" is specified for the range "110 to 198". is stipulated. Then, if the success/failure determination result is “hit (time saving)” and the selected vibration scenario type is other than “third vibration scenario 65”, the entire range of the value of the acquired fourth production counter 223uvb “0 to 198”, the effect pattern “1” is defined.

Further, when the success/failure determination result is “win (variable probability)” and the selected vibration scenario type is “third vibration scenario 65”, the acquired value of the fourth effect counter 223uvb is “0 to 2”. Effect pattern "1" is defined for the range, effect pattern "3" is defined for the range "3 to 101", and effect pattern "4" is defined for the range "102 to 198". ing. Then, if the success/failure determination result is “hit (time saving)” and the selected vibration scenario type is other than “third vibration scenario 65”, the entire range of the value of the acquired fourth production counter 223uvb “0 to 198”, the production pattern “1” is defined.
Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is "off" and the selected vibration scenario type is "third vibration scenario 65", the acquired value of the fourth effect counter 223uvb is in the range of "0 to 149". The effect pattern "1" is defined for the range of "150 to 198", and the effect pattern "2" is defined for the range "150 to 198". Then, if the success/failure determination result is “hit (time saving)” and the selected vibration scenario type is other than “third vibration scenario 65”, the entire range of the value of the acquired fourth production counter 223uvb “0 to 198”, the production pattern “1” is defined.
When production pattern "1" is set, even if the execution conditions for the progress production are satisfied, the progress production is not executed (information on the current game situation and special symbol lottery may be provided). (No effect is executed). In addition, when the production pattern "2" is set, when the condition for executing the progress production is satisfied, the character "Super hot" indicating that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high as the production mode of the progress production is displayed. Is displayed. When the effect pattern "3" is set, when the execution condition of the progress effect is satisfied, the characters "V in preparation" for notifying that the jackpot has been won are displayed as the effect mode of the progress effect. . When the performance pattern "4" is set, when the execution condition of the progress performance is satisfied, the performance mode of the progress performance is the winning of the jackpot, and the type of the jackpot is the probability variable jackpot advantageous to the player. The characters “Congratulations on the probability change” are displayed to notify that.
As described above, when the progress effect is executed, in addition to the information indicating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, information regarding the jackpot type may also be provided to the player. A benefit (information) more advantageous to the player than when an additional performance that can be executed when the performance is terminated halfway is executed can be given.

Next, contents of the first vibration scenario table 222uvea, the second vibration scenario table 222uveb, and the third vibration scenario table 222uvec will be described with reference to FIGS. 2163 to 2165. FIG.
FIG. 2163 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first vibration scenario table 222uvea, and FIG. 2164 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second vibration scenario table 222uveb. FIG. 2165 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third vibration scenario table 222uvec.
Both scenario tables are data tables referred to during the vibration action executed during the first production of the movable accessory, and are variable production patterns to be executed (variation production patterns determined using the variable production pattern selection table 222uva). pattern) is referenced.
It should be noted that the description of the portions having the same contents as those of the vibration scenario table 222ub in the 60th control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 2163, the first vibration scenario table 222uvea defines an operation scenario in which vibration operations are executed six times (for six cycles), each period being one second. Specifically, for the vibration scenario table 222ub, by halving the excitation interval to "2 milliseconds" and doubling the moving speed of the movable object, a vibration operation with a period of 1 second is realized. configured to be executable. Then, as shown in FIG. 2164, the second vibration scenario table 222uveb defines an operation scenario in which the vibration operation with one period of 3 seconds is executed twice (for two periods). Specifically, with respect to the vibration scenario table 222ub, by increasing the excitation interval by 1.5 times to "6 milliseconds", the moving speed of the movable object is increased by 1.5 times, so that one period is 3 times. It is configured to be able to vibrate in seconds.
That is, the vibration operation executed based on the first vibration scenario table 222uvea and the vibration operation executed based on the second vibration scenario table 222uveb differ in the period required for one vibration operation and the vibration operation to be executed. Although the number of times is different, the operation scenario in which the period used for the vibration operation is the same is defined. It becomes difficult to satisfy the end condition (pressing the frame button 22 five times) within the time period. On the other hand, since the operation period of the movable accessory 900 is the same, the total mission is easier to achieve with the vibration operation executed based on the first vibration scenario table 222uvea, as the individual missions are more difficult to achieve. Become.
In addition, in the 62nd control example, two types of periods (1 second and 3 seconds) are provided as the period required for one vibration operation, and a scenario table is provided in which the entire vibration operation period (6 seconds) is unified. However, other vibration scenario tables may be provided. For example, scenario tables may be provided in which the total vibration operation period (6 seconds) and the period required for one vibration operation are different.
As shown in FIG. 2165, the third vibration scenario table 222uvec is a scenario table in which the same vibration operation as that of the vibration scenario table 222ub is executed with a period of 2 seconds. The difference is that the number of times of vibration operation is increased from 3 times to 6 times. That is, the third vibration scenario table 222uvec defines a longer period (12 seconds) as the entire vibration operation period than the other vibration scenario tables.

As described above, in the 62nd control example, it is possible to execute different modes of vibration operation depending on the variation performance pattern to be executed (the variation performance pattern determined using the variation performance pattern selection table 222uva). ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide variation in the motion mode of the movable accessory 900 during the vibrating motion, and to enhance the performance effect.
In the 62nd control example, the operation scenario specified in each scenario table is repeated a predetermined number of times to simplify the process. Although it is configured so that only the vibration operation is executed, it is not limited to this, and a scenario table in which different vibration modes are executed may be provided, and it is possible to refer to different scenario tables in the repeated processing. It may be configured as follows.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2166, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 62nd control example will be described. FIG. 2166 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the 62nd control example.
As shown in FIG. 2166, the RAM 223 of the 62nd control example has a third effect counter 223uva, a fourth effect counter 223uvb, a fifth effect counter 223uvc, a vibration effect pattern history, and a vibration effect pattern history The difference is that a storage area 223uvd and an additional effect prohibition flag 223uve are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The third effect counter 223uva, the fourth effect counter 223uvb, and the fifth effect counter 223uvc are counters used for notice effects and various lotteries in the 62nd control example, and are used for the first effect counter 223uuf and the second effect counter 223uuf described above. It is configured so that the counter value is updated according to a rule different from that of the effect counter 223uug. By configuring in this way, in the case of determining by lottery a plurality of performance modes related to a plurality of good performances in the same control process, the performance mode determined by referring to the value of the first performance counter 223 uuf and the second performance mode An effect mode determined by referring to the value of the effect counter 223 uug, an effect mode determined by referring to the value of the third effect counter 223 uva, and an effect mode determined by referring to the value of the fourth effect counter 223 uvb , and the effect mode determined by referring to the value of the fifth effect counter 223uvc, can be set so as to be easily set at random without making the respective effect modes related. .
The vibration effect pattern history storage area 223uvd is a storage area for temporarily storing the history of the determined vibration effect pattern (vibration action scenario), and is used in the character effect pattern determination process (see S3151L in FIG. 2169). , When the variation performance type is determined, information on the vibration performance pattern (vibration action scenario type) corresponding to the determined variation performance type is stored (see S3175 in FIG. 2169). The information stored in the vibration effect pattern history storage area 223und is referred to when determining the variation effect type (S3173L in FIG. 2169).
That is, in the 62nd control example, the effect pattern (vibration effect history) of the previously executed vibration effect is identified using the information stored in the vibration effect pattern history storage area 223und, and the vibration effect to be executed next is specified. The production pattern of is configured to be determinable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the vibration effect in the same effect pattern. seconds x 6 times of vibration motion), it is predicted that a vibration scenario other than the third vibration scenario 65 will be set in the vibration performance to be executed next, and the first performance (vibration performance) of the movable accessory is in progress. It is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game of depressing the frame button 22 with the intention of satisfying the ending condition.
The additional effect prohibition flag 223uve is set during the period from when the end condition is satisfied until the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the operating position, even if the end condition is satisfied during the first effect of the movable accessory, that is, In a period when the movable accessory 900 is not positioned at a position where the movable accessory first effect can be terminated while the first condition for ending the movable accessory first effect being executed is satisfied, the additional effect is provided. It is a flag indicating that the execution of is prohibited, and is set to ON when the execution of the additional effect is prohibited.

In the 62nd control example, as the end condition for ending the first rendering of the movable accessory in the middle, the first condition (pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times) during the period in which the movable accessory 900 moves once. and a second termination condition that is satisfied when the second condition (pressing the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times) is satisfied during the entire period of the first rendering of the movable accessory. , and the period from when the first end condition is satisfied until the first effect of the movable accessory is actually finished is used to enable execution of the additional effect, and when the second end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the additional performance is not executed during the period from the first performance to the actual end of the first performance of the movable accessory.
In other words, the ease with which the additional effect is executed is varied depending on the type of end condition established during the first movable accessory effect. By configuring in this way, when the condition for ending the movable accessory first presentation in the middle is satisfied, the player can be interested in the type of the satisfied end condition. .
Note that the additional effect prohibition flag 223uve is set to ON when the above-described second end condition (achievement of the overall mission) is satisfied (see S3283L in FIG. 2171), and the additional effect execution condition (end condition is satisfied It is referred to (S3291L in FIG. 2172) when the pressing operation to the frame button 22 in the state of being in) is established (see S3301L in FIG. 2172), and is set to OFF when the first production of the movable accessory ends (FIG. 2173 S3651L).
Next, referring to FIG. 2167, the driving situation storage area 223uz included in the accessory movement related area 223uuy will be described. FIG. 2167(b) is a diagram schematically showing data types stored in the drive status storage area 223uz. As shown in FIG. 2167(b), in the driving condition storage area 223uz, the storage data (data type) “19H” is added to the driving condition storage area 223uy (see FIG. 2112(b)). are different, and otherwise identical. In addition, the description is abbreviate|omitted about the same content.

This data type "19H" indicates that the vibration control (vibration effect) in which the third vibration scenario 65 is set is executed five times, that is, when the vibration action is executed for the sixth time. This is a data type to indicate the state of Then, in the performance update process (see S3560L in FIG. 2173), when it is determined that the data type “19H” is stored in the drive status storage area 223uz (S3653L in FIG. 2173: Yes), configured to run.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the 63rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2168 to 2175, contents of various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 62nd control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 62nd control example, normal state mode determination processing (Fig. 2142 (S3016L of FIG. 2142), the normal state mode determination processing (S3066L of FIG. 2168), and the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L of FIG. 2143) are replaced by the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2157L of FIG. 2170). 2173) in place of the character object effect update process (S3510L in FIG. 2147), and the vibration scenario process (S3757L in FIG. 2174) in place of the vibration scenario process (S3707L in FIG. 2151). Execution is different, but other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 2168, the processing contents of the normal state mode determination processing (S3066L) will be described. FIG. 2168 is a flow chart showing the details of the normal state mode determination process (S3066L). This normal state mode determination process (S3066L) is performed when it is determined that the variable performance type in which the character performance is executed is determined in contrast to the normal state mode determination process (S3016L in FIG. 2142) in the 60th control example described above. (Fig. 3104L: Yes), it is different from the normal state state determination process (S3016L in Fig. 2142) in that the role product effect pattern determination process (S3151L) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Here, with reference to FIG. 2169, the processing contents of the role product effect pattern determination process (S3151L) executed in the normal state mode determination process (S3066L) will be described. FIG. 2169 is a flow chart showing the process contents of the role product effect pattern determination process (S3151L). In this role product production pattern determination process (S3151L), various processes for determining the production mode of the role product production are executed.

Specifically, when the role product production pattern determination process (S3151L) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the production period (special symbol fluctuation time) of the current fluctuation production is 90 seconds or more (S3155L). Seconds or more (S3155L: Yes), the information stored in the vibration effect pattern history storage area 223und is read (S3156L), and the vibration effect pattern (vibration scenario type) indicated by the read information is It is determined whether it is "accessory super 4 (third vibration scenario 65)" (S3157L). In other words, in the process of S3157L, it is determined whether or not the previous character effect was a character effect that allows the progress effect to be executed.
In the process of S3157L, if it is determined that the vibration effect pattern (vibration scenario type) indicated by the read information is "character super 4 (third vibration scenario 65)" (S3157L: Yes), the current setting is performed. ``Character super 1'' or ``Super character 2'' is determined by lottery as the variable performance type (S3158L), and information indicating the determined variable performance type is overwritten in the vibration performance pattern history storage area 223und (S3159L). Then, the process proceeds to S3160L for determining the contents of the mission to be executed during the present performance of the character.
On the other hand, in the process of S3157L, if it is determined that the vibration effect pattern (vibration scenario type) indicated by the read information is not "character super 4 (third vibration scenario 65)" (S3157: No), S3158L , and proceeds to the process of S3159L.
In the process of S3160L, the mission selection table 222uub is referenced to determine the mission content (S3160L), information corresponding to the determined mission content is stored in the mission pattern storage area 223uur (S3161L), and then the overall mission selection table is stored. 222uvb to determine the overall mission content (S3162L), then refer to the first period suggestive effect table 222uvd to determine the first period suggestive effect mode (S3163L), and refer to the transitional effect mode selection table 222uvc. (S3164L), the determined various modes are stored in the performance information storage area 223uun (S3165L), the driving flag 223uq is set to ON (S3166L), and the data type "00H" is stored in the driving status storage area 223uy. ” is set (S3167L), a value corresponding to the current variation effect type is set to the value of the remaining chance number counter 223uuq (S3168L), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of S3168L, a value corresponding to the number of times of vibrating operation (number of cycles) of the movable role 900 executed based on the determined variable effect type (for example, "3" for "super role 1", "``6'' for ``Super 2'', ``2'' for ``Super 3'', and ``6'' for ``Super 4'') is set as the value of the remaining chance number counter 223uuq. .
Also, in the processing of S3155L, when it is determined that the current variation pattern does not correspond to the variation time of 90 seconds (S3155L: No), the information stored in the vibration effect pattern history storage area 223und is cleared. (S3169L), the process proceeds to S3160L. That is, in the 62nd control example, when the variable effects corresponding to the continuously executed special symbol variations are all variable effects including the character effects, the past effect pattern (vibration effect pattern) is changed. For reference, the present production pattern (fluctuation production pattern) is configured to be determinable.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the same performance pattern as the continuously executed variable performance, and after one character performance is executed in a specific performance pattern. , When it is decided to execute the variable production including the role production again after the variable production in which the role production is not executed is executed a plurality of times, the production pattern of the role production executed in the past is the same. It is possible to execute a specific production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive reduction in the execution frequency of the performance of the character product of the specific performance pattern.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2170, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2157L) will be described. FIG. 2170 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2157L). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2157L) differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107L in FIG. When a person presses the frame button 22, the substrate of the frame button 22 is pushed down, and a detection switch (not shown) detects the movement of the substrate, the detected signal is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy at the time of receiving the detection signal. When the information (data type) is "03H" or "04H", the contents of the processing to be executed are different, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2170, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2157L) is executed, and it is determined that the information (data type is "03H") stored in driving status storage area 223uy. If so (S3206L: Yes), the value of the press counter 223uus is incremented by 1 (S3207L), the press information update process is executed (S3251L), the process proceeds to S3217L, and then the process ends.
In addition, when it is determined that the information (data type is "04H") stored in the drive status storage area 223uy (S3214L: Yes), additional effect mode setting processing is executed (S3252L), and the process proceeds to S3217L. Transition.
Here, with reference to FIG. 2171, the details of the pressing information update process (S3251L) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S2157L in FIG. 2170) will be described. FIG. 2171 is a flow chart showing the details of the pressing information update process. In this pressing information update process, various processes are executed based on the pressing operation to the frame button 22 during the movable accessory first presentation period (during vibration control).
Specifically, when the press information update process (S3251L) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223uus after addition is the mission attained value (S3271L), and it is determined that it is the mission attained value. If so (S3271L: Yes), determine the display mode indicating that the mission has been reached (S3272L), set the vibration scenario end flag to ON (S3273L), set "04H" in the driving situation storage area 223uy (S3274L), The switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S3275L), the mode of displaying the information corresponding to the value of the pressing counter 223uus is determined (S3276L), the display mode of displaying the information corresponding to the total value is determined (S3277L), and determined. A display command corresponding to the mode is set (S3278L), and this process ends.

Also, in the process of S3271L, if it is determined that the value of the press counter 223uus after addition is not the mission attainment value (S3271L: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an overall mission setting (S3279L). If it is determined that there is a mission setting (S3279L: Yes), the value of the press counter 223uus after addition and the value stored in the press information storage area 223uut are added, and the total value (cumulative number of presses) is calculated. Calculate (S3280L). Then, it is determined whether the total value calculated in the processing of S3280L is the overall mission achievement value (S3281), and if it is determined that the total value is the overall mission achievement value (S3281L: Yes), the overall mission achievement is determined (S3282L), the additional effect prohibition flag 223uve is set to ON (S3283L), and the process proceeds to S3276L. Also, in the processing of S3281L, if it is determined that the total value is not the overall mission achievement value (S3281L: No), the processing of S3282L and S3283L is not executed, and the processing proceeds to S3276L.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2172, the processing contents of the additional effect mode setting process (S3252L) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S2157L in FIG. 2170) will be described. FIG. 2172 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the additional effect mode setting process (S3252L). This additional effect mode setting process (S3252L) is different from the additional effect mode setting process (see S3215L in FIG. 2144) in the above-described 60th control example. A process is performed to determine the presence or absence.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2172, when the additional effect mode setting process (S3252L) is executed, the same processes of S3301L and S3302L as the above-described additional effect mode setting process (see S3215L of FIG. 2144) are executed. After that, it is determined whether the additional effect prohibition flag 2232uve is set to ON (S3291L), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3291L: Yes), the processing of S3303L is skipped and this processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S3291L, when it is determined that the additional effect prohibition flag 223uve is not set to ON (S3291L: No), the process of S3303L is skipped and the process ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2173, the process contents of the role product effect update process (S3560L) will be described. FIG. 2170 is a flow chart showing the process contents of the character product effect update process (S3560L). This character object effect update process (S3560L) is different from the character object effect update process (S3510L in FIG. 2147) in the above-described 60th control example, when the movable accessory first effect (vibration operation of the movable accessory 900) ends. When it is determined that the data types "05H", "06H", and "07H" indicating that the driving status storage area 223uy has been stored (S3612L: Yes), the additional effect prohibition flag 223uve is set to ON. (S3651L), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S3651L: Yes), the additional effect prohibition flag 223uve is set to OFF (S3652L); When it is determined that the data type "19H" indicating that the process has been executed is stored in the drive status storage area 223uy (S3653L: Yes), the transition effect mode selection table 222uvc is referred to. The difference is that a process (S3654L) for determining the display mode of is added, and the other process contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

As described above, in the 62nd control example, it is possible to set a variable performance in which the performance period of the character performance is different as a variable performance in which the variable time is set for the same variation pattern. there is More specifically, it is possible to set a variable effect in which the length of the effect period during which the first movable accessory effect is executed is different among the role object effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set various performance modes in which the length of the operation performance period is different for the variable performance executed in the same performance period, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can.
In addition, this 62nd control example is different in that not only the contents of the mission but also the contents of the first action executed during the first presentation of the movable accessory can be set differently. More specifically, the length of the mission period (the length of the operation period for one cycle of the movable accessory 900) can be set differently. By configuring in this way, even if the set mission contents are the same, it is possible to vary the difficulty of mission achievement by changing the length of the mission period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a game aiming at accomplishing the mission with various difficulty levels that combine the length of the mission period and the content of the mission, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.
In addition, in the 62nd control example, similarly to the 61st control example described above, while setting the mission content for one mission period, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during the entire movable accessory first effect period is determined. The overall mission that can be achieved by is also configured to be configurable. With this configuration, even if the individual mission period set during the first rendering of the movable accessory is shortened, the frame button 22 can be continuously pressed during the first rendering of the movable accessory. By pressing it, it becomes possible to complete the entire mission. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue to press the frame button 22 willingly.
<Sixty-third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 63rd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2176 to 2208. FIG. In the 61st control example described above, while the first control for causing the movable accessory 900 to perform the predetermined first action (vibrating action) is executed, the second action (dropping action) different from the first action is performed. operation) is established, the first operation is terminated based on the fact that the movable accessory 900 reaches a predetermined position (operating position) that can be arranged multiple times during the execution of the first operation, and the second operation is performed. It was configured to execute two operations. That is, when the operating condition for the second action is satisfied during the execution of the first action, the second action is executed without waiting for the second action until the end of the first action. was configured to suppress excessive delay in the start of

On the other hand, in the 63rd control example, when the movable condition (displacement condition) of the movable accessory 900 is established during the execution of the first effect, which is at least different from the displacement operation in which the movable accessory 900 is moved (displaced). Then, the movement of the movable accessory 900 is suppressed (waited) until the first effect satisfies the predetermined condition, and when the first effect satisfies the predetermined condition, the movable accessory 900 is moved (displaced). ) is configured to run. More specifically, as the variable display effect, it is configured such that an effect mode involving at least the reproduction of a predetermined sound (music) can be set, and the player operates the frame button 22 while the predetermined sound is being output. Taking this as an opportunity, the configuration is such that a specific movable condition for causing the movable accessory 900 to perform a predetermined movable action can be established. Then, when a specific movable condition is established during output of a predetermined sound, it indicates that the predetermined output (playback) position has been reached, which can be output multiple times during the output (playback) of the predetermined sound (music). As a trigger, it is configured to perform a predetermined movable motion. That is, as a predetermined output position, a timing corresponding to the rhythm of a predetermined sound (music) being reproduced is defined, and when it is determined that the timing corresponding to the rhythm has been reached, the output position is output to the movable accessory 900. It is configured to perform a predetermined movable operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize an effect mode as if the movable accessory 900 is moving in accordance with the rhythm of the voice (music) being output (reproduced). It can be set appropriately. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
The pachinko machine 10 in the 63rd control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 61. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 61st control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIGS. 2176 to 2179, the performance effect, which is the characteristic effect mode in the 63rd control example, will be described. This performance effect is a effect that is executed before developing into a ready-to-win effect. degree), and at least an effect to notify. More specifically, when the musical performance effect is executed, a predetermined sound (music) is reproduced (output), and the frame button 22 is operated at a timing corresponding to the rhythm of the predetermined sound (music). An effect is executed that prompts for multiple times. Then, at the end of the performance, the player's operation result (the number of times it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated at the timing corresponding to the rhythm) is taken into consideration, and the performance result (the success of the performance or the failure of the performance) is taken into account. result) is determined, and the type (expectation) of the ready-to-win effect to be executed after the end of the performance effect is determined by taking into account the result of the effect and the lottery result of the special pattern, and the effect to inform them is executed. . There are five types of ready-to-win effects to be determined, from 1-star reach to 5-star reach, and the higher the number of stars, the higher the level of expectation. In addition, when the performance result of the performance success is notified in the performance performance, control is performed so that one performance is selected from the ready-to-win performances corresponding to the expectation level of 3 stars or more, while the performance failure is controlled. When the effect result is notified, control is performed so that one effect is selected from among the ready-to-win effects corresponding to expectations of 3 stars or less, so it is expected that a effect with a higher degree of expectation will be executed. It is possible to make the player to actively operate the frame button 22 during the execution of performance presentation. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
FIG. 2176(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the start of the performance effect. This performance effect is an effect that may be started while the third pattern is being fluctuated at high speed on the third pattern display device 81 . As shown in FIG. 2176(a), at the start of the musical performance effect, a rabbit character 801 finds a musical instrument (a recorder in the example of FIG. 2176(a)) in the main display area Dm. In addition, characters (for example, characters "RECORDER FOUND!!") indicating the type of found musical instrument are displayed in the display area HR10 formed in the upper part of the main display area Dm. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the performance of playing the musical instrument discovered by the rabbit character 801 will be developed. Although not shown, there is also a fake effect in which the rabbit character 801 fails to find the musical instrument and the effect ends as it is, and the missing symbol is stopped and displayed.

After the rabbit character 801 discovers the musical instrument in the musical performance, the musical performance of playing the musical instrument discovered by the rabbit character 801 is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2176(b), the movable accessory 900 is lowered (displaced) to the production start position (operating position), and the display area formed above the main display area Dm. For the HR 10, a message is displayed that reads, "Press the buttons in time with the rhythm to assist the performance!" Also, a display mode in which a rabbit character 801 holds a musical instrument is set below the main display area Dm. In addition, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area Dm64 is formed on the right side of the rabbit character 801 when viewed from the front, and five vertically elongated substantially rectangular images (gauges) are arranged in the horizontal direction inside the display area Dm64. A chance meter CM of a display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the characters "chance meter" are displayed above the chance meter CM within the display area Dm64. Although the details will be described later, taking into account the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, it is decided by lottery whether the performance result of the performance performance is a performance result corresponding to success or a performance result corresponding to failure. .
Further, as shown in FIG. 2176(b), a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR63 is formed on the right side of the display area Dm64 in front view. This display area HR63 displays an image for suggesting to the player the timing of pressing the frame button 22 . Here, in the performance effect, the frame button 22 is pressed (successfully pressed) at a timing corresponding to the rhythm of the sound (music) being reproduced (output) (timing when the sound being output satisfies a predetermined condition). and a period (lottery period A or lottery period B) during which it is determined that the frame button 22 was pressed (failed to press) at a timing out of rhythm. The display area HR63 is composed of display contents suggesting the timing of determination as the success period when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2176(b), on the left side of the display region HR63, a push image PG having a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical shape and displaying the characters “PUSH” is formed. A dashed push determination line PL is displayed vertically downward from the lower end of the push image PG. Furthermore, a display mode is set in which the note image OG imitating an eighth note scrolls from the right side to the left side of the display area HR63. In this note image OG, the success period is 0.25 ms before and after the center of the part imitating the note head of an eighth note overlaps the push determination line PL, and the other period is the lottery period A or the lottery period. The appearance timing of the note image OG, the scroll speed, and the like are set in advance so that B is obtained. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be pressed at the timing when the note image OG overlaps the push determination line PL. On the other hand, it is possible to realize a game property that is easier to understand.
In this performance effect, for example, an effect is executed in which each scale of do re mi fa so la sido is attempted to be pronounced in order using the discovered musical instrument. When each scale from "do" to "shi" is pronounced, it is informed whether or not the gauge number of the chance meter CM is decreased in consideration of the player's game result (timing of pressing the frame button 22). . Then, in the event that the performance result corresponding to the success of the performance is finally notified, for example, while the performance that succeeds in correctly pronouncing all the scales of do re mi fa so la sido is executed, the performance result corresponding to failure is displayed. In the case of notification, an effect is executed in which the last "do" scale cannot be pronounced normally, and an abnormal sound "pyu" is pronounced. Based on these performance contents, it is possible to inform the player whether the performance result of the performance performance is successful or unsuccessful in an audible and easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more comprehensible mode of presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2177(a), an effect mode when the player operates (depresses) the frame button 22 at a timing that matches the rhythm of the performance effect (timing in which the voice being output satisfies a predetermined condition). explain. As shown in FIG. 2177(a), during execution of the musical performance effect, when an operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 is detected, the push image PG changes to a luminous appearance for 0.1 second from the detection, and The push determination line PL switches from the dashed line to the solid line. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed at a timing that matches the rhythm of the voice being output (timing for outputting a new scale), "GREAT ” is displayed. Furthermore, the rabbit character 801 plays (blows) a musical instrument (recorder) to pronounce the corresponding scale (“mi” scale in the example of FIG. 2177(a)). , After the movable accessory 900 descends from the production position (operating position) by a predetermined number of steps (17 steps), the production operation (pitching operation) returning to the production position (operating position) is executed. In other words, it is possible to realize an effect as if the movable accessory 900 is moving in accordance with the rhythm of the voice (music) being output (reproduced). Due to these effect contents, the frame button 22 can be operated (pressed) at a timing that matches the rhythm (timing when the sound being output satisfies a predetermined condition), so that the effect operation of the movable accessory 900 is performed in time with the rhythm. It is possible to make the player intuitively understand that the chance meter CM has been lost and that the gauge number of the chance meter CM has been maintained without being reduced. Therefore, an easy-to-understand performance action can be realized.
Also, FIG. 2177(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at timing that is out of sync with the rhythm (timing at which the sound being output does not satisfy the predetermined condition). be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 2177(b), the appearance of the push image PG is changed to a luminous appearance when the press is detected, and the push determination line PL is changed from a broken line to a solid line. Next, when the timing matches the rhythm, the result of the operation (pressing) is notified. Here, in the 63rd control example, even if the depression of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing out of sync with the rhythm, the number of gauges of the chance meter CM is not immediately reduced as if the depression was unsuccessful. A lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to move (displace) the movable accessory 900 (whether to maintain the gauge number of the chance meter CM), and different performance operations are executed according to the result of the lottery. The effect operation for each lottery result will be specifically described with reference to FIG.
First, with reference to FIG. 2178(a), pressing of the frame button 22 was detected at a timing out of sync with the rhythm, and the lottery result at the time of the pressing was the lottery result corresponding to the movement of the movable accessory 900 (displacement The effect operation in the case of winning the lottery will be described. As shown in FIG. 2178(a), when the displacement lottery is won, the movable accessory 900 is placed at the timing when the rabbit character 801 outputs the next scale (in the example of FIG. 2178(a), the scale of "mi"). After descending from the production position (operating position) by a predetermined number of steps (17 steps), the production operation (displacement production) is executed to return to the production position (operating position). That is, the same role object motion (displacement motion) as when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing that matches the rhythm is executed. In other words, if the depression of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing that is out of sync with the voice (music) rhythm that is being output (reproduced), and the displacement lottery executed based on the detection is won (the displacement condition is satisfied). , the displacement of the movable accessory 900 is on standby (delayed) until the timing matches the rhythm, and the displacement operation of the movable accessory 900 is performed after the timing matches the rhythm of the voice (music) being output (played). It is configured to run. In addition, a character "GOOD!" is displayed in the display area Dm63 to indicate that the player has won the displacement lottery. By configuring in this way, even if the depression of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing that deviates from the rhythm, it is possible to realize an effect mode as if the movable accessory 900 were moved (displaced) in time with the rhythm. Therefore, the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2178(b), pressing of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing out of rhythm, and the lottery result at the time of pressing is not a lottery result corresponding to the movement of the movable accessory 900. A description will be given of the performance operation in the case of (not winning in the displacement lottery). As shown in FIG. 2178(b), when the displacement lottery is not won, the movable accessory 900 is maintained at the performance position (operating position) without performing the role product operation at the timing that matches the rhythm. Also, in the display area Dm64, a display effect is performed in which the gauge number (meter number) of the chance meter CM is decreased by one. Further, a character "NG" is displayed in the display area Dm63 to indicate that the displacement lottery was not won. These presentation modes allow the player to easily understand that the displacement lottery was not won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2179, description will be given of the presentation mode when the presentation result of the performance presentation is notified. First, with reference to FIG. 2179(a), description will be given of the mode of presentation when the performance presentation results in a presentation corresponding to success. As shown in FIG. 2179(a), when the performance effect results in a performance corresponding to success, the rabbit character 801 is playing the last note of the music (sound) being played (in the example of FIG. 2179(a), A performance is executed that succeeds in sounding (playing) the scale of "do"), and the movable role object 900 falls (displaces) to the lower front side of the third pattern display device 81 ( displacement operation) is performed. In addition, the characters "Success!!" By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the performance is successful in the performance performance, and also understand that the execution of the ready-to-win performance with the expectation level of 3 stars or higher is confirmed. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the ready-to-win effect to be executed after that, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
FIG. 2179(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the performance effect results in an effect corresponding to failure. As shown in FIG. 2179(b), if the performance effect results in a performance effect corresponding to failure, the rabbit character 801 fails to pronounce the final scale in the music (voice) being played, and a different sound ( In the example of FIG. 2179(b), an effect is executed in which a sound of "Pew" is pronounced. Also, the movable accessory 900 is maintained at the performance position (operating position), and the characters "failed..." are displayed in the display area HR10. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the performance is unsuccessful in the performance performance, and also understand that the ready-to-win performance in the range of stars 1 to 3 will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive expectations for the subsequent ready-to-win effect.
<Electrical configuration in the 63rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2180 to 2187, the electrical configuration in the 63rd control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 2180, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 63rd control example will be described. FIG. 2180 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 63rd control example. As shown in FIG. 2180, the ROM 222 in the 63rd control example has an operation scenario table group 222uwa instead of the operation scenario table group 222uug in the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 61st control example (see FIG. 2102). The difference is that It is also different in that a pressing period type table 222uwb, a success lottery table 222uwc, an effect result selection table 222uwd, and a destination selection table 222uwe are added. First, with reference to FIG. 2181, details of the operation scenario table group 222uwa in the 63rd control example will be described.
FIG. 2181(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the action scenario table group 222uwa in the 63rd control example. As shown in FIG. 2181(a), the operation scenario table group 222uwa in the 63rd control example is the second save scenario table group 222uug in the above-described 61st control example (see FIG. 2103). The difference is that a table 222uwa1 and a win operation table 222uwa2 are added, and a vibration scenario table 222uugb is deleted.

First, the second evacuation scenario table 222uwa1 will be described. This second retraction scenario table 222uwa1 is used when returning the movable accessory 900 from the performance position (operating position) to the retraction position after notification of the performance result corresponding to failure in the performance performance (see FIG. 2179(b)). is a table referenced by Here, although illustration is omitted, the second evacuation scenario table 222uwa1 differs from the evacuation scenario table 222uc (see FIG. 2067(b)) in the scenario corresponding to the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk. They differ only in respect. More specifically, the only difference is that the hold operation time corresponding to the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk is changed from 10 ms to 3860 ms. That is, the scenario is defined so that the start timing of the retraction operation is 3850 ms later than when the retraction scenario table 222uwa1 is referred to and the movable accessory is returned to the retraction position. When the performance result corresponding to failure is reported in the performance performance, the movable accessory 900 is dropped compared to the case where the performance result corresponding to success is reported (see FIG. 2179(a)). There is a difference in that there is less production action of the movable accessory 900 because there is no such part. In other words, when the performance result corresponding to success is reported, the retraction motion for returning to the retracted position is executed after the falling motion of the movable accessory 900 is completed, while the performance result corresponding to failure is executed. is notified, after performing only the display effect indicating the failure, the retracting operation for returning the movable accessory 900 to the retracted position is executed. For this reason, in order to suppress the deviation of the effect period for the falling motion (the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to be executed after being notified of failure and the case of being notified of success is different), the failure is reported. In the performance performance performed, the second evacuation scenario table 222uwa1, in which the hold operation time is longer than that of the evacuation scenario table 222uc, is referred to and the evacuation operation is performed. With this configuration, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect can be made common regardless of the effect result of the performance effect, so the effect mode after the end of the performance effect can be set more favorably.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2181(b), the details of the winning operation table 222uwa2 described above will be described. FIG. 2181(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the winning operation table 222uwa2. This win-time operation table 222uwa2 detects pressing of the frame button 22 at a timing (success period) that matches the rhythm of the musical performance, or detects pressing at a timing that deviates from the rhythm (lottery period A or lottery period B). It is a data table that defines a motion scenario for realizing the pitching motion set for the movable accessory 900 when the displacement lottery for the movable accessory 900 that is executed when the press is detected is won.
As shown in FIG. 2181(b), in this win operation table 222uwa2, a holding operation of 10 ms is associated with the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk, and the value "2" of the processing counter 223uk is defined. On the other hand, a forward rotation operation at a drive speed in which the drive motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 2 ms is defined in association with a forward rotation operation in which 17 steps are executed. 17 steps of the reverse rotation operation of the driving speed in which the driving motor 905 is driven (excited) one step every 2 ms with respect to the value "4" of the processing counter 223uk. A reverse rotation operation to be performed is defined in association with the value "5" of the processing counter 223uk, and a non-operation (non-driving operation) for 10 ms is defined in association with the value "5" of the processing counter 223uk. According to these regulations, when the operation of the movable accessory 900 is set by referring to the operation table 222uwa2 at the time of winning, after the movable accessory 900 performs a short-time (34 ms) downward operation, a short-time (34 ms ), the action of returning to the production position (operating position) is realized. As a result, the player perceives the movable accessory 900 as if it were slightly pitched.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2182, details of the above-described pressing period type table 222uwb will be described. This pressing period type table 222uwb indicates whether or not the pressing timing of the frame button 22 matches the rhythm (success period) when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the performance effect (lottery period A or lottery period B). This is a data table that is referenced to determine whether Here, in the success period, when a press on the frame button 22 is detected, it is unconditionally determined to be a press success (the gauge number of the chance meter CM is maintained and the pitching motion of the movable accessory 900 is performed. It is set at a timing matching the rhythm (0.25 seconds before and after the timing of sounding (playing) a new scale). The lottery period A is a period in which it is judged that the depression of the frame button 22 has been successful with a relatively low probability when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected. set in a staggered period. Further, the lottery period B is a period in which it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been successful with a relatively high probability when it is detected. set. In this pressing period type table 222uwb, the range of the elapsed time from the start of the performance effect (the timer value of the performance effect timer 223uwd for measuring the elapsed time in the performance effect) corresponds to the pressing period type. It is stipulated with

As shown in FIG. 2182, in the pressing period type table 222uwb, the pressing period type is set to "Lottery period A" is associated and defined, and the type of pressing period is "lottery Period B" is defined in association with the type of the pressing period of "success period" for the elapsed time range of 2000 ms to 2499 ms (the timer value of the performance effect timer 223uwd is in the range of "07D0H" to "09C3H"). are defined in association with each other. After that, the lottery period A, the lottery period B, and the success period are associated in order according to the elapsed period after the start of the performance effect. In the performance effect, each time the depression of the frame button 22 is detected, the depression period type table 222uwb is referenced to identify the period type, and whether or not the depression is determined to be successful is determined according to the identified period type. It is determined. When the frame button 22 is detected to be pressed, the pressing period type table 222uwb is referenced to determine the type of the pressing period. Therefore, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.
In the sixty-third control example, the success period, the lottery period A, and the lottery period B are defined in advance in the pressing period type table 222uwb, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a depression of the frame button 22 is detected, an instruction command is output to the audio output device 226 so as to notify the reproduction position of the sound (music) being reproduced, and the audio output in response to the instruction command is performed. The device 226 may be configured to notify the audio ramp control device 113 of the playback position of the audio (music) (minimum information that allows for grasping whether or not the timing matches the rhythm) by means of a command. With this configuration, the playback position can be obtained directly from the audio output device 226 that is actually playing back the audio. It is possible to determine whether or not the timing is right. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the musical performance effect.
Next, details of the success lottery table 222uwc will be described with reference to FIG. This success lottery table 222uwc determines whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is successful (moves (displaces) the animal part 900 while maintaining the gageable number of the chance meter CM) or fails (movable This is a data table that is referred to by lottery to decide whether to reduce the gauge number of the chance meter CM without moving (displacing) the accessory 900 . FIG. 2183(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this success lottery table 222uwc.
As shown in FIG. 2183(a), this success lottery table 222uwc draws lots to determine whether or not it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 is successful when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the lottery period A (a period that is relatively out of rhythm). The period A table 222uwc1 is referred to for the purpose of selection, and the selection period B (a period in which deviation from the rhythm is relatively small) is referred to for determining whether or not successful pressing of the frame button 22 is determined when it is detected. The table 222uwc2 for B during the period of time, and the operation (pressing) result of the player after it is determined that the pressing is successful (whether or not the movable accessory 900 performs pitching motion and the gauge number of the chance meter CM is reduced) at least a table 222uwc3 for post-successful pressing that is referred to for determining whether the pressing is successful when the pressing of the frame button 22 is further detected during the period until is provided. It should be noted that when the first depression of the frame button 22 is detected during the success period, it is unconditionally determined that the depression was successful, so the table for the success period is not defined.

First, the details of the period A table 222uwc1 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 2183(b). FIG. 2183(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this period A table 222uwc1. As shown in FIG. 2183(b), the period A table 222uwc1 has a range of determination values for each special symbol lottery result to determine that pressing of the frame button 22 is successful in the lottery period A. stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2183(b), for the special symbol lottery result "jackpot", the value of the first effect counter 223uuf is determined to be in the range of "0 to 24" as successful pressing. It is defined as a judgment value (counter value). On the other hand, the value of the first effect counter 223uuf is defined as a determination value (counter value) in the range of "0 to 19" for the special symbol lottery result "miss". Since the first effect counter 223uuf is composed of a loop counter that is updated within the range of "0 to 99", the variable display of the special symbols being executed (variable display accompanied by the performance effect) corresponds to the big win. If there is, when the press is detected in the lottery period A, it is determined that the press was successful at a rate of 25% (25/100) (determined that the press was unsuccessful at a rate of 75%). On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol being executed (variable display accompanied by musical performance) corresponds to the loss, when the press is detected during the lottery period A, the press is successful at a rate of 20% (20/100). (80% of the time it is determined that the press failed). Therefore, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the lottery period A, the rate of successful pressing of the variable display corresponding to the big win is 5% higher than that of the variable display corresponding to the loss. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is depressed during the lottery period A and it is determined that the depression is successful, the expectation for the big win can be heightened, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Next, details of the period B table 222uwc2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 2183(c). FIG. 2183(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this period B table 222uwc2. As shown in FIG. 2183(c), the period B table 222uwc2 has a range of determination values for determining that pressing of the frame button 22 is successful in the lottery period B for each special symbol lottery result. stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2183(c), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf is determined to be in the range of "0 to 54" for the lottery result "jackpot" of the special symbol as successful pressing. It is defined as a judgment value (counter value). On the other hand, with respect to the lottery result of the special symbol "missing", the value of the first effect counter 223uuf is defined as a determination value (counter value) in the range of "0 to 39" for determination of successful pressing. For this reason, if the variable display of the special symbols being executed (variable display accompanied by musical performance) corresponds to a big hit, when the press is detected during the lottery period B, the press is successful at a rate of 55% (55/100). (It is determined that the pressing fails at a rate of 45%). On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol being executed (variable display accompanied by musical performance) corresponds to the loss, when the press is detected during the lottery period B, the press is successful at a rate of 40% (40/100). (60% of the time it is determined that the press failed). Therefore, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the lottery period B, the success rate of pressing is determined to be higher than during the lottery period A. In addition, the difference in the ratio of determination of successful pressing becomes large between the case of a big hit and the case of a miss. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the lottery period B and the pressing is determined to be successful, the expectation for the big win can be further enhanced, and the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2183(d), the details of the table 222uwc3 for after successful pressing described above will be described. FIG. 2183(d) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this post-successful pressing table 222uwc3. The table 222uwc3 for post-successful pressing defines a range of determination values for determining successful pressing when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected again after it is once determined to be successful pressing. If it is not determined to be successful by referring to the post-success pressing table 222uwc3, the pressing result is updated (overwritten) to failure to press. As shown in FIG. 2183(d), in the post-success pressing table 222uwc3, the value of the first effect counter 223uuf is determined to be in the range of "0 to 4" regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol as successful pressing. It is defined as a judgment value (counter value). Therefore, if the user presses the frame button 22 again after it has been determined to have been successfully pressed once, it will only be determined to be successful at an extremely low rate of 5% (5/100) (95%). Successful press result will be overwritten by failed press result). Therefore, it is desired to derive the performance result corresponding to the success of the performance in the performance performance and develop it into a reach performance with high expectations (to keep the number of chance meter CM gauges large by continuing to determine that the press is successful). The user can be made to press the frame button 22 more carefully. In other words, by performing the pressing method of repeatedly pressing the frame button 22 while ignoring the rhythm, even if the operation is realized at the timing matching the rhythm by chance, it is already determined that the pressing has been successful. If it is, it will be overwritten with the pressing result of pressing failure at a rate of 95%. Therefore, operating (depressing) the frame button 22 in accordance with the rhythm of the voice (music) pronounced (played) by the rabbit character 801 in accordance with the purpose of the performance effect corresponds to the performance success in the performance effect. It can be an optimum game method for deriving a result, and the game is played by a game method ignoring the performance contents of the performance performance (a game method ignoring the voice (music) and repeating pressing of the frame button 22 at short intervals). can be suppressed from occurring.
Note that, in the sixty-third control example, there is a possibility that it is determined that the depression is successful only when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected again before the depression result is notified after it is determined that the depression is successful. Although the table 222uwc3 for low post-successful pressing is referred to and a lottery is performed again to determine whether or not the successful pressing is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if pressing of the frame button 22 is detected again before notification of the pressing result after it is determined that the pressing has failed, the possibility of determining that the pressing has succeeded is low (or the possibility is 0). A configuration may be adopted in which the table is referred to and a lottery is again made to determine whether or not it is determined that the key has been successfully pressed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more effectively suppress the game method in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is repeated at short intervals while ignoring the rhythm of the sound (music) reproduced (output) in the performance effect. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 2184, details of the effect result selection table 222uwd will be described. This effect result selection table 222uwd is used to select the effect result of the performance effect (either the result of successful performance or the result of failure in performance, taking into account the number of gauges (meters) of the chance meter CM at the end of the performance effect. is a data table that is referenced to determine whether FIG. 2184 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect result selection table 222uwd. As shown in FIG. 2184, this effect result selection table 222uwd has a determination value (th 1 effect counter 223uuf counter value) are defined in association with each other.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2184, for the meter number (gauge number) "5" of the chance meter CM, the range of all possible values of the first effect counter 223uuf ("0 to 99" range) is defined in association with “success” as the effect result. For this reason, the number of meters (gauge number) of the chance meter CM remains "5" (that is, it is determined that all the presses have been successfully pressed), and it is possible to reach the effect of outputting the final scale in the performance effect. If possible, the performance result corresponding to success is always notified (see FIG. 2179(a)). In other words, since it is confirmed that the ready-to-win performance with the expected degree of 3 stars or higher is developed after the end of the performance performance, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Also, as shown in FIG. 2184, for the meter number (gauge number) "4" of the chance meter CM, the value of the first production counter 223uuf is in the range "0 to 74", and the production result is ""success" is defined in association with "75 to 99", and "failure" is defined in association with the effect result. Therefore, when the gauge number of the chance meter CM is "4" (i.e., when it is determined that only one pressing is unsuccessful, and the rest of the pressings are all determined to be successful), the final scale in the performance effect is output. When the production is reached, the production result corresponding to success at a rate of 75% (75/100) (see FIG. 2179(a)) is notified, and the production corresponding to failure at a rate of 25% (25/100). The result (see FIG. 2179(b)) is notified. For this reason, when the chance meter CM reaches the stage of outputting the final scale in the state where the meter number (gauge number) of the chance meter CM is "4", the performance result corresponding to success is relatively high. Since it is selected (determined), it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of expectation for the notification of the effect result corresponding to success.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2184, for the meter number (gauge number) "3" of the chance meter CM, the value of the first production counter 223uuf is in the range "0 to 49", and the production result is ""Success" is defined in correspondence, and "Failure" is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99" as the effect result. Therefore, when the gauge number of the chance meter CM is "3" (i.e., only two presses are determined to be unsuccessful, and the rest of the presses are determined to be successful), the final scale in the performance effect is output. When the production is reached, the production result corresponding to success at a rate of 50% (50/100) (see FIG. 2179 (a)) is notified, and the production corresponding to failure at a rate of 50% (50/100) The result (see FIG. 2179(b)) is notified. Therefore, when the chance meter CM reaches the stage of outputting the final scale in the state where the number of meters (gauge number) is "3", success and failure will be half and half, and the performance result will be It can make you feel excited that you don't know which one it will be. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 2184, for the meter number (gauge number) "2" of the chance meter CM, the value of the first production counter 223uuf is in the range "0 to 24", and the production result is ""Success" is defined in association with "25 to 99", and "Failure" is defined in association with the effect result. For this reason, when the gauge number of the chance meter CM is "2" (that is, when it is determined that three presses have been unsuccessful, and all the remaining presses have been determined to be successful), the final scale in the performance effect is output. 25% (25/100) of the production results corresponding to success (see FIG. 2179 (a)) are reported, and 75% (75/100) of the production results corresponding to failure. (See FIG. 2179(b)) is notified. For this reason, if the chance meter CM reaches the stage of outputting the final scale in the state where the meter number (gauge number) is "2", there is a possibility that the performance result will correspond to failure. is high, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation for execution of the effect for success.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2184, for the meter number (gauge number) "1" of the chance meter CM, the value of the first production counter 223uuf is in the range "0 to 14", and the production result is ""Success" is defined in correspondence, and "Failure" is defined in association with the range of "15 to 99" as the effect result. For this reason, when the gauge number of the chance meter CM is "1" (i.e., when four presses are determined to be unsuccessful and all the remaining presses are determined to be successful), the final scale in the performance effect is output. , the production result corresponding to success (see FIG. 2179 (a)) is reported at a rate of 15% (15/100), and the production result corresponding to failure is reported at a rate of 85% (75/100). (See FIG. 2179(b)) is notified. For this reason, if the chance meter commercial has a meter number (gauge number) of "1" and the final scale output in the performance production is reached, failures are even greater than when the meter number is "2". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations for the execution of the performance for success.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2184, for the meter number (gauge number) "1" of the chance meter CM, the value of the first production counter 223uuf is in the range "0 to 4", and the production result is ""Success" is defined in correspondence, and "Failure" is defined in association with the range of "5 to 99" as the effect result. For this reason, when the gauge number of the chance meter CM is "0" (that is, when it is determined that the press has failed 5 times or more), if the final scale output effect in the performance effect is reached, 5% ( 5/100), the production result corresponding to success (see FIG. 2179(a)) is reported, and the production result corresponding to failure (see FIG. 2179(b)) is reported at 95% (75/100). be notified. For this reason, if the chance meter CM reaches the stage of outputting the final scale in the state where the meter number (gauge number) is "0", it is highly possible that the performance result will correspond to success. Since it becomes lower, it is possible to make the player think to press the frame button 22 in time with the rhythm in the next performance effect. Therefore, since it is possible to improve the player's desire to continue playing the game, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.
In the 63rd control example, the effect result of the performance effect is determined based only on the number of meters of the chance meter CM (determined regardless of the lottery result of the variable display effect being executed). It is not limited to this, and the effect result may be determined in consideration of the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting the lottery result of the special symbol from the number of meters (the number of gauges) of the chance meter CM and the determined performance result, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2185, details of the destination selection table 222uwe will be described. This development destination selection table 222uwe is a data table referred to for determining the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed (developed) after the end of the performance effect according to the effect result of the performance effect. FIG. 2185 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this destination selection table 222uwe. As shown in FIG. 2185, this destination selection table 222uwe includes the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed (development destination) and the value of the first effect counter 223uuf for each effect result of the performance effect and the lottery result of the special symbol. and are defined in association with each other.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2185, when the effect result of the performance effect is successful and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the value "0" of the first effect counter 223uuf is "Star 5 reach" is defined in correspondence, "Star 4 reach" is defined in correspondence with the range of "1 to 24", and "Star 3 reach" is defined in relation to the range of "25 to 99" ” are defined in association with each other. In addition, when the effect result of the performance effect is a success and the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the value of the first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of "0 to 9", "star 4 reach". The value of the first effect counter 223uuf is associated with the "5 star reach" while the "3 star reach" is defined in association with the range of "10 to 99". Not done.
For this reason, if the performance result corresponds to the success of the performance performance due to the variation of the jackpot, it will develop into "star 5 reach" at a rate of 1% (1/100), and the rate will be 24% (24/100). Develops into "star 4 reach" and develops into "star 3 reach" at a rate of 75% (75/100). At a rate of 10% (10/100), it develops to "4-star reach", and at a rate of 90% (90/100), it develops to "3-star reach". Therefore, if the effect result corresponds to success and develops into "5-star reach" that can only be determined in the case of a big win, the player can be convinced that a big win will occur. can bring great satisfaction to In addition, when it develops to "star 4 reach" in which the selection ratio is higher in the case of a big win, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced, so the player's interest in the game during the execution of the ready-to-win effect. can be further improved. Furthermore, in the case of developing into a "star 3 reach" in which both big hits and losses are determined by a majority ratio, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility of a big win, so that the interest during the execution of the ready-to-win effect can be enhanced. can be improved.
Also, as shown in FIG. 2185, when the performance result of the performance effect is a failure and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first effect counter 223uuf is in the range of "0 to 9". , "Star 3 reach" is defined in association, "Star 2 reach" is defined in association with the range of "10 to 94", and "Star 1 reach" is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99"Reach" is associated and defined. Further, when the effect result of the performance effect is a failure and the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the value "0" of the first effect counter 223uuf is defined in association with "star 3 reach". , "1 star reach" is defined in association with the range of "1 to 79", and "1 star reach" is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99".

For this reason, if the performance result corresponds to success in the performance performance due to the variation of the jackpot, it will develop into "star 3 reach" at a rate of 10% (10/100), and the rate of 85% (85/100) Develops into "2 star reach" and develops into "1 star reach" at a rate of 5% (5/100). At a rate of 1% (1/100), it develops to "star 3 reach", at a rate of 79% (79/100), it develops to "star 2 reach", and at a rate of 20% (20/100), it develops to "star 1 reach”. Therefore, when the result of performance corresponding to a failure in the performance performance develops into "star 3 reach" which is likely to be determined in the case of a big win, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. In addition, in the case of developing into a "2-star reach" in which a majority of both big hits and misses are determined, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility of a big win, so that the interest during the execution of the ready-to-win effect can be enhanced. can be improved. On the other hand, if it develops into a "1-star reach" where it is easier to kick a miss than a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2186, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 63rd control example will be described. FIG. 2186 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 63rd control example. As shown in FIG. 2186, the RAM 223 in the sixty-third control example has a performance effect flag 223uwa, a depressed flag 223uwb, and a lottery result storage area 223uwc, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixty-first control example described above (see FIG. 2111). , a performance rendering timer 223uwd, and a meter number counter 223uwe are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 61st control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
The performance effect flag 223uwa is a flag for indicating whether or not the performance effect is the set variable display effect. If the performance effect flag 223uwa is on, it indicates that the performance effect is set to the variable display effect, and if it is off, it means that the performance effect is not set. This performance effect flag 223uwa is set to ON when a variable display mode with a performance effect is determined as the variable display effect (see S3105L in FIG. 2188), and when the performance effect ends (when the result of the performance effect is announced) It is set to OFF (see S4411L in FIG. 2192).
The pressed flag 223uwb is a flag for indicating whether or not it has already been determined that the key has been successfully pressed in the musical performance effect. Indicates that it has not been determined to be successful. This depressed flag 223uwb is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the depression is successful in the performance effect (see S3275L and S3280L in FIG. 2189), and this is the timing to notify the depression result. is set to OFF every time (see S4412L in FIG. 2192). When it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed during execution of the musical performance effect, this pressed flag 223uwb is referred to determine whether to perform a successful pressing lottery according to the period type. A lottery referring to the table 222uwc3) is switched.

The lottery result storage area 223uwc is a storage area for storing information indicating the lottery result (determined as success or failure) based on the depression of the frame button 22 when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected in the performance presentation. be. This lottery result storage area 223uwc stores information indicating the lottery result based on the pressing of the frame button 22 each time the depression of the frame button 22 is detected in the performance effect (see S3274L and S3281L in FIG. 2189). At the timing of notifying the pressing result of the frame button 22 (end timing of the success period), the information stored in the lottery result storage area 223uwc is referred to, and if the information corresponding to the pressing success is stored, While executing the effect corresponding to the successful pressing (see FIG. 2178(a)), if the information corresponding to the pressing failure is stored, the effect corresponding to the pressing failure (see FIG. 2178(b)) is executed. do.
The performance effect timer 223uwd is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start of the performance effect. During execution of the musical performance effect, each time a depression of the frame button 22 is detected, the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time defined in the depression period type table 222uwd and the depression period type is referred to, and the type of the current depression period is determined. Any of the success period, the lottery period A, and the lottery period B is specified, and it is determined whether the pressing is successful or the pressing is unsuccessful with the lottery probability according to the type of the specified pressing period.
The meter number counter 223uwe is a counter for counting the meter number (gauge number) of the chance meter CM displayed in the performance effect. The counter value of this meter number counter 223uwe is set to 5 at the start of the musical performance, and the value is increased each time the performance (see FIG. 2178(b)) of decreasing the gauge number of the chance meter CM is executed in the musical performance. It is decremented by 1 (see S4418L in FIG. 2192). At the end of the performance performance, the counter value of the meter number counter 223uwe is referred to, and a lottery is drawn as to whether the performance result of the performance performance is successful or unsuccessful.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2187, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the 63rd control example will be described. FIG. 2187 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the 63rd control example. As shown in FIG. 2187, the audio output device 226 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so as to be able to transmit and receive data.

As shown in FIG. 2187, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A certain RAM 203 is built in.
The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 , the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 .
The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 2187, the ROM 302 is provided with at least a voice file storage area 302a. The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the effects is read out from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.

More specifically, for example, when the musical performance (see FIG. 2176) is started, the audio file (audio data) corresponding to the music (audio) played by the rabbit character 801 using the musical instrument is stored as the audio file. It is read out from the storage area 302a and input (reproduced) to the corresponding channel (for example, CN3). Also, when notifying the effect result in the performance effect (see FIG. 2179), the effect sound corresponding to the effect result is read out from the sound file storage area 302a and input (reproduced) to the corresponding channel (for example, CN4). be.
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the 63rd control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the 63rd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2188 to 2196. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 2188, the details of the normal state effect mode determination process (S3021L) in the 63rd control example will be described. This normal state effect mode determination process (S3021L) is a process executed in place of the normal state effect mode determination process (see FIG. 2142) in the 61st control example described above. ), when a variation pattern command is received in the normal state, it is a process executed for determining the variation display mode according to the variation type notified by the variation pattern command. FIG. 2188 is a flow chart showing the normal state effect mode determination process (S3021L).
Of the normal state effect mode determination processing (see FIG. 2188) in the 63rd control example, in each of the processes of S3101L, S3103L, S3110L, S3111L, and S3113L, the above-described normal state effect mode determination process ( FIG. 2142) are executed in steps S3101L, S3103L, S3110L, S3111L, and S3113L. In addition, in the normal state effect mode determination process (see FIG. 2188) in the 63rd control example, after the process of S3103L ends, the variable effect type determined in the process of S3103L is the variable display mode accompanied by the performance effect. (S3171L), and if it is determined that the variable display mode is accompanied by performance effects (S3171L: Yes), both the drive standby flag 223223up and the performance effect flag 223uwa are set to ON (S3172L). , the process proceeds to S3110L. On the other hand, in the process of S3171L, if it is determined that the variable display mode without performance effect has been determined (S3171L: No), there is no possibility that the performance effect will be executed, so the process proceeds to S3111L. do.
By executing this normal state effect mode determination processing (see FIG. 2188), when the variable display mode accompanied by the performance effect is determined, the performance effect flag 223uwa can be turned on, so that the performance effect can be ensured. can be started at

Next, with reference to FIG. 2189, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2131L) in the 63rd control example will be described. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2189) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2143) in the 61st control example described above. Similar to the rendering process (see FIG. 2143), this is a process for monitoring whether an operation member such as the frame button 22 is operated or not, and performing control corresponding to detection of an operation.
In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2189) in the 63rd control example, first, it is determined whether or not an operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 is detected (S3204L), and an operation on the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that it has not (S3204L: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3204L that an operation (depression) on the frame button 22 has been detected (S3204L: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the performance effect flag 223uwa is ON (S3271L). In the process of S3271L, if it is determined that the performance effect flag 223uwa is off (S3271L: No), it means that it is a period during which no control is performed even if the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, in the process of S3271L, if it is determined that the performance effect flag 223uwa is on (S3271L: Yes), it means that the performance effect is being executed, so the depressed flag 223uwb is then turned on. (S3272L). In the process of S3272L, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223uwb is off (S3272L: No), the current time is determined based on the defined contents of the pressed period type table 222uwb (see FIG. 2182) and the timer value of the performance effect timer 223uwd. It is determined whether or not the type of the pressing period is a success period (S3273L), and if it is determined to be a success period (S3273L: Yes), data corresponding to successful pressing (winning) is stored in the lottery result storage area 223uwc. is stored (S3274L), the depressed flag 223uwb is set to ON (S3275L), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3273L, if it is determined that the current pressing period is not the success period (S3273L: No), the type of the current pressing period is determined from the success lottery table 222uwc (see FIG. 2183(a)). The table is read (S3276L), and the process proceeds to S3278L. In the process of S3276L, when the current pressing period is the lottery period A, the period A table 222uwc1 (see FIG. 2183(b)) is read. 2183(c)).
On the other hand, in the process of S3272L, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223uwb is ON (S3272L: Yes), the success lottery table 222uwc (see FIG. (d)) is read (S3277L), and the process proceeds to S3278L. In the process of S3278L executed after the process of S3276L or S3277L, the read table is referenced to specify the lottery result (press result) (S3278L), and whether the specified lottery result is the lottery result corresponding to success. (S3279L).

In the process of S3279L, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to success (S3279L: Yes), the depressed flag 223uwb is set to ON (S3280L), and the process proceeds to S3281L. On the other hand, in the process of S3279L, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to failure (S3279L: No), the process of S3280L is skipped and the process proceeds to S3281L. In the process of S3281L, the lottery result storage area 223uwc is overwritten with the data corresponding to the lottery result specified in the process of S3278L (S3281L), and the process ends.
By executing this frame button input monitoring/rendering process (see FIG. 2189), each time a press (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected in the performance performance, whether the press is successful or not is determined in consideration of the type of the press period. It is possible to accurately determine whether or not to fail.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2190, details of the drive timer monitoring process (S2122L) in the 63rd control example will be described. This drive timer monitoring process (S2122L) is a process executed in place of the drive timer monitoring process (see FIG. 2145) in the 61st control example described above. This is a process for monitoring the timer value of the timer 223uj and determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred with respect to the movable accessory 900 .
Of the drive timer monitoring process (see FIG. 2190) in the 63rd control example, each of the processes in S3401L to S3403L, S3405L to S3416L, and S3418L is the drive timer monitoring process in the above-described 61st control example (see FIG. 2145). , S3401L to S3403L, S3405L to S3416L, and S3418L are executed. Further, in the drive timer monitoring process (see FIG. 2190) in the sixty-third control example, if it is determined in the process of S3403L that the abnormality handling flag 2223uu is off (S3403L: No), then the drop based on the drop scenario A falling scenario execution flag for indicating that the action is being executed, and an winning action (vertical shaking action of the movable accessory 900) that is set when it is determined that the press is successful (winning) when the frame button 22 is detected to be pressed. ) is being executed (S3431L). In the process of S3431L, if it is determined that any flag is ON (S3431L: Yes), the process proceeds to S3406L. No), the process moves to S3405L. Further, in the driving timer monitoring process (see FIG. 2190) in the sixty-third control example, when the process of S3416 ends, the process proceeds to S3418L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2191, details of the rendering update process (S2123L) in the 63rd control example will be described. This effect update process (S2123L) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 2146) in the above-described 61st control example. This is processing for updating.
In the processing of S3501L to S3508L and S3512L of the effect update processing (see FIG. 2191) in the sixty-third control example, S3501L to S3508L in the effect update processing of the sixty-first control example (see FIG. 2146), and The same processing as each processing of S3512L is executed. In addition, in the effect update process (see FIG. 2191) in the sixty-third control example, when S3502L is completed, it is then determined whether or not the performance effect flag 223uwa is on (S3531L), and the performance effect flag 223uwa is on. If there is (S3531L: Yes), performance effect update processing for updating various performance modes in the performance effect is executed (S3532L), and this processing ends. Details of this performance effect update process (S3532L) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3531L that the performance effect flag 223uwa is off (S3531L: No), it means that the performance effect is not being executed, so the process of S3532L is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503L. to move to.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2192, the details of the performance effect update process (S3532L) described above will be described. FIG. 2192 is a flow chart showing the performance effect updating process (S3532L). When the performance effect update process (S3532L) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the performance effect timer 223uwd is 0 (S4401L), and it is determined that the timer value of the performance effect timer 223uwd is 0. If so (S4401L: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start the valid operation period (S4402L). In the process of S4402L, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the operation effective period (S4402L: No), this process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401L that the timer value of the performance effect timer 223uwd is not 0 (S4401L: No), and if it is determined in the process of S4402L that it is time to start the effective operation period (S4402L: Yes), then the timer value of the performance effect timer 223uwd is updated by adding 1 (S4403L), and it is determined whether or not the updated timer value has reached the timer value corresponding to the end timing of the success period (S4404L). ).

In the process of S4404L, if it is determined that the timer value does not correspond to the end timing of the success period (S4404L: No), then, whether or not it is the timing for announcing the effect result of the performance effect (the end timing of the performance effect). (S4405L), and if it is determined that it is not the performance notification timing (end timing) (S4405L: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4405L, if it is determined that it is time to notify the result of performance effect (S4405L: Yes), the effect result selection table 222uwd (see FIG. 2184) is read (S4406L), and the read table is referred to. Then, the effect result corresponding to the current meter number of the chance meter CM indicated by the counter value of the meter number counter 223uwe is specified (S4407L). Next, the development destination table 222uwe (see FIG. 2185) is read, and from the specified contents of the read table, the performance result specified in the processing of S4407L and the lottery result of the special symbol this time. The mode (ready-to-reach type) is specified (S4408L), and after the performance result specified in the process of S4407L is notified, the execution of the latter half of the effect mode that develops into the reach-to-reach type specified in the process of S4408L is set. (S4410L). Next, the performance effect flag 223uwa is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S4417L.
On the other hand, in the process of S4404L, if it is determined that the updated timer value corresponds to the end timing of the success period (S4404L: Yes), first, the pressed flag 223uwb is set to OFF ( S4412L), then it is determined whether data corresponding to winning is stored in the lottery result storage area 223uwc (S4413L). In the process of S4413L, if it is determined that data corresponding to winning (successful pressing) is stored (S4413L: Yes), execution of an effect for winning (successful pressing) is set (S4414L), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S4417L.
On the other hand, in the process of S4413L, if it is determined that data corresponding to winning (unsuccessful pressing) is stored in the lottery result storage area 223uwc (S4413L: No), an effect for non-winning (failed pressing) is displayed. is set (S4415L), the value of the meter number counter 223uwe is updated (S4416L), and the process proceeds to S4417L. In the process of S4417L executed after any one of S4411L, S4414L, and S4416L ends, role product action setting processing for setting the action of the movable role product 900 is executed (S4417L), and this process ends. do. Details of this role product action setting process (S4417L) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 2193 is a flow chart showing this role product action setting process (S4417L). When this role product action setting process (S4417L) is executed, first, the value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 (S4451L), and then it is determined whether or not it is time to notify the result of the current performance effect ( S4452L). In the process of S4452L, if it is determined that it is time to report the result (S4452L: Yes), then it is determined whether or not to report the effect result corresponding to success (S4453L). In the processing of S4453L, if it is determined that the notification of the effect result corresponding to success has been determined (S4453L: Yes), it corresponds to the value of the processing counter 223uk in the fall scenario table 222uugc (see FIG. 2109(b)). data is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4454L), the fall scenario execution flag is set to ON (S4455L), and the process proceeds to S4461L.

On the other hand, in the process of S4453L, if it is determined that the notification of the performance result corresponding to the failure has been determined (S4453L: No), the data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk in the second save scenario table 222uwa1 is transferred to the scenario Store in the storage area 223ue (S4456L), set the second save scenario execution flag to ON (S4457L), and proceed to S4461L.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4452L, if it is determined that the current timing is not the notification timing of the effect result of the performance effect (end timing of the performance effect) (S4452L: No), it means that it is the timing of notification of the pressing result. Therefore, it is determined whether or not data corresponding to winning (successful pressing) is stored in the lottery result storage area 223uwc (S4458L). (S4458L: No), since the movable accessory 900 is not operated, the process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4458L, if it is determined that data corresponding to winning (successful pressing) is stored in the lottery result storage area 223uwc (S4458L: Yes), the winning operation table 222uwa2 (Fig. 2181(b) )), the data corresponding to the value of the processing counter 223uk is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4459L), the winning operation execution flag is set to ON (S4460L), and the process proceeds to S4461L.
In the process of S4461L, the timer value of the drive timer 223uj is set to 0 (S4461L), the switching flag 223uuu is set to ON (S4461L), and this process ends. By executing this role product action setting process (see FIG. 2193), the movable action (displacement action) is preferably performed for the movable accessory 900 in the case of informing the successful pressing and in the case of informing the effect result of the performance effect. ) can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2194, details of the motor scenario processing (S2124L) in the 63rd control example will be described. This motor scenario process (S2124L) is a process that is executed instead of the motor scenario process (see FIG. 2149) in the 61st control example described above. This is a process for advancing the action according to the action scenario set for the . FIG. 2194 is a flow chart showing this motor scenario processing (S2124L).
In the motor scenario processing of the 63rd control example (see FIG. 2194), the processing of S3701L, S3703L, S3705L, and S3710L is performed in S3701L, S3703L in the motor scenario processing of the 61st control example (see FIG. 2149). , S3705L, and S3710L are executed. In addition, in the motor scenario process (see FIG. 2194) in the 63rd control example, if it is determined in the process of S3703 that the save scenario execution flag is ON (S3703L: Yes), the save scenario process (see FIG. 2155) Instead, save scenario processing is executed (S3731L), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3703L, if it is determined that the save scenario execution flag is off (S3703L: No), then it is determined whether or not the action scenario execution flag at the time of winning is on (S3732L). If it is determined that the motion scenario execution flag is on (S3732L: Yes), winning motion scenario processing for moving the movable accessory 900 according to the motion scenario corresponding to the winning motion is executed (S3733L), and this processing is performed. exit. The details of this winning operation scenario process (S3733L) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3732L, when it is determined that the winning action scenario execution flag is OFF (S3732L: No), the process proceeds to S3734L.
In the processing of S3734L, it is determined whether or not the fall scenario execution flag is on (S3734). A fall scenario process is executed (S3736L), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3734L that the fall scenario execution flag is off (S3734L: No), instead of the advance scenario process (see FIG. 2150) in the 61st control example, the advance scenario process is executed ( S3736L), this process ends. Details of this advancement scenario processing (S3736L) will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 2195 is a flowchart showing advance scenario processing (S3736L). This advancing scenario process (S3736L) is a process that is executed instead of the advancing scenario process (see FIG. 2150) in the 61st control example described above. 222uuga by referring to the advance scenario table 222uuga.

In each of the processes of S3806L to S3809L, S3811L, S3812L, and S3816L in the advancing scenario process (see FIG. 2195) in the 63rd control example, S3806L in the above-described advancing scenario process (see FIG. 2150) in the 61st control example The same processes as the processes of S3809L, S3811L, S3812L, and S3816L are executed. Also, when the advance scenario process (see FIG. 2195) in the 63rd control example is executed, data is first extracted from the scenario storage area 223ue (S3831L), and the process proceeds to S3806. In addition, in the advancing scenario processing (see FIG. 2195) in the 63rd control example, whether the processing of S3809L ends or whether it is determined in the processing of S3807L that the detection sensor corresponding to the sensor data is ON (S3807L: Yes ), or if it is determined in the processing of S3808L that the value of the drive timer 223uj matches the value of the time data specified in the operation scenario (S3808L: Yes), whether the value of the processing counter 223uk is 4 is determined (S3832L). That is, it is determined whether or not the last scenario in the advance scenarios has ended.
In the processing of S3832L, when it is determined that the value of the processing counter 223uk is 4 (S3832L: Yes), the character product driving flag 223uq is set to OFF (S3833L), and the processing proceeds to S3816L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3832L that the value of the processing counter 223uk is not 4, the process proceeds to S3811L. In the advance scenario processing (see FIG. 2195) in this 63rd control example, the main difference from the 61st control example is that the operation of the movable accessory 900 is temporarily terminated at the stage where the advance operation based on the advance scenario table 222uuga is completed. become a point. That is, in the 61st control example, a plurality of action scenarios are continuously referred to to set the action. The operation 900 is terminated, and the system waits until the condition for executing the next role product operation is satisfied.
<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the 63rd control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the 63rd control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2197 to 2199. FIG. First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 2197(a). FIG. 2197(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.
When the main processing is executed in the audio output device 226, command output processing for setting the output of various commands to the audio lamp control device 113 is first executed (S6001L). Next, command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S6002L). Details of this command determination process (S6002L) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S6002L, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) corresponding to the effect is executed (S6003L). Details of this audio setting process (S6003L) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S6003L is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S6004L). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S6004 (S6004L: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S6006L), and power-off processing is executed (S6007L). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S6008L), and then the processing is looped infinitely.
On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S6004L (S6004L: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S6005L), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S6005L: No), the process returns to S6001L, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 has been destroyed (S6005L: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.
Next, referring to FIG. 2197(b), command interrupt processing executed by MPU 301 of audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 2197(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 2197(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .
In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S6501L), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2198, the command determination process (S6002L), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 2197(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 2198 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S6002L). In the command determination process (S6002L), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6101L), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6101L: No), the command determination process is terminated. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6101L: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6102L). For all commands in the process, the command type is analyzed (S6103L).
Then, it is first determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6104L). This sound variation pattern command is issued to the sound output device 226 at the timing when the detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the type and output timing of the sound to be reproduced corresponding to the selected display mode. set to notify the
In the processing of S6104L, if it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (S6104L: Yes), music and sound effects used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (S6105L ), set the output channel and output timing of the identified music piece, sound effect (S6106L), and return to the processing of S6101L.
In the processing of S6104L, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (S6104L: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a voice sound effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6107L). This sound effect command for sound is determined on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 to output a sound effect that was not set at the start of the variable display effect (or a sound effect that is set independently of the variable display effect). is set to notify the audio output device 226 of the type of audio to be reproduced and the output timing.

In the processing of S6104, if it is determined that there is a sound effect command for voice among the unprocessed commands (S6107: Yes), the sound effect corresponding to the notified sound effect type is specified (S6108), The output channel and output timing of the produced sound effect are set (S6109), and the process returns to S6101. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6107 that there is no voice sound effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6107: No), the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6110), and S6101 return to the processing of
Next, with reference to FIG. 2199, the details of the audio setting process (S6003), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 2197(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 2199 is a flow chart showing the contents of this audio setting process (S6003).
In the audio setting process (S6003L), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output (reproduce) music (S6201L). In the processing of S6201L, if it is determined that it is time to output the music (S6201L: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S6202L), and the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (6203 ), the music output flag 303b is set to ON (S6204L), and the process proceeds to S6205L. Note that a channel for outputting an audio file is predetermined for each file. For example, it is preset to output the audio file of the music used for the variable effect to channel 1. On the other hand, in the processing of S6201L, if it is determined that it is not the output timing of the music (S6201L: No), the processing from S6202L to S6204L is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6205L.
In the process of S6205L, it is determined whether or not it is time to output a sound effect (S6205L). In the process of S6205L, if it is determined that it is not the output timing of the sound effect (S6205L: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to output a sound effect (S6205L: Yes), the sound file corresponding to the current sound effect is read (S6206L), and the read sound file is output to the corresponding channel (6207L). , the process ends. As a result, it is possible to suitably output sound effects.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-third control example, the first control (control for setting a specific notification mode) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and the first control is executed. On the premise that the second control (at least the control different from the control for setting a specific notification mode) can be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition during execution, If the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first control, the first control is continued until the second condition (a trigger for execution of control at least different from the control for setting a specific notification mode) is satisfied. (execution of the second control is delayed), and the second control is executed when the second condition is satisfied. More specifically, a predetermined movable action is performed on the movable accessory 900 during execution of reproduction control (first control) of a predetermined sound that is at least different from the displacement action in which the movable accessory 900 is moved (displaced). When the execution condition (first condition) for executing the movement control (second control) is satisfied, the movement of the movable accessory 900 is suppressed ( standby), and when a predetermined voice satisfies the second condition, predetermined control is executed to cause the movable accessory 900 to perform a predetermined movable action (displacement action). More specifically, in the 63rd control example, a game is played in accordance with a game method in which the frame button 22 is operated in time with the rhythm of the predetermined sound, accompanied by at least the reproduction of a predetermined sound (music) as the variable display effect. The specific performance mode prompting the player to perform the performance is configured to be able to execute a performance performance composed of at least the father, and when the player operates the frame button 22 during the performance of the performance performance, the movable accessory 900 is activated. On the other hand, it is configured such that a specific movable condition for performing a predetermined movable operation can be established. Then, when a specific movable condition is established during the output of a predetermined sound, a predetermined output (reproduction) position (a new scale is generated) that can be output multiple times during the output (reproduction) of the predetermined sound (music). Triggered by reaching the output playback position), a predetermined movable operation is performed. That is, as a predetermined output position, a timing corresponding to the rhythm of a predetermined sound (music) being reproduced is defined, and when it is determined that the timing corresponding to the rhythm has been reached, the output position is output to the movable accessory 900. It is configured to perform a predetermined movable operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize an effect mode as if the movable accessory 900 is moving in accordance with the rhythm of the voice (music) being output (reproduced). It can be set appropriately. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
In the sixty-third control example, when a performance mode including performance performance is determined as the variable display mode, pressing the frame button 22 at a timing corresponding to the rhythm of the music gives a high-expectation ready-to-win performance. Although the configuration is such that the musical performance effect that easily develops into a new game is always executed, the configuration may be such that the player can select whether or not to execute the musical performance effect. More specifically, for example, when an effect mode including a performance effect is determined and a variable display effect is started, whether to change to another effect different from the performance effect before the start timing of the performance effect. may be executed. As a method for making the selection, for example, a musical performance effect is executed when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected within a predetermined period, while a different effect from the musical performance effect is executed when no operation is detected. Alternatively, it may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the musical performance effect according to the operation details of other operating members other than the frame button 22 . By configuring in this way, a player who is looking forward to the performance effect while playing the game can be made to perform an operation for executing the performance effect. A player who is not good at operating the button 22 is made to perform an operation for changing to another performance (a performance not requiring the operation of the frame button 22) different from the performance performance. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that matches the taste of each player, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game.
In the 63rd control example, as a performance effect, a predetermined music is reproduced (output), and an effect is executed to prompt the player to play a game by operating the frame buttons 22 in time with the rhythm of the predetermined music. By playing a game by a game method in which the frame buttons 22 are operated in time with the rhythm, it becomes easier to control the movement of the movable accessory 900 in which the movable accessory 900 performs pitching motions in time with the rhythm. When the frame button 22 is operated at the right timing, the movable accessory 900 is less likely to swing vertically at the timing that matches the rhythm, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is operated at a timing that matches the rhythm, the movable accessory 900 is configured to swing vertically at the timing when the frame button 22 is detected to be pressed. , and the gauge number (meter number) of the chance meter CM is reduced by 1, an effect may be generated to reduce the gauge number (meter number) at a timing that matches the rhythm. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the button has been pressed at a timing that matches the rhythm by comparing the movement timing of the movable accessory 900 with the voice mode of the predetermined music being reproduced. It is possible to keep the player who has grasped that the button was pressed at a timing out of the rhythm to have expectations for winning the successful lottery until the timing matches the rhythm. Interest in the game can be further improved.
In this 63rd control example, regardless of the number of gauges of the chance meter CM (that is, regardless of whether the player is playing a game by pressing the frame button 22 at a timing that matches the rhythm), In the presentation, the performance is continued until the rabbit character 801 outputs (plays) the final scale, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of gauges of the chance meter CM becomes 0 in the performance performance, the performance result corresponding to the failure may be notified. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to feel strongly that he or she wants to keep the number of the chance meters large, so that the game is played by a game method in which the frame button 22 is operated at a timing that matches the rhythm. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this 63rd control example, every time an operation to the frame button 22 at a timing that deviates from the rhythm of the music is detected during performance performance, the movable accessory 900 is moved (the meter number of the chance meter CM is maintained). ) is determined by lottery, and when an operation is detected at a timing that matches the rhythm, the movable accessory 900 is always moved and the meter count of the chance meter CM is maintained. It is not limited. For example, even if an operation to the frame button 22 at a timing that matches the rhythm is detected, a lottery determines whether or not to move the movable accessory 900 (maintain the meter number of the chance meter CM). may be By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a case where the number of meters of the chance meter CM decreases even if the game of pressing at the timing that matches the rhythm is perfectly played, so that pressing at the timing that matches the rhythm can be provided. A player who was able to play the game can be made to play the game with the expectation that the number of meters will not decrease, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, during the variable display corresponding to the big win, the movable accessory 900 is moved when the frame button 22 is successfully pressed at a timing that matches the rhythm more than during the variable display corresponding to the loss. It may be configured such that the ratio of determination of is high. With this configuration, when the movable accessory 900 is successfully pressed at a timing matching the rhythm and the movable accessory 900 is moved and the number of meters of the chance meter CM is maintained, the player's expectation for a big win. can be further enhanced. Conversely, in the case of a big hit, there is provided a case where it is not decided to move the movable accessory 900 with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/100) when the key is successfully pressed at a timing that matches the rhythm. Then, it may be configured such that the movable accessory 900 is always determined to be moved in the case of being out of line. By configuring in this way, when the movable accessory 900 does not perform the pitching motion even though it is pressed at a timing that matches the rhythm, the player can feel a strong sense of discomfort. Since it is possible to make the player intuitively understand that a big win is possible, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the 63rd control example, in the performance effect, the effect including the effect mode that prompts the pressing of the frame button 22 at the timing that matches the rhythm is executed, and the depression of the frame button 22 is detected at the timing that matches the rhythm. Compared to the case where pressing of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing that deviates from the rhythm, it is easier to determine the type of ready-to-win effect to be developed with a large gauge number of the chance meter CM, and as a result, it is expected. Although it is configured to have a game property in which a high degree of ready-to-win effect is easily executed, the present invention is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to pressing the frame button 22, another predetermined condition is established at timing matching the rhythm, thereby achieving a ready-to-win performance with a higher degree of expectation than when the predetermined condition is established at timing out of rhythm. may be configured to facilitate the execution of In this case, the predetermined conditions include, for example, that the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, that the game ball passes through the through gate 67, and that an operation member other than the frame button 22 is operated. It is desirable to set a condition that allows the player to adjust the establishment timing, such as performing an operation.
In the sixty-third control example, the pressing period type table 222uwb defines the elapsed time after the start of the performance effect and the period type (success period, lottery period A, or lottery period B) in association with each other. By referring to, the type of period is specified, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the command (instruction) instructs the audio output device 226 from the audio lamp control device 113 to determine and notify the reproduction position of the audio data being reproduced. , and based on the playback position notified from the audio output device 226 based on the command, the audio lamp control device 113 side determines whether or not it is pressed at a timing that matches the rhythm. may Further, for example, in the audio output device 226, not only the reproduction position of the audio data being reproduced but also the determination of whether or not the timing matches the rhythm is performed. However, it may be configured such that only the determination result of whether or not the timing matches the rhythm is notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the timing matches the rhythm directly from the actually reproduced audio data, so that pressing at the timing matching the rhythm can be performed more accurately. It can be determined whether or not Further, for example, a sound collecting device such as a microphone capable of detecting at least the sound output from the speaker unit 308 is arranged near the speaker unit 308, and the sound collecting device is connected to the sound lamp control device 113. By electrically connecting, the sound waveform of the sound output from the speaker unit 308 may be configured so that the sound lamp control device 113 can directly analyze it. Then, it may be determined whether or not the timing matches the rhythm from the sound waveform based on the collected sound. By configuring in this way, it is possible to directly analyze the sound actually output from the speaker unit 308 and determine whether or not the depression is made at a timing that matches the rhythm. can be further enhanced.
In the 63rd control example, the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing that matches the rhythm, or the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected at a timing that is out of rhythm, and the lottery result corresponding to the successful pressing in the lottery at the time of detection is detected. In this case, the movable accessory 900 is configured to pitch in time with the rhythm, but the condition for pitching the movable accessory 900 is not limited to this. For example, a period during which the sound is interrupted randomly or periodically (silent period) or a period during which the volume decreases (low volume period) is set during the execution of the performance effect, and these silent periods or low volume periods are set. If the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected within a predetermined period after the start of the volume period, it is determined that the pressing was successful. If it is detected), there is a possibility that it may not be determined as successful pressing (a lottery is executed to determine whether or not successful pressing is determined). Then, based on detection of the depression during the silent period or the low volume period, the reproduction at the normal volume may be restarted. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player is made to listen more carefully to the sound being reproduced during the performance performance and to prepare for the arrival of the silent period or the low volume period. , the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<64th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 64th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2200 to 2204. FIG. In the above-described 61st control example, the number of times (predetermined number) of pressing operations on the frame button 22 for stopping the vibrating motion of the movable accessory 900 and performing the second motion (falling motion or rising motion) is different. It was configured to provide different types of performances.
In addition to this, in the 64th control example, even if execution of the second action is determined once the specified number of times is reached, further depression of the frame button 22 is detected before reaching the effect position (actuation position). In this case, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to avoid (cancel) the execution of the determined second action. As a result, it is possible to create new playability and improve the interest of the player in the game.
The pachinko machine 10 in the 64th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 61. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 61st control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
First, with reference to FIG. 2200, the display mode during execution of the character object presentation in the 64th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 2200(a), in the sixty-fourth control example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is not specified as a mission. That is, as shown in FIG. 2200(a), only the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed is displayed in the small display area Dm62, and in the small display area Dm61, "Press the button as many times as you like!" characters are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to conceal the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (predetermined number of times) to perform the second action. It is possible to realize a playability in which the player himself/herself selects the number of times of pressing. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 2200(b), the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed has not reached the specified number of times in the performance of the character, or after reaching the specified number of times and execution of the second action is determined. Further, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected and the movable accessory 900 reaches the operating position in a state where the execution of the second action is canceled, the performance mode is set to inform that the mission has failed. Specifically, the text "Mission Failed" is displayed in the small display area Dm61. In this way, even if the movable accessory 900 reaches the operating position in a state in which the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed has not reached the specified number of times, the frame button 22 is further pressed after the execution of the second action is determined. Even when the operating role product 900 reaches the operating position in a state where the execution of the second action is canceled by detecting, the same production mode is used to notify only that the second action is not executed. It can be ambiguous which caused the second action not to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which a game is played by predicting the specified number of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Electrical configuration of the 64th control example>
Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the 64th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 2201(a). FIG. 2201(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 64th control example. As shown in FIG. 2201(a), the ROM 222 in the 64th control example has a cancel lottery table 222uxa added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 61st control example (see FIG. 2102). are different. This cancellation lottery table 222uxa will be described with reference to FIG. 2201(b).
FIG. 2201(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the cancellation lottery table 222uxa. This cancellation lottery table 222uxa executes the second action after the conditions for executing the second action are met (detection of pressing of the frame button 22 a specified number of times) during execution of the role product presentation using the movable role object 900. When it is detected that the frame button 22 is further pressed before reaching the executable operating position (performance position), it is referred to by lottery to determine whether or not to cancel the second action once determined to be executed. Data table.
As shown in FIG. 2201(b), this cancellation lottery table 222uxa contains the result of the special symbol lottery and the determination value (the counter value of the first effect counter 223uuf) for determining cancellation for each set mission pattern. ) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2201(b), the result of the lottery is "jackpot" and the mission pattern is "1A" or "1B" (that is, the mission pattern in which the specified number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 5). On the other hand, the range of values of the first effect counter 223uuf "0 to 2" is defined as a determination value (counter value) for determining cancellation. Therefore, after the execution of the second action is determined (after detecting that the frame button 22 has been pressed five times), every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the rate of 3% (3/100) , a lottery is drawn to cancel the second action. Note that once the cancellation lottery is won, the cancellation is confirmed, and even if the frame button 22 is further pressed after that, the second action is not determined again.

Also, as shown in FIG. 2201(b), for the lottery result of "jackpot" and the mission pattern "2A" or "2B" (that is, the mission pattern in which the specified number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 3), , the range of values of the first effect counter 223uuf "0 to 39" is defined as a determination value (counter value) for determining cancellation. Therefore, after the execution of the second action is determined (after detecting that the frame button 22 has been pressed three times), every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the ratio is 40% (40/100). , a lottery is drawn to cancel the second action. Also, as shown in FIG. 2201(b), for the lottery result of "jackpot" and the mission pattern "3A" or "3B" (that is, the mission pattern in which the prescribed number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 1), , the range of values of the first effect counter 223uuf, "0 to 24", is defined as a determination value (counter value) for determining cancellation. Therefore, after the execution of the second action is determined (after detecting one press on the frame button 22), every time the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the ratio of 25% (25/100) , a lottery is drawn to cancel the second action.
For these, as shown in FIG. 2201(b), the result of the lottery is "miss" and the mission pattern is "1A" or "1B" (that is, the mission pattern in which the specified number of presses of the frame button 22 is five). On the other hand, the range of values of the first effect counter 223uuf "0 to 14" is defined as the determination value (counter value) for determining cancellation. Therefore, after the execution of the second action is determined (after detecting that the frame button 22 has been pressed five times), every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the ratio of 15% (15/100) , a lottery is drawn to cancel the second action. Also, as shown in FIG. 2201(b), for the mission pattern "2A" or "2B" (that is, the mission pattern in which the specified number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 3), the lottery result is "lost". , the range of values of the first effect counter 223uuf "0 to 4" is defined as a determination value (counter value) for determining cancellation. Therefore, after the execution of the second action is determined (after detecting that the frame button 22 has been pressed three times), every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the rate of 5% (5/100) , a lottery is drawn to cancel the second action. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2201(b), for the lottery result of "big hit" and the mission pattern "3" (that is, the mission pattern in which the specified number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 1), the first effect A range of values "0 to 4" of the counter 223uuf is defined as a determination value (counter value) for determining cancellation. Therefore, after the execution of the second action is determined (after detecting one press on the frame button 22), every time the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the rate of 5% (5/100) , a lottery is drawn to cancel the second action.
Therefore, if the specified number of times until the second action is determined is set to 5, there is a possibility that the cancellation lottery will be won and the execution of the second action will be canceled if the player loses rather than wins the jackpot. get higher On the other hand, if the specified number of times until the second action is determined is set to 3 times or 1 time, it is possible that the big hit will win the cancellation lottery and the execution of the second action will be canceled rather than the loss. become more sexual. Therefore, when the specified number of times is set to 5, even if the depression of the frame button 22 is detected after the execution of the second action is determined, the execution of the second action is not canceled, which is expected to be a big win. degree increases. Further, when the specified number of times is set to 1 or 3, on the contrary, if the execution of the second action is canceled, the expectation of the big win is higher. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of estimating the degree of expectation of a big win depending on whether or not the game is canceled. In addition, as described above, in the 64th control example, since the set specified number of times is kept secret, the player cannot know the specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the specified number of times, and to realize a novel game feature in which the degree of expectation for a big win is estimated according to the prediction result and the presence or absence of cancellation. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2202, details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the 64th control example will be described. FIG. 2202 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 64th control example. As shown in FIG. 2202, the RAM 223 in the 64th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 61st control example described above (see FIG. 2111) only in that a cancel flag 223uxa is added. .

The cancel flag 223uxa indicates that after the conditions for executing the second action are met during execution of the role product production (vibrating action of the movable role object 900), the movable role is set to the operating position (production position) where the second action can be executed. A flag that is set to ON when execution of the second action is canceled before the object 900 arrives. While the cancel flag 223uxa is set to ON, control is performed so that execution of the second operation cannot be determined.
<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the 64th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the 64th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2203 and 2204. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 2203, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2141L) in the 64th control example will be described. FIG. 2203 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2141L).
Of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2203) in this 64th control example, in each of the processes of S3201L to S3208L, S3210L to S3214L, S3216L, and S3217L, the frame button input monitoring of the above-described 61st control example is performed. - The same processing as each processing of S3201L to S3208L, S3210L to S3214L, S3216L, and S3217L of the production processing (see Fig. 2143) is executed. In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2203) in the sixty-fourth control example, when it is determined in the processing of S3206L that the data stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is "03H" ( S3206L: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the cancel flag 223uxa is ON (S3291L). In the process of S3291L, when it is determined that the cancel flag 223uxa is ON (S3291L: Yes), an additional effect mode setting process is executed (S3292L), and the process proceeds to S3217L. Although the details will be described later, this additional effect mode setting process (S3292L) is a process corresponding to the additional effect mode setting process (see FIG. 2144) in the 61st control example described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3291L that the cancel flag 223uxa is off (S3291L: No), the process proceeds to S3207L to determine whether or not to execute the second operation.
In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2203) in the 64th control example, when it is determined in the processing of S3214L that the data stored in the drive status storage area 223uy is "04H", Instead of the additional effect mode setting process (see FIG. 2146) in the 61st control example described above, the additional effect mode setting process is executed (S3293L), and this process ends. Details of this additional effect mode setting process (S3293L) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 2204 is a flow chart showing the additional effect mode setting process (S3292L). In the processing of S3301L to S3303L of the additional effect mode setting process (S3292L), the same processes as the processes of S3301L to S3303L in the additional effect mode setting process (see FIG. 2144) of the 61st control example described above are performed. executed. Further, in the additional effect mode 67 (S3292L) in the 64th control example, after the processing of S3302L is completed, it is determined whether or not the cancel flag 223uwa is ON (S3331L), and the cancel flag 223uwa is ON. (S3331L: Yes), it is determined whether or not the counter value of the depression counter 223uus is greater than 5 (S3332L).
In the process of S3332L, when it is determined that the counter value of the pressing counter 223uus is greater than 5 (S3332L: Yes), execution of an additional effect in which a weight of "1 kg" appears is determined (S3333L). ), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3332L that the counter value of the press counter 223uus is not greater than 5 (that is, is 5 or less) (S3332L: No), the process of S3333L is skipped and the present End the process. By executing the processing of S3332L and S3333L when the cancel flag 223uwa is ON, even if the second action is canceled, if the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed exceeds five times, , additional effects can be executed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the cancellation has been performed based on the presence or absence of the additional effect.
On the other hand, in the process of S3331L, if it is determined that the cancel flag 223uxa is off (S3331L: No), the cancellation lottery table 222uxa (see FIG. 2201(b)) is read out (S3334L), and the lottery result of the special symbol and A lottery is drawn as to whether or not the second action can be canceled according to the mission pattern (specified number of times of pressing) (S3335L). Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained by the process of S3335L is a lottery result corresponding to cancellation (S3336L), and if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to cancellation (S3336L: Yes), a vibration scenario end flag is generated. is set to OFF (S3337L), and "03H" is set in the drive status storage area 223uy (S3338L). Next, the switching flag 223uuu is set to off (S3339L), the cancel flag 223uxa is set to on (S3340L), and the process proceeds to S3332L. Through these processes, execution of the second operation can be canceled.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3336L that the lottery result corresponding to cancellation is not obtained (S3336L: No), it is determined whether or not the counter value of the pressing counter 223uus is greater than 5 (S3341L ), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 5 (S3341L: Yes), the process proceeds to S3303L. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3341L that the value is not greater than 5 (the value is 5 or less) (S3341L: No), the process of S3303L is skipped and the process ends. As a result, the execution timing of the additional effect can be limited to the case where the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed exceeds 5 regardless of the mission type (predetermined number of times of pressing of the frame button 22), so the timing of generating the additional effect. can make it difficult to predict the prescribed number of times from

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-fourth control example, the displacement means capable of displacing a predetermined range is displaced in a specific displacement pattern based on the establishment of the first condition. Execution of the movement) is determined, and based on the establishment of the second condition after the determination, the specific displacement operation is actually executed, and the second condition is satisfied after the first condition is established. Control for suppressing execution of the specific displacement operation (control for avoiding the operation of the predetermined motion member) can be executed based on the establishment of the specific condition until the condition is established. More specifically, a predetermined displacement member (movable accessory 900) is placed at a specific allowable position (operating position) a plurality of times based on the establishment of a specific execution condition (execution condition for performance of role product). A first displacement motion (specific effect) is set to be displaced in a specific displacement pattern, and a second displacement motion (falling motion) different from the first displacement motion is performed during the execution of the first displacement motion. When a condition for executing a second displacement operation that is permitted to be performed is established, the predetermined displacement member is caused to perform the second displacement operation when the predetermined displacement member reaches the allowable position after that. It is configured to execute the displacement control for the second displacement operation for the purpose. Then, the execution of the second displacement operation is avoided during the period during which the second displacement operation is on standby (second displacement operation waiting period) from when the condition for executing the second displacement operation is established until the permissible position is reached. When the avoidance condition (the second displacement operation avoidance condition) is satisfied to prevent the displacement from occurring, even if the permissible position is reached, the first displacement operation is continued without executing the displacement control for the second displacement operation. there is With this configuration, even if the condition for executing the second displacement operation is satisfied, the second displacement operation can be performed at the permissible position or not, so that the predetermined displacement member can be implemented. It is possible to diversify the displacement motion of the player, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game. In the 64th control example, both the condition for causing the movable accessory 900 to perform the falling action and the condition for avoiding the execution of the falling action are performed by the player using a predetermined operation member (frame button). 22) is configured to set a condition that can be established when a predetermined operation is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to satisfy both the condition for executing the falling motion and the condition for avoiding the falling motion by performing the same predetermined operation, thereby improving convenience for the player.
Furthermore, in the sixty-fourth control example, the effect is executed in such a manner that it is difficult to know whether the condition for executing the falling motion is satisfied and whether the condition for avoiding the falling motion is satisfied. In other words, it is configured such that only the number of times the frame button 22 is operated is not notified in the effect that the condition for executing the falling motion or the condition for avoidance is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the frame button 22 is operated while predicting whether or not the condition for executing the falling motion is satisfied and whether or not the condition for avoiding the falling motion is satisfied. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the sixty-fourth control example, when it is determined to avoid (cancel) the execution of the second action, the execution of the second action is not re-determined regardless of the content of subsequent operation of the frame button 22. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the decision to avoid execution of the second action has been made, if it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed a specified number of times corresponding to the set mission pattern, execution of the second action is decided again. It may be possible. Further, for example, once avoidance is determined, execution of the second action may be re-determined with a predetermined lottery probability each time pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the second operation.
In the sixty-fourth control example, after the execution of the second action is determined by pressing the frame button 22 a specified number of times, until the movable accessory 900 reaches the production position (operating position), further Although the configuration is such that execution of the second action can be avoided when the frame button 22 is pressed, the condition for avoiding execution of the once determined second action is not limited to this. . For example, the execution of the second action is avoided every predetermined period (for example, every 0.5 seconds) from when the execution of the second action is determined until the movable accessory 900 reaches the production position (operating position). It is good also as a structure which performs lottery of whether to carry out. With this configuration, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is less than the specified number of times or whether the avoidance is determined by a lottery at predetermined time intervals, so it is difficult to predict the specified number of times. can. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Further, for example, the execution of the second action may be avoided (cancelled) when the number of presses of the frame button 22 reaches a specified number after the execution of the second action is determined. Furthermore, in the 64th control example, after the execution of the second action is determined, it is determined to cancel the execution of the second action, or before the cancellation is determined, the movable accessory 900 is brought to the effect position. Until the second action is executed after reaching the second action, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to cancel the execution of the second action with the same probability every time the depression of the frame button 22 is detected. A configuration in which the probability of deciding to cancel the execution of the second action is changed according to various conditions such as the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, the elapsed time after the execution of the second action is decided, and the arrangement of the movable accessory 900. may be By configuring in this way, when the second action is not executed, whether the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is insufficient for the specified number of times or after reaching the specified number of times and execution of the second action is determined. Since it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether the cancellation is decided in , the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the 64th control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed a specified number of times while the movable accessory 900 is vibrating (the first action), the movable accessory 900 then reaches the rendering position. On the condition that the avoidance of the second action is not determined until the second action, the movable accessory 900 is configured to perform the falling action as the second action. It may be configured to perform other actions that 900 may perform. Further, as the second action, one of a plurality of actions (for example, falling action, rising action, pitching action, etc.) may be determined by lottery. In this case, if a second action of a type that is likely to be selected during a big win variation (hardly selected in the event of a loss) and a second action of a type that is difficult to be selected are provided, more attention will be paid to the type of the second action. It is possible to make it possible to further improve interest.
In the 64th control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed a specified number of times while the movable accessory 900 is vibrating (the first action), the movable accessory 900 then reaches the rendering position. On the condition that the avoidance of the second action is not determined until the second action, the movable role object 900 is configured to perform the falling action as the second action. It is not necessary to use the movable accessory 900). For example, as the second action, a movable action of moving a character different from the movable character 900 may be set. It may be replaced by an effect operation other than the movable effect such as a predetermined sound effect. As a result, the degree of freedom of presentation can be further improved.
<65th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 65th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2205 to 2228. FIG. In the 61st control example described above, the movable accessory 900 moves (advances) from the first position (storage position) to the second position (operating position) different from the first position (storage position) with respect to the movable accessory 900. After executing the control to cause the movable role product 900 to perform a predetermined first action (vibrating action) starting from the state where the movable role product 900 is located at the second position (operating position) In the period during which the control is being executed, if the conditions for executing the second control to perform the second action (falling action) different from the first action are satisfied, the second control that can be arranged multiple times during the execution of the first control. Based on the fact that the movable accessory 900 has reached the second position (operating position), the first control is terminated and the second control is executed. That is, when the operating condition for the second action is satisfied during the execution of the first action, the second action is executed without waiting for the second action until the end of the first action. was configured to suppress excessive delay in the start of
On the other hand, in the 65th control example, the movable accessory 900 is moved in the first direction from the first position to the second position different from the first position, and the movable accessory 900 moves in the first direction. During the period during which the first motion control is executed in which the movable accessory 900 is moved in a predetermined motion scenario including the motion of moving in the second direction toward the first position from the second position, the first motion control is performed. is satisfied, the first motion control is terminated in a state where the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the first position where movement in the second direction is restricted. . More specifically, the movable accessory 900 that is vertically movable between a first position (origin position) and a second position different from the first position (origin position) is moved to the first position (origin position). ) and the second position, the player does not press the frame button 22, or the player presses the frame button 22. When the lottery result corresponding to terminating the first operation control is obtained in a predetermined end lottery executed based on the above, the movable accessory 900 is moved to the first position (origin position) where it is difficult to move upward. The configuration is such that the first motion control is terminated and the second control, which is different from the first motion control, is executed in the positioned state. That is, when the first motion control is terminated in the middle, the movable accessory 900 is always positioned at the origin position where it is difficult to move upward. With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute control for moving (storing) the movable accessory 900 to the storage position after the first operation control ends. All motion control of the object 900 can be terminated.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 65th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 61st control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 , and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in Section 61. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 61st control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.
First, referring to FIG. 2205, the configuration of the movable accessory 900 in the 65th control example will be described. FIG. 2205(a) is a diagram showing the game board 13 near the movable accessory 900 when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position. In the 65th control example, the configurations of the movable accessory 900 (see FIG. 2083) and the upper decorative accessory 600y (see FIG. 2083) provided on the game board 13 in the 61st control example are partially changed, A decorative frame 801 is newly provided.
In this 65th control example, a decorative frame 801 (see FIG. 2205(b)) displaying a pattern similar to the pattern (pattern imitating a meteorite) displayed on the front side of the movable accessory 900 is provided. The decorative frame 801 is arranged on the back side of the movable accessory 900 . That is, as shown in FIG. 2205(a), when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position, the decorative frame 801 is configured to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. This decorative frame 801 is provided to keep the appearance of the game board 13 when the movable accessory 900 moves downward from the original position in the front view (see FIG. 2205(b)). , which is slightly longer (about 1 cm) in width than the front of the movable accessory, and is formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape.
In addition, the upper decorative accessory 600y provided on the game board 13 in the 65th control example is arranged on the front side of the movable accessory 900, and when the movable accessory 900 is located at the origin position (Fig. 2205 ( 2205(b)), and when it is moved downward from the origin position in front view (see FIG. 2205(b)), it is formed in a shape that does not overlap the front surface of the movable accessory 900 in the horizontal direction.

That is, no matter where the movable accessory 900 is positioned within the movable range, the movable accessory 900 will not be positioned on the back side of the upper decorative accessory 600y (overlapping in the horizontal direction). It is configured so that the object 900 can always be visually recognized by the player. By configuring in this way, an effect using the movable accessory 900 can be executed without moving (advancing) the movable accessory 900 to a position where it can be visually recognized by the player.
In addition, a pattern imitating a meteorite is displayed on the front surface of the upper decorative accessory 600y and the front surface of the movable accessory 900, and when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position, the patterns are connected to each other. (looks like pattern 1). The upper decorative accessory 600y is arranged so that when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position, the B surface 900b (see FIG. 2061) of the movable accessory 900 and a part of the decorative accessory 600y come into contact. is configured to More specifically, when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position, the decorative accessory 600y has a range of about 5 cm toward the back in the front view from the upper end of the movable accessory 900 in front view. It has a thick shape. That is, in the sixty-fifth control example, the decorative accessory 600y restricts the movement of the movable accessory 900 upward in the front view from the origin position, and the movable accessory 900 moves upward in the front view. is the origin position. With this configuration, even if a problem occurs in the control for stopping the drive motor 905 when the movable accessory 900 is raised, the movable accessory 900 can be reliably stopped at the origin position.
In addition, in the sixty-fifth control example, when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position, the fact that the movable accessory 900 and the upper decorative accessory 600y are in contact is displayed on the entire surface of each other. Although the pattern is used to make it easier for the player to understand, it is not limited to this. For example, the movable accessory 900 is formed in a shape that is convex upward when viewed from the front (for example, an accessory imitating a sword), and the upper decorative accessory 600y is formed in a shape that is concave downward when viewed from the front (for example, It is also possible to form the projections and the recesses so that the projections and the recesses are fitted together when they are in contact with each other. With this configuration, even when the display surfaces are not arranged on the same plane, the movable accessory 900 is restricted from moving upward in front view (the origin position).
FIG. 2205(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable accessory 900 is lowered most in the accessory attack effect to be described later. In the state where the movable accessory 900 is located at the origin position (see FIG. 2205(a)), the decorative frame 801 on the back side of the movable accessory 900 is attached to the movable accessory 900 as shown in FIG. 2205(b). is configured to be visible to the player when it moves downward in the front view with respect to the game board 13.例文帳に追加Also, in the decorative frame 801, a pattern that imitates falling meteorites is displayed in the same manner as the movable accessory 900, and the pattern is connected to the upper decorative accessory 600y (together, it looks like one pattern). is configured as By constructing in this way, the movement of the movable accessory 900 located at the origin position makes the non-decorative members visible to the player, thereby suppressing the problem that the appearance of the game board 13 is deteriorated. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2206 to 2208, a description will be given of the effect mode in the battle effect, which is the characteristic effect mode in the 65th control example. This battle effect includes an effect mode in which the action of the movable accessory 900 is controlled based on a predetermined action scenario. a role object attack presentation in which the first action control for operating the role object 900 based on a predetermined action scenario (vibration scenario 68 action) is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (five times) according to the operation status of the frame button 22; It is composed of three effects, one of which is set according to the number of times the first action control is executed (one of the defeat effect, the attack failure effect, and the self-destruct effect).
More specifically, the battle effect is started 8 seconds after the start of the variation during the period during which the special symbol variation effect is being executed. When the battle effect is started, a battle preparation effect including a display mode suggesting that the player operates the frame button 22 is executed for two seconds.
After the battle preparation effect is completed, the movable accessory 900 located at the origin position is lowered to a predetermined position (lower limit position of operation of vibration scenario 68 described later), and the first motion control ( Vibration scenario 68 action) is executed, and a display mode corresponding to the action of the movable accessory 900 (a display mode in which the hero attacks the dinosaur) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (feature attack presentation).
With this configuration, the movable accessory 900 is always positioned at the origin position at the end of the role object attack production, so the movable accessory 900 is moved (retracted) from a position different from the origin position to the origin position. There is no need to execute control, and the motion control for the movable accessory 900 can be simplified.

Further, as described above, the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (five times) by the player pressing the frame button 22. A display mode in which the hero attacks the dinosaur is displayed each time one motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed.
More specifically, when the player presses the frame button 22 while the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is being executed, one cycle of the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) ends. An end lottery for determining whether to end the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is executed at the timing. Here, if the frame button 22 is not pressed by the player during the period in which the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is being executed, the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is not executed without executing the end lottery. operation) is terminated.
In the 65th control example, the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is more likely to be repeatedly executed when the special symbol lottery wins or fails than when it fails. By constructing in this way, the player who wants to predict the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery can positively press the frame button 22, and the interest in the game can be improved. When the role object attack effect is completed, the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a plurality of effects with different movement patterns of the movable role object 900 (one of defeat effect, attack failure effect, and self-destruction effect). , one effect is selected and executed according to the number of times the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed.
First, with reference to FIG. 2206(a), the battle preparation effect executed when the battle effect is started will be described. FIG. 2206(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the battle preparation effect. This battle preparation effect is an effect that may be started 8 seconds after the special symbol variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, and is an effect that is executed for 2 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 2206(a), in the battle preparation effect, a display mode of a hero character 860 and a dinosaur character 861 glaring at each other is displayed in the main display area Dm. In the display area Dm1, a third symbol (indicated by three arrows in the drawing) that is variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol variation is displayed.
It should be noted that, while the battle preparation effect is being executed, the movable accessory 900 is stopped at the origin position. In other words, the movable accessory 900 is not controlled while the battle preparation effect is being executed. In the small display area HR10 formed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm, a display mode suggesting that the frame button 22 is operated (for example, the characters "Press the button to continue the attack!") is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the hero character 860 and the dinosaur character 861 will fight each other.
When the two-second battle preparation effect is completed, next, a character attack effect is executed in which the hero character 860 attacks the dinosaur character 861 . In this role object attack effect, after the movable accessory 900 is lowered from the origin position to a predetermined position (lower limit position of vibration scenario 68 operation, which will be described later), the first operation control (vibration Scenario 68 action) is executed.
FIG. 2206(b) is a diagram showing a rendering mode in which the movable accessory 900 is lowered most in the accessory attack presentation. When the role object attack effect is started, a magic wand 860a is displayed at the hand of the hero character 860 in the main display area Dm, and the movable role object 900 located at the origin position descends in the front view downward direction ( Moving.

Here, the meteorite pattern displayed in the decorative frame 801 provided for decoration becomes visible to the player. After that, the dinosaur character 861 in the main display area Dm is displayed in a display mode in which the head is attacked in response to the downward motion of the movable accessory 900 under the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion). , the movable accessory 900 that has descended to the vicinity of the head of the dinosaur character 861 in the main display area Dm rises again to the origin position. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect in which the display mode in the main control area Dm and the action of the movable accessory 900 are interlocked (correlated), and the effect of the battle effect can be enhanced.
In addition, inside the small display area Dm61 in the shape of a horizontally elongated rectangle formed below the hero character 860 in the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, there is a message "Press the button" that urges the player to press the frame button 22. is displayed. On the right side of the small display area Dm61 when viewed from the front, a small display area Dm62 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is formed. A display mode (for example, characters such as "1st attack") is displayed to indicate how many times the attack has occurred.
More specifically, by updating the number displayed in the small display area Dm62a formed in the center of the small display area Dm62, it is possible to indicate how many times the attack (first operation control) has been executed. It consists of
That is, in the 65th control example, every time the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed, a display mode in which the hero character 860 attacks the dinosaur character 861 is displayed in the main display area Dm. A value indicating whether the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for the first time is displayed as the number of attacks in the main display area Dm.

On the right side of the small display area Dm62 when viewed from the front, a small display area Dm63 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is formed. The time gauge tg1 is composed of tg1b indicating the elapsed period and tg1a indicating the remaining valid operation period. The time gauge tg1 and the display mode prompting the operation of the frame button 22 of the small display area Dm61 are no longer displayed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, and the next first operation control (vibration scenario 68) is displayed. operation) is newly displayed.
Although the details will be described later, in this 65th control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during the execution period of the character attack effect, the first action control ( Vibration scenario 68 operation) is configured to be repeatedly executable. More specifically, when the end lottery is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22, and the lottery result corresponding to the end is not obtained in the end lottery (the lottery result corresponding to continuation is obtained). , the first action control is repeatedly executed (continuing the character attack effect).
Here, if the player does not press the frame button 22 during the period in which the role object attack effect is being executed, the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) and the role are executed without executing the end lottery. It is configured to end the object attack production.
By configuring in this way, the period during which the character object attack effect is executed can be varied according to the operation status of the frame button 22 of the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the 65th control example, the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is more likely to be repeatedly executed when the result of the special symbol lottery determination is a win than when the result is a loss. More specifically, the end lottery that can be executed each time the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is executed is, in the end lottery, when the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery is won. The lottery result corresponding to continuation is easily obtained.

By configuring in this way, by the player pressing the frame button 22, the playability of predicting the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery from the number of times the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is repeatedly executed is enhanced. can be realized. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2206(b), description will be given of the effect mode when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is repeatedly executed (the character object attack effect is continued). When the first action control (scenario 68 action) is repeatedly executed, the number in the small display area Dm62a is incremented by one, and the display mode indicating the effective period of operation of the frame button 22 in the small display area Dm63 and the small display area A display mode prompting the user to press the frame button 22 in Dm61 is newly displayed. FIG. 2207(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode in which the movable accessory 900 is most lowered during the period in which the fifth first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 2063(a), in the character object attack effect when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) continues up to the fifth time, the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is displayed in the small display area Dm62a for how many times A value "5" is displayed to indicate whether or not the action) is being executed, and the text "Last!" is displayed in the small display area HR10. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the maximum number of times the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed has been reached. In addition, the dinosaur character 861 in the main display area Dm is changed to a more tired display mode according to the number of times the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed.
Specifically, every time the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed, the dinosaur character 861 is displayed in a variably tired state (for example, the amount of sweat increases). configured to Here, although illustration is omitted, an effect mode when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for one of the second time, the third time, and the fourth time (other than the first time and the fifth time) is a dinosaur character 861 according to the number of times the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) has been executed for the effect mode when the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed for the fifth time. is displayed, the display mode displayed in the small display area Dm62a is a numerical value indicating how many times the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is being executed, and the small display area HR , and the other effects are the same as those when the fifth first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed. Description is omitted.

FIG. 2207(b) shows that the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is repeatedly executed five times in the role object attack effect, and the end condition for ending the fifth first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is established. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a knockdown rendering that is executed after the character object attack rendering ends when no (a lottery result corresponding to continuation is obtained). More specifically, the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is continued in the role object attack presentation (see FIG. 2207(a)) in which the fifth first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed. If the lottery result is to allow (do not end), the defeat effect is executed after the fifth first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is finished.
In this defeat effect, a display mode in which the hero character 860 directly attacks the dinosaur character 861 with the hero sword 860b is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the text "Defeated" is displayed in the small display area HR10. During the period during which the defeat effect is being executed, the movable accessory 900 is not controlled, and the movable accessory 900 maintains its position at the origin position. That is, even when the maximum number of executions (5 times) of the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is reached, it is determined whether the termination condition for terminating the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is satisfied. , when the determination result does not correspond to the end (determination result of repeated execution), a specific effect (defeat effect) is executed.
In addition, although the details will be described later, in the 65th control example, only when the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is a hit, the defeat effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the battle performance for the player who desires to see the performance in which the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery is decided as winning. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.
Next, referring to FIG. 2208(a), the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for one of the second, third, fourth, and fifth times (other than the first time). A description will be given of the effect mode of the attack failure effect executed when the end condition for ending the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is met in the role object attack effect. Although the details will be described later, in the 65th control example, based on the end of the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action), the next effect (destruction effect, attack failure effect, or self-destruction effect) ) is determined, and a display mode corresponding to the determined effect is displayed.

That is, regardless of the number of times the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed, the next effects (destruction effect, attack failure effect, and self-destruction effect) occur at the timing when the first action control (vibration scenario 68 motion) ends. any one of them).
As shown in FIG. 2208(a), when the attack failure effect is executed, a display mode indicating that the hero character 860's attack has failed (for example, characters "avoided") is displayed in the small display area HR10. ) is displayed. Details will be described later, but during the attack failure production, the movable accessory 900 is located below the point (lower limit position of vibration scenario 68 operation) when the movable accessory 900 is most lowered during the execution of the accessory attack presentation. It is operated by descending to a certain first drop point and moving to the origin position again.
In the main display area Dm, a dinosaur character 861 is variably displayed to avoid an attack in accordance with the downward motion of the movable accessory 900, and a meteorite 862 is displayed in the upper front view. As a result, an interlocking (correlated) effect is executed in the decorative frame 801, the movable accessory 900, and the third pattern display device 81, so that the effect of the battle effect can be enhanced.
Details will be described later, but in the 65th control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is a hit, the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is more likely to be repeatedly executed than when the result is a loss. It is configured. That is, the attack failure performance is configured to have a lower expectation of winning than the destruction performance, and a higher expectation that the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery is a win than the self-destruction performance described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2208(b), in the character object attack production in which the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed for the first time (vibration scenario 68 action), first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) A description will be given of the effect mode of the self-defeating effect executed when the end condition for ending the is satisfied.
Here, in the 65th control example, if the player does not press the frame button 22 during the period in which the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is being executed, the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed. The first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is ended without executing the end lottery for ending the 68 motion).
That is, in the period during which the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed, if the player does not press the frame button 22, the self-destruction effect is always executed. By constructing in this way, a player who does not want to be able to predict the result of the special symbol lottery determination from the performance contents of the battle performance intentionally does not press the frame button 22 to intentionally select the result of the special symbol lottery determination. is difficult to predict.
As shown in FIG. 2208(b), when the self-destruction effect is executed, the movable accessory 900 is further below the point (first falling position) where it is positioned when it descends most in the attack failure effect. The movement is controlled by descending to a certain point (second drop position) and ascending to the origin position again. Here, in the sixty-fifth control example, the second drop position is configured to be the limit position where the movable accessory 900 can move downward when viewed from the front.

That is, in the self-destructing effect, the movable accessory 900 descends to the lowest point (second drop position) in the movable range in front view, and then ascends to the origin position. As a result, it is possible to control the movement of the movable accessory 900 with an action that maximizes the movable range, so that the impact of the presentation using the movable accessory 900 can be improved. In the main display area Dm, a display mode in which a meteorite 862 is falling is displayed, and in the small display area HR10, characters "self-destructed" are displayed. In addition, the hero character 860 and the dinosaur character 861 are no longer displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, the player can easily understand that the brave character 860 has self-destructed due to his own attack, so the self-destruction effect is more likely than the attack failure effect. It can be easily grasped that the performance is low.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2209 to 2210, the flow of actions of the movable accessory 900 in the battle presentation will be described. Here, since the action of the movable accessory 900 is not controlled in the battle preparation effect executed in the battle effect, the description is omitted. FIG. 2209(a) shows the case where the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is repeatedly executed up to the fifth time and the end condition for terminating the fifth first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is not satisfied. That is, it is a diagram showing the flow of the action of the movable accessory 900 when the defeat effect is executed as the effect after the end of the accessory attack effect.
As shown in FIG. 2209(a), in the role object attack effect, the movable role object 900 moves from the origin position to a position below the detection range of the origin position sensor 920 in front view (vibration scenario After descending to the 68 operation lower limit position), it is operated by the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) to ascend to the origin position. Every time this first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for one cycle (about one second), the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion ) is satisfied. As described above, the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed up to five times. The control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is executed a total of five times.
Then, if the end condition is not satisfied during the period in which the fifth first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed, the defeat effect is executed, and the movable accessory 900 is not operated in the defeat effect. , is maintained (stopped) at the origin position.

With this configuration, when the first motion control ends, there is no need to execute motion control for moving (retracting) the movable accessory 900 to the origin position, so the motion control for the movable accessory 900 is simplified. can be
In the sixty-fifth control example, the drive motor 905 is not excited (the operation control of the movable accessory 900 is not performed) during the execution period of the defeat effect, and the movable accessory 900 is maintained at the origin position. Although it is configured to (stop), it is not limited to this. More specifically, an operation scenario table corresponding to the defeat effect may be provided, and the drive motor 905 may be excited to maintain the movable accessory 900 at the origin position (excitation and hold). . By configuring in this way, when the movement control is performed on the movable accessory 900 after the execution of the defeat effect, it is possible to reduce the loss of synchronism of the drive motor 905 due to the inertial load and the delay at the time of start-up. It is possible to suppress problems such as movement of the movable accessory 900 due to the weight of the accessory 900 or the vibration of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加
In addition, by providing a stopper or the like capable of regulating the downward movement of the movable accessory 900 from the origin position, and changing the stopper to the locked state, the movable accessory 900 can be moved to the origin position. It may be configured to remain in place. By configuring in this way, without executing control over the drive motor 905 (suppressing heat generation due to excitation of the drive motor 905), the state in which the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position is reliably maintained. can be made
Next, referring to FIG. 2209(b), the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for one of the second, third, fourth, and fifth times (other than the first time). A description will be given of the operation flow of the movable accessory 900 when the end condition is met during the period, that is, when the attack failure effect is executed. FIG. 2209(b) is a diagram showing, for example, the flow of the movement of the movable accessory 900 when the termination condition is satisfied during the period in which the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed for the third time. .

Regarding the operation contents of the movable accessory 900 during the period during which the role object attack effect is executed (the period during which the first operation control is executed), only the number of times of execution is different. is not established (see FIG. 2209(a)), so the description is omitted. As shown in FIG. 2209(b), when the termination condition is satisfied during the period in which the third first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed, the third first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed. After the action) is completed, the action of the movable accessory 900 is controlled based on the specified contents of the first drop scenario table 222uya2, which will be described later.
More specifically, when the attack failure effect is executed, first, the movable accessory 900 is controlled to move down to the first drop position. Here, the first drop position refers to a place below the lower limit position of the vibration scenario 68 operation, which is located when the movable accessory 900 is most lowered in the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation). After that, the movable accessory 900 is controlled to rise from the first drop position to the origin position and stop at the origin position based on the specified contents of the evacuation scenario table 222uc.
Here, during the period in which any one of the second, fourth, and fifth first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed, the movable accessory 900 in the attack failure rendering when the end condition is satisfied. Since the flow of movement is the same as the flow of movement of the movable accessory 900 in the attack failure effect when the end condition is met during the period in which the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is executed for the third time, Description is omitted.
That is, if the end condition is satisfied during the period during which the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is executed for the second time, the fourth time, or the fifth time, the end condition is satisfied according to the timing at which the end condition is satisfied. , the number of times (period) of execution of the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is variable.

Next, referring to FIG. 2210, in the period during which the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for the first time, when the end condition is met, that is, when the self-destruct effect is executed. , the flow of movement of the movable accessory 900 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 2210, when the end condition is met during the period during which the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for the first time, after the first role object attack effect is completed, Operation control is executed based on the contents defined in a second drop scenario table 222uya3, which will be described later.
Here, in the 65th control example, if the player does not press the frame button 22 during the period in which the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is being executed, the first action control (vibration scenario The first motion control (68 motions in the vibration scenario) is ended without executing the end lottery for ending the 68 motions in the vibration scenario. That is, when the player does not press the frame button 22 even once during the period during which the accessory attack effect is being executed, the operation control based on the specified contents of the second fall scenario table 222uya3 is always executed. .
By configuring in this way, a player who prefers motion control with a long moving distance of the movable accessory 900 can intentionally execute motion control based on the second drop scenario table 222uya3.

In the 65th control example, when the end condition is satisfied during the period during which the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for the first time, the motion control based on the second drop scenario table 222uya3 is always executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the number of times the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) has been executed, if the termination condition for terminating the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is met, the first drop scenario table 222uya2 A predetermined lottery may be used to determine whether to execute the motion control based on the fall scenario table 222uya3 or to execute the motion control based on the second fall scenario table 222uya3. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a playability in which the player anticipates the action control to be executed next when the end condition of the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is met.
When the operation control based on the contents defined in the second drop scenario table 222uya3 is executed, the movable accessory 900 descends from the first drop position to the second drop position below the front view, and then falls to the second drop position. Stop in the position of After the operation control based on the contents of the second fall scenario table 222uya3 is finished, the operation control for moving the movable accessory 900 to the origin position is executed based on the contents of the evacuation scenario table 222uc.
Here, as described above, in the 65th control example, the place where the movable accessory 900 is positioned when it rises to the maximum within its movable range is the origin position, and the movable accessory 900 is most lowered within its movable range. The place where it is located when it is dropped is the second drop position. As a result, it is possible to execute motion control that maximizes the movable range of the movable accessory 900, and to increase the power of the presentation including the presentation mode in which the movable accessory 900 is operated.
Note that, in the sixty-fifth control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is being executed, regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed, A configuration for determining whether or not a termination condition for ending the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is satisfied at the time of completion of the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) (timing at which one cycle is completed) However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the movable accessory 900 is descending from the origin position by the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion), the end condition is set at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed. is established, and if the end condition is established, an operation control is executed to move the movable accessory 900 to the origin position, and when the movable accessory 900 reaches the origin position, the first It may be configured to end the motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion). By configuring in this manner, a player who dislikes the advance (movement) of the movable accessory 900 to the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be made to press the frame button 22 positively.

Further, in the 65th control example, it is determined whether or not the termination condition for terminating the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is satisfied for each cycle of the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) has been executed an even number of times (second and fourth times), the end determination may be performed only at the end of the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion). can be configured to
<Electrical configuration in the 65th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2211 to 2216, the electrical configuration in the 65th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 2211, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the 65th control example will be described. FIG. 2211 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 65th control example. As shown in FIG. 2211, the ROM 222 in the 65th control example is provided with an operation scenario table group 222uya instead of the operation scenario table group 222uug in the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 61st control example (see FIG. 2102). and the addition of a vibration scenario end lottery table 222uyb. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 61st control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. First, with reference to FIG. 2212, details of the operation scenario table group 222uya in the 65th control example will be described.
FIG. 2212 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the action scenario table group 222uya in the 65th control example. As shown in FIG. 2212, the motion scenario table group 222uya in the sixty-fifth control example is different from the configuration of the motion scenario table group 222uug in the sixty-first control example (see FIG. 2103). The difference is that a fall scenario table 222uya2 and a second fall scenario table 222uya3 are added, and that an advance scenario table 222uuga and a vibration scenario table 222uugb are deleted.
First, the vibration scenario table 222uya1 will be described with reference to FIG. 2213(a). FIG. 2213(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this vibration scenario table 222uya1. In this vibration scenario table 222uya1, after the battle preparation effect is executed, the movable accessory 900 is lowered from the origin position to the lower limit position of the vibration scenario 68 and then raised to the origin position during the period when the character object attack effect is executed. This is a table referred to when controlling the motion by the motion of causing the motion.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2213(a), the holding operation by energizing the driving motor 905 for 10 ms is defined in association with the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk. A value of "2" is associated with an operation of rotating the drive motor 905 forward by 72 steps at a speed of exciting the drive motor 905 every 4 ms (rotating by one step). A holding operation by energizing the drive motor 905 for 40 ms is associated and defined, and data for waiting for 500 ms without exciting the drive motor 905 is associated with the value "4" of the processing counter 223uk. A process counter 223uk of "5" is defined in association with an operation of rotating the driving motor 905 in reverse by 8 steps at a speed of exciting the drive motor 905 every 4 ms (rotating it by one step). On the other hand, an operation of rotating the driving motor 905 in reverse at a speed of exciting the driving motor 905 every 4 ms (rotating one step) until the origin position sensor 920 is turned on is defined in association with the processing counter 223uk. A value of "7" is defined in association with an operation of rotating the drive motor 905 in 17 steps in reverse at a speed of exciting the drive motor 905 every 4 ms (rotating it by one step). A holding action is defined by energizing the motor 905 for 40 ms.
When the motion control of the movable accessory 900 is executed based on the specified contents of the vibration scenario table 222uya1, the movable accessory 900 stops (is held) at the origin position for 10 ms and vibrates from the origin position. It descends to the 68 operation lower limit position in 288 ms, stops at the vibration scenario 68 operation lower limit position for 540 ms (hold and wait), rises again to the origin position in 288 ms, and stops at the origin position for 40 ms (hold).
In the 65th control example, the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) based on the vibration scenario table 222uya1 is configured to be repeatedly executable up to five times. In other words, the movable accessory 900 is motion-controlled by vibrating up and down by executing the motion of reciprocating the movable accessory 900 between the origin position and the lower limit position of the vibration scenario 68 multiple times in one second. .
In addition, in the 65th control example, when the movable accessory 900 is not moved (stopped), control to hold by energizing the drive motor 905, or control to wait without energizing the drive motor 905 is performed. Although it is configured to run, it is not limited to this. For example, when the movable accessory 900 is not to be moved, the excitation of the drive motor 905 is always interrupted, and the excitation of the drive motor 905 may be stopped for a predetermined period of time. With this configuration, the drive motor 905 is excited unnecessarily in a situation where there is no possibility that the movable accessory 900 will move due to the weight of the movable accessory 900, etc., and the drive motor 905 is unnecessary. It is possible to eliminate the problem of heat generation.

In addition, for the vibration scenario table 222uya1, data for stopping the movable accessory 900 in a state of being positioned at the origin position (defined in association with the counter values "1" and "8" of the processing counter 223uk) data) is not stipulated, and the first motion control is repeatedly executed at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 40 ms) has elapsed from the timing when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) ends. You may By configuring in this way, the data amount of the vibration scenario table 222uya1 can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.
In addition, in the 65th control example, during the period in which the first action control is being executed, regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the specific timing (one cycle of the vibration scenario 68 action ends) The configuration is such that the end determination is executed at the point in time when the processing is completed), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is being executed, the end determination is performed when the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position. You may
More specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed while the movable accessory 900 is located at the lower limit position of the vibration scenario 68, when the movable accessory 900 rises (reaches) to the origin position, It may be configured to end the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) (without executing the subsequent holding motion for 40 ms). By configuring in this way, the end timing of the motion control can be changed according to the timing when the player operates the frame button 22, so that the motion pattern of the movable accessory 900 can be diversified.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2213(b), details of the first drop scenario table 222uya2 described above will be described. FIG. 2213(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first fall scenario table 222uya2. This first drop scenario table 222uya2 is defined as the end condition during the period when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for one of the second, third, fourth, and fifth times (other than the first time). is established, and thereafter the movable accessory 900 is referred to when executing the operation control to descend from the origin position to the first drop position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2213(b), an operation of holding the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk by energizing the drive motor 905 for 10 ms is specified, and the value "1" of the processing counter 223uk is maintained. 2” is associated with the drive motor 905, and an operation of rotating the drive motor 905 forward 200 steps at a speed of exciting (rotating one step) every 4 ms is defined in association with the value “3” of the processing counter 223uk. 905 is energized for 40 ms and a holding action is associated and defined.
When the action control of the movable accessory 900 is executed based on the specified contents of the first drop scenario table 222uya2, the movable accessory 900 stops (holds) for 10 ms at the origin position. 2209(b)), which is lower than the lower limit position of the vibration scenario 68 when viewed from the front (200 steps from the origin position). b) stop (hold) for 40 ms in ). That is, when motion control is executed based on the first drop scenario table 222uya2, the movable accessory 900 is motion-controlled to fall a longer distance than the distance moved by the first motion control.
Next, the above-described second drop scenario table 222uya3 will be described with reference to FIG. 2213(c). FIG. 2213(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this second drop scenario table 222uya3. This second drop scenario table 222uya3 satisfies a termination condition for terminating the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) during the period in which the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed for the first time. This is a data table that is referred to when the movable accessory 900 is lowered from the origin position to the second drop position (see FIG. 2210) in the self-defeating presentation after the accessory attack presentation ends.
This second fall scenario table 222uya3 differs from the above-described first fall scenario table 222uya2 only in that the number of steps in the data content defined in association with the value "2" of the processing counter 223uk is 600. are different. That is, when the motion control of the movable accessory 900 is executed based on the contents defined in the second drop scenario table 222uya3, the second drop position (origin position to 600 steps), the movable accessory 900 is controlled to descend in 2400 ms.

Next, the vibration scenario end lottery table 222uyb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2214 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the vibration scenario end lottery table 222uyb. This vibration scenario end lottery table 222uyb determines whether the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is ended based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during the period during which the character attack effect is being executed. It is a data table referred to when determining
In this vibration scenario end lottery table 222uyb, the result of the special symbol lottery determination, the number of attacks in the role object attack production (that is, the number of times of the first action control that has already been executed), and the counter value of the first production counter 223uuf Data indicating whether to end the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is defined in association with each other.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2214, if the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is a hit, and the first attack (first operation control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf "0 to "End" is defined in correspondence with the range of "9", and "Success" is defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the first effect counter 223uuf "10 to 198".
In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is hit, and in the case of the second attack (first operation control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from "0 to 19" to "end". is defined in association with, "success" is defined in association with the range of the value "20 to 198" of the first effect counter 223uuf, the result of the special symbol lottery decision is a hit, and the third time In the case of the attack (first action control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from 0 to 49, and the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from 50 to 198. "Success" is defined in association with the range of ", the result of the special symbol lottery determination is hit, and in the case of the fourth attack (first operation control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf "End" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 99", "Success" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first effect counter 223uuf "100 to 198", and special symbols are provided. If the lottery success/failure determination result is a win and the fifth attack (first action control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from "0 to 149" and "end" is associated with it. "Success" is defined in association with the range of values "150 to 198" of the first effect counter 223uuf.

Here, the fifth first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) has reached the maximum number of executions of the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion). , the above-described defeat effect is executed.
That is, if the result of the special symbol lottery win/fail determination is hit, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the first attack (first operation control), the attack (first operation control) is performed at a rate of 10/199. When the frame button 22 is pressed in the second attack (first operation control), the attack is performed at a rate of 20/199 (first operation control). is completed, the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery is hit, and when the frame button 22 is pressed in the third attack (first operation control), the attack at a rate of 50/199 (first operation control ) is completed, the result of the special symbol lottery is a win, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the fourth attack (first action control), the attack at a rate of 100/199 (first action control) is completed, the result of the special symbol lottery decision is a hit, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the fifth attack (first operation control), the attack at a rate of 150/199 (first operation control) is completed, and operation control based on the specified contents of the first fall scenario table 222uya2 is executed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 2214, the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is out, and in the case of the first attack (first operation control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from "0 to 19". , and "success" is defined in association with the value range of the first effect counter 223uuf, ie, "20 to 198". In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is out, and in the case of the second attack (first operation control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from "0 to 49" to "end". is defined in association with, "success" is defined in association with the range of the value "50 to 198" of the first effect counter 223uuf, the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is out, and the third time In the case of the attack (first action control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from 0 to 99, and the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from 100 to 198. "Success" is defined in association with the range of ", the result of the special symbol lottery determination is out, and in the case of the fourth attack (first operation control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf "End" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 179", "Success" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first effect counter 223uuf "180 to 198", and special symbols are provided. If the lottery success/failure determination result is a failure and the fifth attack (first action control), the value of the first effect counter 223uuf ranges from 0 to 198, and "end" is associated with it. stipulated.
That is, if the result of the special symbol lottery success/failure determination is out, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the first attack (first operation control), the attack (first operation control) is performed at a rate of 20/199. When the frame button 22 is pressed in the second attack (first operation control), the attack is performed at a rate of 50/199 (first operation control). is completed, the result of the special symbol lottery is out, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the third attack (first operation control), the attack at a rate of 100/199 (first operation control ) is completed, the result of the special symbol lottery is out, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the fourth attack (first action control), the attack at a rate of 180/199 (first action control) is completed, the result of the special symbol lottery is out, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the fifth attack (first operation control), always (199/199 ratio) attack ( The first motion control) is completed, and the motion control based on the specified contents of the first drop scenario table 222uya2 is executed. That is, the attack (first operation control) in the role object attack production is more likely to be repeatedly executed when the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery is a win, and the fifth attack (first operation control) The fact that the ending lottery result is not obtained (that is, the defeat effect is executed) means that the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery is a win. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the success/failure determination result of the special symbol lottery from the number of attacks (first action control) in the accessory attack presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2215, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 65th control example will be described. FIG. 2215 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the main subject 68 control example. As shown in FIG. 2215, the RAM 223 in the sixty-fifth control example has a role object movement related area 223uya instead of the role object movement related area 223uuy in the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixty-first control example (see FIG. 2111). is provided, and a battle effect standby flag 223uyb, a battle effect timer 223uyc, a battle effect execution flag 223uyd, and a depression completion flag 223uye are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 61st control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
First, referring to FIG. 2216, the accessory movement related area 223uya will be described. This movable role-thing related area 223uya has a vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1, a first fall scenario 223uya2, and a second fall scenario compared to the movable role-thing related area 223uya (see FIG. 2112(a)) in the 61st control example described above. 223uya3 is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 61st control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.
When the vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is ON, it indicates the timing when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is finished, and when it is OFF, the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is finished. This is a flag indicating that it is not timing. The vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON when the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is terminated (see S4908L in FIG. 2224 and S4832L in FIG. 2225). ), and is set to OFF when the effect (one of the knockdown effect, attack failure effect, and self-destruct effect) to be executed after the end of the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is started (Fig. 2221 (see S4710L of ). By configuring in this way, the timing at which the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) ends can be matched with the timing at which the display mode corresponding to the effect is switched.
The first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is a flag for indicating that the motion control of the movable accessory 900 is being executed based on the specified contents of the first fall scenario table 222uya2, and when it is on, the first fall scenario This flag indicates that the motion control based on the table 222uya2 is being executed, and indicates that the motion control based on the first fall scenario table 222uya2 is not being executed when it is off. The first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is set to OFF in the initial state, and the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 2225) is set to ON when the end condition is met during the period in which the action) is being executed, and the action control based on the first fall scenario table 222uya2 is executed (see S4837L in FIG. 2225), and is based on the first fall scenario table 222uya2. It is set to OFF when the motion control ends (see S5011L in FIG. 2226).

The second fall scenario execution flag 223uya3 is a flag for indicating that motion control based on the second fall scenario table 222uya3 is being executed. When it is on, motion control based on the second fall scenario table 222uya3 is executed. The flag indicates that the second fall scenario table 222uya3 is not being executed. The initial state of the second drop scenario execution flag 223uya3 is set to OFF, and the termination condition is satisfied during the period in which the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is executed for the first time (first time), and the second drop scenario execution flag 223uya3 It is set to ON when motion control based on the second drop scenario table 222uya3 is executed (see S4835L in FIG. 2225), and is set to OFF when motion control based on the second drop scenario table 222uya3 is completed (see FIG. 2227). S5111L).
Returning to FIG. 2215, the battle effect standby flag 223uyb will be described. When this battle effect standby flag 223uyb is ON, it indicates that the execution of the battle effect has been determined, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the execution of the battle effect has not been determined. This battle production standby flag 223uyb is set to OFF in the initial state, is set to ON when the variable production to execute the battle production is determined (see S3192L in FIG. 2217), and is turned OFF at the start of the battle production. is set (see S3584L in FIG. 2220).
In the sixty-fifth control example, when the battle effect standby flag 223uyb is set to ON, the battle effect is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the execution of the battle effect is determined (the battle effect standby flag 223uyb is set to ON), if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the battle effect standby flag 223uyb may be set to OFF. good. By configuring in this way, when a problem such as an error message being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 occurs after the execution of the battle effect is determined, the battle effect waiting flag 223uyb is set to OFF. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the battle effect from being executed in parallel with the display of the error message.
The battle effect timer 223uyc is a timer for counting the elapsed time after the battle effect is started. The initial value of this battle effect timer 223uyc is set to 0, and when the battle effect is started, the timer value is incremented by 1 (every 1 ms) (see S4701L in FIG. 2221), and when the battle effect ends, the timer value is set to 0 (see S4713L in FIG. 2221). The value of this battle production timer 223uyc determines whether it is the timing for ending the battle preparation production or the timing for ending the final production in the battle production (any one of the defeat production, the attack failure production, and the self-destruction production). It is referred to when judging. Thus, even if the design is changed so that the battle performance can be executed over a plurality of variable performances, the end processing can be reliably executed at the end timing of the battle performance.

In this 65th control example, the elapsed time is counted by adding 1 to the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc from the start timing of the battle effect. A value (for example, 10000 ms, which is the effect time of the battle effect) may be set, and the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc may be subtracted every 1 ms.
The battle effect execution flag 223uyd is a flag for indicating that the battle effect is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the battle effect is being executed, and when it is off, the battle effect is being executed. This is a flag indicating that it is not The battle effect execution flag 223uyd is set to OFF in the initial state, is set to ON when execution of the battle effect is started (see S3585L in FIG. 2220), and is set to OFF at the end of the battle effect ( See S4712L in FIG. 2221).
<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the 65th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the 65th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2217 to 2228. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 2217, details of the normal state effect mode determination process (S3031L) in the 65th control example will be described. This normal state effect mode determination process (S3031L) is a process that is executed in place of the normal state effect mode determination process (see FIG. 2142) in the 61st control example described above. ), when a variation pattern command is received in the normal state, it is a process executed for determining the variation display mode according to the variation type notified by the variation pattern command. FIG. 2217 is a flow chart showing the normal state effect mode determination process (S3031L).
Of the normal state effect mode determination process (S3031L) in the present 65th control example, in each of the processes of S3101L to S3103L and S3110L to S3113L, the normal state effect mode determination process of the above-described 61st control example (see FIG. 2142) ) are executed in steps S3101L to S3103L and steps S3110L to S3113L.

In addition, in the normal state effect mode determination process (see FIG. 2217) in the 65th control example, when the process of S3103L is completed, then the variable effect type determined in the process of S3103L is the variable display mode with the battle effect. (S3191L). Here, in the sixty-fifth control example, a battle effect can be executed when various character super performances defined in the variable performance pattern selection table 222ua (see FIG. 2104) or various character super non-performances are determined. It is configured. In the process of S3191L, if it is determined that the variable display mode is accompanied by battle effects (S3191L: Yes), both the drive standby flag 223up and the battle effect standby flag 223uyb are set to ON (S3192L), and the process proceeds to S3110L. transition to On the other hand, in the process of S3191L, if it is not determined that the variable display mode is accompanied by a battle effect (S3191L: No), there is no possibility that the battle effect will be executed, so the process proceeds to S3110L. .
By executing this normal state effect mode determination processing (see FIG. 2217), when the variable display mode with the battle effect is determined, the battle effect standby flag 223uyb can be turned on, so that the battle effect can be performed. You can definitely start.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2218, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2181L) in the 65th control example will be described. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2181L) is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2143) in the 61st control example described above. 2143), this is a process for monitoring whether an operation member such as the frame button 22 is operated or not, and performing control corresponding to the detection of the operation. FIG. 2218 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2181L).
Of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2181L) in this 65th control example, in each of the processes of S3201L to S3204L, S3216L, and S3217L, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 2143) in the above-described 61st control example reference), the same processes as the processes of S3201L to S3204L, S3216L, and S3217L are executed.

In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2218) in the 65th control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3204L that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3204L: Yes), the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is turned on. (S4601L), and if it is determined that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (S4601L: Yes), it means that the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is being executed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4602L. On the other hand, if it is not determined in the process of S4601L that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON, the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is not executed, so the process proceeds to S3216L.
In the process of S4602L, it is determined whether the press completion flag 223uye is on (S4602L), and if it is not determined that the press completion flag 223uye is on (S4602L: No), the press completion flag 223uye is set to on. (S4603L), the process proceeds to S3216L. Accordingly, when the frame button 22 is operated while the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is being performed, the corresponding processing can be reliably performed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602L that the depression completion flag 223uye is ON (S4602L: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been depressed, that is, the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is being executed, this means that the frame button 22 has been operated two or more times.
By executing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 2218), when the frame button 22 is pressed while the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is being executed, the pressing completion flag 223uye is displayed. can be set to ON, it is possible to reliably execute processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 .
In the sixty-fifth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times during the period in which the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is performed once, the second and subsequent operations of the frame button 22 are performed. It is configured so that the pressing is not reflected in the end lottery, but it is not limited to this. For example, during the period in which the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is being executed, the lottery for ending the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed, the probability of which varies depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured to With this configuration, the player who wants to continue the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) can be made to operate the frame button 22 more positively, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2219, details of the drive timer monitoring process (S2142L) in the 65th control example will be described. This drive timer monitoring process (S2142L) is a process executed in place of the drive timer monitoring process (see FIG. 2145) in the 61st control example described above. This is a process for monitoring the timer value of the timer 223uj and determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred with respect to the movable accessory 900 . FIG. 2219 is a flow chart showing this drive timer monitoring process (S2142L).
Of the driving timer monitoring processing (see FIG. 2219) in the sixty-fifth control example, in each processing of S3401L to S3403L, S3407L, S3408L, S3410L, S3412L to S3416L, and S3418L, the driving timer monitoring in the sixty-first control example described above is performed. The same processes as those of S3401L to S3403L, S3407L, S3408L, S3410L, S3412L to S3416L, and S3418L of the process (see FIG. 2145) are executed.
In the drive timer monitoring process (see FIG. 2219) in the sixty-fifth control example, if it is not determined in the process of S3403L that the return support flag 223uu is ON (S3403L: No), the timer of the drive timer 223uj is It is determined whether the value is less than 2440 (S3415L), and if it is determined that the value of the drive timer 223uj is less than 2440 (S3415L: Yes), it is determined whether the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is on. (S3452L), if it is determined that the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S3452L: Yes), it is determined whether the timer value of the driving timer 223uj is less than 840 (S3453L), and the timer value of the driving timer 223uj is determined. is less than 840 (S3453L: Yes), it is determined whether the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (S3454L), and if it is determined that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (S3454L : Yes), it is determined whether the timer value of the driving timer 223uj is less than 540 (S3455L), and if it is not determined that the timer value of the driving timer 223uj is less than 540 (S3455L: No), the process proceeds to S3407L. Transition.
As described above, in the 65th control example, each allowable time (operation time considering step-out of the drive motor 905, detection failure of the sensor, etc.) is provided for each operation control based on each operation scenario table. . More specifically, an allowable time (for example, 540 ms for the vibration scenario table 222uya1) is set according to the maximum time (for example, 500 ms for the vibration scenario table 222uya1) required for motion control based on the scenario data in each motion scenario table. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the time until the recovery process is executed becomes long depending on the type of the set operation scenario.

Also, if it is not determined that the timer value of the drive timer 223uj is less than 840 in the process of S3453L (S3453L: No), and if it is not determined that the timer value of the drive timer 223uj is less than 2440 in the process of S3451L (S3451L: No), the process proceeds to S3407L.
On the other hand, if it is not determined in the process of S3452L that the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S3452L: No), the process proceeds to S3454L. Also, in the process of S3454L, if it is not determined that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (S3454L: No), this process ends.
By executing this drive timer monitoring process (see FIG. 2219), a predetermined process can be executed when the timer value of the drive timer 223uj exceeds a predetermined value. It is possible to prevent the operation control of the movable accessory 900 from being continued for an unnecessarily long period due to a malfunction such as step-out of the 905 .
Next, with reference to FIG. 2220, details of the rendering update process (S2143L) in the 65th control example will be described. This effect update process (S2143L) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 2146) in the above-described 61st control example. This is processing for updating. FIG. 2220 is a flowchart showing effect update processing (S2143L).

In the effect update process (see FIG. 2220) in this 65th control example, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the variable time timer 223uh is greater than 0 (S3501L), and the timer value of the variable time timer 223uh is greater than 0. If it is not determined that the value is large (S3501L: No), this means that the variable effect is not being executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3501L, if it is determined that the timer value of the variable time timer 223uh is a value greater than 0 (S3501L: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the variable time timer 223uh (S3502L), and battle effects It is determined whether the standby flag 223uyb is on (S3581L), and if it is determined that the battle effect standby flag 223uyb is on (S3581L: Yes), the variable display mode accompanied by the battle effect is determined. By referring to the timer value of the time timer 223uh, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the battle effect (S3582L).
In the process of S3582L, when it is determined that it is time to execute the battle effect (S3582L: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the battle effect is determined (S3583L), and the battle effect standby flag 223uyb is set to OFF (S3584L). , the battle effect execution flag 223uyd is set to ON (S3585L), and a display command for indicating the display mode corresponding to the decided various effect contents is set (S3588L). On the other hand, in the process of S3582L, when it is not determined that it is time to execute the battle effect (S3582L), the process proceeds to S3588L.
In addition, in the process of S3583L, the effect mode corresponding to the preparation period of the battle effect executed based on the lapse of time and the effect mode during the first battle effect are collectively determined. In this manner, in a configuration in which it is possible to switch and set the presentation mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 according to the operation status of the movable accessory 900, the time can be changed regardless of the operation status of the movable accessory 900. By making it possible to collectively set a series of effects modes executed based on the progress, it is possible to simplify the processing for determining the effects mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. can.
On the other hand, in the processing of S3581L, if it is not determined that the battle effect standby flag 223uyb is on (S3581L: No), it is determined whether the battle effect execution flag 223uyd is on (S3586L), and the battle effect When it is determined that the execution flag 223uyd is ON (S3586L: Yes), a battle effect update process is executed for updating various effects modes in the battle effect (S3587L), and the process proceeds to S3588L. The details of this battle effect update process (S3587L) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not determined in the process of S3586L that the battle effect execution flag 223uyd is ON (S3586L), it means that the battle effect is not being executed, so the process of S3587L is skipped and the process proceeds to S3588L. and migrate.

When the processing of S3588L ends, it is determined whether the driving standby flag 223up is on (S3503L), and if it is determined that the driving standby flag 223up is on (S3503L: Yes), it is time to start driving the accessory. (S3504L), and if it is determined that it is time to start driving the accessory (S3504L: Yes), the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 (S3505L), The scenario data corresponding to the counter value "1" is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S3589L), the driving standby flag 223up is set to OFF (S3507L), the accessory driving flag 223uq is set to ON (S3508L), and so on. Various counters and various timers are updated (S3512L), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3504L, if it is not determined that it is time to start driving the accessory (S3504L: No), or in the processing of S3503L, if it is not determined that the drive standby flag 223up is ON (S3503L: No), the process proceeds to S3512L. By executing this effect update process (S2143L), the display mode during the battle effect (the display mode corresponding to the battle preparation effect and the accessory attack effect) and the action of the movable accessory 900 are interlocked (correlated). be able to.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2221, details of the above-described battle effect update process (S3587L) will be described. This battle effect update process (S3587L) is a process for updating the display mode while the battle effect is being executed. FIG. 2221 is a flow chart showing this battle effect update process (S3587L). When the battle effect update process (S3587L) is executed, first, 1 is added to the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc (S4701L), and the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc is a value corresponding to the end timing of the battle preparation effect. (S4702L), and if it is determined that the timer value of the battle production timer 223uyc is a value corresponding to the end timing of the battle preparation production (S4702L: Yes), it is the timing to start the character attack production. Therefore, the effect mode corresponding to the character object attack effect is determined (S4703L), and the process proceeds to S4704L. On the other hand, in the process of S4702L, if it is not determined that the timer value corresponds to the end timing of the battle preparation effect (S4702L: No), it is determined whether the vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is ON (S4704L). If it is determined that the vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is ON (S4704L: Yes), it means that it is time to end the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion), so the second drop scenario execution flag 223uya3 is on (S4705L), and if it is determined that the second fall scenario execution flag 223uya3 is on (S4705L: Yes), the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is completed once. Therefore, the effect mode corresponding to the self-destruct effect is determined (S4709L), and the vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is set to OFF (S4710L).
On the other hand, in the process of S4705L, if it is not determined that the second fall scenario execution flag 223uya3 is ON (S4705L: No), it is determined whether the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S4706L), If it is determined that the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S4706L: Yes), the first motion control (vibration Since this means that the end condition is met during the period in which the scenario 68 action) is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the attack failure effect is determined (S4708L), and the process proceeds to S4710L.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4706L, if it is not determined that the first drop scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S4706L: No), the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed five times, and Since it means that the termination condition was not satisfied during the period during which the fifth first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) was executed, the effect mode corresponding to the defeat effect is determined (S4707L), and the process proceeds to S4710L. to move to.

When the processing of S4710L ends, or when it is not determined in the processing of S4704L that the vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is ON (S4704L: No), the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc is set at the end timing of the battle effect. It is determined whether it is a corresponding value (S4711L), and if it is not determined that it is a timer value corresponding to the end timing of the battle effect (S4711L: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4711L, if it is determined that the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc is a value corresponding to the end timing of the battle effect (S4711L: Yes), since it is the timing to end the battle effect, the battle effect is executed. The flag 223uyd is set to OFF (S4712L), the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc is set to 0 (S4713L), and this processing ends.
Here, the end timing of the battle effect refers to the timing when the timer value of the battle effect timer 223uyc becomes a value corresponding to 10000ms. That is, in the 65th control example, regardless of the number of times the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is performed, the predetermined effect period (10000 ms ), and by varying the period during which the final display mode (the display mode corresponding to one of the destruction effect, the attack failure effect, and the self-destruction effect) is displayed, the length of the period during which the battle effect is executed. configured to unify By configuring in this way, the length of the period during which the display mode corresponding to the battle effect is displayed can be grasped in advance, so that the display mode other than the battle effect can be easily adapted to the battle effect.
By executing this battle effect update process (see FIG. 2221), the display of the display mode corresponding to the battle effect can be reliably finished within a preset predetermined time, and the first operation control in which the number of times of execution is variable. The display mode can be switched in accordance with the end timing of (vibration scenario 68 operation).
Next, with reference to FIG. 2222, details of the motor scenario processing (S2144L) in the 65th control example will be described. This motor scenario process (S2144L) is a process executed in place of the motor scenario process (see FIG. 2149) in the above-described 61st control example. This is a process for advancing the action according to the action scenario set for the . FIG. 2222 is a flow chart showing this motor scenario processing (S2144L).

Of the motor scenario processing (see FIG. 2222) in the 65th control example, S3701L to S3703L, S3705L, and S3710L of the motor scenario processing in the above-described 61st control example (see FIG. 2149) correspond to S3701L to S3703L. , S3705L, and S3710L are executed. In the motor scenario process (see FIG. 2222) in the 65th control example, if it is determined in the process of S3703L that the save scenario execution flag 223us is ON (S3703L: Yes), the save scenario process (see FIG. 2149) ), the save scenario process is executed (S3775L), and this process ends.
Details of this evacuation scenario process (S3775L) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3703L, if it is not determined that the evacuation scenario execution flag 223us is ON (S3703L: No), it is determined whether the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (S3705L). 223ur is on (S3705L: Yes), vibration scenario processing is executed (S3771L), and this processing ends. The details of this vibration scenario processing (S3771L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, if it is not determined in the process of S3705L that the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is ON (S3705L: No), it is determined whether the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S3772L). If it is determined that the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S3772L: Yes), the first fall scenario process is executed (S3773L), and this process ends. Details of the first fall scenario process (S3773L) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not determined in the process of S3772L that the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is ON (S3774L: No), the second fall scenario process is executed (S3774L), and this process ends. The details of this second fall scenario process (S3774L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2223, details of the vibration scenario processing (S3771L) described above will be described. FIG. 2223 is a flow chart showing this vibration scenario process (S3771L). This vibration scenario process is a process for realizing motion control of the movable accessory 900 based on the vibration scenario table 222uya1 during the period in which the accessory attack effect is being executed.

When the vibration scenario process (S3771L) is executed, first, the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (S3901L), the value indicated by the step number data specified in the scenario data, and the step counter 223um counter value (S3902L), and if it is not determined that the value indicated by the step number data and the value of the step counter 223um match (S3902L: No), the scenario data is specified. It is determined whether the value of the sensor data is 0 (S3903L), and if it is determined that the value of the sensor data is 0 (S3903L: Yes), the time data specified in the scenario data It is determined whether the value and the timer value of the drive timer 223uj match (S3905L), and if it is determined that the value indicated by the time data and the timer value of the drive timer 223uj do not match (S3905L) , the operation control based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue has not been completed (is in progress), so this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3905L that the value indicated by the time data and the timer value of the drive timer 223uj match (S3905L: Yes), execution of operation control corresponding to the specified time data is completed. Therefore, it is determined whether the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 8 (S4801L). Also, in the process of S3903L, if it is not determined that the value of the sensor data is 0 (S3903L: No), the operation control is performed on the movable accessory 900 until the origin position sensor 920 is turned on. scenario data is set, it is determined whether the sensor (origin position sensor 920) corresponding to the sensor data is on (S3904L), and the sensor (origin position sensor 920) corresponding to the sensor data is not turned on (S3904L: No), the process proceeds to S3905L. On the other hand, in the processing of S3904L, if it is determined that the sensor (origin position sensor 920) corresponding to the sensor data is turned on (S3904L: Yes), the movable accessory 900 reaches the detection range of the origin position sensor 920. Since it means that it has reached, the process proceeds to S4801L.
If it is determined in S3902L that the value of the step number data and the counter value of the step counter 223um match (S3902L: Yes), a scenario for rotating the drive motor 905 until the predetermined number of steps is reached. Since the data has been set, meaning that the operation control based on the scenario data has been completed, the counter value of the step counter 223um is set to 0 (S3906L), and the process proceeds to S4801L.
In the processing of S4801L, if it is not determined that the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 8 (S4801L: No), the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is changed in order to continue the control based on the specified contents of the vibration scenario table 222uya1. (S4802L), the scenario data corresponding to the counter value of the processing counter 223uk from the vibration scenario table 222uya1 is overwritten and stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4803L), and the timer value of the driving timer 223uyc is set to 0. (S3192L), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4801L that the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 8 (S4801L: Yes), this means that the operation control based on the last scenario data in the vibration scenario table 222uya1 has been completed. It is determined whether the depression completion flag 223uye is on (S4804L), and if it is determined that the depression completion flag 223uye is on (S4804L: Yes), the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is being executed. Since it means that the frame button 22 has been pressed by the player during the period, the vibration scenario end lottery table 222uyb is read (S4805L), and the lottery result is specified by referring to the read vibration scenario end lottery table 222uyb (S4806L). ), the press completion flag 223uye is set to OFF (S4807L), it is determined whether the lottery result specified in S4806L is the lottery result corresponding to the end (S4808L), and it is not determined that the lottery result corresponds to the end. If so (S4808L: No), in order to repeatedly execute the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion), vibration scenario repetition processing is executed (S4809L), and the processing proceeds to S3192L. The details of this vibration scenario repetition process (S4809L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the process of S4808L, if it is determined that the lottery result of the end lottery is the lottery result corresponding to the end (S4808L: Yes), or in the process of S4804L, it is determined that the depression completion flag 223uye is on. If not (S4804L), the termination condition for terminating the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is satisfied, so vibration scenario termination processing is executed (S4810L), and the process proceeds to S3912L. The details of this vibration scenario end processing (S4810L) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2224, the processing contents of the vibration scenario repetition processing (S4809L) executed in the vibration scenario processing (see S3771L of FIG. 2223) will be described. This vibration scenario repetition process (S4809L) is a process for repeatedly executing the motion control based on the vibration scenario table 222uya1 up to a predetermined number of times (five times). FIG. 2224 is a flowchart showing vibration scenario repetition processing (S4809L).
When the vibration scenario repetition process (S4809L) is executed, it is first determined whether the counter value of the repetition counter 223un is less than 5 (S4901L). (S4901L: Yes), in order to execute the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) again, 1 is added to the counter value of the repetition counter 223un (S4902L), and 1 is set to the counter value of the processing counter 223uk ( S4903L), the scenario data corresponding to the counter value "1" of the processing counter 223uk from the vibration scenario table 222uya1 is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4904L), and the repetition counter 223un is set to display the number of attacks in the role object attack presentation. is determined (S4905L), a display command corresponding to the determined display mode is set (S4906L), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4901L, if it is not determined that the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is less than 5 (S4901L; No), the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is repeated the maximum number of times (5 times). Therefore, the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is set to OFF (S4907L), the vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is set to ON (S4908L), the counter value of the repetition counter 223un is set to 1 (S4909L), The counter value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 (S4910L), the role product driving flag 223uq is set to OFF (S4911L), and this processing ends.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2225, the processing contents of the vibration scenario end processing (S4810L) executed in the vibration scenario processing (see S3771L of FIG. 2223) will be described. This vibration scenario termination process (S4810L) is a process for terminating the motion control based on the vibration scenario table 222uya1 when the termination condition for terminating the motion control based on the vibration scenario table 222uya1 is satisfied. FIG. 2225 is a flowchart showing vibration scenario end processing (S4810L).
When the vibration scenario end processing (S4810L) is executed, first, the vibration scenario execution flag 223ur is set to OFF (S4831L), the vibration scenario completion flag 223uya1 is set to ON (S4832L), and the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is set to 1 is set (S4833L), it is determined whether the counter value of the repetition counter 223un is 1 (S4834L), and if it is determined that the counter value of the repetition counter 223un is 1 (S4834L: Yes), the first Since it means that the end condition is satisfied during the period in which the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed, the scenario data corresponding to the counter value "1" of the processing counter 223uk is retrieved from the second fall scenario table 222uya3. The scenario storage area 223ue is stored (S4835L), the second fall scenario execution flag 223uya3 is set to ON (S4836L), the counter value of the repeat counter 223un is set to 1 (S4839L), and this process ends.
On the other hand, in the process of S4834L, if it is not determined that the counter value of the repetition counter 223un is 1 (S4834L: No), any of the second, third, fourth, and fifth times (other than the first time) ) is executed during the execution of the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation). The data is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S4837L), the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is set to ON (S4838L), and the process proceeds to S4839L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2226, the processing contents of the first drop scenario process (S3773L) executed in the motor scenario process (see S2144L of FIG. 2222) will be described. FIG. 2226 is a flow chart showing the first fall scenario process (S3773L).
When the first fall scenario process (S3773L) is executed, first, the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (S5001L), and the value indicated by the step number data specified in the scenario data, It is determined whether or not the counter value of the step counter 223um matches (S5002L), and if it is not determined that the value indicated by the step number data and the counter value of the step counter 223um match (S5002L: No) Then, it is determined whether the value indicated by the time data specified in the scenario data matches the timer value of the drive timer 223uj (S5003L), and the value indicated by the time data and the timer value of the drive timer 223uj are matched. If it is not determined that they match (S5003L: No), this means that the motion control based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue has not been completed (is in progress), so this process is terminated. finish.
On the other hand, in the process of S5003L, if it is determined that the timer value of the drive timer 223uj matches the value indicated by the time data (S5003L: Yes), operation control is performed based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue. has been completed, it is determined whether the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 3 (S5005L). Also, in the processing of S5002L, if it is determined that the value indicated by the step number data matches the counter value of the step counter 223um (S5002L: Yes), operation control based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is completed. Therefore, the counter value of the step counter 223um is set to 0 (S5004L), and the process proceeds to S5005L.
In the processing of S5005L, if it is not determined that the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 3 (S5005L: No), the motion control based on the first drop scenario table 222uya2 has not been completed (the scenario is in progress). Therefore, the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is incremented by 1 (S5006L), and the scenario data corresponding to the counter value of the processing counter 223uk after addition from the first fall scenario table 222uya2 is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue. (S5007L), the timer value of the driving timer 223uj is set to 0 (S5012L), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005L that the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 3 (S5005L: Yes), this means that the operation control based on the first fall scenario table 222uya2 has been completed. (S5008L), the scenario data corresponding to the counter value "1" of the processing counter 223uk from the save scenario table 222uc is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S5009L), and the save scenario execution flag 223us is turned on. (S5010L), the first fall scenario execution flag 223uya2 is set to OFF (S5011L), and the process proceeds to S5012L.
By executing this first drop scenario process (see FIG. 2226), it is possible to reliably execute motion control based on the first drop scenario table 222uya2 for the movable accessory 900. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIG. 2227, the processing contents of the second drop scenario processing (S3774L) executed in the motor scenario processing (see S2144L of FIG. 2222) will be described. FIG. 2227 is a flowchart showing second fall scenario processing (S3774L).
When the second fall scenario process (S3774L) is executed, first, the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue is extracted (S5101L), and the value indicated by the step number data specified in the scenario data, It is determined whether the counter value of the step counter 223um matches (S5102L), and if it is not determined that the value indicated by the step number data and the counter value of the step counter 223um match (S5102L: No) Then, it is determined whether the value indicated by the time data specified in the scenario data matches the timer value of the drive timer 223uj (S5103L), and the value indicated by the time data and the timer value of the drive timer 223uj are matched. If it is not determined that they match (S5103L: No), this means that the operation control based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue has not been completed (is in progress), so this processing is performed. exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103L, if it is determined that the timer value of the drive timer 223uj matches the value indicated by the time data (S5103L: Yes), the operation is controlled based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue. has been completed, it is determined whether the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 3 (S5105L). Also, in the process of S5102L, if it is determined that the value indicated by the step number data and the counter value of the step counter 223um match (S5102L: Yes), the operation is controlled based on the scenario data stored in the scenario storage area 223ue. is completed, the counter value of the step counter 223um is set to 0 (S5104L), and the process proceeds to S5105L.
In the processing of S5105L, if it is not determined that the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 3 (S5105L: No), the motion control based on the second drop scenario table 222uya3 is not completed (scenario is in progress). Therefore, the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is incremented by 1 (S5106L), and the scenario data corresponding to the counter value of the processing counter 223uk after addition from the second fall scenario table 222uya3 is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue. (S5107L), the timer value of the drive timer 223uj is set to 0 (S5112L), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5105L that the counter value of the processing counter 223uk is 3 (S5105L: Yes), it means that the operation control based on the second drop scenario table 222uya3 has been completed. is set to 1 (S5108L), scenario data corresponding to the counter value "1" of the processing counter 223uk from the save scenario table 222uc is stored in the scenario storage area 223ue (S5109L), and the save scenario execution flag 223us is turned on. (S5110L), the second fall scenario execution flag 223uya3 is set to OFF (S5111L), and the process proceeds to S5112L.
By executing this second drop scenario process (see FIG. 2227), it is possible to reliably execute motion control based on the second drop scenario table 222uya3 for the movable accessory 900. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 2228, the details of the evacuation scenario process (S3775L) executed in the motor scenario process (see S2144L in FIG. 2222) will be described. FIG. 2228 is a flow chart showing save scenario processing (S3775L). This evacuation scenario process (S3775L) is a process executed instead of the evacuation scenario process (see FIG. 2155) in the 61st control example described above. This is a process for realizing the save operation of by referring to the save scenario table 222uc. In the save scenario process (see FIG. 2228) in the 65th control example, the processes in S4301L to S4313L are the same as the processes in S4301L to S4313L in the save scenario process in the 61st control example (see FIG. 2155). process is executed. The save scenario process (S3775L) in the 65th control example differs from the save scenario process in the 61st control example (see FIG. 2155) only in that the processes of S4314L and S4315L are deleted. ing.
By executing this evacuation scenario process (S3775L), it is possible to refer to the evacuation scenario table 222uc and execute motion control for moving the movable accessory 900 to the origin position.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 65th control example, the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed to move the movable accessory 900 from the origin position based on a predetermined motion scenario, and the first motion If the termination condition for terminating the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is not satisfied during the period during which the control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is executed, the first motion control (vibration Scenario 68 operation) is repeatedly executed, and when the termination condition for terminating the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is satisfied during the period in which the first operation control (vibration scenario 68 operation) is being executed, a predetermined number of times ( The first motion control can be terminated (for example, once) without being repeatedly executed up to five times.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 65th control example, it is determined whether or not the termination condition for terminating the first motion control (vibration scenario 68 motion) is satisfied while the movable accessory 900 is positioned at the origin position. It is configured to

By configuring in this way, when execution of the first action control (vibration scenario 68 action) is completed, there is no need to execute control to move (retreat) the movable accessory 900 from a position different from the origin position. Therefore, the motion control for the movable accessory 900 can be simplified.
In the sixty-fifth control example described above, the movable accessory 900 located at the origin position is configured to abut the upper decorative accessory 600y, and the movable accessory 900 located at the origin position further moves upward. By constructing the game board 13 so as not to be able to move downward, the downward movement distance is maximized within the limited space formed by the game board 13 . By configuring in this way, the movement distance of the movable accessory 900 can be increased when the effect of moving the movable accessory 900 is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
In addition, by using the above-described configuration, when the retraction control is executed as the movement control for the movable accessory 900, the movement of the movable accessory 900 upward from the origin position is reliably suppressed. be able to.
In the 65th control example, as in the 60th control example described above, the drive energy (rotation) of the drive motor 905 is transmitted to move the movable accessory 900. However, the drive motor 905 In a part of the transmission means for transmitting the driving energy to the movable accessory 900, it is preferable to provide a protective member (such as a spring) that can expand and contract in the moving direction of the movable accessory 900. By configuring in this way, a problem occurs in the movement control of the movable accessory 900, and the movable accessory 900 positioned at the origin position, that is, the upper decorative accessory 600y (regulating member) is in contact with the state. Even if the movable control to move the movable accessory 900 upward (the direction in which movement is restricted) is executed, the load generated on the movable accessory 900 due to the contraction of the protective member, It is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 905 and the transmission member.

Furthermore, since the movable accessory 900 positioned at the origin position can be configured to abut against the upper decorative accessory 600y in a state in which the protection member is stretched, the movable accessory 900 can move upward. It is possible to perform the movable control to position the decorative accessory 600y at the origin position without increasing the accuracy of the position of contact with the decorative accessory 600y. In addition, since product errors such as the dimensions of the upper decorative accessory 600y and surface irregularities can be absorbed by expanding and contracting the protective member, the situation in which the upper decorative accessory 600y and the movable accessory 900 come into contact can be easily reduced. can be created.
Further, the structure of the transmission member described above may be used in the sixty-first control example described above. Even if it is added, the transmission member may be configured so that the load is not applied to the drive motor 905 even though the movable accessory 900 moves within a predetermined range.
Specifically, as an additional effect shown in FIG. 2091, in the above-described 61st control example, an icon 913 imitating a weight is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. A weight is movably configured as the second movable accessory, and the second movable accessory is configured to be directly placed on the movable accessory 900 positioned at the operating position so as to be able to execute the accessory effect, and the movable accessory 900 As a transmission member (transmission means) that connects the drive motor 905 and the drive motor 905, a stretchable member such as a spring or a clearance (such as a long hole) is provided at a connection portion for operating a plurality of connection members, and the movable accessory 900 can move to a predetermined position. Even if it moves within the range (downward movement due to gravity (external force) applied to the movable accessory 900 by placing the second movable accessory), the external force is It is preferable that the load is absorbed and the load is not applied to the drive motor 905 .
By configuring in this way, the movable accessory 900 can be moved within a predetermined range without affecting the movement control of the drive motor 905, and a falling effect in which the movable accessory 900 falls is executed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually grasp the fact.

<66th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2229 to 2364. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example has the configuration of the game board 13 partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 partially changed, and the voice lamp control device. 113 in that the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of No. 113 are partially changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), variable state ( High probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) can be set, and each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is executed after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery. was configured to allow the probability state of to shift from a low probability state to a high probability state. Also, after the end of the above-mentioned jackpot game, and when other end conditions (for example, end conditions established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number) are satisfied, each symbol (special symbol, It was configured so that the probability state of the normal symbol) can be shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state. After the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times during the variable probability state which is the game state most advantageous to the player, the game state is shifted from the variable probability state to the time saving state. In the first control example configured in this way, even if the variable probability state is set, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the jackpot game is never executed. There is a problem that the variable probability state ends, and the player's motivation to play is remarkably lowered.

On the other hand, in the 66th control example, once the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state continues until the next big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. After the end of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot during the variable probability state, the variable probability state is easily set again, and the number of times the variable probability state is continuously set over the winning of the jackpot. is configured to set an upper limit for In other words, once the variable probability state is set, it is configured so that the player can easily experience the jackpot game a plurality of times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily give the player a benefit due to the setting of the variable probability state, so that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's willingness to play. In addition, in this 66th control example, an upper limit (limit) is provided for the number of times the probability variation state is set continuously (continuous probability variation number), and when the continuous probability variation number reaches the upper limit (limit), the jackpot game It is configured so that the time saving state is set after the end. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the 66th control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 2229 to 2231, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 66th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 2229, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 66th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 2229 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2229, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixty-sixth control example is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 4) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The second variable winning device 650 is provided in the left area (game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80), and the right area of the game board 13 (formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) game area), and in the area on the right side thereof, there are a first general ball entrance 630a, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, and a second general ball entrance. The difference is that an entrance 630b is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the same structure, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this 66th control example, as in the above-described first control example, the first ball entrance 64 capable of acquiring the right to execute the first special symbol lottery based on the entry of the game ball, and the second special The game board 13 is provided with a second ball entrance 640 through which the right to execute the symbol lottery can be acquired. Then, the second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and when the electric accessory 640a is controlled to open in the normal pattern winning game executed based on winning in the normal symbol lottery. It is configured so that a game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 immediately. Further, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbols than in the low probability state of the normal symbols.

In this 66th control example configured in this way, during the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right hitting game (toward the right side area of the game board 13 By executing a game in which a game ball flows down, a left-handed game (a game in which a game ball flows down toward the left area of the game board 13) is performed rather than entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. By executing the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, it becomes easier to execute the special symbol lottery in a relatively large number, so that the left-handed game becomes an advantageous game method for the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2230 and 2231, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail. FIG. 2230(a) is a plan view schematically showing the variable prize winning device 65 in the closed state, and FIG. 2230(b) is a plan view schematically showing the variable prize winning device 65 in the open state. . First, with reference to FIG. 2230(a), the ball flow of the game ball when the variable winning device 65 is closed will be described. In the closed state of the variable prize winning device 65, the opening/closing door 65f is configured to protrude to a position (closed position) covering the opening of the specific prize winning port 65a, and the game balls flowing down the right side area enter the specific prize winning port 65a. It is configured so that it cannot win a prize. A flow-down path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f located at the closed position, through which game balls can flow down.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2229, in the sixty-sixth control example, the opening/closing door 65f is inclined downward from the right end (the right end when viewed from the front in FIG. 2229) to the left end (the left end when viewed from the front in the viewpoint of FIG. 2229). Since the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be formed, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f moves from the right end to the left end as shown in FIG. 2230(a). flow down Furthermore, on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f, a plurality of regulating members are provided for meandering and flowing down the game ball.

Specifically, a first restricting member 65fa, a second restricting member 65fb, a third restricting member 65fc, a fourth restricting member 65fd, and a fifth restricting member 65fe are provided in order from the upstream side to the downstream side of the opening/closing door 65f. The first regulating member 65fa, the third regulating member 65fc, and the fifth regulating member 65fe are provided on the left side with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, and the second regulating member 65fb and the fourth regulating member 65fd are provided in the flowing direction of the game ball. It is provided on the right side with respect to the direction. When the game ball flows down the upper surface of the open/close door 65f configured in this way, the game ball that has reached the point A reaches the curved surface portion of the first restricting member 65fa, the curved surface portion of the second restricting member 65fb, and the third restricting member. It flows down while colliding with the curved surface portion of the member 65fc in order, and reaches the point B. After that, while colliding with the curved surface portion of the fourth restricting member 65fd and the curved surface portion of the fifth restricting member 65fe, it reaches the point C, and the second general ball entrance from the downstream end of the flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f. It is configured to be discharged to a position facing the opening of 630b.

In this way, by providing a plurality of regulating members on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f, the game balls are caused to flow down along a meandering path (indicated by arrows in the figure) on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f, and the flowing down game balls By colliding with each regulating member, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball. Therefore, the period during which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f can be lengthened as compared with the case where the regulation member is not provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2230(b), the ball flow of the game ball when the variable winning device 65 is in the open state will be described. In the open state of the variable prize winning device 65, the opening/closing door 65f is retracted to a position embedded inside the game board 13, and a game ball can enter the opening of the specific prize winning port 65a. A game ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a flows down the bottom surface 65z of the variable winning device 65 from the upstream side to the downstream side. Here, as shown in FIG. 2229, in the sixty-sixth control example, the bottom surface 65z of the variable winning device 65 is directed from the right end (the right end when viewed from the front in FIG. 2229) to the left end (the left end when viewed from the front in FIG. 2229). It is disposed on the game board 13 so as to be inclined downward from the bottom 65z so that the game ball that has flowed down the bottom surface 65z is discharged to the outside after passing the ball entry detection sensor 65s.

Returning to FIG. 2230(b), the description continues. As shown in FIG. 2230(b), the bottom surface 65z of the variable winning device 65 is formed with a bottom surface 65z on which the game ball flows straight, unlike the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f. In other words, the period required to reach point (C) from point (A) shown in FIG. It is configured so that t(A)2 is shorter. By configuring in this way, when one game ball passes through the entering ball detection sensor 65s, it is possible to make it easier for another game ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2231, the ball flow of the winning game ball in the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 2231 is a diagram showing the ball flow of the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 2231, the game ball is configured to flow down toward the entering ball detection sensor 65s through different flow paths depending on the position at which the game ball flows from the opening/closing door 65f to the specific winning opening 65a.

<Regarding the effect content in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 2232 to FIG. 2238, among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, in a part of the case where the result of the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the second A jackpot game that controls the opening of the variable winning device 650 is configured to be executable. In other words, in the normal state where the game (left-handed game) for executing the first special symbol lottery is mainly performed, the jackpot game can be executed while continuing the left-handed game without switching the game method for shooting the game ball. It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of having the player switch the game method every time a big winning game is executed.

Further, although a detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example in the special symbol lottery even during the special symbol low probability state. The probability of winning a jackpot is highly defined (jackpot probability 1/22). Then, a jackpot game is executed in which the second variable winning device 650 is controlled to be opened at a rate of 93% when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the first special symbol, and the variable winning device is at a rate of the remaining 7%. 65 is configured to execute a jackpot game controlled to open. Furthermore, when a jackpot game in which the opening of the second variable prize winning device 650 is controlled is executed, the prize awarded during the jackpot game is higher than when a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is controlled to open is executed. It is constructed so that a disadvantageous jackpot game with a small number of balls is executed.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is controlled to be opened is executed, the normal pattern has a high probability that the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed after the jackpot game is finished. A state (time saving state, probability variable state) is set, and the game shifts to a right-handed game in which a second special symbol lottery is mainly executed in which a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be given.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, a special symbol lottery (first A game aiming at winning a jackpot (advantageous jackpot) with a distribution probability of 7% is performed while performing a special pattern lottery. Then, when a jackpot (disadvantageous jackpot) with a distribution probability of 93% is won, a jackpot game is performed in which a small amount of prize balls are obtained by continuing the left-handed game.

FIG. 2232(a) shows the effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 while the first special symbol variation for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery in the normal state is being executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. As shown in FIG. 2232(a), on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, there is a display area Dm1 in which the third symbol that is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is displayed. formed. In addition, in the central area of the main display area Dm, as a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol variation being executed, a decorative pattern (in the figure, a Indicated by a large downward arrow), a variable effect is being executed in which the player is looking up.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 2232(a), the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol variation is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by three arrows in the figure). The variation display of the third pattern is started at the timing when the corresponding special symbol variation is started, and the variation display is stopped at the timing when the corresponding special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. By configuring in this way, as the variation performance executed in the central area of the main display area Dm, the dynamic display of the decorative pattern is stopped during one special symbol variation period, or the special symbol variation is performed a plurality of times. Even if the variable performance of the performance mode in which the variable performance (dynamic display of the decorative pattern) is continuously executed over the period is executed, the special symbol can be confirmed by checking the variable display situation of the third symbol. It is possible to make the player grasp the number of execution times of the variation.

Further, the display area of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be smaller than the display area in which the variable effect is executed. By configuring in this way, the variable performance with a higher degree of freedom than the variable display of the third pattern, that is, the performance with a high performance effect can be visually recognized by the player more easily than the performance with a low performance effect. can. In addition, in the 66th control example, the display area of the third pattern and the display area of the variable effect are both formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a display device different from the third pattern display device 81, the display device executing the variable effect and the display device executing the variable display of the third pattern may be configured to be different. . By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation where the variable display state of the third pattern enters the field of view of the player who is watching the contents of the performance of the variable performance, and the performance effect of the variable performance is lowered. can be done.

Furthermore, in the sixty-sixth control example, the position of the third pattern display area (display area Dm1) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is fixed to the upper right side of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Although an example in which the size of the display area is also fixed is shown, the size of the display area Dm1 may be changed or the display position may be changed without being limited to this. . In this case, for example, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, and the variation effect of the first effect mode (super ready-to-win effect) with a relatively high expectation is executed, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is To make it more difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable display state of the third pattern than when the variation performance of the second performance mode (normal ready-to-win performance) whose expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than that of the first performance mode is executed. It is preferable to reduce the size of the display area Dm1 or to temporarily remove the display area Dm from the display surface. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the performance effect of the variable performance is detected in advance by the variable display state of the third pattern and the performance effect is lowered, and the display area Dm1 can be reduced. By doing so, it is possible to secure a wide display area in which the variable effect is executed in the main display area Dm, so that it is possible to easily execute a powerful variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 2232(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved storage). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixty-sixth control example performs a variable display (a variable display of special symbols) on the first symbol display device 37, or when a jackpot game is executed, that is, When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which a new special symbol lottery cannot be executed, the number of times the ball enters each ball entrance is a maximum of 4 times. retained until The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this 66th control example, the maximum number of held balls stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is four, and a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is Since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls to be stored is set to 4, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Further, in the sub display area Ds, in addition to the reserved symbols described above, comments (guidance display mode) for supplementing the effect contents of the variable effect being executed, the contents of the game being executed, and the game to be executed later A comment (game guidance display mode) for guiding the contents of the game is displayed. In this way, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a display area (main display area Dm) in which variable effects are executed and a display area (sub-display area Ds) for providing information on the game. By forming it, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in grasping the information provided to the player due to the mixed effect being displayed and the information about the game being displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2232(b) and 2233(a), a disadvantageous jackpot game (2-round jackpot game) is performed in the first special symbol lottery executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. Description will be given of the performance contents of the variable performance executed when winning the disadvantageous jackpot that is executed. FIG. 2232(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a special symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol lottery is a disadvantage jackpot is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 2233(a) is a diagram showing a disadvantageous It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect in a big-hit game (2 round big-hit game).

As shown in FIG. 2232(b), in this 66th control example, patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of numbers (0 to 9, etc.) and a display mode (character , bags, etc.), and the variable display of the three decorative patterns is started at the timing when the variable performance is started, and then the left decorative patterns and the right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in this order. . At this point, if the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped in a specific combination (for example, a combination of the same type of numbers), a combination different from the specific combination (for example, a combination of different types of numbers) A variable effect (ready-to-win effect) that is not executed (hardly executed) in the case of stop display is executed. After that, during the ready-to-win effect, the intermediate decorative symbols that are variably displayed have specific symbols (for example, the same kind of number symbols as the ready-to-win number symbols) are stopped and displayed. By stopping and displaying the symbols side by side, the result of the special symbol lottery of this time is a production result indicating that the big win is won.

Furthermore, in the 66th control example, the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win and a disadvantageous jackpot game is executed (when a disadvantageous jackpot is won), and the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win. In addition, three decorative symbols are stop-displayed in different combinations depending on whether the advantageous jackpot game is executed (when the advantageous jackpot is won).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2232(b), when a disadvantageous jackpot is won, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in a combination in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed (in the figure, the left After the decorative pattern is ``2'' and the right decorative pattern is ``3'', the specific pattern 802 simulating a bag is stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern without executing the ready-to-win performance. Here, in the 66th control example, in the case of winning a disadvantageous jackpot in the special symbol lottery and in the case of winning an advantageous jackpot, benefits given after winning the jackpot (the number of prize balls that can be given during the jackpot game, the jackpot The degree of advantage of the game state set after the end of the game is greatly different, and it is possible to execute a variable performance to arouse whether or not the player wins an advantageous jackpot, which is a result of a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player. Configure.

By configuring in this way, when a performance mode (ready-to-win performance) with a high expectation of winning a big win is executed as a performance mode of the variable performance, it is easy for the user to pay attention to the variable performance executed while expecting the winning of the big win. be able to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 2232(b), when the decorative symbols for indicating the winning of the disadvantageous jackpot are stopped and displayed, in the display area Dm1, the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the jackpot. As a guidance display mode for informing the player that a big win game (disadvantageous big win game) in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "222" and the second variable winning device 650 is controlled to open is executed. , an image showing the vicinity of the second variable prize winning device 650 is displayed in the display area Dm5, and a comment "Aim for it" is displayed. In addition, in order to prevent the player from interrupting the left-handed game during the disadvantageous jackpot game, the display area Dm4 displays "left-handed" as a guidance display mode for prompting the player to play the left-handed game. Is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide display mode for guiding the player that an effect using the stopped specific symbol 802 (decorative symbol corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot winning) will be executed. What's inside?" is displayed.

Then, when the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed, as shown in FIG. As a point mode, an effect in which an icon P1 simulating "+15" pops out of the specific pattern 802 (effect during a disadvantageous jackpot game) is executed, and an action that pleases the character 801 is executed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "get 15" is displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that 15 prize balls have been obtained during the disadvantageous winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2233(b) to 2235(b), description will be given of the effect executed when the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state wins an advantageous jackpot. FIG. 2233(b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the variable effect when the first special symbol that wins the advantageous jackpot is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 2233(b), when the advantageous jackpot is won, the same kind of numbers ("777" in the figure) are displayed as a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the advantageous jackpot has been won, and the advantageous jackpot has been won. As a guide display mode for informing the player of this fact, the words "Big Win" are displayed, and an action that the character 801 is pleased with is displayed.

Then, in the display area Dm1, a third symbol (“777” in the figure) indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed. When an advantageous jackpot is won, a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) in which the variable winning device 65 is controlled to be opened is executed as an advantageous jackpot game. An image simulating the winning device 65 is displayed, and a display of "Right-handed" is displayed in the display area Dm4 to prompt the player to play a right-handed game. In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, the contents of the game being executed and the comment "Congratulations on the big win, hit right and aim at the attacker" are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding the game method to be played later.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example has a disadvantageous jackpot and an advantageous jackpot as jackpots that can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and only when the advantageous jackpot is won, the jackpot is won by the variable performance. It is configured to let you know what you have done. By constructing in this way, when the performance suggesting the winning of the big win is executed in the variable performance, it is suppressed that the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the disadvantageous big win and the player's willingness to play is lowered. be able to.

In addition, in the 66th control example, when a disadvantageous jackpot is won, a variable effect (such as a ready-to-win effect) that suggests a jackpot win is not executed as a variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and is not limited to the disadvantageous jackpot. The ready-to-win effect may be executed even when the game is won. In this case, the ready-to-win performance is made more difficult to execute when the disadvantageous jackpot is won than when the advantageous jackpot is won, and the ratio of the advantageous jackpot winnings when the ready-to-win effect is executed is more disadvantageous. It is preferable to configure the ratio to be higher than the proportion of jackpot winnings. In addition, when the performance result of the ready-to-win performance is a performance result indicating a win, winning of an advantageous jackpot is notified, and when the performance result of the ready-to-win performance is a performance result indicating a loss, it is configured to notify of winning of a disadvantageous jackpot. Also good. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play, who pays attention to the performance contents of the variable performance, from being lowered based on the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is a disadvantageous jackpot winning. can be suppressed.

Next, the effect mode during the advantageous jackpot game executed when the advantageous jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 2234(a). FIG. 2234(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode during the jackpot game (during the first hit) when the advantageous jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery (at the time of the first hit). Although a detailed description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a probability variable jackpot in which a high probability state of special symbols is set as the jackpot type after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured to be set, and an upper limit is provided to the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the high probability state of the special design reaches the upper limit number of times set continuously (when the limit is reached), even if the probability variable jackpot is set, after the jackpot game ends, the special pattern It is configured so that a low-probability state is set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned disadvantageous jackpot is won, the normal pattern low probability state is set after the disadvantageous jackpot game ends, and when the advantageous jackpot is won, the normal pattern high probability state is set after the advantageous jackpot game ends. It is configured so that In other words, if the disadvantageous jackpot is elected in a state where the limit has not been reached, the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the disadvantageous jackpot game, and the limit has been reached. When an advantageous jackpot is won in a state where there is no game, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the advantageous jackpot game. On the other hand, when the limit is reached, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the disadvantageous jackpot game, and the time saving state (low probability of special symbols) is set after the end of the advantageous jackpot game. state, high probability state of normal design) is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the excessive succession of the high-probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous jackpot game in which the round game is 10 rounds and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished is always executed. . That is, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed in a state where the remaining number of times until the limit is reached (the remaining number of times until the upper limit number of times in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set) remains. By shifting to the high-probability state of normal symbols, the number of times the advantageous jackpot game is executed can be increased.

Therefore, in this 66th control example, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a variable performance for suggesting to the player whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, but the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is used to execute an advantageous big win game. A variable performance is executed for suggesting to the player whether or not the jackpot winning is achieved.

Next, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and an advantageous jackpot game is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 2234(a) is displayed as a jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game. FIG. 2234(a) is a diagram showing the effect mode of the jackpot game effect executed during the advantageous jackpot game (first hit game) executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. As described above, in the 66th control example, the maximum number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set continuously after the first hit game is set according to the remaining number of times until the limit is reached at the time when the first hit game is executed. configured differently. Specifically, in the case of winning a jackpot in which an advantageous jackpot game (first hit game) is executed in the first special symbol lottery executed in a state where the normal state is set, the remaining number of times until the limit is reached Since is 7 times, it is possible to continue the variable probability state until a maximum of 7 jackpot games are executed, including the first hit game, while the normal state is set. After the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery and the second probability variable state is set, the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed again in the first special symbol lottery, and then the advantageous jackpot game (first winning game) is executed. If you win a jackpot, the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is updated (subtracted) every time the second variable state is set, so up to 4 jackpot games, including the first hit game It is configured so that the variable probability state can be continued only until it is executed.

Further, in this 66th control example, when the normal state is set as the game state and when the second variable probability state is set, that is, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, Regardless of the probability state of the special symbols, the left-handed game in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is configured to be a game method advantageous to the player, and on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The performance mode of the variation performance to be executed is the same, and the same variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) to be executed. Configure. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed by a left-handed game, the player cannot (or cannot) grasp the remaining number of times until the limit is reached.

In the 66th control example configured in this manner, the player who wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and has executed the advantageous jackpot game (first winning game) will next receive an advantageous game that will be executed until the limit is reached. They will be interested in the remaining number of jackpot games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 2234(a), in the jackpot game effect executed during the first winning game, the effect capable of suggesting to the player the remaining number of times until reaching the limit is executed.

The diagram shown in FIG. 2234(a) is the first round of the first hit game, and shows the effect contents of the jackpot game effect executed in the state where the variable winning device 65 has won two game balls. In the figure shown, in the display area Dm1, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (777) for indicating that the result of the first special symbol lottery is the jackpot winning. In the display area Dm4, "Right-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for prompting a right-handed game during a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) in which the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open. In addition, a display area Dm10 is formed to indicate a value (points) corresponding to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game being executed, and "30P" corresponding to 30 prize balls already paid out is displayed. mode is displayed.

Also, in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, an icon 805 imitating a treasure box is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game being executed. A point icon P1 and a point icon P2 are displayed as a display mode for indicating the prize balls paid out based on the above. In this 66th control example, since 15 prize balls are paid out every time one game ball wins the variable prize winning device 65, both the point icon P1 and the point icon P2 It is displayed in the display mode of "+15" corresponding to 15 prize balls. That is, during the first hit game, the sum of the values indicated by the point icons P1 and P2 displayed so as to pop out from the icon 805 is displayed in the display area Dm10. By constructing in this way, the number of game balls won by the variable prize winning device 65 in one jackpot game and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning are notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

Furthermore, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, an icon 806 with the characters "Chance Mode" and an icon 806a with the characters "Victory Mode" are moving to the left. A character 801 is displayed that is performing an action to stop one of the displayed icons. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 2234(a), since the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is not notified, "? mode" is displayed in the display area Dm9.

Here, the "chance mode" is a state in which the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is not the upper limit, that is, the first winning game being executed has won a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. "Victory mode" is a mode that informs that it is not executed based on the state, and "victory mode" is a state in which the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is the upper limit, that is, the first hit game being executed is normal This is a mode for notifying that the state is executed based on the fact that the first special symbol lottery executed during the state has won a jackpot.

In the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the content of the jackpot game presentation being executed during the first win game, characters such as "Chance mode? P, Victory mode? 2000 P?" are displayed. is displayed.

Then, when the character 801 stop-displays the icon 806 to which the characters "chance mode" are attached as the effect result of the jackpot game effect shown in FIG. 2234(a), the display shown in FIG. 2234(b). A screen appears. This "chance mode" is a mode that is continuously set during the period until the limit is reached, that is, from the end of the first winning game and the setting of the variable probability state to the end of the jackpot game that has reached the limit. . FIG. 2234(b) is a diagram showing a display screen displayed during the second special symbol variation big hit variation executed in a state where the first hit game is finished and the first probability variation state is set. . During this chance mode, the player is notified only that the number of jackpot games that can be executed until the limit is reached is not the upper limit number (7 times), and the "chance mode" is notified. Players are interested in the number of jackpot games that can be executed before the limit is reached.

Here, a pachinko machine having a game property in which an upper limit is set on the length of an advantageous game period in which a player can execute an advantageous game and the length of the set advantageous game period can be varied. If the length of the remaining period of the advantageous game period is accurately notified when the advantageous game period is set in the machine 10, the player's willingness to play decreases when the advantageous game period of a short period is set. There was a problem that On the other hand, if the set length of the advantageous game period is not notified until the advantageous game period ends, the advantageous game period ends abruptly and the player's willingness to play decreases. I had a problem with it.

Therefore, in the sixty-sixth control example, the type of mode set during the advantageous game period is used as the first information regarding the advantageous game period to roughly inform the player of the length of the advantageous game period. ing. Then, when the "chance mode" is notified as the first information, it is finally determined whether the next jackpot game to be executed is the last jackpot game (final winning game) to be executed during the advantageous game period. It is configured to notify the player before the winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, the player who is playing the game during the advantageous game period can be made to play while expecting that the advantageous game period will continue for a longer time.

In addition, in the sixty-sixth control example, when the length of the advantageous game period is not the longest (upper limit) as the first information, the "chance mode" is commonly notified. A range can be provided for the number of jackpot games executed during the "mode". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining when the "chance mode" is announced. In the sixty-sixth control example, only when the length of the advantageous game period is not the longest (upper limit), the "chance mode" is set. may be configured to set the "chance mode" in a part of cases where the length of is the longest (upper limit). By configuring in this way, even when the "chance mode" is set, it is possible to leave the possibility that the length of the advantageous playing period is the longest (upper limit). It is possible to further suppress the decrease.

The contents of the effects executed during the "chance mode" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 2234(b). "Chance mode" is a mode set during the variable probability state, and in this 66th control example, since it is configured so that the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, during the "chance mode" , Substantially, at least the advantageous game period continues until the next big winning game is executed. In other words, during the "chance mode", there is an effect for informing the player whether or not the next jackpot game to be executed will be the last jackpot game (final winning game) to be executed during the advantageous game period. executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2234(b), in the central part of the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which an icon 806 corresponding to the next big win game is displayed with a horizontal variation. In the display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the player to the effect contents related to the variable display of the icon 806, "If the box has a $, the chance mode continues, and if the box has an END, the chance mode ends." ” is displayed.

In addition, since the diagram shown in FIG. 2234 (b) shows the second special symbol jackpot fluctuation in the probability variation state set after the first hit game ends, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variation ( (indicated by an arrow in the figure) is displayed in the display area Dm2, and "Right-handed" is displayed in the display area Dm4 as a guidance display mode for prompting a right-handed game. Also, "300P" is displayed in the display area Dm10 as the value (points) corresponding to the prize balls won during the first winning game (the prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the variable winning device 65). An icon 805 corresponding to the first-hit game is displayed below the main display area Dm as history information indicating the number of times the big-hit game has been played during the current advantageous game period. Also, the icon 805 is displayed with "300P" added to indicate the number of prize balls won during the first winning game.

Since the diagram shown in FIG. 2234(b) shows the display screen after the end of the first hit game, only the icon 805 corresponding to the first hit game is displayed as history information. If it is in the chance mode after it has been executed three times, icons corresponding to three big winning games are displayed as history information, and each icon is displayed corresponding to the number of winning balls obtained in each big winning game. Modes (points) are attached and displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the number of times of the jackpot game executed until the chance mode ends by grasping the history information displayed in the main display area Dm.

In the effect in which the icon 806 shown in FIG. 2234(b) is variably displayed in the horizontal direction, the effect result is displayed until the next big win game is executed. Specifically, during the special figure fluctuation period until the big hit fluctuation is stopped and displayed, the icon 806 is changed so that the back side of the icon 806 is visible to the player and the front side is visible to the player. It is configured to display the performance result by displaying the characters on the surface in the main display area Dm, which is variably displayed in the left-right direction. When "$" is displayed on the surface of this icon 806, it is notified that the probability variable state is set even after the next big winning game is finished, that is, the next big winning game is not the final winning game. . Then, when 'END' is displayed on the surface of the icon 806, it is notified that the variable probability state is not set after the next big winning game is finished, that is, the next big winning game is the final winning game.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, the effect mode of the effect in which the icon 806 is variably displayed in the horizontal direction is set to one effect mode out of a plurality of effect modes based on the remaining number of times until the limit is reached. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is large, the counterclockwise variation display is more likely to be executed than when the number is small. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the limit will be reached before the effect result of the effect in which the icon 806 is variably displayed in the horizontal direction is displayed. There is an effect that the effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to determine the presentation mode of the presentation in which the icon 806 is variably displayed in the horizontal direction based on other factors. It is also possible to change the mode of presentation that is likely to be set depending on whether it is an even number of times or not. In addition, when the remaining number of times until reaching the limit is a specific number or more (for example, 4 times or more) and when the remaining number of times until reaching the limit is 1, one of the production modes (for example, counterclockwise) is It may be configured so that it is easy to set, and in other cases, the other effect mode (for example, clockwise rotation) is easy to set.

In this case, when the counterclockwise direction effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect in which the icon 806 is variably displayed in the horizontal direction, at that time, the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is a specific number or more (for example, 4 times or more), Alternatively, the player is made aware that there is a high possibility that the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is 1, and then an icon 806 with a "$" attached is displayed as a result of the effect, resulting in a relatively long advantage. It is possible to make the player grasp that the game period has been set. In other words, by combining the effect mode in which the icon 806 is variably displayed in the horizontal direction and the effect result in which the icon 806 is variably displayed in the horizontal direction, the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is predicted to the player. It is possible to increase the production effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2235(a), the effect contents of the jackpot game effect executed during the final winning game in the "chance mode" will be described. FIG. 2235(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of a jackpot game effect executed during the final jackpot (during the final win game) in the chance mode. FIG. 2235(a) is a display screen displaying an effect mode being executed when the final winning game is completed in the "chance mode" in which the fourth big winning game including the first winning game is the final winning game. be.

As shown in FIG. 2235(a), on the lower side of the main display area Dm, an icon corresponding to the first winning game is displayed as history information for indicating the number of times of the big winning game executed during the current "chance mode". 805, an icon 806 corresponding to the second jackpot game, and an icon 807 corresponding to the third jackpot game are displayed. A value corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to 65 is attached and displayed. Specifically, the icons 805 and 806 are marked with "300P" corresponding to 300 prize balls, and the icon 807 is marked with "270P" corresponding to 270 prize balls. In other words, the third jackpot game ends when 18 game balls are entered into the variable prize winning device 65, and the fact that the number of prize balls is "270" is reported as history information.

Here, as described above with reference to FIGS. 2230 and 2231, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, in the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) in which the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open, one round The game is configured to end when winning of one game ball is detected. When the winning of one game ball is detected, the game ball launched after the game ball whose winning is detected can pass through the opening of the specific winning port 65a. That is, at the time when the end condition of the round game is satisfied based on the detection of the winning of the first game ball, it is possible to cause two or more game balls to enter the variable winning device 65 (over winning). It consists of Then, in the 10 rounds of the jackpot game, when the second game ball is awarded to the variable prize winning device 65 (over prize) in each round, the number of prize balls obtained in one jackpot game (variable The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to the prize winning device 65 is configured to be 300 pieces. Further, the easiness of over-winning is different depending on the situation of various nails Q embedded in the right side area of the game board 13.例文帳に追加

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 2235 (a), as history information, not only the number of jackpot games executed during the chance mode, but also the number of prize balls won during each jackpot game (game balls to the variable winning device 65 By displaying a value (point) corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning, the player can grasp whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is likely to aim for over winning. can.

In addition, FIG. 2235(a) shows the point in time when the fourth jackpot game (final win game) in the chance mode is completed. An icon 808 corresponding to (final winning game) is displayed with "END" attached, and displayed with "300P" corresponding to the number of prize balls won in the fourth jackpot game. . In addition, in the display area Dm10, a value (point ) is displayed as “1170P”. In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "chance mode end" are displayed as a guide display mode for indicating that the "chance mode" ends in the current jackpot game.

After the display screen of FIG. 2235(a) is displayed, the display mode for notifying the player of all the number of prize balls acquired during the "chance mode" and the game after the "chance mode" is completed The display screen shown in FIG. 2235(b) is displayed as a display screen including a display mode for guiding the contents to the player. FIG. 2235(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the chance mode end screen displayed during the ending period of the final winning game of the "chance mode".

As shown in FIG. 2229, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example, by executing a right-handed game during a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) in which the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open, It is constructed so that a game ball can enter the ball entrance of. Specifically, by performing a right-handed game, the game ball is configured to enter the first general ball entrance 630a and the second general ball entrance 630b, and the first general ball entrance 630a 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second general ball entrance 630b, one game ball enters the second general ball entrance 630b. It is configured to be paid out as prize balls.

When notifying the number of prize balls won during the chance mode, rather than notifying only the number of prize balls (attacker prize balls) paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the variable prize winning device 65. Also, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the variable prize winning device 65 (the number of general prize balls) is paid out based on the entry of game balls into various general ball entrances. In the case where the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) added to the number of awarded balls is reported, a larger value can be reported as the number of prize balls obtained during one chance mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. However, if the configuration is such that the total number of prize balls is always notified during the chance mode, the number of prize balls based on the winning to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of balls entering each general ball entrance during the jackpot game. There is a problem that the number of prize balls based on the number of prize balls is added and displayed, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of prize balls based on the winning to the variable prize winning device 65 obtained in one big winning game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, until the final winning game in the chance mode ends, the number of prize balls obtained based on the winning of the game balls to the variable prize winning device 65 in each jackpot game is displayed so that the player can comprehend it, and the player can comprehend the total number of prize balls on the end screen of the chance mode. Specifically, the number of general prize balls acquired during the jackpot game period in the chance mode is internally measured, and the measured number of general prize balls and the displayed attacker prize balls are displayed on the chance mode end screen. It is configured to sum up and display the number. With this configuration, when the chance mode ends, the player is notified of the total number of prize balls obtained during the chance mode (the number of prize balls obtained by adding the number of attacker prize balls and the number of general prize balls). At the same time, the player can easily grasp the number of attacker prize balls corresponding to each jackpot game in the chance mode.

As shown in FIG. 2235(b), during the ending period of the final winning game in the chance mode, "1170P" is displayed in the display area Dm10 as a value (point) corresponding to the number of prize balls won by the attacker during the current chance mode. be done. This display area Dm10 is a display area that is continuously formed on the display screen when the chance mode is set, and only the end screen of the chance mode is formed at a different position from the other display screens. ing. Then, a display area Dm11 is newly formed for indicating the value (point) corresponding to the number of general prize balls won during the chance mode, and the value corresponding to the number of prize balls for the attacker and the value corresponding to the number of general prize balls are formed. A display area Dm12 is formed in which a value corresponding to the total number of prize balls is displayed.

In FIG. 2235(b), "1170P" is displayed in the display area Dm10 as a value corresponding to the number of awarded balls for the attacker, "40P" as a value corresponding to the number of normal awarded balls is displayed in the display area Dm11, and the total number of awarded balls is displayed. "1210P" is displayed in the display area Dm12 as the value. In addition, in order to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the total number of prize balls is the sum of the number of attacker's prize balls and the number of general prize balls, it is assumed that "Number of attacker's prize balls + Number of general prize balls = Total number of prize balls A display mode indicating "number" is displayed, and the display area Dm12 is displayed with a frame line that is emphasized more than the display area Dm10 and the display area Dm11.

In addition, on the end screen of the chance mode, as a display mode for guiding the contents of the game to be executed after the end of the chance mode, the main display area Dm displays the characters "Pull back mode", and the sub display area Ds displays is displayed with the words "Enter Victory mode with a jackpot during pullback mode".

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2235(b), the value "40P" corresponding to the total number of general prize balls won during the chance mode (during the advantageous game period) is displayed in the display area Dm11. However, it is also possible to execute an effect of gradually increasing the value displayed in the display area Dm11 and stop increasing the value when it reaches "40P".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example, the total number of prize balls won by the player during a series of advantageous game periods (chance mode) (the number of attacker prize balls and the number of general prize balls is Only the number of prize balls for the attacker out of the total number of prize balls can be notified during the jackpot game, so that the player can easily understand the number of prize balls for the attacker obtained during each jackpot game. In addition, since the total number of prize balls is notified when the chance mode ends, a larger value can be notified as the number of prize balls obtained during the chance mode, thereby enhancing the production effect. can.

In the sixty-sixth control example, only the number of general prize balls obtained during the chance mode and during the jackpot game can be notified as the total number of prize balls. The number of general prize balls obtained during the period during which the jackpot game is not executed during the mode, that is, during the special symbol variation period in the variable probability state may be configured to be able to be notified as the total number of prize balls. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the total number of prize balls obtained during the chance mode.

Next, an effect mode when the chance mode ends and the pullback mode is set will be described with reference to FIG. 2236(a). FIG. 2236(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the variable effect executed during the pullback mode. In this 66th control example, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, and when the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends due to reaching the limit, the time saving state (special symbol low-probability state, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the time saving state is continued until the second special symbol lottery is executed 23 times. In this 66th control example, since it is possible to store a maximum of 4 pieces of pending storage (winning information) of the 2nd special symbol, when the time saving state is set, a maximum of 27 times 2 Special symbol lottery can be executed.

When the big win (1/22) is won in the second special pattern lottery 27 times after the time saving state is set, the advantageous big win game is executed in the low probability state of the special pattern, so until the limit is reached. The remaining number of times is the upper limit, and it shifts to "Victory Mode". Therefore, while the pullback mode is set, a variable performance is executed for suggesting to the player whether or not the second special symbol lottery will win a jackpot (whether or not the game should shift to the victory mode).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2236(a), the display area Dm9 displays "pull-back mode" for indicating that the current game mode is the pull-back mode, indicating that the present is in the time-saving state. A display of "right hitting" for prompting a right hitting game is displayed in the display area Dm4. Since the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the time saving state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variation is variably displayed (indicated by an arrow in the figure) in the display area Dm2.

Also, "1210P" is displayed in the display area 12 as a value (point) corresponding to the total number of prize balls won during the advantageous game period before the pullback mode is set. In addition, the number of executable second special symbol variations (remaining time reduction count) is displayed in the display area Dm20 until the currently set time reduction state ends. In the diagram shown in FIG. 2236(a), since it shows the effect mode in the middle of the 13th second special symbol variation being executed after shifting to the pullback mode, the display area Dm20 shows "remaining 10 times” is displayed. Then, in the central part of the main display area Dm, an icon 830 with a "V" attached and an "X" are attached as a variation effect for suggesting the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. icon 831 and icon 832 with "?" Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "get 'V' and enter victory mode" is displayed as a guide display mode for explaining the effect contents of the variable effect being executed.

When the icon 830 to which "V" is attached is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation performance executed during the pullback mode, the player is informed that the second special symbol variation being executed is the big winning variation. When the icon 831 marked with "x" is stop-displayed, the effect result is for informing that the second special symbol variation under execution is a deviation variation. Further, when the icon 832 with "?" It is a production result that makes it difficult to make it.

Here, the production result of the variation production executed during the pullback mode is "?" explain about When an icon 832 resembling a “?” is statically displayed as a variable effect, the character 801 performs an action of hitting the icon 832 that is statically displayed, and an effect of turning over the icon 832 is executed. Then, by turning over the icon 832, an effect of displaying a display mode with "V" or "X" is executed, thereby notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery. .

That is, as a variable effect (see FIG. 2236(a)) in which each icon is variably displayed, the icon 832 is statically displayed more than the icon 830 or the icon 831 is statically displayed first. It is possible to lengthen the performance period of the variable performance of times. That is, once the icon 832 with "?" It is configured to determine whether or not to execute a variable effect to be stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuous setting of a short performance period as the performance period of the variable performance executed during the time saving state.

Next, an effect mode when a jackpot is won during the pullback mode will be described with reference to FIG. 2236(b). FIG. 2236(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the icon 830 to which "V" is attached is stop-displayed in the variable effect executed during the withdrawal mode. After the variable effect shown in FIG. 2236(a) is executed, when the character 801 causes the icon 830 to be statically displayed, the icon 830 is statically displayed in the center of the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 2236(b). and the word "get" is displayed. Then, the character 801 is displayed in an action mode corresponding to the winning of the jackpot, and in the sub-display area Ds, "Congratulations on the jackpot victory mode" is displayed as a guidance display mode for informing the player that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery. "Plunge in" is displayed. 2236(b) shows a state in which the second special symbol that has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed. The corresponding combination "777" is paused.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2237, the effect mode during the victory mode will be described. As described above, this Victory mode is the longest period (jackpot 7 This is a game mode for indicating that a period during which a turn is executed) is set.

When this victory mode is set, as shown in FIG. 2237(a), "victory mode" is displayed in the display area Dm9, and the character 801 is displayed in an overjoyed action mode. FIG. 2237(a) is a view showing immediately after the first win game is started in the case of entering the victory mode, and "0P" corresponding to the fact that the number of prize balls for the attacker during the current advantageous game period is 0. ” is displayed.

Also, "1210P" is displayed in the display area Dm12 as a value corresponding to the total number of prize balls won during the previous advantageous game period set before the pullback mode was set. In addition, when the victory mode is set, seven jackpot games including the jackpot game (first hit game) to be executed this time are executed during the advantageous game period. Icons 805 to 811 imitating a treasure box corresponding to the jackpot game are displayed below the main display area Dm, and characters "Aim to get MAX 7 boxes 2000P" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this way, the victory mode is the longest period as an advantageous game period (7 jackpots Since this is a game mode that is set only when the period during which is executed) is set, unlike the chance mode described above, the player is notified in advance of the number of jackpot games that can be executed during the advantageous game period. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the advantageous game period set this time is the most advantageous advantageous game period for the player.

During the jackpot game in this victory mode, the icon corresponding to the jackpot game being executed, for example, the figure shown in FIG. Each time a game ball is won, a point icon P1 corresponding to the number of awarded balls is popped out, and each time the point icon P1 is displayed, the number of the attacker's prize balls is added and displayed in the display area Dm10. . Then, during the special symbol fluctuation period in the victory mode, the display mode shown in FIG. Then, a display for notifying the number of award balls of the attacker during the jackpot game is performed.

It should be noted that even during this victory mode, the number of times of the jackpot game executed during one advantageous game period is displayed as history information, and the seven icons 805 shown in FIG. 2237(a). .about.811 are displayed continuously until the victory mode ends. Then, an icon corresponding to an already executed jackpot game, an icon corresponding to a currently executed jackpot game, and an icon corresponding to an unexecuted jackpot game are displayed in different display modes. The icon corresponding to the jackpot game that has already been executed displays a value (points) corresponding to the number of prize balls won by the attacker in the corresponding jackpot game as history information. A point icon P1 is attached to the icon. In addition, the value (points) displayed in the display area Dm12 is not added and displayed until one advantageous game period (the period until the end of the victory mode) ends, and one advantageous game period ends. Until then, a value (point) corresponding to the number of awarded balls of the attacker is added and displayed in the display area Dm10.

After that, when the final winning game in the victory mode ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 2237(b) is displayed. Specifically, the value (the value displayed in the display area Dm10) corresponding to the number of attacker prize balls won during the seven jackpot games executed during the victory mode and the general prize balls won during the victory mode "2198P" is displayed in the display area Dm13 as the total number of prize balls obtained by adding the value corresponding to the number, that is, the value corresponding to the number of general prize balls won during the period of seven jackpot games executed during the victory mode. Is displayed. After that, the value (points) corresponding to the total number of prize balls displayed in the display area Dm13 is added to the value (points) displayed in the display area Dm12.

Next, referring to FIG. 2238, description will be given of the performance contents of the pullback mode that shifts after the victory mode ends. FIG. 2238 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when Heaven Zone is set as the effect mode of the pullback mode. In this 66th control example, as a result of pre-reading of the second special symbol hold information (special figure 2 hold information) that has already been acquired at the time of shifting to the pullback mode, the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive chan (total number of prize balls ), and according to the number of general prize balls won during the consecutive game, the performance mode of the pullback mode can be changed and determined. It is configured to increase the possibility that the hold information (special figure 2 hold) of the acquired second special symbol includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning at the time of shifting to the pullback mode.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which production mode is set when the mode is shifted to the withdrawal mode. As shown in FIG. 2238, when the heaven zone is set, various icons that are variably displayed and the background image are displayed in a display mode imitating heaven, and a character 803 imitating an angel is displayed.

As described above, in the 66th control example, when the game mode (victory mode) in which the number of jackpot games to be executed during the advantageous game period is notified to the player in advance is set, special symbols are set. The game screen during the big winning game is continuously displayed without executing the variation presentation corresponding to the special symbol variation during the advantageous game period when the variation is performed. By constructing in this way, the game period of each jackpot game corresponds to one round game period, and the special symbol fluctuation period between jackpot games corresponds to the interval period between round games. can do.

In addition, in the 66th control example, the victory mode is set as the game mode only when the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is the upper limit, and the player is notified in advance of the number of jackpot games to be executed during the advantageous game period. However, without being limited to this, the player is notified in advance of the number of jackpot games to be executed during the advantageous game period even when the remaining number of times until the limit is reached is the upper limit. may be configured. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, when notifying the player in advance of the number of jackpot games to be executed during the advantageous game period, the total number of jackpot games to be executed during the advantageous game period However, without being limited to this, only a part of the total number of jackpot games executed during the advantageous game period is notified to the player in advance. can be configured to In this case, the number of icons 805 corresponding to the number of times of the jackpot games notified in advance is displayed in the main display area Dm, and before the jackpot games corresponding to the number of displayed icons are completed. , the number of icons displayed on the display screen may be increased.

<Regarding the game state transition in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2239 to 2241, the game state transition in the 66th control example will be described.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 66th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2242 to 2249. FIG. In contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example has a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 that the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has, and the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 is different, and that the range of possible values of the various counters is different. Other elements are the same, and description thereof will be omitted. First, referring to FIG. 2242, the configuration of ROM 202 of MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 2242 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2242, the ROM 202 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 66th control example is different from the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23(a)) in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. , a variation pattern selection table 202ab instead of the variation pattern selection table 202b, and a first winning type selection table 202ad instead of the first winning type selection table 202d. , are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

First, the contents of the first winning random number table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 2244(a). FIG. 2244(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202aa. The difference is that the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is different.

Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is in the range of "0 to 47", and the lottery result "jackpot" is in the range of "48 to 999". In the high-probability state of the special symbol, the lottery result "jackpot" is set to "52 to 999” is defined as a lottery result of “missing”. The possible range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is 1000 types of "0 to 999", and the value determined as a big hit during the low probability state of special symbols is 48 types of "0 to 47". Therefore, the probability that the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the special symbol low probability state is determined to be a big win is 48/1000 (approximately 1/22). In addition, since there are 52 values of "0 to 51" that are determined to be a big hit during the high probability state of the special symbols, the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the low probability state of the special symbols is determined to be a big hit. 52/1000 (approximately 1/19).

Next, with reference to FIG. 2244(b), the contents of the first winning type selection table 202ad will be described. FIG. 2244(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 2244(b), the first hit type selection table 202ad includes a special figure 1 jackpot table 202ad1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. A special figure 2 jackpot table 202ad2 that is referred to when winning is defined. By configuring in this way, according to the type of the special pattern in which the special pattern lottery is executed, the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won can be changed, or the ratio of setting the specific jackpot type can be changed. can be

Here, with reference to FIG. 2245(a), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202ad1 will be described. FIG. 2245(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202ad1. As shown in FIG. 2245(a), when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, one of the four jackpot types is selected regardless of the game state at the time when the jackpot is won. The contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202ad1 are defined as follows.

Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 3", the jackpot type "jackpot A" is in the range of "4 to 6", the jackpot type "jackpot B”, the jackpot type “jackpot C” is defined for “7”, and the jackpot type “jackpot D” is defined for the range “8 to 99”. In other words, since the range that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take is 100 kinds of "0 to 99", when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the big win type "jackpot A" is selected. The percentage is 4%, the percentage of selecting the jackpot type “jackpot B” is 3%, the percentage of selecting the jackpot type “jackpot C” is 1%, and the percentage of selecting the jackpot type “jackpot D” is 92%. Become.

When the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, a 10-round (R) probability variable jackpot game with the number of rounds "10" is executed as a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) for controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65. . After the variable probability big winning game executed based on the setting of this "jackpot A" is completed, the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i are set according to whether or not the limit has been reached. Specifically, when the limit has not been reached (when the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 4), after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "10000", and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is "10000". ” is set. In other words, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to substantially continue until the jackpot is won or other end conditions are satisfied.

On the other hand, when the limit is reached (when the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is 4), "23" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h and "0" is set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends. . That is, it is configured to set a time saving state of 23 times of time saving.

When the jackpot type "jackpot B" is set, a 10-round (R) probability variable jackpot game with the number of rounds "10" is executed as a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) for controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65. . After the variable probability big winning game executed based on the setting of this "jackpot B" is completed, the values of the short time counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i are set according to whether or not the limit is reached. Specifically, when the limit has not been reached (when the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 4), after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "14", and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is "10000". ” is set. That is, the variable probability state set after the end of the jackpot game continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 14 times, and then the second variable probability state is set.

On the other hand, when the limit is reached (when the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is 4), "14" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h and "0" is set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends. . That is, it is configured to set the time saving state of 14 times of the time saving times.

When the jackpot type “jackpot C” is set, a 2-round (R) probability variable jackpot game with the number of rounds “2” is executed as a jackpot game for controlling the opening of the second variable winning device 650 . After the variable probability big winning game executed based on the setting of this "jackpot C" is completed, the values of the short time counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i are set according to whether or not the limit is reached. Specifically, when the limit has not been reached (when the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 4), after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "10000", and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is "10000". ” is set. In other words, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to substantially continue until the jackpot is won or other end conditions are satisfied.

On the other hand, when the limit is reached (when the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is 4), "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h and "0" is set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends. . That is, it is configured to set the normal state.

When the jackpot type “jackpot D” is set, a 2-round (R) probability variable jackpot game with the number of rounds “2” is executed as a jackpot game for opening and controlling the second variable winning device 650 . After the variable probability big winning game executed based on the setting of this "jackpot D" is completed, the values of the short time counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i are set according to whether or not the limit has been reached. Specifically, when the limit has not been reached (when the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 4), after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "0", and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is "10000". ” is set. That is, the second variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is configured to substantially continue until the jackpot is won or other end conditions are satisfied.

On the other hand, when the limit is reached (when the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is 4), "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h and "0" is set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends. . That is, it is configured to set the normal state.

As described above, in the 66th control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot) is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open and control the 10-round probability variable jackpot game. B) is selected so that the ratio is 7%, and the ratio of selecting the jackpot type (jackpot C, jackpot D) in which the two-round probability variable jackpot game that controls the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is selected is 93%. , and the 10-round probability variable jackpot game is configured to be able to acquire more attacker prize balls during the jackpot game than the 2-round probability variable jackpot game, so it can be acquired during the jackpot game. In terms of the number of attacker prize balls, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) in which the 10-round variable jackpot game is executed is the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, and the jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the 2-round variable jackpot game is executed. , jackpot D) is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this 66th control example, as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery, when the limit has not been reached, the following is substantially performed. A probability variable state (next probability variable state) in which the probability variable state continues until a jackpot game is executed, and a probability variable state continues until a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (14 times) is executed, and then a second probability variable state is set. It is configured to be able to set a variable probability state (variable probability state cut by the number of times) and a second variable probability state in which the variable probability state is not set. And, if the probability variable state is set, it will be a normal pattern high probability state (electrical support state), and if the second probability variable state is set, it will be a normal pattern low probability state (non-electrical support state) Become. In the normal pattern high probability state (electric sapo state), it becomes a state in which it is easier to execute the second special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. It becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, when the limit is not reached, the next probability variable state is most advantageous to the player as the game state set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is completed. After entering the game state, the variable probability state of cutting the number of times becomes a state advantageous to the player, and the second variable probability state becomes the most disadvantageous game state to the player. As shown in FIG. 2245 (a), the ratio of selecting the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot C) in which the next probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is 5%, and the jackpot type in which the number of cutting probability variable state is set ( The ratio of selecting the jackpot B) is 3%, and the ratio of selecting the jackpot type (jackpot D) in which the second probability variable state is set is configured to be 92%.

On the other hand, when the limit is reached, the special symbol low probability state is always set after the jackpot game ends. state) or normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set. When the time-saving state is set, it becomes an electric sapo state, and the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, can be easily executed, so that the normal state is set. The jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) in which the time saving state is set are more advantageous to the player than the jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D). Furthermore, among the jackpot types for which the time saving state is set, when "jackpot A" is set, the time saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 23 times (time saving number of times 23 times), "jackpot B" is set, the time saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 14 times (the number of time saving is 14 times). Here, when the period in which the time saving state continues is long, the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state can be increased compared to the case when the time saving state continues. This is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B".

That is, in terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, if the limit has not been reached, "jackpot A" and "jackpot C" are the most advantageous jackpot types for the player, and "jackpot B" is the next. , and "jackpot D" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player. Further, when the limit is reached, "jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, "jackpot B" is the second most advantageous jackpot type, and "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" are the most advantageous to the player. It becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type.

In this way, according to whether or not the limit is reached, the order of the degree of advantage in the game state set after the end of the jackpot game for the set jackpot type is different, so that the set jackpot type and the set jackpot type are different. , and the presence or absence of reaching the limit can be combined to provide the player with a game with a variety of game characteristics, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In addition, in this 66th control example, when the normal state is set and when the second probability variable state is set, the variation of the same mode as the variation effect for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery Since it is constructed so as to execute an effect, a variable effect is executed in which the current game state is difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to predict whether or not the limit will be reached when the jackpot is won.

In addition, in the 66th control example, even if the same jackpot type is set, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is made different depending on whether or not the limit has been reached. Without being limited to this, for example, even if the same jackpot type is set according to whether the limit is reached, the number of round games to be executed can be changed, or the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning The number of prize balls to be paid out is varied based on the game balls entering the device 650, or the game balls enter the first general ball entrance 630a or the second general ball entrance 630b. It may be configured such that the number of awarded balls to be paid out is varied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2245(b), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202ad2 will be described. FIG. 2245(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202ad2. As shown in FIG. 2245(b), when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type (jackpot E) is always set. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is defined as the jackpot type "jackpot E" for the entire range of "0 to 99". That is, since the range that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take is 100 kinds of "0 to 99", when the big winning is won in the second special symbol lottery, the big winning type "big winning E" is selected. The percentage becomes 100%.

When the jackpot type "jackpot E" is set, a 10-round (R) probability variable jackpot game with the number of rounds "10" is executed as a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) for controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65. . After the variable probability big winning game executed based on the setting of this "jackpot E" is completed, the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i are set according to whether or not the limit is reached. Specifically, when the limit has not been reached (when the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 4), after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "10000", and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is "10000". ” is set. In other words, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to substantially continue until the jackpot is won or other end conditions are satisfied.

On the other hand, when the limit is reached (when the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is 4), "23" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h and "0" is set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends. . That is, it is configured to set a time saving state of 23 times of time saving.

In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set in part (4% ratio) when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in the first special symbol lottery The jackpot type (jackpot A) most advantageous to the player and the jackpot type "jackpot E" having the same content among the four types of jackpot types set when the jackpot is won are always set. Therefore, a privilege (jackpot classification) advantageous to the player is more likely to be given to the player when the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot than when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is a special symbol lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 2246, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202ab will be described. FIG. 2246(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202ab. As shown in Figure 2246 (a), in the variation pattern selection table 202ab, as a table corresponding to the gaming state that is set, normal / second probability variation table 202ab1 and probability variation / time reduction table 202ab2 are defined. ing.

First, the contents of the normal/second probability variation table 202ab1 will be described with reference to FIG. 2246(b). FIG. 2246(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal/second probability variation table 202ab1. This normal/second probability variation table 202ab1 has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as a game state, or a second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) Probability state) is a data table that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery executed in a state in which the probability state) is set.

As shown in FIG. 2246 (b), in this 66th control example, when the normal state is set and when the second probability variable state is set, the variation pattern by referring to the same data table is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variable state based on the set fluctuation pattern (variation time).

In addition, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, and "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" are set as the jackpot types, that is, when the second variable winning device 650 is controlled to open, a jackpot game is performed. When it is executed and when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out, it is specified that the variation pattern is determined from the same variation pattern group (variation pattern group for loss variation), 1 When the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are set as the jackpot types, that is, when a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open is executed. defines that the variation pattern is determined from among the variation pattern group for the jackpot variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time only for the big win variation in which "big win A" and "big win B" are set, and the variable winning device 65 is controlled to be opened. Only when the big winning game (10 round probability variable big winning game) is executed, it is possible to display the performance result indicating that the performance result of the variable performance indicates the winning of the big win. Therefore, despite the execution of the variable performance indicating the winning of the jackpot, the jackpot game (two-round probability variable jackpot game) in which only a small number of prize balls can be obtained is executed, and the player's willingness to play. can be suppressed from decreasing.

Furthermore, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set to make it more difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery than the high probability state of the normal symbol, or in the second probability variable state, the upper limit number of the second special symbols that can be reserved and stored. When the second special symbol lottery is executed more times than (four), a variation pattern with a long variation time is set. By configuring in this way, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, it is possible to easily suppress the execution of the second special symbol lottery illegally.

When specifically explaining the contents defined in the normal/second probability variation table 202ab1, as shown in FIG. There, if the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery result) is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 19", the fluctuation pattern "Normal" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as "20 to 169", and "Super" with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, "170 to 198". "SP" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range of . In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery result) is "jackpot C", "jackpot D", or out, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates with respect to the range of "0 to 179" As a pattern, "off" with a variation time of 5 seconds is specified, and for the range of "180 to 198", "various out of reach" with a variation time of 30 to 60 seconds are specified as a variation pattern. .

On the other hand, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery result) is "hit" (jackpot), and after the game state shifts If the number of fluctuations is in the range of "1 to 4", "special" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. is specified, and if the number of fluctuations after the game state shifts is in the range of "5 to", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates with respect to the entire range of "0 to 198" "Long" with a fluctuation time of 200 seconds is defined as a pattern. In addition, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery result) is "out", and the number of fluctuations after the game state shifts If the range is "1 to 4", "special" with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the number of fluctuations after the game state shifts is in the range of "5 to", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" "Long" with a time of 200 seconds is defined.

As described above, in the sixty-sixth control example, when the normal state and the second probability variable state are set, that is, in the game state in which the player is encouraged to play a left-handed game, the game board 13 When a jackpot game that controls the opening of the second variable winning device 650 provided in the left area of is executed, the variation pattern is the same variation pattern group as when the result of the first special symbol lottery is lost. It is configured so as to determine the variation pattern from among them. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variation performance in the same mode as when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, so that the player can interrupt the left-handed game during the execution period of the variation performance. can be made difficult.

Next, with reference to FIG.2246(c), the content of table 202ab2 for probability variation / time reduction is demonstrated. FIG.2246(c) is the figure which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to table 202ab2 for probability variation / time reduction. This probability variation/time reduction table 202ab2 has a probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or a short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as a game state It is a data table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery executed in the set state.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example, when the normal symbol high probability state is set, the game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by the right-handed game is a game method advantageous to the player. Mainly, the second special symbol lottery will be executed. However, even if the high probability state of the normal design is set in the state of acquiring the reservation memory of the first special design (the state of having the special design 1 reservation), or even if the right-handed game is played In spite of this, there may be cases where the launched game ball flows down the left side area and enters the first ball entrance 64, and the first special symbol lottery may be executed at a timing unintended by the player. have a nature.

Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the probability variable state or the time saving state, which is a high probability state of the normal symbol, a short time variation time that is unlikely to interfere with the right-handed game is determined. stipulated. In addition, since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be a lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery is performed during the normal symbol high probability state for the purpose of fraudulent gaming. Since there is no execution, when the first special symbol lottery is executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is configured so that the long fluctuation time is not determined.

In addition, when the variable probability state is set, that is, during the chance mode or during the victory mode, it is a state in which at least the game state advantageous to the player continues until the next big win is won, compared to other game states. Since it is a game state in which the interest in the results of individual special symbol lotteries is reduced, variation in a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is not executed for suggesting the results of individual special symbol lotteries. By determining the pattern, the period until the next big winning game is executed is shortened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily complete a plurality of jackpot games to be executed until the limit is reached in a short period of time.

On the other hand, when the time saving state is set, as shown in FIG. 2236 (a), the withdrawal mode in which the player is interested in the result of the special symbol lottery is set, and the result of each special symbol lottery is set. Since the variable effect for indicating (the effect of variably displaying the icons 830 to 832) is executed, even if the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time is longer than the probability variable state. It is configured so that the pattern is determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2246 (c), the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the current gaming state is "probability variation" (probability variation state), Regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery result), the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "ultra-short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198". is stipulated. In addition, when the current gaming state is "time saving" (time saving state) and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", the fluctuation pattern "Short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined as "100 to 198", "Medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern for the range of "100 to 198", and the lottery result is "out" In some cases, a “short variation” with a variation time of 2 seconds is specified as the variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198” for the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the current game state is "variable" (variable state), regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (lottery result) , "ultra-short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 value. In addition, when the current gaming state is "time saving" (time saving state) and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99", the fluctuation pattern "Short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is defined as "100 to 198", "Medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern for the range of "100 to 198", and the lottery result is "out" In some cases, when the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189", the variation pattern is defined as "short variation" with a variation time of 2 seconds, and in the range of "190 to 198" On the other hand, "medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

Here, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is determined in a state where the time saving state is set, the icon 830 with "V" attached or "x is set in the audio lamp control device 113, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined, as a variation effect during the pullback mode, " After the icon 832 to which ?

Next, with reference to FIG. 2243, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example will be described. FIG. 2243 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2243, the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example has a variable probability setting flag 203m with respect to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 23(b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. , probability variable passage counter 203n, winning prize number counter 203o, remaining ball timer flag 203p, remaining ball timer 203q, probability variable effective flag 203r, probability variable effective timer 203s, ejection number counter 203t are deleted, and probability variable limit counter 203aa and prize winning are newly added. The difference is that a number counter 203ab is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variable probability limit counter 203aa is a counter that is referred to when determining whether the variable probability state reaches the upper limit that is set continuously, and when the normal state is set, the counter value is "7". is set. Then, the value of the counter is decremented by 1 each time a jackpot game is executed, and it is determined whether or not the counter value after the decrement is "0". When it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is "0", a process for setting a special pattern low probability state as the game state after the end of the jackpot game is executed, and the counter value is set to "7" again. ” is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being set continuously without limit, and excessively providing the variable probability state to the player. In addition, since an upper limit can be provided for the number of times the variable probability state is set continuously, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game is finished, like the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example. Even if the jackpot type is specified in , it is possible to prevent the excessive provision of a game advantageous to the player.

The winning number counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that have entered a specific winning hole during a jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 2247(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example will be described. FIG. 2247(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2247(a), the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example is different from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 28(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. The difference is that various tables referred to for executing various effects specific to the pachinko machine 10 in one control example are deleted, and a pullback mode mode selection table 222aa and a second prize ball table 222ab are newly added. ing.

Regarding the slave variation pattern selection table 222a, since the types of various variation patterns determined by the main controller 110 are different from those of the first control example, the variation pattern output from the main controller 110 Although the effect modes defined in the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a are different as the effect modes of the variable effects corresponding to the command types, the same reference numerals are attached and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The pullback mode mode selection table 222aa is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode when the pullback mode is set. When the time saving state is set based on reaching the limit during the variable probability state, the total number of prize balls already acquired (the value of the total number of prize balls counter 223aa), the general already acquired Depending on the number of prize balls (the value of the general prize ball counter 223ac) and the winning information contained in the reserved memory (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special pattern that has already been acquired at the time the pullback mode is set Different production modes are defined for each.

This pulling back mode mode selection table 222aa is executed when it is determined that the state command indicating the change to the time saving state is received in the state command reception process (see S4201A in FIG. 2257) (S4306 in FIG. 2257: Yes) 2258 (S4356A in FIG. 2258).

Here, the contents defined in the withdrawal mode selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2248 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the pullback mode selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 2248, the withdrawal mode selection table 222aa defines two types of withdrawal modes: "Normal zone" and "Heaven zone".

Specifically, if the look-ahead result (the look-ahead result for the winning information included in the special figure 2 reserve) is "hit" and the value of the total number of prize balls counter 223aa is in the range of "1 to 6000", The "normal zone" is defined for the range of "0-89" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and the "heaven zone" is defined for the range of "90-99". In addition, when the value of the total number of prize balls counter 223aa is in the range of "6001 to 10000" and the value of the number of general prize balls counter 223ac is in the range of "1 to 600", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is A "normal zone" is defined for the range of "0 to 79", and a "heaven zone" is defined for the range of "80 to 99". In some cases, the "normal zone" is defined for the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of "0-69", and the "heaven zone" is defined in the range of "70-99". Furthermore, when the value of the total award ball number counter 223aa is in the range of "10001~", regardless of the value of the general award ball number counter 223ac, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". , and a "heaven zone" for the range of "50-99".

On the other hand, the look-ahead result (the look-ahead result for the winning information included in the special figure 2 reserve) is "no win", the value of the total prize ball counter 223aa is in the range of "1 to 8000", and the general prize ball counter 223ac If the value of is in the range of "1 to 450", the "normal zone" for the range of "0 to 94" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, and the range for "95 to 99" When the "heaven zone" is defined and the value of the general prize ball number counter 223ac is in the range of "451 to 700", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89". "Zone" is defined as "Heaven Zone" for the range of "90 to 99", and the value of the general winning ball number counter 223ac is in the range of "701~", the obtained value of the effect counter 223f Regardless, a "heaven zone" is defined.

Further, when the value of the total number of prize balls counter 223aa is in the range of "8001 to 10000" and the value of the general number of prize balls counter 223ac is in the range of "1 to 900", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is A "normal zone" is defined for the range of "0 to 89", and a "heaven zone" is defined for the range of "90 to 99". In some cases, the "heaven zone" is defined regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f obtained. Furthermore, when the value of the total number of prize balls counter 223aa is in the range of "10001~" and the value of the number of general prize balls counter 223ac is in the range of "0 to 700", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is " A "normal zone" is defined for the range of "0 to 19", a "heaven zone" is defined for the range of "20 to 99", and the value of the general winning ball counter 223ac is within the range of "701~". In this case, the "heaven zone" is defined regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, when there is a win in the look-ahead result as a mode of the pull-back mode, that is, when the jackpot is won immediately after the pull-back mode is set, the result is higher than when there is no win in the look-ahead result. is also configured to facilitate the setting of the "paradise zone" as a form of the pullback mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the mode type that is set when shifting to the withdrawal mode.

Furthermore, regardless of the look-ahead result, the more the total number of prize balls that have already been won (the number of prize balls that have been won during the consecutive win mode), the easier it is to set the "heaven zone" as a form of the pullback mode. . In addition, as the number of general prize balls won during the consecutive game mode increases, the "heaven zone" is more likely to be set as a form of the pullback mode.

The second prize ball table 222ab is a data table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins (enters a ball) into various winning holes (entering ball holes) provided in the pachinko machine 10 . In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, various detecting means (various switches 208) detect that a game ball has entered a prize (entering a ball) into various prize-winning holes (ball-entering holes) provided on the game board 13. In this case, a detection signal is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 . Information related to the detection signal output from the various switches 208 is stored in a dedicated buffer (win information buffer), and based on the information stored in the win information buffer, a payout is issued to the payout control device 114. A winning ball number command for indicating the number of winning balls is output, and a winning type command for indicating the type of winning opening (entering ball opening) in which the game ball has won (entered the ball) to the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to output

In other words, to the sound lamp control device 113, it is only necessary to output a command indicating which winning hole (entering ball hole) the game ball has won (entered) each time a win (entered ball) occurs. Yes, it is configured not to output a command indicating the number of prize balls actually paid out to the audio lamp control device 113 . By configuring in this way, the processing load executed by main controller 110 can be reduced.

Then, when receiving the prize type command output from the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether it is a period in which it is necessary to count the number of winning balls. In this case, the winning ball table 222ab is referred to, the number of winning balls paid out is specified based on the received winning type command, and the number of winning balls is counted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to count the number of prize balls on the audio lamp control device 113 side only during the period when the number of prize balls needs to be counted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2249, the contents defined in the winning ball table 222ab will be described. FIG. 2249 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the winning ball table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 2249, the winning ball table 222ab prescribes the winning ball information corresponding to the winning type included in the winning type command. Specifically, the prize ball information "15" is defined for the prize type "first specific prize hole (specific prize hole 65a)", and the prize type "second specific prize hole (second specific prize hole 650a)" is defined. )”, prize ball information “15” is defined, and prize ball information “2” is defined for the prize type “first ball entrance (first ball entrance 64)”. Prize ball information "1" is defined for the type "second ball entrance (second ball entrance 640)", and for the prize type "left general entrance (left general ball entrance 63)" , prize ball information "5" is defined, and prize ball information "10" is defined for the prize type "first general entrance (first general ball entrance 630a)", and the prize type " Prize ball information "1" is defined for "second general ball entrance (second general ball entrance 630b)".

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2250 to 2255, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example will be described. In the 66th control example, in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 2250) is added to the update process (see S221 in FIG. 44). The difference is that the update process (see S221A in FIG. 2252) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 52), and the jackpot control process (see S1804A in FIG. 2253) is executed. are identical. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2250 is a flowchart for showing the details of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 2250, in the timer interrupt process in the sixty-sixth control example, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) of the main controller 110 executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. 2250) in place of the switch read process (see S101 in FIG. 40), and otherwise the same process is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2251, the contents of the switch reading process (S101A) will be described. FIG. 2251 is a flow chart showing the contents of the switch reading process (S101A). In this switch reading process (S101A), the information (winning information) stored in the winning information buffer is read out based on the detection signal from the various switches 208 output to the input/output port 205, and sent to the payout control device 114. A process of storing information for setting a prize ball command to be output to the prize ball payout buffer and a process of setting a prize type command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 are executed.

Specifically, when the switch reading process (S101A) is executed, first, the information stored in the winning information buffer is read (S111A), and it is determined whether or not there is stored information (S112A). If it is determined that there is no (S112A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S112A that there is stored information (S112A: Yes), then the stored information corresponds to the specific winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a). It is determined whether the information is information (S113A), and if it is determined that the information corresponds to a specific winning opening (S113A: Yes), a winning type command corresponding to the specific winning opening type is set (S114A), The process proceeds to S115A. That is, it corresponds to the stored information indicating the winning to the specific winning hole 65a in the winning information buffer, that is, the detection signal output from the ball entering detection sensor 65s (see FIG. 2229) provided in the variable winning device 65. When the information is stored in the winning information buffer, a winning type command corresponding to the specific winning opening 65a (first specific winning opening) is set, and the winning ball detection provided in the second variable winning device 650 is set. When the information corresponding to the detection signal output from the sensor (not shown) is stored in the winning information buffer, the winning type command corresponding to the second specific winning opening 650a (second specific winning opening) is issued. set.

Also, in the process of S113A, if it is determined that the information corresponding to the specific winning hole is not stored (S113A: No), then the stored information is the general entrance (left general entrance 63, first It is determined whether the information corresponds to the general entrance 630a, the second general entrance 630b) (S115A), and if it is determined that the information corresponds to the general entrance (S115A: Yes), winning a prize A prize type command corresponding to the general entrance type is set (S116A), and the process proceeds to S117A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S115A that the information corresponding to the general entrance is not stored (S115A: No), the process of S116A is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S117A.

In the process of S117A, it is determined whether or not the stored information corresponds to other ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640) (S117A). (S117A: Yes), a winning type command corresponding to the type of other winning ball entrance is set (S118A), and the process proceeds to S119A. Also, in the process of S117A, if it is determined that information corresponding to other ball entrances is not stored (S117A: No), the process of S118A is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S119A.

Next, in the process of S119A, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning type specified this time is determined and stored in the prize ball payout buffer (S119A). After that, the stored information read out this time is deleted from the winning information buffer, and this processing ends. The various winning type commands set in the processing of S114A, S116A, and S118A are output in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 51) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is output to the audio ramp controller 113 . Further, in the information stored in the prize ball payout buffer in the process of S119A, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the stored prize ball information is set each time the process of S1801 is executed, and the payout control device 114 output to Then, the prize ball information corresponding to the number of prize balls for which the prize ball payout command is set is deleted from the prize ball payout buffer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2252, the processing contents of the update processing (S221A) will be described. FIG. 2252 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the update processing (S221A). This update process (S221A) sets the low probability state of the special symbol when the value of the probability variation counter 203i is updated to 0 with respect to the update process (see S221 in FIG. 44) of the first control example described above. Processing, processing of setting the low probability state of the normal symbol when the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated to 0, execution of the changed game state when the game state is changed, It is different in that the process for setting the command (state command) which shows the value of the probability variation counter 203i at the time, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2252, when the update process (S221A) is executed, first, the same processes of S501 to S503 as the update process of the first control example (see S221 in FIG. 44) are executed. , When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203i is 0 in the process of S503 (S503: Yes), the low probability state of the special symbol is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S501A), and then the above-described first The processing of S505 to S507, which is the same as the update processing of the control example (see S221 in FIG. 44), is executed. Then, in the processing of S507, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S507: Yes), the normal symbol low probability state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S502A), and the processing of S503A to

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S505 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S505: No), the processes of S506, S507 and S502A are skipped and the process proceeds to S503A. In the processing of S503A, it is determined whether the state (probability state of special symbols, probability state of normal symbols) has been changed by this update process (S503A), and if it is determined that there has been a change (S503A: Yes), probability change In addition to the value of the counter 203i and the value of the time saving counter 203h, a command (state command) indicating the current game state is set (S504A), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the processing of S503A, if it is determined that there is no change in the state (S503A: No), the command (state command) indicating the value of the variable probability counter 203i and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set (S505A), and this End the process. In the process of S504A, the current game state is specified based on the process of S501A, the process of S502A, and the information indicating the game state already stored in the game state storage area 203g. is configured to set the corresponding state command.

Specifically, in the state in which the variable probability state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set in the gaming state storage area 203g, the normal symbol low probability state is set by the processing of S502A. In this case, the second variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2253, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804A) will be described. FIG. 2253 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804A). In the jackpot control process (S1804A), in contrast to the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 52) in the above-described first control example, the processing content executed at the start of the round of the jackpot game and the timing at which the jackpot game ends. The difference is that the process content to be executed and the point that the winning process (S1911A) is executed instead of the winning process (S1911). Other processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the jackpot control process (S1804A) is executed, first, the same S1901 to S1905 processes as the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 52) in the first control example described above are executed, and a new round is performed in the process of S1905. (S1905: Yes), in order to open the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or second specific winning opening 650a) corresponding to this jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 The opening/closing door 65f or the opening/closing door of the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened (S1901A), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1902A), and this process ends.

Also, in the process of S1905, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), S1907 to S1909 same as the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 52) in the first control example described above When the process is executed and it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot in the process of S1909 (S1909: Yes), the jackpot end process (S1903A) is executed and this process is finished. Details of the jackpot ending process (S1903A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot in the process of S1909 (S1909: No), next, the winning process is executed (S1911A), and then the same abnormal process as the first control example described above is performed. Execute (S1912) and terminate this process. Details of the winning process (S1911A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2254, the contents of the jackpot ending process (S1903A) will be described. FIG. 2254 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S1903A). This jackpot end processing (S1903A) is a control processing executed when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing in the jackpot control processing (see S1804A in FIG. 2253), and updates the information on reaching the limit. A process of determining whether or not the limit has been reached based on subsequent information and setting a game state according to whether or not the limit has been reached is executed.

Specifically, when the jackpot end process (S1903A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game of this time is a normal jackpot (S1931A), and when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S1931A: No) , the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1932A), and it is determined whether the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa after the subtraction is 0 (S1933A).

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0 in the processing of S1933A (S1933A: No), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set to "10000" (S1934A), the current jackpot type, the current probability variation limit The value of the time saving counter 203h is determined by referring to the first hit type selection table 202ad using the value of the counter 203aa, and the determined value is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h (S1936A). Then, the state command based on the value of the variable probability counter 203i and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set (S1937A), the big hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S1938A), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1931A, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a normal jackpot (S1931A: Yes), or in the processing of S1933A, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after subtraction is 0 ( S1933A: Yes) sets the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa to 7, and proceeds to the processing of S1936A described above.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example, the information regarding limit arrival is updated at the timing when the jackpot game ends (S1932A), and when it is determined that the condition for reaching the limit is satisfied, (S1933A: Yes), processing (S1934A) of setting the value of the probability variation counter 203i regardless of the jackpot type this time, that is, the processing of setting the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an upper limit to the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game.

It should be noted that, in the present 66th control example, the processing (first processing) to update the information on limit arrival (the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa) and the setting of the high probability state of the special symbol based on the limit arrival are suppressed. and (second process) are executed at the end timing of the jackpot game, but not limited to this, the timing at which the first process is executed and the second process are executed. The timing may be different.

In addition, in this 66th control example, in the jackpot end processing (S1903A), a state command for indicating the set game state, the value of the variable probability counter 203i and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 Although it is configured to output, it is not limited to this, and a command (remaining limit command) for indicating the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is set, and can be configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to let the voice lamp control device 113 side grasp the number of executable jackpot games until the limit is reached.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2255, the process contents of the winning process (S1911A) will be described. FIG. 2255 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning process (S1911A). This winning process (S1911A) is a control process executed in the above-described jackpot control process (see S1804A in FIG. 2253), and is a process for ending the round game when the end condition is established during the round game period. is executed. The pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example in that the end conditions for ending the round game are partially different, and the end of the round game The difference lies in that part of the processing that is executed when the conditions are met is different.

As shown in FIG. 2255, when the prize winning process (S1911A) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2204 as the prize winning process of the first control example (see S1911 in FIG. 55) are executed, and then Then, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203o is 1 or more (S2201A). It is determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S2206), and if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), it means that the conditions for ending the round game have not been established, so this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2201A, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 1 or more (S2201A: Yes), that is, the end condition is established based on the game ball winning into the specific winning hole 65a. If so, in order to end the round game being executed, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2207), the closing command is set (S2208), and the end of one round game is set (S2202A ), the process ends. Also, in the process of S2206, even if it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2206: Yes), the conditions for ending the round game are satisfied, so the processes of S2207, S2208, and S2202A described above are executed, and this process ends. .

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2256 to 2262, the contents of control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example will be described. In this 66th control example, in place of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 59), the command determination process (see S4112A in FIG. 2256) is replaced with the status command reception process (see S4112 in FIG. S4202 reference) instead of state command reception processing (see S4201A of FIG. 2257), jackpot related processing (see S4218 of FIG. 64) instead of jackpot related processing (see S4204 of FIG. 2260) differs in that it executes, Other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the command determination process (S4112A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2256 is a flowchart for showing the contents of the command determination process (S4112A) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2256, in the command determination process (S4112A) in the sixty-sixth control example, the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. ), the status command reception process (S4202) instead of the state command reception process (S4201A), the jackpot related process (S4218) instead of the jackpot related process (S4204A) and the winning type command The difference is that the processing to be executed when receiving is added. Other processing is the same, and the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the command determination process (S4112A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4201: Yes), the status command reception process is performed (S4201A). , the process ends. Details of the status command reception process (S4201A) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4201: No), the command determination processing of the sound ramp control device 113 executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above ( The same processing of S4203 to S4214 as in S4112 of FIG. 59) is executed.

Then, in the processing of S4214, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (S4214: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning type command has been received (S4202A). Here, the winning type command is the various winning ports provided on the game board 13 in the switch reading process (see S101A in FIG. 2251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 2250) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. A command that is set when it is determined that a game ball has entered a game ball (entrance). It is a set command.

If it is determined in the process of S4202A that the winning type command has been received (S4202A: Yes), the winning type process is executed (S4203A), and this process ends. In this prize type processing (S4203A), processing for measuring the number of prize balls paid out during a specific period (jackpot game period, etc.) is executed based on the received prize type command. Details of the winning type process (S4203A) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined that the winning type command has not been received in the processing of S4202A (S4202A: No), then it is determined whether a jackpot related command has been received (S4217), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4217: Yes), big hit related processing is executed (S4204A), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4217, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4219), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2257, the processing contents of the state command reception processing (S4201A) executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example will be described. FIG. 2257 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process (S4201A). In this state command reception process (S4201A), part of the processing contents executed when the game state is changed is changed from the state command reception process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) in the first control example described above. The difference is that Note that the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 2257, when the state command reception process (S4201A) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4303 as the state command reception process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) in the first control example described above are executed, After that, it is determined whether or not the consecutive-chan flag 223ag is set to ON (S4301A). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal state is set after the variable probability state (advantageous playing period) is once set. In the processing of S4301A, if it is determined that the consecutive game flag 223ag is set to ON (S4301A: Yes), the consecutive game flag 223ag is set to OFF (S4302A), and the value of the total winning balls counter 223aa is set to 0. (S4303A), clear the value of the specific prize ball number counter 223ab to 0 (S4304A), clear the value of the general prize ball number counter 223ac to 0 (S4305A), and clear the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223g The game state corresponding to the information indicated by the received state command is set (S4305), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the processing of S4301A to S4305A, it is determined that the consecutive chance mode (advantageous game period in which the chance mode, victory mode, and pullback mode are repeatedly set) has ended, and when the consecutive chance mode ends. , a process for clearing the values of various counters used to ascertain the game status during the consecutive chance mode is executed. By constructing in this way, even when the mode is shifted to the continuous-chan mode a plurality of times, the game situation in each continuous-chan mode can be easily grasped without being affected by the game situation during the past continuous-chan mode. be able to.

In the sixty-sixth control example, the cumulative display of the number of prize balls is executed in units of one consecutive game mode. It may be configured to display the cumulative number of balls. In this case, a new game is displayed within a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times) after the end of the consecutive chance mode. When the consecutive-chan mode is set, the number of prize-balls obtained during the new consecutive-chan mode is added to the cumulative display of the number of prize-balls corresponding to the number of prize-balls obtained during the previous consecutive-chan mode. good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily display a large value as the value of the display mode (point display) corresponding to the number of winning balls displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the production effect is enhanced. can be enhanced. Further, even when the continuous-chan mode ends, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting that the continuous-chan mode will be newly set. In this case, the processing of S4302A to S4305A executed in the state command reception processing (S4201A) in the 66th control example may be executed at the timing when the normal state is set, that is, at the timing when the continuous mode ends. Instead, it may be configured to be executed when it is determined that the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the normal state is set reaches a specific number (50 times).

Next, in the processing of S4302, if it is determined that the state command indicating the change to the normal state has not been received (S4302: No), then whether the state command indicating the change to the time saving state has been received Determined (S4306), if it is determined that it has received a state command indicating a change to the reduced working hours state (S4306: Yes), set a value corresponding to the value of the reduced working hours counter 223n (S4306A), then pull back mode Decision processing is executed (S4307A). Thereafter, a display command indicating a mode corresponding to the mode (zone mode in the pullback mode) determined by the pullback mode determination process (S4307A) is set (S4308A), the process of S4305 is executed, and this process ends. . Details of the pullback mode determination process (S4307A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the state command indicating the change to the time saving state has not been received (S4306: No), then it is determined whether the state command indicating the change to the probability variable state has been received ( S4309A), if it is determined that a state command indicating a change to the variable probability state has been received (S4309A: Yes), then it is determined whether the change (transition) from the second variable probability state to the variable probability state has been made (S4310A) , If it is determined that it has changed from the second probability variable state to the probability variable state (S4310A: Yes), set a display command indicating the chance mode (S4311A), then execute the processing of S4305, and end this processing do. On the other hand, in the process of S4310A, it is not changed from the second probability variable state to the probability variable state, that is, if it is determined that it has been changed from the normal state or the time saving state to the probability variable state (S4310A: No), Victory mode is set (S4312A), then the process of S4305 is executed, and this process ends.

Also, if it is determined that the state command indicating the change to the probability variation state has not been received in the processing of S4309A, that is, if it is determined that the state command indicating the change to the second probability variation state has been received (S4309A), The process of S4305 is executed as it is, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 2258, the contents of the pullback mode determination process (S4307A) will be described. FIG. 2258 is a flow chart showing the details of the withdrawal mode determination process (S4307A). In this withdrawal mode determination process (S4307A), a process for determining the effect mode when the time saving state is set as the game state is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example, as shown in FIG. 2239, when the variable probability state is set, an advantageous game period is set in which the variable probability state and the jackpot game are repeatedly executed until the limit is reached. When the limit is reached during this advantageous game period, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed while the time saving state is set, the advantageous game period is set again. Furthermore, since the time saving state is a state with a low probability of special symbols, in the case of winning a jackpot (jackpot probability 1/22) in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the longest game period as an advantageous game period (advantageous game period that continues until the jackpot game is executed 7 times) is set, so the result of the special symbol lottery is played more than the variable state (during the advantageous game period) in which the next big hit is almost fixed. It becomes a game period that the person pays attention to.

Therefore, in this 66th control example, the aspect of the pullback mode, which is the production aspect set corresponding to the time saving state, is changed to the look-ahead result (winning information stored It is configured to be able to determine based on the result of determining in advance whether information corresponding to winning a jackpot is included in the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the area 223b. Specifically, if it is determined that the information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included as the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold, the information corresponding to the jackpot win is included as the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold. It is configured so that the specific mode (heaven zone) is more likely to be determined than when it is determined that it is not.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to predict whether or not a jackpot will be won during the time-saving state according to the mode of the set pull-back mode. It is possible to enhance the production effect in the mode. Furthermore, in this 66th control example, in addition to the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold at the time when the time saving state is set, the total number of prize balls acquired during the continuous mode (the value of the total prize ball counter 223aa) and the general Based on the number of prize balls (the value of the general prize number counter 223ac), it is possible to determine the mode during the pullback mode.

By configuring in this way, according to the number of prize balls won during the consecutive game mode, it is possible to vary the ratio of setting a specific mode (heaven zone), so that the game that repeatedly executes the pullback mode It is possible to easily provide an unexpected performance to a person.

When the pullback mode determination process (A4307A) is executed, first, the value of the total prize ball counter 223aa is read (S4351A), and then the value of the general prize ball counter 223ac is read (S4352A). Then, the winning information (special figure 2 pending) corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S4353A), and the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (special FIG. 2 pending) is determined (S4354A), and if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the second special symbol (S4354A: Yes), then it corresponds to winning winning in the read winning information The presence or absence of information is specified, that is, it is specified whether there is winning information (jackpot reservation) for winning a jackpot in the special figure 2 reservation (S4355A). That is, in the process of S4355A, prefetching process (preliminary determination process) is executed with respect to special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired when the time saving state is set.

Then, based on the value of each counter read out in S4351A and S4352A and the success/failure information (prefetch result), the pullback mode is determined by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222aa (S4356A), and this process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S4354A, when it is determined that there is no winning information, that is, when it is determined that there is no winning information (special figure 2 pending) corresponding to the second special symbol when the time saving state is set (Process of S4354A: No), the process of S4355A is skipped, the process of S4356A is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2259, the processing contents of the winning type processing (S4203A) will be described. FIG. 2259 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning type process (S4203A). In this winning type processing (S4203A), according to the winning type command received during the jackpot game, first information (information corresponding to the number of attacker winning balls) and second information (information corresponding to the number of general winning balls) , and the process of updating is executed.

Specifically, when the winning type processing (S4203A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the consecutive win flag 223ag is set to ON (S4251A). : No), this process is terminated as it is. In addition, in the processing of S4251A, if it is determined that the consecutive game flag 223ag is set to ON (S4251A: Yes), the game situation set in the sub-state setting area 223g is read (S4252A), and the current game It is determined whether the situation is in the jackpot game (S4253A), and when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S4253A: Yes), next, it is decided whether the current round game period (S4254A).

When it is determined that the current time is the round game period (S4254A: Yes), the point (value) corresponding to the received prize type command is determined by referring to the second prize ball table 222ab (S4255A), and the determined point is added to the corresponding counter values (S4256A), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4254A, if it is determined that the current is not the round game period, then it is determined whether the current is the ending period (S4257A), and if it is determined that it is the ending period (S4257A: Yes ), it is determined whether the prize type command received this time is a prize type command corresponding to the general entrance (first general entrance 630a, second general entrance 630b) (S4258A), and the prize received this time is determined. If it is determined that the type command is a prize type command corresponding to the general entrance (first general entrance 630a, second general entrance 630b) (S4258A: Yes), the value indicated by the determined point , the value of the general prize ball number counter 223ac and the value of the unit general prize ball number counter 223ad (S4259A), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of S4253A, if it is determined that the current is not in the jackpot game (S4253A: No), or if it is determined that the current is not the ending period in the process of S4257A (S4257A: No), or S4258A In the processing of , if it is determined that the prize type command received this time is not a prize type command corresponding to the general entrance (first general entrance 630a, second general entrance 630b) (S4258A: No) , the processing ends without adding the values of the various counters.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2260, the processing contents of the jackpot related processing (S4204A) will be described. FIG. 2260 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot related process (S4204A). In this jackpot related process (S4204A), part of the processing contents executed when a jackpot start command is received, and the number of round The content of the processing executed when a command is received is partially changed, and the ending processing (S4708A) is executed instead of the ending processing (S4715 in FIG. 65) when an ending command is received. They are different in that respect. Note that the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the jackpot related process (S4204A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command is received (S4701), and when it is determined that the jackpot start command is received (S4701: Yes), the consecutive chance flag 223ag is It is determined whether it is set to ON (S4701A), and if it is determined that the consecutive chance flag 223ag is not set to ON (S4701A: No), the current jackpot type is "jackpot C" or "jackpot D". (S4702A).

Then, in the processing of S4702A, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is "jackpot C" or "jackpot D" (S4702A: Yes), the jackpot game in which the opening control of the second variable winning device 650 is executed is started, the jackpot display mode for continuing left-handed hitting is determined (S4703A), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing ends. In addition, by setting the display jackpot start command including the jackpot display mode determined in the processing of S4703A, the character "left hit" is displayed in the display area Dm4 formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

In addition, in the processing of S4702, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not "jackpot C" or "jackpot D" (S4702A: No), that is, the jackpot game in which the opening control of the variable winning device 65 is executed If it is started, the jackpot display mode for executing right-handed hitting is determined (S4704A), the consecutive winning flag 223ag is set to ON (S4705A), and the value of the unit general winning ball number counter is cleared to 0 (S4706A). , S4702 are executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701A, when it is determined that the consecutive game flag 223ag is set to ON (S4701A: Yes), a jackpot start process during consecutive game is executed (S4707A), and this process ends. The detailed content of the continuous-chance jackpot start process (S4707A) executed in the process of S4707A will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4709), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4709 : Yes), it is determined whether the consecutive chance flag 223ag is set to ON (S4708A), and if it is determined that the consecutive chance flag 223ag is set to ON (S4708A: Yes), the number of rounds of the jackpot game is determined. This process ends without displaying. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous chan flag 223ag is not set to ON (S4708A: No), since it is not a jackpot game in the continuous chan mode, the display round is based on the number of rounds included in the received round number command. A number command is set (S4710), and this processing ends.

In the process of S4709, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714). Yes), ending processing is executed (S4709A), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S4714 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2261, the processing contents of the continuous-chance jackpot start processing (S4707A) will be described. FIG. 2261 is a flow chart showing the details of the process for starting a jackpot during consecutive games (S4707A). In this continuous-chang big-hit start process (S4707A), a process for setting the effect mode of the big-hit game production corresponding to the big-hit game executed during the continuous-chan mode is executed.

Specifically, when the jackpot start process (S4707A) is executed, first, based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is read (S4731A). A jackpot display mode for continuing hitting is determined (S4732A), and it is determined whether or not the gaming state read in the processing of S4731A is a time saving state (S4733A). Then, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S4733A: No), it is determined whether the mode (chance mode, victory mode) in which the big hit game is executed this time has already been announced (S4734A), and has been announced. If it is determined that there is (S4734A: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4737A), and this process ends. In other words, when the second and subsequent jackpot games are started after the continuous chan mode is set, the chance mode or the victory mode is set at the start timing of the jackpot games executed in the past. A new process is executed that does not notify the mode. By constructing in this way, when a plurality of big winning games are executed during one advantageous game period, the player is easily made to think that one big winning game is continuously executed. be able to.

In the processing of S4734A, if it is determined that the mode notification has not been made (S4734A: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable variable limit counter 223ae is 7 (S4735A), and it is determined that it is not 7. If so (S4735A: No), the length of the advantageous game period is not the upper limit, so the jackpot display mode for indicating the entry into the chance mode is determined (S4736A), the processing of S4737A is executed, and this processing is executed. finish. In addition, when it is determined to be 7 in the processing of S4735A (S4735A: Yes), since the length of the advantageous game period is the upper limit, the jackpot display mode for indicating entry into the victory mode is determined (S4739A ), the process of S4737A is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the ending process (S4709A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2262 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S4709A). In this ending process (S4709A), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game to be ended this time is a jackpot game executed in a mode other than the consecutive chance mode, and the jackpot game is in the consecutive chance mode and the advantageous game period ends. It is determined whether or not it is, and processing for setting the ending display mode according to the result of each determination is executed.

<Regarding another example of the 66th control example>
Next, another example of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above will be described. First, another configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2263 is a diagram showing another configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2229, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixty-sixth control example described above is provided with a first general ball entry hole 630a, a second general ball entry hole 630b, and a specific winning hole 65a in the right area. It is configured so that a game ball that has entered a (ball entrance) cannot win a prize (enter a ball) into another winning entrance (ball entrance).

That is, for one game ball, during a specific period (jackpot game period), winning (entering a ball) to a winning hole (entering ball) where a prize ball acquired based on winning (entering a ball) can be displayed It was configured so that the maximum number was once. The pachinko machine 10 having the game board 13 configured in this manner can prevent the player from being given excessive benefits (prize balls), but provides the player with a game that is unexpected. I had a difficult problem.

On the other hand, this example is different in that a plurality of benefits can be given to one game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

Furthermore, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example described above, instead of constantly displaying on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 all the number of prize balls acquired during the specific period, during the round game (the 1 period) displays the number of attacker prize balls given based on the winning to the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a), and the general ball opening during the ending period (second period) after the end of the round game The number of general prize balls given based on the number of balls entering (the first general ball entrance 630a, the second general ball entrance 630b), and the total number of prize balls that is the sum of the number of attacker prize balls and the number of general prize balls In the pachinko machine 10 configured to display the number, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many general prize balls are won during the period in which the number of general prize balls is not displayed, so the second period is provided. The value of the number of general winning balls displayed in , and the value of the total number of winning balls can be made more interesting.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2263, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this example will be specifically described. In this example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2229) of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 66th control example, the first general ball entrance 630a (10 prize balls) is placed on the most downstream side of the right area. provided, the point that the second general ball entrance 630b (one prize ball) is provided on the upstream side of the right area, the point that the second general ball entrance 630b can be passed through, and the second general entrance The difference is that the variable winning device 65 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided at positions where the game ball that has passed through the ball entrance 630b can win (enter the ball). Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 2263, in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in this example, game balls shot to the right area pass through the through gate 67 and the second general ball entrance 630b at a ratio of about 1:1. All the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 and about 20% of the game balls that have passed through the second ball entrance 630b can flow down on the open/close door 65f of the variable winning device 65. It is

Since the configuration of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the 66th control example described above, a detailed description will be omitted. A game ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a. Here, the second general ball entrance 630b of the pachinko machine 10 in this example has the same structure as the through gate 67, that is, the opening width is formed to a size (approximately 15 mm) through which one game ball can pass. When a detection means (proximity sensor etc.) not shown detects a game ball passing through the second general ball entrance 630b, the main It is configured to output a detection signal to the control device 110 .

Of the game balls discharged from the opening/closing door 65f and the game balls passing through the second general ball entrance 630b, most of the game balls that did not reach the opening/closing door 65f face the electric accessory 640a. When the electric accessory 640a is in the guided state (protruding state), the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a moves down the electric accessory 640a in the direction of the second ball entrance 640 (right in the figure). downward direction) and enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Here, in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, even if the normal symbol lottery wins, the electric accessory 640a is displaced to the induction state (protruding state) only for a short time by the normal symbol winning game to be executed. Therefore, before the game ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a is displaced to the restricted state (buried state), and the second ball entrance 640 It is configured so that a game ball cannot enter into it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the second special symbol lottery even if a right-handed game is executed in a game state (for example, normal state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set. can. Then, the game ball that has flowed down for a short time on the electric accessory 640a enters the first out port 66a and is discharged to the outside of the game board 13 by executing the normal game for a short time. be.

In addition, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the regulated state (buried state), the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a passes through the electric accessory 640a, and two of the three balls are the first out hole. 66a, and the remaining one ball flows down toward the first general ball entrance 630a. It is configured to enter the first general ball entrance 630a at a rate of one ball per second.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in this example, when a right-handed game is performed in a normal pattern low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state), and 150 game balls are fired to the right region, 75 game balls pass through the second general ball entrance 630b, and first, 75 prize balls (1 prize ball×75) are provided. Of the 150 game balls, 50 balls flow down toward the first general ball entrance 630a, 5 of which enter the first general ball entrance 630a and 50 prize balls (prize balls 10×5) are provided. That is, when a right-handed game is performed in a normal pattern low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state), the possession ball gradually decreases without acquiring the right to execute the special symbol lottery ( Since 125 prize balls are paid out for 150 shots, the game is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state), some of the game balls that have reached the electric accessory 640a enter the second ball entrance 640, and one prize ball is given. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in which the right to execute the second special symbol lottery can be obtained without significantly reducing the number of balls in hand, so that the game method is advantageous to the player.

As described above, according to another example of the 66th control example, one game ball fired by operating the operating means can be entered into a plurality of ball entering means. , it is possible to easily provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

In addition, instead of constantly displaying all the number of prize balls won during the specific period (during the jackpot game) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, during the round game (first period), the specific winning opening ( Displays the number of attacker prize balls given based on the winning to the specific winning opening 65a), and in the ending period (second period) after the end of the round game, the general ball opening (first general ball opening 630a, A pachinko configured to display the number of general prize balls given based on the balls entering the second general ball entrance 630b) and the total number of prize balls obtained by adding the number of attacker prize balls and the number of general prize balls. In the machine 10, it is possible to win both an attacker prize ball and a general prize ball with one game ball shot during a specific period. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many general prize balls have been won, the player is more interested in the value of the general number of prize balls displayed in the second period and the value of the total number of prize balls. can have.

In addition, in this example, the ball entry means (general ball entrance) through which the general prize balls are paid out is configured so that the game ball can pass, so that one game ball enters a plurality of ball entry means. Although it is configured to be possible, it is not limited to this, and may be configured so that game balls can pass through the ball entry means (specific winning hole) through which the attacker's prize balls are paid out. Furthermore, in this another example, one game ball is configured to be able to enter a maximum of two ball entering means, but it is not limited to this, and a ball can be entered into three or more ball entering means. It may be configured to obtain In addition, in this another example, in order to make it possible to obtain a prize ball multiple times with one game ball, a part of the ball entry means that pays out the prize ball is configured so that the game ball can pass, but this is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a special winning hole may be provided, and when a game ball is entered into the special winning hole, both an attacker prize ball and a general prize ball may be awarded. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to easily provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

<Another example of effect in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 2264, another example of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above will be described. In the above-described 66th control example, as shown in FIG. 2235(b), the number of general prize balls is configured not to be notified during the advantageous game period including at least the jackpot round game period, and the jackpot when the advantageous game period ends. In the ending period of the game (the ending period of the jackpot game reaching the limit (final jackpot game)), the total number of acquired general prize balls is notified at once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a larger value than in the case of notifying the number of general prize balls acquired each time the general prize balls are paid out, so that a display mode with an impact on the player can be provided. could be displayed.

On the other hand, in this example of production, in the ending period of the jackpot game when the advantageous game period ends, in addition to the total number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period, general balls entered during the advantageous game period The difference is that the effect of notifying the number of game balls that have entered the mouth is executable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2234, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm11 is made different from the sixty-sixth control example described above. Other display elements are the same, and the same display elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Specifically, during the chance mode (during the advantageous game period), four game balls entered the first general ball entrance 630a, and a total of 40 prize balls were paid out. point icons Pa to Pd are displayed in the display area Dm11. By configuring in this way, the normal ball entrance (first general ball entrance) during the chance mode (during the advantageous game period) is It is also possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the number of game balls entered into 630a).

In addition, in this example of effect, at the end timing of the advantageous game period, the number of game balls that entered the general ball entrance (first general ball entrance 630a) during the chance mode (during the advantageous game period) is notified. Although the possible display modes are configured to be collectively displayed, the point icons Pa, Pb, Pc, and Pd may be configured to be displayed gradually in order without being limited to this. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect in which the number of point icons displayed in the display area Dm11 gradually increases. It is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to grasp the number to execute the performance in which he is interested for a longer period.

<First Modification of Sixty-sixth Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the 66th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2265 to 2275. FIG. In the sixty-sixth control example described above, the prize balls (all prize balls) won by the player during the advantageous game period are combined with the prize balls (attacker prize balls) obtained based on winning to the variable prize winning device 65 and the first Prize balls (general prize balls) obtained based on the balls entering the general ball entrance 630a and the second general ball entrance 630b are separately counted and managed, and during the jackpot game in the advantageous game period, only the number of attacker prize balls By displaying , it is possible to inform the player that many prize balls have been obtained by notifying the total number of prize balls at the end of the advantageous game period while allowing the player to easily understand the number of prize balls obtained by the jackpot game. was configured to

Furthermore, according to the acquisition status of the prize balls (general prize balls) that were not displayed during the advantageous game period, the effect mode of the time saving state (retraction mode) set after the end of the advantageous game period is changed. It was configured to be able to provide an unexpected production.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, an upper limit is set for the total number of winning balls that can be obtained during the consecutive game mode period in which the advantageous game period is repeatedly set, and the player is notified based on the attacker winning after reaching the upper limit. It is configured to be able to give an advantageous privilege. By constructing in this way, it is possible to set an upper limit to the number of prize balls that can be given to a player during one consecutive chance mode, so that the player is prevented from playing games that are excessively advantageous to the player. can be done.

In addition, since there is a period in which part of the total number of prize balls (general number of prize balls) is not notified to the player during the continuous mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the upper limit is reached. can. Furthermore, even after the total number of prize balls reaches the upper limit, a privilege can be given based on the winning of the attacker, so that the player's willingness to play to win the privilege can be suppressed. can be done.

In addition, since the number of benefits to be granted can be changed according to the timing when the total number of prize balls reaches the upper limit and the timing when the advantageous playing period ends, it is possible to determine when the upper limit is reached. A player can be interested.

<Regarding the effect content in the first modified example of the 66th control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 2265 and 2266, among the various effects executed in the first modified example, the effect content different from that of the 66th control example described above will be described. FIG. 2265 is a diagram showing the effect mode when the total number of prize balls reaches the upper limit (restricted state) during the victory mode, and FIG. FIG. 2266 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the advantageous game period, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2265(a), when the restricted state is reached, the main display area Dm displays "Over 10000 P" as a display mode to indicate that the total number of prize balls has reached the upper limit, and the secondary display. In the area Ds, characters of "Upper Limit Reached" are displayed as a guidance display mode for guiding that the restricted state has been reached. Then, as a guidance display mode for guiding the game contents after the upper limit is reached, characters of "chance to get privilege video" are displayed.

If the limit state is reached during the victory mode, it is not possible to acquire new prize balls in the remaining jackpot game until the victory mode ends, so the treasure box icon corresponding to the jackpot game in progress 808 is marked with "45P" corresponding to the number of prize balls at the time when the limit state is reached, and "45P" indicating that no prize balls are given to the treasure box icons 809 to 811 corresponding to the remaining jackpot games. ?” is added (see FIG. 2265(b)). In addition, a display area Dm12a is formed above the display area Dm12, and "STOP" is displayed to indicate that the addition display of prize balls is not performed.

Then, when the final jackpot game (final jackpot game) of the victory mode shown in FIG. 2265 (b) is completed and the mode is shifted to the pullback mode, as shown in FIG. The characters "upper limit reached" are displayed to indicate that the In addition, when the mode is shifted to the pullback mode during the restricted state, it is variably displayed as a presentation mode different from the presentation mode of the pullback mode (see FIG. 2236(a)) that is displayed when the restricted state is not reached. The display modes of various icons 833 and 834 are displayed.

By configuring in this way, by setting a restricted state in which prize balls cannot be obtained, a game effect is executed in which variable display is executed in a manner that is not (hardly) executed when the restricted state is not set. can be provided to

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2267 to 2269, the electrical configuration of this first modification will be described. In contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification has a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has The difference is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and part of the RAM 223 are different. Other elements are the same, and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 2267, the configuration of RAM 203 of MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 2267 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2267, the RAM 203 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example has a set flag 23aaA and a consecutive winning ball number counter 203abA in contrast to the RAM 203 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 66th control example described above. , in that an upper limit flag 203acA is provided, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The set flag 23aaA is a flag for indicating the period during which the player continues to play the right-handed game (during the consecutive game mode), and is set to ON when the game shifts to the right-handed game. Then, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the right-handed game has ended. The setting state of the set flag 23aaaA is referred to when determining the period for measuring the number of awarded balls. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive game mode can be appropriately managed.

The consecutive winning ball number counter 203abA is a counter for measuring the number of winning balls paid out during the consecutive winning game mode. This consecutive winning ball number counter 203abA determines that the set flag 23aaA is set to ON at the timing of detecting the winning of game balls into various winning openings, and the winning type is When it is determined that it is the specific winning hole 65a, the first general ball-entering hole 630a, or the second general ball-entering hole 630b, the value of the corresponding number of winning balls is added. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not the upper limit of the number of prize balls that can be paid out has been reached during the consecutive game mode.

The upper limit flag 203acA is a flag for indicating that the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive game mode has reached the upper limit, and is turned on when the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive game mode reaches the upper limit. is set to When the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON, even if it is detected that game balls enter various winning holes, the payout of prize balls based on the winning is prohibited. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of prize balls to be paid out during the consecutive game mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 2268(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 2268(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 2268(a), the ROM 222 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example is different from the ROM 222 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above in that a privilege grant table 222aaA is added. are different.

Privilege giving table 222aaA, when selecting the production mode (production mode during pullback mode) of the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) that is executed after the total number of prize balls reaches the upper limit during the consecutive chance mode In the data table to be referred to, if the chance mode or the victory mode is set before the pullback mode is set, that is, the time saving state is set based on reaching the limit during the variable probability state , the total number of prize balls already acquired (the value of the total number of prize balls counter 223aa), the number of general prize balls already acquired (the value of the general number of prize balls counter 223ac), and the point at which the withdrawal mode is set. A different presentation mode is defined according to the result of prefetching for the winning information included in the reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved) of the acquired second special symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2269, the contents defined in the privilege provision table 222aaA will be described. FIG. 2269 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the privilege provision table 222aaA. As shown in FIG. 2269, the privilege grant table 222aaA has different aspects of production in correspondence with the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the time the pullback mode is set and the value of the acquired production counter 223f Aspects are defined.

Specifically, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained by the success/failure determination is “big win” is given in the range of “0 to 49”, and given to the range of “50 to 79”. If the mode "V + fish" is in the range of "80 to 99", the grant mode "V + turtle" is defined, and the value of the effect counter 223f acquired when the success/failure determination is "off" is "0 to 89". for the range of ", the grant mode "x" for the range of "90 to 94", the grant mode "x + fish" for the range "95 to 99", the grant mode "x + Turtle” is defined.

Returning to FIG. 2268(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 2268(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 2268(b), the RAM 223 of the first modified example differs from the RAM 223 of the 66th control example described above in that a secondary upper limit flag 223aaA is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The secondary upper limit flag 223aaA is a flag for indicating that the payout of prize balls is prohibited by the main controller 110 (that the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON). is set to on when a command is output to indicate that The setting state of the secondary upper limit flag 223aaaA is referred to when determining the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation.

<Regarding control processing in the first modification of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2270 to 2275, processing contents of various control processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example will be described. First, control processing executed by main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2270 to 2272. FIG. This first modified example differs from the above-described 66th control example in that a control process for setting an upper limit on the payout of prize balls is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 2270, the contents of the switch reading process (S151A) will be described. FIG. 2270 is a flow chart showing the contents of the switch reading process (S151A). This switch reading process (S151A) differs from the switch reading process (S101A in FIG. 2251) in the above-described 66th control example in that a process for determining whether the set flag 203aaA is set to ON is executed. However, other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the switch read processing (S151A) is executed, first, the same processing of S111A to S118A as the switch read processing (S101A in FIG. 2251) in the 66th control example described above is executed, and then the set flag 203aaa is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S131A), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S131A: Yes), the set prize ball determination process is executed (S132A), the process of S120A is executed, and this process exit. If it is determined in the process of S131A that the set flag 203aaA is not set to ON (S131A: No), S119A and S120A, which are the same as the switch reading process (S101A in FIG. 2251) in the 66th control example described above, , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2271, the processing contents of the set prize ball determination processing (S151A) will be described. FIG. 2271 is a flow chart showing the details of the set prize ball determination process (S151A). This set prize ball determination process (S151A) is performed when it is determined that the set flag 203aaa is set to ON in the above-described switch reading process (see S151A in FIG. 2270), that is, when the current mode is the consecutive game mode. A process for determining whether or not to execute the payout of prize balls is executed when it is determined.

When the set prize ball determination process (S151A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON (S201A), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S201A: No) , it is determined whether the stored information this time is the specific winning hole 65a and the right general ball hole (first general ball hole 630a, second general ball hole 630b) (S202A), and the stored information this time is the specific winning hole. If it is determined that the opening 65a is the right general ball entrance (first general ball entrance 630a, second general ball entrance 630b) (S202A: Yes), the prize ball corresponding to the prize type to be targeted this time The number is added to the value of the consecutive winning ball number counter 203abA (S203A), and it is determined whether the value of the consecutive winning ball number counter 203abA after the addition is 10000 or more (S204A).

Then, when it is determined that the value of the consecutive winning ball number counter 203abA is 10000 or more (S204A: Yes), the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON (S206A), the upper limit reaching command is set (S207A), The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize is determined, stored in the prize ball payout buffer (S205A), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201A, if it is determined that the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON (S201A: Yes), the stored information this time is the specific winning opening 65a, the right general entrance (first general entrance) 630a, second general ball entrance 630b) (S208A), the stored information this time is the specific winning hole 65a, the right general ball entrance (first general ball entrance 630a, second general ball entrance) 630b) (S208A: Yes), this processing ends without storing the number of prize balls in the prize ball payout buffer. Also, in the processing of S208A, if it is determined that the stored information this time is not the specific prize winning opening 65a and the right general ball opening (the first general ball opening 630a, the second general ball opening 630b) (S208A: No ), the process of S205A is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2272, the processing contents of the update processing (S251A) will be described. FIG. 2272 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the update processing (S251A). This update process (S251A) is different from the update process (see S221A in FIG. 2252) in the above-described 66th control example in that the processing content to be executed when the time saving state ends is different. Other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the update process (S251A) is executed, first, the same processes of S501 to S502A as the update process (see S221A in FIG. 2252) in the 66th control example described above are executed. After completing the process of S502A, it is determined whether the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON (S551A), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S551A: Yes), the upper limit flag 203acA is turned OFF set (S552A), set the upper limit release command (S553A), set the set flag 203aaA to OFF (S554A), clear the value of the winning ball number counter 203abA during consecutive wins to 0 (S555A), and then The processing of S503A to S505A, which is the same as the update processing (see S221A in FIG. 2252) in the 66th control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

That is, in the first modification, since the upper limit is set for the payout of the prize balls during the continuous mode, at the timing when the continuous mode ends, that is, at the timing when the time saving state ends, various elements related to the setting of the upper limit It is configured so that information initialization processing (S551A to S555A) is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their willingness to play due to restrictions on the payout of prize balls despite the completion of the continuous-chance mode.

In addition, in the first modification, when the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive game mode reaches the upper limit, until the consecutive game mode ends, a specific winning (specific winning opening 65a, first general ball entrance 630a, second general ball entrance 630b), but it is also possible to prohibit the payout of prize balls for all winnings. It may be configured such that the types of prizes for which payout is prohibited are changed in the middle.

Also, the period during which the payout of prize balls is prohibited may be the period until the advantageous game period is set again after winning the jackpot in the pullback mode, instead of the period until the consecutive game mode ends. By configuring in this way, even after the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive game mode reaches the upper limit, it is possible to obtain further prize balls by continuing the consecutive game mode. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play the game, who is trying to win many prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2273 to 2275, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the 66th control example will be described. The control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example is different from the control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 66th control example. , Command judgment processing (S4112A) instead of executing command judgment processing (S4132A), and the processing contents for determining the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation are different. are different. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process (S4132A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2273 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S4132A). This command determination process (S4132A) is the same as the command determination process (S4112A) of the sixty-sixth control example, except that a process that is executed when an upper limit-related command (upper limit reach command, upper limit release command) is received is added. They are different in that respect. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the command determination process (S4132A) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4204A as the command determination process (S4112A) of the 66th control example described above are executed. Then, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received in the process of S4217 (S4217: No), then it is determined whether the upper limit related command (maximum reach command, upper limit release command) has been received (S4261A) , if it is determined that it has been received (S4261A: Yes), upper limit-related processing is executed (S4262A), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2274, the contents of the upper limit related process (S4262A) will be described. FIG. 2274 is a flowchart showing details of the upper limit related process (S4262A). In this upper limit related process (S4262A), a process for managing information about a period during which the payout of prize balls is prohibited is executed by main controller 110. FIG.

When the upper limit related process (S4262A) is executed, it is first determined whether the command received this time is an upper limit reaching command (S4271A). The flag 223aaA is set to ON (S4272A), and then it is determined whether an upper limit release command has been received (S4273A). Also, in the process of S4271A, if it is determined that the upper limit reaching command has not been received (S4271A: No), the process of S4272A is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4273A.

Then, if it is determined in S4273A that the upper limit cancellation command has been received (S4273A: Yes), the secondary upper limit flag 223aaaA is set to OFF (S4274A), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the command for removing the upper limit has not been received (S4273A: No), the processing ends. In this way, when main controller 110 changes the setting state of upper limit flag 203acA, voice lamp control device 113 changes the setting state of secondary upper limit flag 223aaA based on the reception of the upper limit related command. By configuring as possible, it is possible to suppress display of a display mode (point icon) corresponding to the payout of prize balls even if a prize type command corresponding to a prize in which no prize balls are paid out is received. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2275, the processing contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting processing (S4907A) will be described. Figure 2275 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S4907A). In this special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907A), when the second special symbol variation is executed in a state where the secondary upper limit flag 223aaaA is set, to determine the effect mode that can give benefits to the player process is executed.

Specifically, when the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the secondary upper limit flag 223aaaA is set to ON (S5101A), and it is determined that it is set to ON If so (S5101A: Yes), the grant mode (privilege mode) is determined by referring to the privilege grant table 222aaA (S5102A), and the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command corresponds to the determined grant mode (privilege mode). A presentation mode is determined (S5103A), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5104A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101A, if it is determined that the secondary upper limit flag 223aaA is not set to ON (S5101A: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5105A), Execute the process and terminate this process.

<Second Modification of Sixty-sixth Control Example>
Next, a second modification of the sixty-sixth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 2276 to 2291. FIG. In the first modification of the sixty-sixth control example described above, an upper limit is set for the total number of winning balls that can be obtained during the continuous game mode period in which the advantageous game period is repeatedly set, and the player wins based on the attacker winning after reaching the upper limit. By constructing so that a privilege advantageous to the player can be given, an upper limit is set on the number of prize balls that can be given to the player during one consecutive chance mode, and the excessively advantageous game for the player is suppressed. It was configured as

By providing a period in which a part of the total number of prize balls (the number of general prize balls) is not notified to the player during the consecutive chan mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the upper limit is reached. It was configured as Furthermore, even after the total number of prize balls reaches the upper limit, by giving a privilege based on the winning of the attacker, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's desire to play the game to acquire the privilege. It was configured as

On the other hand, in the second modification of the 66th control example, when the number of prize balls acquired during the continuous mode period reaches the upper limit, the remaining period of the advantageous game period being executed (until the limit is reached) The jackpot winning probability in the time-saving state after the end of the advantageous game period can be changed according to the number of attacker winning prizes generated in the remaining period) and the number of general entering balls.

In this way, as a privilege that can be granted after the number of prize balls paid out during a specific period (continuous game mode) reaches the upper limit, a privilege that changes the probability of a big win can be granted. By configuring in this way, unlike the privilege (privilege related to performance) granted in the first modified example of the 66th control example described above, it is possible to grant a privilege that affects the actual game result. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

That is, in the second modified example of the 66th control example, in the first period (advantageous game period) during the specific period (continuous play mode), the first situation (situation where the number of prize balls can be added) in which information can be updated The second situation (situation where the number of prize balls has reached the upper limit) in which the information cannot be updated is set after the first period (advantageous game period) ends. In the second period (pull-back mode (time-saving state)), it is configured such that a privilege (next jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is likely to be given.

With this configuration, even if the payout of prize balls in one advantageous game period reaches the upper limit, the attacker can continue to win and the general ball can enter during the advantageous game period. Since it is possible to easily set the advantageous game period (make it easy to continue the consecutive game mode), the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

<Regarding the contents of the effect in the second modified example of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2276 and 2277, the contents of characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 2276(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode during the pullback mode which is executed in a state where the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive game mode has not reached the upper limit, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a display screen displayed when the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous game period in the Chan mode reaches the upper limit. In addition, FIG. 2277(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode executed during the advantageous game period (during the jackpot game) after reaching the upper limit, and FIG. 2277(b) shows the end of the advantageous game period after reaching the upper limit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when

First, as shown in FIG. 2276(a), in the normal pull-back mode, the character 801 destroys the box 830h in the central part of the main display area Dm to perform a variable effect aiming to obtain the V-icon 830. . Here, when the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win, a performance mode in which the character 801 destroys the box 830h is set, and then a performance result of getting the V-icon 830 is displayed to notify the winning of the big win. Variation production is executed so as to do.

On the other hand, when the corresponding special symbol lottery is lost, a performance mode in which the character 801 cannot destroy the box 830h is set, and the variable performance corresponding to the next special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final variation of the pullback mode (the final variation of the time saving state) is out, an effect of abandoning the destruction of the box 830h is executed, and then the end of the pullback mode is indicated. A variable effect in which the display screen is displayed is executed.

Then, below the display area Dm20 indicating the number of times of short remaining time, a display area Dm21 is formed for indicating the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot during the current pullback mode, and in the example shown in FIG. ” is displayed. A display area Dm15 for showing the strength (LV) of the character 801 and a display area Dm16 for showing the items equipped by the character 801 are formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 2276(a). , the rabbit LV "1" and the item "wood stick" are displayed.

Since the mode of the character 801 displayed in the main display area Dm is configured to be set according to the contents of the above-described "LV" and "item", the normal display mode ( A character 801 (display mode corresponding to LV1) is equipped with an item 801b that resembles a wooden stick, and the box 830h is destroyed.

Here, in the second modification, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the withdrawal mode (during the time saving state) can be changed according to the game result executed during the advantageous game period. In the diagram shown in FIG. 2276(a), "1/22" is set as the jackpot probability. The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is "66%".

In other words, the presently set jackpot probability can be suggested to the player by the display mode displayed during the withdrawal mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player who aims to win a big win in the pullback mode interested in the contents of various effects executed during the pullback mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2276(b), when the number of prize balls reaches the upper limit during the advantageous game period, the characters "10000P breakthrough!" The display area Ds displays a guidance display mode of "raise the rabbit LV during the rest of the victory mode", and a display area Dm15 for showing the rabbit LV is formed. This rabbit LV has an initial value of "LV1", and a level-up lottery is executed according to the number of winning prizes of the attacker after reaching the upper limit, and based on the result of the level-up lottery, the maximum is raised to "LV4".

During the advantageous game period after reaching the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 2277(a), an effect showing the increase of the rabbit LV is executed in the main display area Dm, and winning the LV up lottery executed based on the winning of the attacker. In this case, the level-up rabbit LV is displayed in the display area Dm15, and the character 801 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the current rabbit LV. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the game contents related to the rabbit LV, characters of "The higher the LV, the higher the success rate of pulling back" are displayed. As in the first modified example described above, even in the second modified example, even if the attacker wins after reaching the upper limit, prize balls are not paid out, so prize balls are not paid out when the upper limit is reached. is displayed in Dm12a.

After that, when the advantageous game period ends and the mode shifts to the pullback mode, as shown in FIG. A production is performed to suggest the probability.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modification of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2278 to 2283, the electrical configuration of this second modification will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the 66th control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 that the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 has, and the voice The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 is different. Other elements are the same, and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 2278, the configuration of ROM 202 of MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 2278 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2278, the ROM 202 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example replaces the ROM 202 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example of the 66th control example with the first winning random number table 202aaa The difference is that a first hit random number table 202aaB is provided, and that a probability information selection table 222abB is provided. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The first winning random number table 202aaB is a data table referred to when determining the result of the special symbol lottery. In this second modification, as the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, four stages of jackpot probability (range of the value of the first hit random number counter to be determined jackpot) is defined, determined probability information The data table corresponding to is referred to, and the determination of the jackpot winning is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2280, the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202aaB will be described. FIG. 2280 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202aaB. As shown in FIG. 2280, in the low probability state of special symbols, the probability information is "LV1", the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is the range of "0 to 47". "Big win", probability information is "LV2", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired is in the range of "0 to 49", the lottery result "big hit", probability information is "LV3" On the other hand, if the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 65", the lottery result "jackpot" is obtained, and if the probability information is "LV4", the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is A lottery result "jackpot" is defined for each value in the range of "0 to 99".

In other words, the higher the "LV" indicated by the probability information is, the more the special symbol lottery is executed with reference to the data table that is more likely to be determined as a big hit.

The probability information selection table 202abB is a data table that is referred to when determining the probability information. , or the number of game balls entered into the second general ball entrance 630b.

Here, the contents defined in the probability information selection table 202abB will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2281 is a diagram schematically showing contents defined in the probability information selection table 202abB. As shown in FIG. 2281, when the value of the post-upper limit specific winning counter 7203abB is "~10", the probability information "LV1" is defined regardless of the value of the post-upper limit general entry counter 203acB. When the value of the specific prize winning counter 7203abB is "11 to 20", the probability information "LV1" is set to the value of the post-upper limit general entry counter 203acB in the range of "~20". The probability information "LV2" is defined for the range of the value of "21-".

Further, when the value of the post-upper limit specific winning counter 203abB is "21 to 40", the probability information "LV3" is set to the post-upper limit general prize winning counter 203acB with respect to the range of "~20". When the value of the ball entry counter 203acB is in the range of "21-", the probability information "LV4" is defined, and when the value of the post-upper limit specific winning counter 7203abB is "41-", the post-upper limit general ball entry counter 203acB. The probability information “LV4” is defined regardless of the value of .

The probability information determined here is stored in the probability information storage area 203aaB and referred to in the special symbol lottery executed in the low probability state of the special symbols. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery jackpot probability can be changed according to the game content (game ball winning situation) after reaching the upper limit, so that the player is motivated to play the game even after reaching the upper limit. can be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2281, the probability of winning a jackpot can be increased when the game ball is entered into each winning hole after reaching the upper limit. can be done.

First, referring to FIG. 2279, the configuration of RAM 203 of MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 2279 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2279, the RAM 203 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example is different from the RAM 203 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example of the 66th control example described above, with the probability information storage area 203aaB and the upper limit The difference is that a specific prize winning counter 203abB and a post-upper limit general ball entry counter 203acB are provided, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The probability information storage area 203aaB is a data area for temporarily storing probability information (LV) determined by referring to the probability information selection table 202abB. The probability information determined when the time saving state is set is stored. Then, when determining the result of the special symbol lottery, the stored information is changed to the initial value (LV1) when the state is shifted to the normal state.

The post-upper limit specific winning counter 203abB is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that have won into the specific winning hole 65a while the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON. The value of the post-upper limit specific winning counter 203abB is referred to when determining the probability information with reference to the probability information selection table 202abB. Then, it is cleared after determining new probability information.

The post-upper limit general ball entry counter 203acB is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the general ball entrance with the upper limit flag 203acA set to ON. The value of the post-upper limit general entry counter 203acB is referred to when determining the probability information with reference to the probability information selection table 202abB. Then, it is cleared after determining new probability information.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 2282(a). FIG. 2282(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2278, the ROM 222 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example has a character level selection table 222aaB, an item selection table 222aaB, and an item selection The difference is that a table 222abB is provided, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The character level selection table 222aaB is a data table that is referred to when determining the mode of the character 801 in the pullback mode, and is included in the command output from the main controller 110 that indicates the value of the post-upper limit specific winning counter 203abB. A different mode (rabbit LV) is defined based on the information and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f.

The item selection table 222abB is a data table referred to when determining the type of item equipped by the character 801 in the pullback mode, and defines different items corresponding to the number of general prize balls obtained after reaching the upper limit. there is

Returning to FIG. 2282(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 2282(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second modification. As shown in FIG. 2282(b), the RAM 223 of the second modified example is different from the RAM 223 of the first modified example of the sixty-sixth control example described above in that the specific winning opening counter 223aaB after the secondary upper limit and the continuation rate storage table 223abB is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The sub-upper limit specific winning opening counter 223aaB is a counter that is incremented based on the information included in the command output from the main controller 110 and indicating the value of the after upper limit specific winning counter 203abB. By grasping the value of the secondary upper limit specific winning opening counter 223aaB, the sound lamp control device 113 side can execute an effect corresponding to the value of the after upper limit specific winning counter 203abB.

The continuation rate storage table 223abB is a data area that temporarily stores the variable mode determined with reference to the character selection table 222aaB and the continuation rate display mode specified based on the determined variable mode.

<Regarding control processing in the second modification of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2284 to 2292, processing contents of various control processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described. First, control processing executed by main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2284 to 2287. FIG. In the second modified example, in place of the set prize ball determination process (see S132A in FIG. 2271) in the first modified example of the 66th control example described above, the set prize ball determination process (S171A in FIG. 2284) is performed. The update process (see S251A in FIG. 2272) instead of the update process (S271A in FIG. 2286) is executed, and the special symbol jackpot determination for executing the special symbol lottery based on the set probability information The difference is that processing (see S208A in FIG. 2285) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 2284, the processing contents of the set prize ball determination processing (S171A) will be described. FIG. 2284 is a flow chart showing the details of the set prize ball determination process (S171A). In this set prize ball determination process (S171A), the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON with respect to the set prize ball determination process (see S151A in FIG. 2271) of the first modification described above. The stored information is the specific winning hole 65a and the right general ball hole (first general ball hole 630a, second general ball hole 630b). are different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the set prize ball determination process (S171A) is executed, first, the same processes of S201A to S208A as the set prize ball determination process (see S151A in FIG. 2271) of the first modification described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S208A, if it is determined that the stored information this time is the specific winning hole 65a and the right side general ball hole (first general ball hole 630a, second general ball hole 630b) (S208A: Yes ), the value corresponding to the post-upper limit counter (post-upper limit specific winning counter 7203abB, post-upper limit general entry counter 203acB) is added (S261A), and the post-upper limit counter (post-upper limit specific winning counter 7203abB, post-upper limit general entry counter 203acB) is added (S261A). A post-upper-limit command indicating the ball counter 203acB) is set (S262A), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2285, the processing contents of the special symbol jackpot determination processing (S209A) will be described. FIG. 2285 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol jackpot determination processing (S209A). In this special symbol jackpot determination process (S209A), the probability information (LV) stored in the probability information storage area 203aaB is changed to the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 42) in the first modification described above. The difference is that the reading process is executed (S301A), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202aaB using the read probability information (S302A). The same reference numerals are assigned to the processing contents, and the description thereof is omitted. Thus, even in a situation where a low probability state of special symbols is set, a special symbol lottery with different big win probabilities can be executed.

Next, the processing contents of the update processing (S271A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2286 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S271A). This update process (S271A) is different from the update process (see S251A in FIG. 2272) in the first modification of the sixty-sixth control example described above. The difference is that time processing (S571A) is executed, but the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2287, the processing contents of the state change processing (S571A) will be described. FIG. 2287 is a flow chart showing the contents of the state change processing (S571A). In this state change process (S571A), a process for changing the jackpot winning probability is executed when the game state is changed.

Specifically, when the state change process (S571A) is executed, first, the game state after the change is specified (S581A), and it is determined whether it has changed to the time saving state (S582A), and the time saving state is changed. If it is determined that it has been changed (S582A: Yes), then it is determined whether the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON (S583A). In the processing of S583A, if it is determined that the upper limit flag 203acA is set to ON (S583A: Yes), the value of the post-upper limit counter (post-upper limit specific winning counter 7203abB, post-upper limit general ball entry counter 203acB) is acquired. (S584A), probability information is determined by referring to the probability information selection table 202abB using the values of the obtained post-upper limit counters (post-upper limit specific winning counter 7203abB, post-upper limit general entry counter 203acB) (S585A). The probability information is stored in the probability information storage area 203aaB (S586A), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S583A that the upper limit flag 203acA is not set to ON (S583A: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S582A, if it is determined that there is no change to the time-saving state (S582A: No), then it is determined whether it has changed to the normal state (S587A), and it is determined that it has changed to the normal state If so (S587A: Yes), the value of the post-upper limit counter (post-upper limit specific winning counter 7203abB, post-upper limit general ball entry counter 203acB) is cleared to 0 (S588A), and the probability corresponding to LV1 is stored in the probability information storage area 203aaB. The information is stored (S589A), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S587A, if it is determined that the change to the normal state has not been made (S587A: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2288 to 2292, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the 66th control example will be described. The control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification is executed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the 66th control example described above. 2288 instead of the state command reception process (S4201A), and the pullback mode determination process (see S4307A of FIG. 2258) instead of the pullback mode determination process (FIG. 2290). S4362A) is replaced with upper limit related processing (see S4252A in FIG. 2274), and upper limit related processing (S4291A in FIG. 2291) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 2288, the contents of the status command reception process (S4241A) will be described. FIG. 2288 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process (S4241A). In this state command reception process (S4241A), when it is determined that the continuous channel flag 223ag is set to ON (S4301A : Yes), the difference is that the processing at the end of the consecutive game (S4361A) is executed, and the other processing contents are the same.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2289, the processing contents of the process at the end of the consecutive game (S4361A) will be described. FIG. 2289 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the processing at the end of consecutive games (S4361A). In this consecutive-chan end processing (S4361A), based on the completion of the consecutive-chan mode, a process for clearing the flags and counter values used to determine the effect situation during the consecutive-chan mode is executed. .

Specifically, when the continuous game end processing (S4361A) is executed, first, the processing of S4302A to S4305A of the above-described state command reception processing (S4201A in FIG. The value of 223acB is cleared to 0 (S4371A), the information in the continuity rate storage table 233abB is cleared (S4372A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 2290, the contents of the pullback mode determination process (S4362A) will be described. FIG. 2290 is a flow chart showing the details of the withdrawal mode determination process (S4362A). This pullback mode determination process (S4362A) differs from the pullback mode determination process (S4307A in FIG. 2258) in the above-described first modification in that the process content for determining the effect mode during the pullback mode is different. is different.

Specifically, when the withdrawal mode determination process (S4362A) is executed, first, the value of the general prize ball counter 223ac is read (S4381A), and the item selection table is displayed using the read value of the general prize ball counter 223ac. 222abB to determine the item mode (S4382A), read the character level information stored in the continuation rate storage table 223abB (S4383A), and select the effect mode corresponding to the read character level and the determined item mode. Determine (S4384A), determine the continuation rate corresponding to the determined effect mode (S4385A), store information indicating the determined continuation rate in the continuation rate storage table 223abB (S4386A), and display for indicating the determined mode. command is set (S4387A), and this process ends.

That is, in the second modified example, when the withdrawal mode is set without notifying the player of the number of balls entering the general ball entrance after reaching the upper limit, the number of balls entering the general ball entrance after reaching the upper limit is set. It is configured to determine the item mode according to the number of incoming balls. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which item will be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2291, the contents of the upper limit related process (S4291A) will be described. FIG. 2291 is a flowchart showing details of the upper limit related process (S4291A). This upper limit related process (S4291A) differs from the above upper limit related process (see S4252A in FIG. 2274) in that a process to be executed when a post-upper limit command is received is added.

Specifically, when the upper limit related process (S4291A) is executed, it is first determined whether the command received this time is the upper limit reaching command (S4271A), and if it is determined that the upper limit reaching command has been received (S4271A : Yes), the secondary upper limit flag 223aaA is set to ON (S4272A), next it is determined whether an upper limit command has been received (S4281A), and if it is determined that an upper limit command has been received (S4281A: Yes), the upper limit A post-command process is executed (S4282A), and the process proceeds to S4273A.

In the processing of S4273A, it is determined whether or not an upper limit cancellation command has been received (S4273A). Also, in the process of S4271A, if it is determined that the upper limit reaching command has not been received (S4271A: No), the process of S4272A is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4281A.

Then, if it is determined in S4273A that the upper limit cancellation command has been received (S4273A: Yes), the secondary upper limit flag 223aaaA is set to OFF (S4274A), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the command for removing the upper limit has not been received (S4273A: No), the processing ends. In this way, when main controller 110 changes the setting state of upper limit flag 203acA, voice lamp control device 113 changes the setting state of secondary upper limit flag 223aaA based on the reception of the upper limit related command. By configuring as possible, it is possible to suppress display of a display mode (point icon) corresponding to the payout of prize balls even if a prize type command corresponding to a prize in which no prize balls are paid out is received. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2292, the processing contents of the post-upper limit command processing (S4282A) will be described. FIG. 2292 is a flowchart showing the details of the post-upper limit command process (S4282A). This post-upper-limit command process (S4282A) is executed when a post-upper-limit command set based on the fact that a game ball wins (enters a ball) into a specific winning hole or a general ball hole after reaching the upper limit is received. A process for raising the rabbit LV is executed.

Specifically, when the post-upper limit command process (S4282A) is executed, first, the winning type corresponding to the received post-upper limit command is specified (S5001A), and it is determined whether the winning type is a specific winning opening ( S5002A), when it is determined that it is a specific winning hole (S5002A: Yes), 1 is added to the sub-upper limit winning counter 223aaB (S5003A), and an effect lottery is executed (S5004A). In the process of S5004A, a lottery is executed to determine whether character level selection is to be executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery executed in the processing of S5004A indicates that the effect is to be executed (S5005A). The character level is determined by reference (S5006A), information corresponding to the determined character level is stored in the continuation rate storage table 223abB (S5007A), and the process proceeds to S5008A.

Also, in the processing of S5002A, if it is determined that the type of winning is not a specific winning opening (S5002A: No), or if it is determined that the effect is not executed in the processing of S5005A (S5005A: No), the processing proceeds to S5008A. to process.

In the process of S5008A, it is determined whether or not the winning type is a general ball entrance (S5008A), and if it is determined to be a general ball entrance (S5008A: Yes), the value of the general prize ball number counter 223ac is incremented by 1. Add (S5009A) and terminate this process.

<Regarding the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example>
Next, a third modified example of the 66th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2293 to 2241. FIG. In the sixty-sixth control example, the first modification of the sixty-sixth control example, and the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example described above, a big hit or a loss is determined as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. When the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, it is constructed so as to win the probability variable jackpot in which the high probability state (probability variable state, second probability variable state) of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game is finished, and the jackpot game is finished. An upper limit (limit) is provided for the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set afterward, and when the limit is reached, the low probability of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game regardless of the kind of the jackpot. You configured the state to be set.

That is, in the 66th control example described above, when the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the game period advantageous to the player (advantageous game period) is continued until the limit is reached. Was. Of the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous game period, the number of prize balls for the attacker is continuously displayed, and at the end of the advantageous game period, the number of prize balls for the attacker plus the number of general prize balls is displayed. It was configured to inform the player of the number of balls.

On the other hand, in the third modification of the 66th control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the state where the variable probability state is established, the gaming state is changed from the variable probability state to the second variable probability. It is configured to shift to the state, and while the big hit variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1 big hit variation) is being executed, the game in the second probability variable state is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, even when one special symbol variation is being executed, the other special symbol lottery can be executed, and the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small winning). In some cases, a small winning game is configured to be executable. That is, in the third modification of the 66th control example, after the period during which the special figure 1 jackpot variation is executed (the period in which the second probability variation state is set), the jackpot based on the special figure 1 jackpot winning The game is constructed so as to be executed continuously, and the period during which the second variable probability state is set and the period during which the big winning game is executed are regarded as a game period advantageous to the player (advantageous game period). It is configured to execute various productions.

In addition, among the prize balls that can be obtained during the advantageous game period, the player is not notified of the prize balls obtained by the small winning game executed during the specific period (second probability variable state period) until the specific period elapses. After a specific period has passed, that is, after the jackpot game is executed, the number of prize balls added up with the prize balls won during the jackpot game can be notified.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example will be briefly described. In the third modification of the 66th control example, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), variable state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), time saving state Four game states of (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) and second variable probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) are provided. And it is configured so that the second probability variable state is the most advantageous game state for the player.

Specifically, when the second probability variable state is set, the variable time (special figure 2 fluctuation time) is set to be shorter than when another game state is set, so that the lottery advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the third modification of this 66th control example, in order to make the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, in the lottery of the second special symbol In part, the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds x 1 time, 0.2 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times). Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, a lot of opportunities are given to enter the game ball into the first specific winning port 65a to win the prize ball, so the first special symbol is provided. It is more advantageous than the lottery of Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the result of the losing lottery in which the first specific prize winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win".

In the lottery of the second special pattern, in addition to the big win, the first specific prize winning port 65a is opened even when the small win is achieved, so that the prize can be obtained in the second probability variable state where the variation time of the second special pattern is short. You can keep increasing the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of the second variable probability state. In a general game machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous game state, but in this control example, the second variable probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide novel game characteristics. .

Furthermore, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the variable display based on the first special symbol lottery and the variable display based on the second special symbol lottery can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). (A so-called simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted). As a result, even when the variable display of one special pattern is being executed, the variable display of the other special pattern can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special patterns can be executed more efficiently. can. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a jackpot or a small hit stop pattern, the other fluctuation display will be the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped with a stop symbol that is out. As a result, during execution of a big win or a small win, the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a win or a small win, and it is possible to prevent the problem that the big win or the small win is started redundantly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2293, various configurations provided in the game area and the flow of game balls shot toward the game area in the third modified example of the 66th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 2293, the game board 13 of the third modification of the 66th control example divides the game area into a left area and a right area by the variable display unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. It is configured to

In the third modified example of the 66th control example, until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate), the shot ball is fouled. The ball is fired with a firing intensity that does not pass through the ball prevention valve 68 . Therefore, the shot ball finally flows back through the shooting channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The foul ball flowing backwards passes through the start position of the launch channel (lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2293) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see figure). ) flows down and is circulated to the upper plate 17 . With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball with a desired launch intensity, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game is played. can be suppressed from interfering with

Next, when the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player does not rotate), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the left side area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (from 81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operating handle 51), the ball is shot with a shooting intensity that makes it flow down the right side area.

In other words, the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example is configured such that it is possible to change the region where the ball flows down based on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. ing. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation handle is operated so that the ball flows down the left area. 51 by adjusting the amount of operation (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), but a game performed by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ) is configured to be performed. With this configuration, while the game state advantageous to the player is set, the player can keep the operating handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees). Therefore, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

Next, the left area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal High probability state of the design), probability variable state (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set is configured as follows. In addition, a big win game state executed when the lottery result of special symbols wins a big win and a small win game state executed when the lottery result of special symbols wins a small win are executed. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time-saving state, and the variable probability state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform a left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left region of the game board 13. The game method is guided to the player by using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81, and when the second variable probability state is set, the ball is thrown down to the left area of the game board 13. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player on the game method so as to play the game. In addition, during the big win game state or the small win game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before winning the winning.

As a guide method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or only when the game method is switched, after switching It may be configured to display the game method. In addition, of the left-handed game and the right-handed game, the game method (left-handed game in this modification) that is easily set for a long period of time is set as the normal game, and when a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured such that the game method is always displayed as guidance, and the guidance display is not performed when the left-handed game is to be played.

In addition, when it is determined that the game is being played in a game method different from the game method that is advantageous to the player, for example, a second probability variable state is set in which the right-handed game is a game method that is advantageous to the player. In this case, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through an area where only the game ball launched by the left-handed game can flow down, a guidance display is performed to make the player perform a game method that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured to With this configuration, when the player is playing a proper game, the guidance display for guiding the game method is not executed, so that the limited display area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be used as a special display area. It is possible to make it easy to use widely as a display area of the variable performance executed based on the result of the pattern lottery. In addition, the display area of the guide display executed when it is determined that the game method other than the game method that is advantageous to the player is being performed is overlapped with the display area of the variable effect, so that the display mode of the variable effect is visible. It is preferable to configure so as to display guidance display so as to make it difficult. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has not played a game method advantageous to the player to grasp an appropriate game method by continuing to pay attention to the display mode of the variable effect.

As in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example, when there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player, the other game method is guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one of the game methods. can do. In other words, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In addition, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the game method to the player, but it is not limited to this. None. As described above, the game method may be notified to the player by not displaying a specific display mode, or may be notified to the player using sound or a lamp.

A through gate 67 and a general prize winning opening 63 are arranged in the left area of the game board 13 . An upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side area can be entered. A lower first ball entrance 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the electric accessory 64a wins the normal pattern (second pattern) lottery. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which it is difficult (impossible) to hit the ball, to an open state (second state) in which it is easy (possible) to hit the ball into the lower first ball inlet 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the state where the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the variation of the special figure 1 is not executed and the jackpot game, When the game ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in the state where the small winning game is not executed), the lottery of special figure 1 is executed. ing. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 serves as a trigger for executing the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state where the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery cannot be newly executed (a state in which the variation of the special figure 1 has already been executed, or a jackpot game or a small hit game is being executed) When the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, the right that the game ball enters (special figure 1 reservation) is granted up to a predetermined number (4). It has storage means for storing.

Therefore, since the player can continue to play the game even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in the third modified example of the 66th control example, only the first special symbol is provided with the storage means for storing the right to which the game ball enters.

80% of the balls that flow down the left side area in the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the balls (8 out of 100 balls) of the balls that are shot enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by structures such as a plurality of nails and windmills so as to form a sphere. Also, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, the ball entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is about 0%, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first ball entrance A ball channel is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter 64b2. That is, the ball is difficult to enter in the order of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be

As described above, the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player the privilege of paying out prize balls in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery for the first special symbol. 4 prize balls are paid out to the player each time one game ball enters. In the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the same number (4 ), but it is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided in the right area of the game board 13 . The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that a lottery for the second special symbol is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. A spherical channel is formed by a nail. Here, balls that do not enter the second ball entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right area.

Details will be described later, but in the third modification of the 66th control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the second special symbol lottery is executed until the lottery result is displayed. A long variation time (10 minutes) is set as the time (variation time), and a short variation time (1 second) is set when the second probability variation state is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but since a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is low. it gets really bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player performs a left-handed game and executes the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second ball entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and about 50% of the balls are fired in a right-handed game. is entered into the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state and the variable probability state are set as the game state, the state is a high-probability state of normal symbols, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of normal symbols for opening the electric accessary 64a, is provided only in the left area, the lower first ball entrance makes it easier for game balls to enter than in the normal state. In order to enter the ball into 64b2, the player is made to play a left-handed game.

On the other hand, in the state where the second probability variable state is set as the game state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time of time (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game (a game advantageous to the player) to perform the right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the 3rd modification of the 66th control example, only the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is configured to win a small hit (winning probability of about 1/2). When winning a small prize, the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small prize game, and 10 points are awarded for each ball that enters the first variable prize winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the second probability variable state is set as the game state, the player continues to execute the right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery aiming at the small winning and the small winning game. , can be executed in succession.

As shown in FIG. 2293, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the bottom of the game area. The second variable prize winning device 650 operates to open the second specific prize winning port 650a so as to open the second specific prize winning port 650a so that the ball can win a prize by operating the rotating door 650f to the front side when a big win is won by the lottery of the special symbols. It is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that the ball that has flowed down in the left area due to the left-handed game and the ball that has flowed down in the right-side area due to the right-handed game can equally enter the ball. Therefore, when a jackpot game in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continued, and the game method is given to the player. can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When a game ball enters the above-described first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 ) is turned on, and the main controller 110 draws a jackpot lottery due to the turn-on of the first ball entrance switch, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) draws a large winning lottery, and the first symbol display device 37B displays the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second ball entrance 640 receives one ball when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings for paying out prize balls. In addition, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the number of winning balls when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 The number of prize balls paid out is set to be the same (4 for both), and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (1) is different, but The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the opening 64b1 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 may be different.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is set to 4, and the number of prize balls in the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2, thereby setting a normal state in which balls are difficult to enter. When the ball is in the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is increased, and the ball is easier to enter when a specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set. Even if balls enter the first ball entrance 64b2 frequently, the player may not receive an excessive number of prize balls. The number of prize balls in the ball entrance 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, a large privilege may be given to the player.

Also, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same number (for example, both are 5). individual).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (lottery of normal symbols) triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 64a is in an open state (allowed state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

Furthermore, on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 65 in the right area, there is provided a general ball entrance 630a into which game balls can be entered at all times. It is arranged so that game balls enter at a rate of one. And it is configured so that the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general ball entrance 630a is five. That is, the player who is executing the right-handed game during the second variable probability state, by executing the right-handed game, the prize ball based on the entry to the second ball entrance 640 and the general ball entrance 630a A game can be played while winning a prize ball based on entry into the first specific prize winning port 65a and a prize ball based on a prize entry into the first specific prize winning port 65a.

As described above, during the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the variable display of the second symbol. , the symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) increases. Furthermore, during the variable probability state or during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 than during the normal state.

As described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, that is, the ball entrance accompanied by the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which a ball is likely to enter according to the set game state, A state (second state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball can be set. In other words, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery is executed), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same, and when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery of winning the jackpot with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) is executed. , When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) when the jackpot is won is set to be different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example instructs the player to set the ball shooting method (game method) to "left-handed (left beating game)” and “right beating (right beating game)”. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2294 to 2297, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example will be described. do. In the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, a special symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol lottery in which the jackpot is won (special figure 1 jackpot variation). By setting the low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of starting, the game state during the variation period in which the special figure 1 jackpot variation is executed can be set to the second probability variation state. there is

Here, with reference to FIG. 2294(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 2294(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the variable probability jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 2294(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "entering the chance zone!!" indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during the period in which the variable probability state and the second variable probability state are set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not be displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set. A game state advantageous to the player (a game state more advantageous than the normal state) is set.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game can be easily understood. can provide.

In addition, a comment "Aim for RUSH!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to aim for setting the second variable probability state. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, characters of "left-handed" are displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to play a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the variable probability state is set. In addition, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, shoots the ball (the ball flowing down the left area) in the left-handed game, and the right-handed Balls shot in the game are also arranged at a winning position (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)), and characters displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game ("left shot", "Right shot"), that is, the game method to be guided during the jackpot game is configured to be varied according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, the game state when winning the jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variable state) in which the left-handed game is guided, it is displayed as a guidance display during the jackpot. ``Left-handed'' is displayed, and when it is determined that the game state (second probability variable state) in which a right-handed game is guided is displayed, ``Right-handed'' is displayed as a guidance display during the big win. . As a result, when a big winning game is executed, it is possible to save the player from having to change the game method.

Also, in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 2294(a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, "777" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (ending screen displayed). is displayed. In addition, "-" is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

In the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example, when the special symbols are not variably displayed even once after the power is turned on, the above-described non-variable display mode is displayed. By displaying this non-variation display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of special symbols).

The third modification of the sixty-sixth control example is configured to display the above-described non-variable display mode, but is not limited to this, and a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating the deviation is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed, and when it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display is performed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display The display mode displayed in the area Dm2 may be configured to be displayed by changing the display mode to the initial display mode or the non-variable display mode.

Next, the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable probability state will be described with reference to FIG. 2294(b). FIG. 2294(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the variable probability state. As shown in FIG. 2294(b), the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is the variable probability state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left) in the sub display area Ds. be.

In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right). Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and a variable display indicating that the first special symbol is being varied is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It should be noted that, even at this point, since the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. , Non-varying display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the 66th control example, a plurality of motion display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the variable probability state, and the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state The action display pattern of the character 811 is configured to be set differently according to the result (whether or not determination result). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol wins the jackpot during the variable probability state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 2294(b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. 2295(a) is executed. A screen appears. FIG. 2295(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display of winning the jackpot is started in the variable probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the game state changes from the variable probability state at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot during the variable probability state is started. It is configured to shift to the second probability variable state.

Therefore, at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the game state moves to an advantageous state (second probability variable state) for the player, so the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the variable display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the production pattern 813 (the display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the game state has changed is stopped. Is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has shifted from the probability variable state to the second probability variable state by stopping and displaying the effect symbol 813 . Further, in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example, the same display mode as the third symbol display mode is used as the effect symbol display mode. It can be made to think that it is the display mode for showing a lottery result.

In the third modification of the present 66th control example, it is possible to execute many small winning games by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the second variable probability state is set. It is configured to be Therefore, at least during the period in which the second variable probability state is set, "Right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate the right-handed game to the player. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Rush into RUSH!! Hit right" is displayed to indicate that the second variable probability state has been set as the game state.

As described above, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol won in the big hit, it is displayed in the main display area Dm. Since the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player can be made to think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the performance symbols.

Here, in the third modification of the present 66th control example, since it does not have a storage means for storing the execution right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 pending), the second probability variation state is set Even when the game ball fired by the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640, the period in which the second special symbol lottery is frequently executed and the second special symbol There is a possibility that a period during which the lottery is executed with an interval may occur. Furthermore, since the probability of winning a small hit by the second special symbol lottery is stipulated to be about 1/2, the result of the second special symbol lottery that is repeatedly executed may continuously win a small prize. There may be cases where it becomes out of place.

That is, the second probability variable state is set during the period during which the special figure 1 jackpot variation is executed, and even if the right-handed game is executed continuously during that period, it is difficult to execute the small hit game on a regular basis. I had a problem. On the other hand, as a game specification of the pachinko machine 10, a storage means capable of storing a predetermined number (for example, 4) of special figure 2 reserves is provided as an upper limit, and the probability of winning a small prize by the second special symbol lottery is about 1. /1 (a small win is won almost every time), there is a problem that an excessive number of prize balls are paid out to the player. In addition, regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the second variable probability state, the game characteristic is such that only a fixed amount of prize balls are paid out, so that more prize balls are tried to be obtained. There is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

On the other hand, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the second variable probability state, a small It is possible to execute a pseudo-small hit production including a hit fluctuation production (pseudo small-hit fluctuation production) and a small-hit game production (pseudo small-hit game production) for indicating that a small-hit game is being executed in a pseudo manner. It consists of By configuring in this way, even if the game specification is such that it is difficult to periodically execute the small winning game, the pseudo small winning performance can be periodically executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the game can be played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2295(b), the display contents in the pseudo small winning effect executed when the second variable probability state is set will be described. FIG. 2295(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the pseudo small winning effect.

According to Figure 2295 (b), in the state in which the second probability variation state is set (during RUSH), in the display area Dm1 to suggest that the first special symbol is fluctuating (during jackpot fluctuation) is displayed, and in the display area Dm2, a variable display mode for suggesting that the second special symbol is being varied is displayed.

In the central part of the main display area Dm, a treasure box 812 is opened as a pseudo performance mode for showing a pseudo winning of a small prize. A pseudo small winning effect is executed in which "V" for indicating is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think that a small winning game will be executed by winning a small winning with the second special symbol during the second variable probability state (during RUSH).

After that, when the pseudo small winning game effect is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 2296(a) is displayed. FIG. 2296(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the pseudo small winning game effect. As shown in FIG. 2296(a), when the pseudo small winning game effect is executed, point icons P1 to P3 corresponding to the number of winning balls obtainable in one small winning game are displayed. In this modification, when the game ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65, which is controlled to open when the actual small winning game is executed, 15 winning balls Since the point icons P1 to P3 are configured to be paid out, a display mode with "15" attached is displayed as a display mode corresponding to 15 prize balls.

Then, in the display area Dm17, "5 times" is displayed as a display mode for indicating the number of times (V times) of the pseudo small winning effect executed during the second variable probability state, and in the display area Dm18, the pseudo small "225P" is displayed as a display mode indicating the total value of the values attached to the point icons P1 displayed during the winning effect, that is, as a display mode indicating the number of pseudo prize balls obtained in the pseudo small winning effect. there is Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "5th small win" are displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the player that the current pseudo small win effect is the fifth pseudo small win effect. there is In addition, the situation in which this pseudo small winning game effect is being executed is actually the situation in which the second special symbol variation is being executed, so as shown in FIG. A variable display mode is displayed to indicate that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the pseudo small hit effect is repeatedly executed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variable state, and the special figure 1 jackpot It is configured to execute a jackpot game (special figure 1 jackpot game) after the end of the fluctuation period. Here, the number of pseudo prize balls displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pseudo small hit effect executed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variable state is the prize balls actually obtained. There was a problem that it was different from the number.

In order to solve this problem, for example, the difference between the number of pseudo prize balls displayed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variable state and the number of prize balls actually obtained is constantly monitored, and a predetermined difference is determined. When such occurs, it is conceivable to carry out correction processing such as prohibiting the execution of the pseudo small winning performance or shortening the execution interval of the pseudo small winning performance. However, in such a solution, during the period in which the second variable probability state is set, by making it appear that the small winning game is executed periodically, the player's desire to play is originally suppressed. There was a problem that it became difficult to achieve the purpose of

On the other hand, in the third modification of the 66th control example, using the effect (jackpot game effect) during the jackpot game that is executed after the second probability change state ends, the special figure 1 in the second probability change state It is configured to execute an effect to eliminate the difference between the number of simulated prize balls displayed during the period of variation of the jackpot and the number of prize balls actually obtained. Specifically, when the number of pseudo prize balls displayed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variable state is larger than the number of prize balls actually obtained, when the jackpot game is executed During the second probability variable state, the number of display modes displayed corresponding to the number of winning balls won during the jackpot game executed as part of the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game is reduced. The total number of prize balls obtained by summing the number of won prize balls and the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is the total number of prize balls displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (the number of pseudo prize balls, It is configured to be the same as the total number of prize balls displayed during the jackpot game).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the number of prize balls actually obtained is larger than the number of pseudo prize balls displayed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variable state, the jackpot game By increasing the number of prize balls shown by the display mode displayed corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game executed as part of the jackpot game effect executed during the second variable state, The total number of prize balls obtained by summing the number of won prize balls and the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is the total number of prize balls displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (the number of pseudo prize balls, It is configured to be the same as the total number of prize balls displayed during the jackpot game).

By configuring in this way, during the second probability variable state, the pseudo small winning performance is periodically executed regardless of the number of actually executed small winning games and the number of prize balls acquired during the small winning game. Even if it is configured as above, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period (the period from the setting of the second probability variable state to the end of the jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is given to the player. It can be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 without giving a sense of discomfort.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2296(b), the number of pseudo prize balls displayed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variable state is the number of prize balls actually obtained (the number of actual prize balls) A description will be given of the performance contents of the jackpot game performance executed when the jackpot game is executed in a state in which there are more. FIG. 2296(b) is a display screen displaying a subtraction mode in which the number of prize balls displayed by the point icon P displayed during the jackpot game is subtracted from the jackpot game effect during the special figure 1 jackpot game. It is a diagram schematically showing the.

As shown in FIG. 2296(b), during the special figure 1 jackpot game after the second variable probability state ends, the display mode Dm17 and the display area Dm18 are formed continuously from the second variable probability state. In FIG. 2296(b), the pseudo small hit is executed 12 times during the previous second variable probability state, and "540P" is displayed as the number of pseudo prize balls. And actually, the number of prize balls obtained by the small winning game during the second probability variable state is 495, which is less than the number of pseudo prize balls, so the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning game is A point icon P1 and a point icon P2 marked with "+?" are displayed as the display mode of the point icons for indicating the points, and further, "10R" is added as a privilege mode for indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time. A point icon Pr is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Congratulations on the 10th round big win" are displayed. When a display mode (subtraction mode) that does not show prize balls is displayed as the point icon P, the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game corresponding to the point icon P (the number of prize balls for the attacker) is displayed in the display area Dm10. , the value displayed in the display area Dm10 at the end of the jackpot game and the value displayed in the display area Dm18 are added together, and the actual value acquired during the second probability variable state The number of prize balls can be matched with the total value of the attacker's prize balls acquired during the jackpot game.

In this way, when the number of actual prize balls is smaller than the number of pseudo prize balls, the point icon for indicating the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is used to eliminate the difference using the jackpot game effect. By configuring so as to change the display mode of , it is possible to execute a big win game effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Although illustration is omitted, if a fraction smaller than one unit (15 prize balls) of the point icon P occurs as a difference between the number of pseudo prize balls and the number of actual prize balls, the point icon P will be displayed. It is configured to display the value of the number of prize balls shown by subtracting it. Specifically, when the fraction is "8", eight point icons P with "14" are displayed, and the point icons P with "14" are displayed. In this case, 14 prize balls are added to the display of the attacker's prize balls displayed in the display area Dm10. With this configuration, the sum of the value displayed in the display area Dm10 and the value displayed in the display area Dm18 at the end of the jackpot game, including fractions, is obtained during the second probability variable state. The number of actual prize balls and the total value of the attacker's prize balls acquired during the jackpot game can be matched.

Next, referring to FIG. 2297 (a), the jackpot game is executed in a state where the number of actual prize balls is larger than the number of pseudo prize balls displayed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variable state. Description will be given of the contents of the big hit game production executed when the game is executed. FIG. 2297(a) is a display screen displaying an addition mode in which the number of prize balls displayed by the point icon P displayed during the jackpot game is added in the jackpot game effect during the special figure 1 jackpot game. It is a diagram schematically showing the.

As shown in FIG. 2297(a), during the special figure 1 jackpot game after the second variable probability state ends, the display mode Dm17 and the display area Dm18 are formed continuously from the second variable probability state. In FIG. 2297(a), the pseudo small hit is executed seven times during the previous second variable probability state, and "315P" is displayed as the number of pseudo prize balls. And actually, the number of prize balls obtained by the small winning game during the second probability variable state is 495, which is more than the number of pseudo prize balls, so the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning game is A point icon P1, a point icon P2, and a point icon P3 to which "+30" is added are displayed as the display mode of the point icon for showing.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Prize ball UP" are displayed. Then, the number of winning balls corresponding to the value (30) displayed by the point icon P is added and displayed in the display area Dm10. In this way, by displaying the point icons P corresponding to the number of prize balls larger than the number of prize balls actually paid out as the attacker's prize balls, the value displayed in the display area Dm10 at the end of the jackpot game, The sum of the value displayed in the display area Dm18 and the value can match the total value of the actual prize balls obtained during the second variable probability state and the attacker's prize balls obtained during the jackpot game. .

If there is a fraction less than one unit (15 prize balls) of the point icon P as the difference between the number of pseudo prize balls and the number of actual prize balls, the value of the number of prize balls indicated by the point icon P is added. configured to display. Specifically, when the fraction is "8", eight point icons P with "16" are displayed, and the point icons P with "16" are displayed. In this case, 16 prize balls are added to the display of the number of prize balls for the attacker displayed in the display area Dm10. With this configuration, the sum of the value displayed in the display area Dm10 and the value displayed in the display area Dm18 at the end of the jackpot game, including fractions, is obtained during the second probability variable state. The number of actual prize balls and the total value of the attacker's prize balls acquired during the jackpot game can be matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2297(b) and FIG. 2298, during the second variable probability state (during pseudo production), the effect contents when executing the actual small winning game effect will be described. In the third modification, basically, in order to make the player think that the small winning game is being periodically executed during the second variable probability state, a pseudo performance (a pseudo small winning performance is periodically executed It is configured to execute the production to be performed).

Here, when it is determined that the execution timing of the pseudo small winning performance and the execution timing of actually executing the small winning game are within a predetermined range, the actual small winning performance is executed instead of the pseudo small winning performance. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when it is time to execute the next pseudo small winning performance as a pseudo performance scenario, the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed and the remaining variation time are specified, and the small winning is won. When the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation is less than 1 second, the execution of the pseudo small winning performance is interrupted and the actual small winning performance is executed in accordance with the start timing of the small winning game. is doing.

By configuring in this way, while maintaining the situation in which the small winning performance is periodically executed in the second variable probability state, the number of times of execution of the pseudo small winning performance (pseudo small winning performance) is increased. Since the number can be reduced, it is possible to suppress a large deviation between the number of simulated prize balls displayed and the number of actual prize balls.

Figure 2297 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the execution of the real small hit effect is determined at the execution timing of the pseudo small hit effect, and Fig. 2298 (a) , It is a diagram showing the effect mode of the real small hit effect. FIG. 2297(b) shows the point in time when the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small winning at the execution timing of the pseudo small winning effect, and the second special symbol is displayed in the display area Dm2. A display mode "341" indicating that a small prize has been won in the lottery is stopped and displayed, and in the central part of the main display area Dm, an effect of trying to open the treasure box 812 is executed, and the characters "Open the treasure box" are displayed. is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "6th small win!?"

After that, when the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 2298(a), 15 prizes are awarded from the treasure box 812 based on the actual entry of the game ball into the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65. A real small win effect is executed in which a point icon P1 to which "+15" corresponding to the award of the ball is displayed is displayed. In addition, the display area Dm17 displays "V times 6" so as to add 1 to the number of executions of the pseudo small winning effect that has already been executed during the second variable probability state, and the sub display area Ds displays "small winning 6". time” is displayed. Furthermore, since the small winning effect executed this time is the real small winning effect, the display area Dm18a is newly displayed, and the number of actual prize balls different from the number of pseudo prize balls is displayed. Since the diagram shown in FIG. 2298(a) shows the state in which the first point icon P1 is displayed in the actual small winning effect, a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is displayed in the display area Dm18a. A certain "15P" is displayed.

It should be noted that when the actual small winning effect shown in FIG. 2298(a) is executed, the display mode shown in the display area Dm18, that is, the display mode corresponding to the number of pseudo prize balls is not added and displayed. Configure. Then, among the number of actual prize balls acquired during the second variable probability state, the number of actual prize balls already reported is stored and managed in an identifiable manner. In other words, in the jackpot game effect executed after the second probability variable state ends, the number of actual prize balls already notified is configured not to be referred to when calculating the difference between the number of pseudo prize balls and the number of actual prize balls. is doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference value from increasing due to the execution of the actual small winning effect.

In this way, in the third modification, the number of prize balls in the small winning game executed during the second variable probability state is configured not to be notified during the period in which the pseudo small winning effect is executed. It is configured so that it can be notified during the period when the winning performance is being executed. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to periodically execute the small winning performance (pseudo small winning performance, real small winning performance) during the second probability variable state, the number of pseudo prize balls (pseudo small winning performance) It is possible to suppress a large divergence between the number of prize balls obtained and displayed in the production) and the number of actual prize balls (the number of prize balls actually obtained in the small winning game). In addition, by making the player grasp the number of prize balls actually obtained during a partial period of the second variable probability state, the player can easily predict the actual number of prize balls obtained during the entire period of the second variable probability state. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2298(b), the effect mode executed during the opening period of the jackpot game (special figure 1 jackpot game) executed after the second variable probability state ends will be described. FIG. 2298(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the opening period of the special figure 1 jackpot game. In FIG. 2298(b), in order to show that the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery has won the jackpot, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed stopped at the combination "777" indicating the jackpot winning, In the central part of the main display area Dm, the characters "RUSH end" are displayed as a display mode for indicating that the second probability variable state has ended, corresponding to the number of times of the small hit production performed during the second probability variable state. As the display mode, "6 small hits" is displayed, and "225P + 45P get" is displayed as the display mode corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained and displayed during the second variable probability state.

On this display screen, not the number of actually executed small winning games, but the total number of executed pseudo small winning performances and real small winning performances is displayed as the number of small winnings, and the number of small winnings is obtained by the pseudo small winning performance. The value corresponding to the number of simulated prize balls displayed (value displayed in Dm18) and the value corresponding to the number of actual prize balls obtained and displayed in the actual small winning effect (value displayed in Dm18a) Is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guidance display mode for guiding the contents of the game to be played later, the characters "The jackpot will start next!! Keep hitting right!!" are displayed. Thus, in the present third modification, the end of the second variable probability state is configured to notify the player using the opening period of the special figure 1 jackpot game. By configuring in this way, there is no need to execute the production (end production) that the second probability variable state ends using the period until the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation ends, so the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation A pseudo production can be executed using the entire period until the end. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity by only preparing an effect scenario corresponding to the variation period of the first special symbol variation as the effect scenario of the pseudo effect.

Then, after the display screen of FIG. 2298(b) is displayed, the remaining opening period is used to display a display mode (starting mode of the jackpot game effect) indicating that the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot game is started. executed.

<Regarding transition of the game state in the third modified example of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 2298, the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example will be described. FIG. 2298 is a schematic diagram showing a method of shifting from one game state to another game state with respect to the four types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example. It is a diagram.

First, a description will be given of how to shift the game state when staying in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). As described above, in the normal state, the frequency of drawing special symbols tends to be higher when playing the game with the left hand than when playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. This is because when the ball is hit left-handed, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the lottery for the first special symbol that is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small win is not drawn. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state only when a big win is achieved. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 2302(a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 2298, in the normal state ST1, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, when the big wins A and C are determined at a rate of 65% in total, after the big win ends, the center of FIG. 2298 It shifts to the definite variable state ST2 shown in . In addition, when the jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal state ST1, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10%, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 2298. . On the other hand, if a jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot (normal state is looped). do).

In the normal state, the game is normally played aiming at the upper first ball entry hole 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second ball entry hole 640. Or, as a result of some of the left-handed balls entering the second ball entrance 640, there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol will result in a big win. In the third modification of the 66th control example, there are three types of jackpots (jackpots E to G) as the jackpot types set when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol. When the jackpots E and F determined by a total ratio of 65% are reached when winning the jackpot of the special pattern, the state shifts to the probability variable state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined by a ratio of 35%, the jackpot ends. The normal state is set again as the later game state (loop the normal state).

In this way, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (jackpot D). When the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big hit in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed. In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, since it is configured to set a variation pattern having a long time (10 minutes) variation time, when the game efficiency is left-handed game Therefore, it is possible to further increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery for the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the normal state.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the variable probability state. As described above, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand tends to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols rather than playing the game with the right hand, so the left hand is more advantageous for the player. becomes. In addition, in the definite variable state, the probability of a special symbol jackpot increases compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the second definite variable state. When the definite variable state ST2 is set, it shifts to the 2nd definite variable state SP1 triggered by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (the special figure 1 jackpot variation starts).

In addition, in the variable probability state, while aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 by hitting to the left as in the normal state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first ball entrance 64b1. will do. That is, during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes easier to execute the lottery for the first special symbol than in the normal state.

In the variable probability state constructed in this manner, a left-handed game is normally performed and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. There is also the possibility of winning a lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a rate of 65% in total when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol, the variable probability state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends, and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the big win G is reached, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big win is finished.

That is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, it is possible to shift to the second variable probability state that is most advantageous to the player, whereas the lottery of the second special symbol is possible. When executed, the possibility of shifting to the second probability change state becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting the right hand in the probability variable state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Next, a description will be given of a game state transition method when staying in the second variable probability state. As described above, in the second variable probability state, unlike the normal state and the variable probability state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter, so by playing the game with the right hand, it is possible to efficiently perform the lottery of the second special symbol. can. Therefore, a right-handed hit is more advantageous for the player than a left-handed hit.

In the third modification of this 66th control example, when the first special symbol jackpot is won in a state where the variable probability state is set (first transition condition), the state where the variable probability state and the time saving state are set (second transition condition) when the jackpot C is won (second transition condition). The second variable probability state is set during variation, and when the second transition condition is established, the second variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the game state (second probability variable state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game. Amusement can be provided.

Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the second probability variable state is set is the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation period, so the period in which the second probability variable state is set is determined in advance. Therefore, the effect to be executed during the second variable probability state can be easily created in advance (at the time of setting the second variable probability state) according to the period in which the second variable probability state is set.

In addition, when the jackpot C is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variable state is set, the second probability variable state can be set both before and after the jackpot game. It is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 2300 to 2308. FIG. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. 1 and part of the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are different. Other elements are the same, and descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 2300 to 2305, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification of the 66th control example will be described. FIG. 2300 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example. As shown in FIG. 2300, the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example is possessed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the above-described first control example. For the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23A), the first winning random number table 202aaC is replaced with the first winning random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202abC is replaced with the variation pattern selection table 202b, and the second winning The difference is that a second win random number table 202acC is provided instead of the random number table 202c, and a first win type selection table 202adC is provided instead of the first win type selection table 202d.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, the range of possible values of the first hit random number counter C1 is changed from 1000 ways of "0 to 999" to 480 ways of "0 to 479", and various other counters are changed. The range of possible values has also changed. It should be noted that the configurations of the various counters only change the range of values that can be taken, and the method of updating the counter values and the usage thereof are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The first winning random number table 202aaC is a data table referred to when determining the result of the special symbol lottery, like the first winning random number table 202a. Here, with reference to FIG. 2301, the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202aaC will be described. FIG. 2301 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202aaC. As shown in FIG. 2301, the first winning random number table 202aaC is associated with the game state (special symbol probability state), the symbol type (special symbol type), and the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1. The lottery result (the result of the special symbol lottery) is defined in advance.

Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the symbol type is the first special symbol, and the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is in the range of "0, 1". , and the lottery result of "missing" is defined for the range of "2 to 479". In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the symbol type is the second special symbol, and the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0, 1", the lottery result "big hit" A lottery result of "small win" is defined for the range of "212-432", and a lottery result of "miss" is defined for the range of "2-211,433-479".

In addition, in the special symbol high probability state, the symbol type is the first special symbol, and the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 5", and the lottery result "jackpot" is A lottery result of “missing” is defined for the range of “6 to 479”. In addition, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the symbol type is the second special symbol, and the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 5", and the lottery result "big win" is A lottery result of "small hit" is defined for the range of "212-432", and a lottery result of "miss" is defined for the range of "6-211,433-479".

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the 66th control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 479. FIG. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the special symbol jackpot. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Thus, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 2, so the probability of winning a special symbol with a big win is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are six values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 6, so the probability of a big win of a special symbol is "1/80".

Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will be a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random numbers "212 to 432" are stored in the first winning random number table 202aaC. ing. Among the total number of random numbers of 480, the total number of small winning random numbers is 221, so the probability of winning a special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Next, the contents of the second winning random number table 202acC will be described with reference to FIG. 2301(b). This second winning random number table 202acC is a data table referred to when determining the result of the normal symbol lottery, like the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(b)) of the first control example described above. . FIG. 2301(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202acC. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 11 random numbers that normally win the design in the low probability state of the normal design as the game state (during the normal state, during the second probability variable state), and the range is "0 to 10”. Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number numbers to be a win is 11, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time-saving state), there are 232 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "0 to 231". Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of winning random numbers is 232, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the random number value that is the win for the normal symbol has a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state for the normal symbol and the high probability state for the normal symbol. It is configured to be installed. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 in the case of winning the normal symbols are also high for the normal symbols with respect to the low probability state of the normal symbols. It is configured such that the probability state is more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2).

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be winning, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the "o" symbol is illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In addition, in the third modified example of the 66th control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2302, details of the first winning type selection table 202adC will be described. The first hit type selection table 202adC is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each jackpot type. It is stipulated with In the pachinko machine 10 of the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example, when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is determined, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning, and the jackpot type selection table 202d are compared, and a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in Figure 2302, for the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", "jackpot A" is defined in association with ing. This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are the "jackpot A", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100).

Then, when "jackpot A" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (probability change flag aaC is set to ON), and the number of times of time saving of 10000 times It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after the "jackpot A" ends, the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the second variable probability state is configured so that it is easier to give an advantageous privilege to the player than the variable probability state, and a plurality of game states Inside, it becomes a game state that is advantageous next to the second probability variable state.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 49" in association with "jackpot B". In this "jackpot B", the same jackpot game as the above-described "jackpot A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the jackpot that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). Game is set. After the end of the "jackpot B", the variable probability flag aaC is set to OFF, and the time-saving counter 203f is set to a different value according to the game state at the time of winning.

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "0", and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if "jackpot B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, whereas if "jackpot B" is won during the time-saving state , A time saving state (100 times) is set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values are the "jackpot B", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot B" is determined. ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Jack B" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds like "Jack A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of special symbols is not set after the jackpot. , a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than “jackpot A”.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 89" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" has two rounds, and is set to a jackpot game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is released. Although details will be described later, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the first attacker (first variable The winning device 65) is configured to be opened, and is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case of winning the "big win C" and the case of winning the "minor win".

By constructing in this way, when a winning game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big winning game or the small winning game is executed. As described above, in the 3rd modification of the 66th control example, during the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, it is configured to be the second probability change state (RUSH state) in which the small hit game can be executed frequently. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the winning game in which the first attacker is released is a small winning game. In other words, by providing a game period in which the player does not want the situation in which the player's most desired jackpot game is normally executed, novel game characteristics can be provided.

After the "jackpot C" is finished, the variable probability flag aaC is set to ON, and the time-saving counter 203f is set to a different value according to the game state at the time of winning. When the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the game state at the time of jackpot winning is the time saving state and the probability variable state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. In other words, if you win the "jackpot C" in the state where the normal state is set, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot C" is won during the probability variable state or the time saving state. If you do, the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot.

In this way, in the game state when the big win is won, even if the same type of big win is made, the game state to be set after the big win is different, so that the player can simply aim to win the big win. Not only that, but also the game state that has been set can be made to pay attention, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, when the second variable probability state is set as the game state, the game state is most advantageous to the player. is set as the first setting condition that the special pattern jackpot variation is started in the state where the variable probability state is set, and the jackpot C is won in the state where the variable probability state and the time saving state are set. It has two second setting conditions. In other words, the degree of expectation (probability) of setting the second variable probability state is configured to vary according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. By constructing in this manner, the player is made to gradually increase the degree of expectation that a game state that is advantageous to the player is set according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 counter values become the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 40% (40/100). The "jackpot C" is one of the jackpot types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the game state when the jackpot is won, it is the only jackpot type that can set the second probability variable state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state set after the jackpot ends, so it is set after the jackpot. In terms of the game state, the jackpot type is more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" has two rounds, and a jackpot game (same as the "jackpot C") that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of the "jackpot D", the variable probability flag aaC is set to OFF, and a value of "0" is set to the time reduction counter 203f. In other words, when the "jackpot C" is won, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Since this "jackpot D" has the same jackpot game content as the above-described "jackpot C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small win game. ing.

After the end of "jackpot D", since it is configured to set the normal state as described above, the variation display (jackpot variation) won in "jackpot D" in the state where the probability variable state is set When executed, the big winning game is executed after frequently performing the small winning game during the big winning variation, and then the normal state is set.

That is, in the second probability variable state (RUSH state) in the case of winning the "jackpot D" in the lottery of the first special symbol, after the "jackpot D" in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set is finished Since the state is set, the player can be made to think that the second probability variable state in which the big winning game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot D", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). The "jackpot D" is one of the jackpot types with fewer rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. becomes. Since the normal state is set after the end of the big win regardless of the game state when the big win is won, the game state to be set after the big win is also disadvantageous. That is, it becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the 66th control example has four jackpot types (“jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special pattern 1). )have. Among them, in the two jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”), a jackpot game is executed with the second attacker (second variable winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, as an opening target, In the other two jackpot types (“jackpot C” and “jackpot D”), a jackpot game is executed with the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the unlock target for the jackpot game.

That is, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, a main jackpot game (“jackpot A”, “jackpot B”) aimed at allowing the player to win a prize ball as a special symbol jackpot, and a game A secondary jackpot game aimed at varying the state and making it difficult for a player to understand whether or not a jackpot has been won (to make it difficult to determine whether a small win game is a big win game "jackpot C", "jackpot D") are configured to be executable.

In addition, in the third modified example of the 66th control example, since it is a game property in which the player can win prize balls not by a big win game but by a small win game, a large amount of prizes are awarded during the big win game. To vary a game state while suppressing discomfort to a player even if it is set to make it difficult to acquire balls (even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the type of jackpot). It is possible to set a jackpot game for the purpose of.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbols, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is defined in association with "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is released. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the "jackpot E" is five, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100).

Then, when the "jackpot E" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag aaC is set to ON), and the number of time reduction times of 10000 times It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of the "jackpot E", the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot E" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the second variable probability state is configured so that it is easier to give an advantageous privilege to the player than the variable probability state, and a plurality of game states Inside, it becomes a game state that is advantageous next to the second probability variable state.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 64" in association with "jackpot F". The number of rounds of this "jackpot F" is two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable prize winning device 65) is released. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values become the "jackpot F". ratio is 60% (60/100).

Then, when "jackpot F" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability change flag aaC is set to ON), and the number of times of time saving of 10000 times It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the "jackpot F" ends, the variable probability state is set until the next jackpot is won.

Since "jackpot F" is one of the jackpot types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Also, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the probability of winning the normal symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state is such that a more advantageous game can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the second variable probability state is configured so that it is easier to give an advantageous privilege to the player than the variable probability state, and a plurality of game states Inside, it becomes a game state that is advantageous next to the second probability variable state.

"Big win G" is associated with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99". This "jackpot G" has two rounds, and is set to a jackpot game in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is released. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values are the "jackpot G", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot G" is determined. ratio is 35% (35/100).

Then, when the "jackpot G" is selected, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, the normal state is set at the end of the jackpot (the variable probability flag aaC is set to off), and the number of time reduction times of 0 is It is set (a value of 0 is set to the time saving counter 203f).

Since "jackpot G" is one of the jackpot types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the game state set after the big win is the normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big win. That is, it becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, in the third modification of the 66th control example, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) In the case of winning the jackpot, the ratio of setting the variable probability flag aaC to on after the jackpot is 65% (65/100) is the same, but the ratio of setting 15 rounds as the jackpot game (special Figure 1 is 50%, special figure 2 is 5%), the ratio of the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) to be opened (50% for special figure 1, 5% for special figure 2), jackpot The ratio of setting a value of 10000 to the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot when the game state at the time of winning is a time saving state, a probability variable state (that is, a high probability state of normal symbols) (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 65%) are configured differently.

In this way, by varying the contents of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot in accordance with the type of the special symbols won in the jackpot, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of game characteristics, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Interest can be improved.

In addition, in the third modified example of the 66th control example, the contents described above are configured to be different according to the type of the special symbol, but this is not restrictive, and only a part of the contents described above are changed. In addition to the contents described above, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 (for example, 7 rounds). Alternatively, the number of rounds to be played may be varied, or the rate at which the variable probability flag aaC is set to ON may be varied.

In addition, on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (for example, an area through which the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the variable probability flag aaC is set to ON after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine configured as above, the probability of the ball passing through the specific area may be made different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Also, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each game state set after the end of the big win may be configured to be different according to the type of the big win.

The probability variation flag aaC is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of special symbols is set, and when set to ON, indicates that the special symbols are in a high probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag aaC is set to ON, as the gaming state, probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or second probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state , normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

This variable probability flag aaC is set to ON at the end of the big win when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot that sets the variable probability state or the second variable probability state after the jackpot ends. Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF.

In addition, in the third modification of the 66th control example, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbols is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the special symbol high probability state is continued until the next big win is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special pattern high probability end condition for ending the special pattern high probability state, the special pattern high probability state (special pattern high probability state) When the number of special symbol variations (the number of special symbol variations) after being set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability variation flag aaC may be set to OFF. In this case, in order to plan the timing to set the probability variation flag aaC to OFF, a storage means for pre-storing the number of special figure fluctuations as a special figure high probability end condition, and a special figure high probability state after being set Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end discrimination for determining whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means It is sufficient to provide means and .

In addition, a plurality of special figure high probability end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high probability state, fluctuation of the second special symbol Special figure 2 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of times, lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the special pattern is a predetermined lottery result (for example, lottery result that wins a small hit). It may be configured to facilitate a special figure high probability end condition and set the probability variation flag aaC to off when any special figure high probability end condition is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the first ball opening 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. is a flag that is set to This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

With this special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the off symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the second ball opening 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. is a flag that is set to This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

With this special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203adC is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag aaC is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203adC "00H" is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the variable probability flag aaC is on), the variable probability state is shown in the winning state storage area 203adC. "01H" is stored as information. Also, if the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the second probability variable state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variable flag aaC is on), the winning state storage area 203adC stores the second probability variable "02H" is stored as information indicating the state.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203adC is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big win.

The small hit flag 203aeC is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. Flags to be set. This small hit flag 203aeC is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win. With this small hit flag 203aeC turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the counter that measures the variation time of the special symbol (stop) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small winning of the second special symbol is being executed, and the big winning is started during the small winning. can.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203afC and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203agC are counters for timing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined according to the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203afC and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203agC.

The small hit medium flag 203ahC is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If this small hit medium flag 203ahC is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in a small hit. This small hit medium flag 203ahC is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the 66th control example is configured so that only the second special symbol wins a small win, and when a small win is won (the small win medium flag 203ahC is set to ON ), it is configured to interrupt the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the flag 203ahC during the small hit is set to ON. In this state, the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) never ends, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small winning game and play the game. In addition, during the small winning game, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the other special symbol and the start of the big winning game.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the stop symbol of the big hit and when the big win is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is set to ON, even if there is a new entry to the second entrance 640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. be done. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped in the off design, and is set to OFF when the process for executing the variation display of the second special symbol is avoided. be.

The prize winning counter 203ajC is a counter for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the second specific prize winning port (variable prize winning device 65) during the small winning game, and the number of game balls entering the second specific prize winning port during the small winning game. One is added each time a game ball enters. Then, based on the value of the winning counter 203ajC, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the small winning game is established. The value of the prize winning counter 203ajC is cleared to 0 each time the small winning game ends.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit, and is referred to in the special symbol variation process. As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON, so that it is possible to notify that the variation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped. And, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process, it is set to OFF.

In addition, in the third modification of the 66th control example, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the small winning can be won, so the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small winning. The only special symbols to be used are the first special symbols, but if the lottery of the first special symbols is configured so that a small hit can be won, special symbols 2 are used to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbols. A temporary stop flag may be provided.

As described above, in the third modification of the 66th control example, if the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, based on the fact that one of the special symbols has stopped in a combination that indicates a big hit (jackpot game is executed), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, a combination showing a small hit Based on the fact that one special symbol has stopped, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended until the small winning game is finished).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other (lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed and the big win is erased by the small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 2307(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification of the 66th control example will be described. FIG. 2307(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third modified example. As shown in FIG. 2307(a), the ROM 222 in the third modified example differs from the ROM 222 in the 66th control example described above in that a pseudo effect table 222aaC is added.

Pseudo production table 222aaC is a variable production executed in response to special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation) in a state where the second probability variation state is set When determining the production mode of pseudo production that is It is a data table to be referred to, corresponding to the fluctuation time of the corresponding special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation) and the value of the obtained production counter 223f, different aspects of pseudo production are defined. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 2308, the contents defined in the pseudo effect table 222aaC will be described. FIG. 2308 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the pseudo effect table 222aaC. As shown in FIG. 2308, the pseudo effect table 222aaC defines nine modes of "pseudo effect A" to "pseudo effect I" as the effect types of the pseudo effect.

Specifically, the variation time of the corresponding special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 jackpot variation) is 60 seconds (60000 ms), and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19", ``Pseudo performance A'' with a pseudo small hit performance execution interval of 10 seconds (low execution frequency) has a pseudo small hit performance execution interval of 7 seconds (medium execution frequency) for the range of ``20 to 79''. The "pseudo effect B" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the "pseudo effect C" having a pseudo small winning effect execution interval of 5 seconds (high execution frequency) is defined.

Then, the variation time of the corresponding special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation) is 180 seconds (180000 ms), and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19", pseudo small hit "Pseudo production D" with a production execution interval of 10 seconds (low execution frequency) is a "pseudo production D" with a pseudo small hit production execution interval of 7 seconds (medium execution frequency) for the range of "20 to 79" For the range of "80 to 99" of "E", "pseudo effect F" with a pseudo small winning effect execution interval of 5 seconds (high execution frequency) is defined respectively.

Furthermore, the variation time of the corresponding special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation) is 300 seconds (300000 ms), and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19", pseudo small hit "Pseudo production G" with a production execution interval of 10 seconds (low execution frequency) is a "pseudo production G" with a pseudo small hit production execution interval of 7 seconds (medium execution frequency) for the range of "20 to 79" "H" is defined for the range of "80 to 99", and "pseudo effect I" with a pseudo small winning effect execution interval of 5 seconds (high frequency of execution).

That is, in the present third modification, the number of times (execution interval) of the pseudo small hit production to be executed during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation (execution interval) can be changed according to the production mode (production type) of the pseudo production to be set. can. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation where the difference between the number of simulated prize balls displayed during the simulated performance and the number of actual prize balls actually obtained during the small winning game tends to widen and a situation where it is difficult to widen. Various performance modes can be easily set as the performance mode of the big win game performance during the big win game executed after the second probability variable state is finished, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2307(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification will be described. FIG. 2307(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification. As shown in Figure 2307 (b), in the third modification, the RAM223 in the 66th control example described above, special figure 1 variation time counter 223aaC, special figure 2 variation time counter 223abC, residual variation time information storage The difference is that an area 223acC, a remaining time storage area 223adC, a small hit prize ball number counter 223aeC, a pseudo prize ball number counter 223afC, and a power off flag 223y are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Special figure 1 variable time counter 223aaC, special figure 2 variable time counter 223abC, in the variable display setting process, when each variable display is set (executed), a value indicating the corresponding variable time is set, various counters Each value is decremented by 1 each time the update process is executed. In addition, after receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command from the main control device 110, the period until receiving the special figure 1 resume command is even when various counter update processes are executed, special figure 1 fluctuation time It is configured so as not to decrement the value of the counter 223aaC by one.

Then, it is referred to when calculating the remaining variation time in the temporary stop related process executed when it is determined in the command determination process that the temporary stop related command has been received.

The remaining variation time information storage area 223acC is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the first special symbol jackpot variation. In this remaining variation time information storage area 223acC, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special The stored remaining period information is referred to when setting an additional effect for resuming the variable display of symbols.

The small hit prize ball number counter 223aeC counts the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the second specific winning port) after the start of the small hit game until the second variable state ends. , a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls obtained during a small win game, and configured to accumulate the number of prize balls during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. is doing.

The pseudo prize ball number counter 223afC is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls displayed in a pseudo manner in the pseudo small hit effect executed during the pseudo effect until the second probability variable state ends. is.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2309 to 2327, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example will be described. The control process executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example replaces the switch reading process (see S101A in FIG. 2251) with respect to the 66th control example described above. The switch reading process (S191A in FIG. 2309) is replaced with the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 41), and the special symbol variation process (S104A in FIG. 2310) is replaced with the main process (S104A in FIG. 51). The difference is that the processing (see FIG. 2325) is executed, and the other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

In addition, in the starting winning process for acquiring the execution right of the special symbol lottery, the third modification of the 66th control example does not have a storage means capable of storing the execution right of the second special symbol. The difference is that the processing content for acquiring the right to execute the 2 special symbol lottery is deleted, but the basic processing content is the same, so the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process for executing the normal symbol lottery, the third modification of the 66th control example is referred to when determining the result of the normal symbol lottery in contrast to the 66th control example described above. The contents stipulated in the data table (second random number table 202acC), the fluctuation time of normal pattern fluctuation, and the game contents of the normal pattern per game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery are varied. However, since the basic processing contents are the same, illustration and detailed description are omitted. Similarly, in the jackpot control process for executing the jackpot game, the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example differs from the sixty-sixth control example in that the contents of the jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type) are different. However, since the basic processing contents are the same, illustration and detailed description are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 2309, the contents of the switch reading process (S191A) will be described. FIG. 2309 is a flow chart showing the contents of the switch reading process (S191A). This switch reading process (S191A) is different from the switch reading process (see S101A in FIG. 2251) executed in the above-described 66th control example. The winning type is identifiable between the winning of the game ball to the opening 65a) and the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening (second specific winning opening 650a) whose opening is controlled during the jackpot game. The difference is that the processing for setting commands is configured to be executed, and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 2309, when the switch reading process (S191A) is executed, first, the same processes of S111A to A114A as the switch reading process (see S101A in FIG. 2251) in the 66th control example described above are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the stored information stored this time is information indicating winning to the second specific winning port (specific winning port 65a) (S192A), and winning to the second specific winning port (specific winning port 65a) is determined. (S192A: Yes), set a winning type command for indicating winning to the second specific winning port (S193A), then switch read processing in the 66th control example described above (See S101A in FIG. 2251), the same processing of S115A to A119A is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S192A, if it is determined that the information does not indicate the winning of the second specific winning port (the specific winning port 65a) (S192A: No), the above-described first The processing of S115A to A119A, which is the same as the switch reading processing (see S101A in FIG. 2251) in the V.66 control example, is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the third modification of the 66th control example, the game ball (small winning ball) that has entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game and the Since it is possible to identify the game ball (jackpot winning ball) that has entered the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and set the winning type command, the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to make it easier to set an effect mode according to the winning type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2310, the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104A) will be described. FIG. 2310 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104A). Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example executes the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation in parallel with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above. The point that it is configured to be possible, the content of the other special symbol lottery based on the result of one special symbol lottery, and the content of the other special symbol variation can be changed, the special symbol lottery is executed, various counters (time reduction counter 203h, probability variation counter 203i) that are the setting elements of the game state are changed. The content of the special symbol variation processing is also varied according to the content of the points.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation process (S104A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S2501A). (S2501A: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON (S2502A). In the processing of this S2502A, it is determined whether the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is interrupted due to the one special figure being stopped and displayed in the pattern indicating the hit. In the processing of S2502A, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON (S2502A: Yes), update the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped Then (S2503A), that is, the processing for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed with respect to the special figure for which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing ends. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501A, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S2501A: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203afC is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined (S2504A), and the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203afC is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2504A: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S2508A) is executed, after that, it moves to S2509A for executing the variation processing regarding special figure 2. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S2508A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2504A, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203afC is greater than 0 (S2504A: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing processing (S2505A) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (S2505A) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S2505A) is finished, then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203afC is 0) (S2506A), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S2506A: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S2507A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S2509A. On the other hand, in the process of S2506A, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S2506A: No), the process of S2507A is skipped and the process proceeds to S2509A.

In the processing of S2509A ~ S2513A, the same processing as S2504A ~ S2507A executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S2509A is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203agC is greater than 0 (ie, whether the special figure 2 is changing) is determined (S2509A), special figure 2 variation When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203agC is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2509A: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S2510A) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S2510A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2509A, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203agC is greater than 0 (S2509A: Yes), the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S2511A) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (S2511A) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the second special symbol variation executing process (S2511A), next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (special figure 2 variation time counter 203agC is 0) (S2512A), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S2512A: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S2513A) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2512A, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S2512A: No), the process of S2513A is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2311, the first special symbol variation start process (S2508A), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see S104A of FIG. 2310) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. . FIG. 2311 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S2508A).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S2508A), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S2601A), and the acquired value (N1 ) is greater than 0 (S2602A). In the processing of S2602A, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S2602A: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is Subtract 1 (S2603A), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after the subtraction (S2604A). .

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 2325) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S2604A ends, next, the data of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S2605A). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S2605A ends, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is executed (S2606A). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S2606A) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Based on, based on the game state that is set, it is a process for executing the jackpot determination whether or not the jackpot.

When the processing of S2606A ends, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is executed (see FIG. 2313). Details will be described later, but this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S2607A) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S2607A) ends, next, the game state update process is executed (S2608A). This game state update process (S2608A), which will be described in detail later, updates the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the state of the variable probability flag 203aaC and the value of the time saving counter 203h, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. This process is for When the process of S2608A ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2602A, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S2602A: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 2312, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S2606A) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S2508A in FIG. 2311) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain. FIG. 2312 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S2606A). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third modified example of the 66th control example, during the period during which the variation display (jackpot variation) of winning a big win in one of the special symbols is being executed, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win. It is configured so as not to determine whether or not it has been elected.

In other words, in a state in which it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after the fluctuation time has passed) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is constructed so as to suppress giving a privilege excessively due to winning a jackpot.

In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the outlier symbol, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S2606A), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S2701A). Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203aaC is set to ON (S2702A). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbols are in a high probability state (variable probability state, second variable probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203aaC is on (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol) (S2702A: Yes), the first per random number table 202aaC for high probability It is determined whether or not the numerical value matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S2703A). On the other hand, in the process of S2702A, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203aaC is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S2702A: No), the first per random number table 202aaC for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S2704A).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is on (S2705A). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S2705A: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S2703A or S2704A is a big hit (S2706A), and if the lottery result is a big hit ( S2706A: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is set to ON for the first special pattern (S2707A), and the lottery result of the first special pattern is set to jackpot (S2708A). Then, based on the value of the obtained winning type counter, the first special symbol jackpot symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S2709A), and the value corresponding to the current game status is stored in the winning status storage area. 203adC (S2710A), 1 is set to the time saving counter 203h (S2711A), and this process is finished.

Here, by setting the value of the time saving counter 203h to 1 in the processing of S2711A, the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see S2606A of FIG. 2312) in the first special symbol variation start processing (see S2508A of FIG. 2311) The high probability state of normal symbols can be shifted to the low probability state in the game state update process (S2608A) executed later than. Thus, when a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbols, it is possible to set a low probability state of normal symbols at the timing when the big win variation is started. Therefore, by winning the jackpot in the first special symbol in a state in which the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state can be shifted to the second variable probability state.

Also. By performing the processing of setting the value of the time saving counter 203h to 1 in the processing of S2711A, processing to shift the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state on the condition that the jackpot is won, and the fluctuation of the special design. Any of the process of shifting from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state under the condition that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times can be executed using the game state update process (S2608A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main controller 110 from becoming complicated even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high-probability state of the normal symbol are provided.

On the other hand, in the process of S2705A, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is on (S2705A: Yes), or in the process of S2706A, if it is determined that the lottery result is out (S2706A: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S2712A), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2313, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S2607A), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S2508A of FIG. 2311), will be described. FIG. 2313 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S2607A).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S2607A), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S2606A in FIG. 2312), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first special symbol is set (S2801A). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is ON. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is set to ON in the process of S2707A in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 2312).

In the process of S2801A, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S2801A: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 2312) described above S2701A acquired in Based on the value of the type counter C2 per 1, determine the jackpot type from the first per type selection table 202adC (see Figure 2302) (S2802A), and proceed to the processing of S2803A.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is off) (S2801A: No), the process of S2802A is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S2803A.

In the process of S2803A, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S2803A). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 2303 to 2305) corresponding to the game state is read out (S2804A), and the process proceeds to S2805A. The game state is determined based on the state of the variable probability flag 203aaC and the value of the time saving counter 203h. In the process of S2805A, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S2805A), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( S2806A).

When the processing of S2806A is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S2807A), then the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S2808A), and the processing of S2805A. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in is set to the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203afC, and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2314, the game state update process (S2608A), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see S2508A in FIG. 2311) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. . FIG. 2314 is a flow chart showing this game state update process (S2608A). In the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, only the value of the time reduction counter 203h out of the state of the variable probability flag 203aaC, which is the condition for setting the game state, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is used as a special symbol. In order to update at the start of the fluctuation, in the game state update process (see Figure 2314) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see S2508A of Figure 2311), the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h is executed It is configured to

Then, the variable probability flag 203aaC, which is set to ON, which will be described in detail later, is set to OFF when the big hit variation is finished and the special symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed (when the big win game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, of the two conditional elements (the state of the variable probability flag 203aaC, the value of the time saving counter 203h) referred to when setting the gaming state, one conditional element is updated at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the other conditional elements can be updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the game state set by combining the two conditional elements. In addition, since it is also possible to set a specific game state (for example, the second probability variable state) only during the period from the start of the special symbol fluctuation to the end, it is advantageous to the player only during the predetermined period. It is possible to set a game state.

When the gaming state update process (S2608A) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2901A). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S2901A: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2901A: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S2902A), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. (S2903A). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S2904A), and if it is determined to be 0 (S2904A: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203aaC is set to ON (S2905A ). Here, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203aaC is set to ON (S2905A: Yes), the probability variation state (that is, the second probability variation state) where the time saving game is not given, so the second probability variation state is set (S2906A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2905A, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203aaC is not set to ON (S2905A: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2907A), and this processing exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S2904A, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S2904A: No), this process ends.

In addition, in the third modification of the 66th control example, until the high probability state of the special symbol next wins the special symbol jackpot (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the big win) Although it is configured to be continuously set, in addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203aaC, the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the probability variation counter becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S2608A) shown with reference to FIG. By providing a game state update process at the time of special figure fluctuation stop for updating the value of the probability variation counter, a process for determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 2315, regarding the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S2505A) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104A of FIG. 2310) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 give an explanation. FIG. 2315 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S2505A). In this first special symbol variation executing process (S2505A), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process (S2505A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON (S3001A). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON) special symbol variation process (see S104A in FIG. 2310) is executed, the jackpot in the process of S2501A Since it is determined to be in progress, the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S2505A) is not executed. Then, the big winning game (or small winning game) is completed, and it is determined that it is not during the big winning (or during the small winning) in the processing of S2501A, so that the first special symbol variation executing process (S2505A) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S2505A) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON is the jackpot (or small hit) game It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 2315, the description continues. In the process of S3001A, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON (S3001A: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command (S3002A), special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203amC is set to OFF (S3003A), and the process proceeds to S3004A. On the other hand, in the process of S3001A, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3001A: No), the processes of S3002A and S3003A are skipped and S3004A to process.

In the process of S3004A, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203afC is updated by subtracting 1 (S3004A), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S3005A), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2316, the first special symbol variation stop process (S2707A), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104A of FIG. 2310), will be described. FIG. 2316 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation stop process (S2707A).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S7207A), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S3101A). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is set to ON for the first special symbol (S3101A: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is set to ON (S3102A), and the special figure Set a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is turned on (S3103A). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S3104A).

When the processing of S3104A is finished, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S3105A), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC and probability variation flag 203aaC are reset (S3106A). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON (S3107A), and the process proceeds to S3108A.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101A, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S3101A: No), the process of S3102A to S3107A is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3108A.

In the processing of S3108A, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S3108A). Thereafter, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S3109A), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S2707A), the process (S3102A to S3109A) of stopping the variable display in the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S3101A: Yes), the process (S3103A, S3104A) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In addition, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a symbol that is out of the variable display. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure. In addition, in the third modification of the 66th control example, based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203adC in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 2312), the jackpot is generated in the processing of S3105A. Although the scenario is set, for example, the jackpot scenario is set based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203adC in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 2311) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may set it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2317, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S2510A) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 2310) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 2317 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S2510A). In this second special symbol variation start process (S2510A), a process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. Detailed descriptions of the elements are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S2510A), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203aiC is set to ON (S3201A). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is set to ON (S3201A: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is set to OFF (S3202A), and this process ends. Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC, as described above, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, is a flag that is set to ON while causing the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is ON in the process of S3201A, without executing each process of S3202A to S3207A for setting the start of fluctuation, this process is configured to end as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201A, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aiC is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S3201A: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b1 data (various counter values) are acquired (S3203A). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S3203A, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S3204A). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S3204A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3203A, when it is determined that there is data (S3204A: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed based on each counter value stored. Execute (S3205A). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S3205A is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S3203A, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S3206A). . The details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S3206A) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S3206A ends, the above-described game state update processing (see S2608A in FIG. 2314) is executed (S3207A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 2318, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S3205A) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S2510A in FIG. 2317) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain. FIG. 2318 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S3205A).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S3205A), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S2606A in FIG. 2312) is executed. (see S2606A)) will be mainly described.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S3205A) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b1 is acquired (S3301A). Then, it executes the processing of S3302A to S3304A for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big hit based on each acquired counter value and the state of the variable probability flag 203aaC. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b1, and the other is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S2606A in FIG. 2312). Identical control is performed.

When the processing of S3303A or S3304A ends, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is set to ON (S3305A). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203abC is not set to ON (S3305A: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S3306A), and when it is determined to be a jackpot (S3306A: Yes), executes the processing of S3307A ~ S3310A for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to the jackpot, and ends this processing. In each process of these S3307A ~ S3310A, for each process of S2707A ~ S2710A for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S2606 in Figure 2312), Only by changing the target from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, other similar processing is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3305A, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203abC is set to ON (S3305A: Yes), or in the process of S3306A, if the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit When it is determined (S3306A: No), special figure 2 loss variation processing for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or loss of the second special symbol is executed (S3311A), and this process is terminated. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S3311A) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 2319 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S3311A).

With special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S3311A), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained by the processing of S3303A or S3304A in FIG. If it is determined (S3401A: Yes), the small hit flag 203aeC is set to ON (S3402A), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S3403A). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S3404A), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the processing of S3401A (S3401A: No), the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S3405A), and then, End this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 2320, second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S3206A) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S2510A in FIG. 2317) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be explained. FIG. 2320 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S3206A).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S3206A), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b1 (S3501A). Next, the determination result executed by the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S3205A in FIG. 2318) is whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the second special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not there is (S3502A). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203acC is turned on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is set to ON in the process of S3307 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S3205A in FIG. 2318).

In the processing of S3502A, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S3502A: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 2304 and 2305) corresponding to the current gaming state is read. (S3503A). Then, based on the value of the first per type counter C2 acquired in the process of S3301A in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S26063205A of FIG. 2318), from the first per type selection table 202adC (see FIG. 2302) The jackpot type is determined (S3504A).

When the processing of S3504A is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S3505A), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S3506A). Then, the process proceeds to S3508A.

On the other hand, in the process of S3502A, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S3502A: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S3507A) is executed, and the process of S3508A Transition.

In the processing of S3508A, the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the stop design is set (S3508A). Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S3509A), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S3505A is set to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203agC ( S3510A), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2321, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S3507A) will be described. FIG. 2321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S3507A).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S3507A), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S3601A). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203aeC is set to ON (S3601A). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203aeC is ON (S3601A: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S3602A). And, based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, to select a small hit type (S3603A).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the third modification of the 66th control example, when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, it is possible to determine one of the three types of small hit types. , and the small hit type is determined by the processing of S3603A. Then, according to the determined small winning type, the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the small winning game is made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is playing the second variable probability state in which the small winning game frequently occurs to predict the timing when the variable winning device 65 is opened.

Next, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S3604A), and a small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S3605A). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S3606A), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3601A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S3601A: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state is read. (S3607A), from the read variation pattern selection table, select the deviation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S3608A). Then, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, to set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S3609A), to end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2322, second special symbol variation executing process (S2511A), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S104A of FIG. 2310) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, Explain the content. FIG. 2322 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S2511A). In this second special symbol variation executing process (S2511A), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process (S2511A) is executed, first, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203agC is updated by subtracting 1 (S3701A), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is updated (S3702A), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2323, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S2513A) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 2323 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S2513A). This second special symbol variation stop processing (S2513A) is to execute the processing when stopping the variation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol variation stop processing (S2513A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is set to ON (S3801A), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is set to ON. If it is determined (S3801A: Yes), to set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation (S3803A). Next, when the processing of S3803A is completed, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S3804A). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S3805A), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC, probability variation flag 203aaC and time saving counter 203h are reset (S3806A). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON (S3807A), and the process proceeds to S3809A.

In the process of S3809A, a special figure 2 decision command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is decided and stopped is set (S3809A). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S3810A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3801A, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203acC is not set to ON (S3801A: No), the special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (S3808A), S3809A and S3810A described above , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2324, special figure 2 deviation stop processing (S3808A), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S2513A in FIG. 2323), will be described. Figure 2324 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S3808A). In this special figure 2 out stop processing (S3808A), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, out), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution is executed.

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing (S3808A), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203aeC is set to ON (S3901A). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203aeC is set to ON (S3901A: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set to ON (S3902A). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203amC is set (S3903A).

After completing the processing of S3903A, a small winning scenario based on the selected small winning type is set (S3904A). After that, the small hit flag 203aeC is set to OFF (S3905A), and the small hit medium flag 203ahC is set to ON (S3906A).

When the processing of S3906A ends, the special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S3907A). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, stops variably in the small hit symbol (S3908A), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3901A, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203aeC is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S3901A: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. Set a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S3909A). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is stopped by the symbol (S3910A), and the process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In the third modification of the 66th control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed. Although it is configured to be stopped and displayed, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2325, the main processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 2325 is a flow chart showing the details of the main process executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example. In the third modified example of the 66th control example, as compared with the 66th control example described above, it is possible to win a small win as a result of a special symbol lottery, and a small win game is executed based on the small win. , the difference is that small winning control processing (S1805A) is added to the main processing (see FIG. 2325). Other processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2326, the processing contents of the small hit control processing (S1805A) will be described. Figure 2326 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of small hitting control processing (S1805A). In this small winning control process (S1805A), various processes executed during the small winning game are executed.

When the small winning control process (S1805A) is executed, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set by the processing of S3904A of the special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 2324). In the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if the small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown) is a small winning scenario It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the process of S2505, when it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: Yes), the opening scenario of the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is set (S2506), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the round currently being executed is met (S2507). Here, in the third modification of the 66th control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, three) win in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the specific winning opening 65a When the open period has passed a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is met.

In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the processing of S2508 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed, and this processing is performed. exit. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not established (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small winning ending command is set (S2510), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 2325) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the flag 203ahC during the small hit is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process ends. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2327, details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process in the small winning control process (S1805A in FIG. 2326) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 2327 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 2326), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the prize winning counter 203ajC is reset (S2702), and the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and to the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if winning for the specific winning hole 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203ajC is updated by adding 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning counter 203ajC is equal to or greater than the upper limit (3 in the third modification of the 66th control example) (S2705), and the value of the prize winning counter 203ajC is the upper limit (the 66th control example In the third modification of , if 5) or less (S2705: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the prize winning counter 203ajC is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the third modification of the 66th control example) (S2705: Yes), the specific prize winning port 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f1 attached thereto) is closed. Set (S2706). Next, the small winning scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2328 to 2341, of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the above-described sixty-sixth control example Differences from the control processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of 1 will be described. In the third modification of the present 66th control example, in contrast to the 66th control example described above, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be executable in parallel, and the special symbol It is greatly different in that it is configured to win a small prize by lottery and that the game characteristics are different in each game state. The control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 executed based on the difference is also different. Specifically, the command determination process (see S4112A in FIG. 2256) is replaced with the command determination process (see S4152A in FIG. 2328), and the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 66) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S4113A of 2337) is different in that the effect update process (S4111A of FIG. 2340) is executed instead of the effect update process (S4111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process (S4152A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2328 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process (S4152A). In this command determination process (S4152A), each stop type command is received before determining whether or not a state command has been received with respect to the command determination process (see S4112A in FIG. 2256) of the sixty-sixth control example described above. The point configured to perform the determination of whether it was done, the point configured to perform the reception determination of the special pattern variation command for each special symbol type, and the hit related command (big hit related command, small hit related command) and the provisional stop-related command reception determination. Another difference is that part of the processing that is executed when it is determined that various commands have been received is changed. In addition, in FIG. 2328, the same processing contents (processing related to the symbol determination command, etc.) among the command determination processing shown in FIG. ing.

When the command determination process (S4152A) is executed, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command is received from 110 (S4271A). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4271A: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4272A), and this process ends. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4272A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4271A, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4271A: No), whether the state command is received from the main controller 110 is determined (S4201). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4273A), and this processing ends. Details of this state command reception processing (S4273) will be described later with reference to FIG. 2 probability variable state) is set in the state setting area 223g.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the state command is not received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4274A). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4274A, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4274A: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d1C provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4275A) and received The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4276A), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows identification of the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. ), when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4274A: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4277A). In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4277A, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4277A: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d2C provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S4278A), and the received special The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4279A), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format in which the variation pattern type of the second special symbol can be identified, and the variation display setting process described later (see S4113A in FIG. 2337) ), when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is set).

In the processing of S4277A, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4277A: No), it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4209: Yes), the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the first The number of reserved balls of variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4210), the process ends. In addition, since the third modification of the 66th control example does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), in the process of S4210, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is reserved. Only the process of updating the value of the number-of-balls counter 223c is executed.

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from main controller 110 when a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the process of S4210 , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start When the reserved ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be matched with the value of the counter 203d.

Also, in the process of S4209, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). In the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (special symbol lottery propriety, winning type, and variation pattern) corresponding winning information The data is set in the storage area 223b (S4280A), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received from the main controller (S4281A). In the process of S4281A, when it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S4281A: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4282A), and this process ends. Details of the hit-related processing (S4281A) will be described later with reference to FIG. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4281A that the hit-related command has not been received (S4281A: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop-related command has been received from main controller 110 (S4283A). In the process of S4283A, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4283A: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4284A), and this process ends. For details of the temporary stop related process (S4274A), a detailed description will be omitted, but the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when receiving the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command and , When receiving the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command, the process of setting the production (additional production) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4283A that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4283A: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this process ends. In the process of S4219, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

As described above, in the command determination process (S4152A) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the process of determining whether a state command has been received (see S4271A). is configured before the processing (see S4274A, S4277A) for determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol is received.

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, that is, the first special symbol variation start processing of the main control device 110 (see S2508A in FIG. 2311) In, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S2607A in Figure 2313) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the game state update process (see S2608A in Figure 2314) is executed. Even if the state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, in the state where the probability variable state is set, the special figure 1 jackpot is won, and the second probability variable state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the second probability variable state is set It is possible to easily set the variation effect (see FIGS. 2295(b) and 2296(a)) corresponding to the variation pattern command which becomes the big hit variation in the state that it is determined that the game has been performed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, when configured to execute processing according to the variation pattern command prior to the determination processing of the state command, it corresponds to the above-described jackpot variation. From the variation pattern command, only the information indicating that the big win is won by the first special symbol lottery in the probability variation state is received first, and the variation display corresponding to the received contents is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the variation display indicating that the second probability variation state is set at the same time as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. By delaying the variable display indicating that the second probability variable state has been set in this way, the timing of informing the player that the right-handed game is to be performed is delayed. The problem of giving pleasure arises.

On the other hand, in the third modification of the 66th control example, as described above, on the main controller 110 side, the determination of whether the big hit is successful (see S2606A in FIG. 2311) and the variation pattern setting (S2607A in FIG. 2311) 2311), whereas the sound lamp control device 113 side executes processing for determining the current game state first (S4272A in FIG. 2328). ), and then set a variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous game state from being set and executed even though the second variable probability state is set.

In addition, since the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the receiving order of various commands output from the main control device 110, there is a need to define the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute the determination processing of the variation pattern command before the determination processing of the state command, and in this case, the game state can be changed at the start timing of the special symbol variation. , it is possible to execute a variation effect based on the variation pattern command according to the game state before the change. Therefore, the timing at which the game state is actually changed and the timing at which the variation performance is executed based on the game state after the change can be made different (different by one special symbol variation), and the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the timing when the state changes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2329, the stop type command reception process (S4272A) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2329 is a flow chart showing this stop type command reception process (S4272A). This stop type command reception process (S4272A) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 2328) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4272A) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (S4272A), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag is set to ON, and the special figure 2 stop When the type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag is set to ON (S5101A). Next, the stop type (jackpot A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, reach off, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S5102A), this End the process.

The stop type extracted in S5102A is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to fluctuate at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute appropriate fluctuation display. can be done.

Next, referring to FIG. 2330, the state command reception process (S4273A) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2330 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4273A). This state command reception process (S4273A) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 2338) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the status command reception process (S4273A) will be described below.

In this state command reception process (S4273A), the current game state is set in the state setting area 223g based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and the game state shifts to the second probability variable state. If so, a process for setting an effect (see FIG. 2295(a)) for informing the player that the second variable probability state is set is executed.

In the state command reception process (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223g provided in the RAM 223 (S5201A). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the game state before receiving the state command is the second probability variable state (S5202A). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the second variable probability state (S5202: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the second variable probability state (S5203A). In the processing of S5203A, if it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the second probability change state (S5203A: Yes), set the notification effect to notify the entry of the second probability change state (S5204A) . Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223g (S5205A), and the process proceeds to S5206A.

On the other hand, in the process of S5202A, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the second probability variable state (S5202A: Yes), the process proceeds to S5205A, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, in the processing of S5206A, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is set in the state setting area 223g (S5206A), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2331, the processing contents of the win-related processing (S4282A) will be described. FIG. 2331 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S4282A). In this hit related process (S4282A), when it is determined that the jackpot related command is received, the jackpot related process (S5302A) is executed when it is determined that the small hit related command is received (S5304A). It is configured as follows.

Specifically, when the hit related process (S4282A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot related command is received (S5301A), and if it is determined that it is received (S5301A: Yes), the jackpot related process is performed. Execute (S5302A) and terminate this process. Also, in the processing of S5301A, if it is determined that the jackpot related command is not received (S5301A: No), then it is determined whether the small hit related command is received (S5303A), and the small hit related command is received If it is determined that (S5303A: Yes), small hit related processing is executed (S5304A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit related command and the small hit related command have not been received, the processing is terminated as it is.

As shown in FIG. 2331, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, in the winning-related processing (S4282A in FIG. ) is preferentially received (determined). By constructing in this way, an effect based on a win type with a low degree of advantage, with fewer benefits given to the player, is executed than the effect executed in relation to the win most advantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2332, the processing contents of the jackpot related processing (S5302A) executed in the winning related processing (S4282A of FIG. 2331) will be described. FIG. 2332 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot related process (S5302A). In this winning-related process (S4282A in FIG. 2331), the process for determining the effect mode of the big-hit game effect executed during the period from the start to the end of the big-hit game, and the effect based on the prize balls acquired during the big-hit game is executed.

Specifically, when the jackpot related process (S5302A) is executed, first, this hit-related command determines whether it is a jackpot start command (S5401A), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S5401A: Yes), a big hit effect mode setting process is executed (S5402A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5401A, when it is determined that the jackpot start command is not received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the round number command is received (S5403A), and it is determined that the round number command is received. If so (S5403A: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S5404A), and this process ends. In the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as the number-of-rounds command, so the number-of-rounds command for display is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. However, for example, in order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the main controller 110, information indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round update command. In this case, when a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided for accumulating the number of received round update commands, and the audio ramp is controlled based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. The device 113 may be configured to calculate the current number of rounds and set the number-of-rounds command for display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5403A, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5403A: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S5405A), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received ( S5405A), sets an ending command for display (S5406A), and terminates this process. Also, in the processing of S5405A, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5405A: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning command has been received (S5407A).

Here, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, the main control device 110 is configured to be able to measure the number of game balls that have won the second variable prize winning device 650 during the jackpot game (winning counter ), updating the value of the winning counter each time a game ball wins to the second variable winning device 650, and ending the round game being executed when the updated value reaches a predetermined number (10). is configured to be executable. Furthermore, every time the value of the winning counter is updated, a jackpot winning command is set and output to the sound lamp control device 113 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the game ball to the second variable winning device 650 can be grasped. It is possible to display a display mode according to the winning prize.

In the processing of S5407A, if it is determined that a big hit winning command has been received (S5407A: Yes), a display command corresponding to the determined prize state is set (S5408A), and this processing ends. Also, in the processing of S5407A, if it is determined that the jackpot winning command has not been received (S5407A: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S5408A, a display command for indicating the display mode based on the winning ball mode determined in the later-described jackpot effect mode setting process (see S5402A in FIG. 2333) is set. That is, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, when the jackpot game is executed after the second variable probability state ends, that is, when the jackpot game effect is executed after repeatedly executing the pseudo small hit effect, The value corresponding to the number of pseudo prize balls displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as the effect result of the pseudo small hit effect (the value displayed in the display area Dm18 in FIG. 2296 (a)), and the actual second In order to eliminate the difference from the number of prize balls obtained in a plurality of small winning games executed during the 2 probability variable state, the prize ball mode displayed corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning game is changed. configured to change.

With this configuration, regardless of the number of prize balls obtained in the actually executed small winning game, even if the pseudo small winning performance is periodically executed, the third pattern display device after the big winning game ends. A value corresponding to the number of prize balls displayed on the display surface of 81 (adding the number of pseudo prize balls displayed in the pseudo small win effect and the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball mode displayed as the big win game effect) It is possible to easily match the number of prize balls actually obtained (the number of prize balls obtained during the small win game and the number of prize balls obtained during the big win game), thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. A display mode that does not exist can be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2333, the processing contents of the jackpot effect mode setting processing (S5402A) will be described. FIG. 2333 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the jackpot presentation mode setting processing (S5402A). This jackpot effect mode setting process (S5402A) is a control process executed when it is determined that a jackpot start command is received in the above-described jackpot related process (see S5302A in FIG. 2332), and is displayed as a jackpot game effect. Processing for determining the display mode of the winning ball mode (each point icon shown in FIG. 2296(b) and each point icon shown in FIG. 2297(a)) is executed.

When the big hit effect mode setting process (S5402A) is executed, first, the value of the pseudo prize ball counter 223adC is read (S5501A), the value of the small hit prize ball counter 223aeC is read (S5502A), and then S5501A The value of the small winning ball number counter 223aeC read in the process of S5502A is subtracted from the value of the pseudo prize ball number counter 223adC read in the process (S5503A). That is, in the processing of S5503A, the number of pseudo prize balls displayed as the effect result of the pseudo small hit effect and the number of prize balls actually obtained during the small hit game (the number of actual prize balls) are calculated. Processing is performed.

After that, the value calculated in the processing of S5503A is greater than 1, that is, it is determined whether the number of pseudo prize balls is greater than the number of actual prize balls (S5504A), and is greater than 1, that is, the number of pseudo prize balls If it is determined that the number is larger than the number of actual prize balls (S5504: Yes), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball mode displayed during the jackpot game production is larger than the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game. A winning ball mode subtraction process for reducing is executed (S5505A), and the process proceeds to S5506A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5504A that the value after subtraction is not greater than 1 (S5504A: No), then it is determined whether the value after subtraction is less than 0 (S5508A). is smaller, that is, when it is determined that the number of pseudo prize balls is smaller than the number of actual prize balls (S5508A: Yes), the prize displayed during the jackpot game production is larger than the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game. A prize ball mode addition process for increasing the number of prize balls indicated by the ball mode is executed (S5509A), and then the process proceeds to S5506A.

Also, in the processing of S5508A, if the value after subtraction is not less than 0, that is, if it is determined that the value after subtraction is 0 or 1 (S5508A: No), the number of pseudo prize balls and actual prize balls Since the difference from the number is within a predetermined range (within 1), in order to execute a jackpot game effect (normal jackpot game effect) in which the prize ball mode corresponding to the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game is displayed as it is. , S5505A, and S5509A are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5506A.

In addition, in the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example, when the difference between the number of pseudo prize balls and the number of actual prize balls is within a predetermined range (within 1), the conditions for executing the normal jackpot game effect are established. However, the range in which the conditions for executing the normal jackpot game effect are satisfied may be appropriately set. When the value of the number of prize balls (15) paid out when one game ball enters the specific prize winning port (second specific prize winning port 650a) is smaller than the value, the conditions for executing the normal jackpot game presentation are established. may be configured.

Next, in the processing of S5606A, as an effect mode executed during the opening period (OP period) of the big win game, the start of the big win game is indicated after executing the effect for terminating the pseudo effect (pseudo small win effect). An opening mode (OP mode) for executing the effect is determined (S5606A), a display jackpot start command corresponding to the determined OP mode is set (S5507A), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2334, the processing contents of the winning ball mode subtraction processing (S5505A) will be described. FIG. 2334 is a flow chart for showing the details of the prize ball mode subtraction process (S5505A). In this prize ball mode subtraction process (S5505A), in the above-described jackpot effect mode setting process (see S5402A in FIG. 2333), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball mode displayed during the jackpot game effect is actually during the jackpot game. A process for determining an effect mode in which the number of winning balls is less than the number of prize balls acquired is executed.

Specifically, when the prize ball mode subtraction process (S5505A) is executed, first, the value calculated in the process of S5503A of the jackpot effect mode setting process (see S5402A in FIG. 2333) is divided by 15 (S5531A). , a subtraction mode corresponding to "?" is determined as a correspondence to the display of the number of prize balls corresponding to the integer value of the value after division (S5532A). In other words, the number of prize balls (15) paid out when one game ball wins into a specific prize winning port (second specific prize winning port 650a) that is open-controlled during the jackpot game is set as one unit, and how many prizes are awarded? A determination is made as to whether or not to hide the ball display, and processing for determining the number of prize ball displays to be hidden in order to eliminate the difference based on the determination result is executed.

More specifically, for example, when the difference value is "80", that is, when the number of pseudo prize balls is 80 more than the number of actual prize balls, the difference value "80" is divided by "15". A normal point icon (a point icon with a display mode indicating +15) for displaying the number of winning balls in a normal jackpot game effect by the number corresponding to the integer value "5", and a point icon with a "?" Determine the prize ball mode to be changed to. By configuring in this way, even if a prize ball is won during a jackpot game, the display mode (point icon indicating +15) indicating that the prize ball has been awarded on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 ) is not displayed, the difference value can be resolved.

Next, in the processing of S5533A, it is determined whether or not the number of subtraction modes (point icons with "?" attached) determined by the processing of S5532A is 5 or more (S5533A), and it is determined that the number is 5 or more. If so (S5533A: Yes), a privilege mode (corresponding to the point icon Pr in FIG. 2296(b)) for suggesting the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed this time is determined as part of the subtraction mode (S5534A). , S5535A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5533A that the number is not five or more (S5533A: No), the process of S5534A is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5535A.

That is, in the process of S5534A, when the number of pseudo prize balls is 75 or more than the number of actual prize balls, the process for giving a privilege to the player is executed. Here, in the third modification of the present 66th control example, as described above, using the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation period in the second probability variation state, regardless of the actual number of executions of the small winning game, theoretically executed A pseudo small winning performance is periodically executed in accordance with the average number of executions of the small winning game to be obtained, and the probability is about 1/2 in the second special pattern lottery executed during the second variable probability state. It is configured to win a small hit. In other words, when the number of times the result of the second special symbol lottery is lost (other than a small win) exceeds the theoretical value, it is configured so that the number of pseudo prize balls greatly exceeds the number of actual prize balls. is doing.

Therefore, if an event occurs in which the number of pseudo prize balls greatly exceeds the number of actual prize balls, that is, the result of the second special symbol lottery executed multiple times during the second variable state is a disadvantageous result for the player ( It is configured such that, as the number of deviations increases, the privilege mode is more likely to be determined as the prize ball mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to play.

In addition, when the number of subtraction modes (point icons with "?" attached) displayed during the jackpot game effect increases, point icons with different display modes can be displayed. are continuously displayed, and monotonous jackpot game presentation can be suppressed.

In addition, in the third modified example of the 66th control example, as a privilege mode, a privilege indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is provided. For example, it is also possible to display a high-value image that is not normally displayed during the jackpot game presentation. Further, the difference value may be eliminated by giving a privilege of increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when the second variable prize winning device 650 actually wins during the jackpot game.

Next, in the processing of S5535A, it is determined whether there is a remainder value in the value divided by the processing of S5531A (S5535A). The subtraction mode corresponding to "14" is determined as the mode of displaying the corresponding number of prize balls (S5536A), the performance mode during the jackpot game including the determined various modes is determined (S5537A), and this processing is terminated. Also, in the process of S5535A, if it is determined that there is no remainder value after division (S5535A: No), the process of S5536A is skipped, the process of S5537A is executed, and then this process ends.

Here, the processing contents of S5535A and S5536A will be described with a specific example. For example, if the difference value is "80", that is, if the number of pseudo prize balls is 80 more than the number of actual prize balls, the integer value is obtained by dividing the difference value "80" by "15". 5", and the remainder value is "5". Then, five subtraction modes of "14" are determined as the number display modes corresponding to the remainder value "5". As a result, in the normal jackpot game presentation, the display mode of the point icon to which "+15" is added is changed to the display mode (subtraction mode) of the point icon to which "+14" is added by five points.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2335, processing contents of the prize ball addition processing (S5509A) will be described. FIG. 2335 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize ball addition process (S5509A). In this prize ball addition process (S5509A), the value calculated by the process of S5503A of the above-described jackpot effect mode setting process (see S5402A in FIG. 2333) is smaller than 0, that is, the number of pseudo prize balls is greater than the actual prize. Control processing executed when it is determined that the number of balls is less than the number of balls, wherein the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball mode displayed during the jackpot game performance is set to be greater than the number of prize balls actually obtained during the jackpot game. A process for canceling the difference between the number of pseudo prize balls and the number of actual prize balls is executed.

When this prize ball addition process (S5509A) is executed, first, the value calculated in the process of S5503A of the jackpot production mode setting process (see S5402A in FIG. 2333) is divided by 15 (S5551A), and the value after division The addition mode corresponding to "30" is determined as a correspondence of the number of prize ball display corresponding to the integer value of (S5552A). In other words, the number of prize balls (15) paid out when one game ball wins into a specific prize winning port (second specific prize winning port 650a) that is open-controlled during the jackpot game is set as one unit, and how many prizes are awarded? A determination is made as to whether or not the ball display is an addition display, and processing for determining the number of prize ball displays to be added and displayed in order to eliminate the difference based on the determination result is executed.

More specifically, for example, when the difference value is "-80", that is, when the number of actual prize balls is 80 more than the number of pseudo prize balls, the difference value "80" is changed to "15". A normal point icon (point icon with a display mode indicating +15) for displaying the number of prize balls in the normal jackpot game effect is attached with "30" by the number corresponding to the integer value "5" divided by Determine the prize ball mode to be changed to the point icon. By configuring in this way, the difference value can be eliminated by using the display mode (point icon) for indicating that the prize balls have been won during the jackpot game.

After completing the processing of S5552A, it is next determined whether there is a remainder in the value divided by the processing of S5551A (S5553A), and if it is determined that there is a remainder (S5553A: Yes), The subtraction mode corresponding to "16" is determined as the mode of displaying the number of prize balls corresponding to the value (S5554A), the performance mode during the jackpot game including the determined various modes is determined (S5555A), and this processing is terminated. do. Also, in the process of S5553A, if it is determined that there is no remainder value after division (S5553A: No), the process of S5554A is skipped, the process of S5555A is executed, and then this process ends.

Here, the processing contents of S5553A and S5554A will be described with a specific example. For example, if the difference value is "-80", that is, if the number of actual prize balls is 80 more than the number of pseudo prize balls, the difference value "-80" is divided by "15". The integer value is "5" and the remainder value is "5". Then, five subtraction modes of "16" are determined as the number display modes corresponding to the remainder value "5". As a result, in the normal jackpot game presentation, the display mode of the point icon to which "+15" is added is changed to the display mode (subtraction mode) of the point icon to which "+16" is added by five points.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2336, the processing contents of the small winning related processing (S5304A) will be described. Figure 2336 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of small hit related processing (S5304A). This small hit related process (S5304A) is a control process executed when it is determined that a small hit related command is received in the above-described hit related process (S4282A of FIG. 2331), and a small hit game is executed. A process for determining whether or not to execute a small winning game effect based on that, and a process for measuring the number of prize balls acquired during the small winning game (the number of actual prize balls) are executed.

Specifically, when the small hit related process (S5304A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit standby flag 223agC is set to ON (S5601A), and if it is determined to be set to ON ( S5601A: Yes), that is, when the execution condition for interrupting the execution of the pseudo small winning performance and executing the small winning game performance corresponding to the actual small winning game is satisfied, next, the small winning start It is determined whether a command has been received (S5602A), and if it is determined that a small hit start command has been received (S5602A: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S5603A), and a continuous chan mode (Fig. 2296 ( A display command for updating the number of times display mode of the display area Dm17 in a) is set (S5604A), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S5602A, if it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S5602A: No), then it is determined whether the ending command is received (S5605A), and it is determined that the ending command is received If (S5605A: Yes), set the small hit end command for display (S5606A), set the small hit standby flag 223agC to OFF (S5607A), and end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5605A that the ending command has not been received (S5605A: No), the process proceeds to S5608A. Also, in the processing of S5601A, if it is determined that the small hit standby flag 223agC is not set to ON (S5601A: No), that is, the execution condition for executing the small hitting game effect corresponding to the actual small hitting game is not established, since various effects based on the reception of the small hit related command are not executed, the processing of S5602A to S5607A is skipped and the processing of S5608A is performed.

Next, in the processing of S5608A, it is determined whether a small winning prize command (a command for indicating that the game ball has entered the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game) is received (S5608A ), if it is determined that it has been received (S5608A: Yes), then the value corresponding to the number of prize balls in the specific winning hole 65a is added to the value of the small prize ball number counter 223aeC (S5609A), It is determined whether the standby flag 223agC is set to ON (S5610A), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5610A: Yes), a display command for showing the prize balls obtained during the small hit game is set (S5611A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5610A, if it is determined that the small hit standby flag 223agC is not set to ON (S5610A: No), the condition for executing the effect for showing the prize balls acquired during the small hit game is established. Therefore, the process of S5611A is skipped and this process ends. Also, in the process of S5608A, if it is determined that the small hit winning command has not been received (S5608A: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2337, the variable display setting process (S4113A) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2337 is a flow chart showing the contents of this variable display setting process (S4113A). This variable display setting process (S4113A) is one process of the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113A) is based on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. A process of setting a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Moreover, based on the extracted stop type, the process of setting the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113A), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1C provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5701A). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1C is off (S5701A: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so to the processing of S5707A Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1C is on (S5701A: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1C is set to off (S5702A). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second variable probability state (S5703A). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the second probability variable state (S5703A: Yes), the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5704A) is executed, and then, out of the winning prize information storage area 223b, the The data corresponding to 1 special design is shifted (S5706A), and it transfers to the process of S5707A.

On the other hand, in the process of S5703A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the second probability variable state (S5703A: No), from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4152A of the command determination process (see FIG. 2328) The variation pattern in the extracted variation display performance of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5705A). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

S5704A or the first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S5705A is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process. send to. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol The data corresponding to the first special symbol is shifted in the winning information storage area 223b (S5706).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2C provided in the RAM223 is set to ON (S5707A). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d2C is not on (that is, it is off) (S5707A: No), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110 Therefore, the processing of S5711A is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2C is on (S5707A: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d1C is set to off (S5708A). Next, the processing of the special figure 2 variation display setting processing (S5709A) is executed, and then, with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the winning prize corresponding to the set display variation pattern command Data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted in the information storage area 223b (S5709A).

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S5709A is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process. . In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1C or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2C is set to ON (S5711A). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1C or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2C is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5711A: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1C or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2C is on (S5711A: Yes), when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1C is on sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1C to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2C is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2C to off (S5712A).

Then, the stop classification extracted from the special figure 1 stop classification command or the special figure 2 stop classification command received in the process of S4271A of the command determination process (see FIG. 2328) is set (S5713A), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, set the display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, even if the determination result is out. be done. If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2338, the processing contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation display setting processing (S5704A) will be described. Figure 2338 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 fluctuation display setting processing (S5704A). This special figure 1 fluctuation display setting process (S5704A) is the above-described fluctuation display setting process (see S4113A in FIG. 2337), setting the production mode of the fluctuation production corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in the second probability change state Execute the process for

When the special figure 1 fluctuation display setting process (S5704A) is executed, first, the reading of the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is executed (S5801A), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the process of S5801A is specified. It is set in the variable time counter 223aaC of FIG. 1 (S5802A). Next, based on the current variation time, the pseudo effect table 222aaC is referred to determine the pseudo effect mode (S5803A), the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined pseudo effect mode is set (S5804A), and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2339, the processing contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting processing (S5709A) will be described. Figure 2339 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 2 fluctuation display setting processing (S5709A). This special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5709A) executes the process for setting the production mode of the fluctuation production corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation in the above-described fluctuation display setting process (see S4113A in FIG. 2337). do.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process (S5709A) is executed, first, the reading of the fluctuation time corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is executed (S5851A), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time read in the process of S5851A is specified. The variable time counter 223abC in FIG. 2 is set (S5852A). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is set (S5853A), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2340, the effect update process (S4111A) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 2340 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S4111A). This effect update process (S4111A) is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and includes a process of updating the values of various counters provided in the RAM 223, and a second It is a process of updating the performance contents of the pseudo performance (pseudo small winning performance) executed during the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol in the variable probability state.

In the production update process (S4111A), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223abC is greater than 0 (S5901A). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 223abC is greater than 0 (S5901A: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 223abC (S5902A). On the other hand, in the process of S5901A, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 223abC is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) If it is determined (S5901A: No), skip the process of S5902A, of S5903A Go to processing. Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223aaC is greater than 0 (S5903A). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223aaC is greater than 0 (S5903A: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223aaC is subtracted by 1 (S5904A).

Next, the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 223aaC and the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 223abC are read (S5905A), and the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 223abC is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 223aaC. and the remaining time is calculated (S5906A). The remaining time calculated in the processing of S5906A is stored in the value of the remaining time storage area 223adC (S5907A), the value of other various counters is subtracted by 1 (S5908A), and then the pseudo effect update processing is executed (S5909A), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223aaC is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5903A: No), the above S5904A to S5907A are skipped, The processing of S5908A is executed, the processing of S5909A is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 2341, processing contents of the pseudo effect update processing (S5909A) will be described. FIG. 2341 is a flow chart showing the details of the pseudo effect update process (S5909A). This pseudo effect update process (S5909A) is a process executed in the above-described effect update process (S4111A), and the effect mode of the pseudo small hit effect executed during the special figure 1 jackpot variation of the second probability change state is executed.

Specifically, when the pseudo production update process (S5909A) is executed, first, the current is in the pseudo production, that is, the second probability variation state, and the special figure 1 jackpot variation is executed It is determined whether it is in the state (S6001A), and if it is determined that it is in the pseudo production (S6001A: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to execute the pseudo small hit production (S6002A). Here, in the third modified example of the sixty-sixth control example, the effect mode of the pseudo effect executed during the variation of the special figure 1 jackpot is determined by referring to the pseudo effect table 222aaC. It is configured to execute a pseudo performance in which a pseudo small winning performance is executed at different execution intervals according to the performance mode. Then, a performance scenario corresponding to the determined pseudo performance mode is set by referring to the pseudo performance table 222aaC, and the performance scenario is updated by updating the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223aaC, and a new pseudo small win is generated. The timing at which the performance is executed can be determined.

In the processing of S6002A, when it is determined that it is the execution timing of the pseudo small hit effect (S6002A: Yes), next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit is fluctuating (S6003A), special figure 2 small If it is determined that the hit is fluctuating (S6003A: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining time until the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation is stopped and displayed is less than 1 second (S6004A), and it is less than 1 second When it is determined (S6004A: Yes), the small hit standby flag 223agC is set to ON (S6005A), the effect mode for waiting for the start of the small hit effect is determined (S6006A), and the display corresponding to the determined various modes command is set (S6007A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6003A, if it is determined that it is not during special figure 2 small per fluctuation (S6003A: No), or if it is determined that the remaining time until special figure 2 fluctuation stop is not less than 1 second (S6004A : No) determines execution of the pseudo small hit effect (S6008A), adds a value corresponding to the number of prize balls corresponding to one small hit game to the value of the pseudo prize ball number counter 223adC (S6009A), A consecutive win mode indicating the number of times of execution corresponding to the pseudo small win to be executed this time is determined (S6010A), display commands corresponding to the determined various modes are set (S6007A), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the processing of S6001A, if it is determined that the present is not in the pseudo production (S6001A: No), or in the processing of S6002A, if it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the pseudo small hit production (S6002A: No) , the process ends.

<Regarding the 4th modification of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2342 to 2359, a fourth modification of the 66th control example described above will be described. In the third modification of the sixty-sixth control example described above, the second variable probability state and the jackpot game state are configured to be continuous as a game period advantageous to the player, and the small winning game executed during the second variable probability state The number of prize balls (the number of actual prize balls) acquired in the second variable state is made difficult to be notified during the second variable state, and during the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, the number of actual prize balls and the jackpot game are displayed. The total number of prize balls obtained by summing up the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls for the attacker) can be notified to the player.

On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the number of actual prize balls obtained during the second probability variable state and the number of attacker prize balls obtained during the jackpot game are notified at the time when the prize balls are obtained. They are different in terms of their structure. Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game is set differently according to the number of actual prize balls obtained during the second probability variable state. It is different in that it is configured to be possible. Furthermore, according to the number of prize balls (the number of general prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first general ball entrance 630a during the second variable probability state, the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the game ball wins to the specific winning port 65a can be set to be different, and the number of general prize balls acquired during the second variable state is not notified to the player. It is different in that it is configured to

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the content of the privilege (prize ball) given during the jackpot game according to the game result during the second variable probability state, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. can be done.

<Regarding Effect Contents in the Fourth Modification of the Sixty-sixth Control Example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 2342 to 2344, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modified example, characteristic effects will be described. Specifically, the effect content executed during the second probability variable state and the effect content executed during the jackpot game after the second probability variable state is completed, that is, the effect content executed during the advantageous game period , the points different from the above-described third modified example will be mainly described.

Fig. 2342 (a) shows the production mode of the small hit effect executed when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery during the big hit fluctuation (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation) of the first special symbol in the second variable state. It is a figure showing. In the fourth modified example of the 66th control example, when the small winning game is executed during the second variable probability state, the small winning production is executed, and the small winning production production mode is a small winning production. It is configured to change according to the number of times the winning game is executed. The diagram shown in FIG. 2342(a) shows an example of the display screen displayed in the first small hit effect in the second variable probability state. Elements that are the same as those shown in the third modified example are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 2342(a), the third symbol for showing that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the second special symbol is stopped to indicate that the small hit is won. is displayed in the display area Dm2 with the third symbol "341". Then, as a display mode indicating that the current small winning game is the first time, "V times 1 time" is displayed in the display area Dm17. In addition, in the figure, since no game ball is entered into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the first small winning game, the number of winning balls acquired in the small winning game is Nothing is displayed in the display area Dm18 for showing.

In the center of the main display area Dm, a character 801 imitating a rabbit uses a watering can 801j to water a bowl 801h. "Grow" is displayed. In the fourth modification of the 66th control example, when the game ball enters the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the big winning game according to the number of small winning games executed during the second variable probability state, The number of awarded balls to be paid out can be changed and set, and the performance mode of the small winning performance is also configured to progress according to the number of executions of the small winning game (the actual number of winning balls).

Specifically, according to the increase in the number of fruit balls, buds sprout from the pot 801h, buds are formed, flowers (see FIG. 2342(b)) bloom, and then seeds are harvested (see FIG. 2342(b)). 2343(a)) progresses, and the number of prize balls during the big winning game is notified by an icon appearing from the seeds. In the diagram shown in FIG. 2343(b), an icon 801ma indicating that the number of prize balls during the jackpot game has increased to "20" appears from the seed 801m, and in the sub display area Ds, "This jackpot is a prize ball. will increase." is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 2344, every time a game ball enters the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, "+20" is attached. The point icons P1 and P2 are displayed, and the characters of "big wins and points accumulate" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a display mode for indicating that the number of prize balls is larger than usual.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth modification of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2345 to 2350, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this fourth modification will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modified example, in contrast to the third modified example of the 66th control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. Other elements are the same, and descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 2345, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification will be described. FIG. 2345 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 2345, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modified example stores the number of prize balls in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 2300) of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example described above. The difference is that a selection table 202aaD is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The number of prize balls selection table 202aaD selects the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) to be paid out when game balls enter the second specific prize winning port 650a of the second variable prize winning device 650 which is open-controlled during the jackpot game. This is a data table that is referred to when determining, and defines a minimum value of "15" and a maximum value of "20" as the number of unit winning balls.

Here, the contents defined in the prize number selection table 202aaD will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2346 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the number-of-balls selection table 202aaD. As shown in FIG. 2346, the number-of-balls selection table 202aaD contains "15", "16", "15", "16", and " 20” is stipulated. Specifically, when the value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD is in the range of "0 to 900" and the value of the general winning ball number counter 203abD is in the range of "0 to 75", the number of unit prize balls "15" is defined, and the number of unit prize balls "16" is defined for the range where the value of the general prize ball number counter 203abD is "76-".

In addition, when the value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD is in the range of "901 to 1350" and the value of the general winning ball number counter 203abD is in the range of "0 to 75", the unit prize ball number is "15". However, when the value of the general prize ball number counter 203abD is in the range of "76 to 100", the unit prize ball number is "16", and when the value of the general prize ball number counter 203abD is in the range of "101~" The number of unit prize balls "20" is defined. Furthermore, when the value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD is in the range of "1351~" and the value of the general winning ball number counter 203abD is in the range of "0 to 75", the number of unit prize balls is "20". , the value of the general prize ball number counter 203abD is defined as "15" for the range of "76-".

Although the detailed description will be given later, the small winning ball number counter 203aaD determines that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 during the small winning game executed during the second variable probability state. A counter for measuring the number of prize balls (actual number of prize balls) obtained based on the general prize ball number counter 203abD, the first general ball entrance 630a (right general ball entrance) during the second probability variable state It is a counter for measuring the number of prize balls (the number of general prize balls) obtained based on the entry of game balls into the box. In addition, the number of actual prize balls that can be obtained in one small winning game is configured to be 45 (15 x 3 balls) on average, and the game balls enter the first general ball entrance 630a. It is constructed so that the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters is 10.

In other words, the contents of the number-of-balls selection table 202aaD are preliminarily set so that a larger value can be easily determined as the number of unit number of prize balls when there is variation between the number of actual prize balls obtained during the second probability variable state and the number of general prize balls. stipulated. More specifically, in the case where a relatively long period is set as the period of the second probability variable state (fluctuation period of special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation), even though the right-handed game is continuously executed, When the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery is small, or the number of times the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery is lower than the design value (1/2), and the number of small winning games in the second probability variable state is small. , the number of general prize balls is relatively large with respect to the number of actual prize balls. On the other hand, when a relatively short period is set as the period of the second probability variable state (fluctuation period of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), the number of times the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is the design value (1/2 ), when the number of small winning games in the second probability variable state is large, and further, when suppressing the right-handed game during the period when the small winning game is not executed, for the number of actual prize balls As a result, the number of general prize balls is relatively small.

In this way, as the game content during the second variable probability state, if the game content is different from the case where the right-handed game is continuously performed and the game content is different from the case of winning each prize ball on average, each By configuring the number of unit prize balls to be larger during the jackpot game than in the case of the game content of winning the prize balls, the player can make trial and error of the game method during the second variable probability state. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the fourth modification, it is possible to determine the number of unit prize balls according to the number of actual prize balls instead of the number of times the small hit game is executed during the second probability variable state. is executed, it is possible to reduce the number of actual prize balls by interrupting the right hitting game during the small winning game. In other words, the number of unit prize balls can be determined by the player selecting the game method. By constructing in this way, by intentionally reducing the number of real prize balls that can be obtained in the small winning game, the number of attacker prize balls that can be obtained in the big winning game is increased, and all the prizes that can be obtained in total. It is possible to provide novel playability such as increasing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2347, the structure of RAM203 which MPU201 of the main control unit 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 4th modification has is demonstrated. FIG. 2347 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modified example. As shown in FIG. 2347, in the fourth modification, the number of small winning balls is reduced to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the 66th control example described above. The difference is that a counter 203aaD, a general winning ball counter 203abD, and a winning ball storage area 203acD are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The small hit prize ball number counter 203aaD is a counter for measuring the number of actual prize balls acquired during the second probability variable state, and during the second probability variable state, to the second specific winning hole (specific winning hole 65a) When a detection signal indicating that a game ball has won a prize is received, the value of the corresponding number of prize balls is added (see S4053A in FIG. 2353). The value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD is referred to when determining the unit winning ball number in the big winning game (S3172A in FIG. 2355), and the value is cleared after the unit winning ball number is determined (FIG. 2355 S3177A).

The general prize ball number counter 203abD is a counter for measuring the number of general prize balls acquired during the second variable probability state, and is the first general ball entrance 630a (right general ball entrance) during the second variable probability state. When receiving a detection signal indicating that a game ball has entered into, the value of the corresponding number of winning balls is added (see S4055A in FIG. 2353). The value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD is referred to when determining the unit winning ball number in the big winning game (S3172A in FIG. 2355), and the value is cleared after the unit winning ball number is determined (S3178A in FIG. 2355). ).

The prize ball number storage area 203acD is a data area for temporarily storing the unit prize ball number of the jackpot game, and is the unit prize ball number determined in the jackpot middle prize ball determination process (see S3151A in FIG. 2355). Any one of "15" to "20" is stored. Then, after the jackpot game ends, "15", which is the normal number of unit prize balls, is stored. Then, when a game ball wins into a specific winning hole (second specific winning hole 650a) during a jackpot game, the information indicating the number of unit prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 203acD is read out, and a corresponding action is taken. Determines the number of prize balls to be paid out.

Next, referring to FIG. 2348, the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification will be described. FIG. 2348 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 2348, in this fourth modification, for the configuration of the ROM222 that the MPU221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the 66th control example described above has, small winning mode selection The difference is that table 222aaD is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The small winning mode selection table 222aaD is a data table referred to when determining the performance mode of the small winning performance executed during the small winning game, and is the number of small winning games executed during the second variable probability state. , and the value corresponding to the number of general prize balls acquired during the second variable probability state, different modes are defined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2349, the contents defined in the small winning mode selection table 222aaD will be described. FIG. 2349 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning mode selection table 222aaD. As shown in FIG. 2349, the small winning mode selection table 222aaD specifically corresponds to the number of small winning games executed during the second variable probability state and the number of general prize balls acquired during the second variable probability state. Different modes are defined depending on the value to be used and the variable mode of the current situation.

Specifically, if the number of small hits is 5 and the value of the period general prize ball number counter 223aaD is in the range of "0 to 10", if the current variable mode is "seed", the "seed" is stipulated. In other words, a small hit effect is defined in which the variable mode does not change. It should be noted that when the number of small hits is 5, the variable mode does not change to "bud", "bud", or "flower", so the mode after the change is defined in the corresponding part. do not have. On the other hand, if the current variable mode is "seed", "bud" is defined for the range of the value of the period general winning ball number counter 223aaD from "11 to". That is, when the fifth small winning game is executed, the larger the number of obtained general prize balls, the easier the variable mode of the small winning effect progresses.

Here, as described above, in the fourth modification, the number of unit prize balls during the jackpot game is the number of actual prize balls obtained during the second probability variable state (the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game), It is configured to be determined according to the number of general prize balls acquired during the second variable state (the number of prize balls acquired by entering the ball into the right general ball entrance 630a), and the second variable state In the middle, the number of actual prize balls is reported, but the number of general prize balls is not reported.

Therefore, during the second probability variable state, only the degree of progress of the variable mode in the small hit effect can be used as information for allowing the player to grasp the number of general prize balls. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, if the number of small hits is 10 and the value of the period general prize ball number counter 223aaD is in the range of "0 to 20", if the current variable mode is "seed", "seed" is the current state. If the variable aspect of is "bud", "bud" is defined. In other words, a small hit effect is defined in which the variable mode does not change. On the other hand, when the value of the period general prize ball number counter 223aaD is in the range of "21~", if the current variable mode is "seed", "bud" is selected, and if the current variable mode is "bud", "Tsubomi" is defined. That is, when the tenth small winning game is executed, the larger the number of obtained general prize balls, the easier the variable mode of the small winning effect progresses.

If the number of small hits is 15 and the value of the period general prize ball number counter 223aaD is in the range of "0 to 40", if the current variable mode is "seed", the "seed" is the current variable mode. If is "bud", "bud" is defined, and if the current variable mode is "bud", "bud" is defined. In other words, a small hit effect is defined in which the variable mode does not change. On the other hand, when the value of the period general winning ball counter 223aaD is in the range of "41~", if the current variable mode is "seed", "bud" is selected, and if the current variable mode is "bud", "Tsubomi" is defined as "flower" if the current variable mode is "bud". That is, when the 15th small winning game is executed, the larger the number of general winning balls already acquired, the more easily the variable mode of the small winning effect progresses.

Finally, if the number of small hits is 20 and the value of the period general prize ball number counter 223aaD is in the range of "0 to 50", if the current variable mode is "seed", "seed" is If the variable mode of is "bud", "bud" is defined, if the current variable mode is "bud", "bud" is defined, and if the current variable mode is "flower", "flower" is defined. . In other words, a small hit effect is defined in which the variable mode is difficult to change. On the other hand, the value of the period general winning ball number counter 223aaD ranges from "51 to", regardless of the current variable mode, "flower" is defined. That is, when the number of won general prize balls is large at the time when the 20th small winning game is executed, the variable mode is always easily progressed to "flower".

Next, with reference to FIG. 2350, the structure of RAM223 which MPU221 of the sound ramp control apparatus 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 4th modification has is demonstrated. FIG. 2350 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of RAM 223 of MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 2350, the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modified example is the audio ramp control in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modified example of the 66th control example described above. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the device 113 (see FIG. 2307 (b)) differs in that a period general prize ball number counter 223aaD and a determined prize ball number storage area 223abD are added, and the other Elements are identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The period general prize ball number counter 223aaD is a counter for measuring the number of general prize balls acquired during the second variable probability state, and the right general ball entrance 630a (second When it is determined that a prize type command indicating that a game ball has entered the 1 general ball entrance 630a) is received, the value of the corresponding number of prize balls is added. Then, it is referred to when determining the performance mode of the small winning performance executed during the small winning game (see S5652A in FIG. 2359).

The determined prize ball number storage area 223abD is a data area for temporarily storing information regarding the unit prize ball number included in the jackpot command output from the main controller 110, and is a data area for temporarily storing the jackpot command (jackpot start command). ) is received, the information relating to the number of unit winning balls included in the received jackpot command is read, and the read information is stored. Then, when determining the effect mode of the jackpot game effect, the stored information is read, and the effect mode corresponding to the read information is determined. Also, when a winning command for indicating that a game ball has entered a specific winning hole (second specific winning hole 650a) is received during a jackpot game, the stored information is read out and the read information is read out. The display mode of the point icon P for indicating that the number of unit prize balls corresponding to has been obtained is determined.

<Regarding control processing in the fourth modified example of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2351 to 2359, control processing in the fourth modified example will be described. In this fourth modified example, part of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 execute The difference is that part of the control processing performed is changed. Other processing contents are the same, and description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 2351 to 2356, the contents of the control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modified example, the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the 66th control example described above is executed later according to the number of prize balls paid out during the second variable probability state. The difference is that the number of unit prize balls can be determined differently during the jackpot game, and the processing contents regarding the difference are different. Specifically, instead of the switch reading process (S191A of FIG. 2309), the switch reading process (S1191A of FIG. 2351) is replaced with the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S2507A of FIG. 2316). The difference is that the stop process (S12504A in FIG. 2354) is executed, and the jackpot end process (S1983A in FIG. 2356) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and description of the same processing contents is omitted.

FIG. 2351 is a flow chart showing the contents of the switch reading process (S1191A). This switch reading process (S1191A) is different from the switch reading process (see S191A in FIG. 2309) of the third modification described above, if there is information indicating the winning of a specific winning hole (second specific winning hole 650a). When it is determined (S113A: Yes), a prize ball determination process for determining the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (S195A), and a point at which this process ends and a set prize ball determination process (S196A) are executed. , and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2352, processing contents of prize ball determination processing (S196A) executed in the switch reading processing (see S1191A in FIG. 2351) will be described. FIG. 2352 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize ball determination process (S196A). In this prize ball determination process (S196A), a process for determining the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed according to the currently set number of unit prize balls.

Specifically, when the prize ball determination process (S196A) is executed, first, the information (prize ball information) stored in the prize ball number storage area 203acD is read out (S4001A), and the unit prize indicated by the prize ball information is read out (S4001A). It is determined whether the number of balls is other than "15" (S4002A), and if it is determined that it is other than "15" (S4002A: Yes), the information (unit number of prize balls) stored in the prize ball information Determine the corresponding number of prize balls (S4003A), set a prize type command corresponding to the number of special prize balls (S4004A). is stored in the prize ball payout buffer (S4006A), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4002A, if it is determined that the number of unit prize balls indicated by the prize ball information is not other than "15" (S4002A: No), it corresponds to the winning to the specific winning hole (second specific winning hole 650a). A winning type command is set (S4005A), the process of S4006A is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2353, the processing contents of the set prize ball determination processing (S196A) will be described. FIG. 2353 is a flow chart showing the details of the set prize ball determination process (S196A). In this set prize ball determination process (S196A), a process for measuring the number of various prize balls during the set (during the second variable probability state) is executed.

Specifically, when the set prize ball determination process (S196A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is the second probability variation state (S4051A), and if it is determined that it is not the second probability variation state ( S4051A: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is in the second probability variable state (S4051A: Yes), then the stored state stored this time is the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) (S4052A), and if it is determined to be the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) (S4052A: Yes), the corresponding number of prize balls is added to the value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD (S4053A).

Next, it is determined whether the information stored this time is the right general entrance 630a (first general entrance 630a), and it is determined that it is the right general entrance 630a (first general entrance 630a). If so (S4054A: Yes), the corresponding number of prize balls is added to the value of the general prize number counter 203abD (S4055A), and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably measure the number of various prize balls to be paid out during the second variable probability state. In addition, in the fourth modification, when determining the number of unit prize balls during the jackpot game, the number of prize balls obtained (paid out) during the second variable probability state is referred to. Without limitation, it may be configured to refer to the number of prize balls won (paid out) during the game period including the period before the second probability variable state is set. In this case, for example, a general prize The range for adding the value of the number of balls counter 203abD may be determined not only during the second variable probability state but also during the jackpot game, during the variable probability state, and during the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2354, the processing contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing (S12507A) will be described. FIG. 2354 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing (S12507A). In this first special symbol variation stop processing (S12507A), after setting a jackpot scenario for the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S2507A in FIG. 2316) in the third modification of the 66th control example described above ( S3105A), the difference is that the processing for determining the number of balls during the jackpot (S3151A) is added, and the other processing contents are the same.

Here, with reference to S2355, the processing contents of the process for determining the number of balls during the big hit (S3151A) will be described. FIG. 2355 is a flow chart showing the details of the process for determining the number of balls during the big hit (S3151A). In this jackpot middle prize ball number determination process (S3151A), a process for determining the unit prize ball number during the next jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, when the jackpot middle prize ball number determination process (S3151A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is the second probability variable state (S3171A), and if it is determined that it is the second probability variable state (S3171A: Yes), read the value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD (S3172A), read the value of the general winning ball number counter 203abD (S3173A), and refer to the prize ball number selection table 202aaD using the read value Then, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) during the current jackpot game is determined (S3174A), the determined number of prize balls is stored in the prize number storage area 203acD (S3175A), and the determined number of prize balls is indicated. A big hit command including information is set (S3176A), the value of the small winning ball number counter 203aaD is cleared (S3177A), the value of the general prize ball number counter 203abD is cleared (S3178A), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the second probability variable state in the processing of S3171A (S3171A: No), it is a jackpot game in a state where the conditions for changing the number of unit prize balls are not satisfied, so the processing of S3172A to S3178A is skipped, and this process ends. In this case, "15" stored as the initial value in the number-of-prize-balls storage area 203acD is determined as the number of unit prize-balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2356, the contents of the jackpot ending process (S1983A) will be described. FIG. 2356 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process (S1983A). In this jackpot end process (S1983A), a process for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends and a process for clearing the information set for executing the jackpot game are executed.

Specifically, when the jackpot end processing (S1983A) is executed, first, the value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S1991A), and the jackpot type Based on this, the variable probability flag 203aaC is set (S1992A), then it is determined whether there is storage information in the number of prize balls storage area 203acD (S1993A), and if it is determined that there is storage information (S1993A: Yes), Set the storage information of the number of balls storage area 203acD to "15" (S1994A), set the status command based on the setting status of the variable probability flag 203aaC, and the value of the time saving counter 203h (S1995A), set the flag 203k during the jackpot It is set to off (S1996A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1993A that there is no stored information ("15") (S1993A: No), the process of S1994A is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1995A.

As described above, in the fourth modification, according to the number of prize balls acquired (paid out) during the second variable probability state, the number of unit prize balls in the subsequent jackpot game can be changed. Configure. By configuring in this way, even when the jackpot game of the same jackpot type is executed, the upper limit of the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls for the attacker) that can be obtained during the jackpot game can be varied. , it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and novel game.

In addition, in the fourth modified example, when one jackpot game is completed, a process of returning the determined number of unit prize balls to the initial value ("15") is executed. It may be configured such that prize balls are paid out according to the number of unit prize balls determined so as to straddle a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 2357 to 2359, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth modification will be described. In the fourth modified example, in place of the winning type processing (S4286A in FIG. 2328), the winning type processing (S4263A in FIG. 2357) is replaced with the jackpot production mode setting processing (S5402A in FIG. ) in place of the big hit production mode setting process (S5452A in FIG. 2358) and the small hit related process (see S5354A in FIG. 2336). Other processing contents are the same, and the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 2357, the processing contents of the winning type processing (S4263A) will be described. FIG. 2357 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the prize type processing (S4263A). In this winning type processing (S4263A), according to the winning type command output from the main controller 110, the number of awarded balls is specified by referring to the second prize ball table 222ab, and the prize corresponding to various situations is determined. A process for counting the number of balls is executed.

Specifically, when the winning type processing (S4263A) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the consecutive win flag 223ag is set to ON (S4251A), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4251A). , the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous-chan flag 223ag is set to ON in the process of S4251A (S4251A: Yes), then the game situation set in the sub-state setting area 223g is read (S4252A), and the current It is determined whether it is the second probability variable state (S4253A), and if it is determined that it is the second probability variable state (S4271A: Yes), it is determined whether it is in the small hit game (S4272A), and in the small hit game If it is determined that there is (S4272A: Yes), the point corresponding to the received prize type command is determined by referring to the second prize ball table 222ab (S4273A), and the value indicated by the determined point is the value of the corresponding counter. (S4274A), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S4272A, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (S4272A: No), then it is determined whether the winning type of this time is the right general ball entrance (first general ball entrance 630a). If it is determined (S4275A) and it is determined to be the right general entrance (first general entrance 630a) (S4275A: Yes), the same processing as S4273A described above is executed, and then the determined point is indicated. The value is added to the value of the period general award ball number counter 223aaD (S4276A), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2358, the processing contents of the jackpot effect mode setting processing (S5452A) will be described. FIG. 2358 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the jackpot effect mode setting process (S5452A). In this jackpot effect mode setting process (S5452A), the jackpot game effect effect mode to be executed during the jackpot game is determined with respect to the jackpot effect mode setting process (see S5402A in FIG. 2333) in the above-described third modification. The content of processing for this is different.

Specifically, when the jackpot production mode setting process (S5452A) is executed, first, the information stored in the determined prize ball number storage area 223abD is read (S5251A), and the determined number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) is 15 (S5252A), and if it is determined to be 15 (S5252A: Yes), a display jackpot start command corresponding to the normal jackpot production mode is set) (S5253A), this End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S5252A, if it is determined that the number is not 15 (S5252A: No), a display jackpot start command including a mode indicating an increase in prize balls is set (S5254A), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the small hit related processing (S5354) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 2359 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of small hit related processing (S5354). In this small hit related process (S5354), when the number of times of the small hit game executed during the second probability variable state becomes a specific number (multiple of 5), whether to change the variable mode of the small hit production decision processing is performed.

Specifically, after executing the processing of S5602A to S5606A which are the same as the small hit related processing (S5304A in FIG. 2336) of the third modification of the 66th control example described above, and after finishing the processing of S5604, this small It is determined whether the number of hits is a multiple of 5 (S5651A), and when it is determined that it is a multiple of 5 (S5651A: Yes), the small winning performance mode is determined by referring to the small winning mode selection table 222aaD. (S5652A), set a small winning start command for display including the determined effect mode (S5653A), and terminate this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5651A that the number is not a multiple of 5 (S5653A: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the fourth modification, the number of actual prize balls acquired during the second probability variable state and the number of attacker prize balls acquired during the jackpot game are notified at the time of winning the prize balls. It is different in that it is configured to Then, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game is set differently according to the number of actual prize balls obtained during the second probability variable state. It is different in that it is configured to be possible. Furthermore, according to the number of prize balls (the number of general prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first general ball entrance 630a during the second variable probability state, the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the game ball wins to the specific winning port 65a can be set to be different, and the number of general prize balls acquired during the second variable state is not notified to the player. It is different in that it is configured to

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the content of the privilege (prize ball) given during the jackpot game according to the game result during the second variable probability state, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. can be done.

As described above, in the fourth modification, according to the number of prize balls acquired (paid out) during the second variable probability state, the number of unit prize balls in the subsequent jackpot game can be changed. Configure. By configuring in this way, even when the jackpot game of the same jackpot type is executed, the upper limit of the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls for the attacker) that can be obtained during the jackpot game can be varied. , it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and novel game.

In addition, in the fourth modified example, when one jackpot game is completed, a process of returning the determined number of unit prize balls to the initial value ("15") is executed. It may be configured such that prize balls are paid out according to the number of unit prize balls determined so as to straddle a plurality of jackpot games.

In the 66th control example described above, the period from the start of the variable probability jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (after the start of the right-handed game) to the end of the variable probability state is defined as the advantageous game period (specific period). , the information (first information) on the number of prize balls won by the attacker during the round game period (first period) during the specific period is displayed using the point icon P, and the ending period (second period ) is configured to display information obtained by adding information (first information) regarding the number of prize balls for the attacker and information (second information) regarding the number of general prize balls. In other words, the display mode for the first information displayed during the first period and the display mode for the first information displayed during the second period are made different.

By configuring in this way, compared to the case of displaying the display mode during the second period using the display mode related to the first information displayed during the first period as it is, the information related to the number of winning balls for the attacker (first information) and information (second information) about the number of general winning balls can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the 66th control example described above, the period from the start of the variable probability jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (after the start of the right-handed game) to the end of the variable probability state is the advantageous game period (specific period ), and configured to measure the number of award balls for the attacker and the number of general award balls, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to set a specific period within the range including the advantageous game period. For example, a period including a special symbol fluctuation period (jackpot fluctuation period) before execution of the probability variable jackpot game may be set as the specific period.

In this case, it is preferable that the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the general ball entrance 63 provided in the left area of the game board 13 is also measured as the number of general prize balls. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of general winning balls obtainable during the specific period.

Further, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 may be added as the ball entrances for which the number of general winning balls is to be measured. By constructing in this way, even during the period when the special symbol variation is being executed, it is possible to facilitate the game in which the game balls are fired willingly to always increase the number of general prize balls.

Furthermore, in the 66th control example described above, when the right-handed game period (probability variable state, time-saving state, jackpot game period) in which the player is advantageous ends, the measurement of various prize balls is configured to end. (although it is configured to end the specific period), but not limited to this, the right-handed game period (probability variable state, time saving state, jackpot game period) in which the player is advantageous The measurement of various prize balls may be continued until a period (for example, a period until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times) elapses.

By configuring in this way, even when the right-handed game period is once terminated, when the right-handed game period is set again within a predetermined period, the measurement values of various prize balls are continuously accumulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily display a larger number of prize balls.

In addition, in the above-described 66th control example, the number of prize balls acquired during a specific period is accumulated, and various effects are executed according to the accumulated number of prize balls. However, it is not limited to this, and when the number of accumulated prize balls reaches a specific value (for example, the last two digits are square) , it may be configured so as to make it easier to give advantageous benefits to the player.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to provide erasing means capable of erasing at least part of the values of the number of prize balls measured during the specific period. With this configuration, when the measured value of the number of prize balls exceeds the specific value, part of the measured value is erased by the erasing means, so that the measured value of the number of prize balls is reduced to the specific value again. It is possible to make it easier for the player to play the game for the purpose. Further, unlike the erasing means described above, a second erasing means capable of erasing all the values of the various numbers of winning balls that have been measured may be provided. By configuring in this way, by erasing all the number of prize balls measured during the specific period, it is possible to make it easier to play a game in which the number of prize balls is newly measured.

In this case, at least one of the erasing means and the second erasing means may be configured so that the measured value of the number of winning balls is erased when an arbitrarily operable operation means is operated. In addition, erasing by the other erasing means may be configured to be established based on a specific condition (e.g., elapse of a specific time) regardless of the operation on the operating means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing during the specific period, at least part of the measured value of the number of winning balls will be erased.

Further, when the configuration of the erasing means described above is applied to the first modification and the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example, even if the number of prize balls reaches the upper limit once, Since the measured value of the number of prize balls can be decreased within a specific period, it is possible to shift to a state in which prize balls can be obtained again.

Further, as described above, when the erasing means is provided, the information about the erased measured value may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can grasp it. good.

<Another example of the first effect in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2360 and 2361, the first alternative example of effect in the 66th control example described above will be described. In the 66th control example described above, when the probability variable jackpot is won, the probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal A game in which a second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than a symbol low probability state) and a probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is high, that is, an advantageous game that is advantageous to a player can be executed. Was.

Then, the set variable probability state continues until the next big win game is executed, and when the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, the variable probability big win in which the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game is always won. It was configured as In addition, by setting an upper limit (7 times) to the number of times the variable probability state is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game based on winning the variable probability jackpot, the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state If you win the probability variable jackpot (first hit), after the 7th jackpot game including the first hit, the limit (variable limit) that can be set continuously is reached, and the low probability state of the special pattern is forced. was configured to be set

Further, in the above-described 66th control example, a series of effects (chance mode, victory mode) are executed during the advantageous game period, which is the period from when the first win is won until the variable probability limit is reached, so that the advantageous It is constructed so as to make it easy to think that a plurality of jackpot games executed during a game period are one jackpot game. In addition, among the number of prize balls won during the advantageous game period, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the specific prize opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 that is open-controlled in the jackpot game (attacker prize balls number) is configured to notify the player at any time, and among the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period, the first general ball entrance 630a (upper right general ball entrance 630a) or the second general ball entrance 630b (lower right general ball entrance 630b) The number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entered (lower right general ball entrance 630b) (the number of general prize balls) By structuring so as to notify the player, it is configured to make it easy for the player to think that a plurality of jackpot games executed during an advantageous game period are one jackpot game.

On the other hand, this first effect example is different in that the display mode corresponding to the number of general winning balls displayed on the ending screen of the final jackpot game is different. Other contents are the same as those of the 66th control example described above, and the description of the same contents will be omitted.

<Regarding the effect contents of the first effect example in the 66th control example>
First, referring to FIG. 2360, among the various effects executed in the first additional example of effect, the content of the characteristic effect different from the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above. explain about FIG. 2360 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the chance mode end screen.

As shown in FIG. 2360, in this first effect, for the display screen (see FIG. 2235(b)) displayed on the chance mode end screen executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 66th control example described above, The difference is that the display mode displayed in the display area Dm11 is changed, and that the display area Dm11c is newly formed. Other display elements are the same, and the same display elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the 66th control example described above, as shown in FIG. 2235(b), in the display area Dm11, there is a display mode ("40P" in the figure) corresponding to the cumulative number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period. is displayed so that the player can easily grasp the total number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period. On the other hand, in this first effect another example, as shown in FIG. It is configured to display a display mode individually corresponding to the game ball that has entered the lower right general ball entrance 630b).

Specifically, in the diagram shown in FIG. 2360, four game balls enter the first general ball entrance 630a during the advantageous game period, and two game balls enter the second ball entrance 630b. shows the display screen displayed on the ending screen of the final jackpot game when the ball enters the first general ball entrance 630a, and four point icons Pa~ pd and two point icons P10 and P11 individually corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the second general ball entry port 630b are displayed in the display area Dm11.

By configuring in this way, not only the total number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period but also the number of game balls entered into the ball entrance from which the general prize balls are paid out during the advantageous game period are entered. It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand each type of ball mouth. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 during play, particularly the flow state of the game balls in the right area where the game balls mainly flow during the advantageous game period.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixty-sixth control example described above, a plurality of general ball entrances (first general An entrance 630a (upper right general entrance 630a) or a second general entrance 630b (lower right general entrance 630b)) is provided, and a first general entrance 630a (upper right general entrance) 630a), 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the game ball enters the second general ball entrance 630b (lower right general ball entrance 630b) is constructed so that one prize ball is paid out. That is, when one game ball enters the first general ball entrance 630a (upper right general ball entrance 630a), and 10 game balls enter the second general ball entrance 630b (lower right general ball entrance 630b). It is configured so that the total number of general prize balls paid out is the same as when 1 game balls enter. In this case, even if the display mode shown in the above-described 66th control example, that is, the display mode corresponding to the total number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period is displayed in the display area Dm11, There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp how many game balls have entered which general ball entrance.

On the other hand, in this first effect example, the first general ball entrance 630a (upper right general ball entrance 630a) or the second general ball entrance 630b (lower right general ball entrance 630b) during the advantageous game period ), so that the number of game balls that enter the ball entrance where general prize balls are paid out during the advantageous game period is displayed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to understand each type of ball entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2360, each point icon displayed corresponding to an individual ball entry contains information (“+10”, "+1") is attached, the number of balls entered into the general ball entrance during the advantageous game period and the total number of general prize balls can be determined simply by checking the individual display modes displayed in the display area Dm11. and the player can grasp.

In addition, in this first effect example, the display area Dm11 is divided into a first ball-entering area Dm11a and a second ball-entering area Dm11b. are displayed in the first ball entry area Dm11a, and point icons P10 and P11 displayed based on the ball entering the second general ball entrance 630b are displayed in the second ball entry area. It is configured to be displayed on Dm11b. By configuring in this way, even when the number of balls entering the general ball entrance during the advantageous game period increases, the plurality of point icons displayed in the display area Dm11 are displayed in a complicated manner. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2360, the point icon (first point icon) individually corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the first general ball entrance 630a is displayed in a circular shape, and the second general ball entrance 630b. A point icon (second point icon) individually corresponding to the entry of a game ball is configured to be displayed in a square. Therefore, even if the number of balls entering the general ball entrance during the advantageous game period increases, the player can easily identify the plurality of point icons displayed in the display area Dm11.

Furthermore, in this first alternative example of effect, the order in which the point icons are displayed in the first ball-entering area Dm11a and the second ball-entering area Dm11b is defined in advance, and corresponds to the defined order. It is configured so that each point icon is displayed in order in the area to be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2360, when displaying a plurality of first point icons, the first point icons are displayed in order from the left side of the first ball-entering area Dm11a, and a plurality of second point icons are displayed. is displayed, the second point icons are displayed in order from the left side of the second ball entering area Dm11b. Areas (unit areas) in which each point icon is displayed are given a display mode corresponding to the order in which each point icon is displayed (numbers (1 to 4) arranged in ascending order in the figure).

With this configuration, even when the number of balls entering the general ball entrance during the advantageous game period increases, the player can easily identify the plurality of point icons displayed in the display area Dm11. can do.

In addition, in this first effect example, as shown in FIG. 2360, the first point icon and the second point icon are formed by forming the first ball-entering area Dm11a and the second ball-entering area Dm11b. However, without being limited to this, in one display area, the first point icon and the second point icon are displayed to the corresponding ball entrance may be configured to be displayed in the order in which they hit the ball. Even in this case, each point icon is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type of the general entrance into which the ball is entered, thereby allowing the player to identify the plurality of point icons displayed in the display area Dm11. can be done.

Furthermore, in this first effect example, the display area Dm11c in which the display mode corresponding to the total number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period is displayed is the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. is formed on the lower right side of the This display area Dm11c is formed smaller than other display areas (Dm10, Dm11, Dm12) relating to the number of prize balls, and displays the total number of general prize balls obtained during the advantageous game period in a display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A corresponding representation is displayed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm11c is configured to be displayed continuously during the advantageous game period. In other words, even on the display screen displayed while the round game is being executed (see, for example, FIG. 2234(a)), it is in a manner that is more difficult to visually recognize than the jackpot game effect being executed in the main display area Dm. configured to be displayed.

That is, in the 66th control example described above, the number of general prize balls obtained during the advantageous game period is configured not to be displayed until the advantageous game period ends, and the player is notified when the advantageous game period ends. On the other hand, in this first effect example, the number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period is difficult for the player to identify (display area Dm11c) until the advantageous game period ends. display mode), and when the advantageous game period ends, it is displayed in a mode (display mode displayed in the display area Dm11) that is easier for the player to identify than during the advantageous game period. It is configured to notify the player.

In other words, in this first effect example, as the information regarding the number of general prize balls obtained during the advantageous game period, information regarding the total number of general prize balls obtained during the advantageous game period is reported during the advantageous game period. , When the advantageous game period ends, in addition to information on the total number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period, information on the number of balls entered into each general ball entrance during the advantageous game period is sent to the player. It is configured so that it can be notified.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player who is interested in the number of general prize balls obtained during the advantageous game period continue to be interested in the display mode displayed on the display screen.

In addition, in this first effect example, the ending screen of the final jackpot game shows a pattern in which both the display mode displayed in the display area Dm11 and the display mode displayed in the display area Dm11c are displayed. However, without being limited to this, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm11c may be hidden when the display mode displayed in the display area Dm11 is displayed.

<Regarding the control process in the 1st additional example of the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 2361, the contents of the control processing in this first example of effect will be described. In this first effect example, in contrast to the above-described 66th control example, among the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the display mode to be displayed during the ending period of the final jackpot game is determined. The difference is that the contents of the processing for performing are different, and the other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

Figure 2361 is a command determination process (see S4112A in Figure 2256) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The command determination process (see S4112A in Figure 2256) is executed when the command is received. is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S4799A) executed when an ending command is received in step S4799A.

This ending process (S4799A) is different from the ending process (see S4709A in FIG. 2262) in the above-described 66th control example, when it is determined that the value of the variable limit counter 223ae is 1, that is, the advantageous game period is The difference is that the processing contents to be executed when it is determined to be the final jackpot game to end are different, and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the ending process (S4799A) is executed, first, the same processes of S4801A and S4802A as the ending process (see S4709A in FIG. 2262) in the 66th control example described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S4802A, when the value of the submissive variable limit counter 223ae is 1, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is the final jackpot game in which the advantageous game period ends (S4802A: Yes), the specific Based on the value of the prize ball counter 223ab, the effect mode for notifying the points acquired in the current set is determined (S4803A), and based on the value of the unit general prize ball counter 223ad, during the current set The number of balls entering the general entrance is specified (S4891A).

Here, in this first effect example, when executing the process of updating the value of the unit general prize ball number counter 223ad based on the received prize type command, the type of the prize type command received this time and the number of times of reception (the number of balls entered) are associated with each other to update the information. The value of the unit general prize ball number counter 223ad is configured to be updated according to the number of general prize balls put out, and the type of the prize type command received this time and the number of receptions (number of winning balls) can be stored in another storage area, and processing may be provided.

After that, the number of entering balls for each type of general entrance is specified (S4892A), the display mode for displaying the display mode corresponding to the number of entering balls is determined for each specified type (S4893A), and The processing of S4806A to S4808A, which is the same as the ending processing in the V.66 control example (see S4709A in FIG. 2262), is executed, and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4801A that the consecutive chance flag 223ag is not set to ON (S4801A: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4802A that the value of the variable limit counter 223ae is not 1 ( S4802A: No), after executing the same processing of S4809A to S4812A as the ending processing in the 66th control example (see S4709A in FIG. 2262), the processing of S4808A is executed and this processing ends.

As described above, in this first effect example, as a display mode displayed during the ending period of the final jackpot game, the number of general prize balls acquired during the advantageous game period is displayed to each general ball entrance. Since the display mode in which the player can grasp the number of winning balls can be set, the player can be made to grasp in detail how the number of general winning balls was obtained during the advantageous game period.

In addition, in this first effect example, the display screen shown in FIG. 2360 is configured to be displayed during the ending period of the final jackpot game. It may be configured to be displayed during the withdrawal mode (during the time saving state), or may be configured to be displayed when the continuous chan period (right hitting game period) ends, or the continuous chan period (right It may be configured to be displayed in the normal state (left-handed game period) after the end of the beating game period).

As described above, in this first additional effect example, the display mode for indicating the number of general prize balls is displayed in the display area Dm11c during the advantageous game period, and is displayed when the advantageous game period ends. It is configured to be displayed in the area Dm11. By configuring in this way, during the continuous game (right-handed game period), as a display mode for showing the same information, the number of general winning balls, during the first period (during the advantageous game period), the first display is displayed. A mode (display mode of the display area Dm11c) can be displayed, and a second display mode (display mode of the display area Dm11) different from the first display mode can be displayed during the second period (during the end period of the advantageous game period). .

Therefore, even a player who did not notice the existence of the first display mode can be made to grasp the number of general winning balls by the second display mode. In addition, since the second display mode is a display mode that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first display mode, the second display mode can be used even by the player who did not notice the existence of the first display mode. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the number of general winning balls.

It should be noted that the display mode of the display area Dm11c shown in this first additional example of effect is diverted to the sixty-sixth control example, the first modification of the sixty-sixth control example, and the second modification of the sixty-sixth control example. Also good.

<Regarding the second effect example in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2362 to 2364, a second example of effect in the 66th control example will be described. In the first modification of the sixty-sixth control example described above, when the total number of prize balls acquired during the continuous chan mode (right-handed game period) exceeds the upper limit (10000 pieces), until the continuous chan mode ends, It was configured to execute processing for prohibiting the payout of prize balls. By constructing in this way, it has been suppressed that the privilege (prize ball) is given excessively to the player.

However, if the period during which no prize balls are paid out continues for a long period of time, there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced. On the other hand, in this second effect example, after the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive chan mode (right-handed game period) exceeds the upper limit number (10000), a prize is awarded when a predetermined period has passed. It is configured to be able to cancel the restricted state in which the putting out of balls is prohibited. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player's willingness to play from decreasing due to a long period of time during which no prize balls are paid out.

Further, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the remaining period until the restricted state is released. By constructing in this way, it is determined whether the player who has moved to the restricted state continues to play without paying out prize balls or suspends the game until the restricted state is lifted. More specifically, stopping the shooting of the game ball during a game state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player is more appealing to the player than the case where it is not stopped. It is possible to provide an advantageous novel game property.

<Regarding the effect content of the second effect example in the 66th control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 2362, the display screen displayed when the total number of prize balls obtained during the consecutive game mode (right-handed game period) exceeds the upper limit (10000) (restricted state) will be described. do. As shown in FIG. 2362, in this second effect example, the display screen (see FIG. 2265) during the restricted state in the first modified example of the sixty-sixth control example described above is displayed until the restricted state is released. The difference is that the display mode for indicating the remaining time is displayed in the display area Dm21, and other display elements are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same display elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

In this second example of effect, the condition for releasing the restricted state is satisfied and the restricted state is released when 30 seconds have passed since the restricted state was set. Specifically, when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed since the limit state was set, a part of the total number of prize balls (the value of the prize ball counter 203abA during consecutive wins) that triggers the setting of the limit state ( 1010) is executed to create a situation in which the conditions for setting the restricted state are not established.

Since FIG. 2362(a) shows the display screen when 10 seconds have passed since the restriction state was set, the display area Dm21 shows the remaining time until the restriction state is released. "20 seconds until partial release" is displayed as the mode. After that, when the conditions for releasing the restricted state are satisfied, as shown in FIG. 2362(a), "0 seconds" is displayed in the display area Dm21, and the characters "partially released" are displayed in the main display area Dm. . Then, the value (points) corresponding to the total number of prize balls displayed in the display area Dm12 is variably displayed as a value "8995P" for indicating that 1010 has been subtracted, and the value that has been subtracted this time is displayed in the display area Dm22. "-1010P" is displayed to indicate "1010P".

Then, as a display mode for indicating that new prize balls are being paid out, a point icon corresponding to the prize balls paid out from the treasure box 810 corresponding to the jackpot game being executed is displayed.

As described above, in this second effect example, when the total number of prize balls acquired during the continuous chan mode (right-handed game period) exceeds the upper limit (10000), and a predetermined period has passed It is configured to be able to cancel the restricted state in which the payout of prize balls is prohibited. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player's willingness to play from decreasing due to a long period of time during which no prize balls are paid out.

In addition, since the display screen can display the remaining period until the restriction state is released and the number of remaining winning games, it is possible to determine whether or not to proceed with the game until the restriction state is released. It can be made easy for the player to decide.

Specifically, when the number of remaining jackpot games is large at the time when the limit state is reached, one game is performed by interrupting the game to enter the game ball into the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Decide a game method that lengthens the jackpot game period and cancels the restriction state before the end of all the remaining jackpot games, or if the number of remaining jackpot games is small when the limit state is reached, during the jackpot game A game ball is made to enter a specific prize winning port 65a of a variable prize winning device 65 and the present advantageous game period is quickly terminated, thereby shifting to a pullback mode in a restricted state and efficiently executing a game in a continuous mode. It is possible to determine the game method.

<Regarding control processing in the second example of effect in the 66th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 2363 and 2364, the processing contents of the control processing in this second example of effect will be described. In this second effect example, in contrast to the first modified example of the 66th control example described above, as a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, a set prize ball determination process (S132A in FIG. 2271) Instead of executing the set prize ball determination process (S11132A), and the timer update process (Fig. 2364 (a) S10251A reference) is executed), and as control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the processing of S4219A executed in the command determination processing (see S4132A of FIG. 2273) The difference is that other command determination processing (S14132A in FIG. 2364(b)) is added and executed. Other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 2363, the processing contents of the set prize ball determination processing (S11132A) will be described. FIG. 2363 is a flow chart showing the details of the set prize ball determination process (S11132A). In this set prize ball determination process (S11132A), after setting the upper limit flag 203acA to ON with respect to the set prize ball determination process (S132A in FIG. 2271) of the first modification in the 66th control example described above, The difference is that a process for setting the release timer value is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the set prize ball determination process (S11132A) is executed, first, the processing of S201A to S207A, which is the same as the set prize ball determination process (S132A in FIG. 2271) of the first modification in the 66th control example described above, is performed. After that, a value of 30 seconds is set to the value of the cancellation timer (S10201A), a cancellation timer command is set as a command indicating that the value of the cancellation timer has been set (S10202A), and the processing of S205A is executed. Execute and terminate this process.

In this second effect example, the value of the release timer is set to a value corresponding to 30 seconds. It may be configured to determine by lottery from among them. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of time required from when the restricted state is set until when the cancellation condition is met.

In addition, in this second effect example, the release condition (the value of the release timer) is set when the restricted state is set. , By establishing the setting condition of the release condition, it may be configured to set the release condition, for example, when a new special symbol lottery is started in a state where the restriction state is set, the release timer may be configured to execute processing for setting the value of .

In addition, the timing at which the cancellation condition is satisfied is determined in advance before the restriction state is set, and the timing from the setting of the restriction state to the timing at which the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied is reached. may be configured to be a period during which the restriction state continues, for example, the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first jackpot game in the victory mode is determined in advance as the timing when the release condition is established. However, until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the first jackpot game in the victory mode, for example, when the limit state is set when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the final jackpot game, The period during which the restricted state continues is 10 seconds, and after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the first jackpot game in the victory mode, for example, when 40 seconds have passed since the start of the final jackpot game, the limited state is activated. If set, the restricted state may be continued until 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first big win game in the next victory mode. By configuring in this way, the number of winning balls obtainable during the victory mode can be greatly varied depending on the timing at which the restricted state is set.

Next, the contents of the timer update process (S10251A) will be described with reference to FIG. 2364(a). FIG. 2364(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the timer update process (S10251A). In this timer update process (S10251A), the value of the release timer set in the set prize ball determination process (see S11132A in FIG. 2363) is periodically updated, and when the value of the release timer becomes 0, the upper limit A process of turning off the flag 203acA (releasing the restricted state) is executed.

Specifically, when the timer update process (S10251A) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the release timer is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is restricted (S10501A). If it is determined to be larger (S10501A: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the cancellation timer (S10502A), and it is determined whether the value of the cancellation timer after the subtraction is 0 (S10503A). In the process of S10503A, if it is determined that the value of the cancellation timer after subtraction is 0 (S10503A: Yes), the cancellation condition is satisfied, so the upper limit flag 203acA is set to OFF (S10504A). , 1010 is subtracted from the value of the winning ball number counter 203abA during consecutive wins (S10505A), a timer canceled command is set to indicate that the restricted state has been canceled due to the elapsed period (S10506A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10501A that the value of the release timer is greater than 0 (S10501A: No), or if it is determined that the value of the release timer is not 0 in the processing of S10503A (S10503A: No) , the process ends.

As described above, in the second example of effect, when the value of the release timer reaches 0, the condition for releasing the restricted state can be established. In addition, when the conditions for canceling the restricted state are met, the value of the prize ball number counter 203abA during the consecutive game is partially erased, so the number of prize balls corresponding to the partially erased value is obtained. If so, it is possible to set the restricted state again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive rewards (prize balls) from being given to the player due to the cancellation of the restricted state.

In addition, in this second effect example, the value to be partially erased is fixed to "1010", but it is not limited to this, and any value within a predetermined range (for example, 500 to 3000) can be selected by lottery. It may be configured such that it is determined and the determined value is subtracted (erased) from the value of the winning ball number counter 203abA during consecutive games. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of prize balls that can be obtained from when the restricted state is canceled until when the restricted state is set again.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2364(b), the processing contents of the other command determination processing (S14132A) will be described. FIG. 2364(b) is a flow chart showing the details of the other command determination process (S14132A). In this other command determination process (S14132A), a command (timer release command) related to the value of the release timer output from main controller 110 and a command indicating that the restricted state has been released (timer release complete command) are received. In this case, a process of determining the display mode to be displayed on the display screen is performed.

Specifically, when the other command determination process (S14132A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a release timer command has been received (S14201A). A corresponding display mode (display mode displayed in display area Dm21) is determined (S14202A), and the process proceeds to S14203A. That is, in the process of S14202A, the remaining period until the restriction state is canceled is specified based on the information included in the received cancellation timer command, and the display mode for indicating the remaining period is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, the display mode (remaining time display mode) determined in the process of S14202A and displayed in the display area Dm21 is configured to be displayed with subtraction periodically (every second). is doing.

In the processing of S14203A, it is determined whether or not the timer-released command has been received (S14203A), and if it is determined that it has been received (S14203A: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the upper limit release is determined (S14204A), and the total prize balls The value of the number counter 223aa, that is, the value displayed in the display area Dm12 is subtracted by 1010 (S14205A), the display mode indicating the value of the total number of winning balls counter 223aa after the subtraction is determined (S14206A), and the determined display mode is determined. is set (S14207A), a process corresponding to the other command is executed (S14208A), and this process ends.

Here, in the processing of S14206A, the display mode to be displayed in the display area Dm12 is determined as the display mode corresponding to the value of the total number of prize balls counter 223aa after subtraction, and the display mode is determined as the display mode corresponding to the subtraction value "1010". A display mode to be displayed on Dm 21 is determined. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of winning balls that can be acquired until the next limit state is set by visually recognizing the display mode displayed in the display area Dm12. Become. In addition, it is possible for the player to grasp the value "1010" subtracted by the current release by visually recognizing the display mode of the display area Dm21. Therefore, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In addition, in this second example of effect, a condition is established based on the elapsed time as a condition for erasing part of the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive game, but the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive game Another condition may be provided as a condition for erasing a part of the . On the other hand, a condition may be provided that is established when a specific operation is executed.

As described above, in the above-described 66th control example and each modified example, among the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the number of prize balls for the attacker can be displayed at any time, and the number of general prize balls is configured to be displayed. describes a configuration in which a non-display period and a display period are provided, or a visible display period and a more difficult-to-visually display period are provided. However, without being limited to this, A part of the number of prize balls (the number of general prize balls) can be displayed at any time, and the number of other prize balls (the number of prize balls for attackers) can be displayed during periods when it is not displayed and when it is displayed, or when it is displayed visibly. and a period in which the image is displayed in a more difficult-to-visually-recognized manner than that period.

As described above, in the above-described 66th control example and each modified example, at least a part of the number of won prize balls is displayed at all times during consecutive games (right-handed game period). However, without being limited to this, during the right-handed game period, among the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the prize ball jackpot game, the number of attacker prize balls can be displayed at any time, and the general prize The number of balls is described as having a period in which it is not displayed and a period in which it is displayed, or a period in which it is displayed in a visible manner and a period in which it is displayed in a more difficult-to-visible manner. However, some of the number of prize balls (number of general prize balls) can be displayed at any time, and the number of other prize balls (attacker prize balls) can be displayed with a period of non-display and a period of display, or displayed visibly. It is also possible to provide a period during which the image is displayed and a period during which the image is displayed in a less visible manner than the period. In addition, in the above-described 66th control example and each modification, during consecutive chan (right-handed game period), out of the number of general prize balls acquired during advantageous games, the first general ball entrance 630a, the second Only the number of general prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the general ball entrance 630b is targeted for notification of the number of prize balls. 63) may also be subject to notification of the number of prize balls. In addition, it is configured so that all the number of general prize balls is displayed when the advantageous game period ends, but without being limited to this, a part of the number of general prize balls (to the first general ball entrance 630a It may be configured to display only the number of prize balls obtained based on the number of balls entered. In this case, the type of the general ball entrance where the number of winning balls is displayed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot game to be executed or the game state set after the advantageous game period has elapsed. .

<Other information>
Conventionally, during a specific game period (for example, a jackpot game period), a song is played and lyrics corresponding to the song played on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. There are things that improve interest in games.
However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that the song being reproduced and the displayed lyrics are out of sync. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed and the timing for reproducing the music arrives, the audio lamp control device 113 instructs the audio output device 226 to reproduce (output) the audio data of the corresponding music. Since it is configured to output a command and output to the display control device 114 a command indicating the display content to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the progress of the jackpot game. , it is possible to match the start timings of music reproduction and lyrics display, but after that, the music reproduction state and the lyrics display state cannot be synchronized, and the music reproduction process, or In addition, there is a problem that, for example, when the process of displaying the lyrics is stagnated, the song being reproduced and the displayed lyrics are out of sync.
Moreover, there is a pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration in which the lyrics are not displayed from the beginning, out of concern that the displayed lyrics may be out of sync with the song being played. is not displayed, the player cannot comprehend the meaning of the music, resulting in a reduced performance effect.
On the other hand, like the conventional pachinko machine 10, the lyrics are displayed in time with the reproduction timing of the music, and the lyrics are displayed only when there is a discrepancy between the music being reproduced and the displayed lyrics. is configured to be hidden. Then, when a situation occurs in which the lyrics are not displayed, it is preferable to display information about the music being reproduced (information different from the lyrics) instead of the lyrics.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the misalignment between the song being reproduced and the displayed lyrics, and even if the lyrics are hidden. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.
<Summary of described technology>
<Summary instep>
Operation means (effect button 22) that can be operated by the player and operation effective period setting means (special symbol in the second part effect in the battle effect) that can set the operation effective period during which the operation to the operation means is effectively determined a process of determining an operation valid period according to the result of a lottery), and determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means during the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means. Possible operation determination means (process for determining a long-press operation) and based on the determination that the predetermined operation has been performed by the operation determination means, the effect mode (HP value) is changed from the first mode to Effect variable means (processing for varying the display mode of the HP gauge 890 according to the decrease in the HP value) capable of stepwise varying to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode; A game machine having a specific effect executing means (a process for executing a processing effect when the remaining HP value becomes 0) capable of executing a specific effect when the effect mode is changed to the second mode. , a first period (a period in which no non-decreasing period is set) in which the production mode can be varied, and a second period (a non-decreasing period) in which it is more difficult to vary the production mode than in the first period period) can be determined based on the predetermined operation (long-pressing operation) executed in a state in which the effect mode can be varied (a state in which the remaining HP value is not the final HP value). A game machine armor 1 characterized by having (an entry lottery during a non-decrease period).
<Summary B>
Operation means operable by a player, operation valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period during which an operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and during the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means an operation determining means capable of determining that a continuous operation is being performed for the operating means continuously for a predetermined period; and the operation determining means determining that the continuous operation is being performed. production variable means capable of stepwise changing a production mode from a first mode to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode; In a gaming machine having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when changed to the two modes, the continuous operation is more likely to be executed during the first period than during the first period. A first effect control (HP based on a long press operation when a non-decrease period is not set) that makes it easier to change the effect mode to the second mode than when the continuous operation is terminated in a second period that is shorter than the second period. control to decrease the value) and the case where the continuous operation is terminated in a second period shorter than the first period than the case where the continuous operation is continuously performed for the first period. Effect control means capable of executing a second effect control (control to cancel the non-decrease period by interrupting the long-pressing operation in the state where the non-decrease period is set) to easily change to the second mode A gaming machine Otsu 1 characterized by having
<Summary Hei>
Operation means operable by a player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal determination When the determination result by the means satisfies a predetermined execution condition, the performance mode can be changed stepwise from the first mode to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode. A performance variable means, and a final mode determination means (a process for determining a final HP value) capable of determining a final mode in which the performance mode can be varied by the performance variable means from among the plurality of modes. In the gaming machine, the effect variable means sets, as the predetermined execution conditions, a case where a first execution condition is established (when it is determined that a pressing operation is performed), and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition. is established (when a long-pressing operation is determined), the performance mode is changed to the final mode in a different variable mode.

<Summary page>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. effect mode determining means capable of determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including at least modes; updating means capable of updating effect values based on information relating to the effect executed by the effect executing means; The effect mode determination means is a first decision for determining the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means (based on winning a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the chance notice effect) and determining the effect mode of the chance advance notice effect by the updating means, and when the effect value updated by the updating means satisfies the execution condition, the first effect mode is set as the effect mode regardless of the determination result by the determining means. A game machine 1 characterized by being capable of executing a second determination (forcibly determining the performance mode of the chance notice performance based on the value of the performance execution counter 223aah).
<Summary>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. performance mode determination means capable of determining one performance mode from a plurality of performance modes including at least one mode, and identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result are dynamically displayed storage means capable of storing determination information indicating that the first effect mode has been determined as the effect mode of the effect to be performed for a predetermined period of time; and a first decision for determining the performance mode based on the determination result stored in the storage means as the performance mode of the performance to be executed during a period in which the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is dynamically displayed a second determination of determining the first performance mode when the information is stored (a process of using the performance mode used for the losing performance stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag for the winning performance); A gaming machine 戊1 characterized by being executable.
<Summary>
Determining means capable of executing determination, privilege providing means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result, and operating means operable by the player. , operation determination means capable of determining that the operation means has been operated, effective period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid by the operation determining means, and setting of the effective period valid period informing means capable of informing the player of at least a part of the valid period set by means; and an operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means based on the determination of the operation of the valid period setting means, As the valid period, a first valid period and a second valid period longer than the first valid period can be set, and the determination result obtained by the determination means is the specific determination result. The game machine 1 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second validity period than in the case of no specific determination result.
<Summary>
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; Determination means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A game having execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means can easily acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which acquisition is more difficult than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. In the machine, a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect in which the effect mode is determined based on information about the results of the multiple determinations performed by the determination means (executed after the number of times of residual probability change is 20 means for executing each mode effect), and the gaming machine varies the range of the determination included in the information referred to when determining the effect mode of the period effect (targeting the look-ahead result A gaming machine 1 characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not to play, and to select a range by the player.

<Summary of technical ideas 1>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, in a part of each control example described above, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of normal symbols from a low probability state to a high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and a special symbol In a part of the lottery result (loss) where the lottery result is different from the jackpot winning, a chance for setting a high-probability state of normal symbols is established.
In other words, it is configured so that a privilege different from the big winning game can be given even to the player who did not win the big winning in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, the player is provided separately with the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.
Furthermore, in some of the control examples described above, depending on the game state that is set, the easiness of establishment of the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is different, specifically , If the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won when the special symbol lottery is executed, time-saving winning (normal symbols (whether or not there is an opportunity to set a high probability state)), and if a game state other than the normal state is set, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the jackpot winning It is configured so that only the presence or absence can be determined.
By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, as an opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, it is possible to establish a jackpot winning or a short time winning in the special symbol lottery, other than the normal state. In the game state of (2), as an opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols, a jackpot election in a special symbol lottery can be established. That is, the normal state in which the presence/absence of time-saving winning can be determined is more likely to establish the opportunity for setting the high-probability state of normal symbols than in the game state other than the normal state. Therefore, each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is set to a low probability state, and the normal state, which is the most difficult game state to win in each symbol lottery (game state that is disadvantageous to the player), is better than the other. A high-probability state of normal symbols can be set more easily than the game state of (1), and the player's willingness to play the game in the normal state can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above-described second control example, the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set is the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state , Second probability variable state) is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is set to a predetermined number (4 pieces) It is configured to be storable to the upper limit (possible to hold storage). And it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to win the time saving than the first special symbol lottery.
In other words, when the game state shifts from any game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to the normal state (from the game state advantageous to the player to the disadvantageous game state In the case of transition), during the normal state after the transition, the second special design based on the right to execute the second special design lottery held in the high probability state of the normal design before the transition (special design 2 reservation) It is configured to make it easy to win a time-saving election when a lottery is executed.
By constructing in this way, the player can receive a special symbol lottery that facilitates the return to the game state that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period even when the game state is changed from the game state that is advantageous to the player to the game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly declining when the normal state, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, is set. In addition, in order to execute more second special symbol lottery during the normal state, the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired, and the normal symbol high probability state to end the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal pattern ends.
In some of the control examples described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, it is configured to be able to set the high probability state of the normal symbol even when the special symbol lottery wins the short time, based on the jackpot winning. In order to end the high probability state of the normal design with the high probability state of the normal design (first short time) and the high probability state of the normal design (second short time) set based on the short time winning The easiness of establishment of the end condition is made different.

Specifically, it is configured so that the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the second time saving is more likely than the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the first time saving. In this way, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the high probability state of the normal design in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting opportunity (the establishment opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design) By making it possible to set, not only whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, but also the process of the game such as what trigger the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make the player interested, it is possible to facilitate the player to continue playing the game.
In addition, in some of the above-described control examples, in order to vary the degree of advantage of benefits given to the player in the high probability state of normal symbols, the ease of establishment of the time saving end condition (time saving number of times) However, without being limited to this, for example, when the first time reduction is set and when the second time reduction is set, the ease of acquiring the pending memory of the second special symbol lottery (electric The opening pattern of the accessory 640a) is varied, or the degree of advantage of the privilege given when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the high probability state of the normal pattern (for example, the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game, , the type of game state set after the end of the jackpot game) may be changed.
Next, the first modification of the second control example described above is the second control example described above in that it is configured so that the first special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set can be elected. It is different from the control example.
In the above-described second control example, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery is performed in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, and the second special symbol lottery is performed during the high probability state of normal symbols. It was configured to be able to acquire the execution right (special figure 2 reservation) of 2 special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, in addition to the big winning lottery, the short-time lottery is performed. By configuring it so that it is also executed, for a player who has experienced a game (advantageous game) in a high probability state with normal symbols that is advantageous to the player, after the advantageous game is completed, more than usual It is possible to execute a game (pull-back game) that easily returns to an advantageous game with a high probability.

However, in the above-described second control example, a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state, and the game (advantageous game) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is not executed. As long as there is no benefit from the time-saving lottery, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game without receiving the benefit of the time-saving lottery.
On the other hand, in the first modification of the second control example described above, since it is configured so that the time saving can be won even in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the time saving for the player It is possible to make it easier to receive the benefits of the lottery.
Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, based on the time-saving winning in the special symbol lottery, rather than the normal symbol high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery In the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern set by , the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) is likely to become longer. In other words, when the special pattern lottery wins the short-time win, the player can be provided with the privilege of facilitating the continuation of the normal pattern high probability period until the next big win win.
On the other hand, in the first modification of the second control example described above, when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short time (for example, time saving once) can be set. , During the period in which the short time saving state is set (ordinary figure high probability period), it is configured to be able to execute a game to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery. That is, in the first modified example, the pull-back game in the above-described second control example is configured to be executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the first modified example of the second control example described above, a plurality of variable times can be selected as the variable pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. In this first modification, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed in a display mode (time reduction symbol) for indicating the time reduction election after the fluctuation of the predetermined variation time. is stopped and displayed, a time saving state (time saving number of times) is set, and the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation to be executed next is stopped and displayed.
That is, the length of the period during which the time saving state continues is determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the longer the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state, the easier it is to acquire many special figures 2 reserves during the time saving state, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player can be obtained.
Next, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, in order to aim for further interest improvement with respect to the second control example described above, it is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set The contents of a privilege given when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery are constituted so as to be different according to the occasion (first time reduction or second time reduction) when a high probability state of normal patterns is set. In other words, the contents of the privilege given when the same jackpot type is set are different between when the big win is won during the first time saving and when the big win is won during the second time saving. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to make the player interested in which opportunity the time saving state was set, so that the game It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.
Furthermore, in the second modification of the above-described second control example, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short game time of one round game is a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. (2R jackpot) is executable, and after the 2R jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, that is, when the first time saving is set, the time saving state is set without executing the jackpot game. When set, that is, when the second time reduction is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the contents of the game to be executed.

In addition, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, the variable production executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the variable production executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are the same. It is configured to be executable in the production mode of. Specifically, after the special symbol variation for indicating that the jackpot winning (2R jackpot winning) in which the first short time is set is started, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and then the 2R jackpot game ends. The first period until the second time reduction is set and the second period, which is the variation time of the special symbol variation to indicate that the second time reduction is set, is set to be approximately the same period, and the period is set. It is configured to execute the production in a common production mode using.
By configuring in this way, when the first time saving is set and when the second time saving is set, the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the setting of the time saving state is common. Since the performance of the performance mode can be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state is set.
Next, in the above-described third control example, even in a state where a game state other than the normal state is set, it is greatly different from the above-described second control example in that it is configured so that the special symbol lottery can be short-time winning. are different.
By configuring in this way, for example, in the state in which the time saving state is set, when newly winning the time saving state, it is possible to update the remaining period in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state continues.

Also, when updating the remaining period of the time saving state, if it is updated so that the period of the time saving state continues longer than the current remaining period (advantageous update), or if it is updated to be shorter (unfavorable update) ) is configured to occur. In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving lottery and the number of times of time-saving (short-time) set when winning the time-saving lottery, there are cases where the time-saving lottery is an advantageous benefit for the player and a case where it is a disadvantageous benefit. It is configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property that includes a game property that expects time-saving winning and a game property that does not expect time-saving winning.
Furthermore, in the above-described third control example, it is configured such that the more consecutive time-saving winnings are made, the easier it is to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player without winning a jackpot. Specifically, a plurality of time-saving classifications with different degrees of advantage for the player are defined, and the more advantageous time-saving classifications are set as the time-saving winning is made in the time-saving state, the easier it is to set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the player does not win the jackpot, the easier it is to give the player an advantageous benefit.
In addition, when the time-saving type most advantageous to the player is set, it is easier to shift to the time-saving type disadvantageous to the player than when the time-saving type more disadvantageous than the time-saving type is set. It is configured to be In other words, it has multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantage, and based on the time-saving election, a time-saving type with a high degree of advantage is gradually set, and when the highest level of time-saving type is reached, the lowest level It is configured to make it easier to fall into the time-saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the time saving type advantageous to the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.
In addition, as in the third control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the time saving lottery in the state where the time saving state is set, that is, the setting of the new time saving state in the state where the time saving state is set As the processing content when the condition is satisfied, regardless of the content of the time saving state that has already been set (short time remaining), it may be configured to execute the processing of setting a new time saving state, or it may be configured to execute the processing that has already been set Determine the content of the working hours reduction state that has been set (short time remaining) and the content of the working hours reduction state that newly satisfies the setting conditions (short working hours), and whether to set a new working hours state based on the determination result Alternatively, the difference between the content of the time saving state that has already been set and the content of the time saving state in which the setting condition is newly established is calculated, and the difference is handled. It may be configured to perform a process of adding (subtracting) the information (time period) to the remaining time period of the time saving state that has already been set.

Moreover, you may comprise executable the process which waits that the time-saving state which newly set the setting condition is satisfied until the time-saving state already set is complete|finished. In this case, if a plurality of setting conditions for the time saving state are satisfied before the time saving state that has already been set is completed, all the time saving states for which the setting conditions are satisfied may be set in order. Alternatively, it may be possible to store up to a predetermined number of time-saving states advantageous to the player among the time-saving states during standby so that only the stored time-saving states are sequentially set.
Of course, the technical ideas described in the third control example described above may be applied to the respective control examples described above, and the technical ideas described in the tenth control example described above are used as conditions for setting the time saving state. In other words, the technical concept of setting the time saving state as the ceiling privilege may be applied to the above-described third control example.
Next, in the above-described fourth control example, it is possible to determine both the big hit winning and the time saving winning in one special symbol lottery. In addition, in the above-described fourth control example, it is configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election before the determination of the jackpot election is executed, and when the time-saving election is won, the judgment of the jackpot election is made in the special symbol lottery. Set the time saving state before it is executed, execute the judgment of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery while the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery It is configured so that the time saving state can be terminated at the timing of execution.
Specifically, when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, for a short period of time including the timing at which the big hit determination is executed in the special symbol lottery, so that the time saving state Configure. That is, in the above-described second control example, a game that is advantageous to the player toward the next big win (a game that makes it easy to execute a special symbol lottery) is executed for a predetermined period (up to 10000 times) without going through the big win game. In order to make it possible, a function (short time setting function) that can be elected in a special symbol lottery was provided, whereas in the above-described fourth control example, in addition to the above-described short time setting function, in the normal state, special Time is reduced in the middle of a game (left-handed game) executed in a normal state by structuring such that the timing of execution of big win determination by a special pattern lottery is in a time-saving state without facilitating the execution of the pattern lottery. A function (special lottery function) is provided to enable execution of the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a big hit determination of the special symbol lottery in the time saving state while making it difficult for the player to grasp that the special symbol lottery has won the time saving, so that the result of the special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to inform the unexpected lottery result.
Also, in the above-described fourth control example, the benefits given when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery are different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the normal state or in the time-saving state. It is configured such that when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state rather than in the normal state, a privilege (for example, a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous to the player is given. That is, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when both the short-time winning and the big win are won, a more advantageous privilege is given than when only the big win is won.
In addition, in the above-described fourth control example, as the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the suggestion mode (notification mode) that can suggest the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the presence or absence of the jackpot winning can be suggested. and a suggestive mode (notification mode) can be set.
In other words, by grasping the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed, it is possible for the player to predict the result of the big hit judgment executed for the special symbol lottery being executed and the result of the short-time winning judgment. Configure. Furthermore, as a variable effect, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the big win are configured to be different. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the determination for giving a plurality of different benefits for one special symbol lottery, while grasping (predicting) at least one determination result, It is possible to comprehend a suggestion mode for suggesting another determination result.

In addition, in the above-described fourth control example, it is better if the production result of the production (time reduction production) including the suggestion mode that can suggest the presence or absence of the time reduction winning is the production result including the suggestion mode that suggests the time reduction non-winning. , is configured so that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when the time-saving performance is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of awarding a plurality of privileges with different award judgments in one special symbol lottery, a judgment result suggestive presentation capable of suggesting the award judgment result for one privilege. is executed, the production result of the judgment result suggestion production is a production result that suggests that the privilege of 1 is not given, and other benefits are compared to the case where the judgment result suggestion production is not executed. By configuring so that the degree of expectation to be given is high, at the time when the judgment result suggesting performance is executed, compared to the case where the judgment result suggesting performance is not executed, it is easier to grant any privilege. A player can be notified of something.
As in the fourth control example described above, it is of course possible to apply a configuration in which a plurality of benefits can be given in duplicate based on the execution of one special symbol lottery. For example, based on the fact that one special symbol lottery has been executed, the technical idea of making it possible to win the jackpot lottery and the short-time lottery is applied to the above-described 10th control example to the 13th control example. Alternatively, the technical idea regarding the ceiling privilege used in the tenth to fifteenth control examples described above may be applied to the second to fifth control examples described above.
For example, when the technical concept of the ceiling privilege is added to the fourth control example, a maximum of three different privileges (jackpot winning, time saving winning, ceiling privilege) are executed by executing one special symbol lottery. can be given to the player, and the player can be interested in the result of the special symbol lottery. Further, in this case, it may be configured to be able to provide all three privileges that can be given, or it may be configured to discard at least one privilege. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which excessively advantageous benefits are provided to the player.
Next, the fifth control example described above is configured to be able to execute determination of time-saving election (time-saving lottery) in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and has a high probability. It is constituted so that short working hours are won in (most of lost winnings), and the short working hours state (second short working hours) set based on the short winning of working hours is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. is doing.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are likely to be alternately executed, and the above-described second time-saving end condition , is configured to set an end condition that is established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed continuously.
In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described fifth control example configured in this manner, when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set (jackpot probability 1/300) , the second time saving is set by winning the time saving with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time saving until the end condition of the second time saving is established.
In addition, as the end condition of the second time saving, the first time saving end condition that is established when the total number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second time saving reaches a specific number (100 times), and special in a predetermined order It is configured to set a second time saving end condition that is established when the pattern lottery is executed, and the second time saving end condition is established before the first time saving end condition is established. It consists of
Therefore, when the second time saving is set, the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second time saving end condition in order to end the second time saving as soon as possible.

In addition, according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the degree of advantage to the player is made different, and when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is configured so that it is easier to set an advantageous game state after the end of the big win game than when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed after the second time saving is finished.
In addition, in the fifth control example described above, when the type of special symbol lottery executed immediately after the time saving state is set satisfies the specific condition (the same type as the special symbol in which the time saving state is set), immediately after that Although it is configured to establish the time saving end condition by the special symbol lottery to be executed (the shortening time saving end condition is established), the configuration for establishing the shortening time saving end condition is not limited to this, for example , Even in the state where the time saving state is set, the time saving lottery can be executed, and when the time saving lottery is won during the time saving state, the time saving state with the contents of the newly won time saving state is set. You can
In the fifth control example described above, when the disadvantageous time-saving election is made in the second special symbol lottery, even in the first special symbol lottery until the disadvantageous time-saving state ends, a special symbol that is more disadvantageous than the normal state A lottery is configured to be executed. In other words, according to the result of one special symbol lottery, a penalty can be imposed on other special symbol lotteries.

As a game method for imposing such a penalty, for example, like the ninth control example described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel) (so-called , Simultaneous variation specifications), when the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing an inappropriate game in a specific game state (normal state), a disadvantageous time-saving state is set and disadvantageous While the time-saving state is set, a special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state may be executed in the first special symbol lottery.
Next, the above-described ninth control example is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within a predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.
In addition, in the above-described ninth control example, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be able to execute the time saving lottery, and only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving lottery. Rather, it is constructed so that one special symbol is won in a short time and a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the other special symbol is also won in a short time during the period until the variable display of the special symbol stops. ing.
In the ninth control example described above, the time saving A state is set when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is elected in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) variation time is set (time reduction winning variation state), until the variation of the first special symbol ends (that is, time reduction When the second special symbol wins the time-saving during the period until the first special symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed, the time-saving B state more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state is set. Configure.

By configuring in this way, when one special pattern wins short time, the other special pattern also wins short time, so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so that one special pattern wins short time, By making the player think that the other special symbol also wants to win the short time win while the special symbol showing the time short win is fluctuating, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game and improve the amusement of the game. can.
In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends, the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to execute processing for making it possible.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player continuing for a long period of time, and to improve the gambling spirit of the player. can be suppressed.
In addition, in a game machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or a small win) is won in one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol's variable display is forcibly stopped (discarded), or temporarily It is common to have a specification that only one of stopping (interrupting) is executed, but in the above-described ninth control example, the other special symbol is displayed with fluctuation depending on the jackpot type (or small hit type). It is configured to determine whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop. In other words, a big hit type for forcibly stopping (discarding) the fluctuation of the other special symbol and a big hitting type for temporarily stopping (interrupting) the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are defined.

By configuring in this way, when a game state disadvantageous to the player can be set by stopping and displaying one of the special symbols in a state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the other special symbol can be set. When winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that can cancel the fluctuation of special patterns, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous game state from being set, but winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts other special patterns is possible. In such a case, a situation in which a disadvantageous game state can be set continues, so that when a big win is won, the player can be interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols can be discarded, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved.
Of course, the playability of the ninth control example described above, that is, the playability of the simultaneous variation specifications may be applied to each of the control examples described above. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the simultaneous variation specification, the result of the other special symbol lottery is discarded based on one special symbol lottery, for example, based on the execution of one special symbol lottery, time is reduced. A configuration may be used in which the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) being executed is discarded when the prize is won or when the ceiling privilege is awarded.
<Summary of technical ideas 2>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, when the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number of times, the technical idea that the probability that an advantageous privilege will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases According to the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has means for acquiring the execution right of the second special symbol lottery (information can be acquired possible acquisition means) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) up to the upper limit number (4) (the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored possible storage means). Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the reserved and stored second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) (determination is performed based on the information stored in the storage means discriminating means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is jackpot winning (first determination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is the end for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern. It continues until the condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to be able to execute time-saving winning judgment separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that time-saving winning is determined in the time-saving winning judgment (it is the second determination result If it is done), it is possible to set a high probability state (specific setting) of normal symbols without executing a jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, a plurality of game states can be set, but only in the state where the normal state (specific period) is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning determination. be.
By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the fact that the second special pattern lottery is won, it is not the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation but the end timing of the jackpot game. When the high probability state of the normal design is set and the high probability state of the normal design is set based on the time saving winning in the second special design lottery, the high probability state of the normal design at the stop timing of the special design fluctuation is set. Therefore, the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the timing of setting the time saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to set a period during which time-saving winning judgment can be performed (a period in which the normal state is set) and a period in which it cannot be performed (a period in which the normal state is not set), special symbol lottery The duration of execution can also be of interest to the player. In addition, in the second control example described above, it is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period in which the time-saving winning judgment can be executed and a period in which it is not executed. , In the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning determination, and the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability variable It may be configured not to execute the time saving winning determination in the state).
Furthermore, instead of switching depending on the game state where the execution of the time saving success/failure judgment is set, the probability of winning the time saving in the time saving success/failure judgment may be changed according to the game state, for example, the normal state is set It may be configured so that the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/6 in the time saving propriety determination in the case where it is set, and the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/200 in other game states. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win a time saving and a game state in which it is difficult to win a time saving. The time period can also be of interest to the player.
Furthermore, in the above-described second control example, the first ball entrance 64 (first ball entrance means for allowing the game ball to enter) that can trigger the execution of the first special symbol lottery by the entrance of the game ball. , A second ball entrance 640 (second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) that can trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to be executable only in
That is, in the first special symbol lottery, no matter what game state is set, time-saving winning judgment is not executed, and in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a specific period (normal state). By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and eventually the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640. , the amount of value given to the player later can be greatly different.

In addition, in the above-described second control example, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning determination, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning determination during a specific period (normal state). , Without being limited to this, for example, in the first specific period (normal state), only the second special symbol lottery executes time saving winning judgment, and in the second specific period (second probability variable state) different from the first specific period may be configured so that only the first special symbol lottery can execute the time-saving winning determination. By configuring in this way, the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 depending on the set period. and a situation in which entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 more easily imparts a value advantageous to the player than entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64; It becomes possible to create Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a more advantageous value is likely to be awarded.
Furthermore, in this case, as in the modification shown in FIG. 181, even if any game state is set, It is preferable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the degree of entry of the game ball into the ball hole 640 is the same. With such a configuration, the player can select which ball entrance the game ball is to enter, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
Furthermore, as described in each control example, rather than the time saving state (first time saving) set based on the jackpot winning, the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning by the time saving winning judgment It is configured such that a time saving state advantageous to the player, that is, a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established is easily set. That is, according to the setting opportunity of a time saving state, it comprises so that the advantageous degree of the set time saving state may be varied. As a result, it is possible to vary the period (time saving end condition) for which the time saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determination result (setting trigger), so the game can be diversified and the interest can be increased. There is an effect that it can be improved.
In this case, depending on the game state before the time saving state is set, the second time saving is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving, and the first time saving is better than the second time saving. It is better to provide a case where the working hours are shortened which is advantageous to the person. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which situation the time saving state was set.

More specifically, for example, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game (the number of times of addiction) exceeds a predetermined number, the time saving state is more advantageous than when it does not exceed the predetermined number. It may be configured so that it becomes easy to become
Next, in the above-described fourth control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning (see FIG. 167). As a result, the jackpot winning (first discrimination result) and the short-time winning (second discrimination result) can be discriminated in duplicate, so that in one special symbol lottery, the jackpot winning and the short-time winning. , You can expect to win both a big hit and a short time, and various lottery results. Furthermore, in the fourth control example, when time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than when there is no double winning is executed (Fig. 158). (b)). Therefore, since a specific game of a type advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to redundant determination, the game can be diversified by providing the player with benefits corresponding to various determination results. has the effect of
It should be noted that, as a configuration for giving a privilege that is more advantageous to the player in the case of double winning than in the case of not winning multiple times, a configuration other than the above-described fourth control example may be used. The game state to be set after the game is finished may be configured to be able to set a game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous in the case of double winning than in the case of non-overlapping winning.
Further, in the above-described fourth control example, after executing the time-saving winning determination (determining whether or not the second determination result), the big hit determination (determining whether or not the first determination result) is performed In one special symbol lottery, when the time saving is won, the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery can be executed in the time saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the advantageous degree of the privilege game executed in the case of duplicate winning and the advantage degree of the privilege game executed in the case of non-multiple winning different.

Next, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, the normal symbol high probability state (first time reduction) set based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the special symbol lottery time reduction winning The type of privilege given to the player when the jackpot is won in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the high probability state (second time reduction) and the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (jackpot The number of time reductions given after the end of the game) is different (see FIG. 132(b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game (the content of the jackpot game and the number of times of time reduction given) is variable according to the setting type (first time reduction, second time reduction), the same normal pattern high probability state ( Effect that different benefits can be given to the player even in the second game state), and the interest in the game can be improved by diversifying the game without setting many game states. There is
In addition, in the second modification of the second control example described above, a difference is provided in the number of times of time saving to be given according to the setting type (first time saving and second time saving), but not limited to this, execution The contents of the jackpot game to be played (for example, the number of round games) may be configured to be different.
Furthermore, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, when the second time saving is set rather than the first time saving, that is, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set without the jackpot game being executed is configured to facilitate setting of a high probability state of normal symbols in which the end condition is difficult to be established. In other words, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning the prize ball during the jackpot game, that is, the benefit given before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set than the first time reduction Since the less second time saving can lengthen the high probability state of the normal symbol, there is an effect that the privilege can be imparted fairly to the player.
Furthermore, in the second modification of the second control example described above, similarly to the second control example and the first modification of the second control example described above, time-saving winning determination only in the normal state (discrimination of the second determination result) is configured to be executable. In other words, except for the normal state, execution of the time-saving winning determination is regulated. Therefore, since the time-saving winning determination is not executed according to the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested in the set game state and expect the setting of the game state in which the second determination result can be determined. has the effect of

In addition, in the second modified example of the second control example described above, to show the result of the special symbol lottery so as to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set (see FIGS. 130 and 131). That is, when the first time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 130 (a)) is executed for the first period obtained by adding the special symbol fluctuation time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and the second When the time saving is set, it is configured to execute the specific effect (see FIG. 130(b)) for the second period which is the special symbol variation time (including fixed time).
More specifically, the fluctuation time and the jackpot game period are defined in advance corresponding to each special symbol lottery result so that the above-described first period and second period are substantially the same period, and the specific performance is performed. It is configured so that the performance period of is the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shown after the specific effect with the same effect period and the same effect mode is executed. A performance will be performed. Therefore, to make it difficult for the player watching the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to discriminate in which setting opportunity the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can be done.
Next, in the above-described third control example, it is configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning determination even during the time-saving state (second game state), and when the time-saving winning is made during the time-saving state (second game state) , It is configured to be able to set the time saving state (second game state) of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied (the number of time saving times is large or the time saving winning probability is high).
As a result, the longer the period in which the time saving state is set, the easier it is to set the time saving state of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that the privilege game can be easily executed.

In addition, in the above-described third control example, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the time saving winning probability is changed according to the set game state, but even if the time saving winning probability is defined to be the same good. In addition, although the time-saving winning probability is varied according to the game state, the time-saving winning probability may be changed according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big win game is executed. In this case, when the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big winning game is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the time saving winning probability should be increased. By constructing in this way, a player who has not won a big win for a long time in the special symbol lottery can be easily provided with the privilege of short-time winning, which is different from the big win game. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.
As the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each embodiment or each control example described above, the following configuration may be used.
<Regarding the high-probability state of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends, but the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. As a setting opportunity for this, a setting opportunity other than the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery may be provided, for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation is a predetermined number without winning the jackpot A setting opportunity for setting a high-probability state of normal symbols may be established when the value of the denominator of the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery to be drawn reaches twice.
By configuring in this way, when a situation occurs in which a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) that does not win a big hit is repeatedly executed, that is, a situation in which the player's willingness to play tends to decrease, a privilege (normal Since the high-probability state of the symbol can be given, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from significantly declining.

In addition, the number of executions of the special symbol variation, which is an element for establishing the above-described setting opportunity, may be configured to be variable according to the game situation. It may be configured such that the number of executions of the special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state is made different. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set, the second variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) If it is set, that is, according to the type of game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the number of executions of the special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity may be varied. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the set game state.
In this case, the second probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is easier to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set (special Because the pattern lottery jackpot probability is high), when the second probability variation state is set, the high probability state of the normal design is set with fewer special design variations than when the normal state is set. It is preferable to configure so that the setting opportunity for performing is established. By configuring in this way, even if any game state is set, it is possible to make the ease of establishment of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the same degree. becomes.
On the other hand, when the normal state is set rather than when the second probability variable state is set, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design with fewer execution times of the special design variation is established. It can be configured as follows. That is, in the normal state (the most disadvantageous game state for the player) in which the low probability state disadvantageous to the player is set even in the probability state of the special symbol, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol Since it can be made easier to establish, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to play games that are excessively disadvantageous. In addition, since it becomes easy to set the high probability state of the normal design based on the setting opportunity that is established when the number of executions of the special design variation reaches the predetermined number of times, the high probability state of the normal design is set without winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with a game with unexpectedness.
Furthermore, in the case where the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be different according to the set game state, in a part of the set game state, the high probability of the normal symbol It is possible to provide a game state in which the setting opportunity for setting the state cannot be established (it is difficult to do), for example, as a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). , normal AA, normal AB) can be set, and a high probability state of normal symbols is set when the game state of normal AB is set rather than when the game state of normal AA is set. It may be configured such that the setting opportunity for performing is likely to be established.

By configuring in this way, at what timing is the high probability state of the normal symbol set for the player playing the game on the gaming machine in which the normal state is set? Or, is it a game state in which a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols can be established? Since the game can be played while predicting the game, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. In this case, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the currently set game state (game state for each type) is a game state in which the setting opportunity of the high probability state of the normal symbol is likely to be established. It is preferable to construct such a production so as to be executable.
Furthermore, the game state in which the normal pattern high probability state is set is a privilege given to the player when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery than the game state in which the normal pattern low probability state is set. In a gaming machine having a game specification in which (the contents of the game of the jackpot and the game state set to end the game of the jackpot) are likely to be advantageous to the player, the remaining time until the establishment of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is established. Information indicating the period (number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) and information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (or information to indicate the pre-discrimination result (forecast result) that determined the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in advance) ), and it is preferable to configure so as to be able to execute an effect in which the mode of effect is changed based on the above.
For example, when a special pattern lottery wins a jackpot, a high-probability state of a normal pattern is set when determining the production mode of a production (for example, reach production) that is more likely to be executed than when it is not won. With reference to the remaining period (number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) until the setting opportunity is established, if the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations is small, that is, the first situation in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is soon set, and the remaining When the number of special symbol fluctuations is large, that is, when the high probability state of the normal symbols is not set for a while, a different presentation mode is determined, and the first situation is better than the second situation. It is preferable to determine the presentation mode of the ready-to-win presentation so that the ready-to-win presentation can be easily executed in a presentation mode in which it is possible to inform the player that the situation is more advantageous than the situation.
By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win performance of different performance modes depending on the timing of executing the ready-to-win performance for suggesting winning the jackpot and the timing of setting the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the ready-to-win effect can be executed in various effects modes, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, based on the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect to be executed, the degree of advantage of the timing when the ready-to-win effect is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal symbol is set or not) is made known to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel production that makes the player expect that the production result of the ready-to-win production being executed will be lost (a production result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss). can.

In addition, when a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot in a state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, a high probability state of normal symbols is set. In addition, the high probability state of normal symbols is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won during the high probability state of the normal symbols than when the jackpot is won during the low probability state of the normal symbols. In the gaming machine configured as above, as a variable effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, a specific effect (for example, reach and, as the performance mode of the specific performance, a first performance mode suggesting that the jackpot is won in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a simple jackpot. A second performance mode suggesting winning can be determined, and the frequency of execution of the specific performance of the first performance mode is determined regardless of the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It may be fixed, and the frequency at which the specific effect of the second effect mode is executed may be made lower as the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set decreases.
By configuring in this way, the closer to the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the higher the selection ratio of the first effect mode in the case where the specific effect is executed. When the specific effect is executed in a state close to the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high probability state of the symbol is set (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the previous jackpot game is between 90 and 99 times) However, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance result of the specific performance without discouraging the player.
In addition, a frequency lottery means for determining the number of execution times of the special symbol variation for establishing the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is provided, and the setting opportunity is established based on the lottery result of the frequency lottery means. You may determine the execution frequency of a special design variation. In this case, for example, as the range of the number of executions that can be determined by the number-of-times lottery means, the number of executions of the special symbol variation may be determined to be "0" as the number of executions most likely to establish the setting trigger.
By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot type in which a low-probability state of normal symbols is set is set, substantially the same game state as when a high-probability state of normal symbols is set is set. It becomes possible to

In other words, even when the same jackpot type (jackpot type in which a low-probability state of normal symbols is set) is set in the same gaming state, based on the lottery result of the number-of-times lottery means, The game state (probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game (until the first special symbol variation is executed) can be varied.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and to provide the player with an unexpected game.
In addition, the timing at which the above-mentioned number-of-times lottery means is executed may be appropriately set, for example, the timing at which the jackpot game ends may be used, and the number-of-times lottery means is executed every time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). It may be configured to be executable. In this case, when the number of execution times of the special symbol variation determined as the lottery result of the frequency lottery means has already passed, the normal symbol high probability state is set immediately after the lottery by the frequency lottery means is executed. It should be configured as follows.
In this way, by configuring the number-of-times lottery means to be executable each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), during the period in which the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times without winning a jackpot, It is possible to vary the contents of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design (the number of special design fluctuations in which the setting opportunity is established). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In this case, the range of the number of executions of the special symbol variation determined by the lottery must be different based on the number of times the lottery is executed by the number lottery means from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won. More specifically, the higher the number of execution times of the lottery, the easier it is to set the high-probability state of the normal symbol. By constructing in this way, as the number of special symbol fluctuations executed between big hits increases, it is possible to easily set a high probability state of normal symbols, so that the player's willingness to play is remarkably lowered. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the number-of-times lottery means described above, the lottery for determining the number of times of special symbol fluctuations at which the setting opportunity for setting the high-probability state of the normal symbol is established is executed, but this is not the case. Instead, for example, the contents of the number of lottery means may be configured so as to determine the number of special symbol fluctuations required until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the number of times lottery means is executed.
In addition, the number of times lottery means is executed every time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, the number of times lottery means can be executed when a predetermined lottery condition is established based on the execution of the special symbol variation. In the game machine configured as above, instead of the above-mentioned number of times lottery means, a normal pattern high probability lottery means is provided, and when winning the normal pattern high probability lottery means, a high probability state of normal patterns is set. You can
In addition, another setting opportunity may be provided as a setting opportunity for the high probability state of the normal symbol, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning (eg, small winning) is provided, and when the measurement result of the measurement means is a predetermined measurement result, a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of the normal symbol may be established, or the previous big hit When the game result (increase/decrease in the number of paid balls) after the end of the game exceeds a predetermined range (for example, when the degree of decrease in the number of paid balls is extremely large), a setting opportunity to set a high probability state of normal symbols is established. It can be configured as follows.
Furthermore, the degree of establishment (easiness of establishment) of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be varied according to the past game results. When the game is biased toward a disadvantageous jackpot, that is, when a game that is disadvantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be easily established. Alternatively, when a game that is advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be difficult to be established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing for a long time from continuing to play an excessively disadvantageous game or an excessively advantageous game.

In each embodiment described above, when the time saving end condition is satisfied in a state in which the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols , Low probability state of normal symbols) is configured to be set. Then, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times of special symbol variation is executed (performed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.
In addition, the content of the time saving end condition is not limited to this, for example, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the type of special symbol, specifically, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is the first number When executed, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed the second time, or when the total number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed the third time You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized by etc.
In addition, when setting the time-saving end condition to be established based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation, various times may be settable as the number of times of special symbol variation for which the time-saving end condition is established. As shown in each embodiment, except when the number of special symbol variations reaches 100 times, the time saving end condition is established when the number of special symbol variations is greater than 100 times (for example, 200 times). Alternatively, the time-saving end condition may be established when the number of times (for example, 50 times) less than 100 times is executed. Furthermore, depending on the setting opportunity (jackpot type, special symbol fluctuation number, etc.) established to set the time saving state, the contents of the time saving end condition may be changed, and than when the setting opportunity of 1 is established, It is preferable to reduce the number of times of special symbol variation that satisfies the time-saving end condition so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied when another setting opportunity is established. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, and the time saving state is based on which setting opportunity is established. is set, the player can be interested.
In addition, an element other than the number of executions of the special symbol variation may be used as an element to establish the time saving end condition, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit) is a predetermined number of times. You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized when it reaches|attains.

In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the establishment of the time saving end condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special symbol variation, or the corresponding special symbol variation. It may be a specific timing until the special symbol lottery next to the special symbol variation is executed. Furthermore, the time saving state may be ended at the start timing and end timing of the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game), the start timing and stop timing of normal pattern fluctuation, the start timing and end timing of normal pattern per game You can end the time saving state with .
In this case, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the time-saving state may be configured to end at the same timing, or the time-saving state at different timings according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied. may be configured to end, for example, when the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation, the time saving state is terminated at a predetermined timing related to the special symbol variation, and the special symbol lottery When the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the result (small hit winning etc.), the time saving state is terminated at a predetermined timing related to the winning game (small winning game, big winning game) executed based on the lottery result should be configured to By configuring in this way, the timing of ending the time saving state can be changed according to the type of the established time saving end condition, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to understand how long the time saving state continues.
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the number of balls to be output is increased without winning the jackpot. It is configured so that the game is executed with a game property (a game property that can increase the number of balls by small winning games that occur frequently), but the number of balls is increased without winning a big win. By using different game characteristics as possible game characteristics, it may be possible to increase the number of payout balls even in a state in which another game state is set.
For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters a ball entrance (for example, the right first ball entrance 64b2) that makes it easier for the ball to enter when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set By setting a large number of winning balls, it may be possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out without winning a big hit when a high probability state of normal symbols is set. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game aiming at the special symbol jackpot winning and the game aiming at the normal symbol winning, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can do.

Furthermore, in order to make the number of balls to be played out per unit time different between the first game state (time saving state) in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set and the second game state (variable probability state), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set. The length of the period during which the ball can be actually entered into the right first ball entrance 64b2 in the game period of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern is won is varied. It may be configured to be able to vary the depth, and may be configured to be able to obtain more balls per unit time in the first game state than in the second game state.
In addition, in the state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the high probability state of normal symbols is set for the gaming machine having the performance that can increase the number of balls to be released without winning a jackpot. It is preferable to provide the above-described setting opportunity (setting opportunity established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations) as the setting opportunity. As a result, a high probability state of normal symbols is set for a player who is executing a special symbol variation (lottery) for a long time without winning a jackpot in a normal state of low probability of normal symbols. , it is possible to execute a game (relief game) for increasing the number of balls to be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.
As described above, as a configuration that can increase the number of balls by a game that is executed without winning a jackpot in the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), for example, during the time saving state The number of prize balls to be paid out may be equal to or slightly greater (in the range of about 1 to 1.2 times the number of shot balls) with respect to the number of balls to be continuously shot. By configuring in this way, the game specification during the time saving state tends to be long Even in a game machine with a game specification in which a variable time is set, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game during a time-saving state that continues for a long time.
As mentioned above, although the structure regarding the high probability state of a normal design was demonstrated, you may apply the same content as a structure regarding the high probability state of a special design. In this case, the element corresponding to the normal design of the content described above, may be applied to the configuration of the content of the change to the special design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the probability state of the special pattern (low probability state, high probability state) is set, and the interest in the game is improved. can let Furthermore, the configuration described above may be used for any of the normal symbols and the special symbols.

<Regarding the low-probability state of normal symbols>
In each control example described above, when the first starting ball entrance (for example, the first ball entrance 64) and the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery are executed, the game ball A second start ball entrance (for example, a second ball entrance 640) that makes it easier to enter is provided, and a special symbol that is executed based on the game ball entering the first start ball entrance A special symbol lottery (e.g., second special symbol lottery) that is executed based on the game ball entering the second start ball entrance is better than the lottery (e.g., first special symbol lottery). It was configured so that a special symbol lottery that would be advantageous to the player would be executed.
A low probability state and a high probability state can be set as the probability state of the normal design, and the high probability state of the normal design is set more than the case where the low probability state of the normal design is set. was configured to facilitate execution of the second special symbol lottery. Further, in each control example described after the second control example described above, when the first setting condition established based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is established, the configuration of setting the normal symbol high probability state And, when the second setting condition established based on the fact that the time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery is established, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the special pattern lottery in which the lottery result is not a big hit are consecutively performed. A configuration for setting a high probability state of normal symbols when a third setting condition that is satisfied when the number of times of execution (number of times of addiction) reaches a predetermined number of times is satisfied, and at least one of A game machine capable of setting a high probability state is described, but the second special pattern lottery is easily executed without setting the high probability state of the normal pattern and keeping the probability state of the normal pattern in the low probability state. Control may be configured to be executable.
Specifically, as described in the forty-seventh control example described above, in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, the power supply state may be provided. In addition, the processing for shifting from the low probability state of the normal design used in each control example to the high probability state of the normal design is performed in the low probability state of the normal design from the low probability state of the normal design. It may be configured to execute control replaced with processing for transitioning to a state to which a state is assigned.
<About the configuration regarding the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game is finished is the jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern. Although a configuration is used in which the same ratio is defined in advance for the type and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, it is not limited to this, for example, a high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game is played by passing a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game in a state in which a settable jackpot type is set (a state in which the right to set a high-probability state of special symbols is acquired). A high probability state of special symbols is set after completion, and a big winning game is executed based on the winning of the first special symbol lottery, and a big winning game is executed based on the winning of the second special symbol lottery. The execution ratio of an advantageous jackpot game in which the ball can pass through the specific area during the jackpot game and a disadvantageous jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game are made different. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big winning game is the same for the big winning type corresponding to the first special symbol and the big winning type corresponding to the second special symbol. Even if the ratio is stipulated in advance, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is actually set is the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. and can be made different.
In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game ends with the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern. It may also be configured to prescribe different ratios. In this case, furthermore, according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the jackpot, the rate at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends is made different for the same special pattern type. may be configured to be defined in advance.
In addition, a predetermined set lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the set lottery, it is determined whether or not a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished for each special symbol jackpot type. It may be configured to give information to be used. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game status includes, for example, the jackpot winning status within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls the player has won, and the like. When the result is a determination result disadvantageous to the player, it is preferable to set the high probability state of the special symbol more easily than when the determination result is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.
Similarly, when a jackpot is won in a state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set, the above-described content is also applied to the ratio of setting a low probability state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game. can be configured as

In each of the above-described embodiments, a low probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the state where the high probability state of the special symbols is set. As a ratio to be played, the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol have the same ratio defined in advance. However, it is not limited to this, For example, after the end of the jackpot game, in a state in which a jackpot type capable of setting a high probability state of special symbols is set (a state in which the right to set a high probability state of special symbols is acquired), during the jackpot game a jackpot game configured to set a low-probability state of a special pattern after the jackpot game ends due to the ball not passing through the specific area, and executed based on the jackpot winning of a first special pattern lottery; A jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning of a special pattern lottery, an advantageous jackpot game capable of passing a ball through a specific area during the jackpot game, and a ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the execution ratio of the difficult disadvantageous jackpot game is different.
By configuring in this way, the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big winning game is the same for the big winning type corresponding to the first special symbol and the big winning type corresponding to the second special symbol. Even if the ratio is stipulated in advance, the ratio of actually setting the low probability state of the special symbol is the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. and can be made different.
In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern are selected during the high probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot game ends. It may be configured so as to predefine by varying the rate of setting the low probability state of the special symbol later. In this case, furthermore, according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the big win, the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big win game is made different for the same special symbol type. may be configured to be defined in advance.
In addition, a predetermined set lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the set lottery, it is determined whether or not the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big win game is finished for the big win type of each special symbol. It may be configured to give information to be used. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game status includes, for example, the jackpot winning status within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls the player has won, and the like. It is preferable that the low-probability state of special symbols is set more easily when the result is a determination result that is advantageous to the player than when the result is a determination result that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively advantageous game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, it is configured to be able to set the end condition based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol is In the case of setting, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. The configuration used as the time-saving end condition for ending the high-probability state may be used as the end condition for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol.
Specifically, the end condition may be established when the number of special symbol variations after the special symbol high probability state is set reaches a specific number (for example, 150 times). As a result, the high-probability state of the special symbols with a high probability of winning the jackpot can be terminated without winning the jackpot, so that the game in which the high-probability state of the special symbols is set is played. It is possible to motivate a person to play a game so as to win a big win before a termination condition is satisfied.
In addition, the above-mentioned end condition and the time saving end condition may be configured to have both the gaming machine, in this case, the number of executions of the special symbol variation set as the end condition and the time saving end condition are set. It is preferable that the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation and the number of times of execution are different. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the game state each time each end condition is satisfied, so that the player can enjoy the game without getting tired of it.
Furthermore, as the special symbol variation frequency set as the end condition, one special symbol variation frequency out of a plurality of variation frequencies including at least a first variation frequency and a second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency. should be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is satisfied.

In addition, for a gaming machine configured to be able to vary the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition, if the end condition related to the number of special symbol fluctuations can be set, it can be set as the end condition. Of the special symbol variation frequencies, the first variation frequency is set to be the variation frequency smaller than the special symbol variation frequency that satisfies the time saving end condition, and the second variation frequency that is different from the first variation frequency is used to satisfy the time saving end condition. It is preferable to configure so that the number of fluctuations is greater than the number of special symbol fluctuations. By comprising in this way, the conditions satisfied first can be varied among termination conditions and time saving termination conditions according to the termination conditions set.
Therefore, for example, in a situation where the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the game state to be set next is the second probability variable state) (high probability of special symbols State, low probability state of normal design) or time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be changed according to the contents of the set end conditions Therefore, it is possible to play a game that predicts the game state to be set next while keeping the player interested in the content of the set end condition, thereby improving the interest in the game. can.
In addition, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set different contents as end conditions and time-saving end conditions in this way, information for indicating the contents of each condition currently set can be notified to the player. should be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information for predicting the timing at which each condition can be satisfied and the content of each set condition. It is possible to make the user interested in the performance and enhance the performance effect.
As described above, as the termination condition for ending the special symbol high probability state, the termination condition established based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation has been described, but not limited to this, for example, the special symbol high probability state The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to a low probability state is configured to be executable separately from the special pattern jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery), and the end condition is established when the falling lottery is won. can be configured to Even in this case, the winning probability of the fall lottery and the number of executions of the fall lottery during the period in which the special pattern lottery is executed once can be changed so that the ending condition during the high probability state of the special pattern can be determined. You may comprise so that the easiness of establishment may be made different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

<Regarding the function (limit function) that sets the upper limit for the period in which the high probability state can be set continuously>
A high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as the probability state of the special pattern, and a high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as the probability state of the normal pattern, and the degree of advantage is different according to the set probability state. In a game machine capable of setting a state, an upper limit is set for the number of times a probability state (for example, a high probability state) advantageous to a player is continuously set, and when the upper limit is reached, the player is favored. A game state advantageous to a player is provided by providing a function (limit function) for forcibly setting a probability state (e.g., high probability state) to a probability state (e.g., low probability state) more disadvantageous than the probability state. is excessively set, and execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player can be suppressed.
In a gaming machine having such a limit function, the conditions for activating the limit function may be varied according to the established limit setting conditions. Based on the type, any one of a first activation condition under which the limit function is likely to be activated and a second activation condition under which activation is more difficult than the first activation condition is selected and set. You can
Specifically, a game machine with a probability variable limit function that sets an upper limit on the number of times that the high probability state of special symbols is set continuously, and forcibly sets the low probability state of special symbols when the upper limit is reached. , the upper limit until the probability variable limit function is activated can be set differently depending on the jackpot type, and when the first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "5 times", and the first jackpot type and When a different second jackpot type is set, it is preferable that the activation condition can be set so that the upper limit is "three times".
By configuring in this way, according to the value set as the activation condition, the length of the advantageous game period in which the game can be continued and executed in a game state advantageous to the player is determined based on the set jackpot type. can be different.

In the above example, the limit function (probability variable limit function) for the high probability state of the special design was explained, but without limiting to this, the limit function (time saving limit function) for the high probability state of the normal design The contents described above may be applied, or the contents below may be combined and applied to each limit. Furthermore, as the symbol type probability state, for a gaming machine with a game specification in which the low probability state can be a game state more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the number of times the low probability state is set continuously On the other hand, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit and forcibly sets a high probability state when the upper limit is reached.
In addition, in the above-described example, the above-described limit function is used for the purpose of suppressing the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may be used for other purposes, such as An upper limit is set for the number of times a game state (low-probability state) disadvantageous to the player is set in succession, and when the upper limit is reached, a game state (high-probability state) advantageous to the player is forcibly set. A limit function may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.
<Regarding a configuration that can execute a winning game based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game can be executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Another execution opportunity may be provided as an execution opportunity for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. A variable means that is opened in a variable pattern that is variable between a first state and a second state different from the first state when a condition is established, and the variable means is variable to the first state. a second ball entering means through which the ball can enter more easily than when the ball is changed to the second state, a specific area through which the ball entering the second ball entering means can pass, and the specific area and a jackpot game execution means capable of executing a jackpot game based on the ball passing through a specific area, that is, a configuration in which a trigger for executing the jackpot game is established based on the ball passing through the specific area. It is good also as a game machine (so-called two-type specification). With this configuration, whether or not the big win game is executed is determined by the behavior of the ball entering the second ball entering means, so that the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball. can be done.
In such a two-spec game machine, the operation condition may be established based on the entry of the ball into the above-described ball entry means, or the ball may be entered into the entry means. An operation lottery may be executed based on the entry of the ball, and the operation condition may be satisfied when the operation lottery is won. In the former case, the ball has entered the ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, even if a ball enters the ball-entering means, the operation condition is not satisfied unless the ball is won in the operation lottery, so the frequency of balls entering the ball-entering means can be increased.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine with the above-mentioned two types of specifications, as the flow path for the ball that enters the second ball entering means, there is a first flow path that can pass through the specific area, and a specific area that is wider than the first flow path. A plurality of flow paths including at least a second flow path that is difficult to pass through are provided, and a distribution means capable of distributing a ball that has entered the second ball entering means to any of the plurality of flow paths is provided. Alternatively, the rate at which a ball hit by the second ball-entering means passes through the specific area may be varied according to the sorting situation of the sorting means.
With this configuration, the degree of establishment of the trigger for the execution of the jackpot game can be varied depending on the distribution situation of the distribution means. You can make them interested in how they arrive at the means.
As described above, in a gaming machine having a configuration capable of varying the establishment degree of the execution opportunity of the jackpot game depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, the pachinko machine 10 is provided as the distribution operation contents of the distribution means. It may be configured so that a constant operation is always executed after the power is turned on, or the entry of the ball into the ball entry means, the establishment of the operating condition, or the entry of the ball into the second ball entry means. Based on which of the spheres, it may be configured such that a constant action is always performed.
Furthermore, the content of the sorting operation of the sorting means may be varied according to the establishment conditions. For example, the first sorting operation in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area according to the winning type in the case of winning the motion lottery. One of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a content and a second distribution operation content in which the ball is more difficult to pass through a specific area than the first distribution operation content is determined, and distribution is performed. You may comprise so that a means may be operated.

In addition, a game machine configured so that a chance to execute a big win game can be established both when a special pattern lottery wins a big win and when a ball passes through a specific area (so-called one type and two types mixed specifications). , the execution period of the jackpot game being executed can be extended by passing the ball through a specific area during the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery, in other words, the special pattern lottery. A ball may pass through a specific area during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in , so that the jackpot game being executed can be continued without ending midway. That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game that is being executed is not extended (forcibly ended). It can be configured as follows.
By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in both the result of the special symbol lottery and the behavior of the ball flowing down toward the specific area.
<Regarding the configuration for changing the falling direction of the ball>
The nail member used in each of the above-described embodiments, that is, as a configuration for changing the flow direction (drop direction) of the ball flowing down the game area formed on the game board 13 configured in the pachinko machine 10, namely, In addition to the member that can change the downward direction of the ball within a range that does not oppose the direction of gravity, a means for moving the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (for example, upward direction) is provided. For example, by using an electric drive source or using the movement energy of another ball, the ball can be moved in a direction different from the direction of gravity (for example, the upward direction) (for example, the upward direction). It is also possible to provide a moving means for
By configuring in this way, the movement direction of the ball flowing down the game area can be set in various directions including directions different from the direction of gravity. It can provide flexible ball movement. In addition, it is possible to move (raise) the ball that has reached the vicinity of the most downstream side of the game area, that is, the ball that has not entered the ball entrance where a privilege is given to the player, to the upstream side of the game area. Since it is possible, the player can have expectations for the behavior of one ball until the end.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming machine configured so that a gate member through which a ball can pass is provided in the game area and a predetermined privilege can be granted when the ball passes through the gate member, the ball that has passed through the gate member reaches It is preferable that moving means be provided in the area to be obtained so that the balls are ejected above the gate member by the moving means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a plurality of benefits can be given to the player with one ball.
Further, the moving means described above may be provided in an area (for example, an internal area of the winning device that is opened during a winning game) in which a ball is likely to enter during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game). With this configuration, it is possible to raise the ball inside the prize-winning device, so that, for example, a privilege advantageous to the player can be provided by allowing the ball to pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game. In a game machine configured to be awarded, balls that have won a prize in a prize winning device in a round prior to a specific round are raised by a moving means to stay for a predetermined period, and the held balls are discharged. Depending on the timing, it is possible to configure the specific area to be passable during the specific round.
Thus, a moving means may be used to cause the sphere to stay within a specified area for a predetermined period of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ball will be ejected from within the specific area.
<Regarding the structure that acts on the entrance of the ball to the ball entrance to open another ball entrance>
A first operating hole into which a game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball enters the first operating hole to make it easier for the game ball to enter the first operating hole. A first operating member that operates is provided, and the first operating member acts on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls enter the first operating port, and the first state than the first state It is constructed so as to operate to a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first operating hole.

Acting on the fact that the game ball entering the first working hole enters the specific area, the game ball enters a third state in which the game ball can enter the second working hole different from the first working hole. A second actuating member is provided for actuating with. This second operating member is a fourth state in which, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls enter the second operating port, the game ball is less likely to enter the second operating port than in the third state. Configure to operate into a state.
With this configuration, the second operating member is operated to the third state based on the game ball entering the first operating port, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second operating port. In this state, the second operating member operates to the fourth state by inserting one game ball into the second operating port. Then, by entering the game ball again into the first operating port in which the first operating member is in the first state, the second operating member is operated again to the third state, and the game is played to the second operating port. It is possible to enter the ball.
More specifically, when the game ball is entered into the first operating port in a state where the first operating member is in the second state, up to four balls are operated through the operating port (first operating port, first 2 operation opening). Furthermore, the game ball entered into the second operating port executes the first winning lottery (lottery of the first normal symbol) based on the entering ball into the second specific area, and the result of the first winning lottery. is a winning (probability of winning about 1/2), the first normal electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the first variable ball entry means is set to the first closing condition (for example, 5.8 The opening operation (changes the entry of game balls into the first variable entry means to a permissible state) is performed until seconds elapse or four wins are established. Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first variable ball entry means has entered the third specific area that can be entered, a second winning lottery (second normal symbol lottery) is executed, and a second lottery is performed. If the result of the lottery is winning (probability of winning about 1/1), the second normal electric accessory that can regulate the entry of the game ball to the second variable ball entry means is set to the second closing condition (for example, , 5.8 seconds have passed, or until 4 wins) are established, the opening operation (changes the entry of the game ball into the second variable entry means to an allowable state). Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means has entered the fourth specific area that can be entered, a third winning lottery (third normal symbol lottery) is executed, and a third lottery is executed. If the result of the lottery is winning (probability of winning about 1/1), the third ordinary electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the third variable ball entry means is set to the third closing condition (for example , 5.8 seconds have passed, or 10 prizes have been won.
In this case, the maximum winning number of game balls that can be entered into each operating port based on the entry (winning) of the game ball into the first operating port is In the winning number "2", the maximum winning number to the second operating opening that can be won every time the game ball enters the first operating opening with respect to the maximum winning number (2) to the first operating opening It may be calculated as "4" by adding the value "2" multiplied by (1), or a winning game that is executed based on entering the game ball (winning) to the first operation opening The number of game balls that can be entered into each operation port during the period until (a winning game using a plurality of ordinary electric accessories) is executed is the maximum number of winnings, that is, one winning game is executed. It may be configured to be calculated as the number of prizes required until the start (“2” obtained by adding the number of balls entering the first operating port “1” to the number of balls entering the second operating port “1”). Then, every time a game ball enters the first operating port for the maximum winning number to the first operating port, the winning is possible to the second operating port The maximum winning number may be obtained by adding the value obtained by dividing the maximum winning number.

Then, when the maximum winning number reaches a predetermined limit number, the winning game is ended, and based on the satisfaction of the switching condition, it is calculated when determining whether or not the limit number has been reached. The value of the maximum number of prizes to be won may be switched and referred to among the values (maximum number of prizes) calculated by the various calculation formulas described above. If the switched value has not reached the limit number, the winning game may be extended until the maximum winning number after switching reaches the limit number.
In other words, using various calculation formulas that can vary the value after calculation, when the game ball enters the first operating hole, it is possible to win a plurality of operating holes in a series of game flows. The maximum number of prizes to be awarded to each operating port is stipulated so that the number of possible game balls is limited, and the calculation formula for specifying the maximum number of prizes is changed according to the conditions and specified. It may be configured to execute a winning game based on the maximum number of winnings to each operation port defined in correspondence with the calculation formula.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the contents of the winning game (total number of wins to each operation port and each variable ball entry means) according to the specified calculation formula.
Also, the value of the maximum number of prizes described above may be configured to vary according to conditions. When the number is changed to "3" and a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the maximum number of winnings to the first operation port is changed from "2" to "1". Also good. By configuring in this way, depending on the conditions to be established, the winning game executed when the game ball enters the first operation opening (each operation opening, the game ball to the variable ball entry means Since the content of the game to enter the ball can be changed, an advantageous establishment condition (a establishment condition that sets the total number of prize balls given during the winning game to be large) that is advantageous to the player is established. , and a game can be played while expecting that a winning game will be executed in a state where an advantageous establishment condition is established.

<Regarding game machines that can set multiple levels of settings>
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided in multiple stages, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side.
In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high so that it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.
In addition, in a pachinko machine having multiple stages of setting values, by changing the set value, the probability of winning by special symbol lottery (big win, small win, etc.) can be changed. The configuration may be used, for example, the first game state (low probability state of special symbols) in which the first probability is set as the probability of winning in the special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning is higher than the first probability. A gaming machine capable of setting a second game state in which a high second probability is set (high probability state of special symbols), and a specific period as a period in which the second game state continues, for example, a special symbol lottery When the period until the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times or the period until winning a predetermined end lottery (so-called fall lottery) is set, the length of the specific period is set according to the set value. It may be configured to be different, for example, the second game state continues when a set value that is advantageous to the player is set rather than when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be configured such that the period is likely to be longer.
By configuring in this way, even if the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is not changed according to the set value, by varying the length of the second game state to continue, the set value can be achieved. Accordingly, it is possible to vary the frequency of winning by the special symbol lottery.

In the above example, in a pachinko machine provided with set values in a plurality of stages, set values that are advantageous to the player and set values that are disadvantageous to the player can be set regardless of the game situation. Although shown, without being limited to this, various game states set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, among a plurality of types of game states set by a combination of a special symbol probability state and a normal symbol probability state, A setting that is advantageous to the player in at least one of the game situation in which a specific game state is set, the game situation in which a big winning game is executed, and the game situation in which a small winning game is executed. A value and a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player may be configured to be settable, and when a specific setting value is set, a predetermined setting value other than the specific setting value is set. It is more advantageous for the player in a specific game situation than when a specific setting value is set, and when a predetermined setting value other than a specific setting value is set, it is more advantageous than when a specific setting value is set. The contents of the game set corresponding to each setting value may be defined so as to be advantageous to the player in a predetermined game situation other than the game situation.
By configuring in this way, absolute advantages and disadvantages are eliminated for the set values, and it is possible to switch the relative advantage of each set value according to the game situation to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game regardless of what setting values are set.
In addition, it is possible to allow a player who has grasped the set value to play while expecting a game in a game situation in which the set value is relatively advantageous over other set values. can. That is, it is possible to set a different game situation as the game situation desired by the player according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that does not cause the player to quickly become bored.
In the above-described example, the configuration aimed at varying the degree of advantage of the player according to the set value has been described, but the configuration is such that multiple levels of set values are provided for other purposes. For example, without changing the degree of advantage to the player, the game process until the privilege corresponding to the degree of advantage is given to the player may be configured to differ according to the set value. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 having different jackpot probabilities of special symbols according to set values, the probability (expectation) of winning a jackpot within a predetermined period does not differ (not greatly differ) depending on the set values. In addition, the length of the predetermined period may be varied according to the set value, for example, when the set value "1" is set, during the specific period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, A game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/10 (probability of winning a jackpot during a specific period is about 65%) can be executed, and when the set value "6" is set, the special symbol is executed. A game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/9 (probability of winning a jackpot during a specific period is about 65%) can be executed during a specified period until the lottery is executed 9 times. good.

By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol lottery jackpot probability is changed according to each set value, it is possible to change only the game content without significantly changing the degree of advantage to the player. becomes. Therefore, the player can be allowed to play various games.
Moreover, it is preferable to configure (change) the above-described set values in multiple stages as part of the process (initial setting process) based on power-on of the pachinko machine. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on. Unfair play can be made difficult.
It should be noted that other timing may be used as the timing at which the set value can be set (changed). The value obtained by subtracting the number of balls used in the game) is changed from the currently set value to a different set value (a set value that is disadvantageous to the player) based on the payout exceeding the upper limit number, Based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in the game on the pachinko machine) did not exceed the minimum number, It may be configured to change to a different set value (a set value that is advantageous to the player). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player.
In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of winnings in the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to this. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to
Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third design. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114 .
In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Moreover, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.
In each of the above-described embodiments, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different according to the game state. state) and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed. . Also, a left-handed game may be executed during the time saving state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means capable of determining the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation of the means.
Distribution (percentage) of jackpot types, number of time reductions and variable number of times after the jackpot (ST number), probability of jackpots and small hits, probability of normal pattern hits, number of prize balls for winning prizes in each winning port, and variable limit Numerical values (probabilities) relating to game specifications such as the number of times are not limited to the numerical values in the above embodiments, and can be changed arbitrarily without changing the gist of the embodiments. By increasing the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, increasing the number of times of time saving and ST times, increasing the probability of jackpots and small hits, increasing the number of prize balls, and increasing the number of variable limits. It is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the person. Also, on the contrary, lower the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, reduce the number of time saving and ST times, lower the probability of jackpots and small hits, reduce the number of prize balls, and reduce the number of variable limits. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.
The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.
In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of a big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the higher the probability of the big win, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type in which, in the variable probability state, it is easier to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a type of game machine that has a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that can be set in multiple stages, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern by the main controller 110 based on the set value that has been set It is made different, the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is different, or the detailed effect executed as the variation effect It is preferable to configure so that the types of various selection tables referred to when selecting a mode are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable performance to be executed, so that the variable performance that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.
In addition, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, the set setting is used as the effect mode of the operation effect. The effect mode of "suggest setting" for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, and the effect mode of "suggest setting" is executed. It is preferable to configure the content of the operation presentation to be different according to each set value, and to vary the selection ratio of other presentation modes according to the set value. By configuring in this way, when the operation effect of "setting suggestion" directly suggesting the setting value is executed, the content of the effect is displayed, and when the other operation effect is executed, each effect mode is displayed. Since it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the selection ratio of the pachinko machine 10, the player is interested in various operation effects to be executed. be able to.
Furthermore, as described above, the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to vary according to the set game state. In a pachinko machine 10 in which set values can be set in six stages up to setting "6" which is advantageous to a player, the first game is set to the settings "1" to "3" and is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (variable probability state) is set, the setting "4" to "6" are set, and the second game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state The pachinko machine 10 having setting values disadvantageous to the player is played by making the selection ratio of the operation presentation to be selected when the 2-game state (time-saving state) is set to be the same. The player can be made to think that the setting value that is advantageous to the player is set.
In this way, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (lottery result of jackpot, set game condition, selected variation pattern (variation time)) By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10 from being easily discriminated by the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:
Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.
All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

Various concepts included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are described below.
<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means blinds the passed means>
A path construction means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path construction means to pass through, wherein the path construction means is configured to allow the game ball to pass through the path construction means. Displaceable means that can be arranged at a position that overlaps at least a part of the first game ball on the upstream side of the passage means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the path construction means is characterized. A game machine AA1 to play.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of constructing a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls directed to a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 to make it difficult to recognize. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the decorative plate 302 makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431 at all times, it is possible to confirm the entry of the ball into the ball detection hole 431 and continue or stop the shooting of the game ball. There was a possibility that the player could feel dissatisfied with the game mode of playing. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the portion related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AA1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the path construction means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to construct a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to determine whether the shooting operation of the game ball should be continued or stopped by confirming the flow of the first game ball. Relevant parts can be improved.
In addition, the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the downflow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.
In addition, the mode of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to a lottery pattern (for example, a starting hole), a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, and others through which game balls can pass. The means of is also good.
In the game machine AA1, the displaceable means is a second game ball that flows down the upstream side of the first game ball.

According to the game machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the means to be passed. Material cost and design cost can be reduced as compared with the case of preparing other decorative members.
A gaming machine AA3 in the gaming machine AA2, characterized in that the path forming means comprises a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball. .
According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA2, the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball. At least part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.
In the gaming machine AA3, the front-rear direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path configuration means at a shooting interval set in the shooting device. A game machine AA4 characterized in that a game ball is configured to hide at least part of the first game ball.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path configuring means while maintaining the firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball as the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize even in normal times.
In the game machine AA3 or AA4, the game machine AA5 is characterized in that the front-side component of the front-back direction path is arranged closer to the center of the game area than the back-side component.
According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA3 or AA4, the back-and-forth direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed. is hidden behind the second game ball. That is, the blindfold effect can be improved.
In the gaming machine AA5, the gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that the front side component is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed.

According to the game machine AA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA5, the same blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the forward-backward direction path. be able to.
That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved. When the number of game balls is arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.
In any one of the game machines AA2 to AA6, the path construction means includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows the second game ball to be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, and a back-and-forth direction path. A gaming machine AA7 characterized by comprising a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.
According to the gaming machine AA7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left-right direction path, so that the player can use the means to be passed. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only when the passing means is visually recognized with a line of sight that is not displaced to the left and right, but also for a line of sight that is displaced to the left and right and looks into it. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the means to be passed regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This action is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the channel extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in a configuration in which one of the left and right sides is closed by the wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to construct a state in which the means to be passed cannot be seen.
In any one of the game machines AA1 to AA7, the path constructing means includes a first flow-down path through which game balls pass through the passing means in a first mode, and a second flow path through which game balls pass in a second mode. and a flow-down route of the first game ball, regardless of which flow-down route of the route configuration means, at least a part of which is covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be visually recognized A gaming machine AA8 characterized by being configured as follows.
According to the game machine AA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AA1 to AA7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flowing state of the game ball flowing down the path construction means regardless of whether or not the passed means has passed. , it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the path construction means.
Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the ball flows in a different direction, or a mode in which the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

In any one of the game machines AA1 to AA8, branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means is provided, the branching means comprises switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received game ball, The game machine AA9 is characterized in that the path constructing means is configured such that the game balls whose flowing paths are divided by the branching means and the game balls reaching the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.
According to the game machine AA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AA1 to AA8, the game ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game ball that reaches the switching means immediately afterward. Comprehension of the flow down of the game ball can be made more difficult than in the case of the flow mode corresponding to the flow path of . As a result, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.
In the game machine AA9, the path construction means includes a projecting part projecting toward the flowing game ball, and the projecting part acts on the branching of the game ball in the branching means. Machine AA10.
According to the gaming machine AA10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA9, the projecting portion can act to branch the game ball. durability can be improved.

In the game machine AA10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion. and a projection amount of the second projecting portion are different from each other.
According to the gaming machine AA11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA10, the influence of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the influence of the second projecting portion on the game ball are determined according to the flow of the game ball. can be different. As a result, while using the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, it is possible to cause the action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball.
<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means appeals to the introduction to the passed means>
A path configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path configuring means to pass through, and the path configuring means is more likely than the passed means to pass. A gaming machine AB1 comprising a predetermined portion forming an upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a more conspicuous side than said means to be passed and capable of guiding a game ball to said means to be passed.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 so that it is difficult to recognize. Depending on the state of the winning component 300, there are gaming machines in which the game ball falls off the decorative plate 302 or is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a game ball with good visibility that falls off the decorative plate 302 is configured to rather deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since part of the falling game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, so the focus is on the game ball. There is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied because it is likely to be wasted. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making the manner in which the game ball flows after attracting attention worthy of attention.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AB1, since the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side is configured to be guided to the means to be passed, the degree of improvement in attention to the game ball and It can be associated with the game ball passing through the means to be passed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion will pass through the means to be passed.
In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined part, and the possibility of the player missing that the game ball is heading toward the means to be passed is reduced. be able to.
In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to a lottery pattern (for example, a starting hole), a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, and others through which game balls can pass. The means of is also good.
In addition, the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be on the side of the display device that is easy to catch the player's eye, the side of the winning opening, the side of the starting opening, the front side (front side) that is easy for the player to visually recognize, or the side of the specific ball entrance. The stage (mainly, the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where game balls temporarily stay) is a place where the probability of entering a ball is remarkably high, and it is directly connected to winning a big hit. The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as the operation target, the effect operation button side, the range where the game ball that deviates from the entrance ball flowing down (the range where the player is frustrated and follows with his eyes) side, , the bright side or the other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. In addition, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine AB1, the path construction means includes a second predetermined portion that makes a game ball that enters the path construction means less conspicuous than when the game ball enters the path construction means, and the predetermined portion is more conspicuous than the second predetermined portion. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized by being arranged on the conspicuous side.
According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, before the game ball that entered the path configuration means flows down the predetermined portion, by reducing the attention force in the second predetermined portion, it flows down the predetermined portion. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the game ball when playing.
A gaming machine AB3, wherein the predetermined portion of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2 includes sections in which game balls flow at different speeds.
According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1 or AB2, the effect of attracting the player's line of sight can be improved compared to the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the game ball.

The game machine AB3 is characterized in that the second flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is faster than the first flow speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Gaming machine AB4.
According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB3, it is possible to shorten the period until the game ball entering the path forming means reaches the predetermined portion.
In any one of the game machines AB1 to AB4, the game machine AB5 is characterized in that the predetermined portion includes sections in which the game ball is displaced at different speeds when viewed from a predetermined direction.
According to the game machine AB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB4, regardless of the actual flow speed of the game ball, a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction at any predetermined location, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and the player's eyes can be diverted from other portions. .

It should be noted that the manner in which the displacement speed of the apparent game ball is varied is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-back direction in a front view may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component. The difference may be in the case of curvilinear or meandering displacement, or other differences.
In any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB5, an introducing means configured to allow game balls to be introduced into the path configuring means, wherein the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characterized game machine AB6.
According to the game machine AB6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure both the visibility of the introducing means and the improvement of the attention of the game ball which is highly likely to pass through the passing means.
Any one of the game machines AB1 to AB6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured so that the game ball on the front side of the path construction means flows down to avoid the line of sight directed to the passed means or the predetermined portion. Gaming machine AB7.

According to the game machine AB7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB6, the game ball is configured to flow down on the front side of the path configuring means, and the line of sight of the flowing path of the game ball directed to the means to be passed. Since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the above, it is possible to ensure both the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the means to be passed.
It should be noted that the manner in which the game ball is flowed under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or may be a game ball that flows toward the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, it may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the above-mentioned final position and the position of the player's eyes. Good, or something else.
In the gaming machine AB7, the path constructing means includes acceptance state changing means configured to be able to change the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, and the receiving state changing means is a gaming machine AB8, characterized in that, in the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, a game ball that has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state can be guided to the path forming means side. .
According to the game machine AB8, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB7, the game ball that flows down after reaching the receiving state changing means so as to be bridged can be prevented from blocking the line of sight directed to the passed means. can be done.

The gaming machine AB7 or AB8 is provided with a partitioning means disposed above the passing means in a front view and partitioning a game area, and the partitioning means is configured to allow game balls to flow down on the left and right outer sides. Characterized game machine AB9.
According to the gaming machine AB9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB7 or AB8, the partitioning means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the means to be passed, so that the field of view toward the means to be passed can be improved. can be easily secured.
In addition, as a mode of a division means, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that constitutes a flow-down surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entrance constituting means that allows a game ball to enter. Further, the dividing means may be a means having a fixed shape (appearance) or a means having a variable shape (appearance).
In the gaming machine AB9, the path configuring means includes a receiving state changing means capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received. The gaming machine AB10 is characterized in that the part on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide a game ball to the side of the receiving state changing means.

According to the gaming machine AB10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB9, it is possible to configure the game balls in the process of being received by the receiving state changing means to be received by the partitioning means in such a manner that they are pushed into the receiving state changing means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball slipping sideways while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the means to be passed.
For example, as the receiving state changing means, a special winning device having an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a horizontal axis is assumed, and as the partitioning means, a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed. . A game ball that reaches the special winning slot just before the opening/closing plate closes is often caught between the turning tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and the direction in which the edge is formed ( sideways in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate).
Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the turning tip of the opening/closing plate, when at least a part of the opening/closing plate is arranged above the means to be passed, the game ball skids. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball will pass the front position of the means to be passed after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.
When it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate so as to avoid the position of the means to be passed from the front view, so that the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate is reduced. become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AB10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate after skidding, and the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate can be improved.
In any one of the game machines AB7 to AB10, the game balls flowing down the path configuring means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the path configuring means are configured to flow down in a similar manner. Gaming machine AB11.
According to the gaming machine AB11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, the game ball that may flow down the path configuring means and pass through the means to be passed, and the front side of the path configuring means By making it difficult to distinguish game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the number of game balls that flow down the path forming means.
In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the game balls flowing down near the path construction means whether the game balls are likely to enter the path construction means or difficult to enter.

The game machine AB12 is characterized in that, in any of the game machines AB1 to AB11, a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is provided.
According to the game machine AB12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB11, the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light, and it is possible to easily avoid the ball becoming difficult to see.
<Points for securing the length of the path to the V-door while saving space>
Path construction means configured to allow game balls to flow down; Passed means configured to allow game balls flowing down the path construction means to pass through; and a first state in which game balls can flow down to the passed means. state switching means configured to be switchable between the first state and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path configuration means includes delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A game machine AC1 is characterized in that it is configured so that a game ball can flow down toward the passing means.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a distributing section 75 configured to be movable left and right is arranged in a flow-down path of a game ball that enters the second prize-winning hole 12, and the distributing section 75 arranges the game ball. There is a game machine that is configured to be able to change the flow direction of (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the short-term operation of the distribution unit 75 is essential to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and the ball being caught by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, the behavior of the segment 75 was felt as distrustful and the game could not be continued with peace of mind.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is lengthened. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second big winning hole 12 to a position near the left and right central part of the game area (near the first big winning hole 10), from the second big winning hole 12 It is possible to secure a long channel length up to the distribution section 75 . As a result, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.
On the other hand, when this means is executed, it becomes necessary to secure the visibility of the game ball flowing-down path over a wide range from the second big winning hole 12 to the first big winning hole 10, and the game area can be freely designed within this range. degree is limited. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73 .
In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.
On the other hand, according to the game machine AC1, since the path construction means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even when the vertical length of the path construction means in the front view is shortened to save space, the path construction means can be It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the game ball hit passes through the means to be passed.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball enters the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path forming means. False wins can be avoided without operating for a short period of time an opening/closing device for switching whether or not a ball can enter a constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.
Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, there may be a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is configured in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path for causing the game ball to flow down along the flow-down path having a forward-backward direction component may be provided.
In the gaming machine AC1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and among the predetermined flow-down paths, the flow-down path toward the front side is more likely to flow down than the flow-down path toward the back side. A game machine AC2 characterized in that it is configured so that the acceleration of the game machine AC2 increases.
According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, it is possible to secure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.
In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down routes, and among the predetermined flow-down routes, the flow-down route toward the front side is compared to the flow-down route that maintains the front-back position and flows down. A game machine AC3 characterized in that it is constructed so that the acceleration of a game ball flowing down is increased.
According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, it is possible to secure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing on the near side. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.
It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down paths are arranged in front of the means to be passed when viewed from a predetermined direction. A game machine AC4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.
According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, when the game ball is arranged at the front position, visibility in the vicinity of the means to be passed can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve attention to the range in the vicinity of the means to be passed.
A game machine AC5 is characterized in that, in the game machine AC4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured.
According to the gaming machine AC5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, at least part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the rear side rather than the game balls on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, when the ball entry interval of the game ball into the predetermined flow-down path is short, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball is always placed in one of the front positions, so that the passing means is invisible. It becomes possible.
In any one of game machines AC1 to AC5, game machine AC6 is characterized in that the path construction means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner when viewed from above.
According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the vertical width required for arranging the path constructing means of the same length can be shortened.
In addition, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall compared to the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the path can be improved, and compared to the folded path that is folded back at 180 degrees, Possibility of clogging of balls or the like can be reduced.

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC6, game machine AC7 is characterized in that the path constructing means comprises a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.
According to the game machine AC7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC6, the left-right width of the route forming means can be suppressed, so that the pair of left-right symmetrical route forming means can be configured with a suppressed left-right width. can be done.
A gaming machine AC8 in any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, wherein the passing means is arranged obliquely downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.
According to the game machine AC8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC7, it is possible to make it easier to fit the passing means and the ball receiving part of the path forming means in the field of view of the player viewed from the front side. .

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC8, the path configuring means includes first receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls, and means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive game balls. and a second receiving means configured to change the profit obtained by the player depending on the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine AC9.
According to the game machine AC9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be capable of receiving game balls at all times. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving mode of the game ball of the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.
It should be noted that the manner of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which the game balls are accepted only by the first receiving means, a mode in which the game balls are accepted only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of the game balls are received by the first receiving means and then the second receiving means. A mode in which a predetermined number of pieces can be received in the means may be used. Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the frequency of ball entry to each receiving means is different, or a mode in which ball entry positions are different.
In the gaming machine AC9, the change in the profit that the player can obtain depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. A game machine AC10 characterized in that it occurs depending on whether a game ball is received in both of the.

According to the gaming machine AC10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9, it is possible for the player to easily launch the game ball in a predetermined shooting mode by setting the size of the profit that the player can obtain. .
It should be noted that the profit that the player can obtain is not limited at all. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the flowing game ball, or the profit related to the game obtained by the flowing game ball (payout of the prize ball, winning of the jackpot, change of the game state after the jackpot, It may be that the game state becomes a normal state (falling down, etc.).
A gaming machine AC11 in the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, wherein the path forming means is bilaterally symmetrical from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.
According to the gaming machine AC11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right.

In any one of the game machines AC9 to AC11, the path configuring means comprises a receiving state changing means capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the flowing game balls cannot be received, The gaming machine AC12 is characterized in that the receiving state changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state changing state.
According to the game machine AC12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC9 to AC11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode, so that the player's skill in shooting the game ball is enhanced. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.
A gaming machine AC13 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC12, the mode of state change of said acceptance state changing means is composed of a plurality of types.
According to the gaming machine AC13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC12, even when the game ball is shot in a fixed shooting mode, the receiving mode of the game ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means can be changed. As a result, it is possible to adjust the profit that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the acceptance state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the flowing direction of the sphere>
a path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path configuring means to pass therethrough; an introduction state capable of introducing the game ball to the path configuring means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path configuration means, and a state switching means configured such that the direction of displacement caused by the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. A game machine XAA1 characterized in that it is configured along a direction.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of configuring multiple types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are substantially perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XAA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the flowing direction of the game ball, the state can be changed while the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means. By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence to change the rolling mode of the game ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.
For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top, Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on top of it, thereby rolling and rotating the game ball. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.
Further, when the state switching means slides so as to skim the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause a complicated and irregular change in the flow of the game ball.
Due to the effect on the flow of the game ball, the flow of the ball on the state switching means can be changed variously during the opening and closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball gets bored. You can concentrate on the game without worrying about it.
Further, the positional relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged to rub against the side surface of the game ball, or may be arranged to collide with the game ball while facing the game ball in the flowing direction.

In the state switching means displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. can be regulated with less resistance.
In the game machine XAA1, the state change of the state switching means can be executed while the state switching means and the game ball are in contact with each other.
According to the gaming machine XAA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XAA1, the state change of the state switching means can cause the game ball to rotate.
In the game machine XAA1 or XAA2, the state switching means comprises change means for changing the direction of the load in a direction intersecting with the direction of displacement.

According to the game machine XAA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAA1 or XAA2, the load applied from the game ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load applied to the state switching means can be reduced. .
<Points regarding the opening/closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when open and in the second direction when closed>
A path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path configuring means to pass through; an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced to the passed means; a state switching means configured to be able to change between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means and a non-introduction state, wherein the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. and a game ball can be guided in the second direction in the non-introduction state.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it protrudes forward, but when it retracts to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. I will not guide you. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of retreating to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (frame portion, etc.) that guides the downflow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XAB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or the non-introduced state. Since members can be eliminated, the number of required configurations (members) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to diversify the flow direction of game balls in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set laterally with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in the direction after the guidance by the state switching means is started. can be achieved.
The arrangement of the guiding portion that causes the guiding action of the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be arranged in a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be arranged in a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball may move to the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. It may be configured such that it can be switched to a state of close proximity or easy contact.
When the guide part is arranged on the movable member, it is designed not only to provide guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also to consider the influence on the game ball during the state switching operation. preferably.
For example, if the state switching means is provided with a movable member that displaces in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, a surface inclined to the flowing direction (flat, curved surface, etc.) is used rather than providing a planar wall portion orthogonal to the flowing direction. ), it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

In the game machine XAB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. .
According to the gaming machine XAB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XAB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means caused by the load given by the guided game balls.
In the game machine XAB1 or XAB2, the path construction means includes a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means includes a pair of guide portions capable of receiving game balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the pair of guides 4. A game machine XAB3, wherein the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically in the part.
According to the game machine XAB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAB1 or XAB2, it is possible to complicate the path along which game balls flow. In addition, since the first direction and the second direction of the pair of guide portions are symmetrical, the displacement received by the state switching means due to the load received by the pair of guide portions from the game ball is symmetrical. be able to.

As a result, for example, when substantially equal numbers of game balls enter a pair of left and right paths, it is possible to easily uniform the arrangement of the state switching means according to the load received by the guide portion from the game balls.
The gaming machine XAB4 in the gaming machine XAB3 is characterized in that the state switching means comprises an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in a direction intersecting with the third direction.
According to the game machine XAB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAB3, the projecting portion can reduce the contact area with other members, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.
In the gaming machine XAB3 or XAB4, an abutting means configured to be capable of abutting in the introduced state or the non-introduced state of the state switching means is provided, and by abutting with the abutting means, the state switching means moves in the left-right direction. A gaming machine XAB5 characterized by being configured to be able to correct displacement.

According to the game machine XAB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAB3 or XAB4, the load from the game ball can be received from either the left or right direction, so that the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to be disorderly, can be reduced to the contact state. It can be returned to orderly by the action of the means.
<Sequence of separation, reversal, combination, and rotation>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable such that the visually recognized surface is changed, the displacement means comprises a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined form of displacement, the first displacement A game machine AD1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 can rotate multiple times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface seen by the player is the same.
On the other hand, according to the game machine AD1, since the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable along with the displacement, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by relatively displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.
In the gaming machine AD1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are moved toward and away from each other on the basis of a collective portion in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged; A game machine AD2 characterized by comprising at least a second displacement member in which a second displacement member rotates with respect to the gathering portion.
According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, if only the first displacement is used as the displacement with respect to the gathering portion, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member at the end portion where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest is likely to be reduced. The 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member may appear to stop and the performance effect may be lowered, but by mixing the 2nd displacement, it is possible to generate displacement in the rotation direction even at the terminal end. Therefore, the production effect can be improved.
In the game machine AD1 or AD2, the game machine AD3 is characterized in that the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1 or AD2, by reversing the side visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. can let
In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by adsorption or adhesion, and the load associated with the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The game machine AD4 is characterized in that it acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the member.
According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD3, the load related to fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixing , the displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.
For example, in the case of transmission of driving force by a gear, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement occurs, but if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes apparent. By doing so, it is possible to cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

Also, the degree of fixation may be different depending on the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.
In this case, since the effect of fixation differs depending on the side viewed by the player, the strength of the fixation on the side viewed by the player can be set.
As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly united to make it easier to see as one, and the other surface is loosely united to make it easier to see in a state where relative displacement is easy to occur. can be done.
Further, for example, by configuring the degree of adsorption of the first displacement member and the degree of attraction of the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to constitute a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the degree of fixation of the second displacement member differ. can.

In addition, the aspect which enables adsorption|suction is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape, or may utilize the attractive force between a magnet and a metal part. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed so as to use fixing screws, screws, or the like, for example, as the metal portion to be attracted to the magnet.
In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in the first displacement mode and in the reverse direction in the first displacement mode. A game machine AD5 characterized in that it is displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, wherein the second displacement mode is configured to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.
According to the game machine AD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is before the first displacement mode. Since it is configured as a displacement mode to which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the attention to the displacing means at the time of retraction, so that it is possible to relatively increase the attention to the displacing means displaced at the performance position.
In the conventional machine, since the mode of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after the performance position (the position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area) is projected, it is necessary to retreat to the retracted position (outside the liquid crystal display area). It had to rotate multiple times again in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight tends to be drawn to the member retracted from the rendering position, which may be seen as a problem.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, across a plurality of planes, or three-dimensional.
In the game machine AD5, the game machine AD6 is characterized in that the displacement means comprises release means configured to release the load transmission when the movement resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.
According to the gaming machine AD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD5, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement means depending on the magnitude of the movement resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.
In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD6, light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is provided with the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided. The game machine AD7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition state of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the visually recognized surface is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine AD7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AD1 to AD6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. can be changed by
For example, a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light. can be changed with
Any one of the game machines AD1 to AD7 is provided with detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Characterized game machine AD8.
According to the game machine AD8, in any one of the game machines AD1 to AD7, the detection means can detect the state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible. can be avoided.

Further, since the displacement means can be displaced while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement/reduction is performed after displacing from the effect position toward the retracted position to some extent. By controlling the displacement from the performance position to the retracted position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to the case of displacing in a displacement mode including enlargement and reduction from the start of the displacement. .
Any one of the game machines AD1 to AD7 is characterized by comprising detecting means for detecting the state of the displacement means, the detecting means being capable of detecting two or more numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. game machine AD9.
According to the gaming machine AD9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AD1 to AD7, it is possible to reduce the number of detection means provided. Various modes are exemplified as the types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to the change in the motion mode when the motion mode changes at a predetermined timing.
Moreover, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to construct a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be reversible between a facing posture and a facing posture on the other side, and the one side face of the first displacement member and the second displacement member faces the player side, the first While the displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A game machine AD10 characterized in that it is configured such that it is indistinguishable from
According to the game machine AD10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AD1 to AD9, the reversal operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. It is possible to keep the player's expectation high for the occurrence of .
<Points for changing easily visible surfaces by arranging displacing means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
Displacement means comprising a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible is provided, and the displacement means has a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible, and the A game machine AE1 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to recognize and a second state.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a reversible reversing operation unit 71 and is configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visually recognized surface (for example, , see JP-A-2016-153095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the viewed surface. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AE1, the displacement means can be switched between a state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a state in which the second visible surface is easy to see, depending on the arrangement. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the route of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.
The gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE1, an opening portion is provided for opening the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening side is easily visible.
According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1, a player who views the back side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.
A gaming machine AE3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE2, the displacing means is arranged closer to the rear side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening than when it is arranged on the center side of the opening. .

According to the game machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE2, when the displacement means is arranged on the central side of the open portion, the displacement means can be visually recognized on the front side, and the displacement means can be seen on the edge side of the open portion. The movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacing means when arranged can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.
In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The gaming machine AE4 is characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are configured to be difficult to visually recognize when the surfaces are visible.
According to the game machine AE4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AE1 to AE3, different characters and figures are applied to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, so that the displacement means To allow a player who visually recognizes different characters and figures to be visually recognized, and to make it difficult to visually recognize a set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are not intended to be visually recognized. , it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacing means from becoming unsightly.
For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big win and the expectation is low are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed. is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a big win is expressed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means has retreated from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of a big win by the displacement means can be maintained. Also, it is possible to continue visually recognizing the display of the expectation of the big win.

In addition, the aspect which comprises hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be structured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.
In the gaming machine AE4, the action of switching the set of the visible first visible surface and the second visible surface is performed so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during operation. A gaming machine AE5 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine AE5, in the gaming machine AE4, the first visible surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the visible first visible surface and the second visible surface (before confirmation) and the second set of visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.
It should be noted that there is no limitation on the aspect configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be detachable from each other. It may be difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts separately, or it may be difficult to recognize by creating a relatively dark part by setting the brightness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the mode of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other portion is visible, and the other is turned toward the back so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in such a state that some of them and other parts can be visually recognized at the same time, but are visually recognized in a displaced arrangement.
The gaming machine AE5 is characterized in that an opening portion is provided for opening the displacement means so as to be visually recognizable, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion. Game machine AE6.
According to the gaming machine AE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and to improve the attention to the switching action.
In the game machine AE5 or AE6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces the side different from the front side. Game machine AE7 to play.

According to the gaming machine AE7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE5 or AE6, by making a part of the first visible surface visible during operation and making the whole invisible, the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible faces can be made difficult to perceive.
In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE7, a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least part of a line of sight to the second visible surface is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be capable of shielding at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means, together with the second displacement means, A game machine AE8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for visually recognizing the first visible side.
According to the game machine AE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AE1 to AE7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface by the second displacement means to make it difficult to see, the effect position of the displacement means can be changed. Design freedom can be improved.
In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE8, the displacement means is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface with displacement. A gaming machine AE9 characterized by:

According to the game machine AE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AE1 to AE8, the surface visually recognized when viewed from a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change the surface that is easy to visually recognize without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.
A game machine AE10 characterized in that, in the game machine AE9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.
According to the game machine AE10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the attitude of the displacement means. can.
In the game machine AE9 or AE10, an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means in the first state, and the displacement means is arranged in the second state. is arranged apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the game machine AE11, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE9 or AE10, a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacement means and visually recognized integrally, and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separated and visually recognized are available. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacing means gives to the player.
In addition, the aspect of an auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means whose arrangement is fixed, or movable means.
In the gaming machine AE11, the auxiliary means can switch between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .
According to the game machine AE12, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately, so that there are variations in the visual recognition mode with respect to the number of members. can be increased.

<Points where the ratio of the amount of displacement of the displacing means and the amount of displacement of the arranging means at the same point in time differs between sections>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, disposing means for disposing the first portion on the displacing means, and supporting means for supporting the second portion of the disposing means, the supporting means A gaming machine AF1, characterized in that the arrangement of said second portion with reference to said first portion during displacement of said displacement means can be controlled.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. and a driving motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and the rotation accessory 211 can be rotated independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is being tilted and displaced, there is a possibility that the mechanism will malfunction. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotational movement of the rotational accessory 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of displacement is low.
That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.
On the other hand, according to the game machine AF1, the arrangement means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at least at two points, and the two support points are relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the supporting means can control the placement of the second portion with respect to the first portion, the disposing means can be displaced while the displacing means is being displaced while stably supporting the disposing means. can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

In addition, the aspect of a support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means so as to restrict its displacement, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.
In the game machine AF1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means displaces the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second portion is displaced in the first range A gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the direction is different from the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range.
According to the game machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arrangement means can be varied, and the support means can be the second Since it is configured to allow a change in the direction of displacement of the second portion, even if the direction of displacement of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the disposing means can be smoothed.
In the game machine AF1 or AF2, the game machine AF3 is characterized in that the support means comprises a restricting portion for restricting the displacement of the second portion.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the large displacement side to the small displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.
The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the second portion is pulled or a mode in which the second portion is pushed may be used.
It should be noted that the mode of the restricting section is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be configured to switch the direction of displacement of the second portion.
In the gaming machine AF2 or AF3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and an arrangement means based on the displacement means in the second section is configured to be smaller than the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means in the first section.

According to the game machine AF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF2 or AF3, it is possible to construct a section in which the amount of relative displacement of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means becomes small at the intermediate displacement position of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacing means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacing means and the arranging means can be easily visually recognized as an integral unit. Easy position can be increased.
A gaming machine AF5, wherein in any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion is variable.
According to the game machine AF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF4, even if the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the disposing means on the support means side is increased. can be changed, it is possible to construct an action presentation in which the displacement speed of the disposing means is made variable by simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means.
In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF5, the game machine AF6 is characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the end of displacement of the second portion.

According to the game machine AF6, in addition to the effects of the game machines AF1 to AF5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and to facilitate early stopping of the arrangement means at the end of the displacement.
Note that the technique for preventing the second portion from rebounding is not limited at all. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of the displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. It is also possible to restrict the displacement of the second portion by designing a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion while the first portion is stationary.
Further, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the method of increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion may be employed. For example, a magnetic force or the like may be applied at the end of the displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or an urging force such as a coil spring may be used to improve the displacement resistance. good.
In the amusement machine AF6, the support means includes a displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion, and a displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of the displacement. A gaming machine AF7 characterized in that the displacement trajectory of the displacement is configured to intersect with the displacement trajectory.

According to the game machine AF7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF6, the support means having the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part, when the first part stops 2 can reduce the return displacement (bounce).
In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF7, a supported means displaceably supported by the disposing means is provided, and the supported means is adapted to a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means. A game machine AF8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.
According to the game machine AF8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF7, a complicated performance can be executed by the supported means displaced jointly with the arrangement means.
The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arranging means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arranging means on a predetermined plane on which the arranging means is displaced. , sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) may be different (for example, rotational displacement about a predetermined axis).

It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a posture change, or a displacement while maintaining the posture.
In the game machine AF8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion. Amusement machine AF9.
According to the game machine AF9, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF8, while the first part is being displaced, the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the arrangement of the second portion is maintained.
In the game machine AF8 or AF9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. AF10.

According to the game machine AF10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF8 or AF9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to the displacement means with the disposing means interposed therebetween. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.
In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF10, the disposing means includes attitude changing means for changing the attitude so as to switch the side facing the player between the first side and the second side according to the displacement of the disposing means. A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured so that the first face or the second face faces the player side in a state where the second portion is arranged at the end of displacement. Machine AF11.
According to the game machine AF11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player side, so that the second portion is at the end of the displacement. Since the player can grasp the arrival, it is possible to comprehend the final stage of the performance action by the displacement means.
In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF11, an electric wiring is configured to be inserted through the second portion and into the disposing means, and the electric wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second portion. locating means, said locating means comprising an opening through which said electrical wire can pass, said opening being displaceable to avoid contact of said electrical wire with a peripheral portion formed therearound; A gaming machine AF12 characterized by:

According to the game machine AF12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF11, it is possible to avoid contact of the electric wiring with the surrounding portion.
The arranging means may be configured as a means for uniting the plurality of members when the second portion is composed of a plurality of members, or may be configured as a means for combining the plurality of members when the second portion is provided with a separate member. It may be configured as means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion.
<Characteristic BA group>
a first information acquiring means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquiring condition; and a first information acquiring means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquiring means. 1 discriminating means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result by the first discriminating means, and the first dynamic display means a first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by a second information acquisition based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition; second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on the display means, second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination; display means; second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. a special game executing means, wherein the effect mode executing means capable of executing the effect mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means; a selectable presentation mode selection means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. A gaming machine BA1 characterized by:
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
According to the game machine BA1, since the effect mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is varied depending on the number of the stored second information, it can be executed after that. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information, and even when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, the subsequent game is continued. By making the player interested in the game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.
In the game machine BA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode executing means is configured to execute the specific second dynamic display. A gaming machine BA2 characterized in that the performance mode is executed when the target display mode is being executed.

According to the gaming machine BA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the player to store the second information, thereby increasing the interest of the player. .
In the game machine BA1 or BA2, the presentation mode is continuously executed after the period of the second dynamic display mode being executed corresponding to the number of stored second information ends. The game machine BA3 is characterized in that it is set in a period spanning the dynamic display of the next second identification information.
According to the game machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA1 or BA2, the effect mode is configured to be executable over the dynamic display period of the second identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved by displaying the second dynamic display mode a plurality of times as if it were one dynamic display.
In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state; to a first state until a predetermined condition is established; The game machine BA4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines BA1 to BA3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining whether the specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectations can be given to acquisition of the second information.
<Characteristic BB group>
a first information acquiring means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquiring condition; and a first information acquiring means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquiring means. 1 discriminating means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result by the first discriminating means, and the first dynamic display means a first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by a second information acquisition based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition; second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on the display means, second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination; display means; second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. and a special game execution means, wherein a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means a selectable presentation mode selection means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by:
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery result is displayed based on the lottery result etc. as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining a performance mode and executing the determined performance mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
According to the gaming machine BB1, the second information stores the presentation mode to be executed during the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display. Since it is determined based on the number, not only the result of the first determination, but also information about whether the second determination can be executed can be determined from the presentation mode, and the player can quickly start playing the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired.
In the gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed. A gaming machine BB2 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode is selected according to the number of the first dynamic display mode being executed and the second information being stored during the execution thereof, so that various effects can be achieved. There is an effect that it is possible to execute various production modes.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode is executed after that. A game machine BB3 characterized in that an effect related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information is executed.
According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, when the second information is stored, after the first identification information being executed is completed, the second identification information is activated. target display is started, and the effect mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information is started. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize at an early stage that the dynamic display of the identification information will start.
In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state; to a first state until a predetermined condition is established; The game machine BB4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least the result of the preliminary determination means.
According to the game machine BB4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines BB1 to BB3, a specific effect mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining whether the specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectations can be given to acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristic BC group>
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. means, a first bonus game executing means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; 2 second privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result; and the first determination is executed. First effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the fact that the determination result of the second determination is performed, and based on the execution of the second determination, the determination result of the second determination and a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating, and the second effect executing means executes at least a predetermined specific condition when Second, the game machine BC1 is configured to be able to execute the second effect of the effect mode including at least a specific effect mode that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine BC1, since the first effect can be executed as the effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine BC1, the second effect executing means is capable of executing the second effect in a effect mode including at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect. A gaming machine BC2 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1, it is possible to execute the second effect using the display mode showing the determination result of the first determination, so that the interest in the game can be improved. effective.
In the gaming machine BC2, the second effect executing means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode within one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination. A gaming machine BC3 characterized by:

According to the game machine BC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.
<Characteristic BD group>
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination; and displaying a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means after dynamically displaying a plurality of first identification patterns on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode. a first dynamic display means capable of statically displaying a combination of; a second determination means capable of performing a second determination; second dynamic display means capable of stopping display in combination for showing the second determination result by the second determination means after display, and for displaying the specific first determination result on the display means When the first identification pattern is stop-displayed in a specific combination of or when the second identification pattern is stop-displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, the game and a privilege granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player, wherein the privilege granting means is stop-displayed with a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination among the specific combinations. In this case, a first privilege can be given as the privilege, and when a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, it is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. The gaming machine has a determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means, and the first dynamic display means has a specific period of time When it is set, it is possible for the remaining identification symbols to be one of the first specific combination and the second specific combination in a state in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine BD1 characterized in that after displaying a plurality of ready-to-win display modes that are stop-displayed in combination, the first identification symbols are displayed in the specific combination.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning slot is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, it is given after that according to the type of displayed symbols. There is a game designed to improve the interest of the game by providing different benefits (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, some of the symbols that make up a combination that does not give a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player are displayed in a stationary manner, thereby increasing interest in the game before the result is announced. There was a problem that the

It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player.
According to the gaming machine BD1, when identification patterns are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through a plurality of reach display modes, so the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the second privilege are supported. There is an effect that it is possible to have a long expectation that both of the combined combinations will be displayed, and that the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine BD1, the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.
According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD1, even during the specific period in which the first privilege is determined by the determining means, the specific combination is displayed through the multiple reach display mode. There is an effect that even when the first determination is made in the first step, it is possible to easily have a sense of expectation that the second privilege will be granted.

In the gaming machine BD2, the determination means determines the second privilege when the specific second determination result is obtained in the specific period, and the second dynamic display means has the specific period set. If so, while one second identification pattern is dynamically displayed, the rest of the identification patterns are stopped in a combination that can be one of the two or more different second specific combinations. A game machine BD3 characterized in that the second identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination after displaying the special multiple ready-to-win display mode.
According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD2, the player can be quickly recognized that the second privilege advantageous to the player is always given in the specific period when the specific second determination result is obtained. has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic BE group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and execution by the privilege game execution means. A privilege game type determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege game from a plurality of types, a specific area through which the game ball can pass when the specific privilege game is executed, and a game ball passing through the specific area a setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state as a game state to be set after execution of the privilege game when passing through until an end condition is satisfied; a suggesting mode executing means for executing a suggesting mode capable of suggesting the gaming state set after execution of the bonus game when the game is finished, wherein the suggesting mode includes a first suggesting mode and a suggesting mode. The second suggesting mode is combined with the second suggesting mode, and the second suggesting mode for suggesting the normal gaming state and the second suggesting mode for suggesting the advantageous gaming state are configured in the same period. A game machine BE1 characterized in that it is configured in a suggestive mode.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, and different winning games are executed depending on the winning type, and during the winning game of a specific type is a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter. In some cases, the interest in the game is enhanced by creating a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a specific type of winning game is executed, there are cases where the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry area, and the control load in the notification control in that case increases. I had a problem with it.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of reducing the control load.
According to the gaming machine BE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to the same period, it is possible to set the mode suggested by the state of the ball entering the specific area while suppressing the period during which the suggestion mode is displayed from varying. There is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the privilege game and reduce the control load.
In the gaming machine BE1, when the privilege game is executed, suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution means corresponding to the type of the privilege game to be executed; Switching the second suggestion mode among the suggestion modes set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the privilege game to a second suggestion mode corresponding to other than the specific privilege game. A gaming machine BE2 characterized by comprising a switching means capable of

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BE1, the suggestion mode is displayed even when the suggestion mode is set at the start so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the privilege game. Since it is possible to suggest by switching to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for playing, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.
<Characteristic BF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the type of jackpot)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, and the privilege game execution means A privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed from a plurality of types, and determining the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition during the execution of the privilege game. and period setting means for setting a period of length according to the type of the privilege game being executed, as the period for indicating.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
According to the gaming machine BF1, different periods can be set according to the type of privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine BF2 is characterized in that the gaming machine BF1 is provided with a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.
According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF1, it is possible to execute a specific effect in a different period set according to the type of privilege game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. effective.

The game machine BF1 or BF2 is provided with period switching means capable of switching the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game. Characteristic game machine BF3.
According to the game machine BF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BF1 or BF2, the length of the period can be changed even when the variable condition is established during the execution of the privilege game, so that the interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic BG group> (The ED period is variable depending on whether or not there is a V prize)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, and the privilege game being executed. A game capable of setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to a player based on a specific area through which a game ball can pass during execution of the privilege game and the game ball passing through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. state setting means; and specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition during execution of the privilege game, The specific period setting means is configured to be able to set different lengths of the specific period depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. Gaming machine BG1.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
According to the game machine BG1, it is possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be made
The gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BG1, it has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG1, the specific effect can be executed within the specific period, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine BG2, the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passing state of the game ball to the specific area during the privilege game.
According to the gaming machine BG3, since the notification mode is included in the specific effect, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.
<Characteristic BH group>
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, an operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated by the player. setting execution means capable of executing settings corresponding to the operation based on the operation; and operation of the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information. and a regulation means for regulating the execution of the setting based on the game machine BH1.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there is a configuration in which a plurality of performance modes are prepared in advance, and the mode of the variation performance executed during the special symbol variation period is varied for each performance mode.
In the gaming machine configured in this manner, the player can be provided with different variable performances by switching the performance mode, so that the player gets tired of the game early because only the same variable performances are provided. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily switch the production mode by operating an operable operation means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-249877). In such a gaming machine, since the player himself/herself can select the most interesting presentation mode from among a plurality of presentation modes, the variable presentation with low interest is executed and the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed. In addition, since the player himself/herself needs to operate the operation means in order to switch the production mode, the interest in the game can be improved.
However, as described above, when the effect mode can be switched at any timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the special symbol When a short-time fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, the switching of the production mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. I had a problem with it.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's willingness to play.

According to the game machine BH1, it is possible to restrict the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems.
In the gaming machine BH1, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and determination by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied. a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period to be displayed; A game machine BH2 characterized in that it is set as one.
According to the game machine BH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH1, it is possible to restrict the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that the setting execution means is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the discrimination result of the discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
In the game machine BH1 or BH2, an effect mode setting means capable of setting at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode based on the setting executed by the setting executing means. A gaming machine BH3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, different presentation modes can be set based on the operation of the operation means, so that the player does not get tired of the game early. has the effect of being able to suppress
Any one of the game machines BH1 to BH3 has specific setting means capable of executing specific settings, and the regulation means controls the setting execution means based on the operation of the operation means when the specific conditions are set. BH4, wherein the specific setting can be executed by the specific setting means without executing the setting by the BH4.
According to the game machine BH4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BH1 to BH3, the specific setting can be performed even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operation means while the specific condition is satisfied. is executed, it is possible to make the operation of the operation means a meaningful action by providing the player who has operated the operation means with an action due to the operation of the operation means.
A game machine BH4 having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting the information of the identification information stopped and displayed before the identification information is stop-displayed based on the specific setting. A gaming machine BH5 characterized by:

According to the game machine BH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH4, when the specific condition is satisfied, the information of the identification information stopped and displayed becomes identifiable before the stop display due to the suggestion effect, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early by executing various effects by operating when the game is established.
<Characteristic BI group>
determining means capable of executing determination; privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result; and a first game state as a game state; At least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and different from the second game state can be set. and a game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, and The third game state can be set when the first set condition is satisfied in the state where the second game state is set, and the state where the third game state is set is different from the first set condition. The first game state can be set when a second set condition is satisfied, and a period until the second set condition is satisfied when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. and an informing means capable of informing the advantageous period decided by the advantageous period deciding means.
Conventionally, when an advantageous game state (for example, time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the player is notified of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the number of special symbol fluctuations). Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. be. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous game state.
In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are some that can set a plurality of state types as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. A second advantageous gaming state (for example, probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state can be set.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when the first advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving state) is set, the period (remaining period) during which the first advantageous gaming state continues is notified to the player. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to notify which game state is to be set after the first advantageous game state ends. In other words, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player is asked if a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state is set, or is it more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state? There is a problem that it is difficult to understand what the game should be aimed at during the first advantageous game state, and the desire to play is lowered.
The purpose of this invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game by increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.
According to the game machine BI1, when the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set, the notifying means determines the advantageous period based on the period until the first game state is set again. is reported, even in a gaming machine having a plurality of game states more advantageous to the player than the first game state, it is possible to grasp the period during which the game state more advantageous than the first game state is set. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine BI1, in a state in which the notifying means informs that it is the advantageous period, a suggestive effect execution capable of executing a suggestive effect for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means. A game machine BI2 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine BI2, while notifying the player of the advantageous period until the first game state is set, the currently set game state can be suggested. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the game and improve the amusement of the game.
In the game machine BI2, the suggestive effect execution means provides a past suggestion for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means in a state in which the notifying means has notified that the advantage period is reached. The game machine BI3 is characterized by being able to execute an effect.
According to the game machine BI3, it is possible to suggest to the player the game state set in the past by the suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the content of the past suggestive effect, or analyze the past game content during the advantageous period, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. .
In the gaming machine BI2 or BI3, the notification means can display a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period on the display means, and the suggestive effect execution means varies the remaining period display mode. Thus, the game machine BI4 is characterized in that it is possible to suggest the currently set game state or the game state set in the past.

According to the gaming machine BI4, by varying the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, a suggestive effect regarding the game state is executed. There is an effect that the suggestive presentation can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner and the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Any one of the game machines BI1 to BI4 has a second suggestive effect means capable of suggesting the timing at which the first set condition can be satisfied in a state in which the notifying means informs that it is the advantageous period. A game machine BI5 characterized by.
According to the gaming machine BI5, the player can predict the timing at which the game state will be switched during the advantageous period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the advantageous period. There is
Any one of the game machines BI1 to BI5 has an advantage informing means capable of informing the player of the game state that is advantageous to the player, out of the second game state and the third game state. Game machine BI6 characterized.

According to the gaming machine BI 6, the player can grasp the superiority or inferiority of a plurality of game states set during the advantageous period. can have
<Characteristic BJ group>
display means for displaying suggestive information capable of suggesting a determination result; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for indicating is displayed, wherein the suggestive information is composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols. and a second symbol row composed of a plurality of symbol rows different from the first symbol row are set, and the dynamic display means comprises the first wherein the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed in a second direction different from the first direction while the symbol row is dynamically displayed in the first direction; Characteristic gaming machine BJ1.
Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which a third symbol is variably displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, so that the player can expect to win a big win while playing the game. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, the third symbol is only variably displayed for each symbol row without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row. There are only variations such as varying the direction of variation of each symbol row, and varying the size of each symbol row to be displayed, and the effect of the variable production using the variable display of the symbol row is more enhanced. There is a problem that further enhancement of interest in games is demanded by raising them.

It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
According to the game machine BJ1, the first pattern row and the second pattern row are dynamically displayed in directions different from each other, so that the first pattern row and the second pattern row can be easily distinguished, and the discrimination result is discriminated from the suggestive information. There is an effect that it can be done easily.
The gaming machine BJ1 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol sequence is displayed at the start of the dynamic display period. The second symbol row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol row in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition. The gaming machine BJ2 is characterized in that the symbols forming the second symbol row are dynamically displayed in the second direction at least at positions where some of the symbols constitute the second symbol row.
According to the game machine BJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BJ1, the dynamic display is performed at the position where the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, so that it is possible to execute an effect that effectively uses the display area. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine BJ2 has dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol row and the second symbol row A game machine BJ3 characterized in that it is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction based on the start of the target display period.
According to the gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ2, the first symbol row and the second symbol row are dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period. Since it is displayed, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
Any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ3 has display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestive information, and the display control means displays the determination result in the display mode of the first symbol row. A game machine BJ4 characterized in that it is possible to display and control one symbol row.
According to the game machine BJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BJ3, the display mode of the first symbol row is used to display the determination result. It is possible to freely set the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the dynamic display of the suggestive information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A gaming machine BJ4 has a first display layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, wherein the gaming machine comprises: At least a portion of a first display area on the first display layer and a second display area on the second display layer are configured to overlap, and the first display area and the second display area overlap each other. The game machine BJ5 is characterized in that the first symbol row can be displayed with priority over the second symbol row in a place where the two display areas overlap so that it can be visually recognized by the player.
According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ4, when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, the first symbol row is displayed so as to be visible to the player. be. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode for showing the determination result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player while performing an effect that makes effective use of the display area.
In the gaming machine BJ4 or BJ5, the display control means controls the addition of the plurality of symbols constituting the first symbol row and the plurality of symbols constituting the second symbol row arranged in a predetermined order. The game machine BJ6 is characterized in that the display control of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be performed so as to be constituted by the symbol rows.
According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ4 or BJ5, the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed as a total symbol row, so that the total symbol row can be displayed to the player. It can make you think that the columns are composed. Among them, the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed in opposite directions, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. effective.

In the gaming machine BJ6, the display control means preferably combines the first symbol row and the above-mentioned symbol row as the combined symbol row when the determination result is other than the specific determination result rather than when the determination result is the specific determination result. The game machine BJ7 is characterized in that display control is possible so as to facilitate dynamic display of the second symbol row.
According to the gaming machine BJ7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ6, dynamic display of the first symbol row and the second symbol row as the combined symbol row is made more difficult when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first symbol row and the dynamic display of the second symbol row are in different modes, it is possible to heighten expectations for a specific discrimination result and enhance the performance effect. It has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic BK group>
A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state from a first state. A game machine having variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which a ball is easily entered, a first specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the first specific area. A first detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the area, a second specific area through which the game ball that has passed through the first specific area can pass, and that the game ball has passed through the second specific area. a guideway capable of guiding a game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area; and an allowable state in which the game ball can pass through the second specific area. and variable means capable of changing between a regulated state in which passage is difficult and a variable means, wherein the variable means changes from the regulated state to the allowed state based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detection means. A game machine BK1 characterized in that it is configured to be variable until a variable condition is established.
Conventionally, a game machine (so-called V probability machine) that provides a specific area in an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and sets a probability variable state after the jackpot game ends when a game ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game. ) was (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-119807). In such a gaming machine, by setting the first state in which the game ball is likely to pass through the specific area for a predetermined period based on the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot game, the rate at which the variable probability state is set is defined in advance. configured as possible.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the first state is set based on the elapsed time from the execution of the jackpot game. There is a problem that the predetermined period of time during which the first state is set passes while the situation in which the game cannot be played occurs, and the player's desire to play decreases.
The purpose of this invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game by increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.
According to the gaming machine BK1, the variable means is changed to the allowable state based on the measurement result of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means, so the second specific area is determined by the number of balls entering the variable ball entering means. It is possible to let the game ball pass through, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the number of balls entered by the variable ball entry means can be improved, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.
In the gaming machine BK1, the variable means changes the first specific region to the allowable state in a period during which the predetermined number of game balls can reach the variable means in the state of being changed to the allowable state. A game machine BK2 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to allow the predetermined number of game balls that have passed through the first specific area to enter the second specific area and pass through the second specific area. There is an effect that the number of balls entering the second specific area can be limited by controlling the game balls.
a period discriminating means capable of discriminating a period until the game ball is detected by the second detecting means after the predetermined number of game balls pass through the first specific area in the gaming machine BK1 or BK2; and abnormality processing means capable of executing abnormality processing based on the determination result of the period determination means.
According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK1 or BK2, problems such as when a predetermined number of game balls pass through the first specific area but remain on the guideway can be quickly resolved. There is an effect that it can be discovered.
In any one of the game machines BK1 to BK3, the end condition is that a period shorter than a period in which the next game ball reaches the variable means after the game ball of the predetermined number is detected by the second detection means. A game machine BK4 characterized in that it is set so as to be established when it has passed.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BK1 to BK3, there is an effect that a predetermined number of game balls can be reliably entered into the second specific area.
Any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4 is characterized by having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the second detecting means. Game machine BK5 to play.
According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, even when a privilege game is executed, it is possible to motivate the player to enter the game ball into the second specific area. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the privilege game becomes boring.
<Characteristic BL group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; display means for displaying an identification pattern for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means. a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification pattern for indicating the specific determination result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and the privilege granting means. and a privilege type determining means capable of determining the privilege type to be given by means, wherein a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed can be dynamically determined. In the first period of the display period determination means and the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, the first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern for indicating the first result, and the second identification pattern is displayed. setting means for indicating a second result different from the first result in the period, and capable of being set so that at least a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed. A game machine BL1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, so that the player can expect to win a big win while playing the game. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery fluctuates during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.
To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game by suppressing a decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation, which has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. It is an object.
According to the gaming machine BL1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BL1, the dynamic display means can stop and display the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period after at least the first period has passed. A gaming machine BL2 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL1, the end of the first period and the start of the second period can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. effective.
In the gaming machine BL2, the dynamic display means can display the first identification pattern for indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result as the first result. A game machine BL3 characterized by.
According to the game machine BL3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BL2, the determination result of the determination means is notified to the player before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means elapses. Therefore, it is possible to make the player, who is trying to grasp the determination result of the determination means as soon as possible, pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification symbols executed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BL3, the dynamic display means can display the second identification pattern for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means as the second result. Game machine BL4.
According to the gaming machine BL4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to display the identification pattern for indicating the privilege type after the end of the second period. That is, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means can be displayed after displaying the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, after notifying the player that the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means can be notified to the player, so that at least the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that the dynamic display of the second period can be executed while giving a sense of security that the
In the gaming machine BL4, the privilege type determination means selects any one of a plurality of privilege types including at least a first privilege type and a second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type. The second identification pattern determines the type of privilege, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode containing at least information for indicating the type of privilege determined by the means for determining the privilege type. Game machine BL5 characterized.
According to the game machine BL5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BL4, the display mode of the second identification pattern indicates the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means, so the second identification pattern is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can predict the determined privilege means even during the period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The game machine BL5 has symbol row setting means capable of setting a symbol row in which the plurality of identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, and the dynamic display means includes: The identification symbols can be dynamically displayed based on the symbol row set by the symbol row setting means, and the symbol row setting means selects at least part of the first symbol row set during the first period. A game machine BL6 characterized in that a second symbol row in which the first identification symbols to be formed are switched to the second identification symbols can be set.
According to the gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL5, the second symbol row is set by switching the first identification symbols forming at least a part of the first symbol row to the second identification symbols. The number of identification symbols in the first symbol row can be the same as the number of identification symbols in the second symbol row. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the dynamic display mode of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of the set pattern sequence, so that the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification pattern can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine BL6, the symbol row setting means is capable of forming the first symbol row in which the first identification symbols for indicating the same discrimination result of the discrimination means are overlapped, and sets the second symbol row. A gaming machine BL7 characterized in that, when doing so, any one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.
According to the gaming machine BL7, since the first identification symbols included in the first symbol row are switched to the second identification symbols, even during the second period, the dynamic display executed during the first period It becomes possible to confirm each first identification pattern that has been displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

<Characteristic BM group>
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the operable operation means and the type of operation for the operation means a first operation and a second operation that is different from the first operation; and restriction means for restricting execution of the first setting by the setting execution means when the operation determination means determines that the first operation is performed, wherein the setting execution means is configured to perform the restriction. The game machine BM1 is characterized in that the first setting can be executed when the second operation is determined by the operation determining means during the regulation by the means.
Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, a plurality of production modes are prepared in advance, and there are some that are configured to vary the aspect of the fluctuation production executed during the special symbol fluctuation period for each production mode (for example, patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-249877).
In the gaming machine configured in this manner, the player can be provided with different variable performances by switching the performance mode, so that the player gets tired of the game early because only the same variable performances are provided. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily switch the presentation mode by operating an operable operation means. In such a gaming machine, since the player himself/herself can select the most interesting presentation mode from among a plurality of presentation modes, the variable presentation with low interest is executed and the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed. In addition, since the player himself/herself needs to operate the operation means in order to switch the production mode, the interest in the game can be improved.
However, as described above, when the effect mode can be switched at any timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the special symbol When a short-time fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, the switching of the production mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. I had a problem with it.

It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the player's willingness to play.
According to the game machine BM1, even in a state where the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be performed by performing the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means to perform various operations.
In the gaming machine BM1, the setting executing means can execute a second setting different from the first setting when the first operation is determined by the operation determining means during the restriction by the restricting means. A gaming machine BM2 characterized by:
According to the game machine BM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM1, when the first operation is executed during regulation, the second setting is executed. can be suppressed from doing nothing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied. a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by The gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that it can restrict execution of the first setting by the setting executing means when the operation determining means determines that the operation is the first operation.
According to the game machine BM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM1 or BM2, it is possible to restrict the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that the setting execution means is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.
The game machine BM3 has a performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means. A game machine BM4 characterized by.
According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM3, different performance modes can be set based on the operation of the operation means, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of game machines BM1 to BM4, the operation means includes a first operation unit for executing the first operation and a second operation different from the first operation unit for executing the second operation. A game machine BM5 characterized by having a part.
According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM4, different operation units are operated when executing the first operation and when executing the second operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.
The gaming machine BM6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BM5, the second operating section is provided at a position where it is more difficult for the player during the game to operate than the first operating section.
According to the gaming machine BM6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM5, by making the easiness of operation of each operation unit different, the first operation using the first operation unit is set to the normal operation, and the second operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the second operation using , an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic BN group>
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, an operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated by the player. first setting execution means capable of executing a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation; and regulation means for regulating execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means. and second setting executing means for executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operating means is operated in a state in which execution of the first setting is restricted by the restricting means. A gaming machine BN1 characterized by:
Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, so that the player can expect to win a big win while playing the game. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.
To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game by suppressing a decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation, which has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. It is an object.

According to the gaming machine BN1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.
According to the game machine BN1, when the operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, so that the operation means is operated but nothing is executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.
In the game machine BN1, the game machine BN2 is characterized in that the regulation means can regulate execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information.
According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN1, the first setting is performed because the restricting means restricts the execution of the first setting while the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the dynamic display result of the identification information.

In the gaming machine BN2, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and determination by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied. a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period to be displayed, and the regulation means is a state in which the short game state is set. The gaming machine BN3 is characterized in that it can restrict execution of the first setting by the setting executing means when the operation determining means determines that the operation is the first operation.
According to the game machine BN3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN1 or BN2, it is possible to regulate the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that the setting execution means is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.
In a game machine BN3, an effect mode setting means capable of setting at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode based on the first setting executed by the setting executing means. A gaming machine BN4 characterized by having:
According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN3, different presentation modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of game machines BN1 to BN4, the operation means includes a first operation section for executing a first operation and a first operation section for executing a second operation different from the first operation. and a second operation unit different from the game machine BM5.
According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BN1 to BN4, different operation units are operated when executing the first operation and when executing the second operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
In the gaming machine BN5, the second operating section is provided at a location that is more difficult for the player during the game to operate than the first operating section.
According to the game machine BN6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN5, by making the easiness of operation of each operation part different, the first operation using the first operation part is the normal operation, and the second operation part It is possible to make the second operation using , an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic BO group>
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, an operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated by the player. A performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a first performance mode as a performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode based on the operation, and the performance by the performance mode setting means. a period setting means capable of setting a first period during which mode setting can be executed and a second period during which the effect mode setting is more difficult than the first period; The game machine BO1 is characterized in that the setting of the performance mode during the second period can provide more advantageous information to the player than the setting during the first period.
Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, so that the player can expect to win a big win while playing the game. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.
To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game by suppressing a decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation, which has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. It is an object.

According to the gaming machine BO1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine BO1, when the effect mode is set in the second period in which the effect mode is difficult to set, it is possible to provide advantageous information to the player, so the effect mode is set during the second period. It is possible to allow the player to play while expecting to be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine BO1, the production mode setting means sets a third production mode different from the first production mode and the second production mode when setting the production mode during the second period. A game machine BO2 characterized in that
According to the gaming machine BO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BO1, by setting the third production mode, it is possible to inform the player that the production mode has been set during the second period, There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in any one of the game machines BO1 to BO3; a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, wherein the period setting means sets the short game state. The gaming machine BO4 is characterized in that the second period can be set when the second period is set.
According to the game machine BO4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BO1 to BO3, it is possible to make it difficult to set the production mode during the short game state. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.
Any one of the game machines BO1 to BO4 has a notification means capable of informing the player that the second period is set by the period setting means before the second period is set. Characteristic gaming machine BO5.
According to the gaming machine BO5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BO1 to BO4, the player can be made to know in advance that the second period will be set, so a desired presentation mode is set. In this state, the second period can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second period from being set in the performance mode that the player does not desire and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

<Characteristic BP group>
information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of information acquisition conditions; information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; and based on the information stored in the information storage means a determination means capable of performing determination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on a display means; a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the determination result of the above is stop-displayed on the display means, a pre-determining means capable of pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the determination by the determining means based on the information is performed; and a switching means capable of switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, and the switching condition is that the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means is the first preliminary determination result The game machine BP1 is characterized in that the case of the second preliminary determination result different from the first preliminary determination result is more likely to be established than the case of .
Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, so that the player can expect to win a big win while playing the game. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.
To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game by suppressing a decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation, which has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. It is an object.

According to the gaming machine BP1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed during the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.
According to the game machine BP1, since the ease with which the switching condition is met can be varied according to the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means, the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means when the production mode is switched can be used by the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user predict the game and improve the amusement of the game.
The game machine BP1 has operation means that can be operated by a player and operation determination means that can determine an operation for the operation means, and the switching condition is when the operation is determined by the operation determination means. A game machine BP2 characterized in that it can be established in
According to the game machine BP2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BP1, the switching condition can be established even when the player operates the operation means, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine BP2, the switching means switches from the first effect mode to a third effect mode different from the second effect mode when the determination result of the preliminary determination means is the second preliminary determination result. A gaming machine BP3 characterized by being switchable.
According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BP2, by setting the third performance mode, the player is informed that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the second preliminary determination result. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.
In any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP3, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, wherein the switching condition is set to the short game state; A game machine BP4 characterized in that the short game state is less likely to be established when the short game state is set than when the short game state is not set.
According to the game machine BP4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BP1 to BP3, it is possible to make it difficult to switch the production mode during the short game state. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Any one of the game machines BP1 to BP4 has an informing means capable of informing the player that the short game state is set by the game state setting means before the short game state is set. A game machine BP5 characterized by.
According to the gaming machine BP5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP4, the short gaming state can be set because the player can grasp in advance that the short gaming state will be set. Therefore, the operating means can be operated willingly to satisfy the switching condition before the switching condition is established. As a result, since it is possible to easily set the short game state in a state in which the desired performance mode is set, the short game state is set in the performance mode that the player does not desire, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that it will be lost.
<5066 Series>
<Characteristic CA group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the decision result by the decision means is the first decision result; and a specific setting after the specific game is executed. and a setting means that can be set until an end condition is satisfied, and the specific game when the determining means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the above, and the determination means can determine the second determination result when a specific period is set. A gaming machine CA1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to
According to the game machine CA1, when the specific period is set, it can be determined as the second determination result. Therefore, when the specific period is set, the second determination result is determined. By setting the specific setting, the specific setting will be set at a different timing than usual, and not only the specific game will be executed, but also the period in which the specific period is set will raise expectations. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
In the gaming machine CA1, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are provided, and the acquisition means is the first ball entering means. first information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and second information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. A gaming machine CA2, wherein said determining means is configured to be capable of determining said second determination result based on said second information.
According to the game machine CA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine CA1, the second determination result can be determined by making the ball enter the second ball entering means. The ball entry means can change the value of the game ball entry, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information is stored, thereby diversifying the game. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CA1 or CA2, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game. A game machine CA3 characterized in that it is a game machine CA3.
According to the game machine CA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CA1 or CA2, the period in which the specific setting is set can be changed according to the determined result, so that the game can be diversified and the interest can be increased. There is an effect that it is possible to further improve the
<Characteristic CB group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means , a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result, and a specific condition after the specific game is executed and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting until a termination condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the second determination result different from the first determination result by the determination means. It has a setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when it is determined that the determination means is the first determination result and the first A game machine CB1 characterized in that it is configured to be capable of overlapping discrimination with 2 discrimination results.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine CB1, since the first determination result and the second determination result can be redundantly determined, the specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not satisfied. can be made possible, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is made.
In the gaming machine CB1, when the first determination result and the second determination result are redundantly determined by the determination means, it is more advantageous to the player than when the specific game is not redundantly determined. The game machine CB2 is characterized in that the type of the specific game is made to be easily executed.
According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CB1, a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to overlapping discrimination, so that various discrimination results for the player are supported. There is an effect that the game can be diversified by providing the privilege.

In the game machine CB1 or CB2, the setting control means can set the specific setting in a period for determining whether it is the first determination result after the determination means determines the second determination result. A game machine CB3 characterized in that it is configured.
According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CB1 or CB2, when it is determined as the second determination result, it is determined whether it is the first determination result executed after that. is performed, it is possible to determine whether or not the result is the first determination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and there is an effect that determination can be performed in various states.
<Characteristic CC group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and from the first game state and game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is likely to be executed, wherein the game state setting means is configured to set the second game state. As types, a first setting capable of setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means and a second determination result different from the first determination result executed by the determination means. and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on a certain condition, and the gaming machine can perform the second setting according to the setting type. It is possible to vary the selection ratio of the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed during the game state being the first determination result. game machine CC1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, when the advantageous state is set, there is an effect that the game success or failure lottery is likely to be executed, but if the result of the game success or failure lottery wins during the advantageous state, the same privilege is always given. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because it is granted. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine CC1, since the selection ratio in the type of the privilege game is varied according to the setting type, it is possible to make the same second game state different, without setting many game states. There is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine CC1, the second game state is continuously set until the end condition is satisfied, and when the privilege game is executed when the second setting is set, The game machine CC2 is characterized in that it is easy to set such that the period until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is executed can be extended.
According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CC1, the second setting makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the second gaming state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player more interested in the period until the end condition is set when the privilege game is executed.

A gaming machine CC3 characterized in that in the gaming machine CC1 or CC2, the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.
According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CC1 or CC2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that the game state is set.
<Characteristic CD group>
Discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result executed by the discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, and execution by the privilege game execution means a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be executed than the first game state after the end of the privilege game, wherein The game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined end condition while the second game state is set, and the game machine sets the game state. A setting information determining means capable of determining setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the means, and is set after the first setting information is set by the setting information determining means. A game machine CD1 characterized in that it is possible to set the second game state in which the end condition is difficult to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game when the second setting information to be played is discriminated.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine CD1, the longer the period in which the second game state is set, the more difficult it is for the end condition to be satisfied when the privilege game is executed. The expected period and the period during which the privilege game is not expected to be executed can be switched and set, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be further improved.
The gaming machine CD1 has setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result and the determination by the determination means. 2. A gaming machine CD2, wherein said setting information setting means is configured to be able to set setting information corresponding to the type of set setting information.
According to the gaming machine CD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CD1, the setting information set according to the history of the setting information can be varied regularly, so that the period during which the second game state is set can be easily changed. There is an effect that it is possible to discriminate

In the game machine CD1 or CD2, the game machine CD3 is characterized in that the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.
According to the game machine CD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CD1 or CD2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that a game state is set.
<Characteristic CE group>
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, and a first privilege can be given based on the fact that the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is the first determination result, a first privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the result of the first discrimination being a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result. in the machine, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the first determination, and the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means is a third determination result Based on the fact that the first privilege can be granted and the result of the second determination is a fourth determination result different from the third determination result, a third benefit different from the first privilege and the second privilege a second privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege, wherein the gaming machine does not grant the third privilege based on the first determination performed by the first discrimination means; and , the gaming machine CE1 is characterized in that the second privilege is not provided based on the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, the privilege given when winning is the same, so there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine CE1, different benefits can be granted depending on whether the first determination is performed or the second determination is performed, so different determinations are performed for the player. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.
<Characteristic CF group>
a first determining means capable of executing a first determination for determining that a first condition is satisfied; and a first advantageous state based on determination that the first condition is satisfied by the first determining means. , second determination means capable of executing a second determination for determining whether a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and the second determination means by the second determination means a second state setting means capable of setting a second advantageous state based on the determination that two conditions are satisfied, wherein the first determination means determines that the first condition is satisfied. After the first advantageous state is set by the first state setting means, the first advantageous state is determined based on the determination that the second condition is satisfied by the second determining means. A gaming machine CF1 characterized by having third state setting means capable of setting a state and a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, both when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, when the lottery result is a lottery result in which a privilege is given, the privilege corresponding to each is only awarded. , there was a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine CF1, the first advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the second condition. If the second condition is met after the first condition is met and before the first advantageous state is set, it is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A third advantageous state is set. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the timing at which the first condition is established and the timing at which the second condition is established, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. .
<Characteristic CG group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result, a first game state, and the first game game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the game state to the first game state; It is possible to set the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the game state is set is a second determination result different from the first determination result, The first game state can be set based on the establishment of the end condition in the state in which the second game state is set, and the determination means executed in the state in which the first game state is set. is a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set. A gaming machine CG1 characterized by:
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the lottery with the same contents is always executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine CG1, it is possible to make it difficult to set the third game state while the second game state is set. Aim for the set game. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game with different degrees of advantage according to the game situation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
In the game machine CG1, the determination means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination will be the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination will be the second determination result. Game machine CG2 to play.
According to the game machine CG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CG1, the second determination result is more likely than the third determination result. A game aimed at setting the third game state can be played while avoiding the transition of the game state to the second game state in which the third game state is difficult to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, a first condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of times of the determination by the determination means that is executed in the state where the second game state is set as the end condition reaches a predetermined number of times. A game machine CG3 characterized by having end condition setting means capable of setting at least end conditions.
According to the gaming machine CG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated when the number of determinations executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the determination by the determination means in the first game state is performed at least in a specific cycle. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine CG3, the end condition setting means can set a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. .
According to the game machine CG4, in addition to the effects of the game machine CG3, the second game state can be ended at an interval shorter than the specific period by satisfying the second end condition. There is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided.

In any one of the game machines CG1 to CG4, the determination means is executed during the second game state with a probability that the result of the determination executed during the first game state is the third determination result. The game machine CG5 is characterized in that the determination can be executed so that the probability that the result of the determination becomes the third determination result is lower.
According to the game machine CG5, in addition to the effects of the game machines CG1 to CG4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the third game state is more likely to be set in the first game state than in the second game state, the player is allowed to play while expecting that the determination will be executed in a situation where the second game state is not set. It has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic CH group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and a first game state. and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the game state setting means. As a setting type for setting the second game state by, a first setting that can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game execution means, and a result of the determination performed by the determination means are the A type setting means capable of setting at least a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. The game state setting means selects an advantageous second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state and a game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state according to the setting type set by the type setting means. A game machine CH1 characterized by being able to set a disadvantageous second game state.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, the advantageous state is only set after the privilege game is executed, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine CH1, it is possible to set a game state more advantageous than the first game state and a game state more disadvantageous than the first game state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of being able to
<Technical concept of 5068>
<Characteristic DA group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the decision result by the decision means is the first decision result; and a specific setting after the specific game is executed. and a setting means that can be set until an end condition is satisfied, and the specific game when the determining means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the above, and the determination means can determine the second determination result when a specific period is set. A gaming machine DA1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to
According to the game machine DA1, when the specific period is set, it can be determined as the second determination result. By setting the specific setting, the specific setting will be set at a different timing than usual, and not only the specific game will be executed, but also the period in which the specific period is set will raise expectations. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
The gaming machine DA1 has a first ball entering means for entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the obtaining means is the first ball entering means. first information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and second information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. A gaming machine DA2, wherein said determining means is configured to be capable of determining said second determination result based on said second information.
According to the gaming machine DA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1, the second determination result can be determined by making the ball enter the second ball entering means. The ball entry means can change the value of the game ball entry, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information is stored, thereby diversifying the game. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine DA1 or DA2, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game. A game machine DA3 characterized in that the game machine DA3 is
According to the gaming machine DA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1 or DA2, the period during which the specific setting is set can be changed according to the discrimination result, so that the game can be diversified and interesting. There is an effect that it is possible to further improve the
<Feature DB group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means , a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result, and a specific condition after the specific game is executed and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting until a termination condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the second determination result different from the first determination result by the determination means. It has a setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when it is determined that the determination means is the first determination result and the first 2. A game machine DB 1 characterized in that it is configured so as to be capable of overlapping discrimination with 2 discrimination results.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine DB 1, since the first determination result and the second determination result can be redundantly determined, the specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not satisfied. can be made possible, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is made.
In the gaming machine DB 1, when the first determination result and the second determination result are redundantly determined by the determination means, it is more advantageous to the player than when the specific game is not redundantly determined. A game machine DB 2 characterized in that the type of the specific game is one that is easy to execute.
According to the gaming machine DB 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB 1, a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to overlapping discrimination, so that various discrimination results for the player are supported. There is an effect that the game can be diversified by providing the privilege.

In the game machine DB1 or DB2, the setting control means can set the specific setting in a period of time to determine whether the first determination result is obtained after the determination means determines the second determination result. A gaming machine DB 4 characterized by being configured.
According to the gaming machine DB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB1 or DB2, when the second determination result is determined, it is specifically set to the period during which it is determined whether the first determination result is executed after that. is performed, it is possible to determine whether or not the result is the first determination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and there is an effect that determination can be performed in various states.
<Characteristic DC group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and from the first game state and game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is likely to be executed, wherein the game state setting means is configured to set the second game state. As types, a first setting capable of setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means and a second determination result different from the first determination result executed by the determination means. and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on a certain condition, and the gaming machine can perform the second setting according to the setting type. It is possible to vary the selection ratio of the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed during the game state being the first determination result. game machine DC1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, when the advantageous state is set, there is an effect that the game success or failure lottery is likely to be executed. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because it is provided. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine DC1, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game is varied according to the setting type, it is possible to make the same second game state different, without setting a large number of game states. There is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine DC1, the second game state is continuously set until the end condition is satisfied, and when the privilege game is executed when the second setting is set, The game machine DC2 is characterized in that it is easy to set such that the period until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is executed can be extended.
According to the gaming machine DC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1, the second setting makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the second gaming state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player more interested in the period until the end condition is set when the privilege game is executed.

In the game machine DC1 or DC2, the game machine DC3 is characterized in that the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.
According to the gaming machine DC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that a game state is set.
<Characteristic DD group>
Discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result executed by the discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, and execution by the privilege game execution means a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be executed than the first game state after the end of the privilege game, wherein The game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined end condition while the second game state is set, and the game machine sets the game state. A setting information determining means capable of determining setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the means, and is set after the first setting information is set by the setting information determining means. A gaming machine DD1 is characterized in that it is possible to set the second game state in which the end condition is unlikely to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game when the second setting information to be played is discriminated.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine DD1, the longer the period in which the second game state is set, the more difficult it is for the end condition to be satisfied when the privilege game is executed, so that the player is encouraged to execute the privilege game. The expected period and the period during which the privilege game is not expected to be executed can be switched and set, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be further improved.
The gaming machine DD1 has setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result and the determination by the determination means. 2. A gaming machine DD2, wherein said setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to a type of set setting information.
According to the gaming machine DD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DD1, the setting information set according to the history of the setting information can be varied regularly, so that the period during which the second game state is set can be easily changed. There is an effect that it is possible to discriminate

In the game machine DD1 or DD2, the game machine DD3 is characterized in that the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.
According to the game machine DD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DD1 or DD2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that a game state is set.
<Characteristic DE group>
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, and a first privilege can be given based on the fact that the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is the first determination result, a first privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the fact that the result of the first discrimination is the second discrimination result, wherein the first discrimination and the is a second determination means capable of executing a different second determination, and the first privilege is given based on the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means being a specific second determination result possible, and based on the fact that the result of the second determination is a fourth determination result different from the third determination result, a third benefit that is different from the first benefit and the second benefit can be granted 2 privilege granting means, wherein the gaming machine does not grant the third privilege based on the first discrimination performed by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means The gaming machine DE1 is configured so that the second privilege is not given based on the second determination executed by the game machine DE1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, the privilege given when winning is the same, so there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine DE1, different benefits can be granted depending on whether the first determination is performed or the second determination is performed, so different determinations are performed for the player. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.
<Characteristic DF group>
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination for determining that a first condition is satisfied; and a display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. a first dynamic display means capable of statically displaying the first identification information in a manner indicating the first determination result after dynamically displaying the first identification information; a second determination means capable of performing a second determination; A second motion capable of statically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means and then statically displaying the second determination result. and a target display means for setting a specific game state when dynamic display of the first identification information for setting an advantageous game state that can be advantageous to the player is started. When the game state setting means and the specific game state are set, the second determination result which is advantageous to the player can be easily determined by the second determination means. A game machine DF1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, when the first lottery is executed and the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is that a privilege is awarded, the corresponding privilege is only awarded, and the game is not performed. There was a problem of monotony. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine DF1, the first advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the second condition. If the second condition is met after the first condition is met and before the first advantageous state is set, it is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A third advantageous state is set. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the timing at which the first condition is established and the timing at which the second condition is established, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. .
In the gaming machine DF1, in the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the dynamic display of the second identification information executed in the specific game state is longer than the period during which the dynamic display can be executed multiple times. The dynamic display of the period is controlled to be selected from the dynamic display mode group in which the dynamic display of the period is likely to be selected, and when the specific game state is set, the dynamic display of the second identification information A dynamic display mode is selected from a dynamic display mode group in which a dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display period shorter than that of a normal game state is likely to be selected. game machine DF2.
According to the gaming machine DF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DF1, the specific game state can be set long by selecting a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the first identification information. By setting the dynamic display period of the second identification information to be short, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed many times, so that the player can dynamically display the second identification information more often. There is an effect that it is easy to motivate the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine DF1 or DF2, when the specific game state is set, it is possible to set a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game state based on the specific second determination result. A game machine DF3, characterized in that the game machine DF3 is
According to the game machine DF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF1 or DF2, when the second identification information becomes a specific second determination result, a game state more advantageous than the advantageous game state is set in the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the privilege given to the player can be changed according to the remaining period of the specific game state, and the game can be diversified.
In any one of the game machines DF1 to DF3, the dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display of the first identification information dynamically displayed due to the establishment of a specific condition is changed to the The game machine DF4 is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to forcibly stop display so that an advantageous game state is not set.
According to the gaming machine DF4, in any of the gaming machines DF1 to DF3, the advantageous gaming state that should be set by the dynamic display of the second identification information can be forcibly discarded, thus diversifying the games. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF4, when the specific game state is set and the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to execute the privilege game, dynamic display is performed. A gaming machine DF5 is configured to interrupt the dynamic display period of the first identification information that is present, resume the dynamic display after the execution of the privilege game is completed, and execute the dynamic display.
According to the gaming machine DF5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF4, during the period when the privilege game is played, after the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted, after the privilege game ends Since the game is restarted, the privilege game is executed, thereby reducing the expectation for the advantageous game state, thereby suppressing the problem of lowering the value of the privilege game.
In any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF5, the advantageous gaming state is set when the dynamic display of the first identification information is performed in which a bonus game executed after the dynamic display of the first identification information is performed. and a second setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that the privilege game is not executed. A gaming machine DF6 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine DF6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF5, the advantageous gaming state is set even if the privilege game is not executed, so that the timing at which the advantageous gaming state is set. can be made difficult to predict, and there is an effect that the game can be given a freshness.

<Characteristic DG group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result, a first game state, and the first game game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the game state to the first game state; It is possible to set the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the game state is set is a second determination result different from the first determination result, The first game state can be set based on the establishment of the end condition in the state in which the second game state is set, and the determination means executed in the state in which the first game state is set. is a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set. A gaming machine DG1 characterized by:
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there is a problem that the lottery with the same contents is always executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine DG1, it is possible to make it difficult to set the third game state while the second game state is set. Aim for the set game. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game with different degrees of advantage according to the game situation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine DG1, the determination means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination will be the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination will be the second determination result. Gaming machine DG2.
According to the gaming machine DG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DG1, the second discrimination result is more likely than the third discrimination result. A game aimed at setting the third game state can be played while avoiding the transition of the game state to the second game state in which the third game state is difficult to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine DG1 or DG2, a first condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of times of the discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the state where the second game state is set as the end condition reaches a predetermined number of times. A game machine DG3 characterized by having an end condition setting means capable of setting at least an end condition.
According to the gaming machine DG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DG1 or DG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated when the number of determinations executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the determination by the determination means in the first game state is performed at least in a specific cycle. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine DG3, the end condition setting means can set a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. .
According to the gaming machine DG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DG3, the second game state can be terminated at intervals shorter than the specific period by satisfying the second termination condition. There is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided.
In any one of the game machines DG1 to DG4, the determination means is executed during the second game state with a higher probability that the result of the determination executed during the first game state becomes the third determination result. The game machine DG5 is characterized in that the discrimination can be executed so that the probability that the result of the discrimination becomes the third discrimination result is lower.
According to the game machine DG5, in addition to the effects of the game machines DG1 to DG4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the third game state is more likely to be set in the first game state than in the second game state, the player is allowed to play while expecting that the determination will be executed in a situation where the second game state is not set. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic DH group>
A case in which a determining means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and identification information for indicating a specific determination result are displayed. One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. a game state setting means, wherein a first state in which a game state advantageous to a player is set by satisfying a termination condition for terminating the setting of a second game state; and the termination condition. The game machine DH1 is characterized in that it has a state setting means capable of setting a second state in which a game state is set which is more playable than the case where the game is terminated when the game is not established.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, the advantageous state is only set after the privilege game is executed, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine DH1, when the second game state is set, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the satisfaction of the end condition by setting the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved by changing the enjoyment caused by the end of the state.

In the gaming machine DH1, the first game state is set by satisfying the end condition when the first state is set, and the second game state is changed from the state in which the first game state is set. The game machine DH2 is characterized in that the second state is set based on the setting.
According to the gaming machine DH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DH1, after the first state is set, the second gaming state is set through the first gaming state, and the second gaming state is set. Advantageous game states are set according to the order in which the states are set, and there is an effect that the game can be easily continued while the degree of expectation is gradually increased.
In the gaming machine DH1 or DH2, the second game state includes a first condition that can be set when the identification information for executing the privilege game is dynamically displayed, and the privilege game is executed. and a second condition that can be set when the dynamic display of the identification information that is not displayed is performed.
According to the game machine DH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DH1 or DH2, the timing at which the second game state is set can be diversified, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided.

<Characteristic DI group>
In a game machine having a first determination means capable of executing a first determination and a second determination means capable of performing a second determination different from the first determination, the first determination means and the second determination a first setting that can be set if the means are determined in a first order; and a second setting that can be set if the means are determined in a second order different from the first order. A gaming machine DI1 characterized in that it has a setting means capable of setting .
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, determination of a win or the like is executed in a predetermined order by a plurality of triggers, and a player is notified based on the determination result, and when a specific notification such as a win is given. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege that is advantageous to a player is given (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, even if the order in which the determination of winning or the like is executed is different, the game is only executed based on the individual determination result, and the game with different game characteristics is executed by changing the order. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because there is no such thing. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
According to the game machine DI1, since different settings are made according to the execution order of the first discrimination and the second discrimination, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the discrimination is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game. effective.

The game machine DI1 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the game state setting means is configured to perform the first determination. The game machine DI2 is characterized in that the second game state can be set based on the fact that the first determination is made, and the first game state can be set based on the execution of the first determination.
According to the game machine DI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DI1, the first game state can be set periodically, and the game state can be changed in a constant cycle to improve the interest of the game. .
In the gaming machine DI2, the game state setting means can set the second game state based on the execution of the second determination, and then set the game state based on the execution of the second determination. A gaming machine DI3 characterized by being able to set a first gaming state.
By alternately executing the first discrimination and the second discrimination, the first game state can be continuously set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by making the order of discrimination interesting. .

In any one of the game machines DI1 to DI3, the first setting executes the first privilege game based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and the second setting performs the specific A gaming machine DI4 characterized in that a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is executed based on the first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result.
According to the game machine DI4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines DI1 to DI3, the second setting can be made advantageous to the player, and the interest in the game can be varied in the order of discrimination. has the effect of being able to
In any one of the game machines DI2 to DI4, the game state setting means, when the second determination is executed next to the first determination that triggered the setting of the second game state, a plurality of The game machine DI5 is characterized in that the first game state can be set based on the establishment of a setting condition that can be established by executing at least the first determination of times.
<Characteristic DJ group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a first determination result, and a game rather than a first game state One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including a second game state advantageous to the player and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. , wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state after the privilege game ends, and the game is executed in the state in which the first game state is set. The third game state can be set based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the determination means sets the first game state. It is easier to determine the second determination result in the determination performed in the state where the second game state is set than in the determination performed in the state where the second game state is set. , the third game state is better when the determination is performed when the first game state is set than when the determination is performed when the second game state is set. A game machine DJ1 characterized in that it is configured to facilitate setting of a.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to allow a player to switch between various game states by setting a plurality of game states and switching the game state when conditions such as winning are satisfied. Therefore, a configuration has been proposed to increase the motivation to play (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
Furthermore, the game state with different degrees of advantage to the player can be set as a plurality of game states, and by gradually switching the game state from the game state with the low degree of advantage to the game state with the high degree of advantage, the player can There is a game that maintains a high desire to play by aiming to switch to a more advantageous game state than the current one.
However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, when the game state is periodically switched, the player does not get tired of the game early and can continue to have a high desire to play. If a game state with a low degree of advantage continues for a long time without switching, there is a problem that the player's desire to play the game is remarkably reduced. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of improving interest.
According to the gaming machine DJ1, the first game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state, and the third game state is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Easy-to-set discrimination is performed. Therefore, a game aiming to set the second game state after the privilege game is executed and a game aiming to set the third game state for the player who has set the first game state. , can be executed in parallel, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Further, by continuing the first game state for a long time without switching the game state to the second game state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game state being switched to the third game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing even when the first game state continues.
In the game machine DJ1, the determination means can execute a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and execute a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. In the first game state and the second game state, establishment of the second determination condition is restricted, and in the third game state, establishment of the second determination condition is permitted. A game machine DJ2 characterized in that it is set to
According to the game machine DJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DJ1, the ease with which the discrimination condition is established is changed for each type depending on the game state, so that the game method can be varied and the game can be given a freshness. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine DJ1 or DJ2, the game state setting means can set the second game state when the third game state is set and a specific determination result is determined by the second determination. A game machine DJ3 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine DJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DJ1 or DJ2, it is possible to shift to the second game state, which is an advantageous game state, even after the third game state, thereby making the state more advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it can be continued for a long period of time.
<Characteristic DK group>
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means A storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of up to a predetermined number; a determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means; 1 privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the determination result, and capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means prior to the discrimination by the discrimination means. a prior determination means, a first game state, and a second game state in which a game ball can be more easily entered into the ball entry means than in the first game state are established based on the information. and game state setting means that can be set based on possible conditions, wherein when the second game state is set, the first condition is set based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means. A gaming machine DK1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means configured to execute a specific effect that is not executed in the first game state due to being established.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, information such as a random number is acquired when a game ball enters a starting hole, etc., and a lottery is executed based on the random number. A configuration has been proposed that determines whether or not to grant an advantageous privilege (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
Furthermore, the acquired information can be stored up to a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the game state includes a first game state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the starting hole or the like, and a second game state. A configuration has been proposed in which it is possible to set a second game state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first game state.

In such a conventional gaming machine, ending the second game state in a state in which more information is stored tends to be the most advantageous game for the player. A game was played by a player to enter a large number of game balls.
However, depending on the content of the lottery based on the information already acquired, there are cases where the right to set the second game state again has been acquired even after the currently set second game state has ended. There is a risk that the player will unnecessarily enter a game ball into the starting hole or the like to play a game. Also, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous just before the second game state ends, and the interest in the game decreases. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine DK1, it is possible to early identify that the first condition is established by executing the specific effect based on the result of the preliminary determination during the second game state, and the second game. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the value of the setting of the state and improve the amusement of the game.
In the gaming machine DK1, a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means are arranged as the ball-entering means, and the discrimination means is the first ball-entering means. performing a first determination based on the ball hitting means, and performing a second determination that is more advantageous than the first determination based on the second ball hitting means; The game machine DK2 is characterized in that the second game state makes it easy to change the variable means from the first state to the second state.

According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DK1, in the second game state, there is an effect that the second ball-entering means can increase the frequency of ball entry, thereby increasing the interest of the player.
In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, a first termination condition and a second termination condition more advantageous to the player than the first termination condition can be set as termination conditions of the second game state. The gaming machine DK3 is characterized in that the first condition can be satisfied based on the determination that the second end condition can be satisfied by the prior determination.
According to the game machine DK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DK1 or DK2, the satisfaction of the first condition makes it possible to store more information and execute more advantageous second determinations. There is an effect that it is possible to early determine that the second determination will be performed more often by executing the specific effect, and to increase expectations for the game in advance.
<Technical concept of 5072>
<Characteristic EA group>
When a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means and a privilege imparting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player, wherein a first setting can be set based on establishment of a specific condition when a first game state is set. and setting means capable of setting a second setting different from the first setting based on establishment of the specific condition when a second game state different from the first game state is set. A gaming machine EA1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to the game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine EA1, since the setting type differs between the first game state and the second game state when the specific condition is satisfied, the game setting can be varied in various ways, and the specific condition can be set in the first game state. is satisfied or the specific condition is satisfied in the second game state, the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine EA1, the specific condition is set to be satisfied when a condition corresponding to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed is satisfied. 2. The gaming machine EA2 according to claim 1, wherein the counted value is maintained even after transitioning to a game state.
According to the gaming machine EA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the count value of the number of times is maintained even when the game state changes, there is an effect that the number of times until the specific condition is satisfied can be reached while the game state is varied in various ways.
In the gaming machine EA1 or EA2, the first setting can set an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in a first period, and the second setting is a second period longer than the first period. The game machine EA3 is characterized in that it is possible to set the advantageous state with .
According to the gaming machine EA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA1 or EA2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the advantage state can be set for a long period of time by setting the second setting, there is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved by varying the degree of advantage according to the establishment of the specific condition.

In any one of the game machines EA1 to EA3, when the determination result by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result, dynamic display of the identification information is started in the second game state. The game machine EA4 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to be set before starting.
According to the game machine EA4, in addition to the effects of the game machines EA1 to EA3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first determination result is obtained, the game state is shifted to the second game state, so that there is an effect that the game state can be varied in various ways.
In any of the game machines EA1 to EA4, when the second game state is set, the first game state is changed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information a predetermined number of times. A game machine EA5 characterized by being configured to be settable.
According to the game machine EA5, in addition to the effects of the game machines EA1 to EA4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first game state and the second game state can be shifted to each other before the number of times until the specific condition is satisfied is counted, and the period until the number of times until the specific condition is satisfied has passed. There is an effect that it can be diversified.

A game machine EA6 characterized in that any one of the game machines EA1 to EA5 has a suggestive effect executing means capable of suggesting that the second game state is set before the specific condition is satisfied. .
According to the game machine EA6, in addition to the effects of the game machines EA1 to EA5, the following effects are produced. That is, since it is possible for the player to grasp that the second game state has been set, there is an effect that the enjoyment of predicting the game state to be set at the time when the specific condition is established can be provided. be.
Any one of the gaming machines EA3 to EA6 has at least advantageous state setting means capable of setting the advantageous state for the second period based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. A gaming machine EA7 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine EA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines EA3 to EA6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to set the advantageous state for the second period based on the fact that the result of determination by the determining means is a specific determination result, the player is notified of the second period before the specific condition is established. can provide the advantage of Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that various conditions are set as the specific conditions, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the game machine EA7, the advantageous state for the second period can be set based on the determination result by the determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result. Machine EA8.
According to the gaming machine EA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the determination result does not give a privilege, the advantageous state for the second period can be set. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think that it has been done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that various conditions are set as the specific conditions, and thus there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
In any one of the game machines EA1 to EA8, a third setting executing means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when the period during which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period. A gaming machine EA9 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine EA9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a period in which the specific condition is not established continues for a long period of time, the third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, so there is an effect that damage to the player can be suppressed.

<Characteristic EB group>
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. a first privilege granting means capable of imparting a first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the player is in a situation where the discrimination result by the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result. a first setting means capable of executing a first setting when the result is a result; and a canceling means capable of canceling the first setting by pressing and canceling the first setting, and a second setting capable of executing a second setting different from the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied when the first setting is executed. 2 setting means; and a game machine EB1.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to the game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine EB1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.
The game machine EB2 is characterized in that when the first setting is executed in the game machine EB1, the first setting is not set after the first privilege is granted.
According to the gaming machine EB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first setting is canceled when the privilege is granted, the second setting can be executed when the privilege is not granted for a long period of time. There is an effect that it can be made to feel advantageous to
The game machine EB1 or EB2 has a means capable of making a state more advantageous to the player than when the first setting is set by executing the second setting. Characteristic game machine EB3.

According to the game machine EB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EB1 or EB2, the following effects are produced. That is, by executing the second setting, a state advantageous to the player can be obtained, so that there is an effect that damage to the player can be suppressed even if a state in which benefits are not given for a long period of time occurs.
In any one of the game machines EB1 to EB3, a third setting executing means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when the period during which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period. A gaming machine EB4 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine EB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EB1 to EB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a period in which the specific condition is not established continues for a long period of time, the third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, so there is an effect that damage to the player can be suppressed.
<Characteristic EC group>
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. a first privilege granting means capable of imparting a first privilege that is advantageous to the player when the player is in a situation where the discrimination result by the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result. a first setting means capable of executing a first setting when the result is a result; and a second setting capable of executing the second setting based on the satisfaction of the first condition when the first setting is canceled by the canceling means. 2 setting means; and a gaming machine EEC1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to the game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine EC1, it is possible to randomize the number of dynamic display times of the identification information until the second setting is executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine EC1, the second setting means is configured to be able to execute the second setting based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed a predetermined specific number of times. Characterized game machine EC2.
According to the gaming machine EC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is an effect that the number of times of dynamic display until the second setting is executed can be randomized.
In the game machine EC1 or EC2, the second setting means can execute the second setting when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. Gaming machine EC3.
According to the gaming machine EC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second setting is executed according to a plurality of conditions, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the trigger of the execution of the second setting, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

<Feature ED group>
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a privilege providing means capable of awarding a privilege advantageous to a player in a case where the determination result by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result. a first setting means capable of executing a first setting; and when the first setting is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times. a release means capable of releasing the setting; and a second setting means capable of executing a second setting based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed a predetermined number of times; The gaming machine is characterized in that a count value for counting the specific number of times is not updated when dynamic display of the identification information is started while the first setting is being executed. Gaming machine ED1.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine ED1, it is possible to randomize the number of dynamic display times of the identification information until the second setting is executed, and thus there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine ED1, the gaming machine ED2 is characterized in that the second setting is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first setting.
According to the gaming machine ED2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ED1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period until the setting advantageous to the player is given by setting the second setting by executing the dynamic display a specific number of times while the first setting is not set is set at random. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.
A gaming machine ED3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, when the privilege is granted to the player, a count value for counting the specific number of times is updated to an initial value.

According to the gaming machine ED3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes too advantageous to the player because the count value for counting the specific number of times is updated to the initial value when the privilege is given.
In any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED3, when the dynamic display for indicating that the determination means has determined the first determination result is executed and the specific number of times has been reached, the first determination result is displayed. The game machine ED4 is characterized in that the setting is not set and the second setting is set.
According to the game machine ED4, in addition to the effects of the game machines ED1 to ED3, the following effects are produced. That is, the second setting, which is more advantageous than the first setting, is preferentially set, thereby providing an advantageous game to the player.
Any one of the game machines ED1 to ED4 has a first measuring means for measuring the number of dynamic display times of the identification information, and a second measuring means for measuring the count value, wherein the first A game machine ED5, characterized by having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the first measurement result by the measuring means and the second measurement result by the second measuring means.

According to the gaming machine ED5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to easily predict the remaining number of times until the value measured by the second measuring means reaches the specific number of times, so that the second setting is provided to the player. There is an effect that the remaining period until execution can be easily predicted.
<Characteristic EE group>
A determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. A game machine having a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when a game is played, in which a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state can be set. The setting means and the game machine shift to the second game state in a state in which the information set in the first game state is stored, and cancel the second game state in a state in which the information is stored. and means for facilitating the granting of an advantageous period to the player.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.

It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine EE1, since the information is maintained in the stored state even if the game state is changed, it is easy for the player to be given a period of time advantageous to the player. There is an effect that the game state can be changed and the interest in the game state can be improved.
The gaming machine EE1 has acquisition means capable of acquiring the information and storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed as the identification information. The gaming machine EE2 is characterized in that the information stored in the storage means is maintained during the period.
According to the gaming machine EE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EE1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since information storage is maintained by continuing the dynamic display of the first identification information, the game can be played with anticipation of the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the amusement of the game can be further improved. has the effect of

The game machine EE1 or EE2 has first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information, and first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, The gaming machine EE3 is characterized in that the first identification information is information for executing dynamic display when the determination is performed by the determination means based on the first information.
According to the gaming machine EE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EE1 or EE2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to expect that the first information is obtained so that the memory of the information is maintained, it is possible to increase the expectation of obtaining the first information until the second game state is canceled. There is an effect that the value at which one piece of information is acquired can be changed depending on the period.
<Characteristic EF group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege granter capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; determining means capable of determining execution of a specific effect when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored; and dynamic identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. A game machine EF1 characterized by comprising a setting means capable of setting execution timing of the specific effect in a display period.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the game machine EF1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.
In the gaming machine EF1, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. A gaming machine EF2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine EF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to
In the game machine EF1 or EF2, when the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information serving as the specific determination result, the setting means sets the identification number corresponding to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The gaming machine EF3 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific performance is set during the information dynamic display period.
According to the game machine EF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EF1 or EF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player.
<Characteristic EFa group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege granter capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; determining means capable of determining execution of a specific effect when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored; and dynamic identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. A game machine EFa1, characterized by comprising setting means capable of setting execution timing of the specific effect in a display period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to the game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine EFa1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine EFa1, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, the execution of the specific effect is on standby during a waiting period until the execution timing of the specific effect. A game machine EFa2 characterized by being able to display the notification mode of.
According to the gaming machine EFa2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EFa1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can easily recognize that the execution of the specific effect is waiting by displaying the notification mode, the specific effect is executed even though the execution of the specific effect is determined. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game before the specific performance is executed without noticing that the specific performance is executed.
In the game machine EFa2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is displayed during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result in the state where the notification mode is displayed. A game machine EFa3 characterized in that it is possible to prevent the execution of
According to the gaming machine EFa3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EFa2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the specific effect is not executed during the period in which the notification mode indicating that the execution of the specific effect is waiting is displayed, the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

In any one of the game machines EFa1 to EFa3, when the determination means determines execution of the specific effect in a state in which the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information that are determined as the specific determination result, a dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result executed later; and a dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result executed later. It is characterized by having a selection means that enables the player to select in advance in which of the dynamic display period the execution timing of the specific performance is likely to be set by the setting means. Gaming machine EFa4.
According to the gaming machine EFa4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EFa1 to EFa3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is executed for the player who has previously selected the setting in which the specific effect is likely to be executed in the dynamic display period of the identification symbol corresponding to the specific determination result and the information to be executed first. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not there is information that will be determined as a specific determination result in the information remaining in the storage means at the time of execution, and will be determined as a specific determination result that will be executed later. For a player who has previously selected a setting in which the specific effect is likely to be executed during the dynamic display period of the identification pattern corresponding to the information, the specific effect is not executed during the dynamic display period of the identification information. Since it is possible to provide an unexpected game in which identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, it is possible to provide a game that matches the preferences of the player.
<Characteristic EG group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege granter capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; and determination means capable of determining execution of a specific performance based on information on the number of the information stored in the storage means when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored. A gaming machine EG1 characterized by:
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the game machine EG1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be.
The game machine EG1 has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. Characteristic game machine EG2.

According to the gaming machine EG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EG1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, since the execution timing of the specific effect can be set at random, there is an effect that the player's degree of expectation for receiving the privilege can be varied depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed.
In the game machine EG1 or EG2, the determining means is set to be able to vary the probability of determining execution of the specific effect based on the number information corresponding to the number of the information stored in the predetermined period. A gaming machine EG3 characterized by:
According to the game machine EG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EG1 or EG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the determination probability varies depending on the number of pieces of information stored in a predetermined period, the timing at which the specific effect is executed is controlled in accordance with the number of pieces of information stored, thereby increasing interest. be.
In any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG3, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. A game machine EG4 characterized in that the game machine EG4 is

According to the gaming machine EG4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to
In any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG4, when the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information as the specific determination result, the setting means corresponds to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The game machine EG5 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific performance is set during the dynamic display period of the identification information.
According to the gaming machine EG5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic EGa group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege granter capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; A determination means capable of determining execution of a specific performance when it is determined that the information determined as a determination result is stored, and a specific condition is established after the determination means determines execution of the specific performance. a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect based on the information stored in the storage means until the game machine EGa1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine EGa1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine EGa1, the determining means may update the stored information until dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result stored in the storage means is executed. The gaming machine EGa2 is characterized in that the greater the number of the information that can be stored in the means, the easier it is to decide to execute the specific performance.
According to the gaming machine EGa2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EGa1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of pieces of information that can be newly stored in the storage means is large until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result stored in the storage means is executed. Since execution of the specific effect is more likely to be determined by the determining means, the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific effect is executed is determined by the preliminary determination means at the time when the execution of the specific effect is decided. The number of information that has not been discriminated tends to increase, making it difficult for a player to predict the discrimination result of the information remaining in the storage means after execution of the specific performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.
In the game machine EGa1 or EGa2, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number, the information stored in the storage means is determined as the specific determination result. It is easier for the determining means to determine execution of the specific performance when there are a plurality of information determined as the specific determination result than when the number of the information is one. Characteristic game machine EGa3.
According to the gaming machine EGa3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EGa1 or EGa2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a plurality of pieces of information discriminated as a specific determination result exist in the storage means, execution of the specific performance is likely to be determined by the determination means. By making the player expect that the game will be played, the desire to play can be improved.

<Characteristic EH group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege granter capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; Determination means capable of determining execution of a specific performance when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored; and execution means capable of executing a specific suggestion mode.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine EH1, by executing the specific suggesting mode, the player can be made to recognize at an early stage that information that will result in a specific determination result is stored, thereby increasing the interest in the game. There is Moreover, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information that becomes the specific determination result, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
In the gaming machine EH1, execution determination capable of determining execution of the determined specific effect when dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is executed A gaming machine EH2 characterized by having means.
According to the gaming machine EH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EH1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determining means determines whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information for executing the specific effect can be determined at the start of each dynamic display. There is an effect that it can be set.
In either gaming machine EH1 or EH2, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. The game machine EH3 is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine EH3, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EH1 to EH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to
In any one of the game machines EH1 to EH3, the setting means corresponds to the information for which the dynamic display is started later when the storage means stores a plurality of information serving as the specific determination result. The gaming machine EH4 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific effect is set during the dynamic display period of the identification information.
According to the gaming machine EH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EH1 to EH3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic EI group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege granter capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. a dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information; and based on the type of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. and determining means capable of determining execution of a specific effect for indicating that the information stored in the storage means is determined as the specific determination result. A gaming machine EI1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine EI1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

The game machine EI1 has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. Characterized game machine EI2.
According to the gaming machine EI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EI1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, since the execution timing of the specific effect can be set at random, there is an effect that the player's degree of expectation for receiving the privilege can be varied depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed.
In the gaming machine EI1 or EI2, when the determination means determines execution of the specific effect, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. A game machine EI3 characterized by being a thing.
According to the game machine EI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EI1 or EI2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine EI2 or EI3, when the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information serving as the specific determination result, the setting means sets the identification number corresponding to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The game machine EI4 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific performance is set during the information dynamic display period.
According to the game machine EI4, in addition to the effects of either the game machine EI2 or EI3, the following effects are produced. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic EJ group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege granter capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. a privilege type determining means capable of determining a privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means from a plurality of privilege types; and the privilege granting based on the stored information. that the information stored in the storage means is determined to be the specific determination result based on the determination information corresponding to the fact that the type of privilege granted by the means is determined in advance; A game machine EJ1 characterized in that it has a determining means capable of determining execution of a specific effect for indicating.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the game machine EJ1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be.
The game machine EJ1 has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. Characteristic game machine EJ2.

According to the gaming machine EJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EJ1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the execution timing of the specific effect can be set at random, there is an effect that the player's degree of expectation for receiving the privilege can be varied depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed.
In the gaming machine EJ1 or EJ2, the privilege is that the privilege game is executed a number of times corresponding to the type of the privilege, and the determination means determines that the privilege game is executed a predetermined number of times or more as the determination information. is determined, the game machine EJ3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine execution of the specific effect.
According to the gaming machine EJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EJ1 or EJ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the execution of the specific effect is determined when the execution of the privilege game is determined for a predetermined number of times or more, the player, when the privilege game ends after the privilege game is executed less than the predetermined number of times, After that, it is possible to easily recognize that a specific determination result will be obtained, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
A gaming machine EJ4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the predetermined number of times is set to be greater than the number of privilege games to be executed when the privilege is given a plurality of times. .

According to the gaming machine EJ4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is an effect that the player can expect the number of times the privilege is given by executing the specific effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In any one of the game machines EJ1 to EJ4, when the specific effect is executed, the mode of the specific effect being executed during the execution of the privilege game indicates the number of times the remaining privilege game is executed. A game machine EJ5 characterized in that it has a means capable of varying the .
According to the gaming machine EJ5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the privilege game, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times the privilege game is to be executed in a specific mode, and it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting a greater number of remaining privilege games. .
In any one of game machines EJ1 to EJ5, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. A game machine EJ6 characterized in that the game machine EJ6 is

According to the gaming machine EJ6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to
In any one of gaming machines EJ2 to EJ5, when the storage means stores a plurality of information serving as the specific determination result, the setting means corresponds to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The game machine EJ7 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific effect is set during the dynamic display period of the identification information.
According to the gaming machine EJ7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ2 to EJ6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player.
<Characteristic group of 5071 series>
<Characteristic FA group>
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. One of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state can be set based on the executing means and the establishment of a predetermined set condition. and a second determination result different from the first determination result over a predetermined specific number of times after a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. a second setting means for setting a third state in which the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the first state and in which the degree of advantage is different from that in the second state, based on the Characterized game machine FA1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface to draw a lottery for the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the game is played. There is a game in which a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, among such gaming machines, there are also those in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is likely to be performed after the execution of a winning game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the advantage of the time-saving game is the same regardless of the conditions under which the time-saving game is set.
On the other hand, according to the game machine FA1, when the period in which the privilege game is not executed continues, the state is changed to the third state and the determination condition is easily satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation of the person to play the game.
In the gaming machine FA1, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and discrimination information capable of acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. obtaining means; a variable means capable of changing between a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means; and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position; Based on the establishment of the variable condition, a first variable control of the variable means, and a second variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control. and variable control means capable of executing variable control of, wherein the second state is configured in a state in which the variable means is more easily controlled by the second variable control than in the first state. game machine FA2.

According to the gaming machine FA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FA1, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means in the second state than in the first state. In addition, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the second state will be set.
In the gaming machine FA2, the third state is a state in which the variable means is more likely to be controlled by the second variable control than in the first state, and the predetermined variable condition is less likely to be established than in the second state. A game machine FA3 characterized by being configured in the following states.
According to the game machine FA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine FA2, there is an effect that the second state can be configured as a state in which the determination by the determination means is easier to execute than in the third state.
In a gaming machine FA2 or FA3, a second ball entering means configured to allow a game ball to enter and provided at a position different from the above ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. and a second determination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the determination information based on the determination, wherein the determination means performs the determination using the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means, rather than the determination using the determination information. 2. The determination using the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is more likely to be advantageous to the player, and the third state is more likely to be the second determination than the second state. The gaming machine FA4 is characterized in that the game machine FA4 is configured in such a manner that determination using the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means is facilitated.

According to the game machine FA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA2 or FA3, in the third state, determination with a high degree of advantage using the determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means is likely to be executed. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of transition to the third state than the second state.
In the game machine FA4, a game ball can be shot at least in a first direction in which a game ball can reach the ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and a second direction different from the first direction. and a shooting means and a position where a game ball shot in the second direction by the shooting means can enter and a position where the game ball shot in the first direction is difficult to enter. and a third ball entering means, wherein the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information when a game ball enters the ball entering means and when a game ball enters the third ball entering means. In the first state, shooting the game ball in the second direction is more effective for discrimination by the discrimination means than shooting the game ball in the first direction. The execution frequency is likely to be high, and the second state and the third state shoot game balls in the first direction rather than shooting game balls in the second direction. The game machine FA5 is characterized in that the execution frequency of the determination by the determination means tends to increase when the game machine FA5 is set.
According to the game machine FA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA4, the shooting direction of the game ball can be changed between the first state, the second state and the third state, so that the game can be sharpened. has the effect of being able to
Any one of the game machines FA1 to FA5 is provided with initialization means for initializing the settings of the game machine, and the specific condition is satisfied at least when the settings of the game machine are initialized by the initialization means. A gaming machine FA6 characterized by:

According to the game machine FA6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines FA1 to FA5, it is possible to realize novel behavior in which the advantageous third state is set even if the privilege game is never executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the game machine FA6, the specific conditions are a first specific condition that is established based on the initialization of the settings of the game machine by the initialization means, and the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result. and a second specific condition that is established based on the fact that the game machine FA7 is characterized by comprising at least:
According to the game machine FA7, in addition to the effect of the game machine FA6, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations after initialization or after execution of the privilege game.
In the game machine FA7, the specific conditions are composed of at least the first specific condition, the second specific condition, and the third specific condition established based on the setting of the third state. A gaming machine FA8 characterized by:

According to the game machine FA8, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA7, even after the third state is set, if the second determination result is obtained continuously in the determination of a specific number of times, the third state is set again. Therefore, even if the third state is once terminated, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the third state will be set again.
<Characteristic FB group>
discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit, using a discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination Pre-specifying means for specifying the discrimination result of the discriminating means before being used for discriminating the means, and specific performance for executing a specified performance based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is specified by the pre-specifying means. Execution means, first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and establishment of a predetermined second condition in the first game state. a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on; and suppressing means for suppressing execution of the specific effect in a predetermined effect mode by the specific effect executing means based on the acquired result in the game machine FB1.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, it is possible to suggest an effect indicating the possibility of winning a winning game from before the start of the variable display of symbols (for example, when a start winning is detected). There are also those that try to improve the interest of the player by executing a suggestive effect.

However, if the suggestive effect is unconditionally executed, there is a possibility that a problem may occur. Therefore, it may become difficult to suitably set the effect mode.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FB1, the player can play the game while paying more attention to the fact that the second condition is established and the second game state is set, so the effect mode is preferably set. It has the effect of being able to
In the game machine FB1, the second condition is a second determination result that is different from the first determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means in the first game state. A gaming machine FB2 characterized in that it is configured with a condition that is at least satisfied when it becomes true.
According to the gaming machine FB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB1, even if the first determination result is not obtained in the first gaming state, the second gaming state with a different degree of advantage is set, so that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it becomes.

In the game machine FB1 or FB2, the first performance mode and the first determination result by the prior specifying means than the first performance mode as the performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means. and a second performance mode that is likely to be determined when the performance mode is set, and a performance mode determination means for determining one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a second performance mode, and the suppressing means is capable of suppressing execution of at least the second performance mode. A gaming machine FB3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine FB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB1 or FB2, the game can be played by paying attention to the performance mode of the specific performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. effective.
In the game machine FB3, the effect mode determination means includes the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode that is more likely to be determined when the second condition is satisfied than the first effect mode. and the suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of at least the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode. A gaming machine FB4 characterized in that
According to the gaming machine FB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB3, it is possible to suggest both the possibility of the first determination result and the possibility of the second condition being satisfied depending on the effect mode of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately.

In any one of the game machines FB1 to FB4, an end means is provided for ending the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined third condition in the second game state, and obtained in the first game state The determination information corresponding to the first determination result, which is the determined determination information, is used for determination of the determination means during the second game state when the second game state is the end. A gaming machine FB5 characterized in that the advantage degree is likely to be higher than when the game is used for discrimination by the discriminating means after being terminated by the means.
According to the game machine FB5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines FB1 to FB4, the discrimination information acquired before the second condition is satisfied and used after the transition to the second game state is the first Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the possibility of the discrimination result is high from the performance mode of the specific performance, the lottery is entered during the second game state only when the possibility of the first discrimination result is high. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method that adjusts the order of use of discrimination information so that it is used.
The gaming machine FB6 is characterized in that the gaming machine FB5 is configured to be set to the first gaming state based on the termination of the second gaming state by the ending means.
According to the gaming machine FB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB5, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first determination result will be obtained before the second game state ends. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.

In the game machine FB5 or FB6, the determination information corresponding to the deviation determination result different from the first determination result, which is the determination information acquired in the first game state, is obtained during the second game state. It is characterized in that the degree of advantage tends to be higher when used for discrimination by the discriminating means after the second game state is terminated by the end means rather than used for discriminating by the discriminating means. A game machine FB7.
According to the gaming machine FB7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB5 or FB6, the discrimination information acquired before the second condition is satisfied and used after the transition to the second gaming state is used as the first discrimination result. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp from the performance mode of the specific performance whether or not there is a high possibility of becoming, when the possibility of becoming the first determination result is low, it is used for the lottery after the second game state is completed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method that adjusts the order of use of the identification information so that it can be used.
In any of gaming machines FB5 to FB7, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position, wherein the determination information acquisition means is configured to change the first position First discrimination information is acquired as the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and second discrimination information is acquired as the discrimination information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entering means. 2 discrimination information can be acquired, and the discrimination means makes discrimination using the second discrimination information more favorable to the player than discrimination using the first discrimination information. The degree of advantage is easily increased, and the second game state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily changed to the first position than the first game state. A game machine FB8.
According to the gaming machine FB8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines FB5 to FB7, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be increased, so the setting of the second gaming state is strongly expected. There is an effect that the game can be played by

<Characteristic FC group>
a signal output unit configured with a plurality of signal output terminals capable of outputting a predetermined signal to a predetermined device; a first signal control means for controlling a signal in a predetermined first output mode to be output from a predetermined specific signal output terminal; and a second output different from the first output condition. a second signal control means for controlling such that a signal in a predetermined second output mode is output from the specific signal output terminal based on the establishment of a condition; Machine FC1.
2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, output game-related information to a predetermined device (for example, a hall computer, etc.) according to the game situation. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to allow a predetermined device to grasp the state of the game being played in the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).
However, in the conventional game machine described above, if the amount of information to be output to a predetermined device increases, there is a possibility that the number of signal output terminals for outputting signals will increase. Therefore, it may become difficult to suitably output the signal to the predetermined device.
On the other hand, according to the game machine FC1, when the first output condition is satisfied and when the second output condition is satisfied, the signal output mode is changed from the same signal output terminal to the predetermined device. , the number of signal output terminals can be reduced.

In the game machine FC1, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game executing means for executing; first game state setting means for setting a predetermined first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition; and in the first game state a second game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition; The condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, and the second condition is satisfied when the second setting condition is satisfied. Characteristic game machine FC2.
According to the gaming machine FC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FC1, a signal indicating that a privilege game is to be executed and a signal indicating that an advantageous second gaming state is set are output from a common signal output terminal. Since the signal can be output, there is an effect that the number of signal output terminals can be reduced.
In the gaming machine FC2, the second setting condition is constituted by a condition at least different from the judgment result of the judgment means being the specific judgment result.
According to the gaming machine FC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FC2, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game state with a high degree of advantage is set even if a specific determination result is not obtained. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine FC3, the second setting condition is that the specific determination result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means executed after the predetermined specific condition is established. A gaming machine FC4 characterized in that it is constituted so as to be established when a result of discriminating the deviation is different from the above.
According to the game machine FC4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FC3, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one expect that the result of the determination of failure is continuous, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine FC3 or FC4, a third game state setting means capable of setting a third game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the privilege game is finished; During the period from when either the state or the third game state is set until the set second game state or the third game state is terminated, the first signal output terminal different from the specific signal output terminal a third signal output control means for controlling so that a signal of a third output mode is output from the signal output terminal of the third signal output control means; and a fourth signal output control for controlling to output a signal in a fourth output mode from the specific signal output terminal based on the second game state being determined by the game state determining means. A gaming machine FC5 characterized by comprising means.
According to the gaming machine FC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FC3 or FC4, the fourth game state is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the gaming machine is turned on is the second gaming state or the third gaming state. There is an effect that a predetermined device can be easily discriminated by the presence or absence of the signal of the output mode.

In the gaming machine FC4, a consecutive number of times identifying means for identifying the number of consecutive times that the out-of-range determination result continues after the specific condition is established based on the fact that the game machine is turned on, and the consecutive number of times identifying means. and fifth signal output control means for controlling such that a signal having an output mode corresponding to the consecutive number of times specified by is output from a predetermined signal output terminal.
According to the game machine FC6, in addition to the effect of the game machine FC4, there is an effect that the predetermined device can grasp the number of consecutive times of the failure determination result at the time when the power of the game machine is turned on.
In the game machine FC6, a continuous interruption number specifying means for specifying the number of consecutive times that the failure determination result continues after the specific condition is established based on the power supply interruption of the gaming machine, and the interruption continuous number of times. a sixth signal output control means for controlling such that a signal having an output mode corresponding to the consecutive number of times specified by the specifying means is output from the predetermined signal output terminal.
According to the game machine FC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine FC6, the predetermined device can grasp the number of consecutive times of failure determination results when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive times when the power is turned on. Therefore, if there is a discrepancy between the number of consecutive times when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive times when the power is turned on next time, the predetermined device can determine the possibility of fraudulent acts on the gaming machine. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

<Characteristic FD group>
In a game machine having a signal output unit capable of outputting a predetermined signal to a predetermined device, a first discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a predetermined discrimination result of the discriminating means. a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of (1); and a signal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means from the signal output unit based on the fact that the game machine is powered on. A gaming machine FD1 comprising: a control means;
2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, output game-related information to a predetermined device (for example, a hall computer, etc.) according to the game situation. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to allow a predetermined device to grasp the state of the game being played in the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a limit to the information that can be output to the predetermined device, so there is a possibility that it may be difficult to output the signal to the predetermined device.
On the other hand, according to the game machine FD1, there is an effect that when the game machine is powered on, the predetermined device can grasp the count value of the counting means.

In the game machine FD1, after the specific game state is set, the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of times. The game machine FD2 is characterized by comprising an advantageous game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than a specific game state.
According to the game machine FD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FD1, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the second determination result is expected to continue, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine FD1 or FD2, the signal control means can cause the signal output section to output a signal corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means when the power of the gaming machine is cut off. A gaming machine FD3 characterized by:
According to the game machine FD3, in addition to the effect of the game machine FD1 or FD2, there is an effect that the predetermined device can grasp the count value of the counting means when the power is cut off.

In the game machine FD3, the predetermined device sends information according to the number of times counted by the counting means output from the signal output unit when the power of the game machine is cut off, to at least the game machine as follows: A gaming machine FD4 is characterized by comprising storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means until the power is turned on to receive the information.
According to the gaming machine FD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FD3, when the number of times counted by the counting means is rewritten while the gaming machine is powered off, There is an effect that the fraudulent act can be easily grasped on the side of the predetermined device when the power is turned on next time.
<Characteristic FE group>
A signal output means for outputting a signal to a specific device for which a visual recognition mode according to the type of the received signal is set, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination result of the determination means. privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the specific determination result; and at least the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. a signal control means for controlling the specific device to output to the specific device a signal of a specific type that allows the specific device to be set to a specific visual recognition mode; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect configured in a performance mode that makes it easier for the player to confirm that the specific device is in the specific visual recognition mode, based on the fact that the specific device is in the specific visual mode; A gaming machine FE1 characterized by comprising:
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there is a demand for a more novel presentation mode as an entertainment presentation executed in a gaming machine. In other words, there is a demand for further enhancing the interest of players in games.
On the other hand, according to the game machine FE1, a novel presentation mode is realized that makes the player feel as if the specific device and the game machine are interlocking to inform the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine FE1, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the determination result of the determination means has become the specific determination result until at least the first effect is executed. A game machine FE2 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means for executing a second effect to cause a player to play.
According to the game machine FE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FE1, the first effect and the specific visual recognition mode can make the player feel as if a specific determination result has suddenly been notified. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

a variable means capable of changing between a first position in which the visual recognition mode of the specific device is visible and a second position in which the visual recognition mode of the specific device is more difficult to view than the first position in the gaming machine FE2; and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, wherein the variable means is varied to the second position at least while the second effect is being executed, and the first effect is executed. A game machine FE3 characterized in that it is configured to be variable to the first position based on.
According to the game machine FE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FE2, it is physically difficult to visually confirm whether or not the specific device is set to the specific visual mode during execution of the second effect. To make it difficult for a player to perceive that a specific judgment result will be obtained during the execution of the second performance, even if the player visually recognizes the specific device before the execution of the first performance. has the effect of being able to
first game state setting means for setting a first game state disadvantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition in any one of the game machines FE1 to FE3; second game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is established in the state; The means outputs to the specific device a first type of signal that allows the specific device to be set to a first visual recognition mode different from the specific visual recognition mode based on the satisfaction of the second condition. and the first effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the first effect when the second condition is satisfied. FE4.
According to the gaming machine FE4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines FE1 to FE3, the specific device and the gaming machine not only execute the privilege game but also set the second gaming state. Since the notification can be made by an effect as if they are interlocked, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine FE4, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a discrimination information acquisition capable of acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. means, variable means capable of changing between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position; and variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the variable condition, wherein the second game state is different from the first game state is also constructed in a game state in which the predetermined variable condition is likely to be satisfied, and the first effect executing means is configured such that after the second condition is satisfied, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means to generate the first effect. If it is determined before the second condition is satisfied that the period until the position is changed to a predetermined specific period or longer, the first game state is set after the second game state is set. The game machine FE5 is characterized in that the first effect can be executed based on the fact that the variable means is variable to the first position.
According to the gaming machine FE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FE4, the second gaming state can be notified after the game ball can actually enter the ball-entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the wasteful shooting of game balls.
A game machine FE6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines FE1 to FE5, the specific visual recognition mode is constituted by a visual recognition mode capable of informing the player that the privilege game is being executed.
According to the game machine FE6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines FE1 to FE5, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify that the privilege game is being executed by the specific device.

In any one of the game machines FE1 to FE6, the signal control means is configured to be controllable so that a second type signal is output to the specific device based on the execution of the determination by the determination means. According to the number of times the signal of the second type output from the signal output means, the specifying device can set a visual recognition mode capable of suggesting to the player the number of executions of determination by the determination means. A gaming machine FE7 characterized in that it is configured as follows.
According to the game machine FE7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines FE1 to FE6, the number of determinations executed by the visual recognition mode of the specific device can be confirmed, so that the convenience of the player is improved. has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine FE7, the specific device is capable of setting a visual mode capable of suggesting to the player the number of times the privilege game has been executed according to the number of times the signal of the specific type output from the signal output means. A gaming machine FE8 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine FE8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FE7, the number of times the privilege game has been executed can be confirmed by the visual recognition mode of the specific device, so that the player's convenience can be improved. There is

<Characteristic FF group>
Display means capable of displaying identification information, determination means capable of executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. dynamic display means, and privilege granting means capable of imparting advantageous benefits to the player based on the display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display means. a dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information; and a plurality of different dynamic display modes that can be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. stipulated information storage means storing a plurality of specified stipulated information; stipulated information selection means capable of selecting one stipulated information for determining the dynamic display mode from the specified information storage means; an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a setting of the game machine in advance based on the fact that the power is turned on to the game machine in a state in which the operation means is operated with a predetermined operation content. Initialization means capable of initializing to predetermined initial settings, and suppression of changing information for selecting the prescribed information when the initialization is performed by the initialization means A gaming machine FF1 characterized by comprising means.
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, by dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols on display means such as a liquid crystal display, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is notified. There is In such a gaming machine, when a plurality of dynamically displayed symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination, the game machine shifts to a so-called win state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-230714).
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to determine the dynamic display mode in a suitable manner.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FF1, the information for selecting the stipulated information is suppressed so as not to be changed even if it is initialized, so that the stipulated information can be preferably selected even after the initialization. has the effect of

In the gaming machine FF1, a specific game state advantageous to the player is established based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted after the awarding of the privilege is completed. A gaming machine FF2 characterized by comprising setting means capable of setting information for setting the .
According to the game machine FF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FF1, even if the discrimination by the discrimination means does not result in a specific discrimination result, an advantageous specific game state is set by executing discrimination a specified number of times. Therefore, even if a specific determination result is not obtained for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from lowering.
In the gaming machine FF2, counting means for counting the number of times the determination by the determination means is executed without the privilege being granted, and counting by the counting means when the initialization is performed by the initialization means. A second suppressing means for suppressing the initialization of the value is provided, and the setting means changes the specific game state based on the count value of the counting means becoming a count value corresponding to the specific number of times. A gaming machine FF3 characterized by being configured to be able to set information for setting.
According to the game machine FF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FF2, the count value of the counting means is maintained even if the game machine is initialized, so even if the game machine is initialized, the specific game state is set. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of determinations made by the determining means up to when the power is turned off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing a game on the initialized gaming machine.

In the game machine FF3, the stipulated information selection means is configured to be able to select the stipulated information based on at least the count value of the counting means.
According to the gaming machine FF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FF3, even when reading the number of determinations of the determination means for determining whether or not to set the specific game state, the determination means is used to select the stipulated information. The count value of the counting means can be used in common even when reading out the number of times of discrimination, and the possibility of deviation between the two can be eliminated. There is
In any one of the game machines FF2 to FF4, after the specific game state is set, the specific game state is changed based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is executed the specific number of times without the privilege being given. A game machine FF5 characterized by comprising a second setting means capable of setting information for setting.
According to the gaming machine FF5, even after the specific game state is once set, if the privilege is not provided, the specific game state is set again when the number of determinations reaches the specific number of times, so the privilege is not provided. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage increases regularly.

In the game machine FF5, the game machine FF6 is characterized by comprising second initialization means capable of initializing the count value of the count means based on the setting of the specific game state.
According to the game machine FF6, in addition to the effects of the game machine FF5, the count value can be initialized when the specific game state is set, so even if the specific game state is not yet set. , even after the specific game state is set once, it is possible to determine whether or not to set the specific game state by whether or not the count value corresponding to the specific number of times has been reached. There is an effect that the control can be shared by the two setting means.
In any one of the gaming machines FF2 to FF6, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising a third initialization means for initializing the count value of the counting means based on completion of the granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means. FF7.
According to the game machine FF7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines FF2 to FF6, the count value of the counting means is initialized each time the grant of the privilege is completed, so regardless of the timing at which the privilege is granted , there is an effect that a specific game state can be set when the number of times of determination by the determination means reaches a specific number after the granting of the privilege is completed.

<Characteristic FG group>
In a game machine comprising control means for performing predetermined control relating to a game, specific control setting means for setting a predetermined specific control to be performed by the control means based on establishment of a predetermined set condition; and suppressing means for suppressing the setting of the specific control setting means when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the predetermined setting condition is satisfied.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).
However, in such a game machine, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FG1, it is possible to avoid performing the specific control under the establishment of the specific condition, so there is an effect that the control can be performed more preferably.

In the game machine FG1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game executing means to be executed, display means capable of displaying identification information, and the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means based on the execution of determination by the determination means. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, dynamic display period information as information for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and the determination means a defined information storage means for storing a plurality of defined information defining at least a corresponding relationship between the number of determinations, which is the number of times that the determination results differ from the specific determination result, and the determination condition being satisfied dynamic display period information identification for identifying the dynamic display period information corresponding to the number of determinations according to one of the plurality of the defined information stored in the defined information storage means based on and dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period according to the dynamic display period information specified by the dynamic display period information specifying means, wherein the control setting means comprises the 1 for use in identifying the dynamic display period information by the dynamic display period information identifying means from among the plurality of the stipulation information stored in the stipulation information storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; The game machine FG2 is characterized in that the control for specifying the prescribed information of the game machine FG2 can be set so as to be performed by the control means as the specified control.
According to the game machine FG2, there is an effect that the dynamic display period can be preferably determined.
In the game machine FG2, the predetermined setting condition is a condition that is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a first determination result that is at least different from the specific determination result. FG3.
According to the gaming machine FG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FG2, it is possible to specify the stipulated information when the first determination result is obtained. There is an effect that the tendency of the period can be made different.

In the gaming machine FG3, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine in a state in which the operating means operable by the operator and the operating means are operated with predetermined operation contents, the above-mentioned initialization means capable of initializing the settings of the game machine to predetermined initial settings, wherein the determination means determines whether the determination result is the specific determination result or the first determination result. A game machine FG4 characterized in that it is configured as follows.
According to the game machine FG4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FG3, the discrimination of the discrimination means is executed after the initialization of the game machine, and if a specific discrimination result is not obtained, the specified information can be specified. , the stipulated information can be specified by executing determination by the determination means once after the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a state in which the prescribed information is not specified from continuing for a long time.
In the game machine FG4, the specific condition is a condition that is met when the first determination result is obtained for the first time after the setting of the game machine is initialized to the initial setting by the initialization means. A gaming machine FG5 characterized by:
According to the game machine FG5, in addition to the effect of the game machine FG4, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the repetitive specification of the stipulation information each time the first determination result is obtained.

In the game machine FG4 or FG5, the control means initializes the setting of the game machine to the initial setting by the initialization means as the specific control, and the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result. Performing at least a first specific control for specifying one of the stipulated information based on the fact that the special game has been completed, and a second specific control for specifying the one of the stipulated information based on the completion of the execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine FG6 characterized in that it is configured to be able to
According to the gaming machine FG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FG4 or FG5, it is possible to specify the stipulated information even when the execution of the privilege game is over. It is possible to make the trend of the display period different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In any one of game machines FG4 to FG6, a game is played based on the number of times of discrimination after the settings of the game machine are initialized to the initial settings by the initialization means. an advantageous gaming state setting means for setting an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player, and the specific control includes at least the number of determinations until the specific number of times is reached, and the dynamic display period information; A gaming machine FG7 characterized by comprising a control for specifying the stipulated information that stipulates the correspondence relationship.
According to the game machine FG7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines FG4 to FG6, the game machine is initialized and the determination result specified by the determination means is the first determination result. Since the information can be continuously used until the advantageous game state is set, there is no need to perform control for switching the specified information until the advantageous game state is set, and the processing load of the game machine is reduced. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines FG4 to FG7, the game machine is initialized by the initialization means, and an effect execution for executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the first determination result. A gaming machine FG8 characterized by comprising means.
According to the game machine FG8, in addition to the effects of the game machines FG4 to FG7, there is an effect that the player can understand that the specific condition is established when the specific effect is executed.
In the game machine FG8, the effect execution means executes the specific effect when the power is turned on to the game machine and the setting of the game machine is not initialized to the initial setting by the initialization means. A game machine FG9 characterized in that it is configured to be able to suppress the
According to the gaming machine FG9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FG8, the player can understand whether or not the gaming machine has been initialized depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed. When the power is turned on, the player can be made to want to play the game at least until the specific condition is satisfied and determine whether or not initialization is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved especially immediately after the opening of the hall where the gaming machine is installed.

In any one of gaming machines FG2 to FG9, the dynamic display period information is composed of information defining at least a plurality of different periods that can be determined as the dynamic display period. FG10.
According to the gaming machine FG10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines FG2 to FG9, by diversifying the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide variation in the period until the determination result of the determination means is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Characteristic FH group>
Display means capable of displaying identification information, determination means capable of executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. dynamic display means capable of providing a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the display of the identification information for indicating a predetermined specific determination result on the display means; in the gaming machine having the above, after the granting of the privilege is completed, the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted, which is advantageous to the player a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific game state; a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information; and its dynamic display mode. provision information storage means for storing a plurality of provision information defining a plurality of different dynamic display modes that can be determined by the determination means; and selection that is information for selecting one provision information from the provision information storage means. Selected information identifying means for identifying one piece of selected information out of a plurality of different pieces of selected information; provision information selection means capable of selecting one provision information to be determined, wherein the selected information specification means selects the above-mentioned information without providing the privilege after the provision of the privilege is terminated; The game machine FH1 is characterized in that the selection information of 1 can be specified based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed a predetermined number of times.
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, by dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols on display means such as a liquid crystal display, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is notified. There is In such a gaming machine, when a plurality of dynamically displayed symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination, the game machine shifts to a so-called win state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open 2003-230714).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to determine the dynamic display mode in a suitable manner.
On the other hand, according to the game machine FH1, there is an effect that the selection information can be preferably specified.
In the gaming machine FH1, the selection information specifying means specifies the first selection information as the selection information based on the provision of the privilege, and the privilege is provided after the provision of the privilege is completed. The second selection information different from the first selection information can be identified based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has been performed a predetermined number of times. Machine FH2.
According to the gaming machine FH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH1, it is possible to specify different selection information depending on whether the provision of the privilege is completed or when the specific gaming state is set. There is an effect that the tendency of information can be diversified.

In the gaming machine FH1 or FH2, after the specific game state is set, the setting means determines the specific game based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed the specific number of times without the privilege being given. A game machine FH3 characterized by being configured to be able to set information for setting a state.
According to the gaming machine FH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH1 or FH2, even after the specific game state is set once, if the special game state is not given, the special game state is set again, so the special game state is given. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the specific game state is set periodically even if there is no special game state.
In the gaming machine FH3, the selection information specified based on the fact that the determination by the determining means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted after the awarding of the privilege is completed, The number of determinations by the determination means is less than the first number of times, which is less than the specific number of times, and the second determination is performed based on the first number of determinations. A gaming machine FH4 characterized in that it is composed of information that allows selection of prescribed information.
According to the gaming machine FH4, when the discrimination is performed the first number of times after the specific game state is set, the tendency of the determined dynamic display mode can be varied. There is an effect that the change in tendency makes the player feel that the specific number of times is approaching.

In the game machine FH4, the selection information specified based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted is such that the number of discriminations by the discrimination means is greater than the specified number of times. the second number of times is smaller than the first number of times, the second number of times of determination is made to be selected by the second number of times of determination by the determination means, and the number of times of discrimination by the determination means is greater than the first number of times A game machine FH5, characterized in that the game machine FH5 is composed of information that allows the first regulation information to be selected in a range less than the second number of times.
According to the game machine FH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine FH4, when the number of determinations of the determination means executed after setting the specific game state reaches the first number and the number of times becomes the second number, other Since the tendency of the determined dynamic display mode can be made different from the case of the number of times, each time the tendency of the dynamic display mode changes, the player feels that the specific number of times is approaching step by step. It has the effect of being able to
In any of the gaming machines FH3 to FH5, the specific game state initially set after the grant of the privilege is finished, and after the specific game state is set, the privilege is not granted and the The gaming machine FH6 is characterized by comprising an advantage degree varying means capable of varying an advantage degree between the specific game state set based on the execution of the determination by the determination means for the specific number of times.
According to the gaming machine FH6, even in the same specific game state, the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the set timing, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine FH6, the advantage degree varying means provides the privilege after the specific game state is set rather than the specific game state initially set after the award of the privilege is finished. The degree of advantage is variable so that the degree of advantage is higher in the specific game state set based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed the specific number of times. Game machine FH7.
According to the gaming machine FH7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH6, the specific game state set in a state in which no privilege is granted for a longer period of time can increase the degree of advantage, so no privilege is granted. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes us expect.
<Characteristic FI group>
A first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and the first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during execution of the first control. is different from the first control and the second control based on the fact that a predetermined third execution condition is satisfied during execution of at least the first control. third control setting means for setting the third control to be executed by the control means; and termination means for terminating the third control when a predetermined termination condition is met during the execution of the third control. and setting the second control to be executed by the control means when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the third control is terminated by the terminating means, and the specific condition is a post-completion control setting means for setting the first control to be executed by the control means when the first control is not established.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).

However, in such a game machine, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FI1, it is possible to switch between executing the first control and executing the second control after the end of the third control, depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied at the end of the third control. Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.
In the gaming machine FI1, the post-end control setting means determines that the second control is being executed at the time when the end condition is satisfied on the assumption that the third execution condition is not satisfied during the execution of the first control. , the second control is set to be executed by the control means, and the first control is executed by the control means if the first control is being executed when the termination condition is satisfied. The game machine FI2 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to set as follows.
According to the gaming machine FI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FI1, when the third control is ended, it is possible to set the control details on the assumption that the third control has not been executed, which is more preferable. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a smooth control.

In the game machine FI1 or FI2, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination result advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, wherein the second execution condition is that the determination result of the determination means differs from the first determination result after the first execution condition is satisfied. The gaming machine FI3 is characterized in that the condition is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of 2 is obtained reaches a predetermined specific number of times.
According to the game machine FI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FI1 or FI2, the number of times the second determination result is obtained becomes a specific number of times, so that it is possible to switch to a different control, so an advantageous privilege game is not executed. It is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed under certain circumstances. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
In the gaming machine FI3, the post-termination setting means determines, at the time when the termination condition is satisfied, that the number of times the second determination result has been obtained after the previous first execution condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than the specific number of times. The second control can be set to be executed by the control means, and the first control can be set to be executed when the number of times the second determination result is obtained is less than a specific number of times. A gaming machine FI4 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine FI4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FI3, it is possible to switch the control content after the third control is finished according to the number of times of the second determination result, so that more suitable control can be realized. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine FI3 or FI4, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and the dynamic display means dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information according to; , and second regulating information different from the first regulating information; and controlling the dynamic display period determining means to determine the dynamic display period using the second control as the second control to determine the dynamic display period using the second regulation information. A gaming machine FI5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to control target display period determining means.
According to the game machine FI5, the tendency of the dynamic display period determined by whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed can be made different, so the determination result of the determination means is displayed. The trend of the period to can also be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In any one of game machines FI3 to FI5, first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition; It is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means has continuously become the second discrimination result over a predetermined first number of times greater than the specific number of times. and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state, wherein the first execution condition is constituted by a condition that is established when the specific setting condition is established. Game machine FI6.
According to the game machine FI6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines FI3 to FI5, the second game state is set because the first control can be switched to the second control during the first game state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine FI6, based on the determination result of the determination means being a third determination result that is different from the first determination result and is a part of the second determination result, a third game state setting means for setting a third game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state; A game machine FI7 characterized by being constituted by a condition that is established when the condition is satisfied.
According to the game machine FI7, in addition to the effects of the game machine FI6, the control can be switched when the first game state is switched to the third game state, so that the control according to the game state can be executed. has the effect of
In the gaming machine FI7, the first game state setting means continuously sets the determination result of the determination means executed after the third determination result is obtained for a predetermined second number of times. 2, the game state can be set to the first game state, and the end condition is executed after the third determination result is obtained. A gaming machine FI8 is characterized in that it is constituted by a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the second discrimination result consecutively over a predetermined second number of times.
According to the game machine FI8, when returning to the first game state after finishing the third game state, switching between executing the first control and executing the second control according to the number of times of the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

<Characteristic FJ group>
First game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the game state; a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting to the player a degree of advantage taking into account the set conditions to be set, at least before the second game state is set. FJ1.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, it is known that a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided, and when shifting to a game state with a high degree of advantage, display effects, etc. There are also those that report the degree.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since only the degree of advantage of the most recently set advantage state is determined and the degree of advantage is reported, there is a discrepancy between the actual degree of advantage and the reported degree of advantage. may occur.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FJ1, it is known in advance that the second game state is set and that the setting condition for setting the second game state again during the second game state is established. In this case, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode that suggests to the player the degree of advantage that takes into consideration the overlapping setting of the second game state before the second game state is set. , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine FJ1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined first determination result. and the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set is different from the first determination result over a predetermined specific number of times. and a termination means for terminating the second game state based on the determination result of , wherein the specific effect is performed by the determination means until the second game state is terminated by the termination means. The game machine FJ2 is characterized in that it is composed of an effect capable of suggesting the number of determinations.
According to the game machine FJ2, in addition to the effect of the game machine FJ1, the number of determinations until the second game state ends can be suggested by the specific effect, so there is an effect that the specific effect can be noticed. .

In the game machine FJ2, the number of determinations by the determination means until the second game state is terminated by the termination means based on the establishment of the predetermined set condition is a first number and a number greater than the first number. A game machine FJ3, characterized by comprising end number determination means for determining one number of times out of a plurality of numbers including at least a large second number of times.
According to the game machine FJ3, since a plurality of times can be determined by the end times determination means, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of times suggested by the specific effect.
In the game machine FJ2 or FJ3, the predetermined setting condition is a third determination result that is a determination result different from the first determination result of the determination means and is included in the second determination result. and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition.
According to the game machine FJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ2 or FJ3, a plurality of conditions are provided as conditions for setting an advantageous game state, so it can be expected to shift to the second game state. You can do more scenes. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine FJ4, the second setting condition is that the determination results of the determination means executed after the first gaming state is set are set to the second determination results for a predetermined third number of times. The game machine FJ5 is characterized in that it is constituted by a condition that is established when .
According to the gaming machine FJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FJ4, even if the first determination result is not obtained in the first game state with a low degree of advantage, the determination by the determination means is performed the second number of times over the third number of times. Since the second game state with a high degree of advantage is set by obtaining the discrimination result, even if the period in which the first discrimination result is not obtained in the first game state continues for a long time, the player's motivation for playing the game decreases. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the storage.
In the gaming machine FJ5, the specific effect executing means, as the effect mode of the specific effect, satisfies the first setting condition and performs the specific effect in the second game state set based on the establishment of the first setting condition. When the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the third number of times before the determination by the determination means is executed for the number of times, the determination result of the determination means reaches the third number after the first set condition is established. A game machine FJ6 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to set an effect mode according to the number of determinations that can be executed until the second game state that is set based on reaching the number of times is completed.
According to the gaming machine FJ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FJ5, it is possible to set a performance mode according to the number of determinations until the second game state is actually ended as the performance mode of the specific performance. There is an effect that a game can be played while paying more attention to the specific performance.

In the game machine FJ6, when the first determination result is not obtained in the second game state set as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the determination can be performed at least a fourth number of times. and a second effect mode indicating that the discrimination can be performed a fifth number of times, which is larger than the fourth number of times, is determined. A performance mode determination means is provided, and the performance mode determination means has a first number or more of determinations that can be executed when the first determination result is not obtained in the set second game state, and The game machine FJ7 is characterized in that the first effect mode can be determined when the number of times is less than two.
According to the game machine FJ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ6, when the number of determinations until the end of the second game state is the first number of times or more and less than the second number of times, the first performance mode is uniformly applied. can be determined, there is an effect that the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.
In the game machine FJ7, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and the number of determinations that can be executed until the set second game state is terminated based on the setting of the second game state. display control means for causing the display means to display, as information indicating, information indicating the number of determinations according to the effect mode of the specific effect executed before the second game state is set; and the second game updating means for updating the information indicating the number of times of determination displayed on the display means to information indicating the number of times of determination one less each time the determination means performs determination in a state. FJ8.
According to the game machine FJ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ7, the number of determinations until the end of the second game state is displayed on the display means, so that the player can understand how long the second game state will continue. There is an effect that it can be configured easily.

<Characteristic FK group>
updating means capable of updating a counter value of a specific counter to a value of 1 within a predetermined range based on the establishment of a specific predetermined update condition; specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the counter value being updated to a predetermined first counter value; Based on the fact that the counter value has been updated to the first counter value, the counter value of the specific counter is set to a second counter value that is within the predetermined range and is different from the first counter value. A game machine FK1 characterized by comprising counter value setting means for setting a counter value.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).
However, there is a need for better control.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, when a specific counter value is updated to the first counter value, it can be updated to the second counter value, so that the counter value can be preferably updated. can. Therefore, there is an effect that specific control can be executed more preferably.

In the gaming machine FK1, the first counter value is configured with a value larger than the second counter value, and the updating means makes the counter value of the specific counter larger than before updating. A game machine FK2 characterized by being configured to be able to update to a counter value.
According to the game machine FK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FK1, the counter value can be updated to the first counter value again by repeating the update of the counter value after being updated to the second counter value. There is an effect that the player can expect that is executed again.
In the game machine FK1 or FK2, display means capable of displaying identification information, determination means capable of performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means are displayed on the display means. a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a dynamic display, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on the display of the identification information for indicating a predetermined specific determination result on the display means. It is advantageous to the player based on the privilege granting means that can be granted and the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted after the granting of the privilege is completed. a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific game state; a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information; and a dynamic display mode thereof. Defined information storage means for storing a plurality of defined information defining a plurality of different dynamic display modes that can be determined by the determination means, and one definition for determining the dynamic display mode from the defined information storage means defined information selection means capable of selecting information, the update condition is configured to be established based on establishment of the determination condition, and the specific control execution means selects information as the specific control , predetermined specific selection information among a plurality of pieces of selection information preliminarily defined as selection information which is information for causing the definition information selection means to select one definition information from the definition information storage means; wherein the prescribed information selection means selects one prescribed information according to the counter value of the specific counter and the specified selection information A gaming machine FK3 characterized by being configured to be able to
According to the game machine FK3, there is an effect that the selection information can be preferably specified.

A gaming machine FK4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine FK3, first selection information different from the specific selection information can be specified as the selection information based on the provision of the privilege. .
According to the gaming machine FK4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK3, the selection information can be specified even when a privilege is given, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .
In the gaming machine FK3 or FK4, after the specific game state is set, the setting means determines the specific game based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed the specific number of times without the privilege being given. A gaming machine FK5 characterized by being configured to be able to set information for setting a state.
According to the game machine FK5, in addition to the effects of the game machine FK3 or FK4, even after the specific game state is set once, if the special game state is not given, the special game state is set again, so the special game state is given. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the specific game state is set periodically even if there is no special game state.

<Characteristic FL group>
A first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and the first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during execution of the first control. is different from the first control and the second control based on the fact that a predetermined third execution condition is satisfied during execution of at least the first control. third control setting means for setting the third control to be executed by the control means; and termination means for terminating the third control when a predetermined termination condition is met during the execution of the third control. and post-termination control for setting the fourth control different from the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the termination of the third control by the termination means A gaming machine FL1 comprising: setting means;
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).
However, in such a game machine, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.
On the other hand, according to the game machine FL1, when the third control ends, the fourth control can be executed, so there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

In the game machine FL1, the game machine FL2 is characterized in that the first execution condition is composed of a condition that can be satisfied at least during the execution of the fourth control.
Since the first control is executed again when the first execution condition is satisfied during execution of the fourth control, it is possible to expect that the first execution condition is satisfied during execution of the fourth control. has the effect of
In a game machine FL1 or FL2, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and an advantage for a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, wherein the second execution condition is that the determination result of the determination means differs from the first determination result after the first execution condition is established. The game machine FL3 is characterized in that the condition is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of 2 is obtained reaches a predetermined specific number of times.
According to the game machine FL3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FL1 or FL2, the number of times the second determination result is obtained becomes a specific number of times, so that the control can be switched to a different one, so that an advantageous privilege game is not executed. It is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed under certain circumstances. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine FL3, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in dynamic display of identification information; first stipulation information as predetermined stipulation information that defines information for determining the dynamic display period; defining information storage means for storing a plurality of defining information including at least second defining information different from the first defining information; and the controlling means uses the first defining information as the first control. and controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period by using the second control as the dynamic display period to determine the dynamic display period using the second regulation information. A gaming machine FL4 characterized in that it is configured so as to be able to control period determining means.
In the game machine FL4, when the determination result of the determination means is a third determination result different from the first determination result and included in the second determination result, A specific game state setting means for setting an advantageous specific game state is provided, and the third execution condition is constituted by a condition established based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the third determination result. and the third control causes the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using third definition information different from the first definition information and the second definition information. A game machine FL5 characterized in that it is configured with a control for.
According to the gaming machine FL5, since the tendency of the dynamic display period determined when the specific game state is set can be changed, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. be.
<Feature group of 5073 (base) system>
<Characteristic βA group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of performance modes on the display means; variable display means capable of varying the effect mode displayed on the means; notification means capable of arranging the notification mode at the position where the effect mode is displayed; and the plurality of effect modes being displayed. and suggesting control means capable of suggesting the variable presentation mode by arranging the notification mode when the game machine βA1 is in the state of the game machine βA1.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766) However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and improving the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine βA1, since the notification mode is arranged to make it easier for the player to recognize the variable performance mode, it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the variable performance mode, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine βA1, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information that can be discriminated by the discriminating means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means, wherein the effect mode display The gaming machine βA2 is characterized in that the means is capable of displaying the effect mode when the information is stored in the storage means.
According to the gaming machine βA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βA1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can be determined by the number of presentation modes displayed, and the number of times that can be determined can be predicted. has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine βA2 has preliminary determination means capable of performing determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the variable display means A game machine βA3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be variable based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.
According to the gaming machine βA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βA1 or βA2, the performance mode is varied based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means, so that the determination result can be predicted by varying the performance mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
<Characteristic βB group>
reporting means capable of reporting a predetermined reporting mode; operating means operable by the player; setting means capable of setting information for varying settings based on the operation of the operating means; and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect mode corresponding to the setting, and a display means capable of displaying the identification mode corresponding to the set information when the operation means is operated. identification mode display means; setting means capable of setting a specific period during which the identification mode is more difficult to see than a normal period; a mode executing means for executing a second mode different from the first mode for suggesting the identification mode when the means is operated.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, draws a lottery to determine whether the game is successful or not, executes an effect to notify the judgment result, and is provided in the game machine. A game machine has been proposed in which a game mode can be changed by operating an operation means that can be operated by a player who has received the game. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, when the operation means is operated, it may be difficult to determine whether the mode of the game has been changed, and the problem is that the interest in the game is reduced. was there. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and improving the amusement of the game.

According to the gaming machine βB1, when the identification mode is in the specific period when the identification mode is difficult to see, the second mode for suggesting the identification mode is executed. By using the means, it is possible to suggest the identification mode to the player, and the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby improving the interest of the game.
In the gaming machine βB1, a determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and a specific and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, and the effect executing means dynamically displays the identification information. Based on the setting changed by the operation of the operation means during the period when the identification information is not displayed, the effect can be executed by changing it during the dynamic display period of the identification information executed thereafter. A game machine βB2 characterized in that it has a
According to the gaming machine βB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βB1, the details of operations performed during the period during which the dynamic display is not performed are also reflected during the dynamic display period executed thereafter. There is an effect that the production can be enjoyed together with the target display.
In the game machine βB1 or βB2, the mode executing means is configured to be able to move to a position where the identification mode was displayed and execute it during the specific period. Gaming machine βB3.

According to the game machine βB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine βB1 or βB2, the mode executing means is moved to the position where the identification mode was displayed and executed, so the second mode is executed instead of the identification mode. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand that the game is being played, and that the interest in the game can be improved.
<Characteristic βC group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance and variable means capable of varying the form of the identification information based on the establishment of a specific condition during the period during which the identification information and a determination means capable of determining the number of times a condition is satisfied.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery as to whether a game is successful or not when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and dynamically displays a plurality of patterns as an effect to notify the judgment result. A gaming machine has been proposed in which symbols are stopped and displayed in combination to notify the result of the lottery after the symbols have been drawn. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, the dynamic display mode of the symbols tends to be monotonous. There was a problem that the It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and improving the amusement of the game.
According to the gaming machine βC1, since the identification information is changed each time the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to expect that the identification information will be changed to the mode indicating the specific determination result each time the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the number of times determined by the determination means can be made interesting, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine βC1, the dynamic display of the identification information includes a temporary stop mode in which at least part of the identification information is temporarily stopped in a mode that allows the identification information to be displayed in a mode that indicates the specific determination result. A gaming machine βC2 characterized in that it is configured to be executable, and the specific condition is configured to be established during the period in which the temporary stop mode is being performed.
According to the gaming machine βC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βC1, a specific condition is satisfied during the temporary stop period, and the form of the identification information is changed, so that the change can be easily identified. has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine βC1 or βC2, the identification information can be configured to indicate the specific determination result by displaying a combination of a plurality of symbols, and the variable means varies the combination of symbols. A gaming machine βC3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine βC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βC1 or βC2, the combination of symbols can be varied each time a specific condition is established, and the effect of increasing expectations for a specific determination result can be obtained. be.

<Characteristic βD group>
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, an operation means operable by the player, In a gaming machine having setting means capable of varying game settings based on the operation of the operating means, the operating means is operated during the period in which the performance is being executed. A gaming machine βD1 capable of executing an effect based on the game setting changed during the execution period of the effect.
Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines draw lots when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and the contents of the effect are determined by lottery as an effect to notify the judgment result. A game machine has been proposed in which the degree of expectation for the success/failure determination is executed as an advance notice effect before the lottery result is notified. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, there is a problem that the frequency with which the content of the effect mode to be executed tends to be fixed, and the interest in the game decreases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and improving the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine βD1, game settings can be varied by operating the operation means during the performance of the performance, and the performance can be executed based on the changed settings during the execution of the performance. There is an effect that the game can be played at an early stage in a state corresponding to the setting corresponding to the demand of the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine βD2 is characterized in that the gaming machine βD1 has an effect setting means capable of setting an effect mode corresponding to a plurality of settings when the effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine βD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βD1, when an effect is executed, an effect mode corresponding to a plurality of settings is set, so that the effect mode can be easily changed during the execution of the effect. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine βD1 or βD2, a special effect can be executed based on the operation of the operation means and the setting being varied during the period during which the specific effect is executed. A gaming machine βD3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine βD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βD1 or βD2, by varying the settings, it becomes possible to quickly identify that a specific effect will be executed, and the interest in the game can be further improved. has the effect of
<Characteristic βE group>
A determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, wherein the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed 2, the game machine βE1 is characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of executing a effect mode corresponding to the symbol type to be stopped.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, after being displayed, a combination of symbols indicating a lottery result is stopped and displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, there is a problem that simply repeating the dynamic display and stop of the symbols makes the game monotonous and reduces the interest of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and improving the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine βE1, since an effect mode corresponding to the type of the stopped symbol is executed, there is an effect that the type of the stopped symbol can be easily recognized and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine βE1, the identification information is configured by adding an identification mode to each of the plurality of symbols, and the identification mode is determined and added without corresponding to the type of the symbols. A gaming machine βE2 characterized by:
According to the game machine βE2, in addition to the effect of the game machine βE1, since the identification mode is added to the symbols without corresponding to the type, there is an effect that the variation of the identification information can be diversified.

A gaming machine βE3, wherein in the gaming machine βE1 or βE2, the mode for indicating the specific determination result is configured by displaying the identification mode in a specific combination.
According to the gaming machine βE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βE1 or βE2, a specific determination result is notified by combining identification modes regardless of the type of symbols, so symbols are flexibly combined with identification modes and reported. It has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic βF group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information based on the establishment of determination conditions, and identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means are moved. display means capable of displaying a target, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and an identification pattern for indicating the number of the information stored in the storage means; and an identification pattern display means that can be displayed on the display means, and when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means, when the number of the information stored in the storage means changes, the display position of the identification pattern is changed to a display position corresponding to the new number of the information. and operation mode setting means capable of setting an operation mode of the identification pattern when the display position of the identification pattern is changed by the display position change means. Machine βF1.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766) However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine βF1, since the action mode when the display position of the identification pattern is changed can be set by the action mode setting means, it is possible to execute an effect using the action mode of the identification pattern, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of being able to improve
In the gaming machine βF1, the operation mode setting means can set a specific operation mode when the identification information corresponding to the identification pattern is the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. Characteristic game machine βF2.
According to the gaming machine βF2, when the identification pattern changes its display position, the identification information corresponding to the identification pattern is identification information for indicating a specific determination result by operating in a specific operation mode. Since it is possible to recognize that there is something else, it is possible to make the player interested in the action mode of the identification symbol, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
<Characteristic βG group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information based on the establishment of determination conditions, and identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means are moved. display means capable of displaying a target, effect mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of effect modes on the display means, and when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, a blocking means capable of making the display means difficult to see, and a blocking means thereof. a gaming machine βG1, characterized in that it has a range setting means capable of setting a range in which a state is difficult to be visually recognized.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, when a plurality of effects are executed simultaneously, the player does not know which effect to pay attention to, and there is a risk that the effects of the effects are reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and improving the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine βG1, the range is set by the range setting means, and the range is blocked by the blocking means, making it difficult for the player to see. There is an effect of being able to attract the attention of the person.
The gaming machine βG1 has storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the presentation mode display means displays the information when the information is stored in the storage means. A game machine βG2 characterized in that it is possible to display an effect mode.
According to the gaming machine βG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βG1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can be determined by the number of presentation modes displayed, and the number of times that can be determined can be predicted. has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine βG3, wherein the storage means can store the information up to a specific number in the gaming machine βG2.
According to the gaming machine βG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βG2, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of stored information used for determination by the determination means, thereby suppressing execution of excessive determinations. It has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic βH group>
A discrimination means capable of carrying out discrimination; a display means for displaying an identification pattern composed of a plurality of pattern rows for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; display control means for stop-displaying the identification pattern in a display mode for indicating the discrimination result; and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, the stop display mode for indicating the specific determination result is that the plurality of symbol rows are of specific symbols. The display control means selects at least two or more of the plurality of symbol rows as a combination of symbols to be part of the combination for indicating the specific determination result. It is configured to be able to be displayed in a ready-to-win display mode in which the ready-to-win display mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the identification symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row dynamically displayed while the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. A suggestive effect for suggesting a display mode can be executed, and the gaming machine changes the display mode of the identification symbol indicating the ready-to-win display mode based on the display mode of the identification symbol suggested by the suggestive effect. A gaming machine βH1 characterized by being variable.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that solves the problems exemplified above and further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine βH1, the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode is changed while suggesting the stop display mode of the identification pattern during dynamic display by the suggestive effect executed in the state where the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. It is also possible to let Therefore, according to the content of the suggestive effect, the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode does not change, and the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode is different from the game in which the identification pattern during dynamic display is expected to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute a game that expects to change. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine βH1, the suggestive effect is, after displaying a plurality of decorative symbols having information corresponding to the display mode of the identification pattern, a predetermined number of the displayed decorative symbols to indicate the result of the effect. A game machine βH2 characterized in that it displays the decorative pattern of .
According to the game machine βH2, by displaying a plurality of decorative patterns including a decorative pattern for indicating the effect result of the suggestive effect, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the effect result of the suggestive effect. In addition, by grasping the information possessed by the plurality of decorative symbols displayed, it is possible to stop and display the identification symbols during dynamic display without changing the identification symbols indicating the ready-to-win display mode by this suggestive effect. It is possible to execute a game to expect and a game to expect that the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode is variable. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine βH2, the suggestive effect is to display the plurality of decorative symbols in order, and the decorative symbols having information other than the information corresponding to the identification symbols displayed in the ready-to-win display mode are displayed first. A gaming machine βH3 characterized in that it displays.

According to the gaming machine βH3, the decorative pattern that is displayed first in the state where the ready-to-win display mode is displayed is a decorative pattern having information other than the information corresponding to the identification pattern displayed in the ready-to-win display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that an identification symbol for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed.
<Characteristic βI group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, display image creation means capable of creating a display image for showing the determination result by the determination means, and displaying the display image created by the display image creation means in a predetermined display area and image control means capable of variably controlling the display image created by the display image creation means, wherein the display image creation means superimposes a plurality of layers to The gaming machine βI1 is characterized in that the display image can be created, and the image control means can variably control the display image in units of the layers.
Conventionally, there is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device that executes a variable effect for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means. A gaming machine has been proposed that displays various display images on the display screen of the device (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, as the number of types of variable effects increases, the amount of display data for creating a display image increases, causing a problem of increasing manufacturing costs. There has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of increasing the effect of performance and enhancing the interest of the player in the game by executing various variable performances while suppressing the increase in the number of players. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above and further enhances the enjoyment of games.
According to the gaming machine βI1, the display image can be variably controlled in units of a plurality of layers forming the display image created by the display image creation means, so that various display modes can be achieved using the same display image. It can be displayed in the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute various variable effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of display data for creating a display image.

In the gaming machine βI1, the image creating means can create a display image of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means on a specific first layer among the plurality of layers, and the image control A gaming machine βI2, characterized by comprising correction means capable of executing correction control for making the identification information difficult to see when the first layer is variably controlled by the means.
According to the gaming machine βI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βI1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the display image of the identification information is variably controlled by the image control means, the display image of the identification information variably controlled by the correction means can be made difficult for the player to see. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the provided identification information.
In the gaming machine βI2, the plurality of images include at least a second layer on the front side of the first layer, and the image control means is the same for the first layer and the first layer. The correction means executes specific variable control of content, and the correcting means corrects the content displayed on the first layer by the display image displayed on the second layer when the specific variable control is executed. A gaming machine βI3 characterized in that the display image of the identification information is made difficult to see.
According to the gaming machine βI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in order to make it difficult to see the display image for showing the variably controlled identification information, the first layer on which the display image of the identification information is created and the second layer on which the same specific variable control is executed. Since the display image displayed on the layer is used, the display image of the second layer can be easily displayed without deviation from the display position of the display image of the identification information even if any variable control is executed. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic βJ group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of performance modes on the display means; It has variable display means capable of varying the performance mode displayed on the means, and display mode determination means capable of determining the display mode corresponding to the position where the plurality of performance modes are displayed. A gaming machine βJ1 characterized by:
Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766) However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the above-mentioned problems and improving the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine βJ1, since the notification mode is arranged to make it easier for the player to recognize the variable performance mode, it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the variable performance mode, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It has the effect of being able to
The gaming machine βJ2 in the gaming machine βJ1 is characterized in that the variable display means can vary the degree of variation of the presentation mode according to the display mode determined by the display mode determination means.

According to the game machine βJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the variable degree of the presentation mode can be varied according to the determined display mode, so that the displayed display mode can be easily made interesting. has the effect of being able to
In the game machine βJ2, a notification means capable of arranging the notification mode at the position where the production mode is displayed, and when the plurality of production modes are displayed, the notification mode can be changed by arranging the notification mode. and suggestion control means capable of suggesting the possible effect modes.
According to the gaming machine βJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βJ2, the variable rendering mode can be easily recognized by the player by arranging the notification mode, so there is a problem that the variable rendering mode is overlooked. can be suppressed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
<Characteristic βK group>
reporting means capable of reporting a predetermined reporting mode; operating means operable by the player; setting means capable of setting information for varying settings based on the operation of the operating means; and effect execution means capable of executing a performance mode corresponding to the setting, in the gaming machine, benefit giving means capable of giving a benefit based on the setting of the information by the setting means. A gaming machine βK1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, draws a lottery to determine whether the game is successful or not, executes an effect to notify the judgment result, and is provided in the game machine. A game machine has been proposed in which a game mode can be changed by operating an operation means that can be operated by a player who has received the game. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, when the operation means is operated, it may be difficult to determine whether the mode of the game has been changed, and the problem is that the interest in the game is reduced. was there. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and improving the amusement of the game.
According to the gaming machine βK1, since a privilege is given based on setting information, the player can be made to operate the operation means in order to request the provision of the privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine βK1 has a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific determination result, The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the privilege providing means notifies that the result of the determining means is the specific determination result before the privilege game is executed.
According to the gaming machine βK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βK1, the privilege providing means can promptly notify the player that the privilege game will be executed. can be operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine βK2, the privilege granting means can grant the privilege when the information is set by the setting means while the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine βK3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine βK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, it is possible to allow the player to operate the operation means in order to obtain a privilege even during the dynamic display period of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Feature group of 5073 (additional) system>
<Characteristic GA group>
Operation means operable by a player, operation valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period during which an operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and during the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means an effect variable means capable of stepwise changing an effect mode from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode, based on the fact that the operation is executed on the second stage; and the effect mode specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when is varied to the second mode, wherein the operation effective period is set to the first state and the effect It has a state setting means capable of setting a second state in which it is difficult to change the mode, and the state setting means detects that the operation means is operated while the first state is set. A gaming machine GA1 characterized in that the second state can be set based on the above.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Then, as a production mode of the operation production, a production mode of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction production) is provided, and when a privilege advantageous to the player can be given, the production result of the gauge reduction production is A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which the physical strength value of an enemy character becomes 0 (prior art document: JP-A-2009-233171).

However, in the conventional gauge reduction effect, the physical strength value that can be finally reduced is determined according to whether or not the privilege can be given, so the player does not have to operate the operation means. Therefore, if the reduction of the physical strength value stops in the middle of the gauge reduction effect, the effect result of this time will be a result of the effect that is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it is easily predicted before is displayed, and the presentation effect cannot be enhanced.
By solving the problems exemplified above and by setting a period during which the physical strength value is forcibly stopped before reaching the physical strength value that can be reduced in the gauge reduction effect, the gauge can be reduced. To provide a game machine which further enhances the amusement of a game by making a player expect a further decrease in the physical strength value even when the reduction in the physical strength value is stopped for a predetermined period during a reduction performance. do.
According to the game machine GA1, since the second state can be set based on the operation to the operation means executed during the first state, it is difficult to change the effect mode even if the predetermined operation is executed. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the effect mode will not change to the second mode or whether the second state is merely set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means until the valid period of operation elapses.
In the game machine GA1, the game machine GA2 is characterized by having a state switching means capable of setting the first state when a release condition is satisfied while the second state is set.

According to the game machine GA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine GA1, the following effects are produced. That is, even when the second state is set in which it is difficult to change the effect mode, the first state in which the effect mode can be changed is set by establishing the cancellation condition. It is possible to make it easier to change the presentation mode. Therefore, even when the second state is set, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's willingness to play the game to change the presentation mode to the second state.
A game machine GA3 characterized in that, in the game machine GA2, the cancellation condition can be established based on the predetermined operation executed during the second state.
According to the gaming machine GA3, the cancellation condition can be satisfied by executing a predetermined operation during the second state. It is possible to continue the execution, and there is an effect that the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be enhanced.
<Characteristic GB group>
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine whether the predetermined operation is continuously performed on the operation means, and a predetermined period of time that the predetermined operation is performed by the operation determination means. a performance variable means capable of varying a performance mode from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode on the basis of determination that the performance is continuously executed; a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the mode is changed to the second mode, in a state in which the predetermined operation continues for a second period shorter than the specific period. The gaming machine GB1 is characterized by having effect control means capable of executing effect control capable of changing the effect mode to the second mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Then, as a production mode of the operation production, a production mode of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction production) is provided, and when a privilege advantageous to the player can be given, the production result of the gauge reduction production is A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which the physical strength value of an enemy character becomes 0 (prior art document: JP-A-2009-233171).
In addition, instead of repeatedly pressing the operating means (continuous hitting operation), by continuously pressing the operating means (long-pressing), it has a function that allows the gauge reduction effect to proceed in the same way as when performing the repeated pressing operation. A game machine has also been proposed.
However, in the gauge decrease effect executed based on the long press operation, the effect is generally configured to progress (the gauge decreases) as the long press operation continues. There is a problem that the method of operating the operating means becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and preventing a player from becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine GB1, the performance mode can be changed to the second mode before the period during which the predetermined operation is continued reaches the specific period, so the predetermined operation is continuously performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the specific performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.
A gaming machine GB2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine GB1, it has an informing means capable of informing that the production control is being executed by the production control means.
According to the gaming machine GB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the notifying means can notify the player that the effect control is being executed, the effect is that the player can easily understand that the predetermined condition can be established. There is
In gaming machine GB1 or GB2, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined operation is completed in a second period shorter than the first period than when the predetermined operation is continuously performed for the first period. The game machine GB3 is characterized by being able to

According to the gaming machine GB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB1 or GB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined operation that is continuously executed is terminated, a novel game feature is provided in which the player is made to select whether or not to continue the predetermined operation. can do Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved.
The game machine GB3 has an operation effective period setting means capable of setting an operation effective period during which the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and the effect control means controls the operation during a first period during the operation effective period. The game machine GB4 is characterized by having second effect variable means capable of executing effect control and capable of varying the effect mode based on the passage of the first period.
According to the gaming machine GB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even when the first period during which the effect control is executed has passed, it is possible to vary the effect mode by the second effect variable means. Therefore, even if the predetermined operation is continued in the state where the effect control is being executed, the effect mode can be changed later, so that the player is instructed to finish the continuing predetermined operation. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to choose whether or not to play.
In the game machine GB4, determination means capable of executing determination, benefit giving means capable of providing a benefit based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the effect control are executed. a period determination means capable of determining one period from a plurality of periods including a normal period and a special period longer than the normal period as the first period, and the specific effect execution means is The specific effect can be executed when the result of the determination by the determination means is the specific determination result, and the period determination means determines whether the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. The gaming machine GB5 is characterized in that it is easier to determine the special period in a certain case than in the case of a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine GB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special period is set as the period during which the effect control is executed, the possibility that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result can be increased, so when the effect control is executed, The player can be made to select the timing for ending the predetermined operation depending on whether or not the length of the period during which the effect control continues is grasped. That is, a player who wants to grasp the length of the period during which the effect control is executed will continue the predetermined operation at least until the normal period elapses, and grasp that the special period is set as the current effect control. Immediately after the performance control is executed, the player who does not need to grasp the length of the period during which the performance control is executed is instructed to select whether or not to continue the predetermined operation. A game of selecting whether or not to continue a predetermined operation can be played.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a novel game feature of allowing the player to select the timing for ending the continuing predetermined operation.
<Characteristic GC group>
Operation means operable by a player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal determination an effect variable means capable of stepwise changing the effect mode from a first mode to a final mode different from the first mode when the result of the determination by the means satisfies a predetermined execution condition; , as the final mode, a final mode determining means capable of determining one mode from a plurality of modes including the second mode; and capable of executing a specific performance when the performance mode is changed to the second mode. and a specific effect execution means, wherein the effect variable means has, as the predetermined execution condition, a case where a first execution condition is established, and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition. The game machine GC1 is characterized in that the performance mode can be changed to the final mode with a different variable pattern depending on whether the game is established or not.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Then, as a production mode of the operation production, a production mode of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction production) is provided, and when a privilege advantageous to the player can be given, the production result of the gauge reduction production is A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which the physical strength value of an enemy character becomes 0 (prior art document: JP-A-2009-233171).

In addition, instead of repeatedly pressing the operating means (continuous hitting operation), by continuously pressing the operating means (long-pressing), it has a function that allows the gauge reduction effect to proceed in the same way as when performing the repeated pressing operation. A game machine has also been proposed.
However, in conventional gaming machines, when a long-pressing operation is performed on the operation means, it is common to perform a gauge decrease effect in the same effect mode as when a repeated hitting operation is performed. there were. In other words, even when a long-pressing operation is performed on the operation means in the sense of game support for a player who has difficulty executing a repeated hitting operation, the gauge reduction effect is executed in the same effect mode as when executing the repeated hitting operation. It is common to have the technical idea of making it possible.
In such a conventional game machine, it is possible to execute a gauge reduction effect in the same effect mode as when performing a repeated hitting operation, simply by executing a simple long-pressing operation on the player. Therefore, the player can easily enjoy the gauge decrease effect, but the gauge decrease effect is executed depending on whether the repeated hitting operation is performed or the long press operation is performed. Since the modes are similar, it is not possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the operation method for the operating means, and there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the operation presentation.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and preventing a player from becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine GC1, it is possible to change the performance mode to the final mode with different variable patterns according to the type of execution condition to be established. That is, when different operations are performed on the operation means, different effects can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the operation to be performed on the operating means, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming tired of operating the operating means. .
In the gaming machine GC1, a variable mode determination means capable of determining the variable mode of the performance mode to be varied by the performance variable means based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition; and the second execution condition is satisfied. a period discriminating means capable of discriminating a continuation period, wherein the effect variable means includes a first variable that changes the effect mode to the variable mode determined by the variable mode determining means; A gaming machine GC2 characterized by being able to execute a second variable of varying the performance mode according to the duration discriminated by the period discriminating means.
According to the gaming machine GC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first execution condition is satisfied, the effect mode is changed to the variable mode determined based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition, and when the second execution condition is satisfied, the second The mode of presentation varies according to the length of the continuation period in which the execution condition is satisfied. In other words, the timing for changing the effect mode is changed according to the type of execution condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to change the performance mode in different variable modes according to the operation method of the operating means, and to vary the timing of changing the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the variable aspect of the rendering mode according to the type of execution condition that is established, and there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.
In the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, both the first execution condition and the second execution condition can be satisfied within one operation valid period during which the determination by the signal determination means is valid. A gaming machine GC3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine GC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to satisfy both the first execution condition and the second execution condition during one operation valid period. That is, it is possible to change the types of execution conditions that are established by switching the operation method for the operation means during one operation valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of switching the operation method to another operation method while operating the operation means.
<Characteristic GD group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. effect mode determining means capable of determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including at least modes; updating means capable of updating effect values based on information relating to the effect executed by the effect executing means; The effect mode determination means has a first decision to determine the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and when the effect value updated by the update means satisfies an execution condition A gaming machine GD1 capable of executing a second determination of determining the first effect mode as the effect mode regardless of the determination result by the determination means.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and before the stop-display of the symbols, a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the lottery. A possible configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
Furthermore, as the types of suggestive modes, there is a first type in which the lottery result is likely to be a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, and a lottery result in which the lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the first type. One type can be determined from a plurality of types including at least a second type having a low possibility of being a lottery result (for example, winning), and the type of suggestion mode notified by the lottery can be determined. By structuring, diversity is given to the notification performance to be executed, and the performance effect is improved.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the type of suggestive mode is determined by a lottery, so situations may occur in which the notification effect is not executed for a long period of time, or the specific type of suggestive mode is not determined. Therefore, there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game before the variety of presentations prepared in advance is provided to the player.
In particular, the first type, which has a high possibility that the lottery result is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, win), is not advantageous if the lottery result is a lottery result that is not advantageous to the player (for example, a loss). Since it is more difficult to determine than the second type, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game before the notification performance including the suggestion mode in which the first type is determined is executed.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above and prevents a player from becoming bored with the game.
According to the gaming machine GD1, when the performance value updated based on the information regarding the performance executed by the performance execution means satisfies the execution condition, the performance of the first performance mode is performed regardless of the determination result of the determination means. Since it can be executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player gets bored with the game before the performance of the first performance mode is executed.

In the gaming machine GD1, the updating means varies the effect value to be updated according to the type of the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means.
According to the gaming machine GD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect value updated by the updating means can be changed according to the effect mode of the effect to be executed, the number of determinations by the determining means executed until the effect value satisfies the execution condition can be varied. becomes possible. Therefore, when the effect of the first effect mode is executed, is the effect of the first effect mode executed based on the first decision, or is the effect of the first effect mode executed based on the second decision? can be made difficult for the player to comprehend, even if the performance of the first performance mode is executed based on the second determination, the determination result of the corresponding determination means is a specific determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier to expect.
In the gaming machine GD2, the effect mode determining means selects, as the effect mode of the effect, the specific determination result when the determination result corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed is the specific determination result. and a third effect mode that is different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode. When the performance in which the second performance mode is determined is executed, the performance value and the execution condition are more likely to be satisfied than when the performance in which the third performance mode is determined is executed. A gaming machine GD3 characterized in that it can be updated so that
According to the gaming machine GD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an effect with a low possibility of awarding a privilege is executed, the effect of the first effect mode based on the second determination is executed rather than when an effect with a low possibility of being granted a privilege is not executed. can be made easier. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of only an effect with a low possibility of being granted a privilege.

In the gaming machine GD3, the updating means determines that the effect in which the first effect mode is determined is executed when the effect in which the second effect mode and the third effect mode are determined is executed. The game machine GD4 is characterized in that the performance value can be updated so that the execution condition is more likely to be established than in the case of the game machine GD4.
According to the gaming machine GD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the performance with a low possibility of awarding the privilege is executed, the first performance mode is changed based on the second determination in a short period of time compared to the performance with a high possibility of the award of the privilege being executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress frequent execution of the effect of the first effect mode.
<Characteristic GE group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. performance mode determination means capable of determining one performance mode from a plurality of performance modes including at least one mode, and identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result are dynamically displayed storage means capable of storing determination information indicating that the first effect mode has been determined as the effect mode of the effect to be performed for a predetermined period of time; and a second determination of determining the first presentation mode based on the decision information stored in the storage means. Gaming machine GE1.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and before the stop-display of the symbols, a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the lottery. A possible configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

Further, as the types of suggestion mode, a first type in which the lottery result is likely to be a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, and a lottery result in which the lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the first type. One type can be determined from among a plurality of types including at least a second type having a low possibility of being a lottery result (for example, winning), and the type of suggestion mode notified by the lottery can be determined. By structuring, diversity is given to the notification performance to be executed, and the performance effect is improved.
However, in conventional gaming machines, the type of suggested mode is determined by lottery. As a result, the notification effect including the suggestion mode of the first type may become a suggestion mode with a low possibility that the lottery result is a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player. rice field.
Here, conventionally, the effect mode of the effect that the lottery result is likely to be a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, winning). It is general that a flashy presentation mode is defined to make the player pay attention rather than a presentation mode with a low possibility of being. Therefore, in a configuration in which the type of suggestive mode is determined by lottery, the performance executed in a flashy performance mode is continuously executed when the lottery result is a failure, and the performance effect is remarkably reduced. There was a problem.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above and enhances a player's interest in a game by enhancing the performance effect.

According to the gaming machine GE1, the specific determination result is more likely to be the specific determination result as the effect mode of the effect executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. When the first performance mode is determined which is easier to determine than the determination result other than the determination result, the information is stored, and then the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. When determining the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the period, the first effect mode is determined based on the information stored in the storage means. It is possible to prevent the identification information indicating the discrimination result other than the discrimination result from being continuously executed as an effect executed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to execute the performance mode of the performance executed for indicating the determination result of the determination means according to the predetermined rule, and it is possible to suppress the dramatic deterioration of the performance effect. effective.
In the gaming machine GE1, the effect mode determination means stores in the storage means, The gaming machine GE2 is characterized in that a third decision for deciding a mode other than the first performance mode can be executed when the decision information is stored.
According to the gaming machine GE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GE1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the determination information is stored in the storage means, the first effect is used as the effect mode of the effect executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. Aspects can be hard to determine. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the first performance mode to be continuously determined as the performance mode of the performance executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. Therefore, the effect mode of the effect executed to indicate the determination result of the determining means can be easily executed according to a predetermined rule, and when the effect of the first effect mode is continuously executed, Since it is possible to increase the possibility of a specific determination result, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the effect mode of the effect to be executed.

A game machine GE3, characterized in that the gaming machine GE1 or GE2 has an erasing means capable of erasing the determination information stored in the storage means when the determination by the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times.
According to the gaming machine GE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GE1 or GE2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the determination information stored in the storage means is erased based on the number of determinations performed by the determination means, it is possible to set a limit on the period during which the second determination is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to determine the performance mode based on the first determination, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced by providing a variety of performances to the player.
<Characteristic GF group>
Determining means capable of executing determination, privilege providing means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result, and operating means operable by the player. , operation determination means capable of determining that the operation means has been operated, effective period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid by the operation determining means, and setting of the effective period valid period informing means capable of informing the player of at least a part of the valid period set by means; and an operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means based on the determination of the operation of the valid period setting means, As the valid period, a first valid period and a second valid period longer than the first valid period can be set, and the determination result obtained by the determination means is the specific determination result. The gaming machine GF1 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second validity period than in the case of no specific determination result.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an effective period is set for a certain period in which the operation of the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that the player can operate can be effectively determined, and the operation is performed during the effective period. There is a game machine capable of executing an operation effect based on the operation contents of the operation means. Then, when the validity period is set, by displaying a display mode (validity period gauge) for notifying the player that the valid period has been set and the length of the set valid period. , a configuration has been proposed that makes it easier for the player to operate the operating means during the valid period (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233171).

However, in conventional gaming machines, since the length of the valid period set as the period during which the operation effect can be executed is always constant, the length of the valid period displayed is always constant, so the valid period When is displayed, it is difficult to provide high and low willingness for the player to operate the operating means.
Therefore, since a performance result that is disadvantageous to the player is set as the performance result of the operation performance, the performance result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed or the game is played even though the player has intentionally operated the operation means. In spite of the fact that the performance result that is advantageous to the player is set, the operation of the operation means is neglected, and a situation occurs in which the performance result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed. However, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the operation performance.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above, suppresses the player from getting tired of the operation presentation, and improves the player's interest in the game.
According to the game machine GF1, the second effective period is set as the length of the effective period for determining that the operation to the operation means is more effective when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. The player is notified of at least a partial period of the set validity period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the set valid period with different lengths, so that the player can It is possible to provide high and low willingness to operate the operating means.

Therefore, every time the validity period is set, regardless of the result of determination by the corresponding determination means, compared to the conventional game machine in which the operation means is operated with the same desire to operate, Since the desire to operate the operation means can be varied, a performance result that is disadvantageous to the player is set, so that the performance result that is advantageous to the player is displayed despite the player's willingness to operate the operation means. Or, even though the effect result that is advantageous to the player is set, the operation of the operation means is neglected, and the effect result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the operation presentation.
The gaming machine GF1 has valid period determining means capable of determining one valid period from among a plurality of valid periods including at least the first valid period and the second valid period as the valid period, The valid period setting means can set the valid period determined by the valid period determining means, and the valid period setting means can set information indicating the length of the valid period determined by the valid period determining means. A gaming machine GF2 characterized by having valid period advance notification means capable of notifying the determined valid period by the time the determined valid period is set.
According to the gaming machine GF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information indicating the length of the validity period set by the advance notification means can be notified before the validity period is set. Therefore, since the valid period can be set in a state in which the player predicts the length of the valid period to be set this time, the operating means can be operated from the beginning of the valid period with the willingness to operate corresponding to the content notified by the advance notification means. Since it is possible to allow the player to operate, there is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the execution of an operation effect according to the player's desire to operate.
In the gaming machine GF1 or GF2, the effective period notification means provides first notification for stepwise notification of the effective period set by the effective period setting means and the effective period set by the effective period setting means. A gaming machine GF3 characterized by being able to execute a second notification that is notified at once.

According to the gaming machine GF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GF1 or GF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second notification can be executed to increase the length of the valid period notified by the valid period notifying means, the length of the valid period set this time can be notified to the player. It can be difficult to comprehend. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily operate the operating means during the valid period while making the player expect that the valid period which is actually set is long.
<Characteristic GG group>
Storage means capable of storing determination information up to a predetermined number, determination means capable of performing determination based on the determination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and the determination means. a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by is a specific discrimination result; a pre-discrimination means capable of making a preliminary decision before the decision is made based on the pre-discrimination means; and an effect mode determination means capable of determining the effect mode of the preliminary effect to be executed by the pre-effect execution means, wherein the effect mode determination means determines the discrimination stored in the storage means. Based on the result of the preliminary determination for the plurality of determination information included in the first range, the first effect mode is set to the plurality of the information included in the second range after the first range. It is possible to determine a second effect mode based on the result of the pre-determination for the determination information, and the gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, performs the plurality of determinations included in the second range. A gaming machine GG1 characterized in that at least part of the information can be included in the first range.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine acquires lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a start hole provided on the game board surface, and the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery based on the acquired lottery information. After the symbols for notifying the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a win, the privilege game is advantageous to the player. is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game, a configuration has been proposed in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player can be set for a predetermined period of time as the game state (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
Further, a storage means capable of storing the obtained lottery information up to a predetermined number is provided, the lottery information stored in the storage means is discriminated in advance before the lottery is executed, and the lottery to be executed from now on is provided. A configuration has also been proposed in which a pre-suggestion production capable of pre-suggesting the results of the above can be executed.

Furthermore, a configuration has also been proposed in which the result of pre-discrimination for a plurality of lottery information can be suggested in advance using one pre-suggestion effect.
In the above-described conventional gaming machine, the results of pre-discrimination for a plurality of lottery information can be suggested using one pre-suggestion effect. In the case of , it suffices to notify the player of the performance result indicating the failure as the performance result of the preliminary suggestive performance of 1, and in the case of notifying that the lottery result is the failure each time the lottery is executed. Compared to this, it is possible to reduce the number of times of execution of the effect for notifying that the lottery result is lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the continuous display of the effect result indicating that the lottery result is lost as the effect result of the effect to be executed. there were.
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the range of the plurality of lottery information included in the pre-suggestion effect is constant, the effect result of the pre-suggestion effect is not suitable for the player who has been playing for a long time. , there is a problem that it is easy to grasp how many lottery results are collectively displayed.
In addition, as a pre-suggestion production, the ratio of executing the pre-suggestion production of the production result that indicates the hit and the ratio of executing the pre-suggestion production of the production result that shows the failure are always constant, so the pre-suggestion production There is a problem that it is difficult to enhance the performance effect.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above and enhances a player's interest in a game by enhancing the performance effect.
According to the gaming machine GG1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second range normally used for determining the second effect mode is used as the discrimination information used when determining the first effect mode. Since the identification information included can also be used, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of identification information used when determining the presentation mode of the first presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the content of the game to be executed later, and from lowering the player's willingness to play.
Further, when the number of determination information used when determining the first effect mode increases, it becomes easier to determine the effect mode for indicating a preliminary determination result that can be a specific determination result as the first effect mode, As the second effect mode, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the effect mode for indicating a preliminary determination result that can be a specific determination result. Therefore, different performance modes can be easily determined for a plurality of consecutively executed preliminary performances, so that various performances can be provided to the player and the performance effect can be enhanced. has the effect of
In the gaming machine GG1, a first game state in which the discrimination information is easily acquired, a second game state in which it is more difficult to acquire than the first game state, a settable game state setting means, and the first game state are set. a termination means capable of terminating the first game state when the number of times of determination performed by the determination means satisfies a termination condition in the state where the pre-rendering is executed; The means is capable of executing the preliminary performance of the first performance mode when the remaining number of determinations until the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set reaches a specific number of times. A gaming machine GG2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine GG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GG1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the determinations executed during the first game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of determinations in which the determination result is not suggested to the player by the pre-suggestion effect, so that it is executed later. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the content of the game and lowering the player's desire to play.
In addition, even if a performance mode indicating a performance result corresponding to a determination result other than a specific determination result is determined as the performance mode of the pre-suggestion performance, the determination result is not suggested to the player by the pre-suggestion performance. By making it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of determinations that have not been made, the effect is that the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting that more determinations will be made during the first game state. be.
In the gaming machine GG2, the preliminary effect executing means executes the second effect mode using the preliminary determination results corresponding to the multiple determinations performed in the state where the first game state is set. A gaming machine GG3 characterized by being capable of executing the preliminary performance.
According to the gaming machine GG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the preliminary performance of the second performance mode executed after the preliminary performance of the first performance mode is also executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination performed in the state where the first game state is set. . That is, when the remaining number of determinations until the end condition reaches a specific number in a state in which the first game state is set, the preliminary performance of the first performance mode and the preliminary performance of the second performance mode are consecutively performed. A production is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the remaining number of determinations that can be performed in the state where the first game state is set.

In any one of the game machines GG1 to GG3, as the discrimination information, the result of the preliminary discrimination corresponding to the specific discrimination information for which the discrimination is executed next to the discrimination information included in the first range is the specified A game machine GG4 characterized in that the predetermined condition can be established when the determination result is for indicating the determination result of .
According to the gaming machine GG4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines GG1 to GG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of preliminary discrimination corresponding to the specific discrimination information for which discrimination is executed next to the discrimination information included in the first range is a discrimination result for indicating the specific discrimination result, it corresponds to the specific discrimination information. Since the first performance mode can be determined by using the result of the preliminary determination, it is possible to suppress unnecessary extension of the performance period in which the preliminary performance of the first performance mode is executed, and the player can There is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that does not give a sense of incongruity to the user.
In addition, compared to the case of notifying that the determination information for which determination is performed first among the determination information included in the second range will result in a specific determination result using the preliminary effect of the second effect mode, Since it is possible to ensure a long performance period from the execution of the performance to the notification of the result of the performance, there is an effect that it is possible to easily execute the pre-performance that is easy for the player to understand.
In any one of the game machines GG1 to GG4, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and the display means is displayed by the dynamic display means dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be dynamically displayed, wherein the dynamic display period determination means indicates the determination result based on the specific determination information. At least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period can be determined as dynamic display periods of the identification information for the game machine, A game characterized in that the predetermined condition can be established when the first dynamic display period is determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the specific determination information. Machine GG5.

According to the gaming machine GG5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines GG1 to GG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a short dynamic display period is determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the result of determination based on the specific determination information, the result of preliminary determination corresponding to the specific determination information is used to perform the first presentation. Since the mode can be determined, it is possible to suppress unnecessary extension of the performance period during which the preliminary performance of the first performance mode is executed, and the performance is executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic GH group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means As a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination by is a specific determination result, and the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, Benefit type determination means capable of determining one benefit type from among a plurality of privilege types to which different benefits can be imparted, and privilege performance execution means capable of executing a privilege performance for notifying that the privilege game is to be executed. and, in a gaming machine having, pre-determination means capable of performing determination prior to the determination means based on information stored in the storage means, and the privilege effect execution means. and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode of the privilege performance, wherein the performance mode determination means determines whether the privilege game for which the specific privilege type is determined is executed, and the specific privilege. When it is determined that the privilege game in which the privilege type different from the type is determined is executed, and the information determined as the specific determination result by the preliminary determination means is stored, A gaming machine GH1 characterized in that it is possible to determine the same specific performance mode.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine acquires lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a start hole provided on the game board surface, and the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery based on the acquired lottery information. After the symbols for notifying the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a win, the privilege game is advantageous to the player. As such, there has been proposed a configuration in which one of privilege games with different degrees of advantage is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
In addition, by informing the player of the content of the privilege given during the privilege game after the privilege game is executed, compared to the case where the content of the privilege is notified before the privilege game is executed. , a configuration has been proposed in which the user can continue to have expectations for the provision of more advantageous privileges.

A storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of obtained lottery information is provided, and the lottery information stored in the storage means is pre-determined before the lottery is executed, for example, during a privilege game. , a configuration capable of notifying the player that the stored lottery information contains the lottery information that results in winning the lottery has also been proposed.
In the above-described conventional gaming machine, while the privilege game is being executed, the player is notified of the details of the privilege to be granted by the privilege game being executed and the possibility of another privilege game being newly executed. Since the effect can be executed, the player during the privilege game can be made to pay attention to the executed effect, and the player's early boredom with the game can be suppressed.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the privilege given by the privilege game being executed and the fact that another privilege game is newly executed are notified by different effects, so that the player can be notified later. Since the content of the game to be executed is easily grasped, depending on the content of the performance to be executed during the privilege game, there is a problem that the player who has grasped the content of the performance loses his or her willingness to play the game. there were.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and improving the enjoyment of the game of the player.

According to the gaming machine GH1, when a privilege game for which a specific privilege type is determined is executed, and when a privilege game for which a privilege type different from the specific privilege type is determined is executed, and specified by the advance determination means Since the same specific performance mode can be determined as the performance mode of the privilege performance in the case where it is determined that the determination result and the information to be determined are stored, the game that grasps the performance contents of the privilege performance Since it is possible to provide players with the pleasure of predicting the content of the game to be executed later, it is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to play the game of the player who has grasped the content of the privilege presentation. effective.
In the gaming machine GH1, the privilege effect executing means can execute the privilege effect by setting at least part of a period during which the privilege game is executed a plurality of times as the effect period.
According to the gaming machine GH2, since the privilege effect can be executed across a plurality of privilege games, the case where the privilege game in which the specific privilege type is determined is executed and the specific privilege type are different. A privilege game in which a different privilege type is determined is executed, and a privilege performance is executed in the same performance mode when it is determined that information to be determined as a specific determination result is stored by a preliminary determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility even in the case of such a situation.
The game machine GH1 or GH2 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game is completed. Then, the gaming machine is such that the privilege game in which the specific privilege type is determined is faster than the privilege game in which the privilege type other than the specific privilege type is determined after the end of the privilege game. 2 game state is configured to be easily set, the privilege effect execution means executes the privilege game in which the privilege type different from the specific privilege type is determined, and the specific privilege type is determined by the pre-determining means When it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored, the second game state is changed after the privilege game executed based on the information stored in the storage means is completed. The gaming machine GH3 is characterized in that the privilege effect of the specific effect mode can be executed when set.

According to the game machine GH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine GH1 or GH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege effect of a specific effect mode is executed corresponding to a plurality of privilege games, the second game state is set after the corresponding privilege game is finished, so the privilege effect of the specific effect mode is set. is executed, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the second game state is set can be increased.
<Characteristic GI group> (Switching the order of individually notifying each effect element used for composite effect according to the establishment condition)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; and the discrimination by the discrimination means and effect execution means capable of executing effects for indicating the result of (1), wherein the effect execution means comprises effect information reporting means capable of informing a plurality of effect information in order, wherein the effect execution means, as the effect, It is possible to execute a composite effect including an effect mode corresponding to the effect information notified by the effect information notifying means, and the game machine changes the order of the effect information notified by the effect information notifying means. A gaming machine GI1 characterized in that it is possible to
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period. After being variably displayed, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery is a win, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed and the result of the lottery is displayed. There has been proposed a configuration that allows a player to predict the lottery result by executing an effect for the purpose (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208557).
Furthermore, by notifying the player of at least part of the performance information indicating the performance mode used for the performance before the performance is executed, the player is made to predict in advance the contents of the performance to be executed from now on. A configuration has been proposed that makes it possible to provide enjoyment.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the effect information is notified in a specific order, for example, the effect information notified first (first effect information) is the effect information notified later (first effect information). 2 effect information), the player will be predicted the lottery result at an early stage, and the game will be played against the contents of the effect information notified later. There was a problem that people lost interest.
Further, by constructing the second effect information so as to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result than the first effect information, even when the effect information is announced in a specific order. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the result of the lottery until the second performance information is notified. There is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the performance effect of notifying in order.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above and enhances a player's interest in a game by enhancing the performance effect.
According to the game machine GI1, the notification order of a plurality of performance information corresponding to the performance modes included in the composite performance can be varied, so that the enjoyment of having the player predict the performance contents of the composite performance can be easily continued. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In the gaming machine GI1, an effect type determination means capable of determining one type from a plurality of types including a first type and a second type different from the first type as the type of the composite effect; and a type notifying means capable of notifying the type determined by the effect type determining means, wherein the type notifying means is capable of notifying the determined type before the effect information is notified. wherein the gaming machine is capable of changing the order of the performance information notified by the performance information notifying means according to the type of the composite performance determined by the performance type determining means; The second performance information notified later than the first performance information notified earlier than the first performance information notified by the means makes it easier to determine the performance information that makes it easier to predict the discrimination result of the discriminating means. A gaming machine GI2 characterized by:
According to the game machine GI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine GI1, the following effects are produced. That is, the order of notification of the performance information can be changed according to the type of the determined composite performance, and the performance information that makes it easy to predict the determination result of the determination means is determined as the second performance information. There is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result during the period in which a plurality of performance information are notified by.
In the gaming machine GI2, the effect type determination means can determine a third type different from the first type and the second type, and the type notification means determines that the third type is the type of the composite effect. When it is determined, the determined type can be notified after the performance information is notified, and the game machine is more likely to perform the above when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. The gaming machine GI3 is characterized in that the third type is more likely to be determined as the type of the composite effect than when the determination result is a result other than a specific determination result.
According to the gaming machine GI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the timing of notifying the type of the composite effect can be varied according to the type of the determined composite effect, various effects can be provided to the player during the period until the composite effect is executed. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

<Characteristic GJ group> (In a battle production in which multiple battles are executed, it is possible to limit the production result when a specific attack pattern is executed in the final battle depending on the attack pattern executed before the final battle)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; and the discrimination by the discrimination means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect for indicating the result of (1), wherein the effect executing means continuously executes at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect as the effects. and has an effect mode determination means capable of determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including the first specific effect mode as the effect mode of the first specific effect, wherein the gaming machine comprises: The result of the determination can be notified by the effect result of the second specific effect, and the case where the first specific effect of the first specific effect mode is executed is the effect mode other than the first specific effect mode. It is possible to make it easier for a player to predict the effect result when a second specific effect mode is determined as the effect mode of the second specific effect than when the first specific effect is executed. A gaming machine GJ1 characterized by:
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period. After being variably displayed, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery is a win, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed and the result of the lottery is displayed. There has been proposed a configuration that allows a player to predict the lottery result by executing an effect for the purpose (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208557).
Furthermore, by executing the performance of the same mode a plurality of times and informing the player of the result of the lottery according to the result of the last performance, the performance executed until the result of the lottery is notified is diversified. A configuration designed to improve the effect has been proposed.
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it was possible to diversify the effects by executing the effects multiple times, but the lottery result was notified based on the result of the effect executed last. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is not interested in the details of the effects executed other than the last of the multiple effects, and the effects of the effects are lowered.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above and enhances a player's interest in a game by enhancing the performance effect.
According to the gaming machine GJ1, the ease of predicting the effect result of the second specific effect in the case where the second specific effect is executed in the second specific effect mode can be varied depending on the effect mode of the first specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the first specific effect can be made interesting and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, the effect executed while making the player who grasps that the first specific effect has been executed in the first specific effect mode expect that the second specific effect will be executed in the specific second effect mode. There is an effect that the user can pay attention to the contents.
In the gaming machine GJ1, the performance mode determining means, when the result of the determination by the determining means is the specific determination result, is higher than the determination result other than the specific determination result. 1. A game machine GJ2 characterized in that it is easy to determine a specific performance mode.
In the game machine GJ2, as a result of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a first effect result advantageous to the player, a second effect result disadvantageous to the player, and a game is played from the second effect result. The game machine has a performance result determining means capable of determining either the third performance result that is advantageous to the player, and the game machine determines a performance result other than the second performance result as the performance result of the second specific performance. is determined, the second specific effect mode can be determined as the effect mode of the second specific effect to be executed after the first specific effect in which the first specific effect mode is determined is executed. A gaming machine GJ3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine GJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GJ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an effect result other than the second effect result that is disadvantageous to the player is determined as the effect result of the effect executed to indicate the determination result of the determining means, the first specific effect mode of the first specific effect mode is determined. Since the effect and the second specific effect of the second specific effect mode can be executed continuously, the player who grasps that the first specific effect has been executed in the first specific effect mode, There is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the effect to be executed while expecting the second specific effect to be executed in the specific second effect mode.
<Characteristic group of 5075 series>
<Characteristic HA group> (Variable continuation rate while setting a common termination condition in a specific game state)
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition; A first game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first game state. A second game state setting means for setting, and a first control in which the ratio of the establishment of the specific execution condition from the setting of the first game state to the establishment of the specific condition is a first ratio. and a second rate in which the rate of fulfillment of the specific execution condition between the time when the first game state is set and the time when the specific condition is satisfied is a second rate higher than the first rate. and setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least two controlled games.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of termination conditions for a specific game state with a high degree of advantage (for example, a short-time game state) are provided, and the specific game state is set. By setting end conditions, even in the same specific game state, there are some games in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting trigger.
However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to predefine end conditions for each setting opportunity in a storage device such as a ROM, so the memory capacity of the gaming machine increases as the number of ending conditions increases. There is a problem.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HA1, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition, and a a first game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the second game state; A game in which a first control is performed in which is the first ratio, and a ratio in which the specific execution condition is satisfied between the time when the first game state is set and the specific condition is satisfied is the first A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a second control is performed at a second rate higher than the rate.
As a result, even in the same first game state, the possibility of the privilege game being executed can be changed depending on whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed, so that the player's game There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

In the game machine HA1, the first control is a control in which the specific condition is more likely to be established than the second control, the game machine HA2.
According to the game machine HA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA1, the first control is the first control because the specific condition is more likely to be established than the second control. or the second control, the ease with which the specific condition is established can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the possibility that the specific execution condition is satisfied before the specific condition is satisfied can be made different.
In the game machine HA1 or HA2, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. wherein the specific execution condition is determined in advance by either the result of the first determination or the result of the second determination and the specific condition is the number of executions of the first determination at least after the first game state is set. is a predetermined specific number of times.
According to the game machine HA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA1 or HA2, the first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition; and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, wherein the specific execution condition is the determination result of the first determination and the second determination. It is composed of a condition that is established based on whether one of the determination result of determination and the determination result has become a predetermined specific determination result, and the specific condition is at least the first game state is set. It is constituted by a condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first discrimination after the above-mentioned determination reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

As a result, the first game state is maintained in a range where the number of executions of the first discrimination is less than the specified number of times, so the effect is that it is possible to guarantee the execution of the first discrimination for the specified number of times in the first game state. There is
In the gaming machine HA3, the first control is executed during a period from when the first game state is set to when the first determination is performed the specific number of times, rather than the second control. The game machine HA4 is characterized in that it is constituted by a control that tends to reduce the number of executions of determination 2.
According to the game machine HA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA3, the first control executes the first determination the specific number of times after the first game state is set, rather than the second control. Since the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set tends to be a small number of times, the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set. are different, it is possible to substantially differ the ratio of establishment of a specific execution condition.
In the game machine HA3 or HA4, the specific conditions include a first specific condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first determination after the setting of the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times; The second established based on the fact that the sum of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set becomes the first number of times greater than the specific number of times and 2 specific conditions, and the first control and the second control are configured so that the first specific condition is likely to be satisfied before the second specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine HA5 is characterized in that the period required for the first specific condition to be established is likely to be shorter in the first control than in the second control.

According to the game machine HA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA3 or HA4, the specific condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set has reached the specific number of times. A first specific condition that is established based on a total of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set is greater than the specific number of times and a second specific condition that is established based on the number of times, and the first control and the second control are performed before the second specific condition is established. It is configured such that the specific condition is easily established, and the first control is configured such that the period required until the first specific condition is established is likely to be shorter than the second control.
As a result, by varying the length of the period required until the first specific condition is satisfied, the number of times the second determination is performed is varied, thereby varying the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine HA5, display means capable of displaying identification information; first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination on the display means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the determination on the display means; and dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means dynamic display period setting means for setting a display period; and a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least two dynamic display periods, wherein the first control is a ratio of selection of the first dynamic display period by the period selection means. is higher than the second control.
According to the game machine HA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA5, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination are dynamically displayed on the display means. a first dynamic display means; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination on the display means; a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information of 1; and a first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means; a second dynamic display period that is longer than the first dynamic display period; The control is configured such that the ratio of selection of the first dynamic display period is higher than that of the second control.

Thereby, the tendency of the dynamic display period selected by the period selection means is made different between the first control and the second control, so that the length of the period required until the first specific condition is substantially satisfied can be made different. It has the effect of being able to
In the game machine HA6, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information while the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information. A game machine HA7 characterized by being configured to be able to start.
According to the game machine HA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA6, the first dynamic display means displays the second identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the second identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination can be executed with high reliability.
In the gaming machine HA7, the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information while the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information. A gaming machine HA8 characterized by being configured to be able to start.

According to the game machine HA8, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA7, the second dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. Since the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the first identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed with high reliability.
The game machine HA9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines HA3 to HA8, the second determination is made up of a determination with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination.
According to the game machine HA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines HA3 to HA8, the second determination is made up of a determination with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination. The game can be played with a strong expectation that the second determination will be performed rather than the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic HB group> (Performs an effect indicating the possibility of winning a big win during the time saving state of 1, and updates the possibility indicated by the effect mode according to the game situation)
Determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A game execution means, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, and a second setting predetermined in the first game state. Second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a condition; and establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first game state. and the specific determination result and the specific determination result before the second set condition is satisfied as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. In the case of a predetermined first situation with a low possibility of becoming, the first performance mode is determined, and the specific determination result is obtained before the second set condition is satisfied than the first situation. A game machine HB1, comprising a performance mode determining means capable of determining a second performance mode in a second situation with a high possibility.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is also one that is configured to be able to execute an interest effect indicating the degree of expectation that a winning game will be executed within a predetermined period (for example, until all the reserved balls are consumed). There exists not only a variable display during execution but also a game which is constructed so as to continuously give a feeling of anticipation that a winning game will be executed over a plurality of variable displays.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since it is possible to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that a winning game will be executed only for a relatively small number of variable displays, it is difficult to improve interest. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine HB1, a determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determining condition, and based on the determination result of the determining means being a predetermined specific determination result, bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition; second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the game state; A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a specified specific execution condition, and the second set condition being satisfied as a effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A first effect mode is determined in the case of a predetermined first situation that is unlikely to result in the specific determination result before the first situation, and the second setting condition is set more than the first situation. and an effect mode determination means capable of determining a second effect mode when the second situation is likely to result in the specific determination result before being established.
As a result, it is possible to show the player the possibility of obtaining a specific determination result during the first game state according to the effect mode of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .
In the gaming machine HB1, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect of the second effect mode based on the fact that the second situation occurs during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode. A gaming machine HB2 characterized in that it is configured to allow
According to the gaming machine HB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB1, the specific effect executing means, based on the fact that the second situation occurs during execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode, Since the specific performance of the second performance mode can be executed, when the situation changes in the first game state, the performance mode of the specific performance can be switched according to the changed situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an accurate situation can be shown to the player by the specific effect.

In the gaming machine HB1 or HB2, a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect during execution of the privilege game, and the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means are: determining a third effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as a game state after the privilege game being executed is finished; a performance mode determining means configured to determine a fourth performance mode corresponding to the second performance mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set. A game machine HB3 characterized by.
According to the game machine HB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB1 or HB2, the first effect executing means for executing a predetermined first effect during the execution of the privilege game, and the first effect executing means. When the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game being executed is set as the effect mode of the first effect to be performed, the first effect mode is set. A corresponding third effect mode is determined, and when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set, a fourth effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode can be determined. and a performance mode determining means.
As a result, during execution of the privilege game, the possibility of a specific determination result in the first game state after the completion of the privilege game can be shown to the player by the first effect. There is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
In any one of the game machines HB1 to HB3, the second situation is different from the first situation in that the specific determination result is not obtained after the first game state is set, and the second setting condition is satisfied. A game machine HB4 characterized in that the game machine HB4 is constructed in a situation in which the number of determinations by the determination means executed until the condition is established tends to increase.

According to the gaming machine HB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HB1 to HB3, in the second situation, the specific determination is made after the first gaming state is set, rather than in the first situation. Since it is configured in a situation in which the number of determinations by the determination means executed until the second set condition is satisfied without obtaining a result tends to increase, the chances of obtaining a specific determination result are increased. can be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution of the specific effect of the second effect mode can be strongly expected.
In the gaming machine HB4, the determination means comprises first determination means for performing determination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first determination condition, and satisfaction of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on, and the second setting condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after at least the first game state is set is the number of times the first determination is performed. A gaming machine HB5 characterized by comprising a condition that is established based on a common predetermined specific number of times being reached in the first situation and the second situation.
According to the gaming machine HB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB4, the determining means includes the first determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determining condition, and the first determining means. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, and the second setting condition is at least the above-mentioned after the first game state is set. It is constituted by a condition that is established based on the number of execution times of the first determination reaching a predetermined specific number common to the first situation and the second situation.
As a result, in both the first situation and the second situation, the second setting condition is satisfied and the second game state is set when the number of executions of the first determination reaches the specific number. , there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel control that can make the possibility of a specific determination result different between the first situation and the second situation.

In the gaming machine HB5, the second setting condition is a first setting condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set reaches the specific number of times. and, the sum of the number of executions of the first discrimination and the number of executions of the second discrimination after the first game state is set is a number greater than the specific number of times, and the first situation and and a second setting condition that is established based on reaching a predetermined second number of times, which is the number of times common to the second situation.
According to the game machine HB6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB5, the second setting condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set is the specific number of times. and the total number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set is greater than the specific number of times and a second setting condition that is established based on a predetermined second number of times that is a large number of times and is common to the first situation and the second situation. Therefore, even though a common setting condition that does not depend on the first situation and the second situation is set as the second setting condition, the possibility of obtaining a specific determination result differs depending on the situation. There is an effect that novel control can be realized.
In the gaming machine HB5 or HB6, display means capable of displaying identification information; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means; and dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period; and a first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means; and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least a second dynamic display period, wherein the first situation is selected by the first dynamic display period by the period selection means. A gaming machine HB7 characterized in that the ratio of winning is higher than in the second situation.
According to the game machine HB7, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB5 or HB6, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination means are displayed dynamically on the display means. a first dynamic display means for displaying; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means; and the first dynamic display means dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information; and a first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means and a second dynamic display period that is longer than the first dynamic display period, and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods, wherein the first situation is the period selection A ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period by means is higher than in the second situation.

Thus, the length of the period required until the first set condition is substantially satisfied is determined by making the tendency of the dynamic display period selected by the period selection means different between the first situation and the second situation. can be made different, and the number of executions of judgment by the second judgment means that can be executed until the first set condition is satisfied can be made different.
In the gaming machine HB7, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information while the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information. A gaming machine HB8 characterized by being configured to be able to start.
According to the game machine HB8, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB7, the first dynamic display means displays the second identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the second identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination can be executed with high reliability.
In the gaming machine HB8, the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information while the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information. A gaming machine HB9 characterized by being configured to be able to start.

According to the gaming machine HB9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB8, the second dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. Since the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the first identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed with high reliability.
In any one of the game machines HB5 to HB9, the game machine HB10 is characterized in that the discrimination by the second discrimination means is constituted by discrimination with a higher degree of advantage than the discrimination by the first discrimination means.
According to the gaming machine HB10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HB5 to HB9, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is constituted by discrimination with a higher degree of advantage than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. , the game can be played with a strong expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be performed rather than the determination by the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic HC group> (executing an effect that prompts the player to adopt a game method that allows the holding of the advantageous side to accumulate after the advantageous state ends)
a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a first state setting means for setting a first state in which the degree of advantage is likely to be higher when the game ball is shot in the first direction rather than in the second direction; Second state setting for setting a second state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the second direction than in the first direction, based on the establishment of the setting condition 2. means and at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player the same game suggested by the first effect for a predetermined period in the second state. a second effect executing means for executing a second effect composed of: a game machine HC1;

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, by changing the game method (shooting direction of the game ball) that is advantageous for the player for each game state, it is possible to enjoy changing the game method according to the game state. There are also things that are configured so that they can be given to people.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game method corresponding to the game state is generally notified regardless of the game situation in each game state, so the degree of advantage may decrease depending on the situation. There is a problem that it is possible.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HC1, a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and a predetermined first a first state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball is more likely to be shot in the first direction than in the second direction based on the establishment of a set condition; , based on the fact that a predetermined second setting condition is satisfied in the first state, the advantage degree tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the second direction rather than in the first direction. a second state setting means for setting a second state; and a game ball being shot in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and a first effect executing means for executing a first effect configured to include at least an effect mode suggestible to the player; A second performance executing means for executing a second performance including at least a performance mode that can be suggested to a player.
As a result, in the second state where the degree of advantage tends to increase if the game ball is shot in the second direction, a novel presentation mode is realized that suggests to the player the game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine HC1, in the second state, while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the first direction rather than in the second direction. The gaming machine HC2 is characterized in that the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect at least while the specific condition is satisfied.
According to the gaming machine HC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC1, the second state is such that the game ball is moved in the first direction rather than in the second direction while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. It is constructed so that the degree of advantage tends to increase when the ball is shot, and the second performance execution means is constructed so as to be able to execute the second performance at least while the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, in the second state in which it is basically advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction, a specific condition is established and it becomes advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction by the second effect, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.
In the game machine HC2, the game machine HC3 is characterized in that the specific condition is constituted by a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second set condition.
According to the gaming machine HC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC2, the specific condition is a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second setting condition, so the first state is started. After that, the game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction can be continuously suggested by the first and second effects until the state shifts to the second state and the specific condition is not established. Therefore, even after the first state is terminated, the player can be made to think that the first state is in the first state until the specific condition is not established, so the first state continues longer than it actually is. There is an effect that it can make you think as if you were there.
In any one of the gaming machines HC1 to HC3, provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter and a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter. A first ball entering means, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and a game ball launched in the second direction A second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can be entered but is difficult for the game ball shot in the first direction to enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the above, and a player based on a predetermined specific determination result of either the first determination or the second determination. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the second state, wherein the first state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction rather than the second state. is more likely to be executed, and the second state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction during the predetermined period more than during a period other than the predetermined period. game machine HC4 characterized in that it is configured in a state in which is easy to execute.

According to the gaming machine HC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HC1 to HC3, the game ball launched in the second direction is positioned at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. a first ball entering means provided at a position where it is difficult to enter, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; a second ball-entering means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter and where the game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter; A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, and a predetermined specific determination between the first determination and the second determination and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, wherein the first state causes the game ball to move in the second direction more than the second state. It is configured in a state in which the determination of the first determination means is easily executed when the game ball is shot, and the second state is the predetermined period in which the game ball is moved in the second direction more than the period other than the predetermined period. It is configured in such a state that the discrimination by the first discriminating means can be easily executed when the missile is fired.
As a result, even in the second state where the degree of advantage is low, for a predetermined period of time, as in the first state, the determination by the first determination means can be easily performed. be.
In the gaming machine HC4, the first state is such that when game balls are continuously shot in the first direction, the shot game balls enter the first ball entering means at a first rate. In the second state, when game balls are continuously shot in the first direction, the shot game balls enter the first ball entering means at a rate equal to or higher than the first rate. The predetermined period is configured such that the period from when the determination by the first determination means is executed until the determination result of the determination is indicated is shorter than the period other than the predetermined period. A gaming machine HC5 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine HC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC4, the first state is that when game balls are continuously shot in the first direction, the shot game balls are shot at the first rate. It is configured to enter a ball into the first ball entering means, and the second state is that when the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction, the number of the launched game balls exceeds the first ratio. The ball enters the first ball entering means at a rate, and the predetermined period is the period from when the determination by the first determination means is performed to when the determination result of the determination is indicated. It is configured to be shorter than the period other than the period.

As a result, even in the second state, the game ball enters the first ball entering means at a rate equal to or higher than the first rate, so that the player who shoots the game ball in the first direction during execution of the second effect There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss.
In the gaming machine HC4 or HC5, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information for use in the first discrimination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means, and discrimination information acquisition means thereof and a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the method until the discrimination information is used for the first discrimination with a specific number of information as an upper limit, and the predetermined period is a discrimination of the specified number of information Determination of the first determination using the last determination information in the specific number of information after one of the determination information is used for the first determination while the information is stored in the determination information storage means. A gaming machine HC6 characterized by comprising at least a period until a result is shown.
According to the game machine HC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HC4 or HC5, the discrimination information for use in the first discrimination is acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. a discrimination information acquisition means; and a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, up to a specific number of pieces of information, until the discrimination information is used for the first discrimination, For a predetermined period of time, the last determination in the specific number of pieces of information after one piece of determination information is used for the first determination while the determination information of the specific number of pieces of information is stored in the determination information storage means. It is configured at least by a period until the determination result of the first determination using the information is indicated.
As a result, when the predetermined period is set, the execution of the first discrimination for the specific number of pieces of information is guaranteed, so there is an effect that the player can be pleased when the predetermined period is set. .

In the game machine HC6, the predetermined period is a period set based on the establishment of the second set condition.
According to the gaming machine HC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC6, the predetermined period is configured based on the establishment of the second setting condition, so that the second period having a low advantage degree There is an effect that it is possible to guarantee the execution of the first discrimination for at least a specific number of pieces of information immediately after setting the two states.
The gaming machine HC8, wherein the first discrimination is constituted by discrimination having a higher degree of advantage than the second discrimination in any one of the gaming machines HC4 to HC7.
According to the gaming machine HC8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HC4 to HC7, the first determination is made up of determinations with a higher degree of advantage than the second determination. You can increase your advantage. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the predetermined period is set.

<Characteristic HD group> (In the time saving state of 1, the subtraction timing of the number of time saving is variable under predetermined conditions)
counter means capable of storing a counter value; counter value setting means for setting a predetermined first counter value to the counter means based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition; Updating means for updating the counter value of the counter means during a period from when a condition is established until a second condition different from the first condition is established, and the counter value of the counter means is predetermined by the updating means. specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the second counter value being updated to the second counter value, wherein the updating means performs the a first update control for updating the counter value at a first timing until a second condition is satisfied; and a second update control for updating the counter value at a second timing different from the first timing. A gaming machine HD1 characterized in that the counter value can be updated by either one.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine sets a predetermined initial value to a predetermined counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of times the time is saved) at a predetermined timing, and updates the counter value until it reaches a specific value. exists (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for a more suitable counter value update method.
In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols (for example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol) are provided, and the variable display indicating the lottery result of each special symbol is displayed independently of each other. Some are configured to be executable. In a gaming machine with such specifications, in order to avoid overlapping execution of winning games with different special symbols, for example, when the variable display indicating one winning game ends, the variable display of other special symbols is performed. A control or the like that forcibly stops and displays a pattern different from the hit is adopted.

However, in such a game machine, the counter value of a predetermined counter is updated even if the variable display is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the winning pattern, so that the number of lotteries is substantially lost by one. There are problems that can occur.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HD1, there is provided a counter means capable of storing a counter value and a counter for setting a predetermined first counter value to the counter means based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. value setting means; updating means for updating the counter value of said counter means after a predetermined first condition is established until a second condition different from said first condition is established; specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the fact that the counter value of the counter means is updated to a predetermined second counter value by the means, wherein the updating means is a first update control for updating the counter value at a first timing between when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied; and the counter value is updated at a second timing different from the first timing. The counter value can be updated by either a second update control for updating the value.
As a result, a plurality of different timings can be set as timings for updating the counter value, so there is an effect that the counter value can be updated more favorably.
In the game machine HD1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game execution means for executing; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, wherein the counter value setting means is the game state setting means. The first counter value can be set for the counter means based on the setting of the second game state by the first condition, and the first condition is that the determination condition is established. The second condition is satisfied when the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, and the specific control changes the game state from the second game state to the first game state. The game machine HD2 is characterized by being configured by a control that changes the game state.

According to the game machine HD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HD1, the determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the above, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and a predetermined setting condition based on establishment game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; The counter value setting means is configured to be able to set the first counter value for the counter means based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means. The first condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied, the second condition is satisfied when the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, and the specific control is performed by It is constituted by control for changing the state from the second game state to the first game state.
As a result, the update timing of the counter means can be varied during the period from when the determination condition is satisfied until the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination is completed, thereby enabling the second game state. is set until it is changed to the first game state, the counter means can be preferably updated.
In the game machine HD2, the first timing is satisfied when the first condition is satisfied, and the second timing is satisfied when the second condition is satisfied. .
According to the gaming machine HD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD2, the first timing is met when the first condition is met, and the second timing is met when the second condition is met. It is a thing.

As a result, the update timing of the counter means can be set to either the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied or the timing at which the dynamic display of the identification information is completed according to the situation, so that the counter means can be updated more preferably. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine HD2 or HD3, the updating means can update the counter means at the first timing under a situation where the number of remaining updates of the counter means before changing to the first game state is one. The game machine HD4 is constructed so as to be able to update the counter means at the second timing in a situation where the number of remaining updates of the counter means is two or more.
According to the gaming machine HD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD2 or HD3, the updating means updates the counter means under the condition that the number of remaining updates of the counter means before changing to the first gaming state is one. The counter means can be updated at the first timing, and the counter means can be updated at the second timing when the number of remaining updates of the counter means is two or more.
As a result, the last update before changing to the first game state can be performed at the first timing, and other updates can be performed at the second timing, so that the counter means can be updated more favorably. There is

In any one of the game machines HD2 to HD4, the determination means comprises first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first dynamic display means. Display means, and second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the first dynamic display means The dynamic display means can start dynamic display of the first identification information while the dynamic display of the second identification information is being performed, and the second dynamic display means can start the dynamic display of the first identification information. The game machine HD5 is constructed such that dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed by target display means.
According to the gaming machine HD5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HD2 to HD4, the determination means includes a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and the first determination means. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, wherein the dynamic display means displays a first determination result of the first determination means. comprising at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination means; The first dynamic display means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information, and 2 The dynamic display means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information.
As a result, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information can be performed in parallel, so there is an effect that the determination by the determination means can be performed more efficiently.
In the gaming machine HD5, the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result. stopping displaying the first identification information with the deviation identification information for indicating the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result, irrespective of the dynamic display state of the first identification information. A gaming machine HD6 characterized by comprising display means.

According to the game machine HD6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HD5, dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result. When the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the time of termination, regardless of the state of the dynamic display of the first identification information, a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is obtained for the first identification information. Since the stop display means for stop-displaying with the discrepancy identification information for indicating is provided, even if the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means overlap and result in a specific determination result, the privilege game is duplicated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution by
In the gaming machine HD6, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball from the first position to the ball entry means. a second position at which it is difficult to enter the ball; and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and the stop display means displays the determination result of the second determination means. When the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the first determination result, the dynamic display of the first identification information A game machine HD7 characterized in that the first identification information can be stopped and displayed with the loss identification information for indicating the result of the loss determination regardless of the state of the target display.
According to the gaming machine HD7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD6, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position into which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the first position a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter into said ball entering means; variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the first determination result, and the stop display; The means dynamically displays the first identification information at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the first determination result. When the first identification information is present, the first identification information can be stop-displayed with the missing identification information indicating the result of the missing determination regardless of the dynamic display status of the first identification information.
Thereby, when the specific determination result and the first determination result overlap, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the overlapping execution of the privilege game and the variable game.

In the gaming machine HD6 or HD7, the update means is configured to be capable of suppressing updating of the counter means during dynamic display of the first identification information stopped and displayed by the stop display means with the missing identification information. A gaming machine HD8 characterized by:
According to the game machine HD8, in addition to the effects of the game machine HD6 or HD7, the updating means can be set by the counter means in the dynamic display of the first identification information stopped and displayed by the stop display means with the missing identification information. can be suppressed from being updated, it is possible to suppress updating of the counter means triggered by useless determination for the player stopped and displayed by the missing identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged.
<Characteristic HE group> (The degree of advantage tends to be higher when winning a small prize after winning a prize rather than winning a prize after winning a small prize)
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. execution means, game state setting means capable of setting a specific game state as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entrance of a game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. a second position that is difficult; and a variable means that is variable to a second position; variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a period of time, and the specific game state is the first game state after the first determination result is obtained. The degree of advantage is likely to be higher when a first situation that can be established when the determination result of 2 is established is established than when a second situation different from the first situation is established. A gaming machine HE1 characterized in that
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win, a win that is advantageous to the player is executed. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is a jackpot game in which the game state after the winning game is set to a game state corresponding to the winning type, and a game state after the winning game is completed. There is also a game provided with a small winning game in which the game state at the time of winning is maintained. However, even if the small winning game is executed, the game state is not changed regardless of the timing of execution, so it is relatively difficult to improve the interest by executing the small winning game.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HE1, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and a game based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result. bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to players; game state setting means capable of setting a specific game state as a game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed; a ball-entering means, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entering means, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball-entering means; a second position at which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means; and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and the specific game state is the first game state. The first situation that can be established when the second judgment result is obtained after the judgment result of 1 is established is better than the case where the second situation different from the first situation is established. Also, it is configured to easily increase the degree of advantage.
As a result, the player can strongly expect the second determination result after the first determination result has been obtained, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HE1, the second situation is constituted by a situation that can be established when the first determination result is obtained after the second determination result is obtained. HE2.
According to the gaming machine HE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HE1, the second situation is a situation that can be established when the first determination result is obtained after the second determination result is obtained. Since it is configured, in a specific game state, the degree of advantage varies depending on whether the second determination result is obtained before the first determination result is obtained or the second determination result is obtained later. Playability can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine HE1 or HE2, the determination means comprises a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of, and the specific game state is determined after the first determination result is obtained in the determination of the first determination means. The second determination result obtained in the second determination is the second determination result obtained in the second determination after the first determination result obtained in the determination by the first determination means. The game machine HE3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher than in the case where it is not.
According to the game machine HE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HE1 or HE2, the determination means includes first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and the first determination means. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the determination condition of (1), wherein the specific game state is determined by the first determination means. After the first determination result is obtained in the second determination, the second determination result is obtained after the first determination result is obtained in the determination by the first determination means. The degree of advantage is likely to be higher than when the second determination does not result in the second determination result.

As a result, when the discrimination by the first discriminating means results in the first discriminative result in a specific game state, the discrimination by the second discriminating means gives the second discriminative result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine HE3, display means capable of displaying identification information; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, wherein the second dynamic display means is equivalent to the first dynamic display means; The dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed by the When the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is started during the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result, the second determination result The gaming machine HE4 is characterized in that it is configured such that the degree of advantage tends to be higher than when the dynamic display of the corresponding second identification information is not started.
According to the game machine HE4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HE3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on the display means, second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the second dynamic The display means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, In the specific game state, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is started while the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result is being performed. In this case, the degree of advantage tends to be higher than in the case where the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is not started.
As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes one expect that the identification information corresponding to the second determination result is displayed by the dynamic display of the second identification information while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine HE4, while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, the second identification information indicating the second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means a stop control means for controlling the display means to stop and display first identification information indicating a discriminated result different from the first discriminated result and the second discriminated result; The means selects one of a plurality of game states including at least the specific game state and a first game state having a lower advantage than the specific game state as game states after execution of the privilege game is completed. The state can be set, and the determination of the first determination means is more likely than the determination of the second determination means. The game machine HE5 is characterized by being configured so that the setting ratio of the game state is high.
According to the game machine HE5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HE4, while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed by the display means. control so that the first identification information indicating the deviation determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means based on the stop display of the and the game state setting means selects the specific game state and a first game state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific game state as game states after the execution of the privilege game is completed. and one of a plurality of game states including at least , can be set, and the determination by the first determination means is more likely than the determination by the second determination means, when the first determination result is obtained Secondly, the setting ratio of the first game state is increased by the game state setting means.
As a result, even if the determination by the first determination means results in the first determination result and the possibility of setting the first gaming state with a low degree of advantage is high, the first identification indicating the first determination result is obtained. By stop-displaying the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result before the stop-display of the information, the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is rewritten to the deviation discrimination result instead of the first discrimination result. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the end of the advantageous specific game state and the transition to the first game state with a low degree of advantage. Therefore, when the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is the first discrimination result in the first game state, the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result is expected to be stop-displayed first. There is an effect that it is possible to realize sexuality.
In any one of the game machines HE3 to HE5, when the second determination is executed during the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result, the The game machine HE6 is characterized in that a determination result of 1 is suppressed.

According to the gaming machine HE6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HE3 to HE5, during the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result, the second When the determination is executed, the first determination result is suppressed. Therefore, after the first determination result is obtained in the determination of the first determination means, the second determination result is determined by the second determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the determination result is 1 and the privilege game is executed redundantly.
In any one of game machines HE4 to HE6, first dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time in dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means; a second dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time in dynamic display of the second identification information by the display means, wherein the first dynamic display time setting means is set in the specific game state , wherein a dynamic display period of a length that enables dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed multiple times is selected as the dynamic display time corresponding to the first determination result. A gaming machine HE7.
According to the gaming machine HE7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HE4 to HE6, the first dynamic display time for setting the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means display time setting means; and second dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time in dynamic display of the second identification information by the second dynamic display means, wherein the first dynamic display The time setting means sets a dynamic display period of a length that allows the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed multiple times as the dynamic display time corresponding to the first determination result in the specific game state. configured to select.
As a result, the dynamic display of the second identification information during the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information can provide a plurality of opportunities for static display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination result. be.

The game machine HE8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines HE1 to HE7, the specific game state can be continued until the next privilege game is executed.
According to the gaming machine HE8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HE1 to HE7, the specific game state is configured to be able to continue until the privilege game is executed next time. By entering the state, the next privilege game is also substantially determined. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific game state will be set.
In any one of the game machines HE1 to HE8, the variable game is configured such that the game state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is maintained even after the variable game is finished. game machine HE9.
According to the game machine HE9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines HE1 to HE8, the variable game maintains the game state at the time when the second determination result is obtained even after the variable game ends. Since it is configured in such a manner, even if the second determination result is obtained in a specific game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the transition to another game state.

<Characteristic HF group> (The other special figure switches between a state where it is easy to turn and a state where it is difficult to turn according to the number of fluctuations of one special figure)
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and when either the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination becomes a predetermined specific determination result, Privilege game execution means for executing an advantageous privilege game, first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination, and second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination. display means capable of displaying at least; first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means based on execution of the first determination; and the second determination. second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means based on the execution; a game state setting means for setting a specific game state; and under a situation in which a predetermined specific condition is established in the specific game state, the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information is higher than the frequency of the dynamic display of the second identification information. A first control in which the frequency of dynamic display of identification information tends to be higher is executed, and under a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific game state, the first identification information is displayed rather than the first control. and control means capable of executing a second control in which the frequency of dynamic display of the game machine HF1 is likely to increase.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are those that are provided with a plurality of starting winning openings and execute a lottery of different special symbols according to the type of starting winning opening that detects winning. In such a gaming machine, the types of starting winning holes that are easy to win are made different for each game state, thereby making the degree of advantage different for each game state, thereby improving interest.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the types of special symbols that are likely to be drawn for each game state are fixed, so if the same game state continues for a long time, the game becomes monotonous. there is a point
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HF1, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and a second determination means different from the first determination condition. a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; and a specific determination result in which either the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination is predetermined. Based on the result, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination, and the determination result of the second determination a display means capable of displaying at least second identification information for indicating a; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means based on execution of the second determination; and a predetermined specific setting condition. game state setting means for setting a predetermined specific game state based on the fact that the first identification information is established; executing the first control in which the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information tends to be higher than the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information, and under a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific game state, a control means capable of executing a second control in which the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information tends to be higher than that of the first control.
As a result, the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information can be varied depending on whether or not the specific condition is established, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine HF1, the control means executes the first control until the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed a predetermined specific number of times after the specific game state is set, The game machine HF2 is characterized in that the second control can be executed after the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed a specific number of times.

According to the game machine HF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HF1, the control means executes dynamic display of the first identification information a predetermined specific number of times after the specific game state is set. Since it is configured to be able to execute the second control after the first control is executed until the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed the specific number of times, a specific game state is set, the first control and the second control are switched according to the number of dynamic displays of the first identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a specific game state.
In the game machine HF2, the specific setting condition is composed of at least a first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the specific number of times is When the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the first set condition, it is set to a predetermined first specific number of times, and the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the second set condition. is set, a second specific number of times greater than the first specific number of times is set.
According to the gaming machine HF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF2, the specific setting conditions are composed of at least a first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition. The specific number of times is set to a predetermined first specific number of times when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and the second setting is performed. It is configured to set a second specific number of times, which is greater than the first specific number of times, when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the condition.
As a result, the number of times the first control is executed varies depending on the specific game state setting trigger, so there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the specific game state setting trigger.

In the gaming machine HF3, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. The first setting condition is established based on the completion of the execution of the first privilege game, and the second setting condition is the second privilege game game machine HF4 characterized in that it is established based on the completion of the execution of .
According to the gaming machine HF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF3, a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game are provided as the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means. and a type determining means for determining one type out of a plurality of at least, wherein the first setting condition is established based on the completion of execution of the first privilege game, and the first The setting condition 2 is established based on the completion of execution of the second privilege game.
As a result, the degree of advantage in a specific game state set according to the type of privilege game can be varied, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of privilege game.
In any one of game machines HF1 to HF4, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means is provided, and the second dynamic display is provided. The means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the first control comprises: 2. A game machine HF5 characterized in that it is constituted by a control that makes it easier to set a longer dynamic display period by said dynamic display period setting means than said second control.

According to the game machine HF5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines HF1 to HF4, a dynamic display period for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means A setting means is provided, and the second dynamic display means can start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information. The first control is configured to make it easier for the dynamic display period setting means to set a longer dynamic display period than the second control.
As a result, while the first control is being executed, a long dynamic display period is likely to be selected as the dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information, thereby increasing the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information. can be increased.
In a game machine HF5, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a game ball difficult to enter the ball entry means. a second position, a variable means that can be varied, and one of the determination result of the first determination and the determination result of the second determination is a first determination result different from the specific determination result. Based on this, variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and dynamic display of the first identification information is performed. when the second identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed while the first identification information is displayed according to the specific determination result a stop display means for stop-displaying with the first identification information indicating a discrepancy determination result different from the first discrimination result.
According to the gaming machine HF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF5, a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entering means, and the entering means a second position at which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the means; variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a first determination result different from the result; When the second identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, regardless of the dynamic display of the first identification information, and static display means for statically displaying the first identification information with the first identification information indicating a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result and the first determination result.

As a result, when the second identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information ends with the determination result. In some circumstances, the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification may become high. Therefore, while the first control is being executed, there is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that strongly expect that the determination result of the second determination will not be the first determination result.
In the game machine HF6, when the second determination performed while the first control is being executed results in the first determination result, the first determination result is displayed. 2. A game machine HF7 characterized by comprising a first effect executing means for executing a first effect during a dynamic display period in dynamic display of identification information.
According to the gaming machine HF7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF6, when the second determination performed while the first control is executed results in the first determination result, the Since the first effect executing means is provided for executing the first effect during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the first determination result, when the first effect is executed It is possible to make the player understand that the first determination result has been obtained. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the first determination result is obtained without paying attention to the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.
In the gaming machine HF7, when the second determination performed while the first control is performed results in the out-of-order determination result, the second identification information for indicating the out-of-line determination result A gaming machine HF8 comprising a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect including a specific effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first effect during a dynamic display period in dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine HF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF7, when the second determination performed while the first control is executed results in the deviation determination result, the deviation determination a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect including a specific effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first effect during the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the result Since it is provided, it is possible to strongly expect that the second effect is being executed when the specific effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic HG group> (The state of the electric sapo is common, but the execution frequency of the advantageous special figure 2 lottery is different from each other.)
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball; a first determining means capable of executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; second ball entry means different from the ball means; second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on whether one of the discrimination result and the discrimination result of the second discrimination becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result; 2 Displacement means capable of displacing between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a predetermined displacement condition. a displacement control means for displacing the displacement means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first state and the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition and a state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a second state in which the ease with which a game ball enters the second ball entering means is different, and the game ball is set to the first state. A first game state and a second game state in which the execution frequency of determination by the first determination means is likely to be higher than in the first game state are provided as game states to be played. Game machine HG1.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are those that are provided with a plurality of starting winning openings and execute a lottery of different special symbols according to the type of starting winning opening that detects winning. In such a gaming machine, by switching between a non-time-saving state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a specific start winning opening and a time-saving state in which a game ball is easy to enter into a specific starting winning opening, There are also games that are designed to be more interesting by differentiating the types of starting prize-winning openings that are easy to win.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn depending on whether it is in a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state is fixed, so if the same state continues for a long time, the game is monotonous.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HG1, it is possible to execute the first discrimination based on the first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the first ball entering means. a first discriminating means, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a second discrimination capable of executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means 2. A privilege game advantageous to a player, based on the judgment means and either the judgment result of the first judgment or the judgment result of the second judgment becoming a predetermined specific judgment result. a first position where a game ball can be entered into the second ball entry means; and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. displacement means capable of displacement; displacement control means for displacing the displacement means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a predetermined displacement condition; and displacement control means based on establishment of a predetermined set condition. state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the ease with which a game ball enters the second ball entering means is different from the first state; and, as game states set in the first state, a first game state, and a second game state in which the execution frequency of the determination by the first determination means is likely to be higher than in the first game state; is provided at least.
As a result, a novel control is realized in which the execution frequency of discrimination by the first discriminating means varies between the first game state and the second game state in which the ease with which the game ball enters the second ball entering means is common. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine HG1, the game machine HG2 is characterized in that the second determination is made up of a determination with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination.
According to the gaming machine HG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HG1, the second determination is made up of determinations with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination. In the gaming state, there is an effect that the execution frequency of the first determination, which has a low degree of advantage, can be reduced.
In the game machine HG1 or HG2, the game machine HG3 is characterized in that the first game state is constituted by a game state in which the probability of the specific determination result is higher than that of the second game state.
According to the game machine HG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HG1 or HG2, the first game state is configured in a game state with a higher probability of the specific determination result than the second game state. Therefore, in the first game state, the execution frequency of discrimination by the first discrimination means having a low degree of advantage is relatively high, but on the other hand, there is a game characteristic in which the probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result is high, and in the second game state, the degree of advantage is obtained. Although the execution frequency of discrimination by the first discriminating means having a low value is relatively low, the probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result is low. Therefore, even in the game state set to the same first state, the game characteristics can be reversed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines HG1 to HG3, a display means capable of displaying identification information and a first dynamic display for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means on the display means means, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display, wherein the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while the second identification information is in the second game state, and the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period to be longer in the second game state than in the first game state. The game machine HG4 is characterized in that it is configured so that the display period can be easily set.
According to the game machine HG4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines HG1 to HG3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means are displayed. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying in the means; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means; dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information by the dynamic display means, wherein the second dynamic display means causes the first dynamic display means to Dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured to set the dynamic display period before the first game state. The second game state is configured such that it is easier to set a long dynamic display period.
As a result, by varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information for each game state, the motion of the second identification information that can be executed while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed is performed. There is an effect that the frequency of execution of the first discrimination can be varied by varying the number of target display times.
In any one of the game machines HG1 to HG4, after the first game state is set, the sum of the number of executions of the first discrimination and the number of executions of the second discrimination is a predetermined first number. A game machine HG5 characterized by comprising a second game state setting means for setting the second game state based on the occurrence of the game.

According to the gaming machine HG5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG4, after the first game state is set, the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination are determined. Since the second game state setting means for setting the second game state is provided based on the total of becoming a predetermined first number of times, the first game with a high execution frequency of determination by the first determination means A state and a second game state in which the execution frequency of determination by the first determination means is low are set continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine HG5, after the second game state is set, the sum of the number of executions of the first discrimination and the number of executions of the second discrimination reaches a predetermined second number. A gaming machine HG6 characterized by comprising third game state setting means for setting a third game state to be set to the second state based on the above.
According to the game machine HG6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HG5, after the second game state is set, the sum of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination is set in advance. Since the third game state setting means is provided for setting the third game state to be set to the second state on the basis of reaching the predetermined second number of times, the first game state, the second game state and the third game state are provided. 3 game states are continuously set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
In any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG6, the second state is characterized in that the game ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than the first state. Game machine HG7.

According to the gaming machine HG7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG6, in the second state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than in the first state. Therefore, the first determination means discriminates between the first game state and the second game state in which the first state in which the game ball is relatively easy to enter the second ball entering means is set. can be run at different frequencies. Therefore, there is an effect that the game characteristics can be varied in a relatively advantageous game state.
<Characteristic HH group> (variable continuation rate in a specific game state)
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition; A first game state setting means capable of setting a game state; 2 game state setting means, and a game in which a first control is performed in which a ratio of satisfaction of the specific execution condition between the setting of the first game state and the establishment of the specific condition is a first ratio; and a second control in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is established between when the first gaming state is set and until the specific condition is established is a second rate different from the first rate. and setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game to be played.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of termination conditions for a specific game state with a high degree of advantage (for example, a short-time game state) are provided, and the specific game state is set. By setting end conditions, even in the same specific game state, there are some games in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting trigger.
However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to predefine end conditions for each setting opportunity in a storage device such as a ROM, so the memory capacity of the gaming machine increases as the number of ending conditions increases. There is a problem.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HH1, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition, and a a first game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the second game state; and the first rate is the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied after the first game state is set until the specific condition is satisfied. and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a second control is performed with a different second ratio.
As a result, even in the same first game state, the possibility of the privilege game being executed can be changed depending on whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed, so that the player's game There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

The gaming machine HH2 is characterized in that the first control in the gaming machine HH1 is configured such that the specific condition is more likely to be established than the second control.
According to the gaming machine HH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HH1, the first control is configured to make the specific condition more likely to be established than the second control, so the specific condition is established. There is an effect that the possibility that a specific execution condition is satisfied before is made different.
In the game machine HH1 or HH2, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. wherein the specific execution condition is determined in advance by either the result of the first determination or the result of the second determination and the specific condition is the number of executions of the first determination at least after the first game state is set. A gaming machine HH3 characterized in that it is constituted by a condition that is established based on the number of times reaching a predetermined specific number of times.
According to the game machine HH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HH1 or HH2, the first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition; and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, wherein the specific execution condition is the determination result of the first determination and the second determination. It is composed of a condition that is established based on whether one of the determination result of determination and the determination result has become a predetermined specific determination result, and the specific condition is at least the first game state is set. It is constituted by a condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first discrimination after the above-mentioned determination reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

As a result, the first game state is maintained in a range where the number of executions of the first discrimination is less than the specified number of times, so the effect is that it is possible to guarantee the execution of the first discrimination for the specified number of times in the first game state. There is
In the gaming machine HH3, the first control is executed during a period from when the first game state is set to when the first determination is performed the specific number of times, rather than the second control. The game machine HH4 is characterized in that the game machine HH4 is characterized in that the number of executions of determination 2 is likely to be small.
According to the game machine HH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HH3, the first control executes the first determination the specific number of times after the first game state is set, rather than the second control. Since the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set tends to be a small number of times, the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set. is different, it is possible to substantially differ the ratio of establishment of a specific execution condition.
In the gaming machine HH3 or HH4, the specific conditions include a first specific condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first determination after the setting of the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times; The second established based on the fact that the sum of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set becomes the first number of times greater than the specific number of times and 2 specific conditions, and the first control and the second control are configured so that the first specific condition is likely to be satisfied before the second specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine HH5 is characterized in that the period required for the first specific condition to be satisfied is likely to be shorter in the first control than in the second control.

According to the game machine HH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HH3 or HH4, the specific condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set becomes the specific number of times. A first specific condition that is established based on a total of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set is greater than the specific number of times and a second specific condition that is established based on the number of times, and the first control and the second control are performed before the second specific condition is established. It is configured such that the specific condition is easily established, and the first control is configured such that the period required until the first specific condition is established is likely to be shorter than the second control.
As a result, by varying the length of the period required until the first specific condition is satisfied, the number of times the second determination is performed is varied, thereby varying the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Characteristic HI Group> (Performs an effect indicating the possibility of winning a jackpot until the game state of 1 ends)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A game execution means, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, and a second setting predetermined in the first game state. Second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a condition; and establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first game state. A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on and a first effect mode is determined in the case of a predetermined first situation as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. and rendering mode determining means capable of determining a second rendering mode when the second situation is more likely to result in the specific determination result than the first situation. A game machine HI1 to play.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is also one that is configured to be able to execute an interest effect indicating the degree of expectation that a winning game will be executed within a predetermined period (for example, until all the reserved balls are consumed). There exist not only variable displays during execution, but also those constructed so as to continuously give a feeling of anticipation that a winning game will be executed over a plurality of variable displays.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since it is possible to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that a winning game will be executed only for a relatively small number of variable displays, it is difficult to improve interest. there were.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HI1, a determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determining condition, and based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition; second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the game state; A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a specific predetermined execution condition, and a predetermined first situation as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. , and a second performance mode can be determined in a second situation in which the possibility of the specific determination result is higher than in the first situation. and mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to show the player the possibility of obtaining a specific determination result during the first game state according to the effect mode of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .
The gaming machine HI1 is characterized in that the first situation is a situation in which the possibility of obtaining the specific determination result before the second setting condition is satisfied is lower than that in the second situation. Game machine HI2.
According to the game machine HI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HI1, the first situation is more likely than the second situation to become the specific determination result before the second set condition is satisfied. Since the probability is low, it is possible to suggest the possibility of obtaining a specific determination result before the second set condition is satisfied by the effect mode of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine HI1 or HI2, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect of the second effect mode based on the fact that the second situation occurs during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode. A gaming machine HI3 characterized by being configured to be able to execute

According to the game machine HI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HI1 or HI2, the specific effect executing means is based on the fact that the second situation occurs during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode. Since it is configured to be able to execute the specific performance of the second performance mode, when the situation changes in the first game state, the performance mode of the specific performance can be switched according to the changed situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an accurate situation can be shown to the player by the specific effect.
In any one of the game machines HI1 to HI3, a first effect executing means for executing a predetermined first effect during execution of the privilege game, and the effect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means. As a mode, when the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the privilege game being executed is finished, the third performance mode corresponding to the first performance mode is determined. an effect mode determining means configured to determine a fourth effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set; A gaming machine HI4 characterized by comprising:
According to the gaming machine HI4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HI1 to HI3, a first attraction execution means for executing a predetermined first attraction during execution of the privilege game, and the execution of the first attraction. When the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the privilege game being executed is finished as the effect mode of the first effect executed by the means. It is possible to determine a third performance mode corresponding to the performance mode, and to determine a fourth performance mode corresponding to the second performance mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set. and a production mode determining means configured as follows.
As a result, during execution of the privilege game, the possibility of a specific determination result in the first game state after the completion of the privilege game can be shown to the player by the first effect. There is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines HI1 to HI4, the second situation is different from the first situation in that the specific determination result is not obtained after the first game state is set, and the second setting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine HI5 is characterized in that the game machine HI5 is constructed in a situation in which the number of determinations by the determination means executed until the condition is satisfied tends to increase.
According to the game machine HI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines HI1 to HI4, the second situation is more likely to cause the specific discrimination after the first game state is set than the first situation. Since it is configured in a situation in which the number of judgments by the judgment means executed until the second set condition is satisfied without producing a result tends to increase, the second situation is different from the first situation. Since the number of determinations by the determination means is greater than that of the conventional method, it is possible to obtain more chances of obtaining a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution of the specific effect of the second effect mode can be strongly expected.
<Characteristic HJ Group> (executes an effect that prompts the player to adopt a game method that allows the holding of the advantageous side to accumulate after the end of the advantageous state)
a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a first state setting means for setting a first state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the first direction than in the second direction; A second state setting for setting a second state in which the degree of advantage when the game ball is shot in the first direction is likely to be lower than the first state based on the establishment of the setting condition 2. means and at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player the same game suggested by the first effect for a predetermined period in the second state. A gaming machine HJ1 characterized by comprising a second effect execution means for executing a second effect composed of:
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, by changing the game method (shooting direction of the game ball) that is advantageous for the player for each game state, it is possible to enjoy changing the game method according to the game state. There are also things that are configured so that they can be given to people.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game method corresponding to the game state is generally notified regardless of the game situation in each game state, so the degree of advantage may decrease depending on the situation. There is a problem that it is possible.
On the other hand, according to the game machine HJ1, a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and a predetermined first a first state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball is more likely to be shot in the first direction than in the second direction based on the establishment of a set condition; , based on the establishment of a second set condition different from the first set condition, the advantage degree when the game ball is shot in the first direction tends to be lower than the first state. a second state setting means for setting a second state; and a game ball being shot in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and a first effect executing means for executing a first effect configured to include at least an effect mode suggestible to the player; A second performance executing means for executing a second performance including at least a performance mode that can be suggested to a player.

Thus, in the second state where even if the game ball is shot in the first direction, the degree of advantage is not as high as in the first state, a novel performance is suggested to the player for a game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction. Since the mode can be realized, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine HJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine HJ1, the second set condition is a condition that can be established in the first state.
According to the gaming machine HJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HJ1, the second setting condition is a condition that can be satisfied in the first state. Even after the state is set, the same game as the game suggested by the first effect can be suggested. Therefore, it can be made to think that the 1st state is continuing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine HJ1 or HJ2, in the second state, while a predetermined specific condition is established, it is more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction. The game machine HJ3 is characterized in that the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect at least while the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine HJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HJ1 or HJ2, the second state is such that the game is played in the first direction rather than the second direction while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect at least while the specific condition is satisfied. there is
As a result, in the second state in which it is basically advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction, a specific condition is established and it becomes advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction by the second effect, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.
The game machine HJ4 is characterized in that, in the game machine HJ3, the specific condition is constituted by a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second setting condition.
According to the game machine HJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HJ3, the specific condition is a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second setting condition, so the first state is started. After that, the game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction can be continuously suggested by the first and second effects until the state shifts to the second state and the specific condition is not established. Therefore, even after the first state is terminated, the player can be made to think that the first state is in the first state until the specific condition is not established, so the first state continues longer than it actually is. There is an effect that it can make you think as if you were there.

In any one of the game machines HJ1 to HJ4, provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter and a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter. A first ball entering means, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and a game ball launched in the second direction A second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can be entered but is difficult for the game ball shot in the first direction to enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the above, and a player based on a predetermined specific determination result of either the first determination or the second determination. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the second state, wherein the first state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction rather than the second state. is more likely to be executed, and the second state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction during the predetermined period more than during a period other than the predetermined period. A game machine HJ5 characterized in that it is configured in a state in which is easy to execute.
According to the game machine HJ5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines HJ1 to HJ4, the game ball launched in the second direction is located at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. a first ball entering means provided at a position where it is difficult to enter, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; a second ball-entering means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter and where the game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter; A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, and a predetermined specific determination between the first determination and the second determination and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, wherein the first state causes the game ball to move in the second direction more than the second state. It is configured in a state in which the determination of the first determination means is easily executed when the game ball is shot, and the second state is the predetermined period in which the game ball is moved in the second direction more than in the period other than the predetermined period. It is configured in such a state that the discrimination by the first discriminating means can be easily executed when the missile is fired.
As a result, even in the second state where the degree of advantage is low, for a predetermined period of time, as in the first state, the discrimination by the first discriminating means can be easily executed. be.
<5076 Series>
<Characteristic IA group>
A game machine having variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance that varies a performance mode, comprising a determining means capable of determining the number of times the performance mode can be varied in the variable performance, The gaming machine IA1 is characterized in that the gaming machine has additional performance execution means capable of executing an additional performance for varying the performance mode in a specific mode.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode is changed by executing an operation effect a plurality of times to change the effect mode based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. There are some that can execute a period effect that is changed in stages. Then, a gaming machine has been proposed in which, as a result of the effect of the period effect, a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the effect mode is changed to a specific stage (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233171. ). However, in conventional gaming machines, only the effect result of the period effect is determined in advance, and the effect result of each operation effect is not predetermined. is not used, the performance mode is changed up to the stage corresponding to the performance result of the period performance, and the performance result of the period performance is deteriorated. Also, the effect result of each operation effect is determined in advance, and regardless of the contents of the operation to the operation means during each operation effect, when each operation effect ends, the stage corresponding to the effect result determined in advance is reached. A gaming machine configured to change the mode of presentation has also been proposed. However, in such a game machine, regardless of the operation content of the operation means during the operation effect, the effect result determined in advance is displayed as the effect result of the operation effect, so the player tries to operate the operation means. There was a problem that the desire to do so would decrease. Furthermore, since a predetermined effect result is always displayed for each operation effect, in order to execute the period effect in a variety of effect modes, it is necessary to change the effect result of each operation effect. effect data must be prepared in advance, and there is a problem that the amount of effect data for executing the period effect increases. This is done to solve the problems exemplified above, and each operation effect is executed with a different effect result according to the operation content of the operation means in each operation effect executed in the period effect. To provide a game machine capable of enhancing the desire of a player to operate an operation means during an operation performance and enhancing the interest in a game of a player. In addition, by making it possible to execute a period performance with a richer variety than the types of the performance mode of the period performance determined in advance, the performance effect of the period performance is enhanced, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that
According to the game machine IA1, even after the variable performance is executed for the determined number of times, the additional performance for varying the performance mode in a specific mode is executed, so that the performance is varied beyond the set number of times. Thus, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine IA1, acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of discrimination by the discrimination means on a display means; a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when displayed; The game machine IA2 is characterized in that the performance mode can be changed to a predetermined notification mode when the determining means determines that the specific determination result is obtained.
According to the gaming machine IA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IA1, the effect mode is changed to the notification mode, so that the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained. There is an effect that it can make people interested.

The game machine IA1 or IA2 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and the performance mode can be varied based on the operation of the operation means. Characterized game machine IA3.
According to the game machine IA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IA1 or IA2, the contents can be varied depending on the timing of the player's operation. has the effect of being able to
In any one of the game machines IA1 to IA3, the variation of the effect mode is executed in a plurality of stages, and the additional effect executing means performs the determined effect after the effect variation in the number of times is completed. A game machine IA4 characterized in that the additional effect is executed based on the number of times the game is played and information on the variable timing of the plurality of stages.
According to the game machine IA4, in any one of the game machines IA1 to IA3, the additional effect is executed based on the number of times and the information on the variable timing of a plurality of stages. There is an effect that the performance can be executed.

<Characteristic IB group>
A performance executing means capable of executing a performance, a performance type determining means capable of determining the type of the performance to be executed by the performance executing means, and changing the type of the performance to a different type based on the establishment of a transition condition. A game machine having a performance type transition means capable of transitioning, a state setting means capable of setting a first state and a second state in which the transition condition is less likely to be established than in the first state. 3, the gaming machine is characterized in that, in the state where the second state is set, the transition condition can be established when a granting condition for granting a privilege advantageous to the player is established. Gaming machine IB1.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured so that a plurality of performance stages are switched, and a performance mode of a variable performance for showing the result of a jackpot lottery is determined corresponding to the set performance stage. Therefore, a gaming machine has been proposed that can suppress monotonous variation effects (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-233171). In addition, the game machine is configured so that the performance stage is automatically switched when the transition condition of the performance stage is established by executing the jackpot lottery for a predetermined number of times, and the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. is also proposed. However, in a conventional game machine that automatically switches the production stage, the production stage is switched regardless of the player's intention. There is a problem that the player's motivation to play is remarkably lowered when the game is switched to the stage. In addition, when the player is configured to be able to arbitrarily set the production stage, there will be players who play the game only in a specific production stage without experiencing all the production stages. However, there has been a problem that a situation occurs in which the player cannot sufficiently provide the effect content that the player has in advance. This is done in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and even if the production stage is fixed, it should be possible to switch to another production stage so that the player's desire to play does not decrease. To improve a player's interest in a game by providing the player with various performances while suppressing the player's desire to play.
According to the gaming machine IB1, the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be varied by the state setting means, and when the transition condition is satisfied in a state in which the second state in which the transition condition is unlikely to be satisfied is set, Since a privilege is provided, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.
In the gaming machine IB1, it is possible to distinguish between an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means. discrimination means, benefit giving means capable of granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and transition condition setting means for setting the transition condition. and the transition condition setting means can set at least a first transition condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the determination performed by the determination means reaches a specific number of times, and stored in the storage means It has a subsequent performance executing means capable of executing a transition suggestive performance for indicating that the first transition condition can be satisfied before the first transition condition is satisfied based on the stored information. A gaming machine IB2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine IB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the transition suggesting effect can be executed before the first transition condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player can easily predict the timing when the transition condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine IB1 or IB2, characterized in that it has operation means operable by the player, and the state setting means can set the second state based on the operation of the operation means. Machine IB3.
According to the gaming machine IB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IB1 or IB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can set the second state at any timing, the player is allowed to select and execute a game in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the transition condition is satisfied in the state in which the second state is set. There is an effect that it can be made easier.
In the gaming machine IB3, when the second state is set while the transition suggesting effect is being executed, the result of the determination by the determining means satisfying the first transition condition is the specific The gaming machine IB4 is characterized in that the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result is obtained, and the first transition condition is not satisfied when the determination result is not the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine IB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IB3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second state is set while the transition suggestive effect is being executed, the first transition condition is established and the effect is produced only when the determination result of the target determining means is a specific determination result. can be of different types. That is, even when the second state is set, the transition suggesting effect can be executed as it is, so there is an effect that the processing load for controlling the effect to be executed can be reduced.
<Characteristic IC group>
acquisition means capable of acquiring information; storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means; display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result; and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect for indicating predetermined game information, wherein the specific effect is executed when the specific condition is satisfied. The game machine IC1 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than when is not established.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a winning lottery of the game is executed, and a winning game is played based on the winning lottery result. is executed. The execution rights for executing the winning lottery of the game can be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the execution rights that can be won are included in the execution rights that are reserved and stored during the winning game. A gaming machine has been proposed that can execute a continuous winning effect that notifies the player of the next winning in advance by using the winning game effect that is executed during the winning game (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
In such a conventional type game machine, when the execution right to win a winning prize is reserved and stored during a winning game, if the continuous winning performance is executed with a high probability, the continuous winning performance is performed during the winning game. is not executed, there is a high possibility that the reserved execution rights do not include execution rights that can be won. As in the above example, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the fact that the ease with which the effects are executed is always the same. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.

According to the game machine IC1, since the specific effect is easily executed when the specific condition is established, the frequency of informing the game information to the player can be changed, and the effect of improving the interest of the game is obtained. .
The game machine IC1 has preliminary determination means capable of executing preliminary determination based on information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed, and the specific effect execution means is The specific performance can be executed when the preliminary determination means determines that the information determined as the specific determination result is stored, and the specific condition is that the specific performance is executed. The game machine IC2 is characterized in that it is established by
According to the gaming machine IC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IC1, the specific performance is executed to satisfy the specific condition. There is an effect that the player can enjoy the continuous performance of the specific performance.
A game machine IC3 characterized in that, in the game machine IC1 or IC2, it is possible to set a period during which the privilege game is executed based on the result of the determination using the information that triggered the execution of the specific effect. .

According to the game machine IC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to set the execution period of the privilege game whose execution is notified in advance by the specific performance, when the specific performance is once executed, the specific performance can be easily executed continuously. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to continuously execute the specific effect.
In any one of the game machines IC1 to IC3, a privilege performance executing means capable of executing a privilege performance for indicating the contents of the privilege game being executed by using the period during which the privilege game is being executed, and executing the privilege performance. and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode of the privilege performance to be executed by means, wherein the performance mode determination means determines, when the specific performance is continuously executed, the performance mode that was executed last time. The game machine IC4 is characterized in that it is possible to determine a performance mode that takes over the contents of the privilege game.
According to the gaming machine IC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines IC1 to IC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific performance is continuously executed, the content of the privilege performance can be determined across a plurality of privilege games, so that the player is caused to continuously execute the specific performance. There is an effect that the game can be played more motivatedly.
In the gaming machine IC4, the privilege game executing means selects, as the privilege game, a first privilege game or a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A game can be executed, and the content of the privilege performance executed by the privilege performance executing means is more advantageous to the player than the content of the privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game. A gaming machine IC5 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when the game machine IC5 becomes.

According to the gaming machine IC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IC4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when specific effects are successively executed and the content of the privilege effect obtained by accumulating the contents of a plurality of privilege games becomes more advantageous to the player than the content of the second privilege game of one time, a special effect is obtained. Since the performance is executed, there is an effect that the game can be motivated to perform the game in order to execute the special performance.
<Feature ID group>
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specified area, and a game ball capable of entering the specified area. In a gaming machine having a notification execution means capable of executing guidance notification for shooting a game ball into an area, the gaming machine starts an effect to be executed next after the guidance notification is executed. A game machine ID1 characterized in that it is possible to vary the period until the game is played.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games. It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.
According to the game machine ID 1, since the period from the execution of the guidance notification to the start of the next performance can be varied, the guidance notification can be executed in an optimum period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In gaming machine ID 1, the next effect is a effect for indicating that a game ball has entered the specific area when the game ball has entered the specific area, and a first period has elapsed since the guidance notification was executed. Until now, the game machine ID2 is characterized in that the execution of the next effect is restricted even when a game ball enters the specific area.
According to the gaming machine ID2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ID1, even if the game ball enters the specific area immediately after the guidance notification is executed, the guidance notification ends during the first period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the end of the guidance notification without the player being able to grasp the contents of the guidance notification.
In the gaming machine ID2, when the first period has passed since the guidance notification was executed, the guidance notification is terminated based on the game ball entering the specific area. Gaming machine ID3.
According to the gaming machine ID3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ID2, when the first period elapses, the guidance notification ends based on the game ball entering the specific area, so that the player can On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of guidance information for an unnecessarily long period.

The game machine ID2 or ID3 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the remaining period from when the game ball enters the specific area until the first period elapses. gaming machine ID 4.
According to the gaming machine ID4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ID2 or ID3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can be motivated to enter the game ball into the specific area in order to execute the specific effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved. be.
<Characteristic IE group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and dynamic display by the dynamic display means dynamic display period group storage means for pre-storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which different dynamic display periods are defined in advance as dynamic display periods of the identification information to be displayed; and the dynamic display period groups. dynamic display period group determination means capable of determining one dynamic display period group from among the dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means; and dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the identification information using the dynamic display period group, wherein the dynamic display period group determination means is determined by the determination means When a transition condition is satisfied based on the information about the executed determination, the dynamic display period group different from the currently determined dynamic display period group can be determined, and the dynamic display period group is defined in advance as information indicating the dynamic display period group of the transition destination.
Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game is played at a time, and a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow a player who is playing a game for a long time in the same game state to play a game without getting bored (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . Specifically, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, every time the special symbol variation is executed 100 times, the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern is switched. There is a configuration in which a variation pattern (variation time) can be set. According to the conventional gaming machine configured in this manner, even if the same game state continues for a long time, it is possible to set a completely different variation pattern according to the number of executions of the special symbol variation. , It was possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game, but as a regulation content (variation pattern selection scenario) for switching the variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol variation is executed, a huge amount of It is necessary to define data corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations, and there is a risk of increasing the processing load of the gaming machine. Also, if the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to are completely associated, the player will easily predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. , It is desirable to diversify the combination of the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to, and to make it difficult for the player to predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. When such a configuration is used, there is a risk that the contents of the variation pattern selection scenario will become more diversified and that the processing load of the gaming machine will increase. This is done to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is possible to determine a variation pattern by referring to a different variation pattern table based on the number of executions of special symbol variation without increasing the processing load of the gaming machine. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by

According to the gaming machine IE1, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the determination executed in a state in which one dynamic display period group is determined by the dynamic display period group determination, the predefined dynamic Since it is possible to shift to the display period group, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the gaming machine.
In the gaming machine IE1, for at least two dynamic display period groups among the dynamic display period groups stored in the dynamic display period group storage means, the transition destination dynamic display period group A game machine IE2 characterized in that information indicating the same dynamic display period group as is defined in advance.
According to the gaming machine IE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IE1, the following effects are achieved. That is, even in a state in which different dynamic display period groups have been determined, if the transition condition is satisfied, the transition can be made to the same dynamic display period group. It becomes possible to switch between period groups. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine IE1 or IE2, at least one of the dynamic display period groups stored in the dynamic display period group storage means has a plurality of transition conditions. A gaming machine IE3.

According to the game machine IE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IE1 or IE2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by providing a plurality of transition conditions for the dynamic display period group, it becomes possible to switch the dynamic display period group under various conditions, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of
A game machine IE4 characterized in that, in the game machine IE3, it is possible to shift to a different dynamic display period group according to the transition condition that is established.
According to the gaming machine IE4, a transition to a different dynamic display period group is made depending on the satisfied transition condition, so that the player can be interested in which transition condition has been satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
<Characteristic IF group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and dynamic display by the dynamic display means dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be displayed; storage means capable of storing the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means; A gaming machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player when the identification information indicating the result of the specific determination is stopped and displayed, based on the result of the determination by the determination means. a primary display period determining means capable of determining an active display period capable of determining an active display period; and a secondary active display different from the active display period based on the determination result of the determination means. and a secondary dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a period, wherein the dynamic display period determination means is a total dynamic display period obtained by adding the primary display period and the secondary dynamic display period. can be determined as the dynamic display period, and when the total dynamic display period is shorter than the first period, the gaming machine stores information indicating the total dynamic display period to the storage means. and, when the period is equal to or longer than the first period, post-process information obtained by executing special processing on the information indicating the total dynamic display period is stored in the storage means. Machine IF1.

Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game is played at a time, and a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow a player who is playing a game for a long time in the same game state to play a game without getting bored (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . In such a conventional gaming machine, in order to determine various variation patterns (variation times), it is possible to determine a plurality of information related to variation times, and the variation times included in the plurality of determined information are summed up. There is a gaming machine configured to determine a variation pattern by In such a gaming machine, various variation patterns can be determined by combining a plurality of variation times, and it is possible for the player to play a game without getting bored. If long fluctuation times are determined for each of the plurality of fluctuation times, the long fluctuation pattern will be decided as the fluctuation pattern after the summation. It is necessary to secure a large data area so as to store information about the fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and there is a problem that the data area of the gaming machine is compressed. It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a game machine capable of suppressing pressure on the data area of the game machine.
According to the game machine IF1, when the length of the dynamic display period after the addition is equal to or longer than the first period, a special process is performed on the information indicating the length of the dynamic display period. Since the post information can be stored in the storage means, it is possible to simplify the information to be stored in the storage means even when the length of the first period or longer is determined as the dynamic display period. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the data area of the gaming machine is compressed.
The gaming machine IF1 has second storage means capable of storing excess information indicating that the total dynamic display period exceeds the first period, and the dynamic display means When the period exceeds the first period, the identification information is dynamically updated based on the processing information stored in the storage means and the excess information stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine IF2 characterized by being able to display.
According to the gaming machine IF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the identification information can be dynamically displayed based on the excess information indicating that the total dynamic display period exceeds the first period and the processing information, the dynamic display period determination means determines There is an effect that the identification information can be reliably dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display period.

The gaming machine IF3, wherein the special processing in the gaming machine IF1 or IF2 is to calculate a subtraction value obtained by subtracting the first period from the total dynamic display period.
According to the gaming machine IF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IF1 or IF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the first period from the total dynamic display period is stored in the storage means, it is possible to prevent information indicating a period longer than the first period from being stored in the storage means. It has the effect of being able to
In gaming machine IF3, the gaming machine is configured such that an upper limit of a period that can be calculated as the total dynamic display period does not exceed twice the first period. IF4.
According to the game machine IF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine IF3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the total dynamic display period is shorter than the period obtained by doubling the first period, only the excess information indicating that the total dynamic display period exceeds the first period is stored in the second storage means. , there is an effect that the total dynamic display period can be accurately reproduced.

A gaming machine IF5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines IF1 to IF4, the active display period determined by the active display period determining means is shorter than the first period.
According to the gaming machine IF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines IF1 to IF4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, only the active display period is set, and a dynamic display period longer than the first period is not set. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency with which special processing is executed can be suppressed.
<Characteristic IG group>
Storage means capable of storing determination information up to a predetermined number, determination means capable of performing determination based on the determination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and the determination means. a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by is a specific discrimination result; A discrimination information display means capable of displaying the first pattern on the display means in a predetermined dynamic manner, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a type of the effect executed by the effect executing means being capable of deciding. A game having performance type determining means and said performance type shifting means capable of shifting the type of said performance executed by said performance executing means to a different type based on establishment of a transition condition. In the machine, the determination information number notifying means, when the transition condition is satisfied in a state in which the first symbol is displayed in the specific dynamic display mode, displays a special motion different from the specific dynamic display mode. A game machine IG1, characterized in that the first symbol can be displayed in a positive manner.
Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines can acquire lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole provided on the game board, and can store the acquired lottery information up to a predetermined number. A lottery is drawn based on the stored lottery information to determine whether a game is successful or not, and after symbols for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and the lottery is performed. A configuration has been proposed in which if the result is a hit, a privilege game is executed that is advantageous to the player. Further, there has been proposed a configuration capable of displaying reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). In the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the display mode of reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information is monotonous, and there is a problem that the presentation effect cannot be enhanced. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect using reserved symbols.

According to the gaming machine IG1, the dynamic mode of the first symbol after the transition condition is satisfied can be changed according to the timing of establishment of the transition condition and the display timing of the dynamic mode of the first symbol. There is an effect that the production effect of production using the dynamic mode of the first pattern can be enhanced.
In the gaming machine IG1, a pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the determination information stored in the storage means before the determination information is used for the determination by the determination means; and a dynamic mode determination means capable of determining the dynamic mode of the first symbol based on the result of the prior determination, wherein the dynamic mode determination means determines the specific determination by the prior determination means. A case where it is determined that the determination information that results in the result is stored is more likely than a case where the prior determination means determines that the determination information that results in the specific determination result is not stored. a first dynamic mode that is easy to move can be determined, and the gaming machine, when the transition condition is established in a state where the first symbol is displayed in the first dynamic mode, the special dynamic mode A game machine IG2 characterized in that the first symbol can be displayed at .
According to the gaming machine IG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IG1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first symbol is displayed in the special dynamic mode, it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game will be executed. You can play games. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied.
In the gaming machine IG2, the first dynamic mode includes at least a first period during which the first symbol is dynamically displayed in one display mode and a period after the first period, wherein the and a second period in which the display mode is changed to another display mode different from the first display mode. The first pattern can be dynamically displayed in different dynamic modes depending on whether the transition condition is satisfied during the first period or when the transition condition is satisfied during the second period. A game machine IG3.

According to the gaming machine IG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the dynamic mode after the transition condition is satisfied can be changed according to the progress of the period during which the first symbol is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic mode, the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied. , there is an effect that it is possible to make the player more interested.
In the gaming machine IG3, the second period is set to be shorter than the first period, and the dynamic mode determining means determines that the transition condition is satisfied in the second period more than in the first period. The case where the transition condition is satisfied is the case where it is judged that the discrimination information, which is the specific discrimination result, is stored as the dynamic mode of the first symbol by the preliminary discrimination means. However, it is easier to determine a special first dynamic mode that is easier to determine than when it is determined by the prior determination means that the determination information that becomes the specific determination result is not stored. Machine IG4.
According to the gaming machine IG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied during the second period, which is a short period, the special first dynamic mode is likely to be determined, so that the player is more interested in the timing when the transition condition is satisfied. has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic IH group>
A discrimination means capable of carrying out discrimination; a display means for displaying an identification pattern composed of a plurality of pattern rows for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; display control means for stop-displaying the identification pattern in a display mode for indicating the discrimination result; wherein the identification pattern is formed by combining a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern. The gaming machine IH1 is characterized in that the display control means can execute first display control for the first symbol and first display control for the second symbol differently.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.
According to the gaming machine IH1, it is possible to display the discrimination result of the discriminating means using the identification pattern formed by combining the first pattern and the second pattern, and the display control means allows the first pattern and the second pattern to be displayed. Since separate display control can be executed for the symbols, the identification symbols displayed on the display means can be displayed in a variety of display modes, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. There is an effect that it can be suppressed and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine IH1, the display control means can dynamically display the second pattern by the second display control with a delay from the timing at which the first pattern is dynamically displayed by the first display control. A gaming machine IH2 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine IH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IH1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, of the first pattern and the second pattern forming the identification pattern, the timing at which the second pattern is dynamically displayed can be delayed. can make people pay attention. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine IH1 or IH2, the display control means is capable of executing normal first display control and specific first display control as the first display control, and normal second display control as the second display control. Display control and specific second display control can be executed, and at least when the normal first display control is executed, the gaming machine performs the normal second display control as the second display control. and a specific display in which the specific second display control is executed.
According to the game machine IH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IH1 or IH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the normal first display control is performed for the first symbol, the normal display for performing the normal second display control for the second symbol and the specific display for performing the specific second display control are performed. Since it is executable, by combining the dynamic display of the first pattern and the dynamic display of the second pattern, the dynamic display of the identification pattern rich in variation can be executed, and the performance effect is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to
In any one of the game machines IH1 to IH3, the display control means can notify the determination result of the determination means only by the first symbol without using the second symbol when a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine IH4 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine IH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines IH1 to IH3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied, the discrimination result of the discrimination means can be notified only by the first pattern, so that there is an effect that an unexpected performance can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic group II>
Determining means capable of executing determination, display means capable of displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and giving a benefit advantageous to the player when the determination result is a specific determination result. and a privilege granting means capable of arranging an identification pattern in a visible state in an area where the identification information can be displayed during the period in which the identification information is displayed. and dynamic display pattern determination means capable of determining a dynamic display pattern of the identification pattern, wherein the dynamic display pattern determination means determines the dynamic display pattern during the period in which the identification information is displayed. It is possible to determine a dynamic display pattern capable of regulating a specific positional relationship between the identification information and the arranged identification pattern by the timing of dynamically displaying the identification pattern. A gaming machine II1 characterized by:
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.
According to the game machine II1, it is determined by the dynamic display start timing of the identification pattern, and the dynamic display pattern is determined according to the timing, thereby regulating the specific positional relationship. Inconvenient positional relationships can be suppressed, and the dynamic display timing of identification symbols can be flexibly determined, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.
In gaming machine II1, the dynamic display pattern determining means is capable of determining a dynamic display pattern for dynamically displaying a plurality of identification symbols. II2.

According to the game machine II2, in addition to the effects of the game machine II1, it is possible to dynamically display a plurality of identification symbols by the dynamic display pattern, so the control load for dynamically displaying the identification symbols can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be reduced.
In the game machine II1 or II2, an allowable period for determining the timing of starting dynamic display of the identification pattern is set in advance among the periods in which the identification information is displayed. II3.
According to the gaming machine II3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine II1 or II2, the period during which the identification information is displayed is extended by limiting the timing of dynamically displaying the identification symbols in the period during which the identification information is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the identification pattern is not arranged at the predetermined position even after the completion.
<Characteristic IJ group>
In a gaming machine having a determination means capable of performing determination and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, the identification information is , a special pattern setting means configured by combining a plurality of identification patterns, and capable of setting a special pattern different from the identification pattern to be arranged at a predetermined position based on the establishment of a specific condition; , in a first period, a first effect based on the determination result is executed by stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a specific combination, and in a second period different from the first period, the special A game machine IJ1 characterized by comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a second performance based on the determination result by arranging the special symbols in a specific combination mode including at least the symbols. .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.
According to the gaming machine IJ1, it is possible to switch and set a period during which an effect based on the determination result is executed using only the identification symbols and a period during which the effect based on the determination result is executed using a combination including the special symbol. There is an effect that the player can change the expectations for the discrimination result between the performance and the second performance, suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous, and improve the interest of the game.
In the gaming machine IJ1, when a first condition is satisfied, a valid line is formed on which a combination including the special symbol is formed, and when a second condition is satisfied, a combination including the special symbol is formed. The game machine IJ2 is characterized in that the activated line is different from the activated line.
According to the gaming machine IJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IJ1, the effect is varied depending on the conditions under which the activated line is established. There is an effect that interest can be improved more.

The game machine IJ1 or IJ2 has a variable means capable of varying the identification pattern, which is not combined with the special pattern, to a state in which the identification pattern is not combined with the special pattern so as to be more difficult to see than the normal state during the period in which the special pattern is arranged. A gaming machine IJ3 characterized by:
According to the game machine IJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IJ1 or IJ2, the identification patterns that are not combined with the special patterns are changed to be difficult to see, so that the player can easily determine the combination of the special patterns. There is
<Feature IK group>
In a game machine having a determination means capable of performing determination and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, the identification information is dynamically displayed. a first driving means capable of being driven on the front side of the display means during a period in which the first driving means can be driven; an identifying means for identifying a predetermined position of the first driving means; and a drive pattern means capable of driving with the drive pattern of, the drive pattern means executes based on the fact that the predetermined position is not identified at a predetermined timing when the drive pattern is driven. A gaming machine IK1 characterized in that part of the driving patterns is not executed.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

According to the gaming machine IK1, when the predetermined position cannot be identified when driving the first driving means with the driving pattern, the first driving means is not driven by part of the driving pattern. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of contacting other structures and the like and being damaged.
In the game machine IK1, the first drive means has a rotatable rotating means, and the identifying means can identify the origin position of the rotating means as the predetermined position. A gaming machine IK2 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine IK2, when the origin position of the rotating means cannot be identified, part of the drive pattern is not executed, so that the rotating means cannot stop rotating at the regular position, and the first driving means is operated. It has the effect of suppressing the problem that the used performance is not properly transmitted to the player.
In the game machine IK2, the game machine IK3 is characterized in that character information indicating that the origin position is a regular position is attached to the front side of the rotating means.

According to the gaming machine IK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IK2, the addition of character information allows the player to easily identify the character information when placed at the origin position. There is
<Characteristic IL group>
In a game machine having an operation means operable by a player and a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance for varying a performance mode based on the operation of the operation means, the above operation of 1 is provided. The game machine IL1 is characterized in that the performance mode changed by the variable performance based on the variable performance can notify that a privilege advantageous to two or more different players is given.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode is changed by executing an operation effect a plurality of times to change the effect mode based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. There are some that can execute a period effect that is changed in stages. Then, a gaming machine has been proposed in which, as a result of the effect of the period effect, a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the effect mode is changed to a specific stage (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233171. ). However, in conventional gaming machines, only the effect result of the period effect is determined in advance, and the effect result of each operation effect is not predetermined. is not used, the performance mode is changed up to the stage corresponding to the performance result of the period performance, and the performance result of the period performance is deteriorated. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the player's desire to operate the operating means during presentation and enhances the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine IL1, a privilege that is advantageous to two or more players can be notified based on one operation, so that it is possible to increase the privilege by operating the operating means, and enjoy the game. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine IL1, acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of discrimination by the discrimination means on a display means; a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when displayed; The gaming machine IL2 is characterized in that the performance mode can be changed to a predetermined notification mode when the determining means determines that the specific determination result is obtained.
According to the gaming machine IL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IL1, by changing the presentation mode to the notification mode, the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained. There is an effect that it can make people interested.
In either the game machine IL1 or IL2, the variation of the effect mode is executed in a plurality of stages, and after the variation of the effect in the above-mentioned number of times is completed, based on the information in the variable timing of the multiple stages A game machine IL3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to add an additional performance.
According to the game machine IL3, in any one of the game machines IL1 to IL3, the additional effect is executed based on the information on the variable timing in a plurality of stages, so the effect corresponding to the variable effect mode can be executed. has the effect of

<Characteristic IM group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on display means; and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the identification information indicating the result is stopped and displayed, wherein a first information value necessary for game control can be determined. When a specific condition is satisfied based on: 1 information value determining means, second information value determining means capable of determining a second information value necessary for game control, and the first information value and the second information value and special processing execution means capable of executing special processing in the game machine IM1.
Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game is played at a time, and a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow a player who is playing a game for a long time in the same game state to play a game without getting bored (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . In such a conventional gaming machine, in order to determine various variation patterns (variation times), it is possible to determine a plurality of information related to variation times, and the variation times included in the plurality of determined information are summed up. There is a gaming machine configured to determine the variation pattern by In such a gaming machine, various variation patterns can be determined by combining a plurality of variation times, and it is possible for the player to play a game without getting bored. If long fluctuation times are determined for each of the plurality of fluctuation times, the long fluctuation pattern will be decided as the fluctuation pattern after the summation. It is necessary to secure a large data area so as to store information about the fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and there is a problem that the data area of the gaming machine is compressed. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, etc., and to provide a game machine that can reduce the control load even when executing control based on information values that are flexibly determined. and
According to the gaming machine IM1, the special processing is executed when the specific condition is satisfied based on the first information value and the second information value, thereby reducing the frequency of execution of the special processing. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.
In the game machine IM1, the specific condition is established when the sum of the first information value and the second information value is equal to or greater than a specific value.

According to the gaming machine IM2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IM1, special processing is executed when the sum of the first information value and the second information value is equal to or greater than a specific value. There is an effect that special processing can be executed for a large number of objects.
In the gaming machine IM2, the special processing is processing for adding information indicating that the added value is equal to or greater than a specific value, and setting information indicating a value obtained by subtracting the specific value from the added value. A gaming machine IM3 characterized by:
According to the game machine IM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IM2, information indicating that the value is equal to or greater than a specific value is given by special processing. There is an effect that the added value can be determined by the amount.
<Characteristic IN group>
storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number; determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied; A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result being a specific determination result, and an identification pattern corresponding to the number of the information stored in the storage means. in a predetermined mode on the display means, wherein the information display means changes at least one mode of the identification symbols based on predetermined lottery information. When the setting is made to display the identification pattern in the state before it is changed, it is changed again based on the predetermined lottery information. The game machine IN1 is characterized in that the identification pattern can be changed and displayed.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines can acquire lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole provided on the game board, and can store the acquired lottery information up to a predetermined number. A lottery is drawn based on the stored lottery information to determine whether a game is successful or not, and after symbols for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and the lottery is performed. A configuration has been proposed in which if the result is a hit, a privilege game is executed that is advantageous to the player. Further, there has been proposed a configuration capable of displaying reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). In the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the display mode of reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information is monotonous, and there is a problem that the presentation effect cannot be enhanced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing deterioration of the performance effect.
According to the gaming machine IN1, even if the identification pattern is displayed in the initial state due to an accident such as power failure, it is set so that it can be displayed in a variable manner again. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease of
In the gaming machine IN1, the information display means initializes the changed identification symbols when the power is turned off and then the power is supplied again in a state where the identification symbols are changed and displayed. The game machine IN2 is characterized in that after displaying the identification pattern in the state, the identification pattern can be changed and displayed based on establishment of a variable condition.
According to the gaming machine IN2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IN1, the identification symbols can be changed again after the power is restored, so that the player continues to be interested in the variable identification symbols. It has the effect of being able to hold

In the gaming machine IN1 or IN2, the identification symbols are dynamically displayed in a specific cycle, and the identification symbols that are changed and displayed are different motions from the identification symbols before being changed. The gaming machine IN3 is characterized in that it is displayed in a typical display mode.
According to the game machine IN3, in addition to the effect of the game machine IN1 or IN2, the player can easily recognize the variable identification pattern from the dynamic display mode, and the effect of suppressing the problem that the player overlooks. There is
<Characteristic IO group>
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specified area, and a game ball capable of entering the specified area. In a gaming machine having a notification execution means capable of executing guidance notification for shooting a game ball to an area, the gaming machine provides an effect executed according to an execution condition established after the guidance notification is executed. A gaming machine IO1 characterized in that it is possible to delay the period until the start of IO1.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games. It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine IO1, it is possible to delay the period from the execution of the guidance notification to the start of the effect whose start has been established, so that the guidance notification can be executed in an optimum period, and the enjoyment of the game. have the effect of improving
<Characteristic group of 5077 series>
<Characteristic JA group> (When a specific lottery result is obtained in a disadvantageous first game state, a second game state is set in which the substantial jackpot probability is higher than the first game state without winning)
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of determination conditions, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. means, first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a first set condition, and the privilege game based on the establishment of a second set condition in the first game state. a second game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state without intervening the game machine JA1.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided as the game state that is set after the execution of the winning game is completed. There are also games that realize game characteristics that make one expect that a game state with a higher degree of advantage is set as the game state.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a game state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set, unless a winning game is executed, there is no possibility of shifting to a game state with a higher degree of advantage. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the game is expected only to be executed.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine JA1, in the first game state, the second game state with a high degree of advantage is set without involving the privilege game. It is possible to realize a novel game property that can be expected even if the setting condition 2 is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine JA1, the second set condition is a condition that is established when the determination result of the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result. .

According to the game machine JA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine JA1, when the discrimination of the discrimination means is executed, in addition to the specific discrimination result for the player, the first discrimination result is obtained. Since it is possible to realize a novel game property that can be expected even by the players, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
The game machine JA1 or JA2 is provided with display control means capable of displaying a specific display capable of suggesting a game method in the second game state to the player in the second game state, The state is a gaming state in which the rate at which the privilege game is executed is the first rate per determination by the determining means, and the second gaming state is at least the gaming method suggested by the specific display. The gaming machine JA3 is characterized in that the gaming machine JA3 is in a gaming state in which the privilege game can be executed at a second rate higher than the first rate when the game is played.
According to the game machine JA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine JA1 or JA2, a very novel game property is obtained by shifting from a game state in which the privilege game is relatively difficult to be executed to a game state in which the privilege game is relatively easy to be executed without going through the privilege game. can be realized, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine JA3, the determination means includes first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition as the determination condition, and the first determination condition as the determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the above, and when the determination by the first determination means is performed, the first ratio A game machine JA4 characterized in that, when the bonus game is executed in and the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the bonus game is executed at a rate substantially higher than the first rate.

According to the game machine JA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine JA3, the rate at which the privilege game is executed differs depending on whether the determination by the first determination means is performed or the determination by the second determination means is performed. , the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be executed.
In the gaming machine JA4, the first game state is a game state in which the second determination condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the second game state is a game state when a game is played in a game method suggested by the specific display. A gaming machine JA5 characterized by a gaming state in which the privilege game is executed at the second rate by a specific percentage of the established determination conditions becoming the second determination condition.
According to the game machine JA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine JA4, the rate at which the second determination condition is satisfied can be varied depending on the game state, and the rate at which the privilege game is executed can be varied for each game state. effective.
In a gaming machine JA5, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. a first information acquiring means capable of acquiring the first discrimination information used for discrimination of the first discriminating means based on; a second information acquiring means capable of acquiring second discrimination information used for discrimination, a first position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering from the first position; A second position where the ball becomes difficult, a variable means that can be changed, a passing means that allows the game ball to pass, and a specific determination means that performs a specific determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means. , variable game execution in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the specific determination means becoming a predetermined determination result. As the type of the variable game executed by means and the variable game execution means, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first position is the first period during which the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. One of a plurality of types including at least a first variable game to be set and a second variable game to be set in a second period in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means is determined. and a type determination means, wherein the first game state is a game state in which the second variable game cannot be determined, and the second game state is a game in which the second variable game is determined at a predetermined rate. A gaming machine JA6 characterized by being in a state.

According to the gaming machine JA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JA5, whether or not the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means depends on whether it is in the first game state or the second game state. Since the degree is variable, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine JA6, the first ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the passing means can enter.
According to the gaming machine JA7, there is an effect that the discrimination by the specific discrimination means and the discrimination by the first discrimination means can be executed almost simultaneously each time.
In the gaming machine JA7, the second ratio is a ratio of a specific determination result in the determination of the first determination means and a predetermined determination result in the determination of the specific determination means, and the type determination means determines the first A variable game is determined, and the privilege game is executed by the determination of the second determining means performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means during the execution of the first variable game. A game machine JA8 characterized in that it is the sum of a ratio of

According to the gaming machine JA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JA7, in the second gaming state, similarly to the first gaming state, by shooting a game ball aiming at the first ball entering means, the first discrimination means A privilege game can be expected to be executed by the discrimination, the first variable game is executed, the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the privilege game is executed by the discrimination of the second discrimination means. Since a special Yunoki state is formed in which the above can be expected, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.
<Feature JB group> (In the time saving state set in the first trigger, the number of time saving is updated at the first timing, and in the time saving state set in the second trigger, it is updated at the second timing)
A first game state advantageous to the player is established based on establishment of either a predetermined first set condition or a second set condition different from the first set condition. update means for updating a specific counter value according to a predetermined update rule based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the first game state; and update means for the a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the fact that the specific counter value is updated to a predetermined specific value by In the first game state set by the establishment of the setting condition 1, the specific counter value can be updated by the updating means at least based on the establishment of the first update condition as the update condition. and in the first game state set with the establishment of the second setting condition as a trigger, at least based on the establishment of a second update condition different from the first update condition as the update condition The game machine JB1 is characterized in that the specific counter value can be updated by the updating means.
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined initial value is set for a predetermined counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of times of saving time) at a predetermined opportunity, and update processing is performed until the counter value reaches a specific value. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for a more suitable counter value updating method.

In addition, among such conventional type gaming machines, there are those configured to be able to vary the degree of advantage of the game state after the winning game is completed according to the game state when setting the execution of the winning game. also exist.
However, in such a gaming machine, when execution of the same winning game is set in the same gaming state, the same gaming state is always set as the gaming state after the winning game ends. As a game state advantageous to , when a plurality of states with different execution possibilities of the winning game are provided in the same game state by different end conditions, the degree of advantage other than the possibility of executing the winning game There is a problem that it becomes difficult to make a difference.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine JB1, it is possible to change the update timing of the specific counter value according to the timing of setting the first game state, so that the specific counter value can be updated more favorably. It has the effect of being able to
In the game machine JB1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. a privilege game execution means to be executed; and a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game as the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means; It is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage between when the execution of the first privilege game is set in the first game state and when the execution of the first privilege game is set in the second game state. A gaming machine JB2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine JB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JB1, the degree of advantage varies depending on whether the timing at which the execution of the first privilege game is set is the first gaming state or the second gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the timing at which the first privilege game is executed.
In the gaming machine JB2, in the first game state set with the establishment of the first set condition as a trigger, the first game state is set with the establishment of the second set condition as a trigger. The game machine JB3 is characterized in that it is difficult to set the execution of the first privilege game in the 1 game state.
According to the gaming machine JB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JB2, the first gaming state is set when the first setting condition is met, or the second gaming state is set when the second setting condition is met. Since the ease of execution of the first privilege game during the first game state can be varied depending on whether it is in the first game state, the degree of advantage of the first game state can be varied according to the set conditions. has the effect of
In the gaming machine JB2 or JB3, the first update condition is a condition that can be satisfied at a predetermined first timing after the determination condition is satisfied until a new determination condition can be satisfied. and the second update condition is satisfied at a second timing, which is a timing after the first timing, during a period from when the determination condition is satisfied until a new determination condition can be satisfied. wherein the privilege game can be set to be executed at a third timing which is a timing after the first timing and a timing before the second timing. Game machine JB4 to play.

According to the gaming machine JB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JB2 or JB3, when the execution of the privilege game is set in the first gaming state, the specific counter value is updated at the second timing. If so, it is possible to set the execution of the privilege game before the specific counter value is updated, so it is easy to set the execution of the privilege game during the first game state, while the specific counter value is updated at the first timing. In the first game state in which the counter value is updated, the execution of the privilege game is set after the specific counter value is updated, so the execution of the privilege game is comparatively set during the first game state. It has the effect of making it harder.
In a gaming machine JB4, a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter into the ball entering means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means from the first position. a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball; , variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position; and a bonus game execution setting means for setting the execution of the bonus game.
According to the gaming machine JB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JB4, when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the variable game, execution of the privilege game is set, so that the ball entering means is set to execute. There is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the ball.
In the gaming machine JB5, the first timing is a timing from when the determination result of the determination means becomes the first determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, and The second timing is at least after the timing at which the game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game executed based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the first determination result. A game machine JB6 characterized by timing.

According to the gaming machine JB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JB5, when the variable game is executed with the first determination result in the first gaming state, the specific counter value is updated at the second timing. In the first game state, it is possible to set the execution of the privilege game before the specific counter value is updated. If it is the first game state in which the specific counter value is updated at the timing, the privilege game is set to be executed after the specific counter value is updated, so that the privilege game is executed during the first game state. This has the effect of making the setting relatively difficult.
A gaming machine JB7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines JB1 to JB6, the first gaming state is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state.
According to the gaming machine JB7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines JB1 to JB6, the first gaming state is a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state, so the specific counter value is specified. This has the effect of making the player wish that the value is not updated.
<Characteristic JC group> (An disadvantageous second set the game state)
a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; a predetermined first condition after the first game state is set; Second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state based on the establishment of a plurality of conditions including at least a second condition different from the first condition. and a gaming machine JC1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are those that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, an advantageous game state is established when one of a plurality of predetermined end conditions is satisfied under a situation in which a game state with a high degree of advantage is set. There are also those that are terminated and shift to a disadvantageous game state.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, an advantageous game state is terminated when one of a plurality of termination conditions is satisfied, regardless of whether other conditions are satisfied. To make a player feel unreasonable by terminating an advantageous game state just by meeting the end condition 1 in spite of the fact that there is a relatively long margin until the condition is met. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine JC1, since the first game state with a high degree of advantage continues until a plurality of conditions are satisfied, it is possible to realize a novel game property focusing on the establishment of the plurality of conditions. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine JC1, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. and the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. A gaming machine JC2 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine JC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JC1, it is possible to expect that the first determination result will be obtained and that the second determination result will not be obtained in the first game state. There is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the determination result of .
In the gaming machine JC2, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. A game machine JC3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine JC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JC2, it is possible to strongly expect that the third determination result will not be obtained after the first condition is established first. To realize a novel game property capable of making the player want to avoid different discrimination results depending on the order of establishment of the conditions, since the user can strongly expect that the second discrimination result will not be obtained when the conditions are established. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine JC3, the first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained a predetermined first number of times after the first game state is set. The gaming machine JC4 is characterized in that the condition is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained a predetermined number of times after the first game state is set.
According to the gaming machine JC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JC3, the number of times the second determination result is obtained and the number of times the third determination result are obtained can be paid attention to during the game. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.
In any of the gaming machines JC1 to JC4, after the first game state is set, regardless of the order in which the plurality of conditions are satisfied, at least one of the plurality of conditions is not satisfied. The game machine JC5 is characterized in that the first game state can be maintained for a certain period of time.

According to the game machine JC5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines C1 to C4, while at least one condition is not met, the advantageous first game state is maintained regardless of the order in which the conditions are met. There is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make one strongly expect that all the conditions will not be satisfied.
In the gaming machine JC4, when the first condition is satisfied after the first gaming state is set and the second condition is not satisfied, the number of times of the second determination result is the first number of times. Changing means for changing such that the second condition is satisfied when the number of times of the third determination result becomes a fourth number different from the second number of times based on the third number of times greater than A gaming machine JC6 characterized by comprising:
According to the gaming machine JC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JC4, when the second determination result continues to be the second determination result even after the first condition is satisfied and the number of times of the second determination result reaches the third number, the second determination result is obtained. Since the number of times of the third determination result for satisfying the condition can be varied, it is important to pay attention to whether or not the number of times of the second determination result reaches the third number after the first condition is satisfied. You can play a game with it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
A gaming machine JC7, characterized in that, in the gaming machine JC6, the fourth number of times is greater than the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine JC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JC6, when the number of times of the second determination result reaches the third number, the specified number of times of the third determination result required to satisfy the second condition increases, making it easier for the first game state to continue for a long time. It can be a game property that makes you expect that the determination result will be. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In any one of the gaming machines JC1 to JC7, the second game state setting means sets the plurality of conditions based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition different from any of the plurality of conditions in the first game state. The game machine JC8 is characterized in that the second game state can be set regardless of whether a condition is satisfied.
According to the game machine JC8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines JC1 to JC7, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the second game state is forcibly entered regardless of whether a plurality of conditions are satisfied. Since it is set, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the first game state from continuing for an extremely long time and becoming excessively advantageous to the player.
In a game machine JC8, a determining means for performing determination based on establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined first determination result. wherein the specific condition is established based on the execution of a predetermined specific number of times without the determination result of the determination means not becoming the first determination result. A gaming machine JC9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine JC9, the first game state can be ended within a specific number of times of discrimination, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive advantages for the player.
<Characteristic JD group> (The production that suggests the possibility that the first condition that can end the time saving state and the production that suggests the possibility that the second condition is satisfied can be executed independently)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a first condition for determining whether the first condition for ending the first game state is established. determining means; second condition determining means for determining whether a second condition, which is a condition for ending the first game state and is different from the first condition, is met; and whether the first condition is met. The game machine JD1 is characterized by comprising a performance execution means capable of executing at least a first performance capable of suggesting a possibility and a second performance capable of suggesting the possibility that the second condition is satisfied.
Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.

Further, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured so as to be capable of executing a production mode corresponding to each of a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage, and at least a part of the game state with a high degree of advantage. , there is also one that is configured to be able to perform notification indicating the possibility (the number of games played) of the completion condition of the game state.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a plurality of end conditions are provided, it is normal to notify only the possibility of fulfillment of one end condition that is most likely to be fulfilled. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the establishment possibility.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine JD1, by confirming the first effect and the second effect, the player can more accurately grasp the possibility of ending the first game state. , there is an effect that a suitable presentation mode can be realized.
The gaming machine JD1 comprises a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the first condition is based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. It is a condition that can be satisfied, and the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result. A game machine JD2.

According to the game machine JD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine JD1, in the first game state, the game can be played by paying attention to the discrimination result of the discrimination means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine JD2, the first condition is a condition that is met when the first determination result is obtained a predetermined first number of times in the first gaming state of 1, and the second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained for a predetermined second number of times in the first game state of 1;
According to the game machine JD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine JD2, in the first game state, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of first determination results and the number of second determination results. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine JD3, the first effect is a effect in which the effect mode can be changed according to the number of times that the first determination result is obtained in the first game state of 1, and the second effect is 1. The gaming machine JD4 is characterized in that the effect mode is variable depending on the number of times the second determination result is obtained in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine JD4, by confirming the first effect and the second effect, it is possible to estimate the number of times the first determination result and the second determination result are obtained. There is an effect that convenience can be improved.
In the gaming machine JD3 or JD4, a plurality of the first game state and at least one of the first number and the second number are set to different numbers, and the first game state is set. a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player at least one of the first number of times and the second number of times set in the first game state before the game is played. Characterized game machine JD5.
According to the gaming machine JD5, variations can be provided in the first game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
Any one of the game machines JD3 to JD5, comprising privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, The gaming machine JD6, wherein both the first determination result and the second determination result are at least different determination results from the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine JD6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines JD3 to JD5, both the first determination result and the second determination result are conditions different from the specific determination result, so in the first game state There is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect a specific determination result.
In any one of the game machines JD1 to JD6, the first game state is a game state that can be continued even if one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, while the other is not satisfied. A gaming machine JD7 characterized by:
According to the game machine JD7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines JD1 to JD6, novel game characteristics are realized in which the first game state can be continued until both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic JE group> (When the first game state is set and when the second game state with a different number of times of time saving is set, the number of lotteries of special figure 2 is made common )
discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a first state forming means for forming a state; a second state forming means for forming a second state different from the first state based on establishment of a second forming condition different from the first forming condition; a first specific state forming means for forming a specific state in which the acquisition condition is unlikely to be satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied after the first state is formed; and the second state is formed. a second specific state forming means for forming the specific state based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition after the first condition is set, and after the first state is set, the The number of determinations by the determination means until determination using all of the determination information acquired before the formation of the specific state is completed, after the second state is set, the specific state A game machine JE1 is characterized in that it can match the number of discriminations of the discrimination means until the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired before the formation of JE1 is completed.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are those that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are a first start opening for executing a lottery with a relatively low degree of advantage and a second start opening for executing a lottery with a relatively high degree of advantage as a starting prize opening. and are provided to form a disadvantageous game state in which the second special symbol lottery executed based on the winning of the second start port is difficult to be executed, and a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. There are also those that are configured to be possible. In such a conventional game machine, when the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols executed after shifting to an advantageous game state reaches a specified number of times, the advantageous game state is terminated and the game state is changed to a disadvantageous game state. What is set is normal.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in a plurality of states with a high degree of advantage, it is difficult to share the second special symbol lottery opportunity until the end condition is satisfied and the game state is set to be disadvantageous. There is a possibility that

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine JE1, it is possible to execute the determination the same number of times regardless of the different states, so there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.
In the game machine JE1, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state can be set based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. State setting means is provided, wherein the first state is a state that can be formed based on the setting of the first game state, and the second state is based on the setting of the second game state. A game machine JE2 characterized in that it is a state that can be formed by
According to the game machine JE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine JE1, the number of determinations of the determination means can be made common between the first state and the second state even though different game states are set. has the effect of
In the gaming machine JE2, it is possible to set a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state based on the first number of determinations by the determination means being executed in the first game state. A third game state setting means is provided, the second game state is a game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means can be executed a second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times, and the third game state is the third game state. A gaming machine JE3 is characterized in that it is in a game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means can be executed a third number of times, which is less than two times.

According to the gaming machine JE3, when the second state is formed, it is possible to perform the determination of the third number of times in the third game state after performing the determination of the first number of times in the second state of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the monotony of
In the gaming machine JE3, the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the determination by the determination means is performed the third number of times in the third game state, and the second condition is the second game. A condition that can be satisfied when the determination by the determination means is performed the second number of times in the state, and the second number of times is equal to the sum of the first number of times and the third number of times. A game machine JE4.
According to the gaming machine JE4, there is an effect that the number of determinations of the determination means can be reliably matched between the first state and the second state.
In the gaming machine JE3 or JE4, the discrimination information acquiring means acquires the first discrimination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and acquires the first discrimination information upon the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. second determination information can be obtained based on the determination, and the determination means is a first determination means for performing determination using the first determination information based on the establishment of a first determination condition; and a second determination means for performing determination using the second determination information based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, wherein the second determination means is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than the determination by the first determination means, and the third game state setting means performs the first number of determinations by the second determination means in the first game state. Based on that, the third game state can be set, the second game state is a game state in which the determination by the second determination means can be executed the second number of times, and the third game state a game machine JE5, characterized in that the gaming machine JE5 is in a game state in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means can be executed for the third number of times;

According to the game machine JE5, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the number of determinations of the second determining means, which has a high degree of advantage, can be shared between the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
The gaming machine JE5 comprises a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means until discrimination by the discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed, and the specific state is: The game machine JE6 is characterized in that the game machine JE6 is in the first game state in which the second discrimination information is not stored in the discrimination information storage means.
According to the gaming machine JE6, if the first game state is set in a state in which the second determination information is stored, the third game state in which the second determination can be executed can be set. If the information is not stored, a disadvantageous specific state is formed, so there is an effect that the number of stored second discrimination information at the time when the first game state is set can be noticed.
In the gaming machine JE6, when the first formation condition is satisfied, the second discrimination information is likely to be stored in the discrimination information storage means at least before the first game state is set. A game machine JE7 characterized by comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying a game method.

According to the game machine JE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine JE6, the notification performance can be executed before the first game state is set, and the second discrimination information can be stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably perform the determination by the second determining means in the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of times of determination by the second determining means can be reliably matched between the first state and the second state.
<Characteristic JF group> (Return after reaching the limit with 1 type 2 types of time saving limit machine)
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and an advantage over the first determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition A second determination means that performs a second determination with a high degree, and either the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined specific determination result. a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the above; a game state setting means, and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state based on the establishment of a second set condition in the first game state; , wherein a specific state in which the second determination is likely to be executed can be formed from when the second game state is set until the specific condition is satisfied.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, after a specific game state with a high degree of advantage is continuously set for a specified number of times as a game state that is set after execution of a winning game is completed, Furthermore, even if a winning game corresponding to a specific game state is executed, there is also a game that employs control for forcibly setting a game state with a low degree of advantage.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a game state with a low degree of advantage is set, the degree of expectation for winning is greatly reduced, and the player's motivation for playing the game is greatly reduced. There is
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine JF1, it is possible to create a state in which the second determination with a high degree of advantage is likely to be executed even though the second game state with a low degree of advantage is set. It is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment that the game state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine JF1, an acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the second discriminating means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the acquiring means are provided in advance. a determination information storage means capable of storing up to a specific number of information as an upper limit until being used for determination by the second determination means; A game machine JF2 characterized by being in a state capable of executing the second determination using information.

According to the gaming machine JF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JF1, the formation of the specific state causes the second determination to be executed a relatively large number of times. has the effect of being able to please
In the gaming machine JF1 or JF2, game state determination means for determining one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state and the second game state as the game state after the bonus game is completed. In addition, the first game state is set by the game state determination means to the first game state rather than the second game state when the specific determination result is obtained in a state where a predetermined first condition is not satisfied. The game state becomes easier to determine, and when the specific determination result is obtained in a state where the first condition is satisfied, the game state determining means determines the above-mentioned rather than the state where the first condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine JF3 is characterized by being in a gaming state in which the second gaming state is easily determined.
According to the game machine JF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine JF1 or JF2, the player can expect a specific determination result while the first condition is not satisfied in the first game state. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine JF3, the first condition can be satisfied based on the fact that the first game state is determined by the game state determining means continuously over a predetermined specific number of the privilege games. A game machine JF4 characterized by being a condition.

According to the game machine JF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine JF3, when the first game state is set, it is extremely advantageous that the advantageous first game state is likely to be set continuously over a specific number of privilege games. Therefore, when the first game state is set, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction.
In any one of the gaming machines JF1 to JF4, a third game state is set to set a third game state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the second game state. A game state setting means is provided, and in the second game state set based on the establishment of the second setting condition, the second game state set based on the establishment of a setting condition different from the second setting condition is provided. The game machine JF5 is characterized in that the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the game state.
According to the gaming machine JF5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines JF1 to JF4, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the second setting condition is set at another opportunity. There is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that can be higher than in the second game state.
In the game machine JF5, the second condition is a condition that is satisfied based on the first determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination of the second determination means in the second game state. A game machine JF6 characterized by.

According to the game machine JF6, in addition to the effect of the game machine JF5, when the second determination means performs the determination in the second game state, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result. be.
In the game machine JF6, the determination by the first determination means is a determination that cannot result in the first determination result.
According to the game machine JF7, in addition to the effects of the game machine JF6, even if the determination by the first determination means is executed, the first determination result is not obtained, so the determination by the second determination means is performed in the second game state. There is an effect that it can be made to expect things more strongly.
A gaming machine JF8 characterized in that, in the gaming machine JF6 or JF7, the determination by the second determining means substantially determines execution of the privilege game when the first determination result is not obtained.

According to the gaming machine JF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JF6 or JF7, when the determination by the second determination means is executed in the second game state, the privilege game is executed or the third game state is executed. Since it is either one of the following, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.
In the gaming machine JF8, there are a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. and a variable means that can be varied between two positions, and when the determination result of the second determination means becomes a predetermined second determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the Variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to a first position, and second game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game. and a privilege game execution means, wherein the determination by the first determination means is a determination that cannot result in the second determination result, and the determination by the second determination means is the specific determination result and the first determination result. and the second determination result.
According to the gaming machine JF9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JF8, when the determination by the second determination means is executed in the second game state, a specific determination result is obtained and the privilege game is executed or the first Since the third game state is set as a determination result or the variable game is executed as a second determination result, the first determination that cannot be either the first determination result or the second determination result. The degree of advantage can be increased significantly compared to the determination of the means. Therefore, when the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the player can have a great sense of anticipation, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic JG group> (Predetermined effect is executed in the period from when the game state is changed until the reserved ball acquired in the game state before the change is consumed)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a first effect can be executed based on the setting of the first game state. A first effect execution means and a performance mode in which the player can recognize the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition during the execution of the first effect. A gaming machine JG1 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means for executing the configured second effect.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are also those that are configured to be capable of providing a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage, and executing a corresponding performance mode for each game state.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, an effect corresponding to the set game state is executed at the same time when one game state is finished and set, and a game is played in a game method corresponding to the set game state. If the player starts immediately, it may be difficult to set the effect appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine JG1, by confirming the second effect, the player can be made to recognize that the first game state has been set, so that the effect can be preferably set. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine JG1, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. , a determination information storage means that can store a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for determination of the determination means, and the specific execution condition is set to the determination at the time when the first game state is set. The gaming machine JG2 is characterized by a condition that can be established after the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the information storage means is completed.
According to the game machine JG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine JG1, the second effect can be executed after the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game corresponding to the first game state from being started while the discrimination information is stored in the information storage means.
The game machine JG2 comprises display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and performing the specific execution The condition is a condition that can be satisfied after the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the time the first game state is set. A gaming machine JG3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine JG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JG2, during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination information acquired before the first gaming state is set, the player receives the first There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the start of the game corresponding to the game state.
In the gaming machine JG2 or JG3, a first termination condition is satisfied when the number of determinations by the determination means executed after the first game state is set reaches a predetermined specific number. Based on that, a first ending means for ending the first game state and setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state, and the first end condition in the first game state a second end means for ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the establishment of a second end condition different from the A case where a game is played by a game method corresponding to the first game state immediately after the first game state is set, and all stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time when the first game state is set. After the determination using the determination information is completed, the second game is performed before the first end condition is satisfied in both the case where the game is played in the game method corresponding to the first game state. A game machine JG4 is characterized in that a termination condition is likely to be established.
According to the gaming machine JG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JG2 or JG3, the player continues to check the first performance without playing a game during the first performance, and the first performance is performed based on the start of the second performance. Even if the game is played in a game method corresponding to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.
The game machine JG5 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines JG1 to JG4, the first effect is constructed in a performance mode that makes the player think that the first game state is not set.

According to the game machine JG5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines JG1 to JG4, the player can be made to think that the first game state is not set until the second effect is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from starting a game corresponding to the first game state before a specific execution condition is established.
<Characteristic JH Group> (Production that suggests the possibility that a specific condition that can end a predetermined game state is established)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a condition determination means for determining whether a first condition capable of ending the first game state is satisfied. and effect executing means capable of executing at least a first effect capable of suggesting the possibility that the first condition is satisfied.
Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, by confirming the first effect, it is possible for the player to grasp the possibility that the first game state will end, so that a suitable effect mode can be realized. It has the effect of being able to
The game machine JH1 comprises a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the first condition is based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. The gaming machine JH2 is characterized by a condition that can be established.
According to the game machine JH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, in the first game state, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result of the determination means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of being able to
The gaming machine JH2 is characterized in that the first condition is a condition that is established based on the first determination result being obtained a predetermined first number of times in the first gaming state of 1. Game machine JH3.

According to the gaming machine JH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, in the first gaming state, the player can play the game by paying attention to the number of times of the first determination result, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.
In a gaming machine JH3, a second condition determining means capable of determining whether or not a second condition different from the first condition, which is a condition for ending the first game state, has been established; and a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting a sexuality, wherein the second condition is a predetermined second number of times the determination result of the determination means in the first game state of 1. , a gaming machine JH4, characterized in that the condition is established based on a second determination result different from the first determination result.
According to the game machine JH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine JH3, in the first game state, it is possible to focus on both the number of times of the first discrimination result and the number of times of the second discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine JH4, the first effect is a effect in which the effect mode can be varied according to the number of times the first determination result is obtained in the first game state of 1, and the second effect is 1. The game machine JH5 is characterized in that the effect mode is variable according to the number of times the second determination result is obtained in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine JH5, by confirming the first effect and the second effect, it is possible to estimate the number of times the first determination result and the second determination result are obtained. There is an effect that convenience can be improved.
<Characteristic JI group> (execution of a predetermined effect in a predetermined period after the game state is changed)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; and a first effect execution capable of executing a first effect based on the setting of the first game state. means, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect in a different effect mode from the first effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition during the execution of the first effect, A gaming machine JI1 characterized by comprising:
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some which are configured to be capable of providing a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage, and to execute an effect in a corresponding effect mode for each game state.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, an effect corresponding to the set game state is executed at the same time when one game state is completed and set, and a game is played in a game method corresponding to the set game state. If the player starts immediately, it may be difficult to set the effect appropriately.
On the other hand, according to the game machine JI1, there is an effect that the effect can be set appropriately.
In the game machine JI1, the second effect is configured in an effect mode in which the player can recognize that the game state is the first game state.

According to the game machine JI2, in addition to the effect of the game machine JI1, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the first game state has been set by confirming the second effect.
In the gaming machine JI1 or JI2, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; and the discrimination obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means. a determination information storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for determination by the determination means, and the specific execution condition is set at the time when the first game state is set The game machine JI3 is characterized by a condition that can be satisfied after the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means is completed.
According to the game machine JI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine JI1 or JI2, the second effect can be executed after the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game corresponding to the first game state from being started while the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means.
The gaming machine JI3 comprises display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. The condition is a condition that can be established after the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time the first game state is set. A gaming machine JI4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine JI4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, when the player performs the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination information acquired before the first gaming state is set, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the start of the game corresponding to the game state.
In the gaming machine JI3 or JI4, a first termination condition is satisfied when the number of determinations by the determination means executed after the first game state is set reaches a predetermined specific number. Based on that, a first ending means for ending the first game state and setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state, and the first end condition in the first game state a second end means for ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the establishment of a second end condition different from the A case where a game is played by a game method corresponding to the first game state immediately after the first game state is set, and all stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time when the first game state is set. After the determination using the determination information is completed, the second game is performed before the first end condition is satisfied in both the case where the game is played in the game method corresponding to the first game state. The game machine JI5 is characterized in that the termination condition is easily satisfied.
According to the gaming machine JI5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine JI3 or JI4, the player continues to confirm the first performance without playing a game during the first performance, and the first performance is displayed based on the start of the second performance. Even if the game is played in a game method corresponding to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.
<Characteristic group of 5078 series>
<Characteristics KA group> (A game state in which a jackpot game is more likely to be executed than a normal state can be set multiple times based on the number of executions of the special drawing lottery or the lottery result between the jackpots)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result; In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is likely to be executed, the game state setting means is the discrimination means that is executed after the privilege game is finished. A first condition that can be satisfied when the number of times of the determination by the determining means reaches a predetermined number of times, and a second determination result that is different from the first determination result. a second condition, and the second game state can be set based on the establishment of any one of the two conditions, and the gaming machine executes the next privilege game after the first privilege game is executed. The game machine KA1 is characterized in that the second game state can be set a plurality of times by the game state setting means during a game period until the second game state is set.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, in the conventional gaming machine, since an advantageous state is set only when a privilege game is executed, there is a problem that a player's willingness to play continues to play a game that does not result in winning.
Furthermore, as a conventional type gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which an advantageous state set after the end of a privilege game continues until the next privilege game is executed. In such a gaming machine, setting an advantageous state increases the degree of advantage of the privilege granted to the player. , there is a problem that it is difficult to set the advantageous state itself, and the player who has been playing for a long time while expecting the advantageous state to be set loses the desire to play.
Also, there is a gaming machine that terminates the advantageous state set after the end of the privilege game according to the number of times the lottery has been executed. In such a game machine, when the advantageous state ends due to the execution of a predetermined number of lotteries during the advantageous state, the game is played in a less advantageous state than the advantageous state until the next privilege game is executed. There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered after the advantageous state ends.

According to the gaming machine KA1, since the second game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, can be set a plurality of times between privilege games, the game in the first game state is executed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game aiming at the privilege game for a long time, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.
In addition, regardless of the determination result by the determination means, the second game state can be set based on the number of determinations executed by the determination means, so that the second game state is not set, and There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the continuation of a game in which the privilege game is not executed for a long period of time.
The game machine KA1 is characterized in that the game machine is configured such that the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first condition by the determination performed during the game period. Gaming machine KA2 to play.
According to the gaming machine KA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KA1, it is possible to easily set the second game state based on the determination result before the determination is performed a predetermined number of times. There is an effect that the player can be interested in the result of the determination executed during the game, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine KA1 or KA2, the upper limit of the number of times the second condition can be satisfied during the game period is larger than the upper limit of the number of times the first condition can be satisfied. A gaming machine KA3 characterized by:
According to the game machine KA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine KA1 or KA2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the upper limit number of times that the second condition can be satisfied during the game period is greater than the upper limit number of times that the first condition can be satisfied, the second game state based on the satisfaction of the second condition is changed during the game period. It can be made easy to set multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the result of the determination executed during the game period, and to improve the player's interest in the game.
The gaming machine KA4 is characterized in that the gaming machine KA3 has an informing means capable of informing that the number of times the first condition is established during the gaming period has reached an upper limit.
According to the gaming machine KA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KA3, the game period in which the first condition cannot be satisfied can be notified to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the game period that is difficult to enter.

<Characteristic KB group> (Suggests the degree of advantage of the special drawing lottery result by combining the type of background mode that suggests the game state and the displayed production pattern)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a benefit type determining means capable of determining one of a plurality of benefit types including a first benefit type and a second benefit type different from the first benefit type as the benefit types; and the benefit. A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect for suggesting the privilege type determined by the type determining means, and capable of setting the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means. In a gaming machine having a first effect mode setting means, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the game state setting means A second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect for suggesting the set game state, and a mode type of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means are among a plurality of mode types. and a second effect mode setting means capable of setting one of the mode types from 1 to 1, wherein the first effect mode setting means has a specific first effect mode and the first privilege rather than the specific first effect mode. One effect mode can be set from a plurality of effect modes including a specific second effect mode that is difficult to be set when the type is determined, and the game machine is set by the second effect mode setting means. The game machine KB1 is characterized in that it is possible to vary a rate at which the specific first effect mode is set by the first effect mode setting means based on the mode type of the second effect.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured so that a plurality of performance stages are switched, and the performance mode of variable performance for indicating the result of winning lottery is determined corresponding to the set performance stage. Therefore, a game machine capable of suppressing monotonous variation effects has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2009-233171).
In addition, a plurality of game states can be set, and in order to make it difficult for the player to understand the set game state, a plurality of production stages that can be set even in different game states are provided, and the set game state is provided. A gaming machine has also been proposed that allows a player to predict the current game state based on the type of the switched effect stage by varying the selection ratio of each effect stage according to the state.
In such a conventional gaming machine, it is common to vary the contents of the privilege given at the time of winning according to the set game state. However, regardless of which production stage is set, a common display mode is set as a display mode for showing the result of the winning lottery, so the benefit actually does not occur. There is a problem that the player cannot grasp the game state at the time of winning until the award is given.

According to the gaming machine KB1, the player can predict the type of privilege given by the privilege giving means by combining the effect mode of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect that can suggest the game state. is possible, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.
In the gaming machine KB1, the second effect mode setting means is more likely to be set when the first game state is set by the game state setting means than when the second game state is set. It is characterized by being able to set at least a first mode type and a second mode type which is more likely to be set when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. Gaming machine KB2.
According to the gaming machine KB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KB1, based on the mode type set as the rendering mode of the second rendering, it is possible to predict the set game state. has the effect of increasing
In the gaming machine KB1 or the gaming machine KB2, the second game is performed when the game state setting means executes the first setting in which the game state is switched from the first game state to the second game state. A game characterized in that the second effect executing means is configured to make it easier to execute the second effect than when the second setting for switching the game state from the state to the first game state is executed. Machine KB3.

According to the gaming machine KB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KB1 or KB2, the ease of executing the second production can be varied according to the game state transition pattern, so the second production is executed. Even with this, it is possible to make the player predict the game state to be newly set, and it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current game state.
In any one of the gaming machines KB1 to KB3, the first effect mode setting means selects one of the plurality of common effect modes regardless of the mode type of the second effect set by the second effect mode setting means. A game machine KB4 characterized in that it is possible to set the effect mode of.
According to the gaming machine KB4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines KB1 to KB3, regardless of the mode type of the second production, the production mode of the first production can be shared. There is an effect that the total amount of performance data for execution can be reduced.
<Characteristic KC group> (The display mode of the production pattern for indicating the same lottery result is determined according to the game situation at the time of winning)
determination means capable of performing determination; game state setting means capable of setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; and a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect for indicating that the result of the determination is the specific determination result, the second effect set by the game state setting means. End condition determining means capable of determining a condition for ending a game state; information determining means capable of determining remaining period information until the end condition is satisfied during the second game state; and executing during the second game state. a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode of the first performance based on the remaining period information determined by the information determination means when the result of the determined determination is the specific determination result. A gaming machine KC1 characterized by:

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a specific hit, the lottery result is determined. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed after the performance for indicating the winning is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which a winning lottery for the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game. (Prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
Further, as the continuation period of the advantageous state set after the end of the privilege game, a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set, and the advantageous state of the first period is set. By executing the performance indicating that the player has won the prize and the performance that indicates that the player has won the prize in which the advantageous state of the second period is set, the player can grasp the lottery result in an easy-to-understand manner. A configuration has also been proposed.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, in a state in which a period longer than the first period remains as the remaining period of the advantageous state, if winning is made when the advantageous state of the first period is set, this time Winning is disadvantageous to the player, and if winning is made in a state in which a period shorter than the first period is left as the remaining period of the advantageous state, winning is made during the setting of the advantageous state in the first period. is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the same win (win for which the first period of advantage is set) is won, the benefits given to the player by winning will depend on the remaining period of the already set advantage. In spite of the fact that the degree of advantage is different, the performance of the same mode is executed for the same win, so whether or not the win win this time is advantageous to the player. There is a problem that it is difficult to grasp based on the performance to be executed.
According to the gaming machine KC1, when the determination result of the determining means executed during the second game state is a specific determination result that enables setting of the second game state, a second Since the performance mode of the first performance can be determined based on the information until the end condition of the already set second game state is satisfied, the performance mode of the first performance can be varied. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether or not the setting of the new second game state is advantageous to the player through the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. effective.

In the gaming machine KC1, the effect mode setting means determines, based on the remaining period information, that the remaining period until the end condition of the second game state that has already been set is satisfied is set by the game state setting means. A first effect mode indicating that the period until the newly set end condition of the second game state is satisfied is longer than the period until the end condition of the second game state which is already set is satisfied. and a second performance mode indicating that the period until the condition for ending the second game state newly set by the game state setting means is satisfied is longer than the period. Characterized game machine KC2.
According to the gaming machine KC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KC1, it is possible to make a determination that is advantageous to the player depending on whether the rendering mode of the first rendering to be executed is the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode. Since it is possible to easily ascertain whether or not the game has been executed, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.
In the gaming machine KC2, the termination condition determining means determines at least one termination condition among a plurality of termination conditions including a first termination condition and a second termination condition that is less likely to be satisfied than the first termination condition. The gaming machine KC3 is characterized by being able to
According to the gaming machine KC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KC2, it is possible to set the second gaming state in which a different end condition is determined, so that the period indicated by the remaining period information of the already set second gaming state Since it is possible to easily set the length of the length and the length of the period indicated by the remaining period information until the newly set end condition of the second game state is satisfied, the player's interest in the first effect can be easily set. can be made stronger, and there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine KC3, the end condition determination means can determine the end condition to be satisfied based on at least the number of times of the determination performed during the second game state, and the first end condition is the first end condition. The second termination condition is established based on the execution of the determination a first number of times during the 2-game state, and the second termination condition is based on the execution of the determination a second number of times less than the first number of times. A game machine KC4 characterized by being able to be established.
According to the gaming machine KC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KC3, the first end condition and the second end condition are satisfied based on the number of determinations by the determination means executed during the second game state. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand without reversing the easiness of fulfillment of the first end condition and the second end condition.
<Characteristics KD group> (Determines whether or not to execute a time-saving notification effect at the time of time-saving winning based on the number of time-savings set and the look-ahead result)
Storage means capable of storing determination information up to a predetermined number, determination means capable of performing determination based on the determination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and the determination means. a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by is a specific discrimination result; a first game state; A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state that is easy to execute; an end condition determination means capable of determining at least one end condition from among a plurality of end conditions including a second end condition that is more likely to be satisfied than one end condition; and a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect capable of suggesting the type of end condition, in which the first effect is stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed. The first effect executing means has a pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the determination information that is present, and the first effect execution means, when the first end condition is determined, or when the second end condition is determined and the game machine KD1 is characterized in that the first effect can be executed when the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means satisfies the execution condition.
Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and if the lottery result is a win, a predetermined A configuration capable of setting an advantageous state for a period has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

In addition, there is also a game machine configured so that an advantageous state can be set by varying the length of the duration. There has been proposed a configuration capable of informing a player of information indicating
In such a conventional gaming machine, the longer the duration of the advantageous state is, the more advantageous it is for the player. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when information indicating a short duration is reported.
Solves the problems exemplified above, and when the notification effect for notifying information indicating the duration of the advantageous state is executed, the player's willingness to play regardless of the length of the notified duration To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by suppressing the decrease of the .
According to the gaming machine KD1, the second game state is set in which the first end condition that is difficult to be satisfied is determined, and the second game state is set in which the second end condition that is easily satisfied is determined. In addition, when the determination result by the preliminary determination means satisfies the execution condition, the first effect can be executed. Even when the end condition is suggested, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved without lowering the player's desire to play.

In the gaming machine KD1, the end condition determination means can determine the end condition to be satisfied based on at least the number of times of the determination performed during the second game state, and the first end condition is the first end condition. The second termination condition is established based on the execution of the determination a first number of times during the 2-game state, and the second termination condition is based on the execution of the determination a second number of times less than the first number of times. A game machine KD2 characterized by being able to be established.
According to the game machine KD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine KD1, the first end condition and the second end condition are satisfied based on the number of determinations by the determination means executed during the second game state. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand without reversing the easiness of fulfillment of the first end condition and the second end condition.
A gaming machine KD3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine KD1 or KD2, the execution condition can be satisfied when the result of the preliminary determination corresponds to the specific determination result.
According to the gaming machine KD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KD1 or KD2, the result of preliminary determination at the time when the second game state for determining the second end condition is set indicates that the privilege game is to be executed. Since the first effect can be executed in the case of the result of the pre-determination shown in FIG. Even when one effect is executed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In the gaming machine KD3, the execution condition is that the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the first determination executed after the second game state is set is the result corresponding to the specific determination result. A game machine KD4 characterized in that it can be established in
According to the gaming machine KD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KD3, the result of the pre-determination corresponding to the first determination after the second game state in which the second end condition is determined is set. Since the first effect can be executed when the result of the preliminary determination indicates that it will be executed, the second end condition that is easily fulfilled rather than the first end condition that is difficult to be fulfilled is determined for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing even when the first effect indicating that the game has been played is executed.
<Characteristic KE group> (Derivation of determining the display mode of the production pattern for indicating the same lottery result according to the game situation at the time of winning)
determination means capable of performing determination; game state setting means capable of setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; and a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect for indicating that the result of the determination is the specific determination result, the second effect set by the game state setting means. end condition determination means capable of determining a condition for ending a game state; information specifying means capable of specifying information for establishing the end condition during said second game state; and said information specified by said information specifying means. a game machine KE1 characterized by comprising an effect mode determining means capable of determining the effect mode of the first effect based on.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a specific hit, the lottery result is determined. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed after the performance for indicating the winning is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which a winning lottery for the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game. (Prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

Further, as the continuation period of the advantageous state set after the end of the privilege game, a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set, and the advantageous state of the first period is set. By executing the performance indicating that the player has won the prize and the performance that indicates that the player has won the prize in which the advantageous state of the second period is set, the player can grasp the lottery result in an easy-to-understand manner. A configuration has also been proposed.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, in a state in which a period longer than the first period remains as the remaining period of the advantageous state, if winning is made when the advantageous state of the first period is set, this time Winning is disadvantageous to the player, and if winning is made in a state in which a period shorter than the first period is left as the remaining period of the advantageous state, winning is made during the setting of the advantageous state in the first period. is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the same win (win for which the first period of advantage is set) is won, the benefits given to the player by winning will depend on the remaining period of the already set advantage. In spite of the fact that the degree of advantage is different, the performance of the same mode is executed for the same win, so whether or not the win win this time is advantageous to the player. There is a problem that it is difficult to grasp based on the performance to be executed.
According to the gaming machine KE1, the effect mode of the first effect for indicating the specific determination result can be determined based on the information until the end condition of the already set second game state is satisfied. , the effect mode of the first effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether or not the setting of the new second game state is advantageous to the player through the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. effective.
In the gaming machine KE1, the effect mode setting means sets the end condition of the already set second game state to be newly set by the game state setting means based on the information. A first effect mode indicating that the end condition of the state is more difficult to be satisfied than the condition to be satisfied, and the second effect mode newly set by the game state setting means rather than the end condition of the second game state that has already been set. A game machine KE2 characterized in that it is possible to determine at least a second performance mode indicating that the end condition of the game state is more difficult to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine KE2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine KE1, the determination that is advantageous to the player can be made depending on whether the rendering mode of the first rendering to be executed is the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode. Since it is possible to easily ascertain whether or not the game has been executed, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.
In the gaming machine KE2, the end condition determination means determines at least one end condition from among a plurality of end conditions including a first end condition and a second end condition that is less likely to be satisfied than the first end condition. The game machine KE3 is characterized by being able to
According to the gaming machine KE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KE2, it is possible to set a second game state in which a different end condition is determined. Since the second game state can be made easier to establish, the player's interest in the first effect can be made stronger and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
<Characteristic KF group> (Derivation of determining whether or not to execute a time-saving notification effect at the time of time-saving winning based on the set number of times of time-saving and the look-ahead result)
Storage means capable of storing determination information up to a predetermined number, determination means capable of performing determination based on the determination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and the determination means. a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by is a specific discrimination result; a first game state; a game state setting means capable of setting an easy-to-execute second game state; an end condition determination means capable of determining the end condition for ending the second game state set by the game state setting means; In a gaming machine having a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect for indicating the end condition determined for the second game state, before the determination by the determination means is executed It has a preliminary determination means capable of prior determination of the determination information stored in the storage means in advance, and the first effect execution means determines that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means satisfies the execution condition. A game machine KF1 characterized in that the first effect can be executed when the condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and if the lottery result is a win, a predetermined A configuration capable of setting an advantageous state for a period has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
In addition, there is also a game machine configured so that an advantageous state can be set by varying the length of the duration. There has been proposed a configuration capable of informing a player of information indicating
In such a conventional gaming machine, the longer the duration of the advantageous state is, the more advantageous it is for the player. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when information indicating a short duration is reported.
Solves the problems exemplified above, and when the notification effect for notifying information indicating the duration of the advantageous state is executed, the player's willingness to play regardless of the length of the notified duration To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by suppressing the decrease of the .

According to the gaming machine KF1, when the determination result by the preliminary determination means satisfies the execution condition, the first effect can be executed, so that the player's desire to play is not lowered. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine KF2 in the gaming machine KF1 is characterized in that the termination condition determining means can determine the termination condition to be satisfied based on at least the number of times of the determination performed during the second game state.
According to the game machine KF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine KF1, the termination condition is established based on the number of determinations by the determination means executed during the second game state, so that the game is provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. It has the effect of being able to
A gaming machine KF3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine KF1 or KF2, the execution condition can be established when the result of the preliminary determination corresponds to the specific determination result.

According to the game machine KF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine KF1 or KF2, the first effect can be executed when the result of the preliminary determination is the result of the preliminary determination indicating that the privilege game is to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.
<Characteristic KG group>
determining means capable of performing a first determination and a second determination, first identification information for indicating a first determination result corresponding to the first determination by the determining means, and corresponding to the second determination a display means capable of displaying the second identification information; dynamic display means capable of displaying the identification information in a manner for indicating the determination result; and the first identification information in a manner for indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Alternatively, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed, and granting a specific privilege as the privilege based on the specific second determination result. a state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the first determination or the second determination by the determination means is likely to be performed by making a first setting, wherein: When the specific privilege is granted in a state in which the first state is set, the first state can be set until a termination condition is satisfied as a state after the specific privilege is granted. setting control means; and said second identification information executed during a period during which dynamic display of said second identification information satisfying said termination condition is performed by granting said specific benefit corresponding to said second identification information. cancellation setting means capable of executing setting so that the termination condition is not satisfied until the dynamic display of the second identification information is terminated in response to the first determination result by the 1 determination. A gaming machine KG1 characterized by having:
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a specific hit, the lottery result is determined. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed after the performance for indicating the winning is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which a winning lottery for the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game. (Prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
Further, as the continuation period of the advantageous state set after the end of the privilege game, a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set, and the advantageous state of the first period is set. By executing the performance indicating that the player has won the prize and the performance that indicates that the player has won the prize in which the advantageous state of the second period is set, the player can grasp the lottery result in an easy-to-understand manner. A configuration has also been proposed.

However, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous and the interest in the game decreases.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the gaming machine KG1, it is determined during the dynamic display period of the second identification information that a termination condition is established in which the privilege is granted corresponding to the second identification information and the first state is not continuously set. By executing the first determination, it is possible to avoid the establishment of the end condition by the result of the first determination, so that the set period of the first state can be extended according to the game method of the player, and the interest of the game is increased. have the effect of improving
In the game machine KG1, the end condition is satisfied when the specific privilege is continuously given a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine KG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine KG1, it is possible to limit the number of times the first state is set in succession, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the excessive gambling nature.
In the gaming machine KG1 or KG2, a long dynamic display period is set to facilitate determination of the dynamic display period of the second identification information during which the specific privilege satisfying the termination condition is granted. A gaming machine KG3 characterized by:
According to the game machine KG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine KG1 or KG2, the period until the end condition is satisfied can be lengthened, so that the player is given more opportunities to avoid the end condition being satisfied. has the effect of being able to
In any one of the gaming machines KG1 to KG3, a specific effect is executed during a period during which the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed to give the specific privilege satisfying the end condition. A gaming machine KG4 characterized by:

According to the game machine KG4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines KG1 to KG3, it is possible to easily determine that the end condition is satisfied by executing the specific performance, and the first determination is performed. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the timing of switching to the game to be executed.
<Characteristic KH group> (Derivation of KG group)
determining means capable of performing a first determination and a second determination, first identification information for indicating a first determination result corresponding to the first determination by the determining means, and corresponding to the second determination a display means capable of displaying the second identification information; dynamic display means capable of displaying the identification information in a manner for indicating the determination result; and the first identification information in a manner for indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Alternatively, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the second identification information is displayed, and granting a specific privilege as the privilege based on the specific second determination result. a state setting means capable of setting a first state in which the first determination or the second determination by the determination means is likely to be performed by making a first setting, wherein: When the specific privilege is granted in a state in which the first state is set, the first state can be set until a termination condition is satisfied as a state after the specific privilege is granted. and a setting control means for canceling the termination condition during the dynamic display period of the second identification information that satisfies the termination condition by granting the specific privilege corresponding to the second identification information. and a possible release setting means.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a specific hit, the lottery result is determined. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed after the performance for indicating the winning is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which a winning lottery for the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game. (Prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
Further, as the continuation period of the advantageous state set after the end of the privilege game, a first period and a second period longer than the first period can be set, and the advantageous state of the first period is set. By executing the performance indicating that the player has won the prize and the performance that indicates that the player has won the prize in which the advantageous state of the second period is set, the player can grasp the lottery result in an easy-to-understand manner. A configuration has also been proposed.

However, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous and the interest in the game decreases.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving the problems exemplified above and improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the gaming machine KH1, it is possible to prevent the end condition from being established, in which the first state is not continuously set by the provision of the privilege corresponding to the second identification information, by the cancellation setting means. It is possible to extend the set period of the first state depending on the game method of the player, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the game machine KH1, the end condition is satisfied when the specific privilege is continuously given a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine KH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine KH1, it is possible to limit the number of times the first state is set in succession, and it is possible to suppress the excessive gambling nature.
In the gaming machine KH1 or KH2, a long dynamic display period is set to facilitate determination of the dynamic display period of the second identification information during which the specific privilege satisfying the termination condition is granted. A gaming machine KH3 characterized by:
According to the game machine KH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine KH1 or KH2, the period until the end condition is satisfied can be lengthened, so that the player is given more opportunities to avoid the end condition being satisfied. has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic KI group>
determining means capable of performing determination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means capable of displaying identification information; and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a manner for indicating a specific determination result. and a specific condition determining means capable of determining whether a specific condition is established, and specific information is stored based on the fact that the specific condition determining means has determined that the specific condition is satisfied. and a storage means capable of executing a first effect based on the fact that the specific information is stored in the first period, and the specific information is stored in a second period different from the first period. a game machine KI1 characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect based on the above.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that solves the problems exemplified above and further enhances the enjoyment of games.
According to the game machine KI1, since the specific information is stored in the first period and the second period, the effect to be executed is changed, so that the effect can be executed in accordance with the set state. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

The game machine KI1 has a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the specific condition determining means determines whether the specific condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. The storage means stores count information as the specific information based on determination that the specific condition is established, and the count information is the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed. and the game machine is capable of executing settings that are advantageous to the player when the count information is predetermined information.
According to the gaming machine KI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KI1, count information is stored when a specific condition is established, and settings are made that are advantageous to the player during the period in which the count information is predetermined information. In addition to being discriminated as a specific discrimination result by the discriminating means, it is possible to increase the willingness to enter a game ball into the ball-entering means to establish a specific condition, and to further improve the interest of the game. effective.
In the gaming machine KI1 or KI2, during the second period, the determination by the determination means is set to be more advantageous to the player than during the first period, and the second effect is set to , a game machine KI3 characterized by an effect that makes it more difficult to identify that the specific information is stored than the first effect.
According to the gaming machine KI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KI1 or KI2, it is made difficult to identify that the specific information is stored in the second period, so that determination means that facilitates determination that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to concentrate on the determination of , and there is an effect that it is possible to perform more performances in accordance with the state of the game.

<Characteristic KJ group>
determining means capable of performing determination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means capable of displaying identification information; and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a manner for indicating a specific determination result. and a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a dynamic display period in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed; condition determining means and storage means for storing specific information based on determination of establishment of the specific condition by the specific condition determining means, wherein the effect executing means is in the first period than in the case of the second period set after the elapse of the first period, it is possible to execute the first effect in which the notification information for indicating that the specific information is stored is more difficult to identify. , a gaming machine KJ1 characterized by being capable of executing a second effect for indicating information set by storing the specific information by shifting to the second period.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to the game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that solves the problems exemplified above and further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine KJ1, it is made difficult to identify that the specific information is stored in the first period, and in the subsequent second period, it is identified by the second effect that the specific information has been stored. Therefore, it is possible to identify the fact that the specific information is stored by the time difference, and concentrate on the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the determination result by the determination means in the first period, and then in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of whether or not the specific information has been stored, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
In the gaming machine KJ1, the gaming machine KJ2 is characterized in that the first period is set to be more advantageous to the player than the second period.
According to the gaming machine KJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KJ1, when the first period is advantageous, the first period is made more advantageous by making the player concentrate on the first effect corresponding to the determination result. There is an effect that it can be made to seem to be a period.
A gaming machine KJ3, characterized in that, in the gaming machine KJ1 or KJ2, the first period can be set based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine KJ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine KJ1 or KJ2, the first period is set by being determined as a specific determination result, so that the player can determine an advantageous period by determination by the determination means. The effect is that the player can expect the first period to be set and can concentrate on the dynamic display of the identification information.
In any one of the game machines KJ1 to KJ3, the specific information is count information determined when a specific condition is satisfied, and corresponds to the count information when the first period shifts to the second period. A gaming machine KJ4 characterized in that the notification mode is executed as the second effect.
According to the game machine KJ4, since the count information is made difficult to identify in the first period in any one of the game machines KJ1 to KJ3, there is an effect that the first period can be enjoyed without being hindered by the count information. .
<Characteristic KK group>
determining means capable of performing determination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means capable of displaying identification information; and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed in a manner for indicating a specific determination result. and a specific condition determining means capable of determining whether a specific condition is established, and specific information is stored based on the fact that the specific condition determining means has determined that the specific condition is satisfied. and a storage means, wherein the gaming machine has a first period and a second period different from the first period, and the execution condition of the effect executed based on the establishment of the specific condition is variable. A gaming machine KK1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to the game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that solves the problems exemplified above and further enhances the enjoyment of games.
According to the gaming machine KK1, since the execution condition of the effect executed based on the establishment of the specific condition is varied between the first period and the second period, it is possible to recognize that the specific condition is established depending on the period. There is an effect that the execution timing of the performance can be varied, and the amusement of the game can be improved by executing the performance in accordance with the state of the game.

The gaming machine KK1 has ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the specific condition determination means executes determination of establishment of the specific condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. and a gaming machine KK2, wherein count information is stored as the specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition.
According to the gaming machine KK2, since the specific condition can be established by making the ball enter the ball entering means, there is an effect that the desire to enter the ball into the ball entering means can be increased and the interest in the game can be further improved. be.
In the game machine KK2, it is advantageous to the player based on updating means capable of updating the count information corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information, and the count information being a predetermined value. A game machine KK3 characterized by having setting means capable of setting.
According to the gaming machine KK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine KK2, the count information is stored, and settings are made that are advantageous to the player up to a predetermined number of times of dynamic display. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Characteristic KL group>
determining means capable of performing determination; and state setting means capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including a first state and a second state different from the first state based on the result of determination by the determining means. and display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result, and displaying the identification information in a manner for indicating the determination result after dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. and a privilege providing means capable of providing a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. specific condition determining means capable of determining whether a specific condition is met; storage means for storing specific information based on the fact that the specific condition determining means determines that the specific condition is met; and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the type of the specific information in correspondence with the state set by the state setting means.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of amusement in games.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the problems exemplified above and further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine KL1, the corresponding effect can be executed by the effect executing means according to the type of the stored specific information and the set state, so that the effect can be executed in accordance with the state of the game. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
The game machine KL1 has ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the specific condition determination means determines whether the specific condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The storage means stores count information as the specific information based on determination that the specific condition is established, and the count information is the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed. and the gaming machine is capable of executing settings that are advantageous to the player when the count information is predetermined information.
According to the game machine KL2, in addition to the effects of the game machine KL1, the count information is stored when the specific condition is established, and the setting is made advantageous to the player during the period when the count information is predetermined information. In addition to being discriminated as a specific discrimination result by the discriminating means, it is possible to increase the willingness to enter a game ball into the ball-entering means to establish a specific condition, and to further improve the interest of the game. effective.
In the gaming machine KL2, the effect executing means can execute a first effect capable of identifying that the count information is stored based on the fact that the specific count information is stored as the count information, and the specific count information is stored. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the fact that the count information is stored is harder to identify than the first effect, based on the fact that the count information different from the count information is stored. Amusement machine KL3.

According to the gaming machine KL3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine KL2, the degree to which the player can recognize that the count information has been stored can be varied depending on the type of the stored count information. There is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner according to the game by varying the ratio of paying attention to the memorization of the information.
<Displacement means whose outer shape changes during rotation>
A rendering means having displacement means configured to be tiltable about a predetermined rotation axis is provided, and the rendering means changes its outer shape so as to extend at least in a direction away from the rotation axis during tilting of the displacement means. A game machine armor A1 characterized by being configured to be visible.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising displacement means configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and drive means for operating the displacement means, wherein the displacement means is braked by receiving an urging force at an end position. There is a game machine configured to be played (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144283).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, even if the displacement means is directed to tilt vigorously, the outer shape of the displacement means does not change when tilted, so it lacks impact and there is room for improvement in terms of the performance effect. There was a problem that there is

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor A1, since the effect means is configured to be able to change the outer shape while the displacement means is tilting, the effect of changing the outer shape while the displacement means is vigorously tilting is strong. A certain performance can be executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.
In the game machine armor A1, during tilting of the displacement means, it is configured to be able to shift from a first state of maintaining the outer shape of the tilting displacement means to a second state of changing the outer shape of the tilting displacement means. Game machine armor A2 characterized by that.
According to the game machine armor A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor A1, as the tilting operation of the displacement means progresses, the state is shifted from the first state in which the outer shape is maintained to the second state in which the outer shape changes, so that the tilting starts. It is possible to suppress the force required in the operation, and it is possible to facilitate the smooth start of the tilting operation.
In the game machine armor A2, the displacement means is configured to be in the first state at the displacement end position on the side from which tilting is started.

According to the game machine armor A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor A2, the force required to change the outer shape at the start of tilting can be eliminated. The force required can be reduced.
In the game machine A2 or A3, in the process of tilting the displacement means in the direction of transition from the first state to the second state, a section in which the degree of change in the outer shape with respect to the tilting angle of the displacement means increases. Game machine armor A4 characterized by comprising.
According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the change in the outer shape during the tilting of the displacement means in the second state is such that the further away from the side on which it was arranged in the first state (tilts ), the degree of tilting of the displacing means can be associated with the degree of change in the outer shape of the displacing means.
In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the displacement means comprises shaft side means supported so as to be capable of tilting about the predetermined rotation axis, and a structure configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the shaft side means. and means for forming a second posture by tilting from the first posture, wherein the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis is greater in the second posture than in the first posture. A game machine armor A5 characterized in that it is configured to be long.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the direction of change of the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis is determined in one direction corresponding to the tilting direction. Thus, the greater the tilt angle, the greater the degree of effect.
That is, the more the displacing means tilts, the more the constituent means moves away from the predetermined rotation axis, so the position of the center of gravity of the displacing means can be moved to the tilting tip side, and the momentum of the tilting is caused by the own weight of the displacing means. Since it can be assisted, it is possible to realize a vigorous tilting motion, and thus it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.
Furthermore, the more the displacing means is displaced in the direction opposite to the tilting direction (the rising direction), the closer the constituent means are to the predetermined rotation axis. It is possible to reduce the force required to get up.
In the game machine armor A5, the predetermined angle with the second posture as the terminal posture is higher than the degree of change in the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis with respect to the tilting of the predetermined angle with the first posture as the terminal posture. game machine upper A6, characterized by comprising degree changing means for increasing the degree of change in the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis with respect to the inclination of the game machine A6.

According to the game machine armor A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor A5, in the vicinity of the second posture, even with a small tilt angle, the distance from the predetermined rotation axis of the constituent means can be greatly changed. It is possible to perform an effect in which the outer shape of the displacement means is greatly changed without greatly changing the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the rotating shaft.
Furthermore, when causing the displacement means to rise from the second posture to the first posture (displacement in the direction opposite to tilting), the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis is greatly changed after the start of the displacement ( Therefore, the center of gravity of the displacement means can be brought closer to the predetermined rotating shaft side at an early stage, and the force required for the upright displacement can be reduced.
In the game machine A5 or A6, the constituent means includes first constituent means displaceable in a radial direction of a circle centered on the predetermined rotation axis, and second constituent means displaceable in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. A game machine armor A7 characterized by comprising a constituent means.
According to the game machine armor A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor A5 or A6, the outer shape of the displacement means can be further differentiated between the first attitude and the second attitude.

The game machine armor A8 is characterized in that, during tilting of the displacement means, the displacement of the second constituent means is started with a delay from the start of displacement of the first constituent means.
According to the game machine armor A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor A7, compared to the case where the displacement of the first constituent means and the displacement of the second constituent means are started at the same time, the required force can be reduced. can be done.
In the game machine A7 or A8, the game machine A9 is characterized in that the second component means is arranged on the shaft side means.
According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7 or A8, the displacement means can be visually recognized by the external shape in which the predetermined rotating shaft side is swollen.

In the game machine A7 or A8, the game machine A10 is characterized in that the second constituent means is arranged in the constituent means.
According to the game machine armor A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor A7 or A8, the wide external shape on the side of the constituent means allows the displacement means to be visually recognized.
<Driving force transmission at a position distant from the rotation axis>
Displacement means configured to be tiltable about a predetermined rotation axis, and drive means for displacing the displacement means, and a disposing portion disposed closer to the tip of the displacement means than the predetermined rotation axis. A game machine armor B1 characterized in that the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement means via.
A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising displacement means configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and drive means for operating the displacement means, wherein the displacement means receives an urging force at an end position and is braked. There is a game machine that is configured to be played (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144283).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the structure of the displacement means on the side of the first axis tends to be large, and it is difficult to place the displacement means with the first axis near the corner of the installation space. there were. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the arrangement of the displacement means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor B1, since the driving force of the driving means is transmitted through the arrangement portion arranged on the tilting tip side of the displacement means, the structure of the displacement means on the side of the first axis is It is possible to simplify, and it becomes easy to dispose the displacement means with the first axis near the corner of the disposition space. This makes it possible to improve the arrangement of the displacement means.
The game machine armor B2 is characterized in that, while the displacement means is tilted, the direction of the driving force of the drive means is maintained in a predetermined direction, and the displacement direction of the placement portion can be changed. .
According to the game machine armor B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor B1, the displacement direction of the arrangement portion can be changed while the direction of the driving force of the driving means is maintained, so that the operation of the driving means is improved. Albeit monotonic, the displacement of the placement can be complex.

In the game machine upper B1 or upper B2, the direction of the driving force applied to the arrangement portion approaches the linear direction passing through the predetermined rotation axis and the arrangement portion as the displacement means approaches the displacement end position on the tilting side. Game machine armor B3 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor B1 or B2, by changing the direction of the driving force applied to the arrangement portion during tilting, when the displacement means approaches the displacement end position on the tilting side, , it is possible to avoid an excessive load generated in the tilting direction.
As a result, even when the displacement means tilts at high speed, the impact when the displacement means reaches the displacement end position on the tilting side can be easily softened, so that the durability of the displacement means can be improved. can be done. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need for a cushioning material for shock absorption.
In any one of game machines A-B1 to A-B3, game machine A-B4 is characterized in that the direction of the driving force of the driving means is configured to generate a load in a predetermined linear direction on the displacement means.

According to the game machine armor B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor B1 to the game machine armor B3, the driving force can be easily stabilized. Further, the ratio of the driving force component directed in the tilting direction of the displacement means and the component directed in the direction orthogonal to the tilting direction of the displacement means is determined corresponding to the position (orientation) of the displacement means. The magnitude of the load in the tilting direction of the means can be made to correspond to the position (orientation) of the displacement means.
In the game machine armor B4, the angle between the predetermined linear direction and the rotation direction component centered on the predetermined rotation axis in the moving direction of the contact portion of the displacement means that contacts the placement portion A game machine armor B5 characterized in that the larger the distance between the arrangement portion and the predetermined rotation axis, the longer the distance.
According to the game machine armor B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor B4, even in a situation where the angle between the direction of the driving force and the displacement direction of the tilting displacement means is large, it is difficult to transmit the load in the tilting direction. Insufficient driving force for tilting the displacement means can be easily avoided by increasing the distance between the arrangement portion to which the driving force is transmitted and the predetermined rotating shaft.
That is, in the tilting range of the displacement means, by suppressing a local increase or decrease in the driving force required for tilting, the change width of the driving force required is suppressed to be small, and the selection of the driving means is facilitated. can be done.

In the game machine upper B4 or upper B5, the displacement means can be displaced between a front position of the display device and an outer position of the display device, and the position of the arrangement portion centered on the predetermined rotation axis at the front position. The angle between the direction of movement and the predetermined linear direction is greater than the angle between the direction of movement of the placement portion about the predetermined rotation axis at the outer position and the predetermined linear direction. Game machine armor B6 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor B4 or the game machine armor B5, it is possible to reduce the momentum in the rotation direction at the front position, so it is easy to stop the rotation at the target position. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the operation of rotating at high speed during the rotation and smoothly stopping the rotation at the forward position.
In the game machine armor B6, the angle between the direction of movement of the arrangement portion centered on the predetermined rotation axis and the predetermined linear direction increases from the outer position to the front position. Game armor B7 to play.
According to the game machine armor B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor B6, it is possible to slow down the rotation in stages.

In any one of game machines A-B1 to A-B7, game machine B8 is characterized in that the electrical wiring to be connected to the displacement means is connected from the predetermined rotating shaft side.
According to the game machine armor B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor B1 to the game machine armor B7, the space vacated by shifting the arrangement of the driving means to the tilting tip side can be effectively used as the arrangement space for the electric wiring. can be done.
In any one of the game machines A B1 to A B8, the arrangement portion is configured such that the distance from the predetermined rotation axis can be changed by being moved in a second predetermined linear direction, and the The game machine armor B9 is characterized in that the second predetermined straight line direction is configured so as not to pass through the predetermined rotating shaft.
According to the game machine armor B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor B1 to the game machine armor B8, a force for moving the arrangement portion in the second predetermined linear direction is applied to the displacement means about the predetermined rotation axis. It can also be used for rotational movement.

A game machine armor B10 characterized by comprising an endless belt capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means in any one of the game machine armor B1 to B9.
According to the game machine armor B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor B1 to the game machine armor B9, it is possible to easily secure a large displacement width of the displacement means.
<Varying resistance for each range>
In a game machine comprising displaceable displacement means and driving means for displacing the displacement means, mode changing means for changing the mode of force received by the displacement means during displacement in accordance with the position of the displacement means. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising:
A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising displacement means configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and drive means for operating the displacement means, wherein the displacement means is braked by receiving an urging force at an end position. There is a game machine configured to be played (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-144283).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, no consideration is given to the force received by the displacement means during displacement, and there is a possibility that the load applied to the drive means may change suddenly during displacement, and there is room for improvement. There was a problem that there is That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the displacement of the displacement means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor C1, the mode change means can change the mode of the force received by the displacement means during displacement in accordance with the position of the displacement means. The applied force can be appropriately adjusted, and sudden changes in the load applied to the driving means can be prevented. This makes it possible to improve the displacement of the displacement means.
In the game machine C1, the displacement means is capable of displacing a first range and a second range different from the first range, and the force received by the displacement means by the mode changing means is within the first range. The game machine armor C2 is characterized in that when the displacement means is arranged in the second range, it becomes larger than when it is arranged.
According to the game machine armor C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor C1, it is possible to change the mode of the force received by the displacement means for each range.

In the game machine armor C2, the first range or the second range is a range including at least one end of displacement of the displacement means.
According to the game machine armor C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor C2, it is possible to prevent a change in the force received by the displacement means at the end of the displacement.
In the game machine armor C3, the first range includes the displacement end of the displacement means.
According to the game machine upper C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine upper C3, it is possible to reduce the driving force required for the displacement of the displacement means from the displacement end.

In the game machine armor C4, the mode changing means includes relative displacement means capable of relative displacement with respect to the displacement means, and the number of the relative displacement means that is relatively displaced in the second range is the relative displacement in the first range. A game machine armor C5, characterized in that the number of the relative displacement means is greater than the number of the relative displacement means.
According to the game machine armor C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor C4, it is possible to increase or decrease the force generated by the mode changing means while enhancing the performance effect by changing the number of relative displacement means for relatively displacing.
In the game machine armor C5, the relative displacement means includes a first relative displacement means that relatively displaces in a first mode and a second relative displacement means that relatively displaces in a second mode, and the displacement means is one A game machine armor C6 characterized in that it is caused by the relative displacement of the first relative displacement means when the displacement is started from the displacement end.
According to the game machine armor C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor C5, the relative displacement means that are relatively displaced in a plurality of modes do not start the relative displacement at the same time, but the timing of the relative displacement is staggered, thereby displacing the displacement means. can be stabilized.

In the game machine armor C6, when the displacement means starts displacement from the other displacement end, the game machine armor C7 is characterized in that the displacement is caused by the relative displacement of the second relative displacement means.
According to the game machine armor C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor C6, the production effect can be improved by differentiating the relative displacement means that performs the relative displacement first for each terminal end where the displacement means starts displacement. .
In the game machine armor C3, the game machine armor C8 is characterized in that the first range includes at least one displacement end of the displacement means.
According to the game machine upper C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine upper C3, it is possible to facilitate the deceleration of the displacement means at least at one end of the displacement.

In game machine armor C8, game machine armor C9 is characterized in that the force received by the displacement means is a predetermined resistance force.
According to the game machine armor C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor C8, the predetermined resistance received by the displacement means is increased at the end of the displacement and reduced during the displacement, thereby speeding up the displacement of the displacement means. can be achieved.
In the game machine upper C8 or upper C9, the game machine upper C10 is characterized in that the first range includes both displacement ends of the displacement means.
According to the game machine upper C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine upper C8 or C9, the displacement means can be easily decelerated at both displacement ends, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be accelerated in both displacement directions. can.

In the game machine armor C10, the displacement means are composed of a pair, and the load transmitted from the pair of displacement means to the drive means side is the same at both displacement ends. .
According to the game machine armor C11, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor C10, the driving force required to start displacement from both displacement ends can be the same.
<Irradiation of Light Parallel to the Light Guide Plate Aligned with the Substrate>
a first means composed of a plate-like member, a first light-emitting means arranged on a predetermined surface side of the first means, and a first plate-like light-receiving means capable of receiving light from the first light-emitting means; , wherein the side surface of the first light receiving means, which is arranged to face the predetermined surface, is brought into contact with the predetermined surface of the first means.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a light receiving device having a plate-shaped member on which a light-emitting means is arranged, and a plate-shaped part arranged opposite to the light-emitting means of the plate-shaped member and constructed so that the light from the light-emitting means is incident. There is a gaming machine comprising means and (see, for example, JP-A-2015-198675).

However, the conventional game machine described above requires another member for aligning the light receiving means, and has a problem of complicating the structure. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the arrangement of the light receiving means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the first light receiving means can be aligned with the first means by the contact between the first means and the first light receiving means, so the first light receiving means is aligned. structure can be simplified. That is, it is possible to improve the arrangement of the light receiving means.
In the gaming machine deck D1, second light emitting means disposed on the side opposite to the predetermined side of the first means, and a plate-like second light receiving device capable of receiving light from the second light emitting means , wherein the second light receiving means has a side surface arranged to face the opposite surface and is brought into contact with the opposite surface.
According to the game machine deck D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine deck D1, the second light receiving means can also be aligned with the first means by contact with the first means. The structure for aligning the light receiving means can be simplified. That is, it is possible to further improve the arrangement of the light receiving means.

In the game machine upper D2, the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means can be fixed to the first means by pressing from a predetermined pressing means.
According to the game machine armor D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor D2, since the three members can be fixed by pressing from the pressing means, the number of fixing points for fixing a plurality of members can be reduced, and the manufacturing man-hours can be reduced. can be reduced.
In any one of game machines D1 to D3, support means configured to be able to support the first means and the first light receiving means is provided, and the support means is a first protrusion that can be fitted to the first means. A game machine upper D4 characterized by comprising a set portion and a second projecting portion that can be fitted to the first light receiving means.
According to the game machine deck D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine decks D1 to D3, by supporting the first means and the first light receiving means with the support means, in the direction parallel to the plate surface of the first means It is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first means and the first light receiving means.

In addition, when the second light receiving means is provided, the second projecting portion may be configured so as to be fittable to the second light receiving means. In this case, positional deviation between the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means in the direction parallel to the plate surface of the first means can be prevented.
In the game machine deck D3 or deck D4, second light emitting means disposed on the side opposite to the predetermined side of the first means; a second light-receiving means, wherein the second light-receiving means is in contact with the opposite surface on a side thereof arranged to face the opposite surface, and the first means extends outwardly of the second projecting portion; A game machine armor D5, wherein the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means are fixed by being pressed by a predetermined pressing means at the second protruding portion.
According to the game machine armor D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor D3 or D4, the pressing force from the means can be applied to the end of the first means. As a result, even if the pressing force becomes excessive, the end of the first means can be stopped by being damaged, and damage to the central part side where the light emitting means is arranged can be easily avoided.
The game machine upper D5 is characterized in that the first light receiving means or the second light receiving means is configured so that the shape of the abutment part that contacts the first means corresponds to the shape of the game machine upper D6.

According to the game machine deck D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine deck D5, the portion where force is applied to the first means via the first light receiving means by pressing from the predetermined pressing means, and the second light receiving means via the second light receiving means. Since the portion to which the force is applied can be made to correspond to the first means, the direction of the force applied to the first means can be easily made perpendicular to the plane, and the balance of the force applied to the front and back surfaces can be improved. As a result, cracking of the first means due to application of force in a direction inclined to the surface of the first means can be prevented.
In any one of the game machines A D3 to A D6, a second light emitting means disposed on the side opposite to the predetermined side of the first means, and capable of receiving light from the second light emitting means a plate-shaped second light-receiving means, wherein a side surface of the second light-receiving means arranged to face the opposite surface is in contact with the opposite surface; and is configured to irradiate light in a direction parallel to the irradiation direction of the second light emitting means.
According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D3 to D6, the position where the light is emitted from the first light emitting means to the first light receiving means and the position from the second light emitting means to the second light receiving means The positions where the light is irradiated can be made to correspond. As a result, it is possible to match the positions illuminated by the different light emitting parts, so that it is possible to improve the light emission performance in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means.
In the gaming machine D7, the first light emitting means comprises a plurality of light emitting parts, and the optical axis directions of the light from the plurality of light emitting parts are parallel to each other.

According to the game machine armor D8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor D7, the first means can be illuminated uniformly in a wide range by the light of the first light emitting means.
In any one of game machines A D1 to A D8, support means configured to be capable of supporting said first means and said first light emitting means is provided, and said first light receiving means is provided with said first means. The supported surface on the opposite side is supported by the supporting surface of the supporting means, the supported surface or the supporting surface has a plurality of protrusions, and the plurality of protrusions emits a predetermined light emission. A game machine armor D9 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to produce effects by receiving light from means.
According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D8, a plurality of protrusions are used as a performance surface that receives light and a structural surface that can divide the pressing force. be able to.
In the game machine deck D9, the predetermined light emitting means is arranged on the opposite side of the first light receiving means with respect to the first light emitting means.

According to the game machine shell D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine shell D9, it is possible to avoid interference between the light from the predetermined light emitting means and the light from the first light emitting means.
In any one of the game machine decks D1 to D10, the game machine deck D11 is characterized in that the first means comprises a plurality of plate-like members.
According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D10, it is possible to increase the number of locations of the first light emitting means for irradiating light to the first light receiving means. The degree of freedom in designing the size of can be improved.
In any one of the game machines A D1 to A D11, the light receiving side end of the first light receiving means is arranged closer to the light emitting means than the end of the first means on the irradiation direction side of the first light emitting means. A game machine armor D12 characterized by:

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D11, by using the first means as a shielding member, the light before being received by the first light receiving means is prevented from leaking. can do.
<Limiting Means for Restricting Direction of Passing Light>
A flow-down means that constitutes an area in which game balls can flow down on the front side, and a front-side means that is provided on the front side of the flow-down means and in which the game balls may flow down in the area located on the back side. The front side means is configured to be visible in a first direction and in a second direction in which a game ball flowing down the area is easier to see than in the first direction. Game machine armor E1 characterized by.
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a transparent plate on which decorative characters, figures, etc. are drawn is arranged on the front side of the flow path of the game ball (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-23543). reference). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the game ball flowing down the flow path is visually recognized through the decorative characters and figures. ), and the visibility of the other side becomes worse (for example, it becomes difficult to see the game ball).
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the front side means can constitute a state in which the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means is easily visible and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball, depending on the viewing direction. That is, while the front side of the front side means is visually recognized in the first direction view, the game ball is visually recognized through the front side means in the second direction view, so that the game can be played while adopting the front side means. The visibility of the game ball inside can be improved.

In the game machine E1, the front side means is made of a light-transmitting resin material, blocks the light in the first direction toward the area, and allows the light in the second direction to go to the area. A game machine E2 characterized by comprising selection means.
According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, by limiting the direction in which light can be transmitted by the direction selection means, it is possible to further clarify the difference in the degree of visibility due to the difference in the direction. can.
In the gaming machine E2, a front side forming means is arranged on the front side of the flowing-down means and constitutes a front side of an area in which game balls flow down, and the direction selecting means comprises the front side means and the front side forming means. A game machine armor E3 characterized in that it is arranged in a region between means and is constructed to have a predetermined thickness.
According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the change in visibility due to the difference in the direction view is controlled by the direction selection means arranged in the thin region between the front side means and the front side structure means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to be affected by the attenuation of light by the direction selection means itself, and it is possible to make a noticeable difference in the appearance when viewed in the first direction and when viewed in the second direction. .

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, a first flow path in which the visibility of the game ball changes in the direction in which the game ball is visually recognized by the direction selection means, and a second flow path in which the visibility of the game ball does not change in the direction in which the game ball is visually recognized. A game machine E4 characterized in that two flow paths are provided adjacent to each other.
According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the difference in the direction of the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the predetermined range makes it easy to draw attention to the second flow path and the second flow path. Both the first channel and the second channel can be equally attractive.
A game machine E5 characterized by comprising a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the first flow path in the game machine E4.
According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, even if the direction selection means makes it impossible to visually confirm that the game ball has flowed down the first flow path, the detection means detects the downfall of the game ball. Since it is possible to perform control so as to notify the player side when the game ball is dropped, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp whether or not the game ball has flowed down the first flow path.

Game machine E6 is characterized in that, in game machine E4 or E5, game balls that have flowed into the first flow path are discharged from the game area through the first flow path.
According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4 or E5, compared to the game ball flowing down the first flow path scheduled to be discharged from the game area, it flows down the game area even after flowing down. It is possible to draw more attention to the game ball flowing down the possible second flow path.
In any one of the game machines E1 to E6, the front side means includes direction selection means for blocking light in the first direction toward the area and allowing light in the second direction to go to the area. A game machine armor E7 characterized in that the direction selecting means is provided with a light-transmitting resin member so as to cover the surface thereof, and a decorative figure is formed on the surface of the resin member.
According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E6, the decorative figure on the surface of the resin member can be visually recognized by the player who looks from the first direction to the area side. Therefore, the performance effect of the front side means can be improved.

In the gaming machine upper E7, the direction selecting means is formed of a plate-like means having a plurality of plate-like portions arranged in layers.
According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E7, when the dimension of the gap in the front-rear direction is large, the gap can be easily filled by the direction selection means.
A game machine E9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines E1 to E8, a light irradiation means is provided, and the visibility of the front side means is changed by the light of the light irradiation means.
According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E8, the visibility of the front side means is changed depending on whether the light of the light irradiation means is turned on or off. Therefore, the visibility of the game ball flowing down the area can be switched in accordance with the effect.

A game machine E10 characterized in that, in the game machine E9, the range in which the visibility of the front side means is changed by the light of the light irradiation means is switchable.
According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of the game machine E9, by switching the irradiation mode of the light irradiation means, the visibility of each range of the front side means can be changed. Thereby, the direction in which the area in which the game ball flows down can be visually recognized with good visibility can be switched by the light irradiation means.
A game machine E11 in any one of the game machines E1 to E10, wherein the front side means is configured to be displaceable.
According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E10, the player's line of sight and the front side means are displaced even if the player does not move his line of sight. A case can occur in which the angle between them changes, and the visibility of the regions can change.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with substrate boxes W100 to W3100 and W700 to W9100 as examples>
a first member and a second member; an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member; and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member; In a gaming machine in which the joint member is removed and the arrangement member is removed, when the engagement member is removed, a situation equivalent to that in which the arrangement member is removed can be formed. Game machine armor WA1-0.
A gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-244900).
Here, the removed disposition member may be redistributed. In this case, it is preferable to be able to check the state of the arrangement member, but in the above-described gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in making it possible to check the state of the arrangement member.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of the state of an arrangement member.

According to the game machine armor WA1-0, the main body and the engaging part are connected by the connecting part, so that the engaging part can be separated from the engaging member (main body part) by cutting the connecting part. Thereby, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.
In this case, when the engaging member is removed, a situation equivalent to that in which the disposing member is removed can be created. This makes it possible to confirm the state of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new or reused, or whether it has been subject to unauthorized operation) based on the situation.
In the gaming machine armor WA1-0, the engaging member includes a body portion, an engaging portion that engages with the first member, and a connecting portion that connects the body portion and the engaging portion. A game machine armor WA1-1 characterized in that a concave portion is formed at a position corresponding to the connecting portion in a portion of the first member where the disposing member is disposed.
According to the game machine armor WA1-1, since the concave portion is formed in the portion where the arrangement member of the first member is arranged, a space can be formed between the arrangement member and the first member, and Since the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the connecting portion, the recess (space) is used when the connecting portion is cut (so that the tip of a tool for cutting the connecting portion can be received in the recess). , the arrangement member can be easily damaged. That is, when the cut portion is cut, a mark can be formed on the mounting member. As a result, the state of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new or reused, or whether it has been subject to unauthorized operation) can be determined based on the presence or absence of traces of the arrangement member. It can be confirmed.

Further, by forming traces on the disposing member, it is possible to suppress reuse of the disposing member.
If there is no mark on the mounting member, it can be determined that the mounting member is likely new. If there is an imprint on the disposing member, the imprint is formed on the disposing member when the engaging member is removed from the first and second members, and is removed from the first and second members to provide the same or It is an arrangement member that is arranged (reused) again in another first member and second member, or in order to perform an illegal operation on the first member and second member or the stored item, the first member Only the engaging member is removed from the member and the second member, and it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the arrangement portion is seated, leaving traces when the engaging member is removed.
In the gaming machine armor WA1-1, the first member and the second member are connected by fastening a screw, and the head of the screw is positioned in the recess.
According to the game machine armor WA1-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WA1-1, the first member and the second member are connected by fastening a screw, and the head of the screw is positioned in the recess, A trace of the mounting member formed when the connection is cut can be formed at a position corresponding to the head of the screw. Therefore, even when the head of the screw is hidden by the mounting member, the position of the screw can be grasped based on the trace of the mounting member. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability of the work of releasing the tightening of the screw.

In the game machine A WA1-1 or A WA1-2, the engaging member has a smaller opposing interval between the connecting portion and the disposing member than the opposing interval between the main body portion and the disposing member. A game machine WA1-3 characterized by being played.
According to the game machine armor WA1-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WA1-1 or the game machine armor WA1-2, the engagement member is located closer to the connection part and the arrangement member than the facing distance between the body part and the arrangement member. Since the facing distance between and is made small, the tip of the tool for cutting the connecting portion can be brought closer to the disposing member, and the disposing member can be easily damaged when the connecting portion is cut.
In any one of the game machine armors WA1-1 to WA1-3, the game machine armor WA1-4 is characterized in that at least one side surface of the connecting portion is inclined.
According to the game machine armor WA1-4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor WA1-1 to the game machine armor WA1-3, since at least one side surface of the connecting piece is inclined, the connecting piece can be cut. The tool can be moved along the slope of the side surface. Therefore, the tip of the tool can be brought into contact with the disposing member, and the disposing member can be easily damaged.

For example, when using a tool that cuts the connecting piece by sandwiching the connecting piece between a pair of blades (with the pair of blades in contact with both side surfaces), when the connecting piece is cut, the side surface The tip of the tool can be easily brought into contact with the arrangement member as the tool rotates along the inclination of .
In any one of game machines A WA1-1 to A WA1-4, the connecting portion includes a first portion and a second portion having a smaller distance between both side surfaces than the first portion. A game machine armor WA1-5 characterized in that the opposing interval between the second portion and the disposing member is smaller than the opposing interval between the first portion and the disposing member.
According to the game machine armor WA1-5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor WA1-1 to the game machine armor WA1-4, the second part has a smaller distance between both side surfaces than the first part, By cutting the second portion, the connecting portion can be easily cut.
In this case, since the facing distance between the second portion and the disposing member is smaller than the facing distance between the first portion and the disposing member, the tip of the tool for cutting the second portion is disposed. It can be brought close to the installation member, and the installation member can be easily damaged when the second portion is cut.

Also, in this manner, the facing distance between the second portion and the disposing member is made smaller than the facing distance between the first portion and the disposing member (that is, the second portion is moved toward the disposing member side). can be extended), the difference in cross-sectional area between the first portion and the second portion can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, when forming the engaging member from a resin material, its moldability can be ensured.
<Regarding the concept of the invention with the board boxes W4100 to W6100 as an example>
A game machine comprising: a first member and a second member; an engaging member formed so as to be engageable with at least the first member; and an arrangement member arranged with the first member and the second member wherein the engaging member includes a body portion, an engaging portion engaged with the first member, and a connecting portion connecting the body portion and the engaging portion; The game machine armor WA2-1 is characterized in that the joining part has a projection projecting toward the arrangement member.
A gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-244900).
Here, the removed disposition member may be redistributed. In this case, it is preferable to be able to check the state of the arrangement member, but in the above-described gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in making it possible to check the state of the arrangement member.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of the state of an arrangement member.
According to the game machine armor WA2-1, since the main body and the engaging part are connected by the connecting part, the engaging part can be separated from the engaging member (main body part) by cutting the connecting part. Thereby, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.
In this case, since the engaging member has a projecting portion projecting toward the disposing member, if an attempt is made to release the engagement with the first member by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, , the protrusion can damage the arrangement member. That is, regardless of whether or not the engagement is released, if the engagement portion is tampered with, a mark can be formed on the arrangement member. As a result, the state of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new or reused, or whether it has been subject to unauthorized operation) can be determined based on the presence or absence of traces of the arrangement member. It can be confirmed.
In addition, since traces are formed on the disposing member, reuse of the disposing member can be suppressed.

If there is no mark on the mounting member, it can be determined that the mounting member is likely new. If there is an imprint on the disposing member, the imprint is formed on the disposing member when the engaging member is removed from the first and second members, and is removed from the first and second members to provide the same or It is an arrangement member that is arranged (reused) again in another first member and second member, or in order to perform an illegal operation on the first member and second member or the stored item, the first member Only the engaging member is removed from the member and the second member, and it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the arrangement portion is seated, leaving traces when the engaging member is removed.
In the game machine armor WA2-1, the protrusion is positioned on the outer edge side of the engaging part.
According to the game machine armor WA2-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WA2-1, since the projection is positioned on the outer edge side of the engagement part, the engagement member is engaged with the first member. Even if there is, traces of the arrangement member can be easily visually recognized. That is, it is possible to easily confirm the state of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new or reused, or whether it has been subject to unauthorized operation).
A game machine armor WA2-1 or WA2-2, wherein a recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion in a portion of the first member where the arrangement member is arranged. WA2-3.

According to the game machine armor WA2-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WA2-1 or the game machine armor WA2-2, a concave portion is formed in the portion where the arrangement member of the first member is arranged, so that the arrangement A space can be formed between the member and the first member, and the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the projection. When the engagement with the first member is released, the recess (space) is used (the tip of the projection can be received in the recess), so that the mounting member can be easily damaged by the projection. That is, when the engaging portion is illegally operated, it is possible to easily form a mark on the disposing member.
In the game machine armor WA2-3, the engaging member is removed from the first member by displacing a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction while the engaging portion is operated in a direction to approach the disposing member. The concave portion corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced by the predetermined distance in the predetermined direction in a state in which the engaging portion is operated in a direction to approach the disposing member. A game machine armor WA2-4 characterized in that it is formed at least in a range where
According to the game machine armor WA2-4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WA2-3, the engagement member is displaced a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction while the engagement portion is operated in a direction approaching the arrangement member. With the engaging portion operated in a direction approaching the disposing member, the concave portion corresponds to the projection when the engaging member is displaced a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction. Since it is formed at least in the range corresponding to the part, the damage range of the arrangement member can be ensured.
That is, when the engagement between the first member and the engaging member is released by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the tip of the projection is received in the recess when the engaging member is engaged. Since the member is displaced in the predetermined direction, the mounting member can be continuously damaged by the tip of the protrusion received in the recess while the engaging member is displaced in the predetermined direction by the predetermined distance. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the damage range of the arrangement member.

In the game machine armor WA2-3, the engaging member is removed from the first member by displacing a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction while the engaging portion is operated in a direction to approach the disposing member. The concave portion corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced by the predetermined distance in the predetermined direction in a state in which the engaging portion is operated in a direction to approach the disposing member. A game machine armor WA2-5 characterized in that it is formed only in the first half of the range where the game machine armor WA2-5.
According to the game machine armor WA2-5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WA2-3, the engagement member is displaced a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction while the engagement portion is operated in a direction to approach the arrangement member. Thus, the recess can be detached from the first member, and the concave portion is a projection when the engaging member is displaced a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction in a state where the engaging portion is operated in a direction to approach the disposing member. Since it is formed only in the first half of the range corresponding to , it is possible to secure the damage range of the disposing member and to suppress the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member.
That is, when the engagement between the first member and the engaging member is released by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the tip of the projection is received in the recess when the engaging member is engaged. Since the member is displaced in the predetermined direction, the mounting member can be continuously damaged by the tip of the protrusion received in the recess while the engaging member is displaced in the predetermined direction by the front half of the predetermined distance. Therefore, it is possible to secure a damage range of the arrangement member.
On the other hand, after the engaging member is displaced in the predetermined direction by the predetermined distance, the tip of the protrusion received in the recess can be engaged with the end of the recess. As a result, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the engaging member in the predetermined direction, thereby suppressing unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes Wa100 to Wc100 and Wi100 as an example>
A game machine comprising: a first member and a second member; an engaging member formed so as to be engageable with at least the first member; and an arrangement member arranged with the first member and the second member wherein the engaging member comprises a main body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the main body portion and engaged with the first member, wherein the main body portion from which the engaging portion is separated is A game machine armor WB1-1 characterized in that it is formed such that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed by using the game machine armor WB1-1.
A gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-244900).
In the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the arrangement state of an arrangement member.

According to the game machine armor WB1-1, the engaging member includes a body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the body portion and engaged with the first member, and the engaging portion is separated. Since the arrangement state of the arrangement portion can be changed using the main body, it is possible to eliminate the need to carry a tool (for example, a cutter knife) for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. In addition, since the main body of the engaging member is relatively large and easy to hold, it is easy to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Therefore, it is possible to suitably change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.
In the game machine armor WB1-1, the engaging member has a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the main body portion is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined region of the arrangement member. A change means is provided, and in a state in which the connecting portion is cut, the main body portion can be displaced with respect to the first member and the second member to a position where the change means at least abuts on a predetermined region of the arrangement member. A game machine armor WB1-2 characterized by:
According to the game machine armor WB1-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB1-1, the main body part and the engaging part are connected by the connecting part. It can be separated from (main body). Thereby, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.
In this case, the body portion includes the changing means arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined region of the arrangement member, and in a state where the connecting portion is cut, the changing means at least contacts the prescribed region of the arrangement member. Since the main body can be displaced with respect to the first member and the second member up to and the changing means can be brought into contact with at least a predetermined region of the disposing member (to change the disposing state of the disposing member). In other words, the operation of cutting the connecting portion and removing the body portion from the first member and the second member and the operation of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the removed body portion (change means) are performed separately. Since these operations can be efficiently performed as a series of operations without the need to perform these operations, it is possible to easily change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

Further, since the changing means is arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined region of the arrangement member, it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, during manufacture of the engaging member, transportation of the engaging member, attachment (removal) of the engaging member to the first member and the second member, or separation of the main body from which the engaging portion is separated by cutting the connecting member. Workers can be prevented from being injured by changing means during disposal.
In addition, the rigidity of the main body can be increased by the amount that the changing means is formed in the main body.
In the game machine armor WB1-2, the changing means of the main body part is formed so that at least a part thereof is inclined with respect to the predetermined region of the arrangement member.
According to the game machine armor WB1-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB1-2, the changing means of the main body part is formed so that at least a part thereof is inclined with respect to the predetermined region of the arrangement member. When the portion is displaced and the changing means is brought into contact with at least a predetermined region of the disposing member, the disposing state of the disposing member can be easily changed.

In the gaming machine armor WB1-1, the engaging member has a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the main body portion is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the disposing member. A game machine armor WB1-4 characterized by comprising change means arranged at a position facing the joint.
According to the game machine armor WB1-4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB1-1, the main body part and the engaging part are connected by the connecting part. It can be separated from (main body). Thereby, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.
Since the main body portion is provided with a changing means formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and arranged at a position facing the engaging portion, the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). Thus, it is possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the changing means.
In this case, the changing means is disposed at a position facing the engaging portion, and the changing means becomes usable when the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (body portion). In the state before being separated from the engaging member (body portion), it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an operator from being injured by the changing means during manufacturing of the engaging member, transportation of the engaging member, and attachment of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.

In addition, the rigidity of the main body can be increased by the amount that the changing means is formed in the main body.
In the game machine armor WB1-4, at least one of the first member and the second member includes a contact portion, and the body portion includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the contact portion. The game machine armor WB1-5 is characterized in that, when the abutting portion abuts against the abutted portion, the changing means abuts at least a predetermined region of the arrangement member.
According to the game machine armor WB1-5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB1-4, when the contact part is brought into contact with the contacted part, the changing means is at least brought into contact with the predetermined region of the arrangement member. Therefore, when the arrangement state of the arrangement member is changed using the change means (the change means is brought into contact with at least the prescribed region of the arrangement member), the trouble of searching for the position of the prescribed region of the arrangement member is reduced. can.
In the game machine armor WB1-5, the abutted portion is formed so that the abutted portion abutted against the abutted portion can be displaced along the abutted portion, and the abutted portion moves along the abutted portion. A game machine armor WB1-6 characterized in that when said abutting portion is displaced by pressing, said changing means is displaced along a predetermined region of said arrangement member.

According to the game machine armor WB1-6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB1-5, when the contact part is displaced along the contacted part, the changing means is displaced along the predetermined area of the arrangement member. Therefore, by using the abutted portion as a guide, it is possible to easily change the arrangement state of the arrangement member (cut a predetermined region of the arrangement member by the changing means).
<Regarding the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes We100 to Wg100 as an example>
A game machine comprising: a first member and a second member; an engaging member formed so as to be engageable with at least the first member; and an arrangement member arranged with the first member and the second member wherein the engaging member includes a body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the body portion and engaged with the first member, wherein the engaging portion separated from the body portion is A game machine armor WB2-1 characterized in that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed by using the game machine armor WB2-1.
A gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-244900).
In the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the arrangement state of an arrangement member.
According to the game machine armor WB2-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the main body portion and engaged with the first member, and the engaging member separated from the main body portion. Since the joining portion can be used to change the arrangement state of the arrangement portion, there is no need to carry a tool (for example, a cutter knife) for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. In addition, since the engaging portion of the engaging member is relatively small and can suppress interference with the periphery of the disposing member (the first member or the second member), the work of changing the disposing state of the disposing member is performed. Cheap. Therefore, it is possible to suitably change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.
In the gaming machine armor WB2-1, the engaging member includes a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the engaging portion is formed so as to be capable of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. A game machine armor WB2-2 characterized by comprising changing means disposed at a position facing the main body.
According to the game machine armor WB2-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB2-1, the main body part and the engaging part are connected by the connecting part. It can be separated from (main body). Thereby, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Since the engaging portion is provided with changing means formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member and arranged at a position facing the main body portion, the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). Thus, it is possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the changing means.
In this case, the changing means is arranged at a position facing the main body, and the changing means becomes usable when the engaging part is separated from the engaging member (main body). In the state before being separated from the joining member (main body), it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an operator from being injured by the changing means during manufacturing of the engaging member, transportation of the engaging member, and attachment of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.
In the gaming machine armor WB2-1, the engaging member includes a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the engaging portion is formed so as to be capable of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. A game machine armor WB2-3 characterized by comprising change means projecting toward the arrangement member.
According to the game machine armor WB2-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB2-1, the body part and the engaging part are connected by the connecting part. It can be separated from (main body). Thereby, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Since the engaging portion is provided with changing means that is formed to be able to change the arrangement state of the disposing member and protrudes toward the disposing member, the engaging portion can be separated from the engaging member (main body portion). , it is possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the changing means.
In this case, the changing means protrudes toward the disposing member (that is, is disposed at a position facing the disposing member), and the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion) to change. Since the means can be used, it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means before the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an operator from being injured by the changing means during manufacturing of the engaging member, transportation of the engaging member, and attachment of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.
Further, since the engaging means protrudes from the engaging portion toward the disposing member, if an attempt is made to release the engagement with the first member by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, The engaging means can damage the disposing member. That is, regardless of whether or not the engagement is released, if the engagement portion is tampered with, a mark can be formed on the arrangement member. As a result, the state of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new or reused, or whether it has been subject to unauthorized operation) can be determined based on the presence or absence of traces of the arrangement member. It can be confirmed.
In addition, since traces are formed on the disposing member, reuse of the disposing member can be suppressed.

In the game machine armor WB2-2 or the game machine armor WB2-3, at least one of the first member and the second member has a contact portion, and the engaging portion is formed to contact the contact portion. a game machine armor WB2, wherein when the contact portion is brought into contact with the contacted portion, the changing means is at least brought into contact with a predetermined region of the arrangement member. -4.
According to the game machine armor WB2-4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB2-2 or the game machine armor WB2-3, when the abutting part abuts against the abutted part, the changing means is placed in the predetermined area of the arrangement member. Since it is at least abutted, the position of the predetermined region of the disposing member can be changed when the disposing state of the disposing member is changed using the changing means (the changing means is at least brought into contact with the predetermined region of the disposing member). You can suppress the trouble of searching for.
In the game machine armor WB2-4, the abutted part is formed so that the abutted part abutted against the abutted part can be displaced along the abutted part, and can move along the abutted part. A game machine armor WB2-5 characterized in that when said abutment portion is displaced by pressing, said changing means is displaced along a predetermined area of said arrangement member.
According to the game machine armor WB2-5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB2-4, when the contact part is displaced along the contacted part, the changing means is displaced along the predetermined area of the arrangement member. Therefore, by using the abutted portion as a guide, it is possible to easily change the arrangement state of the arrangement member (cut a predetermined region of the arrangement member by the changing means).

In the gaming machine armor WB2-1, the engaging member has a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the engaging portion is formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member. A game machine armor WB2-6, further comprising changing means, wherein the changing means is formed by the cut connecting portion.
According to the game machine armor WB2-6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB2-1, the body part and the engaging part are connected by the connecting part. It can be separated from (main body). Thereby, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.
The engaging portion is provided with changing means formed so as to be able to change the disposition state of the disposing member. It is possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member using the changing means.
In this case, the engaging portion of the engaging member is relatively small, and the connecting portion is even smaller than the engaging portion. It is easy to form a shape (for example, a sharp shape) suitable for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

In addition, since the changing means can be used by separating the engaging portion from the engaging member (main body portion) (that is, the cut connecting portion becomes the changing means), the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member. In the state before being separated from (the main body), it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an operator from being injured by the changing means during manufacturing of the engaging member, transportation of the engaging member, and attachment of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.
In the gaming machine armor WB2-6, the connecting portion includes a one-side connecting portion connecting an end portion of one side of the engaging portion to the body portion, and a side connecting portion opposite to the one side of the one side of the engaging portion. A game machine armor WB2-7 characterized by comprising a second side connecting portion that connects the other side end portion of the game machine WB2-7 to the main body portion.
According to the game machine armor WB2-7, the connecting portion includes a one-side connecting portion that connects the end of one side of the engaging portion to the main body portion, and the other side opposite to the one side of the engaging portion. and the other side connecting portion for connecting the end portion of the disposing member to the main body portion. By displacing the engaging portion to the other side using the other side connecting portion on the other side of the predetermined region of the member, the arrangement state of the predetermined region can be changed. That is, even if the orientation of the engaging portion is not reversed by changing the grip of the engaging portion, interference with surrounding members (the first member or the second member) is suppressed, and the end portion on one side of the predetermined region and the other end portion of the predetermined region are prevented from interfering with each other. The arrangement state can be changed (cut) up to the end of the side. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently change the arrangement state of the arrangement member in the predetermined region.
In the game machine armor WB2-6 or the game machine armor WB2-7, the connecting part has a part with a reduced cross-sectional area between the side connected to the main body part and the side connected to the engaging part. Characteristic game machine armor WB2-8.

According to the game machine armor WB2-8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB2-6 or the game machine armor WB2-7, the connecting part is disconnected between the side connected to the main body part and the side connected to the engaging part. Since the predetermined portion having a reduced area is provided, cutting of the predetermined portion facilitates cutting of the connecting portion. In addition, it is possible to easily form a shape (for example, a sharp shape) suitable for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member in the cut connecting portion (predetermined portion).
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Board Box Wd100 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: a first member and a second member; an engaging member formed so as to be engageable with at least the first member; and an arrangement member arranged with the first member and the second member wherein the engaging member includes a body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the body portion and engaged with the first member, the body portion and the body portion separated from the body portion A game machine armor WB3 is formed so as to be connectable with an engaging portion, and is formed so as to be able to change the disposing state of the disposing member using the engaging portion connected to the main body portion. -1.
A gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-244900).
In the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the arrangement state of an arrangement member.
According to the game machine armor WB3-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the main body portion and engaged with the first member. The separated engaging portion is formed to be connectable, and the engaging portion connected to the main body portion is formed to be able to change the disposition state of the disposing portion. It is possible to eliminate the need to carry a tool (for example, a cutter knife) for changing the state. In addition, the body portion of the engaging member is relatively large and easy to grip, while the engaging portion of the engaging member is relatively small and interferes with the periphery of the disposing member (first member or second member). can be suppressed, the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be easily performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.
In the game machine armor WB3-1, the game machine armor WB3-2 is characterized in that a part of the engaging part that engages with the first member is connected to the main body part.
According to the game machine armor WB3-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB3-1, the engaging part is connected to the main body at the part that is engaged with the first member. There is no need to separately provide a portion to the engaging portion. That is, the part engaged with the first member can also be used as the part connected to the main body. Therefore, the shape of the engaging portion can be simplified.

In the game machine armor WB3-1 or the game machine armor WB3-2, the engaging member includes a regulating portion formed in the main body portion so as to be able to regulate a posture for engaging with the first member, and the main body portion includes the regulating member. A game machine armor WB3-2 characterized in that a portion is connected to the engaging portion.
According to the game machine armor WB3-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WB3-1 or the game machine armor WB3-2, the engagement member has a regulating portion formed in the main body so as to be capable of regulating the attitude of engagement with the first member. Since the regulating portion of the main body is connected to the engaging portion, there is no need to separately provide a portion for connecting to the engaging portion on the main body. That is, the portion (defining portion) that defines the posture of the engaging member can also be used as a portion that is connected to the engaging portion. Therefore, the shape of the engaging portion can be simplified.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Board Box Wj100 as an Example>
A game comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged with the first member and the second member In the machine, the engaging member includes a body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the body portion and engaged with the first member, and the engaging portion is engaged with the first member. The first member or the second member is formed to be displaceable in a predetermined direction in a combined state, and the first member or the second member is disengaged from the first member with respect to the engaging member displaced in the predetermined direction. A game machine armor WC1-1 characterized by comprising suppressing means formed so as to be capable of suppressing the displacement of the engaging portion in the direction in which the game machine WC1-1 is pushed.
A gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-244900).

In the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in suppressing unauthorized removal of the engaging member.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing unauthorized removal of an engaging member.
According to the game machine WC1-1, by separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body portion, even when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member, the first member and the second member The engaging member (body portion) can be removed.
Here, by displacing (elastic deformation) the engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion is released, and the first member and the first member are disengaged. Since there is a possibility that the engaging member may be tampered with from the two members, the engaging member is formed to be displaceable in a predetermined direction while the engaging portion is engaged with the first member. The second member includes a suppressing means formed so as to be capable of suppressing the displacement of the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released with respect to the engaging member displaced in the predetermined direction. Unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.

In the game machine armor WC1-1, the first member or the second member displaces the engaging member in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction from a position where displacement of the engaging portion can be suppressed by the suppressing means. Game machine armor WC1-2 characterized by comprising a regulation means for regulating the.
According to the game machine armor WC1-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WC1-1, the first member or the second member is such that the engagement member moves in a predetermined direction from a position where the displacement of the engagement portion can be suppressed by the suppressing means. Since the restricting means for restricting displacement in the opposite direction is provided, it is possible to suppress unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging portion and the first member. As a result, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.
In the game machine armor WC1-2, the restricting means is formed to be able to engage with the engaging portion of the engaging member displaced in the predetermined direction, and by engaging with the engaging portion, the engaging portion A game machine armor WC1-3 characterized in that it is possible to restrict displacement of a member in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.
According to the game machine armor WC1-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WC1-2, the restricting means is formed so as to be able to engage with the engaging portion of the engaging member displaced in a predetermined direction, and engages with the engaging portion. Since the engaging member can be restricted from being displaced in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the displacement of the engaging member is restricted by the restricting means simply by displacing the engaging member in the predetermined direction. The state can be formed, and the workability of the assembly work of the engaging member can be improved.

In the game machine armor WC1-3, the first member or the second member includes shielding means for shielding the restricting means.
According to the game machine armor WC1-4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WC1-3, the first member or the second member includes shielding means for shielding the restricting means, so that the engagement between the engaging portion and the restricting means is prevented. Unauthorized release can be suppressed. As a result, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Board Boxes Wk100, Wl100, and Wr100 as Examples>
a first member and a second member; an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least one of the first member and the second member; and an arrangement arranged on the first member and the second member , wherein at least one of the first member or the second member and the engaging member are engaged at a plurality of locations, and engagement is achieved by interaction of engagement at the plurality of locations. A game machine armor WC2-1 characterized in that it is formed to be difficult to release.
A gaming machine comprising a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-244900).

In the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in suppressing unauthorized removal of the engaging member.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing unauthorized removal of an engaging member.
According to the game machine armor WC2-1, at least one of the first member or the second member and the engaging member are engaged at a plurality of locations, and the interaction of the engagement at the plurality of locations makes it difficult to release the engagement. Therefore, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.
In the game machine armor WC2-1, the engaging member includes a main body, and a first engaging part and a second engaging part formed separably from the main body and engaged with the first member. , the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion engage the second engaging portion after the first engaging member is engaged with the first member as the engaging member is displaced; is formed to be engageable with the first member, and the first member is provided with restricting means for restricting displacement of the first engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released. Game machine armor WC2-2 characterized by.

According to the game machine armor WC2-2, by separating (cutting) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion from the main body portion, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion engage with the first member. Even in this state, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.
Here, by displacing (elastic deformation) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the first member, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. There is a possibility that the engaging member may be disengaged from the joining portion and the engaging member may be removed from the first member and the second member. In addition, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are arranged such that, following the displacement of the engaging member, the second engaging portion engages with the first member after the first engaging member is engaged with the first member. The first member is formed to be engageable with the member, and the first member includes a restricting means for restricting displacement of the first engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released. Unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the second member can be suppressed.
That is, the displacement of the first engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released can be regulated by the regulating means, and the displacement of the first engaging portion in the direction in which the regulating movement of the first engaging portion by the regulating means is released. Displacement of the joining member can be restricted by engagement between the first member and the second engaging portion. As a result, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.
In the game machine armor WC2-2, the displacement direction of the engaging member when the first engaging portion is engaged with the first member, and the direction in which the second engaging portion is engaged with the first member. The game machine armor WC2-3 is characterized in that the direction of displacement of the engaging member when the game machine WC2-3 is displaced is substantially the same direction.

According to the game machine armor WC2-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WC2-2, the displacement direction of the engagement member when the first engagement part is engaged with the first member and the second engagement part Since the direction of displacement of the engaging member when is engaged with the first member is substantially the same direction, for example, the engaging member is displaced in the first direction to displace the first engaging portion. After engaging, the engaging member is displaced in the second direction, and the engaging member is displaced in the second direction to engage the second engaging portion, without performing a two-step operation. The engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be performed only by an operation in one direction during attachment. Therefore, the attachment operation of the engaging member can be simplified, and the work efficiency can be improved.
In addition, in a configuration that requires a two-step operation, if the operator forgets to operate in the second direction, the second engaging portion is not engaged, and the first member and the second member are separated from the engaging member. to engage the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion only by operating in one direction when attaching the engaging member to the first member and the second member, where there is a risk of unauthorized removal of the engaging member. can prevent the operator from forgetting the necessary operation, and the second engaging portion can be reliably engaged.
In the game machine armor WC2-1, the engaging member includes a main body, a first engaging part separably formed from the main body and engaged with the first member, and separable from the main body. a second engaging portion engaged with the second member, wherein the direction of displacement of the first engaging portion disengages the first engaging portion from the first member; and , a game machine armor WC2-4 characterized in that a direction of displacement of said second engaging portion in which engagement between said second engaging portion and said second member is released is opposite to a direction of displacement.
According to the game machine armor WC2-4, by separating (cutting) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion from the main body portion, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion engage with the first member. Even in this state, the engaging member (body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Here, by displacing (elastic deformation) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member and the second member is released, the first member and the second member and the second member There is a possibility that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion will be disengaged and the engaging member will be removed from the first member and the second member. In addition to the effects of the game machine armor WC2-1, the direction of displacement of the first engaging portion in which the engagement between the first engaging portion and the first member is released, and the direction of displacement between the second engaging portion and the second member. Since the direction of displacement of the second engaging portion in which the engagement is released is the opposite direction, when one of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement is released, , the other of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be displaced so that the engagement is maintained. As a result, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.
In the gaming machine armor WC2-1, the engaging member includes a body portion and an engaging portion separably formed from the body portion and engaged with the first member, and the engaging portion includes the Two portions, the first portion and the second portion, of the engaging portion are engaged with the first member, and one of the first portion and the second portion is disengaged from the first member. A game characterized in that when the engaging portion is displaced, the engaging portion is displaced in a direction in which the engagement between the other of the first portion or the second portion and the first member is maintained. Armor WC2-5.
According to the game machine WC2-5, by separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body portion, even if the engaging portion is engaged with the first member, from the first member and the second member The engaging member (body portion) can be removed.
Here, by displacing (elastic deformation) the engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement between the first portion and the second portion and the first member is released, the first member and the engaging portion (the first portion and the 2 part) and remove the engaging member from the first member and the second member. In addition to the effect, when the engaging portion is displaced in a direction in which the engagement between one of the first portion and the second portion and the first member is released, the other of the first portion or the second portion and the first member are disengaged. Since the engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement is maintained, it is possible to make it difficult to release the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion. As a result, unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the substrate boxes Wo100 to Wq100 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a first member, a second member, and an engaging member formed to be engageable with at least the first member, comprising a mounting member, wherein the engaging member comprises a main body portion and its an engaging portion formed separably from the body portion and engaged with the first member, wherein the mounting member is formed so as to be attachable to the engaging portion, and the first member and the engaging portion A game machine armor WD1-1, wherein displacement of the engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the game machine armor WD1-1 is released can be suppressed by the mounting member.
A gaming machine is known that includes a first member, a second member, and an engagement member formed to be engageable with at least the first member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).
In the gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in suppressing unauthorized removal of the engaging member.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing unauthorized removal of an engaging member.

According to the game machine armor WD1-1, by separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body portion, even when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member, the first member and the second member The engaging member (body portion) can be removed.
Here, by displacing (elastic deformation) the engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion is released, and the first member and the first member are disengaged. Since there is a risk that the engaging member may be tampered with from the two members, the mounting member is formed so as to be attachable to the engaging portion, and the engaging member is engaged in a direction in which the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion is released. Since displacement of the joining portion can be suppressed by the attachment member, it is possible to suppress unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member.
On the other hand, even if the mounting member is attached to the engaging portion, it is possible to separate (cut) the engaging portion from the main body. , the engaging member (body portion) can be easily removed from the first member and the second member.
In the game machine armor WD1-1, when the engaging portion is displaced in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the first surface side of the engaging portion approaches the first member, and the A game machine armor WD1- characterized in that, when an attachment member is attached to the engagement portion, a portion of the attachment member is arranged between the first surface of the engagement portion and the first member. 2.

According to the game machine armor WD1-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WD1-1, when the engaging part is displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the first surface of the engaging part side is proximate to the first member and the mounting member is attached to the engaging portion, a portion of the mounting member is disposed between the first surface of the engaging portion and the first member, thereby The displaceable distance of the engaging portion in the disengagement direction can be shortened by the part of the mounting member. As a result, the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion can be made difficult to be released, so that unauthorized removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member can be suppressed.
In the game machine armor WD1-2, the attachment member is formed so as to be attachable to the engagement portion engaged with the first member.
According to the game machine armor WD1-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WD1-2, the attachment member is formed so as to be attachable to the engaging portion engaged with the first member, so that it can be engaged with the first member. Displacement of the engaging portion is not hindered by a portion of the mounting member when engaging the portion. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly engage the engaging portion with the first member (that is, attach the engaging member to the first member and the second member). In addition, since the engagement margin between the first member and the engaging portion can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress disengagement between the first member and the engaging portion.
In the game machine armor WD1-2 or armor WD1-3, an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is provided, and a part of the mounting member to which the engaging portion is mounted is the second member. A game machine armor WD1-4, wherein the game machine armor WD1-4 is formed as a protrusion protruding from one surface, and the protrusion protrudes toward the arrangement member arranged in the first member.

According to the game machine armor WD1-4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WD1-2 or the game machine armor WD1-3, it has an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member, and the engagement part is attached. A part of the mounting member is formed as a protrusion protruding from the first surface, and the protrusion protrudes toward the disposing member disposed on the first member, so that it can be engaged from the main body. If you try to release the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion without separating (cutting) the portion (that is, if you try to displace the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released) Then), the protrusion can damage the disposing member. That is, traces can be formed on the mounting member. As a result, the state of the arrangement member (whether the arrangement member is new or reused, or whether it has been subject to unauthorized operation) can be determined based on the presence or absence of traces of the arrangement member. It can be confirmed.
In addition, since traces are formed on the disposing member, reuse of the disposing member can be suppressed.
A game machine armor WD1-5 characterized in that, in the game machine armor WD1-4, a recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion in a portion of the first member where the arrangement member is arranged.
According to the game machine armor WD1-5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor WD1-4, since a concave portion is formed in the portion where the arrangement member of the first member is arranged, the arrangement member and the first member In addition, since the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the projection, the first member and the engaging portion can be separated without separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body. When trying to release the engagement (that is, when trying to displace the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released), the recess (space) is used (the tip of the protrusion is pushed into the recess). acceptable), the mounting member can be made susceptible to breakage by the protrusions. That is, when the engaging portion is illegally operated, it is possible to easily form a mark on the disposing member.

<Configuration for reducing waste balls>
A game ball shooting device for shooting game balls, a game area forming means for forming a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball shooting device flow down, and a game area forming means arranged in the game area for detecting passage of the game balls. A gaming machine comprising a detection means and an operation means controlled in a predetermined pattern based on detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means, wherein a game ball passing through the detection means reaches the operation means. A game machine armor YA1 characterized by comprising guide means for guiding along a predetermined route.
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a movable accessory that opens and closes after a specified time has passed since the passage of a game ball is detected in the detection area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-000562). . However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the game ball that has passed through the detection area flows down in a plurality of ways, the game ball that has passed through the detection area can move down depending on the way the game ball flows. Since the case where the game ball is picked up by the player and the case where the game ball is dropped from the movable accessory will occur at random, if there are many game balls that are dropped from the movable accessory, the player will have to adjust the game machine shop to be disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it is easy to misunderstand that the player is playing the game, and that the player may feel dissatisfied that the game cannot be played in an equal environment.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor YA1, the game ball does not flow down randomly after passing through the detecting means, and the guiding means guides the game ball to the operating means. It is possible for the player to understand that the difference between being picked up by the operating means and dropping from the operating means is due to the operation control (control based on the success or failure of the lottery performed in advance at the time of winning). That is, it can be understood that the operation control pattern of the operation means is set based on the flow time defined by the configuration of the guide means, and is not based on the adjustment of the game machine shop. It can make you feel that you are playing in the environment.
It should be noted that the game area means the area where the game balls flow down until the profit given to the player by the game balls that have flowed down is determined, and is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board, for example. For example, a flow path formed on the upstream side of a detection device that draws a lottery for the first symbol by detecting the passage of a game ball, and is disposed inside the game board or on the back side of the game board. Roads are also included in the play area.

In the game machine armor YA1, the game machine armor YA2 is characterized in that the guide means is arranged so as to pass through the back side of the game area.
According to the game machine armor YA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YA1, the game ball guided by the guide means can be hidden by the game ball flowing down in the game area, so the area from the guide means to the operation means can be noticed. You can improve your strength.
In the game machine upper YA2, the game ball guided by the guide means flows down toward the front side of the game board forming the game area within a predetermined range.
According to the game machine armor YA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor YA2, the game ball guided by the guide means flows down to the front side of the game board, so that the player can visually recognize the game ball as if it is approaching. can be done. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guiding means can be made conspicuous in comparison with the game ball that normally flows downward.

In any one of the game machine armors YA1 to YA3, the game machine armor YA4 is characterized in that the guide means is configured to be able to manage the time required for the game ball to flow down from the detection means to the action means.
According to the game machine armor YA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors YA1 to YA3, it is possible to easily set the operation control of the pattern of picking up the game ball with the operation means and the operation control of the pattern of dropping the game ball. .
In any one of the game machine uppers YA1 to YA4, the operating means is configured to guide the flow of the game ball in a rolling manner in the closed state or the open state, and the width dimension of the game ball in the flow direction is equal to the width of the game ball. A game machine armor YA5, comprising a first action part set to a diameter not more than two times, wherein a game ball guided by the guide means is guided to the first action part.
According to the game machine armor YA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors YA1 to YA4, the first operation part can shorten the time for the game ball to be guided to the operation means, and the game ball can be guided by the operation means. can be guided one ball at a time. The width of the operating means can be reduced.

In the game machine upper YA5, the operation means includes a second operation part longer than the first operation part, and the game ball moves through the second operation longer than the period required for the game ball to roll on the first operation part. A game machine armor YA6 characterized in that the period required for rolling the part is longer.
According to the game machine armor YA6, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor YA5, as a guide mode of the game ball that similarly reaches the operation means, when the operation means operates in the same operation pattern, the game ball is first It is possible to change how the game ball flows downstream depending on whether it reaches the action part or the second action part.
In the game machine armor YA6, a game ball guided to the first action part and a game ball guided to the second action part are guided to different flow areas.
According to the game machine armor YA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YA6, it is possible to configure the guiding direction of the ball in a plurality of directions using one operation means, so the appearance when the game ball is guided by the operation means can be realized in multiple ways.

In the game machine upper YA7, a game ball that has passed through the detection means is configured to be guided to the first action section, and a game ball that has flowed down without passing through the detection means is guided to the second action section. Game machine armor YA8 characterized by obtaining.
According to the game machine armor YA8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YA7, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the detection means from being bounced by other game balls and causing a guide failure.
In any one of the game machine uppers YA6 to YA8, a game ball guided to the first action section and a game ball guided to the second action section are prevented from colliding on the action means. Game machine armor YA9.
According to the game machine armor YA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors YA6 to YA8, it is possible to easily avoid the collision of the game balls rolling on the operating means and the occurrence of non-uniform flow down. can.

In addition, a wall may be placed between the game ball placed on the first action part and the game ball placed on the second action part to separate them, or even if there is no wall, the collision may occur. It may be managed in such a way that it does not flow.
In the game machine armor YA9, a game ball guided to the first action part flows down in a direction opposite to a flowing direction of a game ball guided to the second action part.
According to the game machine armor YA10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YA9, unlike the case where the game ball guided to the first action part and the game ball guided to the second action part flow down in the same direction, Collision of game balls can be avoided regardless of the flowing speed of the game balls.
In addition, the direction in which the game ball flows may be reversed left and right, or reversed front and back. Alternatively, it may be in the opposite direction along a predetermined trajectory (for example, a circular trajectory).

In any one of the gaming machine armors YA1 to YA10, the gaming machine armor YA11 is characterized in that the guiding means comprises a plurality of routes as the predetermined routes.
According to the game machine armor YA11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors YA1 to YA10, it is possible to increase the flow pattern of the game ball while reducing the types of operation patterns of the operation means.
<Sensors are placed on the path of 8 chances and the ball is pulled out from the unfavorable side to the advantageous side>
A game ball launching device for shooting game balls, a game area forming means for forming a game area in which the game balls launched by the game ball launching device flow down, a forming means for forming a flow-down path of the game balls, and the configuration thereof A first path arranged on the downstream side of the means for guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance, and a second path arranged on the downstream side of the constituent means for guiding the game ball to the second ball entrance. and , wherein the gaming machine YB1 is characterized by comprising moving means for moving the game ball flowing down the first path to the second path side.
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which the course of a game ball changes periodically in the order in which the game ball passes through a ball entrance (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). . However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the advantage or disadvantage of entering a ball into the ball entrance changes only in the period in which the game ball enters, and a generally advantageous state or a generally disadvantageous state There is a problem that it is difficult to form In other words, there is a problem that the range of change in the player's advantage is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine YB1, the moving means determines whether the game ball that has flowed down the path configured by the constituent means will enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. Since it can be generated in a chaotic manner, it is possible to expand the range of change in the degree of advantage of the player compared to the case where the ball entrance into which the game ball enters changes periodically.
A game machine YB2 characterized in that, in the game machine YB1, the path configured in the constituent means is a branch path.
According to the game machine armor YB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YB1, the action of the moving means not only causes a change in the flow of the game ball, but also causes a change in the flow of the game ball due to the branching of the path. Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the game ball that has entered the constituent means.
The gaming machine YB1 or YB2 is provided with detection means configured to be capable of detecting the passage of the game ball flowing down the path, and the movement means is operable in a manner that affects the flow of the game ball in the path. In the first state, the game ball is thrown toward the first ball entrance, and in the second state, the game ball is thrown toward the second ball entrance. A game machine YB3 characterized in that it is configured to throw a ball, and is configured to be able to control its operation based on the detection of the passage of a game ball by the detection means.

According to the game machine armor YB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor YB1 or YB2, depending on the operation pattern of the operation means, the game ball entering the constituent means enters the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. Since it is possible to switch whether the ball enters the mouth, the periodicity of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters can be easily reduced. As a result, compared to the case where the ball entrance into which the game ball enters changes periodically, it is possible to expand the range of change in the degree of advantage for the player.
In the game machine armor YB3, the operating means is configured to be capable of guiding a game ball flowing down the outside of the component means.
According to the game machine armor YB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YB3, means for guiding the game ball flowing down the flow path constituted by the constituent means and the game ball flowing down outside the flow path constituted by the constituent means are provided. The guiding means can be used as the operating means.
The gaming machine YB3 or YB4 is provided with a second detection means disposed outside the path of the configuration means, and the game ball passing through the detection means is guided to the operation means, and the second detection means is provided. A gaming machine armor YB5 characterized in that the manner in which a passing game ball is guided to the operating means is different.

According to the game machine armor YB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YB3 or YB4, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of guidance modes to the operation means.
It should be noted that the difference in guidance mode is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the path of the game ball may be different, or the flow speed of the game ball may be different.
In any one of the game machines YB3 to YB5, the operating means changes the flowing direction of the game ball between the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by switching between the first state and the second state. Armored YB6.
According to the game machine armor YB6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors YB3 to YB5, the player can easily grasp the change in the flowing direction of the game ball.

In any one of the game machines YB3 to YB6, the detection means is controlled such that a predetermined pattern varies for a predetermined period based on the passage of the game ball, and the game ball does not enter the path during the predetermined period. A game machine YB7 characterized in that it is set to be shorter than the period required for the game machine to pass through the detection means.
According to the gaming machine YB7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines YB3 to YB6, by maintaining a state where the number of game balls placed between the entrance of the path of the constituent means and the detection means is one or less , it is possible to avoid the situation in which the symbols are fluctuating at the time when the game ball passes through the detecting means. Therefore, it is possible to start the variation of the predetermined pattern immediately after the game ball passes through the detecting means.
Therefore, the timing when the game ball passes the detection means can be matched with the timing when the operation control of the operation means is started based on the game ball passing the detection means.
In the game machine YB7, the operation means has a first control mode in which the game ball detected by the detection means is not guided, and a second control mode in which the game ball detected by the detection means is guided. A game machine armor YB8 characterized by being switchable.

According to the gaming machine YB8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine YB7, even if the operation of the operating means is executed, depending on the difference in the control mode, the game ball may or may not be guided by the operating means. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the action of the action means.
In the gaming machine YB8, the switching of the control mode is configured to be executable each time the detection means detects, and the type of the switchable control mode is configured to be changeable each time a jackpot game is played. Characteristic game machine armor YB9.
In any of the game machines YB3 to YB9, the profit obtained by the player by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance and the player by entering the game ball into the second ball entrance A game machine armor YB10 characterized in that it is different from the profit obtained.
According to the game machine armor YB10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors YB3 to YB9, it is possible to improve attention to the action means.

<Structure of Flowing Down to Operating Means at Multiple Positions>
A game ball shooting device for shooting game balls, a game area forming means for forming a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball shooting device flow down, and a game area forming means arranged in the game area for detecting passage of the game balls. In a game machine comprising a detection means and an operation means whose operation is controlled based on detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means, the operation means includes a first flow-down position where the game ball can flow down. , and a second downstream position different from the first downstream position, so that a game ball flowing down at the first downstream position and a game ball flowing down at the second downstream position are different. A game machine armor YC1 characterized by comprising:
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is released when a game ball is detected by a detecting means, and the game ball is guided to a winning opening by the movable accessory. See JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the mode in which the game ball is guided to the movable accessory is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the attention of the movable accessory.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor YC1, the operation means has a plurality of falling positions for the game ball to flow down, and the flowing state differs depending on which position the game ball flows down. Variations can be provided in the manner in which the game ball is guided to the movable accessory, and the attention of the movable accessory can be improved.
In the game machine armor YC1, the above-mentioned flow mode is the flow velocity, the flow direction, or the flow interval of the game ball.

According to the game machine armor YC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YC1, it is possible to vary the flow of the game balls flowing down along the operating means, and to improve the attention to the game balls.
In the gaming machine YC1 or YC2, the gaming machine YC3 is characterized in that the first falling position is set as a position where a game ball that has passed through the detecting means can flow down.
According to the game machine YC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine YC1 or YC2, by confirming that the game ball has reached the first flow position, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has passed through the detection means. , the need to visually recognize the detection means can be eliminated.
In addition, game balls that have passed through the detecting means and game balls that have not passed through the detecting means flow down at different positions of the operating means, thereby reducing the number of game balls that can be placed on the operating means at the same time. , a shooting mode in which all balls are aimed to pass through the detecting means, or a shooting mode in which some game balls are aimed to deviate from the detecting means.

In the game machine YC3, a game ball passing through the detection means is configured as a non-branching path.
According to the game machine armor YC4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YC3, by confirming that the game ball has reached the first flow-down position, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has passed through the detecting means.
In any of the game machines YC1 to YC4, the flow path of the game ball that has flowed down the first flow position and the flow path of the game ball that has flowed down the second flow position are predetermined downstream of the operating means. A game machine YC5 characterized by joining at a joining position.
According to the game machine armor YC5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors YC1 to YC4, the profit obtained from the game ball flowed down by the operation means can be made the same regardless of the flow position. .

In the gaming machine YC5, the merging position is arranged at a position away from the operating means.
According to the game machine armor YC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YC5, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load generated by the game ball at the time of merging on the operation of the operating means. Thereby, the operation of the operation means can be smoothly performed.
In the gaming machine YC5, the gaming machine YC7 is characterized in that the merging position is arranged close to the operating means.
According to the game machine YC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine YC5, the detection device for detecting the passage of the game ball flowing down along the operating means can be arranged on the upstream side, so that profits can be generated early. can be made Therefore, it is possible to shorten the waiting time from when the game ball flows down along the operating means until profit is generated.

A game machine YC8 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines YC5 to YC7, a game ball is configured to fall downward at the merging position.
According to the game machine YC8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines YC5 to YC7, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of situations such as reverse flow of balls after merging and ball clogging.
A game characterized in that, in any one of the game machines YC1 to YC8, a game ball flowing down the first downstream position and a game ball flowing down the second downstream position have the same flowing direction. Armored YC9.
According to the game machine YC9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines YC1 to YC8, it is possible to unify the side to which the game ball that has reached the operating means can be focused, so that the player can easily focus on the part. can be grasped.

A game characterized in that, in any one of the game machines YC1 to YC8, a game ball flowing down the first downstream position and a game ball flowing down the second downstream position are constructed so as to flow in different directions. Armored YC10.
According to the game machine YC10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines YC1 to YC8, by visually recognizing the direction in which the game ball flows, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has flowed down the first downstream position or the game ball has flowed down the second position. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has flowed down at the flow-down position, it is possible to grasp the flow-down direction of the game ball on the downstream side of the operation means even in a configuration in which the game balls arranged close to the operation means are overlapped back and forth and difficult to see. can be done.
In any of the game machines YC1 to YC10, a first ball entrance configured to be able to give a first profit to the player when a game ball enters, and a game ball entering the player and a second ball entrance that is configured to be able to impart a second profit greater than the first profit, wherein the first flow-down position is a flow-down path of a gaming ball that has entered the first ball entrance. , wherein the operating means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down the first downstream position to the second ball entrance side.
According to the game machine armor YC11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors YC1 to YC10, before the profit is given by the game ball entered into the first ball entrance by the operation means, the game ball is moved to the first. 2 It can be pulled out to the entrance side.

As a result, for example, a game machine with a left-right symmetrical board surface (a special symbol lottery winning opening and a winning opening that opens and closes in a special game are arranged vertically in the center position of the left and right, and even if you hit left in those winning openings, Even in a game machine having a board configuration that allows a ball to be entered by striking, the operation of the operation means can reduce the frequency of profit resulting from entering the first ball entrance.
Therefore, in order to reduce the frequency of ball entry into the first ball entrance, it is possible to reduce the necessity of constructing a right-handed path in which game balls are not guided to the first ball entrance, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the game area. can be made
<Advantages and Disadvantages of the First Channel and the Second Channel Branched by the Branching Means Can Be Changed>
a game ball launching device for shooting game balls; a game area forming means for forming a game area into which game balls launched by the game ball shooting device flow; A first profit obtained by a player when a game ball flows down the first flow path, and when a game ball flows down the second flow path. A game machine YD1 characterized by comprising a changing means configured to be able to change the magnitude relationship between the second profit obtained by the player and the second profit.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a difference in the profit expected to be obtained by a player depending on whether a game ball that falls in a predetermined ball entry area falls to the left or to the right. There is (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the direction in which the game ball flows is fixed, so if the direction in which the game ball flows down at the branch position can be confirmed, the profit to be obtained after that can be predicted. Since the player's concentration peaks before the game ball reaches the fixed area where the profit is fixed, the attention to the route from the branch position to the fixed area will decrease, and the game area will be produced. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of using it as a region.

On the other hand, according to the game machine YD1, the changing means can switch the magnitude relationship between the first profit and the second profit, so that the peak of the player's concentration is set by the game ball. Since it can be brought to the time when the game ball enters the definite area where the profit is actually determined, not the time when the ball enters the 1st flow path or the 2nd flow path, the path from the branch area to the definite area You can keep your attention high. As a result, the game area can be effectively used as the performance area.
Note that the timing at which the profit is fixed is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be the time when the game ball passes through the detection opening (detection area, specific area, etc.), or the time when the profit determined by the game ball passing through the detection opening is notified to the player side (when the player when the profit can be recognized).
The game machine armor YD1 is characterized by comprising a flow-down area for causing game balls to flow down to the front side when the player is given the larger profit of the first profit or the second profit. Game machine armor YD2.
According to the game machine armor YD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YD1, when the game ball differs from the normal flow down mode (downward flow down mode), a large profit is given to the player. By visually recognizing the ball, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that a large profit has been awarded.

A game machine YD3 characterized in that in the game machine YD1 or YD2, the first flow path and the second flow path are configured so as to be able to merge, and there is a vertical position difference in the entry position to the confluence position.
According to the game machine YD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine YD1 or YD2, even if the game balls enter the merging position from the first flow path and the second flow path at the same time, the load at the time of collision is increased or decreased. Since it occurs in the direction (the direction intersecting the first flow path and the second flow path), it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the game ball.
In the game machine YD3, the game machine YD4 is characterized in that the entry position is arranged such that the side where the game balls pass more frequently is located on the lower side.
According to the game machine YD4, in addition to the effect of the game machine YD3, it is possible to easily avoid a game ball that frequently passes through a predetermined entry position from entering another entry position by mistake.

In any one of the gaming machines YD1 to YD4, the first flow path and the second flow path are provided with detection means for detecting passage of the game ball, and based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means. an operation means whose operation is controlled in a predetermined pattern, the distance between the detection means and the operation means in the first flow path, the distance between the detection means and the operation means in the second flow path, and A game machine YD5 characterized in that it is configured differently.
According to the game machine YD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines YD1 to YD4, while the operation control of the operation means is the same, the case where the game ball flows down the first flow path and the second flow path are played. Whether or not the action means acts on the game ball can be made different between when the ball flows down.
<Switch between 3 states>
A game ball shooting device for shooting game balls, a game area forming means for forming a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball shooting device flow down, and a configuration in which the game balls flowing down the game area can enter the game area. a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, detection means arranged in the game area for detecting passage of the game ball, and operation based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means. a first state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entrance and a state in which a game ball easily enters the second ball entrance, corresponding to the operation mode of the operation means. The gaming machine YE1 is characterized by being switchable between a second state in which a ball is easy to enter and a third state in which a game ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a first start port and a second start port (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only the first start hole and the second start hole (first second start hole) are in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, and only the second start hole (second second start hole) Although it is possible to switch between the state in which it is easy to enter the ball, it is not possible to switch to the state in which it is easy to enter the ball only in the first starting hole, and the degree of freedom in the manner in which the game ball enters is limited. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine YE1, corresponding to the operation mode of the operating means, the third state in which the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance, and the second state in which the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance. Since the state can be switched not only to the second state in which it is easy to enter the game ball, but also to the first state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance, the degree of freedom in the manner in which the game ball enters can be improved.
In the game machine YE1, in the third state, a case where the falling game ball enters the first ball entrance and a case where the ball enters the second ball entrance alternately occur. Armored YE2.
According to the gaming machine armor YE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine armor YE1, it is possible to equalize the number of balls entering the first ball entrance and the number of balls entering the second ball entrance in the third state.
A game machine YE3, characterized in that the game machine YE1 or YE2 is provided with a predetermined flow path formed so that a game ball that has flowed down can enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance.

According to the game machine YE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine YE1 or YE2, when the game ball is flowing down the predetermined flow path, the possibility that the game ball enters the first ball entrance is reduced. Since there is still a possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entrance, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.
<Both special 1 and special 2 are accumulated with support>
A game ball shooting device for shooting game balls, a game area forming means for forming a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball shooting device flow down, and a configuration in which the game balls flowing down the game area can enter the game area. a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, detection means arranged in the game area for detecting passage of the game ball, and operation based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means. A gaming machine comprising controlled operating means, wherein the operating means divides a flow-down path of a game ball that has flowed down to a position where the operating means is arranged into a first path toward the first ball entrance side; The game machine armor YF1 is characterized in that it can branch into a second route toward the second ball entrance side and other routes.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a first start port and a second start port (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easily entered into the second start opening (second second start opening) in the open state of the movable piece, but the ball is entered into the first start opening. However, there is still room for improvement in the manner in which the game ball is guided by the movable piece.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor YF1, the first path and the second path are formed as the downstream flow path from the operation means, so that the game ball can be guided to the first ball entrance. Since the game ball can be guided to the second ball entrance, it is possible to improve the manner in which the game ball is guided by the operating means.

In the game machine YF1, the profit that can be given to the player when the game ball enters the second ball entrance is higher than the profit that can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first ball entrance. is set large, the first ball entrance is arranged below the center side of the operating means, and the second ball entrance is arranged below the end side of the operating means. Game machine armor YF2.
According to the game machine armor YF2, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor YF1, if the game ball flows to the end side of the operation means, it can be entered into the second ball entrance, so it will fall in the middle position (operating with good timing). By operating the means, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance than to enter the first ball entrance.
A game machine armor YF3, characterized in that the game machine armor YF1 or YF2 is provided with a spill prevention means for preventing game balls from spilling from the end of the operating means.
According to the game machine armor YF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YF1 or YF2, the spill prevention means can avoid the situation where the game ball overflows from the operation means, so when the game ball reaches the operation means The player's sense of security can be enhanced.

In addition, by causing the game ball to rebound with high repulsion by the anti-dropping means, the rolling speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the operating means can be increased, and the game ball can easily pass over the upper surface of the operating means in a short time. can.
<Different configuration between left and right distribution>
A game ball shooting device for shooting game balls, a game area forming means for forming a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball shooting device flow down, and a game area forming means arranged in the game area for detecting passage of the game balls. A plurality of detection means, an operation means that operates based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means, and a guided ball entrance configured to allow the game ball guided by the operation means to enter. and , wherein the plurality of detection means includes a first detection means arranged upstream of the operation means and a second detection means arranged at a position different from the first detection means. And, a game machine armor YG1 characterized by comprising.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a normal figure start port (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-54970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the path guided to the normal figure start port and the path guided to the opening and closing member side are separate paths, and the game balls alternately flow down each path, When a game ball collides with a nail placed directly above the normal pattern start port and deviates from the normal pattern start port, a period opens before the game ball is guided to the normal pattern start port next time. Therefore, when the opening/closing member is closed, the game ball flows down toward the opening/closing member, which tends to create a low expectation. In this case, there is a problem that the game may be prolonged and the interest of the player may be lowered.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor YG1, the first detecting means arranged upstream of the operating means and the second detecting means arranged at a position different from the upstream side of the operating means are provided. , the game ball can be frequently detected by the detecting means. As a result, it is possible to improve the frequency of operation of the operating means, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

A game machine armor YG2 characterized in that a predetermined flow path is formed between the first detection means and the operation means in the game machine armor YG1.
According to the game machine armor YG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YG1, it is possible to rectify the flow of game balls from the first detection means to the operation means.
A gaming machine YG3 in the gaming machine YG1 or YG2, characterized in that the operating means is formed to extend toward the flow-down path side of the game ball passing through the second detecting means.
According to the game machine armor YG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor YG1 or YG2, it is possible to prevent the attention force on the second detection means side from becoming too low in comparison with the attention force on the first detection means side.

<The means to guide the game ball is long>
A ball entry area, guide means for guiding a game ball that has entered the ball entry area, first detection means arranged downstream of the guide means for detecting passage of the game ball, and downstream of the guide means. A second detection means which, when detecting the passage of a game ball, can provide the player with a benefit different from the benefit that can be given to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the first detection means. 2 detecting means, wherein the guiding means includes a predetermined portion for receiving a game ball that has flowed down from the ball-entering area, and the guiding means is arranged downstream of the predetermined portion and displaces corresponding to the displacement of the predetermined portion. a first state in which the game ball is easily guided to the first detection means and a second state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second detection means, at least according to the arrangement of the downstream side part. A game machine armor BA1 characterized by being configured to be able to change its state in two states.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the passage of a game ball is detected in a predetermined detection area (second start winning opening 27), the winning ball opening is opened at a certain probability and arranged on the far side. A movable accessory (second variable winning device 31) capable of guiding a game ball is provided, and the movable accessory is frequently opened to cause the ball to enter the prize hole frequently. There are gaming machines in which a game state in which a player can win a large amount of prize balls is set as a game state more advantageous than a normal state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-169630).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the movable member (opening/closing member 28b) is arranged in another detection area (variable start winning opening 28a), so the movable member for opening and closing the predetermined detection area is not provided. It is not provided, and is configured so that game balls can always pass through a predetermined detection area. In a normal state, a game method in which a game ball flows down to the left side of the game area is recommended, but there are cases in which a game beginner, in particular, accidentally shoots a game ball so as to flow down to the right side of the game area.
When the passage of the game ball is detected in the predetermined detection area, a special symbol lottery (big win lottery) is conducted in addition to the lottery for the opening operation of the movable accessory (small win lottery). When a big hit occurs, a penalty is imposed as a game state after the big win ends, and a game that is more disadvantageous than the normal state is forced. A game beginner may suspect that he or she has been penalized without knowing the reason, and lose interest in the game machine, which may lead to a situation in which new players cannot be acquired. That is, there is a problem that it is not friendly to game beginners and lacks equality.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BA1, by maintaining the guiding means in the first state, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the first detecting means, and in this state, the second detecting means. Guidance of the game ball to (predetermined detection area) can be suppressed. As a result, by using the guide means, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the second detection means, thereby enhancing the equality of the game.
The guide means may be configured such that the predetermined portion and the downstream portion are integrally formed, or may be configured so that the predetermined portion and the downstream portion are formed separately.
In the game machine armor BA1, the downstream side part can prevent the guidance of the game ball to the second detection means in the first state, and can prevent the guidance of the game ball to the first detection means in the second state. Game machine armor BA2 characterized by being configured to be preventable.
According to the game machine armor BA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BA1, the detection means through which the game ball flowing down via the guide means can be switched by the downstream side part.

In game machine armor BA1 or BA2, game machine armor BA3 is characterized in that the guide means comprises an intermediate section for causing the game ball received by the predetermined section to flow down toward the downstream side section.
According to the game machine armor BA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BA1 or BA2, the intermediate part guides the game ball flowing down via the guide means to the first detection means or the second detection means. can prolong the state of ambiguity.
The intermediate portion may be configured to be displaceable in correspondence with the displacement of the downstream portion, or may be configured not to be displaced regardless of the displacement of the downstream portion.
In the game machine armor BA3, the intermediate portion is configured so that the flowing direction of the game ball does not change in either the first state or the second state, and guidance to the first detection means or the second detection means is provided on the downstream side. A game machine armor BA4 characterized by being performed.

According to the game machine armor BA4, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BA3, the guide means is switched between the first state and the second state when the game ball after entering the ball entry area is guided in the intermediate part. Even so, since it does not affect the flow direction of the game ball in the intermediate portion, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the change in the state of the guide means is grasped from the change in the flow state of the game ball guided in the intermediate portion. can.
In any one of game machines BA1 to BBA4, in the first state, the guide means is arranged at a position where the predetermined portion restricts entry of a ball from the ball-entering area to the guide means, and in the second state, A gaming machine armor BA5, wherein said predetermined part is arranged at a position allowing a ball to enter said guiding means from said ball-entering area.
According to the game machine armor BA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA4, it is possible to switch whether or not a new game ball enters the guide means by switching the state of the guide means.
Further, it is possible to draw attention to each of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined portion and the passage of the game ball in the downstream portion. That is, the player's line of sight can be gathered at a plurality of positions, and the attention points of the guide means can be increased.

In the game machine armor BA5, the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined portion and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream side part are executed at the same time.
According to the game machine armor BA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BA5, since switching is performed at different positions at the same time, the player can select either switching at a predetermined part or switching at a downstream side part. It is possible to provide the game property of visually recognizing by pressing.
A game machine armor BA7 characterized in that in the game machine armor BA5, switching of the arrangement of the predetermined part and switching of the arrangement of the downstream part are performed at different timings.
According to the game machine armor BA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BA5, switching at different positions is executed at different timings, so that switching at a predetermined part and switching at a downstream side part are visible to the player. It is possible to impart a playfulness that allows visual recognition by shifting. In addition, the movement of the player's line of sight can be guided.

In any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA7, the game machine armor BA8 is characterized in that the predetermined portion is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction.
According to the game machine armor BA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA7, it is possible to avoid conspicuous movement of the predetermined part in the front view. The predetermined part is a part for switching whether or not the ball can enter the guiding means, and is not a part for determining whether the ball is guided by the first detecting means or the second detecting means, so that it is not conspicuous. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation of the downstream side relatively conspicuous.
In any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA8, the game machine armor BA9 is characterized in that the downstream side part is displaced in a manner of rotating operation.
According to the game machine armor BA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA8, the downstream side part as a location where it is determined whether to be guided by the first detection means or guided by the second detection means movement can be highlighted.

In any one of the gaming machine armors BA1 to BBA9, the guide means has a flow distance of the game ball flowing down from the predetermined portion to the downstream side portion than the distance between the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion in a front view. A game machine armor BA10 characterized in that it is configured to be long.
According to the game machine armor BA10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA9, before the game ball flowing from the predetermined part reaches the downstream side part, the player looks from the predetermined part to the downstream side part. It can be easily moved.
In any one of game machine armors BA1 to BBA10, the game machine armor BA11 is characterized in that the guide means comprises prevention means for preventing a game ball from reaching the downstream side part without passing through the predetermined part.
According to the game machine armor BA11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA10, the prevention means can limit the flow path of the game ball reaching the downstream side, so that the game ball does not pass through an unintended path. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the ball reaches the downstream side and enters the wrong detection means.

In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BBA11, the guiding means is adapted to reduce the plurality of game balls received by the predetermined unit during the first period rather than the first period during which the predetermined unit receives the plurality of game balls from the ball entry area. game machine armor BA12, characterized in that the second period during which the game ball passes through the downstream side portion can be shortened.
According to the game machine armor BA12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BA1 to BBA11, the deviation of the timing of passage of the game ball in the downstream side part is less than the deviation of the timing when the predetermined part receives the game ball by the guide means. Since it can be made smaller, it is possible to increase the allowable range of the deviation of the timing of receiving the game ball at a predetermined part while maintaining the accuracy of switching in the downstream direction of the game ball at the downstream side part, thereby providing a comfortable game. can be made easier.
In the game machine armor BA12, the predetermined portion is configured to have a shape that applies a load to the game ball in a direction to accelerate the game ball when the game machine armor BA13 is displaced.
According to the game machine armor BA13, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BA12, when the predetermined portion is displaced, a load in the direction of accelerating the game ball is generated, so that the predetermined portion passes through the predetermined portion before it is displaced. By accelerating the game ball placed on the predetermined portion when the predetermined portion is displaced toward the game ball that has been moved, it is possible to create a situation in which the interval between the game balls is reduced.

<Extend the flow path>
A gaming machine comprising a ball entry area, a flow means for causing a game ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting passage of the game ball flowing down the downstream area, Said flow-down means comprises a first movable portion for causing game balls to flow down, a second movable portion arranged downstream of said first movable portion for causing game balls to flow down, said first movable portion and said second movable portion. A game machine armor BB1 characterized by comprising a predetermined part arranged between and allowing a game ball to flow down.
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a detection sensor that allows a game ball to enter, and a movable member that guides the game ball to the detection sensor (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572). ).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the path of the game ball flowing down toward the detection sensor is limited to the length of the movable member, the flow of the game ball tends to be monotonous, which may easily bore the player. For this reason, there is a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the flow-down mode of game balls.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BB1, since the flow-down means arranged on the upstream side of the detection means is provided with a plurality of movable parts sandwiching a predetermined part, it is possible to easily provide variations in the length and shape of the movable parts. , it is possible to improve the flow of the game ball.

In the game machine armor BB1, the first movable part has an overlapping part that vertically overlaps with the predetermined part at least at the downstream end.
According to the game machine armor BB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BB1, the game ball can flow to the predetermined part through the overlapping part, so that the game ball does not drop out between the first movable part and the predetermined part. can be easily prevented.
Game machine armor BB1 or BB2, characterized in that the first movable part has, at least at the downstream end thereof, an inclined part for directing the direction in which the game ball flows down to the predetermined part side.
According to the game machine armor BB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BB1 or BB2, the inclined part can direct the downward direction of the game ball to the predetermined part side, so even if the game ball flows turbulently, It is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling out between the first movable part and the predetermined part.

<Dense game balls on the downstream side>
A gaming machine comprising a ball entry area, a flow means for causing a game ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting passage of the game ball flowing down the downstream area, The flow-down means comprises predetermined means for making the interval at which a plurality of game balls entering the ball-entering area at predetermined intervals flow down the downstream area shorter than the predetermined interval. Game machine armor BBZ1.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball flows down from a predetermined ball entry area, the game ball can be guided to the first detection means or the second detection means by the load applied from the game ball. A plurality of movable accessories capable of forming two types of open states are arranged, and the movable accessories are opened by transmitting a mechanical load when a predetermined number of game balls enter the respective prize ball openings. There is a game machine configured to close from the beginning (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202338).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball is normally maintained in a state in which neither the first detection means nor the second detection means guides the game ball. and a second state in which the game ball is guided to the second detection means. It is regarded as the main road, and the timing (interval) of entering the ball entering area and the timing (interval) of paying out the prize balls accompanying that entry are almost the same, so the profit given to the player is generated. There is a problem that the timing to play is restricted to the intervals (constant intervals) of shooting game balls, making it difficult to adjust the pace of the game and to increase the interest of the player.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BBZ1, the predetermined means of the flow-down means causes the interval at which the game ball flows down the downstream area to be shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters the ball-entering area. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game balls to flow down the downstream area at intervals shorter than the shooting intervals of the game balls. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence timing of the profit given to the player by the game ball entering the ball-entering area at regular intervals, and by adjusting the pace of the game, the interest of the player can be improved. can increase

In the game machine armor BBZ1, the predetermined means is configured to increase the flow speed of the game ball in the ball entry area side than the flow speed of the game ball in the downstream area side. BBZ2.
According to the game machine armor BBZ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BBZ1, it is possible to construct a state in which the game balls flowing down the downstream area side catch up with the game balls in the ball entry area side by a predetermined means. .
In the gaming machine armor BBZ1 or BBZ2, the flow-down means is configured to be displaceable in one direction or the other direction, and the displacement in the one direction or the displacement in the other direction affects the game ball entering the ball entry area. The gaming machine armor BBZ3 is characterized in that it is configured to apply a predetermined load toward the downstream area.
According to the game machine armor BBZ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BBZ1 or BBZ2, the flowing-down means is configured to be reciprocally displaceable, and the game means flows down the flowing-down means when the flowing-down means is displaced in one direction. , the flow-down mode can be changed depending on whether the flow-down means flows down when the flow-down means is displaced in the other direction.

In the game machine armor BBZ3, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means is arranged at either a non-branching position where the game ball does not branch in the downstream direction or a branch position where the game ball can branch in the downstream direction. A game machine armor BBZ4 characterized by that.
According to the game machine armor BBZ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BBZ3, while the game ball is flowing down the flow-down means, the game ball is watched more closely than when the game ball is arranged at the branch position. It is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player who plays.
A game machine armor BBZ5 characterized in that, in the game machine armor BBZ4, the branch position is arranged on the side where visibility is higher than the non-branch position.
According to the game machine armor BBZ5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BBZ4, it is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player watching the game ball.

Various aspects are exemplified as the side where the visibility is high. For example, it may be on the side (front side) closer to the player, on the side where it is difficult to be hidden by the game balls flowing down the game area, or on the side where it will not be dazzling when a light emitting effect such as an LED occurs. can be
In the game machine armor BBZ4 or BBZ5, the branch positions are arranged at a first position on the ball-entering area side and a second position downstream from the first position, and the first position and the second position are arranged. A game machine armor BBZ6 characterized in that the non-branching position is arranged between.
According to the game machine armor BBZ6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BBZ4 or BBZ5, when the game ball flows down on the flow-down means, it is arranged at the branch position twice with an interval, so that one game When the ball is guided to the flowing-down means, the attention of the player can be improved at two timings. As a result, attention to the game ball can be efficiently improved.
In any one of the gaming machine armors BBZ1 to BBZ6, the flowing-down means is such that the inclination angle of the ball-entering area side with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the downstream area side with respect to the horizontal plane. .

According to the game machine armor BBZ7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BBZ1 to BBZ6, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means is further accelerated on the ball entry area side, and the distance from the game ball on the downstream area side is increased. can be shortened.
A game machine armor BBZ8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors BBZ1 to BBZ7, the ball-entering area is larger than the downstream area.
According to the game machine armor BBZ8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BBZ1 to BBZ7, it is possible to make it easier for a plurality of game balls to enter the ball entry area at the same time, and those game balls are densely packed in the downstream area. It is possible to make it easier for a state of being (connected) to occur.
A game machine armor BBZ9, wherein the ball entry area is configured to be divided and arranged in a plurality of locations in the game machine armor BBZ8.

According to the game machine armor BBZ9, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BBZ8, since a plurality of ball entry points for the game ball into the flow-down means are prepared, the frequency of entry of the game ball into the flow-down means can be increased.
A game machine armor BBZ10 characterized in that, in the game machine armor BBZ9, the flow-down paths of the game balls flowing down to the flow-down means are different corresponding to the differences in the ball-entering areas into which the game balls enter.
According to the game machine armor BBZ10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BBZ9, the period until the game ball passes through the flow-down means, the arrangement of the game ball on the flow-down means, etc., determine which ball entry area the game ball enters. Since it can change depending on whether the ball enters the flow-down means, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the ball-entering area from which the game ball entered the ball-entering area. attention can be improved.
In any one of the game machine armors BBZ1 to BBZ10, the game machine armor is characterized by comprising flow-down path limiting means for preventing the game ball flowing down the flow-down means from deviating from the flow-down path toward the downstream area. BBZ11.

According to the game machine armor BBZ11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BBZ1 to BBZ10, the flow-down path restricting means ensures that the game ball entering the ball entry area reaches the downstream area. can be done.
<Technical concept of receiving a game ball at a position away from the ball entry area>
a switching means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can be guided to a ball entry area and a second state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry area is restricted; and a switching means. A game machine armor BC1, characterized in that it comprises a flow-down area in which a game ball can flow down, and the flow-down area is arranged on the side of the switching means away from the ball-entering area.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the landing position of a game ball on a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the game ball can be guided to the prize ball opening and a state in which the entry of the game ball into the prize ball opening is restricted. However, there are a plurality of downstream positions near the ball opening and upstream positions upstream from the downstream position, regardless of whether the game ball lands at the downstream position or the upstream position. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to pass through a prize hole (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-029531).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, at the timing when the game ball that lands at the upstream position approaches the prize ball opening, another game ball lands at the downstream position, and a plurality of game balls are clustered together to form the prize ball opening. When trying to pass through, there was a problem that ball clogging may occur and the flow resistance of the game ball may increase. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the flow of game balls.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BC1, the game ball is configured to flow down to the switching means on the side away from the entering ball area (because the landing position of the game ball to the switching means is restricted). ), the game balls can be aligned while flowing down the switching means, and the occurrence of clogging of the balls and the increase in the flow resistance of the game balls can be avoided when trying to pass through the entering ball area. Therefore, improvements can be made from the viewpoint of improving the flow of game balls.
In the game machine armor BC1, the game machine armor BC2 is characterized by comprising a prevention means for preventing the flow to the switching means outside the flow-down region.
According to the game machine armor BC2, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BC1, the prevention means can prevent the game ball from reaching the switching means through the outside of the flow-down area.
The game machine armor BC3 is characterized in that at least a part of the switching means is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the game board forming the game area in the game machine armor BC2.

According to the game machine armor BC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BC2, the position where the game ball lands on the switching means is made to appear at least on the game area side (the front surface of the game board), and at least a part of the others is positioned above the front surface of the game board. By arranging it on the rear side, it is possible to narrow the length of the switching means encroaching on the game area while securing the length of the game ball flowing down on the switching means to the rear side of the front surface of the game board. As a result, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging other components and improve the degree of freedom in designing the game area.
In any one of game machines BC1 to BC3, the switching means comprises a first part in which game balls can roll, and a second part arranged downstream of the first part. A game machine armor BC4 characterized in that a game ball that lands on the switching means is configured to easily land on the first part.
According to the game machine armor BC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BC1 to BC3, rolling on the switching means over a long distance suppresses the bouncing of the game ball and calms down the flow, and the ball enters. It is possible to secure the flow down length to the area and improve the attention to the game ball.
In the game machine armor BC4, the switching means is provided with a guide path between the first part and the second part, which can bridge the game balls in the first state and the second state. Armor BC5.

According to the game machine armor BC5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BC4, the game ball after landing on the first part of the switching means is guided as a place where the game ball keeps rolling regardless of the state of the switching means. Since the path is provided, it is possible to increase variations in the flow of the game ball compared to the case where the state switching of the switching means and the change in the flow of the game ball are in one-to-one correspondence.
In the game machine armor BC5, the game machine armor BC6 is characterized in that a plurality of lengths of the game ball flowing down the guide path are configured.
According to the game machine armor BC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BC5, it is possible to increase variations in the flow of the game ball.
Various aspects are exemplified as factors for changing the downflow length of the game ball on the guide route. For example, it may be configured to change depending on the difference in the position of the ball entering the switching means, or configured to change depending on the relative relationship between the timing at which the ball enters the switching means and the timing at which the state of the switching means is switched. May be.

In the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, the switching means comprises an approaching means for moving the game ball so as to approach the guide path over a predetermined range on the upstream side of the guide path. BC7.
According to the game machine armor BC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BC5 or BC6, the game ball can be moved to the guide route side in advance of the timing at which the game ball rides on the guide route by the approaching means, so that the game ball can be moved to the guide route. It is possible to avoid stagnation of game balls in the bridging portion of.
In the gaming machine armor BC7, the approaching means is an inclined surface for moving the game ball in a direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game ball on the first part of the switching means or the guide path.
According to the game machine armor BC8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BC7, since the flowing direction of the game ball in the first part or the guide part of the switching means is orthogonal to the inclination direction of the inclined surface, the game ball can be moved by the inclined surface. The load applied to the switching means neither accelerates nor decelerates the flow-down speed of the game ball in the first portion or the guide portion of the switching means, so that the influence can be minimized.

A gaming machine BC9 according to any one of the gaming machines BC4 to BC8, wherein the second part is configured to restrict acceptance of a plurality of game balls at the same time.
According to the game machine armor BC9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BC4 to BC8, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which more game balls than expected enter the second part.
In any one of the game machines BC1 to BC9, the switching means changes the state from when the game ball lands in a predetermined section on the end side of the flowing area until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A game machine BC10 characterized by comprising a ball entry restricting means for restricting the game ball from entering the guide path side when the is switched.
According to the game machine BC10, in any one of the game machines BC1 to BC9, when the switching means executes the state switching in a minute time, it is easy to avoid the game ball erroneously entering the guide path side. be able to.

In any one of game machines BC1 to BC10, game machine BC11 is characterized in that the switching means comprises deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball at the downstream side.
According to the game machine armor BC11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BC1 to BC10, it is possible to stabilize (rectify) the flow of the game ball on the downstream side of the switching means.
<Plural hits are likely to pass through the detecting means under the influence of previous hits>
A flow area where game balls can flow down, a downstream area arranged downstream of the flow area, a first flow area where game balls can flow down after passing through the downstream area, and the downstream area. a second flow-down area configured so that a game ball that has passed through but does not flow down the first flow-down area can flow down, and a predetermined profit is obtained when the game ball flows down the second flow-down area. A game ball can be given to a player, and a game ball flows down to the downstream area from the flowing area in a state where no game ball is arranged in the downstream area, compared to a first case. In the second case where the game ball flows down from the flow-down area to the downstream area in a state where is arranged, the game ball is configured to flow down the second flow-down area more easily. A game machine armor BD1.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entrance and a specific ball entrance are arranged at the back of opening/closing means, and the specific ball entrance is closed by a plate member that slides, and the plate member is retracted. When the plate member is in the state of allowing entry of the game ball, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means enter the specific ball entry port. There is a gaming machine in which a game state is set to a game state that is advantageous for the player after the ball is entered into a specific ball entrance (for example, paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). reference).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is considered that the game ball enters the specific ball entrance at the time when one game ball is received by the opening/closing means. There was a problem that it was difficult to make the player pay attention to the ball entering the opening/closing means. In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain attention to the game ball received by the opening/closing means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BD1, among the game balls received in the downstream area, the game ball received in the plurality is second than the game ball received in the first. Since it is configured to increase the possibility of being received in the downstream area, it is possible to maintain the attention to the game ball that has flowed down to the downstream area.
The game machine upper BD1 is configured such that the second and subsequent game balls entering the downstream area are more likely to enter the second downstream area than the first game ball entering the downstream area. A game machine armor BD2 characterized by:
According to the game machine armor BD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BD1, it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the game ball that has flowed down to the flow-down area for a long time.

In the game machine armor BD1 or BD2, when a plurality of game balls are arranged in the downstream area at the same time, the game machine armor is configured so that the game balls easily flow down the second flow area. BD3.
According to the game machine armor BD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BD1 or BD2, it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the game ball that has flowed down to the downstream area while the game ball is arranged in the downstream area. can. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware of the shooting mode of the game ball.
A game machine armor BD4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD3, a plurality of game balls stay in the downstream area, thereby making it easier for the game balls to be received in the second flow-down area. .
According to the game machine armor BD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD3, attention can be paid to the arrangement of game balls in the downstream area.

Any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD4 is provided with opening/closing means capable of switching between a first state in which the flow path of the game ball from the flow-down area is opened and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state, and the downstream A game machine upper BD5 characterized in that the side area is configured such that the game ball is difficult to be guided to the second flow-down area immediately after the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state. .
According to the game machine armor BD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD4, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player's attention to the downstream area is maintained after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state. can.
In the game machine upper BD5, the game ball entered after the predetermined period of time is more likely than the game ball entered in the downstream area during the predetermined period from the time when the opening/closing means is switched to the first state. A game machine armor BD6 characterized in that it is configured so as to easily flow down the second flow-down region.
According to the game machine armor BD6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BD5, attention to the downstream area can be maintained for a long time from the time when the opening/closing means is switched to the first state.

In the game machine armor BD6, after the predetermined period has passed since the opening/closing means was switched to the first state, the period until the game ball that has flowed down the flow-down area flows down the second flow-down area. A game machine armor BD7 characterized by being able to suppress changes.
According to the game machine armor BD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BD6, the opening and closing means is switched to the first state and the flowing down state (flowing period) of the game ball after a predetermined period has passed is made constant. The focus in the area can be reduced, allowing the player to relax.
In any one of the game machines BD5 to BD7, the game ball that entered the first ball counted after the opening/closing means was switched from the second state to the first state is placed in the second flowing region. A game machine armor BD8 characterized by comprising guide ball selection means configured not to guide to the area side.
According to the game machine armor BD8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BD5 to BD7, a plurality of game balls are entered in the first state of the opening and closing means in order to receive the game balls in the second flow area. Since the need arises, it is possible to improve attention to the opening/closing means and the number of game balls passing through the opening/closing means.

In any one of the game machines BD1 to BD8, the number of game balls accepted in the second flow-down area and the number of game balls not accepted in the second flow-down area are made equal. Game machine armor BD9.
According to the game machine armor BD9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor BD1 to BD8, as in the case where all balls enter the second flow area, excessively many game balls may be accepted, It is possible to avoid giving players excessive expectations.
In any one of the game machines BD1 to BD9, the maximum number of game balls that can be accepted by the downstream area is set, and game balls exceeding the maximum number are configured to be accepted by the second flow area. Characteristic game armor BD10.
According to the game machine armor BD10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD9, it is possible to improve attention to the downstream area and the second downstream area.

A game machine armor BD11 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD10, a flowing area can be arranged at a position where passing game balls easily flow into the first flowing area side.
According to the game machine armor BD11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD10, a state in which the game balls arranged in the downstream area easily flow into the first flow down area side is easily formed.
A game machine armor BD12 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD11, the game machine armor BD12 is provided with retention means for stopping the game balls arranged in the downstream area in the downstream area.
According to the game machine armor BD12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD11, it is possible to restrict the game balls arranged in the first flow-down area from flowing toward the second flow-down area by the retention means.

A game machine armor BD13 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD12, the second flow-down area is arranged above the first flow-down area.
According to the game machine armor BD13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BD1 to BD12, it is possible to prevent the game balls arranged in the first flow-down area from flowing to the second flow-down area side by the height difference of the arrangement. can be done.
<Switching between contact and non-contact with the game ball>
a downflow area in which a game ball can flow down, an opening/closing means capable of switching between a first state in which a path of a game ball passing through the downflow area is opened and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state; A downstream region disposed downstream of the region, a first flowing region configured so that game balls that have passed through the downstream region can flow down, and a game ball that has passed through the downstream region and is the first A second flow-down region configured so that a game ball that does not flow down in the first flow-down region can flow down, a contact state in which a game ball that has passed through the downstream region can come into contact, and a non-contact state in which the game ball does not come into contact. a switchable abutment means that can be provided to the player when the game ball flows down the second flow-down area, and the game ball abuts on the abutment means. The game machine upper BE1 is characterized in that the opening/closing means can be switched from the first state to the second state in a state where the game machine upper BE1 is located.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members are arranged in a flow-down path of a game ball that has entered a ball entrance that is opened and closed by an opening/closing member, and the load from the movable member causes the flow-down path of the game ball. There are game machines that can change (see, for example, JP-A-2017-000562).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the movable member is constructed so as to be able to make contact with the game ball that has flowed down. There is a problem that there is a high possibility of making the player bored, and that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BE1, the contactable means can be switched between a contact state in which the game ball passing through the downstream region can contact and a non-contact state in which it does not contact. Therefore, it is possible to greatly change the flow-down manner of the game ball between when the game ball comes into contact with the contactable means and when it does not come into contact with the contactable means. As a result, it is possible to increase variations in the flow of the game ball, and to improve the game from the viewpoint of increasing the interest of the player.
The game machine armor BE2 is characterized in that the game machine armor BE1 is configured such that a game ball receiving a load through the game ball in contact with the contactable means can flow down the second flow area.
According to the game machine armor BE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BE1, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball in the downstream area.

In the game machine BE1 or BE2, when the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state while the game ball is in contact with the abuttable means, the flow region is shifted from the downstream region. A game machine upper BE3 characterized in that it is configured so that a game ball that has flowed down to the second flow down area can flow down.
According to the game machine armor BE3, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BE1 or BE2, when the game ball is in contact with the contactable means at the timing when the opening and closing means is opened, opening and closing is performed after the opening and closing means is opened. Since the game ball that has passed through the means can easily flow down the second flow-down area, it is possible to improve the attention to the abuttable means.
<The game ball is received in the second game area after the passage of the game ball is stopped>
a downflow area in which a game ball can flow down, an opening/closing means capable of switching between a first state in which a path of a game ball passing through the downflow area is opened and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state; A downstream region disposed downstream of the region, a first flowing region configured so that game balls that have passed through the downstream region can flow down, and a game ball that has passed through the downstream region and is the first a second flow-down area configured so that game balls that do not flow down in the first flow-down area can flow down, and a predetermined profit can be given to the player when the game ball flows down in the second flow-down area; A game machine armor BEZ1 characterized in that the state in which passage of game balls is prevented in a predetermined portion of the downstream area is shifted to the state in which game balls can flow down to the second downflow area.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entrance and a specific ball entrance are arranged at the back of opening/closing means, and the specific ball entrance is closed by a plate member that slides, and the plate member is retracted. When the plate member is in the state of allowing entry of the game ball, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means enter the specific ball entry port. and set the game state to a game state advantageous to the player by entering a ball into a specific ball entrance (for example, see paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). .

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the positions of the ball entrance and the specific ball entrance differ only on the left and right sides, and are almost the same. It is difficult to grasp at a glance through the means. When a game ball enters a specific ball slot and the notification is given to the liquid crystal device, the player's attention is focused on the liquid crystal device because the display on the liquid crystal device is easier to understand. There was a problem that the In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the game ball received by the opening/closing means.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine armor BEZ1, the passage of the game ball is prevented in a predetermined portion of the downstream area, and then the game ball is configured to flow down to the second downflow area. A player's line of sight can be drawn to the game ball stopped in the downstream side area in preparation for entering the area, and attention to the game ball accepted by the opening/closing means can be maintained.
A game machine armor BEZ2 characterized in that, in the game machine armor BEZ1, the predetermined portion is positioned in the first flow-down region.
According to the game machine armor BEZ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BEZ1, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball entering the first flow-down area as the area that does not affect the provision of a predetermined profit.

A gaming machine armor BEZ3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine armor BEZ1 or BEZ2, the predetermined portion prevents passage of the game ball by a predetermined game ball.
According to the game machine BEZ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BEZ1 or BEZ2, even if the game ball deviates from the second flow-down area and flows down, the game is expected to block the predetermined part. It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the ball.
In the game machine armor BEZ1 or BEZ2, the predetermined portion is prevented from passing the game ball by a predetermined member different from the game ball, and the size of the predetermined member in a front view is set smaller than the size of the game ball. Game machine armor BEZ4 characterized by.
According to the game machine BEZ4, in addition to the effect of the game machine BEZ1 or BEZ2, the predetermined member for preventing the passage of the game ball can be made less conspicuous than the game ball, thereby improving the attention to the game ball. can be made

In any one of the game machines BEZ1 to BEZ4, after the first flow-down area is filled with game balls, the game balls arriving after chasing are received in the second flow-down area. Game machine armor BEZ5.
According to the game machine armor BEZ5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor BEZ1 to BEZ4, it is possible to shift the player's line of sight from the first flow area to the second flow area from the beginning. It is possible to lengthen the period in which the second flow-down area is visible compared to the case where attention is paid to the second flow-down area.
Furthermore, when the ball enters the second downflow area, the first downflow area is filled with the game ball, so even if the game ball that has entered the second downflow area is lost, the ball enters the second downflow area at a glance. It can be understood that it is possible.
The game machine armor BEZ5 is provided with state switching means capable of switching between a staying state in which game balls are retained in the first flow-down area and a discharge state in which game balls are discharged from the first flow-down area, and the opening/closing means of the opening/closing means. A game machine armor BEZ6 characterized in that the state of the state switching means is switched in correspondence with the state switching.

According to the game machine BEZ6, in addition to the effect of the game machine BEZ5, it is possible to associate the switching of the state of the opening and closing means and the state switching means, so by visually recognizing one of them, it is easy to predict the state of the other. can do.
A game machine BEZ7 characterized in that, in the game machine BEZ5 or BEZ6, an upper limit number of game balls that can be received in the first flow area is set.
According to the game machine armor BEZ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BEZ5 or BEZ6, by checking the number of game balls arranged in the first flow-down area, how many more game balls are allowed to pass through the flow-down area. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the game ball will be received in the second flow area.
Any one of the game machines BEZ1 to BEZ7 is provided with displacement means configured to be displaceable. A game machine armor BEZ8 characterized in that it is displaced so as to switch the state between a discharge impossible state and a discharge impossible state in a downstream area.

According to the gaming machine BEZ8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BEZ1 to BEZ7, the game ball is discharged to the downstream area where the player's attention is high as a premise of accepting the game ball to the second flow area. Since it is configured so that whether or not to move depends on the state of the displacement means, attention to the downstream area and the displacement means can be improved.
That is, when the game balls that have passed through the flow-down region surely flow down to the downstream side region, the timing at which the game balls flow down to the second flow-down region can be predicted from experience by grasping the number of game balls that pass through the flow-down region. Since it is possible to do so, there is a possibility that even if a game is played without looking at the downstream area, the disadvantage is not large.
On the other hand, in a situation where the presence or absence of game balls flowing down to the downstream area is switched depending on the state of the displacement means, the number of game balls passing through the flowing area and the number of game balls flowing down to the downstream area It is also necessary to turn the line of sight to the downstream area because of the deviation. Thereby, attention to the downstream area can be improved.
In the game machine armor BEZ8, the displacement means is configured to be able to reduce the flow speed of the received game ball compared to the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow-down area.

According to the game machine armor BEZ9, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BEZ8, the flow speed of the game ball received by the displacement means can be reduced, so that the player loses sight of the game ball received by the displacement means. can be easily avoided.
In the gaming machine BEZ8 or BEZ9, the displacement means comprises a ball receiving portion capable of receiving a predetermined number of game balls, and the displacement of the displacement means displaces the game ball received in the ball receiving portion. Game machine armor BEZ10.
According to the game machine armor BEZ10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BEZ8 or BEZ9, the number of game balls that are displaced with the displacement of the displacement means can be limited to a predetermined number with respect to the ball receiving portion. By setting the displacement speed of the means within a predetermined range, the number of game balls that can be discharged from the displacement means to the downstream area in a predetermined period can be suppressed within a predetermined range.
<Information Means for Informing End Time in Ending>
A game machine BG1 characterized by comprising a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance relating to a game and an informing means for informing the player of the end of the duration of the predetermined performance so that the player can grasp it.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that shifts to a state where a special figure fluctuation game is possible after the jackpot game is over (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to know when the jackpot game ends, and it is a source of dissatisfaction for players who want to start the special symbol lottery immediately after switching to the state where the special symbol fluctuation game is possible. was
For example, as a general game progress, there is a distribution in which, after a big hit in the lottery of the special pattern 1, the lottery of the special pattern 2, which is more advantageous than the special pattern 1, can be obtained easily after the jackpot game ends. There is a game machine, but in such a game machine, the lottery for the special pattern 2 is started in a state in which it has not yet been acquired immediately after the end of the big win game, so if the lottery for the special pattern 1 is suspended, the special pattern will be drawn after the end of the big win game. If the first lottery is executed and a big win is won in the lottery, there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged.
In order to avoid this situation, it is preferable to win the lottery of the special pattern 2 as soon as possible after the end of the big win before obtaining the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 1 after the end of the big win. It is desirable to start shooting the game balls as soon as the second lottery is available.
On the other hand, the ball entrance is generally opened and closed by an electric accessory in order to win the lottery of the special symbol 2, but the electric accessory is maintained in a closed state during the jackpot game. After the end of the jackpot game, it becomes a state that can be opened. Therefore, even if game balls are shot before the electric accessory is released, most of them are likely to be wasted balls.

Under these circumstances, even if a game ball is shot toward the electric accessory during a jackpot game, the electric accessory maintains a closed state and the lottery for the special symbol 2 cannot be obtained. Furthermore, the ball entrance on the downstream side of the electric accessory opened as soon as the jackpot game is completed in order to win the lottery of the special pattern 2 before the jackpot by the lottery of the special pattern 1 is won. It is thought that the player wants to hit the game ball into the .
On the other hand, in conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to know when the jackpot game will end, and it is difficult to determine the timing of launching the game ball.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BG1, since it is provided with a notification means for notifying the player of the end time of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp it, the timing to shoot the game ball is determined by using the notification of the notification means as a guideline. can be made easier.
In the game machine BG1, the predetermined effect is at least one of a first effect and a second effect different in notification content from the first effect. The notification means is configured to be capable of transmitting to the player the difference in the duration of the predetermined effect, and includes end means for indicating the end point of the predetermined effect and time notification indicating the time elapsed from the current point to the end point. A game machine armor BG2 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine armor BG2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine armor BG1, even when a plurality of types of durations of the predetermined presentation are prepared, the duration of the predetermined presentation currently being performed and the end point thereof can be determined. can be grasped.
In the game machine armor BG2, the time notification means is provided with a pseudo time notification means indicating a pseudo time with a predetermined time difference from the time elapsed from the current time to the end of the predetermined performance. BG3.
According to the game machine armor BG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BG2, the pseudo time notification means can notify the player of a preferable timing before the end of the predetermined effect. As a result, for example, the time that can elapse from when the game ball is shot until it reaches a predetermined ball entrance can be consumed during execution of a predetermined effect, and a predetermined input can be obtained immediately after the predetermined effect ends. It is possible to facilitate the realization of a game in which a game ball is made to flow into a ball opening.
In any one of the game machines BG1 to BG3, the predetermined effect can be executed at least immediately before the end of the predetermined privilege game, and the mode of execution is changed according to the type of the privilege game. A game machine armor BG4 characterized by that.

According to the game machine armor BG4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG3, the type of privilege game can be associated with a predetermined effect.
In any one of the game machines BG1 to BG4, the game machine BG5 is characterized in that the notification means reports a point in time before a predetermined period before the end of the predetermined performance period.
According to the game machine armor BG5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG4, it is possible to grasp the end time of the predetermined performance period in advance by the notification means.
It should be noted that the timing of the predetermined effect period is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be during a predetermined specific game, during symbol variation, or during symbol variation standby.

In any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG5, a predetermined still image or moving image for calming the player is displayed in the display area of the display means at the end of the predetermined effect. .
According to the game machine armor BG6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG5, it is possible to effectively suppress the player's addiction to the game.
In any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG6, the game machine armor BG7 is characterized in that the display of the display means is switched after the end of the predetermined effect.
According to the game machine armor BG7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG6, the switching of the display makes it easy for the player to grasp that the predetermined performance has passed.

The game machine armor BG8 is characterized in that a specific performance can be executed continuously from the predetermined performance after the completion of the predetermined performance.
According to the game machine armor BG8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BG7, a specific production is executed during execution of the prescribed production, compared to the case where the production is newly executed after the end of the prescribed production. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long production time.
A game machine BG9 characterized in that, in any of the game machines BG1 to BG8, the predetermined effect is executed so as to be visible in at least a part of the display area of the display means.
According to the game machine armor BG9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG8, a predetermined effect can be confirmed by visually checking the display area of the display means. The game burden on the player can be reduced compared to the case where the predetermined effect is executed outside the game area.

A game machine armor BG10 characterized in that the game machine armor BG8 or BG9 can be configured so that the mode of display in the display area of the display means at a predetermined timing is different.
According to the game machine armor BG10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BG8 or BG9, it is possible to improve the attention to the mode at a predetermined timing.
It should be noted that different modes at predetermined timing are not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, depending on whether the operation is started at a predetermined timing or when it is stopped and maintained at a predetermined timing, or when it becomes operable at a predetermined timing and when it becomes inoperable at a predetermined timing. A different case is exemplified.
A game machine armor BG11 characterized in that, in the game machine armor BG8 or BG9, an illusion performance is executed before the end of the predetermined performance to create an illusion that it is the end time.

According to the game machine armor BG11, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BG8 or BG9, the concentration of the player can be enhanced for each illusion production.
In any one of the game machine armors BG8 to BG11, a suggestion suggesting that a predetermined profit can be obtained by shooting game balls in the display area of the display means until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the predetermined effect is completed. A game machine armor BG12 characterized by being displayed.
According to the game machine armor BG12, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors BG8 to BG11, the player who visually recognizes the display area can be notified of the timing suitable for shooting the game ball by the suggestive display. The game burden on the player can be reduced.
In addition, the aspect of the predetermined condition is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be that a predetermined period of time has elapsed, that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through a predetermined ball entrance, or that the passage has been detected.

In the game machine armor BG12, the suggestive display is a display suggesting aiming at a predetermined ball entrance or an open/close lottery ball entrance for executing a lottery for opening and closing an electric accessory that opens and closes the predetermined ball entrance. Game machine armor BG13 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor BG13, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BG12, the suggestive display clarifies the aim of the shot game ball, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.
In the game machine armor BG12 or BG13, a display that continues until a predetermined launchable timing is configured in the predetermined effect, and the game ball is detected at a predetermined detection port when the shot is not fired even after the predetermined launch timing. If not, the game machine armor BG14 is characterized in that a predetermined notification is continued until one of them is done.
According to the game machine armor BG14, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BG12 or BG13, if it is confirmed that the predetermined notification is continued, it is possible to check whether the game ball is shot after the predetermined shooting timing. , or the game ball is not detected at a predetermined detection port.

A game machine BG15 characterized in that when a predetermined number of balls or more than the predetermined number of balls are detected during the predetermined performance in any one of the game machines BG12 to BG14, a predetermined notification is given.
According to the game machine armor BG15, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors BG12 to BG14, it is possible to inform the player that a predetermined number or more of balls have been entered during a predetermined presentation by a predetermined notification. Therefore, the player can adjust the shooting intensity of the game ball, etc., using this as a hint, thereby reducing the burden of the game.
Note that the manner of predetermined notification is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified. For example, a predetermined four-letter idiom may be displayed, a display may be displayed to discourage the shooting of the game ball, a predetermined light emitting means may emit light, or a predetermined sound may be emitted. Any output may be used.
In any one of the game machines BG1 to BG15, the predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting made by the player, or regardless of the light emission intensity setting made by the player. A game machine armor BG16 characterized in that it is executed with a predetermined emission intensity and a predetermined emission color.

According to the game machine armor BG16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BG1 to BG15, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unaware of sound or light depending on the player's settings.
<Set the change period of the volume and light intensity in the ending>
Effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game, and change means capable of configuring a changeable state in which predetermined settings related to the game can be changed during execution of the predetermined effect. Game machine armor BH1 to play.
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that transitions to a state in which a jackpot game ends and a special figure fluctuation game is possible (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the player is idle from the end of the round game in the jackpot game to the transition to the state where the special figure fluctuation game is possible, it is easy to hold the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that a game ball is likely to be shot by mistake. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing game balls.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BH1, it is possible to configure the changeable state during the predetermined performance, so that the idle time during the predetermined performance can be used for changing the predetermined setting. can. As a result, the player's hand can be easily released from the handle, so that erroneous shooting of the game ball can be easily prevented. In other words, it can be improved from the viewpoint of effectively using game balls.

The game machine armor BH1 is characterized by comprising notifying means for informing the player of the end of the duration of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp the effect, and in the changeable state, the effect by the notifying means is continued. BH2.
According to the game machine armor BH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BH1, it is possible to notify the player of the timing at which it is preferable to grasp the steering wheel again after changing the predetermined settings. This makes it easier for the player to avoid being disadvantaged by not shooting the game ball at the appropriate timing.
A game machine armor BH3 characterized in that in the game machine armor BH1 or BH2, a state in which the changeable predetermined setting can be switched in the changeable state can be configured.
According to the game machine armor BH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BH1 or BH2, there are a plurality of changeable predetermined settings, so that even if the player has a long time to spare, the player can enjoy It can make it easier to avoid getting into trouble.

In the game machine armor BH3, in the changeable state, the predetermined setting that can be changed or the predetermined setting that is being changed is displayed by display means.
According to the game machine armor BH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BH3, it is possible to clarify by display what is to be changed among the predetermined settings related to the game. As a result, the game burden on the player can be reduced.
A game machine BH5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines BH1 to BH4, a predetermined visible region of a predetermined display on a display means is changed by a predetermined operation executed in the changeable state.
According to the game machine armor BH5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machine armor BH1 to BH4, by changing the visible area of the predetermined display on the display means by the predetermined operation performed by the player, the player can A display considered to be of interest can be placed in front of the player's line of sight. As a result, the player can concentrate on the game without feeling the trouble of moving the line of sight.

A game machine upper BH6 characterized in that it is possible to construct a state in which a part of the display area of the display means is rendered invisible by a predetermined operation executed in the changeable state in the game machine upper BH5.
According to the game machine armor BH6, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor BH5, a part of the display area of the display means becomes invisible by a predetermined operation, so that the display that may become invisible can be visually recognized. It is possible to make the player who wants to keep it consider whether or not to perform a predetermined operation. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid situations in which the player recklessly performs a predetermined operation.
In any of the game machines BH1 to BH6, when the predetermined setting is changed in the changeable state, the change is returned under a predetermined condition, or the change is invalidated under a predetermined condition. Game machine armor BH7 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor BH7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors BH1 to BH6, when the predetermined condition is established, the predetermined setting is returned or invalidated. Players can be made to understand.

Note that the predetermined condition is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a jackpot game may be started, a jackpot game may be continued a predetermined number of times, a predetermined number or more of game balls may be detected by a predetermined detection means in a predetermined period, or a predetermined number of game balls may be detected. It is also possible to operate a predetermined operation means with timing.
In the gaming machine armor BH7, the predetermined condition is achieved by operating a predetermined operating means operated to change the predetermined setting.
According to the game machine armor BH8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BH7, it is possible to undo or invalidate the change of the predetermined setting by operating the predetermined operation means, so the change of the predetermined setting is returned. , or to facilitate intentional invalidation.
In the game machine armor BH7, the predetermined condition is achieved at a predetermined timing regardless of the timing at which the predetermined setting is changed.

According to the game machine armor BH9, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BH7, the predetermined condition is achieved at the predetermined timing, so it is possible to avoid the situation where the predetermined condition is never achieved.
Note that the predetermined timing is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a case where the special figure variation is executed a predetermined number of times, a case where a predetermined content is notified, or a predetermined time such as noon.
Game machine armor BH10 is characterized in that, in game machine armor BH7, the predetermined condition is achieved when a predetermined state elapses for a predetermined period of time.
According to the game machine armor BH10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BH7, the change of the predetermined setting is returned or invalidated, so that the player can grasp that a predetermined state has passed for a predetermined period of time. can.

Note that the predetermined state is not limited at all. For example, when the jackpot game continues, the jackpot type obtained may be repeated with the same (or more or less than a predetermined number of rounds), the operation means may not be operated, or the special figure fluctuation is not executed.
In any of the game machines BH1 to BH10, it is possible to set a predetermined target amount in advance for the predetermined setting, and in the changeable state, a difference notification that makes it possible to grasp the difference between the predetermined setting and the target amount. A game machine armor BH11 characterized by comprising means.
According to the game machine armor BH11, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machine armor BH1 to BH10, even if the change in the predetermined setting is returned or becomes invalid, the same player plays the game. If so, by changing the predetermined setting while grasping the difference from the target amount by the difference notification means, it is possible to easily restore the state before the predetermined setting is returned or invalidated.
As a result, when the player who plays the game changes, the predetermined setting is maintained as the setting of the previous player, so that the predetermined setting can be changed in consideration of the game load given to the subsequent player. Even when the game machine is controlled to be returned or invalidated, the predetermined settings can be easily returned to the previous state, so that even if the player who plays the game has not changed, Even if the predetermined setting is returned or invalidated unintentionally, the predetermined setting can be easily returned to the previous state, so that the game burden imposed on the player can be reduced.

<Change the display mode of the same display depending on the situation>
Effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined display effect related to a game is provided, and the display position or the displayed size of the predetermined display effect can be changed during execution of the predetermined display effect. Game machine armor BI1.
Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that can visually recognize an integral shape by combining a movable accessory arranged on the front side of the display device and the display of the display device (for example, JP-A-2015 -019743). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is necessary to determine the display position, size and shape according to the position, size and shape of the movable accessory, so that the display area of the display device is effectively used. There was a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BI1, it is possible to change the display position or the displayed size of the predetermined display effect while the predetermined display effect is being executed. Improvements can be made from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing the display area of the display device without suffering from the problem.
In the game machine back BI1, the predetermined display effect is configured such that the identifiability is lower when it is displayed on the end side of the display area than when it is displayed on the center side of the display area. Characteristic game machine armor BI2.

According to the game machine armor BI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BI1, it is possible to adjust the degree of attention to a predetermined display effect depending on where it is displayed in the display area.
In addition, the mode of reducing the distinguishability is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be displayed semi-transparently, or may be displayed in a reduced size.
A game machine BI3 characterized in that, in the game machine BI1 or BI2, the change is executed by operating a predetermined operating means.
According to the game machine back BI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine back BI1 or BI2, the player can select whether or not to change the display mode of the predetermined display effect. As a result, the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced.

<Involvement of button operation>
An effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game, and a predetermined operation means being operated during execution of the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect can be switched from a first state to a second state. A game machine armor BIZ1 characterized by comprising a production switching means configured in.
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that transitions to a state in which a jackpot game ends and a special figure fluctuation game is possible (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the player is idle from the end of the round game in the jackpot game to the transition to the state where the special figure fluctuation game is possible, it is easy to hold the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that a game ball is likely to be shot by mistake.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor BIZ1, it is possible to switch the effect to be executed by operating the predetermined operation means during the predetermined effect, so that the idle time during the predetermined effect can be changed to the predetermined effect. It can be applied to the time to operate the operation means. Since the performance can be switched by operating the operating means, the player's desire to operate the operating means can be effectively enhanced. As a result, the player's hand can be easily released from the handle, so that erroneous shooting of the game ball can be easily prevented.
The game machine armor BIZ1 includes operation notification means capable of informing that the predetermined operation means can be operated, and by operating the predetermined operation means according to the notification of the operation notification means, the predetermined effect mode A game machine armor BIZ2 characterized by being switched.

According to the game machine armor BIZ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BIZ1, since the operation of the predetermined operation means is assisted by the operation notification means, even an inexperienced player can operate the predetermined operation means without hesitation. can do.
In the game machine armor BIZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is executed during a part of the duration of the predetermined effect.
According to the game machine armor BIZ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor BIZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is executed during a part of the duration of the predetermined production, so that the predetermined production can be visually recognized during the other time. can afford to do so.
Note that the timing of notification from the operation notification means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed from the middle of a predetermined effect, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed until the middle of the predetermined effect, or the predetermined effect may be performed. The notification from the operation notification means may be executed throughout the execution of the performance. Further, when the notification from the operation notification means is executed during the execution of a predetermined effect, the operation may be valid during the execution of the notification, or the time during which the operation is invalid may be included. Also good.

A game machine BIZ4 characterized in that in any one of the game machines BIZ1 to BIZ3, the performance is not switched by the operation of the predetermined operation means in a predetermined period in the second half of the predetermined performance.
According to the game machine BIZ4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine BIZ1 to BIZ3, by invalidating the operation of the predetermined operation means in the predetermined period in the latter half of the predetermined production, the predetermined in the predetermined period in the latter half You can draw attention to the performance.
In game machine BIZ4, game machine BIZ5 is characterized in that the display of the operation notification means in the display area of the display means is hidden during the predetermined period of the second half of the predetermined effect.
According to the game machine BIZ5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BIZ4, it is possible to recognize that the operation of the predetermined operation means has entered an invalid period by visually recognizing the display area of the display means.

In any of the game machines BIZ1 to BIZ5, when a plurality of types of effects to be switched by the operation of the predetermined operation means are prepared, attached notification for predicting the effect to be executed by the operation of the predetermined operation means A game machine armor BIZ6 characterized by comprising means.
According to the game machine armor BIZ6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor BIZ1 to BIZ5, it is possible to predict the effect executed by the operation of the predetermined operation means by the attached notification means, so even if the predetermined operation means is operated Regardless, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment and futile feeling of being switched to an unexpected performance, and since the player only has to operate the predetermined operation means when switching to the desired performance, the predetermined operation means is repeated. It is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of operating the
A game machine BIZ7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines BIZ1 to BIZ6, the operation of the predetermined operation means becomes possible from the middle of the predetermined performance.
According to the game machine armor BIZ7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor BIZ1 to BIZ6, it is possible to draw attention to a predetermined effect until the operation of the predetermined operation means becomes possible.

In the game machine BIZ6 or BIZ7, the attached notification means has a display for suggesting a specific operation timing, and the specific operation timing secures a predetermined adjustment period by the end of the predetermined effect. A game machine armor BIZ8 characterized by being set as a possible timing.
According to the game machine BIZ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine BIZ6 or BIZ7, the specific operation timing can change depending on the length of the adjustment period. You can predict the development of the production.
A game machine armor BIZ9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors BIZ1 to BIZ8, the mode of performance switched by operating the predetermined operation means is returned to the mode before switching under a predetermined condition.
According to the game machine armor BIZ9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor BIZ1 to BIZ8, the mode of production is returned to the state before switching under a predetermined condition, so that the predetermined operation means can be operated again. . As a result, the number of operations of the predetermined operation means can be increased, and the atmosphere of the players participating in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machine armor BIZ2 to the game machine armor BIZ9, the notification from the operation notification means is provided with a plurality of types of modes in which the number of the predetermined operation means operated simultaneously is different. BIZ10.
According to the game machine armor BIZ10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor BIZ2 to BIZ9, there are cases where the number of predetermined operation means operated simultaneously is 1 and cases where it is 2 or more are provided. Therefore, by daring to operate the two predetermined operation means, it is possible to distract the player from the time when the game ball is not required to be shot, and to make the player enthusiastic about the game. In this case, since the player's hand can be removed from the handle for shooting the ball, it is possible to suppress the erroneous shooting of the game ball, and to avoid unnecessary disadvantages caused by wasting the shot game ball. can be done.
In any one of the game machines BIZ2 to BIZ10, the notification from the operation notification means includes notification executed when a predetermined profit obtained when a ball enters a predetermined ball entrance reaches an upper limit. Characteristic game machine armor BIZ11.
According to the game machine BIZ11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine BIZ2 to BIZ10, by visually recognizing the notification from the operation notification means, a predetermined profit obtained when the ball enters a predetermined ball entrance. It is possible to make the player grasp that the upper limit has been reached.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with distribution members C170 to C3170 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a displacement member that is disposed at least partially in a ball passage path and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the above-mentioned The displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the first ball is guided to the first passage, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. In a state, a second ball following said first ball is guided into a second passage and said displacement member is placed in said predetermined position in a state in which the weight of said ball is not acted upon. Game machine armor CA1 characterized by.
Here, there is known a game machine having a distribution member that operates with the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to the first path and the second path (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the above-described conventional technique, regardless of the state of the game balls that have arrived, they are only alternately distributed to the first path and the second path in the order in which they have arrived, so the player pays attention to such a distribution operation. However, there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor CA1, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and the first ball moves to the first position. and the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first ball, the second ball following the first ball is guided to the second passage, and the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the ball is placed at a predetermined position without the action of the and the second ball can be guided to the second passage by the displacement member displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, while the second ball is pushed by the first ball by a predetermined amount. , the first sphere is guided to the first passage, and the displacement member is placed in a predetermined position before the second sphere reaches the second sphere. A ball can also be guided to the first passage. In this way, since the path to be guided can be changed according to the state of the series of balls (the interval between the leading ball and the trailing ball), the player can focus on the state of the balls, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. can do.
The second sphere that follows the first sphere means a sphere that follows the first sphere with a gap smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second ball may roll or flow down while being in contact with the first ball.

In the game machine armor CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member.
According to the game machine armor CA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member. It can be simplified. In addition, since the displacement of the displacement member can be made slower than in the case of using an urging spring, it is possible to ensure that the displacement member is placed in a predetermined position before guiding the second ball to the second passage. can be suppressed. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility that a third sphere following the second sphere can also be guided to the second passage.
In the game machine upper CA2, the displacement member functions as a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and displaces the main body to the predetermined position. A game machine upper CA3, characterized in that it comprises a weight, and at least part of the weight is visible to the player.
According to the game machine armor CA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA2, a main body part that guides the ball to the first path or the second path, and a weight that is connected to the main body part and displaces the main body part to a predetermined position. Since at least a part of the weight is visible to the player, the player can recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight. can. In addition, the weight can serve both as a weight for displacing the main body and as a part for recognizing the direction in which the ball is guided, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In game machine armors CA1 to CA3, game machine armor CA4 is characterized in that the displacement member has a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.
According to the game machine armor CA4, in any one of the game machine armors CA1 to CA3, the displacement member has a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first path rolls, so that the first ball rolls. The weight of the ball can be exerted on the displacement member while rolling on one surface. Therefore, the state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (that is, the state in which the second ball can be guided to the second passage) can be easily maintained.
The game machine armor CA4 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member rolls the second ball guided to the second passage. A game machine armor CA5, characterized in that it comprises a second surface that overlaps with the shaft in the vertical direction.
According to the game machine armor CA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA4, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second path rolls, and the second surface is perpendicular to the axis. Since the displacement member is disposed at the overlapping position in the direction, it is possible to suppress displacement of the displacement member toward the predetermined position due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to secure the possibility of guiding the third ball, which follows the second ball, to the second passage.

In the game machine upper CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is longer than the second surface. Game machine armor CA6 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor CA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second path rolls, and the first surface is the second surface. Since it is longer than the surface, it is possible to easily create a state in which the first ball rolls on the first surface while the second ball rolls on the second surface. That is, by allowing the weight of the first ball to act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward a predetermined position can be suppressed. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to secure the possibility of guiding the third ball, which follows the second ball, to the second passage.
In any one of the game machine uppers CA4 to CA6, a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member are provided on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. A game machine armor CA7 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, wherein the first surface extends in a direction away from the shaft.
According to the game machine armor CA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors CA4 to CA6, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second path rolls, and the first surface extends away from the axis, so that the weight of the first ball can be effectively applied to the displacement member as the first ball rolls toward the first passage. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward the predetermined position due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to secure the possibility of guiding the third ball, which follows the second ball, to the second passage.

In any one of the game machine uppers CA4 to CA7, a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member are provided on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. A game machine armor CA8 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, wherein at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is arranged with the shaft interposed therebetween.
According to the game machine armor CA8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machine armors CA4 to CA7, it includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is the second The second surface on which the second ball guided to the passage rolls is provided, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface are arranged with the shaft interposed therebetween, so that the displacement member can be arranged freely. can be enhanced.
In any one of the game machine uppers CA4 to CA7, a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member are provided on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. A game machine armor CA9 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, wherein at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is arranged on the same side with respect to the shaft.
According to the game machine armor CA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor CA4 to CA7, it includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is the second A second surface is provided on which a second ball guided into the passage rolls, the first surface and the second surface being at least partially located on the same side of the axis so that the first ball Even if ejected from the first surface, the weight of the second ball can be used to position the displacement member to guide the second ball to the second passage. As a result, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

Any one of game machine uppers CA4 to CA9 has an upstream surface on which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface is a rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface. A game machine CA10 characterized by reversing the .
According to the game machine armor CA10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors CA4 to CA9, it has an upstream surface on which the first ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface rolls from the upstream surface. Since the rolling direction of the first ball that has been formed is reversed, it is possible to secure the time for the first ball to stay on the first surface for the time required for the reversal. Therefore, by allowing the weight of the first ball to act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward a predetermined position can be suppressed. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to secure the possibility of guiding the third ball, which follows the second ball, to the second passage. Furthermore, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member can be increased accordingly.
In any one of the game machine uppers CA1 to CA10, a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and a ball disposed on the base member rolls toward the first surface. A game machine armor CA11, comprising an upstream surface, wherein the shaft is disposed on the upstream surface in a posture orthogonal to the direction in which the ball rolls and the vertical direction.
According to the game machine armor CA11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors CA1 to CA10, the shaft is arranged in a posture orthogonal to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction, so that the base member It is possible to reduce the size of the unit in which the displacement member is arranged in the . In particular, by arranging the base member so that the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface is aligned with the width direction of the game machine, the width direction of the game machine is effectively utilized and a space for disposing the displacement member is secured. can be done easily.

Game machine armor CA12 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors CA1 to CA10, a base member is provided, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be slidably displaceable.
According to the game machine armor CA12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors CA1 to CA10, the displacement member is slidably disposed on the base member. As compared with the case where the displacement member is formed, the size of the displacement member can be reduced, and accordingly, the arrangement space of the other members in the base member can be secured.
In any one of the game machine uppers CA1 to CA12, a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and a ball disposed on the base member rolls toward the first surface. and an upstream surface, wherein the displacement member is guided to the second passage in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and the second ball rolls thereon. A second surface is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is located vertically below the downstream end of the upstream surface. Game machine armor CA13 characterized by.
Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement member may jump up due to the impact of the displacement. Also, if the upstream end of the second surface is positioned upward, there is a risk that the second ball will not be able to roll from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the jumped displacement member (upstream end of the second surface), the displacement member is further pushed up by the impact (the displacement member is pushed up by the second ball), There is a risk that the second ball will flow into the path (first surface) in which the first ball should roll.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor CA13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor CA1 to CA12, in a state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, from the downstream end of the upstream surface Since the upstream end of the second surface is located vertically downward, when the displacement member rebounds due to the impact of being displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the distance from the downstream end of the upstream surface Also, it is possible to suppress the upstream end of the second surface from being positioned upward. Therefore, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.
In the game machine armor CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface.
According to the game machine armor CA14, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface, so that when displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball The force acting on the displacement member from the second ball when the displacement member rebounds (bounces up) due to the impact and the second ball collides with the upstream end of the rebounded displacement member (the upstream end of the second surface), It can act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.
Any one of the game machine uppers CA1 to CA14 has an upstream surface on which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the displacement member rolls the first ball guided to the first passage. A first surface is provided, the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. the position where the displacement locus of the displacement member on the upstream surface side is separated from the upstream surface more than the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first ball at the position where the first surface is reversed. A game machine CA15 characterized by being.

According to the game machine armor CA15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, it is in the position where the first surface is reversed. Since the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is positioned farther from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface side of the first sphere, the second sphere erroneously flows into the first surface ( accepted). That is, the second ball is brought into contact with the first ball to keep the second ball away from the first surface, and the weight of the first ball displaces the upstream surface of the displacement member from the predetermined position. The end can push the second ball away from the first surface.
In the game machine upper CA15, the displacement member is configured to move the first ball to a position where the rolling direction of the first surface is reversed until the weight of the first ball displaces the predetermined position from the predetermined position or more. Game machine armor CA16 characterized by fastening the.
According to the game machine armor CA16, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA15, the displacement member reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the weight of the first ball displaces it from a predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more. Since the first ball is held in place, it is possible to more reliably prevent the second ball from being erroneously flowed (accepted) into the first surface. That is, the second ball is brought into contact with the first ball to keep the second ball away from the first surface, and the weight of the first ball displaces the upstream surface of the displacement member from the predetermined position. The operation of pushing the second ball away from the first surface at the end can be performed more reliably.
Any one of the game machine uppers CA1 to CA16 includes an inflow part, a reciprocating surface on which the ball introduced from the inflow part rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and an outflow part for causing the ball to flow out from the reciprocating surface. A game machine armor CA17, characterized in that a part is located upstream of the displacement member in the passage path.

According to the game machine armor CA17, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machine armors CA1 to CA16, an inflow part, a reciprocating surface on which the ball introduced from the inflow part rolls in a reciprocating manner, and a ball from the reciprocating surface and the outflow portion is positioned upstream of the displacement member in the passage path. It is possible to easily reach the displacement member in a state in which the sphere and the second sphere are connected to each other with an interval of a predetermined amount or less. That is, even if the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere when flowing in from the inflow part is larger than the predetermined amount, the first sphere and the second sphere can be displaced reciprocatingly on the reciprocating surface. It is possible to reduce the distance to the second ball (the distance is reduced to a predetermined amount or less).
The game machine armor CA17 is characterized in that the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension through which one ball can pass.
According to the game machine armor CA18, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through, so that it flows into the reciprocating surface from the inflow part and reciprocates on the reciprocating surface. It is possible to prevent the displaced first ball and the second ball from passing each other. Therefore, when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocatingly displaced on the reciprocating surface, the gap between the first ball and the second ball can be easily reduced (the gap can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less). .
In the game machine armor CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward toward the one side and the other side, and the outflow part is arranged at the lowest part of the reciprocating surface CA19.

According to the game machine armor CA19, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward toward the one side and the other side, and the outflow part is arranged at the bottom of the reciprocating surface. The first sphere and the second sphere can flow out from the outflow part in a state in which the inertia of the reciprocating displacement of the surface is weakened. That is, the first ball and the second ball can be easily flowed out while maintaining the state in which the first ball and the second ball are connected to each other with an interval of a predetermined amount or less.
Game machine armor CA20 characterized in that, in the game machine armor CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from above.
According to the game machine armor CA20, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA19, since the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above, when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocatingly displaced on the reciprocating surface, , the gap between the first ball and the second ball can be easily narrowed (the gap can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less).
A game machine armor CA21 characterized by comprising an attracting member arranged in a posture in which at least the lower surface is inclined downward so that the attracting force of a magnet can act on a ball.

According to the game machine armor CA21, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors CA1 to CA20, the attraction member is formed so that the attraction force of the magnet can act on the ball and is disposed in a posture in which at least the lower surface is inclined downward. Therefore, by forming a ball passage path with such an attraction member, the amusement of the game can be improved. That is, when a ball is attracted to the downwardly inclined lower surface of the attracting member, the ball can be slid by its own weight and displaced along the lower surface of the attracting member. In this case, depending on the state of the sphere (the relationship between the inertial force acting on the sphere and the attraction force), there is a possibility that the sphere will fall from the bottom surface of the attraction member (i.e., the sphere will not reach the end of the path (bottom surface of the attraction member)). It can be an unstable state with a possibility that it cannot be reached. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
The game machine upper CA21 is characterized in that the attracting member comprises a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material, and a magnet for applying a magnetic force to the lower surface forming member.
According to the game machine armor CA22, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA21, the attracting member includes a lower surface forming member formed of a magnetic material into a plate shape and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the lower surface forming member. By adopting a structure in which the sliding surface is formed by the lower surface of the lower surface forming member, it is possible to easily adjust the attracting force and optimize the frictional force, and to reliably form the ball passage path with a simple structure.
Game machine armor CA23 characterized in that in game machine armor CA21 or CA22, the attraction member forms at least part of the second passage.

According to the game machine armor CA23, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA21 or CA22, the attraction member forms at least a part of the second passage, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In other words, the second ball can reach the second passage by being guided by the displacement member only when the second ball reaches the displacement member in a state in which the second ball is connected to the first ball with an interval of a predetermined amount or less. only in some cases, and the chances of that happening are relatively low. The second sphere that has reached through such a low probability is displaced in a state of instability where there is a possibility of falling (possibility that it cannot reach the end of the lower surface of the adsorption member), so that it can pass safely. can be expected by the player to improve the interest in the game.
The game machine armor CA23 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member. and a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, wherein at least a portion of the first surface and the second surface sandwich the shaft. Game machine armor CA24 characterized by being arranged in.
According to the game machine armor CA24, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA23, it is provided with a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the first passage. A first surface on which the first ball rolls and a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, wherein the first surface and the second surface are at least partially Since they are arranged with the shaft interposed therebetween, the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), thereby displacing the position of the second surface upward. can be made Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attracting member.
In the game machine armor CA24, the game machine armor CA25 is characterized in that the second surface is disposed at a position overlapping the shaft in the vertical direction.

According to the game machine armor CA25, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA24, the second surface is disposed at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction, so that the second surface is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. It is possible to suppress the member from being displaced toward the predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward). Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attracting member.
Game machine armor CA26 characterized in that said first surface is longer than said second surface in game machine armor CA24 or CA25.
According to the game machine armor CA26, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CA24 or CA25, since the first surface is longer than the second surface, while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the first can easily form a state in which the ball rolls on the first surface. That is, by allowing the weight of the first ball to act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward a predetermined position (downward displacement of the position of the second surface) can be suppressed. Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attracting member.
<Regarding the concept of the invention using the dish members C120, C2120, and C4120 as examples>
In a game machine provided with a path for balls, the path includes a first path that allows balls to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second path that communicates with the first path and allows the balls to pass along the left-right direction. A game machine armor CB1 characterized by comprising a passage of

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a passage member (stage) that allows a ball to reciprocate (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor CB1, the passage includes a first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second passage that communicates with the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left-right direction. and , the amusement of the game can be enhanced.
In the game machine armor CB1, when the first ball and the second ball following the first ball pass through the second passage, the gap between the first ball and the second ball The game machine armor CB2 is characterized in that the path to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed accordingly.
According to the game machine armor CB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CB1, when the first ball and the second ball succeeding the first ball pass through the second passage, the first ball Depending on the distance between the ball and the second ball, the path to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed. It is possible to make the player expect that the interval between the ball and the second ball will be a predetermined interval, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In this case, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first path, and the first ball and the second ball pass the ball along the left-right direction. Since the ball flows down from the first path to the second path, the player can easily visually recognize the distance between the first ball and the second ball. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In the game machine armor CB2, if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is less than a predetermined amount, the passage is guided when the distance exceeds the predetermined amount. At least a second sphere is guided to a more advantageous path, said first path being defined by said reciprocating movement of said first and second spheres. A game machine armor CB3 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to reduce the interval between.
According to the game machine armor CB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is a predetermined amount or less, the distance is a predetermined amount. at least a second ball is guided to a path that is more favorable than the path guided when the Since the distance between the sphere and the second sphere can be reduced, the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere when passing through the second passage can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less. As a result, the player can expect to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
A game machine armor CB4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors CB1 to CB3, a game board having an opening in the center is provided, and the second passage is arranged in the opening of the game board.

According to the game machine armor CB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of the game machine armors CB1 to CB3, the game machine has a game board with an opening at the center, and the second passage is arranged at the opening of the game board. Therefore, the space in the front-rear direction can be effectively utilized. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the entire length of the second passage.
<Regarding the concept of the invention with the magnetic portions C2400, c5400, c6400 (passage portion CRt2004) as an example>
In a game machine comprising a displacement member that is disposed at least partially in a ball passage path and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the above-mentioned The displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the second ball follows the first ball. The game machine armor CC1 is characterized in that the ball passes through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member and is guided to a path different from that of the first ball.
Here, there is known a game machine having a distribution member that operates with the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to the first path and the second path (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the conventional technique described above, since the ball only flows downward in the weight direction, there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor CC1, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and the displacement member moves to the first ball. is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of , the second ball succeeding the first ball passes through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member and is guided to a path different from that of the first ball. , can enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine armor CC1, the passage through which the second ball is guided through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member is formed of a magnetic portion capable of attracting the ball by magnetic force. CC2.
According to the game machine CC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CC1, the passage through which the second ball is guided through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic portion capable of attracting the ball by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to form a mode in which the ball is dropped in the middle of the passage. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
In the game machine armor CC2, the magnetic part is positioned above a portion of the displacement member which is lifted upward.
According to the game machine armor CC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor CC2, since the magnetic part is positioned above the portion of the displacement member that is lifted upward, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. If not, even if the second ball passes through the portion to be lifted upward, it is possible to reliably form a mode in which the second ball is not attracted to the magnetic portion.

In the game machine armor CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported, and a portion on which the weight of the first ball is applied and a portion to be lifted upward are located on either side of the rotation axis. Game machine armor CC4 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor CC4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported, and sandwiching the rotation axis, the part where the weight of the first ball is applied and the upper part When the second ball passes through the part to be lifted upward, the weight of the first ball is used to lift the part through which the second ball passes. It can be easily maintained in good condition.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Frames D86b to D8086b as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter and a displaceable member that changes the likelihood of a ball entering the passage, wherein the displacement member is configured to allow a ball to enter the passage. A game machine armor DA1 characterized in that it is displaced when a ball is hit, and changes the ease with which a ball enters the path.
A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the entertainment of the game is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor DA1, the displacement member is displaced when the ball enters the passage, and changes the ease with which the ball enters the passage. When a ball is entered into the passage and a second ball is expected to be entered into the passage, or conversely, when the first ball is entered into the passage, the second ball enters the passage. When expecting that the ball will not be hit, it is possible to focus attention on whether or not the second ball will be hit into the passage. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
The game machine upper DA2 in the game machine upper DA1 is characterized in that, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage.
According to the game machine armor DA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA1, when the ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage. It is possible to make it easier for balls that follow the hit ball (other balls that have not entered the passage and subsequent balls) to enter the passage. That is, if one ball enters the passage, a state can be formed in which the following balls are likely to enter the passage in succession, and if the following ball enters the passage, the subsequent balls enter the passage. Due to the entry of the ball into the passage of the first, a state can be formed in which the next following ball is likely to enter the passage. Therefore, the player can expect the occurrence of a chain of balls entering the passage by the ball entering the passage. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
The game machine upper DA3 in the game machine upper DA1 is characterized in that, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

According to the game machine armor DA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA1, when the ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage. In the state where the ball is entered into the passage, it is possible to make it difficult for the second ball to enter the passage when it is expected that the second ball will not be entered into the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In any one of the gaming machine decks DA1 to DA3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the ball to enter the passage. A game machine armor DA4 characterized by being displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.
According to the game machine armor DA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors DA1 to DA3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, it is possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.
In the game machine DA2 or DA3, a rolling member that allows a ball entered into the passage to roll and is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member. The displacement member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means to the passage. A game machine armor DA5 characterized in that it is displaced to a side where a ball is easily entered or a side where it is difficult for a ball to be entered into the passage.

According to the game machine armor DA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA2 or DA3, the ball that enters the passage can roll, and the rolling member that is displaced by the weight of the ball that rolls. transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, the displacement member being displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member being transmitted by the transmission means. As a result, the ball is displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage. The displacement member can be displaced to the side where it is easier or the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (longen) the state in which the ball is easily entered into the passage or the state in which it is difficult for the ball to be entered into the passage.
A game machine armor DA6 comprising a plurality of the rolling members in the game machine armor DA5.
According to the game machine armor DA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA5, a plurality of rolling members are provided, so that the ball can roll into the path by securing a section (rollable distance) for the ball to roll. It is possible to lengthen the period during which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter or the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (longen) the state in which the ball is easily entered into the passage or the state in which it is difficult for the ball to be entered into the passage.
In the game machine DA5 or DA6, the ball entered into the passage rolls on the rolling member due to the downward inclination of the rolling member, and the rolling member is rotatably supported so that the ball rolls. A game machine armor DA7 characterized in that the downward inclination of the rolling member in a moving state is made smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member in a non-rolling state of the ball.

According to the game machine armor DA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA5 or DA6, the ball entered into the passage rolls on the rolling member due to the downward inclination of the rolling member, and the rolling member is rotatable. and the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is made smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling, so that the rolling member rolls It is possible to suppress the imparting of momentum to the ball. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member can be lengthened. As a result, the state in which the ball is easily entered into the passage or the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage can be easily maintained (longer).
Game machine armor DA8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors DA5 to DA7, the rolling member is returned by its own weight to the state before being displaced by the weight of the ball.
According to the game machine armor DA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors DA5 to DA7, the rolling member is restored by its own weight to the state before being displaced by the weight of the ball, so the rolling member is driven. This eliminates the need for actuators and sensors for controlling the actuators, thereby reducing the product cost.
A game machine armor DA9 in any one of the game machine armors DA5 to DA8 is provided with action means for acting on the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to the game machine armor DA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors DA5 to DA8, since it is provided with action means for acting on the ball rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to influence the rolling of the ball. In other words, the action of the action means can provide resistance to rolling of the ball, thereby reducing the rolling speed. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, the state in which the ball is easily entered into the passage or the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage can be easily maintained (longer).
In the game machine armor DA9, the action means is formed as a projection projecting from the inner surface of the passage and extending along the vertical direction, and along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface A plurality of gaming machine armors DA10 are arranged at predetermined intervals.
According to the game machine armor DA10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA9, the action means is formed as a projection projecting from the inner surface of the passage and extending along the vertical direction, and rolls on the rolling surface. Since a plurality of balls are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the balls, when the balls roll on the rolling surface, the projections (acting means) are brought into contact with each other, thereby causing the balls to roll. Rolling resistance can be applied to reduce the rolling speed. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, the state in which the ball is easily entered into the passage or the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage can be easily maintained (longer).
On the other hand, since the projecting portion (acting means) extends along the vertical direction, resistance is less likely to be applied to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when a ball bounces upward from the rolling surface of the rolling member, the ball can be quickly dropped downward (rolling surface). Therefore, even if the rolling member is displaced upward as the ball bounces upward, the rolling member can be quickly restored to the displaced state by the weight of the ball. As a result, the displacement member, which has been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage, is moved to the initial position (the position before the ball enters the passage) due to the bounce of the ball from the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem of returning to

In the game machine armor DA10, the rolling member has a rolling surface on which the ball rolls, which is formed as a smooth surface smoothly extending along the rolling direction of the ball.
According to the game machine armor DA11, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA10, the rolling member has a rolling surface on which the ball rolls, which is formed as a smooth surface that smoothly continues along the rolling direction of the ball. It is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the moving surface from jumping upward (in the vertical direction). Therefore, the displacement member, which has been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage, returns to the initial position (the position before the ball enters the passage) due to the bounce of the ball from the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem to be returned.
In addition, the rolling contact surface does not have to be a flat surface, and may be an undulating surface (a surface whose cross-sectional shape is formed by smoothly connecting circular arcs). That is, the rolling surface should not have a step with a height of at least 1/10 of the diameter of the sphere.
In the game machine armor DA10 or DA11, the protrusions are formed on both sides of the inner surface of the passage and sandwich the rolling surface, and the protrusion on one inner surface and the protrusion on the other inner surface are formed on the inner surface of the passage. A game machine armor DA12 characterized by being arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling surfaces of the rolling members.

According to the game machine armor DA12, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA10 or DA11, the protrusions are formed on both sides of the inner surface of the passage across the rolling surface, and the protrusion on one inner surface and the protrusion on the other inner surface are formed. Since the protrusions on the inner surface are arranged in a zigzag pattern along the rolling surface of the rolling member, the ball can easily come into contact with the protrusions when rolling on the rolling surface. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, the state in which the ball is easily entered into the passage or the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage can be easily maintained (longer).
In any one of game machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably pivoted, and a ball entered into the passage rolls on the rolling member toward the pivoted portion. Game machine armor DA13 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor DA13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably pivoted, and the ball entered into the passage is directed toward the pivoted part. Since the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the rolling member. That is, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage when the ball enters the passage and reaches the rolling member. Therefore, if the distance between the ball that entered the passage and the ball that follows it (another ball that has not entered the passage, the following ball) is relatively small (for example, if both balls When the balls flow down continuously), the trailing ball can be easily entered into the passage or difficult to be entered into the passage.
In addition, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually reduced as the rolling of the ball progresses. In other words, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member, which was on the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage, can be gradually displaced toward the initial position (the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage). can. As a result, it is possible to change the expectation that the ball will enter the path and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when a ball that has entered the passage is dropped onto the rolling member, the dropped ball should be caught at a position where the amount of displacement of the rolling member is large (a position away from the part where it is pivotally supported). can be done. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, and the ball can be prevented from jumping upward. As a result, the weight of the ball is stably applied to the rolling member, and the state of the displacement member is stabilized (for example, the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is easy for the ball to enter the passage). It is possible to suppress the temporary displacement of the member).
The game machine armor DA14 is characterized in that, in the game machine armor DA13, a ball entered into the passage is dropped onto the rolling member.
According to the game machine armor DA14, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA13, the ball that enters the passage is dropped onto the rolling member, so the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is used to move the rolling member. It can be displaced quickly. As a result, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage or the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage. Therefore, if the distance between the ball that entered the passage and the ball that follows it (another ball that has not entered the passage, the following ball) is relatively small (for example, if both balls Even when the balls flow down continuously), it is possible to make it easier or harder for the trailing ball to enter the passage.
In addition, when the ball that has entered the passage member is dropped onto a member other than the rolling member (a fixed, non-displaced member), the other member is likely to be damaged. For example, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, thereby suppressing breakage. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the design of the passage by allowing the ball to fall.

In the game machine armor DA13, the ball rolling on the rolling member rolls at least to the pivotally supported portion of the rolling member.
According to the game machine armor DA14, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA13, the ball rolling on the rolling member rolls at least up to the portion (rotating shaft) where the rolling member is pivotally supported, so the rolling member Compared to the case where the ball is pushed before it reaches the supported part (rotating shaft) of the It is possible to suppress the rolling members from fluttering in the rotational direction. Therefore, the state of the displacement member can be stabilized (for example, temporary displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball can easily enter the passage or the side where the ball can hardly enter the passage can be suppressed).
In any one of the game machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably pivoted, and the ball entered into the passage rolls in a direction away from the pivoted portion. A game machine armor DA16 characterized by rolling members.
According to the game machine armor DA16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably pivoted, and the ball entered into the passage is separated from the pivoted part. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member is maximized in the later stage (the stage when it rolls over a predetermined amount). can be done. That is, it is possible to delay the timing at which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage or the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage. Therefore, if the distance between the ball that entered the passage and the ball following that ball (another ball that has not entered the passage, the following ball) is relatively large, the following ball can be easily entered into the aisle or difficult to be entered into the aisle.

In addition, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually increased as the rolling of the ball progresses. That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member can be gradually displaced toward the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage or the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage. As a result, it is possible to change the expectation that the ball will enter the path and enhance the interest of the game.
In any one of the game machines DA5 to DA16, the displacement member is arranged on the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage or the passage when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball. A game machine armor DA17 characterized in that displacement to the side where it is difficult to be hit is regulated.
According to the game machine armor DA17, in addition to the effects of the game machine armors DA5 to DA16, the displacement member is placed on the side or passage where the ball is likely to enter the passage when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball. Displacement to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball is restricted, so it is fraudulent to forcibly displace the displacement member to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage. can be suppressed.
In the game machine armor DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is restricted by the rolling member, so that the ball can easily enter the passage. A game machine armor DA18 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement member to the side where it is difficult for a ball to enter the passage is restricted.

According to the game machine armor DA18, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DA17, in a state in which the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is restricted by the rolling member, so that the ball enters the passage. Since the displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball is likely to enter or the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage is regulated, there is no need to separately provide a component for regulating the forced displacement of the displacement member. can be diverted. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure for suppressing fraudulent displacement of the displacement member.
In any one of the game machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball fills the gap. A game machine armor DA19 that is in contact with the transmission means.
According to the game machine armor DA19, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball. is abutted by the transmission means after filling the gap, so when the displacement of the rolling member is relatively small, the displacement of the rolling member cannot be transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means. That is, in order to displace the displacement member to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage or the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage, it is necessary to form a displacement in the rolling member that exceeds the gap. It is possible to make it difficult to succeed in cheating such as displacing the rolling member by hitting the game machine or displacing the rolling member with a foreign object such as a wire.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Frames D86b to D8086b as an Example>
A game machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter and a displacement member which is formed to be displaceable and which changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage, wherein the displacement speed of the displacement member is formed so as to be variable. A game machine armor DB1 characterized by being.

A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor DB1, since the displacement speed of the displacement member is formed to be variable, it is possible to change the change speed of the ease with which the ball enters the passage. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the game machine armor DB1, the displacement member is characterized in that the displacement speed of the displacement member toward the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage is faster than the displacement speed toward the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage. Game machine armor DB2.
According to the game machine armor DB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DB1, the displacement member has a displacement speed to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage, and a displacement speed to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage. Therefore, a state in which the ball can easily enter the path can be quickly formed, and a good tempo presentation can be performed for the player who expects the ball to enter the path. In addition, by relatively slowing down the displacement speed to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, the period in which the ball can easily enter the passage is secured, and the ball is prevented from entering the passage. It is possible to make an expected player pay attention to whether or not the ball can enter the passage in time. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine armor DB1, the displacement member is characterized in that the displacement speed toward the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage is slower than the displacement speed toward the side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage. Game machine armor DB3.
According to the game machine armor DB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DB1, the displacement member has a displacement speed to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage, and a displacement speed to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage. Since the ball is slowed down, it is possible to gradually increase the ease with which the ball enters the passage, and to gradually increase the expectation of the player who expects the ball to enter the passage. In addition, a state in which the ball is difficult to enter the passage can be quickly formed, and a fast-paced presentation can be performed for the player who expects the ball to enter the passage. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In any one of the game machine decks DB1 to DB3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the passage so that the ball enters the passage. A game machine armor DB4 characterized by being displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.
According to the game machine armor DB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor DB1 to DB3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, it is possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Frames D86b to D8086b as an Example>
A game machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter and a displacement member that is displaceably formed to change the likelihood of a ball entering the passage, wherein a plurality of the displacement members are provided, and the plurality of displacement members are provided. The game machine armor DC1 is characterized in that one of the displacement members among the members has a displacement mode different from that of the other displacement members.
A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor DC1, a plurality of displacement members are provided, and one of the plurality of displacement members has a displacement mode different from that of the other displacement members. By combining , it is possible to increase the change in the easiness of the ball entering the passage. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
Examples of the displacement mode include the timing of starting displacement, the direction of displacement, the speed of displacement, and a combination thereof.

In the game machine armor DC1, the displacement of the one displacement member is started after a predetermined time has passed since the displacement of the other displacement member is started.
According to the game machine armor DC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DC1, the displacement of one displacement member is started after a predetermined time has passed since the displacement of the other displacement member is started. It is possible to make the positions at which the susceptibility to ball entry is changed different and the timing thereof. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine DC1 or DC2 is provided with an upstream passage for causing a ball to flow down to the passage, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passage. Armored DC3.
According to the game machine armor DC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DC1 or DC2, it is provided with an upstream passage that allows the ball to flow down to the passage, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passage. Therefore, the rolling direction and rolling position of the ball rolling in the upstream passage and the displacement direction and displacement position of the displacement member can be related to the ease with which the ball enters the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the ball to enter the passage. Game machine armor DC4 characterized by being displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.
According to the game machine armor DC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors DC1 to DC3, the displacement member uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to make it easier for the ball to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, it is possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator, thereby reducing the product cost.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Frames D86b to D8086b as an Example>
A game machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter and a displaceable member that changes the likelihood of a ball entering the passage, wherein a ball entered into the passage rolls. The displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to move the ball to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage or the ball to enter the passage. A game machine armor DD1 characterized in that it is displaced to the side where it is difficult to be hit by a ball, and the rolling member is formed so that the ball can drop in the middle of the rolling path of the ball.
A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). The prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor DD1, a rolling member is formed so that the ball that enters the passage can roll, and the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that rolls on the rolling member. , the ball is displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage. The length of time the ball's weight is available can be varied depending on how far the . That is, it is possible to change the easiness of the ball entering the passage according to the state of the ball rolling on the rolling member. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the game machine armor DD1, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member and is displaced to the side where the ball is likely to enter the passage.
According to the game machine armor DD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DD1, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, and is displaced to the side where the ball can easily enter the passage. , while the ball that has entered the passage rolls on the rolling member, the ball that follows the ball (another ball that has not entered the passage, the following ball) can be easily entered into the passage.
That is, one ball is entered into the passage, and while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to create a state in which the following ball is likely to be entered into the passage, and the following ball enters the passage. If a ball is entered and rolls on the rolling member, it is possible to create a state in which the next trailing ball is likely to enter the passage. Therefore, the player can expect the occurrence of a chain of balls entering the passage by the ball entering the passage. On the other hand, if a ball that has entered the passage is dropped in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member, the weight of the ball cannot be utilized, and a following ball cannot readily enter the passage. . This allows the player to pay attention to the rolling state of the ball (whether it can reach the end of the rolling path). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine armor DD3 is characterized in that, when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member in the game machine armor DD1, the game machine armor DD3 is provided with a dropping means for making it easy to drop the rolling balls from the rolling member.
According to the game machine armor DD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DD1, when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member, the game machine armor DD3 is provided with a dropping means that makes it easy to drop the rolling balls from the rolling member. In the state where the ball is rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not another ball is further flowed down into the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
The displacement member in the game machine armor DD3 may use the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. It may be one that is displaced to the side where it is difficult to hit the ball. In the former case, while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a high possibility that another ball will flow down into the passage. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the whereabouts. In the latter case, while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to reduce the possibility that another ball will fall further down the path, thus providing the player with a sense of security.
The game machine DD2 or DD3 is provided with a drop passage through which the ball dropped in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member passes, and the ball that has passed through the drop passage is more advantageous than the ball that has passed through the passage. A game machine armor DD4 characterized in that a condition is given.

According to the game machine armor DD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor DD2 or DD3, it has a drop passage through which the ball that has fallen in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member passes, and the ball that has passed through the drop passage passes through the passage. Since a game condition that is more advantageous than the passing ball is provided, the player can be more strongly focused on whether or not the ball will fall in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
<Concerning the concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: The downwardly inclined thorny stage is reciprocally driven, and when the stage flows down along the downward inclination, the thorns give randomness to the destination. Suppressing the retention of the ball by the thorns with reciprocating drive>
A game machine comprising a passage member formed so that a ball can move, characterized by comprising displacement means formed so as to be capable of displacing at least a part of the passage member and imparting a change to the moving direction of the ball. Armored EA1.
A gaming machine is known that has a passage member in which a ball is movably formed (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198607). The prior art document discloses a technique of reciprocatingly rolling a ball along a stage (passage member). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the change in the movement direction of the ball is monotonous, and the game is not sufficiently interesting.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor EA1, since it is provided with displacement means formed so as to be able to displace at least a part of the passage member and impart a change in the movement direction of the ball, the passage member is displaced by the displacement means. , it is possible to diversify the change in the moving direction of the ball moving through the passage member. As a result, monotonous changes in the moving direction of the ball can be suppressed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine armor EA1, the passage member is provided with imparting means for imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball, the passage member comprises a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the imparting means A game machine armor EA2 characterized by comprising a plurality of protrusions projecting from the rolling part of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed in the rolling part.
According to the game machine armor EA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor EA1, the passage member is provided with a means for imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball, and the passage member is a roller formed so that the ball can roll. A moving portion is provided, and the imparting means includes a plurality of protrusions projecting from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses provided in the rolling portion, so that the passage member (rolling portion) rolls. It is possible to diversify the change in the direction of movement of the ball at the time and suppress the change in the direction of movement of the ball from becoming monotonous.
In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the moving direction of the ball is changed. That is, the ball rolling on the rolling part moves at a relatively low speed, and it takes a relatively long time to move the rolling part. can be done. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily visually recognize the manner in which the moving direction of the ball is changed, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine armor EA2, the displacement means displaces the passage member in a displacement direction including at least a displacement component parallel to a rolling direction of a ball rolling on the rolling portion of the passage member. EA3.

According to the game machine armor EA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor EA2, the displacement means displaces the passage member in a displacement direction having at least a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling portion of the passage member. Therefore, a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball can be formed in the protrusion. As a result, it is possible to easily change the moving direction of the ball. In addition, it is possible to diversify the change in the moving direction of the ball.
In the game machine armor EA2 or EA3, the game machine armor EA4 is characterized in that the projections are arranged with at least a space between the projections so that a ball can move between the projections.
According to the game machine armor EA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor EA2 or EA3, the protrusions are arranged with at least a space that allows the ball to move between the protrusions. part). Therefore, in order to prevent the ball from staying on the passage member (rolling portion), it is possible to prevent the passage member (rolling portion) from being displaced in a complicated trajectory or at a large displacement amount or displacement speed. . As a result, the displacement means can be simplified.
<Regarding the concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: Predetermined value given after passing the stage>
A game machine provided with a passage member in which a ball is movable is provided with changing means for changing the ease with which the ball passes through the passage member, and a predetermined value is given to the ball that has passed through the passage member. A game machine armor EB1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be impartable.

A game machine is known that has a passage member formed so that a ball can move (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198607). The prior art document discloses a technique of reciprocatingly rolling a ball along a stage (passage member). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is not possible to give the player the amusement of whether or not the ball can pass through (whether or not it can reach the end by crossing the stage), and the interest in the game cannot be given. There was a problem that it was inadequate.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor EB1, it is provided with a changing means for changing the ease with which the ball passes through the passage member, and is formed so as to be able to give a predetermined value to the ball that has passed through the passage member. It is possible to provide the player with the amusement of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not it is possible to obtain the possibility of being given a predetermined value by crossing the passage member). As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the game machine armor EB1, the change means includes displacement means for displacing at least a part of the passage member.
According to the game machine armor EB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor EB1, the changing means includes displacement means for displacing at least a part of the passage member. Randomness can be imparted to the moving direction of the sphere by displacing . That is, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) functions as a means for hindering or assisting the ball passing through the passage member (crossing the passage member and obtaining the possibility of being given a predetermined value). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not it is possible to obtain the possibility of being given a predetermined value by crossing the passage member). . As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine armor EB2, the passage member includes a rolling portion formed so that a ball can roll thereon, and the changing means includes a plurality of projections projecting from the rolling portion of the passage member or the rolling portion. A game machine armor EB3 characterized by comprising a plurality of recesses recessed in.
According to the game machine armor EB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor EB2, the passage member has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the changing means protrudes from the rolling portion of the passage member. Since a plurality of protrusions or a plurality of recesses formed in the rolling portion are provided, randomness can be imparted to the rolling direction (moving direction) of the ball rolling on the rolling portion. In other words, the protrusions and recesses can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball passing through the passage member (crossing the passage member and obtaining the possibility of being given a predetermined value). It is possible to enhance the playability of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not it is possible to obtain the possibility of being given a predetermined value by crossing the passage member). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In any one of game machine armors EB1 to EB3, the passage member includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball passing through the first passage member can move, and the predetermined value is formed so as to be able to apply to a ball that has passed through the second passage member, and the changing means has a mode for changing the ease of passage of the ball in the first passage member, and in the second passage member, A game machine armor EB4 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to change the ease with which a ball can pass.
According to the game machine armor EB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors EB1 to EB3, the passage member includes the first passage member and the second passage formed so that the ball passing through the first passage member can move. a member formed so as to be able to impart a predetermined value to a ball that has passed through the second passage member, wherein the changing means changes the ease with which the ball passes through the first passage member; Since it is possible to change the mode of changing the ease of passage of the ball in the second passage member, it is possible to determine whether the ball can pass through the passage member. (whether or not it is possible to obtain the possibility of being provided) can be provided to the player as a different aspect between the first path member and the second path member. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved by diversifying the game characteristics.

Examples of means for changing the ease of passage of a ball include the shape and posture (inclination) of the passage member, the displacement mode of the passage member (the type of displacement (rotation, linear displacement, curvilinear displacement, and combinations thereof). , displacement direction, displacement speed, mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude), etc.), mode of the surface (rolling surface) on which the ball of the passage member moves (presence or absence of protrusions and recesses, mode of protrusions and recesses (large size, shape, arrangement, etc.)) are exemplified. That is, the mode of changing the ease of passage of the ball through the first passage member and the mode of changing the ease of passage of the ball through the second passage member differ from each other by at least part of the above means or All mean different in the first passage member and the second passage member.
<Regarding the concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: retaining means for retaining balls>
In a game machine provided with a passage member formed so that a ball can move, a ball entering means formed so as to be able to give a predetermined value to the entered ball, and a ball that has passed through the passage member is movable. wherein the passage member and the second passage member are formed so that the ball can fall in the middle of the movement path of the ball, and the ball that has passed through the second passage member A game machine EC1 characterized in that a ball is more easily entered into the ball entering means than a ball that has passed through the passage member.
A game machine is known that has a passage member formed so that a ball can move (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198607). The prior art document discloses a technique of reciprocatingly rolling a ball along a stage (passage member). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the balls that flow down from the predetermined position of the stage are directly entered into the winning opening (ball entrance), so there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting. .
On the other hand, according to the game machine EC1, there is provided a ball-entering means formed so as to be able to give a predetermined value to the entered ball, and a second passage formed so that the ball that has passed through the passage member can move. Since the ball passing through the passage member moves through the second passage member, it is possible to increase the time required for the ball to enter the ball entering means. That is, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation by lengthening the period during which the ball can be expected to enter the ball-entering means. In particular, since the ball that has passed through the second passage member is more likely to enter the ball-entering means than the ball that has passed through the passage member, the player can feel the exhilaration that the ball is about to enter the ball-entering means. can be held by the player to follow the direction of the ball. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine armor EC1, the second passage member includes a rolling portion formed so that a ball can roll, and a plurality of projections projecting from the rolling portion or a plurality of recesses provided in the rolling portion. A game machine EC2 characterized by comprising a recess.
According to the game machine EC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine EC1, the second passage member includes a rolling part formed so that the ball can roll, and a plurality of projections or rolling parts protruding from the rolling part. Since the moving part is provided with a plurality of concave parts, the moving direction of the ball when rolling on the second passage member (rolling part) is changed, and whether or not the ball can pass through the second passage member ( It is possible to provide the player with the playability of enjoying the possibility of crossing over the second passage member and getting the ball into the ball-entering means. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
Also, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the movement of the ball. That is, the ball rolling on the rolling part moves at a relatively low speed, and it takes a relatively long time to move the rolling part. can be done. As a result, the player can easily follow the direction of the ball, and the period during which the ball can be expected to enter the ball-entering means can be increased, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.
A game machine EC3 characterized in that the game machine EC1 or EC2 is provided with displacement means formed so as to be capable of displacing the passage member and imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball.

According to the game machine EC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EC1 or EC2, since it is provided with displacement means formed so as to be able to displace the passage member and change the moving direction of the ball, randomness is added to the moving direction of the ball. can be granted. That is, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) can function as means for preventing or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member and reaching the second passage member. Therefore, it is possible to form a game that enjoys whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether the ball can reach the second passage member, and furthermore, whether or not the ball can enter the ball entering means). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
The game machine armor EC3 is characterized by comprising a second displacement means formed so as to displace the second passage member and impart a change in the moving direction of the ball.
According to the game machine armor EC4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor EC3, since it is provided with the second displacement means formed so as to be capable of displacing the second passage member and imparting a change in the movement direction of the ball, random movement is provided in the movement direction of the ball. You can give it character. That is, as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball passing through the passage member to reach the second passage member and the ball passing through the second passage member and entering the ball entering means, the second 2 displacement means (displacement of the second passage member) can be operated. Therefore, whether or not the ball that has passed through the passage member can reach the second passage member, and whether or not the reached ball can pass through the second passage member (whether or not the ball can enter the ball entering means) ) can be formed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
A game machine upper EC5 characterized in that, in the game machine upper EC4, a displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means and a displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means are different.

According to the game machine armor EC5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor EC4, the displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means and the displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means are different modes, so the ball displacement mode is can be diversified. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that the displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means and the displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means are different modes, for example, the type of displacement (rotational displacement, linear displacement, curvilinear displacement, combination thereof) ), displacement direction, displacement speed, mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude), etc., are different between the first passage member and the second passage member.
<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Frames F86b to F5086b as an Example>
A game machine having a receiving portion into which a ball can flow, comprising first means configured to receive a ball, and second means displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means, The game machine armor FA1 is characterized in that the second means is formed to be displaceable in a direction of changing the size of the receiving part.
A gaming machine is known that has a passage member formed so that a ball can move (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). The prior art document discloses a technique of reciprocatingly rolling a ball along a stage (passage member). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the change in the movement direction of the ball is monotonous, and the game is not sufficiently interesting. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine FA1, when a predetermined ball goes to the receiving part, when the first means receives the ball (a ball that precedes or follows the predetermined ball), the second means receives the size of the receiving part is displaced in the direction of changing , it is possible to make it easier or harder to let the predetermined ball flow into the receiving part. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of whether or not the ball is accepted by the first means, and to increase the interest in the game.
The game machine armor FA1 is characterized by comprising a maintaining means for maintaining a state in which the second means is displaced in the direction of changing the size of the receiving part.
According to the game machine armor FA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FA1, even if the weight of the ball ceases to act on the first means, it is possible to maintain a state in which it is easy or difficult for the predetermined ball to flow into the receiving part. . Therefore, it is possible to secure a period in which the inflow of balls can be expected or a period in which it is difficult to expect, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
The game machine armor FA2 is provided with releasing means for releasing the maintenance by the maintaining means, and the maintaining means causes the second means to increase the size of the receiving part by the weight of the ball received by the first means. The game machine armor FA3 is characterized in that the displaced state is maintained, and the release by the release means is performed when at least one ball has flowed into the receiving part.

According to the game machine armor FA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FA2, the second means is displaced in the direction in which the size of the received part is increased until at least one ball is flowed into the received part. Since the state is maintained, it is possible to ensure the flow of the ball into the receiving part. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In the game machine armor FA3, the first means is maintained at a position displaced by receiving a ball in the state maintained by the maintaining means.
According to the game machine armor FA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FA3, it is a state in which the maintenance means is maintained (the state in which the second means is displaced in the direction in which the size of the receiving part is increased). , the displacement position of the first means can also make it easier for the player to understand. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
A game machine armor FA5 characterized by comprising delay means for delaying the falling of a ball from the first means in any one of the game machine armors FA1 to FA4.

According to the game machine armor FA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FA1 to the game machine armor FA4, the period during which the weight of the ball is acting on the first means (the first means is at a predetermined position (position before receiving the ball, initial position ) can be lengthened. Therefore, the period during which the size of the receiving part is increased can be lengthened.
In the game machine armor FA5, the delay means comprises an opening formed in the first means, and a first rolling portion formed in the first means in which a ball can roll along the periphery of the opening. A game machine armor FA6 characterized in that a ball is caused to flow down from the first means by rolling on the first rolling part and flowing into the opening.
According to the game machine armor FA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FA5, by rolling the first rolling part along the periphery of the opening, the speed of the ball can be reduced, so the first means sphere's flow is delayed. That is, the period during which the weight of the ball acts on the first means (the period during which the first means is displaced from the predetermined position (position before receiving the ball, initial position)) can be lengthened. Therefore, the period during which the size of the receiving part is increased can be lengthened.
In the game machine armor FA6, the first rolling portion is formed continuously along the periphery of the opening, and the delay means is arranged so that the ball rolls toward a position eccentric from the opening in the first rolling portion. A game machine armor FA7 characterized by comprising a second rolling part which is movable and formed on the first means.

According to the game machine armor FA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FA6, the first rolling part is continuously formed along the periphery of the opening, so that the ball can be circulated in the first rolling part. . In addition, since the ball can roll in the second rolling part toward a position eccentric from the opening of the first rolling part, the ball can easily form a revolution in the first rolling part. As a result, the period during which the weight of the ball acts on the first means (the period during which the first means is displaced from the predetermined position (the position before receiving the ball, the initial position)) can be lengthened. Therefore, the period during which the size of the receiving part is increased can be lengthened.
In the game machine armor FA7, in a state where the ball rolls on the first rolling part, the height in the vertical direction of the first rolling part is set to be substantially the same along the periphery of the opening. Game machine armor FA8.
According to the game machine armor FA8, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FA7, it is possible to suppress the formation of a difference in height and make it easier to rotate the ball in the first rolling part.
In any one of the game machine armor FA5 to the game machine armor FA8, the delay means includes a rolling portion formed in the first means so that the ball can roll, holding means for holding the ball on the rolling portion, wherein the ball held by the holding means can roll over the holding means by displacing the first means by a predetermined amount due to the weight of the ball. FA9.

According to the game machine armor FA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor FA5 to the game machine armor FA8, it is possible to temporarily stop the rolling of the ball. Therefore, the period during which the first means is displaced from the predetermined position (the position before receiving the ball, the initial position) by the weight of the ball can be lengthened. Accordingly, the period in which the receiving part is enlarged can be lengthened. Further, since the holding of the holding means is released (the ball resumes rolling) using the change in posture of the first means, it is not necessary to provide a releasing means.
In the game machine armor FA9, the delay means comprises action means for acting on the ball held by the holding means when the first means is displaced by a predetermined amount due to the weight of the ball. FA10.
According to the game machine armor FA10, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FA9, the action of the action means can ensure the release of the holding of the ball by the holding means (the ball can easily get over the holding means).
In the game machine armor FA9 or the game machine armor FA10, a flowing portion is formed so that the ball can flow down to the first means, and the direction in which the first means is displaced by the weight of the ball is at least the rolling portion that flows down. Game machine armor FA11 characterized in that it is in a direction away from the part.

According to the game machine armor FA11, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FA9 or the game machine armor FA10, it is possible to suppress the cancellation of the holding by the holding means due to the collision of the trailing ball flowing down from the flow-down part.
Game machine armor FA1 to game machine armor FA11, wherein the game machine armor FA12 is characterized by comprising transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the first means to the second means.
According to the game machine armor FA12, the second means can be displaced using the displacement of the first means (that is, the weight of the ball) in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor FA1 to the game machine armor FA11. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drive source for displacing the second means.
In the game machine armor FA12, when the weight of the ball does not act on the first means, the weights of the first means and the second means allow the first means and the second means to be displaced to their initial positions. A game machine armor FA13 characterized by being formed.

According to the game machine armor FA13, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FA12, the means for returning the first means and the second means are unnecessary, and the product cost can be suppressed.
<Regarding the concept of the invention using the lower frames F6086b to F11086b as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a receiving portion into which a ball can flow and a path formed so that the ball can move toward the receiving portion, first means formed to receive the ball; A game machine armor FB1 characterized by comprising: a second means formed to act on a ball that is displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means and moves on the path.
A gaming machine is known that has a passage member formed so that a ball can move (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). The prior art document discloses a technique of reciprocatingly rolling a ball along a stage (passage member). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the change in the movement direction of the ball is monotonous, and the game is not sufficiently interesting. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.
According to the game machine FB1, when a predetermined ball moves along the path, when the first means receives the ball (a ball that precedes or follows the predetermined ball), the predetermined ball that moves along the path receives the second means is allowed to act. Therefore, it is possible to change the possibility of the predetermined ball moving along the path flowing into the receiving part by the action of the second means. As a result, it is possible to make the player aware of whether or not the ball is received by the first means, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the game machine armor FB1, in the displacement direction of the second means toward the position before being displaced from the position displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means ball, the path is directed to the second means A game machine armor FB2 characterized by including a moving direction component of a moving ball.
According to the game machine armor FB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FB1, when the ball moving along the path toward the second means comes into contact with the second means, the second means is also displaced in the moving direction of the ball ( (retreat to the initial position) to absorb the impact. Therefore, damage to the second means can be suppressed.
In the game machine armor FB2, the second displacement means displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means acts on the ball moving on the path so as to make it easier to flow into the receiving part. Game machine armor FB3 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor FB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB2, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to flow into the receiving part, so that the player can be made aware of whether or not the ball is received by the first means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the game machine armor FB2 or FB3, the path is provided with an inclined portion, and the second means is displaceable to a position where it can act on the ball ascending the inclined portion. Game machine armor FB4 to do.
According to the game machine armor FB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB2 or FB3, the speed of the ball ascending the slope is gradually reduced, so that the movement of the ball and the action of the second means on the ball are played. This makes it easier for people to see. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In the game machine armor FB4, the inclined portion includes a first inclined portion that is inclined and a second inclined portion that is inclined in a direction opposite to the first inclined portion. and a ball is formed to reciprocate on the second inclined portion, and the second means is formed to be displaceable to a position capable of acting on the ball ascending the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion. Game machine armor FB5 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor FB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB4, the reciprocating movement of the ball in the inclined portion (the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion) makes it possible to receive the action from the second means. The ball can reach multiple times. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the game machine armor FB4 or game machine armor FB5, the position where the second means can act on the ball ascending the slope is a position below the maximum reachable position of the ball ascending the slope. A game machine armor FB6 characterized by being.
Here, at the maximum reaching position, the velocity of the ball is low (or the velocity becomes 0) and the force of the ball is weak. Even if the ball comes into contact with the ball, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be guided in the direction in which it is likely to flow into the receiving part. On the other hand, according to the game machine armor FB6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB4 or the game machine armor FB5, the second means can act on the ball ascending the inclined portion at a position below the maximum reaching position. By doing so, the ball can be brought into contact with the second means while the speed of the ball is ensured. Therefore, by using the force of the ball, it is possible to easily guide the ball in the direction in which it is easy to flow into the receiving part.
In addition, in the configuration in which the ball reciprocates on the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion, the ball can easily reach a position where it can receive the action of the second means a plurality of times.
In the game machine armor FB6, the second means is formed so as to be able to act on the ball descending the slope in a state of being displaced to a position where it can act on the ball ascending the slope. Game machine armor FB7.

According to the game machine armor FB7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB6, even if the second means is displaced to a position where the second means can act on the ball after the ball passing the inclined part, the inclined part Possibilities can be created that reach the top and affect the descending sphere.
In any one of the game machine armor FB4 to the game machine armor FB7, the second means includes a guide portion formed so as to be able to guide a ball along an arc-shaped curve, and the ball ascending the inclined portion is guided by the guide portion. A game machine shell FB8 characterized by being guided in a direction in which it is easier to flow into the receiving part by moving along.
According to the game machine armor FB8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor FB4 to the game machine armor FB7, it is possible to gradually guide (change the movement direction) the ball rising on the slope along the curve. That is, it is possible to reliably guide the liquid in a direction in which the liquid is easily flowed into the receiving part.
In the game machine armor FB8, the second means is formed to be protrusible from the inclined portion, and in a state in which the second means does not protrude from the inclined portion, the second means is a part of the inclined portion. A game machine armor FB9 characterized by being played.

Here, in the configuration in which the second means (guide portion) protrudes from the side of the inclined portion along the width direction of the inclined portion (the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the ball rises on the inclined portion), the second means (guide portion ), a space equivalent to the width of the inclined portion must be secured on the side of the inclined portion, resulting in an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the game machine armor FB9, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB8, there is no need to secure the space necessary for accommodating the second means (guide part) on the side of the inclined part, and the inclined part Since the dead space in the thickness direction can be effectively utilized, the size can be reduced accordingly.
In addition, in the configuration in which the second means (guide portion) protrudes from the side of the inclined portion along the width direction of the inclined portion (the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the ball rises on the inclined portion), the second means (guide portion) Since the amount of displacement required for is large, the time required to displace the second means increases. On the other hand, according to the game machine armor FB8, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FB7, the amount of displacement required for the second means (guide section) can be suppressed, and the time required to displace the second means can be shortened. Therefore, the second means can be quickly arranged at a position acting on the ball rising up the slope.
A game machine armor FB10 characterized in that in any one of the game machine armor FB1 to the game machine armor FB9, the game machine armor FB10 is characterized by comprising a maintaining means for maintaining a state in which the second means is displaced to a position capable of acting on the ball moving on the path.
According to the game machine armor FB10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor FB1 to the game machine armor FB9, even if the weight of the ball ceases to act on the first means, a state in which a predetermined ball is easily made to flow into the receiving part. can be maintained. Therefore, the inflow of balls can be easily expected, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The game machine armor FB10 is characterized by comprising a release means for releasing the maintenance by the maintenance means, and the release by the release means is performed when at least one ball is flowed into the receiving part. .
According to the game machine armor FB11, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB10, it is possible to ensure the inflow of the ball to the receiving part. That is, if the second means is displaced in the direction in which the size of the receiving part is increased, a sense of security can be imparted until at least one ball is introduced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
A game machine armor FB12 characterized by comprising transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the first means to the second means in any one of the game machine armor FB1 to the game machine armor FB11.
According to the game machine armor FB12, the second means can be displaced using the displacement of the first means (that is, the weight of the ball) in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor FB1 to the game machine armor FB11. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drive source for displacing the second means.

In the game machine armor FB12, when the weight of the ball does not act on the first means, the first means is displaceable to the predetermined position by the weights of the first means and the second means, and the A game machine armor FB13 characterized in that the second means is formed to be displaceable to the initial position.
According to the game machine armor FB13, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FB12, the means for returning the first means and the second means are unnecessary, and the cost can be suppressed.
<Regarding the concept of the invention using the lower frames F86b to F11086b as an example>
In a gaming machine having a receiving portion into which a ball can flow, first means for changing the ease with which the ball flows into the receiving portion according to the weight of the received ball, which is formed to be able to receive the ball. and suppressing means for suppressing the first means from being affected by a ball other than the received ball while the weight of the received ball is acting on the first means. Game machine armor FC1.
A gaming machine is known that has a passage member formed so that a ball can move (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). The prior art document discloses a technique of reciprocatingly rolling a ball along a stage (passage member). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the change in the movement direction of the ball is monotonous, and the game is not sufficiently interesting. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine FC1, when the predetermined ball is directed to the receiving part and the first means receives the ball (the ball preceding or following the predetermined ball), the predetermined ball flows into the receiving part It is possible to change the ease of application. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of whether or not the ball is accepted by the first means, and to increase the interest in the game. In this case, the first means is prevented from being affected by another ball (for example, another ball collides with the first means, and the ball exerting weight on the first means falls off from the first means). It can be suppressed by means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress interruption of the change in the ease with which the ball flows into the receiving portion, and to enhance the interest of the game.
The game machine FC1 is provided with a path formed so that the ball can move toward the first means, and the suppressing means moves the path in a state where the weight of the received ball is applied to the first means. A game machine armor FC2 characterized by comprising a first restricting means for making it difficult for a moving ball to move toward the first means.
According to the game machine armor FC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FC1, in a state where the weight of the received ball is applied to the first means, the ball moving on the path is directed to the first means by the first regulation means. It can be difficult to move so that the first means is affected by another ball (e.g. another ball collides with the first means and the ball exerting weight on the first means moves away from the first means). falling off) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress interruption of the change in the ease with which the ball flows into the receiving portion, and to enhance the interest of the game.
In the game machine FC2, a second means is formed so as to be capable of receiving a ball and for changing the ease with which the ball flows into the received part according to the weight of the received ball. means and the second means, and the first restricting means controls the movement of the ball moving along the path in a state in which the weight of the received ball is applied to the first means. A game machine armor FC3 characterized by making it easier to move to the second means than to the first means.

According to the game machine armor FC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FC2, in a state where the weight of the received ball is acted on by the first means, the ball moving on the path is directed to the second means by the first control means. Since it can be easily moved, it is possible to easily continue the change in the ease with which the predetermined ball flows into the receiving part. That is, in a state in which the weight of the ball is acting on the first means, that state is interrupted (for example, a ball moving on its path collides with the first means, causing the ball exerting its weight on the first means). drop off from the first means), the ball moving on the path is received by the second means, and the weight of the received ball is applied to the second means. The means can also create a state in which the easiness of the predetermined ball to flow into the receiving portion is changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.
In the game machine FC3, the third means is displaced by the weight of the ball received by the first means or the second means, and the third means is displaceable in the direction of changing the size of the receiving part. A game machine FC4 characterized by being formed in.
According to the game machine FC4, in addition to the effect of the game machine FC2 or FC3, the movement of the third means makes it easier or harder for the ball to flow into the receiving part. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of whether or not the ball is accepted by the first means and the second means, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.
In any one of the gaming machine upper FC1 to the gaming machine upper FC4, the suppressing means is a second regulation that makes it difficult for the another ball to contact at least the side surface of the first means in a state where the weight of the received ball is applied. Game machine armor FC5 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine armor FC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armor FC1 to the game machine armor FC3, in a state where the weight of the received ball is applied to the first means, the second control means restricts at least the first means Since it is difficult for the ball to contact the side surface, the first means is affected by another ball (for example, another ball collides with the side surface of the first means, causing the weight to act on the first means). It is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the first means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress interruption of the change in the ease with which the ball flows into the receiving portion, and to enhance the interest of the game.
If another ball comes into contact with the ball on which the weight is applied to the first means, even if the ball on which the weight is applied falls out of the first means, the ball will be replaced by another ball. may be able to exert weight on the first means. Further, when another ball abuts against the upper surface of the first means (the part where the ball on which the weight is applied is held or rolled), in addition to the ball on which the weight is applied, the other ball is also the first means. weight can be applied to the Therefore, it is effective if it is possible to make it difficult for another ball to contact at least the side surface of the first means.
A game machine armor FC6 characterized by comprising transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the first means to the first regulation means in the game machine armor FC2.
According to the game machine armor FC6, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FC2, the displacement of the first means (that is, the weight of the ball) is used to displace the first restricting means. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a drive source for displacing the first restricting means.

In the gaming machine FC6, when the weight of the ball does not act on the first means, the first means and the first restricting means are displaced to the initial position by the weight of the first means and the first restricting means. A game machine FC7 characterized by being formed as possible.
According to the game machine armor FC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FC6, it is possible to suppress the product cost by eliminating the need for the means for returning the first means and the first regulation means.
The gaming machine armor FC5 is provided with a flow-down section formed so that a ball can flow down to the first means, and the direction in which the first means is displaced by the weight of the ball is such that at least the first means is separated from the flow-down section. A game machine FC8 characterized by being in a certain direction.
According to the game machine armor FC8, in addition to the effect of the game machine armor FC5, it is possible to suppress the following ball that has flowed down from the flow-down part from coming into contact with the side surface of the first means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the lower frame F11086b as an example>
A game machine having a received portion into which a ball can flow, wherein a path is formed so that a ball can move to the received portion; wherein a sphere that flows into the path from a first position and moves along the path is more likely to flow into the received part than a ball that flows into the path from a second position and moves along the path. A game machine armor FD1.
A gaming machine is known that has a passage member formed so that a ball can move (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). The prior art document discloses a technique of reciprocatingly rolling a ball along a stage (passage member). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that the change in the movement direction of the ball is monotonous, and the game is not sufficiently interesting. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.
According to the game machine FD1, the ease with which the ball flows into the receiving part can be changed by the changing means, so that the player can be made aware of the effect of the changing means on the ball moving on the path, It is possible to increase the interest of the game.
In this case, the ball that flows into the path from the first position and moves along the path is more likely to flow into the received part than the ball that flows into the path from the second position and moves along the path. It is possible to make the player aware of (the first position or the second position), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as a configuration that facilitates entry of the ball from the first position, for example, the contact portion F6154 is exemplified.
The gaming machine FD1 is provided with detecting means formed to be able to detect a ball flowing into the path from the first position, and on condition that the ball is detected by at least the detecting means, the ball enters the flow-in portion. The game machine armor FD2 is characterized in that the change is performed by the changing means so as to facilitate the inflow.
According to the game machine armor FD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FD1, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation and increase the interest in the game. That is, a ball that flows into the path from the first position and moves along the path is more likely to flow into the receiving part than a ball that flows into the path from the second position and moves along the path. Since the change is performed by the changing means so as to facilitate the inflow, the player can be made to expect the inflow to the receiving part. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
The conditions for the change by the changing means (the operation to make it easier for the ball to flow into the receiving part) include the detection of the ball by the detecting means, the elapse of a predetermined time period, the winning of a lottery, or any of these conditions. may be used as a condition. Moreover, the period in which the change is performed by the changing means may be separated by a predetermined time, or may be separated by the number of operations.

The game machine armor FD2 comprises forming means for forming the first position and the second position, and the forming means is formed such that a ball can move between the first position and the second position. Game machine armor FD3 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor FD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FD2, since the ball is formed to be movable between the first position and the second position, the ball can be moved from either the first position or the second position to the path. may flow down or allow the player to watch the movement of the ball in the forming means. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In the game machine FD2 or FD3, the paths include a first path formed so that the ball flowing down from the first position is movable, and a second path formed so that the ball flowing down from the second position is movable. A game machine armor FD4 characterized in that a ball is formed so as to be movable between the first path and the second path.
According to the game machine armor FD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FD2 or the game machine armor FD3, since the ball is formed to be movable between the first path and the second path, from the first position (second position) Compared to the case where the ball that has flowed in is formed to be able to move only along the first path (second path), it is possible to secure more types of paths that the ball can move within a certain space. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

The game machine armor FD4 is characterized by comprising one or a plurality of abutment means protruding from the first path or the second path and formed so that a ball can abut thereon.
According to the game machine armor FD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor FD4, the ball moving on the first path or the second path is brought into contact with the abutting means, thereby giving a change in the movement direction of the ball, Movement of the sphere between the first path and the second path can be facilitated. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
<Structure for operating multiple means with different triggers>
A displacement means capable of displacing a first position and a second position, a first means capable of displacing the displacement means, a first state capable of preventing displacement of the displacement means, and a second state not preventing displacement of the displacement means. and a changing means configured to change the state of the second means between the first state and the second state based on the operation of the first means. Game machine armor KA1 characterized by comprising.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in a performance accessory that performs an effect of displacing a displacement means from a predetermined position, holding means for holding the displacement means at a predetermined position and driving force for displacing the displacement means to the predetermined position are transmitted. There is a game machine provided with a transmission means for performing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the holding means and the transmission means have separate driving devices, for example, when the driving device for the transmission means is out of order, the driving device for the holding means is moved and displaced. When the means is moved (dropped) from the predetermined position, the displacing means cannot be returned to the predetermined position, so there is a problem that the performance effect of the displacing means may be reduced. That is, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the presentation effect of the displacement means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor KA1, the changing means changes the state of the second means based on the operation of the first means. can be prevented from being changed from to the second state. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second means is changed from the first state to the second state and the displacement means is displaced from the predetermined position even though the displacement means cannot return to the predetermined position. Therefore, the performance effect of the displacement means can be improved.
In the game machine upper KA1, the first position is located above the second position, and the second means moves the predetermined position while the displacement means is located closer to the first position than the predetermined position. A game machine armor KA2 characterized by being changed to the first state by entering the second position side.
According to the game machine armor KA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KA1, a frictional force is generated by creating a gap between the displacement means and the second means when the second means is brought to the first state. can be avoided and malfunction can be prevented.

Further, since the displacement means and the second means are interlocked by the first means, it is easy to avoid deviation of the operation timing. It is possible to eliminate the need for a detection sensor that detects that the is located on the first position side of the predetermined position.
In the game machine KA1 or KA2, the second means is configured to be rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis, and has a shape that directs the load from the displacement means to the rotation axis in the first state. A game machine armor KA3 characterized by that.
According to the game machine armor KA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KA1 or KA2, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the state of the second means is changed by the load from the displacement means.
In any one of the game machines KA1 to KA3, the first means is provided between the displacement means and the second means when the state of the second means changes from the first state to the second state. A game machine armor KA4 characterized by being able to configure a first interlocking state in which a gap is created.

According to the game machine armor KA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KA1 to KA3, the movement resistance between the displacement means and the second means when changing the second means from the first state to the second state is reduced. can be made smaller.
In any one of the game machines KA1 to KA4, the first means causes the displacement means to rub the second means when the state of the second means changes from the first state to the second state. A game machine armor KA5 characterized by being able to configure two interlocking states.
According to the game machine armor KA5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KA1 to KA4, the position of the displacement means can be specified based on the position of the second means, so the displacement start position of the displacement means can be stabilized. can be made
In the game machine armor KA4 or the game machine armor KA5, the game machine armor KA6 is characterized in that the operation direction of the first means is reversed between the first interlocked state and the second interlocked state.

According to the game machine armor KA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KA4 or the game machine armor KA5, it is determined whether interlocking occurs in the first interlocking state or interlocking in the second interlocking state from the stop state of the first means. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand.
In any one of the game machines KA1 to KA6, when the second means is changed from the first state to the second state while the displacement means is arranged at the first position, the displacement means: The game machine armor KA7 is configured to be able to execute non-supported displacement in a state not supported by the first means.
According to the game machine armor KA7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KA1 to KA6, since it is not supported by the changing means, the displacement means can be operated in an operation mode that is not interlocked with the second means.
The game machine armor KA7 is characterized by comprising a contact prevention portion disposed so as to partition between the displacement means and the first means when the displacement means is caused to perform the non-support displacement. .

According to the game machine armor KA8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KA7, it is possible to avoid accidental contact between the first means and the displacement means in the non-support displacement and damage.
A game machine armor KA9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors KA1 to KA8, when the second means is changed from the first state to the second state, the changing means is downwardly displaced in the direction of gravity.
According to the game machine armor KA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KA1 to KA8, when the second means changes from the first state to the second state, gravity assists the force required for the displacement of the changing means. be able to.
In any one of game machines KA1 to KA9, first displacement amount changing means for changing the displacement amount of the displacement means at a first ratio with respect to the displacement amount of the first means, and the displacement amount of the second means. and a second displacement amount changing means for changing the displacement amount of the first means by a second ratio.

According to the game machine armor KA10, in any one of the game machine armors KA1 to KA9, the amount of displacement of the displacement means accompanying the displacement of the first means and the amount of displacement of the second means can be made different. can be improved.
<Structured so that there are multiple stop positions for movement by biasing force>
A movable first moving means, a second moving means movable from a first position to a second position in conjunction with the movement of the first moving means, and a second moving means moving from the first position to the second position. urging means for urging toward two positions, wherein the first movement when the second moving means is arranged at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position; A game machine armor KB1 characterized by comprising prevention means capable of preventing movement of the means.
2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with moving means that protrudes to the front side of a liquid crystal display device by an urging force (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240386).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the placement of the moving means is limited to two positions, either in front of the liquid crystal display device or in a position different from the front side of the liquid crystal display device. There is a possibility that the player will get bored from the beginning, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement with respect to the performance effect using the means of transportation.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor KB1, the prevention means prevents the movement of the first movement means, so that the second movement means can be stopped at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position. , as the stop position of the second moving means, not only the first position and the second position, but also a predetermined position can be used. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the states that the second moving means can take, and to improve the presentation effect of the second moving means.
The game machine armor KB1 comprises driving means and transmitting means capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first moving means, and the transmitting means includes the second moving means arranged at the predetermined position. A game machine armor KB2 characterized by being configured to be operable within a predetermined range while maintaining a state.
According to the game machine armor KB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KB1, the second moving means can be maintained at a predetermined position even if the arrangement of the transmission means is not fixed within a predetermined range, so the drive means can be controlled. can be simplified.
In the game machine armor KB2, the transmission means is configured to maintain the state where the second moving means is arranged at the predetermined position when the movement within the predetermined range occurs regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. A game machine armor KB3 characterized by being.

According to the game machine armor KB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KB2, regardless of whether the operation is in the direction along the biasing force of the biasing means or in the direction against the biasing force, the second moving means can be moved to a predetermined position. can be easier to maintain. As a result, the operation mode in which the second moving means is rapidly stopped at a predetermined position after being moved at high speed can be realized by simple control regardless of the operation direction.
In the game machine upper KB2 or KB3, the transmission means includes first transmission means arranged on the first moving means side and second transmission means arranged on the drive means side, and the second The transmission means includes operation stopping means for stopping the operation of the first transmission means in a state in which it has entered the recessed portion of the first transmission means, and the game machine includes detection means for detecting the arrangement of the operation stopping means. Game machine armor KB4 characterized by comprising.
According to the game machine armor KB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KB2 or KB3, the operation stopping means can have a plurality of functions, and the shape of the operation stopping means can be simplified.
The gaming machine armor KB5 is characterized in that the output of the detecting means is switched depending on whether or not the second moving means is arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming machine armor KB4.

According to the game machine armor KB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KB4, it is possible to determine whether or not the second moving means is arranged at the predetermined position from the output of the detection means.
In any one of game machines KB1 to KB5, when the second moving means is arranged at the first position, the movable direction of the first moving means and the movable direction of the second moving means are orthogonal to each other. A game machine armor KB6 characterized by doing.
According to the game machine armor KB6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KB1 to KB5, the movement of the first movement means by the force from the second movement means in the state where the second movement means is arranged at the first position can be prevented. Thereby, the second moving means can be stopped at the first position.
In any one of game machines KB1 to KB6, when the second moving means is arranged at the second position, the movable direction of the first moving means and the movable direction of the second moving means are orthogonal to each other. A game machine armor KB7 characterized by doing.

According to the game machine armor KB7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KB1 to KB6, the movement of the first moving means by the force from the second moving means in the state where the second moving means is arranged at the second position can be prevented. Thereby, the second moving means can be stopped at the second position.
In any one of the game machines KB1 to KB7, when the second moving means is arranged at the predetermined position, the movable direction of the first moving means and the movable direction of the second moving means are parallel. Game machine armor KB8 characterized by becoming.
According to the game machine armor KB8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KB1 to KB7, it is possible to improve the efficiency of force transmission to the second moving means arranged at a predetermined position.
<Constructing the run-up range until the start of sliding of the member that slides>
a first means supported so as to be rotatable about a predetermined axis; and a second means movable from a first position to a second position in conjunction with the rotational movement of the first means; When starting to move the means from the first position to the second position, the direction of movement of the first means, which has already started to move, is configured to be along the direction of movement of the second means. Game machine armor KC1 characterized by.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine comprising a first means for rotating and a second means for moving, wherein the force in the circumferential direction of the first means is transmitted to the second means to move the second means. (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-098027).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the pinion as the first means for transmitting force to the door member as the second means applies the load regardless of the arrangement of the second means. Since the driving force required to overcome the inertia and rotate is large, there is a problem that the time difference between the excitation of the driving device and the start of rotation of the pinion tends to become long. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the operation of the second means.
Therefore, even if the driving device is energized at the timing that matches the performance of the game machine, the operation timing of the pinion and the door member will be delayed, so that the pinion and the door member will operate at the timing that does not match the performance. The performance effect may decrease. That is, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the effect of the second means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine KC1, when moving the second means from the first position to the second position, since the moving direction of the first means is along the moving direction of the second means, the rotation of the first means It is possible to easily overcome the inertia of the second means by using the momentum of the second means and shorten the time delay of the movement timing of the second means, so that the operation of the second means can be improved and the second means The performance effect of the means can be improved.

In the gaming machine KC1, when the moving direction of the first means is along the moving direction of the second means, the tip of rotation of the first means is positioned below the predetermined axis. Game machine armor KC2.
According to the game machine armor KC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KC1, the first means can be easily stabilized in a posture in which the movement direction of the first means is along the movement direction of the second means.
The game machine KC1 or KC2 is provided with abutment means capable of abutting against the first means in a predetermined direction, and based on the first means being abutted and stopped by the abutment means, the second means A game machine armor KC3 characterized by being able to be maintained at the second position.
According to the game machine KC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine KC1 or KC2, the second means is arranged at the second position based on the first means coming into contact with the contacting means and being stopped. Since it is possible to eliminate the need to lock the second means, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a large load is applied to the second means in order to stop the second means at the second position, thereby preventing breakage of the second means. can be prevented.

In the game machine KC3, the abutting means is a surface that abuts against the first means in the rotational direction and is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to the moving direction of the second means. Armored KC4.
According to the game machine KC4, in addition to the effect of the game machine KC3, when the load in the moving direction of the second means is applied to the first means while the first means is in contact with the inclined surface, The load can be distributed in the direction towards the predetermined axis and in the direction of rotation of the first means. As a result, the load applied to the predetermined shaft can be reduced.
In any one of the game machines KC1 to KC4, the rotating motion of the first means is continued after the first means is rotated in a predetermined direction and the second means is moved from the first position to the second position. The game machine armor KC5 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second means is not moved by.
According to the game machine KC5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KC1 to KC4, it is possible to easily avoid the displacement of the second means due to the excessive rotation of the first means.

In any one of the game machines KC1 to KC5, when the second means is started to move from the second position to the first position, the moving direction of the first means whose movement has been started in advance is changed to the second means. A game machine armor KC6 characterized in that it is configured to be in a direction along the moving direction of the means.
According to the game machine KC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KC1 to KC5, the time delay of the movement timing of the second means can be shortened regardless of the movement direction of the first movement means. It is possible to improve the presentation effect of the two means.
A game machine KC7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines KC1 to KC6, the game machine KC7 comprises a third means that is movable in the moving direction of the second means in proportion to the amount of rotation of the first means.
According to the game machine KC7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KC1 to KC6, the third means can be moved in a state in which the first means is rotated in advance before starting the movement of the second means. Therefore, the performance effect of the game machine can be improved.

In any one of the game machines KC3 to KC7, the rotation amount of the first means is set to a limit value to the extent that the third means does not move, and the second means reaches the second position. A game machine KC8 characterized in that the amount of rotation from when said first means comes into contact with said contacting means is set to be equal to or less than said limit value.
According to the game machine KC8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KC3 to KC7, it is possible to avoid the displacement of the third means due to the excessive rotation of the first means.
A game machine KC9 characterized in that, in the game machine KC7 or KC8, the reciprocating motion of the first means is possible within a range in which the second means is not moved.
According to the game machine KC9, in addition to the effects of the game machine KC7 or KC8, the third means can be moved with less resistance than when the second means is moved.

A game machine KC10 characterized in that, in the game machine KC9, the driving force transmission to the first means is controlled so as to be stopped without waiting for the first means to move a predetermined amount.
According to the game machine KC10, in addition to the effects of the game machine KC9, the first means moved by the momentum of the driving force is stopped by the inertial resistance (stationary friction) of the second means. This makes it easier to avoid malfunction of the second means than in the case where driving force transmission is continued during the movement of the predetermined amount.
<Arrange the light emitting means so as to use the appearance of the light on the sphere for production>
a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter; forming means capable of forming a state in which the game ball is directed toward the ball entry area; It is configured to allow the game ball to flow down in a first flow-down mode toward the entering ball area or a second flow-down mode not toward the ball-entering area, and when the game ball is flowing down in the first flow-down mode, the predetermined A game machine KD1 characterized in that it is configured such that a visible mode in the irradiation range and a visible mode in the predetermined irradiation range when the game ball is flowing down in the second flowing mode are different.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a light emitting means is arranged in a lower area on the upstream side of a movable body for switching between a state in which a game ball can be guided to a ball entry area and a state in which the game ball cannot be guided, and a light emitting effect is performed. (See, for example, JP-A-2016-120220).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the game ball flows down on the slope formed above the light irradiation means, and the game ball does not enter the area irradiated with the light from the light irradiation means. Therefore, when the game ball flows down, the appearance of the light does not change, and the game ball looks bright near the light irradiation means, but there is a slight difference between the movable body and the light irradiation means. Due to the distance, the light does not easily reach the movable body side, the vicinity of the movable body is visually recognized darkly, and it is difficult to determine whether or not the game ball is in the ball entry area in a game played with normal attention.
Therefore, the player is forced to play the game by looking into the vicinity of the movable body. In other words, the above-described conventional gaming machine has the problem that there is room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of the player.
On the other hand, according to the game machine KD1, depending on whether the game ball is flowing down in the first flowing mode toward the ball entering area or the game ball is flowing down in the second flowing mode not going to the ball entering area, the light Since the appearance of the light from the irradiating means can be varied, the player can recognize whether or not the game ball is heading toward the ball entry area by visually recognizing the light from the light irradiating means. As a result, the game burden on the player can be reduced, and the interest of the player can be improved.
In the game machine KD1, the light irradiation means is arranged at a position where the light is not blocked by the game ball flowing down in the first flowing mode.

According to the game machine KD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine KD1, even when the game ball continues to enter the ball entry area, the performance effect by the light from the light irradiation means can be maintained.
A game machine KD3 characterized in that in the game machine KD1 or KD2, the light irradiation means is arranged at a position for illuminating the forming means with light.
According to the game machine shell KD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine shell KD1 or KD2, it is possible to easily avoid the deterioration of the visibility of the forming means.
The game machine armor KD3 is provided with covering means arranged on the front side of the forming means to cover the flow-down path of the game ball, and the shape drawn on the front side of the covering means is a shape following the shape of the forming means. A game machine KD4 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine armor KD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KD1 to KD3, the visibility of the covering means can be improved as the visibility of the forming means is improved. That is, the shape drawn on the front side of the covering means can be brightly illuminated by the light that is visually recognized through the forming means, so that the presentation effect can be improved.
In the game machine armor KD4, the shape drawn on the covering means is formed of a first visual recognition portion that facilitates visual recognition of the rear and a second visual recognition portion that is inferior in visibility to the easy visual recognition portion. A game machine KD5 characterized in that a portion is formed at least in front of a flow-down path of a game ball in the first flow-down mode, and light traveling through the forming means passes through the first visual recognition portion.
According to the game machine KD5, in addition to the effects of the game machine KD4, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down in the first flow mode, and the backward visibility is improved by brightening the first visual recognition part. can be improved.
Any one of the game machine decks KD1 to KD5 is provided with supporting means for supporting the forming means, and the supporting means is provided with a reflecting portion formed so as to be able to reflect the light reflected from the forming means toward the front side. Game machine armor KD6.

According to the game machine shell KD6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine shells KD1 to KD5, the color of the forming means can be configured to be visually recognized through the reflecting portion.
In the game machine KD6, the reflecting part can reflect the light reflected from the forming means toward the front side in a state where the forming means directs the game ball to the ball entering area, and the forming means directs the game ball to the front side. A game machine armor KD7 characterized in that the light reflected from the formation means is directed to the front side and cannot be reflected in a state in which the light is not directed to the ball entry area.
According to the game machine armor KD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KD6, the visibility mode of the reflecting portion and the state of the forming means are associated with each other. As a result, even if it is difficult to recognize the change in the state of the forming means, the state of the forming means can be grasped by visually recognizing the reflecting portion, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.
Game machine armor KD8 is characterized in that, in the game machine armor KD6 or KD7, the reflecting part is formed above a flow-down path of the game ball.

According to the game machine armor KD8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KD6 or KD7, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the reflection part is hidden by the game machine flowing down the flow path.
Game machine armor KD9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors KD3 to KD8, the covering means has a shape part smaller than the forming means at a position visible against the background of the forming means.
According to the game machine KD9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KD3 to KD8, the visual appearance of the shape part with the forming means as the background and the visual appearance of the shape part without the forming means as the background are made different. , the appearance of the fixed covering means can be changed.
A game machine armor KD10 characterized in that, in the game machine armor KD9, the shape portion is arranged at a position on the upstream side of the forming means.

According to the game machine armor KD10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KD9, by setting the part to be noticed by the shape part to be the upstream position of the forming means, the game ball visually recognized by the player near the shape part is in the ball entry area. It is possible to secure a long time to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to give the player time to confirm that the ball has entered the ball-entering area.
<The appearance of the displacement means behind the decorative plate varies depending on the arrangement>
a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter; a displacement means capable of being displaced between a first position that directs a game ball to the ball entry area and a second position that does not direct a game ball to the ball entry area; transparent means formed of a transparent material and arranged so as to overlap at least a part of the displacement means when viewed from a predetermined direction, the transparent means having a predetermined decoration, and the displacement means being the first displacement means; A game machine armor KE1 characterized in that an overlapping region of the displacement means and the transmission means in the predetermined direction view can be changed depending on whether the game machine is arranged at the position or at the second position.
In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a decorative member that covers the front side of the ball entry area is movable, and the appearance of the vicinity of the ball entry area is changed by moving the decorative member (for example, See JP-A-2015-107293).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since a drive means and a transmission mechanism for operating the decorative member are separately required, the area near the ball entry area is likely to be pressed by the drive means and the transmission mechanism. There was a problem that the degree of design freedom in the vicinity was low.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor KE1, in the structure where the displacement means is visible through the transmission means, the area where the transmission means and the displacement means overlap changes due to the change in the arrangement of the displacement means. The predetermined decoration of the transmission means can be visually recognized in different modes without being operated. As a result, a space for arranging the driving means and the transmission mechanism can be made available, and the degree of freedom in designing the vicinity of the ball-entering area can be improved.
In the game machine upper KE1, the displacement means is arranged at the first position, and the displacement means is used as the background of the predetermined decoration, so that the displacement means is arranged at the second position. A game machine armor KE2 characterized in that it is constructed so that the predetermined decoration can be easily identified by comparison.
According to the game machine armor KE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KE1, it becomes easy to determine the predetermined decoration in a state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position. It is possible to make it easier to grasp the state. Furthermore, the displacing means directs the game ball toward the ball-entering area in an easily distinguishable state, so that the attention to the vicinity of the ball-entering area can be further increased.
The gaming machine armor KE3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine armor KE1 or KE2, the predetermined decoration has a shape related to the ball-entering area.

According to the game machine armor KE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KE1 or KE2, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to predetermined decorations to attention to the ball-entering area.
In any one of the game machine uppers KE1 to KE3, the ball entry area is arranged at a position that is visible in a direction view different from the predetermined direction view and in which the predetermined decoration and the displacement means do not overlap. A game machine armor KE4 characterized by being.
According to the game machine armor KE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KE1 to KE3, it is possible to reduce the game burden for the player who feels annoyed by the change in the viewing mode in the predetermined decoration.
In the game machine upper KE1, the displacement means is arranged at the first position, and the displacement means is retracted from the rear of the predetermined decoration, so that the displacement means is arranged at the second position. A game machine armor KE5 characterized in that it is configured so that the predetermined decoration can be easily discriminated as compared with the game machine armor KE5.

According to the game machine armor KE5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KE1, it becomes easier to determine the predetermined decoration in a state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position. It is possible to make it easier to grasp the state. Furthermore, the displacing means directs the game ball toward the ball-entering area in an easily distinguishable state, so that the attention to the vicinity of the ball-entering area can be further increased.
A game machine upper KE6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine uppers KE1 to KE5, a plurality of the ball-entering areas are provided, and a plurality of the predetermined decorations are provided corresponding to the respective ball-entering areas.
According to the game machine armor KE6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors KE1 to KE5, by visually recognizing a predetermined decoration, it is possible to easily grasp where in a plurality of ball entry areas the game ball is guided. can be done.
A game machine armor KE7, wherein the plurality of predetermined decorations are formed in different sizes in the game machine armor KE6.

According to the game machine armor KE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KE6, it is possible to make it easier to determine the destination of the game ball by a predetermined decoration. In addition, by setting the size relationship of the predetermined decoration according to the profit difference between the plurality of ball-entering areas, it is possible for the player to intuitively grasp the profit to be obtained.
Game machine armor KE8 or game machine armor KE8 is characterized in that, in game machine armor KE6 or KE7, the plurality of predetermined decorations are provided in such a manner that one is arranged inside the other.
According to the game machine armor KE8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KE6 or KE7, it is possible to eliminate the need for the player to change his/her line of sight when focusing on a plurality of predetermined decorations. As a result, the game burden on the player can be reduced.
In any one of the game machine armors KE1 to KE8, the game machine armor KE9 is characterized in that the transmissive means comprises an alignment part for aligning the position of the displacement means.

According to the game machine armor KE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KE1 to KE8, the positioning part suppresses the displacement between the displacement means and the predetermined decoration when the displacement means is in the first state. be able to.
A game machine armor KE10 characterized in that, in the game machine armor KE9, the positioning part is disposed at a position different from the predetermined decoration.
According to the game machine armor KE10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KE9, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the predetermined decoration.
<Structure that combines multiple layers to form a series of decorations>
In a game machine in which a first means can be arranged on a first layer and a second means can be arranged on a second layer overlapping with the first layer when viewed from a predetermined direction, the second means; A game characterized in that the first means and the second means are independently displaceable and arranged in a predetermined area when viewed from the predetermined direction, and can be visually recognized in a series of visual modes. Armored KF1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that is provided with first means and second means formed from a shape that imitates the blades of scissors, and is visually recognized in a series of visual modes by the first means and second means ( For example, see JP-A-2011-110255).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the first means and the second means are interlocked with each other, the operating speed becomes slow, and the first means and the second means are arranged outside the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it takes a long time for the first means and the second means to be arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device to be viewed in a series of viewing modes, and the degree of freedom in performance may be reduced. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the performance effects of the first means and the second means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine KF1, the first means is configured to be displaceable independently of the second means, so the operating speed of the first means is limited by the weight of the second means. This makes it possible to speed up the operations of the first means and the second means, thereby improving the presentation effect of the first means and the second means.
In the game machine armor KF1, the first means is configured to be switchable between a movable state and a non-movable state, which are different visual modes, and is visually recognized in the series of visual modes in the non-movable state.

According to the game machine KF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine KF1, it is possible to switch between a state in which the first means is dynamically produced and a state in which the first means is made non-movable and a series of shapes are focused.
In the gaming machine KF1 or KF2, the first means comprises operating means and operated means, and the operating means is displaced according to the state of the operated means. KF3.
According to the game machine KF3, in addition to the effect of either the game machine KF1 or KF2, it is possible to prevent the operating means and the operated means from colliding with each other as in the case of independent operation.
A game machine armor KF4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors KF1 to KF3, the second means is made movable when the first means is made non-movable.

According to the game machine armor KF4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KF1 to KF3, the second means can also be displaced independently of the first means, so that the variation of the action presentation can be increased. can.
In any one of game machines KF1 to KF4, from a state in which the first means and the second means are not visually recognized in a series of visual recognition modes, the first means and the second means move closer to each other. A game machine armor KF5 characterized by being visually recognized in a series of visual modes in a state.
According to the game machine KF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KF1 to KF4, the visible range can be narrowed in a series of visual recognition modes, so the game burden on the player can be reduced.
In any one of the game machines KF1 to KF5, the first means or the second means stops operating in the predetermined area, and can continue operating in areas other than the predetermined area. .

According to the game machine KF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KF1 to KF5, the visual mode of the first means or the second means can be changed by the continuous operation except when it is visually recognized in a series of visual modes in the predetermined area. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the aspect visually recognized in the series of visualizing aspects.
In any one of the game machine decks KF1 to KF6, the second means is arranged in a region surrounded by the first means, and the light emission mode of the first means is changed corresponding to the light emission mode of the second means. Game machine armor KF7 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor KF7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KF1 to KF6, by matching the light emission mode, the presentation effect by the first means and the second means can be improved.
In any one of game machines KF1 to KF7, a display device having a display area at a position capable of overlapping with the first means or the second means when viewed from the predetermined direction, light from the display area illuminates the first means Or a game machine armor KF8 characterized by being illuminated in an area corresponding to the second means.

According to the game machine KF8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KF1 to KF7, the light from the display area of the display device can brightly illuminate the first means or the second means, thereby improving the performance effect. can be done.
In the game machine KF8, the mode of light from the display area can be changed between when the first means or the second means is displaced and when the first means or the second means is not displaced. Game machine armor KF9 characterized by.
According to the game machine armor KF9, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KF8, the way of showing the first means or the second means can be made different between during displacement and during non-displacement, so that it is visually recognized in a series of visual modes. It is possible to provide variations in how the first means or the second means are shown depending on the state and the other states.
A game machine KF10 characterized in that, in the game machine KF8 or KF9, a display corresponding to the visual recognition mode of the first means or the second means is provided in the display area.

According to the game machine KF10, in addition to the effects of the game machine KF8 or KF9, when the first means or the second means is made of a transparent material, the display in the display area and the first means or the second means itself It can be visually recognized in a visual mode in which the decoration is combined.
Further, even if the first means or the second means malfunctions, the display in the display area can be replaced by the first means or the second means, thereby minimizing the deterioration of the performance effect. can be done.
A game machine KF11 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines KF8 to KF10, display by the display device and the first means or the second means are interlocked.
According to the game machine KF11, the entire display area of the display device in the layer where the first means or the second means is not arranged is used to allow the player to visually recognize the object linked to the first means or the second means. be able to. As a result, the player's attention area can be expanded.

In any one of game machines KF8 to KF11, a first visible range for visually recognizing display by the display device and a second visible range for visually recognizing in a manner different from the first visible range, the second visible range is formed in a layer on the front side of the first visible range, the game machine armor KF12.
According to the game machine armor KF12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KF8 to KF11, the first visible range and the second visible range can be visually recognized in a viewing mode related to the front and back arrangement, so that the three-dimensional It is possible to realize a production with a feeling or a layered feeling.
A game machine armor KF13, characterized in that the game machine armor KF12 is provided with gap prevention means for narrowing the gap between the first visible range and the second visible range.
According to the game machine armor KF13, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KF12, it is possible to facilitate visual recognition of the visual mode in the first visual recognition range and the visual visual mode in the second visual recognition range in a series of visual visual modes.

A game machine armor KF14 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine armors KF8 to KF13, a light emitting means is displaced in accordance with displacement of the first means or the second means.
According to the game machine armor KF14, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KF8 to KF13, it is possible to easily avoid the time delay of the light effect with respect to the displacement of the first means or the second means.
A game machine KF15 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines KF8 to KF14, the visual recognition mode in the first layer can be changed corresponding to the state in the second layer based on voltage control.
According to the game machine armor KF15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KF8 to KF14, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the first means according to the state of the second means in the second layer.

In the game machine KF15, it is possible to configure a blocking range that blocks predetermined light and a non-blocking range that does not block predetermined light, corresponding to the state of the second layer. Armored KF16.
According to the game machine armor KF16, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KF15, by changing the transmission mode of light from the back depending on the state of the second layer, the second layer and the first layer are visually superimposed. Aspects can vary.
<Place the board on the back side of the base plate>
A game board having a game area formed on the front side thereof, and light irradiation means for irradiating the game board with light, wherein the light irradiation means emits light in a direction intersecting the thickness direction of the game board. A game machine armor KG1, characterized in that it is arranged at a position where the can enter the game board.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a light-emitting board is arranged on the back side of the game board, and light is emitted from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the light-emitting board toward the front side, whereby the game board and the light are emitted. There is a game machine configured to brightly illuminate a light-transmitting member assembled to a game board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-333887).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the light-emitting substrate is arranged at a certain distance from the game board in order to brightly illuminate a wide range of the game board and the light-transmissive members assembled to the game board with the limited light-emitting means. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a space for it on the back side of the game board. Since the light-transmitting members attached to the board make the shadows of the movable parts appear dark, from this point of view, it is desirable to move the light-emitting means closer to the game board to create a space for the movable parts. There were conflicting issues. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the arrangement of the light irradiation means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor KG1, the light from the light irradiation means is arranged at a position where it can enter the game board in a direction crossing the thickness direction of the game board. Since the light irradiation range can be expanded inside the width and the area illuminated by the light can be increased, the game board can be visually recognized brightly, and there is no need to dispose the light irradiation means away from the rear of the game board. Therefore, a sufficient space for arranging the movable accessory can be secured on the back side of the game board. That is, the arrangement of the light irradiation means can be improved.
In the gaming machine armor KG1, the gaming machine armor KG2 is characterized in that the light irradiation means is arranged behind the game board.
According to the game machine armor KG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KG1, the light irradiation means can be arranged so as to be hidden by the game board, and the appearance can be improved.

In the game machine armor KG1 or KG2, the game board has a recessed portion recessed on the back side outside the range where the game area is formed, and the light irradiation means is arranged in the space formed by the recessed portion. A game machine armor KG3 characterized by being
According to the game machine armor KG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KG1 or KG2, the light irradiation means can be accommodated within the thickness dimension of the game board, so it is possible to easily secure the space on the back side of the game board. .
In any one of the game machine armors KG1 to KG3, the game machine armor KG4 is characterized in that the game board is provided with a changing portion on the rear side surface for directing the light from the light irradiation means to the front side.
According to the game machine armor KG4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KG1 to KG3, it is possible to easily design how the light looks in the front view by arranging the changing portions.

In the game machine armor KG4, the game machine armor KG5 is characterized in that the game board is formed with texturing in the changing portion.
According to the game machine armor KG5, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KG4, the light can be diffused in the changing parts, and the number of light irradiation parts such as LEDs for brightly recognizing the changing parts can be reduced.
In the game machine upper KG4 or KG5, the changing part is formed at a plurality of positions where light emitted from the light irradiation means along a predetermined optical axis can reach.
According to the game machine armor KG6, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KG4 or KG5, the light emitted from the predetermined optical axis can widen the range in which the changing portion is brightly visible.

In any one of the game machine armors KG4 to KG6, the game machine armor KG7 is characterized in that the changing portion is formed in a circumferential shape at the edge of the opening inside the game board.
According to the game machine armor KG7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KG4 to KG6, the edge of the opening inside the game board can be illuminated in a substantially annular shape. This makes it easier to guide the user's line of sight to the display device arranged inside the opening.
In the game machine armor KG7, the changing part is configured such that the opening is larger at the edge rear end than at the edge front end of the opening.
According to the game machine armor KG8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KG7, the center frame can be arranged on the game board with reference to the front edge of the edge of the opening, and the center frame can be brightly illuminated by the light passing through the changing part. can be done.

In any one of the game machines KG1 to KG8, until the traveling direction of the light entering the game board from the light irradiation means is directed to the front side, the light travels within the thickness dimension of the game board. Characteristic game armor KG9.
According to the game machine armor KG9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KG1 to KG8, unlike the case where the light before being directed to the front side advances in the game area, the light is blocked by the ball flowing down the game area. can be avoided.
In the game machine KG9, light entering the game board from the light irradiation means can pass through a passage path of a game ball entering a ball entry area provided in the game area. Game machine armor KG10.
According to the game machine armor KG10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KG9, it is possible to associate the case where the light entering from the light irradiation means is blocked and the case where the game ball enters the ball entry area. It is possible to improve attention to the light emitted from the irradiation means.

<Rotating Means for Changing the Viewing Mode of the Viewing Portion>
A game machine KKH1 characterized by comprising an operating means having a predetermined visual recognition portion capable of changing a visual recognition mode, wherein the predetermined visual recognition portion can be rotated.
2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with an operation means capable of generating a movement that enhances the performance effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-98027).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the operation means interlocked in response to the variation of the symbols only performs the operation of opening and closing in front of the display device fixed to the central part of the game machine. Although the ability to pay attention to the display device is improved, it is difficult to make the user pay attention to the operation means in a way that the eyes follow them. In other words, there is room for improvement in the performance effect of the operating means.
On the other hand, according to the game machine armor KKH1, since the predetermined visual recognition portion can be rotated, when the rotational movement of the operating means continues around a predetermined point, the visual recognition state of the predetermined visual recognition portion changes. In order to confirm , attention to the action means can be improved. In this case, it is sufficient to keep a certain range from the center of rotation within the field of vision, so that the game burden of the player who tries to confirm the change in the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition portion can be reduced.

A game machine KKH2 in the game machine KKH1, characterized in that the movement means changes a visual recognition mode through the predetermined visual recognition portion as it rotates.
According to the game machine armor KKH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KKH1, it is possible to limit the timing at which attention is paid to the change in the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition part during the rotational movement of the operation means, so that the predetermined visual recognition part can be visually recognized. It is possible to reduce the game burden on the player compared to the case where it is not known when the mode change will occur.
A gaming machine KKH1 or KKH2, wherein the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition portion can be changed at least between a first position and a second position located on both sides of the rotating shaft of the operating means.
According to the game machine armor KKH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KKH1 or KKH2, compared to the case where the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition part changes at one place, the change in the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition part is improved. Since the degree of difficulty of confirmation can be increased, it is possible to further improve the player's attention to the action means.

In the game machine KKH3, when a change occurs in the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition portion at the first position, and when a change occurs in the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition portion at the second position, A game machine KKH4 characterized in that the profit that a player can obtain can change.
According to the game machine KKH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine KKH3, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the change in the visual mode of the predetermined visual recognition part, and to increase the attention to the operation means.
In any one of the game machine armors KKH1 to KKH4, the visual recognition mode of the predetermined visual recognition part may change in a first visual recognition mode or may change in a second visual recognition mode. KKH5.
According to the game machine KKH5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine KKH1 to KKH4, the player's interest in how the predetermined visual mode changes can be improved, and the player's action means. You can improve your attention to

<Production that associates the ball flow with the rotating motion means>
A game machine upper KH1 which is configured to be visually recognized by a player in any one of the game machine uppers KKH1 to KKH5 and has an operation means which can be moved corresponding to the falling of the game ball.
2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with motion means capable of producing movements that enhance the performance effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-98027).
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the effect operation of the operation means is executed in response to the variation of the symbols, and it is difficult to obtain information about the actual flow of the game ball from the operation mode. Therefore, when the player's line of sight is focused on the action means, it is not possible to grasp the flow state of the game ball, and the shooting intensity of the game ball is adjusted in real time while observing the feeling of the game ball flowing down. was difficult.
In this case, it is difficult to continue shooting game balls while visually recognizing the long reach on the liquid crystal display device, which increases the game burden on the player who wants to play the game with the special symbols reserved fully. There is a high possibility that it will make you lose interest. As described above, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operating means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor KH1, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machine armors KKH1 to KKH5, the player can visually recognize the movement of the operation means, so that the player can grasp the flow of the game ball. can. This allows an improved means of operation.
In the game machine KH1, the game machine KH2 is characterized in that the operating means is moved when a predetermined condition based on the flow of the game ball is established.
According to the game machine KH2, in addition to the effect of the game machine KH1, compared to the case where the action means moves as long as the game ball flows down in the game area, the player can play the game from the movement of the action means. It is possible to make it easier to predict how the ball will flow down.
In the game machine upper KH1 or KH2, the operating means is supported in a movable state and is configured to be displaceable with one side end as a fulcrum, an allowable state that allows displacement of the supporting means, and A game machine armor KH3, characterized by comprising a restricting means capable of configuring a restricting state for restricting the displacement of the supporting means.

According to the game machine armor KH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KH1 or KH2, variations can be given to the arrangement of the operation means in correspondence with the arrangement of the support means, so that the state of the flow-down mode can be easily grasped. can do.
A game machine KH4 characterized in that, in the game machine KH2 or KH3, the predetermined condition can be established when a game ball flowing down the game area passes through a predetermined portion.
According to the game machine KH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine KH2 or KH3, the player can recognize that the game ball has passed through a predetermined portion by visually recognizing the movement of the operating means.
Various aspects are exemplified as the predetermined portion. For example, it may be a prize ball opening where predetermined prize balls are dispensed by detecting the downflow of game balls, or an opening where no prize balls are dispensed but some kind of lottery is executed. Alternatively, it may be a detection sensor that simply detects the flow of game balls without executing any payout of prize balls or any lottery, or it may be a colliding portion of an operating member that is operated by transmission of energy from a game ball. good.

In the game machine KH4, when the game ball passes right through the first predetermined portion above the operating means, the operating means is not moved, while the game ball flows down to the left of the first predetermined portion. A game machine armor KH5 characterized in that the operating means can be moved in some cases.
According to the game machine KH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine KH4, by visually recognizing the operation means, the player can grasp which side the game ball is flowing down with reference to the operation means. can be done. As a result, for example, the player who intends to play a right-handed game can easily notice that the game ball is flowing down to the left.
In the game machine KH4, when the game ball passes rightward through the second predetermined portion above the operating means, the operating means is moved rightward while the left side of the second predetermined portion is played. A game machine armor KH6 characterized in that the operating means can be moved leftward when a ball flows down.
According to the game machine KH6, in addition to the effects of the game machine KH4, since the direction of movement of the action means corresponds to the direction in which the game ball flows, the player who visually recognizes the action means can This makes it easier for the user to intuitively understand how the ball flows down.

In the game machine armor KH6, when a game ball passes rightward through a third predetermined part located above the second predetermined part, the operating means is not moved.
According to the game machine KH7, in addition to the effects of the game machine KH6, the distance between the operating means and the presence or absence of movement of the operating means correspond to each other. On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to grasp that the game ball is flowing down at a position away from the operating means.
In any one of the game machine uppers KH4 to KH7, when the game ball passes through the predetermined portion in a state in which the operating means is moving based on the game ball passing through the predetermined portion, the operating means A game machine armor KH8 characterized in that the moving speed of the game machine armor KH8 is changed.
According to the game machine KH8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KH4 to KH7, by reflecting the flow of the game ball, which has a randomness in the frequency and flow direction, in the movement of the operation means, a highly random performance can be performed by the operating means. Furthermore, since it is possible for the player who sees the change in the movement speed of the operating means to recognize that the game ball has passed through the predetermined part again, the pattern of the game ball flowing down (the degree of variation in the flow-down mode) can be determined. can be easily grasped by the player.

The game machine upper KH9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machine uppers KH3 to KH8, the supporting means supports the operating means in a state in which the operating means can move regardless of whether the restricting means is in the allowable state or the restricting state.
According to the game machine armor KH9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KH3 to KH8, the operating means can move only when the support means is displaced or when the displacement of the support means is restricted. Compared to the case, the number of states in which the effect of improving the appearance by the operating means can be produced can be increased.
A game machine upper KH10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine uppers KH3 to KH9, the change of the restricting means from the allowable state to the restricting state occurs in conjunction with the displacement of the support means.
According to the game machine armor KH10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KH3 to KH9, since the change in the state of the regulating means occurs in conjunction with the displacement of the supporting means, the regulating means and the supporting means are independent of each other. Compared to the case where the operation can be performed based on the reference, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of malfunctions (for example, the operation timings do not match and interference occurs).

In any one of the game machine uppers KH3 to KH9, when the regulating means is in the allowable state, the supporting means can be maintained at the vertical position where the supporting means is arranged in the regulating state of the regulating means. A game machine KH11 characterized by being
According to the game machine armor KH11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KH3 to KH9, the displacement of the support means from the allowable state of the regulation means and the displacement of the support means from the regulation state of the regulation means can be performed in the same vertical direction. Since the game can be started from the position, the height position to which the player should pay attention can be unified, and the burden of the game on the player can be reduced.
In any one of game machine armors KH3 to KH11, game machine armor KH12 is characterized in that the movement means is displaced based on the displacement of the support means.
According to the game machine armor KH12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KH3 to KH11, in addition to the movement corresponding to the downflow of the game ball, it is possible to generate the movement due to the displacement based on the displacement of the support means. , it is possible to increase the variation of the visual recognition mode of the operating means.

In any one of the game machines KH3 to KH12, the displacement of the supporting means with the one side end as a fulcrum is a state in which the operating means is placed closer to the one side end than the center position of the supporting means. A game machine KH13 characterized by occurring in.
According to the game machine armor KH13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KH3 to KH12, since the movement means is arranged on the side where the displacement of the support means is small, the support means is suddenly stopped. It is possible to reduce the impact (load) that the operation means receives when an impact of .
<Points for forming decorations on the front side of the range where the game ball flows>
A light transmission part having a predetermined thickness is provided on the front side of a predetermined flow-down area where the game ball flows down, and the light transmission part is a first transmittance part configured with a first light transmittance. , and a second transmittance portion that transmits light at a transmittance higher than that of the first transmittance portion, and a part of the game ball that overlaps with the first transmittance portion in front view has the second transmittance A game machine armor KI1 characterized in that it is configured so as to overlap with the part.
2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which patterns are formed on a game board (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-83381). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the patterns may be hidden by the falling game balls, which may hinder the performance effect. Since there is a possibility that the game ball is hidden by the pattern and the game ball is lost, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the performance effect without losing the game ball. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine KI1, when the game ball overlaps with the first transmittance portion, it is configured to overlap with the second transmittance portion, so the game ball is completely placed in the first transmittance portion. By making it easy to avoid a situation in which a player loses sight of a game ball by avoiding a covered situation, and by changing the visual recognition mode depending on whether or not the game ball flows down the back side of the light transmission part. It is possible to improve the performance effect.
A game machine KI2 characterized in that the first transmittance part constitutes at least a part of a predetermined symbol in the game machine KI1.
According to the game machine armor KI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KI1, regardless of whether or not the game ball is flowing down in the downflow area, the player can be made to recognize some meaning of the predetermined symbol, so the performance is improved. can be achieved.
In the game machine armor KI2, the first transmittance portion constitutes at least part of the outline of the predetermined symbol.

According to the game machine armor KI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KI2, it is possible to facilitate identification of a predetermined symbol.
In any one of the gaming machines KI1 to KI3, at least one of the dimension in the flowing direction of the game ball and the dimension in the direction intersecting the flowing direction of the game ball of the first transmittance portion is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Game machine armor KI4 characterized by being shortened.
According to the game machine armor KI4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machine armors KI1 to KI3, the degree of freedom in designing the first transmittance portion can be improved, and the production effect by increasing the types of patterns configured. can be improved.
In the game machine armor KI4, when the first transmittance part constitutes at least part of the contour of the predetermined symbol, the width of the contour is less than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine KI5, in addition to the effect of the game machine KI4, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is completely hidden by the contour even when a plurality of contours of a predetermined symbol are adjacent to each other.
That is, when a plurality of contours are arranged without gaps, the game ball can be visually recognized outside the plurality of contours, while when a gap occurs between the plurality of contours, the game ball can be passed through the gaps. can be visualized.
A game machine KI6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines KI1 to KI5, the flowing direction of the game ball in the predetermined flowing region has a horizontal component.
According to the game machine armor KI6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KI1 to KI5, compared to the free-falling game ball, it is possible to slow down the flow speed of the game ball in the predetermined flow area. It is possible to lengthen the period during which the game ball is visually recognized through the transparent portion. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the appearance of the pattern formed by the first transmittance portion and the second transmittance portion changes for a long time.

In any one of game machines KI1 to KI6, the predetermined flow-down area comprises a first flow-down area and a second flow-down area in which game balls flow down in a direction different from that of the first flow-down area. Game machine armor KI7 to play.
According to the game machine armor KI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KI1 to KI6, when the game ball is flowing down the first flow-down area, the direction in which the game ball that overlaps the light transmission part is displaced and the game ball Since the direction in which the game ball that overlaps the light transmission part is displaced is different from the direction in which the game ball that overlaps the light transmission part is flowing down the second flow-down area, a plurality of displacement directions of the influence of the game ball on the pattern visually recognized in the light transmission part are generated. (Because it is possible to configure a plurality of types of visual recognition modes of the light transmitting portion in a state in which the pattern dynamically changes), it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the light transmitting portion.
In any one of the game machine shells KI1 to KI7, a game characterized by comprising a configuration part configured with a lower transmittance than the first transmittance part inside the outline composed of the first transmittance part. Armor KI8.
According to the game machine armor KI8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KI1 to KI7, by arranging the constituent parts, the visibility of the light seen through the first transmittance part can be relatively improved. It is possible to improve the identifiability of the constituent parts.

Any of the game machine uppers KI1 to KI8 includes a light irradiation device that irradiates light toward the front of the light transmission part, and a pattern that is visually recognized by the light emitted from the light irradiation device that has passed through the light transmission part. A game machine KI9 characterized in that it is configured to be changeable.
According to the game machine KI9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KI1 to KI8, the pattern visually recognized by the light emitted from the light irradiation device that has passed through the light transmission part can be changed. It is possible to improve the performance effect of the light transmitting portion.
The game machine upper KI10 characterized in that in the game machine upper KI9, a game ball may flow down while being cast a shadow on the second transmittance part by the light emitted from the light irradiation device.
According to the game machine KI10, in addition to the effects of the game machine KI9, the shadow of the game ball projected on the second transmittance portion can be made darker by irradiating light from the light irradiation device, and the player can It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a game ball is lost.

In any one of the game machine uppers KI1 to KI10, an auxiliary portion is provided in a predetermined range that does not overlap the predetermined flow area in a front view, and the pattern formed by the auxiliary portion is formed by the first transmittance portion. A game machine armor KI11 characterized in that it can be visually recognized in a pattern formed and a series of visual recognition modes.
According to the game machine armor KI11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KI1 to KI10, the production effect can be improved by the first transmittance part and the auxiliary part that can be visually recognized in a series of visual recognition modes, and the game ball The visibility of the auxiliary portion can be maintained high regardless of the flow of water.
<Point of providing irradiation means for irradiating light to displacement means>
It comprises an opening/closing member capable of opening and closing a predetermined area, irradiation means capable of irradiating light capable of illuminating an area on a predetermined surface side of the opening/closing member, and displacement means capable of displacing the predetermined surface side. Game machine armor KJ1.
2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with an opening/closing member (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-98027). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the opening/closing member in the closed state is irradiated with light from the display device on the back side, the visibility of the opening/closing member may change, but the front side of the opening/closing member is displaced. There is no other member to be used, and there is little variation in the viewing mode of the opening and closing member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine armor KJ1, since it is provided with displacement means that can be displaced on the predetermined surface side of the predetermined opening and closing member irradiated with light from the irradiation means, the displacement means overlaps with the opening and closing member and can be visually recognized. Also, since the displacement means can be visually recognized without overlapping the opening/closing member, the variation of the viewing mode of the opening/closing member can be increased, and the viewing mode of the opening/closing member can be improved.
The game machine armor KJ2 is characterized in that, in the game machine armor KJ1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in a direction along a predetermined straight line.
According to the game machine armor KJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KJ1, by facilitating prediction of the displacement of the displacement means, it is possible to reduce the game burden of the player who visually recognizes the displacement means.
A game machine armor KJ3 characterized in that, in the game machine armor KJ1 or KJ2, the displacement means and the opening/closing member can be interlocked.

According to the game machine armor KJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KJ1 or KJ2, the displacement of the opening/closing member and the displacement of the displacement means can be visually recognized by the player not as independent but as mutually related. Therefore, the visibility of the opening/closing member can be improved.
A game machine upper KJ4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine uppers KJ1 to KJ3, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means is changed based on the opening/closing movement of the opening/closing member.
According to the game machine KJ4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KJ1 to KJ3, by associating the opening/closing movement of the opening/closing member with the change in the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means, the player can open and close. It is possible to configure a state in which it is easy to notice the opening/closing movement of the member.
A game machine upper KJ5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine uppers KJ1 to KJ4, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means is changed based on the change of the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine KJ5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines KJ1 to KJ4, by associating the change in the displacement direction of the displacement means with the change in the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means, the game can be played. It is possible to construct a state in which a person can easily notice a change in the direction of displacement of the displacement means.
A game machine upper KJ6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machine uppers KJ1 to KJ5, the game machine upper KJ6 is characterized by comprising a resistance generating means for generating a resistance against a load in the direction of changing the opening/closing member from the closed state to the open state.
According to the game machine armor KJ6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KJ1 to KJ5, even if an unexpected load is applied to the opening and closing member, the opening and closing member can be easily maintained in the closed state. It is possible to easily avoid an unexpected change in the visual recognition mode of the member.
In any one of the game machines KJ1 to KJ6, a first state in which the displacement means can pass through the predetermined position in the predetermined direction and a second state in which the displacement means cannot pass the predetermined position in the predetermined direction. A game machine armor KJ7 characterized by comprising a switching means that can be used.

According to the game machine armor KJ7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KJ1 to KJ6, by visually recognizing the state of the switching means, the displacement of the displacement means can be predicted. Thereby, attention to the switching means can be improved.
The game machine armor KJ7 is characterized in that the state change of the switching means occurs before the displacement means passing in the predetermined direction reaches the game machine armor KJ8.
According to the game machine armor KJ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KJ7, it is possible to grasp the state change of the switching means before the displacement means reaches a predetermined position, so the attention of the switching means is improved over a long period of time. can be made
Any one of the game machines KJ1 to KJ8 is characterized by comprising direction changing means for changing the direction of displacement of the displacement means from a first direction to a second direction crossing the first direction. Game machine armor KJ9.

According to the game machine armor KJ9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine armors KJ1 to KJ8, the direction change means can shift the direction of displacement of the displacement means. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the visual recognition mode of the displacement means.
A game machine armor KJ10 characterized in that, in the game machine armor KJ9, the direction changing means are disposed on both sides so as to sandwich the displacement means.
According to the game machine armor KJ10, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KJ9, the direction changing means acts on the displacement means from both sides, so that the direction of displacement of the displacement means by the direction changing means can be changed in multiple modes. can.
The game machine armor KJ11 is characterized in that the direction changing means arranged on both sides of the game machine armor KJ10 alternately act on the displacement means.

According to the game machine armor KJ11, in addition to the effects of the game machine armor KJ10, by shifting the timing at which the direction change means acts on the displacement means, the direction of displacement of the displacement means by the direction change means is changed with high frequency. can be
Game machine armor A1 to armor A10, armor B1 to armor B10, armor C1 to armor C11, armor D1 to armor D12, armor E1 to armor E11, armor WA1-0 to armor WA1-5, armor WA2-1 to armor WA2-5 , A WB1-1 to A WB1-6, A WB2-1 to A WB2-8, A WB3-1 to A WB3-3, A WC1-1 to A WC1-4, A WC2-1 to A WC2-5 And instep WD1-1 to instep WD1-5, game machine instep YA1 to instep YA11, instep YB1 to instep YB10, instep YC1 to instep YC11, instep YD1 to instep YD5, instep YE1 to instep YE3, instep YF1 to instep YF3 and instep YG1 From A YG3, Game Machine A BA1 to A BA13, A B BB1 to A BB3, A B BBZ1 to A BBZ11, A B BC1 to A BC11, A B BD1 to A B BD13, A B BE1 to A B BE3, A BEZ1 to A BEZ10, A B BG1 to Instep BG16, instep BH1 to instep BH11, instep BI1 to instep BI3 and instep BIZ1 to instep BIZ11, game machine instep CA1 to instep CA26, instep CB1 to instep CB4, instep CC1 to instep CC4, instep DA1 to instep DA19, instep DB1 to instep DB4, A DC1 to A DC4, A DD1 to A DD4, A A EA1 to A EA4, A A EB1 to A B4 and A EC1 to A EC5, Game Machine A1 to A1 FA13, A4 A FB1 to A4 FB12, A FC1 to A FC8 Or A FD1 to A FD5, Game Machine A KA1 to A KA10, A KB1 to A to KB8, A KC1 to A KC10, A KD1 to A KD10, A K KE1 to A K KE10, A KF1 to A KF16, A KG1 to A KG10 , A-KKH1 to A-KKH5, A-KH1 to A-KH13, A-KI1 to A-KI11, and A-KJ1 to A-KJ11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.
Game machine armor A1 to armor A10, armor B1 to armor B10, armor C1 to armor C11, armor D1 to armor D12, armor E1 to armor E11, armor WA1-0 to armor WA1-5, armor WA2-1 to armor WA2-5 , A WB1-1 to A WB1-6, A WB2-1 to A WB2-8, A WB3-1 to A WB3-3, A WC1-1 to A WC1-4, A WC2-1 to A WC2-5 And instep WD1-1 to instep WD1-5, game machine instep YA1 to instep YA11, instep YB1 to instep YB10, instep YC1 to instep YC11, instep YD1 to instep YD5, instep YE1 to instep YE3, instep YF1 to instep YF3 and instep YG1 From A YG3, Game Machine A BA1 to A BA13, A B BB1 to A BB3, A B BBZ1 to A BBZ11, A B BC1 to A BC11, A B BD1 to A B BD13, A B BE1 to A B BE3, A BEZ1 to A BEZ10, A B BG1 to Instep BG16, instep BH1 to instep BH11, instep BI1 to instep BI3 and instep BIZ1 to instep BIZ11, game machine instep CA1 to instep CA26, instep CB1 to instep CB4, instep CC1 to instep CC4, instep DA1 to instep DA19, instep DB1 to instep DB4, A DC1 to A DC4, A DD1 to A DD4, A A EA1 to A EA4, A A EB1 to A B4 and A EC1 to A EC5, Game Machine A1 to A1 FA13, A4 A FB1 to A4 FB12, A FC1 to A FC8 Or A FD1 to A FD5, Game Machine A KA1 to A KA10, A KB1 to A to KB8, A KC1 to A KC10, A KD1 to A KD10, A K KE1 to A K KE10, A KF1 to A KF16, A KG1 to A KG10 , A-KKH1 to A-KKH5, A-KH1 to A-KH13, A-KI1 to A-KI11, and A-KJ1 to A-KJ11, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.
Game machine armor A1 to armor A10, armor B1 to armor B10, armor C1 to armor C11, armor D1 to armor D12, armor E1 to armor E11, armor WA1-0 to armor WA1-5, armor WA2-1 to armor WA2-5 , A WB1-1 to A WB1-6, A WB2-1 to A WB2-8, A WB3-1 to A WB3-3, A WC1-1 to A WC1-4, A WC2-1 to A WC2-5 And instep WD1-1 to instep WD1-5, game machine instep YA1 to instep YA11, instep YB1 to instep YB10, instep YC1 to instep YC11, instep YD1 to instep YD5, instep YE1 to instep YE3, instep YF1 to instep YF3 and instep YG1 From A YG3, Game Machine A BA1 to A BA13, A B BB1 to A BB3, A B BBZ1 to A BBZ11, A B BC1 to A BC11, A B BD1 to A B BD13, A B BE1 to A B BE3, A BEZ1 to A BEZ10, A B BG1 to Instep BG16, instep BH1 to instep BH11, instep BI1 to instep BI3 and instep BIZ1 to instep BIZ11, game machine instep CA1 to instep CA26, instep CB1 to instep CB4, instep CC1 to instep CC4, instep DA1 to instep DA19, instep DB1 to instep DB4, A DC1 to A DC4, A DD1 to A DD4, A A EA1 to A EA4, A A EB1 to A B4 and A EC1 to A EC5, Game Machine A1 to A1 FA13, A4 A FB1 to A4 FB12, A FC1 to A FC8 Or A FD1 to A FD5, Game Machine A KA1 to A KA10, A KB1 to A to KB8, A KC1 to A KC10, A KD1 to A KD10, A K KE1 to A K KE10, A KF1 to A KF16, A KG1 to A KG10 , A KKH1 to A KKH5, A KH1 to A KH13, A KI1 to A KI11, and A KJ1 to A KJ11, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A game machine armor Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

<Characteristic group of 5079 series>
<Characteristic LA group>
game state setting means for setting a specific game state set to a predetermined first advantage degree based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; and a predetermined specific condition in the specific game state. setting means for setting the advantage level of the specific game state to a second advantage level different from the first advantage level based on the establishment of the above.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are those that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, by providing a specific game state that continues until the next win as an advantageous game state, winning is confirmed at the time of transition to the specific game state, There are also games designed to increase the interest of players in games.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is only winning that is determined when shifting to a specific game state, and it is uncertain whether or not an advantageous game state is set as the game state after winning. Therefore, when a win is achieved in a specific game state, regardless of the timing of the win, there is always a possibility that a game state with a relatively low degree of advantage will be set, so that the player can feel at ease. There was a problem that it was difficult to make people feel.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine LA1, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of a specific game state before and after the specific condition is established, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine LA1, at least a predetermined privilege is more likely to be given in the specific game state set to the second advantage level than in the specific game state set to the first advantage level. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a configuration of
According to the game machine LA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine LA1, when the specific condition is met, a predetermined benefit is likely to be granted. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine LA1 or LA2, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a benefit advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. and privilege game executing means capable of executing a game, wherein the specific condition is at least a different condition from the execution of the privilege game.
According to the game machine LA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine LA1 or LA2, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage of a specific game state can be changed without involving a special game. There is an effect that it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.
In the gaming machine LA3, the specific condition is a deviation determination that is different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means after the specific game state is set. A game machine LA4 characterized in that it is established when a result is obtained.
According to the game machine LA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine LA3, when a specific game state is set, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one strongly expect that the result of the determination of failure will continue. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine LA3 or LA4, the game state setting means selects the specific game state and a first game state having a lower advantage than the specific game state as game states after the execution of the privilege game is completed. and one of a plurality of game states can be set, and the specific game state set to the second advantage is the specific game state set to the first advantage Further, when the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result and the privilege game is executed, the specific game state is easily set by the game state setting means. Gaming machine LA5.
According to the gaming machine LA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LA3 or LA4, the specific condition is satisfied and the second advantage level is set, so that when the privilege game is executed, the specific advantage level is high. Since there is a high possibility that the game state will be set, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game feature that strongly expects a specific determination result after the specific condition is established.
In the gaming machine LA5, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. and based on the establishment of a predetermined stop condition during the dynamic display period, regardless of the determination result of the determination means corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed, and a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the identification information for indicating a determination result different from the specific determination result, and the privilege game execution means is configured so that the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is The specific game state set to the second degree of advantage is the specific game state set to the first degree of advantage, which is configured to be able to execute the privilege game based on the stopped display. The game machine LA6 is characterized in that the stop condition is likely to be satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game in which the first game state is set.
According to the gaming machine LA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LA5, in the specific gaming state set to the second advantageous degree, the identification corresponding to the privilege game in which the first gaming state with the low advantageous degree is set Since the stop condition is more likely to be satisfied during the dynamic display of information, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is removed and changed to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the first game state is set, so that the specific game state with a higher degree of advantage is relatively higher than the specific game state set to the first degree of advantage. can be increased. As a result, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player expect the specific condition to be satisfied more strongly.

In the gaming machine LA6, the dynamic display period determining means determines that the specific game state set to the second advantage is higher than the specific game state set to the first advantage. , the ratio of determining a long dynamic display period as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result corresponding to the privilege game for which the first game state is set is high. A gaming machine LA7 characterized by:
According to the game machine LA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine LA6, in the specific game state set to the second degree of advantage, a specific determination result corresponding to the privilege game in which the first game state is set is shown. By lengthening the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for the purpose, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop condition is satisfied before the dynamic display period ends. Hard to set and can be configured. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In any one of the gaming machines LA1 to LA7, the degree of advantage of the specific game state set to the second degree of advantage based on the satisfaction of a predetermined second specific condition in the specific game state. to the first degree of advantage.
According to the gaming machine LA8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines LA1 to LA7, when the second specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state set to the second advantage, the first advantage is restored. can be returned to , there is an effect that it is possible to further diversify the game characteristics in a specific game state, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines LA1 to LA8, the degree of advantage of the specific game state set to the second degree of advantage is based on the satisfaction of a predetermined third specific condition. to a third degree of advantage different from the first degree of advantage and the second degree of advantage.
According to the game machine LA9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines LA1 to LA8, the degree of advantage in a specific game state can be varied in three stages, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic LB group>
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of determination conditions, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, a first state based on establishment of a predetermined set condition, and the determination means rather than the first state. a state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a second state in which a period from when one determination is performed until a new determination can be performed tends to be long, and The game machine LB1 is characterized in that the advantage degree is likely to be higher in the second state than in the first state.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are widely known ones that perform a variable display of symbols to indicate the result of a lottery each time a lottery is executed. In addition, such conventional gaming machines are also known to adopt control that gives a sharpness to the game by varying the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display for each game state.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since a longer variation time is set for a game state with a lower degree of advantage, there is a problem that the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered due to the longer variation time.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine LB1, the advantage degree is higher in the second state in which the period from the execution of the determination of 1 to the time when a new determination can be performed is longer than in the first state in which the period is short. Since novel control that makes the game easier is adopted, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine LB1, in the second state, when the determination result of the determination means is at least the first determination result, the period until the new determination becomes executable is longer than in the first state. The game machine LB2 is characterized by being in a state where it is easy to become.
According to the gaming machine LB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LB1, when the first determination result is obtained, the period until a new determination can be executed is longer in the second state than in the first state. Since it tends to be long, there is an effect that it is possible to expect that the first determination result will not be obtained in the second state.
In the gaming machine LB2, the first state is a different game state before the first determination result is obtained and when a new determination becomes executable after the first determination result is obtained. In the second state, the game state is the same before the first determination result is obtained and when a new determination becomes executable after the first determination result is obtained. A game machine LB3 characterized by being in a state where it is easy to become.
According to the gaming machine LB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, in the second state, the gaming state is easily maintained even if the first determination result is obtained, while in the first state, the first determination result is obtained. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game state is easily changed, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine LB2 or LB3, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a plurality of at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a lower degree of advantage than the first privilege game and game state setting for setting a specific game state having a lower degree of advantage than at least the second state as a game state after the end of the second privilege game. means, wherein the first determination result is a determination result in which the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means among the specific determination results.
According to the gaming machine LB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LB2 or LB3, when the determination result corresponds to the second privilege game with a low degree of advantage, a new determination can be executed in the second state. Since it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the period until the game becomes longer tends to be longer, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine LB4, the second privilege based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition that can be established between at least the first determination result and the execution of the second privilege game. A gaming machine LB5 characterized by being configured to be capable of suppressing the execution of a game.
According to the gaming machine LB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LB4, when the first determination result is obtained, the period until a new determination can be executed tends to be longer in the second state. , it is possible to increase the possibility that the specific condition is met and the execution of the second privilege game is suppressed before the second privilege game with a low degree of advantage is executed. Therefore, the second state makes it more difficult to execute the second privilege game than the first state, so that the first privilege game with a relatively high degree of advantage is more likely to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine LB5, the first state is a first period predetermined as a period until the second privilege game is executed when the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result. is set, and the second state is a period until the second privilege game is executed when the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result. is a state in which a second period longer than is set, and the specific condition is that the elapsed period after the determination by the determination means is executed is longer than the first period and shorter than the second period A gaming machine LB6 characterized in that it is configured with a condition that is likely to be established when it becomes.
According to the gaming machine LB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LB5, when the first determination result is obtained in the first state, the second privilege game is executed before the specific condition is established, When the first determination result is obtained in the second state, the specific condition is satisfied before the second privilege game is executed and the execution of the second privilege game is suppressed. Essentially, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the second privilege game cannot be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine LB6, the determination means comprises first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the second determination means, and the second A configuration in which a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is indicated as the determination result of the first determination means based on the determination result of the determination means being indicated, regardless of the determination result of the first determination means. and a period from when the determination by the second determination means is executed until the determination result of the second determination means is indicated is set to the specific period.
According to the gaming machine LB7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LB6, in the second state, even if the discrimination by the first discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed. Then, when the specific period elapses, not the first discrimination result but the non-discrimination discrimination result is shown as the discrimination result of the first discriminating means, so that the advantageous second state is obtained without executing the second privilege game with the low advantage degree. can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine LB7, a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information used for determination by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first acquisition condition a second determination information acquisition unit that acquires second determination information used for determination by the second determination unit based on the establishment of a different second acquisition condition, wherein at least the second state is the A gaming machine LB8 characterized by being in a state in which both the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be established.
According to the gaming machine LB8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LB7, when the first determination result is obtained in the second state, the second privilege game is executed without the second determination condition being satisfied. Therefore, in the second state, it is possible to more reliably suppress the execution of the second privilege game with a low degree of advantage.
In any one of the gaming machines LB4 to LB8, the game state setting means can set a first game state having a higher degree of advantage than the specific game state as a game state after the end of the first privilege game, and The first game state is set to the first state while a predetermined first condition is established, and is set to the second state while a second condition different from the first condition is established. A gaming machine LB9 characterized by being in a set gaming state.
According to the gaming machine LB9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines LB4 to LB8, the first state and the second state constitute the first gaming state with a high degree of advantage, but the second state is set. Since it is possible to realize a novel game picture in which the degree of advantage is higher when it is set, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine LB9, the gaming machine LB10 is characterized in that the first gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued until the privilege game is executed.
According to the gaming machine LB10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LB9, the first gaming state with a high degree of advantage continues until the next privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to have a great sense of security against.
<Characteristic LC group>
game state setting means capable of setting a specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; Based on the establishment of a first effect executing means capable of executing the effect and a predetermined second execution condition, the degree of advantage suggested by the first effect is determined as the effect in the specific game state. A gaming machine LC1 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting a high degree of advantage to a player.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.
Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided, and an effect that can suggest to the player the degree of advantage corresponding to each game state can be executed. There are also those that are configured as
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, as long as the same game state continues, the effect level cannot be changed because the degree of advantage is not changed. There was a problem that it would become
On the other hand, in the gaming machine LC1, different degrees of advantage can be suggested to the player depending on whether the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed in a specific game state. In spite of the fact that the game state is the same, the player can be made to recognize it as if it were a different game state, and it is possible to suppress monotony in the presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

The gaming machine LC2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine LC1, one of the first effect and the second effect is executed in one of the specific game states, and then the other can be executed.
According to the gaming machine LC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LC1, it is possible to suggest different degrees of advantage to the player while one specific gaming state continues. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.
In the game machine LC2, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. and a privilege game executing means for executing the game state, wherein the game state setting means can set one of a plurality of game states including at least the specific game state as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. wherein, after one of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the specific game state, the other can be executed without executing the privilege game. Game machine LC3.
According to the gaming machine LC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LC2, it is possible to execute an effect as if the degree of advantage has changed even though the privilege game is not being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game from becoming monotonous while is continuing.

In the gaming machine LC3, the second execution condition is such that after the specific game state is set, the specific determination result is continuously determined over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means. A game machine LC4 characterized in that it is a condition that is established when different determination results are obtained.
According to the gaming machine LC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LC3, the second effect suggesting a high degree of advantage is executed by executing the determination for a specific number of times in a specific game state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.
In the gaming machine LC4, a first state is set based on the setting of the specific game state, and after the specific game state is set, the determination by the determination means is continued for the specific number of times. State setting capable of setting a second state in which the degree of advantage is higher than the first state while maintaining the specific game state when a result of determination different from the specific determination result is obtained. A gaming machine LC5 characterized by comprising means.
According to the game machine LC5, in addition to the effects of the game machine LC4, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make it possible to expect that a specific determination result will not be obtained over a specific number of times of determination in a specific game state. There is

In the gaming machine LC5, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a first privilege game in which the specific game state is set as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed; Among the plurality of at least including a second privilege game that is the privilege game of a type different from the first privilege game and in which the specific game state is set as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed 1, a type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game, and the specific game state after the execution of the first privilege game is completed is the determination means for a first number of times predetermined as the specific number of times; The second state is set by the state setting means when the result of the determination is continuously obtained over the determination of the specific game after the execution of the second privilege game is completed. As for the state, the second state is set by the state setting means when the out-of-range determination result is obtained continuously over the determination by the determination means a second number of times, which is the specific number of times, which is larger than the first number of times. A gaming machine LC6 characterized by having a configuration of
According to the gaming machine LC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LC5, the timing at which the second state is set can be varied according to the type of the privilege game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. has the effect of being able to
The game machine LC6 is provided with an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode that makes it difficult for a player to distinguish between at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game as an effect mode during execution of the privilege game. Characteristic game machine LC7.
According to the gaming machine LC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LC6, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether it is the first privilege game or the second privilege game. , the second state can be expected as the number of consecutive times of the out-of-range judgment results approaches the first number of times.

In the game machine LC6 or LC7, based on the execution of the first number of determinations after the specific gaming state is set, a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being set to the second state is executed. and the suggestive effect is set to a first effect mode suggesting that the second state is not set in the specific game state after the execution of the first privilege game is completed. , suggesting that the first effect mode and the second state are set according to the determination result of the first time in the specific game state after the execution of the first privilege game is completed. A gaming machine LC8 characterized in that it is configured to be set to either a second effect mode to play or a second effect mode.
According to the game machine LC8, in addition to the effects of the game machine LC6 or LC7, when the determination is performed for the first time after the specific game state is set, the suggestive effect can be executed. There is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the second state is set.
<Characteristic LD group>
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of determination conditions, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. and one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage than the first game state as game states after execution of the privilege game is completed. , a first control means capable of executing initial value setting control for setting a predetermined initial value to a counter value of a specific counter used for game control, and a counter value of the specific counter according to a predetermined update rule, and executing a specific privilege game in which the second game state can be set by the game state setting means in the first game state. The initial value setting control can be executed by the first control means when the conditions are satisfied, and the first control means when the conditions for executing the specific privilege game are satisfied in the second game state. A game characterized in that either a first situation in which the initial value setting control is executed by the second control means or a second situation in which the update control is executed by the second control means can be established. Machine LD1.
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined initial value is set for a predetermined counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of times of saving time) at a predetermined opportunity, and update processing is performed until the counter value reaches a specific value. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for a more suitable counter value updating method.
Also, among such conventional gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine that is disadvantageous to the player when the counter value becomes a specific value. More specifically, every time the first game state advantageous to the player and the win are repeated, a predetermined counter update process is executed, and when the counter value reaches a specific value, after the win game ends game state is forcibly set to a second game state with a relatively low degree of advantage. Since the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the advantageous first game state is also fixed, the player can comprehend relatively easily the timing of updating to the specific value (that is, the player is disadvantaged). , there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest in the game.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine LD1, when the specific privilege game is executed in the advantageous second game state, the update control is not necessarily executed according to the predetermined update rule, and the reset to the initial value is performed. Since it is possible to provide a case where the counter value of a specific counter is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the counter value of a specific counter. Therefore, there is an effect that the counter value can be updated more appropriately.
The gaming machine LD1 is provided with third control means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the fact that the counter value of the specific counter is updated to a predetermined specific value and a predetermined determination timing has come. A game machine LD2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine LD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LD1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the specific control will be executed when the predetermined determination timing comes. , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
A gaming machine LD3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine LD2, the specific control is control for setting the first gaming state.
According to the gaming machine LD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LD2, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the first gaming state with a low advantage is set when the predetermined determination timing comes. Even if there is a high possibility that the first game state will be set, the game can be played in anticipation of setting the advantageous second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In any one of the gaming machines LD1 to LD3, at least a first specific privilege game and a second specific privilege game are provided as the specific privilege game, and the first control means, in the second game state When the execution condition of the first specific privilege game is satisfied, the initial value setting control is executed, and the second control means, when the execution condition of the second privilege game is satisfied in the second game state , a gaming machine LD4 characterized by executing the update control.

According to the gaming machine LD4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines LD1 to LD3, the specific privilege game in which the second game state can be similarly set is either the first specific privilege game or the second specific privilege. Since the counter value of the specific counter can be updated to a different value depending on whether it is a game, there is an effect that the counter value of the specific counter can be configured to be difficult for the player to predict.
The gaming machine LD4 comprises a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the condition for executing the privilege game is met when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. The privilege game executing means executes the privilege game when a predetermined specific setting condition is satisfied after the execution condition of the privilege game is satisfied by the specific determination result. can be set, and the first control means can execute the initial value setting control when the game state at the time when the execution of the privilege game is set is the first game state, and the second The control means can execute the update control when the game state at the time when execution of the privilege game is set is the second game state, and executes the first specific privilege game in the second game state. A game machine LD5 characterized in that when a condition is satisfied, the game state can be changed to the first game state before the specific setting condition is satisfied.
According to the gaming machine LD5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LD4, when the execution condition of the first specific privilege game is satisfied in the second game state, the first game is played before setting the execution of the privilege game. By changing the state in advance, there is an effect that the initial value setting control can be reliably executed by the first control means.
In the gaming machine LD5, when a condition for executing the second specific privilege game is satisfied in the second game state, the second game state can be maintained at least until the specific setting condition is satisfied. Game machine LD6 to play.

According to the gaming machine LD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LD5, when the second specific privilege game execution condition is established in the second game state, the second game state is maintained until the privilege game is set to be executed. By doing so, there is an effect that the update control by the second control means can be reliably executed.
In any one of the gaming machines LD4 to LD6, when the execution condition of the first specific privilege game is satisfied in the second game state and the initial value setting control is executed, the initial value setting control is performed at a predetermined timing. The game machine LD7 is characterized by comprising a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the is executed.
According to the gaming machine LD7, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines LD4 to LD6, it is possible to suggest to the player that the initial value setting control has been executed by the suggesting effect, so it is executed at a predetermined timing. There is an effect that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the rendered effect.
<Characteristic LE group>
specific state setting means for setting a specific state in which specific control advantageous to the player is set over a predetermined specific period based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; execution of a specific effect capable of suggesting to the player that the specific control will continue beyond the specific period at least at a predetermined timing different from the determined timing when it is decided to continue A game machine LE1 characterized by comprising: a specific performance executing means for executing the game.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.
In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided, and an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times in which a winning game is set to be executed in a specific game state. Some are set.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may appear that the situation in which the execution of a winning game is set in a specific game state continues beyond the upper limit value, and the effect mode is changed. It may become difficult to set suitably.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine LE1, since the specific effect can be executed at a predetermined timing, there is an effect that a suitable effect mode can be realized.
The game machine LE2 is characterized in that the game machine LE1 is provided with a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect until the specific period ends based on the setting of the specific state.
According to the gaming machine LE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LE1, a common presentation can be executed from when the specific state is set until the specified period elapses, so the presentation mode is preferably set. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine LE2, when it is determined that the specific control continues beyond the specific period, the specific effect executing means actually ends the specific period after the conditions for ending the specific period are met. A game machine LE3 characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific effect during a period until the game machine LE3 is executed.

According to the gaming machine LE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LE2, even if it is determined that the specific control will continue beyond the specific period, the suggestion by the specific effect is performed until the end condition of the specific period is satisfied. Therefore, the player can continue to have an expectation that the specific control will exceed the specific period until the end of the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In any one of the game machines LE1 to LE3, after the specific control continues beyond the specific period, a first effect capable of suggesting whether or not the specific control is terminated is executed at a predetermined opportunity. An effect executing means is provided, and the specific control is terminated based on the establishment of both a first condition and a second condition different from the first condition, and the first effect executing means is provided. is a game machine LE4 characterized in that the first effect can be executed based on the establishment of the first condition as the predetermined trigger.
According to the gaming machine LE4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines LE1 to LE3, every time the first condition is satisfied, the first effect suggests to the player whether or not the specific control is to be continued. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel excited periodically, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
In the game machine LE4, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. and privilege game execution means for executing the first condition, wherein the first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the privilege game is executed while the specific control is set.

According to the gaming machine LE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LE4, after the specific control lasts longer than the specific period, it is determined whether or not the specific control continues by the first effect each time the privilege game is executed. Since the suggestion can be made, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved during execution of the privilege game.
In the gaming machine LE5, the specific state setting means sets a specific game advantageous to the player as a game state after the special game is completed until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times as the special state. A game machine LE6 characterized by being able to set a state in which a state is set.
According to the gaming machine LE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LE5, when the specific state is set, the advantageous specific game state and the privilege game are likely to be repeated until the execution of the privilege game of the specified number of times is completed. Therefore, when the specific state is set, there is an effect that the player can feel great satisfaction and joy.
In the gaming machine LE6, based on the setting of the specific state, a specific initial value corresponding to the specific number of times is set for a specific counter to which a counter value corresponding to the number of executions of the privilege game is set. A gaming machine comprising: initial value setting means; and update means for updating the counter value of the specific counter based on execution of the privilege game after the specific state is set. LE7.

According to the game machine LE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine LE6, there is an effect that the duration of the specific state can be accurately determined using a specific counter.
The gaming machine LE7 is characterized by comprising second initial value setting means for setting the specific initial value for the specific counter based on the establishment of a predetermined initialization condition in the specific state. A game machine LE8.
According to the gaming machine LE8, when a specific initial value is set in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LE7, the privilege game and the specific game state are repeated until the privilege game for the specified number of times is further executed. Since this is an advantageous situation, there is an effect that the player can play the game with a strong expectation that the initialization condition will be satisfied in the specific state.
<Characteristic LF group>
A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect based on establishment of a first execution condition, and a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect based on establishment of a second execution condition. and a performance executing means, wherein, when the first performance and the second performance are executed in duplicate, the performance period of the second performance elapses before the performance period of the first performance. The game machine LF1 is characterized in that the configuration is such that the player is more likely to be advantageous to the game machine LF1 when the game machine LF1 passes first.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.
On the other hand, in the game machine LF1, when the first effect and the second effect are executed in duplicate, the effect period of the first effect ends first, or the effect period of the second effect ends first. Depending on whether the game is played or not, it is possible to realize a novel performance action in which the degree of advantage of the player changes, so that there is an effect that a suitable performance mode can be realized.
A game machine LF2 characterized by being configured such that both the first execution condition and the second execution condition can be satisfied when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the game machine LF1. .

According to the gaming machine LF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LF1, when the specific condition is satisfied, both the first effect and the second effect are executed. A game can be played by paying attention to whether the period passes quickly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the game machine LF1 or LF2, when the first performance and the second performance are executed in duplicate, the other performance is terminated when the performance period of one performance has passed. A gaming machine LF3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine LF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LF1 or LF2, after the duration of one of the presentations has passed and it has become clear whether or not it is likely to be advantageous to the player, the presentation of the other continues for a long time. , there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored.
In the game machine LF3, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. A privilege game execution means to be executed, and as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage than the first privilege game are included. and a type determining means for determining one of the plurality of types, wherein the first effect is an effect suggesting that the first privilege game is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine LF4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines LF1 to LF3, the first effect suggests that a first privilege game with a low degree of advantage is executed. It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the player expect that the performance period of the second performance will pass before the execution of the privilege game is suggested and that the first performance will end. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine LF4, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state as a game state after execution of the first privilege game is completed, and a game state as a game state after execution of the second privilege game is completed. a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a higher degree of advantage than the first game state, wherein the specific condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in the second game state, The game machine LF5 is characterized in that the performance is a performance suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is different from the specific determination result.
According to the gaming machine LF5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine LF4, the second production suggests that the privilege game is not executed rather than the first production suggests the execution of the first privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes you expect to be played.
<Characteristic group of 5080 series>
<Characteristic MA group: Short time stock>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for the first specific game is displayed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed A first setting means capable of setting settings, a second setting means capable of setting a second specific setting without executing the specific game based on the determination result by the determining means, and the first specific setting being set. a storage means capable of storing information for setting the second specific setting by the second setting means during the period in which the setting is performed, and based on the information stored in the storage means, setting and privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the stored information on the basis of establishment of a condition.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were.
In addition, when the opportunity (execution of the privilege game) to set the advantageous state during the advantageous state is established, the advantageous state being set is cleared, and after the privilege game ends, the advantageous state for the period corresponding to the privilege game Since it is only set, there is a problem that the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues is fixed, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.
This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by making the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues to be unfixed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game.
According to the game machine MA1, information for setting the second specific setting is stored in a state where the first specific setting is set, and the second specific setting can be set based on the establishment of the setting condition. , the setting of the second specific setting can be delayed until the setting condition is satisfied, the period in which the first specific setting is set can be made longer, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is

In the game machine MA1, the first specific setting is canceled based on the satisfaction of the end condition, and the setting condition is set after the end condition of the set first specific setting is satisfied. A gaming machine MA2 characterized in that it can be established.
According to the gaming machine MA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MA1, the setting condition is satisfied while the first specific setting is set, and the end condition of the first specific setting that has been set is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the stored information is digested before.
The gaming machine MA1 or MA2 has suggesting means capable of suggesting information corresponding to a period until the end condition is satisfied when the first specific setting is set, and is stored in the storage means. and variable means capable of varying the information suggested by the suggesting means in correspondence with the information provided.
According to the gaming machine MA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MA1 or MA2, the information corresponding to the period until the end condition is satisfied is varied by the information stored in the storage means, so that the suggesting means suggests. The information enables the information stored in the storage means to be recognized, and the game is played with the expectation that the information is stored during the period when the first specific setting is set. has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic MB group: stock collective notification>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for the first specific game is displayed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed a first setting means capable of setting settings until an end condition is satisfied; a second setting means capable of setting a second specific setting without executing the specific game based on the result of determination by the determining means; storage means capable of storing information during a period in which the first specific setting is set; and information stored multiple times when the information is stored multiple times in the storage means and suggesting means capable of executing a suggesting mode corresponding to the game machine MB1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were.
In addition, when the opportunity (execution of the privilege game) to set the advantageous state during the advantageous state is established, the advantageous state being set is cleared, and after the privilege game ends, the advantageous state for the period corresponding to the privilege game Since it is only set, there is a problem that the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues is fixed, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.
This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by making the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues to be unfixed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game.

According to the gaming machine MB1, the information corresponding to the second specific setting is stored in the storage means a plurality of times while the first specific setting is set, and the suggestion mode corresponding to the information stored a plurality of times is executed. Therefore, since the information can be expected to be stored even during the period when the first specific setting is set, and the number of times the information is stored can be easily identified by the suggestion mode, the interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine MB1, the information stored in the storage means is set corresponding to the period until the end condition is satisfied when the second specific setting is set, and the suggesting mode is A game machine MB2 characterized in that it can be set in a mode corresponding to the period of the information stored in the storage means a plurality of times.
According to the gaming machine MB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MB1, when a state is reached in which the second specific setting can be set a plurality of times, the final Since the period until the second specific setting is set can be identified by the suggesting mode, there is an effect that the game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner.
In the game machine MB1 or MB2, the information corresponds to the period until the end condition is satisfied, and when the information corresponding to the second specific setting that has not been set is stored in the storage means, The game machine MB3 is characterized in that information obtained by adding a period until a condition for ending a second specific setting to be stored next is satisfied is stored in a storage means.

According to the gaming machine MB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MB1 or MB2, the period until the end condition in the second specific setting is satisfied extends over the period in which the second specific setting is set a plurality of times. Since the added information is stored, the period until the end condition corresponding to one specific setting is established can be made longer than the period until the condition is established, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
<Characteristic MC group: switching of time saving stock>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for is displayed, and a normal game state when a predetermined condition is established after the specific game is executed. to a second game state different from the normal game state without executing the specific game based on the determination result by the first game state transition means and the determination means. and a second game state transition means capable of shifting to the second game state without transitioning to the second game state based on the determination result by the determination means during the period in which the first game state is set. Storage means for storing information for shifting to the second game state, and transition to the second game state in accordance with the information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a set condition. and a possible specific transition means, wherein the game machine does not store the information based on the fact that the special determination result is determined during the period in which the second game state is set. Characteristic game machine MC1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were.
In addition, when the opportunity (execution of the privilege game) to set the advantageous state during the advantageous state is established, the advantageous state being set is cleared, and after the privilege game ends, the advantageous state for the period corresponding to the privilege game Since it is only set, there is a problem that the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues is fixed, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by making the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues to be unfixed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine MC1, when the first game state is set, information is stored based on the determination result, and the setting of the second game state is suspended until the setting condition is satisfied. When the game state is set, the information for shifting to the second game state is not stored even if a special determination result is obtained, so that the information is stored according to the set game state. There is an effect that the value of the game can be changed and the interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine MC1, the setting condition is satisfied after the end condition for ending the first game state is satisfied.
According to the gaming machine MC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MC1, it is possible to continue the first gaming state until the end condition is satisfied, and then shift to the second gaming state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the length becomes short.

In the game machine MC1 or MC2, when the information is stored in the storage means and the information is stored next, the information stored previously is held and stored next. The game machine MC3 is characterized in that the information to be played is stored.
According to the gaming machine MC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MC1 or MC2, a plurality of pieces of information can be stored respectively. can be stored, and there is an effect that it is possible to increase the expectation that it will be determined as a special determination result during the first game state.
<Feature MD Group: Stock Notification Control>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for the first specific game is displayed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed A first setting means capable of setting a setting, and a second setting capable of setting a second specific setting without executing the specific game based on establishment of a specific condition that can be established based on the determination result of the determining means. a suggesting means capable of suggesting suggestive information corresponding to a period until the specific setting is canceled when the first specific setting is set; and when the first specific setting is set. update means capable of updating the period until the second specific setting is canceled based on the satisfaction of the update condition based on the satisfaction of the specific condition during the period in which the suggestion When the period is updated by the updating means, the means corresponds to a first state suggesting the suggestive information corresponding to the period updated by the updating means and the period before being updated by the updating means. A game machine MD1 characterized by being capable of setting a second state of suggesting suggestive information.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were.

In addition, when the opportunity (execution of the privilege game) to set the advantageous state during the advantageous state is established, the advantageous state being set is cleared, and after the privilege game ends, the advantageous state for the period corresponding to the privilege game Since it is only set, there is a problem that the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues is fixed, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.
This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by making the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues to be unfixed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine MD1, even if the period is updated due to the establishment of the specific condition while the first specific setting is set, the suggestion corresponding to the period before the update is made, so that the second It is possible to make it seem as if the set first specific setting is continuously executed instead of the complicated information that the second specific setting is newly set, and the effect of improving the amusement of the game. There is
In the game machine MD1, the update means sets a period until the second specific setting, which is set based on the establishment of the specific condition, is canceled when the first specific setting is set. The game machine MD2 is characterized in that the period is updated to a period corresponding to the second specific setting to be set next when the period is longer than the period until the first specific setting is canceled.

According to the gaming machine MD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MD1, when the period until the second specific setting is canceled becomes longer, the period is updated, thereby satisfying the specific condition for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress defects that disadvantage the player.
In the gaming machine MD1 or MD2, when the specific condition is satisfied, a second specific setting is set which is canceled in a period shorter than the period until the set first specific setting is canceled. A game machine MD3 characterized in that if there is, the establishment of the specific condition is invalidated.
According to the game machine MD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine MD1 or MD2, there is an effect that a specific condition is satisfied and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.
<Feature ME group: time-saving pattern during constant change>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for is displayed, a first game state in which a first setting is made, and a second setting different from the first setting; a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including a second game state in which a game state is set; , the specific setting means capable of setting the specific setting without executing the specific game, and the specific setting means based on the fact that the special determination result is determined during the period in which the first game state is set storage means for storing information for setting settings; post-setting means capable of setting the specific settings corresponding to the information stored in the storage means based on establishment of a setting condition; a regulating means capable of regulating the setting of the specific setting when the second game state is set, wherein the second game state is set when the first game state is set. It is possible to set based on the establishment of the transition condition in the state in which the special determination result is not determined during the period, and the specific setting is performed in the state in which the first game state is set. The game machine ME1 is characterized in that, when set, it is possible to shift to the second game state after a specific condition different from the transition condition is established.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which one of a plurality of game states is set, including an advantageous state in which a privilege game is executed, and the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: JP-A 2012-217766). However, since the game state set after the end of the privilege game is configured to always shift to a different game state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, a game configured to be able to set a plurality of game states Even if it is a machine, there is a possibility that the content of the transition of the game state becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game machine.
This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and when a specific game state is set, even if a specific end condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to a different game state. To provide a game machine capable of making the content of transition of a game state rich in variation, preventing a player from quickly getting bored with the game, and improving the player's interest in the game by configuring the game machine. The purpose is to
According to the gaming machine ME1, if the specific setting is set before the transition condition is satisfied, the transition condition is changed, so that the condition expected by the player can be changed to improve the interest of the game. effective.
The game machine ME2 is characterized in that in the game machine ME1, the transition condition can be established based on a predetermined determination result determined by the determination means.

According to the game machine ME2, in addition to the effect of the game machine ME1, the predetermined determination result is obtained before the special determination result is determined, so that the state can be shifted to the second game state. There is an effect that it is possible to heighten expectations for the discrimination result.
A gaming machine ME3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ME1 or ME2, the specific condition is established based on execution of determination a predetermined number of times.
According to the game machine ME3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ME1, since the specific condition is not established until the determination is performed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to restrict the setting of the second game state for a certain period of time or longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the period in which the second game state is set can be shortened.
<Feature MF group: change pattern table switching>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and the discrimination executed by the dynamic display means dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of information; and specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. , a first setting means capable of setting a first specific setting when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed; A second setting means capable of setting a second specific setting without executing the specific game when the special determination result is different from the determination result, and a second setting means set when the first specific setting is set 1 information is updated each time the dynamic display of the identification information ends, and based on the update to predetermined first information, a first release means capable of canceling the first specific setting; The second information set when the second specific setting is set is updated each time the dynamic display of the identification information ends, and based on the update to the predetermined second information, the second information and a second canceling means capable of canceling the specific setting, wherein the dynamic display mode determining means, when the second information is set, waits until the second information becomes the predetermined second information. A gaming machine MF1 characterized in that a dynamic display mode can be determined based on period information corresponding to a period.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set for a predetermined period in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the privilege game is over (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
In addition, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, by executing a variable effect that can suggest the lottery result of the game lottery for a predetermined period, after the game lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified. During the game, it is common to increase the performance effect by paying attention to the variable performance while expecting winning.
Furthermore, when the game for a predetermined period is executed and the conditions for ending the advantageous state are satisfied, the result of the winning lottery of the game is displayed by using the variable effect, and the effect indicating the end of the advantageous state is also executed. In addition, there is also a game machine configured to set a period longer than the period in which other variable effects are executed. In this case, the timing at which the advantageous state may end is specified based on the number of lotteries executed after the end of the privilege game, and another timing is specified as the execution period of the variable performance corresponding to the timing at which the advantageous state may end. It is common that the variation pattern is determined in advance so that a period longer than the execution period of the variation performance corresponding to is set.
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the variation pattern is defined based on the number of lotteries after the end of the privilege game, if the timing at which the advantageous state ends is uncertain, the advantageous state ends A fluctuation pattern for a long fluctuation period cannot be determined in accordance with possible timing, and the advantageous state ends without reliably informing the player of the end of the advantageous state, and the player's desire to play is lost. There was a risk that it would drop.

This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and even if the timing at which the advantageous state ends is uncertain, a variation pattern with a long variation time is determined according to the timing at which the advantageous state may end. To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player's desire to play from declining and improving the player's interest in a game by configuring the game machine to be able to play.
According to the gaming machine MF1, when the second information is set, the second specific setting is continued by determining the dynamic display mode based on the period information until the predetermined second information is reached. The effect corresponding to the period set by , can be executed by dynamic display of the identification information, and the interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine MF1 has storage means for storing a plurality of groups of dynamic display modes in which a plurality of dynamic display modes can be set, and the dynamic display mode determination means corresponds to the period information. A gaming machine MF2 characterized in that a dynamic display mode can be determined from a group of dynamic display modes.
According to the game machine MF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine MF1, the group of dynamic display modes can be switched according to the period information, so that it is possible to easily switch and determine the dynamic display mode according to the period information. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine MF1 or MF2, when the special determination result is determined while the first specific setting is set, the second specific setting is set to the period information after the first specific setting is canceled. A gaming machine MF3 characterized by being set in a period corresponding to .
<Feature MG group: Time saving stock control>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for the first specific game is displayed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed A first setting means capable of setting settings, and a second specific setting can be set without executing the specific game when the determination result by the determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. a second setting means, and information that allows the second setting means to set the specific setting based on the determination of the special determination result during the period in which the first specific setting is set; A storage means capable of storing information, and based on the information stored in the storage means, it is possible to set the specific setting corresponding to the stored information based on establishment of a setting condition. and a second specific setting corresponding to the newly determined special determination result based on the fact that the special determination result is determined when the second specific setting is set. A game machine MG1 characterized in that
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were.

In addition, when the opportunity (execution of the privilege game) to set the advantageous state during the advantageous state is established, the advantageous state being set is cleared, and after the privilege game ends, the advantageous state for the period corresponding to the privilege game Since it is only set, there is a problem that the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues is fixed, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.
This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by making the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues to be unfixed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. To provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine MG1, when the first specific setting is set, the setting of the second specific setting is suspended and stored due to the special determination result, while the second specific setting is stored. is set, the second specific setting is newly set at the timing of the special determination result. There is an effect that the game can be played with interest in the number of times the special determination result is obtained, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In the game machine MG1, the setting condition can be established based on the establishment of a cancellation condition for canceling the first specific setting.

According to the game machine MG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine MG1, the second specific setting can be set after the first specific setting is set up to the cancellation condition, so the period during which the first specific setting is set can be set. There is an effect that it can be made longer.
In the gaming machine MG2, the canceling condition can be established based on a predetermined discrimination result determined by the determining means.
According to the game machine MG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine MG1 or MG2, after the predetermined determination result is determined, the second specific setting corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is set. can be used as a trigger for setting the second specific setting, and there is an effect that a predetermined determination result can be expected.
<Feature MH group: Multiple time-saving winning control>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for is displayed, in a gaming machine having a specific setting when a predetermined condition is established after the specific game is executed. A first setting means that can be set, and a second setting that can set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the determination result by the determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. and storing information that allows the second setting means to set the specific setting based on the determination of the special determination result during the period in which the specific setting is set. and a third setting means capable of setting the specific setting corresponding to the stored information based on the information stored in the storage means, based on the establishment of the setting condition. and when a plurality of pieces of information are stored in the storage means until the setting condition is established, a second specific setting based on information corresponding to the specific condition among the plurality of pieces of information is set. A game machine MH1 characterized in that

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were.
In addition, when the opportunity (execution of the privilege game) to set the advantageous state during the advantageous state is established, the advantageous state being set is cleared, and after the privilege game ends, the advantageous state for the period corresponding to the privilege game Since it is only set, there is a problem that the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues is fixed, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.
This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and while making the length of the period in which the advantageous state continues unfixed, by suppressing excessive continuation, the player can enjoy the game. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by suppressing early boredom.
According to the game machine MH1, when a plurality of pieces of information are stored in the storage means during the period in which the first specific setting is set, the specific setting is set corresponding to the information corresponding to the specific condition. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific setting is excessively set.

In the game machine MH1, the setting condition can be set when a cancellation condition for canceling the first specific setting is satisfied.
According to the game machine MH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine MH1, the second specific setting can be set after the first specific setting is set up to the release condition, so the period during which the first specific setting is set can be set. There is an effect that it can be made longer.
In the gaming machine MH1 or MH2, the second information set when the second specific setting is set is updated each time the dynamic display of the identification information is finished, and is updated to predetermined second information. A gaming machine MH3, further comprising a second releasing means capable of releasing the second specific setting according to the above, and wherein different information can be set as the second information to be set.
According to the game machine MH3, in addition to the effect of the game machine MH1 or MH2, the period during which the second specific setting is set can be set at random, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic MI group>
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first position, , a first control based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a second control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first control, at least and control setting means for setting one control out of a plurality of controls including the second control to the first control based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the state in which the second control is set switching means capable of switching, wherein in a specific game state, a first situation and a second situation in which the degree of advantage is higher when the specific condition is established than in the first situation; A gaming machine MI1 characterized by a configuration in which
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which it is possible to set for a predetermined period of time an advantageous state in which a privilege game is executed, and after the privilege game ends, a lottery for winning or failing the game is likely to be executed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). However, in the event that a new win is won in a state in which an advantageous state for a predetermined period is set, the privilege to be granted is the same regardless of the timing of winning as long as the advantageous state is in effect. The game becomes monotonous in that the player cannot be interested in the timing of winning, and there is a risk that the player will soon become bored with the game.
This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and by creating a situation where it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the event of winning in the state where the same advantageous state is set, To provide a game machine capable of making a player interested in the timing of winning and improving the player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine MI1, the advantage when the second control is switched to the first control depending on whether the game state is the specific game state of the first situation or the specific game state of the second situation. Since the degree is variable, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the second situation exists in a specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine MI1, a first game for setting a first game state having a higher degree of advantage than the specific game state based on the establishment of the specific condition at least in the specific game state of the second situation. A game machine MI2 characterized by comprising state setting means.
According to the gaming machine MI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MI1, when the specific condition is established in the specific gaming state of the second situation, the first gaming state with a high degree of advantage is set, so the second situation is achieved. A game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific condition will be established while it is. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the game machine MI1 or MI2, a second game state having a lower advantage than the specific game state is selected based on the establishment of the specific condition at least in the specific game state of the first situation. A game machine MI3, characterized by comprising second game state setting means for setting.
According to the gaming machine MI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MI1 or MI2, when the specific condition is established in the specific game state of the first situation, the second game state with a low degree of advantage is set. The game can be played with a strong expectation that the specific condition will not be established while the situation is. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines MI1 to MI3, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a player when the determination result of the determination means becomes a predetermined first determination result. and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the game, wherein the second situation is based on a second determination result different from the first determination result in the first situation The gaming machine MI4 is characterized in that it is a situation that can be established by
According to the game machine MI4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines MI1 to MI3, a novel game feature is realized that makes one expect the second determination result before the specific condition is established in the first situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the game machine MI4, the control setting means can set the second control based on the determination result of the determining means being the second determination result in a state where the first control is set. A gaming machine MI5 characterized by:
According to the game machine MI5, in addition to the effect of the game machine MI4, there is an effect that the second determination result can be expected in the state where the first control is set.

In a game machine MI5, when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result in a state where the second control is set, the redundant setting of the second control is avoided. When the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result in a state in which the avoidance means and the second control are set, the specific information indicating that the second determination result is obtained is provided. and storage means capable of storing data until a specific condition is satisfied, wherein the first situation is a situation in which the specific information is not stored in the storage means, and the second situation is a situation in which the storage means does not store the specific information. A game machine MI6, wherein the specific information is stored.
According to the gaming machine MI6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MI5, it is possible to play a game in a specific game state with the goal of storing the specific information in the storage means. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine MI6, the control setting means can set the second control based on the establishment of the specific condition in a state in which the specific information is stored in the storage means. A game machine MI7.
According to the game machine MI7, in addition to the effects of the game machine MI6, if the specific information is stored in the storage means, even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state and the control is switched to the first control. Since the second control is immediately set, there is an effect that the second control can be maintained even after the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine MI7, the state after the second control is set based on the establishment of the specific condition while the specific information is stored in the storage means is the state before the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine MI8 characterized by a configuration in which the specific condition is less likely to be established than above.
According to the game machine MI8, in addition to the effects of the game machine MI7, when the second control is set based on the establishment of the specific condition, the second control is continued for a long time in order to form a state in which the specific condition is difficult to be established. An easy and advantageous condition can be formed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic MJ group>
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. one of a plurality of game execution means, at least a first control based on the establishment of a first set condition, and a second control in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be executed than the first control; a first control setting means for setting control; a third control that can be executed in parallel with the control set by the first state setting means based on the establishment of a second setting condition; setting one of a plurality of controls including at least a fourth control that is control that facilitates execution of the determination by the determination means and that can be executed in parallel with the control set by the first state setting means A predetermined specific condition in a first game state in which the second control is set by the second control setting means and at least the first control setting means and the fourth control is set by the second control setting means a switching means for switching the second control to the first control based on establishment of the game machine MJ1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which it is possible to set for a predetermined period of time an advantageous state in which a privilege game is executed, and after the privilege game ends, a lottery for winning or failing the game is likely to be executed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). However, when the advantageous state continues for a predetermined period and the termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, so that the content of the state transition becomes monotonous and the player may become bored with the game. rice field.

This was done in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and by creating a situation where it is possible to change the degree of advantage in the event of a winning win in a state where an advantageous state is set, To provide a game machine capable of making a player interested in the timing of playing and improving the player's interest in the game.
According to the game machine MJ1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state in which both the second control and the fourth control are set, only the second control is changed to the first control while maintaining the fourth control. Since it is possible to realize a novel control that can be switched to , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine MJ1 is characterized in that, when the switching means switches to the first control in the first game state, a state having a higher degree of advantage than the first game state is formed. Machine MJ2.
According to the game machine MJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine MJ1, it is possible to realize a novel control in which the degree of advantage is increased even though the control is switched to the control in which the determination by the determination means is difficult to execute. , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine MJ1 or MJ2 is provided with a second switching means for switching the fourth control to the third control based on establishment of a second specific condition different from the specific condition in the first game state. Characteristic game machine MJ3.
According to the gaming machine MJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MJ1 or MJ2, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the control is switched to the first control while maintaining the fourth control, while when the second specific condition is satisfied Since it is possible to realize extremely special and novel control in which the second control is maintained while switching to the third control, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.
In any one of the game machines MJ1 to MJ3, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball more than the first position. A variable means that can be varied between a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, a first determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and a determination result of the first determination means. is a predetermined first determination result, and the variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern, and the variable game execution means As types of variable games, a first variable game in which the variable means is varied in a first variable pattern, and a second variable game in which the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern a second variable game in which the variable means is varied in a variable pattern; A game machine characterized by either control for increasing the probability of a determination result of 1 or control for making the second variable game more likely to be determined by the type determining means than the first control. MJ4.
According to the gaming machine MJ4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines MJ1 to MJ3, in the second control, the probability that the variable game is executed is higher than in the first control, or the ball is shifted to the entering means. Since the variable game of the type in which it is easy to enter the ball can be easily executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved when the second control is set.

In the game machine MJ4, the second control is a control in which the probability of the first determination result is higher than that of the first control, and the fourth control is performed by the type determining means than the third control. The game machine MJ5 is characterized in that the second variable game is controlled to be determined easily.
According to the gaming machine MJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MJ4, when the switching means switches to the first control, the first determination result is obtained while maintaining the control that facilitates determination of the second variable game. Since it is possible to realize extremely special and innovative control in which the probability is lowered, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.
In the gaming machine MJ5, the second control is switched to the first control, and the fourth control is switched to the third control based on the establishment of a third specific condition different from the specific condition at least in the first gaming state. a third switching means for switching to control; and a fourth specific condition different from the specific condition and the third specific condition being satisfied in the second game state set to the first control and the fourth control. and fourth switching means for switching the fourth control to the third control, wherein the third specific condition is a condition that is more likely to be satisfied than the fourth specific condition.
According to the game machine MJ6, in addition to the effects of the game machine MJ5, the second game state can shift to a disadvantageous state set in the first control and the third control rather than the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one expect that the specific condition is established in the first game state.

In the gaming machine MJ6, when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied at the time when the third specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the second game state can be set after switching by the third switching means. A game machine MJ7 characterized by comprising possible game state setting means.
According to the game machine MJ7, in addition to the effect of the game machine MJ6, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect that the third specific condition will be satisfied after the predetermined setting condition is satisfied in the first game state.
In the gaming machine MJ7, the second control setting means, when the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result different from the specific determination result in the state where the third control is set, , the fourth control can be set, and the predetermined setting condition is a condition that is satisfied when the first determination result is obtained before the third specific condition is satisfied in the first game state A gaming machine MJ8 characterized by:
According to the game machine MJ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine MJ7, the player is informed that the determination result of the determination means becomes the first determination result before the third specific condition is satisfied in the first game state. Since it is possible to realize an extremely special and novel game property that is expected, there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic MK group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for is displayed, and execution of an effect capable of executing a first effect capable of suggesting that the specific determination result will be obtained. means, effect mode determination means capable of determining the effect mode of the first effect executed by the effect execution means, and first specific setting when a predetermined condition is established after the specific game is executed. and a second setting means capable of setting a second specific setting without executing the specific game based on the determination result by the determining means, and the first specific setting is set. storage means capable of storing information that allows the second setting means to set the second specific setting during a period in which the second setting means is configured to store the first specific setting After the setting is completed, the second specific setting corresponding to the information stored in the storage means can be set, and the effect mode determination means determines the performance mode based on the information stored in the storage means. The game machine MK1 is characterized in that it is possible to determine the effect mode of the first effect.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
In addition, there is known a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the lottery result of a game is configured to be executable, and the player is provided with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the player wins a prize based on the content of the variable performance to be executed. there is However, in the conventional gaming machine, although it is possible for the player to predict the result of the lottery based on the content of the variable performance, the performance mode of the variable performance is not changed based on information other than the presence or absence of winning. In the case of a gaming machine configured to be able to change game content depending on factors other than the presence or absence of winning, there is a risk that the player will lose interest in the content of the variable presentation.
In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, by configuring it so that benefits with different degrees of advantage can be set as the content of the benefits that are granted when winning a prize, Also, a configuration has been proposed to make the player interested. However, the same effect is executed as a variable effect that can suggest that the lottery result is a win, regardless of the content of the benefits to be granted and whether or not an advantageous state is set at the time of winning. In spite of the fact that the player is forced to play a game disadvantageous to the player due to the winning, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced because the variable performance for congratulating the winning is executed.

This is done in order to solve the problems exemplified above, etc., and by configuring it so that the content of the variable production can be determined based on the content of the privilege given when winning and the game situation, To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine MK1, since the effect mode of the first effect for indicating a specific determination result can be determined based on the information stored in the storage means, the same specific game is executed. Even if it is performed, it is possible to execute the first effect in a different effect mode. Therefore, by grasping the effect mode of the first effect, it is possible to grasp not only the contents of the specific game but also the information stored in the storage means, so that the effect that the player is interested in can be executed. This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.
The gaming machine MK2 is characterized in that the gaming machine MK1 has an erasing means capable of erasing the information stored in the storage means when the specific game execution means executes the specific game.
According to the gaming machine MK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MK1, the information stored in the storage means is erased when the specific game is executed, so that the first specific setting is set. It is possible for the player to predict the content of the specific game and the content of the information that will be erased by grasping the effect mode of the first effect executed by pressing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the specific game to be executed based on the effect mode of the first effect to be executed, or to expect the specific game not to be executed, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine MK2, the performance mode determination means is a first performance mode for indicating that the first performance is advantageous to the player when the information stored in the storage means is in the first state. and a second effect mode for indicating that the player is in a disadvantageous situation when the game is in a second state different from the first state.
According to the gaming machine MK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MK2, when the first presentation is executed in the first presentation mode, the first presentation is performed while making the player expect that the specific game will be played. When the first effect is executed in the second effect mode, the first effect can be executed while making the player expect that the specific game will not be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.
<Characteristic ML group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for is displayed, a first effect capable of suggesting that the specific determination result will be obtained, and the specific determination A performance executing means capable of executing a second performance capable of suggesting that a second determination result different from the result is obtained, and a first specific setting when a predetermined condition is established after the specific game is executed. and a second setting means capable of setting a second specific setting without executing the specific game based on the result of determination by the determining means being the second determination result. and storage means capable of storing information that enables the setting of the second specific setting by the second setting means during the period in which the first specific setting is set, The second setting means is capable of setting the second specific setting corresponding to the information stored in the storage means after the first specific setting is completed, and the effect execution means is capable of determining by the determining means. Based on the result, a first specific effect of executing the second effect after executing the first effect, and a second specific effect of executing the first effect after executing the second effect. A gaming machine ML1 characterized by being executable.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

In such a conventional type game machine, in the case of winning, a first privilege that sets an advantageous state after the privilege game ends, or a second privilege that does not set an advantageous state after the privilege game ends. By doing so, a configuration has been proposed that makes the player interested not only in the prize winning but also in the content of the privilege to be given.
Furthermore, there is a configuration that allows execution of a variable performance that can suggest the result of the lottery of the game, and provides the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not there will be a winning by the executed variable performance and the content of the privilege to be given. Are known. However, in the conventional gaming machine, since it is possible to set an advantageous state after the end of the privilege game only when a win is won, the presence or absence of a win and the details of the privilege to be given are determined by the variable effect. Even if the player is configured to be predictable, when it is notified that the player has not won, regardless of the content of the variable performance to be executed, it is decided that the privilege is not given, so the performance effect is reduced. There was a problem that the
It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in the game of the player by enhancing the effect of the variable effect that is executed. and
According to the game machine ML1, it is possible to execute a specific effect in which the order of execution of the first effect and the second effect is switched based on the determination result of the determining means, so that the effect of the side to be executed earlier can be used later. It is possible to prevent the result of the performance that can be executed from being grasped in advance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the performance to be executed, and to enhance the performance effect of the variable performance to be executed, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. has the effect of

In the game machine ML1, the game machine is arranged so that it is easier to execute the second specific effect when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result than when the determination result is the second determination result. A game machine ML2 characterized in that it is configured as follows.
According to the gaming machine ML2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ML1, it is possible to easily inform the determination result by the determination means in the second half of the performance to be executed, so that the player can continue to respond to the performance to be executed. can arouse interest. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved by enhancing the performance effect of the variable performance that is executed.
In the gaming machine ML1 or ML2, the gaming machine is configured to be able to provide the same advantageous state in a period in which the first specific setting is set and a period in which the second specific setting is set. When the specific determination result is that the first specific setting is set after the end of the specific game, the effect executing means performs a combination of the first effect and the second effect. The game machine ML3 is characterized by being capable of executing a third specific effect in which at least a part of the effect period overlaps.
According to the game machine ML3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ML1 or ML2, when the third specific effect is executed, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that any privilege will be given, so the effect of the game machine ML3 can be obtained. has the effect of increasing

<Characteristic MM group>
Acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information, information storage means storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means, and discrimination capable of executing discrimination based on the discrimination information stored in the information storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on display means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result displayed on the display means. and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the game is played, based on the determination information stored in the information storage means before the determination is performed by the determination means. pre-determining means capable of executing determination by means of pre-determining means; pre-determination executing means capable of executing pre-determination based on the result of pre-determination by the pre-determining means; A first setting means capable of setting a first specific setting when a condition is satisfied, and a second setting means capable of setting a second specific setting without executing the specific game based on the determination result of the determining means. setting means; storage means capable of storing information that allows the second setting means to set the second specific setting during the period in which the first specific setting is set; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the stored information based on the information stored in the storage means and based on the establishment of a set condition; and a suggestive effect corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. and a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a specific A game machine MM1 characterized by executing a suggestive effect.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, lottery information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and the acquired lottery information is stored up to a predetermined number. When a lottery condition is satisfied, a lottery is drawn using stored lottery information, the lottery result is stop-displayed, and a privilege game is played when the stop-displayed lottery result is a win. A configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
Furthermore, by pre-determining the stored lottery information before it is used in the winning lottery and executing a suggestive performance capable of suggesting the result of the preliminary determination, the execution period of the performance showing the degree of expectation of winning can be shortened. A configuration that enhances the performance effect by lengthening it has been proposed. However, in the conventional gaming machine, since only the degree of expectation of winning is notified to the player by the suggestive effect, for example, as a result of the lottery based on the lottery information, a privilege that is advantageous to the player due to a lottery result other than winning is obtained. , there is a risk that the player's interest in the effect content of the suggestive effect may decrease.
It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, etc., and to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player in the game by enhancing the performance effect of the performance that is executed. do.

According to the game machine MM1, since the specific suggestive performance can be executed by associating the preliminary performance with the suggestive performance, the specific suggestive performance and the preliminary performance can be notified in relation to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved. have the effect of improving
In the game machine MM1, the second setting means can set the second specific setting based on the information stored in the storage means when the first specific setting is canceled. A game machine MM2 characterized in that it is a game machine MM2.
According to the game machine MM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine MM1, the second specific setting is set following the first specific setting, so it seems as if the first specific setting is continuously set for a long time. There is an effect that it can be done easily.
In the game machine MM1 or MM2, the game machine MM3 is characterized in that the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the first specific setting is cancelled.

According to the game machine MM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine MM1 or MM2, when the first specific setting is canceled, the suggestive effect corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is executed. There is an effect that the information of the second specific setting to be set can be notified and the interest in the game can be improved.
<Characteristic MN group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when identification information for the first specific game is displayed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed a first setting means capable of setting a setting; and when the first specific setting is set, the determining means determines a special determination result different from the specific determination result for a first number of times. The apparatus has first canceling means capable of canceling the first specific setting, and effect execution means capable of executing the effect of increasing the first number of times based on establishment of a specific condition. A gaming machine MN1 characterized by:
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there are some that are configured to be able to set an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the privilege game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In addition, since such a game machine is configured so that the advantageous state ends when a predetermined specific end condition is satisfied, the player can easily grasp the timing at which the advantageous state ends. Therefore, as the end of the advantageous state approaches, the player's motivation to play decreases. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play the game.
According to the game machine MN1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the effect is produced in which the first number of times is increased. This has the effect of making the player more interested in not only the specific determination result but also whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the game machine MN1, the specific condition can be established based on the fact that the decision means determines that the second specific setting is set as a second determination result. .
According to the gaming machine MN2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MN1, the determination by the second determination result and the determination means enables the specific condition to be satisfied. Since the state of the game is variable, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine MN1 or MN2, storage means for storing information for setting the second specific setting based on the determination by the determination means as the second determination result; a second setting means capable of setting a second specific setting based on the information contained therein; and a second canceling means for canceling the second specific setting based on the special determination result and the fact that the second specific setting is determined a second number of times. and a game machine MN3.
According to the gaming machine MN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine MN1 or MN2, when the second specific setting is set, the second specific setting is canceled when the special discrimination result is discriminated a second number of times. , it is possible to make the user feel as if the first specific setting has been set again, and it is possible to make the user feel as if the first specific setting has been set for a long time.

In any one of the game machines MN1 to MN3, the effect executing means executes a effect for indicating that the first number of times has increased based on the second number of times corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine MN4 characterized by:
According to the game machine MN4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines MN1 to MN3, the effect is executed based on the second number of times corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. can be identified in association with the second number of times.
In any one of the game machines MN1 to MN4, the second setting means sets the second specific setting based on the information stored in the storage means when the first specific setting is canceled. A gaming machine MN5 characterized in that it is enabled.
According to the game machine MN5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines MN1 to MN4, the second specific setting is made following the first specific setting, so it is as if the first specific setting is continuously set. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier to see.

<5080 Series Feature Group Part 2>
<Characteristic NA Group> Lost Effect After dynamic display of a plurality of symbols for indicating the determination result by the determination means capable of performing determination and the determination result by the determination means, the symbols are combined to indicate the determination result. dynamic display means capable of static display, wherein one symbol among the plurality of symbols is dynamically displayed, and the one symbol is statically displayed to obtain a specific combination. and advantageous dynamic display means capable of displaying symbols in an advantageous state, and symbols other than the one symbol are stopped and displayed so as to be other than the specific combination in the advantageous state. and a first suggestion execution means capable of suggesting that the one symbol is stopped and displayed so as to achieve the specific combination in the advantageous state. 2 suggestion executing means;
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. is executed, and furthermore, when the win type is the advantageous type, an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the end of the privilege game, and when the win type is different from the advantageous type has proposed a configuration in which a disadvantageous game state is set rather than an advantageous state after the end of a privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there has been proposed a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of a lottery for winning a game is executed to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning and to play the game for a long time.
However, in conventional gaming machines, regardless of the set game state or winning type, if a winning win is made, a variable effect is executed that suggests that the expectation of winning is high. For example, even if the winner wins when the advantageous state ends while the advantageous state is set, the player's willingness to play is reduced because the variable performance that congratulates the player is not executed. There was a problem that
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.

According to the gaming machine NA1, by switching the suggestion mode when an advantageous state is set, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for a specific combination, and to improve the interest of the game. has the effect of
The game machine NA1 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. A game machine NA2 characterized in that the first suggestion executing means enables the suggestion to be executed.
According to the gaming machine NA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NA1, in the second gaming state, the suggestion in the first suggestion mode can be executed, so that the player can play the game in the first suggestion mode. There is an effect that the state can be identified and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine NA1 or NA2, the first suggestion executing means can execute a suggestion when a specific setting that is disadvantageous to the player is made when the symbols are displayed in the specific combination. A gaming machine NA3 characterized by:

According to the game machine NA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine NA1 or NA2, the suggestion mode made by the first suggestion execution means is expected to avoid the specific setting that is disadvantageous to the player. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game in combination with the state after the specific combination.
<Modified example of characteristic NA group>
After dynamic display of determining means capable of performing determination and a plurality of patterns for indicating the result of determination by the determining means, motion capable of statically displaying the symbols in combination for indicating the result of determination. In the gaming machine having a target display means, it is possible to dynamically display one symbol among the plurality of symbols and to display the symbols in a specific combination by statically displaying the one symbol. Advantageous dynamic display means capable of bringing about an advantageous state, and a first suggesting mode suggesting an advantage to the player by displaying the specific combination in the case of the advantageous state. A setting means capable of setting a first state and a second state for executing a second suggestive mode that is advantageous to the player by being displayed in a combination different from the specific combination. A gaming machine NAQ1 characterized by:
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. is executed, and furthermore, when the win type is the advantageous type, an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the end of the privilege game, and when the win type is different from the advantageous type has proposed a configuration in which a disadvantageous game state is set rather than an advantageous state after the end of the privilege game (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). Further, there has been proposed a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of the lottery of the game is executed to make the player feel the expectation of winning and to play the game for a long time.
However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the variable performance is executed only for making the player expect that the performance result indicating that the winning lottery is successful is displayed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NAQ1, when the first condition is satisfied, the suggestion mode is switched when the advantageous state is set, thereby reversing the degree of expectation for a specific combination. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
<Characteristic NB group>
It has a display means capable of displaying a performance mode, and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific performance mode is executed on the display means. In the game machine, display changing means capable of changing a display mode displayed on the display means from a first display mode to a plurality of display modes, and display in the first display mode based on establishment of a first condition. a first display mode changing means capable of varying the mode; and when the display mode is changed to a specific display mode among the plurality of display modes, the display mode is changed to the first display mode based on the establishment of the first condition. A game machine NB1 characterized by comprising a restricting means capable of restricting the variation.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. is executed, and furthermore, when the win type is the advantageous type, an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the end of the privilege game, and when the win type is different from the advantageous type has proposed a configuration in which a disadvantageous game state is set rather than an advantageous state after the end of a privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there has been proposed a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of a lottery for winning a game is executed to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning and to play the game for a long time.

However, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered by continuously executing the variable performance of the same performance mode.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NB1, the first display mode is changed to a plurality of display modes, and when the first condition is satisfied, the first display mode is displayed again, while a specific display mode is displayed. Then, even if the first condition is satisfied, the display is not returned to the first display mode, so that the order of the display modes switched from the predetermined display mode to be displayed can be made random, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be improved.
In the gaming machine NB1, the gaming machine NB2 is characterized in that the first display mode and the plurality of display modes are displayed on the back side of the performance modes executed by the display means.

According to the gaming machine NB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NB1, by displaying on the back side of the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the presentation mode from being disturbed and to provide an easy-to-understand game. .
The gaming machine NB1 or NB2 is characterized in that the first condition can be established in a state in which a predetermined display mode, which is one of the plurality of display modes, is displayed. Gaming machine NB3.
According to the gaming machine NB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NB1 or NB2, by displaying a predetermined display mode, it is possible to return to the first display mode, and display with periodicity can be performed. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand.
The game machine NB1 or NB2 has a determination means capable of performing determination, and the presentation mode is a mode for indicating the determination result after dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means. and the first condition can be established based on the fact that the identification information is displayed in a manner for indicating the determination result. Machine NB4.

According to the gaming machine NB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NB1 or NB2, every time the player is notified of the determination result of 1, it is possible to shift to the first display mode, so that the player can be periodically discriminated. There is an effect that the result can be reported.
<Feature NB modification>
In a gaming machine having a first effect mode executing means capable of executing a first effect mode and a second effect mode executing means capable of executing a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, a first condition A game machine NBQ1 characterized by having a synchronous effect execution means capable of executing the first effect mode and the second effect mode as a synchronized effect based on the establishment of the above.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. is executed, and furthermore, when the win type is the advantageous type, an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the end of the privilege game, and when the win type is different from the advantageous type has proposed a configuration in which a disadvantageous game state is set rather than an advantageous state after the end of the privilege game (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). Further, there has been proposed a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of a lottery for winning a game is executed to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning and to play the game for a long time.
However, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered by continuously executing the variable performance of the same performance mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NBQ1, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed in synchronism based on the establishment of the first condition. can be discriminated from the mode in which .
In the gaming machine NBQ1, a determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a specific display for indicating the determination result. and a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information is statically displayed in the first presentation mode, wherein the identification information is dynamically displayed. The second effect mode is determined independently of the first effect mode, and the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine NBQ2 characterized in that it is made executable during a period of time.
According to the game machine NBQ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine NBQ1, the second effect mode can be executed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in the effect mode determined independently from the first effect mode. Therefore, the effects to be executed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed are diversified by the first effect mode based on the determination result and the second effect mode independently determined in combination. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine NBQ1 or NBQ2, the first effect mode includes an effect of dynamically displaying a symbol corresponding to the identification information in a predetermined direction. The gaming machine NBQ3 is characterized in that the direction in which the symbols are dynamically displayed can be varied to produce an effect synchronized with the second effect mode.
According to the gaming machine NBQ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NBQ1 or NBQ2, the establishment of the first condition is notified by varying the dynamic display direction of the symbols in the first production mode so as to be synchronized with the second production mode. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of the dynamic display direction of the symbols being changed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.
<Characteristic NC group>
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means; a first setting means capable of setting a first setting that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed in a manner for indicating the first determination result; and a second setting means capable of executing the second determination. In a game machine having a determining means and a second setting means capable of setting a second setting based on the fact that a second determination result by the second determining means is a specific second determination result, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; and a specific second determination when the second game state is set. a probability setting means capable of setting a high probability of being determined as a result; and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed, wherein the specific effect executing means, when the second game state is set, The gaming machine NC1 is characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific effect based on the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect can be executed during a period until notification of the lottery result in a configuration in which the privilege game is executed (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the presentation tends to be biased toward notifying the result of the lottery, making the game monotonous.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the gaming machine NC1, by performing a specific effect at the timing when the identification information is stopped and displayed, it is possible to predict whether it is based on a specific second determination result or the second game state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In the gaming machine NC1, the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the dynamic display period of the identification information has ended. The gaming machine NC2, wherein the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine NC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NC1, it is possible to execute the specific effect in accordance with the timing when the second game state is set, and the execution of the specific effect results in the second game state. is set, and the game can be continued.
<Characteristic ND group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A performance determining means capable of determining one performance from a plurality of performances and its performance in a game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed. A game machine ND1 characterized by having a suggesting means capable of suggesting information corresponding to an effect that can be determined by the determining means.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Reference: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the game machine ND1, the type of effect determined by the effect determining means can be identified by the content suggested by the suggesting means, and it is possible to easily predict which effect will be determined.
The game machine ND1 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a variable means that can change information corresponding to the performance based on the operation of the operation means, The game machine ND2 is characterized in that when a privilege that is advantageous to a player is likely to be given, the variable means is made to easily change to specific information.
According to the gaming machine ND2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ND1, by operating the operating means, information corresponding to the suggested performance can be changed, and by changing to specific information, Since it can be expected that a privilege will be given, there is an effect that the desire to play the game can be increased by operating the operating means to change the information corresponding to the performance.

In the game machine ND1 or ND2, the suggesting mode suggested by the suggesting means is configured to suggest information corresponding to a predetermined number of effects from the plurality of effects based on setting information. Machine ND3.
According to the gaming machine ND3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ND1 or ND2, information corresponding to a predetermined number of presentations is suggested from a plurality of presentations based on the setting information. can be varied.
A gaming machine ND4 characterized in that in the gaming machine ND2 or ND3, the variable means is capable of varying the information corresponding to the performance a plurality of times based on the number of times the operation means is operated. .
According to the gaming machine ND4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ND2 or ND2, the information can be changed a plurality of times depending on the number of times the operating means is operated, so that the player can operate the operating means a plurality of times. There is an effect that the amusement of the game in which the operating means is operated can be further improved.

In the gaming machines ND1 to ND4, the game machine is characterized in that the types of effects determined by the effect determining means can be increased based on the determination of a specific determination result by the determining means. ND5.
According to the gaming machine ND5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines ND1 to ND4, it is possible to increase the types of presentations determined based on the determination as a specific determination result, thereby increasing the interest of the game. has the effect of being able to improve
<Variation of Characteristic ND Group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; In a game machine having a privilege granting means capable of imparting advantageous privileges to a player when information is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and a performance mode executed by the performance executing means are provided. and a selection means capable of selecting an effect mode that can be determined by the effect mode determining means from among a plurality of effect modes based on establishment of an update condition. and setting means capable of selectably setting a particular combination of performance modes as a performance mode that can be determined by the performance mode determination means based on the establishment of a specific condition. A gaming machine NDQ1 characterized by:
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NDQ1, when a specific condition is established, a specific combination of performance modes can be made selectable. There is an effect that a certain effect can be executed and the interest in the game can be improved.
<Characteristic NE group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; A game machine having a privilege granting means capable of imparting an advantageous privilege to a player when information is displayed, wherein the performance can be executed based on the establishment of a specific condition. execution means; and suggestion means capable of causing the display means to display a suggestion mode capable of suggesting that it is a period in which the specific condition can be established; A gaming machine NE1 characterized by being capable of executing an effect corresponding to a suggested mode.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Reference: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of effects, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of effects. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to continue to enjoy the game while predicting the contents of the performance to be executed, and the desire to play the game is lowered.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NE1, since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the suggestion mode displayed before the specific condition is established, the player expects the details of the effect to be executed before the specific condition is established. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine NE1, one suggested mode is determined from a plurality of suggested modes, and when a specific suggested mode is executed, the above-mentioned The game machine NE2 is characterized in that a specific suggestive mode is changed to a first mode so that an effect advantageous to the player is easily executed.
According to the gaming machine NE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NE1, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the change to the first mode is made even after the specific condition is established by executing the specific suggestion mode, There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
The game machine NE1 or NE2 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition can be established based on the operation of the operation means during the period in which the suggestive mode is displayed. When the operation means is operated during the period in which the second suggestion mode is displayed, the operation means is operated by continuously displaying the second suggestion mode. The game machine NE3 is characterized in that an opportunity is given for fulfilling the specific condition by doing so.
According to the game machine NE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine NE1 or NE2, the operation means is operated by displaying the second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode continues even after the specific condition is satisfied. By displaying the specific conditions continuously in a short period of time, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic NF group>
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a mode for showing the specific determination result on the display means A game machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed, and performing during a period in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed. and an effect mode determining means capable of determining a first effect mode to be executed by the effect executing means and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The game machine NF1 is characterized in that, when a condition obtained by combining the first performance mode and the second performance mode satisfies the first condition, a notification mode that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed. .
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Reference: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, even in the case of executing a plurality of effects, there is a problem that the degree of expectation cannot be varied depending on the types of effects that are executed in duplicate, and the game becomes monotonous.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.

According to the gaming machine NF1, the degree of expectation for the notification mode to be executed can be changed by discriminating the condition combining the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and the game can be played. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of
In the gaming machine NF1, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and it is possible to indicate the discrimination result by combining the symbols. The game machine NF2 is characterized by an effect of continuing a stop display mode in which the symbols are stop-displayed without dynamic display for a certain period of time from a period in which the symbols can be displayed.
According to the gaming machine NF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NF1, the first presentation mode is a presentation in which the symbols are continued in the stop display mode even after the period in which the identification information can be displayed dynamically starts. The effect is that the user can expect that the first rendering mode will be executed from the start of the dynamic display period.
In the gaming machine NF2, the gaming machine NF3 is characterized in that the second effect mode is a combination mode of the symbols displayed in the stop display mode.

According to the game machine NF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine NF2, since the second effect mode is a combination mode of symbols displayed in the stop display mode, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of 1. , there is an effect that the establishment of the first condition can be expected by the symbol combination, and the degree of expectation for the execution of the first presentation mode can be varied.
In the game machine NF3, the first condition is a period in which the first effect mode is executed and a combination of symbols in the second effect mode are set as fulfillment conditions. Machine NF4.
According to the gaming machine NF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NF3, when symbols are displayed in a combination showing the determination result of 1, if the combination of symbols corresponds to the establishment condition of the first condition. , the interest can be focused on the period in which the first presentation mode is executed at the start of the dynamic display of the next identification information, and the interest can be improved by gradually increasing expectations. be.
<Characteristic NG group>
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and an identification pattern displayed corresponding to the storage of the information stored in the storage means. identifying means capable of performing identification based on the information stored in the storage means; and identification information for indicating the results of identification by the identifying means are dynamically displayed. a display means capable of giving a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. and a game machine having a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode based on the display of the identification pattern, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means being a specific performance mode. and a notification executing means capable of executing a notification mode corresponding to the timing changed to NG1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration where the privilege game is executed, when the game ball enters the start hole, an effect for notifying the lottery result is executed, and if the new lottery result cannot be immediately notified, A gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is reserved and a pattern indicating that the drawing is reserved is displayed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there is a problem that the game is monotonous because only a symbol indicating that the game is on hold is displayed.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the gaming machine NG1, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the performance mode executed based on the display of the identification pattern changes to the specific performance mode, and the player is interested in the determination results other than the determination result of the determination means. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved by allowing the game to be played.

In the gaming machine NG1, prior determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means before determination is performed by the determination means, and the effect mode execution means are: , a gaming machine NG2 characterized in that the performance mode is executed based on the determination result by the prior determination means.
According to the game machine NG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine NG1, the performance mode is executed based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to make people interested.
In the game machine NG1 or NG2, the effect mode can be displayed for a period until dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined when the effect mode is executed is started. A gaming machine NG3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine NG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NG1 or NG2, the effect mode is displayed during the period until the corresponding identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to have expectations about the determination result notified of the dynamic display of the identification information that is currently being executed, and that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

<Characteristic NH group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the information is displayed is capable of displaying a plurality of patterns during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. A pattern display means, a pattern determination means capable of determining one of a plurality of patterns displayed by the pattern display means, and an effect corresponding to the pattern determined by the pattern determination means is executed. A game machine NH1 characterized by comprising a performance executing means capable of
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in a period until the lottery result is notified in a configuration in which the privilege game is executed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by executing more diverse effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game.

According to the gaming machine NH1, by executing an effect corresponding to the determined pattern among a plurality of patterns, interest in which pattern is determined can be enhanced, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to
In the game machine NH1, when the plurality of patterns are displayed, a pattern display means capable of displaying one of the plurality of patterns for one pattern, and when the pattern is displayed. and information determining means capable of determining information corresponding to the displayed pattern and the displayed pattern, and the effect execution means determines the information determined by the information determining means. A gaming machine NH2 characterized by being able to execute a corresponding performance.
According to the gaming machine NH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NH1, an effect is executed based on the information corresponding to the combination of the symbols, so that the player is interested in the combination of the symbols. There is an effect that it is possible to predict in advance the performance mode to be executed by pressing.
In the gaming machine NH2, second pattern display means capable of displaying a second pattern different from the above-mentioned pattern, and one second pattern among the plurality of second patterns displayed by the second pattern display means. , the second pattern determined by the second pattern determining means, and the combined effect corresponding to the pattern determined by the pattern determining means. A game machine NH3 characterized by having a composite effect execution means capable of.

According to the game machine NH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine NH2, it is possible to execute a composite effect corresponding to the combination of the pattern and the second pattern, so that it is possible to execute a more varied effect. effective.
<Preliminary features>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode different from the first suggestion mode in a gaming machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed. and the game machine, when the first suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion means, the identification in a mode for indicating the specific determination result When the information is displayed, the first privilege is likely to be given as the privilege, and when the second suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion means, the mode for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine NK1 is characterized in that when the identification information is displayed, the first privilege and the second privilege different from the first privilege are likely to be granted.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in a period until the lottery result is notified in a configuration in which the privilege game is executed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by executing more diverse effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NK1, by making it easier for the player to predict the type of privilege to be given in the state in which the first suggestion mode is suggested and the state in which the second suggestion mode is suggested, the specific determination is performed. There is an effect that the expectation for the result can be varied in a suggestive manner, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine NK1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means. a pre-determination means capable of performing determination on the stored information before the determination is performed by the determination means when the second suggestion mode is A game machine NK2 characterized in that it is possible to suggest when a pre-determining means determines that the information is determined as the specific determination result by the determining means.
According to the gaming machine NK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NK1, it is possible to identify in the second suggesting mode that information to be determined as a specific determination result is stored, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine NK2, the probability that the second privilege is provided when the mode indicating the specific determination result is displayed is set to be different depending on the timing at which the second suggestion mode is suggested. A gaming machine NK3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine NK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NK1 or NK2, the probability that the second privilege is given differs depending on the timing at which the second suggestion mode is suggested. It is also possible to make the player interested in the game, and the interest in the game can be further improved.
In any one of the gaming machines NK1 to NK3, the suggesting means, during a period from when the identification information is dynamically displayed to when it is displayed in a mode for indicating the determination result, changes from the first suggesting mode to the second suggesting mode. 2, the game machine NK4 is characterized by being capable of being variably suggested in two suggestion modes.
According to the gaming machine NK4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines NK1 to NK3, since the mode suggested during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed varies, the identification information indicates the determination result. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved by making the player interested in the content suggested by the timing displayed in the mode.

<Characteristic NI group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A performance determining means capable of determining one performance from a plurality of performances and its performance in a game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed. and a suggesting means capable of suggesting information corresponding to an effect that can be determined by the determining means.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in a period until the lottery result is notified in a configuration in which the privilege game is executed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by executing more diverse effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.

According to the game machine NI1, the type of effect determined by the effect determining means can be identified by the content suggested by the suggesting means, and it is possible to easily predict which effect will be determined.
The gaming machine NI1 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a variable means that can change information corresponding to the performance based on the operation of the operation means. The game machine NI2 is characterized in that when a privilege that is advantageous to the player is likely to be given, the variable means can easily change the specific information.
According to the gaming machine NI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NI1, by operating the operation means, information corresponding to the suggested performance can be changed, and by changing to specific information, Since it can be expected that a privilege will be given, there is an effect that the desire to play the game can be increased by operating the operation means to change the information corresponding to the performance.
In the game machine NI1 or NI2, the suggesting mode suggested by the suggesting means is configured to suggest information corresponding to a predetermined number of effects from the plurality of effects based on setting information. Machine NI3.

According to the game machine NI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine NI1 or NI2, information corresponding to a predetermined number of effects is suggested from a plurality of effects based on the setting information. can be varied.
<Characteristic NJ group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means and a display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a case where the identification information is displayed in a manner for indicating the specific determination result on the display means and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player, the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed. a pre-discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on; a presentation mode execution means capable of executing a presentation mode based on the pre-discrimination result discriminated by the pre-discrimination means; game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the probability of being determined as the specific determination result is set higher than that of the first game state based on the above; and the effect based on the establishment of the transition condition. A game machine NJ1 characterized by comprising setting means capable of executing a specific setting capable of executing a mode.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, information necessary for a lottery is acquired, and based on the acquired information, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. When the result of the lottery is a win, a performance for notifying the result of the lottery is executed in a configuration in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and a new lottery is immediately started. A gaming machine has been proposed in which acquired information is stored when it is not possible (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, if the player can predict that the result of the lottery for which the notification is being executed is a failure, the player becomes bored during the period until the result of the lottery is notified, and the interest in the game decreases. There was a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NJ1, the specific setting is set so that the performance mode is executed when the transition condition is satisfied, so that the performance mode corresponding to the change in the probability of being determined as the specific determination result is executed. By notifying the player of the accurate pre-determination result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine NJ1 has an identification pattern display means capable of displaying an identification pattern corresponding to each of the information stored in the information storage means, and the effect mode execution means displays the timing of the identification pattern display. Based on the above, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the identification pattern as the effect mode, and the specific setting is to execute the setting that the displayed identification pattern is newly displayed. A gaming machine NJ2 characterized by:
According to the game machine NJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine NJ1, the identification pattern that was displayed based on the establishment of the transition condition is set to be newly displayed. There is an effect that the identification pattern can be changed easily and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine NJ2, the specific game is executed before the transition condition is established, and the identification symbols that have been changed based on the start of the specific game are changed to normal identification symbols. A game machine NJ3 characterized in that it is displayed by
According to the gaming machine NJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NJ2, the identification symbols are displayed as normal identification symbols during the specific game, so that the identification symbols previously determined and varied in the second game state are displayed. continues to be displayed even after transitioning to the first game state, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of erroneously announcing a pre-determination result different from the actual determination.
<Characteristic NL group>
Determination means capable of executing determination, display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a mode for indicating the specific determination result of the display means In a gaming machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed, an operation means operable by the player and the operation means operated by the player. an effect executing means capable of executing a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect based on the fact that the first effect is performed; and a mode of the first effect and the second effect based on the determination result of the determining means. A game machine NL1 characterized by comprising a performance determining means capable of determining the aspect of the game.
According to the gaming machine NL1, since the modes of the first effect and the second effect are determined based on the result of determination by the determining means, the operation means is operated to quickly select the combination of the first effect and the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to predict the determination result immediately, and there is an effect that the interest in the game in which the operating means is operated can be improved.

In the game machine NL1, after the first effect and the second effect are executed, the mode of the first effect is newly determined by the effect determining means based on the operation of the operating means. and a variable means capable of varying the aspect of the second effect.
According to the gaming machine NL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NL1, the mode of the first effect and the mode of the second effect being executed can be changed by operating the operating means. There is an effect that it is possible to motivate the operator to operate continuously.
a first effect mode determining means capable of determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode, as the effect mode of the first effect in the gaming machine NL2; and a second effect mode determining means capable of determining one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes including at least a third effect mode and a fourth effect mode as the effect mode of the second effect. , when the first effect mode and the third effect mode are determined, and when the first effect mode and the fourth effect mode are determined, the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. The game machine NL3 is characterized in that it is possible to notify different degrees of expectation to be given.
According to the game machine NL3, in addition to the effects of the game machine NL2, by combining the first production mode and the second production mode, the performance with different expectations for granting of the privilege is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic NO group>
After dynamic display of determining means capable of performing determination and a plurality of patterns for indicating the result of determination by the determining means, motion capable of statically displaying the symbols in combination for indicating the result of determination. In a gaming machine having a target display means, one of the plurality of symbols is dynamically displayed, and the one symbol is stopped and displayed to display symbols in a specific combination. Advantageous dynamic display means capable of making a state and a first suggesting mode suggesting an advantage to the player by displaying the specific combination in the case of the advantageous state. a setting means capable of setting a state and a second state for executing a second suggestive mode suggesting that a combination different from the specific combination is displayed to be advantageous to the player; Gaming machine No. 1 characterized by having:
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. is executed, and furthermore, when the win type is the advantageous type, an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the end of the privilege game, and when the win type is different from the advantageous type has proposed a configuration in which a disadvantageous game state is set rather than an advantageous state after the end of a privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there has been proposed a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of a lottery for winning a game is executed to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning and to play the game for a long time.
However, in conventional gaming machines, regardless of the set game state or winning type, if a winning win is made, a variable effect is executed that suggests that the expectation of winning is high. For example, even if the winner wins when the advantageous state ends while the advantageous state is set, the player's willingness to play is reduced because the variable performance that congratulates the player is not executed. There was a problem that
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.

According to gaming machine No. 1, by switching the suggestion mode when an advantageous state is set, the degree of expectation for a specific combination can be reversed, and the interest in the game can be improved. effective.
A game machine No. 1, characterized by having a variable means capable of displaying a different symbol so as to make a combination different from the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed after the one symbol is stop-displayed. NO2.
According to the gaming machine NO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NO1, after the 1 symbol is stopped and a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the symbols are varied by the variable means so as to form a different combination. is made possible, there is an effect that even after the combination is once displayed in a specific combination and a different combination, the combination can be expected to change, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In game machine NO1 or NO2, setting means capable of setting setting information after the specific combination is achieved, and a state capable of setting a first state or a second state corresponding to the setting information. A gaming machine NO3 characterized by comprising: setting means;

According to the gaming machine NO3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NO1 or NO2, it is possible to switch and set the first state and the second state by forming a specific combination. There is an effect that the interest in the setting information that is set in the case of the game can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.
<Characteristic NP group>
A game having a display means capable of displaying a performance mode and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player after a specific performance mode is executed on the display means. In the machine, a first performance mode execution means capable of executing a first performance mode with a first performance pattern and a second performance mode with a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern can be executed. and an effect pattern varying means capable of varying the effect pattern in which the second effect mode is executed based on the establishment of a specific condition. game machine.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. is executed, and furthermore, when the win type is the advantageous type, an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the end of the privilege game, and when the win type is different from the advantageous type has proposed a configuration in which a disadvantageous game state is set rather than an advantageous state after the end of a privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there has been proposed a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of a lottery for winning a game is executed to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning and to play the game for a long time.
However, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered by continuously executing the variable performance of the same performance mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the gaming machine NP1, since the performance pattern for executing the second performance mode is varied when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress the problem that the same performance pattern is repeated and the player gets tired of the game. There is an effect of being able to improve the interest of
In the game machine NP1, the second effect mode is composed of a background effect executed on the back side of the effect mode executed by the display means.
According to the gaming machine NP2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NP1, by displaying on the back side of the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the presentation mode from being disturbed and to provide an easy-to-understand game. .

In the gaming machine NP1 or NP2, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a benefit granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means discriminated by the discrimination means an effect pattern setting means capable of setting the effect pattern of the first effect mode and the second effect mode to a specific effect pattern based on the pre-discrimination information determined before the execution of A gaming machine NP3 characterized by having:
According to the gaming machine NP3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NP1 or NP2, the combination of the performance patterns of the first performance mode and the second performance mode enables identification of the result of discrimination in advance, and the effect that the interest in the game can be improved. There is
<Characteristic NQ group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode different from the first suggestion mode in a gaming machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed. and the game machine, when the first suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion means, the identification in a mode for indicating the specific determination result When the information is displayed, the first privilege is likely to be given as the privilege, and when the second suggestion mode is executed by the suggestion means, the mode for indicating the specific determination result. The gaming machine NQ1 is characterized in that when the identification information is displayed, the first privilege and the second privilege different from the first privilege are likely to be awarded.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A game machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in a period until the lottery result is notified in a configuration in which the privilege game is executed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by executing more diverse effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NQ1, by making it easier for the player to predict the type of privilege to be given in the state in which the first suggestion mode is suggested and the state in which the second suggestion mode is suggested, the specific determination is performed. There is an effect that the expectation for the result can be changed in a suggestive manner, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine NQ1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information is stored in the storage means. a pre-determination means capable of performing determination on the stored information before the determination is performed by the determination means when the second suggestion mode is A game machine NQ2 characterized in that it is possible to suggest when a pre-determining means determines that the information is determined as the specific determination result by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine NQ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NQ1, it is possible to identify in the second suggesting mode that information that is determined as a specific determination result is stored, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.
In the gaming machine NQ2, the probability that the second privilege is provided when the mode indicating the specific determination result is displayed is set to be different depending on the timing at which the second suggestion mode is suggested. A gaming machine NQ3 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine NQ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NQ1 or NQ2, the probability that the second privilege is granted differs depending on the timing at which the second suggestion mode is suggested. It is possible to make the player interested in the game, and the interest in the game can be further improved.
In any one of the gaming machines NQ1 to NQ3, the suggesting means, during a period from when the identification information is dynamically displayed until when it is displayed in a mode for indicating the determination result, changes from the first suggesting mode to the second suggesting mode. 2. A game machine NQ4 characterized by being capable of being suggested by changing to two suggestion modes.

According to the game machine NQ4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines NQ1 to NQ3, since the mode suggested during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed changes, the identification information indicates the determination result. There is an effect that interest in the game can be improved by making the player interested in the content suggested by the timing displayed in the mode.
<Characteristic NR group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed, a performance determining means capable of determining one performance from a plurality of performances, and the performance. and storage means for storing information corresponding to the determined effect when the effect is determined by the determining means, wherein the game machine stores the information stored in the storage means by the effect determining means. A game machine NR1 is characterized in that, when an effect corresponding to is determined, an effect with a different mode of the determined effect can be executed.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in a period until the lottery result is notified in a configuration in which the privilege game is executed (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by executing more diverse effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NR1, when the same effect is determined a plurality of times, it is executed by changing it to a different effect mode. There is an effect that the trouble can be suppressed and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In the game machine NR1, the type of effect that can be determined by the effect determination means can be increased based on establishment of a specific condition.
According to the game machine NR2, in addition to the effects of the game machine NR1, the number of effects that can be determined by the effect determination means increases when a specific condition is established, so the same effect is executed for the player. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the frequency of

In the game machine NR1 or NR2, the game machine NR3 is characterized by having suggesting means for suggesting a type of effect that can be determined by the effect determining means.
According to the gaming machine NR3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine NR1 or NR2, it is possible to easily grasp the type of presentation that can be determined by the presentation determining means. There is an effect that it is possible to easily understand whether or not
<Characteristic NS group>
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a mode for showing the specific determination result on the display means In a game machine having privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and executed by the performance executing means. and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a first performance mode to be performed and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode, wherein the first performance mode and the second performance mode are determined. The gaming machine NS1 is characterized in that, when combined conditions satisfy a first condition, a notification mode advantageous to the player is likely to be executed.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Reference: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, even in the case of executing a plurality of effects, there is a problem that the degree of expectation cannot be varied depending on the types of effects that are executed in duplicate, and the game becomes monotonous.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NS1, the degree of expectation for the notification mode to be executed can be changed by identifying the condition combining the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and the game can be played. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of
In the gaming machine NS1, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the determination result can be indicated by combining the symbols. The game machine NS2 is characterized by an effect of continuing a stop display mode in which the symbols are stop-displayed without dynamic display for a certain period of time from a period in which the symbols can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine NS2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NS1, the first presentation mode is a presentation in which the symbols are continued in the stop display mode even after the period in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed starts. The effect is that the user can expect that the first rendering mode will be executed from the start of the dynamic display period.
In the gaming machine NS2, the gaming machine NS3 is characterized in that the second effect mode is a combination mode of the symbols displayed in the stop display mode.
According to the gaming machine NS3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NS2, since the second effect mode is a combination mode of the symbols displayed in the stop display mode, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of 1. , there is an effect that the establishment of the first condition can be expected by the symbol combination, and the degree of expectation for the execution of the first presentation mode can be varied.
In the game machine NS3, the first condition is a period in which the first effect mode is executed and a combination of symbols in the second effect mode are set as fulfillment conditions. Machine NS4.

According to the gaming machine NS4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NS3, when symbols are displayed in a combination showing the determination result of 1, if the combination of symbols corresponds to the establishment condition of the first condition. , the interest can be focused on the period in which the first presentation mode is executed at the start of the dynamic display of the next identification information, and the interest can be improved by gradually increasing expectations. be.
<Characteristic NT group>
After dynamic display of determining means capable of performing determination and a plurality of patterns for indicating the result of determination by the determining means, motion capable of statically displaying the symbols in combination for indicating the result of determination. a game machine having target display means, wherein the pattern variable means is capable of varying the mode of at least one of the plurality of symbols based on the discrimination result; It has a first effect which is advantageous to the player when the mode is varied, and a effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect based on setting information. A gaming machine NT1 characterized by:
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. is executed, and furthermore, when the win type is the advantageous type, an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the end of the privilege game, and when the win type is different from the advantageous type has proposed a configuration in which a disadvantageous game state is set rather than an advantageous state after the end of a privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there has been proposed a configuration in which a variable performance capable of suggesting the result of the lottery of the game is executed to make the player feel the expectation of winning and to play the game for a long time.
However, in conventional gaming machines, regardless of the set game state or winning type, if a winning win is made, a variable effect is executed that suggests that the expectation of winning is high. For example, even if the winner wins when the advantageous state ends while the advantageous state is set, the player's willingness to play will decrease because the variable performance that congratulates the player will not be executed. There was a problem that

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the gaming machine NT1, when the pattern mode is changed, the advantageous first effect mode and the second effect mode are switched and executed according to the set setting information, so the determination result is set. There is an effect that it is possible to identify the set information together with the set information, and the interest of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine NT2 is characterized in that the gaming machine NT1 has a setting means capable of variably setting the setting information after the symbols are displayed in combination for indicating the specific determination result.
According to the gaming machine NT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NT1, setting information is newly set by a combination of symbols for showing a specific determination result, so that not only a specific combination but also , there is an effect that it is possible to make the user interested in setting information to be set.

In the gaming machine NT1 or NT2, the setting means sets first setting information as the setting information and second setting information that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first setting information, and the effect execution means is , when the first setting information is set, the second effect is executed when it is determined that the second setting information is set.
According to the gaming machine NT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NT1, when the player is disadvantaged by a specific determination result, the execution of an advantageous effect is suppressed, and the motivation for the game is reduced. There is an effect that it can be suppressed to do.
<Characteristic NU group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; A performance determining means capable of determining a performance from a plurality of performances and its performance determining means in a game machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed. suggestive information display means capable of displaying suggestive information corresponding to an effect that can be determined by; A gaming machine NU1 characterized by having variable means capable of varying.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the game machine NU1, even when a plurality of pieces of suggestive information are displayed, the display positions thereof can be varied, thereby making it possible for a player to visually recognize more of the suggestive information, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be done.
The game machine NU2 is characterized in that the game machine NU1 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and that the suggestive information can be changed based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the game machine NU2, in addition to the effects of the game machine NU1, by operating the operation means, the suggestive information corresponding to the suggested effect can be varied, and the operation means is operated to correspond to the effect. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the willingness to play a game by changing the information obtained.
In the gaming machine NU1 or NU2, the variable means is capable of varying the display position when the suggestive information is added by newly increasing the effects that can be determined by the effect determining means. The gaming machine NU3 is capable of displaying the specific suggestive information at a display position when it is determined that a privilege advantageous to the player is given.
According to the gaming machine NU3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine NU1 or NU2, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that a privilege will be granted by the position where the suggestive information is displayed, and the suggestive information is displayed to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user interested in the position where it is to be done.
<Characteristic NV group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; In a gaming machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect that can be executed in a predetermined pattern; storage means for storing a plurality of performances executed by the performance execution means; selection information display means capable of displaying selection information corresponding to the plurality of performances stored in the storage means; and notification means capable of informing a notification mode corresponding to the selection information displayed by the selection information display means.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Reference: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.
According to the gaming machine NV1, since the notification mode is notified in correspondence with the selection information, even when a plurality of selection information is displayed, it is possible to easily identify the type of the selection information being displayed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. has the effect of being able to improve

In the game machine NV1, the game machine NV2 is characterized in that the notification mode is a partial performance mode in the performance corresponding to the selection information.
According to the gaming machine NV2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NV1, it is possible to determine the content of the performance to be executed corresponding to the selection information by the notification mode, and to quickly grasp the performance to be executed. has the effect of
In the game machine NV1 or NV2, when the displayed selection information satisfies a predetermined condition, a corresponding notification mode is notified.
According to the game machine NV3, in addition to the effects of the game machine NV1 or NV2, the notification mode of the selection information that satisfies a predetermined condition is notified. There is an effect that it can be easily identified.

<Characteristic network group>
Information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and identification capable of displaying an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means Design display means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means can be dynamically displayed. and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed on the display means in a manner for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the identification symbols displayed after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means is dynamically displayed. NW1.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, information necessary for a lottery is acquired, and based on the acquired information, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. When the result of the lottery is a win, a performance for notifying the result of the lottery is executed in a configuration in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and a new lottery is immediately started. A gaming machine has been proposed in which acquired information is stored when it is not possible (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, if the player can predict that the result of the lottery for which the notification is being executed is a failure, the player becomes bored during the period until the result of the lottery is notified, and the interest in the game decreases. There was a problem.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.

According to the gaming machine NW1, by dynamically displaying at least one of the identification symbols displayed after the award of the privilege, the information stored after the award of the privilege to the player is performed. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved by making the player interested.
In the gaming machine NW1, a pre-determination means capable of performing determination before being determined by the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; A game machine NW2 characterized in that the identification pattern can be displayed in a manner based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means after being dynamically displayed.
According to the gaming machine NW2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NW1, the identification symbols that can be displayed in a manner based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means can be identified by dynamically displaying them. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress overlooking the discrimination result by.
In the game machine NW2, when the identification pattern is newly displayed, it is possible to display the identification pattern in a manner based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means, and when the privilege is given. and the form of the identification pattern displayed in a form based on the discrimination result by the preliminary discrimination means can be varied so that the discrimination result by the preliminary discrimination means becomes difficult to discriminate. Characteristic game machine NW3.

According to the game machine NW3, in addition to the effect of the game machine NW2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the awarding of the privilege is deprived of attention and the player does not notice it.
<Characteristic NX group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; In a game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when information is displayed, an operation means operable by a player and the operation means are operated. production executing means capable of executing production based on; suggesting means capable of suggesting that the operation means is in an operable period; and an informing means capable of informing information corresponding to an effect that can be executed when is operated.
Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. In the configuration in which the privilege game is executed, a plurality of effects are prepared as effects for notifying the lottery result, and a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect selected according to a predetermined selection condition is executed (prior art Document: JP-A-2012-217766).
However, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of effects, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of effects. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to continue to enjoy the game while predicting the contents of the performance to be executed, and the desire to play the game is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game.
According to the gaming machine NX1, the information is configured in a specific display mode, and by varying the specific display mode, it is possible to notify the effect mode that can be executed. Characteristic game machine NX2.
According to the gaming machine NX2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NX1, the performance to be executed when the operation means is operated can be identified by the specific display mode, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. There is an effect that it can be increased.
In the gaming machine NX1 or NX2, an effect that can be executed by combining the suggestion mode suggested by the suggestion means and the information notified by the notification means is identifiable. Game machine NX3.

According to the gaming machine NX3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NX1 or NX2, there is an effect that the number of effects that can be notified can be increased by combining the suggestive mode and the notified information.
One suggested mode is determined from a plurality of suggested modes, and when the specific suggested mode is executed, the specific suggested mode is determined based on the establishment of the specified condition. The game machine NX2 is characterized in that an effect advantageous to the player is easily executed by being changed to the first mode.
According to the gaming machine NX2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NX1, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the change to the first mode is made even after the specific condition is established by executing the specific suggestion mode, There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
The game machine NX1 or NX2 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition can be established based on the operation of the operation means during the period in which the suggestive mode is displayed. When the operation means is operated during the period in which the second suggestion mode is displayed, the operation means is operated by continuously displaying the second suggestion mode. The game machine NX3 is characterized in that an opportunity for fulfilling the specific condition is given as a result.

According to the gaming machine NX3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine NX1 or NX2, the operation means is operated by displaying the second suggesting mode, and the second suggesting mode continues even after the specific condition is established. By displaying the specific conditions continuously in a short period of time, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.
<5082 system feature group>
<Characteristic OA group> (There are game methods that are easy to continue the time saving state for a long time and game methods that are difficult to continue for a long time)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of performing a determination based on the entering of a game ball into the entering means, and a specific predetermined determination result of the determining means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, the first control and the first control are executed based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition a control setting means for setting one of a plurality of controls including at least a second control in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be executed than the control; switching means capable of switching from the second control to the first control based on the establishment of a condition, and performing a game in a first game method when the second control is set. The gaming machine OA1 is characterized in that the period until the specific condition is established tends to become longer when the game is played by a second game method different from the first game method. .
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, game methods that increase the degree of advantage depending on the game state (for example, the direction in which the game ball is shot) are changed to make the game more varied and interesting. Some exist.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game method is fixed for each game state, leaving no room for the player to select the game method, making it difficult to enhance the interest of the player. be.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine OA1, when the second control is set, it is switched to the first control depending on whether the game is played by the first game method or the second game method. Since it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the length of the period until the game is changed, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine OA1, in the first game state in which the second control is set, playing the game with the second game method is more advantageous than playing the game with the first game method. A game machine OA2 characterized by a configuration that is easy to become.

According to the gaming machine OA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OA1, in a situation where the second control is set, the period during which the second control, which is advantageous by playing the game in the first game method, continues is set. Although it can be lengthened, if the first game state is set, the degree of advantage will be higher if the second game method is advantageous. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property by determining whether the game is in the 1 game state and making a distinction between playing the game by the first game method and playing the game by the second game method.
In the gaming machine OA2, the first game state and the second game state different from the first game state in which at least the second control is set based on the establishment of the first set condition. and a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least . The game machine OA3 is characterized in that it has a configuration in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game machine OA3.
According to the gaming machine OA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OA2, when the first gaming state is set, it is more advantageous to play the game with a gaming method in which the second control is likely to end in a short period of time. On the other hand, when the second game state is set, the degree of advantage increases if the game is played in a game method in which the second control is likely to continue for a long time. , it is possible to determine whether the player is in the first game state or the second game state and to select a corresponding game method.
Any one of the game machines OA1 to OA3 is provided with a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in one of a plurality of directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, The ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter and a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter, The first game method is a game method of shooting game balls in the first direction, and the second game method is a game method of shooting game balls in the second direction. Amusement machine OA4.

According to the gaming machine OA4, by adjusting the shooting direction of the game ball, it is possible to adjust the length of the period until the specific condition is established in the state where the second control is set. has the effect of being able to improve
In the gaming machine OA4, it is provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means to enter and a position where a game ball shot in the second direction can enter. a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter; and at least the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means. and a payout means capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on, the privilege game execution means, as the privilege game, the variable ball entry means for a predetermined period, from the second state to the second state 1 state, and when the second control is set, the game machine moves the game in the second direction rather than shooting the game ball in the first direction. The game machine OA5 is characterized in that the number of prize balls put out by the payout means during a predetermined period tends to increase when balls are shot.
According to the gaming machine OA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OA4, if the game ball is shot in the second direction when the second control is set, the period until the specific condition is satisfied is shortened. Since there is an advantage that the number of prize balls paid out during a predetermined period increases, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to select to shoot the game balls in the second direction. .
In the gaming machine OA5, when the specific determination result is obtained while the second control is set, the game state after the end of the privilege game is changed to the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained. When the second control is set, it is better to shoot the game ball in the second direction than to shoot the game ball in the first direction. A gaming machine OA6 characterized by a configuration that facilitates the execution of games.

According to the gaming machine OA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OA5, by shooting the game ball in the second direction under the condition that the second control is set, while maintaining the second control, the privilege game can be executed at a high frequency, so that the player can more easily select to shoot the game ball in the second direction under the circumstances where the second control is set. There is
In the gaming machine OA5 or OA6, the state in which the second control is set is the period in which the first state is set when the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction. A game machine OA7 characterized in that it is configured such that a game ball launched from the above is likely to be shorter than the period during which the game ball can be entered into the ball entering means.
According to the gaming machine OA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OA5 or OA6, in the state where the second control is set, there is an opportunity to shoot a game ball in the first direction and enter the ball entering means. Since the game ball is more likely to be shot in the second direction and entered into the variable ball entry means, the game ball is shot in the first direction under the condition that the second control is set. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to select to shoot.
In any one of the gaming machines OA1 to OA7, the specific conditions include a first specific condition that is more likely to be satisfied when playing the game using the first game method than when playing the game using the second game method; and a second specific condition that is more likely to be established by playing a game by the second game method than by playing a game by the first game method.

According to the gaming machine OA8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines OA1 to OA7, if the game continues to be played in the first gaming method after the second control is set, the first specific condition is satisfied and the first While the game is switched to the 1st control, if the player continues to play the game in the second game method, the second specific condition is met and the game is switched to the first control. Even if the game is played in the second game method, it can be switched to the first control. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second control from continuing endlessly and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.
In any of the gaming machines OA1 to OA8, when the second control is set, it is better to continue playing the game by the first game method than to continue playing the game by the second game method. , The game machine OA9 is characterized in that the number of determinations that can be executed until the specific condition is established tends to increase.
According to the gaming machine OA9, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines OA1 to OA8, when the second control is set, the one who plays the game in the first game method is switched to the first control. Since the number of judgments that can be executed increases until the second control, it is possible to realize a game property that increases the possibility of a specific judgment result by playing a game with the first game method during the second control. effective.
In the gaming machine OA3, first effect executing means for executing a first effect including at least a specific effect mode in the first game state, and executing a second effect including at least the specific effect mode in the second game state. A game machine OA10 characterized by comprising a second effect execution means for

According to the gaming machine OA10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the first game state and the second game state execute an effect in which a specific effect mode is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not. Therefore, there is an effect that the player is made to predict whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, and novel game characteristics can be realized in which the player selects the game method.
In the gaming machine OA10, when the control is switched to the first control in the first game state, a third game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is formed, and the second game state is formed in the second game state. 1 control, the game machine OA11 forms a fourth game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state.
According to the gaming machine OA11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OA10, the game state formed when the specific condition is satisfied can be varied depending on whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state. has the effect of
In the gaming machine OA11, the third gaming state is a gaming state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when playing a game using the first gaming method than when playing a game using the second gaming method. The game machine OA12 is characterized in that the 4 game state is a game state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when playing a game with the second game method than when playing a game with the first game method.

According to the game machine OA12, in addition to the effects of the game machine OA11, it is possible to realize a game property in which the game method is changed depending on whether the third game state or the fourth game state is set. has the effect of
In the gaming machine OA12, the privilege game is more likely to be executed when the second game method is used than when the first game method is used. The game machine OA13 is characterized by a game state in which the execution interval of the privilege game tends to become longer when the game is played in the second game method than in the fourth game state.
According to the gaming machine OA13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine OA12, in the third gaming state, the execution interval of the privilege game tends to be longer, so that the advantage of the fourth gaming state can be further enhanced. be.
<Characteristic OB Group> (A production that hides the shooting direction corresponding to the game state after the jackpot ends until a specific condition is met after the jackpot ends)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and based on establishment of a predetermined determination condition. Determination means for performing determination, and the variable ball entry means changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time based on the result of determination by the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. and variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable, based on the completion of execution of the predetermined variable game, depending on the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A game machine OB1 comprising a first effect executing means for executing a first effect including at least a specific effect mode.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is also a game machine that, as an entertainment effect, performs an effect that suggests to the player the degree of advantage after the winning game is over, such as during the execution of the winning game that is advantageous to the player. exist. In this conventional type gaming machine, a game can be played during a winning game in anticipation that a game state with a high degree of advantage is suggested. You can prevent it from becoming
However, if the configuration is such that the game state after the execution of the winning game is always suggested, and a game state with a low degree of advantage is suggested during the execution of the winning game, the player's motivation for playing the game decreases. There is a problem that the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine OB1, while the first effect is being executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the game state after the execution of the variable game is finished, so that the variable game is executed. It is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the game state after the end of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine OB1, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in any one of a plurality of directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; A first ball entering means provided at a position where the launched game ball can reach and a position where the game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to reach, and a game is played to the first ball entering means. A first acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of the ball, and a position reachable by the game ball shot in the second direction. A second ball entering means provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball launched in the first direction to reach, and the discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. and a first game state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the first direction than in the second direction, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. and a second game state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the second direction rather than in the first direction. A gaming machine OB2 characterized by comprising:
According to the gaming machine OB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OB1, the set game state is predicted while the first effect is being executed, and the player is made to select the flow path for shooting the game ball. Since it is possible to realize sexuality, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine OB2, a plurality of controls including at least a first control and a second control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entering means than the first control based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine OB3 comprising a control setting means capable of setting one of the controls, wherein both the first game state and the second game state are game states set to the second control.

According to the gaming machine OB3, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines OB2 to OB5, both the first game state and the second game state are set to the second control. Since the ease of play is common, there is an effect that it becomes more difficult for the player to predict the game state while the first effect is being executed.
In the game machine OB2 or OB3, at least a specific effect mode capable of suggesting to the player a shooting direction in which the degree of advantage is increased is based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during execution of the first effect. A game machine OB4 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means for executing a second effect comprising:
According to the game machine OB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine OB2 or OB3, the second effect suggests the shooting direction in which the degree of advantage increases when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the specific condition is imposed on the player. There is an effect that it is possible to expect that it will be established.
In the gaming machine OB4, the specific condition is a condition that can be established both when the game ball is shot in the first direction and when the game ball is shot in the second direction during execution of the first effect. A gaming machine OB5 characterized by:

According to the game machine OB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine OB4, the specific condition is a condition that can be established regardless of the shooting direction of the game ball. has the effect of being able to
Any one of the game machines OB2 to OB5 is provided with payout means for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition, and at least during a period from completion of the variable game to establishment of the specific condition. than the predetermined period after the specific condition is established, the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means when the game balls are continuously shot in the first direction, and the number of prize balls paid out in the second direction The game machine OB6 is characterized in that the difference between the number of prize balls put out by the payout means and the number of prize balls put out by the payout means tends to increase when the game balls are continuously shot.
According to the gaming machine OB6, at least until a specific condition is satisfied, there is an advantage in terms of the number of prize balls paid out regardless of whether the game balls are shot in the first direction or in the second direction. To allow a player to more easily select a shooting direction after finishing a variable game by easily selecting the shooting direction from the first direction and the second direction because there is not much difference in degree. has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine OB3, in a state where the second control is set, a predetermined switching condition is more likely to be established when the game ball flows down the second flow path than when the game ball flows down the first flow path. is established, a control switching means for switching to the first control is provided, and the first game state forms a third game state that is disadvantageous to the player when switched to the first control; The gaming machine OB7 is characterized in that the second game state forms a fourth game state advantageous to the player when switched to the first control.

According to the game machine OB7, in addition to the effects of the game machine OB3, it is predicted whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, and the game ball is shot into the second flow path to set the switching condition. or shoot the game ball into the first flow path and maintain the second control for as long as possible. effective.
The gaming machine OB7 includes an effect switching means for switching to an effect corresponding to a set game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined switching condition during execution of the first effect, wherein the switching condition is A game machine OB8 characterized by a condition that is established when the control is switched to the first control.
According to the gaming machine OB8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OB7, switching to the first control switches to an effect according to the set game state. There is an effect that the player can easily understand whether the 4-game state is set.
In any one of the game machines OB1 to OB8, a suggestive effect for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting a set game state to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition during the execution of the first effect. A gaming machine OB9 characterized by comprising execution means.

According to the game machine OB9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines OB1 to OB8, the game state can be guessed by the suggestive effect during execution of the first effect, so execution of the suggestive effect is expected. There is an effect that a game can be played while the player is playing.
<Feature OC group> (Small hit RUSH machine that can reach the small hit attacker even with an electric sapo)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means are used. a determination means capable of performing determination by means of a ball, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, and a game ball shot in a specific direction by the shooting means provided at a position where at least the game ball can enter, and the game ball can enter. and a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the game ball. Based on this, in a gaming machine comprising variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, A variable means capable of changing between a first position where a game ball can be entered and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a control setting means for setting one of a plurality of controls including at least a first control and a second control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first control; Based on the establishment of the specific condition, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the first control is set and a second game state in which the second control is set is set. and a game state setting means, and when the variable game is executed as the first determination result in at least the second game state, the game is shot in the specific direction during execution of the variable game. A game machine OC1 is characterized in that a game ball can reach the variable ball entry means.
Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

Further, in such conventional gaming machines, by continuing to perform a game method corresponding to the game state as a game state with a high degree of advantage, prize balls are likely to be paid out based on the winning of a specific winning hole. In some cases, a specific game (for example, a small winning game) is frequently executed, so that even if a big win is not won, the number of owned balls continues to increase.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a specific game is played in a game state other than the specific game state, the prize ball is not paid out, so that a specific winning ball is not paid out in a game state other than the specific game state. Since it is common to perform control to make it difficult for game balls to enter the opening, it looks as if it is forcibly avoiding winning in a specific winning opening, and the operation of the gaming machine is affected. There was a fear that it would cause a sense of distrust.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine OC1, even in the variable game executed in the second game state in which the advantageous second control is executed, the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means. Since the degree of advantage in the two-game state can be further improved, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
The game machine OC1 includes means for making the game state at the time when the first determination result is obtained and the game state after the execution of the variable game based on the first determination result the same, The gaming machine OC2 is characterized in that the variable game is more likely to be executed in the second game state than in the first game state when game balls are continuously shot in the specific direction.

According to the gaming machine OC2, since the game state can be maintained before and after the variable game, especially when the variable game occurs in the advantageous second game state, the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. In addition to being able to obtain an opportunity to play the game, an advantageous game state is maintained, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine OC2, the game state setting means provides the first game state, the second game state, and a game in which the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second game state based on the establishment of the specific condition. A game machine OC3 characterized by being able to set one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state which is a state.
According to the gaming machine OC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OC2, when the third gaming state is set, the variable game is more likely to be executed than the second gaming state. In addition, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine OC2 or OC3, based on the determination result of the determining means in the second game state being a second determination result different from the first determination result, the second game state is at least A gaming machine OC4 comprising a second game state setting means capable of setting a different predetermined game state, wherein the second game state can be continued until the second determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine OC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OC2 or OC3, the second gaming state is maintained even if the first determination result is obtained, while a predetermined game is played when the second determination result is obtained. Since the state is changed to the state, there is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that strongly expect the first determination result to be obtained more times without the second determination result.
The gaming machine OC4 comprises payout means for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on at least game balls entering the variable ball entering means, wherein the second game state is different from the first game state. Also, the game machine OC5 is characterized in that the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means tends to increase when game balls are continuously shot in the specific direction.
According to the gaming machine OC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OC4, in the second game state, more advantageous control than in the first game state is executed, and during execution of the variable game, the variable ball entry means is executed. Since the game ball can reach and win the prize ball, there is an effect that the player can feel greater joy and satisfaction when the second game state is set.
In the gaming machine OC5, when the game ball is continuously shot in the specific direction from when the second game state is entered until the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result, the game ball is shot. The gaming machine OC6 is characterized in that the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means is likely to be larger than the number of game balls delivered.

According to the gaming machine OC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OC5, by continuing to shoot game balls in a specific direction in the second game state, it is possible to acquire prize balls equal to or greater than the number of game balls that have been shot. Since an advantageous state is formed, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.
In any one of the gaming machines OC1 to OC6, a game ball launched in the specific direction is difficult to enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter. A second ball entering means is provided at a position, and the acquiring means is provided when a game ball enters the said ball entering means and when a game ball enters the second ball entering means. , the determination information can be acquired, and in the second game state, it is better to keep shooting game balls in the second direction than to keep shooting game balls in the specific direction. The game machine OC7 is characterized in that the second game state is easily continued for a long period of time.
According to the gaming machine OC7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines OC1 to OC6, in the second gaming state, by continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a specific direction, the variable ball entry means during execution of the variable game While the game ball can be entered into the second direction, the second game state can be continued longer by continuing to shoot the game ball in the second direction, so the game ball can be shot in the specific direction. or to shoot the game ball in the second direction.
A game machine OC8 characterized in that, in the game machine OC3, the third game state is a game state in which the first control is set.

According to the gaming machine OC8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OC3, in the third gaming state, it is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entering means, but the variable game is easily executed, and in the second gaming state, the ball is entered. It becomes easy to enter the ball into the means, but it becomes a game property that the variable game is difficult to be executed, so there is an effect that various game properties can be realized.
The gaming machine OC3 or OC8 includes a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on at least the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, wherein the third game state is at least the specific direction. characterized by a game state in which the number of game balls paid out by said payout means tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired by said shooting means when game balls are continuously shot into the Gaming machine OC9.
According to the game machine OC9, in addition to the effects of the game machine OC3 or OC8, in the third game state, the number of game balls equal to or greater than the number of game balls to be shot is paid out simply by continuously shooting game balls in a specific direction. Therefore, when the third game state is set, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In a gaming machine OC3, OC8 or OC9, display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination based on the execution of determination by the determination means. dynamic display means; and dynamic display time determination means for determining dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, wherein the third game state corresponds to the second game state. A game machine OC10 characterized in that a short dynamic display time is more likely to be determined by the dynamic display time determining means when at least the first determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine OC10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines OC3, OC8, and OC9, the execution frequency of the variable game is higher in the third gaming state than in the second gaming state. There is an effect that the frequency with which the game ball enters can also be increased.
In any of the game machines OC3 or OC8 to OC10, the game state setting means satisfies a predetermined first condition that is at least different from the first determination result in the predetermined second game state. The game machine OC11 is characterized in that the third game state can be set without the variable game based on what has been done.
According to the gaming machine OC11, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines OC3 or OC8 to OC10, the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, thereby increasing the execution frequency of the variable game. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.
<Characteristic OD group> (If the lottery result is different from the hit in the same time saving state, the ease of saving the special figure 2 reservation changes)
acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined specific number as an upper limit; Determination means for performing determination using the determination information stored in the storage means, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game executing means to be executed, a first game state and the discrimination information are more likely to be acquired by the acquisition means than in the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined set condition. a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state; A game machine OD1 comprising: a control execution means for executing one of a plurality of controls including at least a second control that makes it easier for the acquisition means to acquire the discrimination information than the control.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that are intended to increase the player's interest in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, there is a trigger (winning) in which the first game state is set as a transition condition for shifting from the first game state that is advantageous to the player to the second game state that is less advantageous. There are also those that are configured so that different transition conditions can be set according to the type, game state at the time of winning, etc., and there are also those that are designed to improve interest.
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the transition condition is fixed each time the first game state is set. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve interest because it becomes possible to perceive it.

On the other hand, according to the game machine OD1, the number of determination information stored in the storage means differs depending on whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed. A game can be played by paying attention to the control to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In the gaming machine OD1, the second control is performed by the acquiring means during a period from when the first condition is satisfied until when a predetermined second condition is satisfied, rather than when the first control is performed. A gaming machine OD2 characterized by a control that facilitates acquisition of information.
According to the game machine OD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine OD1, when the second control is executed, the determination information is acquired by the acquisition means from the time when the first condition is satisfied until the time when the second condition is satisfied. Since the state in which the vehicle is likely to be affected continues, there is an effect that the difference in the degree of advantage between the first control and the second control can be increased.
The game machine OD3 is characterized in that, in the game machine OD1 or OD2, when the second condition is established, a specific state in which the acquisition means is difficult to acquire the discrimination information can be formed.

According to the game machine OD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine OD1 or OD2, it becomes difficult to acquire the discrimination information after the second condition is satisfied, so the second control is executed when the first condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it can be made to expect things more strongly.
In any one of the game machines OD1 to OD3, the first control is control to switch from the second game state to the first game state at a first timing included in a predetermined period after the first condition is established. The second control is a control for switching from the second game state to the first game state at a second timing that is included in the predetermined period and later than the first timing. A game machine OD4.
According to the game machine OD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines OD1 to OD3, the second control is more likely to acquire the discrimination information longer after the first condition is satisfied than the first control. Since the 2-game state is continued, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the second control will be executed.
In any one of the game machines OD1 to OD4, the first condition is at least a condition that can be established after the determination result of the determination means in the second game state is a different determination result from the specific determination result. A gaming machine OD5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine OD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines OD1 to OD4, it is possible to realize a novel game property that can change the easiness of acquiring the discrimination information with the result of the discrimination as a trigger. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.
In the gaming machine OD5, the first game state is changed based on the fact that the discriminated result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of discriminations by the discriminating means after the second game state is set. A first game state setting means is provided for setting the first condition, and the first condition can be established at least after the determination by the determination means for the specific number of times after the second game state is set becomes the result of the determination. A game machine OD6 characterized by being a condition.
According to the gaming machine OD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OD5, the ease of acquisition of the discrimination information immediately before the first gaming state is set is determined whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed. Since it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that can be changed depending on the type of game, there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.
In a gaming machine OD5 or OD6, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and the dynamic display means a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the A game machine OD7 characterized by being a condition that can be established after

According to the game machine OD7, in addition to the effects of the game machine OD5 or OD6, a novel game property in which the easiness of obtaining the discrimination information is changed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the result of the discrepancy discrimination. can be realized, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine OD7, the length of the dynamic display period corresponding to the result of discrimination is determined by the second control when the first condition is established during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the result of discrimination. is executed, the second control can be terminated before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the result of the determination of deviation is terminated. A game machine OD8.
According to the gaming machine OD8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OD7, the second control is started during the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the discrepancy determination result, and before the dynamic display of the identification information ends. Since the second control ends at 12:00, it is possible to limit the period during which the discrimination information is likely to be acquired, and it is possible to make the game more focused on whether the second control or the first control is performed. effective.
In the gaming machine OD4, display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determination means. and the predetermined period is a period from when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed until the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination is terminated, and the first control is control for switching from the second game state to the first game state at the start of the dynamic display of the predetermined identification information.

According to the gaming machine OD9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OD4, when the first control is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information is started and the state is switched to the first gaming state, so the second control is executed. There is an effect that the player can be made to expect that more strongly.
In any one of the game machines OD1 to OD9, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means. is a first determination result different from the specific determination result, variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is varied from the second state to the first state and, based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is an outlier determination result different from the specific determination result and the first determination result, the new determination means is established without involving the privilege game or the variable game. wherein the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the determination result of the determination means in the second game state is the outlier determination result. Characterized game machine OD10.
According to the game machine OD10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines OD1 to OD9, there is an effect that the execution of the second control can be expected when the second determination result is obtained. .
In a gaming machine OD10, a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the variable ball entering means can enter, and at least a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the variable game. and a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the fact that the predetermined condition is that the determination result of the determination means in the second game state is different from the first determination result. A game machine OD11 characterized in that it is a condition that can be established when either of the discrimination results is obtained.

According to the gaming machine OD11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OD10, when the first determination result is obtained, there is a possibility that a privilege game will be executed by entering the game ball into the specific area. , If the determination result is out, there is no possibility that the privilege game will be executed, so if the player recognizes that the first control is executed, the first control based on the first determination result There is an effect that the control can be made to expect more strongly.
In the gaming machine OD11, the ratio of executing the first control with the first determination result is higher than the ratio of executing the first control with the second determination result. A game machine OD12 characterized by.
According to the gaming machine OD12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OD11, when the first control is executed, the first determination result is obtained and the degree of expectation that the variable game is executed increases. Even if the player recognizes that the control has been executed, there is an effect that the player is less likely to be discouraged.
In gaming machines OD1 to OD12, the acquisition means acquires the discrimination information based on whether either a first acquisition condition or a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition is met. It is possible, and the discrimination information acquired based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition is higher than the discrimination information acquired based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. The second game state is a game state in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first game state, and the second control. 2. A game machine OD13 characterized in that control is such that said acquisition condition 2 is likely to be satisfied within a predetermined period after said first condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine OD13, in addition to the high price played by any of the game machines OD1 to OD12, the second control is more likely to satisfy the second acquisition condition than the first control, so the degree of advantage is high. Judgment becomes easier to execute. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution of the second control can be expected more strongly.
<Characteristic OE group> (Production that suggests the number of pending balls that can be accumulated within one fluctuation)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means up to a specific number as an upper limit, and a specified discrimination condition Based on the establishment of the determination means for executing determination using the determination information stored in the determination information storage means, and that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, to indicate the determination result of the executed discrimination A player can grasp at least the number of discrimination information that can be stored in the discrimination information storage means during execution of the first performance and a predetermined first performance. and a second effect executing means for executing a second effect including a specific effect mode.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to acquire lottery information for use in a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball enters a predetermined start hole. There are also those that can store up to a predetermined number of acquired lottery information until they are used in the lottery. Further, in this conventional gaming machine, the number of lottery information that can be acquired in a specific game state depends on the trigger (win type, game state at the time of winning, etc.) for setting the specific game state. Some of them are variable, and the number of lottery information that can be acquired in a specific game state is configured so that the player can grasp it by means of effects, thereby improving interest.
However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest because the presentation mode is fixed each time a specific game state is set.
On the other hand, according to the game machine OE1, during the execution of the predetermined first effect, by confirming the specific effect mode, whether or not the determination information should be additionally stored in the determination information storage means. can be discriminated by the player, so there is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.
In the gaming machine OE1, when a first performance mode is set as the specific performance mode, a specific number of the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means during execution of the predetermined first performance. is possible, and when a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is set as the specific effect mode, the discrimination is performed during execution of the predetermined first effect. A game machine OE2 characterized in that it is possible for a player to grasp that it is difficult to store the discrimination information in the information storage means.

According to the gaming machine OE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OE1, the discrimination that can be stored in the discrimination information storage means according to whether the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode is set. Since the number of pieces of information is variable, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the type of the specific presentation mode.
The gaming machine OE2 includes type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a specific bonus game as the type of the bonus game, and during a predetermined period after execution of the specific bonus game is completed, the specific bonus game The game machine OE3 is characterized in that a first situation in which the first effect mode is set as the effect mode and a second situation in which the second effect mode is set can be established.
According to the gaming machine OE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OE2, in a predetermined period after the execution of the specific privilege game is completed, the first rendering mode is set and the second rendering mode is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the type of the specific effect mode after the execution of the specific privilege game is finished.
In any one of the gaming machines OE1 to OE3, the second effect executing means performs the above-described second effect over at least the second first effect executed before the predetermined first effect and the predetermined first effect. A gaming machine OE4 characterized by being capable of executing a second effect.

According to the game machine OE4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines E1 to E3, when the predetermined first effect is executed before the predetermined first effect is executed, the discrimination information storage means Since it is possible to realize a novel performance mode in which the player can grasp the number of discrimination information that can be stored in the game, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
In any one of the gaming machines OE1 to OE4, a first game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state after execution of the privilege game is finished; A second game for setting a second game state having a lower degree of advantage than the first game state based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times without the privilege game being executed. and a state setting means, wherein the predetermined first effect is the first effect executed for the specific number of times in the first game state.
According to the gaming machine OE5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines OE1 to OE4, for the player who wants to make more determinations before the first gaming state with a low degree of advantage is set, Since it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the number of identification information suggested by the specific effect mode, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine OE5, the acquisition means can acquire the discrimination information based on the establishment of either a first acquisition condition or a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. and the discrimination information acquired based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition is higher than the discrimination information acquired based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition by the discrimination means is a configuration in which a determination with a high degree of advantage is executed by the specific effect mode, wherein at least the number of times that the second acquisition condition can be satisfied during the execution of the first effect that is executed for the specific number of times is performed. A game machine OE6 characterized in that it is a performance mode that a player can comprehend.

According to the gaming machine OE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OE5, the number of times the second acquisition condition with a high degree of advantage is satisfied can be suggested by the specific presentation mode, so the second presentation mode can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the game.
In the game machine OE6, the game machine OE7 is characterized in that the first game state is a game state in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second game state.
According to the gaming machine OE7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine OE6, it is easier to determine that the first gaming state has a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state. In addition, there is an effect that the player can have great joy.
In any one of the gaming machines OE1 to OE7, the second effect is the degree of expectation that the privilege game will be executed when the discrimination information already stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for the discrimination. A game machine OE8 characterized in that it is configured to include at least an effect mode that can suggest.

According to the gaming machine OE8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines OE1 to OE7, the second effect can be used not only to determine the number of pieces of discrimination information that can be additionally stored, but also to determine the degree of expectation for the execution of the privilege game. can also be suggested to the player, so there is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.
In any one of the gaming machines OE1 to OE8, when the first effect mode is set as the specific effect mode, a specific number of the discriminations are stored in the discrimination information storage means during execution of the predetermined first effect. When it becomes possible for the player to grasp that information can be stored, and when a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is set as the specific effect mode, the predetermined first effect is performed. During execution, the player can grasp that it is difficult to store the discrimination information in the discrimination information storage means, and the second effect accompanied by the second effect mode is replaced by the first effect mode. The gaming machine OE9 is characterized in that it has a configuration that easily suggests that the degree of expectation for execution of the privilege game is higher than the accompanying second effect.
According to the gaming machine OE9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines OE1 to OE8, it is possible to suppress disappointment of the player when the second effect accompanied by the second effect mode is executed. It has the effect of being able to
<5085 system feature group>
<Feature PA Group> (When the second control can be executed after the first control for moving the movable means a plurality of times is completed, and the movable means is positioned at the first position in a state where the end condition is satisfied can stop the first control in the middle and execute the second control + specific effect can be executed when the execution condition is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied)
movable means movable in a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position; In a gaming machine having executable first control means and second control means capable of executing a second control different from the first control after the first control by the first control means is completed, determining means capable of determining whether a specific condition has been established which can be established when the first control is executed for the movable means and which cannot be established when the second control is executed; The game machine terminates the first control and performs the second control even during execution of the first control when the specific condition is satisfied in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied. and can execute a specific effect when the execution condition is met after the predetermined condition is met.

Conventionally, an action scenario for moving the movable means with a series of action contents is set as a movable control for moving the movable means within a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow this (prior art document: JP-A-2012-130802).
Specifically, by setting an operation scenario in which the rotation direction and rotation speed of the stepping motor are changed according to the elapsed time after the movement control of the moving means is executed, the rotation status of the stepping motor can be handled. The movable means can be moved in various directions and at various speeds. In this way, in the case of executing the movement control to move the movable means with various operation contents, by configuring it so that the operation scenario corresponding to the contents of a series of movements can be set, the processing load of the movement control for the movable means can be simplified. It was something that could be transformed into
However, according to the above-described conventional game machine, when an action scenario is set for moving the movable means in a series of actions, the set action scenario continues until the set action scenario is completed. For example, even if the execution condition for executing a new movement control for the movable means is satisfied, the new movement control is executed until the movement control being executed is completed. There was a problem that movement control could not be executed.
In order to solve the problems exemplified above, a new control can be executed before the movement control corresponding to the set operation scenario is executed to the end. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by executing without delay various controls whose execution conditions are satisfied.

According to the gaming machine PA1, the second control can be executed earlier when the end condition is satisfied during the period when the first control is being executed than when the end condition is not satisfied. There is an effect that the player who wants to execute the second control can enjoy the first control while expecting that the end condition is satisfied. In addition, since the specific effect is executed by establishing the execution condition between the establishment of the end condition and the establishment of the specific condition, the period from the establishment of the end condition to the actual end of the first control is There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game for the period of .
In the game machine PA1, the predetermined condition is the first condition during a specific period from when the movable means positioned at the first position is moved until the number of times the movable means is positioned at the first position reaches a specified number of times. A game machine PA2 characterized in that it can be established when is established a specific number of times.
According to the game machine PA2, the end condition can be satisfied when the number of times the first condition is satisfied during the specific period reaches the specific number of times in response to the effects of the game machine PA1, so the first control ends. The effect is that the player who tries to grasp whether or not the end condition is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied can easily be interested in grasping the number of times the first condition is satisfied within a specific period. be.
The gaming machine PA3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine PA2, it has an informing means capable of informing that the first condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine PA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PA2, the informing means notifies that the first condition is satisfied. The number of times the first condition is satisfied can be comprehended in an easy-to-understand manner for a player who is trying to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily predict whether or not the end condition is met.
In other words, according to the gaming machine PA3, the three elements necessary for the termination condition to be satisfied, specifically, the range of the specific period, the number of times the first condition is satisfied necessary for the termination condition to be satisfied, By making it easier for the player to grasp the information about one element among the number of times the first condition is actually met, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the end condition is met. The number is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, instead of notifying the number of times the first condition is actually satisfied, information regarding other elements may be notified.
The game machine PA3 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and the game machine can establish the first condition based on execution of a predetermined operation on the operation means. A gaming machine PA4 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine PA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PA3, the first condition can be satisfied based on the operation of the operation means by the player. The operator can be made to operate the operating means willingly. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be improved.

In addition, since whether or not the end condition is established is determined by the operation content of the operation means by the player, there is an effect that the player can arbitrarily select not to establish the end condition.
In the gaming machine PA4, the execution condition can be established when the first condition is established between the establishment of the predetermined condition and the establishment of the specific condition. PA5.
According to the game machine PA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine PA4, the execution condition can be established by continuing the operation to the operating means performed for establishing the end condition. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for a player who has intentionally operated the operating means to satisfy the execution condition.
A gaming machine PA6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines PA1 to PA5, by executing the second control, the movable means can be moved in a movable range different from that of the first control.

According to the game machine PA6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines PA1 to PA5, the second control can move the movable means in a movable range different from that of the first control, so that the movable means can be moved in various variable modes. There is an effect that the means can be moved and the performance effect can be enhanced.
The game machine PA7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines PA1 to PA6, the specific effect can be executed with a first period including at least a period during which the first control is executed as an effect period.
According to the game machine PA7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines PA1 to PA6, the specific effect can be executed during the execution period of the first control, so the second control is executed after the end condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game until the game is executed.
A game machine PA8 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines PA1 to PA7, the operation scenario is defined such that the first control is terminated in a state in which the movable means is positioned at the first position. .

According to the game machine PA8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines PA1 to PA7, the movable means is positioned at the first position when the end condition is met and when the first control ends. , the second control having the same contents can be executed regardless of whether or not the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is no need to change the content of the second control depending on whether or not the end condition is satisfied, so there is an effect that the processing load of the second control can be reduced.
<Characteristic PB group> (The second control can be executed after the first control for moving the movable means is completed, and when the movable means is positioned at the first position in a state where the end condition is satisfied, the second control is performed. 1 control can be stopped in the middle and the 2nd control can be executed + the end condition is satisfied based on the operation to the operation means)
movable means movable in a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position; In a gaming machine having executable first control means and second control means capable of executing a second control different from the first control after the first control by the first control means is completed, determining means capable of determining whether a specific condition has been established which can be established when the first control is executed for the movable means and which cannot be established when the second control is executed; The game machine terminates the first control and performs the second control even during execution of the first control when the specific condition is satisfied in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied. is executed, and the predetermined condition is a first condition that can be satisfied based on execution of a predetermined operation on the operation means during a specific period of time during which the first control is executed a predetermined number of times A gaming machine PB1 characterized in that it can be established when it is established a specific number of times.
Conventionally, an action scenario for moving the movable means according to a series of actions is set as a movable control for moving the movable means within a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position. There is a game machine configured to allow this (prior art document: JP-A-2012-130802).
Specifically, by setting an operation scenario in which the rotation direction and rotation speed of the stepping motor are varied according to the elapsed time after the movement control of the moving means is executed, the rotation status of the stepping motor can be handled. It is configured so that the movable means can be moved in various directions and at various speeds. In this way, in the case of executing the movement control to move the movable means with various operation contents, by configuring it so that the operation scenario corresponding to the contents of a series of movements can be set, the processing load of the movement control for the movable means can be simplified. It was something that could be transformed into

However, according to the above-described conventional game machine, when an action scenario is set for moving the movable means in a series of action contents, the set action scenario is continued until the set action scenario is completed. For example, even if the execution condition for executing a new movement control for the movable means is satisfied, the new movement control is executed until the movement control being executed is completed. There was a problem that movement control could not be executed.
In order to solve the problems exemplified above, a new control can be executed before the movable control corresponding to the set operation scenario is executed to the end. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by executing without delay various controls whose execution conditions are satisfied.
According to the gaming machine PB1, the second control can be executed earlier when the end condition is satisfied during the period when the first control is being executed than when the end condition is not satisfied. There is an effect that the player who wants to execute the second control can enjoy the first control while expecting the end condition to be satisfied. In addition, since the end condition is satisfied when the first condition that can be satisfied based on the player's operation of the operation means is satisfied a predetermined number of times within a specific period, the end condition is satisfied. It is possible to make the player who is trying to make it work willingly operate the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be improved.
In addition, since whether or not the end condition is satisfied is determined by the operation content of the operation means by the player, there is an effect that the player can arbitrarily select not to satisfy the end condition.

A gaming machine PB2 characterized in that the gaming machine PB1 has an informing means capable of informing that the first condition is satisfied.
According to the game machine PB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine PB1, the notifying means notifies that the first condition is satisfied. The number of times the first condition is satisfied can be comprehended in an easy-to-understand manner for a player who is trying to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily predict whether or not the end condition is met.
In other words, according to the gaming machine PB2, there are three elements required to satisfy the termination condition, specifically, the range of the specific period, the number of times the first condition is satisfied required to satisfy the termination condition, By making it easier for the player to grasp the information about one element among the number of times the first condition is actually met, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the end condition is met. The number is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, instead of notifying the number of times the first condition is actually satisfied, information regarding other elements may be notified.
A gaming machine PB3 characterized in that in the gaming machine PB2, first information related to the number of times the first condition is satisfied, which is necessary for satisfying the predetermined condition, can be displayed on display means.

According to the gaming machine PB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PB1, by displaying the first information, the player can easily predict the number of remaining satisfactions of the first condition required to satisfy the termination condition. has the effect of being able to
Here, as the first information, in addition to the information numerically indicating the number of times the first condition is satisfied, which is necessary for satisfying the termination condition, specific information given each time the first condition is satisfied is added. Information indicating the value obtained may be used. In this case, when the specific information given each time the first condition is satisfied is always constant, the value indicated by the first information displayed on the display means and the value given each time the first condition is satisfied By comparing the value of the specified information and the value of the specified information, the player can predict the number of times the first condition is satisfied, which is necessary to satisfy the termination condition.
As the first information, in addition to the information using values as described above, for example, a configuration capable of displaying a display mode that can be changed in stages when the first condition is satisfied may be used. When the display mode is changed to the specific display mode, the information indicating the specific display mode may be used as the first information if it is possible to execute an effect to notify that the end condition is satisfied. In this case, the period until the termination condition is satisfied can be enjoyed by visually recognizing the process in which the display mode changes each time the first condition is satisfied.
In the gaming machine PB3, the gaming machine PB4 is characterized in that the display means can display second information related to the cumulative number of times the first condition is satisfied during the specific period.

According to the game machine PB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine PB3, by comparing the first information and the second information displayed on the display means, the first condition required until the end condition is satisfied is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the remaining number of establishment times in detail.
In the game machine PB4, when the first control is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period of time, third information related to the cumulative number of times the first condition has been established during the predetermined period of time can be displayed on the display means. A gaming machine PB5 characterized by:
According to the gaming machine PB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PB4, the third information related to the cumulative number of times the first condition has been satisfied during a predetermined period can be cumulatively displayed over a plurality of times of the first control. Therefore, the player can grasp how likely the first condition is to be satisfied.
In any one of the game machines PB1 to PB5, the first control sets a first movable period as a movable period from the state in which the movable means is positioned at the first position to the next positioning to the first position. A game machine PB6 characterized in that the movable means can be movably controlled in a movable period including at least a period and a second movable period longer than the first movable period.

According to the gaming machine PB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines PB1 to PB5, the length of the specific period can be varied, so that the ease with which the termination condition is satisfied during the specific period can be varied. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress monotonous relationship between the content of the operation to the operation means and the degree of satisfaction of the end condition for the player who is operating the operation means to satisfy the end condition. It has the effect of being able to
<Characteristic PC group> (The second control can be executed after the first control for moving the movable means is completed, and when the movable means is positioned at the first position in a state where the end condition is satisfied, the 1 control can be stopped in the middle and the 2nd control can be executed + information on the establishment of the 1st condition for establishing the end condition is displayed)
A movable means movable in a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position, and first control for a predetermined period so that the movable means is positioned at the first position a plurality of times. and a second control means capable of executing a second control different from the first control after the first control by the first control means is completed. and determining means capable of determining that a specific condition, which can be established when the first control is executed for the movable means and which cannot be established when the second control is executed, has been established. and the gaming machine terminates the first control even during execution of the first control and performs the second The control can be executed, and the predetermined condition is a specific period from when the movable means positioned at the first position is moved until the number of times the movable means is positioned at the first position reaches a specified number of times. A game machine PC1 which can be satisfied when a first condition is satisfied a specific number of times, and can display a first display mode on a display means based on the satisfaction of the first condition.
Conventionally, an action scenario for moving the movable means according to a series of actions is set as a movable control for moving the movable means within a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow this (prior art document: JP-A-2012-130802).
Specifically, by setting an operation scenario in which the rotation direction and rotation speed of the stepping motor are varied according to the elapsed time after the movement control of the moving means is executed, the rotation status of the stepping motor can be handled. The movable means can be moved in various directions and at various speeds.

In this way, in the case of executing the movement control to move the movable means with various operation contents, by configuring it so that the operation scenario corresponding to the contents of a series of movements can be set, the processing load of the movement control for the movable means can be simplified. It was something that could be transformed into
However, according to the above-described conventional game machine, when an action scenario is set for moving the movable means in a series of actions, the set action scenario continues until the set action scenario is completed. For example, even if the execution condition for executing a new movement control for the movable means is satisfied, the new movement control is executed until the movement control being executed is completed. There was a problem that movement control could not be executed.
Therefore, by solving the problems exemplified above and making it possible to execute new control before the movable control corresponding to the set operation scenario is executed to the end, various To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by executing control without delay.
According to the gaming machine PC1, the second control can be executed earlier when the end condition is satisfied during the period when the first control is being executed than when the end condition is not satisfied. There is an effect that the player who wants to execute the second control can enjoy the first control while expecting that the end condition is satisfied. In addition, since the display mode can be variably displayed based on the establishment of the first condition, the player can play the game while predicting whether or not the end condition is satisfied by grasping the variable state of the display mode. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine PC1, the game machine PC2 is characterized in that a second display mode corresponding to the specific number of times can be displayed on the display means.
According to the gaming machine PC2, the second display mode for establishing the termination condition is displayed on the display means, so that the player can easily grasp the number of times the first condition is satisfied, which is necessary for establishing the termination condition. There is an effect that it is possible to
A gaming machine PC3, wherein the gaming machine PC1 or PC2 has display control means capable of variably displaying the first display mode each time the first condition is satisfied.
According to the gaming machine PC3, the first display mode is variably displayed each time the first condition is satisfied, so the number of times the first condition is satisfied can be easily predicted by grasping the first display mode. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

A gaming machine PC4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines PC1 to PC3, by executing the second control, the movable means can be moved in a movable range different from that of the first control.
According to the game machine PC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines PC1 to PC3, the second control can move the movable means in a movable range different from that of the first control, so that the movable means can be moved in various variable modes. There is an effect that the means can be moved and the performance effect can be enhanced.
<Characteristic PD Group> (Different second control can be executed according to the condition satisfied before the first control ends + more execution is performed when the first end condition is satisfied than when the second end condition is satisfied There is a second control that is easy to be
A movable means movable in a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a first control for moving the movable means can be executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. In a game machine having first control means and second control means capable of executing a second control different from the first control after the first control is completed, A mode during the second control when the first condition is satisfied, and a mode when the first condition is not satisfied and a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first control. A gaming machine PD1 characterized by being configured differently.
Conventionally, an action scenario for moving the movable means with a series of action contents is set as a movable control for moving the movable means within a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow this (prior art document: JP-A-2012-130802).

Specifically, by setting an operation scenario in which the rotation direction and rotation speed of the stepping motor are changed according to the elapsed time after the movement control of the moving means is executed, the rotation status of the stepping motor can be handled. It is configured so that the movable means can be moved in various directions and at various speeds.
In this way, in the case of executing the movement control to move the movable means with various operation contents, by configuring it so that the operation scenario corresponding to the contents of a series of movements can be set, the processing load of the movement control for the movable means can be simplified. It was something that could be transformed.
However, according to the conventional game machine described above, since the movable means can only be operated according to the predetermined operation contents, it is not possible to perform a wide variety of movable control. There was a problem that it became monotonous.
By solving the problems exemplified above and by varying the details of the control to be executed next according to the conditions established before the end of the control of the movement of the movable means, the player's interest in the game is improved. The purpose is to provide a game machine capable of

According to the game machine PD1, since the content of the second control can be varied according to the conditions that are established before the first control ends, after the first control for moving the moving means ends In the case where the second control is configured to be executable, it is possible to prevent the control pattern from becoming monotonous and improve the player's interest in the game.
In the game machine PD1, the game machine is configured to be able to satisfy at least a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition as the predetermined conditions, and the first condition is the The game machine PD2 is characterized in that it can be satisfied when a first predetermined condition is satisfied, and the second condition can be satisfied when the second predetermined condition is satisfied.
According to the gaming machine PD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PD1, the content of the second control can be changed according to the type of the satisfied end condition, so the player is also interested in the satisfied end condition. It has the effect of being able to
A gaming machine PD3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine PD1 or PD2, by executing the second control, the movable means can be moved in a movable range different from that of the first control.

According to the game machine PD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine PD1 or PD2, the movable means can be moved in a movable range different from that of the first control by the second control, so that the movable means can be moved in various variable modes. There is an effect that it is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege more advantageous to a player when the specific second control is executed in any of the game machines PD1 to PD3 than when the specific second control is not executed. A gaming machine PD4 characterized by having:
According to the gaming machine PD4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to PD3, when the specific second control is executed, a privilege more advantageous to the player is given than when it is not executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while expecting that the specific second control will be executed.
In any one of game machines PD2 to PD4, the game machine terminates the first control while the movable means is positioned at the first position, regardless of the type of the satisfied termination condition. A game machine PD5, wherein the second control can be executed in a state in which the movable means is positioned at the first position.

According to the game machine PD5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines PD1 to PD4, the first control can be ended in a state in which the movable means is positioned at the first position regardless of the established end condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the second control can be easily executed.
The game machine PD5 has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the first predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second predetermined condition, The gaming machine PD6 is characterized in that the second predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first predetermined condition when the predetermined operation is not executed.
According to the game machine PD6, in addition to the effects of the game machine PD5, different types of end conditions can be established according to the operation of the operation means, so that the player can end the first control under various end conditions. It is possible to select the game to be played, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.
<Characteristic PE Group> (The second control can be executed after the first control ends + the player can select which of a plurality of end conditions to satisfy)
A movable means movable in a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a first control for moving the movable means can be executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine having first control means, second control means capable of executing second control different from the first control after the first control ends, and operation means operable by a player , the gaming machine operates the operating means to set any one of a plurality of predetermined conditions including at least a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition as the predetermined condition. and the second control means can execute the second control according to the type of the established predetermined condition.

Conventionally, an action scenario for moving the movable means according to a series of actions is set as a movable control for moving the movable means within a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position. There is a game machine configured to allow this (prior art document: JP-A-2012-130802).
Specifically, by setting an operation scenario in which the rotation direction and rotation speed of the stepping motor are varied according to the elapsed time after the movement control of the moving means is executed, the rotation status of the stepping motor can be handled. It is configured so that the movable means can be moved in various directions and at various speeds.
In this way, in the case of executing the movement control to move the movable means with various operation contents, the processing load of the movement control for the movable means can be simplified by configuring the movement scenario corresponding to the contents of the series of movements to be settable. It was something that could be transformed into
However, according to the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the movable means can only be operated with predetermined operation contents, it is not possible to perform a wide variety of movable control. There was a problem that it became monotonous.

By solving the problems exemplified above and by varying the details of the next control to be executed according to the conditions established until the end of the control of the movement of the movable means, the player's enjoyment of the game is improved. The purpose is to provide a game machine capable of
According to the gaming machine PE1, different end conditions can be established based on the operation to the operating means, so that the player can select a game for ending the first control under various end conditions. There is an effect that the willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.
In the game machine PE1, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means, the first predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second predetermined condition, and when the predetermined operation is not performed, the The game machine PE2 is characterized in that the second predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first predetermined condition.
According to the gaming machine PE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PE1, different end conditions can be established based on the operation of the operating means, so that the game allows the player to end the first control under various end conditions. can be selected, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine PE2, the first predetermined condition can be satisfied before the second predetermined condition, and the first predetermined condition is satisfied more than the second predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine PE3 characterized by being able to give a privilege more advantageous to a player than a gaming machine PE3.
According to the gaming machine PE3, when the first end condition is satisfied, it is easier for the player to receive an advantageous privilege. can be operated.
In the gaming machine PE3, the first control can be terminated earlier when the first predetermined condition is satisfied than when the second predetermined condition is satisfied. PE4.
According to the game machine PE4, when the first end condition is satisfied, the first control can be terminated earlier than when the second end condition is satisfied, so the second control is executed earlier. There is an effect that it becomes possible.

A game machine E5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines PE1 to PE4, by executing the second control, the movable means can be moved in a movable range different from that of the first control.
According to the game machine PE5, in addition to the effects of the game machines PE1 to PE4, the movable means can be moved in a movable range different from that of the first control by the second control, so that the movable means can be moved in various variable modes. There is an effect that it is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.
<Characteristic PF Group> (When the execution condition of the predetermined control is satisfied, the execution of the predetermined control is suppressed until the voice being output satisfies the predetermined condition)
A first control execution means for executing a predetermined first control, an operable operation means, and a predetermined operation performed on the operation means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. second control execution means for executing a second control different from the first control based on the fact that a first condition that can be satisfied at least in the above is satisfied during the execution of the first control; The second control execution means continues the first control until a predetermined second condition is satisfied after the first condition is satisfied when the first condition is satisfied during execution of the first control. The game machine PF1 is characterized in that it is configured to be executed by
Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest. In addition, in such conventional game machines, as entertainment effects, voice effects by outputting sounds such as music, and movable effects by moving movable members such as accessories are performed in addition to display effects. are also known. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to set the effects appropriately when the display effect, the sound effect, and the movable effect are combined.
On the other hand, according to the gaming machine PF1, even if the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first control, the first control can be continued until the second condition is satisfied, so the second control is changed to the second control. The condition can be established and executed, and the player can have the impression that the first control and the second control are interlocked. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.
The gaming machine PF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine PF1, the predetermined execution condition is a condition that can be established when an operation of a first operation content is performed on the operating means.
According to the game machine PF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine PF1, it is also possible to execute the first control by establishing a predetermined execution condition by operating the operating means, and to perform the first control while the first control is being executed. can be established to execute the second control, so there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

The game machine PF1 or PF2 includes reproduction means capable of reproducing predetermined reproduction data, and audio output means capable of outputting sound corresponding to the reproduction data reproduced by the reproduction means, and executing the first control. The game machine PF3 is characterized in that the means can execute, as the first control, control for causing the reproduction means to reproduce specific reproduction data corresponding to a predetermined specific sound.
According to the game machine PF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine PF1 or PF2, control for outputting a specific sound can be executed, so there is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized. .
In the game machine PF3, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when a predetermined range in the specific reproduction data is reproduced, and when the predetermined range is reproduced, a specific sound is output by the sound output means. A gaming machine PF4 characterized in that it is configured to be.
According to the game machine PF4, since the execution timing of the second control can be limited to the situation where the predetermined range is being reproduced, the sound output at the timing when the second control is executed is fixed to a specific sound. There is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

A gaming machine PF5 characterized in that the gaming machine PF4 is configured such that the predetermined range can be reproduced multiple times during execution of the first control.
According to the gaming machine PF5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PF4, the predetermined range of the specific reproduction data is reproduced a plurality of times during the execution of the first control. When the condition is established, the second control can be executed by performing the regeneration of the next predetermined range, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the cancellation of the execution of the second control itself.
In the game machine PF4 or PF5, the game machine PF6 is characterized in that the predetermined range is a reproduction range in which the sound of a new scale is output by the sound output means.
According to the game machine PF6, in addition to the effects of the game machine PF5, the second control is executed in accordance with the output timing of the sound of the new scale, so it seems as if the sound and the second control are synchronized. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a highly interesting presentation mode.

Any one of the gaming machines PF1 to PF6 includes suggestive image display means capable of displaying a predetermined suggestive image during execution of the first control, and the predetermined suggestive image is displayed during execution of the specific effect. The game machine PF7 is characterized in that the display mode is more easily set to suggest that the degree of advantage is higher when the first condition is met than when the first condition is not met.
According to the gaming machine PF7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines PF1 to PF6, the game can be played while expecting the first condition to be satisfied during the execution of the first control. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.
Any one of the game machines PF1 to PF7 is provided with establishment determination means for determining whether or not the first condition is established based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during execution of the first control. , the establishment determining means satisfies the first condition with a predetermined first probability when the specific condition is established during a first period included in the execution period of the first control; A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that when the specific condition is satisfied during a second period different from the period, the first condition can be satisfied with a second probability lower than the first probability. PF8.
According to the gaming machine PF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines PF1 to PF7, there is an effect that the satisfaction of the specific condition in the first period can be expected more strongly than in the second period.

<Characteristic PG group> (Even if the accessory reaches the production position in a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the displacement operation of the displacement member may or may not be executed.)
Displacement means capable of displacing a predetermined range; First effect execution means for executing a first effect accompanied by a displacement operation of the displacement means based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition; and During execution of the first effect for causing the displacement means to perform a prescribed displacement action based on the fact that the displacement means reaches a prescribed performance position included in the prescribed range after a predetermined specific condition is established in and control means capable of executing specific control, wherein the specific control is performed when the displacement means reaches the predetermined effect position under the establishment of a predetermined first situation after the specific condition is established. A game machine characterized in that the specific control is suppressed when control is executed and the displacement means reaches the predetermined performance position under a second situation different from the first situation. PG1.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include variable members that are operated by motors or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of effect operations by configuring a plurality of different operations to be settable for the variable member (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008 -012194).
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately set the motions of the variable members. In addition, in such conventional game machines, as an entertainment effect, in a situation where the variable member has already performed the first variable action, a second variable action different from the first variable action is performed on the variable member. There is also a configuration in which the setting conditions for setting the second variable action can be satisfied, and the interest is improved by making the user pay attention to whether the first variable action is continued or whether it is switched to the second variable action. Some exist. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the variable motion may become unnatural when switching from the first variable motion to the second variable motion.
On the other hand, according to the game machine PG1, even if the predetermined effect position is reached, it is possible to provide a case where the specific control is executed and a case where it is suppressed, so that the effect mode can be further diversified. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine PG1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. and a display means capable of displaying identification information. 2. The game machine PG2 is characterized in that each of the situations 2 is a configuration that can be established during execution of the first effect for indicating the specific determination result.
According to the game machine PG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine PG1, both the first situation and the second situation can be established during the execution of the first effect for indicating the specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable displacement operation can be realized.
In the game machine PG1 or PG2, the first situation is established when the motion of the displacement means when the displacement means reaches the predetermined performance position is a motion that satisfies a predetermined first condition. and the second situation is established when the action of the displacement means when the displacement means reaches the predetermined effect position is an action that satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. The game machine PG3 is characterized by a situation in which
According to the game machine PG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine PG1 or PG2, it is possible to vary whether or not to execute the specific control depending on the operation content when the displacement means reaches the predetermined effect position. There is an effect that a more suitable displacement operation can be realized.

In the gaming machine PG3, a displacement direction determination means capable of determining a displacement direction of the displacement means when reaching the effect position is provided, and the first situation is when the displacement means performs a displacement operation in the first displacement direction. It is a situation that is established when it is determined that the predetermined performance position has been reached during the performance, and the second situation is that the displacement means moves in a second displacement direction different from the first displacement direction. The game machine PG4 is characterized in that the situation is established when it is determined that the predetermined performance position is reached while the displacement motion is performed.
According to the game machine PG4, it is possible to change whether to execute or suppress the specific control according to the displacement direction when the displacement means reaches the predetermined effect position, so the operation mode of the displacement member is more suitable. has the effect of being able to be set to
In any of the gaming machines PG1 to PG4, when the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the first effect, at least the specific control is performed regardless of whether the first situation is satisfied. A gaming machine PG5 characterized in that it has a configuration in which execution is suppressed.
According to the gaming machine PG5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines PG1 to PG4, since the specific control is not executed when the specific condition is not satisfied, the specific control is executed and the predetermined displacement operation is performed. There is an effect that the player who desires to do so can be made to expect that the specific condition is established.

In any of the game machines PG1 to PG5, when the situation when the predetermined effect position is reached becomes the second situation and the specific control is suppressed, the specific condition must be newly established. The game machine PG6 is characterized in that the specific control can be executed based on the establishment of the first situation thereafter.
According to the game machine PG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines PG1 to PG5, even if the specific control is once suppressed, the specific control can be executed by subsequently establishing the first situation. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable displacement operation can be realized.
In the game machine PG4, the predetermined displacement action includes at least a displacement action in which the displacement means is displaced from the predetermined performance position in the first displacement direction. .
According to the game machine PG7, in addition to the effects of the game machine PG4, when the displacement operation in the first displacement direction is performed and the predetermined performance position is reached, the specific control is executed and the movement is directly moved in the first displacement direction. On the other hand, when the displacement motion in the second displacement direction is performed and the predetermined effect position is reached, the specific control can be suppressed, so the displacement member displaced in the second displacement direction is There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which a sudden displacement in the first displacement direction is performed when reaching a predetermined effect position, and the appearance of the displacement operation becomes unnatural.

Any one of the game machines PG1 to PG7 is characterized by comprising an operable operation means, and the specific condition being a condition that can be established when a predetermined operation content is performed on the operation means. Game machine PG8.
According to the game machine PG8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines PG1 to PG7, the player can select whether or not to perform a specific control depending on whether or not to perform an operation of a predetermined operation content. It has the effect of being able to
In the gaming machine PG8, the first effect is composed of a performance in which the displacement means can reach the predetermined effect position a plurality of times, and the specific condition is that the displacement means reaches the predetermined effect position in the first situation. is established when an operation of the predetermined operation content is performed on the operating means during the period from reaching the effect position in the first situation to reaching the predetermined effect position in the first situation. A gaming machine PG10 characterized by being a condition for obtaining.
According to the game machine PG10, in addition to the effects of the game machine PG8, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the operation means is operated by considering the displacement position of the displacement means, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic PH Group> (When a specific condition is satisfied after the displacement condition of the displacement member is satisfied until the displacement timing is reached, the displacement operation of the displacement member is suppressed.)
displacement means capable of displacing a predetermined range; determination means for determining execution of a specific displacement operation in which the displacement means is displaced in a specific displacement pattern based on the establishment of a first condition; execution means for executing the specific displacement motion based on the satisfaction of a second condition after the execution of the motion is determined; and a period from the satisfaction of the first condition to the satisfaction of the second condition. and suppressing means capable of suppressing execution of the specific displacement action based on the establishment of a specific condition that can be satisfied at least in the game machine PH1.
Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is operated by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are those that can perform a wide variety of effect operations by configuring a plurality of different operations to be settable for the variable member (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008 -012194).
However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to appropriately set the motions of the variable members. In addition, in such conventional game machines, as an entertainment effect, in a situation where the variable member has already performed the first variable action, a second variable action different from the first variable action is performed on the variable member. There is also a configuration in which the setting conditions for setting the second variable action can be satisfied, and the interest is improved by making the user pay attention to whether the first variable action is continued or whether it is switched to the second variable action. Some exist.
However, in such a conventional game machine, once the setting condition for setting the second variable action is established, the first variable action cannot be continued, so the degree of freedom in rendering is reduced. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the game machine PH1, even if the first condition is satisfied, if the specific condition is satisfied after that, the execution of the specific displacement action is suppressed. It is possible to realize a playability that makes one expect that it will not be established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
A game machine PH2 is characterized in that the game machine PH1 is provided with displacement means capable of being displaced, and the specific condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the displacement means performs a predetermined displacement.
According to the game machine PH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine PH1, the game allows the player to select whether to perform the specific displacement action or to suppress it, depending on whether or not to cause the displacement means to perform a predetermined displacement. Since it is possible to realize sexuality, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the game machine PH2, the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when an operation of the specific operation content is performed on the operation means during a specific period, and the specific condition is the first condition. The gaming machine PH3 is characterized in that the condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the operation of the specific operation content is performed on the operating means during the specific period after the condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine PH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine PH2, the first condition can be satisfied by performing an operation with a specific operation content in a specific period, and the specific condition is not satisfied after the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of operations for the operation means is adjusted so that the specific condition is not satisfied while the first condition is satisfied.
A game machine PH4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines PH1 to PH3, the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied even after the specific condition is satisfied.
According to the game machine PH4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines PH1 to PH3, even if the specific condition is met once, the specific displacement action is executed when the first condition is met again. It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one expect the first condition to be satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
A gaming machine PH5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines PH1 to PH4, the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied with a predetermined probability each time a predetermined third condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine PH5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines PH1 to PH4, there is an effect that the first condition can be expected to be satisfied each time the third condition is satisfied.
In any one of the gaming machines PH1 to PH3, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first condition cannot be established at least from the establishment of the specific condition to the establishment of the second condition. pH6.
According to the gaming machine PH6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines PH1 to PH3, once the specific condition is satisfied, the specific displacement action cannot be executed. A game can be played by concentrating so as not to be established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
In the gaming machine PH3, the first condition includes a first type that is satisfied when the operation of the specific operation content is performed on the operating means for the first number of times, and a first condition that the operation of the specific operation content A gaming machine PH7 characterized in that one of a plurality of types including at least a second type that is established when the game is played a second number of times greater than one is set.

According to the gaming machine PH7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PH3, variations can be given to the first condition, and the presentation mode can be diversified, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. has the effect of being able to
A gaming machine PH8, wherein the gaming machine PH7 is provided with concealing means for concealing whether the first condition of the first type is set or the first condition of the second type is set.
According to the gaming machine PH8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine PH7, it is possible to realize a game property that makes it possible to predict whether the first condition is the first type or the second type. There is an effect that interest can be improved more.
<Characteristic PI Group> (The origin position is the position where the second control can be executed after the first control for moving the movable means a plurality of times is completed and the end condition is satisfied.)
A movable means movable in a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position, and control for moving the movable means from the first position to the second position a plurality of times. A first control means capable of executing a first control to be executed, and a second control means capable of executing a second control different from the first control after the first control by the first control means is completed. A gaming machine comprising: determining means capable of determining that a specific condition is established in a state in which the movable means is positioned at the first position; and the gaming machine, when the specific condition is established is a gaming machine PI1 characterized in that it is possible to terminate the first control and execute the second control even during execution of the first control.

Conventionally, an action scenario for moving the movable means with a series of action contents is set as a movable control for moving the movable means within a movable range including at least a first position and a second position different from the first position. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow this (prior art document: JP-A-2012-130802).
Specifically, by setting an operation scenario in which the rotation direction and rotation speed of the stepping motor are changed according to the elapsed time after the movement control of the moving means is executed, the rotation status of the stepping motor can be handled. The movable means can be moved in various directions and at various speeds.
In this way, in the case of executing the movement control to move the movable means with various operation contents, by configuring it so that the operation scenario corresponding to the contents of a series of movements can be set, the processing load of the movement control for the movable means can be simplified. It was something that could be transformed.
However, according to the above-described conventional game machine, when an action scenario is set for moving the movable means in a series of actions, the set action scenario continues until the set action scenario is completed. For example, even if the execution condition for executing a new movement control for the movable means is satisfied, the new movement control is executed until the movement control being executed is completed. There was a problem that movement control could not be executed.

By solving the problems exemplified above, and making it possible to execute new control before the movable control corresponding to the set operation scenario is executed to the end, various controls whose execution conditions are satisfied can be executed. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by executing the game without delay.
According to the gaming machine PI1, since it is configured to be able to determine whether the specific condition is established at the first position, which is the movable start position of the movable means, even when the specific condition is established, the movable start position The first control can be terminated. Therefore, there is no need to set a position different from the first position in order to end the first control, and there is an effect that the processing load related to the movement control of the movable means can be reduced.
In the game machine PI1, the movable means is positioned at the first position when the first control by the first control means ends.
According to the game machine PI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine PI1, the first control can be executed with the movable means positioned at the first position regardless of whether the first control is terminated in the middle or executed to the end. Since the second control can be terminated, the second control can be reliably executed while the movable means is positioned at the first position. Therefore, there is an effect that the control contents of the second control can be simplified.

In the game machine PI2, the movable means moves in either a first direction from the first position to the second position or a second direction from the second position to the first position. A game machine PI3, which is movable and has a restricting member for restricting the movable means located at the first position from moving in the second direction.
According to the game machine PI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine PI2, the movement of the movable means from the first position to the second direction can be regulated by the regulating member. There is an effect that the movable means can be easily positioned at the first position even when a problem occurs in the first control performed.
In the gaming machine PI3, the first distance, which is the distance between the movable means positioned at the first position and the regulating member, is longer than the second distance, which is the distance between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine PI4 characterized by being constructed to be short.
According to the game machine PI4, in addition to the effects of the game machine PI3, the second distance can be made longer than the first distance, so that the movable range of the movable means that is moved by the first control can be easily widened. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines PI2 to PI4, the movable means is movable from the first position in the first direction to a third position spaced apart from the second position, and the second control is A gaming machine PI5 characterized by being capable of moving said movable means from said first position to said third position by being executed.
According to the game machine PI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines PI2 to PI4, it is possible to execute the movement with a wider movable range than the first control as the second control, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. has the effect of
A game machine PI6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines PI2 to PI5, the movable means located at the first position is configured to be visible from the outside.
According to the game machine PI6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines PI2 to PI5, the movable means positioned at the first position can be visually recognized, so that the first control for the movable means does not have an abnormality. There is an effect that it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not there is any.

In the game machine PI6, at least a part of the movable means positioned at the first position and the regulating member are in contact with each other, and a predetermined surface of the movable means is continuous with the surface. A game machine PI7 characterized in that a specific display mode is formed so as to straddle a predetermined surface of the regulating member formed at a position.
According to the game machine PI7, in addition to the effects of the game machine PI6, the state in which the movable means is positioned at the first position can be easily grasped by visually observing a specific display mode. There is an effect that it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the first control for.

<5083 system feature group>
<Characteristic group A> (Information corresponding to the prize ball information stored in the storage means can be displayed, and during the first period of the specific period including the jackpot game period, based on the updated prize ball information The first mode is displayed on the display means + in the second period after the first period has passed, the second display mode according to the number of times the winning ball information is received is displayed on the display means)
A plurality of ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first control means capable of executing control related to the game, and a second control means capable of executing control based on a predetermined signal output from the first control means and the first control means includes privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters one of the plurality of ball entering means, and the privilege giving means an output means capable of outputting to the second control means an information signal containing information relating to at least part of the privilege given by the second control means, wherein the second control means is output by the output means receiving means capable of receiving said information signal received by said receiving means; storage means capable of storing said information contained in said information signal received by said receiving means; and said information contained in said information signal newly received by said receiving means update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the above; and display control capable of displaying a predetermined display mode on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means. wherein the display control means displays the first display mode based on the update information updated by the update means in a first period of a specific period including a game period that is advantageous to the player. In a second period set after the first period, a display mode different from the first display mode displayed during the first period is displayed based on the update information. 2. A gaming machine A1, wherein two display modes can be displayed on the display means.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine configured to add and display the number of won prize balls on a liquid crystal display screen each time the number of prize balls is obtained during a jackpot game (prior art document: JP-A-2017-35242). Gazette). Specifically, as a jackpot game, control for opening the big winning device is executed, and based on receiving a payout command indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to game balls entering the big winning device It is configured to display the number of winning balls that have already been acquired. In this way, the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is added and displayed at any time, so that the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls obtained.

However, in recent gaming machines, by making game balls enter a separate winning port other than the big winning device, prize balls are paid out based on winning in the big winning device and prize balls based on winning in the separate winning port are used. and are executed during the jackpot game to increase the number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the jackpot game. In such a conventional gaming machine, if the number of winning balls that have already been won is added and displayed based on the receipt of a payout command corresponding to the number of winning balls that have been won during a jackpot game, the game machine will not function as a big winning device. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of prize balls obtained based on the winning.

To solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and even if prize balls are paid out based on winning in a plurality of winning holes during a jackpot game, it is possible to win a prize to a winning hole that is open-controlled in the jackpot game. The player is informed of the number of prize balls put out based on the game in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player is notified of the total number of prize balls including the number of prize balls based on the winning in another prize winning port finally obtained during the jackpot game. The purpose is to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand by informing the player.

According to the gaming machine A1, during the first period, the first display mode corresponding to the update information regarding the given privilege is displayed, and during the second period, the second display mode different from the first display mode is displayed. Therefore, by displaying the second display mode to the player who did not notice that the first display mode was displayed, the contents of the update information can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine A1, the display control means is capable of displaying, as the second display mode, an individual specific mode corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means. Machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the number of specific modes corresponding to the number of times the privilege is granted is displayed as the second display mode. The number of times the privilege has been given can be easily understood by the player just by grasping it.

In the game machine A2, the display control means can cause the display means to display a plurality of the specific modes as the second display mode in a mode in which the order stored in the storage means can be identified. A game machine A3 characterized by:

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, by grasping the plurality of specific modes displayed on the display means, it is possible to grasp the order in which the benefits are given. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the content of the award in a more comprehensible manner.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the plurality of ball-entering means include at least a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means; As a privilege, a first privilege that can give a first prize ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. and a second privilege that can grant a second prize ball having a value different from that of the first prize ball based on the display control means, wherein the display mode based on the information on the first privilege; 2. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being able to display in a different manner from the display mode based on the information on the privilege.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, when award balls with different values are granted as benefits, display modes corresponding to the respective benefits can be displayed. It is possible to grasp the contents of the special benefits in a more comprehensible manner.

A gaming machine A5, wherein any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4 has an erasing means capable of erasing at least part of the information stored in the storage means when an erasing condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, when the erasing condition is satisfied, at least a part of the information stored in the storage means is erased by the erasing means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the types of display modes displayed on the display means by the display control means.

A game machine A6 in the game machine A5, wherein the storage means can store the information up to a specific number.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, it is possible to limit the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of types.

The game machine A7 is characterized in that the erasing condition can be established when a predetermined period of time elapses after the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaches the specified number.

According to the game machine A7, even when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaches the upper limit, the erasure condition can be satisfied with the lapse of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which new information is not stored from continuing for a long time.

<Feature B group> (Information corresponding to the prize ball information stored in the storage means can be displayed, and during the first period of the specific period including the jackpot game period, based on the updated prize ball information After the first mode is displayed on the display means + after a specific period has passed, a specific effect is executed according to the information stored in the storage means)
A plurality of ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first control means capable of executing control related to the game, and a second control means capable of executing control based on a predetermined signal output from the first control means and the first control means includes privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters one of the plurality of ball entering means, and the privilege giving means an output means capable of outputting to the second control means an information signal containing information relating to at least part of the privilege given by the second control means, wherein the second control means is output by the output means receiving means capable of receiving said information signal received by said receiving means; storage means capable of storing said information contained in said information signal received by said receiving means; and said information contained in said information signal newly received by said receiving means update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the above; and display control capable of displaying a predetermined display mode on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means. wherein the display control means displays the first display mode based on the update information updated by the update means in a first period of a specific period including a game period that is advantageous to the player. means, and the game machine can execute a specific effect according to the information stored in the storage means after the specific period has passed.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine configured to add and display the number of won prize balls on a liquid crystal display screen each time the number of prize balls is obtained during a jackpot game (prior art document: JP-A-2017-35242). Gazette). Specifically, as a jackpot game, control for opening the big winning device is executed, and based on receiving a payout command indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to game balls entering the big winning device It is configured to display the number of winning balls that have already been acquired. In this way, the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is added and displayed at any time, so that the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls obtained.

However, in recent gaming machines, by making game balls enter a separate winning port other than the big winning device, prize balls are paid out based on winning in the big winning device and prize balls based on winning in the separate winning port are used. and are executed during the jackpot game to increase the number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the jackpot game. In such a conventional gaming machine, if the number of winning balls that have already been won is added and displayed based on the receipt of a payout command corresponding to the number of winning balls that have been won during a jackpot game, the game machine will not function as a big winning device. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of prize balls obtained based on the winning.

To solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and even if prize balls are paid out based on winning in a plurality of winning holes during a jackpot game, it is possible to win a prize to a winning hole that is open-controlled in the jackpot game. The player is informed of the number of prize balls put out based on the game in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player is notified of the total number of prize balls including the number of prize balls based on the winning in another prize winning port finally obtained during the jackpot game. The purpose is to provide a game that is easy for a player to understand by informing the player.

According to the gaming machine B1, the first display mode based on the update information is displayed during the specific period, and after the specific period has elapsed, the specific effect corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is executed. It is possible to make it easy to execute the performance based on the provision of the for a long time, and to enhance the performance effect.

In the gaming machine B1, in the second period set after the first period in the specific period, the display mode based on the update information is the first display mode displayed during the first period. is capable of displaying a different second display mode on said display means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the first display mode corresponding to the update information regarding the granted privilege is displayed during the first period, and the first display mode is displayed during the second period. Since the different second display mode is displayed, the content of the update information can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the second display mode to the player who did not notice that the first display mode was displayed. .

In a game machine B1 or B2, an effect period determination capable of determining a different length effect period as the specific effect effect period according to the number of the information stored in the storage means after the specific effect has passed. A game machine B3 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine B3, since the length of the effect period of the specific effect can be varied according to the number of information stored when the specific time has passed, the specific effect can be executed for a longer period of time. It is possible to make the player who plays the game more interested in the number of information stored in the storage means.

In the gaming machine B3, the performance period determining means determines that the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is greater than the first period when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is larger than the specific number. The game machine B4 is characterized in that it is configured to facilitate determination of the performance period of the second period which is the longest.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the second period is more likely to be determined as the effect period of the specific effect when the storage means stores more information than when the memory means stores less information. It is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to execute the specific performance for a longer time to play the game willingly so as to enter many game balls into the ball entering means.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the plurality of ball-entering means includes at least a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and the privilege providing means is a first privilege that can give a first prize ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means as the privilege, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. and a second privilege capable of awarding a second prize ball having a value different from that of the first prize ball, and the gaming machine stores the second prize ball in the storage means after the specific period has passed. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being capable of executing the specific effect according to the information about the first privilege that is provided.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B4, a specific effect corresponding to the number of pieces of information regarding the first privilege among the plurality of types of information stored in the storage means is executed. Therefore, the player can be interested not only in the total number of pieces of information stored in the storage means but also in the type of information stored.

Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5 has a second privilege giving means capable of giving a second privilege different from the privilege when the performance result of the specific performance becomes the specific performance result, wherein the gaming machine can change the degree of expectation that the second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means according to the number of the information stored in the storage means after the specific period has passed. A gaming machine B6 characterized by:

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the second privilege is provided according to the number of privilege information stored in the storage means when the specific period ends. Since the degree of expectation can be varied, it is possible to make the player who expects to receive the second privilege more interested in the privilege information stored in the storage means.

In the game machine B6, the second privilege is obtained when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means after the passage of the specific period is larger than the specific number than when the number is smaller than the specific number. A game machine B7 characterized by being configured so as to increase the degree of expectation given.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the greater the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means after the elapse of the specific period, the higher the degree of expectation for the provision of the second privilege. A player can be motivated to play a game with the aim of storing more information in the storage means.

<Characteristic group C> (Information corresponding to the prize ball information stored in the storage means can be displayed, and during the first period of the specific period including the jackpot game period, based on the updated prize ball information The first mode is displayed on the display means + there is a period during which the information is updated when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and a period during which the information is not updated)
A plurality of ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first control means capable of executing control related to the game, and a second control means capable of executing control based on a predetermined signal output from the first control means and the first control means includes privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters one of the plurality of ball entering means, and the privilege giving means an output means capable of outputting to the second control means an information signal containing information relating to at least part of the privilege given by the second control means, wherein the second control means is output by the output means receiving means capable of receiving said information signal received by said receiving means; storage means capable of storing said information contained in said information signal received by said receiving means; and said information contained in said information signal newly received by said receiving means update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the above; and display control capable of displaying a predetermined display mode on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means. wherein the display control means displays the first display mode based on the update information updated by the update means in a first period of a specific period including a game period that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being able to set a restricted state in which the information is not updated by the updating means when a first condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine configured to add and display the number of won prize balls on a liquid crystal display screen each time the number of prize balls is obtained during a jackpot game (prior art document: JP-A-2017-35242). Gazette). Specifically, as a jackpot game, control for opening the big winning device is executed, and based on receiving a payout command indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to game balls entering the big winning device It is configured to display the number of winning balls that have already been acquired. In this way, the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is added and displayed at any time, so that the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls obtained.

However, since the same number of winning balls is paid out each time when game balls enter the big winning device, the display mode of the addition display displayed on the liquid crystal display screen becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game. There was a problem of hoarding.

By solving the problems exemplified above, etc., and providing variations in the display mode of addition display during the jackpot game, the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game, and the player's interest in the game is improved. The purpose is to provide

According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to set a restricted state in which information is not updated by the update means based on the establishment of the first condition. Variations can be given to the display mode displayed on the display means, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine C1, in the second period set after the first period in the specific period, the display mode based on the update information is the first display mode displayed during the first period. is capable of displaying a different second display mode on said display means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the first display mode corresponding to the update information regarding the granted privilege is displayed during the first period, and the first display mode is displayed during the second period. Since the different second display mode is displayed, the content of the update information can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the second display mode to the player who did not notice that the first display mode was displayed. .

In gaming machine C1 or C2, gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the first condition is established when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaches a predetermined number.

According to the game machine C3, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaches a predetermined number, the first condition is established and the restricted state is set, so excessive updating of information is suppressed. can do.

A gaming machine C4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C3, it has erasing means capable of erasing at least part of the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, part of the information stored in the storage means can be erased by the erasing means, so that the restricted state can be released. Therefore, since updating of information by the updating means can be resumed, it is possible to provide variation in the display mode displayed on the display means when a game ball enters the ball entering means, and the player can enjoy playing the game. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

A gaming machine C5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, at least part of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means is not granted while the restricted state is set.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, while the restricted state is set, not only the updating of the information by the updating means but also the giving of the privilege by the privilege giving means are performed at the same time. Since it is possible to limit the number of copies, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is given an excessive privilege.

In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the plurality of ball-entering means includes at least a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and the privilege providing means is a first privilege that can give a first prize ball based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means as the privilege, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a second privilege that can be awarded a second prize ball having a value different from that of the first prize ball based on the fact that the A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it can be established when either the number of stored information on the first privilege or the number of information on the second privilege reaches a predetermined number.

In any one of game machines C3 to C6, the erasing means can erase one piece of information in a state in which two or more pieces of information are stored in the storage means, A gaming machine C7 characterized by having a second erasing means capable of erasing two or more pieces of information.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C3 to C6, the number of pieces of information erased by the erasing means and the number of pieces of information erased by the second erasing means can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict how many pieces of information stored in the storage means will be erased.

<Characteristic group D> (Information corresponding to the prize ball information stored in the storage means can be displayed, and during the first period of the specific period including the jackpot game period, based on the updated prize ball information The first mode is displayed on the display means + the contents of the privilege given are different before and after the memory means reaches the upper limit)
A plurality of ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first control means capable of executing control related to the game, and a second control means capable of executing control based on a predetermined signal output from the first control means and the first control means includes privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters one of the plurality of ball entering means, and the privilege giving means an output means capable of outputting to the second control means an information signal containing information relating to at least part of the privilege given by the second control means, wherein the second control means is output by the output means receiving means capable of receiving said information signal received by said receiving means; storage means capable of storing said information contained in said information signal received by said receiving means; and said information contained in said information signal newly received by said receiving means update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the above; and display control capable of displaying a predetermined display mode on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means. wherein the display control means displays the first display mode based on the update information updated by the update means in a first period of a specific period including a game period that is advantageous to the player. The game machine can display the predetermined privilege granted by the privilege granting means in a first state in which a specific condition is satisfied and in a second state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. The game machine D1 is characterized in that it is possible to make the contents of the game machine D1 different.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine configured to add and display the number of won prize balls on a liquid crystal display screen each time the number of prize balls is obtained during a jackpot game (prior art document: JP-A-2017-35242). Gazette). Specifically, as a jackpot game, control for opening the big winning device is executed, and based on receiving a payout command indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to game balls entering the big winning device It is configured to display the number of winning balls that have already been acquired. In this way, the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is added and displayed at any time, so that the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls obtained.

However, since the same number of winning balls are paid out each time when game balls enter the big winning device, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game.

By solving the problems exemplified above, etc., and by differentiating the contents of the privilege given when a game ball is entered into a specific ball entering means, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. , to improve the interest in the game of the player.

According to the gaming machine D1, the content of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means can be changed according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine D1, in the second period set after the first period in the specific period, the display mode based on the update information is the first display mode displayed during the first period. is capable of displaying a different second display mode on said display means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the first display mode corresponding to the update information regarding the granted privilege is displayed during the first period, and the first display mode is displayed during the second period. Since the different second display mode is displayed, the content of the update information can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the second display mode to the player who did not notice that the first display mode was displayed. .

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the privilege giving means can give a privilege more advantageous to the player than the privilege given in the second state as the privilege given in the first state. Characterized game machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first state can provide the player with a benefit that is more advantageous than the second state, so let's establish the specific condition. And the player can be motivated to play the game.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that the specific condition in the game machine D3 can be established according to the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, it is possible to establish a specific condition according to the information stored in the storage means. It is possible to easily make the player interested.

In the gaming machine D4, the storage means is configured to be able to store a plurality of the information, and the specific condition can be satisfied when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number. A game machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can satisfy a specific condition, so that the player is provided with a The number of pieces of information stored in the means can be easily made interesting.

A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that in the gaming machine D4 or D5, it has an erasing means capable of erasing at least part of the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, at least part of the information stored in the storage means can be deleted by the erasing means. can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a period in which the specific condition is not satisfied from continuing for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the privilege giving means can give a predetermined number of prize balls as the privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball entering means, and the gaming machine is a gaming machine D7, wherein a larger number of prize balls can be given as the privilege in the first state than the number of prize balls given as the privilege in the second state.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the first state in which the specific condition is satisfied has more prizes than the second state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. Since the ball can be easily obtained, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the specific condition.

<Feature group E> (When information corresponding to the prize ball information stored in the storage means can be displayed, and prize balls are won during the first period of the specific period including the jackpot game period, , the specific display mode corresponding to the won prize balls is displayed during the first period, and if the prize balls are won during the second period, the specific display mode is displayed after at least the second period has passed)
A plurality of ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first control means capable of executing control related to the game, and a second control means capable of executing control based on a predetermined signal output from the first control means and the first control means includes privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters one of the plurality of ball entering means, and the privilege giving means an output means capable of outputting to the second control means an information signal containing information relating to at least part of the privilege given by the second control means, wherein the second control means is output by the output means receiving means capable of receiving said information signal received by said receiving means; storage means capable of storing said information contained in said information signal received by said receiving means; and said information contained in said information signal newly received by said receiving means update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the above; and display control capable of displaying a predetermined display mode on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means. means, wherein the display control means controls, when the information is stored in the storage means during a first period of a specific period including a game period advantageous to the player, the first When the specific display mode can be displayed during the period, and the information is stored during a second period different from the first period of the specific period, at least after the second period ends, the A gaming machine E1 characterized by being capable of displaying a specific display mode.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine configured to add and display the number of won prize balls on a liquid crystal display screen each time the number of prize balls is obtained during a jackpot game (prior art document: JP-A-2017-35242). Gazette). Specifically, as a jackpot game, control for opening the big winning device is executed, and based on receiving a payout command indicating the number of prize balls paid out due to game balls entering the big winning device It is configured to display the number of winning balls that have already been acquired. In this way, the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is added and displayed at any time, so that the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls obtained.

However, since the number of winning balls is added and displayed whenever a game ball enters the big winning device, the display mode of the added display becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the timing at which the display mode is added and displayed is changed according to the period in which the game ball is entered into a specific ball entering means. By doing so, it is intended to prevent a player from getting bored with the game and to improve the player's interest in the game.

Conventionally, a big win game and a small win game with a lower value than the big win game can be executed based on the result of a special pattern lottery, and an advantageous game state in which the small win game is frequently executed is set. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow this (prior art document: JP-A-2018-110662). Then, in a state in which the advantageous game state is set, every time the small winning game is executed, a small winning game effect is executed in which the player can be notified of the number of prize balls obtained in the small winning game. there is something

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, whether or not to execute a small winning game is determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery. There is a problem that a winning is not made, and the execution interval of the small winning game performance becomes empty, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

In addition, when a limit is set for the period in which the advantageous game state is set, the execution interval of the small winning game production is vacant, so that the number of small winning games executed during the advantageous gaming state is reduced. There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is further reduced because the player is easily made aware of the fact that the game will end. In addition, since the number of prize balls obtained during the small winning game is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at any time, the player can easily grasp whether or not the small winning game is executed just by looking at the liquid crystal display screen. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play becomes more likely to decrease.

By solving the problems exemplified above, etc., and by varying the timing of displaying the number of prize balls acquired in the small winning game executed during the advantageous game state, the player can grasp the execution timing of the small winning game. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a player's motivation to play by making it difficult.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the specific display mode is displayed can be changed according to the period in which the information is stored, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the information was stored. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine E1, in the second period set after the first period in the specific period, the display mode based on the update information is the first display mode displayed during the first period. is capable of displaying a different second display mode on said display means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first display mode corresponding to the update information regarding the granted privilege is displayed during the first period, and the first display mode is displayed during the second period. Since the different second display mode is displayed, the content of the update information can be grasped in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the second display mode to the player who did not notice that the first display mode was displayed. .

In the gaming machine E2, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the specific period includes at least a period in which the first period is set after the second period has passed.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, by setting the first period after the second period elapses, when the information is stored during the second period and when the information is stored during the first period Since the specific display mode can be displayed during the first period in any of the cases where the information is stored, the specific display mode can be easily displayed during the first period. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E3, when the information is stored in the storage means during the first period, the display control means can display the specific display mode each time the information is stored; When a plurality of pieces of the information are stored in the storage means during the second period, the number of the specific display modes corresponding to the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means are displayed after the second period has passed. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being capable of displaying a display mode including;

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, when a plurality of pieces of information are stored in the storage means during the second period, display is not performed during the first period. Since the mode can be displayed, the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E4, the privilege granting means can grant a prize ball as the privilege based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the display control means can perform when the information is stored in the storage means during the second period, the specific display mode can be displayed in a mode corresponding to the number of prize balls according to the stored information, and the When a plurality of pieces of information are stored in the storage means, the specific display mode can be displayed in a mode corresponding to the addition information added by the addition means after the second period has passed. Gaming machine E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, when a plurality of pieces of information are stored during the second period, the number of winning balls corresponding to the plurality of stored information is added. Since the specific display mode can be displayed, the player can easily grasp the total number of prize balls awarded during the second period.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 has an advantageous effect executing means capable of executing an advantageous effect during a game period that is advantageous to the player, and the advantageous effect executing means performs part of the second period. The game machine E6 is characterized in that the advantageous effect can be executed in the effect period including at least.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machines E1 to E5, the advantageous performance can be executed during the second period in which the specific display mode is not displayed, so that the player can easily pay attention to the advantageous performance. can be done. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine E6, the advantageous effect executing means can cause the display means to display an advantageous display mode corresponding to the advantageous effect as the advantageous effect.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, during the second period in which the specific display mode is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute an advantageous effect of displaying the advantageous display mode on the display means. It is possible to easily secure a large display area in which the advantageous display mode is displayed. Therefore, the production effect of the advantageous production can be enhanced.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 Main controller (first control means in the 66th control example)
113 Audio ramp control device (second control means of the 66th control example)
65a Specific winning hole (part of the ball entry means in the 66th control example)
630a First general ball entrance (a part of the ball entrance means in the 66th control example)
630b Second general ball entrance (a part of the ball entrance means in the 66th control example)

Claims (5)

a plurality of ball entry means into which a game ball can enter;
A first control means capable of executing control related to games;
and a second control means capable of executing control based on a predetermined signal output from the first control means,
The first control means is
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the entry of a gaming ball into any of the plurality of ball entering means;
an output means capable of outputting to the second control means an information signal containing information relating to at least part of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means;
The second control means is
receiving means capable of receiving the information signal output by the output means;
a storage means capable of storing the information contained in the information signal received by the receiving means;
update means capable of updating the information stored in the storage means based on the information contained in the information signal newly received by the reception means;
display control means capable of causing a display means to display a predetermined display mode based on the information stored in the storage means;
setting means capable of setting a playing period that is advantageous to the player;
an effect executing means capable of executing an effect when the game period is set by the setting means;
The display control means is
During a first period of the specific period including the game period, the display means can display a first display mode based on the update information updated by the update means,
The gaming machine may differentiate the content of the predetermined privilege granted by the privilege granting means between a first state in which a specific condition is satisfied and a second state in which the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being able to In a second period set after the first period in the specific period, a second display different from the first display mode displayed during the first period as a display mode based on the update information. 2. A gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the mode can be displayed on said display means. 2. The privilege imparting means is capable of imparting a privilege more advantageous to the player than the privilege imparted in the second state as the privilege imparted in the first state. 2. The game machine described. 4. A gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein said specific condition can be established according to said information stored in said storage means. The storage means is configured to be able to store a plurality of the information,
5. A game machine according to claim 4, wherein said specific condition can be satisfied when the number of said information stored in said storage means is a predetermined number.

Images